From eaa0a8384150d46466a7c928402ff7de42172b5d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Nikos Livathinos Date: Tue, 25 Feb 2025 15:42:02 +0100 Subject: [PATCH 01/11] chore: Change the pinning of docling Signed-off-by: Nikos Livathinos --- poetry.lock | 6 +++--- pyproject.toml | 4 ++-- 2 files changed, 5 insertions(+), 5 deletions(-) diff --git a/poetry.lock b/poetry.lock index 94c257f8..82cb1be5 100644 --- a/poetry.lock +++ b/poetry.lock @@ -890,8 +890,8 @@ vlm = ["transformers (>=4.42.0,<4.43.0)", "transformers (>=4.46.0,<5.0.0)"] [package.source] type = "git" url = "https://github.com/DS4SD/docling.git" -reference = "mly/smol-docling-integration" -resolved_reference = "1c75b52f850e19c34ea8a8e0c20021779d1b605e" +reference = "cau/vlm-pipeline-generalizations" +resolved_reference = "10f64a948cee65c3e168f0df5cd6edf1fcc2b417" [[package]] name = "docling-core" @@ -6402,4 +6402,4 @@ type = ["pytest-mypy"] [metadata] lock-version = "2.0" python-versions = "^3.10" -content-hash = "e9f12a7628ff0b035f03c036594641d91086e1493db6117ce8c44d81b92e313a" +content-hash = "207f5708095a91f518a5db86d4c20b24d3895fc4cc4a0a4886e39130b2c87a35" diff --git a/pyproject.toml b/pyproject.toml index f764b45b..0d546b7e 100644 --- a/pyproject.toml +++ b/pyproject.toml @@ -32,8 +32,8 @@ datasets = "^3.2.0" apted = "^1.0.3" Distance = "^0.1.3" # docling = "^2.24.0" -# docling = { git = "https://github.com/DS4SD/docling.git", rev = "dc3a388aa2fe73e6dab8f7edd0c0ee7c6f692244" } -docling = { git = "https://github.com/DS4SD/docling.git", branch = "mly/smol-docling-integration" } +# docling = { git = "https://github.com/DS4SD/docling.git", branch = "mly/smol-docling-integration" } +docling = { git = "https://github.com/DS4SD/docling.git", branch = "cau/vlm-pipeline-generalizations" } matplotlib = "^3.10.0" torch = "^2.5.1" torchmetrics = "^1.6.0" From 125fe23e5164c01e3afefe856713c4f7ef64bf56 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Nikos Livathinos Date: Tue, 25 Feb 2025 16:00:52 +0100 Subject: [PATCH 02/11] fix: Fix the modalities supported for DPBench, OmniDocBench, DLNv1. Clean up code. Signed-off-by: Nikos Livathinos --- docling_eval/benchmarks/doclaynet_v1/create.py | 2 +- docling_eval/benchmarks/dpbench/create.py | 13 ++----------- docling_eval/benchmarks/funsd/create.py | 5 +---- docling_eval/benchmarks/omnidocbench/create.py | 13 ++----------- docling_eval/cli/main.py | 5 ----- 5 files changed, 6 insertions(+), 32 deletions(-) diff --git a/docling_eval/benchmarks/doclaynet_v1/create.py b/docling_eval/benchmarks/doclaynet_v1/create.py index 6b2ccaf4..a123b4c1 100644 --- a/docling_eval/benchmarks/doclaynet_v1/create.py +++ b/docling_eval/benchmarks/doclaynet_v1/create.py @@ -272,7 +272,7 @@ def create_dlnv1_e2e_dataset( BenchMarkColumns.MIMETYPE: "image/png", BenchMarkColumns.MODALITIES: [ EvaluationModality.LAYOUT, - EvaluationModality.READING_ORDER, + EvaluationModality.MARKDOWN_TEXT, ], } pdf_stream.close() diff --git a/docling_eval/benchmarks/dpbench/create.py b/docling_eval/benchmarks/dpbench/create.py index a75c28c9..a50199be 100644 --- a/docling_eval/benchmarks/dpbench/create.py +++ b/docling_eval/benchmarks/dpbench/create.py @@ -298,17 +298,6 @@ def create_dpbench_e2e_dataset( ) if do_viz: - """ - save_comparison_html( - filename=viz_dir / f"{os.path.basename(pdf_path)}-comp.html", - true_doc=true_doc, - pred_doc=pred_doc, - page_image=true_page_images[0], - true_labels=TRUE_HTML_EXPORT_LABELS, - pred_labels=PRED_HTML_EXPORT_LABELS, - ) - """ - save_comparison_html_with_clusters( filename=viz_dir / f"{os.path.basename(pdf_path)}-clusters.html", true_doc=true_doc, @@ -345,7 +334,9 @@ def create_dpbench_e2e_dataset( BenchMarkColumns.MIMETYPE: "application/pdf", BenchMarkColumns.MODALITIES: [ EvaluationModality.LAYOUT, + EvaluationModality.MARKDOWN_TEXT, EvaluationModality.READING_ORDER, + EvaluationModality.TABLE_STRUCTURE, ], } records.append(record) diff --git a/docling_eval/benchmarks/funsd/create.py b/docling_eval/benchmarks/funsd/create.py index 159b67e6..cce7b594 100644 --- a/docling_eval/benchmarks/funsd/create.py +++ b/docling_eval/benchmarks/funsd/create.py @@ -523,10 +523,7 @@ def create_funsd_dataset( BenchMarkColumns.GROUNDTRUTH_PICTURES: true_pictures, BenchMarkColumns.ORIGINAL: img_bytes, BenchMarkColumns.MIMETYPE: "image/png", - BenchMarkColumns.MODALITIES: [ - EvaluationModality.LAYOUT, - EvaluationModality.READING_ORDER, - ], + BenchMarkColumns.MODALITIES: [], } records.append(record) count += 1 diff --git a/docling_eval/benchmarks/omnidocbench/create.py b/docling_eval/benchmarks/omnidocbench/create.py index e08ea4dc..76d720bf 100644 --- a/docling_eval/benchmarks/omnidocbench/create.py +++ b/docling_eval/benchmarks/omnidocbench/create.py @@ -324,17 +324,6 @@ def create_omnidocbench_e2e_dataset( ) if do_viz: - """ - save_comparison_html( - filename=viz_dir / f"{os.path.basename(pdf_path)}-comp.html", - true_doc=true_doc, - pred_doc=pred_doc, - page_image=true_page_images[0], - true_labels=TRUE_HTML_EXPORT_LABELS, - pred_labels=PRED_HTML_EXPORT_LABELS, - ) - """ - save_comparison_html_with_clusters( filename=viz_dir / f"{os.path.basename(pdf_path)}-clusters.html", true_doc=true_doc, @@ -372,7 +361,9 @@ def create_omnidocbench_e2e_dataset( BenchMarkColumns.GROUNDTRUTH_PICTURES: true_pictures, BenchMarkColumns.MODALITIES: [ EvaluationModality.LAYOUT, + EvaluationModality.MARKDOWN_TEXT, EvaluationModality.READING_ORDER, + EvaluationModality.TABLE_STRUCTURE, ], } records.append(record) diff --git a/docling_eval/cli/main.py b/docling_eval/cli/main.py index 818367b9..1c52a585 100644 --- a/docling_eval/cli/main.py +++ b/docling_eval/cli/main.py @@ -40,11 +40,6 @@ DatasetMarkdownEvaluation, MarkdownTextEvaluator, ) - -# from docling_eval.evaluators.readingorder_evaluator_glm import ( -# DatasetReadingOrderEvaluation, -# ReadingOrderEvaluatorGlm, -# ) from docling_eval.evaluators.readingorder_evaluator import ReadingOrderEvaluator from docling_eval.evaluators.stats import DatasetStatistics from docling_eval.evaluators.table_evaluator import ( From 4997a876852f99de4b8473d93805790829839acf Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Nikos Livathinos Date: Tue, 25 Feb 2025 16:14:47 +0100 Subject: [PATCH 03/11] docs: Update documentation to have all benchmarks in separate md files and place links in Readme. Signed-off-by: Nikos Livathinos --- README.md | 196 +- docs/CVAT_create_groundtruth.md | 2 +- docs/DP-Bench_benchmarks.md | 12 +- docs/DocLayNetv1_benchmarks.md | 81 + docs/FinTabNet_benchmarks.md | 43 + docs/OmniDocBench_benchmarks.md | 10 +- docs/P1M_benchmarks.md | 43 + docs/PubTabNet_benchmarks.md | 44 + .../evaluation_DocLayNetV1_markdown_text.json | 55299 ++++++++++++++++ .../evaluation_DocLayNetV1_markdown_text.txt | 158 + ...luation_DocLayNetV1_markdown_text_BLEU.png | Bin 0 -> 19710 bytes ...valuation_DocLayNetV1_markdown_text_F1.png | Bin 0 -> 19793 bytes ...ocLayNetV1_markdown_text_edit_distance.png | Bin 0 -> 20830 bytes ...ation_DocLayNetV1_markdown_text_meteor.png | Bin 0 -> 22368 bytes ...on_DocLayNetV1_markdown_text_precision.png | Bin 0 -> 22898 bytes ...ation_DocLayNetV1_markdown_text_recall.png | Bin 0 -> 20638 bytes 16 files changed, 55707 insertions(+), 181 deletions(-) create mode 100644 docs/DocLayNetv1_benchmarks.md create mode 100644 docs/FinTabNet_benchmarks.md create mode 100644 docs/P1M_benchmarks.md create mode 100644 docs/PubTabNet_benchmarks.md create mode 100644 docs/evaluations/DocLayNetV1/evaluation_DocLayNetV1_markdown_text.json create mode 100644 docs/evaluations/DocLayNetV1/evaluation_DocLayNetV1_markdown_text.txt create mode 100644 docs/evaluations/DocLayNetV1/evaluation_DocLayNetV1_markdown_text_BLEU.png create mode 100644 docs/evaluations/DocLayNetV1/evaluation_DocLayNetV1_markdown_text_F1.png create mode 100644 docs/evaluations/DocLayNetV1/evaluation_DocLayNetV1_markdown_text_edit_distance.png create mode 100644 docs/evaluations/DocLayNetV1/evaluation_DocLayNetV1_markdown_text_meteor.png create mode 100644 docs/evaluations/DocLayNetV1/evaluation_DocLayNetV1_markdown_text_precision.png create mode 100644 docs/evaluations/DocLayNetV1/evaluation_DocLayNetV1_markdown_text_recall.png diff --git a/README.md b/README.md index 1cbbdef4..2124caa3 100644 --- a/README.md +++ b/README.md @@ -21,199 +21,57 @@ Evaluate docling on various datasets. You can use the cli ```sh docling-eval % poetry run evaluate --help -2024-12-20 10:51:57,593 - INFO - PyTorch version 2.5.1 available. Usage: evaluate [OPTIONS] -╭─ Options ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────╮ -│ * --task -t [create|evaluate|visualize] Evaluation task [default: None] [required] │ -│ * --modality -m [end-to-end|layout|tableformer|codeformer] Evaluation modality [default: None] [required] │ -│ * --benchmark -b [DPBench|OmniDcoBench|WordScape|PubLayNet|DocLayNetV1|Pub1M|PubTabNet|FinTabNet|WikiTabNet] Benchmark name [default: None] [required] │ -│ * --input-dir -i PATH Input directory [default: None] [required] │ -│ * --output-dir -o PATH Output directory [default: None] [required] │ -│ --help Show this message and exit. │ -╰─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────╯ +╭─ Options ───────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────╮ +│ * --task -t [create|evaluate|visualize] Evaluation task [default: None] [required] │ +│ * --modality -m [end-to-end|layout|table_structure|code_transcription|math Evaluation modality [default: None] [required] │ +│ _transcription|reading_order|markdown_text|captioning|bbox │ +│ es_text] │ +│ * --benchmark -b [DPBench|OmniDocBench|WordScape|PubLayNet|DocLayNetV1|DocL Benchmark name [default: None] [required] │ +│ ayNetV2|FUNSD|Pub1M|PubTabNet|FinTabNet|WikiTabNet] │ +│ * --output-dir -o PATH Output directory [default: None] [required] │ +│ --input-dir -i PATH Input directory [default: None] │ +│ --converter_type -c [Docling|SmolDocling] Type of document converter [default: Docling] │ +│ --split -s TEXT Dataset split [default: test] │ +│ --artifacts-path -a PATH Load artifacts from local path [default: None] │ +│ --max-items -n INTEGER How many items to load from the original dataset │ +│ [default: 1000] │ +│ --help Show this message and exit. │ +╰─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────╯ ``` -## End to End examples +## Benchmarks -### FinTabNet +### DP-Bench -Using a single command (loading the dataset from Huggingface: [FinTabNet_OTSL](https://huggingface.co/datasets/ds4sd/FinTabNet_OTSL)), +[DP-Bench benchmarks](docs/DP-Bench_benchmarks.md) -```sh -poetry run python docs/examples/benchmark_fintabnet.py -``` -
-Table evaluations for FinTabNet -
+### OmniDocBench -👉 Evaluate the dataset: +[OmniDocBench benchmarks](docs/OmniDocBench_benchmarks.md) -```sh -poetry run evaluate \ - -t evaluate \ - -m tableformer \ - -b FinTabNet \ - -i benchmarks/FinTabNet-dataset/tableformer \ - -o benchmarks/FinTabNet-dataset/tableformer -``` - -[Tableformer evaluation json](docs/evaluations/FinTabNet/evaluation_FinTabNet_tableformer.json) - -👉 Visualize the dataset: - -```sh -poetry run evaluate \ - -t visualize \ - -m tableformer \ - -b FinTabNet \ - -i benchmarks/FinTabNet-dataset/tableformer \ - -o benchmarks/FinTabNet-dataset/tableformer -``` - -![TEDS plot](docs/evaluations/FinTabNet/evaluation_FinTabNet_tableformer-delta_row_col.png) - -![TEDS struct only plot](docs/evaluations/FinTabNet/evaluation_FinTabNet_tableformer_TEDS_struct-only.png) - -[TEDS struct only report](docs/evaluations/FinTabNet/evaluation_FinTabNet_tableformer_TEDS_struct-only.txt) - -![TEDS struct with text plot](docs/evaluations/FinTabNet/evaluation_FinTabNet_tableformer_TEDS_struct-with-text.png) - -[TEDS struct with text report](docs/evaluations/FinTabNet/evaluation_FinTabNet_tableformer_TEDS_struct-with-text.txt) - -
### DocLayNet v1 -Using a single command, - -```sh -poetry run python ./docs/examples/benchmark_doclaynet_v1.py -``` - -This command downloads the DocLayNet v1.1 dataset, runs the evaluations and produces the following files: - -
-Layout evaluation -
- -- [Layout evaluation json](docs/evaluations/DocLayNetV1/evaluation_DocLayNetV1_layout.json) -- [mAP[0.5:0.95] report](docs/evaluations/DocLayNetV1/evaluation_DocLayNetV1_layout_mAP_0.5_0.95.txt) -- [mAP[0.5:0.95] plot](docs/evaluations/DocLayNetV1/evaluation_DocLayNetV1_layout_mAP_0.5_0.95.png) - -
-======= - - -### Pub1M - -Using a single command (loading the dataset from Huggingface: [Pub1M_OTSL](https://huggingface.co/datasets/ds4sd/Pub1M_OTSL)), - -```sh -poetry run python docs/examples/benchmark_p1m.py -``` - -
-Table evaluations for Pub1M -
- -👉 Evaluate the dataset: - -```sh -poetry run evaluate \ - -t evaluate \ - -m tableformer \ - -b Pub1M \ - -i benchmarks/Pub1M-dataset/tableformer \ - -o benchmarks/Pub1M-dataset/tableformer -``` - -[Tableformer evaluation json](docs/evaluations/Pub1M/evaluation_Pub1M_tableformer.json) - -👉 Visualize the dataset: - -```sh -poetry run evaluate \ - -t visualize \ - -m tableformer \ - -b Pub1M \ - -i benchmarks/Pub1M-dataset/tableformer \ - -o benchmarks/Pub1M-dataset/tableformer -``` - -![TEDS plot](docs/evaluations/Pub1M/evaluation_Pub1M_tableformer-delta_row_col.png) - -![TEDS struct only plot](docs/evaluations/Pub1M/evaluation_Pub1M_tableformer_TEDS_struct-only.png) - -[TEDS struct only report](docs/evaluations/Pub1M/evaluation_Pub1M_tableformer_TEDS_struct-only.txt) +[DocLayNetV1 Benchmarks](docs/DocLayNetv1_benchmarks.md) -![TEDS struct with text plot](docs/evaluations/Pub1M/evaluation_Pub1M_tableformer_TEDS_struct-with-text.png) -[TEDS struct with text report](docs/evaluations/Pub1M/evaluation_Pub1M_tableformer_TEDS_struct-with-text.txt) +### FinTabNet -
+[FinTabnet Benchmarks](docs/FinTabNet_benchmarks.md) ### PubTabNet -Using a single command (loading the dataset from Huggingface: [Pubtabnet_OTSL](https://huggingface.co/datasets/ds4sd/Pubtabnet_OTSL)), - -```sh -poetry run python ./docs/examples/benchmark_pubtabnet.py -``` - -
-Table evaluations for PubTabNet -
- -👉 Evaluate the dataset: - -```sh -poetry run evaluate \ - -t evaluate \ - -m tableformer \ - -b PubTabNet \ - -i benchmarks/PubTabNet-dataset/tableformer \ - -o benchmarks/PubTabNet-dataset/tableformer -``` - -[Tableformer evaluation json](docs/evaluations/PubTabNet/evaluation_PubTabNet_tableformer.json) - -👉 Visualize the dataset: - -```sh -poetry run evaluate \ - -t visualize \ - -m tableformer \ - -b PubTabNet \ - -i benchmarks/PubTabNet-dataset/tableformer \ - -o benchmarks/PubTabNet-dataset/tableformer -``` - -![TEDS plot](docs/evaluations/PubTabNet/evaluation_PubTabNet_tableformer-delta_row_col.png) - -![TEDS struct only plot](docs/evaluations/PubTabNet/evaluation_PubTabNet_tableformer_TEDS_struct-only.png) - -[TEDS struct only report](docs/evaluations/PubTabNet/evaluation_PubTabNet_tableformer_TEDS_struct-only.txt) +[PubTabNet benchmarks](docs/PubTabNet_benchmarks.md) -![TEDS struct with text plot](docs/evaluations/PubTabNet/evaluation_PubTabNet_tableformer_TEDS_struct-with-text.png) -[TEDS struct with text report](docs/evaluations/PubTabNet/evaluation_PubTabNet_tableformer_TEDS_struct-with-text.txt) - - -
- - -## DP-Bench - -[See DP-Bench benchmarks](docs/DP-Bench_benchmarks.md) - - -## OmniDocBench +### Pub1M -[See OmniDocBench benchmarks](docs/OmniDocBench_benchmarks.md) +[Pub1M benchmarks](docs/Pub1M_benchmarks.md) ## Contributing diff --git a/docs/CVAT_create_groundtruth.md b/docs/CVAT_create_groundtruth.md index c381beb9..b4030554 100644 --- a/docs/CVAT_create_groundtruth.md +++ b/docs/CVAT_create_groundtruth.md @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ To start creating ground-truth, you first need to have a dataset in parquet form The first way is to use an existing dataset (eg dpbench), which has potentially pre-annotated tables, formulas, etc. Hence you can run the create script of that particular benchmark. ```sh -poetry run python ./docs/examples/benchmark_dpbench.py +poetry run python docs/examples/benchmark_dpbench.py ``` Another way is to create it from PDF or PNG files. In this case, simply run the following scripts, diff --git a/docs/DP-Bench_benchmarks.md b/docs/DP-Bench_benchmarks.md index 030c98c9..c24a29d4 100644 --- a/docs/DP-Bench_benchmarks.md +++ b/docs/DP-Bench_benchmarks.md @@ -3,14 +3,14 @@ Create and evaluate DP-Bench using a single command: ```sh -poetry run python ./docs/examples/benchmark_dpbench.py +poetry run python docs/examples/benchmark_dpbench.py ``` -This command downloads the DP-Bench dataset, runs the evaluations and produces the following files: +This command downloads the DP-Bench dataset, runs the evaluations and produces the following files ## Layout Evaluation -Create the report: +Create the evaluation report: ```sh poetry run evaluate \ @@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ poetry run evaluate \ ## TableFormer Evaluation -Create the report: +Create the evaluation report: ```sh poetry run evaluate \ @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ poetry run evaluate \ ## Reading order Evaluation -Create the report: +Create the evaluation report: ```sh poetry run evaluate \ @@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ poetry run evaluate \ ## Markdown text Evaluation -Create the report: +Create the evaluation report: ```sh poetry run evaluate \ diff --git a/docs/DocLayNetv1_benchmarks.md b/docs/DocLayNetv1_benchmarks.md new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a002e084 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/DocLayNetv1_benchmarks.md @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ +# DocLayNet V1 Benchmarks + +Create and evaluate DocLayNetv1.2 dataset using a single command. This command downloads from Huggingface the [DocLayNetv1.2_OTSL](https://huggingface.co/datasets/ds4sd/DocLayNet-v1.2) and runs the evaluations using the PDF Docling converter for all supported modalities. + +```sh +poetry run python docs/examples/benchmark_doclaynet_v1.py +``` + + +## Layout Evaluation + +Create the report: + +```sh +poetry run evaluate \ + -t evaluate \ + -m layout \ + -b DocLayNetV1 \ + -i benchmarks/DocLayNetV1-dataset/layout \ + -o benchmarks/DocLayNetV1-dataset/layout +``` + +[Layout evaluation json](evaluations/DocLayNetV1/evaluation_DocLayNetV1_layout.json) + +Visualize the report: + +```sh +poetry run evaluate \ + -t visualize \ + -m layout \ + -b DocLayNetV1 \ + -i benchmarks/DocLayNetV1-dataset/layout \ + -o benchmarks/DocLayNetV1-dataset/layout +``` + +[mAP[0.5:0.95] report](evaluations/DocLayNetV1/evaluation_DocLayNetV1_layout_mAP_0.5_0.95.txt) + +![mAP[0.5:0.95] plot](evaluations/DocLayNetV1/evaluation_DocLayNetV1_layout_mAP_0.5_0.95.png) + + +## Markdown text Evaluation + +Create the report: + +```sh +poetry run evaluate \ + -t evaluate \ + -m markdown_text \ + -b DocLayNetV1 \ + -i benchmarks/DocLayNetV1-dataset/layout \ + -o benchmarks/DocLayNetV1-dataset/layout +``` + +[Markdown text json](evaluations/DocLayNetV1/evaluation_DocLayNetV1_markdown_text.json) + + +Visualize the report: + +```sh +poetry run evaluate \ + -t visualize \ + -m markdown_text \ + -b DocLayNetV1 \ + -i benchmarks/DocLayNetV1-dataset/layout \ + -o benchmarks/DocLayNetV1-dataset/layout +``` + +[Markdown text report](evaluations/DocLayNetV1/evaluation_DocLayNetV1_markdown_text.txt) + + +![BLEU plot](evaluations/DocLayNetV1/evaluation_DocLayNetV1_markdown_text_BLEU.png) + +![Edit distance plot](evaluations/DocLayNetV1/evaluation_DocLayNetV1_markdown_text_edit_distance.png) + +![F1 plot](evaluations/DocLayNetV1/evaluation_DocLayNetV1_markdown_text_F1.png) + +![Meteor plot](evaluations/DocLayNetV1/evaluation_DocLayNetV1_markdown_text_meteor.png) + +![Precision plot](evaluations/DocLayNetV1/evaluation_DocLayNetV1_markdown_text_precision.png) + +![Recall plot](evaluations/DocLayNetV1/evaluation_DocLayNetV1_markdown_text_recall.png) diff --git a/docs/FinTabNet_benchmarks.md b/docs/FinTabNet_benchmarks.md new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4019a26a --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/FinTabNet_benchmarks.md @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ +# FinTabNet Benchmarks + +Create and evaluate FinTabNet dataset using a single command. This command downloads from Huggingface the [FinTabNet_OTSL dataset](https://huggingface.co/datasets/ds4sd/FinTabNet_OTSL)) and runs the evaluations for tableformer using the first 1000 samples. + +```sh +poetry run python docs/examples/benchmark_tableformer_fintabnet.py +``` + +## Layout Evaluation + +Create the evaluation report: + +```sh +poetry run evaluate \ + -t evaluate \ + -m tableformer \ + -b FinTabNet \ + -i benchmarks/FinTabNet-dataset/tableformer \ + -o benchmarks/FinTabNet-dataset/tableformer +``` + +[Tableformer evaluation json](docs/evaluations/FinTabNet/evaluation_FinTabNet_tableformer.json) + +Visualize the report: + +```sh +poetry run evaluate \ + -t visualize \ + -m tableformer \ + -b FinTabNet \ + -i benchmarks/FinTabNet-dataset/tableformer \ + -o benchmarks/FinTabNet-dataset/tableformer +``` + +![TEDS plot](docs/evaluations/FinTabNet/evaluation_FinTabNet_tableformer-delta_row_col.png) + +![TEDS struct only plot](docs/evaluations/FinTabNet/evaluation_FinTabNet_tableformer_TEDS_struct-only.png) + +[TEDS struct only report](docs/evaluations/FinTabNet/evaluation_FinTabNet_tableformer_TEDS_struct-only.txt) + +![TEDS struct with text plot](docs/evaluations/FinTabNet/evaluation_FinTabNet_tableformer_TEDS_struct-with-text.png) + +[TEDS struct with text report](docs/evaluations/FinTabNet/evaluation_FinTabNet_tableformer_TEDS_struct-with-text.txt) diff --git a/docs/OmniDocBench_benchmarks.md b/docs/OmniDocBench_benchmarks.md index f17d667d..52992ad6 100644 --- a/docs/OmniDocBench_benchmarks.md +++ b/docs/OmniDocBench_benchmarks.md @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ Create and evaluate OmniDocBench using a single command: ```sh -poetry run python ./docs/examples/benchmark_omnidocbench.py +poetry run python docs/examples/benchmark_omnidocbench.py ``` This command downloads runs the evaluations and produces the following files: @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ This command downloads runs the evaluations and produces the following files: ## Layout Evaluation -Create the report: +Create the evaluation report: ```sh poetry run evaluate \ @@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ poetry run evaluate \ ## Tableformer Evaluation -Create the report: +Create the evaluation report: ```sh poetry run evaluate \ @@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ poetry run evaluate \ ## Reading order Evaluation -Create the report: +Create the evaluation report: ```sh poetry run evaluate \ @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ poetry run evaluate \ ## Markdown text evaluation -Create the report: +Create the evaluation report: ```sh poetry run evaluate \ diff --git a/docs/P1M_benchmarks.md b/docs/P1M_benchmarks.md new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8ecad74f --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/P1M_benchmarks.md @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ +# Pub1M Benchmarks + +Create and evaluate Pub1M dataset using a single command. This command downloads from Huggingface the [Pub1M_OTSL](https://huggingface.co/datasets/ds4sd/Pub1M_OTSL) and runs the evaluations for TableFormer using the first 1000 samples. + +```sh +poetry run python docs/examples/benchmark_p1m.py +``` + +## Layout Evaluation + +Create the evaluation report: + +```sh +poetry run evaluate \ + -t evaluate \ + -m tableformer \ + -b Pub1M \ + -i benchmarks/Pub1M-dataset/tableformer \ + -o benchmarks/Pub1M-dataset/tableformer +``` + +[Tableformer evaluation json](docs/evaluations/Pub1M/evaluation_Pub1M_tableformer.json) + +Visualize the report: + +```sh +poetry run evaluate \ + -t visualize \ + -m tableformer \ + -b Pub1M \ + -i benchmarks/Pub1M-dataset/tableformer \ + -o benchmarks/Pub1M-dataset/tableformer +``` + +![TEDS plot](docs/evaluations/Pub1M/evaluation_Pub1M_tableformer-delta_row_col.png) + +![TEDS struct only plot](docs/evaluations/Pub1M/evaluation_Pub1M_tableformer_TEDS_struct-only.png) + +[TEDS struct only report](docs/evaluations/Pub1M/evaluation_Pub1M_tableformer_TEDS_struct-only.txt) + +![TEDS struct with text plot](docs/evaluations/Pub1M/evaluation_Pub1M_tableformer_TEDS_struct-with-text.png) + +[TEDS struct with text report](docs/evaluations/Pub1M/evaluation_Pub1M_tableformer_TEDS_struct-with-text.txt) diff --git a/docs/PubTabNet_benchmarks.md b/docs/PubTabNet_benchmarks.md new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c50b34c4 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/PubTabNet_benchmarks.md @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ +# Pub1M Benchmarks + +Create and evaluate PubTabNet dataset using a single command. This command downloads from Huggingface the [PubTabNet_OTSL dataset](https://huggingface.co/datasets/ds4sd/Pubtabnet_OTSL) and runs the evaluations for TableFormer using the first 1000 samples. + +```sh +poetry run python docs/examples/benchmark_pubtabnet.py +``` + +## Layout Evaluation + +Create the evaluation report: + +```sh +poetry run evaluate \ + -t evaluate \ + -m tableformer \ + -b PubTabNet \ + -i benchmarks/PubTabNet-dataset/tableformer \ + -o benchmarks/PubTabNet-dataset/tableformer +``` + +[Tableformer evaluation json](docs/evaluations/PubTabNet/evaluation_PubTabNet_tableformer.json) + +Visualize the report: + +```sh +poetry run evaluate \ + -t visualize \ + -m tableformer \ + -b PubTabNet \ + -i benchmarks/PubTabNet-dataset/tableformer \ + -o benchmarks/PubTabNet-dataset/tableformer +``` + +![TEDS plot](docs/evaluations/PubTabNet/evaluation_PubTabNet_tableformer-delta_row_col.png) + +![TEDS struct only plot](docs/evaluations/PubTabNet/evaluation_PubTabNet_tableformer_TEDS_struct-only.png) + +[TEDS struct only report](docs/evaluations/PubTabNet/evaluation_PubTabNet_tableformer_TEDS_struct-only.txt) + +![TEDS struct with text plot](docs/evaluations/PubTabNet/evaluation_PubTabNet_tableformer_TEDS_struct-with-text.png) + +[TEDS struct with text report](docs/evaluations/PubTabNet/evaluation_PubTabNet_tableformer_TEDS_struct-with-text.txt) + diff --git a/docs/evaluations/DocLayNetV1/evaluation_DocLayNetV1_markdown_text.json b/docs/evaluations/DocLayNetV1/evaluation_DocLayNetV1_markdown_text.json new file mode 100644 index 00000000..20fdab39 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/evaluations/DocLayNetV1/evaluation_DocLayNetV1_markdown_text.json @@ -0,0 +1,55299 @@ +{ + "bleu_stats": { + "bins": [ + 0.0, + 0.05, + 0.1, + 0.15000000000000002, + 0.2, + 0.25, + 0.30000000000000004, + 0.35000000000000003, + 0.4, + 0.45, + 0.5, + 0.55, + 0.6000000000000001, + 0.65, + 0.7000000000000001, + 0.75, + 0.8, + 0.8500000000000001, + 0.9, + 0.9500000000000001, + 1.0 + ], + "hist": [ + 388.0, + 55.0, + 65.0, + 54.0, + 74.0, + 70.0, + 61.0, + 67.0, + 102.0, + 138.0, + 115.0, + 128.0, + 154.0, + 181.0, + 240.0, + 319.0, + 431.0, + 668.0, + 861.0, + 828.0 + ], + "mean": 0.7071621037289232, + "median": 0.835262674111884, + "std": 0.2991830564424533, + "total": 4999 + }, + "edit_distance_stats": { + "bins": [ + 0.0, + 0.05, + 0.1, + 0.15000000000000002, + 0.2, + 0.25, + 0.30000000000000004, + 0.35000000000000003, + 0.4, + 0.45, + 0.5, + 0.55, + 0.6000000000000001, + 0.65, + 0.7000000000000001, + 0.75, + 0.8, + 0.8500000000000001, + 0.9, + 0.9500000000000001, + 1.0 + ], + "hist": [ + 549.0, + 357.0, + 350.0, + 272.0, + 254.0, + 238.0, + 239.0, + 214.0, + 268.0, + 227.0, + 258.0, + 230.0, + 204.0, + 220.0, + 215.0, + 315.0, + 255.0, + 161.0, + 88.0, + 85.0 + ], + "mean": 0.4174045232418191, + "median": 0.40271493212669685, + "std": 0.2872948941816082, + "total": 4999 + }, + "evaluations": [ + { + "bleu": 0.8106901710697112, + "doc_id": "132a855ee8b23533d8ae69af0049c038171a06ddfcac892c3c6d7e6b4091c642", + "edit_distance": 0.14285714285714285, + "f1_score": 0.9169675090252707, + "meteor": 0.873292279099478, + "precision": 0.9202898550724637, + "pred_md": "8\n\nLeigh Taliaferro, M.D. General Surgeon Abilene, Texas\n\n## Leigh Taliaferro, M.D., values consistency.\n\nThe Abilene native started his practice 17 years ago and has developed a flourishing business as a general surgeon. He estimates that 90 percent of his practice is for abdominal surgery. With such a busy practice, he finds comfort in having a reliable banking partner. 'I have almost every type of business, trust and personal account with First National Bank of Abilene,' says Dr. Taliaferro.\n\n'First National is immersed in this city - everywhere you go, they are involved with helping people with their business. It's because of the people who work there - they are leaders … generous people who make their mark on the bank and on the community. While they may be the biggest bank in town, they sure don't act like it. It's like banking with friends.'\n\nDr. Taliaferro has invested in First Financial Bankshares for more than a decade. 'My stock has done nothing but go up in value. They are solid, sound businesspeople. I sleep well at night knowing that my investments are in good hands.'\n\n## 'While they may be the biggest bank in town, they sure\n\ndon' t act like it.\n\nIt' s like banking\n\nwith friends.'", + "recall": 0.9136690647482014, + "true_md": "Leigh Taliaferro, M.D. General Surgeon Abilene, Texas\n\n## Leigh Taliaferro, M.D., values consistency.\n\nThe Abilene native started his practice 17 years ago and has developed a flourishing business as a general surgeon. He estimates that 90 percent of his practice is for abdominal surgery. With such a busy practice, he finds comfort in having a reliable banking partner. “I have almost every type of busi- ness, trust and personal account with First National Bank of Abilene,” says Dr. Taliaferro. \n\n“First National is immersed in this city – everywhere you go, they are involved with helping people with their business. It’s because of the people who work there – they are leaders … generous people who make their mark on the bank and on the community. While they may be the biggest bank in town, they sure don’t act like it. It’s like bank- ing with friends.”\n\nDr. Taliaferro has invested in First Financial Bankshares for more than a decade. “My stock has done nothing but go up in value. They are solid, sound businesspeople. I sleep well at night know- ing that my investments are in good hands.”\n\n“While they may be the biggest bank in town, they sure don’t act like it. It’s like banking with friends.”\n\n8" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6995222157030311, + "doc_id": "2b49edc9d0a47e4efaaeabf907a8b8b84b747c295dd10a639e2b5265ac258cf5", + "edit_distance": 0.2828828828828829, + "f1_score": 0.9698795180722892, + "meteor": 0.6630174801495655, + "precision": 0.9698795180722891, + "pred_md": "FINANCIAL SECTION\n\n82\n\n## 9. RETIREMENT BENEFIT PLANS\n\nThe Company and its domestic consolidated subsidiaries have defined benefit plans, i.e., welfare pension fund plans ('WPFP'), tax-qualified pension plans and lump-sum payment plans, covering substantially all employees who are entitled to lump-sum or annuity payments, the amounts of which are determined by reference to their basic rates of pay, length of service, and the conditions under which termination occurs. Certain foreign consolidated subsidiaries have defined benefit and contribution plans.\n\nThe following table sets forth the funded and accrued status of the plans, and the amounts recognized in the consolidated balance sheets as of March 31, 2005 and 2004 for the Company's and the consolidated subsidiaries' defined benefit plans:\n\nThe substitutional portion of the benefits under the WPFP has been included in the amounts shown in the above table.\n\nThe Company received the approval from the Minister of Health, Labor and Welfare ('MHLW') in the year ended March 31, 2003 with respect to its application for exemption from the obligation for benefits related to future employee services under the substitutional portion of the WPFP. Certain domestic consolidated subsidiaries received the same approval from MHLW during the year ended March 31, 2004. In accordance with the transitional provision stipulated in 'Practical Guidelines for Accounting for Retirement Benefits,' the Company and the domestic consolidated subsidiaries accounted for the separation of the substitutional portion of the benefit obligation from the corporate portion of the benefit obligation under their WPFPs as of the dates of approval for their exemption assuming that the transfer to the Japanese government of the substitutional portion of the benefit obligation and related pension plan assets had been completed as of those dates. As a result, the Company recognized a loss of ¥30,945 million for the year ended March 31, 2003 and the domestic consolidated subsidiaries recognized an aggregate gain of ¥3,669 million and an aggregate loss of ¥1,587 million for the year ended March 31, 2004. The pension assets to be transferred were calculated at ¥35,770 million for the domestic consolidated subsidiaries at March 31, 2004 and ¥241,203 million for the Company at March 31, 2003.\n\nThe components of retirement benefit expenses for the years ended March 31, 2005, 2004 and 2003 are outlined as follows:\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004", + "recall": 0.9698795180722891, + "true_md": "FINANCIAL SECTION\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 82\n\nThe Company and its domestic consolidated subsidiaries have defined benefit plans, i.e., welfare pension fund plans (“WPFP”), tax-qualified pension plans and lump-sum payment plans, covering substantially all employees who are entitled to lump-sum or annuity payments, the amounts of which are determined by reference to their basic rates of pay, length of service, and the conditions under which termination occurs. Certain foreign consolidated subsidiaries have defined benefit and contribution plans. The following table sets forth the funded and accrued status of the plans, and the amounts recognized in the consolidated balance sheets as\n\nforeign consolidated subsidiaries have defined benefit and contribution plans. The following table sets forth the funded and accrued status of the plans, and the amounts recognized in the consolidated balance sheets as of March 31, 2005 and 2004 for the Company’s and the consolidated subsidiaries’ defined benefit plans:\n\nThe substitutional portion of the benefits under the WPFP has been included in the amounts shown in the above table. The Company received the approval from the Minister of Health, Labor and Welfare (“MHLW”) in the year ended March 31, 2003 with respect\n\nThe substitutional portion of the benefits under the WPFP has been included in the amounts shown in the above table. The Company received the approval from the Minister of Health, Labor and Welfare (“MHLW”) in the year ended March 31, 2003 with respect to its application for exemption from the obligation for benefits related to future employee services under the substitutional portion of the WPFP. Certain domestic consolidated subsidiaries received the same approval from MHLW during the year ended March 31, 2004. In accordance with the transitional provision stipulated in “Practical Guidelines for Accounting for Retirement Benefits,” the Company and the domestic consolidated subsidiaries accounted for the separation of the substitutional portion of the benefit obligation from the corporate portion of the benefit obligation under their WPFPs as of the dates of approval for their exemption assuming that the transfer to the Japanese government of the substitutional portion of the benefit obligation and related pension plan assets had been completed as of those dates. As a result, the Company recognized a loss of ¥30,945 million for the year ended March 31, 2003 and the domestic consolidated subsidiaries recognized an aggregate gain of ¥3,669 million and an aggregate loss of ¥1,587 million for the year ended March 31, 2004. The pension assets to be transferred were calculated at ¥35,770 million for the domestic consolidated subsidiaries at March 31, 2004 and ¥241,203 million for the Company at March 31, 2003. The components of retirement benefit expenses for the years ended March 31, 2005, 2004 and 2003 are outlined as follows:\n\n¥35,770 million for the domestic consolidated subsidiaries at March 31, 2004 and ¥241,203 million for the Company at March 31, 2003. The components of retirement benefit expenses for the years ended March 31, 2005, 2004 and 2003 are outlined as follows:\n\n## 9. RETIREMENT BENEFIT PLANS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9359999772718942, + "doc_id": "b13563b6fd80bed51928fc4b42497c8236af331fd67bd13b7f7e506d42b4a7e2", + "edit_distance": 0.25435897435897437, + "f1_score": 0.9488752556237219, + "meteor": 0.977453408317308, + "precision": 0.9317269076305221, + "pred_md": "R E P O R T O F I N D E P E N D E N T C E R T I F I E D P U B L I C A C C O U N T A N T S\n\n## To the Stockholders and the Board of Directors of Atrion Corporation:\n\nWe have audited the accompanying consolidated balance sheets of Atrion Corporation (a Delaware corporation) and Subsidiaries as of December 31, 2003 and 2002, and the related consolidated statements of income, changes in stockholders' equity and cash flows for the years then ended. These financial statements are the responsibility of the Company's management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these financial statements based on our audit. The financial statements of Atrion Corporation and Subsidiaries as of and for the year in the period ended December 31, 2001, were audited by other auditors who have ceased operations. Those auditors expressed an unqualified opinion on those financial statements in their report dated February 25, 2002.\n\nWe conducted our audits in accordance with auditing standards generally accepted in the United States of America. Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement. An audit includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements. An audit also includes assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management as well as evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.\n\nIn our opinion, the financial statements referred to above present fairly, in all material respects, the consolidated financial position of Atrion Corporation and Subsidiaries as of December 31, 2003 and 2002, and the consolidated results of their operations and their consolidated cash flows for the years then ended in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America.\n\nAs discussed above, the financial statements of Atrion Corporation and Subsidiaries as of December 31, 2001, and for the year then ended were audited by other auditors who have ceased operations. As described in Note 2, these financial statements have been revised to include the transitional disclosures required by Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 142, Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets, which was adopted by the Company as of January 1, 2002. Our audit procedures with respect to the disclosures in Note 2 with respect to 2001 included agreeing the previously reported net income to the previously issued financial statements and the adjustments to reported net income representing amortization expense (including any related tax effects) recognized in those periods related to goodwill to the Company's underlying records obtained from management. We also tested the mathematical accuracy of the reconciliation of adjusted net income to reported net income, and the related income-per-share amounts. In our opinion, the disclosures for 2001 in Note 2 are appropriate. However, we were not engaged to audit, review, or apply any procedures to the 2001 financial statements of the Company other than with respect to such disclosures and, accordingly, we do not express an opinion or any other form of assurance on the 2001 financial statements taken as a whole.\n\nGrant Thornton LLP Dallas, Texas February 13, 2004\n\nThis is a copy of the audit report previously issued by Arthur Andersen LLP in connection with Atrion Corporation and Subsidiaries Annual Report for the year ended December 31, 2001. This audit report has not been reissued by Arthur Andersen LLP in connection with this Annual Report. The consolidated balance sheets as of December 31, 2001 and 2000 and the consolidated statements of income and cash flows for the years ended December 31, 2000 and 1999 referred to in this report have not been included in the accompanying financial statements.\n\n## To the Stockholders and the Board of Directors of Atrion Corporation:\n\nWe have audited the accompanying consolidated balance sheets of Atrion Corporation (a Delaware corporation) and subsidiaries as of December 31, 2001 and 2000 and the related consolidated statements of income and cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2001. These financial statements are the responsibility of the Company's management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these financial statements based on our audits.\n\nWe conducted our audits in accordance with auditing standards generally accepted in the United States. Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement. An audit includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements. An audit also includes assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management as well as evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.\n\nIn our opinion, the financial statements referred to above present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of Atrion Corporation and subsidiaries as of December 31, 2001 and 2000 and the results of their operations and their cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2001 in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States.\n\nArthur Andersen LLP Atlanta, Georgia February 25, 2002\n\n23", + "recall": 0.9666666666666667, + "true_md": "## REPORT OF INDEPENDENT CERTIFIED PUBLIC ACCOUNTANTS\n\nTo the Stockholders and the Board of Directors of Atrion Corporation:\n\nWe have audited the accompanying consolidated balance sheets of Atrion Corporation (a Delaware corporation) and Subsidiaries as of December 31, 2003 and 2002, and the related consolidated statements of income, changes in stockholders’ equity and cash flows for the years then ended. These financial statements are the responsibility of the Company’s management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these financial statements based on our audit. The financial statements of Atrion Corporation and Subsidiaries as of and for the year in the period ended December 31, 2001, were audited by other auditors who have ceased operations. Those auditors expressed an unqualified opinion on those financial statements in their report dated February 25, 2002.\n\nWe conducted our audits in accordance with auditing standards generally accepted in the United States of America. Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement. An audit includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements. An audit also includes assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management as well as evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.\n\nIn our opinion, the financial statements referred to above present fairly, in all material respects, the consolidated financial position of Atrion Corporation and Subsidiaries as of December 31, 2003 and 2002, and the consolidated results of their operations and their consolidated cash flows for the years then ended in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America.\n\nAs discussed above, the financial statements of Atrion Corporation and Subsidiaries as of December 31, 2001, and for the year then ended were audited by other auditors who have ceased operations. As described in Note 2, these financial statements have been revised to include the transitional disclosures required by Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 142, Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets, which was adopted by the Company as of January 1, 2002. Our audit procedures with respect to the disclosures in Note 2 with respect to 2001 included agreeing the previously reported net income to the previously issued financial statements and the adjustments to reported net income representing amortization expense (including any related tax effects) recognized in those periods related to goodwill to the Company’s underlying records obtained from management. We also tested the mathematical accuracy of the reconciliation of adjusted net income to reported net income, and the related income-per-share amounts. In our opinion, the disclosures for 2001 in Note 2 are appropriate. However, we were not engaged to audit, review, or apply any procedures to the 2001 financial statements of the Company other than with respect to such disclosures and, accordingly, we do not express an opinion or any other form of assurance on the 2001 financial statements taken as a whole. \n\nGrant Thornton LLP Dallas, Texas February 13, 2004\n\nTo the Stockholders and the Board of Directors of Atrion Corporation:\n\nWe have audited the accompanying consolidated balance sheets of Atrion Corporation (a Delaware corporation) and subsidiaries as of December 31, 2001 and 2000 and the related consolidated statements of income and cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2001. These financial statements are the responsibility of the Company’s management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these financial statements based on our audits.\n\nWe conducted our audits in accordance with auditing standards generally accepted in the United States. Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement. An audit includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements. An audit also includes assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management as well as evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.\n\nThis is a copy of the audit report previously issued by Arthur Andersen LLP in connection with Atrion Corporation and Subsidiaries Annual Report for the year ended December 31, 2001. This audit report has not been reissued by Arthur Andersen LLP in connection with this Annual Report. The consolidated balance sheets as of December 31, 2001 and 2000 and the consolidated statements of income and cash flows for the years ended December 31, 2000 and 1999 referred to in this report have not been included in the accompanying financial statements.\n\nIn our opinion, the financial statements referred to above present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of Atrion Corporation and subsidiaries as of December 31, 2001 and 2000 and the results of their operations and their cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2001 in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States.\n\nArthur Andersen LLP Atlanta, Georgia February 25, 2002 \n\n23" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.920088996118468, + "doc_id": "61d269cb1f2c976191469b891aa87b7cb40eb65eee4483725c1a85c4dc72d141", + "edit_distance": 0.13717693836978131, + "f1_score": 0.9629629629629629, + "meteor": 0.9577203695967725, + "precision": 0.975, + "pred_md": "## Linking consumers with any time, any place mobile banking\n\nIn today's increasingly wireless world, consumers are turning in record numbers to mobile devices for greater convenience and access to banking and information services.\n\nith the freedom of mobile devices, bank customers can instantly obtain account balances, transfer money and even view a mini-bank statement-or set up instant alerts to monitor their daily account balances, deposit notifications and other personalized information 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. W\n\nThe exciting potential of wireless is creating unprecedented opportunities for banks to connect with their customers. In W estern Europe, the number of mobile banking accounts is expected to reach 31.8 million by 2004. 1 Expanding wireless capabilities are also helping to drive growth in North America, where the number of wireless financial services users is projected to skyrocket to 35 million by 2005. 2 The Asia-Pacific region is forecast at 12 million subscribers of wireless financial services alone in 2003. 3\n\nThe quickly evolving market for mobile banking represents a tremendous opportunity for Euronet Worldwide. Last spring we introduced Euronet ® Mobile Banking as the first financial application that offered both secure account access and a personalized accounting alerting system. Among our new mobile banking clients in 2000 were the Bank of Cyprus, for its branches in London and Greece, and the National Bank of Kuwait, for its Lebanon branch, who were both first to market in their regions.\n\nTo further strengthen our capabilities, we announced strategic alliances to market and deliver Euronet's suite of mobile banking solutions with\n\nAether Systems, Inc. for the US market and with Sila Communications for the European, Middle Eastern and Asian markets. In addition, we formed similar regional strategic alliances with companies like Stet Hellas Telecommunications S.A., a Greek mobile operator and subsidiary of Telecom Italia Mobile (TIM).\n\nAs next-generation mobile technology brings higher data speeds, personalization and other enhancements, we believe the future of mobile banking presents great opportunities for Euronet.\n\n1 International Data Corporation (September 2000), 2 TowerGroup (September 2000), Meridien Research (August 1999) 3\n\n## National Bank of Kuwait-Lebanon\n\nFirst-to-Market Mobile Banking\n\nTo broaden its customer and account\n\nbase, the National Bank of Kuwait-Lebanon (NBK-L) wanted to be first in their market with a mobile banking solution. In a tight race with a competing bank, Euronet's mobile solution was integrated quickly into the NBK-L's IT infrastructure, enabling the bank to be the first to deliver services in its market.\n\nTogether with GSM operator Libancell, NBK-L's new mobile banking system offers customers any time, any place access to their account information from their GSM telephones.\n\n11", + "recall": 0.9512195121951219, + "true_md": "## Linking consumers with any time, any place mobile banking\n\nIn today’s increasingly wireless world, consumers are turning in record numbers to mobile devices for greater convenience and access to banking and information services.\n\nith the freedom of mobile devices, bank customers can instantly obtain account balances, transfer money and even view a mini-bank statement–or set up instant alerts to monitor their daily account balances, deposit notifications and other personalized information 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. W\n\nThe exciting potential of wireless is creating unprecedented opportuni- ties for banks to connect with their customers. In Western Europe, the number of mobile banking accounts is expected to reach 31.8 million by 2004. 1 Expanding wireless capabilities are also helping to drive growth in North America, where the number of wireless financial services users is projected to skyrocket to 35 million by 2005. 2 The Asia-Pacific region is forecast at 12 million subscribers of wireless financial services alone in 2003. 3\n\nThe quickly evolving market for mobile banking represents a tremen- dous opportunity for Euronet Worldwide. Last spring we introduced Euronet ® Mobile Banking as the first financial application that offered both secure account access and a personalized accounting alerting system. Among our new mobile banking clients in 2000 were the Bank of Cyprus, for its branches in London and Greece, and the National Bank of Kuwait, for its Lebanon branch, who were both first to market in their regions. \n\nTo further strengthen our capabilities, we announced strategic alliances to market and deliver Euronet’s suite of mobile banking solutions with\n\nAether Systems, Inc. for the US market and with Sila Communications for the European, Middle Eastern and Asian markets. In addition, we formed similar regional strategic alliances with companies like Stet Hellas Telecommunications S.A., a Greek mobile operator and subsidiary of Telecom Italia Mobile (TIM).\n\nAs next-generation mobile technology brings higher data speeds, personalization and other enhancements, we believe the future of mobile banking presents great opportunities for Euronet. \n\n11\n\n## National Bank of Kuwait-Lebanon\n\n## First-to-Market Mobile Banking\n\nTo broaden its cus- tomer and account\n\nbase, the National Bank of Kuwait-Lebanon (NBK-L) wanted to be first in their market with a mobile banking solution. In a tight race with a competing bank, Euronet’s mobile solution was integrated quickly into the NBK-L’s IT infra- structure, enabling the bank to be the first to deliver services in its market.\n\nTogether with GSM operator Libancell, NBK-L’s new mobile banking system offers customers any time, any place access to their account information from their GSM telephones.\n\n1 International Data Corporation (September 2000), 2 TowerGroup (September 2000), 3 Meridien Research (August 1999)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7796561549939605, + "doc_id": "a5acc4c1c47a19543362fccf014eec02c7efd931db5e2a34e66444ee8b8e5079", + "edit_distance": 0.8385093167701864, + "f1_score": 0.8758169934640524, + "meteor": 0.7067716828241917, + "precision": 0.9305555555555556, + "pred_md": "HON INDUSTRIES Inc. and SUBSIDIARIES\n\n## Income Taxes\n\n## Shareholders' Equity and Earnings Per Share\n\nSignificant components of the provision for income taxes are as follows:\n\nA reconciliation of the statutory federal income tax rate to the Company's effective income tax rate is as follows:\n\nDeferred income taxes reflect the net tax effects of temporary differences between the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities for financial reporting purposes and the amounts used for income tax purposes. Significant components of the Company's deferred tax liabilities and assets are as follows:\n\n49\n\nThe Company purchased 762,300; 614,580; and 1,472,937 shares of its common stock during 2003, 2002, and 2001, respectively. The par value method of accounting is used for common stock repurchases. The excess of the cost of shares acquired over their par value is allocated to Additional Paid-In Capital, with the excess charged to Retained Earnings.\n\nThe following table reconciles the numerators and denominators used in the calculation of basic and diluted earnings per share (EPS):\n\nCertain exercisable and nonexercisable stock options were not included in the computation of diluted EPS for fiscal year 2003 and 2002, because the option prices were greater that the average market prices for the applicable periods. The number of stock options outstanding which met this criterion for 2003 was 20,000, with a range of per share exercise prices of $42.49-$42.98; and for 2002 was 30,000, with a range of per share exercise prices of $28.25-$32.22.\n\nComponents of other comprehensive income (loss) consist of the following:", + "recall": 0.8271604938271605, + "true_md": "## Income Taxes\n\n## Shareholders’ Equity and Earnings Per Share\n\n## H O N I N D U S T R I E S I n c . a n d S U B S I D I A R I E S\n\nSignificant components of the provision for income taxes are as follows:\n\n49\n\nComponents of other comprehensive income (loss) consist of the following:\n\nCertain exercisable and nonexercisable stock options were not included in the computation of diluted EPS for fiscal year 2003 and 2002, because the option prices were greater that the average market prices for the applicable periods. The number of stock options outstanding which met this criterion for 2003 was 20,000, with a range of per share exer- cise prices of $42.49–$42.98; and for 2002 was 30,000, with a range of per share exercise prices of $28.25–$32.22. \n\nDeferred income taxes reflect the net tax effects of temporary dif- ferences between the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities for financial reporting purposes and the amounts used for income tax purposes. Significant components of the Company’s deferred tax lia- bilities and assets are as follows:\n\nA reconciliation of the statutory federal income tax rate to the Com- pany’s effective income tax rate is as follows:\n\nThe Company purchased 762,300; 614,580; and 1,472,937 shares of its common stock during 2003, 2002, and 2001, respectively. The par value method of accounting is used for common stock repurchases. The excess of the cost of shares acquired over their par value is allocated to Additional Paid-In Capital, with the excess charged to Retained Earnings.\n\nThe following table reconciles the numerators and denom- inators used in the calculation of basic and diluted earnings per share (EPS):" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8432195854300618, + "doc_id": "96a8b3c14d41f3ff00586d39256d24c6f5adccb2d09ef235d14a23ad73849dab", + "edit_distance": 0.17794970986460348, + "f1_score": 0.9308755760368663, + "meteor": 0.9605654574790651, + "precision": 0.9140271493212669, + "pred_md": "As of December 31, 2003, there remained 72,534 shares for which options may be granted in the future under the 1997 Stock Incentive Plan. The following table summarizes information about stock options outstanding at December 31, 2003:\n\nPro forma information regarding net income and income per share as required by SFAS No. 123 has been determined as if the Company had accounted for its stock options under the fair value method of that statement. The fair value for these options was estimated at the date of grant using a Black-Scholes option pricing model with the following weighted average assumptions for 2003, 2002 and 2001:\n\nThe resulting estimated weighted average fair values of the options granted in 2003, 2002 and 2001 were $13.51, $7.25 and $7.06, respectively.\n\nThe Black-Scholes option pricing model was developed for use in estimating the fair value of traded options which have no vesting restrictions and are fully transferable. In addition, option valuation models require the input of highly subjective assumptions, including expected stock price volatility. All options grants in 2003, 2002 and 2001 occurred prior to the declaration of dividends by the Company.\n\n## R E V E N U E S F R O M M A J O R C U S T O M E R S 9\n\nThe Company had one major customer which represented approximately $9.1 million (14.4 percent), $7.4 million (12.4 percent) and $11.0 million (19.1 percent) of the Company's operating revenues during the years 2003, 2002 and 2001, respectively.\n\n## I N D U S T R Y S E G M E N T A N D G E O G R A P H I C I N F O R M A T I O N 10\n\nThe Company operates in one reportable industry segment: designing, developing, manufacturing and marketing products for the medical and health care industry and has no foreign operating subsidiaries. The Company's product lines include pressure relief valves and inflation systems, which are sold primarily to the aviation and marine industries. Due to the similarities in product technologies and manufacturing processes, these products are managed as part of the medical products segment. The Company recorded incidental revenues from its oxygen pipeline, which totaled approximately $950,000 in each of the years of 2003, 2002 and 2001. Pipeline net assets totaled $2.6 million at December 31, 2003 and 2002. Company revenues from sales to parties outside the United States totaled approximately 26, 25 and 33 percent of the Company's total revenues in 2003, 2002 and 2001, respectively. No Company assets are located outside the United States. A summary of revenues by geographic territory for the three years 2003, 2002 and 2001 is as follows (in thousands):\n\n19", + "recall": 0.9483568075117371, + "true_md": "As of December 31, 2003, there remained 72,534 shares for which options may be granted in the future under the 1997 Stock Incentive Plan. The following table summarizes information about stock options outstanding at December 31, 2003:\n\nPro forma information regarding net income and income per share as required by SFAS No. 123 has been determined as if the Company had accounted for its stock options under the fair value method of that statement. The fair value for these options was estimated at the date of grant using a Black-Scholes option pricing model with the following weighted average assumptions for 2003, 2002 and 2001:\n\nThe resulting estimated weighted average fair values of the options granted in 2003, 2002 and 2001 were $13.51, $7.25 and $7.06, respectively.\n\nThe Black-Scholes option pricing model was developed for use in estimating the fair value of traded options which have no vesting restrictions and are fully transferable. In addition, option valuation models require the input of highly subjective assumptions, including expected stock price volatility. All options grants in 2003, 2002 and 2001 occurred prior to the declaration of dividends by the Company.\n\nThe Company had one major customer which represented approximately $9.1 million (14.4 percent), $7.4 million (12.4 percent) and $11.0 million (19.1 percent) of the Company’s operating revenues during the years 2003, 2002 and 2001, respectively.\n\nThe Company operates in one reportable industry segment: designing, developing, manufacturing and marketing products for the medical and health care industry and has no foreign operating subsidiaries. The Company’s product lines include pressure relief valves and inflation systems, which are sold primarily to the aviation and marine industries. Due to the similarities in product technologies and manufacturing processes, these products are managed as part of the medical products segment. The Company recorded incidental revenues from its oxygen pipeline, which totaled approximately $950,000 in each of the years of 2003, 2002 and 2001. Pipeline net assets totaled $2.6 million at December 31, 2003 and 2002. Company revenues from sales to parties outside the United States totaled approximately 26, 25 and 33 percent of the Company’s total revenues in 2003, 2002 and 2001, respectively. No Company assets are located outside the United States. A summary of revenues by geographic territory for the three years 2003, 2002 and 2001 is as follows (in thousands):\n\n## INDUSTRY SEGMENT AND GEOGRAPHIC INFORMATION 10\n\n## REVENUES FROM MAJOR CUSTOMERS 9\n\n19" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8678064835414778, + "doc_id": "f8b7d66f25e95af0f4d1f7ff6f0db9d4a0ce8f7d618599d7f3d23e20b16f9f21", + "edit_distance": 0.11173184357541899, + "f1_score": 0.9604519774011301, + "meteor": 0.9638153818787091, + "precision": 0.9444444444444444, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO AND FORMING PART OF THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR THE FINANCIAL YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2000\n\nConsolidated\n\n2000\n\n1999\n\n2000\n\n1999\n\n$\n\n$\n\n$\n\n$\n\n548,242\n\n602,177\n\n## 24. REMUNERATION OF DIRECTORS\n\nThe directors of Mermaid Marine Australia Limited during the year were:\n\n- · A.G. Birchmore\n- · J.H. Carver\n- · D.A. Dillon\n- · J.A.S. Mews\n\nAggregate Income paid or payable, or otherwise made available, in respect of the Financial Year, to all directors of each entity in the consolidated entity, directly or indirectly, by the entities of which they are directors or any related party.\n\n548,242\n\n602,177\n\nAggregate Income paid or payable, or otherwise made available, in respect of the Financial Year, to all directors of Mermaid Marine Australia Limited, directly or indirectly, from the entity or any related party.\n\nThe number of directors of Mermaid Marine Australia Limited whose total income (including superannuation contributions) falls within the following bands:\n\nCompany", + "recall": 0.9770114942528736, + "true_md": "NOTES TO AND FORMING PART OF THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR THE FINANCIAL YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2000\n\n## 24. REMUNERATION OF DIRECTORS\n\nThe directors of Mermaid Marine Australia Limited during the year were:\n\n- • A.G. Birchmore\n\n- • J.H. Carver\n\n- • D.A. Dillon\n\n- • J.A.S. Mews\n\nAggregate Income paid or payable, or otherwise made available, in respect of the Financial Year, to all directors of each entity in the consolidated entity, directly or indirectly, by the entities of which they are directors or any related party.\n\n548,242\n\n602,177\n\nAggregate Income paid or payable, or otherwise made available, in respect of the Financial Year, to all directors of Mermaid Marine Australia Limited, directly or indirectly, from the entity or any related party.\n\nThe number of directors of Mermaid Marine Australia Limited whose total income (including superannuation contributions) falls within the following bands:\n\n548,242\n\n602,177\n\n54" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9496483318958094, + "doc_id": "683cf2dcdf4fef0cffa74f9cbca65599f1a750a3f90a0a2acc118cfcf3c97b30", + "edit_distance": 0.05276705276705277, + "f1_score": 0.972027972027972, + "meteor": 0.9693125616765399, + "precision": 0.972027972027972, + "pred_md": "SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## Note 1. Summary of Significant Accounting Policies (Continued)\n\npotentially dilutive securities would be antidilutive to the net loss per share from continuing operations. In 2003 and 2001, all options were dilutive. There were no adjustments to net income (loss) in the computation of diluted earnings per share for any of the years presented. The following tables show the computation of basic and diluted earnings per share for 2003, 2002 and 2001:\n\n## Recently Issued Accounting Standards:\n\nIn December 2003, the FASB issued FASB Interpretation No. 46 (revised December 2003),'Consolidation of Variable Interest Entities,' which addresses how a business enterprise should evaluate whether it has a controlling financial interest in an entity through means other than voting rights and accordingly should consolidate the entity. FIN 46R replaces FASB Interpretation No. 46, 'Consolidation of Variable Interest Entities,' (VIE), which was issued in January 2003. The Company will be required to apply FIN 46R to variable interests in VIEs created after December 31, 2003. For variable interests in VIEs created before January 1, 2004, the Interpretation will be applied beginning on January 1, 2005, except it must be applied in the fourth quarter of 2003 for any VIE's that are considered to be special purpose entities. For any VIEs that must be consolidated under FIN 46R that were created before January 1, 2004, the assets, liabilities and non-controlling interests of the VIE initially would be measured at their carrying amounts with any difference between the net amount added to the balance sheet and any previously recognized interest being recognized as the cumulative effect of an accounting change. If determining the carrying amounts is not practicable, fair value at the date FIN 46R first applies may be used to measure the assets, liabilities and non-controlling interest of the VIE. The Company is evaluating the impact of applying FIN 46R to existing VIEs in which it has variable interests and does not believe the application will have a material impact on the Company's consolidated financial statements.\n\nIn May 2003, the Financial Accounting Standards Board ('FASB') issued SFAS No. 150, 'Accounting for Certain Financial Instruments with Characteristics of Liabilities and Equity,' which was effective at the beginning of the first interim period beginning after June 15, 2003. This Statement establishes standards for the classification and measurement of certain financial instruments with characteristics of both liabilities and equity. The Statement also includes required disclosures for financial instruments within its scope. For the Company, the Statement was effective for instruments entered into or modified after May 31, 2003 and otherwise will be effective as of January 1, 2004, except for mandatorily redeemable financial instruments. For certain mandatorily redeemable financial instruments, the Statement will be effective for the Company on January 1, 2005. The effective date has been deferred indefinitely for certain other types of mandatorily redeemable financial instruments. The Company currently does not have any financial instruments that are within the scope of this Statement.\n\nIn December 2003, the Financial Accounting Standards Board issued FASB Statement No. 132(R). Statement No. 132(R) is a revision of Statement No. 132, 'Employers' Disclosures about Pensions and Other Postretirement Benefits.' SFAS 132(R) is effective for financial statements with fiscal years ending after December 15, 2003. SFAS 132(R) requires additional disclosures including information describing the types of plan assets, investment strategy, measurement date(s), plan obligations, cash flows, and components of net periodic benefit cost recognized during interim periods. The objectives of the revisions are to provide qualitative information about the items in the financial statements, quantitative information about items recognized or disclosed in the financial statements, information that enables users of financial statements to assess the effect that pension plans and other postretirement benefit plans have on entities' results of operations, and information to facilitate assessments of future earnings and cash flows. The Company has adopted this statement effective December 31, 2003 with disclosures included in Note 9.\n\nSHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY\n\n22\n\n■", + "recall": 0.972027972027972, + "true_md": "SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## Note 1. Summary of Significant Accounting Policies (Continued)\n\npotentially dilutive securities would be antidilutive to the net loss per share from continuing operations. In 2003 and 2001, all options were dilutive. There were no adjustments to net income (loss) in the computation of diluted earnings per share for any of the years presented. The following tables show the computation of basic and diluted earnings per share for 2003, 2002 and 2001:\n\nIn December 2003, the FASB issued FASB Interpretation No. 46 (revised December 2003),“Consolidation of Variable Interest Entities,” which addresses how a business enterprise should evaluate whether it has a contro lling financial interest in an entity through means other than voting rights and accordingly should consolidate the entity. FIN 46R replaces FASB Interpretation No. 46, “Consolidation of Variable Interest Entities,” (VIE), which was issued in January 2003. The Company will be required to apply FIN 46R to variable interests in VIEs created after December 31, 2003. For variable interests in VIEs created before January 1, 2004, the Interpretation will be applied beginning on January 1, 2005, except it must be applied in the fourth quarter of 2003 for any VIE’s that are considered to be special purpose entities. For any VIEs that must be consolidated under FIN 46R that were created before January 1, 2004, the assets, liabilities and non-controlling interests of the VIE initially would be measured at their carrying amounts with any difference between the net amount added to the balance sheet and any previously recognized interest being recognized as the cumulative effect of an accounting change. If determining the carrying amounts is not practicable, fair value at the date FIN 46R first applies may be used to measure the assets, liabilities and non-controlling interest of the VIE. The Company is evaluating the impact of applying FIN 46R to existing VIEs in which it has variable interests and does not believe the application will have a material impact on the Company’s consolidated financial statements.\n\n## Recently Issued Accounting Standards:\n\nIn May 2003, the Financial Accounting Standards Board (“FASB”) issued SFAS No. 150, “Accounting for Certain Financial Instruments with Characteristics of Liabilities and Equity,” which was effective at the beginning of the first interim period beginning after June 15, 2003. This Statement establishes standards for the classification and measurement of certain financial instruments with characteristics of both liabilities and equity. The Statement also includes required disclosures for financial instruments within its scope. For the Company, the Statement was effective for instruments entered into or modified after May 31, 2003 and otherwise will be effective as of January 1, 2004, except for mandatorily redeemable financial instruments. For certain mandatorily redeemable financial instruments, the Statement will be effective for the Company on January 1, 2005. The effective date has been deferred indefinitely for certain other types of mandatorily redeemable financial instruments. The Company currently does not have any financial instruments that are within the scope of this Statement.\n\nIn December 2003, the Financial Accounting Standards Board issued FASB Statement No. 132(R). Statement No. 132(R) is a revision of Statement No. 132, “Employers’ Disclosures about Pensions and Other Postretirement Benefits.” SFAS 132(R) is effective for financial statements with fiscal years ending after December 15, 2003. SFAS 132(R) requires additional disclosures including information describing the types of plan assets, investment strategy, measurement date(s), plan obligations, cash flows, and components of net periodic benefit cost recognized during interim periods. The objectives of the revisions are to provide qualitative information about the items in the financial statements, quantitative information about items recognized or disclosed in the financial statements, information that enables users of financial statements to assess the effect that pension plans and other postretirement benefit plans have on entities’ results of operations, and information to facilitate assessments of future earnings and cash flows. The Company has adopted this statement effective December 31, 2003 with disclosures included in Note 9.\n\nSHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY ■ 22" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9222992668360108, + "doc_id": "5fde764624022760f6ce80258c1db381b361259cbce3c890bc8673ad627c5e83", + "edit_distance": 0.8153846153846154, + "f1_score": 0.9629629629629631, + "meteor": 0.8183957168711393, + "precision": 0.9848484848484849, + "pred_md": "Assumptions used to determine benefit obligations are as follows:\n\nAssumptions used to determine net periodic benefit costs are as follows:\n\nThe expected long-term rate of return on plan assets is developed in consultation with outside advisors. A range is determined based on the composition of the asset portfolio, historical long-term rates of return, and estimates of future performance.\n\nFor measurement purposes, an 8% annual rate of increase in the per capita cost of covered health care benefits was assumed for 2005. The rate is assumed to decrease by 1% per year to 5% for 2008, and remain at that level thereafter.\n\nAssumed health care cost trend rates have a significant impact on the amounts reported for the health care plan. A one-percentagepoint change in assumed health care cost trend rates would have the following effects:\n\nThe actual and target weighted-average asset allocations for the company's pension plan assets as of the plan measurement date are as follows:\n\nTarget allocations are established in consultation with outside advisors through the use of asset-liability modeling to attempt to match the duration of the plan assets with the duration of the company's projected benefit liability. The asset allocation strategy attempts to minimize the long-term cost of pension benefits, reduce the volatility of pension expense, and achieve a healthy funded status for the plans. The target allocation was revised in fiscal 2004 to better achieve these objectives.\n\n42\n\nHormel Foods Corporation\n\nAs of the fiscal 2004 valuation date, plan assets included 3.2 million shares of common stock of the company having a market value of $95.9 million (16% of total plan assets). Dividends paid during the year on shares held by the plan were $1.5 million. In 2003, plan assets included 3.3 million shares of common stock of the company having a market value of $72.2 million (14% of total plan assets).\n\nThe company made a discretionary contribution of $26.8 million to the company's defined benefit pension plans in April 2004. The company does not anticipate making any discretionary contributions to fund the pension or other postretirement benefit plans during fiscal 2005. The company expects to make contributions of $42.1 million during fiscal 2005 that represent benefit payments from unfunded plans.\n\nBenefits expected to be paid over the next ten fiscal years are as follows:\n\n## > note G\n\n## Income Taxes\n\nThe components of the provision for income taxes are as follows:", + "recall": 0.9420289855072463, + "true_md": "Assumptions used to determine benefit obligations are as follows:\n\nAs of the fiscal 2004 valuation date, plan assets included 3.2 mil- lion shares of common stock of the company having a market value of $95.9 million (16% of total plan assets). Dividends paid during the year on shares held by the plan were $1.5 million. In 2003, plan assets included 3.3 million shares of common stock of the company having a market value of $72.2 million (14% of total plan assets).\n\nThe company made a discretionary contribution of $26.8 million to the company’s defined benefit pension plans in April 2004. The company does not anticipate making any discretionary contri- butions to fund the pension or other postretirement benefit plans during fiscal 2005. The company expects to make contributions of $42.1 million during fiscal 2005 that represent benefit payments from unfunded plans.\n\nAssumptions used to determine net periodic benefit costs are as follows:\n\nBenefits expected to be paid over the next ten fiscal years are as follows:\n\nThe expected long-term rate of return on plan assets is developed in consultation with outside advisors. A range is determined based on the composition of the asset portfolio, historical long-term rates of return, and estimates of future performance.\n\nFor measurement purposes, an 8% annual rate of increase in the per capita cost of covered health care benefits was assumed for 2005. The rate is assumed to decrease by 1% per year to 5% for 2008, and remain at that level thereafter.\n\nAssumed health care cost trend rates have a significant impact on the amounts reported for the health care plan. A one-percentage- point change in assumed health care cost trend rates would have the following effects:\n\nThe components of the provision for income taxes are as follows:\n\nThe actual and target weighted-average asset allocations for the company’s pension plan assets as of the plan measurement date are as follows:\n\nTarget allocations are established in consultation with outside advi- sors through the use of asset-liability modeling to attempt to match the duration of the plan assets with the duration of the company’s projected benefit liability. The asset allocation strategy attempts to minimize the long-term cost of pension benefits, reduce the volatil- ity of pension expense, and achieve a healthy funded status for the plans. The target allocation was revised in fiscal 2004 to better achieve these objectives.\n\n42\n\nHormel Foods Corporation\n\n## Income Taxes\n\n## > note G" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9124407722282529, + "doc_id": "a95cc9540d8364615276380807d1e2deaaabba5bfded308d16cdb9f597705547", + "edit_distance": 0.0721951219512195, + "f1_score": 0.9418777943368106, + "meteor": 0.939532146808304, + "precision": 0.9693251533742331, + "pred_md": "HON INDUSTRIES Inc. and SUBSIDIARIES\n\nIn May 1997, the Company registered 400,000 shares of its common stock under its 1997 Equity Plan for Non-Employee Directors. This plan permits the Company to issue to its non-employee directors options to purchase shares of Company common stock, restricted stock of the Company, and awards of Company stock. The plan also permits non-employee directors to elect to receive all or a portion of their annual retainers and other compensation in the form of shares of Company common stock. During 2003, 2002, and 2001, 10,922; 11,958; and 8,662 shares of Company common stock were issued under the plan, respectively.\n\nCash dividends declared and paid per share for each year are:\n\nDuring 2002, shareholders approved the 2002 Members' Stock Purchase Plan. Under the new plan, 800,000 shares of common stock were registered for issuance to participating members. Beginning on June 30, 2002, rights to purchase stock are granted on a quarterly basis to all members who have one year of employment eligibility and work a minimum of 20 hours a week. The price of the stock purchased under the plan is 85% of the closing price on the applicable purchase date. No member may purchase stock under the plan in an amount which exceeds the lesser of 20% of his/her gross earnings or a maximum fair value of $25,000 in any calendar year. During 2003, 79,237 shares of common stock were issued under the plan at an average price of $29.25. During 2002, 47,419 shares of common stock were issued under the plan at an average price of $22.58. An additional 673,344 shares were available for issuance under the plan at January 3, 2004. This plan replaced the 1994 Members' Stock Purchase Plan. Under this plan, during 2002 and 2001, 43,388 shares at an average price of $23.63 and 85,385 shares at an average price of $20.51 were issued, respectively.\n\nThe Company has a shareholders' rights plan which will expire August 20, 2008. The plan becomes operative if certain events occur involving the acquisition of 20% or more of the Company's common stock by any person or group in a transaction not approved by the Company's Board of Directors. Upon the occurrence of such an event, each right entitles its holder to purchase an amount of common stock of the Company with a market value of $400 for $200, unless the Board authorizes the rights be redeemed. The rights may be redeemed for $0.01 per right at any time before the rights become exercisable. In certain instances, the right to purchase applies to the capital stock of the acquirer\n\ninstead of the common stock of the Company. The Company has reserved preferred shares necessary for issuance should the rights be exercised.\n\nThe Company has entered into change in control employment agreements with corporate officers and certain other key employees. According to the agreements, a change in control occurs when a third person or entity becomes the beneficial owner of 20% or more of the Company's common stock or when more than one-third of the Company's Board of Directors is composed of persons not recommended by at least three-fourths of the incumbent Board of Directors. Upon a change in control, a key employee is deemed to have a two-year employment with the Company, and all his or her benefits are vested under Company plans. If, at any time within two years of the change in control, his or her position, salary, bonus, place of work, or Companyprovided benefits are modified, or employment is terminated by the Company for any reason other than cause or by the key employee for good reason, as such terms are defined in the agreement, then the key employee is entitled to receive a severance payment equal to two times annual salary and the average of the prior two years' bonuses.\n\n## Stock-Based Compensation\n\nUnder the Company's 1995 Stock-Based Compensation Plan, as amended and restated effective November 10, 2000, the Company may award options to purchase shares of the Company's common stock and grant other stock awards to executives, managers, and key personnel. The Plan is administered by the Human Resources and Compensation Committee of the Board of Directors. Restricted stock awarded under the plan is expensed ratably over the vesting period of the awards. Stock options awarded to employees under the Plan must be at exercise prices equal to or exceeding the fair market value of the Company's common stock on the date of grant. Stock options are generally subject to four-year cliff vesting and must be exercised within 10 years from the date of grant.\n\nThe weighted-average fair value of options granted during 2003, 2002, and 2001, estimated on the date of grant using the Black-Scholes option-pricing model, was $10.74, $11.74, and $9.70, respectively. The fair value of 2003, 2002, and 2001 options granted is estimated on the date of grant using the following assumptions: dividend yield of 1.2% to 2.1%, expected volatility of 34.9% to 38.4%, risk-free interest rate of 4.2% to 5.4%, and an expected life of 10 to 12 years, depending on grant date.\n\nThe status of the Company's stock option plans is summarized in the following table:\n\n50", + "recall": 0.9159420289855073, + "true_md": "## H O N I N D U S T R I E S I n c . a n d S U B S I D I A R I E S\n\nIn May 1997, the Company registered 400,000 shares of its common stock under its 1997 Equity Plan for Non-Employee Directors. This plan permits the Company to issue to its non-employee directors options to purchase shares of Company common stock, restricted stock of the Company, and awards of Company stock. The plan also permits non-employee directors to elect to receive all or a portion of their annual retainers and other compensation in the form of shares of Company common stock. During 2003, 2002, and 2001, 10,922; 11,958; and 8,662 shares of Company common stock were issued under the plan, respectively.\n\nCash dividends declared and paid per share for each year are:\n\nDuring 2002, shareholders approved the 2002 Members’ Stock Purchase Plan. Under the new plan, 800,000 shares of common stock were registered for issuance to participating members. Beginning on June 30, 2002, rights to purchase stock are granted on a quarterly basis to all members who have one year of employment eligibility and work a minimum of 20 hours a week. The price of the stock purchased under the plan is 85% of the closing price on the applicable purchase date. No member may purchase stock under the plan in an amount which exceeds the lesser of 20% of his/her gross earnings or a maxi- mum fair value of $25,000 in any calendar year. During 2003, 79,237 shares of common stock were issued under the plan at an average price of $29.25. During 2002, 47,419 shares of common stock were issued under the plan at an average price of $22.58. An additional 673,344 shares were available for issuance under the plan at January 3, 2004. This plan replaced the 1994 Members’ Stock Purchase Plan. Under this plan, during 2002 and 2001, 43,388 shares at an aver- age price of $23.63 and 85,385 shares at an average price of $20.51 were issued, respectively.\n\nThe Company has a shareholders’ rights plan which will expire August 20, 2008. The plan becomes operative if certain events occur involving the acquisition of 20% or more of the Company’s common stock by any person or group in a transaction not approved by the Company’s Board of Directors. Upon the occurrence of such an event, each right entitles its holder to purchase an amount of common stock of the Company with a market value of $400 for $200, unless the Board authorizes the rights be redeemed. The rights may be redeemed for $0.01 per right at any time before the rights become exercisable. In certain instances, the right to purchase applies to the capital stock of the acquirer \n\ninstead of the common stock of the Company. The Company has reserved preferred shares necessary for issuance should the rights be exercised.\n\nThe Company has entered into change in control employ- ment agreements with corporate officers and certain other key employees. According to the agreements, a change in control occurs when a third person or entity becomes the beneficial owner of 20% or more of the Company’s common stock or when more than one-third of the Company’s Board of Directors is composed of persons not recom- mended by at least three-fourths of the incumbent Board of Directors. Upon a change in control, a key employee is deemed to have a two-year employment with the Company, and all his or her benefits are vested under Company plans. If, at any time within two years of the change in control, his or her position, salary, bonus, place of work, or Company- provided benefits are modified, or employment is terminated by the Company for any reason other than cause or by the key employee for good reason, as such terms are defined in the agreement, then the key employee is entitled to receive a severance payment equal to two times annual salary and the average of the prior two years’ bonuses.\n\nUnder the Company’s 1995 Stock-Based Compensation Plan, as amended and restated effective November 10, 2000, the Company may award options to purchase shares of the Company’s common stock and grant other stock awards to executives, managers, and key personnel. The Plan is administered by the Human Resources and Compensation Committee of the Board of Directors. Restricted stock awarded under the plan is expensed ratably over the vesting period of the awards. Stock options awarded to employees under the Plan must be at exercise prices equal to or exceeding the fair market value of the Company’s common stock on the date of grant. Stock options are generally subject to four-year cliff vesting and must be exercised within 10 years from the date of grant.\n\nThe weighted-average fair value of options granted during 2003, 2002, and 2001, estimated on the date of grant using the Black-Scholes option-pricing model, was $10.74, $11.74, and $9.70, respectively. The fair value of 2003, 2002, and 2001 options granted is estimated on the date of grant using the following assumptions: dividend yield of 1.2% to 2.1%, expected volatility of 34.9% to 38.4%, risk-free interest rate of 4.2% to 5.4%, and an expected life of 10 to 12 years, depending on grant date.\n\nThe status of the Company’s stock option plans is summa- rized in the following table:\n\n50\n\n## Stock-Based Compensation" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8392623982173246, + "doc_id": "9fd7178e2e2dd80eb5ffd4cbca62292a94fb8a3f4d0807fbaffe5cb9b046026b", + "edit_distance": 0.6246153846153846, + "f1_score": 0.943952802359882, + "meteor": 0.8714275101124443, + "precision": 0.9696969696969697, + "pred_md": "74\n\n## NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\nfor the year ended 31 December 2004\n\n## 25. Related Parties\n\nSantos Ltd and its controlled entities engage in a variety of related party transactions in the ordinary course of business. These transactions are conducted on normal terms and conditions.\n\nDetails of related party transactions and amounts are set out in:\n\n- Note 2 as to interest received from controlled entities;\n- Note 4 as to interest paid to controlled entities;\n- Note 7 as to tax related balances and other amounts owing by controlled entities;\n- Notes 14 and 15 as to amounts owing to controlled entities;\n- Note 15 as to guarantees by Santos Ltd of the financing facilities of controlled entities;\n- Note 16 as to non-executive Directors' retirement benefits;\n- Notes 12 and 22 as to investments in controlled entities;\n- Note 26 as to disclosures relating to Specified Directors and Specified Executives.\n\n## In addition:\n\n(a) The spouse of a director of a Santos Group company is an employee of a subsidiary of that company and each of those persons is also a director of that subsidiary company.\n\n(b) Mr J W McArdle, who retired as a Director on 14 July 2001, entered into a consultancy agreement with the Company pursuant to which he will provide consultancy services to the Santos Group. The amount paid pursuant to this agreement during the financial year was $30,000 (2003: $70,000).\n\nThe transactions referred to in paragraphs (a) and (b) occurred on terms no more favourable than would have been adopted if dealing at arm's length, do not have the potential to adversely affect decisions about the allocation of scarce resources and are trivial in nature.\n\nAnnual Report 2004", + "recall": 0.9195402298850575, + "true_md": "## NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STA TEMENTS\n\nfor the year ended 31 December 2004\n\n## 25. Related Parties\n\nSantos Ltd and its controlled entities engage in a variety of related party tran sactions in the ordinary course of business. These transactions are conducted on normal terms and conditions.\n\nDetails of related party transactions and amounts are set out in:\n\nIn addition:\n\nThe transactions referred to in paragraphs (a) and (b) occurred on terms no m ore favourable than would have been adopted if dealing at arm’s length, do not have the potential to adversely affect decisions about th allocation of scarce resources and are trivial in nature.\n\n- (a) The spouse of a director of a Santos Group company is an employee of a subsidiary of that company and each of those persons is also a director of that subsidiary company.\n\n- (b) Mr J W McArdle, who retired as a Director on 14 July 2001, entered into a consultancy agreement with the Company pursuant to which he will provide consultancy services to the Santos Group. The amount pai pursuant to this agreement during the financial year was $30,000 (2003: $70,000).\n\nNote 2 as to interest received from controlled entities; Note 4 as to interest paid to controlled entities; Note 7 as to tax related balances and other amounts owing by controlled entities; Notes 14 and 15 as to amounts owing to controlled entities; Note 15 as to guarantees by Santos Ltd of the financing facilities of contr olled entities; Note 16 as to non-executive Directors’ retirement benefits; Notes 12 and 22 as to investments in controlled entities; Note 26 as to disclosures relating to Specified Directors and Specified Ex ecutives.\n\nAnnual Report 2004 74" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5946035575013605, + "doc_id": "1105321a77549c4dcbb3ed0589e359ad1768aa5b730bd0fab7a6926fc9103116", + "edit_distance": 0.625, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.97441793618856, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Outperform\n\nEmmis Communications 2004 Annual Report", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Emmis Communications 2004 Annual Report\n\n# Outperform" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7080544670022316, + "doc_id": "b1d047dfbfc57383f591c0500456bde145e2dc143f84a7f552131924d8429678", + "edit_distance": 0.8846153846153846, + "f1_score": 0.8095238095238095, + "meteor": 0.6941634241245136, + "precision": 0.85, + "pred_md": "Design: Gene Mayer Associates, Inc. www.shareholderfocus.com Text: Daniel D. Elman Photography: Ted Kawalerski; page 8, Amy Etra", + "recall": 0.7727272727272727, + "true_md": "Photography: T ed Kawalerski ; page 8, Amy Etra\n\nDesign: Gene Mayer Associates, Inc. www .shareholderfocus.com T ext: Daniel D. Elman" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.930642024912717, + "doc_id": "4ec755871520bc34c84c254b3bf0b60ed7460dbe4543ef370f3221109dfadcd7", + "edit_distance": 0.052917232021709636, + "f1_score": 0.970464135021097, + "meteor": 0.9541786006745442, + "precision": 0.9745762711864406, + "pred_md": "40\n\n## Reports of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm\n\n## To the Board of Directors and Stockholders of MGM MIRAGE\n\nWe have audited management's assessment, included in the accompanying 'Management's Annual Report on Internal Control Over Financial Reporting', that MGM MIRAGE (a Delaware corporation) and subsidiaries (the 'Company') maintained effective internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2004, based on criteria established in Internal Control-Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission. The Company's management is responsible for maintaining effective internal control over financial reporting and for its assessment of the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on management's assessment and an opinion on the effectiveness of the Company's internal control over financial reporting based on our audit.\n\nWe conducted our audit in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether effective internal control over financial reporting was maintained in all material respects. Our audit included obtaining an understanding of internal control over financial reporting, evaluating management's assessment, testing and evaluating the design and operating effectiveness of internal control, and performing such other procedures as we considered necessary in the circumstances. We believe that our audit provides a reasonable basis for our opinions.\n\nA company's internal control over financial reporting is a process designed by, or under the supervision of, the company's principal executive and principal financial officers, or persons performing similar functions, and effected by the company's board of directors, management, and other personnel to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles. A company's internal control over financial reporting includes those policies and procedures that (1) pertain to the maintenance of records that, in reasonable detail, accurately and fairly reflect the transactions and dispositions of the assets of the company; (2) provide reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded as necessary to permit preparation of financial statements in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles, and that receipts and expenditures of the company are being made only in accordance with authorizations of management and directors of the company; and (3) provide reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of unauthorized acquisition, use, or disposition of the company's assets that could have a material effect on the financial statements.\n\nBecause of the inherent limitations of internal control over financial reporting, including the possibility of collusion or improper management override of controls, material misstatements due to error or fraud may not be prevented or detected on a timely basis. Also, projections of any evaluation of the effectiveness of the internal control over financial reporting to future periods are subject to the risk that the controls may become inadequate because of changes in conditions, or that the degree of compliance with the policies or procedures may deteriorate.\n\nIn our opinion, management's assessment that the Company maintained effective internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2004, is fairly stated, in all material respects, based on criteria established in Internal Control-Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission. Also in our opinion, the Company maintained, in all material respects, effective internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2004, based on criteria established in Internal Control-Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission.\n\nWe have also audited, in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States), the consolidated financial statements as of and for the year ended December 31, 2004 of the Company and our report dated March 10, 2005 expressed an unqualified opinion on those financial statements.\n\nLas Vegas, Nevada March 10, 2005", + "recall": 0.9663865546218487, + "true_md": "Reports of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm 40\n\n## To the Board of Directors and Stockholders of MGM MIRAGE\n\nWe have audited management’s assessment, included in the accompanying “Management’s Annual Report on Internal Control Over Financial Reporting”, that MGM MIRAGE (a Delaware corporation) and subsidiaries (the “Company”) maintained effective internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2004, based on criteria established in Internal Control—Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission. The Company’s management is responsible for maintaining effective internal control over financial reporting and for its assessment of the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting. Our respon- sibility is to express an opinion on management’s assessment and an opinion on the effectiveness of the Company’s internal control over financial reporting based on our audit.\n\nWe conducted our audit in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether effective internal control over financial reporting was maintained in all material respects. Our audit included obtaining an understanding of internal control over financial reporting, evaluating management’s assessment, testing and evaluating the design and operating effectiveness of internal control, and performing such other procedures as we considered necessary in the circumstances. We believe that our audit provides a reasonable basis for our opinions.\n\nA company’s internal control over financial reporting is a process designed by, or under the supervision of, the company’s principal executive and principal financial officers, or persons performing similar functions, and effected by the company’s board of directors, management, and other personnel to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles. A company’s internal control over financial reporting includes those policies and procedures that (1) pertain to the maintenance of records that, in reasonable detail, accurately and fairly reflect the transactions and dispositions of the assets of the company; (2) provide reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded as necessary to permit preparation of financial statements in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles, and that receipts and expenditures of the company are being made only in accordance with authorizations of management and directors of the company; and (3) provide reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of unauthorized acquisition, use, or disposition of the company’s assets that could have a material effect on the financial statements.\n\nBecause of the inherent limitations of internal control over financial reporting, including the possibility of collusion or improper management override of controls, material misstatements due to error or fraud may not be prevented or detected on a timely basis. Also, projections of any evaluation of the effectiveness of the internal control over financial reporting to future periods are subject to the risk that the controls may become inadequate because of changes in conditions, or that the degree of compliance with the policies or procedures may deteriorate.\n\nIn our opinion, management’s assessment that the Company maintained effective internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2004, is fairly stated, in all material respects, based on criteria established in Internal Control—Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission. Also in our opinion, the Company maintained, in all material respects, effective internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2004, based on criteria established in Internal Control—Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission.\n\nWe have also audited, in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States), the consolidated financial statements as of and for the year ended December 31, 2004 of the Company and our report dated March 10, 2005 expressed an unqualified opinion on those financial statements.\n\nLas Vegas, Nevada March 10, 2005" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9166637860768775, + "doc_id": "abaa4d32ae75f54a91b5aa56137ff5b24eebb05f7e8c0542ba96f3f0f71e3ba5", + "edit_distance": 0.125, + "f1_score": 0.9811320754716982, + "meteor": 0.978228555806982, + "precision": 0.9873417721518988, + "pred_md": "FINANCIAL SECTION\n\n92\n\n## 21. SEGMENT INFORMATION\n\nThe Company and its consolidated subsidiaries are primarily engaged in the manufacture and sales of products in the automobile segment and in providing various financial services to users of the Company's products in the sales financing segment. These products, which are sold in Japan and overseas, principally in North America and Europe, include passenger cars, buses and trucks as well as the related components. Financial services include primarily leases and credits principally in Japan and North America.\n\n## Business segments\n\nThe business segment information for the Company and its consolidated subsidiaries for the years ended March 31, 2005, 2004 and 2003 is as follows:\n\nFiscal year 2003\n\n(For the year ended Mar. 31, 2004)\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004", + "recall": 0.975, + "true_md": "## 21. SEGMENT INFORMATION\n\nThe Company and its consolidated subsidiaries are primarily engaged in the manufacture and sales of products in the automobile segment and in providing various financial services to users of the Company’s products in the sales financing segment. These products, which are sold in Japan and overseas, principally in North America and Europe, include passenger cars, buses and trucks as well as the related components. Financial services include primarily leases and credits principally in Japan and North America.\n\n## Business segments\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 92\n\nFINANCIAL SECTION\n\nThe business segment information for the Company and its consolidated subsidiaries for the years ended March 31, 2005, 2004 and 2003 is as follows: Fiscal year 2004 (For the year ended Mar. 31, 2005)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9807444965249761, + "doc_id": "5901349d76394c03828bcc958c5917b48c88c6b7a4f3a326b4b0f9222abeff70", + "edit_distance": 0.037552155771905425, + "f1_score": 0.9901639344262295, + "meteor": 0.9908303904953962, + "precision": 0.9901639344262295, + "pred_md": "SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES MANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS\n\nis the intent of the Company to evaluate whether to hold or sell parts or all of each investment on an individual basis. At December 31, 2003, the Company had external investments totaling $7.5 million.\n\nIn 2004, the Company anticipates taking advantage of a conversion feature on its Rural Telephone Bank stock. The Company will convert a portion of its holdings into a different class of stock that will pay cash dividends each year. The bank declares a dividend rate that varies, each year. The range of the dividend has been between 4.2% and 5.65% over the last 5 years. The rate in the two most recent years was 4.2%. This transaction is estimated to provide the Company with approximately $0.3 million in dividend income each year, based on the 2003 dividend rate of 4.2% and assuming we had converted the stock at the beginning of 2003.\n\n## Financial Condition, Liquidity and Capital Resources\n\nThe Company has four principal sources of funds available to meet the financing needs of its operations, capital projects, debt service, investments and potential dividends. These sources include cash flows from operations, cash and cash equivalents, the liquidation of investments and borrowings. Management routinely considers the alternatives available to determine what mix of sources are best suited for the long-term benefit of the Company.\n\nDuring the 2003 year, with the closing of the sale of the Virginia 10 RSA Limited partnership interest, the Company evaluated its capital requirements, and as a result eliminated its $20.0 million revolving line of credit with CoBank in May 2003. The Company had paid off the outstanding balance in early 2003, and did not borrow on it during the remaining time the facility was in place. In light of the $27.9 million balance in cash equivalent investments, management determined additional debt capacity is not necessary for the near-term.\n\nThe term debt loan agreements with CoBank have three financial covenants. These are measured on a trailing 12-month basis and are calculated on continuing operations. The first of the covenants is the total leverage ratio, which is total debt to operating cash flow. This ratio must remain below 3.5, and as of December 31, 2003 it was 1.2. The second measure is equity to total assets, which must be 35% or higher. At December 31, 2003 the ratio was 57.3%. The third measure is the debt service coverage ratio, which is operating cash flow to scheduled debt service, which must exceed 2.0. At December 31, 2003 this measure was 4.3. Management believes the Company will meet these covenant measures for the coming year. The Company has pledged all of its affiliates capital stock as collateral for the CoBank loans.\n\nThe Company's covenants on the RUS/RTB debt require the pledge of all current and future assets of the Telephone subsidiary until the debt is retired.\n\nAnother external source of funding is a $0.5 million unsecured, variable rate revolving line of credit with SunTrust Bank. This facility is in place to allow the Company to better manage its daily cash balances. The facility expires May 31, 2004. Management anticipates renewing this facility with SunTrust Bank under similar terms and conditions. At December 31, 2003 there were no balances outstanding under this facility.\n\nDue to make-whole provisions in the Company's debt agreements it is currently uneconomical for the Company to prepay any debt.\n\nThe Company is obligated to make future payments under various contracts it has entered into, including amounts pursuant to its various long-term debt facilities, and non-cancelable operating lease agreements for retail space, tower space and cell sites. Expected future minimum contractual cash obligations for the next five years and in the aggregate at December 30, 2003, are as follows:\n\nSHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY\n\n52\n\n■", + "recall": 0.9901639344262295, + "true_md": "SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS\n\nis the intent of the Company to evaluate whether to hold or sell parts or all of each investment on an individual basis. At December 31, 2003, the Company had external investments totaling $7.5 million.\n\nIn 2004, the Company anticipates taking advantage of a conversion feature on its Rural Telephone Bank stock. The Company will convert a portion of its holdings into a different class of stock that will pay cash dividends each year. The bank declares a dividend rate that varies, each year. The range of the dividend has been between 4.2% and 5.65% over the last 5 years. The rate in the two most recent years was 4.2%. This transaction is estimated to provide the Company with approximately $0.3 million in dividend income each year, based on the 2003 dividend rate of 4.2% and assuming we had converted the stock at the beginning of 2003.\n\nThe Company has four principal sources of funds available to meet the financing needs of its operations, capital projects, debt service, investments and potential dividends. These sources include cash flows from operations, cash and cash equivalents, the liquidation of investments and borrowings. Management routinely considers the alternatives available to determine what mix of sources are best suited for the long-term benefit of the Company.\n\nDuring the 2003 year, with the closing of the sale of the Virginia 10 RSA Limited partnership interest, the Company evaluated its capital requirements, and as a result eliminated its $20.0 million revolving line of credit with CoBank in May 2003. The Company had paid off the outstanding balance in early 2003, and did not borrow on it during the remaining time the facility was in place. In light of the $27.9 million balance in cash equivalent investments, management determined additional debt capacity is not necessary for the near-term.\n\nThe term debt loan agreements with CoBank have three financial covenants. These are measured on a trailing 12-month basis and are calculated on continuing operations. The first of the covenants is the total leverage ratio, which is total debt to operating cash flow. This ratio must remain below 3.5, and as of December 31, 2003 it was 1.2. The second measure is equity to total assets, which must be 35% or higher. At December 31, 2003 the ratio was 57.3%. The third measure is the debt service coverage ratio, which is operating cash flow to scheduled debt service, which must exceed 2.0. At December 31, 2003 this measure was 4.3. Management believes the Company will meet these covenant measures for the coming year. The Company has pledged all of its affiliates capital stock as collateral for the CoBank loans.\n\nThe Company’s covenants on the RUS/RTB debt require the pledge of all current and future assets of the Telephone subsidiary until the debt is retired.\n\nAnother external source of funding is a $0.5 million unsecured, variable rate revolving line of credit with SunTrust Bank. This facility is in place to allow the Company to better manage its daily cash balances. The facility expires May 31, 2004. Management anticipates renewing this facility with SunTrust Bank under similar terms and conditions. At December 31, 2003 there were no balances outstanding under this facility.\n\nDue to make-whole provisions in the Company’s debt agreements it is currently uneconomical for the Company to prepay any debt.\n\nThe Company is obligated to make future payments under various contracts it has entered into, including amounts pursuant to its various long-term debt facilities, and non-cancelable operating lease agreements for retail space, tower space and cell sites. Expected future minimum contractual cash obligations for the next five years and in the aggregate at December 30, 2003, are as follows:\n\n## Financial Condition, Liquidity and Capital Resources\n\n52\n\nSHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8783767550859273, + "doc_id": "9927f129341fe0ecd64ce035a2dd3e44ea95d084184ebc4f0de52367cb8b56db", + "edit_distance": 0.16544117647058823, + "f1_score": 0.9457831325301205, + "meteor": 0.9590438138580205, + "precision": 0.9289940828402367, + "pred_md": "HIGHLIGHTS\n\nLETTER FROM CEO/COO\n\nEXECUTIVES\n\nPERFORMANCE\n\nWHO WE ARE\n\nOUR WORK\n\nOUR WORLD\n\nFI N A N C I A L S E C T I O N\n\nCORPORATE DATA\n\n## Contents\n\nThis Annual Report contains forward-looking statements on Nissan's future plans and targets, and related operating investment, product planning and production targets. Please note that there can be no assurance that these targets and plans will actually be achieved. Achieving them will depend on many factors, including not only Nissan's activities and development, but on the dynamics of the automobile industry worldwide and the global economy.\n\n## Vision\n\nNissan: Enriching people's lives\n\n## Mission\n\nNissan provides unique and innovative automotive products and services that deliver superior measurable values to all stakeholders* in alliance with Renault.\n\n*Our stakeholders include customers, shareholders, employees, dealers, suppliers, as well as the communities where we work and operate.\n\nThis Annual Report presents financial results for the fiscal period ending March 31, 2005. The report also provides shareholders with insight to Nissan's management team. Through one-onone interviews, various members of executive management, including Carlos Ghosn, President and Chief Executive Officer, discuss the philosophy and direction of Nissan.\n\n## Our Websites\n\nCorporate Information\n\nhttp://www.nissan-global.com/EN/COMPANY/\n\nhttp://www.nissan-global.com/EN/IR/ IR Information\n\nhttp://www.nissan-global.com/EN/PLAN/ Environment, Design, Safety and Technology Information\n\nhttp://www.nissan-global.com/EN/GLOBAL/ Product Information (by Country)\n\nhttp://www.nissan.co.jp/ Product Information (Japan)\n\nhttp://www.nissan-global.com/EN/COMPANY/CITIZENSHIP/ Corporate Citizenship Information", + "recall": 0.9631901840490797, + "true_md": "HIGHLIGHTS\n\nLETTER FROM CEO/COO\n\nEXECUTIVES\n\nPERFORMANCE\n\nWHO WE ARE\n\nOUR WORK\n\nOUR WORLD\n\nFINANCIAL SECTION\n\nCORPORATE DATA\n\n## Contents\n\n## Vision\n\n## Mission\n\nThis Annual Report contains forward-looking statements on Nissan’s future plans and targets, and related operating investment, product planning and production targets. Please note that there can be no assurance that these targets and plans will actually be achieved. Achieving them will depend on many factors, including not only Nissan’s activities and development, but on the dynamics of the automobile industry worldwide and the global economy.\n\nNissan: Enriching people’s lives\n\nNissan provides unique and innovative automotive products and services that deliver superior measurable values to all stakeholders* in alliance with Renault.\n\n*Our stakeholders include customers, shareholders, employees, dealers, suppliers, as well as the communities where we work and operate.\n\nThis Annual Report presents financial results for the fiscal period ending March 31, 2005. The report also provides shareholders with insight to Nissan’s management team. Through one-on- one interviews, various members of executive management, including Carlos Ghosn, President and Chief Executive Officer, discuss the philosophy and direction of Nissan.\n\nhttp://www.nissan-global.com/EN/COMPANY/ Corporate Information\n\nhttp://www.nissan-global.com/EN/IR/ IR Information\n\nhttp://www.nissan-global.com/EN/PLAN/ Environment, Design, Safety and Technology Information\n\nhttp://www.nissan-global.com/EN/GLOBAL/ Product Information (by Country)\n\nhttp://www.nissan.co.jp/ Product Information (Japan)\n\nhttp://www.nissan-global.com/EN/COMPANY/CITIZENSHIP/ Corporate Citizenship Information\n\n## Our Websites" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9606749035898263, + "doc_id": "d6be7c6e761ff4a1dd50db68b22f023bd3350fbe1b462ec0271405ce5bc7493c", + "edit_distance": 0.06521739130434782, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9997797577463631, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "FINANCIAL SECTION\n\n94\n\nThe following tables set forth the summarized financial statements by business segment for the years ended March 31, 2005, 2004 and 2003. Amounts for the sales financing segment represent the aggregate of the figures for the sales financing subsidiaries in Japan, the United States, Canada and Mexico. Amounts for the automobile and Eliminations segment represent the differences between the consolidated totals and those for the sales financing segment.\n\n- 1) Summarized consolidated balance sheets by business segment\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "The following tables set forth the summarized financial statements by business segment for the years ended March 31, 2005, 2004 and 2003. Amounts for the sales financing segment represent the aggregate of the figures for the sales financing subsidiaries in Japan, the United States, Canada and Mexico. Amounts for the automobile and Eliminations segment represent the differences between the consolidated totals and those for the sales financing segment.\n\nFINANCIAL SECTION\n\n- 1) Summarized consolidated balance sheets by business segment\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 94" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8861078794004759, + "doc_id": "bfdb4cc4b8c92ab3e7f5a044e894645deb24a9350569ff7e1dcaee0c52d447c0", + "edit_distance": 0.43573667711598746, + "f1_score": 0.9545454545454545, + "meteor": 0.9142655464824121, + "precision": 0.96, + "pred_md": "T he worst of 2001 brought out the best in The Hartford's people.\n\nAs the world watched the horrors of Sept. 11, some 330 of our New York employees fled their offices in 7 World Trade Center. Though many were caught in the debris and dust from the nearby Twin Towers, all escaped safely.\n\nBy the time the 47-story 7 World Trade Center building collapsed at about 5:20 p.m., The Hartford had already arranged for temporary space in several of the company's other offices. Employees and suppliers immediately began working around the clock to get the business up and running again. Despite the destruction, back-up systems kept distributors' and customers' data secure.\n\nA hundred miles from Ground Zero, home office employees in Hartford, Conn., began shuttling equipment and supplies to our temporary offices. Some\n\nbooked Long Island Sound ferries from Connecticut to Long Island within 48 hours of the attack. Others spent the weekend driving supplies to the new locations so employees could concentrate on customers instead of on finding pens and paper. Employees and suppliers were determined to get the company, its distributors and its customers through the crisis.\n\nBy Monday, Sept. 17, all of The Hartford's business units in New York were serving customers again. Employees had new furniture, phones, servers and PCs. Distributors' and customers' access to company e-mail was never interrupted. Calls to old phone numbers were rerouted to cell phones or new office phones. Print and radio ads-along with The Hartford's Web sitegave customers instructions for filing claims quickly. Customer relationships were stronger than ever. The Hartford Experience-customer solutions, ease of doing business and extraordinary service-was never better demonstrated.\n\n9", + "recall": 0.9491525423728814, + "true_md": "T he worst of 2001 brought out the best in The Hartford’s people. \n\nAs the world watched the horrors of Sept. 11, some 330 of our New York employees fled their offices in 7 World Trade Center. Though many were caught in the debris and dust from the nearby Twin Towers, all escaped safely. \n\nBy the time the 47-story 7 World Trade Center building collapsed at about 5:20 p.m., The Hartford had already arranged for temporary space in several of the company’s other offices. Employees and suppliers immediately began working around the clock to get the business up and running again. Despite the destruction, back-up systems kept distributors’ and customers’ data secure. \n\nA hundred miles from Ground Zero, home office employees in Hartford, Conn., began shuttling equip- ment and supplies to our temporary offices. Some \n\nBy Monday, Sept. 17, all of The Hartford’s business units in New York were serving customers again. Employees had new furniture, phones, servers and PCs. Distributors’ and customers’ access to company e-mail was never interrupted. Calls to old phone numbers were rerouted to cell phones or new office phones. Print and radio ads—along with The Hartford’s Web site— gave customers instructions for filing claims quickly. Customer relationships were stronger than ever. The Hartford Experience—customer solutions, ease of doing business and extraordinary service—was never better demonstrated.\n\nbooked Long Island Sound ferries from Connecticut to Long Island within 48 hours of the attack. Others spent the weekend driving supplies to the new locations so employees could concentrate on customers instead of on finding pens and paper. Employees and suppliers were determined to get the company, its distributors and its customers through the crisis.\n\n9" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7974754929838639, + "doc_id": "92630b7b6485b7767c5241626c462256b6bfbd346572718ef1b78ac174ce92e4", + "edit_distance": 0.38571428571428573, + "f1_score": 0.9214659685863874, + "meteor": 0.8512027768349862, + "precision": 0.9513513513513514, + "pred_md": "'P artnering' is a popular business buzzword that may vanish as quickly as it appeared. The Hartford's partnerships, on the other hand, are built for the long term and have played a major role in the company's growth and success.\n\nThe company enjoys outstanding partnerships with several of the world's top asset managers. It also values its thousands of relationships with financial intermediaries such as large broker-dealers, banks and independent financial planners-and with affinity partners who extend The Hartford's reach into large, growing markets.\n\n'A lot of people talk about having the right partners, but The Hartford views it differently from most,' says Gary Trippe, CEO of Fort Myers, Fla., propertycasualty agency Oswald, Trippe and Company, Inc. 'They look for partners who share their core values, and the relationship is based on trust and respect. It's all about compatibility.' Trippe should know. His\n\nagency writes three times as much business with The Hartford, in both personal and commercial lines, as it writes with any other insurer.\n\nMutually beneficial partnerships with successful businesses of all sizes are the foundation of The Hartford's business model.\n\nPerhaps no relationship represents shared values and shared success better than the one with AARP , which signed a new eight-year contract with The Hartford that began Jan. 1, 2002. The AARP insurance program with The Hartford is a model of affinity marketing and distribution savvy. AARP's membershipthose age 50 and over-is the fastest-growing segment of the U.S. population. Computer use among this group is growing by an estimated 20 percent per year, and the population segment respects established brands and seeks value, convenience and extraordinary service.\n\nThat right combination of factors helps make AARP's World Wide Web site one of The Hartford's\n\n13", + "recall": 0.8934010152284264, + "true_md": "“P artnering” is a popular business buzzword that may vanish as quickly as it appeared. The Hartford’s partner- ships, on the other hand, are built for the long term and have played a major role in the company’s growth and success. \n\nagency writes three times as much business with The Hartford, in both personal and commercial lines, as it writes with any other insurer. \n\nMutually beneficial partnerships with successful businesses of all sizes are the foundation of The Hartford’s business model. \n\nThe company enjoys outstanding partnerships with several of the world’s top asset managers. It also values its thousands of relationships with financial intermediaries such as large broker-dealers, banks and independent financial planners—and with affinity part- ners who extend The Hartford’s reach into large, grow- ing markets. \n\n“A lot of people talk about having the right part- ners, but The Hartford views it differently from most,” says Gary Trippe, CEO of Fort Myers, Fla., property- casualty agency Oswald, Trippe and Company, Inc. “They look for partners who share their core values, and the relationship is based on trust and respect. It’s all about compatibility.” Trippe should know. His\n\nPerhaps no relationship represents shared values and shared success better than the one with AARP, which signed a new eight-year contract with The Hartford that began Jan. 1, 2002. The AARP insurance program with The Hartford is a model of affinity mar- keting and distribution savvy. AARP’s membership— those age 50 and over—is the fastest-growing segment of the U.S. population. Computer use among this group is growing by an estimated 20 percent per year, and the population segment respects established brands and seeks value, convenience and extraordinary service.\n\nThat right combination of factors helps make AARP’s World Wide Web site one of The Hartford’s\n\n13\n\n## partners" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9110923214277289, + "doc_id": "876b2778dcb59ebfbbc9922bfb48359620eff6006a03e0c5c3bfc127953434e9", + "edit_distance": 0.304635761589404, + "f1_score": 0.9655172413793105, + "meteor": 0.9507594021964039, + "precision": 0.98, + "pred_md": "## we're serving up balanced business, sound governance, and great returns\n\n- > Our branded packaged foods and value-added protein products and services satisfy customers, build competitive advantage, balance the effects of changing raw materials markets, and contribute to steady, growing returns for our shareholders.\n\n14\n\nHormel Foods Corporation\n\n## returning steady, long-term growth\n\nOne of the best measures of our consistency is total return, which expresses the cumulative growth a shareholder experiences over time through stock appreciation and the growth of reinvested dividends. A 1999 investment of $100 in our common stock grew to $142 by 2004 - up 42 percent, compared with an 11 percent loss for the S&P 500 and 36 percent gain for the S&P Packaged Foods and Meats Index.", + "recall": 0.9514563106796117, + "true_md": "- > Our branded packaged foods and value-added protein products and services satisfy customers, build competitive advantage, balance the effects of changing raw materials markets, and contribute to steady, growing returns for our shareholders.\n\n14 Hormel Foods Corporation\n\nOne of the best measures of our consistency is total return, which expresses the cumulative growth a shareholder experi- ences over time through stock appreciation and the growth of reinvested dividends. A 1999 investment of $100 in our common stock grew to $142 by 2004 – up 42 percent, compared with an 11 percent loss for the S&P 500 and 36 percent gain for the S&P Packaged Foods and Meats Index.\n\n## returning steady, long-term growth\n\nwe’re serving up balanced business, sound governance, and great returns" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9764672549873267, + "doc_id": "f4934d70a227f4dca360af0215819e2c0fa43d7257ba3884362cb445a56cd199", + "edit_distance": 0.01984126984126984, + "f1_score": 0.9882352941176471, + "meteor": 0.9849057156255913, + "precision": 0.9905660377358491, + "pred_md": "SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## Note 4. Plant in Service\n\nPlant in service consists of the following at December 31:\n\n## Note 5. Long-Term Debt and Revolving Lines of Credit\n\nTotal debt consists of the following at December 31:\n\nThe RTB loans are payable $67 thousand monthly including interest. RUS loans are payable $4 thousand quarterly, including interest. The RUS and RTB loan facilities have maturities through 2019. The CoBank term facility requires monthly payments of $550 thousand, including interest. The final maturity of the CoBank facility is 2013.\n\nThe CoBank revolver was a $20.0 million facility, which the Company cancelled in May 2003 due to the receipt of the cash proceeds from the sale of the Virginia 10 RSA partnership interest.\n\nThe $2.5 million SunTrust Banks revolver was cancelled in May 2003. It was replaced in August 2003 with a SunTrust Bank Revolver facility of $0.5 million, which the Company uses to fund short-term liquidity variations due to the timing of customer receipts and vendor payments for services. This facility matures May 31, 2004, and is priced at the 30-day LIBOR rate plus 1.25%. The Company has not borrowed on this facility.\n\nSubstantially all of the Company's assets serve as collateral for the long-term debt. The Company's outstanding longterm CoBank debt is $37.4 million, all of which is at fixed rates ranging from approximately 6% to 8%. The stated rate excludes patronage credits that are received from CoBank. These patronage credits are a distribution of CoBank's profits, as it is a cooperative and is required to distribute its profits to its members. During the first quarter of 2003, the Company received patronage credits of approximately 60 basis points on its outstanding CoBank debt balance. The Company accrued a similar amount in the current year, in anticipation of the early 2004 distribution of the credits by CoBank. Repayment of the CoBank long-term debt facilities requires monthly payments on the debt through September 2013. The Company is required to meet financial covenants measured at the end of each quarter, based on a trailing 12-month basis and are calculated on continuing operations. At December 31, 2003, the covenant calculations were as follows. The ratio of total debt to operating cash flow, which must be 3.5 or lower, was 1.2. The equity to total assets ratio, which must be 35% or higher, was 57.3%. The ratio of operating cash flow to scheduled debt service, which must exceed 2.0, was 4.29. The Company was in compliance with all other covenants related to its debt agreements at December 31, 2003.\n\nSHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY\n\n26\n\n■", + "recall": 0.9859154929577465, + "true_md": "SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## Note 4. Plant in Service\n\nPlant in service consists of the following at December 31:\n\n## Note 5. Long-Term Debt and Revolving Lines of Credit\n\nTotal debt consists of the following at December 31:\n\nThe RTB loans are payable $67 thousand monthly including interest. RUS loans are payable $4 thousand quarterly, including interest. The RUS and RTB loan facilities have maturities through 2019. The CoBank term facility requires monthly payments of $550 thousand, including interest. The final maturity of the CoBank facility is 2013.\n\nThe CoBank revolver was a $20.0 million facility, which the Company cancelled in May 2003 due to the receipt of the cash proceeds from the sale of the Virginia 10 RSA partnership interest.\n\nThe $2.5 million SunTrust Banks revolver was cancelled in May 2003. It was replaced in August 2003 with a SunTrust Bank Revolver facility of $0.5 million, which the Company uses to fund short-term liquidity variations due to the timing of customer receipts and vendor payments for services. This facility matures May 31, 2004, and is priced at the 30-day LIBOR rate plus 1.25%. The Company has not borrowed on this facility.\n\nSubstantially all of the Company’s assets serve as collateral for the long-term debt. The Company’s outstanding long- term CoBank debt is $37.4 million, all of which is at fixed rates ranging from approximately 6% to 8%. The stated rate excludes patronage credits that are received from CoBank. These patronage credits are a distribution of CoBank’s profits, as it is a cooperative and is required to distribute its profits to its members. During the first quarter of 2003, the Company received patronage credits of approximately 60 basis points on its outstanding CoBank debt balance. The Company accrued a similar amount in the current year, in anticipation of the early 2004 distribution of the credits by CoBank. Repayment of the CoBank long-term debt facilities requires monthly payments on the debt through September 2013. The Company is required to meet financial covenants measured at the end of each quarter, based on a trailing 12-month basis and are calculated on continuing operations. At December 31, 2003, the covenant calculations were as follows. The ratio of total debt to operating cash flow, which must be 3.5 or lower, was 1.2. The equity to total assets ratio, which must be 35% or higher, was 57.3%. The ratio of operating cash flow to scheduled debt service, which must exceed 2.0, was 4.29. The Company was in compliance with all other covenants related to its debt agreements at December 31, 2003.\n\nSHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY ■ 26" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8938736442099514, + "doc_id": "fd97ccbbd93a4d2c1ac3e10a89b7eaef6c391524d77fbcefaca1c50320a7e158", + "edit_distance": 0.09281437125748503, + "f1_score": 0.9644670050761422, + "meteor": 0.9713893428839921, + "precision": 0.9644670050761421, + "pred_md": "and much more collaboration. The core engineering is common to all-that's why the different organizations can work together so closely, and why we're more efficient today. While each engineering center remains responsible for meeting the specific tastes or specifications that its local market demands, we have global oversight to ensure consistency, with NTC supervising overall resource management and facility investment.\n\nWe are building on these strengths through greater collaboration with our suppliers-our project partners-and doing it much further upstream. For example, we are creating a facility at the NATC where we can disclose our plans to suppliers during the very early planning stages. This means we have to be much more open than before, but in return we will gain a great deal from the ideas our partners bring.\n\nThe Alliance with Renault is another major strength for Nissan R&D. We identify areas of mutual interest and decide which party will develop specific projects. Our basic operating principle is to avoid duplicated efforts. We can work separately, or together if there is mutual interest in the development. For example, we have studied fuel-cell vehicles-FCVs-as well as, advanced materials, safety, and other areas together. Our shared goal is to maximize the benefits so we will rank among the top three entities in technology worldwide.\n\n## R&D Investment\n\n## Patent\n\n(xxxxxxx)\n\n## Research Paper\n\nThe number of research papers presented at JSME (The Japan Society of Mechanical Engineers), JSAE (The Society of Automotive Engineers of Japan), SAE (The Society of Automotive Engineers), FISITA (The International Federation of Automotive Engineering Societies)\n\nCARWINGS telematics system\n\nCARWINGS telematics system\n\nAluminum parts\n\nAluminum parts\n\nTesting at Nissan Advanced Crash Laboratory\n\nTesting at Nissan Advanced Crash Laboratory\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\n45\n\nOUR WORK", + "recall": 0.9644670050761421, + "true_md": "and much more collaboration. The core engineering is common to all—that’s why the different organizations can work together so closely, and why we’re more efficient today. While each engineering center remains responsible for meeting the specific tastes or specifications that its local market demands, we have global oversight to ensure consistency, with NTC supervising overall resource management and facility investment.\n\nWe are building on these strengths through greater collaboration with our suppliers—our project partners—and doing it much further upstream. For example, we are creating a facility at the NATC where we can disclose our plans to suppliers during the very early planning stages.\n\nThis means we have to be much more open than before, but in return we will gain a great deal from the ideas our partners bring. \n\nThe Alliance with Renault is another major strength for Nissan R&D. We identify areas of mutual interest and decide which party will develop specific projects. Our basic operating principle is to avoid duplicated efforts. We can work separately, or together if there is mutual interest in the development. For example, we have studied fuel-cell vehicles—FCVs—as well as, advanced materials, safety, and other areas together. Our shared goal is to maximize the benefits so we will rank among the top three entities in technology worldwide.\n\n## R&D Investment\n\n## Patent\n\n## Research Paper\n\nOUR WORK\n\nThe number of research papers presented at JSME (The Japan Society of Mechanical Engineers), JSAE (The Society of Automotive Engineers of Japan), SAE (The Society of Automotive Engineers), FISITA (The International Federation of Automotive Engineering Societies)\n\nTesting at Nissan Advanced Crash Laboratory\n\nCARWINGS telematics system\n\nAluminum parts\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 45" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7336754520823523, + "doc_id": "4030ad1b1839fff8207718e4679863a64bdd5718fb88c6ff18aa3eff14dc45cf", + "edit_distance": 0.25333333333333335, + "f1_score": 0.8876712328767125, + "meteor": 0.9173747672743167, + "precision": 0.8804347826086957, + "pred_md": "N O T E S T O C O N S O L I D A T E D F I N A N C I A L S T A T E M E N T S\n\n( C O N T I N U E D )\n\n## N E W A C C O U N T I N G P R O N O U N C E M E N T S\n\nIn December 2003, the Financial Accounting Standards Board issued a revised SFAS No. 132, 'Employers' Disclosures about Pensions and Other Postretirement Benefits.' SFAS No. 132 (as revised) revises employers' disclosures about pension plans and other postretirement benefit plans. It does not change the measurement or recognition of those plans required by SFAS Nos. 87, 88 and 106. SFAS No. 132 (as revised) requires additional disclosures to those in the original SFAS No. 132 and it also amends APB Opinion 28, 'Interim Financial Reporting,' to require certain disclosures about pension and other postretirement benefit plans in interim financial statements. SFAS No. 132 (as revised) is generally effective for financial statements with fiscal years ending after December 15, 2003. The Company has revised its disclosures in Note 11 to conform to this new pronouncement.\n\n## 2 G O O D W I L L A N D I N T A N G I B L E A S S E T S\n\nThe Company adopted SFAS No. 142 effective January 1, 2002, and has identified three reporting units where goodwill was recorded for purposes of testing goodwill impairment: (1) Atrion Medical Products (2) Halkey-Roberts and (3) Quest Medical. The Company completed an impairment analysis that revealed that the Quest Medical reporting unit was impaired, resulting in a write-down of goodwill in the first quarter of 2002 of $1.6 million, net of an income tax benefit of $845,000. The charge reflected a $2.5 million reduction in the goodwill resulting from the acquisition of Quest Medical in February 1998. The remaining goodwill asset balance for the Company totaled $9.7 million at December 31, 2003. The impairment loss was recorded as a cumulative effect of a change in accounting principle. Net income from continuing operations for the year 2001 adjusted as though the non-amortization provisions of SFAS No. 142 had been in effect at January 1, 2001, are as follows:\n\n14", + "recall": 0.8950276243093923, + "true_md": "NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (CONTINUED)\n\n## NEW ACCOUNTING PRONOUNCEMENTS\n\n## 2 GOODWILL AND INTANGIBLE ASSETS\n\nIn December 2003, the Financial Accounting Standards Board issued a revised SFAS No. 132, “Employers’ Disclosures about Pensions and Other Postretirement Benefits.” SFAS No. 132 (as revised) revises employers’ disclosures about pension plans and other postretirement benefit plans. It does not change the measurement or recognition of those plans required by SFAS Nos. 87, 88 and 106. SFAS No. 132 (as revised) requires additional disclosures to those in the original SFAS No. 132 and it also amends APB Opinion 28, “Interim Financial Reporting,” to require certain disclosures about pension and other postretirement benefit plans in interim financial statements. SFAS No. 132 (as revised) is generally effective for financial statements with fiscal years ending after December 15, 2003. The Company has revised its disclosures in Note 11 to conform to this new pronouncement.\n\nThe Company adopted SFAS No. 142 effective January 1, 2002, and has identified three reporting units where goodwill was recorded for purposes of testing goodwill impairment: (1) Atrion Medical Products (2) Halkey-Roberts and (3) Quest Medical. The Company completed an impairment analysis that revealed that the Quest Medical reporting unit was impaired, resulting in a write-down of goodwill in the first quarter of 2002 of $1.6 million, net of an income tax benefit of $845,000. The charge reflected a $2.5 million reduction in the goodwill resulting from the acquisition of Quest Medical in February 1998. The remaining goodwill asset balance for the Company totaled $9.7 million at December 31, 2003. The impairment loss was recorded as a cumulative effect of a change in accounting principle. Net income from continuing operations for the year 2001 adjusted as though the non-amortization provisions of SFAS No. 142 had been in effect at January 1, 2001, are as follows: \n\n14" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.019292453595918198, + "doc_id": "7c1fa2e7c81a81888c18eb95cfe37edb82a91dd340e75c8123618a6774081f2e", + "edit_distance": 0.7375730994152047, + "f1_score": 0.20725388601036274, + "meteor": 0.14918246873375976, + "precision": 0.12738853503184713, + "pred_md": "## glyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium> ˜'ÕÃÌÀˆ>Ê>˜'Ê-i“ˆVœ˜'ÕV̜À glyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium> >«ˆÌ>Êglyph<c=13,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium> µÕˆ«“i˜Ì\n\n->˜“ˆ˜>‡-glyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>Ê ˆÃÊ >Ê i>'ˆ˜}Êglyph<c=13,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=31,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>-Ê «ÀœÛˆ'iÀÊܜÀŽˆ˜}Ê܈̅Ê\"glyph<c=13,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=31,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>Ãʈ˜Ê̅iÊglyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>˜'ÕÃÌÀˆ>Ê>˜'Ê-i“ˆVœ˜'ÕV̜ÀÊglyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>>«ˆÌ>Êglyph<c=13,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>µÕˆ«“i˜Ìʈ˜'ÕÃÌÀˆið\n\n-ÕVViÃÃʈ˜Ê̅ˆÃʓ>ÀŽiÌÊ'iÀˆÛiÃÊvÀœ“ÊœÕÀÊiÝ«iÀ̈Ãiʈ˜Êvˆ“Ê'i«œÃˆÌˆœ˜]Ê«…œÌœˆÌ…œ}À>«…Þ]ʓ>ÎÊÀi“œÛ>]ʈœ˜Êˆ“«>˜Ì>̈œ˜]ÊÀ>«ˆ'Ê Êi“«iÀ>ÌÕÀiÊ«ÀœViÃȘ}]ʓiÌ>Ê'i«œÃˆÌˆœ˜]ÊV…i“ˆV>Ê“iV…>˜ˆV>Ê«>˜>Àˆâ>̈œ˜Ê>˜'ÊVi>˜ÊÀœœ“Ê“>˜Õv>VÌÕÀˆ˜}Ê«ÀœViÃÃiðÊglyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>ÃÊ>Ê Ì ÀiÃՏÌ]Ê->˜“ˆ˜>‡-glyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>ʈÃÊ̅iʜ˜ÞÊVœ“«>˜ÞÊV>«>LiʜvÊÃÕ««œÀ̈˜}ʅˆ}…Þ‡Vœ“«iÝ]ÊvՏÞ‡ˆ˜Ìi}À>Ìi'ʓ>V…ˆ˜iÀÞÊ̅>Ìʅ>ÃÊ>ÊÈ}˜ˆvˆV>˜ÌÊ ˜Õ“LiÀʜvÊ«>ÀÌÃÊ>˜'ÊVœ“«œ˜i˜ÌðÊ\"ÕÀÊvՏÞÊ'i'ˆV>Ìi']Ê}œL>ÊœÀ}>˜ˆâ>̈œ˜Ê>˜'ʈ˜'ÕÃÌÀÞÊiÝ«iÀ̈ÃiÊqÊiëiVˆ>Þʈ˜Ê'iÈ}˜]ÊÊ ÃÕ««ÞÊ V…>ˆ˜Ê“>˜>}i“i˜Ì]Ê«ÀiVˆÃˆœ˜Ê“>V…ˆ˜ˆ˜}Ê>˜'Ê>'Û>˜Vi'ÊV>LiÊ>˜'Êi˜VœÃÕÀiÊV>«>LˆˆÌˆiÃÊqʜvviÀÊVÕÃ̜“iÀÃÊ>ÊÊ Vœ“«Ài…i˜ÃˆÛi]Ê LiÃ̇ˆ˜‡V>ÃÃÊȘ}iÊÜÕÀViÊ܏Ṏœ˜°Êglyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>ÃÊ̅iʏi>'iÀʈ˜ÊLՈ'ˆ˜}ÊVœ“«iÝÊ«Àœ'ÕVÌÃʈ˜ÊœÜ‡VœÃÌÊÀi}ˆœ˜ÃÊ>ÀœÕ˜'Ê̅iÊܜÀ']Ê ->˜“ˆ˜>‡-glyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>Ê ˆÃÊ Õ˜ˆµÕiÞʵÕ>ˆvˆi'Ê̜ʅi«ÊœÕÀÊVÕÃ̜“iÀÃÊ>V…ˆiÛiÊVÀˆÌˆV>Ê̈“i‡Ìœ‡“>ÀŽiÌÊ'i“>˜'ÃÊ>˜'ÊV>«ˆÌ>ˆâiʜ˜Ê>˜Ê Ê Ý«>˜'ˆ˜}ʓ>ÀŽiÌʜ««œÀÌ՘ˆÌÞʈ˜Ê̅iʜÕÌÜÕÀVˆ˜}ʜvÊvՏÞ‡ˆ˜Ìi}À>Ìi'ʈ˜'ÕÃÌÀˆ>Ê>˜'ÊÃi“ˆVœ˜'ÕV̜ÀÊÃÞÃÌi“ð i\n\n£™\n\n-glyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman> glyph<c=31,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman> glyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>‡-glyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>", + "recall": 0.5555555555555556, + "true_md": "## ˜ ` Õ Ã Ì À ˆ >  Ê > ˜ ` Ê - i “ ˆ V œ ˜ ` Õ V Ì œ À > « ˆ Ì >  Ê µ Õ ˆ « “ i ˜ Ì\n\n- > ˜ “ ˆ ˜ > ‡ - Ê ˆ Ã Ê > Ê  i > ` ˆ ˜ } Ê - Ê « À œ Û ˆ ` i À Ê Ü œ À Ž ˆ ˜ } Ê Ü ˆ Ì … Ê \" Ã Ê ˆ ˜ Ê Ì … i Ê ˜ ` Õ Ã Ì À ˆ >  Ê > ˜ ` Ê - i “ ˆ V œ ˜ ` Õ V Ì œ À Ê > « ˆ Ì >  Ê µ Õ ˆ « “ i ˜ Ì Ê ˆ ˜ ` Õ Ã Ì À ˆ i à ° \n\n- Õ V V i Ã Ã Ê ˆ ˜ Ê Ì … ˆ Ã Ê “ > À Ž i Ì Ê ` i À ˆ Û i Ã Ê v À œ “ Ê œ Õ À Ê i Ý « i À Ì ˆ à i Ê ˆ ˜ Ê v ˆ  “ Ê ` i « œ à ˆ Ì ˆ œ ˜ ] Ê « … œ Ì œ  ˆ Ì … œ } À > « … Þ ] Ê “ > à Ž Ê À i “ œ Û >  ] Ê ˆ œ ˜ Ê ˆ “ «  > ˜ Ì > Ì ˆ œ ˜ ] Ê À > « ˆ ` Ê Ê Ì i “ « i À > Ì Õ À i Ê « À œ V i à à ˆ ˜ } ] Ê “ i Ì >  Ê ` i « œ à ˆ Ì ˆ œ ˜ ] Ê V … i “ ˆ V >  Ê “ i V … > ˜ ˆ V >  Ê «  > ˜ > À ˆ â > Ì ˆ œ ˜ Ê > ˜ ` Ê V  i > ˜ Ê À œ œ “ Ê “ > ˜ Õ v > V Ì Õ À ˆ ˜ } Ê « À œ V i à à i à ° Ê Ã Ê > Ê À i Ã Õ  Ì ] Ê - > ˜ “ ˆ ˜ > ‡ - Ê ˆ Ã Ê Ì … i Ê œ ˜  Þ Ê V œ “ « > ˜ Þ Ê V > « > L  i Ê œ v Ê Ã Õ « « œ À Ì ˆ ˜ } Ê … ˆ } …  Þ ‡ V œ “ «  i Ý ] Ê v Õ   Þ ‡ ˆ ˜ Ì i } À > Ì i ` Ê “ > V … ˆ ˜ i À Þ Ê Ì … > Ì Ê … > Ã Ê > Ê Ã ˆ } ˜ ˆ v ˆ V > ˜ Ì Ê ˜ Õ “ L i À Ê œ v Ê « > À Ì Ã Ê > ˜ ` Ê V œ “ « œ ˜ i ˜ Ì Ã ° Ê \" Õ À Ê v Õ   Þ Ê ` i ` ˆ V > Ì i ` ] Ê }  œ L >  Ê œ À } > ˜ ˆ â > Ì ˆ œ ˜ Ê > ˜ ` Ê ˆ ˜ ` Õ Ã Ì À Þ Ê i Ý « i À Ì ˆ à i Ê q Ê i à « i V ˆ >   Þ Ê ˆ ˜ Ê ` i à ˆ } ˜ ] Ê Ê Ã Õ « «  Þ Ê V … > ˆ ˜ Ê “ > ˜ > } i “ i ˜ Ì ] Ê « À i V ˆ à ˆ œ ˜ Ê “ > V … ˆ ˜ ˆ ˜ } Ê > ˜ ` Ê > ` Û > ˜ V i ` Ê V > L  i Ê > ˜ ` Ê i ˜ V  œ Ã Õ À i Ê V > « > L ˆ  ˆ Ì ˆ i Ã Ê q Ê œ v v i À Ê V Õ Ã Ì œ “ i À Ã Ê > Ê Ê V œ “ « À i … i ˜ à ˆ Û i ] Ê L i Ã Ì ‡ ˆ ˜ ‡ V  > Ã Ã Ê Ã ˆ ˜ }  i Ê Ã œ Õ À V i Ê Ã œ  Õ Ì ˆ œ ˜ ° Ê Ã Ê Ì … i Ê  i > ` i À Ê ˆ ˜ Ê L Õ ˆ  ` ˆ ˜ } Ê V œ “ «  i Ý Ê « À œ ` Õ V Ì Ã Ê ˆ ˜ Ê  œ Ü ‡ V œ Ã Ì Ê À i } ˆ œ ˜ Ã Ê > À œ Õ ˜ ` Ê Ì … i Ê Ü œ À  ` ] Ê - > ˜ “ ˆ ˜ > ‡ - Ê ˆ Ã Ê Õ ˜ ˆ µ Õ i  Þ Ê µ Õ >  ˆ v ˆ i ` Ê Ì œ Ê … i  « Ê œ Õ À Ê V Õ Ã Ì œ “ i À Ã Ê > V … ˆ i Û i Ê V À ˆ Ì ˆ V >  Ê Ì ˆ “ i ‡ Ì œ ‡ “ > À Ž i Ì Ê ` i “ > ˜ ` Ã Ê > ˜ ` Ê V > « ˆ Ì >  ˆ â i Ê œ ˜ Ê > ˜ Ê Ê i Ý « > ˜ ` ˆ ˜ } Ê “ > À Ž i Ì Ê œ « « œ À Ì Õ ˜ ˆ Ì Þ Ê ˆ ˜ Ê Ì … i Ê œ Õ Ì Ã œ Õ À V ˆ ˜ } Ê œ v Ê v Õ   Þ ‡ ˆ ˜ Ì i } À > Ì i ` Ê ˆ ˜ ` Õ Ã Ì À ˆ >  Ê > ˜ ` Ê Ã i “ ˆ V œ ˜ ` Õ V Ì œ À Ê Ã Þ Ã Ì i “ à ° \n\n£ ™ - ‡ -\n\nÀ œ “ Ê V œ ˜ V i « Ì Ê Ì œ Ê v Õ   Ê Ã Þ Ã Ì i “ Ê ` i Û i  œ « “ i ˜ Ì ] Ê - > ˜ “ ˆ ˜ > ‡ - Ê ` i  ˆ Û i À Ã Ê œ ˜ Ê V œ Ã Ì ] Ê µ Õ >  ˆ Ì Þ Ê > ˜ ` Ê Ì ˆ “ i ‡ Ì œ ‡ “ > À Ž i Ì °" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.661155510259177, + "doc_id": "99908d0419d9000658f35d77ec11a871c45e57740518cde1b608686f2587fb71", + "edit_distance": 0.7037037037037037, + "f1_score": 0.9393939393939394, + "meteor": 0.8341263645626462, + "precision": 0.9789473684210527, + "pred_md": "## 22. Investments in Controlled Entities (continued)\n\n## Notes\n\n## (a) Place of incorporation\n\nACT - Australian Capital Territory\n\nBER - Bermuda\n\nNSW - New South Wales\n\nMAL - Malaysia\n\nQLD - Queensland\n\nPNG - Papua New Guinea\n\nSA - South Australia\n\nSING - Singapore\n\nVIC - Victoria\n\nUK - United Kingdom\n\nWA - Western Australia\n\nUSA - United States of America\n\n## (b) Disposal of controlled entities\n\nDuring the financial year Santos Petroleum (NZ) Limited was removed from the New Zealand Companies Register.\n\n## (c) Acquisition of controlled entities\n\nDuring the financial year the following controlled entities were acquired and their operating results have been included in the statement of financial performance from the date of acquisition:\n\nThe financial impacts of the acquisitions on the Santos Group and the Company are summarised below:\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\n71", + "recall": 0.9029126213592233, + "true_md": "## 22. Investments in Controlled Entities (continued)\n\n## Notes\n\n## (a) Place of incorporation\n\n## (b) Disposal of controlled entities\n\n## (c) Acquisition of controlled entities\n\nDuring the financial year Santos Petroleum (NZ) Limited was removed fr om the New Zealand Companies Register.\n\nDuring the financial year the following controlled entities were acquired and their operating results have been included in the statement of financial performance from the date of acquisition:\n\nACT – Australian Capital Territory NSW – New South Wales QLD – Queensland SA – South Australia VIC – Victoria WA – Western Australia \n\nBER – Bermuda MAL – Malaysia PNG – Papua New Guinea SING – Singapore UK – United Ki ngdo m USA – United States o f America\n\nThe financial impacts of the acquisitions on the Santos Group and th e Company are summarised below:\n\nAnnual Report 2004 71" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9746758828442671, + "doc_id": "53f8e887e610c54e22e4f37bd6ca2ee74a4e50a61295f3b67dea28b7b753bfd2", + "edit_distance": 0.06818181818181818, + "f1_score": 0.9890710382513661, + "meteor": 0.9895986707913025, + "precision": 0.9890710382513661, + "pred_md": "SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## Note 1. Summary of Significant Accounting Policies (Continued)\n\nReclassifications: Certain amounts reported in the 2002 and 2001 financial statements have been reclassified to conform with the 2003 presentation, with no effect on net income or shareholders' equity.\n\n## Note 2. Discontinued Operations\n\nIn November 2002, the Company entered into an agreement to sell its 66% General Partner interest in the Virginia 10 RSA Limited Partnership (cellular operation) to Verizon Wireless for $37.0 million. The closing of the sale took place at the close of business on February 28, 2003. The total proceeds received were $38.7 million, including $5.0 million held in escrow, and a $1.7 million adjustment for estimated working capital at the time of closing. There was a post closing adjustment based on the actual working capital balance as of the closing date, which resulted in a $39 thousand charge for the Company. The $5.0 million escrow was established for any contingencies and indemnification issues that may arise during the two-year post-closing period and is included in deferred charges and other assets in the 2003 consolidated balance sheet. The Company's gain on the transaction was approximately $35 million. Post closing, the Company provided transition services to Verizon for a period of approximately three months, with compensation for those services being approximately $40 thousand per month during the transition period.\n\nThe assets and liabilities attributable to the cellular operation have been classified as held for sale in the consolidated balance sheets and consist of the following at December 31, 2002 and 2001:\n\nThe operations of the cellular partnership including the minority interest have been reclassified as discontinued operations, net of taxes in the consolidated statements of income for all periods presented. Operating results and the sale of the discontinued operations are summarized as follows:\n\n23\n\n2003 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n■", + "recall": 0.9890710382513661, + "true_md": "## Note 1. Summary of Significant Accounting Policies (Continued)\n\nReclassifications: Certain amounts reported in the 2002 and 2001 financial statements have been reclassified to conform with the 2003 presentation, with no effect on net income or shareholders’ equity.\n\n## Note 2. Discontinued Operations\n\nIn November 2002, the Company entered into an agreement to sell its 66% General Partner interest in the Virginia 10 RSA Limited Partnership (cellular operation) to Verizon Wireless for $37.0 million. The closing of the sale took place at the close of business on February 28, 2003. The total proceeds received were $38.7 million, including $5.0 million held in escrow, and a $1.7 million adjustment for estimated working capital at the time of closing. There was a post closing adjustment based on the actual working capital balance as of the closing date, which resulted in a $39 thousand charge for the Company. The $5.0 million escrow was established for any contingencies and indemnification issues that may arise during the two-year post-closing period and is included in deferred charges and other assets in the 2003 consolidated balance sheet. The Company’s gain on the transaction was approximately $35 million. Post closing, the Company provided transition services to Verizon for a period of approximately three months, with compensation for those services being approximately $40 thousand per month during the transition period.\n\nThe assets and liabilities attributable to the cellular operation have been classified as held for sale in the consolidated balance sheets and consist of the following at December 31, 2002 and 2001:\n\nThe operations of the cellular partnership including the minority interest have been reclassified as discontinued operations, net of taxes in the consolidated statements of income for all periods presented. Operating results and the sale of the discontinued operations are summarized as follows:\n\n23 ■ 2003 ANNUAL REPORT\n\nSHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.570282226440554, + "doc_id": "bf700f17151c2de64506d4831ffb43fe30fa9000409408cbd4ea6d9fc3375a08", + "edit_distance": 0.26666666666666666, + "f1_score": 0.7857142857142857, + "meteor": 0.7777973155149173, + "precision": 0.7857142857142857, + "pred_md": "## 12 ASX CORPORATE GOVERNANCE COUNCIL BEST PRACTICE RECOMMENDATIONS\n\nP\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\n35", + "recall": 0.7857142857142857, + "true_md": "- 12 ASX CORPORATE GOVERNANCE COUNCIL BEST PRACTICE RECOMMENDA TIONS\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\n35" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5275182094364111, + "doc_id": "9cf7ad21460ae62062ba33e7e0653b3a3a167f70355b3275655ab2e62e0ae929", + "edit_distance": 0.38181818181818183, + "f1_score": 0.8225806451612904, + "meteor": 0.6326946326321207, + "precision": 0.8225806451612904, + "pred_md": "## afkljdf aojvoaipdddd SEEKING I N V E S T O R S FOR A PERFECT MATCH\n\nJoin us in the dynamic, aggressive, profitable growth of HON INDUSTRIES.\n\nTHE BEST IS YET TO COME!\n\nManagement's Discussion and Analysis … 32 Consolidated Financial Statements and Notes … 39 Eleven-Year Summary … 56 Reports of Independent Auditors … 58 A Message from the Board of Directors … 61 Board of Directors and Officers … 62", + "recall": 0.8225806451612904, + "true_md": "## afkljdf aojvoaipdddd S E E K I N G I N V E S T O R S F O R A P E R F E C T M A T C H\n\nJoin us in the dynamic, aggressive, profitable growth of HON INDUSTRIES. \n\nT H E B E S T I S Y E T T O C O M E !\n\nManagement’s Discussion and Analysis … 32\n\nConsolidated Financial Statements and Notes … 39\n\nEleven-Year Summary … 56\n\nReports of Independent Auditors … 58\n\nA Message from the Board of Directors … 61\n\nBoard of Directors and Officers … 62" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "463ecf7b8e1e4c1722f2ab94761bfb78e20f4f008ef0eb71266b90233074ec8a", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999992407020165, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO AND FORMING PART OF THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR THE FINANCIAL YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2000\n\nThe revaluation of Leasehold buildings and improvements was performed on the basis of market value with reference to continued use and was not performed in accordance with a regular revaluation policy.\n\nAggregate depreciation is charged directly to the profit and loss account as disclosed in Note 2. Potential capital gains tax was not taken into account in the revaluation of leasehold buildings and improvements.\n\n45", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## NOTES TO AND FORMING PART OF THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR THE FINANCIAL YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2000\n\nThe revaluation of Leasehold buildings and improvements was performed on the basis of market value with reference to continued use and was not performed in accordance with a regular revaluation policy.\n\nAggregate depreciation is charged directly to the profit and loss account as disclosed in Note 2. Potential capital gains tax was not taken into account in the revaluation of leasehold buildings and improvements.\n\n45" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8408086076996117, + "doc_id": "86b74c4cb0a6926e4923090ca5d995f8961db6bc4abc994adfcdae2d22eb2a1f", + "edit_distance": 0.7142857142857143, + "f1_score": 0.9756097560975611, + "meteor": 0.8698741804004961, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "FINANCIAL SECTION\n\n88\n\n## Marketable other securities\n\nb) Sales of securities classified as other securities with aggregate gain and loss are summarized as follows:\n\nc) The redemption schedule for securities with maturity dates classified as other securities and held-to-maturity debt securities as of March 31, 2005 is summarized as follows:\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004", + "recall": 0.9523809523809523, + "true_md": "## Marketable other securities\n\nFINANCIAL SECTION\n\nc) The redemption schedule for securities with maturity dates classified as other securities and held-to-maturity debt securities as of March 31, 2005 is summarized as follows: Millions of yen\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 88\n\nb) Sales of securities classified as other securities with aggregate gain and loss are summarized as follows:" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6372066901696747, + "doc_id": "1f981b8374d8287941b74f82608bad578f0f65c2f258f5dc3b74c559e24f23bd", + "edit_distance": 0.4, + "f1_score": 0.8242424242424241, + "meteor": 0.8640371858963861, + "precision": 0.7727272727272727, + "pred_md": "The table immediately below sets out the total\n\nDI R E C TO R S ' R E P O R T\n\n## E X E C U T I V E O F F I C E R S ' R E M U N E R AT I O N\n\nremuneration of the three (3) highest remunerated executive officers of Mermaid during the Financial Year. These three (3) are the only executive officers who meet the disclosure criteria.\n\n- (i) 'Other' includes superannuation, provision of motor vehicles and related fringe benefits tax.\n\nSigned in accordance with a resolution of directors made pursuant to S.298(2) of the Corporations Law.\n\nOn behalf of the Directors\n\nAlan Birchmore\n\nChairman\n\nFremantle , 29 September 2000\n\n33", + "recall": 0.8831168831168831, + "true_md": "DIRECTORS’ REPORT\n\nThe table immediately below sets out the total remuneration of the three (3) highest remunerated executive officers of Mermaid during the Financial Year. These three (3) are the only executive officers who meet the disclosure criteria. EXECUTIVE OFFICERS’ REMUNERA TION\n\n- (i) ‘Other’ includes superannuation, provision of motor vehicles and related fringe benefits tax.\n\nSigned in accordance with a resolution of directors made pursuant to S.298(2) of the Corporations Law.\n\nOn behalf of the Directors\n\nAlan Birchmore Chairman\n\nFremantle , 29 September 2000\n\n33" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6177116217525991, + "doc_id": "3db090bf5ecdb9e29e8d97808ec527533b3aee36469344fe3b052cc1d1ee9fda", + "edit_distance": 0.3333333333333333, + "f1_score": 0.8372093023255814, + "meteor": 0.8778983276905714, + "precision": 0.782608695652174, + "pred_md": "## Consolidated Statements of Income\n\nFor the years ended December 31,\n\nFor additional information, see the Company's Annual Report on Form 10-K.\n\n32", + "recall": 0.9, + "true_md": "## Consolidated Statements of Income\n\nFor additional information, see the Company’s Annual Report on Form 10-K.\n\n32" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9705030294438127, + "doc_id": "61b1b96c92838d5870dac831905fd3094beeff5d5f784065b99ed847692100cb", + "edit_distance": 0.029259896729776247, + "f1_score": 0.9909255898366607, + "meteor": 0.9910537711215295, + "precision": 0.9927272727272727, + "pred_md": "OUR WORK\n\n46\n\n## Safety\n\nIn the area of safety, we have established Vision Zero, the goal of which is to reduce the number of fatal accidents to zero. As a reference point, we are using the number of such accidents in 1995 that involved Nissan vehicles. We realize that accidents cannot be completely avoided, so our objective is to be substantially zero in the future. To achieve this, we have set a series of milestones, including cutting the 1995 fatal accident figure in half by 2015.\n\nInterestingly, while the number of fatal ones is decreasing, the number of all accidents in Japan is increasing. Our first goal is to decrease the overall accident count, which should further reduce the number of fatalities. Several factors contribute to accidents, including driver inexperience and higher speeds. Based on these factors, we came up with the approach of Safety Shield. Safety Shield establishes a timeline for the entire accident, covering the safe driving zone, the moment before the accident, the actual crash, the response time by authorities, and the time taken for post-accident rescue.\n\nIn the past, safety technology primarily focused on dealing with damage in and around the vehicle, such as airbags, body structure design, seatbelts and crumple zones. Now we are studying normal driving conditions and researching how we can keep car and driver in the safe driving zone. In cases where the driving environment becomes unsafe, some type of warning would usually help the driver to return to the safe driving zone. A driver actually in danger has probably lost control of the car. In the latter\n\ncases, we must focus on safety technologies that prompt the vehicle itself to automatically assist the driver. An example of this is Nissan's Lane Departure Prevention system or brake assist: When the vehicle approaches the lane markers, this system not only warns the driver to pay attention through a display and an audible buzzer, it also generates part of the necessary yaw movement needed to return the vehicle to its lane and safety.\n\nAnother Nissan safety innovation is the Around View Monitor. This system offers a 360-degree view on a dashboard display of what is around the vehicle. In addition to significantly reducing the blind spots in driving, the Around View Monitor is helpful when parking, since it improves the driver's field of vision and enables better maneuverability.\n\nIn developing safety technologies, we also look at the conditions that exist seconds before an unavoidable crash. With this information, we can provide technologies to minimize the impact and damage in addition to notifying the authorities and calling for assistance afterward. Because we are building on actual accident data, the final stage in the Safety Shield involves collecting and analyzing the data and feeding what we learn back into the development process. We have committed ourselves to introducing over ten new safety technologies during the next three years, spanning the entire driving range from the safe driving zone to the actual crash.\n\nFor more on safety at Nissan, please see the 2005 Nissan Sustainability Report\n\nSafety Shield-concept image\n\nSafety Shield-concept image\n\nAround View Monitor\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004", + "recall": 0.9891304347826086, + "true_md": "## Safety\n\nIn the area of safety, we have established Vision Zero, the goal of which is to reduce the number of fatal accidents to zero. As a reference point, we are using the number of such accidents in 1995 that involved Nissan vehicles. We realize that accidents cannot be completely avoided, so our objective is to be substantially zero in the future. To achieve this, we have set a series of milestones, including cutting the 1995 fatal accident figure in half by 2015. \n\nInterestingly, while the number of fatal ones is decreasing, the number of all accidents in Japan is increasing. Our first goal is to decrease the overall accident count, which should further reduce the number of fatalities. Several factors contribute to accidents, including driver inexperience and higher speeds. Based on these factors, we came up with the approach of Safety Shield. Safety Shield establishes a timeline for the entire accident, covering the safe driving zone, the moment before the accident, the actual crash, the response time by authorities, and the time taken for post-accident rescue.\n\nOUR WORK\n\nIn the past, safety technology primarily focused on dealing with damage in and around the vehicle, such as airbags, body structure design, seatbelts and crumple zones. Now we are studying normal driving conditions and researching how we can keep car and driver in the safe driving zone. In cases where the driving environment becomes unsafe, some type of warning would usually help the driver to return to the safe driving zone. A driver actually in danger has probably lost control of the car. In the latter\n\ncases, we must focus on safety technologies that prompt the vehicle itself to automatically assist the driver. An example of this is Nissan’s Lane Departure Prevention system or brake assist: When the vehicle approaches the lane markers, this system not only warns the driver to pay attention through a display and an audible buzzer, it also generates part of the necessary yaw movement needed to return the vehicle to its lane and safety.\n\nAnother Nissan safety innovation is the Around View Monitor. This system offers a 360-degree view on a dashboard display of what is around the vehicle. In addition to significantly reducing the blind spots in driving, the Around View Monitor is helpful when parking, since it improves the driver’s field of vision and enables better maneuverability. \n\nIn developing safety technologies, we also look at the conditions that exist seconds before an unavoidable crash. With this information, we can provide technologies to minimize the impact and damage in addition to notifying the authorities and calling for assistance afterward. Because we are building on actual accident data, the final stage in the Safety Shield involves collecting and analyzing the data and feeding what we learn back into the development process. We have committed ourselves to introducing over ten new safety technologies during the next three years, spanning the entire driving range from the safe driving zone to the actual crash.\n\nFor more on safety at Nissan, please see the 2005 Nissan\n\nSustainability Report\n\nAround View Monitor\n\nSafety Shield—concept image\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 46" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6718308846133677, + "doc_id": "cf6c95da4f056ad63a8d9df92828bf400dbffed601cf2c3832cf890b7a3898ce", + "edit_distance": 0.31010452961672474, + "f1_score": 0.8497854077253217, + "meteor": 0.8935837067133723, + "precision": 0.8389830508474576, + "pred_md": "N O T E S T O C O N S O L I D A T E D F I N A N C I A L S T A T E M E N T S ( C O N T I N U E D )\n\n## E M P L O Y E E R E T I R E M E N T A N D B E N E F I T P L A N S\n\nA noncontributory defined benefit retirement plan is maintained for all regular employees of the Company except those of Quest Medical. This plan was amended effective January 1, 1998 to become a cash balance pension plan. The Company's funding policy is to make the annual contributions required by applicable regulations and recommended by its actuary. The Company uses a December 31 measurement date for the plan.\n\nThe changes in the plan's projected benefit obligation ('PBO') as of December 31, 2003 and 2002 are as follows (in thousands):\n\nIn December 2002, the plan was amended to reduce benefit accruals for future service by plan participants by approximately 50 percent. This amendment caused a reduction in the PBO of approximately $616,000, and is reflected as a reduction in pension expense over the estimated employee service lives.\n\nThe changes in the fair value of plan assets, funded status of the plan and the status of the prepaid pension benefit recognized, which is included in the Company's balance sheets as of December 31, 2003 and 2002 are as follows (in thousands):\n\n20", + "recall": 0.8608695652173913, + "true_md": "NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (CONTINUED)\n\n## 11 EMPLOYEE RETIREMENT AND BENEFIT PLANS\n\nA noncontributory defined benefit retirement plan is maintained for all regular employees of the Company except those of Quest Medical. This plan was amended effective January 1, 1998 to become a cash balance pension plan. The Company’s funding policy is to make the annual contributions required by applicable regulations and recommended by its actuary. The Company uses a December 31 measurement date for the plan.\n\nThe changes in the plan’s projected benefit obligation (“PBO”) as of December 31, 2003 and 2002 are as follows (in thousands):\n\nIn December 2002, the plan was amended to reduce benefit accruals for future service by plan participants by approximately 50 percent. This amendment caused a reduction in the PBO of approximately $616,000, and is reflected as a reduction in pension expense over the estimated employee service lives. \n\nThe changes in the fair value of plan assets, funded status of the plan and the status of the prepaid pension benefit recognized, which is included in the Company’s balance sheets as of December 31, 2003 and 2002 are as follows (in thousands):\n\n20" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6704756906869254, + "doc_id": "2271fdca260e8f64f1e6a2101a4e2795a24ccbba3366933e665e8319253614bf", + "edit_distance": 0.5182481751824818, + "f1_score": 0.8879668049792532, + "meteor": 0.7566132832692318, + "precision": 0.8106060606060606, + "pred_md": "## Financial Highlights\n\ndollar amounts in millions except per-share data\n\n*Free cash flow consists of cash provided by operating activities less purchases of property and equipment plus proceeds from the sale of property and equipment.\n\nIn Billions of Dollars\n\nIn Billions of Dollars\n\n## Corporate Office\n\n## Stockholder Relations & Inquiries\n\n## Independent Certified\n\nRepublic Services, Inc. 110 SE 6th Street, Suite 2800 Fort Lauderdale, Florida 33301 Phone: (954) 769-2400 www.republicservices.com\n\nInvestor Relations Republic Services, Inc. 110 SE 6th Street, Suite 2800 Fort Lauderdale, Florida 33301 Phone: (954) 769-3616\n\nINCOME BEFORE CUMULATIVE EFFECT OF CHANGES IN ACCOUNTING PRINCIPLES In Millions of Dollars\n\nINCOME BEFORE CUMULATIVE EFFECT OF CHANGES IN ACCOUNTING PRINCIPLES In Millions of Dollars\n\nDILUTED EARNINGS PER SHARE BEFORE CUMULATIVE EFFECT OF CHANGES IN ACCOUNTING PRINCIPLES In Dollars\n\nDILUTED EARNINGS PER SHARE BEFORE CUMULATIVE EFFECT OF CHANGES IN ACCOUNTING PRINCIPLES In Dollars\n\n## Common Stock Transfer & Agent Registrar\n\n## Public Accountants\n\nErnst & Young LLP First Fort Lauderdale Place 100 NE 3rd Avenue, Suite 700 Fort Lauderdale, Florida 33301\n\nWachovia Bank, NA 1525 West W.T. Harris Boulevard Charlotte, North Carolina 28288-1153 Phone: (800) 829-8432\n\n## Notice of Annual Meeting\n\nThe Annual Meeting of Stockholders of Republic Services, Inc. will be held at 10:30 a.m., May 12, 2005, at 110 SE 6th Street, 7th Floor Atrium, Fort Lauderdale, Florida 33301\n\nIn Millions of Dollars\n\nSTOCKHOLDERS' EQUITY\n\nIn Billions of Dollars", + "recall": 0.981651376146789, + "true_md": "dollar amounts in millions except per-share data\n\n## Financial Highlights\n\n*Free cash flow consists of cash provided by operating activities less purchases of property and equipment plus proceeds from the sale of property and equipment.\n\nCorporate Office Republic Services, Inc. 110 SE 6th Street, Suite 2800 Fort Lauderdale, Florida 33301 Phone: (954) 769-2400 www.republicservices.com\n\nStockholder Relations & Inquiries Investor Relations Republic Services, Inc. 110 SE 6th Street, Suite 2800 Fort Lauderdale,Florida 33301 Phone: (954) 769-3616\n\nNotice of Annual Meeting The Annual Meeting of Stockholders of Republic Services, Inc. will be held at 10:30 a.m., May 12, 2005, at 110 SE 6th Street, 7th Floor Atrium, Fort Lauderdale, Florida 33301\n\nPublic Accountants Ernst & Young LLP First Fort Lauderdale Place 100 NE 3rd Avenue, Suite 700 Fort Lauderdale, Florida 33301\n\nAgent Registrar Wachovia Bank, NA 1525 West W.T. Harris Boulevard Charlotte, North Carolina 28288-1153 Phone: (800) 829-8432\n\n## Notice of Annual Meeting The Annual Meeting of Stockholders of Republic Services, Inc. will be held at 10:30 a.m., May 12, 2005,\n\n## Corporate Office Republic Services, Inc.\n\n## Stockholder Relations & Inquiries Investor Relations\n\n## IndependentCertified Public Accountants Ernst & Young LLP\n\n## CommonStockTransfer & Agent Registrar Wachovia Bank, NA" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.11318741602028208, + "doc_id": "7176779e74d9d157dc6b06cbeea95c173141b58c8f4167d92a628115dd2b2707", + "edit_distance": 0.8378378378378378, + "f1_score": 0.375, + "meteor": 0.6578144078144079, + "precision": 0.23076923076923078, + "pred_md": "## Consolidated Net Revenue\n\n(Billion Yen)\n\n## Consolidated Operating Profit/Margin\n\n(Billion Yen/%)\n\n290\n\n## Global Retail Sales\n\n(Units: 1000s)\n\n2,633\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\n7\n\nPERFORMANCE", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Nissan Annual Report 2004 7\n\nPERFORMANCE" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8761919405209823, + "doc_id": "9709012b6557cbc10a7ecdbcb551cf6861286935a5d2af91c0b2d379f5941162", + "edit_distance": 0.1096433289299868, + "f1_score": 0.9149277688603531, + "meteor": 0.9186956594302448, + "precision": 0.9563758389261745, + "pred_md": "## HON INDUSTRIES Inc. and SUBSIDIARIES\n\nThe Company has contingent liabilities, which have arisen in the course of its business, including pending litigation, preferential payment claims in customer bankruptcies, environmental remediation, taxes, and other claims. The Company currently has a claim for approximately $7.6 million pending against it, arising out of the bankruptcy of a customer filed in 2001. The Company was named a critical vendor by the bankruptcy court and, accordingly, was paid in full for all outstanding receivables. The claim alleges that the Company received preferential payments from the customer during the ninety days before the customer filed for bankruptcy protection. The claim was brought in February 2003. The Company has recorded an accrual with respect to this contingency, in an amount substantially less than the full amount of the claim, which represents the best estimate within the range of likely exposure, and intends to vigorously defend against the claim. Given the nature of this claim, it is possible that the ultimate outcome could differ from the recorded amount.\n\n## Significant Customer\n\nOne office furniture customer accounted for approximately 13% of consolidated net sales in 2003 and 14% in 2002 and 2001.\n\n## Operating Segment Information\n\nIn accordance with SFAS No. 131, 'Disclosures about Segments of an Enterprise and Related Information,' management views the Company as being in two operating segments: office furniture and hearth products, with the former being the principal segment. The office furniture segment manufactures and markets a broad line of metal and wood commercial and home office furniture, which includes storage products, desks, credenzas, chairs, tables, bookcases, freestanding office partitions and panel systems, and other related products. The hearth products segment manufactures and markets a broad line of manufactured gas-, pellet-, and wood-burning fireplaces and stoves, fireplace inserts, gas logs, and chimney systems, principally for the home.\n\nThe Company's hearth products segment is somewhat seasonal, with the third (July-September) and fourth (October-December) fiscal quarters historically having higher sales than the prior quarters. In fiscal 2003, 56% of consolidated net sales of hearth products were generated in the third and fourth quarters.\n\nFor purposes of segment reporting, intercompany sales transfers between segments are not material, and operating profit is income before income taxes exclusive of certain unallocated corporate expenses. These unallocated corporate expenses include the net costs of the Company's corporate operations, interest income, and interest\n\nexpense. Management views interest income and expense as corporate financing costs and not as an operating segment cost. In addition, management applies an effective income tax rate to its consolidated income before income taxes so income taxes are not reported or viewed internally on a segment basis. Identifiable assets by segment are those assets applicable to the respective industry segments. Corporate assets consist principally of cash and cash equivalents, short-term investments, and corporate office real estate and related equipment.\n\nNo geographic information for revenues from external customers or for long-lived assets is disclosed, since the Company's primary market and capital investments are concentrated in the United States.\n\nReportable segment data reconciled to the consolidated financial statements for the years ended 2003, 2002, and 2001 is as follows:\n\n(a) Included in operating profit for the office furniture segment are pretax charges of $8.5 million, $3.0 million, and $22.5 million for closing of facilities and impairment charges in 2003, 2002, and 2001, respectively. Included in operating profit for the hearth products segment is a pretax charge of $1.5 million for closing of facilities and impairment charges in 2001.\n\n(b) In 2002 the Company's information technologies departments became a shared service at the corporate level. The costs continue to be charged out to the segments; however, the assets and related depreciation are now classified as general corporate.\n\n53", + "recall": 0.8769230769230769, + "true_md": "H O N I N D U S T R I E S I n c . a n d S U B S I D I A R I E S\n\nThe Company has contingent liabilities, which have arisen in the course of its business, including pending litigation, preferential payment claims in customer bankruptcies, environmental remediation, taxes, and other claims. The Company currently has a claim for approx- imately $7.6 million pending against it, arising out of the bankruptcy of a customer filed in 2001. The Company was named a critical vendor by the bankruptcy court and, accordingly, was paid in full for all out- standing receivables. The claim alleges that the Company received preferential payments from the customer during the ninety days before the customer filed for bankruptcy protection. The claim was brought in February 2003. The Company has recorded an accrual with respect to this contingency, in an amount substantially less than the full amount of the claim, which represents the best estimate within the range of likely exposure, and intends to vigorously defend against the claim. Given the nature of this claim, it is possible that the ultimate outcome could differ from the recorded amount.\n\nOne office furniture customer accounted for approximately 13% of con- solidated net sales in 2003 and 14% in 2002 and 2001.\n\nIn accordance with SFAS No. 131, “Disclosures about Segments of an Enterprise and Related Information,” management views the Company as being in two operating segments: office furniture and hearth prod- ucts, with the former being the principal segment. The office furniture segment manufactures and markets a broad line of metal and wood commercial and home office furniture, which includes storage prod- ucts, desks, credenzas, chairs, tables, bookcases, freestanding office partitions and panel systems, and other related products. The hearth products segment manufactures and markets a broad line of manufac- tured gas-, pellet-, and wood-burning fireplaces and stoves, fireplace inserts, gas logs, and chimney systems, principally for the home.\n\nThe Company’s hearth products segment is somewhat sea- sonal, with the third (July-September) and fourth (October-December) fiscal quarters historically having higher sales than the prior quarters. In fiscal 2003, 56% of consolidated net sales of hearth products were generated in the third and fourth quarters.\n\nFor purposes of segment reporting, intercompany sales transfers between segments are not material, and operating profit is income before income taxes exclusive of certain unallocated corporate expenses. These unallocated corporate expenses include the net costs of the Company’s corporate operations, interest income, and interest \n\nexpense. Management views interest income and expense as corporate financing costs and not as an operating segment cost. In addition, man- agement applies an effective income tax rate to its consolidated income before income taxes so income taxes are not reported or viewed inter- nally on a segment basis. Identifiable assets by segment are those assets applicable to the respective industry segments. Corporate assets consist principally of cash and cash equivalents, short-term investments, and corporate office real estate and related equipment.\n\nNo geographic information for revenues from external cus- tomers or for long-lived assets is disclosed, since the Company’s primary market and capital investments are concentrated in the United States.\n\nReportable segment data reconciled to the consolidated finan- cial statements for the years ended 2003, 2002, and 2001 is as follows:\n\n(a) Included in operating profit for the office furniture segment are pretax charges of $8.5 million, $3.0 million, and $22.5 million for closing of facilities and impairment charges in 2003, 2002, and 2001, respectively. Included in operating profit for the hearth products segment is a pretax charge of $1.5 million for closing of facilities and impairment charges in 2001.\n\n(b) In 2002 the Company’s information technologies departments became a shared service at the corporate level. The costs continue to be charged out to the segments; however, the assets and related depreciation are now classified as general corporate.\n\n53\n\n## Significant Customer\n\n## Operating Segment Information" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8870885707088578, + "doc_id": "9d4adf53bb63ea36ecb068d4bd30092c0150b5ee5e05ba97d914397468c7bee3", + "edit_distance": 0.36363636363636365, + "f1_score": 0.9613733905579399, + "meteor": 0.8953426199786411, + "precision": 0.9696969696969697, + "pred_md": "## Electronic payment solutions span prepaid distribution gap\n\nNew, sophisticated electronic payment solutions are providing multiple customer touchpoints for replenishing prepaid mobile airtime.\n\nrepaid service has become one of the fastest growing segments of the mobile phone market, enticing more and more consumers to become mobile phone clients. Recharge services are now appealing to mobile subscribers as an easy, convenient and flexible billing alternative. P\n\nThe mobile phone market is enormous in Europe with 300 million subscribers, 1 where today as many as 57% of all mobile phone activations are prepaid. 2 In the United States, analysts expect an upsurge in the number of prepaid mobile subscribers to 34 million by 2003. 3\n\nOne of the biggest challenges for mobile operators is to distribute mobile airtime to their customers. In many markets, the predominant recharge method for consumers still involves purchasing minutes via plastic or paper scratch-off cards. Euronet ® Electronic ReCharge provides a secure, less costly alternative to traditional scratch-off cards with four electronic recharge solutions for mobile operators. Subscribers may purchase additional prepaid airtime in one step over their mobile handset, at a POS terminal, over the Internet or at any ATM operated by any financial institution.\n\nOur growing list of ReCharge clients now includes EuroTel in the Czech Republic, Pannon GSM in Hungary and VIPnet in Croatia. In Poland, Euronet dominates the market, providing ReCharge services to all three mobile operators: Plus GSM, ERA GSM and Centertel. Through a strategic alliance with Gemplus, the world's number one provider of smart card-based solutions, Euronet's expanding suite of mobile payment solutions will be promoted to GSM mobile operators around the world.\n\nPannon GSM, Hungary\n\nConvenient Prepaid Mobile Solutions\n\nPannon, one of the largest GSM mobile phone service compa-\n\nnies in Hungary, now offers the convenience of purchasing prepaid mobile phone airtime at Euronet ATMs throughout the country. Up to 70% of Pannon's more than 1.2 million customers subscribe to prepaid services.\n\n'We are astonished by our customers' Tamás Tus, Sales Manager, Pannon GSM.\n\nresponse to Euronet's ReCharge service,' says 'Sales have dramatically exceeded our expectations. And our customers love the convenience and ease-of-use. What a success!'\n\nAs the popularity of prepaid mobile airtime services continues to increase, the need for cost-effective electronic distibution methods becomes more and more critical to mobile operators. W e believe that our ReCharge product line has unlimited global opportunities.\n\n1 GSM World (February 2001), Business Wire (October 2000), The Yankee Group (1999) 2 3\n\n9", + "recall": 0.9531914893617022, + "true_md": "## Electronic payment solutions span prepaid distribution gap\n\n## Pannon GSM, Hungary\n\n## Convenient Prepaid Mobile Solutions\n\n1 GSM World (February 2001), 2 Business Wire (October 2000), 3 The Yankee Group (1999)\n\n9\n\nNew, sophisticated electronic payment solutions are providing multiple customer touchpoints for replenishing prepaid mobile airtime.\n\nrepaid service has become one of the fastest growing segments of the mobile phone market, enticing more and more consumers to become mobile phone clients. Recharge services are now appealing to mobile subscribers as an easy, convenient and flexible billing alternative. P\n\nThe mobile phone market is enormous in Europe with 300 million subscribers, 1 where today as many as 57% of all mobile phone activations are prepaid. 2 In the United States, analysts expect an upsurge in the number of prepaid mobile subscribers to 34 million by 2003. 3\n\nOne of the biggest challenges for mobile operators is to distribute mobile airtime to their customers. In many markets, the predominant recharge method for consumers still involves purchasing minutes via plastic or paper scratch-off cards. Euronet ® Electronic ReCharge provides a secure, less costly alternative to traditional scratch-off cards with four electronic recharge solutions for mobile operators. Subscribers may purchase additional prepaid airtime in one step over their mobile handset, at a POS terminal, over the Internet or at any ATM operated by any financial institution. \n\nOur growing list of ReCharge clients now includes EuroTel in the Czech Republic, Pannon GSM in Hungary and VIPnet in Croatia. In Poland, Euronet dominates the market, providing ReCharge services to all three mobile operators: Plus GSM, ERA GSM and Centertel. Through a strategic alliance with Gemplus, the world’s number one provider of smart card-based solutions, Euronet’s expanding suite of mobile payment solutions will be promoted to GSM mobile operators around the world.\n\nAs the popularity of prepaid mobile airtime services continues to increase, the need for cost-effective electronic distibution methods becomes more and more critical to mobile operators. We believe that our ReCharge product line has unlimited global opportunities.\n\nPannon, one of the largest GSM mobile phone service compa-\n\nnies in Hungary, now offers the convenience of purchasing prepaid mobile phone airtime at Euronet ATMs throughout the country. Up to 70% of Pannon’s more than 1.2 million cus- tomers subscribe to prepaid services.\n\n“We are astonished by our customers’ response to Euronet’s ReCharge service,” says Tamás Tus, Sales Manager, Pannon GSM. “Sales have dramatically exceeded our expec- tations. And our customers love the conve- nience and ease-of-use. What a success!”" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9015800609240596, + "doc_id": "c87dd926044c3e8cbbaa459193102089a0edc34228d46a085484c58394415937", + "edit_distance": 0.5074946466809421, + "f1_score": 0.9549902152641878, + "meteor": 0.8669240742908321, + "precision": 0.9682539682539683, + "pred_md": "I NDUSTRY TRENDS SPOTLIGHT\n\n## Connecting innovation with bottom-line results through outsourcing\n\nBanks and retailers are accelerating the adoption of outsourcing as a way to increase operational efficiency, gain competitive advantage and create shareholder value.\n\nith the explosive growth of banking technologies and delivery channels, outsourcing the management and processing of financial transactions is fast becoming a worldwide phenomenon. Outsourcing enables companies to free up human resources and financial W\n\ncapital to focus on their core competencies.\n\nCitibank Greece Fast Track for ATM Outsourcing\n\nCitibank Greece Fast Track for ATM Outsourcing\n\nA long-term agreement with Citibank N.A. to deploy and operate 250\n\nATMs in Greece now makes Euronet the largest independent provider of ATM outsourcing services in the country. With this comprehensive agreement, Citibank is launching its first ATM program in Greece. With record speed and efficiency, Euronet has provided complete ATM site identification and operating services for the ATMs.\n\n'Outsourcing ATM deployment and management enables Citibank to control the quality and costs of this distribution channel without committing our own management resources,' says Chris Vasilliades, Citibank Vice President.\n\nBanks and retailers are embracing the outsourcing advantage, chiefly to achieve bottom-line reductions on direct and indirect costs. As a longterm strategy, outsourcing also affords companies immediate access to cutting-edge technology and the ability to leverage specialized expertise through outside suppliers and vendors.\n\nForbes magazine calls outsourcing 'the wave of the future,' and analysts forecast that by 2003 outsourcing in the banking and finance sector will total $91 billion in Europe and nearly $240 billion in the US. 1\n\nEuronet Worldwide continues to focus on complete end-to-end outsourcing solutions to help financial institutions bring together complex technologies and to further enhance the value of ATMs and web-based banking and transaction applications. Our cost-efficient outsourcing services enable any transaction-oriented business to deliver seamless, real-time transactions and event notifications via a state-of-the-art processing infrastructure.\n\nEuronet's growing portfolio of outsourcing clients includes large global banks such as ABN AMRO, Citibank, ING Bank, GE Capital and Deutsche Bank; major regional financial institutions such as Raiffeisenbank, Banco Comercial Português (BCP) and Bank Austria/Creditanstalt; and retailers in the US such as the Dillard's Department Store chain and Saks Incorporated.\n\nOutsourcing provides real value for banks and retailers seeking ways to drive efficiencies within their operations. With the staggering potential of new markets worldwide, we believe that leveraging our infrastructure and networks to deliver quality ATM, mobile and Internet banking solutions on an outsource basis is key to our strategy for growth.\n\n1 INPUT (March 2000)\n\n8", + "recall": 0.9420849420849421, + "true_md": "INDUSTRY TRENDS SPOTLIGHT\n\n## Connecting innovation with bottom-line results through outsourcing\n\n## Citibank Greece\n\nBanks and retailers are accelerating the adoption of outsourcing as a way to increase operational efficiency, gain competitive advantage and create shareholder value.\n\nith the explosive growth of banking technologies and delivery channels, outsourcing the management and processing of financial transactions is fast becoming a worldwide phenomenon. Outsourcing enables companies to free up human resources and financial capital to focus on their core competencies. W\n\nBanks and retailers are embracing the outsourcing advantage, chiefly to achieve bottom-line reductions on direct and indirect costs. As a long- term strategy, outsourcing also affords companies immediate access to cutting-edge technology and the ability to leverage specialized expertise through outside suppliers and vendors.\n\nForbes magazine calls outsourcing “the wave of the future,” and analysts forecast that by 2003 outsourcing in the banking and finance sector will total $91 billion in Europe and nearly $240 billion in the US. 1\n\nEuronet Worldwide continues to focus on complete end-to-end outsourc- ing solutions to help financial institutions bring together complex technologies and to further enhance the value of ATMs and web-based banking and transaction applications. Our cost-efficient outsourcing services enable any transaction-oriented business to deliver seamless, real-time transactions and event notifications via a state-of-the-art processing infrastructure.\n\nEuronet’s growing portfolio of outsourcing clients includes large global banks such as ABN AMRO, Citibank, ING Bank, GE Capital and Deutsche Bank; major regional financial institutions such as Raiffeisenbank, Banco Comercial Português (BCP) and Bank Austria/Creditanstalt; and retailers in the US such as the Dillard’s Department Store chain and Saks Incorporated. \n\nOutsourcing provides real value for banks and retailers seeking ways to drive efficiencies within their operations. With the staggering potential of new markets worldwide, we believe that leveraging our infrastructure and networks to deliver quality ATM, mobile and Internet banking solutions on an outsource basis is key to our strategy for growth.\n\nFast Track for ATM Outsourcing\n\nA long-term agreement with Citibank N.A. to deploy and operate 250\n\nATMs in Greece now makes Euronet the largest independent provider of ATM out- sourcing services in the country. With this comprehensive agreement, Citibank is launching its first ATM program in Greece. With record speed and efficiency, Euronet has provided complete ATM site identifica- tion and operating services for the ATMs. \n\n“Outsourcing ATM deployment and manage- ment enables Citibank to control the quality and costs of this distribution channel without committing our own management resources,” says Chris Vasilliades, Citibank Vice President. \n\n1 INPUT (March 2000)\n\n8" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9327895866284401, + "doc_id": "60f89620784fc8fc6802e93f41355d992fa708e31d1639b1b06bb2a37bd2155d", + "edit_distance": 0.11331679073614558, + "f1_score": 0.9761570827489482, + "meteor": 0.945651840967333, + "precision": 0.96398891966759, + "pred_md": "on the Company's ATM network. In addition, the Company continues to invest in the on-going development of products that were re c e n t l y i roduced to the market. The Company's re s e a rch and development costs incurred for computer products to be sold, leased or otherw i s e nt marketed increased to $6.7 million for the year ended December 31, 2000 from $3.2 million for the year ended December 31, 1999. Of this total f i g u e, $1.0 million and $322,000 were capitalized, as at December 31, 2000 and 1999, re s p e c t i v e l y, in conjunction with the Company's r accounting policy requiring the capitalization of development costs on a product by product basis once technological feasibility is established. Technological feasibility of computer software products is established when the Company has completed all planning, designing, coding, and testing activities that are necessary to establish that the product can be produced to meet its design specifications including functions, feature s , and technical perf o rmance re q u i rements.\n\nOperating Loss The Software Solutions Segment incurred an operating loss of $21.5 million for the year ended December 31, 2000 and $7.1 million for the year ended December 31, 1999 as a result of the factors discussed above\n\n## Corporate Services Segment\n\nOperating Expenses Operating expenses for the Corporate Services Segment increased to $7.9 million for the year ended December 31, 2000 f rom $6.8 million for the year ended December 31, 1999. The components of corporate services operating costs for the years ended December 31, 2000 and 1999 were:\n\nThe Company's expansion of its network infrastru c t u re, and increases in corporate and administrative capabilities are the primary reasons for these i eased expenditures. ncr\n\n## Non-Operating Results for the Years Ended December 31, 2000 and 1999\n\nInterest Income I n est income decreased to $1.1 million for the year ended December 31, 2000 from $2.0 million for the year ended December ter 31, 1999 and from $2.5 million for the year ended December 31, 1998. The decrease is the result of the decrease in investment securities and cash as a result of negative cash flow from operations and capital expenditure s .\n\nInterest Expense I n est expense decreased to $10.8 million for the year ended December 31, 2000 from $10.9 million for the year ended ter December 31, 1999 and increased from $7.8 million for the year ended December 31, 1998. The decrease from 1999 to 2000 is due to exchange rate diff e rences as the majority of the debt is denominated in Deutsche Mark. The increase from 1998 to 1999 is the result of accretion of the C o m p a s Notes Payable for a full year in 1999 in comparison to 6 months' accretion in 1998. ny'\n\nForeign Exchange Gain/Loss The Company had a net foreign exchange loss of $3.2 million for the year ended December 31, 2000, as c o m p a ed to $2.1 million for the year ended December 31, 1999, and $1.9 million for the year ended December 31, 1998. Exchange gains and r losses that result from re - m e a s u rement of certain Company assets and liabilities are re c o rded in determining net loss. A portion of the assets and liabilities of the Company are denominated in Euros, including capital lease obligations, notes payable (including the Notes issued in the C o m p a s public bond offering), cash and cash equivalents, investments, and forw a rd foreign exchange contracts. It is the Company's policy to ny' attempt to match local currency receivables and payables. The foreign currency denominated assets and liabilities give rise to foreign exchange gains and losses as a result of U.S. dollar to local currency exchange movements.\n\nExtraordinary Gain In 1999 the Company re c o rded an extraord i n a ry gain of $2.8 million (net of income taxes of $0) following its re p u rchase of a portion of its Senior Discount Notes. The gain re p resents the diff e rence between the allocated carrying value of the face value of the debt re p chased of $8.1 million less the consideration paid of $5.0 million, offset by the write-off of allocated unamortized deferred financing costs of ur $300,000. The Company has not re t i red the bonds re p u rchased.\n\nIn addition, the Company re p u rchased 97,023 warrants that were attached to the notes payable. Accord i n g l y, approximately $176,000 was allocated to the carrying value of the warrants which reduced additional paid-in capital.\n\nIn 1998 the Company re c o rded an extraord i n a ry gain of $2.9 million (net of income taxes of $1.5 million), following its re p u rchase of a portion of its Senior Discount Notes. The gain re p resents the diff e rence between the allocated carrying value of the face value of the debt re p u rchased of $10.2 million less the consideration paid of $5.5 million, offset by the write-off of allocated unamortized deferred financing costs of $400,000. The Company has not re t i red the bonds re p u rchased.\n\nNet Loss The Company's net loss increased to $49.6 million for the year ended December 31, 2000, as compared to $30.9 million for the year ended December 31, 1999 and $28.4 million for the year ended December 31, 1998, as a result of the factors discussed above.\n\n## LI Q U ID I T Y A N D CA P I A L T RE S O U R C E S\n\nSince its inception, the Company has sustained negative cash flows from operations and has financed its operations and capital expenditure s primarily through the proceeds from the 1998 issue of Deutsche Mark denominated notes payable, the Company's 1997 public equity off e r i n g , equipment lease financing and private placements of equity securities. The net proceeds of such transactions, together with revenues fro m operations and interest income have been used to fund aggregate net losses of approximately $123.8 million, investments in pro p e rt y, plant and equipment of approximately $52.8 million and acquisitions of $24.6 million.\n\n1 9", + "recall": 0.9886363636363636, + "true_md": "on the Company’s ATM network. In addition, the Company continues to invest in the on-going development of products that were re c e n t l y i n t roduced to the market. The Company’s re s e a rch and development costs incurred for computer products to be sold, leased or otherw i s e marketed increased to $6.7 million for the year ended December 31, 2000 from $3.2 million for the year ended December 31, 1999. Of this total f i g u re, $1.0 million and $322,000 were capitalized, as at December 31, 2000 and 1999, re s p e c t i v e l y, in conjunction with the Company’s accounting policy requiring the capitalization of development costs on a product by product basis once technological feasibility is established. Technological feasibility of computer software products is established when the Company has completed all planning, designing, coding, and testing activities that are necessary to establish that the product can be produced to meet its design specifications including functions, feature s , and technical perf o rmance re q u i rements. \n\nOperating Loss The Software Solutions Segment incurred an operating loss of $21.5 million for the year ended December 31, 2000 and $7.1 million for the year ended December 31, 1999 as a result of the factors discussed above\n\nOperating Expenses Operating expenses for the Corporate Services Segment increased to $7.9 million for the year ended December 31, 2000 f rom $6.8 million for the year ended December 31, 1999. The components of corporate services operating costs for the years ended December 31, 2000 and 1999 were: \n\nThe Company’s expansion of its network infrastru c t u re, and increases in corporate and administrative capabilities are the primary reasons for these i n c reased expenditures. \n\nInterest Income I n t e rest income decreased to $1.1 million for the year ended December 31, 2000 from $2.0 million for the year ended December 31, 1999 and from $2.5 million for the year ended December 31, 1998. The decrease is the result of the decrease in investment securities and cash as a result of negative cash flow from operations and capital expenditure s .\n\nInterest Expense I n t e rest expense decreased to $10.8 million for the year ended December 31, 2000 from $10.9 million for the year ended December 31, 1999 and increased from $7.8 million for the year ended December 31, 1998. The decrease from 1999 to 2000 is due to exchange rate diff e rences as the majority of the debt is denominated in Deutsche Mark. The increase from 1998 to 1999 is the result of accretion of the C o m p a n y ’s Notes Payable for a full year in 1999 in comparison to 6 months’ accretion in 1998. \n\nForeign Exchange Gain/Loss The Company had a net foreign exchange loss of $3.2 million for the year ended December 31, 2000, as c o m p a red to $2.1 million for the year ended December 31, 1999, and $1.9 million for the year ended December 31, 1998. Exchange gains and losses that result from re - m e a s u rement of certain Company assets and liabilities are re c o rded in determining net loss. A portion of the assets and liabilities of the Company are denominated in Euros, including capital lease obligations, notes payable (including the Notes issued in the C o m p a n y ’s public bond offering), cash and cash equivalents, investments, and forw a rd foreign exchange contracts. It is the Company’s policy to attempt to match local currency receivables and payables. The foreign currency denominated assets and liabilities give rise to foreign exchange gains and losses as a result of U.S. dollar to local currency exchange movements.\n\nExtraordinary Gain In 1999 the Company re c o rded an extraord i n a ry gain of $2.8 million (net of income taxes of $0) following its re p u rchase of a portion of its Senior Discount Notes. The gain re p resents the diff e rence between the allocated carrying value of the face value of the debt re p u rchased of $8.1 million less the consideration paid of $5.0 million, offset by the write-off of allocated unamortized deferred financing costs of $300,000. The Company has not re t i red the bonds re p u rchased. \n\nIn addition, the Company re p u rchased 97,023 warrants that were attached to the notes payable. Accord i n g l y, approximately $176,000 was allocated to the carrying value of the warrants which reduced additional paid-in capital. \n\nIn 1998 the Company re c o rded an extraord i n a ry gain of $2.9 million (net of income taxes of $1.5 million), following its re p u rchase of a portion of its Senior Discount Notes. The gain re p resents the diff e rence between the allocated carrying value of the face value of the debt re p u rchased of $10.2 million less the consideration paid of $5.5 million, offset by the write-off of allocated unamortized deferred financing costs of $400,000. The Company has not re t i red the bonds re p u rchased. \n\nNet Loss The Company’s net loss increased to $49.6 million for the year ended December 31, 2000, as compared to $30.9 million for the year ended December 31, 1999 and $28.4 million for the year ended December 31, 1998, as a result of the factors discussed above. \n\nSince its inception, the Company has sustained negative cash flows from operations and has financed its operations and capital expenditure s primarily through the proceeds from the 1998 issue of Deutsche Mark denominated notes payable, the Company’s 1997 public equity off e r i n g , equipment lease financing and private placements of equity securities. The net proceeds of such transactions, together with revenues fro m operations and interest income have been used to fund aggregate net losses of approximately $123.8 million, investments in pro p e rt y, plant and equipment of approximately $52.8 million and acquisitions of $24.6 million. \n\n1 9\n\n## LI Q U I D I T Y A N D CA P I TA L RE S O U R C E S\n\n## Non-Operating Results for the Years Ended December 31, 2000 and 1999\n\n## Corporate Services Segment" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9131620705246845, + "doc_id": "9ad92c50a25f00023f74b6e262d18872b01d978fb1e56866b324083ab25e021a", + "edit_distance": 0.11044776119402985, + "f1_score": 0.9814814814814815, + "meteor": 0.9646964450170746, + "precision": 0.9814814814814815, + "pred_md": "54\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n## NOTE 4 - ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE, NET\n\n## Accounts receivable consisted of the following:\n\n## NOTE 5 - PROPERTY AND EQUIPMENT, NET\n\nProperty and equipment consisted of the following:\n\n## NOTE 6 - INVESTMENTS IN UNCONSOLIDATED AFFILIATES\n\nThe Company has investments in unconsolidated affiliates accounted for under the equity method. Under the equity method, carrying value is adjusted for the Company's share of the investees' earnings and losses, as well as capital\n\ncontributions to and distributions from these companies. Investments in unconsolidated affiliates consisted of the following:\n\nThe Company's investments in Monte Carlo and Borgata were recorded at their estimated fair value at the date of the Mirage Acquisition, which value exceeded the Company's share of the net assets of the unconsolidated affiliates by approximately $361 million. Substantially all of this difference relates to the excess of the fair value of land owned by the affiliates over its pre-existing carrying value. The investment balance also includes interest capitalized on the Borgata investment, which is being amortized over 40 years.\n\nThe Company also owns 50% of The Residences at MGM Grand, along with Turnberry Associates. As of December 31, 2004, the Company has a negative investment balance of $3 million, recorded as other long-term liabilities in the accompanying consolidated balance sheet, representing cumulative losses on the venture. In July 2004, the Company contributed land to The Residences at MGM Grand for construction of the first tower. The equity credit of $9 million is greater than the $1 million previous book value of the land, and the $8 million gain has been deferred until the earnings process is complete, which will occur when The Residences at MGM Grand recognizes revenue on the sale of the first tower's units.", + "recall": 0.9814814814814815, + "true_md": "54\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n## NOTE 4 — ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE, NET\n\n## NOTE 5 — PROPERTY AND EQUIPMENT, NET\n\n## NOTE 6 — INVESTMENTS IN UNCONSOLIDATED AFFILIATES\n\nAccounts receivable consisted of the following:\n\nProperty and equipment consisted of the following:\n\nThe Company has investments in unconsolidated affiliates accounted for under the equity method. Under the equity method, carrying value is adjusted for the Company’s share of the investees’ earnings and losses, as well as capital \n\ncontributions to and distributions from these companies. Investments in unconsolidated affiliates consisted of the following:\n\nThe Company’s investments in Monte Carlo and Borgata were recorded at their estimated fair value at the date of the Mirage Acquisition, which value exceeded the Company’s share of the net assets of the unconsolidated affiliates by approximately $361 million. Substantially all of this difference relates to the excess of the fair value of land owned by the affiliates over its pre-existing carrying value. The investment balance also includes interest capitalized on the Borgata investment, which is being amortized over 40 years.\n\nThe Company also owns 50% of The Residences at MGM Grand, along with Turnberry Associates. As of December 31, 2004, the Company has a negative investment balance of $3 million, recorded as other long-term liabilities in the accompanying consolidated balance sheet, representing cumulative losses on the venture. In July 2004, the Company contributed land to The Residences at MGM Grand for construction of the first tower. The equity credit of $9 million is greater than the $1 million previous book value of the land, and the $8 million gain has been deferred until the earnings process is complete, which will occur when The Residences at MGM Grand recognizes revenue on the sale of the first tower’s units." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8149915117073744, + "doc_id": "698480a445b4ff9edd220abd4c4d25c83ffc992a477e6305c958123511b12920", + "edit_distance": 0.2222222222222222, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9976851851851852, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "consolidated statements of\n\n## financial position\n\nSee notes to consolidated financial statements.\n\n2004 Annual Report\n\n31", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## consolidated statements of financial position\n\nSee notes to consolidated financial statements.\n\n2004 Annual Report 31" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "b4f5d430d89499474a31f39fe8eb615fdcd7aa682eb0b959a0384206d5c8174c", + "edit_distance": 0.7905172413793103, + "f1_score": 0.26595744680851063, + "meteor": 0.1377246998908524, + "precision": 0.17482517482517482, + "pred_md": "£È\n\n-glyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman> glyph<c=31,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman> glyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>‡-glyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>\n\n## glyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium> ÕÌ œ“œÌˆÛi\n\n7ˆÌ…Ê“œÀiÊ̅>˜ÊÓäÊÞi>ÀÃÊiÝ«iÀˆi˜ViÊ«>À̘iÀˆ˜}Ê܈̅ʏi>'ˆ˜}ʈ˜ÌiÀ˜>̈œ˜>Ê>Õ̜“œÌˆÛiÊ\"glyph<c=13,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=31,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>Ã]Ê->˜“ˆ˜>‡-glyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>ʜvviÀÃÊ>Ê Ê œ“«Ài…i˜ÃˆÛiÊ«œÀÌvœˆœÊœvʓ>˜Õv>VÌÕÀˆ˜}ÊÃiÀۈViÃÊvœÀÊ>Õ̜“œÌˆÛiÊiiVÌÀœ˜ˆVÃÊ>˜'Ê>Õ̜“œÌˆÛiÊVœ“«œ˜i˜ÌÃ°Ê V\n\nglyph<c=31,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman> > ˜Õv>VÌÕÀˆ˜}ÊvœÀÊ̅iÊ>Õ̜“œÌˆÛiʈ˜'ÕÃÌÀÞÊÀiµÕˆÀiÃÊ̅iʓœÃÌÊ>'Û>˜Vi'ÊÌiV…˜œœ}ˆiÃ]ÊLiÃÌʓ>ÌiÀˆ>Ã]Ê>˜'ʓœÃÌÊ>'Û>˜Vi'Ê Ê “>˜Õv>VÌÕÀˆ˜}Ê«ÀœViÃÃiÃÊ>˜'ʵÕ>ˆÌÞÊÃÞÃÌi“ðÊ->˜“ˆ˜>‡-glyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>ʘœÌʜ˜ÞʜvviÀÃÊܜÀ'‡V>ÃÃʓ>˜Õv>VÌÕÀˆ˜}Ê܏Ṏœ˜ÃÊ̜Ê̅iÊ Ê Õ̜“œÌˆÛiʈ˜'ÕÃÌÀÞ]ÊLÕÌÊ«ÀœÛˆ'iÃÊ'iÈ}˜Ê>˜'Êi˜}ˆ˜iiÀˆ˜}ÊÃiÀۈViÃÊ«ÀœÛi˜Ê̜ʓˆ˜ˆ“ˆâiÊVœÃÌÊ>˜'ÊÀi'ÕViÊ̈“i‡Ìœ‡“>ÀŽiÌ° >\n\n*ÕÃ]Ê->˜“ˆ˜>‡-glyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>ʅ>ÃÊiÝ«iÀˆi˜Viʈ˜Ê*Àœ'ÕV̈œ˜Ê*>ÀÌÊglyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>««ÀœÛ>Ê*ÀœViÃÃiÃÊ­**glyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>*î]Ê*ÀœViÃÃÊglyph<c=19,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>>ˆÕÀiÊglyph<c=31,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>œ'iÊEÊglyph<c=13,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>vviVÌÃÊglyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>˜>ÞÈÃÊ ­*glyph<c=19,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=31,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman> glyph<c=13,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman> glyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman> ®Ê>˜'Êglyph<c=19,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>>ˆÕÀiÊglyph<c=31,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>œ'iÊ EÊglyph<c=13,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>v viVÌÃÊ glyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman> ˜>ÞÈÃÊ ­ glyph<c=19,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=31,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=13,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman> glyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman> ® °Ê 7iÊ >ÃœÊ ÃÕ««œÀ ÌÊ œÕÀÊ VÕÃ̜“iÀ ÃÊ ˆ˜Ê>V…ˆiۈ˜}ÊVœ“«ˆ>˜ViÊ܈̅Ê̅iÊ glyph<c=13,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>Õ À œ «i>˜Ê,œglyph<c=21,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>-Ê ­ ,iÃÌÀˆV̈œ˜ÊœvÊglyph<c=21,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>> â>À'œÕÃÊ-ÕLÃÌ>˜ViîÊ>˜'Ê7glyph<c=13,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=13,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=13,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>Ê­ 7>ÃÌiʜvÊglyph<c=13,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>iVÌÀˆV>Ê>˜'Êglyph<c=13,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>iVÌÀœ˜ˆVÊglyph<c=13,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>µÕˆ«“i˜Ì®Êi}ˆÃ>̈œ˜Ã°Ê", + "recall": 0.5555555555555556, + "true_md": "## Õ Ì œ “ œ Ì ˆ Û i\n\n7 ˆ Ì … Ê “ œ À i Ê Ì … > ˜ Ê Ó ä Ê Þ i > À Ã Ê i Ý « i À ˆ i ˜ V i Ê « > À Ì ˜ i À ˆ ˜ } Ê Ü ˆ Ì … Ê  i > ` ˆ ˜ } Ê ˆ ˜ Ì i À ˜ > Ì ˆ œ ˜ >  Ê > Õ Ì œ “ œ Ì ˆ Û i Ê \" à ] Ê - > ˜ “ ˆ ˜ > ‡ - Ê œ v v i À Ã Ê > Ê Ê V œ “ « À i … i ˜ à ˆ Û i Ê « œ À Ì v œ  ˆ œ Ê œ v Ê “ > ˜ Õ v > V Ì Õ À ˆ ˜ } Ê Ã i À Û ˆ V i Ã Ê v œ À Ê > Õ Ì œ “ œ Ì ˆ Û i Ê i  i V Ì À œ ˜ ˆ V Ã Ê > ˜ ` Ê > Õ Ì œ “ œ Ì ˆ Û i Ê V œ “ « œ ˜ i ˜ Ì Ã ° Ê \n\n> ˜ Õ v > V Ì Õ À ˆ ˜ } Ê v œ À Ê Ì … i Ê > Õ Ì œ “ œ Ì ˆ Û i Ê ˆ ˜ ` Õ Ã Ì À Þ Ê À i µ Õ ˆ À i Ã Ê Ì … i Ê “ œ Ã Ì Ê > ` Û > ˜ V i ` Ê Ì i V … ˜ œ  œ } ˆ i à ] Ê L i Ã Ì Ê “ > Ì i À ˆ >  à ] Ê > ˜ ` Ê “ œ Ã Ì Ê > ` Û > ˜ V i ` Ê Ê “ > ˜ Õ v > V Ì Õ À ˆ ˜ } Ê « À œ V i à à i Ã Ê > ˜ ` Ê µ Õ >  ˆ Ì Þ Ê Ã Þ Ã Ì i “ à ° Ê - > ˜ “ ˆ ˜ > ‡ - Ê ˜ œ Ì Ê œ ˜  Þ Ê œ v v i À Ã Ê Ü œ À  ` ‡ V  > Ã Ã Ê “ > ˜ Õ v > V Ì Õ À ˆ ˜ } Ê Ã œ  Õ Ì ˆ œ ˜ Ã Ê Ì œ Ê Ì … i Ê Ê > Õ Ì œ “ œ Ì ˆ Û i Ê ˆ ˜ ` Õ Ã Ì À Þ ] Ê L Õ Ì Ê « À œ Û ˆ ` i Ã Ê ` i à ˆ } ˜ Ê > ˜ ` Ê i ˜ } ˆ ˜ i i À ˆ ˜ } Ê Ã i À Û ˆ V i Ã Ê « À œ Û i ˜ Ê Ì œ Ê “ ˆ ˜ ˆ “ ˆ â i Ê V œ Ã Ì Ê > ˜ ` Ê À i ` Õ V i Ê Ì ˆ “ i ‡ Ì œ ‡ “ > À Ž i Ì ° \n\n*  Õ Ã ] Ê - > ˜ “ ˆ ˜ > ‡ - Ê … > Ã Ê i Ý « i À ˆ i ˜ V i Ê ˆ ˜ Ê * À œ ` Õ V Ì ˆ œ ˜ Ê * > À Ì Ê « « À œ Û >  Ê * À œ V i à à i Ã Ê ­ * * * à ® ] Ê * À œ V i Ã Ã Ê > ˆ  Õ À i Ê œ ` i Ê E Ê v v i V Ì Ã Ê ˜ >  Þ Ã ˆ Ã Ê ­ * ® Ê > ˜ ` Ê > ˆ  Õ À i Ê œ ` i Ê E Ê v v i V Ì Ã Ê ˜ >  Þ Ã ˆ Ã Ê ­ ® ° Ê 7 i Ê >  à œ Ê Ã Õ « « œ À Ì Ê œ Õ À Ê V Õ Ã Ì œ “ i À Ã Ê ˆ ˜ Ê > V … ˆ i Û ˆ ˜ } Ê V œ “ «  ˆ > ˜ V i Ê Ü ˆ Ì … Ê Ì … i Ê Õ À œ « i > ˜ Ê , œ - Ê ­ , i Ã Ì À ˆ V Ì ˆ œ ˜ Ê œ v Ê > â > À ` œ Õ Ã Ê - Õ L Ã Ì > ˜ V i à ® Ê > ˜ ` Ê 7 Ê ­ 7 > Ã Ì i Ê œ v Ê  i V Ì À ˆ V >  Ê > ˜ ` Ê  i V Ì À œ ˜ ˆ V Ê µ Õ ˆ « “ i ˜ Ì ® Ê  i } ˆ à  > Ì ˆ œ ˜ à ° Ê \n\n£ È - ‡ -\n\n\" Õ À Ê “ > ˜ Õ v > V Ì Õ À i ` Ê « À œ ` Õ V Ì Ã Ê ˆ ˜ V  Õ ` i Ê 6 Ê V œ “ « œ ˜ i ˜ Ì Ã Ê ­ … i > Ì i À Ê > ˜ ` Ê L  œ Ü i À Ê “ œ ` Õ  i à ® ] Ê > ˜ ` Ê V À > à … Ê > Û œ ˆ ` > ˜ V i Ê > ˜ ` Ê Ê Õ  Ì À > à œ ˜ ˆ V Ê « > À Ž ˆ ˜ } Ê ` i Û ˆ V i à °" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9498492903396949, + "doc_id": "7e28077d3e6ffcaba1d9d7b18394a688a8927072e94ce0cdb2cd378e4502efb1", + "edit_distance": 0.04878048780487805, + "f1_score": 0.9609929078014183, + "meteor": 0.9730759788583849, + "precision": 0.9818840579710145, + "pred_md": "from by-products created from the processing and not used in producing company products. The company has developed a series of ratios using historical data and current market conditions (which themselves involve estimates and judgment determinations by the company) to allocate the meat cost pool to each meat component. In addition, substantially all inventoriable expenses, meat, packaging, and supplies are valued by the last-in, first-out method.\n\nGoodwill and other intangibles: The company's identifiable intangible assets are amortized over their useful life, unless the useful life is determined to be indefinite. The useful life of an identifiable intangible asset is based on an analysis of several factors including: contractual, regulatory, or legal obligations; demand; competition; and industry trends. Goodwill and indefinite-lived intangible assets are not amortized, but are tested at least annually for impairment.\n\nThe goodwill impairment test is a two-step process. First, the fair value of each reporting unit is compared with the carrying amount of the reporting unit, including goodwill. The estimated fair value of the reporting unit is determined on the basis of discounted cash flow. If the carrying value exceeds the fair value of the reporting unit, then a second step must be completed in order to determine the amount of goodwill impairment that should be recorded. In the second step, the implied fair value of the reporting unit's goodwill is determined by allocating the reporting unit's fair value to all of its assets and liabilities, other than goodwill, in a manner similar to a purchase price allocation. The implied fair value of the goodwill resulting from the application of this second step is then compared to the carrying amount of the goodwill and an impairment charge is recorded for the difference. Annual impairment testing for indefinite-lived intangible assets compares the fair value and carrying value of the intangible. The fair value of indefinite-lived intangible assets is determined on the basis of discounted cash flows. If the carrying value exceeds the fair value, the indefinite-lived intangible asset is considered impaired and an impairment charge is recorded for the difference. Intangible assets that are subject to amortization are evaluated for impairment using a process similar to that used to evaluate elements of long-lived assets.\n\nThe assumptions used in the estimate of fair value are consistent with historical performance and the estimates and assumptions used in determining future profit plans for each reporting unit. The company reviews product growth patterns, market share information, industry trends, changes in distribution channels, and economic indicators in determining the estimates and assumptions used to develop cash flow and profit plan assumptions.\n\nAccrued promotional expenses: Accrued promotional expenses are unpaid liabilities for customer promotional programs in process or completed as of the end of the fiscal year. There are two components to these liabilities: promotional contractual accruals and voluntary performance accruals. Promotional contractual accruals are based on agreements with customers for defined performance.\n\nThe liability relating to these agreements is based on a review of the outstanding contracts on which performance has taken place, but for which the promotional payments relating to such contracts remain unpaid as of the end of the fiscal year. Voluntary performance accruals are funded through customer purchases and are based on historical promotional expenditure rates by product line. Significant estimates used to determine these liabilities include the level of customer performance and the historical promotional expenditure rate versus contracted rates.\n\nEmployee benefit plans: The company incurs expenses relating to employee benefits such as noncontributory defined benefit pension plans and postretirement health care benefits. In accounting for these employment costs, management must make a variety of assumptions and estimates including mortality rates, discount rates, overall company compensation increases, expected return on plan assets, and health care cost trend rates. The company considers historical data, as well as current facts and circumstances, when determining these estimates. The company uses third-party specialists to assist management in the determination of these estimates and the calculation of certain employee benefit expenses.\n\n## Results of Operations\n\n## Overview\n\nThe company is a processor of branded and unbranded food products for the retail, foodservice, and fresh customer markets. The company operates in the following five segments:\n\n2004 Annual Report\n\n17", + "recall": 0.9409722222222222, + "true_md": "from by-products created from the processing and not used in pro- ducing company products. The company has developed a series of ratios using historical data and current market conditions (which themselves involve estimates and judgment determinations by the company) to allocate the meat cost pool to each meat component. In addition, substantially all inventoriable expenses, meat, packag- ing, and supplies are valued by the last-in, first-out method.\n\nGoodwill and other intangibles: The company’s identifiable intangible assets are amortized over their useful life, unless the useful life is determined to be indefinite. The useful life of an iden- tifiable intangible asset is based on an analysis of several factors including: contractual, regulatory, or legal obligations; demand; competition; and industry trends. Goodwill and indefinite-lived intangible assets are not amortized, but are tested at least annually for impairment.\n\nThe goodwill impairment test is a two-step process. First, the fair value of each reporting unit is compared with the carrying amount of the reporting unit, including goodwill. The estimated fair value of the reporting unit is determined on the basis of discounted cash flow. If the carrying value exceeds the fair value of the reporting unit, then a second step must be completed in order to determine the amount of goodwill impairment that should be recorded. In the second step, the implied fair value of the reporting unit’s goodwill is determined by allocating the reporting unit’s fair value to all of its assets and liabilities, other than goodwill, in a manner similar to a purchase price allocation. The implied fair value of the goodwill resulting from the application of this second step is then compared to the carrying amount of the goodwill and an impairment charge is recorded for the difference. Annual impairment testing for indefi- nite-lived intangible assets compares the fair value and carrying value of the intangible. The fair value of indefinite-lived intangible assets is determined on the basis of discounted cash flows. If the carry- ing value exceeds the fair value, the indefinite-lived intangible asset is considered impaired and an impairment charge is recorded for the difference. Intangible assets that are subject to amortization are evaluated for impairment using a process similar to that used to evaluate elements of long-lived assets.\n\nThe assumptions used in the estimate of fair value are consistent with historical performance and the estimates and assumptions used in determining future profit plans for each reporting unit. The company reviews product growth patterns, market share information, industry trends, changes in distribution channels, and economic indicators in determining the estimates and assumptions used to develop cash flow and profit plan assumptions.\n\nAccrued promotional expenses: Accrued promotional expenses are unpaid liabilities for customer promotional programs in process or completed as of the end of the fiscal year. There are two com- ponents to these liabilities: promotional contractual accruals and voluntary performance accruals. Promotional contractual accruals are based on agreements with customers for defined performance.\n\nThe liability relating to these agreements is based on a review of the outstanding contracts on which performance has taken place, but for which the promotional payments relating to such contracts remain unpaid as of the end of the fiscal year. Voluntary perform- ance accruals are funded through customer purchases and are based on historical promotional expenditure rates by product line. Significant estimates used to determine these liabilities include the level of customer performance and the historical promotional expenditure rate versus contracted rates.\n\nEmployee benefit plans: The company incurs expenses relating to employee benefits such as noncontributory defined benefit pen- sion plans and postretirement health care benefits. In accounting for these employment costs, management must make a variety of assumptions and estimates including mortality rates, discount rates, overall company compensation increases, expected return on plan assets, and health care cost trend rates. The company considers historical data, as well as current facts and circumstances, when determining these estimates. The company uses third-party specialists to assist management in the determination of these estimates and the calculation of certain employee benefit expenses.\n\nThe company is a processor of branded and unbranded food products for the retail, foodservice, and fresh customer markets. The company operates in the following five segments:\n\n2004 Annual Report 17\n\n## Results of Operations\n\n## Overview" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7329959062281245, + "doc_id": "9faf29cc76b96c85bb6039aff82c5400129660902819acb3471cc9f23247be31", + "edit_distance": 0.7096774193548387, + "f1_score": 0.9629629629629631, + "meteor": 0.9594045215259248, + "precision": 0.9285714285714286, + "pred_md": "CORPORATE DATA\n\n108\n\n## Subsidiaries and affiliates accounted for by the equity method\n\n- * Percent of voting rights held by Nissan Motor Co., Ltd.\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "CORPORATE DATA\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 108\n\n* Percent of voting rights held by Nissan Motor Co., Ltd.\n\nSubsidiaries and affiliates accounted for by the equity method" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8418033741363058, + "doc_id": "7068d6c838dde7480b2cd6cded903837b1234d30f579140983d59da1a1602646", + "edit_distance": 0.5689467969598263, + "f1_score": 0.9335180055401662, + "meteor": 0.7951767964461084, + "precision": 0.9656160458452722, + "pred_md": "86\n\n## NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\nfor the year ended 31 December 2004\n\n## 32. Additional Financial Instruments Disclosure (continued)\n\n## (e) Net fair values of financial assets and liabilities\n\nThe carrying amounts of all financial assets and liabilities including hedges approximate net fair value.\n\nAt 31 December 2004 the Santos Group has open derivative financial instruments contracts relating to future operating profit which if closed out at their market rates would have resulted in a gain of $32.8 million (2003: gain of $61.5 million).\n\n## 33. Economic Dependency\n\nThere are in existence long-term contracts for the sale of gas, but otherwise the Directors believe there is no economic dependency.\n\n## 34. Post Balance Date Events\n\nThe following events occurred subsequent to 31 December 2004, the financial effects of which have not been brought to account in the financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2004:\n\n- (a) For dividends declared after 31 December 2004 refer note 20;\n- (b) On 17 February 2005, the Company entered into a contract to acquire Basin Oil Pty Ltd effective 1 January 2005. Basin Oil Pty Ltd has a 2.1% interest in SA Cooper Basin, 40% interests in Patricia-Baleen and Sole, and 33.3% interests in Golden Beach and Vic/P55.\n\n## 35. Australian Equivalents to International Financial Reporting Standards\n\nFollowing the implementation by the Australian Accounting Standards Board ('AASB') of the Financial Reporting Council's policy of adopting the accounting standards issued by the International Accounting Standards Board ('IASB'), the Santos Group must comply with the Australian equivalents to International Financial Reporting Standards ('A-IFRS') from 1 January 2005. Accordingly, the Santos Group will prepare a financial report under A-IFRS for the first time for the half-year ending 30 June 2005. The prior period comparatives in that report will be based on an opening A-IFRS statement of financial position dated 1 January 2004 except for the A-IFRS pertaining to financial instruments described below.\n\nA project team has been in place throughout the year and is well advanced to achieve the transition from Australian GAAP to A-IFRS. At 31 December 2004, the following activities are underway and are expected to be completed by 30 June 2005:\n\n- · complete assessment of accounting standard AASB 6 'Exploration for and Evaluation of Mineral Resources' which was issued by the AASB in December 2004 as an A-IFRS with an effective date of 1 January 2005;\n- · implement changes to information systems and business processes;\n- · conduct training programs;\n- · engage KPMG to audit the Santos Group's A-IFRS compliant accounting policies and submit revised accounting policies to the Board for approval; and\n- · restate the 2004 half-year and full year operating results and financial position from Australian GAAP to A-IFRS for comparative purposes.\n\nUnder current Australian GAAP the financial report is generally prepared on the basis of historical cost while under the IASB conceptual framework there is an emphasis on recording assets and liabilities at their fair values. Accordingly, this will increase the volatility in reported results in future years. The transition to A-IFRS will lead to the derecognition of some assets and the recognition of additional assets and liabilities. Additionally, the transition will lead to increased disclosures in the notes to the financial statements.\n\nThe transition to A-IFRS at 1 January 2005 is not expected to change the Santos Group's underlying business operations nor have any impact on either the quantity or the value of its oil and gas reserves, its future cash flows, or its current borrowing facilities. Also, the ability of the Santos Group to raise additional finance for normal business expansion or to pay dividends consistent with past practice is not expected to be impacted.\n\nThe differences between current Australian GAAP and A-IFRS which are more likely to have a significant effect on the Santos Group's financial performance and financial position are summarised below:\n\n## Financial instruments\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\nAll financial instruments including derivatives will be recognised in the statement of financial position and all derivatives will be carried at fair value.\n\nChanges in the fair value of certain financial instruments will be recorded in the statement of financial performance. Where financial instruments satisfy strict hedge criteria, changes in the fair value will be recognised in equity, or will offset the hedged exposure in the statement of financial performance.\n\nThe A-IFRS relating to financial instruments applies from 1 January 2005. Unlike the majority of other A-IFRS standards which require retrospective application as at 1 January 2004, this accounting standard does not require retrospective application. The effect of the first time application of this standard on the opening statement of financial position at 1 January 2005 will be to recognise additional financial assets and liabilities.\n\nSantos intends to continue to align its hedging transactions to underlying exposures to achieve accounting eligibility and thereby reduce profit and loss volatility.", + "recall": 0.903485254691689, + "true_md": "## NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STA TEMENTS\n\nfor the year ended 31 December 2004\n\n## 32. Additional Financial Instruments Disclosure (continued)\n\n## (e) Net fair values of financial assets and liabilities\n\n## 33. Economic Dependency\n\n## 34. Post Balance Date Events\n\n## 35. Australian Equivalents to International Financial Reporting Standards\n\nThe carrying amounts of all financial assets and liabilities including hedg es approximate net fair value.\n\nAt 31 December 2004 the Santos Group has open derivative financial in struments contracts relating to future operating profit which if closed out at their market rates would have resulted in a gain of $32.8 million (2003: gain of $61.5 million).\n\nThere are in existence long-term contracts for the sale of gas, but otherwise th e Directors believe there is no economic dependency.\n\nThe following events occurred subsequent to 31 December 2004, the financi al effects of which have not been brought to account in the financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2004:\n\nFollowing the implementation by the Australian Accounting Standards Board (“ AASB”) of the Financial Reporting Council’s policy of adopting the accounting standards issued by the International Accounting Standards Boar d (“IASB”), the Santos Group must comply with the Australian equivalents to International Financial Reporting Standards (“A-IFRS”) from 1 J anuary 2005. Accordingly, the Santos Group will prepare a financial report under A-IFRS for the first time for the half-year ending 30 Jun 2005. The prior period comparatives in that report will be based on an opening A-IFRS statement of financial position dated 1 January 2004 except f or the A-IFRS pertaining to financial instruments described below.\n\nA project team has been in place throughout the year and is well advanced to achieve the transition from Australian GAAP to A-IFRS. At 31 December 2004, the following activities are underway and are expected to be completed by 30 June 2005:\n\nUnder current Australian GAAP the financial report is generally prepared on th e basis of historical cost while under the IASB conceptual framework there is an emphasis on recording assets and liabilities at their fair values. A ccordingly, this will increase the volatility in reported results in future years. The transition to A-IFRS will lead to the derecognition of som assets and the recognition of additional assets and liabilities. Additionally, the transition will lead to increased disclosures in the notes to the financial statements.\n\nThe transition to A-IFRS at 1 January 2005 is not expected to change the San tos Group’s underlying business operations nor have any impact on either the quantity or the value of its oil and gas reserves, its futur cash flows, or its current borrowing facilities. Also, the ability of the Santos Group to raise additional finance for normal business expansion or to pay divid ends consistent with past practice is not expected to be impacted.\n\nThe differences between current Australian GAAP and A-IFRS which are more likely to have a significant effect on the Santos Group’s financial performance and financial position are summarised below:\n\nChanges in the fair value of certain financi al instruments will be recorded in the statement of financial performance. Where financial instruments satisfy strict he dge criteria, changes in the fair value will be recognised in equity, or will offset the hedged exposure in th statement of financial performance.\n\nThe A-IFRS relating to financial instruments applies from 1 January 2005. Unlike the majority of other A-IFRS standards which require retrospective appli cation as at 1 January 2004, this accounting standard does not require retrospective application. The effect of th first time application of this standard on the opening statement of financial position at 1 January 2005 will be to recognise additional financial assets and liabilities.\n\nSantos intends to continue to align its hed ging transactions to underlying exposures to achieve accounting eligibility and thereby reduce profit an loss volatility.\n\nAnnual Report 2004 86\n\n- (a) For dividends declared after 31 December 2004 refer note 20;\n\n- (b) On 17 February 2005, the Company entered into a contract to acquir Basin Oil Pty Ltd effective 1 January 2005. Basin Oil Pty Ltd has a 2.1% interest in SA Cooper Basin, 40% interests in Patricia-Baleen and Sole, an d 33.3% interests in Golden Beach and Vic/P55.\n\n- • implement changes to information systems and business processes;\n\n- • complete assessment of accounting standard AASB 6 “Exploration for an d Evaluation of Mineral Resources” which was issued by the AASB in December 2004 as an A-IFRS with an effective date of 1 January 2005;\n\n- • conduct training programs;\n\n- • engage KPMG to audit the Santos Group’s A-IFRS compliant accountin policies and submit revised accounting policies to the Board for approval; and\n\n- • restate the 2004 half-year and full year operating results and financial position from Australian GAAP to A-IFRS for comparative purposes.\n\n- All financial instruments including d erivatives will be recognised in the statement of financial position and all derivatives will be carried at fair value. Financial instruments" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7590994812356263, + "doc_id": "f572bc4e0bf18cf9a9bd24c4cfc941b393e731a04906a8e17825ba31376820d8", + "edit_distance": 0.2, + "f1_score": 0.9714285714285715, + "meteor": 0.9867216117216118, + "precision": 0.9444444444444444, + "pred_md": "## Consolidated Statements of Income\n\nThe accompanying notes are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements.\n\n43", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Consolidated Statements of Income\n\n43\n\nThe accompanying notes are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8747231696531658, + "doc_id": "b2a1d7e47e43dd86c6ebfe608953c2fd13becd707e1ee0adde3ee9e76349acbb", + "edit_distance": 0.1443609022556391, + "f1_score": 0.9680851063829788, + "meteor": 0.9330294001166285, + "precision": 0.9680851063829787, + "pred_md": "## The Environment\n\nWe have extended the Vision Zero concept to our work on environmental technologies. In the area of emissions, for example, we are investigating CO 2 and other substances with an environmental impact, either indirect or direct. Nissan's goal is simple: zero emissions. The primary focus for us has been CO 2 reduction, and we have been quite successful in this area.\n\nNissan is developing new hybrid technology as well. However, we do not believe this technology is sufficiently mature enough yet for wide application in the market. It would be easy to sell 1,000 or 10,000 cars, but that is neither an effective solution for the environment nor a financially viable proposition for a manufacturer.\n\nNissan's greatest strength is in current technologies such as the CVT, or continuously variable transmission. The CVT is a low-cost, advanced technology that can be applied to all types of vehicles to significantly and immediately reduce CO2 emissions. In comparison to a hybrid electric vehicle, or HEV, a CVT-equipped car reduces CO 2 emissions by 20 percent. So if we sell five CVT-equipped vehicles, the effect would be the same as selling one hybrid car. Our current plan is to sell a million CVT vehicles, which would be equivalent to 200,000 HEVs-a significant figure.\n\nWe have to meet certain CO 2 emission levels. The first pillar in our efforts is to develop strong future technologies. To do this, Nissan must have a clear, precise vision of the future. We have come up with a number of specific scenarios for the next 40 or 50 years and considered the\n\nX-TRAIL FCV\n\nX-TRAIL FCV\n\nSentra CA (USA)\n\nSentra CA (USA)\n\nAltima Hybrid\n\ntechnologies we will need to introduce to meet that vision. Over the next two decades we will significantly improve gasoline and diesel engines, which is where we can make an immediate impact. We are currently developing the next generation of gasoline HEVs. The generation after that will be diesel HEVs, which have even lower CO 2 emissions than gas-powered HEVs. The next step will be FCVs and pure electric vehicles. Nissan is actively working to further the diffusion of the fuel-cell stack we've developed in-house.\n\nAt the same time, we are taking a practical, proactive approach to the environment. We want to do good rather than just look good. The second pillar is to consider how we can actually introduce these new technologies to the world market. Advanced but expensive technology can't be applied on smaller, more economical cars, which are the cars most of us drive.\n\nIn the meantime, we have already had some notable successes in the environmental area. The Nissan Sentra CA, for example, was certified as the cleanest gasolinepowered car in the world, and our Bluebird Sylphy was recognized as the first-ever SU-LEV, or super-ultra-low emission vehicle. We are proud of these successes, but we are focusing on even more significant emissions reductions and fuel economy, continuing to develop advanced technologies that will bring us to our Vision Zero goal.'\n\nFor more on environment at Nissan, please see the 2005 Nissan Sustainability Report\n\nNissan-original fuel cell stack\n\nNissan-original fuel cell stack\n\nContinuously Variable Transmission (CVT) CVT (Continuously Variable Transmission) enables a smooth, continuous transmission which not only enhances acceleration, but which also improves fuel economy for better environmental performance\n\nContinuously Variable Transmission (CVT) CVT (Continuously Variable Transmission) enables a smooth, continuous transmission which not only enhances acceleration, but which also improves fuel economy for better environmental performance\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\n47\n\nOUR WORK", + "recall": 0.9680851063829787, + "true_md": "## The Environment\n\nWe have extended the Vision Zero concept to our work on environmental technologies. In the area of emissions, for example, we are investigating CO 2 and other substances with an environmental impact, either indirect or direct. Nissan’s goal is simple: zero emissions. The primary focus for us has been CO2 reduction, and we have been quite successful in this area.\n\nNissan is developing new hybrid technology as well. However, we do not believe this technology is sufficiently mature enough yet for wide application in the market. It would be easy to sell 1,000 or 10,000 cars, but that is neither an effective solution for the environment nor a financially viable proposition for a manufacturer.\n\nNissan’s greatest strength is in current technologies such as the CVT, or continuously variable transmission. The CVT is a low-cost, advanced technology that can be applied to all types of vehicles to significantly and immediately reduce CO 2 emissions. In comparison to a hybrid electric vehicle, or HEV, a CVT-equipped car reduces CO2 emissions by 20 percent. So if we sell five CVT-equipped vehicles, the effect would be the same as selling one hybrid car. Our current plan is to sell a million CVT vehicles, which would be equivalent to 200,000 HEVs—a significant figure. \n\nWe have to meet certain CO 2 emission levels. The first pillar in our efforts is to develop strong future technologies. To do this, Nissan must have a clear, precise vision of the future. We have come up with a number of specific scenarios for the next 40 or 50 years and considered the\n\ntechnologies we will need to introduce to meet that vision. Over the next two decades we will significantly improve gasoline and diesel engines, which is where we can make an immediate impact. We are currently developing the next generation of gasoline HEVs. The generation after that will be diesel HEVs, which have even lower CO 2 emissions than gas-powered HEVs. The next step will be FCVs and pure electric vehicles. Nissan is actively working to further the diffusion of the fuel-cell stack we’ve developed in-house. \n\nAt the same time, we are taking a practical, proactive approach to the environment. We want to do good rather than just look good. The second pillar is to consider how we can actually introduce these new technologies to the world market. Advanced but expensive technology can’t be applied on smaller, more economical cars, which are the cars most of us drive. \n\nIn the meantime, we have already had some notable successes in the environmental area. The Nissan Sentra CA, for example, was certified as the cleanest gasoline- powered car in the world, and our Bluebird Sylphy was recognized as the first-ever SU-LEV, or super-ultra-low emission vehicle. We are proud of these successes, but we are focusing on even more significant emissions reductions and fuel economy, continuing to develop advanced technologies that will bring us to our Vision Zero goal.”\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 47\n\n## Nissan-original fuel cell stack\n\n## X-TRAIL FCV\n\n## Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)\n\nCVT (Continuously Variable Transmission) enables a smooth, continuous transmission which not only enhances acceleration, but which also improves fuel economy for better environmental performance\n\nFor more on environment at Nissan, please see the 2005 Nissan Sustainability Report\n\nAltima Hybrid\n\nSentra CA (USA)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6917537536617723, + "doc_id": "e7c309a3e6d0df91851d167571da92d4a7915ef2c5b0cc72a88aeb505469c169", + "edit_distance": 0.2776617954070981, + "f1_score": 0.8625336927223719, + "meteor": 0.8676140916648353, + "precision": 0.851063829787234, + "pred_md": "## DI R E C TO R S ' R E P O R T\n\nMermaid's principal activities during the course of the Financial Year were:\n\n- Operating crewed vessel charters; ·\n- Vessel manning, management and logistics; ·\n- Operating supply base facilities; and ·\n- Equipment hire. ·\n\nOther than detailed in the Chairman's Report set out at pages 1 and 2 of this report and/or in the Operations Review set out on pages 3 to 9 of this report, (together the 'Chairman's and Operations Reviews'), there have been no significant changes to these activities during the Financial Year.\n\nIn respect of the financial year ended 30 June 1999, as detailed in the directors' report for that financial year, a final dividend of 1.25 cents per share, franked to 100 per cent at 36 per cent corporate income tax rate, was paid to the holders of fully paid ordinary shares on 1 November 1999.\n\nIn respect of the financial year ended 30 June 2000 the directors have not recommended the payment of a dividend.\n\nA review of operations for the Financial Year and the results of those operations are set out in the Chairman's and Operations Reviews.\n\nThe\n\nChairman's\n\nand\n\nOperations\n\n## R E V I E W O F O P E R AT I O N S\n\n## S I G N I F I C A N T C H A N G E S I N T H E S TAT E O F A F F A I R S\n\nReviews set out the matters which have had a significant effect on the state of affairs of Mermaid. Other than those matters there were no significant changes in the state of affairs of Mermaid during the Financial Year.\n\n## S U B S E Q U E N T E V E N T S\n\nOn 25 August 2000 the Company announced that it had reached two agreements for the placement of a total of 16,666,666 ordinary fully paid shares in the Company at an issue price of 30 cents each (Shares).\n\nThe first agreement was with Mr Mark Bradley, who agreed to take a placement of 3,225,000 Shares by 29 September 2000, followed by, if approved of by shareholders at the Company's annual general meeting, a further 3,441,666 within 7 days of that meeting.\n\nOn Mr Bradley being appointed a Director of the Company, in order to comply with the\n\n## P R I N C I PA L A C T I V I T I E S\n\n## DI V I D E N D\n\n29", + "recall": 0.8743169398907104, + "true_md": "## DIRECTORS’ REPORT\n\nMermaid’s principal activities during the course of the Financial Year were: \n\n- Operating crewed vessel charters; •\n\n- Vessel manning, management and logistics; •\n\n- Operating supply base facilities; and •\n\n- Equipment hire. •\n\nOther than detailed in the Chairman’s Report set out at pages 1 and 2 of this report and/or in the Operations Review set out on pages 3 to 9 of this report, (together the “Chairman’s and Operations Reviews”), there have been no significant changes to these activities during the Financial Year.\n\nIn respect of the financial year ended 30 June 1999, as detailed in the directors’ report for that financial year, a final dividend of 1.25 cents per share, franked to 100 per cent at 36 per cent corporate income tax rate, was paid to the holders of fully paid ordinary shares on 1 November 1999.\n\nIn respect of the financial year ended 30 June 2000 the directors have not recommended the payment of a dividend.\n\nA review of operations for the Financial Year and the results of those operations are set out in the Chairman’s and Operations Reviews.\n\nThe Chairman’s and Operations\n\nReviews set out the matters which have had a significant effect on the state of affairs of Mermaid. Other than those matters there were no significant changes in the state of affairs of Mermaid during the Financial Year.\n\nOn 25 August 2000 the Company announced that it had reached two\n\nagreements for the placement of a total of 16,666,666 ordinary fully paid shares in the Company at an issue price of 30 cents each (Shares).\n\nThe first agreement was with Mr Mark Bradley, who agreed to take a placement of 3,225,000 Shares by 29 September 2000, followed by, if approved of by shareholders at the Company’s annual general meeting, a further 3,441,666 within 7 days of that meeting.\n\nOn Mr Bradley being appointed a Director of the Company, in order to comply with the\n\n## DIVIDEND\n\n## REVIEW OF OPERA TIONS\n\n## SIGNIFICANT CHANGES IN THE STATE OF AFF AIRS\n\n## SUBSEQUENT EVENTS\n\n## PRINCIPAL A CTIVITIES\n\n29" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8330818762601254, + "doc_id": "403f274275cba381ed922abeb781d948576ad88b90ad539fdc072608b8eb0ca3", + "edit_distance": 0.1876484560570071, + "f1_score": 0.9307359307359307, + "meteor": 0.901061920113392, + "precision": 0.9513274336283186, + "pred_md": "HON INDUSTRIES Inc. and SUBSIDIARIES\n\n## A MESSAGE FROM THE BOARD OF DIRECTORS\n\n## Dear Shareholders:\n\nWe, the members of the HON INDUSTRIES Board of Directors, believe that integrity is central to good corporate governance. This belief is reflected in the HON INDUSTRIES vision statement (shown on the back of this annual report), adopted many years ago. Our Vision statement represents much more than a traditional 'mission,' and it goes much deeper than company policy. The beliefs and values represented in that document are the very foundation of our corporate culture, and guide the attitude and actions of every member, every day.\n\nFrom its beginnings, HON INDUSTRIES has sought to implement its vision through sound policies and practices, and by maintaining a strong Board composed predominantly of outside directors. We are fully committed to executing our responsibilities, and we will continue to maintain the company's long-standing tradition of an independent, well-informed, active, and engaged Board of Directors.\n\nOur board meetings and procedures have been developed and refined to encourage open and informed communication. The company's accounting policies have always been conservative and straightforward. The Board's three committees - Audit; Human Resources and Compensation; Public Policy and Corporate Governance - have consisted entirely of non-management directors for many years.\n\nDuring 2003, we have given significant attention to the newly released rules emanating from the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 and the New York Stock Exchange listing requirements - rules intended to improve corporate governance across the country. It is gratifying to report that HON INDUSTRIES governance practices were already in accord with the spirit of the rules.\n\nIt is an honor to serve as directors of HON INDUSTRIES. We are very proud to represent you, the shareholder, as we oversee the management of this great company. Please be assured that we intend to remain vigilant and focused on good corporate governance.\n\n## Sincerely,\n\nThe HON INDUSTRIES Board of Directors\n\nStan A. Askren\n\nGary M. Christensen\n\nCheryl A. Francis\n\nRobert L. Katz\n\nDennis J. Martin\n\nJack D. Michaels\n\nJoseph Scalzo\n\nAbbie J. Smith\n\nRichard H. Stanley\n\nBrian E. Stern\n\nRonald V. Waters, III\n\n61", + "recall": 0.9110169491525424, + "true_md": "HON INDUSTRIES Inc. and SUBSIDIARIES\n\n## A M E S S A G E F R O M T H E B O A R D O F D I R E C T O R S\n\n## Dear Shareholders:\n\nWe, the members of the HON INDUSTRIES Board of Directors, believe that integrity is central to good corporate governance. This belief is reflected in the HON INDUSTRIES vision statement (shown on the back of this annual report), adopted many years ago. Our Vision statement represents much more than a traditional “mission,” and it goes much deeper than company policy. The beliefs and values represented in that document are the very foundation of our corporate culture, and guide the attitude and actions of every member, every day.\n\nFrom its beginnings, HON INDUSTRIES has sought to implement its vision through sound policies and practices, and by maintaining a strong Board composed predominantly of outside directors. We are fully committed to executing our responsibilities, and we will continue to maintain the company’s long-standing tradition of an independent, well-informed, active, and engaged Board of Directors.\n\nOur board meetings and procedures have been developed and refined to encourage open and informed communication. The company’s accounting policies have always been conservative and straightforward. The Board’s three committees — Audit; Human Resources and Compensation; Public Policy and Corporate Governance — have consisted entirely of non-management directors for many years.\n\nDuring 2003, we have given significant attention to the newly released rules emanating from the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 and the New York Stock Exchange listing requirements — rules intended to improve corporate governance across the country. It is gratifying to report that HON INDUSTRIES governance practices were already in accord with the spirit of the rules.\n\nIt is an honor to serve as directors of HON INDUSTRIES. We are very proud to represent you, the shareholder, as we oversee the man- agement of this great company. Please be assured that we intend to remain vigilant and focused on good corporate governance.\n\nSincerely,\n\nThe HON INDUSTRIES Board of Directors\n\nRichard H. Stanley\n\nAbbie J. Smith\n\nRonald V. Waters, III\n\nJoseph Scalzo\n\nDennis J. Martin\n\nStan A. Askren\n\nGary M. Christensen\n\nBrian E. Stern\n\nCheryl A. Francis\n\nRobert L. Katz\n\n61\n\nJack D. Michaels" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9225999557389167, + "doc_id": "1e312014a8c94c262688eaf90a9916929e307186900bb30a071db244c2de689b", + "edit_distance": 0.8158803222094362, + "f1_score": 0.9671052631578949, + "meteor": 0.7614829597917151, + "precision": 0.9832775919732442, + "pred_md": "Specialty Foods: The Specialty Foods segment net sales were up 245.8 percent for the quarter and 144.7 percent for the twelve months compared to fiscal 2002. Operating profit increased 411.4 and 87.9 percent for the quarter and fiscal year, respectively, compared to fiscal 2002 results. Sales tonnage increased 185.4 and 131.6 percent for the quarter and twelve months, respectively, compared to fiscal 2002. The acquisitions of the Diamond Crystal Brands (DCB) in December 2002 and Century Foods International (CFI) in July 2003 provided a substantial increase to all segment measures in fiscal 2003. Excluding the results of these acquisitions, net sales increased 26.3 and 15.6 percent for the quarter and twelve months, respectively, compared to the comparable 2002 periods.\n\nExcluding the fiscal 2003 acquisitions, the Hormel HealthLabs operating segment accounted for most of this segment's growth with sales tonnage volume for the quarter and twelve months increasing 19.0 and 18.1 percent, respectively, compared to the comparable fiscal 2002 periods. Volume gains were experienced across all major product categories. Thickened beverages lead the way, posting fourth quarter and twelve month tonnage volume gains of 1,412,000 lbs. (21.5 percent) and 4,870,000 lbs. (19.0 percent), respectively, over the comparable 2002 periods.\n\nThe company's integration of the DCB and CFI businesses are proceeding as planned. These fiscal 2003 acquisitions are providing new growth opportunities for the company and have already been accretive to the company's consolidated earnings.\n\nAll Other: All Other net sales increased 16.4 percent for the fourth quarter and 2.8 percent for the year compared to the comparable fiscal 2002 periods. Operating profit increased 28.5 and 3.7 percent for the quarter and year, respectively, compared to fiscal 2002 results. Fourth quarter profit results are comparable but the twelve month operating profit comparison was negatively impacted by the third quarter fiscal 2002 discontinuation of equity-method accounting for the Campofrio Alimentacion, S.A. investment. Excluding the accounting change, Hormel Foods International experienced a strong year with the exports of key value-added products like Stagg chili and SPAM family of products, growing 372,000 lbs. (7.8 percent) and 1,347,000 lbs. (8.1 percent), respectively.\n\nDan's Prize, Inc., marketer and seller of beef products, also contributed to the increased operating profits of this segment with particularly strong results in the fourth quarter due to enhanced product margins resulting from a strengthening beef market.\n\nVista International Packaging, Inc., the company's food packaging subsidiary, ended fiscal 2003 with operating profits slightly down compared to strong operating results in fiscal 2002.\n\n26\n\nHormel Foods Corporation\n\nUnallocated Income and Expenses: The company does not allocate investment income, interest expense, and interest income to its segments when measuring performance. The company also retains various other income and unallocated expenses at corporate. These items are included in the segment table for the purpose of reconciling segment results to earnings before income taxes.\n\nNet interest and investment income for the fourth quarter and year was a net expense of $6,645 and $21,079, respectively, compared to a net expense of $5,560 and $24,280 for the comparable periods of fiscal 2002. The twelve month decrease in expense compared to fiscal 2002 was due to investment income from market gains on the company's rabbi trust for supplemental executive retirement plans and a third quarter dividend paid to the company by Campofrio Alimentacion, S.A., a 15.2 percent owned investment.\n\nGeneral corporate expense for the fourth quarter and year was $10,315 and $30,363, respectively, compared to general corporate income of $1,611 and expense of $6,274 for the comparable fiscal 2002 quarter and twelve months, respectively. The increase in general corporate expense for the fourth quarter and year was primarily due to higher pension costs of $3,200 and $12,800, respectively, and bad debt expense of $811 and $5,052, respectively, relating to the Fleming Companies' bankruptcy. Also contributing were fourth quarter stock option expense of $1,887 and fourth quarter last-in, first-out inventory valuation adjustments of $3,136.\n\nPrevious years' poor stock market results have lowered the historical returns on the company's pension plan assets. As a result, the company reduced its discount rate from 7.0 to 6.5 percent and its expected rate of return from 8.6 to 7.9 percent in its fiscal 2004 pension plan expense calculation.\n\n## Related Party Transactions\n\nCertain employees of the company provide administrative services to The Hormel Foundation, which beneficially owns more than five percent of the company's common stock, for which The Hormel Foundation reimburses the company for its fully allocated cost for the employee time expended.", + "recall": 0.9514563106796117, + "true_md": "Unallocated Income and Expenses: The company does not allocate investment income, interest expense, and interest income to its segments when measuring performance. The company also retains various other income and unallocated expenses at corpo- rate. These items are included in the segment table for the purpose of reconciling segment results to earnings before income taxes.\n\nSpecialty Foods: The Specialty Foods segment net sales were up 245.8 percent for the quarter and 144.7 percent for the twelve months compared to fiscal 2002. Operating profit increased 411.4 and 87.9 percent for the quarter and fiscal year, respec- tively, compared to fiscal 2002 results. Sales tonnage increased 185.4 and 131.6 percent for the quarter and twelve months, respectively, compared to fiscal 2002. The acquisitions of the Diamond Crystal Brands (DCB) in December 2002 and Century Foods International (CFI) in July 2003 provided a substantial increase to all segment measures in fiscal 2003. Excluding the results of these acquisitions, net sales increased 26.3 and 15.6 percent for the quarter and twelve months, respectively, compared to the comparable 2002 periods. \n\nNet interest and investment income for the fourth quarter and year was a net expense of $6,645 and $21,079, respectively, compared to a net expense of $5,560 and $24,280 for the com- parable periods of fiscal 2002. The twelve month decrease in expense compared to fiscal 2002 was due to investment income from market gains on the company’s rabbi trust for supplemental executive retirement plans and a third quarter dividend paid to the company by Campofrio Alimentacion, S.A., a 15.2 percent owned investment. \n\nExcluding the fiscal 2003 acquisitions, the Hormel HealthLabs operating segment accounted for most of this segment’s growth with sales tonnage volume for the quarter and twelve months increasing 19.0 and 18.1 percent, respectively, compared to the comparable fiscal 2002 periods. Volume gains were experienced across all major product categories. Thickened beverages lead the way, posting fourth quarter and twelve month tonnage volume gains of 1,412,000 lbs. (21.5 percent) and 4,870,000 lbs. (19.0 percent), respectively, over the comparable 2002 periods.\n\nGeneral corporate expense for the fourth quarter and year was $10,315 and $30,363, respectively, compared to general corpo- rate income of $1,611 and expense of $6,274 for the comparable fiscal 2002 quarter and twelve months, respectively. The increase in general corporate expense for the fourth quarter and year was primarily due to higher pension costs of $3,200 and $12,800, respectively, and bad debt expense of $811 and $5,052, respec- tively, relating to the Fleming Companies’ bankruptcy. Also contributing were fourth quarter stock option expense of $1,887 and fourth quarter last-in, first-out inventory valuation adjustments of $3,136. \n\nThe company’s integration of the DCB and CFI businesses are proceeding as planned. These fiscal 2003 acquisitions are provid- ing new growth opportunities for the company and have already been accretive to the company’s consolidated earnings. \n\nPrevious years’ poor stock market results have lowered the histori- cal returns on the company’s pension plan assets. As a result, the company reduced its discount rate from 7.0 to 6.5 percent and its expected rate of return from 8.6 to 7.9 percent in its fiscal 2004 pension plan expense calculation.\n\nCertain employees of the company provide administrative services to The Hormel Foundation, which beneficially owns more than five percent of the company’s common stock, for which The Hormel Foundation reimburses the company for its fully allocated cost for the employee time expended.\n\nAll Other: All Other net sales increased 16.4 percent for the fourth quarter and 2.8 percent for the year compared to the comparable fiscal 2002 periods. Operating profit increased 28.5 and 3.7 percent for the quarter and year, respectively, compared to fiscal 2002 results. Fourth quarter profit results are comparable but the twelve month operating profit comparison was negatively impacted by the third quarter fiscal 2002 discontinuation of equity-method accounting for the Campofrio Alimentacion, S.A. investment. Excluding the accounting change, Hormel Foods International experi- enced a strong year with the exports of key value-added products like Stagg chili and SPAM family of products, growing 372,000 lbs. (7.8 percent) and 1,347,000 lbs. (8.1 percent), respectively.\n\nDan’s Prize, Inc., marketer and seller of beef products, also con- tributed to the increased operating profits of this segment with particularly strong results in the fourth quarter due to enhanced product margins resulting from a strengthening beef market. \n\nVista International Packaging, Inc., the company’s food packaging subsidiary, ended fiscal 2003 with operating profits slightly down compared to strong operating results in fiscal 2002.\n\n## Related Party Transactions\n\n26 Hormel Foods Corporation" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9901849443083881, + "doc_id": "e2f3b61b91b5449510035885b56daf1d7af84b2f3d26755a35c301ee8b7be587", + "edit_distance": 0.027855153203342618, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9989481346388527, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "OPERATIONS REVIEW\n\n## G. SLIPWAY.\n\nAustralia, and particularly the north west is impoverished in terms of infrastructure to service our marine industries. Some of this has been due to a historical link with our recent industrial past. This is now behind us, and Australia has now become a centre of excellence with respect to both new building and ship repair, particularly for high tech and specialty vessels.\n\nThe Mermaid slipway will be the third such facility on the western half of the continent , with others located at Fremantle and Darwin.\n\nThe slipway will be a repair only facility, no new building is contemplated. Its capacity is structured to meet the regional steel mono-hulled fleet requirements of some 60 vessels between 200 and 4000 tonne displacement. Fishing industry, marine tourist industry, large private pleasure craft , naval, scientific and law enforcement vessels are a secondary target.\n\nThe slipway is designed to initially accept vessels up to 2,700 tonnes, a restriction which is set by our current inventory of cradles used to support vessel on the slip. The cradles will be progressively upgraded to ultimately handle 4000 tonne. A later expansion will allow 500 tonne vessels to be side slipped, thereby increasing capacity.\n\nThe slipway location and orientation on the Base has been chosen to maximize the cost and load bearing benefits of having a very high strength granite bedrock as the best possible foundation.\n\nThe Mermaid slipway will rank second in terms of capacity on the western half of the continent. Tenix, Fremantle 8,000 tonne, Mermaid Dampier 2,700 tonne rising to 4,000 tonne, Darwin Ship Repair 2,500 tonne. The nearest other facilities are Singapore, Adelaide, Port Moresby or Cairns.\n\nMermaid has purchased a very large cyclone rated industrial building frame which will be sited beside the slipway and tenanted by Mermaid engineering and companies which will provide ancillary services related to ship repair.\n\nThe Northwest Shelf is a world scale offshore oil and gas exploration province.\n\n17", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "OPERATIONS REVIEW\n\nAustralia, and particularly the north west is impoverished in terms of infrastructure to service our marine industries. Some of this has been due to a historical link with our recent industrial past. This is now behind us, and Australia has now become a centre of excellence with respect to both new building and ship repair, particularly for high tech and specialty vessels.\n\nThe Mermaid slipway will be the third such facility on the western half of the continent , with others located at Fremantle and Darwin.\n\nThe slipway will be a repair only facility, no new building is contemplated. Its capacity is structured to meet the regional steel mono-hulled fleet requirements of some 60 vessels between 200 and 4000 tonne displacement. Fishing industry, marine tourist industry, large private pleasure craft , naval, scientific and law enforcement vessels are a secondary target.\n\nThe slipway is designed to initially accept vessels up to 2,700 tonnes, a restriction which is set by our current inventory of cradles used to support vessel on the slip. The cradles will be progressively upgraded to ultimately handle 4000 tonne. A later expansion will allow 500 tonne vessels to be side slipped, thereby increasing capacity.\n\nThe slipway location and orientation on the Base has been chosen to maximize the cost and load bearing benefits of having a very high strength granite bedrock as the best possible foundation.\n\nThe Mermaid slipway will rank second in terms of capacity on the western half of the continent. Tenix, Fremantle 8,000 tonne, Mermaid Dampier 2,700 tonne rising to 4,000 tonne, Darwin Ship Repair 2,500 tonne. The nearest other facilities are Singapore, Adelaide, Port Moresby or Cairns.\n\nMermaid has purchased a very large cyclone rated industrial building frame which will be sited beside the slipway and tenanted by Mermaid engineering and companies which will provide ancillary services related to ship repair.\n\n## G. SLIPWAY.\n\nThe Northwest Shelf is a world scale offshore oil and gas exploration province.\n\n17" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7754422249915511, + "doc_id": "d5517bc41bc7ca0cd964570b823467fcbe1ccaf320057aaf8259906e3cf6255b", + "edit_distance": 0.29853181076672103, + "f1_score": 0.9733333333333335, + "meteor": 0.9138521305349285, + "precision": 0.9798657718120806, + "pred_md": "02\n\n## TO OUR SHAREHOLDERS\n\n## MGM MIRAGE DEFINES MOMENTUM\n\n## 'Your company has undergone several defining moments throughout its history.'\n\nrom its roots some 35 years ago with the opening of the International Hotel, we have played a leading role in continuously redefining the Las Vegas experience. F\n\nWe announced two significant initiatives in 2004 that, taken together, give your company unrivaled momentum to set industry standards for creativity, performance and responsibility for decades to come.\n\n## Defining Momentum for Las Vegas\n\nOur merger agreement with Mandalay Resort Group and our plans to develop Project CityCenter on the Las Vegas Strip are among the most significant announcements in Las Vegas history. As this fabled city begins its second hundred years, MGM MIRAGE is positioned like no other company to take advantage of unsurpassed growth opportunities in the most dynamic gaming and entertainment market in the world.\n\nProject CityCenter will uniquely re-position Las Vegas like no other project before it. Far more than simply another casino-hotel, Project CityCenter encompasses a\n\nBELLAGIO SPA TOWER The quintessential luxury hotel is now even more opulent. This expansion includes 928 rooms and suites, 80,000 square feet of convention space, retail outlets, and restaurants.\n\nBELLAGIO SPA TOWER The quintessential luxury hotel is now even more opulent. This expansion includes 928 rooms and suites, 80,000 square feet of convention space, retail outlets, and restaurants.\n\nmyriad of elements that will propel Las Vegas into a new generation of urban sophistication.\n\nWhile additional details of this extraordinary development will come in the months ahead, I am pleased to tell you that we have secured the services of the internationally acclaimed architect Cesar Pelli to design our anchor resort at the heart of Project CityCenter.\n\nCesar Pelli & Associates has worked with corporate, government and private clients to design major public spaces, museums, airports, research centers, performing arts centers, academic buildings, hotels, office and residential towers and mixed-use projects.\n\nThe work of Cesar Pelli is not constrained by a personal style or a signature that would limit his architecture; instead, it celebrates the unique characteristics of each project. Using this approach, he has designed several exceptional buildings in the United States and abroad.\n\nWe are very excited about our partnership with Mr. Pelli and his colleagues and believe they will deliver for MGM MIRAGE and the residents of Southern Nevada a building of iconic stature around the world.\n\nSHIBUYA MGM GRAND Designed by superstar team Yabu Pushelberg, Shibuya features stellar sushi and the widest sake selection this side of the Pacific, all served in a sleek, airy ambiance.\n\nSHIBUYA MGM GRAND Designed by superstar team Yabu Pushelberg, Shibuya features stellar sushi and the widest sake selection this side of the Pacific, all served in a sleek, airy ambiance.\n\nCRAVINGS THE MIRAGE The zenith of all-you-can-eat. Designed by Adam Tihany, Cravings boasts 11 cooking stations, a street of unique restaurants, and an array of temptations in what's unquestionably the ultimate buffet dining experience.\n\nJ. TERRENCE LANNI Chairman & Chief Executive Officer\n\nCRAVINGS THE MIRAGE The zenith of all-you-can-eat. Designed by Adam Tihany, Cravings boasts 11 cooking stations, a street of unique restaurants, and an array of temptations in what's unquestionably the ultimate buffet dining experience.J. TERRENCE LANNI Chairman & Chief Executive Officer", + "recall": 0.9668874172185431, + "true_md": "## MGM MIRAGE DEFINES MOMENTUM\n\n## TO OUR SHAREHOLDERS\n\n## “Your company has undergone several defining moments throughout its history.”\n\n## Defining Momentum for Las Vegas\n\nrom its roots some 35 years ago with the opening of the International Hotel, we have played a leading role in continuously redefining the Las Vegas experience. F\n\nWe announced two significant initiatives in 2004 that, taken together, give your company unrivaled momentum to set industry standards for creativity, performance and responsibility for decades to come. \n\nOur merger agreement with Mandalay Resort Group and our plans to develop Project CityCenter on the Las Vegas Strip are among the most significant announcements in Las Vegas history. As this fabled city begins its second hundred years, MGM MIRAGE is positioned like no other company to take advantage of unsurpassed growth oppor- tunities in the most dynamic gaming and entertainment market in the world.\n\nProject CityCenter will uniquely re-position Las Vegas like no other project before it. Far more than simply another casino-hotel, Project CityCenter encompasses a\n\nmyriad of elements that will propel Las Vegas into a new generation of urban sophistication.\n\nWhile additional details of this extraordinary develop- ment will come in the months ahead, I am pleased to tell you that we have secured the services of the internationally acclaimed architect Cesar Pelli to design our anchor resort at the heart of Project CityCenter.\n\nCesar Pelli & Associates has worked with corporate, government and private clients to design major public spaces, museums, airports, research centers, performing arts centers, academic buildings, hotels, office and residential towers and mixed-use projects.\n\nThe work of Cesar Pelli is not constrained by a personal style or a signature that would limit his architecture; instead, it celebrates the unique characteristics of each project. Using this approach, he has designed several exceptional buildings in the United States and abroad. \n\nWe are very excited about our partnership with Mr. Pelli and his colleagues and believe they will deliver for MGM MIRAGE and the residents of Southern Nevada a building of iconic stature around the world.\n\n02\n\nBELLAGIO SPA TOWER The quintessential luxury hotel is now even more opulent. This expansion includes 928 rooms and suites, 80,000 square feet of convention space, retail outlets, and restaurants. \n\nSHIBUYA MGM GRAND Designed by superstar team Yabu Pushelberg, Shibuya features stellar sushi and the widest sake selection this side of the Pacific, all served in a sleek, airy ambiance.\n\nCRAVINGS THE MIRAGE The zenith of all-you-can-eat. Designed by Adam Tihany, Cravings boasts 11 cooking stations, a street of unique restaurants, and an array of temptations in what’s unquestionably the ultimate buffet dining experience. \n\nJ. TERRENCE LANNI Chairman & Chief Executive Officer" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7833357902714263, + "doc_id": "4e9dedfbdbc0665fd4e4d689e2cce5ba402751fec116fcfcfb38163586d2fac6", + "edit_distance": 0.7267441860465116, + "f1_score": 0.9406779661016949, + "meteor": 0.8807254747018745, + "precision": 0.9173553719008265, + "pred_md": "64\n\n## ADDITIONAL STOCK EXCHANGE INFORMATION AS AT 8 S E P T E M B E R 2 0 0 0\n\n## TWENTY LARGEST OPTION HOLDERS\n\n## COMPANY SECRETARIES\n\nBrendan Gore\n\nNeil Roberts\n\n## PRINCIPAL REGISTERED OFFICE\n\nEagle Jetty, 20 Mews Road FREMANTLE WA 6160 Tel: (08) 9431 7431\n\n## SHARE REGISTRY\n\nShareholders can obtain information about their shareholding by contacting the Company's share registry:\n\nNational Registry Services (WA) Pty Ltd\n\nLevel 1, CML Building\n\n55 St Georges Terrace\n\nPerth, Western Australia 6000\n\nTelephone: (08) 9220 4750 Facsimile: (08) 9220 4755\n\n## CHANGE OF ADDRESS\n\nShareholders should notify the share registry in writing immediately there is a change to their registered address.\n\n## STOCK EXCHANGE LISTING\n\nMermaid Marine Australia Limited's ordinary shares are quoted by the Australian Stock Exchange Limited.\n\n## PUBLICATIONS\n\nThe Annual Report is the main source of information for shareholders.", + "recall": 0.9652173913043478, + "true_md": "The Annual Report is the main source of information for shareholders.\n\nMermaid Marine Australia Limited’s ordinary shares are quoted by the Australian Stock Exchange Limited.\n\nShareholders should notify the share registry in writing immediately there is a change to their registered address.\n\nShareholders can obtain information about their shareholding by contacting the Company’s share registry: National Registry Services (WA) Pty Ltd Level 1, CML Building 55 St Georges Terrace Perth, Western Australia 6000 Telephone: (08) 9220 4750 Facsimile: (08) 9220 4755\n\nEagle Jetty, 20 Mews Road FREMANTLE WA 6160 Tel: (08) 9431 7431\n\nBrendan Gore Neil Roberts\n\n## ADDITIONAL STOCK EXCHANGE INFORMATION AS AT 8 SEPTEMBER 2000\n\n## TWENTY LARGEST OPTION HOLDERS\n\n## COMPANY SECRETARIES\n\n## PRINCIPAL REGISTERED OFFICE\n\n## SHARE REGISTRY\n\n## CHANGE OF ADDRESS\n\n## STOCK EXCHANGE LISTING\n\n## PUBLICATIONS\n\n64" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7038198975180106, + "doc_id": "2bd9a892f2a42d117001db6f00d35dd112b4c45c7d87b26355d403670bf6334b", + "edit_distance": 0.8203463203463204, + "f1_score": 0.8776371308016876, + "meteor": 0.6868645549664703, + "precision": 0.9004329004329005, + "pred_md": "## HON INDUSTRIES 2003\n\n## ALLSTEEL: AN ANTIDOTE TO THE ORDINARY\n\n## A CASE STUDY IN QUALITY\n\nGreat, high-quality design creates better work environments and happier end-users. Whether we're building lateral files (the first product for which we became known) or designing awardwinning seating, like our #19 chair, the Allsteel core message ® remains constant: the highest quality in functionality, durability, and service.\n\nToday's Allsteel is about a broad array of workplace furniture solutions: new, exciting panel and desking systems, storage, seating, and tables that offer a unique counterpoint to the sea of sameness provided by most office furniture. Working closely with architects and designers, we target the contract market, providing project-driven and design-oriented office solutions. Our rapid modeling and prototyping allows for equally rapid product development, a reflection of our agile, lean culture. As innovative as many of our products are, design innovation - for us - is simply what happens along the way to solving customer problems.\n\nSome of our products, like the #19 chair, are icono-® graphically associated with the Allsteel name, and are quite influential in our brand building efforts. Our two newest enterprises are Terrace 2.6 - a fast-growing systems line providing ® enormous flexibility and durability - and Get Set TM - an incredibly versatile line of multi-purpose room tables, chairs, and\n\ncommunication products. All of our products respond completely to the needs of end-users because that's where the design process starts.\n\nIn all that we do, our main focus is to identify end-user problems and solve them better than anyone else. The majority of our customers are large corporations with multiple locations worldwide. According to the senior vice president responsible for the global design, construction, and project management of an internationally renowned financial services company, 'Allsteel offers extremely attractive, cost-effective furniture solutions. Your manufacturing and service are best in class you turn everything around with impressive swiftness. There's really not much in the market to beat you.'\n\nWell-designed, forward-thinking, and glad to be of service. Allsteel is proud to uphold our long heritage of quality.\n\n20", + "recall": 0.8559670781893004, + "true_md": "## A L L S T E E L : A N A N T I D O T E T O T H E O R D I N A R Y\n\n## A C A S E S T U D Y I N Q U A L I T Y\n\nH O N I N D U S T R I E S 2 0 0 3\n\nGreat, high-quality design creates better work environments and happier end-users. Whether we’re building lateral files (the first product for which we became known) or designing award- winning seating, like our #19 ® chair, the Allsteel core message remains constant: the highest quality in functionality, dura- bility, and service.\n\ncommunication products. All of our products respond com- pletely to the needs of end-users because that’s where the design process starts.\n\nIn all that we do, our main focus is to identify end-user problems and solve them better than anyone else. The majority of our customers are large corporations with multiple locations worldwide. According to the senior vice president responsible for the global design, construction, and project management of an internationally renowned financial services company, “Allsteel offers extremely attractive, cost-effective furniture solutions. Your manufacturing and service are best in class — you turn everything around with impressive swiftness. There’s really not much in the market to beat you.”\n\nWell-designed, forward-thinking, and glad to be of service. Allsteel is proud to uphold our long heritage of quality.\n\nToday’s Allsteel is about a broad array of workplace furniture solutions: new, exciting panel and desking systems, storage, seating, and tables that offer a unique counterpoint to the sea of sameness provided by most office furniture. Working closely with architects and designers, we target the contract market, providing project-driven and design-oriented office solutions. Our rapid modeling and prototyping allows for equally rapid product development, a reflection of our agile, lean culture. As innovative as many of our products are, design innovation — for us — is simply what happens along the way to solving customer problems. \n\nSome of our products, like the #19 ® chair, are icono- graphically associated with the Allsteel name, and are quite influential in our brand building efforts. Our two newest enter- prises are Terrace ® 2.6 — a fast-growing systems line providing enormous flexibility and durability — and Get Set TM — an incred- ibly versatile line of multi-purpose room tables, chairs, and \n\n20" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.01936172171493486, + "doc_id": "4f6e20223b7bc8436c623b9e6282db6ebd5f221aeb880a8db9b4544326d5a8a6", + "edit_distance": 0.7526564344746163, + "f1_score": 0.21951219512195122, + "meteor": 0.15437946448303339, + "precision": 0.1323529411764706, + "pred_md": "glyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman> ˜Ê>''ˆÌˆœ˜]Ê̜ʫÀœ«iÊˆÌÃÊ\"glyph<c=12,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=31,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>Ê«Àœ}À>“Ãʈ˜ÌœÊ̅iÊi˜ÌiÀ«ÀˆÃiÊVœ“«Ṏ˜}Ê>˜'ÊÃ̜À>}iʓ>ÀŽiÌ]ʏ>ÃÌÊÞi>ÀÊ->˜“ˆ˜>‡-glyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>Ê>VµÕˆÀi'Ê i܈ÃÞà Á ]Ê>Ê'iÛiœ«iÀʜvÊi˜ÌiÀ«ÀˆÃi‡V>ÃÃÊÃiÀÛiÀÃÊ>˜'Ê>ʏi>'iÀʈ˜ÊÃÌ>˜'>À'ÇL>Ãi']ʅˆ}…‡«iÀvœÀ“>˜ViÊÃiÀÛiÀÊ'iÈ}˜Ã°Ê/…iÊ Ê œ“Lˆ˜>̈œ˜ÊœvÊ->˜“ˆ˜>‡-glyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>½ÃÊLՈ'‡Ìœ‡œÀ'iÀÊ­glyph<c=9,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>/\"®]ÊVœ˜vˆ}ÕÀi‡Ìœ‡œÀ'iÀÊ­glyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>/\"®]ʓ>˜Õv>VÌÕÀˆ˜}ÊVœ“«iÌi˜VˆiÃÊ>˜'Ê i܈ÃÞÃÊ'iÈ}˜Ê V Ì>i˜Ì]Ê'ÀˆÛiÊ̅iÊ'iÛiœ«“i˜ÌʜvÊi˜ÌiÀ«ÀˆÃi‡V>ÃÃÊÃiÀÛiÀÊÌiV…˜œœ}ˆiÃÊqÊi˜>Lˆ˜}Ê}Ài>ÌiÀʏiÛiÃʜvÊÃÞÃÌi“Ê>˜'Ê«œÜiÀʓ>˜>}i‡ “i˜ÌÊ>˜'ʓœ'Տ>ÀÊÃV>>LˆˆÌÞ°Ê/œ'>Þ]Ê->˜“ˆ˜>‡-glyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>ʈÃÊ>Ài>'ÞÊň««ˆ˜}Ê>Êv>“ˆÞʜvÊÃiÀÛiÀÃÊL>Ãi'ʜ˜Ê̅iÊ\"«ÌiÀœ˜ Ò ÊÊ ÌiV…˜œœ}Þ°Ê\n\n/…iÊglyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>œ“«>˜ÞʈÃÊ>ÃœÊ«ÕÀÃՈ˜}ʈÌÃÊ\"glyph<c=12,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=31,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>ʓœ'iÊˆ˜Ê̅iÊVœ““Õ˜ˆV>̈œ˜Ãʈ˜'ÕÃÌÀÞ°Êglyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>ÃÊ̅ˆÃÊÃiV̜ÀÊ>'œ«ÌÃʜ«i˜ÊÃÌ>˜'>À'ÇL>Ãi'Ê «>ÌvœÀ“Ãʈ˜ÊˆiÕʜvÊ«Àœ«ÀˆiÌ>ÀÞÊÃÞÃÌi“Ã]Êglyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>/glyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>ʈÃÊiÝ«iVÌi'Ê̜Ê}>ˆ˜ÊÈ}˜ˆvˆV>˜Ìʓœ“i˜ÌՓ°Ê/…iÊglyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>œ“«>˜ÞÊÀiVi˜ÌÞÊ>˜˜œÕ˜Vi'Ê œˆ˜ÌÊÛi˜ÌÕÀiÃÊ܈̅ʫ…œÌœ˜ˆVÃÊ\"glyph<c=13,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=31,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>Ã]Ê'iÛiœ«ˆ˜}Ê>'Û>˜Vi'ʜ«ÌˆV>Ê“œ'ՏiðÊ\"˜iÊiÝ>“«iʈ˜VÕ'iÃÊ>ʍœˆ˜ÌÊivvœÀÌÊ̜Ê'iÈ}˜]ʈ˜'ÕÇ ÌÀˆ>ˆâi]ʓ>˜Õv>VÌÕÀiÊ>˜'ʓ>ÀŽiÌÊ>Ê/՘>LiÊglyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>‡œ«ÌˆV>Ê-ˆ}˜>Ê,i}i˜iÀ>̈œ˜Ê­/glyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>-,®Ê«Àœ'ÕVÌʏˆ˜i°Ê/…iÊ'iÈ}˜ÊˆÃÊVÕÀÀi˜ÌÞÊLiˆ˜}Ê 'œ˜iʈ˜Ê>ÊVœ>LœÀ>̈Ûiʓ>˜˜iÀ]ʏiÛiÀ>}ˆ˜}Ê̅iÊÈ}˜ˆvˆV>˜ÌÊ'iÛiœ«“i˜ÌÊ>˜'ʈ˜'ÕÃÌÀˆ>ˆâ>̈œ˜ÊÃÌÀi˜}̅ÃʜvÊLœÌ…ÊœÀ}>˜ˆâ>̈œ˜Ã°\n\n->˜“ˆ˜>‡-glyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>½ ÃÊ \"glyph<c=12,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=31,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>Ê ÃÌÀ>Ìi }ÞÊ ˆÃÊ >Ê ŽiÞÊ ii“i˜Ìʈ˜ÊˆÌÃÊVÕÃ̜“iÀ‡vœVÕÃi'Êglyph<c=13,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=31,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>-ÊLÕȘiÃÃʓœ'i°Êglyph<c=12,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>ÕiÊ̜ʈÌÃʈ˜'ÕÃÌÀ Þʏi>'iÀň«]Ê glyph<c=9,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman> /\"Ê >˜'Ê glyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>/\"Ê iÝ«iÀ ̈Ãi]Ê>˜'ÊVœ“«iÌiÊi˜'‡Ìœ‡i˜'ʓ>˜Õv>VÌÕÀˆ˜}Ê܏Ṏœ˜Ã]Ê̅iÊglyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>œ“«>˜ÞÊiÝ«iVÌÃÊ̜ÊV>«ˆÌ>ˆâiʜ˜Ê̅ˆÃÊÈâi>LiÊ }ÀœÜ̅ʜ««œÀÌ՘ˆÌÞ°Ê", + "recall": 0.6428571428571429, + "true_md": "V œ > Þ Á Ê ˜ V  œ Ã Õ À i ˜ ` Ê > À Ž i Ì \\ Ê ˜ Ì i À « À ˆ à i Ê œ “ « Õ Ì ˆ ˜ } Ê > ˜ ` Ê - Ì œ À > } i Ê - Þ Ã Ì i “ à \n\n˜ Ê > ` ` ˆ Ì ˆ œ ˜ ] Ê Ì œ Ê « À œ « i  Ê ˆ Ì Ã Ê \" Ê « À œ } À > “ Ã Ê ˆ ˜ Ì œ Ê Ì … i Ê i ˜ Ì i À « À ˆ à i Ê V œ “ « Õ Ì ˆ ˜ } Ê > ˜ ` Ê Ã Ì œ À > } i Ê “ > À Ž i Ì ] Ê  > Ã Ì Ê Þ i > À Ê - > ˜ “ ˆ ˜ > ‡ - Ê > V µ Õ ˆ À i ` Ê i Ü ˆ Ã Þ Ã Á ] Ê > Ê ` i Û i  œ « i À Ê œ v Ê i ˜ Ì i À « À ˆ à i ‡ V  > Ã Ã Ê Ã i À Û i À Ã Ê > ˜ ` Ê > Ê  i > ` i À Ê ˆ ˜ Ê Ã Ì > ˜ ` > À ` à ‡ L > à i ` ] Ê … ˆ } … ‡ « i À v œ À “ > ˜ V i Ê Ã i À Û i À Ê ` i à ˆ } ˜ à ° Ê / … i Ê Ê V œ “ L ˆ ˜ > Ì ˆ œ ˜ Ê œ v Ê - > ˜ “ ˆ ˜ > ‡ - ½ Ã Ê L Õ ˆ  ` ‡ Ì œ ‡ œ À ` i À Ê ­ / \" ® ] Ê V œ ˜ v ˆ } Õ À i ‡ Ì œ ‡ œ À ` i À Ê ­ / \" ® ] Ê “ > ˜ Õ v > V Ì Õ À ˆ ˜ } Ê V œ “ « i Ì i ˜ V ˆ i Ã Ê > ˜ ` Ê i Ü ˆ Ã Þ Ã Ê ` i à ˆ } ˜ Ê Ì >  i ˜ Ì ] Ê ` À ˆ Û i Ê Ì … i Ê ` i Û i  œ « “ i ˜ Ì Ê œ v Ê i ˜ Ì i À « À ˆ à i ‡ V  > Ã Ã Ê Ã i À Û i À Ê Ì i V … ˜ œ  œ } ˆ i Ã Ê q Ê i ˜ > L  ˆ ˜ } Ê } À i > Ì i À Ê  i Û i  Ã Ê œ v Ê Ã Þ Ã Ì i “ Ê > ˜ ` Ê « œ Ü i À Ê “ > ˜ > } i ‡ “ i ˜ Ì Ê > ˜ ` Ê “ œ ` Õ  > À Ê Ã V >  > L ˆ  ˆ Ì Þ ° Ê / œ ` > Þ ] Ê - > ˜ “ ˆ ˜ > ‡ - Ê ˆ Ã Ê >  À i > ` Þ Ê Ã … ˆ « « ˆ ˜ } Ê > Ê v > “ ˆ  Þ Ê œ v Ê Ã i À Û i À Ã Ê L > à i ` Ê œ ˜ Ê Ì … i Ê \" « Ì i À œ ˜ Ò Ê Ê Ì i V … ˜ œ  œ } Þ ° Ê \n\n/ … i Ê œ “ « > ˜ Þ Ê ˆ Ã Ê >  à œ Ê « Õ À Ã Õ ˆ ˜ } Ê ˆ Ì Ã Ê \" Ê “ œ ` i  Ê ˆ ˜ Ê Ì … i Ê V œ “ “ Õ ˜ ˆ V > Ì ˆ œ ˜ Ã Ê ˆ ˜ ` Õ Ã Ì À Þ ° Ê Ã Ê Ì … ˆ Ã Ê Ã i V Ì œ À Ê > ` œ « Ì Ã Ê œ « i ˜ Ê Ã Ì > ˜ ` > À ` à ‡ L > à i ` Ê «  > Ì v œ À “ Ã Ê ˆ ˜ Ê  ˆ i Õ Ê œ v Ê « À œ « À ˆ i Ì > À Þ Ê Ã Þ Ã Ì i “ à ] Ê / Ê ˆ Ã Ê i Ý « i V Ì i ` Ê Ì œ Ê } > ˆ ˜ Ê Ã ˆ } ˜ ˆ v ˆ V > ˜ Ì Ê “ œ “ i ˜ Ì Õ “ ° Ê / … i Ê œ “ « > ˜ Þ Ê À i V i ˜ Ì  Þ Ê > ˜ ˜ œ Õ ˜ V i ` Ê  œ ˆ ˜ Ì Ê Û i ˜ Ì Õ À i Ã Ê Ü ˆ Ì … Ê « … œ Ì œ ˜ ˆ V Ã Ê \" à ] Ê ` i Û i  œ « ˆ ˜ } Ê > ` Û > ˜ V i ` Ê œ « Ì ˆ V >  Ê “ œ ` Õ  i à ° Ê \" ˜ i Ê i Ý > “ «  i Ê ˆ ˜ V  Õ ` i Ã Ê > Ê  œ ˆ ˜ Ì Ê i v v œ À Ì Ê Ì œ Ê ` i à ˆ } ˜ ] Ê ˆ ˜ ` Õ Ã ‡ Ì À ˆ >  ˆ â i ] Ê “ > ˜ Õ v > V Ì Õ À i Ê > ˜ ` Ê “ > À Ž i Ì Ê > Ê / Õ ˜ > L  i Ê   ‡ œ « Ì ˆ V >  Ê - ˆ } ˜ >  Ê , i } i ˜ i À > Ì ˆ œ ˜ Ê ­ / - , ® Ê « À œ ` Õ V Ì Ê  ˆ ˜ i ° Ê / … i Ê ` i à ˆ } ˜ Ê ˆ Ã Ê V Õ À À i ˜ Ì  Þ Ê L i ˆ ˜ } Ê ` œ ˜ i Ê ˆ ˜ Ê > Ê V œ   > L œ À > Ì ˆ Û i Ê “ > ˜ ˜ i À ] Ê  i Û i À > } ˆ ˜ } Ê Ì … i Ê Ã ˆ } ˜ ˆ v ˆ V > ˜ Ì Ê ` i Û i  œ « “ i ˜ Ì Ê > ˜ ` Ê ˆ ˜ ` Õ Ã Ì À ˆ >  ˆ â > Ì ˆ œ ˜ Ê Ã Ì À i ˜ } Ì … Ã Ê œ v Ê L œ Ì … Ê œ À } > ˜ ˆ â > Ì ˆ œ ˜ à ° \n\n- > ˜ “ ˆ ˜ > ‡ - ½ Ã Ê \" Ê Ã Ì À > Ì i } Þ Ê ˆ Ã Ê > Ê Ž i Þ Ê i  i “ i ˜ Ì Ê ˆ ˜ Ê ˆ Ì Ã Ê V Õ Ã Ì œ “ i À ‡ v œ V Õ Ã i ` Ê - Ê L Õ Ã ˆ ˜ i Ã Ã Ê “ œ ` i  ° Ê Õ i Ê Ì œ Ê ˆ Ì Ã Ê ˆ ˜ ` Õ Ã Ì À Þ Ê  i > ` i À à … ˆ « ] Ê / \" Ê > ˜ ` Ê / \" Ê i Ý « i À Ì ˆ à i ] Ê > ˜ ` Ê V œ “ «  i Ì i Ê i ˜ ` ‡ Ì œ ‡ i ˜ ` Ê “ > ˜ Õ v > V Ì Õ À ˆ ˜ } Ê Ã œ  Õ Ì ˆ œ ˜ à ] Ê Ì … i Ê œ “ « > ˜ Þ Ê i Ý « i V Ì Ã Ê Ì œ Ê V > « ˆ Ì >  ˆ â i Ê œ ˜ Ê Ì … ˆ Ã Ê Ã ˆ â i > L  i Ê } À œ Ü Ì … Ê œ « « œ À Ì Õ ˜ ˆ Ì Þ ° Ê" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9727962695580902, + "doc_id": "9c86b8f6da5468f5958c5d0b4b4aed45a512b39755ab4c84b01192b9850aaa66", + "edit_distance": 0.022564102564102566, + "f1_score": 0.9908536585365855, + "meteor": 0.9822426938448572, + "precision": 0.9908536585365854, + "pred_md": "## SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES MANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS\n\nincreased $0.5 million or 12.7%, due to new assets deployed in the operation. There was no amortization of goodwill in 2003 or 2002, compared to goodwill amortization of $360 thousand expensed in 2001, due to the required accounting change.\n\nSelling, general and administrative expenses were $26.0 million, down $0.1 million or 0.4%. Customer support costs were $8.7 million, an increase of $0.9 million or 11.4%. The growth in Sprint wireless subscribers is primarily responsible for this change. Advertising expense was $4.6 million, an increase of $0.3 million or 6.4%. The change is primarily due to increased marketing efforts in support of the PCS operations in both the Quad State and Central Penn markets. PCS sales staff expenses were $2.8 million, an increase of $0.1 million or 1.5% compared to 2002. Other sales staff expenses increased $0.3 million to $1.3 million as the Company worked to expand its other services in areas outside its historically defined service area. Bad debt expense decreased $2.6 million or 58.3%.\n\nAdministrative expenses increased $1.0 million or 17.1%. This increase is a result of increased professional fees, insurance and pension costs. During 2003, the Company added several positions to expand the management team to support the Company's growing operations.\n\nBad debt expense decreased $2.6 million to $1.8 million or 58.3%. This decrease was due to more restrictive credit terms for new PCS subscribers (limiting the high credit risk customers who obtained service), lower churn in the PCS operation and improvement in the interexchange carrier segment of the business. This expense is net of normal recoveries and includes a recovery of $0.2 million for an interexchange carrier settlement the Company received in 2003 which was written off in 2002.\n\nOperating income grew to $18.6 million, an increase of $9.3 million or 100%. Revenue growth, primarily in the PCS operation in addition to the reduced bad debt expenses, adjustments of management estimates, and the settlement of disputed items with Sprint, all contributed to the operating income improvements. The Company's operating margin was 17.6%, compared to 10.0% in 2002.\n\nOther income (expense) is comprised of non-operating income and expenses, interest expense and gain or loss on investments. Collectively, the net impact of these items to pre-tax income was an expense of $3.6 million for 2003, compared to expense of $14.3 million from 2002. The 2002 results were primarily the results of the previously disclosed $9.0 million loss recorded on the sale of the VeriSign stock.\n\nInterest expense was $3.5 million, a decrease of $0.7 million or 16.3%. The Company's average debt outstanding decreased approximately $4.8 million. Long-term debt (inclusive of current maturities), was $43.3 million at year-end 2003, versus $52.0 million at year-end 2002. The Company did not borrow any money on its revolving facilities in 2003.\n\nNet losses on investments were $0.4 million, compared to a loss of $10.1 million from 2002. Results in 2002 include the sale of the VeriSign, Inc. stock for a loss of $9.0 million. See Note 3 to the consolidated financial statements.\n\nNon-operating income was a gain of $0.4 million, an increase of $0.5 million, due to an increase in patronage equity earned from CoBank, the Company's primary lender, and due to interest income from the proceeds on the sale of the Virginia 10 RSA Limited partnership, offset by losses recorded for the Company's portfolio of investments.\n\nThe Company provided for income taxes of $5.3 million in 2003, which is an effective tax rate of 35.2% due to the effect of state tax apportionment rules and reduction in the liability for tax exposures. On a normalized basis the Company would have recorded taxes at an effective tax rate of approximately 39%. Last year's effective tax rate was 42.2% due to the impact of net operating loss carry forwards generated in several states with higher tax rates. The Company currently operates in four states. Due to apportionment rules and geographic operations of subsidiaries where the Company's profits and losses arise, the Company is generating profits in states with lower tax rates, while generating losses in states with higher tax rates. The Company cautions readers that the current effective tax rate may not be the same rate at which tax benefits or tax expenses are recorded in the future. The Company's state apportionments, profits and losses and state tax rates may change, therefore changing the effective rate at which taxes are provided for or at which tax benefits accrue. In the near term, under existing operating results and current tax rates, the Company anticipates a normalized effective tax rate will be approximately 39%.\n\nNet income from continuing operations was $9.8 million, an increase of $12.7 million from 2002. The results are primarily made up of the improvement in the PCS operation and the one-time impact of the losses on the sale of VeriSign stock in 2002.\n\nSHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY\n\n48\n\n■", + "recall": 0.9908536585365854, + "true_md": "SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS\n\nincreased $0.5 million or 12.7%, due to new assets deployed in the operation. There was no amortization of goodwill in 2003 or 2002, compared to goodwill amortization of $360 thousand expensed in 2001, due to the required accounting change.\n\nSelling, general and administrative expenses were $26.0 million, down $0.1 million or 0.4%. Customer support costs were $8.7 million, an increase of $0.9 million or 11.4%. The growth in Sprint wireless subscribers is primarily responsible for this change. Advertising expense was $4.6 million, an increase of $0.3 million or 6.4%. The change is primarily due to increased marketing efforts in support of the PCS operations in both the Quad State and Central Penn markets. PCS sales staff expenses were $2.8 million, an increase of $0.1 million or 1.5% compared to 2002. Other sales staff expenses increased $0.3 million to $1.3 million as the Company worked to expand its other services in areas outside its historically defined service area. Bad debt expense decreased $2.6 million or 58.3%.\n\nAdministrative expenses increased $1.0 million or 17.1%. This increase is a result of increased professional fees, insurance and pension costs. During 2003, the Company added several positions to expand the management team to support the Company’s growing operations.\n\nBad debt expense decreased $2.6 million to $1.8 million or 58.3%. This decrease was due to more restrictive credit terms for new PCS subscribers (limiting the high credit risk customers who obtained service), lower churn in the PCS operation and improvement in the interexchange carrier segment of the business. This expense is net of normal recoveries and includes a recovery of $0.2 million for an interexchange carrier settlement the Company received in 2003 which was written off in 2002.\n\nOperating income grew to $18.6 million, an increase of $9.3 million or 100%. Revenue growth, primarily in the PCS operation in addition to the reduced bad debt expenses, adjustments of management estimates, and the settlement of disputed items with Sprint, all contributed to the operating income improvements. The Company’s operating margin was 17.6%, compared to 10.0% in 2002.\n\nOther income (expense) is comprised of non-operating income and expenses, interest expense and gain or loss on investments. Collectively, the net impact of these items to pre-tax income was an expense of $3.6 million for 2003, compared to expense of $14.3 million from 2002. The 2002 results were primarily the results of the previously disclosed $9.0 million loss recorded on the sale of the VeriSign stock.\n\nInterest expense was $3.5 million, a decrease of $0.7 million or 16.3%. The Company’s average debt outstanding decreased approximately $4.8 million. Long-term debt (inclusive of current maturities), was $43.3 million at year-end 2003, versus $52.0 million at year-end 2002. The Company did not borrow any money on its revolving facilities in 2003.\n\nNet losses on investments were $0.4 million, compared to a loss of $10.1 million from 2002. Results in 2002 include the sale of the VeriSign, Inc. stock for a loss of $9.0 million. See Note 3 to the consolidated financial statements.\n\nNon-operating income was a gain of $0.4 million, an increase of $0.5 million, due to an increase in patronage equity earned from CoBank, the Company’s primary lender, and due to interest income from the proceeds on the sale of the Virginia 10 RSA Limited partnership, offset by losses recorded for the Company’s portfolio of investments.\n\nThe Company provided for income taxes of $5.3 million in 2003, which is an effective tax rate of 35.2% due to the effect of state tax apportionment rules and reduction in the liability for tax exposures. On a normalized basis the Company would have recorded taxes at an effective tax rate of approximately 39%. Last year’s effective tax rate was 42.2% due to the impact of net operating loss carry forwards generated in several states with higher tax rates. The Company currently operates in four states. Due to apportionment rules and geographic operations of subsidiaries where the Company’s profits and losses arise, the Company is generating profits in states with lower tax rates, while generating losses in states with higher tax rates. The Company cautions readers that the current effective tax rate may not be the same rate at which tax benefits or tax expenses are recorded in the future. The Company’s state apportionments, profits and losses and state tax rates may change, therefore changing the effective rate at which taxes are provided for or at which tax benefits accrue. In the near term, under existing operating results and current tax rates, the Company anticipates a normalized effective tax rate will be approximately 39%.\n\nNet income from continuing operations was $9.8 million, an increase of $12.7 million from 2002. The results are primarily made up of the improvement in the PCS operation and the one-time impact of the losses on the sale of VeriSign stock in 2002.\n\nSHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY ■ 48" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6496413417453982, + "doc_id": "5df834686488f9003b2e6cbb89f770e0e1cc79e67efb04aeac065ea8873d9e42", + "edit_distance": 0.631578947368421, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9145254579272538, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "RETAIL We will create a neighborhood where shopping and living become one, like the great cities of San Francisco and Paris.\n\nRETAIL We will create a neighborhood where shopping and living become one, like the great cities of San Francisco and Paris.\n\nProject CityCenter has already captured the imagination of architects and designers around the world as the concept has been widely praised for its vision.\n\n## BUILDING CONTINUOUS VELOCITY", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Project CityCenter has already captured the imagination of architects and designers around the world as the concept has been widely praised for its vision.\n\nRETAIL We will create a neighborhood where shopping and living become one, like the great cities of San Francisco and Paris.\n\n# BUILDING CONTINUOUS VELOCITY" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7066458232474494, + "doc_id": "71099ced97667c65e81b243624a4c97ca0e565bb7b312453db52fe50d852d01d", + "edit_distance": 0.2483221476510067, + "f1_score": 0.8152173913043479, + "meteor": 0.7586724274461316, + "precision": 0.8620689655172413, + "pred_md": "Great brands are like great people. The best ones blend a distinctive personality with a strong character. They combine a 'can-do' attitude with a 'can't-wait-to-try-somethingnew' enthusiasm. They know themselves as well as they know the people who associate with them. They know that while good looks are important, beauty is only skin deep; it's what's inside that counts.\n\nBecause all of our brands have something unique and valuable to offer, we're letting them speak for themselves. As for the people who know and love our brands, we've invited a few to share an 'up close and personal' look into why and how HON INDUSTRIES is …\n\n## THE PERFECT MATCH", + "recall": 0.7731958762886598, + "true_md": "Great brands are like great people. The best ones blend a distinctive personality with a strong character. They combine a “can-do” attitude with a “can’t-wait-to-try-something- new” enthusiasm. They know themselves as well as they know the people who associate with them. They know that while good looks are important, beauty is only skin deep; it’s what’s inside that counts. \n\nBecause all of our brands have some- thing unique and valuable to offer, we’re letting them speak for themselves. As for the people who know and love our brands, we’ve invited a few to share an “up close and personal” look into why and how HON INDUSTRIES is …\n\nT H E P E R F E C T M A T C H" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6315552371794037, + "doc_id": "6e13b3b7f7290e0b07dff3cc57f92fb43858f0ba2c494b08c4111f32dca1fb82", + "edit_distance": 0.18181818181818182, + "f1_score": 0.9333333333333333, + "meteor": 0.9728931830381106, + "precision": 0.875, + "pred_md": "FINANCIAL SECTION\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 68\n\n## FINANCIAL SECTION", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "FINANCIAL SECTION\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 68\n\nFINANCIAL SECTION" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7223539645099948, + "doc_id": "7f8169a7a927d04f92cf55317c9d2065f4f427f8577297fe552bda893d7a835e", + "edit_distance": 0.5038560411311054, + "f1_score": 0.8661800486618004, + "meteor": 0.7948093158612639, + "precision": 0.898989898989899, + "pred_md": "The optimistic message expanded on The Hartford's 'Investor Survival Guide,' a brochure PLANCO used throughout the year to help financial professionals advise their clients amid market volatility. PLANCO sent out more than 500,000 guides in the second half of 2001 alone. And that was just a small part of the company's massive educational efforts during the year. Those efforts included 5,000 instructional seminars-1,200 more than in 2000-and constant advice and selling strategies for The Hartford's products.\n\n'Our value is in providing education to financial professionals,' says Tim Seifert, PLANCO senior vice president and managing director. 'One of their major concerns in 2001 was how to show their clients that we've been through downturns and crises before.'\n\nPLANCO wholesalers did that and much more. They provided reliable counsel only a trusted partner can offer. They helped financial professionals successfully show clients the benefits of using short-term buying opportunities to enhance their long-term investment positions. Consequently, despite the\n\n26\n\nprolonged market correction, many of the financial professionals PLANCO works with-and their clientsearned above-market returns in 2001.\n\nPLANCO's extraordinary service and steady support during 2001 reveal how well the company's wholesalers always think ahead and anticipate financial professionals' needs. That does more than sell financial products; it builds trust. Trust is the bedrock on which PLANCO was founded 25 years ago. Trust-along with a constant flow of reliable information and advice-is what has helped PLANCO's clients weather changes in the financial markets over those 25 years. And trust is what makes PLANCO the financial advisor's 'partner of choice' today.\n\n'We want to be a trusted advisor to our clients so they in turn can be trusted advisors to theirs,' says Seifert. 'Our role doesn't always revolve around products. Sometimes it just means being the go-to person, the one who can solve difficult problems. Financial professionals need an inner circle of people they can always turn to.'\n\nPLANCO is at the center of that circle.", + "recall": 0.8356807511737089, + "true_md": "The optimistic message expanded on The Hartford’s “Investor Survival Guide,” a brochure PLANCO used throughout the year to help financial pro- fessionals advise their clients amid market volatility. PLANCO sent out more than 500,000 guides in the sec- ond half of 2001 alone. And that was just a small part of the company’s massive educational efforts during the year. Those efforts included 5,000 instructional semi- nars—1,200 more than in 2000—and constant advice and selling strategies for The Hartford’s products.\n\n“Our value is in providing education to financial professionals,” says Tim Seifert, PLANCO senior vice president and managing director. “One of their major concerns in 2001 was how to show their clients that we’ve been through downturns and crises before.” \n\nPLANCO wholesalers did that and much more. They provided reliable counsel only a trusted partner can offer. They helped financial professionals success- fully show clients the benefits of using short-term buy- ing opportunities to enhance their long-term investment positions. Consequently, despite the \n\n“We want to be a trusted advisor to our clients so they in turn can be trusted advisors to theirs,” says Seifert. “Our role doesn’t always revolve around prod- ucts. Sometimes it just means being the go-to person, the one who can solve difficult problems. Financial pro- fessionals need an inner circle of people they can always turn to.”\n\nPLANCO is at the center of that circle.\n\nPLANCO’s extraordinary service and steady sup- port during 2001 reveal how well the company’s whole- salers always think ahead and anticipate financial professionals’ needs. That does more than sell financial products; it builds trust. Trust is the bedrock on which PLANCO was founded 25 years ago. Trust—along with a constant flow of reliable information and advice—is what has helped PLANCO’s clients weather changes in the financial markets over those 25 years. And trust is what makes PLANCO the financial advisor’s “partner of choice” today.\n\nprolonged market correction, many of the financial pro- fessionals PLANCO works with—and their clients— earned above-market returns in 2001. \n\n26" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8784554489701111, + "doc_id": "ee37a8eec5f018e578d8d537de1dcac40f79dace4dff4695cf5aaff590324791", + "edit_distance": 0.10810810810810811, + "f1_score": 0.9666666666666666, + "meteor": 0.9447154471544716, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "50\n\n## STATEMENTS OF FINANCIAL PERFORMANCE\n\nfor the year ended 31 December 2004\n\nThe statements of financial performance are to be read in conjunction with the notes to the financial statements.\n\nAnnual Report 2004", + "recall": 0.9354838709677419, + "true_md": "## STATEMENTS OF FINANCIAL PERFORMANCE\n\nfor the year ended 31 December 2004\n\nThe statements of financial performance are to be read in conjunction with th e notes to the financial statements.\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\n50" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "f556167ac3284665652050b1b0bc1e6f5af27f54f17f27566c60c80f6f134a92", + "edit_distance": 0.8653846153846154, + "f1_score": 0.22727272727272727, + "meteor": 0.2171814671814672, + "precision": 0.23809523809523808, + "pred_md": "ÓÇääÊ œÀ̅Êglyph<c=19,font=/AAAAAB+JansonText-Bold>ˆÀÃÌÊ-ÌÀiiÌ]Ê->˜Êglyph<c=27,font=/AAAAAB+JansonText-Bold>œÃi]Êglyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAB+JansonText-Bold>>ˆvœÀ ˜ˆ>ʙx£Î{", + "recall": 0.21739130434782608, + "true_md": "Ó Ç ä ä Ê œ À Ì … Ê ˆ À Ã Ì Ê - Ì À i i Ì ] Ê - > ˜ Ê œ à i ] Ê >  ˆ v œ À ˜ ˆ > Ê ™ x £ Î {" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8889186718264879, + "doc_id": "4b36c40278365899a2e1628f6a77180812d2b9351fdc5cf4875c9c8c9a4f64d3", + "edit_distance": 0.1380952380952381, + "f1_score": 0.9344262295081968, + "meteor": 0.9436152305092318, + "precision": 0.9715909090909091, + "pred_md": "## 32. Additional Financial Instruments Disclosure (continued)\n\n## (b) Interest rate risk exposure\n\nTo manage interest rate risk the Santos Group has entered into interest rate swap contracts with maturities ranging from one to eighteen years.\n\nAt 31 December 2004 the Santos Group has open interest rate swap contracts which if closed out would have resulted in a gain of $44.2 million (2003: gain of $63.3 million).\n\nThe Santos Group's exposure to interest rate risk and the effective weighted average interest rates for classes of interest-bearing financial assets and financial liabilities is set out below:\n\n* After incorporating the effect of interest rate swaps\n\n** Notional principal amounts\n\n## (c) Commodity price risk exposure\n\nThe Santos Group is exposed to commodity price fluctuations through the sale of petroleum products denominated in US dollars. The Santos Group enters into commodity crude oil price swap and option contracts and natural gas swap and option contracts to manage its commodity price risk.\n\nAt 31 December 2004 the Santos Group has open oil price swap contracts with settlement expiry dates up to nine months. If closed out at balance date these contracts would have resulted in a loss of $11.2 million (2003: loss of $1.8 million).\n\n## (d) Credit risk exposure\n\nCredit risk represents the potential financial loss if counterparties fail to perform as contracted.\n\nThe credit risk on financial assets, excluding investments, of the Santos Group which have been recognised on the statements of financial position is indicated by the carrying amount.\n\nThe credit risk on off-balance sheet derivatives is the cost of replacing the contract if the counterparty were to default and is measured by their market value at balance date. As at 31 December 2004, counterparty default of foreign currency swaps, foreign currency option contracts, oil price swap contracts and interest rate swap contracts would result in a loss of $37.2 million (2003: loss of $61.9 million).\n\nThe Santos Group controls credit risk on derivative financial instruments by setting exposure limits related to the credit worthiness of counterparties, all of which are selected banks or institutions with a Standard and Poor's rating of A or better.\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\n85", + "recall": 0.9, + "true_md": "## 32. Additional Financial Instruments Disclosure (continued)\n\n## (b) Interest rate risk exposure\n\n## (c) Commodity price risk exposure\n\n## (d) Credit risk exposure\n\nTo manage interest rate risk the Santos Group has entered into interest r ate swap contracts with maturities ranging from one to eighteen years.\n\nAt 31 December 2004 the Santos Group has open interest rate swap contr acts which if closed out would have resulted in a gain of $44.2 million (2003: gain of $63.3 million).\n\nThe Santos Group’s exposure to interest rate risk and the effective weigh ted average interest rates for classes of interest-bearing financial assets and financial liabilities is set out below:\n\n* After incorporating the effect of interest rate swaps\n\n** Notional principal amounts\n\nThe Santos Group is exposed to commodity price fluctuations through th e sale of petroleum products denominated in US dollars. The Santos Group enters into commodity crude oil price swap and option contracts and natur al gas swap and option contracts to manage its commodity price risk.\n\nAt 31 December 2004 the Santos Group has open oil price swap contracts with settlement expiry dates up to nine months. If closed out at balance date these contracts would have resulted in a loss of $11.2 milli on (2003: loss of $1.8 million).\n\nCredit risk represents the potential financial loss if counterparties fail to perform as contracted.\n\nThe credit risk on financial assets, excluding investments, of the Santos Group which have been recognised on the statements of financial position is indicated by the carrying amount.\n\nThe credit risk on off-balance sheet derivatives is the cost of replacing th e contract if the counterparty were to default and is measured by their market value at balance date. As at 31 December 2004, counterparty def ault of foreign currency swaps, foreign currency option contracts, oil price swap contracts and interest rate swap contracts would result in a loss of $37.2 million (2003: loss of $61.9 million).\n\nThe Santos Group controls credit risk on derivative financial instrumen ts by setting exposure limits related to the credit worthiness of counterparties, all of which are selected banks or institutions with a Stan dard and Poor’s rating of A or better.\n\nAnnual Report 2004 85" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9303945148190693, + "doc_id": "d08dcaedeee911c5815ad1275190c72c0d6a70120a977092716360505e924d41", + "edit_distance": 0.06480721903199343, + "f1_score": 0.9683470105509965, + "meteor": 0.9731576037767049, + "precision": 0.9627039627039627, + "pred_md": "guarantees for financial instruments and as deposits with customs officials. The decrease resulted primarily from the settlement of the forw a rd f o eign exchange contracts using restricted cash and a release of restricted cash resulting from the posting of a surety bond with the Hungarian r banking institution that supplies cash to the Company's ATM network in Hungary.\n\nTrade Accounts Trade accounts receivable increased to $9.5 million at December 31, 2000 from $7.9 million at December 31, 1999 due primarily to sales from the Software Solutions Segment and increased Network Services Segment revenues.\n\nP r o p t lant and Equipment e r , P y Net pro p e rt , plant and equipment decreased to $31.7 million at December 31, 2000 from $36.7 million at y December 31, 1999. This decrease is due primarily to a reduction in the rate of installation of ATMs and fixed asset additions. Fixed asset d e reciation was in excess of fixed asset additions, and the write-off of $800,000 in ATM hard w a re further reduced the net fixed asset position. p\n\nIntangible Assets The decrease in net intangible assets to $2.6 million at December 31, 2000 from $16.3 million at December 31, 1999 is due primarily to the $11.2 million write-down of goodwill and other identifiable intangible assets associated with the Software Solutions Segment (see Note 9 to the Consolidated Financial Statements - Intangibles). In addition, the decrease is the result of amortization of purchased intangibles a c q u ed in the Euronet USA acquisition in 1998, and the SBK and Dash acquisitions in 1999. ir\n\nCurrent Liabilities C u rrent liabilities decreased to $20.5 million at December 31, 2000 from $26.9 million at December 31, 1999. This decre a s e is due primarily to decreases in accrued expenses, billings in excess of costs and estimated earnings on software installation costs and settlement of the forw a rd foreign exchange contracts.\n\nCapital Lease Total capital lease obligations including current installments increased to $11.5 million at December 31, 2000 from $10.6 million at December 31, 1999. This increase is due primarily to additional capital leases resulting from the Company's purchase of Budapest Bank's AT M network, consisting of 147 ATMs on May 1, 2000.\n\nNotes Payable Notes payable increased to $77.2 million at December 31, 2000 from $72.8 million at December 31, 1999. This is the result of several transactions as follows:\n\nS t o c o d Deficit k h l 's e r Stockholders' deficit increased to $44.8 million at December 31, 2000 from $9.5 million at December 31, 1999. This is due to the net loss for the year ended December 31, 2000 of $49.6 million which was offset by an increase in additional paid in capital of $14.4 million due to the sale of 1,882,723 shares of common stock for proceeds of $13.0 million, the issue of $400,000 of warrants and the exercise of 390,231 stock options for proceeds of $900,000.\n\n## Year 2000 Compliance\n\nThe Company's European and U.S. Year 2000 compliance teams re p o rted no material Year 2000 problems during the advent of the year 2000, either with Euro n e t 's own systems or the systems of its customers. The Company is unaware of any material Year 2000 complications to date.\n\n## Impact of New Accounting Pronouncements Not Yet Adopted\n\nS FAS 133 The Company is re q u i red to adopt Statement of Financial Accounting Standard (SFAS) No. 133 'Accounting for Derivative I n uments and Hedging Activities' as amended by SFAS No. 138 for US GAAP re p o rting as of 1 January 2001. SFAS 133 and 138 establish str accounting and re p o rting standards for derivative instruments, including certain derivative instruments embedded in other contracts (collectively re f red to as derivatives). er\n\nIn accordance with SFAS No. 133, entities are re q u i red to carry all derivative instruments on the balance sheet at fair value. The accounting for movements in fair value of derivatives depends upon whether it has been designated and qualifies as part of a hedging relationship and, if so, the reason for holding it. If certain conditions are met, the Company may elect to designate a derivative instrument as a hedge of exposures. If the hedged exposure is a fair value exposure, movements in fair value are recognized in earnings with the offsetting gain or loss on the hedged item attributable to the hedged risk. If the hedged exposure is a cash flow exposure, the effective portion of the movement in fair value of the derivative i ument is initially re p o rted as a component of other comprehensive income and subsequently reclassified into earnings at the time the nstr f o ecasted transaction impacts earnings. Amounts excluded from the assessment of hedge effectiveness as well as the ineffective portion of r movements in fair value of the derivative instrument are re p o rted in earnings in the current period. Accounting for foreign currency hedges is similar to the accounting for fair value and cash flow hedges. If a derivative instrument is not designated as a hedge, movements in the fair value of derivative instruments are recognized in earnings.\n\nUnder the provisions of SFAS No. 133, the method that the Company will use to assess effectiveness of a hedge, as well as the measure m e n t a p oach for determining the ineffectiveness of a hedge, must be established at the inception of a hedge. The Company formally documents all pr relationships between hedging instruments and hedged items as well as its risk management objective and strategy for entering into the transaction. This process includes linking derivatives designated as fair value or cash flow hedges to specific assets, liabilities or firm commitments on forecasted transactions. This process is repeated on a periodic basis. If at any time the Company determines a hedge is no longer eff e c t i v e , hedge accounting is immediately discontinued and the derivative is marked to market with any gain or loss re c o rded in earnings.\n\nThe Company adopted the provisions of SFAS No. 133 on 1 January 2001 and this had no impact on the Company's consolidated financial statements as the Company does not have any derivative financial instruments. Future changes in the fair value for any remaining trading securities will be re c o rded through earnings. Changes in fair value of available for sale securities will be re c o rded in other comprehensive income.\n\n2 1", + "recall": 0.9740566037735849, + "true_md": "guarantees for financial instruments and as deposits with customs officials. The decrease resulted primarily from the settlement of the forw a rd f o reign exchange contracts using restricted cash and a release of restricted cash resulting from the posting of a surety bond with the Hungarian banking institution that supplies cash to the Company’s ATM network in Hungary. \n\nTrade Accounts Trade accounts receivable increased to $9.5 million at December 31, 2000 from $7.9 million at December 31, 1999 due primarily to sales from the Software Solutions Segment and increased Network Services Segment revenues. \n\nP r o p e r t y, Plant and Equipment Net pro p e rt y, plant and equipment decreased to $31.7 million at December 31, 2000 from $36.7 million at December 31, 1999. This decrease is due primarily to a reduction in the rate of installation of ATMs and fixed asset additions. Fixed asset d e p reciation was in excess of fixed asset additions, and the write-off of $800,000 in ATM hard w a re further reduced the net fixed asset position. \n\nIntangible Assets The decrease in net intangible assets to $2.6 million at December 31, 2000 from $16.3 million at December 31, 1999 is due primarily to the $11.2 million write-down of goodwill and other identifiable intangible assets associated with the Software Solutions Segment (see Note 9 to the Consolidated Financial Statements – Intangibles). In addition, the decrease is the result of amortization of purchased intangibles a c q u i red in the Euronet USA acquisition in 1998, and the SBK and Dash acquisitions in 1999. \n\nCurrent Liabilities C u rrent liabilities decreased to $20.5 million at December 31, 2000 from $26.9 million at December 31, 1999. This decre a s e is due primarily to decreases in accrued expenses, billings in excess of costs and estimated earnings on software installation costs and settlement of the forw a rd foreign exchange contracts. \n\nCapital Lease Total capital lease obligations including current installments increased to $11.5 million at December 31, 2000 from $10.6 million at December 31, 1999. This increase is due primarily to additional capital leases resulting from the Company's purchase of Budapest Bank’s AT M network, consisting of 147 ATMs on May 1, 2000. \n\nNotes Payable Notes payable increased to $77.2 million at December 31, 2000 from $72.8 million at December 31, 1999. This is the result of several transactions as follows: \n\nS t o c k h o l d e r’s Deficit Stockholders’ deficit increased to $44.8 million at December 31, 2000 from $9.5 million at December 31, 1999. This is due to the net loss for the year ended December 31, 2000 of $49.6 million which was offset by an increase in additional paid in capital of $14.4 million due to the sale of 1,882,723 shares of common stock for proceeds of $13.0 million, the issue of $400,000 of warrants and the exercise of 390,231 stock options for proceeds of $900,000.\n\n## Year 2000 Compliance\n\n## Impact of New Accounting Pronouncements Not Yet Adopted\n\nThe Company’s European and U.S. Year 2000 compliance teams re p o rted no material Year 2000 problems during the advent of the year 2000, either with Euro n e t ’s own systems or the systems of its customers. The Company is unaware of any material Year 2000 complications to date. \n\nS FAS 133 The Company is re q u i red to adopt Statement of Financial Accounting Standard (SFAS) No. 133 “Accounting for Derivative I n s t ruments and Hedging Activities” as amended by SFAS No. 138 for US GAAP re p o rting as of 1 January 2001. SFAS 133 and 138 establish accounting and re p o rting standards for derivative instruments, including certain derivative instruments embedded in other contracts (collectively re f e rred to as derivatives). \n\nIn accordance with SFAS No. 133, entities are re q u i red to carry all derivative instruments on the balance sheet at fair value. The accounting for movements in fair value of derivatives depends upon whether it has been designated and qualifies as part of a hedging relationship and, if so, the reason for holding it. If certain conditions are met, the Company may elect to designate a derivative instrument as a hedge of exposures. If the hedged exposure is a fair value exposure, movements in fair value are recognized in earnings with the offsetting gain or loss on the hedged item attributable to the hedged risk. If the hedged exposure is a cash flow exposure, the effective portion of the movement in fair value of the derivative i n s t rument is initially re p o rted as a component of other comprehensive income and subsequently reclassified into earnings at the time the f o recasted transaction impacts earnings. Amounts excluded from the assessment of hedge effectiveness as well as the ineffective portion of movements in fair value of the derivative instrument are re p o rted in earnings in the current period. Accounting for foreign currency hedges is similar to the accounting for fair value and cash flow hedges. If a derivative instrument is not designated as a hedge, movements in the fair value of derivative instruments are recognized in earnings. \n\nUnder the provisions of SFAS No. 133, the method that the Company will use to assess effectiveness of a hedge, as well as the measure m e n t a p p roach for determining the ineffectiveness of a hedge, must be established at the inception of a hedge. The Company formally documents all relationships between hedging instruments and hedged items as well as its risk management objective and strategy for entering into the transaction. This process includes linking derivatives designated as fair value or cash flow hedges to specific assets, liabilities or firm commitments on forecasted transactions. This process is repeated on a periodic basis. If at any time the Company determines a hedge is no longer eff e c t i v e , hedge accounting is immediately discontinued and the derivative is marked to market with any gain or loss re c o rded in earnings. \n\nThe Company adopted the provisions of SFAS No. 133 on 1 January 2001 and this had no impact on the Company’s consolidated financial statements as the Company does not have any derivative financial instruments. Future changes in the fair value for any remaining trading securities will be re c o rded through earnings. Changes in fair value of available for sale securities will be re c o rded in other comprehensive income. \n\n2 1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8423639627441546, + "doc_id": "c4ee35d0e12c3163dfae08dc83f72243c9739577d23d27cfadd5c178a8a29bce", + "edit_distance": 0.16188524590163936, + "f1_score": 0.9007936507936508, + "meteor": 0.9063731629900954, + "precision": 0.9380165289256198, + "pred_md": "## HON INDUSTRIES 2003\n\n## TO OUR SHAREHOLDERS:\n\nLEFT: Stan A. Askren, PRESIDENT\n\nLEFT: Stan A. Askren, PRESIDENT\n\nRIGHT: Jack D. Michaels, CHAIRMAN AND CHIEF EXECUTIVE OFFICER\n\nAs we celebrate our 60th year, HON INDUSTRIES has seen much change. The industry has changed. The world has changed. Our business has changed. What has not changed are the culture and values on which we were founded: integrity, fairness, and respect - in the treatment of others, continuous improvement, and responsiveness to those who buy our products and services. In our unique and powerful member-owner culture, throughout our history, every member has had an opportunity to participate in making the business better. We did so again in 2003.\n\nWe outperformed our peers. We grew our sales and profits. We gained market share by providing strong brands, innovative products and services, and greater value to our endusers. We continued to increase our gross margins, a direct result of our ongoing commitment to lean initiatives. We used our strong, positive cash flow to invest in our business for the long term and returned profits to shareholders. We accomplished all of this in a very challenging economy and market.\n\nAlthough we are proud of what we achieved, our philosophy of constructive discontent drives us to continue to challenge ourselves to do better. We believe to succeed in a business environment of ongoing change and continuous transformation we also must continue to change. Today, we are\n\nleaner, more focused, and have more clearly defined brands than ever before. Our challenge is to grow, aggressively and profitably, through market-driven solutions while maintaining focus on what we do best - operational excellence. Our transformation continues:\n\n## BUILDING BRAND MARKET POWER\n\nWe are investing significantly in our brands and increasing our understanding of our diverse range of end-users and the solutions they want. We are building market power through several initiatives: focused selling models; clear brand identity; targeted advertising; expanded channel presence; and aggressive products and solutions development. We are strengthening our ability to be the 'perfect match' with end-users in every segment we serve.\n\n## ACHIEVING BEST TOTAL COST AND LEAN ENTERPRISE\n\n'Best total cost' means more than being a low-cost manufacturer. It requires us to think about the entire value stream where and how to manufacture, ship, install, outsource, assemble, service, procure, and sell - all to provide the best total value to our end-users. We implemented lean initiatives,\n\n13", + "recall": 0.8664122137404581, + "true_md": "HON INDUSTRIES 2003\n\n## T O O U R S H A R E H O L D E R S :\n\nLEFT: Stan A. Askren, PRESIDENT RIGHT: Jack D. Michaels, CHAIRMAN AND CHIEF EXECUTIVE OFFICER\n\nAs we celebrate our 60th year, HON INDUSTRIES has seen much change. The industry has changed. The world has changed. Our business has changed. What has not changed are the culture and values on which we were founded: integ- rity, fairness, and respect — in the treatment of others, continuous improvement, and responsiveness to those who buy our products and services. In our unique and powerful member-owner culture, throughout our history, every member has had an opportunity to participate in making the business better. We did so again in 2003.\n\n We outperformed our peers. We grew our sales and profits. We gained market share by providing strong brands, innovative products and services, and greater value to our end- users. We continued to increase our gross margins, a direct result of our ongoing commitment to lean initiatives. We used our strong, positive cash flow to invest in our business for the long term and returned profits to shareholders. We accom- plished all of this in a very challenging economy and market.\n\n Although we are proud of what we achieved, our phi- losophy of constructive discontent drives us to continue to challenge ourselves to do better. We believe to succeed in a business environment of ongoing change and continuous trans- formation we also must continue to change. Today, we are \n\nleaner, more focused, and have more clearly defined brands than ever before. Our challenge is to grow, aggressively and profitably, through market-driven solutions while maintain- ing focus on what we do best — operational excellence. Our transformation continues:\n\nWe are investing significantly in our brands and increasing our understanding of our diverse range of end-users and the solu- tions they want. We are building market power through several initiatives: focused selling models; clear brand identity; tar- geted advertising; expanded channel presence; and aggressive products and solutions development. We are strengthening our ability to be the “perfect match” with end-users in every seg- ment we serve.\n\n“Best total cost” means more than being a low-cost manufac- turer. It requires us to think about the entire value stream — where and how to manufacture, ship, install, outsource, assemble, service, procure, and sell — all to provide the best total value to our end-users. We implemented lean initiatives, \n\n13\n\n## ACHIEVING BEST TOTAL COST AND LEAN ENTERPRISE\n\n## BUILDING BRAND MARKET POWER" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8293073362778254, + "doc_id": "b47225f4a9c00c41079302a5687d20b30555bdeb20b780dfe557d2b3ca4fc9af", + "edit_distance": 0.09610983981693363, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9893812862064458, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## CORPORATE OFFICERS\n\n## Carlos Ghosn\n\nChief Executive Officer North American Operations (MC-NA & MC-US) Global Communications, CSR and IR\n\nGlobal Internal Audit\n\n## Toshiyuki Shiga\n\nChief Operating Officer\n\nJapan Operations (MC-J)\n\nGOM Operations (MC-GOM)\n\nChina Operations\n\nGlobal Marketing and Sales\n\nGlobal Aftersales and Conversion Business\n\nCorporate Quality Assurance and Customer Service\n\nHuman Resources\n\nTreasury\n\n## Itaru Koeda\n\nExecutive Vice President Administration for Affiliated Companies (MC-AFL) External and Government Affairs Intellectual Asset Management Industry Machinery Marine\n\n## Tadao Takahashi\n\nExecutive Vice President Manufacturing SCM (Supply Chain Management)\n\nGlobal IS\n\n## Hiroto Saikawa\n\nExecutive Vice President European Operations (MC-E) Purchasing\n\n## Mitsuhiko Yamashita\n\nExecutive Vice President\n\nResearch, Technology and Engineering Development\n\nCost Engineering\n\n## Carlos Tavares\n\nExecutive Vice President Design Corporate Planning Product Planning Market Intelligence\n\nLCV Business\n\n## Takeshi Isayama\n\nVice Chairman\n\nExternal and Government Affairs Dept.\n\nIntellectual Asset Management Office\n\n## Eiji Imai\n\nSenior Vice President\n\nCorporate Quality Assurance and Customer Service Div.\n\n## Bernard Rey\n\nSenior Vice President CEO/COO Office Global Motorsports Alliance Coordination Office Security Office Legal Dept. Organization Development and Process Re-engineering\n\nSecretariat\n\n## Shiro Nakamura\n\nSenior Vice President Design\n\n## Kazuhiko Toida\n\nSenior Vice President Japan Marketing & Sales MC-Dealer Dealer Network Div.\n\nFleet Business Div.\n\n## Hidetoshi Imazu\n\nSenior Vice President Cost Reduction Promotion Office Manufacturing and Industrial Engineering Div. Oppama Plant Tochigi Plant Kyushu Plant Yokohama Plant Iwaki Plant\n\nOverseas Parts Logistics Control Dept.\n\n## Alain-Pierre Raynaud\n\nSenior Vice President Global Controller\n\n## Sadao Sekiyama\n\nSenior Vice President\n\nVehicle Production Engineering Div.\n\n## Kimiyasu Nakamura\n\nSenior Vice President\n\nVehicle Design Engineering Div. No.3 Vehicle Performance Development Dept. Body Engineering Dept. Interior and Exterior Trim Engineering Dept.\n\n## Steven Wilhite\n\nSenior Vice President Global Sales Management Dept. Marketing and Sales Brand Management Office Global Marketing Dept. Global Infiniti Support Dept.\n\n## Junichi Endo\n\nSenior Vice President Global Aftersales, Div. Aftersales Div. (Japan) GOM Aftersales Div. Conversion Business\n\n## Hitoshi Kawaguchi\n\nSenior Vice President\n\nHuman Resources Dept. Diversity Development Office\n\n## Minoru Shinohara\n\nSenior Vice President Integrated System Planning Office Environmental and Safety Engineering Dept. Technology Planning Dept. Materials Engineering Dept. Advanced Vehicle Engineering Div.\n\nElectronics Engineering Div.\n\n## Yo Usuba\n\nSenior Vice President Powertrain Engineering Div.\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\n109\n\nCORPORATE DATA", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## CORPORATE OFFICERS\n\nCarlos Ghosn Chief Executive Officer North American Operations (MC-NA & MC-US) Global Communications, CSR and IR Global Internal Audit\n\nToshiyuki Shiga Chief Operating Officer Japan Operations (MC-J) GOM Operations (MC-GOM) China Operations Global Marketing and Sales Global Aftersales and Conversion Business Corporate Quality Assurance and Customer Service Human Resources Treasury\n\nItaru Koeda Executive Vice President Administration for Affiliated Companies (MC-AFL) External and Government Affairs Intellectual Asset Management Industry Machinery Marine\n\nTadao Takahashi Executive Vice President Manufacturing SCM (Supply Chain Management) Global IS\n\nHiroto Saikawa Executive Vice President European Operations (MC-E) Purchasing\n\nMitsuhiko Yamashita Executive Vice President Research, Technology and Engineering Development Cost Engineering\n\nCarlos Tavares Executive Vice President Design Corporate Planning Product Planning Market Intelligence LCV Business\n\nTakeshi Isayama Vice Chairman External and Government Affairs Dept. Intellectual Asset Management Office\n\nEiji Imai Senior Vice President Corporate Quality Assurance and Customer Service Div.\n\nBernard Rey Senior Vice President CEO/COO Office Global Motorsports Alliance Coordination Office Security Office Legal Dept. Organization Development and Process Re-engineering Secretariat\n\nShiro Nakamura Senior Vice President Design\n\nKazuhiko Toida Senior Vice President Japan Marketing & Sales MC-Dealer Dealer Network Div. Fleet Business Div.\n\nHidetoshi Imazu Senior Vice President Cost Reduction Promotion Office Manufacturing and Industrial Engineering Div. Oppama Plant Tochigi Plant Kyushu Plant Yokohama Plant Iwaki Plant Overseas Parts Logistics Control Dept.\n\nAlain-Pierre Raynaud Senior Vice President Global Controller\n\nSadao Sekiyama Senior Vice President Vehicle Production Engineering Div.\n\nKimiyasu Nakamura Senior Vice President Vehicle Design Engineering Div. No.3 Vehicle Performance Development Dept. Body Engineering Dept. Interior and Exterior Trim Engineering Dept.\n\nSteven Wilhite Senior Vice President Global Sales Management Dept. Marketing and Sales Brand Management Office Global Marketing Dept. Global Infiniti Support Dept.\n\nJunichi Endo Senior Vice President Global Aftersales, Div. Aftersales Div. (Japan) GOM Aftersales Div. Conversion Business\n\nHitoshi Kawaguchi Senior Vice President Human Resources Dept. Diversity Development Office\n\nMinoru Shinohara Senior Vice President Integrated System Planning Office Environmental and Safety Engineering Dept. Technology Planning Dept. Materials Engineering Dept. Advanced Vehicle Engineering Div. Electronics Engineering Div.\n\nYo Usuba Senior Vice President Powertrain Engineering Div.\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 109\n\nCORPORATE DATA" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9778460448698021, + "doc_id": "4688e86f10b48fbe7186303a85133f076a125206222f0cc5c64c1b9992a39eba", + "edit_distance": 0.05555555555555555, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999142661179699, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "52\n\n## STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS\n\nfor the year ended 31 December 2004\n\nThe statements of cash flows are to be read in conjunction with the notes of the financial statements.\n\nAnnual Report 2004", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS\n\nfor the year ended 31 December 2004\n\nThe statements of cash flows are to be read in conjunction with the notes of the financial statements.\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\n52" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8838138284981141, + "doc_id": "4604aab2a6736ad3ca175f5156c2e570cbdd0896b8c9007db37697e8e5c24d35", + "edit_distance": 0.8302961275626424, + "f1_score": 0.9359165424739195, + "meteor": 0.6759975881229093, + "precision": 0.9721362229102167, + "pred_md": "48\n\n## 2. Principal Activities\n\nThe principal activities of the consolidated entity during the financial year were: petroleum exploration, the production, treatment and marketing of natural gas, crude oil, condensate, naphtha and liquid petroleum gas, and the transportation by pipeline of crude oil. No significant change in the nature of these activities has occurred during the year.\n\n## 3. Review and Results of Operations\n\nA review of the operations and of the results of those operations of the consolidated entity during the financial year are contained on pages 2 to 7, 10 to 12 and 14 to 28 of this Annual Report.\n\n## 4. Dividends\n\nOn 23 February 2005, Directors declared:-\n\n- (i) that a fully franked final dividend of 18 cents per fully paid ordinary share be paid on 31 March 2005 to shareholders registered in the books of the Company at the close of business on 4 March 2005. This final dividend amounts to approximately $105.4 million; and\n- (ii) that in accordance with the Terms of Issue, a fully franked dividend of $2.4497 per Franked Unsecured Equity Listed Securities be paid on 31 March 2005 to holders registered in the books of the Company at the close of business on 4 March 2005, amounting to $14.7 million.\n\nA fully franked final dividend of $87.7 million (15 cents per share) was paid on 31 March 2004 on the 2003 results. Indication of this dividend payment was disclosed in the 2003 Annual Report. A fully franked interim dividend of $87.8 million (15 cents per share) was paid to members on 30 September 2004.\n\nIn accordance with the Terms of Issue, fully franked dividends of $3.2940 per reset convertible preference share were paid on 31 March 2004 and 30 September 2004 respectively; each amounting to $11.5 million.\n\n## 5. State of Affairs\n\nIn the opinion of the Directors, there were no significant changes in the state of affairs of the consolidated entity that occurred during the financial year other than those referred to on pages 2 to 7, 10 to 12 and 14 to 28 of this Annual Report.\n\n## 6. Environmental Regulation\n\nThe consolidated entity's Australian operations are subject to various environmental regulations under Commonwealth, State and Territory legislation, including under applicable petroleum legislation and in respect to its South Australian operations, licences (numbers EPA 2569, 1259, 14145, 888 and 2164) issued under the Environment Protection Act 1993, and its Queensland operations, licence no. 150029 issued under the Environmental Protection Act 1994. Applicable legislation and requisite environmental licences are specified in the entity's Environmental, Health and Safety Compliance Database, which forms part of the consolidated entity's overall Environmental Management System. Compliance performance is monitored on a regular basis and in various forms, including environmental audits conducted by regulatory authorities and by the Company, either through internal or external resources. During the financial year, except as mentioned below, no fines were imposed, no prosecutions were instituted and no notice of non-compliance with the above referenced regulations was received from a regulatory body. A directive was issued by the Northern Territory Department of Business, Industry and Resource Development in December 2004 in relation to flaring of gas at Mereenie under Clause 619 of the Schedule of Onshore Petroleum Exploration and Production Requirements 1993 issued under the Northern Territory Petroleum Act 1984. A report was submitted to the Department regarding this incident. A show cause notice was received from the Department of Primary Industries and Resources, South Australia, in June 2004 in relation to the Keleary to Merrimelia oil pipeline under the South Australian Petroleum Act 2000. The pipeline has been assessed and a management strategy has been agreed with the Department.\n\n## 7. Events Subsequent to Balance Date\n\nExcept as mentioned below, in the opinion of the Directors there has not arisen in the interval between the end of the financial year and the date of this report any matter or circumstance that has significantly affected or may significantly affect the operations of the consolidated entity, the results of those operations, or the state of affairs of the consolidated entity in future financial years.\n\nDividends declared after 31 December 2004 are set out in Item 4 of this Directors' Report and Note 20 to the financial statements.\n\nOn 17 February 2005, the Company entered into a contract to acquire Basin Oil Pty Ltd effective 1 January 2005. Basin Oil Pty Ltd has a 2.1% interest in the South Australia Cooper Basin, a 40% interest in Patricia-Baleen and Sole and a 33.3% interest in Golden Beach and Vic/P55.\n\nAnnual Report 2004", + "recall": 0.9022988505747126, + "true_md": "## 2. Principal Activities\n\n## 3. Review and Results of Operations\n\n## 4. Dividends\n\n## 5. State of Affairs\n\n## 6. Environmental Regulation\n\n## 7. Events Subsequent to Balance Date\n\n48\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\nExcept as mentioned below, in the opinion of the Directors there has not arisen in the interval between the end of the financial year and the date of this report any matter or circumstance that has significantly affected or m ay significantly affect the operations of the consolidated entity, the results of those operations, or the state of affairs of the consolidated entity in futur e financial years.\n\nDividends declared after 31 December 2004 are set out in Item 4 of this Dir ectors’ Report and Note 20 to the financial statements.\n\nOn 17 February 2005, the Company entered into a contract to acquir Basin Oil Pty Ltd effective 1 January 2005. Basin Oil Pty Ltd has a 2.1% interest in the South Australia Cooper Basin, a 40% interest in Patricia-Baleen and Sole and a 33.3% interest in Golden Beach and Vic/P55.\n\nThe consolidated entity’s Australian operations are subject to various environm ental regulations under Commonwealth, State and Territory legislation, including under applicable petroleum legislation and in respect to its South A ustralian operations, licences (numbers EPA 2569, 1259, 14145, 888 and 2164) issued under the Environment Protection Act 1993, and its Queen sland operations, licence no. 150029 issued under the Environmental Protection Act 1994. Applicable legislation and requisite environmental licen ces are specified in the entity’s Environmental, Health and Safety Compliance Database, which forms part of the consolidated entity’s overall Environmental Management System. Compliance performance is monitored on a regular basis and in various forms, including environmental audits condu cted by regulatory authorities and by the Company, either through internal or external resources. During the financial year, except as mention ed below, no fines were imposed, no prosecutions were instituted and no notice of non-compliance with the above referenced regulations was received from a regulatory body. A directive was issued by the Northern Territory Department of Business, Industry and Resource Developmen in December 2004 in relation to flaring of gas at Mereenie under Clause 619 of the Schedule of Onshore Petroleum Exploration and Production Requirements 1993 issued under the Northern Territory Petroleum Act 1984. A report was submitted to the Department regarding this incident. A show cause notice was received from the Department of Primary Industries and Resources, South Australia, in June 2004 in relation to the Keleary to Merrimeli oil pipeline under the South Australian Petroleum Act 2000. The pipeline has been assessed and a management strategy has been agreed with the Departm ent.\n\nIn the opinion of the Directors, there were no significant changes in th state of affairs of the consolidated entity that occurred during the financial year other than those referred to on pages 2 to 7, 10 to 12 and 14 to 28 of this Annual Report.\n\nIn accordance with the Terms of Issue, fully franked dividends of $3.2940 per reset convertible preference share were paid on 31 March 2004 and 30 September 2004 respectively; each amounting to $11.5 million.\n\nA fully franked final dividend of $87.7 million (15 cents per share) was pai d on 31 March 2004 on the 2003 results. Indication of this dividend payment was disclosed in the 2003 Annual Report. A fully franked interim divi dend of $87.8 million (15 cents per share) was paid to members on 30 September 2004.\n\n- (i) that a fully franked final dividend of 18 cents per fully paid ordinary shar e be paid on 31 March 2005 to shareholders registered in the books of the Company at the close of business on 4 March 2005. This final dividen d amounts to approximately $105.4 million; and\n\n- (ii) that in accordance with the Terms of Issue, a fully franked dividend of $2.4497 per Franked Unsecured Equity Listed Securities be paid on 31 March 2005 to holders registered in the books of the Company at th close of business on 4 March 2005, amounting to $14.7 million.\n\nThe principal activities of the consolidated entity during the financial year wer e: petroleum exploration, the production, treatment and marketing of natural gas, crude oil, condensate, naphtha and liquid petroleum gas, and th e transportation by pipeline of crude oil. No significant change in the nature of these activities has occurred during the year.\n\nA review of the operations and of the results of those operations of the con solidated entity during the financial year are contained on pages 2 to 7, 10 to 12 and 14 to 28 of this Annual Report.\n\nOn 23 February 2005, Directors declared:-" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7447819789879647, + "doc_id": "0d755afe61abd7c74337949cf0e67d8c1ff922236cf3aed145e4a2b73e244431", + "edit_distance": 0.2857142857142857, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9950801749271136, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "See notes to consolidated financial statements.\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\n73\n\nFINANCIAL SECTION", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "See notes to consolidated financial statements.\n\nFINANCIAL SECTION\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 73" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9584819692741259, + "doc_id": "fd4f8ead52deabb6b349a7124935c6ce4fc28df495ec93868f7a7ca5cd803a68", + "edit_distance": 0.3971774193548387, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9962323560079706, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO AND FORMING PART OF THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR THE FINANCIAL YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2000\n\n## (f) Cash\n\nFor the purpose of the Statement of Cash Flows, cash includes cash on hand and in banks, and money market investments readily convertible to cash within 2 workings days, net of outstanding bank overdrafts.\n\n## (g) Comparative Figures\n\nComparative figures are, where appropriate, reclassified so as to be comparable with the figures presented for the current financial years.\n\n## (h) Depreciation\n\nDepreciation is provided on property, plant and equipment, including freehold buildings but excluding land and investment properties. Depreciation is calculated so as to write off the net cost or other revalued amount of each asset over its expected useful life. The Directors reviewed all Depreciation Rates at the commencement of this financial year. It was agreed that the rates for Vessels should be bought in line with industry standards with effect from the 1999/2000 financial year. Leasehold improvements are depreciated over the period of the lease or estimated useful life, whichever is the shorter. The following rates are used in the calculation of depreciation;\n\n## 2000 1900\n\n- • Leasehold buildings and improvements\n\n2.38% prime cost\n\n2.38% prime cost\n\n- • Vessels 4% diminishing value 8% diminishing value\n\n• Vessel Refits 10% diminishing value 8% diminishing value\n\n- • Plant & equipment\n\n4-40% prime cost\n\n4-40% prime cost\n\n- • Motor Vehicles\n\n22.5% diminishing value 22.5% diminishing value\n\n## (i) Employee Entitlements\n\nProvision is made for benefits accruing to employees in respect of wages and salaries, annual leave, long service leave, and sick leave when it is probable that settlement will be required and they are capable of being measured reliably.\n\nProvisions made in respect of wages and salaries, annual leave, and other employee entitlements expected to be settled within 12 months, are measured at their nominal values.\n\nProvisions made in respect of other employee entitlements which are not expected to be settlement with 12 months are measured as the present value of the estimated future cash outflows to be made by the economic entity in respect of services provided by employees up to the reporting date.\n\n## (j) Goods and Services Tax\n\nRevenues, expenses and assets are recognised net of the amount of goods and services tax (GST), except:\n\n- i. where the amount of GST incurred is not recoverable from the taxation authority, it is recognised as part of the cost of acquisition of an asset or as part of an item of expense; or\n- ii. for receivables and payables which are recognised inclusive of GST.\n\n39", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NOTES TO AND FORMING PART OF THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR THE FINANCIAL YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2000\n\n## (f) Cash\n\n## (g) Comparative Figures\n\n## (h) Depreciation\n\n## (i) Employee Entitlements\n\n## (j) Goods and Services Tax\n\nFor the purpose of the Statement of Cash Flows, cash includes cash on hand and in banks, and money market investments readily convertible to cash within 2 workings days, net of outstanding bank overdrafts.\n\nComparative figures are, where appropriate, reclassified so as to be comparable with the figures presented for the current financial years.\n\nDepreciation is provided on property, plant and equipment, including freehold buildings but excluding land and investment properties. Depreciation is calculated so as to write off the net cost or other revalued amount of each asset over its expected useful life. The Directors reviewed all Depreciation Rates at the commencement of this financial year. It was agreed that the rates for Vessels should be bought in line with industry standards with effect from the 1999/2000 financial year. Leasehold improvements are depreciated over the period of the lease or estimated useful life, whichever is the shorter. The following rates are used in the calculation of depreciation;\n\nProvision is made for benefits accruing to employees in respect of wages and salaries, annual leave, long service leave, and sick leave when it is probable that settlement will be required and they are capable of being measured reliably.\n\nProvisions made in respect of wages and salaries, annual leave, and other employee entitlements expected to be settled within 12 months, are measured at their nominal values.\n\nProvisions made in respect of other employee entitlements which are not expected to be settlement with 12 months are measured as the present value of the estimated future cash outflows to be made by the economic entity in respect of services provided by employees up to the reporting date.\n\nRevenues, expenses and assets are recognised net of the amount of goods and services tax (GST), except:\n\n- i. where the amount of GST incurred is not recoverable from the taxation authority, it is recognised as part of the cost of acquisition of an asset or as part of an item of expense; or\n\n- ii. for receivables and payables which are recognised inclusive of GST.\n\n- • Leasehold buildings and improvements 2.38% prime cost 2.38% prime cost\n\n- • Vessels 4% diminishing value 8% diminishing value\n\n- • Vessel Refits 10% diminishing value 8% diminishing value\n\n- • Plant & equipment 4-40% prime cost 4-40% prime cost\n\n- • Motor Vehicles 22.5% diminishing value 22.5% diminishing value\n\n## 2000\n\n## 1900\n\n39" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "49970e6020347853be7a51bd1da47b707d36619d97c4d3968cef20c0be7c9f88", + "edit_distance": 0.4, + "f1_score": 0.8571428571428572, + "meteor": 0.920138888888889, + "precision": 0.75, + "pred_md": "## Board of Directors", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Board of Directors" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7926468979150675, + "doc_id": "52aa5e9f90c3dd912affe80b9e1a3d6ad3dbdc47fc5c4f15ad217014a1e9d775", + "edit_distance": 0.19457013574660634, + "f1_score": 0.9679012345679012, + "meteor": 0.9465350859994877, + "precision": 0.9702970297029703, + "pred_md": "4\n\nThe Hartford Chairman, President and CEO Ramani Ayer speaking at the opening of New York employees' new permanent offices in early November. Despite the destruction of their offices at 7 World Trade Center on Sept. 11, The Hartford's New York employees had their businesses back in operation by Sept. 17. Employees moved into their new permanent offices less than 60 days after the attack.\n\nThe Hartford Chairman, President and CEO Ramani Ayer speaking at the opening of New York employees' new permanent offices in early November. Despite the destruction of their offices at 7 World Trade Center on Sept. 11, The Hartford's New York employees had their businesses back in operation by Sept. 17. Employees moved into their new permanent offices less than 60 days after the attack.\n\nour proven approach to asset management despite the stock market's vagaries. It means growing our business profitably, maintaining financial discipline, controlling expenses and providing extraordinary service to distributors and customers.\n\nWe take the last point very seriously, as evidenced by our earning a sixth consecutive DALBAR Annuity Service Award in 2001. DALBAR also awarded us the Intermediary Service Award and the first-ever Life Insurance Service Award.\n\nAs you'll read throughout this report, service means very specific-and very important-things to us. We strive to forge strong partnerships with our distributors and provide them with technological tools and outstanding products to enhance their selling efforts. These are some of the underpinnings to our solid 2001 results.\n\nDespite the challenges I've mentioned, our revenues for 2001 rose 3 percent to $15.1 billion. Total assets under management rose 8 percent to $198 billion. Operating income rose 7 percent to $1.034 billion, or $4.28 per diluted share, excluding the $440 million impact of Sept. 11 (after tax and net of reinsurance) and a $130 million tax benefit in our life operations.\n\nThe results attest to the resilience of our enterprise. With our strong and balanced portfolio of businesses, we consistently demonstrate superior financial performance. Since 1995, we've produced 13 percent annualized operating earnings-per-share growth, excluding the effects of Sept. 11 and the tax benefit in 2001, and 13 percent annualized growth in assets under management. Excluding the effect of Sept. 11 and the tax benefit, operating return on equity has met or exceeded our 13 to 15 percent target every year for the past five years.", + "recall": 0.9655172413793104, + "true_md": "The Hartford Chairman, President and CEO Ramani Ayer speaking at the opening of New York employees’ new permanent offices in early November. Despite the destruction of their offices at 7 World Trade Center on Sept. 11, The Hartford’s New York employees had their businesses back in operation by Sept. 17. Employees moved into their new permanent offices less than 60 days after the attack.\n\nour proven approach to asset management despite the stock market’s vagaries. It means growing our business profitably, maintaining financial discipline, controlling expenses and providing extraordinary service to distributors and customers.\n\nWe take the last point very seriously, as evidenced by our earning a sixth consecutive DALBAR Annuity Service Award in 2001. DALBAR also awarded us the Intermediary Service Award and the first-ever Life Insurance Service Award.\n\nAs you’ll read throughout this report, service means very specific—and very impor- tant—things to us. We strive to forge strong partnerships with our distributors and provide them with technological tools and outstanding products to enhance their selling efforts. These are some of the underpinnings to our solid 2001 results.\n\nDespite the challenges I’ve mentioned, our revenues for 2001 rose 3 percent to $15.1 billion. Total assets under management rose 8 percent to $198 billion. Operating income rose 7 percent to $1.034 billion, or $4.28 per diluted share, excluding the $440 million impact of Sept. 11 (after tax and net of reinsurance) and a $130 million tax benefit in our life operations. \n\nThe results attest to the resilience of our enterprise. With our strong and balanced portfolio of businesses, we consistently demonstrate superior financial performance. Since 1995, we’ve produced 13 percent annualized operating earnings-per-share growth, excluding the effects of Sept. 11 and the tax benefit in 2001, and 13 percent annualized growth in assets under management. Excluding the effect of Sept. 11 and the tax benefit, operating return on equity has met or exceeded our 13 to 15 percent target every year for the past five years. \n\n4" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8843318655248176, + "doc_id": "56ba1b29c63847c8cfa9f31fe4b9b1ab9d3e868459a2fb402c2d783b1cca5291", + "edit_distance": 0.6041009463722398, + "f1_score": 0.9450549450549449, + "meteor": 0.8482094013110765, + "precision": 0.9678456591639871, + "pred_md": "In the area of compensation, Nissan has moved even further away from the traditional Japanese salary system. Our annual base salary is commensurate with the industry standard, but we have successfully introduced both a performance-oriented pay system and a 'commitment and stretched-target' system. Superior performance is rewarded, with even higher compensation-including stock options for executives-for those who meet their commitments and stretched targets. In 2004, nearly five hundred employees exercised stock options, and we are increasing the number of people eligible to receive them. This has effectively brought Nissan's pay scale to the top in the industry, which has in turn inspired a high-performance corporate culture.\n\nHR will assume an even more prominent role as we work to instill the urge for continuous excellence at Nissan. To strengthen the upper ranks of the organization, for example, we have established the Nissan Management\n\nDIVERSITY\n\nDiversity\n\nYUKIKO YOSHIMARU General Manager Diversity Development Office\n\nDiversity isn't limited to gender issues. Nationality, age, personal values and lifestyle are all areas of continuing interest to us, and addressing the issues surrounding them can produce great value for the organization. Naturally, we felt that tackling gender issues was a logical first step. Our decision was partly market-driven, too, since women make 60 percent of all car purchase decisions in Japan.\n\nWe also believe that women can contribute a great deal more to the growth of the Company. When this office started in October 2004, only 1.6 percent of all managers and 5.7 percent of the total workforce were women. By the end of NISSAN Value-Up, our target is to have 5 percent of qualified female managers. To accomplish this, we promote the career\n\nInstitute in Hakone. There are other training centers, but this is the first one focused primarily on leadership development. The trainees are a select group of people taken through programs designed to nurture Nissan's next generation of leaders.\n\nMy vision of our future is to create a global HR organization that would oversee the entire Nissan group, including our affiliated companies. Harmonizing our HR polices and procedures would help unite the various group companies, which in turn would leave little doubt that there is just one Nissan.\n\nHR is an integral part of what makes Nissan such a powerful organization. We're attempting to create a wellmotivated team, and provide good training for tomorrow's leaders. Look at all the changes that have occurred under strong leadership! If we can produce 20 or 30 leaders like Carlos Ghosn, just imagine what kind of company we could be.'\n\ndevelopment of women and hold workshops for all managers to instill a deeper understanding of the importance of diversity. We're also exploring the issue of balancing work and private life-an important topic in Japan to both women and men.\n\nA diversified workforce is essential to Nissan's success because the marketplace itself is so diversified. Addressing this makes us a more innovative company, and also delivers a tool for recruiting qualified people. We know this policy is being noticed, too: the Tokyo bureau of the Ministry of Health, Labour and Welfare recently recognized our\n\naccomplishments in promoting diversity, and\n\nother Japanese companies now use Nissan as\n\na benchmark.\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\n57\n\nOUR WORK", + "recall": 0.9233128834355828, + "true_md": "In the area of compensation, Nissan has moved even further away from the traditional Japanese salary system. Our annual base salary is commensurate with the industry standard, but we have successfully introduced both a performance-oriented pay system and a “commitment and stretched-target” system. Superior performance is rewarded, with even higher compensation—including stock options for executives—for those who meet their commitments and stretched targets. In 2004, nearly five hundred employees exercised stock options, and we are increasing the number of people eligible to receive them. This has effectively brought Nissan’s pay scale to the top in the industry, which has in turn inspired a high-performance corporate culture. \n\nHR will assume an even more prominent role as we work to instill the urge for continuous excellence at Nissan. To strengthen the upper ranks of the organization, for example, we have established the Nissan Management\n\nInstitute in Hakone. There are other training centers, but this is the first one focused primarily on leadership development. The trainees are a select group of people taken through programs designed to nurture Nissan’s next generation of leaders. \n\nMy vision of our future is to create a global HR organization that would oversee the entire Nissan group, including our affiliated companies. Harmonizing our HR polices and procedures would help unite the various group companies, which in turn would leave little doubt that there is just one Nissan. \n\nHR is an integral part of what makes Nissan such a powerful organization. We’re attempting to create a well- motivated team, and provide good training for tomorrow’s leaders. Look at all the changes that have occurred under strong leadership! If we can produce 20 or 30 leaders like Carlos Ghosn, just imagine what kind of company we could be.”\n\nOUR WORK\n\n## Diversity isn’t limited to gender issues. D Di iv ve er rs si it ty y DIVERSITY\n\nDiversity isn’t limited to gender issues. Nationality, age, personal values and lifestyle are all areas of continuing interest to us, and addressing the issues surrounding them can produce great value for the organization. Naturally, we felt that tackling gender issues was a logical first step. Our decision was partly market-driven, too, since women make 60 percent of all car purchase decisions in Japan. ve er rs si it ty y\n\nWe also believe that women can contribute a great deal more to the growth of the Company. When this office started in October 2004, only 1.6 percent of all managers and 5.7 percent of the total workforce were women. By the end of NISSAN Value-Up, our target is to have 5 percent of qualified female managers. To accomplish this, we promote the career\n\nA diversified workforce is essential to Nissan’s success because the marketplace itself is so diversified. Addressing this makes us a more innovative company, and also delivers a tool for recruiting qualified people. We know this policy is being noticed, too: the Tokyo bureau of the Ministry of Health, Labour and Welfare recently recognized our accomplishments in promoting diversity, and other Japanese companies now use Nissan as a benchmark.\n\ndevelopment of women and hold workshops for all managers to instill a deeper understanding of the importance of diversity. We’re also exploring the issue of balancing work and private life—an important topic in Japan to both women and men. \n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\n57\n\nYUKIKO YOSHIMARU General Manager Diversity Development Office" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8966340241486134, + "doc_id": "e515b71b3ac374110874fbcde95708c39816f8808a3fe0b59a813487fa45ed22", + "edit_distance": 0.46594427244582043, + "f1_score": 0.9539473684210525, + "meteor": 0.8853357670651565, + "precision": 0.9602649006622517, + "pred_md": "BRAND\n\n## The Soul of the Company\n\n'If you think about the inherent value of a great business, brand is enormous-often more valuable than the company's tangible fixed assets. In the minds of consumers, the brand is the company. So everything we do to define and position our brand, to make it more powerful and compelling, yields immense value for our employees, our dealers and suppliers, and most importantly for our shareholders and other stakeholders. That in turn manifests itself in higher sales, better margins and lower marketing costs, elevated levels of customer trust, better wordof-mouth communication, and better advocacy in the marketplace.\n\nAfter the Alliance was created, the new management team came in and made several critical decisions. One was a call to clearly define Nissan as a global brand. The message was clear. Nissan was not going to be a supplier of commodity automotive appliances. We are building cars that capture people's imaginations. Cars that are fun to drive, that people want to drive. Cars that might not be for everyonethat could even prove polarizing in their design and performance characteristics-but cars impossible to ignore, cars that quicken the pulse.\n\nWell, our team got the product right, and it's up to us to get the branding right.\n\nAnother decision was that we are one company, with one brand worldwide. That doesn't mean pursuing a cookiecutter approach, with the same cars or communications everywhere; instead, it is a declaration that our core values will be more carefully defined and articulated in every\n\nNissan at the 2005 North American International Auto Show (NAIAS)\n\nNissan at the 2005 North American International Auto Show (NAIAS)\n\nInfiniti presentation at the 2004 NAIAS\n\nSTEVEN WILHITE Senior Vice President\n\nInfiniti presentation at the 2004 NAIASSTEVEN WILHITE Senior Vice President\n\nmarket where we compete. We have set up very specific targets for the brand. My personal mission statement is to build Nissan and Infiniti into the most clearly defined, powerful brands in the automotive industry. We created a brand scorecard to measure our performance, covering aspects like retail sales, market share, profitability, total distribution costs, as well as purchase intentions and opinions about the brand in several categories. In virtually every market around the world, all of these metrics are moving in a very positive direction. We're happy about that, but certainly not satisfied.\n\nHistorically, brand management has been about enforcing brand standards, guarding your visual identity and brand identity, making sure that intellectual property is managed intelligently and advantageously. We're working on changing that focus, being more strategic and more opportunistic when thinking about growing our business rather than simply protecting existing assets.\n\nSome people mistake advertising or public relations, or the way you greet customers in the showroom as the brand. In reality, everything we do as a company affects the brand. Every customer interaction with our brand helps define who we are and what we stand for, not only for that individual customer but also for everyone that customer interacts with.\n\nSimply stated, the core strength of the brand is the core strength of the company. Assets are perishable; financial strength is ephemeral. The values the brand can define, and the behaviors the brand can drive, give the organization clarity in the marketplace. Brand also gives people here at Nissan focus. Our brands are, in fact, the soul of the company.'\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\n37\n\nOUR WORK", + "recall": 0.9477124183006536, + "true_md": "## The Soul of the Company\n\n“If you think about the inherent value of a great business, brand is enormous—often more valuable than the company’s tangible fixed assets. In the minds of consumers, the brand is the company. So everything we do to define and position our brand, to make it more powerful and compelling, yields immense value for our employees, our dealers and suppliers, and most importantly for our shareholders and other stakeholders. That in turn manifests itself in higher sales, better margins and lower marketing costs, elevated levels of customer trust, better word- of-mouth communication, and better advocacy in the marketplace.\n\nAfter the Alliance was created, the new management team came in and made several critical decisions. One was a call to clearly define Nissan as a global brand. The message was clear. Nissan was not going to be a supplier of commodity automotive appliances. We are building cars that capture people’s imaginations. Cars that are fun to drive, that people want to drive. Cars that might not be for everyone— that could even prove polarizing in their design and performance characteristics—but cars impossible to ignore, cars that quicken the pulse.\n\nWell, our team got the product right, and it’s up to us to get the branding right. \n\nAnother decision was that we are one company, with one brand worldwide. That doesn’t mean pursuing a cookie- cutter approach, with the same cars or communications everywhere; instead, it is a declaration that our core values will be more carefully defined and articulated in every\n\nSimply stated, the core strength of the brand is the core strength of the company. Assets are perishable; financial strength is ephemeral. The values the brand can define, and the behaviors the brand can drive, give the organization clarity in the marketplace. Brand also gives people here at Nissan focus. Our brands are, in fact, the soul of the company.”\n\nSome people mistake advertising or public relations, or the way you greet customers in the showroom as the brand. In reality, everything we do as a company affects the brand. Every customer interaction with our brand helps define who we are and what we stand for, not only for that individual customer but also for everyone that customer interacts with.\n\nHistorically, brand management has been about enforcing brand standards, guarding your visual identity and brand identity, making sure that intellectual property is managed intelligently and advantageously. We’re working on changing that focus, being more strategic and more opportunistic when thinking about growing our business rather than simply protecting existing assets.\n\nmarket where we compete. We have set up very specific targets for the brand. My personal mission statement is to build Nissan and Infiniti into the most clearly defined, powerful brands in the automotive industry. We created a brand scorecard to measure our performance, covering aspects like retail sales, market share, profitability, total distribution costs, as well as purchase intentions and opinions about the brand in several categories. In virtually every market around the world, all of these metrics are moving in a very positive direction. We’re happy about that, but certainly not satisfied. \n\nOUR WORK\n\nInfiniti presentation at the 2004 NAIAS\n\nNissan at the 2005 North American International Auto Show (NAIAS)\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 37\n\nSTEVEN WILHITE Senior Vice President\n\nBRAND" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6681270624195794, + "doc_id": "494aeb97d05f9b88dc566a4c36bb44a966817f7257405ac350746a2b30192ed1", + "edit_distance": 0.2857142857142857, + "f1_score": 0.8717948717948718, + "meteor": 0.9599158653846155, + "precision": 0.7727272727272727, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO AND FORMING PART OF THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR THE FINANCIAL YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2000\n\n4.\n\n## 5. INCOME TAX\n\n43", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## NOTES TO AND FORMING PART OF THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR THE FINANCIAL YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2000\n\n43" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9365362782686352, + "doc_id": "4bf082bbdc728a47fecdc4c0925ba1f7d7a2f06ab744ff5742c6be1f7b752268", + "edit_distance": 0.8867924528301887, + "f1_score": 0.9776785714285715, + "meteor": 0.7066430017039064, + "precision": 0.9820627802690582, + "pred_md": "Motivated, passionate people are Nissan's greatest asset. The high performance of the company reflects the attitudes of our people, and we work hard to maintain their passion and motivation in several ways. First, we clearly define our corporate vision. People must understand and internalize this vision, because even in the most difficult of times a compelling vision inspires everyone to move in the same direction.\n\nSecond, we strive for honest, effective two-way communication. Relationships, inside or outside the company, are based on mutual respect and trust. This is fostered by open exchanges. New communications channels at Nissan now allow employees to access company information in a faster, more effective manner, and to swiftly share what they know with investors, shareholders, suppliers, the media and other interested parties.\n\nThird, we keep our management consistent and promote empowerment. Consistent management sets a solid foundation and inspires trust in the actions and decisions of the company. Empowerment builds on this by encouraging employee participation in the decisionmaking process. Employees understand the management structure and feel confident in expressing their own opinions and ideas.\n\nFourth, employees are evaluated fairly. We are focused on results and real performance as the true measures of success. Nissan has become a leader in Japan by moving away from the traditional seniority-based employment and compensation system toward a system that rewards achievement. We even go a step further and reward actions that exemplify Nissan's vision. Nissan now serves as the benchmark for other companies striving to create more modern, dynamic employment systems.\n\nLastly, Nissan's brand identity is now clearly defined. After our people, our brand is the most valuable asset we possess, of greater worth than any of the company's tangible assets.\n\nThose are the elements of our philosophy-a system of thinking that will stretch as Nissan continues to pursue sustainable and profitable growth. Our vision is to become the top automaker in the world-the leader in quality, brand strength, profitability and performance. The Nissan Management Way has mapped out the course to this goal, yet along the way we will always retain the flexibility to redefine who we are, based on the needs and desires of the customers we serve.\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\n19\n\nWHO WE ARE", + "recall": 0.9733333333333334, + "true_md": "WHO WE ARE\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 19\n\nThose are the elements of our philosophy—a system of thinking that will stretch as Nissan continues to pursue sustainable and profitable growth. Our vision is to become the top automaker in the world—the leader in quality, brand strength, profitability and performance. The Nissan Management Way has mapped out the course to this goal, yet along the way we will always retain the flexibility to redefine who we are, based on the needs and desires of the customers we serve.\n\nLastly, Nissan’s brand identity is now clearly defined. After our people, our brand is the most valuable asset we possess, of greater worth than any of the company’s tangible assets. \n\nFourth, employees are evaluated fairly. We are focused on results and real performance as the true measures of success. Nissan has become a leader in Japan by moving away from the traditional seniority-based employment and compensation system toward a system that rewards achievement. We even go a step further and reward actions that exemplify Nissan’s vision. Nissan now serves as the benchmark for other companies striving to create more modern, dynamic employment systems.\n\nThird, we keep our management consistent and promote empowerment. Consistent management sets a solid foundation and inspires trust in the actions and decisions of the company. Empowerment builds on this by encouraging employee participation in the decision- making process. Employees understand the management structure and feel confident in expressing their own opinions and ideas.\n\nSecond, we strive for honest, effective two-way communication. Relationships, inside or outside the company, are based on mutual respect and trust. This is fostered by open exchanges. New communications channels at Nissan now allow employees to access company information in a faster, more effective manner, and to swiftly share what they know with investors, shareholders, suppliers, the media and other interested parties.\n\nMotivated, passionate people are Nissan’s greatest asset. The high performance of the company reflects the attitudes of our people, and we work hard to maintain their passion and motivation in several ways. First, we clearly define our corporate vision. People must understand and internalize this vision, because even in the most difficult of times a compelling vision inspires everyone to move in the same direction." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9290253257598077, + "doc_id": "f860d1ac77d4b1f6e0058bfbc8472f4b9ecdd59a41dd041d3628ab344e15e13d", + "edit_distance": 0.2516778523489933, + "f1_score": 0.9719298245614035, + "meteor": 0.9373565951749375, + "precision": 0.9822695035460993, + "pred_md": "PEOPLE OF SHENTEL\n\nFor over 100 years Shenandoah Telecommunications Company has been committed to providing outstanding service to our customers. Our employees take that same dedication after hours to make a difference in their community.\n\nWe take this opportunity to share with you, our shareholders, the stories of just a few of your dedicated employees.\n\nPatty Pomeroy\n\nPatty Pomeroy\n\nVolunteerism is in Patty Pomeroy's blood. Her grandfather was a dispatcher for the rescue squad in Middletown, VA for 25 years and her grandmother was in the ladies auxiliary. Her father was a charter member of the Middletown Rescue Squad. In 1997, Patty, a customer service representative at Shentel for four years, continued the family tradition by earning her Emergency Medical Technician certification and going to 'work' for the Strasburg Rescue Squad. Patty is the administrator of membership recruitment and retention for the squad and is the liaison coordinator for junior squad members under 18. It is her job to make sure that new members are brought in to the squad and current members stay active.\n\n'There is a great satisfaction that comes from knowing that what you can do will help people.'\n\nJeff Beard has been an installer repairman with Shentel for almost five years. Two years ago, Jeff helped start Project Isaiah 58, a faith-based recovery ministry that reaches out to people who are struggling with addiction. Project Isaiah 58 has weekly group meetings in Winchester, Woodstock and Warrenton, VA. Jeff, who lives in Winchester, participates in the group meetings and also makes time to meet one-on-one with people who need personal attention.\n\n'I feel the need to reach out to people who are suffering.'\n\nJeff Beard\n\nJeff Beard\n\nJohn Gardner has been with Shentel for two years as a PCS technician in Central Pennsylvania, but for almost a year of that time he was on Naval Reserve duty in Sasebo, Japan. John joined the Reserves after serving 10 years of active duty. In October 2002, he was activated under Noble Eagle-Enduring Freedom as part of the increase in security at bases around the world. John worked on Motorola radios and repeater systems while stationed in Japan. It was tough for the serviceman to be away from his wife and children, but John believes very strongly in serving his country.\n\n'Being in the Reserves is a way for me to be a civilian and still serve my country.'\n\nJohn Gardner\n\nAt Shentel, George Brinkley, the store manager in Front Royal, VA, is known for being one of the biggest fund-raisers for the Shenandoah County American Cancer Society Relay for Life event. In his six years at the Company, George has raised nearly $20,000. In 2003, he raised $4,246 and was recognized as the top individual fund-raiser for the entire event.\n\nIn 2002, George was chairman of the parade committee for the Woodstock, VA 250th anniversary celebration. Under George's leadership, the 26-member committee worked for a year preparing for the parade, which was the largest in the town's history.\n\n'I just have a knack for volunteering. I want to make my community better any way I can.'\n\nGeorge Brinkley\n\nGeorge Brinkley\n\n3\n\n■\n\n2003 ANNUAL REPORT", + "recall": 0.9618055555555556, + "true_md": "PEOPLE OF SHENTEL\n\nFor over 100 years Shenandoah Telecommunications Company has been committed to providing outstanding service to our customers. Our employees take that same dedication after hours to make a difference in their community.\n\nWe take this opportunity to share with you, our shareholders, the stories of just a few of your dedicated employees.\n\nVolunteerism is in Patty Pomeroy’s blood. Her grandfather was a dispatcher for the rescue squad in Middletown, VA for 25 years and her grandmother was in the ladies auxiliary. Her father was a charter member of the Middletown Rescue Squad. In 1997, Patty, a customer service representative at Shentel for four years, continued the family tradition by earning her Emergency Medical Technician certification and going to “work” for the Strasburg Rescue Squad. Patty is the administrator of membership recruitment and retention for the squad and is the liaison coordinator for junior squad members under 18. It is her job to make sure that new members are brought in to the squad and current members stay active.\n\nJeff Beard has been an installer repairman with Shentel for almost five years. Two years ago, Jeff helped start Project Isaiah 58, a faith-based recovery ministry that reaches out to people who are struggling with addiction. Project Isaiah 58 has weekly group meetings in Winchester, Woodstock and Warrenton, VA. Jeff, who lives in Winchester, participates in the group meetings and also makes time to meet one-on-one with people who need personal attention.\n\nJohn Gardner has been with Shentel for two years as a PCS technician in Central Pennsylvania, but for almost a year of that time he was on Naval Reserve duty in Sasebo, Japan. John joined the Reserves after serving 10 years of active duty. In October 2002, he was activated under Noble Eagle-Enduring Freedom as part of the increase in security at bases around the world. John worked on Motorola radios and repeater systems while stationed in Japan. It was tough for the serviceman to be away from his wife and children, but John believes very strongly in serving his country.\n\nAt Shentel, George Brinkley, the store manager in Front Royal, VA, is known for being one of the biggest fund-raisers for the Shenandoah County American Cancer Society Relay for Life event. In his six years at the Company, George has raised nearly $20,000. In 2003, he raised $4,246 and was recognized as the top individual fund-raiser for the entire event.\n\nIn 2002, George was chairman of the parade committee for the Woodstock, VA 250th anniversary celebration. Under George’s leadership, the 26-member committee worked for a year preparing for the parade, which was the largest in the town’s history. \n\nPatty Pomeroy\n\nJeff Beard\n\nJohn Gardner\n\nGeorge Brinkley\n\n3 ■ 2003 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n## “Being in the Reserves is a way for me to be a civilian and still serve my country.”\n\n## “I just have a knack for volunteering. I want to make my community better any way I can.”\n\n## “There is a great satisfaction that comes from knowing that what you can do will help people.”\n\n## “I feel the need to reach out to people who are suffering.”" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9087898652449347, + "doc_id": "e20c2c26db2fc33a60a0c735e47ab6363e5362692ea047b1bf575e53ab12397b", + "edit_distance": 0.6012931034482759, + "f1_score": 0.9662447257383966, + "meteor": 0.8065272510154182, + "precision": 0.9870689655172413, + "pred_md": "Creating Opportunities\n\n## DELIVERING ON THE EXPLORATION STRATEGY\n\nExploration is a key growth driver for Santos and success with the drill bit is vital to adding value for Santos shareholders. During the past four years Santos has been working to build exploration opportunities by:\n\n- · acquiring new exploration acreage\n- · adding material exploration prospects\n- · drilling wildcat exploration wells.\n\n## SUCCESS RATE OF 44% IN 2004\n\nSantos' 2004 exploration effort produced good results, as the Company high graded its exploration acreage and started drilling one of the most exciting portfolios in the industry.\n\nSantos discovered hydrocarbons in seven of the sixteen wildcat wells that were drilled, achieving an impressive success rate of 44%.\n\nThe program added at least 93 million boe (including the pre-drill estimate for Jeruk) of recoverable resources that will be further evaluated by delineation and, in some cases, production history to determine 1P and 2P reserve additions.\n\nImportantly, these results were achieved with financial discipline, spending $126 million which was substantially less than forecast.\n\nThe most significant drilling result for the year was the Jeruk oil discovery in the Sampang PSC offshore East Java, Indonesia. The Jeruk discovery is still under evaluation but its commercial significance appears encouraging. Santos has confirmed an oil column of at least 379 metres with a likely gross recoverable resource in excess of the pre-drill estimate of 170 million barrels.\n\nSantos also had further exploration successes in the\n\nCooper Basin in central Australia where four of six wildcat wells were cased and suspended as gas discoveries.\n\nThere was also success in the offshore Otway Basin with the Martha gas discovery near the Casino field, which is currently being evaluated to determine its commercial significance. Additional drilling is planned to occur nearby in 2005 to follow up this encouraging result.\n\nSantos discovered gas in the United States at the Torres 1A onshore well, which was brought onto production only two months after drilling was completed.\n\nOther wells in the offshore Otway Basin included the deep water Amrit 1 well, which was plugged and abandoned after failing to intersect economic hydrocarbons, and Callister 1 which was also plugged and abandoned with gas shows.\n\n'2004 was a great year for our explorers. We started drilling one of the most exciting portfolios in our industry and our success to date shows that our strategy of basin excellence is delivering. '\n\n## JACQUES GOUADAIN\n\nVice President Geoscience and New Ventures", + "recall": 0.9462809917355371, + "true_md": "Creating Opportunities\n\n## DELIVERING ON THE EXPLORATION STRATEGY\n\nCooper Basin in central Australia where four of six wildcat wells were cased and suspended as gas discoveries.\n\nThere was also success in the offshore Otway Basin with the Martha gas discovery near the Casino field, which is currently being evaluated to determine its commercial significance. Additional drilling is planned to occur nearby in 2005 to follow up this encouraging result.\n\nSantos discovered gas in the United States at the Torres 1A onshore well, which was brought onto production only two months after drilling was completed.\n\nOther wells in the offshore Otway Basin included the deep water Amrit 1 well, which was plugged and abandoned after failing to intersect economic hydrocarbons, and Callister 1 which was also plugged and abandoned with gas shows.\n\nThe program added at least 93 million boe (including the pre-drill estimate for Jeruk) of recoverable resources that will be further evaluated by delineation and, in some cases, production history to determine 1P and 2P reserve additions.\n\nImportantly, these results were achieved with financial discipline, spending $126 million which was substantially less than forecast.\n\nThe most significant drilling result for the year was the Jeruk oil discovery in the Sampang PSC offshore East Java, Indonesia. The Jeruk discovery is still under evaluation but its commercial significance appears encouraging. Santos has confirmed an oil column of at least 379 metres with a likely gross recoverable resource in excess of the pre-drill estimate of 170 million barrels.\n\nSantos also had further exploration successes in the\n\nExploration is a key growth driver for Santos and success with the drill bit is vital to adding value for Santos shareholders. During the past four years Santos has been working to build exploration opportunities by:\n\nSantos’ 2004 exploration effort produced good results, as the Company high graded its exploration acreage and started drilling one of the most exciting portfolios in the industry.\n\nSantos discovered hydrocarbons in seven of the sixteen wildcat wells that were drilled, achieving an impressive success rate of 44%.\n\n- • acquiring new exploration acreage\n\n- • adding material exploration prospects\n\n- • drilling wildcat exploration wells.\n\n## SUCCESS RATE OF 44% IN 2004\n\nAnnual Report 2004 15\n\nFloat-off of Jack Bates rig prior to deep water drilling operations, offshore Otway Basin, Victoria.\n\nJACQUES GOUADAIN Vice President Geoscience and New Ventures\n\n‘2004 was a great year for our explorers. We started drilling one of the most exciting portfolios in our industry and our success to date shows that our strategy of basin excellence is delivering.’" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7227776964772765, + "doc_id": "23091fa089aa9b191a70b2d6c0f4c8f8b4ef9179499682103f14c116b78a974d", + "edit_distance": 0.2692307692307692, + "f1_score": 0.8947368421052632, + "meteor": 0.9703883495145632, + "precision": 0.8095238095238095, + "pred_md": "50\n\n## NOTES TO AND FORMING PART OF THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR THE FINANCIAL YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2000\n\n(e)\n\n(a)", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## NOTES TO AND FORMING PART OF THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR THE FINANCIAL YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2000\n\n50" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9032669207881098, + "doc_id": "56df899379a65c03a511d4a2fdbe0f5edd62ec7fb120af7b3852d4d1c7aa4780", + "edit_distance": 0.7717842323651453, + "f1_score": 0.9770773638968482, + "meteor": 0.7652501311034097, + "precision": 0.9827089337175793, + "pred_md": "respect to a proposed appointee to the Board and the workings of the Board and its Committees are conveyed in interviews with the Chairman and induction procedures include access to appropriate executives in relation to details of the business of the Company.\n\nThe Chairman of the Board is the Chairman of the Nomination Committee. The current members of the Nomination Committee, all of whom are independent non-executive Directors, are Mr S Gerlach (Chairman), Mr P C Barnett and Mr G W McGregor.\n\n## 3. REVIEW OF BOARD AND EXECUTIVE PERFORMANCE\n\nThe Board Guidelines provide that:\n\n- · non-executive Directors are to be appointed on the basis that their nomination for re-election as a Director is subject to review and support by the Board;\n- · there should be appropriate circumstances justifying reelection after a specified period of service as a Director; and\n- · the contribution of the Board and of individual Directors is the subject of formal review and discussion on a biennial and annual basis, respectively.\n\nAs the biennial review of the Board and of its Committees was conducted by an independent consultant in 2003, no formal performance appraisal of the Board was conducted in 2004.\n\nPerformance evaluation of key executives is undertaken on a quarterly and annual basis by the CEO and summarised in presentation to the\n\nRemuneration Committee of the\n\nBoard, both specifically for determination of remuneration and generally in relation to management succession planning for review by the Board.\n\n## 4. INDEMNITY, ACCESS TO INFORMATION AND INDEPENDENT PROFESSIONAL ADVICE\n\nInformation in respect to indemnity and insurance arrangements for Directors and senior executives appears in the Directors' Statutory Report on page 49 of this Annual Report.\n\nThe Board Guidelines set out the circumstances and procedures pursuant to which a Director, in furtherance of his or her duties, may seek independent professional advice at the Company's expense. Those procedures require prior consultation with, and approval by, the Chairman and assurances as to the qualifications and reasonableness of the fees of the relevant expert and, under normal circumstances, the provision of the expert's advice to the Board.\n\nPursuant to a deed executed by the Company and each Director, a Director also has the right to have access to all documents which have been presented to meetings of the Board or to any Committee of the Board or otherwise made available to the Director whilst in office. This right continues for a term of seven years after ceasing to be a Director or such longer period as is necessary to determine relevant legal proceedings that commenced during that term.\n\n## 5. REMUNERATION\n\nThe role, responsibilities and composition of the Remuneration Committee and details of\n\nthe Company's remuneration objectives and principles, nonexecutive Director remuneration and executive remuneration are set out on pages 37 to 40 of this Annual Report in the Directors' and Executives' Remuneration section, as well as in the Directors' Statutory Report and in Notes 18 and 26 of the Financial Statements.\n\nDetails of the nature and amount of the remuneration of:\n\n- · the Directors; and\n- · the Specified Executives;\n\nare set out on pages 37 to 40 of this Annual Report.\n\n## 6. AUDIT COMMITTEE\n\nThe role of the Audit Committee is documented in a Charter, approved by the Board. This Charter was revised in August 2004 in line with contemporary best practice, and can be found on the Company's website.\n\n## 6.1 Composition of the Audit Committee\n\nThe Committee is required to consist of no less than three members and to meet at least three times per year. All members must be independent, non-executive Directors and financially literate, with at least one member having past employment experience in finance and accounting, requisite professional certification in accounting or other comparable experience or background. The Chairman of the Board is precluded from being the Chairman of the Audit Committee.\n\nThe current members of the Audit Committee, all of whom are independent non-executive Directors, are: Mr G W McGregor (Chairman), Professor J Sloan\n\nand Mr R M Harding. The external auditors, CEO, Chief Financial Officer ('CFO'), Manager Risk and Audit, and Manager - Financial Planning and Analysis attend Committee meetings by invitation. There were 4 meetings held in 2004.\n\n## 6.2 Role of the Audit Committee\n\nThe primary objective of the Audit Committee is to assist the Board to fulfil its corporate governance and oversight responsibilities related to financial accounting practices, external financial reporting, financial reporting, risk management and internal control, and the internal and external audit function.\n\nSpecifically, the role of the Audit Committee includes:\n\n- · examining the accounting policies of the Company to determine whether they are appropriate and in accordance with generally accepted practices;\n- · ensuring that truth and fairness is reflected in the preparation and publication of the Company's financial reports;\n- · meeting regularly with the internal and external auditors to reinforce their respective independence and to determine the appropriateness of internal and external audit procedures;\n- · reviewing the performance of the internal and external auditors and providing them with confidential access to the Board;\n- · receiving from the external auditors a formal written statement delineating all\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\n31", + "recall": 0.9715099715099715, + "true_md": "respect to a proposed appointee to the Board and the workings of the Board and its Committees are conveyed in interviews with the Chairman and induction procedures include access to appropriate executives in relation to details of the business of the Company. \n\nThe Chairman of the Board is the Chairman of the Nomination Committee. The current members of the Nomination Committee, all of whom are independent non-executive Directors, are Mr S Gerlach (Chairman), Mr P C Barnett and Mr G W McGregor. \n\nThe Board Guidelines provide that:\n\nAs the biennial review of the Board and of its Committees was conducted by an independent consultant in 2003, no formal performance appraisal of the Board was conducted in 2004. \n\nPerformance evaluation of key executives is undertaken on a quarterly and annual basis by the CEO and summarised in presentation to the Remuneration Committee of the\n\nThe role, responsibilities and composition of the Remuneration Committee and details of \n\nPursuant to a deed executed by the Company and each Director, a Director also has the right to have access to all documents which have been presented to meetings of the Board or to any Committee of the Board or otherwise made available to the Director whilst in office. This right continues for a term of seven years after ceasing to be a Director or such longer period as is necessary to determine relevant legal proceedings that commenced during that term.\n\nThe current members of the Audit Committee, all of whom are independent non-executive Directors, are: Mr G W McGregor (Chairman), Professor J Sloan\n\nThe Committee is required to consist of no less than three members and to meet at least three times per year. All members must be independent, non-executive Directors and financially literate, with at least one member having past employment experience in finance and accounting, requisite professional certification in accounting or other comparable experience or background. The Chairman of the Board is precluded from being the Chairman of the Audit Committee.\n\nThe role of the Audit Committee is documented in a Charter, approved by the Board. This Charter was revised in August 2004 in line with contemporary best practice, and can be found on the Company’s website.\n\nThe Board Guidelines set out the circumstances and procedures pursuant to which a Director, in furtherance of his or her duties, may seek independent professional advice at the Company’s expense. Those procedures require prior consultation with, and approval by, the Chairman and assurances as to the qualifications and reasonableness of the fees of the relevant expert and, under normal circumstances, the provision of the expert’s advice to the Board.\n\nInformation in respect to indemnity and insurance arrangements for Directors and senior executives appears in the Directors’ Statutory Report on page 49 of this Annual Report. \n\nDetails of the nature and amount of the remuneration of:\n\nthe Company’s remuneration objectives and principles, non- executive Director remuneration and executive remuneration are set out on pages 37 to 40 of this Annual Report in the Directors’ and Executives’ Remuneration section, as well as in the Directors’ Statutory Report and in Notes 18 and 26 of the Financial Statements.\n\nBoard, both specifically for determination of remuneration and generally in relation to management succession planning for review by the Board.\n\nand Mr R M Harding. The external auditors, CEO, Chief Financial Officer (“CFO”), Manager Risk and Audit, and Manager – Financial Planning and Analysis attend Committee meetings by invitation. There were 4 meetings held in 2004.\n\nThe primary objective of the Audit Committee is to assist the Board to fulfil its corporate governance and oversight responsibilities related to financial accounting practices, external financial reporting, financial reporting, risk management and internal control, and the internal and external audit function.\n\nSpecifically, the role of the Audit Committee includes: \n\nare set out on pages 37 to 40 of this Annual Report.\n\n31\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\n- • receiving from the external auditors a formal written statement delineating all\n\n- • reviewing the performance of the internal and external auditors and providing them with confidential access to the Board;\n\n- • meeting regularly with the internal and external auditors to reinforce their respective independence and to determine the appropriateness of internal and external audit procedures; \n\n- • ensuring that truth and fairness is reflected in the preparation and publication of the Company’s financial reports; \n\n- • examining the accounting policies of the Company to determine whether they are appropriate and in accordance with generally accepted practices; \n\n- • the Directors; and \n\n- • the Specified Executives; \n\n- • non-executive Directors are to be appointed on the basis that their nomination for re-election as a Director is subject to review and support by the Board; \n\n- • there should be appropriate circumstances justifying re- election after a specified period of service as a Director; and \n\n- • the contribution of the Board and of individual Directors is the subject of formal review and discussion on a biennial and annual basis, respectively. \n\n## 6.2 Role of the Audit Committee\n\n## 4. INDEMNITY, ACCESS TO INFORMATION AND INDEPENDENT PROFESSIONAL ADVICE\n\n## 6. AUDIT COMMITTEE\n\n## 6.1 Composition of the Audit Committee\n\n## 5. REMUNERATION\n\n## 3. REVIEW OF BOARD AND EXECUTIVE PERFORMANCE" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8275380053267916, + "doc_id": "9f76e4b1e2f224ecc80675e1f162046c7f8622a989273b051cebb3d796016dc5", + "edit_distance": 0.3489583333333333, + "f1_score": 0.9583333333333334, + "meteor": 0.950253263935332, + "precision": 0.9787234042553191, + "pred_md": "## Weatherford National Bank\n\n## Main Office\n\n101 N. Main Street Weatherford, Texas 76086 Chartered 1984\n\n## Branches\n\n101 College Park Drive Weatherford, Texas 76086\n\n1214 N. Main Street Weatherford, Texas 76086\n\n505 Farm Road 1187 Aledo, Texas 76008\n\nDoyle Lee Chairman of the Board, President and Chief Executive Officer\n\nDoyle Lee Chairman of the Board, President and Chief Executive Officer\n\n## Senior Officers\n\nDoyle Lee Chairman of the Board, President and Chief Executive Officer Bob Bradberry Executive Vice President Jay Gibbs Executive Vice President Paul Baker Senior Vice President Jean Bryan Senior Vice President Larry Mangrem Senior Vice President and Cashier Louis Sneed Senior Vice President\n\n## Directors\n\nDoyle Lee Chairman of the Board, President and Chief Executive Officer\n\nStephen G. Brogdon, D.D.S.\n\nGeneral and Cosmetic Dentistry\n\nMac A. Coalson\n\nReal Estate and Ranching\n\nF. Scott Dueser\n\nFirst Financial Bankshares, Inc.\n\nBob Kingsley Host and Producer, American Country Countdown\n\nDave Lang\n\nPresident, Dralco, Inc.\n\nKenneth T. Murphy First Financial Bankshares, Inc.\n\n## 26 % Parker County Deposit Market Share\n\n23", + "recall": 0.9387755102040817, + "true_md": "## Weatherfor National Bank\n\n## 2 6 %\n\n## Parker County Deposit Market Share\n\n23\n\nDoyle Lee Chairman of the Board, President and Chief Executive Officer\n\nMain Office 101 N. Main Street Weatherford,Texas 76086 Chartered 1984 \n\nBranches 101 College Park Drive Weatherford,Texas 76086 1214 N. Main Street Weatherford,Texas 76086 505 Farm Road 1187 Aledo, Texas 76008\n\nSenior Officers Doyle Lee Chairman of the Board, President and Chief Executive Officer Bob Bradberry Executive Vice President Jay Gibbs Executive Vice President Paul Baker Senior Vice President Jean Bryan Senior Vice President Larry Mangrem Senior Vice President and Cashier Louis Sneed Senior Vice President\n\nDirectors Doyle Lee Chairman of the Board, President and Chief Executive Officer Stephen G. Brogdon, D.D.S. General and Cosmetic Dentistry Mac A. Coalson Real Estate and R anching F. Scott Dueser First Financial Bankshares, Inc. Bob Kingsley Host and Producer, American Country Countdown Dave Lang President, Dralco, Inc. Kenneth T. Murphy First Financial Bankshares, Inc." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9105109696095911, + "doc_id": "3480b211af7749e80968de6aa95d512cebf033ea4af316d075d3153b7b10a1bf", + "edit_distance": 0.052132701421800945, + "f1_score": 0.957983193277311, + "meteor": 0.9680447646454843, + "precision": 0.9827586206896551, + "pred_md": "88\n\n## DIRECTORS' DECLARATION\n\nfor the year ended 31 December 2004\n\nIn the opinion of the Directors of Santos Ltd:\n\n- (a) the financial statements and notes, set out on pages 50 to 87, are in accordance with the Corporations Act 2001, including:\n- (i) giving a true and fair view of the financial position of the Company and consolidated entity as at 31 December 2004 and of their performance, as represented by the results of their operations and their cash flows, for the year ended on that date; and\n- (ii) complying with Accounting Standards in Australia and the Corporations Regulations 2001; and\n- (b) there are reasonable grounds to believe that the Company will be able to pay its debts as and when they become due and payable.\n\nIn making this declaration, the Directors declare that declarations which satisfy the requirements of section 295A of the Corporations Act 2001 have been received from the Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer.\n\nDated this 23rd day of February 2005.\n\nSigned in accordance with a resolution of the Directors:\n\nDirector\n\nDirector\n\nAnnual Report 2004", + "recall": 0.9344262295081968, + "true_md": "## DIRECTORS’ DECLARATION\n\nfor the year ended 31 December 2004\n\nIn the opinion of the Directors of Santos Ltd:\n\n- (a) the financial statements and notes, set out on pages 50 to 87, ar in accordance with the Corporations Act 2001, including:\n\n- (i) giving a true and fair view of the financial position of the Compan y and consolidated entity as at 31 December 2004 and of their performance, as represented by the results of their operations and th eir cash flows, for the year ended on that date; and\n\n- (ii) complying with Accounting Standards in Australia and the Corporation s Regulations 2001; and\n\n- (b) there are reasonable grounds to believe that the Compan will be able to pay its debts as and when they become due and payable. In making this declaration, the Directors declare that declarations which satisfy the requirements of section 295A of the Corporations Act 2001 have been received from the Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer.\n\nDated this 23rd day of February 2005.\n\nSigned in accordance with a resolution of the Directors:\n\nDirector\n\nDirector\n\nAnnual Report 2004 88" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9159513027180025, + "doc_id": "0844c78eba621e1e16d25661a87ea0a5bdd67670c968e1956fb57dd10217f4af", + "edit_distance": 0.3307291666666667, + "f1_score": 0.9863013698630138, + "meteor": 0.9662257098377508, + "precision": 0.989010989010989, + "pred_md": "PERFORMANCE\n\n6\n\n## PERFORMANCE\n\n## The recovery story is complete\n\nFiscal 2004 was a tough year, full of both anticipated and unexpected risks, but Nissan lived up to all the challenges. We had a record year in revenues, operating profit, net income, sales volume and production.\n\n## Sales performance\n\nGlobal sales came to 3,388,000 units, which exceeded our forecast of 3,380,000 units. This record level represents an increase of 10.8 percent, or 331,000 units, over fiscal 2003, and is 281,000 units more than the previous record level set in 1990. In fiscal 2004, we released nine all-new models globally.\n\nAlong with record sales, we achieved a global production record. Nissan's manufacturing plants turned out 3,378,000 units, or 293,000 units more than the previous record.\n\n## Financial performance\n\n- · Consolidated net revenues came to 8 trillion ¥576.3 billion, up 15.4 percent from last year.\n- · Consolidated operating profit improved by 4.4 percent to a record ¥861.2 billion. As a percentage of net revenue, our operating profit margin came to 10.0 percent.\n- · Net income reached ¥512.3 billion, an increase of ¥8.6 billion.\n\n## Nissan 180 commitments\n\nFiscal 2004 marked the end of our NISSAN 180 business plan. Obviously, NISSAN 180 cannot be closed completely until the end of September 2005, but we know that we have already delivered two of the plan's three critical commitments.\n\n- · We committed to an 8 percent operating profit margin, and our margin has been at or above 10 percent for every year of NISSAN 180.\n- · We committed to zero debt, and today we have more than ¥200 billion in net cash under the new and more demanding accounting standards.\n- · Our only remaining commitment is to achieve one million additional sales. Even here we are in reasonably good shape. At the midpoint of the measurement period we are at 1,809,000 units, which is a slight advance compared to our commitment to reach 3,597,000 units by the end of September 2005.\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004", + "recall": 0.9836065573770492, + "true_md": "PERFORMANCE\n\n## PERFORMANCE\n\n## The recovery story is complete\n\n## Sales performance\n\n## Financial performance\n\n## Nissan 180 commitments\n\nFiscal 2004 was a tough year, full of both anticipated and unexpected risks, but Nissan lived up to all the challenges. We had a record year in revenues, operating profit, net income, sales volume and production.\n\nGlobal sales came to 3,388,000 units, which exceeded our forecast of 3,380,000 units. This record level represents an increase of 10.8 percent, or 331,000 units, over fiscal 2003, and is 281,000 units more than the previous record level set in 1990. In fiscal 2004, we released nine all-new models globally.\n\nAlong with record sales, we achieved a global production record. Nissan’s manufacturing plants turned out 3,378,000 units, or 293,000 units more than the previous record.\n\n- • Consolidated net revenues came to 8 trillion ¥576.3 billion, up 15.4 percent from last year.\n\n- • Consolidated operating profit improved by 4.4 percent to a record ¥861.2 billion. As a percentage of net revenue, our operating profit margin came to 10.0 percent.\n\n- • Net income reached ¥512.3 billion, an increase of ¥8.6 billion.\n\n- • We committed to an 8 percent operating profit margin, and our margin has been at or above 10 percent for every year of NISSAN 180. \n\n- • We committed to zero debt, and today we have more than ¥200 billion in net cash under the new and more demanding accounting standards.\n\n- • Our only remaining commitment is to achieve one million additional sales. Even here we are in reasonably good shape. At the midpoint of the measurement period we are at 1,809,000 units, which is a slight advance compared to our commitment to reach 3,597,000 units by the end of September 2005.\n\nFiscal 2004 marked the end of our NISSAN 180 business plan. Obviously, NISSAN 180 cannot be closed completely until the end of September 2005, but we know that we have already delivered two of the plan’s three critical commitments.\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 6" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9303708692796397, + "doc_id": "234a67f247e22d874c4985cbeac84a7158fb8abb326167cf3505a354734ae0a3", + "edit_distance": 0.0681265206812652, + "f1_score": 0.9677419354838711, + "meteor": 0.9728681932952057, + "precision": 0.9653465346534653, + "pred_md": "## IN D E E N P D E N T AU D I T O R S' RE P O RT\n\nThe Board of Directors and Stockholders\n\nE u ronet Services Inc.:\n\nWe have audited the accompanying consolidated balance sheets of Euronet Services Inc. and subsidiaries as of December 31, 2000 and 1999 and the related consolidated statements of operations and comprehensive loss, changes in stockholders' (deficit)/equity, and cash flows for each of the years in the three-year period ended December 31, 2000. These consolidated financial statements are the responsibility of the Company's management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these consolidated financial statements based on our audits.\n\nWe conducted our audits in accordance with generally accepted auditing standards in the United States of America. Those standards re q u i re that we plan and perf o rm the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement. An audit includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements. An audit also includes assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall financial statement pre s e n t a t i o n . We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.\n\nIn our opinion, the consolidated financial statements re f e rred to above present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of Euro n e t S e vices Inc. and subsidiaries as of December 31, 2000 and 1999, and the results of their operations and their cash flows for each of the years in r the three-year period ended December 31, 2000 in conformity with generally accepted accounting principles in the United States of America.\n\nWa r s aw, Poland\n\nF e u y 9, 2001 br ar\n\n## CHARLES BRIDGE, Prague\n\nDating back to the 14th century, the Charles Bridge is one of the jewels of Gothic architecture. This stone bridge, built by Charles IV, the Czech King and Holy Roman Emperor, created a reliable connection between the Lesser and the Old Town and gave way to the merging of life of both banks.\n\n2 3", + "recall": 0.9701492537313433, + "true_md": "## IN D E P E N D E N T AU D I T O R S’ RE P O RT\n\nThe Board of Directors and Stockholders \n\nE u ronet Services Inc.:\n\nWe have audited the accompanying consolidated balance sheets of Euronet Services Inc. and subsidiaries as of December 31, 2000 and 1999 and the related consolidated statements of operations and comprehensive loss, changes in stockholders’ (deficit)/equity, and cash flows for each of the years in the three-year period ended December 31, 2000. These consolidated financial statements are the responsibility of the Company’s management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these consolidated financial statements based on our audits. \n\nWe conducted our audits in accordance with generally accepted auditing standards in the United States of America. Those standards re q u i re that we plan and perf o rm the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement. An audit includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements. An audit also includes assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall financial statement pre s e n t a t i o n . We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion. \n\nIn our opinion, the consolidated financial statements re f e rred to above present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of Euro n e t S e rvices Inc. and subsidiaries as of December 31, 2000 and 1999, and the results of their operations and their cash flows for each of the years in the three-year period ended December 31, 2000 in conformity with generally accepted accounting principles in the United States of America. \n\nWa r s a w, Poland \n\nF e b ru a ry 9, 2001 \n\nDating back to the 14th century, the Charles Bridge is one of the jewels of Gothic architecture. This stone bridge, built by Charles IV, the Czech King and Holy Roman Emperor, created a reliable connection between the Lesser and the Old Town and gave way to the merging of life of both banks.\n\n## CHARLES BRIDGE, Prague\n\n2 3" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7961807163810691, + "doc_id": "cd3d953c2c003daffcc9a7beb20ae667845653e68c8cdf9f3406b63a0ef3d570", + "edit_distance": 0.23076923076923078, + "f1_score": 0.9302325581395349, + "meteor": 0.9600054975261133, + "precision": 0.9009009009009009, + "pred_md": "## Stephenville Bank & T rust Co.\n\n## Main Office\n\n2201 W. South Loop Stephenville, Texas 76401 Chartered 1923\n\n## Branches\n\n1875 Lingleville Road\n\nStephenville, Texas 76401\n\n199 N. Columbia Stephenville, Texas 76401\n\n## Senior Officers\n\nRon Butler\n\nPresident and Chief Executive Officer\n\nPerry D. Elliott Vice Chairman\n\nKen Luker\n\nExecutive Vice President\n\nMonty Bedwell\n\nSenior Vice President\n\nDereece Howell\n\nSenior Vice President and Cashier\n\nRon Butler President and Chief Executive Officer\n\nRon Butler President and Chief Executive Officer\n\nTerry McCoy Senior Vice President\n\nRobert Reeves Senior Vice President\n\n## Directors\n\nJames C. Terrell, Jr., M.D. Chairman of the Board\n\nPerry D. Elliott Vice Chairman\n\nRon Butler\n\nPresident and Chief Executive Officer\n\nWilliam L. Corbin Investments\n\nF. Scott Dueser\n\nFirst Financial Bankshares, Inc.\n\nCharles P . Gillespie, Jr.\n\nEngineer\n\nCurtis R. Harvey\n\nFirst Financial Bankshares, Inc.\n\nWilliam H. Oxford Attorney\n\n## Stephenville 3 1 % Erath County Deposit Market Share\n\nBill Parham Parham & Parham, CPAs\n\nJerry Parham Investments\n\nJack Parks\n\nFarmer\n\nRonald E. Schneider First Financial Bank, Cleburne\n\nFrank Terrell, M.D. Ophthalmologist\n\nJohn Terrill\n\nAttorney\n\n## Advisory\n\nW.L. Nix Investments\n\n21", + "recall": 0.9615384615384616, + "true_md": "## Stephenville B ank & Trust Co.\n\nMain Office 2201 W. South Loop Stephenville,Texas 76401 Chartered 1923 \n\nBranches 1875 Lingleville Road Stephenville,Texas 76401 199 N. Columbia Stephenville,Texas 76401\n\nSenior Officers Ron Butler President and Chief Executive Officer Perry D. Elliott Vice Chairman\n\nKen Luker Executive Vice President\n\nMonty Bedwell Senior Vice President Dereece Howell Senior Vice President and Cashier\n\nTerry McCoy Senior Vice President\n\nRobert Reeves Senior Vice President Directors\n\nJames C. Terrell, Jr., M.D. Chairman of the Board\n\nPerry D. Elliott Vice Chairman\n\nRon Butler President and Chief Executive Officer\n\nWilliam L. Corbin Investments\n\nF. Scott Dueser First Financial Bankshares, Inc.\n\nCharles P. Gillespie, Jr. Engineer\n\nCurtis R. Harvey First Financial Bankshares, Inc.\n\nWilliam H. Oxford Attorney\n\nBill Parham Parham & Parham, CPAs\n\nJerry Parham Investments Jack Parks Farmer \n\nRonald E. Schneider First Financial Bank, Cleburne\n\nFrank Terrell, M.D. Ophthalmologist\n\nJohn Terrill Attorney\n\nAdvisory W.L. Nix Investments\n\n21\n\nRon Butler President and Chief Executive Officer" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7320963366961418, + "doc_id": "4fb89d57d5210be07a6af12f2c1a98638c88bed03a5151eb92f8e7667330e7a3", + "edit_distance": 0.7400611620795107, + "f1_score": 0.8968750000000001, + "meteor": 0.7472364169355384, + "precision": 0.8996865203761756, + "pred_md": "04\n\n## TO OUR SHAREHOLDERS\n\nBELLAGIO underwent a significant expansion during 2004 resulting in the opening of the Spa Tower and several important new amenities at this AAA Five Diamond property. Bellagio remains Las Vegas' first and only hotel-casino to receive this prestigious recognition. These new additions add dimension and depth to the world-famous experience awaiting guests at Bellagio.\n\nMGM GRAND LAS VEGAS completed a transformation, begun in 2003, of its food and beverage and entertainment offerings. MGM Grand is one of the must-see attractions of Las Vegas, with Cirque du Soleil's newest production, KA ' TM , and several of the Strip's finest restaurants and hottest nightspots. 18.0%\n\nTI 's transformation was no less extensive, as the property's management team conceived and implemented a program to enliven the property with new restaurants and nightlife.\n\nTHE MIRAGE was the site of a revolution in Las Vegas' history as the venerable buffet was given new life as a top dining establishment, Cravings. Others may follow this lead, but The Mirage was the first property to breathe new life into what remained of the last bastion of 'old' Las Vegas.\n\n## E X P A N D I N G WITH EXCELLENCE\n\nThese investments in your company's future paid dividends even before the year was out. We established a new record for net revenues posting $4.2 billion, a 10% increase over 2003.\n\nYour company's resorts produced record EBITDA of $1.46 billion, an increase of 23% over 2003, while operating income was $951 million, an increase of 36%, with record results at Bellagio, MGM Grand Las Vegas and Beau Rivage.\n\n## Defining Momentum in the Community\n\nI've spent 27 years in this profession and the incredible generosity of our employees never ceases to amaze me. Shortly after the merger with Mirage Resorts in 2000, we established the Voice Foundation. This allows employees to express themselves in the communities we serve by providing them a mechanism to raise monies for worthy causes. It's their money and they decide where it goes. Your company provides the marketing and administrative support. 47.6% 19.5%\n\nIn each year since we established the program, employees have given record amounts to support a\n\n## 2004 Revenue Mix\n\nCasino\n\nRooms\n\nFood & Beverage\n\nEntertainment, Retail,\n\n& Other\n\nSKYLOFTS MGM Grand A private sanctuary of sleek, elegant two-story accommodations, offering discerning guests the quintessential loft environment - harmonizing design, décor, ambiance and unparalleled vistas.\n\nBELLAGIO SPA Unique design elements, combined with an international array of innovative treatments and specially trained therapists, provide the ultimate indulgent experience.\n\nTEATRO MGM Grand A new genre of Las Vegas nightlife where European club influences permeate. DJs spin jazz/ house throughout the evening, giving way to an energetic after-hours vibe with live catwalk entertainment.\n\nTEATRO MGM Grand A new genre of Las Vegas nightlife where European club influences permeate. DJs spin jazz/ house throughout the evening, giving way to an energetic after-hours vibe with live catwalk entertainment.\n\nKÀ The most spectacular production ever, by a troupe renowned for its pageantry. Cirque du Soleil's KÀ debuted at a new theatre at MGM Grand in the fourth quarter of 2004.\n\nKÀ The most spectacular production ever, by a troupe renowned for its pageantry. Cirque du Soleil's KÀ debuted at a new theatre at MGM Grand in the fourth quarter of 2004.\n\nWhat exactly is a defining moment? Try a multi-billion dollar project centered in the heart of Las Vegas.", + "recall": 0.8940809968847352, + "true_md": "## TO OUR SHAREHOLDERS\n\n## EXPANDING WITH EXCELLENCE\n\nKÀ The most spectacular production ever, by a troupe renowned for its pageantry. Cirque du Soleil’s KÀ debuted at a new theatre at MGM Grand in the fourth quarter of 2004.\n\nWhat exactly is a defining moment? Try a multi-billion dollar project centered in the heart of Las Vegas.\n\nThese investments in your company’s future paid dividends even before the year was out. We established a new record for net revenues posting $4.2 billion, a 10% increase over 2003. \n\nYour company’s resorts produced record EBITDA of $1.46 billion, an increase of 23% over 2003, while operating income was $951 million, an increase of 36%, with record results at Bellagio, MGM Grand Las Vegas and Beau Rivage.\n\nBELLAGIO underwent a significant expansion during 2004 result- ing in the opening of the Spa Tower and several important new amenities at this AAA Five Diamond property. Bellagio remains Las Vegas’ first and only hotel-casino to receive this prestigious recognition. These new additions add dimension and depth to the world-famous experience awaiting guests at Bellagio.\n\nMGM GRAND LAS VEGAS completed a transformation, begun in 2003, of its food and beverage and entertainment offerings. MGM Grand is one of the must-see attractions of Las Vegas, with Cirque du Soleil’ newest pro- duction, KA ` $^{TM}$, and several of the Strip’s finest restaurants and hottest nightspots. 18 .0\n\nTI ’s transformation was no less extensive, as the property’s management team conceived and implemented a program to enliven the property with new restaurants and nightlife.\n\nTHE MIRAGE was the site of a revolution in Las Vegas’ history as the venerable buffet was given new life as a top dining establishment, Cravings. Others may follow this lead, but The Mirage was the first property to breathe new life into what remained of the last bastion of “old” Las Vegas.\n\nD efining Momentum in the Community I’ ve spent 27 years in this profession and the incredible generosity of our employees never ceases to amaze me. Shortly after the merger with Mirage Resorts in 2000, we established the Voice Foundation. This allows employees to express themselves in the communities we serve by pr oviding them a mechanism to raise monies for wort hy causes. It’s their money and they decide where it goes. Your company provides the marketing and administrative support. $_{47}$.6% 5 %\n\nIn each year since we established the program, employees have given record amounts to support a\n\nTEATRO MGM Grand A new genre of Las Vegas nightlife where European club influ- ences permeate. DJs spin jazz/ house throughout the evening, giving way to an energetic after-hours vibe with live cat- walk entertainment.\n\nBELLAGIO SPA Unique design elements, combined with an international array of innovative treatments and specially trained therapists, provide the ultimate indul- gent experience.\n\nSKYLOFTS MGM Grand A private sanctuary of sleek, elegant two-story accommo- dations, offering discerning guests the quintessential loft environment - harmonizing design, décor, ambiance and unparalleled vistas. \n\n04" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.968964973509445, + "doc_id": "d476a20758841aa31dae240ac2fee4a064e4fbba6b2430fc42f32e9ad8dc5371", + "edit_distance": 0.02875399361022364, + "f1_score": 0.9774436090225564, + "meteor": 0.9844616653615882, + "precision": 0.9923664122137404, + "pred_md": "## Segment Results\n\nNet sales and operating profits for each of the company's segments is set forth below. The company is an integrated enterprise, characterized by substantial intersegment cooperation, cost allocations, and sharing of assets. Therefore, we do not represent that these segments, if operated independently, would report the operating profit and other financial information shown below. (Additional segment financial information can be found in Note K of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.)\n\nGrocery Products: Grocery Products net sales increased 6.6 percent for the quarter and 0.5 percent for the year compared to fiscal 2003. Sales tonnage volume decreased 1.3 percent for the quarter and 4.2 percent for the year compared to year ago results. Operating profit for Grocery Products decreased 5.3 percent for the quarter and 15.7 percent for the year compared to fiscal 2003. This segment experienced significantly higher raw material costs throughout fiscal 2004, which pressured product margins and contributed to decreased operating profit. The price increase on all Grocery Product items that was implemented on June 14, 2004, partially offset the impact of these higher costs and resulted in increased net sales in the fourth quarter compared to the prior year. The company expects raw material prices in fiscal 2005 to be consistent with fiscal 2004 averages.\n\nLower tonnage volume also reduced the operating profit of this segment. Declines were primarily due to Dinty Moore canned products (down 3,863,000 lbs., or 18.3 percent, for the fourth quarter and 10,914,000 lbs., or 15.6 percent, for the twelve months) and Dinty Moore Classic Bakes complete meals (down 536,000 lbs., or 32.8 percent, for the fourth quarter and 10,519,000 lbs., or 75.6 percent, for the twelve months). However, strong performance in the ethnic line of products continued in the fourth quarter with total tonnage up 1,530,000 lbs., or 7.5 percent,\n\n20\n\nHormel Foods Corporation\n\nled by Carapelli olive oil (up 757,000 lbs., or 23.5 percent) and Herdez Mexican products (up 1,568,000 lbs., or 21.0 percent). Dinty Moore microwave products also showed strong growth for the year (up 3,557,000 lbs., or 18.3 percent), coinciding with a package change from a box to a sleeve on tray items.\n\nSeveral initiatives were implemented in fiscal 2004 to enhance growth in the Grocery Products segment. During the third quarter, the segment launched a new packaging concept for chili items using the Tetra Recart carton technology, and also began the national roll-out of Stagg chili (previously sold only in markets west of the Mississippi River). The overall chili category saw a 29.0 percent growth nationally in the fourth quarter with the introduction of two new competitors, and the company has begun an aggressive marketing program to further promote its chili products in fiscal 2005. The new SPAM Singles product has also been introduced in four test markets and initial results indicate positive growth for the canned luncheon meat category. Due to these ongoing initiatives, the company anticipates Grocery Products tonnage volume will increase slightly in fiscal 2005.\n\nRefrigerated Foods: Net sales by the Refrigerated Foods segment were up 19.9 percent for the quarter and 13.9 percent for the twelve months compared to fiscal 2003. Sales tonnage increased 9.6 percent for the quarter and remained the same for the fiscal year as compared to 2003. Tonnage comparisons for the twelve months are impacted by the discontinuance of hog", + "recall": 0.9629629629629629, + "true_md": "## Segment Results\n\nNet sales and operating profits for each of the company’s segments is set forth below. The company is an integrated enterprise, char- acterized by substantial intersegment cooperation, cost allocations, and sharing of assets. Therefore, we do not represent that these segments, if operated independently, would report the operating profit and other financial information shown below. (Additional segment financial information can be found in Note K of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.)\n\nGrocery Products: Grocery Products net sales increased 6.6 percent for the quarter and 0.5 percent for the year compared to fiscal 2003. Sales tonnage volume decreased 1.3 percent for the quarter and 4.2 percent for the year compared to year ago results. Operating profit for Grocery Products decreased 5.3 percent for the quarter and 15.7 percent for the year compared to fiscal 2003. This segment experienced significantly higher raw material costs throughout fiscal 2004, which pressured product margins and contributed to decreased operating profit. The price increase on all Grocery Product items that was implemented on June 14, 2004, partially offset the impact of these higher costs and resulted in increased net sales in the fourth quarter compared to the prior year. The company expects raw material prices in fiscal 2005 to be consistent with fiscal 2004 averages. \n\nLower tonnage volume also reduced the operating profit of this segment. Declines were primarily due to Dinty Moore canned products (down 3,863,000 lbs., or 18.3 percent, for the fourth quarter and 10,914,000 lbs., or 15.6 percent, for the twelve months) and Dinty Moore Classic Bakes complete meals (down 536,000 lbs., or 32.8 percent, for the fourth quarter and 10,519,000 lbs., or 75.6 percent, for the twelve months). However, strong performance in the ethnic line of products continued in the fourth quarter with total tonnage up 1,530,000 lbs., or 7.5 percent,\n\nled by Carapelli olive oil (up 757,000 lbs., or 23.5 percent) and Herdez Mexican products (up 1,568,000 lbs., or 21.0 percent). Dinty Moore microwave products also showed strong growth for the year (up 3,557,000 lbs., or 18.3 percent), coinciding with a package change from a box to a sleeve on tray items. \n\nSeveral initiatives were implemented in fiscal 2004 to enhance growth in the Grocery Products segment. During the third quarter, the segment launched a new packaging concept for chili items using the Tetra Recart carton technology, and also began the national roll-out of Stagg chili (previously sold only in markets west of the Mississippi River). The overall chili category saw a 29.0 per- cent growth nationally in the fourth quarter with the introduction of two new competitors, and the company has begun an aggressive marketing program to further promote its chili products in fiscal 2005. The new SPAM Singles product has also been introduced in four test markets and initial results indicate positive growth for the canned luncheon meat category. Due to these ongoing initia- tives, the company anticipates Grocery Products tonnage volume will increase slightly in fiscal 2005.\n\nRefrigerated Foods: Net sales by the Refrigerated Foods seg- ment were up 19.9 percent for the quarter and 13.9 percent for the twelve months compared to fiscal 2003. Sales tonnage increased 9.6 percent for the quarter and remained the same for the fiscal year as compared to 2003. Tonnage comparisons for the twelve months are impacted by the discontinuance of hog\n\n20 Hormel Foods Corporation" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5039508321855408, + "doc_id": "efbe8a09c1ab44d68f9431f8445a9b0b7a7a998f423d9c949de28ecb9e220370", + "edit_distance": 0.5448504983388704, + "f1_score": 0.7537688442211056, + "meteor": 0.8195270181001453, + "precision": 0.6521739130434783, + "pred_md": "66\n\n## NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\nfor the year ended 31 December 2004\n\n2\n\naggregate\n\n1\n\nissued\n\nreceived\n\nVested\n\nOn issue\n\nexercised\n\nlapsed\n\ngranted\n\nper share of the year\n\nExpiry date\n\nexercisable\n\nGrant date\n\n2\n\naggregate\n\n1\n\nissued\n\nreceived\n\nVested\n\nOn issue\n\nexercised\n\nlapsed\n\ngranted\n\nper share of the year\n\nFair value\n\nof shares\n\nProceeds\n\nOptions\n\nOptions\n\nOptions\n\nbeginning\n\nExercise price\n\nExpiry date\n\n## Date first exercisable\n\nGrant date\n\n18. Contributed Equity (continued)\n\n## (d) Santos Executive Share Option Plan (continued)\n\nSummary of options over unissued ordinary shares\n\nConsolidated and the Company\n\n2004\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\nNumber\n\nNumber of options at end of the year\n\nNumber of\n\noptions at\n\nFair value\n\nof shares\n\nProceeds\n\nOptions\n\nOptions\n\nOptions\n\nbeginning\n\nExercise price\n\nDate first\n\n$\n\n$\n\n$\n\n5,023,550\n\n715,000\n\n4,085,800\n\n2,983,314\n\n5,513,462\n\n715,000\n\n100,000\n\n330,148\n\n5,998,314\n\nShares issued on the exercise of options have occurred at varying dates throughout the financial year. The fair value of shares issued as a result of exercising options during the reporting period has been determined using the market price of the Company's ordinary shares on the Australian Stock Exchange as at close of trading on the respective issue dates.\n\n1\n\n2\n\n2003\n\nNumber of options\n\nNumber of\n\nNumber\n\nat end of the year\n\noptions at\n\n$\n\n$\n\n$\n\n7,348,850\n\n1,250,000\n\n5,721,600\n\n1,365,000\n\n5,998,314\n\n1,250,000\n\n200,000\n\n308,314\n\n7,140,000\n\nShares issued on the exercise of options have occurred at varying dates throughout the 2003 financial year. The fair value of shares issued as a result of exercising options during the 2003 financial year has been determined using the market price of the Company's ordinary shares on the Australian Stock Exchange as at close of trading on the respective issue dates.\n\n1 2", + "recall": 0.8928571428571429, + "true_md": "## NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STA TEMENTS\n\nfor the year ended 31 December 2004\n\n2004\n\nSummary of options over unissued ordinary shares Consolidated and the Company\n\n(d) Santos Executive Share Option Plan (continued)\n\n## 18. Contributed Equity (continued)\n\n- 1 Shares issued on the exercise of options have occurred at varying dates throughout the financial year.\n\n- 2 The fair value of shares issued as a result of exercising options during the reporting period has been determined using the market price of th Compan y’s ordinary shares on the Australian Stock Exchange as at close of trading on the respective issue dates.\n\n2003\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\n66\n\n- 1 Shares issued on the exercise of options have occurred at varying dates throughout the 2003 financial year.\n\n- 2 The fair value of shares issued as a result of exercising options during the 2003 financial year has been determined using the market price of th e Compan y’s ordinary shares on the Australian Stock Exchange as at close of trading on the respective issue dates." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9061292100152905, + "doc_id": "06e355f533ff853eef77542b988b47e51eef43acf44ee037dbe921d0775f35a3", + "edit_distance": 0.2793791574279379, + "f1_score": 0.9656992084432716, + "meteor": 0.935434209416985, + "precision": 0.9631578947368421, + "pred_md": "3 6\n\nIn the week of March 13, 2000, the Company entered into put options with Merrill Lynch to sell Euro 79.0 million for $75.1 million on May 26, 2000. The contracts were purchased to limit the Company's exposure on the call option described above against a fall of the Euro below $0.95.\n\nThe Company was re q u i red to cash collateralize the net fair value of such options contracts measured on a mark-to-market basis, and on May 26, 2000, the Company had on deposit $8.3 million with Merrill Lynch.\n\nOn May 26, 2000, the rate of the Euro was $0.9118 and the Company settled the above option contracts in the amount of $8.3 million resulting in a total net loss on such contracts of $10.3 million inclusive of the cost of the contracts. At December 31, 2000, the Company had not entered into any further option contracts.\n\n## (15) Leases\n\n## (a) Capital leases\n\nThe Company leases many of its ATMs under capital lease agreements that expire between 2001 and 2005 and bear interest at rates between 8% and 12%. Lease installments are paid on a monthly, quarterly or semi-annual basis. Euronet has the right to extend the t e m of certain leases at the conclusion of the basic lease period. r\n\nThe gross amount of the ATMs and computer equipment and related accumulated amortization re c o rded under capital leases were as follows: December 31,\n\nD e eciation of assets held under capital leases amounted to $2.0 million, $2.1 million, and $2.9 million for the years ended December 31, pr 2000, 1999, and 1998, re s p e c t i v e , and is included in depreciation and amortization expense. ly\n\n## (b) Operating leases\n\nThe Company also has noncancelable operating rental leases for office space which expire over the next 3 to 9 years. Rent expense under these leases amounted to $1.4 million, $2.1 million, and $1.1 million for the years ended December 31, 2000, 1999, and 1998, re s p e . ctively\n\nF u e minimum lease payments under the capital leases and the noncancelable operating lease (with initial or remaining lease terms in tur\n\n(c) Future minimum lease payments excess of one year) as of December 31, 2000 are:", + "recall": 0.9682539682539683, + "true_md": "In the week of March 13, 2000, the Company entered into put options with Merrill Lynch to sell Euro 79.0 million for $75.1 million on May 26, 2000. The contracts were purchased to limit the Company's exposure on the call option described above against a fall of the Euro below $0.95. \n\nThe Company was re q u i red to cash collateralize the net fair value of such options contracts measured on a mark-to-market basis, and on May 26, 2000, the Company had on deposit $8.3 million with Merrill Lynch. \n\nOn May 26, 2000, the rate of the Euro was $0.9118 and the Company settled the above option contracts in the amount of $8.3 million resulting in a total net loss on such contracts of $10.3 million inclusive of the cost of the contracts. At December 31, 2000, the Company had not entered into any further option contracts. \n\nThe Company leases many of its ATMs under capital lease agreements that expire between 2001 and 2005 and bear interest at rates between 8% and 12%. Lease installments are paid on a monthly, quarterly or semi-annual basis. Euronet has the right to extend the t e rm of certain leases at the conclusion of the basic lease period. \n\nD e p reciation of assets held under capital leases amounted to $2.0 million, $2.1 million, and $2.9 million for the years ended December 31, 2000, 1999, and 1998, re s p e c t i v e l y, and is included in depreciation and amortization expense. \n\nThe Company also has noncancelable operating rental leases for office space which expire over the next 3 to 9 years. Rent expense under these leases amounted to $1.4 million, $2.1 million, and $1.1 million for the years ended December 31, 2000, 1999, and 1998, re s p e c t i v e l y. \n\nF u t u re minimum lease payments under the capital leases and the noncancelable operating lease (with initial or remaining lease terms in excess of one year) as of December 31, 2000 are: \n\n3 6\n\n## (15) Leases\n\n- (a) Capital leases \n\n- (b) Operating leases \n\n- (c) Future minimum lease payments \n\nThe gross amount of the ATMs and computer equipment and related accumulated amortization re c o rded under capital leases were as follows: December 31," + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8983270762662308, + "doc_id": "7da06c5390ea90d00ffdf4859099416f49c0d4ce828b417786c75f0343b18c8f", + "edit_distance": 0.2771929824561403, + "f1_score": 0.9886363636363635, + "meteor": 0.9555438019502766, + "precision": 0.9886363636363636, + "pred_md": "## OPERATIONS REVIEW\n\nThe foreshore of King Bay will be redeveloped as part of the Mermaid Marine Dampier Base Expansion works.\n\nThe foreshore of King Bay will be redeveloped as part of the Mermaid Marine Dampier Base Expansion works.\n\nleased facilities to seven third party vessels and protection for three of our own vessels using this technique by the cyclone season in 2001.\n\nAs more vessels seek protection, additional breakwaters can be constructed and sea room dredged. Each mooring involves a pattern of pin piles drilled into the granite sea floor with four vessel specific mooring lines secured to special attachment points on the vessel.\n\nMany smaller vessels including Mermaid's will be lifted from the water and tied down on purpose built cradles for cyclones.\n\n## F. ONSHORE LAND RECLAMATION.\n\nLike our neighbours, much of the Mermaid site is below the prescribed storm surge level, or needs some degree of earthworks to maximize its value. Currently 8 of the 17 ha of the area is suitable for development in its present state.\n\nThe spoil produced from dredging will allow Mermaid to achieve full utilization of the site at a fraction of the cost of importing fill from elsewhere.\n\nConsiderable effort has gone into anticipating the future direction of the Base. Planning services such as traffic flows, land allocation and security, as well as fulfilling the many and complex regulatory requirements related to health, safety, quarantine, environmental management, dust, dangerous goods and hazchem materials have been the subject of considerable study prior to this implementation stage.\n\nMERMAID MARINE AUSTRALIA LIMITED\n\n13", + "recall": 0.9886363636363636, + "true_md": "leased facilities to seven third party vessels and protection for three of our own vessels using this technique by the cyclone season in 2001.\n\nAs more vessels seek protection, additional breakwaters can be constructed and sea room dredged. Each mooring involves a pattern of pin piles drilled into the granite sea floor with four vessel specific mooring lines secured to special attachment points on the vessel.\n\nMany smaller vessels including Mermaid’s will be lifted from the water and tied down on purpose built cradles for cyclones.\n\nLike our neighbours, much of the Mermaid site is below the prescribed storm surge level, or needs some degree of earthworks to maximize its value. Currently 8 of the 17 ha of the area is suitable for development in its present state.\n\nThe spoil produced from dredging will allow Mermaid to achieve full utilization of the site at a fraction of the cost of importing fill from elsewhere.\n\nConsiderable effort has gone into anticipating the future direction of the Base. Planning services such as traffic flows, land allocation and security, as well as fulfilling the many and complex regulatory requirements related to health, safety, quarantine, environmental management, dust, dangerous goods and hazchem materials have been the subject of considerable study prior to this implementation stage. \n\n## F. ONSHORE LAND RECLAMATION.\n\nThe foreshore of King Bay will be redeveloped as part of the Mermaid Marine Dampier Base Expansion works.\n\nMERMAID MARINE AUSTRALIA LIMITED\n\nOPERATIONS REVIEW" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.13149195392743385, + "doc_id": "fe890190fd9d42086ec9f2673c52771d3b4298acaac05920413022c8ba782343", + "edit_distance": 0.6949152542372882, + "f1_score": 0.5801526717557252, + "meteor": 0.36353788073011706, + "precision": 0.9743589743589743, + "pred_md": "16\n\n## Office\n\n201 E. Main Eastland, Texas 76448 Chartered 1934\n\n## Senior Officers\n\nTommy J. Barrow Chairman of the Board, President and Chief Executive Officer\n\nClint S. Ferguson\n\nExecutive Vice President\n\nJim Davidson Senior Vice President and Cashier\n\nTommy J. Barrow Chairman of the Board, President and Chief Executive Officer\n\n28 % Eastland County Deposit Market Share", + "recall": 0.41304347826086957, + "true_md": "## Eastland N ational B ank\n\n## Office 201 E. Main\n\n## Senior Officers\n\n## Directors\n\nOffice 201 E. Main Eastland,Texas 76448 Chartered 1934 \n\nTommy J. Barrow Chairman of the Board, President and Chief Executive Officer\n\nClint S. Ferguson Executive Vice President\n\nJim Davidson Senior Vice President and Cashier\n\nTommy J. Barrow Chairman of the Board, President and Chief Executive Officer\n\nF. Scott Dueser First Financial Bankshares, Inc.\n\nClint S. Ferguson Executive Vice President\n\nCurtis R. Harvey First Financial Bankshares, Inc.\n\nJim Keffer President, EBAA Iron Sales, Inc.\n\nMike T. Perry President, Kinnaird, Rossander & Perry Agency, Inc.\n\nDale Squiers, R.Ph. Owner, Eastland Drug Company\n\nTommy Warford Turner, Seaberry and Warford, Attorneys\n\nM.D. White, Jr. President and Owner, Ace Hardware Store Eastland/Cisco\n\nTommy J. Barrow Chairman of the Board, President and Chief Executive Officer\n\n## Return on Average Equity 16.90 15.91 2 8 % Eastland County Deposit Market Share\n\n16" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.966028277777505, + "doc_id": "3c0254c252e46ca12faa51a960cb1cfc6d757c221c100e8cc7e7009646dfcb76", + "edit_distance": 0.051829268292682924, + "f1_score": 0.9936507936507936, + "meteor": 0.9877855501698878, + "precision": 0.9936507936507937, + "pred_md": "The Process and Resource Management division is one of Nissan's greatest assets. They are sometimes perceived as too rigid, and it is true that the division has established quite a number of rules. However, I easily imagine what can happen to a company without rules. The point, really, is to keep the structure and provide some freedom when needed. The core creative divisions can add great value to a process, such as when they interact with the advanced engineering team. When the creative people are happy with what they have developed, however, someone has to support the complex process of creating added value. That responsibility belongs to the Process and Resource Management division. Otherwise, a nicely crafted process may never be implemented. But at Nissan, employees in the Process and Resource Management division serve as the guardians of the timelines and support the implementation of processes. If a process is not working as we planned, they get the project back on track in a smooth and efficient manner. If a process is no longer relevant, they quickly organize a taskforce to update it.\n\nSo Corporate Planning provides the direction, Design and Product Planning create products with value, and Market Intelligence and Process and Resource Management support the creative teams. Someone has to drive the implementation, and that role belongs to our six program directors in Program Management. The program directors are involved from the beginning. They are businesspeople, the CEOs of their own platform businesses. Each has a different part of the vehicle lineup, but the substance of their mutual targets and commitments is simple: profit. Program directors make it happen. They ensure that everybody in the Company keeps each project consistently profitable through\n\n## Nre Global Product Launches\n\n## 28 All-New Models\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\nall phases: planning, development and launch, right through to the end of the lifecycle. Our program directors are persuasive people with strong characters, special skills and attributes, and they are not afraid to challenge the system. Their diversity contributes tremendously to Nissan's success. The cumulative work of all these divisions results in a very consistent organization with an upstream process that creates value.\n\nLooking at Nissan's global output over the last six years, it is clear that some terrific products have been created, and the value of the Company as a whole is greater. There are many scorecards that reflect this, and our stakeholders certainly know Nissan's success first-hand. At the same time, we must prepare for the future. We need to reinforce the strength of our program management groups and establish more precise, accurate groups to standardize and improve processes for the future. Ironically, our achievements have created uncertainty for the future. Success creates risk, and the more we highlight our successes, the more we raise the anxiety level of investors. How can our new products be as good as those already released? How can we keep it all going?\n\nOne way to sustain our strong pace is to take greater advantage of the Alliance. The value is there, in areas such as purchasing, development, benchmarking, sales networks, market knowledge and even financial strategy. Yet we must maintain both a balance and a clear separation between the brand identities of Renault and Nissan. Neither company wants to make the same cars, or have the same corporate culture, or have its brand mistaken for the other. We will continue to derive benefits from this strategic partnership while remaining Nissan.\n\n35\n\nOUR WORK", + "recall": 0.9936507936507937, + "true_md": "The Process and Resource Management division is one of Nissan’s greatest assets. They are sometimes perceived as too rigid, and it is true that the division has established quite a number of rules. However, I easily imagine what can happen to a company without rules. The point, really, is to keep the structure and provide some freedom when needed. The core creative divisions can add great value to a process, such as when they interact with the advanced engineering team. When the creative people are happy with what they have developed, however, someone has to support the complex process of creating added value. That responsibility belongs to the Process and Resource Management division. Otherwise, a nicely crafted process may never be implemented. But at Nissan, employees in the Process and Resource Management division serve as the guardians of the timelines and support the implementation of processes. If a process is not working as we planned, they get the project back on track in a smooth and efficient manner. If a process is no longer relevant, they quickly organize a taskforce to update it. \n\nSo Corporate Planning provides the direction, Design and Product Planning create products with value, and Market Intelligence and Process and Resource Management support the creative teams. Someone has to drive the implementation, and that role belongs to our six program directors in Program Management. The program directors are involved from the beginning. They are businesspeople, the CEOs of their own platform businesses. Each has a different part of the vehicle lineup, but the substance of their mutual targets and commitments is simple: profit. Program directors make it happen. They ensure that everybody in the Company keeps each project consistently profitable through\n\nall phases: planning, development and launch, right through to the end of the lifecycle. Our program directors are persuasive people with strong characters, special skills and attributes, and they are not afraid to challenge the system. Their diversity contributes tremendously to Nissan’s success. The cumulative work of all these divisions results in a very consistent organization with an upstream process that creates value.\n\nLooking at Nissan’s global output over the last six years, it is clear that some terrific products have been created, and the value of the Company as a whole is greater. There are many scorecards that reflect this, and our stakeholders certainly know Nissan’s success first-hand. At the same time, we must prepare for the future. We need to reinforce the strength of our program management groups and establish more precise, accurate groups to standardize and improve processes for the future. Ironically, our achievements have created uncertainty for the future. Success creates risk, and the more we highlight our successes, the more we raise the anxiety level of investors. How can our new products be as good as those already released? How can we keep it all going?\n\nOne way to sustain our strong pace is to take greater advantage of the Alliance. The value is there, in areas such as purchasing, development, benchmarking, sales networks, market knowledge and even financial strategy. Yet we must maintain both a balance and a clear separation between the brand identities of Renault and Nissan. Neither company wants to make the same cars, or have the same corporate culture, or have its brand mistaken for the other. We will continue to derive benefits from this strategic partnership while remaining Nissan.\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 35\n\nNre Global Product Launches\n\n28 All-New Models\n\nOUR WORK" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9698575225732262, + "doc_id": "f00ae158df5cfd9319deb393aee203a4599e0244da6f3017c5bc8abeb97eec87", + "edit_distance": 0.07017543859649122, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999692466102931, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## Note 5. Long-Term Debt and Revolving Lines of Credit (Continued)\n\nThe aggregate maturities of long-term debt for each of the five years subsequent to December 31, 2003 are as follows:\n\nThe estimated fair value of fixed rate debt instruments as of December 31, 2003 and 2002 was $42.6 million and $51.1 million, respectively, determined by discounting the future cash flows of each instrument at rates offered for similar debt instruments of comparable maturities as of the respective year-end dates.\n\nAll other financial instruments presented on the consolidated balance sheets approximate fair value. They include cash and cash equivalents, receivables, investments, payables, and accrued liabilities.\n\n## Note 6. Income Taxes\n\nTotal income taxes for the years ended December 31, 2003, 2002 and 2001 were allocated as follows:\n\nThe Company and its subsidiaries file income tax returns in several jurisdictions. The provision for the federal and state income taxes attributable to income (loss) from continuing operations consists of the following components:\n\nA reconciliation of income taxes determined by applying the Federal and state tax rates to income (loss) from continuing operations is as follows:\n\n27\n\n2003 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n■", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## Note 5. Long-Term Debt and Revolving Lines of Credit (Continued)\n\nThe aggregate maturities of long-term debt for each of the five years subsequent to December 31, 2003 are as follows:\n\nThe estimated fair value of fixed rate debt instruments as of December 31, 2003 and 2002 was $42.6 million and $51.1 million, respectively, determined by discounting the future cash flows of each instrument at rates offered for similar debt instruments of comparable maturities as of the respective year-end dates.\n\nAll other financial instruments presented on the consolidated balance sheets approximate fair value. They include cash and cash equivalents, receivables, investments, payables, and accrued liabilities.\n\nTotal income taxes for the years ended December 31, 2003, 2002 and 2001 were allocated as follows:\n\n## Note 6. Income Taxes\n\nThe Company and its subsidiaries file income tax returns in several jurisdictions. The provision for the federal and state income taxes attributable to income (loss) from continuing operations consists of the following components:\n\nA reconciliation of income taxes determined by applying the Federal and state tax rates to income (loss) from continuing operations is as follows:\n\n27 ■ 2003 ANNUAL REPORT" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7912204265592224, + "doc_id": "4d05c9270b1895024a5308e929413cbfacbe7efe2a6bb597bd3bb3f84e5c7d3e", + "edit_distance": 0.8461538461538461, + "f1_score": 0.8977272727272728, + "meteor": 0.679375626667573, + "precision": 0.8943396226415095, + "pred_md": "## 26. Specified Director and Specified Executive Disclosures\n\n## (a) Specified Directors\n\nThe following persons were Specified Directors of Santos Ltd during the financial year:\n\nBarnett, Peter Charles Conroy, Francis John Ellice-Flint, John Charles Gerlach, Stephen Harding, Richard Michael McGregor, Graeme William O'Leary, Michael Anthony Sloan, Judith\n\nNon-executive Director\n\nNon-executive Director (retired 14 December 2004)\n\nManaging Director\n\nChairman and non-executive Director\n\nNon-executive Director (appointed 1 March 2004)\n\nNon-executive Director\n\nNon-executive Director\n\nNon-executive Director\n\n## (b) Specified Executives of the Santos Group\n\nThe following persons were the six executives with the greatest authority for the strategic direction and management of the Santos Group ('Specified Executives') during the financial year:\n\nAll Specified Executives are employed by Santos Ltd.\n\n## (c) Remuneration of Specified Directors and Specified Executives\n\nThe Remuneration Committee of the Board is responsible for reviewing the remuneration policies and practices of the Company including: the compensation arrangements for the Managing Director and senior management; the Company's superannuation arrangements; employee share and option plans; and the fees for non-executive Directors.\n\n## Non-executive Directors\n\nWithin the aggregate amount (being $1,500,000 per year) approved by shareholders at the Annual General Meeting of the Company held on 7 May 2004, the fees of the Chairman and non-executive Directors are set at levels which represent the responsibilities of and the time commitments provided by those Directors in discharging their duties. Regard is also had to the level of fees payable to non-executive Directors of comparable companies. Non-executive Directors' fees were increased effective 1 July 2004. Non-executive Directors, other than the Chairman, who are members of Board committees receive additional fees. Non-executive Directors may not participate in any of the Company's bonus, share or option plans.\n\nThe Directors determined to cease retirement allowances to non-executive Directors effective from 30 June 2004. Non-executive Directors appointed before 1 January 2004 are entitled to receive benefits accrued to that date, payable upon ceasing to hold office as a Director. The retirement payment (inclusive of superannuation guarantee charge entitlements) is made pursuant to an agreement entered into with each non-executive Director on terms approved by shareholders at the 1989 Annual General Meeting. These benefits have been fully provided for by the Company.\n\n## Executive Directors\n\nThe Managing Director, Mr J C Ellice-Flint, is currently the only Executive Director.\n\nMr J C Ellice-Flint has an executive service agreement with the Company which continues until terminated by either party in accordance with the agreement.\n\nHis remuneration comprises a base salary reviewed annually and an annual bonus calculated on a formula that includes components to measure the growth of profitability, exploitable reserves and share price.\n\nHe also has an entitlement to 1,000,000 Restricted Shares, details of which are described in note 18(h) to the financial statements and holds 3,000,000 options under the Santos Executive Share Option Plan.\n\nIf the Company terminates Mr J C Ellice-Flint's appointment without cause, the Company may at its option, in lieu of part or all of the notice period of 24 months, pay to him an amount equal to a proportion or multiple of his annual base salary and the current year's potential bonus (excluding the application of any performance condition) at the time at which notice is given.\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\n75", + "recall": 0.9011406844106464, + "true_md": "## (a) Specified Directors\n\n## 26. Specified Director and Specified Executive Disclosures\n\n## (b) Specified Executives of the Santos Group\n\n## (c) Remuneration of Specified Directors and Specified Executives\n\n## Non-executive Directors\n\n## Executive Directors\n\nThe Managing Director, Mr J C Ellice-Flint, is currently the only Executive Dir ector.\n\nMr J C Ellice-Flint has an executive service agreement with the Compan y which continues until terminated by either party in accordance with the agreement.\n\nHis remuneration comprises a base salary reviewed annually and an annu al bonus calculated on a formula that includes components to measure the growth of profitability, exploitable reserves and share price.\n\nHe also has an entitlement to 1,000,000 Restricted Shares, details of whi ch are described in note 18(h) to the financial statements and holds 3,000,000 options under the Santos Executive Share Option Plan.\n\nIf the Company terminates Mr J C Ellice-Flint’s appointment without cause , the Company may at its option, in lieu of part or all of the notice period of 24 months, pay to him an amount equal to a proportion or m ultiple of his annual base salary and the current year’s potential bonus (excluding the application of any performance condition) at the tim at which notice is given.\n\nAnnual Report 2004 75\n\nThe Directors determined to cease retirement allowances to non-executive Directors effective from 30 June 2004. Non-executive Directors appointed before 1 January 2004 are entitled to receive benefits accrued to that date , payable upon ceasing to hold office as a Director. The retirement payment (inclusive of superannuation guarantee charge entitlements) is ma de pursuant to an agreement entered into with each non-executive Director on terms approved by shareholders at the 1989 Annual General M eeting. These benefits have been fully provided for by the Company.\n\nWithin the aggregate amount (being $1,500,000 per year) approved by shareholders at the Annual General Meeting of the Company held on 7 May 2004, the fees of the Chairman and non-executive Directors ar set at levels which represent the responsibilities of and the time commitments provided by those Directors in discharging their duties Regard is also had to the level of fees payable to non-executive Directors of comparable companies. Non-executive Directors’ fees were increased effective 1 July 2004. Non-executive Directors, other than the Chairman, who are members of Board committees receive additional fees. Non-ex ecutive Directors may not participate in any of the Company’s bonus, share or option plans.\n\nThe Remuneration Committee of the Board is responsible for reviewing th e remuneration policies and practices of the Company including: the compensation arrangements for the Managing Director and senior manage ment; the Company’s superannuation arrangements; employee share and option plans; and the fees for non-executive Directors.\n\nAll Specified Executives are employed by Santos Ltd.\n\nThe following persons were the six executives with the greatest authority for the strategic direction and management of the Santos Group (“Specified Executives”) during the financial year:\n\nThe following persons were Specified Directors of Santos Ltd during th financial year:" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9542922820780995, + "doc_id": "f9a444f234cb7902f6b5b1bf7309c98098474b4ff953df3152bc86a75ffd3bb0", + "edit_distance": 0.03220035778175313, + "f1_score": 0.9633699633699633, + "meteor": 0.9758899869001066, + "precision": 0.9598540145985401, + "pred_md": "The Company re c o rded an $800,000 write-down of certain ATM hard w a re assets associated with the p u chase of the Budapest Bank ATM network in May 2000 and the Service Bank ATM network in r M a rch 1999 (see Note 10 to the Consolidated Financial Statements - Asset Write Down). In addition, the Company re c o rded a one-time gain in its Central European Sub-segment of $1.2 million. The gain is related to a change in Hungarian law that eliminates a major portion of the Company's liability for import taxes on ATM hard w a re to the Hungarian government. The gain is included as an element of direct operating costs.\n\nThe operating expenses for the Central European Sub-segment totaled $21.7 million for the year ended December 31, 2000 as compared to $20.7 million for the year ended December 31, 1999, an i ease of 5%. The increase in operating expenses is largely the result of an increase in the number ncr of ATMs operated by the Company from 1,203 at December 31, 1999 to 1,391 at December 31, 2000, and increased transaction volumes.\n\nThe operating expenses for the We s t e rn European Sub-segment totaled $18.9 million for the year ended December 31, 2000 as compared to $16.5 million for the year ended December 31, 1999, an increase of 15%. The increase in operating expenses is largely the result of an increase in the number of ATMs operated by the Company from 621 at December 31, 1999 to 787 at December 31, 2000, and increased transaction volumes.\n\nThe operating expenses for the Other ATM Operations Sub-segment were $2.4 million for the year ended December 31, 2000 as compared to $2.2 million for the year ended December 31, 1999, an increase of 9%. The operating expenses from this segment are the result of the acquisition of the Dash network located in the United States in August 1999 and the unallocated costs associated with the Company's processing facilities.\n\nD i ect operating costs in the Network Services Segment consist primarily of: ATM installation costs; ATM site rentals; and costs associated with r maintaining ATMs, ATM telecommunications, interest on network cash and cash delivery and security services to ATMs. Such costs increased to $24.4 million for the year ended December 31, 2000 from $21.9 million for the year ended December 31, 1999. The increase in direct operating costs is primarily attributable to costs associated with operating the increased number of ATMs in the network during the periods. Also, i company allocations were made to charge the ATM operations with transaction switching and bank connection fees associated with the nter operations central processing center in Budapest. These allocations totalled $3.5 million and $2.9 million for the years ended December 31, 2000 and 1999, re s p e c i . Direct operating costs for 2000 include a one-time gain of $1.2 million due to a change in Hungarian law that eliminates a t vely major portion of the Company's liability for import taxes on ATM hard w a re. Direct operating costs also include a $657,000 gain realized in 1999 f rom the sale of the Croatian network assets. The components of direct operating costs for the years ended December 31, 2000 and 1999 were:\n\nAs a percentage of network revenue, direct operating costs fell from 83% for the year ended December 31, 1999 to 66% for the year ended December 31, 2000. On a per ATM basis the direct operating costs fell from $12,782 per ATM for the year ended December 31, 1999 to $9,807 per ATM for the year ended December 31, 2000, an improvement of 23%. On a per transaction basis the direct operating costs fell from $0.66 per transaction for the year ended December 31, 1999 to $0.46 per transaction for the year ended December 31, 2000, an improvement of 30%.\n\nSegment salaries and benefits increased to $7.4 million for the year ended December 31, 2000 from $7.2 million for the year ended December 31, 1999, an increase of 3%. The increase in the year-on-year expenses reflect the continued expansion of the operations to We s t e rn Euro p e a n markets with significantly higher labor costs than Central Europe as well as some increases in staff levels at the processing center re q u i red to maintain quality service in line with the rising transaction volumes. As a percentage of Network Services Segment revenue, salaries and benefits fell from 27% for the year ended December 31, 1999 to 20% for the year ended December 31, 2000.\n\nSelling, general and administrative costs allocated to the Network Services Segment decreased to $2.4 million for the year ended December 31, 2000 from $2.9 million for the year ended December 31, 1999. The $500,000 cost decrease for the year ended December 31, 2000 results fro m the net effect of (1) a $600,000 increase in the allocation of costs from the selling, general and administrative line of the Budapest pro c e s s i n g center to the operating cost line, as discussed above, from $2.9 million for the year ended December 31, 1999 to $3.5 for the year ended December 31, 2000 and (2) a $100,000 increase in costs associated with the expansion of the Company's network operations.\n\nD e eciation and amortization increased to $8.0 million for the year ended December 31, 2000 from $7.4 million for the year ended December pr 31, 1999. The increases are due primarily to the increase in the number of owned ATMs as discussed pre v i o u s l y. The Company also re c o rded an $800,000 write-down of certain ATM hard w a re assets for the year ended December 31, 2000, as previously discussed.\n\n1 7", + "recall": 0.9669117647058824, + "true_md": "The Company re c o rded an $800,000 write-down of certain ATM hard w a re assets associated with the p u rchase of the Budapest Bank ATM network in May 2000 and the Service Bank ATM network in M a rch 1999 (see Note 10 to the Consolidated Financial Statements – Asset Write Down). In addition, the Company re c o rded a one-time gain in its Central European Sub-segment of $1.2 million. The gain is related to a change in Hungarian law that eliminates a major portion of the Company’s liability for import taxes on ATM hard w a re to the Hungarian government. The gain is included as an element of direct operating costs. \n\nThe operating expenses for the Central European Sub-segment totaled $21.7 million for the year ended December 31, 2000 as compared to $20.7 million for the year ended December 31, 1999, an i n c rease of 5%. The increase in operating expenses is largely the result of an increase in the number of ATMs operated by the Company from 1,203 at December 31, 1999 to 1,391 at December 31, 2000, and increased transaction volumes. \n\nThe operating expenses for the We s t e rn European Sub-segment totaled $18.9 million for the year ended December 31, 2000 as compared to $16.5 million for the year ended December 31, 1999, an increase of 15%. The increase in operating expenses is largely the result of an increase in the number of ATMs operated by the Company from 621 at December 31, 1999 to 787 at December 31, 2000, and increased transaction volumes. \n\nThe operating expenses for the Other ATM Operations Sub-segment were $2.4 million for the year ended December 31, 2000 as compared to $2.2 million for the year ended December 31, 1999, an increase of 9%. The operating expenses from this segment are the result of the acquisition of the Dash network located in the United States in August 1999 and the unallocated costs associated with the Company's processing facilities. \n\nD i rect operating costs in the Network Services Segment consist primarily of: ATM installation costs; ATM site rentals; and costs associated with maintaining ATMs, ATM telecommunications, interest on network cash and cash delivery and security services to ATMs. Such costs increased to $24.4 million for the year ended December 31, 2000 from $21.9 million for the year ended December 31, 1999. The increase in direct operating costs is primarily attributable to costs associated with operating the increased number of ATMs in the network during the periods. Also, i n t e rcompany allocations were made to charge the ATM operations with transaction switching and bank connection fees associated with the operations central processing center in Budapest. These allocations totalled $3.5 million and $2.9 million for the years ended December 31, 2000 and 1999, re s p e c t i v e l y. Direct operating costs for 2000 include a one-time gain of $1.2 million due to a change in Hungarian law that eliminates a major portion of the Company’s liability for import taxes on ATM hard w a re. Direct operating costs also include a $657,000 gain realized in 1999 f rom the sale of the Croatian network assets. The components of direct operating costs for the years ended December 31, 2000 and 1999 were: \n\nAs a percentage of network revenue, direct operating costs fell from 83% for the year ended December 31, 1999 to 66% for the year ended December 31, 2000. On a per ATM basis the direct operating costs fell from $12,782 per ATM for the year ended December 31, 1999 to $9,807 per ATM for the year ended December 31, 2000, an improvement of 23%. On a per transaction basis the direct operating costs fell from $0.66 per transaction for the year ended December 31, 1999 to $0.46 per transaction for the year ended December 31, 2000, an improvement of 30%. \n\nSegment salaries and benefits increased to $7.4 million for the year ended December 31, 2000 from $7.2 million for the year ended December 31, 1999, an increase of 3%. The increase in the year-on-year expenses reflect the continued expansion of the operations to We s t e rn Euro p e a n markets with significantly higher labor costs than Central Europe as well as some increases in staff levels at the processing center re q u i red to maintain quality service in line with the rising transaction volumes. As a percentage of Network Services Segment revenue, salaries and benefits fell from 27% for the year ended December 31, 1999 to 20% for the year ended December 31, 2000. \n\nSelling, general and administrative costs allocated to the Network Services Segment decreased to $2.4 million for the year ended December 31, 2000 from $2.9 million for the year ended December 31, 1999. The $500,000 cost decrease for the year ended December 31, 2000 results fro m the net effect of (1) a $600,000 increase in the allocation of costs from the selling, general and administrative line of the Budapest pro c e s s i n g center to the operating cost line, as discussed above, from $2.9 million for the year ended December 31, 1999 to $3.5 for the year ended December 31, 2000 and (2) a $100,000 increase in costs associated with the expansion of the Company’s network operations. \n\nD e p reciation and amortization increased to $8.0 million for the year ended December 31, 2000 from $7.4 million for the year ended December 31, 1999. The increases are due primarily to the increase in the number of owned ATMs as discussed pre v i o u s l y. The Company also re c o rded an $800,000 write-down of certain ATM hard w a re assets for the year ended December 31, 2000, as previously discussed. \n\n1 7\n\n## Network Services: EBITDA" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8842123658876728, + "doc_id": "93e4f0563106af75127fbc59278aa7acc6db6e2e1eeb85b2b74a92201e228958", + "edit_distance": 0.12857142857142856, + "f1_score": 0.9259259259259258, + "meteor": 0.9144308322824133, + "precision": 0.9656652360515021, + "pred_md": "## 18. Contributed Equity (continued)\n\n## (d) Santos Executive Share Option Plan\n\nThe Santos Executive Share Option Plan was approved by shareholders at the Annual General Meeting on 15 May 1997 and its continuation, with amendment, approved at the Annual General Meeting on 5 May 2000.\n\nThe Plan provides for the grant of options to subscribe for or purchase ordinary shares in the capital of the Company to eligible executives selected by the Board. Participation will be limited to those executives who, in the opinion of the Board, are able to significantly influence the generation of shareholder wealth. Directors envisage the Plan applying to up to 50 executives.\n\nEach option is a right to acquire one share, subject to adjustment in accordance with the Rules of the Plan. The options entitle the holder to participate in any bonus issue conducted by the Company, upon exercise of the options. The exercise price of each option will be adjusted in the event of a rights issue.\n\nThere are no voting or dividend rights attached to the options. There are no voting rights attached to the unissued ordinary shares. Voting rights will be attached to the unissued ordinary shares when the options have been exercised.\n\nThe exercise price of the options and other conditions, including any performance hurdles, will be determined by the Board. No consideration is provided by Executives for the options. The Plan provides for options with a life of up to ten years.\n\nThe ability to exercise the options is generally conditional on the Company achieving a prescribed performance hurdle or exercise condition. To reach the performance hurdle, the Company's Total Shareholder Return (broadly, growth in share price plus dividends reinvested) ('TSR Growth') over a minimum three-year period must equal or exceed 10% per annum calculated on a compound basis. If Total Shareholder Return does not reach the performance hurdle at the end of those respective periods, the options may nevertheless be exercisable if the hurdle is subsequently reached within the remaining life of the options. In assessing the performance against the hurdle, the Board may apply on a consistent basis an averaging method over a period of three months to allow for short-term volatility.\n\nThe fair value of shares issued as a result of exercising the options during the reporting period at their issue date is the market price of shares of the Company on the Australian Stock Exchange as at close of trading.\n\nDuring the financial year, the Company granted 330,148 options over unissued shares as set out below. The ability to exercise 200,000 of these options is generally conditional on the Company achieving the performance hurdle described above and the balance are subject to the forfeiture provision described in the Senior Executive Long Term Incentive section of the Santos Executive Share Purchase Plan described above.\n\nThe amounts recognised in the financial statements of the Santos Group and the Company in relation to executive share options exercised during the financial year were:\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\n65", + "recall": 0.8893280632411067, + "true_md": "The Santos Executive Share Option Plan was approved by shareholders at the Annual General Meeting on 15 May 1997 and its continuation, with amendment, approved at the Annual General Meeting on 5 May 2000.\n\nThe Plan provides for the grant of options to subscribe for or purchase or dinary shares in the capital of the Company to eligible executives selected by the Board. Participation will be limited to those executives wh o, in the opinion of the Board, are able to significantly influence the generation of shareholder wealth. Directors envisage the Plan applyin to up to 50 executives.\n\nEach option is a right to acquire one share, subject to adjustmen in accordance with the Rules of the Plan. The options entitle the holder to participate in any bonus issue conducted by the Company, upon exercise of the options. The exercise price of each option will be adjusted in the event of a rights issue.\n\nThere are no voting or dividend rights attached to the options. There ar e no voting rights attached to the unissued ordinary shares. Voting rights will be attached to the unissued ordinary shares when the option have been exercised.\n\nThe exercise price of the options and other conditions, including any perf ormance hurdles, will be determined by the Board. No consideration is provided by Executives for the options. The Plan provides for option with a life of up to ten years.\n\nThe ability to exercise the options is generally conditional on the Compan y achieving a prescribed performance hurdle or exercise condition. To reach the performance hurdle, the Company’s Total Shareholder Return (br oadly, growth in share price plus dividends reinvested) (“TSR Growth”) over a minimum three-year period must equal or exceed 10% per ann um calculated on a compound basis. If Total Shareholder Return does not reach the performance hurdle at the end of those respective periods, th e options may nevertheless be exercisable if the hurdle is subsequently reached within the remaining life of the options. In assessing the perform ance against the hurdle, the Board may apply on a consistent basis an averaging method over a period of three months to allow for short-term volatility.\n\nThe fair value of shares issued as a result of exercising the options durin g the reporting period at their issue date is the market price of shares of the Company on the Australian Stock Exchange as at close of trading.\n\nDuring the financial year, the Company granted 330,148 option over unissued shares as set out below. The ability to exercise 200,000 of these options is generally conditional on the Company achieving the performan ce hurdle described above and the balance are subject to the forfeiture provision described in the Senior Executive Long Term Incentive section o f the Santos Executive Share Purchase Plan described above.\n\nThe amounts recognised in the financial statements of the Santos Group and the Company in relation to executive share options exercised during the financial year were:\n\n## 18. Contributed Equity (continued)\n\n## (d) Santos Executive Share Option Plan\n\nAnnual Report 2004 65" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9055087857048922, + "doc_id": "db5dc71ca6053c8f4db39b2df78da60f0d09cc91125900e6b3f6fd43d012738d", + "edit_distance": 0.26564102564102565, + "f1_score": 0.9408866995073893, + "meteor": 0.9216009425790129, + "precision": 0.9695431472081218, + "pred_md": "HON INDUSTRIES Inc. and SUBSIDIARIES\n\n## OFFICE FURNITURE\n\n## Liquidity and Capital Resources\n\nOffice furniture comprised 74% of consolidated net sales for 2003 and 76% of consolidated net sales for 2002 and 2001. Net sales for office furniture increased 2% in 2003 and decreased 6% in 2002. The increase in 2003 is due to the increased week from the Company's 52/53-week fiscal year. The office furniture industry has experienced an unprecedented three-year decline in shipments. The Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association (BIFMA) reported 2003 shipments down over 5% and 2002 shipments down 19%. The Company's estimated share of the market based on reported office furniture shipments increased to 15.3% in 2003 compared to 14.4% in 2002 and 12.4% in 2001. This increase was achieved by providing strong brands, innovative products and services, and greater value to end-users.\n\nOperating profit as a percent of sales was 10.0% in 2003, 10.2% in 2002, and 8.2% in 2001. Included in 2003 were $15.2 million of net pretax charges related to the closure of two office furniture facilities, which impacted operating margins by 1.1 percentage points. Included in 2002 were $3.0 million of restructuring charges, which impacted operating margins by 0.2 percentage points, and 2001 included $22.5 million of restructuring charges, which impacted operating margins by 1.7 percentage points. The increase in operating margins is due to increased gross profit from the benefits of restructuring initiatives, rapid continuous improvement programs, and increased price realization, offset by additional investments in brand building and selling initiatives and increased freight expense.\n\n## HEARTH PRODUCTS\n\nHearth products sales increased 9% in 2003 and decreased 3% in 2002, respectively. The growth in 2003 was attributable to strong housing starts, growth in market share in both the new construction and retail channels, strengthening alliances with key distributors and dealers, as well as focused new product introductions. The decrease in 2002 was mainly due to pruning out less profitable product lines.\n\nOperating profit as a percent of sales in 2003 was 12.1% compared to 10.8% and 9.2% in 2002 and 2001, respectively. The improved profitability in 2003 was the result of leveraging fixed costs over a higher sales volume and increased sales through company-owned distribution offset by increased freight costs and higher labor costs from increased use of overtime and temporary labor to meet record levels of demand. The increase in 2002 was mainly due to discontinuance of goodwill and indefinite-lived intangible amortization of approximately $7 million due to the adoption of SFAS 142.\n\nDuring 2003, cash flow from operations was $141.3 million, which along with funds from stock option exercises under employee stock plans, provided the funds necessary to meet working capital needs, invest in capital improvements, repay long-term debt, repurchase common stock, and pay increased dividends.\n\nCash, cash equivalents, and short-term investments totaled $204.2 million at the end of 2003 compared to $155.5 million at the end of 2002 and $78.8 million at the end of 2001. The Company used approximately $80 million of cash to acquire Paoli Inc. on January 5, 2004. These remaining funds, coupled with cash from future operations and additional long-term debt, if needed, are expected to be adequate to finance operations, planned improvements, and internal growth. The Company is not aware of any known trends or demands, commitments, events, or uncertainties that are reasonably likely to result in its liquidity increasing or decreasing in any material way.\n\nThe Company places special emphasis on the management and reduction of its working capital with a particular focus on trade receivables and inventory levels. The success achieved in managing receivables is in large part a result of doing business with quality customers and maintaining close communication with them. Trade receivables at year-end 2003 were virtually unchanged from the prior year. Trade receivable days outstanding have averaged approximately 37 to 38 days over the past three years. The Company's inventory turns were 23, 23, and 18 for 2003, 2002, and 2001, respectively. Increased imports of raw materials and finished goods may negatively affect inventory turns in the future but the Company is constantly looking for ways to add efficiency to its supply chain. The decrease in accounts payable and accrued expenses is due to timing of vendor and marketing program payments and the payment of additional purchase consideration and debenture earn out related to a prior acquisition. The Company also funded the retiree medical portion of its postretirement benefit obligation in 2003.\n\n## I NVESTMENTS\n\nThe Company has investments in investment grade equity and debt securities. Management classifies investments in marketable securities at the time of purchase and reevaluates such classification at each balance sheet date. Equity securities are classified as available-for-sale and are stated at current market value with unrealized gains and losses included as a separate component of equity, net of any related tax effect. Debt securities are classified as held-to-maturity and are stated at amortized cost. A table of holdings as of year-end 2003 and 2002 is\n\n36", + "recall": 0.9138755980861244, + "true_md": "H O N I N D U S T R I E S I n c . a n d S U B S I D I A R I E S\n\n## Liquidity and Capital Resources\n\n## OFFICE FURNITURE\n\n## HEARTH PRODUCTS\n\n## INVESTMENTS\n\nOffice furniture comprised 74% of consolidated net sales for 2003 and 76% of consolidated net sales for 2002 and 2001. Net sales for office furniture increased 2% in 2003 and decreased 6% in 2002. The increase in 2003 is due to the increased week from the Company’s 52/53-week fiscal year. The office furniture industry has experienced an unprecedented three-year decline in shipments. The Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer’s Association (BIFMA) reported 2003 shipments down over 5% and 2002 shipments down 19%. The Company’s estimated share of the market based on reported office furniture shipments increased to 15.3% in 2003 compared to 14.4% in 2002 and 12.4% in 2001. This increase was achieved by provid- ing strong brands, innovative products and services, and greater value to end-users.\n\nOperating profit as a percent of sales was 10.0% in 2003, 10.2% in 2002, and 8.2% in 2001. Included in 2003 were $15.2 million of net pretax charges related to the closure of two office furniture facilities, which impacted operating margins by 1.1 percentage points. Included in 2002 were $3.0 million of restructuring charges, which impacted operating margins by 0.2 percentage points, and 2001 included $22.5 million of restructuring charges, which impacted oper- ating margins by 1.7 percentage points. The increase in operating margins is due to increased gross profit from the benefits of restructur- ing initiatives, rapid continuous improvement programs, and increased price realization, offset by additional investments in brand building and selling initiatives and increased freight expense.\n\nHearth products sales increased 9% in 2003 and decreased 3% in 2002, respectively. The growth in 2003 was attributable to strong housing starts, growth in market share in both the new construction and retail channels, strengthening alliances with key distributors and dealers, as well as focused new product introductions. The decrease in 2002 was mainly due to pruning out less profitable product lines.\n\nOperating profit as a percent of sales in 2003 was 12.1% com- pared to 10.8% and 9.2% in 2002 and 2001, respectively. The improved profitability in 2003 was the result of leveraging fixed costs over a higher sales volume and increased sales through company-owned dis- tribution offset by increased freight costs and higher labor costs from increased use of overtime and temporary labor to meet record levels of demand. The increase in 2002 was mainly due to discontinuance of goodwill and indefinite-lived intangible amortization of approximately $7 million due to the adoption of SFAS 142.\n\nThe Company has investments in investment grade equity and debt securities. Management classifies investments in marketable securities at the time of purchase and reevaluates such classification at each bal- ance sheet date. Equity securities are classified as available-for-sale and are stated at current market value with unrealized gains and losses included as a separate component of equity, net of any related tax effect. Debt securities are classified as held-to-maturity and are stated at amortized cost. A table of holdings as of year-end 2003 and 2002 is \n\nDuring 2003, cash flow from operations was $141.3 million, which along with funds from stock option exercises under employee stock plans, provided the funds necessary to meet working capital needs, invest in capital improvements, repay long-term debt, repurchase com- mon stock, and pay increased dividends.\n\nCash, cash equivalents, and short-term investments totaled $204.2 million at the end of 2003 compared to $155.5 million at the end of 2002 and $78.8 million at the end of 2001. The Company used approximately $80 million of cash to acquire Paoli Inc. on January 5, 2004. These remaining funds, coupled with cash from future opera- tions and additional long-term debt, if needed, are expected to be adequate to finance operations, planned improvements, and internal growth. The Company is not aware of any known trends or demands, commitments, events, or uncertainties that are reasonably likely to result in its liquidity increasing or decreasing in any material way.\n\nThe Company places special emphasis on the management and reduction of its working capital with a particular focus on trade receivables and inventory levels. The success achieved in managing receivables is in large part a result of doing business with quality cus- tomers and maintaining close communication with them. Trade receivables at year-end 2003 were virtually unchanged from the prior year. Trade receivable days outstanding have averaged approximately 37 to 38 days over the past three years. The Company’s inventory turns were 23, 23, and 18 for 2003, 2002, and 2001, respectively. Increased imports of raw materials and finished goods may negatively affect inventory turns in the future but the Company is constantly looking for ways to add efficiency to its supply chain. The decrease in accounts pay- able and accrued expenses is due to timing of vendor and marketing program payments and the payment of additional purchase consider- ation and debenture earn out related to a prior acquisition. The Company also funded the retiree medical portion of its postretirement benefit obligation in 2003.\n\n36" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8959241763873486, + "doc_id": "c57df1f20c768aee783303dc2c9a4603f5cbc57e698af3fd2dc33eff521d9508", + "edit_distance": 0.11904761904761904, + "f1_score": 0.9600000000000002, + "meteor": 0.9136576666487102, + "precision": 0.9924812030075187, + "pred_md": "These activities are designed to acknowledge and return the support we receive from these communities.\n\n## DELIVERING THE VISION\n\nSo, 50 years on, would the late John Bonython be pleased at the Company that Santos has become - one of Australia's leading energy suppliers that is an offshore production operator, building new businesses in places like Indonesia, the US and Egypt, while retaining firm roots in Adelaide? I suspect he would.\n\nIt is our job to continue to deliver on our strategy and, in doing so, keep delivering on the foresight of Santos' founders.\n\nOf course, this has to be achieved safely and with a view to the long term. In this regard, our people continue to deliver: safety performance improved again in 2004 and the publication of our first Sustainability Review demonstrates that we have adopted sustainability as a core value.\n\nI am proud of their commitment to Santos' success and I thank them for their efforts and achievements during a year of considerable challenges and change.\n\nJohn C Ellice-Flint\n\nManaging Director\n\n21 March 2005", + "recall": 0.9295774647887324, + "true_md": "These activities are designed to acknowledge and return the support we receive from these communities.\n\nSo, 50 years on, would the late John Bonython be pleased at the Company that Santos has become – one of Australia's leading energy suppliers that is an offshore production operator, building new businesses in places like Indonesia, the US and Egypt, while retaining firm roots in Adelaide? I suspect he would.\n\nIt is our job to continue to deliver on our strategy and, in doing so, keep delivering on the foresight of Santos' founders.\n\nOf course, this has to be achieved safely and with a view to the long term. In this regard, our people continue to deliver: safety performance improved again in 2004 and the publication of our first Sustainability Review demonstrates that we have adopted sustainability as a core value.\n\nI am proud of their commitment to Santos’ success and I thank them for their efforts and achievements during a year of considerable challenges and change. \n\nJohn C Ellice-Flint Managing Director 21 March 2005\n\n## DELIVERING THE VISION\n\nBayu-Undan drilling and production platforms, Timor Sea.\n\nAnnual Report 2004 7" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9490432356824305, + "doc_id": "e017f97a9e7143b2c47bacf9cd4d8e8f1074b5afd8582b55f5d4dbcb70f37fbc", + "edit_distance": 0.04259259259259259, + "f1_score": 0.9823321554770317, + "meteor": 0.9625311431912106, + "precision": 0.9823321554770318, + "pred_md": "## CHAIRMAN'S REPORT\n\nDirector of the Clough Group and a highly experienced and talented executive. Richard has appointed an alternate director, Mr Chris Sutherland, a senior Clough Executive, with engineering qualifications and associated business skills to assist him.\n\nCaptain Jim Carver, Mermaid's founder continues to play a significant role in Mermaid's operations, paying particular attention to our business at sea. Under 20 years of Jim's leadership, Mermaid developed an enviable reputation as a 'can do' company, and in our drive for new engineering expertise and professionalism, we have no intention of allowing that attitude to be lost.\n\nLast year we identified Broome as our next strategic position. No oil and gas work had been supported out of Broome for seventeen years and with the valuable cooperation and assistance of the Broome Port Authority, we secured Inpex, the large Japanese resource company as our first client. The base was then established early this year.\n\nA new focus has developed in the Browse Basin and it is pleasing to report that after only seven months operation, our Base is profitable, housing Inpex, BHP , Woodside and Sedco in support of their current drilling programs. All the holes drilled from the Broome Base have been designated as commercial finds by the explorers and the very major increase in the reserves at Brecknock, Woodside's permit 500 kilometres north of Broome creates optimism for future production based in the Broome area.\n\nDarwin was next on our list, enabling involvement in Timor Sea oil and gas activity. The Bayu Undan project operated by Phillips, is well advanced and will impact Darwin's offshore activity quite soon. Pursuing the formula for a strategic sea/land interface, we reached agreement with Perkins Shipping in Darwin, to set up an office at their Frances Drive facility. Perkins Shipping is synonymous with Darwin's history. Set up by V.B. Perkins in the late 40's, it has grown to significant size, operating its ships across the top of Australia and into South East Asia. There are many synergies which Mermaid shares with Perkins and we look forward to developing our Darwin business in close association with that fine old Company.\n\nOur ambitions for the support of the oil and gas industry now go beyond bases and vessels. Early in the current financial year, Mermaid acquired 50% of the OIS MOC Joint Venture Pty Ltd, to be paid for by the issue of 800,000 Mermaid shares. OIS MOC owns the highly successful labour hire business operated by Kevin Ponga and Rick De Franck. Kevin Ponga is now General Manager of Mermaid Labour & Management Pty Limited and Mr De Franck becomes a Director. With their reputation and talent added to Mermaid's experienced team, this labour hire company has become a significant force and can be expected to be in the final when major labour hire contracts are let.\n\n5", + "recall": 0.9823321554770318, + "true_md": "CHAIRMAN’ S REPORT\n\nDirector of the Clough Group and a highly experienced and talented executive. Richard has appointed an alternate director, Mr Chris Sutherland, a senior Clough Executive, with engineering qualifications and associated business skills to assist him.\n\nCaptain Jim Carver, Mermaid’s founder continues to play a significant role in Mermaid’s operations, paying particular attention to our business at sea. Under 20 years of Jim’s leadership, Mermaid developed an enviable reputation as a “can do” company, and in our drive for new engineering expertise and professionalism, we have no intention of allowing that attitude to be lost.\n\nLast year we identified Broome as our next strategic position. No oil and gas work had been supported out of Broome for seventeen years and with the valuable cooperation and assistance of the Broome Port Authority, we secured Inpex, the large Japanese resource company as our first client. The base was then established early this year. \n\nA new focus has developed in the Browse Basin and it is pleasing to report that after only seven months operation, our Base is profitable, housing Inpex, BHP, Woodside and Sedco in support of their current drilling programs. All the holes drilled from the Broome Base have been designated as commercial finds by the explorers and the very major increase in the reserves at Brecknock, Woodside’s permit 500 kilometres north of Broome creates optimism for future production based in the Broome area.\n\nDarwin was next on our list, enabling involvement in Timor Sea oil and gas activity. The Bayu Undan project operated by Phillips, is well advanced and will impact Darwin’s offshore activity quite soon. Pursuing the formula for a strategic sea/land interface, we reached agreement with Perkins Shipping in Darwin, to set up an office at their Frances Drive facility. Perkins Shipping is synonymous with Darwin’s history. Set up by V.B. Perkins in the late 40’s, it has grown to significant size, operating its ships across the top of Australia and into South East Asia. There are many synergies which Mermaid shares with Perkins and we look forward to developing our Darwin business in close association with that fine old Company.\n\nOur ambitions for the support of the oil and gas industry now go beyond bases and vessels. Early in the current financial year, Mermaid acquired 50% of the OIS MOC Joint Venture Pty Ltd, to be paid for by the issue of 800,000 Mermaid shares. OIS MOC owns the highly successful labour hire business operated by Kevin Ponga and Rick De Franck. Kevin Ponga is now General Manager of Mermaid Labour & Management Pty Limited and Mr De Franck becomes a Director. With their reputation and talent added to Mermaid’s experienced team, this labour hire company has become a significant force and can be expected to be in the final when major labour hire contracts are let.\n\n5" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9118976148947922, + "doc_id": "62fa8af8d203b23ebcb1120ed60b54b1c07faf01a4758ab1042288e83bced20b", + "edit_distance": 0.11071428571428571, + "f1_score": 0.976923076923077, + "meteor": 0.9543792692785503, + "precision": 0.9769230769230769, + "pred_md": "## ( 7 ) Investment Securities\n\nThe amortized cost for short - t e rm held-to-maturity and available-for-sale securities by class security type at December 31, 2000 and 1999, w e e as follows: r\n\nSecurities totaling $2,305,000 and $750,000 have been re c o rded in cash and cash equivalents and investment securities, re s p e c t i v e l y, on the balance sheet at December 31, 1999. In 2000 and 1999 the Company re c o rded a realized loss of $0 and $40,780, re s p e c t i v e l y , resulting fro m the sale of available-for-sale securities.\n\n## ( 8 ) Contracts in Progress\n\nAmounts included in the consolidated financial statements which relate to recoverable costs and accrued profits not yet billed on contracts are classified as current assets under costs and estimated earnings in excess of billings on software installation contracts. Amounts received fro m customers in excess of revenues recognized to date are classified as current liabilities under billings in excess of cost and estimated earnings of s o ftw a re installation contracts.\n\nThe software installation contracts in pro g ress consist of the following:\n\nComponents are included in the accompanying consolidated balance sheets under the following captions:\n\n## ( 9 ) I ntangibles\n\nIntangible assets are carried at amortized cost and consist of the following:\n\nRefer to Note 10 for details of the write down of intangibles in 2000.\n\n3 3", + "recall": 0.9769230769230769, + "true_md": "## ( 7 ) Investment Securities\n\n## ( 8 ) Contracts in Progress\n\nThe amortized cost for short - t e rm held-to-maturity and available-for-sale securities by class security type at December 31, 2000 and 1999, w e re as follows:\n\nSecurities totaling $2,305,000 and $750,000 have been re c o rded in cash and cash equivalents and investment securities, re s p e c t i v e l y, on the balance sheet at December 31, 1999. In 2000 and 1999 the Company re c o rded a realized loss of $0 and $40,780, re s p e c t i v e l y, resulting fro m the sale of available-for-sale securities.\n\nAmounts included in the consolidated financial statements which relate to recoverable costs and accrued profits not yet billed on contracts are classified as current assets under costs and estimated earnings in excess of billings on software installation contracts. Amounts received fro m customers in excess of revenues recognized to date are classified as current liabilities under billings in excess of cost and estimated earnings of s o f t w a re installation contracts. \n\nThe software installation contracts in pro g ress consist of the following:\n\nComponents are included in the accompanying consolidated balance sheets under the following captions:\n\n## ( 9 ) I n t a n g i b l e s\n\nIntangible assets are carried at amortized cost and consist of the following:\n\nRefer to Note 10 for details of the write down of intangibles in 2000. \n\n3 3" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9159730786931529, + "doc_id": "98044ed274f4a8d089bddd48f59742a8c25deff9cf6340e337e2a3094a329366", + "edit_distance": 0.09933774834437085, + "f1_score": 0.9746192893401017, + "meteor": 0.9681164084910503, + "precision": 0.9795918367346939, + "pred_md": "## satisfying the family at every occasion\n\nFor more than 40 years, customers have trusted our Hormel Cure 81 ham to deliver outstanding quality and a perfect occasion - every time. High production standards throughout the manufacturing process guarantee the quality of every ham. Whether it's a special family get together, a quick lunch, or a small dinner for two, there is a Hormel Cure 81 ham that's just right for the occasion.\n\n## keeping brands strong\n\nOur goal is to grow strong brands that consistently earn first or second market shares within their respective product categories. Today, 33 Hormel Foods brands, including the SPAM family of products, have achieved this status. We supported our core brands with a marketing investment of $101 million in fiscal 2004.\n\n2004 Annual Report\n\n7", + "recall": 0.9696969696969697, + "true_md": "## satisfying the family at every occasion\n\n## keeping brands strong\n\nFor more than 40 years, customers have trusted our Hormel Cure 81 ham to deliver outstanding quality and a perfect occasion – every time. High production standards throughout the manufacturing process guarantee the quality of every ham. Whether it’s a special family get together, a quick lunch, or a small dinner for two, there is a Hormel Cure 81 ham that’s just right for the occasion.\n\nOur goal is to grow strong brands that consistently earn first or second market shares within their respective product categories. Today, 33 Hormel Foods brands, including the SPAM family of products, have achieved this status. We supported our core brands with a marketing investment of $101 million in fiscal 2004.\n\n2004 Annual Report 7" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9550832734472828, + "doc_id": "0ce39110e5157491cc7969dece419c8e82e80dcba88eb808b7ea1bb3f50d5910", + "edit_distance": 0.1875, + "f1_score": 0.9977628635346755, + "meteor": 0.9953879128490833, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO AND FORMING PART OF THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR THE FINANCIAL YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2000\n\n## 1. SUMMARY OF ACCOUNTING POLICIES\n\n## Financial Reporting Framework\n\nThe financial report is a general purpose financial report which has been prepared in accordance with the Corporations Law, application Account Standards and Urgent Issues Group Consensus Views, and complies with other requirements of the law.\n\nThe financial report has been prepared on the basis of historical cost and except where stated, does not take into account changing money values or current valuations of non-current assets. Cost is based on the fair values of the consideration given in exchange for assets.\n\n## Significant Accounting Policies\n\nAccounting policies are selected and applied in a manner which ensures that the resulting financial information satisfies the concepts of relevance and reliability, thereby ensuring that the substance of the underlying transaction or other events is reported.\n\nThe following significant accounting policies have been adopted in the preparation and presentation of the financial report:\n\n## (a) Accounts Payable\n\nTrade payables and other accounts payable are recognised when the economic entity becomes obliged to make future payments resulting from the purchase of goods and services.\n\n## (b) Acquisition of Assets\n\nAssets acquired are recorded at the cost of acquisition, being the purchase consideration determined as at the date of acquisition plus costs incidental to the acquisition.\n\nIn the event that settlement of all or part of the cash consideration given in the acquisition of an asset is deferred, the fair value of the purchase consideration is determined by discounting the amounts payable in the future to their present value as at the date of acquisition.\n\n## (c) Borrowings\n\nBills of exchange are recorded at an amount equal to the net proceeds received, with the premium or discount amortised over the period until maturity. Interest expense is recognised on an effective yield basis.\n\nDebentures, bank loans and other loans are recorded at an amount equal to the net proceeds received. Interest expense is recognised on an accrual basis.\n\nAncillary costs incurred in connection with the arrangement of borrowings are deferred and amortised over the period of the borrowings.\n\n## (d) Capital Gains Tax\n\nNo provision has been made for capital gains tax which may arise in the event of sale of revalued assets as no decision has been made to sell any of these assets.\n\n## (e) Capitalisation of Borrowing Costs\n\nBorrowing costs directly attributable to building under construction are capitalised as part of the cost of those assets.", + "recall": 0.9955357142857143, + "true_md": "## NOTES TO AND FORMING PART OF THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR THE FINANCIAL YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2000\n\n## 1. SUMMARY OF ACCOUNTING POLICIES\n\n## Financial Reporting Framework\n\n## (a) Accounts Payable\n\n## (b) Acquisition of Assets\n\n## (c) Borrowings\n\n## (d) Capital Gains Tax\n\n## (e) Capitalisation of Borrowing Costs\n\n## Significant Accounting Policies\n\nThe financial report is a general purpose financial report which has been prepared in accordance with the Corporations Law, application Account Standards and Urgent Issues Group Consensus Views, and complies with other requirements of the law.\n\nThe financial report has been prepared on the basis of historical cost and except where stated, does not take into account changing money values or current valuations of non-current assets. Cost is based on the fair values of the consideration given in exchange for assets.\n\nAccounting policies are selected and applied in a manner which ensures that the resulting financial information satisfies the concepts of relevance and reliability, thereby ensuring that the substance of the underlying transaction or other events is reported.\n\nThe following significant accounting policies have been adopted in the preparation and presentation of the financial report:\n\nTrade payables and other accounts payable are recognised when the economic entity becomes obliged to make future payments resulting from the purchase of goods and services.\n\nAssets acquired are recorded at the cost of acquisition, being the purchase consideration determined as at the date of acquisition plus costs incidental to the acquisition.\n\nIn the event that settlement of all or part of the cash consideration given in the acquisition of an asset is deferred, the fair value of the purchase consideration is determined by discounting the amounts payable in the future to their present value as at the date of acquisition.\n\nBills of exchange are recorded at an amount equal to the net proceeds received, with the premium or discount amortised over the period until maturity. Interest expense is recognised on an effective yield basis.\n\nDebentures, bank loans and other loans are recorded at an amount equal to the net proceeds received. Interest expense is recognised on an accrual basis.\n\nAncillary costs incurred in connection with the arrangement of borrowings are deferred and amortised over the period of the borrowings.\n\nNo provision has been made for capital gains tax which may arise in the event of sale of revalued assets as no decision has been made to sell any of these assets.\n\nBorrowing costs directly attributable to building under construction are capitalised as part of the cost of those assets.\n\n38" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5757723729596878, + "doc_id": "9ed5f15e722607f27bb2d05f4fb5d999e0cf8583a20ee5d2b3bc3621bc5fb453", + "edit_distance": 0.4536741214057508, + "f1_score": 0.9658119658119657, + "meteor": 0.6269205559236727, + "precision": 0.9338842975206612, + "pred_md": "## FINANCIAL HIGHLIGHTS\n\nNissan Motor Co., Ltd. And Consolidated Subsidiaries Fiscal years 2004, 2003, 2002, 2001 and 2000\n\n- Notes: 1. Unless indicated otherwise, all dollar figures herein refer to U.S. currency. Yen amounts have been translated into U.S. dollars, for convenience only, at ¥107 = $1, the approximate exchange rate on March 31, 2005.\n- 2. Net income per share amounts are based on the weighted average number of shares of common stock outstanding during each year. Figures for net income per share are in exact yen and U.S. dollars.\n\nNumber of shares outstanding as of March 31, 2005: 4,520,715,112.\n\n- 3. Cash dividends during the full year by subsidiary companies to non-Nissan minority shareholders are not included.\n- 4. Net consolidated automotive debt was ¥8,602 million cash positive in fiscal year 2002, ¥215,861 million cash positive in fiscal year 2003, and ¥453,470 million cash positive in fiscal year 2004, using the same accounting principles as fiscal year 2001.\n\n## Net Sales\n\n(Billion Yen)\n\n## Operating Income\n\n(Billion Yen)\n\n290\n\n331\n\n## Net Income\n\n(Billion Yen)\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\n1\n\nHIGHLIGHTS", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "HIGHLIGHTS\n\nNissan Motor Co., Ltd. And Consolidated Subsidiaries Fiscal years 2004, 2003, 2002, 2001 and 2000\n\n- Notes: 1. Unless indicated otherwise, all dollar figures herein refer to U.S. currency. Yen amounts have been translated into U.S. dollars, for convenience only, at ¥107 = $1, the approximate exchange rate on March 31, 2005. 2. Net income per share amounts are based on the weighted average number of shares of common stock outstanding during each year.\n\n- only, at ¥107 = $1, the approximate exchange rate on March 31, 2005. 2. Net income per share amounts are based on the weighted average number of shares of common stock outstanding during each year. Figures for net income per share are in exact yen and U.S. dollars. Number of shares outstanding as of March 31, 2005: 4,520,715,112. 3. Cash dividends during the full year by subsidiary companies to non-Nissan minority shareholders are not included.\n\n- Number of shares outstanding as of March 31, 2005: 4,520,715,112. 3. Cash dividends during the full year by subsidiary companies to non-Nissan minority shareholders are not included. 4. Net consolidated automotive debt was ¥8,602 million cash positive in fiscal year 2002, ¥215,861 million cash positive in fiscal year 2003, and\n\n- 3. Cash dividends during the full year by subsidiary companies to non-Nissan minority shareholders are not included. 4. Net consolidated automotive debt was ¥8,602 million cash positive in fiscal year 2002, ¥215,861 million cash positive in fiscal year 2003, and ¥453,470 million cash positive in fiscal year 2004, using the same accounting principles as fiscal year 2001.\n\n## FINANCIAL HIGHLIGHTS\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9199069828907966, + "doc_id": "3f93f9b7e92815462fa64a54a9e70f0ae09d96c7093b7ab72ee52e6aa53866e2", + "edit_distance": 0.11594202898550725, + "f1_score": 0.98989898989899, + "meteor": 0.9732819113388284, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "OUR WORK\n\n32\n\nNISSAN IS A WORLD-CLASS AUTOMOBILE MANUFACTURER. TO ENVISION, PLAN, BUILD AND DISTRIBUTE MILLIONS OF AUTOMOBILES TO THE WORLD REQUIRES A CLEAR DEFINITION OF ROLES AND PROCESSES. AT NISSAN, OUR BUSINESS DIVISIONS COMMUNICATE IDEAS ACROSS COUNTRIES, CULTURES AND FUNCTIONS TO DEVISE THE TRANSPARENT, EFFICIENT SOLUTIONS THAT CREATE SUCCESS. THIS IS THE NISSAN SHIFT\\_\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004", + "recall": 0.98, + "true_md": "NISSAN IS A WORLD-CLASS AUTOMOBILE MANUFACTURER. TO ENVISION, PLAN, BUILD AND DISTRIBUTE MILLIONS OF AUTOMOBILES TO THE WORLD REQUIRES A CLEAR DEFINITION OF ROLES AND PROCESSES. AT NISSAN, OUR BUSINESS DIVISIONS COMMUNICATE IDEAS ACROSS COUNTRIES, CULTURES AND FUNCTIONS TO DEVISE THE TRANSPARENT, EFFICIENT SOLUTIONS THAT CREATE SUCCESS. THIS IS THE NISSAN SHIFT\\_\n\n## OUR WORK\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 32" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8120375072154447, + "doc_id": "1823950aab6b7bbd76d8ce9b0b9cd4c7df07247770b9e9a61e86c999db733042", + "edit_distance": 0.3401639344262295, + "f1_score": 0.9220489977728286, + "meteor": 0.9346218398553643, + "precision": 0.8961038961038961, + "pred_md": "## DI R E C TO R S ' R E P O R T\n\nrequirements of the Corporations Law and the ASX Listing Rules, the Company and Mr Bradley agreed to defer the first issue of Shares, making both issues conditional on shareholder approval.\n\nThe second agreement was with Clough Engineering Limited, pursuant to which it agreed to take a placement of 3,225,000 Shares by 29 September 2000, followed by, if approved of by shareholders at the Company's annual general meeting, 6,775,000 shares, within 7 days of that meeting.\n\nOn 15 June 2000 the Company announced that with effect from 1 July 2000 it acquired a 50% interest in OIS MOC Joint Venture Pty Ltd, to be paid for by the issue of 800,000 Shares in the Company. OIS MOC Joint Venture Pty Ltd owns the goodwill of a successful labour hire company. That company is to be renamed Mermaid Labour and Management Limited (MLML).\n\nMLML offers a full labour hire service inclusive of industrial relations consultancy, negotiating agreements and awards and were appropriate, provides ongoing management of the labour force.\n\nThe effective date is 1 July 2000. The Company will issue 800,000 ordinary fully paid shares in Mermaid Marine Australia Limited.\n\nThere have not been any other matters or circumstances, other than those referred to in the Chairman's and Operations Reviews and/or in the financial statements and notes attached thereto, that have arisen since the end of the Financial Year that have significantly affected, or may significantly affect Mermaid's operations, the results of those operations or its state of affairs in future financial years.\n\n## F U T U R E D E V E L O P M E N T S\n\nThe Chairman's and Operations Reviews give indications, in general terms, of likely developments in Mermaid's operations in future financial years and the expected results of those operations.\n\n## E N V I R O N M E N TA L R E G U L AT I O N\n\nThe development of the Company's Dampier and Broome\n\nbases is subject to the approval of the Western Australian Environmental Protection Authority.\n\nAs at the date of this report the Company had a total of 7,115,000 unissued shares under option as follows: 30 November 2000 Options S H A R E O P T I O N S\n\nAs at the date of this report there are outstanding 6,500,000 options to acquire 6,500,000 ordinary shares in the Company at an issue price of 0.75 cents per ordinary share. Each of these options expires on 30 November 2000.\n\nOn 9 August 2000 the Company announced to the ASX that, subject to shareholder approval", + "recall": 0.9495412844036697, + "true_md": "## DIRECTORS’ REPORT\n\nrequirements of the Corporations Law and the ASX Listing Rules, the Company and Mr Bradley agreed to defer the first issue of Shares, making both issues conditional on shareholder approval.\n\nThe second agreement was with Clough Engineering Limited, pursuant to which it agreed to take a placement of 3,225,000 Shares by 29 September 2000, followed by, if approved of by shareholders at the Company’s annual general meeting, 6,775,000 shares, within 7 days of that meeting.\n\nOn 15 June 2000 the Company announced that with effect from 1 July 2000 it acquired a 50% interest in OIS MOC Joint Venture Pty Ltd, to be paid for by the issue of 800,000 Shares in the Company. OIS MOC Joint Venture Pty Ltd owns the goodwill of a successful labour hire company. That company is to be renamed Mermaid Labour and Management Limited (MLML).\n\nMLML offers a full labour hire service inclusive of industrial relations consultancy, negotiating agreements and awards and were appropriate, provides ongoing management of the labour force.\n\nThe effective date is 1 July 2000. The Company will issue 800,000 ordinary fully paid shares in Mermaid Marine Australia Limited.\n\nThere have not been any other matters or circumstances, other than those referred to in the Chairman’s and Operations Reviews and/or in the financial statements and notes attached thereto, that have arisen since the end of the Financial Year that have significantly affected, or may significantly affect Mermaid’s operations, the results of those operations or its state of affairs in future financial years.\n\n- The Chairman’s and Operations Reviews give indications, in general terms, of likely developments in Mermaid’s operations in future financial years and the expected results of those operations. FUTURE DEVELOPMENTS\n\nAs at the date of this report there are outstanding 6,500,000 options to acquire 6,500,000 ordinary shares in the Company at an issue price of 0.75 cents per ordinary share. Each of these options expires on 30 November 2000.\n\nOn 9 August 2000 the Company announced to the ASX that, subject to shareholder approval\n\n30\n\n- As at the date of this report the Company had a total of 7,115,000 unissued shares under option as follows: 30 November 2000 Options SHARE OPTIONS\n\n- The development of the Company’s Dampier and Broome bases is subject to the approval of the Western Australian Environmental Protection Authority. ENVIRONMENTAL REGULATION" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.24008132324365322, + "doc_id": "76c83f0238bac83a15e648779effe43c9698342c6e9026b9b1d3650719aebac5", + "edit_distance": 0.7333333333333333, + "f1_score": 0.5581395348837209, + "meteor": 0.605885241301908, + "precision": 0.46153846153846156, + "pred_md": "C O N S O L I D A T E D S T A T E M E N T S O F C A S H F L O W S\n\nThe accompanying notes are an integral part of these statements.\n\n10", + "recall": 0.7058823529411765, + "true_md": "CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS\n\nThe accompanying notes are an integral part of these statements.\n\n10" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8646035120464407, + "doc_id": "813110c5dcd7cac7d283c5db609ced539b55acbad6276414c9cfc5447691d3ff", + "edit_distance": 0.17450980392156862, + "f1_score": 0.9354005167958657, + "meteor": 0.8886709877134469, + "precision": 0.9679144385026738, + "pred_md": "HON INDUSTRIES Inc. and SUBSIDIARIES\n\n## REPORT OF INDEPENDENT AUDITORS\n\n## Predecessor Auditor (Arthur Andersen LLP) Opinion\n\nThe following report is a copy of a report previously issued by Arthur Andersen LLP and has not been reissued by Arthur Andersen LLP. In 2002, the corporation adopted the provisions of Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 142, Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets (SFAS No. 142). As discussed in the Goodwill and Intangible Assets note, the Company has presented the transitional disclosures for 2001 required by SFAS No. 142. The Arthur Andersen LLP report does not extend to these changes to the 2001 consolidated financial statements. The adjustments to the 2001 consolidated financial statements were reported on by PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP as stated in their report appearing herein.\n\n## To the Board of Directors and Shareholders of HON INDUSTRIES Inc.\n\nWe have audited the accompanying consolidated balance sheets of HON INDUSTRIES Inc. and Subsidiaries as of December 29, 2001, December 30, 2000*, and January 1, 2000*, and the related consolidated statements of income, shareholders equity, and cash flows for each of the fiscal years then ended. These financial statements are the responsibility of the Company's management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these financial statements based on our audits.\n\nWe conducted our audits in accordance with auditing standards generally accepted in the United States. Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement. An audit includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements. An audit also includes assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.\n\nIn our opinion, the consolidated financial statements referred to above present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of HON INDUSTRIES Inc. and Subsidiaries as of December 29, 2001, December 30, 2000*, and January 1, 2000*, and the results of its operations and its cash flows for each of the three fiscal years then ended in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States.\n\nArthur Andersen LLP\n\nChicago, Illinois\n\nFebruary 1, 2002\n\n*The December 30, 2000, and January 1, 2000, consolidated financial statements are not required to be presented in the 2003 annual report.\n\n59", + "recall": 0.905, + "true_md": "H O N I N D U S T R I E S I n c . a n d S U B S I D I A R I E S\n\n## R E P O R T O F I N D E P E N D E N T A U D I T O R S\n\n## Predecessor Auditor (Arthur Andersen LLP) Opinion\n\n## To the Board of Directors and Shareholders of HON INDUSTRIES Inc.\n\n59\n\nThe following report is a copy of a report previously issued by Arthur Andersen LLP and has not been reissued by Arthur Andersen LLP. In 2002, the corporation adopted the provisions of Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 142, Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets (SFAS No. 142). As discussed in the Goodwill and Intangible Assets note, the Company has presented the transitional disclosures for 2001 required by SFAS No. 142. The Arthur Andersen LLP report does not extend to these changes to the 2001 consolidated financial statements. The adjustments to the 2001 consolidated financial statements were reported on by PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP as stated in their report appearing herein. \n\nWe have audited the accompanying consolidated balance sheets of HON INDUSTRIES Inc. and Subsidiaries as of December 29, 2001, December 30, 2000*, and January 1, 2000*, and the related consolidated statements of income, shareholders equity, and cash flows for each of the fiscal years then ended. These financial statements are the responsibility of the Company’s management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these financial statements based on our audits. \n\nWe conducted our audits in accordance with auditing standards generally accepted in the United States. Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement. An audit includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements. An audit also includes assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion. \n\nIn our opinion, the consolidated financial statements referred to above present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of HON INDUSTRIES Inc. and Subsidiaries as of December 29, 2001, December 30, 2000*, and January 1, 2000*, and the results of its operations and its cash flows for each of the three fiscal years then ended in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States. \n\nArthur Andersen LLP Chicago, Illinois February 1, 2002 \n\n*The December 30, 2000, and January 1, 2000, consolidated financial statements are not required to be presented in the 2003 annual report." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "aa5ec9c9857364207d78e44975988cc3d1cf74e67981912c09c796bfd1bd5fc6", + "edit_distance": 0.9875, + "f1_score": 0.04878048780487805, + "meteor": 0.006934812760055479, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "23", + "recall": 0.025, + "true_md": "## MERMAID FLEET\n\n## MERMAID TITAN\n\n14.3m Steel Twin Screw Tug, Work Boat\n\n26m Utility Vessel \n\n40m Survey, Utility, Standby\n\n36.58m Utility Barge\n\n29.05m Landing Barge, Supply Vessel\n\n19.8m Oil Pollution, Crew Boat\n\n20.04m Tug, Utility Vessel\n\n19.8m Utility Barge\n\n## MERMAID COMMANDO\n\n## MERMAID BOSS\n\n## MERMAID AVENGER\n\n## MERMAID SUPPLIER\n\n## PELICAN BARGE\n\n## MERMAID ACHIEVER\n\n## MERMAID REUNION\n\n23 EA PSS Gey" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8797847667677559, + "doc_id": "adf79d91e03e8f88ddf8357e9bd63f04af65e5304a39c6b778f9dd8a88e62e92", + "edit_distance": 0.09688581314878893, + "f1_score": 0.9527410207939511, + "meteor": 0.9607088725807291, + "precision": 0.9402985074626866, + "pred_md": "16\n\n## ACQUIRING NEW ACREAGE\n\nFuture exploration success depends on quality exploration acreage. Santos acquired five exploration blocks in three hydrocarbon provinces during 2004. The most significant of these were in Egypt and Indonesia.\n\nEgypt and surrounding countries are a focus area for Santos. The Company has farmed in to three exploration blocks in Egypt with US petroleum group, Devon Energy, committing approximately $70 million to an eight-well exploration joint venture over the next three years in the Gulf of Suez. This is Santos' first move into the North Africa-Middle East region, which is considered the world's premier hydrocarbon province.\n\nSantos continues to seek other exploration opportunities in this area, concentrating on the Gulf of Suez and the onshore Desert Basins.\n\nSantos has acquired six exploration permits in Indonesia over the past three years, including an interest in the Donggala PSC in the Kutei Basin during late 2004. This block lies between Santos' other Kutei acreage: the Papalang and Popodi PSCs.\n\nThe addition of the Donggala PSC gives Santos a particularly strong presence in the Kutei Basin and covers a highly prospective trend, while adding to the Company's growing Indonesian operations.\n\nOther exploration acreage portfolio management and activities during 2004 included:\n\n- · the award of exploration permit T/36P in the Sorell Basin, offshore Tasmania\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\n- · the addition of three new venture areas in the shallow waters of the Gulf of Mexico and onshore Montana and Texas, which significantly expands and diversifies the US exploration acreage and prospect inventory\n- · the farm-out of a 16.67% interest in the WA-264-P permit offshore Western Australia to Beach Petroleum\n- · the farm-out of a 60% interest and operatorship of the NT/P61 permit in the Bonaparte Basin, offshore northern Australia to ConocoPhillips\n- · the farm-out of a 70% interest in the deep water exploration block, Nth Bali 1 PSC, offshore East Java Basin to Total and Mitsui\n- · the farm-out of a 25% interest in the VIC P/51 block containing the Callister prospect to Mitsui & Co subsidiary Mitwell Energy Resources.\n\nThese farm-outs continued the trend of risk-sharing with quality partners.\n\n## ADDING MATERIAL PROSPECTS\n\nSantos is now in a position that exploration success in 2004 and good acreage management has created future options that will ultimately translate into greater value for the business in 2005 and beyond.\n\nThis has been achieved by focusing on 'basin excellence' . This means becoming a technical leader in basins, within our focus areas, entering early where possible to keep entry costs down, balancing the commercial and the technical risks and selecting the right co-venturers.\n\n## 2004 EXPLORATION EXPENDITURE BY CATEGORY\n\n$7.3 million\n\nAn example of this is the strong position Santos has created in the Kutei Basin, with interests in three neighbouring production sharing contracts: Popodi, Donggala and Papalang.\n\n2004 also marked the year that Santos drilled its first operated deep water wells - a significant achievement for a company that had its beginnings in a desert environment.\n\n## 2004 EXPLORATION EXPENDITURE BY REGION\n\nOffshore Australia\n\n$32.6 million\n\nOnshore Australia\n\n$23.4 million\n\nSouth East Asia\n\n$41.4 million\n\nUnited States\n\n$28.2 million", + "recall": 0.9655172413793104, + "true_md": "## ACQUIRING NEW ACREAGE\n\nFuture exploration success depends on quality exploration acreage. Santos acquired five exploration blocks in three hydrocarbon provinces during 2004. The most significant of these were in Egypt and Indonesia.\n\nEgypt and surrounding countries are a focus area for Santos. The Company has farmed in to three exploration blocks in Egypt with US petroleum group, Devon Energy, committing approximately $70 million to an eight-well exploration joint venture over the next three years in the Gulf of Suez. This is Santos’ first move into the North Africa–Middle East region, which is considered the world’s premier hydrocarbon province.\n\nSantos continues to seek other exploration opportunities in this area, concentrating on the Gulf of Suez and the onshore Desert Basins.\n\nSantos has acquired six exploration permits in Indonesia over the past three years, including an interest in the Donggala PSC in the Kutei Basin during late 2004. This block lies between Santos’ other Kutei acreage: the Papalang and Popodi PSCs.\n\nThe addition of the Donggala PSC gives Santos a particularly strong presence in the Kutei Basin and covers a highly prospective trend, while adding to the Company’s growing Indonesian operations.\n\nOther exploration acreage portfolio management and activities during 2004 included:\n\n- • the award of exploration permit T/36P in the Sorell Basin, offshore Tasmania\n\nAnnual Report 2004 16\n\n- • the addition of three new venture areas in the shallow waters of the Gulf of Mexico and onshore Montana and Texas, which significantly expands and diversifies the US exploration acreage and prospect inventory\n\n- • the farm-out of a 16.67% interest in the WA-264-P permit offshore Western Australia to Beach Petroleum\n\n- • the farm-out of a 60% interest and operatorship of the NT/P61 permit in the Bonaparte Basin, offshore northern Australia to ConocoPhillips\n\n- • the farm-out of a 70% interest in the deep water exploration block, Nth Bali 1 PSC, offshore East Java Basin to Total and Mitsui\n\n- • the farm-out of a 25% interest in the VIC P/51 block containing the Callister prospect to Mitsui & Co subsidiary Mitwell Energy Resources. \n\nThese farm-outs continued the trend of risk-sharing with quality partners.\n\nSantos is now in a position that exploration success in 2004 and good acreage management has created future options that will ultimately translate into greater value for the business in 2005 and beyond.\n\nThis has been achieved by focusing on ‘basin excellence’. This means becoming a technical leader in basins, within our focus areas, entering early where possible to keep entry costs down, balancing the commercial and the technical risks and selecting the right co-venturers.\n\n## ADDING MATERIAL PROSPECTS\n\nAn example of this is the strong position Santos has created in the Kutei Basin, with interests in three neighbouring production sharing contracts: Popodi, Donggala and Papalang.\n\n2004 also marked the year that Santos drilled its first operated deep water wells – a significant achievement for a company that had its beginnings in a desert environment.\n\n2004 EXPLORATION EXPENDITURE BY CATEGORY\n\n2004 EXPLORATION EXPENDITURE BY REGION\n\nKUTEI BASIN" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6260981206375827, + "doc_id": "80f55bc46bf7a0bdaf6058849c8d9e75edec485f0986d0c2fd4f3ec7283d0ef2", + "edit_distance": 0.375, + "f1_score": 0.9037037037037037, + "meteor": 0.8597985223054334, + "precision": 0.9242424242424242, + "pred_md": "MANAGEMENT TEAM\n\n(Front, left to right): Earle A. MacKenzie, Executive VP , Len L. Greisz, Director of Internal Control, Christopher E. French, President, Daniel R. Detamore-Hunsberger, Controller, Marcy J. Engle, Human Resources Manager.\n\n(Front, left to right): Earle A. MacKenzie, Executive VP , Len L. Greisz, Director of Internal Control, Christopher E. French, President, Daniel R. Detamore-Hunsberger, Controller, Marcy J. Engle, Human Resources Manager.\n\n(Back, left to right): David K. MacDonald, VP - Operations, David E. Ferguson, VP - Customer Services, Lori W. Warren, Director of Regulatory Affairs, Chris S. Kyle, Director of Planning, William L. Pirtle, VP - Sales, Laurence F . Paxton, VP - Information Technology\n\nN t I", + "recall": 0.8840579710144928, + "true_md": "## MANAGEMENT TEAM\n\n(Front, left to right): Earle A. MacKenzie, Executive VP, Len L. Greisz, Director of Internal Control, Christopher E. French, President, Daniel R. Detamore-Hunsberger, Controller, Marcy J. Engle, Human Resources Manager. (Back, left to right): David K. MacDonald, VP – Operations, David E. Ferguson, VP – Customer Services, Lori W. Warren, Director of Regulatory Affairs, Chris S. Kyle, Director of Planning, William L. Pirtle, VP – Sales, Laurence F. Paxton, VP – Information Technology\n\nSHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY ■ 6" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9164900624735967, + "doc_id": "af54f4fd98f78e1a93c2c8c7d65b6d809a35d8a504f5b0b74a6a62f654f1817c", + "edit_distance": 0.23923444976076555, + "f1_score": 0.9293478260869565, + "meteor": 0.9629680108469069, + "precision": 0.9193548387096774, + "pred_md": "28\n\n## DI R E C TO R S ' R E P O R T\n\n## J E F F R E Y ARTHUR SYDNEY MEWS\n\n## Non Executive Director - Appointed 12 August 1998\n\nJeff Mews is a Fellow of the Institute of Chartered Accountants in Australia, Associate of the Australian Society of Certified Practicing Accountants, Fellow of the Australian Institute of Company Directors and a Fellow of the Taxation Institute of Australia.\n\nIn 1998 Jeff retired from the partnership of PricewaterhouseCoopers after over 22 years as a partner in the taxation consulting division. Jeff\n\nhas had extensive experience in the oil, gas and mining industries and has been directly involved, at a senior level, with most major resource projects in Western Australia since the 1970s. He is a past Chairman of the Western Australian Division of the Taxation Institute of Australia.\n\nJeff currently serves as a Member of the Salaries and Allowances Tribunal for the State of Western Australia and is a Founding Governor of the Malcolm Sargent Cancer Fund for Children in Western Australia.\n\n## RICHARD MALCOLM REID\n\n## Non Executive Director - Appointed 22 September 2000\n\nRichard Reid is a Fellow of the Institute of Chartered Accountants. After extensive experience in senior auditing positions in London, Belgium and Perth he joined the Clough Group in 1980. Since 1983 he has been the Finance Director of the main operating company. He is a Director of Clough Limited, the listed parent company, and a Director of a number of the Group's subsidiaries, joint ventures and associates.\n\nRichard has been intimately involved in all the Clough Group's major projects and acquisitions over the past twenty years and the successful listing of both parent company Clough Limited on the Australian Stock Exchange in 1998 and its subsidiary PT Petrosea Tbk on the Jakarta Stock Exchange in 1990. He has significant Australian and overseas experience in Engineering and Construction; Property and other Investments in both Finance and Management\n\n## CHRISTOPHER GLEN SUTHERLAND\n\n## Alternate Non Executive Director -Appointed 29 September 2000\n\nChristopher Sutherland is a Fellow of the Institute of Engineers and has extensive experience in offshore and subsea engineering and construction businesses. Previously Managing Director of a major subsea remote system company. Chris is currently the General Manager - Group Strategy for Clough Engineering Ltd.", + "recall": 0.9395604395604396, + "true_md": "## JEFFREY ARTHUR SYDNEY MEWS\n\n## Non Executive Director - Appointed 12 August 1998\n\nJeff Mews is a Fellow of the Institute of Chartered Accountants in Australia, Associate of the Australian Society of Certified Practicing Accountants, Fellow of the Australian Institute of Company Directors and a Fellow of the Taxation Institute of Australia. In 1998 Jeff retired from the partnership of PricewaterhouseCoopers after over 22 years as a partner in the taxation consulting division. Jeff\n\nhas had extensive experience in the oil, gas and mining industries and has been directly involved, at a senior level, with most major resource projects in Western Australia since the 1970s. He is a past Chairman of the Western Australian Division of the Taxation Institute of Australia.\n\nJeff currently serves as a Member of the Salaries and Allowances Tribunal for the State of Western Australia and is a Founding Governor of the Malcolm Sargent Cancer Fund for Children in Western Australia.\n\nRichard Reid is a Fellow of the Institute of Chartered Accountants. After extensive experience in senior auditing positions in London, Belgium and Perth he joined the Clough Group in 1980. Since 1983 he has been the Finance Director of the main operating company. He is a Director of Clough Limited, the listed parent company, and a Director of a number of the Group’s subsidiaries, joint ventures and associates.\n\nRichard has been intimately involved in all the Clough Group’s major projects and acquisitions over the past twenty years and the successful listing of both parent company Clough Limited on the Australian Stock Exchange in 1998 and its subsidiary PT Petrosea Tbk on the Jakarta Stock Exchange in 1990. He has significant Australian and overseas experience in Engineering and Construction; Property and other Investments in both Finance and Management\n\nChristopher Sutherland is a Fellow of the Institute of Engineers and has extensive experience in offshore and subsea engineering and construction businesses. Previously Managing Director of a major subsea remote system company. Chris is currently the General Manager - Group Strategy for Clough Engineering Ltd.\n\n## RICHARD MALCOLM REID\n\n## Non Executive Director - Appointed 22 September 2000\n\n## CHRISTOPHER GLEN SUTHERLAND\n\n## Alternate Non Executive Director -Appointed 29 September 2000\n\n28 HJ) oO HL Gap\n\n## DIRECTORS’ REPORT" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.864521373065634, + "doc_id": "a959753c07943c30648680567ef92bda469ef77d02dac7ccb9782422959263f7", + "edit_distance": 0.26710526315789473, + "f1_score": 0.9900709219858157, + "meteor": 0.956714190638404, + "precision": 0.9858757062146892, + "pred_md": "Directors and Officers\n\n## Board of Directors\n\n## Michael J. Brown\n\nChairman and Chief Executive Officer Euronet Services Inc.\n\n## Daniel R. Henry\n\nChief Operating Officer\n\nEuronet Services Inc.\n\n## Thomas A. McDonnell\n\nPresident and Chief Executive Officer DST Systems, Inc. (information processing and computer software company)\n\n## Steven J. Buckley\n\nManaging Partner Innova Capital LLC (advisor to Poland Partners venture capital fund)\n\n## Eriberto R. Scocimara\n\nPresident and Chief Executive Officer Hungarian-American Enterprise Fund (private investment company, funded by US Government)\n\n## M. Jeannine Strandjord\n\nSenior Vice President, Finance Long Distance Division Sprint Corporation\n\n## Executive Officers\n\n## Michael J. Brown\n\nPresident and Chief Executive Officer\n\n## Daniel R. Henry\n\nChief Operating Officer\n\n## Jeffery B. Newman\n\nExecutive Vice President and General Counsel\n\n## Miro Bergman\n\nExecutive Vice President, Managing Director EMEA\n\n## Ronald G. Ferguson\n\nExecutive Vice President, Managing Director North America\n\n## Thierry Michel\n\nVice President, Managing Director New Technologies\n\n## James P. Jerome\n\nVice President, Managing Director Software Solutions\n\n## Corporate Information\n\n## Professional Offices\n\nIndependent Auditors KPMG LIM Center, IX Floor Al. Jerozolimskie 65/79 00-697 Wa r s a w, Poland\n\n## Transfer Agent\n\nE q u iS e r v e P.O. Box 9187 Canton, Massachusetts 02021-9187 Shareholder Inquiries: Tel: 877-282-1169 (within the US) Tel: 781-575-3226 (outside the US)\n\n## Investor Information\n\nCopies of Euronet Services Inc.'s Form 10-K, as filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission, are available from the Company at no charge. Requests for copies of Form 10-K and other investor information should be addressed to:\n\n## James McCroy\n\nManaging Director Investor Relations Euronet Services Inc. Tel: 913-327-4232 Fax: 913-327-1921\n\nj m c c r o y @ e u r o n e tw o r ld w i d e . c o m\n\nCorporate Offices\n\nCorporate Headquarters\n\n4601 College Boulevard, Suite 300 Leawood, Kansas 66211 Tel: 913-327-4200 Fax: 913-327-1921\n\n## European Headquarters\n\nHorvát u. 14-24. 1027 Budapest, Hungary Tel: 36-1-224-1000\n\nFax: 36-1-224-1013\n\nSoftware Division\n\n17500 Chenal Parkway Little Rock, Arkansas 72223-9138 Tel: 501-218-7300\n\nFax: 501-218-7302\n\nGlobal Sales Offices\n\n## C r o a t ia\n\nZelinska 3/5 10000 Zagreb, Croatia Tel: 385-1-63-26-777\n\nFax: 385-1-63-26-778\n\n## Czech Republic\n\nIBC - Pobrezní 3 186 00 Prague 8, Czech Republic Tel: 420-2-2483-2252 Fax: 420-2-2323-954\n\n## F r a n c e\n\n120 avenue Charles de Gaulle 92200 Neuilly-sur-Seine, France Tel: 33-1-41-92-95-55\n\nFax: 33-1-47-22-32-82\n\n## G e r m a n y\n\nCharlottenstrasse 18 10117 Berlin, Germany Tel: 49-30-2039-6800 Fax: 49-30-2039-6855\n\n## G r e e c e\n\n90, Kifissias Av e n u e 15125 Marousi Athens, Greece Tel: 301-809-9688 Fax: 301-809-9700\n\n## H u n g a r y\n\nHorvát u. 14-24. 1027 Budapest, Hungary Tel: 36-1-224-1000\n\nFax: 36-1-224-1013\n\n## Middle East\n\n11 Gamal El Dine Abou El Mahasen Garden City - Cairo - Egypt Tel: 20-10-136-6774 Fax: 44-845-127-4748\n\n## P o l a n d\n\nul. Emilii Plater 28 00-688 Wa r s a w, Poland Tel: 48-22-690-5100\n\nFax: 48-22-690-5101\n\n## R o m a n i a\n\n9 Alexandru Ioan Cuza Blvd. Sector 1, Bucharest, Romania Tel: 401-310-3363 Fax: 401-310-3383\n\n## Tu r k e y\n\nBeybi Giz Plaza Kat 26 Meydan Sokak No 28 Maslak 80670 Istanbul, Tu r k e y\n\n## United Kingdom\n\n3A The Courtyard, Alban Park St. Albans, Hertfordshire AL4 0LA United Kingdom Tel: 44-1727-799870\n\nFax: 44-1727-799880\n\n## U S A\n\n4601 College Boulevard, Suite 300 Leawood, Kansas 66211 Tel: 913-327-4200 Fax: 913-327-1921\n\n17500 Chenal Parkway Little Rock, Arkansas 72223-9138 Tel: 501-218-7300 Fax: 501-218-7302\n\nTel: 90-212-335-2512 or 2513\n\nEuronet Worldwide is a trade name and trademark of Euronet Services, Inc.\n\n## Web Site\n\nFor further information, visit:\n\nw w w.euronetworldwide.com\n\n## Common Stock Information\n\nThe table below sets forth the high and low closing sales prices for the stock as reported by Nasdaq.", + "recall": 0.9943019943019943, + "true_md": "## Directors and Officers\n\n## Corporate Information\n\n## Board of Directors\n\n## Executive Officers\n\n## Professional Offices\n\n## Common Stock Information\n\nMichael J. Brown Chairman and Chief Executive Officer Euronet Services Inc.\n\nDaniel R. Henry Chief Operating Officer Euronet Services Inc.\n\nThomas A. McDonnell President and Chief Executive Officer DST Systems, Inc. (information processing and computer software company)\n\nSteven J. Buckley Managing Partner Innova Capital LLC (advisor to Poland Partners venture capital fund)\n\nEriberto R. Scocimara President and Chief Executive Officer Hungarian-American Enterprise Fund (private investment company, funded by US Government)\n\nM. Jeannine Strandjord Senior Vice President, Finance Long Distance Division Sprint Corporation \n\nMichael J. Brown President and Chief Executive Officer \n\nDaniel R. Henry Chief Operating Officer \n\nJeffery B. Newman Executive Vice President and General Counsel \n\nMiro Bergman Executive Vice President, Managing Director - EMEA \n\nRonald G. Ferguson Executive Vice President, Managing Director - North America \n\nThierry Michel Vice President, Managing Director - New Technologies \n\nJames P. Jerome Vice President, Managing Director - Software Solutions \n\nThe table below sets forth the high and low closing sales prices for the stock as reported by Nasdaq.\n\nKPMG LIM Center, IX Floor Al. Jerozolimskie 65/79 00-697 Wa r s a w, Poland\n\nE q u i S e r v e P.O. Box 9187 Canton, Massachusetts 02021-9187 Shareholder Inquiries: Tel: 877-282-1169 (within the US) Tel: 781-575-3226 (outside the US)\n\nCopies of Euronet Services Inc.’s Form 10-K, as filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission, are available from the Company at no charge. Requests for copies of Form 10-K and other investor information should be addressed to:\n\nJames McCroy Managing Director Investor Relations Euronet Services Inc. Tel: 913-327-4232 Fax: 913-327-1921 j m c c r o y @ e u r o n e t w o r l d w i d e . c o m\n\n## Independent Auditors\n\n## Transfer Agent\n\n## Investor Information\n\n## Corporate Offices\n\n## Corporate Headquarters\n\n## European Headquarters\n\n## Software Division\n\n## Web Site\n\n4601 College Boulevard, Suite 300 Leawood, Kansas 66211 Tel: 913-327-4200 Fax: 913-327-1921\n\nHorvát u. 14-24. 1027 Budapest, Hungary Tel: 36-1-224-1000 Fax: 36-1-224-1013\n\n17500 Chenal Parkway Little Rock, Arkansas 72223-9138 Tel: 501-218-7300 Fax: 501-218-7302\n\nFor further information, visit: w w w.euronetworldwide.com \n\n## Global Sales Offices\n\nC r o a t i a Zelinska 3/5 10000 Zagreb, Croatia Tel: 385-1-63-26-777 Fax: 385-1-63-26-778 \n\nCzech Republic IBC - Pobrezní 3 186 00 Prague 8, Czech Republic Tel: 420-2-2483-2252 Fax: 420-2-2323-954\n\nF r a n c e 120 avenue Charles de Gaulle 92200 Neuilly-sur-Seine, France Tel: 33-1-41-92-95-55 Fax: 33-1-47-22-32-82\n\nG e r m a n y Charlottenstrasse 18 10117 Berlin, Germany Tel: 49-30-2039-6800 Fax: 49-30-2039-6855\n\nG r e e c e 90, Kifissias Av e n u e 15125 Marousi Athens, Greece Tel: 301-809-9688 Fax: 301-809-9700\n\nH u n g a r y Horvát u. 14-24. 1027 Budapest, Hungary Tel: 36-1-224-1000 Fax: 36-1-224-1013\n\nMiddle East 11 Gamal El Dine Abou El Mahasen Garden City - Cairo - Egypt Tel: 20-10-136-6774 Fax: 44-845-127-4748\n\nP o l a n d ul. Emilii Plater 28 00-688 Wa r s a w, Poland Tel: 48-22-690-5100 Fax: 48-22-690-5101\n\nR o m a n i a 9 Alexandru Ioan Cuza Blvd. Sector 1, Bucharest, Romania Tel: 401-310-3363 Fax: 401-310-3383\n\nTu r k e y Beybi Giz Plaza Kat 26 Meydan Sokak No 28 Maslak 80670 Istanbul, Tu r k e y Tel: 90-212-335-2512 or 2513\n\nUnited Kingdom 3A The Courtyard, Alban Park St. Albans, Hertfordshire AL4 0LA United Kingdom Tel: 44-1727-799870 Fax: 44-1727-799880\n\nU S A 4601 College Boulevard, Suite 300 Leawood, Kansas 66211 Tel: 913-327-4200 Fax: 913-327-1921\n\n17500 Chenal Parkway Little Rock, Arkansas 72223-9138 Tel: 501-218-7300 Fax: 501-218-7302\n\nEuronet Worldwide is a trade name and trademark of Euronet Services, Inc." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9641679324635181, + "doc_id": "425e4b3ac8f9691493b77a19adffa78892ecc145e7cb665ad8734f9ac98e55da", + "edit_distance": 0.026262626262626262, + "f1_score": 0.9769585253456221, + "meteor": 0.982002132773956, + "precision": 0.9769585253456221, + "pred_md": "60\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nAt December 31, 2004, there is a $6 million valuation allowance provided on certain New Jersey state net operating loss carryforwards and other New Jersey state deferred tax assets because management believes these assets do not meet the 'more likely than not' criteria for recognition under SFAS 109. Management believes all other deferred tax assets are more likely than not to be realized because of the future reversal of existing taxable temporary differences and expected future taxable income. Accordingly, there are no other valuation allowances provided at December 31, 2004.\n\nThe Company is evaluating the impact of provisions of the American Jobs Creation Act of 2004 (the 'Act') that provide for a special one-time tax deduction of 85 percent on certain repatriated earnings of foreign subsidiaries. Additional guidance from Congress and/or the United States Treasury Department will be necessary for the Company to complete its evaluation, as it is not clear at this time whether the Act will provide a benefit to the Company. The Company will complete the evaluation as promptly as practicable following the issuance of such guidance and adjust taxes accordingly, if necessary.\n\nThe Company has not yet repatriated the net proceeds from the sale of MGM Grand Australia pending the evaluation. Nonetheless, the Company provided in 2004 deferred U.S. income taxes of $11 million on the basis that such proceeds would be repatriated without the benefit of the 85 percent one-time deduction. Such amount was included in the provision for income taxes on discontinued operations for 2004. The Company considered the earnings of its Australia operations permanently reinvested prior to the sale of such operations.\n\nIf guidance is issued that indicates the planned repatriation qualifies for the one-time deduction, the Company will recognize a tax benefit of approximately $7 million as part of continuing operations in the quarter in which such guidance is issued. If no such guidance is issued within the applicable timeframe, then the\n\nCompany will attempt to permanently reinvest the proceeds in another foreign jurisdiction, such as Macau. In such case, the Company would recognize a tax benefit of $11 million as part of continuing operations in the quarter in which the reinvestment is made. The Company currently does not have a plan to reinvest the proceeds in such manner.\n\n## NOTE 10 - COMMITMENTS AND CONTINGENCIES\n\nLeases. The Company leases real estate and various equipment under operating and, to a lesser extent, capital lease arrangements. Certain real estate leases provide for escalation of rent based upon a specified price index and/or based upon periodic appraisals.\n\nAt December 31, 2004, the Company was obligated under non-cancelable operating leases and capital leases to make future minimum lease payments as follows:", + "recall": 0.9769585253456221, + "true_md": "Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n60\n\nAt December 31, 2004, there is a $6 million valuation allowance provided on certain New Jersey state net operating loss carryforwards and other New Jersey state deferred tax assets because management believes these assets do not meet the “more likely than not” criteria for recognition under SFAS 109. Management believes all other deferred tax assets are more likely than not to be realized because of the future reversal of existing taxable temporary differences and expected future taxable income. Accordingly, there are no other valuation allowances provided at December 31, 2004.\n\nThe Company is evaluating the impact of provisions of the American Jobs Creation Act of 2004 (the “Act”) that provide for a special one-time tax deduction of 85 percent on certain repatriated earnings of foreign subsidiaries. Additional guidance from Congress and/or the United States Treasury Department will be necessary for the Company to complete its evaluation, as it is not clear at this time whether the Act will provide a benefit to the Company. The Company will complete the evaluation as promptly as practicable following the issuance of such guidance and adjust taxes accordingly, if necessary.\n\nThe Company has not yet repatriated the net proceeds from the sale of MGM Grand Australia pending the evaluation. Nonetheless, the Company provided in 2004 deferred U.S. income taxes of $11 million on the basis that such proceeds would be repatriated without the benefit of the 85 percent one-time deduction. Such amount was included in the provision for income taxes on discontinued operations for 2004. The Company considered the earnings of its Australia operations permanently reinvested prior to the sale of such operations.\n\nIf guidance is issued that indicates the planned repatriation qualifies for the one-time deduction, the Company will recognize a tax benefit of approximately $7 million as part of continuing operations in the quarter in which such guidance is issued. If no such guidance is issued within the applicable timeframe, then the\n\nCompany will attempt to permanently reinvest the proceeds in another foreign jurisdiction, such as Macau. In such case, the Company would recognize a tax benefit of $11 million as part of continuing operations in the quarter in which the reinvestment is made. The Company currently does not have a plan to reinvest the proceeds in such manner.\n\nNOTE 10 — COMMITMENTS AND CONTINGENCIES Leases. The Company leases real estate and various equipment under operating and, to a lesser extent, capital lease arrangements. Certain real estate leases provide for escalation of rent based upon a specified price index and/or based upon periodic appraisals.\n\nAt December 31, 2004, the Company was obligated under non-cancelable operat- ing leases and capital leases to make future minimum lease payments as follows:" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4458173653439389, + "doc_id": "ee4c9b557a897a527cda89192a44ab41dd2493848027f52d206a0d897ffbb481", + "edit_distance": 0.4630225080385852, + "f1_score": 0.9952606635071091, + "meteor": 0.541051541051541, + "precision": 0.9905660377358491, + "pred_md": "## NON-CONSOLIDATED FIVE-YEAR SUMMARY\n\nNissan Motor Co., Ltd. and Consolidated Subsidiaries Fiscal years 2004, 2003, 2002, 2001 and 2000\n\nNotes: 1. Unless indicated otherwise, all dollar figures herein refer to U.S. currency. Yen amounts have been translated into U.S. dollars, for convenience only, at ¥107 = $1, the approximate exchange rate on March 31, 2005.\n\n2. Net income per share amounts are based on the weighted average number of shares of common stock outstanding during each year. Figures for net income per share are in exact yen and U.S. dollars.\n\nNumber of shares outstanding as of March 31, 2005: 4,520,715,112.\n\n3. Cash dividends paid represent the amounts proposed by the Board of Directors as applicable to the respective years, together with the interim cash dividends paid.\n\n4. Cash dividends applicable to fiscal year 2004 is ¥24.00 per share.\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\n105\n\nFINANCIAL SECTION", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NON-CONSOLIDATED FIVE-YEAR SUMMARY\n\nNissan Motor Co., Ltd. and Consolidated Subsidiaries Fiscal years 2004, 2003, 2002, 2001 and 2000\n\nNissan Motor Co., Ltd. and Consolidated Subsidiaries Fiscal years 2004, 2003, 2002, 2001 and 2000\n\nNotes: 1. Unless indicated otherwise, all dollar figures herein refer to U.S. currency. Yen amounts have been translated into U.S. dollars, for convenience only, at ¥107 = $1, the approximate exchange rate on March 31, 2005. 2. Net income per share amounts are based on the weighted average number of shares of common stock outstanding during each year.\n\nonly, at ¥107 = $1, the approximate exchange rate on March 31, 2005. 2. Net income per share amounts are based on the weighted average number of shares of common stock outstanding during each year. Figures for net income per share are in exact yen and U.S. dollars. Number of shares outstanding as of March 31, 2005: 4,520,715,112.\n\nFigures for net income per share are in exact yen and U.S. dollars. Number of shares outstanding as of March 31, 2005: 4,520,715,112. Cash dividends paid represent the amounts proposed by the Board of Directors as applicable to the respective years, together with the interim\n\nNumber of shares outstanding as of March 31, 2005: 4,520,715,112. 3. Cash dividends paid represent the amounts proposed by the Board of Directors as applicable to the respective years, together with the interim cash dividends paid. 4. Cash dividends applicable to fiscal year 2004 is ¥24.00 per share.\n\ncash dividends paid. 4. Cash dividends applicable to fiscal year 2004 is ¥24.00 per share.\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 105\n\nFINANCIAL SECTION" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.777174942678692, + "doc_id": "009e97e9c901e10ee5f6cbd7b93f6fcbd0ce22e789aedfb7aeb4f49a804c90b4", + "edit_distance": 0.2518796992481203, + "f1_score": 0.8686868686868686, + "meteor": 0.8239482477135303, + "precision": 0.8775510204081632, + "pred_md": "## Bob Housley appreciates loyalty.\n\nHis company, Housley Communications, is a thriving business with a staff of 225 and contracting relationships with over 700 firms. The company provides engineering and implementation of advanced telecommunications systems. 'We provide everything a company needs to go from zero to 100 percent.'\n\nSuccess hasn't necessarily been easy. 'We had some difficult times when we were starting out in the '80s,' says Housley. 'San Angelo National Bank worked very diligently to help me get where I am today. They stuck with me and were always team players.'\n\nHousley is a demanding customer - a trait to which he credits much of his success. 'I am very customer service-oriented. It's how I built my business. I appreciate that I can get that same type of dedication from San Angelo National Bank, and I see it reflected throughout the First Financial Bankshares organization.'\n\nHousley the shareholder is no less demanding, but he's had good reason to be pleased with his returns from First Financial Bankshares. 'First Financial's expansion strategy is excellent - they do their research and find banks with good opportunity. Their operations are sound, and their growth is well-managed. I believe they are one of the best mid-size banking organizations around.'\n\nBob Housley President Housley Communications San Angelo, Texas\n\n## 'They stuck with me and were always team players.'", + "recall": 0.86, + "true_md": "“They stuck with me and were always team players.”\n\nBob Housley appreciates loyalty.\n\nHis company, Housley Communications, is a thriv- ing business with a staff of 225 and contracting relationships with over 700 firms. The company provides engineering and implementation of advanced telecommunications systems. “We pro- vide everything a company needs to go from zero to 100 percent.”\n\nSuccess hasn’t necessarily been easy. “We had some difficult times when we were starting out in the ’80s,” says Housley. “San Angelo National Bank worked very diligently to help me get where I am today. They stuck with me and were always team players.”\n\nHousley is a demanding customer – a trait to which he credits much of his success. “I am very customer service-oriented. It’s how I built my busi- ness. I appreciate that I can get that same type of dedication from San Angelo National Bank, and I see it reflected throughout the First Financial Bankshares organization.”\n\nHousley the shareholder is no less demanding, but he’s had good reason to be pleased with his returns from First Financial Bankshares. “First Financial’s expansion strategy is excellent – they do their research and find banks with good oppor- tunity. Their operations are sound, and their growth is well-managed. I believe they are one of the best mid-size banking organizations around.”\n\nBob Housley President Housley Communications San Angelo, Texas" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.07361827715049192, + "doc_id": "36654a46da4bbe04657b4ad806cac24fcd24565b732ed3e81433422d85e05f32", + "edit_distance": 0.7948717948717948, + "f1_score": 0.5084745762711864, + "meteor": 0.2198676066024759, + "precision": 0.625, + "pred_md": "HON INDUSTRIES Inc. and SUBSIDIARIES\n\n## CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF INCOME\n\nThe accompanying notes are an integral part of the consolidated financial statements.\n\n39", + "recall": 0.42857142857142855, + "true_md": "H O N I N D U S T R I E S I n c . a n d S U B S I D I A R I E S\n\n## C O N S O L I D A T E D S T A T E M E N T S O F I N C O M E\n\nThe accompanying notes are an integral part of the consolidated financial statements.\n\n39" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9489378798612563, + "doc_id": "20a80c5870a30fe21fd1b759038b20e86546b6119fc5999cf0743c12f58dcab3", + "edit_distance": 0.7596685082872928, + "f1_score": 0.9875222816399287, + "meteor": 0.7159901829103249, + "precision": 0.9892857142857143, + "pred_md": "38\n\nin a position to affect shareholder returns. It is intended that participants will generally comprise the senior executives and a small number of high potential middle managers of the Company.\n\nOptions and rights to shares issued under these Plans to senior executives are linked to the longer term performance of the Company and are only exercisable following the satisfaction of performance hurdles that are designed to maximise shareholder wealth.\n\nThe amount of the award, and correspondingly the proportion of remuneration at risk, varies between executives according to their respective levels of seniority and responsibility.\n\nThe rules of the SESPP and SESOP were both approved by shareholders in 1997 and again in 2000.\n\nHaving regard to contemporary best practice, the LTI program is designed to drive superior executive performance and to reward only superior Company performance, linked to an appropriate performance benchmark. The benchmark assesses actual Company performance in terms of long-term comparative growth of the Company and resulting shareholder value.\n\nCompany performance is measured over a three year period based on the Company's Total Shareholder Return (TSR) relative to one or more comparator groups as determined by the Board at the commencement of the performance period including, without limitation, any combination of the ASX 100, energy companies in ASX 100, the ASX Energy Index and international E&P companies. If performance is below the 50th\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\npercentile, no award is made. A proportionate award is made for performance between the 50th to 75th percentile and the maximum award is made for performance at or above the 75th percentile.\n\nIn relation to the current financial year, awards may be taken only in the form of shares pursuant to SESPP or, at the election of an executive, options pursuant to SESOP, details of which are described in Notes 18(c) and 18(d) of the financial statements. In future periods, awards may be taken in the form of rights over shares pursuant to SESPP or options granted under SESOP, at the election of executives.\n\nRights to shares and options are granted at no cost to the executives with the number of shares awarded being determined by dividing the amount of the award by the volume weighted average price of the Company's shares over the five business days up to and including the award date. The number of options awarded is of equivalent value calculated by an independent expert based on an acceptable valuation method. The exercise price of the options is the volume weighted average price of the Company's shares over the five business days up to and including the award date.\n\nThe Board intends that LTI awards be made on an annual basis using a three year measurement period for the applicable performance hurdles. However, the Board reserves the right to suspend or modify the LTI program in light of circumstances appropriate to the Company from time to time.\n\nThe maximum number of shares that may be issued under all of the Company's executive and employee share and option plans cannot exceed the limit of 5% of\n\nthe issued capital, as approved by shareholders at the 2000 AGM.\n\n## (c) Specified Executives of the Santos Group\n\nThe following persons were the six executives with the greatest authority for the strategic direction and management of the Santos Group ('Specified Executives') during the financial year receiving the highest remuneration:\n\nAll Specified Executives are employed by the Company.\n\nThe Specified Executives are entitled to a termination payment in the event of termination of their service agreement by the Company without cause. They are entitled to three months' notice, excepting for Mr P C Wasow who is entitled to six months' notice, or payment in lieu of that notice, plus three weeks for each year of continuous service, pro rata for part thereof, and capped at a maximum of sixty-five weeks of total fixed remuneration, less notional value of superannuation for that period.", + "recall": 0.9857651245551602, + "true_md": "in a position to affect shareholder returns. It is intended that participants will generally comprise the senior executives and a small number of high potential middle managers of the Company. \n\npercentile, no award is made. A proportionate award is made for performance between the 50th to 75th percentile and the maximum award is made for performance at or above the 75th percentile. \n\nthe issued capital, as approved by shareholders at the 2000 AGM. \n\nThe following persons were the six executives with the greatest authority for the strategic direction and management of the Santos Group (“Specified Executives”) during the financial year receiving the highest remuneration: \n\nIn relation to the current financial year, awards may be taken only in the form of shares pursuant to SESPP or, at the election of an executive, options pursuant to SESOP, details of which are described in Notes 18(c) and 18(d) of the financial statements. In future periods, awards may be taken in the form of rights over shares pursuant to SESPP or options granted under SESOP, at the election of executives. \n\nRights to shares and options are granted at no cost to the executives with the number of shares awarded being determined by dividing the amount of the award by the volume weighted average price of the Company’s shares over the five business days up to and including the award date. The number of options awarded is of equivalent value calculated by an independent expert based on an acceptable valuation method. The exercise price of the options is the volume weighted average price of the Company’s shares over the five business days up to and including the award date. \n\nAll Specified Executives are employed by the Company. \n\nThe Specified Executives are entitled to a termination payment in the event of termination of their service agreement by the Company without cause. They are entitled to three months’ notice, excepting for Mr P C Wasow who is entitled to six months’ notice, or payment in lieu of that notice, plus three weeks for each year of continuous service, pro rata for part thereof, and capped at a maximum of sixty-five weeks of total fixed remuneration, less notional value of superannuation for that period. \n\nThe Board intends that LTI awards be made on an annual basis using a three year measurement period for the applicable performance hurdles. However, the Board reserves the right to suspend or modify the LTI program in light of circumstances appropriate to the Company from time to time. \n\nThe maximum number of shares that may be issued under all of the Company’s executive and employee share and option plans cannot exceed the limit of 5% of\n\nCompany performance is measured over a three year period based on the Company’s Total Shareholder Return (TSR) relative to one or more comparator groups as determined by the Board at the commencement of the performance period including, without limitation, any combination of the ASX 100, energy companies in ASX 100, the ASX Energy Index and international E&P companies. If performance is below the 50th\n\nHaving regard to contemporary best practice, the LTI program is designed to drive superior executive performance and to reward only superior Company performance, linked to an appropriate performance benchmark. The benchmark assesses actual Company performance in terms of long-term comparative growth of the Company and resulting shareholder value. \n\nThe rules of the SESPP and SESOP were both approved by shareholders in 1997 and again in 2000. \n\nThe amount of the award, and correspondingly the proportion of remuneration at risk, varies between executives according to their respective levels of seniority and responsibility. \n\nOptions and rights to shares issued under these Plans to senior executives are linked to the longer term performance of the Company and are only exercisable following the satisfaction of performance hurdles that are designed to maximise shareholder wealth. \n\nAnnual Report 2004 38\n\n## (c) Specified Executives of the Santos Group" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9857023127820101, + "doc_id": "61c712a225f38316eeb37970ff9a2cc41b4c7b2ee3ebfc1a533f4f2c93122adb", + "edit_distance": 0.029411764705882353, + "f1_score": 0.9927849927849927, + "meteor": 0.992766342837972, + "precision": 0.9942196531791907, + "pred_md": "SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## Note 1. Summary of Significant Accounting Policies (Continued)\n\n101, (SAB No.101). Effective July 1, 2003, the Company adopted Emerging Issues Task Force (\"EITF\") No. 00-21, \"Accounting for Revenue Arrangements with Multiple Element Deliverables.\" The EITF guidance addresses how to account for arrangements that may involve multiple revenue-generating activities, i.e., the delivery or performance of multiple products, services, and/or rights to use assets. In applying this guidance, separate contracts with the same party, entered into at or near the same time, will be presumed to be a bundled transaction, and the consideration will be measured and allocated to the separate units based on their relative fair values. The adoption of EITF 00-21 has required evaluation of each arrangement entered into by the Company for each sales channel. The Company will continue to monitor arrangements with its sales channels to determine if any changes in revenue recognition would need to be made in the future. The adoption of EITF 00-21 has resulted in substantially all of the activation fee revenue generated from Company-owned retail stores and associated direct costs being recognized at the time the related wireless handset is sold and is classified as equipment revenue and cost of equipment, respectively. Upon adoption of EITF 00-21, previously deferred revenues and costs will continue to be amortized over the remaining estimated life of a subscriber, not to exceed 30 months. Revenue and costs for activations at other retail locations will continue to be deferred and amortized over their estimated lives as prescribed by SAB 101. The adoption of EITF 0021 had the effect of increasing equipment revenue by $68 thousand and increasing costs of activation by $23 thousand in 2003, which otherwise would have been deferred and amortized. The amounts of deferred revenue under SAB 101 at December 31, 2003, 2002 and 2001 were $1.2 million, $1.5 million and $1.2 million, respectively. The deferred costs at December 31, 2003, 2002 and 2001 were $0.4 million, $0.7 million and $0.7 million, respectively.\n\nThe Company records its PCS service revenue net of the 8% of collected revenue that is paid to Sprint. Under the management agreement with Sprint, through December 31, 2003 Sprint is entitled to retain 8% of all collected service revenue from subscribers whose service home is in the Company's territory, and 8% of the collected roaming revenue generated by non-Sprint wireless subscribers who use the Company's network. With the adoption of the new Amended Agreement, the Company will record its service revenue and receive payment from Sprint based on billed revenue, net of 8% of billed revenue retained by Sprint, customer credits, and allocated write-offs.\n\nStock Option Plan: To account for its fixed plan stock options, the Company applies the intrinsic value-based method of accounting prescribed by Accounting Principles Board (APB) Opinion No. 25, \"Accounting for Stock Issued to Employees,\" and related interpretations including Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB) Interpretation No. 44, \"Accounting for Certain Transactions involving Stock Compensation,\" an interpretation of APB Opinion No. 25 issued in March 2000. Under this method, compensation expense is recorded on the date of the grant only if the current market price of the underlying stock exceeded the exercise price. SFAS No. 123, \"Accounting for Stock-Based Compensation,\" established accounting and disclosure requirements using a fair value-based method of accounting for stock-based employee compensation plans. As allowed by SFAS No. 123, the Company has elected to continue to apply the intrinsic value-based method of accounting described above, and has adopted the disclosure requirements of SFAS No. 123, as amended by SFAS No. 148, \"Accounting for Stock-Based Compensation-Transition and Disclosure-an amendment of FASB Statement No. 123.\"\n\nGrants of options under the Plan are accounted for following the APB Opinion No. 25 and related interpretations. Accordingly, no compensation expense has been recognized under the Plan. Had compensation expense been recorded, based on fair values of the awards at the grant date (the method prescribed in SFAS No. 123), reported net income and earnings per share would have been reduced to the pro forma amounts shown in the following table:\n\nEarnings per share: Basic income (loss) per share is computed by dividing net income (loss) by the weighted average number of common shares outstanding during the year. Diluted income (loss) per share is computed by dividing the income (loss) by the sum of the weighted average number of common shares outstanding and potential dilutive common shares determined using the treasury stock method. Because the Company reported a net loss from continuing operations in 2002, the diluted income (loss) per share is the same as basic income (loss) per share since including any\n\n21\n\n2003 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n■", + "recall": 0.9913544668587896, + "true_md": "## Note 1. Summary of Significant Accounting Policies (Continued)\n\n101, (SAB No.101). Effective July 1, 2003, the Company adopted Emerging Issues Task Force (\"EITF\") No. 00-21, \"Accounting for Revenue Arrangements with Multiple Element Deliverables.\" The EITF guidance addresses how to account for arrangements that may involve multiple revenue-generating activities, i.e., the delivery or performance of multiple products, services, and/or rights to use assets. In applying this guidance, separate contracts with the same party, entered into at or near the same time, will be presumed to be a bundled transaction, and the consideration will be measured and allocated to the separate units based on their relative fair values. The adoption of EITF 00-21 has required evaluation of each arrangement entered into by the Company for each sales channel. The Company will continue to monitor arrangements with its sales channels to determine if any changes in revenue recognition would need to be made in the future. The adoption of EITF 00-21 has resulted in substantially all of the activation fee revenue generated from Company-owned retail stores and associated direct costs being recognized at the time the related wireless handset is sold and is classified as equipment revenue and cost of equipment, respectively. Upon adoption of EITF 00-21, previously deferred revenues and costs will continue to be amortized over the remaining estimated life of a subscriber, not to exceed 30 months. Revenue and costs for activations at other retail locations will continue to be deferred and amortized over their estimated lives as prescribed by SAB 101. The adoption of EITF 00- 21 had the effect of increasing equipment revenue by $68 thousand and increasing costs of activation by $23 thousand in 2003, which otherwise would have been deferred and amortized. The amounts of deferred revenue under SAB 101 at December 31, 2003, 2002 and 2001 were $1.2 million, $1.5 million and $1.2 million, respectively. The deferred costs at December 31, 2003, 2002 and 2001 were $0.4 million, $0.7 million and $0.7 million, respectively.\n\nThe Company records its PCS service revenue net of the 8% of collected revenue that is paid to Sprint. Under the management agreement with Sprint, through December 31, 2003 Sprint is entitled to retain 8% of all collected service revenue from subscribers whose service home is in the Company’s territory, and 8% of the collected roaming revenue generated by non-Sprint wireless subscribers who use the Company’s network. With the adoption of the new Amended Agreement, the Company will record its service revenue and receive payment from Sprint based on billed revenue, net of 8% of billed revenue retained by Sprint, customer credits, and allocated write-offs.\n\nStock Option Plan: To account for its fixed plan stock options, the Company applies the intrinsic value-based method of accounting prescribed by Accounting Principles Board (APB) Opinion No. 25, \"Accounting for Stock Issued to Employees,\" and related interpretations including Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB) Interpretation No. 44, \"Accounting for Certain Transactions involving Stock Compensation,\" an interpretation of APB Opinion No. 25 issued in March 2000. Under this method, compensation expense is recorded on the date of the grant only if the current market price of the underlying stock exceeded the exercise price. SFAS No. 123, \"Accounting for Stock-Based Compensation,\" established accounting and disclosure requirements using a fair value-based method of accounting for stock-based employee compensation plans. As allowed by SFAS No. 123, the Company has elected to continue to apply the intrinsic value-based method of accounting described above, and has adopted the disclosure requirements of SFAS No. 123, as amended by SFAS No. 148, \"Accounting for Stock-Based Compensation-Transition and Disclosure-an amendment of FASB Statement No. 123.\"\n\nGrants of options under the Plan are accounted for following the APB Opinion No. 25 and related interpretations. Accordingly, no compensation expense has been recognized under the Plan. Had compensation expense been recorded, based on fair values of the awards at the grant date (the method prescribed in SFAS No. 123), reported net income and earnings per share would have been reduced to the pro forma amounts shown in the following table:\n\nEarnings per share: Basic income (loss) per share is computed by dividing net income (loss) by the weighted average number of common shares outstanding during the year. Diluted income (loss) per share is computed by dividing the income (loss) by the sum of the weighted average number of common shares outstanding and potential dilutive common shares determined using the treasury stock method. Because the Company reported a net loss from continuing operations in 2002, the diluted income (loss) per share is the same as basic income (loss) per share since including any\n\n21 ■ 2003 ANNUAL REPORT\n\nSHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9691824657767184, + "doc_id": "fcf83ed75006463197cd8f6aceea259333d9dfb2acc858ae63ca0d4e752d4936", + "edit_distance": 0.45579793340987373, + "f1_score": 0.9814323607427056, + "meteor": 0.8217512392757934, + "precision": 0.9840425531914894, + "pred_md": "OUR WORK\n\n36\n\nWithin the Company, positive tension is what keeps us going. Our recent success has been a learning experience for us. It created a unique set of values and skills, and these are not going to disappear. Moreover, the core skills that now exist in Nissan are what will drive us forward. And we will not lose these skills because we now attract and retain the best employees. The organization is more efficient, and we can push our teams towards higher targets because their confidence level is higher.\n\nWe displayed that confidence when we introduced the Murano in the U.S. Crossover vehicles were a new concept for the U.S. car buyer, and that carried a risk. The product planners boldly pushed ahead, though, and after the Murano became a hit in that market, it proved equally popular in Japan and Europe. Now, with new product launches rising from 44 during NISSAN 180 to 70 in NISSAN Value-Up, and with global expansion in markets outside our traditional regions, you can see how the product planners benefited from the Murano's success. From the conceptual stage onward, they now have the confidence to make strong projections about how many customers a model will have around the world. Their mindset is, we've succeeded before with Murano and others, so why not try this again on a global basis? They can identify and target certain customers but then propose skipping a particular market to avoid compromising the concept. We don't want to make bland cars, where we design one variation for Europe, another for Japan, and something else for the US. There is no flavor, nothing special, about a chameleon car that tries to please everyone. The Murano was the kind of strong, innovative concept that prospered because it was not a compromise.\n\nThese are the things that we as planners can do. For instance, if we understand that in one market diesel engines are very important, the engineers can create a package that takes that into account. We are not compromising, but creating the proper combination to address specific needs from the start. With a car like the Z, for instance, we will not compromise. We will make a clear choice, even if it means losing some volume in other markets. Cars like the Z are not volume seekers; they are brand builders.\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\nThe global expansion of the Infiniti brand is another example of building a brand. Developing and building Infiniti is about making a specific brand decision. You can't advertise a luxury brand like this in the same way you do a standard non-luxury brand. The typical Infiniti customer might never buy a Nissan, for example, because it's not exclusive enough. So in the Planning Group, we have a lot of work to do upstream, going deep into brand understanding and then deploying this understanding on specific products, features that span across multiple car lines, perceived product quality, materials and so on.\n\nBrand is about consistency; keeping on track, building step-by-step to sharpen the awareness that we are professionals with finely tuned cars meant for very specific customers. For example, in the recent launch of the Infiniti brand in Korea, everything in support of the brand had to be outstanding from the beginning-the sales network, the service, the people. We are going to do great things with Infiniti as we take the brand global over the next five years.\n\nLike the global expansion of Infiniti, our Light Commercial Vehicles (LCV) business presents another breakthrough opportunity during the NISSAN Value-Up period. In the past, Nissan, like other OEM producers, often placed the LCV business behind other product lines. Some view these vehicles as unprofitable, but that is only true if they fail to address customer needs. We are now committed to bringing LCVs in-line with Nissan's other product areas. We are looking to introduce a new generation of LCVs, with innovations and features that will satisfy customer needs that have not yet been met. From a design standpoint, we also want to demonstrate that LCVs are more than just utilitarian. We have several exciting products in the LCV pipeline that will bring something new and fresh to this market.\n\nHere in the Planning Group, we understand that we must protect the Nissan way of being creative. But while fostering that creativity, we will continue to standardize and refine our processes, building on what we have learned and applying these processes during this period of sustainable growth and profit. That balance between creativity and rigorous process management will keep Nissan on the path of global profitable growth.'", + "recall": 0.9788359788359788, + "true_md": "OUR WORK\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 36\n\nWithin the Company, positive tension is what keeps us going. Our recent success has been a learning experience for us. It created a unique set of values and skills, and these are not going to disappear. Moreover, the core skills that now exist in Nissan are what will drive us forward. And we will not lose these skills because we now attract and retain the best employees. The organization is more efficient, and we can push our teams towards higher targets because their confidence level is higher. \n\nThe global expansion of the Infiniti brand is another example of building a brand. Developing and building Infiniti is about making a specific brand decision. You can’t advertise a luxury brand like this in the same way you do a standard non-luxury brand. The typical Infiniti customer might never buy a Nissan, for example, because it’s not exclusive enough. So in the Planning Group, we have a lot of work to do upstream, going deep into brand understanding and then deploying this understanding on specific products, features that span across multiple car lines, perceived product quality, materials and so on. \n\nWe displayed that confidence when we introduced the Murano in the U.S. Crossover vehicles were a new concept for the U.S. car buyer, and that carried a risk. The product planners boldly pushed ahead, though, and after the Murano became a hit in that market, it proved equally popular in Japan and Europe. Now, with new product launches rising from 44 during NISSAN 180 to 70 in NISSAN Value-Up, and with global expansion in markets outside our traditional regions, you can see how the product planners benefited from the Murano’s success. From the conceptual stage onward, they now have the confidence to make strong projections about how many customers a model will have around the world. Their mindset is, we’ve succeeded before with Murano and others, so why not try this again on a global basis? They can identify and target certain customers but then propose skipping a particular market to avoid compromising the concept. We don’t want to make bland cars, where we design one variation for Europe, another for Japan, and something else for the US. There is no flavor, nothing special, about a chameleon car that tries to please everyone. The Murano was the kind of strong, innovative concept that prospered because it was not a compromise.\n\nThese are the things that we as planners can do. For instance, if we understand that in one market diesel engines are very important, the engineers can create a package that takes that into account. We are not compromising, but creating the proper combination to address specific needs from the start. With a car like the Z, for instance, we will not compromise. We will make a clear choice, even if it means losing some volume in other markets. Cars like the Z are not volume seekers; they are brand builders. \n\nHere in the Planning Group, we understand that we must protect the Nissan way of being creative. But while fostering that creativity, we will continue to standardize and refine our processes, building on what we have learned and applying these processes during this period of sustainable growth and profit. That balance between creativity and rigorous process management will keep Nissan on the path of global profitable growth.”\n\nLike the global expansion of Infiniti, our Light Commercial Vehicles (LCV) business presents another breakthrough opportunity during the NISSAN Value-Up period. In the past, Nissan, like other OEM producers, often placed the LCV business behind other product lines. Some view these vehicles as unprofitable, but that is only true if they fail to address customer needs. We are now committed to bringing LCVs in-line with Nissan’s other product areas. We are looking to introduce a new generation of LCVs, with innovations and features that will satisfy customer needs that have not yet been met. From a design standpoint, we also want to demonstrate that LCVs are more than just utilitarian.\n\nWe have several exciting products in the LCV pipeline that will bring something new and fresh to this market.\n\nBrand is about consistency; keeping on track, building step-by-step to sharpen the awareness that we are professionals with finely tuned cars meant for very specific customers. For example, in the recent launch of the Infiniti brand in Korea, everything in support of the brand had to be outstanding from the beginning—the sales network, the service, the people. We are going to do great things with Infiniti as we take the brand global over the next five years." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9150061270707632, + "doc_id": "911cc28d2b0eb55a14845e92314c30f40c5b96cde70ee6bab0abcd86061b392b", + "edit_distance": 0.17587939698492464, + "f1_score": 0.957345971563981, + "meteor": 0.9355254688715073, + "precision": 0.9711538461538461, + "pred_md": "18\n\n## FINANCIAL HIGHLIGHTS\n\n## (in thousands except share and per share data)\n\n(1) On December 13, 1999, the Board of Directors approved an initial quarterly cash dividend of $0.10 per share to stockholders of record on February 10, 2000. The dividend was paid on March 1, 2000. As a result of the acquisition of Mirage Resorts, Incorporated, we announced on April 19, 2000 that the quarterly dividend policy was discontinued.\n\nThe acquisition of Mirage Resorts occurred on May 31, 2000. In June 2003, we ceased operations of PLAYMGMMIRAGE.com, our online gaming website ('Online'). In January 2004, we sold the Golden Nugget Las Vegas and the Golden Nugget Laughlin including substantially all of the assets and liabilities of those resorts (the 'Golden Nugget Subsidiaries'). In July 2004, we sold the subsidiaries that own and operate MGM Grand Australia. The results of Online, the Golden Nugget Subsidiaries and MGM Grand Australia are classified as discontinued operations for all periods presented.", + "recall": 0.9439252336448598, + "true_md": "## FINANCIAL HIGHLIGHTS 18\n\n(1) On December 13, 1999, the Board of Directors approved an initial quarterly cash dividend of $0.10 per share to stockholders of record on February 10, 2000. The dividend was paid on March 1, 2000. As a result of the acquisition of Mirage Resorts, Incorporated, we announced on April 19, 2000 that the quarterly dividend policy was discontinued.\n\nThe acquisition of Mirage Resorts occurred on May 31, 2000. In June 2003, we ceased operations of PLAYMGMMIRAGE.com, our online gaming website (“Online”). In January 2004, we sold the Golden Nugget Las Vegas and the Golden Nugget Laughlin including substantially all of the assets and liabilities of those resorts (the “Golden Nugget Subsidiaries”). In July 2004, we sold the subsidiaries that own and operate MGM Grand Australia. The results of Online, the Golden Nugget Subsidiaries and MGM Grand Australia are classified as discontinued operations for all periods presented.\n\nNET REVENUE\n\nOPERATING INCOME\n\nNET INCOME\n\n(in thousands except share and per share data)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9693259465213387, + "doc_id": "b1420f4629ba3f8df7ef322a345647a195bfbec9d72aa2fe1162fdf02819a6cd", + "edit_distance": 0.03305785123966942, + "f1_score": 0.9938900203665987, + "meteor": 0.99172568637368, + "precision": 0.9959183673469387, + "pred_md": "## OPERATING CASH FLOW AND CAPITAL EXPENDITURE\n\n$ million\n\n## DEPRECIATION, DEPLETION AND AMORTISATION\n\nAll things being equal, DD&A could have been expected to be lower this year, as Santos produced lower volumes and had written off the Heytesbury plant in the onshore Otway Basin last year.\n\nHowever, two factors caused an increase in 2004 DD&A. Firstly, while reserve revisions were positive overall, negative revisions were predominantly in producing areas which increased depletion rates in 2004, while positive reserve revisions were in areas where Santos is not yet producing or where straight line depreciation is dominant; for example, Casino and John Brookes.\n\nSecondly, on the future development cost side, depletion is up partly because Santos is starting to factor in higher steel and service company costs into long-term economic models.\n\n## CASH FLOW LOWER\n\nWhile Santos had a strong profit year, this is not fully reflected in cash flows.\n\nThere were large movements in trade debtors between years, reflecting the timing of liftings and the payments for them.\n\nIn addition, Santos has not yet been paid for the insurance claim relating to the Moomba incident. A total of $117 million was recognised in sundry income, which represents an estimate of the amount receivable from insurers for lost revenue, additional costs and replacement plant and equipment. At year end the money was still owed and so is not shown as part of operating cash flow. The final quantification of the claim with insurers is progressing.\n\n## RECORD CAPITAL EXPENDITURE\n\nCapital expenditure ended right on target at $930 million a record year for Santos approaching a level which is double DD&A, reflecting how rapidly the portfolio is changing.\n\nSantos will continue with a high development expenditure in 2005, but expects to spend more in line with cash generation. Exploration spend is estimated to be about $150 million, while development spend is expected to be reduced to $530 million and delineation to $90 million. Other capital spending is expected to be reduced to $80 million.\n\nThis results in a total planned capital expenditure for 2005 of approximately $850 million.\n\n## FINANCIAL FLEXIBILITY INTACT\n\nSantos ended the year in a strong financial position with its financial flexibility intact, despite the record development spending.\n\nThe FUELS issue was successful and Santos' gearing increased only marginally, despite the large capital program in 2004.\n\nThis is important in Santos' business as the Company needs to be able to fund exploration success as it occurs, and our development projects are increasing in size.\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\n11", + "recall": 0.991869918699187, + "true_md": "OPERATING CASH FLOW AND CAPITAL EXPENDITURE $ million\n\n## DEPRECIATION, DEPLETION AND AMORTISATION\n\n## CASH FLOW LOWER\n\nAll things being equal, DD&A could have been expected to be lower this year, as Santos produced lower volumes and had written off the Heytesbury plant in the onshore Otway Basin last year.\n\nHowever, two factors caused an increase in 2004 DD&A. Firstly, while reserve revisions were positive overall, negative revisions were predominantly in producing areas which increased depletion rates in 2004, while positive reserve revisions were in areas where Santos is not yet producing or where straight line depreciation is dominant; for example, Casino and John Brookes.\n\nSecondly, on the future development cost side, depletion is up partly because Santos is starting to factor in higher steel and service company costs into long-term economic models.\n\nWhile Santos had a strong profit year, this is not fully reflected in cash flows.\n\nThere were large movements in trade debtors between years, reflecting the timing of liftings and the payments for them.\n\nIn addition, Santos has not yet been paid for the insurance claim relating to the Moomba incident. A total of $117 million was recognised in sundry income, which represents an estimate of the amount receivable from insurers for lost revenue, additional costs and replacement plant and equipment. At year end the money was still owed and so is not shown as part of operating cash flow. The final quantification of the claim with insurers is progressing.\n\n## RECORD CAPITAL EXPENDITURE\n\nCapital expenditure ended right on target at $930 million – a record year for Santos – approaching a level which is double DD&A, reflecting how rapidly the portfolio is changing.\n\nSantos will continue with a high development expenditure in 2005, but expects to spend more in line with cash generation. Exploration spend is estimated to be about $150 million, while development spend is expected to be reduced to $530 million and delineation to $90 million. Other capital spending is expected to be reduced to $80 million.\n\nThis results in a total planned capital expenditure for 2005 of approximately $850 million.\n\n## FINANCIAL FLEXIBILITY INTACT\n\nSantos ended the year in a strong financial position with its financial flexibility intact, despite the record development spending.\n\nThe FUELS issue was successful and Santos’ gearing increased only marginally, despite the large capital program in 2004.\n\nThis is important in Santos’ business as the Company needs to be able to fund exploration success as it occurs, and our development projects are increasing in size.\n\nAnnual Report 2004 11" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7360565461072172, + "doc_id": "66f76f484536870cc46bda0651618a315645cdaaf7c74588e0cd825ed7fb2951", + "edit_distance": 0.4444444444444444, + "f1_score": 0.92, + "meteor": 0.8851537244780069, + "precision": 0.92, + "pred_md": "## We must serve well to prosper - We must prosper to serve well\n\nShenTel Service Company · Shenandoah Long Distance Company · Shenandoah Mobile Company Shenandoah Network Company · Shenandoah Telephone Company · Shenandoah Valley Leasing Company Shenandoah Cable Television Company · ShenTel Communications Company\n\nShenandoah Personal Communications Company\n\nPO Box 459 Edinburg, VA 22824-0459 Phone 540-984-4141 · Fax 540-984-8192\n\nwww.shentel.com\n\nThe front cover of the annual report is adapted from the Company's 2004 Telephone Directory.", + "recall": 0.92, + "true_md": "ShenTel Service Company • Shenandoah Long Distance Company • Shenandoah Mobile Company Shenandoah Network Company • Shenandoah Telephone Company • Shenandoah Valley Leasing Company Shenandoah Cable Television Company • ShenTel Communications Company Shenandoah Personal Communications Company\n\nPO Box 459 Edinburg, VA 22824-0459 Phone 540-984-4141 • Fax 540-984-8192 www.shentel.com\n\nThe front cover of the annual report is adapted from the Company’s 2004 Telephone Directory.\n\nWe must serve well to prosper – We must prosper to serve well" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.1955727822476122, + "doc_id": "fa7d664d84551efd6b0ce69751dad39ca94c2082aef2e44574f7555af4048087", + "edit_distance": 0.6785714285714286, + "f1_score": 0.625, + "meteor": 0.3587591441542869, + "precision": 0.7317073170731707, + "pred_md": "HON INDUSTRIES Inc. and SUBSIDIARIES\n\n## SELECTED FINANCIAL DATA ELEVEN-YEAR SUMMARY\n\n(a) Per SFAS No. 142, 'Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets,' the Company has ceased recording of goodwill and indefinite-lived Intangible amortization.\n\n(b) Includes acquisitions completed during year.\n\n56", + "recall": 0.5454545454545454, + "true_md": "H O N I N D U S T R I E S I n c . a n d S U B S I D I A R I E S\n\n## S E L E C T E D F I N A N C I A L D A T A E L E V E N - Y E A R S U M M A R Y\n\n56\n\n(a) Per SFAS No. 142, “Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets,” the Company has ceased recording of goodwill and indefinite-lived Intangible amortization.\n\n(b) Includes acquisitions completed during year." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9071133387999893, + "doc_id": "cfd9b1ee221f0b36809f9ecd32476390832ea8e78bc9f7b04ac41e580048d43e", + "edit_distance": 0.8369384359400999, + "f1_score": 0.9669565217391304, + "meteor": 0.6683416224684283, + "precision": 0.972027972027972, + "pred_md": "OUR WORLD\n\n66\n\n## GENERAL OVERSEAS MARKETS\n\nAsia/Oceania\n\n## A Solid Strategy for Growth\n\nYASUAKI HASHIMOTO Vice President\n\nYASUAKI HASHIMOTO Vice President\n\n'General Overseas Markets oversees a huge territory, including countries as diverse and geographically separated as Pakistan and Tahiti. Fiscal 2004 was a good year for us in GOM, with retail sales going up more than 10 percent. All our major markets exhibited growth. Taiwan and Australia were the biggest contributors\n\nwith sales of 70,000 and 63,000 units, respectively. Australia's auto market was particularly good for uswe're now the number-four automaker there. Strong demand for the Nissan Pickup and X-TRAIL was responsible for the jump in sales. Although there were no new passenger car releases, the dealers did an excellent job selling the current lineup.\n\nIn the past, we left local sales up to our sales affiliates in each market. However, we've recently altered our strategy in an effort to unify the brand and service level. Emphasizing the importance of consistency to the sales companies has made it much easier to promote the Nissan way of doing business. We have also increased our shares in local companies, such as in Thailand and Taiwan, to strengthen management control.\n\nFiscal 2005 will be challenging because we have no major model launches planned. We're committed to growth, however, and I believe that having a clear strategy for each market and a targeted approach to the customer will boost our market position throughout the region.\n\nThailand is an important market for Nissan's future. Although we sell just over 50,000 vehicles a year there, we plan to increase sales volume under NISSAN Value-Up. We're also expanding production capacity and planning to localize Thailand as an export base for Pickups. We intend\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\nto export parts and components from Thailand worldwide, which will result in a great cost advantage. We see more opportunities in Malaysia and Indonesia as well.\n\nTwo other interesting countries for us are India and Pakistan, which NISSAN Value-Up identifies as next steps in our global expansion. Currently, Pakistan's auto market totals just 100,000 vehicles a year, while in India annual sales are 1.2 million. Both markets are expected to grow. This year, we will determine our strategies for India and Pakistan based on feasibility studies. We've already established a wholly owned subsidiary in Mumbai that will first focus on imports and later serve as a base camp to learn more about the market in India.\n\nPerhaps the biggest news for GOM in Asia was the summer 2005 launch of the Infiniti in Korea. This is the first-ever launch of the full brand independent of Nissan's sales network and outside of the U.S. Korea is a goodsized market and a good first step in Infiniti's development as a globally recognized luxury brand. Although we have set a modest annual sales target of just 5,000 vehicles within three years, Korea will be a strategic market for establishing the Infiniti brand before the scheduled launches in Russia, China, and eventually Japan.\n\nSoutheast Asia is also a major emerging market for Nissan. We have reinforced our strength with a solid strategy in the region, and are now ready to invest.'\n\nPICKUP\n\nPICKUP\n\nInfiniti in Korea\n\nInfiniti in Korea", + "recall": 0.9619377162629758, + "true_md": "to export parts and components from Thailand worldwide, which will result in a great cost advantage. We see more opportunities in Malaysia and Indonesia as well.\n\nTwo other interesting countries for us are India and Pakistan, which NISSAN Value-Up identifies as next steps in our global expansion. Currently, Pakistan’s auto market totals just 100,000 vehicles a year, while in India annual sales are 1.2 million. Both markets are expected to grow. This year, we will determine our strategies for India and Pakistan based on feasibility studies. We’ve already established a wholly owned subsidiary in Mumbai that will first focus on imports and later serve as a base camp to learn more about the market in India.\n\nPerhaps the biggest news for GOM in Asia was the summer 2005 launch of the Infiniti in Korea. This is the first-ever launch of the full brand independent of Nissan’s sales network and outside of the U.S. Korea is a good- sized market and a good first step in Infiniti’s development as a globally recognized luxury brand. Although we have set a modest annual sales target of just 5,000 vehicles within three years, Korea will be a strategic market for establishing the Infiniti brand before the scheduled launches in Russia, China, and eventually Japan. \n\nSoutheast Asia is also a major emerging market for Nissan. We have reinforced our strength with a solid strategy in the region, and are now ready to invest.”\n\nFiscal 2005 will be challenging because we have no major model launches planned. We’re committed to growth, however, and I believe that having a clear strategy for each market and a targeted approach to the customer will boost our market position throughout the region. \n\nThailand is an important market for Nissan’s future. Although we sell just over 50,000 vehicles a year there, we plan to increase sales volume under NISSAN Value-Up. We’re also expanding production capacity and planning to localize Thailand as an export base for Pickups. We intend\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 66\n\nIn the past, we left local sales up to our sales affiliates in each market. However, we’ve recently altered our strategy in an effort to unify the brand and service level. Emphasizing the importance of consistency to the sales companies has made it much easier to promote the Nissan way of doing business. We have also increased our shares in local companies, such as in Thailand and Taiwan, to strengthen management control. \n\nwith sales of 70,000 and 63,000 units, respectively. Australia’s auto market was particularly good for us— we’re now the number-four automaker there. Strong demand for the Nissan Pickup and X-TRAIL was responsible for the jump in sales. Although there were no new passenger car releases, the dealers did an excellent job selling the current lineup. \n\n“General Overseas Markets oversees a huge territory, including countries as diverse and geographically separated as Pakistan and Tahiti. Fiscal 2004 was a good year for us in GOM, with retail sales going up more than 10 percent. All our major markets exhibited growth. Taiwan and Australia were the biggest contributors\n\nYASUAKI HASHIMOTO Vice President\n\n## A Solid Strategy for Growth\n\n## Asia/Oceania\n\nGENERAL OVERSEAS MARKETS\n\nOUR WORLD\n\nPICKUP\n\nInfiniti in Korea" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6353840721232273, + "doc_id": "0ea7447d58f25fbcad7b9c652d4e35e96655410843729d35e2a1c84e58178cbe", + "edit_distance": 0.3125, + "f1_score": 0.8295454545454546, + "meteor": 0.7404249202357468, + "precision": 0.8795180722891566, + "pred_md": "PERFECT MATCH #4\n\n## THE HOMEOWNER AND HEARTH & HOME TECHNOLOGIES\n\nHearth & Home Technologies, you warm our hearts by making a powerful impact on our lives; you are the ones who transform our houses into homes. First, you warmed up our living rooms and family rooms with style, elegance, and comfort. Now, you're heating up our porches and our kitchens … and finding creative and innovative ways to make our bedrooms, bathrooms, dens, guest rooms, and kids' rooms all toasty with your beautiful glow. The home fires are burning brighter and hotter than ever, now that you've come into our lives.", + "recall": 0.7849462365591398, + "true_md": "## T H E H O M E O W N E R A N D H E A R T H & H O M E T E C H N O L O G I E S\n\nHearth & Home Technologies, you warm our hearts by making a powerful impact on our lives; you are the ones who transform our houses into homes. First, you warmed up our living rooms and family rooms with style, elegance, and comfort. Now, you’re heating up our porches and our kitchens … and find- ing creative and innovative ways to make our bedrooms, bathrooms, dens, guest rooms, and kids’ rooms all toasty with your beautiful glow. The home fires are burning brighter and hotter than ever, now that you’ve come into our lives. \n\nPERFECT MATCH #4" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9636384762977276, + "doc_id": "ed9d1041663fdea8f52ce5659ca44c27c941ed425b14d8f8eef401744452dbfa", + "edit_distance": 0.8499399759903962, + "f1_score": 0.9904153354632587, + "meteor": 0.776419625073078, + "precision": 0.9935897435897436, + "pred_md": "## Liquidity and Capital Resources\n\nSelected financial ratios at the end of fiscal 2004 and 2003 are as follows:\n\nCash and cash equivalents were $288,881 at the end of fiscal 2004 compared to $97,976 at the end of fiscal 2003.\n\nDuring fiscal 2004, cash provided by operating activities was $294,730 compared to $253,250 last year. The increase in cash provided by operating activities is primarily due to improved net earnings, combined with decreased accounts receivable balances resulting from improvements in the company's receivables turnover. Inventories and liabilities also increased in fiscal 2004, driven by higher raw material costs as compared to the prior year.\n\nCash flow from operating activities provides the company with its principal source of liquidity. The company does not anticipate a significant risk to cash flow from this source in the foreseeable future because the company operates in a relatively stable industry and has strong products across several product lines.\n\nCash provided by investing activities was $18,319 in fiscal 2004 compared to cash used in investing activities of $394,280 in fiscal 2003. The cash provided by investing activities in fiscal 2004 primarily reflects the $84,249 proceeds received in the second quarter sale of the remaining equity interest in the Spanish food company Campofrio Alimentacion, S.A. and the $42,525 proceeds received in the third quarter sale of Vista International Packaging, Inc. The decrease in cash used for investing activities is also due to changes in the funding of various benefit plans. Fiscal 2003 investing activities included the company's first quarter funding of $56,000 to a rabbi trust for supplemental executive retirement plans and deferred income plans and the third quarter contribution of $51,062 to its defined benefit pension plans. In the second quarter of fiscal 2004, the company contributed an additional $26,841 to those pension plans. The company does not anticipate any additional discretionary contributions to these plans during fiscal 2005.\n\nAdditionally, acquisitions of businesses represented a significant investment activity of the company in fiscal 2003 and 2004. Fiscal 2003 included the December 2002 acquisition of the Diamond Crystal Brands business (with a final purchase price of $124,528, including related costs) and the July 2003 acquisition of the Century Foods International (CFI) business. In fiscal 2004, the company paid an additional $2,053 following a final working capital valuation for CFI, resulting in a final purchase price of $118,552, including related costs. The company also acquired the Chi-Chi's trademark for $2,241 and purchased the assets of Concept Foods, Inc. for $17,102 during the fourth quarter. The company continues to pursue acquisition opportunities that complement its growth strategies and product offerings.\n\nFiscal 2004 fixed asset expenditures were $80,363 compared to $67,104 in the prior year. The company estimates its fiscal 2005 expenditures will increase to $100,000 and exceed estimated depreciation expense. The main reason for the expected increase is a new further processing plant being built in Albert Lea, Minnesota, that will be utilized by the Refrigerated Foods segment.\n\nCash used in financing activities was $122,144 in fiscal 2004 compared to $70,557 in fiscal 2003. The higher amount of cash used in fiscal 2004 includes an increase of $18,356 in principal payments on the company's long term debt compared to fiscal 2003. Cash dividends paid to the company's shareholders also continues to be a significant financing activity for the company. Dividends paid in fiscal 2004 were $61,343 compared to $57,092 paid in the previous fiscal year. The company has paid dividends for 305 consecutive quarters and expects to continue doing so in the future. The annual dividend for fiscal 2005 will increase to $.52 per share, up from $.45 per share in fiscal 2004, representing the company's 39th consecutive annual dividend increase.\n\nAdditionally, $37,525 was used for common stock repurchases in fiscal 2004 compared to $6,119 in the prior year. During the year, the company repurchased 1,379,400 shares of its common stock at an average price per share of $27.21 under the repurchase plan approved by the company's Board of Directors in October 2002. These repurchases result in a total of 1,601,628 shares having been repurchased under this 10 million share repurchase plan through October 30, 2004.\n\nThe company is required, by certain covenants in its debt agreements, to maintain specified levels of financial ratios and balance sheet position. At the end of fiscal 2004, the company was in compliance with all of these debt covenants.\n\n2004 Annual Report\n\n27", + "recall": 0.9872611464968153, + "true_md": "Additionally, acquisitions of businesses represented a significant investment activity of the company in fiscal 2003 and 2004. Fiscal 2003 included the December 2002 acquisition of the Diamond Crystal Brands business (with a final purchase price of $124,528, including related costs) and the July 2003 acquisition of the Century Foods International (CFI) business. In fiscal 2004, the company paid an additional $2,053 following a final working capital valuation for CFI, resulting in a final purchase price of $118,552, including related costs. The company also acquired the Chi-Chi’s trademark for $2,241 and purchased the assets of Concept Foods, Inc. for $17,102 during the fourth quarter. The company continues to pursue acquisition opportunities that complement its growth strategies and product offerings.\n\nSelected financial ratios at the end of fiscal 2004 and 2003 are as follows:\n\n## Liquidity and Capital Resources\n\nFiscal 2004 fixed asset expenditures were $80,363 compared to $67,104 in the prior year. The company estimates its fiscal 2005 expenditures will increase to $100,000 and exceed estimated depreciation expense. The main reason for the expected increase is a new further processing plant being built in Albert Lea, Minnesota, that will be utilized by the Refrigerated Foods segment.\n\nCash and cash equivalents were $288,881 at the end of fiscal 2004 compared to $97,976 at the end of fiscal 2003. \n\nDuring fiscal 2004, cash provided by operating activities was $294,730 compared to $253,250 last year. The increase in cash provided by operating activities is primarily due to improved net earnings, combined with decreased accounts receivable balances resulting from improvements in the company’s receivables turnover. Inventories and liabilities also increased in fiscal 2004, driven by higher raw material costs as compared to the prior year.\n\nCash flow from operating activities provides the company with its principal source of liquidity. The company does not anticipate a significant risk to cash flow from this source in the foreseeable future because the company operates in a relatively stable industry and has strong products across several product lines.\n\nCash used in financing activities was $122,144 in fiscal 2004 compared to $70,557 in fiscal 2003. The higher amount of cash used in fiscal 2004 includes an increase of $18,356 in principal payments on the company’s long term debt compared to fiscal 2003. Cash dividends paid to the company’s shareholders also continues to be a significant financing activity for the company. Dividends paid in fiscal 2004 were $61,343 compared to $57,092 paid in the previous fiscal year. The company has paid dividends for 305 consecutive quarters and expects to continue doing so in the future. The annual dividend for fiscal 2005 will increase to $.52 per share, up from $.45 per share in fiscal 2004, representing the company’s 39th consecutive annual dividend increase.\n\nThe company is required, by certain covenants in its debt agree- ments, to maintain specified levels of financial ratios and balance sheet position. At the end of fiscal 2004, the company was in compliance with all of these debt covenants.\n\nAdditionally, $37,525 was used for common stock repurchases in fiscal 2004 compared to $6,119 in the prior year. During the year, the company repurchased 1,379,400 shares of its common stock at an average price per share of $27.21 under the repurchase plan approved by the company’s Board of Directors in October 2002. These repurchases result in a total of 1,601,628 shares having been repurchased under this 10 million share repurchase plan through October 30, 2004.\n\nCash provided by investing activities was $18,319 in fiscal 2004 compared to cash used in investing activities of $394,280 in fiscal 2003. The cash provided by investing activities in fiscal 2004 primarily reflects the $84,249 proceeds received in the second quarter sale of the remaining equity interest in the Spanish food company Campofrio Alimentacion, S.A. and the $42,525 proceeds received in the third quarter sale of Vista International Packaging, Inc. The decrease in cash used for investing activities is also due to changes in the funding of various benefit plans. Fiscal 2003 investing activities included the company’s first quarter funding of $56,000 to a rabbi trust for supplemental executive retirement plans and deferred income plans and the third quarter contribution of $51,062 to its defined benefit pension plans. In the second quarter of fiscal 2004, the company contributed an additional $26,841 to those pension plans. The company does not anticipate any additional discretionary contributions to these plans during fiscal 2005.\n\n2004 Annual Report 27" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9399213319369926, + "doc_id": "e3bf6e584624189b10d3900a693824b5507443cb43751c47fda390a8a0e3c589", + "edit_distance": 0.6872037914691943, + "f1_score": 0.9604989604989606, + "meteor": 0.7667096907306107, + "precision": 0.9746835443037974, + "pred_md": "Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations\n\nChoice of vesting patterns. Under SFAS 123(R), awards with graded vesting, as all of our awards have, may be expensed in one of two time patterns: 1) On a straightline basis over the complete vesting period (as though the entire award was one grant); or 2) On an accelerated basis, treating each vesting layer as a separate grant and amortizing each layer on a straight-line basis. For disclosure purposes under SFAS 123, we used the accelerated basis. We have preliminarily concluded that we will use the straight-line method for future grants under SFAS 123(R). As discussed below under transition methods, such policy will only apply to future grants. Expense recognized under SFAS 123(R) for previously granted options will be recorded on the accelerated basis.\n\nEstimating forfeitures. Under SFAS 123, we could choose whether to estimate forfeitures at the grant date or recognize actual forfeitures as they occur. Under SFAS 123(R), we must estimate forfeitures as of the grant date.\n\n## Presentation of excess tax benefits in the statement of cash flows. Under SFAS\n\n123(R), the excess of tax benefits realized from the exercise of employee stock options over the tax benefit associated with the financial reporting expense is shown as a financing cash inflow in the statement of cash flows. Previously, these excess benefits were shown as an operating cash inflow.\n\nTransition alternatives. There are two allowable transition alternatives - the modifiedprospective transition or the modified-retrospective transition. Under the modifiedprospective transition, we would begin applying the valuation and other criteria to stock options granted beginning July 1, 2005. We would begin recognizing expense for the unvested portion of previously issued grants at the same time, based on the valuation and attribution methods originally used to calculate the disclosures. Under the modified-retrospective transition, we would restate prior periods to reflect the previously calculated amounts in the pro forma disclosures as actual expenses of the prior period (with no change in valuation or attribution methods). Future accounting would\n\nbe the same as under the modified-prospective transition. We would also restate the statement of cash flows for the change in classification of excess tax benefits. In addition, we would be required under the modified-retrospective transition method to estimate forfeitures for options outstanding as of July 1, 2005 and recognize a cumulative effect of change in accounting principle to reverse such previously recognized compensation. We have not yet determined which transition method we will apply.\n\nDisclosures. There are additional disclosure requirements under SFAS 123(R), which will not have a material impact on us.\n\nThe impact of adopting SFAS 123(R) on our operating results will depend in part on the amount of stock options or other share-based payments we grant in the future. The following table shows compensation expense related to options granted through December 31, 2004, based on the options' vesting schedules:\n\nWe do not believe the adoption of SFAS 123(R) will have a material impact on our cash flows or financial position.\n\n## Market Risk\n\nMarket risk is the risk of loss arising from adverse changes in market rates and prices, such as interest rates, foreign currency exchange rates and commodity prices. Our primary exposure to market risk is interest rate risk associated with our\n\n37", + "recall": 0.9467213114754098, + "true_md": "37\n\nManagement’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations\n\nbe the same as under the modified-prospective transition. We would also restate the statement of cash flows for the change in classification of excess tax benefits. In addition, we would be required under the modified-retrospective transition method to estimate forfeitures for options outstanding as of July 1, 2005 and recognize a cumula- tive effect of change in accounting principle to reverse such previously recognized compensation. We have not yet determined which transition method we will apply.\n\nDisclosures. There are additional disclosure requirements under SFAS 123(R), which will not have a material impact on us.\n\nThe impact of adopting SFAS 123(R) on our operating results will depend in part on the amount of stock options or other share-based payments we grant in the future. The following table shows compensation expense related to options granted through December 31, 2004, based on the options’ vesting schedules:\n\nEstimating forfeitures. Under SFAS 123, we could choose whether to estimate forfeitures at the grant date or recognize actual forfeitures as they occur. Under SFAS 123(R), we must estimate forfeitures as of the grant date.\n\nChoice of vesting patterns. Under SFAS 123(R), awards with graded vesting, as all of our awards have, may be expensed in one of two time patterns: 1) On a straight- line basis over the complete vesting period (as though the entire award was one grant); or 2) On an accelerated basis, treating each vesting layer as a separate grant and amortizing each layer on a straight-line basis. For disclosure purposes under SFAS 123, we used the accelerated basis. We have preliminarily concluded that we will use the straight-line method for future grants under SFAS 123(R). As discussed below under transition methods, such policy will only apply to future grants. Expense recognized under SFAS 123(R) for previously granted options will be recorded on the accelerated basis.\n\nPresentation of excess tax benefits in the statement of cash flows. Under SFAS 123(R), the excess of tax benefits realized from the exercise of employee stock options over the tax benefit associated with the financial reporting expense is shown as a financing cash inflow in the statement of cash flows. Previously, these excess benefits were shown as an operating cash inflow.\n\nTransition alternatives. There are two allowable transition alternatives – the modified- prospective transition or the modified-retrospective transition. Under the modified- prospective transition, we would begin applying the valuation and other criteria to stock options granted beginning July 1, 2005. We would begin recognizing expense for the unvested portion of previously issued grants at the same time, based on the valua- tion and attribution methods originally used to calculate the disclosures. Under the modified-retrospective transition, we would restate prior periods to reflect the previous- ly calculated amounts in the pro forma disclosures as actual expenses of the prior period (with no change in valuation or attribution methods). Future accounting would\n\nWe do not believe the adoption of SFAS 123(R) will have a material impact on our cash flows or financial position.\n\nMarket risk is the risk of loss arising from adverse changes in market rates and prices, such as interest rates, foreign currency exchange rates and commodity prices. Our primary exposure to market risk is interest rate risk associated with our \n\n## Market Risk" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8840969029961319, + "doc_id": "3aa16c48eea26338b1f2f156ae7a7fef8cfbaa97faa408daf700fcd3fddc6408", + "edit_distance": 0.5609756097560976, + "f1_score": 0.9866666666666666, + "meteor": 0.7638259692460885, + "precision": 0.9823008849557522, + "pred_md": "BELLAGIO ADDS A JEWEL TO THE FAMILY CROWN. The Mirage Resorts merger provided outstanding resorts, people and land, and has propelled our earnings and provided an unparalleled platform for future growth.\n\n## SOON, A SPECTACULAR NEW CITY WILL RISE.\n\nProject CityCenter - an ambitious multi-dimensional urban plan - will contribute to the remarkable transformation of Las Vegas as an emerging city of global significance.\n\n20\n\n00\n\n04 20\n\n## BORGATA CHANGES THE FACE OF ATLANTIC CITY.\n\nBorgata is launched in Atlantic City with our joint-venture partner Boyd Gaming. Borgata has been a tremendous success, raising the bar for casino entertainment in that market.\n\n20\n\n03\n\nMANDALAY RESORT GROUP AND MGM MIRAGE ANNOUNCE MERGER. Mandalay Resort Group will add iconic resorts and great people to our family. We will own 832 acres in the heart of Las Vegas, the fastest growing city in the United States.\n\n09 20", + "recall": 0.9910714285714286, + "true_md": "MANDALAY RESORT GROUP AND MGM MIRAGE ANNOUNCE MERGER. Mandalay Resort Group will add iconic resorts and great people to our family. We will own 832 acres in the heart of Las Vegas, the fastest growing city in the United States.\n\nSOON, A SPECTACULAR NEW CITY WILL RISE. Project CityCenter – an ambitious multi-dimensional urban plan – will contribute to the remarkable transformation of Las Vegas as an emerging city of global significance.\n\nBORGATA CHANGES THE FACE OF ATLANTIC CITY. Borgata is launched in Atlantic City with our joint-venture partner Boyd Gaming. Borgata has been a tremendous success, raising the bar for casino entertainment in that market.\n\nBELLAGIO ADDS A JEWEL TO THE FAMILY CROWN. The Mirage Resorts merger provided outstanding resorts, people and land, and has propelled our earnings and provided an unparalleled platform for future growth.\n\n04 20\n\n00 20\n\n03 20\n\n09 20" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.838412828627277, + "doc_id": "a832ddaa54c4c5a35e340a6a29ceadee1fb584eb8c3ed8f14a590799220fa633", + "edit_distance": 0.1111111111111111, + "f1_score": 0.9247706422018349, + "meteor": 0.89648595721065, + "precision": 0.9333333333333333, + "pred_md": "Meanwhile, in midtown Manhattan, The Hartford's negotiations for permanent offices-a process that normally takes 12 to 15 months-were complete.\n\nThe feverish pace was in some ways therapeutic. It helped take people's minds off the tragedy and the monumental loss of life, including the lives of many good friends and business colleagues at Aon, Marsh & McLennan, Bank of America and Morgan Stanley-major partners of The Hartford with offices in the Twin Towers.\n\nLike many Americans watching the heroism of firefighters, police and emergency crews, thousands of our employees asked, 'How can we help?' Fortunately, they found ways. Lots of them. Employees crowded into bloodmobiles and dropped food and supplies into overflowing bins. With the company's match, employees also donated more than $700,000 to relief efforts, and The Hartford provided a special telephone hotline for employees who needed counseling.\n\n'Focused resolve' is how New York-based Regional Vice President Brandon Hickey characterizes The Hartford's response. 'It solidified in my mind how strong the culture is at this company,' he says. 'The emotional stress of Sept. 11 will be with us for a long time. But as a tribute to the people who were there, we came back as quickly as we did because we knew we\n\nhad a job to do, and we were committed to succeed.'\n\n10\n\nBy early November-less than 60 days after the attack-The Hartford's New York employees were in their new permanent offices at 2 Park Ave.\n\nNo less impressive-and certainly no less swiftwas The Hartford's claims service during Sept. 11's aftermath. 'Catastrophe Team'-CAT-adjusters were on the ground within days, fulfilling obligations to policyholders who suffered losses. As an example, The Hartford advanced $1 million within 72 hours of the disaster to help the Thacher, Proffitt & Wood law firm establish temporary midtown Manhattan offices. All the firm's employees had evacuated the World Trade Center's south tower before everything in their offices was destroyed. Within a week, Thacher, Proffitt & Wood was back in business.\n\nThe Hartford assigned extra resources to expedite service requests, and customers received premium payment extensions as needed. One adjuster wrote a $250,000 check on the spot to help a lower Manhattan software-development company begin its recovery. CAT team members and call center customer service representatives received special training to help them cope with traumatized customers, and the company distributed disaster-recovery literature and forms to help customers get back to business.\n\nThe Hartford's Group Benefits Division (GBD) offered crisis-counseling services to policyholders in", + "recall": 0.9163636363636364, + "true_md": "Meanwhile, in midtown Manhattan, The Hartford’s negotiations for permanent offices—a process that normally takes 12 to 15 months—were complete. \n\nThe feverish pace was in some ways therapeutic. It helped take people’s minds off the tragedy and the monumental loss of life, including the lives of many good friends and business colleagues at Aon, Marsh & McLennan, Bank of America and Morgan Stanley—major partners of The Hartford with offices in the Twin Towers.\n\nLike many Americans watching the heroism of firefighters, police and emergency crews, thousands of our employees asked, “How can we help?” Fortunately, they found ways. Lots of them. Employees crowded into bloodmobiles and dropped food and supplies into overflowing bins. With the company’s match, employees also donated more than $700,000 to relief efforts, and The Hartford provided a special tele- phone hotline for employees who needed counseling.\n\n“Focused resolve” is how New York-based Regional Vice President Brandon Hickey characterizes The Hartford’s response. “It solidified in my mind how strong the culture is at this company,” he says. “The emotional stress of Sept. 11 will be with us for a long time. But as a tribute to the people who were there, we came back as quickly as we did because we knew we had a job to do, and we were committed to succeed.”\n\nBy early November—less than 60 days after the attack—The Hartford’s New York employees were in their new permanent offices at 2 Park Ave. \n\nNo less impressive—and certainly no less swift— was The Hartford’s claims service during Sept. 11’s aftermath. “Catastrophe Team”—CAT—adjusters were on the ground within days, fulfilling obligations to poli- cyholders who suffered losses. As an example, The Hartford advanced $1 million within 72 hours of the dis- aster to help the Thacher, Proffitt & Wood law firm establish temporary midtown Manhattan offices. All the firm’s employees had evacuated the World Trade Center’s south tower before everything in their offices was destroyed. Within a week, Thacher, Proffitt & Wood was back in business.\n\nThe Hartford assigned extra resources to expedite service requests, and customers received premium payment extensions as needed. One adjuster wrote a $250,000 check on the spot to help a lower Manhattan software-development company begin its recovery. CAT team members and call center customer service representatives received special training to help them cope with traumatized customers, and the company distributed disaster-recovery literature and forms to help customers get back to business.\n\nThe Hartford’s Group Benefits Division (GBD) offered crisis-counseling services to policyholders in\n\n10" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9951187904700068, + "doc_id": "313dda9d8437c600451468c437888cc7e534a9a25f7dd80950b4edc33d44eca8", + "edit_distance": 0.05172413793103448, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9995736423182582, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## We gain strength from product diversity.\n\nAt any given time, changing customer needs, market conditions and economic factors can impact the revenues we derive from one of our product lines, either positively or negatively. But that is precisely the advantage that product diversity gives us. We supply a range of different products, many of which hold leading market positions, to a range of different market niches. This helps us to achieve growth without a disproportionate dependence on a single product or market and provides stability and consistency for our revenue base.\n\nIn 2003, we achieved revenue growth in the majority of our product lines, contributing to the generation of continuing strong cash flows for the company.\n\n## We keep a close watch on the bottom line.\n\nA company with manufacturing at its core faces the continuing challenge to make its products faster, better and more economically. We view this challenge as a continuing opportunity to increase profitability and improve our operational efficiency.\n\nOver the past several years, we have made significant investments in the upgrading of our automated manufacturing equipment, enabling us to produce higher volumes in less time and with greater cost efficiency. We also have taken steps toward the consolidation of common systems and processes among our three manufacturing locations.\n\nIn 2003, we continued to make solid headway in our never-ending quest for operational improvement, which is a primary focus of our business strategy. Our ability to hold the line on operational costs, coupled with increased revenues from product sales, contributed to a 20 percent improvement in operating income over 2002.\n\nOur strategy for the future continues to be focused on growth, as we remain committed to the fundamentals that have served us well: Financial strength that fuels continuing growth. Products that meet the needs of select markets. Productivity and profitability that improve year by year.\n\nTo that end, we will continue to put products into the marketplace that represent the highest standards of integrity and innovation. We will be relentless in our pursuit of operational measures that improve productivity and produce bottom-line benefits. We will seek out new ways to expand market opportunities and increase sales. We will continue to deploy our financial resources in the wisest way we can. We pledge our best effort to achieving a double-digit rate of growth in earnings per share from continuing operations. And we will remain vigilant in our determination to return value to those who invest in our company.\n\nSincerely,\n\nEmile A. Battat Chairman of the Board and President\n\n6", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## We gain strength from product diversity.\n\n## We keep a close watch on the bottom line.\n\nAt any given time, changing customer needs, market conditions and economic factors can impact the revenues we derive from one of our product lines, either positively or negatively. But that is precisely the advantage that product diversity gives us. We supply a range of different products, many of which hold leading market positions, to a range of different market niches. This helps us to achieve growth without a disproportionate dependence on a single product or market and provides stability and consistency for our revenue base.\n\nIn 2003, we achieved revenue growth in the majority of our product lines, contributing to the generation of continuing strong cash flows for the company.\n\nA company with manufacturing at its core faces the continuing challenge to make its products faster, better and more economically. We view this challenge as a continuing opportunity to increase profitability and improve our operational efficiency.\n\nOver the past several years, we have made significant investments in the upgrading of our automated manufacturing equipment, enabling us to produce higher volumes in less time and with greater cost efficiency. We also have taken steps toward the consolidation of common systems and processes among our three manufacturing locations.\n\nIn 2003, we continued to make solid headway in our never-ending quest for operational improvement, which is a primary focus of our business strategy. Our ability to hold the line on operational costs, coupled with increased revenues from product sales, contributed to a 20 percent improvement in operating income over 2002.\n\nOur strategy for the future continues to be focused on growth, as we remain committed to the fundamentals that have served us well: Financial strength that fuels continuing growth. Products that meet the needs of select markets. Productivity and profitability that improve year by year.\n\nTo that end, we will continue to put products into the marketplace that represent the highest standards of integrity and innovation. We will be relentless in our pursuit of operational measures that improve productivity and produce bottom-line benefits. We will seek out new ways to expand market opportunities and increase sales. We will continue to deploy our financial resources in the wisest way we can. We pledge our best effort to achieving a double-digit rate of growth in earnings per share from continuing operations. And we will remain vigilant in our determination to return value to those who invest in our company.\n\nSincerely,\n\nEmile A. Battat Chairman of the Board and President\n\n6" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8441276919321983, + "doc_id": "fe0c0ebc28850d8c3abac13b14e741aeb3b1270fc6724fb6d7f5fef872709895", + "edit_distance": 0.636568848758465, + "f1_score": 0.9057591623036648, + "meteor": 0.7458884484900684, + "precision": 0.9505494505494505, + "pred_md": "HON INDUSTRIES Inc. and SUBSIDIARIES\n\n## Business Combinations\n\nDuring 2001, the Company completed the acquisition of three small hearth product distributors for a total purchase price of approximately $7.6 million. The acquisitions were accounted for using the purchase method, and the results of the three distributors have been included in the Company's financial statements since the date of acquisition.\n\n## Inventories\n\n## Property, Plant, and Equipment\n\n## Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets\n\nThe Company adopted Statement of Financial Accounting Standards (SFAS) No. 142, 'Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets' on December 30, 2001, the beginning of its 2002 fiscal year. Pursuant to\n\nthis standard, the Company evaluates its goodwill for impairment on an annual basis based on values at the end of third quarter, or whenever indicators of impairment exist. The Company has evaluated its goodwill for impairment and has determined that the fair value of its reporting units exceeds the carrying values and therefore, no impairment of goodwill was recorded. Also pursuant to the standard, the Company has ceased recording of goodwill and indefinite-lived intangibles amortization in 2002.\n\nThe Company also owns a trademark having a net value of $8.1 million as of January 3, 2004, December 28, 2002, and December 29, 2001. The fair value of the trademark exceeds the carrying value of the trademark and thus, no impairment was recorded. The trademark is deemed to have an indefinite useful life because it is expected to generate cash flows indefinitely. The Company ceased amortizing the trademark in 2002.\n\nThe table below summarizes amortizable definite-lived intangible assets, which are reflected in Other Assets in the Company's consolidated balance sheets:\n\nAmortization expense for definite-lived intangibles for 2003, 2002, and 2001 was $2,690,100, $2,690,100, and $2,200,200, respectively. Amortization expense is estimated to be approximately $2.7 million per year through 2005, $2.4 million in 2006, $1.2 million in 2007, and $1.0 million in 2008.\n\nThe goodwill at December 29, 2001, included other intangible assets that are required to be accounted for as assets apart from goodwill under SFAS No. 142. The following table summarizes the reclassification:\n\n47", + "recall": 0.865, + "true_md": "this standard, the Company evaluates its goodwill for impairment on an annual basis based on values at the end of third quarter, or whenever indicators of impairment exist. The Company has evaluated its goodwill for impairment and has determined that the fair value of its reporting units exceeds the carrying values and therefore, no impairment of goodwill was recorded. Also pursuant to the standard, the Company has ceased recording of goodwill and indefinite-lived intangibles amortiza- tion in 2002.\n\nThe Company also owns a trademark having a net value of $8.1 million as of January 3, 2004, December 28, 2002, and December 29, 2001. The fair value of the trademark exceeds the car- rying value of the trademark and thus, no impairment was recorded. \n\nThe trademark is deemed to have an indefinite useful life because it is expected to generate cash flows indefinitely. The Company ceased amortizing the trademark in 2002.\n\nThe table below summarizes amortizable definite-lived intangible assets, which are reflected in Other Assets in the Company’s consolidated balance sheets:\n\nDuring 2001, the Company completed the acquisition of three small hearth product distributors for a total purchase price of approximately $7.6 million. The acquisitions were accounted for using the purchase method, and the results of the three distributors have been included in the Company’s financial statements since the date of acquisition.\n\nAmortization expense for definite-lived intangibles for 2003, 2002, and 2001 was $2,690,100, $2,690,100, and $2,200,200, respectively. \n\nAmortization expense is estimated to be approximately $2.7 million per year through 2005, $2.4 million in 2006, $1.2 million in 2007, and $1.0 million in 2008.\n\nThe goodwill at December 29, 2001, included other intangi- ble assets that are required to be accounted for as assets apart from goodwill under SFAS No. 142. The following table summarizes the reclassification:\n\nThe Company adopted Statement of Financial Accounting Stan- dards (SFAS) No. 142, “Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets” on December 30, 2001, the beginning of its 2002 fiscal year. Pursuant to \n\n## Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets\n\n## Property, Plant, and Equipment\n\n## Inventories\n\n## Business Combinations\n\n47\n\n## H O N I N D U S T R I E S I n c . a n d S U B S I D I A R I E S" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9581141320024423, + "doc_id": "89a6023a9aceedfa44aabe22e455e9257f6e3a73d01c04a670555adcc62ab1f3", + "edit_distance": 0.42098765432098767, + "f1_score": 0.9815303430079155, + "meteor": 0.9433153736739118, + "precision": 0.9815303430079155, + "pred_md": "OUR WORK\n\n54\n\nFINANCE\n\n## A Centralized, Globalized Treasury Function\n\n'Treasury was decentralized in the past, with various offices around the world dealing directly with their respective local banks. Four years ago, however, we decided it would be more consistent and efficient to centralize the function in Tokyo as a Global Treasury Center.\n\nDuring the NISSAN Value-Up period, my major responsibilities are global tax optimization, risk management and quality improvement of the balance sheet. Global tax optimization is a major challenge because our taxable income has been rising. We used to be reactive to tax policies, but we've realized that we need to be more proactive, since tax is one of the biggest cash-out items. Tax planning is of no small concern; cash paid for taxes was approximately ¥200 billion in fiscal 2004, which made our effective tax rate 33 percent. This amount is substantial compared to our capital and R&D expenditures of ¥480 billion and ¥400 billion, respectively, for the same period. We will always comply with tax law, of course, but the strategy is to set up a long-term plan to reduce the effective tax rate. For example, we can take advantage of an R&D tax incentive that was recently introduced in Japan. Another example would involve the variability in tax rates among countries. These tax differences are important in determining production locations.\n\nRisk management has also been centralized under our control, and is a developing facet of our organization. The financial risks we face are traditional ones such as interest rates and foreign exchange. However, we are also subject to a variety of physical risks. To put this in an automotive context, risk management at Nissan is not the brakes, but the airbags. We can't prevent all risks from affecting us, but we can reduce their impact and keep our business going.\n\nOur production facilities may be exposed to various forms of risk. For example, the production facilities in Japan are susceptible to earthquakes, so we are investing ¥20 billion to reinforce the pillars in all of them. Through the\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\nAKIRA SATO Vice President\n\nAKIRA SATO Vice President\n\nrisk-mapping process developed by our cross-functional team, we've identified nearly 860 different risks, prioritized them, and started to create solutions to mitigate them.\n\nOn financial risks, we take a 'no speculation' position in addressing foreign exchange fluctuations. We usually hedge for only short periods of one to two months. Foreign exchange is a major concern, since a shift of one yen against the dollar translates to an ¥11 billion gain or loss, or ¥2 billion for a change of one yen against the euro. We hold weekly videoconferences with Renault Finance S.A. in Switzerland to exchange ideas and forecast trends.\n\nWhen it comes to the state of the balance sheet, Nissan is in a good position with our current levels of debt. In 1998, for example, we had debt of ¥2.1 trillion; now we are in a cash-positive position of ¥205.8 billion under the new accounting standard. We concentrate more on the quality of our balance sheet. Factors affecting the balance sheet include our pension situation and possible impairment of assets. We have sold off a number of noncore assets over the past five years, significantly reducing the risk of capital loss from differences between market and book values.\n\nThe remaining issue is non-funded pensions. In June 2005, we contributed ¥228 billion to our pension fund. We did this to ensure the health of our fund and to reduce its future negative impact on operating profit. Our funding came from a bond issue, which got a favorable response in the market despite bad market conditions. Transparent communication with investors worked.\n\nNissan is currently rated a triple-B+ by the major international rating agencies. Our goal is to be a single A. To accomplish this, the first issue we need to address is profit sustainability, which is very important to the rating agencies. We've shown stable profitability growth over the past few years, but we must deliver sustainable profit growth for longer periods. The balance sheet is also important. Liquidity is one of the major factors for strong ratings. For that reason we decided to increase cash on hand from 3.5 percent of net sales to 8 percent, a figure", + "recall": 0.9815303430079155, + "true_md": "## A Centralized, Globalized Treasury Function\n\nAKIRA SATO Vice President \n\n“Treasury was decentralized in the past, with various offices around the world dealing directly with their respective local banks. Four years ago, however, we decided it would be more consistent and efficient to centralize the function in Tokyo as a Global Treasury Center.\n\nDuring the NISSAN Value-Up period, my major responsibilities are global tax optimization, risk management and quality improvement of the balance sheet. Global tax optimization is a major challenge because our taxable income has been rising. We used to be reactive to tax policies, but we’ve realized that we need to be more proactive, since tax is one of the biggest cash-out items. Tax planning is of no small concern; cash paid for taxes was approximately ¥200 billion in fiscal 2004, which made our effective tax rate 33 percent. This amount is substantial compared to our capital and R&D expenditures of ¥480 billion and ¥400 billion, respectively, for the same period. We will always comply with tax law, of course, but the strategy is to set up a long-term plan to reduce the effective tax rate. For example, we can take advantage of an R&D tax incentive that was recently introduced in Japan. Another example would involve the variability in tax rates among countries. These tax differences are important in determining production locations. \n\nRisk management has also been centralized under our control, and is a developing facet of our organization. The financial risks we face are traditional ones such as interest rates and foreign exchange. However, we are also subject to a variety of physical risks. To put this in an automotive context, risk management at Nissan is not the brakes, but the airbags. We can’t prevent all risks from affecting us, but we can reduce their impact and keep our business going. \n\nOur production facilities may be exposed to various forms of risk. For example, the production facilities in Japan are susceptible to earthquakes, so we are investing ¥20 billion to reinforce the pillars in all of them. Through the\n\nNissan is currently rated a triple-B+ by the major international rating agencies. Our goal is to be a single A. To accomplish this, the first issue we need to address is profit sustainability, which is very important to the rating agencies. We’ve shown stable profitability growth over the past few years, but we must deliver sustainable profit growth for longer periods. The balance sheet is also important. Liquidity is one of the major factors for strong ratings. For that reason we decided to increase cash on hand from 3.5 percent of net sales to 8 percent, a figure\n\nThe remaining issue is non-funded pensions. In June 2005, we contributed ¥228 billion to our pension fund. We did this to ensure the health of our fund and to reduce its future negative impact on operating profit. Our funding came from a bond issue, which got a favorable response in the market despite bad market conditions. Transparent communication with investors worked.\n\nWhen it comes to the state of the balance sheet, Nissan is in a good position with our current levels of debt. In 1998, for example, we had debt of ¥2.1 trillion; now we are in a cash-positive position of ¥205.8 billion under the new accounting standard. We concentrate more on the quality of our balance sheet. Factors affecting the balance sheet include our pension situation and possible impairment of assets. We have sold off a number of non- core assets over the past five years, significantly reducing the risk of capital loss from differences between market and book values. \n\nOn financial risks, we take a ‘no speculation’ position in addressing foreign exchange fluctuations. We usually hedge for only short periods of one to two months. Foreign exchange is a major concern, since a shift of one yen against the dollar translates to an ¥11 billion gain or loss, or ¥2 billion for a change of one yen against the euro. We hold weekly videoconferences with Renault Finance S.A. in Switzerland to exchange ideas and forecast trends.\n\nrisk-mapping process developed by our cross-functional team, we’ve identified nearly 860 different risks, prioritized them, and started to create solutions to mitigate them. \n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 54\n\nOUR WORK\n\n## FINANCE" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9425645209402094, + "doc_id": "3b10068aea580ec2c315622f726993468efb91b65e88440089d17a2258014bb8", + "edit_distance": 0.04197530864197531, + "f1_score": 0.9716088328075709, + "meteor": 0.964380871882013, + "precision": 0.9746835443037974, + "pred_md": "Reports of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm\n\n## To the Board of Directors and Stockholders of MGM MIRAGE\n\nWe have audited the accompanying consolidated balance sheets of MGM MIRAGE (a Delaware corporation) and subsidiaries (the 'Company') as of December 31, 2004 and 2003, and the related consolidated statements of income, stockholders' equity, and cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2004. These financial statements are the responsibility of the Company's management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on the financial statements based on our audits.\n\nWe conducted our audits in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement. An audit includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements. An audit also includes assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.\n\nIn our opinion, such consolidated financial statements present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of the Company as of December 31, 2004 and 2003, and the results of its operations and its cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2004, in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America.\n\nWe have also audited, in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States), the effectiveness of the Company's internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2004, based on the criteria established in Internal Control-Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission and our report dated March 10, 2005 expressed an unqualified opinion on management's assessment of the effectiveness of the Company's internal control over financial reporting and an unqualified opinion on the effectiveness of the Company's internal control over financial reporting.\n\nLas Vegas, Nevada March 10, 2005\n\n41", + "recall": 0.9685534591194969, + "true_md": "Reports of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm\n\n41\n\n## To the Board of Directors and Stockholders of MGM MIRAGE\n\nWe have audited the accompanying consolidated balance sheets of MGM MIRAGE (a Delaware corporation) and subsidiaries (the “Company”) as of December 31, 2004 and 2003, and the related consolidated statements of income, stockholders’ equity, and cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2004. These financial statements are the responsibility of the Company’s management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on the financial statements based on our audits.\n\nWe conducted our audits in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement. An audit includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements. An audit also includes assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.\n\nIn our opinion, such consolidated financial statements present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of the Company as of December 31, 2004 and 2003, and the results of its operations and its cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2004, in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America.\n\nWe have also audited, in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States), the effectiveness of the Company’s internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2004, based on the criteria established in Internal Control—Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission and our report dated March 10, 2005 expressed an unqualified opinion on management’s assessment of the effectiveness of the Company’s internal control over financial reporting and an unqualified opinion on the effectiveness of the Company’s internal control over financial reporting.\n\nLas Vegas, Nevada March 10, 2005" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9598976340346304, + "doc_id": "8ad7a47d65e0e0dbe31e731b864ca88aa9e94f12859e5fbb1e5ffb35c811e1ef", + "edit_distance": 0.054673721340388004, + "f1_score": 0.9823943661971832, + "meteor": 0.9775461529693654, + "precision": 0.9858657243816255, + "pred_md": "## Letter to Shareholders\n\nDear Fellow Shareholders:\n\nI am pleased to report that 2004 was a very good year for Republic Services, Inc. Our team met and exceeded the important financial and management goals we told you about here a year ago, and we plan to work just as hard and accomplish just as much in the coming year.\n\nRepublic is strengthening its competitive position among the leading waste services providers every day. As always, we are doing so by offering our customers cost-effective and safe waste collection, reliable recycling, and environmentally protective disposal options.\n\nI am proud of our team and what they accomplished. The results tell you just how well they did.\n\nRevenue in 2004 grew 7.6 percent to $2.7 billion, a record. The increases came largely from new municipal contracts and improved pricing. At the same time, we benefited from our presence in highgrowth markets, especially those in the rapidly expanding Sunbelt states.\n\nWe met last year's guidance. Net income per diluted share rose 15 percent to $1.53. Our revenue enhancement and cost reduction efforts produced results. We generated a record level of free cash flow - $388 million to be exact. Republic continues to generate strong and predictable levels of cash flow. As in the past year, we will concentrate on free cash flow and use it for acquisitions, reinvestment, repurchases of our stock and regular quarterly cash dividends.\n\nAs I thought about these achievements, I realized they result from the environment that we work to create for both our customers and our people. We care about our customers and the communities we serve. About our people. About the environment. And, of course, we care about you -- our shareholders. Every year we adopt a theme that captures our Company and our values. Our theme for 2005 is 'Republic Services…A Company that cares'.\n\nOur 13,400 dedicated people worked hard last year to create real value. We improved the way we deliver our services, increasing our efficiency in routing our collection trucks. We improved the way we construct disposal cells at numerous landfills, lowering costs. We worked with our vendors to control prices. And, we communicated to our customers the value of the services we offer. This year will be no different. We will continue to concentrate on these fundamentals.\n\nRepublic's future is bright. We are mindful of our mission. We know our business exists to ease the burden of managing society's waste. It's not a glamorous business, but it is an essential one, and we take this responsibility very seriously.\n\nAt the end of the year, Republic had 140 collection companies, 58 landfills, 96 transfer stations and 35 recycling facilities in 22 states. These resources give us many opportunities to listen to our customers, anticipate their needs and quickly respond to them. Each customer faces challenges unique to his or her business and community. Our goal is to remain flexible and to tailor our services to each customer.", + "recall": 0.9789473684210527, + "true_md": "I am pleased to report that 2004 was a very good year for Republic Services, Inc. Our team met and exceeded the important financial and management goals we told you about here a year ago, and we plan to work just as hard and accomplish just as much in the coming year.\n\nRepublic is strengthening its competitive position among the leading waste services providers every day. As always, we are doing so by offering our customers cost-effective and safe waste collection, reliable recycling, and environmentally protective disposal options.\n\nI am proud of our team and what they accomplished. The results tell you just how well they did.\n\nRevenue in 2004 grew 7.6 percent to $2.7 billion, a record. The increases came largely from new municipal contracts and improved pricing. At the same time, we benefited from our presence in high- growth markets, especially those in the rapidly expanding Sunbelt states.\n\nWe met last year ’s guidance. Net income per diluted share rose 15 percent to $1.53. Our revenue enhancement and cost reduction efforts produced results. We generated a record level of free cash flow - $388 million to be exact. Republic continues to generate strong and predictable levels of cash flow. As in the past year, we will concentrate on free cash flow and use it for acquisitions, reinvestment, repurchases of our stock and regular quarterly cash dividends.\n\nAs I thought about these achievements, I realized they result from the environment that we work to create for both our customers and our people. We care about our customers and the communities we serve. About our people. About the environment. And, of course, we care about you -- our shareholders. Every year we adopt a theme that captures our Company and our values. Our theme for 2005 is “Republic Services…A Company that cares”.\n\nOur 13,400 dedicated people worked hard last year to create real value. We improved the way we deliver our services, increasing our efficiency in routing our collection trucks. We improved the way we construct disposal cells at numerous landfills, lowering costs. We worked with our vendors to control prices. And, we communicated to our customers the value of the services we offer. This year will be no different. We will continue to concentrate on these fundamentals. \n\nRepublic’s future is bright. We are mindful of our mission. We know our business exists to ease the burden of managing society’s waste. It’s not a glamorous business, but it is an essential one, and we take this responsibility very seriously.\n\nAt the end of the year, Republic had 140 collection companies, 58 landfills, 96 transfer stations and 35 recycling facilities in 22 states. These resources give us many opportunities to listen to our customers, anticipate their needs and quickly respond to them. Each customer faces challenges unique to his or her business and community. Our goal is to remain flexible and to tailor our services to each customer.\n\nDear Fellow Shareholders:\n\n## Letter to Shareholders" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9322079578443541, + "doc_id": "90f6dab2cd75c16fdf49d9775e50e94c3aaff435073d32c75b32104ddb1e48e3", + "edit_distance": 0.6683333333333333, + "f1_score": 0.989816700610998, + "meteor": 0.7951073137847162, + "precision": 0.9918367346938776, + "pred_md": "PERFORMANCE\n\n12\n\n## FISCAL YEAR 2004 FINANCIAL REVIEW\n\nNISSAN REPORTED A RECORD YEAR IN TERMS OF REVENUES, OPERATING INCOME, NET INCOME, SALES AND PRODUCTION VOLUME IN FISCAL 2004. NISSAN ACHIEVED TWO OF ITS THREE COMMITMENTS FOR NISSAN 180: AN 8 PERCENT OPERATING PROFIT MARGIN AND ZERO NET AUTOMOTIVE DEBT. THE REMAINING COMMITMENT IS THE ACHIEVEMENT OF ONE MILLION ADDITIONAL UNIT SALES. AT MID-YEAR 2005, GLOBAL SALES AT 1,809,000 UNITS WERE SLIGHTLY AHEAD OF THE COMMITMENT TO REACH 3,597,000 UNITS BY THE END OF SEPTEMBER 2005.\n\n## Net Sales\n\nConsolidated net sales came to ¥8,576.3 billion, up 15.4 percent from last year. A higher volume and mix had a positive impact of ¥707.0 billion. Movements in foreign exchange rates produced a negative impact of ¥173.0 billion. Changes in the scope of consolidation, including Dongfeng Motor and Yulon Nissan Motor, raised revenues by ¥432.0 billion.\n\n## Operating Income\n\nConsolidated operating profit improved by 4.4 percent from last year to a record ¥861.2 billion. This resulted in an operating profit margin of 10.0 percent. Operating profit was affected by the following factors:\n\n- · The effect of foreign exchange rates produced a ¥78 billion negative impact for the full year. The depreciation of the U.S. dollar against the yen resulted in a negative impact of ¥74 billion, with an additional ¥13 billion from other currencies. The appreciation of the euro resulted in a positive impact of ¥9 billion.\n- · The change in the scope of consolidation produced a positive impact of ¥31 billion. This was primarily from the consolidation of Dongfeng Motor and Yulon Nissan Motor.\n- · The impact of the higher volume and mix contributed ¥284 billion. This was mainly driven by an increase in U.S. sales volume.\n- · Selling expenses increased by ¥114 billion, also mainly due to the increase of sales in the U.S.\n- · The improvement in purchasing costs amounted to ¥131 billion.\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\n- · Product enrichment and the cost of regulations had a negative impact of ¥92 billion.\n- · An additional ¥44 billion was allocated to R&D to reinforce product and technology development.\n- · Cost reductions from manufacturing efficiencies were offset by costs associated with expanding the Canton plant's capacity, which resulted in a ¥15 billion increase in manufacturing and logistics expenses.\n- · Warranty costs increased by ¥41 billion, partly due to greater volume.\n- · General, administrative and other expenses increased by ¥25.7 billion.\n\nBy region, operating profits in Japan came to ¥341.1 billion, a decrease of 3.2 percent compared to last year. This was mainly due to unfavorable exchange rate fluctuations and an increase in R&D expenses, which reached a record level.\n\nDue to higher volumes, profitability in the U.S. and Canada increased 7.9 percent from last year and totaled ¥379.7 billion.\n\nOperating profit in Europe was ¥56 billion, an increase of 13.8 percent compared to last year, owing to a better mix and higher contributions from Russia.\n\nIn General Overseas Markets, including Mexico, operating profits came to ¥84.8 billion, an increase of 28.5 percent compared to last year. This was primarily due to the consolidation of Dongfeng Motor and Yulon Nissan Motor.\n\nInter-regional eliminations were negative ¥0.4 billion.", + "recall": 0.9878048780487805, + "true_md": "## FISCAL YEAR 2004 FINANCIAL REVIEW\n\nNISSAN REPORTED A RECORD YEAR IN TERMS OF REVENUES, OPERATING INCOME, NET INCOME, SALES AND PRODUCTION VOLUME IN FISCAL 2004. NISSAN ACHIEVED TWO OF ITS THREE COMMITMENTS FOR NISSAN 180: AN 8 PERCENT OPERATING PROFIT MARGIN AND ZERO NET AUTOMOTIVE DEBT. THE REMAINING COMMITMENT IS THE ACHIEVEMENT OF ONE MILLION ADDITIONAL UNIT SALES. AT MID-YEAR 2005, GLOBAL SALES AT 1,809,000 UNITS WERE SLIGHTLY AHEAD OF THE COMMITMENT TO REACH 3,597,000 UNITS BY THE END OF SEPTEMBER 2005.\n\nPERFORMANCE\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 12\n\n## Net Sales\n\n## Operating Income\n\nIn General Overseas Markets, including Mexico, operating profits came to ¥84.8 billion, an increase of 28.5 percent compared to last year. This was primarily due to the consolidation of Dongfeng Motor and Yulon Nissan Motor.\n\nInter-regional eliminations were negative ¥0.4 billion.\n\nOperating profit in Europe was ¥56 billion, an increase of 13.8 percent compared to last year, owing to a better mix and higher contributions from Russia. \n\nDue to higher volumes, profitability in the U.S. and Canada increased 7.9 percent from last year and totaled ¥379.7 billion. \n\nBy region, operating profits in Japan came to ¥341.1 billion, a decrease of 3.2 percent compared to last year. This was mainly due to unfavorable exchange rate fluctuations and an increase in R&D expenses, which reached a record level. \n\nConsolidated operating profit improved by 4.4 percent from last year to a record ¥861.2 billion. This resulted in an operating profit margin of 10.0 percent. Operating profit was affected by the following factors:\n\nConsolidated net sales came to ¥8,576.3 billion, up 15.4 percent from last year. A higher volume and mix had a positive impact of ¥707.0 billion. Movements in foreign exchange rates produced a negative impact of ¥173.0 billion. Changes in the scope of consolidation, including Dongfeng Motor and Yulon Nissan Motor, raised revenues by ¥432.0 billion.\n\n- • The effect of foreign exchange rates produced a ¥78 billion negative impact for the full year. The depreciation of the U.S. dollar against the yen resulted in a negative impact of ¥74 billion, with an additional ¥13 billion from other currencies. The appreciation of the euro resulted in a positive impact of ¥9 billion.\n\n- • The change in the scope of consolidation produced a positive impact of ¥31 billion. This was primarily from the consolidation of Dongfeng Motor and Yulon Nissan Motor.\n\n- • The impact of the higher volume and mix contributed ¥284 billion. This was mainly driven by an increase in U.S. sales volume.\n\n- • Selling expenses increased by ¥114 billion, also mainly due to the increase of sales in the U.S.\n\n- • The improvement in purchasing costs amounted to ¥131 billion.\n\n- • General, administrative and other expenses increased by ¥25.7 billion.\n\n- • Warranty costs increased by ¥41 billion, partly due to greater volume.\n\n- • Cost reductions from manufacturing efficiencies were offset by costs associated with expanding the Canton plant’s capacity, which resulted in a ¥15 billion increase in manufacturing and logistics expenses.\n\n- • An additional ¥44 billion was allocated to R&D to reinforce product and technology development.\n\n- • Product enrichment and the cost of regulations had a negative impact of ¥92 billion." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "e805712ddd8db27ee83e0a1ec5842354eb7ea013ceb28565f0688bc77fa200ca", + "edit_distance": 0.6683333333333333, + "f1_score": 0.989816700610998, + "meteor": 0.7951073137847162, + "precision": 0.9918367346938776, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.9878048780487805, + "true_md": "" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "bda7df2e81b2a44d25e66a90a152f99e0ff1b9b424a73c0dc9201fc79281347d", + "edit_distance": 0.25, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9498207885304659, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Financial Information", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "# Financial Information" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9302011210383228, + "doc_id": "fe6778071b8358966b9e51e51e53c7b1c0e4b7e3bb151a1664ffb7b749d9962f", + "edit_distance": 0.06835443037974684, + "f1_score": 0.9738562091503268, + "meteor": 0.9671144164599729, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## 15. Interest-Bearing Liabilities (continued)\n\n## (c) Medium-term notes\n\nThe Santos Group has a A$500.0 million (2003: A$500.0 million) Australian medium-term note program. At 31 December 2004, A$20.0 million (2003: A$20.0 million) of medium-term notes have been issued at fixed rate and swapped into floating rates of interest of 6.25% (2003: 6.20%), maturing in 2008.\n\n## (d) Long-term notes\n\nUS$170.0 million of long-term notes were issued to institutional investors in 1993 at an annual effective interest rate of 6.95% and are repayable in five annual US dollar instalments which commenced in December 2001. As at 31 December 2004, US$34.0 million (A$43.7 million) remains outstanding (2003: US$68.0 million equivalent to A$90.8 million). A further US$290.0 million (A$372.5 million) (2003: US$290.0 million equivalent to A$387.3 million) of long-term notes were issued to institutional investors in 2000 at an annual effective interest rate of 8.37% and are repayable at varying maturity dates between 2007 and 2015. In addition US$300.0 million (A$385.3 million) (2003: US$300.0 million equivalent to A$400.6 million) of long-term notes were issued to institutional investors in 2002 at an annual effective interest rate of 6.11% and are repayable at varying maturity dates between 2009 and 2022.\n\nThe Santos Group has entered into interest rate swap contracts to manage the exposure to interest rates. This has resulted in a weighted average interest rate on interest-bearing liabilities of 5.50% as at 31 December 2004 (2003: 4.72%). All facilities are unsecured and arranged through a controlled entity, Santos Finance Ltd, and are guaranteed by Santos Ltd.\n\nThe deferred foreign currency fluctuations on US dollar borrowings designated as hedges reflect the deferred gains arising from the movement of the Australian dollar against the US dollar from the inception of the drawdown of the borrowings to balance date.\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\n61", + "recall": 0.9490445859872612, + "true_md": "## 15. Interest-Bearing Liabilities (continued)\n\n## (c) Medium-term notes\n\n## (d) Long-term notes\n\nThe Santos Group has a A$500.0 million (2003: A$500.0 million) Australi an medium-term note program. At 31 December 2004, A$20.0 million (2003: A$20.0 million) of medium-term notes have been issued at fixed r ate and swapped into floating rates of interest of 6.25% (2003: 6.20%), maturing in 2008.\n\nUS$170.0 million of long-term notes were issued to institutional investors in 1993 at an annual effective interest rate of 6.95% and are repayable in five annual US dollar instalments which commenced in December 2001. As at 31 December 2004, US$34.0 million (A$43.7 million) remains outstanding (2003: US$68.0 million equivalent to A$90.8 milli on). A further US$290.0 million (A$372.5 million) (2003: US$290.0 million equivalent to A$387.3 million) of long-term notes were issued to instituti onal investors in 2000 at an annual effective interest rate of 8.37% and are repayable at varying maturity dates between 2007 an 2015. In addition US$300.0 million (A$385.3 million) (2003: US$300.0 million equivalent to A$400.6 million) of long-term notes were issued to instituti onal investors in 2002 at an annual effective interest rate of 6.11% and are repayable at varying maturity dates between 2009 and 2022.\n\nThe Santos Group has entered into interest rate swap contracts to manage th e exposure to interest rates. This has resulted in a weighted average interest rate on interest-bearing liabilities of 5.50% as at 31 December 2004 (2003: 4.72%). All facilities are unsecured and arranged through a controlled entity, Santos Finance Ltd, and are guaranteed by Santos Ltd.\n\nThe deferred foreign currency fluctuations on US dollar borrowings designated as hedges reflect the deferred gains arising from the movement of the Australian dollar against the US dollar from the inception of the drawdown of the borrowings to balance date.\n\nAnnual Report 2004 61" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.844643226409957, + "doc_id": "2b3c11faa7e6db93e04daa091bfd28174b6b3c9c7dd872cca278e389916ad19e", + "edit_distance": 0.3641304347826087, + "f1_score": 0.9544235924932977, + "meteor": 0.8489150531416622, + "precision": 0.967391304347826, + "pred_md": "RESIDENTIAL In lofts, brownstones and high-rise buildings, residential options abound to populate the new city and energize the surrounding areas.\n\nENTERTAINMENT From street performers to Broadway shows, our entertainment will evoke the best of New York or London.\n\ne have been working for some time on conceiving the best use of the 66 acres between Monte Carlo and Bellagio, the most significant piece of undeveloped land remaining on the Las Vegas Strip. We certainly could have come up with a spectacular casino-hotel. But, the truth is, Las Vegas is ready for so much more. W\n\nAs the city eclipses two million residents on its way to passing three million by the end of the decade, and with land prices on the Strip soaring, it has become clear that there is a much better and higher use for this location. As Las Vegas marks its Centennial, Project CityCenter stands as a defining moment for development in this fabled city.\n\nProject CityCenter represents a new era of the urban complex, one that encompasses tourism, entertainment, gaming, retail and residential elements. Only MGM MIRAGE has the momentum - financially, intellectually and professionally - to effectively develop such a project.\n\nThe signature building within Project CityCenter is the 4,000-room hotel-casino. The internationally acclaimed architect Cesar Pelli has been commissioned to design this iconic structure. Pelli's initial concept drawing defines a new generation of urban landscape for the Las Vegas Strip, one which includes gaming at its economic center but not as an emotional centerpiece.\n\nProject CityCenter will provide the momentum for the next era of amazing growth for your company and Las Vegas.\n\nTHE SITE Located in the heart of the Las Vegas Strip, Project CityCenter will dwarf every development that preceded it. Its 66 acres will include a 4,000-room hotel-casino and three boutique hotels.\n\nTHE SITE Located in the heart of the Las Vegas Strip, Project CityCenter will dwarf every development that preceded it. Its 66 acres will include a 4,000-room hotel-casino and three boutique hotels.", + "recall": 0.9417989417989417, + "true_md": "ENTERTAINMENT From street performers to Broadway shows, our entertainment will evoke the best of New York or London.\n\nRESIDENTIAL In lofts, brown- stones and high-rise buildings, residential options abound to populate the new city and ener- gize the surrounding areas.\n\nTHE SITE Located in the heart of the Las Vegas Strip, Project CityCenter will dwarf every development that preceded it. Its 66 acres will include a 4,000-room hotel-casino and three boutique hotels. \n\ne have been working for some time on con- ceiving the best use of the 66 acres between Monte Carlo and Bellagio, the most signifi- cant piece of undeveloped land remaining on the Las Vegas Strip. We certainly could have come up with a spectacular casino-hotel. But, the truth is, Las Vegas is ready for so much more. W\n\nAs the city eclipses two million residents on its way to passing three million by the end of the decade, and with land prices on the Strip soaring, it has become clear that there is a much better and higher use for this location. As Las Vegas marks its Centennial, Project CityCenter stands as a defining moment for development in this fabled city. \n\nProject CityCenter represents a new era of the urban complex, one that encompasses tourism, entertainment, gaming, retail and residential elements. Only MGM MIRAGE has the momentum – financially, intellectually and professionally – to effectively develop such a project.\n\nThe signature building within Project CityCenter is the 4,000-room hotel-casino. The internationally acclaimed architect Cesar Pelli has been commissioned to design this iconic structure. Pelli’s initial concept drawing defines a new generation of urban landscape for the Las Vegas Strip, one which includes gaming at its economic center but not as an emotional centerpiece. \n\nProject CityCenter will provide the momentum for the next era of amazing growth for your company and Las Vegas." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9139337954449483, + "doc_id": "20f1b1efb83e4ef19cf57f60410525956e836bc8ef02927afe2fdbd28c244dba", + "edit_distance": 0.3058823529411765, + "f1_score": 0.9559543230016312, + "meteor": 0.9152156656599879, + "precision": 0.973421926910299, + "pred_md": "process or completed at the end of a quarter or fiscal year. Promotional contract accruals are based on a review of the unpaid outstanding contracts on which performance has taken place. Voluntary performance accruals are based on the historical spend rates by product lines. Estimates used to determine the revenue reduction include the level of customer performance and the historical spend rate versus contracted rates.\n\nAdvertising Expenses: Advertising costs are expensed when incurred. Advertising expenses include all media advertising but exclude the costs associated with samples and market research. Advertising costs for fiscal 2004, 2003, and 2002 were $78.2 million, $83.5 million, and $89.4 million, respectively.\n\nShipping and Handling Costs: Shipping and handling costs are recorded as selling and delivery expenses. Shipping and handling costs for fiscal 2004, 2003, and 2002 were $317.0 million, $284.2 million, and $267.1 million, respectively.\n\nResearch and Development Expenses: Research and development costs are expensed as incurred and are included in administrative and general expenses. Research and development expenses incurred for fiscal 2004, 2003, and 2002 were $15.9 million, $13.2 million, and $12.1 million, respectively.\n\nIncome Taxes: The company records income taxes in accordance with the liability method of accounting. Deferred taxes are recognized for the estimated taxes ultimately payable or recoverable based on enacted tax law. Changes in enacted tax rates are reflected in the tax provision as they occur.\n\nEmployee Stock Options: In the fourth quarter of fiscal 2003, the company adopted the fair value method of accounting for employee stock options in accordance with SFAS No. 123, 'Accounting for Stock-Based Compensation' and SFAS No. 148, 'Accounting for Stock-Based Compensation - Transition and Disclosure.' The company has elected to use the prospective method to recognize stock-based compensation expense. Accordingly, the company will continue to use the intrinsic value method prescribed by Accounting Principles Board (APB) Opinion No. 25, 'Accounting for Stock Issued to Employees' and related interpretations in accounting for employee stock options granted prior to fiscal 2003. Under the intrinsic value method, no compensation expense was recognized in years prior to fiscal 2003 because options were granted at current market prices.\n\nBecause employee stock options generally vest over four years and the company has elected to use the prospective method in transitioning to fair value accounting, reported stock options expense will continue to increase through fiscal 2006. Additional information on employee stock options is presented in Note I.\n\nPro forma amounts if the company had used the fair value method in accounting for all employee stock options are as follows:\n\nEarnings Per Share: Basic earnings per share are computed using the weighted-average common shares outstanding. Diluted earnings per share are computed using the weighted-average common shares outstanding after adjusting for potential common shares from stock options. For all years presented, the reported net earnings were used when computing basic and diluted earnings per share. A reconciliation of the shares used in the computation is as follows:\n\n## Accounting Changes and Recent Accounting Pronouncements:\n\nIn December 2003, the Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB) issued Statement of Financial Accounting Standard (SFAS) No. 132 (Revised 2003), 'Employers' Disclosures about Pensions and Other Postretirement Benefits,' which improves financial statement disclosures for defined benefit plans. This Statement incorporates all of the original disclosure requirements from SFAS 132 and adds additional annual disclosures that will provide more information about pension plan assets, obligations, cash flows, and net benefit cost. It does not change the measurement of recognition of those plans required by SFAS 87, 'Employers' Accounting for Pensions,' SFAS 88, 'Employers' Accounting for Settlements and Curtailments of Defined Benefit Pension Plans and for Termination Benefits,' and SFAS 106, 'Employers' Accounting for Postretirement Benefits Other than Pensions.' The disclosure rules apply to annual financial statements for fiscal years ending after December 15, 2003, and for interim periods beginning after December 15, 2003. The year end disclosure provisions of the Statement are presented in Note F.\n\n2004 Annual Report\n\n37", + "recall": 0.9391025641025641, + "true_md": "Pro forma amounts if the company had used the fair value method in accounting for all employee stock options are as follows:\n\nprocess or completed at the end of a quarter or fiscal year. Promotional contract accruals are based on a review of the unpaid outstanding contracts on which performance has taken place. Voluntary performance accruals are based on the historical spend rates by product lines. Estimates used to determine the revenue reduction include the level of customer performance and the historical spend rate versus contracted rates.\n\nAdvertising Expenses: Advertising costs are expensed when incurred. Advertising expenses include all media advertising but exclude the costs associated with samples and market research. Advertising costs for fiscal 2004, 2003, and 2002 were $78.2 mil- lion, $83.5 million, and $89.4 million, respectively.\n\nShipping and Handling Costs: Shipping and handling costs are recorded as selling and delivery expenses. Shipping and handling costs for fiscal 2004, 2003, and 2002 were $317.0 million, $284.2 million, and $267.1 million, respectively.\n\nResearch and Development Expenses: Research and devel- opment costs are expensed as incurred and are included in administrative and general expenses. Research and development expenses incurred for fiscal 2004, 2003, and 2002 were $15.9 million, $13.2 million, and $12.1 million, respectively. \n\nEarnings Per Share: Basic earnings per share are computed using the weighted-average common shares outstanding. Diluted earnings per share are computed using the weighted-average common shares outstanding after adjusting for potential common shares from stock options. For all years presented, the reported net earnings were used when computing basic and diluted earnings per share. A reconciliation of the shares used in the computation is as follows:\n\nIncome Taxes: The company records income taxes in accordance with the liability method of accounting. Deferred taxes are recog- nized for the estimated taxes ultimately payable or recoverable based on enacted tax law. Changes in enacted tax rates are reflected in the tax provision as they occur.\n\nEmployee Stock Options: In the fourth quarter of fiscal 2003, the company adopted the fair value method of accounting for employee stock options in accordance with SFAS No. 123, “Accounting for Stock-Based Compensation” and SFAS No. 148, “Accounting for Stock-Based Compensation – Transition and Disclosure.” The company has elected to use the prospective method to recognize stock-based compensation expense. Accordingly, the company will continue to use the intrinsic value method prescribed by Accounting Principles Board (APB) Opinion No. 25, “Accounting for Stock Issued to Employees” and related interpretations in accounting for employee stock options granted prior to fiscal 2003. Under the intrinsic value method, no com- pensation expense was recognized in years prior to fiscal 2003 because options were granted at current market prices. \n\nBecause employee stock options generally vest over four years and the company has elected to use the prospective method in transitioning to fair value accounting, reported stock options expense will continue to increase through fiscal 2006. Additional information on employee stock options is presented in Note I.\n\nAccounting Changes and Recent Accounting Pronouncements: In December 2003, the Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB) issued Statement of Financial Accounting Standard (SFAS) No. 132 (Revised 2003), “Employers’ Disclosures about Pensions and Other Postretirement Benefits,” which improves financial statement disclosures for defined benefit plans. This Statement incorporates all of the original disclosure requirements from SFAS 132 and adds additional annual disclosures that will provide more information about pension plan assets, obligations, cash flows, and net benefit cost. It does not change the meas- urement of recognition of those plans required by SFAS 87, “Employers’ Accounting for Pensions,” SFAS 88, “Employers’ Accounting for Settlements and Curtailments of Defined Benefit Pension Plans and for Termination Benefits,” and SFAS 106, “Employers’ Accounting for Postretirement Benefits Other than Pensions.” The disclosure rules apply to annual financial state- ments for fiscal years ending after December 15, 2003, and for interim periods beginning after December 15, 2003. The year end disclosure provisions of the Statement are presented in Note F.\n\n2004 Annual Report 37" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.01988980202766471, + "doc_id": "c2b513a5611d3138726e679c6e2e9e5383e4d3d82a2c588bbe3d5802797e2765", + "edit_distance": 0.7950065703022339, + "f1_score": 0.275, + "meteor": 0.15333984680970617, + "precision": 0.18487394957983194, + "pred_md": "£{\n\n-glyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman> glyph<c=31,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman> glyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>‡-glyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>\n\n## glyph<c=13,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium> ˜Ì iÀ«ÀˆÃiÊglyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium>œ“«Ṏ˜}Ê >˜'Ê-̜À>}iÊ-ÞÃÌi“Ã\n\nglyph<c=28,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman> iÞÊ ÌœÊ ->˜“ˆ˜>‡-glyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>½ ÃÊ œ˜}‡ÌiÀ“Ê«>À ̘iÀň«ÃÊ܈̅ʏi>'ˆ˜}Êglyph<c=13,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>˜ÌiÀ«ÀˆÃiÊglyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>œ“«Ṏ˜}Ê>˜'Ê-̜À>}iÊ\"glyph<c=13,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=31,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>ÃʈÃʜÕÀÊVœÃ̇ivviV̈ÛiÊ >««Àœ>V…Ê̜ʫÀœÛˆ'ˆ˜}Ê>ÊVœ“«Ài…i˜ÃˆÛiÊÃiÌʜvÊi˜'‡Ìœ‡i˜'ʓ>˜Õv>VÌÕÀˆ˜}Ê܏Ṏœ˜ÃÊ̅>ÌÊ>ÀiÊÀiˆ>Li]Êvi݈LiÊ>˜'ÊÃV>>Li°Ê\n\nglyph<c=31,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman> œ Ài œÛiÀ ]ʜÕÀʏi>'iÀň«Ê>˜'ÊVi>ÀÊۈȜ˜ÊˆÃÊÃÕ««œÀÌi'ÊLÞʜÕÀÊÃiÀÛiÀÊ>˜'ÊÃ̜À>}iÊ«Àœ'ÕVÌÊ'iÛiœ«“i˜ÌÊV>«>LˆˆÌˆiÃ]Ê>˜'ʜÕÀÊ Ê LՈ'‡Ìœ‡œÀ'iÀÊ­glyph<c=9,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>/\"®Ê>˜'ÊVœ˜vˆ}ÕÀi‡Ìœ‡œÀ'iÀÊ­glyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>/\"®ÊiÝ«iÀ̈Ãi°Ê->˜“ˆ˜>‡-glyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>ÊiÝ«iVÌÃÊ̜Êi˜…>˜ViʜÕÀÊ«œÃˆÌˆœ˜Êˆ˜Ê̅ˆÃÊÃiV̜ÀÊLÞÊ 'iÛiœ«ˆ˜}Ê>Ê}ÀœÜˆ˜}ÊV>Ì>œ}ʜvÊ܏Ṏœ˜ÃÊ̅>Ìʈ˜VÕ'iÊ̅iʘiÜÊÃV>>LiÊV…ˆ«Êºglyph<c=21,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>œÀÕÃ]»Ê>˜Êˆ˜ÌiÀVœ˜˜iVÌÊV…ˆ«ÃiÌÊ«iÀ“ˆÌ̈˜}ÊÃiÀÛiÀÊ Ûi˜'œÀÃÊ̜Ê'iÈ}˜ÊÕ«Ê̜ÊÎӇÜ>ÞÊ\"«ÌiÀœ˜ Ò ÊÃÞÃÌi“ðÊ", + "recall": 0.5365853658536586, + "true_md": "## ˜ Ì i À « À ˆ à i Ê œ “ « Õ Ì ˆ ˜ } Ê > ˜ ` Ê - Ì œ À > } i Ê - Þ Ã Ì i “ Ã\n\ni Þ Ê Ì œ Ê - > ˜ “ ˆ ˜ > ‡ - ½ Ã Ê  œ ˜ } ‡ Ì i À “ Ê « > À Ì ˜ i À à … ˆ « Ã Ê Ü ˆ Ì … Ê  i > ` ˆ ˜ } Ê ˜ Ì i À « À ˆ à i Ê œ “ « Õ Ì ˆ ˜ } Ê > ˜ ` Ê - Ì œ À > } i Ê \" Ã Ê ˆ Ã Ê œ Õ À Ê V œ Ã Ì ‡ i v v i V Ì ˆ Û i Ê > « « À œ > V … Ê Ì œ Ê « À œ Û ˆ ` ˆ ˜ } Ê > Ê V œ “ « À i … i ˜ à ˆ Û i Ê Ã i Ì Ê œ v Ê i ˜ ` ‡ Ì œ ‡ i ˜ ` Ê “ > ˜ Õ v > V Ì Õ À ˆ ˜ } Ê Ã œ  Õ Ì ˆ œ ˜ Ã Ê Ì … > Ì Ê > À i Ê À i  ˆ > L  i ] Ê v  i Ý ˆ L  i Ê > ˜ ` Ê Ã V >  > L  i ° Ê \n\nœ À i œ Û i À ] Ê œ Õ À Ê  i > ` i À à … ˆ « Ê > ˜ ` Ê V  i > À Ê Û ˆ à ˆ œ ˜ Ê ˆ Ã Ê Ã Õ « « œ À Ì i ` Ê L Þ Ê œ Õ À Ê Ã i À Û i À Ê > ˜ ` Ê Ã Ì œ À > } i Ê « À œ ` Õ V Ì Ê ` i Û i  œ « “ i ˜ Ì Ê V > « > L ˆ  ˆ Ì ˆ i à ] Ê > ˜ ` Ê œ Õ À Ê Ê L Õ ˆ  ` ‡ Ì œ ‡ œ À ` i À Ê ­ / \" ® Ê > ˜ ` Ê V œ ˜ v ˆ } Õ À i ‡ Ì œ ‡ œ À ` i À Ê ­ / \" ® Ê i Ý « i À Ì ˆ à i ° Ê - > ˜ “ ˆ ˜ > ‡ - Ê i Ý « i V Ì Ã Ê Ì œ Ê i ˜ … > ˜ V i Ê œ Õ À Ê « œ à ˆ Ì ˆ œ ˜ Ê ˆ ˜ Ê Ì … ˆ Ã Ê Ã i V Ì œ À Ê L Þ Ê ` i Û i  œ « ˆ ˜ } Ê > Ê } À œ Ü ˆ ˜ } Ê V > Ì >  œ } Ê œ v Ê Ã œ  Õ Ì ˆ œ ˜ Ã Ê Ì … > Ì Ê ˆ ˜ V  Õ ` i Ê Ì … i Ê ˜ i Ü Ê Ã V >  > L  i Ê V … ˆ « Ê º œ À Õ Ã ] » Ê > ˜ Ê ˆ ˜ Ì i À V œ ˜ ˜ i V Ì Ê V … ˆ « à i Ì Ê « i À “ ˆ Ì Ì ˆ ˜ } Ê Ã i À Û i À Ê Û i ˜ ` œ À Ã Ê Ì œ Ê ` i à ˆ } ˜ Ê Õ « Ê Ì œ Ê Î Ó ‡ Ü > Þ Ê \" « Ì i À œ ˜ Ò Ê Ã Þ Ã Ì i “ à ° Ê \n\n£ { - ‡ -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8279323404130432, + "doc_id": "f7a6a9baac6e7074c192565f35f4d198c67f499e53f85644b9eda945ddf97efd", + "edit_distance": 0.3111111111111111, + "f1_score": 0.9166666666666667, + "meteor": 0.8419596330807169, + "precision": 0.9631336405529954, + "pred_md": "## INDEPENDENT AUDIT REPORT TO MEMBERS OF SANTOS LTD\n\n## Scope\n\nThe financial report and directors' responsibility\n\nThe financial report comprises the statement of financial performance, statement of financial position, statement of cash flows, accompanying notes to the financial statements, and the directors' declaration for both Santos Ltd (the 'Company') and Santos Group (the 'Consolidated Entity'), for the year ended 31 December 2004. The Consolidated Entity comprises both the Company and the entities it controlled during that year.\n\nThe Directors of the Company are responsible for the preparation and true and fair presentation of the financial report in accordance with the Corporations Act 2001. This includes responsibility for the maintenance of adequate accounting records and internal controls that are designed to prevent and detect fraud and error, and for the accounting policies and accounting estimates inherent in the financial report.\n\n## Audit approach\n\nWe conducted an independent audit in order to express an opinion to the members of the Company. Our audit was conducted in accordance with Australian Auditing Standards in order to provide reasonable assurance as to whether the financial report is free of material misstatement. The nature of an audit is influenced by factors such as the use of professional judgement, selective testing, the inherent limitations of internal control, and the availability of persuasive rather than conclusive evidence. Therefore, an audit cannot guarantee that all material misstatements have been detected.\n\nWe performed procedures to assess whether in all material respects the financial report presents fairly, in accordance with the Corporations Act 2001, Australian Accounting Standards and other mandatory financial reporting requirements in Australia, a view which is consistent with our understanding of the Company's and the Consolidated Entity's financial position, and of their performance as represented by the results of their operations and cash flows.\n\nWe formed our audit opinion on the basis of these procedures, which included:\n\n- · examining, on a test basis, information to provide evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial report, and\n- · assessing the appropriateness of the accounting policies and disclosures used and the reasonableness of significant accounting estimates made by the Directors.\n\nWhile we considered the effectiveness of management's internal controls over financial reporting when determining the nature and extent of our procedures, our audit was not designed to provide assurance on internal controls.\n\n## Independence\n\nIn conducting our audit, we followed applicable independence requirements of Australian professional ethical pronouncements and the Corporations Act 2001.\n\n## Audit opinion\n\nIn our opinion, the financial report of Santos Ltd is in accordance with:\n\n- (a) the Corporations Act 2001, including:\n- (i) giving a true and fair view of the Company's and the Consolidated Entity's financial position as at 31 December 2004 and of their performance for the financial year ended on that date; and\n- (ii) complying with Accounting Standards in Australia and the Corporations Regulations 2001; and\n- (b) other mandatory professional reporting requirements in Australia.\n\nKPMG\n\nPeter A Jovic Partner Adelaide\n\n23 February 2005\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\n89", + "recall": 0.8744769874476988, + "true_md": "## Scope\n\n## Audit opinion\n\n## Independence\n\nThe financial report and directors’ responsibility\n\nThe financial report comprises the statement of financial performance, statem ent of financial position, statement of cash flows, accompanying notes to the financial statements, and the directors’ declaration for both Santos Ltd (the “Company”) and Santos Group (the “Consolidated Entity”), for the year ended 31 December 2004. The Consolidated Entity comprises both th Company and the entities it controlled during that year.\n\nThe Directors of the Company are responsible for the preparation and true an d fair presentation of the financial report in accordance with the Corporations Act 2001. This includes responsibility for the maintenance of ad equate accounting records and internal controls that are designed to prevent and detect fraud and error, and for the accounting policies and accoun ting estimates inherent in the financial report.\n\nWe conducted an independent audit in order to express an opinion to the m embers of the Company. Our audit was conducted in accordance with Australian Auditing Standards in order to provide reasonable assurance as to whether the financial report is free of material misstatement. The nature of an audit is influenced by factors such as the use of professional judgement, selective testing, the inherent limitations of internal control, and the availability of persuasive rather than conclusive evidence. Therefore, an au dit cannot guarantee that all material misstatements have been detected.\n\nWe performed procedures to assess whether in all material respects the financi al report presents fairly, in accordance with the Corporations Act 2001, Australian Accounting Standards and other mandatory financial reporting r equirements in Australia, a view which is consistent with our understanding of the Company’s and the Consolidated Entity’s financial position, and of th eir performance as represented by the results of their operations and cash flows.\n\nWe formed our audit opinion on the basis of these procedures, which included:\n\nWhile we considered the effectiveness of management’s internal controls over financial reporting when determining the nature and extent of our procedures, our audit was not designed to provide assurance on internal contr ols.\n\nIn conducting our audit, we followed applicable independence requirements of Australian professional ethical pronouncements and the Corporations Act 2001.\n\nIn our opinion, the financial report of Santos Ltd is in accordance with:\n\n(a) the Corporations Act 2001, including:\n\n(b) other mandatory professional reporting requirements in Australia.\n\n- (i) giving a true and fair view of the Company’s and the Consolidated En tity’s financial position as at 31 December 2004 and of their performance for the financial year ended on that date; and\n\n- (ii) complying with Accounting Standards in Australia and the Corporation s Regulations 2001; and\n\n- • examining, on a test basis, information to provide evidence supporting th e amounts and disclosures in the financial report, and\n\n- • assessing the appropriateness of the accounting policies and disclosures used and the reasonableness of significant accounting estimates made by the Directors.\n\n## Audit approach\n\nKPMG\n\nPeter A Jovic Partner Adelaide\n\n23 February 2005\n\nAnnual Report 2004 89\n\nINDEPENDENT AUDIT REPORT T O MEMBERS OF SANTOS LTD" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7517679369857309, + "doc_id": "f551757f6da1e76e05d66fdf4f84043006a0607aa7cdca2cf2b279a849b87862", + "edit_distance": 0.25, + "f1_score": 0.908382066276803, + "meteor": 0.923461118064804, + "precision": 0.8893129770992366, + "pred_md": "## P R O P E R T Y , P L A N T A N D E Q U I P M E N T\n\nProperty, plant and equipment is stated at cost and depreciated using the straight-line method over the estimated useful lives of the related assets. Expenditures for repairs and maintenance are charged to expense as incurred. The following table represents a summary of property, plant and equipment at original cost (in thousands):\n\nDepreciation expense of $4,442,000, $4,080,000 and $3,743,000 was recorded for the years ended December 31, 2003, 2002 and 2001, respectively.\n\n## PAT E N T S\n\nCost for patents acquired is determined at acquisition date. Patents are amortized over the remaining lives of the individual patents, which are four to 14 years. Patents are reviewed for impairment whenever events or changes in circumstances indicate that the carrying amount of the asset may not be recoverable.\n\n## G O O D W I L L\n\nGoodwill represents the excess of cost over the fair value of tangible and identifiable intangible net assets acquired. Through December 31, 2001, goodwill was being amortized over 25 years. Beginning January 1, 2002, accounting for goodwill was changed to conform to Statement of Financial Accounting Standards ('SFAS') No. 142, 'Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets' as outlined in Note 2. Annual impairment testing for goodwill is done in accordance with SFAS No. 142 using a fair value-based test. Goodwill is also reviewed periodically for impairment whenever events or changes in circumstances indicate a change in value may have occurred.\n\n## R E V E N U E S\n\nThe Company recognizes revenue when its products are shipped to its customers and distributors, provided an arrangement exists, the fee is fixed and determinable and collectibility is reasonably assured. Net sales represent gross sales invoiced to customers, less certain related charges, including discounts, returns and other allowances. Returns, discounts and other allowances have been insignificant historically.\n\n## S H I P P I N G A N D H A N D L I N G P O L I C Y\n\nShipping and handling fees charged to customers are reported as revenue and all shipping and handling costs incurred related to products sold are reported as cost of goods sold.\n\n## R E S E A R C H A N D D E V E L O P M E N T C O S T S\n\nResearch and development costs relating to the development of new products and improvements of existing products are expensed as incurred.\n\n## S T O C K - B A S E D C O M P E N S A T I O N\n\nAt December 31, 2003, the Company had three stock-based employee compensation plans, which are described more fully in Note 8. The Company accounts for those plans under the recognition and measurement principles of Accounting Principles Board ('APB') Opinion No. 25, 'Accounting for Stock Issued to Employees,' and related interpretations. No stock-based employee compensation cost is reflected in net income, as all options granted under those plans had an exercise price equal to the market value of the underlying common stock on the date of grant. The following table illustrates the effect on net income and income per share if the Company had applied the fair value recognition provisions of SFAS No. 123, 'Accounting for Stock-Based Compensation,' to stock-based employee compensation:\n\n13", + "recall": 0.9282868525896414, + "true_md": "## PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT\n\nProperty, plant and equipment is stated at cost and depreciated using the straight-line method over the estimated useful lives of the related assets. Expenditures for repairs and maintenance are charged to expense as incurred. The following table represents a summary of property, plant and equipment at original cost (in thousands):\n\nDepreciation expense of $4,442,000, $4,080,000 and $3,743,000 was recorded for the years ended December 31, 2003, 2002 and 2001, respectively.\n\nCost for patents acquired is determined at acquisition date. Patents are amortized over the remaining lives of the individual patents, which are four to 14 years. Patents are reviewed for impairment whenever events or changes in circumstances indicate that the carrying amount of the asset may not be recoverable.\n\nGoodwill represents the excess of cost over the fair value of tangible and identifiable intangible net assets acquired. Through December 31, 2001, goodwill was being amortized over 25 years. Beginning January 1, 2002, accounting for goodwill was changed to conform to Statement of Financial Accounting Standards (“SFAS”) No. 142, “Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets” as outlined in Note 2. Annual impairment testing for goodwill is done in accordance with SFAS No. 142 using a fair value-based test. Goodwill is also reviewed periodically for impairment whenever events or changes in circumstances indicate a change in value may have occurred.\n\n## PATENTS\n\n## GOODWILL\n\n## REVENUES\n\n## SHIPPING AND HANDLING POLICY\n\n## RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT COSTS\n\n## STOCK-BASED COMPENSATION\n\nThe Company recognizes revenue when its products are shipped to its customers and distributors, provided an arrangement exists, the fee is fixed and determinable and collectibility is reasonably assured. Net sales represent gross sales invoiced to customers, less certain related charges, including discounts, returns and other allowances. Returns, discounts and other allowances have been insignificant historically.\n\nShipping and handling fees charged to customers are reported as revenue and all shipping and handling costs incurred related to products sold are reported as cost of goods sold.\n\nResearch and development costs relating to the development of new products and improvements of existing products are expensed as incurred.\n\nAt December 31, 2003, the Company had three stock-based employee compensation plans, which are described more fully in Note 8. The Company accounts for those plans under the recognition and measurement principles of Accounting Principles Board (“APB”) Opinion No. 25, “Accounting for Stock Issued to Employees,” and related interpretations. No stock-based employee compensation cost is reflected in net income, as all options granted under those plans had an exercise price equal to the market value of the underlying common stock on the date of grant. The following table illustrates the effect on net income and income per share if the Company had applied the fair value recognition provisions of SFAS No. 123, “Accounting for Stock-Based Compensation,” to stock-based employee compensation:\n\n13" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.978142159681496, + "doc_id": "454e20d65ef8b8c23dd18b0ceba5d84ebae7c6bd12922f757895dc0ac458c98c", + "edit_distance": 0.03278688524590164, + "f1_score": 0.9850107066381156, + "meteor": 0.9882587955434196, + "precision": 0.9871244635193133, + "pred_md": "Our decentralized structure is an advantage. It gives us flexibility and speed in reacting to local conditions. Our division leaders are well-positioned to respond immediately to the needs, changes and developments among their customers. We in the corporate office set the goals, establish the discipline, provide financial resources, management and operational support, but it is in our local divisions where customer relationships are established and the work is done. Our community-based focus forges strong local relationships and ensures that, at the customer level, the highest expectations are exceeded.\n\nUltimately, all the things we do as a Company are aimed at increasing value for our shareholders. We know the importance of strong and predictable cash flow in meeting our shareholders' expectations. Over time, our cash flow has proven to be a strong indicator of the quality of our earnings. Last year's record free cash flow enabled us to reinvest in our business, acquire new companies, repurchase $266 million of our common stock and double the quarterly dividend to $0.12 per share. The plan this year is similar. We will continue to use our strong free cash flow to grow and strengthen the Company by building our customer base through internal growth and strategic acquisitions. Additionally, we plan to repurchase Republic stock worth up to $275 million and pay a regular quarterly cash dividend to our shareholders. We believe these steps will increase shareholder value.\n\n## The Year Ahead\n\nWe are focused on improving our service and strengthening relationships with our customers. Exceptional service allows us to build loyalty and create lasting bonds with those we serve. We will continue to train and develop our people, too, so they may grow as we grow as a Company. And we will continue to focus on improving the safety of our operations, an important commitment we have made to our people and service communities.\n\nThe last year was indeed an outstanding one for Republic. Our goal is to continue to deliver impressive results in 2005.\n\nI am both privileged and grateful to have the opportunity to lead a team of such exceptional people. Everyday, I grow more impressed with the experience, knowledge, loyalty and hard work they contribute. Republic truly has one of the best management and operations teams in America.\n\nOn behalf of all of us at Republic, I want to thank our shareholders for the trust they have placed in us. We are a Company that cares about you, and we pledge to continue working hard to serve you in 2005 and beyond.\n\nSincerely,\n\nJames E. O'Connor Chairman and Chief Executive Officer March 31, 2005", + "recall": 0.9829059829059829, + "true_md": "Our decentralized structure is an advantage. It gives us flexibility and speed in reacting to local conditions. Our division leaders are well-positioned to respond immediately to the needs, changes and developments among their customers. We in the corporate office set the goals, establish the discipline, provide financial resources, management and operational support, but it is in our local divisions where customer relationships are established and the work is done. Our community-based focus forges strong local relationships and ensures that, at the customer level, the highest expectations are exceeded.\n\nUltimately, all the things we do as a Company are aimed at increasing value for our shareholders. We know the importance of strong and predictable cash flow in meeting our shareholders’ expectations. Over time, our cash flow has proven to be a strong indicator of the quality of our earnings. Last year’s record free cash flow enabled us to reinvest in our business, acquire new companies, repurchase $266 million of our common stock and double the quarterly dividend to $0.12 per share. The plan this year is similar. We will continue to use our strong free cash flow to grow and strengthen the Company by building our customer base through internal growth and strategic acquisitions. Additionally, we plan to repurchase Republic stock worth up to $275 million and pay a regular quarterly cash dividend to our shareholders. We believe these steps will increase shareholder value. \n\nWe are focused on improving our service and strengthening relationships with our customers. Exceptional service allows us to build loyalty and create lasting bonds with those we serve. We will continue to train and develop our people, too, so they may grow as we grow as a Company. And we will continue to focus on improving the safety of our operations, an important commitment we have made to our people and service communities.\n\nThe last year was indeed an outstanding one for Republic. Our goal is to continue to deliver impressive results in 2005.\n\nI am both privileged and grateful to have the opportunity to lead a team of such exceptional people. Everyday, I grow more impressed with the experience, knowledge, loyalty and hard work they contribute. Republic truly has one of the best management and operations teams in America. \n\nOn behalf of all of us at Republic, I want to thank our shareholders for the trust they have placed in us. We are a Company that cares about you, and we pledge to continue working hard to serve you in 2005 and beyond.\n\nSincerely,\n\nJames E. O’Connor Chairman and Chief Executive Officer March 31, 2005\n\n## The Year Ahead" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "abfac19b7a772f2499540349428981590139b8d8ed866d8450f2570e6e41daa1", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999271030762502, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## 2) Summarized consolidated statements of income by business segment\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\n97\n\nFINANCIAL SECTION", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## 2) Summarized consolidated statements of income by business segment\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 97\n\nFINANCIAL SECTION" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8660912114962261, + "doc_id": "a62d9110dbfa2a6e68b5af3f79326178d06d3a03756c418e7f4c107ba63bc285", + "edit_distance": 0.7679500520291364, + "f1_score": 0.9210526315789475, + "meteor": 0.7693520758856804, + "precision": 0.9574468085106383, + "pred_md": "HON INDUSTRIES Inc. and SUBSIDIARIES\n\nFIN 46R is effective at the end of the first interim period ending after March 15, 2004. Entities that have adopted FIN 46 prior to this effective date can continue to apply the provision of FIN 46 until the effective date of FIN 46R. The Company adopted FIN 46 on January 3, 2004, and it did not have an impact on the Company's financial statements.\n\nThe Financial Accounting Standards Board finalized SFAS No. 150, 'Accounting for Certain Financial Instruments with Characteristics of both Liabilities and Equity,' effective for financial instruments entered into or modified after May 31, 2003, and otherwise is effective at the beginning of the first interim period beginning after June 15, 2003. The adoption of SFAS No. 150 did not have an impact on the Company's financial statements.\n\nDuring 2002, the Financial Accounting Standards Board finalized SFAS No. 146, 'Accounting for Costs Associated with Exit or Disposal Activities' for exit and disposal activities that are initiated after December 31, 2002. This Statement requires that a liability for a cost associated with an exit or disposal activity be recognized when the liability is incurred. The Company applied this statement to its 2003 restructuring activities which resulted in a charge of $8.5 million during 2003.\n\nThe Financial Accounting Standards Board also issued Interpretation No. 45, 'Guarantor's Accounting and Disclosure Requirements for Guarantees, Including Indirect Guarantees of Indebtedness to Other.' FIN 45 clarifies the requirements of SFAS No. 5, 'Accounting for Contingencies' relating to the guarantor's accounting for and disclosure of the issuance of certain types of guarantees. The provisions for initial recognition and measurement are effective on a prospective basis for guarantees that are issued or modified after December 31, 2002. The adoption did not have a material impact on the Company's financial statements.\n\nIn December 2003, the Financial Accounting Standards Board issued a revised SFAS No. 132, 'Employers' Disclosures about Pensions and Other Postretirement Benefits.' In 2003, the Company adopted the revised disclosure requirements of this pronouncement.\n\n## RECLASSIFICATIONS\n\nCertain prior year amounts have been reclassified to conform to the 2003 presentation.\n\n## Restructuring Related Charges\n\nAs a result of the Company's business simplification and cost reduction strategies, the Company closed two office furniture facilities located in Milan, Tennessee, and Hazleton, Pennsylvania, and consolidated pro-\n\nduction into other U.S. manufacturing locations. Charges for the closures totaled $15.7 million, which consists of $6.7 million of accelerated depreciation of machinery and equipment which was recorded in cost of sales, $3.4 million of severance, and $5.6 million of facility exit, production relocation, and other costs which were recorded as restructuring costs. A total of 316 members were terminated and received severance due to these shutdowns. The closures and consolidation are substantially complete.\n\nThe Hazleton, Pennsylvania, facility is an owned facility and has been reclassified to current assets as it is currently being held as available for sale. It is included in the 'Prepaid expenses and other current assets' in the January 3, 2004, condensed consolidated balance sheet at its carrying value of $2.1 million. The Milan, Tennessee, facility is a leased facility that is no longer being used in the production of goods. The restructuring expense for 2003 included $1.4 million of costs that will continue to be incurred under the lease contract reduced by estimated sublease rentals that could be reasonably obtained.\n\nDuring 2002, the Company recorded a pretax charge of approximately $5.4 million due to the shutdown of an office furniture facility in Jackson, Tennessee. A total of 125 members were terminated and received severance due to this shutdown. During the second quarter of 2003, a restructuring credit of approximately $0.6 million was taken back into income relating to this charge. This was due to the fact that the Company was able to exit a lease with the lessor at more favorable terms than previously estimated.\n\nDuring the second quarter of 2001, the Company recorded a pretax charge of $24.0 million or $0.26 per diluted share for a restructuring plan that involved consolidating physical facilities, discontinuing low-volume product lines, and reductions of workforce. Included in the charge was the closedown of three of its office furniture facilities located in Williamsport, Pennsylvania; Tupelo, Mississippi; and Santa Ana, California. Approximately 500 members were terminated and received severance due to the closedown of these facilities. During the second quarter of 2002, a restructuring credit of approximately $2.4 million was taken back into income relating to this charge. This was mainly due to the fact that the Company was able to exit a lease with a lessor at more favorable terms than originally estimated and the Company's ability to minimize the number of members terminated as compared to the original plan.\n\nThe following table details the change in restructuring reserve for the last three years:\n\n46", + "recall": 0.8873239436619719, + "true_md": "## H O N I N D U S T R I E S I n c . a n d S U B S I D I A R I E S\n\nFIN 46R is effective at the end of the first interim period ending after March 15, 2004. Entities that have adopted FIN 46 prior to this effective date can continue to apply the provision of FIN 46 until the effective date of FIN 46R. The Company adopted FIN 46 on January 3, 2004, and it did not have an impact on the Company’s financial statements. \n\nduction into other U.S. manufacturing locations. Charges for the closures totaled $15.7 million, which consists of $6.7 million of acceler- ated depreciation of machinery and equipment which was recorded in cost of sales, $3.4 million of severance, and $5.6 million of facility exit, production relocation, and other costs which were recorded as restruc- turing costs. A total of 316 members were terminated and received severance due to these shutdowns. The closures and consolidation are substantially complete.\n\nThe Financial Accounting Standards Board finalized SFAS No. 150, “Accounting for Certain Financial Instruments with Charac- teristics of both Liabilities and Equity,” effective for financial instru- ments entered into or modified after May 31, 2003, and otherwise is effective at the beginning of the first interim period beginning after June 15, 2003. The adoption of SFAS No. 150 did not have an impact on the Company’s financial statements.\n\nThe Hazleton, Pennsylvania, facility is an owned facility and has been reclassified to current assets as it is currently being held as available for sale. It is included in the “Prepaid expenses and other cur- rent assets” in the January 3, 2004, condensed consolidated balance sheet at its carrying value of $2.1 million. The Milan, Tennessee, facility is a leased facility that is no longer being used in the production of goods. The restructuring expense for 2003 included $1.4 million of costs that will continue to be incurred under the lease contract reduced by estimated sublease rentals that could be reasonably obtained.\n\nDuring 2002, the Financial Accounting Standards Board finalized SFAS No. 146, “Accounting for Costs Associated with Exit or Disposal Activities” for exit and disposal activities that are initiated after December 31, 2002. This Statement requires that a liability for a cost associated with an exit or disposal activity be recognized when the liability is incurred. The Company applied this statement to its 2003 restructuring activities which resulted in a charge of $8.5 million during 2003. \n\nDuring 2002, the Company recorded a pretax charge of approximately $5.4 million due to the shutdown of an office furniture facility in Jackson, Tennessee. A total of 125 members were terminated and received severance due to this shutdown. During the second quar- ter of 2003, a restructuring credit of approximately $0.6 million was taken back into income relating to this charge. This was due to the fact that the Company was able to exit a lease with the lessor at more favor- able terms than previously estimated.\n\nThe Financial Accounting Standards Board also issued Interpretation No. 45, “Guarantor’s Accounting and Disclosure Requirements for Guarantees, Including Indirect Guarantees of Indebtedness to Other.” FIN 45 clarifies the requirements of SFAS No. 5, “Accounting for Contingencies” relating to the guarantor’s accounting for and disclosure of the issuance of certain types of guar- antees. The provisions for initial recognition and measurement are effective on a prospective basis for guarantees that are issued or modi- fied after December 31, 2002. The adoption did not have a material impact on the Company’s financial statements.\n\nDuring the second quarter of 2001, the Company recorded a pretax charge of $24.0 million or $0.26 per diluted share for a restruc- turing plan that involved consolidating physical facilities, discontinuing low-volume product lines, and reductions of workforce. Included in the charge was the closedown of three of its office furniture facilities located in Williamsport, Pennsylvania; Tupelo, Mississippi; and Santa Ana, California. Approximately 500 members were terminated and received severance due to the closedown of these facilities. During the second quarter of 2002, a restructuring credit of approximately $2.4 million was taken back into income relating to this charge. This was mainly due to the fact that the Company was able to exit a lease with a lessor at more favorable terms than originally estimated and the Company’s ability to minimize the number of members terminated as compared to the original plan.\n\nIn December 2003, the Financial Accounting Standards Board issued a revised SFAS No. 132, “Employers’ Disclosures about Pensions and Other Postretirement Benefits.” In 2003, the Company adopted the revised disclosure requirements of this pronouncement.\n\nCertain prior year amounts have been reclassified to conform to the 2003 presentation.\n\nAs a result of the Company’s business simplification and cost reduction strategies, the Company closed two office furniture facilities located in Milan, Tennessee, and Hazleton, Pennsylvania, and consolidated pro-\n\nThe following table details the change in restructuring reserve for the last three years:\n\n## RECLASSIFICATIONS\n\n## Restructuring Related Charges\n\n46" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5082365016563265, + "doc_id": "a978260b27d02ef9ce58b3ad26d7d280f1190aa4ac197af51f3c13c273e00bcb", + "edit_distance": 0.4444444444444444, + "f1_score": 0.9285714285714286, + "meteor": 0.9114583333333334, + "precision": 0.8666666666666667, + "pred_md": "CORPORATE DATA\n\n106\n\n## INFORMATION ON SUBSIDIARIES AND AFFILIATES\n\n## Consolidated subsidiaries\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## INFORMATION ON SUBSIDIARIES AND AFFILIATES\n\nCORPORATE DATA\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 106" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8411915199067923, + "doc_id": "b36e03f5205687da7bbc48f69303740f7f6b4336a32683194fc789e8fd52c271", + "edit_distance": 0.2168421052631579, + "f1_score": 0.9022556390977443, + "meteor": 0.9064236479478527, + "precision": 0.8522727272727273, + "pred_md": "3 0\n\nHeld-to-maturity securities are re c o rded at amortized cost, adjusted for the amortization or accretion of premium and discounts. Av a i lab l -sale securities are re c o rded at fair value. Unrealized holding gains and losses, net of the related tax effect, on available-fore-for sale securities are excluded from operating results and re p o rted as a separate component of other comprehensive income/loss until realized. Realized gains and losses from the sale of available-for-sale securities are determined on a specific identification basis.\n\nA decline in the market value of any held-to-maturity or available-for-sale security below cost that is deemed other than temporary results in a reduction in the carrying amount to fair value. The impairment is charged to operating results and a new cost basis for the security is established. Premiums and discounts are amortized or accreted over the life or term of the related held-to-maturity security or a v l -sale security as an adjustment to yield using the effective interest method. ailab e-for\n\nDividend and interest income are recognized when earned.\n\n## (e) Forw a rd foreign exchange contracts\n\nF o w a d foreign exchange contracts are re c o rded at fair values in the consolidated balance sheet in other current assets or other curre n t r r liabilities with the related gain or loss recognized in the consolidated statement of operations, unless the contracts meet certain hedging criteria. A foreign exchange contract is considered a hedge of an identifiable foreign currency commitment if (i) the contract is designated as, and is effective as, a hedge of foreign currency commitment and (ii) the foreign currency commitment is firm.\n\nIn addition, the significant characteristics of expected terms of the anticipated transaction are identified and it is probable that the anticipated transaction will occur. Gains and losses on foreign exchange contracts meeting these hedge accounting criteria are deferre d and included in the measurement of the related foreign currency transaction. Losses are not deferred if, however, it is estimated that the d e ral would lead to recognition of losses in later periods. fer\n\n## (f) Pro p e t , plant and equipment r y\n\nP ro t , plant, and equipment are stated at cost. Equipment under capital leases are stated at the lesser of fair value of the leased per y equipment and the present value of future minimum lease payments.\n\nD e eciation is calculated using the straight-line method over the estimated useful lives of the assets. Equipment held under capital leases pr and leasehold improvements are amortized straight line over the shorter of their estimated useful lives or the lease term.\n\nD e eciation and amortization rates are as follows: pr\n\nAutomated teller machines 5-7 years\n\nComputers and software 3-5 years\n\nVehicles & office equipment 5 years\n\nCassettes 1 year\n\nLeasehold improvements Over the lease term\n\n## (g) Goodwill and other intangible assets\n\nGoodwill re p resents the excess of purchase price over fair value of net assets acquired. Other identifiable intangible assets are valued at their fair market value at the time of purchase.\n\nA m o tization is calculated using the straight-line method over the estimated useful lives of the assets as follows: r\n\nGoodwill 7-10 years\n\nDeveloped technology 5 years\n\nAssembled workforce 4 years\n\nInstalled base 4 years\n\nDistributor/agent relationships 8 years\n\nTrade-name 10 years\n\nThe Company assesses the recoverability of this intangible asset by determining whether the amortization of the goodwill balance over its remaining life can be re c o v e red through undiscounted future operating cash flows of the acquired operation. The amount of goodwill i m p a ment, if any , is measured based on projected undiscounted future operating cash flows. The assessment of the recoverability of ir goodwill will be impacted if estimated future operating cash flows are not achieved.\n\n## (h) Impairment of long-lived assets\n\nThe Company accounts for long-lived assets in accordance with the provisions of SFAS No. 121, 'Accounting for the Impairment of Long-Lived Assets to Be Disposed Of.' This Statement re q u i res that long-lived assets and certain identifiable intangibles be reviewed for i m p a ment whenever events or changes in circumstances indicate that the carrying amount of an asset may not be re c o v e r a b l e . ir Recoverability of assets to be held and used is measured by a comparison of the carrying amount of an asset to projected undiscounted f u tu re net cash flows expected to be generated by the asset. If such assets are considered to be impaired, the impairment to be re c o g n i z e d is measured by the amount by which the carrying amount of the assets exceeds the fair value of the assets on a discounted cash flow basis. Assets to be disposed of are re p o rted at the lower of the carrying amount or fair value less costs to sell.\n\n## (i) Other assets\n\nOther assets include deferred financing costs, investments in affiliates, and loans receivables. Deferred financing costs re p resent expenses i rred to obtain financing which have been deferred and amortized over the life of the loan using the effective interest method. ncu", + "recall": 0.9584664536741214, + "true_md": "Held-to-maturity securities are re c o rded at amortized cost, adjusted for the amortization or accretion of premium and discounts. Av a i l a b l e - f o r-sale securities are re c o rded at fair value. Unrealized holding gains and losses, net of the related tax effect, on available-for- sale securities are excluded from operating results and re p o rted as a separate component of other comprehensive income/loss until realized. Realized gains and losses from the sale of available-for-sale securities are determined on a specific identification basis. \n\nA decline in the market value of any held-to-maturity or available-for-sale security below cost that is deemed other than temporary results in a reduction in the carrying amount to fair value. The impairment is charged to operating results and a new cost basis for the security is established. Premiums and discounts are amortized or accreted over the life or term of the related held-to-maturity security or a v a i l a b l e - f o r-sale security as an adjustment to yield using the effective interest method. \n\nDividend and interest income are recognized when earned. \n\nF o rw a rd foreign exchange contracts are re c o rded at fair values in the consolidated balance sheet in other current assets or other curre n t liabilities with the related gain or loss recognized in the consolidated statement of operations, unless the contracts meet certain hedging criteria. A foreign exchange contract is considered a hedge of an identifiable foreign currency commitment if (i) the contract is designated as, and is effective as, a hedge of foreign currency commitment and (ii) the foreign currency commitment is firm. \n\nIn addition, the significant characteristics of expected terms of the anticipated transaction are identified and it is probable that the anticipated transaction will occur. Gains and losses on foreign exchange contracts meeting these hedge accounting criteria are deferre d and included in the measurement of the related foreign currency transaction. Losses are not deferred if, however, it is estimated that the d e f e rral would lead to recognition of losses in later periods. \n\nP ro p e rt y, plant, and equipment are stated at cost. Equipment under capital leases are stated at the lesser of fair value of the leased equipment and the present value of future minimum lease payments. \n\n- (e) Forw a rd foreign exchange contracts \n\n- (f) Pro p e rt y, plant and equipment \n\nD e p reciation is calculated using the straight-line method over the estimated useful lives of the assets. Equipment held under capital leases and leasehold improvements are amortized straight line over the shorter of their estimated useful lives or the lease term. \n\nD e p reciation and amortization rates are as follows: \n\nGoodwill re p resents the excess of purchase price over fair value of net assets acquired. Other identifiable intangible assets are valued at their fair market value at the time of purchase. \n\n- (g) Goodwill and other intangible assets \n\nA m o rtization is calculated using the straight-line method over the estimated useful lives of the assets as follows: \n\nThe Company assesses the recoverability of this intangible asset by determining whether the amortization of the goodwill balance over its remaining life can be re c o v e red through undiscounted future operating cash flows of the acquired operation. The amount of goodwill i m p a i rment, if any, is measured based on projected undiscounted future operating cash flows. The assessment of the recoverability of goodwill will be impacted if estimated future operating cash flows are not achieved.\n\nThe Company accounts for long-lived assets in accordance with the provisions of SFAS No. 121, “Accounting for the Impairment of Long-Lived Assets to Be Disposed Of.” This Statement re q u i res that long-lived assets and certain identifiable intangibles be reviewed for i m p a i rment whenever events or changes in circumstances indicate that the carrying amount of an asset may not be re c o v e r a b l e . Recoverability of assets to be held and used is measured by a comparison of the carrying amount of an asset to projected undiscounted f u t u re net cash flows expected to be generated by the asset. If such assets are considered to be impaired, the impairment to be re c o g n i z e d is measured by the amount by which the carrying amount of the assets exceeds the fair value of the assets on a discounted cash flow basis. Assets to be disposed of are re p o rted at the lower of the carrying amount or fair value less costs to sell. \n\nOther assets include deferred financing costs, investments in affiliates, and loans receivables. Deferred financing costs re p resent expenses i n c u rred to obtain financing which have been deferred and amortized over the life of the loan using the effective interest method. \n\n- (h) Impairment of long-lived assets \n\n- (i) Other assets \n\n3 0" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "51400027ddcef29b1c9334a02feea4587cdb5dfb1d18cfd237ec024a2b0a98a0", + "edit_distance": 0.2168421052631579, + "f1_score": 0.9022556390977443, + "meteor": 0.9064236479478527, + "precision": 0.8522727272727273, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.9584664536741214, + "true_md": "" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.683157474504208, + "doc_id": "abeac418269d1a78df3f6a48340cd2736b795807bbe526055c8d2095b1ed9b40", + "edit_distance": 0.3, + "f1_score": 0.972972972972973, + "meteor": 0.9041027559546079, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "FINANCIAL SECTION\n\n98\n\n3) Summarized consolidated statements of cash flows by business segment\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004", + "recall": 0.9473684210526315, + "true_md": "## 3) Summarized consolidated statements of cash flows by business segment\n\nFINANCIAL SECTION\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 98" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8715748430202158, + "doc_id": "26bd142cb11e16fc7e7c540beac2238547f68593e8cef1f6d9dd441028c633b6", + "edit_distance": 0.1802030456852792, + "f1_score": 0.9563106796116505, + "meteor": 0.951967702797392, + "precision": 0.9656862745098039, + "pred_md": "Joel W. Johnson, Chairman of the Board and Chief Executive Officer\n\nJoel W. Johnson, Chairman of the Board and Chief Executive Officer\n\n'We continue to make good progress in building a fastergrowing, more profitable, better-balanced, and more diversified business.'\n\n2\n\nHormel Foods Corporation\n\n## fellow shareholders:\n\n## strategies continue to build shareholder value\n\nI am pleased to report that Hormel Foods had an outstanding fiscal 2004.\n\n- · Earnings per share reached $1.65, up 24 percent compared to $1.33 in fiscal 2003. Our 2004 results include a $.09 per share gain from non-operating items and 2003 includes a $.02 per share gain from non-operating items.\n- · Net sales totaled $4.8 billion, 14 percent higher than a year earlier, and were driven by exceptional demand for value-added pork and turkey products and the addition of Century Foods International.\n- · Earnings before interest and tax (EBIT) margins increased to 7.8 percent from 7.3 percent because of improved product mix and better market conditions.\n- · Shareholders participated in a 7.1 percent increase in the annual dividend per share payout, with a total dividend payment of $62.4 million.\n- · Shareholders benefited from the company's repurchase of $37.5 million of common stock during the year.\n\nWe continue to make good progress in building a faster-growing, more profitable, better-balanced, and more diversified business. I think several achievements and initiatives deserve specific mention here.\n\n## benefits of a balanced business model\n\nWe have worked to better balance the proportional contributions of our packaged foods and protein business segments for one key reason: to build a business model that supports faster growth than packaged food companies yet is less volatile than protein companies. The right balance allows us to take advantage of changing raw material markets and still prosper regardless of the environment. Strong protein markets, such as we experienced in fiscal 2004, benefit our Refrigerated Foods and Jennie-O Turkey Store protein segments. Conversely, lower protein markets benefit our Grocery Products packaged food segment. In high protein markets, our Refrigerated Foods and Jennie-O Turkey Store segments are able to get better margins", + "recall": 0.9471153846153846, + "true_md": "Joel W. Johnson, Chairman of the Board and Chief Executive Officer\n\n“We continue to make good progress in building a faster- growing, more profitable, better-balanced, and more diversified business.”\n\nfellow shareholders:\n\nI am pleased to report that Hormel Foods had an outstanding fiscal 2004. \n\n## strategies continue to build shareholder value\n\n- • Earnings per share reached $1.65, up 24 percent compared to $1.33 in fiscal 2003. Our 2004 results include a $.09 per share gain from non-operating items and 2003 includes a $.02 per share gain from non-operating items. \n\n- • Net sales totaled $4.8 billion, 14 percent higher than a year earlier, and were driven by exceptional demand for value-added pork and turkey products and the addition of Century Foods International. \n\n- • Earnings before interest and tax (EBIT) margins increased to 7.8 percent from 7.3 percent because of improved product mix and better market conditions.\n\n- • Shareholders participated in a 7.1 percent increase in the annual dividend per share payout, with a total dividend payment of $62.4 million.\n\n- • Shareholders benefited from the company’s repurchase of $37.5 million of common stock during the year.\n\nWe continue to make good progress in building a faster-growing, more profitable, better-balanced, and more diversified business. I think several achievements and initiatives deserve specific mention here.\n\nWe have worked to better balance the proportional contributions of our packaged foods and protein business segments for one key reason: to build a business model that supports faster growth than packaged food companies yet is less volatile than protein companies. The right balance allows us to take advan- tage of changing raw material markets and still prosper regard- less of the environment. Strong protein markets, such as we experienced in fiscal 2004, benefit our Refrigerated Foods and Jennie-O Turkey Store protein segments. Conversely, lower protein markets benefit our Grocery Products packaged food segment. In high protein markets, our Refrigerated Foods and Jennie-O Turkey Store segments are able to get better margins\n\n## benefits of a balanced business model\n\n2 Hormel Foods Corporation" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9657314753787325, + "doc_id": "b9034381fe1a04839bf8adbbfe95108b4d194eee6f58690b20ad2aac8aae1dec", + "edit_distance": 0.03337612323491656, + "f1_score": 0.9927007299270073, + "meteor": 0.97801964541984, + "precision": 0.9941520467836257, + "pred_md": "SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES MANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS\n\nwill be determined based on Sprint's average revenue per PCS user for voice services divided by the average minutes of use per user.\n\n- 5. Sprint and the Company will agree on a service level agreement related to the provision of customer services by December 2006. If Sprint does not reach the stated goals, the Company will have the opportunity to either provide the services itself or contract with a third party beginning in 2008.\n- 6. Through 2006, a methodology is provided to determine if the Company is required to make certain capital expenditures and participate in Sprint Programs Requirements.\n- 7. Effective January 1, 2004, the method of cash settlement provided for under the Agreement changed from Sprint distributing cash from customers based on collected revenue to billed revenue. The absolute amount of cash received by the Company should remain the same, but the Company should receive cash on a more timely basis.\n- 8. The Company is entitled to a Most Favored Nations clause. During the period through 2006, the Company will have the opportunity to adopt any addendum to the Management and/or Service Agreements that Sprint signs with another PCS Affiliate.\n\nIn May 2003, the Board of Directors of the Company adopted a nonqualified supplemental executive retirement plan (SERP) benefit for named executives. The plan was established to provide benefits beyond the pension plan that covers all employees. See Note 9 of the Consolidated Financial Statements for additional information.\n\nIn November 2003, the Company commenced a management reorganization that will be ongoing into 2004. The reorganization was in recognition of the Company's growth and changes in the telecom industry. The Company shifted from an organization structure that was focused on lines of business to a plan that organizes on function. The Company plans to expand the senior staff and corresponding departments as needed to better position itself for future opportunities. This reorganization did not require a charge to the operation, as there were no positions lost or values impaired as a result of the reorganization.\n\nOn November 24, 2003, federal regulations went into effect whereby customers in the 100 largest metropolitan areas were able to change wireless carriers and keep their phone numbers. This is referred to as Wireless Local Number Portability (WLNP). On the same date in those markets, wireline customers could transfer their wireline number to a wireless phone. On May 24, 2004, Local Number Portability (LNP) will be available to wireless and wireline subscribers throughout the United States. To date, the impact of LNP/ WLNP on the Company has been insignificant.\n\n## Summary\n\nThe Company's three major lines of business are wireless, wireline and other businesses. Each of the three areas has unique issues and challenges that are critical to the understanding of the operations of the Company. The wireless business is made up of two different operations, the PCS operation and the tower business. The wireline business is made up of traditional telephone operations, a cable TV operation, fiber network leasing and a company that resells long-distance. Other business includes the Company's Internet operation, the Interstate 81 corridor Travel 511 project and the sales and service of telecommunications systems.\n\nThe PCS operation must be understood within the context of the Company's relationship with Sprint and its PCS Affiliates. The Company operates its PCS wireless network as an affiliate of Sprint. The Company receives revenues from Sprint for subscribers that obtain service in the Company's network coverage area and those subscribers using the Company's network when they travel. The Company relies on Sprint to provide timely, accurate and complete information for the Company to record the appropriate revenue and expenses for the periods reflected.\n\nThe Company's PCS business has operated in a net travel receivable position for several years. The Company received $6.0 million in net travel in 2003, compared to $5.8 million in 2002, and $4.0 million in 2001. This relationship could change due to service plan changes, subscriber travel habit changes and other changes beyond the control of the Company.\n\nSHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY\n\n42\n\n■", + "recall": 0.9912536443148688, + "true_md": "SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS\n\nwill be determined based on Sprint’s average revenue per PCS user for voice services divided by the average minutes of use per user.\n\n- 5. Sprint and the Company will agree on a service level agreement related to the provision of customer services by December 2006. If Sprint does not reach the stated goals, the Company will have the opportunity to either provide the services itself or contract with a third party beginning in 2008.\n\n- 6. Through 2006, a methodology is provided to determine if the Company is required to make certain capital expenditures and participate in Sprint Programs Requirements.\n\n- 7. Effective January 1, 2004, the method of cash settlement provided for under the Agreement changed from Sprint distributing cash from customers based on collected revenue to billed revenue. The absolute amount of cash received by the Company should remain the same, but the Company should receive cash on a more timely basis.\n\n- 8. The Company is entitled to a Most Favored Nations clause. During the period through 2006, the Company will have the opportunity to adopt any addendum to the Management and/or Service Agreements that Sprint signs with another PCS Affiliate.\n\nIn May 2003, the Board of Directors of the Company adopted a nonqualified supplemental executive retirement plan (SERP) benefit for named executives. The plan was established to provide benefits beyond the pension plan that covers all employees. See Note 9 of the Consolidated Financial Statements for additional information.\n\nIn November 2003, the Company commenced a management reorganization that will be ongoing into 2004. The reorganization was in recognition of the Company’s growth and changes in the telecom industry. The Company shifted from an organization structure that was focused on lines of business to a plan that organizes on function. The Company plans to expand the senior staff and corresponding departments as needed to better position itself for future opportunities. This reorganization did not require a charge to the operation, as there were no positions lost or values impaired as a result of the reorganization.\n\nOn November 24, 2003, federal regulations went into effect whereby customers in the 100 largest metropolitan areas were able to change wireless carriers and keep their phone numbers. This is referred to as Wireless Local Number Portability (WLNP). On the same date in those markets, wireline customers could transfer their wireline number to a wireless phone. On May 24, 2004, Local Number Portability (LNP) will be available to wireless and wireline subscribers throughout the United States. To date, the impact of LNP/ WLNP on the Company has been insignificant.\n\nThe Company’s three major lines of business are wireless, wireline and other businesses. Each of the three areas has unique issues and challenges that are critical to the understanding of the operations of the Company. The wireless business is made up of two different operations, the PCS operation and the tower business. The wireline business is made up of traditional telephone operations, a cable TV operation, fiber network leasing and a company that resells long-distance. Other business includes the Company’s Internet operation, the Interstate 81 corridor Travel 511 project and the sales and service of telecommunications systems.\n\n## Summary\n\nThe PCS operation must be understood within the context of the Company’s relationship with Sprint and its PCS Affiliates. The Company operates its PCS wireless network as an affiliate of Sprint. The Company receives revenues from Sprint for subscribers that obtain service in the Company’s network coverage area and those subscribers using the Company’s network when they travel. The Company relies on Sprint to provide timely, accurate and complete information for the Company to record the appropriate revenue and expenses for the periods reflected.\n\nThe Company’s PCS business has operated in a net travel receivable position for several years. The Company received $6.0 million in net travel in 2003, compared to $5.8 million in 2002, and $4.0 million in 2001. This relationship could change due to service plan changes, subscriber travel habit changes and other changes beyond the control of the Company.\n\nSHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY ■ 42" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5699201344278756, + "doc_id": "c19c6f490b6ce267080a3258483d6383b0d8b575c7380cb050f6a6e9e22463e6", + "edit_distance": 0.3055555555555556, + "f1_score": 0.7769784172661871, + "meteor": 0.7076033994334278, + "precision": 0.84375, + "pred_md": "## YOU WOOD LOVE ME\n\nOf course, you wood love the new me even more, since I thrive on change and selfimprovement. Seek a seeker of all things bold and beautiful - someone who desires elegant solutions and tailored style, and who appreciates handcrafted expressions of commitment. I'm easy to be around, and I'm certain I could fit into both your life and your office. Let's create a new way of being - together.\n\nGUNLOCKE", + "recall": 0.72, + "true_md": "## Y O U W O O D L O V E M E\n\nOf course, you wood love the new me even more, since I thrive on change and self- improvement. Seek a seeker of all things bold and beautiful — someone who desires elegant solutions and tailored style, and who appreci- ates handcrafted expressions of commitment. I’m easy to be around, and I’m certain I could fit into both your life and your office. Let’s create a new way of being — together.\n\nG U N L O C K E" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8725338470257269, + "doc_id": "b305e07de4dc6d595599d6fdbb4acc636ba362e77dc3c5e62f795041a232bbf3", + "edit_distance": 0.28687196110210694, + "f1_score": 0.9411764705882353, + "meteor": 0.9245196694766169, + "precision": 0.96, + "pred_md": "4\n\nprocessesing business. And, I get excited about the opportunity to expand our transaction base with our mobile banking, bill payment and mobile operator solutions.\n\nThe real value of our company is in our transaction processing. Because of the low incremental cost of connecting to a new customer, anytime we sign a new contract most of the incremental revenue will now be flowing to our bottom line. The infrastructure is in place to leverage additional growth and bring us closer to being EBITDA and cash flow positive in the near term.\n\n## What role will strategic alliances play in extending\n\nAlliances are an important part of our strategic direction. Recently, we announced several partnerships that help us expand sales channels and distribution of our products and services. Our partners were looking for wireless transaction solutions to complement their own offerings, and they selected Euronet's products, proving that our solutions are rock solid.\n\nGemplus, the world's number one provider of smart card-based solutions, chose us as their global partner to provide electronic recharge solutions to mobile operators. W e also have agreements with Sila Communications to help us market our suite of mobile banking solutions throughout Europe, the Middle East and Asia Pacific and with Aether Systems which is offering our mobile banking solutions in the United States.\n\n## Why did you change your corporate name to Euronet Worldwide last year?\n\nWe became Euronet Worldwide to more accurately reflect the company's growing presence in the global marketplace. We are no longer focused solely on Europe, and today, deliver comprehensive solutions to more than 200 customers in over 60 countries.\n\n## What was your biggest challenge in 2000?\n\nachieve high growth. As banks began moving to outsourcing rather than purchasing software to manage their transactions, we realized that this high growth would not materialize. W e've basically downsized to reduce expenses to better correspond to revenue expec-\n\ntations, so we expect this division to be an EBITDA contributor from this point forward. The trend towards outsourcing negatively impacted our software business, but positively benefits our network services division.\n\nIt's important to point out that our software is an asset to our business of\n\nselling transactions. For example, our software sales doubled in the Asia Pacific region over 1999. Relationships with large financial institutions like Westpac Banking Corporation have cemented our position in Asia Pacific as a leading supplier of transaction processing solutions.\n\n## Why is ATM outsourcing important?\n\nIncreasingly, financial institutions are choosing to outsource their ATM operations to free up resources\n\nI think it was restructuring our software business late in the year. When Euronet purchased Arkansas Systems, Inc. over two years ago, the division was expected to\n\nand concentrate on their core banking business. Some analysts predict that outsourcing by the European banking and finance sector will total $91 billion by 2003. We are expanding our outsourcing business with wireless and Internet banking services.\n\nOur outsourcing business is thriving. Currently we provide ATM outsourcing for some of the biggest banks in the world - banks like Citibank, ABN AMRO, Deutsche Bank, Millennium\n\nand Raiffeisenbank - as they expand into emerging markets. We have contracts with Citibank in five countries, most recently in Greece and the Czech Republic.", + "recall": 0.9230769230769231, + "true_md": "processesing business. And, I get excited about the opportunity to expand our transaction base with our mobile banking, bill payment and mobile operator solutions.\n\nThe real value of our company is in our transaction processing. Because of the low incremental cost of connecting to a new customer, anytime we sign a new contract most of the incremental revenue will now be flowing to our bottom line. The infrastructure is in place to leverage additional growth and bring us closer to being EBITDA and cash flow positive in the near term.\n\nAlliances are an important part of our strategic direc- tion. Recently, we announced several partnerships that help us expand sales channels and distribution of our products and services. Our partners were looking for wireless transaction solutions to complement their own offerings, and they selected Euronet’s products, proving that our solutions are rock solid.\n\nGemplus, the world’s number one provider of smart card-based solutions, chose us as their global partner to provide electronic recharge solutions to mobile opera- tors. We also have agreements with Sila Communications to help us market our suite of mobile banking solutions throughout Europe, the Middle East and Asia Pacific and with Aether Systems which is offering our mobile banking solutions in the United States.\n\nWe became Euronet Worldwide to more accurately reflect the company’s grow- ing presence in the global marketplace. We are no longer focused solely on Europe, and today, deliver comprehen- sive solutions to more than 200 customers in over 60 countries. \n\nI think it was restructuring our software business late in the year. When Euronet purchased Arkansas Systems, Inc. over two years ago, the division was expected to\n\nachieve high growth. As banks began moving to out- sourcing rather than purchasing software to manage their transactions, we realized that this high growth would not materialize. We’ve basically downsized to reduce expenses to better correspond to revenue expec- tations, so we\n\nexpect this division to be an EBITDA contributor from this point forward. The trend towards outsourcing nega- tively impacted our software business, but positively ben- efits our network services division.\n\nIt’s important to point out that our software is an asset to our business of\n\nselling transactions. For example, our software sales doubled in the Asia Pacific region over 1999. Relationships with large financial institutions like Westpac Banking Corporation have cemented our position in Asia Pacific as a leading supplier of transaction processing solutions.\n\nIncreasingly, financial institutions are choosing to outsource their ATM operations to free up resources and concentrate on their core banking\n\nbusiness. Some analysts predict that outsourcing by the European banking and finance sector will total $91 bil- lion by 2003. We are expanding our outsourcing business with wireless and Internet banking services.\n\nOur outsourcing business is thriving. Currently we provide ATM outsourc- ing for some of the biggest banks in the world – banks like Citibank, ABN AMRO, Deutsche Bank, Millennium\n\nand Raiffeisenbank – as they expand into emerging markets. We have contracts with Citibank in five coun- tries, most recently in Greece and the Czech Republic.\n\n## What role will strategic alliances play in extending your reach into new markets?\n\n## What was your biggest challenge in 2000?\n\n## Why is ATM outsourcing important?\n\n4\n\n## Why did you change your corporate name to Euronet Worldwide last year?" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8043343988925458, + "doc_id": "66396d5a697fe3d1eab82d5c4b98ebda1aba0bb487141e22128d64dc2efdfd65", + "edit_distance": 0.8287037037037037, + "f1_score": 0.9195402298850576, + "meteor": 0.7188623222378496, + "precision": 0.967741935483871, + "pred_md": "## HON INDUSTRIES Inc. and SUBSIDIARIES\n\n## Subsequent Acquisition\n\nOn January 5, 2004, the Company finalized the acquisition of Paoli Inc., a subsidiary of Klaussner Furniture Industries, Inc. Paoli is a leading provider of wood case goods and seating, with well-known brands, broad product offering, and strong independent representative sales and dealer networks. Further details of the transaction will be included in the Company's SEC Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the first quarter ended April 3, 2004.\n\n## Summary of Quarterly Results of Operations (Unaudited)\n\nThe following table presents certain unaudited quarterly financial information for each of the past 12 quarters. In the opinion of the Company's management, this information has been prepared on the same basis as the consolidated financial statements appearing elsewhere in this report and includes all adjustments (consisting only of normal recurring accruals) necessary to present fairly the financial results set forth herein. Results of operations for any previous quarter are not necessarily indicative of results for any future period.\n\n54", + "recall": 0.8759124087591241, + "true_md": "54\n\nThe following table presents certain unaudited quarterly financial information for each of the past 12 quarters. In the opinion of the Company’s management, this information has been prepared on the same basis as the consolidated financial statements appearing elsewhere in this report and includes all adjustments (consisting only of normal recurring accruals) necessary to present fairly the financial results set forth herein. Results of operations for any previous quarter are not necessarily indicative of results for any future period.\n\nOn January 5, 2004, the Company finalized the acquisition of Paoli Inc., a subsidiary of Klaussner Furniture Industries, Inc. Paoli is a leading provider of wood case goods and seating, with well-known brands, broad product offering, and strong independent representative sales and dealer networks. Further details of the transaction will be included in the Company’s SEC Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the first quarter ended April 3, 2004.\n\n## Subsequent Acquisition\n\n## Summary of Quarterly Results of Operations (Unaudited)\n\nH O N I N D U S T R I E S I n c . a n d S U B S I D I A R I E S" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6807123983233854, + "doc_id": "3d4c6966f95156a5d38a9346c0b3906c081c807f408b25d97d795b27040fd86a", + "edit_distance": 0.2777777777777778, + "f1_score": 0.8275862068965518, + "meteor": 0.7426880811496196, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Euronet Worldwide Annual Report 2000\n\nSECURE FINANCIAL TRANSACTIONS ANY TIME, ANY PLACE", + "recall": 0.7058823529411765, + "true_md": "# Connecting aWorld in Motion\n\nEuronet Worldwide Annual Report 2000\n\nSECURE FINANCIAL TRANSACTIONS ANY TIME, ANY PLACE" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9438431595708779, + "doc_id": "fbc014e1c27351affe9ea9420aaad1cf5c70521a595041f565e8afba8c36c6a1", + "edit_distance": 0.043478260869565216, + "f1_score": 0.9673913043478262, + "meteor": 0.9723985433187592, + "precision": 0.978021978021978, + "pred_md": "SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## Note 15. Quarterly Results (unaudited)\n\n(in thousands except for per share data)\n\n(a) Fourth quarter results of 2003 include favorable adjustments to revenue and expenses totaling $2.5 million, related to true-ups of management's estimates and settlements of disputes with Sprint and a $0.4 million benefit related to a change in vacation benefit accrual for employees.\n\n(b) Second quarter results of 2002 include the loss of $4.9 million, net of tax effects on the other than temporary writedown of the VeriSign stock.\n\nPer share earnings may not add to the full year values as each per share calculation stands on its own.\n\nSHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY\n\n38\n\n■", + "recall": 0.956989247311828, + "true_md": "SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## Note 15. Quarterly Results (unaudited)\n\n(in thousands except for per share data)\n\n(a) Fourth quarter results of 2003 include favorable adjustments to revenue and expenses totaling $2.5 million, related to true-ups of management’s estimates and settlements of disputes with Sprint and a $0.4 million benefit related to a change in vacation benefit accrual for employees.\n\n(b) Second quarter results of 2002 include the loss of $4.9 million, net of tax effects on the other than temporary write- down of the VeriSign stock.\n\nPer share earnings may not add to the full year values as each per share calculation stands on its own.\n\nSHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY ■ 38" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8932415065116407, + "doc_id": "c75cab62d0b81a8238c0bad3ef7e124a3e5dbd27e93c74ef24ac20638ccbb4a3", + "edit_distance": 0.12941176470588237, + "f1_score": 0.9423076923076924, + "meteor": 0.9537933529515898, + "precision": 0.9865771812080537, + "pred_md": "84\n\n## NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\nfor the year ended 31 December 2004\n\n## 32. Additional Financial Instruments Disclosure\n\n## (a) Foreign exchange risk exposure\n\nThe Santos Group is exposed to foreign exchange risk principally through the sale of liquid petroleum products denominated in US dollars, US dollar borrowings and US dollar expenditure. In order to hedge this foreign exchange risk, the Santos Group has from time to time entered into forward foreign exchange, foreign currency swap and foreign currency option contracts.\n\nAt 31 December 2004 the Santos Group has one open forward foreign currency exchange contract which has expired in January 2005. If closed out at balance date a loss of $0.2 million would have resulted.\n\nUS dollar denominated borrowings are either swapped into Australian dollar exposure (2004: US$321.4 million; 2003: US$115.0 million) or designated as a hedge of US dollar denominated investments in self-sustaining overseas controlled entities (2004: US$313.0 million; 2003: US$323.6 million) or as a hedge of future US denominated sales revenues (2004: US$146.4 million; 2003: US$219.4 million). As a result, there were no net foreign currency gains or losses arising from translation of US denominated dollar borrowings recognised in the statements of financial performance in 2004. Accordingly, $37.4 million of unrealised foreign currency gains were deferred as at 31 December 2004 (2003: gains of $66.3 million). The ultimate foreign currency gains or losses will be included in the measurement of the specific hedged US dollar denominated sales revenues to be realised in the years 2005 through 2006.\n\nThe Australian dollar equivalents of foreign currency monetary items included in the statements of financial position to the extent that they are not effectively hedged are:\n\nAnnual Report 2004", + "recall": 0.901840490797546, + "true_md": "## 32. Additional Financial Instruments Disclosure\n\n## (a) Foreign exchange risk exposure\n\nNOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STA TEMENTS for the year ended 31 December 2004\n\nThe Santos Group is exposed to foreign exchange risk principally through the sale of liquid petroleum products denominated in US dollars, US dollar borrowings and US dollar expenditure. In order to hedge this for eign exchange risk, the Santos Group has from time to time entered into forward foreign exchange, foreign currency swap and foreign curren cy option contracts.\n\nAt 31 December 2004 the Santos Group has one open forward foreign curr ency exchange contract which has expired in January 2005. If closed out at balance date a loss of $0.2 million would have resulted.\n\nUS dollar denominated borrowings are either swapped into Australian d ollar exposure (2004: US$321.4 million; 2003: US$115.0 million) or designated as a hedge of US dollar denominated investments in self-sustaining overseas controlled entities (2004: US$313.0 million; 2003: US$323.6 million) or as a hedge of future US denominated sales r evenues (2004: US$146.4 million; 2003: US$219.4 million). As a result, there were no net foreign currency gains or losses arising from translati on of US denominated dollar borrowings recognised in the statements of financial performance in 2004. Accordingly, $37.4 million of unrealised foreign currency gains were deferred as at 31 December 2004 (2003: gains of $66.3 million). The ultimate foreign currency gain or losses will be included in the measurement of the specific hedged US dollar denominated sales revenues to be realised in the years 2005 through 2006.\n\nThe Australian dollar equivalents of foreign currency monetary items inclu ded in the statements of financial position to the extent that they are not effectively hedged are:\n\n84\n\nAnnual Report 2004" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8560758544438951, + "doc_id": "d683f4405b65918ba067ad9302873550b83c0f5444e86c367f987c4e7e5113e6", + "edit_distance": 0.08974358974358974, + "f1_score": 0.9649122807017544, + "meteor": 0.9708697844471414, + "precision": 0.9649122807017544, + "pred_md": "70\n\n## NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\nfor the year ended 31 December 2004\n\n## 22. Investments in Controlled Entities\n\n- 1 Beneficial interests in all controlled entities is 100% except for Kipper GS Pty Ltd in which two shares of the total issued capital of 9,246,353 shares are owned by a third party.\n- 2 Company acquired during the year.\n- 3 Company incorporated during the year.\n\nAnnual Report 2004", + "recall": 0.9649122807017544, + "true_md": "## NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STA TEMENTS\n\nfor the year ended 31 December 2004\n\n## 22. Investments in Controlled Entities\n\n1 Beneficial interests in all controlled entities is 100% except for Kipper GS Pty Ltd in which two shares of the total issued capital of 9,246,353 shares are owned by a third party.\n\n2 Company acquired during the year.\n\n3 Company incorporated during the year.\n\nAnnual Report 2004 70" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.13834368456410948, + "doc_id": "104c309c0f34517c76ec614f31f834421f508e619bba86db38496addd83b47ae", + "edit_distance": 0.8928571428571429, + "f1_score": 0.4878048780487804, + "meteor": 0.35782442748091603, + "precision": 0.5263157894736842, + "pred_md": "8\n\n## THE WORLD OF SANTOS\n\n## United States\n\nExploration\n\nProduction\n\nOil field\n\nGas field\n\nOil pipeline\n\nGas pipeline\n\n## Houtman Basin\n\nAnnual Report 2004", + "recall": 0.45454545454545453, + "true_md": "THE WORLD OF SANT OS\n\nEast Java\n\nWest Natuna Basin\n\nEgypt\n\nHoutman Basin\n\nDuntroon Basin\n\nOtway Basin\n\nSorell Basin\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\n8\n\nU nited States" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4138352071314741, + "doc_id": "d67e0a2780c79af72042af22bd9ce2f765514fa640d80e9c71278f9bc390c40a", + "edit_distance": 0.5333333333333333, + "f1_score": 0.6984126984126985, + "meteor": 0.7723740237917932, + "precision": 0.6111111111111112, + "pred_md": "36\n\n## B A L A N C E S H E E T AS AT 3 0 J U N E 2 0 0 0\n\nThe balance sheet should be read in conjunction with the accompanying notes on pages 21 to 42.", + "recall": 0.8148148148148148, + "true_md": "## BALANCE SHEET AS AT 30 JUNE 2000\n\nThe balance sheet should be read in conjunction with the accompanying notes on pages 21 to 42.\n\n36" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9618219135944381, + "doc_id": "4f95af3dc08127d47aba2619ccda80c7e9721522ccc0e03d320358527a6fc003", + "edit_distance": 0.18786692759295498, + "f1_score": 0.9785407725321889, + "meteor": 0.9779564365027678, + "precision": 0.987012987012987, + "pred_md": "24\n\n## Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations\n\nSlot revenues increased substantially in both 2003 and 2004. Improvements were the result of strong customer visitation, enhanced marketing programs, the impact of our Players Club rewards program, and the implementation of cashless gaming technology in 2003. Slot win percentages were consistent among all three periods.\n\nNon-casino revenue increased in 2004 primarily due to the enhanced amenities at our resorts. In addition, we were able to increase the pricing for our rooms and other non-gaming amenities. Our hotel results began to improve notably in the latter half of 2003, particularly at our Las Vegas Strip resorts. For the year ended December 31, 2004 REVPAR at our Las Vegas Strip resorts was $141 compared to $126 in 2003, an increase of 12%. Company-wide REVPAR was $121, an increase of 10% over 2003. This increase was largely rate driven, as occupancy increased from 91% to 92% and ADR increased from $121 to $132. In 2003, company-wide REVPAR increased 6% from $104 to $110, with most of the gains coming in the second half of the year.\n\n## Operating Results - Details of Certain Charges\n\nPre-opening and start-up expenses consisted of the following:\n\nPre-opening and start-up expenses related to Borgata represent our share of the operating results of Borgata prior to its July 2003 opening.\n\n## Restructuring costs (credit) consisted of the following:\n\nIn 2004, restructuring costs include $3 million for contract termination costs related to the Aqua restaurant at Bellagio and $2 million of workforce reduction costs at MGM Grand Detroit as a result of our efforts to minimize the impact of a gaming tax increase in Michigan.\n\nIn 2003, our primary restructuring activities included closing two marketing offices and terminating the related leases, terminating a lease agreement with a restaurant tenant at MGM Grand Las Vegas, and closing the Siegfried & Roy show, which resulted in a charge for employee severance costs.\n\nIn December 2002, we recorded a restructuring credit of $10 million related to a lease contract termination accrual originally recorded in June 2000 as we determined that payment under this obligation was not probable. We recorded $3 million of restructuring charges in December 2002 related to contract termination costs for a restaurant lease and the EFX! show at MGM Grand Las Vegas. In 2001, management responded to a decline in business volumes caused by the September 11 attacks by implementing cost containment strategies which included a significant reduction in payroll and a refocusing of several of our marketing programs. This resulted in a $22 million charge against earnings. As a result of improving business levels and our success at re-hiring a substantial number of", + "recall": 0.9702127659574468, + "true_md": "Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations 24\n\nSlot revenues increased substantially in both 2003 and 2004. Improvements were the result of strong customer visitation, enhanced marketing programs, the impact of our Players Club rewards program, and the implementation of cashless gaming technology in 2003. Slot win percentages were consistent among all three periods.\n\nNon-casino revenue increased in 2004 primarily due to the enhanced amenities at our resorts. In addition, we were able to increase the pricing for our rooms and other non-gaming amenities. Our hotel results began to improve notably in the latter half of 2003, particularly at our Las Vegas Strip resorts. For the year ended December 31, 2004 REVPAR at our Las Vegas Strip resorts was $141 compared to $126 in 2003, an increase of 12%. Company-wide REVPAR was $121, an increase of 10% over 2003. This increase was largely rate driven, as occupancy increased from 91% to 92% and ADR increased from $121 to $132. In 2003, company-wide REVPAR increased 6% from $104 to $110, with most of the gains coming in the second half of the year.\n\nPre-opening and start-up expenses consisted of the following:\n\nIn 2004, restructuring costs include $3 million for contract termination costs related to the Aqua restaurant at Bellagio and $2 million of workforce reduction costs at MGM Grand Detroit as a result of our efforts to minimize the impact of a gaming tax increase in Michigan.\n\nIn 2003, our primary restructuring activities included closing two marketing offices and terminating the related leases, terminating a lease agreement with a restaurant tenant at MGM Grand Las Vegas, and closing the Siegfried & Roy show, which resulted in a charge for employee severance costs.\n\nIn December 2002, we recorded a restructuring credit of $10 million related to a lease contract termination accrual originally recorded in June 2000 as we deter- mined that payment under this obligation was not probable. We recorded $3 million of restructuring charges in December 2002 related to contract termina- tion costs for a restaurant lease and the EFX! show at MGM Grand Las Vegas. In 2001, management responded to a decline in business volumes caused by the September 11 attacks by implementing cost containment strategies which included a significant reduction in payroll and a refocusing of several of our marketing programs. This resulted in a $22 million charge against earnings. As a result of improving business levels and our success at re-hiring a substantial number of \n\nPre-opening and start-up expenses related to Borgata represent our share of the operating results of Borgata prior to its July 2003 opening. \n\n## Operating Results – Details of Certain Charges\n\nRestructuring costs (credit) consisted of the following:" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7609651284508491, + "doc_id": "311480439c80dfd34276a7afaabda27b877a5bbb42b7258b5f823c27d97bb705", + "edit_distance": 0.7573529411764706, + "f1_score": 0.8722466960352423, + "meteor": 0.6705534289145981, + "precision": 0.9801980198019802, + "pred_md": "60\n\n## NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\nfor the year ended 31 December 2004\n\n## Details of major credit facilities\n\n## (a) Bank loans\n\nThe Santos Group has access to the following committed revolving facilities:\n\n## Revolving facilities at 31 December 2004\n\nRevolving bank loans bear interest at the relevant interbank reference rate plus 0.25% to 0.43%. The amount drawn at 31 December 2004 is $nil (2003: $nil).\n\n## Term facilities at 31 December 2004\n\nDrawdowns under the term loans are dependent upon expenditure for specific projects.\n\nTerm loans bear interest at the relevant interbank reference rate plus a margin of up to 0.75%. The amount drawn at 31 December 2004 is US$177.5 million (A$227.9 million) at a weighted average annual effective interest rate of 2.70%.\n\n## (b) Commercial paper\n\nThe Santos Group has an A$800.0 million (2003: A$800.0 million) Australian commercial paper program supported by the revolving facilities referred to in (a) above. At 31 December 2004, A$209.0 million (2003: A$110.0 million) of commercial paper is on issue and the weighted average annual effective interest rate is 5.61% (2003: 5.50%).\n\nAnnual Report 2004", + "recall": 0.7857142857142857, + "true_md": "NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STA TEMENTS\n\nfor the year ended 31 December 2004\n\nThe Santos Group has an A$800.0 million (2003: A$800.0 million) Australi an commercial paper program supported by the revolving facilities referred to in (a) above. At 31 December 2004, A$209.0 million (2003: A$110.0 million) of commercial paper is on issue and the weighted average annual effective interest rate is 5.61% (2003: 5.50%).\n\nTerm loans bear interest at the relevant interbank reference rate plus a margin of up to 0.75%. The amount drawn at 31 December 2004 is US$177.5 million (A$227.9 million) at a weighted average annua l effective interest rate of 2.70%.\n\nDrawdowns under the term loans are dependent upon expenditure f or specific projects.\n\nRevolving bank loans bear interest at the relevant interbank referen ce rate plus 0.25% to 0.43%. The amount drawn at 31 December 2004 is $nil (2003: $nil).\n\nThe Santos Group has access to the following committed revolving faciliti es:\n\nThe interest-bearing amounts owing to controlled entities are for loans made in the ordinary course of business on normal market terms and conditions for an ind efinite period.\n\n## Details of major credit facilities\n\n## (a) Bank loans\n\n## Revolving facilities at 31 December 2004\n\n## Term facilities at 31 December 2004\n\n## (b) Commercial paper\n\nAnnual Report 2004 60" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8740644543272937, + "doc_id": "5a7f5efb80cd3ed39349d425990803093e4e01ca97d56e13b42d983a191f90e6", + "edit_distance": 0.18377088305489261, + "f1_score": 0.9437229437229437, + "meteor": 0.9745504549059385, + "precision": 0.919831223628692, + "pred_md": "## OPERATIONS REVIEW\n\n## B A S E E X PA N S I O N W O R K S A N D E N V I R O N M E N TA L M A N A G E M E N T\n\nWork on Dampier\n\nBase expansion commenced on 9 October and will be largely complete by June 2001, involving a capital budget of $13m.\n\nThe principle activities and facility developments involved in the expansion are:\n\n## A. DREDGING\n\nApproximately 700,000 m3 of material is to be dredged in King Bay to form an entrance channel, vessel berths, cyclone moorings and to provide access to the slipway.\n\nThe experience of Woodside constructing their nearby base in 1981 indicates that two types of dredges will be required, a Cutter Suction to remove the soft unconsolidated material (approx.70%) and a Dipper Dredge (barge mounted back-hoe) to remove harder consolidated material.\n\nThe Cutter Suction dredge size will be deliberately modest due to onshore spoil management requirement and environmental considerations.\n\nThe Dipper Dredge will be the largest of its type in the world, and will be an ideal remedial dredging tool using the experience gained from the earlier Woodside project.\n\nThe layout of the Base has been very much driven by the desire to avoid or minimize blasting while fulfilling functional objectives.\n\nThe entrance channel into the Mermaid Base will be 30 m wide and dredged to 6 m below chart datum. The dredge spoil will be pumped ashore and used as fill around the Base.\n\nDredges are expected to be onsite for approximately 7 months commencing mid November.\n\n## B. QUAY WALL ( BERTH 1)\n\nMarket research and customer needs have caused Mermaid to relocate and redesign the main berth to accommodate a wider range of vessels than originally contemplated. The berth is now located in deeper water with better vessel access.\n\nThe regional offshore fleet characteristics have been changing in terms of vessel size. There are now four vessels operating in the region with 12,000 to 18,000 hp. When design commenced there were none of this size.\n\nThe depth alongside Berth 1 will be 7.5m. King Bay has a statistical average extreme low tide (MLWS) of 0.9 m, the occurrence of which can be expressed in hours per month. The largest", + "recall": 0.9688888888888889, + "true_md": "## OPERATIONS REVIEW\n\nWork on Dampier Base expansion commenced on 9 October and will be largely complete by June 2001, involving a capital budget of $13m. BASE EXPANSION WORKS AND ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT\n\nThe principle activities and facility developments involved in the expansion are:\n\nApproximately 700,000 m3 of material is to be dredged in King Bay to form an entrance channel, vessel berths, cyclone moorings and to provide access to the slipway.\n\nThe experience of Woodside constructing their nearby base in 1981 indicates that two types of dredges will be required, a Cutter Suction to remove the soft unconsolidated material (approx.70%) and a Dipper Dredge (barge mounted back-hoe) to remove harder consolidated material.\n\nThe Cutter Suction dredge size will be deliberately modest due to onshore spoil management requirement and environmental considerations. \n\nThe Dipper Dredge will be the largest of its type in the world, and will be an ideal remedial dredging tool using the experience gained from the earlier Woodside project.\n\nThe layout of the Base has been very much driven by the desire to avoid or minimize blasting while fulfilling functional objectives.\n\nThe entrance channel into the Mermaid Base will be 30 m wide and dredged to 6 m below chart datum. The dredge spoil will be pumped ashore and used as fill around the Base.\n\nDredges are expected to be onsite for approximately 7 months commencing mid November.\n\nMarket research and customer needs have caused Mermaid to relocate and redesign the main berth to accommodate a wider range of vessels than originally contemplated. The berth is now located in deeper water with better vessel access.\n\nThe regional offshore fleet characteristics have been changing in terms of vessel size. There are now four vessels operating in the region with 12,000 to 18,000 hp. When design commenced there were none of this size. \n\nThe depth alongside Berth 1 will be 7.5m. King Bay has a statistical average extreme low tide (MLWS) of 0.9 m, the occurrence of which can be expressed in hours per month. The largest\n\n## B. QUAY WALL ( BERTH 1)\n\n## A. DREDGING\n\n10" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8078728054006045, + "doc_id": "71590e43b49661a1b831d1d65449fac61c9f1abc2f222a9f0bdd575e1ece2701", + "edit_distance": 0.2553191489361702, + "f1_score": 0.927536231884058, + "meteor": 0.9597288171362246, + "precision": 0.9696969696969697, + "pred_md": "The Santos Group operates predominantly in one business, namely the exploration, development, production, transportation and marketing of hydrocarbons. Revenue is derived from the sale of gas and liquid hydrocarbons and the transportation of crude oil.\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\n81", + "recall": 0.8888888888888888, + "true_md": "Annual Report 2004 81\n\nThe Santos Group operates predominantly in one business, namely the explor ation, development, production, transportation and marketing of hydrocarbons. Revenue is derived from the sale of gas and liquid hydrocarbon s and the transportation of crude oil." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7820297945116218, + "doc_id": "cd5e0a8e78945bd3066f8fcb336ca7a6927e24fdec292fabeaaebe78d65c1b61", + "edit_distance": 0.16560509554140126, + "f1_score": 0.9202453987730062, + "meteor": 0.8695576296543001, + "precision": 0.9433962264150944, + "pred_md": "## S.L. Garrison knows how to grow things.\n\nIn fact, two of his businesses specialize in growth. As founder/partner of Bar-G Feedyard and the Garrison and Townsend Inc. hybrid seed company, Garrison has a keen perspective on what it takes to build successful companies. His other interests include Backyard Adventures, a fast-rising maker of high-quality playground equipment.\n\n'I've been a customer of Hereford State Bank since 1966, when we were first starting out,' says Garrison. 'As our company grew, the bank was always willing to grow with us to meet our loan needs. Of course, we tried to be good customers and pay them back!\n\n'I've owned First Financial Bankshares stock since the early '80s ... they are a strong company. They've paid good dividends, the value has grown, and their strategy of acquiring solid banks has been good for shareholders.\n\n'When they acquire a bank, they keep a local board of directors for that bank - that's important for strong support of the community. They are leaders who help grow the communities they serve.\n\n'As with all businesses, it's people that make the difference, and First Financial Bankshares' emphasis on making sure they have quality, informed people from top to bottom is obvious. They understand business, and they are active and involved in community affairs. No matter what the need, they always step in to help.'\n\nS.L. Garrison Founder/Partner Bar-G Feedyard Garrison and Townsend Inc. Hereford, Texas\n\nS.L. Garrison Founder/Partner Bar-G Feedyard Garrison and Townsend Inc. Hereford, Texas\n\n## ' As with all businesses, it' s people that make the difference. '.\n\n7", + "recall": 0.8982035928143712, + "true_md": "## S.L. Garrison knows how to grow things.\n\nIn fact, two of his businesses specialize in growth. As founder/partner of Bar-G Feedyard and the Garrison and Townsend Inc. hybrid seed com- pany, Garrison has a keen perspective on what it takes to build successful companies. His other interests include Backyard Adventures, a fast-ris- ing maker of high-quality playground equipment.\n\n“I've been a customer of Hereford State Bank since 1966, when we were first starting out,” says Garrison. “As our company grew, the bank was always willing to grow with us to meet our loan needs. Of course, we tried to be good customers and pay them back!\n\n“I've owned First Financial Bankshares stock since the early ’80s ... they are a strong company. They’ve paid good dividends, the value has grown, and their strategy of acquiring solid banks has been good for shareholders.\n\n“When they acquire a bank, they keep a local board of directors for that bank – that’s important for strong support of the community. They are leaders who help grow the communities they serve.\n\n“As with all businesses, it’s people that make the difference, and First Financial Bankshares’ empha- sis on making sure they have quality, informed people from top to bottom is obvious. They under- stand business, and they are active and involved in community affairs. No matter what the need, they always step in to help.”\n\n7\n\nS.L. Garrison Founder/Partner Bar-G Feedyard Garrison and Townsend Inc. Hereford, Texas\n\n“As with all businesses, it’ people that make the difference.”." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5445426799702716, + "doc_id": "8e998cc5590fc58e323525b2111178db2fbb60345ec761c2a334e519106dd2fa", + "edit_distance": 0.4606741573033708, + "f1_score": 0.7499999999999999, + "meteor": 0.6332947976878612, + "precision": 0.8571428571428571, + "pred_md": "HON INDUSTRIES Inc. and SUBSIDIARIES\n\n## Summary of Unaudited Quarterly Results of Operations (continued)\n\n## Investor Information\n\n## COMMON STOCK MARKET PRICES AND DIVIDENDS ( UNAUDITED) QUARTERLY 2003 - 2002\n\n## COMMON STOCK MARKET PRICE AND PRICE/EARNINGS\n\n## RATIO (UNAUDITED) FISCAL YEARS 2003 - 1993\n\n*Adjusted for the effect of stock splits\n\n55", + "recall": 0.6666666666666666, + "true_md": "## Summary of Unaudited Quarterly Results of Operations (continued)\n\n## Investor Information\n\n## COMMON STOCK MARKET PRICES AND DIVIDENDS (UNAUDITED) QUARTERLY 2003 – 2002\n\n## COMMON STOCK MARKET PRICE AND PRICE/EARNINGS RATIO (UNAUDITED) FISCAL YEARS 2003 – 1993\n\n*Adjusted for the effect of stock splits\n\n55\n\nH O N I N D U S T R I E S I n c . a n d S U B S I D I A R I E S" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8933196223362788, + "doc_id": "8b24ab572844afae7e23321690de0ee706d239281be41e7b1cbec7db7b39e8ee", + "edit_distance": 0.7035490605427975, + "f1_score": 0.9671179883945841, + "meteor": 0.7738704833171406, + "precision": 0.9765625, + "pred_md": "14\n\n## FINANCIAL OVERVIEW\n\n## ACHIEVING MOMENTOUS RESULTS\n\nJAMES J. MURREN President, CFO & Treasurer\n\nJAMES J. MURREN President, CFO & Treasurer\n\nGAMAL AZIZ President, MGM Grand\n\nGAMAL AZIZ President, MGM Grand\n\nGLENN BONNER Senior VP & CIO, MGM MIRAGE Information Systems\n\nGEORGE R. BOYER III President, MGM Grand Detroit\n\nJOSEPH BRUNINI President, MGM Grand Resorts National Marketing\n\nJEFF DAHL President, Beau Rivage\n\no some, momentum is intangible - a product of fortune, a power that cannot be harnessed, and typically a short-lived sensation. Others wonder how they lost their momentum. At MGM MIRAGE, we are constantly thinking of better ways to maximize it. We believe momentum is a product of effort and excellence, a force which can be observed and measured, and something that can be a lasting and defining quality of a great company. Our 2004 results are a clear reminder of the power of moving forward. Our financial policies have long been designed to create and maintain momentum. By investing in our best assets and thinking of new ways to add value to our shareholders, we are able to redefine our Company's place in history every year - and 2004 was a defining time even by our exacting standards. T\n\nSo how did we get here? Last year, we discussed the importance of focus, and the laser-like precision with which we operated our resorts in 2004 affirms the power of our single-minded dedication to excellence. The hard work of our 40,000 employees resulted in a record year in almost every regard. Net revenues increased 10% over 2003 to a record $4.2 billion, with 12% REVPAR growth at our Las Vegas resorts; property-level EBITDA was an all-time record, nearly $1.5 billion, and 23% higher than the prior year. We exceeded the expectations of every market observer, and significantly beat our forecasts. And 2004 will not be a zenith year for your company - rather, we expect to continue our excellent operating performance, re-invest the resulting cash flow to stimulate future growth and move forward to new defining moments.\n\nHow do we re-define a company that is already at the top of its industry? First, we continue to execute on our vision for our existing resorts - to continually evolve and increase the 'Wow!' factor for our guests. This strategy requires investment, and we will ensure that our resorts are not only world-class, but best-in-class. Examples include the beautiful Spa T ower at Bellagio and KÀ , the latest spectacular creation in collaboration with Cirque du Soleil.", + "recall": 0.9578544061302682, + "true_md": "GAMAL AZIZ President, MGM Grand \n\nGLENN BONNER Senior VP & CIO, MGM MIRAGE Information Systems\n\nGEORGE R. BOYER III President, MGM Grand Detroit\n\nJOSEPH BRUNINI President, MGM Grand Resorts National Marketing\n\nJEFF DAHL President, Beau Rivage\n\n14\n\nJAMES J. MURREN President, CFO & Treasurer\n\nHow do we re-define a company that is already at the top of its industry? First, we continue to execute on our vision for our existing resorts – to continually evolve and increase the “Wow!” factor for our guests. This strategy requires investment, and we will ensure that our resorts are not only world-class, but best-in-class. Examples include the beautiful Spa Tower at Bellagio and KÀ , the latest spectacular creation in collaboration with Cirque du Soleil.\n\nSo how did we get here? Last year, we discussed the importance of focus, and the laser-like precision with which we operated our resorts in 2004 affirms the power of our single-minded dedication to excellence. The hard work of our 40,000 employees resulted in a record year in almost every regard. Net revenues increased 10% over 2003 to a record $4.2 billion, with 12% REVPAR growth at our Las Vegas resorts; property-level EBITDA was an all-time record, nearly $1.5 billion, and 23% higher than the prior year. We exceeded the expectations of every market observer, and significantly beat our forecasts. And 2004 will not be a zenith year for your company – rather, we expect to continue our excellent operating performance, re-invest the resulting cash flow to stimulate future growth and move forward to new defining moments. \n\no some, momentum is intangible – a product of fortune, a power that cannot be harnessed, and typically a short-lived sensation. Others wonder how they lost their momentum. At MGM MIRAGE, we are con- stantly thinking of better ways to maximize it. We believe momentum is a product of effort and excellence, a force which can be observed and measured, and something that can be a lasting and defining quality of a great company. Our 2004 results are a clear reminder of the power of moving forward. Our financial policies have long been designed to create and maintain momentum. By investing in our best assets and thinking of new ways to add value to our shareholders, we are able to redefine our Company’s place in history every year – and 2004 was a defin- ing time even by our exacting standards. T\n\n## ACHIEVING MOMENTOUS RESULTS\n\n## FINANCIAL OVERVIEW" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "a485fa59a17f314312ef1e17b8547be39d23dccd8bd23cfeafb98241163e0b0d", + "edit_distance": 0.7035490605427975, + "f1_score": 0.9671179883945841, + "meteor": 0.7738704833171406, + "precision": 0.9765625, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.9578544061302682, + "true_md": "" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9620987387291967, + "doc_id": "28896ae200e590a50022ee2fdf1077b0765919fbd28e0c30da4907cc31205bbd", + "edit_distance": 0.10144927536231885, + "f1_score": 0.9845094664371772, + "meteor": 0.9839169059877645, + "precision": 0.9896193771626297, + "pred_md": "## RENAULT-NISSAN ALLIANCE\n\n## Allied for Independent Success\n\nVarious Models\n\n## From the B Platform\n\nMARCH/MICRA\n\nMARCH/MICRA\n\n## From the C Platform\n\nMEGANE\n\nMEGANE\n\nSERENA\n\nSERENA\n\nNISSAN Value-Up has set aggressive objectives for sustainable growth at Nissan, and Alliance support is a key to attaining those objectives. While its role is not rigidly defined, the Alliance will nevertheless be an integral player in the process.\n\nA major change in the Alliance is that Carlos Ghosn now serves as CEO of Renault and Nissan. As the chair of the executive committees for both companies, he has an invaluable dual perspective that will help us solve major issues, identify fresh opportunities, and create more strategic discussions within the Alliance board. 'Synergy' is an overused word, but in this case an entirely appropriate one.\n\nAn example of this purposeful fusion is in benchmarking competition. Confidentiality effectively prevents the accurate comparison of performance between two different companies. However, the Alliance transparency policy between Nissan and Renault makes such disclosures natural and beneficial, presenting opportunities to identify avenues of progress from two angles.\n\nEngineering is one specific area where the Alliance presents opportunities for better coordination and resource optimization. Powertrains offer a practical example by combining the expertise and industrial capacity of the current Renault and Nissan workforce, both partners can upgrade the quantity and quality of their output. When engineers challenge each other, better concepts are the rule rather than the exception.\n\nAnother prospective area for synergy is in General Overseas Markets (GOM). Further optimization of the Alliance will help us to penetrate these widely dispersed markets, particularly where one partner is present and the other is not. For totally new markets, both companies will meet to decide which will enter first. This is more than just a sales and marketing strategy; it is also about production optimization. One company can use the other's production capacity to test a new market, which lowers cost and risk.\n\nA key here is that both companies must operate in tandem. We will only pursue opportunities that offer a win-win situation. If it is not mutually beneficial, we will either find a way to balance the equation or abandon the project.\n\nIn 2004, the Alliance released its Vision-Destination paper to clarify the cooperative aspects that would make both partners successful. It reinforced this unique partnership and set precise targets for the Alliance, including becoming one of the top three automotive groups in quality, key technologies, and total operating profit. Vision-Destination created a positive environment of intramural competition.\n\nThe real importance of the Alliance lies in its potential. The two companies do not exist in separate worlds, but they do possess different cultures and strengths. Renault is strong in Europe, which is good for Nissan. Nissan is strong in Japan and North America, which is good for Renault. We can challenge each other, and in doing so, drive ourselves to greater heights.\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\n31\n\nWHO WE ARE", + "recall": 0.9794520547945206, + "true_md": "## Allied for Independent Success\n\nNISSAN Value-Up has set aggressive objectives for sustainable growth at Nissan, and Alliance support is a key to attaining those objectives. While its role is not rigidly defined, the Alliance will nevertheless be an integral player in the process. \n\nA major change in the Alliance is that Carlos Ghosn now serves as CEO of Renault and Nissan. As the chair of the executive committees for both companies, he has an invaluable dual perspective that will help us solve major issues, identify fresh opportunities, and create more strategic discussions within the Alliance board. “Synergy” is an overused word, but in this case an entirely appropriate one.\n\nAn example of this purposeful fusion is in benchmarking competition. Confidentiality effectively prevents the accurate comparison of performance between two different companies. However, the Alliance transparency policy between Nissan and Renault makes such disclosures natural and beneficial, presenting opportunities to identify avenues of progress from two angles.\n\nEngineering is one specific area where the Alliance presents opportunities for better coordination and resource optimization. Powertrains offer a practical example by combining the expertise and industrial capacity of the current Renault and Nissan workforce, both partners can upgrade the quantity and quality of their output. When engineers challenge each other, better concepts are the rule rather than the exception.\n\nAnother prospective area for synergy is in General Overseas Markets (GOM). Further optimization of the Alliance will help us to penetrate these widely dispersed markets, particularly where one partner is present and the other is not. For totally new markets, both companies will meet to decide which will enter first. This is more than just a sales and marketing strategy; it is also about production optimization. One company can use the other’s production capacity to test a new market, which lowers cost and risk. \n\nA key here is that both companies must operate in tandem. We will only pursue opportunities that offer a win-win situation. If it is not mutually beneficial, we will either find a way to balance the equation or abandon the project.\n\nIn 2004, the Alliance released its Vision-Destination paper to clarify the cooperative aspects that would make both partners successful. It reinforced this unique partnership and set precise targets for the Alliance, including becoming one of the top three automotive groups in quality, key technologies, and total operating profit. Vision-Destination created a positive environment of intramural competition. \n\nThe real importance of the Alliance lies in its potential. The two companies do not exist in separate worlds, but they do possess different cultures and strengths. Renault is strong in Europe, which is good for Nissan. Nissan is strong in Japan and North America, which is good for Renault. We can challenge each other, and in doing so, drive ourselves to greater heights.\n\nWHO WE ARE\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 31\n\n## From the C Platform\n\nSERENA\n\nMEGANE\n\nMARCH/MICRA\n\nCLIO\n\n## RENAULT-NISSAN ALLIANCE\n\n## Various Models\n\n## From the B Platform" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8236606776438821, + "doc_id": "bf71bee8f2a1ede63db319a3453f547fcd3d3db601474c559d7139fde8e80e97", + "edit_distance": 0.5430711610486891, + "f1_score": 0.9052631578947369, + "meteor": 0.8080505920254824, + "precision": 0.9347826086956522, + "pred_md": "- /H17073 Marsh, Inc. is a major distributor of The Hartford's group benefits plans for mid-sized businessesa key growth area for The Hartford. Joe Axelrod, senior account executive, third from right, and Kevin Szott, group sales representative, far right, work in partnership with senior executives from\n\nMarsh's employee benefits practice. The team includes, left to right, Senior Vice Presidents Kerry King, Robert Lustberg, Maria McHugh and, second from right, Eric Jacobson. Szott, who is legally blind, also works with The Hartford's Team Ability, a group of company-sponsored athletes with disabilities.\n\n- /H17075 I n 2001, The Hartford introduced a new category of commercial coverage called CyberFlex, TM designed to protect small and mid-sized businesses against e-business risks such as e-mail viruses and Web site business interruption. Deirdre Barbee, The Hartford's middle market manager in Charlotte, N.C., Mike Lesniak, Charlotte regional vice president, far left, and VIP agent\n\nCameron Harris, president of Cameron M. Harris & Company, second from right, explain CyberFlex's benefits to Todd W. Mansfield, CEO of Crosland, a Charlotte property developer and a 13-year customer of The Hartford. Product innovations such as CyberFlex allow The Hartford to provide riskmanagement solutions for customers as their businesses evolve.\n\n16", + "recall": 0.8775510204081632, + "true_md": "- GLYPH<H17073> Marsh, Inc. is a major distributor of The Hartford’s group benefits plans for mid-sized businesses— a key growth area for The Hartford. Joe Axelrod, senior account exec- utive, third from right, and Kevin Szott, group sales representative, far right, work in partnership with senior executives from \n\n- GLYPH<H17075> I n 2001, The Hartford introduced a new category of commercial coverage called CyberFlex, TM designed to protect small and mid-sized businesses against e-business risks such as e-mail viruses and Web site business interruption. Deirdre Barbee, The Hartford’s middle market manager in Charlotte, N.C., Mike Lesniak, Charlotte regional vice president, far left, and VIP agent\n\nCameron Harris, president of Cameron M. Harris & Company, second from right, explain CyberFlex’s benefits to Todd W. Mansfield, CEO of Crosland, a Charlotte property developer and a 13-year customer of The Hartford. Product innova- tions such as CyberFlex allow The Hartford to provide risk- management solutions for cus- tomers as their businesses evolve.\n\nMarsh’s employee benefits prac- tice. The team includes, left to right, Senior Vice Presidents Kerry King, Robert Lustberg, Maria McHugh and, second from right, Eric Jacobson. Szott, who is legally blind, also works with The Hartford’s Team Ability, a group of company-sponsored athletes with disabilities.\n\n16" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9119178063611386, + "doc_id": "4eda3ed553c051c7746234e3ac1a40fcb5605cb7897066a9500db27679082cbf", + "edit_distance": 0.17714285714285713, + "f1_score": 0.9533468559837728, + "meteor": 0.9528817457104369, + "precision": 0.9631147540983607, + "pred_md": "selected\n\n## financial data\n\n*53 Weeks\n\n- **Adjusted for the impact of EITF 01-9, 'Accounting for Consideration Given by a Vendor to a Customer (Including a Reseller of the Vendor's Products).' EITF 01-9 relates to the income statement classification of advertising and promotional costs. The company applied the consensus as of the beginning of fiscal 2002, and reclassified certain marketing expenses as reductions of revenue. The marketing expenses that were reclassified included consumer coupon redemption, off-invoice allowances, and various marketing performance funds. There was no impact to operating income or net earnings. The impact of the reclassification on other years presented was a reduction in net sales of $238,868 in 2001 and $201,283 in 2000.\n\nmanagement's discussion and analysis of\n\n## financial condition and results of operations (In Thousands of Dollars, Except Per Share Amounts)\n\n## Critical Accounting Policies\n\nHormel Foods' discussion and analysis of its financial condition and results of operations are based upon the company's consolidated financial statements, which have been prepared in accordance with U.S. generally accepted accounting principles. The preparation of these financial statements requires the company to make estimates and judgments that affect the reported amounts of assets, liabilities, revenues and expenses, and related disclosure of contingent assets and liabilities. The company evaluates, on an on-going basis, its estimates for reasonableness as changes occur in its business environment. The company bases its estimates on experience, the use of independent third-party specialists, and various other assumptions that are believed to be reasonable under the circumstances, the results of which form the basis for making judgments about the carrying values of assets and liabilities that are not readily apparent from other sources. Actual results may differ from these estimates under different assumptions or conditions.\n\n16\n\nHormel Foods Corporation\n\nCritical accounting policies are defined as those that are reflective of significant judgments, estimates, and uncertainties, and potentially result in materially different results under different assumptions and conditions. Hormel Foods believes the following are its critical accounting policies:\n\nInventory valuation: The company values its pork inventories at the lower of cost or USDA market prices (primal values). When the carcasses are disassembled and transferred from primal processing to various manufacturing departments, the primal values, as adjusted by the company for product specifications and further processing, become the basis for calculating inventory values. In addition, substantially all inventoriable expenses, packaging, and supplies are valued by the last-in, first-out method.\n\nTurkey raw materials are represented by the deboned meat quantities realized at the end of the boning lines. The company values these raw materials using a concept referred to as the 'meat cost pool.' The meat cost pool is determined by combining the cost to grow turkeys with processing costs, less any net sales revenue", + "recall": 0.9437751004016064, + "true_md": "## selected financial data\n\n## financial condition and results of operations (In Thousands of Dollars, Except Per Share Amounts)\n\nmanagement’s discussion and analysis of\n\n*53 Weeks\n\n**Adjusted for the impact of EITF 01-9, “Accounting for Consideration Given by a Vendor to a Customer (Including a Reseller of the Vendor’s Products).” EITF 01-9 relates to the income statement classification of advertising and promotional costs. The company applied the consensus as of the beginning of fiscal 2002, and reclassified certain marketing expenses as reductions of revenue. The marketing expenses that were reclassified included consumer coupon redemption, off-invoice allowances, and various marketing performance funds. There was no impact to operating income or net earnings. The impact of the reclassification on other years presented was a reduction in net sales of $238,868 in 2001 and $201,283 in 2000.\n\nHormel Foods’ discussion and analysis of its financial condition and results of operations are based upon the company’s consolidated financial statements, which have been prepared in accordance with U.S. generally accepted accounting principles. The preparation of these financial statements requires the company to make estimates and judgments that affect the reported amounts of assets, liabilities, revenues and expenses, and related disclosure of contingent assets and liabilities. The company evaluates, on an on-going basis, its estimates for reasonableness as changes occur in its business environment. The company bases its estimates on experi- ence, the use of independent third-party specialists, and various other assumptions that are believed to be reasonable under the circumstances, the results of which form the basis for making judgments about the carrying values of assets and liabilities that are not readily apparent from other sources. Actual results may differ from these estimates under different assumptions or conditions.\n\nCritical accounting policies are defined as those that are reflective of significant judgments, estimates, and uncertainties, and poten- tially result in materially different results under different assumptions and conditions. Hormel Foods believes the following are its critical accounting policies:\n\nInventory valuation: The company values its pork inventories at the lower of cost or USDA market prices (primal values). When the carcasses are disassembled and transferred from primal pro- cessing to various manufacturing departments, the primal values, as adjusted by the company for product specifications and further processing, become the basis for calculating inventory values. In addition, substantially all inventoriable expenses, packaging, and supplies are valued by the last-in, first-out method.\n\nTurkey raw materials are represented by the deboned meat quanti- ties realized at the end of the boning lines. The company values these raw materials using a concept referred to as the “meat cost pool.” The meat cost pool is determined by combining the cost to grow turkeys with processing costs, less any net sales revenue\n\n16 Hormel Foods Corporation\n\n## Critical Accounting Policies" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.734860912359517, + "doc_id": "cf0652fa98a94a75d543686c66df029bae2ecc861328ffb11213e113bd9d72a2", + "edit_distance": 0.2946058091286307, + "f1_score": 0.8704663212435234, + "meteor": 0.9651109997133717, + "precision": 0.7706422018348624, + "pred_md": "## (16) Ta x e s\n\nThe sources of (loss)/income before income taxes are presented as follows:\n\nTotal income tax benefit/(expense) for the years ended December 31, 2000, 1999 and 1998 was allocated as follows:\n\nThe income tax benefit/(expense) from operations consisted of the following:\n\nAs a result of the formation of the Company a portion of the stock compensation cost re c o rded in 1996 became a temporary diff e rence for which the Company recognized a gross deferred tax asset of $1.4 million in 1997. A valuation allowance for this deferred tax asset was established. During 1997, certain of the stock options were exercised resulting in a tax deduction of $1.0 million. Because of the tax loss position of the Company in 1997 in the United States, this tax deduction was not utilized and increased the tax loss carry f o rw a rd. The Company established a valuation allowance for the deferred tax asset resulting from the tax loss carry f o rw a rd in the United States. This tax loss carry f o w a rd was utilized in 1998 and there f o re, $951,553 of the tax benefit was re c o rded as an adjustment to additional paid in capital. r\n\n3 7", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "As a result of the formation of the Company a portion of the stock compensation cost re c o rded in 1996 became a temporary diff e rence for which the Company recognized a gross deferred tax asset of $1.4 million in 1997. A valuation allowance for this deferred tax asset was established. During 1997, certain of the stock options were exercised resulting in a tax deduction of $1.0 million. Because of the tax loss position of the Company in 1997 in the United States, this tax deduction was not utilized and increased the tax loss carry f o rw a rd. The Company established a valuation allowance for the deferred tax asset resulting from the tax loss carry f o rw a rd in the United States. This tax loss carry f o rw a rd was utilized in 1998 and there f o re, $951,553 of the tax benefit was re c o rded as an adjustment to additional paid in capital. \n\n3 7\n\n(16) Ta x e s" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9577443096668984, + "doc_id": "15c05cad74911009807750468bb917f9d2d22c5539d38a29028d4f29c5f0aadc", + "edit_distance": 0.40025252525252525, + "f1_score": 0.9879194630872481, + "meteor": 0.9609379195130289, + "precision": 0.9865951742627346, + "pred_md": "20\n\n## ACHIEVING INNOVATIVE COMMERCIALISATION\n\nOn top of exploration and new ventures growth opportunities, Santos has a large inventory of gas fields that are yet to be committed to gas contracts. These fields, known as contingent resources, represent significant opportunities for Santos.\n\nEach year Santos works towards commercialising these fields by finding new gas contracts or extending existing contracts so that they can be booked as Proven (1P) or Proven plus Probable (2P) reserves.\n\nSantos' contingent gas resources are largely located offshore southern Australia and Western Australia, in the Bonaparte Basin offshore northern Australia and onshore Papua New Guinea.\n\nSantos continued to deliver on gas commercialisation during 2004, commercialising 27 million boe during the year. Santos also achieved positive contract price reviews for gas sales that were well above the indexed levels.\n\n## UNIQUE ENERGY HUBS DELIVER GAS SWAPS\n\nSome of the most important gas commercialisation achievements for the year were the innovative gas swaps agreements that were only possible because of Santos' unique spread of assets across key Australian gas hubs.\n\nSantos and the other South West Queensland Gas Producers announced a coal seam methane gas swap in May to allow each party to supply the other party's contractual obligations in different states via the Moomba gas hub in central Australia. This arrangement for 200 PJ meant that Origin could avoid building a pipeline and that Santos could capture a share of the saving.\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\nGas swapping will commence in 2005 and could continue until the end of 2011.\n\nA second gas swap, from eastern Queensland to Gippsland, moved gas through three states and five joint ventures, expanding market horizons for partners and providing backup options to customers.\n\n## EXPANDED CASINO CONTRACT ENHANCES VALUE\n\nThe commercialisation of the Casino gas field in the Otway Basin, offshore southern Australia, continued during 2004 with an increase in the quantity of gas being sold under the initial term sheet signed in September 2003 with TXU for 293 PJ.\n\nWhen the project was sanctioned in October 2004, the joint venture announced an extension to the original Gas Sales Agreement to supply up to 420 PJ of gas, and possibly another 105 PJ, over 12 years for the Victorian or South Australian markets.\n\nThe Casino contracts are unique in that the reserves have been contracted prior to the field being fully appraised to confirm the quantity of gas available. This has allowed the joint venture to undertake appraisal drilling and near field exploration programs with the knowledge that all of the gas likely to be discovered will be taken, thereby significantly reducing the risk. This shortens the time from discovery to production and delivers profits to Santos and its shareholders sooner.\n\n## WA CONTRACTS FAST-TRACK JOHN BROOKES\n\nSantos and its co-venturer Apache won two significant gas contracts in Western Australia\n\n## ENERGY HUB STRATEGY\n\nwhich resulted in the fast tracking and sanctioning of the John Brookes gas field in the Carnarvon Basin.\n\nThe successful appraisal of the field in late 2003 and early 2004 significantly increased the available gas reserves. The decision to bring the field into production by mid-2005 enabled active marketing of gas above that already allocated to support the declining East Spar field.\n\nIn a separate move, designed to enhance future commercialisation opportunities, the joint venture equity interests in the East Spar and the John Brookes fields were aligned through an acquisition program which created an important production hub at Varanus Island.\n\nJohn Brookes has an expected field life of more than 15 years which could be further extended by a development of the Reindeer field in later years.\n\nIn the first contract, the joint venture agreed to supply Newcrest Mining with 120 PJ of gas over 15 years at a maximum rate of 25 TJ per day. Newcrest will use the gas for power generation at the Telfer gold mine in the Pilbara region of Western Australia.\n\nThe second John Brookes contract is to supply 58 PJ of gas over 20 years to EDL to supply four gasfired powered stations under construction as part of its West Kimberly Power project in Western Australia.\n\nThe gas will be converted to LNG at a new facility to be built at Karratha. The LNG will then be transported by road tankers to fuel the gas-fired power stations in Broome, Derby, Fitzroy Crossing and Halls Creek. The contract will commence in the first half of 2006.", + "recall": 0.989247311827957, + "true_md": "## ACHIEVING INNOVATIVE COMMERCIALISATION\n\nOn top of exploration and new ventures growth opportunities, Santos has a large inventory of gas fields that are yet to be committed to gas contracts. These fields, known as contingent resources, represent significant opportunities for Santos. \n\nEach year Santos works towards commercialising these fields by finding new gas contracts or extending existing contracts so that they can be booked as Proven (1P) or Proven plus Probable (2P) reserves.\n\nSantos’ contingent gas resources are largely located offshore southern Australia and Western Australia, in the Bonaparte Basin offshore northern Australia and onshore Papua New Guinea. \n\nSantos continued to deliver on gas commercialisation during 2004, commercialising 27 million boe during the year. Santos also achieved positive contract price reviews for gas sales that were well above the indexed levels.\n\nSome of the most important gas commercialisation achievements for the year were the innovative gas swaps agreements that were only possible because of Santos’ unique spread of assets across key Australian gas hubs.\n\nSantos and the other South West Queensland Gas Producers announced a coal seam methane gas swap in May to allow each party to supply the other party’s contractual obligations in different states via the Moomba gas hub in central Australia. This arrangement for 200 PJ meant that Origin could avoid building a pipeline and that Santos could capture a share of the saving.\n\nSantos and its co-venturer Apache won two significant gas contracts in Western Australia\n\nThe Casino contracts are unique in that the reserves have been contracted prior to the field being fully appraised to confirm the quantity of gas available. This has allowed the joint venture to undertake appraisal drilling and near field exploration programs with the knowledge that all of the gas likely to be discovered will be taken, thereby significantly reducing the risk. This shortens the time from discovery to production and delivers profits to Santos and its shareholders sooner.\n\nWhen the project was sanctioned in October 2004, the joint venture announced an extension to the original Gas Sales Agreement to supply up to 420 PJ of gas, and possibly another 105 PJ, over 12 years for the Victorian or South Australian markets.\n\nThe commercialisation of the Casino gas field in the Otway Basin, offshore southern Australia, continued during 2004 with an increase in the quantity of gas being sold under the initial term sheet signed in September 2003 with TXU for 293 PJ. \n\nA second gas swap, from eastern Queensland to Gippsland, moved gas through three states and five joint ventures, expanding market horizons for partners and providing backup options to customers.\n\nGas swapping will commence in 2005 and could continue until the end of 2011.\n\n## EXPANDED CASINO CONTRACT ENHANCES VALUE\n\n## UNIQUE ENERGY HUBS DELIVER GAS SWAPS\n\n## WA CONTRACTS FAST-TRACK JOHN BROOKES\n\nAnnual Report 2004 20\n\nwhich resulted in the fast tracking and sanctioning of the John Brookes gas field in the Carnarvon Basin.\n\nThe successful appraisal of the field in late 2003 and early 2004 significantly increased the available gas reserves. The decision to bring the field into production by mid-2005 enabled active marketing of gas above that already allocated to support the declining East Spar field. \n\nIn a separate move, designed to enhance future commercialisation opportunities, the joint venture equity interests in the East Spar and the John Brookes fields were aligned through an acquisition program which created an important production hub at Varanus Island.\n\nJohn Brookes has an expected field life of more than 15 years which could be further extended by a development of the Reindeer field in later years.\n\nThe gas will be converted to LNG at a new facility to be built at Karratha. The LNG will then be transported by road tankers to fuel the gas-fired power stations in Broome, Derby, Fitzroy Crossing and Halls Creek. The contract will commence in the first half of 2006.\n\nThe second John Brookes contract is to supply 58 PJ of gas over 20 years to EDL to supply four gas- fired powered stations under construction as part of its West Kimberly Power project in Western Australia.\n\nIn the first contract, the joint venture agreed to supply Newcrest Mining with 120 PJ of gas over 15 years at a maximum rate of 25 TJ per day. Newcrest will use the gas for power generation at the Telfer gold mine in the Pilbara region of Western Australia." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6502893158359245, + "doc_id": "25b87dfbc728436d65114ad96d606eba9e1273b9ab2be909fbf35cb3bd865a68", + "edit_distance": 0.5261194029850746, + "f1_score": 0.8695652173913044, + "meteor": 0.866955030894377, + "precision": 0.819672131147541, + "pred_md": "32\n\n## DI R E C TO R S ' R E P O R T\n\n## DI R E C TO R S ' M E E T I N G S\n\nThe following table sets out the number of directors' meetings held during the Financial Year and the number of meetings attended by each director whilst they were a director of the Company. During the Financial Year, 12 board meetings were held. The only board committee, the audit committee, met twice during the Financial Year.\n\n## DI R E C TO R S ' S H A R E H O L D I N G S\n\nAs at the date of this report, directors' interests in shares and\n\noptions of the Company are as follows:\n\n## DI R E C TO R S ' R E M U N E R AT I O N\n\nThe Board reviews the remuneration packages of all directors and\n\nexecutive officers on an annual basis. Remuneration packages may contain as key elements:\n\n- a. Salary;\n- b. Benefits - including the provision of motor vehicle and superannuation; and\n- c. Incentive Schemes - including share options under the Employee Option Plan.\n\nThe table immediately below sets out the total remuneration of directors of the Company.\n\nNo options have been issued to directors pursuant to the Employee Option Plan.\n\n- (i) 'Other' includes superannuation, provision of motor vehicles and related fringe benefits tax", + "recall": 0.9259259259259259, + "true_md": "DIRECTORS’ REPORT\n\n- The following table sets out the number of directors’ meetings held during the Financial Year and the number of meetings attended by each director whilst they were a director of the Company. During the Financial Year, 12 board meetings were held. The only board committee, the audit committee, met twice during the Financial Year. DIRECTORS’ MEETINGS\n\n- As at the date of this report, directors’ interests in shares and options of the Company are as follows: DIRECTORS’ SHAREHOLDINGS\n\n- The Board reviews the remuneration packages of all directors and executive officers on an annual basis. Remuneration packages may contain as key elements: DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION\n\nThe table immediately below sets out the total remuneration of directors of the Company. No options have been issued to directors pursuant to the Employee Option Plan.\n\n- a. Salary;\n\n- b. Benefits - including the provision of motor vehicle and superannuation; and\n\n- c. Incentive Schemes - including share options under the Employee Option Plan.\n\n- (i) ‘Other’ includes superannuation, provision of motor vehicles and related fringe benefits tax\n\n32" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7614537675876523, + "doc_id": "ce982b2c5b173e7162a423181d192854e93dfa6e83763120c5ce34b1e863dc95", + "edit_distance": 0.7567567567567568, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9903409090909091, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## Note 14. Segment Reporting (Continued)\n\nSelected financial data for each segment is as follows:\n\nSHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY\n\n36\n\n■", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## Note 14. Segment Reporting (Continued)\n\nSHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY ■ 36\n\nSHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\nSelected financial data for each segment is as follows:" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9579472508871494, + "doc_id": "02248b53dd2336b3156144b5ca92ccc1133c8cbf15023a3c3bda4e166b4732af", + "edit_distance": 0.1, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9995, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO AND FORMING PART OF THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR THE FINANCIAL YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2000\n\n55", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "55\n\n## NOTES TO AND FORMING PART OF THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR THE FINANCIAL YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2000" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8367828172827751, + "doc_id": "408759e9f992439d556fec4cccd699c8231ffff48ac2bc17bb996587da5a6a5a", + "edit_distance": 0.14285714285714285, + "f1_score": 0.8982035928143713, + "meteor": 0.8894179388815532, + "precision": 0.9202453987730062, + "pred_md": "Trust is important to Maggy Morford.\n\nKnown all over Abilene for her devotion to good causes, Morford is one of the community's most benevolent trustees - a generous contributor of money, time and hard work. Her style of leadership is to be active, get things done and set a positive example for the city she loves.\n\nMorford does business with First National Bank of Abilene, in part because she appreciates the example they set, too. 'My husband was in the cattle business. He depended upon loans from First National,' says Morford. 'After he died, I knew that I did not want to stay in the cattle business, so I sold it. That gave me money to invest.'\n\nMorford chose to work with First National Bank of Abilene's Trust Department. 'I created a family limited partnership. During a time when there was a lot of hysteria in the markets, they were conservative. They kept an even keel and have done well despite the difficult market.\n\n'They are a good bunch of folks, and they make it a point to serve the community by joining boards and lending a hand where help is needed. They are very careful in the people they hire. They nurture them and bring them along, and they don't hesitate to recruit from other areas when necessary. They keep the interests of the shareholders and customers close to heart.\n\n'With First Financial Bankshares, you know the people that you work with, and they are friends. People that you trust.'\n\nMaggy Morford Civic Leader Investor Abilene, Texas\n\nMaggy Morford Civic Leader Investor Abilene, Texas\n\n## 'You know the people you work with, and they are friends. People that you trust.'\n\n11", + "recall": 0.8771929824561403, + "true_md": "## Trust is important to Maggy Morford.\n\nKnown all over Abilene for her devotion to good causes, Morford is one of the community’s most benevolent trustees – a generous contributor of money, time and hard work. Her style of leadership is to be active, get things done and set a positive example for the city she loves.\n\nMorford does business with First National Bank of Abilene, in part because she appreciates the example they set, too. “My husband was in the cat- tle business. He depended upon loans from First National,” says Morford. “After he died, I knew that I did not want to stay in the cattle business, so I sold it. That gave me money to invest.”\n\nMorford chose to work with First National Bank of Abilene’s Trust Department. “I created a family limited partnership. During a time when there was a lot of hysteria in the markets, they were con- servative. They kept an even keel and have done well despite the difficult market.\n\n“They are a good bunch of folks, and they make it a point to serve the community by joining boards and lending a hand where help is needed. They are very careful in the people they hire. They nurture them and bring them along, and they don’t hesi- tate to recruit from other areas when necessary. They keep the interests of the shareholders and customers close to heart.\n\n“With First Financial Bankshares, you know the people that you work with, and they are friends. People that you trust.”\n\nMaggy Morford Civic Leader Investor Abilene, Texas\n\n11\n\n“You know the people you work with, and they are friends. People that y ou trust.”" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7071067811865476, + "doc_id": "e87c5622b7340496a7f68d3e8bcec0c8f3334ad87463cd4f1669716979adeaea", + "edit_distance": 0.4, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.968, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "22\n\n## MERMAID FLEET", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## MERMAID FLEET\n\n22" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9754534616979826, + "doc_id": "60a122dad4d1085ab7795aff7604ba14fe37eb34c262ce216ff6fc525295cc3b", + "edit_distance": 0.7570332480818415, + "f1_score": 0.9896640826873384, + "meteor": 0.8280736317793654, + "precision": 0.9922279792746114, + "pred_md": "FINANCIAL SECTION\n\n78\n\n## (k) Research and development costs\n\nResearch and development costs are charged to income when incurred.\n\n## (l) Revenue recognition\n\nRevenue is generally recognized on sales of products at the time of shipment.\n\n## (m) Derivative financial instruments\n\nThe Company and certain consolidated subsidiaries have entered into various derivative transactions in order to manage certain risks arising from adverse fluctuations in foreign currency exchange rates, interest rates, and stock and commodity prices. Derivative financial instruments are carried at fair value with changes in unrealized gain or loss charged or credited to operations, except for those which meet the criteria for deferral hedge accounting under which unrealized gain or loss is deferred as an asset or a liability. Receivables and payables hedged by qualified forward foreign exchange contracts are translated at the corresponding foreign exchange contract rates.\n\n## 2. ACCOUNTING CHANGES\n\n(a) Until the year ended March 31, 2003, finished goods, work in process and purchased parts included in raw materials were stated at the lower of average cost or market, and raw materials except for purchased parts and supplies were stated at the lower of cost or market, cost being determined by the last-in, first-out method. Effective April 1, 2003, the Company and certain consolidated subsidiaries began to value all inventories at the lower of cost or market, cost being determined by the first-in, first-out method. This change was made in order to establish a sound financial position by reflecting the changes in the purchase prices in the valuation of inventories considering the fact that there has been progress in achieving a reduction in purchasing costs and that this trend is anticipated to continue. This change is also intended to achieve a better matching of revenue and expenses and more appropriate cost management by applying an inventory valuation method which reflects the actual inventory movements. The effect of this change was immaterial for the year ended March 31, 2004.\n\n(b) Effective April 1, 2003, Nissan Motor Manufacturing (UK) Ltd., a consolidated subsidiary, implemented early adoption a new accounting standard for retirement benefits in the United Kingdom. The effect of this change was to increase retirement benefit expenses by ¥2,178 million and to decrease operating income and income before income taxes and minority interests by ¥1,686 million and ¥2,178 million respectively, for the year ended March 31, 2004 as compared with the corresponding amounts which would have been recorded if the previous method had been followed. Retained earnings also decreased by ¥18,132 million since the net retirement benefit obligation at transition and actuarial loss was charged directly to retained earnings for the year ended March 31, 2004. The effect of this change on segment information is explained in Note 21.\n\n(c) Until the year ended March 31, 2003, noncancelable lease transactions of the Company and its domestic consolidated subsidiaries were accounted for as operating leases (whether such leases were classified as operating or finance leases) except that lease agreements which stipulated the transfer of ownership of the leased assets to the lessee were accounted for as finance leases.\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\n## (n) Appropriation of retained earnings\n\nUnder the Commercial Code of Japan, the appropriation of retained earnings with respect to a given financial year is made by resolution of the shareholders at a general meeting held subsequent to the close of such financial year. The accounts for that year do not, therefore, reflect such appropriations. See Note 22.\n\n## (o) New Accounting Standards\n\nA new Japanese accounting standard 'Impairment of Fixed Assets' was issued in August 2002 that is effective for fiscal years beginning on or after April 1, 2005. The new standard requires that tangible and intangible fixed assets be carried at cost less depreciation, and be reviewed for impairment whenever events or changes in circumstances indicate that the carrying amount of an asset may not be recoverable. Companies would be required to recognize an impairment loss in their income statement if certain indicators of asset impairment exist and the book value of an asset exceeds the undiscounted sum of future cash flows of the asset. The Company is currently assessing the impact of this new accounting standard on its financial position and operating results.\n\nEffective April 1, 2003, the Company and its domestic consolidated subsidiaries changed their method of accounting for noncancelable lease transactions which transfer substantially all risks and rewards associated with the ownership of assets, from accounting for them as operating leases, to finance leases. This change was made in order to achieve a better matching of revenue and expenses by calculating manufacturing costs more accurately and to establish a better presentation of the Company's and its domestic consolidated subsidiaries' financial position by reflecting lease transactions more appropriately in its consolidated financial statements, considering the increasing materiality of these lease transactions as well as from an international point of view. The effect of this change in method of accounting was to decrease sales, cost of sales and selling, general and administrative expenses by ¥17,943 million, ¥38,910 million and ¥624 million, respectively, and to increase operating income and income before income taxes and minority interests by ¥21,591 million and ¥17,659 million respectively, for the year ended March 31, 2004 as compared with the corresponding amounts which would have been recorded if the previous method had been followed. In addition, trade and sales finance receivables, tangible fixed assets and lease obligation increased by ¥70,670 million, ¥66,514 million and ¥120,061 million respectively, at March 31, 2004 over the corresponding amounts which would have been recorded if the previous method had been followed. The effect of this change on segment information is explained in Note 21.\n\n(d) Until the year ended March 31, 2004, freight and shipping costs of the Company and certain consolidated subsidiaries were included in selling, general and administrative expenses. Effective April 1, 2004, the Company and those consolidated subsidiaries began to account for the freight and shipping costs as cost of sales. This change was made in order to present gross profit more accurately by including the freight and shipping costs in cost of sales and matching them directly with sales as well as to unify the accounting policy among the Nissan group considering the fact that shipping costs for export parts to be used for manufacture in overseas countries have increased due to the expansion of manufacturing activities outside Japan.", + "recall": 0.9871134020618557, + "true_md": "Nissan Annual Report 2004 78\n\nFINANCIAL SECTION\n\n## (n) Appropriation of retained earnings\n\n## (o) New Accounting Standards\n\n## (l) Revenue recognition\n\n## (m) Derivative financial instruments\n\n## 2. ACCOUNTING CHANGES\n\n## (k) Research and development costs\n\nResearch and development costs are charged to income when incurred.\n\nUnder the Commercial Code of Japan, the appropriation of retained earnings with respect to a given financial year is made by resolution of the shareholders at a general meeting held subsequent to the close of such financial year. The accounts for that year do not, therefore, reflect such appropriations. See Note 22.\n\nRevenue is generally recognized on sales of products at the time of shipment.\n\nThe Company and certain consolidated subsidiaries have entered into various derivative transactions in order to manage certain risks arising from adverse fluctuations in foreign currency exchange rates, interest rates, and stock and commodity prices. Derivative financial instruments are carried at fair value with changes in unrealized gain or loss charged or credited to operations, except for those which meet the criteria for deferral hedge accounting under which unrealized gain or loss is deferred as an asset or a liability. Receivables and payables hedged by qualified forward foreign exchange contracts are translated at the corresponding foreign exchange contract rates.\n\nA new Japanese accounting standard “Impairment of Fixed Assets” was issued in August 2002 that is effective for fiscal years beginning on or after April 1, 2005. The new standard requires that tangible and intangible fixed assets be carried at cost less depreciation, and be reviewed for impairment whenever events or changes in circumstances indicate that the carrying amount of an asset may not be recoverable. Companies would be required to recognize an impairment loss in their income statement if certain indicators of asset impairment exist and the book value of an asset exceeds the undiscounted sum of future cash flows of the asset. The Company is currently assessing the impact of this new accounting standard on its financial position and operating results. \n\nEffective April 1, 2003, the Company and its domestic consolidated subsidiaries changed their method of accounting for noncancelable lease transactions which transfer substantially all risks and rewards associated with the ownership of assets, from accounting for them as operating leases, to finance leases. This change was made in order to achieve a better matching of revenue and expenses by calculating manufacturing costs more accurately and to establish a better presentation of the Company’s and its domestic consolidated subsidiaries’ financial position by reflecting lease transactions more appropriately in its consolidated financial statements, considering the increasing materiality of these lease transactions as well as from an international point of view. The effect of this change in method of accounting was to decrease sales, cost of sales and selling, general and administrative expenses by ¥17,943 million, ¥38,910 million and ¥624 million, respectively, and to increase operating income and income before income taxes and minority interests by ¥21,591 million and ¥17,659 million respectively, for the year ended March 31, 2004 as compared with the corresponding amounts which would have been recorded if the previous method had been followed. In addition, trade and sales finance receivables, tangible fixed assets and lease obligation increased by ¥70,670 million, ¥66,514 million and ¥120,061 million respectively, at March 31, 2004 over the corresponding amounts which would have been recorded if the previous method had been followed. The effect of this change on segment information is explained in Note 21.\n\n(a) Until the year ended March 31, 2003, finished goods, work in process and purchased parts included in raw materials were stated at the lower of average cost or market, and raw materials except for purchased parts and supplies were stated at the lower of cost or market, cost being determined by the last-in, first-out method. Effective April 1, 2003, the Company and certain consolidated subsidiaries began to value all inventories at the lower of cost or market, cost being determined by the first-in, first-out method. This change was made in order to establish a sound financial position by reflecting the changes in the purchase prices in the valuation of inventories considering the fact that there has been progress in achieving a reduction in purchasing costs and that this trend is anticipated to continue. This change is also intended to achieve a better matching of revenue and expenses and more appropriate cost management by applying an inventory valuation method which reflects the actual inventory movements. The effect of this change was immaterial for the year ended March 31, 2004.\n\n(b) Effective April 1, 2003, Nissan Motor Manufacturing (UK) Ltd., a consolidated subsidiary, implemented early adoption a new accounting standard for retirement benefits in the United Kingdom. The effect of this change was to increase retirement benefit expenses by ¥2,178 million and to decrease operating income and income before income taxes and minority interests by ¥1,686 million and ¥2,178 million respectively, for the year ended March 31, 2004 as compared with the corresponding amounts which would have been recorded if the previous method had been followed. Retained earnings also decreased by ¥18,132 million since the net retirement benefit obligation at transition and actuarial loss was charged directly to retained earnings for the year ended March 31, 2004. The effect of this change on segment information is explained in Note 21.\n\n(c) Until the year ended March 31, 2003, noncancelable lease transactions of the Company and its domestic consolidated subsidiaries were accounted for as operating leases (whether such leases were classified as operating or finance leases) except that lease agreements which stipulated the transfer of ownership of the leased assets to the lessee were accounted for as finance leases.\n\n(d) Until the year ended March 31, 2004, freight and shipping costs of the Company and certain consolidated subsidiaries were included in selling, general and administrative expenses. Effective April 1, 2004, the Company and those consolidated subsidiaries began to account for the freight and shipping costs as cost of sales. This change was made in order to present gross profit more accurately by including the freight and shipping costs in cost of sales and matching them directly with sales as well as to unify the accounting policy among the Nissan group considering the fact that shipping costs for export parts to be used for manufacture in overseas countries have increased due to the expansion of manufacturing activities outside Japan." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9263803994694464, + "doc_id": "4312e97fb0837cd06b9fee29357a9744ea81b40e65c17b724973d8f045a72a80", + "edit_distance": 0.07947019867549669, + "f1_score": 0.9611197511664076, + "meteor": 0.966017020817199, + "precision": 0.9537037037037037, + "pred_md": "3 2\n\nmanagement fees payable to Service Bank. The risks and re w a rds of ownership of the ATM network transferred to the Company as of J a n u y 1, 1999, and revenues and expenses from the operation of the ATM network accrued to Euronet from that date. ar\n\nThe acquisition was accounted for as a purchase; accord i n g l y , the results of operations have been included in the accompanying consolidated financial statements since January 1, 1999. The purchase price was allocated to assets acquired in the amount of $3.5 million based on their fair values. The excess of the purchase price over the fair value of the net assets acquired of $3.2 million was re c o rded as goodwill and is a m o tized over seven years. r\n\nOn August 13, 1999, Euronet USA purchased the remaining 66 2/3% interest in Dash for a consideration of $800,000 payable in 24 equal monthly installments commencing on July 1, 1999. Euronet USA has delivered letters of credit to each of the sellers in the amount of the e n e unpaid balance of the purchase price of Dash. As payments are made, the outstanding credit risk exposures related to the letters of tir c redit are reduced pro p o rt i o . Euronet USA now owns a 100% interest in Dash. nately\n\nThe acquisition was accounted for as a purchase; accord i n g l y , the results of operations have been included in the accompanying consolidated financial statements since July 1, 1999. The purchase price was allocated to assets acquired of $680,000 based on their fair values. The excess of the purchase price over the fair value of the net assets acquired of $120,000 has been re c o rded as goodwill and is amortized over ten years.\n\nOn November 30, 1998, the Company acquired the outstanding common stock of Euronet USA for purchase consideration of appro x i m a t e l y $17.9 million (including incidental costs of $90,000 and fair value of stock options of $96,000). Euronet USA, with headquarters in Little Rock, Arkansas, sells payment and transaction delivery systems worldwide. Its main software products include ATM and network pro c e s s i n g , e l onic funds transfer interfaces, electronic funds transfer switch control, credit/debit card processing and corporate cash management and ectr personal financial management access products. Euronet USA is the software provider to Euro n e t 's ATM transaction processing center in Central Europe.\n\nThe acquisition was accounted for as a purchase; accord i n g l y, the results of operations are included in the accompanying consolidated financial statements since the date of acquisition. The purchase price was allocated to assets acquired ($7.5 million) and liabilities assumed ($6.0 million) based on their fair values. The excess of the purchase price over the fair value of the net assets acquired of $16.4 million was allocated $1.0 million to in-process re s e a rch and development ('IPRD'), $8.7 million to other identifiable intangible assets and the remaining $6.7 million to goodwill (see Note 9). This allocation was based on independent valuations perf o rmed at the time of acquisition. I n -p rocess re s e ch and development was written-off to operations at the date of the acquisition. In the third quarter of 2000 the ar remaining book value of intangibles and goodwill of $11.2 million was written down in accordance with SFAS No. 121 (see Note 10).\n\n## (5) Restricted Reserve\n\nThe restricted re s e rve arose from the provisions of Hungarian accounting law in relation to share capital contributed in foreign currency to Bank Tech and Administrative Services. Under these rules, a foreign currency capital contribution is re c o rded in the local accounting re c o rd s of the companies using the rate when the capital was contributed. The foreign currency gain (or loss) which arises upon usage of the fore i g n c u rency is re c o ded as a separate non-distributable re s e rve. r r\n\nThe re s e ve has remained frozen during the year as the laws in Hungary have now changed and no longer re q u i re this accounting. However, r the change in the law is not re t roactive and the historical re s e rve remains undistributable.\n\n## ( 6 ) Restricted Cash\n\nThe restricted cash balances as of December 31, 2000 and 1999, were as follows:\n\nThe ATM deposit balances held are equivalent to the value of certain banks' cash held in Euro n e t 's ATM network. The Company also has deposits with commercial banks to cover guarantees and deposits with customs officials to cover future charg e s .", + "recall": 0.9686520376175548, + "true_md": "management fees payable to Service Bank. The risks and re w a rds of ownership of the ATM network transferred to the Company as of J a n u a ry 1, 1999, and revenues and expenses from the operation of the ATM network accrued to Euronet from that date. \n\nThe acquisition was accounted for as a purchase; accord i n g l y, the results of operations have been included in the accompanying consolidated financial statements since January 1, 1999. The purchase price was allocated to assets acquired in the amount of $3.5 million based on their fair values. The excess of the purchase price over the fair value of the net assets acquired of $3.2 million was re c o rded as goodwill and is a m o rtized over seven years. \n\nOn August 13, 1999, Euronet USA purchased the remaining 66 2/3% interest in Dash for a consideration of $800,000 payable in 24 equal monthly installments commencing on July 1, 1999. Euronet USA has delivered letters of credit to each of the sellers in the amount of the e n t i re unpaid balance of the purchase price of Dash. As payments are made, the outstanding credit risk exposures related to the letters of c redit are reduced pro p o rt i o n a t e l y. Euronet USA now owns a 100% interest in Dash. \n\nThe acquisition was accounted for as a purchase; accord i n g l y, the results of operations have been included in the accompanying consolidated financial statements since July 1, 1999. The purchase price was allocated to assets acquired of $680,000 based on their fair values. The excess of the purchase price over the fair value of the net assets acquired of $120,000 has been re c o rded as goodwill and is amortized over ten years. \n\nOn November 30, 1998, the Company acquired the outstanding common stock of Euronet USA for purchase consideration of appro x i m a t e l y $17.9 million (including incidental costs of $90,000 and fair value of stock options of $96,000). Euronet USA, with headquarters in Little Rock, Arkansas, sells payment and transaction delivery systems worldwide. Its main software products include ATM and network pro c e s s i n g , e l e c t ronic funds transfer interfaces, electronic funds transfer switch control, credit/debit card processing and corporate cash management and personal financial management access products. Euronet USA is the software provider to Euro n e t ’s ATM transaction processing center in Central Europe. \n\nThe acquisition was accounted for as a purchase; accord i n g l y, the results of operations are included in the accompanying consolidated financial statements since the date of acquisition. The purchase price was allocated to assets acquired ($7.5 million) and liabilities assumed ($6.0 million) based on their fair values. The excess of the purchase price over the fair value of the net assets acquired of $16.4 million was allocated $1.0 million to in-process re s e a rch and development (“IPRD”), $8.7 million to other identifiable intangible assets and the remaining $6.7 million to goodwill (see Note 9). This allocation was based on independent valuations perf o rmed at the time of acquisition. I n - p rocess re s e a rch and development was written-off to operations at the date of the acquisition. In the third quarter of 2000 the remaining book value of intangibles and goodwill of $11.2 million was written down in accordance with SFAS No. 121 (see Note 10). \n\nThe restricted re s e rve arose from the provisions of Hungarian accounting law in relation to share capital contributed in foreign currency to Bank Tech and Administrative Services. Under these rules, a foreign currency capital contribution is re c o rded in the local accounting re c o rd s of the companies using the rate when the capital was contributed. The foreign currency gain (or loss) which arises upon usage of the fore i g n c u rrency is re c o rded as a separate non-distributable re s e rve. \n\nThe re s e rve has remained frozen during the year as the laws in Hungary have now changed and no longer re q u i re this accounting. However, the change in the law is not re t roactive and the historical re s e rve remains undistributable. \n\nThe restricted cash balances as of December 31, 2000 and 1999, were as follows: \n\nThe ATM deposit balances held are equivalent to the value of certain banks’ cash held in Euro n e t ’s ATM network. The Company also has deposits with commercial banks to cover guarantees and deposits with customs officials to cover future charg e s .\n\n## ( 6 ) Restricted Cash\n\n## (5) Restricted Reserve\n\n3 2" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8716962557520788, + "doc_id": "91280460bfd8e8d44f59fa389b6e0d0cc8637b22f3b1c657e5b27679a3ec0f4f", + "edit_distance": 0.9072847682119205, + "f1_score": 0.9724770642201837, + "meteor": 0.9037043425073783, + "precision": 0.9814814814814815, + "pred_md": "## we're serving up leading brands\n\n## that satisfy\n\n- > Hormel Foods builds brands that deliver added value - convenience, flavor, tenderness, and consistent performance. These features increase product profitability and attract repeat purchases. Hormel Foods has the expertise to develop, launch, and grow brands through efficient marketing, sales, and distribution programs.\n\n## driving demand by delivering more\n\nOur fully-cooked entrees are perfect when there's only enough time for great taste. These microwave-ready entrees help you serve a high-quality, family-pleasing meal in less than five minutes. With that kind of track record, it's easy to see why Hormel fully-cooked entrees and Jennie-O Turkey Store So Easy stuffed breasts are consistently popular choices. These products continued to build market share in fiscal 2004.\n\n6\n\nHormel Foods Corporation", + "recall": 0.9636363636363636, + "true_md": "## driving demand by delivering more\n\nOur fully-cooked entrees are perfect when there’s only enough time for great taste. These microwave-ready entrees help you serve a high-quality, family-pleasing meal in less than five minutes. With that kind of track record, it’s easy to see why Hormel fully-cooked entrees and Jennie-O Turkey Store So Easy stuffed breasts are consistently popular choices. These products continued to build market share in fiscal 2004.\n\n- > Hormel Foods builds brands that deliver added value – convenience, flavor, tenderness, and consistent performance. These features increase product profitability and attract repeat purchases. Hormel Foods has the expertise to develop, launch, and grow brands through efficient marketing, sales, and distribution programs.\n\nwe’re serving up leading brands that satisfy\n\n6 Hormel Foods Corporation" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "6199c457b4e3c0289beccb4c744ad2d063f41f3b64b9c93f75c246dade5fc99f", + "edit_distance": 0.9883720930232558, + "f1_score": 0.06153846153846154, + "meteor": 0.04608294930875577, + "precision": 0.03278688524590164, + "pred_md": "TABLE OF C O N T E N T S\n\nTABLE OF C O N T E N T S\n\n| Chairman's Report...................................................................................................................... 4 |\n|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|\n| Operations' Review .................................................................................................................... 7 |\n| Corporate Governance............................................................................................................. 24 |\n| Directors' Report ...................................................................................................................... 26 |\n| Profit and Loss Statement........................................................................................................ 35 |\n| Balance Sheet........................................................................................................................... 36 |\n| Statement of Cash Flows.......................................................................................................... 37 |\n| Notes to the Financial Statements .......................................................................................... 38 |\n| Directors' Declaration .............................................................................................................. 62 |\n| Additional Stock Exchange Information ................................................................................ 63 |\n| Auditor's Report ....................................................................................................................... 65 |", + "recall": 0.5, + "true_md": "## TABLE OF CONTENTS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5773502691896257, + "doc_id": "e2dfede55b4a3ba8343e3c778a6f72ef30b04ae44082372ad548558e6d4e45df", + "edit_distance": 0.4, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9865, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Contents\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\n69\n\nFINANCIAL SECTION", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## Contents\n\nFINANCIAL SECTION\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 69" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "2c0abc344218b9abe553863f4bf8a938817a5b3de9b8d79ad840bb07b76bc9a9", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9921875, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "36\n\nAnnual Report 2004", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "36\n\nAnnual Report 2004" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.821779538697124, + "doc_id": "3368f0c2c5adac535288f3199284fe8460fda0ecc6cdb7a11ae01b9a66c7ff89", + "edit_distance": 0.5409836065573771, + "f1_score": 0.9936305732484076, + "meteor": 0.8226919630989771, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "The annual weighted-average interest rates applicable to short-term borrowings except for lease obligation outstanding at March 31, 2005 and 2004 were 2.1% and 1.8%, respectively.\n\nAt March 31, 2005 and 2004, long-term debt consisted of the following:\n\nThe maturities of long-term debt except for lease obligation are summarized as follows:\n\nThe assets pledged as collateral for short-term borrowings of ¥449,020 million ($4,196,449 thousand) and long-term debt of ¥1,351,212 million ($12,628,150 thousand) at March 31, 2005 were as follows:\n\nIn addition to the above, at March 31, 2005, investments in consolidated subsidiaries of ¥1,036 million ($9,682 thousand) were pledged as collateral for long-term debt of affiliates of ¥472 million ($4,411 thousand), which has not been reflected in the accompanying consolidated balance sheet.\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\n81\n\nFINANCIAL SECTION", + "recall": 0.9873417721518988, + "true_md": "The annual weighted-average interest rates applicable to short-term borrowings except for lease obligation outstanding at March 31, 2005 and 2004 were 2.1% and 1.8%, respectively. At March 31, 2005 and 2004, long-term debt consisted of the following:\n\n2004 were 2.1% and 1.8%, respectively. At March 31, 2005 and 2004, long-term debt consisted of the following:\n\nIn addition to the above, at March 31, 2005, investments in consolidated subsidiaries of ¥1,036 million ($9,682 thousand) were pledged as collateral for long-term debt of affiliates of ¥472 million ($4,411 thousand), which has not been reflected in the accompanying consolidated balance sheet.\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 81\n\nThe maturities of long-term debt except for lease obligation are summarized as follows:\n\nThe assets pledged as collateral for short-term borrowings of ¥449,020 million ($4,196,449 thousand) and long-term debt of ¥1,351,212 million ($12,628,150 thousand) at March 31, 2005 were as follows: Thousands of\n\nFINANCIAL SECTION" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6602644218078885, + "doc_id": "559359c6d1d3c253454156ee322bb7de657ef76562508c2d9514bd5f6ec06f60", + "edit_distance": 0.32418952618453867, + "f1_score": 0.835680751173709, + "meteor": 0.8004445074820568, + "precision": 0.8557692307692307, + "pred_md": "## T O O U R S H A R E H O L D E R S :\n\nJA M E S R . H O U G H T O N\n\nJA M E S R . H O U G H T O N\n\nC H A I R M A N A N D C H I E F E X E C U T I V E O F F I C E R\n\nWe will long remember 2002 as one of the most challenging years-if not the most challenging-in Corning Incorpo long history. I quickly became even more steeped in these challenges in April when, at the request of our Board I returned to the company as Chairman and Chief Executive Officer.\n\nSince that time, I am increasingly convinced that, despite our downturn, the long-term future of Corning remai filled with opportunity.\n\nBut in the meantime, we have been living in a very difficult reality - one marked by ongoing quarterly losses revenue. You, our shareholders-along with our employees and our friends in the communities we serve-felt the pai watched our businesses retrench, battered by a weakened global economy and Wall Street turmoil. And we could onl what bad news would be next as our stock value continued its seemingly relentless decline.\n\nWith the severe drop-off in revenues from our telecommunications customers, we knew we could no longer afford up the costly infrastructure of facilities and staff we had in place. Put simply, we couldn't spend more than w\n\nWe also knew our strengths - and they were many! We knew we were not - nor had we ever been - merely a telecommunications company. Rather, we are a technology company, with the materials and process expertise t life-changing products. That's what we've been for all of our 152 years; that's what we'll continue to be.\n\nAnd we knew something else … that our Values, the historic strength of our company, were alive and well. Qualit Performance, Leadership,Innovation,Independence and The Individual continue to guide our every move, and continue t apart from other companies-especially those caught in the accounting scandals that marred the business world thi\n\n1", + "recall": 0.8165137614678899, + "true_md": "## T O O UR S HAREHOLDERS:\n\nC HAIRMAN AND C HIEF E XECUTIVE O FFICER J AMES R. HOUGHTON\n\nWe will long remember 2002 as one of the most challenging years — if not the most challenging — in Corning Incorporated’s long history. I quickly became even more steeped in these challenges in April when, at the request of our Board of Directors, I returned to the company as Chairman and Chief Executive Officer. \n\nSince that time, I am increasingly convinced that, despite our downturn, the long-term future of Corning remains bright and filled with opportunity.\n\nBut in the meantime, we have been living in a very difficult reality – one marked by ongoing quarterly losses and drops in revenue. You, our shareholders—along with our employees and our friends in the communities we serve—felt the pain. We all watched our businesses retrench, battered by a weakened global economy and Wall Street turmoil. And we could only wonder what bad news would be next as our stock value continued its seemingly relentless decline.\n\nWith the severe drop-off in revenues from our telecommunications customers, we knew we could no longer afford to keep up the costly infrastructure of facilities and staff we had in place. Put simply, we couldn’t spend more than we were making. \n\nWe also knew our strengths — and they were many! We knew we were not — nor had we ever been — merely a telecommunications company. Rather, we are a technology company, with the materials and process expertise to create life-changing products. That’s what we’ve been for all of our 152 years; that’s what we’ll continue to be. \n\nAnd we knew something else … that our Values, the historic strength of our company, were alive and well. Quality, Integrity, Performance, Leadership, Innovation, Independence and The Individual continue to guide our every move, and continue to set us apart from other companies—especially those caught in the accounting scandals that marred the business world this past year.\n\n1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9363560188134885, + "doc_id": "d0b5487f278554e7081ad7a0f2f59dff04b0de0e1286ce1cd6cc39a950e16898", + "edit_distance": 0.9324324324324325, + "f1_score": 0.9646182495344506, + "meteor": 0.7514759587414402, + "precision": 0.9810606060606061, + "pred_md": "Accumulated Other Comprehensive Loss: The components of accumulated other comprehensive loss are as follows:\n\nDerivatives and Hedging Activity: The company uses commodity and currency futures to manage its exposure to price fluctuations in those markets. The futures contracts are recorded at fair value on the balance sheet within prepaid expenses and other current assets. Additional information on hedging activities is presented in Note J.\n\nEquity Method Investments: The company has a number of investments in joint ventures and other entities where its voting interests are in excess of 20 percent but not greater than 50 percent. The company accounts for such investments under the equity method of accounting, and its underlying share of each investee's equity is reported in the consolidated balance sheet as part of investments in affiliates. The only material equity method investment is a 40 percent ownership interest in a Philippine joint venture, Purefoods-Hormel Company, which has an October 30, 2004, book value of $35.5 million.\n\nThe company regularly monitors and evaluates the fair value of its equity investments. If events and circumstances indicate that a decline in the fair value of these assets has occurred and is other than temporary, the company will record a charge in 'equity in earnings of affiliates.' The company's equity investments do not have a readily determinable fair value as none of them are publicly traded. The fair values of the company's private equity investments are determined by discounting the estimated future cash flows of each entity. These cash flow estimates include assumptions on growth rates and future currency exchange rates. The company did not record an impairment charge on any of its equity investments in fiscal 2004, 2003, or 2002.\n\n36\n\nHormel Foods Corporation\n\nAt the end of the third quarter of fiscal 2002, the company changed from the equity method to the cost method of accounting for its investment in Campofrio Alimentacion, S.A., a publicly traded company in Spain, because its ownership level was reduced below 20 percent. This investment was sold in fiscal 2004 for a pre-tax gain of $6.2 million. As of October 25, 2003, the investment was recorded at a market value of $86.4 million with unrealized gains of $4.9 million, net of tax, reflected in accumulated other comprehensive loss.\n\nRevenue Recognition: The company recognizes sales upon delivery of its products to customers, net of applicable provisions for discounts, returns, and allowances. Products are delivered upon receipt of customer purchase orders with acceptable terms, including price and collectibility that is reasonably assured.\n\nThe company offers various sales incentives to customers and consumers. Incentives that are offered off-invoice include prompt pay allowances, spoilage allowances, and temporary price reductions. These incentives are recognized as a reduction of revenue at the time title passes. Coupons are used as an incentive for consumers to purchase various products. The coupons reduce revenues at the time they are offered. Promotional contracts and voluntary promotions are performed by customers to promote the company's products to the consumers. These incentives reduce revenues at the time of performance through direct payments and accrued promotional funds. Accrued promotional funds are unpaid liabilities for promotional contracts and voluntary promotions in", + "recall": 0.9487179487179487, + "true_md": "Accumulated Other Comprehensive Loss: The components of accumulated other comprehensive loss are as follows:\n\nAt the end of the third quarter of fiscal 2002, the company changed from the equity method to the cost method of accounting for its investment in Campofrio Alimentacion, S.A., a publicly traded company in Spain, because its ownership level was reduced below 20 percent. This investment was sold in fiscal 2004 for a pre-tax gain of $6.2 million. As of October 25, 2003, the invest- ment was recorded at a market value of $86.4 million with unreal- ized gains of $4.9 million, net of tax, reflected in accumulated other comprehensive loss.\n\nRevenue Recognition: The company recognizes sales upon delivery of its products to customers, net of applicable provisions for discounts, returns, and allowances. Products are delivered upon receipt of customer purchase orders with acceptable terms, including price and collectibility that is reasonably assured.\n\nThe company offers various sales incentives to customers and consumers. Incentives that are offered off-invoice include prompt pay allowances, spoilage allowances, and temporary price reduc- tions. These incentives are recognized as a reduction of revenue at the time title passes. Coupons are used as an incentive for consumers to purchase various products. The coupons reduce revenues at the time they are offered. Promotional contracts and voluntary promotions are performed by customers to promote the company’s products to the consumers. These incentives reduce revenues at the time of performance through direct payments and accrued promotional funds. Accrued promotional funds are unpaid liabilities for promotional contracts and voluntary promotions in\n\nEquity Method Investments: The company has a number of investments in joint ventures and other entities where its voting interests are in excess of 20 percent but not greater than 50 per- cent. The company accounts for such investments under the equity method of accounting, and its underlying share of each investee’s equity is reported in the consolidated balance sheet as part of investments in affiliates. The only material equity method investment is a 40 percent ownership interest in a Philippine joint venture, Purefoods-Hormel Company, which has an October 30, 2004, book value of $35.5 million. \n\nDerivatives and Hedging Activity: The company uses commodity and currency futures to manage its exposure to price fluctuations in those markets. The futures contracts are recorded at fair value on the balance sheet within prepaid expenses and other current assets. Additional information on hedging activities is presented in Note J.\n\nThe company regularly monitors and evaluates the fair value of its equity investments. If events and circumstances indicate that a decline in the fair value of these assets has occurred and is other than temporary, the company will record a charge in “equity in earnings of affiliates.” The company’s equity investments do not have a readily determinable fair value as none of them are publicly traded. The fair values of the company’s private equity investments are determined by discounting the estimated future cash flows of each entity. These cash flow estimates include assumptions on growth rates and future currency exchange rates. The company did not record an impairment charge on any of its equity invest- ments in fiscal 2004, 2003, or 2002.\n\n36 Hormel Foods Corporation" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.953650451053558, + "doc_id": "fdb6a78e509bd797ddeb46af3a18329b9f4c08c95ad8e8795a9821eb055b1fc3", + "edit_distance": 0.0380952380952381, + "f1_score": 0.9791666666666665, + "meteor": 0.9763558784468858, + "precision": 0.9690721649484536, + "pred_md": "3 8\n\nThe tax effect of temporary diff e rences and carry forw a rds that give rise to deferred tax assets and liabilities are as follows:\n\nThe valuation allowance for deferred tax assets as of January 1, 2000, 1999 and 1998 was $19.7 million, $14.3 million and $4.8 million, re s p e . The net change in the total valuation allowance for the years ended December 31, 2000, 1999, and 1998 were increases of ctively $10.9 million, $5.4 million and $9.5 million, re s p e c t i v e l y.\n\nThe valuation allowance relates primarily to deferred tax assets established under SFAS No. 109 for loss carry f o rw a rds at December 31, 2000, 1999 and 1998 of $46.9 million, $45.0 million and $32.9 million, re s p e c t i v e l y. The tax operating loss carry f o rw a rds will expire t h ough 2004 for EFT-Uslage d o.o., The tax operating loss carry f o rw a rds will expire through 2005 for Euronet Adminisztracios Szolgaltato r Kft., Euronet Banktechnikai Szolgaltato Kft.,Bankomat 24/Euronet Sp. z o.o., Euronet SRL, and 2007 for Euronet Services spol. sro. The tax operating losses for Euronet Services Inc. and Euronet USA can be carried back two years and forw a rd twenty years. The tax operating losses for Euronet Services Inc. and Euronet USA can be carried back two years and forw a rd twenty years. The tax operating losses for E u ronet GmbH and Euronet Services Ltd. can be carried forw a rd indefinitely.\n\nIn assessing the realizability of deferred tax assets, management considers whether it is more likely than not that some portion or all of the d e red tax assets will not be realized. The ultimate realization of deferred tax assets is dependent upon the generation of future taxable fer income during the periods in which those temporary diff e rences become deductible. Management considers the scheduled reversal of deferre d tax liabilities, projected future taxable income, and tax planning strategies in making this assessment. Based upon the level of historical taxable income and projections for future taxable income over the periods which the deferred tax assets are deductible, management believes it is more likely than not the Company will realize the benefits of these deductible diff e rences, net of the existing valuation allowances at December 31, 2000. The amount of the deferred tax asset considered realizable, however, could be reduced in the near term if estimates of f u tu re taxable income during the carry f o rw a rd period are reduced.\n\nAt December 31, 2000 the Company has net operating loss carry forw a rds of approximately $46.9 million which will expire as follows:", + "recall": 0.9894736842105263, + "true_md": "The tax effect of temporary diff e rences and carry forw a rds that give rise to deferred tax assets and liabilities are as follows:\n\nThe valuation allowance for deferred tax assets as of January 1, 2000, 1999 and 1998 was $19.7 million, $14.3 million and $4.8 million, re s p e c t i v e l y. The net change in the total valuation allowance for the years ended December 31, 2000, 1999, and 1998 were increases of $10.9 million, $5.4 million and $9.5 million, re s p e c t i v e l y. \n\nThe valuation allowance relates primarily to deferred tax assets established under SFAS No. 109 for loss carry f o rw a rds at December 31, 2000, 1999 and 1998 of $46.9 million, $45.0 million and $32.9 million, re s p e c t i v e l y. The tax operating loss carry f o rw a rds will expire t h rough 2004 for EFT-Uslage d o.o., The tax operating loss carry f o rw a rds will expire through 2005 for Euronet Adminisztracios Szolgaltato Kft., Euronet Banktechnikai Szolgaltato Kft.,Bankomat 24/Euronet Sp. z o.o., Euronet SRL, and 2007 for Euronet Services spol. sro. The tax operating losses for Euronet Services Inc. and Euronet USA can be carried back two years and forw a rd twenty years. The tax operating losses for Euronet Services Inc. and Euronet USA can be carried back two years and forw a rd twenty years. The tax operating losses for E u ronet GmbH and Euronet Services Ltd. can be carried forw a rd indefinitely. \n\nIn assessing the realizability of deferred tax assets, management considers whether it is more likely than not that some portion or all of the d e f e rred tax assets will not be realized. The ultimate realization of deferred tax assets is dependent upon the generation of future taxable income during the periods in which those temporary diff e rences become deductible. Management considers the scheduled reversal of deferre d tax liabilities, projected future taxable income, and tax planning strategies in making this assessment. Based upon the level of historical taxable income and projections for future taxable income over the periods which the deferred tax assets are deductible, management believes it is more likely than not the Company will realize the benefits of these deductible diff e rences, net of the existing valuation allowances at December 31, 2000. The amount of the deferred tax asset considered realizable, however, could be reduced in the near term if estimates of f u t u re taxable income during the carry f o rw a rd period are reduced. \n\nAt December 31, 2000 the Company has net operating loss carry forw a rds of approximately $46.9 million which will expire as follows: \n\n3 8" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8760906841582997, + "doc_id": "4a5568a92ec6c7425284bace1d6de0f7a6a7ab6d5eb0f3b5449bff39bb030411", + "edit_distance": 0.6190476190476191, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9354631724758133, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Douglas C. Arthur Attorney-at-Law Arthur and Allamong\n\nDouglas C. Arthur Attorney-at-Law Arthur and Allamong\n\nKen L. Burch Farmer\n\nHarold Morrison, Jr. Chairman of the Board Woodstock Garage, Inc. (an auto sales and repair firm)\n\nNoel M. Borden President, Retired H. L. Borden Lumber Company (a retail building materials firm)\n\nChristopher E. French President Shenandoah Telecommunications Company and its subsidiaries\n\nZane Neff Manager, Retired Hugh Saum Company, Inc. (a hardware and furniture store)\n\n## BOARD OF DIRECTORS\n\nDick D. Bowman President Bowman Bros., Inc. (a farm equipment dealer)\n\nGrover M. Holler, Jr. President Valley View, Inc. (a real estate developer)\n\nJames E. Zerkel II Vice President James E. Zerkel, Inc. (a hardware firm)\n\n## FIVE-YEAR SUMMARY OF SELECTED FINANCIAL DATA\n\n7\n\n2003 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n■", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## BOARD OF DIRECTORS\n\n## FIVE-YEAR SUMMARY OF SELECTED FINANCIAL DATA\n\n7 ■ 2003 ANNUAL REPORT\n\nDouglas C. Arthur Attorney-at-Law Arthur and Allamong\n\nKen L. Burch Farmer\n\nHarold Morrison, Jr. Chairman of the Board Woodstock Garage, Inc. (an auto sales and repair firm)\n\nZane Neff Manager, Retired Hugh Saum Company, Inc. (a hardware and furniture store)\n\nChristopher E. French President Shenandoah Telecommunications Company and its subsidiaries\n\nJames E. Zerkel II Vice President James E. Zerkel, Inc. (a hardware firm) \n\nGrover M. Holler, Jr. President Valley View, Inc. (a real estate developer)\n\nDick D. Bowman President Bowman Bros., Inc. (a farm equipment dealer)\n\nNoel M. Borden President, Retired H. L. Borden Lumber Company (a retail building materials firm)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9135910596797159, + "doc_id": "b7bc49ac9aa04d56ffc4417216692c7632edd42b0d60241db3ca8bfdcf94fef6", + "edit_distance": 0.4488778054862843, + "f1_score": 0.958397534668721, + "meteor": 0.7817368177068129, + "precision": 0.9598765432098766, + "pred_md": "OUR WORLD\n\n62\n\nNORTH AMERICA\n\n## Growing in Areas of Expansion\n\nJED CONNELLY Senior Vice President Nissan North America\n\nJED CONNELLY Senior Vice President Nissan North America\n\n'We had a terrific year in North America; sales for calendar year 2004 grew by 24.7 percent, and that growth that came in a flat U.S. market. The auto industry here only rose by about 237,000 vehicles, while Nissan was up by 191,000 cars. It was a strong year with a rich mix of products. The Altima continues to be a core car\n\nfor us, and our most important car in terms of volume. We sell over 200,000 Altimas a year, at a rate of 20,000 units per month-outstanding for a car so far along in its lifecycle. The Infiniti has also been phenomenal over the past few years. The G35 sedan and coupe continue to be the icons of the brand, driving both volume and profit.\n\nOur success always comes down to the product. We had great products from top to bottom,\n\nthroughout the lineup and in both divisions. We were also very intelligent, I believe, in the way we price our vehicles-very close to the transaction price, and with limited reliance on incentives. That's been our strategy for four years, and it works. Customers understand that we provide a great product at a fair price. The other key to our success has been a very consistent marketing message. The SHIFT\\_ campaign is consistent and has been in place for some time now, and it's starting to gain traction with the public. Consumers look at Nissan products and our dealerships and say, 'Hey, something really is going on at Nissan!'\n\nIn a year full of successes, the one thing we would like to have handled better was the Quest. We had some initial quality issues, and some trim mix issues. We've corrected\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\nthese, however, and repackaged the Quest to give people their most popular options. We've also made great strides in quality and on other aspects get it right.\n\nFor fiscal 2005 we have a volume growth target of 3.3 percent, but in the first three months of this period we were actually up by 18 percent! We launched a few new products at the end of the last year, so it's probably not realistic to expect that kind of volume for the whole year, but it makes us very confident of reaching our target.\n\nWe won't have any completely new products in fiscal 2005. That means that, while we will have solid, enviable growth, it won't translate into the spectacular numbers we've had over the past four years. The Altima will continue to drive our growth-it's in its fifth year, but still a remarkable performer. We've gotten a good boost in the market from the Pathfinder, which was relaunched last fall. We also expect to make some inroads with the Frontier, which is outperforming its competitors-it's clearly the best truck in the mid-size truck segment. This is, however, a difficult segment at the moment.\n\nWe have a great opportunity to build on the strengths that we've demonstrated in North America over the past four years. We have solid growth, and we continue to establish the Nissan brand. We have new models that continue to gain strength, such as the Murano, which has done wonderful things for Nissan's image in the market. On the Infiniti side, we just launched the M45, the mid-size luxury sedan that competes with the BMW 5 series. In the first three months after its launch, the M45 is doing very well. As we continue to establish Nissan brand recognition, we also will continue to define Infiniti, because now we're strong with the M45, strong in the luxury crossover market with the FX, and with the M we have a luxury sedan that can compete with anything in its class. Infiniti is strong all across the board.\n\nNot having a new product launch in fiscal year 2005 might be seen as a risk, but the current models are strong and selling well, and we'll have a host of new models in 2006. Most of our risks in the coming year are from", + "recall": 0.9569230769230769, + "true_md": "## NORTH AMERICA\n\n## Growing in Areas of Expansion\n\nOUR WORLD\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 62\n\nNot having a new product launch in fiscal year 2005 might be seen as a risk, but the current models are strong and selling well, and we’ll have a host of new models in 2006. Most of our risks in the coming year are from\n\nIn a year full of successes, the one thing we would like to have handled better was the Quest. We had some initial quality issues, and some trim mix issues. We’ve corrected\n\nOur success always comes down to the product.\n\nWe had great products from top to bottom, throughout the lineup and in both divisions. We were also very intelligent, I believe, in the way we price our vehicles—very close to the transaction price, and with limited reliance on incentives. That’s been our strategy for four years, and it works. Customers understand that we provide a great product at a fair price. The other key to our success has been a very consistent marketing message. The SHIFT\\_ campaign is consistent and has been in place for some time now, and it’s starting to gain traction with the public. Consumers look at Nissan products and our dealerships and say, ‘Hey, something really is going on at Nissan!’\n\n“We had a terrific year in North America; sales for calendar year 2004 grew by 24.7 percent, and that growth that came in a flat U.S. market. The auto industry here only rose by about 237,000 vehicles, while Nissan was up by 191,000 cars. It was a strong year with a rich mix of products. The Altima continues to be a core car\n\nfor us, and our most important car in terms of volume. We sell over 200,000 Altimas a year, at a rate of 20,000 units per month—outstanding for a car so far along in its lifecycle. The Infiniti has also been phenomenal over the past few years. The G35 sedan and coupe continue to be the icons of the brand, driving both volume and profit. \n\nthese, however, and repackaged the Quest to give people their most popular options. We’ve also made great strides in quality and on other aspects get it right.\n\nFor fiscal 2005 we have a volume growth target of 3.3 percent, but in the first three months of this period we were actually up by 18 percent! We launched a few new products at the end of the last year, so it’s probably not realistic to expect that kind of volume for the whole year, but it makes us very confident of reaching our target. \n\nWe won’t have any completely new products in fiscal 2005. That means that, while we will have solid, enviable growth, it won’t translate into the spectacular numbers we’ve had over the past four years. The Altima will continue to drive our growth—it’s in its fifth year, but still a remarkable performer. We’ve gotten a good boost in the market from the Pathfinder, which was relaunched last fall. We also expect to make some inroads with the Frontier, which is outperforming its competitors—it’s clearly the best truck in the mid-size truck segment. This is, however, a difficult segment at the moment.\n\nWe have a great opportunity to build on the strengths that we’ve demonstrated in North America over the past four years. We have solid growth, and we continue to establish the Nissan brand. We have new models that continue to gain strength, such as the Murano, which has done wonderful things for Nissan’s image in the market. On the Infiniti side, we just launched the M45, the mid-size luxury sedan that competes with the BMW 5 series. In the first three months after its launch, the M45 is doing very well. As we continue to establish Nissan brand recognition, we also will continue to define Infiniti, because now we’re strong with the M45, strong in the luxury crossover market with the FX, and with the M we have a luxury sedan that can compete with anything in its class. Infiniti is strong all across the board. \n\nJED CONNELLY Senior Vice President Nissan North America" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8459493339348042, + "doc_id": "706bee3cd2d169653f0c1844181c409091d20931e254ab7b7a635f86edfe1474", + "edit_distance": 0.36099585062240663, + "f1_score": 0.9926470588235295, + "meteor": 0.9607508186026613, + "precision": 0.9926470588235294, + "pred_md": "## · · · leading brands that satisfy page 6\n\nWe build and support leading brands across multiple product categories.\n\n## · · · foods people love page 8\n\nConsumers and restaurant operators turn to Hormel Foods over and over again for great taste, bolder flavors, high quality, convenience, and consistent performance.\n\n## · · · new ideas that make it better page 10\n\nInnovation keeps Hormel Foods brands fresh, relevant, and preferred.\n\n## · · · great meal choices all day, everywhere page 12\n\nThroughout the day, at home and away, Hormel Foods offers great tasting foods.\n\n## · · · balanced business, sound governance, and great returns page 14\n\nHormel Foods has a unique blend of stable, high-margin packaged food products and fast-growing, value-added protein products. The result: faster growth than a packaged food company and less volatility than a protein company.\n\ncorporate profile\n\nHormel Foods Corporation is a multinational marketer of consumer-branded, value-added food, meat, and poultry products delivered through retail and foodservice channels. The company creates shareholder value by strengthening existing brands, launching new brands, providing outstanding customer service, building emerging businesses, maintaining careful cash and debt management and transparent accounting policies, and leveraging its strong financial position to accelerate growth worldwide.", + "recall": 0.9926470588235294, + "true_md": "We build and support leading brands across multiple product categories.\n\nConsumers and restaurant operators turn to Hormel Foods over and over again for great taste, bolder flavors, high quality, convenience, and consistent performance.\n\nInnovation keeps Hormel Foods brands fresh, relevant, and preferred.\n\n## ••• great meal choices all day, everywhere page 12\n\n## ••• new ideas that make it better page 10\n\n## ••• foods people love page 8\n\n## ••• leading brands that satisfy page 6\n\n## ••• balanced business, sound governance, and great returns page 14\n\n## corporate profile\n\nThroughout the day, at home and away, Hormel Foods offers great tasting foods.\n\nHormel Foods has a unique blend of stable, high-margin packaged food products and fast-growing, value-added protein products. The result: faster growth than a packaged food company and less volatility than a protein company.\n\nHormel Foods Corporation is a multinational marketer of consumer-branded, value-added food, meat, and poultry products delivered through retail and foodservice channels. The company creates shareholder value by strengthening existing brands, launching new brands, providing outstanding customer service, building emerging businesses, maintaining careful cash and debt management and transparent accounting policies, and leveraging its strong financial position to accelerate growth worldwide." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8665256886704352, + "doc_id": "ae09e655c775aeddde798870a6f2d53228fbb8a9a1dd0cbbc171e68ac9804876", + "edit_distance": 0.46835443037974683, + "f1_score": 0.970873786407767, + "meteor": 0.9797652541138779, + "precision": 0.9615384615384616, + "pred_md": "CORPORATE DATA\n\n## FOR FURTHER INFORMATION, PLEASE CONTACT\n\n## Investor Relations\n\n## Nissan Motor Co., Ltd.\n\nGlobal Communications, CSR and IR Division 17-1, Ginza 6-chome, Chuo-ku Tokyo 104-8023, Japan phone: +81(0)3-5565-2334 fax: +81(0)3-3546-2669 e-mail: nissan-ir@mail.nissan.co.jp\n\n## Corporate Information Website\n\nhttp://www.nissan-global.com/\n\n## Investor Relations Website\n\nhttp://www.nissan-global.com/EN/IR/\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 110", + "recall": 0.9803921568627451, + "true_md": "## FOR FURTHER INFORMATION, PLEASE CONTACT\n\nCORPORATE DATA\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 110\n\n## Investor Relations Nissan Motor Co., Ltd.\n\n## Corporate Information Website\n\n## Investor Relations Website\n\nGlobal Communications, CSR and IR Division 17-1, Ginza 6-chome, Chuo-ku Tokyo 104-8023, Japan phone: +81(0)3-5565-2334 fax: +81(0)3-3546-2669 e-mail: nissan-ir@mail.nissan.co.jp\n\nhttp://www.nissan-global.com/\n\nhttp://www.nissan-global.com/EN/IR/" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "c39e685ba34e4cd170e1fc0a76b323c8a4bd1e233d3049eb7fbe5ee4db94e337", + "edit_distance": 0.46835443037974683, + "f1_score": 0.970873786407767, + "meteor": 0.9797652541138779, + "precision": 0.9615384615384616, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.9803921568627451, + "true_md": "" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9383769404240557, + "doc_id": "a4e3a936ce13ba43bf8b4f9536a2d49c15906719d424256b2a2c6cebabd93c50", + "edit_distance": 0.5824175824175825, + "f1_score": 0.9897610921501705, + "meteor": 0.9330184023045128, + "precision": 0.9863945578231292, + "pred_md": "- (e) The effect of this change was to increase cost of sales by ¥112,074 million ($1,047,421 thousand) and to decrease gross profit and selling, general and administrative expenses by the same amount for the year ended March 31, 2005. This change had no impact on operating income, income before income taxes and minori-\n\ny income and net income for the years ended March 31, 2005 as compared with the corresponding amounts which would have been recorded if the previous method had been followed. This change had no effect on segment information.\n\n## 3. U.S. DOLLAR AMOUNTS\n\nAmounts in U.S. dollars are included solely for the convenience of the reader. The rate of ¥107 = US$1.00, the approximate rate of exchange in effect on March 31, 2005, has been used. The inclusion of such amounts is not intended to imply that yen amounts have been or could be readily converted, realized or settled in U.S. dollars at that or any other rate.\n\n## 4. RECEIVABLES\n\nReceivables at March 31, 2005 and 2004 consisted of the following:\n\nFinance receivables principally represent receivables from customers on loans made by financing subsidiaries in connection with sales of automobiles.\n\n## 5. INVENTORIES\n\nInventories at March 31, 2005 and 2004 were as follows:\n\n## 6. PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT\n\nProperty, plant and equipment at March 31, 2005 and 2004 is summarized as follows:\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\n79\n\nFINANCIAL SECTION", + "recall": 0.9931506849315068, + "true_md": "ty income and net income for the years ended March 31, 2005 as compared with the corresponding amounts which would have been recorded if the previous method had been followed. This change had no effect on segment information.\n\n(e) The effect of this change was to increase cost of sales by ¥112,074 million ($1,047,421 thousand) and to decrease gross profit and selling, general and administrative expenses by the same amount for the year ended March 31, 2005. This change had no impact on operating income, income before income taxes and minori-\n\nAmounts in U.S. dollars are included solely for the convenience of the reader. The rate of ¥107 = US$1.00, the approximate rate of exchange in effect on March 31, 2005, has been used. The inclusion of such amounts is not intended to imply that yen amounts have been or could be readily converted, realized or settled in U.S. dollars at that or any other rate.\n\n## 4. RECEIVABLES\n\n## 3. U.S. DOLLAR AMOUNTS\n\n## 6. PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 79\n\nProperty, plant and equipment at March 31, 2005 and 2004 is summarized as follows:\n\nInventories at March 31, 2005 and 2004 were as follows:\n\n## 5. INVENTORIES\n\nFinance receivables principally represent receivables from customers on loans made by financing subsidiaries in connection with sales of automobiles.\n\nReceivables at March 31, 2005 and 2004 consisted of the following:\n\nFINANCIAL SECTION" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9508460664186014, + "doc_id": "c8fc8a8ac88a5e2b248bfb046170432867c8963dd8df33cc74c9bd0ea8594968", + "edit_distance": 0.1021021021021021, + "f1_score": 0.9874686716791982, + "meteor": 0.9757247835977114, + "precision": 0.9899497487437185, + "pred_md": "- > We constantly study consumers' preferences in order to provide products that deliver the safety, quality, convenience, consistent performance and great taste they desire. Consumers have rewarded our efforts with strong acceptance and repeat purchases.\n\n## respecting your time\n\n## perfect, every time\n\nWhen it has to be perfect, smart cooks choose Hormel Foods products. Our Hormel Always Tender beef and pork tenderloins and Jennie-O Turkey Store flavored turkey tenderloins are known for their consistent flavor and moistness. The result: consumers enjoy a flawless meal and we enjoy higher margins by converting commodity meats and poultry into convenient, value-added products.\n\nMost days, consumers need quick solutions for family meals. We are pleased to oblige with Hormel microwave meals, the smart choice for great flavor and nutrition in 90 seconds. Our new, multi-dimensional support program, called Your Personal Chef With Fresh Ideas , has been very well received by\n\nconsumers nationwide. The web-enabled program provides consumers with easy meal solutions that are ready in 30 minutes or less and valuable tips and ideas on family and lifestyle issues.\n\nCheck out the Your Personal Chef With Fresh Ideas Web site at www.hormel.com/personalchef\n\n## delivering great taste - the bolder, the better!\n\nToday's consumers are increasingly diverse and want more flavor in every bite. Hormel Foods is poised to help make every meal a festival with its full line of authentic and mainstream ethnic products, which provide additional growth opportunities for our packaged foods business. Sales of the Herdez family of authentic Mexican products increased seven percent in fiscal 2004, while both Carapelli olive oil and the Patak's line of Indian foods gained market share. The Chi-Chi's line of salsas offer a wide range of varieties that satisfy more mainstream tastes.\n\n2004 Annual Report\n\n9", + "recall": 0.985, + "true_md": "- > We constantly study consumers’ preferences in order to provide products that deliver the safety, quality, convenience, consistent performance and great taste they desire. Consumers have rewarded our efforts with strong acceptance and repeat purchases.\n\n## perfect, every time\n\n## respecting your time\n\n## delivering great taste – the bolder, the better!\n\nWhen it has to be perfect, smart cooks choose Hormel Foods products. Our Hormel Always Tender beef and pork tenderloins and Jennie-O Turkey Store flavored turkey tenderloins are known for their consistent flavor and moistness. The result: consumers enjoy a flawless meal and we enjoy higher margins by converting commodity meats and poultry into convenient, value-added products.\n\nMost days, consumers need quick solutions for family meals. We are pleased to oblige with Hormel microwave meals, the smart choice for great flavor and nutrition in 90 seconds. Our new, multi-dimensional support program, called Your Personal Chef With Fresh Ideas , has been very well received by consumers nationwide. The web-enabled program provides\n\nconsumers with easy meal solutions that are ready in 30 minutes or less and valuable tips and ideas on family and lifestyle issues. Check out the Your Personal Chef With Fresh\n\nIdeas Web site at www.hormel.com/personalchef\n\nToday’s consumers are increasingly diverse and want more flavor in every bite. Hormel Foods is poised to help make every meal a festival with its full line of authentic and mainstream ethnic products, which provide additional growth opportunities for our packaged foods business. Sales of the Herdez family of authentic Mexican products increased seven percent in fiscal 2004, while both Carapelli olive oil and the Patak’s line of Indian foods gained market share. The Chi-Chi’s line of salsas offer a wide range of varieties that satisfy more mainstream tastes.\n\n2004 Annual Report 9" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8730748886033767, + "doc_id": "4afe279ee9b67d931d36e65b256b6e55ff8d5340e6f3f60a2fa808089f357f4f", + "edit_distance": 0.3957894736842105, + "f1_score": 0.952772073921971, + "meteor": 0.8496277675082838, + "precision": 0.9747899159663865, + "pred_md": "## Defining Momentum for Our Industry\n\nThe gaming industry in America is maturing, and international expansion, while exciting in select markets, remains challenging. As a result, your company has pursued a growth strategy that calls for maximizing the assets we currently own and seeking prudent development opportunities and strategic acquisitions.\n\nUpon completion of our merger with Mandalay, MGM MIRAGE will be the world's leading gaming and leisure company. The combination will result in a wellcapitalized company uniquely situated to invest in its current portfolio in addition to creating new projects in the United States and around the world.\n\nWe believe this is an outstanding transaction for the shareholders of both companies. With this acquisition, we will own, operate and have investments\n\nin 28 properties throughout Nevada, Mississippi, Illinois, Michigan, and New Jersey.\n\nThe combined company will have an asset portfolio which includes some of the most widely recognized brand names in the world. These properties cater to a broad customer base, ranging from value-oriented to the ultrahigh end. Each resort provides a unique customer experience through its specific personality and combination of amenities.\n\nFIX BELLAGIO Classic American fare using the freshest fish, meat, and poultry cooked to order on a wood-burning grill. Costa Rican Padouk wood inspires a warm environment in a unique, vibrant design.\n\nFIX BELLAGIO Classic American fare using the freshest fish, meat, and poultry cooked to order on a wood-burning grill. Costa Rican Padouk wood inspires a warm environment in a unique, vibrant design.\n\nWe also will have at Mandalay Bay the fifth largest convention center in the United States, providing the company with a great resource to further develop the business travel and convention market.\n\nBut the bricks and mortar tell only part of the story of this transaction. At the heart of Mandalay is its people. Mandalay employees at all levels are energetic and talented and will be a tremendous asset to us. T ogether, we will become a family in excess of 70,000 people committed to delivering the best possible experiences for our guests. The transaction also will create unparalleled opportunities for our entire family of employees.\n\nIn short, this groundbreaking transaction creates unstoppable momentum for all stakeholders in the MGM MIRAGE family.\n\n## Defining Momentum in our Properties\n\nIn 2004, your company invested over $690 million of capital in the creation of new restaurants, clubs, shows and nightspots as well as the development of strategic enhancements to existing amenities. These investments generated exceptional returns in a time when competition for the entertainment dollar has never been higher.\n\n03", + "recall": 0.9317269076305221, + "true_md": "## Defining Momentum for Our Industry\n\nThe gaming industry in America is maturing, and international expansion, while exciting in select markets, remains challenging. As a result, your company has pursued a growth strategy that calls for maximizing the assets we currently own and seeking prudent development opportunities and strategic acquisitions.\n\nUpon completion of our merger with Mandalay, MGM MIRAGE will be the world’s leading gaming and leisure company. The combination will result in a well- capitalized company uniquely situated to invest in its current portfolio in addition to creating new projects in the United States and around the world.\n\nWe believe this is an outstanding transaction for the shareholders of both companies. With this acquisition, we will own, operate and have investments in 28 properties throughout Nevada, Mississippi, Illinois, Michigan, and New Jersey. \n\nThe combined company will have an asset portfolio which includes some of the most widely recognized brand names in the world. These properties cater to a broad customer base, ranging from value-oriented to the ultra- high end. Each resort provides a unique customer experience through its specific personality and combination of amenities.\n\nIn 2004, your company invested over $690 million of capital in the creation of new restaurants, clubs, shows and nightspots as well as the development of strategic enhance- ments to existing amenities. These investments generated exceptional returns in a time when competition for the entertainment dollar has never been higher. \n\nIn short, this groundbreaking transaction creates unstoppable momentum for all stakeholders in the MGM MIRAGE family. \n\nBut the bricks and mortar tell only part of the story of this transaction. At the heart of Mandalay is its people. Mandalay employees at all levels are energetic and talented and will be a tremendous asset to us. Together, we will become a family in excess of 70,000 people committed to delivering the best possible experiences for our guests. The transaction also will create unparalleled opportunities for our entire family of employees. \n\nWe also will have at Mandalay Bay the fifth largest convention center in the United States, providing the com- pany with a great resource to further develop the business travel and convention market. \n\n## Defining Momentum in our Properties\n\n03\n\nMystère ® by Cirque du Soleil ®\n\nFIX BELLAGIO Classic American fare using the freshest fish, meat, and poultry cooked to order on a wood-burning grill. Costa Rican Padouk wood inspires a warm environment in a unique, vibrant design." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8766214989255489, + "doc_id": "e1cd65e3e8a96735c7a3a726ded6e7e71d0eb7a49a432369a00a9175f766e126", + "edit_distance": 0.7456575682382134, + "f1_score": 0.9714285714285715, + "meteor": 0.7321230406069952, + "precision": 0.9763513513513513, + "pred_md": "## CORPORATE GOVERNANCE\n\n## CORPORATE GOVERNANCE STATEMENT\n\nThe purpose of this Statement is to provide details of the main corporate governance practices the Company had in place during the past financial year.\n\nThe Board works under a set of well-established corporate governance policies that reinforce the responsibilities of all Directors in accordance with the requirements of the Corporations Act and the Listing Rules of the Australian Stock Exchange (ASX).\n\nThe Board regularly reviews and updates its corporate governance policies on an annual basis and as required, to ensure that the Company's policies remain in accordance with best practice.\n\n## 1. COMPLIANCE WITH THE ASX BEST PRACTICE RECOMMENDATIONS\n\nFollowing publication of the Principles of Good Corporate Governance and Best Practice Recommendations of the ASX Corporate Governance Council ('ASX Best Practice Recommendations'), Santos assessed its existing corporate governance practices for compliance with those Recommendations. As a result of this assessment, which was initially carried out in 2003, the Board formed the view that the Company's existing practices complied in substance with the ASX Best Practice\n\nRecommendations, except that at that time it provided retirement benefits to non-executive Directors. Historically, these benefits were provided pursuant\n\nto agreements approved by shareholders at the 1989 Annual General Meeting and, as reported in the Company's 2003 Annual Report, a review by the Remuneration Committee of the Board had determined that the provision of those benefits should cease on 30 June 2004 and benefits accrued to that date should be held by the Company and paid on retirement.\n\nAs a result of its decision to cease the provision of retirement benefits, the Board believes that from 30 June 2004, the Company's policies and practices comply in all substantial respects with the ASX Best Practice Recommendations. To assist shareholders, the policies and practices described in this Corporate Governance Statement are cross referenced to a checklist of the ASX Best Practice Recommendations set out at the end of this Statement.\n\n## 2. BOARD OF DIRECTORS AND ITS COMMITTEES\n\nExcept where otherwise indicated, references in this Statement to the 'Board Guidelines' are to the formal guidelines in force during the past financial year and as at 30 March, 2005.\n\n## 2.1 Board Responsibilities\n\nThe Board is responsible for the overall corporate governance of the Company, including its strategic direction and financial objectives, establishing goals for management and monitoring the attainment of these goals.\n\nSpecifically, as detailed in this Statement, the Board is responsible for:\n\n- · the provision of strategic direction and oversight of management;\n- · corporate governance;\n- · the selection and evaluation of, and succession planning for, Directors and executive management;\n- · significant acquisitions and disposals of assets;\n- · significant expenditure decisions outside of the corporate budget;\n- · hedging of product sales, sales contracts and financing arrangements;\n- · the remuneration of Directors and executive management;\n- · the approval of, and monitoring of financial performance against, corporate budgets;\n- · the approval of delegations of authority to management;\n- · ethical standards and codes of conduct; and\n- · the integrity of risk management strategies and controls.\n\nThe Board delegates management of the Company's resources to the Company's executive management team, under the leadership of the Chief Executive Officer and Managing Director ('CEO'), to deliver the strategic direction and goals determined by the Board. This Statement details the responsibilities delegated by the Board to executive management for:\n\n- · implementing corporate strategies;\n\n'The Company continued its focus on stakeholder delivery throughout 2004, enhancing its commitment to top quartile corporate governance. '\n\n## WESLEY GLANVILLE\n\nManaging Counsel and Company Secretary\n\n- · maintaining and reporting on effective risk management (including safety and plant integrity); and\n- · operating under approved budgets and written delegations of authority.\n\n## 2.2 Board Procedures\n\nTo assist in the effective execution of its responsibilities, the Board Guidelines include procedures for providing Directors with all relevant information and familiarity with the Company's major centres of operation. In addition, the Board has established a number of Board Committees including a Nomination Committee, a Remuneration Committee, an Audit Committee, a Finance Committee and an Environmental and Safety Committee to assist with the effective discharge of its duties. All Committees are chaired by, and comprised only\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\n29", + "recall": 0.9665551839464883, + "true_md": "## CORPORATE GOVERNANCE STATEMENT\n\n## CORPORATE GO VERNANCE\n\nThe purpose of this Statement is to provide details of the main corporate governance practices the Company had in place during the past financial year. \n\nto agreements approved by shareholders at the 1989 Annual General Meeting and, as reported in the Company’s 2003 Annual Report, a review by the Remuneration Committee of the Board had determined that the provision of those benefits should cease on 30 June 2004 and benefits accrued to that date should be held by the Company and paid on retirement. \n\nThe Board works under a set of well-established corporate governance policies that reinforce the responsibilities of all Directors in accordance with the requirements of the Corporations Act and the Listing Rules of the Australian Stock Exchange (ASX).\n\nAs a result of its decision to cease the provision of retirement benefits, the Board believes that from 30 June 2004, the Company’s policies and practices comply in all substantial respects with the ASX Best Practice Recommendations. To assist shareholders, the policies and practices described in this Corporate Governance Statement are cross referenced to a checklist of the ASX Best Practice Recommendations set out at the end of this Statement.\n\nThe Board regularly reviews and updates its corporate governance policies on an annual basis and as required, to ensure that the Company’s policies remain in accordance with best practice.\n\nFollowing publication of the Principles of Good Corporate Governance and Best Practice Recommendations of the ASX Corporate Governance Council (“ASX Best Practice Recommendations”), Santos assessed its existing corporate governance practices for compliance with those Recommendations. As a result of this assessment, which was initially carried out in 2003, the Board formed the view that the Company’s existing practices complied in substance with the ASX Best Practice Recommendations, except that at that time it provided retirement benefits to non-executive Directors. Historically, these benefits were provided pursuant\n\nThe Board is responsible for the overall corporate governance of the Company, including its strategic direction and financial objectives, establishing goals for management and monitoring the attainment of these goals.\n\nSpecifically, as detailed in this Statement, the Board is responsible for: \n\nThe Board delegates management of the Company’s resources to the Company’s executive management team, under the leadership of the Chief Executive Officer and Managing Director (“CEO”), to deliver the strategic direction and goals determined by the Board. This Statement details the responsibilities delegated by the Board to executive management for:\n\nTo assist in the effective execution of its responsibilities, the Board Guidelines include procedures for providing Directors with all relevant information and familiarity with the Company’s major centres of operation. In addition, the Board has established a number of Board Committees including a Nomination Committee, a Remuneration Committee, an Audit Committee, a Finance Committee and an Environmental and Safety Committee to assist with the effective discharge of its duties. All Committees are chaired by, and comprised only\n\nExcept where otherwise indicated, references in this Statement to the “Board Guidelines” are to the formal guidelines in force during the past financial year and as at 30 March, 2005.\n\n‘The Company continued its focus on stakeholder delivery throughout 2004, enhancing its commitment to top quartile corporate governance.’ \n\nManaging Counsel and Company Secretary\n\n- • the provision of strategic direction and oversight of management; \n\n- • corporate governance; \n\n- • the selection and evaluation of, and succession planning for, Directors and executive management; \n\n- • significant acquisitions and disposals of assets; \n\n- • significant expenditure decisions outside of the corporate budget; \n\n- • hedging of product sales, sales contracts and financing arrangements;\n\n- • the remuneration of Directors and executive management; \n\n- • the approval of, and monitoring of financial performance against, corporate budgets;\n\n- • the approval of delegations of authority to management; \n\n- • ethical standards and codes of conduct; and \n\n- • maintaining and reporting on effective risk management (including safety and plant integrity); and\n\n- • the integrity of risk management strategies and controls.\n\n- • operating under approved budgets and written delegations of authority.\n\n- • implementing corporate strategies; \n\nAnnual Report 2004 29\n\n## 2.2 Board Procedures\n\n## 2. BOARD OF DIRECTORS AND ITS COMMITTEES\n\n## 2.1 Board Responsibilities\n\n## 1. COMPLIANCE WITH THE ASX BEST PRACTICE RECOMMENDATIONS\n\n## WESLEY GLANVILLE" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8516635773069263, + "doc_id": "71a97a307ecf63bd5e9b22e9df6d6f128b4fb7cf7295a958aa61883b8a2a08f2", + "edit_distance": 0.08333333333333333, + "f1_score": 0.9814814814814815, + "meteor": 0.9345245275047003, + "precision": 0.9875776397515528, + "pred_md": "## CORPORATE GOVERNANCE\n\nThe Directors are responsible for the Corporate Governance practices of Mermaid. This statement sets out the main Corporate Governance practices that were in operation during the Period.\n\n## Board of Directors\n\n## The Board carries out its responsibilities in accordance with the following:\n\n- The Board will comprise at least four directors; ·\n- The Board will be made up of at least one quarter of non-executive directors; ·\n- The directors must between them possess a broad range of skills, qualifications and experience; ·\n- The Board will meet on a monthly basis; and ·\n- All available information in connection with items to be discussed at a meeting of the Board will be provided to each director prior to that meeting. ·\n\n## The primary responsibilities of the Board include:\n\n- Establishing Mermaid's goals and developing strategic plans to achieve them; ·\n- The review and adoption of annual budgets and cashflow forecasts for the financial performance of Mermaid and monitoring the results on an ongoing basis; ·\n- Identifying business risks and implementing actions to manage those risks; ·\n- Developing an effective management and corporate system to ensure safety, quality, measure progress and exercise control; ·\n- Ensuring the employment and further development of efficient and qualified staff for the growth of the Company's business consistent with industry leadership; ·\n- Identifying and developing strategic relationships for growth and access to specialist expertise; and ·\n- ·\n- Develop clear and accurate annual and half-yearly financial reports for Mermaid stakeholders.\n\n## Independent Professional Advice\n\nSubject to the Chairman's prior approval (not to be unreasonably withheld), directors, at Mermaid's expense, may obtain independent professional advice on issues arising in the course of their duties.", + "recall": 0.9754601226993865, + "true_md": "## CORPORATE GOVERNANCE\n\nThe Directors are responsible for the Corporate Governance practices of Mermaid. This statement sets out the main Corporate Governance practices that were in operation during the Period.\n\n## Board of Directors\n\nThe Board carries out its responsibilities in accordance with the following: \n\n- The Board will comprise at least four directors; •\n\n- The Board will be made up of at least one quarter of non-executive directors; •\n\n- The directors must between them possess a broad range of skills, qualifications and experience; •\n\n- The Board will meet on a monthly basis; and •\n\n- All available information in connection with items to be discussed at a meeting of the Board will be provided to each director prior to that meeting. •\n\nThe primary responsibilities of the Board include:\n\n- Establishing Mermaid’s goals and developing strategic plans to achieve them; •\n\n- The review and adoption of annual budgets and cashflow forecasts for the financial performance of Mermaid and monitoring the results on an ongoing basis; •\n\n- Identifying business risks and implementing actions to manage those risks; •\n\n- Developing an effective management and corporate system to ensure safety, quality, measure progress and exercise control; •\n\n- Ensuring the employment and further development of efficient and qualified staff for the growth of the Company’s business consistent with industry leadership; •\n\n- Identifying and developing strategic relationships for growth and access to specialist expertise; and •\n\n- Develop clear and accurate annual and half-yearly financial reports for Mermaid stakeholders. •\n\n## Independent Professional Advice\n\nSubject to the Chairman’s prior approval (not to be unreasonably withheld), directors, at Mermaid’s expense, may obtain independent professional advice on issues arising in the course of their duties.\n\n24" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7524265703794796, + "doc_id": "bc6579928220119d8ddba1b61716d9379d4d1c014620865a3317c8aaccc8fd02", + "edit_distance": 0.6161971830985915, + "f1_score": 0.8888888888888888, + "meteor": 0.7849202179543502, + "precision": 0.9242424242424242, + "pred_md": "## HON INDUSTRIES 2003\n\n## HEARTH & HOME TECHNOLOGIES: HOT! HOT! HOT!\n\n## A CASE STUDY IN EXPANDING MARKETS\n\nWith four brand names under the Hearth & Home Technologies umbrella, we are collectively the world's largest fireplace manufacturer, the country's premier fireplace brands, the most recognized name in the industry, and the preferred brands among home builders. As the leading provider of hearth and home products and services, we make houses feel more like homes.\n\nIn addition to our commanding leadership position in manufacturing the two strongest hearth and home product brand names - Heatilator and Heat-N-Glo - we also offer ® ® innovative wood fuel technology, fireplaces, and stoves through Quadra-Fire TM , while Fireside Hearth & Home distributes, services, and sells fireplace systems.\n\nWhat are we up to with all our great brands? We are meeting a broad range of customer needs, particularly by selling both to consumers and builders through a network of independent and company-owned, stand-alone, or gallerystyle design and installation centers. These Fireside Hearth & Home design centers - visually impressive and aspirational in setting - manifest our proprietary concept of elevating the hearth retail, installation, and distribution experience to a new level of sophistication and service. Since there is no other nationally branded hearth retailer in the industry, we are once again changing the game by being first-to-market innovators.\n\nOur newest store in Eagan, Minnesota, for example, is living proof that we're succeeding in growing core product share by getting closer to consumers. One customer, a St. Paul, Minnesota veterinarian, recently had a typically dynamic retail experience at the Eagan store. He's among a large group of people who own at least one of our hearth products - and who comes back for more. He explains: 'When we moved into our house, there were three fireplaces built into the family room, living room, and kitchen. Since we used them every day and liked them so much, we decided to convert our threeseason porch into a year-round porch.'\n\n'We all went to the Eagan store to purchase our fourth Heat-N-Glo fireplace. Once we were walking around the store, ® taking in the lifestyle environments that are set up and dreaming about what our house could look and feel like, we realized we wanted more! We saw an amazing stone surround setting in one of the store displays - and before you knew it, we had bought the whole wall. Not only does our new fireplace now have a beautiful aesthetic and terrific functionality, but so does our porch. Because the surround wall installation was so surprisingly easy and clean, we're even considering our next purchase.'\n\n27", + "recall": 0.856140350877193, + "true_md": "HON INDUSTRIES 2003\n\n## H E A R T H & H O M E T E C H N O L O G I E S : H O T ! H O T ! H O T !\n\n## A C A S E S T U D Y I N E X P A N D I N G M A R K E T S\n\nWith four brand names under the Hearth & Home Technologies umbrella, we are collectively the world’s largest fireplace manu- facturer, the country’s premier fireplace brands, the most rec- ognized name in the industry, and the preferred brands among home builders. As the leading provider of hearth and home prod- ucts and services, we make houses feel more like homes. \n\nOur newest store in Eagan, Minnesota, for example, is living proof that we’re succeeding in growing core product share by getting closer to consumers. One customer, a St. Paul, Minnesota veterinarian, recently had a typically dynamic retail experience at the Eagan store. He’s among a large group of people who own at least one of our hearth products — and who comes back for more. He explains: “When we moved into our house, there were three fireplaces built into the family room, living room, and kitchen. Since we used them every day and liked them so much, we decided to convert our three- season porch into a year-round porch.”\n\nIn addition to our commanding leadership position in manufacturing the two strongest hearth and home product brand names — Heatilator ® and Heat-N-Glo ® — we also offer innovative wood fuel technology, fireplaces, and stoves through Quadra-Fire TM , while Fireside Hearth & Home distributes, ser- vices, and sells fireplace systems.\n\nWhat are we up to with all our great brands? We are meeting a broad range of customer needs, particularly by sell- ing both to consumers and builders through a network of independent and company-owned, stand-alone, or gallery- style design and installation centers. These Fireside Hearth & Home design centers — visually impressive and aspirational in setting — manifest our proprietary concept of elevating the hearth retail, installation, and distribution experience to a new level of sophistication and service. Since there is no other nationally branded hearth retailer in the industry, we are once again changing the game by being first-to-market innovators.\n\n“We all went to the Eagan store to purchase our fourth Heat-N-Glo ® fireplace. Once we were walking around the store, taking in the lifestyle environments that are set up and dreaming about what our house could look and feel like, we realized we wanted more! We saw an amazing stone surround setting in one of the store displays — and before you knew it, we had bought the whole wall. Not only does our new fireplace now have a beautiful aesthetic and terrific functionality, but so does our porch. Because the surround wall installation was so surprisingly easy and clean, we’re even considering our next purchase.” \n\n27" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.933645793623932, + "doc_id": "b4ea50c4597f5c154237cff15b0a6e121fc8b9d984598e4c2065bd4ec3cb4251", + "edit_distance": 0.120817843866171, + "f1_score": 0.9668615984405459, + "meteor": 0.9600024607843342, + "precision": 0.9763779527559056, + "pred_md": "Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations\n\n- · The ongoing capital investments in upscale amenities at our resorts, which we believe is allowing us to market more effectively to visitors, capture a greater share of these visitors' increased travel budgets, and generate premium pricing for our resorts' rooms and other amenities.\n\nAs a result of the above trends, our net revenues increased 10% in 2004, while increasing only 3% in 2003. Net revenues at MGM Grand Las Vegas increased 14% in 2004, due to the addition of several new restaurants, bars and other amenities, and in spite of fewer rooms in service due to room remodel activity. Net revenues at New York-New York increased 26% as the resort continues to benefit from Zumanity and Nine Fine Irishmen, both of which opened in summer 2003. Net revenues at The Mirage decreased 2% as the resort was without the Siegfried & Roy show and the buffet was closed for a portion of the year while Cravings was constructed.\n\nOur operating income in 2004 increased 36%, due primarily to the strong revenue trends and a full year of Borgata's results. The increase in income from unconsolidated affiliates is responsible for approximately one-third of the increase in operating income, while improvements at our operating resorts, particularly Bellagio, MGM Grand Las Vegas and New York-New York, make up the rest of the increase. Operating income at MGM Grand Detroit was essentially flat year-overyear, despite an increase in the gaming tax rate from 18% to 24% effective September 2004. Several other factors largely offset: Higher corporate expense due to increased development costs; lower bad debt expense due to improved collections; lower preopening expenses due to Borgata preopening expenses in 2003; and higher property transactions, net due to a $37 million gain on sale of land in 2003.\n\nIn 2003, our operating income decreased by 6%. While revenues grew especially in the second half of 2003, expense growth, particularly in payroll, outpaced revenues.\n\n## Operating Results - Detailed Revenue Information\n\n## The following table presents details of our net revenues:\n\n## (In thousands)\n\nTable games revenues increased as a result of the improvements in the U.S. economy and the general economy worldwide, as well as increased attendance at targeted marketing events, including the New Years period. Total table games volume for the year was up 9%, with particular strength in baccarat volume, up 18%. These are the most significant increases in table games volumes since 2000. Table games revenues decreased in 2003, as a slightly lower hold percentage and the impact of the Iraq war and SARS outbreak in early 2003 were not fully offset by strong volume levels over the latter half of 2003. Table games win percentages were within our normal range for all periods presented.\n\n23", + "recall": 0.9575289575289575, + "true_md": "23\n\nManagement’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations\n\n## Operating Results – Detailed Revenue Information\n\nThe following table presents details of our net revenues:\n\n(In thousands)\n\n- • The ongoing capital investments in upscale amenities at our resorts, which we believe is allowing us to market more effectively to visitors, capture a greater share of these visitors’ increased travel budgets, and generate premium pricing for our resorts’ rooms and other amenities.\n\nAs a result of the above trends, our net revenues increased 10% in 2004, while increasing only 3% in 2003. Net revenues at MGM Grand Las Vegas increased 14% in 2004, due to the addition of several new restaurants, bars and other amenities, and in spite of fewer rooms in service due to room remodel activity. Net revenues at New York-New York increased 26% as the resort continues to benefit from Zumanity and Nine Fine Irishmen, both of which opened in summer 2003. Net revenues at The Mirage decreased 2% as the resort was without the Siegfried & Roy show and the buffet was closed for a portion of the year while Cravings was constructed.\n\nOur operating income in 2004 increased 36%, due primarily to the strong revenue trends and a full year of Borgata’s results. The increase in income from unconsoli- dated affiliates is responsible for approximately one-third of the increase in operating income, while improvements at our operating resorts, particularly Bellagio, MGM Grand Las Vegas and New York-New York, make up the rest of the increase. Operating income at MGM Grand Detroit was essentially flat year-over- year, despite an increase in the gaming tax rate from 18% to 24% effective September 2004. Several other factors largely offset: Higher corporate expense due to increased development costs; lower bad debt expense due to improved collec- tions; lower preopening expenses due to Borgata preopening expenses in 2003; and higher property transactions, net due to a $37 million gain on sale of land in 2003.\n\nIn 2003, our operating income decreased by 6%. While revenues grew especially in the second half of 2003, expense growth, particularly in payroll, outpaced revenues.\n\nTable games revenues increased as a result of the improvements in the U.S. econo- my and the general economy worldwide, as well as increased attendance at targeted marketing events, including the New Years period. Total table games volume for the year was up 9%, with particular strength in baccarat volume, up 18%. These are the most significant increases in table games volumes since 2000. Table games revenues decreased in 2003, as a slightly lower hold percentage and the impact of the Iraq war and SARS outbreak in early 2003 were not fully offset by strong volume levels over the latter half of 2003. Table games win percentages were within our normal range for all periods presented." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8983963957228829, + "doc_id": "ec6db3a7367b113e8fd8efdfc3a1e14ac35c1a51239c6fcbdb941e9153f31633", + "edit_distance": 0.5219047619047619, + "f1_score": 0.9539078156312627, + "meteor": 0.8702069907249291, + "precision": 0.967479674796748, + "pred_md": "much of the increases from the prior year. Research and development is an integral part of the company's strategy to extend existing brands and expand its offering of new branded items for the consumer market. Hormel Foods, LLC, has responsibility for a majority of the company's intangible assets.\n\nPrevious years' poor stock market results have lowered the historical returns on the company's pension plan assets. As a result, the company reduced its discount rate from 7.0 to 6.5 percent and the expected rate of return from 8.6 to 7.9 percent in its fiscal 2004 pension plan expense calculation.\n\nEquity in Earnings of Affiliates: Equity in earnings of affiliates was $2,174 and $5,886 for the fourth quarter and year, respectively, compared to $1,967 and $7,741 in fiscal 2002. The twelve month decrease is due to the third quarter 2002 discontinuation of equitymethod accounting for the company's 15.2 percent owned investment in Campofrio Alimentacion, S.A. (Campofrio).\n\nIn conformity with U. S. generally accepted accounting principles, the company accounts for its majority-owned China and Australian operations under the consolidation method. Other international\n\ninvestments, such as Campofrio, Purefoods-Hormel, and Hormel Alimentos, in which the company owns a minority interest, are accounted for under the equity or cost method. These international investments, along with investments in and receivables from other affiliates, are included in the balance sheet line item 'investments in and receivables from affiliates.' The composition of this line item at October 25, 2003, was as follows:\n\nIncome Taxes: The company's effective tax rate for the quarter and year was 37.0 and 35.8 percent compared to 34.9 and 35.6 percent in fiscal 2002. The higher fourth quarter rate in fiscal 2003 reflects an increase in foreign taxes.\n\n## Segment Results\n\nThe December 2002 acquisition of Diamond Crystal Brands prompted Hormel Foods management to adjust how it evaluates its businesses and, as a result, established a new segment for Specialty Foods. The Specialty Foods segment includes the newly acquired Diamond Crystal Brands and Century Foods International operating segments along with the existing operating segments of Hormel HealthLabs (formerly in the Refrigerated Foods segment) and Specialty Products (formerly in the Grocery Products segment). The fiscal 2002 segment results presented below have been restated to reflect this change.\n\nNet sales and operating profits for each of the company's segments is set forth below. The company is an integrated enterprise, characterized by substantial intersegment cooperation, cost allocations, and sharing of assets. Therefore, we do not represent that these segments, if operated independently, would report the operating profit and other financial information shown below. (Additional segment financial information can be found in Note K of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.)\n\n24\n\nHormel Foods Corporation", + "recall": 0.9407114624505929, + "true_md": "much of the increases from the prior year. Research and develop- ment is an integral part of the company’s strategy to extend exist- ing brands and expand its offering of new branded items for the consumer market. Hormel Foods, LLC, has responsibility for a majority of the company’s intangible assets. \n\ninvestments, such as Campofrio, Purefoods-Hormel, and Hormel Alimentos, in which the company owns a minority interest, are accounted for under the equity or cost method. These international investments, along with investments in and receivables from other affiliates, are included in the balance sheet line item “investments in and receivables from affiliates.” The composition of this line item at October 25, 2003, was as follows:\n\nPrevious years’ poor stock market results have lowered the his- torical returns on the company’s pension plan assets. As a result, the company reduced its discount rate from 7.0 to 6.5 percent and the expected rate of return from 8.6 to 7.9 percent in its fiscal 2004 pension plan expense calculation. \n\nEquity in Earnings of Affiliates: Equity in earnings of affiliates was $2,174 and $5,886 for the fourth quarter and year, respectively, compared to $1,967 and $7,741 in fiscal 2002. The twelve month decrease is due to the third quarter 2002 discontinuation of equity- method accounting for the company’s 15.2 percent owned invest- ment in Campofrio Alimentacion, S.A. (Campofrio). \n\nIn conformity with U. S. generally accepted accounting principles, the company accounts for its majority-owned China and Australian operations under the consolidation method. Other international\n\nThe December 2002 acquisition of Diamond Crystal Brands prompted Hormel Foods management to adjust how it evaluates its businesses and, as a result, established a new segment for Specialty Foods. The Specialty Foods segment includes the newly acquired Diamond Crystal Brands and Century Foods International operating segments along with the existing operating segments of Hormel HealthLabs (formerly in the Refrigerated Foods segment) and Specialty Products (formerly in the Grocery Products segment). The fiscal 2002 segment results presented below have been restated to reflect this change.\n\nNet sales and operating profits for each of the company’s segments is set forth below. The company is an integrated enterprise, char- acterized by substantial intersegment cooperation, cost allocations, and sharing of assets. Therefore, we do not represent that these segments, if operated independently, would report the operating profit and other financial information shown below. (Additional segment financial information can be found in Note K of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.)\n\n## Segment Results\n\nIncome Taxes: The company’s effective tax rate for the quarter and year was 37.0 and 35.8 percent compared to 34.9 and 35.6 percent in fiscal 2002. The higher fourth quarter rate in fiscal 2003 reflects an increase in foreign taxes. \n\n24 Hormel Foods Corporation" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8874907253094609, + "doc_id": "6ab9e42c621b08ad07d25985707c9fe1eb56bb7dd2c0724868ea67b0158ba490", + "edit_distance": 0.24324324324324326, + "f1_score": 0.9710743801652894, + "meteor": 0.9336982170502491, + "precision": 0.9670781893004116, + "pred_md": "24\n\n## REPLENISHING AND UPGRADING RESERVES\n\nSantos added 57 million boe of Proven (1P) reserves which represents 121% of 2004 production.\n\nProven reserves at the end of the year, after 47.1 million boe of production and after divestments, were 348 million boe, compared with 338 million boe at the end of 2003.\n\nThe replacement of Proven reserves exceeded Santos' total group production for the third year in a row, with the replacement rate for Proven reserves averaging 130% over the past three years: a good result and in line with international best practice.\n\nProven plus Probable (2P) reserves increased by 54 million boe prior to production, or by 7 million boe after production which represents a reserves replacement rate of 114%.\n\nThe 2004 reserves figures do not include any potential reserve bookings for the Jeruk oil discovery in the Sampang PSC in East Java or the Hiu Aman oil and gas discovery in the Donggala PSC in the Kutei Basin, offshore East Kalimantan.\n\nThe average Proven reserve replacement cost for 2004 was US$12.37 per boe. Replacement costs in any one year are affected by the timing of spending and reserve bookings, so a three-year average is a more reliable indicator of costs. Santos' threeyear average replacement cost of US$7.19 per boe is worldcompetitive.\n\n2004 was also a significant year in terms of development, with some 102 million boe of 1P\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\nreserves and 134 million boe of 2P reserves being moved from undeveloped to developed, significantly increasing the value of reserves.\n\nThe material movements in reserves during the year were as follows:\n\n- · Onshore Australia - revisions due to positive reservoir performance and development results in onshore Australia added 18.5 million boe of 1P reserves.\n- · Cooper Basin - poorer than expected performance in some tight gas fields and the integration of results from some previously unsuccessful fracture stimulations resulted in a 2P reserve reduction of 16 million boe.\n- · Bayu-Undan - excellent results from development drilling program in the Bayu-Undan field added 7 million boe of 1P and 14 million boe of 2P reserves.\n- · Mutineer-Exeter - a disappointing appraisal and development drilling campaign resulted in downgrades in 1P reserves of 10 million boe and 2P reserves of 13 million boe.\n- · John Brookes - integration of the late 2003 drilling results in the John Brookes gas field, along with detailed reservoir modelling, resulted in a significant positive revision of 15 million boe of 1P and 32 million boe of 2P reserves.\n- · East Spar - disappointing production performance resulted in downgrades in 1P reserves of 3 million boe and 2P reserves of 8 million boe.\n- · Maleo - sufficient progress with commercialisation resulted in the booking of 19 million boe of 1P and 27 million boe of 2P reserves.\n- · Acquisitions and divestments a net increase in 1P reserves of 12 million boe and 2P reserves of 22 million boe from the acquisition of certain Novus Petroleum assets and an increase in Patricia-Baleen equity, with negligible movement due to divestments.\n\n## OFFSHORE 1P AND 2P RESERVES\n\nThe shift in Santos' focus since 2001 is evidenced by the reduction in onshore reserves and the corresponding increase in offshore reserves over time, as shown in the charts below. This trend can be expected to continue as the central Australian fields mature and new projects move through the development conveyor.\n\n## ONSHORE 1P AND 2P RESERVES\n\nmmboe - nett", + "recall": 0.975103734439834, + "true_md": "## REPLENISHING AND UPGRADING RESERVES\n\nSantos added 57 million boe of Proven (1P) reserves which represents 121% of 2004 production.\n\nProven reserves at the end of the year, after 47.1 million boe of production and after divestments, were 348 million boe, compared with 338 million boe at the end of 2003. \n\nThe replacement of Proven reserves exceeded Santos’ total group production for the third year in a row, with the replacement rate for Proven reserves averaging 130% over the past three years: a good result and in line with international best practice.\n\nProven plus Probable (2P) reserves increased by 54 million boe prior to production, or by 7 million boe after production which represents a reserves replacement rate of 114%.\n\nThe 2004 reserves figures do not include any potential reserve bookings for the Jeruk oil discovery in the Sampang PSC in East Java or the Hiu Aman oil and gas discovery in the Donggala PSC in the Kutei Basin, offshore East Kalimantan.\n\nThe average Proven reserve replacement cost for 2004 was US$12.37 per boe. Replacement costs in any one year are affected by the timing of spending and reserve bookings, so a three-year average is a more reliable indicator of costs. Santos’ three- year average replacement cost of US$7.19 per boe is world- competitive. \n\n2004 was also a significant year in terms of development, with some 102 million boe of 1P\n\nreserves and 134 million boe of 2P reserves being moved from undeveloped to developed, significantly increasing the value of reserves.\n\nThe material movements in reserves during the year were as follows:\n\nThe shift in Santos’ focus since 2001 is evidenced by the reduction in onshore reserves and the corresponding increase in offshore reserves over time, as shown in the charts below. This trend can be expected to continue as the central Australian fields mature and new projects move through the development conveyor.\n\n- • Onshore Australia – revisions due to positive reservoir performance and development results in onshore Australia added 18.5 million boe of 1P reserves.\n\n- • Cooper Basin – poorer than expected performance in some tight gas fields and the integration of results from some previously unsuccessful fracture stimulations resulted in a 2P reserve reduction of 16 million boe. \n\n- • Bayu-Undan – excellent results from development drilling program in the Bayu-Undan field added 7 million boe of 1P and 14 million boe of 2P reserves.\n\n- • Mutineer-Exeter – a disappointing appraisal and development drilling campaign resulted in downgrades in 1P reserves of 10 million boe and 2P reserves of 13 million boe.\n\n- • John Brookes – integration of the late 2003 drilling results in the John Brookes gas field, along with detailed reservoir modelling, resulted in a significant positive revision of 15 million boe of 1P and 32 million boe of 2P reserves.\n\n- • East Spar – disappointing production performance resulted in downgrades in 1P reserves of 3 million boe and 2P reserves of 8 million boe.\n\n- • Maleo – sufficient progress with commercialisation resulted in the booking of 19 million boe of 1P and 27 million boe of 2P reserves.\n\n- • Acquisitions and divestments – a net increase in 1P reserves of 12 million boe and 2P reserves of 22 million boe from the acquisition of certain Novus Petroleum assets and an increase in Patricia-Baleen equity, with negligible movement due to divestments.\n\nAnnual Report 2004 24" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9469285321723776, + "doc_id": "5ab4acee89998c3c8ea8729465caf4c8094c9a03fbbb1c76b34a0e2e82ba8b30", + "edit_distance": 0.8202531645569621, + "f1_score": 0.9888143176733781, + "meteor": 0.7466181663120952, + "precision": 0.9910313901345291, + "pred_md": "## AUTOMOBILES\n\n## INFINITI\n\n## Becoming a Globally Recognized Luxury Brand\n\nIn the realm of passenger vehicles, a luxury car is the thoroughbred all the others aspire to be. Constructed differently and with infinite care, it is meant for passionate buyers with exceptionally high expectations. A luxury car also demands extraordinary treatment; only the highest levels of attention to customer desires, needs and service will do.\n\nFrom the time of its U.S. launch in 1989, Infiniti has been such a brand. Built using the ultimate in Nissan technology and production skills, an Infiniti is a merging of spirited performance, innovation and art, and embodies the achievement of something deeper-a vibrant alternative to the usual luxury-class competitors.\n\nInfiniti has been the fastest-growing luxury-car brand in the North American market for three consecutive years. This success is based on a clear understanding of the Infiniti luxury customer and building distinctive vehicles that surpass even their uncompromising standards.\n\nThe brand's overwhelming success in the United States led to the decision to take Infiniti global as part of the NISSAN Value-Up Plan. Currently available in North America, the Middle East and Taiwan, Infiniti took its first step toward becoming a truly world-class brand with its entry into South Korea in the summer of 2005. Exclusive Infiniti dealerships there will offer a full passenger car lineup, including the G35 sedan and coupe, FX, Q45, and the all-new M.\n\nSouth Korea represents a good first global market for Infiniti. The initial sales targets are modest but will help build a solid foundation for Infiniti's expansion into Russia, followed by China and then ultimately into Japan.\n\nWith a luxury brand of this stature, establishing the dealer network, along with a distinctive level of service and a highly trained staff, are absolutely critical elements for sustained success. Infiniti's global expansion is a significant investment that must be executed flawlessly from the beginning. The launch of the Infiniti into any new market will therefore be very carefully considered, thoroughly developed and painstakingly implemented to ensure the successful debut of a globally recognized luxury brand.\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\n25\n\nWHO WE ARE", + "recall": 0.9866071428571429, + "true_md": "With a luxury brand of this stature, establishing the dealer network, along with a distinctive level of service and a highly trained staff, are absolutely critical elements for sustained success. Infiniti’s global expansion is a significant investment that must be executed flawlessly from the beginning. The launch of the Infiniti into any new market will therefore be very carefully considered, thoroughly developed and painstakingly implemented to ensure the successful debut of a globally recognized luxury brand.\n\nSouth Korea represents a good first global market for Infiniti. The initial sales targets are modest but will help build a solid foundation for Infiniti’s expansion into Russia, followed by China and then ultimately into Japan.\n\nThe brand’s overwhelming success in the United States led to the decision to take Infiniti global as part of the NISSAN Value-Up Plan. Currently available in North America, the Middle East and Taiwan, Infiniti took its first step toward becoming a truly world-class brand with its entry into South Korea in the summer of 2005. Exclusive Infiniti dealerships there will offer a full passenger car lineup, including the G35 sedan and coupe, FX, Q45, and the all-new M.\n\nInfiniti has been the fastest-growing luxury-car brand in the North American market for three consecutive years. This success is based on a clear understanding of the Infiniti luxury customer and building distinctive vehicles that surpass even their uncompromising standards.\n\nFrom the time of its U.S. launch in 1989, Infiniti has been such a brand. Built using the ultimate in Nissan technology and production skills, an Infiniti is a merging of spirited performance, innovation and art, and embodies the achievement of something deeper—a vibrant alternative to the usual luxury-class competitors.\n\nIn the realm of passenger vehicles, a luxury car is the thoroughbred all the others aspire to be. Constructed differently and with infinite care, it is meant for passionate buyers with exceptionally high expectations. A luxury car also demands extraordinary treatment; only the highest levels of attention to customer desires, needs and service will do.\n\nWHO WE ARE\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 25\n\n## Becoming a Globally Recognized Luxury Brand\n\n## INFINITI\n\n## AUTOMOBILES" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.769333758306495, + "doc_id": "00c3405f0fc4afb2f068640dd840d6300d407a33a988b47465377afc8d438105", + "edit_distance": 0.31528662420382164, + "f1_score": 0.8264984227129338, + "meteor": 0.8058900157411623, + "precision": 0.8397435897435898, + "pred_md": "## HON INDUSTRIES Inc. and SUBSIDIARIES\n\nThe following table summarizes information about fixed stock options outstanding at January 3, 2004:\n\n## Retirement Benefits\n\nThe Company has defined contribution profit-sharing plans covering substantially all employees who are not participants in certain defined benefit plans. The Company's annual contribution to the defined contribution plans is based on employee eligible earnings and results of operations and amounted to $26,489,000, $23,524,000, and $24,826,000 in 2003, 2002, and 2001, respectively.\n\nThe Company sponsors defined benefit plans which include a limited number of salaried and hourly employees at certain subsidiaries. The Company's funding policy is generally to contribute annually the minimum actuarially computed amount. Net pension costs relating to these plans were $176,000; $0; and $0 for 2003, 2002, and 2001, respectively. The actuarial present value of obligations, less related plan assets at fair value, is not significant.\n\nThe Company also participates in a multiemployer plan, which provides defined benefits to certain of the Company's union\n\nemployees. Pension expense for this plan amounted to $309,000, $309,000, and $310,000 in 2003, 2002, and 2001, respectively.\n\n## Postretirement Health Care\n\nIn accordance with the guidelines of revised SFAS No. 132, 'Employers' Disclosures about Pensions and other Postretirement Benefits,' the following table sets forth the funded status of the plan, reconciled to the accrued postretirement benefits cost recognized in the Company's balance sheet at:\n\nEstimated Future Benefit Payments (In thousands)\n\nPlan Assets - Percentage of Fair Value by Category\n\n51", + "recall": 0.8136645962732919, + "true_md": "## H O N I N D U S T R I E S I n c . a n d S U B S I D I A R I E S\n\n## Postretirement Health Care\n\n## Retirement Benefits\n\nThe Company has defined contribution profit-sharing plans cover- ing substantially all employees who are not participants in certain defined benefit plans. The Company’s annual contribution to the de- fined contribution plans is based on employee eligible earnings and results of operations and amounted to $26,489,000, $23,524,000, and $24,826,000 in 2003, 2002, and 2001, respectively.\n\nThe Company sponsors defined benefit plans which include a limited number of salaried and hourly employees at certain subsidiar- ies. The Company’s funding policy is generally to contribute annually the minimum actuarially computed amount. Net pension costs relating to these plans were $176,000; $0; and $0 for 2003, 2002, and 2001, respectively. The actuarial present value of obligations, less related plan assets at fair value, is not significant.\n\nThe Company also participates in a multiemployer plan, which provides defined benefits to certain of the Company’s union \n\n51\n\nThe following table summarizes information about fixed stock options outstanding at January 3, 2004:\n\nemployees. Pension expense for this plan amounted to $309,000, $309,000, and $310,000 in 2003, 2002, and 2001, respectively.\n\nIn accordance with the guidelines of revised SFAS No. 132, “Employers’ Disclosures about Pensions and other Postretirement Benefits,” the fol- lowing table sets forth the funded status of the plan, reconciled to the accrued postretirement benefits cost recognized in the Company’s bal- ance sheet at:" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.83605062947371, + "doc_id": "304bec0f08e23f3bcd0a04de8bf40a493f0a3b36aaf751d31175080087d28e3c", + "edit_distance": 0.6941176470588235, + "f1_score": 0.943025540275049, + "meteor": 0.8672332420591979, + "precision": 0.9125475285171103, + "pred_md": "22\n\nManaging Options\n\n## UNLOCKING THE VALUE OF STRATEGIC ASSETS\n\n'Our objective is to derive value from undeveloped assets which have been outside of Santos' base business. '\n\n## BRUCE WOOD\n\nVice President Strategic Projects\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\nSantos' Strategic Projects team focuses on assets that have proven difficult to commercialise or that need to be considered in a regional context rather than on an individual basis.\n\nThe other key activity for this team has been to lead Santos' continuous improvement focus.\n\n## UNITED STATES GAS\n\nThe US gas business was a major focus in 2004 for a number of reasons, not the least of which are the higher gas prices in the US compared with the domestic Australian market, and the ability to rapidly commercialise new discoveries.\n\nAn ongoing development and delineation program was carried out during the year, yielding better than planned production. The exploration initiative also continued to seek higher risk but more material prospects, aimed at enhancing the move into the shallow water area of the Gulf of Mexico. Exploration results in this area during 2005 will shape Santos' future strategy in the US.\n\n## TIGHT GAS\n\nHydrocarbons contained in traps with poor permeability are known as 'tight gas' . Large tight gas resources are known to exist in the Cooper Basin. Under current circumstances, this gas cannot be economically developed but, with the combination of improved production techniques and better commercial terms, could prove attractive.\n\nSantos assessed the resources and potential technologies that could be applied to unlock these resources during 2004 and is now\n\nworking up a range of possible evaluation projects to be undertaken in 2005.\n\n## NORTHERN AUSTRALIA GAS\n\nSantos has a significant existing gas resource base and some promising exploration acreage in the waters offshore Darwin, where it intends to drill a gas exploration well later this year.\n\nThe Company currently operates the Mereenie gas field in the Amadeus Basin in central Australia, which supplies gas to Darwin. Santos' first offshore gas production in northern Australia begins in 2006, sending BayuUndan gas to Darwin for conversion to LNG. Santos plans to build upon its growing position in the region to target further development which could ensure long-term gas supplies for the current market, or an expanded Northern Territory domestic market, or for export.\n\n## PAPUA NEW GUINEA GAS\n\nSantos is in active discussions with the PNG Gas Project participants to potentially re-enter the PNG Gas Project. Santos has a significant interest in a large part of the liquids-rich Hides gas field which is integral to the development of the Project.\n\n2004 CONTINGENT RESOURCES (TOTAL 1,443 mmboe)\n\n2004 CONTINGENT RESOURCES (TOTAL 1,443 mmboe)\n\n- Northern Australia 709 mmboe\n\nWestern Australia\n\n71 mmboe\n\nCentral Australia 240 mmboe\n\n- Southern Australia 32 mmboe\n- Papua New Guinea 391 mmboe", + "recall": 0.975609756097561, + "true_md": "Managing Options\n\n## UNLOCKING THE VALUE OF STRATEGIC ASSETS\n\n## UNITED STATES GAS\n\n## PAPUA NEW GUINEA GAS\n\n## TIGHT GAS\n\nAnnual Report 2004 22\n\n‘Our objective is to derive value from undeveloped assets which have been outside of Santos’ base business.’\n\nSantos’ Strategic Projects team focuses on assets that have proven difficult to commercialise or that need to be considered in a regional context rather than on an individual basis.\n\nThe other key activity for this team has been to lead Santos’ continuous improvement focus.\n\nThe US gas business was a major focus in 2004 for a number of reasons, not the least of which are the higher gas prices in the US compared with the domestic Australian market, and the ability to rapidly commercialise new discoveries. \n\nworking up a range of possible evaluation projects to be undertaken in 2005.\n\nSantos has a significant existing gas resource base and some promising exploration acreage in the waters offshore Darwin, where it intends to drill a gas exploration well later this year.\n\nThe Company currently operates the Mereenie gas field in the Amadeus Basin in central Australia, which supplies gas to Darwin. Santos’ first offshore gas production in northern Australia begins in 2006, sending Bayu- Undan gas to Darwin for conversion to LNG. Santos plans to build upon its growing position in the region to target further development which could ensure long-term gas supplies for the current market, or an expanded Northern Territory domestic market, or for export.\n\nAn ongoing development and delineation program was carried out during the year, yielding better than planned production. The exploration initiative also continued to seek higher risk but more material prospects, aimed at enhancing the move into the shallow water area of the Gulf of Mexico. Exploration results in this area during 2005 will shape Santos’ future strategy in the US.\n\nSantos is in active discussions with the PNG Gas Project participants to potentially re-enter the PNG Gas Project. Santos has a significant interest in a large part of the liquids-rich Hides gas field which is integral to the development of the Project.\n\nHydrocarbons contained in traps with poor permeability are known as ‘tight gas’. Large tight gas resources are known to exist in the Cooper Basin. Under current circumstances, this gas cannot be economically developed but, with the combination of improved production techniques and better commercial terms, could prove attractive. \n\nSantos assessed the resources and potential technologies that could be applied to unlock these resources during 2004 and is now\n\n## NORTHERN AUSTRALIA GAS\n\nVice President Strategic Projects\n\n## BRUCE WOOD" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9674527139882074, + "doc_id": "7a9b49ed743e8a04095e82de596bb1a69fe29be7cdcfd5115cfcbefac41bc070", + "edit_distance": 0.7232876712328767, + "f1_score": 0.9921259842519685, + "meteor": 0.8598388714252616, + "precision": 0.9947368421052631, + "pred_md": "## SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## Note 6. Income Taxes (Continued)\n\nNet deferred tax assets and liabilities consist of the following at December 31:\n\nIn assessing the ability to realize deferred tax assets, management considers whether it is more likely than not that some portion or all of the deferred tax assets will not be realized. The ultimate realization of deferred tax assets is dependent upon generating future taxable income during the periods in which those temporary differences become deductible. Management considers the scheduled reversal of deferred tax liabilities, projected future taxable income and tax planning strategies in making this assessment. Based upon the level of historical taxable income and projections for future taxable income over the periods which the deferred tax assets are deductible, management believes it more likely than not that the Company will realize the benefits of the deductible differences that are not reserved by the valuation allowance, which increased by $160 thousand, to $864 thousand in 2003, from $704 thousand in 2002. The Company has generated net operating loss (NOL) carry forwards of approximately $25.9 million from its PCS operations in several states. The carry forwards expire at varying dates beginning in 2005.\n\n## Note 7. Significant Contractual Relationship\n\nIn 1999, the Company executed a Management Agreement (the Agreement) with Sprint whereby the Company committed to construct and operate a PCS network using CDMA air interface technology, replacing an earlier PCS network based on GSM technology. Under the Agreement, the Company is the exclusive PCS Affiliate of Sprint providing wireless mobility communications network products and services in its territory which extends from Altoona, York and Harrisburg, Pennsylvania, and south along the Interstate 81 corridor through Western Maryland, the panhandle of West Virginia, to Harrisonburg, Virginia. The Company is authorized to use the Sprint brand name in its territory, and operate its network under the Sprint radio spectrum license.\n\nSHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY\n\n28\n\n■", + "recall": 0.9895287958115183, + "true_md": "SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY ■ 28\n\n## Note 7. Significant Contractual Relationship\n\nIn 1999, the Company executed a Management Agreement (the Agreement) with Sprint whereby the Company committed to construct and operate a PCS network using CDMA air interface technology, replacing an earlier PCS network based on GSM technology. Under the Agreement, the Company is the exclusive PCS Affiliate of Sprint providing wireless mobility communications network products and services in its territory which extends from Altoona, York and Harrisburg, Pennsylvania, and south along the Interstate 81 corridor through Western Maryland, the panhandle of West Virginia, to Harrisonburg, Virginia. The Company is authorized to use the Sprint brand name in its territory, and operate its network under the Sprint radio spectrum license.\n\nIn assessing the ability to realize deferred tax assets, management considers whether it is more likely than not that some portion or all of the deferred tax assets will not be realized. The ultimate realization of deferred tax assets is dependent upon generating future taxable income during the periods in which those temporary differences become deductible. Management considers the scheduled reversal of deferred tax liabilities, projected future taxable income and tax planning strategies in making this assessment. Based upon the level of historical taxable income and projections for future taxable income over the periods which the deferred tax assets are deductible, management believes it more likely than not that the Company will realize the benefits of the deductible differences that are not reserved by the valuation allowance, which increased by $160 thousand, to $864 thousand in 2003, from $704 thousand in 2002. The Company has generated net operating loss (NOL) carry forwards of approximately $25.9 million from its PCS operations in several states. The carry forwards expire at varying dates beginning in 2005.\n\nNet deferred tax assets and liabilities consist of the following at December 31:\n\n## Note 6. Income Taxes (C ontinued)\n\n## SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "27b19ca39b8230826779c04dc736db3f47d9403b0e259defe4b8e5f40246e8ec", + "edit_distance": 0.7232876712328767, + "f1_score": 0.9921259842519685, + "meteor": 0.8598388714252616, + "precision": 0.9947368421052631, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.9895287958115183, + "true_md": "NET SALES (in millions)\n\nNET INCOME (in millions)\n\nDILUTED EARNINGS PER SHARE (dollars)\n\nRETURN ON AVERAGE SHAREHOLDERS’ EQUITY (percent)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9359983133475641, + "doc_id": "6216643ea791b794e40786181f1a7f3ad9b1760f67fdc3a37b1fbc54cf1c6d4e", + "edit_distance": 0.43339960238568587, + "f1_score": 0.9717514124293785, + "meteor": 0.9272276719200118, + "precision": 0.9735849056603774, + "pred_md": "Nissan. While we consider this data, it is not directly integrated into our designs. If you simply react to opinion surveys, you try to please everybody, and that results in boring cars. We try to tune into the inner voice of the customer, looking into their life and values to discover what they really want. When you're sitting in Japan, for example, it's difficult to know the values of customers elsewhere in the world. Our global design centers bring us closer to that customer. Mr. Ghosn is the chairman of the design decision committee, which includes all the related executives, and they are a source of insight as well.\n\nThe Alliance with Renault has been useful in our work. We study each other, benchmark performance, and share best practices. While it is impossible to effectively benchmark against your competitors, the Alliance transparency policy allows us to identify a particular process and examine everything, and Renault can do the same. This leads to new ideas. It's stimulating working with them, but of course neither company wants to turn out the same cars. It's healthy to maintain these differences and our identities. That is what makes the relationship an alliance.\n\nI think we did a very good job during the Nissan Revival Plan (NRP) and NISSAN 180. One of our greatest\n\nZAROOT concept car\n\nZAROOT concept car\n\nAZEAL concept car\n\nAZEAL concept car\n\nsuccesses is that top management made significant investments in design immediately after implementing the NRP. If they hadn't, there would not have been any new products during NISSAN 180. Although the NRP focused on cost containment, management recognized that design was essential in building the cars that people long to own.\n\nThat investment continues today. We will soon open the Imagination Factory design center in Japan. We have also expanded the Farmingham center, renovated the San Diego studio, and built the new Nissan Design Europe in London. Nissan has world-leading design facilities and a highly talented and motivated staff. We have no trouble recruiting top designers.\n\nAlthough we've accomplished a lot, we can never afford to be complacent, especially after the way our competitors have responded to our strong statements in design. While we do have great cars, as a brand Nissan is still not at the top of the industry. You will see more exciting designs from us in the next few years, however, and by 2010 we intend to be the top brand. We are working on that even as we focus on designing profitable models. Contributing to Nissan's sustainable growth is our responsibility as designers, and we take it very seriously.'\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\n39\n\nOUR WORK", + "recall": 0.9699248120300752, + "true_md": "Nissan. While we consider this data, it is not directly integrated into our designs. If you simply react to opinion surveys, you try to please everybody, and that results in boring cars. We try to tune into the inner voice of the customer, looking into their life and values to discover what they really want. When you’re sitting in Japan, for example, it’s difficult to know the values of customers elsewhere in the world. Our global design centers bring us closer to that customer. Mr. Ghosn is the chairman of the design decision committee, which includes all the related executives, and they are a source of insight as well.\n\nThe Alliance with Renault has been useful in our work. We study each other, benchmark performance, and share best practices. While it is impossible to effectively benchmark against your competitors, the Alliance transparency policy allows us to identify a particular process and examine everything, and Renault can do the same. This leads to new ideas. It’s stimulating working with them, but of course neither company wants to turn out the same cars. It’s healthy to maintain these differences and our identities. That is what makes the relationship an alliance.\n\nI think we did a very good job during the Nissan Revival Plan (NRP) and NISSAN 180. One of our greatest\n\nAlthough we’ve accomplished a lot, we can never afford to be complacent, especially after the way our competitors have responded to our strong statements in design. While we do have great cars, as a brand Nissan is still not at the top of the industry. You will see more exciting designs from us in the next few years, however, and by 2010 we intend to be the top brand. We are working on that even as we focus on designing profitable models. Contributing to Nissan’s sustainable growth is our responsibility as designers, and we take it very seriously.” \n\nThat investment continues today. We will soon open the Imagination Factory design center in Japan. We have also expanded the Farmingham center, renovated the San Diego studio, and built the new Nissan Design Europe in London. Nissan has world-leading design facilities and a highly talented and motivated staff. We have no trouble recruiting top designers. \n\nsuccesses is that top management made significant investments in design immediately after implementing the NRP. If they hadn’t, there would not have been any new products during NISSAN 180. Although the NRP focused on cost containment, management recognized that design was essential in building the cars that people long to own.\n\nAZEAL concept car\n\nZAROOT concept car\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 39\n\nOUR WORK" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9364820284342609, + "doc_id": "3f00f5628bcaf429416468832ec7f3cc167a8206ce6b676d0853b319d4c0ee32", + "edit_distance": 0.07079646017699115, + "f1_score": 0.993006993006993, + "meteor": 0.9839191549226051, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "FINANCIAL SECTION\n\n80\n\nThe following table set forth the acquisition costs and related accumulated amortization of assets recorded under finance leases included in the balances above:\n\nDepreciation of property, plant and equipment for each of the three years in the period ended March 31, 2005 was as follows:\n\n## 7. NOTES AND ACCOUNTS PAYABLE\n\nNotes and accounts payable at March 31, 2005 and 2004 consisted of the following:\n\n## 8. SHORT-TERM BORROWINGS AND LONG-TERM DEBT\n\nAt March 31, 2005 and 2004, short-term borrowings and the current portion of long-term debt consisted of the following:\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004", + "recall": 0.9861111111111112, + "true_md": "The following table set forth the acquisition costs and related accumulated amortization of assets recorded under finance leases included in the balances above: Thousands of\n\nDepreciation of property, plant and equipment for each of the three years in the period ended March 31, 2005 was as follows:\n\n## 7. NOTES AND ACCOUNTS PAYABLE\n\nNotes and accounts payable at March 31, 2005 and 2004 consisted of the following:\n\n## 8. SHORT-TERM BORROWINGS AND LONG-TERM DEBT\n\nAt March 31, 2005 and 2004, short-term borrowings and the current portion of long-term debt consisted of the following:\n\nFINANCIAL SECTION\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 80" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9202111482769161, + "doc_id": "dd85e2532688bbb77bc904a43d0704269454d31692408534e4dab8f94851f27b", + "edit_distance": 0.13973063973063973, + "f1_score": 0.9506398537477148, + "meteor": 0.9541455501036571, + "precision": 0.9420289855072463, + "pred_md": "T O O U R S T O C K H O L D E R S\n\nOver the years, we have learned that there are certain clear prerequisites to growth. Our path to growth is grounded on these basic fundamentals: Managing our assets wisely. Making products that meet specific market needs. And maintaining our keen focus on productivity and profitability. It is our steady and consistent focus on the fundamentals that has enabled us to build strength and create an environment for growth, through favorable or unfavorable conditions in the market and the economy.\n\n## We manage our assets and resources carefully.\n\nOur financial strategy centers on building the strength and stability that will position our company for ongoing growth. We approach the management of our resources with discipline and diligence, striking the balance that allows us to accomplish our objectives: Funding the current needs of the business, maintaining a strong financial foundation, and investing in the resources, technology and assets that will ensure operating efficiency and fuel future growth. The soundness of this strategy was reflected once again in our financial results for 2003.\n\nFor the fifth consecutive year, Atrion's earnings per diluted share from continuing operations increased by more than 15 percent, rising from $2.18 in 2002 to $2.66 in 2003, a 22 percent improvement. In light of the economic pressures which have challenged virtually every business in recent years, we view five consecutive years of EPS growth-ranging from 16 percent to over 50 percent-as a sign of solid financial strength and a testament to the viability of our strategy. Including a gain from discontinued operations of $ .09 per share, net income totaled $2.75 per diluted share for 2003.\n\nRevenues for 2003 increased five percent to $62.8 million, from $59.5 million in the prior year. Return on equity (a) , which provides a good indication of how well we are utilizing investors' dollars, has steadily increased in recent years, from five percent in 1999 to 12 percent in 2003. This compares favorably to the average return on equity for our industry, reported at 10.7 percent by statistical research sources.\n\nThe company's ability to generate strong cash flow continued to flourish in 2003. This is a key strength for our company, as it enables us to pursue a number of value-creating initiatives.\n\n- · We initiated the payment of quarterly dividends on the company's common stock in September 2003. Recent changes in tax laws make this an efficient avenue for providing a return to our shareholders and, with continuing growth in earnings and cash flow, we plan to increase the dividend periodically.\n- · We repurchased 193,814 shares of our common stock in 2003. Over the last five years, we have repurchased nearly two million shares of our stock, a strategy we regard as a wise investment for our company and our stockholders.\n- · We reduced debt by $6 million, from $10.3 million at the end of 2002 to $4.3 million at year-end 2003.\n\n2\n\n## EBITDA Per Diluted Share From Continuing Operations (a)\n\n(a) This is a non-GAAP financial measure which is defined and reconciled to GAAP on page 7 of this report.", + "recall": 0.959409594095941, + "true_md": "Over the years, we have learned that there are certain clear prerequisites to growth. Our path to growth is grounded on these basic fundamentals: Managing our assets wisely. Making products that meet specific market needs. And maintaining our keen focus on productivity and profitability. It is our steady and consistent focus on the fundamentals that has enabled us to build strength and create an environment for growth, through favorable or unfavorable conditions in the market and the economy.\n\nOur financial strategy centers on building the strength and stability that will position our company for ongoing growth. We approach the management of our resources with discipline and diligence, striking the balance that allows us to accomplish our objectives: Funding the current needs of the business, maintaining a strong financial foundation, and investing in the resources, technology and assets that will ensure operating efficiency and fuel future growth. The soundness of this strategy was reflected once again in our financial results for 2003.\n\nFor the fifth consecutive year, Atrion’s earnings per diluted share from continuing operations increased by more than 15 percent, rising from $2.18 in 2002 to $2.66 in 2003, a 22 percent improvement. In light of the economic pressures which have challenged virtually every business in recent years, we view five consecutive years of EPS growth—ranging from 16 percent to over 50 percent—as a sign of solid financial strength and a testament to the viability of our strategy. Including a gain from discontinued operations of $ .09 per share, net income totaled $2.75 per diluted share for 2003.\n\nRevenues for 2003 increased five percent to $62.8 million, from $59.5 million in the prior year. Return on equity$^{(a)}$, which provides a good indication of how well we are utilizing investors’ dollars, has steadily increased in recent years, from five percent in 1999 to 12 percent in 2003. This compares favorably to the average return on equity for our industry, reported at 10.7 percent by statistical research sources. \n\nThe company’s ability to generate strong cash flow continued to flourish in 2003. This is a key strength for our company, as it enables us to pursue a number of value-creating initiatives.\n\n- • We initiated the payment of quarterly dividends on the company’s common stock in September 2003. Recent changes in tax laws make this an efficient avenue for providing a return to our shareholders and, with continuing growth in earnings and cash flow, we plan to increase the dividend periodically.\n\n- • We repurchased 193,814 shares of our common stock in 2003. Over the last five years, we have repurchased nearly two million shares of our stock, a strategy we regard as a wise investment for our company and our stockholders. \n\n- • We reduced debt by $6 million, from $10.3 million at the end of 2002 to $4.3 million at year-end 2003.\n\n(a) This is a non-GAAP financial measure which is defined and reconciled to GAAP on page 7 of this report.\n\n2\n\n## We manage our assets and resources carefully.\n\n## EBITDA Per Diluted Share From Continuing Operations (a)\n\nTO OUR STOCKHOLDERS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.2537122265502532, + "doc_id": "a095ed8760746373473bc7b3815d5dc3305c22133aecbd8df3eb6cb12986d700", + "edit_distance": 0.8076923076923077, + "f1_score": 0.5806451612903225, + "meteor": 0.383305785123967, + "precision": 0.9, + "pred_md": "## Gippsland Basin\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\n## Cooper/Eromanga Basins\n\nAmadeus Basin\n\nAmadeus Basin\n\n9", + "recall": 0.42857142857142855, + "true_md": "Carnarvon Basin\n\nNorthern Australia\n\nWest Papua & Papua New Guinea\n\nKutei Basin\n\nGippsland Basin\n\nSurat/Bowen Basins\n\nCooper/Eromanga Basins\n\nAmadeus Basin\n\nAnnual Report 2004 9" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9600501910099057, + "doc_id": "da14d894ff9aebe45f5d4ade1e55d0ecea3fa12ad5ded7c91307254eb7ef4735", + "edit_distance": 0.1109350237717908, + "f1_score": 0.9756097560975611, + "meteor": 0.9708995941324894, + "precision": 0.974025974025974, + "pred_md": "we set after benchmarking others with A+ ratings. This is also the reason we changed our ROIC formula. Previously, cash on hand was one of the denominators in our formula, which meant that higher cash on hand led to lower ROIC. We do not want to penalize liquidity improvements. Obviously, cash is a funding source that enables us to\n\ninvest in opportunities such as R&D in a flexible way.\n\nLiquidity can also have a significant impact on our sales financing business, which requires large amounts of cash to operate. There has been a high degree of intercompany loans to the sales finance companies, but that strategy will change after our rating improves. With a higher rating we can develop diversified sources of funding. We will strive to achieve a healthy balance between the diversification of funds and cost efficiencies by utilizing sound financial management.\n\nIn terms of the commitment under NISSAN Value-Up, we must maintain a 20 percent ROIC on average over the course of the plan. I believe that Treasury can continue to play a key role in managing working capital. What we did especially well under NISSAN 180 was to improve our supply chain management. With the information from the new supply chain management system, we succeeded in converting our working capital into cash much faster than before.\n\nHowever, our inventory increased in fiscal 2004. There are two reasons for this. First, we increased our inventory to prepare for the spring season. As evidenced by the strong sales volume so far in fiscal 2005, it appears that our decision was correct. The second reason was the consolidation of new companies, whose operations are not yet as efficient as Nissan's. I believe, though, that we can apply our methodology to these newly consolidated companies. We will focus on reducing working capital on a consolidated basis.\n\nWe will not change our commitment to the NISSAN Value-Up dividend plan. Our dividend policy is transparent because we have already announced our dividends for the next three years. I believe that this benefits our\n\nshareholders in forecasting the return for Nissan's shares. We want to encourage more long-term investors, and dividends are the way to do that. Concurrently, we have also been repurchasing stock from the market, primarily for stock option purposes. We will continue this to some extent, because we may have M&A and other opportunities.\n\nWith global expansion, we must extend financing to new areas. This means that we have to move to a second phase in the development of our Global Treasury Center. For example, the use of leading competitive countries will create a more complex cash flow due to foreign exchange exposure. We've opened an office in Singapore as a first step.\n\nIn our drive to become a world-class Treasury function, we evaluate our performance in comparison to worldwide best practices. This provides an objective assessment of our operation. Investors also provide us with objective evaluations. To receive feedback from the latter, we must be transparent, and also pay attention to the signals from the capital market. I believe that is the most effective way to enhance shareholders' value.'\n\n## Working Capital Management\n\n- Consolidated automotive working capital/consolidated automotive turnover\n- * Same scope pf consolidation as P&L, excluding change of cash compared to fiscal year 2003\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\n55\n\nOUR WORK", + "recall": 0.9771986970684039, + "true_md": "we set after benchmarking others with A+ ratings. This is also the reason we changed our ROIC formula. Previously, cash on hand was one of the denominators in our formula, which meant that higher cash on hand led to lower ROIC. We do not want to penalize liquidity improvements. Obviously, cash is a funding source that enables us to invest in opportunities such as R&D in a flexible way.\n\nLiquidity can also have a significant impact on our sales financing business, which requires large amounts of cash to operate. There has been a high degree of inter- company loans to the sales finance companies, but that strategy will change after our rating improves. With a higher rating we can develop diversified sources of funding. We will strive to achieve a healthy balance between the diversification of funds and cost efficiencies by utilizing sound financial management.\n\nIn terms of the commitment under NISSAN Value-Up, we must maintain a 20 percent ROIC on average over the course of the plan. I believe that Treasury can continue to play a key role in managing working capital. What we did especially well under NISSAN 180 was to improve our supply chain management. With the information from the new supply chain management system, we succeeded in converting our working capital into cash much faster than before. \n\nHowever, our inventory increased in fiscal 2004. There are two reasons for this. First, we increased our inventory to prepare for the spring season. As evidenced by the strong sales volume so far in fiscal 2005, it appears that our decision was correct. The second reason was the consolidation of new companies, whose operations are not yet as efficient as Nissan’s. I believe, though, that we can apply our methodology to these newly consolidated companies. We will focus on reducing working capital on a consolidated basis.\n\nWe will not change our commitment to the NISSAN Value-Up dividend plan. Our dividend policy is transparent because we have already announced our dividends for the next three years. I believe that this benefits our\n\nConsolidated automotive working capital/consolidated automotive turnover\n\n* Same scope pf consolidation as P&L, excluding change of cash compared to fiscal year 2003\n\nshareholders in forecasting the return for Nissan’s shares. We want to encourage more long-term investors, and dividends are the way to do that. Concurrently, we have also been repurchasing stock from the market, primarily for stock option purposes. We will continue this to some extent, because we may have M&A and other opportunities.\n\nWith global expansion, we must extend financing to new areas. This means that we have to move to a second phase in the development of our Global Treasury Center. For example, the use of leading competitive countries will create a more complex cash flow due to foreign exchange exposure. We’ve opened an office in Singapore as a first step.\n\nIn our drive to become a world-class Treasury function, we evaluate our performance in comparison to worldwide best practices. This provides an objective assessment of our operation. Investors also provide us with objective evaluations. To receive feedback from the latter, we must be transparent, and also pay attention to the signals from the capital market. I believe that is the most effective way to enhance shareholders’ value.”\n\n## Working Capital Management\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 55" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.93673075395117, + "doc_id": "fa6c8025ac30c5ce6fa6eb2924cea1dc4767db133205d4cb13a550cf44893041", + "edit_distance": 0.35509138381201044, + "f1_score": 0.9646017699115044, + "meteor": 0.8878297859719, + "precision": 0.9674556213017751, + "pred_md": "OUR WORK\n\n34\n\nPLANNING\n\n## Building on Strengths and Being Innovative\n\n'The Planning Group covers a great deal of corporate territory and handles a number of key responsibilities within Nissan. Our Corporate Planning division, for example, oversees strategy, setting the Company's long-term course under the Executive Committee's direction. The two creative divisions, Design and Product Planning, create value for the customer. Together, those three divisions form the core of our group, surrounded by several other key divisions. Market Intelligence supports Design and Product Planning in customer understanding. The people in Process and Resource Management provide the practical direction and restraint a company of our size must have when deploying its resources. And Program Management drives the implementation process, turning the work of all the other divisions into reality.\n\nThe role of Corporate Planning is to look to the future and devise ways to take advantage of the business opportunities we identify. In the past, the division relied primarily on three-year plans such the Nissan Revival Plan and NISSAN 180. That strategy served the interests of Nissan stakeholders well. The Company is now sound, and the power and constancy of vision Corporate Planning provides will determine how well Nissan maintains its strength. However, in addition to the mid-term plan, we have now entered a phase that requires us to extend that vision and implement a longer-term plan. Corporate Planning is working closely with the Executive Committee on this matter.\n\nDesign and Product Planning are central to the creation of Nissan's strength. Both focus on satisfying the consumer's unmet needs, and create value in the process. Our product planning DNA is to identify and target our customers, and do it better than our competitors. Rather than simply throwing a product into the market and waiting for a response, we first seek a deep understanding of the expected response. Only then can we create a product consistent with that understanding.\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\nCARLOS TAVARES Executive Vice President\n\nCARLOS TAVARES Executive Vice President\n\nOne key for both creative divisions is to focus on 'customer clusters.' We refuse to spend our money to develop products that should please everyone. In fact, we may invest in a certain innovation because we understand that a particular subset of customers will appreciate the performance it provides. Our process is very focused, and may even target a smaller customer cluster that no one else is addressing. The marketing process for these two divisions is deep and accurate. This creates value through differentiation.\n\nThe NISSAN Value-Up plan is about focusing on strong products that reinforce our brand, pursuing new concepts and innovation, and expanding geographically in a stronger and faster way. During the Nissan Revival Plan and NISSAN 180, we introduced some influential and innovative modelsthe Murano, the Z, the FX and the X-TRAIL, to name a few. It would be a mistake not to capitalize on those successes and reinforce the brand. At the same time, we cannot rely solely on our current concepts. Launching a new product naturally requires significant expenditures, because awareness and understanding must be created for the new product. We must differentiate to succeed, devise new products and concepts, and venture into areas that others have not. During the NISSAN Value-Up period, we will offer products that build on past successes-without being conservative-as well as products that are new and innovative. Our brand pyramid shows us the way to be both 'bold and thoughtful.'\n\nOur Market Intelligence division, which supports the Design and Product Planning teams as well as other divisions throughout the Company, is relatively new. The division's experts not only supply research data, they also help shape surveys to answer precise questions and identify the traps that are often hidden within surveys. One challenge for the Market Intelligence people is to clearly communicate their conclusions to the Company's decisionmakers. If only their peers are able to understand the data they produce, their efforts and the data itself serve no purpose. In addition, this division is challenged to standardize and extend best practices globally, while maintaining a regional focus when appropriate.", + "recall": 0.961764705882353, + "true_md": "CARLOS TAVARES Executive Vice President\n\n## Building on Strengths and Being Innovative\n\n“The Planning Group covers a great deal of corporate territory and handles a number of key responsibilities within Nissan. Our Corporate Planning division, for example, oversees strategy, setting the Company’s long-term course under the Executive Committee’s direction. The two creative divisions, Design and Product Planning, create value for the customer.\n\nTogether, those three divisions form the core of our group, surrounded by several other key divisions. Market Intelligence supports Design and Product Planning in customer understanding. The people in Process and Resource Management provide the practical direction and restraint a company of our size must have when deploying its resources. And Program Management drives the implementation process, turning the work of all the other divisions into reality. \n\nThe role of Corporate Planning is to look to the future and devise ways to take advantage of the business opportunities we identify. In the past, the division relied primarily on three-year plans such the Nissan Revival Plan and NISSAN 180. That strategy served the interests of Nissan stakeholders well. \n\nThe Company is now sound, and the power and constancy of vision Corporate Planning provides will determine how well Nissan maintains its strength. However, in addition to the mid-term plan, we have now entered a phase that requires us to extend that vision and implement a longer-term plan. Corporate Planning is working closely with the Executive Committee on this matter.\n\nDesign and Product Planning are central to the creation of Nissan’s strength. Both focus on satisfying the consumer’s unmet needs, and create value in the process. Our product planning DNA is to identify and target our customers, and do it better than our competitors. Rather than simply throwing a product into the market and waiting for a response, we first seek a deep understanding of the expected response. Only then can we create a product consistent with that understanding. \n\nOur Market Intelligence division, which supports the Design and Product Planning teams as well as other divisions throughout the Company, is relatively new. The division’s experts not only supply research data, they also help shape surveys to answer precise questions and identify the traps that are often hidden within surveys. One challenge for the Market Intelligence people is to clearly communicate their conclusions to the Company’s decision- makers. If only their peers are able to understand the data they produce, their efforts and the data itself serve no purpose. In addition, this division is challenged to standardize and extend best practices globally, while maintaining a regional focus when appropriate.\n\nOne key for both creative divisions is to focus on “customer clusters.” We refuse to spend our money to develop products that should please everyone. In fact, we may invest in a certain innovation because we understand that a particular subset of customers will appreciate the performance it provides. Our process is very focused, and may even target a smaller customer cluster that no one else is addressing. The marketing process for these two divisions is deep and accurate. This creates value through differentiation.\n\nThe NISSAN Value-Up plan is about focusing on strong products that reinforce our brand, pursuing new concepts and innovation, and expanding geographically in a stronger and faster way. During the Nissan Revival Plan and NISSAN 180, we introduced some influential and innovative models— the Murano, the Z, the FX and the X-TRAIL, to name a few.\n\nIt would be a mistake not to capitalize on those successes and reinforce the brand. At the same time, we cannot rely solely on our current concepts. Launching a new product naturally requires significant expenditures, because awareness and understanding must be created for the new product. We must differentiate to succeed, devise new products and concepts, and venture into areas that others have not. During the NISSAN Value-Up period, we will offer products that build on past successes—without being conservative—as well as products that are new and innovative. Our brand pyramid shows us the way to be both ‘bold and thoughtful.’\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 34\n\nOUR WORK\n\n## PLANNING" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9726551488610083, + "doc_id": "c3ee9da1705883a0c7a36b327c5f965b607ee62109c08b47f8a8ad0bcd3995aa", + "edit_distance": 0.032388663967611336, + "f1_score": 0.9825174825174825, + "meteor": 0.984410674209859, + "precision": 0.9894366197183099, + "pred_md": "The current and long-term obligations under capital leases are included in the 'Other accrued liabilities' and 'Other long-term obligations' captions, respectively, in the accompanying consolidated balance sheets. Rental expense for operating leases was $19 million, $19 million and $20 million for the years ended December 31, 2004, 2003 and 2002, respectively.\n\nDetroit Development Agreement. Under the August 2002 revised development agreement with the City of Detroit, MGM Grand Detroit, LLC and the Company are subject to certain obligations. The City of Detroit required payments of $44 million, all of which had been made as of December 31, 2004; the transfer of assets of $3 million; indemnification of up to $20 million related to the Lac Vieux and certain other litigation, of which $2 million has been paid as of December 31, 2004; and continued letter of credit support for $50 million of bonds issued by the Economic Development Corporation of the City of Detroit for land purchases along the Detroit River. The letter of credit will be drawn on to make interest and principal payments on the bonds, which mature in 2009. The remaining obligations have been classified as other accrued liabilities or other long-term obligations, depending on the expected payment date.\n\nThe Company recorded an intangible asset (development rights, deemed to have an indefinite life) of approximately $115 million in connection with its obligations under the revised development agreement. In addition to the above obligations, the Company will pay the City of Detroit 1% of gaming revenues (2% if annual revenues exceed $400 million) beginning January 1, 2006.\n\nThe Company is currently in the process of obtaining land and developing plans for the permanent casino facility. The design, budget and schedule of the permanent facility are not finalized, and the ultimate timing, cost and scope of the project are subject to risks attendant to large-scale projects. The ability to construct the perma-\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nnent casino facility is currently subject to resolution of the Lac Vieux litigation. The 6th Circuit Court of Appeals has issued an injunction prohibiting the City and the developers from commencing construction pending further action of the 6th Circuit Court. Therefore, it is unknown when construction of the permanent facility will commence or when the permanent facility will open.\n\nUnited Kingdom. In October 2003, the Company entered into an agreement with the Earls Court and Olympia Group, which operates large exhibition and trade show facilities in London, to form a jointly owned company which would develop an entertainment and gaming facility, which the Company would operate in space leased from Earls Court and Olympia, to complement the existing Olympia facilities. The Company made a deposit of £2 million ($4 million based on exchange rates at December 31, 2004), which is refundable if proposed gaming law reforms are not implemented by December 2005. Otherwise, the deposit will be applied to the first year's rent on a lease between the new company and Earls Court and Olympia. The Company would make a nominal equity investment and would provide a loan for half of the estimated development costs. The agreement is subject to the implementation of proposed gaming law reforms and a tax structure acceptable to the Company, and obtaining required planning and other approvals. The Company owns 82.5% of the entity.\n\nIn November 2003, the Company entered into an agreement with Newcastle United PLC to create a 50-50 joint venture which would build a major new mixed-use development, including casino development, on a site adjacent to Newcastle's football stadium. Newcastle United PLC contributed the land to the joint venture, and the Company made an equity investment of £5 million ($10 million based on exchange rates at December 31, 2004), which is refundable if certain conditions have not been met by January 2008. The Company would develop and operate the complex, as well as own the casino development in leased\n\n61", + "recall": 0.9756944444444444, + "true_md": "Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n61\n\nThe current and long-term obligations under capital leases are included in the “Other accrued liabilities” and “Other long-term obligations” captions, respectively, in the accompanying consolidated balance sheets. Rental expense for operating leases was $19 million, $19 million and $20 million for the years ended December 31, 2004, 2003 and 2002, respectively.\n\nDetroit Development Agreement. Under the August 2002 revised development agreement with the City of Detroit, MGM Grand Detroit, LLC and the Company are subject to certain obligations. The City of Detroit required payments of $44 million, all of which had been made as of December 31, 2004; the transfer of assets of $3 million; indemnification of up to $20 million related to the Lac Vieux and certain other litigation, of which $2 million has been paid as of December 31, 2004; and continued letter of credit support for $50 million of bonds issued by the Economic Development Corporation of the City of Detroit for land purchases along the Detroit River. The letter of credit will be drawn on to make interest and principal payments on the bonds, which mature in 2009. The remaining obligations have been classified as other accrued liabilities or other long-term obligations, depending on the expected payment date.\n\nThe Company recorded an intangible asset (development rights, deemed to have an indefinite life) of approximately $115 million in connection with its obligations under the revised development agreement. In addition to the above obligations, the Company will pay the City of Detroit 1% of gaming revenues (2% if annual revenues exceed $400 million) beginning January 1, 2006.\n\nThe Company is currently in the process of obtaining land and developing plans for the permanent casino facility. The design, budget and schedule of the permanent facility are not finalized, and the ultimate timing, cost and scope of the project are subject to risks attendant to large-scale projects. The ability to construct the perma-\n\nnent casino facility is currently subject to resolution of the Lac Vieux litigation. The 6th Circuit Court of Appeals has issued an injunction prohibiting the City and the developers from commencing construction pending further action of the 6th Circuit Court. Therefore, it is unknown when construction of the permanent facility will commence or when the permanent facility will open.\n\nUnited Kingdom. In October 2003, the Company entered into an agreement with the Earls Court and Olympia Group, which operates large exhibition and trade show facilities in London, to form a jointly owned company which would develop an entertainment and gaming facility, which the Company would operate in space leased from Earls Court and Olympia, to complement the existing Olympia facili- ties. The Company made a deposit of £2 million ($4 million based on exchange rates at December 31, 2004), which is refundable if proposed gaming law reforms are not implemented by December 2005. Otherwise, the deposit will be applied to the first year’s rent on a lease between the new company and Earls Court and Olympia. The Company would make a nominal equity investment and would provide a loan for half of the estimated development costs. The agreement is subject to the implementation of proposed gaming law reforms and a tax structure acceptable to the Company, and obtaining required planning and other approvals. The Company owns 82.5% of the entity.\n\nIn November 2003, the Company entered into an agreement with Newcastle United PLC to create a 50-50 joint venture which would build a major new mixed-use development, including casino development, on a site adjacent to Newcastle’s football stadium. Newcastle United PLC contributed the land to the joint venture, and the Company made an equity investment of £5 million ($10 million based on exchange rates at December 31, 2004), which is refundable if certain conditions have not been met by January 2008. The Company would develop and operate the complex, as well as own the casino development in leased" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9159238884338711, + "doc_id": "10557ff0e689e596268a5839d25fb76109b5d0f6cca16ad9f6247e776fcb2b39", + "edit_distance": 0.5198487712665406, + "f1_score": 0.9442379182156134, + "meteor": 0.84540964197345, + "precision": 0.9621212121212122, + "pred_md": "'Our turkey business segment will be increasingly valuable as we create the convenient products that encourage consumers to eat our products on an everyday basis.'\n\nof unique meat and ethnic sauce entrees, which grew 157 percent in fiscal 2004. Other key Foodservice brands that continue to gain momentum are Austin Blues BBQ and Bread Ready presliced items. These items are successful because they are easily prepared by the foodservice operator and deliver quality and flavor that can't be beat. These value-added products also provide improved margins to Hormel Foods. Our Foodservice business grew 22 percent during the year.\n\nOur ethnic products continue to do very well. There are two key drivers behind this growth. First, the population is becoming more diverse, particularly with the growth of the Hispanic population. Second, people are looking for excitement in their menu and ethnic products add the variety they seek. Carapelli olive oil and Herdez authentic Mexican products contributed particularly good growth in fiscal 2004.\n\ndeliver turkey's hidden value Our turkey business segment will be increasingly valuable as we create the convenient products that encourage consumers to eat our products on an everyday basis. To accomplish this goal, Jennie-O Turkey Store has done an outstanding job over the past several years creating value-added products across multiple product categories. In fact, 30 percent of Jennie-O Turkey Store's 2004 sales came from products introduced within the past five years. We ended fiscal 2004 with very strong financial results in this segment.\n\nCarapelli olive oil reported outstanding results in fiscal 2004. Sales were up 29 percent.\n\n4\n\nHormel Foods Corporation\n\nI believe the best is yet to come as we continue to develop value-added products at Jennie-O Turkey Store.\n\nprovide effective customer outreach Recognizing that our retail customers are rapidly changing, we restructured our sales team in fiscal 2004 through a consolidation of sales divisions called 'Project DELTA.' Now we serve each major retail customer through a dedicated sales team that encompasses both Grocery Products and Refrigerated Foods products. This system should make us more efficient, further strengthen our customer service, and expand relationships with key customers.\n\ndo more globally Although Hormel Foods has enjoyed success in key non-U.S. markets, we intend to do more to build a truly global operation. We believe Asia offers great opportunity. Building on our successful operations in China and the Philippines, we continue to search for ways to expand our presence in this part of the world. We are also expanding our Grocery Products portfolio in Europe and North America.\n\n## grow and protect value through careful stewardship\n\nShareholders have averaged an annualized total return of seven percent by investing in Hormel Foods common stock over the past five years, compared with a two percent annualized loss in the S&P 500. Shareholders also have enjoyed increased dividend payouts for 38 consecutive years.", + "recall": 0.927007299270073, + "true_md": "Carapelli olive oil reported outstanding results in fiscal 2004. Sales were up 29 percent.\n\n4 Hormel Foods Corporation\n\nof unique meat and ethnic sauce entrees, which grew 157 per- cent in fiscal 2004. Other key Foodservice brands that continue to gain momentum are Austin Blues BBQ and Bread Ready pre- sliced items. These items are successful because they are easily prepared by the foodservice operator and deliver quality and flavor that can’t be beat. These value-added products also provide improved margins to Hormel Foods. Our Foodservice business grew 22 percent during the year.\n\nOur ethnic products continue to do very well. There are two key drivers behind this growth. First, the population is becoming more diverse, particularly with the growth of the Hispanic popu- lation. Second, people are looking for excitement in their menu and ethnic products add the variety they seek. Carapelli olive oil and Herdez authentic Mexican products contributed particularly good growth in fiscal 2004.\n\ndeliver turkey’s hidden value Our turkey business segment will be increasingly valuable as we create the convenient prod- ucts that encourage consumers to eat our products on an everyday basis. To accomplish this goal, Jennie-O Turkey Store has done an outstanding job over the past several years creat- ing value-added products across multiple product categories. In fact, 30 percent of Jennie-O Turkey Store’s 2004 sales came from products introduced within the past five years. We ended fiscal 2004 with very strong financial results in this segment. \n\ngrow and protect value through careful stewardship Shareholders have averaged an annualized total return of seven percent by investing in Hormel Foods common stock over the past five years, compared with a two percent annualized loss in the S&P 500. Shareholders also have enjoyed increased dividend payouts for 38 consecutive years. \n\ndo more globally Although Hormel Foods has enjoyed suc- cess in key non-U.S. markets, we intend to do more to build a truly global operation. We believe Asia offers great opportunity. Building on our successful operations in China and the Philippines, we continue to search for ways to expand our presence in this part of the world. We are also expanding our Grocery Products portfolio in Europe and North America.\n\nprovide effective customer outreach Recognizing that our retail customers are rapidly changing, we restructured our sales team in fiscal 2004 through a consolidation of sales divisions called “Project DELTA.” Now we serve each major retail customer through a dedicated sales team that encompasses both Grocery Products and Refrigerated Foods products. This system should make us more efficient, further strengthen our customer service, and expand relationships with key customers.\n\nI believe the best is yet to come as we continue to develop value-added products at Jennie-O Turkey Store. \n\n## “Our turkey business segment will be increasingly valuable as we create the convenient products that encourage consumers to eat our products on an everyday basis.”" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8623367196371715, + "doc_id": "bd4ca42bd1c4ebc50cd410b6b52c82118481c89114284612644d47b946874a15", + "edit_distance": 0.08806818181818182, + "f1_score": 0.9362880886426592, + "meteor": 0.9153300443828339, + "precision": 0.9602272727272727, + "pred_md": "## products & services\n\nH ow do you secure the future when the present is puzzling enough? It's a big challenge, and The Hartford's primary objective. Everything we do is designed to help our customers deal with the uncertainties that lie ahead.\n\nThe Hartford believes the best way to secure the future is to provide customers with the right products, and then back those products with outstanding performance and great service. Staying focused on this objective was never more important-or more challenging-than in 2001.\n\nTrue to form, The Hartford's life operations' annuities and mutual funds delivered high-quality performance in a time of market turmoil. Despite an anemic stock market, 87 percent of the funds in The Hartford's Director variable annuity remained in the first or second quartile of three-year returns within the Lipper Peer Group in 2001. Sixty-four percent of the funds in the Leaders suite of annuities and 91 percent of The Hartford's mutual funds remained in the first or second quartile over the three-year period.\n\nThe ability to deliver that kind of performance can be traced to our money managers-Wellington Management Co., American Funds, Franklin Templeton Investments, MFS Investment Management, AIM Funds Management, Inc., Putnam Investment Management and The Hartford's own Hartford Investment Management Co.\n\nAll of The Hartford's money managers have years of experience and are among the most respected firms in the industry. Their experience and expertise were especially important during the market volatility we saw in 2001. They always stay focused on long-term performance, which is the true measuring stick of The Hartford's value to its customers.\n\nBesides outstanding products and excellent management, great service is a critical component in delivering the right solutions to our customers. In 2001, The Hartford won an unprecedented sixth consecutive DALBAR Annuity Service Award, as well as the\n\n17", + "recall": 0.9135135135135135, + "true_md": "## products & services\n\nH ow do you secure the future when the present is puzzling enough? It’s a big challenge, and The Hartford’s primary objective. Everything we do is designed to help our customers deal with the uncertainties that lie ahead.\n\nThe Hartford believes the best way to secure the future is to provide customers with the right products, and then back those products with outstanding per- formance and great service. Staying focused on this objective was never more important—or more chal- lenging—than in 2001.\n\nTrue to form, The Hartford’s life operations’ annu- ities and mutual funds delivered high-quality perform- ance in a time of market turmoil. Despite an anemic stock market, 87 percent of the funds in The Hartford’s Director variable annuity remained in the first or second quartile of three-year returns within the Lipper Peer Group in 2001. Sixty-four percent of the funds in the Leaders suite of annuities and 91 percent of The Hartford’s mutual funds remained in the first or second quartile over the three-year period.\n\nThe ability to deliver that kind of performance can be traced to our money managers—Wellington Management Co., American Funds, Franklin Templeton Investments, MFS Investment Management, AIM Funds Management, Inc., Putnam Investment Management and The Hartford’s own Hartford Investment Management Co. \n\nAll of The Hartford’s money managers have years of experience and are among the most respected firms in the industry. Their experience and expertise were especially important during the market volatility we saw in 2001. They always stay focused on long-term performance, which is the true measuring stick of The Hartford’s value to its customers.\n\nBesides outstanding products and excellent man- agement, great service is a critical component in deliv- ering the right solutions to our customers. In 2001, The Hartford won an unprecedented sixth consecutive DALBAR Annuity Service Award, as well as the \n\n17" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "2b5e77852b2f692d98496814b8afef4859f6aeb77c507f583095307f90a007cc", + "edit_distance": 0.08806818181818182, + "f1_score": 0.9362880886426592, + "meteor": 0.9153300443828339, + "precision": 0.9602272727272727, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.9135135135135135, + "true_md": "" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9717976388566488, + "doc_id": "7147f0baa2d294b4672629da4d2ebb7126bea72d3aa5bce873536429f9cf411c", + "edit_distance": 0.048286604361370715, + "f1_score": 0.9918433931484503, + "meteor": 0.9918409591181078, + "precision": 0.9934640522875817, + "pred_md": "WHO WE ARE\n\n28\n\n## SALES FINANCE\n\n## Providing Profit and Supporting Sales\n\nNAOTOMO UCHIMURA President Nissan Financial Services\n\nNAOTOMO UCHIMURA President Nissan Financial Services\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\n'Sales finance is a core business in the auto world. Automotive financing supports car sales and provides additional income, which translates into increased profit for the Group. All Nissan finance companies operate under strict risk management control policies and must balance the drive for profit with active sales support.\n\nIn Japan, about fifty percent of customers use cash when buying a car. Corporate sales account for another 20 percent of the total, while the remaining 30 percent of customers use automotive financing. Therefore, we focus on capturing that 30 percent market, in addition to penetrating the cash customer segment. Nissan Financial Services, or NFS, has the highest level of market penetration in Japan, and our centralized customer center gives us a clear advantage over other finance companies.\n\nA sales finance company is exposed to various forms of risk. One risk is interest rate fluctuation. NFS mitigates this risk by matching interest as much as possible. Almost seventy percent of our portfolio is on a match-funding basis. Another risk is credit risk. Fortunately, our portfolio is improving. The economy is getting better, and we've had success with a low-interest, 2.9 percent APR program. Because this is a competitive rate, it has attracted customers with good credit ratings who otherwise would have opted for bank financing.\n\nWe have also improved our scoring system for credit analysis. We have a new system that can automatically process 60 percent of all credit applications. Turnaround time for the credit decision used to take three to four hours, but with continuous improvement of our system it takes just 14 minutes. If the dealer submits the data online, turnaround is reduced to four minutes. This has really increased customer satisfaction. In addition, having a centralized system ensures that our credit standards are consistently applied.\n\nThe above improvements have reduced our loss ratio to below 0.3 percent. More importantly, 95 percent of applicants are approved for financing. The challenge is to reduce the loss ratio and rejection rate at the same time. We want to support sales by providing financing, and keep the loss ratio low.\n\nIn the past, NFS depended on the parent company for funding. Since Nissan and NFS had their financial ratings upgraded, we issued our first public bond in September 2003. We have also issued commercial paper and diversified our funding sources. As a result, our reliance on the parent company for funding has been reduced to almost zero.\n\nSales finance became actively involved in sales support during NISSAN 180. We have always been a source of profit, but now we are aiming to enhance the value chain as well. We have the largest number of business lines of any finance company, including credit loans, corporate and private leasing, car rentals, credit cards, insurance, maintenance and much more. Because we have more touch points with the customer, we have a great opportunity to easily cross-sell our products. Nissan is allocating more resources to light commercial vehicles, which is a perfect platform for us as well. And two years ago we created a fleet division with Nissan that provides both vehicles and a full range of services including total outsourcing of fleet management.\n\nThe Alliance with Renault has played a central role in our development over the past few years.", + "recall": 0.990228013029316, + "true_md": "## Providing Profit and Supporting Sales\n\nNAOTOMO UCHIMURA President Nissan Financial Services\n\n“Sales finance is a core business in the auto world. Automotive financing supports car sales and provides additional income, which translates into increased profit for the Group. All Nissan finance companies operate under strict risk management control policies and must balance the drive for profit with active sales support.\n\nIn Japan, about fifty percent of customers use cash when buying a car. Corporate sales account for another 20 percent of the total, while the remaining 30 percent of customers use automotive financing. Therefore, we focus on capturing that 30 percent market, in addition to penetrating the cash customer segment. Nissan Financial Services, or NFS, has the highest level of market penetration in Japan, and our centralized customer center gives us a clear advantage over other finance companies.\n\nA sales finance company is exposed to various forms of risk. One risk is interest rate fluctuation. NFS mitigates this risk by matching interest as much as possible. Almost seventy percent of our portfolio is on a match-funding basis. Another risk is credit risk. Fortunately, our portfolio is improving. The economy is getting better, and we’ve had success with a low-interest, 2.9 percent APR program. Because this is a competitive rate, it has attracted customers with good credit ratings who otherwise would have opted for bank financing. \n\nWe have also improved our scoring system for credit analysis. We have a new system that can automatically process 60 percent of all credit applications. Turnaround time for the credit decision used to take three to four hours, but with continuous improvement of our system it takes just 14 minutes. If the dealer submits the data online, turnaround is reduced to four minutes. This has really increased customer satisfaction. In addition, having a centralized system ensures that our credit standards are consistently applied.\n\nThe above improvements have reduced our loss ratio to below 0.3 percent. More importantly, 95 percent of applicants are approved for financing. The challenge is to reduce the loss ratio and rejection rate at the same time. We want to support sales by providing financing, and keep the loss ratio low. \n\nIn the past, NFS depended on the parent company for funding. Since Nissan and NFS had their financial ratings upgraded, we issued our first public bond in September 2003. We have also issued commercial paper and diversified our funding sources. As a result, our reliance on the parent company for funding has been reduced to almost zero. \n\nSales finance became actively involved in sales support during NISSAN 180. We have always been a source of profit, but now we are aiming to enhance the value chain as well. We have the largest number of business lines of any finance company, including credit loans, corporate and private leasing, car rentals, credit cards, insurance, maintenance and much more. Because we have more touch points with the customer, we have a great opportunity to easily cross-sell our products. Nissan is allocating more resources to light commercial vehicles, which is a perfect platform for us as well. And two years ago we created a fleet division with Nissan that provides both vehicles and a full range of services including total outsourcing of fleet management.\n\nThe Alliance with Renault has played a central role in our development over the past few years.\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 28\n\nWHO WE ARE\n\nSALES FINANCE" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8875369289645527, + "doc_id": "daa9a2ed1d88062b27fc5a8d4b7ea6ba829b66b4121b5104c82357f4610d51ae", + "edit_distance": 0.06060606060606061, + "f1_score": 0.9642857142857141, + "meteor": 0.94123712318412, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Share information\n\nShare issues\n\nPrior year amounts have, where applicable, been adjusted to place them on a comparable basis with current year amounts.\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\n45", + "recall": 0.9310344827586207, + "true_md": "## Share information\n\nShare issues\n\nPrior year amounts have, where applicable, been adjusted to place them on a comparable basis with current year am ounts.\n\nAnnual Report 2004 45" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9659806504180786, + "doc_id": "163cd9a1750976915f9a74e8d8ea35b9e3483bf32b5fd4e1525a6b0fd71a0455", + "edit_distance": 0.9278131634819533, + "f1_score": 0.9917808219178081, + "meteor": 0.6583769586158292, + "precision": 0.9945054945054945, + "pred_md": "## Net Income\n\nNet non-operating expenses totaled ¥5.5 billion, ¥9.7 billion lower than last year. This was primarily due to a ¥5.3 billion decrease in financial costs and a ¥5.3 billion increase in equity in earnings of unconsolidated subsidiaries and affiliates, thanks mainly to Renault. Net extraordinary losses totaled ¥62.5 billion, ¥10.7 billion lower than last year, mainly due to the sale of the site of the former Murayama plant. Net income before taxes came to ¥793.2 billion. Income taxes totaled ¥258.0 billion, with an effective consolidated tax rate of 33 percent. Minority interests amounted to ¥22.9 billion, mainly from Yulon Nissan Motor. As a result, net income reached ¥512.3 billion, an increase of ¥8.6 billion.\n\n## FINANCIAL POSITION\n\n## Balance Sheet\n\nIn 2004, total consolidated assets increased by 25.3 percent to ¥9,848.5 billion.\n\nCurrent assets increased by 36.4 percent, or ¥1,372.4 billion, to ¥5,139.4 billion. This increase included changes in the scope of consolidation by ¥271.1 billion and an increase in sales finance receivables by ¥840.6 billion thanks to increased sales in the U.S. Fixed assets increased by 15.1 percent, or ¥616.7 billion, to ¥4,708.0 billion. Property, plant and equipment valuation increased by ¥593.6 billion, mainly due to capital expenditures of ¥477.5 billion and an increase in leased vehicles.\n\nCurrent liabilities increased by 28.1 percent, or ¥872.2 billion, to ¥3,974.7 billion. This increase included changes in the scope of consolidation of ¥144.4 billion and an increase in short-term borrowings for sales financing of ¥558.5 billion.\n\nIn 2004, total shareholder equity increased from ¥2,024.0 billion to ¥2,465.8 billion. This gain was primarily due to net income of ¥512.3 billion, offset by dividends paid totaling ¥101.2 billion. Consolidated shareholder equity represented 29 percent of total revenues and 25 percent of total assets.\n\n## Cash Flow\n\nCash from operating activities was ¥369.4 billion, below the previous year's level of ¥797.4 billion. This drop was primarily caused by a ¥331.2 billion increase in finance receivables in the U.S. and Japan. There were also increases in inventory and income tax paid.\n\nCash used for investing activities increased by ¥108.9 billion to ¥865.0 billion. This increase was mainly due to an increase of leased vehicles in the U.S.\n\nCash from financing activities totaled ¥521.0 billion, including an increase in short-term borrowing of ¥666.2 billion, offset by ¥94 billion for the payment of dividends and ¥26 billion for the acquisition of treasury stock.\n\nIn total, cash and cash equivalents increased by ¥95.6 billion to ¥289.8 billion from fiscal 2004.\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\nPERFORMANCE\n\n13", + "recall": 0.9890710382513661, + "true_md": "Current liabilities increased by 28.1 percent, or ¥872.2 billion, to ¥3,974.7 billion. This increase included changes in the scope of consolidation of ¥144.4 billion and an increase in short-term borrowings for sales financing of ¥558.5 billion.\n\nPERFORMANCE\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 13\n\nIn total, cash and cash equivalents increased by ¥95.6 billion to ¥289.8 billion from fiscal 2004.\n\nCash from financing activities totaled ¥521.0 billion, including an increase in short-term borrowing of ¥666.2 billion, offset by ¥94 billion for the payment of dividends and ¥26 billion for the acquisition of treasury stock.\n\nCash used for investing activities increased by ¥108.9 billion to ¥865.0 billion. This increase was mainly due to an increase of leased vehicles in the U.S.\n\nCash from operating activities was ¥369.4 billion, below the previous year’s level of ¥797.4 billion. This drop was primarily caused by a ¥331.2 billion increase in finance receivables in the U.S. and Japan. There were also increases in inventory and income tax paid.\n\nIn 2004, total shareholder equity increased from ¥2,024.0 billion to ¥2,465.8 billion. This gain was primarily due to net income of ¥512.3 billion, offset by dividends paid totaling ¥101.2 billion. Consolidated shareholder equity represented 29 percent of total revenues and 25 percent of total assets.\n\nNet non-operating expenses totaled ¥5.5 billion, ¥9.7 billion lower than last year. This was primarily due to a ¥5.3 billion decrease in financial costs and a ¥5.3 billion increase in equity in earnings of unconsolidated subsidiaries and affiliates, thanks mainly to Renault. Net extraordinary losses totaled ¥62.5 billion, ¥10.7 billion lower than last year, mainly due to the sale of the site of the former Murayama plant. Net income before taxes came to ¥793.2 billion. Income taxes totaled ¥258.0 billion, with an effective consolidated tax rate of 33 percent. Minority interests amounted to ¥22.9 billion, mainly from Yulon Nissan Motor. As a result, net income reached ¥512.3 billion, an increase of ¥8.6 billion.\n\nIn 2004, total consolidated assets increased by 25.3 percent to ¥9,848.5 billion. \n\nCurrent assets increased by 36.4 percent, or ¥1,372.4 billion, to ¥5,139.4 billion. This increase included changes in the scope of consolidation by ¥271.1 billion and an increase in sales finance receivables by ¥840.6 billion thanks to increased sales in the U.S. Fixed assets increased by 15.1 percent, or ¥616.7 billion, to ¥4,708.0 billion. Property, plant and equipment valuation increased by ¥593.6 billion, mainly due to capital expenditures of ¥477.5 billion and an increase in leased vehicles. \n\n## FINANCIAL POSITION\n\n## Balance Sheet\n\n## Cash Flow\n\n## Net Income" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8789961093480054, + "doc_id": "572a803b974347c97ef599bc4cfe65c1981aa2a1cb1f3572bf1d3b9d1b173660", + "edit_distance": 0.7669902912621359, + "f1_score": 0.972972972972973, + "meteor": 0.9574514223847913, + "precision": 0.972972972972973, + "pred_md": "2 6\n\n## EU R O N E T SE RV I C E S IN C. A N D SU B S I D I A R I E S\n\n## Consolidated Statements of Changes in Stockholders' (Deficit)/Equity\n\nSee accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.\n\n## RIVER TYNE BRIDGES, Newcastle\n\nSix bridges dominate the Tyne between Newcastle and Gateshead, enabling innovative railway and roadway advances over the past two centuries. At the time of its completion in 1929, the Tyne Bridge was the world's longest single span bridge.", + "recall": 0.972972972972973, + "true_md": "## Consolidated Statements of Changes in Stockholders’ (Deficit)/Equity\n\nSee accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.\n\nSix bridges dominate the Tyne between Newcastle and Gateshead, enabling innovative railway and roadway advances over the past two centuries. At the time of its completion in 1929, the Tyne Bridge was the world’s longest single span bridge.\n\n## RIVER TYNE BRIDGES, Newcastle\n\n2 6\n\nEU R O N E T SE RV I C E S IN C. A N D SU B S I D I A R I E S" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9273787968067029, + "doc_id": "a523268b86df7f2faeb0b10a7756e7026348a326c1b0fcda50a9406a0bb157ac", + "edit_distance": 0.45775535939470363, + "f1_score": 0.9598765432098765, + "meteor": 0.7896516117200469, + "precision": 0.9841772151898734, + "pred_md": "In December 2003, the Medicare Prescription Drug, Improvement and Modernization Act of 2003 ('the Act') was signed into law. The provisions of the Act provide for a federal subsidy for plans that provide prescription drug benefits that are at least actuarially equivalent to Medicare Part D, and alternatively would allow prescription drug plan sponsors to coordinate with the Medicare benefit. On May 19, 2004, the FASB issued Staff Position (FSP) No. 106-2, 'Accounting and Disclosure Requirements Related to the Medicare Prescription Drug, Improvement and Modernization Act of 2003,' offering guidance on accounting for the effects of the Act. FSP No. 106-2 specifies that the subsidy initially received under the Act is recorded as an actuarial gain to the accumulated postretirement benefit obligation (APBO), and amortized over future service periods. Future subsidies or reductions in covered claims will reduce periodic service costs. FSP No. 106-2 is effective for the first interim or annual period beginning after June 15, 2004. During the third quarter of fiscal 2004, the company determined its plan to be at least actuarially equivalent based on an analysis of the net company cost, and chose to retroactively adopt the provisions of the Act back to the date of enactment. The required disclosure provisions are presented in Note F. As additional guidance is issued by the federal government for determining actuarial equivalency, this determination is subject to current interpretation and could require the company to change previously reported information.\n\n## > note B\n\n## Divestitures and Acquisitions\n\nEffective June 30, 2004, the company completed the sale of Vista International Packaging, Inc., the company's food packaging subsidiary. The company recorded an $18.1 million pre-tax gain ($11.5 million after-tax, or $.08 per share) in the third quarter of fiscal 2004 related to the sale.\n\nOn October 18, 2004, the company purchased the assets of Concept Foods, Inc. (Concept) for $17.1 million in cash. Concept, located in Alma, Kansas, was renamed Alma Foods, LLC upon acquisition. Alma Foods manufactures a wide variety of fully-cooked entrees.\n\nOn July 31, 2003, the company purchased the assets of Century Foods International (CFI) for $116.5 million in cash, including related costs. In the first quarter of fiscal 2004, an additional payment of $2.1 million was made following a final working capital valuation. CFI, located in Sparta, Wisconsin, manufactures nutritional products, dairy proteins and blends, and cheese products.\n\n38\n\nHormel Foods Corporation\n\nOn December 30, 2002, the company purchased 100 percent of the outstanding stock of the Imperial Sugar Company subsidiaries operating the Diamond Crystal Brands (DCB) business for $124.5 million in cash, including related costs. DCB, headquartered in Savannah, Georgia, packages and sells various sugar and sugar substitute products, salt and pepper products, savory products, drink mixes, and dessert mixes to retail and foodservice customers.\n\nThe operating results of each acquisition are included in the company's consolidated statement of operations from the dates of acquisition. No divestitures or acquisitions in fiscal 2004, 2003, or 2002 were material individually or in aggregate.\n\n## > note C\n\n## Inventories\n\nPrincipal components of inventories are:\n\nInventoriable expenses, packages, supplies, and turkey products amounting to approximately $85.5 million at October 30, 2004, and $91.1 million at October 25, 2003, are stated at cost determined by the last-in, first-out method and are $36.8 million and $33.7 million lower in the respective years than such inventories determined under the first-in, first-out method.\n\n>\n\n## note D\n\n## Goodwill and Intangible Assets\n\nThe changes in the carrying amount of goodwill for the fiscal years ended October 30, 2004, and October 25, 2003, are presented in the table below. The amounts presented for goodwill acquired in fiscal 2003 reflect the acquisitions of Diamond Crystal Brands and Century Foods International. The purchase adjustments in fiscal 2004 relate to finalizing the purchase accounting for those acquisitions, including a payment of $2.1 million in the first quarter following a final working capital valuation for Century Foods International.", + "recall": 0.9367469879518072, + "true_md": "On December 30, 2002, the company purchased 100 percent of the outstanding stock of the Imperial Sugar Company subsidiaries operating the Diamond Crystal Brands (DCB) business for $124.5 million in cash, including related costs. DCB, headquartered in Savannah, Georgia, packages and sells various sugar and sugar substitute products, salt and pepper products, savory products, drink mixes, and dessert mixes to retail and foodservice customers.\n\nIn December 2003, the Medicare Prescription Drug, Improvement and Modernization Act of 2003 (“the Act”) was signed into law. The provisions of the Act provide for a federal subsidy for plans that provide prescription drug benefits that are at least actuarially equiv- alent to Medicare Part D, and alternatively would allow prescription drug plan sponsors to coordinate with the Medicare benefit. On May 19, 2004, the FASB issued Staff Position (FSP) No. 106-2, “Accounting and Disclosure Requirements Related to the Medicare Prescription Drug, Improvement and Modernization Act of 2003,” offering guidance on accounting for the effects of the Act. FSP No. 106-2 specifies that the subsidy initially received under the Act is recorded as an actuarial gain to the accumulated postretirement benefit obligation (APBO), and amortized over future service peri- ods. Future subsidies or reductions in covered claims will reduce periodic service costs. FSP No. 106-2 is effective for the first interim or annual period beginning after June 15, 2004. During the third quarter of fiscal 2004, the company determined its plan to be at least actuarially equivalent based on an analysis of the net com- pany cost, and chose to retroactively adopt the provisions of the Act back to the date of enactment. The required disclosure provi- sions are presented in Note F. As additional guidance is issued by the federal government for determining actuarial equivalency, this determination is subject to current interpretation and could require the company to change previously reported information.\n\nThe operating results of each acquisition are included in the com- pany’s consolidated statement of operations from the dates of acquisition. No divestitures or acquisitions in fiscal 2004, 2003, or 2002 were material individually or in aggregate.\n\nEffective June 30, 2004, the company completed the sale of Vista International Packaging, Inc., the company’s food packaging subsidiary. The company recorded an $18.1 million pre-tax gain ($11.5 million after-tax, or $.08 per share) in the third quarter of fiscal 2004 related to the sale.\n\nOn October 18, 2004, the company purchased the assets of Concept Foods, Inc. (Concept) for $17.1 million in cash. Concept, located in Alma, Kansas, was renamed Alma Foods, LLC upon acquisition. Alma Foods manufactures a wide variety of fully-cooked entrees.\n\nOn July 31, 2003, the company purchased the assets of Century Foods International (CFI) for $116.5 million in cash, including related costs. In the first quarter of fiscal 2004, an additional payment of $2.1 million was made following a final working capital valuation. CFI, located in Sparta, Wisconsin, manufactures nutritional prod- ucts, dairy proteins and blends, and cheese products.\n\nThe changes in the carrying amount of goodwill for the fiscal years ended October 30, 2004, and October 25, 2003, are presented in the table below. The amounts presented for goodwill acquired in fiscal 2003 reflect the acquisitions of Diamond Crystal Brands and Century Foods International. The purchase adjustments in fiscal 2004 relate to finalizing the purchase accounting for those acquisi- tions, including a payment of $2.1 million in the first quarter follow- ing a final working capital valuation for Century Foods International.\n\nInventoriable expenses, packages, supplies, and turkey products amounting to approximately $85.5 million at October 30, 2004, and $91.1 million at October 25, 2003, are stated at cost deter- mined by the last-in, first-out method and are $36.8 million and $33.7 million lower in the respective years than such inventories determined under the first-in, first-out method.\n\n## > note D\n\n## > note B\n\n## Divestitures and Acquisitions\n\n## Goodwill and Intangible Assets\n\n## > note C\n\n## Inventories\n\nPrincipal components of inventories are:\n\n38 Hormel Foods Corporation" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.11090926665836774, + "doc_id": "34e1c7f2f31324cd78e1a180320fde393b30af88d784aa8d7e0bf7f82a575a0c", + "edit_distance": 0.8867924528301887, + "f1_score": 0.288135593220339, + "meteor": 0.4887905604719765, + "precision": 0.16831683168316833, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO AND FORMING PART OF THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR THE FINANCIAL YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2000\n\n(b)\n\n## (c) Non-Cash Financing and\n\n## Investing Activities\n\nDuring the Financial Year the consolidated entity acquired a vessel with an aggregate fair value of $3,250,000, by way of hire purchase. During 1998/99 the consolidated entity acquired vessels and plant and equipment with aggregate fair values of $4,650,000 and $86,174 respectively, by way of hire purchase.\n\n## (d) Businesses Acquired\n\nOn 12 August 1998, Mermaid Marine Australia Limited (formerly Bellbridge Investments Pty Ltd) acquired 100% of the shares in Mermaid Marine Group Pty Ltd. The acquisition details were:\n\nCash paid for purchase of shares Buy back of shares Issue of shares as part of acquisition Pre-acquisition dividend Stamp duty payable on transfer of shares\n\nConsideration Shares issued\n\n49", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "49\n\n## NOTES TO AND FORMING PART OF THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR THE FINANCIAL YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2000" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9971975559226118, + "doc_id": "b20451fc4923948f13624d9e9d06dacfa58a32b634895d567337da92a180f367", + "edit_distance": 0.026465028355387523, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.999968720422924, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## 2003 Revenues by Product Line\n\nOur financial performance earned recognition from Investors Business Daily , which ranked Atrion sixth on its list of Market-Leading Medical Stocks in November 2003. During the year, our stock price more than doubled, ending the year at $45.44, up from $22.50 at year-end 2002. Over the last five years, our stock price has increased by 468 percent.\n\n## We make products that meet the specific needs of niche markets.\n\nOne of the principal strengths of our company lies in the diversity of our product lines. Atrion makes medical devices and components for end-users and manufacturers throughout the health care industry, ranging from ophthalmology and cardiovascular products to fluid delivery devices. Our reputation for quality, precision and reliability has helped a number of our products gain the leading market positions in the United States in their respective niches.\n\nIn the ophthalmic sector, Atrion is a leading U.S. manufacturer of soft contact lens disinfection cases. In addition, our LacriCATH ® balloon catheter positions us as a market leader with a patented product for the treatment of tear duct blockages.\n\nWe serve the cardiac surgery market as a leading U.S. provider of vacuum relief valves, minimally invasive surgical tapes and check valves. Serving the same market, our MPS ® Myocardial Protection System continues to make headway, as hospitals and surgeons increasingly recognize the value of this proprietary technology. The MPS delivers essential fluids and medications to the heart during open-heart surgery, and it is the only system that provides integrated control over temperature, pressure, flow rate and the precise delivery of medications to the heart during surgery. Atrion also is the leading U.S. provider of clamps for IV sets, which are used in many surgical and medical settings.\n\nOur expertise and leadership in valve design and manufacturing extend beyond the health care industry. We are the leading domestic manufacturer of valves and inflation devices used in marine and aviation safety products.\n\nWe support this stable of solidly performing products with two essential programs. One is a highly effective sales and marketing effort that keeps our products moving into the marketplace. Our sales team is comprised of professionals who possess clinical knowledge and specific product experience, and also concentrate on building strong relationships with customers and within the industry.\n\nOur other essential program is research and development. We believe it is vital to keep a pipeline of products in various stages of development so that we can take advantage of near- and long-term opportunities in our markets. Understandably, proposed new products for the health care industry must undergo stringent testing and rigorous approval procedures. Often, this means that the process of bringing a new product from the design stage to the marketplace is a long and arduous one. A strong, proactive research and development program ensures that we are committing the resources and time required to successfully stay the course.\n\n4", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Our financial performance earned recognition from Investors Business Daily , which ranked Atrion sixth on its list of Market-Leading Medical Stocks in November 2003. During the year, our stock price more than doubled, ending the year at $45.44, up from $22.50 at year-end 2002. Over the last five years, our stock price has increased by 468 percent.\n\n## We make products that meet the specific needs of niche markets.\n\nOne of the principal strengths of our company lies in the diversity of our product lines. Atrion makes medical devices and components for end-users and manufacturers throughout the health care industry, ranging from ophthalmology and cardiovascular products to fluid delivery devices. Our reputation for quality, precision and reliability has helped a number of our products gain the leading market positions in the United States in their respective niches. \n\nIn the ophthalmic sector, Atrion is a leading U.S. manufacturer of soft contact lens disinfection cases. In addition, our LacriCATH ® balloon catheter positions us as a market leader with a patented product for the treatment of tear duct blockages. \n\nWe serve the cardiac surgery market as a leading U.S. provider of vacuum relief valves, minimally invasive surgical tapes and check valves. Serving the same market, our MPS ® Myocardial Protection System continues to make headway, as hospitals and surgeons increasingly recognize the value of this proprietary technology. The MPS delivers essential fluids and medications to the heart during open-heart surgery, and it is the only system that provides integrated control over temperature, pressure, flow rate and the precise delivery of medications to the heart during surgery. Atrion also is the leading U.S. provider of clamps for IV sets, which are used in many surgical and medical settings. \n\nOur expertise and leadership in valve design and manufacturing extend beyond the health care industry. We are the leading domestic manufacturer of valves and inflation devices used in marine and aviation safety products.\n\nWe support this stable of solidly performing products with two essential programs. One is a highly effective sales and marketing effort that keeps our products moving into the marketplace. Our sales team is comprised of professionals who possess clinical knowledge and specific product experience, and also concentrate on building strong relationships with customers and within the industry.\n\nOur other essential program is research and development. We believe it is vital to keep a pipeline of products in various stages of development so that we can take advantage of near- and long-term opportunities in our markets. Understandably, proposed new products for the health care industry must undergo stringent testing and rigorous approval procedures. Often, this means that the process of bringing a new product from the design stage to the marketplace is a long and arduous one. A strong, proactive research and development program ensures that we are committing the resources and time required to successfully stay the course.\n\n4\n\n## 2003 Revenues by Product Line" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9279137994072068, + "doc_id": "1b49b5e96842506196c58a23c6ec2f89f75bfe05c679cd105a128cfd6d03e139", + "edit_distance": 0.06071019473081329, + "f1_score": 0.9536784741144415, + "meteor": 0.9626627249492424, + "precision": 0.9722222222222222, + "pred_md": "notes to\n\n## consolidated financial statements October 30, 2004\n\n## > note A\n\n## Summary of Significant Accounting Policies\n\nPrinciples of Consolidation: The consolidated financial statements include the accounts of Hormel Foods Corporation and all of its majority-owned subsidiaries after elimination of all material intercompany accounts, transactions, and profits.\n\nReclassifications: Certain reclassifications of previously reported amounts have been made to conform to the current year presentation and to conform with recent accounting pronouncements and guidance. The reclassifications had no impact on net earnings as previously reported.\n\nUse of Estimates: The preparation of financial statements in conformity with U.S. generally accepted accounting principles requires management to make estimates and assumptions that affect the amounts reported in the financial statements and accompanying notes. Actual results could differ from those estimates.\n\nFiscal Year: The company's fiscal year ends on the last Saturday in October. Fiscal year 2004 consisted of 53 weeks and fiscal years 2003 and 2002 consisted of 52 weeks. Beginning in 2005, the company's fiscal year will end on the last Sunday in October.\n\nCash and Cash Equivalents and Short-term Marketable Securities: The company considers all investments with an original maturity of three months or less on their acquisition date to be cash equivalents. The company classifies investments with an original maturity of more than three months on their acquisition date as short-term marketable securities.\n\nInventories: Inventories are stated at the lower of cost or market. Livestock and the materials portion of products are valued on the first-in, first-out method with the exception of the materials portion of turkey products, which are valued on the last-in, firstout method. Substantially all inventoriable expenses, packages, and supplies are valued by the last-in, first-out method.\n\nProperty, Plant, and Equipment: Property, plant, and equipment are stated at cost. The company generally uses the straight-line method in computing depreciation. The annual provisions for depreciation have been computed principally using the following ranges of asset lives: buildings 20 to 40 years, machinery and equipment 5 to 10 years.\n\nSoftware development and implementation costs are expensed until the company has determined that the software will result in probable future economic benefits, and management has committed to funding the project. Thereafter, all direct, external implementation costs and purchased software costs are capitalized and amortized using the straight-line method over the remaining estimated useful lives, not exceeding five years.\n\nGoodwill and Intangibles: Goodwill and other intangibles are originally recorded at their estimated fair values at date of acquisition. Goodwill and indefinite-lived intangibles are no longer amortized but are tested annually for impairment, or more frequently if impairment indicators arise. Definite-lived intangibles are amortized over their estimated useful lives and are evaluated for impairment annually, or more frequently if impairment indicators are present, using a process similar to that used to test long-lived assets for impairment.\n\nImpairment of Long-lived Assets: The company reviews longlived assets and definite-lived intangibles for impairment annually or more frequently when events or changes in circumstances indicate that the carrying amount of an asset may not be recoverable. If impairment indicators are present and the estimated future undiscounted cash flows are less than the carrying value of the assets and any related goodwill, the carrying value is reduced to the estimated fair value.\n\nIn the first quarter of fiscal 2003, the company's Jennie-O Turkey Store subsidiary announced it would close its Heartland Foods processing plant in Marshall, Minnesota, effective February 28, 2003. The company classified the Marshall facility as an 'asset to be disposed of by sale' in accordance with Statement of Financial Accounting Standard (SFAS) No. 144, 'Accounting for the Impairment or Disposal of Long-Lived Assets.' In fiscal 2003, the company recognized a pre-tax loss of $2.5 million in cost of products sold to write the asset down to fair value. The $1.8 million carrying value of the plant was included in other assets on the consolidated balance sheet. In fiscal 2004, the company recognized an additional writedown of $0.6 million to adjust the asset to fair value. The asset was sold in fiscal 2004.\n\nForeign Currency Translation: Assets and liabilities denominated in foreign currency are translated at the current exchange rate as of the balance sheet date, and income statement amounts are translated at the average monthly exchange rate. Translation adjustments resulting from fluctuations in exchange rates are recorded as a component of accumulated other comprehensive loss in shareholders' investment.\n\nWhen calculating foreign currency translation, the company deemed its foreign investments to be permanent in nature and has not provided for taxes on currency translation adjustments arising from converting the investment in a foreign currency to U.S. dollars.\n\n2004 Annual Report\n\n35", + "recall": 0.9358288770053476, + "true_md": "notes to consolidated financial statements October 30, 2004\n\n## > note A\n\n## Summary of Significant Accounting Policies\n\nPrinciples of Consolidation: The consolidated financial state- ments include the accounts of Hormel Foods Corporation and all of its majority-owned subsidiaries after elimination of all material intercompany accounts, transactions, and profits.\n\nReclassifications: Certain reclassifications of previously reported amounts have been made to conform to the current year presen- tation and to conform with recent accounting pronouncements and guidance. The reclassifications had no impact on net earnings as previously reported.\n\nUse of Estimates: The preparation of financial statements in con- formity with U.S. generally accepted accounting principles requires management to make estimates and assumptions that affect the amounts reported in the financial statements and accompanying notes. Actual results could differ from those estimates.\n\nFiscal Year: The company’s fiscal year ends on the last Saturday in October. Fiscal year 2004 consisted of 53 weeks and fiscal years 2003 and 2002 consisted of 52 weeks. Beginning in 2005, the company’s fiscal year will end on the last Sunday in October.\n\nSecurities: The company considers all investments with an original maturity of three months or less on their acquisition date to be cash equivalents. The company classifies investments with an original maturity of more than three months on their acquisition date as short-term marketable securities.\n\n## Cash and Cash Equivalents and Short-term Marketable\n\nInventories: Inventories are stated at the lower of cost or market. Livestock and the materials portion of products are valued on the first-in, first-out method with the exception of the materials portion of turkey products, which are valued on the last-in, first- out method. Substantially all inventoriable expenses, packages, and supplies are valued by the last-in, first-out method.\n\nProperty, Plant, and Equipment: Property, plant, and equipment are stated at cost. The company generally uses the straight-line method in computing depreciation. The annual provisions for depreciation have been computed principally using the following ranges of asset lives: buildings 20 to 40 years, machinery and equipment 5 to 10 years.\n\nSoftware development and implementation costs are expensed until the company has determined that the software will result in probable future economic benefits, and management has commit- ted to funding the project. Thereafter, all direct, external implemen- tation costs and purchased software costs are capitalized and amortized using the straight-line method over the remaining esti- mated useful lives, not exceeding five years.\n\nGoodwill and Intangibles: Goodwill and other intangibles are originally recorded at their estimated fair values at date of acquisition. Goodwill and indefinite-lived intangibles are no longer amortized but are tested annually for impairment, or more frequently if impairment indicators arise. Definite-lived intangibles are amortized over their estimated useful lives and are evaluated for impairment annually, or more frequently if impairment indicators are present, using a process similar to that used to test long-lived assets for impairment.\n\nImpairment of Long-lived Assets: The company reviews long- lived assets and definite-lived intangibles for impairment annually or more frequently when events or changes in circumstances indicate that the carrying amount of an asset may not be recoverable. If impairment indicators are present and the estimated future undis- counted cash flows are less than the carrying value of the assets and any related goodwill, the carrying value is reduced to the estimated fair value.\n\nIn the first quarter of fiscal 2003, the company’s Jennie-O Turkey Store subsidiary announced it would close its Heartland Foods processing plant in Marshall, Minnesota, effective February 28, 2003. The company classified the Marshall facility as an “asset to be disposed of by sale” in accordance with Statement of Financial Accounting Standard (SFAS) No. 144, “Accounting for the Impairment or Disposal of Long-Lived Assets.” In fiscal 2003, the company recognized a pre-tax loss of $2.5 million in cost of products sold to write the asset down to fair value. The $1.8 million carrying value of the plant was included in other assets on the consolidated balance sheet. In fiscal 2004, the company recog- nized an additional writedown of $0.6 million to adjust the asset to fair value. The asset was sold in fiscal 2004.\n\nForeign Currency Translation: Assets and liabilities denominated in foreign currency are translated at the current exchange rate as of the balance sheet date, and income statement amounts are translated at the average monthly exchange rate. Translation adjustments resulting from fluctuations in exchange rates are recorded as a component of accumulated other comprehensive loss in shareholders’ investment.\n\nWhen calculating foreign currency translation, the company deemed its foreign investments to be permanent in nature and has not provided for taxes on currency translation adjustments arising from converting the investment in a foreign currency to U.S. dollars.\n\n2004 Annual Report 35" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.008508117409287577, + "doc_id": "ab9315a0610ec0e5446a7062cd99a9e137efe3d7da9a7bffa2523894ac68751a", + "edit_distance": 0.9566563467492261, + "f1_score": 0.30000000000000004, + "meteor": 0.03756340991657395, + "precision": 0.24489795918367346, + "pred_md": "°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°\n\nʀʀʀʀÊÊ­ÊÊ\n\nglyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium> œ “«œ˜i˜ÌÊ glyph<c=31,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium>>˜Õv>VÌÕÀˆ˜}\n\n°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê ­ÊÊ+1glyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium>glyph<c=29,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium>glyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium>/9Ê glyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium>--1,glyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium> glyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium>glyph<c=13,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium>Ê Ê ®Ê\n\n°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê ­ÊÊ-1**glyph<c=29,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium> 9Êglyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium>glyph<c=21,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium>glyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium>glyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium> Ê glyph<c=31,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium>glyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium> glyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium>glyph<c=20,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium>glyph<c=13,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium>glyph<c=31,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium>glyph<c=13,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium> /Ê Ê ®Ê\n\n°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê\n\nÊÊ®ÊÊ €Ê€Ê€Ê€Ê€Ê€Ê€Ê\n\n-ÞÃÌi“Êglyph<c=12,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium>iÈ}˜Ê>˜'Êglyph<c=31,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium>>˜Õv>VÌÕÀˆ˜}\n\n°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê°Ê ­ÊÊglyph<c=21,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium>1glyph<c=31,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium>glyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium> Ê ,glyph<c=13,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium>-\"1,glyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium>glyph<c=13,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium>Ê Ê ®Ê\n\nʀʀʀʀʀ", + "recall": 0.3870967741935484, + "true_md": "­ Ê Ê * , \" / \" / 9 * Ê * - Ê Ê ® Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê \n\n° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ­ Ê Ê * , \" 1 / \" Ê * - Ê Ê ® Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê \n\n° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ­ Ê Ê - 1 - / Ê * - Ê Ê ® Ê \n\nœ “ « œ ˜ i ˜ Ì Ê > ˜ Õ v > V Ì Õ À ˆ ˜ } Ê Ê ® Ê Ê € Ê € Ê € Ê € Ê € Ê € Ê € Ê -\n\nÊ Ê ® Ê Ê € Ê € Ê € Ê € Ê € Ê € Ê € Ê - Þ Ã Ì i “ Ê i à ˆ } ˜ Ê > ˜ ` Ê > ˜ Õ v > V Ì Õ À ˆ ˜ } Ê €\n\n­ Ê Ê + 1 / 9 Ê - - 1 , Ê Ê ® Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê \n\n° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ­ Ê Ê - 1 * * 9 Ê Ê / Ê Ê ® Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê \n\n° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ° Ê ­ Ê Ê 1 Ê , - \" 1 , Ê Ê ® Ê" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.92426252513025, + "doc_id": "4e280235101d4f5165d594fb2feb0b20641a5a26051eede602368a28f99e1a7f", + "edit_distance": 0.22916666666666666, + "f1_score": 0.9640000000000001, + "meteor": 0.9172282460478004, + "precision": 0.9678714859437751, + "pred_md": "OUR WORK\n\n38\n\nDESIGN\n\n## Shaping a World-Leading Brand\n\n'Our goal is very simple: make Nissan the world leader in design. Design is about shaping products that naturally draw the eye, and yet it is also an intangible asset that creates shareholder value and competitive advantage. The power of that attraction translates into a higher selling price. Ultimately, a design's true worth is measured in profit and the number of cars sold.\n\nAt the same time, design is a visual message from the company. The brand's philosophy must be consistent, because brand value directly relates to profit. Automobiles are my main responsibility, but design-specifically visual brand identity-covers much more than that, including motor shows, showrooms, new car launch events, and even the shareholders meeting. Whether it is through cars, buildings or showrooms, we express a variety of visual messages, but the overall message must be constant and coherent. You must sense the unity and power of the brand.\n\nI am in charge of the Design Center globally. We have seven design centers around the world-three in Japan, two in the U.S., one in Europe, and one in Taiwan. There are\n\nSHIRO NAKAMURA\n\nSHIRO NAKAMURA\n\nSenior Vice President\n\nnearly a thousand designers are working together across the globe, with 700 in Japan, 100 in the U.S., 100 in Europe and approximately 30 in Taiwan. For the moment, that's an ideal mix. We've aligned our goals, strategies and processes to unify this international team. Yet we feel there is a definite creative advantage in having each design center maintain its own character and culture. It ensures that fresh perspectives keep coming. We don't want a uniform viewpoint. We all have the same goal, but there are different ways to get there.\n\nFor example, when developing the Z, we put the three main design centers in competition, which was very healthy and stimulating for the entire team. In other cases, we assign the design to one center. The Titan truck was designed and engineered in the U.S. Nissan Design Europe in London often does the same. We also exchange designers, including senior staff, between the different centers. One of the assistant design directors from Nissan Design America is now working in Japan as a chief designer.\n\nWe have a simple design decision process consisting of three stages: concept, selection and model freeze. During the initial stage, we gather research data from the Market Intelligence Department and other sources within\n\nNissan Design America\n\nNissan Design America\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004", + "recall": 0.9601593625498008, + "true_md": "## Shaping a World-Leading Brand\n\nSHIRO NAKAMURA Senior Vice President\n\n“Our goal is very simple: make Nissan the world leader in design. Design is about shaping products that naturally draw the eye, and yet it is also an intangible asset that creates shareholder value and competitive advantage. The power of that attraction translates into a higher selling price. Ultimately, a design’s true worth is measured in profit and the number of cars sold.\n\nAt the same time, design is a visual message from the company. The brand’s philosophy must be consistent, because brand value directly relates to profit. Automobiles are my main responsibility, but design—specifically visual brand identity—covers much more than that, including motor shows, showrooms, new car launch events, and even the shareholders meeting. Whether it is through cars, buildings or showrooms, we express a variety of visual messages, but the overall message must be constant and coherent. You must sense the unity and power of the brand.\n\nnearly a thousand designers are working together across the globe, with 700 in Japan, 100 in the U.S., 100 in Europe and approximately 30 in Taiwan. For the moment, that’s an ideal mix. We’ve aligned our goals, strategies and processes to unify this international team. Yet we feel there is a definite creative advantage in having each design center maintain its own character and culture. It ensures that fresh perspectives keep coming. We don’t want a uniform viewpoint. We all have the same goal, but there are different ways to get there.\n\nFor example, when developing the Z, we put the three main design centers in competition, which was very healthy and stimulating for the entire team. In other cases, we assign the design to one center. The Titan truck was designed and engineered in the U.S. Nissan Design Europe in London often does the same. We also exchange designers, including senior staff, between the different centers. One of the assistant design directors from Nissan Design America is now working in Japan as a chief designer. \n\nWe have a simple design decision process consisting of three stages: concept, selection and model freeze. During the initial stage, we gather research data from the Market Intelligence Department and other sources within\n\nI am in charge of the Design Center globally. We have seven design centers around the world—three in Japan, two in the U.S., one in Europe, and one in Taiwan. There are\n\nOUR WORK\n\nNissan Design America\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 38\n\n## DESIGN" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6545582749064346, + "doc_id": "86c3bfe93129df3f8a4197400bc25baf8bcd782328b73fda4d6bb2c92d6b3146", + "edit_distance": 0.14285714285714285, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9772230320699709, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "ANNUAL REPORT 2000\n\nANNUAL REPORT 2000\n\nMERMAID MARINE AUSTRALIA LIMITED\n\nACN 083 185 693", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "ANNUAL REPORT 2000\n\n2000\n\nREPORT\n\nANNUAL\n\nMERMAID MARINE AUSTRALIA LIMITED\n\nACN 083 185 693" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.07072560442186134, + "doc_id": "5db647c776f2dfeacc102ac967ce7172baa28dafcdb16162ba7016999f6e8b84", + "edit_distance": 0.8271604938271605, + "f1_score": 0.49180327868852464, + "meteor": 0.21171357615894043, + "precision": 0.6, + "pred_md": "HON INDUSTRIES Inc. and SUBSIDIARIES\n\n## CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS\n\nThe accompanying notes are an integral part of the consolidated financial statements.\n\n42", + "recall": 0.4166666666666667, + "true_md": "## C O N S O L I D A T E D S T A T E M E N T S O F C A S H F L O W S\n\nH O N I N D U S T R I E S I n c . a n d S U B S I D I A R I E S\n\nThe accompanying notes are an integral part of the consolidated financial statements.\n\n42" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8109958330485393, + "doc_id": "982612e2c41d62f638c1fea418927e9e4ea26b3fc688678750c82e42ac417bef", + "edit_distance": 0.12759643916913946, + "f1_score": 0.9035532994923858, + "meteor": 0.8827888797623739, + "precision": 0.9270833333333334, + "pred_md": "Intermediary Service Award and the first-ever Life Insurance Service Award. The triple win reflected the overall excellence of The Hartford's service, a natural complement to the company's quality products. DALBAR also recognized The Hartford's mutual funds as the industry leader in several categories, including investment management.\n\nIn managing its product portfolio, The Hartford follows its own advice: think ahead and diversify. The company's earnings base derives from a variety of businesses. Diversification is a key element in managing risk and ensuring profitability-a time-tested philosophy that held especially true in 2001, as the company's other businesses evolved to anticipate changing market demands and to offer protection from new risks.\n\nThe property-casualty Business Insurance group, for example, extended its coverage to include common risks associated with e-commerce. Hartford Financial Products' (HFP) coverage continued to meet emerging risks in an extremely volatile business environment.\n\n18\n\nThe Hartford helped customers manage risk by developing a new category of commercial coverage called CyberFlex. TM This targets the previously unmet needs of small and mid-sized businesses that are integrating the Internet and other communications tools into their regular operations.\n\nA 2001 survey by The Hartford revealed that 80 percent of small and mid-sized businesses weren't sure if their current insurance policies covered specific-and increasingly common-risks such as e-mail viruses, Web site business interruption and online copyright infringement. CyberFlex coverage protects middle-market and small-business policyholders against the risk of those potentially debilitating conditions.\n\nCyberFlex is part of a broad array of industryspecific coverages in The Hartford's SPECTRUM ® business-owner's policy, including protection against employment practices liability, equipment breakdown and business interruption. As the economic environment changes rapidly, The Hartford thinks ahead by providing those flexible coverages. And the company's", + "recall": 0.8811881188118812, + "true_md": "Intermediary Service Award and the first-ever Life Insurance Service Award. The triple win reflected the overall excellence of The Hartford’s service, a natural complement to the company’s quality products. DAL- BAR also recognized The Hartford’s mutual funds as the industry leader in several categories, including invest- ment management. \n\nIn managing its product portfolio, The Hartford fol- lows its own advice: think ahead and diversify. The com- pany’s earnings base derives from a variety of businesses. Diversification is a key element in managing risk and ensuring profitability—a time-tested philosophy that held especially true in 2001, as the company’s other businesses evolved to anticipate changing market demands and to offer protection from new risks. \n\nThe property-casualty Business Insurance group, for example, extended its coverage to include common risks associated with e-commerce. Hartford Financial Products’ (HFP) coverage continued to meet emerging risks in an extremely volatile business environment. \n\nThe Hartford helped customers manage risk by developing a new category of commercial coverage called CyberFlex. TM This targets the previously unmet needs of small and mid-sized businesses that are inte- grating the Internet and other communications tools into their regular operations.\n\nA 2001 survey by The Hartford revealed that 80 percent of small and mid-sized businesses weren’t sure if their current insurance policies covered specific—and increasingly common—risks such as e-mail viruses, Web site business interruption and online copyright infringement. CyberFlex coverage protects middle-mar- ket and small-business policyholders against the risk of those potentially debilitating conditions.\n\nCyberFlex is part of a broad array of industry- specific coverages in The Hartford’s SPECTRUM ® busi- ness-owner’s policy, including protection against employment practices liability, equipment breakdown and business interruption. As the economic environ- ment changes rapidly, The Hartford thinks ahead by providing those flexible coverages. And the company’s \n\n18" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8418823133344888, + "doc_id": "7797d109135840a2232d3bf2529bc11bb4c0f3da8e14cc4c79a6da024f30e70b", + "edit_distance": 0.39669421487603307, + "f1_score": 0.9674796747967481, + "meteor": 0.7540944346951552, + "precision": 0.9916666666666667, + "pred_md": "SELECTED STATISTICS (unaudited)\n\n(1) - Wholesale Digital PCS Users are private label subscribers homed in the Company's wireless network service area.\n\n(2) - Originated by customers of the Company's Telephone subsidiary\n\n(3) - POPS refers to the estimated population of a given geographic area. Market POPS are those within a market area, and Covered POPS are those covered by the network's service area. ARPU is revenue before travel, roaming revenue, and management fee, net of adjustments divided by average subscribers. PCS Travel revenue includes roamer revenue and is divided by average subscribers. PCS Average management fee per subscriber is 8% of collected revenue excluding travel revenue, retained by Sprint. PCS Ave Monthly Churn is the average of three monthly calculations of deactivations (excluding returns less than 30 days) divided by beginning of period subscribers. CPGA includes selling costs, product costs, and advertising costs. CCPU includes network, customer care and other costs.\n\n(4) - On a normalized basis, the 4 th quarter PCS travel revenue per subscriber would be $19.25 and PCS CCPU would be approximately $38.66 if adjustments and true-ups recorded in December 2003 were excluded.\n\nSHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY\n\n10\n\n■", + "recall": 0.9444444444444444, + "true_md": "SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY ■ 10\n\n- (4) - On a normalized basis, the 4$^{th}$ quarter PCS travel revenue per subscriber would be $19.25 and PCS CCPU would be approximately $38.66 if adjustments and true-ups recorded in December 2003 were excluded.\n\n- (3) — POPS refers to the estimated population of a given geographic area. Market POPS are those within a market area, and Covered POPS are those covered by the network’s service area. ARPU is revenue before travel, roaming revenue, and management fee, net of adjustments divided by average subscribers. PCS Travel revenue includes roamer revenue and is divided by average subscribers. PCS Average management fee per subscriber is 8% of collected revenue excluding travel revenue, retained by Sprint. PCS Ave Monthly Churn is the average of three monthly calculations of deactivations (excluding returns less than 30 days) divided by beginning of period subscribers. CPGA includes selling costs, product costs, and advertising costs. CCPU includes network, customer care and other costs.\n\n- (2) — Originated by customers of the Company’s Telephone subsidiary\n\n- (1) — Wholesale Digital PCS Users are private label subscribers homed in the Company’s wireless network service area.\n\n## SELECTED STATISTICS (unaudited)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "589f3e227b92347fe52618d63e25f1704e55abc043655e0c951a1293e0814235", + "edit_distance": 0.9863013698630136, + "f1_score": 0.10909090909090907, + "meteor": 0.075, + "precision": 0.06, + "pred_md": "34\n\nTABLE OF C O N T E N T S\n\nTABLE OF C O N T E N T S\n\n| Profit and Loss Statement........................................................................................................ 35 |\n|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|\n| Balance Sheet........................................................................................................................... 36 |\n| Statement of Cash Flows.......................................................................................................... 37 |\n| Notes to the Financial Statements .......................................................................................... 38 |\n| Directors' Declaration .............................................................................................................. 62 |\n| Additional Stock Exchange Information ................................................................................ 63 |\n| Auditor's Report ....................................................................................................................... 65 |", + "recall": 0.6, + "true_md": "## TABLE OF CONTENTS\n\n34" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6754528161573434, + "doc_id": "3e7b10cbc6b12e6f5250be464c6b18cd72bb486adec2a41212bda6348a99d5f2", + "edit_distance": 0.5087719298245614, + "f1_score": 0.8428571428571429, + "meteor": 0.8985074466253443, + "precision": 0.7866666666666666, + "pred_md": "72\n\n## NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\nfor the year ended 31 December 2004\n\n## 23. Interests in Joint Ventures\n\n- (a) Santos Ltd and its controlled entities have combined interests in unincorporated joint ventures in the following major areas:\n\n(b) The sales revenue received from the Santos Group's share of petroleum products produced by the joint ventures is $1,493.5 million (2003: $1,451.2 million) and the contribution of joint venture business undertakings to profit from ordinary activities before interest and tax of the Santos Group is $581.3 million (2003: $496.7 million).\n\nAnnual Report 2004", + "recall": 0.9076923076923077, + "true_md": "## 23. Interests in Joint Ventures\n\n(b) The sales revenue received from the Santos Group’s share of petroleum pr oducts produced by the joint ventures is $1,493.5 million (2003: $1,451.2 million) and the contribution of joint venture business undertakings to profit from ordinary activities before interest and tax of the Santos Group is $581.3 million (2003: $496.7 million).\n\n## NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STA TEMENTS\n\nfor the year ended 31 December 2004\n\n72\n\nAnnual Report 2004" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9712656830763864, + "doc_id": "41751a7555ba98106d47418fb51dea7fea707c8b41cd293645d967a151af2cbc", + "edit_distance": 0.08888888888888889, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999561042524006, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "2 4\n\n## EU R O N E T SE RV I C E S IN C. A N D SU B S I D I A R I E S\n\n## Consolidated Balance Sheets\n\nSee accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## EU R O N E T SE RV I C E S IN C. A N D SU B S I D I A R I E S\n\n## Consolidated Balance Sheets\n\nSee accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.\n\n2 4" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8086936049943984, + "doc_id": "81128585cb6cd202e79b8d965a12b4f5cb6fc3351e727575c4e3949a5e4410a1", + "edit_distance": 0.7461928934010152, + "f1_score": 0.9395348837209302, + "meteor": 0.8851487664694979, + "precision": 0.9711538461538461, + "pred_md": "20\n\n## First Financial Bank, National Association, Southlake\n\n## Main Office\n\n3205 E. Highway 114 Southlake, Texas 76092 Chartered 1985\n\n## Branches\n\n95 Trophy Club Drive Trophy Club, Texas 76262 891 E. Keller Parkway Suite 100 Keller, Texas 76248\n\nMark L. Jones President and Chief Executive Officer\n\nMark L. Jones President and Chief Executive Officer\n\n## Senior Officers\n\nPerry D. Elliott\n\nChairman of the Board\n\nMark L. Jones\n\nPresident and Chief Executive Officer\n\nF. Mills Shallene Senior Vice President\n\nJ. Sean Shope\n\nSenior Vice President\n\nMichele P . Stevens\n\nSenior Vice President and Cashier\n\n## Directors\n\nPerry D. Elliott\n\nChairman of the Board\n\nJames E. Burger Burger Construction\n\nJack Dortch Jack Dortch Insurance Agency\n\nF. Scott Dueser First Financial Bankshares, Inc.\n\nDerrell Johnson\n\nPresident, American Council of Engineering Companies Life Health Trust\n\nMark L. Jones\n\nPresident and Chief Executive Officer\n\nK. Wayne Lee\n\nPresident, DDFW Properties\n\nRobert S. Mundlin\n\nOwner, Lifetime Benefits Insurance\n\nJim Ridenour\n\nPresident, Sunbelt Station Service\n\nCities of Southlake, Keller and Roanoke Deposit Market Share\n\n## Southlake\n\n9 %", + "recall": 0.9099099099099099, + "true_md": "## First Financial B ank, National Association, Southlake\n\nMark L. Jones President and Chief Executive Officer\n\n20\n\nPerry D. Elliott Chairman of the Board\n\nMark L. Jones President and Chief Executive Officer\n\nF. Mills Shallene Senior Vice President\n\nJ. Sean Shope Senior Vice President\n\nMichele P. Stevens Senior Vice President and Cashier\n\nJack Dortch Jack Dortch Insurance Agency\n\nF. Scott Dueser First Financial Bankshares, Inc.\n\nDerrell Johnson President, American Council of Engineering Companies Life Health Trust\n\nMark L. Jones President and Chief Executive Officer\n\nK. Wayne Lee President, DDFW P roperties\n\nRobert S. Mundlin Owner, Lifetime Benefits Insurance\n\nJim Ridenour President, Sunbelt Station Service\n\nPerry D. Elliott Chairman of the Board\n\nJames E. Burger Burger Construction\n\nBranches 95 Trophy Club Drive Trophy Club, Texas 76262 891 E. Keller Parkway Suite 100 Keller, Texas 76248\n\nMain Office 3205 E. Highway 114 Southlake, Texas 76092 Chartered 1985 \n\n## Directors\n\n## Main Office 3205 E. Highway 114\n\n## Branches 95 Trophy Club Drive\n\n## Senior Officers\n\nSouthlake Return on Average Equity 6.74 10.97 9 % Cities of Southlake, Keller and Roanoke Deposit Market Share" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.883581682109632, + "doc_id": "3178b36fae05c6838e8e5699ea832c1630d310a63ab6f37e2b9287efca2d5350", + "edit_distance": 0.5082266910420475, + "f1_score": 0.9307692307692308, + "meteor": 0.8147826451191568, + "precision": 0.937984496124031, + "pred_md": "I NDUSTRY TRENDS SPOTLIGHT\n\n## Uniting ATM services and retail locations worldwide\n\nRetailers are relying on automated teller machines (ATMs) to offer an expanding array of banking and e-commerce services and to open up new avenues of profit potential.\n\nver since the world's first ATM, a simple cash dispenser, was installed in 1967, consumers have depended on electronic banking services. Now, both retailers and financial institutions recognize the benefits of placing ATMs in retail locations, so E\n\nRetail ATM Locations Offsite ATMs Flourish in the United Kingdom\n\nRetail ATM Locations Offsite ATMs Flourish in the United Kingdom\n\nWestern Europe offers high potential for\n\noff-premise ATMs, and the UK is a leading market for Euronet. Euronet was the first independent ATM owner in the UK, and now retail locations represent two-thirds of our UK ATM portfolio.\n\nAccording to Diebold, a leading ATM manufacturer, the growing popularity of Westernstyle convenience stores is contributing to the demand for ATMs in the UK. Euronet has more than 350 ATMs located within the UK market, including both independent stores and multiple convenience store chains such as Spar, Alldays, T&S Stores, Jacksons, Costcutter and Star News.\n\nthat consumers can get to money when they need it most-at the point of purchase.\n\nToday, non-bank ATMs are installed virtually anywhere that commerce takes place: convenience stores, restaurants, hotels, post offices, transportation hubs, cinemas, casinos and so on. These retailers recognize the revenue opportunities and the benefits of locating ATMs on site-from instant cash for purchases to surcharge incomes. Up to 20% of the cash taken from our retail ATMs is spent at that those locations. In entertainment locations, we estimate almost 100% of ATM cash is spent on site.\n\nCurrently more than 865,000 machines are in operation today, 1 and industry analysts forecast 45% growth of ATM deployment worldwide by 2004. 2 Analysts also indicate that new ATMs soon could be deployed at more than two million existing consumer locations. 3\n\nAs the largest independent ATM owner in Europe, Euronet has negotiated some of the most coveted real estate locations for installing our ATMs. In Germany, Euronet is providing services to retailers such as W al-Mart, Metro AG and Lidl & Schwarz. In the UK, we operate ATMs in retail, convenience, entertainment and leisure locations. W e have also established retail locations for ATMs in France, Greece, Croatia, Hungary, the Czech Republic and Poland.\n\nIn addition, Euronet leverages expertise earned as an independent\n\nATM owner to offer ATM outsourcing and professional services to retailers, financial institutions looking for 'off-premise' ATM locations and other independent ATM owners. We are providing these services for prestigious entities such as Citibank in Greece and Dillard's stores and Saks Incorporated in the United States.\n\n1 Retail Banking Research Ltd. (2000), Retail Banking Research Ltd. (1999), 2 3 ATM Industry Association (2001)\n\n12", + "recall": 0.9236641221374046, + "true_md": "INDUSTRY TRENDS SPOTLIGHT\n\n## Uniting ATM services and retail locations worldwide\n\n## Retailers are relying on automated teller machines (ATMs) to offer an expanding array of banking and e-commerce services and to open up new avenues of profit potential.\n\nver since the world’s first ATM, a simple cash dispenser, was installed in 1967, consumers have depended on electronic banking services. Now, both retailers and financial institutions recognize the benefits of placing ATMs in retail locations, so E\n\nthat consumers can get to money when they need it most—at the point of purchase.\n\nToday, non-bank ATMs are installed virtually anywhere that commerce takes place: convenience stores, restaurants, hotels, post offices, trans- portation hubs, cinemas, casinos and so on. These retailers recognize the revenue opportunities and the benefits of locating ATMs on site—from instant cash for purchases to surcharge incomes. Up to 20% of the cash taken from our retail ATMs is spent at that those locations. In entertain- ment locations, we estimate almost 100% of ATM cash is spent on site.\n\nCurrently more than 865,000 machines are in operation today, 1 and industry analysts forecast 45% growth of ATM deployment worldwide by 2004. 2 Analysts also indicate that new ATMs soon could be deployed at more than two million existing consumer locations. 3\n\nAs the largest independent ATM owner in Europe, Euronet has negotiat- ed some of the most coveted real estate locations for installing our ATMs. In Germany, Euronet is providing services to retailers such as Wal-Mart, Metro AG and Lidl & Schwarz. In the UK, we operate ATMs in retail, convenience, entertainment and leisure locations. We have also estab- lished retail locations for ATMs in France, Greece, Croatia, Hungary, the Czech Republic and Poland. \n\nIn addition, Euronet leverages expertise earned as an independent \n\nATM owner to offer ATM outsourcing and professional services to retailers, financial institutions looking for “off-premise” ATM locations and other independent ATM owners. We are providing these services for prestigious entities such as Citibank in Greece and Dillard’s stores and Saks Incorporated in the United States.\n\nAccording to Diebold, a leading ATM manu- facturer, the growing popularity of Western- style convenience stores is contributing to the demand for ATMs in the UK. Euronet has more than 350 ATMs located within the UK market, including both independent stores and multiple convenience store chains such as Spar, Alldays, T&S Stores, Jacksons, Costcutter and Star News. \n\noff-premise ATMs, and the UK is a leading market for Euronet. Euronet was the first independent ATM owner in the UK, and now retail locations represent two-thirds of our UK ATM portfolio.\n\nWestern Europe offers high potential for \n\n## Offsite ATMs Flourish in the United Kingdom\n\n1 Retail Banking Research Ltd. (2000), 2 Retail Banking Research Ltd. (1999), 3 ATM Industry Association (2001)\n\n12" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "d7982190fd5aa0bd29f7b34f671388a16eb68989cdc3e0b0c2376d09eed6cada", + "edit_distance": 0.5082266910420475, + "f1_score": 0.9307692307692308, + "meteor": 0.8147826451191568, + "precision": 0.937984496124031, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.9236641221374046, + "true_md": "" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9433040310174218, + "doc_id": "052bbba5bcbf1093846d7284c03c659c83c95a1806572375b4775bebeaae85a1", + "edit_distance": 0.8165137614678899, + "f1_score": 0.9672447013487476, + "meteor": 0.8592232829084849, + "precision": 0.9766536964980544, + "pred_md": "Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations\n\npreviously laid off or terminated employees, management determined in 2002 that a portion of the remaining accrual was no longer necessary. This resulted in a restructuring credit of $10 million in 2002.\n\nProperty transactions, net consisted of the following:\n\nIn 2004, there were no material unusual property transactions. In 2003, we sold 315 acres of land in North Las Vegas, Nevada near Shadow Creek for approximately $55 million, resulting in the $37 million gain reflected above. Prior to 2003, we classified gains and losses on routine assets sales or disposals as a non-operating item at some resorts and as an operating item at other resorts. We believe the preferable presentation of these items is as an element of operating income. Prior period statements have not been reclassified as such transactions were not material in periods prior to 2003. Until 2003, demolition costs were typically capitalized as part of new construction. We began expensing demolition costs on major construction projects as incurred on January 1, 2003, and are accounting for this change in policy prospectively. Demolition costs were not material in periods prior to 2003. Demolition costs in 2004 and 2003 related primarily to preparation for the Bellagio standard room remodel, Bellagio expansion and new theatre at MGM Grand Las Vegas. Impairments of assets to be disposed of in 2003 consisted primarily of assets related to the former EFX! show and restaurants closed during 2003 at MGM Grand Las Vegas.\n\nIn 2002, T ropical Storm Isidore caused property damage at Beau Rivage totaling $8 million, including clean-up costs. The amount of the write-down for damaged assets was determined based on the net book value of the assets and engineering estimates. In connection with the revised development agreement in Detroit, we wrote off $5 million, which was the net book value of previously incurred development costs associated with the riverfront permanent casino site ($9 million), offset by previously accrued obligations no longer required under the revised development agreement ($4 million).\n\n## Non-operating Results\n\nThe following table summarizes information related to interest on our long-term debt:\n\nInterest cost was higher in 2004 as we had a higher average borrowing rate due to increases in variable interest rates and the issuance of significant fixed rate debt in the second half of 2004 in anticipation of the Mandalay merger.\n\nCapitalized interest increased in 2004 due to the ongoing Bellagio expansion and KÀ theatre projects. Capitalized interest in 2005 will include interest capitalized on Project CityCenter. Capitalized interest decreased in 2003 due to the suspension of development in Atlantic City in late 2002 and the mid-2003 cessation of interest capitalization on the Company's investment in Borgata, which opened on July 3, 2003.\n\nNon-operating items from unconsolidated affiliates, primarily our share of Borgata's interest expense and state income taxes, increased from $10 million in 2003 to\n\n25", + "recall": 0.9580152671755725, + "true_md": "25\n\nManagement’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations\n\npreviously laid off or terminated employees, management determined in 2002 that a portion of the remaining accrual was no longer necessary. This resulted in a restructuring credit of $10 million in 2002.\n\nProperty transactions, net consisted of the following:\n\nIn 2002, Tropical Storm Isidore caused property damage at Beau Rivage totaling $8 million, including clean-up costs. The amount of the write-down for damaged assets was determined based on the net book value of the assets and engineering estimates. In connection with the revised development agreement in Detroit, we wrote off $5 million, which was the net book value of previously incurred development costs associated with the riverfront permanent casino site ($9 million), offset by previously accrued obliga- tions no longer required under the revised development agreement ($4 million).\n\nThe following table summarizes information related to interest on our long-term debt:\n\n## Non-operating Results\n\nInterest cost was higher in 2004 as we had a higher average borrowing rate due to increases in variable interest rates and the issuance of significant fixed rate debt in the second half of 2004 in anticipation of the Mandalay merger.\n\nCapitalized interest increased in 2004 due to the ongoing Bellagio expansion and KÀ theatre projects. Capitalized interest in 2005 will include interest capitalized on Project CityCenter. Capitalized interest decreased in 2003 due to the suspension of development in Atlantic City in late 2002 and the mid-2003 cessation of interest cap- italization on the Company’s investment in Borgata, which opened on July 3, 2003.\n\nIn 2004, there were no material unusual property transactions. In 2003, we sold 315 acres of land in North Las Vegas, Nevada near Shadow Creek for approximately $55 million, resulting in the $37 million gain reflected above. Prior to 2003, we classified gains and losses on routine assets sales or disposals as a non-operating item at some resorts and as an operating item at other resorts. We believe the preferable pres- entation of these items is as an element of operating income. Prior period statements have not been reclassified as such transactions were not material in periods prior to 2003. Until 2003, demolition costs were typically capitalized as part of new construc- tion. We began expensing demolition costs on major construction projects as incurred on January 1, 2003, and are accounting for this change in policy prospectively. Demolition costs were not material in periods prior to 2003. Demolition costs in 2004 and 2003 related primarily to preparation for the Bellagio standard room remodel, Bellagio expansion and new theatre at MGM Grand Las Vegas. Impairments of assets to be disposed of in 2003 consisted primarily of assets related to the former EFX! show and restaurants closed during 2003 at MGM Grand Las Vegas.\n\nNon-operating items from unconsolidated affiliates, primarily our share of Borgata’s interest expense and state income taxes, increased from $10 million in 2003 to" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8186752274025375, + "doc_id": "179d3c8381023b9d59ce0f8c48fa81780c0a46f08e5475633a546fbd5f898a61", + "edit_distance": 0.17060367454068243, + "f1_score": 0.9483870967741935, + "meteor": 0.9608823246438566, + "precision": 0.9130434782608695, + "pred_md": "SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## Note 3. Securities and Investments (Continued)\n\nAs of December 31, other investments, comprised of equity securities, which do not have readily determinable fair values, consist of the following: ly determinable securities, which do not have readi fair values, consist of the following: As of December 31, other investments, comprised of equity\n\nThe Company's investment in CoBank increased $195 thousand in 2003 and $358 thousand in 2002, due to the ongoing patronage earned from the outstanding investment and loan balances the Company has with CoBank. For 2003 and 2002, the Company's allocated portions of losses, recorded on the investment in NTC were $118 thousand and $171 thousand, respectfully.\n\nIn 2003, the Company received distributions from its equity investments totaling $0.5 million in cash and invested $0.7 million in two equity investments, Dolphin Communications Parallel Fund, LP and Dolphin Communications Fund II, LP. These two investments recorded losses of approximately $0.4 million for the 2003 year. The Company recorded a loss from the Virginia Independent Telephone Alliance investment of $19 thousand, for 2003. The Company recorded a gain from the ValleyNet partnership of $84 thousand and received distributions of $84 thousand. Other equity investments lost an additional $0.4 million for 2003.\n\nThe Company was committed to invest an additional $1.8 million at December 31, 2003 in various equity method investees pursuant to capital calls from the fund managers. It is not practical to estimate the fair value of the other investments due to their limited market and restrictive nature of their transferability.\n\nThe Company's ownership interests in Virginia Independent Telephone Alliance and ValleyNet are approximately 22% and 20%, respectively. The Company purchases services from Virginia Independent Telephone Alliance and ValleyNet at rates comparable with other customers. The Company's ownership in NTC Communications is approximately 18%. Other equity method investees are investment limited partnerships which are approximately 2% owned each.\n\n25\n\n2003 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n■", + "recall": 0.9865771812080537, + "true_md": "SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## Note 3. Securities and Investments (Continued)\n\nThe Company’s investment in CoBank increased $195 thousand in 2003 and $358 thousand in 2002, due to the ongoing patronage earned from the outstanding investment and loan balances the Company has with CoBank. For 2003 and 2002, the Company’s allocated portions of losses, recorded on the investment in NTC were $118 thousand and $171 thousand, respectfully.\n\nIn 2003, the Company received distributions from its equity investments totaling $0.5 million in cash and invested $0.7 million in two equity investments, Dolphin Communications Parallel Fund, LP and Dolphin Communications Fund II, LP. These two investments recorded losses of approximately $0.4 million for the 2003 year. The Company recorded a loss from the Virginia Independent Telephone Alliance investment of $19 thousand, for 2003. The Company recorded a gain from the ValleyNet partnership of $84 thousand and received distributions of $84 thousand. Other equity investments lost an additional $0.4 million for 2003.\n\nThe Company was committed to invest an additional $1.8 million at December 31, 2003 in various equity method investees pursuant to capital calls from the fund managers. It is not practical to estimate the fair value of the other investments due to their limited market and restrictive nature of their transferability.\n\nThe Company’s ownership interests in Virginia Independent Telephone Alliance and ValleyNet are approximately 22% and 20%, respectively. The Company purchases services from Virginia Independent Telephone Alliance and ValleyNet at rates comparable with other customers. The Company’s ownership in NTC Communications is approximately 18%. Other equity method investees are investment limited partnerships which are approximately 2% owned each.\n\n25 ■ 2003 ANNUAL REPORT" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9044841804313298, + "doc_id": "ff29830944e70c60d80f750a4cc28b7cae3e75c4e1bec9be2810acc66b7ce8b8", + "edit_distance": 0.9188118811881189, + "f1_score": 0.9568788501026693, + "meteor": 0.6970495609971972, + "precision": 0.9588477366255144, + "pred_md": "## OUR VISION\n\nWe, the members of HON INDUSTRIES, are dedicated to creating long-term value for all of our stakeholders, to exceeding our customers' expectations, and to making our company a great place to work. We will always treat each other, as well as customers, suppliers, shareholders, and our communities, with fairness and respect.\n\nOur success depends upon business simplification, rapid continuous improvement, and innovation in everything we do, individual and collective integrity, and the relentless pursuit of the following long-standing beliefs:\n\n## WE WILL BE PROFITABLE.\n\nWe pursue mutually profitable relationships with customers and suppliers. Only when our company achieves an adequate profit can the other elements of this Vision be realized.\n\n## WE WILL CREATE LONG-TERM VALUE FOR SHAREHOLDERS.\n\nWe create long-term value for shareholders by earning financial returns significantly greater than our cost of capital and pursuing profitable growth opportunities. We will safeguard our shareholders' equity by maintaining a strong balance sheet to allow flexibility in responding to a continuously changing market and business environment.\n\n## WE WILL PURSUE PROFITABLE GROWTH.\n\nWe pursue profitable growth on a global basis in order to provide continued job opportunities for members and financial success for all stakeholders.\n\n## WE WILL BE A SUPPLIER OF QUALITY PRODUCTS AND SERVICES.\n\nWe provide reliable products and services of high quality and brand value to our end-users. Our products and services exceed our customers' expectations and enable our distributors and our company to make a fair profit.\n\n## WE WILL BE A GREAT PLACE TO WORK.\n\nWe pursue a participative environment and support a culture that encourages and recognizes excellence, active involvement, ongoing learning, and contributions of each member; that seeks out and values diversity; and that attracts and retains the most capable people who work safely, are motivated, and are devoted to making our company and our members successful.\n\n## WE WILL BE A RESPONSIBLE CORPORATE CITIZEN.\n\nWe conduct our business in a way that sustains the well-being of society, our environment, and the economy in which we live and work. We follow ethical and legal business practices. Our company supports our volunteer efforts and provides charitable contributions so that we can actively participate in the civic, cultural, educational, environmental, and governmental affairs of our society.\n\n## T O O U R S T A K E H O L D E R S :\n\nWhen our company is appreciated by its members, favored by its customers, supported by its suppliers, respected by the public, and admired by its shareholders, this Vision is fulfilled.\n\nHON INDUSTRIES Inc. (HNI) 414 East Third Street, P.O. Box 1109, Muscatine, IA 52761-0071\n\nwww.honi.com", + "recall": 0.9549180327868853, + "true_md": "## O U R V I S I O N\n\n## WE WILL BE PROFITABLE.\n\n## WE WILL CREATE LONG-TERM VALUE FOR SHAREHOLDERS.\n\n## WE WILL PURSUE PROFITABLE GROWTH.\n\n## WE WILL BE A SUPPLIER OF QUALITY PRODUCTS AND SERVICES.\n\n## WE WILL BE A GREAT PLACE TO WORK.\n\n## WE WILL BE A RESPONSIBLE CORPORATE CITIZEN.\n\n## TO OUR STAKEHOLDERS:\n\nHON INDUSTRIES Inc. (HNI) 414 East Third Street, P.O. Box 1109, Muscatine, IA 52761-0071 www.honi.com\n\nWhen our company is appreciated by its members, favored by its customers, supported by its suppliers, respected by the public, and admired by its shareholders, this Vision is fulfilled.\n\nWe conduct our business in a way that sustains the well-being of society, our environment, and the economy in which we live and work. We follow ethical and legal business practices. Our company supports our volunteer efforts and provides charitable contributions so that we can actively participate in the civic, cultural, educational, environmental, and governmental affairs of our society.\n\nWe pursue a participative environment and support a culture that encourages and recognizes excellence, active involvement, ongoing learning, and contributions of each member; that seeks out and values diversity; and that attracts and retains the most capable people who work safely, are motivated, and are devoted to making our company and our members successful.\n\nWe pursue profitable growth on a global basis in order to provide continued job opportunities for members and finan- cial success for all stakeholders.\n\nWe provide reliable products and services of high quality and brand value to our end-users. Our products and services exceed our customers’ expectations and enable our distributors and our company to make a fair profit.\n\nWe create long-term value for shareholders by earning financial returns significantly greater than our cost of capital and pursuing profitable growth opportunities. We will safeguard our shareholders’ equity by maintaining a strong balance sheet to allow flexibility in responding to a continuously changing market and business environment.\n\nWe pursue mutually profitable relationships with customers and suppliers. Only when our company achieves an ade- quate profit can the other elements of this Vision be realized.\n\nOur success depends upon business simplification, rapid continuous improvement, and innovation in every- thing we do, individual and collective integrity, and the relentless pursuit of the following long-standing beliefs:\n\nWe, the members of HON INDUSTRIES, are dedicated to creating long-term value for all of our stakeholders, to exceeding our customers’ expectations, and to making our company a great place to work. We will always treat each other, as well as customers, suppliers, shareholders, and our communities, with fairness and respect." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8887269174911512, + "doc_id": "d76812a8c1bd1188178cc97581b27a604a2067f05b7458c4b254e9212beefcec", + "edit_distance": 0.09221902017291066, + "f1_score": 0.9396325459317586, + "meteor": 0.9595055987631185, + "precision": 0.9226804123711341, + "pred_md": "## DI R E C TO R S ' R E P O R T\n\n## J A MES HENRY CARVER Executive Director - Appointed 29 June 1998\n\nCaptain James Carver is a Ships Master with over 30 years direct experience in the marine industry. He was Woodside Petroleum's first ships master, carrying out marine operations in the LNG development. Captain Carver was involved in exploration, construction and production of most oil and gas projects on the North West Shelf. He has in-depth knowledge of the industry, its needs and its future. Establishing\n\nthe company in 1982, Jim pursued a 'can do' attitude at sea and on shore. Under his direction the fleet grew from 1 to 15 vessels and the Base at Dampier secured for the present expansion and exiting future.\n\n## DERRICE-ANN DILLON\n\n## Executive Director - Corporate - Appointed 12 August 1998\n\nDerrice Dillon has considerable experience in management, administration and finance acquired over the last 22 years and has held a number of senior positions in Australia and overseas. From the early 1990's Derrice developed a strong knowledge of the oil and gas industry from her previous position as a director and head of administration of Slimdrill Pty Ltd. She was responsible for the design\n\nand implementation of all accounting and administration systems, including complex databases to track information for the construction and manufacture of the Slimdrill oil drilling rigs. She was also responsible for all legal matters and the production of promotional and marketing material for worldwide distribution.\n\nDerrice took a leading role in the listing of Mermaid Marine in 1999 and has since headed up accounting, systems and administration. As Chairman of the Board of Management she plays a senior role in Mermaid's operations.\n\nDerrice has also recently been appointed to the Seacare Authority by the Minister of Employment, Workplace Relations and Small Business as National Representative for the Offshore Maritime Industry.\n\n27", + "recall": 0.9572192513368984, + "true_md": "## DIRECTORS’ REPORT\n\nJAMES HENRY CARVER Executive Director - Appointed 29 June 1998\n\nCaptain James Carver is a Ships Master with over 30 years direct experience in the marine industry. He was Woodside Petroleum’s first ships master, carrying out marine operations in the LNG development. Captain Carver was involved in exploration, construction and production of most oil and gas projects on the North West Shelf. He has in-depth knowledge of the industry, its needs and its future. Establishing\n\nthe company in 1982, Jim pursued a “can do” attitude at sea and on shore. Under his direction the fleet grew from 1 to 15 vessels and the Base at Dampier secured for the present expansion and exiting future.\n\nDERRICE-ANN DILLON Executive Director - Corporate - Appointed 12 August 1998\n\nDerrice Dillon has considerable experience in management, administration and finance acquired over the last 22 years and has held a number of senior positions in Australia and overseas. From the early 1990’s Derrice developed a strong knowledge of the oil and gas industry from her previous position as a director and head of administration of Slimdrill Pty Ltd. She was responsible for the design\n\nand implementation of all accounting and administration systems, including complex databases to track information for the construction and manufacture of the Slimdrill oil drilling rigs. She was also responsible for all legal matters and the production of promotional and marketing material for worldwide distribution.\n\nDerrice took a leading role in the listing of Mermaid Marine in 1999 and has since headed up accounting, systems and administration. As Chairman of the Board of Management she plays a senior role in Mermaid’s operations.\n\nDerrice has also recently been appointed to the Seacare Authority by the Minister of Employment, Workplace Relations and Small Business as National Representative for the Offshore Maritime Industry.\n\n27" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6950777286498705, + "doc_id": "3ce2e770ead3dd490205691d40c460aec545662704a70cefa286b0174756d4dd", + "edit_distance": 0.24196277495769883, + "f1_score": 0.8800000000000001, + "meteor": 0.7746912163848331, + "precision": 0.9063670411985019, + "pred_md": "## HON INDUSTRIES 2003\n\n## THE HON COMPANY: PRACTICAL AND PROFESSIONAL\n\n## A CASE STUDY IN KNOWING OUR CUSTOMERS\n\nThe HON Company today is the country's largest provider of office furniture to small and medium-sized businesses. We're widely recognized for having the broadest line of durable, functional, practical, and professional office furniture - from storage files to seating, desks, panel systems, and tables - and we're admired for bringing it all in at a competitive price.\n\nAs tough as it is to become a leader, it's even tougher to hold on to the lead. To do it, we're working to know our customers better than ever, and to continually respond to their evolving needs. We've come to understand that our customers want the same reliable and affordable furniture they've always wanted from us, but with a twist: greater choice.\n\nOver the past three years we've raised the bar in terms of design and aesthetics. We create design that is beautiful without being intimidating or pretentious; design that provides complete workplace solutions with a value-added contemporary twist of color, or fabric, or function.\n\nFor example, our award-winning Perpetual Series of ® seating and desking products is made of wood, steel, and laminate, and offers a range of finishes. Other innovations include combined seating and file storage, combined organizer tray top and file storage, and mobile marker boards. In short, our\n\nbrand's aesthetic drive is way up, while our price and functionality remain absolutely consistent and true to expectation.\n\nOne customer, an office manager of a Chicago-based manufacturer, is exactly the kind of end-user we're looking for. In addition to her other responsibilities, she's in charge of ordering furniture for her 65-person firm - and she knows exactly what she wants. 'I don't care how many times you tell me your product is comfortable,' she says, 'I'm the hands-on type, so I have to touch it, sit on it, and see it myself. I looked for chairs that had great back support, good casters to roll around on, adjustable arms, backs, and seats, and generous width but didn't cost a fortune. I also wanted them to look good and wear well. I don't want to have to buy replacements any time soon. All in all, HON was the brand that fit the bill.'\n\nMaking our customers happy, productive, and satisfied is the focus The HON Company is all about. We're committed to staying on track, focusing on customer needs, and building a brand - and products - that will last for generations.\n\n26", + "recall": 0.8551236749116607, + "true_md": "H O N I N D U S T R I E S 2 0 0 3\n\n## T H E H O N C O M P A N Y : P R A C T I C A L A N D P R O F E S S I O N A L\n\nThe HON Company today is the country’s largest provider of office furniture to small and medium-sized businesses. We’re widely recognized for having the broadest line of durable, functional, practical, and professional office furniture — from storage files to seating, desks, panel systems, and tables — and we’re admired for bringing it all in at a competitive price.\n\nAs tough as it is to become a leader, it’s even tougher to hold on to the lead. To do it, we’re working to know our cus- tomers better than ever, and to continually respond to their evolving needs. We’ve come to understand that our customers want the same reliable and affordable furniture they’ve always wanted from us, but with a twist: greater choice. \n\nOver the past three years we’ve raised the bar in terms of design and aesthetics. We create design that is beautiful without being intimidating or pretentious; design that provides complete workplace solutions with a value-added contempo- rary twist of color, or fabric, or function. \n\nFor example, our award-winning Perpetual ® Series of seating and desking products is made of wood, steel, and lami- nate, and offers a range of finishes. Other innovations include combined seating and file storage, combined organizer tray top and file storage, and mobile marker boards. In short, our \n\nbrand’s aesthetic drive is way up, while our price and function- ality remain absolutely consistent and true to expectation.\n\nOne customer, an office manager of a Chicago-based manufacturer, is exactly the kind of end-user we’re looking for. In addition to her other responsibilities, she’s in charge of ordering furniture for her 65-person firm — and she knows exactly what she wants. “I don’t care how many times you tell me your product is comfortable,” she says, “I’m the hands-on type, so I have to touch it, sit on it, and see it myself. I looked for chairs that had great back support, good casters to roll around on, adjustable arms, backs, and seats, and generous width — but didn’t cost a fortune. I also wanted them to look good and wear well. I don’t want to have to buy replacements any time soon. All in all, HON was the brand that fit the bill.” \n\nMaking our customers happy, productive, and satisfied is the focus The HON Company is all about. We’re committed to staying on track, focusing on customer needs, and building a brand — and products — that will last for generations. \n\n## A C A S E S T U D Y I N K N O W I N G O U R C U S T O M E R S\n\n26" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "5d18804e2617123bc03aa55ffc0ec1e64a62a99ba4d9b11700104e446ff02855", + "edit_distance": 0.24196277495769883, + "f1_score": 0.8800000000000001, + "meteor": 0.7746912163848331, + "precision": 0.9063670411985019, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.8551236749116607, + "true_md": "" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "911afb8292a47052b5fe6d06bfaecd9a2fa14ff66b22ea2867271b9756a9b188", + "edit_distance": 0.24196277495769883, + "f1_score": 0.8800000000000001, + "meteor": 0.7746912163848331, + "precision": 0.9063670411985019, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.8551236749116607, + "true_md": "" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8737165286311218, + "doc_id": "570d514a40810df380366a63820bfb81144b8837a90279c11a9b53c565eb64e8", + "edit_distance": 0.13725490196078433, + "f1_score": 0.9427312775330396, + "meteor": 0.9318886410250125, + "precision": 0.981651376146789, + "pred_md": "## REMUNERATION OF DIRECTORS AND SPECIFIED EXECUTIVES 2004\n\n## REMUNERATION DETAILS OF NON-EXECUTIVE DIRECTORS\n\n## REMUNERATION DETAILS OF EXECUTIVE DIRECTOR AND SPECIFIED EXECUTIVES\n\n(1) Upon his retirement as a Director on 14 December 2004, Mr F J Conroy became entitled to a retirement payment of $161,447 in accordance with arrangements previously approved by shareholders. Only $15,927 of this amount has been disclosed as part of Mr Conroy's remuneration for the 2004 reporting period, as the balance of the payment has been provided for in previous reporting periods.\n\n(2) Non-monetary are non base remuneration benefits including the cost to the Company of cars (including applicable FBT).\n\n(3) Contributions for non-executive Directors are made in accordance with the Company's Superannuation Guarantee Charge obligations.\n\n(4) This shows provisions made in accordance with arrangements previously approved by shareholders, which amounts have been fully provided for.\n\n(5) (a) Includes the notional value of shares granted by the Company during the year pursuant to the Santos Employee Share Purchase Plan,\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\n39", + "recall": 0.9067796610169492, + "true_md": "## REMUNERATION DETAILS OF NON-EXECUTIVE DIRECTORS\n\n## REMUNERATION OF DIRECTORS AND SPECIFIED EXECUTIVES 2004\n\n## REMUNERATION DETAILS OF EXECUTIVE DIRECTOR AND SPECIFIED EXECUTIVES\n\n(1) Upon his retirement as a Director on 14 December 2004, Mr F J Conr oy became entitled to a retirement payment of $161,447 in accordance with arrangements previously approved by shareholders. Only $15,927 o f this amount has been disclosed as part of Mr Conroy’s remuneration for the 2004 reporting period, as the balance of the paymen has been provided for in previous reporting periods.\n\n(2) Non-monetary are non base remuneration benefits including th cost to the Company of cars (including applicable FBT).\n\n(3) Contributions for non-executive Directors are made in accordance with th e Company’s Superannuation Guarantee Charge obligations.\n\n(4) This shows provisions made in accordance with arrangements previously approved by shareholders, which amounts have been fully provided for.\n\n(5) (a) Includes the notional value of shares granted by the Company durin g the year pursuant to the Santos Employee Share Purchase Plan,\n\n39\n\nAnnual Report 2004" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9480899915762004, + "doc_id": "88b8e04044bbf23054ab0c89e4d347cb7366aa73518c89d49e275b4bc4f9817a", + "edit_distance": 0.03787878787878788, + "f1_score": 0.9885496183206107, + "meteor": 0.9684647020712621, + "precision": 0.9961538461538462, + "pred_md": "A SIGNIFICANT MILESTONE FOR PCS\n\n2003 was the 10th anniversary of Shentel's decision to enter the PCS business and the 8th year operating as a Sprint PCS Affiliate. This year was a significant milestone for Shentel's PCS business, as we posted our first profitable quarter and recorded net income for the year of $0.3 million versus a net loss of $5.4 million in 2002.\n\nOur Sprint PCS wireless customer base continues to grow, with year-end customers at 85,139 spread from Harrisonburg, Virginia to Harrisburg, Pennsylvania. Our customers are averaging approximately 700 minutes of usage per month and we have one of the lowest customer churn rates in the industry. To keep up with this growth and improve our service, we continued investing in additional network facilities. We added capacity to 26 existing tower sites and installed 16 new tower locations bringing our total sites to 253. Our plan is to add capacity and build additional sites in 2004 in order to meet expected growth.\n\nWe added a new type of customer in 2003. Through Sprint's relationship with its wholesale cutomers, more than 11,000 pre-paid customers were added to our network. These pre-paid accounts, usually for customers with no established credit, are a low cost method to increase customers. They can purchase phones and some minutes at various convenience, electronic or department stores in addition to one of our company locations. When needed, they can easily purchase additional minutes.\n\nCamera phones and e-mailing pictures were hot in 2003. We now offer phones that can take and send a 15 second video. Late in the year, we launched Spirit PCS ReadyLink sm , the Sprint walkie-talkie style service. It is hoped that these new services will be major sales drivers in 2004.\n\nIn 2003, we focused on improving our distribution channels. We expanded and relocated our stores in Harrisonburg and Winchester, Virginia to handle our growing customer base. At our Edinburg, Virginia store, we expanded both our hours and office space. We continue to increase our direct sales force to expand our base of business customers. To make it convenient for our potential customers, we also grew the number of local third-party sales partners.\n\nA much publicized development in our industry was the introduction of Wireless Local Number Portability (WLNP) on November 24 th , 2003. Starting on that day, customers in the 100 largest population centers in the United States were able to change wireless carriers while keeping their existing phone number. WLNP will be available in the entire country on May 24, 2004. To date, this change has had only a minor impact on Shentel's customer base.\n\nWe continue to work to make PCS a growth vehicle of revenue and net income for Shenandoah Telecommunications Company.\n\n9\n\n2003 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n■", + "recall": 0.9810606060606061, + "true_md": "A SIGNIFICANT MILESTONE FOR PCS\n\n2003 was the 10th anniversary of Shentel’s decision to enter the PCS business and the 8th year operating as a Sprint PCS Affiliate. This year was a significant milestone for Shentel’s PCS business, as we posted our first profitable quarter and recorded net income for the year of $0.3 million versus a net loss of $5.4 million in 2002. \n\nOur Sprint PCS wireless customer base continues to grow, with year-end customers at 85,139 spread from Harrisonburg, Virginia to Harrisburg, Pennsylvania. Our customers are averaging approximately 700 minutes of usage per month and we have one of the lowest customer churn rates in the industry. To keep up with this growth and improve our service, we continued investing in additional network facilities. We added capacity to 26 existing tower sites and installed 16 new tower locations bringing our total sites to 253. Our plan is to add capacity and build additional sites in 2004 in order to meet expected growth.\n\nWe added a new type of customer in 2003. Through Sprint’s relationship with its wholesale cutomers, more than 11,000 pre-paid customers were added to our network. These pre-paid accounts, usually for customers with no established credit, are a low cost method to increase customers. They can purchase phones and some minutes at various convenience, electronic or department stores in addition to one of our company locations. When needed, they can easily purchase additional minutes.\n\nCamera phones and e-mailing pictures were hot in 2003. We now offer phones that can take and send a 15 second video. Late in the year, we launched Spirit PCS ReadyLink$^{sm}$, the Sprint walkie-talkie style service. It is hoped that these new services will be major sales drivers in 2004.\n\nIn 2003, we focused on improving our distribution channels. We expanded and relocated our stores in Harrisonburg and Winchester, Virginia to handle our growing customer base. At our Edinburg, Virginia store, we expanded both our hours and office space. We continue to increase our direct sales force to expand our base of business customers. To make it convenient for our potential customers, we also grew the number of local third-party sales partners.\n\nA much publicized development in our industry was the introduction of Wireless Local Number Portability (WLNP) on November 24$^{th}$, 2003. Starting on that day, customers in the 100 largest population centers in the United States were able to change wireless carriers while keeping their existing phone number. WLNP will be available in the entire country on May 24, 2004. To date, this change has had only a minor impact on Shentel’s customer base.\n\nWe continue to work to make PCS a growth vehicle of revenue and net income for Shenandoah Telecommunications Company. \n\n9 ■ 2003 ANNUAL REPORT" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8943548151761269, + "doc_id": "4e2df0b0c6c3b057599418c7bb738cb60a5808b1c8a7a7410c9a2041040a0df5", + "edit_distance": 0.05714285714285714, + "f1_score": 0.9473684210526315, + "meteor": 0.9454534929919145, + "precision": 0.9642857142857143, + "pred_md": "## STATEMENTS OF FINANCIAL POSITION\n\nas at 31 December 2004\n\nThe statements of financial position are to be read in conjunction with the notes to the financial statements.\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\n51", + "recall": 0.9310344827586207, + "true_md": "## STATEMENTS OF FINANCIAL POSITION\n\nas at 31 December 2004\n\nThe statements of financial position are to be read in conjunction with the n otes to the financial statements.\n\nAnnual Report 2004 51" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9244495011646775, + "doc_id": "bc04efdc15e152c013b0eb81bf286a1873e76e0580653a50df216585dc4ec60e", + "edit_distance": 0.9666666666666667, + "f1_score": 0.9904761904761905, + "meteor": 0.8964694424153885, + "precision": 0.9904761904761905, + "pred_md": "## hassle-free holiday cooking\n\nCount on Hormel Foods to end holiday anxiety! Home cooks across America were calmer this year with the introduction of our new Jennie-O Turkey Store Oven Ready Turkey - a top-quality turkey that goes directly from freezer to oven for a flawless holiday celebration in about three and one-half hours. Even a novice cook can create a juicy, tender holiday turkey with confidence.\n\n## bringing better packaging to your pantry\n\nLight, convenient shape, easy to open - these are just a few reasons why our new Tetra Recart packaging is such a great solution for our Hormel and Stagg lines of chili. The cartons also make our delicious chili easier to ship, stack, store, and eat. We have received great acceptance with the nationwide distribution of Stagg chili.\n\n2004 Annual Report\n\n11", + "recall": 0.9904761904761905, + "true_md": "2004 Annual Report 11\n\n## bringing better packaging to your pantry\n\n## hassle-free holiday cooking\n\nLight, convenient shape, easy to open – these are just a few reasons why our new Tetra Recart packaging is such a great solution for our Hormel and Stagg lines of chili. The cartons also make our delicious chili easier to ship, stack, store, and eat. We have received great acceptance with the nationwide distribution of Stagg chili.\n\nCount on Hormel Foods to end holiday anxiety! Home cooks across America were calmer this year with the introduction of our new Jennie-O Turkey Store Oven Ready Turkey – a top-quality turkey that goes directly from freezer to oven for a flawless holiday celebration in about three and one-half hours. Even a novice cook can create a juicy, tender holiday turkey with confidence." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9859930766977737, + "doc_id": "3afd9e6e989bb27612c9fce0bbc4a3552620f4020e9fa00b4394b2660be337da", + "edit_distance": 0.011378002528445006, + "f1_score": 0.9932523616734142, + "meteor": 0.9936786664791561, + "precision": 0.9919137466307277, + "pred_md": "## LETTER TO THE SHAREHOLDERS\n\nWe believe our commitment to good customer service, and our expanding PCS coverage area, will provide an advantage as we strive to profitably add customers.\n\nThe telecommunications industry remains in a period of rapid change, both from technological and regulatory perspectives. While these changes present challenges to our existing operations, they present opportunities as well. As an organization we need to address the continuing shift of minutes and customers away from our traditional networks to newer wireless and Internet Protocol (IP)-based networks. Finding a way to profitably offer Voice Over IP services will be one of our immediate goals. We have rapidly deployed broadband data capabilities, now making DSL access available to over 80 percent of our telephone customers. While DSL is currently provided over our wireline network, we need to look to wireless technologies to deliver broadband services to more customers in a larger footprint. Our video service offerings are increasingly in competition with satellite based services, and thus need enhancements in order to be the preferred choice of our customers. As we work to identify new services to offer, a major objective will also be to find ways to do so profitably.\n\nBeing able to deliver good financial results over the long term requires the efforts of many talented and dedicated employees. In the pages of this annual report, you will get a glimpse of how many of our employees also make a contribution to their communities. Our Company strives to be a good corporate citizen, a goal which is enhanced by our employees' own effort to make a positive impact with their volunteer activities.\n\nWe have had a history of investing heavily in the capabilities of our networks, expanding and enhancing them in order to offer the best service possible. As our business has continued to grow and become more complex, we also need to invest in additional management resources. One of the recent steps in this direction was to hire Earle MacKenzie, who joined our organization as Executive Vice President in June. Earle brings 30 years of telecommunications experience to our Company, having worked for a range of organizations, including Contel, Arthur Andersen, startup ventures, and consulting firms. In his position, he will serve as Chief Financial Officer of the organization, freeing up Larry Paxton to focus on our information technology needs. In addition to the new management positions, we have underway a reorganization of our management structure to more closely align it with our functional areas.\n\nIn addition to the normal challenges of managing a growing business, our Board of Directors and members of management have spent considerable time and effort to ensure compliance with the numerous new rules and requirements resulting from the various corporate scandals over the past few years. While a valid argument can be made as to whether all the new requirements are necessary, or even if they would have avoided the scandals that were uncovered, we have approached these efforts as an additional opportunity to further improve what we hope is already a well governed organization. The cost of complying with the new rules will be significant, but the cost of not doing what is right would be worse, and certainly not acceptable to you as owners of the Company.\n\nAs announced last October, the Board of Directors declared a two-for-one stock split to shareholders of record as of January 30, 2004. The certificates for the new shares were distributed to shareholders February 20, 2004 and the stock began trading on a post-split basis February 23, 2004. With the split, shareholders received one new share for each existing share they held on the record date. While the split results in no change to a shareholder's ownership of the Company, it is hoped that the lower post-split trading price will make the shares more affordable to a larger number of potential investors.\n\nWhile we cannot predict how our stock's price will perform, we know that over the long term the price should be a function of our ability to steadily increase earnings for our shareholders. We have generally been successful at doing that in the past, and while our future is always uncertain, generating long-term earnings growth will remain our primary objective.\n\nFor the Board of Directors,\n\nChristopher E. French\n\nPresident\n\nSHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY\n\n2\n\n■", + "recall": 0.9945945945945946, + "true_md": "LETTER TO THE SHAREHOLDERS\n\nWe believe our commitment to good customer service, and our expanding PCS coverage area, will provide an advantage as we strive to profitably add customers.\n\nThe telecommunications industry remains in a period of rapid change, both from technological and regulatory perspectives. While these changes present challenges to our existing operations, they present opportunities as well. As an organization we need to address the continuing shift of minutes and customers away from our traditional networks to newer wireless and Internet Protocol (IP)-based networks. Finding a way to profitably offer Voice Over IP services will be one of our immediate goals. We have rapidly deployed broadband data capabilities, now making DSL access available to over 80 percent of our telephone customers. While DSL is currently provided over our wireline network, we need to look to wireless technologies to deliver broadband services to more customers in a larger footprint. Our video service offerings are increasingly in competition with satellite based services, and thus need enhancements in order to be the preferred choice of our customers. As we work to identify new services to offer, a major objective will also be to find ways to do so profitably.\n\nBeing able to deliver good financial results over the long term requires the efforts of many talented and dedicated employees. In the pages of this annual report, you will get a glimpse of how many of our employees also make a contribution to their communities. Our Company strives to be a good corporate citizen, a goal which is enhanced by our employees’ own effort to make a positive impact with their volunteer activities.\n\nWe have had a history of investing heavily in the capabilities of our networks, expanding and enhancing them in order to offer the best service possible. As our business has continued to grow and become more complex, we also need to invest in additional management resources. One of the recent steps in this direction was to hire Earle MacKenzie, who joined our organization as Executive Vice President in June. Earle brings 30 years of telecommunications experience to our Company, having worked for a range of organizations, including Contel, Arthur Andersen, startup ventures, and consulting firms. In his position, he will serve as Chief Financial Officer of the organization, freeing up Larry Paxton to focus on our information technology needs. In addition to the new management positions, we have underway a reorganization of our management structure to more closely align it with our functional areas.\n\nIn addition to the normal challenges of managing a growing business, our Board of Directors and members of management have spent considerable time and effort to ensure compliance with the numerous new rules and requirements resulting from the various corporate scandals over the past few years. While a valid argument can be made as to whether all the new requirements are necessary, or even if they would have avoided the scandals that were uncovered, we have approached these efforts as an additional opportunity to further improve what we hope is already a well governed organization. The cost of complying with the new rules will be significant, but the cost of not doing what is right would be worse, and certainly not acceptable to you as owners of the Company.\n\nAs announced last October, the Board of Directors declared a two-for-one stock split to shareholders of record as of January 30, 2004. The certificates for the new shares were distributed to shareholders February 20, 2004 and the stock began trading on a post-split basis February 23, 2004. With the split, shareholders received one new share for each existing share they held on the record date. While the split results in no change to a shareholder’s ownership of the Company, it is hoped that the lower post-split trading price will make the shares more affordable to a larger number of potential investors.\n\nWhile we cannot predict how our stock’s price will perform, we know that over the long term the price should be a function of our ability to steadily increase earnings for our shareholders. We have generally been successful at doing that in the past, and while our future is always uncertain, generating long-term earnings growth will remain our primary objective.\n\nFor the Board of Directors,\n\nChristopher E. French President\n\nSHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY ■ 2" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9510606296020997, + "doc_id": "5bf72a50db9982b48534819a95504707b5d37952db86a43bf93a3b27c9cba7c2", + "edit_distance": 0.036231884057971016, + "f1_score": 0.9838709677419355, + "meteor": 0.9726515993640885, + "precision": 0.9878542510121457, + "pred_md": "·\n\n·\n\n·\n\n## OPERATIONS REVIEW\n\nA slipway initially capable of receiving vessels up to 2,700 tonnes capacity will handle most of the 60 vessels currently working in the region, a considerable number, but one which will rise over coming years. First class engineering facilities have been planned and highly experienced management recruited. Alternative slipways offering comparable capacity are only to be found in Darwin or Fremantle, a sea journey of approximately 1000 miles from this operational region. Australia has emerged as a centre of excellence with respect to vessel repair work, the Dampier facility will both benefit from and protect that valuable reputation.\n\nRehabilitated land for buildings and storage will finally extend over 17 hectares. The major oilfield services company Halliburton, have been attracted to the base as a tenant and a $1.1m purpose built building is being constructed for their use. Negotiations are also proceeding with other groups who recognise the unique advantages of operating from this strategically positioned Base. Rental income and associated revenues such as plant and labour hire will contribute significantly to the overall economics of the facility.\n\nProtected moorings for cyclone shelter will be established inside the breakwater for long term lease to local tug operators. The demand arises from serious vessel and crew safety considerations. The Dampier Port Authority are reluctant to see the continued use of cyclone moorings in the Harbour, not only for safety reasons, but for environmental concerns as well. Oil spills are not acceptable under any circumstances and will be avoided whatever the cost. Tug owners share similar concerns, but in addition they need to remain in a position of readiness for crews and equipment to resume their important functions immediately following a cyclonic event. The number of specific purpose spread moorings, detailed on the adjacent plan will total 10 in the first phase of construction, a limit which will be assisted by an ability to remove vessels up to 100 tonnes from the water by wharf crane for tie down on cradles.\n\nConstruction of the Dampier Base commenced on the 9th October this year, with an expectation that all major elements of the project will be largely completed within 12 months.\n\nThe 'Clough Challenge' Barge Shallow Water Construction Support Barge in the East Spar Field\n\n9", + "recall": 0.9799196787148594, + "true_md": "## OPERATIONS REVIEW\n\n- A slipway initially capable of receiving vessels up to 2,700 tonnes capacity will handle most of the 60 vessels currently working in the region, a considerable number, but one which will rise over coming years. First class engineering facilities have been planned and highly experienced management recruited. Alternative slipways offering comparable capacity are only to be found in Darwin or Fremantle, a sea journey of approximately 1000 miles from this operational region. Australia has emerged as a centre of excellence with respect to vessel repair work, the Dampier facility will both benefit from and protect that valuable reputation. •\n\n- Rehabilitated land for buildings and storage will finally extend over 17 hectares. The major oilfield services company Halliburton, have been attracted to the base as a tenant and a $1.1m purpose built building is being constructed for their use. Negotiations are also proceeding with other groups who recognise the unique advantages of operating from this strategically positioned Base. Rental income and associated revenues such as plant and labour hire will contribute significantly to the overall economics of the facility. •\n\n- Protected moorings for cyclone shelter will be established inside the breakwater for long term lease to local tug operators. The demand arises from serious vessel and crew safety considerations. The Dampier Port Authority are reluctant to see the continued use of cyclone moorings in the Harbour, not only for safety reasons, but for environmental concerns as well. Oil spills are not acceptable under any circumstances and will be avoided whatever the cost. Tug owners share similar concerns, but in addition they need to remain in a position of readiness for crews and equipment to resume their important functions immediately following a cyclonic event. The number of specific purpose spread moorings, detailed on the adjacent plan will total 10 in the first phase of construction, a limit which will be assisted by an ability to remove vessels up to 100 tonnes from the water by wharf crane for tie down on cradles. •\n\nConstruction of the Dampier Base commenced on the 9th October this year, with an expectation that all major elements of the project will be largely completed within 12 months. \n\n## The “Clough Challenge” Barge - Shallow Water Construction Support Barge in the East Spar Field\n\n9" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9343828512016576, + "doc_id": "5c9fdcf232c3c32205f69dd827cb9372a8568a48db575a823f3764210d288905", + "edit_distance": 0.06962025316455696, + "f1_score": 0.9641434262948207, + "meteor": 0.9447717104552668, + "precision": 0.968, + "pred_md": "- a) As described in Note 2(b), effective April 1, 2003, Nissan Motor Manufacturing (UK) Ltd., a consolidated subsidiary, implemented early adoption of a new accounting standard for retirement benefits in the United Kingdom. The effect of this change was to decrease operating income in the 'Automobile' segment by ¥1,686 million for the year ended March 31, 2004 as compared with the corresponding amount which would have been recorded if the previous method had been followed.\n- b) As described in Note 2(c), effective April 1, 2003, the Company and its domestic consolidated subsidiaries changed their method of accounting for noncancelable lease transactions which transfer substantially all risks and rewards associated with the ownership of assets, from accounting for them as operating leases, to finance leases. The effect of this change was to decrease sales and operating expenses in the 'Automobile' segment by ¥237 million and ¥21,805 million respectively, to increase operating income, total assets, depreciation expense and capital expenditures in the 'Automobile' segment by ¥21,568 million ¥136,522 million, ¥46,986 million and ¥55,581 million, respectively, to decrease sales and operating expenses and capital expenditures in the 'Sales Financing' segment by ¥33,351 million, ¥33,374 million and ¥29,716 million, respectively, to increase operating income, total assets and depreciation expense in the 'Sales Financing' segment by ¥23 million, ¥662 million and ¥292 million, respectively, and to increase sales and operating expenses in 'Eliminations' by ¥15,645 million for the year ended March 31, 2004 as compared with the corresponding amounts which would have been recorded if the previous method had been followed.\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\n93\n\nFINANCIAL SECTION", + "recall": 0.9603174603174603, + "true_md": "- a) As described in Note 2(b), effective April 1, 2003, Nissan Motor Manufacturing (UK) Ltd., a consolidated subsidiary, implemented early adoption of a new accounting standard for retirement benefits in the United Kingdom. The effect of this change was to decrease operating income in the “Automobile” segment by ¥1,686 million for the year ended March 31, 2004 as compared with the corresponding amount which would have been recorded if the previous method had been followed.\n\n- b) As described in Note 2(c), effective April 1, 2003, the Company and its domestic consolidated subsidiaries changed their method of accounting for noncancelable lease transactions which transfer substantially all risks and rewards associated with the ownership of assets, from accounting for them as operating leases, to finance leases. The effect of this change was to decrease sales and operating expenses in the “Automobile” segment by ¥237 million and ¥21,805 million respectively, to increase operating income, total assets, depreciation expense and capital expenditures in the “Automobile” segment by ¥21,568 million ¥136,522 million, ¥46,986 million and ¥55,581 million, respectively, to decrease sales and operating expenses and capital expenditures in the “Sales Financing” segment by ¥33,351 million, ¥33,374 million and ¥29,716 million, respectively, to increase operating income, total assets and depreciation expense in the “Sales Financing” segment by ¥23 million, ¥662 million and ¥292 million, respectively, and to increase sales and operating expenses in “Eliminations” by ¥15,645 million for the year ended March 31, 2004 as compared with the corresponding amounts which would have been recorded if the previous method had been followed.\n\nFINANCIAL SECTION\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 93" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.805426034076807, + "doc_id": "555b5a8241e0080a904544f770841987c2bae146e8f06f532f6d57563f69746f", + "edit_distance": 0.7624831309041835, + "f1_score": 0.9085365853658537, + "meteor": 0.7698522813867277, + "precision": 0.9430379746835443, + "pred_md": "## HON INDUSTRIES Inc. and SUBSIDIARIES\n\n## PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT COSTS\n\nProduct development costs relating to the development of new products and processes, including significant improvements and refinements to existing products, are expensed as incurred. These costs include salaries, contractor fees, building costs, utilities, and administrative fees. The amounts charged against income were $25,791,000 in 2003, $25,849,000 in 2002, and $21,415,000 in 2001.\n\n## STOCK-BASED COMPENSATION\n\nThe Company accounts for its stock option plan using Accounting Principles Board Opinion No. 25, 'Accounting for Stock Issued to Employees,' whereby stock-based employee compensation is reflected in net income as all options granted under the plan had an exercise price equal to the market value of the underlying common stock on the date of grant. SFAS No. 123, 'Accounting for Stock-Based Compensation' issued subsequent to APB No. 25 and amended by SFAS No. 148, 'Accounting for Stock-Based Compensation - Transition and Disclosure' defines a fair value-based method of accounting for employees' stock options but allows companies to continue to measure compensation cost for employee stock options using the intrinsic value-based method described in APB No. 25.\n\nThe following table illustrates the effect on net income and earnings per share if the Company had applied the fair value recognition provisions of SFAS No. 123, 'Accounting for Stock-Based Compensation,' as amended by SFAS No. 148 'Accounting for StockBased Compensation - Transition and Disclosure,' to stock-based employee compensation.\n\nIncrease in expense in 2003 is due to accelerated vesting upon the retirement of plan participants.\n\n## I NCOME TAXES\n\nThe Company accounts for income taxes under SFAS No. 109, 'Accounting for Income Taxes.' This Statement uses an asset and lia-\n\nbility approach that requires the recognition of deferred tax assets and liabilities for the expected future tax consequences of events that have been recognized in the Company's financial statements or tax returns. Deferred income taxes are provided to reflect the differences between the tax bases of assets and liabilities and their reported amounts in the financial statements.\n\n## EARNINGS PER SHARE\n\nBasic earnings per share are based on the weighted-average number of common shares outstanding during the year. Shares potentially issuable under options and deferred restricted stock have been considered outstanding for purposes of the diluted earnings per share calculation.\n\n## USE OF ESTIMATES\n\nThe preparation of financial statements in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States requires management to make estimates and assumptions that affect the amounts reported in the financial statements and accompanying notes. The more significant areas requiring the use of management estimates relate to allowance for doubtful accounts, inventory reserves, marketing program accruals, warranty accruals, accruals for self-insured medical claims, workers' compensation, legal contingencies, general liability and auto insurance claims, and useful lives for depreciation and amortization. Actual results could differ from those estimates.\n\n## SELF-INSURANCE\n\nThe Company is partially self-insured for general and product liability, workers' compensation, and certain employee health benefits. The general, product, and workers' compensation liabilities are managed using a wholly owned insurance captive; the related liabilities are included in the accompanying consolidated financial statements. The Company's policy is to accrue amounts in accordance with the actuarially determined liabilities. The actuarial valuations are based on historical information along with certain assumptions about future events. Changes in assumptions for such matters as legal actions, medical costs, and changes in actual experience could cause these estimates to change in the near term.\n\n## RECENT ACCOUNTING PRONOUNCEMENTS\n\nIn December 2003, the Financial Accounting Standards Board issued Interpretation 46R (FIN 46R), a revision to Interpretation 46 (FIN 46), 'Consolidation of Variable Interest Entities.' Fin 46R clarifies some of the provisions of FIN 46 and exempts certain entities from its requirements.\n\n45", + "recall": 0.8764705882352941, + "true_md": "H O N I N D U S T R I E S I n c . a n d S U B S I D I A R I E S\n\n## PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT COSTS\n\n## EARNINGS PER SHARE\n\n## STOCK-BASED COMPENSATION\n\n## USE OF ESTIMATES\n\n## SELF-INSURANCE\n\n## RECENT ACCOUNTING PRONOUNCEMENTS\n\n## INCOME TAXES\n\nProduct development costs relating to the development of new prod- ucts and processes, including significant improvements and refinements to existing products, are expensed as incurred. These costs include sala- ries, contractor fees, building costs, utilities, and administrative fees. The amounts charged against income were $25,791,000 in 2003, $25,849,000 in 2002, and $21,415,000 in 2001. \n\nbility approach that requires the recognition of deferred tax assets and liabilities for the expected future tax consequences of events that have been recognized in the Company’s financial statements or tax returns. Deferred income taxes are provided to reflect the differences between the tax bases of assets and liabilities and their reported amounts in the financial statements.\n\nBasic earnings per share are based on the weighted-average number of common shares outstanding during the year. Shares potentially issu- able under options and deferred restricted stock have been considered outstanding for purposes of the diluted earnings per share calculation.\n\nThe Company accounts for its stock option plan using Accounting Principles Board Opinion No. 25, “Accounting for Stock Issued to Employees,” whereby stock-based employee compensation is reflected in net income as all options granted under the plan had an exercise price equal to the market value of the underlying common stock on the date of grant. SFAS No. 123, “Accounting for Stock-Based Compensation” issued subsequent to APB No. 25 and amended by SFAS No. 148, “Accounting for Stock-Based Compensation — Trans- ition and Disclosure” defines a fair value-based method of accounting for employees’ stock options but allows companies to continue to measure compensation cost for employee stock options using the intrinsic value-based method described in APB No. 25.\n\nThe following table illustrates the effect on net income and earnings per share if the Company had applied the fair value recognition provisions of SFAS No. 123, “Accounting for Stock-Based Compensation,” as amended by SFAS No. 148 “Accounting for Stock- Based Compensation — Transition and Disclosure,” to stock-based employee compensation.\n\nThe Company is partially self-insured for general and product liability, workers’ compensation, and certain employee health benefits. The gen- eral, product, and workers’ compensation liabilities are managed using a wholly owned insurance captive; the related liabilities are included in the accompanying consolidated financial statements. The Company’s policy is to accrue amounts in accordance with the actuarially deter- mined liabilities. The actuarial valuations are based on historical information along with certain assumptions about future events. Changes in assumptions for such matters as legal actions, medical costs, and changes in actual experience could cause these estimates to change in the near term.\n\nIn December 2003, the Financial Accounting Standards Board issued Interpretation 46R (FIN 46R), a revision to Interpretation 46 (FIN 46), “Consolidation of Variable Interest Entities.” Fin 46R clarifies some of the provisions of FIN 46 and exempts certain entities from its requirements. \n\nThe Company accounts for income taxes under SFAS No. 109, “Accounting for Income Taxes.” This Statement uses an asset and lia-\n\nIncrease in expense in 2003 is due to accelerated vesting upon the retirement of plan participants.\n\nThe preparation of financial statements in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States requires manage- ment to make estimates and assumptions that affect the amounts reported in the financial statements and accompanying notes. The more significant areas requiring the use of management estimates relate to allowance for doubtful accounts, inventory reserves, market- ing program accruals, warranty accruals, accruals for self-insured medical claims, workers’ compensation, legal contingencies, general liability and auto insurance claims, and useful lives for depreciation and amortization. Actual results could differ from those estimates.\n\n45" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.023837923615012822, + "doc_id": "65e17dd07e62972403ee09aea63093bb2a7b43c2b191f9daab193d6096465abf", + "edit_distance": 0.8823529411764706, + "f1_score": 0.5925925925925926, + "meteor": 0.2480593152866242, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Europe\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\n107\n\nCORPORATE DATA", + "recall": 0.42105263157894735, + "true_md": "## Europe\n\n## Australia\n\n## New Zealand\n\n## South Africa\n\n## Middle East\n\n## China\n\n## Taiwan\n\n## Thailand\n\nCORPORATE DATA\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 107" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.014995576820477717, + "doc_id": "007846eed0bab9627ec3cfc8520360d5a91bcee5883e0c98ef61b53b0e12d6cc", + "edit_distance": 0.8, + "f1_score": 0.37037037037037035, + "meteor": 0.21652173913043476, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "FORM 100025[2001]", + "recall": 0.22727272727272727, + "true_md": "The Har tford Financial Ser vices Group, Inc. Hartford Plaza, 690 Asylum A venue Hartford, Connecticut 06115\n\nFORM 100025[2001]" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9556787071194609, + "doc_id": "c97a3c2b65b172701849368796327702e05c772678e2deb81eb3294f28b1c27d", + "edit_distance": 0.30853658536585366, + "f1_score": 0.9754500818330604, + "meteor": 0.909116051988183, + "precision": 0.9834983498349835, + "pred_md": "34\n\n## Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations\n\n31, 2002 was $41 million. In November 2004, we announced the development of Project CityCenter in Las Vegas. In connection with this announcement and the start of design activities, we began capitalizing interest associated with this project, including capitalizing interest on land costs for the portion of the Project CityCenter site not currently being utilized in operations. Interest capitalized on this project for the year ended December 31, 2004 was $2 million.\n\n## Impairment of Long-lived Assets\n\nWe evaluate our property and equipment and other long-lived assets for impairment in accordance with Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 144, 'Accounting for the Impairment or Disposal of Long-Lived Assets.' For assets to be disposed of, we recognize the asset at the lower of carrying value or fair market value less costs of disposal, as estimated based on comparable asset sales, solicited offers, or a discounted cash flow model. For assets to be held and used, we review for impairment whenever indicators of impairment exist. We then compare the estimated future cash flows of the asset, on an undiscounted basis, to the carrying value of the asset. If the undiscounted cash flows exceed the carrying value, no impairment is indicated. If the undiscounted cash flows do not exceed the carrying value, then an impairment is recorded based on the fair value of the asset, typically measured using a discounted cash flow model. If an asset is still under development, future cash flows include remaining construction costs. All recognized impairment losses, whether for assets to be disposed of or assets to be held and used, are recorded as operating expenses.\n\nThere are several estimates, assumptions and decisions in measuring impairments of long-lived assets. First, management must determine the usage of the asset. To the extent management decides that an asset will be sold, it is more likely that an impairment may be recognized. Assets must be tested at the lowest level for which identifiable cash flows exist. This means that some assets must be grouped, and management has some discretion in the grouping of assets. Future cash flow estimates are, by their nature, subjective and actual results may differ materially from our estimates.\n\nOn a quarterly basis, we review our major long-lived assets to determine if events have occurred or circumstances exist that indicate a potential impairment. We estimate future cash flows using our internal budgets. When appropriate, we discount future cash flows using our weighted-average cost of capital, developed using a standard capital asset pricing model. Whenever an impairment loss is recorded, or a test for impairment is made, we discuss the facts and circumstances with the audit committee.\n\nSee 'Results of Operations' for discussion of write-downs and impairments recorded in 2002, 2003 and 2004. In October 2002, we announced the suspension of our development activities on our wholly-owned project on the Renaissance Pointe land in Atlantic City. In connection therewith, we reviewed the land for potential impairment, and determined no impairment was indicated. In December 2002, in connection with our agreement with Turnberry Associates whereby we are required to contribute land to the venture, we reviewed the land for potential impairment, and determined no impairment was indicated. In June 2003, we entered into an agreement to sell the Golden Nugget Subsidiaries. The fair value less costs to sell exceeds the carrying value, therefore no impairment was indicated. In February 2004, we entered into an agreement to sell MGM Grand Australia. The fair value less costs to sell exceeds the carrying value, therefore no impairment was indicated.\n\nOther than the above items, we are not aware of events or circumstances that would cause us to review any material long-lived assets for impairment.\n\n## Income taxes\n\nWe are subject to income taxes in the United States, and in several states and foreign jurisdictions in which we operate. We account for income taxes according to Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 109, 'Accounting for Income Taxes' ('SFAS 109'). SFAS 109 requires the recognition of deferred tax assets, net of applicable reserves, related to net operating loss carryforwards and certain temporary differences. The standard requires recognition of a future tax benefit to the extent that realization of such benefit is more likely than not. Otherwise, a valuation allowance is applied.", + "recall": 0.9675324675324676, + "true_md": "34\n\nManagement’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations\n\n31, 2002 was $41 million. In November 2004, we announced the development of Project CityCenter in Las Vegas. In connection with this announcement and the start of design activities, we began capitalizing interest associated with this project, including capitalizing interest on land costs for the portion of the Project CityCenter site not currently being utilized in operations. Interest capitalized on this project for the year ended December 31, 2004 was $2 million.\n\nWe evaluate our property and equipment and other long-lived assets for impairment in accordance with Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 144, “Accounting for the Impairment or Disposal of Long-Lived Assets.” For assets to be disposed of, we recognize the asset at the lower of carrying value or fair market value less costs of disposal, as estimated based on comparable asset sales, solicited offers, or a discounted cash flow model. For assets to be held and used, we review for impairment whenever indicators of impairment exist. We then compare the estimated future cash flows of the asset, on an undiscounted basis, to the carrying value of the asset. If the undiscounted cash flows exceed the carrying value, no impairment is indicated. If the undiscounted cash flows do not exceed the carrying value, then an impairment is recorded based on the fair value of the asset, typically measured using a discounted cash flow model. If an asset is still under development, future cash flows include remaining construction costs. All recognized impairment losses, whether for assets to be disposed of or assets to be held and used, are recorded as operating expenses.\n\nOn a quarterly basis, we review our major long-lived assets to determine if events have occurred or circumstances exist that indicate a potential impairment. We estimate future cash flows using our internal budgets. When appropriate, we discount future cash flows using our weighted-average cost of capital, developed using a standard capital asset pricing model. Whenever an impairment loss is recorded, or a test for impair- ment is made, we discuss the facts and circumstances with the audit committee. \n\nSee “Results of Operations” for discussion of write-downs and impairments recorded in 2002, 2003 and 2004. In October 2002, we announced the suspension of our develop- ment activities on our wholly-owned project on the Renaissance Pointe land in Atlantic City. In connection therewith, we reviewed the land for potential impairment, and determined no impairment was indicated. In December 2002, in connection with our agreement with Turnberry Associates whereby we are required to contribute land to the venture, we reviewed the land for potential impairment, and determined no impairment was indicated. In June 2003, we entered into an agreement to sell the Golden Nugget Subsidiaries. The fair value less costs to sell exceeds the carrying value, therefore no impairment was indicated. In February 2004, we entered into an agreement to sell MGM Grand Australia. The fair value less costs to sell exceeds the carrying value, therefore no impairment was indicated.\n\nOther than the above items, we are not aware of events or circumstances that would cause us to review any material long-lived assets for impairment.\n\nWe are subject to income taxes in the United States, and in several states and foreign jurisdictions in which we operate. We account for income taxes according to Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 109, “Accounting for Income Taxes” (“SFAS 109”). SFAS 109 requires the recognition of deferred tax assets, net of applicable reserves, related to net operating loss carryforwards and certain temporary differences. The standard requires recognition of a future tax benefit to the extent that realization of such benefit is more likely than not. Otherwise, a valuation allowance is applied.\n\nThere are several estimates, assumptions and decisions in measuring impairments of long-lived assets. First, management must determine the usage of the asset. To the extent management decides that an asset will be sold, it is more likely that an impairment may be recognized. Assets must be tested at the lowest level for which identifiable cash flows exist. This means that some assets must be grouped, and man- agement has some discretion in the grouping of assets. Future cash flow estimates are, by their nature, subjective and actual results may differ materially from our estimates.\n\n## Income taxes\n\n## Impairment of Long-lived Assets" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8625009317670597, + "doc_id": "6dc257f02a79baa76eb098b2fb64b0047c705c290acf798831adc4edbfff31f5", + "edit_distance": 0.09659090909090909, + "f1_score": 0.9189189189189189, + "meteor": 0.9062982560768323, + "precision": 0.949468085106383, + "pred_md": "76\n\n## NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\nfor the year ended 31 December 2004\n\n## 26. Specified Director and Specified Executive Disclosures (continued)\n\n## (c) Remuneration of Specified Directors and Specified Executives (continued)\n\n## Senior Executives\n\n## Remuneration Objectives and Principles\n\nThe objectives of the Company's remuneration policy are to attract, retain and motivate appropriately qualified and experienced executives capable of discharging their respective responsibilities to enable the Company to achieve its business strategy.\n\nThe principles underlying the remuneration policy are: to realistically reflect the responsibilities of executives and other employees; to be industry competitive and reasonable; that a significant portion of remuneration be at risk against individual and company performance and shareholder wealth creation; that performance, not failure, be rewarded so that the Company's best performers receive more; and to encourage executives to manage from the perspective of the shareholders by rewarding them for aligning Company and shareholder returns.\n\n## Remuneration Structure\n\nThe Company's remuneration structure for its non-award employees is based upon Target Total Remuneration ('TTR'), the components of which comprise:\n\n- · a fixed component called Fixed Annual Remuneration ('FAR'); and\n\ntwo variable components, called:\n\n- · the Short Term Incentive ('STI') and\n- · the Long Term Incentive ('LTI').\n\nFAR comprises salary, superannuation and benefits; is quantified by reference to role and experience; and is industry benchmarked.\n\nSTI is represented as a percentage of base remuneration which is 'at risk', consists of an annual cash bonus paid to reward performance based on a mix of: Company performance and individual performance measured against annual scorecards with target and stretch performance criteria determined in advance each year.\n\nLTI in relation to executive remuneration includes a long-term performance based component in the form of equity participation through the Santos Executive Share Option Plan ('SESOP') and the Santos Employee Share Purchase Plan ('SESPP'). Participation is determined by the Board, on recommendation of the Remuneration Committee, and only applies to executives who are in a position to affect shareholder returns.\n\nOptions and rights to shares issued under these Plans to senior executives are linked to the longer term performance of the Company and are only exercisable following the satisfaction of performance hurdles that are designed to maximise shareholder wealth.\n\nThe amount of the award, and correspondingly the proportion of remuneration at risk, varies between executives according to their respective levels of seniority and responsibility.\n\nThe rules of the SESPP and SESOP were both approved by shareholders in 1997 and again in 2000.\n\nHaving regard to contemporary best practice, the LTI program is designed to drive superior executive performance and to reward only superior Company performance, linked to an appropriate performance benchmark. The benchmark assesses actual Company performance in terms of long-term comparative growth of the Company and resulting shareholder value.\n\nCompany performance is measured over a three year period based on the Company's Total Shareholder Return ('TSR') relative to one or more comparator groups as determined by the Board at the commencement of the performance period including, without limitation, any combination of the ASX100, energy companies in ASX100, the ASX Energy Index and international exploration and production companies. If performance is below the 50th percentile, no award is made. A proportionate award is made for performance between the 50th to 75th percentile and the maximum award is made for performance at or above the 75th percentile.\n\nIn relation to the current financial year, awards may be taken only in the form of shares pursuant to SESPP or, at the election of an executive, options pursuant to SESOP, details of which are described in notes 18(c) and 18(d) of the financial statements. In future periods, awards may be taken in the form of rights over shares pursuant to SESPP or options granted under SESOP, at the election of executives.\n\nRights to shares and options are granted at no cost to the executives with the number of shares awarded being determined by dividing the amount of the award by the volume weighted average price of the Company's shares over the five business days up to and including the award date. The number of options awarded is of equivalent value calculated by an independent expert based on an acceptable valuation method.\n\nThe exercise price of the options is the volume weighted average price of the Company's shares over the five business days up to and including the award date.\n\nThe Board intends that LTI awards be made on an annual basis using a three year measurement period for the applicable performance hurdles. However, the Board reserves the right to suspend or modify the LTI program in light of circumstances appropriate to the Company from time to time.\n\nThe maximum number of shares that may be issued under all of the Company's executive and employee share and option plans cannot exceed the limit of 5% of the issued capital, as approved by shareholders at the 2000 Annual General Meeting.\n\nThe Specified Executives are entitled to a termination payment in the event of termination of their service agreement by the Company without cause. They are entitled to three months' notice, excepting for Mr P C Wasow who is entitled to six months' notice, or payment in lieu of that notice, plus three weeks for each year of continuous service, pro rata for part thereof, and capped at a maximum of 65 weeks of total fixed remuneration, less notional value of superannuation for that period.\n\nAnnual Report 2004", + "recall": 0.8902743142144638, + "true_md": "## NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STA TEMENTS\n\nfor the year ended 31 December 2004\n\n## 26. Specified Director and Specified Executive Disclosures (continued)\n\n## (c) Remuneration of Specified Directors and Specified Executives (continued)\n\n## Senior Executives\n\n## Remuneration Objectives and Principles\n\nThe objectives of the Company’s remuneration policy are to attract, retain and motivate appropriately qualified and experienced executives capable of discharging their respective responsibilities to enable th Company to achieve its business strategy.\n\nThe principles underlying the remuneration policy are: to realistically r eflect the responsibilities of executives and other employees; to be industry competitive and reasonable; that a significant portion of remuner ation be at risk against individual and company performance and shareholder wealth creation; that performance, not failure, be rewarded so that the Company’s best performers receive more; and to encourage executives to manage from the perspective of the shareholders by rewar ding them for aligning Company and shareholder returns.\n\nThe Company’s remuneration structure for its non-awar employees is based upon Target Total Remuneration (“TTR”), the components of which comprise:\n\n## Remuneration Structure\n\n- • a fixed component called Fixed Annual Remuneration (“FAR”); and two variable components, called:\n\n- • the Short Term Incentive (“STI”) and\n\n- • the Long Term Incentive (“LTI”).\n\nFAR comprises salary, superannuation and benefits; is quantified by refer ence to role and experience; and is industry benchmarked.\n\nSTI is represented as a percentage of base remuneration which is “at risk”, consists of an annual cash bonus paid to reward performance based on a mix of: Company performance and individual performance measured against annual scorecards with target and stretch performance criteria determined in advance each year.\n\nLTI in relation to executive remuneration includes a long-term performan ce based component in the form of equity participation through the Santos Executive Share Option Plan (“SESOP”) and the Santos Employee Share Purchase Plan (“SESPP”). Participation is determined by the Board, on recommendation of the Remuneration Committee, and only applies to ex ecutives who are in a position to affect shareholder returns.\n\nOptions and rights to shares issued under these Plans to senior executives are linked to the longer term performance of the Company and are only exercisable following the satisfaction of performance hurdles that ar e designed to maximise shareholder wealth.\n\nThe amount of the award, and correspondingly the proportion of remuner ation at risk, varies between executives according to their respective levels of seniority and responsibility.\n\nThe rules of the SESPP and SESOP were both approved by shareholders in 1997 and again in 2000.\n\nHaving regard to contemporary best practice, the LTI program is design ed to drive superior executive performance and to reward only superior Company performance, linked to an appropriate performance benchmark. The benchmark assesses actual Company performance in terms of long-term comparative growth of the Company and resulting shareholder value.\n\nCompany performance is measured over a three year period based on th e Company’s Total Shareholder Return (“TSR”) relative to one or more comparator groups as determined by the Board at the commencement of the performance period including, without limitation, any combination of the ASX100, energy companies in ASX100, the ASX Energy Index and in ternational exploration and production companies. If performance is below the 50th percentile, no award is made. A proportionate award is ma de for performance between the 50th to 75th percentile and the maximum award is made for performance at or above the 75th percentile.\n\nIn relation to the current financial year, awards may be taken only in th e form of shares pursuant to SESPP or, at the election of an executive, options pursuant to SESOP, details of which are described in notes 18(c) and 18(d) of the financial statements. In future periods, awards may be taken in the form of rights over shares pursuant to SESPP or options gran ted under SESOP, at the election of executives.\n\nRights to shares and options are granted at no cost to the executiveswith the number of shares awarded being determined by dividing the amount of the award by the volume weighted average price of the Company’s shar es over the five business days up to and including the award date. The number of options awarded is of equivalent value calculated by an indepen dent expert based on an acceptable valuation method.\n\nThe exercise price of the options is the volume weighted average price of the Company’s shares over the five business days up to and including the award date.\n\nThe Board intends that LTI awards be made on an annual basis using a thr ee year measurement period for the applicable performance hurdles. However, the Board reserves the right to suspend or modify the LTI progr am in light of circumstances appropriate to the Company from time to time.\n\nThe maximum number of shares that may be issued under all of th Company’s executive and employee share and option plans cannot exceed the limit of 5% of the issued capital, as approved by shareholders at th 2000 Annual General Meeting.\n\nThe Specified Executives are entitled to a termination payment in th event of termination of their service agreement by the Company without cause. They are entitled to three months’ notice, excepting for Mr P C W asow who is entitled to six months’ notice, or payment in lieu of that notice, plus three weeks for each year of continuous service, pro rata f or part thereof, and capped at a maximum of 65 weeks of total fixed remuneration, less notional value of superannuation for that period.\n\nAnnual Report 2004 76" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9184679453181422, + "doc_id": "0195a1243b4a6d1a2f717adb6d281b8c3068bb14363946aa23dbba9fd8f062c4", + "edit_distance": 0.7534456355283308, + "f1_score": 0.9632107023411371, + "meteor": 0.7831043880097244, + "precision": 0.972972972972973, + "pred_md": "Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations\n\nThe collectibility of unpaid markers is affected by a number of factors, including changes in currency exchange rates and economic conditions in the customers' home countries. Because individual customer account balances can be significant, the allowance and the provision can change significantly between periods, as information about a certain customer becomes known or as changes in a region's economy occur.\n\nThe following table shows key statistics related to our casino receivables:\n\nThe allowance for doubtful accounts as a percentage of casino accounts receivable has decreased since 2002, the result of improved collections leading to improved credit statistics, reflected in the lower median age of accounts and decreasing percentage of accounts outstanding over 180 days. Our reserve percentage is now consistent with the percentage before the September 11 attacks, and is representative of a more normalized collection experience and positive global economic conditions relative to the conditions in 2001 and 2002.\n\nAt December 31, 2004, a 100 basis-point change in the allowance for doubtful accounts as a percentage of casino accounts receivable would change net income by $1.1 million, or $0.01 per share.\n\n## Fixed asset capitalization and depreciation policies\n\nProperty and equipment are stated at cost. Maintenance and repairs that neither materially add to the value of the property nor appreciably prolong its life are charged to expense as incurred. Depreciation and amortization are provided on a\n\nstraight-line basis over the estimated useful lives of the assets. We account for construction projects in accordance with Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 67, 'Accounting for Costs and Initial Rental Operations of Real Estate Projects'. When we construct assets, we capitalize direct costs of the project, including fees paid to architects and contractors, property taxes, and certain costs of our design and construction subsidiary, MGM MIRAGE Design Group.\n\nWe must make estimates and assumptions when accounting for capital expenditures. Whether an expenditure is considered a maintenance expense or a capital asset is a matter of judgment. When constructing or purchasing assets, we must determine whether existing assets are being replaced or otherwise impaired, which also may be a matter of judgment. Our depreciation expense is highly dependent on the assumptions we make about our assets' estimated useful lives. We determine the estimated useful lives based on our experience with similar assets, engineering studies, and our estimate of the usage of the asset. Whenever events or circumstances occur which change the estimated useful life of an asset, we account for the change prospectively.\n\nIn accordance with Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 34, 'Capitalization of Interest Cost' ('SFAS 34'), interest cost associated with major development and construction projects is capitalized as part of the cost of the project. Interest is typically capitalized on amounts expended on the project using the weightedaverage cost of our outstanding borrowings, since we typically do not borrow funds directly related to a development project. Capitalization of interest starts when construction activities, as defined in SFAS 34, begin and ceases when construction is substantially complete or development activity is suspended for more than a brief period.\n\nWhether we capitalize interest on a project depends in part on management's actions. In October 2002, we announced the suspension of development activities on our wholly-owned project on the Renaissance Pointe land in Atlantic City. In connection with that announcement, we stopped capitalizing interest associated with the project. Interest capitalized on this project for the year ended December\n\n33", + "recall": 0.9536423841059603, + "true_md": "33\n\nManagement’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations\n\nstraight-line basis over the estimated useful lives of the assets. We account for construction projects in accordance with Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 67, “Accounting for Costs and Initial Rental Operations of Real Estate Projects”. When we construct assets, we capitalize direct costs of the project, including fees paid to architects and contractors, property taxes, and certain costs of our design and construction subsidiary, MGM MIRAGE Design Group.\n\nThe collectibility of unpaid markers is affected by a number of factors, including changes in currency exchange rates and economic conditions in the customers’ home countries. Because individual customer account balances can be significant, the allowance and the provision can change significantly between periods, as information about a certain customer becomes known or as changes in a region’s economy occur.\n\nThe following table shows key statistics related to our casino receivables:\n\nWe must make estimates and assumptions when accounting for capital expenditures. Whether an expenditure is considered a maintenance expense or a capital asset is a matter of judgment. When constructing or purchasing assets, we must determine whether existing assets are being replaced or otherwise impaired, which also may be a matter of judgment. Our depreciation expense is highly dependent on the assump- tions we make about our assets’ estimated useful lives. We determine the estimated useful lives based on our experience with similar assets, engineering studies, and our estimate of the usage of the asset. Whenever events or circumstances occur which change the estimated useful life of an asset, we account for the change prospectively. \n\nIn accordance with Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 34, “Capitalization of Interest Cost” (“SFAS 34”), interest cost associated with major development and construction projects is capitalized as part of the cost of the project. Interest is typically capitalized on amounts expended on the project using the weighted- average cost of our outstanding borrowings, since we typically do not borrow funds directly related to a development project. Capitalization of interest starts when construc- tion activities, as defined in SFAS 34, begin and ceases when construction is substan- tially complete or development activity is suspended for more than a brief period.\n\nWhether we capitalize interest on a project depends in part on management’s actions. In October 2002, we announced the suspension of development activities on our wholly-owned project on the Renaissance Pointe land in Atlantic City. In connection with that announcement, we stopped capitalizing interest associated with the project. Interest capitalized on this project for the year ended December\n\nProperty and equipment are stated at cost. Maintenance and repairs that neither materially add to the value of the property nor appreciably prolong its life are charged to expense as incurred. Depreciation and amortization are provided on a\n\nAt December 31, 2004, a 100 basis-point change in the allowance for doubtful accounts as a percentage of casino accounts receivable would change net income by $1.1 million, or $0.01 per share.\n\nThe allowance for doubtful accounts as a percentage of casino accounts receivable has decreased since 2002, the result of improved collections leading to improved credit statistics, reflected in the lower median age of accounts and decreasing percentage of accounts outstanding over 180 days. Our reserve percentage is now consistent with the percentage before the September 11 attacks, and is representa- tive of a more normalized collection experience and positive global economic conditions relative to the conditions in 2001 and 2002.\n\n## Fixed asset capitalization and depreciation policies" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.951468480349338, + "doc_id": "ef4bacf8ccbae63c8e56a2c5089f58f107f07ee47f269ad06d9436cdba95edc8", + "edit_distance": 0.8385167464114832, + "f1_score": 0.9894179894179894, + "meteor": 0.7820139398167631, + "precision": 0.9920424403183024, + "pred_md": "6\n\nManaging Director's Review continued\n\nWestern Australian coast, in which Santos has a one-third interest, is the first offshore oil field development which we operate and is also the first of five more offshore production projects due to commence over the next 18 months, three of which are operated by Santos.\n\nMutineer-Exeter appraisal delivered a lower than expected outcome in terms of reserves. Conversely, at Bayu-Undan, where the LNG project continues to make steady progress towards start-up in the first half of 2006, Santos' fortunes went the other way, as development drilling upgraded Proven plus Probable (2P) gas and liquids reserves by 14 million boe.\n\nThe good news for the MutineerExeter project is that the field has been developed under budget and production is starting three months ahead of schedule.\n\nThe achievements in developing Mutineer-Exeter are world class and provide further evidence of the ability of Australian companies to more than hold their own on the global discovery and development stage.\n\nAs projects like Minerva, Mutineer-Exeter and Bayu-Undan emerge from our development pipeline, other projects enter and continue to advance.\n\nWith contracts in place to supply gas to customers in Western Australia, we expect a mid-2005 start-up for the John Brookes project in the offshore Carnarvon Basin. Meanwhile, the Casino gas field off the Victorian coast is on schedule to produce first gas in 2006, just four years after its discovery.\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\nSeveral projects in Indonesia Maleo (gas) and Oyong (oil and gas) - have entered the development pipeline at a design phase. These projects are now joined by Jeruk which, subject to further appraisal drilling and commercial issues, has early production potential.\n\nOur Sole, Kipper and Golden Beach gas assets in the Gippsland Basin, where we recently completed acquisitions to increase our interests and become operator of the strategic Orbost processing plant, are also at the early development stage.\n\nIn all, Santos has an impressive and exciting development outlook over the next few years.\n\n## PERFORMANCE AGAINST TARGETS\n\nIn last year's Annual Report, I foreshadowed a series of performance measures, together with target levels for the 2004 to 2006 period. At the time, I highlighted that it was unlikely that all of the targets would be achieved in any one year, and needed to be measured over the long run.\n\nOur performance over 2004 is summarised in the table below, and while not all of the targets were achieved, we are confident\n\nthat we are on track to meet them within the timeframe set out.\n\nProduction was down, as expected, but was further reduced by the effects of the Moomba incident. However, as previously stated, we expect this trend to be reversed in 2005.\n\nReserve replacement has been strong over the past three years, averaging about 130%. While this is below our long-term goal of greater than 140%, it does not include the recent Jeruk discovery and is a solid result against the industry average of less than 100%.\n\nSimilarly, our reserve replacement cost for 2004 is above our target due mainly to the high level of expenditure on major development projects during the year. On a three-year average basis, which is more representative of the nature of the business, the result is a reserve replacement cost of US$7.19 - much more in line with our target.\n\nThe netback achieved in 2004 was an improvement over 2003 and was on target due largely to higher average product prices, but also reflected the results of the continuous improvement program.\n\nAll our financial measures representing shareholder return were favourable, being close to targets which, given the difficult start to the year, was an exceptional result.\n\n## CONTINUOUS IMPROVEMENT IMPORTANT\n\nOur primary goal is to produce higher returns for our shareholders and, in our drive to do so, it is important to identify ways in which we might achieve more efficient and cost-effective outcomes.\n\nAs a result, an important initiative has been the introduction of a continuous improvement program. The organisational restructure implemented during 2004 yielded dividends with savings recorded in the past year of $38 million for program outlays of $22 million.\n\nThese programs will continue to contribute at even higher levels going forward for even less cost.\n\n## A PART OF OUR COMMUNITY\n\nSantos engages with many stakeholders and we believe it is important to have rewarding relationships with the communities to which we belong.\n\nWe sponsor a wide range of educational, cultural and community events and programs.\n\n## PERFORMANCE AGAINST TARGETS", + "recall": 0.9868073878627969, + "true_md": "Managing Director’s Review continued\n\nWestern Australian coast, in which Santos has a one-third interest, is the first offshore oil field development which we operate and is also the first of five more offshore production projects due to commence over the next 18 months, three of which are operated by Santos. \n\nSeveral projects in Indonesia – Maleo (gas) and Oyong (oil and gas) – have entered the development pipeline at a design phase. These projects are now joined by Jeruk which, subject to further appraisal drilling and commercial issues, has early production potential. \n\nthat we are on track to meet them within the timeframe set out.\n\nAll our financial measures representing shareholder return were favourable, being close to targets which, given the difficult start to the year, was an exceptional result.\n\nProduction was down, as expected, but was further reduced by the effects of the Moomba incident. However, as previously stated, we expect this trend to be reversed in 2005.\n\n## CONTINUOUS IMPROVEMENT IMPORTANT\n\nReserve replacement has been strong over the past three years, averaging about 130%. While this is below our long-term goal of greater than 140%, it does not include the recent Jeruk discovery and is a solid result against the industry average of less than 100%.\n\nOur primary goal is to produce higher returns for our shareholders and, in our drive to do so, it is important to identify ways in which we might achieve more efficient and cost-effective outcomes. \n\nOur Sole, Kipper and Golden Beach gas assets in the Gippsland Basin, where we recently completed acquisitions to increase our interests and become operator of the strategic Orbost processing plant, are also at the early development stage.\n\nMutineer-Exeter appraisal delivered a lower than expected outcome in terms of reserves. Conversely, at Bayu-Undan, where the LNG project continues to make steady progress towards start-up in the first half of 2006, Santos' fortunes went the other way, as development drilling upgraded Proven plus Probable (2P) gas and liquids reserves by 14 million boe. \n\nIn all, Santos has an impressive and exciting development outlook over the next few years.\n\nSimilarly, our reserve replacement cost for 2004 is above our target due mainly to the high level of expenditure on major development projects during the year. On a three-year average basis, which is more representative of the nature of the business, the result is a reserve replacement cost of US$7.19 – much more in line with our target.\n\nIn last year’s Annual Report, I foreshadowed a series of performance measures, together with target levels for the 2004 to 2006 period. At the time, I highlighted that it was unlikely that all of the targets would be achieved in any one year, and needed to be measured over the long run.\n\nThe good news for the Mutineer- Exeter project is that the field has been developed under budget and production is starting three months ahead of schedule. \n\n## PERFORMANCE AGAINST TARGETS\n\nAs a result, an important initiative has been the introduction of a continuous improvement program. The organisational restructure implemented during 2004 yielded dividends with savings recorded in the past year of $38 million for program outlays of $22 million.\n\nThese programs will continue to contribute at even higher levels going forward for even less cost. \n\nA PART OF OUR COMMUNITY Santos engages with many stakeholders and we believe it is important to have rewarding relationships with the communities to which we belong. \n\nThe achievements in developing Mutineer-Exeter are world class and provide further evidence of the ability of Australian companies to more than hold their own on the global discovery and development stage.\n\nOur performance over 2004 is summarised in the table below, and while not all of the targets were achieved, we are confident\n\nThe netback achieved in 2004 was an improvement over 2003 and was on target due largely to higher average product prices, but also reflected the results of the continuous improvement program.\n\nWe sponsor a wide range of educational, cultural and community events and programs.\n\nAs projects like Minerva, Mutineer-Exeter and Bayu-Undan emerge from our development pipeline, other projects enter and continue to advance. \n\nWith contracts in place to supply gas to customers in Western Australia, we expect a mid-2005 start-up for the John Brookes project in the offshore Carnarvon Basin. Meanwhile, the Casino gas field off the Victorian coast is on schedule to produce first gas in 2006, just four years after its discovery.\n\n## PERFORMANCE AGAINST TARGETS\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\n6" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.014411549809881293, + "doc_id": "c9755e6972e3150a1c02565ec8070bfc26503d0fe09d056e418d6dcd6ea43cd9", + "edit_distance": 0.8009478672985783, + "f1_score": 0.13095238095238096, + "meteor": 0.12600776537654282, + "precision": 0.07272727272727272, + "pred_md": "È\n\n-glyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman> glyph<c=31,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman> glyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>‡-glyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>\n\n## \"ÕÀÊ{n]äääÊܜÀ'܈'iÊi“«œÞiiÃÊ>ÀiÊ'i'ˆV>Ìi'Ê ÌœÊ'iˆÛiÀˆ˜}ÊÀiÃՏÌÃ]Ê«ÀœÛˆ'ˆ˜}ÊVÕÃ̜“iÀÊ Ê >̈Ãv>V̈œ˜Ê>˜'ʈ˜VÀi>Ș}ÊÅ>Ài…œ'iÀÊÛ>Õi°Ê Ã\n\n/ˆ‹ÈÑçi>Å]ы›ÑÅiÈ° ›ÈiÑÓ Ñ–>őiÓћii'È]ÑåiÑÓÅ>›ÈwiÅÅi'і>›Þw>VÓÞŋ›€Ñ V>°>V‹ÓçÑwÅ –Ñ ÅӈÑglyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman> –iŋV>Ñ>›'Ñ7iÈÓiśÑglyph<c=13,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman>ÞÅ °iÑÓ Ñ’ åiŊV ÈÓÑ Åi€‹ ›Èы›Ñglyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman> ȋ>]Ñglyph<c=13,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman>>ÈÓiÅ ›Ñglyph<c=13,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman>Þ Å °iÑ> ›'Ñglyph<c=29,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman>>Ó ‹ ›Ñglyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman> –iÅ ‹V>µÑglyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman> ÈÑ>ÑÅiÈÞ ’Ó ]Ñ åiÑV –°’iÓi'ÑӈiÑÈiV ›'Ñ°ˆ>ÈiÑ wÑӈ‹ÈÑ °Ó‹–‹ë>Ӌ ›Ñ°’>›Ñ>›'Ñ勒’Ñ V –°’iÓiÑӈiÑӈ‹Å'Ñ°ˆ>ÈiÑ wÑӈiÑ°’>›Ñ›iæÓÑçi>Å]Ñ刋VˆÑ勒’ÑÅiÈޒÓÑ ‹›Ñ>ђi>›iÅі Åiћ‹–Ñ L’iÑ Å€>›‹ë>Ӌ ›Ñӈ>ÓÑ wwiÅÈш‹€ˆiÅÑÞӋ’‹ë>Ӌ ›Ñ wÑiæ‹ÈӋ›€ÑV>°>V‹ÓçµÑglyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman>''‹Ó‹ ›>’’ç]ÑåiÑiæiVÞÓi'Ñåi’’Ñ ›ÑӈiÑ'iÓ>‹’ÈÑ ›iViÈÈ>ÅçÑÓ ÑV –°’iÓiÑӈiÑ*i›ÓiæŠ-Vˆåi‹ëiÅÑglyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman>‹ÅVދÓÈÑglyph<c=29,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman>‹–‹Ói'ÑÓÅ>›ÈÑ Š >VӋ ›]Ñi›>L’‹›€ÑÞÈÑÓ ÑV’ ÈiÑӈiÑ'i>’Ñi>ŒçÑ>›'ш‹ÓÑӈiрŠޛ'ÑÅޛ›‹›€Ñ å‹ÓˆÑÅiÈ°iVÓÑÓ Ñӈ‹Èы–° ÅÓ>›ÓÑÈÓÅ>Ói€‹VÑ>VºÞ‹È‹Ó‹ ›µÑ7iÑ>ÅiÑLi€‹›Š ›‹›€Ñåˆ>ÓÑ勒’ÑLiÑ>іޒӋŠ°ˆ>Èiі äiы›Ó Ñglyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman>ˆ‹›>Ñ>›'Ñ ÓˆiÅÑ°>ÅÓÈÑ wÑglyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman> ȋ>µÑ*i›ÓiæŠ-Vˆåi‹ëiÅ]Ñ>Ñglyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman>ˆ‹›>ŠÑ>›'Ñ-‹›€>° ÅiŠL>Èi'Ñw>LŋV>Š Ó ÅÑ wѰŋ›Ói'ÑV‹ÅVދÓÑL >Å'ÈѲ*glyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman>glyph<c=9,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman>ȳ]Ñw ÞÅӈiÅÑÈ ’‹'‹w‹iÈÑ->›–‹›>Š -glyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman> glyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman> ÂÈÑ>'ä>›Vi'Ñ*glyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman>glyph<c=9,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman>Ñ ÓiVˆ › ’ € çÑ>›'ÑÈiÅ ä‹ViÈÑ wwiŋ›€]Ñiæ°>›'‹›€Ñ Ñ ÞÈÓ –iÅÑi›'і>őiÓÈÑ>›'Ñ°Å €Å>–ÈÑÓ '>çÑ>›'ы›Ó ÑӈiÑwÞÓÞÅiµÑ V\n\n## glyph<c=13,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium> 8*glyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium> glyph<c=12,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium> glyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium> glyph<c=20,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium>Ê glyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium> 1 - /\" glyph<c=31,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium> glyph<c=13,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium> ,Ê , glyph<c=13,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium> glyph<c=29,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium> glyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium> /glyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium> \" - glyph<c=21,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium> glyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium> *-Ê\n\nglyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman> ÓÑӈiÑÈ>–iÑӋ–iÑåiÑiæ°>›'i'Ñ ÞÅÑ °iÅ>Ӌ ›Èы›Ñ’ åŠV ÈÓÑÅi€‹ ›È]Ñ åiÑ>’È ы›äiÈÓi'ы›Ñ ÞÅр’ L>’ÑÓiVˆ› ’ €çÑ>›'і>›Þw>VÓÞŋ›€Ñ ’i>'iÅȈ‹°µÑ7iÑ>ÅiÑV’i>ÅÑ>L ÞÓÑ ÞÅр >’Èы›Ñӈ‹ÈÑ>Åi>ÑrÑӈ>ÓыÈ]Ñ Ó ÑV ›Ó‹›Þ>’’çÑw VÞÈÑ ›Ñ'iäi’ °‹›€ÑLiÈӊ‹›ŠV’>ÈÈÑÓiVˆ› ’ €‹iÈ]Ñ Ñ °Å ViÈÈiÈÑ>›'Ñ°iÅw Ŗ>›ViÑÓ>‹’ Åi'ÑÓ ÑӈiÑޛ‹ºÞiÑÅiºÞ‹Åi–i›ÓÈÑ wÑi>VˆÑVÞÈÓ –iŵ\n\n/ '>çÂÈÑ\"glyph<c=13,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman> glyph<c=31,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman>Ñ –> őiÓÑi›ä ‹Å ›–i›ÓÑÅiºÞ‹ÅiÈÑӈ>ÓÑåiÑÅi'ÞViÑ Ñ °Å 'ÞVÓÑVçV’iÑӋ–iÑ>›'ы›VÅi>ÈiÑ°Å w‹Ó>L‹’‹ÓçµÑglyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman>ÈÑ>ÑÅiÈޒÓ]Ñ\"glyph<c=13,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman>glyph<c=31,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman>ÈÑ >ÅiÑ°>Åӛiŋ›€Ñå‹ÓˆÑglyph<c=13,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman>glyph<c=31,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman>-Ñ°Å ä ‹'iÅÈђ‹‘iÑ->›–‹›>Š-glyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman>glyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman>ÑÓ Ñ'iȋ€›]Ñ 'i’‹äiÅ]ÑȈ‹°Ñ>›'ÑÅi°>‹ÅÑӈi‹ÅÑ°Å 'ÞVÓȵÑglyph<c=9,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman>iV>ÞÈiÑ wÑ ÞÅÑLދ’'ŠÓ Š Å'iÅѲglyph<c=9,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman>/\"³Ñ>›'ÑV ›w‹€ÞÅiŠÓ Š Å'iÅѲglyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman>/\"³Ñ’i>'iÅȈ‹°Ñ‹›ÑӈiÑ glyph<c=13,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman> glyph<c=31,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman> -Ñ ‹ ›'Þ ÈÓ Å ç ]Ñ>'ä>›Vi'ÑÓiVˆ› ’ €çђi>'iÅȈ‹°Ñ>›'ÑÈç›VˆÅ ›‹ëi'Ñ –>›Þw>VÓÞŋ›€]Ñåiш>äiÑÈÞVViÈÈwޒ’çÑV>°‹Ó>’‹ëi'Ñ ›Ñӈ‹Èі>őiÓÑ Èˆ‹wÓµÑglyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman> ›Ñ w>VÓ ]Ñ>Ñȋ€Ñ ›‹wÑ ‹V>›ÓÑ° ÅӋ ›Ñ wÑ ÞÅÑVÞÈÓ –iÅÈÑÅi’çÑ ›Ñ ÞÅÑ V –°’iÓiÑi›'ŠÓ Ši›'Ñ°Å 'ÞVÓђ‹wiÑVçV’iÑÈiÅä‹ViÈÑÓ Ñ‹–°Å äiÑӈi‹ÅÑ Ñ °iÅ>Ӌ ›ÈÑ>›'ÑL ÓÓ –Ñ’‹›iµ\n\n\"äiÅ>’’]Ñ->›–‹›>Š-glyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman>glyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman>ш>ÈÑ ›iÑ wÑÓ ˆiђ>ŀiÈÓÑ>›'і ÈÓÑÓ>’i›Ói'Ñ ÓiVˆ›‹V>’рŠްÈы›ÑӈiÑglyph<c=13,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman>glyph<c=31,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman>-ы›'ÞÈÓÅ ç]Ñå‹ÓˆÑ– ÅiÑӈ>›ÑÕ]íííÑ 'iȋ€›Ñ>›'Ñi›€‹›iiŋ›€Ñ°Å wiÈȋ ›>’ÈÑÈÓÅ>Ói€‹V>’’çђ V>Ói'Ñ>Šޛ'Ñ ÓˆiÑå Œ'µÑglyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman> ›Ñ>''‹Ó ‹ ›]Ñ ÞÅћiÓå Å‘Ñ wÑ iåÑ*Å 'ÞVÓÑglyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman>›ÓÅ 'ÞVӋ ›Ñ ² *glyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman> ³Ñ Vi›ÓiÅÈÑi›>L’iÑÞÈÑÓ Ñå őÑV’ Èi’çÑå‹ÓˆÑ\"glyph<c=13,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman>glyph<c=31,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman>ÈÑ'Þŋ›€Ñi>ŒçÑ ÈÓ>€iÈÑ wÑ°Å 'ÞVÓÑ'iäi’ °–i›Ó]ÑÈiÅ䋛€Ñ>Èр>Óiå>çÈÑÓ Ñˆ‹€ˆŠ Ñ ’Þ–iі>›Þw>VÓÞŋ›€Ñ‹›Ñglyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman>ȋ>]Ñglyph<c=13,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman>>ÈÓiśÑglyph<c=13,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman>ÞÅ °iÑ ÅÑglyph<c=29,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman>>Ó ‹›Ñglyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman> –iŋV>µÑ ä 7iÑwÞÅӈiÅÑÈÞ°° ÅÓÑ ÞÅÑVÞÈÓ –iÅÈÑå‹ÓˆÑå Œ'ŠV’>ÈÈÑw>V‹’‹Ó‹iÈÑ >›'ÑV –° ›i›ÓÑÓiVˆ› ’ €‹iÈ]Ñ刋VˆÑ‹›V’Þ'iÑ*glyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman>glyph<c=9,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman>Ñw>LŋV>Ӌ ›Ñ>›'Ñ >ÈÈi–L’ç]ÑL>V‘°’>›iÈ]іi– ÅçÑ>›'Ñ °Ó‹V>’Ñ– 'ޒiÈ]ÑV>L’iÈ]Ñ Ñ °ÅiV‹È‹ ›Ñ–>Vˆ‹›‹›€Ñ>›'Ñi›V’ ÈÞÅiȵÑ\n\n## \",glyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium> glyph<c=20,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium> glyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium> glyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium> glyph<c=29,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium>Ê glyph<c=12,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium> glyph<c=13,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium> - glyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium> glyph<c=20,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium> Êglyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium> glyph<c=12,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium>Ê glyph<c=31,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium> glyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium> 1 glyph<c=19,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium> glyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium> glyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium> /1,glyph<c=13,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium>Ê ­ \"glyph<c=12,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium> glyph<c=31,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium> ®\n\nglyph<c=29,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman> >ÈÓÑçi>Å]Ñåiђ>ޛVˆi'Ñ ÞÅÑ\"glyph<c=12,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman>glyph<c=31,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman>Ñ°Å €Å>–µÑglyph<c=9,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman>çÑ'iȋ€›‹›€Ñ°Å 'Š ÞVÓÈ]ÑåiÑ>ÅiÑ>L’iÑÓ Ñ’iäiÅ>€iÑ->›–‹›>Š-glyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman>glyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman>ÂÈÑäiÅӋV>’Ñ‹›Ói€Å>Ӌ ›Ñ wÑV –° ›i›ÓÈÑ>›'ÑÓiVˆ› ’ €‹iÈ]Ñ>›'ÑӈiÅiw Åiрi›iÅ>Óiш‹€ˆiÅÑ –>ŀ‹›ÈµÑ iå‹ÈçÈ Æ ]Ñ ÞÅÑ\"glyph<c=12,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman>glyph<c=31,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman>Ñi›ÓiŰŋÈiŠV’>ÈÈÑÈiÅäiÅÑ'‹ä‹È‹ ›]Ñ w‹›‹Èˆi'ÑӈiÑçi>ÅÑ>ÓÑ>›Ñ>››Þ>’ÑÅiäi›ÞiÑÅޛŠÅ>ÓiÑ wÑ>°°Å 拖>Ói’çÑ fÛííі‹’’‹ ›µÑ\"glyph<c=13,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman>glyph<c=31,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman>ÈÑ>ÅiÑ>L’iÑÓ Ñi‹Ó ˆiÅÑLÅ>›'Ñ Åы›V Å° Å>ÓiÑ ÞÅÑ \"glyph<c=12,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman>glyph<c=31,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman>Ñ °Å 'ÞV Ó ÈÑ ‹ ›Ó ÑÓ ˆi‹ÅÑ å ›ÑÈçÈÓi–ÈÑ>›'Ñ°Å €Å>–ÈÑ>Èћii'i'µÑ \"ÞÅѰŋ–>ÅçÑw VÞÈыÈÑÓ Ñ'iäi’ °Ñ– ÅiÑ°Å w‹Ó>L’i]ш‹€ˆiŊi›'Ñ °Å 'ÞVÓÈÑÓ>ŀiÓi'ÑÓ ÑӈiÑi›ÓiŰŋÈiÑV –°ÞӋ›€Ñ>›'ÑÈÓ Å>€i]Ñ>›'Ñ V ––Þ›‹V>Ӌ ›Èі>őiÓȵÑglyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman>ÈÑ>ÑÅiÈޒÓ]ÑӈiÑ\"glyph<c=12,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman>glyph<c=31,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman>ÑÈi€–i›ÓÑ wÑ ÞÅÑ LÞȋ›iÈÈыÈÑ ›iÑ wÑӈiÑw>ÈÓiÈÓрŠ勛€Ñw ÅÑ->›–‹›>Š-glyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman>glyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman>Ñ>›'ыÈÑ iæ°iVÓi'ÑÓ Ñ€Å åÑwÞÅӈiÅÑ'Þŋ›€Ñw‹ÈV>’ÑÛííyµÑÑÑ\n\n## glyph<c=29,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium>\" \" glyph<c=28,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium> glyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium> glyph<c=20,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium>Ê glyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium> glyph<c=21,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium> glyph<c=13,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium> glyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium> glyph<c=12,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium>\n\n7iÑ>ÅiÑiæV‹Ói'Ñ>L ÞÓÑӈiÑwÞÓÞÅiµÑ7iÑ>ÅiÑV ––‹ÓÓi'ÑÓ Ñw VÞȋ›€Ñ ›Ñ ÞÅÑVÞÈÓ –iÅÈ]Ñ'i’‹äiŋ›€ÑÈÞ°iŋ ÅѺÞ>’‹Óç]ы–°Å 䋛€Ñ>’’Ñ wÑ ÞÅÑ °iÅ>Ӌ ›ÈÑ>›'рiÓӋ›€Ñ ÞÅÑä>ŋ ÞÈÑLÞȋ›iÈÈÑޛ‹ÓÈÑ wÑӈiÑglyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman> –°>›çÑ å ő‹›€Ñ>ÓÑ °Ó‹–>’Ñiww‹V‹i›VçµÑ7iÑÅi>’‹ëiÑVÞÈÓ –iÅÑÑ È>ӋÈw>VӋ ›Ñ 'ŋäiÈÑ ÞÅÑLÞȋ›iÈÈÑ>›'ÑåiÑ>ÅiÑޛç‹i’'‹›€Ñ‹›Ñ ÞÅÑ°Å –‹ÈiÑÓ Ñ–iiÓÑ Óˆi‹ÅÑiæ°iVÓ>Ӌ ›Èы›ÑºÞ>’‹Óç]Ñ'i’‹äiÅçÑ>›'Ñ°iÅw Ŗ>›ViµÑ\n\nglyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman> ÓÑӈiÑÈ>–iÑӋ–i]ÑåiÑV ›Ó‹›ÞiÑÓ Ñ’ ‘Ñw ÅÑå>çÈÑÓ Ñ‹–°Å äiÑÞ° ›Ñ ÞÅÑå Œ'ŠV’>ÈÈр’ L>’Ñ‹›wÅ>ÈÓÅÞVÓÞÅi]ђ åŠV ÈÓі>›Þw>VÓÞŋ›€Ñ °ÅiÈi›ViÑ>›'ÑV>°>L‹’‹Ó‹iÈ]Ñglyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman>/ÑÓ ’È]Ñ>›'ÑÈÞ°°’çÑVˆ>‹›Ñ>›'ђ €‹ÈӋVÈÑ –>›>€i–i›ÓµÑ/ˆiр >’Ñ wÑӈiÈiÑiww ÅÓÈÑ>ÅiÑӈiÑV ›Ó‹›Þi'Ñ ‹–°Å äi–i›ÓÑ wÑ ÞÅÑL>’>›ViÑȈiiÓ]Ñ äiÅ>’’Ñ°Å w‹Ó>L‹’‹ÓçÑ>›'Ñ ÅiÓÞśÈÑÓ Ñ ÞÅы›äiÈÓ ÅȵÑ7‹ÓˆÑ>ÑÓi>–Ñ wÑ°>Èȋ ›>Ói]ÑÓ>’i›Ói'Ñ >›'Ñ'i'‹V>Ói'Ñi–°’ çiiÈ]Ñåˆ Ñ>ÅiÑV ––‹ÓÓi'ÑÓ Ñw’>å’iÈÈÑÈiÅä‹ViÑ >›'ÑV Å° Å>Óiы›Ói€Å‹Óç]ÑåiÑLi’‹iäiÑåiш>äiÑӈiі –i›ÓޖÑw ÅÑ V ›Ó‹›Þi'ÑÈÞVViÈȵ\n\nglyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman> ›>’çÈÓÈÑiæ°iVÓÑӈiÑglyph<c=13,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman>glyph<c=31,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman>-ы›'ÞÈÓ Å çÑÓ ÑV ›Ó‹›ÞiÑÓ Ñiæ°>›'µÑ 7iÑLi’‹iäiÑåiÑ>ÅiÑåi’’Ñ° ȋӋ ›i'ÑÓ ÑiæVii'ы›'ÞÈÓÅçрŠåÓˆÑ >›'ÑÑ V>°ÓÞÅiÑ>''‹Ó‹ ›>’ÑVÞÈÓ –iÅÑ°Å €Å>–ȵÑglyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman>›'Ñ刋’iÑåiш>äiÑ Åi>Vˆi'і>›çÑȋ€›‹w‹V>›Óі‹’iÈÓ ›iÈ]ÑåiÑåi’V –iÑӈiÑ °° ÅÓފ ›‹ÓçÑÓ Ñ–iiÓћiåÑVˆ>’’i›€iÈ]рŠåÑ ÞÅÑLÞȋ›iÈÈÑ>›'і>›>€iÑ>Ñ å Œ'ŠV’>ÈÈÑ Å€>›‹ë>Ӌ ›µ\n\n7iђ ‘Ñw Åå>Å'ÑÓ Ñ>''ÅiÈȋ›€Ñç ÞÑ>€>‹›Ñ›iæÓÑçi>ŵ\n\nglyph<c=27,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman> ÞÅiÑ- ’>Ñ glyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAF+JansonText-Italic> ˆ >‹Å –>›Ñ >›'Ñ glyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAF+JansonText-Italic> ˆ ‹iwÑ glyph<c=13,font=/AAAAAF+JansonText-Italic>æiVÞӋäiÑ \"ww‹ViÅÑ\n\nglyph<c=27,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman> ÞÅiÑ- ’>Ñ glyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAF+JansonText-Italic> ˆ >‹Å –>›Ñ >›'Ñ glyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAF+JansonText-Italic> ˆ ‹iwÑ glyph<c=13,font=/AAAAAF+JansonText-Italic>æiVÞӋäiÑ \"ww‹ViÅÑ\n\n,>›'çÑ7µÑglyph<c=19,font=/AAAAAI+JansonText-Roman>ÞÅÅ *Åiȋ'i›ÓÑ>›' glyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAF+JansonText-Italic> ˆ ‹iwÑ \"°iÅ>Ӌ›€Ñ\"ww‹ViÅ", + "recall": 0.6567164179104478, + "true_md": "\" Õ À Ê { n ] ä ä ä Ê Ü œ À  ` Ü ˆ ` i Ê i “ «  œ Þ i i Ã Ê > À i Ê ` i ` ˆ V > Ì i ` Ê Ì œ Ê ` i  ˆ Û i À ˆ ˜ } Ê À i Ã Õ  Ì Ã ] Ê « À œ Û ˆ ` ˆ ˜ } Ê V Õ Ã Ì œ “ i À Ê Ê Ã > Ì ˆ à v > V Ì ˆ œ ˜ Ê > ˜ ` Ê ˆ ˜ V À i > à ˆ ˜ } Ê Ã … > À i … œ  ` i À Ê Û >  Õ i ° Ê \n\nÈ - ‡ -\n\n> È Ó Ñ ç i > Å ] Ñ å i Ñ ’ > Þ › V ˆ i ` Ñ Þ Å Ñ \" Ñ ° Å € Å > – µ Ñ ç Ñ ` i È ‹ € › ‹ › € Ñ ° Å ` Š Þ V Ó È ] Ñ å i Ñ > Å i Ñ > L ’ i Ñ Ó Ñ ’ i ä i Å > € i Ñ - > › – ‹ › > Š - Â È Ñ ä i Å Ó ‹ V > ’ Ñ ‹ › Ó i € Å > Ó ‹ › Ñ w Ñ V – ° › i › Ó È Ñ > › ` Ñ Ó i V ˆ › ’ € ‹ i È ] Ñ > › ` Ñ Ó ˆ i Å i w Å i Ñ € i › i Å > Ó i Ñ ˆ ‹ € ˆ i Å Ñ – > Å € ‹ › È µ Ñ i å ‹ È ç È Æ ] Ñ Þ Å Ñ \" Ñ i › Ó i Å ° Å ‹ È i Š V ’ > È È Ñ È i Å ä i Å Ñ ` ‹ ä ‹ È ‹ › ] Ñ w ‹ › ‹ È ˆ i ` Ñ Ó ˆ i Ñ ç i > Å Ñ > Ó Ñ > › Ñ > › › Þ > ’ Ñ Å i ä i › Þ i Ñ Å Þ › Š Å > Ó i Ñ w Ñ > ° ° Å æ ‹ – > Ó i ’ ç Ñ f Û í í Ñ – ‹ ’ ’ ‹ › µ Ñ \" È Ñ > Å i Ñ > L ’ i Ñ Ó Ñ i ‹ Ó ˆ i Å Ñ L Å > › ` Ñ Å Ñ ‹ › V Å ° Å > Ó i Ñ Þ Å Ñ \" Ñ ° Å ` Þ V Ó È Ñ ‹ › Ó Ñ Ó ˆ i ‹ Å Ñ å › Ñ È ç È Ó i – È Ñ > › ` Ñ ° Å € Å > – È Ñ > È Ñ › i i ` i ` µ Ñ \" Þ Å Ñ ° Å ‹ – > Å ç Ñ w V Þ È Ñ ‹ È Ñ Ó Ñ ` i ä i ’ ° Ñ – Å i Ñ ° Å w ‹ Ó > L ’ i ] Ñ ˆ ‹ € ˆ i Å Š i › ` Ñ ° Å ` Þ V Ó È Ñ Ó > Å € i Ó i ` Ñ Ó Ñ Ó ˆ i Ñ i › Ó i Å ° Å ‹ È i Ñ V – ° Þ Ó ‹ › € Ñ > › ` Ñ È Ó Å > € i ] Ñ > › ` Ñ V – – Þ › ‹ V > Ó ‹ › È Ñ – > Å ‘ i Ó È µ Ñ È Ñ > Ñ Å i È Þ ’ Ó ] Ñ Ó ˆ i Ñ \" Ñ È i € – i › Ó Ñ w Ñ Þ Å Ñ L Þ È ‹ › i È È Ñ ‹ È Ñ › i Ñ w Ñ Ó ˆ i Ñ w > È Ó i È Ó Ñ € Å å ‹ › € Ñ w Å Ñ - > › – ‹ › > Š - Ñ > › ` Ñ ‹ È Ñ i æ ° i V Ó i ` Ñ Ó Ñ € Å å Ñ w Þ Å Ó ˆ i Å Ñ ` Þ Å ‹ › € Ñ w ‹ È V > ’ Ñ Û í í y µ Ñ Ñ Ñ \n\nÓ Ñ Ó ˆ i Ñ È > – i Ñ Ó ‹ – i Ñ å i Ñ i æ ° > › ` i ` Ñ Þ Å Ñ ° i Å > Ó ‹ › È Ñ ‹ › Ñ ’ å Š V È Ó Ñ Å i € ‹ › È ] Ñ å i Ñ > ’ È Ñ ‹ › ä i È Ó i ` Ñ ‹ › Ñ Þ Å Ñ € ’ L > ’ Ñ Ó i V ˆ › ’ € ç Ñ > › ` Ñ – > › Þ w > V Ó Þ Å ‹ › € Ñ ’ i > ` i Å È ˆ ‹ ° µ Ñ 7 i Ñ > Å i Ñ V ’ i > Å Ñ > L Þ Ó Ñ Þ Å Ñ € > ’ È Ñ ‹ › Ñ Ó ˆ ‹ È Ñ > Å i > Ñ r Ñ Ó ˆ > Ó Ñ ‹ È ] Ñ Ó Ñ V › Ó ‹ › Þ > ’ ’ ç Ñ w V Þ È Ñ › Ñ ` i ä i ’ ° ‹ › € Ñ L i È Ó Š ‹ › Š V ’ > È È Ñ Ó i V ˆ › ’ € ‹ i È ] Ñ Ñ ° Å V i È È i È Ñ > › ` Ñ ° i Å w Å – > › V i Ñ Ó > ‹ ’ Å i ` Ñ Ó Ñ Ó ˆ i Ñ Þ › ‹ º Þ i Ñ Å i º Þ ‹ Å i – i › Ó È Ñ w Ñ i > V ˆ Ñ V Þ È Ó – i Å µ \n\n/ ` > ç Â È Ñ \" Ñ – > Å ‘ i Ó Ñ i › ä ‹ Å › – i › Ó Ñ Å i º Þ ‹ Å i È Ñ Ó ˆ > Ó Ñ å i Ñ Å i ` Þ V i Ñ Ñ ° Å ` Þ V Ó Ñ V ç V ’ i Ñ Ó ‹ – i Ñ > › ` Ñ ‹ › V Å i > È i Ñ ° Å w ‹ Ó > L ‹ ’ ‹ Ó ç µ Ñ È Ñ > Ñ Å i È Þ ’ Ó ] Ñ \" È Ñ > Å i Ñ ° > Å Ó › i Å ‹ › € Ñ å ‹ Ó ˆ Ñ - Ñ ° Å ä ‹ ` i Å È Ñ ’ ‹ ‘ i Ñ - > › – ‹ › > Š - Ñ Ó Ñ ` i È ‹ € › ] Ñ ` i ’ ‹ ä i Å ] Ñ È ˆ ‹ ° Ñ > › ` Ñ Å i ° > ‹ Å Ñ Ó ˆ i ‹ Å Ñ ° Å ` Þ V Ó È µ Ñ i V > Þ È i Ñ w Ñ Þ Å Ñ L Þ ‹ ’ ` Š Ó Š Å ` i Å Ñ ² / \" ³ Ñ > › ` Ñ V › w ‹ € Þ Å i Š Ó Š Å ` i Å Ñ ² / \" ³ Ñ ’ i > ` i Å È ˆ ‹ ° Ñ ‹ › Ñ Ó ˆ i Ñ - Ñ ‹ › ` Þ È Ó Å ç ] Ñ > ` ä > › V i ` Ñ Ó i V ˆ › ’ € ç Ñ ’ i > ` i Å È ˆ ‹ ° Ñ > › ` Ñ È ç › V ˆ Å › ‹ ë i ` Ñ – > › Þ w > V Ó Þ Å ‹ › € ] Ñ å i Ñ ˆ > ä i Ñ È Þ V V i È È w Þ ’ ’ ç Ñ V > ° ‹ Ó > ’ ‹ ë i ` Ñ › Ñ Ó ˆ ‹ È Ñ – > Å ‘ i Ó Ñ È ˆ ‹ w Ó µ Ñ › Ñ w > V Ó ] Ñ > Ñ È ‹ € Ñ › ‹ w Ñ ‹ V > › Ó Ñ ° Å Ó ‹ › Ñ w Ñ Þ Å Ñ V Þ È Ó – i Å È Ñ Å i ’ ç Ñ › Ñ Þ Å Ñ V – ° ’ i Ó i Ñ i › ` Š Ó Š i › ` Ñ ° Å ` Þ V Ó Ñ ’ ‹ w i Ñ V ç V ’ i Ñ È i Å ä ‹ V i È Ñ Ó Ñ ‹ – ° Å ä i Ñ Ó ˆ i ‹ Å Ñ Ñ ° i Å > Ó ‹ › È Ñ > › ` Ñ L Ó Ó – Ñ ’ ‹ › i µ \n\n\" ä i Å > ’ ’ ] Ñ - > › – ‹ › > Š - Ñ ˆ > È Ñ › i Ñ w Ñ Ó ˆ i Ñ ’ > Å € i È Ó Ñ > › ` Ñ – È Ó Ñ Ó > ’ i › Ó i ` Ñ Ó i V ˆ › ‹ V > ’ Ñ € Å Þ ° È Ñ ‹ › Ñ Ó ˆ i Ñ - Ñ ‹ › ` Þ È Ó Å ç ] Ñ å ‹ Ó ˆ Ñ – Å i Ñ Ó ˆ > › Ñ Õ ] í í í Ñ ` i È ‹ € › Ñ > › ` Ñ i › € ‹ › i i Å ‹ › € Ñ ° Å w i È È ‹ › > ’ È Ñ È Ó Å > Ó i € ‹ V > ’ ’ ç Ñ ’ V > Ó i ` Ñ > Å Þ › ` Ñ Ó ˆ i Ñ å Å ’ ` µ Ñ › Ñ > ` ` ‹ Ó ‹ › ] Ñ Þ Å Ñ › i Ó å Å ‘ Ñ w Ñ i å Ñ * Å ` Þ V Ó Ñ › Ó Å ` Þ V Ó ‹ › Ñ ² * ³ Ñ V i › Ó i Å È Ñ i › > L ’ i Ñ Þ È Ñ Ó Ñ å Å ‘ Ñ V ’ È i ’ ç Ñ å ‹ Ó ˆ Ñ \" È Ñ ` Þ Å ‹ › € Ñ i > Å ’ ç Ñ È Ó > € i È Ñ w Ñ ° Å ` Þ V Ó Ñ ` i ä i ’ ° – i › Ó ] Ñ È i Å ä ‹ › € Ñ > È Ñ € > Ó i å > ç È Ñ Ó Ñ ˆ ‹ € ˆ Š Ñ ä ’ Þ – i Ñ – > › Þ w > V Ó Þ Å ‹ › € Ñ ‹ › Ñ È ‹ > ] Ñ > È Ó i Å › Ñ Þ Å ° i Ñ Å Ñ > Ó ‹ › Ñ – i Å ‹ V > µ Ñ 7 i Ñ w Þ Å Ó ˆ i Å Ñ È Þ ° ° Å Ó Ñ Þ Å Ñ V Þ È Ó – i Å È Ñ å ‹ Ó ˆ Ñ å Å ’ ` Š V ’ > È È Ñ w > V ‹ ’ ‹ Ó ‹ i È Ñ > › ` Ñ V – ° › i › Ó Ñ Ó i V ˆ › ’ € ‹ i È ] Ñ å ˆ ‹ V ˆ Ñ ‹ › V ’ Þ ` i Ñ * Ñ w > L Å ‹ V > Ó ‹ › Ñ > › ` Ñ > È È i – L ’ ç ] Ñ L > V ‘ ° ’ > › i È ] Ñ – i – Å ç Ñ > › ` Ñ ° Ó ‹ V > ’ Ñ – ` Þ ’ i È ] Ñ V > L ’ i È ] Ñ Ñ ° Å i V ‹ È ‹ › Ñ – > V ˆ ‹ › ‹ › € Ñ > › ` Ñ i › V ’ È Þ Å i È µ Ñ \n\n7 i Ñ > Å i Ñ i æ V ‹ Ó i ` Ñ > L Þ Ó Ñ Ó ˆ i Ñ w Þ Ó Þ Å i µ Ñ 7 i Ñ > Å i Ñ V – – ‹ Ó Ó i ` Ñ Ó Ñ w V Þ È ‹ › € Ñ › Ñ Þ Å Ñ V Þ È Ó – i Å È ] Ñ ` i ’ ‹ ä i Å ‹ › € Ñ È Þ ° i Å ‹ Å Ñ º Þ > ’ ‹ Ó ç ] Ñ ‹ – ° Å ä ‹ › € Ñ > ’ ’ Ñ w Ñ Þ Å Ñ ° i Å > Ó ‹ › È Ñ > › ` Ñ € i Ó Ó ‹ › € Ñ Þ Å Ñ ä > Å ‹ Þ È Ñ L Þ È ‹ › i È È Ñ Þ › ‹ Ó È Ñ w Ñ Ó ˆ i Ñ – ° > › ç Ñ å Å ‘ ‹ › € Ñ > Ó Ñ ° Ó ‹ – > ’ Ñ i w w ‹ V ‹ i › V ç µ Ñ 7 i Ñ Å i > ’ ‹ ë i Ñ V Þ È Ó – i Å Ñ Ñ È > Ó ‹ È w > V Ó ‹ › Ñ ` Å ‹ ä i È Ñ Þ Å Ñ L Þ È ‹ › i È È Ñ > › ` Ñ å i Ñ > Å i Ñ Þ › ç ‹ i ’ ` ‹ › € Ñ ‹ › Ñ Þ Å Ñ ° Å – ‹ È i Ñ Ó Ñ – i i Ó Ñ Ó ˆ i ‹ Å Ñ i æ ° i V Ó > Ó ‹ › È Ñ ‹ › Ñ º Þ > ’ ‹ Ó ç ] Ñ ` i ’ ‹ ä i Å ç Ñ > › ` Ñ ° i Å w Å – > › V i µ Ñ \n\nÓ Ñ Ó ˆ i Ñ È > – i Ñ Ó ‹ – i ] Ñ å i Ñ V › Ó ‹ › Þ i Ñ Ó Ñ ’ ‘ Ñ w Å Ñ å > ç È Ñ Ó Ñ ‹ – ° Å ä i Ñ Þ ° › Ñ Þ Å Ñ å Å ’ ` Š V ’ > È È Ñ € ’ L > ’ Ñ ‹ › w Å > È Ó Å Þ V Ó Þ Å i ] Ñ ’ å Š V È Ó Ñ – > › Þ w > V Ó Þ Å ‹ › € Ñ ° Å i È i › V i Ñ > › ` Ñ V > ° > L ‹ ’ ‹ Ó ‹ i È ] Ñ / Ñ Ó ’ È ] Ñ > › ` Ñ È Þ ° ° ’ ç Ñ V ˆ > ‹ › Ñ > › ` Ñ ’ € ‹ È Ó ‹ V È Ñ – > › > € i – i › Ó µ Ñ / ˆ i Ñ € > ’ Ñ w Ñ Ó ˆ i È i Ñ i w w Å Ó È Ñ > Å i Ñ Ó ˆ i Ñ V › Ó ‹ › Þ i ` Ñ ‹ – ° Å ä i – i › Ó Ñ w Ñ Þ Å Ñ L > ’ > › V i Ñ È ˆ i i Ó ] Ñ ä i Å > ’ ’ Ñ ° Å w ‹ Ó > L ‹ ’ ‹ Ó ç Ñ > › ` Ñ Å i Ó Þ Å › È Ñ Ó Ñ Þ Å Ñ ‹ › ä i È Ó Å È µ Ñ 7 ‹ Ó ˆ Ñ > Ñ Ó i > – Ñ w Ñ ° > È È ‹ › > Ó i ] Ñ Ó > ’ i › Ó i ` Ñ > › ` Ñ ` i ` ‹ V > Ó i ` Ñ i – ° ’ ç i i È ] Ñ å ˆ Ñ > Å i Ñ V – – ‹ Ó Ó i ` Ñ Ó Ñ w ’ > å ’ i È È Ñ È i Å ä ‹ V i Ñ > › ` Ñ V Å ° Å > Ó i Ñ ‹ › Ó i € Å ‹ Ó ç ] Ñ å i Ñ L i ’ ‹ i ä i Ñ å i Ñ ˆ > ä i Ñ Ó ˆ i Ñ – – i › Ó Þ – Ñ w Å Ñ V › Ó ‹ › Þ i ` Ñ È Þ V V i È È µ \n\n › > ’ ç È Ó È Ñ i æ ° i V Ó Ñ Ó ˆ i Ñ - Ñ ‹ › ` Þ È Ó Å ç Ñ Ó Ñ V › Ó ‹ › Þ i Ñ Ó Ñ i æ ° > › ` µ Ñ 7 i Ñ L i ’ ‹ i ä i Ñ å i Ñ > Å i Ñ å i ’ ’ Ñ ° È ‹ Ó ‹ › i ` Ñ Ó Ñ i æ V i i ` Ñ ‹ › ` Þ È Ó Å ç Ñ € Å å Ó ˆ Ñ > › ` Ñ Ñ V > ° Ó Þ Å i Ñ > ` ` ‹ Ó ‹ › > ’ Ñ V Þ È Ó – i Å Ñ ° Å € Å > – È µ Ñ › ` Ñ å ˆ ‹ ’ i Ñ å i Ñ ˆ > ä i Ñ Å i > V ˆ i ` Ñ – > › ç Ñ È ‹ € › ‹ w ‹ V > › Ó Ñ – ‹ ’ i È Ó › i È ] Ñ å i Ñ å i ’ V – i Ñ Ó ˆ i Ñ ° ° Å Ó Þ Š › ‹ Ó ç Ñ Ó Ñ – i i Ó Ñ › i å Ñ V ˆ > ’ ’ i › € i È ] Ñ € Å å Ñ Þ Å Ñ L Þ È ‹ › i È È Ñ > › ` Ñ – > › > € i Ñ > Ñ å Å ’ ` Š V ’ > È È Ñ Å € > › ‹ ë > Ó ‹ › µ \n\n7 i Ñ ’ ‘ Ñ w Å å > Å ` Ñ Ó Ñ > ` ` Å i È È ‹ › € Ñ ç Þ Ñ > € > ‹ › Ñ › i æ Ó Ñ ç i > Å µ \n\n, > › ` ç Ñ 7 µ Ñ Þ Å Å * Å i È ‹ ` i › Ó Ñ > › ` ˆ ‹ i w Ñ \" ° i Å > Ó ‹ › € Ñ \" w w ‹ V i Å \n\nÞ Å i Ñ - ’ > Ñ ˆ > ‹ Å – > › Ñ > › ` Ñ ˆ ‹ i w Ñ æ i V Þ Ó ‹ ä i Ñ \" w w ‹ V i Å Ñ \n\n## \" , Ê - Ê Ê 1 / 1 , Ê ­ \" ®\n\n## 8 * Ê 1 - / \" , Ê , / \" - * - Ê\n\n## \" \" Ê\n\n/ ˆ ‹ È Ñ ç i > Å ] Ñ ‹ › Ñ Å i È ° › È i Ñ Ó Ñ – > Å ‘ i Ó Ñ › i i ` È ] Ñ å i Ñ Ó Å > › È w i Å Å i ` Ñ – > › Þ w > V Ó Þ Å ‹ › € Ñ V > ° > V ‹ Ó ç Ñ w Å – Ñ Å Ó ˆ Ñ – i Å ‹ V > Ñ > › ` Ñ 7 i È Ó i Å › Ñ Þ Å ° i Ñ Ó Ñ ’ å i Å Š V È Ó Ñ Å i € ‹ › È Ñ ‹ › Ñ È ‹ > ] Ñ > È Ó i Å › Ñ Þ Å ° i Ñ > › ` Ñ > Ó ‹ › Ñ – i Å ‹ V > µ Ñ È Ñ > Ñ Å i È Þ ’ Ó ] Ñ å i Ñ V – ° ’ i Ó i ` Ñ Ó ˆ i Ñ È i V › ` Ñ ° ˆ > È i Ñ w Ñ Ó ˆ ‹ È Ñ ° Ó ‹ – ‹ ë > Ó ‹ › Ñ ° ’ > › Ñ > › ` Ñ å ‹ ’ ’ Ñ V – ° ’ i Ó i Ñ Ó ˆ i Ñ Ó ˆ ‹ Å ` Ñ ° ˆ > È i Ñ w Ñ Ó ˆ i Ñ ° ’ > › Ñ › i æ Ó Ñ ç i > Å ] Ñ å ˆ ‹ V ˆ Ñ å ‹ ’ ’ Ñ Å i È Þ ’ Ó Ñ ‹ › Ñ > Ñ ’ i > › i Å Ñ – Å i Ñ › ‹ – Ñ L ’ i Ñ Å € > › ‹ ë > Ó ‹ › Ñ Ó ˆ > Ó Ñ w w i Å È Ñ ˆ ‹ € ˆ i Å Ñ Þ Ó ‹ ’ ‹ ë > Ó ‹ › Ñ w Ñ i æ ‹ È Ó ‹ › € Ñ V > ° > V ‹ Ó ç µ Ñ ` ` ‹ Ó ‹ › > ’ ’ ç ] Ñ å i Ñ i æ i V Þ Ó i ` Ñ å i ’ ’ Ñ › Ñ Ó ˆ i Ñ ` i Ó > ‹ ’ È Ñ › i V i È È > Å ç Ñ Ó Ñ V – ° ’ i Ó i Ñ Ó ˆ i Ñ * i › Ó i æ Š - V ˆ å i ‹ ë i Å Ñ ‹ Å V Þ ‹ Ó È Ñ ‹ – ‹ Ó i ` Ñ Ó Å > › È Ñ Š > V Ó ‹ › ] Ñ i › > L ’ ‹ › € Ñ Þ È Ñ Ó Ñ V ’ È i Ñ Ó ˆ i Ñ ` i > ’ Ñ i > Å ’ ç Ñ > › ` Ñ ˆ ‹ Ó Ñ Ó ˆ i Ñ € Å Þ › ` Ñ Å Þ › › ‹ › € Ñ å ‹ Ó ˆ Ñ Å i È ° i V Ó Ñ Ó Ñ Ó ˆ ‹ È Ñ ‹ – ° Å Ó > › Ó Ñ È Ó Å > Ó i € ‹ V Ñ > V º Þ ‹ È ‹ Ó ‹ › µ Ñ 7 i Ñ > Å i Ñ L i € ‹ › Š › ‹ › € Ñ å ˆ > Ó Ñ å ‹ ’ ’ Ñ L i Ñ > Ñ – Þ ’ Ó ‹ Š ° ˆ > È i Ñ – ä i Ñ ‹ › Ó Ñ ˆ ‹ › > Ñ > › ` Ñ Ó ˆ i Å Ñ ° > Å Ó È Ñ w Ñ È ‹ > µ Ñ * i › Ó i æ Š - V ˆ å i ‹ ë i Å ] Ñ > Ñ ˆ ‹ › > Š Ñ > › ` Ñ - ‹ › € > ° Å i Š L > È i ` Ñ w > L Å ‹ V > Š Ó Å Ñ w Ñ ° Å ‹ › Ó i ` Ñ V ‹ Å V Þ ‹ Ó Ñ L > Å ` È Ñ ² * È ³ ] Ñ w Þ Å Ó ˆ i Å Ñ È ’ ‹ ` ‹ w ‹ i È Ñ - > › – ‹ › > Š - Â È Ñ > ` ä > › V i ` Ñ * Ñ Ó i V ˆ › ’ € ç Ñ > › ` Ñ È i Å ä ‹ V i È Ñ w w i Å ‹ › € ] Ñ i æ ° > › ` ‹ › € Ñ Ñ V Þ È Ó – i Å Ñ i › ` Ñ – > Å ‘ i Ó È Ñ > › ` Ñ ° Å € Å > – È Ñ Ó ` > ç Ñ > › ` Ñ ‹ › Ó Ñ Ó ˆ i Ñ w Þ Ó Þ Å i µ Ñ" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4024512376987107, + "doc_id": "5f738e6097b31f20f15eee930f076c563eb20ff8838e6e87aaf10dd1f06e663e", + "edit_distance": 0.6044776119402985, + "f1_score": 0.640625, + "meteor": 0.6942990297653333, + "precision": 0.5189873417721519, + "pred_md": "68\n\n## NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\nfor the year ended 31 December 2004\n\nThe foreign currency translation reserve records the foreign currency differences arising from the translation of self-sustaining foreign operations, the translation of transactions that hedge the Company's net investment in a foreign operation or the translation of foreign currency monetary items forming part of the net investment in a self-sustaining operation.\n\nThe financial effect of these dividends has not been brought to account in the consolidated financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2004.\n\nFranking credits\n\nBalance of franking account credits at 30% available for future distribution, after adjusting for franking credits which will arise from the payment of the current income tax provision at 31 December 2004\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\n394.7\n\n358.3", + "recall": 0.8367346938775511, + "true_md": "NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STA TEMENTS\n\nfor the year ended 31 December 2004\n\n68\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\nThe foreign currency translation reserve records the foreign currency differen ces arising from the translation of self-sustaining foreign operations, the translation of transactions that hedge the Company’s net investment in a forei gn operation or the translation of foreign currency monetary items forming part of the net investment in a self-sustaining operation." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5081327481546147, + "doc_id": "9d75b425ded03d753295eb21e0a7d6156f8622d6f53bc192d0da10a8558bfa04", + "edit_distance": 0.2857142857142857, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9606413994169096, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "FINANCIAL SECTION\n\n100\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "FINANCIAL SECTION\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 100" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9415752751693783, + "doc_id": "dce3c988121c5c23241b61fc878b0e9a144ed428147bd0c36ce62bfea57c99b8", + "edit_distance": 0.512853470437018, + "f1_score": 0.9656565656565655, + "meteor": 0.8024276218490362, + "precision": 0.9795081967213115, + "pred_md": "terms. Also in 2004, the Company issued $550 million of 6.75% senior notes due 2012 through a Rule 144A offering which were subsequently exchanged for registered notes with identical terms. Also in 2004, the Company issued $450 million of 6% senior notes due 2009 through a Rule 144A offering which were subsequently exchanged for registered notes with identical terms. The proceeds of the above offerings were used to reduce outstanding borrowings under the Senior Credit Facility.\n\nIn August 2003, the Company's Board of Directors authorized the repurchase of up to $100 million of the Company's public debt securities. Subsequently, the Company repurchased $25 million of its senior notes. The Company recorded a loss of $3 million related to repurchase premiums and unamortized debt issue costs. In 2004, the Company repurchased an additional $49 million of its senior notes for $52 million. This resulted in a loss on early retirement of debt of $6 million, including the write-off of unamortized original issue discount, classified as 'other, net' in the accompanying consolidated statements of income. In December 2004, the Company's Board of Directors renewed its authorization for up to $100 million of additional debt securities.\n\nThe Company established a commercial paper program during 2001 that provides for the issuance, on a revolving basis, of up to $500 million of uncollateralized short-term notes. The Company is required to maintain credit availability under its Senior Credit Facility equal to the outstanding principal amount of commercial paper borrowings. No commercial paper borrowings were outstanding at December 31, 2004 or 2003.\n\nThe Company attempts to limit its exposure to interest rate risk by managing the mix of its long-term fixed rate borrowings and short-term borrowings under its bank credit facilities. In 2003, the Company entered into three interest rate swap agreements, designated as fair value hedges, which effectively converted $400 million of the Company's fixed rate debt to floating rate debt. In 2004, the Company terminated interest rate swap agreements with total notional amounts of $400 million and entered into additional interest rate swap agreements, designated\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nas fair value hedges, with total notional amounts of $100 million, leaving interest rate swap agreements with total notional amounts of $100 million remaining as of December 31, 2004. At December 31, 2004, the fair value of the interest rate swap agreements was a liability of $0.1 million.\n\nUnder the terms of the interest rate swap agreements, the Company makes payments based on specified spreads over six-month LIBOR, and receives payments equal to the interest payments due on the fixed rate debt. The interest rate swap agreements qualify for the 'shortcut method' allowed under Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 133, which allows an assumption of no ineffectiveness in the hedging relationship. As such, there is no income statement impact from changes in the fair value of the hedging instruments. Instead, the fair value of the instruments is recorded as an asset or liability on the Company's balance sheet, with an offsetting adjustment to the carrying value of the related debt. The Company received $5 million upon termination of swap agreements in 2004, which has been added to the carrying value of the related debt obligations and is being amortized and recorded as a reduction of interest expense over the remaining life of that debt.\n\nDuring 2001 and 2002, the Company entered into several interest rate swap agreements, designated as fair value hedges, which effectively converted a portion of the Company's fixed rate debt to floating rate debt. By the second quarter of 2002, the Company had terminated these interest rate swap agreements. The Company received net payments totaling $11 million during 2001 and 2002 upon the termination of these swap agreements. These amounts have been added to the carrying value of the related debt obligations and are being amortized and recorded as a reduction of interest expense over the remaining life of that debt.\n\nThe Company and each of its material subsidiaries, excluding MGM Grand Detroit, LLC and the Company's foreign subsidiaries, are directly liable for or uncondition-\n\n57", + "recall": 0.952191235059761, + "true_md": "57\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nterms. Also in 2004, the Company issued $550 million of 6.75% senior notes due 2012 through a Rule 144A offering which were subsequently exchanged for regis- tered notes with identical terms. Also in 2004, the Company issued $450 million of 6% senior notes due 2009 through a Rule 144A offering which were subsequently exchanged for registered notes with identical terms. The proceeds of the above offer- ings were used to reduce outstanding borrowings under the Senior Credit Facility.\n\nas fair value hedges, with total notional amounts of $100 million, leaving interest rate swap agreements with total notional amounts of $100 million remaining as of December 31, 2004. At December 31, 2004, the fair value of the interest rate swap agreements was a liability of $0.1 million. \n\nIn August 2003, the Company’s Board of Directors authorized the repurchase of up to $100 million of the Company’s public debt securities. Subsequently, the Company repurchased $25 million of its senior notes. The Company recorded a loss of $3 mil- lion related to repurchase premiums and unamortized debt issue costs. In 2004, the Company repurchased an additional $49 million of its senior notes for $52 million.\n\nThis resulted in a loss on early retirement of debt of $6 million, including the write-off of unamortized original issue discount, classified as “other, net” in the accompanying consolidated statements of income. In December 2004, the Company’s Board of Directors renewed its authorization for up to $100 million of additional debt securities.\n\nThe Company attempts to limit its exposure to interest rate risk by managing the mix of its long-term fixed rate borrowings and short-term borrowings under its bank credit facilities. In 2003, the Company entered into three interest rate swap agreements, designated as fair value hedges, which effectively converted $400 million of the Company’s fixed rate debt to floating rate debt. In 2004, the Company terminated interest rate swap agreements with total notional amounts of $400 million and entered into additional interest rate swap agreements, designated\n\nThe Company and each of its material subsidiaries, excluding MGM Grand Detroit, LLC and the Company’s foreign subsidiaries, are directly liable for or uncondition-\n\nDuring 2001 and 2002, the Company entered into several interest rate swap agreements, designated as fair value hedges, which effectively converted a portion of the Company’s fixed rate debt to floating rate debt. By the second quarter of 2002, the Company had terminated these interest rate swap agreements. The Company received net payments totaling $11 million during 2001 and 2002 upon the termination of these swap agreements. These amounts have been added to the carrying value of the related debt obligations and are being amortized and recorded as a reduction of interest expense over the remaining life of that debt. \n\nUnder the terms of the interest rate swap agreements, the Company makes payments based on specified spreads over six-month LIBOR, and receives payments equal to the interest payments due on the fixed rate debt. The interest rate swap agreements qualify for the “shortcut method” allowed under Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 133, which allows an assumption of no ineffectiveness in the hedging relationship. As such, there is no income statement impact from changes in the fair value of the hedging instruments. Instead, the fair value of the instruments is recorded as an asset or liability on the Company’s balance sheet, with an offsetting adjustment to the carrying value of the related debt. The Company received $5 million upon termination of swap agreements in 2004, which has been added to the carrying value of the related debt obligations and is being amortized and recorded as a reduction of interest expense over the remaining life of that debt. \n\nThe Company established a commercial paper program during 2001 that provides for the issuance, on a revolving basis, of up to $500 million of uncollateralized short-term notes. The Company is required to maintain credit availability under its Senior Credit Facility equal to the outstanding principal amount of commercial paper borrowings.\n\nNo commercial paper borrowings were outstanding at December 31, 2004 or 2003." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "6b1300a52b90dee13f41c791b230abe681dc88504e44675af032bc00a4cef8ce", + "edit_distance": 0.512853470437018, + "f1_score": 0.9656565656565655, + "meteor": 0.8024276218490362, + "precision": 0.9795081967213115, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.952191235059761, + "true_md": "" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9617608562152856, + "doc_id": "52f0226a2bb6ea85bab2ad300282c0e91f658b354188ea1cbce57f5a9895f04b", + "edit_distance": 0.40916271721958924, + "f1_score": 0.976833976833977, + "meteor": 0.9280287858455915, + "precision": 0.9844357976653697, + "pred_md": "## NOTE 11 - STOCKHOLDERS' EQUITY\n\nShare repurchases are only conducted under repurchase programs approved by the Board of Directors and publicly announced. Share repurchase activity was as follows:\n\nAt December 31, 2004, we had 10 million shares available for repurchase under a July 2004 authorization.\n\nIn May 2002, the Board of Directors approved a restricted stock plan. The plan allowed for the issuance of up to 1 million shares of Company common stock to certain key employees. The restrictions on selling these shares lapse 50% on the third anniversary date from the grant date and 50% on the fourth anniversary date after the grant date. Through December 31, 2004, 903,000 shares were issued, with an aggregate value of $32 million. This amount was recorded as deferred compensation in the accompanying consolidated balance sheet and is being amortized to operating expenses on a straight-line basis through the period in which the restrictions fully lapse. Amortization of deferred compensation was $7 million, $8 million and $5 million for the years ended December 31, 2004, 2003 and 2002, respectively, and 855,000 shares were outstanding under the plan at December 31, 2004. In November 2002, the Board of Directors determined that no more awards would be granted under the plan.\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n## NOTE 12 - EMPLOYEE BENEFIT PLANS\n\nEmployees of the Company who are members of various unions are covered by union-sponsored, collectively bargained, multi-employer health and welfare and defined benefit pension plans. The Company recorded an expense of $86 million in 2004, $77 million in 2003 and $66 million in 2002 under such plans. The plans' sponsors have not provided sufficient information to permit the Company to determine its share of unfunded vested benefits, if any.\n\nThe Company is self-insured for most health care benefits for its non-union employees. The liability for claims filed and estimates of claims incurred but not reported is included in the 'Other accrued liabilities' caption in the accompanying consolidated balance sheets.\n\nThe Company has a retirement savings plan under Section 401(k) of the Internal Revenue Code for eligible employees not covered by a collective bargaining agreement that does not specifically provide for participation in the plan. The plans allow employees to defer, within prescribed limits, up to 30% of their income on a pre-tax basis through contributions to the plans. The Company matches, within prescribed limits, a portion of eligible employees' contributions. In the case of certain union employees, the Company contributes to the plan are based on hours worked. The Company recorded charges for 401(k) contributions of $12 million in 2004, $10 million in 2003 and $12 million in 2002.\n\nThe Company maintains a nonqualified deferred retirement plan for certain key employees. The plan allows participants to defer, on a pre-tax basis, a portion of their salary and bonus and accumulate tax deferred earnings, plus investment earnings on the deferred balances, as a retirement fund. Participants receive a Company match of up to 4% of salary, net of any Company match received under the Company's 401(k) plan. All employee deferrals vest immediately. The Company matching contributions vest ratably over a three-year period. The Company recorded charges for matching contributions of $1 million in 2004, $2 million in 2003 and $1 million in 2002.\n\n63", + "recall": 0.9693486590038314, + "true_md": "Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n63\n\n## NOTE 11 — STOCKHOLDERS’ EQUITY\n\n## NOTE 12 — EMPLOYEE BENEFIT PLANS\n\nShare repurchases are only conducted under repurchase programs approved by the Board of Directors and publicly announced. Share repurchase activity was as follows:\n\nAt December 31, 2004, we had 10 million shares available for repurchase under a July 2004 authorization.\n\nIn May 2002, the Board of Directors approved a restricted stock plan. The plan allowed for the issuance of up to 1 million shares of Company common stock to certain key employees. The restrictions on selling these shares lapse 50% on the third anniversary date from the grant date and 50% on the fourth anniversary date after the grant date. Through December 31, 2004, 903,000 shares were issued, with an aggregate value of $32 million. This amount was recorded as deferred compensation in the accompanying consolidated balance sheet and is being amortized to operating expenses on a straight-line basis through the period in which the restrictions fully lapse. Amortization of deferred compensation was $7 million, $8 million and $5 million for the years ended December 31, 2004, 2003 and 2002, respectively, and 855,000 shares were outstanding under the plan at December 31, 2004. In November 2002, the Board of Directors determined that no more awards would be granted under the plan.\n\nThe Company maintains a nonqualified deferred retirement plan for certain key employees. The plan allows participants to defer, on a pre-tax basis, a portion of their salary and bonus and accumulate tax deferred earnings, plus investment earnings on the deferred balances, as a retirement fund. Participants receive a Company match of up to 4% of salary, net of any Company match received under the Company’s 401(k) plan. All employee deferrals vest immediately. The Company matching contributions vest ratably over a three-year period. The Company recorded charges for matching contributions of $1 million in 2004, $2 million in 2003 and $1 million in 2002.\n\nThe Company has a retirement savings plan under Section 401(k) of the Internal Revenue Code for eligible employees not covered by a collective bargaining agree- ment that does not specifically provide for participation in the plan. The plans allow employees to defer, within prescribed limits, up to 30% of their income on a pre-tax basis through contributions to the plans. The Company matches, within prescribed limits, a portion of eligible employees' contributions. In the case of certain union employees, the Company contributes to the plan are based on hours worked. The Company recorded charges for 401(k) contributions of $12 million in 2004, $10 million in 2003 and $12 million in 2002.\n\nThe Company is self-insured for most health care benefits for its non-union employees. The liability for claims filed and estimates of claims incurred but not reported is included in the “Other accrued liabilities” caption in the accompanying consolidated balance sheets.\n\nEmployees of the Company who are members of various unions are covered by union-sponsored, collectively bargained, multi-employer health and welfare and defined benefit pension plans. The Company recorded an expense of $86 million in 2004, $77 million in 2003 and $66 million in 2002 under such plans. The plans' sponsors have not provided sufficient information to permit the Company to determine its share of unfunded vested benefits, if any." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9306063580879913, + "doc_id": "29c546af9d6c8195b3801f342e022a89ad3a93317f806a5f351ae2ead97da5c9", + "edit_distance": 0.6601520086862106, + "f1_score": 0.9846153846153847, + "meteor": 0.7537936407564766, + "precision": 0.9896907216494846, + "pred_md": "through: a comprehensive Environmental Health and Safety Management System based on Australian Standard 4801 and International Standard 14001; environmental and safety committees at Board and management levels; the retention of specialist environmental and safety staff and advisors; regular internal and external environmental and safety audits; and imposing environmental care and safety accountability as line management responsibilities. The role of the Environmental and Safety Committee is documented in a Charter, approved by the Board. The current members of the Environmental and Safety Committee are: Mr S Gerlach (Chairman), Mr P C Barnett, Mr M A O'Leary and Mr J C ElliceFlint.\n\n- · MANAGEMENT OF EXPLORATION RISK exploration risk is managed through internal control systems which include: formalised risk assessment procedures at the functional level; corporate review in both prospect and hindsight; Board approval of exploration budgets; and regular reporting on progress to the Board. External reviews are also undertaken as necessary.\n- · INVESTMENT APPRAISAL - the Company has clearly defined procedures for capital expenditure. These include: annual budgets; detailed appraisal and review procedures; levels of authority; and due diligence requirements where assets are being acquired.\n- · FINANCIAL REPORTING a comprehensive budgeting system exists with an annual budget approved by the Board. Monthly actual results are reported against budget and, where applicable, revised forecasts for the year are prepared and reported to the Board. Speculative transactions are prohibited. Further details relating to financial instruments and commodity price risk management are included in Note 32 of the Financial Statements.\n- · FUNCTIONAL REPORTING all significant areas of Company operations are subject to regular reporting to the Board. The Board receives regular reports on the performance of each functional area, including: operations; gas marketing and commercialisation; liquids marketing; corporate and people; legal and secretariat; geoscience, exploration and new ventures; development and technical services; finance; safety; government; investor relations and environmental matters.\n\n## 9. ETHICAL STANDARDS AND CODE OF CONDUCT\n\nTo promote high standards of corporate governance and ethical conduct the Company has provided its employees with a clear set of rules, values and guidelines to follow when carrying out their work as a Santos employee and representative. In addition to the Board Guidelines, the Company has adopted a Code of Conduct which prescribes that, in addition to compliance with all applicable legal requirements,\n\nthe Board expects all Directors, executives and employees of the Company to adopt appropriate standards of professional and business conduct in their dealings on behalf of the Company. In addition, the Board, in conjunction with executive management, has implemented procedures designed to ensure compliance by all employees with those standards.\n\nIn particular, the Code of Conduct requires that Directors and employees:\n\n- · avoid conflicts of interest, and ensure that all business transactions are conducted solely in the best interests of the Company;\n- · are aware of, and comply with laws and regulations relevant to the Company's operations including environmental and trade laws both in Australia and abroad;\n- · protect any Company assets under their control and not use Company assets for personal purposes, without prior Company approval;\n- · do not disclose or use in any improper manner confidential information about the Company, its customers or affairs; and\n- · respect the privacy of others and comply with the Company's Privacy Policy.\n\nThe standards of conduct expected of Santos staff, including those directed at the broader stakeholder constituency of shareholders, employees, customers and the community, are also recorded in separate guidelines and policies relating to dealing in securities (refer to the next section), the\n\nenvironment, occupational health and safety and human resources. Further, a Code of Conduct, based on that developed by the Group of 100 (an association of senior finance executives from Australia's business enterprises) applies to the CFO and all other officers and employees within the finance function of the Company who have the opportunity to influence the integrity, direction and operation of the Company and its financial performance.\n\nWhere applicable, the guidelines and policies are incorporated by reference in individual contracts of employment or expressly set out in those contracts, including provisions relating to: conflicts of interest; confidentiality and restrictions against use and dissemination of information; use of Company assets; perquisites, tender processes, benefits and contact with suppliers; employment opportunity practices; privacy; training and further education support; and smoking, alcohol and drugs.\n\n## 10. GUIDELINES FOR DEALING IN SECURITIES\n\nThe Company has developed specific written guidelines that prohibit Directors and executives (and their respective associates) from acquiring, selling or otherwise trading in the Company's shares if they possess material price-sensitive information which is not in the public domain.\n\nPursuant to these guidelines, no person may deal in securities while they are in the possession of price sensitive information. In other circumstances, Directors must inform and receive\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\n33", + "recall": 0.9795918367346939, + "true_md": "## 9. ETHICAL STANDARDS AND CODE OF CONDUCT\n\n## 10. GUIDELINES FOR DEALING IN SECURITIES\n\n- • MANAGEMENT OF EXPLORATION RISK – exploration risk is managed through internal control systems which include: formalised risk assessment procedures at the functional level; corporate review in both prospect and hindsight; Board approval of exploration budgets; and regular reporting on progress to the Board. External reviews are also undertaken as necessary.\n\n- • INVESTMENT APPRAISAL – the Company has clearly defined procedures for capital expenditure. These include: annual budgets; detailed appraisal and review procedures; levels of authority; and due diligence requirements where assets are being acquired.\n\n- • FINANCIAL REPORTING – a comprehensive budgeting system exists with an annual budget approved by the Board. Monthly actual results are reported against budget and, where applicable, revised forecasts for the year are prepared and reported to the Board. Speculative transactions are prohibited. Further details relating to financial instruments and commodity price risk management are included in Note 32 of the Financial Statements.\n\n- • FUNCTIONAL REPORTING – all significant areas of Company operations are subject to regular reporting to the Board. The Board receives regular reports on the performance of each functional area, including: operations; gas marketing and commercialisation; liquids marketing; corporate and people; legal and secretariat; geoscience, exploration and new ventures; development and technical services; finance; safety; government; investor relations and environmental matters.\n\n- • avoid conflicts of interest, and ensure that all business transactions are conducted solely in the best interests of the Company;\n\n- • are aware of, and comply with laws and regulations relevant to the Company’s operations including environmental and trade laws both in Australia and abroad;\n\n- • protect any Company assets under their control and not use Company assets for personal purposes, without prior Company approval;\n\n- • do not disclose or use in any improper manner confidential information about the Company, its customers or affairs; and\n\n- • respect the privacy of others and comply with the Company’s Privacy Policy.\n\nthrough: a comprehensive Environmental Health and Safety Management System based on Australian Standard 4801 and International Standard 14001; environmental and safety committees at Board and management levels; the retention of specialist environmental and safety staff and advisors; regular internal and external environmental and safety audits; and imposing environmental care and safety accountability as line management responsibilities. The role of the Environmental and Safety Committee is documented in a Charter, approved by the Board. The current members of the Environmental and Safety Committee are: Mr S Gerlach (Chairman), Mr P C Barnett, Mr M A O’Leary and Mr J C Ellice- Flint.\n\nTo promote high standards of corporate governance and ethical conduct the Company has provided its employees with a clear set of rules, values and guidelines to follow when carrying out their work as a Santos employee and representative. In addition to the Board Guidelines, the Company has adopted a Code of Conduct which prescribes that, in addition to compliance with all applicable legal requirements,\n\nThe standards of conduct expected of Santos staff, including those directed at the broader stakeholder constituency of shareholders, employees, customers and the community, are also recorded in separate guidelines and policies relating to dealing in securities (refer to the next section), the\n\nPursuant to these guidelines, no person may deal in securities while they are in the possession of price sensitive information. In other circumstances, Directors must inform and receive\n\nThe Company has developed specific written guidelines that prohibit Directors and executives (and their respective associates) from acquiring, selling or otherwise trading in the Company’s shares if they possess material price-sensitive information which is not in the public domain.\n\nWhere applicable, the guidelines and policies are incorporated by reference in individual contracts of employment or expressly set out in those contracts, including provisions relating to: conflicts of interest; confidentiality and restrictions against use and dissemination of information; use of Company assets; perquisites, tender processes, benefits and contact with suppliers; employment opportunity practices; privacy; training and further education support; and smoking, alcohol and drugs.\n\nthe Board expects all Directors, executives and employees of the Company to adopt appropriate standards of professional and business conduct in their dealings on behalf of the Company. In addition, the Board, in conjunction with executive management, has implemented procedures designed to ensure compliance by all employees with those standards.\n\nIn particular, the Code of Conduct requires that Directors and employees:\n\nenvironment, occupational health and safety and human resources. Further, a Code of Conduct, based on that developed by the Group of 100 (an association of senior finance executives from Australia’s business enterprises) applies to the CFO and all other officers and employees within the finance function of the Company who have the opportunity to influence the integrity, direction and operation of the Company and its financial performance.\n\nAnnual Report 2004 33" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.823453876943162, + "doc_id": "f09b47ee655b3c45889d2a905affbf7b9e0f8d4448da71ff82a741b1d273a22c", + "edit_distance": 0.5592105263157895, + "f1_score": 0.9187675070028012, + "meteor": 0.8448988764044943, + "precision": 0.9425287356321839, + "pred_md": "N ew technology tools made The Hartford Experiencecustomer solutions, ease of doing business and extraordinary service-more real than ever for our customers in 2001.\n\nIt was a year that saw the debut of life operations' Hartford Investor Web portal, expanded Web portals for group benefits administrators, and enhancements to technology for The Hartford's property-casualty agents and customers.\n\nHartford Investor is both a versatile personal assistant and an aid in wholesaling, especially for the independent financial planner channel. Broker-dealers and financial advisors can use it to research The Hartford's full complement of individual life and investment products, update their books of business in seconds, track daily fund performance, run financialplanning models, receive online product training, produce customized presentations and even submit business electronically.\n\nIn short, the portal allows The Hartford to bring products and functions from a variety of sources into one convenient online environment.\n\nHartford Investor has two strategic objectives: One, deepen current intermediaries' loyalty to The Hartford by extending The Hartford Experience right to their desktops. Two, expand the network of intermediaries by giving them the technological support they need to grow their businesses.\n\nMore than 153,000 licensed intermediaries-from solo advisors to members of large financial institutions-are appointed to sell The Hartford's products. Yet fewer than 60,000 actively write business for the company. The untapped potential is vast, especially among independents, the fastest-growing distribution channel and the only one in which The Hartford doesn't hold the largest market share.\n\nThat's bound to change. With Hartford Investor available on their desktops, intermediaries will have far\n\n21", + "recall": 0.8961748633879781, + "true_md": "## technology\n\nIn short, the portal allows The Hartford to bring products and functions from a variety of sources into one convenient online environment.\n\nN ew technology tools made The Hartford Experience— customer solutions, ease of doing business and extraordinary service—more real than ever for our cus- tomers in 2001. \n\nHartford Investor has two strategic objectives: One, deepen current intermediaries’ loyalty to The Hartford by extending The Hartford Experience right to their desktops. Two, expand the network of intermedi- aries by giving them the technological support they need to grow their businesses.\n\nIt was a year that saw the debut of life operations’ Hartford Investor Web portal, expanded Web portals for group benefits administrators, and enhancements to technology for The Hartford’s property-casualty agents and customers.\n\nHartford Investor is both a versatile personal assistant and an aid in wholesaling, especially for the independent financial planner channel. Broker-dealers and financial advisors can use it to research The Hartford’s full complement of individual life and invest- ment products, update their books of business in seconds, track daily fund performance, run financial- planning models, receive online product training, produce customized presentations and even submit business electronically. \n\nMore than 153,000 licensed intermediaries—from solo advisors to members of large financial institu- tions—are appointed to sell The Hartford’s products. Yet fewer than 60,000 actively write business for the company. The untapped potential is vast, especially among independents, the fastest-growing distribution channel and the only one in which The Hartford doesn’t hold the largest market share.\n\nThat’s bound to change. With Hartford Investor available on their desktops, intermediaries will have far \n\n21" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9540905521011308, + "doc_id": "6347307bf32e6c6be7543ee0db6f94ba9adaa8c1b19ac37e14892c4f847ee9a0", + "edit_distance": 0.041916167664670656, + "f1_score": 0.9840000000000001, + "meteor": 0.9709099810718896, + "precision": 0.9879518072289156, + "pred_md": "brand awareness. The Teana represents the first step, symbolizing the excellence of our product and reputation to the public.\n\nDespite a tough market in 2004, DFL sold 66,000 DFL-produced Nissan-branded passenger vehicles in the first half of 2005 alone. This was a result of the new lineup, our strong brand image, and a creative pricing strategy. Based on the first-half sales results, DFL has moved to ninth among automakers in China. Our target for this year is to sell close to 170,000 Nissan-branded passenger vehicles. DFL will produce 140,000 of those, which is more than double last year's sales, and approximately 30,000 will be Zhenzhou-produced vehicles and imported vehicles. We also estimate sales of roughly 100,000 DFL-produced light commercial vehicles. It's a big challenge, but we're very confident of achieving this.\n\nThere are risks in China, but that is true of any market. Today, I see the country as a regular market for Nissan. The most serious ones are heavy competition, exchange rate fluctuations and possible increased macroeconomic control by the government. To minimize these risks and maximize our opportunities, we rely on two basic strategies: stay market-driven, and turn out excellent products. DFL has the product, sales network, factories and R&D essential to succeeding in this market.\n\nTIIDA\n\nTIIDA\n\nTEANA\n\nFUGA\n\nI believe the opportunities in China far outweigh the risks. Despite heightened political tensions last year, orders and dealer traffic remained steady. DFL has set a sales target of 300,000 Nissan-brand passenger vehicles in fiscal 2007. We also began construction on a new engine factory in Huadu that will have a capacity of 300,000 engines per year. This provides new opportunities for cooperation with Renault and increases our localization level to nearly 80 percent.\n\nOne of the reasons for DFL's success is that we manage the company based on mid- and long-term plans. In 2004, we developed and implemented strategies for DFL, such as brand building with the Teana. Based on that foundation, we brought more products to market, such as the Tiida in 2005. These cars are targeted at a segment that has huge potential. Given China's own potential, we foresee significant overall growth in the long term. We have set high targets for NISSAN Value-Up and I am confident that we will achieve them.\n\nNissan has set the standard for establishing operations in China. Now we're analyzing the market as we have done elsewhere. We want to understand the customer and the market better so that we can deliver excellent products. With this approach, we will succeed in the emerging market of China.'\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\n65\n\nOUR WORLD", + "recall": 0.9800796812749004, + "true_md": "brand awareness. The Teana represents the first step, symbolizing the excellence of our product and reputation to the public.\n\nDespite a tough market in 2004, DFL sold 66,000 DFL-produced Nissan-branded passenger vehicles in the first half of 2005 alone. This was a result of the new lineup, our strong brand image, and a creative pricing strategy.\n\nBased on the first-half sales results, DFL has moved to ninth among automakers in China. Our target for this year is to sell close to 170,000 Nissan-branded passenger vehicles. DFL will produce 140,000 of those, which is more than double last year’s sales, and approximately 30,000 will be Zhenzhou-produced vehicles and imported vehicles.\n\nWe also estimate sales of roughly 100,000 DFL-produced light commercial vehicles. It’s a big challenge, but we’re very confident of achieving this. \n\nThere are risks in China, but that is true of any market.\n\nToday, I see the country as a regular market for Nissan.\n\nThe most serious ones are heavy competition, exchange rate fluctuations and possible increased macroeconomic control by the government. To minimize these risks and maximize our opportunities, we rely on two basic strategies: stay market-driven, and turn out excellent products. DFL has the product, sales network, factories and R&D essential to succeeding in this market. \n\nI believe the opportunities in China far outweigh the risks. Despite heightened political tensions last year, orders and dealer traffic remained steady. DFL has set a sales target of 300,000 Nissan-brand passenger vehicles in fiscal 2007. We also began construction on a new engine factory in Huadu that will have a capacity of 300,000 engines per year. This provides new opportunities for cooperation with Renault and increases our localization level to nearly 80 percent. \n\nOne of the reasons for DFL’s success is that we manage the company based on mid- and long-term plans.\n\nIn 2004, we developed and implemented strategies for DFL, such as brand building with the Teana. Based on that foundation, we brought more products to market, such as the Tiida in 2005. These cars are targeted at a segment that has huge potential. Given China’s own potential, we foresee significant overall growth in the long term. We have set high targets for NISSAN Value-Up and I am confident that we will achieve them. \n\nNissan has set the standard for establishing operations in China. Now we’re analyzing the market as we have done elsewhere. We want to understand the customer and the market better so that we can deliver excellent products.\n\nWith this approach, we will succeed in the emerging market of China.”\n\nFUGA\n\nTEANA\n\nTIIDA\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 65\n\nOUR WORLD" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7826019661693611, + "doc_id": "8ad4900e7ebd38c18d3459d2138e5be7118d89e79370e19bebbf4b1421595700", + "edit_distance": 0.5068493150684932, + "f1_score": 0.8943089430894309, + "meteor": 0.839785032892106, + "precision": 0.9322033898305084, + "pred_md": "most dynamic sources of business growth. In 2001 the company's link to AARP's Web site accounted for much of the $55 million worth of auto business The Hartford generated over the Internet.\n\nBecause The Hartford quotes and issues this business online (and added online billing in 2001), acquisition and processing costs are 15 to 20 percent lower than those of traditional direct-marketing or face-toface sales. Because of this and other factors, the expense ratio for AARP business is 30 percent below that of the industry in general. And the customer renewal rate is 96 percent, versus the industry's 88 percent, making the AARP program yield some of the most profitable auto business The Hartford writes.\n\nThe relationship also has The Hartford thinking ahead toward new business and an even stronger relationship with AARP members. The Hartford can crossmarket auto insurance to homeowner's customers and homeowner's insurance to auto customers, which presents a tremendous growth opportunity. In addition,\n\nThe Hartford is committed to providing value to AARP members in many ways. An example: The Hartford and AARP work with the MIT Age Lab to produce information-available in print and on both partners' Web sites-advising AARP members about Alzheimer's disease and other forms of dementia as they affect driving ability. The information guides caregivers struggling with difficult decisions about family members' safety behind the wheel. The resource-a customer solution like no other-helps enhance the superior value The Hartford provides to AARP members.\n\nAlthough it's the most comprehensive, the AARP relationship isn't The Hartford's only affinity program. The company also has affinity arrangements with USAA and other companies. Regardless of the program's size, the affinity partners share the right qualities: strong name-brand recognition, first-class marketing and a broad and loyal customer base.\n\nIn other words, they share some of The Hartford's core attributes.\n\n14", + "recall": 0.859375, + "true_md": "most dynamic sources of business growth. In 2001 the company’s link to AARP’s Web site accounted for much of the $55 million worth of auto business The Hartford generated over the Internet.\n\nBecause The Hartford quotes and issues this busi- ness online (and added online billing in 2001), acquisi- tion and processing costs are 15 to 20 percent lower than those of traditional direct-marketing or face-to- face sales. Because of this and other factors, the expense ratio for AARP business is 30 percent below that of the industry in general. And the customer renewal rate is 96 percent, versus the industry’s 88 per- cent, making the AARP program yield some of the most profitable auto business The Hartford writes.\n\nThe relationship also has The Hartford thinking ahead toward new business and an even stronger rela- tionship with AARP members. The Hartford can cross- market auto insurance to homeowner’s customers and homeowner’s insurance to auto customers, which presents a tremendous growth opportunity. In addition,\n\nIn other words, they share some of The Hartford’s core attributes.\n\nAlthough it’s the most comprehensive, the AARP relationship isn’t The Hartford’s only affinity program. The company also has affinity arrangements with USAA and other companies. Regardless of the pro- gram’s size, the affinity partners share the right quali- ties: strong name-brand recognition, first-class marketing and a broad and loyal customer base.\n\nThe Hartford is committed to providing value to AARP members in many ways. An example: The Hartford and AARP work with the MIT Age Lab to produce informa- tion—available in print and on both partners’ Web sites—advising AARP members about Alzheimer’s dis- ease and other forms of dementia as they affect driving ability. The information guides caregivers struggling with difficult decisions about family members’ safety behind the wheel. The resource—a customer solution like no other—helps enhance the superior value The Hartford provides to AARP members.\n\n14" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9378901651082772, + "doc_id": "8896b00dc0289252c266b99bf334529288e76790327f5dd77292f722124ff6ea", + "edit_distance": 0.09775967413441955, + "f1_score": 0.9887133182844244, + "meteor": 0.9687240823181448, + "precision": 0.9909502262443439, + "pred_md": "SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## Note 7. Significant Contractual Relationship (Continued)\n\nAs part of the Amended Agreement signed January 30, 2004, the Company and Sprint resolved several outstanding issues. The result of the resolution of these disputes was a favorable adjustment to operating income of $0.7 million for the settlement of a dispute related to inter-market travel revenue generated by certain other Affiliate subscribers traveling in the Company's market, and a reduction to previously billed disputed software maintenance fees from a reallocation of the fees from Sprint on a per subscriber basis versus the prior allocation which was on a per switch basis.\n\nThe Sprint Agreements require the Company to maintain certain minimum network performance standards and to meet other performance requirements. The Company was in compliance in all-material respects with these requirements as of December 31, 2003.\n\nGoing forward, the adoption of the Amended Agreement will allow the Company to better project the fees it will pay to Sprint for its cash cost per user (CCPU) per month related to certain billing, customer services and other service costs, and certain defined costs per gross add (CPGA). The CCPU charge from Sprint is fixed at $7.70 per subscriber through the end of 2006, and certain defined CPGA are the lower of $25.00 or 6.3% of Sprint's published CPGA figure.\n\n## Note 8. Related Party Transactions\n\nValleyNet, an equity method investee of the Company, resells capacity on the Company's fiber network under an operating lease agreement. Facility lease revenue from ValleyNet was approximately $3.1 million, $3.5 million and $4.1 million in 2003, 2002 and 2001, respectively. At December 31, 2003, 2002 and 2001, the Company had accounts receivable from ValleyNet of approximately $0.4 million, $0.4 million and $0.4 million, respectively. The Company's PCS operating subsidiary leases capacity through ValleyNet fiber facilities. Payment for usage of these facilities was $0.8 million in 2003, and $1.2 million in 2002 and 2001.\n\nVirginia Independent Telephone Alliance, (VITAL), another equity method investee of the Company, provides SS7 signaling services to the Company. These transactions are recorded as expense on the Company's books and were less than $30 thousand in each of the 2003, 2002 and 2001.\n\n## Note 9. Retirement Plans\n\nThe Company maintains a noncontributory defined benefit pension plan and a separate defined contribution plan. The following table presents the defined benefit plan's funded status and amounts recognized in the Company's consolidated balance sheets.\n\nSHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY\n\n30\n\n■", + "recall": 0.9864864864864865, + "true_md": "SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## Note 7. Significant Contractual Relationship (Continued)\n\nAs part of the Amended Agreement signed January 30, 2004, the Company and Sprint resolved several outstanding issues. The result of the resolution of these disputes was a favorable adjustment to operating income of $0.7 million for the settlement of a dispute related to inter-market travel revenue generated by certain other Affiliate subscribers traveling in the Company’s market, and a reduction to previously billed disputed software maintenance fees from a re- allocation of the fees from Sprint on a per subscriber basis versus the prior allocation which was on a per switch basis.\n\nThe Sprint Agreements require the Company to maintain certain minimum network performance standards and to meet other performance requirements. The Company was in compliance in all-material respects with these requirements as of December 31, 2003.\n\nGoing forward, the adoption of the Amended Agreement will allow the Company to better project the fees it will pay to Sprint for its cash cost per user (CCPU) per month related to certain billing, customer services and other service costs, and certain defined costs per gross add (CPGA). The CCPU charge from Sprint is fixed at $7.70 per subscriber through the end of 2006, and certain defined CPGA are the lower of $25.00 or 6.3% of Sprint’s published CPGA figure.\n\nValleyNet, an equity method investee of the Company, resells capacity on the Company’s fiber network under an operating lease agreement. Facility lease revenue from ValleyNet was approximately $3.1 million, $3.5 million and $4.1 million in 2003, 2002 and 2001, respectively. At December 31, 2003, 2002 and 2001, the Company had accounts receivable from ValleyNet of approximately $0.4 million, $0.4 million and $0.4 million, respectively. The Company’s PCS operating subsidiary leases capacity through ValleyNet fiber facilities. Payment for usage of these facilities was $0.8 million in 2003, and $1.2 million in 2002 and 2001.\n\nVirginia Independent Telephone Alliance, (VITAL), another equity method investee of the Company, provides SS7 signaling services to the Company. These transactions are recorded as expense on the Company’s books and were less than $30 thousand in each of the 2003, 2002 and 2001.\n\nThe Company maintains a noncontributory defined benefit pension plan and a separate defined contribution plan. The following table presents the defined benefit plan’s funded status and amounts recognized in the Company’s consolidated balance sheets.\n\n## Note 8. Related Party Transactions\n\n## Note 9. Retirement Plans\n\nSHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY ■ 30" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.365928366587394, + "doc_id": "2e62ed7de6ffd1fa0911e94eab9942eb8ae484b9d99457a88cb4f0c5e8f94b03", + "edit_distance": 0.6329479768786127, + "f1_score": 0.6863468634686347, + "meteor": 0.8267802889813725, + "precision": 0.5224719101123596, + "pred_md": "SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## Note 14. Segment Reporting\n\nThe Company, as a holding company with various operating subsidiaries, has identified ten reporting segments based on the products and services each provides. Each segment is managed and evaluated separately because of differing technologies and marketing strategies.\n\nThe reporting segments and the nature of their activities are as follows:\n\nShenandoah Telecommunications Company (Holding)\n\nHolding company, which invests in both affiliated and non-affiliated companies.\n\nShenandoah Telephone Company (Telephone)\n\nProvides both regulated and unregulated telephone services and leases fiber optic facilities primarily throughout the Northern Shenandoah Valley.\n\nShenandoah Cable Television Company (CATV)\n\nProvides cable television service in Shenandoah County.\n\nShenTel Service Company (ShenTel)\n\nProvides Internet access to a multi-state region surrounding the Northern Shenandoah Valley, hosts Travel 511 for Virginia, and sells and services telecommunication equipment.\n\nShenandoah Valley Leasing Company (Leasing)\n\nFinances purchases of telecommunications equipment to customers of other segments.\n\nShenandoah Mobile Company (Mobile)\n\nProvides tower rental space in the Company's PCS markets and paging services throughout the Northern Shenandoah Valley.\n\nShenandoah Long Distance Company (Long Distance)\n\nProvides long distance services.\n\nShenandoah Network Company (Network)\n\nLeases interstate fiber optic facilities.\n\nShenTel Communications Company (Shen Comm)\n\nProvides DSL services as a CLEC operation.\n\nShenandoah Personal Communications Company (PCS)\n\nAs a PCS Affiliate of Sprint, provides digital wireless service to a portion of a four-state area covering the region from Harrisburg, York and Altoona, Pennsylvania, to Harrisonburg, Virginia.\n\nThe accounting policies of the segments are the same as those described in the summary of significant accounting policies. Each segment accounts for inter-segment sales and transfers as if the sales or transfers were to outside parties.\n\nIncome (loss) recognized from equity method nonaffiliated investees by segment is as follows:\n\n35\n\n2003 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n■", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## Note 14. Segment Reporting\n\nThe Company, as a holding company with various operating subsidiaries, has identified ten reporting segments based on the products and services each provides. Each segment is managed and evaluated separately because of differing technologies and marketing strategies.\n\nThe reporting segments and the nature of their activities are as follows:\n\nThe accounting policies of the segments are the same as those described in the summary of significant accounting policies. Each segment accounts for inter-segment sales and transfers as if the sales or transfers were to outside parties.\n\nIncome (loss) recognized from equity method nonaffiliated investees by segment is as follows:\n\n35 ■ 2003 ANNUAL REPORT" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8107212331205018, + "doc_id": "57b7d571427a6aab4c2bf4e23c50c641d5a0dbf48018ecdc3987d367c15c3c65", + "edit_distance": 0.13916500994035785, + "f1_score": 0.927601809954751, + "meteor": 0.8672571629928574, + "precision": 0.9360730593607306, + "pred_md": "E u ronet and its subsidiaries operate in two business segments: (1) a segment that provides an independent shared ATM network and other e l onic payment network services to banks, retail and financial institutions (the 'Network Services Segment'); and (2) a segment that ectr p roduces application software and solutions for payment and transaction delivery systems (the 'Software Solutions Segment'). These business segments are supported by a corporate service segment which provides corporate and other administrative services which are not d i ectly identifiable with the two business segments, (the 'Corporate Services Segment'). The accounting policies of each segment are the r same as those described in the summary of significant accounting policies. The Company evaluates perf o rmance based on profit or loss fro m operations before income taxes not including nonre c u rring gains and net loss. Prior period segment information has been restated to conform to the current period's presentation.\n\nAs the Network Services Segment continued to grow throughout 1999, the Company's management began to divide the internal org a n i z a t i o n of the segment into Sub-segments. Accord i n g l y , beginning in January 2000, the Company divided the Network Services Segment into thre e Sub-segments: 'Central European Sub-segment' (including Hungary, Poland, the Czech Republic, Croatia, Greece and Romania), 'We s t e rn E u ropean Sub-segment' (including Germ a n y, France, and the United Kingdom) and 'Other Operations Sub-segment' (including the United States and unallocated processing center costs). Where practical, certain amounts have been reclassified to reflect the change in intern a l re p ting. The Company is unable to present Network Services Segment assets by Sub-segment as of December 31, 1999. Prior to January 1, or 2000, certain assets that were used to provide support services to the Company as a whole were included in the assets in the balance sheet of the Company's wholly owned Hungarian subsidiary, Bank Tech. In order to segregate corporate assets from those of the Hungarian operations, these assets were transferred as of December 31, 1999, from Bank Tech to an existing Hungarian shell company, Administrative S e vices. Those assets are now shown under the Other Operations Sub-segment. r\n\nThe following tables present the segment results of the Company's operations for the years ended December 31, 2000, 1999 and 1998.\n\n4 1", + "recall": 0.9192825112107623, + "true_md": "## (19) Business Segment Information\n\nE u ronet and its subsidiaries operate in two business segments: (1) a segment that provides an independent shared ATM network and other e l e c t ronic payment network services to banks, retail and financial institutions (the “Network Services Segment”); and (2) a segment that p roduces application software and solutions for payment and transaction delivery systems (the “Software Solutions Segment”). These business segments are supported by a corporate service segment which provides corporate and other administrative services which are not d i rectly identifiable with the two business segments, (the “Corporate Services Segment”). The accounting policies of each segment are the same as those described in the summary of significant accounting policies. The Company evaluates perf o rmance based on profit or loss fro m operations before income taxes not including nonre c u rring gains and net loss. Prior period segment information has been restated to conform to the current period’s presentation. \n\nAs the Network Services Segment continued to grow throughout 1999, the Company’s management began to divide the internal org a n i z a t i o n of the segment into Sub-segments. Accord i n g l y, beginning in January 2000, the Company divided the Network Services Segment into thre e Sub-segments: “Central European Sub-segment” (including Hungary, Poland, the Czech Republic, Croatia, Greece and Romania), “We s t e rn E u ropean Sub-segment” (including Germ a n y, France, and the United Kingdom) and “Other Operations Sub-segment” (including the United States and unallocated processing center costs). Where practical, certain amounts have been reclassified to reflect the change in intern a l re p o rting. The Company is unable to present Network Services Segment assets by Sub-segment as of December 31, 1999. Prior to January 1, 2000, certain assets that were used to provide support services to the Company as a whole were included in the assets in the balance sheet of the Company’s wholly owned Hungarian subsidiary, Bank Tech. In order to segregate corporate assets from those of the Hungarian operations, these assets were transferred as of December 31, 1999, from Bank Tech to an existing Hungarian shell company, Administrative S e rvices. Those assets are now shown under the Other Operations Sub-segment. \n\nThe following tables present the segment results of the Company’s operations for the years ended December 31, 2000, 1999 and 1998. \n\nYear Ended December 31, 2000\n\nNetwork Serv i c e s\n\nYear Ended December 31, 2000\n\nNetwork Serv i c e s\n\n4 1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7025167779819551, + "doc_id": "49d242aa60d5d7d896d3b684f9b7d304408b0efdb3494e8461035535e1c09808", + "edit_distance": 0.27906976744186046, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.783353010625738, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEETS\n\n## December 31, 2003, 2002 and 2001\n\nin thousands\n\nSee accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.\n\nSHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY\n\n12\n\n■", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEETS\n\n## December 31, 2003, 2002 and 2001 in thousands\n\nDecember 31, 2003, 2002 and 2001 in thousands\n\nSee accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.\n\nSHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY ■ 12" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7726881237754151, + "doc_id": "9ff9619bc3ed5b78b2438a46ab857047afe4db0119afe050659c99362f2026a3", + "edit_distance": 0.8900126422250316, + "f1_score": 0.8970189701897018, + "meteor": 0.7085608761722059, + "precision": 0.8710526315789474, + "pred_md": "2002\n\nWORLDWIDE REVENUES\n\noperations throughout the world. These actions are key to re than 1,000 scientists and researchers in our reaching this goal of profitability. The optical fiber and cable . They are at the heart of our innovation engin have mo laboratories and they'r\n\nThe optical components market remains very weak and asorld - who are continuing to move us forward toward a result our photonic technologies business will need to take They have been through a lot during this downturn, further action to reduce costs. In this challenging environment, e done our best to set a tone of open, honest we have narrowed our product focus and continue to explorecation, even when the news hasn't been good. In the several strategic options. Lastly, we are continuing to drive down costs in our administrative and staff functions by standardizing processes and centralizing activities wherever possible. And in investing in our future, we are talking about more tha just our scientific labs. We are continuing to invest in people-all 23,200 of them, in plants and offices throughout the w our goals. and we hav communi year ahead, I've told our managers to place special emphasis on our Value of The Individual … knowing that, in the end, the commitment and contribution of all our employees will determine our success.\n\nbusiness remains challenging for the short term, but there is e going to stay that way! still a great deal of long-term value to be realized in this business. We believe our cost structure is coming in line with our current reduced revenue expectations.\n\n## L O O K I N G A H E A D\n\nAs a company, we have been through an extraordinarily difficult time. We continue to face some formidable challenges. But we are facing them with some equally formidable strengths.\n\nAnd as we reach that goal of profitability-as a smaller, more focused, yet highly diverse and balanced company - we are confident that you, our shareholders, will experience greater returns on your investments.\n\n## IN V E S T I N G I N O U R F U T U R E\n\nCorning Incorporated is more than the sum of its parts-much more than a commercial enterprise.\n\nemerging from our 152-year legacy of scientific innovations. one company with a proud history of innovation We are concentrating our efforts on high-impact, near-term more than 150 years. That legacy has created a growth initiatives with emphasis on our liquid-crystal display, siness portfolio and strong market leadership. We are spanning diverse bu\n\nAnd we are certainly not giving up on optical communica- de our every action. We also hold dear the pride o by far, and continue to be the low-cost producer for anyoneers, customers and employees understand that your needing to move information from place to place. So while tion has, for more than 150 years, produced useful we've scaled back on production of fiber and other optical stry-creating products that have changed the lives We have a time-tested set of Values and we rely on them to gui associatio that all who touch our corporation feel. Sharehold corpora and indu of mankind\n\nI continue to be extremely excited about the future opportunities diesel filter, and chemical processing projects.\n\ntions. We have the biggest share of the optical fiber market, n products, we certainly believe that they will continue to be . an important part of our product mix again in the future. The optical communications industry is still in its infancy and we will capitalize on our leadership position to grow both our earnings and return on shareholder equity.\n\nIn our long history, we've always come together in the face of a tough challenge - and you can count on us to continue doing exactly that. I thank you for your continued confidenc and assure you that we will succeed!\n\nYes, we have trimmed our investment in research to a level appropriate with our lowered revenues. But we're committed to research today even more than we have been in the past. Sincerely,\n\nWe are applying more than 10 percent of our revenues toward research. Some may question this high level of commitment in . Houghton these times … but we simply will not back away from it. We an and Chief Executive Officer James R Chairm\n\n3", + "recall": 0.9245810055865922, + "true_md": "2002 WORLDWIDE REVENUES\n\noperations throughout the world. These actions are key to reaching this goal of profitability. The optical fiber and cable business remains challenging for the short term, but there is still a great deal of long-term value to be realized in this business. We believe our cost structure is coming in line with our current reduced revenue expectations.\n\nThe optical components market remains very weak and as a result our photonic technologies business will need to take further action to reduce costs. In this challenging environment, we have narrowed our product focus and continue to explore several strategic options.\n\nLastly, we are continuing to drive down costs in our adminis- trative and staff functions by standardizing processes and centralizing activities wherever possible. \n\nAnd as we reach that goal of profitability — as a smaller, more focused, yet highly diverse and balanced company — we are confident that you, our shareholders, will experience greater returns on your investments.\n\nI continue to be extremely excited about the future opportunities emerging from our 152-year legacy of scientific innovations. We are concentrating our efforts on high-impact, near-term growth initiatives with emphasis on our liquid-crystal display, diesel filter, and chemical processing projects. \n\nAnd we are certainly not giving up on optical communica- tions. We have the biggest share of the optical fiber market, by far, and continue to be the low-cost producer for anyone needing to move information from place to place. So while we’ve scaled back on production of fiber and other optical products, we certainly believe that they will continue to be an important part of our product mix again in the future. The optical communications industry is still in its infancy and we will capitalize on our leadership position to grow both our earnings and return on shareholder equity.\n\nYes, we have trimmed our investment in research to a level appropriate with our lowered revenues. But we’re committed to research today even more than we have been in the past. \n\nWe are applying more than 10 percent of our revenues toward research. Some may question this high level of commitment in these times … but we simply will not back away from it. We\n\nhave more than 1,000 scientists and researchers in our laboratories. They are at the heart of our innovation engine, and they’re going to stay that way!\n\nAnd in investing in our future, we are talking about more than just our scientific labs. We are continuing to invest in our people — all 23,200 of them, in plants and offices throughout the world — who are continuing to move us forward toward our goals. They have been through a lot during this downturn, and we have done our best to set a tone of open, honest communication, even when the news hasn’t been good. In the year ahead, I’ve told our managers to place special emphasis on our Value of The Individual … knowing that, in the end, the commitment and contribution of all our employees will determine our success.\n\nAs a company, we have been through an extraordinarily diffi- cult time. We continue to face some formidable challenges. But we are facing them with some equally formidable strengths.\n\nCorning Incorporated is more than the sum of its parts—much more than a commercial enterprise.\n\nWe are one company with a proud history of innovation spanning more than 150 years. That legacy has created a diverse business portfolio and strong market leadership.\n\nWe have a time-tested set of Values and we rely on them to guide our every action. We also hold dear the pride of association that all who touch our corporation feel. Shareholders, customers and employees understand that your corporation has, for more than 150 years, produced useful and industry-creating products that have changed the lives of mankind.\n\nIn our long history, we’ve always come together in the face of a tough challenge — and you can count on us to continue doing exactly that. I thank you for your continued confidence and assure you that we will succeed!\n\nJames R. Houghton Chairman and Chief Executive Officer\n\n## L OOKING AHEAD\n\n## I NVESTING IN OUR FUTURE\n\n3\n\nSincerely," + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8005420187969411, + "doc_id": "997f8196f3b8a0f18503b0959f8b8e711372584767a088340c18d1ddd85df07d", + "edit_distance": 0.2626970227670753, + "f1_score": 0.9252525252525253, + "meteor": 0.9166950758303852, + "precision": 0.9271255060728745, + "pred_md": "N O T E S T O C O N S O L I D A T E D F I N A N C I A L S T A T E M E N T S ( C O N T I N U E D )\n\nIt is the Company's investment policy to maintain 66 percent to 79 percent of the plan's assets in equity securities and 21 percent to 31 percent of its assets in debt securities with the balance invested in a money market account to meet liquidity requirements for distributions. The asset allocation at December 31, 2003 represents the targeted asset allocation at that time. Based upon the plan's current over-funded position, the Company expects to make no contributions to its pension plan in 2004.\n\nThe Company also sponsors a defined contribution plan for all employees. Each participant may contribute certain amounts of eligible compensation. The Company makes a matching contribution to the plan. The Company's contribution under this plan was $202,000 in 2003, $302,000 in 2002 and $258,000 in 2001.\n\n## 12 C O M M I T M E N T S A N D C O N T I N G E N C I E S\n\nThe Company is subject to legal proceedings, third-party claims and other contingencies related to product liability, regulatory, employee and other matters that arise in the ordinary course of business. In the opinion of management, the amount of potential liability with respect to these actions will not materially affect the Company's financial position, results of operations or liquidity.\n\nThe Company has arrangements with its executive officers (the 'Executives') pursuant to which the termination of their employment under certain circumstances would result in lump sum payments to the Executives. Termination under such circumstances in 2004 could result in payments aggregating $2.0 million, excluding any excise tax that may be reimbursable by the Company.\n\nIn May 1996, Halkey-Roberts began leasing the land, building and building improvements in St. Petersburg, Florida, which serve as Halkey-Roberts' headquarters and manufacturing facility, under a 10-year lease. The lease provides for monthly payments, including certain lease payment escalators, and provides for certain sublease and assignment rights. The lease also provides the right of either the landlord or Halkey-Roberts to terminate the lease on 12 months notice effective at any time after May 21, 2003. The Company has guaranteed Halkey-Roberts' payment and performance obligations under the lease. The lease is being accounted for as an operating lease, and the rental expense for the years ended December 31, 2003, 2002 and 2001 was $396,000, $384,000 and $372,000, respectively. Future minimum rental commitments under this lease are $409,000, $422,000 and $166,000 in 2004, 2005 and 2006, respectively.\n\n## QUARTERLY FINANCIAL DATA ( U N A U D I T E D ) 13\n\n## Quarterly financial data for 2003 and 2002 are as follows:\n\n- (a) Includes a $1.6 million after-tax charge ($ .96 per share) from goodwill impairment (see Note 2)\n\n22", + "recall": 0.9233870967741935, + "true_md": "NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (CONTINUED)\n\nIt is the Company’s investment policy to maintain 66 percent to 79 percent of the plan’s assets in equity securities and 21 percent to 31 percent of its assets in debt securities with the balance invested in a money market account to meet liquidity requirements for distributions. The asset allocation at December 31, 2003 represents the targeted asset allocation at that time. Based upon the plan’s current over-funded position, the Company expects to make no contributions to its pension plan in 2004.\n\nThe Company also sponsors a defined contribution plan for all employees. Each participant may contribute certain amounts of eligible compensation. The Company makes a matching contribution to the plan. The Company’s contribution under this plan was $202,000 in 2003, $302,000 in 2002 and $258,000 in 2001. \n\nThe Company is subject to legal proceedings, third-party claims and other contingencies related to product liability, regulatory, employee and other matters that arise in the ordinary course of business. In the opinion of management, the amount of potential liability with respect to these actions will not materially affect the Company’s financial position, results of operations or liquidity. \n\nThe Company has arrangements with its executive officers (the “Executives”) pursuant to which the termination of their employment under certain circumstances would result in lump sum payments to the Executives. Termination under such circumstances in 2004 could result in payments aggregating $2.0 million, excluding any excise tax that may be reimbursable by the Company.\n\nIn May 1996, Halkey-Roberts began leasing the land, building and building improvements in St. Petersburg, Florida, which serve as Halkey-Roberts’ headquarters and manufacturing facility, under a 10-year lease. The lease provides for monthly payments, including certain lease payment escalators, and provides for certain sublease and assignment rights. The lease also provides the right of either the landlord or Halkey-Roberts to terminate the lease on 12 months notice effective at any time after May 21, 2003. The Company has guaranteed Halkey-Roberts’ payment and performance obligations under the lease. The lease is being accounted for as an operating lease, and the rental expense for the years ended December 31, 2003, 2002 and 2001 was $396,000, $384,000 and $372,000, respectively. Future minimum rental commitments under this lease are $409,000, $422,000 and $166,000 in 2004, 2005 and 2006, respectively. \n\n(a) Includes a $1.6 million after-tax charge ($ .96 per share) from goodwill impairment (see Note 2)\n\n22\n\n## QUARTERLY FINANCIAL DATA (UNAUDITED) 13\n\n## 12 COMMITMENTS AND CONTINGENCIES\n\n(IN THOUSANDS, EXCEPT PER SHARE AMOUNTS)\n\n## Quarterly financial data for 2003 and 2002 are as follows:" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9390152286451394, + "doc_id": "b8c5346850bfe15dac1ab8dbfd259f0c68b79930db8655213d7ed88e35d535e7", + "edit_distance": 0.043478260869565216, + "f1_score": 0.9590163934426229, + "meteor": 0.9760556537884344, + "precision": 0.9435483870967742, + "pred_md": "## DI R E C TO R S ' DECLARATION\n\nThe directors declare that:\n\n- a) The attached financial statements and notes thereto comply with Accounting Standards;\n- b) The attached financial statements and notes thereto give a true and fair view of the financial position and performance of the company and the consolidated entity;\n- c) In the directors' opinion, the attached financial statements and notes thereto are in accordance with the Corporations Law; and\n- d) In the directors' opinion, there are reasonable grounds to believe that the company will be able to pay its debts as and when they become due and payable.\n\nAt the date of this declaration the company is within the class of companies affected by the ASIC Class Order 98/1418. The nature of the deed of cross guarantee is such that each company which is party to the deed guarantees to each creditor payment in full of any debt in accordance with the deed of cross guarantee.\n\nIn the directors' opinion, there are reasonable grounds to believe that the company and the companies to which the ASIC Class Order applies, as detailed in Note 11, will as a group be able to meet any obligations or liabilities to which they are, or may become, subject by virtue of the deed of cross guarantee.\n\nSigned in accordance with a resolution of the directors made pursuant to s.295(5) of the Corporations Law.\n\nOn behalf of the directors\n\nAlan Birchmore\n\nChairman\n\nFremantle 29 September 2000", + "recall": 0.975, + "true_md": "## DIRECTORS’ DECLARATION\n\nThe directors declare that:\n\n- a) The attached financial statements and notes thereto comply with Accounting Standards;\n\n- b) The attached financial statements and notes thereto give a true and fair view of the financial position and performance of the company and the consolidated entity;\n\n- c) In the directors’ opinion, the attached financial statements and notes thereto are in accordance with the Corporations Law; and\n\n- d) In the directors’ opinion, there are reasonable grounds to believe that the company will be able to pay its debts as and when they become due and payable.\n\nAt the date of this declaration the company is within the class of companies affected by the ASIC Class Order 98/1418. The nature of the deed of cross guarantee is such that each company which is party to the deed guarantees to each creditor payment in full of any debt in accordance with the deed of cross guarantee.\n\nIn the directors’ opinion, there are reasonable grounds to believe that the company and the companies to which the ASIC Class Order applies, as detailed in Note 11, will as a group be able to meet any obligations or liabilities to which they are, or may become, subject by virtue of the deed of cross guarantee.\n\nSigned in accordance with a resolution of the directors made pursuant to s.295(5) of the Corporations Law.\n\nOn behalf of the directors \n\nAlan Birchmore Chairman\n\nFremantle 29 September 2000\n\n62" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9670904764742887, + "doc_id": "62132700b0c889c2f3b8a241a316b7ae8fe34a967a7e22877fa533a344da593f", + "edit_distance": 0.15021459227467812, + "f1_score": 0.9802130898021307, + "meteor": 0.9638975235227182, + "precision": 0.9817073170731707, + "pred_md": "QUALITY\n\n## The Quest for Improved Quality\n\n'Quality is a crucial factor in Nissan's success. Along with trust, familiarity and differentiation, it is one of the ways we express our brand. Quality builds the trust of our customers and stakeholders, so it is also a major element in promoting the brand.\n\nQuality was a major issue for us in 2004. We were unable to reach the global goals we set because a great deal of time was spent addressing issues that arose, particularly in the U.S. The good news is that in all our newly launched vehicles, including those from the U.S., we are seeing radically better quality. This is a direct result of implementing a global quality management system. While such positive outcomes are welcome, we must continue to upgrade the quality of Nissan automobiles.\n\nTo be frank, the quality programs of the past no longer suit our organization. During the NISSAN 180 period, we redefined the Nissan Product Quality Policy and reorganized its elements. The new Quality Policy sets three goals. First, our product quality must be in the top three among automakers. Second, we will establish uniform global quality standards; this is not a single-fix solution, however, since each region may have its own requirements. And third, we will implement and continuously improve the Nissan Quality Assurance Way, a global quality assurance system.\n\nThe Quality Policy is a top-down process, whereas the Assurance Way is bottom up. The Assurance Way can be summarized as follows:\n\nFirst, we will set clear, reasonable, understandable targets for each activity, and review milestones along the way.\n\nSecond, because problems are usually discovered late in the process, we want to front-load the problem-discovery process by moving it further upstream. We must predict\n\nEIJI IMAI\n\nEIJI IMAI\n\nSenior Vice President\n\npotential problems at the engineering stage, at the supplier level, and in design models. We realize, of course, that problems will still be found during the later stages. Therefore, feedback must be submitted quickly.\n\nThe third way is to take integration to a higher level. A vehicle consists of thousands of parts, so integration is needed between various departments, such as design and engineering and engineering and production.\n\nThe other three elements of the Way are to reinforce a strong sense of responsibility, standardize our engineering process to establish a higher level of quality, and seek continuous improvement. These are all basic but essential.\n\nOne other new means of ensuring quality we've established is the Project Quality Director or 'PQD' system. I've assigned six PQDs to each of our vehicle lines, including overseas projects. The PQDs establish quality targets at the initial stages of development and at certain milestones. They also conduct quality clinic drives and test pre-production models.\n\nIn the end, quality assurance involves more than just reacting to problems; we need to prevent them from ever occurring. To accomplish that, we test out countless possible scenarios, including collecting automotive parts that have had quality problems and installing them on vehicles. This allows us to really understand the problem. We also examine used cars at several stages to evaluate how well our parts have endured under typical conditions such as sunlight and acid rain, and in comparison to those of the competition.\n\nAlthough we have standards and criteria for these potential concerns, we must assess actual trends and identify our weak points if we are going to meet customer expectations, which are getting higher all the time. To fulfill our commitments on quality, we need to examine every product throughout its entire life cycle. We must do this on a global basis, and better than before.'\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\n49\n\nOUR WORK", + "recall": 0.9787234042553191, + "true_md": "EIJI IMAI Senior Vice President\n\n## QUALITY\n\n## The Quest for Improved Quality\n\n“Quality is a crucial factor in Nissan’s success. Along with trust, familiarity and differentiation, it is one of the ways we express our brand. Quality builds the trust of our customers and stakeholders, so it is also a major element in promoting the brand. \n\nQuality was a major issue for us in 2004. We were unable to reach the global goals we set because a great deal of time was spent addressing issues that arose, particularly in the U.S. The good news is that in all our newly launched vehicles, including those from the U.S., we are seeing radically better quality. This is a direct result of implementing a global quality management system. While such positive outcomes are welcome, we must continue to upgrade the quality of Nissan automobiles. \n\nTo be frank, the quality programs of the past no longer suit our organization. During the NISSAN 180 period, we redefined the Nissan Product Quality Policy and reorganized its elements. The new Quality Policy sets three goals. First, our product quality must be in the top three among automakers. Second, we will establish uniform global quality standards; this is not a single-fix solution, however, since each region may have its own requirements.\n\nAnd third, we will implement and continuously improve the Nissan Quality Assurance Way, a global quality assurance system.\n\nThe Quality Policy is a top-down process, whereas the Assurance Way is bottom up. The Assurance Way can be summarized as follows:\n\nFirst, we will set clear, reasonable, understandable targets for each activity, and review milestones along the way. \n\nSecond, because problems are usually discovered late in the process, we want to front-load the problem-discovery process by moving it further upstream. We must predict\n\npotential problems at the engineering stage, at the supplier level, and in design models. We realize, of course, that problems will still be found during the later stages. Therefore, feedback must be submitted quickly. \n\nThe other three elements of the Way are to reinforce a strong sense of responsibility, standardize our engineering process to establish a higher level of quality, and seek continuous improvement. These are all basic but essential.\n\nOne other new means of ensuring quality we’ve established is the Project Quality Director or “PQD” system.\n\nI’ve assigned six PQDs to each of our vehicle lines, including overseas projects. The PQDs establish quality targets at the initial stages of development and at certain milestones. They also conduct quality clinic drives and test pre-production models. \n\nIn the end, quality assurance involves more than just reacting to problems; we need to prevent them from ever occurring. To accomplish that, we test out countless possible scenarios, including collecting automotive parts that have had quality problems and installing them on vehicles. This allows us to really understand the problem.\n\nWe also examine used cars at several stages to evaluate how well our parts have endured under typical conditions such as sunlight and acid rain, and in comparison to those of the competition. \n\nAlthough we have standards and criteria for these potential concerns, we must assess actual trends and identify our weak points if we are going to meet customer expectations, which are getting higher all the time. To fulfill our commitments on quality, we need to examine every product throughout its entire life cycle. We must do this on a global basis, and better than before.”\n\nOUR WORK\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 49\n\nThe third way is to take integration to a higher level. A vehicle consists of thousands of parts, so integration is needed between various departments, such as design and engineering and engineering and production." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8519571686887091, + "doc_id": "9d3b63eb28e97ac44b8f1b9ac892e238d2189786bc537a4a8739ff85c5f70bb9", + "edit_distance": 0.1223203026481715, + "f1_score": 0.9333333333333333, + "meteor": 0.9063862461099549, + "precision": 0.9640718562874252, + "pred_md": "## HON INDUSTRIES Inc. and SUBSIDIARIES\n\nclaims. The Company currently has a claim for approximately $7.6 million pending against it arising out of the bankruptcy of a customer filed in 2001. The Company was named a critical vendor by the bankruptcy court and, accordingly, was paid in full for all outstanding receivables. The claim alleges that the Company received preferential payments from the customer during the ninety days before the customer filed for bankruptcy protection. The claim was brought in February 2003. The Company has recorded an accrual with respect to this contingency, in an amount substantially less than the full amount of the claim, which represents the best estimate within the range of likely exposure and intends to vigorously defend against the claim. Given the nature of this claim, it is possible that the ultimate outcome could differ from the recorded amount. It is our opinion, after consultation with legal counsel, that additional liabilities, if any, resulting from these matters, are not expected to have a material adverse effect on our financial condition, although such matters could have a material effect on our quarterly or annual operating results and cash flows when resolved in a future period.\n\n## Looking Ahead\n\nThe Company is encouraged by indications that the economy is recovering and is cautiously optimistic that the office furniture industry will begin to rebound in the second half of 2004. Global Insight, BIFMA's forecasting consultant, increased its estimate for the industry shipment growth from 2.4% to 5.6% in 2004, with first quarter flat and improving as the year progresses.\n\nThe hearth segment is impacted by the housing market, which may experience a slight decline from record high levels, but is expected to remain at healthy levels. Management believes its strong brand recognition and new innovative product introductions in addition to strengthening distribution will allow it to grow its hearth segment.\n\nOn January 5, 2004, the Company completed the acquisition of Paoli Inc., a leading provider of wood case goods and seating. The Company intends to continue to build on Paoli's strong position in the market and excellent selling capabilities while leveraging its lean enterprise practices to achieve greater cost efficiencies and improved customer performance.\n\nThe Company's strategy is to grow its business through aggressive investment in building its brands, enhancing its strong member-owner culture, and remaining focused on its rapid continuous improvement program to continue to build best total cost. The Company plans to reinvest a large portion of its cost savings from plant\n\nconsolidations and its rapid continuous improvement program to continue to build brands, product solutions, and selling models.\n\nBecause of the following factors, as well as other variables affecting the Company's operating results, past financial performance may not be a reliable indicator of future performance, and historical trends should not be used to anticipate results or trends in future periods:\n\n- · competition within the office furniture and fireplace industries, including competition from imported products and competitive pricing;\n- · increases in the cost of raw materials, including steel, which is the Company's largest raw material category;\n- · increases in the cost of health care benefits provided by the Company;\n- · reduced demand for the Company's storage products caused by changes in office technology, including the change from paper record storage to electronic record storage;\n- · the effects of economic conditions on demand for office furniture, customer insolvencies and related bad debts, and claims against the Company that it received preferential payments;\n- · changes in demand and order patterns from the Company's customers, particularly its top ten customers, which represented approximately 36% of net sales in 2003;\n- · issues associated with acquisitions and integration of acquisitions;\n- · the ability of the Company to realize cost savings and productivity improvements from its cost containment and business simplification initiatives;\n- · the ability of the Company to realize financial benefits from investments in new products;\n- · the ability of the Company's distributors and dealers to successfully market and sell the Company's products; and\n- · the availability and cost of capital to finance planned growth.\n\n38", + "recall": 0.9044943820224719, + "true_md": "H O N I N D U S T R I E S I n c . a n d S U B S I D I A R I E S\n\nclaims. The Company currently has a claim for approximately $7.6 mil- lion pending against it arising out of the bankruptcy of a customer filed in 2001. The Company was named a critical vendor by the bankruptcy court and, accordingly, was paid in full for all outstanding receivables. The claim alleges that the Company received preferential payments from the customer during the ninety days before the customer filed for bankruptcy protection. The claim was brought in February 2003. The Company has recorded an accrual with respect to this contingency, in an amount substantially less than the full amount of the claim, which represents the best estimate within the range of likely exposure and intends to vigorously defend against the claim. Given the nature of this claim, it is possible that the ultimate outcome could differ from the recorded amount. It is our opinion, after consultation with legal coun- sel, that additional liabilities, if any, resulting from these matters, are not expected to have a material adverse effect on our financial condi- tion, although such matters could have a material effect on our quarterly or annual operating results and cash flows when resolved in a future period.\n\nThe Company is encouraged by indications that the economy is recov- ering and is cautiously optimistic that the office furniture industry will begin to rebound in the second half of 2004. Global Insight, BIFMA’s forecasting consultant, increased its estimate for the industry shipment growth from 2.4% to 5.6% in 2004, with first quarter flat and improving as the year progresses. \n\nThe hearth segment is impacted by the housing market, which may experience a slight decline from record high levels, but is expected to remain at healthy levels. Management believes its strong brand recognition and new innovative product introductions in addition to strengthening distribution will allow it to grow its hearth segment.\n\nOn January 5, 2004, the Company completed the acquisition of Paoli Inc., a leading provider of wood case goods and seating. The Company intends to continue to build on Paoli’s strong position in the market and excellent selling capabilities while leveraging its lean enter- prise practices to achieve greater cost efficiencies and improved customer performance.\n\nThe Company’s strategy is to grow its business through aggressive investment in building its brands, enhancing its strong member-owner culture, and remaining focused on its rapid continu- ous improvement program to continue to build best total cost. The Company plans to reinvest a large portion of its cost savings from plant \n\nconsolidations and its rapid continuous improvement program to con- tinue to build brands, product solutions, and selling models. \n\nBecause of the following factors, as well as other variables affecting the Company’s operating results, past financial performance may not be a reliable indicator of future performance, and historical trends should not be used to anticipate results or trends in future periods:\n\n## Looking Ahead\n\n38\n\n• competition within the office furniture and fireplace industries, including competition from imported products and competitive pricing; \n\n• increases in the cost of raw materials, including steel, which is the Company’s largest raw material category;\n\n• increases in the cost of health care benefits provided by the Company;\n\n• reduced demand for the Company’s storage products caused by changes in office technology, including the change from paper record storage to electronic record storage; \n\n• the effects of economic conditions on demand for office furniture, customer insolvencies and related bad debts, and claims against the Company that it received preferential payments; \n\n• changes in demand and order patterns from the Company’s customers, particularly its top ten customers, which represented approximately 36% of net sales in 2003; \n\n• issues associated with acquisitions and integration of acquisitions; \n\n• the ability of the Company to realize cost savings and productivity improvements from its cost containment and business simplification initiatives;\n\n• the ability of the Company to realize financial benefits from invest- ments in new products; \n\n• the ability of the Company’s distributors and dealers to successfully market and sell the Company’s products; and\n\n• the availability and cost of capital to finance planned growth." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9264511655757292, + "doc_id": "87c909d190906eb2b60e6e6f76917e6795db769b2be8dadd3879885b2c5b389d", + "edit_distance": 0.24031007751937986, + "f1_score": 0.962800875273523, + "meteor": 0.934621297512654, + "precision": 0.9777777777777777, + "pred_md": "64\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nThe Company implemented a supplemental executive retirement plan ('SERP') for certain key employees effective January 1, 2001. The SERP is a nonqualified plan under which the Company makes quarterly contributions which are intended to provide a retirement benefit that is a fixed percentage of a participant's estimated final five-year average annual salary, up to a maximum of 65%. Company contributions and investment earnings on the contributions are tax-deferred and accumulate as a retirement fund. Employees do not make contributions under this plan. A portion of the Company contributions and investment earnings thereon vests after three years of SERP participation and the remaining portion vests after both five years of SERP participation and 10 years of continuous service. The Company recorded expense of $5 million under this plan in each of 2004, 2003 and 2002.\n\nNOTE 13 - RESTRUCTURING COSTS\n\nRestructuring costs (credit) consisted of the following:\n\nIn 2004, restructuring costs include $3 million for contract termination costs related to the Aqua restaurant at Bellagio and $2 million of workforce reduction costs at MGM Grand Detroit as a result of the Company's efforts to minimize the impact of a gaming tax increase in Michigan.\n\n2003 restructuring costs included $2 million related to the closure of the Siegfried & Roy show, primarily for severance costs of employees involved in the show's\n\nproduction. Also, the Company terminated a restaurant lease and closed two marketing offices, resulting in $4 million of contract termination charges. Other severance of $1 million in 2003 related primarily to restructuring of table games staffing at several resorts.\n\nThe Company recorded $3 million of restructuring charges in December 2002 related to contract termination costs for a restaurant and the EFX! show at MGM Grand Las Vegas. In December 2002, the Company recorded a restructuring credit of $10 million related to a lease contract termination accrual originally recorded in June 2000. In December 2002 management determined that payment under this obligation was not probable. In 2001, management responded to a decline in business volumes caused by the September 11 attacks by implementing cost containment strategies which included a significant reduction in payroll and a refocusing of several of the Company's marketing programs. This resulted in a $22 million charge against earnings. As a result of improving business levels and the Company's success at re-hiring a substantial number of previously laid off or terminated employees, management determined in 2002 that a portion of the remaining accrual would now not be necessary. This resulted in a restructuring credit of $10 million.\n\nThe following table summarizes activity for restructuring accruals with a balance at December 31, 2004. All other restructuring awards have been fully paid or otherwise resolved.", + "recall": 0.9482758620689655, + "true_md": "Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements 64\n\nThe Company implemented a supplemental executive retirement plan (“SERP”) for certain key employees effective January 1, 2001. The SERP is a nonqualified plan under which the Company makes quarterly contributions which are intended to provide a retirement benefit that is a fixed percentage of a participant’s estimated final five-year average annual salary, up to a maximum of 65%. Company contribu- tions and investment earnings on the contributions are tax-deferred and accumulate as a retirement fund. Employees do not make contributions under this plan. A portion of the Company contributions and investment earnings thereon vests after three years of SERP participation and the remaining portion vests after both five years of SERP participation and 10 years of continuous service. The Company recorded expense of $5 million under this plan in each of 2004, 2003 and 2002.\n\nRestructuring costs (credit) consisted of the following:\n\nIn 2004, restructuring costs include $3 million for contract termination costs related to the Aqua restaurant at Bellagio and $2 million of workforce reduction costs at MGM Grand Detroit as a result of the Company’s efforts to minimize the impact of a gaming tax increase in Michigan.\n\n2003 restructuring costs included $2 million related to the closure of the Siegfried & Roy show, primarily for severance costs of employees involved in the show’s \n\nThe Company recorded $3 million of restructuring charges in December 2002 related to contract termination costs for a restaurant and the EFX! show at MGM Grand Las Vegas. In December 2002, the Company recorded a restructuring credit of $10 million related to a lease contract termination accrual originally recorded in June 2000. In December 2002 management determined that payment under this obligation was not probable. In 2001, management responded to a decline in busi- ness volumes caused by the September 11 attacks by implementing cost contain- ment strategies which included a significant reduction in payroll and a refocusing of several of the Company’s marketing programs. This resulted in a $22 million charge against earnings. As a result of improving business levels and the Company’s success at re-hiring a substantial number of previously laid off or terminated employees, management determined in 2002 that a portion of the remaining accrual would now not be necessary. This resulted in a restructuring credit of $10 million. \n\nproduction. Also, the Company terminated a restaurant lease and closed two marketing offices, resulting in $4 million of contract termination charges. Other severance of $1 million in 2003 related primarily to restructuring of table games staffing at several resorts.\n\nThe following table summarizes activity for restructuring accruals with a balance at December 31, 2004. All other restructuring awards have been fully paid or otherwise resolved.\n\n## NOTE 13 — RESTRUCTURING COSTS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.48882903186579435, + "doc_id": "cb81655023c5625f533fdcef26ec3c703104044a516ef13a7a2dbbeace66db0f", + "edit_distance": 0.45454545454545453, + "f1_score": 0.6666666666666666, + "meteor": 0.6226379440665155, + "precision": 0.75, + "pred_md": "MGM MIRAGE 2004 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n## defining momentum", + "recall": 0.6, + "true_md": "# MGM MIRAGE 2004 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n# def ining moment um" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "1e26ff413687892a1f3696c8e0199237a959ced1063a1a5544be7513ba6a5088", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999375, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Balanced growth. Product diversity. Market leadership.\n\nThese continue to stand as signs of our strength.\n\n5", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Balanced growth. Product diversity. Market leadership.\n\nThese continue to stand as signs of our strength.\n\n5" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8635697054758321, + "doc_id": "9e61c465632ee737ea75e0edaad735c07f592e03c4247fd40406d8850b27c133", + "edit_distance": 0.42492917847025496, + "f1_score": 0.9681159420289854, + "meteor": 0.9470096162605646, + "precision": 0.9709302325581395, + "pred_md": "PERFORMANCE\n\n8\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\n## Looking to the New Fiscal Year\n\nNissan will continue to grow in fiscal 2005. Even assuming a relatively flat total industry volume of 61 million units globally, Nissan's sales are forecast to come to 3,618,000 units, a 6.8 percent increase over the prior year.\n\nWorldwide, we will launch six all-new models-five in Japan, one in Europe-leading to twenty regional product events.\n\n## Our sales objectives\n\n- · Japan: 933,000 units, a 10 percent increase over last year\n- · U.S.: 1,047,000 units, an increase of 3.3 percent\n- · Europe: 550,000 units, a 1.1 percent increase over last year\n- · General Overseas Markets: 1,088,000 units, a 10.7 percent increase\n\n## Our financial outlook\n\nAny new fiscal year brings risks and opportunities, and 2005 brings very high levels of uncertainty and risks-volatility in exchange rates, higher interest rates, higher commodity prices, higher energy prices, higher incentives and uncertainty about growth in the U.S. and Japan. The opportunity is in following through on the NISSAN Value-Up plan quickly and effectively.\n\nIn light of these factors, our forecast for fiscal 2005 is as follows. This is based on a foreign exchange rate assumption for the year of ¥105 per dollar and ¥130 per euro:\n\n- · Net revenue is predicted to be ¥9 trillion, up 4.9 percent.\n- · Operating profit is expected to be ¥870 billion, up 1 percent.\n- · Ordinary profit is expected to reach ¥860 billion, up 0.5 percent.\n- · Net income is predicted to be ¥517 billion, up 0.9 percent.\n- · Capital expenditures are expected to reach ¥540 billion, up 13.1 percent.\n- · R&D expenses are forecast to reach ¥450 billion, or 5 percent of net sales, up 13.0 percent.\n- · ROIC is expected to remain at or above 20 percent.", + "recall": 0.9653179190751445, + "true_md": "## Looking to the New Fiscal Year\n\n## Our sales objectives\n\n## Our financial outlook\n\nPERFORMANCE\n\nNissan will continue to grow in fiscal 2005. Even assuming a relatively flat total industry volume of 61 million units globally, Nissan’s sales are forecast to come to 3,618,000 units, a 6.8 percent increase over the prior year.\n\nWorldwide, we will launch six all-new models—five in Japan, one in Europe—leading to twenty regional product events.\n\nAny new fiscal year brings risks and opportunities, and 2005 brings very high levels of uncertainty and risks—volatility in exchange rates, higher interest rates, higher commodity prices, higher energy prices, higher incentives and uncertainty about growth in the U.S. and Japan. The opportunity is in following through on the NISSAN Value-Up plan quickly and effectively.\n\nIn light of these factors, our forecast for fiscal 2005 is as follows. This is based on a foreign exchange rate assumption for the year of ¥105 per dollar and ¥130 per euro:\n\n- • Japan: 933,000 units, a 10 percent increase over last year\n\n- • U.S.: 1,047,000 units, an increase of 3.3 percent\n\n- • Europe: 550,000 units, a 1.1 percent increase over last year\n\n- • General Overseas Markets: 1,088,000 units, a 10.7 percent increase\n\n- • Net revenue is predicted to be ¥9 trillion, up 4.9 percent.\n\n- • Operating profit is expected to be ¥870 billion, up 1 percent. \n\n- • Ordinary profit is expected to reach ¥860 billion, up 0.5 percent.\n\n- • Net income is predicted to be ¥517 billion, up 0.9 percent. \n\n- • Capital expenditures are expected to reach ¥540 billion, up 13.1 percent.\n\n- • R&D expenses are forecast to reach ¥450 billion, or 5 percent of net sales, up 13.0 percent. \n\n- • ROIC is expected to remain at or above 20 percent.\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 8" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9055236400151867, + "doc_id": "8911597e281936d471d1f3fced55d23f6df16fa75d38bd97b49fbb085fb8ac65", + "edit_distance": 0.12022900763358779, + "f1_score": 0.9488752556237219, + "meteor": 0.9028083707182045, + "precision": 0.9872340425531915, + "pred_md": "allowing the development to progress rapidly.\n\nAnother important milestone was achieved in December with the completion of the 'Christmas tree' subsea wellheads which will be installed on the Casino development wells. These wells are scheduled to be drilled during the first half of 2005.\n\nThe John Brookes gas project has also progressed rapidly since it was sanctioned early in 2004 and is approximately 50% complete. This project is scheduled to come into production in mid-2005 to meet declining production from East Spar and to create additional marketing opportunities, some of which have since been realised (see page 20).\n\nThe platform jacket, constructed at Batam Island in Indonesia, is expected to be installed off Dampier, Western Australia, during April 2005. Development drilling is scheduled for the second quarter of 2005 and the onshore gas processing plant modifications at Varanus Island have commenced.\n\n## PROGRESS CONTINUES ELSEWHERE OFFSHORE\n\nThree other projects, two outside Australia, made significant progress during the year.\n\nThe development plan for the Oyong oil and gas field, offshore East Java, Indonesia, was revised to target early oil production.\n\nNegotiations are proceeding to secure a production barge for oil production to commence during the last quarter of 2005, ahead of later gas production, subject to credit security and Indonesian Government approvals.\n\nThe Maleo gas field development, also offshore East Java, remains on track for a first half 2006 production start-up. The project is on the cusp of formal sanction, with outstanding matters being execution of gas sales and gas transportation agreements.\n\nThe second stage of the BayuUndan project in the Timor Sea the US$1.5 billion LNG project also made good progress during the year. The pipeline connecting the offshore field to the LNG plant being constructed at\n\n## DEVELOPMENT CONVEYOR at 31 December 2004\n\nWickham Point, Darwin, has been laid in readiness for a planned shutdown around May 2005 to enable the tie-in of the offshore facility.\n\nOnshore progress has been steady with the total LNG project 67% complete at year end and on target for first LNG production to commence in the first half of 2006, ramping up to more than 3 million tonnes per year by 2009.\n\nFollowing the discovery of oil at Jeruk, Santos is moving rapidly to evaluate the significance of the field and development options. To this end, a 3D seismic survey over\n\nProject Lifecycle\n\nJeruk and Santos' surrounding interests was initiated in late 2004. In addition, a focused multi-disciplinary team has been assembled to assess all development options, including the potential for early production.\n\nSantos' development conveyor is functioning well, with the number of significant projects in the pre-development and development stages at a record level.", + "recall": 0.9133858267716536, + "true_md": "DEVELOPMENT CONVEYOR at 31 December 2004\n\n## PROGRESS CONTINUES ELSEWHERE OFFSHORE\n\nallowing the development to progress rapidly.\n\nAnother important milestone was achieved in December with the completion of the 'Christmas tree' subsea wellheads which will be installed on the Casino development wells. These wells are scheduled to be drilled during the first half of 2005.\n\nThe John Brookes gas project has also progressed rapidly since it was sanctioned early in 2004 and is approximately 50% complete. This project is scheduled to come into production in mid-2005 to meet declining production from East Spar and to create additional marketing opportunities, some of which have since been realised (see page 20).\n\nThe platform jacket, constructed at Batam Island in Indonesia, is expected to be installed off Dampier, Western Australia, during April 2005. Development drilling is scheduled for the second quarter of 2005 and the onshore gas processing plant modifications at Varanus Island have commenced.\n\nThree other projects, two outside Australia, made significant progress during the year.\n\nThe development plan for the Oyong oil and gas field, offshore East Java, Indonesia, was revised to target early oil production.\n\nNegotiations are proceeding to secure a production barge for oil production to commence during the last quarter of 2005, ahead of later gas production, subject to credit security and Indonesian Government approvals.\n\nThe Maleo gas field development, also offshore East Java, remains on track for a first half 2006 production start-up. The project is on the cusp of formal sanction, with outstanding matters being execution of gas sales and gas transportation agreements. \n\nThe second stage of the Bayu- Undan project in the Timor Sea – the US$1.5 billion LNG project – also made good progress during the year. The pipeline connecting the offshore field to the LNG plant being constructed at\n\nWickham Point, Darwin, has been laid in readiness for a planned shutdown around May 2005 to enable the tie-in of the offshore facility. \n\nOnshore progress has been steady with the total LNG project 67% complete at year end and on target for first LNG production to commence in the first half of 2006, ramping up to more than 3 million tonnes per year by 2009.\n\nFollowing the discovery of oil at Jeruk, Santos is moving rapidly to evaluate the significance of the field and development options. To this end, a 3D seismic survey over\n\nJeruk and Santos’ surrounding interests was initiated in late 2004. In addition, a focused multi-disciplinary team has been assembled to assess all development options, including the potential for early production.\n\nSantos' development conveyor is functioning well, with the number of significant projects in the pre-development and development stages at a record level.\n\nAnnual Report 2004 19\n\nMODEC Venture II Floating Production, Storage and Offloading vessel, en route to Mutineer- Exeter oil fields, Carnarvon Basin, offshore Western Australia." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9381447340545865, + "doc_id": "c977858d326b9aac31e8bf8f0d2a77f5893f189122a04fa4943bf108eab171e6", + "edit_distance": 0.2465753424657534, + "f1_score": 0.9787234042553192, + "meteor": 0.9702034537641817, + "precision": 0.9857142857142858, + "pred_md": "The income tax provision attributable to income from continuing operations before income taxes is as follows:\n\nReconciliation of the federal income tax statutory rate and the Company's effective tax rate is as follows:\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nThe major tax effected components of the Company's net deferred tax liability are as follows:\n\nFor U.S. federal income tax return purposes, the Company has a net operating loss carryforward of $4 million, which will begin to expire in 2009. For state income tax purposes, the Company has a New Jersey net operating loss carryforward of $122 million, which equates to a deferred tax asset of $7 million, after federal tax effect, and before valuation allowance. The New Jersey net operating loss carryforwards begin to expire in 2005.\n\n59", + "recall": 0.971830985915493, + "true_md": "Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n59\n\nThe income tax provision attributable to income from continuing operations before income taxes is as follows:\n\nThe major tax effected components of the Company’s net deferred tax liability are as follows:\n\nReconciliation of the federal income tax statutory rate and the Company’s effective tax rate is as follows:\n\nFor U.S. federal income tax return purposes, the Company has a net operating loss carryforward of $4 million, which will begin to expire in 2009. For state income tax purposes, the Company has a New Jersey net operating loss carryforward of $122 million, which equates to a deferred tax asset of $7 million, after federal tax effect, and before valuation allowance. The New Jersey net operating loss carryforwards begin to expire in 2005." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5974970909115025, + "doc_id": "8a141308f840e58be1e2e78f787d639bd1a872471d57369a7a0ff932f2cb742f", + "edit_distance": 0.7777777777777778, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.8858882030178327, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "consolidated statements of\n\n## cash flows\n\nSee notes to consolidated financial statements.\n\n34\n\nHormel Foods Corporation", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "34 Hormel Foods Corporation\n\nSee notes to consolidated financial statements.\n\n## consolidated statements of cash flows" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.02779888447867254, + "doc_id": "0261791e343389682847c913a16789776d0ba41a584901571846c7ddab3cbaa6", + "edit_distance": 0.7959459459459459, + "f1_score": 0.2533333333333333, + "meteor": 0.14288212873052025, + "precision": 0.1792452830188679, + "pred_md": "glyph<c=19,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman> œ ÀÊ `iV>`iÃ]Ê->˜“ˆ˜>‡-glyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>Ê …>ÃÊLii˜Ê>ʏi>`iÀʈ˜Ê̅iÊglyph<c=13,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=31,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>-ʈ˜`ÕÃÌÀ Þ °Ê\"«iÀ>̈˜}ʈ˜ÊœÛiÀÊÓäÊVœÕ˜ÌÀˆiÃʜ˜Ê w ÊÛiÊVœ˜Ìˆ˜i˜ÌÃ]ʜÕÀÊ£Îʓˆˆœ˜ÊõÕ>ÀiÊviiÌʜvʓ>˜Õv>VÌÕÀˆ˜}ÊV>«>VˆÌÞÊ>˜`Ê>««ÀœÝˆ“>ÌiÞÊ{n]äääÊi“«œÞiià i˜ÃÕÀiÃʜÕÀÊVÕÃ̜“iÀÃÊÀiViˆÛiÊÃÕ«iÀˆœÀÊVÕÃ̜“iÀÊÃiÀۈVi]Ê>ÃÊÜiÊ>ÃʏœV>Ê>˜`Ê}œL>Ê܏Ṏœ˜Ã°Êglyph<c=13,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>Ûi˜Ê “œÀi]ÊÜiʅ>Ûiʓ>`iÊÈ}˜ˆw ÊV>˜Ìʈ˜ÛiÃ̓i˜ÌÃʈ˜Ê iÜÊ*Àœ`ÕVÌÊglyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>˜ÌÀœ`ÕV̈œ˜Ê­ *glyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>®ÊVi˜ÌiÀÃÊ̜ʫÀœÛˆ`iÊi>ÀÞÊ «Àœ}À>“ʏˆviÊVÞViÊÃÕ««œÀÌÊ̅>ÌÊ«ÀœÛiÃÊVÀˆÌˆV>Ê̜ʓiï˜}ʜÕÀÊVÕÃ̜“iÀýÊVœÃÌÊ>˜`Ê̈“i‡Ìœ‡“>ÀŽiÌÊ œLiV̈ÛiðÊglyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>ÃÊ>ÊÀiÃՏÌʜvÊ->˜“ˆ˜>‡-glyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>½ ÃÊ}œL>ÊvœœÌ«Àˆ˜Ì]Ê`ˆÛiÀÃiÊi˜`ʓ>ÀŽiÌÃÊ>˜`ÊVÕÃ̜“iÀ‡vœVÕÃi`Ê i“«…>ÈÃ]Ê\"glyph<c=13,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=31,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>ÃÊ ÀiViˆÛiÊyi݈LiÊ>˜`ÊÀi뜘ÈÛiÊ܏Ṏœ˜ÃÊ>˜Þ܅iÀiʈ˜Ê̅iÊܜÀ`° Ê\n\nÎ\n\n-glyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman> glyph<c=31,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman> glyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>‡-glyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>", + "recall": 0.4318181818181818, + "true_md": "œ À Ê ` i V > ` i à ] Ê - > ˜ “ ˆ ˜ > ‡ - Ê … > Ã Ê L i i ˜ Ê > Ê  i > ` i À Ê ˆ ˜ Ê Ì … i Ê - Ê ˆ ˜ ` Õ Ã Ì À Þ ° Ê \" « i À > Ì ˆ ˜ } Ê ˆ ˜ Ê œ Û i À Ê Ó ä Ê V œ Õ ˜ Ì À ˆ i Ã Ê œ ˜ Ê w Ê Û i Ê V œ ˜ Ì ˆ ˜ i ˜ Ì Ã ] Ê œ Õ À Ê £ Î Ê “ ˆ   ˆ œ ˜ Ê Ã µ Õ > À i Ê v i i Ì Ê œ v Ê “ > ˜ Õ v > V Ì Õ À ˆ ˜ } Ê V > « > V ˆ Ì Þ Ê > ˜ ` Ê > « « À œ Ý ˆ “ > Ì i  Þ Ê { n ] ä ä ä Ê i “ «  œ Þ i i à i ˜ Ã Õ À i Ã Ê œ Õ À Ê V Õ Ã Ì œ “ i À Ã Ê À i V i ˆ Û i Ê Ã Õ « i À ˆ œ À Ê V Õ Ã Ì œ “ i À Ê Ã i À Û ˆ V i ] Ê > Ã Ê Ü i   Ê > Ã Ê  œ V >  Ê > ˜ ` Ê }  œ L >  Ê Ã œ  Õ Ì ˆ œ ˜ à ° Ê Û i ˜ Ê “ œ À i ] Ê Ü i Ê … > Û i Ê “ > ` i Ê Ã ˆ } ˜ ˆ w Ê V > ˜ Ì Ê ˆ ˜ Û i Ã Ì “ i ˜ Ì Ã Ê ˆ ˜ Ê i Ü Ê * À œ ` Õ V Ì Ê ˜ Ì À œ ` Õ V Ì ˆ œ ˜ Ê ­ * ® Ê V i ˜ Ì i À Ã Ê Ì œ Ê « À œ Û ˆ ` i Ê i > À  Þ Ê « À œ } À > “ Ê  ˆ v i Ê V Þ V  i Ê Ã Õ « « œ À Ì Ê Ì … > Ì Ê « À œ Û i Ã Ê V À ˆ Ì ˆ V >  Ê Ì œ Ê “ i i Ì ˆ ˜ } Ê œ Õ À Ê V Õ Ã Ì œ “ i À à ½ Ê V œ Ã Ì Ê > ˜ ` Ê Ì ˆ “ i ‡ Ì œ ‡ “ > À Ž i Ì Ê œ L  i V Ì ˆ Û i à ° Ê Ã Ê > Ê À i Ã Õ  Ì Ê œ v Ê - > ˜ “ ˆ ˜ > ‡ - ½ Ã Ê }  œ L >  Ê v œ œ Ì « À ˆ ˜ Ì ] Ê ` ˆ Û i À à i Ê i ˜ ` Ê “ > À Ž i Ì Ã Ê > ˜ ` Ê V Õ Ã Ì œ “ i À ‡ v œ V Õ Ã i ` Ê i “ « … > à ˆ à ] Ê \" Ã Ê À i V i ˆ Û i Ê y Ê i Ý ˆ L  i Ê > ˜ ` Ê À i à « œ ˜ à ˆ Û i Ê Ã œ  Õ Ì ˆ œ ˜ Ã Ê > ˜ Þ Ü … i À i Ê ˆ ˜ Ê Ì … i Ê Ü œ À  ` ° \n\nÎ - ‡ -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "1763e54be635759ccb66ebb462548f8a40d44567f62cecc5ca26f22acd28e823", + "edit_distance": 0.7959459459459459, + "f1_score": 0.2533333333333333, + "meteor": 0.14288212873052025, + "precision": 0.1792452830188679, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.4318181818181818, + "true_md": "£ Î - ‡ -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.08315088482728604, + "doc_id": "bd43746d6b9a674785cdde3ca82dcf58a5dbea0046016bc381cb419357e3d921", + "edit_distance": 0.7808219178082192, + "f1_score": 0.5357142857142857, + "meteor": 0.2347191629955947, + "precision": 0.6521739130434783, + "pred_md": "HON INDUSTRIES Inc. and SUBSIDIARIES\n\n## CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEETS\n\nThe accompanying notes are an integral part of the consolidated financial statements.\n\n40", + "recall": 0.45454545454545453, + "true_md": "H O N I N D U S T R I E S I n c . a n d S U B S I D I A R I E S\n\n## C O N S O L I D A T E D B A L A N C E S H E E T S\n\nThe accompanying notes are an integral part of the consolidated financial statements.\n\n40" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6978675188024814, + "doc_id": "59ae1b20e56861a924ad4aa263b2f9b1cc4453c6e335d067cee07d90f701d3c4", + "edit_distance": 0.27624309392265195, + "f1_score": 0.9873417721518988, + "meteor": 0.7515857992065871, + "precision": 0.9873417721518988, + "pred_md": "FINANCIAL SECTION\n\n84\n\n## 13. INCOME TAXES\n\nIncome taxes in Japan applicable to the Company and its domestic consolidated subsidiaries consist of corporation tax, inhabitants' taxes and enterprise tax, which, in the aggregate, resulted in a statutory rate of approximately 41% for 2004 and 42% for 2003 and 2002. Income taxes of the foreign consolidated subsidiaries are based generally on the tax rates applicable in their countries of incorporation.\n\nThe effective tax rates reflected in the consolidated statements of income for the years ended March 31, 2005, 2004 and 2003 differ from the statutory tax rates for the following reasons:\n\nThe significant components of deferred tax assets and liabilities at March 31, 2005 and 2004 were as follows:\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004", + "recall": 0.9873417721518988, + "true_md": "## 13. INCOME TAXES\n\nIncome taxes in Japan applicable to the Company and its domestic consolidated subsidiaries consist of corporation tax, inhabitants’ taxes and enterprise tax, which, in the aggregate, resulted in a statutory rate of approximately 41% for 2004 and 42% for 2003 and 2002. Income taxes of the foreign consolidated subsidiaries are based generally on the tax rates applicable in their countries of incorporation. The effective tax rates reflected in the consolidated statements of income for the years ended March 31, 2005, 2004 and 2003 differ from\n\nthe foreign consolidated subsidiaries are based generally on the tax rates applicable in their countries of incorporation. The effective tax rates reflected in the consolidated statements of income for the years ended March 31, 2005, 2004 and 2003 differ from the statutory tax rates for the following reasons:\n\nFINANCIAL SECTION\n\nThe significant components of deferred tax assets and liabilities at March 31, 2005 and 2004 were as follows:\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\n84" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8238350020039102, + "doc_id": "d7f37f242e2cb0fef584caa6906884097d74cd09c9697028feed38efe9e3eb55", + "edit_distance": 0.21408045977011494, + "f1_score": 0.9066666666666666, + "meteor": 0.8684153356709923, + "precision": 0.9477351916376306, + "pred_md": "HON INDUSTRIES Inc. and SUBSIDIARIES\n\n## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## Nature of Operations\n\nHON INDUSTRIES Inc., with its subsidiaries (the 'Company'), is a provider of office furniture and hearth products. Both industries are reportable segments; however, the Company's office furniture business is its principal line of business. Refer to the Operating Segment Information note for further information. Office furniture products are sold through a national system of dealers, wholesalers, mass merchandisers, warehouse clubs, retail superstores, end-user customers, and to federal and state governments. Dealer, wholesaler, and retail superstores are the major channels based on sales. Hearth products include electric, wood-, pellet-, and gas-burning factory-built fireplaces, fireplace inserts, stoves, and gas logs. These products are sold through a national system of dealers, wholesalers, large regional contractors, and Company-owned retail outlets. The Company's products are marketed predominantly in the United States and Canada. The Company exports select products to a limited number of markets outside North America, principally Latin America and the Caribbean, through its export subsidiary; however, based on sales, these activities are not significant.\n\n## Summary of Significant Accounting Policies\n\n## PRINCIPLES OF CONSOLIDATION AND FISCAL YEAR-END\n\nThe consolidated financial statements include the accounts and transactions of the Company and its subsidiaries. Intercompany accounts and transactions have been eliminated in consolidation.\n\nThe Company follows a 52/53-week fiscal year which ends on the Saturday nearest December 31. Fiscal year 2003 ended on January 3, 2004; 2002 ended on December 28, 2002; and 2001 ended on December 29, 2001. The financial statements for fiscal year 2003 are based on a 53-week period; fiscal years 2002 and 2001 are on a 52-week basis.\n\n## CASH, CASH EQUIVALENTS, AND INVESTMENTS\n\nCash and cash equivalents generally consist of cash, money market accounts, and debt securities. These securities have original maturity dates not exceeding three months from date of purchase. The Company has short-term investments with maturities of less than one year and also has investments with maturities greater than one year that are included in Other Assets on the consolidated balance sheet. Management classifies investments in marketable securities at the time of purchase and reevaluates such classification at each balance sheet\n\ndate. Equity securities are classified as available-for-sale and are stated at current market value with unrealized gains and losses included as a separate component of equity, net of any related tax effect. Debt securities are classified as held-to-maturity and are stated at amortized cost. The specific identification method is used to determine realized gains and losses on the trade date. Short-term investments include municipal bonds, money market preferred stock, and U.S. treasury notes. Longterm investments include U.S. government securities, municipal bonds, certificates of deposit, and asset- and mortgage-backed securities.\n\nAt January 3, 2004, and December 28, 2002, cash, cash equivalents and investments consisted of the following (cost approximates market value):\n\nThe 2001 cash and cash equivalents generally consisted of cash and commercial paper.\n\n## RECEIVABLES\n\nAccounts receivable are presented net of an allowance for doubtful accounts of $10,859,000, $9,570,000, and $16,576,000 for 2003, 2002, and 2001, respectively. The allowance for receivables is developed based on several factors including overall customer credit quality, historical write-off experience and specific account analyses that\n\n43", + "recall": 0.8690095846645367, + "true_md": "H O N I N D U S T R I E S I n c . a n d S U B S I D I A R I E S\n\n## N O T E S T O C O N S O L I D A T E D F I N A N C I A L S T A T E M E N T S\n\n## Nature of Operations\n\n## Summary of Significant Accounting Policies\n\n## PRINCIPLES OF CONSOLIDATION AND FISCAL YEAR-END\n\n## CASH, CASH EQUIVALENTS, AND INVESTMENTS\n\n## RECEIVABLES\n\nHON INDUSTRIES Inc., with its subsidiaries (the “Company”), is a provider of office furniture and hearth products. Both industries are reportable segments; however, the Company’s office furniture business is its principal line of business. Refer to the Operating Segment Information note for further information. Office furniture products are sold through a national system of dealers, wholesalers, mass merchan- disers, warehouse clubs, retail superstores, end-user customers, and to federal and state governments. Dealer, wholesaler, and retail super- stores are the major channels based on sales. Hearth products include electric, wood-, pellet-, and gas-burning factory-built fireplaces, fire- place inserts, stoves, and gas logs. These products are sold through a national system of dealers, wholesalers, large regional contractors, and Company-owned retail outlets. The Company’s products are marketed predominantly in the United States and Canada. The Company exports select products to a limited number of markets outside North America, principally Latin America and the Caribbean, through its export subsid- iary; however, based on sales, these activities are not significant.\n\nThe consolidated financial statements include the accounts and trans- actions of the Company and its subsidiaries. Intercompany accounts and transactions have been eliminated in consolidation.\n\nThe Company follows a 52/53-week fiscal year which ends on the Saturday nearest December 31. Fiscal year 2003 ended on January 3, 2004; 2002 ended on December 28, 2002; and 2001 ended on December 29, 2001. The financial statements for fiscal year 2003 are based on a 53-week period; fiscal years 2002 and 2001 are on a 52-week basis.\n\nCash and cash equivalents generally consist of cash, money market accounts, and debt securities. These securities have original maturity dates not exceeding three months from date of purchase. The Company has short-term investments with maturities of less than one year and also has investments with maturities greater than one year that are included in Other Assets on the consolidated balance sheet. Management classifies investments in marketable securities at the time of purchase and reevaluates such classification at each balance sheet \n\ndate. Equity securities are classified as available-for-sale and are stated at current market value with unrealized gains and losses included as a separate component of equity, net of any related tax effect. Debt securi- ties are classified as held-to-maturity and are stated at amortized cost. The specific identification method is used to determine realized gains and losses on the trade date. Short-term investments include municipal bonds, money market preferred stock, and U.S. treasury notes. Long- term investments include U.S. government securities, municipal bonds, certificates of deposit, and asset- and mortgage-backed securities.\n\nAt January 3, 2004, and December 28, 2002, cash, cash equivalents and investments consisted of the following (cost approxi- mates market value):\n\nThe 2001 cash and cash equivalents generally consisted of cash and commercial paper.\n\nAccounts receivable are presented net of an allowance for doubtful accounts of $10,859,000, $9,570,000, and $16,576,000 for 2003, 2002, and 2001, respectively. The allowance for receivables is devel- oped based on several factors including overall customer credit quality, historical write-off experience and specific account analyses that \n\n43" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7685683899490579, + "doc_id": "be4df05f572025263bcb16e455fe59f2521ab64b08f4979a75b44c11eb84af7d", + "edit_distance": 0.7474437627811861, + "f1_score": 0.9813242784380306, + "meteor": 0.5514685682332927, + "precision": 0.9796610169491525, + "pred_md": "## 20. DERIVATIVE TRANSACTIONS\n\n## Hedging Policies\n\nThe Company and its consolidated subsidiaries (collectively, the 'Group') utilize derivative transactions for the purpose of hedging their exposure to fluctuation in foreign exchange rates, interest rates and market prices. However, based on an internal management rule on financial market risk (the 'Rule') approved by the Company's Board of Directors, they do not enter into transactions involving derivatives for speculative purposes. The Rule prescribes that (i) the Group's financial market risk is to be controlled by the Company in a centralized manner, and that (ii) no individual subsidiary can initiate a hedge position without the prior approval of, and regular reporting back to the Company.\n\n## Risk to be hedged by derivative transactions\n\n(1) Market risk\n\nThe financial market risk to which the Group is generally exposed in its operations and the relevant derivative transactions primarily used for hedging are summarized as follows:\n\n- · Foreign exchange risk associated with assets and liabilities denominated in foreign currencies; forward foreign exchange contracts, foreign currency options, and currency swaps;\n- · Interest rate risk associated with sourcing funds and investing: interest-rate swaps;\n- · Risk of fluctuation in stock prices: options on stocks;\n- · Risk of fluctuation in commodity prices (mainly for precious metals): commodity futures contracts\n\n## (2) Credit risk\n\nThe Group is exposed to the risk that a counterparty to its financial transactions could default and jeopardize future profits. We believe that this risk is insignificant as the Group enters into derivative transactions only with financial institutions which have a sound credit profile. The Group enters into these transactions also with Renault Finance S.A. ('RF'), a specialized financial subsidiary of the Renault Group which, we believe, is not subject to any such material risk. This is because RF enters into derivative transactions to cover such derivative transactions with us only with financial institutions of the highest caliber carefully selected by RF based on its own rating system which takes into account each counterparty's long-term credit rating and shareholders' equity.\n\n(3) Legal risk\n\nThe Group is exposed to the risk of entering into a financial agreement which may contain inappropriate terms and conditions as well as the risk that an existing contract may be affected by revisions to the relevant laws and regulations. The Company's Legal Department and Finance Department make every effort to minimize legal risk by reviewing any new agreements of significance and by reviewing the related documents in a centralized way.\n\n## Risk Management\n\nAll strategies to manage financial market risk and risk hedge operations of the Group are carried out pursuant to the Rule which stipulates the Group's basic policies for derivative transactions, management policies, management items, procedures, criteria for the selection of counterparties, and the reporting system, and so forth. The Rule prescribes that (i) the Group's financial market risk is to be controlled by the Company in a centralized manner, and that (ii) no individual subsidiary is permitted to initiate a hedging operation without the prior approval of, and regular reporting back to the Company.\n\nThe basic hedge policy is subject to the approval of the Monthly Hedge Policy Meeting attended by the corporate officer in charge of Treasury Department. Execution and management of all deals are to be conducted pursuant to the Rule. Derivative transactions are conducted by a special section of the Treasury Department and monitoring of contracts for such transactions and confirming the balance of all open positions are the responsibility of back office and risk management section. Commodity futures contracts are to be handled also by Treasury Department under guidelines which are to be drawn up by the MRMC (Materials Risk Management Committee). The MRMC is chaired by the corporate officer in charge of the Purchasing Department and the corporate officer in charge of Treasury Department and it will meet approximately once every six months.\n\nThe status of derivative transactions is reported on a daily basis to the chief officer in charge of Treasury Department and on an annual basis to the Board of Directors. Credit risk is monitored quantitatively with reference to Renault's rating system based principally on the counterparties' long-term credit ratings and on their shareholders' equity. The Finance Department sets a maximum upper limit on positions with each of the counterparties for the Group and monitors the balances of open positions every day.\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\n89\n\nFINANCIAL SECTION", + "recall": 0.9829931972789115, + "true_md": "FINANCIAL SECTION\n\nAll strategies to manage financial market risk and risk hedge operations of the Group are carried out pursuant to the Rule which stipulates the Group’s basic policies for derivative transactions, management policies, management items, procedures, criteria for the selection of counterparties, and the reporting system, and so forth. The Rule prescribes that (i) the Group’s financial market risk is to be controlled by the Company in a centralized manner, and that (ii) no individual subsidiary is permitted to initiate a hedging operation without the prior approval of, and regular reporting back to the Company. The basic hedge policy is subject to the approval of the Monthly\n\nCompany. The basic hedge policy is subject to the approval of the Monthly Hedge Policy Meeting attended by the corporate officer in charge of Treasury Department. Execution and management of all deals are to be conducted pursuant to the Rule. Derivative transactions are conducted by a special section of the Treasury Department and monitoring of contracts for such transactions and confirming the balance of all open positions are the responsibility of back office and risk management section. Commodity futures contracts are to be handled also by Treasury Department under guidelines which are to be drawn up by the MRMC (Materials Risk Management Committee). The MRMC is chaired by the corporate officer in charge of the Purchasing Department and the corporate officer in charge of Treasury Department and it will meet approximately once every six months. The status of derivative transactions is reported on a daily basis to\n\nmonths. The status of derivative transactions is reported on a daily basis to the chief officer in charge of Treasury Department and on an annual basis to the Board of Directors. Credit risk is monitored quantitatively with reference to Renault’s rating system based principally on the counterparties’ long-term credit ratings and on their shareholders’ equity. The Finance Department sets a maximum upper limit on positions with each of the counterparties for the Group and monitors the balances of open positions every day.\n\n(2) Credit risk The Group is exposed to the risk that a counterparty to its financial transactions could default and jeopardize future profits. We believe that this risk is insignificant as the Group enters into derivative transactions only with financial institutions which have a sound credit profile. The Group enters into these transactions also with Renault Finance S.A. (“RF”), a specialized financial subsidiary of the Renault Group which, we believe, is not subject to any such material risk. This is because RF enters into derivative transactions to cover such derivative transactions with us only with financial institutions of the highest caliber carefully selected by RF based on its own rating system which takes into account each counterparty’s long-term credit rating and shareholders’ equity.\n\n(1) Market risk The financial market risk to which the Group is generally exposed in its operations and the relevant derivative transactions primarily used for hedging are summarized as follows: • Foreign exchange risk associated with assets and liabilities\n\nThe Company and its consolidated subsidiaries (collectively, the “Group”) utilize derivative transactions for the purpose of hedging their exposure to fluctuation in foreign exchange rates, interest rates and market prices. However, based on an internal management rule on financial market risk (the “Rule”) approved by the Company’s Board of Directors, they do not enter into transactions involving derivatives for speculative purposes. The Rule prescribes that (i) the Group’s financial market risk is to be controlled by the Company in a centralized manner, and that (ii) no individual subsidiary can initiate a hedge position without the prior approval of, and regular reporting back to the Company.\n\n(3) Legal risk The Group is exposed to the risk of entering into a financial agreement which may contain inappropriate terms and conditions as well as the risk that an existing contract may be affected by revisions to the relevant laws and regulations. The Company’s Legal Department and Finance Department make every effort to minimize legal risk by reviewing any new agreements of significance and by reviewing the related documents in a centralized way.\n\n## Hedging Policies\n\n## Risk to be hedged by derivative transactions\n\n## Risk Management\n\n- for hedging are summarized as follows: • Foreign exchange risk associated with assets and liabilities denominated in foreign currencies; forward foreign exchange contracts, foreign currency options, and currency swaps; • Interest rate risk associated with sourcing funds and investing:\n\n- contracts, foreign currency options, and currency swaps; • Interest rate risk associated with sourcing funds and investing: interest-rate swaps; • Risk of fluctuation in stock prices: options on stocks;\n\n- interest-rate swaps; • Risk of fluctuation in stock prices: options on stocks; • Risk of fluctuation in commodity prices (mainly for precious metals):\n\n- • Risk of fluctuation in stock prices: options on stocks; • Risk of fluctuation in commodity prices (mainly for precious metals): commodity futures contracts\n\n- (3) Legal risk The Group is\n\n- (2) Credit risk The Group is exposed to the risk that a counterparty to its financial\n\n- (1) Market risk The financial market risk to which the Group is generally exposed in\n\n- 20. DERIVATIVE TRANSACTIONS\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 89" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6640270746131995, + "doc_id": "148c1f33ba511a0f6efe476d3402d19ae1140b64bffe196f9df227425f73f354", + "edit_distance": 0.3250883392226148, + "f1_score": 0.9947089947089948, + "meteor": 0.6989180092993079, + "precision": 0.9894736842105263, + "pred_md": "## 18. AMOUNTS PER SHARE\n\nBasic net income per share was computed based on the net income available for distribution to shareholders of common stock and the weighted average number of shares of common stock outstanding during the year, and diluted net income per share was computed based on the net income available for distribution to the shareholders and the weighted average number of shares of common stock outstanding during each year after giving effect to the dilutive potential of shares of common stock to be issued upon the exercise of warrants and stock subscription rights.\n\nAmounts per share of net assets are computed based on net assets available for distribution to the shareholders and the number of shares of common stock outstanding at the year end.\n\nCash dividends per share represent the cash dividends proposed by the Board of Directors as applicable to the respective years together with the interim cash dividends paid.\n\n## 19. SECURITIES\n\n- a) Information regarding marketable securities classified as held-to-maturity debt securities and other securities as of March 31, 2005 and 2004 is as follows:\n\n## Marketable held-to-maturity debt securities\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\n87\n\nFINANCIAL SECTION", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## 18. AMOUNTS PER SHARE\n\nBasic net income per share was computed based on the net income available for distribution to shareholders of common stock and the weighted average number of shares of common stock outstanding during the year, and diluted net income per share was computed based on the net income available for distribution to the shareholders and the weighted average number of shares of common stock outstanding during each year after giving effect to the dilutive potential of shares of common stock to be issued upon the exercise of warrants and stock subscription rights. Amounts per share of net assets are computed based on net assets available for distribution to the shareholders and the number of shares of\n\nafter giving effect to the dilutive potential of shares of common stock to be issued upon the exercise of warrants and stock subscription rights. Amounts per share of net assets are computed based on net assets available for distribution to the shareholders and the number of shares of common stock outstanding at the year end. Cash dividends per share represent the cash dividends proposed by the Board of Directors as applicable to the respective years together with\n\ncommon stock outstanding at the year end. Cash dividends per share represent the cash dividends proposed by the Board of Directors as applicable to the respective years together with the interim cash dividends paid.\n\na) Information regarding marketable securities classified as held-to-maturity debt securities and other securities as of March 31, 2005 and 2004 is as follows:\n\n## 19. SECURITIES\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 87\n\nFINANCIAL SECTION\n\n## Marketable held-to-maturity debt securities" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6980149821240123, + "doc_id": "e4b0bf55dc6e416f50f2114fc2842a5c553d29808d72c002dccefb11f40dd9b9", + "edit_distance": 0.47387387387387386, + "f1_score": 0.8490230905861456, + "meteor": 0.8015756473227822, + "precision": 0.9122137404580153, + "pred_md": "Paoli Inc. is a leading provider of wood case goods, modular desking, conference products, and seating through its well-known brands Paoli ® and Whitehall . Founded in ® 1926, it is the newest member of the HON INDUSTRIES family, acquired in January 2004. Outstanding product design at a great value makes Paoli a highly sought after solution in the market for wood private offices. Paoli's production capability and resources allow the company to respond quickly to changing market needs. Paoli's strong, independent representative sales and dealer networks support its broad product offering in the mid-market and contract furniture segments.\n\n## HIGHLIGHTS/AWARDS:\n\n- · Introduced the Reflect TM product line of modular, traditional case goods in 2003.\n- · Created CAP TM - a comprehensive family of library products designed to effectively furnish today's diverse learning environments and sports stadium suites.\n\nWWW.PAOLI.COM\n\n## HON INDUSTRIES 2003\n\n## OFFICE FURNITURE AT-A-GLANCE\n\nMaxon Furniture Inc. targets small to midsized businesses seeking 'planned' offices featuring workstations and compatible storage and seating. Maxon's customers appreciate office furniture that efficiently organizes space and creates a positive working environment.\n\n## HIGHLIGHTS/AWARDS:\n\n- · Gave the Empower ® product line a complete makeover; including a new trim design, segmented panels, and redesigned storage cabinets.\n\nWWW.MAXONFURNITURE.COM\n\nHolga Inc. provides filing and storage solutions to contract, commercial, and institutional markets. Signature products include high-density shelving and mobile storage systems designed for efficient space utilization. Holga also offer a broad range of traditional metal filing and storage products.\n\n## HIGHLIGHTS/AWARDS:\n\n- · Introduced 8000 Series Stackable Storage units, which provide a wide array of customizable storage options within a standard platform. The Series complements our new 8000 Series Pedestals, which offer a unique interlocking system and end tab filing capabilities.\n\nWWW.HOLGA.COM\n\n29\n\nHON International Inc. is responsible for HON INDUSTRIES' sales and business development outside the United States and Canada. Our members in local countries market the HON INDUSTRIES' brands through a global distribution network. With an extensive product selection, HON International is able to provide dealers and customers with the widest collection of 'compelling value' office furniture in the world. The international team is dedicated to providing customers with worldclass service, from initial inquiry to complete-and-on-time installation. Extensive international experience helps to ensure customers are provided with solutions for even their most challenging international needs and opportunities.\n\n## HIGHLIGHTS/AWARDS:\n\n- · A lead exhibitor in the first-ever Office Furniture Expo in Mexico City.\n- · Successfully completed projects for key multinational accounts in Ireland, Barbados,\n- Jamaica, Egypt, and Hong Kong, among others.\n- · Opened the first HON INDUSTRIES' showroom outside the United States in Monterrey, Mexico.\n\nWWW.HONINTERNATIONAL.COM", + "recall": 0.7940199335548173, + "true_md": "H O N I N D U S T R I E S 2 0 0 3\n\n## O F F I C E F U R N I T U R E A T - A - G L A N C E\n\nPaoli Inc. is a leading provider of wood case goods, modular desking, conference pro- ducts, and seating through its well-known brands Paoli ® and Whitehall ® . Founded in 1926, it is the newest member of the HON INDUSTRIES family, acquired in January 2004. Outstanding product design at a great value makes Paoli a highly sought after solu- tion in the market for wood private offices. Paoli’s production capability and resources allow the company to respond quickly to changing market needs. Paoli’s strong, inde- pendent representative sales and dealer net- works support its broad product offering in the mid-market and contract furniture segments. \n\n• Introduced the Reflect TM product line of modular, traditional case goods in 2003.\n\n• Created CAP TM — a comprehensive family of library products designed to effectively fur- nish today’s diverse learning environments and sports stadium suites.\n\nWWW.PAOLI.COM\n\n• Introduced 8000 Series Stackable Storage units, which provide a wide array of customiz- able storage options within a standard plat- form. The Series complements our new 8000 Series Pedestals, which offer a unique inter- locking system and end tab filing capabilities.\n\nWWW.HOLGA.COM\n\nHolga Inc. provides filing and storage solu- tions to contract, commercial, and institutional markets. Signature products include high-den- sity shelving and mobile storage systems designed for efficient space utilization. Holga also offer a broad range of traditional metal filing and storage products.\n\n• Gave the Empower ® product line a com- plete makeover; including a new trim design, segmented panels, and redesigned storage cabinets. \n\nWWW.MAXONFURNITURE.COM\n\nMaxon Furniture Inc. targets small to mid- sized businesses seeking “planned” offices fea- turing workstations and compatible storage and seating. Maxon’s customers appreciate office furniture that efficiently organizes space and creates a positive working environment.\n\nHON International Inc. is responsible for HON INDUSTRIES’ sales and business develop- ment outside the United States and Canada. Our members in local countries market the HON INDUSTRIES’ brands through a global distribution network. With an extensive prod- uct selection, HON International is able to provide dealers and customers with the widest collection of “compelling value” office furni- ture in the world. The international team is dedicated to providing customers with world- class service, from initial inquiry to com- plete-and-on-time installation. Extensive international experience helps to ensure cus- tomers are provided with solutions for even their most challenging international needs and opportunities. \n\n• A lead exhibitor in the first-ever Office Furniture Expo in Mexico City.\n\n• Successfully completed projects for key multinational accounts in Ireland, Barbados, Jamaica, Egypt, and Hong Kong, among others. \n\n• Opened the first HON INDUSTRIES’ show- room outside the United States in Monterrey, Mexico.\n\nWWW.HONINTERNATIONAL.COM\n\n## HIGHLIGHTS/AWARDS:\n\n## HIGHLIGHTS/AWARDS:\n\n## HIGHLIGHTS/AWARDS:\n\n## HIGHLIGHTS/AWARDS:\n\n29" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9728478704279735, + "doc_id": "6a688a5d676261079529636c16954deffe3f413329bc0d08a6d6a6e3cd642ca5", + "edit_distance": 0.044145873320537425, + "f1_score": 0.9877551020408163, + "meteor": 0.9817933654568862, + "precision": 0.9877551020408163, + "pred_md": "NEW TELEPHONE DIRECTORY FOR THE NORTHERN SHENANDOAH VALLEY\n\nThe Shenandoah Telephone Directory has undergone many changes since we published our first directory in 1906, as The Farmers' Mutual Telephone System of Shenandoah County. In 1906, the entire phone number listings were on 15 pages. The first Company directory to include yellow pages was distributed in 1946. That year local businesses invested in a new way to reach their potential customers.\n\nThe goal has always been to provide a useful tool for our customers. The pace of change has quickened in the last few years. In 2000, for the first time, Shenandoah Telephone's directory expanded from telephone listings for only Shenandoah County and Bergton, to include business and residential listings for Rockingham, Frederick, Clarke, and Warren counties. In 2001, Page County listings were added. The name of our directory was changed to ShentelPages in 2002 to reflect the expanded listing area. Although we included additional information in our directory, we continued to only furnish it to our local telephone customers.\n\nEarly in 2003, we conducted a customer survey to measure potential public acceptance of a regional phone directory for the six-county area. The findings of the survey indicated almost 60% would likely use an expanded six-county directory, with a fourth of all respondents saying they would use a regional directory more often than the directory they currently had in their home or business. Based on these positive results, Shentel launched an expanded directory to meet the demand.\n\nAn extensive public-awareness campaign was launched on television and radio, in a variety of daily and weekly newspapers and at regional county fairs. The campaign helped build anticipation for the directory and increase awareness of yellow page advertising opportunities. As a result of the added value of the expanded distribution area, ShentelPages' yellow page advertising revenues increased 21%, to $1.8 million for the 2004 book.\n\nIn December 2003, Shentel mailed out 120,000 ShentelPages directories to every home and business in Shenandoah, Rockingham, Frederick, Page, Clarke and Warren counties. ShentelPages now has a potential audience that exceeds 300,000 readers. The 2004 directory continues to be an important local resource. In addition to telephone listings, it contains both general and county-specific information - from ZIP codes to area codes, and from international dialing instructions to the listing of regional interstate exits.\n\nThrough ShentelPages, businesses have a new way of reaching thousands more potential customers within the sixcounty area to sell their products and services. ShentelPages is bundled with our electronic version, ShentelPages.com. This service allows area residents to use their computer and the Internet to let their fingers do the walking.\n\nJust like our first book in 1906, the 2004 ShentelPages provides area residents with a quick and easy way to stay in touch.\n\nSHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY\n\n8\n\n■", + "recall": 0.9877551020408163, + "true_md": "The Shenandoah Telephone Directory has undergone many changes since we published our first directory in 1906, as The Farmers’ Mutual Telephone System of Shenandoah County. In 1906, the entire phone number listings were on 15 pages. The first Company directory to include yellow pages was distributed in 1946. That year local businesses invested in a new way to reach their potential customers.\n\nThe goal has always been to provide a useful tool for our customers. The pace of change has quickened in the last few years. In 2000, for the first time, Shenandoah Telephone’s directory expanded from telephone listings for only Shenandoah County and Bergton, to include business and residential listings for Rockingham, Frederick, Clarke, and Warren counties. In 2001, Page County listings were added. The name of our directory was changed to ShentelPages in 2002 to reflect the expanded listing area. Although we included additional information in our directory, we continued to only furnish it to our local telephone customers.\n\nEarly in 2003, we conducted a customer survey to measure potential public acceptance of a regional phone directory for the six-county area. The findings of the survey indicated almost 60% would likely use an expanded six-county directory, with a fourth of all respondents saying they would use a regional directory more often than the directory they currently had in their home or business. Based on these positive results, Shentel launched an expanded directory to meet the demand.\n\nAn extensive public-awareness campaign was launched on television and radio, in a variety of daily and weekly newspapers and at regional county fairs. The campaign helped build anticipation for the directory and increase awareness of yellow page advertising opportunities. As a result of the added value of the expanded distribution area, ShentelPages’ yellow page advertising revenues increased 21%, to $1.8 million for the 2004 book. \n\nIn December 2003, Shentel mailed out 120,000 ShentelPages directories to every home and business in Shenandoah, Rockingham, Frederick, Page, Clarke and Warren counties. ShentelPages now has a potential audience that exceeds 300,000 readers. The 2004 directory continues to be an important local resource. In addition to telephone listings, it contains both general and county-specific information - from ZIP codes to area codes, and from international dialing instructions to the listing of regional interstate exits.\n\nThrough ShentelPages, businesses have a new way of reaching thousands more potential customers within the six- county area to sell their products and services. ShentelPages is bundled with our electronic version, ShentelPages.com. This service allows area residents to use their computer and the Internet to let their fingers do the walking.\n\nJust like our first book in 1906, the 2004 ShentelPages provides area residents with a quick and easy way to stay in touch. \n\nSHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY ■ 8\n\nNEW TELEPHONE DIRECTORY FOR THE NORTHERN SHENANDOAH VALLEY" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9528065494063647, + "doc_id": "7b681fc9bcddc7af2ec2d48b4dba2e06b142d4048fafe1b49c5df68d10767664", + "edit_distance": 0.3544600938967136, + "f1_score": 0.9758064516129031, + "meteor": 0.943335608685806, + "precision": 0.983739837398374, + "pred_md": "through responsive pricing, while the Grocery Products segment suffers because raw material costs are higher and price adjustments are infrequent. When protein markets weaken, the Grocery Products segment becomes more profitable, while the protein business margins soften. In the end, this balance within our business model helped deliver record profitability in fiscal 2004.\n\nWe continue to look for ways to reduce our commodity exposure. We have aggressively converted our hog contracts from a grain-based to a meat-value formula. This limits our exposure to the grain markets for the procurement of live hogs and better aligns the value of the raw material with market conditions. Over the long term, this will support steadier financial performance in the face of grain price fluctuations.\n\n## areas of attention\n\ninnovate more Innovation is a top priority for us because it creates competitive advantage and builds brand equity. Fiscal 2004 was a fertile period for new ideas in every aspect of our business. We installed high-volume, high-pressure food processing systems to explore new horizons in food safety. Beginning mid-year, Hormel chili varieties were first in their\n\n2004 Annual Report\n\n3\n\nproduct category to offer Tetra Recart carton packaging - an innovation that provides consumers with a more convenient package and adds excitement to a long established category. Other new convenience product launches include SPAM Singles and Jennie-O Turkey Store Oven Ready Turkey, a fool-proof, whole frozen turkey that's pre-seasoned, ready to go directly from freezer to oven, and is ready to eat in about three and one-half hours. Less dramatic packaging improvements have significantly boosted sales of our Hormel microwave meals by revising packaging to draw attention to the convenient bowl rather than the box.\n\nTo support continued innovation throughout the company, we made significant investments in new and expanded R&D facilities in 2004. Jennie-O Turkey Store, Inc. opened a new R&D facility and we expanded the R&D facility at our corporate campus. Our total R&D spending was up 21 percent in 2004 compared to fiscal 2003.\n\n## expand high-potential product portfolios As growth\n\nprospects accelerate for our Foodservice and ethnic foods businesses, we are expanding our portfolio of products in both sectors. Our Foodservice business offers a growing selection of branded products, including the highly popular café h family", + "recall": 0.968, + "true_md": "through responsive pricing, while the Grocery Products segment suffers because raw material costs are higher and price adjustments are infrequent. When protein markets weaken, the Grocery Products segment becomes more profitable, while the protein business margins soften. In the end, this balance within our business model helped deliver record profitability in fiscal 2004. \n\nWe continue to look for ways to reduce our commodity expo- sure. We have aggressively converted our hog contracts from a grain-based to a meat-value formula. This limits our exposure to the grain markets for the procurement of live hogs and better aligns the value of the raw material with market conditions. Over the long term, this will support steadier financial performance in the face of grain price fluctuations.\n\nproduct category to offer Tetra Recart carton packaging – an innovation that provides consumers with a more convenient package and adds excitement to a long established category. Other new convenience product launches include SPAM Singles and Jennie-O Turkey Store Oven Ready Turkey, a fool-proof, whole frozen turkey that’s pre-seasoned, ready to go directly from freezer to oven, and is ready to eat in about three and one-half hours. Less dramatic packaging improve- ments have significantly boosted sales of our Hormel microwave meals by revising packaging to draw attention to the convenient bowl rather than the box.\n\nTo support continued innovation throughout the company, we made significant investments in new and expanded R&D facilities in 2004. Jennie-O Turkey Store, Inc. opened a new R&D facility and we expanded the R&D facility at our corporate campus. Our total R&D spending was up 21 percent in 2004 compared to fiscal 2003.\n\nexpand high-potential product portfolios As growth prospects accelerate for our Foodservice and ethnic foods businesses, we are expanding our portfolio of products in both sectors. Our Foodservice business offers a growing selection of branded products, including the highly popular café h family\n\ninnovate more Innovation is a top priority for us because it creates competitive advantage and builds brand equity. Fiscal 2004 was a fertile period for new ideas in every aspect of our business. We installed high-volume, high-pressure food processing systems to explore new horizons in food safety. Beginning mid-year, Hormel chili varieties were first in their \n\n## areas of attention\n\n2004 Annual Report 3" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4421341910465115, + "doc_id": "6038cea61f3c5108b48b3c93ae06ce950d99ed2f8e8d9bc757d7f5a58c54c20b", + "edit_distance": 0.5315315315315315, + "f1_score": 0.7628865979381443, + "meteor": 0.7920569214584128, + "precision": 0.7254901960784313, + "pred_md": "N O T E S T O C O N S O L I D A T E D F I N A N C I A L S T A T E M E N T S ( C O N T I N U E D )\n\n## I N C O M E T A X E S\n\nThe items comprising income tax expense for continuing operations are as follows (in thousands):\n\nTemporary differences and carryforwards which have given rise to deferred income tax assets and liabilities as of December 31, 2003 and 2002 are as follows (in thousands):\n\n16", + "recall": 0.8043478260869565, + "true_md": "NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (CONTINUED)\n\n## INCOME TAXES 5\n\n16\n\nThe items comprising income tax expense for continuing operations are as follows (in thousands):\n\nTemporary differences and carryforwards which have given rise to deferred income tax assets and liabilities as of December 31, 2003 and 2002 are as follows (in thousands):" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9275191711505675, + "doc_id": "f8315e364b0c2cec6e84be3c23389668bbf68b97ecfe974193261a5a1ed4b374", + "edit_distance": 0.05063291139240506, + "f1_score": 0.9763779527559056, + "meteor": 0.9730404588193984, + "precision": 0.9841269841269841, + "pred_md": "## we're serving up\n\n## foods people love\n\n## making it lighter\n\nConsumers increasingly want lighter fare, but still demand great flavor. Satisfaction is no problem with Hormel Foods favorites such as Jennie-O Turkey Store Premium Portions hickory smoked sun dried tomato turkey breasts and Jennie-O Turkey Store sweet Italian bratwurst. Consumers have long known that nothing beats a fresh salad topped with Hormel real crumbled bacon.\n\n8\n\nHormel Foods Corporation", + "recall": 0.96875, + "true_md": "## we’re serving up foods people love\n\n## making it lighter\n\nConsumers increasingly want lighter fare, but still demand great flavor.\n\nSatisfaction is no problem with Hormel Foods favorites such as Jennie-O Turkey Store Premium Portions hickory smoked sun dried tomato turkey breasts and Jennie-O Turkey Store sweet Italian bratwurst. Consumers have long known that nothing beats a fresh salad topped with Hormel real crumbled bacon.\n\n8 Hormel Foods Corporation" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "e17f72a6563aed80f73a183d5ca5bf09355f375c2ae7dd718d28ceede747df70", + "edit_distance": 0.05063291139240506, + "f1_score": 0.9763779527559056, + "meteor": 0.9730404588193984, + "precision": 0.9841269841269841, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.96875, + "true_md": "" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9539395370504181, + "doc_id": "e575b9ace4680a8f9384d9986f5e86c13e986caae3cba4d6c4ac756c56d6d648", + "edit_distance": 0.05731225296442688, + "f1_score": 0.9739776951672864, + "meteor": 0.9728944136061817, + "precision": 0.9776119402985075, + "pred_md": "WHO WE ARE\n\n18\n\n## OUR WAY\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\n## The Nissan Way of Doing Business\n\nOne thing about Nissan is very clear: this is a company that sets its own distinctive course, and that course defines the modern automotive company. Our philosophy comes from within, and its principles are based not on tradition but on our own knowledge and experience, drawing on the powerful flow of information that runs through divisions, business areas and the Alliance with Renault.\n\nAt the core of our philosophy is the Nissan Management Way. As one senior executive remarked, 'This is our way, a commonsense way that anyone in the company can take as their own.' The guiding principle here is both flexible and simple: inspire effective performance. To create value for customers, for example, employees must be customer-focused.\n\nTo produce the necessary shift in thinking, we must have management of the highest caliber. The actions and comments of the senior executives appearing in this annual report reflect that strength of leadership. You will see it in the way they convey their individual visions, commit to action plans, manage with accountability, assess progress, and recognize high performance. The same management practices are deeply embedded at every level of the company.\n\nThe first key concept in the Nissan Management Way is cross-functionality. Cross-functional teams-CFTs-and the V-Up program are powerful management tools, developed within Nissan, that reach across the functions and organizations of this global company. When employees are brought together across corporate and physical borders to form a CFT, what we call 'healthy conflict' often arises. Healthy conflict is cooperative, not combative, and sparks innovative ways of thinking. Again, it all springs from looking at challenges in a customer-centric way. After all, no single division can produce what customers want-an outstanding automobile backed by excellent service and support. Cross-functional activities are at the core of all operations within Nissan, making the process more active and direct.\n\nAnother key concept at Nissan is 'stretch.' Stretch occurs when an activity spans the entire company and draws on a variety of viewpoints aimed at meeting customer expectations. Combining diverse backgrounds and ways of thinking creates solutions that stretch the organization in new directions.\n\nSince the first days of the Nissan Revival Plan, everything we do at Nissan is based on commitments. People must commit themselves to achieving goals. Some goals are internal, while others are of importance to a wider association of employees, shareholders, suppliers, customers and others. Setting a goal and developing the process to achieve it go beyond simply meeting a target, however. These actions are meant to develop confidence and the desire to reach still higher levels of performance.", + "recall": 0.9703703703703703, + "true_md": "## OUR WAY\n\n## The Nissan Way of Doing Business\n\nOne thing about Nissan is very clear: this is a company that sets its own distinctive course, and that course defines the modern automotive company. Our philosophy comes from within, and its principles are based not on tradition but on our own knowledge and experience, drawing on the powerful flow of information that runs through divisions, business areas and the Alliance with Renault. \n\nAt the core of our philosophy is the Nissan Management Way. As one senior executive remarked, “This is our way, a commonsense way that anyone in the company can take as their own.” The guiding principle here is both flexible and simple: inspire effective performance. To create value for customers, for example, employees must be customer-focused.\n\nTo produce the necessary shift in thinking, we must have management of the highest caliber. The actions and comments of the senior executives appearing in this annual report reflect that strength of leadership. You will see it in the way they convey their individual visions, commit to action plans, manage with accountability, assess progress, and recognize high performance. The same management practices are deeply embedded at every level of the company.\n\nThe first key concept in the Nissan Management Way is cross-functionality. Cross-functional teams—CFTs—and the V-Up program are powerful management tools, developed within Nissan, that reach across the functions and organizations of this global company. When employees are brought together across corporate and physical borders to form a CFT, what we call “healthy conflict” often arises. Healthy conflict is cooperative, not combative, and sparks innovative ways of thinking. Again, it all springs from looking at challenges in a customer-centric way. After all, no single division can produce what customers want—an outstanding automobile backed by excellent service and support. Cross-functional activities are at the core of all operations within Nissan, making the process more active and direct.\n\nAnother key concept at Nissan is “stretch.” Stretch occurs when an activity spans the entire company and draws on a variety of viewpoints aimed at meeting customer expectations. Combining diverse backgrounds and ways of thinking creates solutions that stretch the organization in new directions.\n\nSince the first days of the Nissan Revival Plan, everything we do at Nissan is based on commitments. People must commit themselves to achieving goals. Some goals are internal, while others are of importance to a wider association of employees, shareholders, suppliers, customers and others. Setting a goal and developing the process to achieve it go beyond simply meeting a target, however. These actions are meant to develop confidence and the desire to reach still higher levels of performance.\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 18\n\nWHO WE ARE" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "d7e6c44b303883b98395074644c83e40ba6a34adce29f015ab1c286204b50e9e", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9990234375, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Nissan Annual Report 2004\n\n17\n\nWHO WE ARE", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Nissan Annual Report 2004 17\n\nWHO WE ARE" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.727029579361981, + "doc_id": "3879e0bd1ea5597524f223a3598017aa10b9e175e366d7497094e6aa91054d07", + "edit_distance": 0.7723076923076924, + "f1_score": 0.8867924528301887, + "meteor": 0.6974264183029834, + "precision": 0.94, + "pred_md": "HON INDUSTRIES 2003\n\n## HEARTH & HOME TECHNOLOGIES AT-A-GLANCE\n\nSince the first air-circulating fireplace was patented in 1927, Heatilator ® has become the most recognized and preferred fireplace brand among homebuilders. Heatilator Home Products TM extends our business beyond the hearth to include products that enhance a healthy home environment.\n\n## HIGHLIGHTS/AWARDS:\n\n- · Redesigned and launched Novus TM , the largest Heatilator ® product family, continuing a best-in-class tradition in the gas fireplace segment.\n- · Won the hearth industry's Vesta Award that recognized the Silhouette TM electric fireplace as the best new electric fireplace on the market in 2003.\n\nWWW.HEATILATOR.COM\n\nThe leader in high-efficiency, durable, and stylish hearth products, the Quadra-Fire TM brand offers specialty channel partners the widest selection of high-performance fireplaces, stoves, and fireplace inserts in the wood, gas, pellet, and electric fuel categories.\n\n## HIGHLIGHTS/AWARDS:\n\n- · 2003 product introductions included new wood- and pellet-burning stoves and fireplaces; wood and gas inserts and fireplace fronts; and electric stoves and fireplaces.\n- · The Quadra-Fire TM 7100 EPA Wood Fireplace won the Vesta Awards' 'Best New Hearth Product for 2003' and 'Best in Show in 2003.'\n\nWWW.QUADRAFIRE.COM\n\nThe hearth industry's design and innovation leader, Heat-N-Glo ® has been awarded more than 50 patents and is known for its innovative hearth technology. The Heat-N-Glo ® brand now includes a complete line of gas, wood, and electric fireplaces, stoves and inserts, unique surrounds, and distinctive accessories - all designed to meet discriminating homeowners' desires for comfort, beauty, and elegance.\n\n## HIGHLIGHTS/AWARDS:\n\nNew product introductions:\n\n- · Cutting Edge TM - the world's only customizable insert surround that allows for a natural stone finish at installation.\n- · Escape TM fireplace - the world's first and only direct-vent gas fireplace that has a complete masonry appearance inside and out was a finalist for the Vesta award for 'Best New Gas Fireplace.'\n- · Vesta awarded the Dakota TM outdoor fireplace 'Best New Outdoor Fireplace Product' in 2003, and also named Rekindler TM a finalist for 'Best New Gas Insert.'\n- · The Infinity TM fireplace won 'Best New Product' from Building Products magazine, for its innovative combination of traditional masonry appearance and advanced venting and installation applications.\n\nWWW.HEATNGLO.COM\n\n30\n\nThe Fireside Furnishings business is the preferred manufacturer for mantels and surrounds to complement Heatilator ® , Heat-N-Glo ® , or Quadra-Fire TM fireplaces. It builds the widest range of mantels, shelves, cabinets, and wall systems, from simple and inexpensive offerings to elegant and elaborate designs featuring custom millwork and imported stone.\n\n## HIGHLIGHTS/AWARDS:\n\n- · Heritage Collection TM was named a 2003 Vesta Award Finalist for Mantels, Facings, and Surrounds.\n\nWWW.FIRESIDEFURNISHINGS.COM\n\nThe leading provider of hearth and home products and services, Fireside Hearth & Home design centers help consumers achieve the feeling they want in their home by supporting the entire buying process - from purchase to installation and after-sale service. Fireside Hearth & Home works through a network of independent and company-owned, standalone or gallery design centers, as well as installation centers, catering both to consumers and builders.\n\nWWW.FIRESIDEUSA.COM", + "recall": 0.8392857142857143, + "true_md": "H O N I N D U S T R I E S 2 0 0 3\n\n## H E A R T H & H O M E T E C H N O L O G I E S A T - A - G L A N C E\n\nSince the first air-circulating fireplace was patented in 1927, Heatilator ® has become the most recognized and preferred fireplace brand among homebuilders. Heatilator Home Products TM extends our business beyond the hearth to include products that enhance a healthy home environment.\n\nThe hearth industry’s design and innovation leader, Heat-N-Glo ® has been awarded more than 50 patents and is known for its inno- vative hearth technology. The Heat-N-Glo ® brand now includes a complete line of gas, wood, and electric fireplaces, stoves and inserts, unique surrounds, and distinctive accessories — all designed to meet discrimi- nating homeowners’ desires for comfort, beauty, and elegance. \n\nThe Fireside Furnishings business is the preferred manufacturer for mantels and surrounds to complement Heatilator ® , Heat-N-Glo ® , or Quadra-Fire TM fireplaces. It builds the widest range of mantels, shelves, cabinets, and wall systems, from simple and inexpensive offerings to elegant and elaborate designs featuring custom millwork and imported stone. \n\n## HIGHLIGHTS/AWARDS:\n\n## HIGHLIGHTS/AWARDS:\n\n## HIGHLIGHTS/AWARDS:\n\n- • Redesigned and launched Novus TM , the larg- est Heatilator ® product family, continuing a best-in-class tradition in the gas fireplace segment. \n\n- • Won the hearth industry’s Vesta Award that recognized the Silhouette TM electric fireplace as the best new electric fireplace on the market in 2003.\n\nNew product introductions:\n\n- • Cutting Edge TM — the world’s only customiz- able insert surround that allows for a natural stone finish at installation. \n\n- • Escape TM fireplace — the world’s first and only direct-vent gas fireplace that has a com- plete masonry appearance inside and out — was a finalist for the Vesta award for “Best New Gas Fireplace.” \n\n- • Vesta awarded the Dakota TM outdoor fire- place “Best New Outdoor Fireplace Product” in 2003, and also named Rekindler TM a finalist for “Best New Gas Insert.”\n\n- • The Infinity TM fireplace won “Best New Product” from Building Products magazine, for its innovative combination of traditional masonry appearance and advanced venting and installation applications.\n\nWWW.HEATNGLO.COM\n\nWWW.FIRESIDEUSA.COM\n\nThe leading provider of hearth and home products and services, Fireside Hearth & Home design centers help consumers achieve the feeling they want in their home by supporting the entire buying process — from purchase to installation and after-sale service. Fireside Hearth & Home works through a network of independent and company-owned, stand- alone or gallery design centers, as well as installation centers, catering both to con- sumers and builders. \n\n30\n\nWWW.QUADRAFIRE.COM\n\n- • 2003 product introductions included new wood- and pellet-burning stoves and fire- places; wood and gas inserts and fireplace fronts; and electric stoves and fireplaces. \n\n- • The Quadra-Fire TM 7100 EPA Wood Fireplace won the Vesta Awards’ “Best New Hearth Product for 2003” and “Best in Show in 2003.” \n\n## HIGHLIGHTS/AWARDS:\n\nWWW.HEATILATOR.COM\n\nWWW.FIRESIDEFURNISHINGS.COM\n\n- • Heritage Collection TM was named a 2003 Vesta Award Finalist for Mantels, Facings, and Surrounds.\n\nThe leader in high-efficiency, durable, and stylish hearth products, the Quadra-Fire TM brand offers specialty channel partners the widest selection of high-performance fire- places, stoves, and fireplace inserts in the wood, gas, pellet, and electric fuel categories." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "a6a09fa6be0ff6dbf2be28f976175988710baa330f6b391b00e234b9a57c9b05", + "edit_distance": 0.7723076923076924, + "f1_score": 0.8867924528301887, + "meteor": 0.6974264183029834, + "precision": 0.94, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.8392857142857143, + "true_md": "## You can tell the future by the people who build it.\n\nChir furure is in the hands of 70,000 exceptional people. Proud people from owe preat organiacions working together te shape our destiny. The new fumily of Miah MIRAGE.\n\nThis is truly a company that cares. We care encugh abour even: member of our family co provide Healthy Living health and wellness programs for cur employees, as well as comprehensive taining and development programs and career growth opporuniqies.\n\nOur employes in turn care enough about their community ro have donated over 38 million co worthy causes through the 41GH MIRAGE Yorce Foundation.\n\nYour company will continue to invest in bricks and mortar, tmaintaining and extending our position of leadership, always creating wich imagination and energe. The combined mamentum ol landalay Retort Group and MGM MIPAGE will unquestionably give: us dramatic leverage to achiewe our goals for the future.\n\n## defining the future" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8636924743853651, + "doc_id": "541271456f74037266fbfdfb398f59a551e5f7f688a2e248fcddf31232291186", + "edit_distance": 0.5561497326203209, + "f1_score": 0.9391304347826086, + "meteor": 0.8997213664346531, + "precision": 0.9, + "pred_md": "## OPERATIONS REVIEW\n\n## E N V I R O N M E N TA L I S S U E S\n\nMangroves, a tropical evergreen shrub, which forms dense thickets along coastlines, are a key element of the life cycle of a large number of marine species in the areas in which Mermaid principally operates.\n\nThe potential exposure to accidental damage, pollution or destruction of mangroves represents a significant environmental issue in the region.\n\nAs part of its plans to expand the Dampier Base, Mermaid volunteered a replanting program to encourage the growth of mangroves in previously denuded areas, immediately adjacent to the expanded Base.\n\nAs at the date of the report, five hundred (500) juvenile mangroves have been transplanted with 90% success. A further 174 mangrove seedlings have been planted and are showing very good growth rates. Attempts to transplant adult mangrove trees, have proved to be more difficult, but the success with young plants now appears to guarantee a more than satisfactory outcome.\n\n21", + "recall": 0.9818181818181818, + "true_md": "The potential exposure to accidental damage, pollution or destruction of mangroves represents a significant environmental issue in the region.\n\nAs part of its plans to expand the Dampier Base, Mermaid volunteered a replanting program to encourage the growth of mangroves in previously denuded areas, immediately adjacent to the expanded Base.\n\nAs at the date of the report, five hundred (500) juvenile mangroves have been transplanted with 90% success. A further 174 mangrove seedlings have been planted and are showing very good growth rates. Attempts to transplant adult mangrove trees, have proved to be more difficult, but the success with young plants now appears to guarantee a more than satisfactory outcome.\n\nMangroves, a tropical evergreen shrub, which forms dense thickets along\n\ncoastlines, are a key element of the life cycle of a large number of marine species in the areas in which Mermaid principally operates. \n\n21\n\nENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES\n\nOPERATIONS REVIEW" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.012155489670873272, + "doc_id": "b72bb61059b06ff9859ae023aa66cdb3ff706c354ac72ca5d3c837e107d0a384", + "edit_distance": 0.7556291390728477, + "f1_score": 0.21524663677130046, + "meteor": 0.17866206724832212, + "precision": 0.13114754098360656, + "pred_md": "7ˆÌ…Ê'iÈ}˜ÊVi˜ÌiÀÃʏœV>Ìi'ʈ˜Ê œÀ̅Êglyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>“iÀˆV>]Êglyph<c=13,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>ÕÀœ«iÊ>˜'Êglyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>È>]Ê->˜“ˆ˜>‡-glyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>ÊLœ>ÃÌÃʜ˜iʜvÊ̅iÊÊ>À}iÃÌÊ>˜'ʓœÃÌÊ  Ê Ý«iÀˆi˜Vi'Ê'iÈ}˜Ê>˜'Êi˜}ˆ˜iiÀˆ˜}Ê}ÀœÕ«Ãʈ˜Ê̅iÊglyph<c=13,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=31,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>-ʈ˜'ÕÃÌÀÞ°Ê\"ÕÀÊVœ“«Ài…i˜ÃˆÛiÊÀ>˜}iʜvÊÃiÀۈViÃÊÃÕ««œÀÌʈ˜ˆÌˆ>Ê i «Àœ'ÕVÌÊ'iÛiœ«“i˜ÌÊ>˜'Ê«Ài‡«Àœ'ÕV̈œ˜ÊÀiµÕˆÀi“i˜ÌÃÊ̅>Ìʈ˜VÕ'iʈ˜'ÕÃÌÀˆ>Ê'iÈ}˜]ʓiV…>˜ˆV>Êi˜}ˆ˜iiÀˆ˜}]ÊiiVÌÀˆV>Ê 'iÈ}˜]ÊÜvÌÜ>ÀiÊ'iÛiœ«“i˜Ì]Ê«Àˆ˜Ìi'ÊVˆÀVՈÌÊLœ>À'Ê­*glyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=9,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>®Ê>ޜÕÌ]ÊÀ>'ˆœÊvÀiµÕi˜VÞÊ­,glyph<c=19,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>®Ê>˜'ʜ«ÌˆV>Ê'iÈ}˜]ʵÕ>ˆÌÞÊ >ÃÃÕÀ>˜ViÊ>˜'Ê'iÈ}˜ÊÛ>ˆ'>̈œ˜ÊÌiÃ̈˜}°Ê\n\n->˜“ˆ˜>‡-glyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>½ ÃÊ Õ˜ˆµÕiÊ>'Û>˜Ì>}iÊ'iÀˆÛiÃÊvÀœ“ÊœÕÀÊ>LˆˆÌÞÊ̜ÊVœ˜ÃˆÃÌi˜ÌÞʓiiÌʜÕÀÊVÕÃ̜“iÀýÊVœÃÌ]Ê«iÀvœÀ“>˜ViÊ>˜'Ê Ìˆ“i‡Ìœ‡“>ÀŽiÌÊÀiµÕˆÀi“i˜ÌðÊglyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>˜Ìi}À>Ê̜Ê̅ˆÃÊÃÕVViÃÃÊ>ÀiÊÌi>“ÃÊëiVˆvˆV>ÞÊ'i'ˆV>Ìi'Ê̜Ê̅iÊ'iÈ}˜Ê>˜'Êi˜}ˆ˜iiÀˆ˜}ʜvÊ *glyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=9,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman> à ]Ê L>VŽ«>˜iÃÊ >˜'Êi˜VœÃÕÀiÃÊqÊ>ÊVÀˆÌˆV>Êii“i˜ÌÃÊ̜Ê̅iʓ>˜Õv>VÌÕÀˆ˜}ʜvÊVœ“«iÝ]ʅˆ}…‡«iÀvœÀ“>˜ViÊÃÞÃÌi“Ã°Ê glyph<c=19,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>œ ÀÊ 'i V>'iÃ]Ê->˜“ˆ˜>‡-glyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>Ê …>ÃÊLii˜Ê>ʏi>'iÀʈ˜Êˆ˜˜œÛ>̈˜}ʘiÜʓ>ÌiÀˆ>Ã]Ê«ÀœViÃÃiÃÊ>˜'ÊÌiV…˜œœ}ˆiðÊglyph<c=31,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>œÀiÊÀiVi˜ÌÞ]Ê Üi½Ûiʈ˜VÀi>Ãi'ʜÕÀÊÀœiʈ˜Ê˜iÜÊ«Àœ'ÕVÌÊ'iÛiœ«“i˜ÌÊLÞÊ«ÀœÛˆ'ˆ˜}ʜÀˆ}ˆ˜>Ê'iÈ}˜Ê>˜'ʓ>˜Õv>VÌÕÀiÊ­\"glyph<c=12,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=31,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>®Ê܏Ṏœ˜ÃÊÌœÊ œÕÀÊVÕÃ̜“iÀðÊ7ˆÌ…Ê>ÊVœ“«Ài…i˜ÃˆÛiÊ\"glyph<c=12,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=31,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>ÊÃÌÀ>Ìi}Þʈ˜Ê«>Vi]Ê>˜'Ê̅iÊÀˆ}…ÌÊÀiÜÕÀViÃÊ>˜'ÊÌi>“ÃÊ̜ÊiÝiVÕÌiÊ̅ˆÃʈ˜ˆÌˆ>‡ ̈Ûi]ÊVÕÃ̜“iÀÃÊÌ>ŽiÊvՏÊ>'Û>˜Ì>}iʜvʜÕÀÊ՘«>À>ii'Ê'i«Ì…ÊœvÊ'iÈ}˜Ê>˜'Êi˜}ˆ˜iiÀˆ˜}ÊΈÃÊ̅>ÌÊ>ÀiÊÃޘV…Àœ˜ˆâi'ÊÜˆÌ…Ê œ˜iʜvÊ̅iÊܜÀ'½Ãʏ>À}iÃÌʓ>˜Õv>VÌÕÀˆ˜}ʈ˜vÀ>ÃÌÀÕVÌÕÀið", + "recall": 0.6, + "true_md": "£ £ - ‡ -\n\n7 ˆ Ì … Ê ` i à ˆ } ˜ Ê V i ˜ Ì i À Ã Ê  œ V > Ì i ` Ê ˆ ˜ Ê œ À Ì … Ê “ i À ˆ V > ] Ê Õ À œ « i Ê > ˜ ` Ê Ã ˆ > ] Ê - > ˜ “ ˆ ˜ > ‡ - Ê L œ > Ã Ì Ã Ê œ ˜ i Ê œ v Ê Ì … i Ê Ê  > À } i Ã Ì Ê > ˜ ` Ê “ œ Ã Ì Ê Ê i Ý « i À ˆ i ˜ V i ` Ê ` i à ˆ } ˜ Ê > ˜ ` Ê i ˜ } ˆ ˜ i i À ˆ ˜ } Ê } À œ Õ « Ã Ê ˆ ˜ Ê Ì … i Ê - Ê ˆ ˜ ` Õ Ã Ì À Þ ° Ê \" Õ À Ê V œ “ « À i … i ˜ à ˆ Û i Ê À > ˜ } i Ê œ v Ê Ã i À Û ˆ V i Ã Ê Ã Õ « « œ À Ì Ê ˆ ˜ ˆ Ì ˆ >  Ê « À œ ` Õ V Ì Ê ` i Û i  œ « “ i ˜ Ì Ê > ˜ ` Ê « À i ‡ « À œ ` Õ V Ì ˆ œ ˜ Ê À i µ Õ ˆ À i “ i ˜ Ì Ã Ê Ì … > Ì Ê ˆ ˜ V  Õ ` i Ê ˆ ˜ ` Õ Ã Ì À ˆ >  Ê ` i à ˆ } ˜ ] Ê “ i V … > ˜ ˆ V >  Ê i ˜ } ˆ ˜ i i À ˆ ˜ } ] Ê i  i V Ì À ˆ V >  Ê ` i à ˆ } ˜ ] Ê Ã œ v Ì Ü > À i Ê ` i Û i  œ « “ i ˜ Ì ] Ê « À ˆ ˜ Ì i ` Ê V ˆ À V Õ ˆ Ì Ê L œ > À ` Ê ­ * ® Ê  > Þ œ Õ Ì ] Ê À > ` ˆ œ Ê v À i µ Õ i ˜ V Þ Ê ­ , ® Ê > ˜ ` Ê œ « Ì ˆ V >  Ê ` i à ˆ } ˜ ] Ê µ Õ >  ˆ Ì Þ Ê > Ã Ã Õ À > ˜ V i Ê > ˜ ` Ê ` i à ˆ } ˜ Ê Û >  ˆ ` > Ì ˆ œ ˜ Ê Ì i Ã Ì ˆ ˜ } ° Ê \n\n- > ˜ “ ˆ ˜ > ‡ - ½ Ã Ê Õ ˜ ˆ µ Õ i Ê > ` Û > ˜ Ì > } i Ê ` i À ˆ Û i Ã Ê v À œ “ Ê œ Õ À Ê > L ˆ  ˆ Ì Þ Ê Ì œ Ê V œ ˜ à ˆ Ã Ì i ˜ Ì  Þ Ê “ i i Ì Ê œ Õ À Ê V Õ Ã Ì œ “ i À à ½ Ê V œ Ã Ì ] Ê « i À v œ À “ > ˜ V i Ê > ˜ ` Ê Ì ˆ “ i ‡ Ì œ ‡ “ > À Ž i Ì Ê À i µ Õ ˆ À i “ i ˜ Ì Ã ° Ê ˜ Ì i } À >  Ê Ì œ Ê Ì … ˆ Ã Ê Ã Õ V V i Ã Ã Ê > À i Ê Ì i > “ Ã Ê Ã « i V ˆ v ˆ V >   Þ Ê ` i ` ˆ V > Ì i ` Ê Ì œ Ê Ì … i Ê ` i à ˆ } ˜ Ê > ˜ ` Ê i ˜ } ˆ ˜ i i À ˆ ˜ } Ê œ v Ê * à ] Ê L > V Ž «  > ˜ i Ã Ê > ˜ ` Ê i ˜ V  œ Ã Õ À i Ã Ê q Ê >   Ê V À ˆ Ì ˆ V >  Ê i  i “ i ˜ Ì Ã Ê Ì œ Ê Ì … i Ê “ > ˜ Õ v > V Ì Õ À ˆ ˜ } Ê œ v Ê V œ “ «  i Ý ] Ê … ˆ } … ‡ « i À v œ À “ > ˜ V i Ê Ã Þ Ã Ì i “ à ° Ê œ À Ê ` i V > ` i à ] Ê - > ˜ “ ˆ ˜ > ‡ - Ê … > Ã Ê L i i ˜ Ê > Ê  i > ` i À Ê ˆ ˜ Ê ˆ ˜ ˜ œ Û > Ì ˆ ˜ } Ê ˜ i Ü Ê “ > Ì i À ˆ >  à ] Ê « À œ V i à à i Ã Ê > ˜ ` Ê Ì i V … ˜ œ  œ } ˆ i à ° Ê œ À i Ê À i V i ˜ Ì  Þ ] Ê Ü i ½ Û i Ê ˆ ˜ V À i > à i ` Ê œ Õ À Ê À œ  i Ê ˆ ˜ Ê ˜ i Ü Ê « À œ ` Õ V Ì Ê ` i Û i  œ « “ i ˜ Ì Ê L Þ Ê « À œ Û ˆ ` ˆ ˜ } Ê œ À ˆ } ˆ ˜ >  Ê ` i à ˆ } ˜ Ê > ˜ ` Ê “ > ˜ Õ v > V Ì Õ À i Ê ­ \" ® Ê Ã œ  Õ Ì ˆ œ ˜ Ã Ê Ì œ Ê œ Õ À Ê V Õ Ã Ì œ “ i À à ° Ê 7 ˆ Ì … Ê > Ê V œ “ « À i … i ˜ à ˆ Û i Ê \" Ê Ã Ì À > Ì i } Þ Ê ˆ ˜ Ê «  > V i ] Ê > ˜ ` Ê Ì … i Ê À ˆ } … Ì Ê À i à œ Õ À V i Ã Ê > ˜ ` Ê Ì i > “ Ã Ê Ì œ Ê i Ý i V Õ Ì i Ê Ì … ˆ Ã Ê ˆ ˜ ˆ Ì ˆ > ‡ Ì ˆ Û i ] Ê V Õ Ã Ì œ “ i À Ã Ê Ì > Ž i Ê v Õ   Ê > ` Û > ˜ Ì > } i Ê œ v Ê œ Õ À Ê Õ ˜ « > À >   i  i ` Ê ` i « Ì … Ê œ v Ê ` i à ˆ } ˜ Ê > ˜ ` Ê i ˜ } ˆ ˜ i i À ˆ ˜ } Ê Ã Ž ˆ   Ã Ê Ì … > Ì Ê > À i Ê Ã Þ ˜ V … À œ ˜ ˆ â i ` Ê Ü ˆ Ì … Ê œ ˜ i Ê œ v Ê Ì … i Ê Ü œ À  ` ½ Ã Ê  > À } i Ã Ì Ê “ > ˜ Õ v > V Ì Õ À ˆ ˜ } Ê ˆ ˜ v À > Ã Ì À Õ V Ì Õ À i à °" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4455740204187538, + "doc_id": "c45cab2ef7c8323ff7be45383f87807a6d46f7dfac6cac72cc5c97eda2ca285e", + "edit_distance": 0.5353535353535354, + "f1_score": 0.6964285714285714, + "meteor": 0.7459347402760711, + "precision": 0.639344262295082, + "pred_md": "## S TAT E M E N T O F C A S H F L O W S F O R T H E F I N A N C I A L Y E A R E N D E D 3 0 J U N E 2 0 0 0\n\n* These cash flows form part of the acquisition of Mermaid Marine Group Pty Ltd as disclosed in Note 19(d).\n\nThe statement of cash flows should be read in conjunction with the accompanying notes on pages 21 to 42.\n\n37", + "recall": 0.7647058823529411, + "true_md": "## STATEMENT OF CASH FLOWS FOR THE FINANCIAL YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2000\n\n37\n\n* These cash flows form part of the acquisition of Mermaid Marine Group Pty Ltd as disclosed in Note 19(d). The statement of cash flows should be read in conjunction with the accompanying notes on pages 21 to 42." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5139148057589263, + "doc_id": "5dda3367b1d51cb9e5596f4b67874488dc534e277af4d6df2ad34e7d51ecf5b3", + "edit_distance": 0.3974358974358974, + "f1_score": 0.8282828282828282, + "meteor": 0.630266241927198, + "precision": 0.8541666666666666, + "pred_md": "AN A N T I D O T E TO THE ORDINARY\n\nFunctional and timeless yet durable to the core. Problem-solver who values long-lasting and well-designed solutions seeks modern professional with a passion for helping people be both productive and inspired. Great customer relationships and confident, forwardthinking approach a must.\n\nALLSTEEL", + "recall": 0.803921568627451, + "true_md": "# A N A N T I D O T E T O T H E O R D I N A R Y\n\n## A L L S T E E L\n\nFunctional and timeless yet durable to the core. Problem-solver who values long-lasting and well-designed solutions seeks modern professional with a passion for helping people be both productive and inspired. Great cus- tomer relationships and confident, forward- thinking approach a must." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.04883451282282424, + "doc_id": "bd3b77d8b7a5fd644514b60c77882211c776d5882eab4ccb2317c2a628f9ba74", + "edit_distance": 0.8241758241758241, + "f1_score": 0.46875, + "meteor": 0.18894060283687944, + "precision": 0.5769230769230769, + "pred_md": "HON INDUSTRIES Inc. and SUBSIDIARIES\n\n## CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF SHAREHOLDERS' EQUITY\n\nThe accompanying notes are an integral part of the consolidated financial statements.\n\n41", + "recall": 0.39473684210526316, + "true_md": "H O N I N D U S T R I E S I n c . a n d S U B S I D I A R I E S\n\n## C O N S O L I D A T E D S T A T E M E N T S O F S H A R E H O L D E R S ’ E Q U I T Y\n\nThe accompanying notes are an integral part of the consolidated financial statements.\n\n41" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9473726065443968, + "doc_id": "e9e76be3b2a2c86ddc3a0040430a993bfde0f7cf943fe2d2ac4d86f24e764ac9", + "edit_distance": 0.4337899543378995, + "f1_score": 0.967948717948718, + "meteor": 0.9076611691790512, + "precision": 0.9710610932475884, + "pred_md": "OUR WORLD\n\n60\n\n## Driving Ahead in a Flat Market\n\nKAZUHIKO TOIDA Senior Vice President\n\nKAZUHIKO TOIDA Senior Vice President\n\n'Nissan's performance in Japan in 2004 was solid. Profit rose 1.4 percent and our market share went up 0.4 percent to 14.6 percent. Launching six new models in the second half boosted our results dramatically: we registered a 1.1 percent increase in market share over the previous period. And for the first time in 19\n\nyears we had four cars-the Tiida, Note, March and Cube-in the top ten.\n\nOur steady growth has continued into 2005, powered by positive customer response to both the Murano and Tiida. These are the kinds of attractive, unique products that have an immediate impact on consumers. We've also strengthened our position in the important small car market, and plan to augment that with the launch of the Otti, an OEM project with Mitsubishi, and the Moco, an OEM product with Suzuki. While we do need to raise our game in the SUV market, our overall coverage has improved recently.\n\nWe've set an ambitious sales target of 933,000 vehicles for 2005, which represents an increase of 10 percent. I'm confident that we can achieve this because of the strength of our product lineup. The recently released Serena underwent a full model change, for example, which should give us more muscle in the minivan market. We also recently decided to offer our entire lineup through both our blue and red sales channels, so customers will be able to see every model at any outlet they visit. This is in stark contrast to the traditional dealership system in Japan, which has many different sales channels.\n\nThe aging of the population has made the automotive market in Japan much tougher, and we expect flat or even\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\ndeclining sales as a result. Still, we do see potential in new areas within the market. For example, we increased the number of women employed as 'carlife' advisors and technical advisors. We did this to put both women and older customers at ease when they have sales and service issues. Both types of advisors are important to our sales and service at a dealership because they make the process more transparent and understandable. Service is a very profitable part of business in Japan, so taking ours to the next level is crucial.\n\nWe have two plans to expand sales in a flat market. The first is to develop a more efficient marketing strategy that is aligned with our quality products. The second is to build a more efficient dealership network, which will boost customer satisfaction. If we succeed at these, we can raise both our sales and our customer retention rate.\n\nOur dealers are reporting that the quality of our vehicles has improved greatly. We knew this from the upstream side, but it means a great deal to get confirmation from the market. Quality is always a risk factor in Japan; consumers here are unforgiving about quality problems. The Internet has accelerated the ability to share information, both good and bad, so the level and rate of information from dealers and consumers have gone up accordingly. Meanwhile, even prices for used Nissan vehicles are improving steadily, a major indication that the Nissan brand is recognized and valued.\n\nOur home market is of prime importance to Nissan. Japan is a major contributor to our total profit, and we will continue to make the upgrades in quality, products and service needed to drive sales and profit higher.'\n\nTIIDA\n\nTIIDA\n\nSERENA\n\nSERENA", + "recall": 0.9648562300319489, + "true_md": "## JAPAN\n\n## Driving Ahead in a Flat Market\n\nKAZUHIKO TOIDA Senior Vice President\n\n“Nissan’s performance in Japan in 2004 was solid. Profit rose 1.4 percent and our market share went up 0.4 percent to 14.6 percent. Launching six new models in the second half boosted our results dramatically: we registered a 1.1 percent increase in market share over the previous period. And for the first time in 19\n\nyears we had four cars—the Tiida, Note, March and Cube—in the top ten. \n\nOur steady growth has continued into 2005, powered by positive customer response to both the Murano and Tiida. These are the kinds of attractive, unique products that have an immediate impact on consumers. We’ve also strengthened our position in the important small car market, and plan to augment that with the launch of the Otti, an OEM project with Mitsubishi, and the Moco, an OEM product with Suzuki. While we do need to raise our game in the SUV market, our overall coverage has improved recently.\n\nWe’ve set an ambitious sales target of 933,000 vehicles for 2005, which represents an increase of 10 percent. I’m confident that we can achieve this because of the strength of our product lineup. The recently released Serena underwent a full model change, for example, which should give us more muscle in the minivan market. We also recently decided to offer our entire lineup through both our blue and red sales channels, so customers will be able to see every model at any outlet they visit. This is in stark contrast to the traditional dealership system in Japan, which has many different sales channels. \n\nThe aging of the population has made the automotive market in Japan much tougher, and we expect flat or even\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 60\n\nOur home market is of prime importance to Nissan. Japan is a major contributor to our total profit, and we will continue to make the upgrades in quality, products and service needed to drive sales and profit higher.”\n\nOur dealers are reporting that the quality of our vehicles has improved greatly. We knew this from the upstream side, but it means a great deal to get confirmation from the market. Quality is always a risk factor in Japan; consumers here are unforgiving about quality problems. The Internet has accelerated the ability to share information, both good and bad, so the level and rate of information from dealers and consumers have gone up accordingly. Meanwhile, even prices for used Nissan vehicles are improving steadily, a major indication that the Nissan brand is recognized and valued. \n\nWe have two plans to expand sales in a flat market. The first is to develop a more efficient marketing strategy that is aligned with our quality products. The second is to build a more efficient dealership network, which will boost customer satisfaction. If we succeed at these, we can raise both our sales and our customer retention rate.\n\ndeclining sales as a result. Still, we do see potential in new areas within the market. For example, we increased the number of women employed as “carlife” advisors and technical advisors. We did this to put both women and older customers at ease when they have sales and service issues. Both types of advisors are important to our sales and service at a dealership because they make the process more transparent and understandable. Service is a very profitable part of business in Japan, so taking ours to the next level is crucial. \n\nTIIDA\n\nSERENA\n\nOUR WORLD" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "5c31b464675589447ce0aa11e7329523592529dedbf152ccd1135fcdf5b6157b", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9985422740524781, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Nissan Annual Report 2004\n\n95\n\nFINANCIAL SECTION", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Nissan Annual Report 2004 95\n\nFINANCIAL SECTION" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8936114651189485, + "doc_id": "c5bc92768354d38bc343607f3d25434ab5561b158d9670fb2a7a85f228e5c0a3", + "edit_distance": 0.30434782608695654, + "f1_score": 0.9794520547945207, + "meteor": 0.8710424365200427, + "precision": 0.9930555555555556, + "pred_md": "SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## Note 10. Stock Incentive Plan (Continued)\n\nA summary of the status of the Plan at December 31, 2003, 2002 and 2001 and changes during the years ended on those dates is as follows:\n\nThere were 85,670, 91,658 and 83,114 shares exercisable at December 31, 2003, 2002 and 2001, at weighted average exercise prices per share of, $15.94, $13.70, and $11.71, respectively. During 2002, the Company issued 4,654 shares of Company stock to employees valued at $100 thousand in recognition of the Company's 100 th year anniversary. The following table summarizes information about stock options outstanding at December 31, 2003:\n\n## Note 11. Major Customers\n\nThe Company has one major customer and relationship that is a significant source of revenue. In 2003, as during the past number of years, the Company's relationship with Sprint continued to increase, due to growth in the PCS business segment. Approximately 61.2% of total revenues in 2003 were generated by or through Sprint and its customers using the Company's portion of Sprint's nationwide PCS network. This was compared to 57.6% in 2002, and 47.1% of total revenue in 2001. No other customer relationship on a stand-alone basis generates more than 2.5% of the Company's total revenue for 2003, 2002 and 2001.\n\n33\n\n2003 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n■", + "recall": 0.9662162162162162, + "true_md": "SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## Note 10. Stock Incentive Plan (Continued)\n\n## Note 11. Major Customers\n\nThere were 85,670, 91,658 and 83,114 shares exercisable at December 31, 2003, 2002 and 2001, at weighted average exercise prices per share of, $15.94, $13.70, and $11.71, respectively. During 2002, the Company issued 4,654 shares of Company stock to employees valued at $100 thousand in recognition of the Company’s 100 $^{th}$ year anniversary. The following table summarizes information about stock options outstanding at December 31, 2003:\n\nThe Company has one major customer and relationship that is a significant source of revenue. In 2003, as during the past number of years, the Company’s relationship with Sprint continued to increase, due to growth in the PCS business segment. Approximately 61.2% of total revenues in 2003 were generated by or through Sprint and its customers using the Company’s portion of Sprint’s nationwide PCS network. This was compared to 57.6% in 2002, and 47.1% of total revenue in 2001. No other customer relationship on a stand-alone basis generates more than 2.5% of the Company’s total revenue for 2003, 2002 and 2001.\n\nA summary of the status of the Plan at December 31, 2003, 2002 and 2001 and changes during the years ended on those dates is as follows:\n\n33 ■ 2003 ANNUAL REPORT" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.2381436464516063, + "doc_id": "dfee0961bc841336e5bc54e2fcde4a90784d8cff12708d5297277a7b3eaeee39", + "edit_distance": 0.7380952380952381, + "f1_score": 0.5853658536585367, + "meteor": 0.5868736383442267, + "precision": 0.5, + "pred_md": "C O N S O L I D A T E D S T A T E M E N T S O F I N C O M E\n\nThe accompanying notes are an integral part of these statements.\n\n8", + "recall": 0.7058823529411765, + "true_md": "## CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF INCOME\n\n8\n\nThe accompanying notes are an integral part of these statements." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9057338831486614, + "doc_id": "5aa19ae5c484f76af9fda11e77c9a7369ffca1610b53ccbf3c2dd04b694553f1", + "edit_distance": 0.7600896860986547, + "f1_score": 0.9696969696969697, + "meteor": 0.7870584662090822, + "precision": 0.9696969696969697, + "pred_md": "I NDUSTRY TRENDS SPOTLIGHT\n\n## Bridging electronic payments in emerging markets\n\nNew business solutions are thriving as traditional banking environments transition rapidly from cash to electronic payments and transactions.\n\nhile credit is used for electronic transactions in W estern Europe and North America, the model is quite different in many 'cash-based' economies around the world. And that's where Euronet continues to look for new opportunities - particularly in the emerging W\n\nThe Promise of Emerging Markets\n\nExpanding Poland's Payment Infrastructure\n\nAlthough still under-\n\ndeveloped compared to western economies, Poland is one of the most dynamic and promising markets in all of Europe.\n\nSince entering Poland in 1995, Euronet Worldwide has become one of the largest transaction processing service providers in the country, establishing a network of over 600 ATMs and providing software to eight major banks. Our agreement for electronic airtime distribution with all three mobile phone operators in the country - ERA GSM, Plus GSM and IDEA Centertel - further confirms that Euronet is embedded in the financial payments fabric in Poland.\n\nmarkets of Central Europe, the Middle East, Africa, Asia-Pacific, Latin America and the Caribbean.\n\nAlthough bank card use is just starting in these markets, the demand for non-cash payment is gaining momentum. The foundation for this marketplace is rapidly taking shape with greater technology support, well-designed infrastructure and rapidly growing networks, as well as a critical mass of users. So the shift to new electronic payment channels is on, and the number of electronic financial transactions has grown tremendously.\n\nEuronet Worldwide continuously monitors cash-based economies to identify their readiness to embrace electronic payment and transaction alternatives. With ATM, point-of-sale (POS), interactive voice response (IVR), Internet, mobile solutions and other innovative payment options, we can play a vital role in developing the electronic payments fabric of these countries.\n\nIn Greece, we are delivering ATM outsourcing solutions for a number of multinational banks with Greek operations. For Credigen Bank in Hungary, we are helping to open up the consumer credit market to a new base of shoppers who can perform POS and ATM transactions over Euronet's network. And in the Czech Republic we are providing outsourcing services for ABN AMRO's Visa Charge Card Program.\n\nLooking ahead, we see great potential for extending Euronet's brand into cash-based markets and for connecting a new world of users to dynamic transaction services.\n\n10", + "recall": 0.9696969696969697, + "true_md": "10\n\nINDUSTRY TRENDS SPOTLIGHT\n\n## Bridging electronic payments in emerging markets\n\nNew business solutions are thriving as traditional banking environments transition rapidly from cash to electronic payments and transactions.\n\nAlthough bank card use is just starting in these markets, the demand for non-cash payment is gaining momentum. The foundation for this marketplace is rapidly taking shape with greater technology support, well-designed infrastructure and rapidly growing networks, as well as a critical mass of users. So the shift to new electronic payment channels is on, and the number of electronic financial transactions has grown tremendously. \n\nhile credit is used for electronic transactions in Western Europe and North America, the model is quite different in many “cash-based” economies around the world. And that’s where Euronet continues to look for new opportunities – particularly in the emerging W\n\nmarkets of Central Europe, the Middle East, Africa, Asia-Pacific, Latin America and the Caribbean.\n\nEuronet Worldwide continuously monitors cash-based economies to identify their readiness to embrace electronic payment and transaction alternatives. With ATM, point-of-sale (POS), interactive voice response (IVR), Internet, mobile solutions and other innovative payment options, we can play a vital role in developing the electronic payments fabric of these countries.\n\nIn Greece, we are delivering ATM outsourcing solutions for a number of multinational banks with Greek operations. For Credigen Bank in Hungary, we are helping to open up the consumer credit market to a new base of shoppers who can perform POS and ATM transactions over Euronet’s network. And in the Czech Republic we are providing outsourcing services for ABN AMRO’s Visa Charge Card Program.\n\nLooking ahead, we see great potential for extending Euronet’s brand into cash-based markets and for connecting a new world of users to dynamic transaction services.\n\nSince entering Poland in 1995, Euronet Worldwide has become one of the largest transaction processing service providers in the country, establishing a network of over 600 ATMs and providing software to eight major banks. Our agreement for electronic airtime distribution with all three mobile phone operators in the country – ERA GSM, Plus GSM and IDEA Centertel – further confirms that Euronet is embedded in the financial payments fabric in Poland.\n\ndeveloped compared to western economies, Poland is one of the most dynamic and promising markets in all of Europe.\n\nAlthough still under-\n\n## The Promise of Emerging Markets\n\n## Expanding Poland’s Payment Infrastructure" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9374736334594099, + "doc_id": "46720ea9bf88235e2a96cb07edf7f3b5cc595401cf771c716531cfdf7a289aa9", + "edit_distance": 0.9133574007220217, + "f1_score": 0.988929889298893, + "meteor": 0.8385854822120113, + "precision": 0.9925925925925926, + "pred_md": "SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## Note 9. Retirement Plans (Continued)\n\nThe accumulated benefit obligation for the qualified retirement plan was $7,872, $6,551 and $5,399 at December 31, 2003, 2002 and 2001, respectively.\n\nWeighted average assumptions used by the Company in the determination of benefit obligations at December 31, 2003, 2002 and 2001 were as follows:\n\nWeighted average assumptions used by the Company in the determination of net pension cost for the years ended December 31, 2003, 2002, and 2001 were as follows:\n\nThe Company's pension plan asset allocations based on market value at December 31, 2003 and 2002, by asset category were as follows:\n\n## Investment Policy\n\nThe investment policy of the Company's Pension Plan is for assets to be invested in a manner consistent with the fiduciary standards of ERISA. More specifically, the investment focus is to preserve capital which includes inflationary protection as well as protection of the principal amounts contributed to the Plan. Of lesser importance is the consistency of growth, which will tend to minimize the annual fluctuations in the normal cost. It is anticipated that growth of the fund will result from both capital appreciation and the re-investment of current income.\n\n## Contributions\n\nThe Company expects to contribute $0.5 million to the noncontributory defined benefit plan in 2004, and contributed $0.4 million in 2003, and $0.3 million in 2002.\n\n31 ■ 2003 ANNUAL REPORT", + "recall": 0.9852941176470589, + "true_md": "## Note 9. Retirement Plans (Continued)\n\n## SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\nThe investment policy of the Company’s Pension Plan is for assets to be invested in a manner consistent with the fiduciary standards of ERISA. More specifically, the investment focus is to preserve capital which includes inflationary protection as well as protection of the principal amounts contributed to the Plan. Of lesser importance is the consistency of growth, which will tend to minimize the annual fluctuations in the normal cost. It is anticipated that growth of the fund will result from both capital appreciation and the re-investment of current income.\n\nThe Company expects to contribute $0.5 million to the noncontributory defined benefit plan in 2004, and contributed $0.4 million in 2003, and $0.3 million in 2002.\n\n31 ■ 2003 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n## Investment Policy\n\n## Contributions\n\nThe Company’s pension plan asset allocations based on market value at December 31, 2003 and 2002, by asset category were as follows:\n\nWeighted average assumptions used by the Company in the determination of net pension cost for the years ended December 31, 2003, 2002, and 2001 were as follows:\n\nWeighted average assumptions used by the Company in the determination of benefit obligations at December 31, 2003, 2002 and 2001 were as follows:\n\nThe accumulated benefit obligation for the qualified retirement plan was $7,872, $6,551 and $5,399 at December 31, 2003, 2002 and 2001, respectively." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9105224431206467, + "doc_id": "ac4c1fcc91fd4b59125a0396f2da9641f46bafe99904034d14586f71600af1bc", + "edit_distance": 0.07750472589792061, + "f1_score": 0.9422382671480144, + "meteor": 0.9495774214164133, + "precision": 0.9738805970149254, + "pred_md": "HON INDUSTRIES 2003\n\nour rapid continuous improvement (RCI) programs, in 1992. It is not only a process to drive out cost, it is a powerful tool to engage every member every day in making choices to improve the value we provide to our customers.\n\n## ENHANCING CULTURE AND CAPABILITIES\n\nOur values are simple yet powerful. They are as relevant today as they were when the company was founded 60 years ago. Our member-owner culture of shared responsibility and shared reward engages all members in the ongoing business improvement process and allows us to embrace change. As we continue to add and develop talent to support our growth strategies, we become more diverse in our perspectives, strengthening our ability to understand and meet the needs of our customers and end-users.\n\nOn January 5, 2004, we completed the acquisition of Paoli Inc., a leading provider of wood case goods and seating. The acquisition reflects our commitment to achieving profitable growth. With annual sales in excess of $80 million, Paoli has well-known brands, a broad product offering, and strong independent representative sales and dealer networks. This acquisition supports our operating philosophy to work through autonomous, decentralized businesses with strong brands focused on distinct markets.\n\nImportant to our company's success, is a strong Board of Directors who bring their individual skills, knowledge, and experience to our company. Their involvement, independence, and integrity provide the ongoing foundation for effective governance and corporate oversight for you, our shareholders.\n\nThis year we recognize retiring directors Lorne R. Waxlax, Robert W. Cox, and M. Farooq Kathwari. We thank them for their dedication. We are also pleased to welcome Joseph Scalzo, President, Personal Care Products, The Gillette Company, to our board.\n\nOur CEO succession process is progressing smoothly. The appointment of Stan Askren as President of HON INDUSTRIES and as a member of the Board of Directors,\n\nannounced in February 2003, was an important part of this process.\n\nOur office furniture and hearth businesses are healthy and well-positioned for growth; still we continue to face a competitive business environment. We are confident of our financial security, and certain that our transition to becoming a marketdriven, operationally excellent company will continue to enhance shareholder value. The transformation continues. We will be seeking shareholder approval, in early May 2004, to change the name of HON INDUSTRIES to HNI Corporation, drawing on our heritage while remaining true to our culture and values. The new name will serve to better align the corporate identity with the direction of the company, as a strategic manager of multiple, distinct, and independent brands.\n\nWe thank our member-owners for their continued dedication, and look forward to the challenges and opportunities of 2004.\n\n14", + "recall": 0.9125874125874126, + "true_md": "HON INDUSTRIES 2003\n\nour rapid continuous improvement (RCI) programs, in 1992. It is not only a process to drive out cost, it is a powerful tool to engage every member every day in making choices to improve the value we provide to our customers.\n\nOur values are simple yet powerful. They are as relevant today as they were when the company was founded 60 years ago. Our member-owner culture of shared responsibility and shared reward engages all members in the ongoing business improve- ment process and allows us to embrace change. As we continue to add and develop talent to support our growth strategies, we become more diverse in our perspectives, strengthening our ability to understand and meet the needs of our customers and end-users.\n\n## ENHANCING CULTURE AND CAPABILITIES\n\nOn January 5, 2004, we completed the acquisition of Paoli Inc., a leading provider of wood case goods and seating. The acquisition reflects our commitment to achieving profit- able growth. With annual sales in excess of $80 million, Paoli has well-known brands, a broad product offering, and strong independent representative sales and dealer networks. This acquisition supports our operating philosophy to work through autonomous, decentralized businesses with strong brands focused on distinct markets. \n\nImportant to our company’s success, is a strong Board of Directors who bring their individual skills, knowledge, and experience to our company. Their involvement, independence, and integrity provide the ongoing foundation for effective gov- ernance and corporate oversight for you, our shareholders. \n\nThis year we recognize retiring directors Lorne R. Waxlax, Robert W. Cox, and M. Farooq Kathwari. We thank them for their dedication. We are also pleased to welcome Joseph Scalzo, President, Personal Care Products, The Gillette Company, to our board. \n\nOur CEO succession process is progressing smoothly. The appointment of Stan Askren as President of HON INDUSTRIES and as a member of the Board of Directors, \n\n14\n\nannounced in February 2003, was an important part of this process. \n\nOur office furniture and hearth businesses are healthy and well-positioned for growth; still we continue to face a com- petitive business environment. We are confident of our financial security, and certain that our transition to becoming a market- driven, operationally excellent company will continue to en- hance shareholder value. The transformation continues. We will be seeking shareholder approval, in early May 2004, to change the name of HON INDUSTRIES to HNI Corporation, drawing on our heritage while remaining true to our culture and values. The new name will serve to better align the corporate identity with the direction of the company, as a strategic manager of multiple, distinct, and independent brands.\n\nWe thank our member-owners for their continued dedication, and look forward to the challenges and opportuni- ties of 2004.\n\nJack D. Michaels CHAIRMAN AND CHIEF EXECUTIVE OFFICER\n\nStan A. Askren PRESIDENT" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "0c49de0d861362926e54b7151f4271e6e9a457623d316457a6a29797fc74709b", + "edit_distance": 0.07750472589792061, + "f1_score": 0.9422382671480144, + "meteor": 0.9495774214164133, + "precision": 0.9738805970149254, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.9125874125874126, + "true_md": "WHILE YOU IN TRAINI! WHILE YOU IN TRAINI!" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8650728557358817, + "doc_id": "d435cde09aa0f7078a63b270adebad6ce1bcf3e2039a5295e721a8640a096bdf", + "edit_distance": 0.27692307692307694, + "f1_score": 0.9411764705882353, + "meteor": 0.8303045690697709, + "precision": 0.9504950495049505, + "pred_md": "6\n\nFirst Financial Bankshares customers and shareholders also know a thing or two about Value and Values - and we learn from them every day. We're proud to share in their success. Here are just a few of their stories.\n\nGeorge Marti believes in doing things. Good things.\n\nBorn to humble roots on his parents' farm in 1920, Marti has accomplished much, including founding three radio stations (and investing in 10 more) and developing a remote pickup device that became standard equipment in 80 percent of all radio stations worldwide. He still has part ownership of KCLE in Cleburne, Texas (the town where he was once mayor for 12 years).\n\nMarti's dedication to his hometown is part of the reason why he bought Cleburne State Bank in 1992. His business skills (and success in the broadcasting industry) gave him the resources to turn the bank into yet another winning venture. Five years later, he sold it to First Financial, which merged it with their existing First Financial Bank, Cleburne.\n\nThe proceeds from the sale helped Marti complete the funding for his proudest achievement: the Marti Foundation, which he created in the 1970s to help send students from Johnson County to college. 'We help over 100 students a year … most are the first from their family ever to attend college,' says Marti. 'I know what education did for me, so it's a great thing to help these young people.' Marti says that when he dies, the Foundation will live on, $20 million strong.\n\nMarti still serves on the board of First Financial Bank, Cleburne. 'First Financial's merger of the banks was positive for the community. They have a good customer base. They are friendly, helpful and creative. They are growing, and the branches in Alvarado and Burleson are both doing well. Those are all good things.'\n\n## 'They are friendly , helpful and creative.\n\nThose are all good things. '\n\nGeorge Marti Founder Marti Enterprises Cleburne, Texas\n\nGeorge Marti Founder Marti Enterprises Cleburne, Texas", + "recall": 0.9320388349514563, + "true_md": "“They are friendly, helpful and creative. Those are all good things.”\n\nGeorge Marti believes in doing things. Good things. \n\nBorn to humble roots on his parents’ farm in 1920, Marti has accomplished much, including found- ing three radio stations (and investing in 10 more) and developing a remote pickup device that became standard equipment in 80 percent of all radio stations worldwide. He still has part own- ership of KCLE in Cleburne, Texas (the town where he was once mayor for 12 years).\n\nMarti’s dedication to his hometown is part of the reason why he bought Cleburne State Bank in 1992. His business skills (and success in the broadcasting industry) gave him the resources to turn the bank into yet another winning venture. Five years later, he sold it to First Financial, which merged it with their existing First Financial Bank, Cleburne. \n\nThe proceeds from the sale helped Marti complete the funding for his proudest achievement: the Marti Foundation, which he created in the 1970s to help send students from Johnson County to college. “We help over 100 students a year … most are the first from their family ever to attend college,” says Marti. “I know what education did for me, so it’s a great thing to help these young people.” Marti says that when he dies, the Foundation will live on, $20 million strong. \n\nMarti still serves on the board of First Financial Bank, Cleburne. “First Financial’s merger of the banks was positive for the community. They have a good customer base. They are friendly, help- ful and creative. They are growing, and the branches in Alvarado and Burleson are both doing well. Those are all good things.”\n\n## First Financial Bankshares customers and shareholders also know a thing or two about Value and Values – and we learn from them every day. We’re proud to share in their success. Here are just a few of their stories.\n\n6\n\nGeorge Marti Founder Marti Enterprises Cleburne, Texas" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "e6293956bbfd10cc1cdb4643e290c077af9a999d69dd41ddf56b02275ea453e6", + "edit_distance": 0.27692307692307694, + "f1_score": 0.9411764705882353, + "meteor": 0.8303045690697709, + "precision": 0.9504950495049505, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.9320388349514563, + "true_md": "## ITlO ‘mM Cc 1 = tu m\n\n(n) pl momenta / or momentums /; 1. strength or force gained by motion through a series of moments or events prodwcing velocity." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9370520341487665, + "doc_id": "e34072339f0cf6c2761e6e4e563ab765f216360848233676613b8c6f01433dc7", + "edit_distance": 0.024390243902439025, + "f1_score": 0.9677419354838711, + "meteor": 0.975584032012195, + "precision": 0.967741935483871, + "pred_md": "A t r i o n C o r p o r a t i o n O n e A l l e n t o w n P a r k w a y A l l e n , T e x a s 7 5 0 0 2 9 7 2 · 3 9 0 · 9 8 0 0 w w w . a t r i o n c o r p . c o m", + "recall": 0.967741935483871, + "true_md": "A t r i o n C o r p o r a t i o n O n e A l l e n t o w n P a r k w a y A l l e n , T e x a s 7 5 0 0 2 9 7 2 • 3 9 0 • 9 8 0 0 w w w . a t r i o n c o r p . c o m" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9195677489784095, + "doc_id": "a356ef1a87dcd27c3a34f6946736d16e8bff803e15a1deb79f4a3aea283a2a61", + "edit_distance": 0.09339774557165861, + "f1_score": 0.9377777777777777, + "meteor": 0.9746389424904222, + "precision": 0.9213973799126638, + "pred_md": "## Intangible assets consist of the following (dollars in thousands):\n\nAggregate amortization expense for patents and goodwill was $304,000, $304,000 and $907,000 for 2003, 2002 and 2001, respectively.\n\nEstimated future amortization expense for each of the years ending December 31, is as follows (in thousands):\n\nThere was no change in the carrying amounts of goodwill for 2003.\n\n## DI S C O N T I N U E D O P E R A T I O N S 3\n\nDuring 1997, the Company sold all of its natural gas operations. The consolidated financial statements presented herein reflect the Company's natural gas operations as discontinued operations for all periods presented. The consolidated financial statements reflect a gain on disposal of these discontinued operations of $165,000 in 2003 and 2002, and $5.5 million in 2001. These amounts are net of income tax expense of $85,000 in 2003 and 2002, and include an income tax benefit of $5.1 million in 2001.\n\nIn addition to the initial consideration received in 1997 upon the sale of the natural gas operations, certain annual contingent deferred payments of up to $250,000 per year were to be paid to the Company over an eight-year period which began in 1999, with the amount paid each year to be dependent upon revenues received by the purchaser from certain gas transportation contracts. The Company received deferred payments of $250,000 each, before tax, from the purchaser in April 2003, 2002 and 2001 which are reflected in each year as a gain from discontinued operations of $165,000, net of tax. The 2001 gain also includes a $5.3 million non-cash gain from reversal of a reserve established when the Company disposed of its natural gas operations in 1997. This reversal in the third quarter of 2001 followed the resolution of an outstanding contingency related to the sale of those assets.\n\n## L I N E O F C R E D I T\n\nThe Company has a revolving credit facility ('Credit Facility') with a regional bank. In December 2001, the Credit Facility arrangement was amended to increase the credit line under the Credit Facility from $18.5 million to $25.0 million. Under the Credit Facility, the Company and certain of its subsidiaries have a line of credit which is secured by substantially all inventory, equipment and accounts receivable of the Company. Interest under the Credit Facility is assessed at 30-day, 60-day or 90-day LIBOR, as selected by the Company, plus one percent (2.17 percent at December 31, 2003) and is payable monthly. At December 31, 2003, and 2002, $4.3 million and $10.3 million, respectively, was outstanding under the line of credit. The Credit Facility expires November 12, 2006, and may be extended under certain circumstances. At any time during the term, the Company may convert any or all outstanding amounts under the Credit Facility to a term loan with a maturity of two years. The Company's ability to borrow funds under the Credit Facility from time to time is contingent on meeting certain covenants in the loan agreement, the most restrictive of which is the ratio of total debt to earnings before interest, income tax, depreciation and amortization. At December 31, 2003, the Company was in compliance with all financial covenants.\n\n15", + "recall": 0.9547511312217195, + "true_md": "Intangible assets consist of the following (dollars in thousands):\n\nAggregate amortization expense for patents and goodwill was $304,000, $304,000 and $907,000 for 2003, 2002 and 2001, respectively. Estimated future amortization expense for each of the years ending December 31, is as follows (in thousands):\n\nThere was no change in the carrying amounts of goodwill for 2003.\n\nDuring 1997, the Company sold all of its natural gas operations. The consolidated financial statements presented herein reflect the Company’s natural gas operations as discontinued operations for all periods presented. The consolidated financial statements reflect a gain on disposal of these discontinued operations of $165,000 in 2003 and 2002, and $5.5 million in 2001. These amounts are net of income tax expense of $85,000 in 2003 and 2002, and include an income tax benefit of $5.1 million in 2001. \n\nIn addition to the initial consideration received in 1997 upon the sale of the natural gas operations, certain annual contingent deferred payments of up to $250,000 per year were to be paid to the Company over an eight-year period which began in 1999, with the amount paid each year to be dependent upon revenues received by the purchaser from certain gas transportation contracts. The Company received deferred payments of $250,000 each, before tax, from the purchaser in April 2003, 2002 and 2001 which are reflected in each year as a gain from discontinued operations of $165,000, net of tax. The 2001 gain also includes a $5.3 million non-cash gain from reversal of a reserve established when the Company disposed of its natural gas operations in 1997. This reversal in the third quarter of 2001 followed the resolution of an outstanding contingency related to the sale of those assets. \n\nThe Company has a revolving credit facility (“Credit Facility”) with a regional bank. In December 2001, the Credit Facility arrangement was amended to increase the credit line under the Credit Facility from $18.5 million to $25.0 million. Under the Credit Facility, the Company and certain of its subsidiaries have a line of credit which is secured by substantially all inventory, equipment and accounts receivable of the Company. Interest under the Credit Facility is assessed at 30-day, 60-day or 90-day LIBOR, as selected by the Company, plus one percent (2.17 percent at December 31, 2003) and is payable monthly. At December 31, 2003, and 2002, $4.3 million and $10.3 million, respectively, was outstanding under the line of credit. The Credit Facility expires November 12, 2006, and may be extended under certain circumstances. At any time during the term, the Company may convert any or all outstanding amounts under the Credit Facility to a term loan with a maturity of two years. The Company’s ability to borrow funds under the Credit Facility from time to time is contingent on meeting certain covenants in the loan agreement, the most restrictive of which is the ratio of total debt to earnings before interest, income tax, depreciation and amortization. At December 31, 2003, the Company was in compliance with all financial covenants.\n\n## DISCONTINUED OPERATIONS 3\n\n## LINE OF CREDIT 4\n\n15" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7324354347710584, + "doc_id": "38bd31740af94d54e8bfaeb35e29d6c58144264e202b674c52e77b8965f78e09", + "edit_distance": 0.7921146953405018, + "f1_score": 0.9880239520958083, + "meteor": 0.93649529751814, + "precision": 0.9939759036144579, + "pred_md": "## Senior Management\n\n## Executive and\n\nCorporate Officers\n\n## Ramani Ayer\n\nChairman, President and Chief Executive Officer\n\n## Thomas M. Marra\n\nExecutive Vice President\n\n## David K. Zwiener\n\nExecutive Vice President\n\n## David M. Johnson\n\nExecutive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer\n\n## Neal S. Wolin\n\nExecutive Vice President and General Counsel\n\n## David M. Znamierowski\n\nGroup Senior Vice President and Chief Investment Officer\n\n## David H. Annis\n\nGroup Senior Vice President, Information Technology\n\n## Randall I. Kiviat\n\nGroup Senior Vice President, Human Resources\n\n## Edward L. Morgan, Jr.\n\nGroup Senior Vice President, Corporate Relations\n\n## Joel Freedman\n\nSenior Vice President,\n\nGovernment Affairs\n\n## John N. Giamalis\n\nSenior Vice President and Controller\n\nHartford Investment\n\nManagement Company (HIMCO)\n\n## David M. Znamierowski\n\nPresident\n\n## Life\n\n## Thomas M. Marra\n\nPresident and Chief Operating Officer\n\n## Robert A. Kerzner\n\nExecutive Vice President, Individual Life Division, and President, Woodbury Financial Services\n\n## John C. Walters\n\nExecutive Vice President, Investment Products Division\n\n## Stephen T. Joyce\n\nSenior Vice President, Investment Products\n\n## David M. Levenson\n\nSenior Vice President,\n\nInvestment Products\n\n## Lizabeth H. Zlatkus\n\nExecutive Vice President, Group Benefits Division\n\n## Gregory A. Boyko\n\nSenior Vice President, International\n\n## Ann M. de Raismes\n\nSenior Vice President,\n\nHuman Resources\n\n## David T. Foy\n\nSenior Vice President and Chief Financial Officer\n\n## Lois W. Grady\n\nSenior Vice President, Fortis Integration/Operations\n\n## Craig R. Raymond\n\nSenior Vice President and\n\nChief Actuary\n\n## Christine H. Repasy\n\nSenior Vice President and General Counsel\n\n## Vittorio M. Severino\n\nSenior Vice President, Information Technology\n\n## Walter C. Welsh\n\nSenior Vice President, Government Affairs\n\n## PLANCO Financial Services, Inc.\n\n## Kevin M. Connor\n\nManaging Director\n\n## Sean E. O'Hara\n\nManaging Director\n\n## Timothy J. Seifert\n\nManaging Director\n\nInternational Corporate Marketing Group (ICMG)\n\nJoseph F. Mahoney President\n\n## Property & Casualty\n\n## David K. Zwiener\n\nPresident and Chief Operating Officer\n\n## Judith A. Blades\n\nSenior Executive Vice President,\n\nProperty & Casualty\n\n## J. Paul Kennedy\n\nExecutive Vice President, Personal Lines\n\n## David H. McElroy\n\nSenior Vice President,\n\nHartford Financial Products\n\n## Ralph J. Palmieri\n\nSenior Vice President, Specialty Property\n\n## James M. Ruel\n\nSenior Vice President, Select Customer\n\n## Gary J. Thompson\n\nSenior Vice President,\n\nMiddle Market\n\n## Fred H. Eppinger\n\nExecutive Vice President, Field and Service Operations\n\n## Richard J. Law\n\nSenior Vice President,\n\nField Operations\n\n## Sharon A. Ritchey\n\nSenior Vice President, Contact Center Operations\n\n## Joseph Z. Gauches\n\nExecutive Vice President, E-Commerce and Technology\n\n## Calvin Hudson\n\nExecutive Vice President, Claims\n\n## David R. Robb\n\nExecutive Vice President\n\n## Raymond J. Sprague\n\nExecutive Vice President, Reinsurance Operations\n\n## Michael J. Dury\n\nSenior Vice President and Chief Financial Officer\n\n## Robert A. Ferreira\n\nSenior Vice President,\n\nHuman Resources\n\n## Richard W. Palczynski\n\nSenior Vice President and Chief Actuary\n\n35", + "recall": 0.9821428571428571, + "true_md": "## Senior Management\n\n## Property & Casualty\n\n## Life\n\n## Executive and Corporate Officers\n\n## Ramani Ayer\n\n## Thomas M. Marra\n\n## David K. Zwiener\n\n## David M. Johnson\n\n## Neal S. Wolin\n\n## David M. Znamierowski\n\n## David H. Annis\n\n## Randall I. Kiviat\n\n## Edward L. Morgan, Jr.\n\n## Joel Freedman\n\n## John N. Giamalis\n\n## Hartford Investment Management Company (HIMCO)\n\n## David M. Znamierowski\n\n## Thomas M. Marra\n\n## Robert A. Kerzner\n\n## John C. Walters\n\n## Stephen T. Joyce\n\n## David M. Levenson\n\n## Lizabeth H. Zlatkus\n\n## Gregory A. Boyko\n\n## Ann M. de Raismes\n\n## David T. Foy\n\n## Lois W. Grady\n\n## Craig R. Raymond\n\n## Christine H. Repasy\n\n## Vittorio M. Severino\n\n## Walter C. Welsh\n\n## PLANCO Financial Services, Inc.\n\n## Kevin M. Connor\n\n## Sean E. O’Hara\n\n## Timothy J. Seifert\n\n## International Corporate Marketing Group (ICMG)\n\n## Joseph F. Mahoney\n\n## David K. Zwiener\n\n## Judith A. Blades\n\n## J. Paul Kennedy\n\n## David H. McElroy\n\n## Ralph J. Palmieri\n\n## James M. Ruel\n\n## Gary J. Thompson\n\n## Fred H. Eppinger\n\n## Richard J. Law\n\n## Sharon A. Ritchey\n\n## Joseph Z. Gauches\n\n## Calvin Hudson\n\n## David R. Robb\n\n## Raymond J. Sprague\n\n## Michael J. Dury\n\n## Robert A. Ferreira\n\n## Richard W. Palczynski\n\nChairman, President and Chief Executive Officer\n\nExecutive Vice President\n\nExecutive Vice President\n\nExecutive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer\n\nGroup Senior Vice President and Chief Investment Officer\n\nGroup Senior Vice President, Information Technology\n\nGroup Senior Vice President, Human Resources\n\nGroup Senior Vice President, Corporate Relations\n\nSenior Vice President, Government Affairs\n\nSenior Vice President and Controller\n\nPresident\n\nExecutive Vice President and General Counsel\n\nPresident and Chief Operating Officer\n\nExecutive Vice President, Individual Life Division, and President, Woodbury Financial Services\n\nExecutive Vice President, Investment Products Division\n\nSenior Vice President, Investment Products\n\nSenior Vice President, Investment Products\n\nExecutive Vice President, Group Benefits Division\n\nSenior Vice President, International\n\nSenior Vice President, Human Resources\n\nSenior Vice President and Chief Financial Officer\n\nSenior Vice President, Fortis Integration/Operations\n\nSenior Vice President and Chief Actuary\n\nSenior Vice President and General Counsel\n\nSenior Vice President, Information Technology\n\nSenior Vice President, Government Affairs\n\nSenior Executive Vice President, Property & Casualty\n\nExecutive Vice President, Personal Lines\n\nSenior Vice President, Hartford Financial Products\n\nSenior Vice President, Specialty Property\n\nSenior Vice President, Select Customer\n\nSenior Vice President, Middle Market\n\nExecutive Vice President, E-Commerce and Technology\n\nSenior Vice President, Contact Center Operations\n\nExecutive Vice President, Field and Service Operations\n\nSenior Vice President, Field Operations\n\nExecutive Vice President, Claims\n\nExecutive Vice President\n\nExecutive Vice President, Reinsurance Operations\n\nSenior Vice President and Chief Financial Officer\n\nSenior Vice President, Human Resources\n\nSenior Vice President and Chief Actuary\n\nManaging Director\n\nManaging Director\n\nManaging Director\n\nPresident\n\nPresident and Chief Operating Officer\n\n35" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8837841380405761, + "doc_id": "379458997400d9c26339e14f3e386fcb018f8f8678dbfe229a0824d56c1156ac", + "edit_distance": 0.07196029776674938, + "f1_score": 0.9574468085106382, + "meteor": 0.9336792627646328, + "precision": 0.9625668449197861, + "pred_md": "## Selected Financial Data\n\n[1] 2001 includes a $91 reduction in premiums from reinsurance cessions related to the September 11 terrorist attack ('September 11').\n\n[2] 1998 includes $541 related to the recapture of an in force block of Corporate Owned Life Insurance ('COLI') business from MBL Life Assurance Co. of New Jersey. Also, includes revenues from London & Edinburgh, which was sold in November 1998, for 1998 and 1997 of $1,117 and $1,225, respectively.\n\n[3] 2001 includes $440 of losses ($1.85 per basic and $1.82 per diluted share) related to September 11 and a $130 tax benefit ($0.55 per basic and $0.54 per diluted share) at HLI. 1997 includes an equity gain of $368 ($1.56 per basic and $1.54 per diluted share), resulting from the initial public offering of HLI.\n\n[4] 2001 includes a $34 after-tax charge ($0.14 per basic and per diluted share) related to the cumulative effect of accounting changes for the Company's adoption of SFAS No. 133, 'Accounting for Derivative Instruments and Hedging Activities' and EITF Issue 99-20, 'Recognition of Interest Income and Impairment on Purchased and Retained Beneficial Interests in Securitized Financial Assets.' Also includes an $8 extraordinary after-tax loss ($0.04 per basic and $0.03 per diluted share) related to the Company's retirement of its 8.35% Cumulative Quarterly Income Preferred Securities.\n\n[5] Includes mutual fund assets.\n\n[6] Mutual funds are owned by the shareholders of those funds and not by the Company. As a result they are not reflected in total assets on the Company's balance sheet.\n\n[7] Excludes results of the Other Operations segment.\n\n[8] 2001 includes the impact of September 11. Excluding the impact of September 11, 2001 combined ratio was 103.4.\n\n[9] U.S. Industry Combined Ratio information obtained from A.M. Best. Combined ratio for 2001 is an A.M. Best estimate prepared as of January 2002.\n\n31", + "recall": 0.9523809523809523, + "true_md": "## Selected Financial Data\n\n- [1] 2001 includes a $91 reduction in premiums from reinsurance cessions related to the September 11 terrorist attack (“September 11”). \n\n- [2] 1998 includes $541 related to the recapture of an in force block of Corporate Owned Life Insurance (“COLI”) business from MBL Life Assurance Co. of New Jersey. Also, includes revenues from London & Edinburgh, which was sold in November 1998, for 1998 and 1997 of $1,117 and $1,225, respectively.\n\n- [3] 2001 includes $440 of losses ($1.85 per basic and $1.82 per diluted share) related to September 11 and a $130 tax benefit ($0.55 per basic and $0.54 per diluted share) at HLI. 1997 includes an equity gain of $368 ($1.56 per basic and $1.54 per diluted share), resulting from the initial public offering of HLI.\n\n- [4] 2001 includes a $34 after-tax charge ($0.14 per basic and per diluted share) related to the cumulative effect of accounting changes for the Company’s adoption of SFAS No. 133, “Accounting for Derivative Instruments and Hedging Activities” and EITF Issue 99-20, “Recognition of Interest Income and Impairment on Purchased and Retained Beneficial Interests in Securitized Financial Assets.” Also includes an $8 extraordinary after-tax loss ($0.04 per basic and $0.03 per diluted share) related to the Company’s retirement of its 8.35% Cumulative Quarterly Income Preferred Securities.\n\n- [5] Includes mutual fund assets.\n\n- [6] Mutual funds are owned by the shareholders of those funds and not by the Company. As a result they are not reflected in total assets on the Company’s balance sheet.\n\n- [7] Excludes results of the Other Operations segment.\n\n- [8] 2001 includes the impact of September 11. Excluding the impact of September 11, 2001 combined ratio was 103.4.\n\n- [9] U.S. Industry Combined Ratio information obtained from A.M. Best. Combined ratio for 2001 is an A.M. Best estimate prepared as of January 2002.\n\n31" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "f36464f6cf54f18119698974930a4cef3b0fc8b8c2d487ef13db7e15761a22ea", + "edit_distance": 0.07196029776674938, + "f1_score": 0.9574468085106382, + "meteor": 0.9336792627646328, + "precision": 0.9625668449197861, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.9523809523809523, + "true_md": "The announcement of the merger between MGM MIRAGE and Mandalay Resort Group was one of the seminal moments of 2004.\n\n## USING OUR STRENGTH..." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7831898268771958, + "doc_id": "b712bb177e05248bd786d0225b35930d13fe3890e876af615db4e0747c993cce", + "edit_distance": 0.29699248120300753, + "f1_score": 0.875, + "meteor": 0.8449808570226017, + "precision": 0.9296875, + "pred_md": "HON INDUSTRIES Inc. and SUBSIDIARIES\n\nThe changes in the carrying amount of goodwill since December 29, 2001, are as follows by reporting segment:\n\nThe goodwill increase in 2002 relates to additional purchase consideration associated with debentures issued in connection with a prior acquisition. The decrease in goodwill in 2003 is due to an adjustment relating to a prior acquisition.\n\nThe following schedule reports the adjusted net income for the goodwill and indefinite-lived trademark amortization effect:\n\n## Accounts Payable and Accrued Expenses\n\n## Long-Term Debt\n\nAggregate maturities of long-term debt are as follows:\n\nThe convertible debentures are payable to the former owners of businesses that were acquired by the Company. Following the acquisition some of these individuals continued as members of the Company. The convertible debentures are convertible into cash. The debentures contain certain conversion features that are recorded as earned. During 2003 the Company recorded approximately $3 million of appreciation on these debentures.\n\nCertain of the above borrowing arrangements include covenants which limit the assumption of additional debt and lease obligations. The Company has been and currently is in compliance with the covenants related to these debt agreements. The fair value of the Company's outstanding long-term debt obligations at yearend 2003 approximates the recorded aggregate amount.\n\n## Selling and Administrative Expenses\n\n48", + "recall": 0.8263888888888888, + "true_md": "## H O N I N D U S T R I E S I n c . a n d S U B S I D I A R I E S\n\n## Long-Term Debt\n\n## Accounts Payable and Accrued Expenses\n\n## Selling and Administrative Expenses\n\n48\n\nThe changes in the carrying amount of goodwill since December 29, 2001, are as follows by reporting segment:\n\nThe goodwill increase in 2002 relates to additional purchase consider- ation associated with debentures issued in connection with a prior acquisition. The decrease in goodwill in 2003 is due to an adjustment relating to a prior acquisition.\n\nThe following schedule reports the adjusted net income for the goodwill and indefinite-lived trademark amortization effect:\n\nAggregate maturities of long-term debt are as follows:\n\nThe convertible debentures are payable to the former owners of busi- nesses that were acquired by the Company. Following the acquisition some of these individuals continued as members of the Company. The convertible debentures are convertible into cash. The debentures con- tain certain conversion features that are recorded as earned. During 2003 the Company recorded approximately $3 million of appreciation on these debentures.\n\nCertain of the above borrowing arrangements include covenants which limit the assumption of additional debt and lease obligations. The Company has been and currently is in compliance with the covenants related to these debt agreements. The fair value of the Company’s outstanding long-term debt obligations at year- end 2003 approximates the recorded aggregate amount." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "51ecae1f28937e21b03c4a1e3352234fdcffc6316e104844050e821e13e72c95", + "edit_distance": 0.29699248120300753, + "f1_score": 0.875, + "meteor": 0.8449808570226017, + "precision": 0.9296875, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.8263888888888888, + "true_md": "" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9655389083471184, + "doc_id": "23f95c1292b55e1920c1958328230499a55a836a9a579661a0d43ce559b43257", + "edit_distance": 0.8571428571428571, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.8319762444660403, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "4 2\n\nThe following is a reconciliation of the segmented information to the consolidated financial statements.\n\nTotal revenues and long-lived assets for the years ended December 31, 200, 1999 and 1998 for the Company analyzed by geographical location is as follows:\n\nTotal revenues are attributed to countries based on location of customer for the ATM and related service segment. For revenues generated by the Euronet USA software solutions segment, all revenues are attributed to the United States. Long lived assets consist of pro p e rt y, plant, and equipment, net of accumulated depreciation.", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Total revenues are attributed to countries based on location of customer for the ATM and related service segment. For revenues generated by the Euronet USA software solutions segment, all revenues are attributed to the United States. Long lived assets consist of pro p e rt y, plant, and equipment, net of accumulated depreciation. \n\nTotal revenues and long-lived assets for the years ended December 31, 200, 1999 and 1998 for the Company analyzed by geographical location is as follows: \n\nThe following is a reconciliation of the segmented information to the consolidated financial statements. \n\n4 2" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9618207131097481, + "doc_id": "a26059a2951e0e295233082f0af181de1d52488e9bfad2f4abe39a56faae2013", + "edit_distance": 0.2779552715654952, + "f1_score": 0.9698996655518395, + "meteor": 0.9584150769462064, + "precision": 0.9731543624161074, + "pred_md": "38\n\n## Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations\n\nlong-term debt. We attempt to limit our exposure to interest rate risk by managing the mix of our long-term fixed rate borrowings and short-term borrowings under our bank credit facilities.\n\nIn 2003, we entered into three interest rate swap agreements, designated as fair value hedges, which effectively converted $400 million of our fixed rate debt to floating rate debt. In 2004, we terminated interest rate swap agreements with total notional amounts of $400 million and entered into additional interest rate swap agreements designated as fair value hedges with total notional amounts of $100 million, leaving interest rate swap agreements with total notional amounts of $100 million at December 31, 2004.\n\nUnder the terms of these agreements, we make payments based on specified spreads over six-month LIBOR, and receive payments equal to the interest payments due on the fixed rate debt. The interest rate swap agreements qualify for the 'shortcut method' allowed under SFAS No. 133, which allows an assumption of no ineffectiveness in the hedging relationship. As such, there is no income statement impact from changes in the fair value of the hedging instruments.\n\nThe following table provides information about our interest rate swaps as of December 31, 2004:\n\n*Interest rates are determined in arrears. These rates have been estimated based on implied forward rates in the yield curve.\n\nAs of December 31, 2004, after giving effect to the interest rate swaps discussed above, long-term fixed rate borrowings represented approximately 97% of our total borrowings. Assuming a 100 basis-point change in LIBOR, our annual interest cost would change by approximately $2 million.", + "recall": 0.9666666666666667, + "true_md": "38\n\nManagement’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations\n\nlong-term debt. We attempt to limit our exposure to interest rate risk by managing the mix of our long-term fixed rate borrowings and short-term borrowings under our bank credit facilities.\n\nThe following table provides information about our interest rate swaps as of December 31, 2004:\n\nIn 2003, we entered into three interest rate swap agreements, designated as fair value hedges, which effectively converted $400 million of our fixed rate debt to floating rate debt. In 2004, we terminated interest rate swap agreements with total notional amounts of $400 million and entered into additional interest rate swap agreements designated as fair value hedges with total notional amounts of $100 million, leaving interest rate swap agreements with total notional amounts of $100 million at December 31, 2004.\n\nUnder the terms of these agreements, we make payments based on specified spreads over six-month LIBOR, and receive payments equal to the interest payments due on the fixed rate debt. The interest rate swap agreements qualify for the “shortcut method” allowed under SFAS No. 133, which allows an assumption of no ineffectiveness in the hedging relationship. As such, there is no income statement impact from changes in the fair value of the hedging instruments.\n\nAs of December 31, 2004, after giving effect to the interest rate swaps discussed above, long-term fixed rate borrowings represented approximately 97% of our total borrowings. Assuming a 100 basis-point change in LIBOR, our annual interest cost would change by approximately $2 million.\n\n*Interest rates are determined in arrears. These rates have been estimated based on implied forward rates in the yield curve." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.964145155585258, + "doc_id": "08143a644518ab97b92bf53cb7acac6e550239a4012ec773207aeddba0d5ed3b", + "edit_distance": 0.03184713375796178, + "f1_score": 0.9806094182825484, + "meteor": 0.9774508942451298, + "precision": 0.9833333333333333, + "pred_md": "SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES MANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS\n\nStatement will be effective for the Company on January 1, 2005. The effective date has been deferred indefinitely for certain other types of mandatorily redeemable financial instruments. The Company currently does not have any financial instruments that are within the scope of this Statement. for instruments entered into or modified after May 31, 2003 and otherwise will be effective as of January 1, 2004, except for mandatorily redeemable financial instruments. For certain mandatorily redeemable financial instruments, the\n\nIn December 2003, the Financial Accounting Standards Board issued FASB Statement No. 132(R). Statement No. 132(R) is a revision of Statement No. 132, 'Employers' Disclosures about Pensions and Other Postretirement Benefits.' SFAS 132(R) is effective for financial statements with fiscal years ending after December 15, 2003. SFAS 132(R) requires additional disclosures including information describing the types of plan assets, investment strategy, measurement date(s), plan obligations, cash flows, and components of net periodic benefit cost recognized during interim periods. The objectives of the revisions are to provide qualitative information about the items in the financial statements, quantitative information about items recognized or disclosed in the financial statements, information that enables users of financial statements to assess the effect that pension plans and other postretirement benefit plans have on entities' results of operations, and information to facilitate assessments of future earnings and cash flows. The Company has adopted this statement effective December 31, 2003 with disclosures included in Note 9.\n\n## RISKS\n\nThe Company is one of eleven PCS Affiliates of Sprint, and accordingly, is impacted by decisions and requirements adopted by Sprint in regard to its wireless operation. Management continually reviews its relationship with Sprint as new developments and requirements are added. Note 7 to the accompanying consolidated financial statements contains a detailed description of the significant contractual relationship.\n\nThe Company is dependent on Sprint for the reporting of a significant majority of PCS revenues, particularly travel and service revenue. Controls and processes are continually refined, so the Company can monitor, review, test, and validate information being reported to the Company by Sprint. It is the Company's policy to estimate and reflect the information supplied by Sprint in the financial statements in the respective periods. Corrections, if any, are made no earlier than the period in which the parties agree to the corrections and as noted in these financial statements, there are several dispute settlements, true-ups of estimates and corrections which are recorded in the period the issue has been resolved. The Company is at risk for reporting errors that may be made by Sprint.\n\nThe net balance of PCS travel revenue and expense could change significantly due to changes in service plan offerings, changes in the travel settlement rate, changes in travel habits by the subscribers in the Company's market areas or other Sprint subscribers and numerous other factors beyond the Company's control. The Company is continuing to monitor the financial strength of the other PCS Affiliates of Sprint, as to their ability to maintain their segment of the Sprint network may impact the ability of the Company to add new subscribers. Two other Sprint PCS Affiliates are currently operating under bankruptcy protection.\n\nWireless Local Number Portability (WLNP) permits a subscriber to change wireless service providers in the same market area while retaining their existing telephone number. This Federal Communications Commission mandate was effective November 24, 2003 in the 100 largest metropolitan areas and will be effective in all areas of the United States on May 24, 2004. Although the initial impact of WLNP appears to be insignificant, there may be a significant future impact to the Company's operation. As a result of WLNP, portions of the PCS subscriber base may migrate to other wireless providers, thereby contributing to increased churn. Alternatively, the implementation of WLNP may allow the Company to attract additional subscribers from other wireless providers.\n\nThe Company has limited control over the service plans and marketing promotions offered to Sprint customers in the competitive wireless telecommunications industry. Sprint controls the marketing plans, advertising message and market promotions offered in the Company's market area. As a result, the plans and promotions offered may have a material adverse effect on the Company's results of operations.\n\nThe Company relies on Sprint for the development of new products and services to remain competitive in the wireless industry. Examples of these services are text messaging, video, and push to talk walkie-talkie features. If these services do not work properly or if Sprint should not continue to develop new competitive products, the results could have a material adverse impact on the results of the Company.\n\nThe Company is required to participate in national and regional third party distribution programs formulated and negotiated by Sprint. Sprint has entered into reseller agreements which may impact the Company. These distribution and reseller programs may have an adverse effect on the results of the Company.\n\nSHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY\n\n54\n\n■", + "recall": 0.9779005524861878, + "true_md": "SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS\n\nStatement will be effective for the Company on January 1, 2005. The effective date has been deferred indefinitely for certain other types of mandatorily redeemable financial instruments. The Company currently does not have any financial instruments that are within the scope of this Statement. for instruments entered into or modified after May 31, 2003 and otherwise will be effective as of January 1, 2004, except for mandatorily redeemable financial instruments. For certain mandatorily redeemable financial instruments, the\n\nIn December 2003, the Financial Accounting Standards Board issued FASB Statement No. 132(R). Statement No. 132(R) is a revision of Statement No. 132, “Employers’ Disclosures about Pensions and Other Postretirement Benefits.” SFAS 132(R) is effective for financial statements with fiscal years ending after December 15, 2003. SFAS 132(R) requires additional disclosures including information describing the types of plan assets, investment strategy, measurement date(s), plan obligations, cash flows, and components of net periodic benefit cost recognized during interim periods. The objectives of the revisions are to provide qualitative information about the items in the financial statements, quantitative information about items recognized or disclosed in the financial statements, information that enables users of financial statements to assess the effect that pension plans and other postretirement benefit plans have on entities’ results of operations, and information to fac ilitate assessments of future earnings and cash flows. The Company has adopted this statement effective December 31, 2003 with disclosures included in Note 9.\n\nThe Company is one of eleven PCS Affiliates of Sprint, and accordingly, is impacted by decisions and requirements adopted by Sprint in regard to its wireless operation. Management continually reviews its relationship with Sprint as new developments and requirements are added. Note 7 to the accompanying consolidated financial statements contains a detailed description of the significant contractual relationship.\n\nThe Company is dependent on Sprint for the reporting of a significant majority of PCS revenues, particularly travel and service revenue. Controls and processes are continually refined, so the Company can monitor, review, test, and validate information being reported to the Company by Sprint. It is the Company’s policy to estimate and reflect the information supplied by Sprint in the financial statements in the respective periods. Corrections, if any, are made no earlier than the period in which the parties agree to the corrections and as noted in these financial statements, there are several dispute settlements, true-ups of estimates and corrections which are recorded in the period the issue has been resolved. The Company is at risk for reporting errors that may be made by Sprint.\n\nThe net balance of PCS travel revenue and expense could change significantly due to changes in service plan offerings, changes in the travel settlement rate, changes in travel habits by the subscribers in the Company’s market areas or other Sprint subscribers and numerous other factors beyond the Company’s control. The Company is continuing to monitor the financial strength of the other PCS Affiliates of Sprint, as to their ability to maintain their segment of the Sprint network may impact the ability of the Company to add new subscribers. Two other Sprint PCS Affiliates are currently operating under bankruptcy protection.\n\nWireless Local Number Portability (WLNP) permits a subscriber to change wireless service providers in the same market area while retaining their existing telephone number. This Federal Communications Commission mandate was effective November 24, 2003 in the 100 largest metropolitan areas and will be effective in all areas of the United States on May 24, 2004. Although the initial impact of WLNP appears to be insignificant, there may be a significant future impact to the Company’s operation. As a result of WLNP, portions of the PCS subscriber base may migrate to other wireless providers, thereby contributing to increased churn. Alternatively, the implementation of WLNP may allow the Company to attract additional subscribers from other wireless providers.\n\nThe Company has limited control over the service plans and marketing promotions offered to Sprint customers in the competitive wireless telecommunications industry. Sprint controls the marketing plans, advertising message and market promotions offered in the Company’s market area. As a result, the plans and promotions offered may have a material adverse effect on the Company’s results of operations.\n\nThe Company relies on Sprint for the development of new products and services to remain competitive in the wireless industry. Examples of these services are text messaging, video, and push to talk walkie-talkie features. If these services do not work properly or if Sprint should not continue to develop new competitive products, the results could have a material adverse impact on the results of the Company.\n\nThe Company is required to participate in national and regional third party distribution programs formulated and negotiated by Sprint. Sprint has entered into reseller agreements which may impact the Company. These distribution and reseller programs may have an adverse effect on the results of the Company.\n\nSHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY ■ 54\n\n## RISKS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9611963717482132, + "doc_id": "076553f478eea5ae4963153f945dae7dfe15485ea1cd65f6230f569ca8d0507e", + "edit_distance": 0.1258741258741259, + "f1_score": 0.9798657718120807, + "meteor": 0.9865279941192432, + "precision": 0.9864864864864865, + "pred_md": "## 14. RETAINED EARNINGS\n\nOther changes in retained earnings for each of the three years in the period ended March 31, 2005 were as follows:\n\n## 15. SUPPLEMENTARY CASH FLOW INFORMATION\n\nThe following is a summary of the assets and liabilities of Calsonic Kansei Corporation and its 11 subsidiaries, which were newly consolidated subsidiaries, as a result of the acquisition of shares through the private placement for the year ended March 31, 2005.\n\nThe following is a summary of the assets and liabilities of Dongfeng Motor Co., Ltd., a newly consolidated subsidiary, as a result of transfer of all shares to the Company's consolidated subsidiary, Nissan China Investment Co., Ltd. for the year ended March 31, 2005.\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\n85\n\nFINANCIAL SECTION", + "recall": 0.9733333333333334, + "true_md": "## 14. RETAINED EARNINGS\n\nOther changes in retained earnings for each of the three years in the period ended March 31, 2005 were as follows:\n\nThe following is a summary of the assets and liabilities of Calsonic Kansei Corporation and its 11 subsidiaries, which were newly consolidated subsidiaries, as a result of the acquisition of shares through the private placement for the year ended March 31, 2005.\n\nThe following is a summary of the assets and liabilities of Dongfeng Motor Co., Ltd., a newly consolidated subsidiary, as a result of transfer of all shares to the Company’s consolidated subsidiary, Nissan China Investment Co., Ltd. for the year ended March 31, 2005.\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 85\n\nFINANCIAL SECTION\n\n## 15. SUPPLEMENTARY CASH FLOW INFORMATION" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9523038142495388, + "doc_id": "5b6ced4c8d7dcca21f39f48ddc03f03521dc57e447240b6555b9abf21b1310a2", + "edit_distance": 0.6851063829787234, + "f1_score": 0.9810725552050475, + "meteor": 0.8411997295306485, + "precision": 0.9873015873015873, + "pred_md": "On June 16, 2004, the Company announced that it had entered into a definitive merger agreement with Mandalay Resort Group ('Mandalay'), a publicly traded company, under which the Company will acquire Mandalay for $71.00 in cash for each share of common stock of Mandalay. Mandalay owns and operates eleven properties in Nevada, including Mandalay Bay, Luxor, Excalibur, Circus Circus, and Slots-A-Fun in Las Vegas, Circus Circus-Reno in Reno, Colorado Belle and Edgewater in Laughlin, Gold Strike and Nevada Landing in Jean, and Railroad Pass in Henderson. Mandalay also owns and operates Gold Strike, a hotel/casino in Tunica County, Mississippi. In addition, Mandalay owns a 50% interest in Silver Legacy in Reno, a 50% interest in Monte Carlo in Las Vegas, a 50% interest in Grand Victoria, a riverboat in Elgin, Illinois, and a 53.5% interest in MotorCity in Detroit, Michigan. The total consideration is approximately $8.1 billion, including equity value of approximately $4.8 billion, convertible debentures with a redemption value of approximately $574 million, the assumption or repayment of other outstanding Mandalay debt with a fair value of approximately $2.6 billion as of December 31, 2004, and $100 million of estimated transaction costs. The transaction is structured as a merger of one of the Company's wholly-owned subsidiaries with and into Mandalay. The transaction will be accounted for as a purchase and is anticipated to close during the first quarter of 2005.\n\n## NOTE 2 - SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES AND BASIS OF PRESENTATION\n\nPrinciples of consolidation. The consolidated financial statements include the accounts of the Company and its subsidiaries. Investments in unconsolidated affiliates which are 50% or less owned are accounted for under the equity method. All significant intercompany balances and transactions have been eliminated in consolidation. The Company's operations are primarily in one segment - operation of casino resorts. Other operations, and foreign operations, are not material.\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nManagement's use of estimates. The consolidated financial statements have been prepared in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America. Those principles require the Company's management to make estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets and liabilities and disclosure of contingent assets and liabilities at the date of the financial statements and the reported amounts of revenues and expenses during the reporting period. Actual results could differ from those estimates.\n\nCash and cash equivalents. Cash and cash equivalents include investments and interest bearing instruments with maturities of three months or less at the date of acquisition. Such investments are carried at cost which approximates market value. Effective December 31, 2004, the Company is recording book overdraft balances resulting from its cash management program as accounts payable, and has reclassified prior period balances to conform to this presentation.\n\nAccounts receivable and credit risk. Financial instruments that potentially subject the Company to concentrations of credit risk consist principally of casino accounts receivable. The Company issues markers to approved casino customers following background checks and investigations of creditworthiness. At December 31, 2004, a substantial portion of the Company's receivables were due from customers residing in foreign countries. Business or economic conditions or other significant events in these countries could affect the collectibility of such receivables.\n\nTrade receivables, including casino and hotel receivables, are typically non-interest bearing and are initially recorded at cost. Accounts are written off when management deems the account to be uncollectible. Recoveries of accounts previously written off are recorded when received. An estimated allowance for doubtful accounts is maintained to reduce the Company's receivables to their carrying amount, which approximates fair value. The allowance is estimated based on specific review of customer accounts as well as historical collection experience\n\n47", + "recall": 0.9749216300940439, + "true_md": "47\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nManagement’s use of estimates. The consolidated financial statements have been prepared in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America. Those principles require the Company’s management to make estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets and liabilities and disclosure of contingent assets and liabilities at the date of the financial statements and the reported amounts of revenues and expenses during the reporting period. Actual results could differ from those estimates.\n\nCash and cash equivalents. Cash and cash equivalents include investments and interest bearing instruments with maturities of three months or less at the date of acquisition. Such investments are carried at cost which approximates market value. Effective December 31, 2004, the Company is recording book overdraft balances resulting from its cash management program as accounts payable, and has reclassified prior period balances to conform to this presentation. \n\nOn June 16, 2004, the Company announced that it had entered into a definitive merger agreement with Mandalay Resort Group (“Mandalay”), a publicly traded company, under which the Company will acquire Mandalay for $71.00 in cash for each share of common stock of Mandalay. Mandalay owns and operates eleven properties in Nevada, including Mandalay Bay, Luxor, Excalibur, Circus Circus, and Slots-A-Fun in Las Vegas, Circus Circus-Reno in Reno, Colorado Belle and Edgewater in Laughlin, Gold Strike and Nevada Landing in Jean, and Railroad Pass in Henderson. Mandalay also owns and operates Gold Strike, a hotel/casino in Tunica County, Mississippi. In addition, Mandalay owns a 50% interest in Silver Legacy in Reno, a 50% interest in Monte Carlo in Las Vegas, a 50% interest in Grand Victoria, a riverboat in Elgin, Illinois, and a 53.5% interest in MotorCity in Detroit, Michigan. The total consideration is approximately $8.1 billion, including equity value of approximately $4.8 billion, convertible debentures with a redemption value of approximately $574 million, the assumption or repayment of other outstanding Mandalay debt with a fair value of approximately $2.6 billion as of December 31, 2004, and $100 million of estimated transaction costs. The transaction is structured as a merger of one of the Company’s wholly-owned subsidiaries with and into Mandalay. The transaction will be accounted for as a purchase and is anticipated to close during the first quarter of 2005.\n\nAccounts receivable and credit risk. Financial instruments that potentially subject the Company to concentrations of credit risk consist principally of casino accounts receivable. The Company issues markers to approved casino customers following background checks and investigations of creditworthiness. At December 31, 2004, a substantial portion of the Company’s receivables were due from customers residing in foreign countries. Business or economic conditions or other significant events in these countries could affect the collectibility of such receivables.\n\nPrinciples of consolidation. The consolidated financial statements include the accounts of the Company and its subsidiaries. Investments in unconsolidated affiliates which are 50% or less owned are accounted for under the equity method. All significant intercompany balances and transactions have been eliminated in consolidation. The Company’s operations are primarily in one segment – operation of casino resorts. Other operations, and foreign operations, are not material.\n\nTrade receivables, including casino and hotel receivables, are typically non-interest bearing and are initially recorded at cost. Accounts are written off when manage- ment deems the account to be uncollectible. Recoveries of accounts previously written off are recorded when received. An estimated allowance for doubtful accounts is maintained to reduce the Company’s receivables to their carrying amount, which approximates fair value. The allowance is estimated based on specific review of customer accounts as well as historical collection experience \n\n## NOTE 2 — SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES AND BASIS OF PRESENTATION" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.616615987674838, + "doc_id": "5388931572c45a8e7c24b2e9ddacff216eb1d6496b2146fe61d8c5b4c06a9db2", + "edit_distance": 0.7268518518518519, + "f1_score": 0.823529411764706, + "meteor": 0.7213739035726563, + "precision": 0.9882352941176471, + "pred_md": "## First Financial Bank, National Association, Cleburne\n\n## Main Office\n\n403 N. Main Cleburne, Texas 76033 Chartered 1927\n\n## Branches\n\n200 N. Ridgeway Cleburne, Texas 76033\n\n1900 S.W. Wilshire Burleson, Texas 76028\n\n201 E. Highway 67 Alvarado, Texas 76009\n\n## Senior Officers\n\nRonald E. Schneider Chairman of the Board, President and\n\nChief Executive Officer\n\nPerry Ginn\n\nExecutive Vice President\n\nHomer S. Pittman, Jr.\n\nSenior Vice President and Cashier\n\nCraig Beskow\n\nSenior Vice President\n\nDerek Schmidt\n\nSenior Vice President\n\n## Directors\n\nRonald E. Schneider Chairman of the Board, President and Chief Executive Officer\n\nAlbert A. Archer\n\nChairman of the Board, Walls Industries, Inc.\n\nGary Bennett\n\nBennett Printing & Office Supply\n\nRobert T. Childress\n\nInvestments\n\nF. Scott Dueser\n\nFirst Financial Bankshares, Inc.\n\nJohnson County Deposit Market Share\n\nCleburne\n\n2 2\n\nRonald E. Schneider Chairman of the Board, President and Chief Executive Officer\n\n15", + "recall": 0.7058823529411765, + "true_md": "## First F inancial B ank, National Association, Cleburne\n\n## Directors\n\n## Senior Officers\n\n## Main Office 403 N. Main\n\nJim Easdon Investments \n\nCurtis R. Harvey First Financial Bankshares, Inc.\n\nHollis E. (Gene) Joslin Investments \n\nBrent D. Magers Chief Ex ecutiv e Officer and Administrator, Walls Regional H ospital\n\nGeorge Marti Marti Enterprises\n\nRonald E. Schneider Chairman of the Board, President and Chief Executive Officer\n\nAlbert A. Archer Chairman of the Board, Walls Industries, Inc.\n\nGary Bennett Bennett Printing & Office Supply\n\nRobert T. Childress Investments\n\nF. Scott Dueser First Financial Bankshares, Inc.\n\nPerry Ginn Executive Vice President\n\nRonald E. Schneider Chairman of the Board, President and Chief Executive Officer\n\n201 E. Highway 67 Alvarado,Texas 76009\n\n1900 S.W. Wilshire Burleson, Texas 76028\n\nBranches 200 N. Ridgeway Cleburne,Texas 76033\n\nMain Office 403 N. Main Cleburne,Texas 76033 Chartered 1927 \n\nHomer S. Pittman, Jr. Senior Vice President and Cashier\n\nCraig Beskow Senior Vice President\n\nDerek Schmidt Senior Vice President\n\n## Branches 200 N. Ridgeway\n\nRonald E. Schneider Chairman of the Board, President and Chief Executive Officer Pa\n\nReturn on Average Equity 17.66 17.08 2 % Johnson County Deposit Market Share\n\n15" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.02270446857833102, + "doc_id": "3361796dba75fe2c641c43db12ab31a0eb9dbcbbc7c99721288d36c41d759bcd", + "edit_distance": 0.7899786780383795, + "f1_score": 0.2222222222222222, + "meteor": 0.1412569981629299, + "precision": 0.145985401459854, + "pred_md": "## *iÀܘ>Ê>˜'Êglyph<c=9,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium>ÕȘiÃÃÊ glyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium> œ“«Ṏ˜}Ê-ÞÃÌi“Ã\n\nglyph<c=31,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman> œ À iÊ Ì…>˜ÊÓäÊÞi>ÀÃÊ>}œ]Ê->˜“ˆ˜>‡-glyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>ÊÜ>Ãʜ˜iʜvÊ̅iÊvˆÀÃÌÊglyph<c=13,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=31,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>-ÊVœ“«>˜ˆiÃÊ̜ʫÀœÛˆ'iʜÕÌÜÕÀVi'ʓ>˜Õv>VÌÕÀˆ˜}ÊÃiÀۈViÃʈ˜Ê ÃÕ««œÀÌʜvÊ̅iÊ«iÀܘ>ÊVœ“«ÕÌiÀ°\n\n/œ'>Þ]ÊÜiÊ>ÀiÊÃ̈Ê>ÊܜÀ'ʏi>'iÀʈ˜Ê̅iʜÕÌÜÕÀVi'ʓ>˜Õv>VÌÕÀˆ˜}ʜvÊ̅iÊ«iÀܘ>Ê>˜'ÊLÕȘiÃÃÊVœ“«ÕÌiÀÊqÊVœ˜vˆ}ÕÀˆ˜}]ÊLՈ'ˆ˜}Ê >˜'Êň««ˆ˜}ÊÊ Vœ“«ÕÌiÀÃÊ܈̅ˆ˜Ê{nÊqÊÇÓʅœÕÀÃÊvœÀÊ\"glyph<c=13,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=31,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>ÊVÕÃ̜“iÀðÊglyph<c=13,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>Ûi˜Ê“œÀi]ʜÕÀÊglyph<c=9,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>/\"Ê>˜'Êglyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>/\"ÊV>«>LˆˆÌˆiÃÊ>ÀiÊ՘“>ÌV…i'ʈ˜Ê ̅iÊglyph<c=13,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=31,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman> -Ê ˆ˜'ÕÃÌÀ Þ °Ê glyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman> ÃÊ Ì…iÊ Vœ“«ÕÌiÀʈ˜'ÕÃÌÀ ÞÊ>˜'ʈÌÃÊÃÕ««ÞÊÀiµÕˆÀi“i˜ÌÃÊLiVœ“iʈ˜VÀi>Ș}ÞÊVœ“«iÝ]Ê\"glyph<c=13,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=31,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>ÃÊ>ÀiʓœÀiÊ >}}ÀiÃÈÛiÞÊ«>À̘iÀˆ˜}Ê܈̅Ê->˜“ˆ˜>‡-glyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>ÊqÊÌ>Žˆ˜}ÊvՏÊ>'Û>˜Ì>}iʜvʜÕÀÊ>'Û>˜Vi'ʓ>˜Õv>VÌÕÀˆ˜}ÊV>«>LˆˆÌˆiÃ]ÊÀi«ÕÌ>̈œ˜ÊvœÀÊ µÕ>ˆÌÞÊ>˜'ÊÊ vi݈LˆˆÌÞ]Ê>˜'ÊÊ Vœ“«iÌiÊÃÞÃÌi“Ê܏Ṏœ˜Ã°Ê\n\n£x\n\n-glyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman> glyph<c=31,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman> glyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>‡-glyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>\n\n7iÊVœ˜Ìˆ˜ÕiÊ̜ÊiÝÌi˜'ʈ˜'ÕÃÌÀÞÊ i>'iÀň«ÊLÞÊiÝ«>˜'ˆ˜}ʜÕÀÊ ÛiÀ̈V>ÊÊ ˆ˜Ìi}À>̈œ˜ÊV>«>LˆˆÌˆiÃÊ >˜'Ê\"glyph<c=12,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=31,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>Ê Ã i À ۈViÊ œv viÀˆ˜}ðÊ", + "recall": 0.46511627906976744, + "true_md": "£ x - ‡ -\n\nœ À i Ê Ì … > ˜ Ê Ó ä Ê Þ i > À Ã Ê > } œ ] Ê - > ˜ “ ˆ ˜ > ‡ - Ê Ü > Ã Ê œ ˜ i Ê œ v Ê Ì … i Ê v ˆ À Ã Ì Ê - Ê V œ “ « > ˜ ˆ i Ã Ê Ì œ Ê « À œ Û ˆ ` i Ê œ Õ Ì Ã œ Õ À V i ` Ê “ > ˜ Õ v > V Ì Õ À ˆ ˜ } Ê Ã i À Û ˆ V i Ã Ê ˆ ˜ Ê Ã Õ « « œ À Ì Ê œ v Ê Ì … i Ê « i À à œ ˜ >  Ê V œ “ « Õ Ì i À ° \n\n/ œ ` > Þ ] Ê Ü i Ê > À i Ê Ã Ì ˆ   Ê > Ê Ü œ À  ` Ê  i > ` i À Ê ˆ ˜ Ê Ì … i Ê œ Õ Ì Ã œ Õ À V i ` Ê “ > ˜ Õ v > V Ì Õ À ˆ ˜ } Ê œ v Ê Ì … i Ê « i À à œ ˜ >  Ê > ˜ ` Ê L Õ Ã ˆ ˜ i Ã Ã Ê V œ “ « Õ Ì i À Ê q Ê V œ ˜ v ˆ } Õ À ˆ ˜ } ] Ê L Õ ˆ  ` ˆ ˜ } > ˜ ` Ê Ã … ˆ « « ˆ ˜ } Ê Ê V œ “ « Õ Ì i À Ã Ê Ü ˆ Ì … ˆ ˜ Ê { n Ê q Ê Ç Ó Ê … œ Õ À Ã Ê v œ À Ê \" Ê V Õ Ã Ì œ “ i À à ° Ê Û i ˜ Ê “ œ À i ] Ê œ Õ À Ê / \" Ê > ˜ ` Ê / \" Ê V > « > L ˆ  ˆ Ì ˆ i Ã Ê > À i Ê Õ ˜ “ > Ì V … i ` Ê ˆ ˜ Ê Ì … i Ê - Ê ˆ ˜ ` Õ Ã Ì À Þ ° Ê Ã Ê Ì … i Ê V œ “ « Õ Ì i À Ê ˆ ˜ ` Õ Ã Ì À Þ Ê > ˜ ` Ê ˆ Ì Ã Ê Ã Õ « «  Þ Ê À i µ Õ ˆ À i “ i ˜ Ì Ã Ê L i V œ “ i Ê ˆ ˜ V À i > à ˆ ˜ }  Þ Ê V œ “ «  i Ý ] Ê \" Ã Ê > À i Ê “ œ À i Ê > } } À i à à ˆ Û i  Þ Ê « > À Ì ˜ i À ˆ ˜ } Ê Ü ˆ Ì … Ê - > ˜ “ ˆ ˜ > ‡ - Ê q Ê Ì > Ž ˆ ˜ } Ê v Õ   Ê > ` Û > ˜ Ì > } i Ê œ v Ê œ Õ À Ê > ` Û > ˜ V i ` Ê “ > ˜ Õ v > V Ì Õ À ˆ ˜ } Ê V > « > L ˆ  ˆ Ì ˆ i à ] Ê À i « Õ Ì > Ì ˆ œ ˜ Ê v œ À Ê µ Õ >  ˆ Ì Þ Ê > ˜ ` Ê Ê v  i Ý ˆ L ˆ  ˆ Ì Þ ] Ê > ˜ ` Ê Ê V œ “ «  i Ì i Ê Ã Þ Ã Ì i “ Ê Ã œ  Õ Ì ˆ œ ˜ à ° Ê \n\n## * i À à œ ˜ >  Ê > ˜ ` Ê Õ Ã ˆ ˜ i Ã Ã Ê œ “ « Õ Ì ˆ ˜ } Ê - Þ Ã Ì i “ Ã\n\n7 i Ê V œ ˜ Ì ˆ ˜ Õ i Ê Ì œ Ê i Ý Ì i ˜ ` Ê ˆ ˜ ` Õ Ã Ì À Þ Ê  i > ` i À à … ˆ « Ê L Þ Ê i Ý « > ˜ ` ˆ ˜ } Ê œ Õ À Ê Û i À Ì ˆ V >  Ê Ê ˆ ˜ Ì i } À > Ì ˆ œ ˜ Ê V > « > L ˆ  ˆ Ì ˆ i Ã Ê > ˜ ` Ê \" Ê Ã i À Û ˆ V i Ê œ v v i À ˆ ˜ } à ° Ê" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9806273569596848, + "doc_id": "ac2b1158adab1c93d5473cac43bd4e908206dbbffe7f58bf5b60c6f34406a50f", + "edit_distance": 0.019667170953101363, + "f1_score": 0.9797570850202428, + "meteor": 0.9866804396197547, + "precision": 0.979757085020243, + "pred_md": "26\n\n## Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations\n\n$12 million in 2004. The increase is due to the full year of Borgata's results, offset by a reduction to state income taxes in the fourth quarter of 2004. Borgata received a notice of refund of certain state tax credits and recorded a benefit for amounts earned in 2003 and 2004, which had previously been fully reserved. Our share of the adjustment was $12 million. We expect our share of the benefit of these tax credits to positively impact this line item by approximately $8 million per year for the next three years.\n\nThe following table summarizes information related to our income taxes:\n\nThe effective income tax rate in 2004 was higher than in 2003 primarily due to the accrual of additional state deferred taxes related to capital investments in New Jersey, non-deductible costs related to a Michigan ballot initiative, overseas development costs for which no tax benefit was provided, and the reversal of a greater amount of tax reserves in 2003 compared to 2004 ($13 million in 2003 versus $6 million in 2004) as a result of completion of audits and the expiration of statutes of limitations. The effective income tax rate in 2003 was lower than in 2002 primarily due to the reversal of tax reserves in 2003. Excluding the reversal, our effective income tax rate was approximately the same in both periods.\n\nIn 2004, taxes paid increased from prior years, primarily due to increased book income and the full utilization of tax credit carryforwards in 2003. Except for 2003, when we made payments to settle IRS audits of prior years, taxes paid have generally been significantly lower than our income tax provision. This is primarily due to accelerated\n\ntax depreciation and the utilization of tax credit carryforwards. We utilized the last of these credits in 2003, which resulted in the increase in our cash paid for taxes in 2004.\n\nWe are evaluating the impact of provisions of the American Jobs Creation Act of 2004 (the 'Act') that provide for a special one-time tax deduction of 85 percent on certain repatriated earnings of foreign subsidiaries. Additional guidance from Congress and/or the United States Treasury Department will be necessary for us to complete our evaluation, as it is not clear at this time whether the Act will provide a benefit to us. We will complete our evaluation as soon as practicable following the issuance of guidance and adjust our taxes accordingly, if necessary.\n\nWe have not yet repatriated the net proceeds from the sale of MGM Grand Australia pending our evaluation. Nonetheless, we provided in 2004 deferred U.S. income taxes of $11 million on the basis that such proceeds would be repatriated without the benefit of the 85 percent one-time deduction. Such amount was included in the provision for income taxes on discontinued operations for 2004. We considered the earnings of our Australia operations permanently reinvested prior to the sale of such operations.\n\nIf guidance is issued that indicates our planned repatriation qualifies for the onetime deduction, we will recognize a tax benefit of approximately $7 million as part of continuing operations in the quarter in which such guidance is issued. If no such guidance is issued within the applicable timeframe, then we will attempt to permanently reinvest the proceeds in another foreign jurisdiction, such as Macau. In such case, we would recognize a tax benefit of $11 million as part of continuing operations in the quarter in which the reinvestment is made. We currently do not have a plan to reinvest the proceeds in such manner.", + "recall": 0.979757085020243, + "true_md": "Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations 26\n\n$12 million in 2004. The increase is due to the full year of Borgata’s results, offset by a reduction to state income taxes in the fourth quarter of 2004. Borgata received a notice of refund of certain state tax credits and recorded a benefit for amounts earned in 2003 and 2004, which had previously been fully reserved. Our share of the adjustment was $12 million. We expect our share of the benefit of these tax credits to positively impact this line item by approximately $8 million per year for the next three years.\n\nThe following table summarizes information related to our income taxes:\n\nThe effective income tax rate in 2004 was higher than in 2003 primarily due to the accrual of additional state deferred taxes related to capital investments in New Jersey, non-deductible costs related to a Michigan ballot initiative, overseas development costs for which no tax benefit was provided, and the reversal of a greater amount of tax reserves in 2003 compared to 2004 ($13 million in 2003 versus $6 million in 2004) as a result of completion of audits and the expiration of statutes of limitations. The effective income tax rate in 2003 was lower than in 2002 primarily due to the reversal of tax reserves in 2003. Excluding the reversal, our effective income tax rate was approximately the same in both periods.\n\nIn 2004, taxes paid increased from prior years, primarily due to increased book income and the full utilization of tax credit carryforwards in 2003. Except for 2003, when we made payments to settle IRS audits of prior years, taxes paid have generally been significantly lower than our income tax provision. This is primarily due to accelerated\n\ntax depreciation and the utilization of tax credit carryforwards. We utilized the last of these credits in 2003, which resulted in the increase in our cash paid for taxes in 2004.\n\nWe are evaluating the impact of provisions of the American Jobs Creation Act of 2004 (the “Act”) that provide for a special one-time tax deduction of 85 percent on certain repatriated earnings of foreign subsidiaries. Additional guidance from Congress and/or the United States Treasury Department will be necessary for us to complete our evaluation, as it is not clear at this time whether the Act will provide a benefit to us. We will complete our evaluation as soon as practicable following the issuance of guidance and adjust our taxes accordingly, if necessary.\n\nWe have not yet repatriated the net proceeds from the sale of MGM Grand Australia pending our evaluation. Nonetheless, we provided in 2004 deferred U.S. income taxes of $11 million on the basis that such proceeds would be repatriated without the benefit of the 85 percent one-time deduction. Such amount was included in the provision for income taxes on discontinued operations for 2004. We considered the earnings of our Australia operations permanently reinvested prior to the sale of such operations.\n\nIf guidance is issued that indicates our planned repatriation qualifies for the one- time deduction, we will recognize a tax benefit of approximately $7 million as part of continuing operations in the quarter in which such guidance is issued. If no such guidance is issued within the applicable timeframe, then we will attempt to permanently reinvest the proceeds in another foreign jurisdiction, such as Macau. In such case, we would recognize a tax benefit of $11 million as part of continuing operations in the quarter in which the reinvestment is made. We currently do not have a plan to reinvest the proceeds in such manner." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.2670508619466664, + "doc_id": "f1a1b537ef6e3fc8f81abe68a58ad5bb279c370c454228d71d2295b64e76aede", + "edit_distance": 0.7012987012987013, + "f1_score": 0.5526315789473684, + "meteor": 0.5865418000848734, + "precision": 0.4883720930232558, + "pred_md": "## P R O F I T A N D L O S S S TAT E M E N T F O R T H E F I N A N C I A L Y E A R E N D E D 3 0 J U N E 2 0 0 0\n\nThe profit and loss statement should be read in conjunction with the accompanying notes on pages xxx to xxx.\n\n35", + "recall": 0.6363636363636364, + "true_md": "## PROFIT AND LOSS STATEMENT FOR THE FINANCIAL YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2000\n\nThe profit and loss statement should be read in conjunction with the accompanying notes on pages xxx to xxx.\n\n35" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9223327597449473, + "doc_id": "92b4589cdd468cb74a3b85db0fe24c57b37cf6741a4c7d13d2b18ad8de011c5f", + "edit_distance": 0.4988610478359909, + "f1_score": 0.9655172413793105, + "meteor": 0.7865653797586856, + "precision": 0.9655172413793104, + "pred_md": "Goodwill and other intangible assets. Goodwill and intangible assets consisted of the following:\n\nGoodwill represents the excess of purchase price over fair market value of net assets acquired in business combinations. Goodwill related to the Mirage acquisition was assigned to Bellagio, The Mirage and TI. Other goodwill relates to the Company's 2003 acquisition for $9 million of majority interests in the entities that operate the nightclubs Light and Caramel, located in Bellagio, and Mist, located in TI. Changes in the recorded balances of goodwill are as follows:\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nThe Company's indefinite-lived intangible assets consist primarily of development rights in Detroit (see Note 10) and trademarks. The Company's finite-lived intangible assets consist primarily of lease acquisition costs, amortized over the life of the related leases, and certain license rights with contractually limited terms, amortized over their contractual life.\n\nGoodwill and indefinite-lived intangible assets must be reviewed for impairment at least annually and between annual test dates in certain circumstances. The Company performs its annual impairment test for goodwill and indefinite-lived intangible assets in the fourth quarter of each fiscal year. No impairments were indicated as a result of the annual impairment reviews for goodwill and indefinite-lived intangible assets in 2004 or 2003.\n\nRevenue recognition and promotional allowances. Casino revenue is the aggregate net difference between gaming wins and losses, with liabilities recognized for funds deposited by customers before gaming play occurs ('casino front money') and for chips in the customers' possession ('outstanding chip liability'). Hotel, food and beverage, entertainment and other operating revenues are recognized as services are performed. Advance deposits on rooms and advance ticket sales are recorded as accrued liabilities until services are provided to the customer.\n\nRevenues are recognized net of certain sales incentives in accordance with the Emerging Issues Task Force ('EITF') consensus on Issue 01-9, 'Accounting for Consideration Given by a Vendor to a Customer (Including a Reseller of the Vendor's Products).' The consensus in EITF 01-9 requires that sales incentives be recorded as a reduction of revenue and that points earned in point-loyalty programs, such as our Players Club loyalty program, must be recorded as a reduction of revenue. The Company recognizes incentives related to casino play and points earned in Players Club as a direct reduction of casino revenue.\n\n49", + "recall": 0.9655172413793104, + "true_md": "49\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nThe Company’s indefinite-lived intangible assets consist primarily of development rights in Detroit (see Note 10) and trademarks. The Company’s finite–lived intangible assets consist primarily of lease acquisition costs, amortized over the life of the related leases, and certain license rights with contractually limited terms, amortized over their contractual life.\n\nGoodwill and indefinite-lived intangible assets must be reviewed for impairment at least annually and between annual test dates in certain circumstances. The Company performs its annual impairment test for goodwill and indefinite-lived intangible assets in the fourth quarter of each fiscal year. No impairments were indicated as a result of the annual impairment reviews for goodwill and indefinite-lived intangible assets in 2004 or 2003.\n\nRevenue recognition and promotional allowances. Casino revenue is the aggregate net difference between gaming wins and losses, with liabilities recognized for funds deposited by customers before gaming play occurs (“casino front money”) and for chips in the customers’ possession (“outstanding chip liability”). Hotel, food and beverage, entertainment and other operating revenues are recognized as services are performed. Advance deposits on rooms and advance ticket sales are recorded as accrued liabilities until services are provided to the customer.\n\nRevenues are recognized net of certain sales incentives in accordance with the Emerging Issues Task Force (“EITF”) consensus on Issue 01-9, “Accounting for Consideration Given by a Vendor to a Customer (Including a Reseller of the Vendor’s Products).” The consensus in EITF 01-9 requires that sales incentives be recorded as a reduction of revenue and that points earned in point-loyalty programs, such as our Players Club loyalty program, must be recorded as a reduction of revenue. The Company recognizes incentives related to casino play and points earned in Players Club as a direct reduction of casino revenue.\n\nGoodwill represents the excess of purchase price over fair market value of net assets acquired in business combinations. Goodwill related to the Mirage acquisition was assigned to Bellagio, The Mirage and TI. Other goodwill relates to the Company’s 2003 acquisition for $9 million of majority interests in the entities that operate the nightclubs Light and Caramel, located in Bellagio, and Mist, located in TI. Changes in the recorded balances of goodwill are as follows:\n\nGoodwill and other intangible assets. Goodwill and intangible assets consisted of the following:" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "2610e3f853a8fc6984ea8b8cc506974b75e5ed05151bdde6bc864d40589008ab", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9985422740524781, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Nissan Annual Report 2004\n\n33\n\nOUR WORK", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Nissan Annual Report 2004 33\n\nOUR WORK" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.94709756771002, + "doc_id": "c156204615639d64d4aa09fc896c4f9cb7109549cb48e6af0c91354b1ad31188", + "edit_distance": 0.039540816326530615, + "f1_score": 0.9616724738675959, + "meteor": 0.9644530770183568, + "precision": 0.971830985915493, + "pred_md": "Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations\n\nAt December 31, 2004, we had $93 million of deferred tax assets and $1.9 billion of deferred tax liabilities. Except for certain New Jersey state net operating losses and certain other New Jersey state deferred tax assets, we believe that it is more likely than not that our deferred tax assets are fully realizable because of the future reversal of existing taxable temporary differences and future projected taxable income. The valuation allowance at December 31, 2004 related to the New Jersey deferred tax assets was $6 million.\n\nOur income tax returns are subject to examination by the Internal Revenue Service ('IRS') and other tax authorities. While positions taken in tax returns are sometimes subject to uncertainty in the tax laws, we do not take such positions unless we have 'substantial authority' to do so under the Internal Revenue Code and applicable regulations. We may take positions on our tax returns based on substantial authority that are not ultimately accepted by the IRS.\n\nWe assess such potential unfavorable outcomes based on the criteria of Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 5, 'Accounting for Contingencies' ('SFAS 5'). We establish a tax reserve if an unfavorable outcome is probable and the amount of the unfavorable outcome can be reasonably estimated. We assess the potential outcomes of tax uncertainties on a quarterly basis. In determining whether the probable criterion of SFAS 5 is met, we presume that the taxing authority will focus on the exposure and we assess the probable outcome of a particular issue based upon the relevant legal and technical merits. We also apply our judgment regarding the potential actions by the tax authorities and resolution through the settlement process.\n\nWe maintain required tax reserves until such time as the underlying issue is resolved. When actual results differ from reserve estimates, we adjust the income tax provision and our tax reserves in the period resolved. For tax years that are examined by taxing authorities, we adjust tax reserves in the year the tax examinations are settled. For tax years that are not examined by taxing authorities, we adjust tax reserves in the year that the statute of limitations expires. Our estimate of the\n\npotential outcome for any uncertain tax issue is highly judgmental, and we believe we have adequately provided for any reasonable and foreseeable outcomes related to uncertain tax matters.\n\nIn December 2002, we settled the IRS audit of the Company's 1995 and 1996 tax returns, which did not result in a material impact on our results of operations or financial position. During 2003, we filed amended returns for tax years subsequent to 1996 to reflect the impact of the IRS audits of the 1993 through 1996 tax years on those subsequent years. In the fourth quarter of 2003, the statutes of limitations expired for the 1997 through 1999 tax years, resulting in a reduction of our tax reserves of $13 million and a corresponding reduction in our provision for income taxes. In the third quarter of 2004, the statute of limitations expired for our 2000 tax return, resulting in a reduction of our tax reserves of $6 million and a corresponding reduction in our provision for income taxes. Subsequent to December 31, 2004, we received notice that the IRS will audit our 2001 and 2002 tax returns, and the tax returns for years after 2002 are subject to possible future examination.\n\nWe classify reserves for tax uncertainties within 'other accrued liabilities' in the accompanying consolidated balance sheets, separate from any related income tax payable or deferred income taxes. Reserve amounts may relate to the deductibility of an item, as well as potential interest associated with those items.\n\nA portion of our tax reserves was assumed in the Mirage Acquisition. The IRS audit of the tax returns of Mirage through the merger date was settled in August 2003, resulting in a payment to the IRS of $45 million, including interest. These matters had been previously reserved for, so the settlement had no impact on our income tax provision or our results of operations. Any future adjustments to the acquired Mirage tax reserves will be recorded as an adjustment to goodwill.\n\n35", + "recall": 0.9517241379310345, + "true_md": "Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations\n\n35\n\nAt December 31, 2004, we had $93 million of deferred tax assets and $1.9 billion of deferred tax liabilities. Except for certain New Jersey state net operating losses and certain other New Jersey state deferred tax assets, we believe that it is more likely than not that our deferred tax assets are fully realizable because of the future reversal of existing taxable temporary differences and future projected taxable income. The valuation allowance at December 31, 2004 related to the New Jersey deferred tax assets was $6 million.\n\nOur income tax returns are subject to examination by the Internal Revenue Service (“IRS”) and other tax authorities. While positions taken in tax returns are some- times subject to uncertainty in the tax laws, we do not take such positions unless we have “substantial authority” to do so under the Internal Revenue Code and applicable regulations. We may take positions on our tax returns based on substantial authority that are not ultimately accepted by the IRS.\n\nWe assess such potential unfavorable outcomes based on the criteria of Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 5, “Accounting for Contingencies” (“SFAS 5”). We establish a tax reserve if an unfavorable outcome is probable and the amount of the unfavorable outcome can be reasonably estimated. We assess the potential out- comes of tax uncertainties on a quarterly basis. In determining whether the proba- ble criterion of SFAS 5 is met, we presume that the taxing authority will focus on the exposure and we assess the probable outcome of a particular issue based upon the relevant legal and technical merits. We also apply our judgment regarding the potential actions by the tax authorities and resolution through the settlement process.\n\nWe maintain required tax reserves until such time as the underlying issue is resolved. When actual results differ from reserve estimates, we adjust the income tax provision and our tax reserves in the period resolved. For tax years that are exam- ined by taxing authorities, we adjust tax reserves in the year the tax examinations are settled. For tax years that are not examined by taxing authorities, we adjust tax reserves in the year that the statute of limitations expires. Our estimate of the\n\npotential outcome for any uncertain tax issue is highly judgmental, and we believe we have adequately provided for any reasonable and foreseeable outcomes related to uncertain tax matters.\n\nIn December 2002, we settled the IRS audit of the Company’s 1995 and 1996 tax returns, which did not result in a material impact on our results of operations or financial position. During 2003, we filed amended returns for tax years subsequent to 1996 to reflect the impact of the IRS audits of the 1993 through 1996 tax years on those subsequent years. In the fourth quarter of 2003, the statutes of limitations expired for the 1997 through 1999 tax years, resulting in a reduction of our tax reserves of $13 million and a corresponding reduction in our provision for income taxes. In the third quarter of 2004, the statute of limitations expired for our 2000 tax return, resulting in a reduction of our tax reserves of $6 million and a corre- sponding reduction in our provision for income taxes. Subsequent to December 31, 2004, we received notice that the IRS will audit our 2001 and 2002 tax returns, and the tax returns for years after 2002 are subject to possible future examination.\n\nWe classify reserves for tax uncertainties within “other accrued liabilities” in the accompanying consolidated balance sheets, separate from any related income tax payable or deferred income taxes. Reserve amounts may relate to the deductibility of an item, as well as potential interest associated with those items.\n\nA portion of our tax reserves was assumed in the Mirage Acquisition. The IRS audit of the tax returns of Mirage through the merger date was settled in August 2003, resulting in a payment to the IRS of $45 million, including interest. These matters had been previously reserved for, so the settlement had no impact on our income tax provision or our results of operations. Any future adjustments to the acquired Mirage tax reserves will be recorded as an adjustment to goodwill." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8044318681013578, + "doc_id": "6dfba5a9d0fc404beeb9be35b5b8481c1e84fae1729ad6fe9c7c96b0b8ca969f", + "edit_distance": 0.2913616398243045, + "f1_score": 0.9552238805970149, + "meteor": 0.9385037998490521, + "precision": 0.9664429530201343, + "pred_md": "16\n\n(from left to right) ROBERT C. SELWOOD Senior Vice PresidentAccounting; JAMES J. MURREN President, CFO & Treasurer; BRYAN L. WRIGHT Senior Vice President - Assistant General Counsel & Assistant Secretary; DANIEL J. D'ARRIGO Senior Vice President-Finance\n\n(from left to right) ROBERT C. SELWOOD Senior Vice PresidentAccounting; JAMES J. MURREN President, CFO & Treasurer; BRYAN L. WRIGHT Senior Vice President - Assistant General Counsel & Assistant Secretary; DANIEL J. D'ARRIGO Senior Vice President-Finance\n\n## No company is better positioned to help shape the future of Las Vegas than MGM MIRAGE.\n\nCYNTHIA KISER MURPHEY Senior VP, MGM MIRAGE Human Resources\n\nCYNTHIA KISER MURPHEY Senior VP, MGM MIRAGE Human Resources\n\nWILLIAM MCBEATH President, The Mirage\n\nROBERT V. MOON Chairman, MGM MIRAGE Marketing\n\nFELIX D. RAPPAPORT President, New York-New York\n\nFELIX D. RAPPAPORT President, New York-New York\n\nPUNAM MATHUR Senior VP, MGM MIRAGE Diversity/Community Relations\n\nPUNAM MATHUR Senior VP, MGM MIRAGE Diversity/Community Relations\n\ncombination of Mandalay's assets with our financial strength and industry-leading financial discipline will yield significant returns for all of our stakeholders.\n\nWe are currently planning the integration of the two companies, and over time, we expect to realize the full potential of cost and revenue synergies. We will report on our progress throughout the coming year.\n\n## The Next Moment - A City is Born\n\nWhat makes a great city? Las Vegas has long been recognized as the leisure capital of the world. The resorts in our valley have been the innovative leaders in the hospitality industry and have driven the tremendous growth in visitor volume, high occupancy rates and surging food, beverage, entertainment and gaming volumes. But there is another Las Vegas - a community of two million residents on its way to three million by the end of the decade. Las Vegas is leading the U.S. migration to the Southwest. Our newcomers are attracted by the lifestyle, weather, cost of living and economic opportunity. Many have come from cities in the East, West and Midwest and take elements of established communities for granted, such as medical, educational and cultural excellence and diversity.\n\nThe people of Las Vegas today have great aspirations and\n\nexpect and demand more of our community. We are a city without a proper city, and that is about to change. Ambitious plans are underway to revitalize Downtown Las Vegas, centered around a beautiful performing arts center and an academic medical center; UNLV is in the midst of a major capital campaign to enhance the Midtown section of Las Vegas; and your company has embarked on the most comprehensive project to date - Project CityCenter, at the heart of the Las V egas Strip.\n\nThe Las Vegas Strip has no sense of city now - but we believe it can. The future of Las Vegas is centered around our great resorts and our future development. There are many reasons we believe Project CityCenter is the right project for our Las Vegas Strip development. We believe there is a social imperative that Las Vegas mature as a city, not just a conglomeration of suburbs. A city deserves a center - a center for living, working and playing. We want to be an integral part in defining the Las Vegas of the future.\n\nAnd there is a business motivation. Companies in the gaming industry have historically not been valued on par with other hospitality companies and mixed-use real estate companies. We plan to break out of the gaming mold, and define a company based on extensive holdings in multiple businesses. Project CityCenter will include major residential, retail and entertainment components. We will partner with boutique\n\nSCOTT SIBELLA President, TI\n\nSCOTT SIBELLA President, TI", + "recall": 0.9442622950819672, + "true_md": "(from left to right) ROBERT C. SELWOOD Senior Vice President— Accounting; JAMES J. MURREN President, CFO & Treasurer; BRYAN L. WRIGHT Senior Vice President — Assistant General Counsel & Assistant Secretary; DANIEL J. D'ARRIGO Senior Vice President—Finance\n\nNo company is better positioned to help shape the future of Las Vegas than MGM MIRAGE.\n\ncombination of Mandalay’s assets with our financial strength and industry-leading financial discipline will yield significant returns for all of our stakeholders.\n\nWe are currently planning the integration of the two companies, and over time, we expect to realize the full poten- tial of cost and revenue synergies. We will report on our progress throughout the coming year.\n\nWhat makes a great city? Las Vegas has long been recognized as the leisure capital of the world. The resorts in our valley have been the innovative leaders in the hospitality industry and have driven the tremendous growth in visitor volume, high occupancy rates and surging food, beverage, entertainment and gaming volumes. But there is another Las Vegas – a community of two million residents on its way to three million by the end of the decade. Las Vegas is leading the U.S. migration to the Southwest. Our newcom- ers are attracted by the lifestyle, weather, cost of living and economic opportunity. Many have come from cities in the East, West and Midwest and take elements of established communities for granted, such as medical, educational and cultural excellence and diversity.\n\nThe people of Las Vegas today have great aspirations and\n\n## The Next Moment – A City is Born\n\nexpect and demand more of our community. We are a city without a proper city, and that is about to change. Ambitious plans are underway to revitalize Downtown Las Vegas, centered around a beautiful performing arts center and an academic medical center; UNLV is in the midst of a major capital cam- paign to enhance the Midtown section of Las Vegas; and your company has embarked on the most comprehensive project to date – Project CityCenter, at the heart of the Las Vegas Strip.\n\nThe Las Vegas Strip has no sense of city now – but we believe it can. The future of Las Vegas is centered around our great resorts and our future development. There are many reasons we believe Project CityCenter is the right project for our Las Vegas Strip development. We believe there is a social imperative that Las Vegas mature as a city, not just a con- glomeration of suburbs. A city deserves a center – a center for living, working and playing. We want to be an integral part in defining the Las Vegas of the future.\n\nAnd there is a business motivation. Companies in the gaming industry have historically not been valued on par with other hospitality companies and mixed-use real estate compa- nies. We plan to break out of the gaming mold, and define a company based on extensive holdings in multiple businesses. Project CityCenter will include major residential, retail and entertainment components. We will partner with boutique\n\nCYNTHIA KISER MURPHEY Senior VP, MGM MIRAGE Human Resources \n\nPUNAM MATHUR Senior VP, MGM MIRAGE Diversity/Community Relations \n\nWILLIAM MCBEATH President, The Mirage \n\nROBERT V. MOON Chairman, MGM MIRAGE Marketing \n\nFELIX D. RAPPAPORT President, New York-New York\n\n16\n\nSCOTT SIBELLA President, TI" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "87c7dc9ca13016fafa4a7539efa1bf00401ba27323a473094b4184bc42cb36c0", + "edit_distance": 0.8281622911694511, + "f1_score": 0.2553191489361702, + "meteor": 0.10578605445649909, + "precision": 0.27906976744186046, + "pred_md": "- º7iÊ«Àˆ'iʜÕÀÃiÛiÃʈ˜Ê'iˆÛiÀˆ˜}ʵÕ>ˆÌÞÊ>˜'Ê Vœ“«iÌiÊi˜'‡Ìœ‡i˜'Ê܏Ṏœ˜ÃÊ̅>ÌÊi˜>LiʜÕÀÊ VÕÃ̜“iÀÃÊ̜ÊÃ>ÛiÊÛ>Õ>LiÊ̈“iÊ>˜'ÊÊ ˆ˜VÀi>ÃiÊ «ÀœvˆÌÃʈ˜Ê>Ê}œL>Ê“>ÀŽiÌ«>Vi°»\n\nÇ\n\n-glyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman> glyph<c=31,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman> glyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>‡-glyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>", + "recall": 0.23529411764705882, + "true_md": "º 7 i Ê « À ˆ ` i Ê œ Õ À à i  Û i Ã Ê ˆ ˜ Ê ` i  ˆ Û i À ˆ ˜ } Ê µ Õ >  ˆ Ì Þ Ê > ˜ ` Ê V œ “ «  i Ì i Ê i ˜ ` ‡ Ì œ ‡ i ˜ ` Ê Ã œ  Õ Ì ˆ œ ˜ Ã Ê Ì … > Ì Ê i ˜ > L  i Ê œ Õ À Ê V Õ Ã Ì œ “ i À Ã Ê Ì œ Ê Ã > Û i Ê Û >  Õ > L  i Ê Ì ˆ “ i Ê > ˜ ` Ê Ê ˆ ˜ V À i > à i Ê « À œ v ˆ Ì Ã Ê ˆ ˜ Ê > Ê }  œ L >  Ê “ > À Ž i Ì «  > V i ° » \n\nÇ - ‡ -\n\n6 Ê - - 6 ‹ V i Ñ * Å i È ‹ ` i › Ó ] Ñ › ` Þ È Ó Å ‹ > ’ Ñ > › ` Ñ - i – ‹ V › ` Þ V Ó Å Ñ - ç È Ó i – È Ñ ‹ ä ‹ È ‹ › \n\n, Ê * * Å i È ‹ ` i › Ó ] Ñ ’ L > ’ Ñ \" ° i Å > Ó ‹ › È \n\n- \" Ê , - i › ‹ Å Ñ 6 ‹ V i Ñ * Å i È ‹ ` i › Ó ] Ñ i w i › È i Ñ > › ` Ñ i Å È ° > V i - ç È Ó i – È Ñ ‹ ä ‹ È ‹ › \n\n6 Ê 1 / \" 7 - 9 æ i V Þ Ó ‹ ä i Ñ 6 ‹ V i Ñ * Å i È ‹ ` i › Ó ] Ñ – – Þ › ‹ V > Ó ‹ › È Ñ - ç È Ó i – È Ñ ‹ ä ‹ È ‹ ›" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9395447127812936, + "doc_id": "ce6bd1ed025d675e7d55d5aea5266887d5e0dafd349609a13c61519424f706ff", + "edit_distance": 0.8107142857142857, + "f1_score": 0.9666666666666666, + "meteor": 0.804762657595631, + "precision": 0.9789029535864979, + "pred_md": "28\n\n## Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations\n\nInvestments in unconsolidated affiliates in 2004 primarily consist of contributions to The Residences at MGM Grand. In 2003 and 2002, such investments were primarily our required investments in Borgata. In 2002, we also contributed $44 million to Monte Carlo in connection with Monte Carlo's retirement of the final $87 million of its outstanding debt.\n\n## Cash Flows - Financing Activities\n\nIn 2004, we issued over $1.5 billion of fixed rate debt in various issuances:\n\n- · In February and March 2004, we issued $525 million of 5.875% Senior Notes due 2014;\n- · In August 2004, we issued $550 million of 6.75% Senior Notes due 2012;\n- · In September 2004, we issued $450 million of 6% Senior Notes due 2009 at a premium to yield 5.65%.\n\nIn 2004, we repaid a net $1.6 billion on our bank credit facilities and repurchased $49 million of our existing senior notes for $52 million, resulting in a loss on early retirement of debt of $6 million (including the write-off of unamortized original issue discount), which is classified as 'Other, net' in the accompanying consolidated statement of income. In 2003, we issued $600 million of 6% Senior Notes, due 2009 and repaid a net $285 million on our bank credit facilities. The net proceeds of these financing activities were used to supplement operating cash flows, fund capital expenditures and repurchase shares of our common stock. In 2002, we utilized our operating cash flow to reduce outstanding indebtedness by $270 million, while still funding significant capital expenditures and share repurchases.\n\nOur share repurchases are only conducted under repurchase programs approved by our Board of Directors and publicly announced. Our share repurchase activity was as follows:\n\nAt December 31, 2004, we had 10 million shares available for repurchase under a July 2004 authorization. We received $136 million, $36 million and $46 million in proceeds from the exercise of employee stock options in the years ended December 31, 2004, 2003 and 2002, respectively.\n\n## Principal Debt Arrangements\n\nOur long-term debt consists of publicly held senior and subordinated notes and bank credit facilities. We pay fixed rates of interest ranging from 5.875% to 9.75% on the senior and subordinated notes. We pay variable interest based on LIBOR on our bank credit facility. We amended our bank credit facility in November 2003, and our current senior credit facility is a $2.5 billion, five-year revolving credit facility with a syndicate of banks led by Bank of America, N.A. As of December 31, 2004, we had approximately $2.4 billion of available liquidity under our bank credit facility. Subsequent to year-end, we redeemed three issuances of senior notes totaling $676 million of principal utilizing available funds under the bank credit facility. Our next maturity of public debt is not due until 2006.", + "recall": 0.9547325102880658, + "true_md": "28\n\nManagement’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations\n\nInvestments in unconsolidated affiliates in 2004 primarily consist of contributions to The Residences at MGM Grand. In 2003 and 2002, such investments were primarily our required investments in Borgata. In 2002, we also contributed $44 million to Monte Carlo in connection with Monte Carlo’s retirement of the final $87 million of its outstanding debt.\n\nIn 2004, we issued over $1.5 billion of fixed rate debt in various issuances:\n\n## Cash Flows – Financing Activities\n\nOur share repurchases are only conducted under repurchase programs approved by our Board of Directors and publicly announced. Our share repurchase activity was as follows:\n\nAt December 31, 2004, we had 10 million shares available for repurchase under a July 2004 authorization. We received $136 million, $36 million and $46 million in proceeds from the exercise of employee stock options in the years ended December 31, 2004, 2003 and 2002, respectively.\n\nOur long-term debt consists of publicly held senior and subordinated notes and bank credit facilities. We pay fixed rates of interest ranging from 5.875% to 9.75% on the senior and subordinated notes. We pay variable interest based on LIBOR on our bank credit facility. We amended our bank credit facility in November 2003, and our current senior credit facility is a $2.5 billion, five-year revolving credit facility with a syndicate of banks led by Bank of America, N.A. As of December 31, 2004, we had approximately $2.4 billion of available liquidity under our bank credit facility. Subsequent to year-end, we redeemed three issuances of senior notes totaling $676 million of principal utilizing available funds under the bank credit facility. Our next maturity of public debt is not due until 2006. \n\nIn 2004, we repaid a net $1.6 billion on our bank credit facilities and repurchased $49 million of our existing senior notes for $52 million, resulting in a loss on early retirement of debt of $6 million (including the write-off of unamortized original issue discount), which is classified as “Other, net” in the accompanying consolidat- ed statement of income. In 2003, we issued $600 million of 6% Senior Notes, due 2009 and repaid a net $285 million on our bank credit facilities. The net proceeds of these financing activities were used to supplement operating cash flows, fund capital expenditures and repurchase shares of our common stock. In 2002, we utilized our operating cash flow to reduce outstanding indebtedness by $270 mil- lion, while still funding significant capital expenditures and share repurchases.\n\n## Principal Debt Arrangements\n\n- • In February and March 2004, we issued $525 million of 5.875% Senior Notes due 2014;\n\n- • In August 2004, we issued $550 million of 6.75% Senior Notes due 2012;\n\n- • In September 2004, we issued $450 million of 6% Senior Notes due 2009 at a premium to yield 5.65%." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9550184754559978, + "doc_id": "b2f43639ab6628fc2e15aae8421efbc98860681183b7cc1b632f9ede3d24545c", + "edit_distance": 0.048027444253859346, + "f1_score": 0.983666061705989, + "meteor": 0.9794110305177237, + "precision": 0.9854545454545455, + "pred_md": "WHO WE ARE\n\n30\n\n## I NDUSTRIAL MACHINERY AND MARINE BUSINESS\n\n## Building on the Core\n\nTOSHIO AOKI Vice President\n\nTOSHIO AOKI Vice President\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\n'We are the only forklift manufacturer directly owned by an automotive company, and that has created a number of synergies for our division. There's a natural link with the core business, for instance, given the powertrain of a forklift. However, we also benefit from other assets within Nissan, such as brand, quality, cost management, and marketing activities.\n\nThe bottom line is that we contribute to the Company's total profitability. We had our highest sales and profit in fiscal 2004. We now lead the industry in profitability, in fact, which I believe reflects the market's awareness of our superior quality. In this business, quality is everything, because our customers are investing in tools for their business. As we upgrade our customer service, I think we will be in a position to become the market leader.\n\nProducing forklifts is the heart of our business, although we also build marine products, mostly fiberglass boats and outboard motors. During the year a major issue for our forklift division was the rising price of steel, which seriously affects forklift production. We increased our selling price in response, as did the rest of the industry. Fortunately, we met or surpassed our targets in Japan and in Europe, where we have a plant in Spain. We were slightly below our target for the U.S., however, the result of a slight delay in the start of production on a new model, which reduced volume for the year. We have since recovered our strength in that market, which we see as key to our continued growth.\n\nA major contributor to our expansion was the release of a new forklift in Japan two years ago. At the time we had not released a new model in over seven years. Over the coming years we plan to introduce a new battery-powered model in major markets and enhance our service network. Since forklifts are production equipment, their sales are highly influenced by business cycles. To help maintain our profitability, we need to ramp up our parts and service businesses, which can be a significant source of income.\n\nWe have made a tough commitment for the NISSAN Value-Up period, and that is to increase our profitability until it is in line with Nissan's other operations. This will require some bold steps, but doing so will make us the industry leader. We are currently expanding into producing other material handling and warehousing equipment. We also see opportunities for quality forklifts in China, despite the competitive market there. Used forklifts can also be a profitable business as well, and we are looking to increase our involvement in that area.\n\nOur marine-related business has been profitable since 2000, when we restructured the business by expanding the marine product line-up and strengthening marina operations. Now we are focusing on larger boats and investigating the possibility of manufacturing in China. We are also researching the recycling of plastic and fiberglass boats, which is a major environmental concern.'", + "recall": 0.9818840579710145, + "true_md": "## INDUSTRIAL MACHINERY AND MARINE BUSINESS\n\n## Building on the Core\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 30\n\nWHO WE ARE\n\nTOSHIO AOKI Vice President\n\n“We are the only forklift manufacturer directly owned by an automotive company, and that has created a number of synergies for our division. There’s a natural link with the core business, for instance, given the powertrain of a forklift. However, we also benefit from other assets within Nissan, such as brand, quality, cost management, and marketing activities.\n\nThe bottom line is that we contribute to the Company’s total profitability. We had our highest sales and profit in fiscal 2004. We now lead the industry in profitability, in fact, which I believe reflects the market’s awareness of our superior quality. In this business, quality is everything, because our customers are investing in tools for their business. As we upgrade our customer service, I think we will be in a position to become the market leader.\n\nProducing forklifts is the heart of our business, although we also build marine products, mostly fiberglass boats and outboard motors. During the year a major issue for our forklift division was the rising price of steel, which seriously affects forklift production. We increased our selling price in response, as did the rest of the industry. Fortunately, we met or surpassed our targets in Japan and in Europe, where we have a plant in Spain. We were slightly below our target for the U.S., however, the result of a slight delay in the start of production on a new model, which reduced volume for the year. We have since recovered our strength in that market, which we see as key to our continued growth.\n\nA major contributor to our expansion was the release of a new forklift in Japan two years ago. At the time we had not released a new model in over seven years. Over the coming years we plan to introduce a new battery-powered model in major markets and enhance our service network. Since forklifts are production equipment, their sales are highly influenced by business cycles. To help maintain our profitability, we need to ramp up our parts and service businesses, which can be a significant source of income. \n\nWe have made a tough commitment for the NISSAN Value-Up period, and that is to increase our profitability until it is in line with Nissan’s other operations. This will require some bold steps, but doing so will make us the industry leader. We are currently expanding into producing other material handling and warehousing equipment. We also see opportunities for quality forklifts in China, despite the competitive market there. Used forklifts can also be a profitable business as well, and we are looking to increase our involvement in that area. \n\nOur marine-related business has been profitable since 2000, when we restructured the business by expanding the marine product line-up and strengthening marina operations. Now we are focusing on larger boats and investigating the possibility of manufacturing in China. We are also researching the recycling of plastic and fiberglass boats, which is a major environmental concern.”" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9607435579640916, + "doc_id": "36db42a95b9962d6f43631e0f7fb0634a3095ee60c6debb362553fde91f40691", + "edit_distance": 0.028639618138424822, + "f1_score": 0.9854604200323104, + "meteor": 0.9752441758708889, + "precision": 0.9902597402597403, + "pred_md": "SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES\n\nMANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS\n\nReflected in the 2003 results are several unusual items, which should be noted in understanding the financial results of the Company for 2003.\n\n- 1. Certain access revenue rate elements billed by the Company to interexchange carriers were disputed and subsequently refunded to the carriers. During 2003, the Company recorded a reduction in access revenue of $1.2 million from interexchange customers related to the disputed access revenue the Company previously billed for switching facilities and the local exchange network. The disputes cover a two-year period beginning in 2001 through and including the second quarter of 2003. The total amount of the reduction related to 2003 was $0.7 million.\n- 2. The Company changed its employee vacation policy so that employees now earn and use their vacation benefits in the same year. Previously, vacation benefits were earned in the year prior to the year the benefits were available to the employee. As a result of this change in employee benefit policy, the Company did not accrue employee vacation expense for 2004 in 2003, thereby reducing its benefit expenses by $0.5 million for the 2003 year.\n- 3. The Company adjusted its estimate of deferred revenue for the PCS operation in the fourth quarter of 2003. The adjustment decreased deferred revenue by $0.6 million and increased revenue in 2003 by the same amount.\n- 4. The Company received a reimbursement from Sprint of $0.2 million related to 2002 for its portion of the E911 surcharge collected from PCS subscribers. The reimbursement is to offset the Company's portion of handset costs incurred to make the customers' phones E911 compliant. This entry decreased cost of goods expenses.\n\nOn January 30, 2004, the Company, a PCS Affiliate of Sprint, signed agreements with Sprint that resolved disputed items and documented changes in the management and operating agreements between the two companies related to the operations of the nationwide Sprint PCS network. The agreements provide the Company with the ability to better estimate the future costs of certain operating expenses and in the Company's opinion improve the contract between Sprint and itself. Under the agreements:\n\n- 1. Sprint agreed to compensate the Company for lost travel revenue related to usage by Sprint customers in the Company's territory for the period prior to 2003, and change the method of allocating certain software maintenance fees between Sprint and its Affiliates for fees recorded in 2002 and 2003. These items had the effect of increasing operating income by $0.7 million in the 4 th quarter of 2003.\n- 2. The method used to price certain services performed by Sprint on behalf of the Company was simplified. The CCPU (cash cost per user) rate for the periods 2004 through 2006 was set at $7.70 per user per month. This fee covers customer service, billing, collections, network operations and other costs to support the customer. However, Sprint may discontinue such services if Sprint is discontinuing such services to all other Sprint PCS affiliates and Sprint's own end-users. It is estimated that this rate will decrease the amount the Company will pay Sprint compared to payments under the previous method by approximately $120,000 per month in 2004.\n- 3. There will be a maximum until the year 2007, on the non-direct Costs per Gross Additions (CPGA) at the greater of 6.3% of the Sprint published CPGA rate or $25. With the volatility of CPGA, the Company cannot determine the amount of potential savings, but the change does provide more certainty in estimating future costs.\n- 4. For the period 2004 through 2006, the travel and reseller rates between the Company and Sprint were set at $0.058 per minute for voice and $0.002 per kilobyte for data. Without this agreement the voice travel rate for 2004 would have decreased to $0.041. Since the Company is in a net receivable position related to travel with Sprint, the impact on net travel and reseller revenue would have been a reduction of $1.5 million had the $0.041 rate been in effect in 2003. Beginning in 2007, the Sprint travel and reseller rate will be changed annually to equal 90% of Sprint's retail yield from the prior year. Sprint's retail yield will be determined based on Sprint's average revenue per PCS user for voice services divided by the average minutes of use per user.\n\n41\n\n2003 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n■", + "recall": 0.9807073954983923, + "true_md": "SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS\n\nReflected in the 2003 results are several unusual items, which should be noted in understanding the financial results of the Company for 2003.\n\n- 1. Certain access revenue rate elements billed by the Company to interexchange carriers were disputed and subsequently refunded to the carriers. During 2003, the Company recorded a reduction in access revenue of $1.2 million from interexchange customers related to the disputed access revenue the Company previously billed for switching facilities and the local exchange network. The disputes cover a two-year period beginning in 2001 through and including the second quarter of 2003. The total amount of the reduction related to 2003 was $0.7 million.\n\n- 2. The Company changed its employee vacation policy so that employees now earn and use their vacation benefits in the same year. Previously, vacation benefits were earned in the year prior to the year the benefits were available to the employee. As a result of this change in employee benefit policy, the Company did not accrue employee vacation expense for 2004 in 2003, thereby reducing its benefit expenses by $0.5 million for the 2003 year.\n\n- 3. The Company adjusted its estimate of deferred revenue for the PCS operation in the fourth quarter of 2003. The adjustment decreased deferred revenue by $0.6 million and increased revenue in 2003 by the same amount.\n\n- 4. The Company received a reimbursement from Sprint of $0.2 million related to 2002 for its portion of the E911 surcharge collected from PCS subscribers. The reimbursement is to offset the Company’s portion of handset costs incurred to make the customers’ phones E911 compliant. This entry decreased cost of goods expenses.\n\nOn January 30, 2004, the Company, a PCS Affiliate of Sprint, signed agreements with Sprint that resolved disputed items and documented changes in the management and operating agreements between the two companies related to the operations of the nationwide Sprint PCS network. The agreements provide the Company with the ability to better estimate the future costs of certain operating expenses and in the Company’s opinion improve the contract between Sprint and itself. Under the agreements:\n\n- 1. Sprint agreed to compensate the Company for lost travel revenue related to usage by Sprint customers in the Company’s territory for the period prior to 2003, and change the method of allocating certain software maintenance fees between Sprint and its Affiliates for fees recorded in 2002 and 2003. These items had the effect of increasing operating income by $0.7 million in the 4$^{th}$ quarter of 2003.\n\n- 2. The method used to price certain services performed by Sprint on behalf of the Company was simplified. The CCPU (cash cost per user) rate for the periods 2004 through 2006 was set at $7.70 per user per month. This fee covers customer service, billing, collections, network operations and other costs to support the customer. However, Sprint may discontinue such services if Sprint is discontinuing such services to all other Sprint PCS affiliates and Sprint’s own end-users. It is estimated that this rate will decrease the amount the Company will pay Sprint compared to payments under the previous method by approximately $120,000 per month in 2004.\n\n- 3. There will be a maximum until the year 2007, on the non-direct Costs per Gross Additions (CPGA) at the greater of 6.3% of the Sprint published CPGA rate or $25. With the volatility of CPGA, the Company cannot determine the amount of potential savings, but the change does provide more certainty in estimating future costs.\n\n- 4. For the period 2004 through 2006, the travel and reseller rates between the Company and Sprint were set at $0.058 per minute for voice and $0.002 per kilobyte for data. Without this agreement the voice travel rate for 2004 would have decreased to $0.041. Since the Company is in a net receivable position related to travel with Sprint, the impact on net travel and reseller revenue would have been a reduction of $1.5 million had the $0.041 rate been in effect in 2003. Beginning in 2007, the Sprint travel and reseller rate will be changed annually to equal 90% of Sprint’s retail yield from the prior year. Sprint’s retail yield will be determined based on Sprint’s average revenue per PCS user for voice services divided by the average minutes of use per user.\n\n41 ■ 2003 ANNUAL REPORT" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7053392799877652, + "doc_id": "6888e8f957ed15a072ce41ebc8229a3cd6c885fbed934c81499f517dc8e9217e", + "edit_distance": 0.22929936305732485, + "f1_score": 0.8730964467005075, + "meteor": 0.7894265817467379, + "precision": 0.9247311827956989, + "pred_md": "PERFECT MATCH #1\n\n## THE FORTUNE 500 AND ALLSTEEL\n\nWhen we saw Get Set TM it was love at first sight. Then we got to know everything else you have to offer, and realized you're more than just a pretty face - you're a brand with a head for business and uplifting products that set the standard for functionality, durability, and style. Of course we know we Fortune 500 types are not the only ones in your life corporate, government, and institutional customers are excited about you, too, since you match everyone's workplace furniture and service needs with energy, confidence, and great customer relationships. That's ok, Allsteel; you're worth sharing.", + "recall": 0.8269230769230769, + "true_md": "PERFECT MATCH #1\n\n## T H E F O R T U N E 5 0 0 A N D A L L S T E E L\n\nWhen we saw Get Set TM it was love at first sight. Then we got to know everything else you have to offer, and realized you’re more than just a pretty face — you’re a brand with a head for business and uplifting products that set the standard for functionality, durability, and style. Of course we know we Fortune 500 types are not the only ones in your life — corporate, government, and institutional customers are excited about you, too, since you match everyone’s workplace furniture and service needs with energy, confidence, and great customer relationships. That’s ok, Allsteel; you’re worth sharing." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8565955628626373, + "doc_id": "30e93dfc8b3f8f5152017f9598d4d459a7581029e28bde3bc1dc0c6065bc2526", + "edit_distance": 0.1588235294117647, + "f1_score": 0.92018779342723, + "meteor": 0.9346886068476977, + "precision": 0.9514563106796117, + "pred_md": "82\n\n## NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\nfor the year ended 31 December 2004\n\n30. Superannuation Commitments\n\nSantos Ltd and certain controlled entities participate in a number of superannuation funds and pension plans in Australia and the United States of America. From 1 February 2002, three of the more significant employee benefit plans were combined into a single plan which provides benefits either on a defined benefit or cash accumulation basis for employees or their dependants on retirement, resignation, temporary or permanent disablement or death. The employers and employee members make contributions as specified in the rules of the plan.\n\nIn the case of the defined benefit component of the combined plan, employer contributions are based on the advice of the plan's actuary. The most recent actuarial assessment of the plan was undertaken as at 1 January 2004.\n\nThe following is a summary of the Santos Superannuation Plan:\n\nAnnual Report 2004", + "recall": 0.8909090909090909, + "true_md": "for the year ended 31 December 2004\n\n## 30. Superannuation Commitments\n\nSantos Ltd and certain controlled entities participate in a number of superann uation funds and pension plans in Australia and the United States of America. From 1 February 2002, three of the more significant employee ben efit plans were combined into a single plan which provides benefits either on a defined benefit or cash accumulation basis for employees or their depend ants on retirement, resignation, temporary or permanent disablement or death. The employers and employee members make contributions as specifi ed in the rules of the plan.\n\nIn the case of the defined benefit component of the combined plan, employer contributions are based on the advice of the plan’s actuary. The most recent actuarial assessment of the plan was undertaken as at 1 January 2004.\n\nThe following is a summary of the Santos Superannuation Plan:\n\nAnnual Report 2004 82\n\nNOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STA TEMENTS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6294197412882044, + "doc_id": "3cc094f660dc0b838ceb9e690e4bd620f67bbfc03d791ad2abb3a96797c03250", + "edit_distance": 0.39690721649484534, + "f1_score": 0.8258064516129032, + "meteor": 0.8519546451643489, + "precision": 0.7710843373493976, + "pred_md": "2 0 0 3 B O A R D O F D I R E C T O R S A N D E X E C U T I V E O F F I C E R S\n\n## B O A R D O F D I R E C T O R S\n\nEmile A. Battat Chairman of the Board and President Atrion Corporation\n\nRichard O. Jacobson Chairman of the Board Jacobson Companies\n\nDes Moines, Iowa\n\nJohn H. P . Maley Chairman of the Board Compex Technologies, Inc. Minneapolis, Minnesota\n\nHugh J. Morgan, Jr.\n\nPrivate Investor, Former Chairman of the Board National Bank of Commerce of Birmingham Birmingham, Alabama\n\nRoger F. Stebbing\n\nPresident and Chief Executive Officer Stebbing and Associates, Inc. Signal Mountain, Tennessee\n\nJohn P . Stupp, Jr. President Stupp Bros., Inc.\n\nSt. Louis, Missouri\n\n## E X E C U T I V E O F F I C E R S\n\nEmile A. Battat\n\nChairman of the Board and President\n\nJeffery Strickland Vice President and Chief Financial Officer, Secretary and Treasurer\n\n28", + "recall": 0.8888888888888888, + "true_md": "2003 BOARD OF DIRECTORS AND EXECUTIVE OFFICERS\n\n## BOARD OF DIRECTORS\n\nEmile A. Battat Chairman of the Board and President Atrion Corporation\n\nRichard O. Jacobson Chairman of the Board Jacobson Companies Des Moines, Iowa\n\nJohn H. P. Maley Chairman of the Board Compex Technologies, Inc. Minneapolis, Minnesota\n\nHugh J. Morgan, Jr. Private Investor, Former Chairman of the Board National Bank of Commerce of Birmingham Birmingham, Alabama\n\nRoger F. Stebbing President and Chief Executive Officer Stebbing and Associates, Inc. Signal Mountain, Tennessee\n\nJohn P. Stupp, Jr. President Stupp Bros., Inc. St. Louis, Missouri\n\n## EXECUTIVE OFFICERS\n\nEmile A. Battat Chairman of the Board and President\n\nJeffery Strickland Vice President and Chief Financial Officer, Secretary and Treasurer\n\n28" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6221625145977443, + "doc_id": "40676ed54254ab777b954aed3515c5161625c74ea2832e8c4fabf13733737ce2", + "edit_distance": 0.2814814814814815, + "f1_score": 0.8466257668711658, + "meteor": 0.7294565717408688, + "precision": 0.9078947368421053, + "pred_md": "## HOT! HOT! HOT!\n\nCompetitive, inventive, expansive by day … cozy, intimate, and warm by night. On one hand, a technology buff; while on the other hand, an incurable romantic. I'll bathe you in heat - and show you how to fill a room with a very special glow. Seek hearthwarming personality with a powerful appreciation for style and performance. Must have aspirational dreams and family values. My dream: someone to ignite my potential … someone to keep the home fires burning.\n\nHEARTH & HOME TECHNOLOGIES", + "recall": 0.7931034482758621, + "true_md": "## H O T ! H O T ! H O T !\n\nCompetitive, inventive, expansive by day … cozy, intimate, and warm by night. On one hand, a technology buff; while on the other hand, an incurable romantic. I’ll bathe you in heat — and show you how to fill a room with a very special glow. Seek hearthwarming per- sonality with a powerful appreciation for style and performance. Must have aspirational dreams and family values. My dream: some- one to ignite my potential … someone to keep the home fires burning. \n\nH E A R T H & H O M E T E C H N O L O G I E S" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "b1ff68df65b5fb61f7fee54b3c07235543c733eeacfd7561bab13dce36d21553", + "edit_distance": 0.2814814814814815, + "f1_score": 0.8466257668711658, + "meteor": 0.7294565717408688, + "precision": 0.9078947368421053, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.7931034482758621, + "true_md": "400 Pine Street, Abilene, Texas 79601 www.ffin.com" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9567692685875616, + "doc_id": "91bb8e816461cb1e38b30a9f18b0bf802f6c824b08c973b46690feca8bf9f538", + "edit_distance": 0.9084065244667503, + "f1_score": 0.9686221009549796, + "meteor": 0.6682738372778185, + "precision": 0.9752747252747253, + "pred_md": "LETTER FROM COO\n\n4\n\n## LETTER FROM THE COO\n\nMuch has been written about the Nissan revival. While innovative product, an improved cost base, greater manufacturing efficiencies and a better-defined brand have all been factors, the strongest element in our revival has been our people. And, what we learned during the crisis in the 90s and through the Nissan Revival Plan and Nissan 180 plan, now guides how we will manage the company in the future. We call it the Nissan Management Way. It is both a philosophy and set of disciplines that guide us at all levels of the organization and will help Nissan build on the momentum of the past six years.\n\nAlthough our president and CEO Carlos Ghosn has now taken on the same responsibilities at Renault, our basic management style will not change. As in the past, the Executive Committee, chaired by Carlos Ghosn, is still the highest decision making authority for strategy and management policy.\n\nThe COO position I now hold was created to provide an 'operating officer' in the truest sense of the title. As COO my role is to assist the CEO by executing the business plan, monitoring the Company's performance and supervising dayto-day operations. The decisions I make are always based on the Nissan Management Way and support the commitments of the NISSAN Value-Up business plan.\n\nWhat distinguishes the Nissan Management Way is that we are both profit-driven and customer-focused, and that we share our strategy globally and execute in a cross-functional way. These cross-functional activities are particularly important to our success; along with cross-functional thinking, they have helped create an organization of singular structure, focus and culture. In this organization, employees representing each of Nissan's three axis-regional businesses such as Japan and U.S., functions such as engineering and manufacturing, and products-are actively encouraged to work together to maximize profits and to avoid a 'silo' mentality that is only focused on their immediate operational group.\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\nFiscal 2005 is a year of immense challenges and uncertainties, but we have still pushed ahead with an ambitious business plan for this period. As COO, my priority is to keep a close watch on Nissan's performance to ensure that we deliver our commitments. These include achieving the final Nissan 180 commitment of one million additional vehicles by the end of September 2005 and hitting our financial targets for fiscal 2005. There is no doubt that we have the strong leadership and management teams capable of sustaining the high level of performance required to reach these goals.\n\nNissan is now a learning organization. We have fully integrated the changes that began during the Nissan Revival Plan and continue to shape our business in the future. Our employees continually seek to build a better Nissan and fortify the brand, and are not afraid to speak out on issues and openly discuss challenges that face the business. Within the Nissan Management Way, we call that 'healthy conflict'- and it strongly related to our belief in transparency and accountability. This is the essence of the evolution that continues to empower our company.\n\nOur alliance with Renault also continues to be a source of immense strength. We expect to further reinforce the Alliance and to develop new synergies now that Carlos Ghosn is the CEO of both companies.\n\nWhile we have the kinds of advantages I have mentioned, we also have risks. One of those risks is complacency. During the last six years, we have made significant achievements and consistently met tough commitments, but countless challenges remain. Our industry is immensely competitive, our customers more demanding than ever and we have no time to rest and congratulate ourselves. We need to create a culture where employees are always motivated to challenge themselves and the company and to create value for all our stakeholders.\n\nPeople around the world know that Nissan is a profitable and customer-driven company. As COO, one of my key roles under NISSAN Value-Up is to promote this customer-driven culture throughout the entire value chain, from initial product planning to after-sales service. I truly believe that by enhancing our focus on profit and pursuing a customer-driven approach, we can provide more value to all our stakeholders: employees, communities, suppliers, partners, and, of course, our shareholders.\n\nToshiyuki Shiga Chief Operating Officer\n\nToshiyuki Shiga Chief Operating Officer", + "recall": 0.962059620596206, + "true_md": "## LETTER FROM THE COO\n\nFiscal 2005 is a year of immense challenges and uncertainties, but we have still pushed ahead with an ambitious business plan for this period. As COO, my priority is to keep a close watch on Nissan’s performance to ensure that we deliver our commitments. These include achieving the final Nissan 180 commitment of one million additional vehicles by the end of September 2005 and hitting our financial targets for fiscal 2005. There is no doubt that we have the strong leadership and management teams capable of sustaining the high level of performance required to reach these goals. \n\nNissan is now a learning organization. We have fully integrated the changes that began during the Nissan Revival Plan and continue to shape our business in the future. Our employees continually seek to build a better Nissan and fortify the brand, and are not afraid to speak out on issues and openly discuss challenges that face the business. Within the Nissan Management Way, we call that “healthy conflict”— and it strongly related to our belief in transparency and accountability. This is the essence of the evolution that continues to empower our company. \n\nOur alliance with Renault also continues to be a source of immense strength. We expect to further reinforce the Alliance and to develop new synergies now that Carlos Ghosn is the CEO of both companies.\n\nWhile we have the kinds of advantages I have mentioned, we also have risks. One of those risks is complacency. During the last six years, we have made significant achievements and consistently met tough commitments, but countless challenges remain. Our industry is immensely competitive, our customers more demanding than ever and we have no time to rest and congratulate ourselves. We need to create a culture where employees are always motivated to challenge themselves and the company and to create value for all our stakeholders.\n\nPeople around the world know that Nissan is a profitable and customer-driven company. As COO, one of my key roles under NISSAN Value-Up is to promote this customer-driven culture throughout the entire value chain, from initial product planning to after-sales service. I truly believe that by enhancing our focus on profit and pursuing a customer-driven approach, we can provide more value to all our stakeholders: employees, communities, suppliers, partners, and, of course, our shareholders.\n\nToshiyuki Shiga Chief Operating Officer\n\nMuch has been written about the Nissan revival. While innovative product, an improved cost base, greater manufacturing efficiencies and a better-defined brand have all been factors, the strongest element in our revival has been our people. And, what we learned during the crisis in the 90s and through the Nissan Revival Plan and Nissan 180 plan, now guides how we will manage the company in the future. We call it the Nissan Management Way. It is both a philosophy and set of disciplines that guide us at all levels of the organization and will help Nissan build on the momentum of the past six years.\n\nAlthough our president and CEO Carlos Ghosn has now taken on the same responsibilities at Renault, our basic management style will not change. As in the past, the Executive Committee, chaired by Carlos Ghosn, is still the highest decision making authority for strategy and management policy. \n\nThe COO position I now hold was created to provide an “operating officer” in the truest sense of the title. As COO my role is to assist the CEO by executing the business plan, monitoring the Company’s performance and supervising day- to-day operations. The decisions I make are always based on the Nissan Management Way and support the commitments of the NISSAN Value-Up business plan. \n\nWhat distinguishes the Nissan Management Way is that we are both profit-driven and customer-focused, and that we share our strategy globally and execute in a cross-functional way. These cross-functional activities are particularly important to our success; along with cross-functional thinking, they have helped create an organization of singular structure, focus and culture. In this organization, employees representing each of Nissan’s three axis—regional businesses such as Japan and U.S., functions such as engineering and manufacturing, and products—are actively encouraged to work together to maximize profits and to avoid a ‘silo’ mentality that is only focused on their immediate operational group.\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 4\n\nLETTER FROM COO" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9009964876208791, + "doc_id": "d31c3f5eb324a9afdbf7fcba2db6b48011c0f4d314db42e4f80d666bb2a866b0", + "edit_distance": 0.09320388349514563, + "f1_score": 0.971291866028708, + "meteor": 0.9384765839306408, + "precision": 0.9759615384615384, + "pred_md": "58\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nally guarantee the Senior Credit Facility, senior notes, senior debentures, and senior subordinated notes. MGM Grand Detroit, LLC is a guarantor under the Senior Credit Facility, but only to the extent that the proceeds of borrowings under such facilities are made available to MGM Grand Detroit, LLC. Substantially all of the Company's assets, other than assets of foreign subsidiaries and certain assets in use at MGM Grand Detroit, were pledged as collateral for the Company's senior notes, excluding subordinated notes, and the Company's bank credit facilities at December 31, 2004. See Note 18 for additional information.\n\nThe Company's long-term debt obligations contain certain customary covenants. The Company's Senior Credit Facility contains covenants that require the Company to maintain certain financial ratios. At December 31, 2004, the Company was required to maintain a maximum leverage ratio (average debt to EBITDA, as defined) of 5.5:1, which decreases periodically to 4.75:1 by December 2007. The Company must also maintain a minimum coverage ratio (EBITDA to interest charges, as defined) of 2.75:1. As of December 31, 2004, the Company's leverage and interest coverage ratios were 4.0:1 and 3.7:1, respectively.\n\nMaturities of the Company's long-term debt as of December 31, 2004 are as follows:\n\nAmounts due in 2005 that were refinanced through available capacity under the Company's Senior Credit Facility have been excluded from current liabilities in the accompanying consolidated balance sheet.\n\nThe estimated fair value of the Company's long-term debt at December 31, 2004 was approximately $5.9 billion, versus its book value of $5.5 billion. At December 31, 2003, the estimated fair value of the Company's long-term debt was approximately $6.0 billion, versus its book value of $5.6 billion. The estimated fair value of the Company's public debt securities was based on quoted market prices on or about December 31, 2004 and 2003. The estimated fair value of the Company's outstanding credit facility borrowings was assumed to approximate book value due to the short-term nature of the borrowings.\n\n## NOTE 9 - INCOME TAXES\n\nThe Company accounts for income taxes in accordance with Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 109, 'Accounting for Income Taxes' ('SFAS 109'). SFAS 109 requires the recognition of deferred income tax assets, net of applicable reserves, related to net operating loss carryforwards and certain temporary differences. The standard requires recognition of a future tax benefit to the extent that realization of such benefit is more likely than not. Otherwise, a valuation allowance is applied.\n\nThe income tax provision attributable to continuing operations and discontinued operations is as follows:", + "recall": 0.9666666666666667, + "true_md": "Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements 58\n\nally guarantee the Senior Credit Facility, senior notes, senior debentures, and senior subordinated notes. MGM Grand Detroit, LLC is a guarantor under the Senior Credit Facility, but only to the extent that the proceeds of borrowings under such facilities are made available to MGM Grand Detroit, LLC. Substantially all of the Company’s assets, other than assets of foreign subsidiaries and certain assets in use at MGM Grand Detroit, were pledged as collateral for the Company’s senior notes, excluding subordinated notes, and the Company’s bank credit facilities at December 31, 2004. See Note 18 for additional information.\n\nThe Company’s long-term debt obligations contain certain customary covenants. The Company’s Senior Credit Facility contains covenants that require the Company to maintain certain financial ratios. At December 31, 2004, the Company was required to maintain a maximum leverage ratio (average debt to EBITDA, as defined) of 5.5:1, which decreases periodically to 4.75:1 by December 2007. The Company must also maintain a minimum coverage ratio (EBITDA to interest charges, as defined) of 2.75:1. As of December 31, 2004, the Company’s leverage and interest coverage ratios were 4.0:1 and 3.7:1, respectively.\n\nMaturities of the Company’s long-term debt as of December 31, 2004 are as follows:\n\nAmounts due in 2005 that were refinanced through available capacity under the Company’s Senior Credit Facility have been excluded from current liabilities in the accompanying consolidated balance sheet.\n\nThe estimated fair value of the Company’s long-term debt at December 31, 2004 was approximately $5.9 billion, versus its book value of $5.5 billion. At December 31, 2003, the estimated fair value of the Company’s long-term debt was approxi- mately $6.0 billion, versus its book value of $5.6 billion. The estimated fair value of the Company’s public debt securities was based on quoted market prices on or about December 31, 2004 and 2003. The estimated fair value of the Company’s outstanding credit facility borrowings was assumed to approximate book value due to the short-term nature of the borrowings.\n\nThe Company accounts for income taxes in accordance with Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 109, “Accounting for Income Taxes” (“SFAS 109”). SFAS 109 requires the recognition of deferred income tax assets, net of applicable reserves, related to net operating loss carryforwards and certain temporary differences. The standard requires recognition of a future tax benefit to the extent that realization of such benefit is more likely than not. Otherwise, a valuation allowance is applied.\n\nThe income tax provision attributable to continuing operations and discontinued operations is as follows:\n\n## NOTE 9 — INCOME TAXES" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8914715479950368, + "doc_id": "a24c0dc875fcd9cdb2ebb8d34ffe287617a649983ef58b45ff652bf9038d6c33", + "edit_distance": 0.17027027027027028, + "f1_score": 0.9487870619946092, + "meteor": 0.9136659310315137, + "precision": 0.9411764705882353, + "pred_md": "2 8\n\n## EU R O N E T SE RV I C E S IN C. A N D SU B S I D I A R I E S\n\n## Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows\n\nSee accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.\n\n## NO T E S T O TH E CO N S O L I D AT E D FI N A N C IA L STAT E M E N T S FO R TH E YE A R S EN D E D DE C E M B R E 31, 2000, 1999 A N D 1 9 9 8\n\n## ( 1 ) O r t ganiza ion\n\nE u ronet Services Inc. was established as a Delaware corporation on December 13, 1997 and capitalized on March 6, 1998. Euronet Serv i c e s Inc. succeeded Euronet Holding N.V . as the group holding company.\n\nE u ronet Services Inc. and its subsidiaries (the 'Company' or 'Euronet') is a provider of electronic financial solutions and transaction p rocessing services to banks, financial institutions, and other companies. Euronet operates an automated teller machine ('ATM') network in E u rope and the U.S., which serves banks and retail companies by accepting most international bankcards and pro p r i e t a ry cards issued by member banks. Some of the ATMs also perf o rm certain deposit, sales or advertising functions. Euronet also provides ATM network management outsourcing services to banks or companies with their own networks. Euronet sells integrated software solutions for electro n i c payment and financial transaction delivery systems worldwide. Its software comprises a suite of products including a core system, Integrated Transaction Management ('ITM'), and compatible modular software for ATM and POS network processing, electronic funds transfer i faces, electronic funds transfer switch control, credit/debit card management and processing, and corporate cash management and nter personal financial management access products.", + "recall": 0.9565217391304348, + "true_md": "Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows\n\n## EU R O N E T SE RV I C E S IN C. A N D SU B S I D I A R I E S\n\nSee accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.\n\n## ( 1 ) O r g a n i z a t i o n\n\n## NO T E S T O TH E CO N S O L I D AT E D FI N A N C I A L STAT E M E N T S FO R TH E YE A R S EN D E D DE C E M B E R 31, 2000, 1999 A N D 1 9 9 8\n\nE u ronet Services Inc. was established as a Delaware corporation on December 13, 1997 and capitalized on March 6, 1998. Euronet Serv i c e s Inc. succeeded Euronet Holding N.V. as the group holding company. \n\nE u ronet Services Inc. and its subsidiaries (the “Company” or “Euronet”) is a provider of electronic financial solutions and transaction p rocessing services to banks, financial institutions, and other companies. Euronet operates an automated teller machine (“ATM”) network in E u rope and the U.S., which serves banks and retail companies by accepting most international bankcards and pro p r i e t a ry cards issued by member banks. Some of the ATMs also perf o rm certain deposit, sales or advertising functions. Euronet also provides ATM network management outsourcing services to banks or companies with their own networks. Euronet sells integrated software solutions for electro n i c payment and financial transaction delivery systems worldwide. Its software comprises a suite of products including a core system, Integrated Transaction Management (“ITM”), and compatible modular software for ATM and POS network processing, electronic funds transfer i n t e rfaces, electronic funds transfer switch control, credit/debit card management and processing, and corporate cash management and personal financial management access products. \n\n2 8" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9329479927050789, + "doc_id": "530be44e18bc532ab95412cabb1908087ff2a032ad466309a82299fcd7af4e94", + "edit_distance": 0.7112970711297071, + "f1_score": 0.9808612440191388, + "meteor": 0.7715065379236745, + "precision": 0.9903381642512077, + "pred_md": "Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations\n\n## LIQUIDITY AND CAPITAL RESOURCES\n\n## Cash Flows - Summary\n\n## Our cash flows consisted of the following:\n\n## Cash Flows - Operating Activities\n\nTrends in our operating cash flows tend to follow trends in our operating income, excluding non-cash charges, since our business is primarily cash-based. Cash flow from operations in 2004 increased from 2003 due to higher operating income offset by higher tax payments. Cash flow from operations in 2003 decreased from 2002, resulting from the decrease in operating income and higher cash paid for taxes.\n\nAt December 31, 2004 and 2003, we held cash and cash equivalents of $435 million and $280 million, respectively. We require a certain amount of cash on hand to\n\noperate our resorts. Beyond our cash on hand, we utilize a company-wide cash management system to minimize the amount of cash held in banks. Funds are swept from accounts at our resorts daily into central bank accounts, and excess funds are invested overnight or are used to repay borrowings under our bank credit facilities. Included in cash and cash equivalents at December 31, 2004 is $141 million received from the sale of MGM Grand Australia and still held in Australia, pending clarification of the tax rule for repatriated earnings, as discussed earlier.\n\n## Cash Flows - Investing Activities\n\nThe sale of the Golden Nugget Subsidiaries closed in January 2004 with net proceeds to the Company of $210 million. The sale of MGM Grand Australia closed in July 2004 with net proceeds to the Company of $136 million.\n\nCapital expenditures in 2004 increased over 2003 due to continued spending on major projects at several of our resorts, including:\n\n- · The Bellagio expansion completed in December 2004;\n- · The theatre for KÀ at MGM Grand Las Vegas, completed in November 2004.\n\nSpending on these two projects totaled approximately $325 million. Other capital expenditures were made for maintenance capital activities, including room remodel projects at New York-New York and MGM Grand Las Vegas and new restaurant and entertainment amenities at several resorts. Capital expenditures in 2003 were significantly higher than 2002, due largely to major projects at our existing resorts, including projects described above which began in 2003, the Zumanity theatre at New York-New York, the Bellagio room remodel and slot technology improvements. Capital expenditures in 2002 included general property improvements at our resorts, such as a room remodel project at The Mirage, new restaurant and nightclub development at several of our resorts, and various other remodeling projects.\n\n27", + "recall": 0.9715639810426541, + "true_md": "27\n\nManagement’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations\n\noperate our resorts. Beyond our cash on hand, we utilize a company-wide cash management system to minimize the amount of cash held in banks. Funds are swept from accounts at our resorts daily into central bank accounts, and excess funds are invested overnight or are used to repay borrowings under our bank credit facilities. Included in cash and cash equivalents at December 31, 2004 is $141 mil- lion received from the sale of MGM Grand Australia and still held in Australia, pending clarification of the tax rule for repatriated earnings, as discussed earlier.\n\nThe sale of the Golden Nugget Subsidiaries closed in January 2004 with net proceeds to the Company of $210 million. The sale of MGM Grand Australia closed in July 2004 with net proceeds to the Company of $136 million.\n\nCapital expenditures in 2004 increased over 2003 due to continued spending on major projects at several of our resorts, including:\n\nSpending on these two projects totaled approximately $325 million. Other capital expenditures were made for maintenance capital activities, including room remodel projects at New York-New York and MGM Grand Las Vegas and new restaurant and entertainment amenities at several resorts. Capital expenditures in 2003 were significantly higher than 2002, due largely to major projects at our existing resorts, including projects described above which began in 2003, the Zumanity theatre at New York-New York, the Bellagio room remodel and slot technology improvements. Capital expenditures in 2002 included general property improvements at our resorts, such as a room remodel project at The Mirage, new restaurant and nightclub development at several of our resorts, and various other remodeling projects. \n\nAt December 31, 2004 and 2003, we held cash and cash equivalents of $435 mil- lion and $280 million, respectively. We require a certain amount of cash on hand to\n\nTrends in our operating cash flows tend to follow trends in our operating income, excluding non-cash charges, since our business is primarily cash-based. Cash flow from operations in 2004 increased from 2003 due to higher operating income offset by higher tax payments. Cash flow from operations in 2003 decreased from 2002, resulting from the decrease in operating income and higher cash paid for taxes. \n\nOur cash flows consisted of the following:\n\n## Cash Flows – Summary\n\n## LIQUIDITY AND CAPITAL RESOURCES\n\n## Cash Flows – Investing Activities\n\n## Cash Flows – Operating Activities\n\n- • The Bellagio expansion completed in December 2004;\n\n- • The theatre for KÀ at MGM Grand Las Vegas, completed in November 2004." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7883476453874045, + "doc_id": "f828627e92cc823974f9c4205727e6d401f25dfd1ab259590b29966a4250a1ec", + "edit_distance": 0.3514328808446455, + "f1_score": 0.9863387978142075, + "meteor": 0.6696118888598106, + "precision": 0.989041095890411, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\nNissan Motor Co., Ltd. and Consolidated Subsidiaries Fiscal year 2004 (Year ended March 31, 2005)\n\n## 1. SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES\n\n## (a) Basis of Presentation\n\nNissan Motor Co., Ltd. (the 'Company') and its domestic subsidiaries maintain their books of account in conformity with the financial accounting standards of Japan, and its foreign subsidiaries maintain their books of account in conformity with those of their countries of domicile.\n\nThe accompanying consolidated financial statements have been prepared in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in Japan, which are different in certain respects as to the application and disclosure requirements of International Financial Reporting Standards, and have been compiled from the consolidated financial statements prepared by the Company as required by the Securities and Exchange Law of Japan.\n\nCertain amounts in the prior years' financial statements have been reclassified to conform to the current year's presentation.\n\n## (b) Principles of consolidation and accounting for investments in unconsolidated subsidiaries and affiliates\n\nThe accompanying consolidated financial statements include the accounts of the Company and any significant companies controlled directly or indirectly by the Company. Companies over which the Company exercises significant influence in terms of their operating and financial policies have been included in the consolidated financial statements on an equity basis. All significant intercompany balances and transactions have been eliminated in consolidation.\n\nThe financial statements of the Company's subsidiaries in certain foreign countries including Mexico have been prepared based on general price-level accounting. The related revaluation adjustments made to reflect the effect of inflation in those countries in the accompanying consolidated financial statements have been charged or credited to operations and are directly reflected in retained earnings.\n\nInvestments in subsidiaries and affiliates which are not consolidated or accounted for by the equity method are carried at cost or less. Where there has been a permanent decline in the value of such investments, the Company has written down the investments.\n\nDifferences between the cost and the underlying net equity at fair value of investments in consolidated subsidiaries and in companies which are accounted for by the equity method have been amortized by the straight-line method over periods not exceeding 20 years.\n\n## (c) Foreign currency translation\n\nThe balance sheet accounts of the foreign consolidated subsidiaries are translated into yen at the rates of exchange in effect at the balance sheet date, except for the components of shareholders' equity which are translated at their historical exchange rates. Revenue and expense accounts are translated at the average rate of exchange in effect during the year. Translation adjustments are presented as a component of shareholders' equity and minority interests in its consolidated financial statements.\n\n## (d) Cash equivalents\n\nAll highly liquid investments with maturity of three months or less when purchased are considered cash equivalents.\n\n## (e) Inventories\n\nInventories are stated principally at the lower of cost or market, cost being determined principally by the first-in, first-out method. See Note 2 (a).\n\n## (f) Short-term investments and investment securities\n\nSecurities other than equity securities issued by subsidiaries and affiliates are classified into three categories: trading, held-to-maturity or other securities. Trading securities are carried at fair value and held-to-maturity securities are carried at amortized cost. Marketable securities classified as other securities are carried at fair value with changes in unrealized holding gain or loss, net of the applicable income taxes, included directly in shareholders' equity. Nonmarketable securities classified as other securities are carried at cost. Cost of securities sold is determined by the moving average method.\n\n## (g) Property, plant and equipment and depreciation\n\nDepreciation of property, plant and equipment of the Company and its consolidated subsidiaries is calculated principally by the straight-line method based on the estimated useful lives and the residual value determined by the Company. Significant renewals and additions are capitalized at cost. Maintenance and repairs are charged to income.\n\n## (h) Leases\n\nNoncancellable lease transactions that transfer substantially all risks and rewards associated with the ownership of assets are accounted for as finance leases. All other lease transactions are accounted for as operating leases and relating payments are charged to income as incurred. See Note 2(c).\n\n## (i) Retirement benefits\n\nAccrued retirement benefits for employees have been provided mainly at an amount calculated based on the retirement benefit obligation and the fair value of the pension plan assets as of balance sheet date, as adjusted for unrecognized net retirement benefit obligation at transition, unrecognized actuarial gain or loss, and unrecognized prior service cost. The retirement benefit obligation is attributed to each period by the straight-line method over the estimated years of service of the eligible employees. The net retirement benefit obligation at transition is being amortized principally over a period of 15 years by the straight-line method.\n\nActuarial gain or loss is amortized in the year following the year in which the gain or loss is recognized primarily by the straight-line method over periods (principally 8 years through 18 years) which are shorter than the average remaining years of service of the employees. Certain foreign consolidated subsidiaries have adopted the corridor approach for the amortization of actuarial gain and loss.\n\nPrior service cost is being amortized as incurred by the straight-line method over periods (principally 9 years through 15 years) which are shorter than the average remaining years of service of the employees.\n\nSee Note 9 for the method of accounting for the separation of the substitutional portion of the benefit obligation from the corporate portion of the benefit obligation under Welfare Pension Fund Plan.\n\nSee Note 2(b) for adoption of a new accounting standard by a consolidated subsidiary in the United Kingdom.\n\n## (j) Income taxes\n\nDeferred tax assets and liabilities have been recognized in the consolidated financial statements with respect to the differences between financial reporting and the tax bases of the assets and liabilities, and were measured using the enacted tax rates and laws which will be in effect when the differences are expected to reverse.\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\n77\n\nFINANCIAL SECTION", + "recall": 0.9836512261580381, + "true_md": "NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## 1. SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES\n\n## (a) Basis of Presentation\n\n## (f) Short-term investments and investment securities\n\n## (g) Property, plant and equipment and depreciation\n\n## (b) Principles of consolidation and accounting for investments in unconsolidated subsidiaries and affiliates\n\n## (h) Leases\n\n## (i) Retirement benefits\n\n## (c) Foreign currency translation\n\n## (d) Cash equivalents\n\n## (e) Inventories\n\n## (j) Income taxes\n\nNissan Motor Co., Ltd. (the “Company”) and its domestic subsidiaries maintain their books of account in conformity with the financial accounting standards of Japan, and its foreign subsidiaries maintain their books of account in conformity with those of their countries of domicile. The accompanying consolidated financial statements have been\n\ndomicile. The accompanying consolidated financial statements have been prepared in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in Japan, which are different in certain respects as to the application and disclosure requirements of International Financial Reporting Standards, and have been compiled from the consolidated financial statements prepared by the Company as required by the Securities and Exchange Law of Japan. Certain amounts in the prior years’ financial statements have been\n\nSecurities and Exchange Law of Japan. Certain amounts in the prior years’ financial statements have been reclassified to conform to the current year’s presentation.\n\nThe accompanying consolidated financial statements include the accounts of the Company and any significant companies controlled directly or indirectly by the Company. Companies over which the Company exercises significant influence in terms of their operating and financial policies have been included in the consolidated financial statements on an equity basis. All significant intercompany balances and transactions have been eliminated in consolidation. The financial statements of the Company’s subsidiaries in certain\n\nand transactions have been eliminated in consolidation. The financial statements of the Company’s subsidiaries in certain foreign countries including Mexico have been prepared based on general price-level accounting. The related revaluation adjustments made to reflect the effect of inflation in those countries in the accompanying consolidated financial statements have been charged or credited to operations and are directly reflected in retained earnings. Investments in subsidiaries and affiliates which are not\n\nearnings. Investments in subsidiaries and affiliates which are not consolidated or accounted for by the equity method are carried at cost or less. Where there has been a permanent decline in the value of such investments, the Company has written down the investments. Differences between the cost and the underlying net equity at fair\n\nof such investments, the Company has written down the investments. Differences between the cost and the underlying net equity at fair value of investments in consolidated subsidiaries and in companies which are accounted for by the equity method have been amortized by the straight-line method over periods not exceeding 20 years.\n\nThe balance sheet accounts of the foreign consolidated subsidiaries are translated into yen at the rates of exchange in effect at the balance sheet date, except for the components of shareholders’ equity which are translated at their historical exchange rates. Revenue and expense accounts are translated at the average rate of\n\nequity which are translated at their historical exchange rates. Revenue and expense accounts are translated at the average rate of exchange in effect during the year. Translation adjustments are presented as a component of shareholders’ equity and minority interests in its consolidated financial statements.\n\nAll highly liquid investments with maturity of three months or less when purchased are considered cash equivalents.\n\nInventories are stated principally at the lower of cost or market, cost being determined principally by the first-in, first-out method. See Note 2 (a).\n\nDeferred tax assets and liabilities have been recognized in the consolidated financial statements with respect to the differences between financial reporting and the tax bases of the assets and liabilities, and were measured using the enacted tax rates and laws which will be in effect when the differences are expected to reverse.\n\nmarketable securities classified as other securities are carried at cost. Cost of securities sold is determined by the moving average method.\n\nSecurities other than equity securities issued by subsidiaries and affiliates are classified into three categories: trading, held-to-maturity or other securities. Trading securities are carried at fair value and held-to-maturity securities are carried at amortized cost. Marketable securities classified as other securities are carried at fair value with changes in unrealized holding gain or loss, net of the applicable income taxes, included directly in shareholders’ equity. Non- marketable securities classified as other securities are carried at cost. Cost of securities sold is determined by the moving average method.\n\nDepreciation of property, plant and equipment of the Company and its consolidated subsidiaries is calculated principally by the straight-line method based on the estimated useful lives and the residual value determined by the Company. Significant renewals and additions are capitalized at cost. Maintenance and repairs are charged to income.\n\nNoncancellable lease transactions that transfer substantially all risks and rewards associated with the ownership of assets are accounted for as finance leases. All other lease transactions are accounted for as operating leases and relating payments are charged to income as incurred. See Note 2(c).\n\nAccrued retirement benefits for employees have been provided mainly at an amount calculated based on the retirement benefit obligation and the fair value of the pension plan assets as of balance sheet date, as adjusted for unrecognized net retirement benefit obligation at transition, unrecognized actuarial gain or loss, and unrecognized prior service cost. The retirement benefit obligation is attributed to each period by the straight-line method over the estimated years of service of the eligible employees. The net retirement benefit obligation at transition is being amortized principally over a period of 15 years by the straight-line method. Actuarial gain or loss is amortized in the year following the year in\n\nprincipally over a period of 15 years by the straight-line method. Actuarial gain or loss is amortized in the year following the year in which the gain or loss is recognized primarily by the straight-line method over periods (principally 8 years through 18 years) which are shorter than the average remaining years of service of the employees. Certain foreign consolidated subsidiaries have adopted the corridor approach for the amortization of actuarial gain and loss. Prior service cost is being amortized as incurred by the straight-line\n\nthe corridor approach for the amortization of actuarial gain and loss. Prior service cost is being amortized as incurred by the straight-line method over periods (principally 9 years through 15 years) which are shorter than the average remaining years of service of the employees. See Note 9 for the method of accounting for the separation of the\n\nemployees. See Note 9 for the method of accounting for the separation of the substitutional portion of the benefit obligation from the corporate portion of the benefit obligation under Welfare Pension Fund Plan. See Note 2(b) for adoption of a new accounting standard by a\n\nportion of the benefit obligation under Welfare Pension Fund Plan. See Note 2(b) for adoption of a new accounting standard by a consolidated subsidiary in the United Kingdom.\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 77\n\nFINANCIAL SECTION\n\nNissan Motor Co., Ltd. and Consolidated Subsidiaries Fiscal year 2004 (Year ended March 31, 2005)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "f88706f7bd081fcf5652908157c68d5748ccec941ee615c9c47dc741be49520b", + "edit_distance": 0.3514328808446455, + "f1_score": 0.9863387978142075, + "meteor": 0.6696118888598106, + "precision": 0.989041095890411, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.9836512261580381, + "true_md": "## MGMi@ MIRAGE" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9446539899693778, + "doc_id": "a02bff77e6ffccb74f6440eb443a38a9e0f0cea4957b395b50aad260a924910d", + "edit_distance": 0.836405529953917, + "f1_score": 0.9777227722772278, + "meteor": 0.8358128906544531, + "precision": 0.9825870646766169, + "pred_md": "18\n\nCapturing and Delivering Growth\n\n## COMMISSIONING AND DELIVERING GROWTH PROJECTS\n\nThe diversification of Santos is evident in the creation of a number of new higher margin producing assets such as the Bayu-Undan liquids project offshore northern Australia, the Casino gas field offshore southern Australia, and the Mutineer-Exeter oil and John Brookes gas fields offshore Western Australia.\n\nOutside Australia, Santos has also built a core business in Indonesia through new field developments such as Oyong and Maleo. Santos is further reinforcing its capabilities to implement high value offshore development projects through an improved drilling capability (including deepwater and high pressure reservoirs) and functional leadership in the areas of reservoir and production engineering.\n\n## BAYU-UNDAN AND MINERVA COMMISSIONED\n\nThere has been considerable progress on all of these projects during 2004 with two projects being commissioned: Bayu-Undan liquids and Minerva gas.\n\nBayu-Undan started liquids production in April 2004 and was ramped up during the year to meet an increased design throughput of 1.1 billion cubic feet per day of raw gas. This resulted in liquids production of more than 100,000 barrels per day. This excellent performance generated production for the year of 19 million barrels - 22% above expectations.\n\nThe liquids project involves extracting and processing wet gas to remove condensate, propane and butane (liquids) before reinjecting dry gas back into the\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\nreservoir for later use as part of the future LNG stage of the project.\n\nThe liquids are loaded onto a Floating Storage and Offloading facility. Santos has a 10.6% interest and is the only Australian-owned company involved in the project, which was recently rated as one of the top 100 projects to change the world by Goldman Sachs JBWere.\n\nThe other project that commenced production during the year was the Minerva gas field in the Otway Basin offshore Victoria which started up in December.\n\nWhile Santos' share of production is only 10%, the project has greater significance for Santos because it has enabled the commencement of direct-tocustomer marketing through Santos Direct.\n\n## MUTINEER-EXETER COMMISSIONING\n\nAnother important project for Santos is the Mutineer-Exeter oil fields development.\n\nDespite disappointments regarding the size of reserves during development and appraisal drilling, the construction and connection of the fields proceeded at a rapid pace with the project 89% complete by year end.\n\nThe conversion of the state-ofthe-art Floating Production Storage and Offloading facility was completed at the Jurong shipyard in Singapore in December 2004 with no lost time safety incidents despite a massive workforce completing over two million work hours.\n\nNamed the MODEC Venture 11, the vessel left Singapore in early 2005 to take up anchorage in the Carnarvon Basin off the Western Australian coast. First oil production from Mutineer-Exeter is starting about three months ahead of schedule.\n\nFour high-tech horizontal wells have been drilled and completed, which are expected to provide initial peak plateau oil production of 70,000 to 90,000 barrels per day. The wells are fitted with dual electric submersible pumps and are supported further by seabed flow boost pumps to maintain high well rates throughout field life.\n\nSantos, with the assistance of external experts and other members of the joint venture, assessed the risk of reserve uncertainty against the incremental value to be created by a fast-track development and decided to proceed with the development, which was designed to provide substantial flexibility to cope with a wide range of production rate and reserve outcomes.\n\nThe project will come on stream earlier than expected, delivering strong cash flow in this high oil price environment. Coupled with this, the project will cost at least 10% less than budget.\n\n## CASINO AND JOHN BROOKES SANCTIONED\n\nWhile two projects came into production, Santos added two more to the development conveyor with the sanctioning of the Casino and John Brookes gas projects during the year.\n\nCasino was formally sanctioned in October and was 25% complete\n\n'2004 was the year that we really got the conveyor belt moving in terms of development projects. In 2005 we'll hand over to Operations our first offshore operated project, Mutineer-Exeter, ahead of schedule and under budget, and we'll continue to progress several other new offshore developments, targeted to be on stream during 2005-06. '\n\n## PAUL MOORE\n\nVice President Development Projects\n\nand Technical Services\n\nby the end of the year. This is a significant achievement considering the field was only discovered in late 2002.\n\nThe $200 million development commenced following the granting of the necessary Board approvals as well as the finalisation of a larger Gas Sales Agreement with TXU. Gas production is expected to start in the first quarter of 2006.\n\nAll formal environmental approvals have now been granted for the project by the Commonwealth Government. The use of existing onshore facilities and a low environmental impact design have been integral to", + "recall": 0.9729064039408867, + "true_md": "Capturing and Delivering Growth\n\n## COMMISSIONING AND DELIVERING GROWTH PROJECTS\n\nThe diversification of Santos is evident in the creation of a number of new higher margin producing assets such as the Bayu-Undan liquids project offshore northern Australia, the Casino gas field offshore southern Australia, and the Mutineer-Exeter oil and John Brookes gas fields offshore Western Australia.\n\nreservoir for later use as part of the future LNG stage of the project. \n\nThe liquids are loaded onto a Floating Storage and Offloading facility. Santos has a 10.6% interest and is the only Australian-owned company involved in the project, which was recently rated as one of the top 100 projects to change the world by Goldman Sachs JBWere.\n\nNamed the MODEC Venture 11, the vessel left Singapore in early 2005 to take up anchorage in the Carnarvon Basin off the Western Australian coast. First oil production from Mutineer-Exeter is starting about three months ahead of schedule.\n\nOutside Australia, Santos has also built a core business in Indonesia through new field developments such as Oyong and Maleo. Santos is further reinforcing its capabilities to implement high value offshore development projects through an improved drilling capability (including deepwater and high pressure reservoirs) and functional leadership in the areas of reservoir and production engineering.\n\nThe other project that commenced production during the year was the Minerva gas field in the Otway Basin offshore Victoria which started up in December.\n\nFour high-tech horizontal wells have been drilled and completed, which are expected to provide initial peak plateau oil production of 70,000 to 90,000 barrels per day. The wells are fitted with dual electric submersible pumps and are supported further by seabed flow boost pumps to maintain high well rates throughout field life.\n\n‘2004 was the year that we really got the conveyor belt moving in terms of development projects. In 2005 we’ll hand over to Operations our first offshore operated project, Mutineer-Exeter, ahead of schedule and under budget, and we’ll continue to progress several other new offshore developments, targeted to be on stream during 2005-06.’\n\nSantos, with the assistance of external experts and other members of the joint venture, assessed the risk of reserve uncertainty against the incremental value to be created by a fast-track development and decided to proceed with the development, which was designed to provide substantial flexibility to cope with a wide range of production rate and reserve outcomes. \n\nWhile Santos' share of production is only 10%, the project has greater significance for Santos because it has enabled the commencement of direct-to- customer marketing through Santos Direct.\n\nThere has been considerable progress on all of these projects during 2004 with two projects being commissioned: Bayu-Undan liquids and Minerva gas.\n\nVice President Development Projects and Technical Services\n\nAnother important project for Santos is the Mutineer-Exeter oil fields development.\n\nDespite disappointments regarding the size of reserves during development and appraisal drilling, the construction and connection of the fields proceeded at a rapid pace with the project 89% complete by year end.\n\nBayu-Undan started liquids production in April 2004 and was ramped up during the year to meet an increased design throughput of 1.1 billion cubic feet per day of raw gas. This resulted in liquids production of more than 100,000 barrels per day. This excellent performance generated production for the year of 19 million barrels – 22% above expectations.\n\nThe project will come on stream earlier than expected, delivering strong cash flow in this high oil price environment. Coupled with this, the project will cost at least 10% less than budget.\n\nby the end of the year. This is a significant achievement considering the field was only discovered in late 2002.\n\nThe $200 million development commenced following the granting of the necessary Board approvals as well as the finalisation of a larger Gas Sales Agreement with TXU. Gas production is expected to start in the first quarter of 2006.\n\nAll formal environmental approvals have now been granted for the project by the Commonwealth Government. The use of existing onshore facilities and a low environmental impact design have been integral to\n\nWhile two projects came into production, Santos added two more to the development conveyor with the sanctioning of the Casino and John Brookes gas projects during the year.\n\nCasino was formally sanctioned in October and was 25% complete\n\nThe conversion of the state-of- the-art Floating Production Storage and Offloading facility was completed at the Jurong shipyard in Singapore in December 2004 with no lost time safety incidents despite a massive workforce completing over two million work hours. \n\nThe liquids project involves extracting and processing wet gas to remove condensate, propane and butane (liquids) before re- injecting dry gas back into the\n\n## PAUL MOORE\n\n## MUTINEER-EXETER COMMISSIONING\n\n## BAYU-UNDAN AND MINERVA COMMISSIONED\n\n## CASINO AND JOHN BROOKES SANCTIONED\n\nAnnual Report 2004 18" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9187746757406096, + "doc_id": "41138b610fcc7c4f1c5713ce8fdd0b67029f91975be5778f9b1486737134d954", + "edit_distance": 0.1016949152542373, + "f1_score": 0.9655172413793103, + "meteor": 0.9677011105937782, + "precision": 0.9767441860465116, + "pred_md": "Sales and operating profits for each of the company's business segments and reconciliation to earnings before income taxes are set forth below. The company is an integrated enterprise, characterized by substantial intersegment cooperation, cost allocations, and sharing of assets. Therefore, we do not represent that these segments, if operated independently, would report the operating profit and other financial information shown below.\n\n46\n\nHormel Foods Corporation\n\n## > note L\n\n## Quarterly Results of Operations (Unaudited)\n\nThe following tabulations reflect the unaudited quarterly results of operations for the years ended October 30, 2004, and October 25, 2003:", + "recall": 0.9545454545454546, + "true_md": "Sales and operating profits for each of the company’s business segments and reconciliation to earnings before income taxes are set forth below. The company is an integrated enterprise, charac- terized by substantial intersegment cooperation, cost allocations, and sharing of assets. Therefore, we do not represent that these segments, if operated independently, would report the operating profit and other financial information shown below.\n\n## > note L\n\n## Quarterly Results of Operations (Unaudited)\n\nThe following tabulations reflect the unaudited quarterly results of operations for the years ended October 30, 2004, and October 25, 2003:\n\n46\n\nHormel Foods Corporation" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9173886385275914, + "doc_id": "8f4991ce918be79051d3cfb343afb0af2cdfeb1aa2c5f8ae6495a3d4adeaae22", + "edit_distance": 0.1342372881355932, + "f1_score": 0.9759999999999999, + "meteor": 0.952301627151102, + "precision": 0.9663366336633663, + "pred_md": "2 2\n\nS FAS 140 The FASB issued Statement of Financial Accounting Standard No. 140, Accounting for Transfers and Servicing of Financial Assets and Extinguishments of Liabilities (SFAS No. 140). SFAS No. 140 replaces SFAS No. 125 as it revises the standards for accounting for securitizations and other transfers of financial assets and collateral and re q u i res certain disclosures. SFAS No. 140 is effective for transfers and s e vicing of financial assets and extinguishments of liabilities occurring after March 31, 2001 and in certain limited instances can be applied early. r S FAS No. 140 re q u i res recognition and reclassification of collateral and for disclosures relating to securitzation and collateral for fiscal years ending after December 15, 2000.The Company does not expect SFAS No. 140 to have a material effect on its financial statements.\n\nForward-Looking Statements This document contains statements that constitute forw a rd-looking statements within the meaning of section 27A of the Securities Act and section 21E of the U.S. Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended. All statements other than statements of historical facts included in this document, including, without limitation, statements re g a rding (i) the Company's business plans and financing plans and re q ements, (ii) trends affecting the Company's business plans and financing plans and re q u i rements, (ii) trends affecting the Company's uir business, (v) the adequacy of capital to meet the Company's capital re q u i rements and expansion plans, (vi) the assumptions underlying the C o m p a s business plans, (vii) business strategy, (viii) government re g u l a t o ry action, (ix) technological advances and (x) projected costs and ny' revenues, are forw a rd-looking statements. Although the Company believes that the expectations reflected in such forw a rd- looking statements are reasonable, it can give no assurance that such expectations will prove to be correct. Forw a rd-looking statements are typically identified by the w o rds believe, expect, anticipated, intend, estimate and similar expressions.\n\nInvestors are cautioned that any such forw a rd looking statements are not guarantees of future perf o rmance and involve risks and uncert a i n t i e s . Actual results may materially differ from those in the forw a rd-looking statements as a result of various factors, including: technological and business developments in the local card and electronic banking markets affecting the transaction and other fees which the Company is able to c h ge for its services; foreign exchange fluctuations; competition from bank owned ATM networks, outsource providers of ATM services and ar s o ftw a re providers; the Company's relationships with its major customers, sponsor banks in various markets and International Card Org a n i z a t i o n ; and changes in laws and regulations affecting the Company's business. These risks, and other risks are described elsewhere in this document and the Company's periodic filings with the Securities and Exchange Commission.\n\n## QU A N T I AT I T V E A N D QU A L I AT I T V E DI S C LO S U R S E AB O U T MA R K E T RI S K\n\n## Foreign Exchange Exposure\n\nIn 2000, 30% of the Company's revenues were generated in Poland and Hungary, as compared to 27% in 1999 and 73% in 1998. The 2000 f i g u e has increased due to the increase in revenues for the Polish operations. In Hungary the majority of revenues received are denominated in r Hungarian Forint and in Poland, the majority of revenues are denominated in Polish Zloty. However the majority of these foreign curre n c y denominated contracts are linked either to inflation or the retail price index. While it remains the case that a significant portion of the Company's e x p e d es are made in or are denominated in U.S. Dollars the Company is also striving to achieve more of its expenses in local currencies to n itur match its revenues.\n\nThe Company estimates that a further 10% depreciation in foreign exchange rates of the Deutsche Mark, Hungarian Forint, Polish Zloty and the British Pound Sterling against the U.S. dollar, would have the combined effect of a $7.1 million decrease in the re p o rted net loss. This was estimated using 10% of the Company's net losses after adjusting for unusual impairment and other items including U.S. dollar denominated or indexed expenses. The Company believes that this quantitative measure has inherent limitations. It does not take into account any govern m e n t a l actions or changes in either customer purchasing patterns or the Company's financing or operating strategies.\n\nAs a result of continued European economic convergence, including the increased influence of the Deutsche Mark, as opposed to the U.S. Dollar, on the Central European currencies, the Company expects that the currencies of the markets where it invests will fluctuate less against the Deutsche Mark than against the Dollar. Accord i n g l y, the Company believes that its Deutsche Mark denominated debt provides, in the medium to long term, for a closer matching of assets and liabilities than would Dollar denominated debt.\n\n## Inflation and Functional Currencies\n\nIn recent years, Hungary, Poland and the Czech Republic have experienced high levels of inflation. Consequently, these countries' currencies have continued to decline in value against the major currencies of the OECD over this time period. However, due to the significant reduction in the inflation rate of these countries in recent years, none of these countries are considered to have a hyper- i n f l a t i o n a ry economy . Furt h e r, the majority of all three subsidiaries' revenues are denominated in the local curre n c y. Thus all three subsidiaries use their local currency as the functional c u re . The Polish and Czech subsidiaries changed their functional currency to the respective local currency as of January 1, 1998 and January r ncy 1, 1999, re s p e , and the Hungarian subsidiary changed as of July 1, 1999. ctively\n\nG e m a n , France and the United Kingdom have experienced relatively low and stable inflation rates in recent years. There f o re, the local curre n c y r y in each of these markets is the functional curre n c y. Although Croatia, like Germany and France, has maintained relatively stable inflation and exchange rates, the functional currency of the Croatian company is the U.S. dollar due to the significant level of U.S. dollar denominated re v e n u e s and expenses. Due to the factors mentioned above, the Company does not believe that inflation will have a significant effect on results of operations or financial condition. The Company continually reviews inflation and the functional currency in each of the countries that it operates in.\n\n## Interest Rate Risk\n\nThe fair market value of the Company's long-term fixed interest rate debt is subject to interest rate risk. Generally, the fair market value of fixed i est rate debt will increase as interest rates fall and decrease as interest rates rise. The estimated fair value of the Company's notes payable at nter December 31, 2000 was $37.5 million compared to a carrying value of $77.2 million. A 1% increase from prevailing interest rates at December 31, 2000 would result in a decrease in fair value of notes payable by approximately $1.5 million. Fair values were determined from quoted market prices and from investment bankers considering credit ratings and the remaining term to maturity. (See Note 20 to the Consolidated Financial Statements - Financial Instruments)", + "recall": 0.9858585858585859, + "true_md": "S FAS 140 The FASB issued Statement of Financial Accounting Standard No. 140, Accounting for Transfers and Servicing of Financial Assets and Extinguishments of Liabilities (SFAS No. 140). SFAS No. 140 replaces SFAS No. 125 as it revises the standards for accounting for securitizations and other transfers of financial assets and collateral and re q u i res certain disclosures. SFAS No. 140 is effective for transfers and s e rvicing of financial assets and extinguishments of liabilities occurring after March 31, 2001 and in certain limited instances can be applied early. S FAS No. 140 re q u i res recognition and reclassification of collateral and for disclosures relating to securitzation and collateral for fiscal years ending after December 15, 2000.The Company does not expect SFAS No. 140 to have a material effect on its financial statements.\n\nForward-Looking Statements This document contains statements that constitute forw a rd-looking statements within the meaning of section 27A of the Securities Act and section 21E of the U.S. Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended. All statements other than statements of historical facts included in this document, including, without limitation, statements re g a rding (i) the Company’s business plans and financing plans and re q u i rements, (ii) trends affecting the Company’s business plans and financing plans and re q u i rements, (ii) trends affecting the Company’s business, (v) the adequacy of capital to meet the Company’s capital re q u i rements and expansion plans, (vi) the assumptions underlying the C o m p a n y ’s business plans, (vii) business strategy, (viii) government re g u l a t o ry action, (ix) technological advances and (x) projected costs and revenues, are forw a rd-looking statements. Although the Company believes that the expectations reflected in such forw a rd- looking statements are reasonable, it can give no assurance that such expectations will prove to be correct. Forw a rd-looking statements are typically identified by the w o rds believe, expect, anticipated, intend, estimate and similar expressions. \n\nInvestors are cautioned that any such forw a rd looking statements are not guarantees of future perf o rmance and involve risks and uncert a i n t i e s . Actual results may materially differ from those in the forw a rd-looking statements as a result of various factors, including: technological and business developments in the local card and electronic banking markets affecting the transaction and other fees which the Company is able to c h a rge for its services; foreign exchange fluctuations; competition from bank owned ATM networks, outsource providers of ATM services and s o f t w a re providers; the Company’s relationships with its major customers, sponsor banks in various markets and International Card Org a n i z a t i o n ; and changes in laws and regulations affecting the Company’s business. These risks, and other risks are described elsewhere in this document and the Company’s periodic filings with the Securities and Exchange Commission. \n\nIn 2000, 30% of the Company’s revenues were generated in Poland and Hungary, as compared to 27% in 1999 and 73% in 1998. The 2000 f i g u re has increased due to the increase in revenues for the Polish operations. In Hungary the majority of revenues received are denominated in Hungarian Forint and in Poland, the majority of revenues are denominated in Polish Zloty. However the majority of these foreign curre n c y denominated contracts are linked either to inflation or the retail price index. While it remains the case that a significant portion of the Company’s e x p e n d i t u res are made in or are denominated in U.S. Dollars the Company is also striving to achieve more of its expenses in local currencies to match its revenues. \n\nThe Company estimates that a further 10% depreciation in foreign exchange rates of the Deutsche Mark, Hungarian Forint, Polish Zloty and the British Pound Sterling against the U.S. dollar, would have the combined effect of a $7.1 million decrease in the re p o rted net loss. This was estimated using 10% of the Company’s net losses after adjusting for unusual impairment and other items including U.S. dollar denominated or indexed expenses. The Company believes that this quantitative measure has inherent limitations. It does not take into account any govern m e n t a l actions or changes in either customer purchasing patterns or the Company’s financing or operating strategies. \n\nAs a result of continued European economic convergence, including the increased influence of the Deutsche Mark, as opposed to the U.S. Dollar, on the Central European currencies, the Company expects that the currencies of the markets where it invests will fluctuate less against the Deutsche Mark than against the Dollar. Accord i n g l y, the Company believes that its Deutsche Mark denominated debt provides, in the medium to long term, for a closer matching of assets and liabilities than would Dollar denominated debt. \n\nIn recent years, Hungary, Poland and the Czech Republic have experienced high levels of inflation. Consequently, these countries’ currencies have continued to decline in value against the major currencies of the OECD over this time period. However, due to the significant reduction in the inflation rate of these countries in recent years, none of these countries are considered to have a hyper- i n f l a t i o n a ry economy. Furt h e r, the majority of all three subsidiaries’ revenues are denominated in the local curre n c y. Thus all three subsidiaries use their local currency as the functional c u rre n c y. The Polish and Czech subsidiaries changed their functional currency to the respective local currency as of January 1, 1998 and January 1, 1999, re s p e c t i v e l y, and the Hungarian subsidiary changed as of July 1, 1999. \n\nG e rm a n y, France and the United Kingdom have experienced relatively low and stable inflation rates in recent years. There f o re, the local curre n c y in each of these markets is the functional curre n c y. Although Croatia, like Germany and France, has maintained relatively stable inflation and exchange rates, the functional currency of the Croatian company is the U.S. dollar due to the significant level of U.S. dollar denominated re v e n u e s and expenses. Due to the factors mentioned above, the Company does not believe that inflation will have a significant effect on results of operations or financial condition. The Company continually reviews inflation and the functional currency in each of the countries that it operates in.\n\nThe fair market value of the Company's long-term fixed interest rate debt is subject to interest rate risk. Generally, the fair market value of fixed i n t e rest rate debt will increase as interest rates fall and decrease as interest rates rise. The estimated fair value of the Company's notes payable at December 31, 2000 was $37.5 million compared to a carrying value of $77.2 million. A 1% increase from prevailing interest rates at December 31, 2000 would result in a decrease in fair value of notes payable by approximately $1.5 million. Fair values were determined from quoted market prices and from investment bankers considering credit ratings and the remaining term to maturity. (See Note 20 to the Consolidated Financial Statements - Financial Instruments) \n\n2 2\n\n## Interest Rate Risk\n\n## Inflation and Functional Currencies\n\n## QU A N T I TAT I V E A N D QU A L I TAT I V E DI S C L O S U R E S AB O U T MA R K E T RI S K\n\n## Foreign Exchange Exposure" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "7f9e956dd703002d985379c906169d427d76dd043a720808aca3460ce4f19770", + "edit_distance": 0.625, + "f1_score": 0.5454545454545455, + "meteor": 0.8412698412698413, + "precision": 0.375, + "pred_md": "Nissan Annual Report 2004\n\n23\n\nWHO WE ARE", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "WHO WE ARE" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "40867dc4d2532a29d781d00575b710bc0d9a63104022787dfbab9ceb10e82e47", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.5, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "3", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "3" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9207400128389481, + "doc_id": "ef7c9686cd36fc057d4fd1b97bd5ee04c17a66a6eebcd0df8d67f727b19b1bcc", + "edit_distance": 0.6051948051948052, + "f1_score": 0.9661835748792269, + "meteor": 0.8226575941070416, + "precision": 0.9615384615384616, + "pred_md": "36\n\n## Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations\n\n## ACCOUNTING PRINCIPLES ADOPTED IN 2004\n\n## Taxation on Foreign Earnings\n\nIn December 2004, the staff of the Financial Accounting Standards Board ('FASB') issued FASB Staff Position 109-2, 'Accounting and Disclosure Guidance for the Foreign Repatriation Provision within the American Jobs Creation Act of 2004' ('FSP 109-2'). FSP 109-2 allows us additional time beyond the financial reporting period in which the Act was enacted to evaluate the effects of the Act on our plans for repatriation of unremitted earnings. Under SFAS 109, we did not historically record a provision for U.S. Federal or State income taxes on undistributed earnings of foreign subsidiaries because such earnings were considered to be indefinitely reinvested in the operations of foreign subsidiaries. Upon the sale of MGM Grand Australia, we did provide deferred taxes of $11 million on the basis that the proceeds would be repatriated without the benefit of the 85 percent one-time deduction provided by the Act. The Act may allow a special one-time deduction of 85 percent of certain repatriated foreign earnings; however, additional clarifying language is necessary to ensure we qualify for the deduction. The potential benefit to us of the repatriation provisions of the Act is $7 million.\n\n## Discontinued operations\n\nIn November 2004, the Emerging Issues Task Force ('EITF') of the FASB reached a consensus on Issue No. 03-13, 'Applying the Conditions in Paragraph 42 of FASB Statement No. 144, Accounting for the Impairment or Disposal of Long-Lived Assets , in Determining Whether to Report Discontinued Operations,' ('EITF 03-13'). EITF 03-13 requires us to analyze whether the cash flows of a disposed component have been eliminated from our ongoing operations and whether we retain a continuing involvement in the operations of the disposed component. If significant migration of customers occurs to our other operations, we would be precluded from classifying a sold or disposed operation as a 'discontinued' operation. EITF 03-13 is effective for components disposed of or classified as held for sale in periods beginning after\n\nDecember 15, 2004, with optional application to components disposed of or classified as held for sale within that fiscal year. We did not apply EITF 03-13 to our sale of MGM Grand Australia, but if we had applied EITF 03-13 we still would have classified MGM Grand Australia as a discontinued operations.\n\n## RECENTLY ISSUED ACCOUNTING STANDARDS\n\n## Stock-based Compensation\n\nIn December 2004, the FASB issued FASB Statement No. 123 (revised 2004), 'Share-Based Payment' ('SFAS 123(R)'). Under the original standard, SFAS No. 123, 'Accounting for Stock-Based Compensation' ('SFAS 123'), companies had the option of recording stock options issued to employees at fair value or intrinsic value, which generally leads to no expense being recorded. Most companies, including us, opted to use this intrinsic value method and make required disclosures of fair value expense. SFAS 123(R) eliminates this intrinsic value alternative. SFAS 123(R) is effective for us on July 1, 2005, at which time all future share-based payments must be recorded at fair value. T ransition methods are discussed below.\n\nWe must make certain changes in the manner of valuation of options and must make certain decisions which will affect the amount and timing of expense recognition, as discussed below.\n\nChoice of valuation model. Under SFAS 123, stock options were generally valued using the Black-Scholes model. SFAS 123(R) does not specify which model must be used, but requires that certain assumptions be included in the chosen model. Essentially, we have a choice of continuing to apply the Black-Scholes model or applying a binomial (lattice) model. The key difference is that a binomial model can better account for sub-optimal exercises; that is, exercises before the contractual expiration of the option. A binominal model is more complex to apply, and generally results in a lower value than a comparable valuation using the Black-Scholes model. We have not yet determined which model we will apply.", + "recall": 0.970873786407767, + "true_md": "Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations\n\n36\n\n## ACCOUNTING PRINCIPLES ADOPTED IN 2004\n\n## Taxation on Foreign Earnings\n\n## RECENTLY ISSUED ACCOUNTING STANDARDS\n\n## Stock-based Compensation\n\nDecember 15, 2004, with optional application to components disposed of or classi- fied as held for sale within that fiscal year. We did not apply EITF 03-13 to our sale of MGM Grand Australia, but if we had applied EITF 03-13 we still would have classified MGM Grand Australia as a discontinued operations.\n\nIn December 2004, the staff of the Financial Accounting Standards Board (“FASB”) issued FASB Staff Position 109-2, “Accounting and Disclosure Guidance for the Foreign Repatriation Provision within the American Jobs Creation Act of 2004” (“FSP 109-2”). FSP 109-2 allows us additional time beyond the financial reporting period in which the Act was enacted to evaluate the effects of the Act on our plans for repatriation of unremitted earnings. Under SFAS 109, we did not historically record a provision for U.S. Federal or State income taxes on undistributed earnings of foreign subsidiaries because such earnings were considered to be indefinitely reinvested in the operations of foreign subsidiaries. Upon the sale of MGM Grand Australia, we did provide deferred taxes of $11 million on the basis that the proceeds would be repatriated without the benefit of the 85 percent one-time deduction provided by the Act. The Act may allow a special one-time deduction of 85 percent of certain repatriated foreign earnings; however, additional clarifying language is necessary to ensure we qualify for the deduction. The potential benefit to us of the repatriation provisions of the Act is $7 million. \n\nIn December 2004, the FASB issued FASB Statement No. 123 (revised 2004), “Share-Based Payment” (“SFAS 123(R)”). Under the original standard, SFAS No. 123, “Accounting for Stock-Based Compensation” (“SFAS 123”), companies had the option of recording stock options issued to employees at fair value or intrinsic value, which generally leads to no expense being recorded. Most companies, including us, opted to use this intrinsic value method and make required disclosures of fair value expense. SFAS 123(R) eliminates this intrinsic value alternative. SFAS 123(R) is effective for us on July 1, 2005, at which time all future share-based payments must be recorded at fair value. Transition methods are discussed below.\n\nWe must make certain changes in the manner of valuation of options and must make certain decisions which will affect the amount and timing of expense recognition, as discussed below.\n\nChoice of valuation model. Under SFAS 123, stock options were generally valued using the Black-Scholes model. SFAS 123(R) does not specify which model must be used, but requires that certain assumptions be included in the chosen model. Essentially, we have a choice of continuing to apply the Black-Scholes model or applying a binomial (lattice) model. The key difference is that a binomial model can better account for sub-optimal exercises; that is, exercises before the contractual expiration of the option. A binominal model is more complex to apply, and generally results in a lower value than a comparable valuation using the Black-Scholes model. We have not yet determined which model we will apply.\n\nIn November 2004, the Emerging Issues Task Force (“EITF”) of the FASB reached a consensus on Issue No. 03-13, “Applying the Conditions in Paragraph 42 of FASB Statement No. 144, Accounting for the Impairment or Disposal of Long-Lived Assets , in Determining Whether to Report Discontinued Operations,” (“EITF 03-13”). EITF 03-13 requires us to analyze whether the cash flows of a disposed component have been eliminated from our ongoing operations and whether we retain a continuing involvement in the operations of the disposed component. If significant migration of customers occurs to our other operations, we would be precluded from classifying a sold or disposed operation as a “discontinued” operation. EITF 03-13 is effective for components disposed of or classified as held for sale in periods beginning after\n\n## Discontinued operations" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8370462943350969, + "doc_id": "9ba33abf2b191600c03dd39fe52cea8c02e8f2ae1692a8d9a2f4e9eb745fddbf", + "edit_distance": 0.7142857142857143, + "f1_score": 0.9183673469387754, + "meteor": 0.8152302569040275, + "precision": 0.9473684210526315, + "pred_md": "- /H17074 B usiness Technology Solutions Manager Mike Conery and Automation Trainer Brenda Fischer, left, help agents such as Bonnie Piazza, commercial select accounts manager at Webster Insurance in Hartford, Conn., integrate The Hartford's technological\n\ntools into their sales strategies. BTSMs work out of 14 regional offices throughout the country, advising agents on the best way to use tools such as the Electronic Business Center and InterComm On the Net (ICON), a Web-based automated quoting system.\n\n## the\n\n- /H17075 K wadwo Dankyi-Ampadu, service representative, personal lines, takes customer phone calls in The Hartford's Southington, Conn., customer call center. It's one of three AARP call centers throughout the United States.", + "recall": 0.8910891089108911, + "true_md": "- GLYPH<H17074> B usiness Technology Solutions Manager Mike Conery and Automation Trainer Brenda Fischer, left, help agents such as Bonnie Piazza, commercial select accounts manager at Webster Insurance in Hartford, Conn., inte- grate The Hartford’s technological\n\n- GLYPH<H17075> K wadwo Dankyi-Ampadu, service representative, personal lines, takes customer phone calls in The Hartford’s Southington, Conn., customer call center. It’s one of three AARP call centers throughout the United States.\n\ntools into their sales strategies. BTSMs work out of 14 regional offices throughout the country, advising agents on the best way to use tools such as the Electronic Business Center and InterComm On the Net (ICON), a Web-based automated quoting system." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.840435017870011, + "doc_id": "c2a048688018922f1ba837bc6beebcca0f6c16f351e11e0ddf9dc3397d08dd60", + "edit_distance": 0.10526315789473684, + "f1_score": 0.9714285714285715, + "meteor": 0.9875673935784983, + "precision": 0.9444444444444444, + "pred_md": "42\n\n## Consolidated Balance Sheets\n\nThe accompanying notes are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements.", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "42\n\nConsolidated Balance Sheets\n\nThe accompanying notes are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "1e400744967942751a403a83936f3318745b430011cc8fb260e025ccfa50aaf8", + "edit_distance": 0.10526315789473684, + "f1_score": 0.9714285714285715, + "meteor": 0.9875673935784983, + "precision": 0.9444444444444444, + "pred_md": "## the\n\nway.", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9223162728834396, + "doc_id": "f721722da7080d92ffd7a87a2199726c96cda1be927949fc1246597cc37e5451", + "edit_distance": 0.3497584541062802, + "f1_score": 0.9807407407407408, + "meteor": 0.8736349043745296, + "precision": 0.9821958456973294, + "pred_md": "30\n\nof, non-executive, independent Directors, except for the Environmental and Safety Committee, which includes the CEO as a member.\n\nThe Board Guidelines prescribe that the Board is to meet at least eight times a year, including a strategy meeting of two days duration. The number of meetings of the Board and of each of its Committees and the names of attendees at those meetings are set out on page 47 of this Annual Report. Board Meetings are structured in two separate sessions, without management present for one of those sessions. The agenda for meetings is prepared by the Company Secretary in conjunction with the Chairman and CEO, with periodic input from the Board. Comprehensive Board papers are distributed to Directors in advance of scheduled meetings. Board meetings take place both at the Company's head office and at key operating sites, to assist the Board in its understanding of operational issues.\n\nExecutive management attend Board and Committee meetings, at which they report to Directors within their respective areas of responsibility. This assists the Board in maintaining its understanding of the Company's business and assessing the executive management team. Where appropriate, advisors to the Company attend meetings of the Board and of its Committees.\n\n## 2.3 Composition of the Board\n\nThe composition of the Board is determined in accordance with the Company's Constitution and the Board Guidelines which, among other things, require that:\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\n- · the Board is to comprise a minimum of five and a maximum of ten Directors (exclusive of the CEO);\n- · the Board should comprise a substantial majority of independent, non-executive Directors;\n- · there should be a separation of the roles of Chairman and Chief Executive Officer of the Company; and\n- · the Chairman of the Board should be an independent, non-executive Director.\n\nUnder the Company's Constitution approximately onethird of Directors retire by rotation each year and Directors appointed during the year are required to submit themselves for election by shareholders at the Company's next Annual General Meeting. The Board Guidelines encourage Directors to retire at the first Annual General Meeting after reaching the age of 72 years and not seek reappointment.\n\nCurrently, the Board comprises eight non-executive Directors and one executive Director. The Board has adopted the definition set out in the ASX Best Practice Recommendations and as defined in the 2002 guidelines of the Investment and Financial Services Association Limited and considers all current nonexecutive Directors, including the Chairman, to be independent directors.\n\nGenerally, the Board considers a Director to be independent if he or she is not a member of management and is free of any business or other relationship that could materially interfere with, or could reasonably be\n\nperceived to materially interfere with, the Director's ability to act in the best interests of the Company. The Board will assess the materiality of any given relationship that may affect independence on a case by case basis and has adopted materiality guidelines to assist in that assessment. Under these guidelines, the following interests are regarded as material in the absence of any mitigating factors:\n\n- · a holding of 5% or more of the Company's voting shares or a direct association with an entity that holds more than 5% of the Company's voting shares;\n- · an affiliation with an entity which accounts for 5% or more or the revenue or expense of the Company.\n\nThe Board has determined that there should not be any arbitrary length of tenure that should be considered to materially interfere with a Director's ability to act in the best interests of the Company, as it believes this assessment must be made on a case by case basis with reference to the length of service of all members of the Board.\n\nEach Director's independence is assessed by the Board on an individual basis, with reference to the above materiality guidelines and focussing on an assessment of each Director's capacity to bring independence of judgment to Board decisions. In this context, as mentioned below, Directors are required to promptly disclose their interests in contracts and other directorships and offices held.\n\nThe names and details of the experience, qualifications, special\n\nresponsibilities, and term of office of each Director of the Company are set out on page 41 of this Annual Report. Details of each Director's attendance at Board and Committee Meetings and their shareholdings are also set out on page 47 of this Annual Report.\n\n## 2.4 Nomination Committee\n\nThe role, responsibilities and membership requirements of the Nomination Committee are documented in the Board Guidelines and in a separate Charter, approved by the Board.\n\nUnder the Board Guidelines, it is the responsibility of the Nomination Committee to devise the criteria for, and review membership of, and nominations to, the Board. The primary criteria adopted in selection of suitable Board candidates is their capacity to contribute to the ongoing development of the Company having regard to the location and nature of the Company's significant business interests and to the candidates' age and experience by reference to the attributes of existing Board members.\n\nWhen a Board vacancy exists or where it is considered that the Board would benefit from the services of a new Director with particular skills, the Nomination Committee has responsibility for proposing candidates for consideration by the Board and, where appropriate, engages the services of external consultants.\n\nPrior to appointment, each Director is provided with a letter of appointment which encloses a copy of the Company's Constitution and of the relevant policies. Additionally, the expectations of the Board in", + "recall": 0.9792899408284024, + "true_md": "of, non-executive, independent Directors, except for the Environmental and Safety Committee, which includes the CEO as a member. \n\nThe Board Guidelines prescribe that the Board is to meet at least eight times a year, including a strategy meeting of two days duration. The number of meetings of the Board and of each of its Committees and the names of attendees at those meetings are set out on page 47 of this Annual Report. Board Meetings are structured in two separate sessions, without management present for one of those sessions. The agenda for meetings is prepared by the Company Secretary in conjunction with the Chairman and CEO, with periodic input from the Board. Comprehensive Board papers are distributed to Directors in advance of scheduled meetings. Board meetings take place both at the Company’s head office and at key operating sites, to assist the Board in its understanding of operational issues.\n\nExecutive management attend Board and Committee meetings, at which they report to Directors within their respective areas of responsibility. This assists the Board in maintaining its understanding of the Company’s business and assessing the executive management team. Where appropriate, advisors to the Company attend meetings of the Board and of its Committees.\n\nThe composition of the Board is determined in accordance with the Company’s Constitution and the Board Guidelines which, among other things, require that: \n\nGenerally, the Board considers a Director to be independent if he or she is not a member of management and is free of any business or other relationship that could materially interfere with, or could reasonably be\n\nUnder the Company’s Constitution approximately one- third of Directors retire by rotation each year and Directors appointed during the year are required to submit themselves for election by shareholders at the Company’s next Annual General Meeting. The Board Guidelines encourage Directors to retire at the first Annual General Meeting after reaching the age of 72 years and not seek re- appointment.\n\nCurrently, the Board comprises eight non-executive Directors and one executive Director. The Board has adopted the definition set out in the ASX Best Practice Recommendations and as defined in the 2002 guidelines of the Investment and Financial Services Association Limited and considers all current non- executive Directors, including the Chairman, to be independent directors.\n\nperceived to materially interfere with, the Director’s ability to act in the best interests of the Company. The Board will assess the materiality of any given relationship that may affect independence on a case by case basis and has adopted materiality guidelines to assist in that assessment. Under these guidelines, the following interests are regarded as material in the absence of any mitigating factors:\n\nThe Board has determined that there should not be any arbitrary length of tenure that should be considered to materially interfere with a Director’s ability to act in the best interests of the Company, as it believes this assessment must be made on a case by case basis with reference to the length of service of all members of the Board.\n\nEach Director’s independence is assessed by the Board on an individual basis, with reference to the above materiality guidelines and focussing on an assessment of each Director’s capacity to bring independence of judgment to Board decisions.\n\nIn this context, as mentioned below, Directors are required to promptly disclose their interests in contracts and other directorships and offices held.\n\nThe names and details of the experience, qualifications, special\n\nresponsibilities, and term of office of each Director of the Company are set out on page 41 of this Annual Report. Details of each Director’s attendance at Board and Committee Meetings and their shareholdings are also set out on page 47 of this Annual Report.\n\nThe role, responsibilities and membership requirements of the Nomination Committee are documented in the Board Guidelines and in a separate Charter, approved by the Board. \n\nUnder the Board Guidelines, it is the responsibility of the Nomination Committee to devise the criteria for, and review membership of, and nominations to, the Board. The primary criteria adopted in selection of suitable Board candidates is their capacity to contribute to the ongoing development of the Company having regard to the location and nature of the Company’s significant business interests and to the candidates’ age and experience by reference to the attributes of existing Board members.\n\nWhen a Board vacancy exists or where it is considered that the Board would benefit from the services of a new Director with particular skills, the Nomination Committee has responsibility for proposing candidates for consideration by the Board and, where appropriate, engages the services of external consultants.\n\nPrior to appointment, each Director is provided with a letter of appointment which encloses a copy of the Company’s Constitution and of the relevant policies. Additionally, the expectations of the Board in\n\n## 2.3 Composition of the Board\n\n- • the Board is to comprise a minimum of five and a maximum of ten Directors (exclusive of the CEO); \n\n- • the Board should comprise a substantial majority of independent, non-executive Directors;\n\n- • there should be a separation of the roles of Chairman and Chief Executive Officer of the Company; and \n\n- • the Chairman of the Board should be an independent, non-executive Director. \n\n- • a holding of 5% or more of the Company’s voting shares or a direct association with an entity that holds more than 5% of the Company’s voting shares;\n\n- • an affiliation with an entity which accounts for 5% or more or the revenue or expense of the Company.\n\n## 2.4 Nomination Committee\n\n30\n\nAnnual Report 2004" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9575625916966701, + "doc_id": "021b1b41ad3b775bfd7828bdecec1ca00196c16e57fd4fa1e1e1fa4b69190145", + "edit_distance": 0.47377938517179025, + "f1_score": 0.9740932642487046, + "meteor": 0.9472662505945165, + "precision": 0.9657534246575342, + "pred_md": "## OPERATIONS REVIEW\n\nTrading for the period commencing 1 July 1999 to 30 June 2000 for Mermaid Marine Australia Ltd ('Company') and its controlled entities, experienced a 43% turnover reduction from last year. The result was almost entirely due to a heavy fall in oil prices, which reached their low of US$10 in February 1999, leading to the lowest level of offshore activity for many years. In September 1999 Mermaid exercised its option to acquire the utility vessel 'Mermaid Achiever' for $3,250,000. Previously the Achiever operated under a bare boat charter.\n\nIn February 2000 Mermaid received approval in principle from the Western Australian Minister for the Environment for the development of a supply and engineering base at Dampier (Dampier Base). Since that time a detailed environmental management system has been produced for final approval and as a guide to daily environmental management and compliance. Refinements to the design have proceeded, together with the preparation of bid packages and negotiations with Banks for project finance.\n\nSubsequent to years end, the subscription of a further $5 million from Mr Mark Bradley and Clough Engineering will see an extremely robust balance sheet, with cash on hand approaching $10 million. As construction commences at Dampier, a level of project finance will be arranged providing a comfortable mix of debt and equity and allowing the retention of a significant cash balance.\n\nThe year saw considerable progress with Base activities at Dampier, Broome and Darwin. They are dealt with in detail under following headings.\n\nF I N A N C I A L\n\nMermaid recorded an after-tax loss for the Period of $207,957. Compared with an after-tax profit for the previous period of $2,454,919. Revenue for the Period was $15,124,774, a decrease of 43% over the previous period. Fixed cost reductions enabled the Company to ride out the market reversal with a minimal loss and positive operating cash before capex of $1.6m. This result, achieved against a major drop in turnover, was possible through a vigorous attack on overheads, which included more beneficial ownership costs, insurance savings, management salary savings, including voluntary sacrifice from certain senior executives in recognition of the tighter conditions. In all the changes contributed approximately $1.5million to the bottom line.\n\nBare boat charters, although useful for the busy times encountered in 1998 exposed the Company to a high level of fixed costs. The vessels were valuable earners and the transfer of the Mermaid Achiever, Mermaid Eagle and Mermaid Reunion to Company ownership has proved to be the right decision for all market conditions. Although there have been no contracts yet let for work of any significance by producers on the North West Shelf, underlying day to day activity has returned. Expressions of interest for major project work have been issued and as an indication of better trading conditions, an unaudited profit of $496,721 has been recorded for the two months to 31st August 2000. The trend has continued in September.\n\n7\n\n## OVERVIEW", + "recall": 0.9825783972125436, + "true_md": "## OPERATIONS REVIEW\n\nTrading for the period commencing 1 July 1999 to 30 June 2000 for Mermaid Marine Australia Ltd (“Company”) and its controlled entities, experienced a 43% turnover reduction from last year. The result was almost entirely due to a heavy fall in oil prices, which reached their low of US$10 in February 1999, leading to the lowest level of offshore activity for many years. In September 1999 Mermaid exercised its option to acquire the utility vessel “Mermaid Achiever” for $3,250,000. Previously the Achiever operated under a bare boat charter. OVER\n\n## OVER VIEW\n\nIn February 2000 Mermaid received approval in principle from the Western Australian Minister for the Environment for the development of a supply and engineering base at Dampier (Dampier Base). Since that time a detailed environmental management system has been produced for final approval and as a guide to daily environmental management and compliance. Refinements to the design have proceeded, together with the preparation of bid packages and negotiations with Banks for project finance.\n\nSubsequent to years end, the subscription of a further $5 million from Mr Mark Bradley and Clough Engineering will see an extremely robust balance sheet, with cash on hand approaching $10 million. As construction commences at Dampier, a level of project finance will be arranged providing a comfortable mix of debt and equity and allowing the retention of a significant cash balance.\n\nThe year saw considerable progress with Base activities at Dampier, Broome and Darwin. They are dealt with in detail under following headings.\n\nBare boat charters, although useful for the busy times encountered in 1998 exposed the Company to a high level of fixed costs. The vessels were valuable earners and the transfer of the Mermaid Achiever, Mermaid Eagle and Mermaid Reunion to Company ownership has proved to be the right decision for all market conditions. Although there have been no contracts yet let for work of any significance by producers on the North West Shelf, underlying day to day activity has returned. Expressions of interest for major project work have been issued and as an indication of better trading conditions, an unaudited profit of $496,721 has been recorded for the two months to 31st August 2000. The trend has continued in September.\n\nprofit for the previous period of $2,454,919. Revenue for the Period was $15,124,774, a decrease of 43% over the previous period. Fixed cost reductions enabled the Company to ride out the market reversal with a minimal loss and positive operating cash before capex of $1.6m. This result, achieved against a major drop in turnover, was possible through a vigorous attack on overheads, which included more beneficial ownership costs, insurance savings, management salary savings, including voluntary sacrifice from certain senior executives in recognition of the tighter conditions. In all the changes contributed approximately $1.5million to the bottom line. \n\nMermaid recorded an after-tax loss for the Period of $207,957. Compared with an after-tax\n\n## FINANCIAL\n\n7" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9800970140996219, + "doc_id": "57755c2a4038e7bdde8d46f6c78fc7dc0625841d46fdf72188d60e5e08e5f32a", + "edit_distance": 0.019801980198019802, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9979833567015873, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## EU R O N E T SE RV I C E S IN C. A N D SU B S I D I A R I E S\n\n## Consolidated Statements of Operations and Comprehensive Loss\n\nSee accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.\n\n## SYDNEY HARBOUR BRIDGE, Sydney\n\nSince its opening in March 1932, the Sydney Harbour Bridge has held a special place for immigrants upon their arrival to Australia. This grand arch remains a distinctive landmark for what many consider to be the most beautiful harbour in the world.\n\n2 5", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "EU R O N E T SE RV I C E S IN C. A N D SU B S I D I A R I E S\n\n## Consolidated Statements of Operations and Comprehensive Loss\n\nSee accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.\n\n## SYDNEY HARBOUR BRIDGE, Sydney\n\nSince its opening in March 1932, the Sydney Harbour Bridge has held a special place for immigrants upon their arrival to Australia. This grand arch remains a distinctive landmark for what many consider to be the most beautiful harbour in the world.\n\n2 5" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6303234987540091, + "doc_id": "1abd27f8819b33b0104b145be9eb311a1a8526c4846f5b89b6931a300c9d56b9", + "edit_distance": 0.70625, + "f1_score": 0.9532710280373832, + "meteor": 0.7882824637868004, + "precision": 0.9532710280373832, + "pred_md": "Rand V. Araskog Retired Chairman and Chief Executive, ITT Corporation\n\nRand V. Araskog Retired Chairman and Chief Executive, ITT Corporation\n\n3-chair, 4, 5\n\nEdward J. Kelly III President and Chief Executive Officer, Mercantile Bankshares Corp. 1, 3, 4\n\nEdward J. Kelly III President and Chief Executive Officer, Mercantile Bankshares Corp. 1, 3, 4\n\nCharles B. Strauss President and Chief Executive Officer, Unilever United States, Inc.\n\nCharles B. Strauss President and Chief Executive Officer, Unilever United States, Inc.\n\n1, 3, 4\n\n- 1 Audit Committee\n- 2 Compensation and Personnel Committee\n- 3 Finance Committee\n- 4 Legal and Public Affairs Committee\n- 5 Nominating Committee\n\nH. Patrick Swygert President, Howard University\n\n2, 4-chair, 5\n\nGordon I. Ulmer Retired Chairman and Chief Executive Officer, the former Connecticut Bank and Trust Company\n\n2-chair, 3, 5\n\nPaul G. Kirk, Jr. Of Counsel to Sullivan & Worcester, law firm\n\n1, 2, 5-chair\n\nThomas M. Marra Executive Vice President, The Hartford; President and Chief Operating Officer, Life Operations\n\nRobert W. Selander President and Chief Executive Officer, MasterCard International\n\n1-chair, 2, 4\n\nDavid K. Zwiener Executive Vice President, The Hartford; President and Chief Operating Officer, Property & Casualty Operations\n\nDavid K. Zwiener Executive Vice President, The Hartford; President and Chief Operating Officer, Property & Casualty Operations\n\n29\n\nRamani Ayer Chairman, President and Chief Executive Officer, The Hartford\n\nRamani Ayer Chairman, President and Chief Executive Officer, The Hartford\n\nDina Dublon Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer, JP Morgan Chase & Co.\n\n1, 2, 3\n\nDonald R. Frahm Retired Chairman, President and Chief Executive Officer, The Hartford\n\n1, 3, 5", + "recall": 0.9532710280373832, + "true_md": "Rand V. Araskog Retired Chairman and Chief Executive, ITT Corporation \n\nRamani Ayer Chairman, President and Chief Executive Officer, The Hartford\n\nDina Dublon Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer, JP Morgan Chase & Co. \n\nDonald R. Frahm Retired Chairman, President and Chief Executive Officer, The Hartford\n\nRobert W. Selander President and Chief Executive Officer, MasterCard International\n\nThomas M. Marra Executive Vice President, The Hartford; President and Chief Operating Officer, Life Operations\n\nPaul G. Kirk, Jr. Of Counsel to Sullivan & Worcester, law firm\n\nEdward J. Kelly III President and Chief Executive Officer, Mercantile Bankshares Corp. 1, 3, 4\n\nCharles B. Strauss President and Chief Executive Officer, Unilever United States, Inc.\n\nH. Patrick Swygert President, Howard University\n\nGordon I. Ulmer Retired Chairman and Chief Executive Officer, the former Connecticut Bank and Trust Company\n\nDavid K. Zwiener Executive Vice President, The Hartford; President and Chief Operating Officer, Property & Casualty Operations\n\n1, 3, 5\n\n1, 2, 3\n\n1, 2, 5–chair\n\n1–chair, 2, 4\n\n3–chair, 4, 5\n\n1, 3, 4\n\n2, 4–chair, 5\n\n2–chair, 3, 5\n\n29\n\n- 1 Audit Committee \n\n- 2 Compensation and Personnel Committee\n\n- 3 Finance Committee\n\n- 4 Legal and Public Affairs Committee\n\n- 5 Nominating Committee" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "c90d298ac9493e3804baf1b62c9321cdabf388c29eb504c5ad12106b3cdf530b", + "edit_distance": 0.796423658872077, + "f1_score": 0.23287671232876708, + "meteor": 0.1674300378773027, + "precision": 0.15315315315315314, + "pred_md": "{\n\n-glyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman> glyph<c=31,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman> glyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>‡-glyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>\n\n\"ÕÀʵÕ>ˆÌÞÊ>˜'ÊVÕÃ̜“iÀÊvœVÕÃʈÃÊiۈ'i˜Ìʈ˜ÊiÛiÀÞ̅ˆ˜}Ê ÜiÊ'iÈ}˜]ʓ>˜Õv>VÌÕÀi]ÊÌiÃÌÊ>˜'Ê'iˆÛiÀ°Êglyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium>̽ÃÊ̅ˆÃÊi“«…>ÈÃÊ œ˜ÊµÕ>ˆÌÞ]ʈ˜˜œÛ>̈ÛiÊÌiV…˜œœ}ÞÊ>˜'ÊVœ“«iÌiÊi˜'‡Ìœ‡i˜'Ê “>˜Õv>VÌÕÀˆ˜}Ê܏Ṏœ˜ÃÊ̅>ÌÊ'ÀˆÛiÃʜÕÀÊLÕȘiÃÃÊ>˜'Ê «ÀœÛˆ'iÃʜÕÀÊVÕÃ̜“iÀÃÊ܈̅ÊÈ}˜ˆvˆV>˜ÌÊVœ“«ï̈ÛiÊ Ê 'Û>˜Ì>}iÃʈ˜Ê̅iÊ}œL>Ê“>ÀŽiÌ«>Vi° >\n\nglyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium> ˜ÊÌ œ'>Þ½ ÃÊVœ“«ï̈Ûiʓ>ÀŽiÌÃ]Ê̅iÊ'i“>˜'ÊvœÀʅˆ}…ÞÊ ivvˆVˆi˜ÌÊ>˜'Êvi݈Liʜ«iÀ>̈œ˜ÃʈÃÊ>Ê«ÀiÀiµÕˆÃˆÌi°Êglyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium>ÃÊ \"glyph<c=13,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium>glyph<c=31,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium>ÃÊ}Àœ Ü ]Ê->˜“ˆ˜>‡-glyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium>glyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium>½ ÃÊÊ VÕÃ̜“iÀ‡vœVÕÃi'ÊLÕȘiÃÃÊ “œ'iÊˆÃʈ˜Ê>Ê«œÃˆÌˆœ˜Ê̜ʫÀœÛˆ'iʏi>'ˆ˜}ÊÌiV…˜œœ}ÞÊ Vœ“«>˜ˆiÃÊ܈̅ÊÀi뜘ÈÛi]ÊVÕÃ̜“ˆâi'Ê>˜'Êvi݈LiÊ “>˜Õv>VÌÕÀˆ˜}Ê܏Ṏœ˜ÃÊ>VÀœÃÃÊ>ÊÛ>ÀˆiÌÞʜvÊÊ i˜'ʓ>ÀŽiÌÃÊ qÊ>˜Þ܅iÀiʈ˜Ê̅iÊܜÀ'°Ê", + "recall": 0.4857142857142857, + "true_md": "\" Õ À Ê µ Õ >  ˆ Ì Þ Ê > ˜ ` Ê V Õ Ã Ì œ “ i À Ê v œ V Õ Ã Ê ˆ Ã Ê i Û ˆ ` i ˜ Ì Ê ˆ ˜ Ê i Û i À Þ Ì … ˆ ˜ } Ê Ü i Ê ` i à ˆ } ˜ ] Ê “ > ˜ Õ v > V Ì Õ À i ] Ê Ì i Ã Ì Ê > ˜ ` Ê ` i  ˆ Û i À ° Ê Ì ½ Ã Ê Ì … ˆ Ã Ê i “ « … > à ˆ Ã Ê œ ˜ Ê µ Õ >  ˆ Ì Þ ] Ê ˆ ˜ ˜ œ Û > Ì ˆ Û i Ê Ì i V … ˜ œ  œ } Þ Ê > ˜ ` Ê V œ “ «  i Ì i Ê i ˜ ` ‡ Ì œ ‡ i ˜ ` Ê “ > ˜ Õ v > V Ì Õ À ˆ ˜ } Ê Ã œ  Õ Ì ˆ œ ˜ Ã Ê Ì … > Ì Ê ` À ˆ Û i Ã Ê œ Õ À Ê L Õ Ã ˆ ˜ i Ã Ã Ê > ˜ ` Ê « À œ Û ˆ ` i Ã Ê œ Õ À Ê V Õ Ã Ì œ “ i À Ã Ê Ü ˆ Ì … Ê Ã ˆ } ˜ ˆ v ˆ V > ˜ Ì Ê V œ “ « i Ì ˆ Ì ˆ Û i Ê Ê > ` Û > ˜ Ì > } i Ã Ê ˆ ˜ Ê Ì … i Ê }  œ L >  Ê “ > À Ž i Ì «  > V i ° \n\n˜ Ê Ì œ ` > Þ ½ Ã Ê V œ “ « i Ì ˆ Ì ˆ Û i Ê “ > À Ž i Ì Ã ] Ê Ì … i Ê ` i “ > ˜ ` Ê v œ À Ê … ˆ } …  Þ Ê i v v ˆ V ˆ i ˜ Ì Ê > ˜ ` Ê v  i Ý ˆ L  i Ê œ « i À > Ì ˆ œ ˜ Ã Ê ˆ Ã Ê > Ê « À i À i µ Õ ˆ à ˆ Ì i ° Ê Ã Ê \" Ã Ê } À œ Ü ] Ê - > ˜ “ ˆ ˜ > ‡ - ½ Ã Ê Ê V Õ Ã Ì œ “ i À ‡ v œ V Õ Ã i ` Ê L Õ Ã ˆ ˜ i Ã Ã Ê “ œ ` i  Ê ˆ Ã Ê ˆ ˜ Ê > Ê « œ à ˆ Ì ˆ œ ˜ Ê Ì œ Ê « À œ Û ˆ ` i Ê  i > ` ˆ ˜ } Ê Ì i V … ˜ œ  œ } Þ Ê V œ “ « > ˜ ˆ i Ã Ê Ü ˆ Ì … Ê À i à « œ ˜ à ˆ Û i ] Ê V Õ Ã Ì œ “ ˆ â i ` Ê > ˜ ` Ê v  i Ý ˆ L  i Ê “ > ˜ Õ v > V Ì Õ À ˆ ˜ } Ê Ã œ  Õ Ì ˆ œ ˜ Ã Ê > V À œ Ã Ã Ê > Ê Û > À ˆ i Ì Þ Ê œ v Ê Ê i ˜ ` Ê “ > À Ž i Ì Ã Ê q Ê > ˜ Þ Ü … i À i Ê ˆ ˜ Ê Ì … i Ê Ü œ À  ` ° Ê \n\n{ - ‡ -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9563394498384085, + "doc_id": "0a8e4125061168adfe5227fd51068060c11783b6c4bf1fc890aa3d292bd3b04a", + "edit_distance": 0.09275053304904052, + "f1_score": 0.981366459627329, + "meteor": 0.96778270795525, + "precision": 0.9844236760124611, + "pred_md": "SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES\n\nMANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS\n\nIncome from discontinued operations was $22.4 million after taxes, an increase of $15.0 million or 202%. The income from discontinued operations in 2003 includes the sale of the partnership interest in February 2003 and results from the two months of its operations in 2003.\n\nThe Company adopted FAS 143 'Accounting for Asset Retirement Obligations.' effective January 1, 2003, and as a result recorded a charge to earnings for the cumulative effect of this change in accounting of $76 thousand after taxes.\n\nNet income was $32.1 million, an increase of $27.6 million or 610%. The increase is a result of improved operating results in the PCS operations, the 2002 VeriSign stock loss and the sale of the cellular operations.\n\n## DISCONTINUED OPERATIONS\n\nThe Company invested $2.0 million in the Virginia 10 RSA limited partnership in the early 1990's. The partnership's local customer base peaked in early 2000 with nearly 12,000 subscribers, then steadily declined to 6,700 by December 31, 2002. The decline was the result of competition with digital technologies and increased competition from national carriers in the area. As a result of the decline in the subscriber base, and the need for extensive capital expenditures to transform the analog network into a digital cellular network, the Company elected to sell its 66% interest in the partnership to one of the minority partners. The agreement was signed in November 2002, and closing was February 28, 2003. The Company's portion of the net income from its operations for 2003, 2002 and 2001 was $1.2 million, $7.4 million and $6.7 million, respectively.\n\n## CONTINUING OPERATIONS\n\n## 2002 compared to 2001\n\nTotal revenue was $93.0 million in 2002, an increase of $24.3 million or 35.3%. Total revenues included $57.9 million of wireless revenues, an increase of $21.7 million or 60.2%; wireline revenues of $28.7 million, an increase of $1.3 million or 4.6%; and other revenues of $6.4 million, an increase of $1.2 million or 24.5%.\n\nWithin wireless revenues, the PCS operation contributed $55.5 million, an increase of $21.4 million, or 63.0%. PCS service revenues were $37.4 million, an increase of $18.3 million or 95.7%. The increase in the subscriber base, which totaled 67,842 at December 31, 2002, was an increase of 20,524 or 43% from the prior year end.\n\nPCS travel revenue, which is compensation between Sprint and its PCS Affiliates for use of the other party's network, was $16.5 million, an increase of $2.9 million or 21.3%. Travel revenue is impacted by the geographic size of the Company's network service area, the overall number of Sprint wireless customers, and the travel exchange rate. The rate received on travel was $0.10 per minute in 2002. The rates in 2001 were $0.20 per minute from January 1, 2001 through April 30, 2001; $0.15 per minute from May 1, 2001 through September 30, 2001; and $0.12 per minute from October 1, 2001 through December 31, 2001.\n\nPCS equipment sales were $1.6 million, an increase of $0.3 million or 19.6%. The equipment sales are net of $0.3 million of rebates and discounts given at the time of sale, which became more pronounced during the year to meet industry competition for subscriber additions and subscriber retention.\n\nIn accordance with Sprint's requirements, the Company launched third generation (3G 1X) service in August 2002. The impact of 3G 1X-network enhancements on revenues was not significant in 2002.\n\nTower leases added $2.1 million to wireless revenues, an increase of $0.4 million or 24.5%. The increase was the result of other wireless carriers executing additional leases to use space on the Company's portfolio of towers. Of the 82 towers and poles owned by the Company as of December 31, 2002, 46 have tower space leased to other carriers.\n\nWireless revenues from the Company's paging operation were $0.3 million, a decrease of $0.1 million as the local customer base increasingly chose alternative digital wireless services. Paging service subscribers declined by 7.8% in 2002 from 3,190 subscribers to 2,940 subscribers.\n\nWithin wireline revenues, the Telephone operation contributed $22.5 million, an increase of $0.9 million, or 4.0%. Telephone access revenues were $10.9 million, an increase of $1.4 million or 14.8%. The growth in access revenues was driven by a 38.4% increase in access minutes of use on the Company's network and an increased percentage of minutes in the intrastate jurisdiction, where rates are higher than the interstate jurisdiction. On January 1, 2002 the Federal subscriber line charge (SLC) for residential customers increased from $3.50 to $5.00 per month. The SLC\n\n49\n\n2003 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n■", + "recall": 0.978328173374613, + "true_md": "Income from discontinued operations was $22.4 million after taxes, an increase of $15.0 million or 202%. The income from discontinued operations in 2003 includes the sale of the partnership interest in February 2003 and results from the two months of its operations in 2003.\n\nThe Company adopted FAS 143 “Accounting for Asset Retirement Obligations.” effective January 1, 2003, and as a result recorded a charge to earnings for the cumulative effect of this change in accounting of $76 thousand after taxes.\n\nNet income was $32.1 million, an increase of $27.6 million or 610%. The increase is a result of improved operating results in the PCS operations, the 2002 VeriSign stock loss and the sale of the cellular operations.\n\nThe Company invested $2.0 million in the Virginia 10 RSA limited partnership in the early 1990’s. The partnership’s local customer base peaked in early 2000 with nearly 12,000 subscribers, then steadily declined to 6,700 by December 31, 2002. The decline was the result of competition with digital technologies and increased competition from national carriers in the area. As a result of the decline in the subscriber base, and the need for extensive capital expenditures to transform the analog network into a digital cellular network, the Company elected to sell its 66% interest in the partnership to one of the minority partners. The agreement was signed in November 2002, and closing was February 28, 2003. The Company’s portion of the net income from its operations for 2003, 2002 and 2001 was $1.2 million, $7.4 million and $6.7 million, respectively.\n\nTotal revenue was $93.0 million in 2002, an increase of $24.3 million or 35.3%. Total revenues included $57.9 million of wireless revenues, an increase of $21.7 million or 60.2%; wireline revenues of $28.7 million, an increase of $1.3 million or 4.6%; and other revenues of $6.4 million, an increase of $1.2 million or 24.5%.\n\nWithin wireless revenues, the PCS operation contributed $55.5 million, an increase of $21.4 million, or 63.0%. PCS service revenues were $37.4 million, an increase of $18.3 million or 95.7%. The increase in the subscriber base, which totaled 67,842 at December 31, 2002, was an increase of 20,524 or 43% from the prior year end.\n\nPCS travel revenue, which is compensation between Sprint and its PCS Affiliates for use of the other party’s network, was $16.5 million, an increase of $2.9 million or 21.3%. Travel revenue is impacted by the geographic size of the Company’s network service area, the overall number of Sprint wireless customers, and the travel exchange rate. The rate received on travel was $0.10 per minute in 2002. The rates in 2001 were $0.20 per minute from January 1, 2001 through April 30, 2001; $0.15 per minute from May 1, 2001 through September 30, 2001; and $0.12 per minute from October 1, 2001 through December 31, 2001.\n\nPCS equipment sales were $1.6 million, an increase of $0.3 million or 19.6%. The equipment sales are net of $0.3 million of rebates and discounts given at the time of sale, which became more pronounced during the year to meet industry competition for subscriber additions and subscriber retention.\n\nIn accordance with Sprint’s requirements, the Company launched third generation (3G 1X) service in August 2002. The impact of 3G 1X-network enhancements on revenues was not significant in 2002.\n\nTower leases added $2.1 million to wireless revenues, an increase of $0.4 million or 24.5%. The increase was the result of other wireless carriers executing additional leases to use space on the Company’s portfolio of towers. Of the 82 towers and poles owned by the Company as of December 31, 2002, 46 have tower space leased to other carriers.\n\nWireless revenues from the Company’s paging operation were $0.3 million, a decrease of $0.1 million as the local customer base increasingly chose alternative digital wireless services. Paging service subscribers declined by 7.8% in 2002 from 3,190 subscribers to 2,940 subscribers.\n\nWithin wireline revenues, the Telephone operation contributed $22.5 million, an increase of $0.9 million, or 4.0%. Telephone access revenues were $10.9 million, an increase of $1.4 million or 14.8%. The growth in access revenues was driven by a 38.4% increase in access minutes of use on the Company’s network and an increased percentage of minutes in the intrastate jurisdiction, where rates are higher than the interstate jurisdiction. On January 1, 2002 the Federal subscriber line charge (SLC) for residential customers increased from $3.50 to $5.00 per month. The SLC\n\n49 ■ 2003 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n## 2002 compared to 2001\n\n## CONTINUING OPERATIONS\n\n## DISCONTINUED OPERATIONS\n\nSHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8740326054961292, + "doc_id": "025b0d5a781777b06b6e87568c4cfd074096e67693ed20504aeb234c3ed9935e", + "edit_distance": 0.20512820512820512, + "f1_score": 0.9739130434782608, + "meteor": 0.9707704280155641, + "precision": 0.9824561403508771, + "pred_md": "60\n\n## NOTES TO AND FORMING PART OF THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR THE FINANCIAL YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2000\n\n## 29. FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS (continued)\n\nInterest Rate Risk (continued)\n\n(b)\n\n## The economic entity's exposure to interest rate risks and the effective interest rates of financial assets and financial liabilities as at 30 June 2000 are as follows:\n\nN/a: not applicable for non-interest bearing financial instruments", + "recall": 0.9655172413793104, + "true_md": "NOTES TO AND FORMING PART OF THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR THE FINANCIAL YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2000\n\n## 29. FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS (continued)\n\n## (b) Interest Rate Risk (continued)\n\nThe economic entity’ s exposure to interest rate risks and the effective interest rates of financial assets and financial liabilities as at 30 June 2000 are as follows:\n\nN/a: not applicable for non-interest bearing financial instruments\n\n60" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8038965142755984, + "doc_id": "708a5825082d83d8e9e72145490e3a03d091ca3f18bf2ed389b93751fcbc64ca", + "edit_distance": 0.25, + "f1_score": 0.9019607843137255, + "meteor": 0.8819931758192235, + "precision": 0.9583333333333334, + "pred_md": "## (in millions)\n\n## Investments\n\n## Insurance Financial Strength Ratings\n\nFor additional information, see the Company's Annual Report on Form 10-K.\n\n34", + "recall": 0.8518518518518519, + "true_md": "(in millions)\n\n## Cash Flows\n\n## Investments\n\n## Insurance Financial Strength Ratings\n\nFor additional information, see the Company’s Annual Report on Form 10-K.\n\n34" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8726261005363164, + "doc_id": "6e788d5d21d7d018a57c502983f384bf89b8346583aadfd935cdfbb24f0466d8", + "edit_distance": 0.12795549374130738, + "f1_score": 0.9248366013071895, + "meteor": 0.9098515851218588, + "precision": 0.956081081081081, + "pred_md": "HON INDUSTRIES Inc. and SUBSIDIARIES\n\nThe Company invests these funds in high grade money market instruments. Prior to 2003 the plan was not funded. The discount rates at fiscal year-end 2003, 2002, and 2001 were 6.0%, 6.5%, and 6.5%, respectively. The Company payment for these benefits has reached the maximum amounts per the plan; therefore, healthcare trend rates have no impact on company cost.\n\nIn December 2003, the United States enacted into law the Medicare Prescription Drug, Improvement and Modernization Act of 2003 (the 'Act'). The Act established a prescription drug benefit under Medicare, known as 'Medicare Part D,' and a federal subsidy to sponsors of retiree health care benefit plans that provide a benefit that is at least actuarially equivalent to Medicare Part D.\n\nIn January 2004, the FASB issued FASB Staff Position No. 106-1, 'Accounting and Disclosure Requirements Related to the Medicare Prescription Drug, Improvement and Modernization Act of 2003' ('FSP 106-1'). The Company has elected to defer accounting for the economic effects of the Act, as permitted by FSP 106-1. Therefore, in accordance with FSP 106-1, the accumulated postretirement benefit obligation or net period postretirement benefit cost included in the consolidated financial statements and disclosed above do not reflect the effects of the Act. Specific authoritative guidance on accounting for the federal subsidy is pending. The final issued guidance could require a change to previously reported information.\n\n## Leases\n\nThe Company leases certain warehouses. Commitments for minimum rentals under noncancelable leases at the end of 2003 are as follows:\n\nProperty, plant, and equipment at year-end include the following amounts for capitalized leases:\n\nRent expense for the years 2003, 2002, and 2001 amounted to approximately $13,592,000, $13,683,000, and $13,387,000, respectively. Contingent rent expense under both capitalized and operating leases (generally based on mileage of transportation equipment) amounted to $313,000, $787,000, and $869,000 for the years 2003, 2002, and 2001, respectively.\n\n## Guarantees, Commitments, and Contingencies\n\nDuring the second quarter ended June 28, 2003, the Company entered into a one-year financial agreement for the benefit of one of its distribution chain partners. The maximum financial exposure assumed by the Company as a result of this arrangement totals $3 million of which over 75% is secured by collateral. In accordance with the provisions of FIN 45, the Company has recorded the fair value of this guarantee, which is estimated to be less than $0.1 million.\n\nThe Company utilizes letters of credit in the amount of $24 million to back certain financing instruments, insurance policies, and payment obligations. The letters of credit reflect fair value as a condition of their underlying purpose and are subject to fees competitively determined.\n\nThe Company is contingently liable for future minimum payments totaling $9.7 million under a transportation service contract. The transportation agreement is for a three-year period and is automatically renewable for periods of one year unless either party gives sixty days' written notice of its intent to terminate at the end of the original three-year term or any subsequent term. The minimum payments are $4.8 million in 2004, and $4.9 million in 2005.\n\nThe Company has guaranteed a contractual lease obligation of an independent contract furniture dealership. The related term expires in the fourth quarter of 2004. As of January 3, 2004, the remaining unpaid lease payments subject to this guarantee totaled approximately $69,000. In accordance with the provisions of FIN 45 no liability has been recorded, as the Company entered into this agreement prior to December 31, 2002.\n\n52", + "recall": 0.8955696202531646, + "true_md": "The Company invests these funds in high grade money market instru- ments. Prior to 2003 the plan was not funded. The discount rates at fiscal year-end 2003, 2002, and 2001 were 6.0%, 6.5%, and 6.5%, respectively. The Company payment for these benefits has reached the maximum amounts per the plan; therefore, healthcare trend rates have no impact on company cost. \n\nIn December 2003, the United States enacted into law the Medicare Prescription Drug, Improvement and Modernization Act of 2003 (the “Act”). The Act established a prescription drug benefit under Medicare, known as “Medicare Part D,” and a federal subsidy to spon- sors of retiree health care benefit plans that provide a benefit that is at least actuarially equivalent to Medicare Part D.\n\nIn January 2004, the FASB issued FASB Staff Position No. 106-1, “Accounting and Disclosure Requirements Related to the Medicare Prescription Drug, Improvement and Modernization Act of 2003” (“FSP 106-1”). The Company has elected to defer accounting for the economic effects of the Act, as permitted by FSP 106-1. Therefore, in accordance with FSP 106-1, the accumulated postretirement benefit obligation or net period postretirement benefit cost included in the consolidated financial statements and disclosed above do not reflect the effects of the Act. Specific authoritative guidance on accounting for the federal subsidy is pending. The final issued guidance could require a change to previously reported information.\n\nThe Company leases certain warehouses. Commitments for minimum rentals under noncancelable leases at the end of 2003 are as follows:\n\nProperty, plant, and equipment at year-end include the following amounts for capitalized leases:\n\nRent expense for the years 2003, 2002, and 2001 amounted to approx- imately $13,592,000, $13,683,000, and $13,387,000, respectively. Contingent rent expense under both capitalized and operating leases (generally based on mileage of transportation equipment) amounted to $313,000, $787,000, and $869,000 for the years 2003, 2002, and 2001, respectively.\n\nDuring the second quarter ended June 28, 2003, the Company entered into a one-year financial agreement for the benefit of one of its distribu- tion chain partners. The maximum financial exposure assumed by the Company as a result of this arrangement totals $3 million of which over 75% is secured by collateral. In accordance with the provisions of FIN 45, the Company has recorded the fair value of this guarantee, which is estimated to be less than $0.1 million.\n\nThe Company utilizes letters of credit in the amount of $24 million to back certain financing instruments, insurance policies, and payment obligations. The letters of credit reflect fair value as a condition of their underlying purpose and are subject to fees competi- tively determined.\n\nThe Company is contingently liable for future minimum pay- ments totaling $9.7 million under a transportation service contract. The transportation agreement is for a three-year period and is auto- matically renewable for periods of one year unless either party gives sixty days’ written notice of its intent to terminate at the end of the original three-year term or any subsequent term. The minimum pay- ments are $4.8 million in 2004, and $4.9 million in 2005.\n\nThe Company has guaranteed a contractual lease obligation of an independent contract furniture dealership. The related term expires in the fourth quarter of 2004. As of January 3, 2004, the remaining unpaid lease payments subject to this guarantee totaled approximately $69,000. In accordance with the provisions of FIN 45 no liability has been recorded, as the Company entered into this agree- ment prior to December 31, 2002.\n\n52\n\n## Leases\n\n## Guarantees, Commitments, and Contingencies\n\n## H O N I N D U S T R I E S I n c . a n d S U B S I D I A R I E S" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.04452903891913612, + "doc_id": "5e372ab4fde224cdf2c568b0d546180003d554389c9279b546060f053e683bd1", + "edit_distance": 0.7761194029850746, + "f1_score": 0.4411764705882353, + "meteor": 0.25344209863541894, + "precision": 0.9375, + "pred_md": "58\n\n## NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\nfor the year ended 31 December 2004\n\nAnnual Report 2004", + "recall": 0.28846153846153844, + "true_md": "## NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STA TEMENTS\n\nfor the year ended 31 December 2004\n\nThe interest-bearing amounts owing by controlled entities are for loans made in the ordinary course of business on normal market terms and conditions for an ind efinite period.\n\n58\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\n## 8. Inventories\n\n## 9. Other Assets\n\n## 10. Exploration and Development Expenditure" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9421474569678747, + "doc_id": "0c30cdc8cd50ad2ee85a6877f3bdf16e52723d25cd193f8fddd66e89bb63f2c4", + "edit_distance": 0.16452991452991453, + "f1_score": 0.9679012345679012, + "meteor": 0.9071623808118848, + "precision": 0.9702970297029703, + "pred_md": "4 0\n\nAt December 31, 2000, the range of exercise prices, weighted-average remaining contractual life and number exercisable of outstanding options was as follows:\n\nThe Company applies APB Opinion No. 25 in accounting for its share option plans. The exercise price of the options is established generally based on the estimated fair value of the underlying shares at grant date. For options granted prior to the initial public offering, the fair value was determined by taking into consideration the per share price at which the most recent sale of equity securities was made by Euronet to investors. For options granted after the initial public offering, the fair value is determined by the market price of the share at the date of grant. However, in contemplation of the initial public offering in March 1997, compensation expense was recognized in 1996 relating to all options granted during the fourth quarter of 1996. Such compensation expense was calculated as the excess of the fair market value of the underlying shares (determined as $4.22, which is the cash price per share at which GE Capital subscribed for pre f e rred shares of Euronet in F e u y 1997) over the exercise price of $2.14 per share. Euronet re c o rded $4,172,000 of compensation expense in the 1997 consolidated br ar financial statements and an additional compensation expense of $343,000 with respect to these options was recognized over the re m a i n i n g vesting period of such options. Of this amount, $0, $127,000 and $108,000 has been expensed in the years ended December 31, 2000, 1999 and 1998, re s p e c . tively\n\nThe following table provides the fair value of options granted during 2000, 1999 and 1998 together with a description of the assumptions used to calculate the fair value using the Black-Scholes pricing model:\n\nHad the Company determined compensation cost based on the fair value at the grant date for its stock options under SFAS No. 123, E u o n s net loss and net loss per share would have increased to the amounts indicated below: r et'\n\nP ro forma impact reflects only options granted since December 31, 1994. There f o re, the full impact of calculating compensation cost for stock options under SFAS No. 123 is not reflected in the pro forma amounts presented above because compensation cost is reflected over the options' vesting periods and compensation cost for options granted prior to January 1, 1995 is not considered.", + "recall": 0.9655172413793104, + "true_md": "The Company applies APB Opinion No. 25 in accounting for its share option plans. The exercise price of the options is established generally based on the estimated fair value of the underlying shares at grant date. For options granted prior to the initial public offering, the fair value was determined by taking into consideration the per share price at which the most recent sale of equity securities was made by Euronet to investors. For options granted after the initial public offering, the fair value is determined by the market price of the share at the date of grant. However, in contemplation of the initial public offering in March 1997, compensation expense was recognized in 1996 relating to all options granted during the fourth quarter of 1996. Such compensation expense was calculated as the excess of the fair market value of the underlying shares (determined as $4.22, which is the cash price per share at which GE Capital subscribed for pre f e rred shares of Euronet in F e b ru a ry 1997) over the exercise price of $2.14 per share. Euronet re c o rded $4,172,000 of compensation expense in the 1997 consolidated financial statements and an additional compensation expense of $343,000 with respect to these options was recognized over the re m a i n i n g vesting period of such options. Of this amount, $0, $127,000 and $108,000 has been expensed in the years ended December 31, 2000, 1999 and 1998, re s p e c t i v e l y. \n\nThe following table provides the fair value of options granted during 2000, 1999 and 1998 together with a description of the assumptions used to calculate the fair value using the Black-Scholes pricing model:\n\nHad the Company determined compensation cost based on the fair value at the grant date for its stock options under SFAS No. 123, E u ro n e t ’s net loss and net loss per share would have increased to the amounts indicated below:\n\nP ro forma impact reflects only options granted since December 31, 1994. There f o re, the full impact of calculating compensation cost for stock options under SFAS No. 123 is not reflected in the pro forma amounts presented above because compensation cost is reflected over the options’ vesting periods and compensation cost for options granted prior to January 1, 1995 is not considered. \n\n4 0\n\nAt December 31, 2000, the range of exercise prices, weighted-average remaining contractual life and number exercisable of outstanding options was as follows:" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.43020133691739243, + "doc_id": "0870a01197d3733d13422f8f7fc9e60332d210977c3fdc9061236819760be1ea", + "edit_distance": 0.72, + "f1_score": 0.8, + "meteor": 0.693542852240556, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n37\n\n2003 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n■", + "recall": 0.6666666666666666, + "true_md": "## Note 14. Segment Reporting (Continued)\n\n37 ■ 2003 ANNUAL REPORT\n\nSHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES\n\nNOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9532832918928106, + "doc_id": "b1e63fa93c1b95fa3c1a37528f3d0756f3fd8c21bc776c07ad70f37fed0bd675", + "edit_distance": 0.18376068376068377, + "f1_score": 0.9810426540284359, + "meteor": 0.9680571131884411, + "precision": 0.9857142857142858, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO AND FORMING PART OF THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR THE FINANCIAL YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2000\n\nThe net amount of GST recoverable from, or payable to, the taxation authority is included as part of receivables or payables.\n\n## (k) Income Tax\n\nTax-effect accounting principles are adopted whereby income tax expense is calculated on pretax accounting profits after adjustment for permanent differences. The tax-effect of timing difference, which occur when items are included or allowed for income tax purposes in a period different to that for accounting is shown at current taxation rate in provision for deferred income tax and future income tax benefit, as applicable.\n\n## (l) Inventory\n\nInventory is valued at the lower of cost and net realisable value.\n\n## (m) Investments\n\nInvestments are recorded at the lower of cost and recoverable amount.\n\nDividend revenue is recognised on a receivable basis. Interest revenue is recognised on an accrual basis.\n\n## (n) Leased Assets\n\nHire Purchase leased assets are capitalised as fixed assets. The amount initially brought to account is the present value of minimum hire purchase payments.\n\nA Hire Purchase lease is one which effectively transfers from the lessor to the lessee substantially all the risks and benefits incidental to ownership of the leased property.\n\nCapitalised hire purchase assets are depreciated on a reducing balance basis.\n\nHire Purchase lease payments are allocated between interest expense and reduction of lease liability over the term of the lease. The interest expense is determined by applying the interest rate implicit in the lease to the outstanding lease liability at the beginning of each lease payment period.\n\nOperating lease payments are recognised as an expense on a basis which reflects the pattern in which economic benefits from the leased asset are consumed.\n\n## (o) Principles of Consolidation\n\nThe consolidated financial statements are prepared by combining the financial statements of all the entities that comprise the economic entity, being the company (the parent entity) and its controlled entities as defined in accounting standard AASB 1024 'Consolidated Accounts'. A list of controlled entities appears in note 11 to the financial statements. Consistent accounting policies are employed in the preparation and presentation of the consolidated financial statements.\n\nThe consolidated financial statements include the information and results of each controlled entity from the date on which the company obtains control and until such time as the company ceases to control such entity.\n\nIn preparing the consolidated financial statements, all intercompany balances and transactions, and unrealised profits arising within the economic entity are eliminated in full.", + "recall": 0.9764150943396226, + "true_md": "## NOTES TO AND FORMING PART OF THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR THE FINANCIAL YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2000\n\nThe net amount of GST recoverable from, or payable to, the taxation authority is included as part of receivables or payables.\n\n## (k) Income Tax\n\n## (l) Inventory\n\n## (m) Investments\n\n## (n) Leased Assets\n\n## (o) Principles of Consolidation\n\n40\n\nTax-effect accounting principles are adopted whereby income tax expense is calculated on pre- tax accounting profits after adjustment for permanent differences. The tax-effect of timing difference, which occur when items are included or allowed for income tax purposes in a period different to that for accounting is shown at current taxation rate in provision for deferred income tax and future income tax benefit, as applicable.\n\nInvestments are recorded at the lower of cost and recoverable amount.\n\nDividend revenue is recognised on a receivable basis. Interest revenue is recognised on an accrual basis.\n\nHire Purchase leased assets are capitalised as fixed assets. The amount initially brought to account is the present value of minimum hire purchase payments.\n\nA Hire Purchase lease is one which effectively transfers from the lessor to the lessee substantially all the risks and benefits incidental to ownership of the leased property.\n\nCapitalised hire purchase assets are depreciated on a reducing balance basis. \n\nHire Purchase lease payments are allocated between interest expense and reduction of lease liability over the term of the lease. The interest expense is determined by applying the interest rate implicit in the lease to the outstanding lease liability at the beginning of each lease payment period.\n\nOperating lease payments are recognised as an expense on a basis which reflects the pattern in which economic benefits from the leased asset are consumed.\n\nThe consolidated financial statements are prepared by combining the financial statements of all the entities that comprise the economic entity, being the company (the parent entity) and its controlled entities as defined in accounting standard AASB 1024 “Consolidated Accounts”. A list of controlled entities appears in note 11 to the financial statements. Consistent accounting policies are employed in the preparation and presentation of the consolidated financial statements.\n\nThe consolidated financial statements include the information and results of each controlled entity from the date on which the company obtains control and until such time as the company ceases to control such entity.\n\nIn preparing the consolidated financial statements, all intercompany balances and transactions, and unrealised profits arising within the economic entity are eliminated in full.\n\nInventory is valued at the lower of cost and net realisable value." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8808633362926778, + "doc_id": "8ac07d6cd9c8789838ab5d0b2cf966cfc2051c076e5e27c1ae40bbbd7fafb054", + "edit_distance": 0.35294117647058826, + "f1_score": 0.9385749385749387, + "meteor": 0.8669308208873322, + "precision": 0.9597989949748744, + "pred_md": "the New York metropolitan area. In order to speed the payment of claims, GBD employees immediately contacted customers with offices in the towers and worked with industry organizations to expedite the issuing of death certificates.\n\nThe Hartford's individual life operations scoured airline manifests and missing-persons lists, looking for names of customers. When they spotted a potential match, they called agents to alert them to a possible claim and provided tips on how to proceed.\n\nFuture generations will measure the full impact of Sept. 11. But at The Hartford, one thing is known already. As they did after disasters such as the New York fire of 1835, the Chicago fire of 1871 and the 1906 San Francisco earthquake, The Hartford's people in 2001 ran their business the only way they know howthe right way. They put customers first and kept promises. In so doing, they helped lay the foundation for a more confident future.\n\n- /H17076 N ew York employees admire a painting depicting the courage and resilience of The Hartford employees and the New York rescue teams. The montage, which now hangs in the lobby of The Hartford's New York offices, was painted by Andy Yelenak of The Hartford's Information Technology department.\n- /H17073 T he Hartford's New York staff got their businesses back up and running in less than a week after the Sept. 11 attack, despite the destruction of their offices. Among those who were instrumental in getting 330 employees situated in temporary office space were, left to right, Lucille T. Sgaglione, vice president, Hartford Financial Products; Linda Banks, administrative assistant, office support\n\nservices, Business Insurance; Holly McCalmont, human resources manager, Business Insurance; Jim Norris, business technology solutions manager, Business Insurance; Craig Lowenthal, first vice president and chief information officer, Hartford Financial Products; and Susan Miranda, support services manager, Hartford Specialty Co.\n\n11", + "recall": 0.9182692307692307, + "true_md": "the New York metropolitan area. In order to speed the payment of claims, GBD employees immediately con- tacted customers with offices in the towers and worked with industry organizations to expedite the issuing of death certificates.\n\nThe Hartford’s individual life operations scoured airline manifests and missing-persons lists, looking for names of customers. When they spotted a potential match, they called agents to alert them to a possible claim and provided tips on how to proceed.\n\nFuture generations will measure the full impact of Sept. 11. But at The Hartford, one thing is known already. As they did after disasters such as the New York fire of 1835, the Chicago fire of 1871 and the 1906 San Francisco earthquake, The Hartford’s people in 2001 ran their business the only way they know how— the right way. They put customers first and kept prom- ises. In so doing, they helped lay the foundation for a more confident future.\n\n11\n\nservices, Business Insurance; Holly McCalmont, human resources manager, Business Insurance; Jim Norris, business technology solutions manager, Business Insurance; Craig Lowenthal, first vice president and chief information officer, Hartford Financial Products; and Susan Miranda, support services manager, Hartford Specialty Co.\n\nGLYPH<H17073> T he Hartford’s New York staff got their businesses back up and running in less than a week after the Sept. 11 attack, despite the destruction of their offices. Among those who were instrumental in getting 330 employees situated in temporary office space were, left to right, Lucille T. Sgaglione, vice president, Hartford Financial Products; Linda Banks, adminis- trative assistant, office support\n\nGLYPH<H17076> N ew York employees admire a painting depicting the courage and resilience of The Hartford employ- ees and the New York rescue teams. The montage, which now hangs in the lobby of The Hartford’s New York offices, was painted by Andy Yelenak of The Hartford’s Information Technology department." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.942971856355123, + "doc_id": "a5eb96c4683dc869fe883187637ed7a9cd494a21c957ae57f1885777f9bdc849", + "edit_distance": 0.0410958904109589, + "f1_score": 0.9578947368421054, + "meteor": 0.9607409009170509, + "precision": 0.9732620320855615, + "pred_md": "## about emmis\n\nEmmis Communications (NASDAQ: EMMS) owns 23 FM and 4 AM domestic radio stations serving the nation's largest markets of New York, Los Angeles and Chicago as well as Phoenix, St. Louis, Austin, Indianapolis and Terre Haute, Ind. In addition, Emmis owns 16 television stations, award-winning regional and specialty magazines, a radio network, international radio interests, and ancillary businesses in broadcast sales and publishing.\n\nEmmis was founded in 1980, and the company launched its first radio station, WENS-FM, in July 1981. As Emmis (the Hebrew word for 'truth') acquired more radio stations across the nation, it established a reputation for sound operations and emerged as a radio industry leader and innovator. Emmis was the first broadcast company to own toprated radio stations in both L.A. and New York, and it pioneered such concepts as the all-sports format.\n\nThe company launched its magazine division in 1988 with the purchase of Indianapolis Monthly , and moved into the world of international radio in 1997, when it was awarded a license to operate a national radio network in Hungary. In 1998, Emmis expanded into television by buying six television stations in markets throughout the United States. In the last six years, the company has added properties in each of its divisions.\n\nWith its emphasis on solid operations, integrity, community involvement and fun, the company's culture has been repeatedly lauded by both its employees and its peers. Trade publications have regularly cited the company's leaders as being among the best in the business.\n\nEmmis became a public company in 1994. It maintains its worldwide headquarters in Indianapolis, where the company was founded.\n\nThis annual report contains certain non-GAAP measures. For a presentation of the directly comparable GAAP measure and a reconciliation of the non-GAAP measures to the GAAP measures, see the attachment to the back of our Form 10-K in this Annual Report.", + "recall": 0.9430051813471503, + "true_md": "## about emmis\n\nEmmis Communications (NASDAQ: EMMS) owns 23 FM and 4 AM domestic radio stations serving the nation’s largest markets of New York, Los Angeles and Chicago as well as Phoenix, St. Louis, Austin, Indianapolis and Terre Haute, Ind. In addition, Emmis owns 16 television stations, award-winning regional and specialty magazines, a radio net- work, international radio interests, and ancillary businesses in broadcast sales and publishing. \n\nEmmis was founded in 1980, and the company launched its first radio station, WENS-FM, in July 1981. As Emmis (the Hebrew word for “truth”) acquired more radio stations across the nation, it established a reputation for sound operations and emerged as a radio industry leader and innovator. Emmis was the first broadcast company to own top- rated radio stations in both L.A. and New York, and it pioneered such concepts as the all-sports format.\n\nThe company launched its magazine division in 1988 with the purchase of Indianapolis Monthly , and moved into the world of international radio in 1997, when it was awarded a license to operate a national radio network in Hungary. In 1998, Emmis expanded into television by buying six television stations in markets throughout the United States. In the last six years, the company has added properties in each of its divisions.\n\nWith its emphasis on solid operations, integrity, community involvement and fun, the company’s culture has been repeatedly lauded by both its employees and its peers. Trade publications have regularly cited the company’s leaders as being among the best in the business. \n\nEmmis became a public company in 1994. It maintains its worldwide headquarters in Indianapolis, where the company was founded.\n\nThis annual report contains certain non-GAAP measures. For a presen- tation of the directly comparable GAAP measure and a reconciliation of the non-GAAP measures to the GAAP measures, see the attachment to the back of our Form 10-K in this Annual Report." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9602007350999203, + "doc_id": "de9e0dd194623009b797a0e9ca55eb78e545b2e7ec986977d71904f7b6f93925", + "edit_distance": 0.6927480916030534, + "f1_score": 0.9908592321755028, + "meteor": 0.7951247660221832, + "precision": 0.9926739926739927, + "pred_md": "4\n\n## CHAIRMAN'S REPORT\n\nMermaid Marine made great progress during the year to 30th June 2000, even though trading reflected low levels of activity in the North West. Prospects over recent months have rapidly improved, with a great deal of large project work in prospect. The Prospectus concept of building our business within the triangle of oil and gas reserves found between Timor, Exmouth and Darwin, is proven and has become even more relevant.\n\nRich in gas, the region is rapidly becoming Australia's powerhouse and the focus of new resource processing industries. In a statement made in only August this year, the Shell Oil Company identified gas as that Company's premier future fuel, due to its high environmental qualifications and portability. The Federal Government, also recognising the environmental advantages of gas, has identified that liquified natural gas in particular, as a greenhouse solution rather than a problem and has effectively exempted the gas industry from Kyoto protocol restraints.\n\nWoodside Petroleum has announced the signing of Memorandums of understanding for substantial gas contracts to a range of companies planning to establish their production in the Pilbara. At the time of writing this report, firm Letters of Intent were also foreshadowed for substantial increases in LNG production, specifically to Japan and prospects are high for further export sales to China, Singapore and India.\n\nProviding marine support for such expansion has been our principle source of earnings, but Mermaid will enjoy a larger and more diversified income stream once development of the Base at Dampier is completed. The project, demonstrated in more detail later in this report, will revolutionise our Company and drive significant changes in the way offshore producers are serviced in the North West of Australia.\n\nCoinciding with a start of Base construction, we were successful in attracting Mr Mark Bradley, formerly Managing Director of Clough Offshore, to join us as Mermaid's Chief Executive. As reported by the Age newspaper, our new Chief Executive has put his money where his mouth is, offering a personal investment of $2 million for equity in our company. Mark has had an extremely successful career with McDermotts and Clough Offshore. He will now drive the development of a much stronger engineering capability at Mermaid, through which, whether in joint venture or alone, we intend to be more closely involved as direct participants in North West Shelf work.\n\nImmediately following Mark Bradley's decision, his old employer, Clough Engineering, also expressed a desire to become a shareholder, subscribing $3 million for new equity. The influence that the direct involvement of Mark Bradley and Clough Engineering will have in our company's future should not be underestimated. At this time when we welcome Mark as a Director and shareholder, we are also pleased to announce the appointment of Mr Richard Reid, finance", + "recall": 0.9890510948905109, + "true_md": "4\n\nWoodside Petroleum has announced the signing of Memorandums of understanding for substantial gas contracts to a range of companies planning to establish their production in the Pilbara. At the time of writing this report, firm Letters of Intent were also foreshadowed for substantial increases in LNG production, specifically to Japan and prospects are high for further export sales to China, Singapore and India. \n\nProviding marine support for such expansion has been our principle source of earnings, but Mermaid will enjoy a larger and more diversified income stream once development of the Base at Dampier is completed. The project, demonstrated in more detail later in this report, will revolutionise our Company and drive significant changes in the way offshore producers are serviced in the North West of Australia.\n\nCoinciding with a start of Base construction, we were successful in attracting Mr Mark Bradley, formerly Managing Director of Clough Offshore, to join us as Mermaid’s Chief Executive. As reported by the Age newspaper, our new Chief Executive has put his money where his mouth is, offering a personal investment of $2 million for equity in our company. Mark has had an extremely successful career with McDermotts and Clough Offshore. He will now drive the development of a much stronger engineering capability at Mermaid, through which, whether in joint venture or alone, we intend to be more closely involved as direct participants in North West Shelf work.\n\nImmediately following Mark Bradley’s decision, his old employer, Clough Engineering, also expressed a desire to become a shareholder, subscribing $3 million for new equity. The influence that the direct involvement of Mark Bradley and Clough Engineering will have in our company’s future should not be underestimated. At this time when we welcome Mark as a Director and shareholder, we are also pleased to announce the appointment of Mr Richard Reid, finance\n\nRich in gas, the region is rapidly becoming Australia’s powerhouse and the focus of new resource processing industries. In a statement made in only August this year, the Shell Oil Company identified gas as that Company’s premier future fuel, due to its high environmental qualifications and portability. The Federal Government, also recognising the environmental advantages of gas, has identified that liquified natural gas in particular, as a greenhouse solution rather than a problem and has effectively exempted the gas industry from Kyoto protocol restraints.\n\nMermaid Marine made great progress during the year to 30th June 2000, even though trading reflected low levels of activity in the North West. Prospects over recent months have rapidly improved, with a great deal of large project work in prospect. The Prospectus concept of building our business within the triangle of oil and gas reserves found between Timor, Exmouth and Darwin, is proven and has become even more relevant. \n\n## CHAIRMAN’ S REPORT" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9217899636852149, + "doc_id": "fdb210514594a110ead9e24589ae28ff955c23355c8f188c73ae87e4716ff57b", + "edit_distance": 0.35968992248062015, + "f1_score": 0.9561752988047808, + "meteor": 0.9248637754337014, + "precision": 0.9836065573770492, + "pred_md": "## responsibility for\n\n## financial statements\n\nThe accompanying financial statements were prepared by the management of Hormel Foods Corporation which is responsible for their integrity and objectivity. These statements have been prepared in accordance with U.S. generally accepted accounting principles appropriate in the circumstances and, as such, include amounts that are based on our best estimates and judgments.\n\nHormel Foods Corporation has developed a system of internal controls designed to assure that the records reflect the transactions of the company and that the established policies and procedures are adhered to. This system is augmented by wellcommunicated written policies and procedures, a strong program of internal audit, and well-qualified personnel.\n\nThese financial statements have been audited by Ernst & Young LLP, an independent registered public accounting firm, and their report appears on this page. Their audit was conducted in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States) and includes a review of the company's accounting and financial controls and tests of transactions.\n\nThe Audit Committee of the Board of Directors, composed solely of outside directors, meets periodically with the independent auditors, management, and the internal auditors to assure that each is carrying out its responsibilities. Both Ernst & Young LLP and our internal auditors have full and free access to the Audit Committee, with or without the presence of management, to discuss the results of their audit work and their opinions on the adequacy of internal controls and the quality of financial reporting.\n\nPlease refer to Exhibits 31.1 and 31.2 attached to the company's Annual Report on Form 10-K for the fiscal year ending October 30, 2004, for certifications required under Section 302 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002.\n\nJoel W. Johnson Chairman of the Board and Chief Executive Officer\n\nMichael J. McCoy Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer\n\n30\n\nHormel Foods Corporation\n\nreport of\n\n## independent registered public accounting firm\n\nTo the Shareholders and Board of Directors Hormel Foods Corporation Austin, Minnesota\n\nWe have audited the accompanying consolidated statements of financial position of Hormel Foods Corporation as of October 30, 2004, and October 25, 2003, and the related consolidated statements of operations, changes in shareholders' investment, and cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended October 30, 2004. These financial statements are the responsibility of the company's management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these financial statements based on our audits.\n\nWe conducted our audits in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement. An audit includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements. An audit also includes assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.\n\nIn our opinion, the financial statements referred to above present fairly, in all material respects, the consolidated financial position of Hormel Foods Corporation at October 30, 2004, and October 25, 2003, and the consolidated results of its operations and its cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended October 30, 2004, in conformity with U.S. generally accepted accounting principles.\n\nMinneapolis, Minnesota November 22, 2004", + "recall": 0.9302325581395349, + "true_md": "The accompanying financial statements were prepared by the management of Hormel Foods Corporation which is responsible for their integrity and objectivity. These statements have been prepared in accordance with U.S. generally accepted accounting principles appropriate in the circumstances and, as such, include amounts that are based on our best estimates and judgments.\n\nHormel Foods Corporation has developed a system of internal controls designed to assure that the records reflect the trans- actions of the company and that the established policies and procedures are adhered to. This system is augmented by well- communicated written policies and procedures, a strong program of internal audit, and well-qualified personnel.\n\nThese financial statements have been audited by Ernst & Young LLP, an independent registered public accounting firm, and their report appears on this page. Their audit was conducted in accor- dance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States) and includes a review of the com- pany’s accounting and financial controls and tests of transactions.\n\nThe Audit Committee of the Board of Directors, composed solely of outside directors, meets periodically with the independent audi- tors, management, and the internal auditors to assure that each is carrying out its responsibilities. Both Ernst & Young LLP and our internal auditors have full and free access to the Audit Committee, with or without the presence of management, to discuss the results of their audit work and their opinions on the adequacy of internal controls and the quality of financial reporting.\n\nPlease refer to Exhibits 31.1 and 31.2 attached to the company’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the fiscal year ending October 30, 2004, for certifications required under Section 302 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002.\n\nIn our opinion, the financial statements referred to above present fairly, in all material respects, the consolidated financial position of Hormel Foods Corporation at October 30, 2004, and October 25, 2003, and the consolidated results of its operations and its cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended October 30, 2004, in conformity with U.S. generally accepted accounting principles.\n\nWe conducted our audits in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States).\n\nThose standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial state- ments are free of material misstatement. An audit includes exam- ining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements. An audit also includes assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.\n\nWe have audited the accompanying consolidated statements of financial position of Hormel Foods Corporation as of October 30, 2004, and October 25, 2003, and the related consolidated statements of operations, changes in shareholders’ investment, and cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended October 30, 2004. These financial statements are the responsibil- ity of the company’s management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these financial statements based on our audits.\n\nTo the Shareholders and Board of Directors Hormel Foods Corporation Austin, Minnesota\n\n## independent registered public accounting firm\n\n## financial statements\n\nreport of \n\nresponsibility for \n\nJoel W. Johnson Chairman of the Board and Chief Executive Officer\n\nMichael J. McCoy Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer\n\nMinneapolis, Minnesota November 22, 2004\n\n30 Hormel Foods Corporation" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.015355425772256695, + "doc_id": "bd752f093e3ceeac562f7614711efca19d229cf6b98c923a43516bc7cc169824", + "edit_distance": 0.980440097799511, + "f1_score": 0.05952380952380952, + "meteor": 0.1382566437007874, + "precision": 0.03125, + "pred_md": "## FINANCIAL REPORT\n\n## CONTENTS\n\n| Directors' Statutory Report | 47 |\n|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|-------|\n| Financial Report | |\n| Statements of Financial Performance | 50 |\n| Statements of Financial Position | 51 |\n| | 52 |\n| Statements of Cash Flows Notes to the Financial Statements | |\n| 1 Statement of Accounting Policies | 53 |\n| 2 Revenue from Ordinary Activities | |\n| | 56 |\n| 3 Expenses from Ordinary Activities | 56 |\n| 4 Borrowing Costs | 56 |\n| 5 Profit from Ordinary Activities | 57 |\n| 6 Taxation | 57 |\n| 7 Receivables | 58 |\n| 8 Inventories | 58 |\n| 9 Other Assets | |\n| | 58 |\n| 10 Exploration and Development Expenditure | 58 |\n| 11 Land and Buildings, Plant and Equipment | 59 |\n| 12 Other Financial Assets | 59 |\n| 13 Intangibles | 59 |\n| 14 Payables | 59 |\n| 15 Interest-Bearing Liabilities | 60 |\n| 16 Provisions | 61 61 |\n| | 62 |\n| 17 Other Liabilities | 68 |\n| | 68 |\n| 18 Contributed Equity | |\n| 20 Retained Profits | |\n| 19 Foreign Currency Translation Reserve | 69 |\n| 21 Earnings per Share | 70 |\n| 22 Investments in Controlled Entities | 72 |\n| 23 Interests in Joint Ventures 24 Notes to Statements of Cash Flows | 74 |\n| | 74 |\n| 25 Related Parties | |\n| | 75 |\n| 26 Specified Director and Specified Executive Disclosures 27 Remuneration of Auditors | 80 |\n| | 80 |\n| 28 Segment Information | 82 |\n| | 82 |\n| 29 Commitments for Expenditure | 83 |\n| 30 Superannuation Commitments 31 Contingent Liabilities | |\n| | 84 |\n| 32 Additional Financial Instruments Disclosure 33 Economic Dependency | 86 86 |\n| 34 Post Balance Date Events | |\n| | 86 |\n| 35 Australian Equivalents to International Reporting Standards Directors Declaration | 88 |\n| Independent Audit Report | 89 |", + "recall": 0.625, + "true_md": "## FINANCIAL REPORT\n\n## CONTENTS\n\n46\n\nAnnual Report 2004" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6086891445704177, + "doc_id": "0e0151287c41dd454e882ddd60067dc0ef23b20605a12ea3133d77cb071d7569", + "edit_distance": 0.5, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.7022853900505387, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF INCOME\n\n## Years Ended December 31, 2003, 2002 and 2001\n\nin thousands, except per share amounts\n\nSee accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.\n\nSHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY\n\n14\n\n■", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## Years Ended December 31, 2003, 2002 and 2001 in thousands, except per share amounts\n\nYears Ended December 31, 2003, 2002 and 2001 in thousands, except per share amounts\n\nSee accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.\n\nSHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF INCOME\n\nSHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY ■ 14" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9528195538672092, + "doc_id": "7762d68cd44bb905b596b47f4df0505d23d09dbd7ffb38d75799cf46740cdf11", + "edit_distance": 0.6983758700696056, + "f1_score": 0.9894736842105265, + "meteor": 0.8421743677725018, + "precision": 0.9929577464788732, + "pred_md": "4\n\nManaging Director's Review\n\n## OUR 50 YEARS OF EXPERIENCE: AN INVESTMENT IN THE FUTURE\n\nFifty years ago, the founding fathers of Santos, led by the late John Bonython, took the Company's first brave steps in the search for oil and gas. It was a risky move but, with the limited information available, they identified the far north-east of South Australia as having great potential. This judgment would later be justified and the Cooper Basin would become a prime Australian source of energy for decades to come.\n\nWith 2004 marking the 50th anniversary of Santos' incorporation, we have been reminded of how much the world of commerce, technology and regulation has changed since those pioneering days of the 1950s and 1960s.\n\nComplicated corporate entities trade oil around the world at the touch of a button. With sophisticated seismic technology and three-dimensional computer images we can more clearly 'see' the structures that might hold the oil and gas for which we search.\n\nBut some things never change and it is interesting as we reach this milestone period to reflect on the Santos story - not in an indulgent way as we celebrate our progress and achievements, but rather as a means of learning from the past as we look forward to the challenges ahead.\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\n## 'Santos has an impressive and exciting development outlook over the next few years.'\n\n## RETAINING AN ENTREPRENEURIAL SPIRIT\n\nSantos' founders were the entrepreneurs of their day among them Sir Douglas Mawson and Reg Sprigg - people with the drive and commitment required to create an entirely new industry. It was hard work in a hostile environment but they persevered and delivered the discoveries that have sustained the energy needs of Adelaide, Sydney and beyond for the past 35 years.\n\nToday, we have knowledge and technology injected into the exploration equation that the early prospectors could not even dream about. But it is vital that we retain their entrepreneurial spirit. Our aim is to foster a working environment in which we encourage and support people and build the confidence required to make bold but informed decisions throughout our business.\n\nA culture change program is currently underway in Santos which is all about making sure that we work together in a way that enhances our team spirit and ability to be successful.\n\n## VALUES ARE IMPORTANT\n\nThere is another attribute of our forefathers that is still very relevant today, even though our\n\nworking environment is a vastly different place. People matter.\n\nValues are the essential building blocks for any successful company. If the basic building blocks are not in place then it doesn't matter whether you have a vision for change, a business will not go in the direction you want without them. In that context, the progress we have made under the restructuring program is most pleasing and there is an ongoing role for all of us to play in Santos' continuous improvement program.\n\nThis includes striving to operate our business in the safest possible manner. I applaud the great commitment and performance of everyone who rose to the challenges posed by the fire at the Moomba liquids recovery plant on New Year's Day 2004. The effort by everyone involved to repair and return the plant to full production was first class and a credit to their cooperation and professionalism.\n\n## JERUK STANDS OUT\n\nThe Jeruk oil discovery in Indonesia, our most exciting drilling success for many years, is the result of deliberately targeting this area as part of the growth strategy put in place in 2001.\n\nWe were in Indonesia by design, identifying East Java as an\n\nattractive area in which to expand Santos' exploration effort internationally and to establish a new core area. We were looking for excellent drilling targets and found one with Jeruk.\n\nFurther, we took a strategic approach towards gaining access to the area, acquiring the surrounding exploration acreage to ensure that we manage the evaluation of the entire play trend, giving Santos maximum drilling flexibility and keeping upfront costs down.\n\nJeruk is a significant discovery and has important strategic implications for Santos. It confirms that our exploration strategy is delivering and has the Company well positioned to capture the upside value available from this discovery.\n\nThe success of our strategy in East Java helps us balance the risk in our exploration program and, with the Jeruk discovery pointing the way to other potential targets, we can add some attractive lower risk prospects to our portfolio.\n\nJeruk stands out from the crowd for a number of reasons. At 18,700 feet, it was the deepest well (in terms of measured depth) drilled in Indonesia last year: a deep, high pressure well that few companies would have attempted. Jeruk", + "recall": 0.986013986013986, + "true_md": "Managing Director’s Review\n\n## OUR 50 YEARS OF EXPERIENCE: AN INVESTMENT IN THE FUTURE\n\n‘Santos has an impressive and exciting development outlook over the next few years.’\n\nFifty years ago, the founding fathers of Santos, led by the late John Bonython, took the Company's first brave steps in the search for oil and gas. It was a risky move but, with the limited information available, they identified the far north-east of South Australia as having great potential. This judgment would later be justified and the Cooper Basin would become a prime Australian source of energy for decades to come.\n\nSantos' founders were the entrepreneurs of their day – among them Sir Douglas Mawson and Reg Sprigg – people with the drive and commitment required to create an entirely new industry. It was hard work in a hostile environment but they persevered and delivered the discoveries that have sustained the energy needs of Adelaide, Sydney and beyond for the past 35 years.\n\nworking environment is a vastly different place. People matter. \n\nValues are the essential building blocks for any successful company. If the basic building blocks are not in place then it doesn't matter whether you have a vision for change, a business will not go in the direction you want without them. In that context, the progress we have made under the restructuring program is most pleasing and there is an ongoing role for all of us to play in Santos' continuous improvement program.\n\nattractive area in which to expand Santos' exploration effort internationally and to establish a new core area. We were looking for excellent drilling targets and found one with Jeruk. \n\nFurther, we took a strategic approach towards gaining access to the area, acquiring the surrounding exploration acreage to ensure that we manage the evaluation of the entire play trend, giving Santos maximum drilling flexibility and keeping upfront costs down.\n\nWith 2004 marking the 50th anniversary of Santos’ incorporation, we have been reminded of how much the world of commerce, technology and regulation has changed since those pioneering days of the 1950s and 1960s. \n\nToday, we have knowledge and technology injected into the exploration equation that the early prospectors could not even dream about. But it is vital that we retain their entrepreneurial spirit. Our aim is to foster a working environment in which we encourage and support people and build the confidence required to make bold but informed decisions throughout our business.\n\nComplicated corporate entities trade oil around the world at the touch of a button. With sophisticated seismic technology and three-dimensional computer images we can more clearly ‘see’ the structures that might hold the oil and gas for which we search. \n\nBut some things never change and it is interesting as we reach this milestone period to reflect on the Santos story – not in an indulgent way as we celebrate our progress and achievements, but rather as a means of learning from the past as we look forward to the challenges ahead.\n\nThere is another attribute of our forefathers that is still very relevant today, even though our \n\nWe were in Indonesia by design, identifying East Java as an\n\nThe Jeruk oil discovery in Indonesia, our most exciting drilling success for many years, is the result of deliberately targeting this area as part of the growth strategy put in place in 2001.\n\nThis includes striving to operate our business in the safest possible manner. I applaud the great commitment and performance of everyone who rose to the challenges posed by the fire at the Moomba liquids recovery plant on New Year's Day 2004. The effort by everyone involved to repair and return the plant to full production was first class and a credit to their cooperation and professionalism.\n\nJeruk is a significant discovery and has important strategic implications for Santos. It confirms that our exploration strategy is delivering and has the Company well positioned to capture the upside value available from this discovery. \n\nThe success of our strategy in East Java helps us balance the risk in our exploration program and, with the Jeruk discovery pointing the way to other potential targets, we can add some attractive lower risk prospects to our portfolio.\n\nJeruk stands out from the crowd for a number of reasons. At 18,700 feet, it was the deepest well (in terms of measured depth) drilled in Indonesia last year: a deep, high pressure well that few companies would have attempted. Jeruk \n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\n4\n\nA culture change program is currently underway in Santos which is all about making sure that we work together in a way that enhances our team spirit and ability to be successful.\n\n## JERUK STANDS OUT\n\n## VALUES ARE IMPORTANT\n\n## RETAINING AN ENTREPRENEURIAL SPIRIT" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9512745277962729, + "doc_id": "d918b5c7fd33306c63c9895bd4d9ddce1014fd240d1ad1e29edcbea143e26652", + "edit_distance": 0.4444444444444444, + "f1_score": 0.9956709956709957, + "meteor": 0.9545437025562303, + "precision": 0.9956709956709957, + "pred_md": "## OPERATIONS REVIEW\n\nvessels engaged in routine offshore logistics tasks operate fully laden with 7.4 m draft which means there will be very few occasions when the largest vessels in the industry have to make a tide dependent entry or departure through the Mermaid channel. Further the Mermaid Base will not suffer operational disadvantages experienced by the adjacent Woodshed Base or nearby Damper Public Wharf in terms of entry and departure draft restrictions.\n\nThe function and purpose of Berth 1 will be:\n\n- · To service the larger offshore supply boat market on a fast turnaround basis.\n- · To receive and offload very heavy ro/ro cargoes up to 1500 tonne delivered by ocean going heavy lift ships and barges.\n- · To handle inbound and outbound cargoes related to major offshore pipe lay projects.\n- · To receive and efficiently load reel ships used for deep water small diameter pipelay.\n\nThe wharf will be an earth filled structure with steel sheet pile faces and concrete capping beam surround. Most of the construction will be performed using land based equipment working from the core of the earth filled system.\n\nMuch effort has gone into a design concept which allows very large cranes (>100 tonne capacity) to operate without restriction on the wharf.\n\nThe separation between Berth 1 and Berth 2 is such to allow Road Train Triples (the max allowable) to turn unassisted on the wharf.\n\n## C. QUAY WALL (BERTH 2)\n\nThe inner berth, Berth 2 has a minimum depth alongside of 5.0 m allowing unrestricted operation of all the Mermaid fleet, and the majority of other vessels servicing the offshore oil/gas industry and mineral ports. This berth will offer excellent weather protection for small and medium size vessels.\n\n## D. BREAKWATER.\n\nThe rubble mount type breakwater will be an extension of the wharf, constructed using core and armor rock largely won from excavations on the Base. The excavations created will become depositories for dredge spoil.\n\nBecause the storm surge associated with major cyclones can be up to 7 m above chart datum (low tide), before imposing the wave height, a fully protective breakwater is not practical. The\n\n11", + "recall": 0.9956709956709957, + "true_md": "OPERATIONS REVIEW\n\nvessels engaged in routine offshore logistics tasks operate fully laden with 7.4 m draft which means there will be very few occasions when the largest vessels in the industry have to make a tide dependent entry or departure through the Mermaid channel. Further the Mermaid Base will not suffer operational disadvantages experienced by the adjacent Woodshed Base or nearby Damper Public Wharf in terms of entry and departure draft restrictions.\n\nThe function and purpose of Berth 1 will be:\n\nThe wharf will be an earth filled structure with steel sheet pile faces and concrete capping beam surround. Most of the construction will be performed using land based equipment working from the core of the earth filled system. \n\nMuch effort has gone into a design concept which allows very large cranes (>100 tonne capacity) to operate without restriction on the wharf. \n\nThe separation between Berth 1 and Berth 2 is such to allow Road Train Triples (the max allowable) to turn unassisted on the wharf.\n\nThe inner berth, Berth 2 has a minimum depth alongside of 5.0 m allowing unrestricted operation of all the Mermaid fleet, and the majority of other vessels servicing the offshore oil/gas industry and mineral ports. This berth will offer excellent weather protection for small and medium size vessels.\n\nThe rubble mount type breakwater will be an extension of the wharf, constructed using core and armor rock largely won from excavations on the Base. The excavations created will become depositories for dredge spoil. \n\nBecause the storm surge associated with major cyclones can be up to 7 m above chart datum (low tide), before imposing the wave height, a fully protective breakwater is not practical. The\n\n- • To service the larger offshore supply boat market on a fast turnaround basis.\n\n- • To receive and offload very heavy ro/ro cargoes up to 1500 tonne delivered by ocean going heavy lift ships and barges.\n\n- • To handle inbound and outbound cargoes related to major offshore pipe lay projects.\n\n- • To receive and efficiently load reel ships used for deep water small diameter pipelay.\n\n## C. QUAY WALL (BERTH 2)\n\n## D. BREAKWATER.\n\n11" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8789656788637319, + "doc_id": "1207f21783336099ef17dbd28f23bdd720b5f99cf2c4715d32b5bad922dd2679", + "edit_distance": 0.10766721044045677, + "f1_score": 0.9302325581395348, + "meteor": 0.9001104367061465, + "precision": 0.966183574879227, + "pred_md": "HON INDUSTRIES Inc. and SUBSIDIARIES\n\n## REPORT OF INDEPENDENT AUDITORS\n\n## To the Board of Directors and Shareholders, HON INDUSTRIES Inc.:\n\nIn our opinion, the accompanying consolidated balance sheets and the related consolidated statements of income, shareholders' equity, and cash flows present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of HON INDUSTRIES Inc. and its subsidiaries at January 3, 2004, and December 28, 2002, and the results of their operations and their cash flows for the fiscal years ended January 3, 2004, and December 28, 2002, in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America. These financial statements are the responsibility of the Company's management; our responsibility is to express an opinion on these financial statements based on our audits. We conducted our audits of these statements in accordance with auditing standards generally accepted in the United States of America, which require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement. An audit includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements, assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, and evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion. The financial statements of the Company as of December 29, 2001, and for the fiscal year then ended, prior to the adjustments discussed in the Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets note, were audited by other independent accountants who have ceased operations. Those independent accountants expressed an unqualified opinion on those financial statements in their report dated February 1, 2002.\n\nAs disclosed in the Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets note, the Company changed the manner in which it accounts for goodwill and other intangible assets upon adoption of the accounting guidance of Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 142, Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets, on December 30, 2001.\n\nAs discussed above, the financial statements of HON INDUSTRIES Inc., as of December 29, 2001, and for the period then ended, were audited by other independent accountants who have ceased operations. As described in the Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets note, these financial statements have been revised to include the transitional disclosures required by Statement of Financial Accounting Standards (Statement) No. 142, Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets, which was adopted by the Company as of December 30, 2001. We audited the transitional disclosures described in the Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets note. In our opinion, the transitional disclosures for 2001 in the Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets note are appropriate. However, we were not engaged to audit, review, or apply any procedures to the 2001 financial statements of the Company other than with respect to such disclosures, and, accordingly, we do not express an opinion or any other form of assurance on the 2001 financial statements taken as a whole.\n\nPricewaterhouseCoopers LLP\n\nChicago, Illinois\n\nFebruary 6, 2004\n\n58", + "recall": 0.8968609865470852, + "true_md": "H O N I N D U S T R I E S I n c . a n d S U B S I D I A R I E S\n\n## R E P O R T O F I N D E P E N D E N T A U D I T O R S\n\n## To the Board of Directors and Shareholders, HON INDUSTRIES Inc.:\n\nIn our opinion, the accompanying consolidated balance sheets and the related consolidated statements of income, shareholders’ equity, and cash flows present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of HON INDUSTRIES Inc. and its subsidiaries at January 3, 2004, and December 28, 2002, and the results of their operations and their cash flows for the fiscal years ended January 3, 2004, and December 28, 2002, in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America. These financial statements are the responsibility of the Company’s management; our responsibility is to express an opinion on these financial statements based on our audits. We conducted our audits of these statements in accordance with auditing standards generally accepted in the United States of America, which require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement. An audit includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements, assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, and evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion. The financial statements of the Company as of December 29, 2001, and for the fiscal year then ended, prior to the adjustments discussed in the Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets note, were audited by other independent accountants who have ceased opera- tions. Those independent accountants expressed an unqualified opinion on those financial statements in their report dated February 1, 2002.\n\nAs disclosed in the Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets note, the Company changed the manner in which it accounts for goodwill and other intangible assets upon adoption of the accounting guidance of Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 142, Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets, on December 30, 2001.\n\nAs discussed above, the financial statements of HON INDUSTRIES Inc., as of December 29, 2001, and for the period then ended, were audited by other independent accountants who have ceased operations. As described in the Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets note, these financial statements have been revised to include the transitional disclosures required by Statement of Financial Accounting Standards (Statement) No. 142, Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets, which was adopted by the Company as of December 30, 2001. We audited the transitional disclo- sures described in the Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets note. In our opinion, the transitional disclosures for 2001 in the Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets note are appropriate. However, we were not engaged to audit, review, or apply any procedures to the 2001 financial statements of the Company other than with respect to such disclosures, and, accordingly, we do not express an opinion or any other form of assurance on the 2001 financial statements taken as a whole.\n\nPricewaterhouseCoopers LLP Chicago, Illinois February 6, 2004\n\n58" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.969814385914109, + "doc_id": "1b13b29c0907bdc848e82459dfb0c04faa88a178852a5e5e265b2507f9c4a114", + "edit_distance": 0.07407407407407407, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9997967789462988, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "58\n\n## NOTES TO AND FORMING PART OF THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR THE FINANCIAL YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2000\n\nThere are no unrecognised financial instruments.", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## NOTES TO AND FORMING PART OF THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR THE FINANCIAL YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2000\n\nThere are no unrecognised financial instruments.\n\n58" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9757655483273872, + "doc_id": "0aa102b59df7c36b9a59309af5e8112512070b660ca991672aeec6ad65b52e79", + "edit_distance": 0.02490170380078637, + "f1_score": 0.9832572298325724, + "meteor": 0.9874058059497363, + "precision": 0.9877675840978594, + "pred_md": "Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations\n\n## Other Factors Affecting Liquidity\n\nIn November 2004, in anticipation of the Mandalay merger, we entered into an amended and restated bank credit facility with a group of lenders led by Bank of America, N.A. The revised bank credit facility will be effective upon the closing of the Mandalay merger, will mature five years later, and will provide a total of $7.0 billion of borrowing capacity, consisting of a $5.5 billion senior revolving credit facility and $1.5 billion senior term loan facility. The remaining terms are substantially similar to our existing bank credit facility.\n\n## Future Developments\n\nProject CityCenter. In November 2004, we announced a plan to develop a multibillion dollar urban metropolis, initially called Project CityCenter, on 66 acres of land on the Las Vegas Strip, between Bellagio and Monte Carlo. We anticipate that the first phase of Project CityCenter will include a 4,000-room casino resort, three 400-room boutique hotels, approximately 550,000 square feet of retail shops, dining and entertainment venues, and 1,650 units of luxury condominium, hotel/condominium and private residence clubs.\n\nWe expect that the complete design work for Project CityCenter will take 18 months and that the first phase will open in 2009. The design, budget and schedule of Project CityCenter are still preliminary however, and the ultimate timing, cost and scope of Project CityCenter are subject to risks attendant to large-scale projects.\n\nAtlantic City, New Jersey. We own approximately 130 acres on Renaissance Pointe in Atlantic City, New Jersey. In addition, Borgata occupies 29 acres at Renaissance Pointe, including 27 acres it owns and two acres we lease to Borgata. Of the remaining land, approximately 95 acres are suitable for development, and a portion of these acres consists of common roads, landscaping and master plan improvements which we designed and developed as required by our agreement with Boyd.\n\nBorgata is currently expanding its gaming and non-gaming amenities, adding 36 casino table games and 600 slot machines, along with additional restaurant, entertainment and other amenities. This project is expected to be completed in 2006. Additionally, Borgata has plans to add another hotel tower featuring 800 guest rooms, suites and resort condominiums, along with a new spa, parking garage and meeting rooms. This project is expected to be completed in 2007. Neither project is expected to require contributions from us, as existing operating cash flow and Borgata's recently renegotiated bank credit facility is anticipated to provide for the cost of the expansions.\n\nIn October 2002, we announced the suspension of our development activities on our wholly-owned project on the Renaissance Pointe land in Atlantic City. We must apply for and receive numerous governmental permits and satisfy other conditions before construction of a new resort on the Renaissance Pointe site could begin. No assurance can be given that we will develop a casino resort in New Jersey, or its ultimate schedule, size, configuration or cost if we do develop a casino resort.\n\nDetroit, Michigan. MGM Grand Detroit, LLC, in which we hold a controlling interest, has operated an interim casino facility in Detroit, Michigan since July 1999. In August 2002, the Detroit City Council approved revised development agreements with us and two other developers. The revised development agreement released us and the City from certain of the obligations under the original agreement and significantly changed other provisions of the original agreement. We are currently in the process of obtaining land and developing plans for the permanent facility. The design, budget and schedule of the permanent facility are not finalized, and the ultimate timing, cost and scope of the facility are subject to risks attendant to large-scale projects.\n\nThe ability to construct the permanent casino facility is currently subject to resolution of the Lac Vieux litigation. The 6th Circuit Court of Appeals has issued an injunction prohibiting the City and the developers from commencing construction pending further action of the 6th Circuit Court. Therefore, we do not know when we will be able to commence construction of, or complete, the permanent facility.\n\n29", + "recall": 0.9787878787878788, + "true_md": "Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations\n\n## Other Factors Affecting Liquidity\n\n## Future Developments\n\nIn November 2004, in anticipation of the Mandalay merger, we entered into an amended and restated bank credit facility with a group of lenders led by Bank of America, N.A. The revised bank credit facility will be effective upon the closing of the Mandalay merger, will mature five years later, and will provide a total of $7.0 billion of borrowing capacity, consisting of a $5.5 billion senior revolving credit facility and $1.5 billion senior term loan facility. The remaining terms are substantially similar to our existing bank credit facility.\n\nProject CityCenter. In November 2004, we announced a plan to develop a multi- billion dollar urban metropolis, initially called Project CityCenter, on 66 acres of land on the Las Vegas Strip, between Bellagio and Monte Carlo. We anticipate that the first phase of Project CityCenter will include a 4,000-room casino resort, three 400-room boutique hotels, approximately 550,000 square feet of retail shops, dining and entertainment venues, and 1,650 units of luxury condominium, hotel/condominium and private residence clubs.\n\nWe expect that the complete design work for Project CityCenter will take 18 months and that the first phase will open in 2009. The design, budget and schedule of Project CityCenter are still preliminary however, and the ultimate timing, cost and scope of Project CityCenter are subject to risks attendant to large-scale projects.\n\nAtlantic City, New Jersey. We own approximately 130 acres on Renaissance Pointe in Atlantic City, New Jersey. In addition, Borgata occupies 29 acres at Renaissance Pointe, including 27 acres it owns and two acres we lease to Borgata. Of the remaining land, approximately 95 acres are suitable for development, and a portion of these acres consists of common roads, landscaping and master plan improve- ments which we designed and developed as required by our agreement with Boyd.\n\nBorgata is currently expanding its gaming and non-gaming amenities, adding 36 casino table games and 600 slot machines, along with additional restaurant, entertainment and other amenities. This project is expected to be completed in 2006. Additionally, Borgata has plans to add another hotel tower featuring 800 guest rooms, suites and resort condominiums, along with a new spa, parking garage and meeting rooms. This project is expected to be completed in 2007. Neither project is expected to require contributions from us, as existing operating cash flow and Borgata’s recently renegotiated bank credit facility is anticipated to provide for the cost of the expansions.\n\nIn October 2002, we announced the suspension of our development activities on our wholly-owned project on the Renaissance Pointe land in Atlantic City. We must apply for and receive numerous governmental permits and satisfy other conditions before construction of a new resort on the Renaissance Pointe site could begin. No assurance can be given that we will develop a casino resort in New Jersey, or its ultimate schedule, size, configuration or cost if we do develop a casino resort.\n\nDetroit, Michigan. MGM Grand Detroit, LLC, in which we hold a controlling interest, has operated an interim casino facility in Detroit, Michigan since July 1999. In August 2002, the Detroit City Council approved revised development agreements with us and two other developers. The revised development agreement released us and the City from certain of the obligations under the original agreement and significantly changed other provisions of the original agreement. We are currently in the process of obtaining land and developing plans for the permanent facility. The design, budget and schedule of the permanent facility are not finalized, and the ultimate timing, cost and scope of the facility are subject to risks attendant to large-scale projects.\n\nThe ability to construct the permanent casino facility is currently subject to resolu- tion of the Lac Vieux litigation. The 6th Circuit Court of Appeals has issued an injunction prohibiting the City and the developers from commencing construction pending further action of the 6th Circuit Court. Therefore, we do not know when we will be able to commence construction of, or complete, the permanent facility." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "b98d3e40d26d5740d7156ad7342b84a445bfdc2fc130db6572e4d0051064872c", + "edit_distance": 0.9230769230769231, + "f1_score": 0.14814814814814814, + "meteor": 0.07079101261926747, + "precision": 0.2857142857142857, + "pred_md": "## HON INDUSTRIES 2003\n\n## FINANCIAL HIGHLIGHTS\n\n15", + "recall": 0.1, + "true_md": "H O N I N D U S T R I E S 2 0 0 3\n\n## F I N A N C I A L H I G H L I G H T S\n\n15" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9243398119643627, + "doc_id": "9da8272f5c7fcaa3737b7206592fb469fbcbe6e8d4cac823432e0ff0406487d2", + "edit_distance": 0.05371900826446281, + "f1_score": 0.9458128078817736, + "meteor": 0.9533479791510171, + "precision": 0.9664429530201343, + "pred_md": "4\n\n## 'We promise that our dedication to you will not waver as we continue to focus on the importance of value and values. '\n\nDear Shareholders: The theme of this year's annual report is Value and Values. We firmly believe that values do drive value. We want to provide value to our shareholders through ownership of our stock, and value to our customers through banking products and services. We do this by adhering to the principles that have guided this organization since the establishment of First National Bank of Abilene in 1890. In particular, we are committed to doing business professionally and ethically and to making sure our financial information is presented fairly.\n\nLast year, shareholders saw the value of their stock rise as we achieved higher earnings for the 16th year in a row. Net income reached $34.0 million, a gain of 15.7% from 2001's $29.4 million. Basic earnings per share totaled $2.75, up from $2.38 in 2001. Over the past 10 years, earnings have grown at a compounded annual rate of 11.9%. The primary factors contributing to 2002's higher earnings were an increase in average earning assets and an improved net interest margin (the percentage difference between interest earned and interest paid). Also contributing was the elimination of goodwill amortization under a change in generally accepted accounting principles; this change produced an increase of $.10 in basic earnings per share.\n\nKey profitability ratios also improved in 2002. Our return on average assets increased to 1.78% from 1.62% in 2001. This result was well above the average of 1.19% achieved by our peer group (bank holding companies of similar size). Return on average equity improved to 15.13% from 14.35% in 2001. Our operating efficiency ratio (the share of revenues consumed by operating expenses) improved to 51.96% in 2002 from 53.82% in 2001. Again, our ratio compared favorably to our peer group's average of 59.17%.\n\nConsolidated assets at year-end 2002 totaled $1.993 billion, up 3.3% from $1.930 billion in 2001. Loans increased modestly, by 2.5%, to $964.0 million. The book value of our trust assets increased by 2.8%, reaching $986.2 million at December 31, 2002. Deposits grew by 1.6%, to $1.712 billion.\n\nFirst Financial's balance sheet at year-end was again marked by strong asset quality and capital strength. Classified loans (those at risk to some degree) increased to 3.7% of total loans from 2.7% a year earlier. However, total nonperforming assets decreased to .44% of total loans from .51% at the end of 2001; by comparison, the peer group average was .75%. Shareholders' equity grew to $238.8 million at the end of 2002, yielding an equity-toassets ratio of 11.98%.\n\nBased on our earnings performance and strong capital position, in April 2002 the Board of Directors approved a 16.7% increase in the quarterly cash dividend, to $.35 per share from $.30 per share. The total cash dividend for 2002 was $1.35 per share. The market price of our common stock at year-end was $38.00 per share, up 26.2% from $30.10 at the end of 2001. The combination of share price appreciation and dividend paid produced a total return to shareholders of 31% for 2002.\n\nOn January 2, 2002, First Financial Bank, N. A., Southlake, opened a new branch in Keller. We are encouraged by the growth of this branch, and are looking for additional opportunities in the same northeast Tarrant County area. On October 15, 2002, First National Bank, Sweetwater, acquired the Trent branch of State National Bank of West Texas. This branch, with total assets of $6.5 million, is a", + "recall": 0.9260450160771704, + "true_md": "“We promise that our dedication to you will not waver as we continue to focus on the importance of value and values.”\n\nDear Shareholders: The theme of this year’s annual report is Value and Values. We firmly believe that values do drive value. We want to provide value to our shareholders through ownership of our stock, and value to our customers through banking products and services. We do this by adhering to the principles that have guided this organization since the establishment of First National Bank of Abilene in 1890. In particular, we are committed to doing business profes- sionally and ethically and to making sure our financial information is presented fairly .\n\nLast year, shareholders saw the value of their stock rise as we achieved higher earnings for the 16th year in a row. Net income reached $34.0 million, a gain of 15.7% from 2001’s $29.4 million. Basic earnings per share totaled $2.75, up from $2.38 in 2001. Over the past 10 years, earnings have grown at a compounded annual rate of 11.9%. The primary factors contributing to 2002’s higher earnings were an increase in average earning assets and an improved net interest margin (the percentage difference between inter- est earned and interest paid). Also contributing was the elimination of goodwill amortization under a change in generally accepted accounting principles; this change produced an increase of $.10 in basic earnings per share.\n\nKey profitability ratios also improved in 2002. Our return on average assets increased to 1.78% from 1.62% in 2001. This result was well above the average of 1.19% achieved by our peer group (bank holding companies of similar size). Return on average equity improved to 15.13% from 14.35% in 2001. Our operating efficiency ratio (the share of revenues consumed by operating expenses) improved to 51.96% in 2002 from 53.82% in 2001. Again, our ratio compared favorably to our peer group’s average of 59.17%.\n\nConsolidated assets at year-end 2002 totaled $1.993 bil- lion, up 3.3% from $1.930 billion in 2001. Loans increased modestly, by 2.5%, to $964.0 million. The book value of our trust assets increased by 2.8%, reaching $986.2 mil- lion at December 31, 2002. Deposits grew by 1.6%, to $1.712 billion.\n\nFirst Financial’s balance sheet at year-end was again marked by strong asset quality and capital strength. Classified loans (those at risk to some degree) increased to 3.7% of total loans from 2.7% a year earlier. However, total nonperforming assets decreased to .44% of total loans from .51% at the end of 2001; by comparison, the peer group average was .75%. Shareholders’ equity grew to $238.8 million at the end of 2002, yielding an equity-to- assets ratio of 11.98%.\n\nBased on our ear nings performance and strong capital posi- tion, in April 2002 the Board of Dir ectors approved a 16.7% increase in the quarterly cash dividend, to $.35 per share from $.30 per share. The total cash dividend for 2002 was $1.35 per share. The market price of our common stock at year-end was $38.00 per share, up 26.2% from $30.10 at the end of 2001. The combination of share price appreci- ation and dividend paid produced a total return to shareholders of 31% for 2002.\n\nOn January 2, 2002, First Financial Bank, N. A., Southlake, opened a new branch in Keller. We are encouraged by the growth of this branch, and are looking for additional oppor- tunities in the same northeast Tarrant County area. On October 15, 2002, First National Bank, Sweetwater, acquired the Trent branch of State National Bank of West Texas. This branch, with total assets of $6.5 million, is a\n\n4" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9357249921431849, + "doc_id": "71501e10fcf4570c18b1cb92011e61c93342970fe191cb0fa9bec1ad70fa26d4", + "edit_distance": 0.8860369609856262, + "f1_score": 0.9762796504369537, + "meteor": 0.6768948352299395, + "precision": 0.9799498746867168, + "pred_md": "## SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES\n\nMANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS\n\nThe $5.0 million placed in escrow, as part of the sales agreement on the Virginia 10 RSA limited partnership, should be released after February 28, 2005. There are no known claims that have been filed against the amount in escrow.\n\nThe Company spent $12.5 million on capital projects in 2003, or about $7.0 million below what was budgeted for the year. The variance was primarily due to postponing construction of an additional diverse fiber route and the delay of the second phase of renovations on the Shentel Center in Edinburg, Virginia.\n\nThe Company has no other off-balance sheet arrangements and has not entered into any transactions involving unconsolidated, limited purpose entities or commodity contracts.\n\nCapital expenditures budgeted for 2004 total approximately $30 million, including approximately $20 million for additional PCS base stations, additional towers, and switch upgrades to enhance the PCS network. Improvements and replacements of approximately $5 million are planned for the telephone operation. The remaining $5 million covers building renovations, vehicles, office equipment, and other miscellaneous capital needs.\n\nThe Company anticipates using funds from operations, to the extent they are available to fund the capital expenditures and the payment of debt and interest. Due to lower than expected tax expenses in 2003, the Company will apply the tax receivable to the 2004-year tax liability. It is anticipated by no later than second quarter of 2004, additional federal tax payments will be due based on anticipated profits expected to be generated in the operation.\n\nManagement anticipates its operations will generate similar operating cash flows in 2004, compared to those of continuing operations in 2003, although there are events outside the control of the Company that could have an adverse impact on cash flows from operations. The events that could adversely impact operating cash flow results include, but are not limited to; changes in overall economic conditions, regulatory requirements, changes in technologies, availability of labor resources and capital, and other conditions. The PCS subsidiary's operations are dependent upon Sprint's ability to execute certain functions such as billing, customer care, and collections; their ability to develop and implement successful marketing programs and new products and services; and their ability to effectively and economically manage other operating activities under the Company's agreements with Sprint. Additionally, the Company's ability to attract and maintain a sufficient customer base is critical to maintaining a positive cash flow from operations. These items individually and/or collectively could impact the Company's results.\n\nThe Company expects to generate adequate cash to meet its short-term and long-term cash needs, including working capital requirements, capital projects and debt payments, and to fund potential dividend payments from cash on hand, operating cash flow, and amounts expected to be available under the Company's existing financing facilities and its anticipated financing facilities discussed above. The Company may, at its election, liquidate some of its investments to generate additional cash for its capital needs as market conditions allow.\n\n## Recently Issued Accounting Standards\n\nIn December 2003, the FASB issued FASB Interpretation No. 46 (revised December 2003),'Consolidation of Variable Interest Entities,' which addresses how a business enterprise should evaluate whether it has a controlling financial interest in an entity through means other than voting rights and accordingly should consolidate the entity. FIN 46R replaces FASB Interpretation No. 46, 'Consolidation of Variable Interest Entities,' (VIE), which was issued in January 2003. The Company will be required to apply FIN 46R to variable interests in VIEs created after December 31, 2003. For variable interests in VIEs created before January 1, 2004, the Interpretation will be applied beginning on January 1, 2005, except it must be applied in the fourth quarter of 2003 for any VIE's that are considered to be special purpose entities. For any VIEs that must be consolidated under FIN 46R that were created before January 1, 2004, the assets, liabilities and non-controlling interests of the VIE initially would be measured at their carrying amounts with any difference between the net amount added to the balance sheet and any previously recognized interest being recognized as the cumulative effect of an accounting change. If determining the carrying amounts is not practicable, fair value at the date FIN 46R first applies may be used to measure the assets, liabilities and non-controlling interest of the VIE. The Company is evaluating the impact of applying FIN 46R to existing VIEs in which it has variable interests and does not believe the application will have a material impact on the Company's consolidated financial statements.\n\nIn May 2003, the Financial Accounting Standards Board ('FASB') issued SFAS No. 150, 'Accounting for Certain Financial Instruments with Characteristics of Liabilities and Equity,' which was effective at the beginning of the first interim period beginning after June 15, 2003. This Statement establishes standards for the classification and measurement of certain financial instruments with characteristics of both liabilities and equity. The Statement also includes required disclosures for financial instruments within its scope. For the Company, the Statement was effective\n\n53\n\n2003 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n■", + "recall": 0.972636815920398, + "true_md": "## SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS\n\n## Recently Issued Accounting Standards\n\n53 ■ 2003 ANNUAL REPORT\n\nIn May 2003, the Financial Accounting Standards Board (“FASB”) issued SFAS No. 150, “Accounting for Certain Financial Instruments with Characteristics of Liabilities and Equity,” which was effective at the beginning of the first interim period beginning after June 15, 2003. This Statement establishes standards for the classification and measurement of certain financial instruments with characteristics of both liabilities and equity. The Statement also includes required disclosures for financial instruments within its scope. For the Company, the Statement was effective\n\nIn December 2003, the FASB issued FASB Interpretation No. 46 (revised December 2003),“Consolidation of Variable Interest Entities,” which addresses how a business enterprise should evaluate whether it has a contro lling financial interest in an entity through means other than voting rights and accordingly should consolidate the entity. FIN 46R replaces FASB Interpretation No. 46, “Consolidation of Variable Interest Entities,” (VIE), which was issued in January 2003. The Company will be required to apply FIN 46R to variable interests in VIEs created after December 31, 2003. For variable interests in VIEs created before January 1, 2004, the Interpretation will be applied beginning on January 1, 2005, except it must be applied in the fourth quarter of 2003 for any VIE’s that are considered to be special purpose entities. For any VIEs that must be consolidated under FIN 46R that were created before January 1, 2004, the assets, liabilities and non-controlling interests of the VIE initially would be measured at their carrying amounts with any difference between the net amount added to the balance sheet and any previously recognized interest being recognized as the cumulative effect of an accounting change. If determining the carrying amounts is not practicable, fair value at the date FIN 46R first applies may be used to measure the assets, liabilities and non-controlling interest of the VIE. The Company is evaluating the impact of applying FIN 46R to existing VIEs in which it has variable interests and does not believe the application will have a material impact on the Company’s consolidated financial statements.\n\nThe Company expects to generate adequate cash to meet its short-term and long-term cash needs, including working capital requirements, capital projects and debt payments, and to fund potential dividend payments from cash on hand, operating cash flow, and amounts expected to be available under the Company’s existing financing fac ilities and its anticipated financing facilities discussed above. The Company may, at its election, liquidate some of its investments to generate additional cash for its capital needs as market conditions allow.\n\nManagement anticipates its operations will generate similar operating cash flows in 2004, compared to those of continuing operations in 2003, although there are events outside the control of the Company that could have an adverse impact on cash flows from operations. The events that could adversely impact operating cash flow results include, but are not limited to; changes in overall economic conditions, regulatory requirements, changes in technologies, availability of labor resources and capital, and other conditions. The PCS subsidiary’s operations are dependent upon Sprint’s ability to execute certain functions such as billing, customer care, and collections; their ability to develop and implement successful marketing programs and new products and services; and their ability to effectively and economically manage other operating activities under the Company’s agreements with Sprint. Additionally, the Company’s ability to attract and maintain a sufficient customer base is critical to maintaining apositive cash flow from operations. These items individually and/or collectively could impact the Company’s results.\n\nThe Company anticipates using funds from operations, to the extent they are available to fund the capital expenditures and the payment of debt and interest. Due to lower than expected tax expenses in 2003, the Company will apply the tax receivable to the 2004-year tax liability. It is anticipated by no later than second quarter of 2004, additional federal tax payments will be due based on anticipated profits expected to be generated in the operation.\n\nCapital expenditures budgeted for 2004 total approximately $30 million, including approximately $20 million for additional PCS base stations, additional towers, and switch upgrades to enhance the PCS network. Improvements and replacements of approximately $5 million are planned for the telephone operation. The remaining $5 million covers building renovations, vehicles, office equipment, and other miscellaneous capital needs.\n\nThe Company has no other off-balance sheet arrangements and has not entered into any transactions involving unconsolidated, limited purpose entities or commodity contracts.\n\nThe Company spent $12.5 million on capital projects in 2003, or about $7.0 million below what was budgeted for the year. The variance was primarily due to postponing construction of an additional diverse fiber route and the delay of the second phase of renovations on the Shentel Center in Edinburg, Virginia.\n\nThe $5.0 million placed in escrow, as part of the sales agreement on the Virginia 10 RSA limited partnership, should be released after February 28, 2005. There are no known claims that have been filed against the amount in escrow." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "c8d0afa75f68fcdc23bd1b4c97bfce6f861a83c13cb6dad8ad4e8424a6847d83", + "edit_distance": 0.8860369609856262, + "f1_score": 0.9762796504369537, + "meteor": 0.6768948352299395, + "precision": 0.9799498746867168, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.972636815920398, + "true_md": "" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8748246652330993, + "doc_id": "26e526e031fe7a170e7aedfd0473bad0a13bf954adfa28874c464deac4c9fd0f", + "edit_distance": 0.530638852672751, + "f1_score": 0.9466484268125855, + "meteor": 0.8401485075134572, + "precision": 0.9637883008356546, + "pred_md": "## what it has always done: outperform.\n\nIn addition, we commit ourselves to creating the best content in our markets. Our magazines routinely dominate their industry awards ceremonies - last year, Texas Monthly won a coveted National Magazine Award, and Emmis publications claimed more than half of the awards at the City and Regional Magazine competition. Our radio stations feature some of the industry's most popular personalities - in 2003, Emmis people and stations were awarded three Marconi Radio Awards. And our television operations are regularly honored by journalism organizations for their news gathering and community service. In short, we provide our markets with reliable, high-quality content - content that helps us assemble the audiences our advertisers want to reach.\n\nWe then generate revenue by overallocating to sales. We give our teams well-developed strategies, clearly defined brands and solid products. We build bigger, better sales forces and put a greater emphasis on local dollars than our competitors. We hire aggressive managers, set ambitious goals and then watch our people work harder and smarter than anyone else.\n\nWe also seize the right opportunities and make the most of them. As the cost of buying radio properties has gone through the roof, we have been careful about buying. However, when we had a chance to acquire the LBJ stations in Austin, we knew it was the right fit: good stations, a tremendous heritage and a great culture, all with an opportunity for growth. And we've already built on that group's track record - since we bought them, we've reformatted one station and quickly sent it to No. 1 in the market, and we've pushed revenues up 9 percent for the entire group.\n\nFinally, we innovate. Why has Emmis, traditionally a radio company, become the company to emulate in TV? Because we approached TV in a way it's never been approached before. Why do we operate leading hip-hop stations in markets across the nation? Because we pioneered the concept. Why have we created a new 'Music with Class' format in St. Louis' Red 104.1? Because we believe we see a new opportunity. We know that successful companies don't follow the pack. They lead it, and that's what we'll always do.\n\n## The year ahead\n\nThat last point - innovation - is an important one, especially for the future of Emmis, because we are planning something\n\nthat could change the face of American TV and once again demonstrate that Emmis is a company that leads the way.\n\nForty years ago, Americans began taking down their TV antennas and severing broadcasters' direct link to television audiences. Since then, the cable companies-the middlemen who replaced us-have created more than $300 billion of value for themselves. However, changes in technology have given broadcasters the ability to provide the American public with the most popular TV channels, without the middlemen and at a more reasonable price.\n\nWe are developing an innovative model that will leverage that technology to get broadcast companies back into the game. I believe it has the potential to revolutionize the television industry. I also believe it will add substantial value to your investment.\n\nWe unveiled this concept at the National Association of Broadcasters meeting in April. I am proud to say that 11 other television companies joined us at that meeting to express their support for what we're calling the Broadcasters' Initiative, and more are signing on each week. Once again, Emmis has leveraged innovation to take a leading role in our industries.\n\nWe'll continue to use innovation to push us forward. Meanwhile, we'll also build and maintain the best teams, produce the best media content, outhustle and outsell our competitors, seize the best opportunities and operate this company better than any other.\n\nIn other words, you can count on Emmis to continue to do what it has always done: Outperform.\n\nThank you for your belief and investment in Emmis.\n\nJeffrey H. Smulyan\n\nchairman & ceo emmis communications", + "recall": 0.9301075268817204, + "true_md": "what it has always done: outperform.\n\nIn addition, we commit ourselves to creating the best content in our markets. Our magazines routinely dominate their industry awards ceremonies – last year, Texas Monthly won a coveted National Magazine Award, and Emmis publications claimed more than half of the awards at the City and Regional Magazine competition. Our radio stations feature some of the industry’s most popular personalities – in 2003, Emmis people and stations were awarded three Marconi Radio Awards. And our television operations are regularly honored by journalism organizations for their news gathering and community service. In short, we provide our markets with reliable, high-quality content – content that helps us assemble the audiences our advertisers want to reach. \n\nWe then generate revenue by overallocating to sales. We give our teams well-developed strategies, clearly defined brands and solid products. We build bigger, better sales forces and put a greater emphasis on local dollars than our competitors. We hire aggressive managers, set ambitious goals and then watch our people work harder and smarter than anyone else.\n\nthat could change the face of American TV and once again demonstrate that Emmis is a company that leads the way.\n\nForty years ago, Americans began taking down their TV antennas and severing broadcasters’ direct link to television audiences. Since then, the cable companies—the middlemen who replaced us—have created more than $300 billion of value for themselves. However, changes in technology have given broadcasters the ability to provide the American public with the most popular TV channels, without the middlemen and at a more reasonable price. \n\nWe are developing an innovative model that will leverage that technology to get broadcast companies back into the game. I believe it has the potential to revolutionize the television industry. I also believe it will add substantial value to your investment. \n\nWe also seize the right opportunities and make the most of them. As the cost of buying radio properties has gone through the roof, we have been careful about buying. However, when we had a chance to acquire the LBJ stations in Austin, we knew it was the right fit: good stations, a tremendous heritage and a great culture, all with an opportu- nity for growth. And we’ve already built on that group’s track record – since we bought them, we’ve reformatted one sta- tion and quickly sent it to No. 1 in the market, and we’ve pushed revenues up 9 percent for the entire group.\n\nFinally, we innovate. Why has Emmis, traditionally a radio company, become the company to emulate in TV? Because we approached TV in a way it’s never been approached before. Why do we operate leading hip-hop stations in mar- kets across the nation? Because we pioneered the concept. Why have we created a new “Music with Class” format in St. Louis’ Red 104.1? Because we believe we see a new oppor- tunity. We know that successful companies don’t follow the pack. They lead it, and that’s what we’ll always do.\n\nWe’ll continue to use innovation to push us forward. Meanwhile, we’ll also build and maintain the best teams, pro- duce the best media content, outhustle and outsell our com- petitors, seize the best opportunities and operate this com- pany better than any other.\n\nIn other words, you can count on Emmis to continue to do what it has always done: Outperform.\n\nThank you for your belief and investment in Emmis.\n\nWe unveiled this concept at the National Association of Broadcasters meeting in April. I am proud to say that 11 other television companies joined us at that meeting to express their support for what we’re calling the Broadcasters’ Initiative, and more are signing on each week. Once again, Emmis has leveraged innovation to take a leading role in our industries.\n\nThat last point – innovation – is an important one, especially for the future of Emmis, because we are planning something\n\n## The year ahead\n\nJeffrey H. Smulyan chairman & ceo emmis communications" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.978263753263002, + "doc_id": "4c86d458f538c739ae5cd7034f6ad3a02def6d796cf17383c0e91fe60b1dff2b", + "edit_distance": 0.06666666666666667, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999814814814815, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "1 4\n\n## Consolidated Balance Sheet Data:\n\n## CHAIN BRIDGE, Budapest\n\nThe Chain Bridge, built from 1839 to 1849, was the first bridge over the Danube, linking the cities Buda and Pest. Measuring 380 meters long and 15.7 meters wide, it is supported by pillars shaped like antique triumphal arches.", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## Consolidated Balance Sheet Data:\n\n## CHAIN BRIDGE, Budapest\n\nThe Chain Bridge, built from 1839 to 1849, was the first bridge over the Danube, linking the cities Buda and Pest. Measuring 380 meters long and 15.7 meters wide, it is supported by pillars shaped like antique triumphal arches.\n\n1 4" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6333411593963718, + "doc_id": "1ddf9ef641e877d3da16c8c6b5ccb87bbb43266280e238ff6c7de1adafe8b9c2", + "edit_distance": 0.24820143884892087, + "f1_score": 0.8175675675675677, + "meteor": 0.7557426484714443, + "precision": 0.8581560283687943, + "pred_md": "Terry Wilkinson has vision. Show him an empty tract of land, and the wheels start turning.\n\nWilkinson's various enterprises have created some of the most profitable developments in Southlake, Texas, a once-sleepy town whose name has become synonymous with upscale living and commerce in the Dallas-Fort Worth Metroplex.\n\n'I've been in business on my own since the early '90s, and a customer of First Financial Bank in Southlake for about six years,' says Wilkinson. He works with the bank to finance numerous projects, such as residential developments, office buildings and large-scale shopping centers. 'Naturally, I work with several banks, but I consider First Financial the easiest to work with.'\n\nWilkinson believes the bank's local perspective gives it better vision for what can succeed in the community. That translates into better performance. 'I prefer dealing with banks where things don't have to be sent off to people you've never met for a decision. With First Financial, they've gotten to know me, and they understand my business.\n\n'First Financial doesn't seem like a bank that's owned by an outof-town company. That's why they're my preferred lender.'\n\n## 'First Financial doesn ' t seem like a bank that' s owned by an out-oftown company.'\n\nTerry Wilkinson Commercial/Residential Developer Southlake, Texas\n\n10", + "recall": 0.7806451612903226, + "true_md": "Terry Wilkinson has vision. Show him an empty tract of land, and the wheels start turning.\n\nWilkinson’s various enterprises have created some of the most pr of- itable developments in Southlake, Texas, a once-sleepy town whose name has become synonymous with upscale living and com- merce in the Dallas-Fort Worth Metroplex.\n\n“I’ve been in business on my own since the early ’90s, and a cus- tomer of First Financial Bank in Southlake for about six years,” says Wilkinson. He works with the bank to finance numerous pr ojects, such as residential developments, office buildings and lar ge-scale shopping centers. “Naturally, I work with several banks, but I con- sider First Financial the easiest to work with.”\n\nWilkinson believes the bank’s local perspective gives it better vision for what can succeed in the community. That translates into better performance. “I prefer dealing with banks where things don’t have to be sent off to people you’ve never met for a decision. With First Financial, they’ve gotten to know me, and they under- stand my business.\n\n“First Financial doesn’t seem like a bank that’s owned by an out- of-town company. That’s why they’re my preferred lender.”\n\n## “First Financial doesn’t seem like a bank that’s owned by an out-of- town company.” i re nur 4 Cy\n\nTe rry Wilkinson Commercial/Residential Developer Southlake, Texas\n\n10" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9453020155253716, + "doc_id": "a5802888e8b7be276bd364024952c314eeda194c503e4bd58411a28f4581571f", + "edit_distance": 0.7528675703858185, + "f1_score": 0.9637462235649547, + "meteor": 0.7882547602040987, + "precision": 0.9906832298136646, + "pred_md": "Grocery Products: Grocery Products net sales decreased 3.8 percent for the fourth quarter and increased 2.5 percent for the year compared to fiscal 2002. Sales tonnage volume decreased 3.4 percent for the quarter but finished the year up 1.1 percent compared to fiscal 2002. Operating profit for Grocery Products decreased 25.9 percent for the quarter and increased 1.6 percent for the year compared to fiscal 2002. This segment experienced lower average raw material costs until late in the second quarter of fiscal 2003. Since that time, raw materials increased substantially while product pricing remained relatively stable thereby pressuring product margins and causing a reduction in third and fourth quarter profits.\n\nLower tonnage volume also impaired the operating profits of this segment. Fourth quarter tonnage volume declines compared to fiscal 2002 included Dinty Moore Classic Bakes dinner kit casseroles (down 4,766,000 lbs., or 74.5 percent) and Dinty Moore canned products (down 1,937,000 lbs., or 8.4 percent). The Dinty Moore Classic Bakes dinner kits comparison is to an initial pipeline sell-in, as this line was introduced late in the third quarter of fiscal 2002. Hormel chili posted a strong fourth quarter volume gain of 4,097,000 lbs. (12.9 percent) over fiscal 2002; however, significantly higher raw material costs, primarily beef, more than offset any positive impact on operating profits.\n\nRefrigerated Foods: The Refrigerated Foods segment net sales were up 8.2 percent for the fourth quarter and 1.9 percent for the twelve months compared to fiscal 2002. Operating profit increased 183.3 and 44.8 percent for the quarter and fiscal year, respectively, compared to fiscal 2002. Sales tonnage decreased 8.0 percent for the quarter and 5.6 percent for the year compared to fiscal 2002 results. Tonnage volume was negatively affected by the discontinuance of hog processing, effective January 3, 2003, at the company's Rochelle, Illinois, facility. The company's hog processing for fiscal 2003 declined 9.8 percent to 6,904,000 hogs from 7,651,000 hogs for the comparable period of fiscal 2002. The Rochelle facility is being converted to a 100 percent value-added product processing facility, which will help meet the increasing demand for the company's branded products.\n\nRefrigerated Foods operating profit substantially increased in fiscal 2003 primarily due to the return of cash hog prices to more normal levels, allowing the company to purchase its raw materials under its hog procurement contracts at costs consistent with those hogs available in the cash market. This market turnaround began in the company's third quarter and continued through the end of the year, resulting in strong second half results.\n\nPrior to the second half recovery in cash hog markets, much of the progress achieved by the company in expanding its value-added portfolio of products was masked by the higher costs on procurement contracts. Product lines performing particularly well in the company's Meat Products business unit, with fourth quarter volume gains over fiscal 2002, were premium dinner hams (up 760,000 lbs., or 6.0 percent), refrigerated entrees (up 872,000 lbs., or 16.8 percent), and deli products (up 1,221,000 lbs., or 4.4 percent). Volume growth was also enhanced as the Precept Foods operation continued to expand sales of its Hormel Always Tender branded products. The Precept Foods joint venture began shipping products in the third quarter of fiscal 2003.\n\nThe Foodservice business unit contributed to the improved operating profits as key product lines continued to achieve solid volume gains. Fourth quarter tonnage volume increases over the fiscal 2002 comparable quarter were 196,000 lbs. (17.5 percent) for Austin Blues BBQ products, 457,000 lbs. (27.8 percent) for Always Tender boneless pork, and 533,000 lbs. (12.0 percent) for Bread Ready meats. The third quarter 2002 launch of the café h line of products continues to progress with fourth quarter tonnage volume up 368,000 lbs. (265.4 percent) over fiscal 2002 and sequential volume up 118,000 lbs. (30.3 percent).\n\nJennie-O Turkey Store: Jennie-O Turkey Store (JOTS) net sales for the quarter and year increased 6.0 and 4.8 percent, respectively, compared to fiscal 2002 periods. Operating profit decreased 14.6 percent for the quarter and 40.1 percent for the year compared to fiscal 2002. Tonnage volume increased 3.4 percent for the quarter and 4.1 percent for the year compared to fiscal 2002 results. JOTS began scaling back its live turkey production in the third quarter of fiscal 2003 in order to accelerate its reduction of commodity product sales.\n\nThroughout fiscal 2003, excess commodity turkey meat in the marketplace had a significant negative impact on JOTS profits. However, during the fourth quarter, industry supplies moderated and turkey meat commodity prices began increasing to more normal price levels.\n\nThroughout fiscal 2003, JOTS enhanced its value-added product portfolio with strong tonnage volume growth over fiscal 2002. Notable value-added product performers with twelve month volume gains over fiscal 2002 were Jennie-O Turkey Store homestyle turkey breast (up 2,336,000 lbs., or 23.9 percent), Jennie-O Turkey Store oven roasted products (up 2,619,000 lbs., or 7.6 percent), and Jennie-O Turkey Store regular and savory seasoned frozen burgers (up 2,916,000 lbs., or 33.1 percent).\n\n2004 Annual Report\n\n25", + "recall": 0.9382352941176471, + "true_md": "Grocery Products: Grocery Products net sales decreased 3.8 percent for the fourth quarter and increased 2.5 percent for the year compared to fiscal 2002. Sales tonnage volume decreased 3.4 percent for the quarter but finished the year up 1.1 percent compared to fiscal 2002. Operating profit for Grocery Products decreased 25.9 percent for the quarter and increased 1.6 percent for the year compared to fiscal 2002. This segment experienced lower average raw material costs until late in the second quarter of fiscal 2003. Since that time, raw materials increased substan- tially while product pricing remained relatively stable thereby pressuring product margins and causing a reduction in third and fourth quarter profits. \n\nPrior to the second half recovery in cash hog markets, much of the progress achieved by the company in expanding its value-added portfolio of products was masked by the higher costs on procure- ment contracts. Product lines performing particularly well in the company’s Meat Products business unit, with fourth quarter vol- ume gains over fiscal 2002, were premium dinner hams (up 760,000 lbs., or 6.0 percent), refrigerated entrees (up 872,000 lbs., or 16.8 percent), and deli products (up 1,221,000 lbs., or 4.4 percent). Volume growth was also enhanced as the Precept Foods operation continued to expand sales of its Hormel Always Tender branded products. The Precept Foods joint venture began shipping products in the third quarter of fiscal 2003. \n\nThe Foodservice business unit contributed to the improved operat- ing profits as key product lines continued to achieve solid volume gains. Fourth quarter tonnage volume increases over the fiscal 2002 comparable quarter were 196,000 lbs. (17.5 percent) for Austin Blues BBQ products, 457,000 lbs. (27.8 percent) for Always Tender boneless pork, and 533,000 lbs. (12.0 percent) for Bread Ready meats. The third quarter 2002 launch of the café h line of products continues to progress with fourth quarter tonnage volume up 368,000 lbs. (265.4 percent) over fiscal 2002 and sequential volume up 118,000 lbs. (30.3 percent). \n\nLower tonnage volume also impaired the operating profits of this segment. Fourth quarter tonnage volume declines compared to fiscal 2002 included Dinty Moore Classic Bakes dinner kit casseroles (down 4,766,000 lbs., or 74.5 percent) and Dinty Moore canned products (down 1,937,000 lbs., or 8.4 percent). The Dinty Moore Classic Bakes dinner kits comparison is to an ini- tial pipeline sell-in, as this line was introduced late in the third quar- ter of fiscal 2002. Hormel chili posted a strong fourth quarter volume gain of 4,097,000 lbs. (12.9 percent) over fiscal 2002; however, significantly higher raw material costs, primarily beef, more than offset any positive impact on operating profits. \n\nJennie-O Turkey Store: Jennie-O Turkey Store (JOTS) net sales for the quarter and year increased 6.0 and 4.8 percent, respectively, compared to fiscal 2002 periods. Operating profit decreased 14.6 percent for the quarter and 40.1 percent for the year compared to fiscal 2002. Tonnage volume increased 3.4 per- cent for the quarter and 4.1 percent for the year compared to fiscal 2002 results. JOTS began scaling back its live turkey production in the third quarter of fiscal 2003 in order to accelerate its reduc- tion of commodity product sales. \n\nRefrigerated Foods: The Refrigerated Foods segment net sales were up 8.2 percent for the fourth quarter and 1.9 percent for the twelve months compared to fiscal 2002. Operating profit increased 183.3 and 44.8 percent for the quarter and fiscal year, respectively, compared to fiscal 2002. Sales tonnage decreased 8.0 percent for the quarter and 5.6 percent for the year compared to fiscal 2002 results. Tonnage volume was negatively affected by the dis- continuance of hog processing, effective January 3, 2003, at the company’s Rochelle, Illinois, facility. The company’s hog process- ing for fiscal 2003 declined 9.8 percent to 6,904,000 hogs from 7,651,000 hogs for the comparable period of fiscal 2002. The Rochelle facility is being converted to a 100 percent value-added product processing facility, which will help meet the increasing demand for the company’s branded products. \n\nThroughout fiscal 2003, excess commodity turkey meat in the marketplace had a significant negative impact on JOTS profits. However, during the fourth quarter, industry supplies moderated and turkey meat commodity prices began increasing to more normal price levels. \n\nThroughout fiscal 2003, JOTS enhanced its value-added product portfolio with strong tonnage volume growth over fiscal 2002. Notable value-added product performers with twelve month volume gains over fiscal 2002 were Jennie-O Turkey Store homestyle turkey breast (up 2,336,000 lbs., or 23.9 percent), Jennie-O Turkey Store oven roasted products (up 2,619,000 lbs., or 7.6 percent), and Jennie-O Turkey Store regular and savory seasoned frozen burgers (up 2,916,000 lbs., or 33.1 percent).\n\nRefrigerated Foods operating profit substantially increased in fiscal 2003 primarily due to the return of cash hog prices to more normal levels, allowing the company to purchase its raw materials under its hog procurement contracts at costs consistent with those hogs available in the cash market. This market turnaround began in the company’s third quarter and continued through the end of the year, resulting in strong second half results. \n\n2004 Annual Report 25" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9098180966740246, + "doc_id": "d54ab6f488a3c159be719bda633dc09f7c969ba8aae2da23cc76dbcab1a7364b", + "edit_distance": 0.08163265306122448, + "f1_score": 0.9600000000000002, + "meteor": 0.9610202175335887, + "precision": 0.9836065573770492, + "pred_md": "## deploying cash prudently\n\nHormel Foods is one of the food industry's most reliable financial performers because we are disciplined about maintaining a sound financial position. At the end of fiscal 2004, debt accounted for 21 percent of our total capitalization, while cash from operations totaled $295 million. In addition to directing available cash to acquisitions that meet our demanding standards for financial return and strategic contribution, we use cash to reward shareholders through dividend payments and common stock repurchases.\n\n## sound governance\n\nSound governance on behalf of shareholders has been a top priority at Hormel Foods for many years. Having a predominantly independent board of directors is a practice that significantly predates the new mandates. We also have long required that all board members on the Audit, Compensation, Governance, and Contingency Committees be independent. In addition, all of our directors stand for election each year. For more details about our corporate governance, please go to our Web site at www.hormel.com and refer to our corporate governance section.\n\n2004 Annual Report\n\n15", + "recall": 0.9375, + "true_md": "## deploying cash prudently\n\n## sound governance\n\nHormel Foods is one of the food industry’s most reliable financial performers because we are disciplined about maintaining a sound financial position. At the end of fiscal 2004, debt accounted for 21 percent of our total capitalization, while cash from operations totaled $295 million. In addition to directing available cash to acquisitions that meet our demanding standards for financial return and strategic contribution, we use cash to reward shareholders through dividend payments and common stock repurchases.\n\nSound governance on behalf of shareholders has been a top priority at Hormel Foods for many years. Having a predominantly independ- ent board of directors is a practice that signifi- cantly predates the new mandates. We also have long required that all board members on the Audit, Compensation, Governance, and Contingency Committees be independent. In addition, all of our directors stand for election each year. For more details about our corpo- rate governance, please go to our Web site at www.hormel.com and refer to our corporate governance section.\n\n2004 Annual Report 15" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.007689138099889831, + "doc_id": "dbc51622cbe9b8766f44db3b3fda8d0a745da06b9bfec9935bd003d2bdd494c8", + "edit_distance": 0.7840210711150132, + "f1_score": 0.13793103448275865, + "meteor": 0.12983130422578232, + "precision": 0.08403361344537816, + "pred_md": "## glyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium> ÕÃÌ œ“ˆâi'Ê>˜'Êvi݈LiÊ܏Ṏœ˜ÃÊ Ê >VÀœÃÃÊÌ>À}iÌi'Êi˜'ʓ>ÀŽiÌÃo\n\n/…ˆÃÊÀi«œÀÌÊVœ˜Ì>ˆ˜ÃÊvœÀÜ>À'‡œœŽˆ˜}ÊÃÌ>Ìi“i˜ÌÃÊ܈̅ˆ˜Ê̅iʓi>˜ˆ˜}ʜvÊ-iV̈œ˜ÊÓÇglyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAG+HelveticaNeue-Light>ʜvÊ̅iÊ-iVÕÀˆÌˆiÃÊglyph<c=13,font=/AAAAAG+HelveticaNeue-Light>ÝV…>˜}iÊglyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAG+HelveticaNeue-Light>VÌʜvÊ£™ÎÎÊ>˜'Ê-iV̈œ˜ÊÓ£glyph<c=13,font=/AAAAAG+HelveticaNeue-Light>ʜvÊ̅iÊ -iVÕÀˆÌˆiÃÊglyph<c=13,font=/AAAAAG+HelveticaNeue-Light>ÝV…>˜}iÊglyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAG+HelveticaNeue-Light>VÌʜvÊ£™Î{°Êglyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAG+HelveticaNeue-Light>VÌÕ>ÊiÛi˜ÌÃÊ>˜'ɜÀÊvÕÌÕÀiÊÀiÃՏÌÃʜvʜ«iÀ>̈œ˜Ãʓ>ÞÊ'ˆvviÀʓ>ÌiÀˆ>ÞÊvÀœ“Ê̅œÃiÊVœ˜Ìi“«>Ìi'ÊLÞÊÃÕV…ÊvœÀÜ>À'‡œœŽˆ˜}Ê ÃÌ>Ìi“i˜ÌÃ]Ê>ÃÊ>ÊÀiÃՏÌʜvÊ̅iÊv>V̜ÀÃÊ'iÃVÀˆLi'ʅiÀiˆ˜]Ê>˜'ʈ˜Ê̅iÊ'œVՓi˜ÌÃʈ˜VœÀ«œÀ>Ìi'ʅiÀiˆ˜ÊLÞÊÀiviÀi˜Vi]ʈ˜VÕ'ˆ˜}]ʈ˜Ê«>À̈VՏ>À]Ê̅œÃiÊv>V̜ÀÃÊ 'iÃVÀˆLi'Ê՘'iÀʺglyph<c=19,font=/AAAAAG+HelveticaNeue-Light>>V̜ÀÃÊglyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAG+HelveticaNeue-Light>vviV̈˜}Ê\"«iÀ>̈˜}Ê,iÃՏÌûʈ˜VÕ'i'Ê՘'iÀÊglyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAG+HelveticaNeue-Light>Ìi“ÊÇÊqʺglyph<c=31,font=/AAAAAG+HelveticaNeue-Light>>˜>}i“i˜Ì½ ÃÊglyph<c=12,font=/AAAAAG+HelveticaNeue-Light>ˆÃVÕÃȜ˜Ê>˜'Êglyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAG+HelveticaNeue-Light>˜>ÞÈÃʜvÊglyph<c=19,font=/AAAAAG+HelveticaNeue-Light>ˆ˜>˜Vˆ>Êglyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAG+HelveticaNeue-Light>œ˜'ˆÌˆœ˜Ê>˜'Ê,iÃՏÌÃÊ œvÊ\"«iÀ>̈œ˜Ã»ÊœvÊ->˜“ˆ˜>‡-glyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAG+HelveticaNeue-Light>glyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAG+HelveticaNeue-Light>½ ÃÊÀi«œÀÌʜ˜ÊvœÀ“Ê£ä‡glyph<c=28,font=/AAAAAG+HelveticaNeue-Light>ÊvœÀÊvˆÃV>ÊÓää{°Ê-ˆ}˜ˆvˆV>˜ÌÊv>V̜ÀÃÊ̅>ÌÊ>vviVÌÊ->˜“ˆ˜>‡-glyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAG+HelveticaNeue-Light>glyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAG+HelveticaNeue-Light>½ ÃÊLÕȘiÃÃʈ˜VÕ'iÊV…>˜}iÃʈ˜ÊiVœ˜œ“ˆVÊ Vœ˜'ˆÌˆœ˜Ãʈ˜Ê̅iÊiiVÌÀœ˜ˆVÃʈ˜'ÕÃÌÀÞʈ˜Ê}i˜iÀ>Ê>˜'ʈ˜Ê̅iÊiiVÌÀœ˜ˆVÃʈ˜'ÕÃÌÀÞÊÃiV̜ÀÃÊÃiÀÛi'ÊLÞÊ->˜“ˆ˜>‡-glyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAG+HelveticaNeue-Light>glyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAG+HelveticaNeue-Light>ʈ˜Ê«>À̈VՏ>ÀÆÊV…>˜}iÃʈ˜Ê'i“>˜'ÊvœÀʜÕÀÊ ˆ}…iÀÊi˜']ʓœÃÌÊVœ“«iÝʓ>˜Õv>VÌÕÀˆ˜}]Êi˜}ˆ˜iiÀˆ˜}Ê>˜'Ê'iÈ}˜ÊÃiÀۈViÃÊ>˜'ÊV…>˜}iÃʈ˜Ê«Àœ'ÕVÌÊ>˜'ÊÃiÀۈViÃʓˆÝÊLiV>ÕÃiʏœÜiÀÊۜÕ“i]ʓœÀiÊ Vœ“«iÝʓ>˜Õv>VÌÕÀˆ˜}ÊÀi>Ìi'ÊÃiÀۈViÃÊÌÞ«ˆV>ÞÊ«ÀœÛˆ'iÊÕÃÊ܈̅ʅˆ}…iÀʓ>À}ˆ˜ÃÊ̅>˜Ê…ˆ}…iÀÊۜÕ“i]ʏiÃÃÊVœ“«iÝÊÃiÀۈViÃÆʏ>VŽÊœvʏœ˜}ÊÌiÀ“ÊۜÕ“iÊ «ÕÀV…>ÃiÊVœ““ˆÌ“i˜ÌÃÊvÀœ“Ê«Àˆ˜Vˆ«>ÊVÕÃ̜“iÀÃÊ>˜'ÊV…>˜}iÃÊ>˜'ÊvÕVÌÕ>̈œ˜Ãʈ˜Ê'i“>˜'ÊvœÀʜÕÀÊÃiÀۈViÃÊvÀœ“ÊœÕÀÊ«Àˆ˜Vˆ«>ÊVÕÃ̜“iÀÃÆÊÀˆÃŽÃÊ>ÃÜVˆ>Ìi'Ê ÜˆÌ…ÊœÕÀÊi˜ÌÀÞʈ˜ÌœÊ̅iʜÀˆ}ˆ˜>Ê'iÈ}˜Ê“>˜Õv>VÌÕÀiÊ­\"glyph<c=12,font=/AAAAAG+HelveticaNeue-Light>glyph<c=31,font=/AAAAAG+HelveticaNeue-Light>®ÊLÕȘiÃÃÊ̅ÀœÕ}…Ê̅iÊ>VµÕˆÃˆÌˆœ˜ÊœvÊ i܈ÃÞÃ]Êglyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAG+HelveticaNeue-Light>˜V°ÆÊ«œÃÈLiʘii'Ê̜Ê>vviVÌÊvÕÀ̅iÀÊÀiÃÌÀÕVÌÕÀˆ˜}ʜvÊ œÕÀÊLÕȘiÃÃÊ>˜'ʜ«iÀ>̈œ˜ÃÆÊÀˆÃŽÃÊ>ÃÜVˆ>Ìi'Ê܈̅ÊVœ“«ï̈œ˜]ÊÌiV…˜œœ}ˆV>ÊV…>˜}iÊ>˜'ÊVœ˜Ãœˆ'>̈œ˜Êˆ˜Ê̅iÊiiVÌÀœ˜ˆVÃʈ˜'ÕÃÌÀÞÆÊÀˆÃŽÃÊÀi>Ìi'Ê̜Ê̅iÊ }œL>Ê˜>ÌÕÀiʜvʜÕÀÊLÕȘiÃÃÊ>˜'ʜ«iÀ>̈œ˜Ãʈ˜VÕ'ˆ˜}ÊVÕÀÀi˜VÞÊvÕVÌÕ>̈œ˜Ã]ÊÛ>Àވ˜}ʈ˜ÌiÀ˜>̈œ˜>ÊiVœ˜œ“ˆVÊVœ˜'ˆÌˆœ˜Ã]Ê«œˆÌˆV>ÊVœ˜ViÀ˜ÃÊ>˜'Ê̅iʘii'ÊÌœÊ “>˜>}iÊ>Ê}œL>Êi˜ÌiÀ«ÀˆÃiÆÊÀˆÃŽÃ‡Ài>Ìi'Ê̜Êi˜ÛˆÀœ˜“i˜Ì>Ê“>ÌÌiÀÃÊ̅>ÌÊ>vviVÌʜÕÀÊLÕȘiÃÃÊ>˜'ʜ«iÀ>̈œ˜ÃÆÊ>˜'ÊÀˆÃŽÃÊÀi>Ìi'Ê̜ʈ˜ÌiiVÌÕ>Ê«Àœ«iÀÌÞÊÀˆ}…Ìð\n\nglyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAE+JansonText-BoldItalic> œÛiÀ Ñ glyph<c=13,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman> ˜ }ˆ˜iiÀÃÊ ÌiÃÌÊ ÌiiVœ““Õ˜ˆV>̈œ˜ÃÊÃ>ÌiˆÌiʈ˜ÊÀ>`>Àʓi>ÃÕÀˆ˜}ÊVÕLi°", + "recall": 0.38461538461538464, + "true_md": "## Õ Ã Ì œ “ ˆ â i ` Ê > ˜ ` Ê v  i Ý ˆ L  i Ê Ã œ  Õ Ì ˆ œ ˜ Ã Ê Ê > V À œ Ã Ã Ê Ì > À } i Ì i ` Ê i ˜ ` Ê “ > À Ž i Ì Ã o\n\n/ … ˆ Ã Ê À i « œ À Ì Ê V œ ˜ Ì > ˆ ˜ Ã Ê v œ À Ü > À ` ‡  œ œ Ž ˆ ˜ } Ê Ã Ì > Ì i “ i ˜ Ì Ã Ê Ü ˆ Ì … ˆ ˜ Ê Ì … i Ê “ i > ˜ ˆ ˜ } Ê œ v Ê - i V Ì ˆ œ ˜ Ê Ó Ç Ê œ v Ê Ì … i Ê - i V Õ À ˆ Ì ˆ i Ã Ê Ý V … > ˜ } i Ê V Ì Ê œ v Ê £ ™ Î Î Ê > ˜ ` Ê - i V Ì ˆ œ ˜ Ê Ó £ Ê œ v Ê Ì … i Ê - i V Õ À ˆ Ì ˆ i Ã Ê Ý V … > ˜ } i Ê V Ì Ê œ v Ê £ ™ Î { ° Ê V Ì Õ >  Ê i Û i ˜ Ì Ã Ê > ˜ ` É œ À Ê v Õ Ì Õ À i Ê À i Ã Õ  Ì Ã Ê œ v Ê œ « i À > Ì ˆ œ ˜ Ã Ê “ > Þ Ê ` ˆ v v i À Ê “ > Ì i À ˆ >   Þ Ê v À œ “ Ê Ì … œ à i Ê V œ ˜ Ì i “ «  > Ì i ` Ê L Þ Ê Ã Õ V … Ê v œ À Ü > À ` ‡  œ œ Ž ˆ ˜ } Ê Ã Ì > Ì i “ i ˜ Ì Ã ] Ê > Ã Ê > Ê À i Ã Õ  Ì Ê œ v Ê Ì … i Ê v > V Ì œ À Ã Ê ` i à V À ˆ L i ` Ê … i À i ˆ ˜ ] Ê > ˜ ` Ê ˆ ˜ Ê Ì … i Ê ` œ V Õ “ i ˜ Ì Ã Ê ˆ ˜ V œ À « œ À > Ì i ` Ê … i À i ˆ ˜ Ê L Þ Ê À i v i À i ˜ V i ] Ê ˆ ˜ V  Õ ` ˆ ˜ } ] Ê ˆ ˜ Ê « > À Ì ˆ V Õ  > À ] Ê Ì … œ à i Ê v > V Ì œ À Ã Ê ` i à V À ˆ L i ` Ê Õ ˜ ` i À Ê º > V Ì œ À Ã Ê v v i V Ì ˆ ˜ } Ê \" « i À > Ì ˆ ˜ } Ê , i Ã Õ  Ì Ã » Ê ˆ ˜ V  Õ ` i ` Ê Õ ˜ ` i À Ê Ì i “ Ê Ç Ê q Ê º > ˜ > } i “ i ˜ Ì ½ Ã Ê ˆ à V Õ Ã Ã ˆ œ ˜ Ê > ˜ ` Ê ˜ >  Þ Ã ˆ Ã Ê œ v Ê ˆ ˜ > ˜ V ˆ >  Ê œ ˜ ` ˆ Ì ˆ œ ˜ Ê > ˜ ` Ê , i Ã Õ  Ì Ã Ê œ v Ê \" « i À > Ì ˆ œ ˜ à » Ê œ v Ê - > ˜ “ ˆ ˜ > ‡ - ½ Ã Ê À i « œ À Ì Ê œ ˜ Ê v œ À “ Ê £ ä ‡ Ê v œ À Ê v ˆ à V >  Ê Ó ä ä { ° Ê - ˆ } ˜ ˆ v ˆ V > ˜ Ì Ê v > V Ì œ À Ã Ê Ì … > Ì Ê > v v i V Ì Ê - > ˜ “ ˆ ˜ > ‡ - ½ Ã Ê L Õ Ã ˆ ˜ i Ã Ã Ê ˆ ˜ V  Õ ` i Ê V … > ˜ } i Ã Ê ˆ ˜ Ê i V œ ˜ œ “ ˆ V Ê V œ ˜ ` ˆ Ì ˆ œ ˜ Ã Ê ˆ ˜ Ê Ì … i Ê i  i V Ì À œ ˜ ˆ V Ã Ê ˆ ˜ ` Õ Ã Ì À Þ Ê ˆ ˜ Ê } i ˜ i À >  Ê > ˜ ` Ê ˆ ˜ Ê Ì … i Ê i  i V Ì À œ ˜ ˆ V Ã Ê ˆ ˜ ` Õ Ã Ì À Þ Ê Ã i V Ì œ À Ã Ê Ã i À Û i ` Ê L Þ Ê - > ˜ “ ˆ ˜ > ‡ - Ê ˆ ˜ Ê « > À Ì ˆ V Õ  > À Æ Ê V … > ˜ } i Ã Ê ˆ ˜ Ê ` i “ > ˜ ` Ê v œ À Ê œ Õ À Ê … ˆ } … i À Ê i ˜ ` ] Ê “ œ Ã Ì Ê V œ “ «  i Ý Ê “ > ˜ Õ v > V Ì Õ À ˆ ˜ } ] Ê i ˜ } ˆ ˜ i i À ˆ ˜ } Ê > ˜ ` Ê ` i à ˆ } ˜ Ê Ã i À Û ˆ V i Ã Ê > ˜ ` Ê V … > ˜ } i Ã Ê ˆ ˜ Ê « À œ ` Õ V Ì Ê > ˜ ` Ê Ã i À Û ˆ V i Ã Ê “ ˆ Ý Ê L i V > Õ Ã i Ê  œ Ü i À Ê Û œ  Õ “ i ] Ê “ œ À i Ê V œ “ «  i Ý Ê “ > ˜ Õ v > V Ì Õ À ˆ ˜ } Ê À i  > Ì i ` Ê Ã i À Û ˆ V i Ã Ê Ì Þ « ˆ V >   Þ Ê « À œ Û ˆ ` i Ê Õ Ã Ê Ü ˆ Ì … Ê … ˆ } … i À Ê “ > À } ˆ ˜ Ã Ê Ì … > ˜ Ê … ˆ } … i À Ê Û œ  Õ “ i ] Ê  i Ã Ã Ê V œ “ «  i Ý Ê Ã i À Û ˆ V i Ã Æ Ê  > V Ž Ê œ v Ê  œ ˜ } Ê Ì i À “ Ê Û œ  Õ “ i Ê « Õ À V … > à i Ê V œ “ “ ˆ Ì “ i ˜ Ì Ã Ê v À œ “ Ê « À ˆ ˜ V ˆ « >  Ê V Õ Ã Ì œ “ i À Ã Ê > ˜ ` Ê V … > ˜ } i Ã Ê > ˜ ` Ê v  Õ V Ì Õ > Ì ˆ œ ˜ Ã Ê ˆ ˜ Ê ` i “ > ˜ ` Ê v œ À Ê œ Õ À Ê Ã i À Û ˆ V i Ã Ê v À œ “ Ê œ Õ À Ê « À ˆ ˜ V ˆ « >  Ê V Õ Ã Ì œ “ i À Ã Æ Ê À ˆ à Ž Ã Ê > à à œ V ˆ > Ì i ` Ê Ü ˆ Ì … Ê œ Õ À Ê i ˜ Ì À Þ Ê ˆ ˜ Ì œ Ê Ì … i Ê œ À ˆ } ˆ ˜ >  Ê ` i à ˆ } ˜ Ê “ > ˜ Õ v > V Ì Õ À i Ê ­ \" ® Ê L Õ Ã ˆ ˜ i Ã Ã Ê Ì … À œ Õ } … Ê Ì … i Ê > V µ Õ ˆ à ˆ Ì ˆ œ ˜ Ê œ v Ê i Ü ˆ Ã Þ Ã ] Ê ˜ V ° Æ Ê « œ à à ˆ L  i Ê ˜ i i ` Ê Ì œ Ê > v v i V Ì Ê v Õ À Ì … i À Ê À i Ã Ì À Õ V Ì Õ À ˆ ˜ } Ê œ v Ê œ Õ À Ê L Õ Ã ˆ ˜ i Ã Ã Ê > ˜ ` Ê œ « i À > Ì ˆ œ ˜ Ã Æ Ê À ˆ à Ž Ã Ê > à à œ V ˆ > Ì i ` Ê Ü ˆ Ì … Ê V œ “ « i Ì ˆ Ì ˆ œ ˜ ] Ê Ì i V … ˜ œ  œ } ˆ V >  Ê V … > ˜ } i Ê > ˜ ` Ê V œ ˜ à œ  ˆ ` > Ì ˆ œ ˜ Ê ˆ ˜ Ê Ì … i Ê i  i V Ì À œ ˜ ˆ V Ã Ê ˆ ˜ ` Õ Ã Ì À Þ Æ Ê À ˆ à Ž Ã Ê À i  > Ì i ` Ê Ì œ Ê Ì … i Ê }  œ L >  Ê ˜ > Ì Õ À i Ê œ v Ê œ Õ À Ê L Õ Ã ˆ ˜ i Ã Ã Ê > ˜ ` Ê œ « i À > Ì ˆ œ ˜ Ã Ê ˆ ˜ V  Õ ` ˆ ˜ } Ê V Õ À À i ˜ V Þ Ê v  Õ V Ì Õ > Ì ˆ œ ˜ à ] Ê Û > À Þ ˆ ˜ } Ê ˆ ˜ Ì i À ˜ > Ì ˆ œ ˜ >  Ê i V œ ˜ œ “ ˆ V Ê V œ ˜ ` ˆ Ì ˆ œ ˜ à ] Ê « œ  ˆ Ì ˆ V >  Ê V œ ˜ V i À ˜ Ã Ê > ˜ ` Ê Ì … i Ê ˜ i i ` Ê Ì œ Ê “ > ˜ > } i Ê > Ê }  œ L >  Ê i ˜ Ì i À « À ˆ à i Æ Ê À ˆ à Ž à ‡ À i  > Ì i ` Ê Ì œ Ê i ˜ Û ˆ À œ ˜ “ i ˜ Ì >  Ê “ > Ì Ì i À Ã Ê Ì … > Ì Ê > v v i V Ì Ê œ Õ À Ê L Õ Ã ˆ ˜ i Ã Ã Ê > ˜ ` Ê œ « i À > Ì ˆ œ ˜ Ã Æ Ê > ˜ ` Ê À ˆ à Ž Ã Ê À i  > Ì i ` Ê Ì œ Ê ˆ ˜ Ì i   i V Ì Õ >  Ê « À œ « i À Ì Þ Ê À ˆ } … Ì Ã ° \n\nœ Û i À Ñ ˜ } ˆ ˜ i i À Ã Ê Ì i Ã Ì Ê Ì i  i V œ “ “ Õ ˜ ˆ V > Ì ˆ œ ˜ Ã Ê Ã > Ì i   ˆ Ì i Ê ˆ ˜ Ê À > ` > À Ê “ i > Ã Õ À ˆ ˜ } Ê V Õ L i °" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7131689667465562, + "doc_id": "9924bb8d704b4eed56ca6f05626560c2c60f48db6e3e23fbcca4b3925ac74355", + "edit_distance": 0.234251968503937, + "f1_score": 0.8600000000000001, + "meteor": 0.7932025518341309, + "precision": 0.8921161825726142, + "pred_md": "## HON INDUSTRIES 2003\n\n## GUNLOCKE: YOU WOOD LOVE ME\n\n## A CASE STUDY IN TRANSFORMATION\n\nFor more than a century, Gunlocke has been known almost exclusively for quality wood seating and case goods. Today's Gunlocke is about transformation. Our goal is to leverage our history and experience in fine wood furnishings to achieve new levels of leadership in a competitive market segment. We are building our brand into a leading provider in the contract furniture market through a stronger focus on our most promising customer segments - and through fine-tuning our design and manufacturing to best meet their unique requirements.\n\nThe majority of our current efforts are on wood office solutions for the private office segment: customers in the business of delivering professional services. Typically, they're medium to large law, accounting, and investment firms, as well as certain segments of federal and state government. Of course, they're all wood lovers seeking beautiful, tailored wood solutions, which they believe project an image of stability, security, success, and prestige. We agree.\n\nWe're designing new product solutions to meet these customers' changing needs. We're applying all that we've learned over the years - on our production lines and through conversations with our customers - to improve our manufacturing processes and achieve our best product quality ever. Our goal is to develop highly functional, task-specific, wood and\n\nmixed material solutions that retain status appeal while holding costs in check.\n\nFrom new products to new showrooms, everything we're doing today reflects our allegiance to our customers' desire for continuous improvement, fresh styling, superior quality, beautiful craftsmanship, and highly customized solutions. Our design-savvy attitude is geared to the eye of the architects and designers who make brand recommendations to our end-users.\n\nA leading interior designer praises our 'consistent quality, sensitivity to critical time frames and quick delivery, and capability to change detailing and finishing to achieve a custom look.' He also speaks about the 'high touch' of Gunlocke products, the kind of warmth, comfort, and naturalness that is associated with fine wood. Citing his work with one accounting firm that has been a client for 20 years: 'We could have chosen any brand for their office renovation, but we chose Gunlocke for your blend of value and quality. Clients want both - and you give them what they need.'\n\n21", + "recall": 0.8301158301158301, + "true_md": "H O N I N D U S T R I E S 2 0 0 3\n\nFor more than a century, Gunlocke has been known almost exclusively for quality wood seating and case goods. Today’s Gunlocke is about transformation. Our goal is to leverage our history and experience in fine wood furnishings to achieve new levels of leadership in a competitive market segment. We are building our brand into a leading provider in the contract furni- ture market through a stronger focus on our most promising customer segments — and through fine-tuning our design and manufacturing to best meet their unique requirements.\n\nThe majority of our current efforts are on wood office solutions for the private office segment: customers in the busi- ness of delivering professional services. Typically, they’re medium to large law, accounting, and investment firms, as well as certain segments of federal and state government. Of course, they’re all wood lovers seeking beautiful, tailored wood solu- tions, which they believe project an image of stability, security, success, and prestige. We agree.\n\nWe’re designing new product solutions to meet these customers’ changing needs. We’re applying all that we’ve learned over the years — on our production lines and through conversations with our customers — to improve our manufac- turing processes and achieve our best product quality ever. Our goal is to develop highly functional, task-specific, wood and \n\nmixed material solutions that retain status appeal while hold- ing costs in check. \n\nFrom new products to new showrooms, everything we’re doing today reflects our allegiance to our customers’ desire for continuous improvement, fresh styling, superior quality, beautiful craftsmanship, and highly customized solu- tions. Our design-savvy attitude is geared to the eye of the architects and designers who make brand recommendations to our end-users. \n\nA leading interior designer praises our “consistent quality, sensitivity to critical time frames and quick delivery, and capability to change detailing and finishing to achieve a custom look.” He also speaks about the “high touch” of Gunlocke products, the kind of warmth, comfort, and natural- ness that is associated with fine wood. Citing his work with one accounting firm that has been a client for 20 years: “We could have chosen any brand for their office renovation, but we chose Gunlocke for your blend of value and quality. Clients want both — and you give them what they need.”\n\n21\n\n## G U N L O C K E : Y O U W O O D L O V E M E\n\n## A C A S E S T U D Y I N T R A N S F O R M A T I O N" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5419700198139404, + "doc_id": "896190757ff1e85b0929292dc82a25dee1fabf9d9fb85389ad195da377594390", + "edit_distance": 0.4155844155844156, + "f1_score": 0.7884615384615384, + "meteor": 0.9046902987852055, + "precision": 0.6949152542372882, + "pred_md": "## PAPUA NEW GUINEA\n\n## INDONESIA\n\n## East Java Basin\n\n## UNITED STATES OF AMERICA AVG WORKING INTEREST\n\n- * Santos operated.\n- (I) Includes interests held by Basin Oil Pty Ltd. By contract dated 17 February 2005, Santos agreed to acquire Basin Oil Pty Ltd effective 1 January 2005. The transaction is expected to be completed in the second quarter of 2005.\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\n43", + "recall": 0.9111111111111111, + "true_md": "Annual Report 2004 43\n\n* Santos operated.\n\n(I) Includes interests h eld by Basin Oil Pty Ltd. By contract dated 17 February 2005, Santos agreed to acquir Basin Oil Pty Ltd effective 1 January 2005. The transaction is expected to be completed in th second quarter of 2005." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.972617604308863, + "doc_id": "39d8dcf98adcc1f5e12116aba6122d19241d51c7913645546bca44eabe1f647f", + "edit_distance": 0.040169133192389, + "f1_score": 0.980821917808219, + "meteor": 0.9801443959876257, + "precision": 0.9862258953168044, + "pred_md": "SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## Note 1. Summary of Significant Accounting Policies (Continued)\n\nincome until realized. Realized gains and losses are determined on a specific identification basis. A decline in the market value of any available-for-sale security below cost that is deemed to be other than temporary results in a reduction in the carrying amount to fair value. The impairment is charged to earnings and a new cost basis for the security is established.\n\nInvestments Carried at Cost: Investments in common stock in which the Company does not have a significant ownership (less than 20%) and for which there is no ready market, are carried at cost. Information regarding investments carried at cost is reviewed continuously for evidence of impairment in value. Impairments are charged to earnings and a new cost basis for the investment is established.\n\nEquity Method Investments : Investments in partnerships and unconsolidated corporations where the Company's ownership is 20% or more, or where the Company otherwise has the ability to exercise significant influence, are reported under the equity method. Under this method, the Company's equity in earnings or losses of investees is reflected in earnings. Distributions received reduce the carrying value of these investments. The Company recognizes a loss when there is a decline in value of the investment which is other than a temporary decline.\n\nMaterials and supplies: New and reusable materials are carried in inventory at the lower of average cost or market value. Inventory held for sale, such as telephones and accessories, are carried at the lower of average cost or market value. Non-reusable material is carried at estimated salvage value.\n\nProperty, plant and equipment: Property, plant and equipment is stated at cost. The Company capitalizes all costs associated with the purchase, deployment and installation of property, plant and equipment, including interest on major capital projects during the period of their construction. Expenditures, including those on leased assets, which extend the useful life or increase its utility, are capitalized. Maintenance expense is recognized when repairs are performed. Depreciation is calculated on the straight-line method over the estimated useful lives of the assets. Depreciation expense for continuing operations was approximately 8.7%, 8.6% and 8.3% of average depreciable assets for the years 2003, 2002 and 2001, respectively. Depreciation lives are assigned to assets based on their estimated useful lives in conjunction with industry and regulatory guidelines, where applicable. Such lives, while similar, may exceed the lives that would have been used if the Company did not operate certain segments of the business in a regulated environment. The Company takes technology changes into consideration as it assigns the estimated useful lives, and monitors the remaining useful lives of asset groups to reasonably match the remaining economic life with the useful life and makes adjustments when necessary.\n\nIn June 2001, the FASB issued SFAS No. 143, 'Accounting for Asset Retirement Obligations.' SFAS No. 143 requires the Company to record the fair value of an asset retirement obligation as a liability in the period in which it incurs a legal obligation associated with the retirement of tangible long-lived assets that result from acquisition, construction, development and/or normal use of the assets. The Company also records a corresponding asset, which is depreciated over the life of the asset. Subsequent to the initial measurement of the asset retirement obligation, the obligation will be adjusted at the end of each period to reflect the passage of time and changes in the estimated future cash flows underlying the obligation. The Company adopted SFAS No. 143 on January 1, 2003. The impact of the adoption of SFAS No. 143 was the recording of a capitalized asset retirement obligation of $158 thousand, the related accumulated depreciation of $32 thousand, the present value of the future removal obligation of $249 thousand, and the cumulative effect of the accounting change of $76 thousand after taxes recorded on the consolidated statements of income.\n\nThe Company recorded the retirement obligation on towers owned where there is a legal obligation to remove the tower at the time the Company discontinues its use. The obligation was estimated based on the size of the tower. The Company's cost to remove the towers is amortized over the life of the tower. The pro forma liability on January 1, 2002 would have been $236 thousand, and was $249 thousand on December 31, 2002. On December 30, 2003, the liability was $300 thousand. The current year expense for the accretion and depreciation related to the adoption of SFAS No.143 is approximately $20 thousand before taxes.\n\nCost in excess of net assets of business acquired: In June 2001, the Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB) issued Statements of Financial Accounting Standards (SFAS) No.142, 'Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets,' which eliminates amortization of goodwill and intangible assets that have indefinite useful lives and requires annual tests of impairment of those assets. SFAS No. 142 also provides specific guidance about how to determine and measure\n\n19\n\n2003 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n■", + "recall": 0.9754768392370572, + "true_md": "## Note 1. Summary of Significant Accounting Policies (Continued)\n\nincome until realized. Realized gains and losses are determined on a specific identification basis. A decline in the market value of any available-for-sale security below cost that is deemed to be other than temporary results in a reduction in the carrying amount to fair value. The impairment is char ged to earnings and a new cost basis for the security is established. \n\nInvestments Carried at Cost: Investments in common stock in which the Company does not have a significant ownership (less than 20%) and for which there is no ready market, are carried at cost. Information regarding investments carried at cost is reviewed continuously for evidence of impairment in value. Impairments are charged to earnings and a new cost basis for the investment is established.\n\nEquity Method Investments : Investments in partnerships and unconsolidated corporations where the Company’s ownership is 20% or more, or where the Company otherwise has the ability to exercise significant influence, are reported under the equity method. Under this method, the Company’s equity in earnings or losses of investees is reflected in earnings. Distributions received reduce the carrying value of these investments. The Company recognizes a loss when there is a decline in value of the investment which is other than a temporary decline.\n\nMaterials and supplies: New and reusable materials are carried in inventory at the lower of average cost or market value. Inventory held for sale, such as telephones and accessories, are carried at the lower of average cost or market value. Non-reusable material is carried at estimated salvage value.\n\nProperty, plant and equipment: Property, plant and equipment is stated at cost. The Company capitalizes all costs associated with the purchase, deployment and installation of property, plant and equipment, including interest on major capital projects during the period of their construction. Expenditures, including those on leased assets, which extend the useful life or increase its utility, are capitalized. Maintenance expense is recognized when repairs are performed. Depreciation is calculated on the straight-line method over the estimated useful lives of the assets. Depreciation expense for continuing operations was approximately 8.7%, 8.6% and 8.3% of average depreciable assets for the years 2003, 2002 and 2001, respectively. Depreciation lives are assigned to assets based on their estimated useful lives in conjunction with industry and regulatory guidelines, where applicable. Such lives, while similar, may exceed the lives that would have been used if the Company did not operate certain segments of the business in a regulated environment. The Company takes technology changes into consideration as it assigns the estimated useful lives, and monitors the remaining useful lives of asset groups to reasonably match the remaining economic life with the useful life and makes adjustments when necessary.\n\nIn June 2001, the FASB issued SFAS No. 143, “Accounting for Asset Retirement Obligations.” SFAS No. 143 requires the Company to record the fair value of an asset retirement obligation as a liability in the period in which it incurs a legal obligation associated with the retirement of tangible long-lived assets that result from acquisition, construction, development and/or normal use of the assets. The Company also records a corresponding asset, which is depreciated over the life of the asset. Subsequent to the initial measurement of the asset retirement obligation, the obligation will be adjusted at the end of each period to reflect the passage of time and changes in the estimated future cash flows underlying the obligation. The Company adopted SFAS No. 143 on January 1, 2003. The impact of the adoption of SFAS No. 143 was the recording of a capitalized asset retirement obligation of $158 thousand, the related accumulated depreciation of $32 thousand, the present value of the future removal obligation of $249 thousand, and the cumulative effect of the accounting change of $76 thousand after taxes recorded on the consolidated statements of income.\n\nThe Company recorded the retirement obligation on towers owned where there is a legal obligation to remove the tower at the time the Company discontinues its use. The obligation was estimated based on the size of the tower. The Company’s cost to remove the towers is amortized over the life of the tower. The pro forma liability on January 1, 2002 would have been $236 thousand, and was $249 thousand on December 31, 2002. On December 30, 2003, the liability was $300 thousand. The current year expense for the accretion and depreciation related to the adoption of SFAS No.143 is approximately $20 thousand before taxes.\n\nCost in excess of net assets of business acquired: In June 2001, the Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB) issued Statements of Financial Accounting Standards (SFAS) No.142, “Goodw ill and Other Intangible Assets,” which eliminates amortization of goodwill and intangible assets that have indefinite useful lives and requires annual tests of impairment of those assets. SFAS No. 142 also provides specific guidance about how to determine and measure\n\n19 ■ 2003 ANNUAL REPORT\n\nSHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "80417b2b18046c19a8f10bde7694b97764aabc9cef6960d0d68f4b91cf9f6621", + "edit_distance": 0.040169133192389, + "f1_score": 0.980821917808219, + "meteor": 0.9801443959876257, + "precision": 0.9862258953168044, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.9754768392370572, + "true_md": "" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9414266767078238, + "doc_id": "e28835b61b746e2e153dfd21494d0be81770d4aab261d4bd39fb1da3edd41959", + "edit_distance": 0.1044776119402985, + "f1_score": 0.9838472834067546, + "meteor": 0.9580748130272864, + "precision": 0.9882005899705014, + "pred_md": "SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES MANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS\n\nThrough Sprint, the Company began receiving revenue from wholesale resellers of wireless PCS service in late 2002. These resellers pay a flat rate per minute of use for all traffic their subscribers generate on the Company's network. The Company's cost to handle this traffic is the incremental cost to provide the necessary network capacity.\n\nThe Company faces vigorous competition in the wireless business as numerous national carriers are aggressively marketing their services in the Company's markets. The competitive landscape could change significantly depending on the marketing initiatives of our competitors, or in the event of consolidation in the wireless industry.\n\nThe wireline business is made up of traditional telephony, cable TV, fiber network operations and the Company's longdistance resale business. These businesses operate in a defined geographic area. The Company's primary service area for the telephone, cable TV and long-distance business is Shenandoah County, Virginia. The county is a rural area in northwestern Virginia, with a population of approximately 37,300 inhabitants, which has increased by approximately 6,000 since 1990. The potential for significant numbers of additional customers in the current operating area is limited.\n\nThe Company's telephone subscriber count declined in the third quarter and again in the fourth quarter of 2003. Migration to wireless and DSL services are believed to be driving this change. Based on industry experience, the Company anticipates this trend may continue for the foreseeable future.\n\nOther revenues include Internet services, both dial-up and DSL high-speed service. The Company has seen a decline in dial up subscriptions over the last year. The DSL service has grown over 100% in the last year driven by customer desire for faster Internet connections.\n\nThe Company is facing competition for revenues it generates in the other lines of business, which will require the Company to differentiate itself from other providers through its service levels and evolving technologies that are more reliable and cost effective for the customer.\n\n## CRITICAL ACCOUNTING POLICIES\n\nThe Company relies on the use of estimates and makes assumptions that impact its financial condition and results. These estimates and assumptions are based on historical results and trends as well as the Company's forecasts as to how these might change in the future. Several of the most critical accounting policies that materially impact the Company's results of operations include:\n\n## Allowance for Doubtful Accounts\n\nEstimates are used in determining the allowance for doubtful accounts and are based on historical collection and writeoff experience, current trends, credit policies, and the analysis of the accounts receivable by aging category. In determining these estimates, the Company compares historical write-offs in relation to the estimated period in which the subscriber was originally billed. The Company also looks at the historical average length of time that elapses between the original billing date and the date of write-off and the financial position of its larger customers in determining the adequacy of the allowance for doubtful accounts. From this information, the Company assigns specific amounts to the aging categories. The Company provides an allowance for substantially all receivables over 90 days old.\n\nThe allowance for doubtful accounts balance as of December 31, 2003, 2002 and 2001 was $0.5 million, $0.9 million and $0.7 million, respectively. If the allowance for doubtful accounts is not adequate, it could have a material adverse effect on our liquidity, financial position and results of operations.\n\nThe Company also reviews current trends in the credit quality of the subscriber bases in its various businesses and periodically changes its credit policies. As of December 31, 2003, the Sprint PCS subscriber base in the Company's market area consisted of 17.9% sub-prime credit quality subscribers compared to 25.3% at December 31, 2002. Sprint manages the accounts receivable function related to all of the Company's Sprint PCS wireless customers, therefore limiting the amount of control the Company has in setting credit policy parameters.\n\nThe remainder of the Company's receivables are associated with services provided on a more localized basis, where the Company exercises total control in setting credit policy parameters. Historically there have been limited losses generated from the non-PCS revenue streams. Prior to 2002, the Company had not faced significant write-offs of inter-\n\n43\n\n2003 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n■", + "recall": 0.97953216374269, + "true_md": "Through Sprint, the Company began receiving revenue from wholesale resellers of wireless PCS service in late 2002.\n\nThese resellers pay a flat rate per minute of use for all traffic their subscribers generate on the Company’s network.\n\nThe Company’s cost to handle this traffic is the incremental cost to provide the necessary network capacity.\n\nThe Company faces vigorous competition in the wireless business as numerous national carriers are aggressively marketing their services in the Company’s markets. The competitive landscape could change significantly depending on the marketing initiatives of our competitors, or in the event of consolidation in the wireless industry.\n\nThe wireline business is made up of traditional telephony, cable TV, fiber network operations and the Company’s long- distance resale business. These businesses operate in a defined geographic area. The Company’s primary service area for the telephone, cable TV and long-distance business is Shenandoah County, Virginia. The county is a rural area in northwestern Virginia, with a population of approximately 37,300 inhabitants, which has increased by approximately 6,000 since 1990. The potential for significant numbers of additional customers in the current operating area is limited.\n\nThe Company’s telephone subscriber count declined in the third quarter and again in the fourth quarter of 2003. Migration to wireless and DSL services are believed to be driving this change. Based on industry experience, the Company anticipates this trend may continue for the foreseeable future.\n\nOther revenues include Internet services, both dial-up and DSL high-speed service. The Company has seen a decline in dial up subscriptions over the last year. The DSL service has grown over 100% in the last year driven by customer desire for faster Internet connections.\n\nThe Company is facing competition for revenues it generates in the other lines of business, which will require the Company to differentiate itself from other providers through its service levels and evolving technologies that are more reliable and cost effective for the customer.\n\nThe Company relies on the use of estimates and makes assumptions that impact its financial condition and results. These estimates and assumptions are based on historical results and trends as well as the Company’s forecasts as to how these might change in the future. Several of the most critical accounting policies that materially impact the Company’s results of operations include:\n\nEstimates are used in determining the allowance for doubtful accounts and are based on historical collection and write- off experience, current trends, credit policies, and the analysis of the accounts receivable by aging category. In determining these estimates, the Company compares historical write-offs in relation to the estimated period in which the subscriber was originally billed. The Company also looks at the historical average length of time that elapses between the original billing date and the date of write-off and the financial position of its larger customers in determining the adequacy of the allowance for doubtful accounts. From this information, the Company assigns specific amounts to the aging categories. The Company provides an allowance for substantially all receivables over 90 days old.\n\nThe allowance for doubtful accounts balance as of December 31, 2003, 2002 and 2001 was $0.5 million, $0.9 million and $0.7 million, respectively. If the allowance for doubtful accounts is not adequate, it could have a material adverse effect on our liquidity, financial position and results of operations.\n\nThe Company also reviews current trends in the credit quality of the subscriber bases in its various businesses and periodically changes its credit policies. As of December 31, 2003, the Sprint PCS subscriber base in the Company’s market area consisted of 17.9% sub-prime credit quality subscribers compared to 25.3% at December 31, 2002. Sprint manages the accounts receivable function related to all of the Company’s Sprint PCS wireless customers, therefore limiting the amount of control the Company has in setting credit policy parameters.\n\nThe remainder of the Company’s receivables are associated with services provided on a more localized basis, where the Company exercises total control in setting credit policy parameters. Historically there have been limited losses generated from the non-PCS revenue streams. Prior to 2002, the Company had not faced significant write-offs of inter-\n\n43 ■ 2003 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n## CRITICAL ACCOUNTING POLICIES\n\n## Allowance for Doubtful Accounts\n\nSHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9321911819930933, + "doc_id": "768390f0978084b377253ed211a25487775de044e9248d99a1dd7281fa59d4d6", + "edit_distance": 0.7934426229508197, + "f1_score": 0.9902280130293161, + "meteor": 0.8327751324085866, + "precision": 0.9934640522875817, + "pred_md": "SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## Note 12. Shareholder Rights\n\nThe Board of Directors adopted a Shareholder Rights Plan in 1998, whereby, under certain circumstances, holders of each right (granted in 1998 at one right per share of outstanding stock) will be entitled to purchase $80 worth of the Company's common stock for $40. The rights are neither exercisable nor traded separately from the Company's common stock. The rights are only exercisable if a person or group becomes or attempts to become, the beneficial owner of 15% or more of the Company's common stock. Under the terms of the Plan, such a person or group is not entitled to the benefits of the rights.\n\n## Note 13. Lease Commitments\n\nThe Company leases land, buildings and tower space under various non-cancelable agreements, which expire between 2004 and 2043 and require various minimum annual rental payments. The leases generally contain certain renewal options for periods ranging from 5 to 20 years.\n\nFuture minimum lease payments under non-cancelable operating leases with initial variable lease terms in excess of one year as of December 31, 2003 are as follows:\n\nThe Company's total rent expense from continuing operations for each of the previous three years was $4.4 million in 2003, $3.4 million in 2002, and $2.4 million in 2001.\n\nAs lessor, the Company has leased buildings, tower space and telecommunications equipment to other entities under various non-cancelable agreements, which require various minimum annual payments. The total minimum rental receipts at December 31, 2003 are as follows:\n\nSHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY\n\n34\n\n■", + "recall": 0.987012987012987, + "true_md": "SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## Note 12. Shareholder Rights\n\n## Note 13. Lease Commitments\n\nSHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY ■ 34\n\nAs lessor, the Company has leased buildings, tower space and telecommunications equipment to other entities under various non-cancelable agreements, which require various minimum annual payments. The total minimum rental receipts at December 31, 2003 are as follows:\n\nThe Company’s total rent expense from continuing operations for each of the previous three years was $4.4 million in 2003, $3.4 million in 2002, and $2.4 million in 2001.\n\nFuture minimum lease payments under non-cancelable operating leases with initial variable lease terms in excess of one year as of December 31, 2003 are as follows:\n\nThe Company leases land, buildings and tower space under various non-cancelable agreements, which expire between 2004 and 2043 and require various minimum annual rental payments. The leases generally contain certain renewal options for periods ranging from 5 to 20 years.\n\nThe Board of Directors adopted a Shareholder Rights Plan in 1998, whereby, under certain circumstances, holders of each right (granted in 1998 at one right per share of outstanding stock) will be entitled to purchase $80 worth of the Company’s common stock for $40. The rights are neither exercisable nor traded separately from the Company’s common stock. The rights are only exercisable if a person or group becomes or attempts to become, the beneficial owner of 15% or more of the Company’s common stock. Under the terms of the Plan, such a person or group is not entitled to the benefits of the rights." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.48695034067157983, + "doc_id": "8a69ed2ff95706911b740b3e5ed37c1ff05aa782d53206bd550017a374c2d812", + "edit_distance": 0.4016393442622951, + "f1_score": 0.7499999999999999, + "meteor": 0.6131786281763907, + "precision": 0.8225806451612904, + "pred_md": "## PRACTICAL AND PROFESSIONAL\n\nSomething of a paradox, too; highly competitive but approachable; stylish but never a slave to fashion. I have a true talent for leadership. I'm stable, steady, reliable, and efficient. At the same time, I'm good-looking, good-natured, and good-humored. Seek successful business person driven by values, with a 'whatever it takes' attitude - just like me, practical and professional.\n\nTHE\n\nHON COMPANY", + "recall": 0.6891891891891891, + "true_md": "## P R A C T I C A L A N D P R O F E S S I O N A L\n\nSomething of a paradox, too; highly competi- tive but approachable; stylish but never a slave to fashion. I have a true talent for leadership. I’m stable, steady, reliable, and efficient. At the same time, I’m good-looking, good-natured, and good-humored. Seek successful business person driven by values, with a “whatever it takes” attitude — just like me, practical and professional.\n\n## T H E H O N C O M P A N Y" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9071812497075961, + "doc_id": "a213f971ff9bfbb3c090c56cc7062700c122d071979c8ba7f4c9599dbd77a205", + "edit_distance": 0.0847457627118644, + "f1_score": 0.9676190476190477, + "meteor": 0.9746321286549707, + "precision": 0.9584905660377359, + "pred_md": "26\n\n## DI R E C TO R S ' R E P O R T\n\nYour directors submit their Annual Financial Report for the Financial Year ended 30 June 2000. In order to comply with the provisions of the Corporations Law, the Directors report as follows:\n\n## DI R E C TO R S\n\nThe directors in office during or since the end of the Financial Year are:\n\n## ALAN GORDON BIRCHMORE\n\n## Chairman - Appointed 12 August 1998\n\nAlan Birchmore has occupied senior management and board appointments in Australia, England, Mainland Europe and the United States of America, with direct responsibility over a range of financial, industrial and mining operations. Chief Executive of the New York listed Bond International Gold, he was responsible for a worldwide workforce of 6,000 employees, in Canada, the United States and South\n\nAmerica, in Australia, the Company developed the Superpit at Kalgoorlie and successfully ran that as Australia's largest gold mining operation in joint venture with Homestake of the US. He also sat on the Argyle joint venture as one of the three principles during the period it developed the world's largest diamond mine. In 1990, as a major shareholder, he became Chairman of St Barbara Mines Ltd. Once listed and during the time of his stewardship the Company became highly profitable, registering market capitalisation growth from $12million to over $440 million, he retired from the Board of St. Barbara in 1997. In recent years he has chaired enquiries in the agricultural sector, addressing National Competition policy and is a fellow of the Australian Institute of Company Directors.\n\n## MARK FRANCIS BRADLEY\n\n## Director and Chief Executive Officer - Appointed 22 September 2000\n\nA civil engineer with a track record of senior offshore engineering management, Mark joined the J. Ray McDermott Company in 1977 for service in Bass Strait on Esso's Tuna/Mackeral project. During the following 14 years, of technically challenging work, Mark held senior positions with the Company in Indonesia, Singapore, Malaysia, Dubai and Saudi Arabia. Still with McDermott, but returning to Australia, he\n\nthen worked on new projects in Bass Strait and finally the Woodside North Rankin A and Goodwyn A platforms on the North West Shelf in Western Australia. In 1991, Mark joined Clough Offshore as project manager of a number of NWS projects, followed by duties in Thailand, China and Indonesia. By 1993, he was operations/project manager for BHP's Griffin project and by 1994 became Managing Director of Clough Offshore. A highly talented manager, Mark then presided over the five fold growth of Clough Offshore, which was to make the Western Australian company one of the best equipped, professional and competitive groups in the offshore contracting business. In 1997, he joined the Board of Clough Engineering as an Executive Director, retiring to become a shareholder and CEO of Mermaid in 2000.", + "recall": 0.9769230769230769, + "true_md": "## DIRECTORS’ REPORT\n\nYour directors submit their Annual Financial Report for the Financial Year ended 30 June 2000. In order to comply with the provisions of the Corporations Law, the Directors report as follows:\n\nThe directors in office during or since the end of the Financial Year are:\n\nALAN GORDON BIRCHMORE Chairman - Appointed 12 August 1998\n\nAlan Birchmore has occupied senior management and board appointments in Australia, England, Mainland Europe and the United States of America, with direct responsibility over a range of financial, industrial and mining operations. Chief Executive of the New York listed Bond International Gold, he was responsible for a worldwide workforce of 6,000 employees, in Canada, the United States and South\n\nAmerica, in Australia, the Company developed the Superpit at Kalgoorlie and successfully ran that as Australia’s largest gold mining operation in joint venture with Homestake of the US. He also sat on the Argyle joint venture as one of the three principles during the period it developed the world’s largest diamond mine. In 1990, as a major shareholder, he became Chairman of St Barbara Mines Ltd. Once listed and during the time of his stewardship the Company became highly profitable, registering market capitalisation growth from $12million to over $440 million, he retired from the Board of St. Barbara in 1997. In recent years he has chaired enquiries in the agricultural sector, addressing National Competition policy and is a fellow of the Australian Institute of Company Directors.\n\nMARK FRANCIS BRADLEY Director and Chief Executive Officer - Appointed 22 September 2000\n\nA civil engineer with a track record of senior offshore engineering management, Mark joined the J. Ray McDermott Company in 1977 for service in Bass Strait on Esso’s Tuna/Mackeral project. During the following 14 years, of technically challenging work, Mark held senior positions with the Company in Indonesia, Singapore, Malaysia, Dubai and Saudi Arabia. Still with McDermott, but returning to Australia, he\n\nthen worked on new projects in Bass Strait and finally the Woodside North Rankin A and Goodwyn A platforms on the North West Shelf in Western Australia. In 1991, Mark joined Clough Offshore as project manager of a number of NWS projects, followed by duties in Thailand, China and Indonesia. By 1993, he was operations/project manager for BHP’s Griffin project and by 1994 became Managing Director of Clough Offshore. A highly talented manager, Mark then presided over the five fold growth of Clough Offshore, which was to make the Western Australian company one of the best equipped, professional and competitive groups in the offshore contracting business. In 1997, he joined the Board of Clough Engineering as an Executive Director, retiring to become a shareholder and CEO of Mermaid in 2000.\n\n## DIRECT ORS\n\n26" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.39985976557646163, + "doc_id": "0e83a04a6b4eaece3ec8284b8a359f45de542aced44968208036fe58b5bbc106", + "edit_distance": 0.5161290322580645, + "f1_score": 0.717948717948718, + "meteor": 0.5637735849056603, + "precision": 0.56, + "pred_md": "## Outperform.\n\n## emmis communications 2004 abbreviated financial highlights\n\nin thousands except where noted\n\n*excluding noncash compensation\n\nradio\n\nstation operating income,\n\nexcluding noncash compensation\n\ntv\n\npublishing", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## Outperform.\n\nemmis communications 2004 abbreviated financial highlights in thousands except where noted \n\nemmis communications 2004 abbreviated financial highlights in thousands except where noted" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9229363052841851, + "doc_id": "aaf356dd8df23071eb77fd40a7ad04c35be89049174574488612d9f0f14c1c1c", + "edit_distance": 0.12857142857142856, + "f1_score": 0.9562682215743439, + "meteor": 0.9660376798568397, + "precision": 0.9590643274853801, + "pred_md": "## OPERATIONS REVIEW\n\n## MERMAID LABOUR AND MANAGEMENT LIMITED\n\nS A F E T Y\n\n20\n\nDuring 2000 Mermaid Marine formed a new business unit Mermaid Labour and Management Limited. The focus of this unit will be labour supply and industrial relations management to the marine, offshore construction industry and onshore resources projects in the NW of Australia. The Directors and Management of the new entity are very experienced, well known and regarded by the industry in general. The company has high expectations for Mermaid Labour and Management Limited.\n\nMermaid remains dedicated to ensuring a safe environment in all areas where we operate or have responsibility.\n\nIn April 2000, following the regular six monthly Quality Assurance audit, the Company's accreditation under AS/NZS/ISO 9002 was reconfirmed. Mermaid's quality assurance and compliance team continues with a continuous day to day effort to improve our health, safety and environmental performance. Stringent charterer requirements, which are a pre requisite of increased vessel usage, must be met to the letter and are the subject of regular and demanding audits. Although time consuming and expensive, we are grateful to certain of the large producers, who while demanding the highest levels of compliance, have also been prepared to give their time, sharing their safety expertise with us and in that way assisting in the very major advances our company has made in this all important area.\n\nAt the time of writing this report, Mermaid had accumulated 348 days without a Lost Time Injury. A fine achievement and a continuing record.", + "recall": 0.9534883720930233, + "true_md": "During 2000 Mermaid Marine formed a new business unit Mermaid Labour and Management Limited. The focus of this unit will be labour supply and industrial relations management to the marine, offshore construction industry and onshore resources projects in the NW of Australia. The Directors and Management of the new entity are very experienced, well known and regarded by the industry in general. The company has high expectations for Mermaid Labour and Management Limited. MERMAID LABOUR AND MANAGEMENT LIMITED\n\nMermaid remains dedicated to ensuring a safe environment in all areas where we operate or have responsibility. SAFETY\n\nIn April 2000, following the regular six monthly Quality Assurance audit, the Company’s accreditation under AS/NZS/ISO 9002 was reconfirmed. Mermaid’s quality assurance and compliance team continues with a continuous day to day effort to improve our health, safety and environmental performance. Stringent charterer requirements, which are a pre requisite of increased vessel usage, must be met to the letter and are the subject of regular and demanding audits. Although time consuming and expensive, we are grateful to certain of the large producers, who while demanding the highest levels of compliance, have also been prepared to give their time, sharing their safety expertise with us and in that way assisting in the very major advances our company has made in this all important area. \n\nAt the time of writing this report, Mermaid had accumulated 348 days without a Lost Time Injury. A fine achievement and a continuing record.\n\n20 HJ) oO HL Gap\n\nOPERATIONS REVIEW" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7871773473399102, + "doc_id": "0f0aa1b108dccac413e3264bd5bb3eae5cac68d0aa1c5cae4188770f0f2c8a92", + "edit_distance": 0.20833333333333334, + "f1_score": 0.9189189189189189, + "meteor": 0.9799019607843138, + "precision": 0.85, + "pred_md": "42\n\n## NOTES TO AND FORMING PART OF THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR THE FINANCIAL YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2000\n\n2.\n\n3.", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## NOTES TO AND FORMING PART OF THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR THE FINANCIAL YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2000\n\n42" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6617759915351987, + "doc_id": "7a17f5ad7c9b48cb84ceb5f1566db31c3884a37f090d8375b16eab6b12043ace", + "edit_distance": 0.8825966850828729, + "f1_score": 0.8893129770992366, + "meteor": 0.6432079451528708, + "precision": 0.8893129770992366, + "pred_md": "N O T E S T O C O N S O L I D A T E D F I N A N C I A L S T A T E M E N T S\n\n## S U M M A R Y O F S I G N I F I C A N T A C C O U N T I N G P O L I C I E S\n\nAtrion Corporation designs, develops, manufactures and markets products primarily for the medical and health care industry. The Company markets its products throughout the United States and internationally. The Company's customers include hospitals, distributors, and other manufacturers. As of December 31, 2003, the principal subsidiaries of the Company through which it conducted its operations were Atrion Medical Products, Inc. ('Atrion Medical Products'), Halkey-Roberts Corporation ('Halkey-Roberts') and Quest Medical, Inc. ('Quest Medical').\n\n## P R I N C I P L E S O F C O N S O L I D A T I O N\n\nThe consolidated financial statements include the accounts of Atrion Corporation and its subsidiaries (the 'Company'). All significant intercompany transactions and balances have been eliminated in consolidation.\n\n## F A I R V A L U E\n\nThe carrying amounts of cash and cash equivalents, accounts receivable and accounts payable approximate fair value due to the short-term nature of these items. The carrying amount of debt approximates fair value as the interest rate is tied to market rates.\n\n## E S T I M A T E S\n\nThe preparation of financial statements in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America requires management to make estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets and liabilities and disclosures of contingent assets and liabilities at the dates of the financial statements and the reported amount of revenues and expenses during the reporting periods. Actual results could differ from those estimates.\n\n## F I N A N C I A L P R E S E N T A T I O N\n\nCertain prior-year amounts have been reclassified to conform with the current-year presentation.\n\n## C A S H A N D C A S H E Q U I VA L E N T S\n\nCash equivalents are securities with original maturities of 90 days or less.\n\n## T R A D E R E C E I VA B L E S\n\nTrade accounts receivable are recorded at the original sales price to the customer. The Company maintains an allowance for doubtful accounts to reflect estimated losses resulting from the inability of customers to make required payments. On an ongoing basis, the collectibility of accounts receivable is assessed, based upon historical collection trends, current economic factors, and the assessment of the collectibility of specific accounts. The Company evaluates the collectibility of specific accounts using a combination of factors, including the age of the outstanding balances, evaluation of customers' current and past financial condition, recent payment history, current economic environment, and discussions with appropriate Company personnel and with the customers directly. Accounts are written off when it is determined the receivable will not be collected.\n\n## I N V E N T O R I E S\n\nInventories are stated at the lower of cost or market. Cost is determined by using the first-in, first-out method. The following table details the major components of inventory (in thousands):\n\n## I N C O M E T A X E S\n\nThe Company utilizes the asset and liability approach to financial accounting and reporting for income taxes. Deferred income tax assets and liabilities are computed annually for differences between the financial reporting basis and the tax basis of the Company's other assets and liabilities. These amounts are based on enacted tax laws and rates applicable to the periods in which the differences are expected to affect taxable income.\n\n12", + "recall": 0.8893129770992366, + "true_md": "## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## 1 SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES\n\n## PRINCIPLES OF CONSOLIDATION\n\n## FAIR VALUE\n\n## ESTIMATES\n\n## FINANCIAL PRESENTATION\n\n## CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS\n\n## TRADE RECEIVABLES\n\n## INVENTORIES\n\n## INCOME TAXES\n\n12\n\nThe Company utilizes the asset and liability approach to financial accounting and reporting for income taxes. Deferred income tax assets and liabilities are computed annually for differences between the financial reporting basis and the tax basis of the Company’s other assets and liabilities. These amounts are based on enacted tax laws and rates applicable to the periods in which the differences are expected to affect taxable income.\n\nInventories are stated at the lower of cost or market. Cost is determined by using the first-in, first-out method. The following table details the major components of inventory (in thousands):\n\nTrade accounts receivable are recorded at the original sales price to the customer. The Company maintains an allowance for doubtful accounts to reflect estimated losses resulting from the inability of customers to make required payments. On an ongoing basis, the collectibility of accounts receivable is assessed, based upon historical collection trends, current economic factors, and the assessment of the collectibility of specific accounts. The Company evaluates the collectibility of specific accounts using a combination of factors, including the age of the outstanding balances, evaluation of customers’ current and past financial condition, recent payment history, current economic environment, and discussions with appropriate Company personnel and with the customers directly. Accounts are written off when it is determined the receivable will not be collected.\n\nCash equivalents are securities with original maturities of 90 days or less. \n\nCertain prior-year amounts have been reclassified to conform with the current-year presentation.\n\nThe preparation of financial statements in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America requires management to make estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets and liabilities and disclosures of contingent assets and liabilities at the dates of the financial statements and the reported amount of revenues and expenses during the reporting periods. Actual results could differ from those estimates.\n\nThe carrying amounts of cash and cash equivalents, accounts receivable and accounts payable approximate fair value due to the short-term nature of these items. The carrying amount of debt approximates fair value as the interest rate is tied to market rates.\n\nThe consolidated financial statements include the accounts of Atrion Corporation and its subsidiaries (the “Company”). All significant intercompany transactions and balances have been eliminated in consolidation.\n\nAtrion Corporation designs, develops, manufactures and markets products primarily for the medical and health care industry. The Company markets its products throughout the United States and internationally. The Company’s customers include hospitals, distributors, and other manufacturers. As of December 31, 2003, the principal subsidiaries of the Company through which it conducted its operations were Atrion Medical Products, Inc. (“Atrion Medical Products”), Halkey-Roberts Corporation (“Halkey-Roberts”) and Quest Medical, Inc. (“Quest Medical”)." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7898395548691257, + "doc_id": "7f2fd7293e04bf4f1756ae51f5779764933da1d1d2002e3915356050570fc75b", + "edit_distance": 0.23917995444191345, + "f1_score": 0.9220489977728286, + "meteor": 0.9068357634032934, + "precision": 0.92, + "pred_md": "## S E T T I N G T H E F U T U R E I N M O T I O N\n\nMGM GRAND MACAU Our joint venture has secured a prime location to develop and construct an exciting addition to this dynamic gaming destination.\n\nMGM GRAND MACAU Our joint venture has secured a prime location to develop and construct an exciting addition to this dynamic gaming destination.\n\nhile the international opportunities for growth remain to be fully defined, in 2004 MGM MIRAGE entered into a joint venture agreement with Pansy Ho Chiu-king to develop, build and operate a major hotel-casino resort in Macau S.A.R. No other international market has shown its ability to sustain improved growth even as the government takes important steps to modernize its regulatory structure. We have methodically moved through the regulatory process and look forward to initiating construction in 2005 and opening in 2007. W\n\nWe continue to monitor and pursue opportunities as they arise in the United Kingdom. The bill modernizing British gaming law has moved steadily through the legislative process throughout the year. Several key issues are yet to be resolved, but we remain hopeful that Great Britain will become one of the world's leading jurisdictions with significant growth opportunities for decades to come.\n\nWe are also excited about the emergence of possible new jurisdictions in the Far East. We plan to pursue additional development opportunities as they become available, as we believe that the Far East holds considerable promise as a growing gaming market.\n\nDomestically, we are selectively expanding our presence as well, moving into markets and business lines where our superior brands and assets can provide the best returns. In Las Vegas we will maximize the use of our vast land holdings, beginning with The Residences at MGM Grand. This unique venture is a breakthrough combination of a hotel and condominiums - the first of its kind in Las Vegas. In Atlantic City, we own an exceptional site for future development. The already successful Borgata is prepared to grow bigger and better. Expansion plans include more casino space, a new hotel tower, more restaurants, retail outlets and an expanded spa.\n\nTHE RESIDENCES AT MGM GRAND Our joint venture with Turnberry Associates to build luxury condo/hotels ignited a flurry of development in Las Vegas.\n\nTHE RESIDENCES AT MGM GRAND Our joint venture with Turnberry Associates to build luxury condo/hotels ignited a flurry of development in Las Vegas.", + "recall": 0.9241071428571429, + "true_md": "## SETTING THE FUTURE IN MOTION\n\nhile the international opportunities for growth remain to be fully defined, in 2004 MGM MIRAGE entered into a joint venture agreement with Pansy Ho Chiu-king to develop, build and operate a major hotel-casino resort in Macau S.A.R. No other international market has shown its ability to sustain improved growth even as the government takes important steps to modernize its regu- latory structure. We have methodically moved through the regulatory process and look forward to initiating construction in 2005 and opening in 2007. W\n\nWe continue to monitor and pursue opportunities as they arise in the United Kingdom. The bill modernizing British gaming law has moved steadily through the legislative process throughout the year. Several key issues are yet to be resolved, but we remain hopeful that Great Britain will become one of the world’s leading jurisdictions with significant growth opportunities for decades to come.\n\nWe are also excited about the emergence of possible new jurisdictions in the Far East. We plan to pursue additional development opportunities as they become avail- able, as we believe that the Far East holds considerable promise as a growing gaming market. \n\nDomestically, we are selectively expanding our presence as well, moving into mar- kets and business lines where our superior brands and assets can provide the best returns. In Las Vegas we will maximize the use of our vast land holdings, beginning with The Residences at MGM Grand. This unique venture is a breakthrough combina- tion of a hotel and condominiums – the first of its kind in Las Vegas. In Atlantic City, we own an exceptional site for future development. The already successful Borgata is pre- pared to grow bigger and better. Expansion plans include more casino space, a new hotel tower, more restaurants, retail outlets and an expanded spa.\n\nTHE RESIDENCES AT MGM GRAND Our joint venture with Turnberry Associates to build luxury condo/hotels ignited a flurry of development in Las Vegas.\n\nMGM GRAND MACAU Our joint venture has secured a prime location to develop and construct an exciting addition to this dynamic gaming destination." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8242152263024449, + "doc_id": "9c410dcdc0482d5fbf8f439075590389dad9729776bbe0243fe64cc77f0d5ae6", + "edit_distance": 0.5544871794871795, + "f1_score": 0.918558077436582, + "meteor": 0.8146920142491942, + "precision": 0.9635854341736695, + "pred_md": "## 1. Statement of Accounting Policies (continued)\n\nof usage, degree of technical obsolescence, expected commercial life and the period of time during which the right or entitlement to the asset exists. The depreciation rates are reviewed and reassessed periodically in light of technical and economic developments.\n\nThe useful lives for each class of onshore asset will vary depending on their individual technical and economic characteristics but will generally fall within the following ranges:\n\n- · Plant and equipment\n- - Computer equipment\n\n3 - 5 years\n\n- - Motor vehicles\n\n4 - 7 years\n\n- - Furniture and fittings\n\n10 - 20 years\n\n- - Pipelines\n\n10 - 30 years\n\n- - Plant and facilities\n\n10 - 50 years\n\n- • Buildings\n\n20 - 50 years\n\nDepreciation of offshore plant and equipment is calculated using a unit of production method which will proportionately depreciate the assets over the life of the Proven plus Probable ('2P') reserves on a field by field basis.\n\nDepletion charges are calculated using a unit of production method which will amortise, over the life of the 2P reserves, exploration and development expenditure together with future costs necessary to develop the reserves in the respective areas of interest.\n\nDepletion is not charged on costs carried forward in respect of areas of interest in the development stage until production commences.\n\n## (r) Restoration\n\nProvisions are made for environmental restoration of areas of interest where gas and petroleum production is undertaken. Such provisions recognise the estimated future restoration obligations incrementally over the life of the reserves on a unit of production basis. The estimated future obligations include removing of facilities, abandoning of wells and restoring the affected areas. Estimates\n\nfor the future restoration obligations are reviewed and reassessed regularly, based on current legal requirements and technology and are measured in current dollars on an undiscounted basis. Adjustments to the provisions are made on a prospective basis.\n\n## (s) Employee benefits\n\nThe provisions for employee benefits for wages, salaries and annual leave expected to be settled within twelve months of the balance date represent present obligations resulting from employees services provided to balance date, calculated at undiscounted amounts based on remuneration wage and salary rates that the Santos Group expects to pay as at balance date including related on-costs.\n\nLong service leave is provided in respect of all employees, based on the present value of the estimated future cash outflow to be made resulting from employees' services up to balance date. The provision is calculated using expected future increases in wage and salary rates including related on-costs and expected settlement dates, and is discounted using the rates attached to the Commonwealth Government bonds at balance date which most closely match the terms of maturity of the related liabilities.\n\nThe Company and several controlled entities contribute to a number of defined benefit and cash accumulation superannuation plans. Contributions are recognised as an expense as they are made.\n\n## (t) Employee share ownership plans\n\nThe Company operates a number of share ownership plans.\n\nShares issued under the Santos Executive Share Plan, Santos Executive Share Option Plan and the Santos Employee Share Purchase Plan are recorded as contributed equity at the fair value of the consideration received, if any.\n\nThe value of the shares issued to eligible employees under the Santos Employee Share Acquisition Plan is expensed over a three year period.\n\n## (u) Income tax\n\nTax effect accounting is applied whereby the income tax charged in the statements of financial performance is matched with the accounting profit after allowing for permanent differences. Income tax on timing differences, which arise from items being brought to account in different periods for income tax and accounting purposes, is carried forward in the statements of financial position as a deferred tax asset or deferred tax liability. Future income tax benefits relating to entities which incur losses are brought to account where realisation of the benefits is considered to be virtually certain.\n\nSantos Ltd is the head entity in the tax-consolidated group comprising all the Australian resident wholly-owned controlled entities set out in note 22. The implementation date for the tax-consolidated group was 1 January 2003.\n\nThe head entity recognises all of the current and deferred tax assets and liabilities of the tax-consolidated group.\n\nThe tax-consolidated group has entered into a tax funding agreement that requires wholly-owned subsidiaries to make contributions to the head entity for tax liabilities and deferred tax balances arising from external transactions occurring after implementation of tax consolidation. The contributions are calculated as a percentage of profit from ordinary activities before income tax expense. Contributions are payable following payment of the liabilities by Santos Ltd. The assets and liabilities arising under the tax funding agreement are recognised as intercompany assets and liabilities with a consequential adjustment to income tax expense or revenue.\n\nThe tax-consolidated group has also entered into a tax sharing agreement pursuant to which the wholly-owned controlled entities may be required to contribute to the tax liabilities of Santos Ltd in the event of default by Santos Ltd or upon leaving the group.\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\n55", + "recall": 0.8775510204081632, + "true_md": "## 1. Statement of Accounting Policies (continued)\n\n## (r) Restoration\n\n## (s) Employee benefits\n\n## (t) Employee share o wner ship plans\n\n## (u) Income tax\n\nof usage, degree of technical obsolescence, expected commercial life and the period of time during which the right or entitlement to the asset exists. The depreciation rates are reviewed and reassessed periodically in light of technical and economic developments.\n\nThe useful lives for each class of onshore asset will vary depending on their individual technical and economic characteristics but will generally fall within the following ranges:\n\nDepreciation of offshore plant and equipment is calculated using a unit of production method which will proportionately depreciate the assets over the life of the Proven plus Probable (“2P”) reserves on a field by field basis.\n\nDepletion charges are calculated using a unit of production method which will amortise, over the life of the 2P reserves, exploration and development expenditure together with future costs necessary to develop the reserves in the respective areas of interest.\n\nDepletion is not charged on costs carried forward in respect of areas of interest in the development stage until production commences.\n\nProvisions are made for environmental restoration of areas of interest where gas and petroleum production is undertaken. Such provisions recognise the estimated future restoration obligations incrementally over the life of the reserves on a unit of production basis. The estimated future obligations include removing of facilities, abandoning of wells and restoring the affected areas. Estimates \n\nfor the future restor ation obligations are reviewed and r eassessed r egularly, based on current legal r equir ements and technology and ar measured in current dollars on an un discoun ted basis. Adjustments to th provisions are made on a prospective basis .\n\nThe Company an several controlled entities contribute to a n umber of defined benefit and cash accumulati on superannuation plans. Contribution are recognised as an expense as they ar made.\n\nShares issued under the Santos Executive Share Plan, Santos Ex ecutive Share Option Plan and the Santos Employee Share Purchase Plan are r ecorded as contributed equity at the fair value of the consideration r eceived , if any.\n\nThe value of th shares issued to eligible employees under th e Santos Employee Share Acquisition Plan is expensed over a three year period.\n\nTax effect accounting is applied whereby the income tax charged in the statements of financial performance is matched with the accounting profit after allowing for permanent differences. Income tax on timing differences, which arise from items being brought to account in different periods for income tax and accounting purposes, is carried forward in the statements of financial position as a deferred tax asset or deferred tax liability. Future income tax benefits relating to entities which incur losses are brought to account where realisation of the benefits is considered to be virtually certain.\n\nSantos Ltd is the head entity in the tax-consolidated group comprising all the Australian resident wholly-owned controlled entities set out in note 22. The implementation date for the tax-consolidated group was 1 January 2003.\n\nThe head entity recognises all of the current and deferred tax assets and liabilities of the tax-consolidated group.\n\nThe tax-consolidated group has entered into a tax funding agreement that requires wholly-owned subsidiaries to make contributions to the head entity for tax liabilities and deferred tax balances arising from external transactions occurring after implementation of tax consolidation. The contributions are calculated as a percentage of profit from ordinary activities before income tax expense. Contributions are payable following payment of the liabilities by Santos Ltd. The assets and liabilities arising under the tax funding agreement are recognised as intercompany assets and liabilities with a consequential adjustment to income tax expense or revenue.\n\nThe tax-consolidated group has also entered into a tax sharing agreement pursuant to which the wholly-owned controlled entities may be required to contribute to the tax liabilities of Santos Ltd in the event of default by Santos Ltd or upon leaving the group.\n\nThe Company oper ates a number of share ownership plans.\n\nAnnual Report 2004 55\n\n- • Plant and equipment\n\n- – Computer equipment 3 – 5 years\n\n- – Motor vehicles 4 – 7 years\n\n- – Furniture and fittings 10 – 20 years\n\n- – Pipelines 10 – 30 years\n\n- – Plant and facilities 10 – 50 years\n\n- • Buildings 20 – 50 years\n\nThe provisions for employee benefits for wages, salaries an annual leave expected to be settled within twelve months of the balance date repr esen t present obligations resulting from employees services provided to balance date calculated at undiscounted am oun ts based on remuneration wag and salary rates that the Santos Group e xpects to pay as at balance date inclu ding related on-costs.\n\nLong service leave is provided in respect of all employees based on the present value of the estim ated future cash outflow to be made resultin g from employees’ services up to balan ce date. The provision is calculated usin expected future increases in wag and salary rates including related on-costs and expected settlement dates and is discounted using the rates attached to the Commonwealth Government bonds at balance date which most closely match th e terms of maturity of the related li abiliti es." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9479866426464671, + "doc_id": "f1faee1efae23b22ea6e56a6a542f6dbc81c62f128ca734971ad47f46a0eb056", + "edit_distance": 0.8719723183391004, + "f1_score": 0.9633333333333334, + "meteor": 0.7291023026968877, + "precision": 0.9697986577181208, + "pred_md": "OUR WORK\n\nMARKETING\n\n## Better information, Better decision\n\n## Market Intelligence\n\nASAKO HOSHINO Vice President\n\nASAKO HOSHINO Vice President\n\n'Why does a company conduct market research on consumers? It is not just about asking the customer if they prefer A or B, which is often what managers want to know. Accumulating knowledge on consumer behavior and emerging trends is how you come up with ideas that are truly focused on the customer. Our aim is to gain the deepest understanding of the customer possible, and use that insight to identify future trends.\n\nThe Market Intelligence department is relatively new, formed by combining the research functions once carried out separately by various divisions. The merger and our independent status have brought several practical benefits. We now have uniform procedures for conducting research, better research methodologies, and greater objectivity in the interpretation of the data. Today, we're a team of experts in this field, not simply coordinators between research organizations and the decision makers. We are often benchmarked by other industries.\n\nWhen the department was first established, Mr. Ghosn made one thing very clear: Do not attack the methodology! Different business areas may complain when we release information that is negative or differs from their objectives. However, they cannot attack how we came to our conclusions, because our methodology is considered the best within the organization. We are transparent in our\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\nselection of methodologies and how we approach conclusions. Among the various areas, we aim to be the department that most effectively utilizes the PDCA-plan, do, check and action-cycle. We are always working to get better and more accurate information to upgrade our methodology. Every year we hold a PDCA session to review our methodology with other departments. Anyone can assess Market Intelligence at this time. This is also a great opportunity to share methodologies and approaches with various functions.\n\nWe also conduct trend review meetings with all decision-makers, including non-marketing officers, to understand social, consumer and value trends so that we can identify sources of innovation for all areas. This makes us unique. Our analysts enrich the analysis, interpretation and forecast because they are aware of global social and consumer trends. The trend review meetings also remind people in all departments-even those not directly involved with sales and marketing-that customers are truly the center of our business.\n\nWe work with different research experts and companies as our partners. They offer a variety of hightech techniques such as glasses with cameras that track eye movement, instruments that measure brainwaves or pupil dilation to detect preferences, and non-categorical measures that help us find personal evaluations of perceived quality or design. Our job is to evaluate these research companies and their output, and to develop the best methodology for our issues. We are always refining the tools we have and looking for new ones that will boost our accuracy. Our strong ties with outside experts are a source of competitive advantage for Nissan.\n\nAgain, it all goes back to being customer-oriented. Confirming that customer-oriented stance will create value for Nissan. Market Intelligence must be a dedicated evangelist for this change.'", + "recall": 0.956953642384106, + "true_md": "MARKETING\n\n## Better information, Better decision\n\n## Market Intelligence\n\nselection of methodologies and how we approach conclusions. Among the various areas, we aim to be the department that most effectively utilizes the PDCA—plan, do, check and action—cycle. We are always working to get better and more accurate information to upgrade our methodology. Every year we hold a PDCA session to review our methodology with other departments. Anyone can assess Market Intelligence at this time. This is also a great opportunity to share methodologies and approaches with various functions. \n\nWe also conduct trend review meetings with all decision-makers, including non-marketing officers, to understand social, consumer and value trends so that we can identify sources of innovation for all areas. This makes us unique. Our analysts enrich the analysis, interpretation and forecast because they are aware of global social and consumer trends. The trend review meetings also remind people in all departments—even those not directly involved with sales and marketing—that customers are truly the center of our business.\n\nWe work with different research experts and companies as our partners. They offer a variety of high- tech techniques such as glasses with cameras that track eye movement, instruments that measure brainwaves or pupil dilation to detect preferences, and non-categorical measures that help us find personal evaluations of perceived quality or design. Our job is to evaluate these research companies and their output, and to develop the best methodology for our issues. We are always refining the tools we have and looking for new ones that will boost our accuracy. Our strong ties with outside experts are a source of competitive advantage for Nissan.\n\nAgain, it all goes back to being customer-oriented. Confirming that customer-oriented stance will create value for Nissan. Market Intelligence must be a dedicated evangelist for this change.”\n\nWhen the department was first established, Mr. Ghosn made one thing very clear: Do not attack the methodology! Different business areas may complain when we release information that is negative or differs from their objectives. However, they cannot attack how we came to our conclusions, because our methodology is considered the best within the organization. We are transparent in our\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 40\n\nThe Market Intelligence department is relatively new, formed by combining the research functions once carried out separately by various divisions. The merger and our independent status have brought several practical benefits. We now have uniform procedures for conducting research, better research methodologies, and greater objectivity in the interpretation of the data. Today, we’re a team of experts in this field, not simply coordinators between research organizations and the decision makers. We are often benchmarked by other industries. \n\n“Why does a company conduct market research on consumers? It is not just about asking the customer if they prefer A or B, which is often what managers want to know. Accumulating knowledge on consumer behavior and emerging trends is how you come up with ideas that are truly focused on the customer. Our aim is to gain the deepest understanding of the customer possible, and use that insight to identify future trends. \n\nOUR WORK\n\nASAKO HOSHINO Vice President" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8059451950421276, + "doc_id": "e5293b998785c913080a1ff92db611cf4042d3913419281bd77a1e0a377683d7", + "edit_distance": 0.25956284153005466, + "f1_score": 0.9469153515064561, + "meteor": 0.8935544103402494, + "precision": 0.9620991253644315, + "pred_md": "DESIGN: SEQUEL STUDIO, NEW YORK\n\nHON INDUSTRIES Inc. and SUBSIDIARIES\n\n## I N V E S T O R I N F O R M A T I O N\n\n## SCHEDULE OF QUARTERLY RESULTS\n\nThe Company operates on a fiscal year ending on the Saturday nearest December 31. Quarterly results are typically announced within 25 days after the end of each quarter, and audited results are typically announced within 40 days after year-end.\n\n## FISCAL 2004 QUARTER-END DATES\n\n1st Quarter: Saturday, April 3\n\n2nd Quarter: Saturday, July 3\n\n3rd Quarter: Saturday, October 2\n\n4th Quarter: Saturday, January 1\n\n## ANNUAL MEETING\n\nThe Company's annual shareholders' meeting will be held at 10:30 a.m. on May 4, 2004, at the Holiday Inn, Highways 61 & 38 North, Muscatine, Iowa. Shareholders and other interested investors are encouraged to attend the meeting.\n\n## I NVESTOR RELATIONS\n\nSend inquiries to:\n\nInvestor Relations\n\nHON INDUSTRIES Inc.\n\n414 East Third Street\n\nMuscatine, IA 52761\n\nTelephone: 563.264.7400\n\nFax: 563.264.7655\n\nE-mail: investorrelations@honi.com\n\n## CORPORATE HEADQUARTERS\n\nHON INDUSTRIES Inc.\n\n414 East Third Street\n\nP.O. Box 1109\n\nMuscatine, IA 52761-0071\n\nTelephone: 563.264.7400\n\nFax: 563.264.7217\n\nWebsite: www.honi.com\n\n## I NDEPENDENT PUBLIC ACCOUNTANTS\n\nPricewaterhouseCoopers LLP\n\nOne North Wacker Drive\n\nChicago, IL 60606\n\n## FORWARD-LOOKING STATEMENTS\n\nStatements in this report that are not strictly historical, including statements as to plans, objectives, and future financial performance, are 'forward-looking' statements that are made pursuant to the safe harbor provisions of the Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995. Forward-looking statements involve known and unknown risks, which may cause the Company's actual results in the future to differ materially from expected results. These risks include, among others:\n\n- · competition within the office furniture and fireplace industries, including competition from imported products and competitive pricing;\n- · increases in the cost of raw materials, including steel, which is the Company's largest raw material category;\n- · increases in the cost of health care benefits provided by the Company;\n- · reduced demand for the Company's storage products caused by changes in office technology; including the change from paper record storage to electronic record storage;\n- · the effects of economic conditions, on demand for office furniture, customer insolvencies and related bad debts and claims against the Company that it received preferential payments;\n- · changes in demand and order patterns from the Company's customers, particularly its top ten customers, which represented approximately 36% of net sales in 2003;\n- · issues associated with acquisitions and integration of acquisitions;\n- · the ability of the Company to realize cost savings and productivity improvements from its cost containment and business simplification initiatives;\n- · the ability of the Company to realize financial benefits from investments in new products;\n- · the ability of the Company's distributors and dealers to successfully market and sell the Company's products;\n- · the availability and cost of capital to finance planned growth; and\n- · other risks, uncertainties, and factors described from time to time in the Company's filings with the Securities and Exchange Commission.\n\nWe caution the reader that the above list of factors may not be exhaustive. The Company does not assume any obligation to update any forward-looking statement, whether as a result of new information, future events or otherwise.\n\n## COMMON STOCK\n\nHON INDUSTRIES common stock trades on the New York Stock Exchange under the symbol: HNI. Stock price quotations can be found in major daily newspapers and The Wall Street Journal .\n\n## TRANSFER AGENT\n\nShareholders may report a change of address or make inquiries by writing or calling:\n\nComputershare Investor Services, LLC\n\n- 2 North LaSalle Street\n\nChicago, IL 60602\n\nTelephone: 312.588.4991\n\n63", + "recall": 0.9322033898305084, + "true_md": "## H O N I N D U S T R I E S I n c . a n d S U B S I D I A R I E S\n\n## I N V E S T O R I N F O R M A T I O N\n\n## SCHEDULE OF QUARTERLY RESULTS\n\n## INVESTOR RELATIONS\n\n## FISCAL 2004 QUARTER-END DATES\n\n## CORPORATE HEADQUARTERS\n\n## ANNUAL MEETING\n\n## INDEPENDENT PUBLIC ACCOUNTANTS\n\n## FORWARD-LOOKING STATEMENTS\n\nThe Company operates on a fiscal year ending on the Saturday nearest December 31. Quar- terly results are typically announced within 25 days after the end of each quarter, and audited results are typically announced within 40 days after year-end.\n\n1st Quarter: Saturday, April 3 2nd Quarter: Saturday, July 3 3rd Quarter: Saturday, October 2 4th Quarter: Saturday, January 1\n\nThe Company’s annual shareholders’ meeting will be held at 10:30 a.m. on May 4, 2004, at the Holiday Inn, Highways 61 & 38 North, Muscatine, Iowa. Shareholders and other interested investors are encouraged to attend the meeting.\n\nPricewaterhouseCoopers LLP One North Wacker Drive Chicago, IL 60606\n\nHON INDUSTRIES Inc. 414 East Third Street P.O. Box 1109 Muscatine, IA 52761-0071 Telephone: 563.264.7400 Fax: 563.264.7217 Website: www.honi.com\n\nSend inquiries to: Investor Relations HON INDUSTRIES Inc. 414 East Third Street Muscatine, IA 52761 Telephone: 563.264.7400 Fax: 563.264.7655 E-mail: investorrelations@honi.com\n\nDESIGN: SEQUEL STUDIO, NEW YORK\n\nStatements in this report that are not strictly historical, including statements as to plans, objectives, and future financial performance, are “forward-looking” state- ments that are made pursuant to the safe harbor provisions of the Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995. Forward-looking statements involve known and unknown risks, which may cause the Company’s actual results in the future to dif- fer materially from expected results. These risks include, among others: \n\n• competition within the office furniture and fireplace industries, including competition from imported products and competitive pricing; \n\n• increases in the cost of raw materials, including steel, which is the Company’s largest raw material category;\n\n• increases in the cost of health care benefits provided by the Company;\n\n• reduced demand for the Company’s storage products caused by changes in office technology; including the change from paper record storage to electronic record storage; \n\n• the effects of economic conditions, on demand for office furniture, customer insolvencies and related bad debts and claims against the Company that it received preferential payments; \n\n• changes in demand and order patterns from the Company’s customers, par- ticularly its top ten customers, which represented approximately 36% of net sales in 2003; \n\n• issues associated with acquisitions and integration of acquisitions; \n\n• the ability of the Company to realize cost savings and productivity improve- ments from its cost containment and business simplification initiatives;\n\n• the ability of the Company to realize financial benefits from investments in new products; \n\n• the ability of the Company’s distributors and dealers to successfully market and sell the Company’s products; \n\n• the availability and cost of capital to finance planned growth; and\n\n• other risks, uncertainties, and factors described from time to time in the Company’s filings with the Securities and Exchange Commission. \n\nWe caution the reader that the above list of factors may not be exhaustive. The Company does not assume any obligation to update any forward-looking state- ment, whether as a result of new information, future events or otherwise.\n\n63\n\n## COMMON STOCK\n\n## TRANSFER AGENT\n\nHON INDUSTRIES common stock trades on the New York Stock Exchange under the symbol: HNI. Stock price quotations can be found in major daily newspapers and The Wall Street Journal .\n\nShareholders may report a change of address or make inquiries by writing or calling:\n\nComputershare Investor Services, LLC 2 North LaSalle Street Chicago, IL 60602 Telephone: 312.588.4991" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "66ff6935ba80221d81272883f796c2a06123e71e06df7f4a33be73c01a6fba04", + "edit_distance": 0.25956284153005466, + "f1_score": 0.9469153515064561, + "meteor": 0.8935544103402494, + "precision": 0.9620991253644315, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.9322033898305084, + "true_md": "D MARINE AUSTRALIA LIMITED\n\nJampier Supply Base\n\n.PANSION PLAN" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8903754797060001, + "doc_id": "1dbb6119141bb3f5706a0963bf04374880935d089ba9ba6bf9d9e61b8bc94a09", + "edit_distance": 0.2801724137931034, + "f1_score": 0.9554140127388535, + "meteor": 0.9251034645945113, + "precision": 0.9453781512605042, + "pred_md": "## B RO O M E\n\n## OPERATIONS REVIEW\n\nMermaid Marine services base at the Port of Broome (Broome Base) commenced operations on 1 February 2000 when the first ship containing drill pipe for Inpex Browse Ltd arrived from Japan. S U P P LY B A S E\n\nAs a result of Mermaid's efforts in establishing the Broome Base, Inpex Browse Ltd., BHP Petroleum and Woodside have used Broome as their base for drilling a total of four (4) offshore wells.\n\nIt is presently expected that at least six (6) exploration wells will be drilled in the area during 2001. The Base now employs as many as ten (10) staff up from the three (3) who commenced in February 2000. Excellent management and staff competence are the prime factors, which have delivered the smooth start up and continued success at Broome.\n\nThe Mermaid Broome Supply Base certified Impex, Woodside and BHP Petroleum exploration program during 2000.\n\nThe Mermaid Broome Supply Base certified Impex, Woodside and BHP Petroleum exploration program during 2000.\n\nThe base is currently secured on a come and go lease arrangement, located on Port premises adjacent to the wharf gates. Although convenient, with an excellent cyclone proof building, the site has limitations in terms of size and slope. An area more suitable for our long term needs has been optioned from Port authorities and discussions will proceed with our clients this year to determine their precise needs.\n\nThe success of Browse Basin wells drilled this year, strong developments in the energy sector and the intention of operators to base their 2001 operations in Broome, have encouraged the Board to consider further investment to ensure that capability keeps pace with demand and that we leave no reason for competitors to offer more or better.\n\n## DARWIN BASE\n\nThe offshore waters of the Northern Territory, the Zone of Co-Operation (ZOCA) between Australia and Timor, and the Commonwealth Territory of Ashmore and Cartier host approximately 35% of the exploration and development budgets of Australian offshore oil and gas industry.\n\nTwo large projects are under study or implementation in these waters; the Phillips Petroleum Bayu-Undang Project and the Woodside Sunrise Troubador Project.\n\nTwo large petrochemical projects are under study for the Darwin area based upon pipelines from the Timor Sea gas resources of the projects above.\n\nDarwin will within 3 years be the northern terminus of the Australian national rail system with the completion of the Alice Springs Darwin rail link, further expanding its role in Australia's economy.", + "recall": 0.9656652360515021, + "true_md": "OPERATIONS REVIEW\n\nAs a result of Mermaid’s efforts in establishing the Broome Base, Inpex Browse Ltd., BHP Petroleum and Woodside have used Broome as their base for drilling a total of four (4) offshore wells.\n\nIt is presently expected that at least six (6) exploration wells will be drilled in the area during 2001. The Base now employs as many as ten (10) staff up from the three (3) who commenced in February 2000. Excellent management and staff competence are the prime factors, which have delivered the smooth start up and continued success at Broome.\n\nThe Mermaid Broome Supply Base certified Impex, Woodside and BHP Petroleum exploration program during 2000.\n\nThe base is currently secured on a come and go lease arrangement, located on Port premises adjacent to the wharf gates. Although convenient, with an excellent cyclone proof building, the site has limitations in terms of size and slope. An area more suitable for our long term needs has been optioned from Port authorities and discussions will proceed with our clients this year to determine their precise needs.\n\nThe success of Browse Basin wells drilled this year, strong developments in the energy sector and the intention of operators to base their 2001 operations in Broome, have encouraged the Board to consider further investment to ensure that capability keeps pace with demand and that we leave no reason for competitors to offer more or better.\n\nThe offshore waters of the Northern Territory, the Zone of Co-Operation (ZOCA) between Australia and Timor, and the Commonwealth Territory of Ashmore and Cartier host approximately 35% of the\n\n- Mermaid Marine services base at the Port of Broome (Broome Base) commenced operations on 1 February 2000 when the first ship containing drill pipe for Inpex Browse Ltd arrived from Japan. BROOME SUPPLY BASE\n\nTwo large projects are under study or implementation in these waters; the Phillips Petroleum Bayu-Undang Project and the Woodside Sunrise Troubador Project.\n\nTwo large petrochemical projects are under study for the Darwin area based upon pipelines from the Timor Sea gas resources of the projects above.\n\nDarwin will within 3 years be the northern terminus of the Australian national rail system with the completion of the Alice Springs Darwin rail link, further expanding its role in Australia’s economy.\n\n- exploration and development budgets of Australian offshore oil and gas industry. D ARWIN BASE\n\n18" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8764646320349953, + "doc_id": "a5416b4ba434aae61249f61f869f81f29007b1c6ea27f62687f85cea99af6c58", + "edit_distance": 0.3590504451038576, + "f1_score": 0.9281767955801103, + "meteor": 0.8057882482213505, + "precision": 0.9581749049429658, + "pred_md": "## 8. Likely Developments\n\nCertain likely developments in the operations of the consolidated entity and the expected results of those operations in future financial years are referred to at pages 2 to 7, 11 to 12, 16 to 23 and 26 to 28 of this Annual Report. Further information about likely developments in the operations of the consolidated entity and the expected results of those operations in future financial years has not been included in this report because disclosure of the information would be likely to result in unreasonable prejudice to the consolidated entity.\n\n## 9. Directors' and Senior Executives' Remuneration\n\nThe remuneration policies and practices of the Company, (including the compensation arrangements for executive Directors and senior management), the Company's superannuation arrangements, the fees for non-executive members of the Board (within the aggregate amount approved by shareholders), the Company's employee share and option plans and executive and senior management performance review and succession planning are matters referred to and considered by the Remuneration Committee of the Board, which has access to independent advice and comparative studies on the appropriateness of remuneration arrangements. Details of the Company's remuneration policies and the nature and amount of the remuneration of the Directors and Specified Executives are set out on pages 31 and 37 to 40 of this Annual Report and in Notes 18 and 26 to the financial statements.\n\n## 10. Indemnification\n\nArticle 177 of the Company's Constitution provides that the Company indemnifies each person who is or who has been an 'officer' (as defined in the Corporations Act) of the Company against any liability to another person (other than the Company or a related body corporate) arising from their position as such officer, unless the liability arises out of conduct involving a lack of good faith. The Company has insured against amounts which it is liable to pay pursuant to Article 177 or which it otherwise agrees to pay by way of indemnity. Article 177 also provides for an indemnity in favour of an officer or auditor (KPMG) in relation to costs incurred in defending proceedings in which judgement is given in their favour, or in which they are acquitted or the Court grants relief.\n\nIn conformity with Article 177, the Company is party to Deeds of Indemnity in favour of each of the Directors referred to in this report who held office during the year and certain executives of the consolidated entity, being indemnities to the full extent permitted by law. There is no monetary limit to the extent of the indemnity under those Deeds and no liability has arisen thereunder during or since the financial year.\n\nDuring the year, the Company paid premiums in respect of Directors' and Officers' Liability and Legal Expenses insurance contracts for the year ending 31 December 2004 and since the end of the year the Company has paid, or agreed to pay, premiums in respect of such contracts for the year ending 31 December 2005. The insurance contracts insure against certain liability (subject to exclusions) persons who are or have been directors or officers of the Company and controlled entities. A condition of the contracts is that the nature of the liability indemnified and the premium payable not be disclosed.\n\n## 11. Rounding\n\nAustralian Securities and Investments Commission Class Order 98/100, dated 10 July 1998, applies to the Company and accordingly amounts have been rounded off in accordance with that Class Order, unless otherwise indicated.\n\nThis report is made on 23 February, 2005 in accordance with a resolution of the Directors.\n\nDirector\n\n23 February, 2005\n\nDirector\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\n49", + "recall": 0.9, + "true_md": "## 8. Likely Developments\n\n## 9. Directors’ and Senior Executives’ Remuneration\n\n## 10. Indemnification\n\n## 11. Rounding\n\nThe remuneration policies and practices of the Company, (including th compensation arrangements for executive Directors and senior management), the Company’s superannuation arrangements, the fees for non-executive m embers of the Board (within the aggregate amount approved by shareholders), the Company’s employee share and option plans and executive and senior management performance review and succession planning are matters referred to and considered by the Remuneration Committee of th e Board, which has access to independent advice and comparative studies on the appropriateness of remuneration arrangements. Details of th e Company’s remuneration policies and the nature and amount of the remuneration of the Directors and Specified Executives are set out on pag es 31 and 37 to 40 of this Annual Report and in Notes 18 and 26 to the financial statements.\n\nArticle 177 of the Company’s Constitution provides that the Company ind emnifies each person who is or who has been an “officer” (as defined in the Corporations Act) of the Company against any liability to another person (other than the Company or a related body corporate) arising from their position as such officer, unless the liability arises out of conduct involvin a lack of good faith. The Company has insured against amounts which it is liable to pay pursuant to Article 177 or which it otherwise agrees to pay by way of indemnity. Article 177 also provides for an indemnity in favour of an officer or auditor (KPMG) in relation to costs incurred in defending pr oceedings in which judgement is given in their favour, or in which they are acquitted or the Court grants relief.\n\nIn conformity with Article 177, the Company is party to Deeds of Indemnityin favour of each of the Directors referred to in this report who held office during the year and certain executives of the consolidated entity, bein g indemnities to the full extent permitted by law. There is no monetary limit to the extent of the indemnity under those Deeds and no liability has arisen thereunder during or since the financial year. \n\nDuring the year, the Company paid premiums in respect of Directors' and Offi cers' Liability and Legal Expenses insurance contracts for the year ending 31 December 2004 and since the end of the year the Company has paid, or agreed to pay, premiums in respect of such contracts for the year ending 31 December 2005. The insurance contracts insure against certain liability (subject to exclusions) persons who are or have been directors or officers of the Company and controlled entities. A condition of the contracts is that the nature of the liability indemnified and the premium payable not be disclosed.\n\nAustralian Securities and Investments Commission Class Order 98/100, dated 10 July 1998, applies to the Company and accordingly amounts have been rounded off in accordance with that Class Order, unless otherwise indi cated.\n\nThis report is made on 23 February, 2005 in accordance with a resolution of the Directors.\n\nDirector\n\nDirector\n\n23 February, 2005\n\nAnnual Report 2004 49\n\nCertain likely developments in the operations of the consolidated entity an d the expected results of those operations in future financial years are referred to at pages 2 to 7, 11 to 12, 16 to 23 and 26 to 28 of this Annu al Report. Further information about likely developments in the operations of the consolidated entity and the expected results of those operation in future financial years has not been included in this report because disclosure of the information would be likely to result in unreasonable prejudi ce to the consolidated entity." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9255212244349597, + "doc_id": "0998ef33f62244e666e4bed0a1335e848b61ec65c9f409f45dd433def9f52656", + "edit_distance": 0.6605504587155964, + "f1_score": 0.9557894736842105, + "meteor": 0.8598497865812992, + "precision": 0.978448275862069, + "pred_md": "Deferred income taxes reflect the net tax effects of temporary differences between the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities for financial reporting purposes and the amounts used for income tax purposes. The company believes that, based upon its lengthy and consistent history of profitable operations, it is probable that the net deferred tax assets of $24.9 million will be realized on future tax returns, primarily from the generation of future taxable income. Significant components of the deferred income tax liabilities and assets are as follows:\n\nReconciliation of the statutory federal income tax rate to the company's effective tax rate is as follows:\n\nIn fiscal 2004, the company received a $9.0 million cash distribution from a foreign subsidiary under the provisions of the American Job Creation Act. The provisions of the Act provide for a one-time repatriation of foreign earnings of an affiliate at a net 5.25% tax rate if the earnings are repatriated under a Qualified Domestic Reinvestment Plan.\n\nU.S. income taxes have not been provided on remaining undistributed earnings of foreign subsidiaries, which were approximately $24.6 million as of October 30, 2004. The company has reinvested such earnings overseas in foreign operations indefinitely and expects that future earnings will also be reinvested overseas indefinitely.\n\nTotal income taxes paid during fiscal 2004, 2003, and 2002 were $138.8 million, $76.4 million, and $101.3 million, respectively.\n\n## > note H\n\n## Commitments and Contingencies\n\nThe company enters into various agreements guaranteeing specified obligations of affiliated parties. In some cases, the company guarantees payment for raw materials that were purchased by a supplier of Hormel Foods. In other cases, the company provides a standby letter of credit for obligations of an affiliated party that may arise under worker compensation claims. The company's guarantees either terminate in one year or remain in place until such time as Hormel Foods revokes the agreement. Total guarantees provided by the company, as of October 30, 2004, amounted to $3.6 million. These potential obligations are not reflected in the company's consolidated balance sheet.\n\nIn order to ensure a steady supply of hogs and turkeys and to keep the cost of products stable, the company has entered into contracts with producers for the purchase of hogs and turkeys at formula-based prices over periods of up to 15 years. Under these contracts, the company is committed at October 30, 2004, to purchase hogs and turkeys, assuming current price levels, as follows:\n\nPurchases under these contracts for fiscal 2004, 2003, and 2002 were $749.3 million, $686.8 million, and $682.3 million, respectively.\n\nThe company has noncancelable operating lease commitments on facilities and equipment at October 30, 2004, as follows:\n\nThe company expensed $20.0 million, $21.5 million, and $20.0 million for rent in fiscal 2004, 2003, and 2002, respectively.\n\n2004 Annual Report\n\n43", + "recall": 0.934156378600823, + "true_md": "Deferred income taxes reflect the net tax effects of temporary dif- ferences between the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities for financial reporting purposes and the amounts used for income tax purposes. The company believes that, based upon its lengthy and consistent history of profitable operations, it is probable that the net deferred tax assets of $24.9 million will be realized on future tax returns, primarily from the generation of future taxable income. Significant components of the deferred income tax liabilities and assets are as follows:\n\nThe company enters into various agreements guaranteeing speci- fied obligations of affiliated parties. In some cases, the company guarantees payment for raw materials that were purchased by a supplier of Hormel Foods. In other cases, the company provides a standby letter of credit for obligations of an affiliated party that may arise under worker compensation claims. The company’s guarantees either terminate in one year or remain in place until such time as Hormel Foods revokes the agreement. Total guaran- tees provided by the company, as of October 30, 2004, amounted to $3.6 million. These potential obligations are not reflected in the company’s consolidated balance sheet. \n\nIn order to ensure a steady supply of hogs and turkeys and to keep the cost of products stable, the company has entered into contracts with producers for the purchase of hogs and turkeys at formula-based prices over periods of up to 15 years. Under these contracts, the company is committed at October 30, 2004, to pur- chase hogs and turkeys, assuming current price levels, as follows:\n\nPurchases under these contracts for fiscal 2004, 2003, and 2002 were $749.3 million, $686.8 million, and $682.3 million, respectively.\n\nThe company has noncancelable operating lease commitments on facilities and equipment at October 30, 2004, as follows:\n\nIn fiscal 2004, the company received a $9.0 million cash distribu- tion from a foreign subsidiary under the provisions of the American Job Creation Act. The provisions of the Act provide for a one-time repatriation of foreign earnings of an affiliate at a net 5.25% tax rate if the earnings are repatriated under a Qualified Domestic Reinvestment Plan.\n\nU.S. income taxes have not been provided on remaining undistrib- uted earnings of foreign subsidiaries, which were approximately $24.6 million as of October 30, 2004. The company has rein- vested such earnings overseas in foreign operations indefinitely and expects that future earnings will also be reinvested overseas indefinitely.\n\nTotal income taxes paid during fiscal 2004, 2003, and 2002 were $138.8 million, $76.4 million, and $101.3 million, respectively.\n\nThe company expensed $20.0 million, $21.5 million, and $20.0 million for rent in fiscal 2004, 2003, and 2002, respectively.\n\nReconciliation of the statutory federal income tax rate to the company’s effective tax rate is as follows:\n\n## Commitments and Contingencies\n\n## > note H\n\n2004 Annual Report 43" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8084902922987588, + "doc_id": "263aa9fdf66c24251e369b393f1c2e336e333c2f1e9b12b2ab101177b51298c0", + "edit_distance": 0.1784841075794621, + "f1_score": 0.8999999999999999, + "meteor": 0.9458469768099427, + "precision": 0.8873239436619719, + "pred_md": "N O T E S T O C O N S O L I D A T E D F I N A N C I A L S T A T E M E N T S\n\n( C O N T I N U E D )\n\n## S T O C K O P T I O N P L A N S\n\nThe Company's 1997 Stock Incentive Plan provides for the grant to key employees of incentive and nonqualified stock options, stock appreciation rights, restricted stock and performance shares. In addition, under the 1997 Stock Incentive Plan, outside directors (directors who are not employees of the Company or any subsidiary) receive automatic annual grants of nonqualified stock options to purchase 2,000 shares of common stock. Under the 1997 Stock Incentive Plan, 624,425 shares in the aggregate of common stock were reserved for grants. The purchase price of shares issued on the exercise of incentive options must be at least equal to the fair market value of such shares on the date of grant. The purchase price for shares issued on the exercise of nonqualified options and restricted and performance shares is fixed by the Compensation Committee of the Board of Directors. The options granted become exercisable as determined by the Compensation Committee and expire no later than 10 years after the date of grant.\n\nDuring 1994, the stockholders of the Company approved the adoption of the Company's 1994 Key Employee Stock Incentive Plan, which provided for the grant to key employees of incentive and nonqualified options to purchase shares of common stock of the Company. During 1998, the Company's stockholders approved the adoption of the Company's 1998 Outside Directors Stock Option Plan which, as amended, provided for the automatic grant on February 1, 1998 and February 1, 1999 of nonqualified stock options to the Company's outside directors. Although no additional options may be granted under the 1994 Key Employee Stock Incentive Plan or the 1998 Outside Directors Stock Option Plan, all outstanding options under those plans continue to be governed by the terms and conditions of those plans and the existing option agreements for those grants.\n\nOption transactions for the three years in the period ended December 31, 2003 are as follows:\n\n18", + "recall": 0.9130434782608695, + "true_md": "NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (CONTINUED)\n\n## STOCK OPTION PLANS 8\n\nThe Company’s 1997 Stock Incentive Plan provides for the grant to key employees of incentive and nonqualified stock options, stock appreciation rights, restricted stock and performance shares. In addition, under the 1997 Stock Incentive Plan, outside directors (directors who are not employees of the Company or any subsidiary) receive automatic annual grants of nonqualified stock options to purchase 2,000 shares of common stock. Under the 1997 Stock Incentive Plan, 624,425 shares in the aggregate of common stock were reserved for grants. The purchase price of shares issued on the exercise of incentive options must be at least equal to the fair market value of such shares on the date of grant. The purchase price for shares issued on the exercise of nonqualified options and restricted and performance shares is fixed by the Compensation Committee of the Board of Directors. The options granted become exercisable as determined by the Compensation Committee and expire no later than 10 years after the date of grant. \n\nDuring 1994, the stockholders of the Company approved the adoption of the Company’s 1994 Key Employee Stock Incentive Plan, which provided for the grant to key employees of incentive and nonqualified options to purchase shares of common stock of the Company. During 1998, the Company’s stockholders approved the adoption of the Company’s 1998 Outside Directors Stock Option Plan which, as amended, provided for the automatic grant on February 1, 1998 and February 1, 1999 of nonqualified stock options to the Company’s outside directors. Although no additional options may be granted under the 1994 Key Employee Stock Incentive Plan or the 1998 Outside Directors Stock Option Plan, all outstanding options under those plans continue to be governed by the terms and conditions of those plans and the existing option agreements for those grants.\n\nOption transactions for the three years in the period ended December 31, 2003 are as follows:\n\n18" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "b6ca443c255c20ea43a4b736fca60ccac4560f23ccda28a081658bf266242bb9", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999999701976776, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO AND FORMING PART OF THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR THE FINANCIAL YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2000\n\n- (v) Rental is subject to market reviews every 21/2 years during the term, although the rental may not decrease.\n- (vi) An independent qualified valuer has determined that the fair open market rental value for the premises is $66,335 per annum for the currently occupied area. There is additional area available in the building for expansion purposes as and when required with appropriate rent adjustments in accordance with the per metre charge derived from this valuation.\n- (vii) The parties have agreed to execute a formal lease agreement which is to contain all other usual contractual provisions that would be expected to be found in a commercial lease of like nature.\n- (c) Unsecured loans of $50,000 had been provided to Slimdrill Pty Ltd during the period ended 30 June 1999. The balance of loans outstanding at balance date was $11,184. Interest was charged during the Financial Year at a rate of 6.7%. This amount has since been settled.\n\nMermaid Marine Australia Limited is the ultimate Australian parent entity.\n\n## 28. SEGMENT REPORTING\n\nThe economic entity operates predominantly within Australia and in one industry segment, being the hire and sale of marine related plant and equipment, buildings and land to companies operating in the oil and gas industry.\n\n57", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## NOTES TO AND FORMING PART OF THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR THE FINANCIAL YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2000\n\n- (v) Rental is subject to market reviews every 21/2 years during the term, although the rental may not decrease.\n\n- (vi) An independent qualified valuer has determined that the fair open market rental value for the premises is $66,335 per annum for the currently occupied area. There is additional area available in the building for expansion purposes as and when required with appropriate rent adjustments in accordance with the per metre charge derived from this valuation.\n\n- (vii) The parties have agreed to execute a formal lease agreement which is to contain all other usual contractual provisions that would be expected to be found in a commercial lease of like nature.\n\n- (c) Unsecured loans of $50,000 had been provided to Slimdrill Pty Ltd during the period ended 30 June 1999. The balance of loans outstanding at balance date was $11,184. Interest was charged during the Financial Year at a rate of 6.7%. This amount has since been settled.\n\nMermaid Marine Australia Limited is the ultimate Australian parent entity.\n\n## 28. SEGMENT REPORTING\n\nThe economic entity operates predominantly within Australia and in one industry segment, being the hire and sale of marine related plant and equipment, buildings and land to companies operating in the oil and gas industry.\n\n57" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9369700762904563, + "doc_id": "dae5ffebceda3f3b92a97732a7bea8f0159fb07bc02d7d5484c93c4b4dc0fe60", + "edit_distance": 0.0634765625, + "f1_score": 0.9582806573957018, + "meteor": 0.9653462619000773, + "precision": 0.969309462915601, + "pred_md": "## SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## Note 1. Summary of Significant Accounting Policies\n\nDescription of business: Shenandoah Telecommunications Company and subsidiaries (the Company) provides telephone service, wireless personal communications service (PCS) under the Sprint brand name, cable television, unregulated communications equipment sales and services, Internet access, and paging services. In addition, the Company leases towers and operates and maintains an interstate fiber optic network. The Company's operations are located in the four state region surrounding the Northern Shenandoah Valley of Virginia. Pursuant to a management agreement with Sprint Communications Company and its related parties (collectively, 'Sprint'), the Company is the exclusive PCS Affiliate of Sprint providing wireless mobility communications network products and services in the geographic area extending from Altoona, Harrisburg and York, Pennsylvania, south through Western Maryland, and the panhandle of West Virginia, to Harrisonburg, Virginia. The Company is licensed to use the Sprint brand name in this territory, and operates its network under the Sprint radio spectrum license (Note 7). A summary of the Company's significant accounting policies follows:\n\nStock split: All share and per share information reflect the two for one stock split announced in October 2003, to shareholders of record as of the close of business on January 30, 2004. The additional shares were distributed on February 20, 2004. The effective date of the split is February 23, 2004. All previously reported share and per share data included herein are retroactively adjusted to reflect the split.\n\nPrinciples of consolidation: The consolidated financial statements include the accounts of all wholly owned subsidiaries and other entities where effective control is exercised. All significant intercompany balances and transactions have been eliminated in consolidation.\n\nUse of estimates: Management of the Company has made a number of estimates and assumptions related to the reporting of assets and liabilities, the disclosure of contingent assets and liabilities at the date of the consolidated financial statements and the reported amounts of revenues and expenses during the reporting periods. Management reviews its estimates, including those related to recoverability and useful lives of assets as well as liabilities for income taxes and pension benefits. Changes in facts and circumstances may result in revised estimates and actual results could differ from those reported estimates.\n\nCash and cash equivalents: The Company considers all temporary cash investments purchased with a maturity of three months or less to be cash equivalents. The Company places its temporary cash investments with high credit quality financial institutions. At times, these investments may be in excess of FDIC insurance limits. Cash and cash equivalents were $28.7million, $2.2 million, and $2.0 million at December 31, 2003, 2002 and 2001, respectively.\n\nAccounts receivable: Accounts receivable are recorded at the invoiced amount and do not bear interest. The allowance for doubtful accounts is the Company's best estimate of the amount of probable credit losses in the Company's existing accounts receivable. The Company determines the allowance based on historical write-off experience and by industry and national economic data. The Company reviews its allowance for doubtful accounts monthly. Past due balances meeting specific criteria are reviewed individually for collectibility. All other balances are reviewed on a pooled basis. Account balances are charged off against the allowance after all means of collection have been exhausted and the potential for recovery is considered remote. Accounts receivable are concentrated among customers within the Company's geographic service area and large telecommunications companies. The Company's allowance for uncollectable receivables related to continuing operations was $477 thousand, $914 thousand and $650 thousand at December 31, 2003, 2002 and 2001, respectively.\n\nSecurities and investments: The classifications of debt and equity securities are determined by management at the date individual investments are acquired. The appropriateness of such classification is continually reassessed. The Company monitors the fair value of all investments, and based on factors such as market conditions, financial information and industry conditions, the Company will reflect impairments in values as is warranted. The classification of those securities and the related accounting policies are as follows:\n\nAvailable-for-Sale Securities: rities: Debt and equity securities classified as available-for-sale consist of securities which the h the Company intends to hold for an indefinite period of time, but not necessarily to maturity. Any decision to sell a sell a security classified as available-for-sale would be based on various factors, including changes in market conditions, tions, liquidity needs and similar criteria. Available-for-sale securities are recorded at fair value as determined by quoted uoted Available-for-Sale Secu rities: Debt and equity securities classified as available-for-sale consist of securities whic Company intends to hold for an indefinite period of time, but not necessarily to maturity. Any decision to y security classified as available-for-sale would be based on various factors, including changes in market condi liquidity needs and similar criteria. Available-for-sale securities are recorded at fair value as determined by q Available-for-Sale Secu Debt and equity securities classified as available-for-sale consist of securities which the Company intends to hold for an indefinite period of time, but not necessarily to maturity. An decision to sell a security classified as available-for-sale would be based on various factors, including changes in market conditions, liquidity needs and similar criteria. Available-for-sale securities are recorded at fair value as determined by quoted market prices. Unrealized holding gains and losses, net of the related tax effect, are excluded from earnings and are reported as a separate component of other comprehensive\n\nSHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY\n\n18\n\n■", + "recall": 0.9475, + "true_md": "SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## Note 1. Summary of Significant Accounting Policies\n\nDescription of business: Shenandoah Telecommunications Company and subsidiaries (the Company) provides telephone service, wireless personal communications service (PCS) under the Sprint brand name, cable television, unregulated communications equipment sales and services, Internet access, and paging services. In addition, the Company leases towers and operates and maintains an interstate fiber optic network. The Company’s operations are located in the four state region surrounding the Northern Shenandoah Valley of Virginia. Pursuant to a management agreement with Sprint Communications Company and its related parties (collectively, “Sprint”), the Company is the exclusive PCS Affiliate of Sprint providing wireless mobility communications network products and services in the geographic area extending from Altoona, Harrisburg and York, Pennsylvania, south through Western Maryland, and the panhandle of West Virginia, to Harrisonburg, Virginia. The Company is licensed to use the Sprint brand name in this territory, and operates its network under the Sprint radio spectrum license (Note 7). A summary of the Company’s significant accounting policies follows:\n\nStock split: All share and per share information reflect the two for one stock split announced in October 2003, to shareholders of record as of the close of business on January 30, 2004. The additional shares were distributed on February 20, 2004. The effective date of the split is February 23, 2004. All previously reported share and per share data included herein are retroactively adjusted to reflect the split.\n\nPrinciples of consolidation: The consolidated financial statements include the accounts of all wholly owned subsidiaries and other entities where effective control is exercised. All significant intercompany balances and transactions have been eliminated in consolidation.\n\nUse of estimates: Management of the Company has made a number of estimates and assumptions related to the reporting of assets and liabilities, the disclosure of contingent assets and liabilities at the date of the consolidated financial statements and the reported amounts of revenues and expenses during the reporting periods. Management reviews its estimates, including those related to recoverability and useful lives of assets as well as liabilities for income taxes and pension benefits. Changes in facts and circumstances may result in revised estimates and actual results could differ from those reported estimates.\n\nCash and cash equivalents: The Company considers all temporary cash investments purchased with a maturity of three months or less to be cash equivalents. The Company places its temporary cash investments with high credit quality financial institutions. At times, these investments may be in excess of FDIC insurance limits. Cash and cash equivalents were $28.7million, $2.2 million, and $2.0 million at December 31, 2003, 2002 and 2001, respectively.\n\nAccounts receivable: Accounts receivable are recorded at the invoiced amount and do not bear interest. The allowance for doubtful accounts is the Company’s best estimate of the amount of probable credit losses in the Company’s existing accounts receivable. The Company determines the allowance based on historical write-off experience and by industry and national economic data. The Company reviews its allowance for doubtful accounts monthly. Past due balances meeting specific criteria are reviewed individually for collectibility. All other balances are reviewed on a pooled basis. Account balances are charged off against the allowance after all means of collection have been exhausted and the potential for recovery is considered remote. Accounts receivable are concentrated among customers within the Company’s geographic service area and large telecommunications companies. The Company’s allowance for uncollectable receivables related to continuing operations was $477 thousand, $914 thousand and $650 thousand at December 31, 2003, 2002 and 2001, respectively.\n\nSecurities and investments: The classifications of debt and equity securities are determined by management at the date individual investments are acquired. The appropriateness of such classification is continually reassessed. The Company monitors the fair value of all investments, and based on factors such as market conditions, financial information and industry conditions, the Company will reflect impairments in values as is warranted. The classification of those securities and the related accounting policies are as follows:\n\nSHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY ■ 18\n\nAvailable-for-Sale Securities: Debt and equity securities classified as available-for-sale consist of securiti es which the Com pany intends to hold for an indefinite period of time, but not necessarily to maturity. Any decision to sell a secu rity classified as available-for-sale would be based on various factors, including changes in market c ondition s, liqui dity needs and similar criteria. Available-for-sale securities are recorded at fair value as determined by quot e d Debt and equity securities classified as available-for-sale consist of securities which the Company intends to hold for an indefinite period of time, but not necessarily to maturity. Any decision to s e ll a security classified as available-for-sale would be based on various factors, including changes in mark et c ondi tions, liquidity needs and similar criteria. Available-for-sale are recorded at fair value as determined by quoted Available-for-Sale Securities: Debt and equity securities classified as available-for-sale consist of securities which the Company intends to hold for an indefinite period of time, but not necessarily to maturity. Any decision to sell a security classified as available-for-sale would be based on various factors, including changes in market conditions, liquidity needs and similar criteria. Available-for-sale securities are recorded at fair value as determined by quoted market prices. Unrealized holding gains and losses, net of the related tax effect, are excluded from earnings and are reported as a separate component of other comprehensive" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9128746976946766, + "doc_id": "6d49eb218eb35d2fecb00f1ed6c8686eb5e2ceb12ea5d5a5f3b3041c2515e281", + "edit_distance": 0.13807531380753138, + "f1_score": 0.9371980676328503, + "meteor": 0.9181928148793406, + "precision": 0.9603960396039604, + "pred_md": "64\n\n## NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\nfor the year ended 31 December 2004\n\n## 18. Contributed Equity (continued)\n\n## (c) Santos Employee Share Purchase Plan (continued)\n\n## Senior Executive Long Term Incentive\n\nIn addition, during the year, selected senior executives of the Company were invited to apply for shares pursuant to the terms of the Santos Employee Share Purchase Plan as part of the Company's long term incentive arrangements (and on different terms from the general employee participation described above). On 27 January 2004 and 1 July 2004, 3,397 and 87,851 (2003: 129,664) shares respectively were allotted to a trustee to hold for senior executives.\n\nThe shares allocated pursuant to the Plan were allotted to a trustee at no cost to participants, to be held on their behalf. The allocation price is Market Value (as defined above) and the trustee was funded by the Company to subscribe for the shares.\n\nIn general the shares are restricted for a period of one year from the date of allotment. If an executive allotted such shares ceased employment during this period, the Board in its discretion may determine that a lesser restriction on transfer and dealing applies, having regard to the circumstances of the cessation. The shares can remain on trust for up to four years, during which time the shares are subject to forfeiture if participants act fraudulently or dishonestly or in breach of their obligations to any Group Company. Participants are entitled to instruct the trustee as to the exercise of voting rights, receive dividends and participate in bonus and rights issues while the shares are restricted.\n\nThe fair value of the 3,397 and 87,851 shares allotted on 27 January 2004 and 1 July 2004 respectively to a trustee to hold for senior executives was $773,783 at the end of the financial year, being the market price of the ordinary shares of the Company on the Australian Stock Exchange as at close of trading on that date.\n\nSummary of share movements in the Plan:\n\nThe fair value per share for shares granted during the year and the consideration received by the Company per share is Market Value (as defined above) less, in the case of General Employee Participation, the discount of 5% referred to above.\n\nThe amounts recognised in the financial statements of the Santos Group and the Company in relation to the Santos Employee Share Purchase Plan during the year were:\n\nAt 31 December 2004, the total number of shares acquired under the Plan since its commencement was 930,112.\n\nAnnual Report 2004", + "recall": 0.9150943396226415, + "true_md": "## (c) Santos Employee Share Purchase Plan (continued)\n\n## Senior Executive Long Term Incentive\n\nIn addition, during the year, selected senior executives of the Compan y were invited to apply for shares pursuant to the terms of the Santos Employee Share Purchase Plan as part of the Company’s long term incen tive arrangements (and on different terms from the general employee participation described above). On 27 January 2004 an 1 July 2004, 3,397 and 87,851 (2003: 129,664) shares respectively were allotted to a trustee to hold for senior executives.\n\nThe shares allocated pursuant to the Plan were allotted to a trustee at no cost to participants, to be held on their behalf. The allocation price is Market Value (as defined above) and the trustee was funded by th Company to subscribe for the shares.\n\nIn general the shares are restricted for a period of one year from the date of allotment. If an executive allotted such shares ceased employment during this period, the Board in its discretion may determin that a lesser restriction on transfer and dealing applies, having regard to the circumstances of the cessation. The shares can remain on trust for up to f our years, during which time the shares are subject to forfeiture if participants act fraudulently or dishonestly or in breach of their obligation s to any Group Company. Participants are entitled to instruct the trustee as to the exercise of voting rights, receive dividends and parti cipate in bonus and rights issues while the shares are restricted.\n\nThe fair value of the 3,397 and 87,851 shares allotted on 27 January 2004 and 1 July 2004 respectively to a trustee to hold for senior executives was $773,783 at the end of the financial year, being the market price of the ordinary shares of the Company on the Australian Stock Exchange as at close of trading on that date.\n\nSummary of share movements in the Plan:\n\nThe fair value per share for shares granted during the year and the consid eration received by the Company per share is Market Value (as defined above) less, in the case of General Employee Participation, the discount of 5% referred to above.\n\nThe amounts recognised in the financial statements of the Santos Group and the Company in relation to the Santos Employee Share Purchase Plan during the year were:\n\nAt 31 December 2004, the total number of shares acquired under th e Plan since its commencement was 930,112.\n\nAnnual Report 2004 64\n\n## 18. Contributed Equity (continued)\n\nNOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STA TEMENTS for the year ended 31 December 2004" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9617280761505493, + "doc_id": "3a396e3c487115bd70a0dc9a9a4e99f9294f79a5f4b6bb85fd07d4e06ce1f293", + "edit_distance": 0.030595813204508857, + "f1_score": 0.9709923664122136, + "meteor": 0.9849305390945595, + "precision": 0.9607250755287009, + "pred_md": "from the prior year was primarily due to the above-mentioned improvement in manufacturing variances. The decline in gross profit percentage in 2002 from the prior year was primarily due to the unfavorable shift in product mix.\n\nOperating expenses were $15.3 million in 2003, compared with $14.5 million in 2002 and $16.0 million in 2001. The increase in operating expenses in 2003 from 2002 was primarily attributable to increased general and administrative ('G&A') and selling ('Selling') expenses. G&A expenses consist primarily of salaries and other related expenses of administrative, executive and financial personnel and outside professional fees. The increase in G&A expenses in 2003 is primarily attributable to increased insurance costs, compensation and other taxes. The Company anticipates that G&A expenses are likely to increase in the foreseeable future but at a rate less than the anticipated rate of increase in revenues. Selling expenses consist primarily of salaries, commissions and other related expenses for sales and marketing personnel, marketing, advertising and promotional expenses. The increase in Selling expenses in 2003 is primarily related to increased compensation costs and travel related expenses. The Company anticipates that Selling expenses are likely to increase in the foreseeable future but at a rate less than the anticipated rate of increase in revenues. Research and development ('R&D') expenses consist primarily of salaries and other related expenses of the research and development personnel as well as costs associated with regulatory expenses. The Company anticipates that R&D expenses will continue at the current level for the foreseeable future. The decrease in operating expenses in 2002 from 2001 was primarily attributable to decreased G&A and Selling expenses partially offset by increased R&D expenses. G&A expenses for 2002 were $857,000 lower than G&A expenses for 2001, primarily due to a decrease in amortization expense as a result of a reduction in goodwill amortization in 2002 due to the adoption of SFAS No. 142 as discussed in Note 2 to the Company's Consolidated Financial Statements included herein. Additionally, G&A expenses were lower in 2002 compared to 2001 primarily as a result of reduced depreciation and cost containment programs related to supplies, communication costs and professional fees. The decrease in Selling expenses of $905,000 in 2002 from 2001 was primarily related to reduced outside services (primarily related to clinical studies), reduced compensation costs and continuing cost reduction efforts. R&D expenses were $269,000 higher for 2002 compared with 2001. This increase was primarily related to increased product development activities.\n\nThe Company's operating income for 2003 was $6.9 million, compared with $5.8 million in 2002 and $5.8 million in 2001. Revenue growth, manufacturing efficiency improvements, cost containment and cost reduction activities were the major contributors to the operating income improvements during 2003. Revenue growth, cost containment and cost reduction activities during 2002 were offset by lower gross margins compared with 2001, which combined to cause relatively flat operating results.\n\nInterest expense was $195,000 in 2003 compared to $432,000 in 2002 and $300,000 in 2001. The decrease in 2003 is primarily related to lower average borrowings during 2003 as compared with 2002. The increase in 2002 is primarily related to higher average borrowings during 2002 as compared with 2001 partially offset by a significant reduction in interest rates in 2002. The higher average borrowings during 2002 is primarily related to borrowing of funds under the Company's credit facility in late December 2001 in connection with its repurchase of outstanding common stock of the Company under a tender offer. The other income in 2001 was primarily related to the Company's one-time pre-tax gain of $428,000 on the sale of a patent.\n\nIncome tax expense in 2003 totaled $1.9 million, compared with $1.4 million in 2002 and $1.8 million in 2001. The effective tax rates for 2003, 2002 and 2001 were 27.8 percent, 25.7 percent and 29.7 percent, respectively. Benefits from tax incentives for exports and R&D expenditures totaled $350,000 in 2003, $408,000 in 2002 and $404,000 in 2001. The higher effective tax rate in 2003 is primarily a result of benefits from tax incentives for exports and R&D expenditures being a lesser percentage of taxable income in 2003 than in 2002. The lower effective tax rate in 2002 is primarily a result of benefits from tax incentives for exports and R&D expenditures being a larger percentage of taxable income in 2002 than in 2001 and the utilization of capital loss carryforwards in 2002.\n\nThe Company believes that 2004 revenues will be higher than 2003 revenues and that the cost of goods sold, gross profit, operating income and income from continuing operations will each be higher in 2004 than in 2003. The Company further believes that it will have continuing volume growth in most of its product lines in 2004, complemented by the introduction of new products, and that it will achieve a double-digit annual rate of growth in earnings per share from continuing operations for the next several years.\n\n## DI S C O N T I N U E D O P E R A T I O N S\n\nDuring 1997, the Company sold all of its natural gas operations. The financial statements presented herein reflect the Company's natural gas operations as discontinued operations for all periods presented. The financial statements also reflect an after-tax gain on disposal of these discontinued operations of $ .2 million, or $ .10 per basic and $ .09 per diluted share, in both 2003 and 2002, and $5.5 million, or $2.70 per basic and $2.42 per diluted share, in 2001.\n\nIn addition to the initial consideration received in 1997 upon the sale of the natural gas operations, certain annual contingent deferred payments of up to $250,000 per year were to be paid to the Company over an eight-year period which began in 1999, with the amount paid each year to be dependent upon revenues received by the purchaser from certain gas transportation contracts. The Company received deferred payments of $250,000 each, before tax, from the purchaser in April 2003, 2002 and 2001 which are reflected in each year as a gain from discontinued operations of $165,000, net of tax. The 2001 gain also includes a $5,327,000 non-cash gain from reversal of a reserve established when the Company disposed of its natural gas operations in 1997. This reversal in the third quarter of 2001 followed the resolution of an outstanding contingency related to the sale of those assets.\n\n25", + "recall": 0.9814814814814815, + "true_md": "from the prior year was primarily due to the above-mentioned improvement in manufacturing variances. The decline in gross profit percentage in 2002 from the prior year was primarily due to the unfavorable shift in product mix.\n\nOperating expenses were $15.3 million in 2003, compared with $14.5 million in 2002 and $16.0 million in 2001. The increase in operating expenses in 2003 from 2002 was primarily attributable to increased general and administrative (“G&A”) and selling (“Selling”) expenses. G&A expenses consist primarily of salaries and other related expenses of administrative, executive and financial personnel and outside professional fees. The increase in G&A expenses in 2003 is primarily attributable to increased insurance costs, compensation and other taxes. The Company anticipates that G&A expenses are likely to increase in the foreseeable future but at a rate less than the anticipated rate of increase in revenues. Selling expenses consist primarily of salaries, commissions and other related expenses for sales and marketing personnel, marketing, advertising and promotional expenses. The increase in Selling expenses in 2003 is primarily related to increased compensation costs and travel related expenses. The Company anticipates that Selling expenses are likely to increase in the foreseeable future but at a rate less than the anticipated rate of increase in revenues. Research and development (“R&D”) expenses consist primarily of salaries and other related expenses of the research and development personnel as well as costs associated with regulatory expenses. The Company anticipates that R&D expenses will continue at the current level for the foreseeable future. The decrease in operating expenses in 2002 from 2001 was primarily attributable to decreased G&A and Selling expenses partially offset by increased R&D expenses. G&A expenses for 2002 were $857,000 lower than G&A expenses for 2001, primarily due to a decrease in amortization expense as a result of a reduction in goodwill amortization in 2002 due to the adoption of SFAS No. 142 as discussed in Note 2 to the Company’s Consolidated Financial Statements included herein. Additionally, G&A expenses were lower in 2002 compared to 2001 primarily as a result of reduced depreciation and cost containment programs related to supplies, communication costs and professional fees. The decrease in Selling expenses of $905,000 in 2002 from 2001 was primarily related to reduced outside services (primarily related to clinical studies), reduced compensation costs and continuing cost reduction efforts. R&D expenses were $269,000 higher for 2002 compared with 2001. This increase was primarily related to increased product development activities. \n\nThe Company’s operating income for 2003 was $6.9 million, compared with $5.8 million in 2002 and $5.8 million in 2001. Revenue growth, manufacturing efficiency improvements, cost containment and cost reduction activities were the major contributors to the operating income improvements during 2003. Revenue growth, cost containment and cost reduction activities during 2002 were offset by lower gross margins compared with 2001, which combined to cause relatively flat operating results. \n\nInterest expense was $195,000 in 2003 compared to $432,000 in 2002 and $300,000 in 2001. The decrease in 2003 is primarily related to lower average borrowings during 2003 as compared with 2002. The increase in 2002 is primarily related to higher average borrowings during 2002 as compared with 2001 partially offset by a significant reduction in interest rates in 2002. The higher average borrowings during 2002 is primarily related to borrowing of funds under the Company’s credit facility in late December 2001 in connection with its repurchase of outstanding common stock of the Company under a tender offer. The other income in 2001 was primarily related to the Company’s one-time pre-tax gain of $428,000 on the sale of a patent.\n\nIncome tax expense in 2003 totaled $1.9 million, compared with $1.4 million in 2002 and $1.8 million in 2001. The effective tax rates for 2003, 2002 and 2001 were 27.8 percent, 25.7 percent and 29.7 percent, respectively. Benefits from tax incentives for exports and R&D expenditures totaled $350,000 in 2003, $408,000 in 2002 and $404,000 in 2001. The higher effective tax rate in 2003 is primarily a result of benefits from tax incentives for exports and R&D expenditures being a lesser percentage of taxable income in 2003 than in 2002. The lower effective tax rate in 2002 is primarily a result of benefits from tax incentives for exports and R&D expenditures being a larger percentage of taxable income in 2002 than in 2001 and the utilization of capital loss carryforwards in 2002. \n\nThe Company believes that 2004 revenues will be higher than 2003 revenues and that the cost of goods sold, gross profit, operating income and income from continuing operations will each be higher in 2004 than in 2003. The Company further believes that it will have continuing volume growth in most of its product lines in 2004, complemented by the introduction of new products, and that it will achieve a double-digit annual rate of growth in earnings per share from continuing operations for the next several years.\n\n## DISCONTINUED OPERATIONS\n\nDuring 1997, the Company sold all of its natural gas operations. The financial statements presented herein reflect the Company’s natural gas operations as discontinued operations for all periods presented. The financial statements also reflect an after-tax gain on disposal of these discontinued operations of $ .2 million, or $ .10 per basic and $ .09 per diluted share, in both 2003 and 2002, and $5.5 million, or $2.70 per basic and $2.42 per diluted share, in 2001.\n\nIn addition to the initial consideration received in 1997 upon the sale of the natural gas operations, certain annual contingent deferred payments of up to $250,000 per year were to be paid to the Company over an eight-year period which began in 1999, with the amount paid each year to be dependent upon revenues received by the purchaser from certain gas transportation contracts. The Company received deferred payments of $250,000 each, before tax, from the purchaser in April 2003, 2002 and 2001 which are reflected in each year as a gain from discontinued operations of $165,000, net of tax. The 2001 gain also includes a $5,327,000 non-cash gain from reversal of a reserve established when the Company disposed of its natural gas operations in 1997. This reversal in the third quarter of 2001 followed the resolution of an outstanding contingency related to the sale of those assets. \n\n25" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7009472187737036, + "doc_id": "1869050e1a5ce53b0c75a6053353a4037ea03c3be1bde23569512ab876262396", + "edit_distance": 0.24390243902439024, + "f1_score": 0.9107142857142856, + "meteor": 0.8919531551346337, + "precision": 0.9107142857142857, + "pred_md": "12\n\n## IN THOUSANDS EXCEPT PER SHARE DATA\n\n- (1) As originally reported at the close of each year and prior to restatements for pooling-of-interests.\n- (2) Adjusted for stock dividends and splits.\n\n## 'The value of our stock rose as we achieved higher earnings for the 16th year in a row .'\n\nCurtis R. Harvey Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer\n\nCurtis R. Harvey Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer", + "recall": 0.9107142857142857, + "true_md": "## IN THOUSANDS EXCEPT PER SHARE DATA\n\n(1) As originally reported at the close of each year and prior to restatements for pooling-of-interests.\n\n(2) Adjusted for stock dividends and splits.\n\n## “The value of our stock rose as we achieved higher earnings for the 1 6th year in a row.”\n\nCurtis R. Harvey Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer\n\n12" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9019468725213772, + "doc_id": "823ca0c3fd648e74c021152799cdc407752616d6ccb6e414e99afc4c763192b8", + "edit_distance": 0.8391203703703703, + "f1_score": 0.9590163934426231, + "meteor": 0.7631124553156953, + "precision": 0.9616438356164384, + "pred_md": "## you can count on emmis to continue to do\n\nDear Shareholders,\n\nOn our year-end conference call, I said that last year was the best in Emmis Communications' history. And while that might have sounded like the usual Wall Street hyperbole - like any other CEO bragging about his company's performance - the difference is, I believed it. And I still do.\n\nBut I've been in this business long enough to know two things for sure: What I believe is not as important as what I can prove, and what we did last year is only meaningful if it reflects on how we will do in the coming year. The good news is, Emmis does have the results to back up my high praise, and what we did to perform last year does directly relate to how we'll perform in the year ahead.\n\n## The best year\n\nThe bottom line is this: Emmis Communications turned in a remarkable performance last year. Again and again, and by a number of measures, we outperformed our peers, our markets and our own solid track record.\n\nAnd we did this in a year that was challenging in just about every way. The economy was unstable, public companies came under continuing scrutiny, indecency issues hounded broadcasters, competition for tight ad dollars increased and technology continued to reshape the media world.\n\nBut our people refused to be slowed by those challenges. Instead, they worked through them. They innovated, hustled and focused. And they produced.\n\nOur radio division's revenue growth led our markets and the industry - in our fiscal year, our group was up 4.5 percent while our markets were up 2.7 percent and the industry only 1 percent. Based on this kind of performance, we have consistently ranked among the nation's leaders in per-station revenue, and we continue to produce top-rated programming in markets across the nation.\n\nOur TV performance was even more impressive. The Emmis television group's revenues were up 0.5 percent in calendar 2003, a year when our markets saw a 2.3 percent decrease in revenues, and the industry experienced a 4.7 percent revenue decline. This industry-leading result made us one of the few groups in the nation to post positive growth. In addi-\n\ntion, we gained revenue share at 11 of our 13 measured stations and held the line on expenses, giving us a 1.2 percent increase in fiscal-year cash flow.\n\nOur publishing and international divisions also posted strong results. In a tough publishing market, our magazines boosted their division's revenues by 4.6 percent over last year and increased cash flow by 3.3 percent. Our international division turned in a revenue increase of 27 percent and a cash flow increase of 31 percent.\n\nIn addition to boosting performance in our divisions, we honed our corporate operations by continuing to build one of the most adept and hardest-working corporate groups in American media. With this team in place, we've brought our leverage and cost of capital down to more manageable levels, found ways to combat the continually increasing costs of health insurance and, in a truly top-notch effort, smoothly integrated our new Austin radio properties - in just under a year as a part of Emmis, the Austin properties are enjoying significant ratings and revenue increases.\n\nOf course, for you, the real bottom line on our performance is its impact on your investment. I'm proud to say that we saw a 27 percent increase in our share price over the course of the last fiscal year - we ended fiscal '03 at 19.79, and closed the book on fiscal '04 at 25.17.\n\n## How we did it\n\nOperationally, we were on top of our game last year. However, as I said, I know that the past year's performance really only matters if it reflects on what we'll do in the coming year. The good news is, it does. We performed at these high levels not by doing something unusual, but by operating the way Emmis has always operated, and the way we always will.\n\nFirst of all, we focus on assembling and maintaining the best teams in our markets. We have traditionally had the top salespeople, creative and technical professionals, news staffs, managers and support staff in every city where we operate. Their peers turn to them for industry leadership, honor them with awards and copy them at every opportunity. We invest in these people, giving them industry-leading benefits packages, great opportunities and the tools they need to succeed. This has always been a hallmark of Emmis, and it won't change.", + "recall": 0.9564032697547684, + "true_md": "## Dear Shareholders,\n\ntion, we gained revenue share at 11 of our 13 measured stations and held the line on expenses, giving us a 1.2 percent increase in fiscal-year cash flow.\n\nOn our year-end conference call, I said that last year was the best in Emmis Communications’ history. And while that might have sounded like the usual Wall Street hyperbole – like any other CEO bragging about his company’s performance – the difference is, I believed it. And I still do.\n\nOur publishing and international divisions also posted strong results. In a tough publishing market, our magazines boosted their division’s revenues by 4.6 percent over last year and increased cash flow by 3.3 percent. Our international division turned in a revenue increase of 27 percent and a cash flow increase of 31 percent.\n\nBut I’ve been in this business long enough to know two things for sure: What I believe is not as important as what I can prove, and what we did last year is only meaningful if it reflects on how we will do in the coming year. The good news is, Emmis does have the results to back up my high praise, and what we did to perform last year does directly relate to how we’ll perform in the year ahead.\n\nIn addition to boosting performance in our divisions, we honed our corporate operations by continuing to build one of the most adept and hardest-working corporate groups in American media. With this team in place, we’ve brought our leverage and cost of capital down to more manageable levels, found ways to combat the continually increasing costs of health insurance and, in a truly top-notch effort, smoothly integrated our new Austin radio properties – in just under a year as a part of Emmis, the Austin properties are enjoying significant ratings and revenue increases. \n\nThe bottom line is this: Emmis Communications turned in a remarkable performance last year. Again and again, and by a number of measures, we outperformed our peers, our mar- kets and our own solid track record.\n\nOf course, for you, the real bottom line on our performance is its impact on your investment. I’m proud to say that we saw a 27 percent increase in our share price over the course of the last fiscal year – we ended fiscal ’03 at 19.79, and closed the book on fiscal ’04 at 25.17.\n\nAnd we did this in a year that was challenging in just about every way. The economy was unstable, public companies came under continuing scrutiny, indecency issues hounded broadcasters, competition for tight ad dollars increased and technology continued to reshape the media world. \n\nBut our people refused to be slowed by those challenges. Instead, they worked through them. They innovated, hustled and focused. And they produced. \n\nOperationally, we were on top of our game last year. However, as I said, I know that the past year’s performance really only matters if it reflects on what we’ll do in the coming year. The good news is, it does. We performed at these high levels not by doing something unusual, but by operating the way Emmis has always operated, and the way we always will.\n\nOur radio division’s revenue growth led our markets and the industry – in our fiscal year, our group was up 4.5 percent while our markets were up 2.7 percent and the industry only 1 percent. Based on this kind of performance, we have con- sistently ranked among the nation’s leaders in per-station revenue, and we continue to produce top-rated programming in markets across the nation.\n\nFirst of all, we focus on assembling and maintaining the best teams in our markets. We have traditionally had the top salespeople, creative and technical professionals, news staffs, managers and support staff in every city where we operate. Their peers turn to them for industry leadership, honor them with awards and copy them at every opportunity. We invest in these people, giving them industry-leading ben- efits packages, great opportunities and the tools they need to succeed. This has always been a hallmark of Emmis, and it won’t change.\n\nOur TV performance was even more impressive. The Emmis television group’s revenues were up 0.5 percent in calendar 2003, a year when our markets saw a 2.3 percent decrease in revenues, and the industry experienced a 4.7 percent revenue decline. This industry-leading result made us one of the few groups in the nation to post positive growth. In addi-\n\n## How we did it\n\n## The best year" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5956403592718089, + "doc_id": "e3542af4c1713c1f6a0b5c64793199b8939124c319d1fd2cc4714ef70963a801", + "edit_distance": 0.35714285714285715, + "f1_score": 0.782608695652174, + "meteor": 0.9298245614035089, + "precision": 0.6428571428571429, + "pred_md": "This annual report is printed on recycled paper.\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\nc3", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "This annual report is printed on recycled paper." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8751474483993158, + "doc_id": "9b1b59fbce7fffc3e1af7ff9c34c74842aa57e4e788c3ff5ca2d8634d0c63209", + "edit_distance": 0.6666666666666666, + "f1_score": 0.9388429752066116, + "meteor": 0.8364794339518754, + "precision": 0.9759450171821306, + "pred_md": "## HON INDUSTRIES Inc. and SUBSIDIARIES\n\nincluded in the Cash, Cash Equivalents, and Investments note included in the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.\n\n## CAPITAL EXPENDITURE INVESTMENTS\n\nCapital expenditures were $34.8 million in 2003, $25.9 million in 2002, and $36.9 million in 2001. Expenditures during 2003, 2002, and 2001 have been consistently focused on machinery and equipment needed to support new products, process improvements, and cost savings initiatives. Expenditures in 2003 also included the purchase from a related party of a previously leased hearth products plant for $3.6 million.\n\n## ACQUISITIONS\n\nDuring 2001, the Company completed the acquisition of three small hearth products distributors for a total purchase price of approximately $7.6 million. The acquisitions were accounted for using the purchase method, and the results of the three distributors have been included in the Company's financial statements since the date of acquisition. On January 5, 2004, the Company completed the acquisition of Paoli Inc., a provider of wood case goods and seating, for approximately $80 million. The acquisition will be accounted for using the purchase method.\n\n## LONG-TERM DEBT\n\nLong-term debt, including capital lease obligations, was 1% of total capitalization at January 3, 2004, 2% at December 28, 2002, and 12% at December 29, 2001. The reductions in long-term debt during 2003 and 2002 were due to the retirement of Industrial Revenue Bonds. The Company does not expect future capital resources to be a constraint on planned growth. Additional borrowing capacity of $136 million, less amounts used for designated letters of credit, is available through a revolving bank credit agreement in the event cash generated from operations should be inadequate to meet future needs. Certain of the Company's credit agreements include covenants that limit the assumption of additional debt and lease obligations. The Company has been, and currently is, in compliance with the covenants related to the debt agreements.\n\n## CONTRACTUAL OBLIGATIONS\n\nThe following table discloses the Company's obligations and commitments to make future payments under contracts:\n\n## PAYMENTS DUE BY PERIOD\n\nOther long-term obligations includes $2,959,000 earn-out on convertible debentures included in current liabilities, $69,000 of financial guarantees with customers, and $8,865,000 of payments included in long-term liabilities, due to members who are participants in the Company's salary deferral program.\n\n## CASH DIVIDENDS\n\nCash dividends were $0.52 per common share for 2003, $0.50 for 2002, and $0.48 for 2001. Further, the Board of Directors announced a 7.7% increase in the quarterly dividend from $0.13 to $0.14 per common share effective with the March 1, 2004, dividend payment for shareholders of record at the close of business February 20, 2004. The previous quarterly dividend increase was from $0.125 to $0.13, effective with the February 28, 2003, dividend payment for shareholders of record at the close of business on February 21, 2003. A cash dividend has been paid every quarter since April 15, 1955, and quarterly dividends are expected to continue. The average dividend payout percentage for the most recent three-year period has been 32% of prior year earnings.\n\n## COMMON SHARE REPURCHASES\n\nDuring 2003, the Company repurchased 762,300 shares of its common stock at a cost of approximately $21.5 million, or an average price of $28.22 per share. During 2002, the Company repurchased 614,580 shares of its common stock at a cost of approximately $15.7 million, or an average price of $25.60 per share. During 2001, the Company repurchased 1,472,937 shares at a cost of approximately $35.1 million, or an average price of $23.80 per share.\n\n## LITIGATION AND UNCERTAINTIES\n\nThe Company has contingent liabilities that have arisen in the course of its business, including pending litigation, preferential payments claims in customer bankruptcies, environmental remediation, taxes, and other\n\n37", + "recall": 0.9044585987261147, + "true_md": "H O N I N D U S T R I E S I n c . a n d S U B S I D I A R I E S\n\nincluded in the Cash, Cash Equivalents, and Investments note included in the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.\n\nCapital expenditures were $34.8 million in 2003, $25.9 million in 2002, and $36.9 million in 2001. Expenditures during 2003, 2002, and 2001 have been consistently focused on machinery and equipment needed to support new products, process improvements, and cost savings initiatives. Expenditures in 2003 also included the purchase from a related party of a previously leased hearth products plant for $3.6 million. \n\nOther long-term obligations includes $2,959,000 earn-out on convert- ible debentures included in current liabilities, $69,000 of financial guarantees with customers, and $8,865,000 of payments included in long-term liabilities, due to members who are participants in the Company’s salary deferral program.\n\nDuring 2001, the Company completed the acquisition of three small hearth products distributors for a total purchase price of approximately $7.6 million. The acquisitions were accounted for using the purchase method, and the results of the three distributors have been included in the Company’s financial statements since the date of acquisition. On January 5, 2004, the Company completed the acquisition of Paoli Inc., a provider of wood case goods and seating, for approximately $80 mil- lion. The acquisition will be accounted for using the purchase method.\n\nCash dividends were $0.52 per common share for 2003, $0.50 for 2002, and $0.48 for 2001. Further, the Board of Directors announced a 7.7% increase in the quarterly dividend from $0.13 to $0.14 per com- mon share effective with the March 1, 2004, dividend payment for shareholders of record at the close of business February 20, 2004. The previous quarterly dividend increase was from $0.125 to $0.13, effec- tive with the February 28, 2003, dividend payment for shareholders of record at the close of business on February 21, 2003. A cash dividend has been paid every quarter since April 15, 1955, and quarterly divi- dends are expected to continue. The average dividend payout percentage for the most recent three-year period has been 32% of prior year earnings.\n\nLong-term debt, including capital lease obligations, was 1% of total capitalization at January 3, 2004, 2% at December 28, 2002, and 12% at December 29, 2001. The reductions in long-term debt during 2003 and 2002 were due to the retirement of Industrial Revenue Bonds. The Company does not expect future capital resources to be a constraint on planned growth. Additional borrowing capacity of $136 million, less amounts used for designated letters of credit, is available through a revolving bank credit agreement in the event cash generated from operations should be inadequate to meet future needs. Certain of the Company’s credit agreements include covenants that limit the assump- tion of additional debt and lease obligations. The Company has been, and currently is, in compliance with the covenants related to the debt agreements.\n\nDuring 2003, the Company repurchased 762,300 shares of its com- mon stock at a cost of approximately $21.5 million, or an average price of $28.22 per share. During 2002, the Company repurchased 614,580 shares of its common stock at a cost of approximately $15.7 million, or an average price of $25.60 per share. During 2001, the Company repurchased 1,472,937 shares at a cost of approximately $35.1 million, or an average price of $23.80 per share. \n\nThe Company has contingent liabilities that have arisen in the course of its business, including pending litigation, preferential payments claims in customer bankruptcies, environmental remediation, taxes, and other \n\nThe following table discloses the Company’s obligations and commit- ments to make future payments under contracts: \n\n## PAYMENTS DUE BY PERIOD\n\n## CAPITAL EXPENDITURE INVESTMENTS\n\n## ACQUISITIONS\n\n## CASH DIVIDENDS\n\n## LONG-TERM DEBT\n\n## CONTRACTUAL OBLIGATIONS\n\n## LITIGATION AND UNCERTAINTIES\n\n## COMMON SHARE REPURCHASES\n\n37" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9178005424323745, + "doc_id": "e5b2e0fd6e913108bcfd8ce78d7338c9dd1a5b05370b6d2cef92bcb8f8fedd54", + "edit_distance": 0.7562097516099356, + "f1_score": 0.9736842105263158, + "meteor": 0.6719310560655385, + "precision": 0.9667458432304038, + "pred_md": "4 4\n\n## (23) Concentrations of Business and Credit Risk\n\nE u ronet is subject to concentrations of business and credit risk. Euro n e t 's financial instruments mainly include trade accounts re c e i v a b l e s , cash and cash equivalents and investment securities. Euro n e t 's customer base, although limited, includes the most significant intern a t i o n a l c a d organizations and certain banks in the markets in which it operates. There f o re, the Company's operations are directly affected by the r financial condition of those entities.\n\nCash and cash equivalents, and investment securities are placed with high-credit quality financial institutions or in short - t e rm duration, high-quality debt securities. Euronet does not re q u i re collateral or other security to support financial instruments subject to credit risk. Management believes that the credit risk associated with its financial instruments is minimal due to the control pro c e d u res which monitor c redit worthiness of customers and financial institutions.\n\n## (24) Research and Development\n\nThe Company regularly engages in re s e a rch and development activities aimed at the development and delivery of new products, services and p rocesses to its customers including, but not limited to, bill payment and presentment, telephone banking products, applications for wire l e s s application protocol ('WAP') enabled customer touch points, other wireless banking products, GSM mobile prepaid re c h a rge products AT M b rowser products and internet banking solutions as well as significant improvements to core software products.\n\nThe Company's re s e a rch and development costs incurred for computer products to be sold, leased or otherwise marketed totaled $6.7 million, $3.2 million and $153,000 for the years ended December 31, 2000, 1999 and 1998, re s p e c t i v e l y. In 2000, $1.0 million was capitalized and appears on the Company's balance sheet in prepaid expenses and other assets, net of accumulated amortization of $137,000. In 1999, $322,000 was capitalized, net of accumulated amortization of $70,000.\n\n## (25) Employee Loans for Common Stock Program\n\nIn October 1999 the Company's Board of Directors approved and implemented a Loan Agreement Program ('Program') for cert a i n employees under which the Company has loaned sums of money to participating employees in order for them to purchase shares of the C o m p a s stock on the open market. The shares are pledged to the Company to secure the loans. As of December 31, 2000 166,195 share s ny' a re held by the Company as collateral for the loans. The loans carry five-year terms are non-recourse, non-interest bearing loans. The share s vest to the employees in five equal tranches of 20 percent of the shares for five years, commencing at the date each employee began employment with the Company. As the shares vest, the employees are entitled to pay off the loans and free the shares of the pledge. These loans are considered an award of stock options as the loans are non-recourse and the employee is not obligated to pay any interest on the loans. The loans have been accounted for as a separate component of stockholders' deficit. In the event that any one of the employees defaults on the term of the loans, the shares received by the Company will be re c o rded as tre a s u ry stock.\n\n## (26) Sale of Croatian Network\n\nOn November 19, 1999, the Company completed the sale of its Croatian ATM network to Raiffeisenbank Austria, d.d., a Croatian financial institution ('RBA'), for consideration of $2.7 million. The carrying value of the Croatian assets was $2.0 million, resulting in a gain to the Company of $657,000, re c o rded as an offset to operating costs. Subsequent to the sale of the network assets, the Company and RBA entere d into an ATM services agreement whereby the Company will provide ATM management and other related services to RBA for an initial term of 15 years.\n\n## (27) Employee Benefit Plans\n\nE u ronet has established a Profit Sharing and 401(k) plan for all employees who have completed six months of service and are not otherw i s e c o ed by a re t ement benefit plan (national or private) outside of the US. Each plan participant can contribute up to the maximum ver ir amount allowed by the Internal Revenue Service to the Plan through payroll deductions. Euro n e t 's matching contribution to the plan is d i e scr tion a y and is determined each year by the Board of Directors. The employee's vested percentage re g a rding the employer's contribution r varies according to years of service. Euro n e t 's contribution accrual to the Plan for the years ended December 31, 2000, 1999 and 1998 was $213,000, $159,000 and $26,000 re s p e c t i v e l y.\n\nE u ronet maintains both a fully funded and self-funded health insurance programs, which cover all full-time employees and their families at no charge to the employees. In order to administer the self-funded program, Euronet has entered into a contractual agreement with a third p a ty administrator by which Euronet pays a monthly service fee to the administrator based upon employee enrollment participating in the r self-funded plan. Euronet has also purchased a stop/loss insurance policy to limit Euro n e t 's self-funded liability to $25,000 per employee per year and a total loss on all claims to approximately $31,000 per month.", + "recall": 0.980722891566265, + "true_md": "## (23) Concentrations of Business and Credit Risk\n\n## (24) Research and Development\n\n## (25) Employee Loans for Common Stock Program\n\n## (26) Sale of Croatian Network\n\n## (27) Employee Benefit Plans\n\n4 4\n\nE u ronet has established a Profit Sharing and 401(k) plan for all employees who have completed six months of service and are not otherw i s e c o v e red by a re t i rement benefit plan (national or private) outside of the US. Each plan participant can contribute up to the maximum amount allowed by the Internal Revenue Service to the Plan through payroll deductions. Euro n e t ’s matching contribution to the plan is d i s c re t i o n a ry and is determined each year by the Board of Directors. The employee’s vested percentage re g a rding the employer’s contribution varies according to years of service. Euro n e t ’s contribution accrual to the Plan for the years ended December 31, 2000, 1999 and 1998 was $213,000, $159,000 and $26,000 re s p e c t i v e l y. \n\nE u ronet maintains both a fully funded and self-funded health insurance programs, which cover all full-time employees and their families at no charge to the employees. In order to administer the self-funded program, Euronet has entered into a contractual agreement with a third p a rty administrator by which Euronet pays a monthly service fee to the administrator based upon employee enrollment participating in the self-funded plan. Euronet has also purchased a stop/loss insurance policy to limit Euro n e t ’s self-funded liability to $25,000 per employee per year and a total loss on all claims to approximately $31,000 per month. \n\nOn November 19, 1999, the Company completed the sale of its Croatian ATM network to Raiffeisenbank Austria, d.d., a Croatian financial institution (“RBA”), for consideration of $2.7 million. The carrying value of the Croatian assets was $2.0 million, resulting in a gain to the Company of $657,000, re c o rded as an offset to operating costs. Subsequent to the sale of the network assets, the Company and RBA entere d into an ATM services agreement whereby the Company will provide ATM management and other related services to RBA for an initial term of 15 years. \n\nIn October 1999 the Company’s Board of Directors approved and implemented a Loan Agreement Program (“Program”) for cert a i n employees under which the Company has loaned sums of money to participating employees in order for them to purchase shares of the C o m p a n y ’s stock on the open market. The shares are pledged to the Company to secure the loans. As of December 31, 2000 166,195 share s a re held by the Company as collateral for the loans. The loans carry five-year terms are non-recourse, non-interest bearing loans. The share s vest to the employees in five equal tranches of 20 percent of the shares for five years, commencing at the date each employee began employment with the Company. As the shares vest, the employees are entitled to pay off the loans and free the shares of the pledge. These loans are considered an award of stock options as the loans are non-recourse and the employee is not obligated to pay any interest on the loans. The loans have been accounted for as a separate component of stockholders’ deficit. In the event that any one of the employees defaults on the term of the loans, the shares received by the Company will be re c o rded as tre a s u ry stock. \n\nThe Company regularly engages in re s e a rch and development activities aimed at the development and delivery of new products, services and p rocesses to its customers including, but not limited to, bill payment and presentment, telephone banking products, applications for wire l e s s application protocol (“WAP”) enabled customer touch points, other wireless banking products, GSM mobile prepaid re c h a rge products AT M b rowser products and internet banking solutions as well as significant improvements to core software products. \n\nThe Company’s re s e a rch and development costs incurred for computer products to be sold, leased or otherwise marketed totaled $6.7 million, $3.2 million and $153,000 for the years ended December 31, 2000, 1999 and 1998, re s p e c t i v e l y. In 2000, $1.0 million was capitalized and appears on the Company’s balance sheet in prepaid expenses and other assets, net of accumulated amortization of $137,000. In 1999, $322,000 was capitalized, net of accumulated amortization of $70,000. \n\nCash and cash equivalents, and investment securities are placed with high-credit quality financial institutions or in short - t e rm duration, high-quality debt securities. Euronet does not re q u i re collateral or other security to support financial instruments subject to credit risk. Management believes that the credit risk associated with its financial instruments is minimal due to the control pro c e d u res which monitor c redit worthiness of customers and financial institutions.\n\nE u ronet is subject to concentrations of business and credit risk. Euro n e t ’s financial instruments mainly include trade accounts re c e i v a b l e s , cash and cash equivalents and investment securities. Euro n e t ’s customer base, although limited, includes the most significant intern a t i o n a l c a rd organizations and certain banks in the markets in which it operates. There f o re, the Company’s operations are directly affected by the financial condition of those entities." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9528647090991673, + "doc_id": "f8fd2a28b0850352ea5c4cf2b88faea8e9d92807dcded4f875fdf204bfaffc5c", + "edit_distance": 0.04973544973544974, + "f1_score": 0.9823609226594302, + "meteor": 0.9703477914275711, + "precision": 0.9836956521739131, + "pred_md": "SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES MANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS\n\nThe third component of interest rate risk is marked increases in interest rates which may adversely impact the rate at which the Company may borrow funds for growth in the future. Although this risk is real, it is not significant at this time as the Company has adequate cash for operations, payment of debt and near-term capital projects.\n\nManagement does not view market risk as having a significant impact on the Company's results of operations, although future results could be adversely impacted if interest rates were to escalate markedly and the company required external financing. Since the Company does not currently have significant investments in publicly traded stock, currently there is limited risk related to the Company's available for sale securities. General economic conditions impacted by regulatory changes, competition or other external influences may play a higher risk to the Company's overall results.\n\nAs of December 31, 2003, the Company has $7.3 million invested in privately held companies directly or through investments with portfolio managers. Most of the companies are early stage and significant increases in interest rates could have an adverse impact on their results, ability to raise capital and viability. The Company's market risk is limited to the funds previously invested and an additional $1.8 million committed under contracts the Company has signed with portfolio managers.\n\n## Evaluation of Disclosure Controls and Procedures\n\nThe Company maintains disclosure controls and procedures that are designed to ensure that information required to be disclosed in Exchange Act reports is recorded, processed, summarized and reported within the time periods specified in the Commission's rules and forms, and that such information is accumulated and communicated to management including our Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer, as appropriate, to allow timely decisions regarding required disclosure.\n\nAs of the end of the period covered by this report, December 31, 2003 (the 'Evaluation Date'), we carried out an evaluation, under the supervision and with the participation of the Company's management, including our Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer of the effectiveness of the design and operation of our disclosure controls and procedures. Based upon that evaluation, the Chief Executive Officer and the Chief Financial Officer concluded that our disclosure controls and procedures were effective as of the Evaluation Date.\n\nUnder our agreements with Sprint, Sprint provides us with billing, collections, customer care, certain network operations and other back office services. As a result, Sprint remits to the Company approximately 61% of the Company's total revenues. In addition, approximately 42% of the expenses reflected in the Company's consolidated financial statements relate to charges by or through Sprint for expenses such as billing, collections and customer care, roaming expense, long-distance, and travel. Due to this relationship, the Company necessarily relies on Sprint to provide accurate, timely and sufficient data and information to properly record our revenues, expenses and accounts receivable, which underlie a substantial portion of our periodic financial statements and other financial disclosures.\n\nInformation provided by Sprint includes reports regarding the subscriber accounts receivable in our markets. Sprint provides us monthly accounts receivable, billing and cash receipts information on a market level, rather than a subscriber level. We review these various reports to identify discrepancies or errors. However, under our agreements with Sprint, we are entitled to only a portion of the receipts, net of items such as taxes, government surcharges, certain allocable write-offs and the 8% of revenue retained by Sprint. Because of our reliance on Sprint for financial information, we must depend on Sprint to design adequate internal controls with respect to the processes established to provide this data and information to the Company and Sprint's other network partners. To address this issue, Sprint engages its independent auditors to perform a periodic evaluation of these controls and to provide a 'Report on Controls Placed in Operation and Tests of Operating Effectiveness for Affiliates' under guidance provided in Statement of Auditing Standards No. 70 ('SAS 70 reports'). The report is provided to us annually and covers a twelve-month period from October 1, 2002 to September 30, 2003. This report did not indicate there were issues which would adversely impact the information used to support the recording of the revenues and expenses provided by Sprint related to our relationship with them.\n\nWe believe the processes we have put into place over the course of the year have steadily improved our ability to identify material errors in Sprint financial information on a timely basis. As a result of the improved processes and procedures we are continuing to develop and define, the Company is committed to monitor and evaluate the effectiveness of its improvements in controls related to information provided by Sprint and to continue to improve these processes.\n\nIn preparation for the requirements imposed under Section 404 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, we have retained an outside consulting firm to assist us in reviewing and documenting our internal control processes.\n\nSHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY\n\n56\n\n■", + "recall": 0.981029810298103, + "true_md": "SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS\n\nThe third component of interest rate risk is marked increases in interest rates which may adversely impact the rate at which the Company may borrow funds for growth in the future. Although this risk is real, it is not significant at this time as the Company has adequate cash for operations, payment of debt and near-term capital projects.\n\nManagement does not view market risk as having a significant impact on the Company’s results of operations, although future results could be adversely impacted if interest rates were to escalate markedly and the company required external financing. Since the Company does not currently have significant investments in publicly traded stock, currently there is limited risk related to the Company’s available for sale securities. General economic conditions impacted by regulatory changes, competition or other external influences may play a higher risk to the Company’s overall results.\n\nAs of December 31, 2003, the Company has $7.3 million invested in privately held companies directly or through investments with portfolio managers. Most of the companies are early stage and significant increases in interest rates could have an adverse impact on their results, ability to raise capital and viability. The Company’s market risk is limited to the funds previously invested and an additional $1.8 million committed under contracts the Company has signed with portfolio managers.\n\nThe Company maintains disclosure controls and procedures that are designed to ensure that information required to be disclosed in Exchange Act reports is recorded, processed, summarized and reported within the time periods specified in the Commission’s rules and forms, and that such information is accumulated and communicated to management including our Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer, as appropriate, to allow timely decisions regarding required disclosure.\n\nAs of the end of the period covered by this report, December 31, 2003 (the “Evaluation Date”), we carried out an evaluation, under the supervision and with the participation of the Company’s management, including our Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer of the effectiveness of the design and operation of our disclosure controls and procedures. Based upon that evaluation, the Chief Executive Officer and the Chief Financial Officer concluded that our disclosure controls and procedures were effective as of the Evaluation Date.\n\n## Evaluation of Disclosure Controls and Procedures\n\nUnder our agreements with Sprint, Sprint provides us with billing, collections, customer care, certain network operations and other back office services. As a result, Sprint remits to the Company approximately 61% of the Company’s total revenues. In addition, approximately 42% of the expenses reflected in the Company’s consolidated financial statements relate to charges by or through Sprint for expenses such as billing, collections and customer care, roaming expense, long-distance, and travel. Due to this relationship, the Company necessarily relies on Sprint to provide accurate, timely and sufficient data and information to properly record our revenues, expenses and accounts receivable, which underlie a substantial portion of our periodic financial statements and other financial disclosures.\n\nInformation provided by Sprint includes reports regarding the subscriber accounts receivable in our markets. Sprint provides us monthly accounts receivable, billing and cash receipts information on a market level, rather than a subscriber level. We review these various reports to identify discrepancies or errors. However, under our agreements with Sprint, we are entitled to only a portion of the receipts, net of items such as taxes, government surcharges, certain allocable write-offs and the 8% of revenue retained by Sprint. Because of our reliance on Sprint for financial information, we must depend on Sprint to design adequate internal controls with respect to the processes established to provide this data and information to the Company and Sprint’s other network partners. To address this issue, Sprint engages its independent auditors to perform a periodic evaluation of these controls and to provide a “Report on Controls Placed in Operation and Tests of Operating Effectiveness for Affiliates” under guidance provided in Statement of Auditing Standards No. 70 (“SAS 70 reports”). The report is provided to us annually and covers a twelve-month period from October 1, 2002 to September 30, 2003. This report did not indicate there were issues which would adversely impact the information used to support the recording of the revenues and expenses provided by Sprint related to our relationship with them.\n\nWe believe the processes we have put into place over the course of the year have steadily improved our ability to identify material errors in Sprint financial information on a timely basis. As a result of the improved processes and procedures we are continuing to develop and define, the Company is committed to monitor and evaluate the effectiveness of its improvements in controls related to information provided by Sprint and to continue to improve these processes.\n\nIn preparation for the requirements imposed under Section 404 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, we have retained an outside consulting firm to assist us in reviewing and documenting our internal control processes.\n\nSHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY ■ 56" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8206326395955278, + "doc_id": "0b91ae65e19b580726fdf79c4460c297b7286cb7e55237d73d4e2cb0a6577a38", + "edit_distance": 0.4358974358974359, + "f1_score": 0.9644970414201184, + "meteor": 0.9156938442861631, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "HON INDUSTRIES Inc. and SUBSIDIARIES\n\n## BOARD OF DIRECTORS AND OFFICERS\n\n## BOARD OF DIRECTORS\n\n## Stan A. Askren\n\nPresident, HON INDUSTRIES Inc.\n\n## Gary M. Christensen\n\nRetired President and\n\nChief Executive Officer,\n\nPella Corporation\n\n## Cheryl A. Francis\n\nAdvisor/Consultant Former Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer,\n\nRR Donnelley & Sons\n\n## Robert L. Katz\n\nPresident,\n\nRobert L. Katz and Associates\n\n## Dennis J. Martin\n\nChairman, President and\n\nChief Executive Officer,\n\nGeneral Binding Corporation\n\n## Jack D. Michaels\n\nChairman and Chief Executive Officer, HON INDUSTRIES Inc.\n\n## Joseph Scalzo\n\nVice President and President, Personal Care Products,\n\nThe Gillette Company\n\n## Abbie J. Smith\n\nChaired Professor,\n\nThe University of Chicago\n\nGraduate School of Business\n\n## Richard H. Stanley\n\nVice Chairman, HON INDUSTRIES Inc.\n\nChairman, SC Companies, Inc.\n\nChairman, Stanley Consultants, Inc.\n\n## Brian E. Stern\n\nPresident,\n\nXerox Supplies Technology Enterprises\n\nXerox Corporation\n\n## Ronald V. Waters, III\n\nChief Operating Officer,\n\nWm. Wrigley Jr. Company\n\n## COMMITTEES OF THE BOARD\n\nAUDIT\n\nCheryl A. Francis, Chairperson\n\nDennis J. Martin\n\nRonald V. Waters, III\n\n## HUMAN RESOURCES AND COMPENSATION\n\nGary M. Christensen, Chairperson\n\nRobert L. Katz\n\nAbbie J. Smith\n\n## PUBLIC POLICY AND CORPORATE GOVERNANCE\n\nRichard H. Stanley, Chairperson\n\nJoseph Scalzo\n\nBrian E. Stern\n\n## HON INDUSTRIES INC. OFFICERS\n\nJack D. Michaels\n\nChairman and Chief Executive Officer\n\n## Stan A. Askren\n\nPresident\n\nPeter R. Atherton\n\nVice President and Chief Technology Officer\n\nJerald K. Dittmer\n\nVice President and Chief Financial Officer\n\nRobert J. Driessnack\n\nVice President, Controller\n\n62\n\n## Melinda C. Ellsworth\n\nVice President, Treasurer and\n\nInvestor Relations\n\n## Jeffrey D. Fick\n\nVice President, Member and\n\nCommunity Relations\n\nMalcolm C. Fields\n\nVice President and Chief Information Officer\n\nJames I. Johnson\n\nVice President, General Counsel and Secretary\n\nTimothy R. Summers\n\nVice President, Lean Enterprise\n\n## SUBSIDIARIES\n\nDavid C. Burdakin\n\nExecutive Vice President, HON INDUSTRIES, Inc.\n\nPresident, The HON Company\n\n## Brad D. Determan\n\nPresident,\n\nHearth and Home Technologies Inc.\n\n## Thomas D. Head\n\nVice President,\n\nGeneral Manager, Holga Inc.\n\nEric K. Jungbluth\n\nPresident, Allsteel Inc.\n\nDonald T. Mead\n\nPresident, The Gunlocke Company L.L.C.\n\n## Marco V. Molinari\n\nPresident, International and Business\n\nDevelopment\n\nJean M. Reynolds\n\nPresident, Maxon Furniture Inc.\n\n## Thomas A. Tolone\n\nPresident, Paoli Inc.", + "recall": 0.9314285714285714, + "true_md": "HON INDUSTRIES Inc. and SUBSIDIARIES\n\n## B O A R D O F D I R E C T O R S A N D O F F I C E R S\n\n62\n\n## BOARD OF DIRECTORS\n\n## COMMITTEES OF THE BOARD\n\n## HUMAN RESOURCES AND COMPENSATION\n\n## SUBSIDIARIES\n\n## HON INDUSTRIES INC. OFFICERS\n\n## AUDIT\n\nStan A. Askren President, HON INDUSTRIES Inc.\n\nGary M. Christensen Retired President and Chief Executive Officer, Pella Corporation\n\nCheryl A. Francis Advisor/Consultant Former Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer, RR Donnelley & Sons\n\nRobert L. Katz President, Robert L. Katz and Associates\n\nDennis J. Martin Chairman, President and Chief Executive Officer, General Binding Corporation\n\nJack D. Michaels Chairman and Chief Executive Officer, HON INDUSTRIES Inc.\n\nJoseph Scalzo Vice President and President, Personal Care Products, The Gillette Company\n\nAbbie J. Smith Chaired Professor, The University of Chicago Graduate School of Business\n\nRichard H. Stanley Vice Chairman, HON INDUSTRIES Inc. Chairman, SC Companies, Inc. Chairman, Stanley Consultants, Inc.\n\nRobert J. Driessnack Vice President, Controller\n\nJerald K. Dittmer Vice President and Chief Financial Officer\n\nPeter R. Atherton Vice President and Chief Technology Officer\n\nStan A. Askren President\n\nJack D. Michaels Chairman and Chief Executive Officer\n\n## PUBLIC POLICY AND CORPORATE GOVERNANCE\n\nRichard H. Stanley, Chairperson Joseph Scalzo Brian E. Stern\n\nGary M. Christensen, Chairperson Robert L. Katz Abbie J. Smith\n\nCheryl A. Francis, Chairperson Dennis J. Martin Ronald V. Waters, III\n\nBrian E. Stern President, Xerox Supplies Technology Enterprises Xerox Corporation\n\nRonald V. Waters, III Chief Operating Officer, Wm. Wrigley Jr. Company\n\nMelinda C. Ellsworth Vice President, Treasurer and Investor Relations\n\nJeffrey D. Fick Vice President, Member and Community Relations\n\nMalcolm C. Fields Vice President and Chief Information Officer\n\nJames I. Johnson Vice President, General Counsel and Secretary\n\nTimothy R. Summers Vice President, Lean Enterprise\n\nDavid C. Burdakin Executive Vice President, HON INDUSTRIES, Inc. President, The HON Company\n\nBrad D. Determan President, Hearth and Home Technologies Inc.\n\nThomas D. Head Vice President, General Manager, Holga Inc.\n\nEric K. Jungbluth President, Allsteel Inc.\n\nDonald T. Mead President, The Gunlocke Company L.L.C.\n\nMarco V. Molinari President, International and Business Development\n\nJean M. Reynolds President, Maxon Furniture Inc.\n\nThomas A. Tolone President, Paoli Inc." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.943198209229625, + "doc_id": "07cf1b7e38daa8ed5669dba64af63132f3d3167f2fd540b25a09217f9050262b", + "edit_distance": 0.7481243301178992, + "f1_score": 0.9677419354838711, + "meteor": 0.8282035587799031, + "precision": 0.9636871508379888, + "pred_md": "The subsidiaries of Euronet Services Inc., all of which are, directly or indire c t l y , wholly owned are:\n\n- - EFT Services Holding B.V ., incorporated in the Netherlands\n- - Euronet Banktechnikai Szolgaltato Kft. ('Bank Tech'), incorporated in Hungary\n- - Euronet Adminisztracios Szolgaltato Kft. ('Administrative Services') (formerly SatComNet), incorporated in Hungary\n- - Bankomat 24/Euronet Sp. z o.o. ('Bankomat'), incorporated in Poland\n- - EFT-Usluge d o.o., incorporated in Croatia\n- - Euronet Services GmbH, incorporated in Germany\n- - EFT Services France SAS, incorporated in France\n- - Euronet Services spol. s.r.o., incorporated in the Czech Republic\n- - Euronet Services SRL, incorporated in Romania\n- - Euronet Services (UK) Limited, incorporated in the United Kingdom\n- - Euronet USA Inc. (formerly Arkansas Systems, Inc.) ('Euronet USA') incorporated in Arkansas, United States of America\n- - EFT Network Services LLC ('Dash'), incorporated in Arkansas, United States of America\n- - Euronet Holding N.V ., incorporated in the Netherlands Antilles (in liquidation)\n- - Euronet Eft Services Hellas, incorporated in Greece\n\n## ( 2 ) Financial Position and Basis of Preparation\n\nThe Company generated an operating loss of $35.4 million and negative cash flows from operations of $16.4 million for the year ended December 31, 2000, primarily due to the significant costs associated with its investment in delivery, support, re s e a rch and development in its s o ftw a re subsidiary which was acquired in December 1998. Based on the Company's current business plan and financial projections, the Company expects to reduce operating losses and net cash used in operating activities in 2001. In the Network Services Segment, the Company anticipates that increased transaction levels in its ATM network will result in additional revenues without a corresponding incre a s e in expenses. In addition, the Company expects to further expand its ATM outsourcing services and offer new value-added services, which will p rovide continued revenue growth without significantly increasing direct operating expenses or capital investments. In the Software Solutions Segment, the Company expects reduced operating expenses and improved operating perf o rmance due to a cost re s t ructuring pro g r a m i oduced in the first quarter of 2001. The Company believes that the credit facility (see note 13), certain asset sales and cash and cash ntr equivalents at December 31, 2000 will provide the Company with sufficient cash re s o u rces until it achieves positive cash flow.\n\nBased on the above, management is confident that the Company will be able to continue as a going concern. Accord i n g l y, these consolidated financial statements have been pre p a red on a going concern basis which contemplates the continuation and expansion of trading activities as well as the realization of assets and liquidation of liabilities in the ord i n a ry course of business.\n\n## ( 3 ) S u m m a ry of Significant Accounting Policies and Practices\n\n## (a) Basis of presentation\n\nThe accompanying consolidated financial statements have been pre p a red in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles in the United States of America.\n\nAll significant intercompany balances and transactions have been eliminated.\n\n## (b) Foreign currencies\n\nF o reign currency transactions are re c o rded at the exchange rate prevailing on the date of the transactions. Assets and liabilitiesdenominated in foreign currencies are re m e a s u red at rates of exchange on the balance sheet date. Resulting gains and losses on f o eign currency transactions are included in the consolidated statement of operations and comprehensive loss. r\n\nThe financial statements of foreign subsidiaries where the local currency is the functional currency are translated to U.S. dollars using (i) exchange rates in effect at period end for assets and liabilities, and (ii) average exchange rates during the period for results of operations. Adjustments resulting from translation of such financial statements are reflected in accumulated other comprehensive income as aseparate component of consolidated stockholders' equity.\n\nThe financial statements of foreign subsidiaries where the functional currency is the U.S. dollar are re m e a s u red using historical exchangerates for nonmonetary items while current exchange rates are used for monetary items. Foreign exchange gains and losses arising from the re m e a s u rement are re p o rted in the consolidated statement of operations and comprehensive loss.\n\n## (c) Cash equivalents\n\nFor the purposes of the consolidated statements of cash flows, the Company considers all highly liquid debt instruments purchased with an original maturity of three months or less to be cash equivalents.\n\n## (d) Investment securities\n\nThe Company has classified its investment securities as held-to-maturity or available-for-sale. Held-to-maturity securities are those securities in which the Company has the ability and intent to hold the security to maturity. All securities not included in held-to-maturity a re classified as available-for sale.\n\n2 9", + "recall": 0.971830985915493, + "true_md": "The subsidiaries of Euronet Services Inc., all of which are, directly or indire c t l y, wholly owned are: \n\nThe Company generated an operating loss of $35.4 million and negative cash flows from operations of $16.4 million for the year ended December 31, 2000, primarily due to the significant costs associated with its investment in delivery, support, re s e a rch and development in its s o f t w a re subsidiary which was acquired in December 1998. Based on the Company’s current business plan and financial projections, the Company expects to reduce operating losses and net cash used in operating activities in 2001. In the Network Services Segment, the Company anticipates that increased transaction levels in its ATM network will result in additional revenues without a corresponding incre a s e in expenses. In addition, the Company expects to further expand its ATM outsourcing services and offer new value-added services, which will p rovide continued revenue growth without significantly increasing direct operating expenses or capital investments. In the Software Solutions Segment, the Company expects reduced operating expenses and improved operating perf o rmance due to a cost re s t ructuring pro g r a m i n t roduced in the first quarter of 2001. The Company believes that the credit facility (see note 13), certain asset sales and cash and cash equivalents at December 31, 2000 will provide the Company with sufficient cash re s o u rces until it achieves positive cash flow. \n\nBased on the above, management is confident that the Company will be able to continue as a going concern. Accord i n g l y, these consolidated financial statements have been pre p a red on a going concern basis which contemplates the continuation and expansion of trading activities as well as the realization of assets and liquidation of liabilities in the ord i n a ry course of business. \n\nAll significant intercompany balances and transactions have been eliminated. \n\nThe financial statements of foreign subsidiaries where the local currency is the functional currency are translated to U.S. dollars using (i) exchange rates in effect at period end for assets and liabilities, and (ii) average exchange rates during the period for results of operations. Adjustments resulting from translation of such financial statements are reflected in accumulated other comprehensive income as aseparate component of consolidated stockholders’ equity.\n\nThe financial statements of foreign subsidiaries where the functional currency is the U.S. dollar are re m e a s u red using historical exchangerates for nonmonetary items while current exchange rates are used for monetary items. Foreign exchange gains and losses arising from the re m e a s u rement are re p o rted in the consolidated statement of operations and comprehensive loss. \n\n- (d) Investment securities The Company has classified its investment securities as held-to-maturity or available-for-sale. Held-to-maturity securities are those securities in which the Company has the ability and intent to hold the security to maturity. All securities not included in held-to-maturity a re classified as available-for sale. \n\n- (c) Cash equivalents For the purposes of the consolidated statements of cash flows, the Company considers all highly liquid debt instruments purchased with an original maturity of three months or less to be cash equivalents. \n\n- (b) Foreign currencies F o reign currency transactions are re c o rded at the exchange rate prevailing on the date of the transactions. Assets and liabilitiesdenominated in foreign currencies are re m e a s u red at rates of exchange on the balance sheet date. Resulting gains and losses on f o reign currency transactions are included in the consolidated statement of operations and comprehensive loss.\n\n- (a) Basis of presentation The accompanying consolidated financial statements have been pre p a red in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles in the United States of America. \n\n- - EFT Services Holding B.V., incorporated in the Netherlands \n\n- - Euronet Banktechnikai Szolgaltato Kft. (“Bank Tech”), incorporated in Hungary \n\n- - Euronet Adminisztracios Szolgaltato Kft. (“Administrative Services”) (formerly SatComNet), incorporated in Hungary \n\n- - Bankomat 24/Euronet Sp. z o.o. (“Bankomat”), incorporated in Poland \n\n- - EFT-Usluge d o.o., incorporated in Croatia \n\n- - Euronet Services GmbH, incorporated in Germany \n\n- - EFT Services France SAS, incorporated in France \n\n- - Euronet Services spol. s.r.o., incorporated in the Czech Republic \n\n- - Euronet Services SRL, incorporated in Romania \n\n- - Euronet Services (UK) Limited, incorporated in the United Kingdom \n\n- - Euronet USA Inc. (formerly Arkansas Systems, Inc.) (“Euronet USA”) incorporated in Arkansas, United States of America \n\n- - EFT Network Services LLC (“Dash”), incorporated in Arkansas, United States of America \n\n- - Euronet Holding N.V., incorporated in the Netherlands Antilles (in liquidation)\n\n- - Euronet Eft Services Hellas, incorporated in Greece \n\n## ( 2 ) Financial Position and Basis of Preparation\n\n## ( 3 ) S u m m a ry of Significant Accounting Policies and Practices\n\n2 9" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8397244216276114, + "doc_id": "bf3421ef2b37932be26abacee934c3ac14e8cd4e84cd6e78cfde5a330e74e8ce", + "edit_distance": 0.3493150684931507, + "f1_score": 0.93048128342246, + "meteor": 0.9444218224969448, + "precision": 0.9109947643979057, + "pred_md": "## I N D E P E N D E N T A U D I T R E P O R T TO T H E M E M B E R S O F MERMAID MARINE AUSTRALIA LIMITED\n\nWe have audited the financial report of Mermaid Marine Australia Limited for the financial year ended 30 June 2000 as set out on pages 18 to 43. The financial report includes the consolidated financial statements of the consolidated entity comprising the company and the entities it controlled at the year's end or from time to time during the financial year. The company's directors are responsible for the financial report. We have conducted an independent audit of the financial report in order to express an opinion on it to the members of the company.\n\nOur audit has been conducted in accordance with Australian Auditing Standards to provide reasonable assurance whether the financial report is free of material misstatement. Our procedures included examination, on a test basis, of evidence supporting the amounts and other disclosures in the financial report, and the evaluation of accounting policies and significant accounting estimates. These procedures have been undertaken to form an opinion whether, in all material respects, the financial report is presented fairly in accordance with Accounting Standards issued in Australia and other mandatory professional reporting requirements and statutory requirements so as to present a view which is consistent with our understanding of the company's and the consolidated entity's financial position, and performance as represented by the results of their operations and their cash flows.\n\nThe audit opinion expressed in this report has been formed on the above basis.\n\n## Audit Opinion\n\nIn our opinion, the financial report of Mermaid Marine Australia Limited is in accordance with:\n\n- (a) the Corporations Law, including:\n- (i) giving a true and fair view of the company's and consolidated entity's financial position as at 30 June 2000 and of their performance for the year ended on that date; and\n- (ii) complying with Accounting Standards and the Corporations Regulations; and\n- (b) other mandatory professional reporting requirements.\n\n## DELOITTE TOUCHE TOHMATSU\n\n## K F JONES\n\nPartner Chartered Accountants Perth\n\n29 September 2000\n\nThe liability of Deloitte Touche Tohmatsu is limited by, and to the extent of, the Accountants' Scheme under the Professional Standards Act 1994 (NSW).\n\nS C O P E\n\n65", + "recall": 0.9508196721311475, + "true_md": "## INDEPENDENT AUDIT REPORT TO THE MEMBERS OF MERMAID MARINE AUSTRALIA LIMITED\n\nWe have audited the financial report of Mermaid Marine Australia Limited for the financial year ended 30 June 2000 as set out on pages 18 to 43. The financial report includes the consolidated financial statements of the consolidated entity comprising the company and the entities it controlled at the year’s end or from time to time during the financial year. The company’s directors are responsible for the financial report. We have conducted an independent audit of the financial report in order to express an opinion on it to the members of the company.\n\nOur audit has been conducted in accordance with Australian Auditing Standards to provide reasonable assurance whether the financial report is free of material misstatement. Our procedures included examination, on a test basis, of evidence supporting the amounts and other disclosures in the financial report, and the evaluation of accounting policies and significant accounting estimates. These procedures have been undertaken to form an opinion whether, in all material respects, the financial report is presented fairly in accordance with Accounting Standards issued in Australia and other mandatory professional reporting requirements and statutory requirements so as to present a view which is consistent with our understanding of the company’s and the consolidated entity’s financial position, and performance as represented by the results of their operations and their cash flows.\n\nThe audit opinion expressed in this report has been formed on the above basis.\n\nIn our opinion, the financial report of Mermaid Marine Australia Limited is in accordance with:\n\n## Audit Opinion\n\n## DELOITTE TOUCHE TOHMATSU\n\nK F JONES Partner Chartered Accountants Perth 29 September 2000\n\nThe liability of Deloitte Touche Tohmatsu is limited by, and to the extent of, the Accountants’ Scheme under the Professional Standards Act 1994 (NSW).\n\n65\n\n- (a) the Corporations Law, including:\n\n- (i) giving a true and fair view of the company’s and consolidated entity’s financial position as at 30 June 2000 and of their performance for the year ended on that date; and\n\n- (ii) complying with Accounting Standards and the Corporations Regulations; and\n\n- (b) other mandatory professional reporting requirements.\n\nSCOPE" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7010630265846515, + "doc_id": "9904569bee513b24cc00d5a0cb52ae929478cd1e57c34e12baddfaf5beaa421d", + "edit_distance": 0.37358490566037733, + "f1_score": 0.9871244635193132, + "meteor": 0.9269386149096581, + "precision": 0.9913793103448276, + "pred_md": "## corporate\n\nCorporate Secretary (Effective January 1, 2005, Mr. Cavanaugh assumes the duties of Senior Vice President of External Affairs and General Counsel.)\n\n## Joel W. Johnson *\n\nChairman of the Board and Chief Executive Officer\n\n## Jeffrey M. Ettinger *\n\nPresident and Chief Operating Officer\n\n## Michael J. McCoy *\n\nExecutive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer\n\n## Gary J. Ray *\n\nExecutive Vice President\n\n## Steven G. Binder\n\nGroup Vice President\n\n## Richard A. Bross\n\nGroup Vice President/President Hormel Foods International\n\n## Ronald W. Fielding\n\nGroup Vice President\n\n## James A. Jorgenson\n\nSenior Vice President\n\n## Mahlon C. Schneider\n\nSenior Vice President - External Affairs and General Counsel (retired December 31, 2004)\n\n## Thomas R. Day\n\nVice President\n\n## Forrest D. Dryden, Ph.D.\n\nVice President\n\nJody H. Feragen\n\nVice President and Treasurer\n\n## Dennis B. Goettsch\n\nVice President\n\n## Daniel A. Hartzog\n\nVice President\n\nKurt F. Mueller\n\nVice President\n\nGary C. Paxton\n\nVice President\n\nLarry J. Pfeil\n\nVice President\n\n## Douglas R. Reetz\n\nVice President\n\n## James N. Sheehan\n\nVice President and Controller\n\n## William F. Snyder\n\n## James M. Splinter\n\nVice President\n\n## Joe C. Swedberg\n\nVice President\n\n## Michael D. Tolbert\n\nVice President/President Jennie-O Turkey Store, Inc.\n\n## Larry L. Vorpahl\n\nVice President\n\n## James W. Cavanaugh\n\n## Roland G. Gentzler\n\nAssistant Controller\n\n## Kevin C. Jones\n\nAssistant Secretary\n\n*Director\n\nVice President\n\n2004 Annual Report\n\n47", + "recall": 0.9829059829059829, + "true_md": "## corporate officers\n\nJoel W. Johnson * Chairman of the Board and Chief Executive Officer\n\nJeffrey M. Ettinger * President and Chief Operating Officer\n\nMichael J. McCoy * Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer\n\nGary J. Ray * Executive Vice President\n\nSteven G. Binder Group Vice President\n\nRichard A. Bross Group Vice President/President Hormel Foods International\n\nRonald W. Fielding Group Vice President\n\nJames A. Jorgenson Senior Vice President\n\nMahlon C. Schneider Senior Vice President – External Affairs and General Counsel (retired December 31, 2004)\n\nThomas R. Day Vice President\n\nForrest D. Dryden, Ph.D. Vice President\n\nJody H. Feragen Vice President and Treasurer\n\nDennis B. Goettsch Vice President\n\nDaniel A. Hartzog Vice President\n\nKurt F. Mueller Vice President\n\nGary C. Paxton Vice President\n\nLarry J. Pfeil Vice President\n\nDouglas R. Reetz Vice President\n\nJames N. Sheehan Vice President and Controller\n\nWilliam F. Snyder Vice President\n\nJames M. Splinter Vice President\n\nJoe C. Swedberg Vice President\n\nMichael D. Tolbert Vice President/President Jennie-O Turkey Store, Inc.\n\nLarry L. Vorpahl Vice President\n\nJames W. Cavanaugh Corporate Secretary (Effective January 1, 2005, Mr. Cavanaugh assumes the duties of Senior Vice President of External Affairs and General Counsel.)\n\nRoland G. Gentzler Assistant Controller\n\nKevin C. Jones Assistant Secretary\n\n*Director\n\n2004 Annual Report 47" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4150820616639959, + "doc_id": "65d638e5c84b9a60b113a10ee32eaedd896f68fba34f944486d74767ce387e42", + "edit_distance": 0.5113636363636364, + "f1_score": 0.8013937282229965, + "meteor": 0.7584184438125832, + "precision": 0.7931034482758621, + "pred_md": "## C O R N I N G T E L E C O M M U N I C A T I O N S\n\nThe ongoing malaise of the telecommunications industry l Corning to initiate significant restructurings during 2002. fiber plant closings and workforce reductions were evidence o comprehensive plan to align expenses with dramatically lowe revenues in our telecommunications businesses. Despite indu weakness, we remain the global leader in the manufacturing and of optical communications products. Our position will serve us when the inevitable growth of this dynamic market returns.\n\nFor the near-term,we are focused on maintaining our leading pos across our markets and with our customers. Through our ma generations of manufacturing technology development, we a restoring our businesses to profitability despite continued pressure and low-volume growth expectations.\n\nLooking further ahead, we remain committed to creating innova optical communications products that meet even tighter qua capability and cost requirements for our customers. We are emph sizing metro and access segments of the market as our major op tunities. And we are watching carefully for signs of market re When that time comes, we will be poised for growth once again\n\nC O R N I N G C A B L E S Y S T E M S : C A B L E A N D H A R D W A R E\n\nO P T I C A L N E T W O R K S : M E T R O , L O C A L , L A S T M I L E\n\nC O R N I N G C A B L E S Y S T E M S : C A B L E A N D H A R D W A R EO P T I C A L N E T W O R K S : M E T R O , L O C A L , L A S T M I L E\n\n6", + "recall": 0.8098591549295775, + "true_md": "C ORNING T ELECOMMUNICA TIONS\n\nThe ongoing malaise of the telecommunications industry led Corning to initiate significant restructurings during 2002. Optical fiber plant closings and workforce reductions were evidence of our comprehensive plan to align expenses with dramatically lowered revenues in our telecommunications businesses. Despite industry weakness, we remain the global leader in the manufacturing and sale of optical communications products. Our position will serve us well when the inevitable growth of this dynamic market returns.\n\nFor the near-term,we are focused on maintaining our leading position across our markets and with our customers. Through our many generations of manufacturing technology development, we are restoring our businesses to profitability despite continued pricing pressure and low-volume growth expectations. \n\nLooking further ahead, we remain committed to creating innovative optical communications products that meet even tighter quality, capability and cost requirements for our customers. We are empha- sizing metro and access segments of the market as our major oppor- tunities. And we are watching carefully for signs of market recovery. When that time comes, we will be poised for growth once again.\n\nO PTICAL N ETWORKS: METRO , LOCAL, LAST MILE\n\nC ORNING C ABLE S YSTEMS : CABLE AND HARDWARE\n\n6" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9712662866203919, + "doc_id": "e3ec0accf4ff43df864e4cff2836f84c91e7f5a83d441821d3b16135912205e7", + "edit_distance": 0.03349282296650718, + "f1_score": 0.9917081260364842, + "meteor": 0.984002112554287, + "precision": 0.9933554817275747, + "pred_md": "SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES MANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS\n\nOperating income grew to $9.3 million, an increase of $2.9 million or 45.4%. Revenue growth, primarily in the PCS operation, was greater than the increase in operating expense, and the overall operating margin was 10.0%, compared to 9.4% in 2001. The elevated bad debt expense in the PCS and telephone operations had a dampening effect on the operating margin improvement.\n\nOther income (expense) is comprised of non-operating income and expenses, interest expense and gain or loss on investments. Collectively, the net impact of these items to pre-tax income was an expense of $14.3 million for 2002, compared to income of $9.1 million from 2001. The largest component was the loss on investments that is discussed below.\n\nInterest expense was $4.2 million, an increase of $0.1 million or 1.4%. The Company's average debt outstanding was approximately the same during 2002 as compared to the previous year.\n\nNet losses on investments were $10.0 million, compared to a gain of $12.9 million from 2001. Results in 2002 include the sale of the VeriSign, Inc. stock for a loss of $9.0 million compared to a gain recorded on the VeriSign stock of $12.7 million in 2001.\n\nNon-operating income was a loss of $0.1 million, a decrease of $0.3 million, primarily due to losses recorded for the Company's portfolio of investments, offset by an increase in patronage equity earned from CoBank, the Company's primary lender.\n\nIncome (loss) from continuing operations before taxes was a $5.0 million loss compared to a profit of $15.5 million in 2001, a decrease of $20.5 million. Gains and losses on external investments contributed $21.7 million to this change from 2002 to 2001.\n\nThe Company recognized an income tax benefit of $2.1 million on continuing operations in 2002, which is an effective tax rate of 42.2% due to the impact of net operating loss carry forwards generated in several states with higher tax rates, offset by the need for a valuation allowance.\n\nNet loss from continuing operations was $2.9 million, a decrease of $12.6 million from 2001. The results are primarily made up of the one-time impact of the losses on the sale of the VeriSign stock and the improvement in operating income.\n\nIncome from discontinued operations was $7.4 million after taxes, an increase of $0.7 million or 11%. Increased revenues from use of our cellular network by customers of other wireless providers were the main cause for the increase in net income.\n\nNet income was $4.5 million, a decrease of $11.9 million or 72.4%. The decrease is primarily the result of the $21.7 million decline in investment results due to the impact of the VeriSign gain recorded in 2001, and the loss on the sale of the VeriSign stock in 2002.\n\n## Investments in Non-Affiliated Companies\n\nThe Company has investments in several available-for-sale securities, which the Company may choose to liquidate from time to time, based on market conditions, capital needs, other investment opportunities, or a combination of any number of these factors. As a result of the uncertainty of these factors, there is also uncertainty as to what the value of the investments may be when they are sold.\n\nThe fair value of the Company's available-for-sale securities was $0.2 million at the end of 2003, compared to $0.2 million at the end of 2002. The Company's available-for-sale portfolio at December 31, 2003 is made up of two investments, both of which are within the telecommunications industry. Due to the volatility of the securities markets, particularly in the telecommunications industry, there is uncertainty about the ultimate value the Company will realize with respect to these investments in the future.\n\nThe Company participates in emerging technologies by investing in entities that invest in start-up companies. This includes indirect participation through capital venture funds of South Atlantic Venture Fund III, South Atlantic Private Equity IV, Dolphin Communications Parallel Fund, Dolphin Communications Fund II and the Burton Partnership. The Company also participates by direct investment in privately held companies. Currently the Company's only direct investment is in NTC Communications, a provider of voice, video and data connections to off campus housing properties at universities and colleges. For those companies that eventually make public offerings of their securities, it\n\n51\n\n2003 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n■", + "recall": 0.9900662251655629, + "true_md": "SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS\n\nOperating income grew to $9.3 million, an increase of $2.9 million or 45.4%. Revenue growth, primarily in the PCS operation, was greater than the increase in operating expense, and the overall operating margin was 10.0%, compared to 9.4% in 2001. The elevated bad debt expense in the PCS and telephone operations had a dampening effect on the operating margin improvement.\n\nOther income (expense) is comprised of non-operating income and expenses, interest expense and gain or loss on investments. Collectively, the net impact of these items to pre-tax income was an expense of $14.3 million for 2002, compared to income of $9.1 million from 2001. The largest component was the loss on investments that is discussed below.\n\nInterest expense was $4.2 million, an increase of $0.1 million or 1.4%. The Company’s average debt outstanding was approximately the same during 2002 as compared to the previous year.\n\nNet losses on investments were $10.0 million, compared to a gain of $12.9 million from 2001. Results in 2002 include the sale of the VeriSign, Inc. stock for a loss of $9.0 million compared to a gain recorded on the VeriSign stock of $12.7 million in 2001.\n\nNon-operating income was a loss of $0.1 million, a decrease of $0.3 million, primarily due to losses recorded for the Company’s portfolio of investments, offset by an increase in patronage equity earned from CoBank, the Company’s primary lender.\n\nIncome (loss) from continuing operations before taxes was a $5.0 million loss compared to a profit of $15.5 million in 2001, a decrease of $20.5 million. Gains and losses on external investments contributed $21.7 million to this change from 2002 to 2001.\n\nThe Company recognized an income tax benefit of $2.1 million on continuing operations in 2002, which is an effective tax rate of 42.2% due to the impact of net operating loss carry forwards generated in several states with higher tax rates, offset by the need for a valuation allowance.\n\nNet loss from continuing operations was $2.9 million, a decrease of $12.6 million from 2001. The results are primarily made up of the one-time impact of the losses on the sale of the VeriSign stock and the improvement in operating income.\n\nIncome from discontinued operations was $7.4 million after taxes, an increase of $0.7 million or 11%. Increased revenues from use of our cellular network by customers of other wireless providers were the main cause for the increase in net income.\n\nNet income was $4.5 million, a decrease of $11.9 million or 72.4%. The decrease is primarily the result of the $21.7 million decline in investment results due to the impact of the VeriSign gain recorded in 2001, and the loss on the sale of the VeriSign stock in 2002.\n\nThe Company has investments in several available-for-sale securities, which the Company may choose to liquidate from time to time, based on market conditions, capital needs, other investment opportunities, or a combination of any number of these factors. As a result of the uncertainty of these factors, there is also uncertainty as to what the value of the investments may be when they are sold.\n\nThe fair value of the Company’s available-for-sale securities was $0.2 million at the end of 2003, compared to $0.2 million at the end of 2002. The Company’s available-for-sale portfolio at December 31, 2003 is made up of two investments, both of which are within the telecommunications industry. Due to the volatility of the securities markets, particularly in the telecommunications industry, there is uncertainty about the ultimate value the Company will realize with respect to these investments in the future.\n\nThe Company participates in emerging technologies by investing in entities that invest in start-up companies. This includes indirect participation through capital venture funds of South Atlantic Venture Fund III, South Atlantic Private Equity IV, Dolphin Communications Parallel Fund, Dolphin Communications Fund II and the Burton Partnership. The Company also participates by direct investment in privately held companies. Currently the Company’s only direct investment is in NTC Communications, a provider of voice, video and data connections to off campus housing properties at universities and colleges. For those companies that eventually make public offerings of their securities, it\n\n## Investments in Non-Affiliated Companies\n\n51 ■ 2003 ANNUAL REPORT" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8685377787013243, + "doc_id": "c731a0978c963ab1836b76c045b1728c93c35bd1ecbb4dd8e0a1f554e5cac559", + "edit_distance": 0.1547911547911548, + "f1_score": 0.9255474452554745, + "meteor": 0.923738566352499, + "precision": 0.9577039274924471, + "pred_md": "HON INDUSTRIES Inc. and SUBSIDIARIES\n\nproject the ultimate collectibility of the account. As such, these factors may change over time, causing the reserve level to adjust accordingly.\n\n## I NVENTORIES\n\nThe Company values 96% of its inventory by the last-in, first-out (LIFO) method. Additionally, the Company evaluates its inventory reserves in terms of excess and obsolete exposures. This evaluation includes such factors as anticipated usage, inventory turnover, inventory levels, and ultimate product sales value. As such, these factors may change over time, causing the reserve level to adjust accordingly.\n\n## PROPERTY, PLANT, AND EQUIPMENT\n\nProperty, plant, and equipment are carried at cost. Depreciation has been computed using the straight-line method over estimated useful lives: land improvements, 10-20 years; buildings, 10-40 years; and machinery and equipment, 3-12 years.\n\n## LONG-LIVED ASSETS\n\nLong-lived assets are reviewed for impairment as events or changes in circumstances occur indicating that the amount of the asset reflected in the Company's balance sheet may not be recoverable. An estimate of undiscounted cash flows produced by the asset, or the appropriate group of assets, is compared to the carrying value to determine whether impairment exists. The estimates of future cash flows involve considerable management judgment and are based upon assumptions about expected future operating performance. The actual cash flows could differ from management's estimates due to changes in business conditions, operating performance, and economic conditions. Asset impairment charges connected with the Company's restructuring activities are discussed in the Restructuring Related Charges note. These assets included real estate, manufacturing equipment, and certain other fixed assets. The Company's continuous focus on improving the manufacturing process tends to increase the likelihood of assets being replaced; therefore, the Company is constantly evaluating the expected lives of its equipment and accelerating depreciation where appropriate. The Company recorded losses on the disposal of assets in the amount of approximately $1 million and $5 million during 2003 and 2002, respectively, as a result of its rapid continuous improvement initiatives.\n\n## GOODWILL AND OTHER INTANGIBLE ASSETS\n\nIn accordance with SFAS No. 142, the Company evaluates its goodwill for impairment on an annual basis based on values at the end of third quarter, or whenever indicators of impairment exist. The Company has\n\nevaluated its goodwill for impairment and has determined that the fair value of reporting units exceeds their carrying value, so no impairment of goodwill was recognized. Management's assumptions about future cash flows for the reporting units requires significant judgment, and actual cash flows in the future may differ significantly from those forecasted today.\n\nThe Company also determines the fair value of an indefinite lived trademark on an annual basis, or whenever indications of impairment exist. The Company has evaluated its trademark for impairment and has determined that the fair market value of the trademark exceeds its carrying value, so no impairment was recognized.\n\n## PRODUCT WARRANTIES\n\nThe Company issues certain warranty policies on its furniture and hearth products that provide for repair or replacement of any covered product or component that fails during normal use because of a defect in design, materials, or workmanship. A warranty reserve is determined by recording a specific reserve for known warranty issues and an additional reserve for unknown claims that are expected to be incurred based on historical claims experience. Actual claims incurred could differ from the original estimates, requiring adjustments to the reserve. Activity associated with warranty obligations was as follows:\n\n## REVENUE RECOGNITION\n\nRevenue is normally recognized upon shipment of goods to customers. In certain circumstances revenue is not recognized until the goods are received by the customer or upon installation and customer acceptance based on the terms of the sales agreement. Revenue includes freight charged to customers; related costs are in selling and administrative expense. Rebates, discounts, and other marketing program expenses that are directly related to the sale are recorded as a deduction to net sales. Marketing program accruals require the use of management estimates and the consideration of contractual arrangements that are subject to interpretation. Customer sales that reach certain award levels can affect the amount of such estimates and actual results could differ from these estimates.\n\n44", + "recall": 0.8954802259887006, + "true_md": "## INVENTORIES\n\nH O N I N D U S T R I E S I n c . a n d S U B S I D I A R I E S\n\n## PRODUCT WARRANTIES\n\n## PROPERTY, PLANT, AND EQUIPMENT\n\n## LONG-LIVED ASSETS\n\n## REVENUE RECOGNITION\n\n## GOODWILL AND OTHER INTANGIBLE ASSETS\n\nproject the ultimate collectibility of the account. As such, these factors may change over time, causing the reserve level to adjust accordingly.\n\nThe Company values 96% of its inventory by the last-in, first-out (LIFO) method. Additionally, the Company evaluates its inventory reserves in terms of excess and obsolete exposures. This evaluation includes such factors as anticipated usage, inventory turnover, inven- tory levels, and ultimate product sales value. As such, these factors may change over time, causing the reserve level to adjust accordingly.\n\nProperty, plant, and equipment are carried at cost. Depreciation has been computed using the straight-line method over estimated useful lives: land improvements, 10–20 years; buildings, 10–40 years; and machinery and equipment, 3–12 years. \n\nLong-lived assets are reviewed for impairment as events or changes in circumstances occur indicating that the amount of the asset reflected in the Company’s balance sheet may not be recoverable. An estimate of undiscounted cash flows produced by the asset, or the appropriate group of assets, is compared to the carrying value to determine whether impairment exists. The estimates of future cash flows involve consider- able management judgment and are based upon assumptions about expected future operating performance. The actual cash flows could dif- fer from management’s estimates due to changes in business conditions, operating performance, and economic conditions. Asset impairment charges connected with the Company’s restructuring activities are dis- cussed in the Restructuring Related Charges note. These assets included real estate, manufacturing equipment, and certain other fixed assets. The Company’s continuous focus on improving the manufacturing pro- cess tends to increase the likelihood of assets being replaced; therefore, the Company is constantly evaluating the expected lives of its equipment and accelerating depreciation where appropriate. The Company recorded losses on the disposal of assets in the amount of approximately $1 million and $5 million during 2003 and 2002, respectively, as a result of its rapid continuous improvement initiatives.\n\nIn accordance with SFAS No. 142, the Company evaluates its goodwill for impairment on an annual basis based on values at the end of third quarter, or whenever indicators of impairment exist. The Company has \n\nevaluated its goodwill for impairment and has determined that the fair value of reporting units exceeds their carrying value, so no impairment of goodwill was recognized. Management’s assumptions about future cash flows for the reporting units requires significant judgment, and actual cash flows in the future may differ significantly from those fore- casted today.\n\nThe Company also determines the fair value of an indefinite lived trademark on an annual basis, or whenever indications of impair- ment exist. The Company has evaluated its trademark for impairment and has determined that the fair market value of the trademark exceeds its carrying value, so no impairment was recognized.\n\nThe Company issues certain warranty policies on its furniture and hearth products that provide for repair or replacement of any covered product or component that fails during normal use because of a defect in design, materials, or workmanship. A warranty reserve is determined by recording a specific reserve for known warranty issues and an addi- tional reserve for unknown claims that are expected to be incurred based on historical claims experience. Actual claims incurred could dif- fer from the original estimates, requiring adjustments to the reserve. Activity associated with warranty obligations was as follows:\n\nRevenue is normally recognized upon shipment of goods to customers. In certain circumstances revenue is not recognized until the goods are received by the customer or upon installation and customer acceptance based on the terms of the sales agreement. Revenue includes freight charged to customers; related costs are in selling and administrative expense. Rebates, discounts, and other marketing program expenses that are directly related to the sale are recorded as a deduction to net sales. Marketing program accruals require the use of management esti- mates and the consideration of contractual arrangements that are subject to interpretation. Customer sales that reach certain award levels can affect the amount of such estimates and actual results could differ from these estimates.\n\n44" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7812371862535812, + "doc_id": "e7baf06330eccdf37c7019a1f2b19572c3ca5af379484152fe7dd5516584caa2", + "edit_distance": 0.18719211822660098, + "f1_score": 0.8709677419354841, + "meteor": 0.8223630527763885, + "precision": 0.8925619834710744, + "pred_md": "- /H17076 B ecky Frazier, investment representative for Edward Jones in Kingsport, Tenn., helps build retirement plans for clients such as Calvin and Jean Bird. When Frazier left a previous company to join Edward Jones, her former PLANCO wholesaler notified a PLANCO colleague who services Edward Jones' financial advisors. He immediately introduced himself to Frazier, who was happy to continue the PLANCO relationship. Some 90 percent of the variable annuities Frazier sells-and nearly 40 percent of the mutual funds-are from The Hartford.\n- /H17074 F inancial professionals like Gary Wortman and Martha Winn have good reasons for working with The Hartford and PLANCO. 'PLANCO's service is outstanding,' says Wortman, financial consultant at RBC Centura Securities in Shelby, N.C. 'Their people get me the answers I need when I need them.' And Wellington Management Co., which manages many of The Hartford's mutual funds, is 'as good as any money manager on Wall Street,' says Winn, personal banker at RBC Centura Bank.", + "recall": 0.8503937007874016, + "true_md": "GLYPH<H17076> B ecky Frazier, investment repre- sentative for Edward Jones in Kingsport, Tenn., helps build retire- ment plans for clients such as Calvin and Jean Bird. When Frazier left a previous company to join Edward Jones, her former PLANCO wholesaler notified a PLANCO colleague who services Edward Jones’ financial advisors. He immediately introduced himself to Frazier, who was happy to continue the PLANCO relationship. Some 90 percent of the variable annuities Frazier sells—and nearly 40 percent of the mutual funds—are from The Hartford. \n\nGLYPH<H17074> F inancial professionals like Gary Wortman and Martha Winn have good reasons for working with The Hartford and PLANCO. “PLANCO’s service is outstanding,” says Wortman, financial consultant at RBC Centura Securities in Shelby, N.C. “Their people get me the answers I need when I need them.” And Wellington Management Co., which manages many of The Hartford’s mutual funds, is “as good as any money manager on Wall Street,” says Winn, personal banker at RBC Centura Bank." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7018491170272205, + "doc_id": "ddfe5585481ee5b86f993c3d433b9d42bb3c9485c06977de4f546845b7a10355", + "edit_distance": 0.23809523809523808, + "f1_score": 0.9444444444444444, + "meteor": 0.9485714285714285, + "precision": 0.9444444444444444, + "pred_md": "consolidated statements of\n\n## changes in shareholders' investment\n\nSee notes to consolidated financial statements.\n\n2004 Annual Report\n\n33", + "recall": 0.9444444444444444, + "true_md": "## consolidated statements of changes in shareholders’ investment\n\nSee notes to consolidated financial statements.\n\n2004 Annual Report 33" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7071067811865476, + "doc_id": "6296ec244c712e34a4996972cbc51b23a10b278c534691a5322e7f48d1404a9f", + "edit_distance": 0.5714285714285714, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9883381924198251, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Nissan Annual Report 2004\n\n99\n\nFINANCIAL SECTION", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "FINANCIAL SECTION\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 99" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9506542326807881, + "doc_id": "0ef866b4980c9ac0ac12ecb96366c6c0d31870adfab7f9c67561e19e49c1b586", + "edit_distance": 0.03951890034364261, + "f1_score": 0.9613899613899614, + "meteor": 0.9721844489306627, + "precision": 0.9803149606299213, + "pred_md": "good addition to the Sweetwater bank, and we are pleased to have a location in the Trent community.\n\nWe are honored that Johnny Trotter, President and Chief Executive Officer of Livestock Investors, Ltd., has accepted nomination for election as a new director of the Company at our annual shareholder meeting in April 2003. He is presently a director of the Hereford State Bank and a prominent business, community and cattle industry leader.\n\nCraig Smith, President and Chief Executive Officer of Hereford State Bank, retired at the end of 2002, after 31 years of service to the bank. Craig also served as a director on our Company board. Mike Mauldin, a well-known Texas Panhandle banker with over 23 years of banking experience, has been elected President and Chief Executive Officer of the Hereford State Bank to succeed Craig.\n\nAfter 12 years of service, Curtis Harvey, Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer, will be leaving the Company on March 31, 2003, to manage his new business interest in Fort Worth. J. Bruce Hildebrand has been elected to succeed Curtis. Bruce, a CPA, was a financial services audit partner at KPMG LLP , where he worked for 24 years. He is well-qualified for the Executive Vice President/Chief Financial Officer position due to his experience with publicly held companies and financial institutions. The Board has also elected Gary L. Webb as Executive Vice President/Operations. Gary has over 15 years of experience in the banking and consulting industries, and will be managing our technology, operations, training and product development. Over the next several years, we plan to make additional investments in technology in order to expand our services and gain operating efficiencies for the Company.\n\nWe thank Craig and Curtis for their outstanding service and dedication to the Company, and we welcome the newest members of our management team. We are very honored to have these experienced professionals join the Company. We also are pleased that Kenneth T. Murphy will continue as Chairman of the Board and in that role will focus on acquisitions. With this experienced management team, which includes our 10 bank presidents, we are poised for growth and continued strong results. We greatly appreciate both their efforts and those of our directors and employees.\n\nIn 2003, we will continue to pursue opportunities to grow and enhance shareholder value. We plan to actively seek strategic acquisitions; look for additional branch locations in higher-growth areas to expand our existing banks; and increase our mortgage and brokerage operations. We currently are in the process of forming a trust company that will consolidate our present trust operations, provide greater expertise to our clients and allow us to expand trust services to additional markets.\n\nThis year's annual report features a few of the many people that we work for every day - our shareholders and customers. As we grow the Company, we promise that our dedication to you will not waver, and that we will continue to focus on the importance of value and values.\n\nThank you for your investment in and support for First Financial Bankshares.\n\nF. Scott Dueser President and Chief Executive Officer\n\nF. Scott Dueser President and Chief Executive Officer", + "recall": 0.9431818181818182, + "true_md": "good addition to the Sweetwater bank, and we are pleased to have a location in the Trent community.\n\nWe are honored that Johnny Trotter, President and Chief Executive Officer of Livestock Investors, Ltd., has accepted nomination for election as a new director of the Company at our annual shareholder meeting in April 2003. He is presently a director of the Hereford State Bank and a prominent business, community and cattle industry leader.\n\nCraig Smith, President and Chief Executive Officer of Hereford State Bank, retired at the end of 2002, after 31 years of service to the bank. Craig also served as a direc- tor on our Company board. Mike Mauldin, a well-known Texas Panhandle banker with over 23 years of banking experience, has been elected President and Chief Executive Officer of the Hereford State Bank to succeed Craig.\n\nAfter 12 years of service, Curtis Harvey, Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer, will be leaving the Company on March 31, 2003, to manage his new business interest in Fort Worth. J. Bruce Hildebrand has been elected to succeed Curtis. Bruce, a CPA, was a financial services audit partner at KPMG LLP, where he worked for 24 years. He is well-qualified for the Executive Vice President/Chief Financial Officer position due to his expe- rience with publicly held companies and financial institutions. The Board has also elected Gary L. Webb as Executive Vice President/Operations. Gary has over 15 years of experience in the banking and consulting indus- tries, and will be managing our technology, operations, training and product development. Over the next several years, we plan to make additional investments in technol- ogy in order to expand our services and gain operating efficiencies for the Company.\n\nWe thank Craig and Curtis for their outstanding service and dedication to the Company, and we welcome the newest members of our management team. We are very honored to have these experienced professionals join the Company. We also are pleased that Kenneth T. Murphy will continue as Chairman of the Board and in that role will focus on acquisitions. With this experienced management team, which includes our 10 bank presidents, we are poised for growth and continued strong results. We greatly appreciate both their efforts and those of our directors and employees.\n\nIn 2003, we will continue to pursue opportunities to grow and enhance shareholder value. We plan to actively seek strategic acquisitions; look for additional branch locations in higher-growth areas to expand our existing banks; and increase our mortgage and brokerage operations. We cur- rently are in the process of forming a trust company that will consolidate our present trust operations, provide greater expertise to our clients and allow us to expand trust services to additional markets.\n\nThis year’s annual report features a few of the many peo- ple that we work for every day – our shareholders and customers. As we grow the Company , we promise that our dedication to you will not waver, and that we will continue to focus on the importance of value and values.\n\nThank you for your investment in and support for First Financial Bankshares.\n\nF. Scott Dueser President and Chief Executive Officer" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "68ad578fbcc8dc5872f60d533a50432131823e65611e35dfe7bd4819b11c552f", + "edit_distance": 0.9479166666666666, + "f1_score": 0.14634146341463417, + "meteor": 0.358584111610746, + "precision": 0.08108108108108109, + "pred_md": "14\n\n## PRODUCTION STATISTICS\n\nTotal 2004\n\nField units\n\nmmboe\n\nField units\n\nmmboe\n\nTotal 2003\n\nSales gas and ethane (PJ)\n\nCooper\n\n125.9\n\n21.6\n\n154.0\n\n26.5\n\nSurat/Denison\n\n16.1\n\n2.8\n\n14.3\n\n2.5\n\nAmadeus\n\n11.3\n\n1.9\n\n11.7\n\n2.0\n\nOtway\n\n4.4\n\n0.8\n\n11.9\n\n2.0\n\nPatricia-Baleen\n\n3.8\n\n0.7\n\n1.9\n\n0.3\n\nCarnarvon\n\n17.7\n\n3.0\n\n17.7\n\n3.1\n\nUnited States\n\n9.2\n\n1.6\n\n11.3\n\n1.9\n\nIndonesia\n\n2.1\n\n0.4\n\n-\n\n-\n\nTotal production\n\n190.5\n\n32.8\n\n222.8\n\n38.3\n\nTotal sales volume\n\n207.1\n\n35.6\n\n228.4\n\n39.3\n\nTotal sales revenue ($million)\n\n680.1\n\n720.8\n\n## Crude oil ('000 bbls)\n\nAnnual Report 2004", + "recall": 0.75, + "true_md": "## PRODUCTION STA TISTICS\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\n14" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9158369223603928, + "doc_id": "afa49c12724d36f392df430ee32d5efc39f255a1b2b192ba5ec29e6d1d4882b6", + "edit_distance": 0.09302325581395349, + "f1_score": 0.9777777777777777, + "meteor": 0.9777781407479561, + "precision": 0.9850746268656716, + "pred_md": "FINANCIAL SECTION\n\n90\n\nSummarized below are the notional amounts and the estimated fair value of the derivative instruments outstanding at March 31, 2005 and 2004:\n\n## 1) Currency-related transactions\n\nNote: The notional amounts of the forward foreign exchange contracts and currency swaps presented above exclude those entered into to hedge receivables and payables denominated in foreign currencies which have been translated and are reflected at their corresponding contracted rates in the accompanying consolidated balance sheets.\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004", + "recall": 0.9705882352941176, + "true_md": "Summarized below are the notional amounts and the estimated fair value of the derivative instruments outstanding at March 31, 2005 and 2004:\n\n## 1) Currency-related transactions\n\nNote: The notional amounts of the forward foreign exchange contracts and currency swaps presented above exclude those entered into to hedge receiv- ables and payables denominated in foreign currencies which have been translated and are reflected at their corresponding contracted rates in the accompanying consolidated balance sheets.\n\nFINANCIAL SECTION\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 90" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9494125185945163, + "doc_id": "73f74bd620869eaadfad255354ef6e54b1744c1754cfeed290012e27383d72bf", + "edit_distance": 0.25, + "f1_score": 0.9891067538126362, + "meteor": 0.9675412823992664, + "precision": 0.9912663755458515, + "pred_md": "## OPERATIONS REVIEW\n\nbreakwater will be an over capping type, which interrupts the waves progress, but does not totally protect from wave penetration. These events are manageable and estimated as a once in 50 years possibility.\n\nThe breakwater core will be used as a construction causeway allowing land based equipment to perform the work. The greater part of the breakwater work involves winning the material as opposed to actual construction.\n\n## E. CYCLONE MOORINGS.\n\nThe extent of the cyclone problem in Australia's north and north west was emphasised when Cyclone Tracey struck Darwin in 1974. The most powerful cyclone to cross the Australian coast was Cyclone Vance in 1999, which passed near Dampier, destroying large parts of the towns of Onslow and Exmouth further to the south.\n\nThe problem is acute, particularly in the area between Exmouth and Port Hedland, which suffers cyclones of an intensity and frequency as high as anywhere in the world. The Mermaid Base is typically on cyclone alert three times per season. The season is November to April.\n\nTo date there have been three options available to vessel owners when a cyclone approaches:.\n\n- · Run to sea\n- · Take refuge with crew onboard, on a mooring in the most sheltered location available such as the Dampier Archipelago or the Monte Bello Islands.\n- · Construct a cyclone shelter.\n\nThere are serious personal safety and environmental considerations related to Options 1 and 2 and it is obvious that best practice universally adopted by large responsible Companies can be satisfied in this way.\n\nOnly Woodside at Dampier and BHP at Port Hedand have taken the step of building shelters which provides protection to 12 of the region's 60 vessels and this at very considerable cost.\n\nMermaid has undertaken significant engineering work on the placing of vessels on partially sheltered spread moorings, allowing the vessels to be secured near to shore and the crews demobilized to take care of their families and attend to household cyclone preparation.\n\nMermaid is taking a leadership role with a technical solution which will lead to wider adoption as vessel owners and the insurance industry fully value the arrangements. Mermaid will provide\n\nMERMAID MARINE AUSTRALIA LIMITED\n\n12", + "recall": 0.9869565217391304, + "true_md": "OPERATIONS REVIEW\n\nbreakwater will be an over capping type, which interrupts the waves progress, but does not totally protect from wave penetration. These events are manageable and estimated as a once in 50 years possibility.\n\nThe breakwater core will be used as a construction causeway allowing land based equipment to perform the work. The greater part of the breakwater work involves winning the material as opposed to actual construction. \n\nThe extent of the cyclone problem in Australia’s north and north west was emphasised when Cyclone Tracey struck Darwin in 1974. The most powerful cyclone to cross the Australian coast was Cyclone Vance in 1999, which passed near Dampier, destroying large parts of the towns of Onslow and Exmouth further to the south.\n\nThe problem is acute, particularly in the area between Exmouth and Port Hedland, which suffers cyclones of an intensity and frequency as high as anywhere in the world. The Mermaid Base is typically on cyclone alert three times per season. The season is November to April.\n\nTo date there have been three options available to vessel owners when a cyclone approaches:.\n\nThere are serious personal safety and environmental considerations related to Options 1 and 2 and it is obvious that best practice universally adopted by large responsible Companies can be satisfied in this way.\n\nOnly Woodside at Dampier and BHP at Port Hedand have taken the step of building shelters which provides protection to 12 of the region’s 60 vessels and this at very considerable cost.\n\nMermaid has undertaken significant engineering work on the placing of vessels on partially sheltered spread moorings, allowing the vessels to be secured near to shore and the crews demobilized to take care of their families and attend to household cyclone preparation. \n\nMermaid is taking a leadership role with a technical solution which will lead to wider adoption as vessel owners and the insurance industry fully value the arrangements. Mermaid will provide\n\n12\n\nMERMAID MARINE AUSTRALIA LIMITED\n\n- • Run to sea\n\n- • Take refuge with crew onboard, on a mooring in the most sheltered location available such as the Dampier Archipelago or the Monte Bello Islands.\n\n- • Construct a cyclone shelter.\n\n## E. CYCLONE MOORINGS." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9822821334346259, + "doc_id": "6ab4be2e6d05e9e90f4fa80476fbba41c423125dba9d070169a4ca5242818a6d", + "edit_distance": 0.01288404360753221, + "f1_score": 0.9844851904090269, + "meteor": 0.9911776548716426, + "precision": 0.9858757062146892, + "pred_md": "## SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES MANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS\n\nincreased again on July 1, 2002 to $6.50, and comparable rate increases also impacted business subscribers. Tied to the SLC rate increases were declines in rates charged to interexchange carriers for interstate minutes of use. The 2002 results reflect a significantly larger increase in network usage, which more than offset the decline in rates.\n\nFacility lease revenue contributed $5.7 million to wireline revenues, a decrease of $0.8 million or 12.6% from 2001. The decrease was primarily the result of declining lease rates associated with competitive pricing pressure, and the economic downturn in the telecommunications industry.\n\nBilling and collection services contributed $0.4 million to wireline revenues, which was the same as 2001 results. Revenues from this service had declined in recent years, with interexchange carriers now issuing a greater proportion of their bills directly to their customers.\n\nWireline revenues from cable television services were $4.3 million, an increase of $0.5 million or 14.5%. In December 2001, the Company increased its basic service charge by $6.00 per month, which produced $0.3 million of the increase in cable television revenue. The remaining $0.2 million was generated by an increased penetration of digital services and increased pay per view sales.\n\nWithin other revenues, Internet and 511Virginia contract revenues from the Virginia Department of Transportation, were $5.1 million in 2002, an increase of $1.2 million or 30.4%. The Company had 18,050 dial-up Internet subscribers at December 31, 2002, compared to 17,423 subscribers at the end of 2001. Total Internet service revenue was $4.2 million, an increase of $0.6 million or 15.7%. Services provided under the 511Virginia contract contributed $0.9 million to other revenues, an increase of $0.6 million. Telecommunications equipment sales, services and lease revenues were $1.2 million, a nominal increase over 2001 results.\n\nTotal operating expenses were $83.6 million, an increase of $21.3 million or 34.3%. The continued growth in the PCS operation was principally responsible for the change.\n\nCost of goods and services was $10.5 million, an increase of $3.1 million or 41.8%. The PCS cost of goods sold was $8.3 million, an increase of $2.8 million or 50.2%. This change is due primarily to higher volumes of handsets sold through Company owned stores and PCS handset subsidies paid to third-party retailers. The cable television programming (cost of service) expense was $1.4 million, an increase of $0.1 million or 4.6%. The other cost of goods sold increased $0.3 million, compared to the same period in 2001.\n\nNetwork operating costs were $32.5 million, an increase of $5.8 million or 21.5%. Line and switching costs were $9.7 million, an increase of $2.6 million or 37.4%, due principally to the impact of the expanded PCS network. Travel expense, generated by the Company's PCS subscribers' use of minutes on other providers' portions of the Sprint wireless network, was $10.7 million, an increase of $0.9 million or 8.4%. The increase in customer travel usage more than offset the travel rate explained above in travel revenue. Plant specific costs were $9.6 million, which include the operation, and maintenance of the networks increased $2.3 million or 30.7%. Tower, building, and land rentals, as well as PCS equipment maintenance, were major contributors to the increase in plant specific expenses. Other network costs such as power, network administration, and engineering, were $2.7 million, the same as in 2001.\n\nDepreciation and amortization expense was $14.5 million, an increase of $3.2 million or 28.6%. The PCS operation had depreciation expense of $8.6 million, an increase of $3.6 million or 72.7%. The PCS operation added 53 additional base stations during 2002.\n\nSelling, general and administrative expenses were $26.1 million, an increase of $9.3 million or 55.0%. Customer support costs were $7.8 million, an increase of $2.8 million or 55.3%. The growth in Sprint wireless subscribers was the primary driver for this increase. Advertising expense was $4.3 million, an increase of $1.5 million or 55.8%. This change was primarily due to the stepped-up and ongoing marketing efforts to support the PCS operations in the Quad State market and particularly the Central Penn market. PCS sales staff expenses were $2.7 million, an increase of $0.7 million or 32.7%. The increase was principally due to the full year operations of the three retail locations and adding additional sales staff.\n\nThe Company experienced significant bad debt losses in its PCS operations related to the Sprint Clear PaySM program. The program was initially targeted at customers in sub-prime credit classes and did not require a deposit upon activation of service. As a result of default rates that exceeded projections, the Company experienced a substantial increase in bad debt expense, which rose from $1.2 million in 2001 to $4.4 million in 2002. The reinstatement of deposit requirements in April 2002 caused some moderation in bad debt expense by the end of the year. Total PCS bade debt expense for 2002 was $3.7 million of this expense is associated with several large telecommunications customers who filed bankruptcies in 2002. program. sm\n\nSHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY\n\n50\n\n■", + "recall": 0.9830985915492958, + "true_md": "SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS\n\nincreased again on July 1, 2002 to $6.50, and comparable rate increases also impacted business subscribers. Tied to the SLC rate increases were declines in rates charged to interexchange carriers for interstate minutes of use. The 2002 results reflect a significantly larger increase in network usage, which more than offset the decline in rates.\n\nFacility lease revenue contributed $5.7 million to wireline revenues, a decrease of $0.8 million or 12.6% from 2001. The decrease was primarily the result of declining lease rates associated with competitive pricing pressure, and the economic downturn in the telecommunications industry.\n\nBilling and collection services contributed $0.4 million to wireline revenues, which was the same as 2001 results. Revenues from this service had declined in recent years, with interexchange carriers now issuing a greater proportion of their bills directly to their customers.\n\nWireline revenues from cable television services were $4.3 million, an increase of $0.5 million or 14.5%. In December 2001, the Company increased its basic service charge by $6.00 per month, which produced $0.3 million of the increase in cable television revenue. The remaining $0.2 million was generated by an increased penetration of digital services and increased pay per view sales.\n\nWithin other revenues, Internet and 511Virginia contract revenues from the Virginia Department of Transportation, were $5.1 million in 2002, an increase of $1.2 million or 30.4%. The Company had 18,050 dial-up Internet subscribers at December 31, 2002, compared to 17,423 subscribers at the end of 2001. Total Internet service revenue was $4.2 million, an increase of $0.6 million or 15.7%. Services provided under the 511Virginia contract contributed $0.9 million to other revenues, an increase of $0.6 million. Telecommunications equipment sales, services and lease revenues were $1.2 million, a nominal increase over 2001 results.\n\nTotal operating expenses were $83.6 million, an increase of $21.3 million or 34.3%. The continued growth in the PCS operation was principally responsible for the change.\n\nCost of goods and services was $10.5 million, an increase of $3.1 million or 41.8%. The PCS cost of goods sold was $8.3 million, an increase of $2.8 million or 50.2%. This change is due primarily to higher volumes of handsets sold through Company owned stores and PCS handset subsidies paid to third-party retailers. The cable television programming (cost of service) expense was $1.4 million, an increase of $0.1 million or 4.6%. The other cost of goods sold increased $0.3 million, compared to the same period in 2001.\n\nNetwork operating costs were $32.5 million, an increase of $5.8 million or 21.5%. Line and switching costs were $9.7 million, an increase of $2.6 million or 37.4%, due principally to the impact of the expanded PCS network. Travel expense, generated by the Company’s PCS subscribers’ use of minutes on other providers’ portions of the Sprint wireless network, was $10.7 million, an increase of $0.9 million or 8.4%. The increase in customer travel usage more than offset the travel rate explained above in travel revenue. Plant specific costs were $9.6 million, which include the operation, and maintenance of the networks increased $2.3 million or 30.7%. Tower, building, and land rentals, as well as PCS equipment maintenance, were major contributors to the increase in plant specific expenses. Other network costs such as power, network administration, and engineering, were $2.7 million, the same as in 2001.\n\nDepreciation and amortization expense was $14.5 million, an increase of $3.2 million or 28.6%. The PCS operation had depreciation expense of $8.6 million, an increase of $3.6 million or 72.7%. The PCS operation added 53 additional base stations during 2002.\n\nSelling, general and administrative expenses were $26.1 million, an increase of $9.3 million or 55.0%. Customer support costs were $7.8 million, an increase of $2.8 million or 55.3%. The growth in Sprint wireless subscribers was the primary driver for this increase. Advertising expense was $4.3 million, an increase of $1.5 million or 55.8%. This change was primarily due to the stepped-up and ongoing marketing efforts to support the PCS operations in the Quad State market and particularly the Central Penn market. PCS sales staff expenses were $2.7 million, an increase of $0.7 million or 32.7%. The increase was principally due to the full year operations of the three retail locations and adding additional sales staff.\n\nThe Company experienced significant bad debt losses in its PCS operations related to the Sprint Clear PayS program. The program was initially targeted at customers in sub-prime credit classes and did not require a deposit upon activation of service. As a result of default rates that exceeded projections, the Company experienced a substantial increase in bad debt expense, which rose from $1.2 million in 2001 to $4.4 million in 2002. The reinstatement of deposit requirements in April 2002 caused some moderation in bad debt expense by the end of the year. Total PCS bade debt expense for 2002 was $3.7 million of this expense is associated with several large telecommunications customers who filed bankruptcies in 2002. pr ogram. sm\n\nSHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY ■ 50" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9711876679527548, + "doc_id": "44471db8ade70232278bda1a982a9a5742e79c755e2d3b4843f92a3818b20b88", + "edit_distance": 0.29069767441860467, + "f1_score": 0.9868421052631579, + "meteor": 0.9542404649746219, + "precision": 0.9868421052631579, + "pred_md": "and are available to our employees who are striving to grow within the company.\n\nWhether through brick and mortar projects or initiatives that support at-risk youths and deserving senior citizens, MGM MIRAGE is a proud contributor to hundreds of worthwhile causes.\n\nIn 2004, our employees contributed more than $3 million to help improve the quality of life for others. Of this amount, employees raised a record-breaking $2.7 million to benefit more than 400 charities in southern Nevada alone. These funds were collected and distributed by the MGM MIRAGE Voice\n\nFoundation, the company's nonprofit, philanthropic arm established three years ago to encourage and empower employee giving.\n\nWith hundreds of organizations benefiting from our employees' generosity, MGM MIRAGE absorbs all administrative costs associated with operating and managing the Voice Foundation, resulting in 100 percent of our employee contributions going directly to charities. Additionally, employees are able to choose qualified grant recipients to receive the funding. Since its founding, employees have raised more than $8 million to support deserving nonprofit organizations.\n\nEmployee giving achieved momentous results last year. While contributions to the Voice Foundation reached record amounts, MGM MIRAGE employees also provided manpower to Habitat for Humanity to build homes for single working mothers.\n\nThrough the \"Dollars for Doers\" program, also administered by the Voice Foundation, the company provides grants to eligible organizations in which our employees volunteer their time.", + "recall": 0.9868421052631579, + "true_md": "Employee giving achieved momentous results last year. While contributions to the Voice Foundation reached record amounts, MGM MIRAGE employees also provided manpower to Habitat for Humanity to build homes for single working mothers.\n\nand are available to our employees who are striving to grow within the company. \n\nWhether through brick and mortar projects or initiatives that support at-risk youths and deserving senior citizens, MGM MIRAGE is a proud contributor to hundreds of worthwhile causes. \n\nIn 2004, our employees contributed more than $3 million to help improve the quality of life for others. Of this amount, employees raised a record-breaking $2.7 million to benefit more than 400 charities in southern Nevada alone. These funds were collected and distributed by the MGM MIRAGE Voice\n\nFoundation, the company’s nonprofit, philanthropic arm established three years ago to encourage and empower employee giving. \n\nWith hundreds of organizations benefiting from our employees’ generosity, MGM MIRAGE absorbs all administrative costs associated with operating and managing the Voice Foundation, resulting in 100 percent of our employee contributions going directly to charities. Additionally, employees are able to choose qualified grant recipients to receive the funding. Since its founding, employees have raised more than $8 million to support deserving nonprofit organizations. \n\nThrough the \"Dollars for Doers\" program, also administered by the Voice Foundation, the company provides grants to eligible organizations in which our employees volunteer their time." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9389529059275206, + "doc_id": "e68ad3c1163b52095817e55f5861390bac982e009b97ea20f87441854d9106c0", + "edit_distance": 0.03854389721627409, + "f1_score": 0.9624060150375939, + "meteor": 0.9630942752430246, + "precision": 0.9696969696969697, + "pred_md": "All this translates into increased shareholder value. Since 1995, our market cap has increased from $5.7 billion to $15.4 billion-an 18 percent compound annual growth rate. Our share price has increased nearly 160 percent since The Hartford became a public company. During the same period, the S&P 500 increased 89 percent, and the Dow Jones Industrial Average 97 percent.\n\nIt's no surprise that our management team is highly regarded within the financial services industry and on Wall Street. We've built a strong leadership team, complemented by more than 27,000 dedicated employees who are nurtured and energized by a culture of success. Consequently, we had a smooth leadership transition over the past year. Tom Marra succeeded Lon Smith as president of our life operations and joined our board of directors. Lon retired after a 33-year career with The Hartford, and we owe him a tremendous amount of gratitude for building a strong and successful operation.\n\nDuring 2001 we also welcomed two new members to our board of directors. Edward J. Kelly III, president and CEO of Mercantile Bankshares Corp., joined us in May, and we welcomed Charles B. Strauss, president and CEO of Unilever United States, Inc., in November.\n\nWe're well-positioned for growth in 2002. On Jan. 1 we renewed our relationship with AARP by signing a new eight-year contract to market auto and homeowner's insurance to its 35 million members. Our small-business property-casualty operation continues to grow-premiums surpassed $1.2 billion in annual sales in 2001.\n\nWe're also in a leading position to take advantage of demographic shifts and to provide estate planning and investment and insurance products to baby boomers. We are very excited, too, about our new SMART 529™ college savings program, which offers flexible features and numerous tax advantages. And the growing small-business market segment is a key target for our 401(k) and group-benefits businesses. In fact, with $2 billion in fully insured premiums and $106 million in net income, the Group Benefits Division (GBD) had its best year ever.\n\nAs our markets continue to grow and evolve, we stay intensely focused on the key strategies in all our businesses.\n\nSoon after the Sept. 11 attack, The Hartford Chairman, President and CEO Ramani Ayer, left foreground, joined other industry CEOs in meeting with President Bush at the White House. During the meeting, the executives assured the president of industry support as the nation recovers.", + "recall": 0.9552238805970149, + "true_md": "All this translates into increased shareholder value. Since 1995, our market cap has increased from $5.7 billion to $15.4 billion—an 18 percent compound annual growth rate. Our share price has increased nearly 160 percent since The Hartford became a public com- pany. During the same period, the S&P 500 increased 89 percent, and the Dow Jones Industrial Average 97 percent.\n\nIt’s no surprise that our management team is highly regarded within the financial services industry and on Wall Street. We’ve built a strong leadership team, complemented by more than 27,000 dedicated employees who are nurtured and energized by a culture of success. Consequently, we had a smooth leadership transition over the past year. Tom Marra succeeded Lon Smith as president of our life operations and joined our board of directors. Lon retired after a 33-year career with The Hartford, and we owe him a tremendous amount of gratitude for building a strong and successful operation. \n\nDuring 2001 we also welcomed two new members to our board of directors. Edward J. Kelly III, president and CEO of Mercantile Bankshares Corp., joined us in May, and we welcomed Charles B. Strauss, president and CEO of Unilever United States, Inc., in November.\n\nWe’re well-positioned for growth in 2002. On Jan. 1 we renewed our relationship with AARP by signing a new eight-year contract to market auto and homeowner’s insurance to its 35 million members. Our small-business property-casualty operation continues to grow—premiums surpassed $1.2 billion in annual sales in 2001.\n\nWe’re also in a leading position to take advantage of demographic shifts and to provide estate planning and investment and insurance products to baby boomers. We are very excited, too, about our new SMART 529 ™ college savings program, which offers flexible features and numerous tax advantages. And the growing small-business market segment is a key target for our 401(k) and group-benefits businesses. In fact, with $2 billion in fully insured premiums and $106 million in net income, the Group Benefits Division (GBD) had its best year ever.\n\nAs our markets continue to grow and evolve, we stay intensely focused on the key strategies in all our businesses. \n\nSoon after the Sept. 11 attack, The Hartford Chairman, President and CEO Ramani Ayer, left fore- ground, joined other industry CEOs in meeting with President Bush at the White House. During the meeting, the executives assured the president of industry support as the nation recovers." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9433305821783917, + "doc_id": "650ed43eed03380df5ad1fe1533e12855f6420824cf20f8d2517d47d0c7defe2", + "edit_distance": 0.043478260869565216, + "f1_score": 0.9563106796116505, + "meteor": 0.9591496324551072, + "precision": 0.9609756097560975, + "pred_md": "- · Enhance the value chain. The typical LCV owner keeps a vehicle for seven to ten years, and puts on five times the mileage of a passenger vehicle owner. If you treat LCV owners well, additional opportunities for income such as inspections, aftermarket service, and repeat sales will inevitably follow.\n- · Build the learning organization. Prior to Nissan's turnaround, we did not focus on the LCV market. We need to take the knowledge we now have about design, sales and conversions, codify it all, and pass the know-how on to the next generation.\n\nIn addition to the above initiatives, we plan to reduce the number of Nissan LCV platforms from eleven to two. Since we can't produce all our LCVs on two platforms, the others will be carderived vehicles. Two models will be introduced in 2006, both embodying the new direction of the brand. The big breakthroughs, however, will come in 2007 and 2008. LCVs are functional by nature, but we believe they should also be inspiring. Design chief Shiro Nakamura is a guy who knows how to put out exciting products, and we're going to release some that shift the image of an LCV into a higher class.\n\nNissan does face some risks, of course. We have a slew of competitors, and the market is relatively small. That places pressure on margins. However, the biggest potential threat we see in fiscal 2005 is a rise in material costs. To mitigate these various risks, we have to clearly differentiate ourselves from the competition.\n\nThe Alliance is integral to our LCV strategy because we share a common goal with Renault, and that is to be the top LCV group in the world. The benefits of the Alliance include cross badging and sharing parts. We also have a CCT, or cross-company team, with Renault's LCV group, and share information and ideas every month.'\n\nWHO WE ARE", + "recall": 0.9516908212560387, + "true_md": "- • Enhance the value chain. The typical LCV owner keeps a vehicle for seven to ten years, and puts on five times the mileage of a passenger vehicle owner. If you treat LCV owners well, additional opportunities for income such as inspections, aftermarket service, and repeat sales will inevitably follow. \n\n- • Build the learning organization. Prior to Nissan’s turnaround, we did not focus on the LCV market. We need to take the knowledge we now have about design, sales and conversions, codify it all, and pass the know-how on to the next generation. \n\nIn addition to the above initiatives, we plan to reduce the number of Nissan LCV platforms from eleven to two. Since we can’t produce all our LCVs on two platforms, the others will be car- derived vehicles. Two models will be introduced in 2006, both embodying the new direction of the brand. The big breakthroughs, however, will come in 2007 and 2008. LCVs are functional by nature, but we believe they should also be inspiring. Design chief Shiro Nakamura is a guy who knows how to put out exciting products, and we’re going to release some that shift the image of an LCV into a higher class. \n\nNissan does face some risks, of course. We have a slew of competitors, and the market is relatively small. That places pressure on margins. However, the biggest potential threat we see in fiscal 2005 is a rise in material costs. To mitigate these various risks, we have to clearly differentiate ourselves from the competition.\n\nThe Alliance is integral to our LCV strategy because we share a common goal with Renault, and that is to be the top LCV group in the world. The benefits of the Alliance include cross badging and sharing parts. We also have a CCT, or cross-company team, with Renault’s LCV group, and share information and ideas every month.” \n\nWHO WE ARE" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.926525398896897, + "doc_id": "a4cacb745f66c18aeec1ecb78c010f466efab8b35363fe1a29d59a1c31b31522", + "edit_distance": 0.8514531754574811, + "f1_score": 0.9502923976608186, + "meteor": 0.7775392275654158, + "precision": 0.9789156626506024, + "pred_md": "sales (currency futures), in the period or periods in which the hedged transactions affect earnings. The company typically does not hedge its grain purchases beyond 15 months and currency exposure beyond 12 months.\n\nAs of October 30, 2004, the company has included in accumulated other comprehensive loss hedging losses of $2.5 million (net of tax) relating to its futures contracts. The company expects to recognize the majority of these losses over the next six months. Losses in the amount of $6.0 million, before tax, were reclassified into earnings in fiscal 2004.\n\nFair Value Hedge: The company utilizes hog futures to minimize the price risk assumed when forward priced contracts are offered to the company's hog producers. The intent of the program is to make the forward priced hogs cost nearly the same as cash market hogs at the date of delivery.\n\nThe futures contracts are designated and accounted for as fair value hedges, and the company measures the effectiveness of the hedges on a regular basis. The company has determined its hedge program to be highly effective. Changes in the fair value of the futures contracts, along with the gain or loss on the hedged purchase commitment, are marked-to-market through earnings and are recorded on the consolidated statement of financial position as a current asset and liability, respectively.\n\nAs of October 30, 2004, the fair value of the company's open futures contracts included on the consolidated statement of financial position was $(0.7 million). Losses on closed futures contracts in the amount of $0.7 million, before tax, were recognized in earnings during the fiscal year.\n\n## > note K\n\n## Segment Operating Results\n\nThe company develops, processes, and distributes a wide array of food products in a variety of markets. Under the criteria set forth by the accounting standard SFAS No. 131, 'Disclosures about Segments of an Enterprise and Related Information,' the company reports its results in the following five segments: Grocery Products, Refrigerated Foods, Jennie-O Turkey Store, Specialty Foods, and All Other.\n\nThe December 2002 acquisition of Diamond Crystal Brands prompted Hormel Foods management to adjust how it evaluates its business and, as a result, established a new segment for Specialty Foods. The Specialty Foods segment includes the newly acquired Diamond Crystal Brands and Century Foods International operating segments, along with the existing operating segments of Hormel HealthLabs (formerly in the Refrigerated Foods segment) and Specialty Products (formerly in the Grocery Products segment). All prior year segment information has been restated to reflect this change.\n\nThe Grocery Products segment consists primarily of the processing, marketing, and sale of shelf-stable food products sold predominately in the retail market.\n\nThe Refrigerated Foods segment includes the Meat Products and Foodservice business units. The segment consists primarily of the processing, marketing, and sale of branded and unbranded pork products for the retail, foodservice, and fresh customer markets. This segment also includes the Precept Foods operation, which offers fresh, case-ready, branded pork and beef products to its retail customers. The Precept Foods operation is a 50 percent owned joint venture between Hormel Foods Corporation and Excel Corporation, a wholly owned subsidiary of Cargill, Incorporated.\n\nThe Jennie-O Turkey Store segment consists primarily of the processing, marketing, and sale of branded and unbranded turkey products for the retail, foodservice, and fresh customer markets.\n\nThe Specialty Foods segment includes the Diamond Crystal Brands (acquired in December 2002), Century Foods International (acquired in July 2003), Hormel HealthLabs, and Specialty Products operating segments. This segment consists of the packaging and sale of various sugar and sugar substitute products, salt and pepper products, dessert mixes, gelatin products, and private label canned meats to retail and foodservice customers. This segment also includes the processing, marketing, and sale of nutritional food products and supplements to hospitals, nursing homes, and other marketers of nutritional products.\n\nThe All Other segment includes the Dan's Prize, Inc., Vista International Packaging, Inc., and Hormel Foods International operating segments. These businesses produce, market, and sell beef products and food packaging (i.e., casing for dry sausage), and manufacture, market, and sell company products internationally. This segment also includes various miscellaneous corporate sales. Effective June 30, 2004, the company completed the sale of Vista.\n\nIntersegment sales are recorded at prices that approximate cost and are eliminated in the consolidated profit and loss statement. Equity in earnings of affiliates is included in segment profit; however, the company does not allocate investment income, interest expense, and interest income to its segments when measuring performance. The company also retains various other income and unallocated expenses at corporate. These items are included below as 'net interest and investment income' and 'general corporate expense' when reconciling to earnings before income taxes.\n\n2004 Annual Report\n\n45", + "recall": 0.9232954545454546, + "true_md": "sales (currency futures), in the period or periods in which the hedged transactions affect earnings. The company typically does not hedge its grain purchases beyond 15 months and currency exposure beyond 12 months.\n\nThe Grocery Products segment consists primarily of the process- ing, marketing, and sale of shelf-stable food products sold predominately in the retail market.\n\nThe Refrigerated Foods segment includes the Meat Products and Foodservice business units. The segment consists primarily of the processing, marketing, and sale of branded and unbranded pork products for the retail, foodservice, and fresh customer markets. This segment also includes the Precept Foods operation, which offers fresh, case-ready, branded pork and beef products to its retail customers. The Precept Foods operation is a 50 percent owned joint venture between Hormel Foods Corporation and Excel Corporation, a wholly owned subsidiary of Cargill, Incorporated.\n\nAs of October 30, 2004, the company has included in accumu- lated other comprehensive loss hedging losses of $2.5 million (net of tax) relating to its futures contracts. The company expects to recognize the majority of these losses over the next six months. Losses in the amount of $6.0 million, before tax, were reclassified into earnings in fiscal 2004.\n\nFair Value Hedge: The company utilizes hog futures to minimize the price risk assumed when forward priced contracts are offered to the company’s hog producers. The intent of the program is to make the forward priced hogs cost nearly the same as cash mar- ket hogs at the date of delivery.\n\nThe Jennie-O Turkey Store segment consists primarily of the pro- cessing, marketing, and sale of branded and unbranded turkey products for the retail, foodservice, and fresh customer markets.\n\nThe Specialty Foods segment includes the Diamond Crystal Brands (acquired in December 2002), Century Foods International (acquired in July 2003), Hormel HealthLabs, and Specialty Products operat- ing segments. This segment consists of the packaging and sale of various sugar and sugar substitute products, salt and pepper products, dessert mixes, gelatin products, and private label canned meats to retail and foodservice customers. This segment also includes the processing, marketing, and sale of nutritional food products and supplements to hospitals, nursing homes, and other marketers of nutritional products.\n\nThe futures contracts are designated and accounted for as fair value hedges, and the company measures the effectiveness of the hedges on a regular basis. The company has determined its hedge program to be highly effective. Changes in the fair value of the futures contracts, along with the gain or loss on the hedged purchase commitment, are marked-to-market through earnings and are recorded on the consolidated statement of financial posi- tion as a current asset and liability, respectively.\n\nAs of October 30, 2004, the fair value of the company’s open futures contracts included on the consolidated statement of finan- cial position was $(0.7 million). Losses on closed futures contracts in the amount of $0.7 million, before tax, were recognized in earn- ings during the fiscal year.\n\nThe All Other segment includes the Dan’s Prize, Inc., Vista International Packaging, Inc., and Hormel Foods International oper- ating segments. These businesses produce, market, and sell beef products and food packaging (i.e., casing for dry sausage), and manufacture, market, and sell company products internationally. This segment also includes various miscellaneous corporate sales. Effective June 30, 2004, the company completed the sale of Vista.\n\nThe company develops, processes, and distributes a wide array of food products in a variety of markets. Under the criteria set forth by the accounting standard SFAS No. 131, “Disclosures about Segments of an Enterprise and Related Information,” the company reports its results in the following five segments: Grocery Products, Refrigerated Foods, Jennie-O Turkey Store, Specialty Foods, and All Other.\n\nIntersegment sales are recorded at prices that approximate cost and are eliminated in the consolidated profit and loss statement. Equity in earnings of affiliates is included in segment profit; how- ever, the company does not allocate investment income, interest expense, and interest income to its segments when measuring performance. The company also retains various other income and unallocated expenses at corporate. These items are included below as “net interest and investment income” and “general corpo- rate expense” when reconciling to earnings before income taxes.\n\nThe December 2002 acquisition of Diamond Crystal Brands prompted Hormel Foods management to adjust how it evaluates its business and, as a result, established a new segment for Specialty Foods. The Specialty Foods segment includes the newly acquired Diamond Crystal Brands and Century Foods International operating segments, along with the existing operating segments of Hormel HealthLabs (formerly in the Refrigerated Foods segment) and Specialty Products (formerly in the Grocery Products segment). All prior year segment information has been restated to reflect this change.\n\n## Segment Operating Results\n\n## > note K\n\n2004 Annual Report 45" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.951671411182171, + "doc_id": "591779e78814e186024904e0770ade7421d4e9d612bd80215a99f767c598e3b1", + "edit_distance": 0.8808988764044944, + "f1_score": 0.9855072463768116, + "meteor": 0.6972718132249033, + "precision": 0.9878934624697336, + "pred_md": "2\n\nChairman's Review\n\n## DELIVERING ON THE STRATEGY\n\nDear Shareholder,\n\nI am pleased to report that in 2004 Santos continued to deliver on its strategy to transform the Company into a truly international exploration and production business with world-class operations.\n\nWhile the year saw many positives in terms of development and exploration success, it did not get off to a good start with the incident on New Year's Day at the Moomba processing facility in central Australia.\n\nImportantly, Santos was able to work effectively with its key stakeholders, including customers, joint venturers and government departments, to minimise the commercial impacts.\n\nNatural gas supplies were quickly restored, in part by recovering processed gas from underground storage reservoirs. Liquids processing facilities were progressively reinstated allowing further increases to gas production and sales volumes, with the ramp-up to full liquids production achieved by August as planned.\n\nA large proportion of the costs and foregone revenues associated with the repair of the damaged plant and the reduced oil and gas production volumes are being recovered under insurance policies.\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\nDue to the long cycle times inherent in the oil and gas business, it had been recognised that 2004 would be a year in which production was marginally below the previous year, with subsequent increases in 2005 and beyond driven by new development projects.\n\nIn this light, it is pleasing to report that the Minerva gas and Bayu-Undan liquids projects commenced production during the year as planned, while first oil from Mutineer-Exeter and several other key growth projects are progressing to plan.\n\nIndonesia matured into a core area during 2004, through a strategy of prudent acquisition, portfolio management and exploration. In particular, the Jeruk discovery has the potential to add significant value, with further evaluation activities underway.\n\nEven with the large effort expended on the Moomba incident, Santos was able to deliver strong results for 2004, reflecting higher average prices across most products.\n\nGroup sales revenue increased by 2.5% to a record $1,501 million, earnings before interest and tax improved by 23% to $574 million and net profit after tax rose by 16% to $380 million.\n\nThis strong financial performance, combined with the confidence that Santos will continue to grow earnings in the future, enabled the Board to increase the final dividend on ordinary shares by 20% from 15 cents to 18 cents per share, fully franked. For the full year, dividends increased by 10% to 33 cents per share, compared with 30 cents per share\n\nin each of the four previous years. On a grossed up basis, this represents a yield of over 5%.\n\nIn response to increasing interest and enquiry from shareholders, the Dividend Reinvestment Plan has been reintroduced and applied to the final dividend paid during March 2005.\n\nSantos continued its proactive approach to capital management with the redemption and buyback of the outstanding Preference Shares and the issue of FUELS (Franked Unsecured Equity Listed Securities). This initiative was driven by the alignment of Australian accounting standards with international requirements, and closed oversubscribed, raising $600 million in new equity.\n\nThe total shareholder return for the year, including share price appreciation and dividends paid, was 28% - an excellent result.\n\nIn addition to our focus on shareholder value, Santos takes its corporate social responsibilities seriously and is committed to sustainability as a core value in all operations. The Company's first Sustainability Review was released during the year.\n\nSantos continues to be recognised for the high quality of its corporate governance, receiving a measure of five out of five for corporate governance for the third successive year in an independent report prepared by leading accounting and management firm, Horwath, and the University of Newcastle.\n\nThe safety of our employees and contractors is the highest priority for the Board and I'm pleased that Santos has delivered another\n\nyear of safety improvement with an 11% reduction in the 2004 total recordable case frequency rate.\n\nMr Frank Conroy retired from the Board of Directors during December 2004. A member of the Board for five years, Mr Conroy brought extensive business and corporate experience to the Board and I thank him for his outstanding contribution.\n\nIn February 2005 we appointed two new Board members, Mr Kenneth Dean from Shell, and Mr Christopher Recny from the international management consultancy firm, L.E.K. These individuals further strengthen the composition of the Board, bringing strong international oil and gas expertise and outstanding management experience.\n\nFinally, I'd like to acknowledge the extraordinary effort made by everyone at Santos to keep the Company moving forward during this challenging year.\n\nI am confident that the significant achievements made during 2004 provide Santos with a solid platform from which to achieve future growth with increased value for our shareholders.\n\nStephen Gerlach\n\nChairman\n\n21 March 2005", + "recall": 0.983132530120482, + "true_md": "## DELIVERING ON THE STRA TEGY\n\nDue to the long cycle times inherent in the oil and gas business, it had been recognised that 2004 would be a year in which production was marginally below the previous year, with subsequent increases in 2005 and beyond driven by new development projects. \n\nin each of the four previous years. On a grossed up basis, this represents a yield of over 5%.\n\nyear of safety improvement with an 11% reduction in the 2004 total recordable case frequency rate.\n\nMr Frank Conroy retired from the Board of Directors during December 2004. A member of the Board for five years, Mr Conroy brought extensive business and corporate experience to the Board and I thank him for his outstanding contribution.\n\nIn response to increasing interest and enquiry from shareholders, the Dividend Reinvestment Plan has been reintroduced and applied to the final dividend paid during March 2005.\n\nSantos continued its proactive approach to capital management with the redemption and buyback of the outstanding Preference Shares and the issue of FUELS (Franked Unsecured Equity Listed Securities). This initiative was driven by the alignment of Australian accounting standards with international requirements, and closed oversubscribed, raising $600 million in new equity.\n\nIn February 2005 we appointed two new Board members, Mr Kenneth Dean from Shell, and Mr Christopher Recny from the international management consultancy firm, L.E.K. These individuals further strengthen the composition of the Board, bringing strong international oil and gas expertise and outstanding management experience.\n\nIn this light, it is pleasing to report that the Minerva gas and Bayu-Undan liquids projects commenced production during the year as planned, while first oil from Mutineer-Exeter and several other key growth projects are progressing to plan.\n\nIndonesia matured into a core area during 2004, through a strategy of prudent acquisition, portfolio management and exploration. In particular, the Jeruk discovery has the potential to add significant value, with further evaluation activities underway.\n\nThe total shareholder return for the year, including share price appreciation and dividends paid, was 28% – an excellent result.\n\nFinally, I’d like to acknowledge the extraordinary effort made by everyone at Santos to keep the Company moving forward during this challenging year.\n\nI am confident that the significant achievements made during 2004 provide Santos with a solid platform from which to achieve future growth with increased value for our shareholders.\n\nIn addition to our focus on shareholder value, Santos takes its corporate social responsibilities seriously and is committed to sustainability as a core value in all operations. The Company’s first Sustainability Review was released during the year.\n\nSantos continues to be recognised for the high quality of its corporate governance, receiving a measure of five out of five for corporate governance for the third successive year in an independent report prepared by leading accounting and management firm, Horwath, and the University of Newcastle.\n\nThe safety of our employees and contractors is the highest priority for the Board and I’m pleased that Santos has delivered another\n\nThis strong financial performance, combined with the confidence that Santos will continue to grow earnings in the future, enabled the Board to increase the final dividend on ordinary shares by 20% from 15 cents to 18 cents per share, fully franked. For the full year, dividends increased by 10% to 33 cents per share, compared with 30 cents per share\n\nA large proportion of the costs and foregone revenues associated with the repair of the damaged plant and the reduced oil and gas production volumes are being recovered under insurance policies.\n\nNatural gas supplies were quickly restored, in part by recovering processed gas from underground storage reservoirs. Liquids processing facilities were progressively reinstated allowing further increases to gas production and sales volumes, with the ramp-up to full liquids production achieved by August as planned.\n\nGroup sales revenue increased by 2.5% to a record $1,501 million, earnings before interest and tax improved by 23% to $574 million and net profit after tax rose by 16% to $380 million.\n\nEven with the large effort expended on the Moomba incident, Santos was able to deliver strong results for 2004, reflecting higher average prices across most products.\n\nImportantly, Santos was able to work effectively with its key stakeholders, including customers, joint venturers and government departments, to minimise the commercial impacts.\n\nWhile the year saw many positives in terms of development and exploration success, it did not get off to a good start with the incident on New Year’s Day at the Moomba processing facility in central Australia. \n\nI am pleased to report that in 2004 Santos continued to deliver on its strategy to transform the Company into a truly international exploration and production business with world-class operations.\n\n## Dear Shareholder,\n\nStephen Gerlach Chairman 21 March 2005\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\n2\n\n## Chairman’s Review" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9528814215618243, + "doc_id": "ce56fac24dba5f274c550c450ae8cd16879bb63060d3aa7972b83331932a8359", + "edit_distance": 0.8282097649186256, + "f1_score": 0.9725829725829725, + "meteor": 0.7049408286115182, + "precision": 0.9882697947214076, + "pred_md": "## Fiscal Years 2003 and 2002\n\nThe first half of fiscal 2003 provided many of the same challenges the company faced in fiscal 2002, of which the most significant was an oversupply of protein inventory in the marketplace. This market condition created significant pricing pressure on the company's turkey and pork businesses, impacting the Jennie-O Turkey Store and Refrigerated Foods segments, respectively. The oversupply subsided in the second half of fiscal 2003, greatly improving margins within these segments. However, as protein supplies in the second half of fiscal 2003 decreased, pork and beef raw material costs significantly increased, resulting in lower than expected margins within the company's Grocery Products' portfolio. The company continuously adapts to these changing livestock supply conditions. In addition, the company is constantly adapting to changes in consumer preferences, primarily through enhancement of its value-added portfolio of products.\n\n## Consolidated Results\n\nNet Earnings: Net earnings for the fourth quarter of fiscal 2003 were $70,365, an increase of 3.5 percent compared to earnings of $67,970 for the same period in fiscal 2002. Diluted earnings per share were $.50 compared to $.49 for the same period in 2002. The fourth quarter of fiscal 2003 includes an expense of $.01 per share relating to the company's adoption of the fair value method of recording stock option expense contained in SFAS No. 123. The company transitioned to fair value stock option accounting using the prospective method described in SFAS No. 148. All stock options granted in fiscal 2003 and thereafter, will be expensed over the vesting period of the options, generally four years, based on the fair value at the date the options are granted.\n\nNet earnings for the year decreased 1.9 percent to $185,779 from $189,322 in fiscal 2002. Diluted earnings per share for the same period decreased to $1.33 from $1.35 in 2002.\n\nSales: Net sales for the fourth quarter increased to $1,169,881 from $1,038,895 in 2002, an increase of 12.6 percent. Net sales for the twelve months in fiscal 2003 increased 7.4 percent to $4,200,328 compared to $3,910,314 in 2002. Net sales for the fourth quarter and twelve months of fiscal 2003 were impacted by the Diamond Crystal Brands (DCB) and Century Foods International (CFI) acquisitions, which occurred in December 2002 and July 2003, respectively.\n\nTonnage volume for the fourth quarter increased 3.3 percent to 906,183 from 877,469 in fiscal 2002. Tonnage volume for the year increased 2.6 percent to 3,400,265 from 3,313,010 in 2002. Tonnage volume for the fourth quarter and twelve months of fiscal 2003 were impacted by the DCB and CFl acquisitions.\n\nIncreased volume resulting from the acquisitions of DCB and CFI more than offset the lost tonnage resulting from the discontinuance of hog processing at the company's Rochelle, Illinois, facility. The percentage increase in sales dollars exceeded tonnage gains for the fourth quarter and year primarily as a result of easing pricing\n\npressures in the protein market, allowing the company to raise prices during the second half of the year as industry supplies returned to more normal levels. Also contributing to this trend was the company's continued success in growing its value-added product lines, while lessening its percentage of commodity items.\n\nGross Profit: Gross profits were $295,353 and $1,013,153 for the fourth quarter and year, respectively, compared to $265,734 and $962,853 in fiscal 2002. As a percent of net sales, gross profit decreased to 25.2 and 24.1 percent for the fourth quarter and year, respectively, compared to 25.6 and 24.6 percent in fiscal 2002. Overshadowing the successes in many of the company's branded products lines were the challenges relating to the oversupply of commodity turkey meat in the marketplace. The turkey market strengthened significantly in the fourth quarter of fiscal 2003 after a very challenging first nine months; however, fourth quarter market conditions remained below those of 2002. Higher retiree medical costs also contributed to lower gross margins.\n\nSelling and Delivery: Selling and delivery expenses for the fourth quarter and year were $144,083 and $583,964, respectively, compared to $133,352 and $558,354 in fiscal 2002. As a percent of net sales, selling and delivery expenses decreased to 12.3 and 13.9 percent for the quarter and year, respectively, compared to 12.8 and 14.3 percent in 2002. The increase in selling and delivery expenses over the prior year is primarily due to fiscal 2003 acquisitions. Marketing expenses increased $2,809 and decreased $4,226 for the fourth quarter and year, respectively, compared to fiscal 2002. The twelve month decrease in spending reflects adjustments the company made earlier in fiscal 2003 as Jennie-O Turkey Store and Refrigerated Foods dealt with the difficult protein markets. Impacting the percentages of selling and delivery expense, primarily in the fourth quarter, was a significant rebound in pork prices over the prior year, creating lower expenses as a percent of net sales.\n\nAdministrative and General: Administrative and general expenses were $35,182 and $124,665 for the fourth quarter and year, respectively, compared to $24,421 and $93,990 in fiscal 2002. As a percent of net sales, administrative and general expenses for the quarter and year were 3.0 percent compared to 2.4 for the quarter and year in fiscal 2002. The increased expenses primarily resulted from higher pension costs of $3,200 and $12,800, bad debt expense of $811 and $5,052 relating to the Fleming Companies' bankruptcy, and higher amortization of intangibles of $1,576 and $3,542, for the fourth quarter and year, respectively. Administrative and general expenses also increased in the fourth quarter and year due to $1,887 of stock option expense in the fourth quarter.\n\nResearch and development expenses for the fourth quarter and year increased to $3,460 and $13,165, respectively, from $3,021 and $12,097 in fiscal 2002. The fiscal 2003 acquisitions generated\n\n2004 Annual Report\n\n23", + "recall": 0.9573863636363636, + "true_md": "## Fiscal Years 2003 and 2002\n\n## Consolidated Results\n\npressures in the protein market, allowing the company to raise prices during the second half of the year as industry supplies returned to more normal levels. Also contributing to this trend was the company’s continued success in growing its value-added product lines, while lessening its percentage of commodity items. \n\nGross Profit: Gross profits were $295,353 and $1,013,153 for the fourth quarter and year, respectively, compared to $265,734 and $962,853 in fiscal 2002. As a percent of net sales, gross profit decreased to 25.2 and 24.1 percent for the fourth quarter and year, respectively, compared to 25.6 and 24.6 percent in fiscal 2002. Overshadowing the successes in many of the com- pany’s branded products lines were the challenges relating to the oversupply of commodity turkey meat in the marketplace. The turkey market strengthened significantly in the fourth quarter of fis- cal 2003 after a very challenging first nine months; however, fourth quarter market conditions remained below those of 2002. Higher retiree medical costs also contributed to lower gross margins.\n\nThe first half of fiscal 2003 provided many of the same challenges the company faced in fiscal 2002, of which the most significant was an oversupply of protein inventory in the marketplace. This market condition created significant pricing pressure on the com- pany’s turkey and pork businesses, impacting the Jennie-O Turkey Store and Refrigerated Foods segments, respectively. The over- supply subsided in the second half of fiscal 2003, greatly improv- ing margins within these segments. However, as protein supplies in the second half of fiscal 2003 decreased, pork and beef raw material costs significantly increased, resulting in lower than expected margins within the company’s Grocery Products’ portfo- lio. The company continuously adapts to these changing livestock supply conditions. In addition, the company is constantly adapting to changes in consumer preferences, primarily through enhance- ment of its value-added portfolio of products. \n\nSelling and Delivery: Selling and delivery expenses for the fourth quarter and year were $144,083 and $583,964, respectively, compared to $133,352 and $558,354 in fiscal 2002. As a percent of net sales, selling and delivery expenses decreased to 12.3 and 13.9 percent for the quarter and year, respectively, compared to 12.8 and 14.3 percent in 2002. The increase in selling and deliv- ery expenses over the prior year is primarily due to fiscal 2003 acquisitions. Marketing expenses increased $2,809 and decreased $4,226 for the fourth quarter and year, respectively, compared to fiscal 2002. The twelve month decrease in spending reflects adjustments the company made earlier in fiscal 2003 as Jennie-O Turkey Store and Refrigerated Foods dealt with the difficult protein markets. Impacting the percentages of selling and delivery expense, primarily in the fourth quarter, was a significant rebound in pork prices over the prior year, creating lower expenses as a percent of net sales. \n\nNet Earnings: Net earnings for the fourth quarter of fiscal 2003 were $70,365, an increase of 3.5 percent compared to earnings of $67,970 for the same period in fiscal 2002. Diluted earnings per share were $.50 compared to $.49 for the same period in 2002. The fourth quarter of fiscal 2003 includes an expense of $.01 per share relating to the company’s adoption of the fair value method of recording stock option expense contained in SFAS No. 123. The company transitioned to fair value stock option accounting using the prospective method described in SFAS No. 148. All stock options granted in fiscal 2003 and thereafter, will be expensed over the vesting period of the options, generally four years, based on the fair value at the date the options are granted.\n\nNet earnings for the year decreased 1.9 percent to $185,779 from $189,322 in fiscal 2002. Diluted earnings per share for the same period decreased to $1.33 from $1.35 in 2002. \n\nSales: Net sales for the fourth quarter increased to $1,169,881 from $1,038,895 in 2002, an increase of 12.6 percent. Net sales for the twelve months in fiscal 2003 increased 7.4 percent to $4,200,328 compared to $3,910,314 in 2002. Net sales for the fourth quarter and twelve months of fiscal 2003 were impacted by the Diamond Crystal Brands (DCB) and Century Foods International (CFI) acquisitions, which occurred in December 2002 and July 2003, respectively.\n\nAdministrative and General: Administrative and general expenses were $35,182 and $124,665 for the fourth quarter and year, respectively, compared to $24,421 and $93,990 in fiscal 2002. As a percent of net sales, administrative and general expenses for the quarter and year were 3.0 percent compared to 2.4 for the quarter and year in fiscal 2002. The increased expenses primarily resulted from higher pension costs of $3,200 and $12,800, bad debt expense of $811 and $5,052 relating to the Fleming Companies’ bankruptcy, and higher amortization of intangibles of $1,576 and $3,542, for the fourth quarter and year, respectively. Administrative and general expenses also increased in the fourth quarter and year due to $1,887 of stock option expense in the fourth quarter. \n\nResearch and development expenses for the fourth quarter and year increased to $3,460 and $13,165, respectively, from $3,021 and $12,097 in fiscal 2002. The fiscal 2003 acquisitions generated\n\nTonnage volume for the fourth quarter increased 3.3 percent to 906,183 from 877,469 in fiscal 2002. Tonnage volume for the year increased 2.6 percent to 3,400,265 from 3,313,010 in 2002. Tonnage volume for the fourth quarter and twelve months of fiscal 2003 were impacted by the DCB and CFl acquisitions.\n\nIncreased volume resulting from the acquisitions of DCB and CFI more than offset the lost tonnage resulting from the discontinuance of hog processing at the company’s Rochelle, Illinois, facility. The percentage increase in sales dollars exceeded tonnage gains for the fourth quarter and year primarily as a result of easing pricing\n\n2004 Annual Report 23" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9685779030233582, + "doc_id": "e95d4e310a7efbabc349baf5c3fba803d249a0a925799f220766bc6fe93512fe", + "edit_distance": 0.028639618138424822, + "f1_score": 0.9897750511247443, + "meteor": 0.9852401679849644, + "precision": 0.9877551020408163, + "pred_md": "1 6\n\nThe results of segment operations expenses for the years ended December 31, 2000 and 1999 are discussed more fully in the Segment Results of Operations section below.\n\n## Segment Results of Operations for the Years Ended December 31, 2000 and 1999\n\n## Comparison of Operation Results for the Years Ended December 31, 2000 and 1999\n\nNetwork Services Segment\n\nRevenues Total segment revenues increased by $10.4 million or 39% to $36.9 million for the year ended December 31, 2000 from $26.5 million for the year ended December 31, 1999. The increase in revenues is due primarily to the significant increase in transaction volume and an incre a s e in the number of ATMs operated by the Company during these periods. The Company had 2,283 ATMs installed as of December 31, 1999 and p rocessed 32.9 million transactions for the year ended December 31, 1999. As of December 31, 2000, the Company's owned and operated AT M network increased by 351 ATMs, or 15%, to a total of 2,634 ATMs, of which 72% are owned by the Company and 28% are owned by banks or other financial institutions but operated by the Company through management agreements. The Company processed 52.7 million transactions for\n\nthe year ended December 31, 2000, an increase of 19.8 million transactions, or 60%, over the year ended December 31, 1999.\n\nRevenues for the Central European Sub-segment totaled $18.6 million for the year ended December 31, 2000 as compared to $12.7 million for the year ended December 31, 1999, an increase of 47%. The increase in revenues is largely the result of an increase in the number of ATMs operated by the Company from 1,203 at December 31, 1999 to 1,391 at December 31, 2000, and incre a s e d transaction volumes.\n\nRevenues for the We s t e rn European Sub-segment totaled $16.6 million for the year ended December 31, 2000 as compared to $12.6 million for the year ended December 31, 1999, an increase of 31%. The increase in revenues is largely the result of an increase in the number of ATMs operated by the Company from 621 at December 31, 1999 to 787 at December 31, 2000, and increased transaction volumes.\n\nRevenues for the Other ATM Operations Sub-segment were $1.7 million for the year ended December 31, 2000 as compared to $1.2 million for the year ended December 31, 1999, an incre a s e\n\nof 41%. The revenues from this segment are the result of the acquisition of the Dash network located in the United States in August 1999.\n\nOf total segment revenue, approximately 87% is attributable to those ATMs owned by the Company for the year ended December 31, 2000 and 94% for the year ended December 31, 1999. Of total transactions processed, approximately 78% is attributable to those ATMs owned by the Company for the year ended December 31, 2000 and 76% for the year ended December 31, 1999. The Company believes the shift from a larg e l y p ro y , Euronet Worldwide owned ATM network to a more balanced mix between pro p r i e t a ry ATMs and customer-owned ATMs is a positive prietar development and will provide higher marginal re t u rns on investments.\n\nTransaction fees charged by the Company vary for the three types of ATM transactions that are currently processed on the Company's ATMs: cash withdrawals, balance inquiries and transactions not completed because the relevant card issuer does not give authorization. Transaction fees for cash withdrawals vary from market to market but generally range from $0.60 to $1.75 per transaction while transaction fees for the other two types of transactions are generally substantially less. Transaction fees payable under the electronic re c h a rge solutions sold by the Company are included in Network Services Segment revenues and vary substantially from market to market and based upon the specific prepaid solution and the denomination of prepaid hours purchased. Generally the range of transaction fees vary from $1.10 to $1.80 per prepaid mobile re c h a rg e p u chase. r\n\nOperating Expenses Total segment operating expenses increased to $43.0 million for the year ended December 31, 2000 from $39.4 million for the year ended December 31, 1999. The increases are due primarily to costs associated with the growth in the numbers of ATMs and expansion of the Company's operations during the period.", + "recall": 0.9918032786885246, + "true_md": "The results of segment operations expenses for the years ended December 31, 2000 and 1999 are discussed more fully in the Segment Results of Operations section below.\n\nSegment Results of Operations for the Years Ended December 31, 2000 and 1999\n\n## Comparison of Operation Results for the Years Ended December 31, 2000 and 1999\n\n## Network Services Segment\n\nRevenues Total segment revenues increased by $10.4 million or 39% to $36.9 million for the year ended December 31, 2000 from $26.5 million for the year ended December 31, 1999. The increase in revenues is due primarily to the significant increase in transaction volume and an incre a s e in the number of ATMs operated by the Company during these periods. The Company had 2,283 ATMs installed as of December 31, 1999 and p rocessed 32.9 million transactions for the year ended December 31, 1999. As of December 31, 2000, the Company’s owned and operated AT M network increased by 351 ATMs, or 15%, to a total of 2,634 ATMs, of which 72% are owned by the Company and 28% are owned by banks or other financial institutions but operated by the Company through management agreements. The Company processed 52.7 million transactions for\n\nthe year ended December 31, 2000, an increase of 19.8 million transactions, or 60%, over the year ended December 31, 1999. \n\nRevenues for the Central European Sub-segment totaled $18.6 million for the year ended December 31, 2000 as compared to $12.7 million for the year ended December 31, 1999, an increase of 47%. The increase in revenues is largely the result of an increase in the number of ATMs operated by the Company from 1,203 at December 31, 1999 to 1,391 at December 31, 2000, and incre a s e d transaction volumes. \n\nRevenues for the We s t e rn European Sub-segment totaled $16.6 million for the year ended December 31, 2000 as compared to $12.6 million for the year ended December 31, 1999, an increase of 31%. The increase in revenues is largely the result of an increase in the number of ATMs operated by the Company from 621 at December 31, 1999 to 787 at December 31, 2000, and increased transaction volumes. \n\nRevenues for the Other ATM Operations Sub-segment were $1.7 million for the year ended December 31, 2000 as compared to $1.2 million for the year ended December 31, 1999, an incre a s e\n\nof 41%. The revenues from this segment are the result of the acquisition of the Dash network located in the United States in August 1999. \n\nOf total segment revenue, approximately 87% is attributable to those ATMs owned by the Company for the year ended December 31, 2000 and 94% for the year ended December 31, 1999. Of total transactions processed, approximately 78% is attributable to those ATMs owned by the Company for the year ended December 31, 2000 and 76% for the year ended December 31, 1999. The Company believes the shift from a larg e l y p ro p r i e t a ry, Euronet Worldwide owned ATM network to a more balanced mix between pro p r i e t a ry ATMs and customer-owned ATMs is a positive development and will provide higher marginal re t u rns on investments. \n\nTransaction fees charged by the Company vary for the three types of ATM transactions that are currently processed on the Company’s ATMs: cash withdrawals, balance inquiries and transactions not completed because the relevant card issuer does not give authorization. Transaction fees for cash withdrawals vary from market to market but generally range from $0.60 to $1.75 per transaction while transaction fees for the other two types of transactions are generally substantially less. Transaction fees payable under the electronic re c h a rge solutions sold by the Company are included in Network Services Segment revenues and vary substantially from market to market and based upon the specific prepaid solution and the denomination of prepaid hours purchased. Generally the range of transaction fees vary from $1.10 to $1.80 per prepaid mobile re c h a rg e p u rchase. \n\nOperating Expenses Total segment operating expenses increased to $43.0 million for the year ended December 31, 2000 from $39.4 million for the year ended December 31, 1999. The increases are due primarily to costs associated with the growth in the numbers of ATMs and expansion of the Company’s operations during the period. \n\n1 6" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9444214219928646, + "doc_id": "3c6e56a5754835e47f8aec03d4df7447d4081dfeceeda11d6e0bbf6e639591d5", + "edit_distance": 0.06865671641791045, + "f1_score": 0.9913043478260871, + "meteor": 0.9843631133670007, + "precision": 0.9941860465116279, + "pred_md": "FINANCIAL SECTION\n\n86\n\nThe following is a summary of the transferred assets and liabilities, the relevant selling prices and the net cash inflows from sales of stock of Rhythm Corporation and two other companies in the year ended March 31, 2003.\n\n## 16. LEASE TRANSACTIONS\n\n## a) Lessees' accounting\n\nFuture minimum lease payments subsequent to March 31, 2005 on noncancelable operating leases are summarized as follows:\n\n## b) Lessors' accounting\n\nFuture minimum lease income subsequent to March 31, 2005 for noncancelable operating leases is summarized as follows:\n\nSee Note 2(c) for the change in the method of accounting for noncancelable lease transactions which transfer substantially all risks and rewards associated with the ownership of assets.\n\n## 17. COMMITMENTS AND CONTINGENCIES\n\nAt March 31, 2005, the Company and its consolidated subsidiaries had the following contingent liabilities:\n\nIn addition to the above, at March 31, 2005, the Company was committed to provide guarantees of indebtedness of unconsolidated subsidiaries and affiliates in the aggregate amount of ¥2,712 million ($25,346 thousand) at the request of the lending banks. The outstanding balance of installment receivables sold with recourse amounted to ¥20,687 million ($193,336 thousand) at March 31, 2005.\n\nCertain consolidated subsidiaries have entered into overdraft and loan commitment agreements amounting to ¥107,247 million ($1,002,308 thousand) with their customers and others. The loans receivable outstanding and the unused balances under these credit facilities as of March 31, 2005 amounted to ¥12,094 million ($113,028 thousand) and ¥95,153 million ($889,280 thousand), respectively. Since many of these facilities expire without being utilized and the related borrowings are sometimes subject to a review of the borrowers' credibility, any unused amount will not necessarily be utilized at the full amount.\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004", + "recall": 0.9884393063583815, + "true_md": "The following is a summary of the transferred assets and liabilities, the relevant selling prices and the net cash inflows from sales of stock of Rhythm Corporation and two other companies in the year ended March 31, 2003.\n\n## 16. LEASE TRANSACTIONS\n\n- a) Lessees’ accounting\n\n- b) Lessors’ accounting\n\nFuture minimum lease payments subsequent to March 31, 2005 on noncancelable operating leases are summarized as follows:\n\nFuture minimum lease income subsequent to March 31, 2005 for noncancelable operating leases is summarized as follows:\n\nSee Note 2(c) for the change in the method of accounting for noncancelable lease transactions which transfer substantially all risks and rewards associated with the ownership of assets.\n\n## 17. COMMITMENTS AND CONTINGENCIES\n\nAt March 31, 2005, the Company and its consolidated subsidiaries had the following contingent liabilities:\n\nIn addition to the above, at March 31, 2005, the Company was committed to provide guarantees of indebtedness of unconsolidated subsidiaries and affiliates in the aggregate amount of ¥2,712 million ($25,346 thousand) at the request of the lending banks. The outstanding balance of installment receivables sold with recourse amounted to ¥20,687 million ($193,336 thousand) at March 31, 2005. Certain consolidated subsidiaries have entered into overdraft and loan commitment agreements amounting to ¥107,247 million ($1,002,308 thousand) with their customers and others. The loans receivable outstanding and the unused balances under these credit facilities as of March 31, 2005 amounted to ¥12,094 million ($113,028 thousand) and ¥95,153 million ($889,280 thousand), respectively. Since many of these facilities expire without being utilized and the related borrowings are sometimes subject to a review of the borrowers’ credibility, any unused amount will not necessarily be utilized at the full amount.\n\nFINANCIAL SECTION\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 86" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9162108445630274, + "doc_id": "f6837cb3de7ee41c19ed2aef79b9fa475cdfd7871a0e794ef08ad3623cd5c9d4", + "edit_distance": 0.0410958904109589, + "f1_score": 0.9559748427672956, + "meteor": 0.9664960216994823, + "precision": 0.987012987012987, + "pred_md": "Partly paid shares outstanding issued under the Santos Executive Share Plan; options outstanding issued under the Santos Executive Share Option Plan; and reset convertible preference shares have been classified as potential ordinary shares and included in the calculation of diluted earnings per share. The number of shares included in the calculation are those assumed to be issued for no consideration, being the difference between the number that would have been issued at the exercise price and the number that would have been issued at the average market price.\n\nDuring the year, 715,000 (2003: 1,250,000) options and 50,000 (2003: 35,750) partly paid shares were converted to ordinary shares.\n\n6,000,000 redeemable convertible preference shares were not dilutive and were excluded from the calculation of diluted earnings per share.\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\n69", + "recall": 0.926829268292683, + "true_md": "Partly paid shares outstanding issued under the Santos Executive Shar Plan; options outstanding issued under the Santos Executive Share Option Plan; and reset convertible preference shares have been classified as potenti al ordinary shares and included in the calculation of diluted earnings per share. The number of shares included in the calculation are those assumed to be issued for no consideration, being the difference between the number that would have been issued at the exercise price and the number that would have been issued at the average market price.\n\nDuring the year, 715,000 (2003: 1,250,000) options an 50,000 (2003: 35,750) partly paid shares were converted to ordinary shares.\n\n6,000,000 redeemable convertible preference shares were not dilutive and wer e excluded from the calculation of diluted earnings per share.\n\nAnnual Report 2004 69" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8408529359691682, + "doc_id": "56ea50ddee03cabaa11c96976ed628e8a0dd8f1bb75f99a0a216500c9799f555", + "edit_distance": 0.29971988795518206, + "f1_score": 0.919908466819222, + "meteor": 0.8786993356652637, + "precision": 0.95260663507109, + "pred_md": "streamlined product-development process maximizes speed-to-market so agents have the right products to sell at the right time. That's one reason why we estimate The Hartford's small-business insurance growth is five to six times the industry average.\n\nDeveloping products for a changing business environment is also a proven skill of HFP . The unit completed its first full year as part of The Hartford after our 2000 acquisition of Reliance Group Holdings, Inc.'s financial products and excess and surplus lines.\n\nIt was quite a year after quite a decade. Demand for HFP's mainstay directors and officers liability\n\ninsurance was high during the 1990s as the number of U.S. public corporations tripled. Amid the past year's corporate retrenchment, loss activity led to industrywide premium price increases of up to 30 percent. A flight to quality was inevitable under such conditions, and a strong brand and superior ratings helped HFP distance itself from lesser competitors. Even the horrific collapse of its World Trade Center headquarters couldn't hold HFP back in 2001. It renewed $43 million worth of business in September alone, fulfilling its commitment to protecting customers against uncertainty.\n\n- /H17076 A strong brand and superior ratings help Hartford Financial Products (HFP) differentiate its directors and officers liability insurance from those of competitors. HFP's Boston Regional Manager Doreen Lukowski-Rizza\n\nworks with HFP Underwriting Manager David Garrison, far right, and financial professionals such as William Gallagher Associates President and CEO Philip Edmundson, second from left, and Principal Richard Leavitt.\n\n- /H17073 H artford Investment Management Co., which specializes in fixedincome asset management, has nearly $75 billion under management. Marcie Hayden, money market trader, and Peter Perrotti, government portfolio manager, are two members of a professional organization whose annual trading volume exceeds $50 billion.\n\n19", + "recall": 0.8893805309734514, + "true_md": "streamlined product-development process maximizes speed-to-market so agents have the right products to sell at the right time. That’s one reason why we esti- mate The Hartford’s small-business insurance growth is five to six times the industry average. \n\nDeveloping products for a changing business environment is also a proven skill of HFP. The unit com- pleted its first full year as part of The Hartford after our 2000 acquisition of Reliance Group Holdings, Inc.’s financial products and excess and surplus lines.\n\nIt was quite a year after quite a decade. Demand for HFP’s mainstay directors and officers liability \n\ninsurance was high during the 1990s as the number of U.S. public corporations tripled. Amid the past year’s corporate retrenchment, loss activity led to industry- wide premium price increases of up to 30 percent. A flight to quality was inevitable under such conditions, and a strong brand and superior ratings helped HFP dis- tance itself from lesser competitors. Even the horrific collapse of its World Trade Center headquarters couldn’t hold HFP back in 2001. It renewed $43 million worth of business in September alone, fulfilling its commitment to protecting customers against uncertainty.\n\nworks with HFP Underwriting Manager David Garrison, far right, and financial professionals such as William Gallagher Associates President and CEO Philip Edmundson, second from left, and Principal Richard Leavitt.\n\n- GLYPH<H17076> A strong brand and superior ratings help Hartford Financial Products (HFP) differentiate its directors and officers liability insurance from those of competi- tors. HFP’s Boston Regional Manager Doreen Lukowski-Rizza\n\n- GLYPH<H17073> H artford Investment Management Co., which specializes in fixed- income asset management, has nearly $75 billion under manage- ment. Marcie Hayden, money market trader, and Peter Perrotti, government portfolio manager, are two members of a professional organization whose annual trading volume exceeds $50 billion.\n\n19" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8117192858348441, + "doc_id": "1a147d6398eb81994deee46f6a998187164c9000f374de72d851d73836b57586", + "edit_distance": 0.17435897435897435, + "f1_score": 0.9098360655737706, + "meteor": 0.8345293448456828, + "precision": 0.940677966101695, + "pred_md": "- /H17073 T he Hartford's acquisition of Fortis Financial Group in 2001 enhanced the company's market share and distribution advantage. Most importantly, the acquisition brought into The Hartford's family powerful sales professionals like Allen Chinoy of Darien, Ill., left, the nation's fifthleading producer of The Hartford's variable universal life insurance. Chinoy is a vocal supporter of Hartford Investor, which makes it easier for him to show customers such as Dr. Dilip Patel how his portfolio is performing.\n- /H17075 J oe Smith, right, and Kim Connolly, left, are a brother-sister team heading Smith Brothers Insurance, Inc. of Glastonbury, Conn. These VIP agents are enthusiastic users of The Hartford's Electronic Business Center (EBC) and other technological tools for propertycasualty agents. They piloted the EBC and have given valuable feedback to Senior Commercial Underwriter Tracey Kamenash and others at The Hartford to help develop the EBC standards and navigational model.\n\n22", + "recall": 0.8809523809523809, + "true_md": "GLYPH<H17073> T he Hartford’s acquisition of Fortis Financial Group in 2001 enhanced the company’s market share and distribution advantage. Most impor- tantly, the acquisition brought into The Hartford’s family powerful sales professionals like Allen Chinoy of Darien, Ill., left, the nation’s fifth- leading producer of The Hartford’s variable universal life insurance. Chinoy is a vocal supporter of Hartford Investor, which makes it easier for him to show customers such as Dr. Dilip Patel how his portfolio is performing. \n\nGLYPH<H17075> J oe Smith, right, and Kim Connolly, left, are a brother-sister team heading Smith Brothers Insurance, Inc. of Glastonbury, Conn. These VIP agents are enthusiastic users of The Hartford’s Electronic Business Center (EBC) and other technological tools for property- casualty agents. They piloted the EBC and have given valuable feedback to Senior Commercial Underwriter Tracey Kamenash and others at The Hartford to help develop the EBC standards and navigational model.\n\n22" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.905202407651778, + "doc_id": "4c00b705ae0b39ee85d99d47152a3cc3fd8e48b04c2e1b136823be0d6f7cbd3d", + "edit_distance": 0.5231388329979879, + "f1_score": 0.943310657596372, + "meteor": 0.9217632097322216, + "precision": 0.9454545454545454, + "pred_md": "52\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nHad the Company accounted for these plans under the fair value method allowed by SFAS 123, the Company's net income and earnings per share would have been reduced to recognize the fair value of employee stock options. The following are required disclosures under SFAS 123 and SFAS 148:\n\n(In thousands, except per share amount)\n\nReported net income includes $5 million, $5 million and $3 million, net of tax, of amortization of restricted stock and non-employee stock option compensation for the years ended December 31, 2004, 2003 and 2002, respectively. For purposes of computing the pro forma compensation, the fair value of each option grant was estimated on the date of grant using the Black-Scholes option-pricing model with the following weighted-average assumptions: risk-free interest rates of 3% in 2004, 3% in 2003, and 4% in 2002; no expected dividend yields for the years presented; expected lives of 5 years for the years presented; and expected volatility of 42% in 2004, 42% in 2003 and 50% in 2002. The estimated weighted average fair value of options granted in 2004, 2003 and 2002 was $19.10, $10.64 and $16.32, respectively.\n\nCurrency translation. The Company accounts for currency translation in accordance with Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 52, 'Foreign Currency Translation'. Balance sheet accounts are translated at the exchange rate in effect at each balance sheet date. Income statement accounts are translated at the average rate of exchange prevailing during the period. T ranslation adjustments resulting from this process are charged or credited to other comprehensive income (loss).\n\nComprehensive income. Comprehensive income includes net income and all other non-stockholder changes in equity, or other comprehensive income. Elements of the Company's other comprehensive income are reported in the accompanying consolidated statement of stockholders' equity, and the cumulative balance of these elements consisted of the following:\n\nReclassifications. The consolidated financial statements for prior years reflect certain reclassifications, which have no effect on previously reported net income, to conform to the current year presentation.\n\n## NOTE 3 - DISCONTINUED OPERATIONS\n\nIn June 2003, the Company entered into an agreement to sell the Golden Nugget Subsidiaries, including substantially all of the assets and liabilities of those resorts, for approximately $215 million, subject to certain working capital adjustments. This transaction closed in January 2004, with net proceeds to the Company of $210 million. Also in June 2003, the Company ceased operations of PLAYMGMMIRAGE.com, its online gaming website ('Online'). In February 2004, the Company entered into an agreement to sell the subsidiaries that own", + "recall": 0.9411764705882353, + "true_md": "Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements 52\n\nHad the Company accounted for these plans under the fair value method allowed by SFAS 123, the Company’s net income and earnings per share would have been reduced to recognize the fair value of employee stock options. The following are required disclosures under SFAS 123 and SFAS 148:\n\nReported net income includes $5 million, $5 million and $3 million, net of tax, of amortization of restricted stock and non-employee stock option compensation for the years ended December 31, 2004, 2003 and 2002, respectively. For purposes of com- puting the pro forma compensation, the fair value of each option grant was estimated on the date of grant using the Black-Scholes option-pricing model with the following weighted-average assumptions: risk-free interest rates of 3% in 2004, 3% in 2003, and 4% in 2002; no expected dividend yields for the years presented; expected lives of 5 years for the years presented; and expected volatility of 42% in 2004, 42% in 2003 and 50% in 2002. The estimated weighted average fair value of options granted in 2004, 2003 and 2002 was $19.10, $10.64 and $16.32, respectively.\n\nIn June 2003, the Company entered into an agreement to sell the Golden Nugget Subsidiaries, including substantially all of the assets and liabilities of those resorts, for approximately $215 million, subject to certain working capital adjustments. This transaction closed in January 2004, with net proceeds to the Company of $210 million. Also in June 2003, the Company ceased operations of PLAYMGMMIRAGE.com, its online gaming website (“Online”). In February 2004, the Company entered into an agreement to sell the subsidiaries that own \n\nReclassifications. The consolidated financial statements for prior years reflect cer- tain reclassifications, which have no effect on previously reported net income, to conform to the current year presentation. \n\nComprehensive income. Comprehensive income includes net income and all other non-stockholder changes in equity, or other comprehensive income. Elements of the Company’s other comprehensive income are reported in the accompanying consolidated statement of stockholders’ equity, and the cumulative balance of these elements consisted of the following:\n\nCurrency translation. The Company accounts for currency translation in accor- dance with Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 52, “Foreign Currency Translation”. Balance sheet accounts are translated at the exchange rate in effect at each balance sheet date. Income statement accounts are translated at the average rate of exchange prevailing during the period. Translation adjustments resulting from this process are charged or credited to other comprehensive income (loss).\n\n## NOTE 3 — DISCONTINUED OPERATIONS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8193374446373063, + "doc_id": "562f5d5c004fa0284dd289e1837b2ca34450e3f5e0466bc25f893398a7513e66", + "edit_distance": 0.2898550724637681, + "f1_score": 0.92, + "meteor": 0.8918942342506426, + "precision": 0.968421052631579, + "pred_md": "details of which are described in Note 18 to the financial statements.\n\nShares granted to the Specified Executives during the year are as follows, and were valued at $6.95 each, being their market value (as defined in the Income Tax Assessment Act).\n\n(b) Includes the notional value of shares and options granted by the Company during previous financial years (and which had not vested as at 1 January 2004) which have been amortized over the relevant vesting period. All options have been valued by independent valuers using the modified Black-Scholes or Binomial option pricing model.\n\n(c) No options were granted by the Company during the year to the Directors or to the Specified Executives.\n\n(d) No options or shares have been granted by the Company since the end of the financial year.\n\n(6) This amount reflects the value during the current reporting period of the 1,000,000 Restricted Shares granted to Mr J C Ellice-Flint in 2000, further details of which are described in note 18(h) to the financial statements.", + "recall": 0.8761904761904762, + "true_md": "details of which are described in Note 18 to the financial statement s.\n\nShares granted to the Specified Executives during the year are as f ollows, and were valued at $6.95 each, being their market value (as defined in the Income Tax Assessment Act).\n\n- (b) Includes the notional value of shares and options granted by th Company during previous financial years (and which had not vested as at 1 January 2004) which have been amortized over the relevan vesting period. All options have been valued by independent valuers using the modified Black-Scholes or Binomial option pricing model.\n\n- (c) No options were granted by the Company during the year to the Dir ectors or to the Specified Executives.\n\n- (6) This amount reflects the value during the current reporting period of th e 1,000,000 Restricted Shares granted to Mr J C Ellice-Flint in 2000, further details of which are described in note 18(h) to the financial statements.\n\n- (d) No options or shares have been granted by the Company since th e end of the financial year.\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\n40" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.818218331576479, + "doc_id": "8fdf701443f47be5e23723b80eb6ca88f64e240ce9dfe2fddaad9117b741505e", + "edit_distance": 0.56, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.983616, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "FINANCIAL SECTION\n\n## CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEETS\n\nNissan Motor Co., Ltd. and Consolidated Subsidiaries Fiscal years 2004 and 2003\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 72", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Nissan Motor Co., Ltd. and Consolidated Subsidiaries Fiscal years 2004 and 2003\n\n## CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEETS\n\nFINANCIAL SECTION\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 72" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "85ac9e506886b289fb61d273d8d2be0697246b7b3faf00d568a13cb3c78a3ae3", + "edit_distance": 0.56, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.983616, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9463182705630284, + "doc_id": "644368adae133d9218b62bb6272f08651740fd3b9e17d7b32d64bfd51f8cfaac", + "edit_distance": 0.06965174129353234, + "f1_score": 0.9746478873239436, + "meteor": 0.9699007835082611, + "precision": 0.9774011299435028, + "pred_md": "56\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n## NOTE 8 - LONG-TERM DEBT\n\n## Long-term debt consisted of the following:\n\nTotal interest incurred during 2004, 2003 and 2002 was $401 million, $353 million and $345 million, respectively, of which $23 million, $15 million and $62 million, respectively, was capitalized.\n\nOn November 24, 2003, the Company entered into the Third Amended and Restated Loan Agreement providing for bank financing totaling $2.5 billion from a syndicate of banks each led by Bank of America, N.A. (collectively, the 'Senior Credit Facility'). The Senior Credit Facility, as amended in 2004, consists entirely of a senior revolving credit facility which matures on November 24, 2008.\n\nInterest on the Senior Credit Facility is based on the bank reference rate or Eurodollar rate. The Company's borrowing rate on the Senior Credit Facility was approximately 3.3% at December 31, 2004 and 2.8% at December 31, 2003. Stand-by letters of credit totaling $51 million were outstanding as of December 31, 2004 under the Senior Credit Facility.\n\nIn November 2004, in anticipation of the Mandalay merger, the Company entered into an amended and restated bank credit facility with a group of lenders led by Bank of America, N.A. The revised bank credit facility will be effective upon the closing of the Mandalay merger, will mature five years later, and will provide a total of $7.0 billion of borrowing capacity, consisting of a $5.5 billion senior revolving credit facility and $1.5 billion senior term loan facility. The remaining terms are substantially similar to the Company's existing bank credit facility.\n\nIn 2003, the Company issued $600 million of 6% Senior Notes due 2009. In 2004, the Company issued $525 million of 5.875% senior notes due 2014. Of this amount, $225 million of the senior notes were issued pursuant to the Company's shelf registration statement, which completed the available securities issuances under that registration statement and $300 million of the senior notes were issued through a Rule 144A offering and subsequently exchanged for registered notes with identical", + "recall": 0.9719101123595506, + "true_md": "Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n56\n\n## NOTE 8 — LONG-TERM DEBT\n\nTotal interest incurred during 2004, 2003 and 2002 was $401 million, $353 million and $345 million, respectively, of which $23 million, $15 million and $62 million, respectively, was capitalized.\n\nOn November 24, 2003, the Company entered into the Third Amended and Restated Loan Agreement providing for bank financing totaling $2.5 billion from a syndicate of banks each led by Bank of America, N.A. (collectively, the “Senior Credit Facility”). The Senior Credit Facility, as amended in 2004, consists entirely of a senior revolving credit facility which matures on November 24, 2008. \n\nInterest on the Senior Credit Facility is based on the bank reference rate or Eurodollar rate. The Company’s borrowing rate on the Senior Credit Facility was approximately 3.3% at December 31, 2004 and 2.8% at December 31, 2003. Stand-by letters of credit totaling $51 million were outstanding as of December 31, 2004 under the Senior Credit Facility.\n\nIn November 2004, in anticipation of the Mandalay merger, the Company entered into an amended and restated bank credit facility with a group of lenders led by Bank of America, N.A. The revised bank credit facility will be effective upon the closing of the Mandalay merger, will mature five years later, and will provide a total of $7.0 billion of borrowing capacity, consisting of a $5.5 billion senior revolving credit facility and $1.5 billion senior term loan facility. The remaining terms are substantially similar to the Company’s existing bank credit facility.\n\nIn 2003, the Company issued $600 million of 6% Senior Notes due 2009. In 2004, the Company issued $525 million of 5.875% senior notes due 2014. Of this amount, $225 million of the senior notes were issued pursuant to the Company’s shelf registration statement, which completed the available securities issuances under that registration statement and $300 million of the senior notes were issued through a Rule 144A offering and subsequently exchanged for registered notes with identical\n\nLong-term debt consisted of the following:" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7546613634087447, + "doc_id": "9b3f2f6cde00b91e1e5f030ca5400e1b5a50d2a86b436c0a50484efc9190c206", + "edit_distance": 0.4588235294117647, + "f1_score": 0.8695652173913044, + "meteor": 0.8485555756655833, + "precision": 0.9090909090909091, + "pred_md": "## 35. Australian Equivalents to International Financial Reporting Standards (continued)\n\nThe AASB and IASB have significant ongoing projects including a comprehensive 'Extractive Industries' project that could affect the differences between current Australian GAAP and A-IFRS as described above and could further impact the Santos Group's financial reports in future years. The future impacts of any new or amended A-IFRS will depend on the particular circumstances in those years.\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\n87", + "recall": 0.8333333333333334, + "true_md": "The AASB and IASB have significant ongoing projects including a comprehen sive “Extractive Industries” project that could affect the differences between current Australian GAAP and A-IFRS as described above an could further impact the Santos Group’s financial reports in future years. The future impacts of any new or amended A-IFRS will depend on the particular cir cumstances in those years.\n\nAnnual Report 2004 87\n\n## 35. Australian Equivalents to International Financial Reporting Standar ds (continued)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.941599708293823, + "doc_id": "b668dc956560df3953a705a091046328d443ff00d03f415f5731df6712790ae1", + "edit_distance": 0.2270450751252087, + "f1_score": 0.9807692307692308, + "meteor": 0.9397370942593934, + "precision": 0.9845559845559846, + "pred_md": "34\n\nacknowledgment from the Chairman or his representative (and executives from the Secretary or a person appointed by the Board) of an intention prior to any dealings in securities either by themselves or by their associates, and must promptly notify details following the dealing.\n\nThe Company's policy is that trading in Santos securities is permitted, with approval as set out above, only during the following periods:\n\n- · the period commencing two clear days after the announcement of the Company's annual results and ending 1 July; and\n- · the period commencing two clear days after the announcement of the Company's half yearly results and ending 1 January.\n\nUnder the guidelines, prohibitions on dealing in securities apply not only to the acquisition and disposal of shares, but also to the acquiring, taking, assigning and releasing\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\nof options traded in the options market. Directors and executives may not deal in securities on considerations of a short-term nature.\n\n## 11. CONTINUOUS DISCLOSURE & SHAREHOLDER COMMUNICATION\n\nThe Company is committed to giving all shareholders timely and equal access to information concerning the Company.\n\nThe Company has developed policies and procedures in accordance with its commitment to fulfilling its obligations to shareholders and the broader market for continuous disclosure. The policies are summarised in this Statement, which may be accessed at the Company's website at www.santos.com. The Company is currently in the process of compiling stand-alone summaries of relevant policies for inclusion on the Corporate Governance section of the Company's website. The policies are regularly reviewed and updated for changes to the law and the Listing Rules. The Company notes that the ASX\n\nBest Practice Recommendations are for full copies of certain policies and charters to be included on the website. The Company has been working on this during the year, together with the update of the website itself. These will shortly be available on the Corporate Governance section of the website.\n\nThese policies establish procedures to ensure that Directors and management are aware of and fulfil their obligations in relation to the timely disclosure of material price sensitive information. Information must not be selectively disclosed prior to being announced to the ASX, NASDAQ or New Zealand Exchange Ltd (NZX). Directors and executive management must notify the Company Secretary as soon as they become aware of information that should be considered for release to the market.\n\nWhen the Company makes an announcement to the market, that announcement is released\n\nto each exchange where its shares are listed: ASX, NASDAQ and NZX. The Company Secretary is responsible for communications with the exchanges. All material information disclosed to the ASX is posted on the Company's website at www.santos.com. This includes ASX announcements, annual reports (including therefore this Corporate Governance Statement), notices of meeting, CEO briefings, media releases, and materials presented at investor, media and analyst briefings. An email 'alert' facility is also offered to shareholders. Web-casting of material presentations, including annual and half-yearly results presentations, is provided for the benefit of shareholders, regardless of their location.\n\nAdditionally, the Company's external auditor attends annual general meetings to be available to answer shareholder questions relevant to the conduct of the audit.", + "recall": 0.9770114942528736, + "true_md": "## 11. CONTINUOUS DISCLOSURE & SHAREHOLDER COMMUNICATION\n\nacknowledgment from the Chairman or his representative (and executives from the Secretary or a person appointed by the Board) of an intention prior to any dealings in securities either by themselves or by their associates, and must promptly notify details following the dealing. \n\nThe Company’s policy is that trading in Santos securities is permitted, with approval as set out above, only during the following periods: \n\nUnder the guidelines, prohibitions on dealing in securities apply not only to the acquisition and disposal of shares, but also to the acquiring, taking, assigning and releasing\n\nof options traded in the options market. Directors and executives may not deal in securities on considerations of a short-term nature.\n\nThe Company is committed to giving all shareholders timely and equal access to information concerning the Company.\n\nThe Company has developed policies and procedures in accordance with its commitment to fulfilling its obligations to shareholders and the broader market for continuous disclosure. The policies are summarised in this Statement, which may be accessed at the Company’s website at www.santos.com. The Company is currently in the process of compiling stand-alone summaries of relevant policies for inclusion on the Corporate Governance section of the Company’s website. The policies are regularly reviewed and updated for changes to the law and the Listing Rules. The Company notes that the ASX\n\nBest Practice Recommendations are for full copies of certain policies and charters to be included on the website. The Company has been working on this during the year, together with the update of the website itself. These will shortly be available on the Corporate Governance section of the website.\n\nThese policies establish procedures to ensure that Directors and management are aware of and fulfil their obligations in relation to the timely disclosure of material price sensitive information. Information must not be selectively disclosed prior to being announced to the ASX, NASDAQ or New Zealand Exchange Ltd (NZX). Directors and executive management must notify the Company Secretary as soon as they become aware of information that should be considered for release to the market.\n\nWhen the Company makes an announcement to the market, that announcement is released\n\nto each exchange where its shares are listed: ASX, NASDAQ and NZX. The Company Secretary is responsible for communications with the exchanges. All material information disclosed to the ASX is posted on the Company’s website at www.santos.com. This includes ASX announcements, annual reports (including therefore this Corporate Governance Statement), notices of meeting, CEO briefings, media releases, and materials presented at investor, media and analyst briefings. An email “alert” facility is also offered to shareholders. Web-casting of material presentations, including annual and half-yearly results presentations, is provided for the benefit of shareholders, regardless of their location. \n\nAdditionally, the Company’s external auditor attends annual general meetings to be available to answer shareholder questions relevant to the conduct of the audit.\n\n- • the period commencing two clear days after the announcement of the Company’s annual results and ending 1 July; and\n\n- • the period commencing two clear days after the announcement of the Company’s half yearly results and ending 1 January.\n\n34\n\nAnnual Report 2004" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6490990868090789, + "doc_id": "d8c0d6fc1182353086bc8815017aaa50019be388d8152a22e504a80025e8b900", + "edit_distance": 0.3888888888888889, + "f1_score": 0.8534201954397395, + "meteor": 0.7782955148092816, + "precision": 0.9703703703703703, + "pred_md": "## INVESTOR INFORMATION\n\nThe following table represents the high and low trading prices of the Company's common stock:\n\nThe Company's common stock is listed on the New York Stock Exchange. The symbol is MGG.\n\n## Forward-Looking Statements\n\nThis Annual Report contains some forward-looking statements which are subject to change. Actual results may differ materially from those described in any forwardlooking statement. Additional information concerning potential factors that could affect our future results is included under the caption 'Factors that May Affect Our Future Results' in Item 1 of our Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 2004. This statement is provided as permitted by the Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995.\n\nInvestor Information\n\n## Form 10-K\n\nA copy of the Company's annual report on Form 10-K, as filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission, will be furnished without charge to any stockholder upon written request to:\n\n## Mr. Bryan L. Wright\n\nSenior Vice President, Assistant General Counsel and Assistant Secretary\n\nMGM MIRAGE 3600 Las Vegas Blvd. South Las Vegas, NV 89109\n\n69", + "recall": 0.7616279069767442, + "true_md": "Investor Information\n\n69\n\n## INVESTOR INFORMATION\n\n## Transfer Agent and Registrar For Common Stock\n\n## Independent Public Accountants\n\n## Form 10-K\n\n## Forward-Looking Statements\n\n## Mr. Bryan L. Wright\n\nThe following table represents the high and low trading prices of the Company’s common stock:\n\nThe Company’s common stock is listed on the New York Stock Exchange. The symbol is MGG.\n\nThis Annual Report contains some forward-looking statements which are subject to change. Actual results may differ materially from those described in any forward- looking statement. Additional information concerning potential factors that could affect our future results is included under the caption “Factors that May Affect Our Future Results” in Item 1 of our Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 2004. This statement is provided as permitted by the Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995.\n\nSenior Vice President, Assistant General Counsel and Assistant Secretary MGM MIRAGE 3600 Las Vegas Blvd. South Las Vegas, NV 89109\n\nA copy of the Company’s annual report on Form 10-K, as filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission, will be furnished without charge to any stockholder upon written request to:\n\nMellon Investor Services LLC 85 Challenger Road Ridgefield Park, NJ 07660 www.melloninvestor.com 1-800-358-2066\n\nDeloitte & Touche LLP 3773 Howard Hughes Parkway Suite 490, North Tower Las Vegas, NV 89109" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9560108283693365, + "doc_id": "e6ae8a0e3456c86b16c81f77c0610f4de0d0bbcea41a13b57b5b23435f9676c2", + "edit_distance": 0.5441696113074205, + "f1_score": 0.9789029535864979, + "meteor": 0.9374752071287881, + "precision": 0.9872340425531915, + "pred_md": "## NOTE 14 - PROPERTY TRANSACTIONS, NET\n\n## Property transactions, net consisted of the following:\n\nIn 2004, there were no material unusual property transactions. In 2003 the Company sold 315 acres of land in North Las Vegas, Nevada near Shadow Creek for approximately $55 million, which resulted in a pretax gain of approximately $37 million. Also in 2003, the Company recorded write-downs and impairments of assets abandoned or replaced with new construction, primarily at MGM Grand Las Vegas in preparation for new restaurants and the new theatre. Prior to 2003, the Company classified gains and losses on routine asset sales or disposals as a non-operating item at some resorts and as an operating item at other resorts. Management believes the preferable presentation of these items is as an element of operating income. Prior period statements have not been reclassified as such transactions were not material in the prior periods. Until 2003, demolition costs were typically capitalized as part of new construction. The Company began expensing demolition costs on major construction projects as incurred on January 1, 2003, and is accounting for this change in policy prospectively. Demolition costs were not material in prior periods. Demolition costs in 2004 and 2003 relate primarily to preparation for the Bellagio standard room remodel, Bellagio expansion and new theatre at MGM Grand Las Vegas.\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nIn 2002, Tropical Storm Isidore caused property damage at Beau Rivage totaling $8 million, including clean-up costs. The amount of the write-down for damaged assets was determined based on the net book value of the assets and engineering estimates. In connection with the revised development agreement in Detroit, the Company wrote off $5 million, which was the net book value of previously incurred development costs associated with the riverfront permanent casino site ($9 million), offset by previously accrued obligations no longer required under the revised development agreement ($4 million). Also in 2002, the Company recorded write-downs and impairments of assets abandoned or replaced with new construction.\n\n## NOTE 15 - RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS\n\nThe Company's related party transactions consisted of the following revenues (expenses):\n\nAt December 31, 2004, the Company owed $2 million for legal fees to a firm affiliated with one of the Company's directors. The Company also engaged in transactions with its unconsolidated affiliates. In each of 2004 and 2003, the Company paid Monte Carlo $4 million as a result of closing the tram between Bellagio and Monte Carlo in preparation for the Bellagio expansion. The Company leases two acres of land to Borgata and received $1 million in each of 2004, 2003 and 2002 under this lease. Borgata is required to pay for a portion of the masterplan improvements at Renaissance Pointe, and the Company is responsible for environmental cleanup costs incurred by Borgata. The net amount reimbursed to the Company under these arrangements for the years ended December 31, 2004, 2003 and 2002 was $1 million, $10 million and $8 million, respectively.\n\n65", + "recall": 0.9707112970711297, + "true_md": "Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n65\n\n## NOTE 14 — PROPERTY TRANSACTIONS, NET\n\nProperty transactions, net consisted of the following:\n\nIn 2004, there were no material unusual property transactions. In 2003 the Company sold 315 acres of land in North Las Vegas, Nevada near Shadow Creek for approximately $55 million, which resulted in a pretax gain of approximately $37 million. Also in 2003, the Company recorded write-downs and impairments of assets abandoned or replaced with new construction, primarily at MGM Grand Las Vegas in preparation for new restaurants and the new theatre. Prior to 2003, the Company classified gains and losses on routine asset sales or disposals as a non-operating item at some resorts and as an operating item at other resorts. Management believes the preferable presentation of these items is as an element of operating income. Prior period statements have not been reclassified as such transactions were not material in the prior periods. Until 2003, demolition costs were typically capitalized as part of new construction. The Company began expensing demolition costs on major construction projects as incurred on January 1, 2003, and is accounting for this change in policy prospectively. Demolition costs were not material in prior periods. Demolition costs in 2004 and 2003 relate primarily to preparation for the Bellagio standard room remodel, Bellagio expansion and new theatre at MGM Grand Las Vegas.\n\nAt December 31, 2004, the Company owed $2 million for legal fees to a firm affiliated with one of the Company’s directors. The Company also engaged in transactions with its unconsolidated affiliates. In each of 2004 and 2003, the Company paid Monte Carlo $4 million as a result of closing the tram between Bellagio and Monte Carlo in preparation for the Bellagio expansion. The Company leases two acres of land to Borgata and received $1 million in each of 2004, 2003 and 2002 under this lease. Borgata is required to pay for a portion of the master- plan improvements at Renaissance Pointe, and the Company is responsible for environmental cleanup costs incurred by Borgata. The net amount reimbursed to the Company under these arrangements for the years ended December 31, 2004, 2003 and 2002 was $1 million, $10 million and $8 million, respectively.\n\nThe Company’s related party transactions consisted of the following revenues (expenses):\n\nIn 2002, Tropical Storm Isidore caused property damage at Beau Rivage totaling $8 million, including clean-up costs. The amount of the write-down for damaged assets was determined based on the net book value of the assets and engineering estimates. In connection with the revised development agreement in Detroit, the Company wrote off $5 million, which was the net book value of previously incurred develop- ment costs associated with the riverfront permanent casino site ($9 million), offset by previously accrued obligations no longer required under the revised development agreement ($4 million). Also in 2002, the Company recorded write-downs and impairments of assets abandoned or replaced with new construction.\n\n## NOTE 15 — RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "18dcb85d44d997dc47640939990a18624fa16781ebcdaa31f1049814af0a5fc4", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9921875, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Annual Report 2004\n\n57", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Annual Report 2004 57" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "37b1ecb0cef019d5a04f4c493be27966a2c96ac277e66d303a58fe0cd521eb60", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9921875, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9640084649771725, + "doc_id": "d41241b013e4bf154ef012024a17b405d54cd2e755fe201239cc8e7657a78147", + "edit_distance": 0.05771144278606965, + "f1_score": 0.993324432576769, + "meteor": 0.9824431727953616, + "precision": 0.9946524064171123, + "pred_md": "SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES\n\nMANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS\n\nsubsidy. The Company does not receive any revenues from the sale of handsets and accessories by national retailers. The Company classifies these handset subsidy charges as a cost of goods expense. participates in the Sprint national and regional distribution programs in which national retailers sell Sprint wireless products and services. In order to facilitate the sale of Sprint wireless products and services, national retailers purchase wireless handsets from Sprint for resale and receive compensation from Sprint for Sprint wireless products and services sold. For industry competitive reasons, Sprint subsidizes the price of these handsets by selling the handsets at a price below cost. Under the Company's agreements with Sprint, when a national retailer sells a handset purchased from Sprint to a subscriber in the Company's territories, the Company is obligated to reimburse Sprint for the handset\n\nThrough December 31, 2003, the Agreement provided that Sprint retains 8% of collected service revenues from subscribers based in the Company's markets and from non-Sprint wholesale subscribers who roam onto the Company's network. The amount of revenue retained by Sprint is recorded as an offset to the revenues recorded. All revenues derived from the sale of handsets and accessories by the Company and from certain roaming services (outbound roaming and travel revenues from Sprint and its PCS Affiliate subscribers) are retained by the Company.\n\nIncome Taxes The Company defers direct subscriber activation costs on subscribers whose activation falls within the SAB 101 guidelines. The activation costs are deferred when incurred, and then amortized using the straight-line method over 30 months, which is the estimated average life of a subscriber. Direct subscriber activation costs also include the activation charge from Sprint, and credit check fees. These fees are charged to the Company by Sprint at approximate $12.50 per subscriber.\n\n## Income Taxes\n\nIncome taxes are accounted for under the asset and liability method. Deferred tax assets and liabilities are recognized for the future tax consequences attributable to differences between financial statement carrying amounts of existing assets and liabilities and their respective tax bases. Deferred tax assets and liabilities are measured using enacted tax rates expected to apply to taxable income in the years in which those temporary differences are expected to be recovered or settled. The effect on deferred tax assets and liabilities of a change in tax rates is recognized in income in the period that includes the enactment date. The Company evaluates the recoverability of tax assets generated on a state-by-state basis from net operating losses apportioned to that state. Management uses a more likely than not threshold to make that determination and has established a valuation allowance against the tax assets, in case they are not recoverable. For 2003, the Company added an additional reserve of $0.2 million to its valuation allowance due to the uncertainty of the recoverability of the net operating loss carry-forwards in certain states. The valuation allowance now stands at $0.9 million as of December 31, 2003. Management will evaluate the effective rate of taxes based on apportionment factors, the Company's operating results, and the various state income tax rates. Currently, management anticipates the normalized effective income tax rate to be approximately 39%.\n\n## Other\n\nThe Company does not have any unrecorded off-balance sheet transactions or arrangements, however, the Company has commitments under operating leases and is subject to certain capital calls under one of its investments.\n\n## Results of Continuing Operations\n\n## 2003 compared to 2002\n\nTotal revenue was $105.9 million in 2003, an increase of $12.9 million or 13.9%. Total revenues included $70.0 million of wireless revenues, an increase of $12.0 million or 20.7%; wireline revenues of $29.0 million, an increase of $0.3 million or 0.9%; and other revenues of $7.0 million, an increase of $0.6 million or 9.7%.\n\nWithin wireless revenues, the PCS operation contributed $69.8 million, an increase of $11.6 million, or 20.8%. PCS service revenues were $44.4 million, an increase of $10.9 million or 32.4%. Service revenue growth was driven by the increase in subscribers, totaling 85,139 at December 31, 2003, an increase of 17,297 or 25.5%, compared to 67,842 subscribers at year-end 2002. The company had churn of 2.1% in 2003 compared to 2.8% in 2002. The decline in the churn rate is the result of tightening the credit screening for new subscribers as well as continued efforts to improve the after sales support. Competition in the wireless industry continues to have a significant impact on the results of the Company's PCS operation.\n\nPCS travel revenue, including reseller revenue, which is compensation between Sprint and its PCS Affiliates for use of the other party's network, was $16.8 million, an increase of $0.3 million or 1.8%. Travel revenue is impacted by the geographic size of the Company's network service area, the overall number of Sprint wireless customers, their travel patterns and the travel exchange rate. The rate received on travel was $0.058 per minute in 2003, compared to $0.10 per minute in 2002. As a part of the amended management agreement signed on January 30, 2004, Sprint and the Company agreed to maintain the travel rate at $0.058 per minute through December 31, 2006.\n\n45\n\n2003 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n■", + "recall": 0.992, + "true_md": "SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS\n\n## Income Taxes\n\n## Other\n\n## Results of Continuing Operations\n\n## 2003 compared to 2002\n\nsubsidy. The Company does not receive any revenues from the sale of handsets and accessories by national retailers. The Company classifies these handset subsidy charges as a cost of goods expense. participates in the Sprint national and regional distribution programs in which national retailers sell Sprint wireless products and services. In order to facilitate the sale of Sprint wireless products and services, national retailers purchase wireless handsets from Sprint for resale and receive compensation from Sprint for Sprint wireless products and services sold. For industry competitive reasons, Sprint subsidizes the price of these handsets by selling the handsets at a price below cost. Under the Company’s agreements with Sprint, when a national retailer sells a handset purchased from Sprint to a subscriber in the Company’s territories, the Company is obligated to reimburse Sprint for the handset\n\nThrough December 31, 2003, the Agreement provided that Sprint retains 8% of collected service revenues from subscribers based in the Company’s markets and from non-Sprint wholesale subscribers who roam onto the Company’s network. The amount of revenue retained by Sprint is recorded as an offset to the revenues recorded. All revenues derived from the sale of handsets and accessories by the Company and from certain roaming services (outbound roaming and travel revenues from Sprint and its PCS Affiliate subscribers) are retained by the Company.\n\nIncome Taxes The Company defers direct subscriber activation costs on subscribers whose activation falls within the SAB 101 guidelines. The activation costs are deferred when incurred, and then amortized using the straight-line method over 30 months, which is the estimated average life of a subscriber. Direct subscriber activation costs also include the activation charge from Sprint, and credit check fees. These fees are charged to the Company by Sprint at approximate $12.50 per subscriber.\n\nIncome taxes are accounted for under the asset and liability method. Deferred tax assets and liabilities are recognized for the future tax consequences attributable to differences between financial statement carrying amounts of existing assets and liabilities and their respective tax bases. Deferred tax assets and liabilities are measured using enacted tax rates expected to apply to taxable income in the years in which those temporary differences are expected to be recovered or settled. The effect on deferred tax assets and liabilities of a change in tax rates is recognized in income in the period that includes the enactment date. The Company evaluates the recoverability of tax assets generated on a state-by-state basis from net operating losses apportioned to that state. Management uses a more likely than not threshold to make that determination and has established a valuation allowance against the tax assets, in case they are not recoverable. For 2003, the Company added an additional reserve of $0.2 million to its valuation allowance due to the uncertainty of the recoverability of the net operating loss carry-forwards in certain states. The valuation allowance now stands at $0.9 million as of December 31, 2003. Management will evaluate the effective rate of taxes based on apportionment factors, the Company’s operating results, and the various state income tax rates. Currently, management anticipates the normalized effective income tax rate to be approximately 39%.\n\nThe Company does not have any unrecorded off-balance sheet transactions or arrangements, however, the Company has commitments under operating leases and is subject to certain capital calls under one of its investments.\n\nTotal revenue was $105.9 million in 2003, an increase of $12.9 million or 13.9%. Total revenues included $70.0 million of wireless revenues, an increase of $12.0 million or 20.7%; wireline revenues of $29.0 million, an increase of $0.3 million or 0.9%; and other revenues of $7.0 million, an increase of $0.6 million or 9.7%.\n\nWithin wireless revenues, the PCS operation contributed $69.8 million, an increase of $11.6 million, or 20.8%. PCS service revenues were $44.4 million, an increase of $10.9 million or 32.4%. Service revenue growth was driven by the increase in subscribers, totaling 85,139 at December 31, 2003, an increase of 17,297 or 25.5%, compared to 67,842 subscribers at year-end 2002. The company had churn of 2.1% in 2003 compared to 2.8% in 2002. The decline in the churn rate is the result of tightening the credit screening for new subscribers as well as continued efforts to improve the after sales support. Competition in the wireless industry continues to have a significant impact on the results of the Company’s PCS operation.\n\nPCS travel revenue, including reseller revenue, which is compensation between Sprint and its PCS Affiliates for use of the other party’s network, was $16.8 million, an increase of $0.3 million or 1.8%. Travel revenue is impacted by the geographic size of the Company’s network service area, the overall number of Sprint wireless customers, their travel patterns and the travel exchange rate. The rate received on travel was $0.058 per minute in 2003, compared to $0.10 per minute in 2002. As a part of the amended management agreement signed on January 30, 2004, Sprint and the Company agreed to maintain the travel rate at $0.058 per minute through December 31, 2006.\n\n45 ■ 2003 ANNUAL REPORT" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8781803016662387, + "doc_id": "3dc8f0b286a5180dc2901b7ef78e1db3ea150506a533412e3253f578a48fa023", + "edit_distance": 0.2014218009478673, + "f1_score": 0.9696969696969697, + "meteor": 0.9356784902514615, + "precision": 0.9746192893401016, + "pred_md": "## Corporate Information\n\nCorporate Headquarters\n\nThe Hartford Financial Services Group, Inc. 690 Asylum Avenue Hartford, Connecticut 06115 860-547-5000\n\nInternet Address\n\nhttp://www.thehartford.com\n\nAnnual Meeting\n\nShareholders are cordially invited to attend The Hartford's Annual Meeting of Shareholders, which will be held on Thursday, April 18, 2002 at 9:00a.m. in the Wallace Stevens Theater at The Hartford Financial Services Group, Inc.'s home office at 690 Asylum Avenue, Hartford, Connecticut. Shareholders of record as of February 28, 2002 are entitled to notice of, and to vote at, the Annual Meeting.\n\n## Form 10-K and Other Information\n\nShareholders may receive, without charge, a copy of The Hartford's Form 10-K (without exhibits) filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission for the year ended December 31, 2001 by contacting 1-888-FACT-HIG. Forms 10-Q, press releases, and other shareholder communications are also available through this toll-free number.\n\n## Transfer Agent/Shareholder Records\n\nFor information or assistance regarding stock records, dividend checks or stock certificates, please contact The Hartford's transfer agent:\n\nThe Bank of New York Shareholder Relations Department-11E P.O. Box 11258 Church Street Station New York, NY 10286 800-254-2823\n\nTo send certificates for transfer and address changes:\n\nThe Bank of New York Receive and Deliver Department-11W P.O. Box 11002 Church Street Station New York, NY 10286\n\nAddress inquiries about The Hartford's Dividend Reinvestment and Cash Payment Plan to:\n\nThe Bank of New York Dividend Reinvestment Department P.O. Box 1958 Newark, NJ 07101-9774\n\nE-mail: shareowner-svcs@bankofny.com\n\nInternet address: www.stockbny.com\n\n36\n\nInvestor Relations\n\nThe Hartford Financial Services Group, Inc. Hartford Plaza, HO-1-01 Hartford, Connecticut 06115 Attn: Investor Relations\n\n860-547-2537\n\nMedia Inquiries\n\nThe Hartford Financial Services Group, Inc. Media Relations Hartford Plaza, T-12-56 Hartford, CT 06115 860-547-5200\n\n## Common Stock and Dividend Information\n\nThe Hartford's common stock is traded on the New York Stock Exchange (NYSE) under the trading symbol 'HIG.' The following table presents the high and low closing prices for the common stock of The Hartford on the NYSE for the periods indicated, and the quarterly dividends declared per share.\n\nAs of February 28, 2002 there were approximately 120,000 shareholders of The Hartford.", + "recall": 0.964824120603015, + "true_md": "## Investor Relations\n\n## Corporate Headquarters\n\n## Internet Address\n\n## Annual Meeting\n\n## Form 10-K and Other Information\n\n## Transfer Agent/Shareholder Records\n\n## Media Inquiries\n\n## Common Stock and Dividend Information\n\nThe Hartford Financial Services Group, Inc. 690 Asylum Avenue Hartford, Connecticut 06115 860-547-5000\n\nhttp://www.thehartford.com\n\nShareholders are cordially invited to attend The Hartford’s Annual Meeting of Shareholders, which will be held on Thursday, April 18, 2002 at 9:00a.m. in the Wallace Stevens Theater at The Hartford Financial Services Group, Inc.’s home office at 690 Asylum Avenue, Hartford, Connecticut. Shareholders of record as of February 28, 2002 are entitled to notice of, and to vote at, the Annual Meeting.\n\nShareholders may receive, without charge, a copy of The Hartford’s Form 10-K (without exhibits) filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission for the year ended December 31, 2001 by contacting 1-888-FACT-HIG. Forms 10-Q, press releases, and other shareholder communications are also available through this toll-free number. \n\nFor information or assistance regarding stock records, dividend checks or stock certificates, please contact The Hartford’s transfer agent:\n\nThe Bank of New York Shareholder Relations Department–11E P.O. Box 11258 Church Street Station New York, NY 10286 800-254-2823\n\nTo send certificates for transfer and address changes:\n\nThe Bank of New York Receive and Deliver Department–11W P.O. Box 11002 Church Street Station New York, NY 10286\n\nAddress inquiries about The Hartford’s Dividend Reinvestment and Cash Payment Plan to:\n\nThe Bank of New York Dividend Reinvestment Department P.O. Box 1958 Newark, NJ 07101-9774\n\nE-mail: shareowner-svcs@bankofny.com\n\nInternet address: www.stockbny.com\n\nThe Hartford Financial Services Group, Inc. Hartford Plaza, HO-1-01 Hartford, Connecticut 06115 Attn: Investor Relations 860-547-2537\n\nThe Hartford Financial Services Group, Inc. Media Relations Hartford Plaza, T-12-56 Hartford, CT 06115 860-547-5200 \n\nThe Hartford’s common stock is traded on the New York Stock Exchange (NYSE) under the trading symbol “HIG.” The following table presents the high and low closing prices for the common stock of The Hartford on the NYSE for the periods indicated, and the quarterly dividends declared per share.\n\nAs of February 28, 2002 there were approximately 120,000 shareholders of The Hartford.\n\n36\n\n## Corporate Information" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5780847990873865, + "doc_id": "d1664b4cb50ccfc05804569d3159450ed13c60a5eb37819ea8133c20741a4e85", + "edit_distance": 0.683969465648855, + "f1_score": 0.9707602339181287, + "meteor": 0.563427337190182, + "precision": 0.9880952380952381, + "pred_md": "## Board of Directors\n\nJames E. O'Connor 1 Chairman & Chief Executive Officer\n\nW. Lee Nutter 2, 3, 4 Chairman, Compensation Committee Chairman, President & Chief Executive Officer Rayonier, Inc.\n\n(a forest products company)\n\n1 Member, Executive Committee · 2 Member, Audit Committee · 3 Member, Compensation Committee · 4 Member, Nominating and Corporate Governance Committee\n\n## Officers\n\nJames E. O'Connor Chairman & Chief Executive Officer Michael J. Cordesman President & Chief Operating Officer David A. Barclay Senior Vice President & General Counsel Tod C. Holmes Senior Vice President & Chief Financial Officer Lee V. Twyford Senior Vice President & Chief Information Officer Brian A. Bales Vice President, Corporate Development Kenneth M. Baylor Vice President, Employee & Labor Relations Tim M. Benter Vice President & Associate General Counsel Jerry S. Clark Vice President & Controller Paul J. Connealy Vice President, Tax Matthew E. Davies Vice President, Environmental Engineering & Compliance Arthur J. Dudzinski Regional Vice President - Western Region\n\nWilliam C. Flower Vice President, Communications Matthew D. Katz Vice President & Associate General Counsel Ronald R. Krall Regional Vice President - Eastern Region Edward A. Lang III Vice President, Finance & Treasurer Thomas E. Miller Regional Vice President - Southwest Region Craig J. Nichols Vice President, Human Resources Charles F. Serianni Vice President & Chief Accounting Officer Robert N. Shepard Regional Vice President - Southern Region Gary L. Sova Vice President, Marketing & Sales Kevin C. Walbridge Regional Vice President - Central Region Gerard W. Wickett\n\nVice President, Purchasing & Maintenance\n\nJohn W. Croghan 2, 3, 4 Chairman, Nominating and Corporate Governance Committee Chairman, Rail-Splitter Capital Management, LLC (an investment management firm)\n\nHarris W. Hudson 1 Vice Chairman of the Board\n\nHarris W. Hudson 1 Vice Chairman of the Board\n\nRamon A. Rodriguez 2, 3, 4 Chairman, Audit Committee President & Chief Executive Officer Madsen, Sapp, Mena, Rodriguez & Co. (a public accounting firm)\n\nAllan C. Sorensen 2, 3, 4 Presiding Director President & Chief Executive Officer Interim Health Care, Inc. (a provider of temporary labor to the healthcare industry)\n\nMichael W. Wickham 2, 3, 4 Retired Chairman, President & Chief Executive Officer, Roadway Corporation", + "recall": 0.9540229885057471, + "true_md": "## Board of Directors\n\nJohn W. Croghan 2, 3, 4 Chairman, Nominating and Corporate Governance Committee Chairman, Rail-Splitter Capital Management, LLC (an investment management firm)\n\nHarris W. Hudson 1 Vice Chairman of the Board\n\nJames E. O’Connor 1 Chairman & Chief Executive Officer\n\nW. Lee Nutter 2, 3, 4 Chairman, Compensation Committee Chairman, President & Chief Executive Officer Rayonier, Inc. (a forest products company)\n\nRamon A. Rodriguez 2, 3, 4 Chairman, Audit Committee President & Chief Executive Officer Madsen, Sapp, Mena, Rodriguez & Co. (a public accounting firm)\n\nAllan C. Sorensen 2, 3, 4 Presiding Director President & Chief Executive Officer Interim Health Care, Inc. (a provider of temporary labor to the healthcare industry)\n\nMichael W. Wickham 2, 3, 4 Retired Chairman, President & Chief Executive Officer, Roadway Corporation\n\n$^{1}$Member, Executive Committee • $^{2}$Member, Audit Committee • $^{3}$Member, Compensation Committee • $^{4}$Member, Nominating and Corporate Governance Committee\n\n## Officers\n\nJames E. O’Connor Chairman & Chief Executive Officer Michael J. Cordesman\n\nChairman & Chief Executive Officer Michael J. Cordesman President & Chief Operating Officer David A. Barclay\n\nPresident & Chief Operating Officer David A. Barclay Senior Vice President & General Counsel Tod C. Holmes\n\nSenior Vice President & General Counsel Tod C. Holmes Senior Vice President & Chief Financial Officer Lee V. Twyford\n\nSenior Vice President & Chief Financial Officer Lee V. Twyford Senior Vice President & Chief Information Officer Brian A. Bales\n\nSenior Vice President & Chief Information Officer Brian A. Bales Vice President, Corporate Development Kenneth M. Baylor\n\nVice President, Corporate Development Kenneth M. Baylor Vice President, Employee & Labor Relations Tim M. Benter\n\nVice President, Employee & Labor Relations Tim M. Benter Vice President & Associate General Counsel\n\nJerry S. Clark Vice President & Controller Paul J. Connealy\n\nVice President & Controller Paul J. Connealy Vice President, Tax Matthew E. Davies\n\nVice President, Tax Matthew E. Davies Vice President, Environmental Engineering & Compliance Arthur J. Dudzinski\n\nVice President, Environmental Engineering & Compliance Arthur J. Dudzinski Regional Vice President - Western Region\n\nRegional Vice President - Central Region Gerard W. Wickett Vice President, Purchasing & Maintenance\n\nVice President, Marketing & Sales Kevin C. Walbridge Regional Vice President - Central Region Gerard W. Wickett\n\nRegional Vice President - Southern Region Gary L. Sova Vice President, Marketing & Sales Kevin C. Walbridge\n\nVice President & Chief Accounting Officer Robert N. Shepard Regional Vice President - Southern Region Gary L. Sova\n\nVice President, Human Resources Charles F. Serianni Vice President & Chief Accounting Officer Robert N. Shepard\n\nRegional Vice President - Southwest Region Craig J. Nichols Vice President, Human Resources Charles F. Serianni\n\nVice President, Finance & Treasurer Thomas E. Miller Regional Vice President - Southwest Region Craig J. Nichols\n\nRegional Vice President - Eastern Region Edward A. Lang III Vice President, Finance & Treasurer Thomas E. Miller\n\nVice President & Associate General Counsel Ronald R. Krall Regional Vice President - Eastern Region Edward A. Lang III\n\nVice President, Communications Matthew D. Katz Vice President & Associate General Counsel Ronald R. Krall\n\nWilliam C. Flower Vice President, Communications Matthew D. Katz" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9648777115817626, + "doc_id": "56e92fee94d0aace119ffb93f90649ca274bc47e492b774314a7b871efda40df", + "edit_distance": 0.0685763888888889, + "f1_score": 0.9735744089012518, + "meteor": 0.9744464292249468, + "precision": 0.9668508287292817, + "pred_md": "During December 1998, the Company re p u rchased notes with a face value of DM 26.4 million and 31,173 warrants for a total purc h a s e price of $5.5 million. This re p u rchase was accounted for as an extinguishment of debt with a resulting $2.9 million (net of income taxes of $1.5 million) recognized as an extraord i n a ry gain on such extinguishment. The extinguishment gain (pre-tax) re p resents the diff e re n c e between the allocated carrying value of the debt extinguished ($10.2 million) and the consideration paid ($5.5 million), offset by the writeo ff of the allocated unamortized deferred financing costs ($341,000).\n\nThe following table provides the composition of notes payable at December 31:\n\nThe effective interest rate relating to the aforementioned notes payable was 13.09% for 2000 and 1999. The interest expense was a p oximately $8.8 million and $9.5 million for the years ended December 31, 2000 and 1999, re s p e c t i v e l y. pr\n\n## (12) Private Placement of Common Shares\n\nIn July 2000, the Company entered into subscription agreements for the sale of 877,946 new common shares of the Company. Closing with respect to such sale took place on July 14, 2000 and August 29, 2000. These agreements were signed with accredited investors in transactions exempt from registration pursuant to the exemptions provided in Section 4(2) and Regulation D of the Act. The purchase price of each share was $6.97. The aggregate amount of proceeds to the Company from the private placement was $6.1 million.\n\nIn April 2000, the Company entered into two separate subscription agreements for the sale of an aggregate of 354,777 new common share s of the Company. Of the total new shares, closing with respect to 254,777 shares took place on April 10, 2000, and closing with respect to 100,000 shares took place on May 4, 2000. These agreements were signed with certain foreign persons in transactions exempt fro m registration under the United States Securities Act of 1933 (the 'Act') pursuant the exemption provided in Regulation S of the Act. The weighted average purchase price of each share was $7.50. The aggregate amount of proceeds to the Company from the private placement was $2.7 million. Under each of the agreements, for each two shares of common stock purchased in the private placement, the accre d i t e d investors were issued one warrant, expiring in each case on the one year anniversary date of the subscription agreement, to purchase a share of Euronet common stock at a weighted average exercise price of $12.50.\n\nIn Febru a ry 2000, the Company entered into two subscription agreements for the sale of an aggregate of 650,000 new common shares of the C o m p a . Closing under these agreements took place on March 13, 2000. These agreements were signed with certain accredited investors in ny transactions exempt from registration pursuant to the exemptions provided in Section 4(2) and Regulation D of the Act. The purchase price of each share was $6.615, which re p resents 90% of the average closing price for the ten trading days prior to and including Febru a ry 15, 2000. The aggregate amount of proceeds to the Company from the private placement was $4.3 million. Under each of the agreements, for each two shares of common stock purchased in the private placement, the purchasers were issued one warrant to purchase a share of Euro n e t common stock at an exercise price of $11.615, expiring in each case on the one year anniversary date of the subscription agreement.\n\n## (13) Credit Facility\n\nOn June 28, 2000 the Company entered into an unsecured revolving credit agreement (the 'Credit Agreement') providing a facility of up to $4.0 million from three shareholders as follows: DST Systems in the amount of $2.4 million; Hungarian-American Enterprise Fund in the amount of $1.0 million; and Michael J. Brown in the amount of $600,000. The facility was available to be drawn upon until December 28, 2000, and repayment of any draws was due June 28, 2001. On December 28, 2000 the facility was amended and renewed for a further six months and is available to be drawn until June 28, 2001 with repayment of any draws being due December 28, 2001. Draws on the facility will accrue interest at 10 percent per annum, payable quart e r l y. A 'commitment' fee was paid for the initial facility of 100,000 warr a n t s issued pro-rata to the lenders with a warrant strike price set at the average share price, as quoted on NASDAQ for 10 trading days prior to the warrant issue date, less 10 percent. An additional fee of 100,000 warrants, on the same terms, was paid for the subsequent extension of the facility. Wa rrants are to be issued on similar terms and conditions for each draw on the facility at the rate of 80,000 warrants for each $1.0 million of funds drawn. As of March 1, 2001, the Company had not made any draws under the Credit Agreement.\n\n## (14) Forward Foreign Exchange Contracts\n\nOn May 26, 1999, the Company entered into foreign currency call options with Merrill Lynch to purchase Euro 79.3 million for $85.9 million and foreign currency put options to sell $83.6 million for Euro 79.3 million on May 26, 2000 (the 'Settlement Date'). Under such contracts, the Company would be re q u i red to make a cash payment to Merrill Lynch on May 31, 2000, should the Euro weaken against the US Dollar and fall below $1.055 (the 'Floor Rate') on the Settlement Date. At the same time, should the Euro strengthen against the U.S. dollar and rise above $1.0835 to the Euro (the 'Ceiling Rate') the Company would receive a cash payment from Merrill Lynch depending upon the Euro/Dollar exchange rate on such Settlement Date.\n\n3 5", + "recall": 0.9803921568627451, + "true_md": "During December 1998, the Company re p u rchased notes with a face value of DM 26.4 million and 31,173 warrants for a total purc h a s e price of $5.5 million. This re p u rchase was accounted for as an extinguishment of debt with a resulting $2.9 million (net of income taxes of $1.5 million) recognized as an extraord i n a ry gain on such extinguishment. The extinguishment gain (pre-tax) re p resents the diff e re n c e between the allocated carrying value of the debt extinguished ($10.2 million) and the consideration paid ($5.5 million), offset by the write- o ff of the allocated unamortized deferred financing costs ($341,000). \n\nThe following table provides the composition of notes payable at December 31:\n\nThe effective interest rate relating to the aforementioned notes payable was 13.09% for 2000 and 1999. The interest expense was a p p roximately $8.8 million and $9.5 million for the years ended December 31, 2000 and 1999, re s p e c t i v e l y. \n\nIn July 2000, the Company entered into subscription agreements for the sale of 877,946 new common shares of the Company. Closing with respect to such sale took place on July 14, 2000 and August 29, 2000. These agreements were signed with accredited investors in transactions exempt from registration pursuant to the exemptions provided in Section 4(2) and Regulation D of the Act. The purchase price of each share was $6.97. The aggregate amount of proceeds to the Company from the private placement was $6.1 million. \n\nIn April 2000, the Company entered into two separate subscription agreements for the sale of an aggregate of 354,777 new common share s of the Company. Of the total new shares, closing with respect to 254,777 shares took place on April 10, 2000, and closing with respect to 100,000 shares took place on May 4, 2000. These agreements were signed with certain foreign persons in transactions exempt fro m registration under the United States Securities Act of 1933 (the “Act”) pursuant the exemption provided in Regulation S of the Act. The weighted average purchase price of each share was $7.50. The aggregate amount of proceeds to the Company from the private placement was $2.7 million. Under each of the agreements, for each two shares of common stock purchased in the private placement, the accre d i t e d investors were issued one warrant, expiring in each case on the one year anniversary date of the subscription agreement, to purchase a share of Euronet common stock at a weighted average exercise price of $12.50. \n\nIn Febru a ry 2000, the Company entered into two subscription agreements for the sale of an aggregate of 650,000 new common shares of the C o m p a n y. Closing under these agreements took place on March 13, 2000. These agreements were signed with certain accredited investors in transactions exempt from registration pursuant to the exemptions provided in Section 4(2) and Regulation D of the Act. The purchase price of each share was $6.615, which re p resents 90% of the average closing price for the ten trading days prior to and including Febru a ry 15, 2000. The aggregate amount of proceeds to the Company from the private placement was $4.3 million. Under each of the agreements, for each two shares of common stock purchased in the private placement, the purchasers were issued one warrant to purchase a share of Euro n e t common stock at an exercise price of $11.615, expiring in each case on the one year anniversary date of the subscription agreement. \n\nOn June 28, 2000 the Company entered into an unsecured revolving credit agreement (the “Credit Agreement”) providing a facility of up to $4.0 million from three shareholders as follows: DST Systems in the amount of $2.4 million; Hungarian-American Enterprise Fund in the amount of $1.0 million; and Michael J. Brown in the amount of $600,000. The facility was available to be drawn upon until December 28, 2000, and repayment of any draws was due June 28, 2001. On December 28, 2000 the facility was amended and renewed for a further six months and is available to be drawn until June 28, 2001 with repayment of any draws being due December 28, 2001. Draws on the facility will accrue interest at 10 percent per annum, payable quart e r l y. A “commitment” fee was paid for the initial facility of 100,000 warr a n t s issued pro-rata to the lenders with a warrant strike price set at the average share price, as quoted on NASDAQ for 10 trading days prior to the warrant issue date, less 10 percent. An additional fee of 100,000 warrants, on the same terms, was paid for the subsequent extension of the facility. Wa rrants are to be issued on similar terms and conditions for each draw on the facility at the rate of 80,000 warrants for each $1.0 million of funds drawn. As of March 1, 2001, the Company had not made any draws under the Credit Agreement. \n\nOn May 26, 1999, the Company entered into foreign currency call options with Merrill Lynch to purchase Euro 79.3 million for $85.9 million and foreign currency put options to sell $83.6 million for Euro 79.3 million on May 26, 2000 (the “Settlement Date”). Under such contracts, the Company would be re q u i red to make a cash payment to Merrill Lynch on May 31, 2000, should the Euro weaken against the US Dollar and fall below $1.055 (the “Floor Rate”) on the Settlement Date. At the same time, should the Euro strengthen against the U.S. dollar and rise above $1.0835 to the Euro (the “Ceiling Rate”) the Company would receive a cash payment from Merrill Lynch depending upon the Euro/Dollar exchange rate on such Settlement Date. \n\n3 5\n\n## (14) Forward Foreign Exchange Contracts\n\n## (13) Credit Facility\n\n## (12) Private Placement of Common Shares" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9137995882965548, + "doc_id": "bd2f6f20fcc47ac095398431eadc2d53175fb8e8ec6f0db22fcf23f16ca46843", + "edit_distance": 0.29347826086956524, + "f1_score": 0.9759999999999999, + "meteor": 0.9712141393616948, + "precision": 0.9838709677419355, + "pred_md": "## we're serving up great meal choices\n\n## all day , everywhere\n\n## crossing the globe with Hormel Foods\n\nHormel Foods brands are fast-growing favorites around the world, particularly in Asia. We serve the world through exports of U.S.-made products and through in-country production facilities within key markets abroad, such as China and the Philippines. Popular international products include the SPAM family of products for Guam, Stagg chili for Germany, and chunky corned beef for the Philippines.\n\n12\n\nHormel Foods Corporation", + "recall": 0.9682539682539683, + "true_md": "## crossing the globe with Hormel Foods\n\nHormel Foods brands are fast-growing favorites around the world, particularly in Asia. We serve the world through exports of U.S.-made products and through in-country production facilities within key markets abroad, such as China and the Philippines. Popular international products include the SPAM family of products for Guam, Stagg chili for Germany, and chunky corned beef for the Philippines.\n\n12 Hormel Foods Corporation\n\nwe’re serving up great meal choices all day , everywhere" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9791016783983533, + "doc_id": "66481e83d5b2dc138148ac1bd3d95ffdd8cc31d721ff7bf5d2410c10c0599310", + "edit_distance": 0.3057324840764331, + "f1_score": 0.9955947136563875, + "meteor": 0.9034092847476772, + "precision": 0.9912280701754386, + "pred_md": "and operate MGM Grand Australia. This transaction closed in July 2004 with net proceeds to the Company of $136 million.\n\nThe results of the Golden Nugget Subsidiaries, Online and MGM Grand Australia are classified as discontinued operations in the accompanying consolidated statements of income for all periods presented. Net revenues of discontinued operations were $45 million, $231 million and $222 million, respectively, for the years ended December 31, 2004, 2003 and 2002. Included in income from discontinued operations is an allocation of interest expense based on the ratio of the net assets of the discontinued operations to the total consolidated net assets and debt of the Company. Interest allocated to discontinued operations was $2 million, $9 million and $9 million for the years ended December 31, 2004, 2003 and 2002, respectively. Included in discontinued operations for the year ended December 31, 2003 is a loss on disposal of Online of $7 million relating primarily to unrecoverable costs of computer hardware and software. Included in the tax benefit from discontinued operations for the year ended December 31, 2003 is $2 million of previously unrecognized tax benefits relating to prior year operating losses of Online. Included in discontinued operations for the year ended December 31, 2004 is a gain on the sale of the Golden Nugget Subsidiaries of $8 million and a gain on sale of the MGM Grand Australia Subsidiaries of $74 million.\n\n## Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nThe following table summarizes the assets and liabilities of discontinued operations (the Golden Nugget Subsidiaries and Online) as of December 31, 2003, included as assets and liabilities held for sale in the accompanying consolidated balance sheet:\n\n53", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "53\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nand operate MGM Grand Australia. This transaction closed in July 2004 with net proceeds to the Company of $136 million.\n\nThe following table summarizes the assets and liabilities of discontinued operations (the Golden Nugget Subsidiaries and Online) as of December 31, 2003, included as assets and liabilities held for sale in the accompanying consolidated balance sheet:\n\nThe results of the Golden Nugget Subsidiaries, Online and MGM Grand Australia are classified as discontinued operations in the accompanying consolidated statements of income for all periods presented. Net revenues of discontinued operations were $45 million, $231 million and $222 million, respectively, for the years ended December 31, 2004, 2003 and 2002. Included in income from discontinued operations is an allocation of interest expense based on the ratio of the net assets of the discontinued operations to the total consolidated net assets and debt of the Company. Interest allocated to discontinued operations was $2 million, $9 million and $9 million for the years ended December 31, 2004, 2003 and 2002, respectively. Included in discontinued operations for the year ended December 31, 2003 is a loss on disposal of Online of $7 million relating primarily to unrecoverable costs of computer hardware and software. Included in the tax benefit from discontinued operations for the year ended December 31, 2003 is $2 million of previously unrecognized tax benefits relating to prior year operating losses of Online. Included in discontinued operations for the year ended December 31, 2004 is a gain on the sale of the Golden Nugget Subsidiaries of $8 million and a gain on sale of the MGM Grand Australia Subsidiaries of $74 million." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9175247545060315, + "doc_id": "fbbd48a5624f578e5f7bf1784662d62c6be61a8a490052bef67dbb2e207b94fa", + "edit_distance": 0.43858131487889274, + "f1_score": 0.9562841530054644, + "meteor": 0.8788751976705459, + "precision": 0.9859154929577465, + "pred_md": "costs of labor; (iii) market conditions for finished products, including the supply and pricing of alternative proteins; (iv) effectiveness of advertising and marketing programs; (v) changes in consumer purchasing behavior; (vi) the ability of the company to successfully integrate newly acquired businesses into existing operations; (vii) risks associated with leverage, including cost increases due to rising interest rates; (viii) changes in domestic or foreign regulations and laws, including changes in accounting standards, environmental laws, occupational, health, and safety laws; (ix) issues related to food safety, including costs resulting from product recalls, regulatory compliance, and any related claims or litigation; (x) adverse results from ongoing litigation; (xi) access to foreign markets together with foreign economic conditions, including currency fluctuations; and (xii) the effect of, or changes in, general economic conditions. Please refer to Exhibit 99.1 attached to the company's Annual Report on Form 10-K for fiscal year ending October 30, 2004, for further information on the company's position regarding 'forward-looking' information.\n\n## Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosure About Market Risks\n\nHog Markets: The company's earnings are affected by fluctuations in the live hog market. To minimize the impact on earnings, the company has entered into contracts with producers for the purchase of hogs at formula-based prices over periods of up to 15 years. Contract formulas are based on hog production costs, hog futures, or hog primal values. Purchased hogs under contract accounted for 67 percent and 79 percent of the total hogs purchased by the company in fiscal 2004 and 2003, respectively. A hypothetical 10 percent change in the cash market would have impacted approximately 33 percent and 21 percent of the hogs purchased in fiscal 2004 and 2003, respectively, and would have had an immaterial effect on the company's results of operations. The contracts reduce volatility in hog prices and ensure a steady supply of quality hogs.\n\nCertain procurement contracts allow for future hog deliveries (firm commitments) to be forward priced. The company generally hedges these firm commitments by purchasing hog futures contracts. These futures contracts are designated and accounted for as fair value hedges. The change in the market value of such futures contracts has historically been, and is expected to continue to be, highly effective at offsetting changes in price movements of the hedged item. Changes in the fair value of the futures contracts, along with the gain or loss on the firm commitment, are markedto-market through earnings and are recorded on the consolidated statement of financial position as a current asset and liability, respectively. The fair value of the company's open futures contracts as of October 30, 2004, was $(662).\n\nThe company measures its market risk exposure on its October 30, 2004, hog futures contracts using a sensitivity analysis, which considers a hypothetical 10 percent change in market prices. A 10 percent increase in market prices would have negatively impacted\n\nthe fair value of the company's October 30, 2004, open contracts by $(1,747), which in turn would have lowered the company's cost of purchased hogs by a similar amount.\n\nTurkey Markets: The company raises or contracts on a yearly basis for live turkeys. Production costs in raising turkeys are subject primarily to fluctuations in feed grain prices and, to a lesser extent, fuel costs. To reduce the company's exposure to changes in grain prices, the company utilizes a hedge program to offset the fluctuation in the company's future direct grain purchases. This program utilizes corn and soybean meal futures, and these contracts are accounted for under cash flow hedge accounting. The open contracts are reported at their fair value of $(638), before tax, on the consolidated statement of financial position as of October 30, 2004.\n\nThe company measures its market risk exposure on its grain futures contracts using a sensitivity analysis, which considers a hypothetical 10 percent change in the market prices for grain. A 10 percent decrease in the market price for grain would have negatively impacted the fair value of the company's October 30, 2004, open grain contracts by $(3,003), which in turn would have lowered the company's cost on purchased grain by a similar amount.\n\nLong-Term Debt: A principal market risk affecting the company is the exposure to changes in interest rates on the company's fixed-rate, long-term debt. As of October 30, 2004, fixed-rate debt totaled $372,570 at rates ranging from 6.625 to 8.16 percent. Market risk for fixed-rate, long-term debt is estimated as the potential increase in fair value resulting from a hypothetical 10 percent decrease in interest rates, and amounts to approximately $10,288. The fair values of the company's long-term debt were estimated using discounted future cash flows based on the company's incremental borrowing rates for similar types of borrowing arrangements.\n\nInternational: The fair values of certain company assets are subject to fluctuations in foreign currencies. The majority of these assets were eliminated in the second quarter of fiscal 2004 when the company sold its remaining equity interest in the Spanish food company Campofrio Alimentacion, S.A. The company's remaining net asset position in foreign currencies as of October 30, 2004, was $65,420, with most of the exposure existing in Philippine pesos and Chinese yuan. Changes in currency exchange rates impact the fair values of company assets either currently through the consolidated statement of operations as currency gains/ losses, or by affecting other comprehensive income/loss.\n\nThe company measures its foreign currency exchange risk by using a 10 percent sensitivity analysis on the company's primary foreign net asset position, the Philippine peso, as of October 30, 2004. A 10 percent strengthening in the value of the peso relative to the U.S. dollar would result in other comprehensive income of $3,554, pre-tax. A 10 percent weakening in the value of the peso relative to the U.S. dollar would result in other comprehensive loss of the same amount.\n\n2004 Annual Report\n\n29", + "recall": 0.9283819628647215, + "true_md": "costs of labor; (iii) market conditions for finished products, includ- ing the supply and pricing of alternative proteins; (iv) effectiveness of advertising and marketing programs; (v) changes in consumer purchasing behavior; (vi) the ability of the company to successfully integrate newly acquired businesses into existing operations; (vii) risks associated with leverage, including cost increases due to rising interest rates; (viii) changes in domestic or foreign regulations and laws, including changes in accounting standards, environ- mental laws, occupational, health, and safety laws; (ix) issues related to food safety, including costs resulting from product recalls, regulatory compliance, and any related claims or litigation; (x) adverse results from ongoing litigation; (xi) access to foreign markets together with foreign economic conditions, including currency fluctuations; and (xii) the effect of, or changes in, general economic conditions. Please refer to Exhibit 99.1 attached to the company’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for fiscal year ending October 30, 2004, for further information on the company’s position regarding “forward-looking” information. \n\nHog Markets: The company’s earnings are affected by fluctu- ations in the live hog market. To minimize the impact on earnings, the company has entered into contracts with producers for the purchase of hogs at formula-based prices over periods of up to 15 years. Contract formulas are based on hog production costs, hog futures, or hog primal values. Purchased hogs under contract accounted for 67 percent and 79 percent of the total hogs pur- chased by the company in fiscal 2004 and 2003, respectively. A hypothetical 10 percent change in the cash market would have impacted approximately 33 percent and 21 percent of the hogs purchased in fiscal 2004 and 2003, respectively, and would have had an immaterial effect on the company’s results of operations.\n\nThe contracts reduce volatility in hog prices and ensure a steady supply of quality hogs.\n\nCertain procurement contracts allow for future hog deliveries (firm commitments) to be forward priced. The company generally hedges these firm commitments by purchasing hog futures con- tracts. These futures contracts are designated and accounted for as fair value hedges. The change in the market value of such futures contracts has historically been, and is expected to continue to be, highly effective at offsetting changes in price movements of the hedged item. Changes in the fair value of the futures contracts, along with the gain or loss on the firm commitment, are marked- to-market through earnings and are recorded on the consolidated statement of financial position as a current asset and liability, respectively. The fair value of the company’s open futures contracts as of October 30, 2004, was $(662).\n\nThe company measures its market risk exposure on its October 30, 2004, hog futures contracts using a sensitivity analysis, which considers a hypothetical 10 percent change in market prices. A 10 percent increase in market prices would have negatively impacted\n\nThe company measures its foreign currency exchange risk by using a 10 percent sensitivity analysis on the company’s primary foreign net asset position, the Philippine peso, as of October 30, 2004. A 10 percent strengthening in the value of the peso relative to the U.S. dollar would result in other comprehensive income of $3,554, pre-tax. A 10 percent weakening in the value of the peso relative to the U.S. dollar would result in other comprehensive loss of the same amount.\n\nInternational: The fair values of certain company assets are subject to fluctuations in foreign currencies. The majority of these assets were eliminated in the second quarter of fiscal 2004 when the company sold its remaining equity interest in the Spanish food company Campofrio Alimentacion, S.A. The company’s remaining net asset position in foreign currencies as of October 30, 2004, was $65,420, with most of the exposure existing in Philippine pesos and Chinese yuan. Changes in currency exchange rates impact the fair values of company assets either currently through the consolidated statement of operations as currency gains/ losses, or by affecting other comprehensive income/loss. \n\nLong-Term Debt: A principal market risk affecting the company is the exposure to changes in interest rates on the company’s fixed-rate, long-term debt. As of October 30, 2004, fixed-rate debt totaled $372,570 at rates ranging from 6.625 to 8.16 per- cent. Market risk for fixed-rate, long-term debt is estimated as the potential increase in fair value resulting from a hypothetical 10 percent decrease in interest rates, and amounts to approx- imately $10,288. The fair values of the company’s long-term debt were estimated using discounted future cash flows based on the company’s incremental borrowing rates for similar types of borrow- ing arrangements.\n\nThe company measures its market risk exposure on its grain futures contracts using a sensitivity analysis, which considers a hypothetical 10 percent change in the market prices for grain. A 10 percent decrease in the market price for grain would have neg- atively impacted the fair value of the company’s October 30, 2004, open grain contracts by $(3,003), which in turn would have lowered the company’s cost on purchased grain by a similar amount.\n\nTurkey Markets: The company raises or contracts on a yearly basis for live turkeys. Production costs in raising turkeys are sub- ject primarily to fluctuations in feed grain prices and, to a lesser extent, fuel costs. To reduce the company’s exposure to changes in grain prices, the company utilizes a hedge program to offset the fluctuation in the company’s future direct grain purchases. This program utilizes corn and soybean meal futures, and these con- tracts are accounted for under cash flow hedge accounting. The open contracts are reported at their fair value of $(638), before tax, on the consolidated statement of financial position as of October 30, 2004.\n\nthe fair value of the company’s October 30, 2004, open contracts by $(1,747), which in turn would have lowered the company’s cost of purchased hogs by a similar amount. \n\n## Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosure About Market Risks\n\n2004 Annual Report 29" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.583526016818016, + "doc_id": "defde788fa0a351eb54e6fd2168174414594195c08d4fc8401f1d80b89926e71", + "edit_distance": 0.375, + "f1_score": 0.7619047619047619, + "meteor": 0.7929236317559335, + "precision": 0.7272727272727273, + "pred_md": "## Consolidated Balance Sheets\n\nAs of December 31,\n\nFor additional information, see the Company's Annual Report on Form 10-K.\n\n33", + "recall": 0.8, + "true_md": "## Consolidated Balance Sheets\n\n33\n\nFor additional information, see the Company’s Annual Report on Form 10-K." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8262186501429266, + "doc_id": "a89e787a2444ab6313b745cda9b7aaeb920e5b1800f9fb4b68bb1ba405fbc9ba", + "edit_distance": 0.12878787878787878, + "f1_score": 0.8804347826086956, + "meteor": 0.9027459953007356, + "precision": 0.8901098901098901, + "pred_md": "At First Financial Bankshares, we are not a complicated company. Our value is easy to calculate because our numbers are easy to follow. The same holds true for our values. We believe in doing business the right way - from our boardrooms to our mailrooms. Maybe it' s our W est T exas roots, but we still appreciate the days when a handshake was binding. The relationships we have developed with our customers bear this out. More and more, in communities across T exas, we're the banks people turn to for financial services. The result has been strong, consistent, above-sector performance for our shareholders. How do values drive value? Let us explain.", + "recall": 0.8709677419354839, + "true_md": "At First F inancial B ankshar es, we are not a complicated company. Our value is easy to calculate because our numbers are easy to follow. The same holds true for our values. We believe in doing business the right way – from our boardrooms to our mailrooms. Maybe it’s our West Texas roots, but we still appreciate the days when a handshake was binding. The relationships we have developed with our customers bear this out. More and more, in communities across Texas, we’re the banks people turn to for financial services. The result has been strong, consistent, above-sector perform- ance for our shareholders. How do values drive value? Let us explain." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7172649855169327, + "doc_id": "62a7f178ec28d2a9a997526d3420f2e676dcc2f36d2f8f880e4d4848d5c23ed5", + "edit_distance": 0.4307692307692308, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9441590274302312, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## EXECUTIVES\n\nFrom left: Mitsuhiko Yamashita, Tadao Takahashi, Toshiyuki Shiga, Carlos Ghosn, Itaru Koeda, Hiroto Saikawa, Carlos Tavares\n\nFrom left: Mitsuhiko Yamashita, Tadao Takahashi, Toshiyuki Shiga, Carlos Ghosn, Itaru Koeda, Hiroto Saikawa, Carlos Tavares\n\n## BOARD OF DIRECTORS AND AUDITORS\n\n## Representative Board Members\n\nCarlos Ghosn\n\nPresident and Co-Chairman\n\nItaru Koeda\n\nCo-Chairman\n\nToshiyuki Shiga\n\nCo-Chairman\n\nBoard Members\n\nTadao Takahashi\n\nHiroto Saikawa\n\nMitsuhiko Yamashita\n\nCarlos Tavares\n\nShemaya Lévy\n\nPatrick Pélata\n\nAuditors\n\nHisayoshi Kojima\n\nShinji Ichishima\n\nKeishi Imamura\n\nHaruo Murakami\n\n## EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE MEMBERS\n\nCarlos Ghosn\n\nToshiyuki Shiga\n\nItaru Koeda\n\nTadao Takahashi\n\nHiroto Saikawa\n\nMitsuhiko Yamashita\n\nCarlos Tavares\n\nAlain-Pierre Raynaud\n\n(As of June 21, 2005)\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\n5\n\nEXECUTIVES", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## EXECUTIVES\n\nEXECUTIVES\n\nFrom left: Mitsuhiko Yamashita, Tadao Takahashi, Toshiyuki Shiga, Carlos Ghosn, Itaru Koeda, Hiroto Saikawa, Carlos Tavares\n\n## BOARD OF DIRECTORS AND AUDITORS\n\n## EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE MEMBERS\n\n## Representative Board Members\n\nCarlos Ghosn President and Co-Chairman\n\nItaru Koeda Co-Chairman\n\nToshiyuki Shiga Co-Chairman\n\n(As of June 21, 2005)\n\n## Board Members\n\n## Auditors\n\nTadao Takahashi\n\nHiroto Saikawa\n\nMitsuhiko Yamashita\n\nCarlos Tavares\n\nShemaya Lévy \n\nPatrick Pélata\n\nHisayoshi Kojima\n\nShinji Ichishima\n\nKeishi Imamura\n\nHaruo Murakami\n\nCarlos Ghosn\n\nToshiyuki Shiga\n\nItaru Koeda\n\nTadao Takahashi\n\nHiroto Saikawa\n\nMitsuhiko Yamashita\n\nCarlos Tavares\n\nAlain-Pierre Raynaud\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 5" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9070304361826567, + "doc_id": "88f15e548db47b2c24484200dc0c000ccaaa598c6b146b85461f3b62530206b0", + "edit_distance": 0.07142857142857142, + "f1_score": 0.9635036496350365, + "meteor": 0.9680013044660011, + "precision": 0.9705882352941176, + "pred_md": "66\n\n## Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n## NOTE 16 - CONSOLIDATING CONDENSED FINANCIAL INFORMATION\n\nThe Company's subsidiaries (excluding MGM Grand Detroit, LLC and certain minor subsidiaries) have fully and unconditionally guaranteed, on a joint and several basis, payment of the Senior Credit Facility, the senior notes and the senior subordinated notes. Separate condensed financial statement information for the subsidiary guarantors and non-guarantors as of December 31, 2004 and 2003 and for the years ended December 31, 2004, 2003 and 2002 is as follows:", + "recall": 0.9565217391304348, + "true_md": "Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements 66\n\n## NOTE 16 — CONSOLIDATING CONDENSED FINANCIAL INFORMATION\n\nThe Company’s subsidiaries (excluding MGM Grand Detroit, LLC and certain minor subsidiaries) have fully and unconditionally guaranteed, on a joint and several basis, payment of the Senior Credit Facility, the senior notes and the senior subordinated notes. Separate condensed financial statement information for the subsidiary guarantors and non-guarantors as of December 31, 2004 and 2003 and for the years ended December 31, 2004, 2003 and 2002 is as follows:" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6285862344706586, + "doc_id": "b9c43cda45aaa10ed9d40455162fd5e0cf961a7103a9b1eb46900c29cd7b69a4", + "edit_distance": 0.7457627118644068, + "f1_score": 0.8363636363636364, + "meteor": 0.7197325288693553, + "precision": 0.9324324324324325, + "pred_md": "18\n\n## City National Bank, Mineral W ells\n\n## Office\n\n1800 E. Hubbard Mineral Wells, Texas 76068\n\nChartered 1925\n\n## Senior Officers\n\nKen A. Williamson Chairman of the Board, President and Chief Executive Officer\n\nBrad Seay\n\nExecutive Vice President, Lending\n\nEddie Gregory\n\nVice President\n\nKay Hudspeth\n\nCashier\n\nMike Mearse Vice President\n\nKen A. Williamson Chairman of the Board, President and Chief Executive Officer\n\n## Directors\n\nKen A. Williamson\n\nChairman of the Board, President and Chief Executive Officer\n\nF. Scott Dueser\n\nFirst Financial Bankshares, Inc.\n\nTerry L. Murphy President and Chief Executive Officer, Murphy and Murphy, Inc.\n\nDon O'Neal\n\nDon O'Neal Distributing Company, Inc., O'Neal Enterprises, Inc.\n\nDavid Ramsey, M.D.\n\nFamily Practice Center\n\n## Mineral Wells 26 % Palo Pinto County Deposit Market Share", + "recall": 0.7582417582417582, + "true_md": "## City National B ank, Mineral Wells\n\nBrad Seay Executive Vice President\n\nJimmy Seay Investments and Ranching\n\nWalter Joe Thomas, D.D.S. Dentist\n\nDavid Ramsey, M.D. Family Practice Center\n\nDon O’Neal Don O’Neal Distributing Company, Inc., O’Neal Enterprises, Inc.\n\nTerry L. Murphy President and Chief Executive Officer, Murphy and Murphy, Inc.\n\nF. Scott Dueser First Financial Bankshares, Inc.\n\nKen A. Williamson Chairman of the Board, President and Chief Executive Officer\n\nOffice 1800 E. Hubbard MineralWells,Texas 76068 Chartered 1925\n\nKen A. Williamson Chairman of the Board, President and Chief Executive Officer\n\nBrad Seay Executive Vice President, Lending\n\nEddie Gregory Vice President\n\nKay Hudspeth Cashier\n\nMike Mearse Vice President\n\n## Directors\n\n## Senior Officers\n\n## Office 1800 E. Hubbard\n\nMineral Wells 2 6\n\n18\n\nKen A. Williamson Chairman of the Board, President and Chief Executive Officer\n\nMineral Wells Return on Average Equity 18.02 13.22 2 6 % Palo Pinto County Deposit Market Share" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9210251357909994, + "doc_id": "96cd9ea5ddf170729bdca7ec1eb08395db0e0dcb28559b67b6bbcb4b88986505", + "edit_distance": 0.08348134991119005, + "f1_score": 0.9783693843594011, + "meteor": 0.9556636394310667, + "precision": 0.9832775919732442, + "pred_md": "PEOPLE OF SHENTEL\n\nTarinda Showman has worked part-time in the Shentel Communications Center since she was a summer intern in 1998. She initially joined the Conicville, VA Volunteer Fire Department to help raise funds, but when she ran her first emergency call she was hooked. During her six years in the Department, she served a two-year stint as captain and currently holds the office of secretary. In 1999, she joined the Mount Jackson, VA Rescue Squad. Each week she pulls two 12-hour shifts with the rescue squad and spends at least 10 hours at the fire department.\n\n'I do it because one day it might be my family. It's always somebody's family.'\n\nTarinda Showman\n\nDuring his 36 years at Shentel, David Ferguson, Vice President-Customer Services, has been involved in a variety of community, civic and church organizations such as the Woodstock Rotary Club, the American Cancer Society and the March of Dimes. David is a charter member of the Board of Directors of the Shenandoah County Free Clinic and served as chairman of the fund-raising drive. The clinic opened its doors in June 2002, offering medical, dental and pharmaceutical services to county citizens who would not otherwise receive these services. In the first six months, more than 300 patients were served.\n\nFor their work at the clinic, David and his wife, Janet, received the Unsung Hero Award from Governor Mark Warner in 2003, and David earned the 2003 Beyond the Call Award from the United States Telecommunications Association.\n\n'It is so rewarding - you can see it on the faces of the people.'\n\nBrian Bosley, a Sprint PCS business-to-business sales representative with Shentel for the past three years, has always enjoyed sports. He takes his passion, knowledge and experience in sports, and volunteers his time with young people in his community. Brian has been active in the very successful Bridgewater, Virginia Community Little League program for the past four years. He currently serves as vice president of the Girls Minor League Softball. Brian also finds time to coach his daughters' T-ball and basketball teams.\n\n'I get a great sense of satisfaction from teaching kids and watching them grow and learn.'\n\nBrian Bosley\n\nCindy Rinker, corporate content editor at Shentel since October 2002, was recently named the 2004 chairman of the Woodstock, Virginia Downtown Enhancement Committee's Promotion Committee. The Downtown Enhancement group was established to find ways to revitalize downtown Woodstock. As a member for the past four years, Cindy has helped develop, plan and promote an impressive list of events from Light Up Woodstock at Christmastime to a street dance in spring, to Halloween on Court Square in October. The ultimate goal is to create a downtown area that is lively, attractive and reflective of Woodstock's important historical significance to the Shenandoah Valley and the Commonwealth of Virginia.\n\n'It is important to preserve the beauty and history of this area for the generations to come.'\n\nSHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY\n\n4\n\n■\n\nDavid Ferguson\n\nDavid Ferguson\n\nCindy Rinker\n\nCindy Rinker", + "recall": 0.9735099337748344, + "true_md": "## PEOPLE OF SHENTEL\n\nSHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY ■ 4\n\nTarinda Showman has worked part-time in the Shentel Communications Center since she was a summer intern in 1998. She initially joined the Conicville, VA Volunteer Fire Department to help raise funds, but when she ran her first emergency call she was hooked. During her six years in the Department, she served a two-year stint as captain and currently holds the office of secretary. In 1999, she joined the Mount Jackson, VA Rescue Squad. Each week she pulls two 12-hour shifts with the rescue squad and spends at least 10 hours at the fire department. \n\n“I do it because one day it might be my family. It’s always somebody’s family .”\n\nDuring his 36 years at Shentel, David Ferguson, Vice President-Customer Services, has been involved in a variety of community, civic and church organizations such as the Woodstock Rotary Club, the American Cancer Society and the March of Dimes. David is a charter member of the Board of Directors of the Shenandoah County Free Clinic and served as chairman of the fund-raising drive. The clinic opened its doors in June 2002, offering medical, dental and pharmaceutical services to county citizens who would not otherwise receive these services. In the first six months, more than 300 patients were served.\n\nFor their work at the clinic, David and his wife, Janet, received the Unsung Hero Award from Governor Mark Warner in 2003, and David earned the 2003 Beyond the Call Award from the United States Telecommunications Association.\n\n“It is so rewarding - you can see it on the faces of the people.” \n\nBrian Bosley, a Sprint PCS business-to-business sales representative with Shentel for the past three years, has always enjoyed sports. He takes his passion, knowledge and experience in sports, and volunteers his time with young people in his community. Brian has been active in the very successful Bridgewater, Virginia Community Little League program for the past four years. He currently serves as vice president of the Girls Minor League Softball. Brian also finds time to coach his daughters’ T-ball and basketball teams.\n\n“I get a great sense of satisfaction from teaching kids and watching them grow and learn.”\n\nCindy Rinker, corporate content editor at Shentel since October 2002, was recently named the 2004 chairman of the Woodstock, Virginia Downtown Enhancement Committee’s Promotion Committee. The Downtown Enhancement group was established to find ways to revitalize downtown Woodstock. As a member for the past four years, Cindy has helped develop, plan and promote an impressive list of events from Light Up Woodstock at Christmastime to a street dance in spring, to Halloween on Court Square in October. The ultimate goal is to create a downtown area that is lively, attractive and reflective of Woodstock’s important historical significance to the Shenandoah Valley and the Commonwealth of Virginia.\n\n“It is important to preserve the beauty and history of this area for the generations to come.”\n\nCindy Rinker\n\nBrian Bosley\n\nDavid Ferguson\n\nTarinda Showman" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9136960580166528, + "doc_id": "68fa7498fa74730cc2d7cd6bde0bc5fa48d9844d5cf064014e0513fd9091dc9f", + "edit_distance": 0.25225225225225223, + "f1_score": 0.9871794871794873, + "meteor": 0.9830899681408586, + "precision": 0.9871794871794872, + "pred_md": "## fresh ideas are only a click away\n\n- > Visit www.hormel.com/personalchef for easy recipes, helpful tips and ideas, detailed product information, and money-saving special offers.\n\n## Your Personal Chef With Fresh Ideas is your family's go-to solution\n\nDrop in anytime for fast and delicious meal ideas driven by your individual tastes and preferences. Whether it's a mid-week dinner or a weekend breakfast, Your Personal Chef With Fresh Ideas lets you make the decisions, and then does almost all the work for you.\n\nHormel Foods Corporation | 1 Hormel Place | Austin, Minnesota 55912-3680 | www.hormel.com", + "recall": 0.9871794871794872, + "true_md": "## fresh ideas are only a click away\n\n- > Visit www.hormel.com/personalchef for easy recipes, helpful tips and ideas, detailed product information, and money-saving special offers.\n\nDrop in anytime for fast and delicious meal ideas driven by your individual tastes and preferences. Whether it's a mid-week dinner or a weekend breakfast, Your Personal Chef With Fresh Ideas lets you make the decisions, and then does almost all the work for you.\n\nYour Personal Chef With Fresh Ideas is your family's go-to solution\n\nHormel Foods Corporation | 1Hormel Place | Austin,Minnesota 55912-3680 | www.hormel.com" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8935278236927295, + "doc_id": "58d3038fd527f470e54a08b9c514768c76b79019e9c1a1c85838f7f23909e2b5", + "edit_distance": 0.7542662116040956, + "f1_score": 0.9425287356321839, + "meteor": 0.6635516415868673, + "precision": 0.9715639810426541, + "pred_md": "## 18. Contributed Equity (continued)\n\n## (b) Santos Employee Share Acquisition Plan (continued)\n\nSummary of share movements in the Plan during 2004 (and comparative 2003 information):\n\nShares are allocated at a price equal to the weighted average sale price of the Company's ordinary shares on the Australian Stock Exchange during the one week period up to and including the Grant Date. This is shown as fair value per share for shares granted during the year. The fair value of shares distributed from the trust during the year and remaining in the trust at the end of the financial year is the market price of shares of the Company on the Australian Stock Exchange as at close of trading on the respective dates.\n\nDistributions during the year occurred at various dates throughout the year and therefore have not been separately listed.\n\nThe amounts recognised in the financial statements of the Santos Group and the Company in relation to the Santos Employee Share Acquisition Plan during the year were:\n\nAt 31 December 2004, the total number of shares acquired under the Plan since its commencement was 1,874,287.\n\n## (c) Santos Employee Share Purchase Plan\n\nThe Santos Employee Share Purchase Plan was approved by shareholders at the Annual General Meeting on 15 May 1997 and its continuation, with amendment, approved at the Annual General Meeting on 5 May 2000.\n\n## General Employee Participation\n\nThe Plan is open to all employees (other than a casual employee or Director of the Company) determined by the Board who are continuing employees at the date of the offer. However, employees who are not resident in Australia at the time of an offer under the Plan and those who have participated in the Executive Long Term Incentive Plan during the year will not be eligible to participate in that offer unless the Board otherwise decides.\n\nUnder the Plan, eligible employees may be offered the opportunity to subscribe for or acquire fully paid ordinary shares in the capital of the Company at a discount to market price, subject to restrictions, including on disposal, determined by the Board (which has been a period of one year for issues so far). The subscription or acquisition price is Market Value (being the weighted average sale price of the Company's ordinary shares on the Australian Stock Exchange during the one week period up to and including the offer date) less any discount determined by the Board (5% for issues so far). Under the Plan, at the discretion of the Board, financial assistance may be provided to employees to subscribe for and acquire shares under the Plan. The 5% discount constitutes financial assistance for these purposes. Participants are entitled to vote, receive dividends and participate in bonus and rights issues while the shares are restricted.\n\nOn 26 November 2004, the Company issued 32,400 ordinary shares to 49 eligible employees at a subscription price of $8.14 per share under the Plan. The total market value of those shares on the issue date was $287,064 and the total amount received from employees for those shares was $249,480.\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\n63", + "recall": 0.9151785714285714, + "true_md": "## 18. Contributed Equity (continued)\n\n## (c) Santos Employee Share Purchase Plan\n\n## General Employee Participation\n\nOn 26 November 2004, the Company issued 32,400 ordinary shares to 49 eligible employees at a subscription price of $8.14 per share under the Plan. The total market value of those shares on the issue date was $287,064 and the total amount received from employees for those shares was $249,480.\n\nUnder the Plan, eligible employees may be offered th opportunity to subscribe for or acquire fully paid ordinary shares in the capital of the Company at a discount to market price, subject to restrictions, includin g on disposal, determined by the Board (which has been a period of one year for issues so far). The subscription or acquisition price is Market V alue (being the weighted average sale price of the Company’s ordinary shares on the Australian Stock Exchange during the one week period up to and including the offer date) less any discount determined by the Board (5% for issues so far). Under the Plan, at the discretion of the Boar d, financial assistance may be provided to employees to subscribe for and acquire shares under the Plan. The 5% discount constitutes financi al assistance for these purposes. Participants are entitled to vote, receive dividends and participate in bonus and rights issues while the shares are r estricted.\n\nThe Plan is open to all employees (other than a casual employee or Dir ector of the Company) determined by the Board who are continuing employees at the date of the offer. However, employees who are not resid ent in Australia at the time of an offer under the Plan and those who have participated in the Executive Long Term Incentive Plan during th e year will not be eligible to participate in that offer unless the Board otherwise decides.\n\nThe Santos Employee Share Purchase Plan was approved by shareholders at the Annual General Meeting on 15 May 1997 and its continuation, with amendment, approved at the Annual General Meeting on 5 May 2000.\n\nAt 31 December 2004, the total number of shares acquired under th e Plan since its commencement was 1,874,287.\n\nShares are allocated at a price equal to the weighted average sale price of the Company’s ordinary shares on the Australian Stock Exchange during the one week period up to and including the Grant Date. This is shown as fair value per share for shares granted during the year. The fair value of shares distributed from the trust during the year and remaining in th trust at the end of the financial year is the market price of shares of the Company on the Australian Stock Exchange as at close of trading on the r espective dates.\n\nDistributions during the year occurred at various dates throughout th year and therefore have not been separately listed.\n\nThe amounts recognised in the financial statements of the Santos Group and the Company in relation to the Santos Employee Share Acquisition Plan during the year were:\n\nSummary of share movements in the Plan during 2004 (and comparative 2003 information):\n\n## (b) Santos Employee Share Acquisition Plan (continued)\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\n63" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9258283476132939, + "doc_id": "de6bfb54c07e8628a11d3a34ade20d6ba846e0e26d7f9091e7ee000fdc6d5b7f", + "edit_distance": 0.8561643835616438, + "f1_score": 0.9832775919732443, + "meteor": 0.7890097602806255, + "precision": 0.9832775919732442, + "pred_md": "Volume: Nissan will achieve global sales of 4.2 million units in fiscal 2008-an increase of 812,000 units over fiscal 2004.\n\nROIC: Nissan will achieve a 20 percent or higher return on invested capital on average over the course of the plan, excluding cash on hand.\n\nTo meet this commitment, over the NISSAN Value-Up period we will launch 28 new products, including 10 models that are highly innovative in their concept and benefits.\n\nOur investment in advanced technology continues. From fiscal 2002 to 2005 we have increased spending on research and development by 50 percent. Over the next three years we will invest a further 5 percent of net sales annually, creating new and exciting technologies to benefit our customers.\n\nDuring NISSAN Value-Up we will pursue several key business opportunities:\n\n- · Our Infiniti luxury brand will extend its reach into new markets such as China and Russia and continue to establish its credibility as a Tier-1 luxury player.\n- · We will develop our Light Commercial Vehicle business into a fully competitive global operation through new market and product entries.\n- · We will take a more efficient global sourcing approach to maximize our opportunities and minimize our overall costs as we grow. Our engineering, production and purchasing functions will continue their acceleration towards being fully integrated global operations.\n- · We will continue to invest in new and emerging markets, including China, India and Russia.\n\nNISSAN Value-Up also delivers increased value for our shareholders through a clear and well-defined dividend strategy. By the end of the plan period, we will pay an annual dividend of no less than ¥40 per share, a 66 percent increase over fiscal 2004.\n\n## Share price performance\n\nWhat should investors expect from Nissan's share price?\n\nOver the long-term, share prices reflect fundamentals. But in the short-term share prices are driven by performance against expectations.\n\nIn Nissan's case, recent share price trends signal market expectations that greater uncertainty will result in lower growth. So our challenge is to both manage those expectations and to exceed them. This supports our belief in a high level of disclosure and transparency.\n\nOur business plans and commitments, and our ability to communicate our strategy clearly, are the most effective means to convey transparency. But we recognize that financial announcements alone are no longer sufficient communication for the markets. We need to provide more forward-looking information and to avoid surprises that create uncertainty for shareholders and investors.\n\nWe intend to serve the professional investment community better in fiscal 2005. We will also extend our welcome to individual investors-whose numbers grew by 51,323 in fiscal 2004, increasing our list to 193,000 shareholders.\n\nThat growing interest in Nissan was apparent in the turnout of more than 1,800 people at our June 21 shareholders' meeting in Yokohama. Questions from the shareholders were many and varied, but it was encouraging to hear in each one a passionate commitment to Nissan.\n\nThis year, and in the future, I hope we merit such support from all our shareholders as we create lasting value in a transparent way.\n\nCarlos Ghosn President and Chief Executive Officer\n\nCarlos Ghosn President and Chief Executive Officer\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\n3\n\nLETTER FROM CEO", + "recall": 0.9832775919732442, + "true_md": "Volume: Nissan will achieve global sales of 4.2 million units in fiscal 2008—an increase of 812,000 units over fiscal 2004.\n\nROIC: Nissan will achieve a 20 percent or higher return on invested capital on average over the course of the plan, excluding cash on hand.\n\nWhat should investors expect from Nissan’s share price? \n\nOver the long-term, share prices reflect fundamentals. But in the short-term share prices are driven by performance against expectations.\n\nIn Nissan’s case, recent share price trends signal market expectations that greater uncertainty will result in lower growth. So our challenge is to both manage those expectations and to exceed them. This supports our belief in a high level of disclosure and transparency.\n\nOur business plans and commitments, and our ability to communicate our strategy clearly, are the most effective means to convey transparency. But we recognize that financial announcements alone are no longer sufficient communication for the markets. We need to provide more forward-looking information and to avoid surprises that create uncertainty for shareholders and investors. \n\nWe intend to serve the professional investment community better in fiscal 2005. We will also extend our welcome to individual investors—whose numbers grew by 51,323 in fiscal 2004, increasing our list to 193,000 shareholders. \n\nThat growing interest in Nissan was apparent in the turnout of more than 1,800 people at our June 21 shareholders’ meeting in Yokohama. Questions from the shareholders were many and varied, but it was encouraging to hear in each one a passionate commitment to Nissan. \n\nThis year, and in the future, I hope we merit such support from all our shareholders as we create lasting value in a transparent way.\n\nNISSAN Value-Up also delivers increased value for our shareholders through a clear and well-defined dividend strategy. By the end of the plan period, we will pay an annual dividend of no less than ¥40 per share, a 66 percent increase over fiscal 2004.\n\nDuring NISSAN Value-Up we will pursue several key business opportunities:\n\nOur investment in advanced technology continues. From fiscal 2002 to 2005 we have increased spending on research and development by 50 percent. Over the next three years we will invest a further 5 percent of net sales annually, creating new and exciting technologies to benefit our customers.\n\nTo meet this commitment, over the NISSAN Value-Up period we will launch 28 new products, including 10 models that are highly innovative in their concept and benefits.\n\n## Share price performance\n\nLETTER FROM CEO\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 3\n\nCarlos Ghosn President and Chief Executive Officer\n\n- • Our Infiniti luxury brand will extend its reach into new markets such as China and Russia and continue to establish its credibility as a Tier-1 luxury player.\n\n- • We will develop our Light Commercial Vehicle business into a fully competitive global operation through new market and product entries.\n\n- • We will take a more efficient global sourcing approach to maximize our opportunities and minimize our overall costs as we grow. Our engineering, production and purchasing functions will continue their acceleration towards being fully integrated global operations.\n\n- • We will continue to invest in new and emerging markets, including China, India and Russia." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.06441382535349108, + "doc_id": "56154cc3f7d54434b32c6932ce6a39e2a5d8bd3e77d3bdac3f5c01541f092b8d", + "edit_distance": 0.6807228915662651, + "f1_score": 0.6774193548387096, + "meteor": 0.7047603904543317, + "precision": 0.5121951219512195, + "pred_md": "FINANCIAL SECTION\n\n102\n\n## Overseas sales\n\nOverseas sales, which include export sales of the Company and its domestic consolidated subsidiaries and sales (other than exports to Japan) of the foreign consolidated subsidiaries, for the years ended March 31, 2005, 2004 and 2003 are summarized as follows:\n\nFiscal year 2003\n\nNorth America\n\nEurope\n\ncountries\n\nTotal\n\n(For the year ended Mar. 31, 2004)\n\nOther foreign\n\nMillions of yen\n\nOverseas sales ....................................................................................................................................................\n\n¥3,222,497\n\n¥1,201,035\n\n¥773,248\n\n¥5,196,780\n\nConsolidated net sales .................................................................................................................................\n\n7,429,219\n\nOverseas sales as a percentage of consolidated net sales ..........................................\n\n43.4%\n\n16.2%\n\n10.4%\n\n70.0%\n\nOverseas sales ....................................................................................................................................................\n\n¥2,785,334\n\n¥974,872\n\n¥763,368\n\n¥4,523,574\n\nConsolidated net sales .................................................................................................................................\n\n6,828,588\n\nOverseas sales as a percentage of consolidated net sales ..........................................\n\n40.8%\n\n14.3%\n\n11.1%\n\n66.2%\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\nFiscal year 2002\n\nNorth America\n\nEurope\n\ncountries\n\nTotal\n\n(For the year ended Mar. 31, 2003)\n\nOther foreign\n\nMillions of yen", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Overseas sales, which include export sales of the Company and its domestic consolidated subsidiaries and sales (other than exports to Japan) of the foreign consolidated subsidiaries, for the years ended March 31, 2005, 2004 and 2003 are summarized as follows:\n\n## Overseas sales\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\n102\n\nFINANCIAL SECTION" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9629948277128011, + "doc_id": "fb368f59e069b3066692a802cb9f7475353986c8fa94512cea2f6e81420ee8dc", + "edit_distance": 0.0332409972299169, + "f1_score": 0.9749999999999999, + "meteor": 0.9728323783114974, + "precision": 0.975, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO AND FORMING PART OF THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR THE FINANCIAL YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2000\n\nDuring the year Mermaid Marine relocated their Corporate Office. Office rental commitments contains the rental payable under the balance of the lease for Mermaid's former corporate office. This has been sublet for the balance of the term of the lease at a rental equal to the rental payable by Mermaid under the lease of $46,250. The new location is committed under a 5 plus 5 year lease term.\n\nSupply base rental commitments represents the lease of the King Bay Supply Base for a term of 21 years commencing 1 January 1999 with an option to renew the term for a further period of 21 years.\n\nThe Lessee is obliged to obtain all necessary approvals by 31 December 2000 for certain development of works ('Development Works') and to subsequently perform the works within 3 years.\n\nThe Development Works planned include breakwater, dredged basin, cyclone moorings, slipway, quay wall and industrial buildings.\n\nIf the Development Works are not completed within the prescribed period, the Lessor has the right (unless it is satisfied that the non completion was due principally to matters beyond the Company's control) to vary the Lease by retaking 2.3 hectares at the western extremity of the site.\n\nThe approved use of the site is for the purpose of conducting a multi purpose marine service facility and supply base including but not limited to open and covered laydown and storage, warehousing, production and storage of drilling mud and other drilling supplies, operating and maintaining vessels and floating plant together with associated docking, maintenance and engineering works. Any other uses require the prior written consent of the Lessor.\n\nRestrictions apply to the assignment or subletting of the site (or any part) without prior consent of the Lessor, although that consent cannot unreasonably be withheld (subject to 'usual' prudential requirements common to leases in Western Australia).\n\n51", + "recall": 0.975, + "true_md": "NOTES TO AND FORMING PART OF THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR THE FINANCIAL YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2000\n\nDuring the year Mermaid Marine relocated their Corporate Office. Office rental commitments contains the rental payable under the balance of the lease for Mermaid’s former corporate office. This has been sublet for the balance of the term of the lease at a rental equal to the rental payable by Mermaid under the lease of $46,250. The new location is committed under a 5 plus 5 year lease term.\n\nSupply base rental commitments represents the lease of the King Bay Supply Base for a term of 21 years commencing 1 January 1999 with an option to renew the term for a further period of 21 years.\n\nThe Lessee is obliged to obtain all necessary approvals by 31 December 2000 for certain development of works (“Development Works”) and to subsequently perform the works within 3 years.\n\nThe Development Works planned include breakwater, dredged basin, cyclone moorings, slipway, quay wall and industrial buildings.\n\nIf the Development Works are not completed within the prescribed period, the Lessor has the right (unless it is satisfied that the non completion was due principally to matters beyond the Company’s control) to vary the Lease by retaking 2.3 hectares at the western extremity of the site.\n\nThe approved use of the site is for the purpose of conducting a multi purpose marine service facility and supply base including but not limited to open and covered laydown and storage, warehousing, production and storage of drilling mud and other drilling supplies, operating and maintaining vessels and floating plant together with associated docking, maintenance and engineering works. Any other uses require the prior written consent of the Lessor.\n\nRestrictions apply to the assignment or subletting of the site (or any part) without prior consent of the Lessor, although that consent cannot unreasonably be withheld (subject to “usual” prudential requirements common to leases in Western Australia).\n\n51" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7713625842415652, + "doc_id": "ec2400fe0f45a707e35a41f5cdb5937bb54ecf43f2a72510c4d9a9f62209f72a", + "edit_distance": 0.19285714285714287, + "f1_score": 0.9536423841059603, + "meteor": 0.9454693924035269, + "precision": 0.935064935064935, + "pred_md": "## Financial Highlights\n\n- [1] 2001 includes $440 of losses ($1.85 per basic and $1.82 per diluted share) related to the September 11 terrorist attack ('September 11') and a $130 tax benefit ($0.55 per basic and $0.54 per diluted share) at Hartford Life, Inc. ('HLI').\n- [2] Operating income represents after-tax operational results excluding, as applicable, net realized capital gains or losses, extraordinary items, the cumulative effect of accounting changes and certain other items.\n- [3] 2001 includes a $91 reduction in premiums from reinsurance cessions related to September 11.\n\nNet income excluding September 11 and HLI tax benefit\n\nOperating income excluding September 11 and HLI tax benefit", + "recall": 0.972972972972973, + "true_md": "## Financial Highlights\n\n[1] 2001 includes $440 of losses ($1.85 per basic and $1.82 per diluted share) related to the September 11 terrorist attack (“September 11”) and a $130 tax benefit ($0.55 per basic and $0.54 per diluted share) at Hartford Life, Inc. (“HLI”).\n\n[2] Operating income represents after-tax operational results excluding, as applicable, net realized capital gains or losses, extraordinary items, the cumulative effect of accounting changes and certain other items.\n\n[3] 2001 includes a $91 reduction in premiums from reinsurance cessions related to September 11." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9480883605612863, + "doc_id": "fc3f13293d182fd2e60627d18f3061a2299e2f746e2811f61fedd99906839d76", + "edit_distance": 0.06427503736920777, + "f1_score": 0.971875, + "meteor": 0.9794750907845574, + "precision": 0.9749216300940439, + "pred_md": "OUR WORK\n\n56\n\n## HUMAN RESOURCES\n\n## Dynamism and Diversity\n\n'Once perceived as bureaucratic and slow to change, Human Resources changed dramatically during the NISSAN 180 period. Now, in fact, people occasionally say that we're changing too rapidly. That may be true, but a positive dynamism is emerging as a result, and Nissan is stronger because of it.\n\nThe impetus for many of the modifications comes from top management. Mr. Ghosn, for one, takes a direct and abiding interest in this area of operations. There is also a cross-functional team dedicated to organizational issues that recommends changes to HR policy. And because half the people on our HR staff come from other companies, many suggestions are coming from within as well. The latter is very unusual for a major Japanese company such as Nissan, and is a direct result of a new policy we call Mid-Career Scouting, which actively seeks talent from outside Nissan. All of these activities are indicative of the dynamism that is creating such diversity at the Company.\n\nThere is no doubt that diversity is a key theme in our HR evolution. We are currently focusing on three areas in particular: women in the workforce, Mid-Career Scouting, and embracing other cultures. We are working to provide more opportunities for our female employees (please see the Diversity feature on p. 57). Renault, which has a number of female executives-including many with families-has served as a great example for us. Unfortunately, that kind of work-home balance is still rare for women both inside and outside the executive ranks in Japan.\n\nThe second area mentioned, Mid-Career Scouting, is still an uncommon practice at Japanese companies. We have found great value, though, in the insights people who have experience in other corporate cultures bring to Nissan, and we are able to learn to take advantage of those insights.\n\nThe third area, embracing other cultures, became a more pressing consideration after the Alliance. Suddenly\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\nHITOSHI KAWAGUCHI Senior Vice President\n\nHITOSHI KAWAGUCHI Senior Vice President\n\nwe had many foreign executives working at Nissan headquarters, and the majority of communications were in English as well as Japanese. As a result, more employees, including non-management staff, are being assigned to work outside of Japan. In addition, proficiency in English is now a prerequisite for all managers at Nissan. These efforts to promote diversity are transforming our corporate culture.\n\nOne of the most interesting developments of NISSAN 180 was the advent of the Career Coach system, which we imported from our Alliance partner, Renault. In a modern business structure, HR is in charge of structural and system functions such as compensation. The Career Coach system provides career development for the individual employee. There are five career coaches at this time, one for each of the major functions. Their collective task is to identify people of high potential and create career plans for them. In a sense, they work outside of HR, although they report to me. The coaches gather once a month for the Nissan Assignment Committee, headed by Mr. Ghosn, to report on their activities.\n\nEmployees at Nissan also have the chance to control their career paths through our internal 'self-career' system on the Company's intranet. Managers can search for employees registered on the system for open positions they have and proactively post job vacancies on the openentry system portal. Although the open-entry system has a longer history, the self-career system began in early fiscal 2005 in Japan. We plan to expand both these programs on a global basis.\n\nNissan Management Institute\n\nNissan Management Institute", + "recall": 0.9688473520249221, + "true_md": "HUMAN RESOURCES\n\n## Dynamism and Diversity\n\n“Once perceived as bureaucratic and slow to change, Human Resources changed dramatically during the NISSAN 180 period. Now, in fact, people occasionally say that we’re changing too rapidly. That may be true, but a positive dynamism is emerging as a result, and Nissan is stronger because of it. \n\nThe impetus for many of the modifications comes from top management. Mr. Ghosn, for one, takes a direct and abiding interest in this area of operations. There is also a cross-functional team dedicated to organizational issues that recommends changes to HR policy. And because half the people on our HR staff come from other companies, many suggestions are coming from within as well. The latter is very unusual for a major Japanese company such as Nissan, and is a direct result of a new policy we call Mid-Career Scouting, which actively seeks talent from outside Nissan. All of these activities are indicative of the dynamism that is creating such diversity at the Company.\n\nThere is no doubt that diversity is a key theme in our HR evolution. We are currently focusing on three areas in particular: women in the workforce, Mid-Career Scouting, and embracing other cultures. We are working to provide more opportunities for our female employees (please see the Diversity feature on p. 57). Renault, which has a number of female executives—including many with families—has served as a great example for us. Unfortunately, that kind of work-home balance is still rare for women both inside and outside the executive ranks in Japan. \n\nThe second area mentioned, Mid-Career Scouting, is still an uncommon practice at Japanese companies. We have found great value, though, in the insights people who have experience in other corporate cultures bring to Nissan, and we are able to learn to take advantage of those insights. \n\nThe third area, embracing other cultures, became a more pressing consideration after the Alliance. Suddenly\n\nwe had many foreign executives working at Nissan headquarters, and the majority of communications were in English as well as Japanese. As a result, more employees, including non-management staff, are being assigned to work outside of Japan. In addition, proficiency in English is now a prerequisite for all managers at Nissan. These efforts to promote diversity are transforming our corporate culture.\n\nOne of the most interesting developments of NISSAN 180 was the advent of the Career Coach system, which we imported from our Alliance partner, Renault. In a modern business structure, HR is in charge of structural and system functions such as compensation. The Career Coach system provides career development for the individual employee. There are five career coaches at this time, one for each of the major functions. Their collective task is to identify people of high potential and create career plans for them. In a sense, they work outside of HR, although they report to me. The coaches gather once a month for the Nissan Assignment Committee, headed by Mr. Ghosn, to report on their activities. \n\nEmployees at Nissan also have the chance to control their career paths through our internal “self-career” system on the Company’s intranet. Managers can search for employees registered on the system for open positions they have and proactively post job vacancies on the open- entry system portal. Although the open-entry system has a longer history, the self-career system began in early fiscal 2005 in Japan. We plan to expand both these programs on a global basis. \n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 56\n\nOUR WORK\n\nHITOSHI KAWAGUCHI Senior Vice President\n\nNissan Management Institute" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6776820476245083, + "doc_id": "e3dfc45299682110639c99140cea38758f0261f97c4b890de2d92eae9ed7fb5e", + "edit_distance": 0.2602739726027397, + "f1_score": 0.8444444444444446, + "meteor": 0.754652276315449, + "precision": 0.9047619047619048, + "pred_md": "PERFECT MATCH #2\n\n## THE DESIGN COMMUNITY AND GUNLOCKE\n\nIn addition to your handsome good looks, what impresses us most about you, Gunlocke, is how open you are to self-improvement. It's usually a slow and difficult process to make fundamental shifts in attitude, but you jump at the idea of collaboration, and quickly turn the wheel in a different direction. We also love how you balance your sense of detail and approach with a truly refined aesthetic. Bold and strong, yet sophisticated and classy - able to adjust to the nuances of your customer's personality. Bottom line? You're simply irresistible.", + "recall": 0.7916666666666666, + "true_md": "## PERFECT MATCH #2\n\n## T H E D E S I G N C O M M U N I T Y A N D G U N L O C K E\n\nIn addition to your handsome good looks, what impresses us most about you, Gunlocke, is how open you are to self-improvement. It’s usually a slow and difficult process to make fundamental shifts in attitude, but you jump at the idea of collaboration, and quickly turn the wheel in a different direction. We also love how you balance your sense of detail and approach with a truly refined aesthetic. Bold and strong, yet sophisticated and classy — able to adjust to the nuances of your customer’s personality. Bottom line? You’re simply irresistible." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8309004856088136, + "doc_id": "ab6317848b98a7230bf856e217b36331847108340cd749c4e6adf06e1dae5895", + "edit_distance": 0.4942528735632184, + "f1_score": 0.9452054794520549, + "meteor": 0.8987276892770615, + "precision": 0.9857142857142858, + "pred_md": "## 26. Specified Director and Specified Executive Disclosures (continued)\n\n## (d) Share Based Payment Compensation\n\n## Options Over Ordinary Shares Granted as Remuneration\n\nDuring the reporting period, no options over ordinary shares were granted and vested.\n\n## Exercise of Options Granted as Remuneration\n\nDuring the reporting period, no shares were issued on the exercise of options previously granted as remuneration.\n\n## (e) Equity Holdings\n\n## Options\n\nThe movement during the reporting period in the number of options of the Company held, directly, indirectly or beneficially, by each Specified Director and Specified Executive, including their personally-related entities, is as follows:\n\n## Shares\n\nThe movement during the reporting period in the number of shares of the Company held, directly, indirectly or beneficially, by each Specified Director and Specified Executive, including their personally-related entities, is as follows:\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\n79", + "recall": 0.9078947368421053, + "true_md": "## 26. Specified Director and Specified Executive Disclosures (continued)\n\n## (d) Share Based Payment Compensation\n\n## Options Over Ordinary Shares Granted as Remuneration\n\nThe movement during the reporting period in the number of options of th e Company held, directly, indirectly or beneficially, by each Specified Director and Specified Executive, including their personally-related entiti es, is as follows:\n\nDuring the reporting period, no shares were issued on the exercise of opti ons previously granted as remuneration.\n\nDuring the reporting period, no options over ordinary shares were gran ted and vested.\n\n## Exercise of Options Granted as Remuneration\n\n## (e) Equity Holdings\n\n## Options\n\n## Shares\n\nThe movement during the reporting period in the number of shares of th e Company held, directly, indirectly or beneficially, by each Specified Director and Specified Executive, including their personally-related entiti es, is as follows:\n\nAnnual Report 2004 79" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9468178760676436, + "doc_id": "341af68471856851d91f1e958c854f803dd5f391c28d762f87bd36ec5f2dc02d", + "edit_distance": 0.8427835051546392, + "f1_score": 0.9692737430167597, + "meteor": 0.7786889578900986, + "precision": 0.9719887955182073, + "pred_md": "OUR WORK\n\n50\n\nMANUFACTURING\n\n## Building on World-Class Productivity and Efficiency\n\n'By following the Nissan Production Way and the principle of doukiseisan -meaning synchronization with the customer-manufacturing at Nissan remains flexible and integrated, and keeps lead times short. The Nissan Production Way incorporates integration at the supplier, global and logistic levels. That is why we remain the most productive manufacturer in the world.\n\nWe've also become much more efficient, as our utilization rates show. In Japan, we were operating at 54 percent of capacity in 1999. In fiscal 2004 that figure increased to 86 percent, which is just about the maximum possible. During NISSAN Value-Up, we will increase our global utilization rate from approximately 74 percent to over 80 percent. We will not achieve that target by closing facilities, either. In fact, we've opened new plants in the U.S. and China, and increased capacity at our other facilities.\n\nManufacturing achieved a series of milestones during NISSAN 180. One of the biggest was opening the Canton plant in the U.S., which got up to speed quickly, launching five new vehicles in a period of just eight months. We built two plants in China, and restarted operations in Egypt. We dramatically expanded the Decherd, Tennessee engine plant in the U.S., and all engines for North America are now built at Decherd or at our plant in Mexico.\n\nWe also commenced cross-production with Renault: Nissan began building Renault's Platina in Mexico and its Traffic in Spain, while Renault began building our Pickup and Xterra at its factory in Brazil. We also started production of common engines with Renault, with our subsidiary Aichi Kikai and the Yokohama plant producing the four-cylinder engines used in our new Tiida, Note and Lafesta models. In Japan, we launched six new models in just six months-the Murano, Fuga, Lafesta, Tiida, Tiida Latio and Note. We also launched three vehicles-the Tiida, Teana and Tiida Latio-in China.\n\nWhile we were successful in Japan and China, we did have quality issues at the Canton facility. This was\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\nTADAO TAKAHASHI Executive Vice President\n\nTADAO TAKAHASHI Executive Vice President\n\nunfortunate, since it affected our ratings in the J. D. Power and Associates Initial Quality Study. We've since taken effective measures to resolve these problems. More importantly, we learned from them. We created new systems and new approaches to quality, which we then applied in Japan and to the new factories in China. Incidentally, the factories in China opened with no significant quality issues. This highlights one of our 'neverending' quests at Nissan, which is to identify problems and rapidly get solutions for them in place.\n\nWe do not rely solely on external quality evaluations. In cooperation with Renault, we created AVES, the Alliance Vehicle Evaluation System. AVES is a sophisticated process involving two people taking four to five hours to evaluate a vehicle. Because it is time-intensive, we also devised a short version of AVES that only takes an hour and can be done at the factory.\n\nThe second major area of focus is logistics, which is becoming more complicated. We send engine parts to the U.S., and soon we will be shipping more parts from leading competitive countries, or LCCs. During 2004, we encountered cargo-handling problems on the U.S. West Coast, which highlighted the need for a more sophisticated tracking system. If we had had such a system in place, we could have anticipated those problems and made the necessary adjustments.\n\nWhile Nissan's productivity leads the world, we have not stopped working to improve the process. One system we have implemented is the Design Standard Time Ratio, which allows us to calculate the ideal standard time for every operation. By applying this globally, we have brought all our branches around the world to nearly the same level. This in turn illustrated that we can produce vehicles more cheaply and with good productivity in the LCCs. Another opportunity discovered for the LCCs was in low-cost jig and die making. As a result, we have doubled the capacity of our die-making plant in Thailand and are looking into doing the same in China.", + "recall": 0.9665738161559888, + "true_md": "## MANUFACTURING\n\n## Building on World-Class Productivity and Efficiency\n\nTADAO TAKAHASHI Executive Vice President\n\nunfortunate, since it affected our ratings in the J. D. Power and Associates Initial Quality Study. We’ve since taken effective measures to resolve these problems. More importantly, we learned from them. We created new systems and new approaches to quality, which we then applied in Japan and to the new factories in China. Incidentally, the factories in China opened with no significant quality issues. This highlights one of our ‘never- ending’ quests at Nissan, which is to identify problems and rapidly get solutions for them in place.\n\n“By following the Nissan Production Way and the principle of doukiseisan —meaning synchronization with the customer—manufacturing at Nissan remains flexible and integrated, and keeps lead times short. The Nissan Production Way incorporates integration at the supplier, global and logistic levels. That is why we remain the most productive manufacturer in the world. \n\nWe’ve also become much more efficient, as our utilization rates show. In Japan, we were operating at 54 percent of capacity in 1999. In fiscal 2004 that figure increased to 86 percent, which is just about the maximum possible. During NISSAN Value-Up, we will increase our global utilization rate from approximately 74 percent to over 80 percent. We will not achieve that target by closing facilities, either. In fact, we’ve opened new plants in the U.S. and China, and increased capacity at our other facilities.\n\nWe do not rely solely on external quality evaluations. In cooperation with Renault, we created AVES, the Alliance Vehicle Evaluation System. AVES is a sophisticated process involving two people taking four to five hours to evaluate a vehicle. Because it is time-intensive, we also devised a short version of AVES that only takes an hour and can be done at the factory. \n\nThe second major area of focus is logistics, which is becoming more complicated. We send engine parts to the U.S., and soon we will be shipping more parts from leading competitive countries, or LCCs. During 2004, we encountered cargo-handling problems on the U.S. West Coast, which highlighted the need for a more sophisticated tracking system. If we had had such a system in place, we could have anticipated those problems and made the necessary adjustments. \n\nManufacturing achieved a series of milestones during NISSAN 180. One of the biggest was opening the Canton plant in the U.S., which got up to speed quickly, launching five new vehicles in a period of just eight months. We built two plants in China, and restarted operations in Egypt. We dramatically expanded the Decherd, Tennessee engine plant in the U.S., and all engines for North America are now built at Decherd or at our plant in Mexico. \n\nWhile Nissan’s productivity leads the world, we have not stopped working to improve the process. One system we have implemented is the Design Standard Time Ratio, which allows us to calculate the ideal standard time for every operation. By applying this globally, we have brought all our branches around the world to nearly the same level. This in turn illustrated that we can produce vehicles more cheaply and with good productivity in the LCCs. Another opportunity discovered for the LCCs was in low-cost jig and die making. As a result, we have doubled the capacity of our die-making plant in Thailand and are looking into doing the same in China. \n\nWe also commenced cross-production with Renault: Nissan began building Renault’s Platina in Mexico and its Traffic in Spain, while Renault began building our Pickup and Xterra at its factory in Brazil. We also started production of common engines with Renault, with our subsidiary Aichi Kikai and the Yokohama plant producing the four-cylinder engines used in our new Tiida, Note and Lafesta models. In Japan, we launched six new models in just six months—the Murano, Fuga, Lafesta, Tiida, Tiida Latio and Note. We also launched three vehicles—the Tiida, Teana and Tiida Latio—in China. \n\nWhile we were successful in Japan and China, we did have quality issues at the Canton facility. This was\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 50\n\nOUR WORK" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "99723d3d3c61db030dbd813faec67579ceb50c6b5dd8c2f500c6e073849e9784", + "edit_distance": 0.897196261682243, + "f1_score": 0.25396825396825395, + "meteor": 0.21412957746478872, + "precision": 0.23529411764705882, + "pred_md": "£ä\n\n-glyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman> glyph<c=31,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman> glyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>‡-glyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>\n\n7iÊ'iÈ}˜]Êi˜}ˆ˜iiÀ]ʓ>˜Õv>VÌÕÀiÊ >˜'Ê'iˆÛiÀÊ«Àœ'ÕVÌÃÊvœÀÊÌiV…˜œœ}ÞÊ Vœ“«>˜ˆiÃÊ>ÀœÕ˜'Ê̅iÊܜÀ'°", + "recall": 0.27586206896551724, + "true_md": "£ ä - ‡ -\n\n7 i Ê ` i à ˆ } ˜ ] Ê i ˜ } ˆ ˜ i i À ] Ê “ > ˜ Õ v > V Ì Õ À i Ê > ˜ ` i  ˆ Û i À Ê « À œ ` Õ V Ì Ã Ê v œ À Ê Ì i V … ˜ œ  œ } Þ Ê V œ “ « > ˜ ˆ i Ã Ê > À œ Õ ˜ ` Ê Ì … i Ê Ü œ À  ` °" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4509501517345887, + "doc_id": "4b1bd7606e2cf351f21fcfac378ccc1290b4b76f1ba084011fb13e53491979d1", + "edit_distance": 0.4805491990846682, + "f1_score": 0.8269794721407625, + "meteor": 0.7927647822931364, + "precision": 0.8197674418604651, + "pred_md": "## S C I E N C E & T E C H N O L O G Y\n\nCorning's long history of extraordinary innovation continu the context of managing the sensitive balance between the near alignment of R&D and business objectives, and longer-ran discovery research and new opportunity creation.\n\nOver the past year, we adjusted our R&D spending to al with business conditions. At the same time, we carefully pres our core technology capabilities to ensure our capacity to l markets and create life-changing innovations.\n\nWe have tightened our focus on high-impact projects and h streamlined our processes to develop and commercialize promis opportunities more quickly and efficiently. We have emphasi our patent processes to ensure strong competitive positions f critical intellectual assets of our scientific organization.\n\nOur R&D organization is aligned with our operating goals plays a critical role in meeting them. Our scientists and e are closely linked to our operations and are focused not o new product development, but also new process development. Th are discovering new ways to manufacture innovative products lowered cost and increased quality performance.\n\nInnovation is one of Corning's core Values. It is the ev language and mindset of the company. Even in the face of dif economic conditions, we will pursue our tradition of devel breakthrough technologies for the markets we serve - fr telecommunications to environmental - and will capitalize on creation of new market opportunities made possible by our s commitment to research and development.\n\nC R I T I C A L T E C H N O L O G I E S : C H E M I C A L V A P O R D E P O S I T I O N\n\nM A T E R I A L S R E S E A R C H : O P T I C A L P R O P E R T I E S\n\nC R I T I C A L T E C H N O L O G I E S : C H E M I C A L V A P O R D E P O S I T I O NM A T E R I A L S R E S E A R C H : O P T I C A L P R O P E R T I E S\n\n7", + "recall": 0.834319526627219, + "true_md": "## S CIENCE TECHNOLOGY\n\n## C RITICAL T ECHNOLOGIES: CHEMICAL VAPOR DEPOSITION\n\n## M ATERIALS R ESEARCH : OPTICAL PROPERTIES\n\n7\n\nCorning’s long history of extraordinary innovation continues in the context of managing the sensitive balance between the near-term alignment of R&D and business objectives, and longer-range discovery research and new opportunity creation.\n\nOver the past year, we adjusted our R&D spending to align with business conditions. At the same time, we carefully preserved our core technology capabilities to ensure our capacity to lead our markets and create life-changing innovations.\n\nWe have tightened our focus on high-impact projects and have streamlined our processes to develop and commercialize promising opportunities more quickly and efficiently. We have emphasized our patent processes to ensure strong competitive positions from the critical intellectual assets of our scientific organization.\n\nOur R&D organization is aligned with our operating goals and plays a critical role in meeting them. Our scientists and engineers are closely linked to our operations and are focused not only on new product development, but also new process development. They are discovering new ways to manufacture innovative products with lowered cost and increased quality performance.\n\nInnovation is one of Corning’s core Values. It is the everyday language and mindset of the company. Even in the face of difficult economic conditions, we will pursue our tradition of developing breakthrough technologies for the markets we serve — from telecommunications to environmental — and will capitalize on the creation of new market opportunities made possible by our strong commitment to research and development." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "53272dc2f590d8f68b9eae42f166db41362cadb5405292277060143ee98809fc", + "edit_distance": 0.4805491990846682, + "f1_score": 0.8269794721407625, + "meteor": 0.7927647822931364, + "precision": 0.8197674418604651, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.834319526627219, + "true_md": "he Mandalay merger will create a powerful combination of assets and people positioned to compete far more strongly than either company individually. T\n\nWith ever-increasing competition from tribal gaming in California as well as the continuing growth of gaming across the country and abroad, we are positioned to grow through improved performance at existing properties and development of strategic real estate obtained in the merger.\n\nMGM MIRAGE and Mandalay combined will create an unmatched collection of the world’s most famous resorts in the gaming, entertainment and travel markets. Customers will benefit from choices in all market segments. Lastly, of significance in determin- ing the value of this transaction for shareholders, the merger with Mandalay will be immediately accretive.\n\nExtraordinary choices for our customers, unrivaled opportunities for our employees and outstanding returns for our shareholders all add up to make the merger with Mandalay a defining moment in company history.\n\nWISELY" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "3948e0adece80a5957d98b1b64443c9e2df566b96cbc75ae3c4db66d6ccc1b8d", + "edit_distance": 0.4805491990846682, + "f1_score": 0.8269794721407625, + "meteor": 0.7927647822931364, + "precision": 0.8197674418604651, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.834319526627219, + "true_md": "" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6910383139907568, + "doc_id": "54b745449834c3f26eed6ef6278c473b7219bdd59cb31c24001b3ee47685cf61", + "edit_distance": 0.7311827956989247, + "f1_score": 0.8888888888888888, + "meteor": 0.9283073521282477, + "precision": 0.8387096774193549, + "pred_md": "## ADDITIONAL STOCK EXCHANGE INFORMATION AS AT 8 S E P T E M B E R 2 0 0 0\n\n## Ordinary Share Capital\n\n- 43,000,000 fully paid ordinary shares are held by 773 individual shareholders.\n- · All issued ordinary shares carry one vote per share.\n\n## Options\n\n- · 6,500,000 options are held by 466 individual optionholders.\n\nOptions do not carry a right to vote.\n\n## SUBSTANTIAL SHAREHOLDERS\n\n## DISTRIBUTION OF MEMBERS AND THEIR HOLDINGS\n\n## TWENTY LARGEST SHAREHOLDERS\n\n63", + "recall": 0.9454545454545454, + "true_md": "## Ordinary Share Capital\n\n- • 43,000,000 fully paid ordinary shares are held by 773 individual shareholders.\n\n- • 6,500,000 options are held by 466 individual optionholders.\n\nAll issued ordinary shares carry one vote per share.\n\n## Options\n\n## SUBSTANTIAL SHAREHOLDERS\n\n## DISTRIBUTION OF MEMBERS AND THEIR HOLDINGS\n\n## TWENTY LARGEST SHAREHOLDERS\n\nOptions do not carry a right to vote.\n\n63\n\nADDITIONAL STOCK EXCHANGE INFORMATION AS AT 8 SEPTEMBER 2000" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9249220187367677, + "doc_id": "2aaef42186d504ec12fd8a9d81742cfc67b0c5886f4d0848aad4d2b6622ed349", + "edit_distance": 0.8619676945668135, + "f1_score": 0.9735682819383261, + "meteor": 0.6640551065885191, + "precision": 0.9671772428884027, + "pred_md": "3 4\n\n## (10) Asset Write Down\n\nDuring the third quarter of 2000, the Company reduced the carrying value of certain assets in accordance with SFAS No.121. The asset write-downs totaled $12.0 million, of which $11.2 million related to goodwill and other identifiable intangible assets associated with the C o m p a s acquisition of Arkansas Systems, Inc. ('Euronet USA') in December 1998. The remaining $800,000 write-down related to the ny' C o m p a s A TM hard w a re inventory acquired associated with the Company's acquisition of the SBK ATM network in Germany and the ny' Budapest Bank ATM network in Hungary.\n\nAs a result of the Company's inability to achieve operating improvements, including software license and service orders for Euronet USA's traditional core product (ITM) and cost reductions, the Software Solutions Segment continued operating at a loss through the first thre e q u ters of 2000. The Company calculated the expected cash flows of the Company's Software Solutions Segment, which identified an ar i m p a ment of its long-lived assets. Accord i n g l y , in the third quarter of 2000, the Company re c o rded an impairment charge based on the ir p resent value of expected cash flows of $11.2 million for the write-down of goodwill and other identifiable intangible assets re c o rded upon the acquisition of Euronet USA. The Company considers the rapidly changing business environment surrounding electronic transaction payment systems software to be a primary indicator of any potential impairment of goodwill and other identifiable intangible assets related to the Company's Software Solutions Segment. The Company is in the process of repositioning Euronet USA in the market thro u g h development and release of a new set of products that are independent of Euronet USA 's traditional core product lines, including a new, p l m independent Java based transaction processing software package with wireless banking and messaging modules and a set of mobile atfor phone prepaid re c h a rge solutions. It has become apparent, based on market reaction to these new products, that these new products and solutions rather than Euronet USA's traditional ITM solution will be the primary source of software solutions revenues in the future.\n\nIn order to determine the extent of the asset impairment and the related asset write-down, the Company estimated the discounted cash flows of the Software Solutions Segment products and services in determining the fair value of the goodwill and related identifiable intangible assets. The Company's estimate was based on historical results which have shown re c u rring operating losses since acquisition, curre n t p rojections, and internal earnings targets, net of applicable taxes. The Company's discounted cash flow analysis indicated that the carry i n g value of intangible assets related to Euronet USA should be reduced to zero as of September 30, 2000. The net book value of the intangible assets prior to the write down was $11.2 million.\n\nThe asset write-down is disclosed as a separate operating expense item in the Company's Consolidated Statements of Operations and C o m p rehensive Loss.\n\nThe Company periodically reviews the re c o rded values of its long-lived assets to determine if future cash flows to be derived from these assets will be sufficient to recover the remaining re c o rded asset values. A portion of the ATM hard w a re assets acquired with the Budapest Bank and S e vice Bank ATM network purchases were deemed technologically inferior relative to the Company's standards. Specifically, these assets r w e e not technologically advanced to support the entire current and future set of transactions the Company typically offers to users of its r ATM network. As a result of this analysis, the Company re c o rded a non-cash charge of $800,000 related to a reduction in the carrying value of ATM hard w a re, adjusting to its net realizable value.\n\n## (11) Notes Payable\n\nOn June 22, 1998, the Company sold 243,211 units in a public offering, each consisting of DM 1,000 principal amount at maturity of 12 3/8% senior discount notes due on July 1, 2006 and 729,633 warrants to purchase 766,114 shares of common stock. Each warrant entitles the holder to purchase, on or after June 22, 1998 and prior to July 1, 2006, 1.05 shares of common stock at an exercise price of $5.00 per share. Cash i est on the notes will not be payable prior to July 1, 2002. Commencing January 1, 2003, cash interest will be payable semi-annually on nter J a n u y 1 and July 1 of each year. The notes and the warrants are separately transferable. The gross proceeds to the Company was DM 150.0 ar million (approximately $83.1 million) re p resenting an issue price of DM 616.75 per DM 1,000 principal amount at maturity . Of this amount, $1.7 million has been allocated to the warrants within stockholders' equity to reflect their fair market value on the date of issuance. Net p roceeds to the Company after underwriting discount and offering expenses were DM 145.1 million (approximately $81.3 million).\n\nPursuant to the Company's indenture, the Company is subject to certain restrictions and covenants, including, without limitation, covenants with respect to the following matters: (i) limitation on additional indebtedness; (ii) limitation on restricted payments; (iii) limitation on issuance and sales of capital stock of restricted subsidiaries; (iv) limitation on transactions with affiliates; (v) limitation on liens; (vi) limitation on guarantees of indebtedness by restricted subsidiaries; (vii) purchase of Euronet notes upon a change of control; (viii) limitation on sale of assets; (ix) limitation on dividends and other payment restrictions affecting restricted subsidiaries; (x) limitation on investments in u n estricted subsidiaries; (xi) limitation on lines of business; and (xii) provision of financial statements and re p o rts. The Company is in r compliance with these covenants at December 31, 2000.\n\nDuring 1999, the Company re p u rchased notes with a face value of DM 22.0 million and 65,850 warrants for a total purchase price of $5.2 million. This re p u rchase was accounted for as an extinguishment of debt with a resulting $2.7 million (net of income taxes of $0) re c o g n i z e d as an extraord i n a ry gain on such extinguishment. The extinguishment gain re p resents the diff e rence between the allocated carrying value of the debt extinguished ($8.1 million) and the consideration paid ($5.0 million), offset by the write-off of the allocated unamortized deferre d financing costs ($300,000). Of the total purchase price of $5.2 million, $176,000 was allocated to the warrants based on their fair market value at the time of purchase and re c o rded as an adjustment to additional paid-in capital. Of the total extinguishment gain, $803,000 was re c ded in the fourth quarter of 1999 relating to the purchase of notes with a face value of DM 7.6 million on December 13, 1999. or", + "recall": 0.9800443458980045, + "true_md": "## (10) Asset Write Down\n\n## (11) Notes Payable\n\n3 4\n\nDuring 1999, the Company re p u rchased notes with a face value of DM 22.0 million and 65,850 warrants for a total purchase price of $5.2 million. This re p u rchase was accounted for as an extinguishment of debt with a resulting $2.7 million (net of income taxes of $0) re c o g n i z e d as an extraord i n a ry gain on such extinguishment. The extinguishment gain re p resents the diff e rence between the allocated carrying value of the debt extinguished ($8.1 million) and the consideration paid ($5.0 million), offset by the write-off of the allocated unamortized deferre d financing costs ($300,000). Of the total purchase price of $5.2 million, $176,000 was allocated to the warrants based on their fair market value at the time of purchase and re c o rded as an adjustment to additional paid-in capital. Of the total extinguishment gain, $803,000 was re c o rded in the fourth quarter of 1999 relating to the purchase of notes with a face value of DM 7.6 million on December 13, 1999. \n\nPursuant to the Company’s indenture, the Company is subject to certain restrictions and covenants, including, without limitation, covenants with respect to the following matters: (i) limitation on additional indebtedness; (ii) limitation on restricted payments; (iii) limitation on issuance and sales of capital stock of restricted subsidiaries; (iv) limitation on transactions with affiliates; (v) limitation on liens; (vi) limitation on guarantees of indebtedness by restricted subsidiaries; (vii) purchase of Euronet notes upon a change of control; (viii) limitation on sale of assets; (ix) limitation on dividends and other payment restrictions affecting restricted subsidiaries; (x) limitation on investments in u n restricted subsidiaries; (xi) limitation on lines of business; and (xii) provision of financial statements and re p o rts. The Company is in compliance with these covenants at December 31, 2000. \n\nOn June 22, 1998, the Company sold 243,211 units in a public offering, each consisting of DM 1,000 principal amount at maturity of 12 3/8% senior discount notes due on July 1, 2006 and 729,633 warrants to purchase 766,114 shares of common stock. Each warrant entitles the holder to purchase, on or after June 22, 1998 and prior to July 1, 2006, 1.05 shares of common stock at an exercise price of $5.00 per share. Cash i n t e rest on the notes will not be payable prior to July 1, 2002. Commencing January 1, 2003, cash interest will be payable semi-annually on J a n u a ry 1 and July 1 of each year. The notes and the warrants are separately transferable. The gross proceeds to the Company was DM 150.0 million (approximately $83.1 million) re p resenting an issue price of DM 616.75 per DM 1,000 principal amount at maturity. Of this amount, $1.7 million has been allocated to the warrants within stockholders' equity to reflect their fair market value on the date of issuance. Net p roceeds to the Company after underwriting discount and offering expenses were DM 145.1 million (approximately $81.3 million). \n\nThe Company periodically reviews the re c o rded values of its long-lived assets to determine if future cash flows to be derived from these assets will be sufficient to recover the remaining re c o rded asset values. A portion of the ATM hard w a re assets acquired with the Budapest Bank and S e rvice Bank ATM network purchases were deemed technologically inferior relative to the Company’s standards. Specifically, these assets w e re not technologically advanced to support the entire current and future set of transactions the Company typically offers to users of its ATM network. As a result of this analysis, the Company re c o rded a non-cash charge of $800,000 related to a reduction in the carrying value of ATM hard w a re, adjusting to its net realizable value. \n\nThe asset write-down is disclosed as a separate operating expense item in the Company’s Consolidated Statements of Operations and C o m p rehensive Loss. \n\nIn order to determine the extent of the asset impairment and the related asset write-down, the Company estimated the discounted cash flows of the Software Solutions Segment products and services in determining the fair value of the goodwill and related identifiable intangible assets. The Company’s estimate was based on historical results which have shown re c u rring operating losses since acquisition, curre n t p rojections, and internal earnings targets, net of applicable taxes. The Company’s discounted cash flow analysis indicated that the carry i n g value of intangible assets related to Euronet USA should be reduced to zero as of September 30, 2000. The net book value of the intangible assets prior to the write down was $11.2 million. \n\nAs a result of the Company’s inability to achieve operating improvements, including software license and service orders for Euronet USA’s traditional core product (ITM) and cost reductions, the Software Solutions Segment continued operating at a loss through the first thre e q u a rters of 2000. The Company calculated the expected cash flows of the Company’s Software Solutions Segment, which identified an i m p a i rment of its long-lived assets. Accord i n g l y, in the third quarter of 2000, the Company re c o rded an impairment charge based on the p resent value of expected cash flows of $11.2 million for the write-down of goodwill and other identifiable intangible assets re c o rded upon the acquisition of Euronet USA. The Company considers the rapidly changing business environment surrounding electronic transaction payment systems software to be a primary indicator of any potential impairment of goodwill and other identifiable intangible assets related to the Company’s Software Solutions Segment. The Company is in the process of repositioning Euronet USA in the market thro u g h development and release of a new set of products that are independent of Euronet USA’s traditional core product lines, including a new, p l a t f o rm independent Java based transaction processing software package with wireless banking and messaging modules and a set of mobile phone prepaid re c h a rge solutions. It has become apparent, based on market reaction to these new products, that these new products and solutions rather than Euronet USA’s traditional ITM solution will be the primary source of software solutions revenues in the future. \n\nDuring the third quarter of 2000, the Company reduced the carrying value of certain assets in accordance with SFAS No.121. The asset write-downs totaled $12.0 million, of which $11.2 million related to goodwill and other identifiable intangible assets associated with the C o m p a n y ’s acquisition of Arkansas Systems, Inc. (“Euronet USA”) in December 1998. The remaining $800,000 write-down related to the C o m p a n y ’s ATM hard w a re inventory acquired associated with the Company's acquisition of the SBK ATM network in Germany and the Budapest Bank ATM network in Hungary." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8991613713443143, + "doc_id": "7901aa8009690300c0279ae30861ee7d51ae8ca76679d1c4d422ad38fa859eca", + "edit_distance": 0.5105105105105106, + "f1_score": 0.9600000000000002, + "meteor": 0.9427907869631877, + "precision": 0.9574468085106383, + "pred_md": "2\n\n## 'In 2000 we took great pride in Euronet's Fast 500 ranking by Deloitte & Touche as the second fastest growing technology company in North America.'\n\nDuring 2000, we failed to meet our revenue target for our software division. In the Fourth Quarter, we initiated the steps necessary to rightsize our software business and to bring costs in line with ongoing revenue expectations. However, owning this software division gives us control of software development. It also provides the expertise and\n\nflexibility to adapt to emerging transaction needs and to bring new payment solutions quickly to market, which enhances our outsourcing opportunities. The software business is very valuable to Euronet and completes our service offering. W e expect it to be a\n\nTouche as the second fastest growing technology company in North America based on our five-year revenue growth of 66,790%.\n\nWe're continuing to build on our recurring revenue stream through transaction channels that reinforce our strengths as an electronic payments processor.\n\npositive contributor to our bottom line going forward.\n\nSince founding Euronet in 1994, we've worked hard to establish the company as a leader in the field of secure electronic financial transactions and to grow our presence worldwide. So in 2000 we took great pride in Euronet being ranked by Deloitte &\n\nMichael J. Brown Chairman & CEO\n\nDaniel R. Henry\n\nChief Operating Officer\n\nToday, we're expanding the reach of our ATM networks, delivering innovative new mobile operator services and tapping the promise of mobile commerce with an expanding suite of wireless solutions. Based on this strong foundation,\n\nour future has more potential than ever before.\n\nWe're excited about the possibilities ahead as we continue to form the digital bridges that will position Euronet Worldwide as a global leader in secure electronic financial transactions.", + "recall": 0.9625668449197861, + "true_md": "“In 2000 we took great pride in Euronet’s Fast 500 ranking by Deloitte & Touche as the second fastest growing technology company in North America.”\n\nDuring 2000, we failed to meet our revenue target for our software division. In the Fourth Quarter, we initiated the steps necessary to rightsize our software business and to bring costs in line with ongoing revenue expectations. However, owning this software division gives us control of software development. It also provides the expertise and \n\nflexibility to adapt to emerging transaction needs and to bring new payment solutions quickly to market, which enhances our outsourcing opportunities. The software business is very valuable to Euronet and completes our service offering. We expect it to be a\n\npositive contributor to our bottom line going forward.\n\nour future has more potential than ever before.\n\nToday, we’re expanding the reach of our ATM networks, delivering innovative new mobile operator services and tapping the promise of mobile commerce with an expanding suite of wireless solutions. Based on this strong foundation,\n\nWe’re continuing to build on our recurring revenue stream through transaction channels that reinforce our strengths as an electronic payments processor.\n\nTouche as the second fastest growing technology company in North America based on our five-year revenue growth of 66,790%.\n\nSince founding Euronet in 1994, we’ve worked hard to establish the company as a leader in the field of secure electronic financial transactions and to grow our presence worldwide. So in 2000 we took great pride in Euronet being ranked by Deloitte &\n\nWe’re excited about the possibilities ahead as we continue to form the digital bridges that will position Euronet Worldwide as a global leader in secure electronic financial transactions.\n\n2\n\nDaniel R. Henry Chief Operating Officer\n\nMichael J. Brown Chairman & CEO" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9542793232048223, + "doc_id": "7c964ca4d5a4640e4ae2795089da1f61f2dd7a5858b6a11e0c48a7cb853e6efd", + "edit_distance": 0.6559766763848397, + "f1_score": 0.9791044776119402, + "meteor": 0.8181822713014871, + "precision": 0.9820359281437125, + "pred_md": "## SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## Note 9. Retirement Plans (Continued)\n\nThe Company's matching contributions to the defined contribution plan were approximately $228 thousand, $210 thousand and $182 thousand for the years ended December 31, 2003, 2002 and 2001, respectively.\n\nIn May 2003, the Company adopted an unfunded nonqualified supplemental executive retirement plan for named executives. The plan was established to provide retirement benefits in addition to those provided under the Retirement Plan that covers all employees. The following table presents the actuarial information for the plan.\n\nAssumptions used by the Company in the determination of the Supplemental Retirement Plan information consisted of the following at December 31, 2003:\n\n## Note 10. Stock Incentive Plan\n\nThe Company has a shareholder approved Company Stock Incentive Plan (the 'Plan'), providing for the grant of incentive compensation to essentially all employees in the form of stock options. The Plan authorizes grants of options to purchase up to 480,000 shares of common stock over a ten-year period beginning in 1996. The option price for all grants has been at the current market price at the time of the grant. The grants have generally provided that one-half of the options exercisable on each of the first and second anniversaries of the date of grant, with the options expiring five years after they are granted. In 2003, the Company issued grants where the options are vested over a five-year period beginning on the third anniversary date of the grant of the options. The participant may exercise 20% of the total grant after each anniversary date through the eighth year, with the options expiring after ten years.\n\nThe fair value of each grant is estimated at the grant date using the Black-Scholes option-pricing model with the following weighted average assumptions:\n\nSHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY\n\n32\n\n■", + "recall": 0.9761904761904762, + "true_md": "## SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## Note 9. Retirement Plans (Continued)\n\n## Note 10. Stock Incentive Plan\n\nSHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY ■ 32\n\nThe fair value of each grant is estimated at the grant date using the Black-Scholes option-pricing model with the following weighted average assumptions:\n\nThe Company has a shareholder approved Company Stock Incentive Plan (the “Plan”), providing for the grant of incentive compensation to essentially all employees in the form of stock options. The Plan authorizes grants of options to purchase up to 480,000 shares of common stock over a ten-year period beginning in 1996. The option price for all grants has been at the current market price at the time of the grant. The grants have generally provided that one-half of the options exercisable on each of the first and second anniversaries of the date of grant, with the options expiring five years after they are granted. In 2003, the Company issued grants where the options are vested over a five-year period beginning on the third anniversary date of the grant of the options. The participant may exercise 20% of the total grant after each anniversary date through the eighth year, with the options expiring after ten years.\n\nAssumptions used by the Company in the determination of the Supplemental Retirement Plan information consisted of the following at December 31, 2003:\n\nIn May 2003, the Company adopted an unfunded nonqualified supplemental executive retirement plan for named executives. The plan was established to provide retirement benefits in addition to those provided under the Retirement Plan that covers all employees. The following table presents the actuarial information for the plan.\n\nThe Company’s matching contributions to the defined contribution plan were approximately $228 thousand, $210 thousand and $182 thousand for the years ended December 31, 2003, 2002 and 2001, respectively." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9126608262652526, + "doc_id": "2960ba538fb679299402db3fbfb01a62f2597e9d3a1ad4f1c7af6304bed65430", + "edit_distance": 0.7381443298969073, + "f1_score": 0.9333333333333333, + "meteor": 0.7614665560471459, + "precision": 0.9716088328075709, + "pred_md": "## HON INDUSTRIES Inc. and SUBSIDIARIES\n\nsales volume, offset by increased investment in brand equity building and new product development of approximately $7 million, and increased incentive compensation of which approximately $4 million was for a debenture earn out related to a prior acquisition.\n\nSelling and administrative expenses include freight expense for shipments to customers, product development costs, and amortization expense of intangible assets. The Selling and Administrative Expenses note included in the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements provides further information regarding the comparative expense levels for these major expense items.\n\n## RESTRUCTURING CHARGES\n\nDuring 2003, the Company closed two office furniture facilities and consolidated production into other U.S. manufacturing locations to increase efficiencies, streamline processes, and reduce overhead costs. The two facilities were located in Hazleton, Pennsylvania, and Milan, Tennessee. In connection with the closures, the Company recorded $15.7 million of pre-tax charges or $0.17 per diluted share. These charges included $6.7 million of accelerated depreciation of machinery and equipment which was recorded in cost of sales, $3.4 million of severance, and $5.6 million of facility exit, production relocation, and other costs which were recorded as restructuring costs. A total of 316 members were terminated and received severance due to these shutdowns. The closures are substantially complete. The Company anticipates additional costs of $0.3 to $0.5 million during the first quarter of 2004 related to these closures.\n\nThe Hazleton, Pennsylvania, facility is an owned facility and has been reclassified to current assets as it is currently being held as available for sale. It is included in the 'Prepaid expenses and other current assets' in the January 3, 2004, condensed consolidated balance sheet at its carrying value of $2.1 million. The Milan, Tennessee, facility is a leased facility that is no longer being used in the production of goods. The restructuring expense for 2003 included $1.4 million of costs that will continue to be incurred under the lease contract reduced by estimated sublease rentals that could be reasonably obtained.\n\nDuring 2002, the Company recorded a pretax charge of approximately $5.4 million due to the shutdown of an office furniture facility in Jackson, Tennessee. A total of 125 members were terminated and received severance due to this shutdown. During the second quarter of 2003, a restructuring credit of approximately $0.6 million or $0.01 per diluted share was taken back into income relating to this charge.\n\nThis was due to the fact that the Company was able to exit a lease with the lessor at more favorable terms than previously estimated.\n\nDuring the second quarter of 2001, the Company recorded a pretax charge of $24 million or $0.26 per diluted share for a restructuring plan that involved consolidating physical facilities, discontinuing low-volume product lines, and reductions of workforce. Included in the charge was the closedown of three of its office furniture facilities located in Williamsport, Pennsylvania; Tupelo, Mississippi; and Santa Ana, California. Approximately 500 members were terminated and received severance due to the closedown of these facilities. During the second quarter of 2002, a restructuring credit of approximately $2.4 million was taken back into income relating to this charge. This was mainly due to the fact that the Company was able to exit a lease with a lessor at more favorable terms than originally estimated and the Company's ability to minimize the number of members terminated as compared to the original plan.\n\n## OPERATING INCOME\n\nOperating income increased 5% in 2003 and 16% in 2002, respectively. The increase in 2003 is due to the additional week, strong sales volume in the hearth segment, and improved gross margins in both segments, offset by increased restructuring charges due to additional plant closures and consolidations, increased investment in brand building and selling initiatives, and increased freight costs. The increase in 2002 was due to a $24 million restructuring charge in 2001 compared to a $3 million restructuring charge in 2002 and goodwill and indefinitelived intangibles amortization of $9 million incurred in 2001 that is not included in 2002 due to a change in accounting standards.\n\n## NET INCOME\n\nNet income increased 7% in 2003 and 23% in 2002, respectively. Net income in 2003 was favorably impacted by increased interest income due to increased investments and decreased interest expense due to reduction in debt. Net income in 2002 was favorably impacted by a decrease in interest expense and a decrease in the effective tax rate to 35% in 2002 from 36% in 2001 mainly due to tax benefits associated with various federal and state tax credits. The Company anticipates that its tax rate will increase to 36% in 2004 due to increased state taxes and a reduced benefit from federal and state tax credits. Net income per diluted share increased by 8% to $1.68 in 2003 and by 23% to $1.55 in 2002, respectively. Due to the appreciation in the Company's stock price, outstanding options had a dilutive impact of $0.01 per share in 2003.\n\n35", + "recall": 0.8979591836734694, + "true_md": "H O N I N D U S T R I E S I n c . a n d S U B S I D I A R I E S\n\nsales volume, offset by increased investment in brand equity build- ing and new product development of approximately $7 million, and increased incentive compensation of which approximately $4 million was for a debenture earn out related to a prior acquisition. \n\nSelling and administrative expenses include freight expense for shipments to customers, product development costs, and amortiza- tion expense of intangible assets. The Selling and Administrative Expenses note included in the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements provides further information regarding the comparative expense levels for these major expense items.\n\nThis was due to the fact that the Company was able to exit a lease with the lessor at more favorable terms than previously estimated.\n\nDuring the second quarter of 2001, the Company recorded a pretax charge of $24 million or $0.26 per diluted share for a restructur- ing plan that involved consolidating physical facilities, discontinuing low-volume product lines, and reductions of workforce. Included in the charge was the closedown of three of its office furniture facilities located in Williamsport, Pennsylvania; Tupelo, Mississippi; and Santa Ana, California. Approximately 500 members were terminated and received severance due to the closedown of these facilities. During the second quarter of 2002, a restructuring credit of approximately $2.4 million was taken back into income relating to this charge. This was mainly due to the fact that the Company was able to exit a lease with a lessor at more favorable terms than originally estimated and the Company’s ability to minimize the number of members terminated as compared to the original plan.\n\nDuring 2003, the Company closed two office furniture facilities and consolidated production into other U.S. manufacturing locations to increase efficiencies, streamline processes, and reduce overhead costs. The two facilities were located in Hazleton, Pennsylvania, and Milan, Tennessee. In connection with the closures, the Company recorded $15.7 million of pre-tax charges or $0.17 per diluted share. These charges included $6.7 million of accelerated depreciation of machinery and equipment which was recorded in cost of sales, $3.4 million of sev- erance, and $5.6 million of facility exit, production relocation, and other costs which were recorded as restructuring costs. A total of 316 members were terminated and received severance due to these shutdowns. The closures are substantially complete. The Company anticipates additional costs of $0.3 to $0.5 million during the first quarter of 2004 related to these closures.\n\nOperating income increased 5% in 2003 and 16% in 2002, respectively. The increase in 2003 is due to the additional week, strong sales volume in the hearth segment, and improved gross margins in both segments, offset by increased restructuring charges due to additional plant clo- sures and consolidations, increased investment in brand building and selling initiatives, and increased freight costs. The increase in 2002 was due to a $24 million restructuring charge in 2001 compared to a $3 million restructuring charge in 2002 and goodwill and indefinite- lived intangibles amortization of $9 million incurred in 2001 that is not included in 2002 due to a change in accounting standards.\n\nThe Hazleton, Pennsylvania, facility is an owned facility and has been reclassified to current assets as it is currently being held as available for sale. It is included in the “Prepaid expenses and other cur- rent assets” in the January 3, 2004, condensed consolidated balance sheet at its carrying value of $2.1 million. The Milan, Tennessee, facility is a leased facility that is no longer being used in the production of goods. The restructuring expense for 2003 included $1.4 million of costs that will continue to be incurred under the lease contract reduced by estimated sublease rentals that could be reasonably obtained. \n\nNet income increased 7% in 2003 and 23% in 2002, respectively. Net income in 2003 was favorably impacted by increased interest income due to increased investments and decreased interest expense due to reduc- tion in debt. Net income in 2002 was favorably impacted by a decrease in interest expense and a decrease in the effective tax rate to 35% in 2002 from 36% in 2001 mainly due to tax benefits associated with various federal and state tax credits. The Company anticipates that its tax rate will increase to 36% in 2004 due to increased state taxes and a reduced benefit from federal and state tax credits. Net income per diluted share increased by 8% to $1.68 in 2003 and by 23% to $1.55 in 2002, respec- tively. Due to the appreciation in the Company’s stock price, outstanding options had a dilutive impact of $0.01 per share in 2003.\n\nDuring 2002, the Company recorded a pretax charge of approximately $5.4 million due to the shutdown of an office furniture facility in Jackson, Tennessee. A total of 125 members were terminated and received severance due to this shutdown. During the second quarter of 2003, a restructuring credit of approximately $0.6 million or $0.01 per diluted share was taken back into income relating to this charge. \n\n35\n\n## NET INCOME\n\n## OPERATING INCOME\n\n## RESTRUCTURING CHARGES" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9706416033556093, + "doc_id": "265471256a1a5ede280f1d1fd60eb49ecbe1dcf3333f411816ad5bab84e84288", + "edit_distance": 0.8996316758747698, + "f1_score": 0.9927710843373493, + "meteor": 0.7143780129275814, + "precision": 0.9951690821256038, + "pred_md": "is also located in relatively shallow water with infrastructure nearby, creating options for early production.\n\nAt Santos, we are proud that an Australian company took on that challenge and succeeded, and I congratulate the exploration and drilling teams on a great effort. With the Jeruk discovery behind us, Indonesia is at the forefront of our international exploration efforts. With eight wells planned in the region for 2005, Santos is currently the most active explorer in Indonesia.\n\n## A STRONG FINANCIAL PERFORMANCE\n\nIt was pleasing that Santos was able to conclude 2004 on a higher note than it started.\n\nWe achieved record annual revenue thanks to higher oil and gas prices combined with the return of full production at Moomba to produce a 21.5% jump in second half sales: the best result for any six-month period in Santos' history.\n\nThe average realised price for crude oil was up nearly 19% to A$51.83 per barrel.\n\nThese results have left Santos well positioned to continue its strong investment program which saw capital expenditure peak at $930 million in 2004.\n\nIn 2005 we expect to invest around $850 million of new capital in projects and our strategy is to plan for firm developments based on affordability at relatively low oil prices. If higher prices continue and some projects mature quickly and can be given the green light, our overall capital expenditure may be higher.\n\nProduction is expected to rise in 2005 when, as usual, our financial performance will be subject to oil prices, exchange rates and interest rates. These factors have a significant effect on our bottom line. A US$1 per barrel change in the oil price equates to a A$16 million change in net profit after tax in 2005.\n\nA one US cent movement in the Australia-US dollar exchange rate would produce a change in profit after tax of A$8 million, and a 1% change in interest rates equates to a change in net profit after tax of A$9 million.\n\n2004 has also been an important period for shareholders, with a significant improvement in the Santos share price combined with an increase in the dividend.\n\n## PRODUCTION TO REBOUND\n\nWhile we expected lower production overall in 2004, our output was obviously curtailed further by the incident at the Moomba plant. The good news is that several projects emerged from the development pipeline during the year and made positive contributions to our expanding suite of oil and gas facilities.\n\nProduction is forecast to increase by 15% in 2005, or by 4% after excluding the effect of the Moomba downtime, to about 54 million boe. We expect this positive forward trend to be followed by further production growth of more than 10% in 2006.\n\nThe Bayu-Undan liquids project came on line in April 2004 and, at its increased design throughput of just over one billion cubic feet of gas per day, produced liquids at a rate of 100,000 barrels per day.\n\nBayu-Undan is currently stripping liquids and re-injecting the gas pending tie-in of the pipeline to Darwin in May 2005 for future LNG production. The onshore LNG facilities are more than two-thirds complete. With a gross production of 19 million barrels, 22% above expectations for the year, we were pleased with the performance of Bayu-Undan and look forward to a full year contribution from this exciting project in 2005.\n\nThe Minerva gas field off Victoria's western coast started production in December 2004 and is ramping up to full field production of around 150 TJ per day. Our share in this project is 10%, and is significant because it represents our first foray into marketing gas directly to customers or into the Victorian spot market through our sales vehicle, Santos Direct, aimed at delivering higher prices.\n\n## RECORD EXPLORATION EFFORT AHEAD\n\nExploration is a great way to increase shareholder value so I am pleased to be able to report that in 2004, Santos drilled 16 wildcat wells resulting in seven hydrocarbon discoveries.\n\nGrowing our oil and gas reserves for future production is the goal of our exploration efforts. On a rolling three-year average we have replaced the hydrocarbons that Santos has produced at a rate of 130% of Proven (1P) reserves, at an average replacement cost of around US$7 per boe.\n\nSantos has an exciting exploration program for 2005: one that I believe holds the highest resource potential of any program in the Company's 50-year history.\n\nWe expect to participate in drilling a record 157 wells during 2005, of which 25 are exploration wildcat wells. Consistent with the growing internationalisation of Santos, this includes eight wells in Indonesia and six wells in the Gulf of Suez, Egypt. This program offers an attractive combination of risk and reward and is a new focus to our overseas exploration effort.\n\nIn the US, two exploration wells are planned, one onshore, and one offshore in the shallow waters of the Gulf of Mexico.\n\nIn Australia, our increasing focus on the potential of offshore areas will see Santos drill three wells off Western Australia in 2005, one off southern Australia and two wells off northern Australia. We will also drill two wells onshore in Queensland and one onshore in Victoria.\n\nThe discovery of oil and gas at Hiu Aman in the Kutei Basin, offshore East Kalimantan, has provided a strong start to our 2005 exploration program and we look forward with anticipation to further work on that significant find. Santos has a 50% interest in the discovery. We believe this region of Indonesia is very promising and Santos expects to drill four wells in the Kutei Basin in 2005.\n\n## BIGGEST DEVELOPMENT YEAR YET\n\nI am pleased also to report that 2004 was a record year for development with six projects advancing through the pipeline.\n\nThe start-up of the MutineerExeter oil field is a significant milestone in Santos' development history. This project off the\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\n5", + "recall": 0.9903846153846154, + "true_md": "We expect to participate in drilling a record 157 wells during 2005, of which 25 are exploration wildcat wells. Consistent with the growing internationalisation of Santos, this includes eight wells in Indonesia and six wells in the Gulf of Suez, Egypt. This program offers an attractive combination of risk and reward and is a new focus to our overseas exploration effort.\n\nBayu-Undan is currently stripping liquids and re-injecting the gas pending tie-in of the pipeline to Darwin in May 2005 for future LNG production. The onshore LNG facilities are more than two-thirds complete. With a gross production of 19 million barrels, 22% above expectations for the year, we were pleased with the performance of Bayu-Undan and look forward to a full year contribution from this exciting project in 2005.\n\nProduction is expected to rise in 2005 when, as usual, our financial performance will be subject to oil prices, exchange rates and interest rates. These factors have a significant effect on our bottom line. A US$1 per barrel change in the oil price equates to a A$16 million change in net profit after tax in 2005. \n\nis also located in relatively shallow water with infrastructure nearby, creating options for early production.\n\nAt Santos, we are proud that an Australian company took on that challenge and succeeded, and I congratulate the exploration and drilling teams on a great effort. With the Jeruk discovery behind us, Indonesia is at the forefront of our international exploration efforts. With eight wells planned in the region for 2005, Santos is currently the most active explorer in Indonesia. \n\nA one US cent movement in the Australia–US dollar exchange rate would produce a change in profit after tax of A$8 million, and a 1% change in interest rates equates to a change in net profit after tax of A$9 million.\n\nThe Minerva gas field off Victoria's western coast started production in December 2004 and is ramping up to full field production of around 150 TJ per day. Our share in this project is 10%, and is significant because it represents our first foray into marketing gas directly to customers or into the Victorian spot market through our sales vehicle, Santos Direct, aimed at delivering higher prices.\n\nIn the US, two exploration wells are planned, one onshore, and one offshore in the shallow waters of the Gulf of Mexico.\n\nIn Australia, our increasing focus on the potential of offshore areas will see Santos drill three wells off Western Australia in 2005, one off southern Australia and two wells off northern Australia. We will also drill two wells onshore in Queensland and one onshore in Victoria. \n\n2004 has also been an important period for shareholders, with a significant improvement in the Santos share price combined with an increase in the dividend.\n\nIt was pleasing that Santos was able to conclude 2004 on a higher note than it started. \n\n## A STRONG FINANCIAL PERFORMANCE\n\n## PRODUCTION TO REBOUND\n\n## RECORD EXPLORATION EFFORT AHEAD\n\n## BIGGEST DEVELOPMENT YEAR YET\n\nWe achieved record annual revenue thanks to higher oil and gas prices combined with the return of full production at Moomba to produce a 21.5% jump in second half sales: the best result for any six-month period in Santos' history. \n\nWhile we expected lower production overall in 2004, our output was obviously curtailed further by the incident at the Moomba plant. The good news is that several projects emerged from the development pipeline during the year and made positive contributions to our expanding suite of oil and gas facilities.\n\nExploration is a great way to increase shareholder value so I am pleased to be able to report that in 2004, Santos drilled 16 wildcat wells resulting in seven hydrocarbon discoveries.\n\nThe discovery of oil and gas at Hiu Aman in the Kutei Basin, offshore East Kalimantan, has provided a strong start to our 2005 exploration program and we look forward with anticipation to further work on that significant find. Santos has a 50% interest in the discovery. We believe this region of Indonesia is very promising and Santos expects to drill four wells in the Kutei Basin in 2005.\n\nThe average realised price for crude oil was up nearly 19% to A$51.83 per barrel.\n\nThese results have left Santos well positioned to continue its strong investment program which saw capital expenditure peak at $930 million in 2004. \n\nProduction is forecast to increase by 15% in 2005, or by 4% after excluding the effect of the Moomba downtime, to about 54 million boe. We expect this positive forward trend to be followed by further production growth of more than 10% in 2006.\n\nGrowing our oil and gas reserves for future production is the goal of our exploration efforts. On a rolling three-year average we have replaced the hydrocarbons that Santos has produced at a rate of 130% of Proven (1P) reserves, at an average replacement cost of around US$7 per boe. \n\nI am pleased also to report that 2004 was a record year for development with six projects advancing through the pipeline.\n\nThe start-up of the Mutineer- Exeter oil field is a significant milestone in Santos' development history. This project off the\n\nSantos has an exciting exploration program for 2005: one that I believe holds the highest resource potential of any program in the Company's 50-year history.\n\nThe Bayu-Undan liquids project came on line in April 2004 and, at its increased design throughput of just over one billion cubic feet of gas per day, produced liquids at a rate of 100,000 barrels per day. \n\nIn 2005 we expect to invest around $850 million of new capital in projects and our strategy is to plan for firm developments based on affordability at relatively low oil prices. If higher prices continue and some projects mature quickly and can be given the green light, our overall capital expenditure may be higher.\n\nAnnual Report 2004 5" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9045578811526716, + "doc_id": "b5ebd2ab2046ee8550364bfda4930b07341dbb332a5831ecf6c5ee7a2311a878", + "edit_distance": 0.3185378590078329, + "f1_score": 0.9618320610687022, + "meteor": 0.9574265345243183, + "precision": 0.9692307692307692, + "pred_md": "Recently, we opened the SKYLOFTS, a new level of luxury for guests atop MGM Grand Las Vegas.\n\nWe'll follow the success of these new resort features with a category-defining new nightclub at The Mirage, two fabulous restaurants by Joël Robuchon at MGM Grand Las Vegas and gaming upgrades company-wide. Second, we are doubling down on Las Vegas by merging with Mandalay, a company we have long admired. The Mandalay merger represents a tremendous opportunity to build on the momentum established by Mike Ensign and his team. And third, we are dreaming of a not-so-distant future, when\n\nAL FACCINTO President, MGM MIRAGE International Marketing\n\nAL FACCINTO President, MGM MIRAGE International Marketing\n\nALAN FELDMAN Senior VP Public Affairs, MGM MIRAGE\n\nBRUCE GEBHARDT Senior VP, MGM MIRAGE Global Security\n\nWILLIAM J. HORNBUCKLE President & COO, MGM MIRAGE Europe\n\nPHYLLIS JAMES Senior VP & Senior Counsel, MGM MIRAGE\n\nProject CityCenter will literally redefine the Las Vegas Strip and change the face of Las Vegas forever.\n\n## Mandalay in Motion\n\nWe are incredibly excited to begin our journey with the talented people of Mandalay, as we work to maximize the value of Mandalay's instantly recognized brands and worldclass resorts. Long a fixture in Las V egas, Mandalay's resorts will add to our premium portfolio and allow us to accelerate the pace of our growth. Our hotel people will be able to market a wider range of rooms and benefit from a world-class\n\nconvention center. Our casino marketing people will be able to offer their customers wonderful new amenities to expand our market reach. And our development people will be able to maximize the potential of priceless Las Vegas Strip land.\n\nThe Mandalay merger represents another defining moment for MGM MIRAGE, much like the Mirage Resorts transaction in 2000, at a time when Las Vegas is in a state of astounding metamorphosis. No company is better positioned to help shape the future of Las Vegas than MGM MIRAGE. We employ more people, invest more money and hold more prime real estate than any other company in Las Vegas. The\n\n15", + "recall": 0.9545454545454546, + "true_md": "Recently, we opened the SKYLOFTS, a new level of luxury for guests atop MGM Grand Las Vegas. \n\nWe’ll follow the success of these new resort features with a category-defining new nightclub at The Mirage, two fabulous restaurants by Joël Robuchon at MGM Grand Las Vegas and gaming upgrades company-wide. Second, we are doubling down on Las Vegas by merging with Mandalay, a company we have long admired. The Mandalay merger represents a tremendous opportunity to build on the mo- mentum established by Mike Ensign and his team. And third, we are dreaming of a not-so-distant future, when\n\nProject CityCenter will literally redefine the Las Vegas Strip and change the face of Las Vegas forever.\n\n## Mandalay in Motion\n\nWe are incredibly excited to begin our journey with the talented people of Mandalay, as we work to maximize the value of Mandalay’s instantly recognized brands and world- class resorts. Long a fixture in Las Vegas, Mandalay’s resorts will add to our premium portfolio and allow us to accelerate the pace of our growth. Our hotel people will be able to mar- ket a wider range of rooms and benefit from a world-class \n\nconvention center. Our casino marketing people will be able to offer their customers wonderful new amenities to expand our market reach. And our development people will be able to maximize the potential of priceless Las Vegas Strip land.\n\nThe Mandalay merger represents another defining moment for MGM MIRAGE, much like the Mirage Resorts transaction in 2000, at a time when Las Vegas is in a state of astounding metamorphosis. No company is better positioned to help shape the future of Las Vegas than MGM MIRAGE. We employ more people, invest more money and hold more prime real estate than any other company in Las Vegas. The\n\nPHYLLIS JAMES Senior VP & Senior Counsel, MGM MIRAGE\n\nWILLIAM J. HORNBUCKLE President & COO, MGM MIRAGE Europe\n\nBRUCE GEBHARDT Senior VP, MGM MIRAGE Global Security \n\nALAN FELDMAN Senior VP Public Affairs, MGM MIRAGE\n\nAL FACCINTO President, MGM MIRAGE International Marketing\n\n15" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8482952533251482, + "doc_id": "5ece2efb076311948af3f60f45e9c572b35da2b59382387158b050834242558a", + "edit_distance": 0.12921348314606743, + "f1_score": 0.9702970297029704, + "meteor": 0.9020756526382394, + "precision": 0.98989898989899, + "pred_md": "SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS\n\n## Years Ended December 31, 2003, 2002 and 2001 in thousands\n\n## Non-cash transactions:\n\nDuring 2002, the Company issued 4,654 shares of Company stock to employees valued at $0.1 million in recognition of the Company's 100 th year anniversary.\n\nIn December 2001, the Company received 310,158 shares of VeriSign Inc. common stock in exchange for 333,504 shares of Illuminet Holdings, Inc. stock as a result of the merger of the two entities.\n\nThe Company completed the sale of its GSM network equipment in January 2001, for approximately $6.5 million of which approximately $4.9 million was escrowed as part of a like-kind exchange transaction. The escrowed funds were disbursed as new equipment was received during the first six months of 2001.\n\nSee accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.\n\n17\n\n2003 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n■", + "recall": 0.9514563106796117, + "true_md": "## SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS\n\n## Years Ended December 31, 2003, 2002 and 2001 in thousands\n\nYears Ended December 31, 2003, 2002 and 2001 in thousands\n\nNon-cash transactions:\n\nDuring 2002, the Company issued 4,654 shares of Company stock to employees valued at $0.1 million in recognition of the Company’s 100 $^{th}$ year anniversary.\n\nIn December 2001, the Company received 310,158 shares of VeriSign Inc. common stock in exchange for 333,504 shares of Illuminet Holdings, Inc. stock as a result of the merger of the two entities.\n\nThe Company completed the sale of its GSM network equipment in January 2001, for approximately $6.5 million of which approximately $4.9 million was escrowed as part of a like-kind exchange transaction. The escrowed funds were disbursed as new equipment was received during the first six months of 2001.\n\nSee accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.\n\n17 ■ 2003 ANNUAL REPORT" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9290891256011377, + "doc_id": "3c6dcad82ec39d281d138f2a6c9fd2bfc500631bc2de110d6516c4c534987fa5", + "edit_distance": 0.09473684210526316, + "f1_score": 0.9829787234042554, + "meteor": 0.9689006112852038, + "precision": 0.9871794871794872, + "pred_md": "WHO WE ARE\n\n20\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\n## Corporate Governance\n\n## Basic Corporate Governance Policy\n\nCorporate governance is an important responsibility of management, and its most important role is to clarify the duties and responsibilities of the members of Nissan's management team. At Nissan, clear management objectives and policies are published for the benefit of the shareholders and investors, and achievements and results are announced early and with as much transparency as possible. The enhancement of corporate governance by full and fair disclosure is the responsibility of management.\n\n## The Company's organization and systems for internal control\n\nNissan operates under the dual governance of a Board of Directors and a Statutory Audit Committee, both based on the provisions of the Commercial Code of Japan. The Board of Directors is responsible for resolutions governing important business decisions while the Statutory Audit Committee supervises and controls the execution of Nissan's most important business functions.\n\nThe number of directors has increased from seven to nine following the 106th shareholders' meeting held on June 21st, 2005. An external director serves as one of the nine members of the Board of Directors. The Board of Directors holds general meetings as well as extraordinary meetings, if necessary, to discuss and decide significant business operations.\n\nThe number of auditors has changed to four, decreased by one, on the 106th general meeting of shareholders held on June 21st, 2005, and the Statutory Audit Committee is composed of three external statutory auditors and one statutory auditor. And three of four are standing statutory auditors. Each auditor attends the Board of Directors all the time and conducts audit of Directors' business operations in accordance with the annual audit strategies determined by the Statutory Audit Committee.\n\nIn Japan, the Domestic Internal Audit Office, which is independent from other sections and is composed of 14 people, has been established to conduct internal audits of the Nissan's and its domestic consolidated subsidiaries' operations under the President's direct control. With respect to foreign subsidiaries, in order to ensure effective and efficient audits, regional audit teams have been globalized and report to CIAO (Chief Internal Audit Officer) responsible for global internal audit.\n\nStatutory auditors perform audit of execution of entire business operations. Their procedures include, but are not limited to, interviewing the Directors with regard to business conduct and attending the Board of Directors' meetings and other significant meetings. The Statutory Audit Committee tries to enhance audit efficiency by sharing information among each statutory auditor. The statutory auditors also periodically receive the report of audit plans and the results of audit from internal audit departments. The statutory auditors also exchange their insight with the Internal Audit Office to facilitate their own audit. In addition, they also receive the report from independent auditors and determine its adequacy.\n\n## Status of Risk Management System\n\nThe Company defines the risk as 'factors which may prevent the achievement of business objectives,' and tries to identify and evaluate such risks as soon as possible and to take necessary measures to minimize the probabilities that risk materialize and the damages.", + "recall": 0.9788135593220338, + "true_md": "## Basic Corporate Governance Policy\n\n## The Company’s organization and systems for internal control\n\nCorporate governance is an important responsibility of management, and its most important role is to clarify the duties and responsibilities of the members of Nissan’s management team. At Nissan, clear management objectives and policies are published for the benefit of the shareholders and investors, and achievements and results are announced early and with as much transparency as possible. The enhancement of corporate governance by full and fair disclosure is the responsibility of management. \n\nNissan operates under the dual governance of a Board of Directors and a Statutory Audit Committee, both based on the provisions of the Commercial Code of Japan. The Board of Directors is responsible for resolutions governing important business decisions while the Statutory Audit Committee supervises and controls the execution of Nissan’s most important business functions.\n\nThe number of directors has increased from seven to nine following the 106th shareholders’ meeting held on June 21st, 2005. An external director serves as one of the nine members of the Board of Directors. The Board of Directors holds general meetings as well as extraordinary meetings, if necessary, to discuss and decide significant business operations. \n\nThe number of auditors has changed to four, decreased by one, on the 106th general meeting of shareholders held on June 21st, 2005, and the Statutory Audit Committee is composed of three external statutory auditors and one statutory auditor. And three of four are standing statutory auditors. Each auditor attends the Board of Directors all the time and conducts audit of Directors’ business operations in accordance with the annual audit strategies determined by the Statutory Audit Committee. \n\nIn Japan, the Domestic Internal Audit Office, which is independent from other sections and is composed of 14 people, has been established to conduct internal audits of the Nissan’s and its domestic consolidated subsidiaries’ operations under the President’s direct control. With respect to foreign subsidiaries, in order to ensure effective and efficient audits, regional audit teams have been globalized and report to CIAO (Chief Internal Audit Officer) responsible for global internal audit. \n\nStatutory auditors perform audit of execution of entire business operations. Their procedures include, but are not limited to, interviewing the Directors with regard to business conduct and attending the Board of Directors’ meetings and other significant meetings. The Statutory Audit Committee tries to enhance audit efficiency by sharing information among each statutory auditor. The statutory auditors also periodically receive the report of audit plans and the results of audit from internal audit departments. The statutory auditors also exchange their insight with the Internal Audit Office to facilitate their own audit. In addition, they also receive the report from independent auditors and determine its adequacy. \n\n## Status of Risk Management System\n\nThe Company defines the risk as “factors which may prevent the achievement of business objectives,” and tries to identify and evaluate such risks as soon as possible and to take necessary measures to minimize the probabilities that risk materialize and the damages.\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 20\n\nWHO WE ARE\n\nCorporate Governance" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5412950123902805, + "doc_id": "867ef2db7493a4efeceb8ae4dc3953c1060e8fe86e242e355f25d6501c33208c", + "edit_distance": 0.6349693251533742, + "f1_score": 0.9714285714285715, + "meteor": 0.5151448497571711, + "precision": 0.9754098360655737, + "pred_md": "FINANCIAL SECTION\n\n70\n\n## CONSOLIDATED FIVE-YEAR SUMMARY\n\nNissan Motor Co., Ltd. and Consolidated Subsidiaries Fiscal years 2004, 2003, 2002, 2001 and 2000\n\nNotes: 1. Unless indicated otherwise, all dollar figures herein refer to U.S. currency. Yen amounts have been translated into U.S. dollars, for convenience only, at ¥107 = $1, the approximate exchange rate on March 31, 2005.\n\n2. Net income per share amounts are based on the weighted average number of shares of common stock outstanding during each year. Figures for net income per share are in exact yen and U.S. dollars. Number of shares outstanding as of March 31, 2005: 4,520,715,112.\n\n3. Cash dividends during the full year by subsidiary companies to non-Nissan minority shareholders are not included.\n\nNotes: 1. Unit sales in Mexico are included in 'North America.'\n\n2. Sales and Production for Europe and Mexico for each year are on a January to December basis. (In the annual reports for the fiscal years before 2003, production for Europe and Mexico was on April to March basis.)\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004", + "recall": 0.967479674796748, + "true_md": "Nissan Annual Report 2004 70\n\nFINANCIAL SECTION\n\nNotes: 1. Unit sales in Mexico are included in “North America.” 2. Sales and Production for Europe and Mexico for each year are on a January to December basis. (In the annual reports for the fiscal years before\n\nNotes: 1. Unit sales in Mexico are included in “North America.” 2. Sales and Production for Europe and Mexico for each year are on a January to December basis. (In the annual reports for the fiscal years before 2003, production for Europe and Mexico was on April to March basis.)\n\nNotes: 1. Unless indicated otherwise, all dollar figures herein refer to U.S. currency. Yen amounts have been translated into U.S. dollars, for convenience only, at ¥107 = $1, the approximate exchange rate on March 31, 2005. 2. Net income per share amounts are based on the weighted average number of shares of common stock outstanding during each year. \n\nonly, at ¥107 = $1, the approximate exchange rate on March 31, 2005. 2. Net income per share amounts are based on the weighted average number of shares of common stock outstanding during each year. Figures for net income per share are in exact yen and U.S. dollars. Number of shares outstanding as of March 31, 2005: 4,520,715,112. 3. Cash dividends during the full year by subsidiary companies to non-Nissan minority shareholders are not included.\n\nNumber of shares outstanding as of March 31, 2005: 4,520,715,112. 3. Cash dividends during the full year by subsidiary companies to non-Nissan minority shareholders are not included.\n\n## Nissan Motor Co., Ltd. and Consolidated Subsidiaries Fiscal years 2004, 2003, 2002, 2001 and 2000\n\nCONSOLIDATED FIVE-YEAR SUMMARY" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "95a1fddc6e10e43ab8ba1301e0386308d494c5980bc558891c1661dbae8a9062", + "edit_distance": 0.6349693251533742, + "f1_score": 0.9714285714285715, + "meteor": 0.5151448497571711, + "precision": 0.9754098360655737, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.967479674796748, + "true_md": "# 2004 Annual Report Year Ended March 31, 2005\n\n2004 Year Ended March 31, 2005" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9606831088985411, + "doc_id": "0b94204306c53ea4e3a805d06408f099667687ea23c303b6820142bc0c69e775", + "edit_distance": 0.20572916666666666, + "f1_score": 0.9775784753363229, + "meteor": 0.9538090832795215, + "precision": 0.9849397590361446, + "pred_md": "Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations\n\n## Overall Outlook\n\nWe have invested heavily in our existing operations in 2003 and 2004, and expect to continue to do so on a targeted basis in 2005. Our Las Vegas Strip resorts require ongoing capital investment to maintain their competitive advantages. We believe the investments in additional non-gaming amenities we made in 2003 and 2004 have enhanced our ability to generate increased visitor volume and allowed us to charge premium prices for our amenities.\n\nThe most likely significant factors affecting operating results at our existing resorts in 2005 will be the expected continued strength of the leisure and convention travel segments, the expansion of Bellagio and the opening of KÀ and other amenities at MGM Grand Las Vegas, and new competition from Wynn Las Vegas on the Las Vegas Strip. Various lodging market observers, such as PricewaterhouseCoopers and Smith Travel Research, are forecasting mid-single digit percentage growth in REVPAR in 2005, with greater REVPAR gains in full service hotels. Our REVPAR growth, and REVPAR growth in Las Vegas in general, has outpaced that of the national market, and we expect that trend to continue.\n\nThe Bellagio expansion opened in late 2004 and added over 30% to the resort's room base. In addition, we added new meeting, retail and dining space and significantly expanded the spa and salon. KÀ opened in late November 2004 at MGM Grand Las Vegas, which had been without a featured production show for almost two years. Along with the numerous restaurant and other entertainment additions at MGM Grand Las Vegas, KÀ will enhance our ability to generate visitor traffic and capture a greater share of our guests' spending.\n\nWynn Las Vegas will add room capacity to the Las Vegas market, with its 2,700 rooms representing a 2% increase in Las Vegas room supply. Wynn Las Vegas will also feature numerous upscale restaurants and generally target customers who might otherwise choose Bellagio, MGM Grand Las Vegas or The Mirage. We believe there\n\nwill be some impact on these resorts from Wynn Las Vegas, but also believe that the breadth of amenities in our portfolio of resorts and our loyalty and other marketing programs will help minimize these competitive pressures. The proximity of Wynn Las Vegas to TI and The Mirage, along with pedestrian bridges linking TI with the Fashion Show Mall and Venetian, will also benefit these resorts.\n\n## Mandalay Merger\n\nOn June 16, 2004, we announced that we had entered into a definitive merger agreement with Mandalay Resort Group ('Mandalay'), a publicly traded company, under which we will acquire Mandalay for $71.00 in cash for each share of common stock of Mandalay. Mandalay owns and operates eleven properties in Nevada, including Mandalay Bay, Luxor, Excalibur, Circus Circus, and Slots-A-Fun in Las Vegas, Circus Circus-Reno in Reno, Colorado Belle and Edgewater in Laughlin, Gold Strike and Nevada Landing in Jean, and Railroad Pass in Henderson. Mandalay also owns and operates Gold Strike, a hotel/casino in Tunica County, Mississippi. In addition, Mandalay owns a 50% interest in Silver Legacy in Reno, a 50% interest in Monte Carlo in Las Vegas, a 50% interest in Grand Victoria, a riverboat in Elgin, Illinois, and a 53.5% interest in MotorCity in Detroit, Michigan. The total consideration is approximately $8.1 billion, including equity value of approximately $4.8 billion, convertible debentures with a redemption value of approximately $574 million, the assumption or repayment of other outstanding Mandalay debt with a fair value of approximately $2.6 billion as of December 31, 2004, and $100 million of estimated transaction costs. The transaction is structured as a merger of one of our wholly-owned subsidiaries with and into Mandalay. The transaction will be accounted for as a purchase and is anticipated to close during the first quarter of 2005.\n\nThe Mandalay merger will impact our operations in several ways. We will have to integrate Mandalay's operations into ours. This could require additional operating and capital expenditures. However, we expect to achieve ongoing cost savings and\n\n21", + "recall": 0.9703264094955489, + "true_md": "21\n\nManagement’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations\n\n## Overall Outlook\n\n## Mandalay Merger\n\nWe have invested heavily in our existing operations in 2003 and 2004, and expect to continue to do so on a targeted basis in 2005. Our Las Vegas Strip resorts require ongoing capital investment to maintain their competitive advantages. We believe the investments in additional non-gaming amenities we made in 2003 and 2004 have enhanced our ability to generate increased visitor volume and allowed us to charge premium prices for our amenities.\n\nThe most likely significant factors affecting operating results at our existing resorts in 2005 will be the expected continued strength of the leisure and convention travel segments, the expansion of Bellagio and the opening of KÀ and other amenities at MGM Grand Las Vegas, and new competition from Wynn Las Vegas on the Las Vegas Strip. Various lodging market observers, such as PricewaterhouseCoopers and Smith Travel Research, are forecasting mid-single digit percentage growth in REVPAR in 2005, with greater REVPAR gains in full service hotels. Our REVPAR growth, and REVPAR growth in Las Vegas in general, has outpaced that of the national market, and we expect that trend to continue. \n\nThe Bellagio expansion opened in late 2004 and added over 30% to the resort’s room base. In addition, we added new meeting, retail and dining space and signifi- cantly expanded the spa and salon. KÀ opened in late November 2004 at MGM Grand Las Vegas, which had been without a featured production show for almost two years. Along with the numerous restaurant and other entertainment additions at MGM Grand Las Vegas, KÀ will enhance our ability to generate visitor traffic and capture a greater share of our guests’ spending. \n\nWynn Las Vegas will add room capacity to the Las Vegas market, with its 2,700 rooms representing a 2% increase in Las Vegas room supply. Wynn Las Vegas will also feature numerous upscale restaurants and generally target customers who might otherwise choose Bellagio, MGM Grand Las Vegas or The Mirage. We believe there\n\nThe Mandalay merger will impact our operations in several ways. We will have to integrate Mandalay’s operations into ours. This could require additional operating and capital expenditures. However, we expect to achieve ongoing cost savings and\n\nOn June 16, 2004, we announced that we had entered into a definitive merger agreement with Mandalay Resort Group (“Mandalay”), a publicly traded company, under which we will acquire Mandalay for $71.00 in cash for each share of common stock of Mandalay. Mandalay owns and operates eleven properties in Nevada, including Mandalay Bay, Luxor, Excalibur, Circus Circus, and Slots-A-Fun in Las Vegas, Circus Circus-Reno in Reno, Colorado Belle and Edgewater in Laughlin, Gold Strike and Nevada Landing in Jean, and Railroad Pass in Henderson. Mandalay also owns and operates Gold Strike, a hotel/casino in Tunica County, Mississippi. In addition, Mandalay owns a 50% interest in Silver Legacy in Reno, a 50% interest in Monte Carlo in Las Vegas, a 50% interest in Grand Victoria, a riverboat in Elgin, Illinois, and a 53.5% interest in MotorCity in Detroit, Michigan. The total consideration is approximately $8.1 billion, including equity value of approximately $4.8 billion, convertible debentures with a redemp- tion value of approximately $574 million, the assumption or repayment of other outstanding Mandalay debt with a fair value of approximately $2.6 billion as of December 31, 2004, and $100 million of estimated transaction costs. The transac- tion is structured as a merger of one of our wholly-owned subsidiaries with and into Mandalay. The transaction will be accounted for as a purchase and is anticipated to close during the first quarter of 2005.\n\nwill be some impact on these resorts from Wynn Las Vegas, but also believe that the breadth of amenities in our portfolio of resorts and our loyalty and other marketing programs will help minimize these competitive pressures. The proximity of Wynn Las Vegas to TI and The Mirage, along with pedestrian bridges linking TI with the Fashion Show Mall and Venetian, will also benefit these resorts." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6754804732171602, + "doc_id": "d57b1d559a75ac10281d6bd5106f311c3fb2a25d8b54b2dbfc366533abb254e1", + "edit_distance": 0.8496551724137931, + "f1_score": 0.8597842835130971, + "meteor": 0.6888645032206852, + "precision": 0.8328358208955224, + "pred_md": "## IN V E S T O R IN F O R M A T I O N :\n\nA N N U A L M E E T I N G The annual meeting of shareholders will be held on Thursday, April 24, 2003, in Corning, NY. A formal notice tatements in this annual report that are not historica of the meeting together with a proxy statement will be mailed information are forward-looking statements. These to shareholders on or about March 12, 2003. The proxy state-looking statements involve risks and uncertainties ment can also be accessed electronically through the Investorcause the outcome to be materially different. Such Relations category of the Corning home page on the Internetnd uncertainties include, but are not limited to: at www.corning.com. A summary report of the proceedings at the annual meeting will be available without charge upon written request to Ms. Denise A. Hauselt, Secretary and Assistant General Counsel, Corning Incorporated, HQ-E2-10, Corning, NY 14831. 'Safe Harbor' Statement under the Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995 The s facts or forwardthat may risks a -global economic and political conditions, -currency fluctuations, -product demand and industry capacity, -competitive products and pricing,\n\n## A D D I T I O N A L IN F O R M AT I O N\n\n-\n\nsufficiency of manufacturing capacity and efficiencies,\n\n- -cost reductions,\n\nA copy of Corning's 2002 Annual Report on Form 10-K filed vailability and costs of critical materials, with the Securities and Exchange Commission is available ew product development and commercialization, upon written request to Ms. Denise A. Hauselt, Secretary and cting and retaining key personnel, Assistant General Counsel, Corning Incorporated, HQ-E2-10,er activity and demand from major customers, Corning, NY 14831. The Annual Report on Form 10-K can also be accessed electronically through the Investor Relations telecommunications industry and other category of the home page on the Internet at: www.corning.com -a -n -attra -ord fluctuations in capital spending by customers in the business segments, -financial condition of customers,\n\nIN V E S T O R IN F O R M AT I O N\n\nInvestment analysts who need additional information may contact Mr. Kenneth C. Sofio, Manager of Investor Relations, Corning Incorporated, HQ-E2-25, Corning, NY 14831; Telephone 607.974.9000\n\n## C O M M O N S T O C K\n\n- -changes in the mix of sales between premium and non-premium products,\n- -facility expansions and new plant start-up costs,\n- -adverse litigation or regulatory developments, including future or pending tax legislation,\n- -adequacy and availability of insurance,\n- -capital resource and cash flow activities,\n\nCorning Incorporated common stock is listed on the New York Stock Exchange and the SWX Swiss Exchange. In addition, it is traded on the Boston, Midwest, Pacific rest costs, and Philadelphia stock exchanges. Common stock options acquisition and divestiture activity, are traded on the Chicago Board Options Exchange. The abbreviated ticker symbol for Corning Incorporated is 'GLW.' ability to enforce patents, capital spending, -equity company activities, -inte --the rate of technology change, -the\n\nTRANSFER A GENT AND R EGISTRAR Computershare Investor Services LLC P.O. Box A-3504 Chicago, IL 60690-3504 Telephone: 800.255.0461 Website: www.computershare.com\n\nC HANGE OF A DDRESS Report change of address to Computershare Investor Services at the above address.\n\nIN D E P E N D E N T A C C O U N TA N T S PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP 1301 Avenue of the Americas New York, NY 10019\n\nCorning Incorporated\n\nOne Riverfront Plaza\n\nCorning, NY 14831-0001 607 974 9000\n\nwww.corning.com\n\n02BR24601EN\n\n- -product performance issues,\n- -stock price fluctuations, and\n- -other risks detailed in Corning's SEC filings.\n\nNeither this report nor any statement contained herein is furnished in connection with any offering of securities or the purpose of promoting or influencing the sale of securit\n\nCorning is an equal opportunity employer. Printed in USA\n\n© Corning Incorporated 2003", + "recall": 0.8885350318471338, + "true_md": "I NVESTOR I NFORMATION:\n\n## A NNUAL M EETING\n\n## A DDITIONAL I NFORMATION\n\n## I NVESTOR I NFORMATION\n\n## C OMMON S TOCK\n\n## Corning Incorporated\n\nThe annual meeting of shareholders will be held on Thursday, April 24, 2003, in Corning, NY. A formal notice of the meeting together with a proxy statement will be mailed to shareholders on or about March 12, 2003. The proxy state- ment can also be accessed electronically through the Investor Relations category of the Corning home page on the Internet at www.corning.com. A summary report of the proceedings at the annual meeting will be available without charge upon written request to Ms. Denise A. Hauselt, Secretary and Assistant General Counsel, Corning Incorporated, HQ-E2-10, Corning, NY 14831.\n\nA copy of Corning’s 2002 Annual Report on Form 10-K filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission is available upon written request to Ms. Denise A. Hauselt, Secretary and Assistant General Counsel, Corning Incorporated, HQ-E2-10, Corning, NY 14831. The Annual Report on Form 10-K can also be accessed electronically through the Investor Relations category of the home page on the Internet at: www.corning.com\n\nInvestment analysts who need additional information may contact Mr. Kenneth C. Sofio, Manager of Investor Relations, Corning Incorporated, HQ-E2-25, Corning, NY 14831; Telephone 607.974.9000\n\nCorning Incorporated common stock is listed on the New York Stock Exchange and the SWX Swiss Exchange. In addition, it is traded on the Boston, Midwest, Pacific and Philadelphia stock exchanges. Common stock options are traded on the Chicago Board Options Exchange. The abbreviated ticker symbol for Corning Incorporated is “GLW.” — — — — — —\n\n## T RANSFER AGENT AND REGISTRAR\n\n## C HANGE OF ADDRESS\n\n## I NDEPENDENT A CCOUNTANTS\n\nComputershare Investor Services LLC P.O. Box A-3504 Chicago, IL 60690-3504 Telephone: 800.255.0461 Website: www.computershare.com\n\nReport change of address to Computershare Investor Services at the above address.\n\nPricewaterhouseCoopers LLP 1301 Avenue of the Americas New York, NY 10019\n\nOne Riverfront Plaza Corning, NY 14831-0001 607 974 9000 www.corning.com\n\n02BR24601EN\n\nThe statements in this annual report that are not historical facts or information are forward-looking statements. These forward-looking statements involve risks and uncertainties that may cause the outcome to be materially different. Such risks and uncertainties include, but are not limited to:\n\nNeither this report nor any statement contained herein is furnished in connection with any offering of securities or for the purpose of promoting or influencing the sale of securities.\n\nCorning is an equal opportunity employer. Printed in USA\n\n© Corning Incorporated 2003\n\n- — other risks detailed in Corning’s SEC filings.\n\n- — stock price fluctuations, and\n\n- — product performance issues,\n\n- abbreviated ticker symbol for Corning Incorporated is “GLW.” — the ability to enforce patents,\n\n- — the rate of technology change,\n\n- — acquisition and divestiture activity,\n\n- — interest costs,\n\n- — equity company activities,\n\n- — capital spending,\n\n- — capital resource and cash flow activities,\n\n- — adequacy and availability of insurance,\n\n- — adverse litigation or regulatory developments, including future or pending tax legislation,\n\n- — global economic and political conditions, \n\n- — currency fluctuations,\n\n- — product demand and industry capacity,\n\n- — competitive products and pricing,\n\n- — sufficiency of manufacturing capacity and efficiencies,\n\n- — cost reductions,\n\n- — availability and costs of critical materials,\n\n- — new product development and commercialization,\n\n- — attracting and retaining key personnel,\n\n- — order activity and demand from major customers,\n\n- — fluctuations in capital spending by customers in the telecommunications industry and other business segments,\n\n- — financial condition of customers,\n\n- — changes in the mix of sales between premium and non-premium products,\n\n- — facility expansions and new plant start-up costs,\n\n## “Safe Harbor” Statement under the Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9190389555294655, + "doc_id": "19087ccc5a2cc37da8ab0b39aec6c812e047883ed9ac4be03545618f28ec5bb0", + "edit_distance": 0.42063492063492064, + "f1_score": 0.9748549323017407, + "meteor": 0.8976233583361768, + "precision": 0.980544747081712, + "pred_md": "## MALEO NEGOTIATIONS ADVANCED\n\nOutside Australia, Santos and its co-venturers have executed a Heads of Agreement for the sale of the entire gas reserves of the Maleo field offshore East Java, Indonesia. Santos continued negotiations with PT Perusahaan Gas Negara, Indonesia's stateowned gas distributor, on behalf of the joint venture to finalise the Gas Sales Agreement. The project is targeting first production in the first half of 2006 at rates of up to 100 mmcf/d for more than five years.\n\n## FIRST RETAIL GAS SALES WITH SANTOS DIRECT\n\nAs well as selling gas into the wholesale gas market, Santos secured a retail gas licence from the Victorian Government in 2004. This allows Santos to sell gas direct to industrial customers and into the Victorian spot market through a wholly-owned\n\nsubsidiary, Santos Direct Pty Ltd ('Santos Direct').\n\nSantos Direct will market Santos' 10% share of gas production from the Minerva field - around 15 TJ/d - in the offshore Otway Basin, which commenced production at the end of 2004.\n\nThe move to market and sell gas directly into the Victorian retail market is a first for Santos and leverages off Santos' position as one of Australia's largest gas producers, supplying wholesale gas to major industrial customers and specialist marketers in all mainland Australian states and territories.\n\n## LIQUIDS MARKETING ALLIANCE WITH BP\n\nAnother important marketing development during the year was the decision to outsource the marketing of crude oil and natural gas liquids to BP. The new marketing arrangements are in response to the significantly\n\nhigher volumes of crude oil that Santos will receive from the Mutineer-Exeter and Oyong projects, coming on stream in 2005, and the increasing globalisation of the liquids marketplace.\n\nThe validity of this approach has already been demonstrated by the sale of the first Mutineer-Exeter oil cargo at a premium to Tapis despite a discount for the uncertain delivery date.\n\nSantos continues to build an inventory of high quality options to provide a platform for production growth over the coming years. Santos is committed to a program of diversification while capitalising on the long-term Cooper Basin legacy asset. Most importantly, this involves leveraging the strengths of the core competencies built up over a number of years and Santos' well-positioned domestic gas franchise.\n\n'During 2004 we brought together everyone at Santos responsible for commercialisation into a single team. One of the outcomes from this was the introduction of gas swaps, where we were able to move gas between Santos assets in different states. '\n\n## RICK WILKINSON\n\nVice President Gas Marketing and Commercialisation\n\nThe alignment of joint venture interests in the John Brookes and East Spar fields has created an important production hub at Varanus Island, Carnarvon Basin, offshore Western Australia.\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\n21", + "recall": 0.9692307692307692, + "true_md": "## MALEO NEGOTIATIONS ADVANCED\n\nOutside Australia, Santos and its co-venturers have executed a Heads of Agreement for the sale of the entire gas reserves of the Maleo field offshore East Java, Indonesia. Santos continued negotiations with PT Perusahaan Gas Negara, Indonesia’s state- owned gas distributor, on behalf of the joint venture to finalise the Gas Sales Agreement. The project is targeting first production in the first half of 2006 at rates of up to 100 mmcf/d for more than five years.\n\n## FIRST RETAIL GAS SALES WITH SANTOS DIRECT\n\n## LIQUIDS MARKETING ALLIANCE WITH BP\n\n## RICK WILKINSON\n\nsubsidiary, Santos Direct Pty Ltd (‘Santos Direct’).\n\nSantos Direct will market Santos’ 10% share of gas production from the Minerva field – around 15 TJ/d – in the offshore Otway Basin, which commenced production at the end of 2004.\n\nThe move to market and sell gas directly into the Victorian retail market is a first for Santos and leverages off Santos’ position as one of Australia’s largest gas producers, supplying wholesale gas to major industrial customers and specialist marketers in all mainland Australian states and territories.\n\nAnother important marketing development during the year was the decision to outsource the marketing of crude oil and natural gas liquids to BP. The new marketing arrangements are in response to the significantly\n\nAs well as selling gas into the wholesale gas market, Santos secured a retail gas licence from the Victorian Government in 2004. This allows Santos to sell gas direct to industrial customers and into the Victorian spot market through a wholly-owned \n\nSantos continues to build an inventory of high quality options to provide a platform for production growth over the coming years. Santos is committed to a program of diversification while capitalising on the long-term Cooper Basin legacy asset. Most importantly, this involves leveraging the strengths of the core competencies built up over a number of years and Santos' well-positioned domestic gas franchise.\n\nThe validity of this approach has already been demonstrated by the sale of the first Mutineer-Exeter oil cargo at a premium to Tapis despite a discount for the uncertain delivery date.\n\nhigher volumes of crude oil that Santos will receive from the Mutineer-Exeter and Oyong projects, coming on stream in 2005, and the increasing globalisation of the liquids marketplace. \n\nVice President Gas Marketing and Commercialisation\n\nAnnual Report 2004 21\n\n‘During 2004 we brought together everyone at Santos responsible for commercialisation into a single team. One of the outcomes from this was the introduction of gas swaps, where we were able to move gas between Santos assets in different states.’\n\nThe alignment of joint venture interests in the John Brookes and East Spar fields has created an important production hub at Varanus Island, Carnarvon Basin, offshore Western Australia." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6989307622784944, + "doc_id": "c34dbebb8d2d97b3afe522286859963cf61fafb614f63e929802e6314771edf0", + "edit_distance": 0.3, + "f1_score": 0.8421052631578947, + "meteor": 0.7937500000000002, + "precision": 0.8888888888888888, + "pred_md": "## we're serving up...\n\n2004 Annual Report", + "recall": 0.8, + "true_md": "# we’re serving up...\n\n2004 Annual Report" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7053987074480172, + "doc_id": "b0d38997ca7b020922e47a96f5cb28233dac3d0d6490f240ca5407230aabd240", + "edit_distance": 0.2694610778443114, + "f1_score": 0.8842105263157894, + "meteor": 0.7739334758718327, + "precision": 0.9130434782608695, + "pred_md": "PERFECT MATCH #3\n\nT H E S M A L L T O MID-SIZED BUSINESS AND THE HON COMPANY\n\nThe truth is, The HON Company, 'practical and professional' is only one part of who you are. When it comes to partnering with small to mid-sized businesses as we are, you are the champion of the hardworking office: sensible, honest, and unpretentious, yet strong, well built, and totally committed to quality. You help us to be more productive by keeping us comfortable and relieving our stress. Your files, desks, panel systems, and other products are as contemporary, intelligent, and adaptable as we are! So call us both practical and professional; call us a perfect match.", + "recall": 0.8571428571428571, + "true_md": "## T H E S M A L L T O M I D - S I Z E D B U S I N E S S A N D T H E H O N C O M P A N Y\n\nThe truth is, The HON Company, “practical and professional” is only one part of who you are. When it comes to partnering with small to mid-sized businesses as we are, you are the champion of the hardworking office: sensible, honest, and unpretentious, yet strong, well built, and totally committed to quality. You help us to be more productive by keeping us comfortable and relieving our stress. Your files, desks, panel systems, and other products are as contemporary, intelligent, and adapt- able as we are! So call us both practical and professional; call us a perfect match. \n\nPERFECT MATCH #3" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8818452584105975, + "doc_id": "996b64a66416b01cb38c9b0519013613f52fd25afa7e16627cdc8bf09a20b328", + "edit_distance": 0.33962264150943394, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9975516701706778, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## 2002 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n- 2 Corporate Profile\n- 3 Financial Highlights\n- 4 Letter to Shareholders\n- 6 Shareholder Values\n- 12 Selected Financial Data\n- 13 Trust Services\n- 14 Subsidiary Bank Reports Financial Summaries Senior Officers and Directors Market Share\n- 25 Form 10-K\n\nInside Back Cover\n\nCorporate Information", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## 2002 ANNUAL REPORT\n\nInside Back Cover Corporate Information\n\n- 2 Corporate Profile\n\n- 3 Financial Highlights\n\n- 4 Letter to Shareholders\n\n- 6 Shareholder Values\n\n- 12 Selected Financial Data\n\n- 13 Trust Services\n\n- 14 Subsidiary Bank Reports\n\n- 25 Form 10-K\n\nFinancial Summaries Senior Officers and Directors Market Share" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9064631216997961, + "doc_id": "45f2a1ce7da61469ab36409c9c5c632c457eba0fbb28d6a7218bd428dab10bc1", + "edit_distance": 0.48032786885245904, + "f1_score": 0.9747899159663864, + "meteor": 0.9239567404992165, + "precision": 0.9797297297297297, + "pred_md": "OUR WORK\n\nTECHNOLOGY\n\n## Pursuing Value Through Technological Excellence\n\n'I have two prime objectives. The first is to realize our corporate vision, 'Enriching people's lives,' from an engineering standpoint. The second is to create a future vision for people working in R&D. Research and development is all about providing practical value to the customer via technological excellence, which in turn creates value for our shareholders. Nissan has made a major commitment to technological excellence so that we can accomplish these objectives.\n\n## Research and Development\n\nNissan's investment in R&D has been rising. In fiscal 2004 we devoted approximately ¥400 billion to it, equivalent to 4.6 percent of our turnover. We estimate that our financial commitment to R&D will continue to range between 4.5 and 5 percent. R&D investments take a lot of time to pay off, of course, so it's difficult to evaluate our evolution over the short term. Given our expanded output, however, I believe that we are headed in the right direction.\n\nFor example, the number of patents we have generated is growing quickly, exceeding 4,000 in fiscal 2003-more than twice the fiscal 1999 figure. And the number of research papers we present at societies such as The Japan Society of Mechanical Engineers rose dramatically in fiscal 2004. These are direct results of our commitment to research. We are also generating more new technologies related to safety and the environment, such as the Around View Monitor and the lane-keeping system.\n\nRear active steering\n\nRear active steering\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\nMITSUHIKO YAMASHITA Executive Vice President\n\nMITSUHIKO YAMASHITA Executive Vice President\n\nWe have succeeded in shortening our production pipeline, too, using a new vehicle development process called V3P that our engineers devised over the past three years. V3P, which stands for Value-up innovation of Product, Process, and Program, has helped us cut our development time almost in half, from 20 months to just 10.5 months. I believe this makes Nissan the world benchmark in development. That improvement is having a major effect on the flexibility and execution of R&D at Nissan, and will ultimately boost the company's profitability.\n\nThe number of new products we have brought to market over the past three years is equally significantmore than thirty new vehicles. That's an impressive engineering achievement, and the reason you are seeing so many new Nissan models on the road.\n\nOur R&D infrastructure, however, is still in need of expansion. We've therefore begun building new facilities at the Nissan Technical Center, NTC, and at the Nissan Advanced Technical Center, NATC, both of which are in Japan. These additions represent a major investment, and show Nissan's dedication to maintaining and enhancing its technological skills.\n\nOur technology base is in Japan, where we have some ten thousand people involved in R&D, but we also have two major centers in North America and Europe, and smaller operations in Taiwan, China, Thailand, South Africa and Brazil. In the past, these entities were mostly standalone operations, but today there are many more joint projects\n\nIntelligent cruise control\n\nIntelligent cruise control\n\nShock-absorbing body, to reduce pedestrian injuries", + "recall": 0.9698996655518395, + "true_md": "## TECHNOLOGY\n\n## Pursuing Value Through Technological Excellence\n\nMITSUHIKO YAMASHITA Executive Vice President\n\n“I have two prime objectives. The first is to realize our corporate vision, ‘ Enriching people’s lives,’ from an engineering standpoint. The second is to create a future vision for people working in R&D. Research and development is all about providing practical value to the customer via technological excellence, which in turn creates value for our shareholders. Nissan has made a major commitment to technological excellence so that we can accomplish these objectives. \n\nNissan’s investment in R&D has been rising. In fiscal 2004 we devoted approximately ¥400 billion to it, equivalent to 4.6 percent of our turnover. We estimate that our financial commitment to R&D will continue to range between 4.5 and 5 percent. R&D investments take a lot of time to pay off, of course, so it’s difficult to evaluate our evolution over the short term. Given our expanded output, however, I believe that we are headed in the right direction. \n\nFor example, the number of patents we have generated is growing quickly, exceeding 4,000 in fiscal 2003—more than twice the fiscal 1999 figure. And the number of research papers we present at societies such as The Japan Society of Mechanical Engineers rose dramatically in fiscal 2004. These are direct results of our commitment to research. We are also generating more new technologies related to safety and the environment, such as the Around View Monitor and the lane-keeping system.\n\nOur technology base is in Japan, where we have some ten thousand people involved in R&D, but we also have two major centers in North America and Europe, and smaller operations in Taiwan, China, Thailand, South Africa and Brazil. In the past, these entities were mostly standalone operations, but today there are many more joint projects\n\nOur R&D infrastructure, however, is still in need of expansion. We’ve therefore begun building new facilities at the Nissan Technical Center, NTC, and at the Nissan Advanced Technical Center, NATC, both of which are in Japan. These additions represent a major investment, and show Nissan’s dedication to maintaining and enhancing its technological skills. \n\nThe number of new products we have brought to market over the past three years is equally significant— more than thirty new vehicles. That’s an impressive engineering achievement, and the reason you are seeing so many new Nissan models on the road.\n\nWe have succeeded in shortening our production pipeline, too, using a new vehicle development process called V3P that our engineers devised over the past three years. V3P, which stands for Value-up innovation of Product, Process, and Program, has helped us cut our development time almost in half, from 20 months to just 10.5 months. I believe this makes Nissan the world benchmark in development. That improvement is having a major effect on the flexibility and execution of R&D at Nissan, and will ultimately boost the company’s profitability. \n\n## Research and Development\n\nOUR WORK\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 44\n\nShock-absorbing body, to reduce pedestrian injuries\n\nIntelligent cruise control\n\nRear active steering" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.030567355060426495, + "doc_id": "02a094caf73f02f681e81273a4b15ddb15308e79b59664835e306f3edbce0d56", + "edit_distance": 0.8888888888888888, + "f1_score": 0.35, + "meteor": 0.6226379440665155, + "precision": 0.21212121212121213, + "pred_md": "FINANCIAL SECTION\n\n96\n\n## (Interest-bearing debt)\n\nNet interest bearing debt\n\n(excluding that related to Canton Plant\n\nand lease obligation) ...............................................\n\n## ¥ (453,470) ¥3,862,214 ¥3,408,744\n\n$(4,238,037) $36,095,457 $31,857,420\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "FINANCIAL SECTION\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 96" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9032175988614154, + "doc_id": "5c04c2abe8cd0d3145a2855d865bc007bd976467120010de6839fb99bcd0e610", + "edit_distance": 0.7019867549668874, + "f1_score": 0.9855907780979828, + "meteor": 0.839777200261967, + "precision": 0.991304347826087, + "pred_md": "92\n\n## INFORMATION FOR SHAREHOLDERS\n\n## NOTICE OF MEETING\n\nThe Annual General Meeting of Santos Ltd will be held in the Auditorium at The Adelaide Town Hall Function Centre, 128 King William Street, Adelaide, South Australia on Friday 20 May 2005 at 10.00 am.\n\n## FINAL DIVIDEND\n\nThe 2004 final ordinary dividend will be paid on 31 March 2005 to shareholders registered in the books of the Company at the close of business on 4 March 2005 in respect of fully paid shares held at record date.\n\n## STOCK EXCHANGE LISTING\n\nSantos Ltd. Incorporated in Adelaide, South Australia, on 18 March 1954. Quoted on the official list of the Australian Stock Exchange Ltd (ordinary shares code STO; FUELS code STOPB) and the NZX Ltd.\n\n## AMERICAN DEPOSITORY RECEIPTS\n\nSantos American Depository Receipts issued by Morgan Guaranty in the USA are sponsored and are quoted on the NASDAQ system in the USA (code STOSY).\n\n## DIRECTORS\n\nS Gerlach (Chairman), J C Ellice-Flint (Managing Director), P C Barnett, K A Dean, R M Harding, G W McGregor, M A O'Leary, C J Recny, J Sloan. F J Conroy (retired 14 December 2004).\n\n## SECRETARY\n\nM G Roberts (retired 1 July 2004).\n\nW J Glanville (appointed 23 February 2004).\n\nMr Glanville is responsible for corporate governance, secretariat and legal services. Prior to his appointment, he was Manager - Legal of Santos' Legal Department and, prior to joining Santos, he practised law as a Barrister and Solicitor. Mr Glanville holds a Degree of Bachelor of Laws, a Degree of Bachelor of Arts and a Graduate Diploma in Legal Practice.\n\n## CHANGE OF SHAREHOLDER DETAILS\n\nIssuer Sponsored Shareholders wishing to update their details must notify the Share Registrar in writing. The relevant shareholder forms can be obtained from the Share Registrar or via the Investor Centre on the Santos website, www.santos.com.\n\nForms are available to advise the Company of changes relating to change of address, direct crediting of dividends, Tax File Number and Australian Business Number, Annual Report and Sustainability Review mailing preferences and Dividend Reinvestment Plan participation.\n\n## INVESTOR INFORMATION AND SERVICES Santos website\n\nA wide range of information for investors is available from Santos' website, www.santos.com, including Annual Reports, Full Year and Interim Reports and Presentations, Press Releases, Quarterly Activities Reports and Weekly Drilling Summaries.\n\nComprehensive archives of these materials dating back to 1997 are available on the Santos website.\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\nOther investor information available on the Santos website includes:\n\n- · open briefings with Corporate File - an ASX-endorsed online briefing service\n- · live and archived webcasts of investor briefings\n- · an e-mail alert facility where shareholders and other interested parties can register to be notified, free of charge, of Santos' Press Releases and Weekly Drilling Summaries via e-mail.\n\nThe Santos website provides shareholder forms to help shareholders manage their holdings, as well as a full history of Santos' dividend payments and equity issues. Shareholders can also check their holdings and payment history in the secure View Shareholding section.\n\nSantos' website also provides an online Conversion Calculator, which instantly computes equivalent values of the most common units of measurement in the oil and gas industry.\n\n## Publications\n\nThe Annual Report and the Sustainability Review are the major sources of printed information about Santos. Printed copies are available from the Share Registrar or Investor Relations.\n\n## SHAREHOLDER ENQUIRIES\n\nEnquiries about shareholdings should be directed to:\n\nShare Registrar, Santos Ltd, GPO Box 2455, Adelaide, South Australia 5001. Telephone: 08 8218 5111. E-mail: share.register@santos.com\n\nInvestor information, other than that relating to a shareholding, can be obtained from:\n\nInvestor Relations, Santos Ltd, GPO Box 2455, Adelaide, South Australia 5001. Telephone: 08 8218 5111. E-mail: investor.relations@santos.com\n\nElectronic enquiries can also be submitted through the Contact Us section of the Santos website, www.santos.com.\n\n## SHAREHOLDERS' CALENDAR", + "recall": 0.9799426934097422, + "true_md": "## INFORMATION FOR SHAREHOLDERS\n\n## NOTICE OF MEETING\n\n## FINAL DIVIDEND\n\n## STOCK EXCHANGE LISTING\n\n## AMERICAN DEPOSITORY RECEIPTS\n\n## Publications\n\n## SHAREHOLDER ENQUIRIES\n\n## DIRECTORS\n\n## SECRETARY\n\n## CHANGE OF SHAREHOLDER DETAILS\n\n## SHAREHOLDERS’ CALENDAR\n\n## Santos website\n\n## INVESTOR INFORMATION AND SERVICES\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\n## QUARTERLY REPORTING CALENDAR\n\nThe Annual General Meeting of Santos Ltd will be held in the Auditorium at The Adelaide Town Hall Function Centre, 128 King William Street, Adelaide, South Australia on Friday 20 May 2005 at 10.00 am.\n\nOther investor information available on the Santos website includes:\n\nThe 2004 final ordinary dividend will be paid on 31 March 2005 to shareholders registered in the books of the Company at the close of business on 4 March 2005 in respect of fully paid shares held at record date.\n\nThe Santos website provides shareholder forms to help shareholders manage their holdings, as well as a full history of Santos’ dividend payments and equity issues. Shareholders can also check their holdings and payment history in the secure View Shareholding section.\n\nSantos Ltd. Incorporated in Adelaide, South Australia, on 18 March 1954. Quoted on the official list of the Australian Stock Exchange Ltd (ordinary shares code STO; FUELS code STOPB) and the NZX Ltd.\n\nSantos’ website also provides an online Conversion Calculator, which instantly computes equivalent values of the most common units of measurement in the oil and gas industry.\n\nSantos American Depository Receipts issued by Morgan Guaranty in the USA are sponsored and are quoted on the NASDAQ system in the USA (code STOSY).\n\nThe Annual Report and the Sustainability Review are the major sources of printed information about Santos. Printed copies are available from the Share Registrar or Investor Relations.\n\nS Gerlach (Chairman), J C Ellice-Flint (Managing Director), P C Barnett, K A Dean, R M Harding, G W McGregor, M A O’Leary, C J Recny, J Sloan. F J Conroy (retired 14 December 2004).\n\nEnquiries about shareholdings should be directed to:\n\nShare Registrar, Santos Ltd, GPO Box 2455, Adelaide, South Australia 5001. Telephone: 08 8218 5111. E-mail: share.register@santos.com\n\nInvestor information, other than that relating to a shareholding, can be obtained from:\n\nInvestor Relations, Santos Ltd, GPO Box 2455, Adelaide, South Australia 5001. Telephone: 08 8218 5111. E-mail: investor.relations@santos.com\n\nElectronic enquiries can also be submitted through the Contact Us section of the Santos website, www.santos.com.\n\nM G Roberts (retired 1 July 2004). W J Glanville (appointed 23 February 2004). \n\nMr Glanville is responsible for corporate governance, secretariat and legal services. Prior to his appointment, he was Manager – Legal of Santos’ Legal Department and, prior to joining Santos, he practised law as a Barrister and Solicitor. Mr Glanville holds a Degree of Bachelor of Laws, a Degree of Bachelor of Arts and a Graduate Diploma in Legal Practice.\n\nIssuer Sponsored Shareholders wishing to update their details must notify the Share Registrar in writing. The relevant shareholder forms can be obtained from the Share Registrar or via the Investor Centre on the Santos website, www.santos.com. \n\nForms are available to advise the Company of changes relating to change of address, direct crediting of dividends, Tax File Number and Australian Business Number, Annual Report and Sustainability Review mailing preferences and Dividend Reinvestment Plan participation.\n\nA wide range of information for investors is available from Santos’ website, www.santos.com, including Annual Reports, Full Year and Interim Reports and Presentations, Press Releases, Quarterly Activities Reports and Weekly Drilling Summaries.\n\nComprehensive archives of these materials dating back to 1997 are available on the Santos website.\n\n- • an e-mail alert facility where shareholders and other interested parties can register to be notified, free of charge, of Santos’ Press Releases and Weekly Drilling Summaries via e-mail.\n\n- • live and archived webcasts of investor briefings\n\n- • open briefings with Corporate File – an ASX-endorsed online briefing service\n\n92" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9076144895626714, + "doc_id": "ebd1b976af12cd1d16d58939049920df139d7cd1d1cc52b7d3200c6ba45c23cd", + "edit_distance": 0.5328282828282829, + "f1_score": 0.9663461538461536, + "meteor": 0.917898392602823, + "precision": 0.9852941176470589, + "pred_md": "## DEVOTION TO SERVICE\n\nor us, it is a measure of responsible corporate citizenship. The MGM MIRAGE Corporate Charitable Giving Program is the principal source of financial donations to community and social initiatives. Funded by a percentage of the company's net profits, the Corporate Charitable Giving Program supports various community efforts impacting four critical areas: F\n\nCHILDHOOD DEVELOPMENT Community-based programs that focus on the overall development and well-being of children.\n\nCOMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT Programs that focus on low-income or socio-economically disadvantaged communities.\n\nDIVERSITY Programs which are inclusive receive priority in funding. This includes efforts that encourage economic development and enhance individual and community resources.\n\nEDUCATION Programs and efforts to strengthen public education from kindergarten through higher education.\n\nThrough various education partnerships with institutions such as the University of Nevada, we award scholarships to help students achieve their educational goals and to encourage their interest in our business. Additionally, scholarship programs assist the children of our employees with their higher education aspirations\n\n## MGM GRAND DETROIT\n\nPresident George Boyer epitomizes the company's commitment to corporate social responsibility. Boyer reads to a child at the Northwest Community Center in Detroit during an after-school mentoring program funded by the Voice Foundation.\n\nMGM MIRAGE supports a variety of programs to further educational aspirations of both students and employees, including tuition reimbursement for employees, scholarships for children of employees, and on-site GED, naturalization and English-asa-second-language (ESL) classes.\n\nGiving back to the communities in which MGM MIRAGE operates its businesses and where our employees live, work, and care for their families is a serious and dedicated commitment.\n\nMGM MIRAGE employee Christina Fuentes embraces a child during an event to benefit the Variety Day Home's Emergency Childcare Assistance Program in Las Vegas, one of the many programs supported by MGM MIRAGE to support the well-being of children. The program helps underwrite childcare assistance for low-income working parents.\n\n## In 2004, MGM MIRAGE\n\nemployees raised nearly $3 million for the Voice Foundation. Companywide, Aid for AIDS of Nevada (AFAN) was among one of the leading nonprofit agencies to receive the most funding support from the Voice Foundation.", + "recall": 0.9481132075471698, + "true_md": "## DEVOTION TO SERVICE\n\nor us, it is a measure of responsible corporate citizenship. The MGM MIRAGE Corporate Charitable Giving Program is the principal source of financial donations to community and social initiatives. Funded by a percentage of the company’s net profits, the Corporate Charitable Giving Program supports various community efforts impacting four critical areas: F\n\n- CHILDHOOD DEVELOPMENT Community-based programs that focus on the overall development and well-being of children.\n\n- COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT Programs that focus on low-income or socio-economically disadvantaged communities.\n\n- DIVERSITY Programs which are inclusive receive priority in funding. This includes efforts that encourage economic development and enhance individual and community resources. \n\n- EDUCATION Programs and efforts to strengthen public education from kindergarten through higher education.\n\nThrough various education partnerships with institutions such as the University of Nevada, we award scholarships to help students achieve their educational goals and to encourage their interest in our business. Additionally, scholarship programs assist the children of our employees with their higher education aspirations\n\nMGM MIRAGE employee Christina Fuentes embraces a child during an event to benefit the Variety Day Home’s Emergency Childcare Assistance Program in Las Vegas, one of the many programs supported by MGM MIRAGE to support the well-being of children. The program helps underwrite childcare assistance for low-income working parents. \n\nIn 2004, MGM MIRAGE employees raised nearly $3 million for the Voice Foundation. Companywide, Aid for AIDS of Nevada (AFAN) was among one of the leading non- profit agencies to receive the most funding support from the Voice Foundation.\n\nMGM GRAND DETROIT President George Boyer epitomizes the company’s commitment to cor- porate social responsibility. Boyer reads to a child at the Northwest Community Center in Detroit during an after-school mentoring program funded by the Voice Foundation.\n\nMGM MIRAGE supports a variety of pro- grams to further educational aspirations of both students and employees, including tuition reimbursement for employees, scholarships for children of employees, and on-site GED, naturalization and English-as- a-second-language (ESL) classes. \n\nGiving back to the communities in which MGM MIRAGE operates its businesses and where our employees live, work, and care for their families is a serious and dedicated commitment." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.903749709250572, + "doc_id": "cd159de3a6b8958b38ad8a9887e51fb3f261722c93bd22249068d337da3810ed", + "edit_distance": 0.3902027027027027, + "f1_score": 0.979591836734694, + "meteor": 0.8757298226228699, + "precision": 0.9873417721518988, + "pred_md": "Hormel Foods has a solid reputation for maintaining a flexible, strong financial position. Cash from operations totaled $294.7 million in fiscal 2004. Debt accounted for 21 percent of our total capitalization. We devoted our available cash - including the gains from recent sales of Vista Packaging and our Campofrio investment - to our ongoing pursuit of acquisitions that meet our demanding standards. We also directed cash to an aggressive 16 percent increase in the 2005 dividend payout and to additional common stock repurchases. At year end, 8.4 million shares of common stock are yet to be repurchased as part of the 10 million share repurchase program authorized in 2002.\n\nmaintain strong leadership Hormel Foods is fortunate to have had many talented, dedicated leaders over the years. Their contributions are evident in every aspect of this company today. Early in 2004, we welcomed John L. Morrison to our Board of Directors. A former senior executive of The Pillsbury Company, Jack is director and founder of Goldner Hawn Johnson & Morrison Inc., a private equity firm in Minneapolis, Minn. He also has been chairman of Callanish Capital Partners, a private hedge fund, since 2001. His financial background and corporate and international experience will help Hormel Foods continue to move forward in the food industry. We are grateful for many years of wisdom from Mahlon C. Schneider, senior vice president of external affairs and general counsel, who retired in late 2004. James W. Cavanaugh, corporate secretary and senior attorney, was named to succeed Mahlon, and we look forward to his continued contribution to the company. Finally, at mid-year we named Jeffrey M. Ettinger to the post of president and chief operating officer and to the Hormel Foods board. Jeff is a well-seasoned Hormel Foods executive and\n\nBread Ready pre-sliced meats are successful because of the convenience they provide the foodservice operator, along with excellent quality and flavor. Sales were up 16 percent for the year.\n\nserved most recently as a Hormel Foods group vice president and chief executive officer of Jennie-O Turkey Store. I am excited to be working closely with Jeff and I have complete confidence in his ability to lead Hormel Foods to continued success. Michael D. Tolbert, formerly our director of information technology services, succeeded Jeff as president of Jennie-O Turkey Store.\n\n## sound strategy and outlook\n\nWe begin fiscal 2005 with more favorable conditions than a year ago. The demand for protein continues to be very good. Our value-added line of products continues to gain momentum and there is an improved price outlook for grain, which is a key input for our turkey operation.\n\nShareholders may be assured that we will continue to reward their trust through focused attention to our long-term growth strategies:\n\n- · increase our value-added product mix\n- · brand the fresh meat case\n- · contemporize our product portfolio\n- · grow our ethnic foods business\n- · support foodservice growth\n- · grow the international business in select regions\n- · identify and pursue high-potential products and channels\n- · enhance profitability by operating more efficiently\n- · maintain sound financial discipline.\n\nJoel W. Johnson Chairman of the Board and Chief Executive Officer\n\nJoel W. Johnson Chairman of the Board and Chief Executive Officer\n\n2004 Annual Report\n\n5", + "recall": 0.9719626168224299, + "true_md": "served most recently as a Hormel Foods group vice president and chief executive officer of Jennie-O Turkey Store. I am excited to be working closely with Jeff and I have complete con- fidence in his ability to lead Hormel Foods to continued success. Michael D. Tolbert, formerly our director of information technology services, succeeded Jeff as president of Jennie-O Turkey Store.\n\nHormel Foods has a solid reputation for maintaining a flexible, strong financial position. Cash from operations totaled $294.7 million in fiscal 2004. Debt accounted for 21 percent of our total capitalization. We devoted our available cash – including the gains from recent sales of Vista Packaging and our Campofrio investment – to our ongoing pursuit of acquisitions that meet our demanding standards. We also directed cash to an aggres- sive 16 percent increase in the 2005 dividend payout and to additional common stock repurchases. At year end, 8.4 million shares of common stock are yet to be repurchased as part of the 10 million share repurchase program authorized in 2002. \n\nmaintain strong leadership Hormel Foods is fortunate to have had many talented, dedicated leaders over the years. Their con- tributions are evident in every aspect of this company today. Early in 2004, we welcomed John L. Morrison to our Board of Directors. A former senior executive of The Pillsbury Company, Jack is director and founder of Goldner Hawn Johnson & Morrison Inc., a private equity firm in Minneapolis, Minn. He also has been chairman of Callanish Capital Partners, a private hedge fund, since 2001. His financial background and corpo- rate and international experience will help Hormel Foods continue to move forward in the food industry. We are grateful for many years of wisdom from Mahlon C. Schneider, senior vice president of external affairs and general counsel, who retired in late 2004. James W. Cavanaugh, corporate secretary and senior attorney, was named to succeed Mahlon, and we look forward to his continued contribution to the company. Finally, at mid-year we named Jeffrey M. Ettinger to the post of president and chief operating officer and to the Hormel Foods board. Jeff is a well-seasoned Hormel Foods executive and\n\nWe begin fiscal 2005 with more favorable conditions than a year ago. The demand for protein continues to be very good. Our value-added line of products continues to gain momentum and there is an improved price outlook for grain, which is a key input for our turkey operation. \n\nShareholders may be assured that we will continue to reward their trust through focused attention to our long-term growth strategies:\n\n- • brand the fresh meat case\n\n- • increase our value-added product mix\n\n- • contemporize our product portfolio\n\n- • grow our ethnic foods business\n\n- • support foodservice growth\n\n- • grow the international business in select regions\n\n- • identify and pursue high-potential products and channels\n\n- • enhance profitability by operating more efficiently\n\n- • maintain sound financial discipline.\n\nJoel W. Johnson Chairman of the Board and Chief Executive Officer\n\nBread Ready pre-sliced meats are successful because of the convenience they provide the foodservice operator, along with excellent quality and flavor. Sales were up 16 percent for the year.\n\n2004 Annual Report\n\n5\n\n## sound strategy and outlook" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7823244058627868, + "doc_id": "22b47a5c6bed3354a10f31edd375ecda3c5cbbf00f23802defe0f8e4955c34bb", + "edit_distance": 0.125, + "f1_score": 0.9387755102040818, + "meteor": 0.8819931758192235, + "precision": 0.9583333333333334, + "pred_md": "## We exceeded last year's earnings by more than 15%.\n\nAgain.\n\n2003 A N N U A L R E P O R T", + "recall": 0.92, + "true_md": "## We exceeded last year’s earnings by more than 15%.\n\n## Again.\n\n2003 A N N U A L R E P O R T" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9419661180380056, + "doc_id": "2e187f57fef8982e287d5bdf74b8fa1a8778dce343031aa0312bbf5aeb66ca3a", + "edit_distance": 0.17142857142857143, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9974810495626822, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "FINANCIAL SECTION\n\n74\n\n## CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF INCOME\n\nNissan Motor Co., Ltd. and Consolidated Subsidiaries Fiscal years 2004, 2003 and 2002\n\nSee notes to consolidated financial statements.\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF INCOME\n\nNissan Motor Co., Ltd. and Consolidated Subsidiaries Fiscal years 2004, 2003 and 2002\n\nSee notes to consolidated financial statements.\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 74\n\nFINANCIAL SECTION" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.860308038835726, + "doc_id": "cd40cb25f7f0a700e3c7f3caee6258a11ed4a09d5cf68dfe8a50d565c080246b", + "edit_distance": 0.8214654282765738, + "f1_score": 0.9397590361445783, + "meteor": 0.7327266156390208, + "precision": 0.9696132596685083, + "pred_md": "54\n\n## NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\nfor the year ended 31 December 2004\n\n## 1. Statement of Accounting Policies (continued)\n\n## (g) Revenue\n\nProduct sales, equipment rentals and pipeline tariffs, overriding royalties and other income are recognised when the goods and services are provided and the Santos Group has a legally enforceable entitlement to the proceeds. Interest revenue is recognised as it accrues. Dividend income from controlled entities is recognised as revenue as dividends are declared and from other parties as dividends are received.\n\nThe gross proceeds of non-current asset sales are included as revenue at the date control of the asset passes to the buyer, usually when an unconditional contract of sale is signed. The gain or loss on disposal is calculated as the difference between the carrying amount of the asset at the time of disposal and the net proceeds on disposal.\n\n## (h) Goods and services tax\n\nRevenues, expenses and assets are recognised net of the amount of goods and services tax ('GST'), except where the amount of GST incurred is not recoverable from the Australian Tax Office ('ATO'). In these circumstances the GST is recognised as part of the cost of acquisition of the asset or as part of the expense.\n\nReceivables and payables are stated with the amount of GST included.\n\nThe net amount of GST recoverable from, or payable to, the ATO is included as a current asset or liability in the statements of financial position.\n\nCash flows are included in the statements of cash flows on a gross basis. The GST components of cash flows arising from investing and financing activities which are recoverable from, or payable to, the ATO are classified as operating cash flows.\n\n## (i) Cash\n\nFor the purposes of the statements of cash flows, cash includes cash on hand, cash at bank and short-term deposits at call.\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\n## (j) Receivables\n\nTrade debtors and other receivables are recorded at amounts due. A provision is made for any doubtful debts based on a review of collectability of outstanding amounts at balance date. Bad debts are written off in the period they are identified.\n\n## (k) Inventories\n\nInventories are valued at the lower of cost and net realisable value after provision is made for obsolescence. Cost is determined as follows:\n\n- (i) drilling and maintenance stocks, which include plant spares, maintenance and drilling tools used for ongoing operations, are valued at average cost; and\n- (ii) petroleum products, which comprise extracted crude oil, liquefied petroleum gas, condensate and naphtha stored in tanks and pipeline systems and processed sales gas and ethane stored in subsurface reservoirs, are valued using the absorption cost method.\n\n## (l) Exploration and development expenditure\n\nExploration and development expenditures in respect of each area of interest are accumulated and carried forward if either:\n\n- (i) such expenditure is expected to be recouped through successful development and commercial exploitation of the area of interest; or\n- (ii) the exploration activities in the area of interest have not yet reached a stage which permits reasonable assessment of the existence of economically recoverable reserves and active and significant operations in, or in relation to, the area of interest are continuing.\n\nWhen either an area of interest is abandoned or the Directors consider the expenditure to be of reduced or no further value, accumulated exploration expenditure is written down or off in the period in which such a decision is made.\n\n## (m)Borrowings\n\nBorrowings are carried on the statements of financial position at their principal amount. Interest is accrued at the contracted rate.\n\n## (n) Leases\n\nOperating lease payments, where the lessor effectively retains substantially all the risks and benefits of ownership of the leased items, are expensed on a straight line basis over the term of the lease.\n\n## (o) Capitalisation of borrowing costs\n\nBorrowing costs, including interest, finance charges and foreign currency exchange gains and losses relating to major plant and equipment projects under development and construction up to the date of commencement of commercial operations, are capitalised and amortised over the expected useful lives of the facilities. Where funds are borrowed specifically for qualifying projects the actual borrowing costs incurred are capitalised. Where the projects are funded through general borrowings the borrowing costs are capitalised based on the weighted average borrowing rate, which for the year ended 31 December 2004 was 5.09% (2003: 4.91%).\n\nBorrowing costs incurred in respect of completed projects are expensed.\n\n## (p) Deferred income\n\nA liability is recorded for obligations under sales contracts to deliver natural gas in future periods for which payment has already been received.\n\n## (q) Depreciation and depletion\n\nDepreciation charges are calculated to write-off the carrying value of buildings, plant and equipment over their estimated useful lives to the entity. Depreciation of onshore buildings, plant and equipment assets is calculated using the straight line method of depreciation. The estimated useful lives to the entity will vary for each asset depending on projected average rate", + "recall": 0.9116883116883117, + "true_md": "## NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STA TEMENTS\n\nfor the year ended 31 December 2004\n\n## 1. Statement of Accounting Policies (continued)\n\n## (g) Revenue\n\n## (j) Receivables\n\n## (m)Borrowings\n\n## (n) Leases\n\n## (k) Inventories\n\n## (h) Goods and services tax\n\n## (o) Capitalisation of borrowing costs\n\n## (p) Deferred income\n\n## (q) Depreciation and depletion\n\n## (i) Cash\n\n## (l) Exploration and de velopment expenditure\n\nThe gross proceeds of non-current asset sales are included as revenue at the date control of the asset passes to the buyer, usually when an unconditional contract of sale is signed. The gain or loss on disposal is calculated as the difference between the carrying amount of the asset at the time of disposal and the net proceeds on disposal.\n\nProduct sales, equipment rentals and pipeline tariffs, overriding royalties and other income are recognised when the goods and services are provided and the Santos Group has a legally enforceable entitlement to the proceeds. Interest revenue is recognised as it accrues. Dividend income from controlled entities is recognised as revenue as dividends are declared and from other parties as dividends are received.\n\nTrade debtors an other receivables are recorded at amounts due. A provision is made for any d oubtful d ebts based on a review of collectability of outstanding amounts at balance d ate. Bad debts are written off in th period they are identified.\n\nBorrowings are carried on the statements of financial position at their principal amount. Interest is accrued at the contracted rate.\n\nOperating lease payments, where the lessor effectively retains substantially all the risks and benefits of ownership of the leased items, are expensed on a straight line basis over the term of the lease.\n\nBorrowing costs, including interest, finance charges and foreign currency exchange gains and losses relating to major plant and equipment projects under development and construction up to the date of commencement of commercial operations, are capitalised and amortised over the expected useful lives of the facilities. Where funds are borrowed specifically for qualifying projects the actual borrowing costs incurred are capitalised. Where the projects are funded through general borrowings the borrowing costs are capitalised based on the weighted average borrowing rate, which for the year ended 31 December 2004 was 5.09% (2003: 4.91%).\n\nBorrowing costs incurred in respect of completed projects are expensed.\n\nRevenues, expenses and assets are recognised net of the amount of goods and services tax (“GST”), except where the amount of GST incurred is not recoverable from the Australian Tax Office (“ATO”). In these circumstances the GST is recognised as part of the cost of acquisition of the asset or as part of the expense.\n\nReceivables and payables are stated with the amount of GST included.\n\nThe net amount of GST recoverable from, or payable to, the ATO is included as a current asset or liability in the statements of financial position.\n\nCash flows are included in the statements of cash flows on a gross basis. The GST components of cash flows arising from investing and financing activities which are recoverable from, or payable to, the ATO are classified as operating cash flows.\n\nFor the purposes of the statements of cash flows, cash includes cash on hand, cash at bank and short-term deposits at call.\n\nWhen either an area of interest is abandoned or th Directors consider the expenditure to be of reduced or no further value, accumulated e xploration expenditur is written down or off in the period in which such a decision is made.\n\nExploration and d evelopm ent expenditures in respect of each area of interest are accumulated an carried forward if either:\n\n- (i) such expenditur e is expected to be recouped thr ough successful development an d commercial exploitation of the area of interest; or\n\n- (ii) the exploration activities in the area of interest have n ot yet reached a stage which permits r easonable assessment of the existence of economically recoverable r eserves and active and significant oper ations in, or in relation to, the area of interest are continuing.\n\nA liability is recorded for obligations under sales contracts to deliver natural gas in future periods for which payment has already been received.\n\nDepreciation charges are calculated to write-off the carrying value of buildings, plant and equipment over their estimated useful lives to the entity. Depreciation of onshore buildings, plant and equipment assets is calculated using the straight line method of depreciation. The estimated useful lives to the entity will vary for each asset depending on projected average rate \n\n- (ii) petroleum produ cts, which comprise extracted crude oil, liquefied petroleum gas, condensate and naphtha stored in tanks an pipeline systems and processed sales gas and ethane stored in subsurface r eservoirs, are valued using th absorption cost method.\n\n- (i) drilling and m ain tenance stocks, which include plant spares, maintenance an d drilling tools used for ongoin operations, are valued at averag cost; and\n\nInventories ar valued at the lower of cost and net realisable value after provision is made for obsolescen ce. Cost is determined as follows:\n\n54\n\nAnnual Report 2004" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8523192236291659, + "doc_id": "eedcd0a2a6a3bb42e04c2d42026e5cbbc9b42cfd30133b7fdfdd8c92dbbd8dca", + "edit_distance": 0.7516973811833172, + "f1_score": 0.9380281690140845, + "meteor": 0.6491040857527163, + "precision": 0.9794117647058823, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\nfor the year ended 31 December 2004\n\n## 1. Statement of Accounting Policies\n\nThe significant accounting policies that have been adopted in the preparation of this financial report are:\n\n## (a) Basis of preparation\n\nThe financial report is a general purpose financial report prepared in accordance with applicable Accounting Standards, Urgent Issues Group Consensus Views, other authoritative pronouncements of the Australian Accounting Standards Board and the Corporations Act 2001 collectively referred to as Australian Generally Accepted Accounting Principles ('Australian GAAP'). The financial report has been prepared on the basis of historical costs and, except where stated, does not take into account changing money values or fair values of assets.\n\nThe accounting policies have been consistently applied by each entity in the Santos Group and are consistent with those adopted in the previous financial year.\n\n## (b) Principles of consolidation\n\nThe consolidated financial statements of the Santos Group include the financial statements of the Company, Santos Ltd being the parent entity, and its controlled entities.\n\nThe balances and effects of all transactions between controlled entities are eliminated in full on consolidation.\n\nInterests in unincorporated joint ventures are recognised by including in the financial statements the Santos Group's proportion of the joint venture costs, assets and liabilities.\n\n## (c) Non-current assets\n\nWith the exception of exploration expenditure carried forward pertaining to areas of interest in the exploration stage (refer note 1(l)), the carrying amounts of non-current assets are reviewed to determine whether they are in excess of their estimated recoverable amount at balance date. If the carrying amount of a non-current asset exceeds the estimated recoverable amount, the asset is written down to the lower value. The write-down is expensed in the reporting period in which it occurs.\n\nIn assessing recoverable amounts, the relevant cash flows have not been discounted to their present value.\n\n## (d) Acquisition of assets\n\nAll assets acquired are recorded at their cost of acquisition, being the fair value of the consideration provided plus incidental costs directly attributable to the acquisition.\n\nOn acquisition of a controlled entity, the identifiable net assets acquired are recorded at their fair values. To the extent that there is excess purchase consideration representing goodwill, the goodwill is amortised using the straight line method over a period of 20 years. The unamortised balance of goodwill is reviewed at each balance date and charged against profit to the extent that the balance exceeds the value of expected future benefits.\n\nAssets transferred between entities within the Santos Group are recognised by the acquiring entity at fair value.\n\n## (e) Foreign currency\n\nForeign currency transactions are translated to Australian currency at the rates of exchange in effect at the dates of the transactions. Amounts receivable and payable in foreign currencies at balance date are translated at the rate of exchange existing on that date. Exchange differences relating to amounts receivable or payable in foreign currencies are brought to account in the statements of financial performance in the period in which they arise.\n\nMonetary assets and liabilities of integrated foreign operations are translated at the exchange rate existing at balance date, while non-monetary items and revenue and expense items are translated at exchange rates current when the transactions occurred. Exchange differences arising on the translation of monetary assets and liabilities are brought to account in the statement of financial performance.\n\nAssets and liabilities of self-sustaining foreign operations are translated at the exchange rate existing at balance date. Equity items are translated at historical rates. The statements of financial performance are translated at a weighted average rate for the year. Exchange differences arising on translation are taken directly to the foreign currency translation reserve.\n\n## (f) Derivative financial instruments\n\nThe Santos Group uses derivative financial instruments to hedge its exposure to changes in foreign exchange rates, commodity prices and interest rates arising in the normal course of business. The principal derivatives used are forward foreign exchange contracts, foreign currency swaps, foreign currency option contracts, interest rate swaps and options, commodity crude oil price swap and option contracts and natural gas swap and option contracts. Their use is subject to a comprehensive set of policies, procedures and limits approved by the Board of Directors. The Santos Group does not trade in derivative financial instruments for speculative purposes.\n\nGains and losses on derivative financial instruments designated as hedges are accounted for on the same basis as the underlying exposures they are hedging.\n\nThe gains and losses on derivative financial instruments hedging specific purchase or sale commitments are deferred and included in the measurement of the purchase or sale.\n\nWhere hedge transactions are designated as a hedge of an anticipated specific purchase or sale, the gains or losses on the hedge arising up to the date of the anticipated transaction, together with any costs or gains arising at the time of entering into the hedge, are deferred and included in the measurement of the anticipated transaction when the transaction has occurred as designated. Any gains or losses on the hedge transaction after that date are included in the statements of financial performance. The net amounts receivable or payable under forward foreign exchange contracts and the associated deferred gains or losses are recorded on the statements of financial position from the inception of the hedge transaction.\n\nExchange differences relating to amounts payable in foreign currencies designated as a hedge of a self-sustaining foreign operation, together with any related income tax expense/benefit, are transferred on consolidation to the foreign currency translation reserve.\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\n53", + "recall": 0.9, + "true_md": "NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STA TEMENTS\n\nfor the year ended 31 December 2004\n\n## 1. Statement of Accounting Policies\n\n## (d) Acquisition of assets\n\n## (f) Derivative financial instruments\n\n## (a) Basis of preparation\n\n## (e) Foreign currency\n\n## (b) Principles of consolidation\n\n## (c) Non-current assets\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\n53\n\nExchange differences relating to amounts payable in foreign currencies designated as a hedge of a self-sustaining foreign operation, together with any related income tax expense/benefit, are transferred on consolidation to the foreign currency translation reserve.\n\nAssets and liabilities of self-sustaining foreign operation are translated at the exchange rate e xistin g at balance date. Equity items are tr anslated at historical rates. The statemen ts of financial performance are tr anslated at a weighted average rate for th year. Exchange differences arisin on translation are taken directly to th e foreign currency translation reserve.\n\nIn assessing recoverable amounts, the relevant cash flows have not been discounted to their present value.\n\nWith the exception of exploration expenditure carried forward pertaining to areas of interest in the exploration stage (refer note 1(l)), the carrying amounts of non-current assets are reviewed to determine whether they are in excess of their estimated recoverable amount at balance date. If the carrying amount of a non-current asset exceeds the estimated recoverable amount, the asset is written down to the lower value. The write-down is expensed in the reporting period in which it occurs.\n\nMonetary assets an d liabilities of integrated foreign operations are translated at the ex change rate existing at balance date while non-monetary items and revenue and e xpen se items are translated at ex chan ge rates current when the transaction occurred. Exchange differences arisin on the translation of monetary assets an d liabilities are brought to account in th statement of financial performance.\n\nWhere hedge transactions are designated as a hedge of an anticipated specific purchase or sale, the gains or losses on the hedge arising up to the date of the anticipated transaction, together with any costs or gains arising at the time of entering into the hedge, are deferred and included in the measurement of the anticipated transaction when the transaction has occurred as designated. Any gains or losses on the hedge transaction after that date are included in the statements of financial performance. The net amounts receivable or payable under forward foreign exchange contracts and the associated deferred gains or losses are recorded on the statements of financial position from the inception of the hedge transaction.\n\nInterests in unincorporated joint ventures are recognised by including in the financial statements the Santos Group’s proportion of the joint venture costs, assets and liabilities.\n\nThe balances and effects of all transactions between controlled entities are eliminated in full on consolidation.\n\nThe consolidated financial statements of the Santos Group include the financial statements of the Company, Santos Ltd being the parent entity, and its controlled entities.\n\nForeign currency tr ansactions are translated to Austr alian currency at the rates of exchange in effect at the dates of the transactions. Amounts receivable and payable in foreign currencies at balance date are translatedat the rate of exchange existing on that d ate . Exchange differences relatin to amounts receivable or payable in foreign currencies are brought to accoun in the statements of financial performan ce in the period in which they arise.\n\nThe gains and losses on derivative financial instruments hedging specific purchase or sale commitments are deferred and included in the measurement of the purchase or sale.\n\nGains and losses on derivative financial instruments designated as hedges are accounted for on the same basis as the underlying exposures they are hedging.\n\nThe accounting policies have been consistently applied by each entity in the Santos Group and are consistent with those adopted in the previous financial year.\n\nAssets transferred between entities within the Santos Group ar e recognised by the acquiring entity at f air value.\n\nThe Santos Group uses derivative financial instruments to hedge its exposure to changes in foreign exchange rates, commodity prices and interest rates arising in the normal course of business. The principal derivatives used are forward foreign exchange contracts, foreign currency swaps, foreign currency option contracts, interest rate swaps and options, commodity crude oil price swap and option contracts and natural gas swap and option contracts. Their use is subject to a comprehensive set of policies, procedures and limits approved by the Board of Directors. The Santos Group does not trade in derivative financial instruments for speculative purposes.\n\nOn acquisition of a controlled entity, the identifiable net assets acquired are recorded at their f air values. To the extent that there is excess purchase consideration representing good will, the goodwill is amortised using th straight line method over a period of 20 years. The unamortised balance of goodwill is reviewed at each balance date an charged against profit to the extent that th balance exceeds the value of expected futur e benefits.\n\nAll assets acquired ar e recorded at their cost of acquisition, bein the fair value of the consideration provid ed plus incidental costs directly attributable to the acquisition.\n\nThe financial report is a general purpose financial report prepared in accordance with applicable Accounting Standards, Urgent Issues Group Consensus Views, other authoritative pronouncements of the Australian Accounting Standards Board and the Corporations Act 2001 collectively referred to as Australian Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (“Australian GAAP”). The financial report has been prepared on the basis of historical costs and, except where stated, does not take into account changing money values or fair values of assets.\n\nThe significant accounting policies that have been adopted in the preparation of this financial report are:" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9713816893388062, + "doc_id": "d41517148f7b29ff0028a9953e9e4155848a7ccc2ad7b67945694c25db954de2", + "edit_distance": 0.10101010101010101, + "f1_score": 0.9897260273972603, + "meteor": 0.9850476566335652, + "precision": 0.993127147766323, + "pred_md": "Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations\n\nan investigation of certain aspects of NYRA's operations by Federal prosecutors. In December 2003, NYRA reached agreement with the Justice Department whereby NYRA was indicted with prosecution deferred. NYRA agreed to pay a fine and the indictment will be dismissed with prejudice upon NYRA implementing certain reforms and otherwise complying with the terms of the agreement. Our participation is subject to a definitive agreement, regulatory approvals and certain legislative changes by the State of New York.\n\n## Off Balance Sheet Arrangements\n\nOur off balance sheet arrangements consist primarily of investments in unconsolidated affiliates, which currently consist primarily of our investments in Monte Carlo and Borgata. We have not entered into any transactions with special purpose entities, nor have we engaged in any derivative transactions other than straightforward interest rate swaps. Our joint venture and unconsolidated affiliate investments allow us to realize the benefits of owning a full-scale resort in a manner that minimizes our initial investment. We provided a guaranty for up to 50% of the interest and principal payment obligations on the construction financing for The Residences at MGM Grand. Otherwise, we have not guaranteed financing obtained by our investees, nor are there any other provisions of the venture agreements which are unusual or subject us to risks to which we would not be subjected if we had full ownership of the resort.\n\nAt December 31, 2004, we had outstanding letters of credit totaling $51 million, of which $50 million support the bonds issued by the Economic Development Corporation of the City of Detroit. These bonds are recorded as a liability in our consolidated balance sheets. This obligation was undertaken to secure our right to develop a permanent casino in Detroit.\n\n## Commitments and Contractual Obligations\n\nThe following table summarizes our scheduled contractual commitments as of December 31, 2004:\n\n(1) Estimated interest payments on long-term debt are based on principal amounts outstanding at December 31, 2004 after giving effect to the redemption of certain senior notes in February 2005, and forecasted LIBOR rates for our bank credit facility.\n\n(2) Includes our obligation to support $50 million of bonds issued by the Economic Development Corporation of the City of Detroit as part of our development agreement with the City. The bonds mature in 2009. Also includes the estimated payments of obligations under our deferred compensation and supplemental executive retirement plans, based on balances as of December 31, 2004 and assumptions of retirement based on plan provisions.\n\n(3) Our largest entertainment commitments consist of minimum contractual payments to Cirque du Soleil, which performs shows at several of our resorts. We are generally contractually committed for a period of 12 months based on our ability to exercise certain termination rights; however, we expect these shows to continue for longer periods.\n\n(4) The amount for 2005 includes approximately $31 million of open purchase orders. Other commitments are for various contracts, including maintenance and other service agreements and advertising commitments.\n\nOther significant operating uses of cash in 2005 include tax payments. Other significant investing uses of cash flow in 2005 include uncommitted capital expenditures, expected to be approximately $400 million exclusive of any spending\n\n31", + "recall": 0.9863481228668942, + "true_md": "Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations\n\n31\n\n## Commitments and Contractual Obligations\n\n## Off Balance Sheet Arrangements\n\nan investigation of certain aspects of NYRA’s operations by Federal prosecutors. In December 2003, NYRA reached agreement with the Justice Department whereby NYRA was indicted with prosecution deferred. NYRA agreed to pay a fine and the indictment will be dismissed with prejudice upon NYRA implementing certain reforms and otherwise complying with the terms of the agreement. Our participation is subject to a definitive agreement, regulatory approvals and certain legislative changes by the State of New York.\n\nOur off balance sheet arrangements consist primarily of investments in unconsolidated affiliates, which currently consist primarily of our investments in Monte Carlo and Borgata. We have not entered into any transactions with special purpose entities, nor have we engaged in any derivative transactions other than straightforward interest rate swaps. Our joint venture and unconsolidated affiliate investments allow us to realize the benefits of owning a full-scale resort in a manner that minimizes our initial investment. We provided a guaranty for up to 50% of the interest and principal payment obligations on the construction financing for The Residences at MGM Grand. Otherwise, we have not guaranteed financing obtained by our investees, nor are there any other provisions of the venture agreements which are unusual or subject us to risks to which we would not be subjected if we had full ownership of the resort.\n\nAt December 31, 2004, we had outstanding letters of credit totaling $51 million, of which $50 million support the bonds issued by the Economic Development Corporation of the City of Detroit. These bonds are recorded as a liability in our consolidated balance sheets. This obligation was undertaken to secure our right to develop a permanent casino in Detroit.\n\n(1) Estimated interest payments on long-term debt are based on principal amounts outstanding at December 31, 2004 after giv- ing effect to the redemption of certain senior notes in February 2005, and forecasted LIBOR rates for our bank credit facility.\n\n(2) Includes our obligation to support $50 million of bonds issued by the Economic Development Corporation of the City of Detroit as part of our development agreement with the City. The bonds mature in 2009. Also includes the estimated payments of obligations under our deferred compensation and supplemental executive retirement plans, based on balances as of December 31, 2004 and assumptions of retirement based on plan provisions.\n\n(3) Our largest entertainment commitments consist of minimum contractual payments to Cirque du Soleil, which performs shows at several of our resorts. We are generally contractually committed for a period of 12 months based on our ability to exercise certain termination rights; however, we expect these shows to continue for longer periods.\n\n(4) The amount for 2005 includes approximately $31 million of open purchase orders. Other commitments are for various contracts, including maintenance and other service agreements and advertising commitments.\n\nOther significant operating uses of cash in 2005 include tax payments. Other significant investing uses of cash flow in 2005 include uncommitted capital expenditures, expected to be approximately $400 million exclusive of any spending\n\nThe following table summarizes our scheduled contractual commitments as of December 31, 2004:" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "375b50fa77af0f909d40a2be6f744ed84947c8d4ed972addbaa570280ecded52", + "edit_distance": 0.997716894977169, + "f1_score": 0.01652892561983471, + "meteor": 0.011185682326621925, + "precision": 0.008333333333333333, + "pred_md": "## Target Markets\n\n## Clients\n\n- ■ Banks\n- ■ Credit unions\n- ■ Independent ATM owners\n- ■ Mobile operators\n- ■ Payment associations\n- ■ Retailers and merchants\n- ■ Banks\n- ■ Credit unions\n- ■ EFT networks\n- ■ Independent ATM owners\n- ■ Resellers\n- ■ Retailers and merchants\n- ■ Mobile phone operators\n- ■ Third-party prepaid suppliers for mobile phone operators\n- ■ Banks\n- ■ Brokerages\n- ■ Credit card issuers\n- ■ Credit unions\n- ■ Investment community\n- ■ Retailers and merchants\n- ■ Banks\n- ■ Credit unions\n- ■ Independent ATM owners\n- ■ Retailers\n- ■ Bank Austria/Creditanstalt (CZE)\n- ■ Budapest Bank (HUN)\n- ■ Citibank (GRC, HUN, POL, CZE)\n- ■ Deutsche Bank (HUN, POL)\n- ■ DiBa (DEU)\n- ■ Dillards Inc. (USA)\n- ■ ABN Amro (HUN, CUR)\n- ■ Banco Comercial Português (MOZ)\n- ■ Banco de Oro, Unibank (PHL)\n- ■ Bank Slaski (POL)\n- ■ Century Bank (ZWE)\n- ■ Cayman National Bank (CYM)\n- ■ Commercial Bank of Romania (ROM)\n- ■ ALLTEL (USA)\n- ■ Centertel (POL)\n- ■ Eurotel (CZE)\n- ■ ERA GSM (POL)\n- ■ Bank of Cyprus (GRC, GBR)\n- ■ Commercial Bank of Ceylon (LKA)\n- ■ First Federal Savings Bank of LaCrosse (USA)\n- ■ Fortis Bank (POL)\n- ■ ING/Bank Slaski (POL)\n- ■ Oyak Bank (TUR)\n- ■ Metropolitan National Bank (USA)\n- ■ Millennium Bank (POL)\n- ■ Raiffeisenbank (HRV)\n- ■ Saks Inc. (USA)\n- ■ Maduro and Curiel's Bank N.V . (CUR)\n- ■ Nova Bank (GRC)\n- ■ Old National Service Corp. (USA)\n- ■ Seylan Bank (LKA)\n- ■ VIFI Card Services (USA)\n- ■ WestPac Banking Corp. (FJI, PNG)\n- ■ Old National Service Corp. (USA)\n- ■ Plus GSM (POL)\n- ■ VIPnet (HRV)\n- ■ Maduro and Curiel's Bank N.V . (CUR)\n- ■ National Bank of Kuwait-Lebanon (LBN)\n- ■ Splitska Banka (HRV)\n- ■ Union Bank Ltd. (PAK)\n- ■ Union Banka (CZE)\n\n7", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "7" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "38d5a5d70ca837188d71d9e18d742cc81d04da7ef79260304fc42950868cabed", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9990234375, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "WHO WE ARE\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 24", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "WHO WE ARE\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 24" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9487294800164372, + "doc_id": "ed2f6c137fee98596442a3873448eaa67ae9e6a59a698f4435bb348a12acb796", + "edit_distance": 0.05, + "f1_score": 0.9696969696969697, + "meteor": 0.9547042692687815, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO AND FORMING PART OF THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR THE FINANCIAL YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2000", + "recall": 0.9411764705882353, + "true_md": "## NOTES TO AND FORMING PART OF THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR THE FINANCIAL YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2000\n\n44" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5531496697863236, + "doc_id": "2d1a446a4497902a3e392e90aa3af1c6c31934582216723b3bb189d77acacbcc", + "edit_distance": 0.3942857142857143, + "f1_score": 0.8362369337979094, + "meteor": 0.649453906001691, + "precision": 0.8695652173913043, + "pred_md": "HON INDUSTRIES Inc. and SUBSIDIARIES\n\n## MANAGEMENT'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\nManagement is responsible for the preparation and integrity of the consolidated financial statements and other financial information presented in this report. That responsibility is accomplished using internal controls designed to provide reasonable assurance as to the integrity and accuracy of the Company's financial records and to adequately safeguard, verify, and maintain accountability of assets. Such controls are based on established written policies and procedures, are implemented by trained personnel with an appropriate segregation of duties, and are monitored through a comprehensive internal audit program. These policies and procedures prescribe that the Company and all its members are to maintain the highest ethical and business standards.\n\nPricewaterhouseCoopers, LLP, independent accountants, is retained to audit HON INDUSTRIES' financial statements. Their accompanying report is based on audits conducted in accordance with auditing standards, generally accepted in the United States.\n\nThe Board of Directors exercises its responsibility for these financial statements through its Audit Committee, which consists entirely of independent board members. The Audit Committee meets periodically with the independent accountants and with the Company's internal auditors, both privately and with management present, to review accounting, auditing, internal controls, and financial reporting matters.\n\nJack D. Michaels\n\nJerald K. Dittmer VICE PRESIDENT AND CHIEF FINANCIAL OFFICER\n\nCHAIRMAN AND\n\nCHIEF EXECUTIVE OFFICER\n\n60", + "recall": 0.8053691275167785, + "true_md": "## M A N A G E M E N T ’ S R E S P O N S I B I L I T Y F O R F I N A N C I A L S T A T E M E N T S\n\nManagement is responsible for the preparation and integrity of the consolidated financial statements and other financial information presented in this report. That responsibility is accomplished using internal controls designed to provide reasonable assurance as to the integrity and accuracy of the Company’s financial records and to adequately safeguard, verify, and maintain accountability of assets. Such controls are based on estab- lished written policies and procedures, are implemented by trained personnel with an appropriate segregation of duties, and are monitored through a comprehensive internal audit program. These policies and procedures prescribe that the Company and all its members are to maintain the highest ethical and business standards.\n\nPricewaterhouseCoopers, LLP, independent accountants, is retained to audit HON INDUSTRIES’ financial statements. Their accompa- nying report is based on audits conducted in accordance with auditing standards, generally accepted in the United States.\n\nThe Board of Directors exercises its responsibility for these financial statements through its Audit Committee, which consists entirely of independent board members. The Audit Committee meets periodically with the independent accountants and with the Company’s internal audi- tors, both privately and with management present, to review accounting, auditing, internal controls, and financial reporting matters.\n\nJerald K. Dittmer V I C E P R E S I D E N T A N D C H I E F F I N A N C I A L O F F I C E R\n\nJack D. Michaels C H A I R M A N A N D C H I E F E X E C U T I V E O F F I C E R\n\n60\n\nHON INDUSTRIES Inc. and SUBSIDIARIES" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8865612362519611, + "doc_id": "b5d15c073d070c44ac97a31115843172a4a7e70fd301758964a942792f5b4d9b", + "edit_distance": 0.17097701149425287, + "f1_score": 0.9577039274924469, + "meteor": 0.9679952865080388, + "precision": 0.9406528189910979, + "pred_md": "hotel, retail and residential companies, companies previously serving only major urban hubs. And CityCenter will ensure the greatest possible return on our investment on this Las V egas Strip land.\n\nAs always, we are working on many growth opportunities to increase our momentum and become a company with a global scale. We are excited about the expansion projects underway at Borgata, the rapid sales pace at The Residences at MGM Grand Las Vegas, and the development of a hotel-casino in Macau. And we are exploring additional development opportunities in the Far East and the United Kingdom. All of these endeavors will be handled with the clear intent of expanding prudently and ensuring financial stability, as our capital allocation focus in 2005 will be to reduce debt and continue to invest in our resorts.\n\n## Defining Value\n\nIt has become a custom to include our financial core values in this letter to our owners. We believe that management's most important role is to most effectively manage assets and allocate capital. We hire the best casino resort operators in the world, and they provide us the fuel we need, operating cash flow, to propel us forward. That cash flow generates real value for shareholders in several ways.\n\nWILLIAM SMITH President, MGM MIRAGE Design Group\n\nWILLIAM SMITH President, MGM MIRAGE Design Group\n\nRICHARD A. STURM President, MGM MIRAGE Sports & Entertainment\n\nFRANK VISCONTI President, MGM MIRAGE Retail\n\nRENEE WEST President, Primadonna Resorts\n\nFORREST WOODWARD President, Boardwalk\n\nFirst, we can re-invest in our resorts, as we have done over the past several years and will continue to do so in 2005 and beyond. These investments create the impetus for increased guest spending, and the relationship is not linear. We are capturing an increased share of guests and an increased share of each guest's spending budget. Since 2000, we have invested over $2.0 billion in capital in our resorts and our unconsolidated affiliates, which helped drive EBITDA from $1.1 billion to $1.5 billion in 2004, with significant cash flow-producing assets just coming on line in late 2004. Second, we can return capital to the shareholders. In 2004, we repurchased eight million shares of common stock for $349 million bringing the total since May 2000 to 30 million shares for $1.0 billion. Third, we can reduce debt, and maintain a low cost of borrowing for the future. In 2004, we repaid almost $100 million in net debt, bringing total debt reduction since May 2000 to $1.1 billion.\n\nOur financial strength allowed us to issue over $1.5 billion in fixed rate debt in 2004 at historically low interest rates, as well as securing a $7 billion credit facility to fund the Mandalay acquisition, the largest ever for a gaming company. And the recent redemptions of certain of our Senior Notes means our assets are no longer securing our remaining senior debt, including the new credit facility.\n\n## Always in Motion\n\nWe would love to look back at 2004 forever, given that it was our company's best year ever. But our work is only beginning. New history is still to be made; records are waiting to be broken; and we must vigilantly maintain our momentum. As stewards of your company, our goals are to continue to perform at peak levels and manage our growth initiatives to ensure maximum value for our shareholders. I hope to report on new defining moments in next year's Annual Report.\n\nJAMES J. MURREN President, Chief Financial Officer & Treasurer\n\nJAMES J. MURREN President, Chief Financial Officer & Treasurer\n\nS T O C K P R I C E H I S T O R Y ( 2 0 0 2 - 2 0 0 4 )\n\n17", + "recall": 0.9753846153846154, + "true_md": "## Always in Motion\n\n## Defining Value\n\nhotel, retail and residential companies, companies previously serving only major urban hubs. And CityCenter will ensure the greatest possible return on our investment on this Las Vegas Strip land.\n\nAs always, we are working on many growth opportunities to increase our momentum and become a company with a global scale. We are excited about the expansion projects underway at Borgata, the rapid sales pace at The Residences at MGM Grand Las Vegas, and the development of a hotel-casino in Macau. And we are exploring additional development opportu- nities in the Far East and the United Kingdom. All of these endeavors will be handled with the clear intent of expanding prudently and ensuring financial stability, as our capital alloca- tion focus in 2005 will be to reduce debt and continue to invest in our resorts.\n\nIt has become a custom to include our financial core values in this letter to our owners. We believe that management’s most important role is to most effectively manage assets and allocate capital. We hire the best casino resort operators in the world, and they provide us the fuel we need, operating cash flow, to propel us forward. That cash flow generates real value for share- holders in several ways.\n\nFirst, we can re-invest in our resorts, as we have done over the past several years and will continue to do so in 2005 and beyond. These investments create the impetus for increased guest spending, and the relationship is not linear. We are capturing an increased share of guests and an increased share of each guest’s spending budget. Since 2000, we have invested over $2.0 billion in capital in our resorts and our unconsolidated affiliates, which helped drive EBITDA from $1.1 billion to $1.5 billion in 2004, with significant cash flow-producing assets just coming on line in late 2004. Second, we can return capital to the shareholders. In 2004, we repurchased eight million shares of common stock for $349 million bringing the total since May 2000 to 30 million shares for $1.0 billion. Third, we can reduce debt, and maintain a low cost of borrowing for the future. In 2004, we repaid almost $100 million in net debt, bringing total debt reduction since May 2000 to $1.1 billion.\n\nOur financial strength allowed us to issue over $1.5 billion in fixed rate debt in 2004 at historically low interest rates, as well as securing a $7 billion credit facility to fund the Mandalay acquisition, the largest ever for a gaming company. And the recent redemptions of certain of our Senior Notes means our assets are no longer securing our remaining senior debt, including the new credit facility.\n\nWe would love to look back at 2004 forever, given that it was our company’s best year ever. But our work is only beginning. New history is still to be made; records are waiting to be broken; and we must vigilantly maintain our momentum. As stewards of your company, our goals are to continue to perform at peak levels and manage our growth initiatives to ensure maximum value for our shareholders. I hope to report on new defining moments in next year’s Annual Report. \n\nJAMES J. MURREN President, Chief Financial Officer & Treasurer \n\n17\n\nWILLIAM SMITH President, MGM MIRAGE Design Group\n\nRICHARD A. STURM President, MGM MIRAGE Sports & Entertainment \n\nFRANK VISCONTI President, MGM MIRAGE Retail\n\nRENEE WEST President, Primadonna Resorts \n\nFORREST WOODWARD President, Boardwalk" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9623544800039061, + "doc_id": "e305b8aaaa1b965ca8ec4ad1901bda771926757c1d81693f9b5808db04f192c8", + "edit_distance": 0.41851368970013036, + "f1_score": 0.984375, + "meteor": 0.9469536740761614, + "precision": 0.9936908517350158, + "pred_md": "32\n\n## Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations\n\non a permanent casino in Detroit, investments in our Macau joint venture or capital spending at Mandalay resorts.\n\nWe plan to fund our contractual obligations and other estimated spending through a combination of operating cash flow, proceeds from known or expected sales of businesses and available borrowings under our senior credit facility. To fund the Mandalay acquisition, we entered into the revised bank credit facility, which will provide the required funds to fund payments to Mandalay's shareholders and holders of Mandalay's convertible debentures, as well as refinance certain of Mandalay's outstanding borrowings. We are required to sell our interest in one of the two casinos in Detroit, Michigan. The sale of either of these interests will generate significant cash flow. We have generated over $740 million in operating cash flow in each of the past three years, which included deductions for interest payments, tax payments and certain contractually committed payments reflected in the above table, including operating leases, employment agreements and entertainment agreements. We expect to generate a higher level of operating cash flow in 2005 due to improved operating results, expanded facilities and the Mandalay acquisition.\n\n## Critical Accounting Policies and Estimates\n\nManagement's discussion and analysis of our results of operations and liquidity and capital resources are based on our consolidated financial statements. To prepare our consolidated financial statements in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America, we must make estimates and assumptions that affect the amounts reported in the consolidated financial statements. We regularly evaluate these estimates and assumptions, particularly in areas we consider to be critical accounting estimates, where changes in the estimates and assumptions could have a material impact on our results of operations, financial position or cash flows. Senior management and the Audit Committee of the Board of Directors have reviewed the disclosures included herein about our critical accounting estimates, and have reviewed the processes to determine those estimates.\n\n## Allowance for Doubtful Casino Accounts Receivable\n\nMarker play represents a significant portion of the table games volume at Bellagio, MGM Grand Las Vegas and The Mirage. Our other facilities do not emphasize marker play to the same extent, although we offer markers to customers at those casinos as well.\n\nWe maintain strict controls over the issuance of markers and aggressively pursue collection from those customers who fail to pay their marker balances timely. These collection efforts are similar to those used by most large corporations when dealing with overdue customer accounts, including the mailing of statements and delinquency notices, personal contacts, the use of outside collection agencies and civil litigation. Markers are generally legally enforceable instruments in the United States. At December 31, 2004 and 2003, approximately 54% and 53%, respectively, of our casino accounts receivable was owed by customers from the United States. Markers are not legally enforceable instruments in some foreign countries, but the United States assets of foreign customers may be reached to satisfy judgments entered in the United States. A significant portion of our casino accounts receivable is owed by casino customers from the Far East. At December 31, 2004 and 2003, approximately 25% and 30%, respectively, of our casino accounts receivable was owed by customers from the Far East.\n\nWe maintain an allowance, or reserve, for doubtful casino accounts at all of our operating casino resorts. The provision for doubtful accounts, an operating expense, increases the allowance for doubtful accounts. We regularly evaluate the allowance for doubtful casino accounts. At resorts where marker play is not significant, the allowance is generally established by applying standard reserve percentages to aged account balances. At resorts where marker play is significant, we apply standard reserve percentages to aged account balances under a specified dollar amount and specifically analyze the collectibility of each account with a balance over the specified dollar amount, based on the age of the account, the customer's financial condition, collection history and any other known information. We also monitor regional and global economic conditions and forecasts to determine if reserve levels are adequate.", + "recall": 0.9752321981424149, + "true_md": "32\n\nManagement’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations\n\non a permanent casino in Detroit, investments in our Macau joint venture or capital spending at Mandalay resorts.\n\nWe plan to fund our contractual obligations and other estimated spending through a combination of operating cash flow, proceeds from known or expected sales of businesses and available borrowings under our senior credit facility. To fund the Mandalay acquisition, we entered into the revised bank credit facility, which will provide the required funds to fund payments to Mandalay’s shareholders and hold- ers of Mandalay’s convertible debentures, as well as refinance certain of Mandalay’s outstanding borrowings. We are required to sell our interest in one of the two casinos in Detroit, Michigan. The sale of either of these interests will generate significant cash flow. We have generated over $740 million in operating cash flow in each of the past three years, which included deductions for interest payments, tax payments and certain contractually committed payments reflected in the above table, including operating leases, employment agreements and entertainment agree- ments. We expect to generate a higher level of operating cash flow in 2005 due to improved operating results, expanded facilities and the Mandalay acquisition.\n\nMarker play represents a significant portion of the table games volume at Bellagio, MGM Grand Las Vegas and The Mirage. Our other facilities do not emphasize marker play to the same extent, although we offer markers to customers at those casinos as well.\n\nWe maintain strict controls over the issuance of markers and aggressively pursue collection from those customers who fail to pay their marker balances timely. These collection efforts are similar to those used by most large corporations when dealing with overdue customer accounts, including the mailing of statements and delinquency notices, personal contacts, the use of outside collection agencies and civil litigation. Markers are generally legally enforceable instruments in the United States. At December 31, 2004 and 2003, approximately 54% and 53%, respectively, of our casino accounts receivable was owed by customers from the United States. Markers are not legally enforceable instruments in some foreign countries, but the United States assets of foreign customers may be reached to satisfy judgments entered in the United States. A significant portion of our casino accounts receivable is owed by casino customers from the Far East. At December 31, 2004 and 2003, approximately 25% and 30%, respec- tively, of our casino accounts receivable was owed by customers from the Far East.\n\nManagement’s discussion and analysis of our results of operations and liquidity and capital resources are based on our consolidated financial statements. To prepare our consolidated financial statements in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America, we must make estimates and assumptions that affect the amounts reported in the consolidated financial statements. We regularly evaluate these estimates and assumptions, particularly in areas we consider to be critical accounting estimates, where changes in the estimates and assumptions could have a material impact on our results of operations, financial position or cash flows. Senior management and the Audit Committee of the Board of Directors have reviewed the disclosures included herein about our critical accounting estimates, and have reviewed the processes to determine those estimates.\n\nWe maintain an allowance, or reserve, for doubtful casino accounts at all of our operating casino resorts. The provision for doubtful accounts, an operating expense, increases the allowance for doubtful accounts. We regularly evaluate the allowance for doubtful casino accounts. At resorts where marker play is not significant, the allowance is generally established by applying standard reserve percentages to aged account balances. At resorts where marker play is significant, we apply standard reserve percentages to aged account balances under a specified dollar amount and specifically analyze the collectibility of each account with a balance over the specified dollar amount, based on the age of the account, the customer’s financial condition, collection history and any other known information. We also monitor regional and global economic conditions and forecasts to determine if reserve levels are adequate.\n\n## Critical Accounting Policies and Estimates\n\n## Allowance for Doubtful Casino Accounts Receivable" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8807474887679584, + "doc_id": "cf213ff03429470a7c626a5aabbde09e9d0807ce518a6f5ee4f5fe202b630902", + "edit_distance": 0.5391705069124424, + "f1_score": 0.9455587392550143, + "meteor": 0.8815808227143334, + "precision": 0.9705882352941176, + "pred_md": "## DIRECTORS' STATUTORY REPORT\n\nThe Directors present their report together with the financial report of Santos Ltd ('the Company') and the consolidated financial report of the consolidated entity, being the Company and its controlled entities, for the financial year ended 31 December 2004, and the auditor report thereon. Information in this Annual Report referred to by page number in this report or contained in a Note to the financial statements referred to in this report is to be read as part of this report.\n\n## 1. Directors, Directors' Shareholdings and Directors' Meetings\n\nThe names of Directors of the Company in office at the date of this report and details of the relevant interest of each of those Directors in shares in the Company at that date are as set out below:\n\nThe above named Directors held office during and since the end of the financial year except for Mr RM Harding, who was appointed a Director on 1 March 2004.\n\nExcept where otherwise indicated, all shareholdings are of fully paid ordinary shares.\n\n*These shares are Restricted Shares issued on the terms described in Note 18 to the financial statements.\n\nNo Director holds shares in any related body corporate, other than in trust for the Company.\n\nAt the date of this report, Mr J C Ellice-Flint holds 3,000,000 options under the Santos Executive Share Option Plan and subject to the further terms described in Note 18 to the financial statements.\n\nDetails of the qualifications, experience and special responsibilities of each Director are set out on page 41 of this Annual Report.\n\n## Directors' Meetings\n\nThe number of Directors' Meetings and meetings of committees of Directors held during the financial year and the number of meetings attended by each Director are as follows:\n\n* Reflects the number of meetings held during the time the Director held office, or was a member of the Committee, during the year.\n\n** In addition to formal meetings, the Committee participated in a site visit to Moomba.\n\n*** Retired as a Director of the Company on 14 December 2004.\n\nAs at the date of this report, the Company had an audit committee of the Board of Directors.\n\nParticulars of the Company's corporate governance practices appear on pages 29 to 40 of this Annual Report.\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\n47", + "recall": 0.9217877094972067, + "true_md": "The names of Directors of the Company in office at the date of this report an d details of the relevant interest of each of those Directors in shares in the Company at that date are as set out below:\n\n## 1. Directors, Directors’ Shareholdings and Directors’ Meetings\n\nThe Directors present their report together with the financial report of Santos Ltd (“the Company”) and the consolidated financial report of the consolidated entity, being the Company and its controlled entities, f or the financial year ended 31 December 2004, and the auditor report thereon. Information in this Annual Report referred to by page number in this report or contained in a Note to the financial statements referred to in this report is to be read as part of this report.\n\n## DIRECTORS’ STATUTORY REPOR T\n\nThe above named Directors held office during and since the end of the financial year except for Mr RM Harding, who was appointed a Director on 1 March 2004.\n\nExcept where otherwise indicated, all shareholdings are of fully paid ordinary shares.\n\nNo Director holds shares in any related body corporate, other than in trust for the Company.\n\n*These shares are Restricted Shares issued on the terms described in Note 18 to the financial statements.\n\nAt the date of this report, Mr J C Ellice-Flint holds 3,000,000 options under th e Santos Executive Share Option Plan and subject to the further terms described in Note 18 to the financial statements.\n\nDetails of the qualifications, experience and special responsibilities of each Director are set out on page 41 of this Annual Report.\n\n## Directors’ Meetings\n\nThe number of Directors’ Meetings and meetings of committees of Directors h eld during the financial year and the number of meetings attended by each Director are as follows:\n\nParticulars of the Company’s corporate governance practices appear on pag es 29 to 40 of this Annual Report.\n\nAs at the date of this report, the Company had an audit committee of th Board of Directors.\n\nAnnual Report 2004 47\n\n* Reflects the number of meetings held during the time the Director held office, or was a member of the Committee , during the year.\n\n** In addition to formal meetings, the Committee participated in a site visit to Moomba.\n\n*** Retired as a Director of the Company on 14 December 2004." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9585685934553493, + "doc_id": "af29419bf8d8da696244119e0c5220f22fd68851699699d400abb50d2a60cb1a", + "edit_distance": 0.03411131059245961, + "f1_score": 0.9635974304068521, + "meteor": 0.9752235476570229, + "precision": 0.974025974025974, + "pred_md": "48\n\n## Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nand current economic and business conditions. Management believes that as of December 31, 2004, no significant concentrations of credit risk existed for which an allowance had not already been recorded.\n\nInventories. Inventories consist of food and beverage, retail merchandise and operating supplies, and are stated at the lower of cost or market. Cost is determined primarily by the average cost method for food and beverage and supplies and the retail inventory or specific identification methods for retail merchandise.\n\nProperty and equipment. Property and equipment are stated at cost. Gains or losses on dispositions of property and equipment are included in the determination of income. Maintenance costs are expensed as incurred. Property and equipment are generally depreciated over the following estimated useful lives on a straight-line basis:\n\nWe evaluate our property and equipment and other long-lived assets for impairment in accordance with the Financial Accounting Standards Board's Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 144, 'Accounting for the Impairment or Disposal of Long-Lived Assets.' For assets to be disposed of, we recognize the asset to be sold at the lower of carrying value or fair value less costs of disposal. Fair value for assets to be disposed of is estimated based on comparable asset sales, solicited offers, or a discounted cash flow model.\n\nFor assets to be held and used, we review fixed assets for impairment whenever indicators of impairment exist. If an indicator of impairment exists, we compare the estimated future cash flows of the asset, on an undiscounted basis, to the carrying value of the asset. If the undiscounted cash flows exceed the carrying value, no\n\nimpairment is indicated. If the undiscounted cash flows do not exceed the carrying value, then an impairment is measured based on fair value compared to carrying value, with fair value typically based on a discounted cash flow model. If an asset is still under development, future cash flows include remaining construction costs.\n\nFor a discussion of recognized impairment losses, see Note 14. In October 2002, the Company announced the suspension of development activities on its whollyowned project on the Renaissance Pointe land in Atlantic City. In connection therewith, the Company reviewed the land for potential impairment, and determined that no impairment was indicated. In December 2002, the Company entered into an agreement with Turnberry Associates to form a venture to construct condominium residences behind MGM Grand Las Vegas. As part of the agreement, the Company contributed land to the venture. The Company reviewed the land for potential impairment, and determined no impairment was indicated.\n\nCapitalized interest. The interest cost associated with major development and construction projects is capitalized and included in the cost of the project. When no debt is incurred specifically for a project, interest is capitalized on amounts expended on the project using the weighted-average cost of the Company's outstanding borrowings. Capitalization of interest ceases when the project is substantially complete or development activity is suspended for more than a brief period.", + "recall": 0.9533898305084746, + "true_md": "Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements 48\n\nand current economic and business conditions. Management believes that as of December 31, 2004, no significant concentrations of credit risk existed for which an allowance had not already been recorded.\n\nInventories. Inventories consist of food and beverage, retail merchandise and operating supplies, and are stated at the lower of cost or market. Cost is determined primarily by the average cost method for food and beverage and supplies and the retail inventory or specific identification methods for retail merchandise.\n\nProperty and equipment. Property and equipment are stated at cost. Gains or loss- es on dispositions of property and equipment are included in the determination of income. Maintenance costs are expensed as incurred. Property and equipment are generally depreciated over the following estimated useful lives on a straight-line basis:\n\nWe evaluate our property and equipment and other long-lived assets for impairment in accordance with the Financial Accounting Standards Board’s Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 144, “Accounting for the Impairment or Disposal of Long-Lived Assets.” For assets to be disposed of, we recognize the asset to be sold at the lower of carrying value or fair value less costs of disposal. Fair value for assets to be disposed of is estimated based on comparable asset sales, solicited offers, or a discounted cash flow model.\n\nFor assets to be held and used, we review fixed assets for impairment whenever indicators of impairment exist. If an indicator of impairment exists, we compare the estimated future cash flows of the asset, on an undiscounted basis, to the carrying value of the asset. If the undiscounted cash flows exceed the carrying value, no\n\nimpairment is indicated. If the undiscounted cash flows do not exceed the carrying value, then an impairment is measured based on fair value compared to carrying value, with fair value typically based on a discounted cash flow model. If an asset is still under development, future cash flows include remaining construction costs.\n\nFor a discussion of recognized impairment losses, see Note 14. In October 2002, the Company announced the suspension of development activities on its wholly- owned project on the Renaissance Pointe land in Atlantic City. In connection therewith, the Company reviewed the land for potential impairment, and deter- mined that no impairment was indicated. In December 2002, the Company entered into an agreement with Turnberry Associates to form a venture to construct condominium residences behind MGM Grand Las Vegas. As part of the agreement, the Company contributed land to the venture. The Company reviewed the land for potential impairment, and determined no impairment was indicated. \n\nCapitalized interest. The interest cost associated with major development and construction projects is capitalized and included in the cost of the project. When no debt is incurred specifically for a project, interest is capitalized on amounts expended on the project using the weighted-average cost of the Company’s outstanding borrowings. Capitalization of interest ceases when the project is substantially complete or development activity is suspended for more than a brief period." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8571061116877262, + "doc_id": "652fa62dd8bb3a85b2c2bab27562005bfbf215c1ea2647d9d600887ea22d2087", + "edit_distance": 0.09523809523809523, + "f1_score": 0.972972972972973, + "meteor": 0.9890062326869806, + "precision": 0.9473684210526315, + "pred_md": "44\n\n## Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows\n\nThe accompanying notes are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements.", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "44\n\nConsolidated Statements of Cash Flows\n\nThe accompanying notes are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.810751846048407, + "doc_id": "40b6089ea0f3066940200466057bc3daea84d410be4014e6c4660c1b376a6799", + "edit_distance": 0.660482374768089, + "f1_score": 0.9142857142857143, + "meteor": 0.8137391376632194, + "precision": 0.9125475285171103, + "pred_md": "## Mike B r o w n : B u i l d i n g D i g i t a l B r i d g e s W o r l d w i d e\n\nA conversation with Euronet's Chairman and CEO Michael J. Brown on the opportunities and challenges the company faces today.\n\n## How would you summarize Euronet's main focus as a financial services provider?\n\nEuronet Worldwide generates and processes financial\n\ntransactions through secure electronic technology. We're more than just an ATM network or just a software company. We pursue a comprehensive set of solutions that help drive transactions, including network operations, outsourcing operations, software development - all incorporating the latest technology. As we introduce new methods of managing financial accounts through various electronic touchpoints, such as ATMs, the\n\norganic growth in the emerging markets we are in, where more and more people are getting debit and credit cards for the first time. This growth will continue\n\nInternet and mobile phones, we continually increase transaction types and volumes in our processing centers. The more outsourcing and processing solutions that we provide, the more transactions we generate.\n\nAt Euronet, we've always emphasized the theme of 'Building Bridges.' I think that idea pretty well sums\n\nup Euronet's vision: to create digital bridges that connect people and their financial institutions electronically in a world that's increasingly on-line and on the move. We help people control their finances any time, any placeright from the palm of their hands.\n\n## How will you maintain your growth rate on your transactions and revenue?\n\nA number of factors are driving additional transaction growth for us, from deployment of new ATMs to delivery of bill payment solutions. The primary factor is the\n\nas we deliver new solutions and enter new markets that can generate more transactions.\n\nMore transactions equates to more revenue. During 2000 we have seen our business model mature and our expenses level off. Therefore, as our revenues increase, we are seeing higher percentages of revenue drop to the bottom line and contribute to our EBITDA performance.\n\n## What is your business strategy going forward?\n\nOur strategy is to go into growing markets, whether geographic (like Greece, Poland or Egypt) or new product-entry markets (like mobile banking in the US). We have built the infrastructure and now we can enter these markets without having to make major financial\n\ninvestments.\n\nWe have also established network processing centers within geographic regions and will leverage those centers' capabilities and our software development to generate more transactions. We currently have processing centers in the US, Europe and Asia. The Network Services business generated $37 million in revenue last year - an increase of 39% over 1999\n\n- and turned the corner to become EBITDA positive for the year 2000. We expect to continue to experience significant transaction growth in our ATM and POS\n\n3", + "recall": 0.916030534351145, + "true_md": "A conversation with Euronet’s Chairman and CEO Michael J. Brown on the opportunities and challenges the company faces today.\n\nEuronet Worldwide generates and processes financial\n\ntransactions through secure electronic technology. We’re more than just an ATM network or just a software com- pany. We pursue a comprehensive set of solutions that help drive transac- tions, including network operations, outsourcing operations, software development — all incorporating the latest technology. As we introduce new methods of managing financial accounts through various electronic touchpoints, such as ATMs, the\n\nInternet and mobile phones, we continually increase transaction types and volumes in our processing centers. The more outsourcing and processing solutions that we provide, the more transactions we generate. \n\nAt Euronet, we’ve always emphasized the theme of “Building Bridges.” I think that idea pretty well sums\n\nup Euronet’s vision: to create digital bridges that connect people and their financial institutions electronically in a world that’s increasingly on-line and on the move. We help people control their finances any time, any place— right from the palm of their hands.\n\nA number of factors are driving additional transaction growth for us, from deployment of new ATMs to delivery of bill payment solutions. The primary factor is the\n\nWe have also established network processing centers within geographic regions and will leverage those centers’ capabilities and our software development to generate more trans- actions. We currently have processing centers in the US, Europe and Asia. The Network Services business gen- erated $37 million in revenue last year – an increase of 39% over 1999\n\n– and turned the corner to become EBITDA positive for the year 2000. We expect to continue to experience sig- nificant transaction growth in our ATM and POS\n\nMore transactions equates to more revenue. During 2000 we have seen our business model mature and our expenses level off. Therefore, as our revenues increase, we are seeing higher percentages of revenue drop to the bottom line and contribute to our EBITDA performance.\n\norganic growth in the emerging markets we are in, where more and more people are getting debit and credit cards for the first time. This growth will continue\n\nas we deliver new solutions and enter new markets that can generate more transactions. \n\n## How would you summarize Euronet’s main focus as a financial services provider?\n\n## What is your business strategy going forward?\n\n## How will you maintain your growth rate on your transactions and revenue?\n\n3\n\nOur strategy is to go into growing markets, whether geographic (like Greece, Poland or Egypt) or new product-entry markets (like mobile banking in the US). We have built the infrastructure and now we can enter these markets without having to make major financial investments.\n\n## Mike Brown: Building Digital Bridges Worldwide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.87000545581096, + "doc_id": "bd3e7015d796e3a75dfff60500a3c881a223224e022df690a13c1c83676e5c37", + "edit_distance": 0.15384615384615385, + "f1_score": 0.972972972972973, + "meteor": 0.9708697844471414, + "precision": 0.972972972972973, + "pred_md": "## 2) Interest-related transactions\n\nNote: The notional amounts of the interest rate swaps and options presented above exclude those for which the deferral hedge accounting has been applied.\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\n91\n\nFINANCIAL SECTION", + "recall": 0.972972972972973, + "true_md": "- 2) Interest-related transactions\n\nNote: The notional amounts of the interest rate swaps and options presented above exclude those for which the deferral hedge accounting has been applied.\n\nFINANCIAL SECTION\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 91" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9443736438982079, + "doc_id": "e224ccc77bbda805821bc397529105ac006ed96b442d18ea241dc8194aaa99a9", + "edit_distance": 0.49770290964777947, + "f1_score": 0.9639794168096055, + "meteor": 0.8948745900822079, + "precision": 0.9689655172413794, + "pred_md": "OUR WORK\n\nPURCHASING\n\n## More value, Higher quality, Win-win partnerships\n\n'The evolution that took place in Nissan's purchasing activities during the Nissan Revival Plan, or NRP, and continued through NISSAN 180, will stretch even further during NISSAN Value-Up. Why evolution and not revolution? Because the shift in purchasing that started six years ago was not a single action, it was a mindset change that continues to drive all our activities.\n\nPurchasing represents the single largest area of cost for Nissan. Through the NISSAN Value-Up business plan, we are determined to drive greater value from our purchasing activities and maintain the momentum built over the last six years.\n\nDuring the Nissan Revival Plan years, our focus was on catching up with the rest of the industry. NISSAN 180 was focused on reaching the benchmarks set during NRP and now as we enter the NISSAN Value-Up period, that focus evolves towards being the global cost leader.\n\nOne of the key breakthrough strategies of NISSAN Value-Up is the focus on new and emerging markets. On the sales side, markets like China, India, Russia and ASEAN represent significant opportunities for Nissan. On the purchasing side, we look at the cost competitiveness of these new markets and how we can increasingly use them to enhance our global competitiveness.\n\nOur strategy for what we call 'Leading Competitive Countries', or LCCs, is to focus on those markets that we see as trend leaders in both cost, quality and supply stability. We will focus first on China and then on ASEAN nations. This will bring cost advantages for our major regions, such as Japan, North America and Western Europe, making us more competitive. We're also investigating sourcing from Eastern Europe, the Mercosur trading zone, and India.\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\nHIROTO SAIKAWA Executive Vice President\n\nHIROTO SAIKAWA Executive Vice President\n\nOur Alliance with Renault has also provided substantial purchasing benefits and opportunities. Formed in 2001, the Renault Nissan Purchasing Organization, or RNPO, now accounts for over 70 percent of all purchasing for Nissan and Renault. Nissan will further benefit from RNPO through the utilization of Renault supply bases in certain LCCs.\n\nAlthough the turnaround in the Nissan business has been profound, we also recognize that our supplier partners have played a significant role. Going forward, we intend to reinforce those relationships, building value on both sides. For example, we are reinvigorating our innovative 3-3-3 engineering program.\n\nWe are also deploying a purchasing process that gets suppliers involved earlier and further upstream in the product development process, the concept of 'project partners'. This is a program that identifies key technologies and innovations that require substantial investments from both sides. Suppliers will be selected as project partners for a specific area and will work closer with us to develop lower cost and higher quality solutions. This win-win approach has already started with interior systems and chassis development projects.\n\nLast year, we faced several challenges with raw materials. Those risks-both price and supply related-are a factor that we have to recognize and address in the coming years. Last year, the pressure was concentrated on the supply side, going forward we see an increasingly challenging cost environment. Working closely with our key raw material suppliers as well as parts suppliers and accelerating our cost reduction countermeasures will be key during NISSAN Value-Up.\n\nOur purchasing philosophy at Nissan is focused on value, quality and relationships. We want our purchasing process to be transparent and proactive, and create more value for our suppliers and for the company.'", + "recall": 0.9590443686006825, + "true_md": "## More value, Higher quality, Win-win partnerships\n\nPURCHASING\n\nHIROTO SAIKAWA Executive Vice President\n\n“The evolution that took place in Nissan’s purchasing activities during the Nissan Revival Plan, or NRP, and continued through NISSAN 180, will stretch even further during NISSAN Value-Up. Why evolution and not revolution? Because the shift in purchasing that started six years ago was not a single action, it was a mindset change that continues to drive all our activities. \n\nPurchasing represents the single largest area of cost for Nissan. Through the NISSAN Value-Up business plan, we are determined to drive greater value from our purchasing activities and maintain the momentum built over the last six years.\n\nDuring the Nissan Revival Plan years, our focus was on catching up with the rest of the industry. NISSAN 180 was focused on reaching the benchmarks set during NRP and now as we enter the NISSAN Value-Up period, that focus evolves towards being the global cost leader.\n\nOne of the key breakthrough strategies of NISSAN Value-Up is the focus on new and emerging markets. On the sales side, markets like China, India, Russia and ASEAN represent significant opportunities for Nissan. On the purchasing side, we look at the cost competitiveness of these new markets and how we can increasingly use them to enhance our global competitiveness.\n\nLast year, we faced several challenges with raw materials. Those risks—both price and supply related—are a factor that we have to recognize and address in the coming years. Last year, the pressure was concentrated on the supply side, going forward we see an increasingly challenging cost environment. Working closely with our key raw material suppliers as well as parts suppliers and accelerating our cost reduction countermeasures will be key during NISSAN Value-Up.\n\nOur strategy for what we call ‘Leading Competitive Countries’, or LCCs, is to focus on those markets that we see as trend leaders in both cost, quality and supply stability. We will focus first on China and then on ASEAN nations. This will bring cost advantages for our major regions, such as Japan, North America and Western Europe, making us more competitive. We’re also investigating sourcing from Eastern Europe, the Mercosur trading zone, and India.\n\nOur purchasing philosophy at Nissan is focused on value, quality and relationships. We want our purchasing process to be transparent and proactive, and create more value for our suppliers and for the company.”\n\nWe are also deploying a purchasing process that gets suppliers involved earlier and further upstream in the product development process, the concept of ‘project partners’. This is a program that identifies key technologies and innovations that require substantial investments from both sides. Suppliers will be selected as project partners for a specific area and will work closer with us to develop lower cost and higher quality solutions. This win-win approach has already started with interior systems and chassis development projects.\n\nAlthough the turnaround in the Nissan business has been profound, we also recognize that our supplier partners have played a significant role. Going forward, we intend to reinforce those relationships, building value on both sides. For example, we are reinvigorating our innovative 3-3-3 engineering program.\n\nOur Alliance with Renault has also provided substantial purchasing benefits and opportunities. Formed in 2001, the Renault Nissan Purchasing Organization, or RNPO, now accounts for over 70 percent of all purchasing for Nissan and Renault. Nissan will further benefit from RNPO through the utilization of Renault supply bases in certain LCCs.\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 48\n\nOUR WORK" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9061251922223007, + "doc_id": "04672d318762eebcd1d4350229dc7efe5070c4cddd406a617be8fb5c82b0dfbd", + "edit_distance": 0.9333333333333333, + "f1_score": 0.9681528662420382, + "meteor": 0.9490196078431372, + "precision": 0.9620253164556962, + "pred_md": "## EU R O N E T SE RV I C E S IN C. A N D SU B S I D I A R I E S\n\n## Consolidated Statements of Changes in Stockholders' (Deficit)/Equity (continued)\n\nSee accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.\n\n## B R O O K YN BRIDGE, New Yo r k L\n\nThe Brooklyn Bridge, proudly standing over the East River and connecting the boroughs of Brooklyn and Manhattan, endures as one of the most famous bridges in America. When completed in May 1883, the 5989-foot-long Brooklyn Bridge was the largest suspension bridge in the world.\n\n2 7", + "recall": 0.9743589743589743, + "true_md": "B R O O K LYN BRIDGE, New Yo r k\n\nThe Brooklyn Bridge, proudly standing over the East River and connecting the boroughs of Brooklyn and Manhattan, endures as one of the most famous bridges in America. When completed in May 1883, the 5989-foot-long Brooklyn Bridge was the largest suspension bridge in the world.\n\n2 7\n\nSee accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.\n\n## EU R O N E T SE RV I C E S IN C. A N D SU B S I D I A R I E S\n\n## Consolidated Statements of Changes in Stockholders’ (Deficit)/Equity (continued)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9234169303713254, + "doc_id": "359c39839354f7fd86586f12c7b1174d1e31e89a86a2a6636f20f851d19dd027", + "edit_distance": 0.7640586797066015, + "f1_score": 0.9697885196374623, + "meteor": 0.7277156105981265, + "precision": 0.9756838905775076, + "pred_md": "## BOARD OF DIRECTORS\n\n## STEPHEN GERLACH\n\n## LLB\n\nAge 59. Director since 5 September 1989 and Chairman since 4 May 2001. Chairman of Santos Finance Ltd and of the Environmental and Safety Committee, Finance Committee and Nomination Committee and member of the Remuneration Committee of the Board. Chairman of Futuris Corporation Ltd and Challenger Beston Limited and a Director of Southcorp Ltd. Former Managing Partner of the Adelaide legal firm, Finlaysons. Former Chairman of Amdel Ltd and Equitoral Mining Ltd.\n\n## JOHN CHARLES ELLICE-FLINT BSc (Hons)\n\nAge 54. Managing Director since 19 December 2000, member of the Environmental and Safety Committee of the Board, Director of Santos Finance Ltd and also Chairman of other Santos Ltd subsidiary companies. Thirty years' experience in the international oil and gas industry including twenty six years with Unocal, including as Senior Vice President: Global Exploration and Technology and Vice President: Corporate Planning and Economics. Member and Chair of the South Australian Museum Board.\n\n## PETER CHARLES BARNETT FCPA\n\nAge 64. Director since 31 October 1995 and member of the Environmental and Safety Committee, Nomination Committee, Finance Committee and Remuneration Committee of the Board. Director of AMCIL Ltd and Opis Capital Ltd. Former Managing Director and Chief Executive Officer of Pasminco Ltd (1988-1995) and Chief Executive Officer of EZ Industries Ltd. Former director of Mayne Group Ltd.\n\n## KENNETH ALFRED DEAN\n\n## FCPA, MAICD\n\nAge 52. Independent nonexecutive Director effective 23 February 2005. Extensive financial\n\nexperience in the international petroleum industry, having held the position of Chief Executive Officer, Shell Financial Services. During his 30-year career with Shell, held several other senior executive positions in treasury, audit, accounting, IT and financial and corporate services. Fellow of the Australian Society of Certified Practising Accountants and member of the Australian Institute of Company Directors.\n\n## RICHARD MICHAEL HARDING MSc\n\nAge 55. Director since 1 March 2004 and member of the Audit Committee of the Board. Former President and General Manager of BP Developments Australia Limited and former Vice-Chairman and Council member of the Australian Petroleum Production and Exploration Association. Chairman of the Ministry of Defence Command Support, Training and Simulation Project Governance Board and Director of Arc Energy Ltd.\n\n## GRAEME WILLIAM MCGREGOR\n\nAO, BEc, FCPA, FAIM, FAICD Age 66. Director since\n\n3 September 1999. Chairman of the Audit Committee and member of the Finance Committee and Nomination Committee of the Board. Director of Santos Finance Ltd. Director of Foster's Group Ltd, Nufarm Ltd, WMC Resources Ltd and Goldman Sachs JB Were Managed Funds Limited. Member of the Financial Reporting Council. Former Executive Director Finance of The Broken Hill Proprietary Company Limited and former Director of Community Foundation Network Ltd.\n\n## MICHAEL ANTHONY O'LEARY\n\nDipMinE, BSc, FAusIMM, FAIM, FAICD\n\nAge 69. Director since 15 October 1996 and member of the Environmental and Safety Committee of the Board. Director of Newcrest Mining Ltd. Former Chairman of Hamersley Iron, Argyle Diamonds, Dampier Salt, former Deputy Chairman of Bank of Western Australia Ltd and former Director of Rio Tinto Ltd and Rio Tinto plc.\n\n## CHRISTOPHER JOHN RECNY\n\nBSc, MSc, MBA\n\nAge 51. Independent non-\n\nexecutive Director effective 23 February 2005. Extensive international management and project management experience, including as global head of international consultancy L.E.K. 's natural resources practice - a company he helped establish in the 1980s. Regional head of Asia-Pacific for L.E.K. and previously spent eight years with Fluor Corporation as a project manager on, and undertaking feasibility studies for, major resource developments.\n\n## PROFESSOR JUDITH SLOAN\n\nBA (Hons), MA, MSc Age 50. Director since 5 September 1994. Chairperson of the Remuneration Committee and member of the Audit Committee of the Board. Deputy Chair of the Australian Broadcasting Corporation and Part-time Commissioner of the Productivity Commission. Former Professor of Labour Studies at the Flinders University of South Australia and Director of the National Institute of Labour Studies. Former Chairperson of SGIC Holdings Ltd and Director of Mayne Group Ltd.\n\nSantos Board of Directors during November 2004 Board meeting held at Moomba, Cooper Basin. Left to right: Graeme McGregor, John Ellice-Flint, Peter Barnett, Stephen Gerlach, Michael Harding, Judith Sloan, Michael O'Leary and Frank Conroy (who retired in December 2004). Kenneth Dean and Christopher Recny subsequently joined the Board in February 2005.\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\n41", + "recall": 0.963963963963964, + "true_md": "## BOARD OF DIRECTORS\n\n## STEPHEN GERLACH\n\n## RICHARD MICHAEL HARDING\n\n## MICHAEL ANTHONY O’LEARY\n\n## PROFESSOR JUDITH SLOAN\n\n## JOHN CHARLES ELLICE-FLINT\n\n## GRAEME WILLIAM MCGREGOR\n\n## CHRISTOPHER JOHN RECNY\n\n## PETER CHARLES BARNETT\n\n## KENNETH ALFRED DEAN\n\nAnnual Report 2004 41\n\nexecutive Director effective 23 February 2005. Extensive international management and project management experience, including as global head of international consultancy L.E.K.’s natural resources practice – a company he helped establish in the 1980s. Regional head of Asia-Pacific for L.E.K. and previously spent eight years with Fluor Corporation as a project manager on, and undertaking feasibility studies for, major resource developments. \n\n3 September 1999. Chairman of the Audit Committee and member of the Finance Committee and Nomination Committee of the Board. Director of Santos Finance Ltd. Director of Foster’s Group Ltd, Nufarm Ltd, WMC Resources Ltd and Goldman Sachs JB Were Managed Funds Limited. Member of the Financial Reporting Council. Former Executive Director Finance of The Broken Hill Proprietary Company Limited and former Director of Community Foundation Network Ltd.\n\nexperience in the international petroleum industry, having held the position of Chief Executive Officer, Shell Financial Services. During his 30-year career with Shell, held several other senior executive positions in treasury, audit, accounting, IT and financial and corporate services. Fellow of the Australian Society of Certified Practising Accountants and member of the Australian Institute of Company Directors. \n\nLLB Age 59. Director since 5 September 1989 and Chairman since 4 May 2001. Chairman of Santos Finance Ltd and of the Environmental and Safety Committee, Finance Committee and Nomination Committee and member of the Remuneration Committee of the Board. Chairman of Futuris Corporation Ltd and Challenger Beston Limited and a Director of Southcorp Ltd. Former Managing Partner of the Adelaide legal firm, Finlaysons. Former Chairman of Amdel Ltd and Equitoral Mining Ltd.\n\nMSc Age 55. Director since 1 March 2004 and member of the Audit Committee of the Board. Former President and General Manager of BP Developments Australia Limited and former Vice-Chairman and Council member of the Australian Petroleum Production and Exploration Association. Chairman of the Ministry of Defence Command Support, Training and Simulation Project Governance Board and Director of Arc Energy Ltd.\n\nDipMinE, BSc, FAusIMM, FAIM, FAICD Age 69. Director since 15 October 1996 and member of the Environmental and Safety Committee of the Board. Director of Newcrest Mining Ltd. Former Chairman of Hamersley Iron, Argyle Diamonds, Dampier Salt, former Deputy Chairman of Bank of Western Australia Ltd and former Director of Rio Tinto Ltd and Rio Tinto plc.\n\nBA (Hons), MA, MSc Age 50. Director since 5 September 1994. Chairperson of the Remuneration Committee and member of the Audit Committee of the Board. Deputy Chair of the Australian Broadcasting Corporation and Part-time Commissioner of the Productivity Commission. Former Professor of Labour Studies at the Flinders University of South Australia and Director of the National Institute of Labour Studies. Former Chairperson of SGIC Holdings Ltd and Director of Mayne Group Ltd.\n\nBSc, MSc, MBA Age 51. Independent non-\n\nAO, BEc, FCPA, FAIM, FAICD Age 66. Director since \n\nBSc (Hons) Age 54. Managing Director since 19 December 2000, member of the Environmental and Safety Committee of the Board, Director of Santos Finance Ltd and also Chairman of other Santos Ltd subsidiary companies. Thirty years’ experience in the international oil and gas industry including twenty six years with Unocal, including as Senior Vice President: Global Exploration and Technology and Vice President: Corporate Planning and Economics. Member and Chair of the South Australian Museum Board.\n\nSantos Board of Directors during Nov ember 2004 Board meeting held at Moomba, Cooper Basin. Left to right: Graeme McGregor John Ellice-Flint, Peter Barnett, Stephen Gerlach, Michael Harding, Judith Sloan, Michael O’Leary and Frank Conroy (who retired in December 2004). Kenneth Dean and Christopher Recny subsequently joined the Boar d in February 2005.\n\nFCPA Age 64. Director since 31 October 1995 and member of the Environmental and Safety Committee, Nomination Committee, Finance Committee and Remuneration Committee of the Board. Director of AMCIL Ltd and Opis Capital Ltd. Former Managing Director and Chief Executive Officer of Pasminco Ltd (1988–1995) and Chief Executive Officer of EZ Industries Ltd. Former director of Mayne Group Ltd.\n\nFCPA, MAICD Age 52. Independent non- executive Director effective 23 February 2005. Extensive financial" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.25593824163809076, + "doc_id": "2e297c93da10cb4db9b098480e8372856c07ae3dd12295f43da528452d30b277", + "edit_distance": 0.7528089887640449, + "f1_score": 0.6542056074766355, + "meteor": 0.4598029811097993, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "THREE CRITICAL COMMITMENTS\n\n## FOUR MAJOR BREAKTHROUGHS\n\n## Infiniti Global Tier-1 bBrand\n\n## Light Commercial Vehicles (LCV)\n\n*Japan launch after NISSAN Value-Up\n\n## Leading Competitive Countries (LCCs)\n\nGeographic Expansion\n\nGeographic Expansion\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\n11\n\nPERFORMANCE", + "recall": 0.4861111111111111, + "true_md": "PERFORMANCE\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 11\n\n## THREE CRITICAL COMMITMENTS\n\n## FOUR MAJOR BREAKTHROUGHS\n\nConsolidated Operating Profit Margin COP margin (%)\n\nNISSAN Value-Up Sales Volume (Units: 1000s)\n\nReturn on Invested Capital (auto) (%)\n\nInfiniti Global Tier-1 bBrand\n\nLight Commercial Vehicles (LCV)\n\nGeographic Expansion\n\nLeading Competitive Countries (LCCs)\n\n*Japan launch after NISSAN Value-Up\n\n*Same scope pf consolidation as P&L, excluding change of cash compared to fiscal year 2003" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.23462350320528, + "doc_id": "bba9ebe0dcf954ad7c024e8c00fada4ec398432bd8395e5917c3c742d474339c", + "edit_distance": 0.6363636363636364, + "f1_score": 0.5, + "meteor": 0.6105769230769231, + "precision": 0.4, + "pred_md": "B A L A N C E\n\nCorning Annual Report 2002", + "recall": 0.6666666666666666, + "true_md": "# BALANCE Corning Annual Report 2002" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.41120981512070537, + "doc_id": "19f5943e52f1ac778a00c61b5b289ae9b4d24dc894c4dbebd4a242c01156855c", + "edit_distance": 0.4794520547945205, + "f1_score": 0.7142857142857143, + "meteor": 0.5409948623245021, + "precision": 0.8333333333333334, + "pred_md": "## HON INDUSTRIES Inc. and SUBSIDIARIES\n\n(a) Per SFAS No. 142, 'Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets,' the Company has ceased recoding of goodwill and indefinite-lived Intangible amortization.\n\n(b) Includes acquisitions completed during year.\n\n57", + "recall": 0.625, + "true_md": "## H O N I N D U S T R I E S I n c . a n d S U B S I D I A R I E S\n\n(a) Per SFAS No. 142, “Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets,” the Company has ceased recoding of goodwill and indefinite-lived Intangible amortization.\n\n(b) Includes acquisitions completed during year.\n\n57" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9532713431753955, + "doc_id": "75885ee1d8c688d053d6211748bf0961966a8b5ab5ccd00ac2c1d83aaec271ff", + "edit_distance": 0.8298755186721992, + "f1_score": 0.9841269841269842, + "meteor": 0.684983633104592, + "precision": 0.9893617021276596, + "pred_md": "SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## Note 3. Securities and Investments\n\nThe Company has three classifications of investments; available for sale securities, investments carried at cost, and equity method investments. See Note 1 for specific definitions of each classification of investment. The following tables present the investments of the Company for the three-year period ended December 31, 2003:\n\nAvailable-for-sale securities at December 31 consist of the following:\n\nDuring 2001, the Company liquidated its holdings of Loral Space and Communications, LTD and ITC^DeltaCom, Inc. for proceeds of $0.2 million and a realized loss of $1.4 million. Additionally, the Company sold 130,000 shares of Illuminet Holdings, Inc. (Illuminet) for proceeds of $5.3 million and a realized gain of $5.0 million. In September 2001, Illuminet notified the Company that VeriSign, Inc. (VeriSign) made an offer to acquire Illuminet. The Company received VeriSign stock valued at $13.2 million, for the Illuminet investment, and based on the fair value of the new asset received, recorded a realized gain of $12.7 million in 2001 on the transaction through net gain on investments in the other income (expense) section of the income statement. Subsequent to the close of the transaction, the VeriSign stock declined in value and the Company recognized an impairment of $1.5 million, as management viewed the decline to be other than temporary.\n\nIn 2002, the Company liquidated its holdings of VeriSign, Inc, for proceeds of $2.8 million and a realized loss of $9.0 million. The VeriSign stock was valued at $38 per share at December 31, 2001, and declined over the ensuing months to approximately $6 per share in early July 2002. The Company liquidated all of its holdings in the stock early in the third quarter 2002. The Company's original investment in VeriSign's predecessor companies was approximately $1.0 million. Total proceeds from all sales of stock in VeriSign and its predecessor companies were $8.1 million, or more than eight times the original investment. .\n\nThere were no gross realized gains on available-for-sale securities included in income in 2003 or 2002, while there were $17.7 million for 2001. Gross realized losses included in income in 2003, 2002 and 2001 were $3 thousand, $9.0 million and $3.0 million, respectively.\n\nChanges in the unrealized gains (losses) on available-for-sale securities during the years ended December 31, 2003, 2002 and 2001 reported as a separate component of shareholders' equity are as follows:\n\nSHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY\n\n24\n\n■", + "recall": 0.9789473684210527, + "true_md": "SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## Note 3. Securities and Investments\n\nSHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY ■ 24\n\nChanges in the unrealized gains (losses) on available-for-sale securities during the years ended December 31, 2003, 2002 and 2001 reported as a separate component of shareholders’ equity are as follows:\n\nThere were no gross realized gains on available-for-sale securities included in income in 2003 or 2002, while there were $17.7 million for 2001. Gross realized losses included in income in 2003, 2002 and 2001 were $3 thousand, $9.0 million and $3.0 million, respectively.\n\nIn 2002, the Company liquidated its holdings of VeriSign, Inc, fo r proceeds of $2.8 million and a realized loss of $9.0 million. The VeriSign stock was valued at $38 per share at December 31, 2001, and declined over the ensuing months to approximately $6 per share in early July 2002. The Company liquidated all of its holdings in the stock early in the third quarter 2002. The Company’s original investment in VeriSign’s predecessor companies was approximately $1.0 million. Total proceeds from all sales of stock in VeriSign and its predecessor companies were $8.1 million, or more than eight times the original investment. .\n\nDuring 2001, the Company liquidated its holdings of Loral Space and Communications, LTD and ITC^DeltaCom, Inc. for proceeds of $0.2 million and a realized loss of $1.4 million. Additionally, the Company sold 130,000 shares of Illuminet Holdings, Inc. (Illuminet) for proceeds of $5.3 million and a realized gain of $5.0 million. In September 2001, Illuminet notified the Company that VeriSign, Inc. (VeriSign) made an offer to acquire Illuminet. The Company received VeriSign stock valued at $13.2 million, for the Illuminet investment, and based on the fair value of the new asset received, recorded a realized gain of $12.7 million in 2001 on the transaction through net gain on investments in the other income (expense) section of the income statement. Subsequent to the close of the transaction, the VeriSign stock declined in value and the Company recognized an impairment of $1.5 million, as management viewed the decline to be other than temporary.\n\nAvailable-for-sale securities at December 31 consist of the following:\n\nThe Company has three classifications of investments; available for sale securities, investments carried at cost, and equity method investments. See Note 1 for specific definitions of each classification of investment. The following tables present the investments of the Company for the three-year period ended December 31, 2003:" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5923033072023249, + "doc_id": "1abbf573b5f56860d50891c51646e1106d73d2edee2d0d7ad76b49d0b8d0127e", + "edit_distance": 0.39285714285714285, + "f1_score": 0.8205128205128205, + "meteor": 0.9467186484730346, + "precision": 0.6956521739130435, + "pred_md": "48\n\n## NOTES TO AND FORMING PART OF THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR THE FINANCIAL YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2000\n\n## 18. RESERVES\n\n(a)", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NOTES TO AND FORMING PART OF THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR THE FINANCIAL YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2000\n\n48" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7932846588453272, + "doc_id": "e2a16b294fe9dc03c2427027d3650dac7567d40ce43e7b476b1b22ebb2d54587", + "edit_distance": 0.5909090909090909, + "f1_score": 0.9666666666666666, + "meteor": 0.9380109597156397, + "precision": 0.9354838709677419, + "pred_md": "## 26. Specified Director and Specified Executive Disclosures (continued) (c) Remuneration of Specified Directors and Specified Executives (continued)\n\nDetails of remuneration\n\n2004\n\n1 No bonuses were attributable to long-term incentive plans.\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\n77", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "1 No bonuses were attributable to long-term incentive plans.\n\n## 26. Specified Director and Specified Executive Disclosures (continued)\n\n## (c) Remuneration of Specified Directors and Specified Executives (continued)\n\nAnnual Report 2004 77" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8852613222719046, + "doc_id": "6ab8bca2a08e80b46c04f71d19f1b1613271be577b2875aea034880caff1c25d", + "edit_distance": 0.24096385542168675, + "f1_score": 0.9736842105263156, + "meteor": 0.8828659886917898, + "precision": 0.9866666666666667, + "pred_md": "Most of Euro n e t 's financial instruments (cash and cash equivalents, trade accounts receivable, investment securities, prepaid expenses and other current assets, trade accounts payable, accrued expenses and other current liabilities, advance payments on contracts, billings in excess of costs and estimated earnings on software installation contracts, costs and estimated earnings in excess of billings on software installation contracts) are short - t e rm in nature. Accord i n g l y, the carrying value of these instruments approximates their fair values. The fair value of notes payable was determined based on quoted market prices for the same issue and amounted to $37.5 million (carrying value of $77.2 million) at December 31, 2000 and $52.0 million (carrying value of $72.8 million) at December 31, 1999. See Note 14 for details of the Company's foreign exchange contracts.\n\n## (21) Reconciliation of Net Loss to Net Cash Used in Operating Activities\n\nThe reconciliation of net loss to net cash used in operating activities for the years ended December 31, 2000, 1999, and 1998 follows.\n\n## (22) Non-Cash Financing and Investing Activities\n\nCapital lease obligations of $5.1 million, $5.2 million and $3.9 million during the years ended December 31, 2000, 1999 and 1998, re s e , were incurred when the Company entered into leases primarily for new automated teller machines. p ctively\n\nDuring the years ended December 31, 2000, 1999 and 1998, the Company issued warrants to purchase common stock totaling $ 372,000, $0, and $1,725,000, re s p e c t i v . ely\n\n4 3", + "recall": 0.961038961038961, + "true_md": "## (20) Financial Instruments\n\n## (21) Reconciliation of Net Loss to Net Cash Used in Operating Activities\n\n## (22) Non-Cash Financing and Investing Activities\n\nMost of Euro n e t ’s financial instruments (cash and cash equivalents, trade accounts receivable, investment securities, prepaid expenses and other current assets, trade accounts payable, accrued expenses and other current liabilities, advance payments on contracts, billings in excess of costs and estimated earnings on software installation contracts, costs and estimated earnings in excess of billings on software installation contracts) are short - t e rm in nature. Accord i n g l y, the carrying value of these instruments approximates their fair values. The fair value of notes payable was determined based on quoted market prices for the same issue and amounted to $37.5 million (carrying value of $77.2 million) at December 31, 2000 and $52.0 million (carrying value of $72.8 million) at December 31, 1999. See Note 14 for details of the Company's foreign exchange contracts. \n\nThe reconciliation of net loss to net cash used in operating activities for the years ended December 31, 2000, 1999, and 1998 follows. \n\nCapital lease obligations of $5.1 million, $5.2 million and $3.9 million during the years ended December 31, 2000, 1999 and 1998, re s p e c t i v e l y, were incurred when the Company entered into leases primarily for new automated teller machines. \n\nDuring the years ended December 31, 2000, 1999 and 1998, the Company issued warrants to purchase common stock totaling $ 372,000, $0, and $1,725,000, re s p e c t i v e l y. \n\n4 3\n\nYear Ended December 31," + }, + { + "bleu": 0.632557820487137, + "doc_id": "efd5756d942ed89d71cf72fd29b11d327c7cd6eaf2c9dec3a5ec9cf356d5885c", + "edit_distance": 0.362962962962963, + "f1_score": 0.861244019138756, + "meteor": 0.9033452805148023, + "precision": 0.8256880733944955, + "pred_md": "F I N A N C I A L I N F O R M A T I O N\n\n## S E L E C T E D F I N A N C I A L D A T A\n\n- (a) Dividends on outstanding common shares paid in the 3rd and 4th quarter at $.12 per share (see Note 6)\n- (b) Includes a $1.6 million after-tax goodwill impairment charge ($ .88 per diluted share) (see Note 2)\n- (c) Includes a $5.5 million after-tax gain ($ 2.42 per diluted share) from discontinued operations (see Note 3)\n\n## R E C O N C I L I A T I O N O F N O N - G A A P F I N A N C I A L M E A S U R E S\n\n## EBITDA Per Diluted Share From Continuing Operations\n\nEBITDA per diluted share from continuing operations, a non-GAAP financial measure, is computed by the Company as EBITDA divided by weighted average diluted shares outstanding. The company computes EBITDA by adding income from continuing operations, net interest expense/(income), income tax expense, depreciation and amortization.\n\n## Return on Equity\n\nReturn on equity, a non-GAAP financial measure, is computed by the Company by dividing annual net income by the Company's beginning of the year stockholders' equity balance as shown on its balance sheet.\n\n7", + "recall": 0.9, + "true_md": "FINANCIAL INFORMATION\n\n## SELECTED FINANCIAL DATA\n\n(a) Dividends on outstanding common shares paid in the 3rd and 4th quarter at $.12 per share (see Note 6) \n\n(b) Includes a $1.6 million after-tax goodwill impairment charge ($ .88 per diluted share) (see Note 2) \n\n(c) Includes a $5.5 million after-tax gain ($ 2.42 per diluted share) from discontinued operations (see Note 3)\n\n## RECONCILIATION OF NON-GAAP FINANCIAL MEASURES\n\n## EBITDA Per Diluted Share From Continuing Operations\n\nEBITDA per diluted share from continuing operations, a non-GAAP financial measure, is computed by the Company as EBITDA divided by weighted average diluted shares outstanding. The company computes EBITDA by adding income from continuing operations, net interest expense/(income), income tax expense, depreciation and amortization.\n\nReturn on equity, a non-GAAP financial measure, is computed by the Company by dividing annual net income by the Company’s beginning of the year stockholders’ equity balance as shown on its balance sheet.\n\n## Return on Equity\n\n7" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5998181344035176, + "doc_id": "c280fa87cc8d30347ab6e9eb210a400c618f59cd12b7d9cbc8d3b2f2a176cfa0", + "edit_distance": 0.38392857142857145, + "f1_score": 0.8780487804878049, + "meteor": 0.9298584537665932, + "precision": 0.7964601769911505, + "pred_md": "In recent years, the economic climate has presented significant challenges to growth-and, in some cases, survival-for American businesses. The companies that have fared well are those with solid financial foundations and sound growth strategies that provide a measure of protection against the changing winds of the economy. Atrion is one of those companies. For the past five years, we have produced earnings per share growth of more than 15 percent each year. Despite fluctuations in our markets and product demand, we have continued to return value to our stockholders through strong earnings growth, year after year. As a leading provider of medical devices and components to niche markets in the health care industry, we are committed to doing everything we can to continue that level of performance.\n\nF I N A N C I A L H I G H L I G H T S\n\n1\n\nL E T T E R T O S T O C K H O L D E R S\n\n2\n\nF I N A N C I A L I N F O R M A T I O N\n\n7\n\nC O R P O R A T E I N F O R M A T I O N 2 8", + "recall": 0.9782608695652174, + "true_md": "In recent years, the economic climate has presented significant challenges to growth—and, in some cases, survival—for American businesses. The companies that have fared well are those with solid financial foundations and sound growth strategies that provide a measure of protection against the changing winds of the economy. Atrion is one of those companies. For the past five years, we have produced earnings per share growth of more than 15 percent each year. Despite fluctuations in our markets and product demand, we have continued to return value to our stockholders through strong earnings growth, year after year. As a leading provider of medical devices and components to niche markets in the health care industry, we are committed to doing everything we can to continue that level of performance." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9241088340024464, + "doc_id": "57890249561a8db8c344cdbcf366e68f17511aca9a2093c9edb4d50d1826cf10", + "edit_distance": 0.8832, + "f1_score": 0.9559543230016312, + "meteor": 0.7404579017694798, + "precision": 0.973421926910299, + "pred_md": "OUR WORK\n\n52\n\nThe above are all part of the Nissan Integrated Manufacturing System, known as NIMS, which provides more flexibility in manufacturing. Using NIMS, for example, we can produce eight models on a single line. During NISSAN 180, we introduced 16 NIMS lines worldwide into our 18 total major lines. For NISSAN Value-Up, we will increase this to 22 NIMS lines.\n\nWe will need that flexibility during NISSAN Value-Up, because twice a month we will be launching new cars somewhere-a total of 70 production starts. We cannot do this with our old system. The launch stage can be a difficult period, and too often problems arise that can cause panic on the line. To cope with these problems, we've devised what we call the Global Launching Expert system. The launch expert can stand back and analyze the situation and come up with solutions. We are now identifying, educating and dispatching launch experts from around the world. In 2006, we will further refine our launch procedures by opening the Global Production Engineering Center. Currently, if we produce the same car in several markets,\n\n## Europe MANUFACTURING IN EUROPE\n\nCOLIN DODGE Senior Vice President Nissan Europe\n\nCOLIN DODGE Senior Vice President Nissan Europe\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\n'In the last four years the Nissan Production Way has become the international standard for manufacturing in the world. This system makes sense everywhere, including Japan, the UK, Spain, and the U.S. It's a system that everyone embraces and feels is theirs, not one that was imposed on them. The Sunderland plant is the most productive automotive plant in the Western world, and while we have great people working for us, the Nissan Production Way is what made this success possible.\n\nEurope is an incredibly competitive market, with 15 companies trying to gain market share.\n\nthe launches are separate activities. In the future, we will 'bundle' all launches by developing the launch process and creating the dies in Japan. This bundle will then be reproduced and forwarded to the various factories producing the car.\n\nWe have established four key factors for success during NISSAN Value-Up: quality, timely delivery, cost, and the environment. Regarding the environment, we have identified three environmental issues, which are CO2, recycling, and emissions such as chemical emissions and volatile organic compounds. This is our newest challenge, since we do not yet have concrete targets on a global scale as we do for Japan.\n\nOur goal is to maintain Nissan's status as the world leader in manufacturing by aggressively implementing new technologies and expertise. Our processes are designed to require low investment costs and generate fast product launches, which would result in a faster return on investment in addition to a top-quality product.'\n\nWe decided not to compete directly in fundamental segments. Instead, we chose to build unique, profitable vehicles, like the new crossover vehicle, based on the Qashqai concept car, which will be released in early 2007. This is one of the three launches for the upcoming year from the Sunderland plant, along with the Tone and the Micra C+C coupe and cabriolet. NISSAN 180 was a great success for us. Today, our Spanish factory is in full production and our Sunderland plant is preparing to turn out the three new models.'", + "recall": 0.9391025641025641, + "true_md": "## E Eu ur ro op pe e MANUFACTURING IN EUROPE\n\n“In the last four years the Nissan Production Way has become the international standard for manufacturing in the world. This system makes sense everywhere, including Japan, the UK, Spain, and the U.S. It’s a system that everyone embraces and feels is theirs, not one that was imposed on them. The Sunderland plant is the most productive automotive plant in the Western world, and while we have great people working for us, the Nissan Production Way is what made this success possible. ur ro op pe e\n\nEurope is an incredibly competitive market, with 15 companies trying to gain market share.\n\nWe decided not to compete directly in fundamental segments. Instead, we chose to build unique, profitable vehicles, like the new crossover vehicle, based on the Qashqai concept car, which will be released in early 2007. This is one of the three launches for the upcoming year from the Sunderland plant, along with the Tone and the Micra C+C coupe and cabriolet. NISSAN 180 was a great success for us. Today, our Spanish factory is in full production and our Sunderland plant is preparing to turn out the three new models.”\n\nCOLIN DODGE Senior Vice President Nissan Europe\n\nThe above are all part of the Nissan Integrated Manufacturing System, known as NIMS, which provides more flexibility in manufacturing. Using NIMS, for example, we can produce eight models on a single line. During NISSAN 180, we introduced 16 NIMS lines worldwide into our 18 total major lines. For NISSAN Value-Up, we will increase this to 22 NIMS lines. \n\nWe will need that flexibility during NISSAN Value-Up, because twice a month we will be launching new cars somewhere—a total of 70 production starts. We cannot do this with our old system. The launch stage can be a difficult period, and too often problems arise that can cause panic on the line. To cope with these problems, we’ve devised what we call the Global Launching Expert system. The launch expert can stand back and analyze the situation and come up with solutions. We are now identifying, educating and dispatching launch experts from around the world. In 2006, we will further refine our launch procedures by opening the Global Production Engineering Center. Currently, if we produce the same car in several markets,\n\nOur goal is to maintain Nissan’s status as the world leader in manufacturing by aggressively implementing new technologies and expertise. Our processes are designed to require low investment costs and generate fast product launches, which would result in a faster return on investment in addition to a top-quality product.”\n\nWe have established four key factors for success during NISSAN Value-Up: quality, timely delivery, cost, and the environment. Regarding the environment, we have identified three environmental issues, which are CO 2, recycling, and emissions such as chemical emissions and volatile organic compounds. This is our newest challenge, since we do not yet have concrete targets on a global scale as we do for Japan.\n\nthe launches are separate activities. In the future, we will ‘bundle’ all launches by developing the launch process and creating the dies in Japan. This bundle will then be reproduced and forwarded to the various factories producing the car. \n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\n52\n\nOUR WORK" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.956641355537709, + "doc_id": "8e02ffb57deba845755f7f690328c06a6202a65bdde2d4248ca5c439e773ae5c", + "edit_distance": 0.0778642936596218, + "f1_score": 0.9803921568627451, + "meteor": 0.9637271932881982, + "precision": 0.9776536312849162, + "pred_md": "SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES MANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS\n\ncarrier accounts, but due to the telecommunication industry down-turn of the last few years, the Company experienced write-offs in this area of the business totaling $0.5 million in 2002, due to bankruptcy filings of several significant telecommunications companies. In 2003, the inter-carrier segment of the business improved and the Company recovered $240 thousand of bad debt from the sale of certain accounts that were previously written-off.\n\nBad Debt expense summary, net of recoveries for the three years ended December 31, 2003:\n\nIn thousands\n\n## Revenue Recognition\n\nThe Company recognizes revenues when persuasive evidence of an arrangement exists, services have been rendered or products have been delivered, the price to the buyer is fixed and determinable, and collectibility is reasonably assured. The Company's revenue recognition polices are consistent with the guidance in Staff Accounting Bulletin (\"SAB\") No. 101, Revenue Recognition in Financial Statements promulgated by the Securities and Exchange Commission, and the Emerging Issues Task Force ('EITF') 00-21, 'Revenue Arrangements with Multiple Deliverables' ('EITF 00-21'). Effective July 1, 2003 the Company adopted EITF 00-21. The EITF guidance addresses how to account for arrangements that may involve multiple revenue-generating activities, i.e., the delivery or performance of multiple products, services, and/or rights to use assets. In applying this guidance, separate contracts with the same party, entered into at or near the same time, will be presumed to be a bundled transaction, and the consideration will be measured and allocated to the separate units based on their relative fair values. The consensus guidance was applicable to new PCS service agreements entered into for quarters beginning July 1, 2003. The adoption of EITF 00-21 required evaluation of each arrangement entered into by the Company for each sales channel. The Company will continue to monitor arrangements with its sales channels to determine if any changes in revenue recognition will need to be made in the future. The adoption of EITF 00-21 has resulted in substantially all of the PCS activation fee revenue generated through Company-owned retail stores and associated direct costs being recognized at the time the related wireless handset is sold and it is classified as equipment revenue and cost of equipment, respectively. Upon adoption of EITF 00-21, previously deferred PCS revenue and costs will continue to be amortized over the remaining estimated life of a subscriber, not to exceed 30 months. PCS revenue and costs for activations at other retail locations and through other sales channels will continue to be deferred and amortized over their estimated lives as prescribed by SAB 101. The adoption of EITF 00-21 had the effect of increasing equipment revenue by $68 thousand and increasing costs of equipment by $23 thousand, which otherwise would have been deferred and amortized.\n\nThe Company records equipment revenue from the sale of handsets and accessories to subscribers in its retail stores and to local distributors in its territories upon delivery. The Company does not record equipment revenue on handsets and accessories purchased from national third-party retailers, those purchased though the Company's business-tobusiness sales force, or directly from Sprint by subscribers in its territories. The Company believes the equipment revenue and related cost of equipment associated with the sale of wireless handsets and accessories is a separate earnings process from the sale of wireless services to subscribers. For competitive marketing reasons, the Company sells wireless handsets at prices lower than the cost. In certain instances the Company may offer larger handset discounts as an incentive for the customer to agree to a multi-year service contract. The Company also sells wireless handsets to existing customers at a loss in handset sales and the corresponding cost in cost of goods, and accounts for these transactions separately from agreements to provide customers wireless service. These transactions are viewed as a cost to retain the existing customers and deter churn.\n\nFor the Company's wireless customers that purchase and activate their service through a channel not covered by EITF 00-21, the wireless customers generally pay an activation fee to the Company when they initiate service. The Company defers the activation fee revenue (except when a special promotion reduces or waives the fee) over the average life of its subscribers, which is estimated to be 30 months. The Company recognizes service revenue from its subscribers as they use the service. The Company provides a reduction of recorded revenue for billing adjustments and the portion of revenue (8%) that is retained by Sprint. The Company also reduces recorded revenue for rebates and discounts given to subscribers on wireless handset sales in accordance with (\"EITF\") Issue No. 01-9 'Accounting for Consideration Given by a Vendor to a Subscriber (Including a Reseller of the Vendor's Products).' The Company\n\nSHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY\n\n44\n\n■", + "recall": 0.9831460674157303, + "true_md": "carrier accounts, but due to the telecommunication industry down-turn of the last few years, the Company experienced write-offs in this area of the business totaling $0.5 million in 2002, due to bankruptcy filings of several significant telecommunications companies. In 2003, the inter-carrier segment of the business improved and the Company recovered $240 thousand of bad debt from the sale of certain accounts that were previously written-off.\n\nBad Debt expense summary, net of recoveries for the three years ended December 31, 2003:\n\nThe Company recognizes revenues when persuasive evidence of an arrangement exists, services have been rendered or products have been delivered, the price to the buyer is fixed and determinable, and collectibility is reasonably assured. The Company’s revenue recognition polices are consistent with the guidance in Staff Accounting Bulletin (\"SAB\") No. 101, Revenue Recognition in Financial Statements promulgated by the Securities and Exchange Commission, and the Emerging Issues Task Force (“EITF”) 00-21, “Revenue Arrangements with Multiple Deliverables” (“EITF 00-21”). Effective July 1, 2003 the Company adopted EITF 00-21. The EITF guidance addresses how to account for arrangements that may involve multiple revenue-generating activities, i.e., the delivery or performance of multiple products, services, and/or rights to use assets. In applying this guidance, separate contracts with the same party, entered into at or near the same time, will be presumed to be a bundled transaction, and the consideration will be measured and allocated to the separate units based on their relative fair values. The consensus guidance was applicable to new PCS service agreements entered into for quarters beginning July 1, 2003. The adoption of EITF 00-21 required evaluation of each arrangement entered into by the Company for each sales channel. The Company will continue to monitor arrangements with its sales channels to determine if any changes in revenue recognition will need to be made in the future. The adoption of EITF 00-21 has resulted in substantially all of the PCS activation fee revenue generated through Company-owned retail stores and associated direct costs being recognized at the time the related wireless handset is sold and it is classified as equipment revenue and cost of equipment, respectively. Upon adoption of EITF 00-21, previously deferred PCS revenue and costs will continue to be amortized over the remaining estimated life of a subscriber, not to exceed 30 months. PCS revenue and costs for activations at other retail locations and through other sales channels will continue to be deferred and amortized over their estimated lives as prescribed by SAB 101. The adoption of EITF 00-21 had the effect of increasing equipment revenue by $68 thousand and increasing costs of equipment by $23 thousand, which otherwise would have been deferred and amortized.\n\nThe Company records equipment revenue from the sale of handsets and accessories to subscribers in its retail stores and to local distributors in its territories upon delivery. The Company does not record equipment revenue on handsets and accessories purchased from national third-party retailers, those purchased though the Company’s business-to- business sales force, or directly from Sprint by subscribers in its territories. The Company believes the equipment revenue and related cost of equipment associated with the sale of wireless handsets and accessories is a separate earnings process from the sale of wireless services to subscribers. For competitive marketing reasons, the Company sells wireless handsets at prices lower than the cost. In certain instances the Company may offer larger handset discounts as an incentive for the customer to agree to a multi-year service contract. The Company also sells wireless handsets to existing customers at a loss in handset sales and the corresponding cost in cost of goods, and accounts for these transactions separately from agreements to provide customers wireless service. These transactions are viewed as a cost to retain the existing customers and deter churn.\n\nFor the Company’s wireless customers that purchase and activate their service through a channel not covered by EITF 00-21, the wireless customers generally pay an activation fee to the Company when they initiate service. The Company defers the activation fee revenue (except when a special promotion reduces or waives the fee) over the average life of its subscribers, which is estimated to be 30 months. The Company recognizes service revenue from its subscribers as they use the service. The Company provides a reduction of recorded revenue for billing adjustments and the portion of revenue (8%) that is retained by Sprint. The Company also reduces recorded revenue for rebates and discounts given to subscribers on wireless handset sales in accordance with (\"EITF\") Issue No. 01-9 “Accounting for Consideration Given by a Vendor to a Subscriber (Including a Reseller of the Vendor’s Products).” The Company\n\nSHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY ■ 44\n\n## Revenue Recognition\n\n## SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "7ac786825b8bfc242262778361b3f065953346cacfafd7db48956a3fdbf4a557", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9985422740524781, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Nissan Annual Report 2004\n\n59\n\nOUR WORLD", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Nissan Annual Report 2004 59\n\nOUR WORLD" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8112244253224361, + "doc_id": "62fc59e6654727ef82cd555c84715d8282e9c08cc755778f9a620a2775beb2c5", + "edit_distance": 0.24390243902439024, + "f1_score": 0.9752650176678447, + "meteor": 0.8523475053785906, + "precision": 0.9787234042553191, + "pred_md": "The assumptions used in accounting for the above plans were as follows:\n\n## 10. SHAREHOLDERS' EQUITY\n\nIn accordance with the Commercial Code of Japan (the 'Code'), the Company has provided a legal reserve, which was included in retained earnings. The Code provides that an amount equal to at least 10% of the amount to be disbursed as distributions of earnings be appropriated to the legal reserve until the total of such reserve and the additional paid-in capital account equals 25% of the common stock account. The legal reserve amounted to ¥53,838 million ($503,159 thousand) as of both March 31, 2005 and 2004.\n\nThe Code provides that neither additional paid-in capital nor the legal reserve is available for dividends, but both may be used to reduce or eliminate a deficit by resolution of the shareholders or may be transferred to common stock by resolution of the Board of Directors. The Code also provides that if the total amount of additional paid-in capital and the legal reserve exceeds 25% of the amount of common stock, the excess may be distributed to the shareholders either as a return of capital or as dividends subject to the approval of the shareholders.\n\n## 11. RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT COSTS\n\nResearch and development costs included in selling, general and administrative expenses and manufacturing costs for the years ended March 31, 2005, 2004 and 2003 amounted to ¥398,148 million ($3,721,009 thousand), ¥354,321 million and ¥300,330 million, respectively.\n\n## 12. OTHER INCOME (EXPENSES)\n\nThe components of 'Other, net' in 'Other income (expenses)' for each of the three years in the period ended March 31, 2005 were as follows:\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\n83\n\nFINANCIAL SECTION", + "recall": 0.971830985915493, + "true_md": "The assumptions used in accounting for the above plans were as follows:\n\nIn accordance with the Commercial Code of Japan (the “Code”), the Company has provided a legal reserve, which was included in retained earnings. The Code provides that an amount equal to at least 10% of the amount to be disbursed as distributions of earnings be appropriated to the legal reserve until the total of such reserve and the additional paid-in capital account equals 25% of the common stock account. The legal reserve amounted to ¥53,838 million ($503,159 thousand) as of both March 31, 2005 and 2004. The Code provides that neither additional paid-in capital nor the legal reserve is available for dividends, but both may be used to reduce or\n\nreserve amounted to ¥53,838 million ($503,159 thousand) as of both March 31, 2005 and 2004. The Code provides that neither additional paid-in capital nor the legal reserve is available for dividends, but both may be used to reduce or eliminate a deficit by resolution of the shareholders or may be transferred to common stock by resolution of the Board of Directors. The Code also provides that if the total amount of additional paid-in capital and the legal reserve exceeds 25% of the amount of common stock, the excess may be distributed to the shareholders either as a return of capital or as dividends subject to the approval of the shareholders. \n\n## 10. SHAREHOLDERS’ EQUITY\n\n## 11. RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT COSTS\n\nResearch and development costs included in selling, general and administrative expenses and manufacturing costs for the years ended March 31, 2005, 2004 and 2003 amounted to ¥398,148 million ($3,721,009 thousand), ¥354,321 million and ¥300,330 million, respectively.\n\nThe components of “Other, net” in “Other income (expenses)” for each of the three years in the period ended March 31, 2005 were as follows:\n\n## 12. OTHER INCOME (EXPENSES)\n\nFINANCIAL SECTION\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 83" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9648387019246097, + "doc_id": "e29c4f931133350432ce90a392ab490dbfcdbf7feb07a01fdb3d182d6738cb41", + "edit_distance": 0.04608294930875576, + "f1_score": 0.9846491228070176, + "meteor": 0.979866692754026, + "precision": 0.9824945295404814, + "pred_md": "2 0\n\nAt December 31, 2000 the Company had cash and cash equivalents of $7.2 million and working capital of $3.6 million. The Company had $2.1 million of restricted cash held as security with respect to cash provided by banks participating in Euro n e t 's ATM network, to cover guarantees on financial instruments and as deposits with customs officials (See Note 7 to the Consolidated Financial Statements - Restricted cash). In addition to the assets held on the balance sheet at December 31, 1999 the Company held re p u rchased notes payable with a face value of 48.4 million Deutsche Marks ($23.3 million as at December 31, 2000 based on a USD to DM rate of 1:2.08) and a fair market value at December 31, 2000 of $9.3 million (See Note 20 to the Consolidated Financial Statements - Financial instruments).\n\nOn June 28, 2000 the Company entered into an unsecured revolving credit agreement (the 'Credit Agreement') providing a facility of up to $4.0 million from three shareholders as follows: DST Systems in the amount of $2.4 million; Hungarian-American Enterprise Fund in the amount of $1.0 million; and Michael J. Brown in the amount of $600,000. The facility was available to be drawn upon until December 28, 2000, with repayment of any draws being due June 28, 2001. On December 28, 2000 the facility was amended and renewed for a further six months and is available to be drawn until June 28, 2001 with repayments of any draws being due December 28, 2001. Draws on the facility will accrue intere s t at 10 percent per annum, payable quart e r l y. A 'commitment' fee was paid for the initial facility of 100,000 warrants issued pro- rata to the lenders with a warrant strike price set at the average share price, as quoted on NASDAQ for 10 trading days prior to the warrant issue date, less 10 percent. An additional fee of 100,000 warrants, on the same terms, was paid for the subsequent extension of the facility . Wa rrants are to be issued on similar terms and conditions for each draw on the facility at the rate of 80,000 warrants for each $1.0 million of funds drawn. As of M a rch 1, 2001, the Company had not made any draws under the Credit Agreement.\n\nOn Febru a ry 25, 2000 the Company entered into two subscription agreements for the sale of an aggregate of 650,000 new common shares of the C o m p a . Closing under those agreements took place on March 13, 2000. These agreements were signed with certain accredited investors in ny transactions exempt from registration under the exemptions provided in Section 4(2) and Regulation D of the Act. The purchase price of each s h e was $6.615, which re p resents ninety percent of the average closing price for the ten trading days prior to and including Febru a ry 15, 2000. ar The aggregate amount of proceeds to the Company from the private placement was $4.3 million. Under each of the agreements, for each two s h es of common stock purchased in the private placement, the purchasers were issued one warrant to purchase a share of Euronet common ar stock at an exercise price of $11.615, expiring in each case on the one year anniversary date of the subscription agreement.\n\nIn April 2000 the Company entered into two separate subscription agreements for the sale of an aggregate of 354,777 new common shares of the C o m p a . Of the total new shares, closing with respect to 254,777 shares took place on April 10, 2000, and closing with respect to 100,000 share s ny took place on May 4, 2000. These agreements were signed with certain foreign persons in transactions exempt from registration under the exemption provided in Regulation S of the Act. The weighted average purchase price of each share was $7.50. The aggregate amount of pro c e e d s to the Company from the private placement was $2.7 million. Under each of the agreements, for each two shares of common stock purchased in the private placement, the purchaser was issued one warrant to purchase a share of Euronet common stock at a weighted average exercise price of $12.50, expiring in each case on the one year anniversary date of the subscription agreement.\n\nIn July 2000 the Company entered into subscription agreements for the sale of 877,946 new common shares of the Company. These agre e m e n t s w e re signed with accredited investors in transactions exempt from registration pursuant to the exemptions provided in Section 4(2) and Regulation D of the Act. Closing with respect to such sale took place on July 14 and August 29, 2000. The purchase price of each share was $6.97. The aggregate amount of proceeds to the Company from the private placement was $6.1 million.\n\nThe Company leases many of its ATMs under capital lease arrangements that expire between 2001 and 2005. The leases bear interest between 8% and 12% per annum. As of December 31, 2000 the Company owed $11.5 million under such capital lease arrangements. (See Note 15 to the Consolidated Financial Statements - Leases.)\n\nThe Company expects that its capital re q u i rements will continue in the future but will not be as great as they were in the past, as the Company intends to continue to promote its outsourcing capabilities and re-deploy under- p e rf o rming ATMs currently operating in the network. This strategy should reduce the Company's reliance on capital expenditures in the future as the business continues to gro w. Fixed asset purchases and capital lease payments for 2001 are expected to be approximately $6.2 million in the Company's existing markets, notably We s t e rn and Central E u rope. Acquisitions of related ATM business and investments in new markets in furtherance of the Company's strategy may re q u i re additional capital expenditures.\n\nBased on the Company's current business plan and financial projections, the Company expects to continue to reduce operating losses and net cash used in operating activities in 2001. In the Network Services Segment, the Company anticipates that increased transaction levels in its AT M network will result in additional revenues without a corresponding increase in expenses. In addition, the Company expects to further expand its ATM outsourcing services and offer new value-added services, which will provide continued revenue growth without significantly increasing dire c t operating expenses or capital investments. In the Software Solutions Segment, the Company expects that the benefits of a re s t ructuring pro g r a m commenced in the first quarter of 2001 will reduce the operating losses and bring operating costs more in line with anticipated revenues. The Company believes that the credit facility, certain asset sales and cash and cash equivalents will provide the Company with sufficient capital until it achieves positive cash flow. As a result, the Company believes it has sufficient liquidity re s o u rces to meet current and future cash re q u i rements.\n\n## BA L A N C E SH E E T IT E M S\n\nCash and Cash Equivalents The decrease of cash and cash equivalents to $7.2 million at December 31, 2000 from $15.0 million at December 31, 1999 is due primarily to the net effects of working capital movements, foreign exchange gains and losses, the settlement of a forw a rd fore i g n exchange contract, private placement of common shares, capital expenditures and capital lease payments, and operating losses for the year ended December 31, 2000. (See Note 21 to the Consolidated Financial Statements - Reconciliation of net loss to net cash used in operating activities and the Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows.)\n\nRestricted Cash Restricted cash decreased to $2.1 million at December 31, 2000 from $10.9 million at December 31, 1999. The majority of restricted cash was held as security with respect to cash provided in Hungary by banks participating in Euro n e t 's ATM network, to cover", + "recall": 0.9868131868131869, + "true_md": "At December 31, 2000 the Company had cash and cash equivalents of $7.2 million and working capital of $3.6 million. The Company had $2.1 million of restricted cash held as security with respect to cash provided by banks participating in Euro n e t ’s ATM network, to cover guarantees on financial instruments and as deposits with customs officials (See Note 7 to the Consolidated Financial Statements – Restricted cash). In addition to the assets held on the balance sheet at December 31, 1999 the Company held re p u rchased notes payable with a face value of 48.4 million Deutsche Marks ($23.3 million as at December 31, 2000 based on a USD to DM rate of 1:2.08) and a fair market value at December 31, 2000 of $9.3 million (See Note 20 to the Consolidated Financial Statements – Financial instruments). \n\nOn June 28, 2000 the Company entered into an unsecured revolving credit agreement (the “Credit Agreement”) providing a facility of up to $4.0 million from three shareholders as follows: DST Systems in the amount of $2.4 million; Hungarian-American Enterprise Fund in the amount of $1.0 million; and Michael J. Brown in the amount of $600,000. The facility was available to be drawn upon until December 28, 2000, with repayment of any draws being due June 28, 2001. On December 28, 2000 the facility was amended and renewed for a further six months and is available to be drawn until June 28, 2001 with repayments of any draws being due December 28, 2001. Draws on the facility will accrue intere s t at 10 percent per annum, payable quart e r l y. A “commitment” fee was paid for the initial facility of 100,000 warrants issued pro- rata to the lenders with a warrant strike price set at the average share price, as quoted on NASDAQ for 10 trading days prior to the warrant issue date, less 10 percent. An additional fee of 100,000 warrants, on the same terms, was paid for the subsequent extension of the facility. Wa rrants are to be issued on similar terms and conditions for each draw on the facility at the rate of 80,000 warrants for each $1.0 million of funds drawn. As of M a rch 1, 2001, the Company had not made any draws under the Credit Agreement. \n\nOn Febru a ry 25, 2000 the Company entered into two subscription agreements for the sale of an aggregate of 650,000 new common shares of the C o m p a n y. Closing under those agreements took place on March 13, 2000. These agreements were signed with certain accredited investors in transactions exempt from registration under the exemptions provided in Section 4(2) and Regulation D of the Act. The purchase price of each s h a re was $6.615, which re p resents ninety percent of the average closing price for the ten trading days prior to and including Febru a ry 15, 2000. The aggregate amount of proceeds to the Company from the private placement was $4.3 million. Under each of the agreements, for each two s h a res of common stock purchased in the private placement, the purchasers were issued one warrant to purchase a share of Euronet common stock at an exercise price of $11.615, expiring in each case on the one year anniversary date of the subscription agreement. \n\nIn April 2000 the Company entered into two separate subscription agreements for the sale of an aggregate of 354,777 new common shares of the C o m p a n y. Of the total new shares, closing with respect to 254,777 shares took place on April 10, 2000, and closing with respect to 100,000 share s took place on May 4, 2000. These agreements were signed with certain foreign persons in transactions exempt from registration under the exemption provided in Regulation S of the Act. The weighted average purchase price of each share was $7.50. The aggregate amount of pro c e e d s to the Company from the private placement was $2.7 million. Under each of the agreements, for each two shares of common stock purchased in the private placement, the purchaser was issued one warrant to purchase a share of Euronet common stock at a weighted average exercise price of $12.50, expiring in each case on the one year anniversary date of the subscription agreement. \n\nIn July 2000 the Company entered into subscription agreements for the sale of 877,946 new common shares of the Company. These agre e m e n t s w e re signed with accredited investors in transactions exempt from registration pursuant to the exemptions provided in Section 4(2) and Regulation D of the Act. Closing with respect to such sale took place on July 14 and August 29, 2000. The purchase price of each share was $6.97. The aggregate amount of proceeds to the Company from the private placement was $6.1 million. \n\nThe Company leases many of its ATMs under capital lease arrangements that expire between 2001 and 2005. The leases bear interest between 8% and 12% per annum. As of December 31, 2000 the Company owed $11.5 million under such capital lease arrangements. (See Note 15 to the Consolidated Financial Statements - Leases.) \n\nThe Company expects that its capital re q u i rements will continue in the future but will not be as great as they were in the past, as the Company intends to continue to promote its outsourcing capabilities and re-deploy under- p e rf o rming ATMs currently operating in the network. This strategy should reduce the Company’s reliance on capital expenditures in the future as the business continues to gro w. Fixed asset purchases and capital lease payments for 2001 are expected to be approximately $6.2 million in the Company’s existing markets, notably We s t e rn and Central E u rope. Acquisitions of related ATM business and investments in new markets in furtherance of the Company’s strategy may re q u i re additional capital expenditures. \n\nBased on the Company’s current business plan and financial projections, the Company expects to continue to reduce operating losses and net cash used in operating activities in 2001. In the Network Services Segment, the Company anticipates that increased transaction levels in its AT M network will result in additional revenues without a corresponding increase in expenses. In addition, the Company expects to further expand its ATM outsourcing services and offer new value-added services, which will provide continued revenue growth without significantly increasing dire c t operating expenses or capital investments. In the Software Solutions Segment, the Company expects that the benefits of a re s t ructuring pro g r a m commenced in the first quarter of 2001 will reduce the operating losses and bring operating costs more in line with anticipated revenues. The Company believes that the credit facility, certain asset sales and cash and cash equivalents will provide the Company with sufficient capital until it achieves positive cash flow. As a result, the Company believes it has sufficient liquidity re s o u rces to meet current and future cash re q u i rements. \n\nCash and Cash Equivalents The decrease of cash and cash equivalents to $7.2 million at December 31, 2000 from $15.0 million at December 31, 1999 is due primarily to the net effects of working capital movements, foreign exchange gains and losses, the settlement of a forw a rd fore i g n exchange contract, private placement of common shares, capital expenditures and capital lease payments, and operating losses for the year ended December 31, 2000. (See Note 21 to the Consolidated Financial Statements – Reconciliation of net loss to net cash used in operating activities and the Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows.) \n\nRestricted Cash Restricted cash decreased to $2.1 million at December 31, 2000 from $10.9 million at December 31, 1999. The majority of restricted cash was held as security with respect to cash provided in Hungary by banks participating in Euro n e t ’s ATM network, to cover\n\n## BA L A N C E SH E E T IT E M S\n\n2 0" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8477440858417323, + "doc_id": "03b50b8b24c317309c3f4b50357b4f1e514bc1579b04fb708c88137800adc014", + "edit_distance": 0.799660441426146, + "f1_score": 0.9737991266375545, + "meteor": 0.8530191739182105, + "precision": 0.9780701754385965, + "pred_md": "70\n\n## Corporate Information\n\n## Directors\n\n## Corporate Directory\n\n## J. Terrence Lanni\n\nDirector/Officer\n\nChairman & Chief Executive Officer\n\n## John T. Redmond\n\nDirector/Officer President & Chief Executive Officer, MGM Grand Resorts, LLC\n\nRobert H. Baldwin Director/Officer President & Chief Executive Officer, Mirage Resorts, Incorporated, President - Project CityCenter\n\nJames J. Murren Director/Officer President, Chief Financial Officer\n\n&Treasurer\n\n## Gary N. Jacobs\n\nDirector/Officer Executive Vice President, General Counsel & Secretary\n\n## Officers\n\n## Glenn D. Bonner\n\nSenior Vice President Chief Information Officer\n\nDaniel J. D'Arrigo Senior Vice President Finance\n\n## Alan Feldman\n\nSenior Vice President Public Affairs\n\n## Bruce Gebhardt\n\nSenior Vice President Global Security\n\n## MGM MIRAGE\n\n3600 Las Vegas Blvd South Las Vegas, NV 89109 1-702-693-7120 www.mgmmirage.com\n\n## Bellagio\n\n3600 Las Vegas Blvd South Las Vegas, NV 89109 1-702-693-7111\n\nReservations\n\n1-702-693-7444\n\n1-888-987-3456\n\nwww.bellagiolasvegas.com\n\n## MGM Grand Las Vegas\n\n3799 Las Vegas Blvd South Las Vegas, NV 89109 1-702-891-1111\n\nReservations\n\n1-702-891-7777\n\n1-800-929-1111\n\nwww.mgmgrand.com\n\n## The Mirage\n\n3400 Las Vegas Blvd South Las Vegas, NV 89109\n\n1-702-791-7111 Reservations 1-702-791-7444 1-800-627-6667\n\nwww.mirage.com\n\n## Treasure Island\n\n3300 Las Vegas Blvd South Las Vegas, NV 89109 1-702-894-7111\n\nReservations\n\n1-702-894-7444\n\n1-800-944-7444\n\nwww.treasureisland.com\n\n## James D. Aljian\n\nDirector Executive, Tracinda Corporation\n\nTerry N. Christensen Director Partner, Christensen, Miller, Fink, Jacobs, Glaser, Weil & Shapiro, LLP\n\nWillie D. Davis Director President & Director, All-Pro Broadcasting, Inc.\n\n## Alexander M. Haig, Jr.\n\nDirector Chairman, Worldwide Associates, Inc.\n\n## Alexis M. Herman\n\nDirector President, Alexis M. Herman, LLC\n\n## Roland Hernandez\n\nDirector\n\nPresident, Hernandez Media Ventures\n\n## Phyllis A. James\n\nSenior Vice President & Senior Counsel\n\n## Cynthia Kiser Murphey\n\nSenior Vice President Human Resources\n\n## Punam Mathur\n\nSenior Vice President Corporate Diversity & Community Affairs\n\n## Kirk Kerkorian\n\nDirector President & Chief Executive Officer, Tracinda Corporation\n\n## George J. Mason\n\nDirector\n\nSenior Managing Director, Bear Stearns & Co., Inc.\n\n## Ronald M. Popeil\n\nDirector Chief Executive Officer, RONCO, Inc.\n\n## Daniel M. Wade\n\nDirector\n\n## Melvin B. Wolzinger\n\nDirector General Partner, W.W. Investment Co.\n\n## Alex Yemenidjian\n\nDirector\n\nChairman & Chief Executive Officer, Metro Goldwyn Mayer Inc.\n\n## Robert C. Selwood\n\nSenior Vice President Accounting\n\nBryan L. Wright Senior Vice President, Assistant General Counsel & Assistant Secretary\n\n## New York-New York Hotel & Casino\n\n3790 Las Vegas Blvd South Las Vegas, NV 89109\n\n1-702-740-6969 Reservations 1-702-740-6900 1-800-693-6763 www.nynyhotelcasino.com\n\n## Primm Valley Resorts\n\nPO Box 95997\n\nLas Vegas, NV 89183 1-702-382-1212\n\nReservations\n\n1-800-FUN-STOP\n\n1-800-386-7867\n\nwww.primmvalleyresorts.com\n\n## The Boardwalk Hotel & Casino\n\n3750 Las Vegas Blvd South Las Vegas, NV 89109\n\n1-702-735-2400 Reservations 1-800-635-4581 www.boardwalklv.com\n\n## MGM Grand Detroit\n\n1300 John C. Lodge Detroit, MI 48226 1-313-393-7777\n\nwww.detroit.mgmgrand.com\n\n## Beau Rivage\n\n875 Beach Blvd Biloxi, MS 39530 1-228-386-7111 1-888-750-7111 Reservations 1-888-595-2534\n\nwww.beaurivage.com\n\n## Monte Carlo\n\n3770 Las Vegas Blvd South Las Vegas, NV 89109 1-702-730-7777 Reservations 1-702-730-7000 1-800-311-8999\n\nwww.monte-carlo.com\n\n## Borgata Hotel Casino & Spa\n\nOne Borgata Way Atlantic City, NJ 08401 1-609-677-1000 1-800-845-0711\n\nwww.theborgata.com", + "recall": 0.9695652173913043, + "true_md": "70\n\nCorporate Information\n\n## Corporate D ir ector y\n\nJ. Terrence Lanni Director/Officer Chairman & Chief Executive Officer\n\n## D ir ectors\n\nNew York-New York Hotel & Casino 3790 Las Vegas Blvd South Las Vegas, NV 89109 1-702-740-6969 Reservations 1-702-740-6900 1-800-693-6763 www.nynyhotelcasino.com\n\nMGM MIRAGE 3600 Las Vegas Blvd South Las Vegas, NV 89109 1-702-693-7120 www.mgmmirage.com\n\nBellagio 3600 Las Vegas Blvd South Las Vegas, NV 89109 1-702-693-7111 Reservations 1-702-693-7444 1-888-987-3456 www.bellagiolasvegas.com\n\nMGM Grand Las Vegas 3799 Las Vegas Blvd South Las Vegas, NV 89109 1-702-891-1111 Reservations 1-702-891-7777 1-800-929-1111 www.mgmgrand.com\n\nPrimm Valley Resorts PO Box 95997 Las Vegas, NV 89183 1-702-382-1212 Reservations 1-800-FUN-STOP 1-800-386-7867 www.primmvalleyresorts.com\n\nBorgata Hotel Casino & Spa One Borgata Way Atlantic City, NJ 08401 1-609-677-1000 1-800-845-0711 www.theborgata.com\n\nThe Boardwalk Hotel & Casino 3750 Las Vegas Blvd South Las Vegas, NV 89109 1-702-735-2400 Reservations 1-800-635-4581 www.boardwalklv.com \n\nThe Mirage 3400 Las Vegas Blvd South Las Vegas, NV 89109 1-702-791-7111 Reservations 1-702-791-7444 1-800-627-6667 www.mirage.com\n\nTreasure Island 3300 Las Vegas Blvd South Las Vegas, NV 89109 1-702-894-7111 Reservations 1-702-894-7444 1-800-944-7444 www.treasureisland.com\n\nMGM Grand Detroit 1300 John C. Lodge Detroit, MI 48226 1-313-393-7777 www.detroit.mgmgrand.com\n\nBeau Rivage 875 Beach Blvd Biloxi, MS 39530 1-228-386-7111 1-888-750-7111 Reservations 1-888-595-2534 www.beaurivage.com\n\nMonte Carlo 3770 Las Vegas Blvd South Las Vegas, NV 89109 1-702-730-7777 Reservations 1-702-730-7000 1-800-311-8999 www.monte-carlo.com\n\nKirk Kerkorian Director President & Chief Executive Officer, Tracinda Corporation\n\nGeorge J. Mason Director Senior Managing Director, Bear Stearns & Co., Inc.\n\nRonald M. Popeil Director Chief Executive Officer, RONCO, Inc.\n\nDaniel M. Wade Director\n\nMelvin B. Wolzinger Director General Partner, W.W. Investment Co.\n\nAlex Yemenidjian Director Chairman & Chief Executive Officer, Metro Goldwyn Mayer Inc.\n\nRobert C. Selwood Senior Vice President Accounting\n\nBryan L. Wright Senior Vice President, Assistant General Counsel & Assistant Secretary\n\nCynthia Kiser Murphey Senior Vice President Human Resources\n\nPhyllis A. James Senior Vice President & Senior Counsel\n\nPunam Mathur Senior Vice President Corporate Diversity & Community Affairs\n\nDaniel J. D’Arrigo Senior Vice President Finance\n\nGlenn D. Bonner Senior Vice President Chief Information Officer\n\nAlan Feldman Senior Vice President Public Affairs\n\nBruce Gebhardt Senior Vice President Global Security\n\n## Officers\n\nRoland Hernandez Director President, Hernandez Media Ventures\n\nAlexis M. Herman Director President, Alexis M. Herman, LLC\n\nAlexander M. Haig, Jr. Director Chairman, Worldwide Associates, Inc.\n\nWillie D. Davis Director President & Director, All-Pro Broadcasting, Inc.\n\nTerry N. Christensen Director Partner, Christensen, Miller, Fink, Jacobs, Glaser, Weil & Shapiro, LLP\n\nJames D. Aljian Director Executive, Tracinda Corporation\n\nJohn T. Redmond Director/Officer President & Chief Executive Officer, MGM Grand Resorts, LLC\n\nRobert H. Baldwin Director/Officer President & Chief Executive Officer, Mirage Resorts, Incorporated, President - Project CityCenter\n\nJames J. Murren Director/Officer President, Chief Financial Officer & Treasurer\n\nGary N. Jacobs Director/Officer Executive Vice President, General Counsel & Secretary" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.020952700598196438, + "doc_id": "4232e47097e6ecfdf53d4097cb90bdd56cc63c31508a2f91a6d3908770a4d1ed", + "edit_distance": 0.8036036036036036, + "f1_score": 0.2032085561497326, + "meteor": 0.16744676297199085, + "precision": 0.12837837837837837, + "pred_md": "£Ó\n\n-glyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman> glyph<c=31,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman> glyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>‡-glyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>\n\n## glyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium> œ““Õ˜ˆV>̈œ˜ÃÊglyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium>˜vÀ>ÃÌÀÕVÌÕÀiÊ\n\nœÊœÌ…iÀÊglyph<c=13,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=31,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>-Ê «ÀœÛˆ'iÀÊV>˜ÊÌÀՏÞÊ'iÈ}˜]ʓ>˜Õv>VÌÕÀiÊ>˜'ÊÃÕ««œÀÌÊV>ÀÀˆiÀÊ>˜'Êi˜ÌiÀ«ÀˆÃiÊV>ÃÃÊ Ê œ““Õ˜ˆV>̈œ˜ÃÊiµÕˆ«“i˜ÌʏˆŽiÊ->˜“ˆ˜>‡-glyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>°Ê V\n\n->˜“ˆ˜>‡-glyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>Ê …>ÃÊ >ʏœ˜}Ê>˜'ÊÀiÃՏÌÇ'ÀˆÛi˜Ê…ˆÃ̜ÀÞÊÃiÀۈ˜}Ê̅iÊVœ““Õ˜ˆV>̈œ˜Ãʈ˜'ÕÃÌÀÞ]Ê«ÀœÛˆ'ˆ˜}Ê ˆ}…‡Àiˆ>LˆˆÌÞÊ܈ÀiiÃÃ]ʜ«ÌˆV>Ê˜iÌܜÀŽˆ˜}]Ê܈Àiˆ˜iÊÌÀ>˜Ã“ˆÃȜ˜Ê>˜'Êi˜ÌiÀ«ÀˆÃiʘiÌܜÀŽˆ˜}ÊÃÞÃÌi“Ã°Ê glyph<c=13,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman> Û i ˜Ê “œÀi]Ê>ÃʘiÜÊÌiV…˜œœ}ˆiÃÊ'iÛiœ«]ʜÕÀÊ«Àœ'ÕVÌÊ«œÀÌvœˆœÊ…>ÃÊiÝ«>˜'i'Ê̜ʈ˜VÕ'iʜ«ÌˆV>Ê Ã܈ÌV…iÃ]Ê܈ÀiiÃÃÊL>ÃiÊÃÌ>̈œ˜Ã]Ê܈Àiˆ˜iÊÃ܈ÌV…iÃ]ÊÀœÕÌiÀÃ]ÊÌÀ>˜ÃViˆÛiÀÃ]ÊÃ>ÌiˆÌiÊÀiViˆÛiÀÃÊ>˜'Ê ,glyph<c=19,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>ÊiµÕˆ«“i˜Ì]Ê>“œ˜}ʜ̅iÀðÊ\"ÕÀʅˆ}…‡iÛiÊœvÊÌiV…˜ˆV>ÊiÝ«iÀ̈ÃiÊ>˜'ʈ˜'ÕÃÌÀÞʎ˜œÜ‡…œÜʓ>ŽiÃÊ ÕÃÊ>ʘ>ÌÕÀ>ÊV…œˆViÊvœÀʏi>'ˆ˜}ÊÌiV…˜œœ}ÞÊVœ“«>˜ˆiÃʈ˜Ê̅iÊVœ““Õ˜ˆV>̈œ˜Ãʓ>ÀŽiÌ«>Vi°\n\n## glyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>\"glyph<c=31,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>*glyph<c=29,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=13,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman> /glyph<c=13,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>Ê - 9 -/glyph<c=13,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=31,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>Ê glyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman> * glyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman> glyph<c=9,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=29,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman> / 9\n\n->˜“ˆ˜>‡-glyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>Ê ˆÃÊ >Ê i>'ˆ˜}Êglyph<c=13,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=31,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>-Ê «ÀœÛˆ'iÀʜv viÀˆ˜}ÊVœ“«iÌiÊi˜'‡Ìœ‡i˜'ʓ>˜Õv>VÌÕÀˆ˜}Ê܏Ṏœ˜ÃÊ̜Ê̅iÊ Vœ““Õ˜ˆV>̈œ˜Ãʈ˜'ÕÃÌÀÞ°Ê7iʓ>˜>}iÊ̅iÊi˜ÌˆÀiÊ«Àœ'ÕVÌʏˆviÊVÞVi]Ê«ÀœÛˆ'ˆ˜}Ê>'Û>˜Vi'Êi˜}ˆ˜iiÀˆ˜}Ê >˜'Ê'iÈ}˜]ÊvՏÊÃÞÃÌi“Ê>ÃÃi“LÞ]ÊÌiÃÌÊ>˜'Ê'iˆÛiÀÞʜvÊVœ“«iÌiÊÃÞÃÌi“ð", + "recall": 0.48717948717948717, + "true_md": "## œ “ “ Õ ˜ ˆ V > Ì ˆ œ ˜ Ã Ê ˜ v À > Ã Ì À Õ V Ì Õ À i Ê\n\nœ Ê œ Ì … i À Ê - Ê « À œ Û ˆ ` i À Ê V > ˜ Ê Ì À Õ  Þ Ê ` i à ˆ } ˜ ] Ê “ > ˜ Õ v > V Ì Õ À i Ê > ˜ ` Ê Ã Õ « « œ À Ì Ê V > À À ˆ i À Ê > ˜ ` Ê i ˜ Ì i À « À ˆ à i Ê V  > Ã Ã Ê Ê V œ “ “ Õ ˜ ˆ V > Ì ˆ œ ˜ Ã Ê i µ Õ ˆ « “ i ˜ Ì Ê  ˆ Ž i Ê - > ˜ “ ˆ ˜ > ‡ - ° Ê \n\n- > ˜ “ ˆ ˜ > ‡ - Ê … > Ã Ê > Ê  œ ˜ } Ê > ˜ ` Ê À i Ã Õ  Ì Ã ‡ ` À ˆ Û i ˜ Ê … ˆ Ã Ì œ À Þ Ê Ã i À Û ˆ ˜ } Ê Ì … i Ê V œ “ “ Õ ˜ ˆ V > Ì ˆ œ ˜ Ã Ê ˆ ˜ ` Õ Ã Ì À Þ ] Ê « À œ Û ˆ ` ˆ ˜ } Ê … ˆ } … ‡ À i  ˆ > L ˆ  ˆ Ì Þ Ê Ü ˆ À i  i à à ] Ê œ « Ì ˆ V >  Ê ˜ i Ì Ü œ À Ž ˆ ˜ } ] Ê Ü ˆ À i  ˆ ˜ i Ê Ì À > ˜ à “ ˆ à à ˆ œ ˜ Ê > ˜ ` Ê i ˜ Ì i À « À ˆ à i Ê ˜ i Ì Ü œ À Ž ˆ ˜ } Ê Ã Þ Ã Ì i “ à ° Ê Û i ˜ Ê “ œ À i ] Ê > Ã Ê ˜ i Ü Ê Ì i V … ˜ œ  œ } ˆ i Ã Ê ` i Û i  œ « ] Ê œ Õ À Ê « À œ ` Õ V Ì Ê « œ À Ì v œ  ˆ œ Ê … > Ã Ê i Ý « > ˜ ` i ` Ê Ì œ Ê ˆ ˜ V  Õ ` i Ê œ « Ì ˆ V >  Ê Ã Ü ˆ Ì V … i à ] Ê Ü ˆ À i  i Ã Ã Ê L > à i Ê Ã Ì > Ì ˆ œ ˜ à ] Ê Ü ˆ À i  ˆ ˜ i Ê Ã Ü ˆ Ì V … i à ] Ê À œ Õ Ì i À à ] Ê Ì À > ˜ à V i ˆ Û i À à ] Ê Ã > Ì i   ˆ Ì i Ê À i V i ˆ Û i À Ã Ê > ˜ ` Ê , Ê i µ Õ ˆ « “ i ˜ Ì ] Ê > “ œ ˜ } Ê œ Ì … i À à ° Ê \" Õ À Ê … ˆ } … ‡  i Û i  Ê œ v Ê Ì i V … ˜ ˆ V >  Ê i Ý « i À Ì ˆ à i Ê > ˜ ` Ê ˆ ˜ ` Õ Ã Ì À Þ Ê Ž ˜ œ Ü ‡ … œ Ü Ê “ > Ž i Ã Ê Õ Ã Ê > Ê ˜ > Ì Õ À >  Ê V … œ ˆ V i Ê v œ À Ê  i > ` ˆ ˜ } Ê Ì i V … ˜ œ  œ } Þ Ê V œ “ « > ˜ ˆ i Ã Ê ˆ ˜ Ê Ì … i Ê V œ “ “ Õ ˜ ˆ V > Ì ˆ œ ˜ Ã Ê “ > À Ž i Ì «  > V i ° \n\n- > ˜ “ ˆ ˜ > ‡ - Ê ˆ Ã Ê > Ê  i > ` ˆ ˜ } Ê - Ê « À œ Û ˆ ` i À Ê œ v v i À ˆ ˜ } Ê V œ “ «  i Ì i Ê i ˜ ` ‡ Ì œ ‡ i ˜ ` Ê “ > ˜ Õ v > V Ì Õ À ˆ ˜ } Ê Ã œ  Õ Ì ˆ œ ˜ Ã Ê Ì œ Ê Ì … i Ê V œ “ “ Õ ˜ ˆ V > Ì ˆ œ ˜ Ã Ê ˆ ˜ ` Õ Ã Ì À Þ ° Ê 7 i Ê “ > ˜ > } i Ê Ì … i Ê i ˜ Ì ˆ À i Ê « À œ ` Õ V Ì Ê  ˆ v i Ê V Þ V  i ] Ê « À œ Û ˆ ` ˆ ˜ } Ê > ` Û > ˜ V i ` Ê i ˜ } ˆ ˜ i i À ˆ ˜ } Ê > ˜ ` Ê ` i à ˆ } ˜ ] Ê v Õ   Ê Ã Þ Ã Ì i “ Ê > à à i “ L  Þ ] Ê Ì i Ã Ì Ê > ˜ ` Ê ` i  ˆ Û i À Þ Ê œ v Ê V œ “ «  i Ì i Ê Ã Þ Ã Ì i “ à ° \n\n## \" * / Ê - 9 - / Ê * / 9\n\n£ Ó \n\n- ‡ -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5195776081934628, + "doc_id": "4ea831177d147cd641c9ff407f22dca0b864ee21aeed16c979ed18e7ba4973a9", + "edit_distance": 0.8095238095238095, + "f1_score": 0.746268656716418, + "meteor": 0.6529850746268657, + "precision": 0.8064516129032258, + "pred_md": "78\n\n## NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\nfor the year ended 31 December 2004\n\n26. Specified Director and Specified Executive Disclosures (continued)\n\n(c) Remuneration of Specified Directors and Specified Executives (continued)\n\nAnnual Report 2004", + "recall": 0.6944444444444444, + "true_md": "for the year ended 31 December 2004\n\n1 No bonuses were attributable to long-term incentive plans.\n\n## 26. Specified Director and Specified Executive Disclosures (continued)\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\n78\n\nNOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STA TEMENTS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9415099872423002, + "doc_id": "63917acc6e5e10737c925fa59bfb2b87690edd473954afd47989e0e8704e4a22", + "edit_distance": 0.05032119914346895, + "f1_score": 0.9932523616734142, + "meteor": 0.9612364048071227, + "precision": 0.9945945945945946, + "pred_md": "SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES\n\nMANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS\n\nmarketing Sprint PCS. If financial difficulties are experienced by Sprint or any Affiliate, it could have an adverse impact on the Company's results. The Company's PCS network is part of Sprint's nationwide wireless network. The network is owned and operated by Sprint and its Affiliates. The financial viability of Sprint and its Affiliates is critical to the success of operating and\n\nThe current competitive nature of the wireless industry may prompt major wireless providers to strive for financial improvements through industry consolidation. Such consolidation could include Sprint. It is not clear to what extent consolidation may occur or which companies will be involved, but certain consolidation transactions may have an adverse impact on the operating results and valuation of the Company's wireless operations.\n\nThe Company's access revenue may be adversely impacted by legislative or regulatory actions that decrease access rates or exempt certain traffic from paying access to the Company's regulated telephone network. The Federal Communications Commission is currently reviewing the issue of Voice Over Internet Protocol (VOIP) as it relates to access charges. An unfavorable finding may have an adverse effect on the Company's telephone operations.\n\nThere has been a trend for incumbent local exchange carriers to see a decrease in access lines due to the effect of wireless and wireline competition, a slow down in the economy, and the elimination of a second line dedicated to dial up Internet as customers migrate to broadband connections. Although the Company has not seen a material reduction in its number of access lines to date, it experienced line decreases in each of the last two quarters. There is a significant risk that this trend could have a material adverse effect on the Company's telephone operations in the future.\n\nOn May 24, 2004, Local Number Portability (LNP) will be required in the Company's local wireline service area. The Company's customers will be able to retain their existing wireline phone number and use it to obtain service from a competing wireline or wireless provider in the service area. At this time, the Company cannot estimate the potential impact on its telephone operations. If a significant number of customers disconnect the Company's service, it will have an adverse impact on the Company's telephone operating results.\n\nThe Company's revenue from fiber leases may be adversely impacted by further erosion in demand or in price competition for these facilities. There is also the potential for additional bankruptcies of the Company's customers. The Company monitors each of its fiber lease customers closely to minimize the risk related to this business.\n\nThe Company operates the cable television system in Shenandoah County, Virginia. The Company has seen increased competition from satellite providers that are larger and have cost advantages over the Company in the procurement of programming. The continued success of the satellite television providers may have an adverse impact on the Company's cable television results.\n\nThe Company currently has a 12-month, $1.2 million contract with the Virginia Department of Transportation (VDOT) to provide 511 Travel services in the I-81 corridor of Virginia. This contract expires in February 2005. VDOT has recently requested a proposal for a three-year contract with two two-year extensions to extend 511 services to the entire state. Although the Company plans to submit a proposal for the new VDOT contract, there is no certainty that the Company will be selected to provide these services after the end of its current contract.\n\nThe Company may not be able to utilize all of its net operating loss carry forwards for taxes in certain states before they expire, resulting in the Company writing off some of its deferred tax assets and impacting its cash position.\n\n## Market Risk\n\nThe Company's market risks relate primarily to changes in interest rates on instruments held for other than trading purposes. Our interest rate risk involves three components, although only one is of any significance at this time. The first component is outstanding debt with variable rates. As of December 31, 2003, the Company's variable rate debt balance was zero. The Company has a variable rate line of credit totaling $0.5 million with SunTrust Banks. The Company's remaining debt has fixed rates through its maturity. A 10.0% decline in interest rates would increase the fair value of the fixed rate debt by approximately $1.1 million, while the estimated current fair value of the fixed rate debt is approximately $42.6 million.\n\nThe second component of interest rate risk is temporary excess cash, primarily invested in overnight repurchase agreements and short-term certificates of deposit and money market funds. The Company currently has approximately $27.9 million of cash equivalents in money market funds, which are earning rates of approximately 1% per year. The cash is currently in short-term investment vehicles that have limited interest rate risk. Management continues to evaluate the most beneficial use of these funds.\n\n55\n\n2003 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n■", + "recall": 0.9919137466307277, + "true_md": "SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS\n\nmarketing Sprint PCS. If financial difficulties are experienced by Sprint or any Affiliate, it could have an adverse impact on the Company’s results. The Company’s PCS network is part of Sprint’s nationwide wireless network. The network is owned and operated by Sprint and its Affiliates. The financial viability of Sprint and its Affiliates is critical to the success of operating and\n\nThe current competitive nature of the wireless industry may prompt major wireless providers to strive for financial improvements through industry consolidation. Such consolidation could include Sprint. It is not clear to what extent consolidation may occur or which companies will be involved, but certain consolidation transactions may have an adverse impact on the operating results and valuation of the Company’s wireless operations.\n\nThe Company’s access revenue may be adversely impacted by legislative or regulatory actions that decrease access rates or exempt certain traffic from paying access to the Company’s regulated telephone network. The Federal Communications Commission is currently reviewing the issue of Voice Over Internet Protocol (VOIP) as it relates to access charges. An unfavorable finding may have an adverse effect on the Company’s telephone operations.\n\nThere has been a trend for incumbent local exchange carriers to see a decrease in access lines due to the effect of wireless and wireline competition, a slow down in the economy, and the elimination of a second line dedicated to dial up Internet as customers migrate to broadband connections. Although the Company has not seen a material reduction in its number of access lines to date, it experienced line decreases in each of the last two quarters. There is a significant risk that this trend could have a material adverse effect on the Company’s telephone operations in the future.\n\nOn May 24, 2004, Local Number Portability (LNP) will be required in the Company’s local wireline service area. The Company’s customers will be able to retain their existing wireline phone number and use it to obtain service from a competing wireline or wireless provider in the service area. At this time, the Company cannot estimate the potential impact on its telephone operations. If a significant number of customers disconnect the Company’s service, it will have an adverse impact on the Company’s telephone operating results.\n\nThe Company’s revenue from fiber leases may be adversely impacted by further erosion in demand or in price competition for these facilities. There is also the potential for additional bankruptcies of the Company’s customers.\n\nThe Company monitors each of its fiber lease customers closely to minimize the risk related to this business.\n\nThe Company operates the cable television system in Shenandoah County, Virginia. The Company has seen increased competition from satellite providers that are larger and have cost advantages over the Company in the procurement of programming. The continued success of the satellite television providers may have an adverse impact on the Company’s cable television results.\n\nThe Company currently has a 12-month, $1.2 million contract with the Virginia Department of Transportation (VDOT) to provide 511 Travel services in the I-81 corridor of Virginia. This contract expires in February 2005. VDOT has recently requested a proposal for a three-year contract with two two-year extensions to extend 511 services to the entire state. Although the Company plans to submit a proposal for the new VDOT contract, there is no certainty that the Company will be selected to provide these services after the end of its current contract.\n\nThe Company may not be able to utilize all of its net operating loss carry forwards for taxes in certain states before they expire, resulting in the Company writing off some of its deferred tax assets and impacting its cash position.\n\nThe Company’s market risks relate primarily to changes in interest rates on instruments held for other than trading purposes. Our interest rate risk involves three components, although only one is of any significance at this time. The first component is outstanding debt with variable rates. As of December 31, 2003, the Company’s variable rate debt balance was zero. The Company has a variable rate line of credit totaling $0.5 million with SunTrust Banks. The Company’s remaining debt has fixed rates through its maturity. A 10.0% decline in interest rates would increase the fair value of the fixed rate debt by approximately $1.1 million, while the estimated current fair value of the fixed rate debt is approximately $42.6 million.\n\nThe second component of interest rate risk is temporary excess cash, primarily invested in overnight repurchase agreements and short-term certificates of deposit and money market funds. The Company currently has approximately $27.9 million of cash equivalents in money market funds, which are earning rates of approximately 1% per year. The cash is currently in short-term investment vehicles that have limited interest rate risk. Management continues to evaluate the most beneficial use of these funds.\n\n55 ■ 2003 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n## Market Risk" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "5ffead54ddd35ef70cfcc919020b8cad0e05375b0e53aa4f573820ef86d3ecbb", + "edit_distance": 0.05032119914346895, + "f1_score": 0.9932523616734142, + "meteor": 0.9612364048071227, + "precision": 0.9945945945945946, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.9919137466307277, + "true_md": "" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "7a231e9b7d841935a142d972ea1c7546d613cba18e301b0e07415f9eb44e3382", + "edit_distance": 0.802158273381295, + "f1_score": 0.3111111111111111, + "meteor": 0.15606454896264882, + "precision": 0.23728813559322035, + "pred_md": "-Փ“>ÀÞʜvÊglyph<c=31,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium>>ÀŽiÌð Êglyph<c=19,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium> Õii'ÊLÞÊVÕÃ̜“iÀÃ½Ê ˜ii'ÃÊ̜ÊÀi'ÕViʜ«iÀ>̈˜}ÊVœÃÌÊ>˜'Ê>VViÃÃʏi>'ˆ˜}‡ i'}iÊ}œL>Ê'iÈ}˜]Êi˜}ˆ˜iiÀˆ˜}]ʓ>˜Õv>VÌÕÀˆ˜}Ê>˜'Ê Êœ}ˆÃ̈VÃÊÃiÀۈViÃ]Ê->˜“ˆ˜>‡-glyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium>glyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium>ÊiÝ«iVÌÃÊ̜ÊvÕÀ̅iÀʈÌÃÊ  ˆ˜'ÕÃÌÀÞʏi>'iÀň«Êˆ˜Êi>V…ÊœvʈÌÃÊÌ>À}iÌʓ>ÀŽiÌð\n\nÓ£\n\n-glyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman> glyph<c=31,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman> glyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>‡-glyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>", + "recall": 0.45161290322580644, + "true_md": "Ó £ - ‡ -\n\n- Õ “ “ > À Þ Ê œ v Ê > À Ž i Ì Ã ° Ê Õ i  i ` Ê L Þ Ê V Õ Ã Ì œ “ i À à ½ Ê ˜ i i ` Ã Ê Ì œ Ê À i ` Õ V i Ê œ « i À > Ì ˆ ˜ } Ê V œ Ã Ì Ê > ˜ ` Ê > V V i Ã Ã Ê  i > ` ˆ ˜ } ‡ i ` } i Ê }  œ L >  Ê ` i à ˆ } ˜ ] Ê i ˜ } ˆ ˜ i i À ˆ ˜ } ] Ê “ > ˜ Õ v > V Ì Õ À ˆ ˜ } Ê > ˜ ` Ê Ê  œ } ˆ Ã Ì ˆ V Ã Ê Ã i À Û ˆ V i à ] Ê - > ˜ “ ˆ ˜ > ‡ - Ê i Ý « i V Ì Ã Ê Ì œ Ê v Õ À Ì … i À Ê ˆ Ì Ã Ê ˆ ˜ ` Õ Ã Ì À Þ Ê  i > ` i À à … ˆ « Ê ˆ ˜ Ê i > V … Ê œ v Ê ˆ Ì Ã Ê Ì > À } i Ì Ê “ > À Ž i Ì Ã °" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9880803503791113, + "doc_id": "0246e606634e0512921483de0557504af17942d05aa5c2cead4331fbf08dac16", + "edit_distance": 0.009389671361502348, + "f1_score": 0.986046511627907, + "meteor": 0.9910752003511433, + "precision": 0.9906542056074766, + "pred_md": "The gross carrying amount and accumulated amortization for definite-lived intangible assets are presented in the table below. The increase in fiscal 2004 relates primarily to the acquisition of $4.3 million of proprietary formulas from Concept Foods, Inc. during the fourth quarter.\n\nAmortization expense for the fiscal years ended October 30, 2004, and October 25, 2003, was $7.1 million and $4.6 million, respectively.\n\nEstimated annual amortization expense (in thousands) for the five fiscal years after October 30, 2004, is as follows:\n\nThe carrying amounts for indefinite-lived intangible assets are presented in the table below. The fiscal 2004 increase is primarily due to the fourth quarter purchase of the Chi-Chi's trademark for $2.2 million.\n\nDuring the fourth quarter of fiscal 2004, the company completed the required annual impairment tests of indefinite-lived intangible assets and goodwill with no material impairment indicated. Useful lives of intangible assets were also reviewed during this process. As a result, a trademark with $0.8 million in carrying value was reclassified from indefinite-lived to definite-lived intangible assets and will be amortized over its remaining useful life beginning in fiscal 2005.\n\n2004 Annual Report\n\n39", + "recall": 0.9814814814814815, + "true_md": "The gross carrying amount and accumulated amortization for definite-lived intangible assets are presented in the table below. The increase in fiscal 2004 relates primarily to the acquisition of $4.3 million of proprietary formulas from Concept Foods, Inc. during the fourth quarter.\n\nAmortization expense for the fiscal years ended October 30, 2004, and October 25, 2003, was $7.1 million and $4.6 million, respectively.\n\nEstimated annual amortization expense (in thousands) for the five fiscal years after October 30, 2004, is as follows:\n\nThe carrying amounts for indefinite-lived intangible assets are presented in the table below. The fiscal 2004 increase is primarily due to the fourth quarter purchase of the Chi-Chi’s trademark for $2.2 million.\n\nDuring the fourth quarter of fiscal 2004, the company completed the required annual impairment tests of indefinite-lived intangible assets and goodwill with no material impairment indicated. Useful lives of intangible assets were also reviewed during this process. As a result, a trademark with $0.8 million in carrying value was reclassified from indefinite-lived to definite-lived intangible assets and will be amortized over its remaining useful life beginning in fiscal 2005.\n\n2004 Annual Report 39" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7888405431504336, + "doc_id": "72b255405bbddb5c4da307efce0ab223398d6585f1bebf47edf6d644a54e0078", + "edit_distance": 0.7274011299435028, + "f1_score": 0.9060402684563759, + "meteor": 0.8033330767707221, + "precision": 0.8970099667774086, + "pred_md": "W E N D E L L P . W E E K S\n\nW E N D E L L P . W E E K S\n\nJ A M E S B . FL A W S\n\n## P R E S I D E N T\n\n## A N D C H I E F O P E R A T I N G O F F I C E R\n\nV I C E C H A I R M A N\n\nA N D C H I E F F I N A N C I A L O F F I C E R\n\nIn our business operations during 2002 we invested a great deal of energy aligning our cost structure and business plans with our priority of restoring profitability. After massive restructuring - following restructuring efforts we launched in 2001-we feel we now have our cost structure and growth strategies in place to accomplish this goal.\n\nWe have re-balanced the company to take advantage of our broad and diverse set of businesses. And in charting our strategies, we have focused on ensuring that both our segments have solid business plans in place, enabling them to grow. Our people are rigorously committed to executing against these plans.\n\nWe take great pride in saying that Corning continues to be a financially sound company, thanks to the aggressive strategies we executed throughout 2002. Although it has been a very painful process, we have dramatically slowed the rate at which we are spending cash. We ended the year with a balance of cash and short-term investments of $2.1 billion. And we have access to $2 billion in credit that we haven't touched - and don't plan to. We also continue to pay down debt each quarter. This, combined with our plan to return to profitability in 2003, gives u a high degree of confidence in our ability to meet any future financial obligations. So, we feel very good about our liquidity position right now.\n\nAs you saw earlier in this report, our Technologies businesses are in markets with solid growth potential. We have leading market positions in attractive businesses … we are ready to capitalize on that position of strength. Meanwhile, we are making these businesses even more cost-effective through significant manufacturing efficiency gains.\n\nIn telecommunications, we are not planning on a market recovery in 2003. We have aligned our cost structure to meet current demand levels after two very tough years of ongoing restructuring.\n\nThe ongoing economic weakness and uncertainty in world events continue to make the overall business environment a volatile one. Still, we have greatly improved our abilit to forecast revenues and expenses quarter-to-quarter, and we are encouraged by the near-term growth potential of our non-telecommunications businesses - especially our liquid-crystal display, environmental and semiconductor businesses. If these markets continue to grow as we expect, we are confident that we will be able to meet our goals. Corning\n\nWe know that our shareholders are most eager to see a greater return on their investment with Corning, and of course our return to profitability will be key to building ba Wall Street's confidence. We are 100 percent committed to reaching that goal of profitability in 2003- and doing so within the rigorous compliance rules by which we have always been guided. Integrity characterizes all our relationships, both inside and outside of Corning, and we will never compromise that foundation of our reputation.\n\nWithin the context of our financial realities, however, we have not lost our sense of self. We will meet our goals…but the path we are taking to get there has been, and will continue to be, consistent with our Values. Integrity … quality … treating individuals with dignity and respect … these are the guiding principles of the decisions we make. We know that in adhering to our Values, solid business performance will follow.\n\n8", + "recall": 0.9152542372881356, + "true_md": "W ENDELL P. W EEKS PRESIDENT AND CHIEF OPERATING OFFICER\n\nJ AMES B. FLAWS VICE CHAIRMAN AND CHIEF FINANCIAL OFFICER\n\nIn our business operations during 2002 we invested a great deal of energy aligning our cost structure and business plans with our priority of restoring profitability. After massive restructuring — following restructuring efforts we launched in 2001—we feel we now have our cost structure and growth strategies in place to accomplish this goal. \n\nWe have re-balanced the company to take advantage of our broad and diverse set of businesses. And in charting our strategies, we have focused on ensuring that both our segments have solid business plans in place, enabling them to grow. Our people are rigorously committed to executing against these plans.\n\nAs you saw earlier in this report, our Corning Technologies businesses are in markets with solid growth potential. We have leading market positions in attractive businesses … we are ready to capitalize on that position of strength. Meanwhile, we are making these businesses even more cost-effective through significant manufactur- ing efficiency gains.\n\nIn telecommunications, we are not planning on a market recovery in 2003. We have aligned our cost structure to meet current demand levels after two very tough years of ongoing restructuring.\n\nWithin the context of our financial realities, however, we have not lost our sense of self. We will meet our goals … but the path we are taking to get there has been, and will continue to be, consistent with our Values. Integrity … quality … treating individuals with dignity and respect … these are the guiding principles of the decisions we make. We know that in adhering to our Values, solid business performance will follow.\n\nWe know that our shareholders are most eager to see a greater return on their investment with Corning, and of course our return to profitability will be key to building back Wall Street’s confidence. We are 100 percent committed to reaching that goal of profitability in 2003 — and doing so within the rigorous compliance rules by which we have always been guided. Integrity characterizes all our relationships, both inside and outside of Corning, and we will never compromise that foundation of our reputation.\n\nThe ongoing economic weakness and uncertainty in world events continue to make the overall business environment a volatile one. Still, we have greatly improved our ability to forecast revenues and expenses quarter-to-quarter, and we are encouraged by the near-term growth potential of our non-telecommunications businesses — especially our liquid-crystal display, environmental and semiconductor businesses. If these markets continue to grow as we expect, we are confident that we will be able to meet our goals.\n\nWe take great pride in saying that Corning continues to be a financially sound company, thanks to the aggressive strategies we executed throughout 2002. Although it has been a very painful process, we have dramatically slowed the rate at which we are spending cash. We ended the year with a balance of cash and short-term investments of $2.1 billion. And we have access to $2 billion in credit that we haven’t touched — and don’t plan to. We also continue to pay down debt each quarter. This, combined with our plan to return to profitability in 2003, gives us a high degree of confidence in our ability to meet any future financial obligations. So, we feel very good about our liquidity position right now.\n\n8" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.3674832241731779, + "doc_id": "53d2264b2329067db332e96516ddd1a3f09b329303177d44ccc9eeef9efbc250", + "edit_distance": 0.525, + "f1_score": 0.689655172413793, + "meteor": 0.7880261479591837, + "precision": 0.5714285714285714, + "pred_md": "## Consolidated Statements of Stockholders' Equity\n\n## For the Years Ended December 31, 2004, 2003 and 2002 (In thousands)\n\nThe accompanying notes are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements.\n\n45", + "recall": 0.8695652173913043, + "true_md": "45\n\nConsolidated Statements of Stockholders’ Equity\n\nFor the Y ears Ended December 31, 2004, 2003 and 2002 (In thousands)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7579797322641441, + "doc_id": "40eb69a0fba30db8d583e0b5540d0612495ab7ee711d4ce81dcadc5c06e2784a", + "edit_distance": 0.20909090909090908, + "f1_score": 0.884848484848485, + "meteor": 0.9180304855104753, + "precision": 0.8588235294117647, + "pred_md": "## P O I N T S I N T I M E\n\n19\n\n93\n\n## DEFINING MOMENTS OF MGM MIRAGE\n\n96 19\n\nTHE NEW YORK-NEW YORK SKYLINE BECOMES\n\nA TOWERING PRESENCE IN THE PORTFOLIO. We acquired Primadonna Resorts to gain full ownership of the spectacular New York-New York as well as three hotel-casinos on the Nevada state line and two championship golf courses.\n\nIT ALL BEGINS WITH MGM GRAND. MGM Grand, the largest hotel-casino in the world, opened to great fanfare. 'The City of Entertainment' redefined the urban resort and provided the foundation for our company's momentous growth.", + "recall": 0.9125, + "true_md": "## POINTS IN TIME\n\n## DEFINING MOMENTS OF MGM MIRAGE\n\nTHE NEW YORK-NEW YORK SKYLINE BECOMES A TOWERING PRESENCE IN THE PORTFOLIO. We acquired Primadonna Resorts to gain full ownership of the spectacular New York-New York as well as three hotel-casinos on the Nevada state line and two championship golf courses.\n\nIT ALL BEGINS WITH MGM GRAND. MGM Grand, the largest hotel-casino in the world, opened to great fanfare. “The City of Entertainment” redefined the urban resort and provided the foundation for our company’s momentous growth.\n\n96\n\n93" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9568515831632428, + "doc_id": "4e2365886dd7e46bb353999a33c8e7ad2e574695fc61ca9f8a3494112ae43184", + "edit_distance": 0.905422446406053, + "f1_score": 0.9917582417582418, + "meteor": 0.7167844220307681, + "precision": 0.9917582417582418, + "pred_md": "## March 22, 2004\n\n## Dear Shareholder:\n\nI am pleased to report on an excellent year for your Company, one in which we achieved strong financial results and reached several significant accomplishments.\n\nOur financial performance was very positive in 2003. For the first time in our history, revenues exceeded $100 million, reaching a total of $105.9 million for the year. While revenues increased by $12.9 million, our operating expenses only increased by $3.6 million, resulting in a $9.3 million improvement in operating income which reached $18.6 million. Helped by the one-time gain from the sale of our cellular partnership interest, our net income was a record $32.1 million. Our net income from continuing operations, which excludes the cellular impact, reached $9.8 million.\n\nWhile the last few years have not been kind to many companies in the telecommunications industry, your Company has not just survived, it has thrived. In addition to the operating results, our balance sheet became even\n\nLETTER TO THE SHAREHOLDERS\n\nChristopher E. French\n\nChristopher E. French\n\nstronger. Total debt was again reduced, decreasing by $12.2 million to $43.3 million as of the end of the year. At the same time, our cash and equivalents at the end of the year was $28.7 million, while total assets were $185.4 million. With our total long-term debt equaling only 23.4 percent of total assets, your Company's balance sheet is envied in an industry where many companies have encountered problems just meeting their debt obligations, much less being able to invest in their future.\n\nAs previously announced, the Company completed the sale of our cellular partnership interest on February 28, 2003. While our participation in cellular, a subset of the wireless industry, had been very profitable, competitive pressures in the wireless industry were having an increasing impact. We had already lost half of our customers, and growth in revenues and profits had begun to slow. Exiting the cellular segment through the sale allows the Company to focus on our significantly larger digital PCS operation. It also made available a large source of cash to finance our other operating needs and future growth opportunities.\n\nOur wireless priorities are now focused on improving results within our PCS operation. After many years of multiplemillion dollar losses, our PCS business produced a slight profit in 2003. While many non-recurring factors contributed to this small profit, the basic operating results within this subsidiary showed significant improvement during 2003. PCS revenues grew 20.8 percent to a total of $67.0 million. Operating income in this subsidiary was $2.9 million, an $8.2 million change from the previous year's loss. Despite these improvements, we still have a long way to go before we are earning a satisfactory return on our investment.\n\nThe Company continued its efforts to successfully grow revenues and profits from other lines of business and by furnishing more and newer services in our enlarged footprint extending beyond Shenandoah County. Revenues from our information access services, which includes contract work on the 511Virginia Travel Project and Internet access services, increased $0.6 million, to $7.0 million during 2003. The Virginia Department of Transportation has requested proposals to continue the 511 project for future years, as well as to expand it to cover all the interstate highways throughout the Commonwealth. The success of the project to date has attracted many other bidders competing against our Company to win the contracts. Our recently launched regional phone book, Shentel Pages, exceeded our initial revenue expectations. It is hoped that a single source of phone listings and Yellow Page advertising, in both printed and online versions, will increasingly be demanded by residents and businesses in the northern Shenandoah Valley region.\n\nWhile our 2003 results have been good, we recognize we still have many challenges to overcome in order to continue our history of profitable long-term growth. Foremost is sustaining profitability in our PCS business which is so heavily dependent on Sprint's decisions and overall success with PCS. Our recently announced amendment to our Sprint agreements will provide some cost savings and allow us greater certainty in fees paid to Sprint. The recently announced merger between two of Sprint's competitors may provide some much needed consolidation in the U.S. wireless industry.\n\n1\n\n2003 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n■", + "recall": 0.9917582417582418, + "true_md": "LETTER TO THE SHAREHOLDERS\n\nChristopher E. French\n\n1 ■ 2003 ANNUAL REPORT\n\nThe Company continued its efforts to successfully grow revenues and profits from other lines of business and by furnishing more and newer services in our enlarged footprint extending beyond Shenandoah County. Revenues from our information access services, which includes contract work on the 511Virginia Travel Project and Internet access services, increased $0.6 million, to $7.0 million during 2003. The Virginia Department of Transportation has requested proposals to continue the 511 project for future years, as well as to expand it to cover all the interstate highways throughout the Commonwealth. The success of the project to date has attracted many other bidders competing against our Company to win the contracts. Our recently launched regional phone book, Shentel Pages, exceeded our initial revenue expectations. It is hoped that a single source of phone listings and Yellow Page advertising, in both printed and online versions, will increasingly be demanded by residents and businesses in the northern Shenandoah Valley region.\n\nWhile our 2003 results have been good, we recognize we still have many challenges to overcome in order to continue our history of profitable long-term growth. Foremost is sustaining profitability in our PCS business which is so heavily dependent on Sprint’s decisions and overall success with PCS. Our recently announced amendment to our Sprint agreements will provide some cost savings and allow us greater certainty in fees paid to Sprint. The recently announced merger between two of Sprint’s competitors may provide some much needed consolidation in the U.S. wireless industry.\n\nOur wireless priorities are now focused on improving results within our PCS operation. After many years of multiple- million dollar losses, our PCS business produced a slight profit in 2003. While many non-recurring factors contributed to this small profit, the basic operating results within this subsidiary showed significant improvement during 2003. PCS revenues grew 20.8 percent to a total of $67.0 million. Operating income in this subsidiary was $2.9 million, an $8.2 million change from the previous year’s loss. Despite these improvements, we still have a long way to go before we are earning a satisfactory return on our investment.\n\nAs previously announced, the Company completed the sale of our cellular partnership interest on February 28, 2003. While our participation in cellular, a subset of the wireless industry, had been very profitable, competitive pressures in the wireless industry were having an increasing impact. We had already lost half of our customers, and growth in revenues and profits had begun to slow. Exiting the cellular segment through the sale allows the Company to focus on our significantly larger digital PCS operation. It also made available a large source of cash to finance our other operating needs and future growth opportunities.\n\nWhile the last few years have not been kind to many companies in the telecommunications industry, your Company has not just survived, it has thrived. In addition to the operating results, our balance sheet became even\n\nstronger. Total debt was again reduced, decreasing by $12.2 million to $43.3 million as of the end of the year. At the same time, our cash and equivalents at the end of the year was $28.7 million, while total assets were $185.4 million. With our total long-term debt equaling only 23.4 percent of total assets, your Company’s balance sheet is envied in an industry where many companies have encountered problems just meeting their debt obligations, much less being able to invest in their future.\n\nOur financial performance was very positive in 2003. For the first time in our history, revenues exceeded $100 million, reaching a total of $105.9 million for the year. While revenues increased by $12.9 million, our operating expenses only increased by $3.6 million, resulting in a $9.3 million improvement in operating income which reached $18.6 million. Helped by the one-time gain from the sale of our cellular partnership interest, our net income was a record $32.1 million. Our net income from continuing operations, which excludes the cellular impact, reached $9.8 million.\n\nI am pleased to report on an excellent year for your Company, one in which we achieved strong financial results and reached several significant accomplishments.\n\nDear Shareholder:\n\nMarch 22, 2004" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "57f5b409b92b08b2f9e474572d8146123215389b23b7eae70291c5d8a478d60d", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999375, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO AND FORMING PART OF THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR THE FINANCIAL YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2000\n\n47", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## NOTES TO AND FORMING PART OF THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR THE FINANCIAL YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2000\n\n47" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9765994096606669, + "doc_id": "841c199f4f50e3a99ad772a549ef86e7cca757b3fbf32b7668d1c80994fde114", + "edit_distance": 0.1872146118721461, + "f1_score": 0.982905982905983, + "meteor": 0.9639595605660506, + "precision": 0.9913793103448276, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO AND FORMING PART OF THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR THE FINANCIAL YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2000\n\n## 20. EXPENDITURE COMMITMENTS (continued)\n\n## 21. EMPLOYEE ENTITLEMENTS AND SUPERANNUATION COMMITMENTS\n\n## Employee Share Option Incentive Plan\n\nA Share Option Incentive Plan has been established where employees of the consolidated entity with appropriate seniority and length of service have been issued with options over ordinary shares of Mermaid Marine Australia Limited.\n\nThe options cannot be transferred and are not quoted on the ASX.\n\nOn 19 June 1999, 730,000 options were issued under this plan to employees. Since the date of issue 115,000 options have expired due to the non exercise of the options by employees who have since left Mermaid's employ. Of the remaining 615,000 ordinary shares under option pursuant to the Employee Option Plan, half (307,500) may be purchased within 12 months of 18 June 2000 at an issue price of 60 cents per share and half (307,500) may be purchased within 12 months of 18 June 2000 at an issue price of 70 cents per share.\n\nThe market value of ordinary Mermaid Marine Australia Limited shares closed at 30 cents on 30 June 2000.", + "recall": 0.9745762711864406, + "true_md": "## 20. EXPENDITURE COMMITMENTS (continued)\n\n## 21. EMPLOYEE ENTITLEMENTS AND SUPERANNUATION COMMITMENTS\n\n## Employee Share Option Incentive Plan\n\nA Share Option Incentive Plan has been established where employees of the consolidated entity with appropriate seniority and length of service have been issued with options over ordinary shares of Mermaid Marine Australia Limited. \n\nThe options cannot be transferred and are not quoted on the ASX.\n\nOn 19 June 1999, 730,000 options were issued under this plan to employees. Since the date of issue 115,000 options have expired due to the non exercise of the options by employees who have since left Mermaid’s employ. Of the remaining 615,000 ordinary shares under option pursuant to the Employee Option Plan, half (307,500) may be purchased within 12 months of 18 June 2000 at an issue price of 60 cents per share and half (307,500) may be purchased within 12 months of 18 June 2000 at an issue price of 70 cents per share.\n\nThe market value of ordinary Mermaid Marine Australia Limited shares closed at 30 cents on 30 June 2000.\n\n52\n\n## NOTES TO AND FORMING PART OF THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR THE FINANCIAL YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2000" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7717677160360278, + "doc_id": "78aa56d2bb7225b1cbed2529a73dc824dbb500936159cd6e3a6fbb78244e0d85", + "edit_distance": 0.7280701754385965, + "f1_score": 0.8814055636896047, + "meteor": 0.720057529943433, + "precision": 0.8361111111111111, + "pred_md": "Specialty Foods\n\nAll Other\n\nThis segment includes the Diamond Crystal Brands (acquired in December 2002), Century Foods International (acquired in July 2003), Hormel HealthLabs, and Specialty Products operating segments. This segment consists of the packaging and sale of various sugar and sugar substitute products, salt and pepper products, dessert mixes, gelatin products, and private label canned meats to retail and foodservice customers. This segment also includes the processing, marketing, and sale of nutritional food products and supplements to hospitals, nursing homes, and other marketers of nutritional products.\n\nThis segment includes the Dan's Prize, Inc., Vista International Packaging, Inc. (Vista), and Hormel Foods International operating segments. These businesses produce, market, and sell beef products and food packaging (i.e., casings for dry sausage), and manufacture, market, and sell company products internationally. This segment also includes various miscellaneous corporate sales. Effective June 30, 2004, the company completed the sale of Vista.\n\n## Fiscal Years 2004 and 2003\n\nFiscal 2004 was an exceptional year for Hormel Foods, with net sales, tonnage volume, and profits all reaching record levels. The improvements in commodity markets that began late in fiscal 2003 continued throughout the year, generating strong operating profit results in the Refrigerated Foods and Jennie-O Turkey Store segments. The first major price increase since fiscal 2000 was implemented in the Grocery Products segment during the second half of the year, which partially offset the impact of higher raw material prices. Additionally, profits were enhanced by the third quarter sale of Vista International Packaging, Inc., the company's food packaging subsidiary.\n\nOverall, the company has been successful with its strategy to create a faster-growing, more diversified product portfolio. Throughout fiscal 2004, the company benefited from its focus on expanding value-added product lines, growth through acquisitions, and new product development. These initiatives have reduced the impact of fluctuating market conditions and have allowed the company to achieve consistently favorable financial results. The company will continue to advance these strategies during fiscal 2005.\n\nThe company's accounting cycle resulted in a 14-week fourth quarter and a 53-week year in fiscal 2004 compared with a 13-week fourth quarter and a 52-week year in fiscal 2003. As the company accounts for its operations on a weekly basis, the additional week is fully loaded with expenses, including salaries and depreciation, and does not provide a disproportionate amount of operating profit on a comparable basis.\n\n18\n\nHormel Foods Corporation\n\n## Consolidated Results\n\nNet Earnings: Net earnings for the fourth quarter of fiscal 2004 were $69,843, a decrease of 0.7 percent compared to earnings of $70,365 for the same period last year. Diluted earnings per share were $.50 and were consistent with the same period last year. Net earnings for the year increased 24.7 percent to $231,663 from $185,779 in fiscal 2003. Diluted earnings per share for the same period increased to $1.65 from $1.33 in the prior year.\n\nAs previously noted, the company experienced infrequently occurring transactions in both fiscal 2004 and 2003. To supplement year-to-year comparisons, we have identified these items as follows: fiscal 2004 net earnings include an $11,470 after-tax gain ($.08 per share) on the sale of Vista International Packaging, Inc.; a $3,963 after-tax gain ($.03 per share) on the sale of the company's investment in Campofrio Alimentacion, S.A.; and a $2,672 ($.02 per share) after-tax charge for early retirement packages related to the company's sales reorganization. Fiscal 2003 net earnings include a $3,868 after-tax gain ($.03 per share) resulting from receipt of a vitamin antitrust settlement at Jennie-O Turkey Store (JOTS) and a $1,131 ($.01 per share) after-tax writedown of assets and other expenses relating to the closing of a JOTS facility in Marshall, Minnesota.\n\nSales: Net sales for the fourth quarter increased to $1,345,216 from $1,169,881 in 2003, an increase of 15.0 percent. Net sales for the twelve months in fiscal 2004 increased 13.8 percent to $4,779,875 compared to $4,200,328 last year. Tonnage volume for the fourth quarter increased 9.3 percent to 990,180 from 906,183 last year. Tonnage volume for the year increased 6.2 percent to 3,611,953 from 3,400,265 in the prior year. Net sales and tonnage volume comparisons for the twelve months were positively impacted by the Diamond Crystal Brands and Century Foods International acquisitions, while the fourth quarter results are comparable to the prior year.\n\nSignificantly improved demand for protein and increased sales of value-added products resulted in sales dollars increasing more rapidly than tonnage gains for both the quarter and fiscal year, most notably in the Refrigerated Foods and Jennie-O Turkey Store segments. The price increase implemented on June 14, 2004, also resulted in increased net sales for the Grocery Products segment during the fourth quarter. Additionally, international sales of commodity pork items improved fiscal 2004 net sales results and offset the impact of divesting Vista International Packaging, Inc. during the third quarter.\n\nGross Profit: Gross profits were $318,882 and $1,121,005 for the quarter and year, respectively, compared to $295,353 and $1,013,153 last year, with increases largely due to easing pricing pressures in the Refrigerated Foods and Jennie-O Turkey Store (JOTS) segments. As a percent of net sales, gross profit decreased to 23.7 and 23.5 percent for the current quarter and year, respectively, compared to 25.2 and 24.1 percent for the prior year periods. Higher raw material costs throughout fiscal", + "recall": 0.9318885448916409, + "true_md": "## Consolidated Results\n\n## Fiscal Years 2004 and 2003\n\n18 Hormel Foods Corporation\n\nGross Profit: Gross profits were $318,882 and $1,121,005 for the quarter and year, respectively, compared to $295,353 and $1,013,153 last year, with increases largely due to easing pricing pressures in the Refrigerated Foods and Jennie-O Turkey Store (JOTS) segments. As a percent of net sales, gross profit decreased to 23.7 and 23.5 percent for the current quarter and year, respectively, compared to 25.2 and 24.1 percent for the prior year periods. Higher raw material costs throughout fiscal\n\nThe company’s accounting cycle resulted in a 14-week fourth quarter and a 53-week year in fiscal 2004 compared with a 13-week fourth quarter and a 52-week year in fiscal 2003. As the company accounts for its operations on a weekly basis, the addi- tional week is fully loaded with expenses, including salaries and depreciation, and does not provide a disproportionate amount of operating profit on a comparable basis.\n\nOverall, the company has been successful with its strategy to cre- ate a faster-growing, more diversified product portfolio. Throughout fiscal 2004, the company benefited from its focus on expanding value-added product lines, growth through acquisitions, and new product development. These initiatives have reduced the impact of fluctuating market conditions and have allowed the company to achieve consistently favorable financial results. The company will continue to advance these strategies during fiscal 2005.\n\nFiscal 2004 was an exceptional year for Hormel Foods, with net sales, tonnage volume, and profits all reaching record levels. The improvements in commodity markets that began late in fiscal 2003 continued throughout the year, generating strong operating profit results in the Refrigerated Foods and Jennie-O Turkey Store seg- ments. The first major price increase since fiscal 2000 was imple- mented in the Grocery Products segment during the second half of the year, which partially offset the impact of higher raw material prices. Additionally, profits were enhanced by the third quarter sale of Vista International Packaging, Inc., the company’s food packag- ing subsidiary.\n\nSignificantly improved demand for protein and increased sales of value-added products resulted in sales dollars increasing more rap- idly than tonnage gains for both the quarter and fiscal year, most notably in the Refrigerated Foods and Jennie-O Turkey Store seg- ments. The price increase implemented on June 14, 2004, also resulted in increased net sales for the Grocery Products segment during the fourth quarter. Additionally, international sales of commod- ity pork items improved fiscal 2004 net sales results and offset the impact of divesting Vista International Packaging, Inc. during the third quarter.\n\nSales: Net sales for the fourth quarter increased to $1,345,216 from $1,169,881 in 2003, an increase of 15.0 percent. Net sales for the twelve months in fiscal 2004 increased 13.8 percent to $4,779,875 compared to $4,200,328 last year. Tonnage volume for the fourth quarter increased 9.3 percent to 990,180 from 906,183 last year. Tonnage volume for the year increased 6.2 percent to 3,611,953 from 3,400,265 in the prior year. Net sales and tonnage volume comparisons for the twelve months were positively impacted by the Diamond Crystal Brands and Century Foods International acquisitions, while the fourth quarter results are comparable to the prior year.\n\nAs previously noted, the company experienced infrequently occurring transactions in both fiscal 2004 and 2003. To supple- ment year-to-year comparisons, we have identified these items as follows: fiscal 2004 net earnings include an $11,470 after-tax gain ($.08 per share) on the sale of Vista International Packaging, Inc.; a $3,963 after-tax gain ($.03 per share) on the sale of the company’s investment in Campofrio Alimentacion, S.A.; and a $2,672 ($.02 per share) after-tax charge for early retirement pack- ages related to the company’s sales reorganization. Fiscal 2003 net earnings include a $3,868 after-tax gain ($.03 per share) resulting from receipt of a vitamin antitrust settlement at Jennie-O Turkey Store (JOTS) and a $1,131 ($.01 per share) after-tax write- down of assets and other expenses relating to the closing of a JOTS facility in Marshall, Minnesota. \n\nNet Earnings: Net earnings for the fourth quarter of fiscal 2004 were $69,843, a decrease of 0.7 percent compared to earnings of $70,365 for the same period last year. Diluted earnings per share were $.50 and were consistent with the same period last year. Net earnings for the year increased 24.7 percent to $231,663 from $185,779 in fiscal 2003. Diluted earnings per share for the same period increased to $1.65 from $1.33 in the prior year." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9539558710912851, + "doc_id": "e8a45fae1f1791b86646e93ea99b1e360a72eacc009f5ab34809f359e2d00e7a", + "edit_distance": 0.2939729397293973, + "f1_score": 0.9666666666666668, + "meteor": 0.9443139593474122, + "precision": 0.9764309764309764, + "pred_md": "30\n\n## Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations\n\nUnited Kingdom. In anticipation of reforms to gambling legislation currently before the United Kingdom's House of Parliament, we have made several strategic agreements in the United Kingdom, including the following:\n\nIn May 2003, we purchased a 25% interest in Metro Casinos Limited, a company which was developing a new casino in Bristol. Metro Casinos Limited is a subsidiary of R J Bown (Holdings) Ltd, the owner of the Westcliff Casino, one of the largest United Kingdom provincial casinos. We received regulatory approval for our investment in Metro Casinos Limited from the Gaming Board for Great Britain in November 2003. The Bristol facility opened in February 2004.\n\nIn October 2003, we entered into an agreement with the Earls Court and Olympia Group, which operates large exhibition and trade show facilities in London, to form a jointly owned company which would develop an entertainment and gaming facility, which we would operate in space leased from the Earls Court and Olympia Group, to complement the existing Olympia facilities. We made a deposit of £2 million ($4 million based on exchange rates at December 31, 2004), which is refundable if proposed gaming law reforms are not implemented by December 2005. Otherwise, the deposit will be applied to the first year's rent on a lease between the new company and the Earls Court and Olympia Group. We would make a nominal equity investment and would provide a loan for half of the estimated development costs. The agreement is subject to the implementation of proposed gaming law reforms and a tax structure acceptable to us, and obtaining required planning and other approvals. We own 82.5% of the entity.\n\nIn November 2003, we entered into an agreement with Newcastle United PLC to create a 50-50 joint venture which would build a major new mixed-use development, including casino development, on a site adjacent to Newcastle's football stadium. Newcastle United PLC contributed the land to the joint venture, and we made an equity investment of £5 million ($10 million based on exchange rates at December 31, 2004), which is refundable if certain conditions have not been met by January 2008. We would develop and operate the complex, as well as own the\n\ncasino development in leased premises within the complex. The complex is expected to be financed through project-specific borrowings. The agreement is subject to the implementation of proposed gaming law reforms and a tax structure acceptable to us, and obtaining required planning and other approvals.\n\nIn February 2004, we announced an agreement in principle with The British Land Company PLC whereby we would operate a casino in leased premises within a newly developed leisure and entertainment complex adjacent to the Meadowhall Shopping Centre in Sheffield. The agreement is subject to the implementation of proposed gaming law reforms and a tax structure acceptable to us, and obtaining required planning and other approvals.\n\nMacau. In June 2004, we entered into a joint venture agreement with Pansy Ho Chiu-king to develop, build and operate a hotel-casino resort in Macau S.A.R. The facility, which will use the 'MGM Grand' name, will be located on a prime waterfront site and will include world-class resort amenities including a hotel, restaurants, entertainment facilities, convention, retail and spa facilities in addition to a significant gaming component. The agreement is subject to, among other things, the approval of the government of Macau S.A.R. and other regulatory approvals as well as the entry into a subconcession agreement with Sociedade de Jogos de Macau (SJM), the holder of one of the existing concessions to operate a casino in Macau. The Company has committed to invest up to $280 million in the entity in the form of capital contributions and shareholder loans. The complete design, timing, cost and scope of the project are at a preliminary stage and are subject to the risks attendant to large-scale projects.\n\nNew York Racing Association. We have an understanding with the New York Racing Association ('NYRA') to manage VLTs at NYRA's Aqueduct horseracing facility in metropolitan New York. We would assist in the development of the facility, including providing project financing, and would manage the facility for a fee. Work was halted on the VLT facility in August 2003 pending the outcome of", + "recall": 0.9570957095709571, + "true_md": "30\n\nManagement’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations\n\nUnited Kingdom. In anticipation of reforms to gambling legislation currently before the United Kingdom’s House of Parliament, we have made several strategic agreements in the United Kingdom, including the following:\n\nIn May 2003, we purchased a 25% interest in Metro Casinos Limited, a company which was developing a new casino in Bristol. Metro Casinos Limited is a sub- sidiary of R J Bown (Holdings) Ltd, the owner of the Westcliff Casino, one of the largest United Kingdom provincial casinos. We received regulatory approval for our investment in Metro Casinos Limited from the Gaming Board for Great Britain in November 2003. The Bristol facility opened in February 2004.\n\nIn October 2003, we entered into an agreement with the Earls Court and Olympia Group, which operates large exhibition and trade show facilities in London, to form a jointly owned company which would develop an entertainment and gaming facility, which we would operate in space leased from the Earls Court and Olympia Group, to complement the existing Olympia facilities. We made a deposit of £2 million ($4 mil- lion based on exchange rates at December 31, 2004), which is refundable if proposed gaming law reforms are not implemented by December 2005. Otherwise, the deposit will be applied to the first year’s rent on a lease between the new company and the Earls Court and Olympia Group. We would make a nominal equity investment and would provide a loan for half of the estimated development costs. The agreement is subject to the implementation of proposed gaming law reforms and a tax structure acceptable to us, and obtaining required planning and other approvals. We own 82.5% of the entity.\n\nIn November 2003, we entered into an agreement with Newcastle United PLC to create a 50-50 joint venture which would build a major new mixed-use develop- ment, including casino development, on a site adjacent to Newcastle’s football stadium. Newcastle United PLC contributed the land to the joint venture, and we made an equity investment of £5 million ($10 million based on exchange rates at December 31, 2004), which is refundable if certain conditions have not been met by January 2008. We would develop and operate the complex, as well as own the\n\nNew York Racing Association. We have an understanding with the New York Racing Association (“NYRA”) to manage VLTs at NYRA’s Aqueduct horseracing facility in metropolitan New York. We would assist in the development of the facility, including providing project financing, and would manage the facility for a fee. Work was halted on the VLT facility in August 2003 pending the outcome of\n\nMacau. In June 2004, we entered into a joint venture agreement with Pansy Ho Chiu-king to develop, build and operate a hotel-casino resort in Macau S.A.R. The facility, which will use the “MGM Grand” name, will be located on a prime water- front site and will include world-class resort amenities including a hotel, restaurants, entertainment facilities, convention, retail and spa facilities in addition to a significant gaming component. The agreement is subject to, among other things, the approval of the government of Macau S.A.R. and other regulatory approvals as well as the entry into a subconcession agreement with Sociedade de Jogos de Macau (SJM), the holder of one of the existing concessions to operate a casino in Macau. The Company has committed to invest up to $280 million in the entity in the form of capital contributions and shareholder loans. The complete design, timing, cost and scope of the project are at a preliminary stage and are subject to the risks attendant to large-scale projects.\n\nIn February 2004, we announced an agreement in principle with The British Land Company PLC whereby we would operate a casino in leased premises within a newly developed leisure and entertainment complex adjacent to the Meadowhall Shopping Centre in Sheffield. The agreement is subject to the implementation of proposed gaming law reforms and a tax structure acceptable to us, and obtaining required planning and other approvals.\n\ncasino development in leased premises within the complex. The complex is expected to be financed through project-specific borrowings. The agreement is subject to the implementation of proposed gaming law reforms and a tax structure acceptable to us, and obtaining required planning and other approvals." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8392798411861987, + "doc_id": "2ad8a25d67dc64451473646d745ff37dbdd28b3a4d5bc3e341149763ef4715d4", + "edit_distance": 0.3148148148148148, + "f1_score": 0.9846153846153847, + "meteor": 0.9824486878078117, + "precision": 0.9846153846153847, + "pred_md": "As discussed in Note 10, the Company has provided a guaranty for up to 50% of the interest and principal payment obligations on the construction financing of the first tower as well as a completion guaranty.\n\nThe Company recorded its share of the results of operations of the unconsolidated affiliates as follows:\n\n## Summarized balance sheet information of the unconsolidated affiliates is as follows:\n\n## Summarized results of operations of the unconsolidated affiliates are as follows:\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n## NOTE 7 - OTHER ACCRUED LIABILITIES\n\n## Other accrued liabilities consisted of the following:\n\n55", + "recall": 0.9846153846153847, + "true_md": "Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n55\n\n## NOTE 7 — OTHER ACCRUED LIABILITIES\n\nAs discussed in Note 10, the Company has provided a guaranty for up to 50% of the interest and principal payment obligations on the construction financing of the first tower as well as a completion guaranty.\n\nThe Company recorded its share of the results of operations of the unconsolidated affiliates as follows:\n\nSummarized balance sheet information of the unconsolidated affiliates is as follows:\n\nSummarized results of operations of the unconsolidated affiliates are as follows:\n\nOther accrued liabilities consisted of the following:" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9007979622277656, + "doc_id": "0a3486d8088373c424f884e358951b94bace91fb706c7729fe84754f7f58fa24", + "edit_distance": 0.11949685534591195, + "f1_score": 0.9349397590361446, + "meteor": 0.9755223665751714, + "precision": 0.9065420560747663, + "pred_md": "## 6\n\n7\n\nTotal income tax expense for continuing operations differs from the amount that would be provided by applying the statutory federal income tax rate to pretax earnings as illustrated below (in thousands):\n\n## S T O C K H O L D E R S ' E Q U I T Y\n\nThe Board of Directors of the Company has at various times authorized repurchases of Company stock in open-market or negotiated transactions at such times and at such prices as management may from time to time decide. The Company has effected a number of open-market or negotiated transactions to purchase its stock during the past three years. These repurchases totaled 20,200, 26,000 and 10,300 shares during the years 2003, 2002 and 2001, respectively, at per share prices ranging from $14.02 to $42.42. As of December 31, 2003, authorization for the repurchase of 94,000 additional shares remained. The Company purchased 173,614 shares of its common stock at $23.00 per share in April 2003 pursuant to a tender offer. The Company purchased 502,229 shares of its common stock at $34.50 per share in December 2001 pursuant to a tender offer. All shares purchased in the tender offers and in the open-market or negotiated transactions became treasury shares upon repurchase by the Company.\n\nIn September 2003, the Company announced that it had adopted a policy for the payment of regular quarterly cash dividends on the Company's common stock. The Company subsequently paid a quarterly cash dividend of $ .12 per common share in both September and December of 2003.\n\nThe Company has a Common Share Purchase Rights Plan, which is intended to protect the interests of stockholders in the event of a hostile attempt to take over the Company. The rights, which are not presently exercisable and do not have any voting powers, represent the right of the Company's stockholders to purchase at a substantial discount, upon the occurrence of certain events, shares of common stock of the Company or of an acquiring company involved in a business combination with the Company. In January 2000, this plan, which was adopted in February 1990, was extended until February 2005.\n\n## I N C O M E P E R S H A R E\n\nThe following is the computation for basic and diluted income per share from continuing operations:\n\nFor the years ended December 31, 2003, 2002 and 2001, options to purchase approximately 25,250, 40,625 and 7,800 shares of common stock, respectively, were not included in the computation of diluted income per share because their effect would have been antidilutive.\n\n17", + "recall": 0.9651741293532339, + "true_md": "Total income tax expense for continuing operations differs from the amount that would be provided by applying the statutory federal income tax rate to pretax earnings as illustrated below (in thousands):\n\nThe Board of Directors of the Company has at various times authorized repurchases of Company stock in open-market or negotiated transactions at such times and at such prices as management may from time to time decide. The Company has effected a number of open-market or negotiated transactions to purchase its stock during the past three years. These repurchases totaled 20,200, 26,000 and 10,300 shares during the years 2003, 2002 and 2001, respectively, at per share prices ranging from $14.02 to $42.42. As of December 31, 2003, authorization for the repurchase of 94,000 additional shares remained. The Company purchased 173,614 shares of its common stock at $23.00 per share in April 2003 pursuant to a tender offer. The Company purchased 502,229 shares of its common stock at $34.50 per share in December 2001 pursuant to a tender offer. All shares purchased in the tender offers and in the open-market or negotiated transactions became treasury shares upon repurchase by the Company. \n\nIn September 2003, the Company announced that it had adopted a policy for the payment of regular quarterly cash dividends on the Company’s common stock. The Company subsequently paid a quarterly cash dividend of $ .12 per common share in both September and December of 2003.\n\nThe Company has a Common Share Purchase Rights Plan, which is intended to protect the interests of stockholders in the event of a hostile attempt to take over the Company. The rights, which are not presently exercisable and do not have any voting powers, represent the right of the Company’s stockholders to purchase at a substantial discount, upon the occurrence of certain events, shares of common stock of the Company or of an acquiring company involved in a business combination with the Company. In January 2000, this plan, which was adopted in February 1990, was extended until February 2005.\n\nThe following is the computation for basic and diluted income per share from continuing operations:\n\nFor the years ended December 31, 2003, 2002 and 2001, options to purchase approximately 25,250, 40,625 and 7,800 shares of common stock, respectively, were not included in the computation of diluted income per share because their effect would have been antidilutive.\n\n17\n\n## INCOME PER SHARE 7\n\n## STOCKHOLDERS’ EQUITY 6" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9325795221223043, + "doc_id": "1998a92e54e92e6b9f80bd32d20c00fe4635ee2b821cb14c87ed7fb85cda4f46", + "edit_distance": 0.05058365758754864, + "f1_score": 0.9692307692307693, + "meteor": 0.9692377003834218, + "precision": 0.972972972972973, + "pred_md": "PERFORMANCE\n\n10\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\n## NISSAN Value-Up: Sustaining Performance\n\nNissan's position today is much different than it was six years ago or even three years ago. In 1999, we were in crisis, and the Nissan Revival Plan was needed to revive our company and build a future. In April 2002, when NISSAN 180 began, we wanted to complete the revival process, with an emphasis on profitable growth.\n\nNISSAN Value-Up is about sustaining performance. About taking all the gains we have made in connecting with our customers, in growing volumes, in creating value, in earning profits, in improving management- and then building upon these gains.\n\nWith NISSAN Value-Up, you will not see a radical break from NISSAN 180. This plan is evolutionary, not revolutionary. We will take the core elements that got us to this point-namely, more revenue, less cost, more quality and speed, and maximized Alliance benefit with Renaultand build upon them.\n\nNISSAN Value-Up has three critical commitments:\n\nProfit: Nissan will maintain the top level of operating profit margin among global automakers for each of the three years of the plan.\n\nVolume: Nissan will achieve global sales of 4.2 million units measured in fiscal 2008.\n\nROIC: Nissan will achieve a 20 percent ROIC on average over the course of the plan, based on the new formula that excludes cash on hand from the denominator.\n\nNISSAN Value-Up will oversee 28 new models, resulting in the start of production of 70 models worldwide, over two dozen more than the 44 production starts during NISSAN 180. Of the 28 new models, 18 will be replacements for existing models and 10 will be completely new 'conquest' models. We will enter more new segments, and we will introduce six models that will delight customers by being completely innovative in their concept and benefits.\n\nWe will pursue four major breakthroughs while implementing NISSAN Value-Up:\n\n- · Our Infiniti luxury brand will extend its reach into new markets such as China and Russia and continue to establish its credibility as a Tier-1 luxury player.\n- · We will develop our Light Commercial Vehicle (LCV) business into a fully competitive global operation through new market and product entries. By 2007, we plan to increase our LCV volume by 40 percent from fiscal 2004 to 434,000 units. During this period, operating margin is targeted to double from 4 percent to 8 percent.\n- · We will take a more efficient global sourcing approach to maximize our opportunities and minimize our overall costs as we grow. Our engineering, production and purchasing functions will continue their acceleration toward being fully integrated global operations.\n- · We will continue to invest in new and emerging markets, including China, India and Russia.", + "recall": 0.9655172413793104, + "true_md": "PERFORMANCE\n\n## NISSAN Value-Up: Sustaining Performance\n\nNissan’s position today is much different than it was six years ago or even three years ago. In 1999, we were in crisis, and the Nissan Revival Plan was needed to revive our company and build a future. In April 2002, when NISSAN 180 began, we wanted to complete the revival process, with an emphasis on profitable growth. \n\nNISSAN Value-Up is about sustaining performance. About taking all the gains we have made in connecting with our customers, in growing volumes, in creating value, in earning profits, in improving management— and then building upon these gains. \n\nWith NISSAN Value-Up, you will not see a radical break from NISSAN 180. This plan is evolutionary, not revolutionary. We will take the core elements that got us to this point—namely, more revenue, less cost, more quality and speed, and maximized Alliance benefit with Renault— and build upon them.\n\nNISSAN Value-Up has three critical commitments:\n\n- Profit: Nissan will maintain the top level of operating profit margin among global automakers for each of the three years of the plan.\n\n- Volume: Nissan will achieve global sales of 4.2 million units measured in fiscal 2008.\n\n- ROIC: Nissan will achieve a 20 percent ROIC on average over the course of the plan, based on the new formula that excludes cash on hand from the denominator.\n\nNISSAN Value-Up will oversee 28 new models, resulting in the start of production of 70 models worldwide, over two dozen more than the 44 production starts during NISSAN 180. Of the 28 new models, 18 will be replacements for existing models and 10 will be completely new “conquest” models. We will enter more new segments, and we will introduce six models that will delight customers by being completely innovative in their concept and benefits.\n\nWe will pursue four major breakthroughs while implementing NISSAN Value-Up: \n\n- • Our Infiniti luxury brand will extend its reach into new markets such as China and Russia and continue to establish its credibility as a Tier-1 luxury player.\n\n- • We will develop our Light Commercial Vehicle (LCV) business into a fully competitive global operation through new market and product entries. By 2007, we plan to increase our LCV volume by 40 percent from fiscal 2004 to 434,000 units. During this period, operating margin is targeted to double from 4 percent to 8 percent.\n\n- • We will take a more efficient global sourcing approach to maximize our opportunities and minimize our overall costs as we grow. Our engineering, production and purchasing functions will continue their acceleration toward being fully integrated global operations.\n\n- • We will continue to invest in new and emerging markets, including China, India and Russia.\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 10" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9275986389682794, + "doc_id": "f1068472884498de4b4a6649db9877783ec0a8b97e0ce0b8459a89eb91aa8c2b", + "edit_distance": 0.6440677966101694, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9619605704575444, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Corporate Headquarters\n\nEuronet Worldwide 4601 College Boulevard, Suite 300 Leawood, Kansas 66211 Tel: 913-327-4200 Fax: 913-327-1921\n\n## European Headquarters\n\nEuronet Worldwide\n\nHorvát u. 14-24.\n\n1027 Budapest, Hungary\n\nTel: 36-1-224-1000\n\nFax: 36-1-224-1013\n\n© 2001 Euronet Worldwide 021 03/01 All trademarks are property of their respective owners.\n\nwww.euronetworldwide.com", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Euronet Worldwide Horvát u. 14-24. 1027 Budapest, Hungary Tel: 36-1-224-1000 Fax: 36-1-224-1013\n\nEuronet Worldwide 4601 College Boulevard, Suite 300 Leawood, Kansas 66211 Tel: 913-327-4200 Fax: 913-327-1921\n\n© 2001 Euronet Worldwide 021 03/01 All trademarks are property of their respective owners.\n\nwww.euronetworldwide.com\n\n## European Headquarters\n\n## Corporate Headquarters" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8949276135646199, + "doc_id": "9cba7d4a01825ed5e7b6e852f02194b713bb0f2bfa6257b5fe124c58a6f2e5d8", + "edit_distance": 0.07194244604316546, + "f1_score": 0.9300911854103342, + "meteor": 0.9333509279137768, + "precision": 0.9503105590062112, + "pred_md": "T he stock market meltdown of 2001 sent a lot of people running for cover-but not the financial professionals who work with PLANCO, a wholly owned subsidiary of The Hartford that wholesales our annuities, mutual funds and other financial services products.\n\nDespite a painful combination of recession and terrorism, PLANCO never wavered in its confidence in long-term economic growth or in its commitment to the brokers and other intermediaries it serves. And throughout 2001, the industry's leading wholesaler of annuities shared its unshakeable optimism and strengthened its partnerships with more than 153,000 financial advisors.\n\nIt's no accident that PLANCO, which The Hartford acquired in 1998, is the industry leader, as well as a trusted wholesaler of mutual funds, 401(k) plans and\n\nsingle-premium variable life. When it comes to supporting financial professionals, PLANCO does it right and does it often-especially during the most trying times.\n\nPLANCO wholesalers spent the latter part of 2001 reminding financial professionals that every 20th century downturn gave rise to a prolonged recovery, and urged them to think ahead to the first recovery of the 21st century. Within two weeks after the Sept. 11 tragedies, thousands of those professionals received a new brochure from PLANCO titled 'From Crisis to Recovery.' It outlined the history of the bull markets that followed World War II, the Cuban missile crisis, the Iran hostage crisis and the Persian Gulf War, demonstrating the market's resilience and ability to bounce back from a national crisis.", + "recall": 0.9107142857142857, + "true_md": "T he stock market meltdown of 2001 sent a lot of people running for cover—but not the financial professionals who work with PLANCO, a wholly owned subsidiary of The Hartford that wholesales our annuities, mutual funds and other financial services products.\n\nDespite a painful combination of recession and terrorism, PLANCO never wavered in its confidence in long-term economic growth or in its commitment to the brokers and other intermediaries it serves. And throughout 2001, the industry’s leading wholesaler of annuities shared its unshakeable optimism and strengthened its partnerships with more than 153,000 financial advisors.\n\nIt’s no accident that PLANCO, which The Hartford acquired in 1998, is the industry leader, as well as a trusted wholesaler of mutual funds, 401(k) plans and \n\nsingle-premium variable life. When it comes to support- ing financial professionals, PLANCO does it right and does it often—especially during the most trying times.\n\nPLANCO wholesalers spent the latter part of 2001 reminding financial professionals that every 20th cen- tury downturn gave rise to a prolonged recovery, and urged them to think ahead to the first recovery of the 21st century. Within two weeks after the Sept. 11 tragedies, thousands of those professionals received a new brochure from PLANCO titled “From Crisis to Recovery.” It outlined the history of the bull markets that followed World War II, the Cuban missile crisis, the Iran hostage crisis and the Persian Gulf War, demon- strating the market’s resilience and ability to bounce back from a national crisis.\n\nattitude" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.2717162668121464, + "doc_id": "f8d8f50ea11522dd98bce3fc97566412f211e3c461dcfd8419df2317729f5f8b", + "edit_distance": 0.7027027027027027, + "f1_score": 0.6153846153846154, + "meteor": 0.696059431524548, + "precision": 0.5, + "pred_md": "C O N S O L I D A T E D B A L A N C E S H E E T S\n\nThe accompanying notes are an integral part of these statements.\n\n9", + "recall": 0.8, + "true_md": "CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEETS\n\n9\n\nThe accompanying notes are an integral part of these statements." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8856285500934094, + "doc_id": "d14482cfee6e453c1daf792a72e51ab12ed91adc12adbcedc4c5e284612be818", + "edit_distance": 0.16304347826086957, + "f1_score": 0.9189189189189189, + "meteor": 0.9310941671568851, + "precision": 0.9066666666666666, + "pred_md": "'The response of our people to the Moomba incident and rebuild was truly outstanding. With this behind us, we are now focused on continuing to extract value from our legacy assets while preparing to bring our new growth projects, such as Mutineer-Exeter, Oyong and Casino, into production. '\n\nJON YOUNG\n\nExecutive Vice President Operations\n\nStewart Duncan, Environmental Adviser, and Melanie Brown, Lead Specialist Drilling Engineer, inspecting coiled tubing underbalanced drilling operations, Cooper Basin, central Australia.\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\n13", + "recall": 0.9315068493150684, + "true_md": "‘The response of our people to the Moomba incident and rebuild was truly outstanding. With this behind us, we are now focused on continuing to extract value from our legacy assets while preparing to bring our new growth projects, such as Mutineer-Exeter, Oyong and Casino, into production.’\n\nExecutive Vice President Operations \n\n## JON YOUNG\n\nStewart Duncan, Environmental Adviser, and Melanie Brown, Lead Specialist Drilling Engineer, inspecting coiled tubing underbalanced drilling operations, Cooper Basin, central Australia." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8756934922248734, + "doc_id": "e6932b219d4f5a24c864894c904ccd16d1467edd3cbb10c7ac370715ac5c4ce6", + "edit_distance": 0.10869565217391304, + "f1_score": 0.9041095890410958, + "meteor": 0.8951445516159283, + "precision": 0.9166666666666666, + "pred_md": "'We will continue to pursue opportunities to grow and enhance shareholder value. We plan to actively seek strategic acquisitions; look for additional branch locations in highergrowth areas to expand our existing banks; and increase our mortgage and .brokerage operations.'", + "recall": 0.8918918918918919, + "true_md": "“We will continue to pursue opportunities to grow and enhance shareholder value. We plan to actively seek strategic acquisitions; look for additional branch locations in higher- growth areas to expand our existing banks; and increase our mortgage and .brokerage operations.”" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9304781730151119, + "doc_id": "1a1c83ac14934286fbb5ec11f9243954f04e1a2febda8cd7483102b2947df1c2", + "edit_distance": 0.6378205128205128, + "f1_score": 0.9679715302491102, + "meteor": 0.8997855298288615, + "precision": 0.9784172661870504, + "pred_md": "The company has commitments to expend approximately $57.7 million to complete construction in progress at various locations as of October 30, 2004.\n\nAs a condition to the sale of Vista International Packaging, Inc., the company has contracted to continue purchasing specified amounts of packaging materials over the next seven years. The contracted amounts approximate historical purchases of those items and result in a maximum obligation of $30.8 million if those purchasing levels are not attained.\n\nThe company is involved, on an ongoing basis, in litigation arising in the ordinary course of business. In the opinion of management, the outcome of litigation currently pending will not materially affect the company's results of operations, financial condition, or liquidity.\n\n## > note I\n\n## Stock Options\n\nThe company has stock option plans for employees and nonemployee directors. The company's policy is to grant options with the exercise price equal to the market price of the common stock on the date of grant. Options vest over periods ranging from six months to four years and expire ten years after the date of the grant.\n\nFollowing is a summary of stock option activity:\n\nOptions exercisable are as follows:\n\n44\n\nHormel Foods Corporation\n\nExercise prices and remaining contractual lives for options outstanding and exercisable at October 30, 2004, are as follows:\n\nPro forma information regarding net earnings and earnings per share is required by SFAS No. 123, 'Accounting for Stock-Based Compensation,' assuming the company accounted for all its employee stock options using the fair value method and is presented in Note A. The fair value of options was estimated at the date of the grant using the Black-Scholes option-pricing model with the following weighted-average assumptions for fiscal 2004, 2003, and 2002, respectively: risk-free interest rate of 3.9%, 3.9%, and 4.7%; dividend yield of 1.8%, 1.8%, and 1.8%; expected volatility of 24.4%, 25.8%, and 25.2%; and expected option life of seven years. The weighted-average fair value of options granted in fiscal 2004, 2003, and 2002 were $7.31, $6.27, and $7.74, respectively.\n\nThe number of shares available for future grants, in thousands, was 3,610 at October 30, 2004, 4,796 at October 25, 2003, and 5,986 at October 26, 2002.\n\n## > note J\n\n## Derivatives and Hedging\n\nThe company uses hedging programs to manage price risk associated with commodity purchases and foreign currency transactions. These programs utilize futures contracts to manage the company's exposure to price fluctuations in these markets.\n\nCash Flow Hedge: The company from time to time utilizes corn and soybean meal futures to offset the price fluctuation in the company's future direct grain purchases. The company also utilizes currency futures contracts to reduce its exposure to fluctuations in foreign currencies related to the receipt of royalties that are computed in British pounds. The futures contracts are designated and accounted for as cash flow hedges, and the company measures the effectiveness of the hedges on a regular basis. The company has determined its hedges to be highly effective. Effective gains or losses related to these cash flow hedges are reported as other comprehensive income (loss) and reclassified into earnings, through cost of products sold (corn futures) or net", + "recall": 0.9577464788732394, + "true_md": "The company has commitments to expend approximately $57.7 million to complete construction in progress at various locations as of October 30, 2004.\n\nAs a condition to the sale of Vista International Packaging, Inc., the company has contracted to continue purchasing specified amounts of packaging materials over the next seven years. The contracted amounts approximate historical purchases of those items and result in a maximum obligation of $30.8 million if those purchasing levels are not attained.\n\nThe company is involved, on an ongoing basis, in litigation arising in the ordinary course of business. In the opinion of management, the outcome of litigation currently pending will not materially affect the company’s results of operations, financial condition, or liquidity.\n\nThe company has stock option plans for employees and non- employee directors. The company’s policy is to grant options with the exercise price equal to the market price of the common stock on the date of grant. Options vest over periods ranging from six months to four years and expire ten years after the date of the grant.\n\nFollowing is a summary of stock option activity:\n\nCash Flow Hedge: The company from time to time utilizes corn and soybean meal futures to offset the price fluctuation in the company’s future direct grain purchases. The company also utilizes currency futures contracts to reduce its exposure to fluctu- ations in foreign currencies related to the receipt of royalties that are computed in British pounds. The futures contracts are desig- nated and accounted for as cash flow hedges, and the company measures the effectiveness of the hedges on a regular basis. The company has determined its hedges to be highly effective. Effective gains or losses related to these cash flow hedges are reported as other comprehensive income (loss) and reclassified into earnings, through cost of products sold (corn futures) or net\n\nThe company uses hedging programs to manage price risk associated with commodity purchases and foreign currency transactions. These programs utilize futures contracts to manage the company’s exposure to price fluctuations in these markets.\n\nThe number of shares available for future grants, in thousands, was 3,610 at October 30, 2004, 4,796 at October 25, 2003, and 5,986 at October 26, 2002.\n\nPro forma information regarding net earnings and earnings per share is required by SFAS No. 123, “Accounting for Stock-Based Compensation,” assuming the company accounted for all its employee stock options using the fair value method and is pre- sented in Note A. The fair value of options was estimated at the date of the grant using the Black-Scholes option-pricing model with the following weighted-average assumptions for fiscal 2004, 2003, and 2002, respectively: risk-free interest rate of 3.9%, 3.9%, and 4.7%; dividend yield of 1.8%, 1.8%, and 1.8%; expected volatility of 24.4%, 25.8%, and 25.2%; and expected option life of seven years. The weighted-average fair value of options granted in fiscal 2004, 2003, and 2002 were $7.31, $6.27, and $7.74, respectively.\n\nExercise prices and remaining contractual lives for options outstanding and exercisable at October 30, 2004, are as follows:\n\n## > note J\n\n## > note I\n\n## Stock Options\n\n## Derivatives and Hedging\n\nOptions exercisable are as follows:\n\n44 Hormel Foods Corporation" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7845636281715523, + "doc_id": "6ceb7d0ff45c4a0ed11a5bd8a1823de2c1c15bae1cb0325aab7893b5532e8b01", + "edit_distance": 0.12365591397849462, + "f1_score": 0.9122807017543859, + "meteor": 0.8806213625204419, + "precision": 0.9430051813471503, + "pred_md": "more incentive to look to The Hartford for the right products to offer their clients.\n\nThe Hartford's Group Benefits Division's (GBD) Producer View Web portal enables group benefits brokers to manage their books of business and track commissions and premium payments online. It's also a resource for product brochures and other marketing material. GBD's Employer View portal meets benefits managers' increasing demands for self-service. In 2001 GBD added online billing capability to the portal, which also features access to forms and status reports on premium payments and claims, among other functions.\n\nThe property-casualty operation's Electronic Business Center (EBC) has transformed the way agents do business. They can obtain quotes almost instantly, check billing and loss information, track claims payments and perform a host of other daily tasks. Because it's their virtual back office, agents have more time to do what's right for them: build their business. The EBC is proving especially valuable in the high-growth smallbusiness market, where service is as important as price.\n\nThe EBC saves hours of administrative time, allowing agents to sell commercial insurance products much more profitably.\n\nThe EBC also came into its own as a decision-support tool in 2001. Among other new features, its scoring tool evaluates potential small-business customers based on factors such as the number of employees and the size and type of the business. The score helps identify businesses The Hartford is likely to accept and minimizes the complexity of agents' decisions.\n\nTechnology introduced in 2001 also enhanced customers' interaction with our personal lines operation. Computer-telephony integration (CTI) at call centers immediately directs calls to the right customer service representative based on whether the caller is an auto or homeowner's policyholder. CTI also automatically calls up the customer's record on the customer service representative's screen so service is faster and doing business is easier-the embodiment of The Hartford Experience.", + "recall": 0.883495145631068, + "true_md": "more incentive to look to The Hartford for the right products to offer their clients. \n\nThe Hartford’s Group Benefits Division’s (GBD) Producer View Web portal enables group benefits bro- kers to manage their books of business and track com- missions and premium payments online. It’s also a resource for product brochures and other marketing material. GBD’s Employer View portal meets benefits managers’ increasing demands for self-service. In 2001 GBD added online billing capability to the portal, which also features access to forms and status reports on pre- mium payments and claims, among other functions. \n\nThe property-casualty operation’s Electronic Business Center (EBC) has transformed the way agents do business. They can obtain quotes almost instantly, check billing and loss information, track claims pay- ments and perform a host of other daily tasks. Because it’s their virtual back office, agents have more time to do what’s right for them: build their business. The EBC is proving especially valuable in the high-growth small- business market, where service is as important as price.\n\nThe EBC saves hours of administrative time, allowing agents to sell commercial insurance products much more profitably.\n\nThe EBC also came into its own as a decision-sup- port tool in 2001. Among other new features, its scoring tool evaluates potential small-business customers based on factors such as the number of employees and the size and type of the business. The score helps identi- fy businesses The Hartford is likely to accept and mini- mizes the complexity of agents’ decisions. \n\nTechnology introduced in 2001 also enhanced customers’ interaction with our personal lines opera- tion. Computer-telephony integration (CTI) at call cen- ters immediately directs calls to the right customer service representative based on whether the caller is an auto or homeowner’s policyholder. CTI also automati- cally calls up the customer’s record on the customer service representative’s screen so service is faster and doing business is easier—the embodiment of The Hartford Experience." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8388462420622889, + "doc_id": "fcdf756e50308971430cccdcd99bfc280593d10328e943c8d29ba5221c6a7572", + "edit_distance": 0.20261437908496732, + "f1_score": 0.942857142857143, + "meteor": 0.929211424759808, + "precision": 0.9649122807017544, + "pred_md": "80\n\n## NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\nfor the year ended 31 December 2004\n\n## 26. Specified Director and Specified Executive Disclosures (continued)\n\n## (e) Equity Holdings (continued)\n\n## (f) Loans and Other Transactions\n\n## Loans\n\nThere have been no loans outstanding at any time throughout the year with any Specified Director or Specified Executive.\n\n## Other Transactions with the Company or its Controlled Entities\n\nAgreements exist with the non-executive Directors appointed prior to 1 January 2004 providing for the payment of a sum on retirement from office as a Director in accordance with shareholder approval at the 1989 Annual General Meeting. From 30 June 2004 the retirement allowances ceased to accrue.\n\nThe transactions referred to above occurred on terms no more favourable than would have been adopted if dealing at arm's length, do not have the potential to affect adversely decisions about the allocation of scarce resources and are trivial in nature.\n\n## 28. Segment Information\n\nSegment results, assets and liabilities include items directly attributable to a segment as well as those that can be allocated on a reasonable basis. Unallocated items mainly comprise dividend revenue, interest-earning assets and revenue, interest-bearing loans, borrowings and expenses, and corporate assets and liabilities.\n\nSegment capital expenditure is the total cost incurred during the period to acquire segment assets that are expected to be used for more than one period.\n\n## Geographic segments\n\nThe Santos Group operates primarily in Australia but also has international operations in the United States, Papua New Guinea, Indonesia and Egypt.\n\nAnnual Report 2004", + "recall": 0.9217877094972067, + "true_md": "## NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STA TEMENTS\n\nfor the year ended 31 December 2004\n\n## 26. Specified Director and Specified Executive Disclosures (continued)\n\n## (e) Equity Holdings (continued)\n\n## (f) Loans and Other Transactions\n\n## Loans\n\n## Other Transactions with the Company or its Controlled Entities\n\n## 28. Segment Information\n\n## Geographic segments\n\nThere have been no loans outstanding at any time throughout th year with any Specified Director or Specified Executive.\n\nAgreements exist with the non-executive Directors appointed prior to 1 Ja nuary 2004 providing for the payment of a sum on retirement from office as a Director in accordance with shareholder approval at th 1989 Annual General Meeting. From 30 June 2004 the retirement allowances ceased to accrue.\n\nThe transactions referred to above occurred on terms no more favourable than would have been adopted if dealing at arm’s length, do not have the potential to affect adversely decisions about the allocation of scarce r esources and are trivial in nature.\n\nThe auditors ceased providing taxation services from 31 December 2004.\n\nSegment results, assets and liabilities include items directly attributable to a segment as well as those that can be allocated on a reasonable basis.\n\nUnallocated items mainly comprise dividend revenue, interest-earnin assets and revenue, interest-bearing loans, borrowings and expenses, and corporate assets and liabilities.\n\nSegment capital expenditure is the total cost incurred during the period to acquir e segment assets that are expected to be used for more than one period.\n\nThe Santos Group operates primarily in Australia but also has international operations in the United States, Papua New Guinea, Indonesia and Egypt.\n\n80\n\nAnnual Report 2004" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "d68a78612164005ba3fc9c16a4bc01ac400c9af434e03f93e8346f050e519bcb", + "edit_distance": 0.8636363636363636, + "f1_score": 0.2727272727272727, + "meteor": 0.15471813725490197, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## financial\n\n## highlights", + "recall": 0.15789473684210525, + "true_md": "## financial highlights\n\n*53 weeks\n\n**See page 18 for a summary of non-operating items under consolidated results." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9109603214522787, + "doc_id": "3bb3ed4289febb7401a8e9c053c2f183d777b0108736cf872857fe8008927560", + "edit_distance": 0.5446428571428571, + "f1_score": 0.958904109589041, + "meteor": 0.8655076585799274, + "precision": 0.958904109589041, + "pred_md": "## we're serving up new ideas that\n\n## make it better\n\n- > From new flavors to new packaging, innovation keeps Hormel Foods brands fresh, relevant and preferred. In fact, products that are less than five years old represented 22 percent of our total sales in fiscal 2004.\n\n## new ideas in dining out\n\nYou don't have to visit the grocery store to enjoy some of our best ideas, just head to your favorite restaurant. Hormel Foods Foodservice business has grown by recognizing diners' love of bold, unique flavors. We provide chefs nationwide with our café h family of high-quality meat and ethnic sauce entrees, including the newest choice, chicken tinga. The café h line of products reported explosive growth of 157 percent in fiscal 2004.\n\n## keeping our favorites young\n\nDelighting consumers is a continuous process, even for our oldest and most popular brands. Every day Hormel Foods works to keep our brands fresh and relevant, while preserving the taste and performance of everyone's favorites. Recent updates include handy SPAM Singles, which debuted in four test markets during fiscal 2004 and will be introduced in several additional markets during 2005.\n\n10\n\nHormel Foods Corporation", + "recall": 0.958904109589041, + "true_md": "## new ideas in dining out\n\nYou don’t have to visit the grocery store to enjoy some of our best ideas, just head to your favorite restaurant. Hormel Foods Foodservice business has grown by recognizing diners’ love of bold, unique flavors. We provide chefs nationwide with our café h family of high-quality meat and ethnic sauce entrees, including the newest choice, chicken tinga. The café h line of products reported explosive growth of 157 percent in fiscal 2004.\n\n## keeping our favorites young\n\nDelighting consumers is a continuous process, even for our oldest and most popular brands. Every day Hormel Foods works to keep our brands fresh and relevant, while preserving the taste and performance of everyone’s favorites. Recent updates include handy SPAM Singles, which debuted in four test markets during fiscal 2004 and will be introduced in several additional markets during 2005.\n\nwe’re serving up\n\n## new ideas that make it better\n\n10 Hormel Foods Corporation\n\n- > From new flavors to new packaging, innovation keeps Hormel Foods brands fresh, relevant and preferred. In fact, products that are less than five years old represented 22 percent of our total sales in fiscal 2004." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8382456355976833, + "doc_id": "6075685bc39e08298e2e30cf46c968915d8ca428f419e2d2072dd065e63d82aa", + "edit_distance": 0.7746077032810271, + "f1_score": 0.9142857142857143, + "meteor": 0.7786253519608499, + "precision": 0.8707482993197279, + "pred_md": "20\n\n## Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations\n\n## RESULTS OF OPERATIONS\n\nAt December 31, 2004, our operations consisted of 11 wholly-owned casino resorts and 50% investments in two other casino resorts, including:\n\nLas Vegas, Nevada:\n\nOther:\n\nBellagio, MGM Grand Las Vegas, The Mirage, TI, New YorkNew York, Boardwalk, and Monte Carlo (50% owned).\n\nThe Primm Valley Resorts (Buffalo Bill's, Primm Valley Resort and Whiskey Pete's) in Primm, Nevada; Beau Rivage in Biloxi, Mississippi; MGM Grand Detroit; Borgata (50% owned) in Atlantic City, New Jersey.\n\nWe operate in one segment, the operation of casino resorts, which includes offering gaming, hotel, dining, entertainment, retail and other resort amenities. Slightly over half of our net revenues are derived from gaming activities, a lower percentage than many of our competitors, as our operating philosophy is to provide a complete resort experience for our guests, including non-gaming amenities which command premium prices based on their quality.\n\nWe generate a majority of our net revenues and operating income from our Las Vegas Strip resorts. In 2004, over 75% of our net revenues and operating income was generated by wholly-owned Las Vegas Strip resorts. We believe that we own the premier casino resorts on the Las Vegas Strip, and a main focus of our strategy is to continually reinvest in these resorts to maintain that competitive advantage. Our concentration on the Las Vegas Strip exposes us to certain risks outside of our control, such as competition from other Las Vegas Strip resorts as well as new or expanded resorts in Las Vegas, including Wynn Las Vegas expected to open in 2005, and the impact from potential expansion of gaming in California. This concentration also exposes us to risks related to tourism and the general economy, including national and global economic conditions and terrorist attacks or other global events.\n\n## Key Performance Indicators\n\nAs a resort-based company, our operating results are highly dependent on the volume of customers at our resorts, which in turn impacts the price we can charge for our hotel rooms and other amenities. We also generate a significant portion of our operating income from the high-end gaming segment, which can cause variability in our results. Key performance indicators related to revenue are:\n\n- · Gaming revenue indicators - table games drop and slot handle (volume indicators); 'win' or 'hold' percentage, which is not fully controllable by us. Our normal table games win percentage is in the range of 18% to 22% of table games drop and our normal slot win percentage is in the range of 6% to 7% of slot handle;\n- · Hotel revenue indicators - hotel occupancy (volume indicator); average daily rate ('ADR', price indicator); revenue per available room ('REVPAR'), a summary measure of hotel results, combining ADR and occupancy rate.\n\nMost of our revenue is essentially cash-based, through customers wagering with cash or paying for non-gaming services with cash or credit cards. Our resorts, like many in the industry, generate significant operating cash flow. Our industry is capital intensive and we rely heavily on the ability of our resorts to generate operating cash flow to repay debt financing, fund maintenance capital expenditures and provide excess cash for future development.\n\nOur results of operations do not tend to be seasonal in nature, though a variety of factors can affect the results of any interim period, including the timing of major Las Vegas conventions, the amount and timing of marketing and special events for our high-end customers, and the level of play during major holidays, including New Year and Chinese New Year.", + "recall": 0.9624060150375939, + "true_md": "20\n\nManagement’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations\n\n## RESULTS OF OPERATIONS\n\n## Key Performance Indicators\n\nWe generate a majority of our net revenues and operating income from our Las Vegas Strip resorts. In 2004, over 75% of our net revenues and operating income was generated by wholly-owned Las Vegas Strip resorts. We believe that we own the premier casino resorts on the Las Vegas Strip, and a main focus of our strategy is to continually reinvest in these resorts to maintain that competitive advantage. Our concentration on the Las Vegas Strip exposes us to certain risks outside of our control, such as competition from other Las Vegas Strip resorts as well as new or expanded resorts in Las Vegas, including Wynn Las Vegas expected to open in 2005, and the impact from potential expansion of gaming in California. This concentra- tion also exposes us to risks related to tourism and the general economy, including national and global economic conditions and terrorist attacks or other global events.\n\nOur results of operations do not tend to be seasonal in nature, though a variety of factors can affect the results of any interim period, including the timing of major Las Vegas conventions, the amount and timing of marketing and special events for our high-end customers, and the level of play during major holidays, including New Year and Chinese New Year.\n\nMost of our revenue is essentially cash-based, through customers wagering with cash or paying for non-gaming services with cash or credit cards. Our resorts, like many in the industry, generate significant operating cash flow. Our industry is capital intensive and we rely heavily on the ability of our resorts to generate operating cash flow to repay debt financing, fund maintenance capital expenditures and provide excess cash for future development.\n\nWe operate in one segment, the operation of casino resorts, which includes offering gaming, hotel, dining, entertainment, retail and other resort amenities. Slightly over half of our net revenues are derived from gaming activities, a lower percentage than many of our competitors, as our operating philosophy is to provide a complete resort experience for our guests, including non-gaming amenities which command premium prices based on their quality.\n\nAt December 31, 2004, our operations consisted of 11 wholly-owned casino resorts and 50% investments in two other casino resorts, including:\n\nAs a resort-based company, our operating results are highly dependent on the volume of customers at our resorts, which in turn impacts the price we can charge for our hotel rooms and other amenities. We also generate a significant portion of our operating income from the high-end gaming segment, which can cause variability in our results. Key performance indicators related to revenue are:\n\n- • Gaming revenue indicators – table games drop and slot handle (volume indicators); “win” or “hold” percentage, which is not fully controllable by us. Our normal table games win percentage is in the range of 18% to 22% of table games drop and our normal slot win percentage is in the range of 6% to 7% of slot handle; \n\n- • Hotel revenue indicators – hotel occupancy (volume indicator); average daily rate (“ADR”, price indicator); revenue per available room (“REVPAR”), a summary measure of hotel results, combining ADR and occupancy rate." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8506198716076165, + "doc_id": "dadc4bd80d974d5280c8fc9bf56dd954375a841e5af1b03579f50fcc17f53cae", + "edit_distance": 0.4200913242009132, + "f1_score": 0.9197080291970802, + "meteor": 0.8225397173479736, + "precision": 0.9545454545454546, + "pred_md": "- /H17074 T he Hartford claims adjusters arrived in lower Manhattan within days after the Sept. 11 attack to fulfill obligations to policyholders who suffered losses. Senior Property General Adjuster Ray Davidson wrote a check on the spot for $250,000 to Wheelhouse\n\nCorp. and gave it to Wheelhouse Director Javier Flaim, left, to help the company's recovery efforts. The Burlington, Mass.-based software developer had a downtown Manhattan office that suffered extensive damage.\n\n- /H17075 A fter the Sept. 11 disaster, a team of The Hartford's home office employees set up shop in a conference room to organize some 150 employees, who delivered supplies and equipment by car and ferry to get temporary New York-area offices up and running within a week. Left to right, Leslie Cyrulik, automation project manager, corporate real estate;\n\nSarah Blount, director, client services, enterprise technologies services; Mark Gauvain, assistant vice president, property-casualty e-business; Tony Abate, vice president, IT acquisitions; Franca Lewis, assistant director, information technology; and Patrice Chandler, assistant procurement administrative manager, procurement.", + "recall": 0.8873239436619719, + "true_md": "- GLYPH<H17074> T he Hartford claims adjusters arrived in lower Manhattan within days after the Sept. 11 attack to fulfill obligations to policyholders who suffered losses. Senior Property General Adjuster Ray Davidson wrote a check on the spot for $250,000 to Wheelhouse\n\n- GLYPH<H17075> A fter the Sept. 11 disaster, a team of The Hartford’s home office employees set up shop in a con- ference room to organize some 150 employees, who delivered supplies and equipment by car and ferry to get temporary New York-area offices up and running within a week. Left to right, Leslie Cyrulik, automation project manager, corporate real estate; \n\nSarah Blount, director, client services, enterprise technologies services; Mark Gauvain, assistant vice president, property-casualty e-business; Tony Abate, vice presi- dent, IT acquisitions; Franca Lewis, assistant director, information technology; and Patrice Chandler, assistant procurement administra- tive manager, procurement.\n\nCorp. and gave it to Wheelhouse Director Javier Flaim, left, to help the company’s recovery efforts. The Burlington, Mass.-based soft- ware developer had a downtown Manhattan office that suffered extensive damage." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5678224175191425, + "doc_id": "43d96a3e0724acd8f8100b269b2b268d5aea215521d64df085f8b3cd324c3438", + "edit_distance": 0.4065934065934066, + "f1_score": 0.9690721649484536, + "meteor": 0.9054621848739497, + "precision": 0.9791666666666666, + "pred_md": "Our growth strategy calls for prudent and strategic development of our real estate assets to maximize shareholder value.\n\nATLANTIC CITY LAND/BORGATA EXPANSION Our prime real estate in Atlantic City, in a location we defined as Renaissance Pointe, holds spectacular promise to expand MGM MIRAGE's market presence on the East Coast.\n\nATLANTIC CITY LAND/BORGATA EXPANSION Our prime real estate in Atlantic City, in a location we defined as Renaissance Pointe, holds spectacular promise to expand MGM MIRAGE's market presence on the East Coast.", + "recall": 0.9591836734693877, + "true_md": "Our growth strategy calls for prudent and strategic development of our real estate assets to maximize shareholder value.\n\nATLANTIC CITY LAND/BORGATA EXPANSION Our prime real estate in Atlantic City, in a location we defined as Renaissance Pointe, holds spectacular promise to expand MGM MIRAGE’s market presence on the East Coast." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9837819243813252, + "doc_id": "fd37d6ef0e57a412037cec2a24ba68b37be4fe5c73c32d08d8bf34a70b86ef7a", + "edit_distance": 0.01256281407035176, + "f1_score": 0.9955156950672647, + "meteor": 0.9928357621703922, + "precision": 0.9970059880239521, + "pred_md": "SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## Note 1. Summary of Significant Accounting Policies (Continued)\n\ngoodwill and intangible asset impairments, and requires additional disclosures of information about goodwill and other intangible assets. The provisions of SFAS No. 142 were required to be applied starting with fiscal years beginning after December 15, 2001 and applied to all goodwill and other intangible assets recognized in financial statements at that date. In connection with SFAS No. 142 transitional goodwill impairment evaluation, the Statement required the Company to perform an assessment of whether there is an indication that goodwill is impaired as of the date of adoption. To accomplish this, the Company identified its reporting units and determined the carrying value of each unit by assigning the assets and liabilities, including the existing goodwill and intangible assets, to those reporting units as of January 1, 2002.\n\nGoodwill represents the excess of purchase price over fair value of tangible and identifiable intangible net assets acquired. Prior to adoption of SFAS No. 142 goodwill was amortized on a straight-line basis over the expected , periods to be benefited, which was 15 years for the Company. SFAS No. 142 required a transitional goodwill impairment evaluation beginning January 1, 2002. Subsequent to adoption, amortization of goodwill ceased, and the goodwill balance is reviewed annually for impairment. No impairment of goodwill was required to be recorded in 2003 and 2002. With the implementation of SFAS No. 142, there was no goodwill amortization charged to operations in 2003 or 2002, while amortization expense was $360 thousand in 2001.\n\nThe following table reconciles previously reported net income as if the provisions of SFAS No. 142 were in effect for the years ended prior to 2002.\n\nRetirement plans: The Company maintains a noncontributory defined benefit plan covering substantially all employees. Pension benefits are based primarily on the employee's compensation and years of service. The Company's policy is to fund the maximum allowable contribution calculated under federal income tax regulations. During 2003, the Company adopted an Executive Supplemental Retirement Plan for selected employees. This is an unfunded plan and is maintained primarily for the purpose of providing deferred compensation for a select group of management or highly compensated employees. The Company also maintains a defined contribution plan under which substantially all employees may defer a portion of their earnings on a pre-tax basis, up to the allowable federal maximum. The Company may make matching and discretionary contributions to this plan. Neither of the funded retirement plans holds Company stock in the respective portfolios.\n\nIncome taxes: Income taxes are accounted for under the asset and liability method. Deferred tax assets and liabilities are recognized for the future tax consequences attributable to differences between financial statement carrying amounts of existing assets and liabilities and their respective tax bases. Deferred tax assets and liabilities are measured using enacted tax rates expected to apply to taxable income in the years in which those temporary differences are expected to be recovered or settled. The effect on deferred tax assets and liabilities of a change in tax rates is recognized in income in the period that includes the enactment date. The Company evaluates the recoverability of tax assets generated on a state-by-state basis from net operating losses apportioned to that state. Management uses a more likely than not threshold to make that determination and has established a valuation allowance against the deferred tax assets, in case they may not be recoverable.\n\nRevenue recognition: The Company recognizes revenue when pervasive evidence of an arrangement exists, services have been rendered or products have been delivered, the price to the buyer is fixed and determinable and collectibility is reasonably assured. Revenues are recognized by the Company based on the various types of transactions generating the revenue. For equipment sales, revenue is recognized when the sales transaction is complete. For services, revenue is recognized as the services are performed.\n\nBeginning in 2000, coinciding with the inception of activation fees in its PCS segment, nonrefundable PCS activation fees and the portion of the activation costs deemed to be direct costs of acquiring new customers (primarily activation costs and credit analysis costs) were deferred and recognized ratably over the estimated life of the customer relationship of 30 months in accordance with the Securities and Exchange Commission's Staff Accounting Bulletin\n\nSHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY\n\n20\n\n■", + "recall": 0.9940298507462687, + "true_md": "SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## Note 1. Summary of Significant Accounting Policies (Continued)\n\ngoodwill and intangible asset impairments, and requires additional disclosures of information about goodwill and other intangible assets. The provisions of SFAS No. 142 were required to be applied starting with fiscal years beginning after December 15, 2001 and applied to all goodwill and other intangible assets recognized in financial statements at that date. In connection with SFAS No. 142 transitional goodwill impairment evaluation, the Statement required the Company to perform an assessment of whether there is an indication that goodwill is impaired as of the date of adoption. To accomplish this, the Company identified its reporting units and determined the carrying value of each unit by assigning the assets and liabilities, including the existing goodwill and intangible assets, to those reporting units as of January 1, 2002.\n\nGoodwill represents the excess of purchase price over fair value of tangible and identifiable intangible net assets acquired. Prior to adoption of SFAS No. 142 , goodwill was amortized on a straight-line basis over the expected periods to be benefited, which was 15 years for the Company. SFAS No. 142 required a transitional goodwill impairment evaluation beginning January 1, 2002. Subsequent to adoption, amortization of goodwill ceased, and the goodwill balance is reviewed annually for impairment. No impairment of goodwill was required to be recorded in 2003 and 2002. With the implementation of SFAS No. 142, there was no goodwill amortization charged to operations in 2003 or 2002, while amortization expense was $360 thousand in 2001.\n\nThe following table reconciles previously reported net income as if the provisions of SFAS No. 142 were in effect for the years ended prior to 2002.\n\nRetirement plans: The Company maintains a noncontributory defined benefit plan covering substantially all employees. Pension benefits are based primarily on the employee’s compensation and years of service. The Company’s policy is to fund the maximum allowable contribution calculated under federal income tax regulations.\n\nDuring 2003, the Company adopted an Executive Supplemental Retirement Plan for selected employees. This is an unfunded plan and is maintained primarily for the purpose of providing deferred compensation for a select group of management or highly compensated employees. The Company also maintains a defined contribution plan under which substantially all employees may defer a portion of their earnings on a pre-tax basis, up to the allowable federal maximum. The Company may make matching and discretionary contributions to this plan. Neither of the funded retirement plans holds Company stock in the respective portfolios.\n\nIncome taxes: Income taxes are accounted for under the asset and liability method. Deferred tax assets and liabilities are recognized for the future tax consequences attributable to differences between financial statement carrying amounts of existing assets and liabilities and their respective tax bases. Deferred tax assets and liabilities are measured using enacted tax rates expected to apply to taxable income in the years in which those temporary differences are expected to be recovered or settled. The effect on deferred tax assets and liabilities of a change in tax rates is recognized in income in the period that includes the enactment date. The Company evaluates the recoverability of tax assets generated on a state-by-state basis from net operating losses apportioned to that state. Management uses a more likely than not threshold to make that determination and has established a valuation allowance against the deferred tax assets, in case they may not be recoverable.\n\nRevenue recognition: The Company recognizes revenue when pervasive evidence of an arrangement exists, services have been rendered or products have been delivered, the price to the buyer is fixed and determinable and collectibility is reasonably assured. Revenues are recognized by the Company based on the various types of transactions generating the revenue. For equipment sales, revenue is recognized when the sales transaction is complete. For services, revenue is recognized as the services are performed.\n\nBeginning in 2000, coinciding with the inception of activation fees in its PCS segment, nonrefundable PCS activation fees and the portion of the activation costs deemed to be direct costs of acquiring new customers (primarily activation costs and credit analysis costs) were deferred and recognized ratably over the estimated life of the customer relationship of 30 months in accordance with the Securities and Exchange Commission’s Staff Accounting Bulletin\n\nSHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY ■ 20" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8988745038733715, + "doc_id": "9c8138b62360191e9947f68a96a492dfa454cda66e2a10d19e466e38041b55c4", + "edit_distance": 0.06823027718550106, + "f1_score": 0.9424860853432283, + "meteor": 0.9345319432328648, + "precision": 0.9548872180451128, + "pred_md": "## Dear Fellow Shareholders,\n\nIt would be difficult to imagine a more tumultuous year than 2001. But if one major test of a company's character is its performance in the face of extreme adversity, The Hartford aced that test.\n\nSuccessfully managing our company through a turbulent stock market and the beginning of a recession was challenge enough through the first eight months of the year.\n\nThen came the morning of Sept. 11. What followed, in retrospect, almost made those 'normal' challenges seem like child's play.\n\nNone of us will ever forget where we were when we heard the shocking news. I had just stopped at the home of Stuart Carlisle, The Hartford's director of investor relations. We were on our way to an analysts' meeting in Manhattan, but that meeting, of course, never took place.\n\nWith our eyes glued to the horrific events unfolding on television, our thoughts turned immediately to our 330 employees in 7 World Trade Center and our partners at Aon, Marsh & McLennan, Bank of America and Morgan Stanley, who had offices in the Twin Towers.\n\nAs you'll read in this report, we were profoundly thankful that all of our people survived the devastation. Our New York offices were back up and running within a week, thanks to a superb group of people I'm proud to call our employees. Tragically, not all our partners were as fortunate. Many of us lost friends, relatives or long-time business colleagues.\n\nIt's almost a cliché now, but that morning changed our lives. Entire industries, including the financial services industry, will feel its effects for many years.\n\nSept. 11 also taught us some harsh business lessons. There are suddenly new risks in insuring large sections of neighborhoods filled with top-quality office buildings. Horribly, we have to alter our view of workers' compensation risks, even for employers in low-risk professions, like accountants and attorneys.\n\nBut even with all that, we know one thing didn't change on Sept. 11: a determination, backed by 190 years of experience, to run The Hartford's business the right way. The right way means always thinking ahead and doing the things that ensure we have the unshakeable financial strength to pay over $1.2 billion in gross losses (before taxes and reinsurance) relating to Sept. 11. In a broader context, it means taking the long-term view and sticking to\n\n3", + "recall": 0.9304029304029304, + "true_md": "## Dear Fellow Shareholders,\n\nIt would be difficult to imagine a more tumultuous year than 2001. But if one major test of a company’s character is its performance in the face of extreme adversity, The Hartford aced that test.\n\nSuccessfully managing our company through a turbulent stock market and the begin- ning of a recession was challenge enough through the first eight months of the year. \n\nThen came the morning of Sept. 11. What followed, in retrospect, almost made those “normal” challenges seem like child’s play. \n\nNone of us will ever forget where we were when we heard the shocking news. I had just stopped at the home of Stuart Carlisle, The Hartford’s director of investor relations. We were on our way to an analysts’ meeting in Manhattan, but that meeting, of course, never took place. \n\nWith our eyes glued to the horrific events unfolding on television, our thoughts turned immediately to our 330 employees in 7 World Trade Center and our partners at Aon, Marsh & McLennan, Bank of America and Morgan Stanley, who had offices in the Twin Towers. \n\nAs you’ll read in this report, we were profoundly thankful that all of our people sur- vived the devastation. Our New York offices were back up and running within a week, thanks to a superb group of people I’m proud to call our employees. Tragically, not all our partners were as fortunate. Many of us lost friends, relatives or long-time business colleagues.\n\nIt’s almost a cliché now, but that morning changed our lives. Entire industries, includ- ing the financial services industry, will feel its effects for many years. \n\nSept. 11 also taught us some harsh business lessons. There are suddenly new risks in insuring large sections of neighborhoods filled with top-quality office buildings. Horribly, we have to alter our view of workers’ compensation risks, even for employers in low-risk pro- fessions, like accountants and attorneys.\n\nBut even with all that, we know one thing didn’t change on Sept. 11: a determination, backed by 190 years of experience, to run The Hartford’s business the right way. The right way means always thinking ahead and doing the things that ensure we have the unshake- able financial strength to pay over $1.2 billion in gross losses (before taxes and reinsurance) relating to Sept. 11. In a broader context, it means taking the long-term view and sticking to\n\n3" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8870591769187918, + "doc_id": "250e88abfe9cd22f08192e100be95d14d31102c439204719ec9c3205a1ec7037", + "edit_distance": 0.06521739130434782, + "f1_score": 0.9756097560975608, + "meteor": 0.9779173376274826, + "precision": 0.975609756097561, + "pred_md": "SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF SHAREHOLDERS' EQUITY AND COMPREHENSIVE INCOME\n\n## Years Ended December 31, 2003, 2002 and 2001\n\nin thousands, except per share amounts\n\nSee accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.\n\n15\n\n2003 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n■", + "recall": 0.975609756097561, + "true_md": "SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF SHAREHOLDERS’ EQUITY AND COMPREHENSIVE INCOME\n\n## Years Ended December 31, 2003, 2002 and 2001 in thousands, except per share amounts\n\nSee accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.\n\n15 ■ 2003 ANNUAL REPORT" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9717081792219718, + "doc_id": "ac1f5a8f1897c3094cae30dfc349d0427b387a01b60df9832484ef0d2e5229f7", + "edit_distance": 0.39761646803900325, + "f1_score": 0.9893048128342247, + "meteor": 0.9689388935116837, + "precision": 0.9946236559139785, + "pred_md": "SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES MANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS\n\nThe wireless industry in the late 1990's became increasingly competitive and the Company was not immune to these industry issues. The Clear Pay SM program, introduced by Sprint as a no-deposit offering in 2001, attracted high credit risk customers in the Company's markets. As the results began to materialize, the Company implemented deposits on this program (mid-April 2002), and experienced high levels of customer turnover (churn) and uncollectable accounts. The write-offs of uncollectable accounts peaked in the third quarter of 2002. During the fourth quarter of 2002 there was some evidence that the strengthened credit policy was having a favorable impact. Nonetheless, the 2002 net loss in the PCS operation was $5.4 million, as compared to $5.5 million in 2001. Despite the disappointing financial results for 2002, the PCS customer base grew by over 40%. While the PCS operation was adding customers, the cellular operation continued to lose its local customer base.\n\nThe growing belief that national branding was critical to our wireless operations, the expectation that roaming revenues from our analog cellular operation would not continue to grow, and the increase in the number of wireless competitors in our markets, prompted the Company to exit the cellular business in order to focus on our PCS operations. The Company entered into an agreement on November 21, 2002, to sell its 66% ownership interest in the Virginia 10 RSA cellular operation which was classified as a discontinued operation. The closing occurred February 28, 2003. The Company received $37.0 million in proceeds, including $5.0 million in escrow for two years and $1.7 million for working capital.\n\nIn many respects, 2003 was a successful year. Churn and levels of uncollectable accounts in the PCS operation returned to more acceptable levels. PCS revenues reached $67.0 million, and total revenues reached $105.9 million. The PCS operation recognized a small profit for the year, including favorable adjustments associated with settlement of disputed items with Sprint. Excluding the favorable adjustments, the PCS operation recognized a profit in the fourth quarter. With improved operating cash flow and reduced capital spending in 2003, the Company prepaid $4.6 million in debt, selecting those notes with nominal prepayment penalties. Additionally, after receiving the cash and paying taxes on the gain of the sale of the Virginia 10 partnership interest, the Company invested the remaining proceeds in liquid financial instruments, available for future deployment. Additionally, the Company has been successful at decreasing its dependency on wireline revenues. Wireline revenues, at $29.0 million in 2003 compared to $18.6 million in 1998, were 27.4% of total revenues in 2003 compared to 76.6% in 1998.\n\nEntering 2004, the Company is pleased with the milestone of a profitable quarter in the PCS operation, but recognizes that much work remains to ultimately earn a reasonable return on this investment. The recently announced signing of an addendum to the management and services agreements with Sprint is expected to lead to cost savings and greater certainty in fees paid to Sprint. However, the consolidation predicted for the wireless industry in recent years, including the recently announced Cingular/ATT deal and anticipated improvements in the overall economics of wireless services, has not yet materialized. Future Sprint marketing efforts, designed to meet the competition, could potentially have an unfavorable impact on the Company and lead to additional losses. The risks associated with the Sprint PCS affiliation are described in further detail elsewhere in this document. The Company is now reviewing alternatives for other businesses to further diversify our revenue base, from either a services platform or a geographic concentration.\n\n## Significant Transactions\n\nThe Company had several significant transactions during 2003. The largest was the sale of its 66% interest in the Virginia 10 RSA cellular operation, as described above. The Company originally entered into the agreement with Verizon Wireless in November 2002. The Company was the general partner of the limited partnership which operated an analog cellular network in the six-county area of Northwestern Virginia, including Clarke, Frederick, Page, Rappahannock, Shenandoah, and Warren counties, and the city of Winchester. The sales price was $37.0 million plus the Company's 66% share of the partnership's working capital, which was approximately $1.7 million. The Company was required to do a working capital true up following the closing, from which the Company recorded a charge for $23 thousand after taxes. In the fourth quarter the Company recorded an additional charge for taxes of $0.2 million to reflect the consolidated effective tax rate based on the final operating results for the year.\n\nThe sale of this business is reflected in the discontinued operations section of the income statement along with the results of operations for the two months of 2003 that the operation remained a part of the Company.\n\nSHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY\n\n40\n\n■", + "recall": 0.9840425531914894, + "true_md": "SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS\n\nThe wireless industry in the late 1990’s became increasingly competitive and the Company was not immune to these industry issues. The Clear Pay$^{SM}$ program, introduced by Sprint as a no-deposit offering in 2001, attracted high credit risk customers in the Company’s markets. As the results began to materialize, the Company implemented deposits on this program (mid-April 2002), and experienced high levels of customer turnover (churn) and uncollectable accounts. The write-offs of uncollectable accounts peaked in the third quarter of 2002. During the fourth quarter of 2002 there was some evidence that the strengthened credit policy was having a favorable impact. Nonetheless, the 2002 net loss in the PCS operation was $5.4 million, as compared to $5.5 million in 2001. Despite the disappointing financial results for 2002, the PCS customer base grew by over 40%. While the PCS operation was adding customers, the cellular operation continued to lose its local customer base.\n\nThe growing belief that national branding was critical to our wireless operations, the expectation that roaming revenues from our analog cellular operation would not continue to grow, and the increase in the number of wireless competitors in our markets, prompted the Company to exit the cellular business in order to focus on our PCS operations. The Company entered into an agreement on November 21, 2002, to sell its 66% ownership interest in the Virginia 10 RSA cellular operation which was classified as a discontinued operation. The closing occurred February 28, 2003. The Company received $37.0 million in proceeds, including $5.0 million in escrow for two years and $1.7 million for working capital.\n\nIn many respects, 2003 was a successful year. Churn and levels of uncollectable accounts in the PCS operation returned to more acceptable levels. PCS revenues reached $67.0 million, and total revenues reached $105.9 million. The PCS operation recognized a small profit for the year, including favorable adjustments associated with settlement of disputed items with Sprint. Excluding the favorable adjustments, the PCS operation recognized a profit in the fourth quarter. With improved operating cash flow and reduced capital spending in 2003, the Company prepaid $4.6 million in debt, selecting those notes with nominal prepayment penalties. Additionally, after receiving the cash and paying taxes on the gain of the sale of the Virginia 10 partnership interest, the Company invested the remaining proceeds in liquid financial instruments, available for future deployment. Additionally, the Company has been successful at decreasing its dependency on wireline revenues. Wireline revenues, at $29.0 million in 2003 compared to $18.6 million in 1998, were 27.4% of total revenues in 2003 compared to 76.6% in 1998.\n\nThe Company had several significant transactions during 2003. The largest was the sale of its 66% interest in the Virginia 10 RSA cellular operation, as described above. The Company originally entered into the agreement with Verizon Wireless in November 2002. The Company was the general partner of the limited partnership which operated an analog cellular network in the six-county area of Northwestern Virginia, including Clarke, Frederick, Page, Rappahannock, Shenandoah, and Warren counties, and the city of Winchester. The sales price was $37.0 million plus the Company’s 66% share of the partnership’s working capital, which was approximately $1.7 million. The Company was required to do a working capital true up following the closing, from which the Company recorded a charge for $23 thousand after taxes. In the fourth quarter the Company recorded an additional charge for taxes of $0.2 million to reflect the consolidated effective tax rate based on the final operating results for the year.\n\nThe sale of this business is reflected in the discontinued operations section of the income statement along with the results of operations for the two months of 2003 that the operation remained a part of the Company.\n\n## Significant Transactions\n\nEntering 2004, the Company is pleased with the milestone of a profitable quarter in the PCS operation, but recognizes that much work remains to ultimately earn a reasonable return on this investment. The recently announced signing of an addendum to the management and services agreements with Sprint is expected to lead to cost savings and greater certainty in fees paid to Sprint. However, the consolidation predicted for the wireless industry in recent years, including the recently announced Cingular/ATT deal and anticipated improvements in the overall economics of wireless services, has not yet materialized. Future Sprint marketing efforts, designed to meet the competition, could potentially have an unfavorable impact on the Company and lead to additional losses. The risks associated with the Sprint PCS affiliation are described in further detail elsewhere in this document. The Company is now reviewing alternatives for other businesses to further diversify our revenue base, from either a services platform or a geographic concentration.\n\nSHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY ■ 40" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6147881529512643, + "doc_id": "4b8411475d4a8a5b634d67d525617c04ce9e070845968509ebb0349bf755069a", + "edit_distance": 0.7058823529411765, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.8645430490535314, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "consolidated statements of\n\n## operations\n\nSee notes to consolidated financial statements.\n\n32\n\nHormel Foods Corporation", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "32 Hormel Foods Corporation\n\nSee notes to consolidated financial statements.\n\n## consolidated statements of operations" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9102783541594837, + "doc_id": "199d88bc1083392fcc25aa88b3b26b729d83bcb0cdeac736409392049e194d2d", + "edit_distance": 0.4222222222222222, + "f1_score": 0.9802631578947367, + "meteor": 0.9596678091324892, + "precision": 0.9802631578947368, + "pred_md": "## HIGH IMPACT DRILLING IN 2005\n\nThe 2005 exploration program has the highest resource potential of any program undertaken at Santos.\n\nSantos is planning a large, high impact drilling campaign that is already well underway.\n\nSantos plans to drill 25 wells and will invest $150 million testing prospects within its expanding domestic and international exploration portfolio - up 19% from the $126 million spent on exploration in 2004.\n\nOil is the main focus of the 2005 program with most activity in the Kutei and East Java Basins offshore Indonesia, the Gulf of\n\nSuez in Egypt, the Bonaparte Basin in the Timor Sea and the Carnarvon Basin offshore Western Australia.\n\nThe 2005 program reflects the increasing materiality of Santos' exploration portfolio and continues the emphasis on more globally-focused exploration as an important part of the Company's growth strategy.\n\nSantos has already had drilling success early in 2005 with the Hiu Aman 1 well - the first to be drilled by Santos in the Donggala PSC. Hiu Aman 1 has indicated the presence of a prolific hydrocarbon system in this area. The discovery should add other lower risk prospects to Santos'\n\n## 2005 WILDCAT EXPLORATION PROGRAM\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\nexploration portfolio. A multi-well drilling program will be undertaken in Santos' Kutei Basin PSCs during 2005.\n\nAnother gas discovery has been made at Hurricane 1 in the Carnarvon Basin, offshore Western Australia. While both wells were discoveries, they require further evaluation to determine their commercial significance.\n\n17", + "recall": 0.9802631578947368, + "true_md": "## 2005 WILDCAT EXPLORATION PROGRAM\n\n## HIGH IMPACT DRILLING IN 2005\n\nThe 2005 exploration program has the highest resource potential of any program undertaken at Santos.\n\nSantos is planning a large, high impact drilling campaign that is already well underway.\n\nSantos plans to drill 25 wells and will invest $150 million testing prospects within its expanding domestic and international exploration portfolio – up 19% from the $126 million spent on exploration in 2004.\n\nOil is the main focus of the 2005 program with most activity in the Kutei and East Java Basins offshore Indonesia, the Gulf of\n\nSantos has already had drilling success early in 2005 with the Hiu Aman 1 well – the first to be drilled by Santos in the Donggala PSC. Hiu Aman 1 has indicated the presence of a prolific hydrocarbon system in this area. The discovery should add other lower risk prospects to Santos’\n\nThe 2005 program reflects the increasing materiality of Santos’ exploration portfolio and continues the emphasis on more globally-focused exploration as an important part of the Company’s growth strategy.\n\nSuez in Egypt, the Bonaparte Basin in the Timor Sea and the Carnarvon Basin offshore Western Australia.\n\nexploration portfolio. A multi-well drilling program will be undertaken in Santos’ Kutei Basin PSCs during 2005.\n\nAnother gas discovery has been made at Hurricane 1 in the Carnarvon Basin, offshore Western Australia. While both wells were discoveries, they require further evaluation to determine their commercial significance.\n\nAnnual Report 2004 17" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6903885199646335, + "doc_id": "4db68257807480e173ddc663392df31349b02d0ec2b27416b99e1d431df5c208", + "edit_distance": 0.24324324324324326, + "f1_score": 0.8, + "meteor": 0.7919111388342007, + "precision": 0.8571428571428571, + "pred_md": "## 10 YEAR SUMMARY 1995-2004\n\n- * From 2001, appraisal and near-field exploration wells have been reclassified from exploration to delineation expenditure. Prior year amounts have not been restated.", + "recall": 0.75, + "true_md": "## 10 YEAR SUMMAR 1995–2004\n\n* From 2001, appraisal and near-field exploration wells have been reclassified from exploration to delineation expen diture. Prior year amounts have not been restated.\n\nAnnual Report 2004 44" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7631795628721989, + "doc_id": "6c0f8d24528f9ef72b127120129ace4f253c96c6cc9c9259f5c0b1e9261adee5", + "edit_distance": 0.8462389380530974, + "f1_score": 0.896640826873385, + "meteor": 0.6771852135242836, + "precision": 0.8653366583541147, + "pred_md": "2001\n\nWORLDWIDE REVENUES\n\n## W H A T W E D I D\n\nSo, armed with full recognition of both our challenges and our Beyond severance, our actual cash usage for our strengths, we set out to re-shape the company, adjusting to the has become very low. We have also added to our new realities of the market. During 2002, we relied on our Values to set the context in which we operated. From there, we focused relentlessly on a very clear plan with three priorities: payments. opera ions cash reserves through such actions as our preferred stock offering in July, and the sale of our Ohio-based precision l business to 3M late in the year. As a result of all these act we were able to end the year with about $2.1 billion in cas and short-term investments.\n\n- n TO PRESERVE THE FINANCIAL HEALTH OF THE COMPANY ;\n- n TO RETURN TO PROFITABILITY IN 2003;\n- n TO CONTINUE TO INVEST IN OUR FUTURE .\n\nDuring the course of the year - with a recovery in the cial paper. telecommunications industry still nowhere in sight - we restructured the company and dramatically lowered our cost structure. Meanwhile, we focused our research and development efforts and recommitted ourselves to building those businesses which presented the most attractive near-term opportunities for growth - a large part of which are outside the telecommunications segment. Our diverse portfolio and been more important.\n\nIn keeping with this strategy, we also continue to pay down debt each quarter. Over the course of 2002 and the first mont of this year, we repaid about $975 million in debt, includi commer\n\nWe haven't touched our $2 billion in credit - and we don't intend to. We maintain our access to this credit by keeping o debt-to-capital ratio lower than 60 percent. Our ratio at y end was 46.7 percent, well within the compliance range in our credit agreement. And as we execute on our plan to pay down debt, that ratio will drop even further.\n\nwealth of skills across a wide variety of markets had neversaid, we are preserving what we believe is a stro The plan-painful though it is-is working. P R E S E R V I N G O U R F I N A N C I A L H E A L T H All that liquidity position. And our balance sheet will continue t improve in 2003 as we gain more benefits from last year's restructuring actions. We will continue to maintain our focu on improving our cash flow and reducing our debt levels as we look ahead to our longer-term goal of regaining an invest ment-grade\n\n## R E T U R N I N G T O P R O F I T A B I L I T Y\n\nIn 2003, we will focus our energy on the plan to return t profitability. We are on track to reach that goal, and let explain a few of the reasons why.\n\nNow, let's take a look at our financial picture. Our 2002 salesdebt rating. from continuing operations were $3.2 billion, a significant decline from 2001 sales of $6.1 billion. Losses in our telecommunications segment and significant restructuring and impairment charges drove a net loss of $1.3 billion or $1.39 per share in 2002.\n\nDespite these lowered revenues and net loss, I take great pride in saying that Corning continues to be a financially sound company. We developed a three-part plan for achieving this goal: maintaining significant cash balances; using excess cash to reduce our debt; and continuing to have access to our $2 billion revolving line of credit. And we have achieved significant success in each of these areas. Although it has been a very painful process, we have dramat- we participate expand as we expect, we have every ically slowed the rate at which we are consuming cash and nce these businesses will be able to meet their goal short term investments. Much of this, regrettably, was through so well on our way toward getting our optical fibe a variety of plant closures and the elimination of about 7,100operations back to profitability as we reduce ou jobs, in addition to the 12,000 jobs we eliminated last year. structure. In October, we announced plans to As a result, a major drain on cash has been due to severance eral of our fiber plants and to streamline our ca Our Technologies segment has had a strong year, and has set aggressive goals for both sales and profit growth for 2003. T time is right for these businesses to lead the way to our re to profitability - particularly our liquid-crystal display, en ronmental and semiconductor optics businesses. These are strong businesses which continue to set the standard for the markets and have plenty of growth potential. If the industri in which confide We are al and cable fixed cost close sev\n\n2", + "recall": 0.9302949061662198, + "true_md": "So, armed with full recognition of both our challenges and our strengths, we set out to re-shape the company, adjusting to the new realities of the market.\n\nDuring 2002, we relied on our Values to set the context in which we operated. From there, we focused relentlessly on a very clear plan with three priorities:\n\nDuring the course of the year — with a recovery in the telecommunications industry still nowhere in sight — we restructured the company and dramatically lowered our cost structure. Meanwhile, we focused our research and develop- ment efforts and recommitted ourselves to building those businesses which presented the most attractive near-term opportunities for growth — a large part of which are outside the telecommunications segment. Our diverse portfolio and wealth of skills across a wide variety of markets had never been more important.\n\nNow, let’s take a look at our financial picture. Our 2002 sales from continuing operations were $3.2 billion, a significant decline from 2001 sales of $6.1 billion. Losses in our telecommunications segment and significant restructuring and impairment charges drove a net loss of $1.3 billion or $1.39 per share in 2002.\n\nDespite these lowered revenues and net loss, I take great pride in saying that Corning continues to be a financially sound company. We developed a three-part plan for achieving this goal: maintaining significant cash balances; using excess cash to reduce our debt; and continuing to have access to our $2 billion revolving line of credit. And we have achieved significant success in each of these areas. \n\nAlthough it has been a very painful process, we have dramat- ically slowed the rate at which we are consuming cash and short term investments. Much of this, regrettably, was through a variety of plant closures and the elimination of about 7,100 jobs, in addition to the 12,000 jobs we eliminated last year. As a result, a major drain on cash has been due to severance\n\npayments. Beyond severance, our actual cash usage for our operations has become very low. We have also added to our cash reserves through such actions as our preferred stock offering in July, and the sale of our Ohio-based precision lens business to 3M late in the year. As a result of all these actions, we were able to end the year with about $2.1 billion in cash and short-term investments. \n\nIn keeping with this strategy, we also continue to pay down debt each quarter. Over the course of 2002 and the first month of this year, we repaid about $975 million in debt, including commercial paper.\n\nWe haven’t touched our $2 billion in credit — and we don’t intend to. We maintain our access to this credit by keeping our debt-to-capital ratio lower than 60 percent. Our ratio at year end was 46.7 percent, well within the compliance range in our credit agreement. And as we execute on our plan to pay down debt, that ratio will drop even further.\n\nAll that said, we are preserving what we believe is a strong liquidity position. And our balance sheet will continue to improve in 2003 as we gain more benefits from last year’s restructuring actions. We will continue to maintain our focus on improving our cash flow and reducing our debt levels as we look ahead to our longer-term goal of regaining an invest- ment-grade debt rating. \n\nIn 2003, we will focus our energy on the plan to return to profitability. We are on track to reach that goal, and let me explain a few of the reasons why.\n\nOur Technologies segment has had a strong year, and has set aggressive goals for both sales and profit growth for 2003. The time is right for these businesses to lead the way to our return to profitability — particularly our liquid-crystal display, envi- ronmental and semiconductor optics businesses. These are strong businesses which continue to set the standard for their markets and have plenty of growth potential. If the industries in which we participate expand as we expect, we have every confidence these businesses will be able to meet their goals. We are also well on our way toward getting our optical fiber and cable operations back to profitability as we reduce our fixed cost structure. In October, we announced plans to close several of our fiber plants and to streamline our cable\n\n## R ETURNING TO PROFITABILITY\n\n## P RESERVING OUR FINANCIAL HEALTH\n\n- ■ TO PRESERVE THE FINANCIAL HEALTH OF THE COMPANY;\n\n- ■ TO RETURN TO PROFITABILITY IN 2003;\n\n- ■ TO CONTINUE TO INVEST IN OUR FUTURE .\n\n## W HAT WE DID\n\n2\n\nThe plan — painful though it is — is working." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8737704908347572, + "doc_id": "962cef62499e8c5c6e114ac252451526f8ee7f9d7eec11d23d08bafc1c3c09a1", + "edit_distance": 0.8253094910591472, + "f1_score": 0.9318600368324125, + "meteor": 0.6727182724894892, + "precision": 0.9693486590038314, + "pred_md": "## 18. Contributed Equity (continued)\n\n## (e) Maximum number of shares that may be acquired under share and option schemes\n\nThe aggregate number of:\n\n- (i) shares issued under and for the time being outstanding and subject to the terms of each employee share plan of the Company; and\n- (ii) unissued shares to which options are granted and for the time being outstanding under any employee or executive share option plan of the Company;\n\ncannot exceed 5% of the issued shares of all classes of the Company.\n\n## (f) Reset convertible preference shares redemption and buy-back\n\nOn 30 September 2004, through a redemption and buy-back arrangement, the Company cancelled its entire 3,500,000 reset convertible preference shares on issue at that date. 2,865,821 shares were redeemed at face value and reinvested in redeemable convertible preference shares, 489,774 shares were bought back for $105 each and cancelled, and 144,405 shares were redeemed at face value. This redemption and buy-back resulted in an amount of $350,000,000 being debited against the Company's capital account and an amount of $2,448,870 being debited against retained profits representing the $5.00 premium paid over the issue price in the buy-back of the 489,774 reset convertible preference shares.\n\n## (g) Redeemable convertible preference shares\n\nOn 30 September 2004, the Company issued 6,000,000 redeemable convertible preference shares at $100 each, which resulted in an amount of $600,000,000 being credited to the Company's capital account before deducting the costs of issue.\n\nUnder the terms of the redemption and buy-back, those shareholders whose reset convertible preference shares were redeemed at face value and reinvested in redeemable convertible preference shares were entitled to a $5.00 per share special dividend which was paid on 7 October 2004.\n\nRedeemable convertible preference shareholders receive a floating preferential, non-cumulative dividend which incorporates the value of franking credits (i.e. it is on a grossed up basis), set at the Bank Bill Swap Rate for 180 day bills plus a margin. Dividends on redeemable convertible preference shares are in priority to any dividend declared on ordinary class shares. Redeemable convertible preference shareholders are not entitled to vote at any general meetings, except in the following circumstances:\n\n- (i) on a proposal:\n- (1) to reduce the share capital of the Company;\n- (2) that affects rights attached to the redeemable convertible preference shares;\n- (3) to wind up the Company; or\n- (4) for the disposal of the whole of the property, business and undertaking of the Company;\n- (ii) on a resolution to approve the terms of a buy-back agreement;\n\n(iii) during a period in which a dividend or part of a dividend on the redeemable convertible preference shares is in arrears; or (iv) during the winding up of the Company.\n\nIn the event of the winding up of the Company, redeemable convertible preference shares will rank for repayment of capital behind all creditors of the Company, but ahead of the ordinary class shares.\n\nThe redeemable convertible preference shares may, at the sole discretion of the Company, be converted into ordinary class shares and/or exchanged.\n\n## (h) Restricted shares\n\nOn his appointment as Chief Executive Officer on 13 December 2000, 1,000,000 Restricted Shares were issued to Mr J C Ellice-Flint. The Restricted Shares were issued for nil consideration and are held under a trust structure. The Restricted Shares carry rights to dividends and bonus issues and allow Mr Ellice-Flint to instruct the trustee as to the exercise of voting rights. Legal title in the Restricted Shares will not pass to Mr Ellice-Flint until he has completed five years continuous service with the Group or his employment is earlier terminated by the Company (other than for cause).\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\n67", + "recall": 0.8971631205673759, + "true_md": "## 18. Contributed Equity (continued)\n\n- (ii) on a resolution to approve the terms of a buy-back agreement;\n\n- (iv) during the winding up of the Company.\n\n- (iii) during a period in which a dividend or part of a dividend on the red eemable convertible preference shares is in arrears; or\n\n- (4) for the disposal of the whole of the property, business and und ertaking of the Company;\n\n- (3) to wind up the Company; or\n\n- (2) that affects rights attached to the redeemable convertible prefer ence shares;\n\n- (1) to reduce the share capital of the Company;\n\n- (i) on a proposal:\n\nIn the event of the winding up of the Company, redeemable convertible pr eference shares will rank for repayment of capital behind all creditors of the Company, but ahead of the ordinary class shares.\n\n## (h) Restricted shares\n\nOn his appointment as Chief Executive Officer on 13 December 2000, 1,000,000 Restricted Shares were issued to Mr J C Ellice-Flint. The Restricted Shares were issued for nil consideration and are held und er a trust structure. The Restricted Shares carry rights to dividends and bonus issues and allow Mr Ellice-Flint to instruct the trustee as to the ex ercise of voting rights. Legal title in the Restricted Shares will not pass to Mr Ellice-Flint until he has completed five years continuous service with the Group or his employment is earlier terminated by the Company (other than for cause).\n\nThe redeemable convertible preference shares may, at the sole discretion of the Company, be converted into ordinary class shares and/or exchanged.\n\nRedeemable convertible preference shareholders receive a floating prefer ential, non-cumulative dividend which incorporates the value of franking credits (i.e. it is on a grossed up basis), set at the Bank Bill Swap Rate f or 180 day bills plus a margin. Dividends on redeemable convertible preference shares are in priority to any dividend declared on ordinary class shares. Redeemable convertible preference shareholders are not entitled to vote at any general meetings, except in the following circum stances:\n\nUnder the terms of the redemption and buy-back, those shareholders wh ose reset convertible preference shares were redeemed at face value and reinvested in redeemable convertible preference shares were entitled to a $5.00 per share special dividend which was paid on 7 October 2004.\n\nOn 30 September 2004, the Company issued 6,000,000 redeemable convertible preference shares at $100 each, which resulted in an amount of $600,000,000 being credited to the Company’s capital account before ded ucting the costs of issue.\n\n## (f) Reset convertible preference shares redemption and buy-back\n\n## (g) Redeemable convertible preference shares\n\n## (e) Maximum number of shares that may be acquired under shar and option schemes\n\n- (i) shares issued under and for the time being outstanding an subject to the terms of each employee share plan of the Company; and\n\n- (ii) unissued shares to which options are granted and for the time bein g outstanding under any employee or executive share option plan of the Company;\n\ncannot exceed 5% of the issued shares of all classes of the Company.\n\nThe aggregate number of:\n\nOn 30 September 2004, through a redemption and buy-back arrangemen t, the Company cancelled its entire 3,500,000 reset convertible preference shares on issue at that date. 2,865,821 shares were redeem ed at face value and reinvested in redeemable convertible preference shares, 489,774 shares were bought back for $105 each and cancelled, an d 144,405 shares were redeemed at face value. This redemption and buy-back resulted in an amount of $350,000,000 being debited against th e Company’s capital account and an amount of $2,448,870 being debited against retained profits representing the $5.00 premium pai over the issue price in the buy-back of the 489,774 reset convertible preference shares.\n\nAnnual Report 2004 67" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8757263399128676, + "doc_id": "4b6e4474f43522b97e49a1a339e48d9cfc0fab060e13bbfde86656ed938ae48b", + "edit_distance": 0.3141263940520446, + "f1_score": 0.9567099567099566, + "meteor": 0.8466265493147429, + "precision": 0.9608695652173913, + "pred_md": "50\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nExisting industry practice related to non-gaming revenues already complied with EITF 01-9. The retail value of accommodations, food and beverage, and other services furnished to guests without charge is included in gross revenue and then deducted as promotional allowances. The estimated cost of providing such promotional allowances is primarily included in casino expenses as follows:\n\nAdvertising. The Company expenses advertising costs the first time the advertising takes place. Advertising expense, which is generally included in general and administrative expenses, was $57 million, $54 million and $52 million for 2004, 2003 and 2002, respectively.\n\nCorporate expense. Corporate expense represents unallocated payroll and aircraft costs, professional fees and various other expenses not directly related to the Company's casino resort operations. In addition, corporate expense includes the costs associated with the Company's evaluation and pursuit of new business opportunities, which are expensed as incurred until development of a specific project has become probable.\n\nPreopening and start-up expenses. The Company accounts for costs incurred during the preopening and start-up phases of operations in accordance with Statement of Position 98-5, 'Reporting on the Costs of Start-up Activities'. Preopening and start-up costs, including organizational costs, are expensed as incurred. Costs classified as preopening and start-up expenses include payroll, outside services, advertising, and other expenses related to new or start-up operations and new customer initiatives.\n\nIncome per share of common stock. The weighted-average number of common and common equivalent shares used in the calculation of basic and diluted earnings per share consisted of the following:\n\nStock-based compensation. The Company accounts for stock-based compensation, including employee stock option plans, in accordance with Accounting Principles Board Opinion No. 25, 'Accounting for Stock Issued to Employees' and the Financial Accounting Standards Board's Interpretation No. 44, 'Accounting for Certain Transactions involving Stock Compensation, an interpretation of APB Opinion No. 25', and discloses supplemental information in accordance with Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 123, 'Accounting for Stock-Based Compensation' ('SFAS 123'), as amended by Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 148, 'Accounting for Stock-Based Compensation - Transition and Disclosure' ('SFAS 148'). The Company does not incur compensation expense for employee stock options when the exercise price is at least 100% of the market value of the Company's common stock on the date of grant. For disclosure purposes, employee stock options are measured at fair value and compensation is assumed to be amortized over the vesting periods of the options.\n\nIn December 2004, the FASB issued FASB Statement No. 123 (revised 2004), 'Share-Based Payment' ('SFAS 123(R)'). Under the original standard, SFAS No. 123, companies had the option of recording stock options issued to employees at", + "recall": 0.9525862068965517, + "true_md": "Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements 50\n\nIncome per share of common stock. The weighted-average number of common and common equivalent shares used in the calculation of basic and diluted earnings per share consisted of the following:\n\nExisting industry practice related to non-gaming revenues already complied with EITF 01-9. The retail value of accommodations, food and beverage, and other services furnished to guests without charge is included in gross revenue and then deducted as promotional allowances. The estimated cost of providing such promotional allowances is primarily included in casino expenses as follows:\n\nAdvertising. The Company expenses advertising costs the first time the advertising takes place. Advertising expense, which is generally included in general and administrative expenses, was $57 million, $54 million and $52 million for 2004, 2003 and 2002, respectively.\n\nCorporate expense. Corporate expense represents unallocated payroll and aircraft costs, professional fees and various other expenses not directly related to the Company’s casino resort operations. In addition, corporate expense includes the costs associated with the Company’s evaluation and pursuit of new business opportunities, which are expensed as incurred until development of a specific project has become probable.\n\nPreopening and start-up expenses. The Company accounts for costs incurred dur- ing the preopening and start-up phases of operations in accordance with Statement of Position 98-5, “Reporting on the Costs of Start-up Activities”. Preopening and start-up costs, including organizational costs, are expensed as incurred. Costs classi- fied as preopening and start-up expenses include payroll, outside services, advertising, and other expenses related to new or start-up operations and new customer initiatives.\n\nIn December 2004, the FASB issued FASB Statement No. 123 (revised 2004), “Share-Based Payment” (“SFAS 123(R)”). Under the original standard, SFAS No. 123, companies had the option of recording stock options issued to employees at\n\nStock-based compensation. The Company accounts for stock-based compensation, including employee stock option plans, in accordance with Accounting Principles Board Opinion No. 25, “Accounting for Stock Issued to Employees” and the Financial Accounting Standards Board’s Interpretation No. 44, “Accounting for Certain Transactions involving Stock Compensation, an interpretation of APB Opinion No. 25”, and discloses supplemental information in accordance with Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 123, “Accounting for Stock-Based Compensation” (“SFAS 123”), as amended by Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 148, “Accounting for Stock-Based Compensation – Transition and Disclosure” (“SFAS 148”). The Company does not incur compensation expense for employee stock options when the exercise price is at least 100% of the market value of the Company’s common stock on the date of grant. For disclosure purposes, employee stock options are measured at fair value and compensation is assumed to be amortized over the vesting periods of the options." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "d7b468faa54032711347678d866fae4d22948a65c0569b6175b82f5b31b13cb7", + "edit_distance": 0.3141263940520446, + "f1_score": 0.9567099567099566, + "meteor": 0.8466265493147429, + "precision": 0.9608695652173913, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.9525862068965517, + "true_md": "" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8894506866246732, + "doc_id": "66ed2b9ec0ba446d8981f1d29ae702aa4a6f613040647597608b22d90087d5bd", + "edit_distance": 0.14647377938517178, + "f1_score": 0.9453924914675769, + "meteor": 0.9352601941532875, + "precision": 0.9618055555555556, + "pred_md": "Dave Zwiener, President and Chief Operating Officer, Property & Casualty Operations\n\nDave Zwiener, President and Chief Operating Officer, Property & Casualty Operations\n\n6\n\nIn our life operations, aided by the Fortis Financial Group acquisition, we're enhancing our market share and our distribution advantage. Individual life sales rose 14 percent over 2000. Retail mutual fund sales increased 11 percent-despite a 19 percent drop in total industry retail sales for the year. Performance in our Investment Products Division was strong across all lines of business. Sales of 401(k) plans and institutional investment products rose 58 and 46 percent, respectively, in 2001, and our variable annuity market share increased to 8.6 percent.\n\nWe believe we are uniquely positioned to reap the benefits of a recovering and, ultimately, rising stock market because we've enhanced our industry-leading market share for individual retail variable annuities in a down market. This is especially encouraging since industry-wide variable annuity sales declined by more than 17 percent last year. We're leveraging our wholesaling capabilities to sell more mutual funds and retirement plans, and we're pursuing long-term growth opportunities driven by consumers' financial needs, demographic shifts and our strengths as an organization.\n\nAs we add scale, we're reinventing the life insurance sales process. Our SimplifyLife program makes it easier for financial intermediaries to sell life insurance to clients in the 'emerging affluent' market. We're relieving financial professionals of time spent filling out applications or asking their clients personal medical questions. Our in-house interviewers call the client, fill out the application and order any necessary medical tests or underwriting requirements. As a result, intermediaries can concentrate on what they do best: selling.\n\nWe're also making inroads into international markets. We have a highly successful venture in Brazil to sell personal savings, pension and life insurance products. In addition, our new venture in Japan, Hartford Life Insurance K.K., reported more than $500 million in variable annuity sales in 2001. We are also exploring the possibility of establishing operations in a few select markets with favorable demographics.\n\nThe relentless pursuit of excellence also applies to our property-casualty operations. Excluding the effect of Sept. 11, our Business Insurance segment saw a 20 percent jump in premiums in 2001. Our combined ratio in this segment was 97.8-a 2.8-point improvement over the prior year. Our affinity personal lines premiums rose 11 percent, reflecting our growing business with AARP members. And our specialty professional liability business saw a 56 percent premium gain.\n\nWe merged our personal and business insurance sales and agency management organizations in 2001 to give agents a single point of contact. This makes it easier for them to do business with us and enhances their ability to cross-sell these lines. We also gave agents a wealth of new technological tools. They include continuously updated small-business underwriting guidelines available online, customized direct-bill status reports, online access to commission statements, and online quoting capabilities, to name just a few.", + "recall": 0.9295302013422819, + "true_md": "In our life operations, aided by the Fortis Financial Group acquisition, we’re enhanc- ing our market share and our distribution advantage. Individual life sales rose 14 percent over 2000. Retail mutual fund sales increased 11 percent—despite a 19 percent drop in total industry retail sales for the year. Performance in our Investment Products Division was strong across all lines of business. Sales of 401(k) plans and institutional investment prod- ucts rose 58 and 46 percent, respectively, in 2001, and our variable annuity market share increased to 8.6 percent. \n\nWe believe we are uniquely positioned to reap the benefits of a recovering and, ulti- mately, rising stock market because we’ve enhanced our industry-leading market share for individual retail variable annuities in a down market. This is especially encouraging since industry-wide variable annuity sales declined by more than 17 percent last year. We’re lever- aging our wholesaling capabilities to sell more mutual funds and retirement plans, and we’re pursuing long-term growth opportunities driven by consumers’ financial needs, demographic shifts and our strengths as an organization.\n\nAs we add scale, we’re reinventing the life insurance sales process. Our SimplifyLife program makes it easier for financial intermediaries to sell life insurance to clients in the “emerging affluent” market. We’re relieving financial professionals of time spent filling out applications or asking their clients personal medical questions. Our in-house interviewers call the client, fill out the application and order any necessary medical tests or underwriting requirements. As a result, intermediaries can concentrate on what they do best: selling.\n\nWe’re also making inroads into international markets. We have a highly successful venture in Brazil to sell personal savings, pension and life insurance products. In addition, our new venture in Japan, Hartford Life Insurance K.K., reported more than $500 million in variable annuity sales in 2001. We are also exploring the possibility of establishing opera- tions in a few select markets with favorable demographics.\n\nThe relentless pursuit of excellence also applies to our property-casualty operations. Excluding the effect of Sept. 11, our Business Insurance segment saw a 20 percent jump in premiums in 2001. Our combined ratio in this segment was 97.8—a 2.8-point improvement over the prior year. Our affinity personal lines premiums rose 11 percent, reflecting our grow- ing business with AARP members. And our specialty professional liability business saw a 56 percent premium gain.\n\nWe merged our personal and business insurance sales and agency management organizations in 2001 to give agents a single point of contact. This makes it easier for them to do business with us and enhances their ability to cross-sell these lines. We also gave agents a wealth of new technological tools. They include continuously updated small-busi- ness underwriting guidelines available online, customized direct-bill status reports, online access to commission statements, and online quoting capabilities, to name just a few.\n\n6\n\nDave Zwiener, President and Chief Operating Officer, Property & Casualty Operations" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9314993111840818, + "doc_id": "12220d5cbd6d47e644a8ba915c5b860b6591ddd0d0f070186616d0d14fc1547d", + "edit_distance": 0.05420054200542006, + "f1_score": 0.9680589680589681, + "meteor": 0.9640467243036185, + "precision": 0.9563106796116505, + "pred_md": "## I T ' S L O G I C A L\n\nMermaid Marine Australia Limited's future is now inextricably linked to the oil and gas industry. Oil continues to be the main attraction to explorers because of its lower infrastructure costs, early cash flow and easier marketing, but it is gas, which is emerging as the premier fuel.\n\nGas is clean, portable, in massive supply and the environmental answer to so many of today's atmospheric problems. Together with its sister product, condensate it is also the dominant feedstock for the petrochemical industry. In Australia . . . gas has a very, very great future .\n\nFrom all sources, our country consumes or exports a modest total of approximately one trillion cubic feet of gas each year. Gas is found in a number of places around Australia, but over 90% of national reserves are found offshore of northwestern Australia, where current estimates of gas in place comfortably exceed 100 trillion cubic feet .\n\nThese reserves were effectively found as a co-product in the search for oil, yet on today's economics, only one trillion cubic feet of gas with the appropriate production infrastructure in place is estimated to be worth $A5 billion dollars .\n\nTherefore it may be simplistic, but true, that the undiscounted value of the gas in Australia's northwest, is so far worth a staggering $500 billion dollars and rising .\n\nDespite these mind bending numbers, existing production taps far less than half of 1% of this huge resource each year, a resource which increases almost by accident, from exceedingly modest levels of exploration for oil.\n\nWe at Mermaid recognise that these are solid and compelling reasons to focus our attention unwaveringly on this industry, within this region. To build the company's seagoing assets and strategically blessed shore bases at Dampier, Broome and Darwin with all speed. To lift our professional expertise and productive capability to meet what we have assessed to be an amazing and highly exclusive opportunity.", + "recall": 0.9800995024875622, + "true_md": "## IT’S LOGICAL\n\nMermaid Marine Australia Limited’s future is now inextricably linked to the oil and gas industry. Oil continues to be the main attraction to explorers because of its lower infrastructure costs, early cash flow and easier marketing, but it is gas, which is emerging as the premier fuel.\n\nGas is clean, portable, in massive supply and the environmental answer to so many of today’s atmospheric problems. Together with its sister product, condensate it is also the dominant feedstock for the petrochemical industry. In Australia . . . gas has a very, very great future .\n\nFrom all sources, our country consumes or exports a modest total of approximately one trillion cubic feet of gas each year. Gas is found in a number of places around Australia, but over 90% of national reserves are found offshore of northwestern Australia, where current estimates of gas in place comfortably exceed 100 trillion cubic feet .\n\nThese reserves were effectively found as a co-product in the search for oil, yet on today’s economics, only one trillion cubic feet of gas with the appropriate production infrastructure in place is estimated to be worth $A5 billion dollars .\n\nTherefore it may be simplistic, but true, that the undiscounted value of the gas in Australia’s northwest, is so far worth a staggering $500 billion dollars and rising .\n\nDespite these mind bending numbers, existing production taps far less than half of 1% of this huge resource each year, a resource which increases almost by accident, from exceedingly modest levels of exploration for oil.\n\nWe at Mermaid recognise that these are solid and compelling reasons to focus our attention unwaveringly on this industry, within this region. To build the company’s seagoing assets and strategically blessed shore bases at Dampier, Broome and Darwin with all speed. To lift our professional expertise and productive capability to meet what we have assessed to be an amazing and highly exclusive opportunity." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8914331269535354, + "doc_id": "59a7a66c6ec5e9ff7cc3b9a62684402413f2bab092d0054ee0dd2b6e4e00b48b", + "edit_distance": 0.38243626062322944, + "f1_score": 0.9801699716713882, + "meteor": 0.8352291137523026, + "precision": 0.9829545454545454, + "pred_md": "PERFORMANCE\n\n## Automotive Debt:\n\nDespite higher levels incurred for capital expenditures and R&D, cash generated from operating activities in the automotive division eliminated net automotive debt. Nissan held a ¥205.8 billion yen net cash position at the close of fiscal 2004 in this division.\n\n## Rating\n\nRegarding Nissan's long-term credit rating, R&I upgraded Nissan from A- to A on May 11, 2005. S&P upgraded their rating from BBB to BBB+ on July 20, 2004, and Moody's upgraded from Baa3 to Baa1 on January 29, 2004.\n\n## Investment Policy\n\nCapital expenditures increased by ¥50.2 billion to ¥477.5 billion, representing 5.6 percent of net revenue. This increase included the Canton plant expansion. R&D expenditures increased by ¥43.8 billion to ¥398.1 billion. This increase went to fund new technologies and product development. Our R&D resources are focused on projects that add value to our customers and that will deliver an expected return, in both the short and long term.\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\n## Dividend\n\nAt the annual general meeting of shareholders on June 21, 2005, the company proposed increasing its dividend to ¥24 per share in 2004, up from ¥19 in 2003. In the first year of the NISSAN Value-up dividend policy, the Company plans to increase the per-share dividend to ¥29 in 2005. By the end of NISSAN Value-up in March 2008, Nissan plans to pay an annual dividend of no less than ¥40 per share.\n\n## Return on Invested Capital (ROIC)\n\nNissan's investments are made within the strict guidelines of its automotive operating ROIC. Based on these guidelines, Nissan reached 20.1 percent of ROIC on a consistent basis as of fiscal 2003.\n\n## Dividend Policy\n\n*Forecast\n\n14", + "recall": 0.9774011299435028, + "true_md": "Investment in Our Future\n\nCorporate Rating\n\nPERFORMANCE\n\n## Dividend\n\n## Automotive Debt:\n\n## Rating\n\n## Return on Invested Capital (ROIC)\n\n## Investment Policy\n\n## Dividend Policy\n\n(Dividend per share, in yen)\n\nNissan’s investments are made within the strict guidelines of its automotive operating ROIC. Based on these guidelines, Nissan reached 20.1 percent of ROIC on a consistent basis as of fiscal 2003.\n\nRegarding Nissan’s long-term credit rating, R&I upgraded Nissan from A- to A on May 11, 2005. S&P upgraded their rating from BBB to BBB+ on July 20, 2004, and Moody’s upgraded from Baa3 to Baa1 on January 29, 2004.\n\nCapital expenditures increased by ¥50.2 billion to ¥477.5 billion, representing 5.6 percent of net revenue. This increase included the Canton plant expansion. R&D expenditures increased by ¥43.8 billion to ¥398.1 billion. This increase went to fund new technologies and product development. Our R&D resources are focused on projects that add value to our customers and that will deliver an expected return, in both the short and long term.\n\nAt the annual general meeting of shareholders on June 21, 2005, the company proposed increasing its dividend to ¥24 per share in 2004, up from ¥19 in 2003. In the first year of the NISSAN Value-up dividend policy, the Company plans to increase the per-share dividend to ¥29 in 2005. By the end of NISSAN Value-up in March 2008, Nissan plans to pay an annual dividend of no less than ¥40 per share. \n\nDespite higher levels incurred for capital expenditures and R&D, cash generated from operating activities in the automotive division eliminated net automotive debt. Nissan held a ¥205.8 billion yen net cash position at the close of fiscal 2004 in this division.\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\n14" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8158929804510058, + "doc_id": "072155bc6fabd58c8a01779848bfc06dd283bcec86e0825fcc437a009d0ea51f", + "edit_distance": 0.19896193771626297, + "f1_score": 0.8985507246376813, + "meteor": 0.9443984619624649, + "precision": 0.8857142857142857, + "pred_md": "## DI R E C TO R S ' R E P O R T\n\nat the Company's annual general meeting in November 2000, it was proposed to invite each holder of the above options to subscribe for one new 30 November 2001, 0.75 cent option for each of the above options held on its expiry at a proposed issue price of 1 cent per new option.\n\nThere is no inherent right arising from these options to participate in any new issue of shares in the Company which may be offered to shareholders from time to time prior to the exercise of the options. The Company will ensure however, that during the exercise period, for the purpose of determining entitlement to any new issue, the relevant record date will be at least 12 business days after the new issue is exercised, so as to give the holder of options an opportunity to exercise their options prior to the relevant record date of any new issue.\n\nIn accordance with the provisions of the\n\n## E M P L OY E E S H A R E O P T I O N I N C E N T I V E P L A N\n\nMermaid Marine Australia Limited Employee Share Option Incentive Plan (the 'Employee Option Plan'), as at the date of this report a total of 42 employees have under option an aggregate of 615,000 ordinary shares in the Company. Of the 615,000 ordinary shares under option pursuant to the Employee Option Plan, half (307,500) may be purchased within 12 months of 18 June 2000 at an issue price of 60 cents per share and half (307,500) may be purchased within 12 months of 18 June 2000 at an issue price of 70 cents per share.\n\nHolders of options over unissued shares in the Company do not have the right, by virtue of the option, to participate in any share issue or interest issue of the Company or of any other body corporate or registered scheme.\n\nAs at the date of this report no shares have been issued during or since the end of the Financial Year as a result of the exercise of an option over unissued shares in the Company.\n\n## I NDEMNITIES AND I N S U R A N C E P R E M I U M S F O R O F F I C E R S A N D A U D I T O R S\n\nDuring the Financial Year, Mermaid paid a premium for a contract insuring all of the directors of the Company, the company secretaries and all executive officers of Mermaid against any liability incurred by such director, secretary or executive officer during the course of their duties as such director, secretary or executive officer to the extent permitted by the Corporations Law.\n\nThe policy does not allocate an identifiable part of the premium to specific directors or officers. Accordingly, the premium paid has not been apportioned to directors' remuneration.\n\nThe company has not otherwise during or since the end of the Financial Year, indemnified or agreed to indemnify an officer or auditor of the company against a liability incurred as such officer or auditor.\n\n31", + "recall": 0.9117647058823529, + "true_md": "DIRECTORS’ REPORT\n\nat the Company’s annual general meeting in November 2000, it was proposed to invite each holder of the above options to subscribe for one new 30 November 2001, 0.75 cent option for each of the above options held on its expiry at a proposed issue price of 1 cent per new option.\n\nThere is no inherent right arising from these options to participate in any new issue of shares in the Company which may be offered to shareholders from time to time prior to the exercise of the options. The Company will ensure however, that during the exercise period, for the purpose of determining entitlement to any new issue, the relevant record date will be at least 12 business days after the new issue is exercised, so as to give the holder of options an opportunity to exercise their options prior to the relevant record date of any new issue.\n\nIn accordance with the provisions of the Mermaid Marine Australia Limited Employee Share Option Incentive Plan (the “Employee Option Plan”), as at the date of this report a total of 42 employees have under option an aggregate of 615,000 ordinary shares in the Company. Of the 615,000 ordinary shares under option pursuant to the Employee Option Plan, half (307,500) may be purchased within 12 months of 18 June 2000 at an issue price of 60 cents per share and half (307,500) may be purchased within 12 months of 18 June 2000 at an issue price of 70 cents per share. EMPLOYEE SHARE OPTION INCENTIVE PLAN\n\nHolders of options over unissued shares in the Company do not have the right, by virtue of the option, to participate in any share issue or interest issue of the Company or of any other body corporate or registered scheme.\n\nAs at the date of this report no shares have been issued during or since the end of the Financial Year as a result of the exercise of an option over unissued shares in the Company.\n\nDuring the Financial Year, Mermaid paid a premium for a contract insuring all of the directors of the Company, the company secretaries and all executive officers of Mermaid against any liability incurred by such director, secretary or executive officer during the course of their duties as such director, secretary or executive officer to the extent permitted by the Corporations Law.\n\nThe policy does not allocate an identifiable part of the premium to specific directors or officers. Accordingly, the premium paid has not been apportioned to directors’ remuneration.\n\nThe company has not otherwise during or since the end of the Financial Year, indemnified or agreed to indemnify an officer or auditor of the company against a liability incurred as such officer or auditor.\n\n31\n\n## INDEMNITIES AND INSURANCE PREMIUMS FOR OFFICERS AND AUDIT ORS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9151830939451147, + "doc_id": "6421cd9aef6e78d0d8b4fcf7150e7dfdafc9bd61ce87a057edc8b8100a05914d", + "edit_distance": 0.10888252148997135, + "f1_score": 0.9562500000000002, + "meteor": 0.9569681691710517, + "precision": 0.9745222929936306, + "pred_md": "## SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES\n\n## 2003 Financial Statements\n\n## INDEPENDENT AUDITOR'S REPORT\n\nThe Board of Directors and Shareholders Shenandoah Telecommunications Company:\n\nWe have audited the accompanying consolidated balance sheets of Shenandoah Telecommunications Company and subsidiaries (the Company), as of December 31, 2003, 2002, and 2001, and the related consolidated statements of income, shareholders' equity and comprehensive income, and cash flows for the years then ended. These consolidated financial statements are the responsibility of the Company's management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these consolidated financial statements based on our audits.\n\nWe conducted our audits in accordance with auditing standards generally accepted in the United States of America. Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement. An audit includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements. An audit also includes assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.\n\nIn our opinion, the consolidated financial statements referred to above present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of Shenandoah Telecommunication s Company and subsidiaries as of December 31, 2003, 2002 and 2001, and the results of their operations and their cash flows for the years then ended, in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America.\n\nAs discussed in note 1 to the consolidated financial statements, the Company changed its method of accounting for goodwill in 2002. As further discussed in note 1 to the consolidated financial statements, the Company changed its method of accounting for asset retirement obligations in 2003.\n\nRichmond, Virginia February 6, 2004\n\n11\n\n2003 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n■", + "recall": 0.9386503067484663, + "true_md": "## INDEPENDENT AUDITOR’S REPORT\n\nThe Board of Directors and Shareholde rs Shenandoah Telecommunications Comp any:\n\nWe have audited the accompanying consolidated balance sheets of Shenandoah Telecommunications Company and subsidiaries (the Company), as of De cember 31, 2003, 2002, and 2001, and the related consolidated statements of income, shareholders’ equity and comprehensive income, and cash flows for the years then ended. These consolidated financial statements are the responsibility of the Company’s management. Our res ponsibility is to express an opinion on these consolidated financial statements based on our audits.\n\nWe conducted our audits in accordance with auditing standards generally accepted in the United States of America. Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement. An audit includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements. An audit also includes assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.\n\nIn our opinion, the consolidated financial statements referred to above present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of Shenandoah Telecommunication s Company and subsidiaries as of December 31, 2003, 2002 and 2001, and the results of their operations and their cash flows for the years then ended, in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America.\n\nAs discussed in note 1 to the consolidated financial statements, the Company changed its method of accounting for goodwill in 2002. As further discussed in note 1 to the consolidated financial statements, the Company changed its method of accounting for asset retirement obligations in 2003.\n\n11 ■ 2003 ANNUAL REPORT\n\nRichmond, Virginia February 6, 2004\n\nSHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES\n\n2003 Financial Statements" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8767336184146755, + "doc_id": "2f0494039cd62c1d012b99a462917e4497a016603bf90fa3e731525edd281566", + "edit_distance": 0.4479283314669653, + "f1_score": 0.9185393258426966, + "meteor": 0.8809871370172757, + "precision": 0.9589442815249267, + "pred_md": "## HON INDUSTRIES Inc. and SUBSIDIARIES\n\ncosts are included in selling and administrative expense. Rebates, discounts, and other marketing program expenses directly related to the sale are recorded as a reduction to net sales. Marketing program accruals require the use of management estimates and the consideration of contractual arrangements subject to interpretation. Customer sales that reach certain award levels can affect the amount of such estimates, and actual results could differ from these estimates. Future market conditions may require increased incentive offerings, possibly resulting in an incremental reduction in net sales at the time the incentive is offered.\n\nAllowance for doubtful accounts receivable - The allowance for receivables is based on several factors including overall customer credit quality, historical write-off experience, and specific account analysis that project the ultimate collectibility of the account. As such, these factors may change over time, causing the reserve level to adjust accordingly.\n\nWhen it is determined that a customer is unlikely to pay, a charge is recorded to bad debt expense in the income statement and the allowance for doubtful accounts is increased. When it becomes certain the customer cannot pay, the receivable is written off by removing the accounts receivable amount and reducing the allowance for doubtful accounts accordingly.\n\nAt January 3, 2004, there was approximately $192 million in outstanding accounts receivable and $11 million recorded in the allowance for doubtful accounts to cover all potential future customer non-payments. However, if economic conditions deteriorate significantly or one of our large customers were to declare bankruptcy, a larger allowance for doubtful accounts might be necessary. The allowance for doubtful accounts was approximately $10 million and $17 million at year end 2002 and 2001, respectively.\n\nInventory valuation - The Company values 96% of its inventory by the last-in, first-out (LIFO) method. Additionally, the Company evaluates inventory reserves in terms of excess and obsolete exposure. This evaluation includes such factors as anticipated usage, inventory turnover, inventory levels, and ultimate product sales value. As such, these factors may change over time, causing the reserve level to adjust accordingly.\n\nLong-lived assets - Long-lived assets are reviewed for impairment as events or changes in circumstances occur indicating that the amount\n\nof the asset reflected in the Company's balance sheet may not be recoverable. An estimate of undiscounted cash flows produced by the asset, or the appropriate group of assets, is compared to the carrying value to determine whether impairment exists. The estimates of future cash flows involve considerable management judgment and are based upon assumptions about future operating performance. The actual cash flows could differ from management's estimates due to changes in business conditions, operating performance, and economic conditions. Asset impairment charges associated with the Company's restructuring activities are discussed in the Restructuring Related Charges note.\n\nThe Company's continuous focus on improving the manufacturing process tends to increase the likelihood of assets being replaced; therefore, the Company is constantly evaluating the expected useful lives of its equipment, which can result in accelerated depreciation. Additionally, the Company recorded losses on the disposal of assets in the amount of $1 million and $5 million in 2003 and 2002, respectively, as a result of its rapid continuous improvement initiatives.\n\nGoodwill and other intangibles - In accordance with the Statement of Financial Accounting Standards ('SFAS') No. 142, the Company evaluates its goodwill for impairment on an annual basis based on values at the end of third quarter or whenever indicators of impairment exist. The Company has evaluated its goodwill for impairment and has determined that the fair value of the reporting units exceeded their carrying value, so no impairment of goodwill was recognized. Goodwill of approximately $192 million is shown on the consolidated balance sheet as of the end of fiscal 2003.\n\nManagement's assumptions about future cash flows for the reporting units require significant judgment and actual cash flows in the future may differ significantly from those forecasted today. We believe our assumptions used in discounting future cash flows would have no impact on the reported carrying amount of goodwill. The estimated future cash flow for any reporting unit could be reduced by 50% without decreasing the fair value to less than the carrying value.\n\nThe Company also determines the fair value of an indefinite lived trademark on an annual basis or whenever indication of impairment exists. The Company has evaluated its trademark for impairment and has determined that the fair market value of the trademark exceeds its carrying value, so no impairment was recognized. The carrying value of the trademark was approximately $8 million at the end of fiscal 2003.\n\n33", + "recall": 0.8814016172506739, + "true_md": "H O N I N D U S T R I E S I n c . a n d S U B S I D I A R I E S\n\ncosts are included in selling and administrative expense. Rebates, discounts, and other marketing program expenses directly related to the sale are recorded as a reduction to net sales. Marketing program accruals require the use of management estimates and the consider- ation of contractual arrangements subject to interpretation. Customer sales that reach certain award levels can affect the amount of such estimates, and actual results could differ from these estimates. Future market conditions may require increased incentive offerings, possibly resulting in an incremental reduction in net sales at the time the incentive is offered.\n\nAllowance for doubtful accounts receivable – The allowance for receivables is based on several factors including overall customer credit quality, historical write-off experience, and specific account analysis that project the ultimate collectibility of the account. As such, these factors may change over time, causing the reserve level to adjust accordingly. \n\nWhen it is determined that a customer is unlikely to pay, a charge is recorded to bad debt expense in the income statement and the allowance for doubtful accounts is increased. When it becomes certain the customer cannot pay, the receivable is written off by removing the accounts receivable amount and reducing the allowance for doubtful accounts accordingly.\n\nAt January 3, 2004, there was approximately $192 million in outstanding accounts receivable and $11 million recorded in the allow- ance for doubtful accounts to cover all potential future customer non-payments. However, if economic conditions deteriorate signifi- cantly or one of our large customers were to declare bankruptcy, a larger allowance for doubtful accounts might be necessary. The allowance for doubtful accounts was approximately $10 million and $17 million at year end 2002 and 2001, respectively.\n\nInventory valuation – The Company values 96% of its inventory by the last-in, first-out (LIFO) method. Additionally, the Company evalu- ates inventory reserves in terms of excess and obsolete exposure. This evaluation includes such factors as anticipated usage, inventory turn- over, inventory levels, and ultimate product sales value. As such, these factors may change over time, causing the reserve level to adjust accordingly. \n\nLong-lived assets – Long-lived assets are reviewed for impairment as events or changes in circumstances occur indicating that the amount \n\nThe Company also determines the fair value of an indefinite lived trademark on an annual basis or whenever indication of impair- ment exists. The Company has evaluated its trademark for impairment and has determined that the fair market value of the trademark exceeds its carrying value, so no impairment was recognized. The car- rying value of the trademark was approximately $8 million at the end of fiscal 2003.\n\nManagement’s assumptions about future cash flows for the reporting units require significant judgment and actual cash flows in the future may differ significantly from those forecasted today. We believe our assumptions used in discounting future cash flows would have no impact on the reported carrying amount of goodwill. The esti- mated future cash flow for any reporting unit could be reduced by 50% without decreasing the fair value to less than the carrying value.\n\nGoodwill and other intangibles – In accordance with the Statement of Financial Accounting Standards (“SFAS”) No. 142, the Company evaluates its goodwill for impairment on an annual basis based on values at the end of third quarter or whenever indicators of impairment exist. The Company has evaluated its goodwill for impair- ment and has determined that the fair value of the reporting units exceeded their carrying value, so no impairment of goodwill was recog- nized. Goodwill of approximately $192 million is shown on the consolidated balance sheet as of the end of fiscal 2003.\n\nThe Company’s continuous focus on improving the manufac- turing process tends to increase the likelihood of assets being replaced; therefore, the Company is constantly evaluating the expected useful lives of its equipment, which can result in accelerated depreciation. Additionally, the Company recorded losses on the disposal of assets in the amount of $1 million and $5 million in 2003 and 2002, respec- tively, as a result of its rapid continuous improvement initiatives.\n\nof the asset reflected in the Company’s balance sheet may not be recov- erable. An estimate of undiscounted cash flows produced by the asset, or the appropriate group of assets, is compared to the carrying value to determine whether impairment exists. The estimates of future cash flows involve considerable management judgment and are based upon assumptions about future operating performance. The actual cash flows could differ from management’s estimates due to changes in business conditions, operating performance, and economic conditions. Asset impairment charges associated with the Company’s restructuring activities are discussed in the Restructuring Related Charges note.\n\n33" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7760114635728617, + "doc_id": "90ab4e1e8c3f9a7df6f363c70058dcd3a79dfe1b5e57323d8aaa74f2774ed9a3", + "edit_distance": 0.2, + "f1_score": 0.9166666666666667, + "meteor": 0.9753274616079494, + "precision": 0.8461538461538461, + "pred_md": "emmis communications one emmis plaza 40 monument circle indianapolis, indiana 46204\n\n## ¤", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "emmis communications one emmis plaza 40 monument circle indianapolis, indiana 46204" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9294729068228139, + "doc_id": "39b9c23a36fb027af5651b0d65f8aca45b60c1aa6d304dd67c9553f8987a625c", + "edit_distance": 0.44272445820433437, + "f1_score": 0.9786535303776682, + "meteor": 0.9199578651040811, + "precision": 0.9738562091503268, + "pred_md": "Santos is investing in the future of Australia's petroleum industry through the funding of the Australian School of Petroleum at the University of Adelaide.\n\nbe working in business operations with a lean and efficient corporate and services group.\n\nWith the exception of a small number of project teams, all non-award based positions in the Company were declared vacant and a selection process commenced around a set of criteria designed to ensure that people with the right skills and the ability to successfully grow Santos were appointed. As is often the case with transformational change initiatives, not everyone was re-appointed and, as a result, the workforce was reduced by 9%.\n\n## CULTURE CHANGE\n\nThe need to develop a culture that supports the newly designed business processes was another of the major outcomes of the change program. A Santos-wide culture change program led by employees is currently underway.\n\nThis long-term program is designed to ensure that the way employees work together enhances Santos' ability to be successful.\n\nOne of the first tasks undertaken was a voluntary employee survey to identify the gaps between the existing culture and the desired culture. The outcomes of the survey will assist in the development of programs and activities that will better align work practices with Santos' strategic goals.\n\n## TRAINING AND DEVELOPING PEOPLE\n\nMaking sure training and development supports current and future business requirements, and provides opportunities for people to develop their skills to achieve optimum performance, are key aspects of Santos' human resources strategy.\n\nSantos has a number of long-term projects underway which will optimise the substantial investment the Company makes in training people. Importantly, these projects will deliver programs that are targeted to meet business and individual needs and to support culture change initiatives.\n\n## BANKSIA AWARDS\n\nSantos was selected in 2004 as a finalist in the Banksia Environmental Awards for the work undertaken in the Companyled initiative to protect the world-renowned Coongie Lakes, resulting in the area being declared a new National Park by the South Australian Government.\n\nAs a finalist for this award Santos was recognised for its leadership role in bringing together a group of disparate parties to develop a Memorandum of Understanding recommending further protection for the Coongie Lakes.\n\n## WASTE MANAGEMENT\n\nSantos trialled innovative waste management techniques during 2004 to reduce the volume of hydrocarbon waste generated from Cooper Basin operations. Preliminary results indicate that these waste volumes can be reduced to 3-5% of their original volume, which is a significant achievement.\n\nThis technology will be implemented where possible\n\n## OIL SPILL VOLUMES\n\nm 3\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\nacross Santos operations. The long-term environmental and financial benefits of using this technology are expected to be considerable.\n\n## REDUCED OIL SPILLS\n\nThere was a substantial reduction in the volume of hydrocarbons released to the environment in 2004, with uncontained hydrocarbons spilt reducing from 1,943 cubic metres to 83 cubic metres and Santos continues to focus on reducing oil spills.\n\n## GREENHOUSE POLICY\n\nSantos released its Greenhouse Policy in 2004 to drive performance improvements in this area through reducing emissions and producing oil and gas more efficiently.\n\nSantos' Greenhouse Policy is being rolled out across the organisation through crossfunctional greenhouse gas teams that have the right skill sets and responsibilities to progress this initiative. These teams will manage Greenhouse Policy and regulation, carbon management and trading opportunities, and energy efficiency. A key internal driver for emissions reduction will be the promotion of energy efficiency.\n\nSantos is committed to achieving effective emission reduction targets, to the pursuit of energy efficiency strategies and to the identification and implementation\n\n27", + "recall": 0.9834983498349835, + "true_md": "be working in business operations with a lean and efficient corporate and services group.\n\nWith the exception of a small number of project teams, all non-award based positions in the Company were declared vacant and a selection process commenced around a set of criteria designed to ensure that people with the right skills and the ability to successfully grow Santos were appointed. As is often the case with transformational change initiatives, not everyone was re-appointed and, as a result, the workforce was reduced by 9%.\n\n## TRAINING AND DEVELOPING PEOPLE\n\n## CULTURE CHANGE\n\n## BANKSIA AWARDS\n\n## GREENHOUSE POLICY\n\n## WASTE MANAGEMENT\n\nSantos is investing in the future of Australia’s petroleum industry through the funding of the Australian School of Petroleum at the University of Adelaide.\n\nThis long-term program is designed to ensure that the way employees work together enhances Santos’ ability to be successful. \n\nOne of the first tasks undertaken was a voluntary employee survey to identify the gaps between the existing culture and the desired culture. The outcomes of the survey will assist in the development of programs and activities that will better align work practices with Santos’ strategic goals.\n\nThe need to develop a culture that supports the newly designed business processes was another of the major outcomes of the change program. A Santos-wide culture change program led by employees is currently underway.\n\nMaking sure training and development supports current and future business requirements, and provides opportunities for people to develop their skills to achieve optimum performance, are key aspects of Santos’ human resources strategy. \n\nSantos has a number of long-term projects underway which will optimise the substantial investment the Company makes in training people. Importantly, these projects will deliver programs that are targeted to meet business and individual needs and to support culture change initiatives.\n\nacross Santos operations. The long-term environmental and financial benefits of using this technology are expected to be considerable.\n\n## REDUCED OIL SPILLS\n\nSantos was selected in 2004 as a finalist in the Banksia Environmental Awards for the work undertaken in the Company- led initiative to protect the world-renowned Coongie Lakes, resulting in the area being declared a new National Park by the South Australian Government. As a finalist for this award Santos was recognised for its leadership role in bringing together a group of disparate parties to develop a Memorandum of Understanding recommending further protection for the Coongie Lakes.\n\nThere was a substantial reduction in the volume of hydrocarbons released to the environment in 2004, with uncontained hydrocarbons spilt reducing from 1,943 cubic metres to 83 cubic metres and Santos continues to focus on reducing oil spills.\n\nSantos released its Greenhouse Policy in 2004 to drive performance improvements in this area through reducing emissions and producing oil and gas more efficiently.\n\nSantos’ Greenhouse Policy is being rolled out across the organisation through cross- functional greenhouse gas teams that have the right skill sets and responsibilities to progress this initiative. These teams will manage Greenhouse Policy and regulation, carbon management and trading opportunities, and energy efficiency. A key internal driver for emissions reduction will be the promotion of energy efficiency.\n\nSantos is committed to achieving effective emission reduction targets, to the pursuit of energy efficiency strategies and to the identification and implementation\n\nSantos trialled innovative waste management techniques during 2004 to reduce the volume of hydrocarbon waste generated from Cooper Basin operations. Preliminary results indicate that these waste volumes can be reduced to 3-5% of their original volume, which is a significant achievement. \n\nThis technology will be implemented where possible\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\n27" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.49677395712637434, + "doc_id": "75a44e1854a7c1f5a2468a5f232df6956c61caa69cf9bf1afc436cffcecfbee9", + "edit_distance": 0.3987730061349693, + "f1_score": 0.8224299065420562, + "meteor": 0.7631399411962625, + "precision": 0.8148148148148148, + "pred_md": "C O R N I N G T E C H N O L O G I E S\n\nCorning's historical success stems from its foundation as an vative technology company. Our diverse portfolio of busines spans a wide range of markets, and this is one of the main r we are weathering the downturn in the telecommunications sec The businesses we classify as Corning Technologies - led by o liquid-crystal display (LCD) glass, environmental, and semi ductor optics operations - were strong and profitable in 20 with aggressive plans for significant growth during 2003.\n\nOur LCD glass business has been a star performer, posti year-over-year volume gains of more than 45 percent. We are leading producer in this market. Our sales of glass for de monitors have doubled over the past year alone - and there's s plenty of room for more growth, since only about a quarte desktop displays sold in 2002 were LCD. And, LCD TVs are just beginning to gain popularity - we consider this one o next big opportunities, as the number of LCD TVs sold annua more than doubled in 2002. Our EAGLE ™ 2000 glass substrates and other product and process innovations are enabling manuf turers to produce lighter, larger, thinner and higher-res displays more affordably - exactly what the market is demandin\n\nF L A T P A N E L D I S P L A Y G L A S S : L C D T E L E V I S I O N S\n\nD E S K T O P M O N I T O R S A N D L A P T O P S\n\nD E S K T O P M O N I T O R S A N D L A P T O P S\n\n4", + "recall": 0.8301886792452831, + "true_md": "C ORNING T ECHNOLOGIES\n\nCorning’s historical success stems from its foundation as an inno- vative technology company. Our diverse portfolio of businesses spans a wide range of markets, and this is one of the main reasons we are weathering the downturn in the telecommunications sector. The businesses we classify as Corning Technologies — led by our liquid-crystal display (LCD) glass, environmental, and semicon- ductor optics operations — were strong and profitable in 2002, with aggressive plans for significant growth during 2003. \n\nOur LCD glass business has been a star performer, posting year-over-year volume gains of more than 45 percent. We are the leading producer in this market. Our sales of glass for desktop monitors have doubled over the past year alone — and there’s still plenty of room for more growth, since only about a quarter of desktop displays sold in 2002 were LCD. And, LCD TVs are just beginning to gain popularity — we consider this one of our next big opportunities, as the number of LCD TVs sold annually more than doubled in 2002. Our EAGLE 2000™ glass substrates and other product and process innovations are enabling manufac- turers to produce lighter, larger, thinner and higher-resolution displays more affordably — exactly what the market is demanding.\n\nF LAT P ANEL D ISPLAY G LASS: LCD TELEVISIONS\n\nDESKTOP MONIT ORS AND LAPTOPS\n\n4" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "cc1150e67102e7f7a56b44bd6bd1e40fe300b94461ff035b8a3922277392de52", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9921875, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Annual Report 2004\n\n73", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Annual Report 2004 73" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "e63f9e6a32c20708661cdcb7faa3fc0eff389144d9feb9a0ce21120a19e02282", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9921875, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## emmis entities\n\n## RADIO\n\n## Austin\n\n## Chicago\n\n## Indianapolis\n\n## Los Angeles\n\n## New York\n\n## Phoenix\n\n## TELEVISION\n\n## St. Louis\n\n## Terre Haute\n\n## PUBLISHING\n\n## INTERNATIONAL\n\n## RELATED BUSINESSES\n\nKDHT-FM (93.3), Rhythmic CHR KEYI-FM (103.5), Oldies KGSR-FM (107.1), Adult Alternative KLBJ-AM (590), News/Talk KLBJ-FM (93.7), Album Oriented Rock KROX-FM (101.5), Alternative Rock\n\nWKQX-FM (101.1), Alternative Rock\n\nWENS-FM (97.1), Adult Contemporary WIBC-AM (1070), News/Talk/Sports WNOU-FM (93.1), CHR WYXB-FM (105.7), Soft Adult Contemporary Network Indiana, Statewide news network\n\nKPWR-FM (105.9), Hip-Hop/R&B KZLA-FM (93.9), Country \n\nWQCD-FM (101.9), Smooth Jazz WQHT-FM (97.7), Hip-Hop WRKS-FM(98.7), Classic Soul/Today’s R&B\n\nKKFR-FM(92.3), Rhythmic CHR KKLT-FM (98.7), Adult Contemporary KMVP-AM (860), Sports KTAR-AM (620), News/Talk/Sports\n\nKFTK-FM (97.1), Talk KIHT-FM (96.3), Classic Hits KPNT-FM (105.7), Alternative Rock KSHE-FM (94.7), Album Oriented Rock WRDA-FM (104.1), New Standards\n\nWTHI-FM (99.9), Country WWVR-FM (105.5), Classic Rock \n\nAlbuquerque, N.M., KRQE-TV (Channel 13), CBS programming/local news\n\nFort Myers, Fla., WFTX-TV (Channel 4), Fox programming/local news\n\nGreen Bay, Wis., WLUK-TV (Channel 11), Fox programming/local news\n\nHonolulu, KHON-TV (Channel 2), Fox programming/local news\n\nHonolulu, KGMB-TV (Channel 9), CBS programming/local news\n\nHuntington/Charleston, W.Va., WSAZ-TV (Channel 3), NBC programming/local news\n\nMobile, Ala./Pensacola, Fla., WALA-TV (Channel 10), Fox programming/local news\n\nMobile, Ala./Pensacola, Fla., WBPG-TV (Channel 55), WB programming\n\nNew Orleans, WVUE-TV (Channel 8), Fox programming/local news\n\nOmaha, Neb., KMTV-TV (Channel 3), CBS programming/local news\n\nEmmis Books Emmis Interactive RDS\n\nHungary, Sláger Rádió, Classic Rock/local programming Belgium, nine stations serving the Flanders region\n\nAtlanta Country Sampler Cincinnati Indianapolis Monthly Los Angeles Texas Monthly \n\nOrlando, Fla., WKCF-TV (Channel 18), WB programming\n\nPortland, Ore., KOIN-TV (Channel 6), CBS programming/local news\n\nTerre Haute, Ind., WTHI-TV (Channel 10), CBS programming/local news\n\nTopeka, Kan., KSNT-TV (Channel 27), NBC programming/local news\n\nTucson, Ariz., KGUN-TV (Channel 9), ABC programming/local news\n\nWichita, Kan., KSNW-TV (Channel 3), NBC programming/local news" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.918023879755291, + "doc_id": "cc79f628d10fc28c7e795e1261f09aaad242b69fecbacfe4ccc94b3ce96bb26f", + "edit_distance": 0.5172413793103449, + "f1_score": 0.9788235294117646, + "meteor": 0.8819297821625846, + "precision": 0.9811320754716981, + "pred_md": "28\n\nSantos employees rehabilitating a section of the River Torrens in Adelaide, as part of Santos' three-year commitment to the Our Patch project.\n\nof opportunities to use fewer greenhouse-emitting or renewable sources of energy.\n\nTo achieve these commitments Santos is actively pursuing an emissions intensity reduction target (greenhouse emissions per unit of production) of 20% in the period from 2002 to 2008.\n\n## SUPPORTING COMMUNITIES\n\nSantos has relationships with a number of communities where it operates. Some have been longterm and others are just beginning. Relationships with communities outside Australia, such as Indonesia and the United States, are also emerging as Santos' business grows in these locations.\n\nSantos made contributions during 2004 to a wide variety of organisations and events through the sponsorship program as part of the Company's commitment to supporting the communities to which it belongs.\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\nPartnerships continued in 2004 with the Australian School of Petroleum, the Adelaide Symphony Orchestra, the State Opera Company of South Australia, the Art Gallery of South Australia and the Lloyd McDermott Foundation.\n\nOne of the highlights of the 2004 program was the establishment of the Santos Community Fund. It brings together all of the contributions Santos makes to community-based organisations and recognises and supports the efforts of Santos employees who choose to contribute their own time and resources to improving their communities.\n\nThe 'Our Patch' program was a recipient of this fund in 2004. This is a joint initiative of the Patawalonga and Torrens Catchment Management Boards which encourages the local community to assist with the rehabilitation and management of Adelaide's water catchment.\n\nSantos has adopted a patch of the River Torrens and employees are assisting with the remediation and revegetation of this area in a volunteering program.\n\n## CORPORATE GOVERNANCE\n\nFor the third year running, the integrity of Santos' corporate governance was recognised in 2004 with the maximum five-star rating in the Corporate Governance Research Report prepared by Horwath and the University of Newcastle.\n\nA more detailed overview of corporate governance at Santos follows on page 29 of this Annual Report.\n\nMore detailed information about sustainability at Santos is contained in the Sustainability Review and copies are available from the Company and via the Santos website www.santos.com.", + "recall": 0.9765258215962441, + "true_md": "Santos employees rehabilitating a section of the River Torrens in Adelaide as part of Santos’ three-year commitment to the Our Patch project.\n\nof opportunities to use fewer greenhouse-emitting or renewable sources of energy. \n\nTo achieve these commitments Santos is actively pursuing an emissions intensity reduction target (greenhouse emissions per unit of production) of 20% in the period from 2002 to 2008.\n\nSantos has relationships with a number of communities where it operates. Some have been long- term and others are just beginning. Relationships with communities outside Australia, such as Indonesia and the United States, are also emerging as Santos’ business grows in these locations.\n\nPartnerships continued in 2004 with the Australian School of Petroleum, the Adelaide Symphony Orchestra, the State Opera Company of South Australia, the Art Gallery of South Australia and the Lloyd McDermott Foundation.\n\nOne of the highlights of the 2004 program was the establishment of the Santos Community Fund. It brings together all of the contributions Santos makes to community-based organisations and recognises and supports the efforts of Santos employees who choose to contribute their own time and resources to improving their communities.\n\nFor the third year running, the integrity of Santos’ corporate governance was recognised in 2004 with the maximum five-star rating in the Corporate Governance Research Report prepared by Horwath and the University of Newcastle.\n\nSantos has adopted a patch of the River Torrens and employees are assisting with the remediation and revegetation of this area in a volunteering program.\n\nA more detailed overview of corporate governance at Santos follows on page 29 of this Annual Report.\n\nMore detailed information about sustainability at Santos is contained in the Sustainability Review and copies are available from the Company and via the Santos website www.santos.com.\n\nThe ‘Our Patch’ program was a recipient of this fund in 2004. This is a joint initiative of the Patawalonga and Torrens Catchment Management Boards which encourages the local community to assist with the rehabilitation and management of Adelaide’s water catchment.\n\nSantos made contributions during 2004 to a wide variety of organisations and events through the sponsorship program as part of the Company’s commitment to supporting the communities to which it belongs.\n\n## CORPORATE GOVERNANCE\n\n## SUPPORTING COMMUNITIES\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\n28" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.020211173084499982, + "doc_id": "43b9cddb8e5a1e3069d80c14bdade8ad7f6a2d1beb00c79ab1d55b9a5614cfeb", + "edit_distance": 0.9665809768637532, + "f1_score": 0.12745098039215688, + "meteor": 0.26565286308698244, + "precision": 0.06806282722513089, + "pred_md": "42\n\n## SANTOS GROUP INTERESTS\n\n## As at 28 February 2005\n\n## QUEENSLAND\n\n(PL = Petroleum Lease; PPL = Pipeline Licence)\n\n## South-West Queensland *\n\nATP 259P\n\nNaccowlah (PLs 23-26, 35, 36, 62, 76-79, 82, 87, 105, 107, 109, 133, 149, 175, 181, 182 & 189 55.5\n\nTotal 66 (PLs 34, 37, 63, 68, 75, 84, 88, 110, 129, 130, 134, 140, 142-144, 150, 168, 178, 186, 193, PPL8 & PPL14)\n\n70.0\n\nWareena (PLs 113, 114, 141, 145, 148, 153, 157, 158, 187 & 188)\n\n61.2\n\nInnamincka (PLs 58, 80, 136, 137, 156 & 159)\n\n70.0\n\nAlkina\n\n72.0\n\nAquitaine A (PLs 86, 131, 146, 177 & 208)\n\n52.5\n\nAquitaine B (PLs 59-61, 81, 83, 85, 97, 106, 108, 111, 112, 132, 135, 139, 147, 151, 152, 155, 205 & 207)\n\n55.0\n\nAquitaine C (PLs 138 & 154)\n\n47.8\n\n50/40/10 (PL 55)\n\n60.0\n\nSWQ Unit (PLs 12-13, 16-18, 31, 34, 36-40, 46-48, 62, 64-72, 78-82, 84, 86, 94-96, 98, 100, 101 & 105 and in South Australia PLs 5, 9 & 15)\n\n60.1\n\nATP 267P (Nockatunga) (PLs 33, 50 & 51)\n\n59.1\n\nATP 299P (Tintaburra) (PLs 29, 38, 39, 52, 57, 95, 169 & 170)\n\n89.0\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\n## VICTORIA\n\n## OFFSHORE SOUTH AUSTRALIA\n\n## OFFSHORE TASMANIA\n\n## NORTHERN TERRITORY\n\n## Amadeus Basin\n\nOL 3 (Palm Valley)\n\n48.0\n\nLs 4 and 5 (Mereenie)*\n\n65.0\n\nRL2 (Dingo)*\n\n65.7\n\nMereenie-Brewer Estate Pipeline*\n\n65.0\n\n## OFFSHORE NORTHERN AUSTRALIA", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## SANTOS GROUP INTERESTS\n\nAs at 28 February 2005\n\n42\n\nAnnual Report 2004" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8951966583914103, + "doc_id": "79b3b01ed813f528118e4765b1c823976e68211e9da84772142b8d2fcb80acfd", + "edit_distance": 0.3684210526315789, + "f1_score": 0.9384164222873902, + "meteor": 0.8794496917314174, + "precision": 0.960960960960961, + "pred_md": "The most important measurement in manufacturing is the global cost per unit. During NISSAN 180, we achieved a cost reduction of 14 percent per unit, including indirect costs, or 8.3 percent in direct costs. We also evaluate our performance in time to delivery using three different measures. One measure is from customer to customer, and the time from order to delivery-an especially important calculation for our build-to-order system. We've reduced this interval to 24 or 25 days, and have set a target of about 18 days.\n\nThe second measure is from the 'model freeze' stage until the start of production, which is an important factor for both manufacturing and R&D. With the recent launch of the Note in Japan, we brought this down to 10.5 months for the first time. The third measure is the time from the start of production to full production. The standard is about two months. Our target is two weeks, which we achieved with both the Tiida and the Note. While a faster rate could present quality issues, we produced these two cars with speed and high quality.\n\nThe second of our 'never-ending' quests at Nissan is greater synchronization, or douki . With the Nissan Production Way, we are aiming to shorten production pipelines. The process begins with the customer's order, which includes items such as colors and specifications. Based on this, we make the production plan, establish the sequence and determine the shipping time. We broadcast this information to all players at the same time, within Nissan and our suppliers, and not just in the order of need. If there is any problem, everyone immediately recognizes it. This makes quick action possible. The same can be said of what we call the 'fishbone system.' Instead of a strictly linear production line, this system features a constant, parallel introduction of supplies to the operation similar in construction to skeleton of a fish. We also utilize the 'strike zone,' where supplies must be delivered within the reach of the factory workers, which improves quality and productivity. This is related to logistics, so we involve our production partners from the early stages of planning.\n\n## North America MANUFACTURING IN NORTH AMERICA\n\nDAN GAUDETTE Senior Vice President Nissan North America\n\nDAN GAUDETTE Senior Vice President Nissan North America\n\n'I am proud to say that Nissan's U.S. plants have long been among the most efficient in the country. We've topped the Harbour Report automotive assembly rankings for the past 12 years. We are now operating at close to full capacity. The Smyrna and Canton plants, which can produce 550,000 and 400,000 vehicles a year, respectively, are running at approximately 85 percent of total capacity.\n\n'In North America, our manufacturing flexibility gives us a competitive advantage. Both Smyrna and Canton are set up to produce five models each, and we can react to market changes quickly. We also recognize that we may need to boost capacity in the future due to expected growth and increases in exports to various countries.\n\n'To us, the Canton plant embodied the principles of NISSAN 180. We had to be prepared to launch and immediately produce five all-new vehicles. At the same time, we were taking the Decherd plant from an annual capacity of 250,000 engines up to 950,000, including two brand-new engines. That was a challenging and exciting time.\n\n'Today, we are pleased that our results in the recent J. D. Power and Associates Initial Quality Study show significant improvement over the prior year, and we're determined to move beyond that level. We will continue to rely heavily on the Nissan Production Way as our guide, focusing on being quality-driven and waste-free.'\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\n51\n\nOUR WORK", + "recall": 0.9169054441260746, + "true_md": "The most important measurement in manufacturing is the global cost per unit. During NISSAN 180, we achieved a cost reduction of 14 percent per unit, including indirect costs, or 8.3 percent in direct costs. We also evaluate our performance in time to delivery using three different measures. One measure is from customer to customer, and the time from order to delivery—an especially important calculation for our build-to-order system. We’ve reduced this interval to 24 or 25 days, and have set a target of about 18 days. \n\nThe second measure is from the “model freeze” stage until the start of production, which is an important factor for both manufacturing and R&D. With the recent launch of the Note in Japan, we brought this down to 10.5 months for the first time. The third measure is the time from the start of production to full production. The standard is about two months. Our target is two weeks, which we achieved with both the Tiida and the Note. While a faster rate could present quality issues, we produced these two cars with speed and high quality. \n\nThe second of our ‘never-ending’ quests at Nissan is greater synchronization, or douki . With the Nissan Production Way, we are aiming to shorten production pipelines. The process begins with the customer’s order, which includes items such as colors and specifications. Based on this, we make the production plan, establish the sequence and determine the shipping time. We broadcast this information to all players at the same time, within Nissan and our suppliers, and not just in the order of need. If there is any problem, everyone immediately recognizes it. This makes quick action possible. The same can be said of what we call the “fishbone system.” Instead of a strictly linear production line, this system features a constant, parallel introduction of supplies to the operation similar in construction to skeleton of a fish. We also utilize the ‘strike zone,’ where supplies must be delivered within the reach of the factory workers, which improves quality and productivity. This is related to logistics, so we involve our production partners from the early stages of planning.\n\nOUR WORK\n\n“To us, the Canton plant embodied the principles of NISSAN 180. We had to be prepared to launch and immediately produce five all-new vehicles. At the same time, we were taking the Decherd plant from an annual capacity of 250,000 engines up to 950,000, including two brand-new engines. That was a challenging and exciting time.\n\n“Today, we are pleased that our results in the recent J. D. Power and Associates Initial Quality Study show significant improvement over the prior year, and we’re determined to move beyond that level. We will continue to rely heavily on the Nissan Production Way as our guide, focusing on being quality-driven and waste-free.”\n\n“In North America, our manufacturing flexibility gives us a competitive advantage. Both Smyrna and Canton are set up to produce five models each, and we can react to market changes quickly. We also recognize that we may need to boost capacity in the future due to expected growth and increases in exports to various countries.\n\n“I am proud to say that Nissan’s U.S. plants have long been among the most efficient in the country. We’ve topped the Harbour Report automotive assembly rankings for the past 12 years. We are now operating at close to full capacity. The Smyrna and Canton plants, which can produce 550,000 and 400,000 vehicles a year, respectively, are running at approximately 85 percent of total capacity. or rt th h A Am me er ri ic ca a\n\n## N No or rt th h A Am me er ri ic ca MANUFACTURING IN NORTH AMERICA\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 51\n\nDAN GAUDETTE Senior Vice President Nissan North America" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7072645827054039, + "doc_id": "7f6bc09243bfe769aade393fef428177ee4b49543773558a70e384e8a16aa0b7", + "edit_distance": 0.3218390804597701, + "f1_score": 0.8728813559322034, + "meteor": 0.8714745754158125, + "precision": 0.911504424778761, + "pred_md": "## …TO DELIVER ON THE STRATEGY\n\nSantos continues to tap into the spirit and commitment of the entrepreneurs and explorers who laid the Company's foundations as we deliver on our growth strategy.\n\nToday, Santos is a major Australian oil and gas exploration and production company growing a global energy business through:\n\n## LEVERAGING BASE BUSINESS\n\nCreating value from the base business through environment, health, safety and operational excellence, optimisation programs and cost leadership.\n\n## CREATING OPPORTUNITIES\n\nMaximising the value of the exploration program, building a better and more balanced portfolio and pursuing new opportunities.\n\n## CAPTURING AND DELIVERING GROWTH\n\nCommencing new production, advancing key projects, extracting value from our infrastructure position and seeking innovative commercial arrangements.\n\n## MANAGING OPTIONS\n\nDelivering improved returns, strong cash flow and reserve replacement through disciplined portfolio management, strategic acquisitions and divestments, and making sustainable progress.\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\n1", + "recall": 0.8373983739837398, + "true_md": "## …T DELIVER ON THE STRATEGY\n\nSantos continues to ta into the spirit and commitment of the entrepreneurs and explorers who laid the Company’s foundations as we deliver on our growth strateg y.\n\nToday, Santos is a major Australian oil and gas exploration and production company growing a global energy business through:\n\n## LEVERAGING B ASE BUSINESS\n\n## CREATING OPPORTUNITIES\n\n## CAPTURING AND DELIVERING GR OWTH\n\n## MANAGING OPTIONS\n\nAnnual Report 2004 1\n\nCreating value from th base business through environment, health, safety and operation al excellence, optimisation programs and cost lead ership.\n\nMaximising the value of th exploration program, building a better and more balanced portfolio and pursuing new opportunities.\n\nCommencing new production, advancing key projects, extracting value from our infrastructure position and seeking innovative commer cial arrangements.\n\nDelivering improved returns, strong cash flow and reserve replacement through disciplin ed portfolio management, strategic acquisitions an divestments, and making sustainable progress." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9777864594599202, + "doc_id": "580bb58cc6a7923a46d7cf267b868e27274c05fe7f6371eafd5ec0dd3f10ab2b", + "edit_distance": 0.015977443609022556, + "f1_score": 0.9889196675900277, + "meteor": 0.9865428914155473, + "precision": 0.9916666666666667, + "pred_md": "SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES MANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS\n\nFacility lease revenue contributed $5.5 million to wireline revenues, a decrease of $0.2 million or 3.5%. The decrease was primarily the result of the prolonged decline of lease rates associated with competitive pricing pressures and the economic downturn in the telecommunications industry. During 2002 the Company completed a second, diverse fiber route to its existing interconnection point in the Dulles airport area of Northern Virginia. This fiber route provides increased reliability for customers in the event of fiber cuts or breaks, and extends the availability of the Company's fiber network to additional market locations but to date has not added additional revenue to the Company's operation.\n\nBilling and collection services and other revenues contributed $0.4 million to wireline revenues, which was the same as 2002 results. Revenues from this service had declined in recent years, with interexchange carriers now issuing a greater proportion of their bills directly to their customers.\n\nWireline revenues from cable television services were $4.4 million, an increase of $0.1 million or 1.7%. The number of subscribers and service plan prices remained relatively constant during 2003.\n\nOther revenues, primarily consisting of Internet and 511Virginia service revenues were $5.8 million in 2003, an increase of $0.7 million or 13.5%. The Company had 17,420 dial-up Internet subscribers at December 31, 2003, compared to 18,050 at the end of the previous year. During 2003, the Company's DSL high-speed Internet access subscriber count increased to 1,298 from 646. Total Internet service revenue was $4.5 million, an increase of $0.3 million or 10.7%. The 511Virginia contract with the Virginia Department of Transportation contributed $1.3 million to other revenues, an increase of $0.4 million or 41.3%. Telecommunications equipment sales, services and lease revenues were $1.1 million, which reflects a $0.1 million decrease from 2002 results.\n\nTotal operating expenses were $87.2 million, an increase of $3.6 million or 4.3%. The primary driver in the increase in operating expenses is continued growth in the PCS operation somewhat offset by a significant decline in bad debt expense compared to 2002.\n\nLate in 2003, the Company made an employee benefits policy change, which eliminated the requirement for the Company to accrue a vacation liability in advance of the year in which the benefit was used. The result of this change was a reduction of benefit expense of $0.5 million for the year compared to 2002. Benefit expenses impact all operating departments based on the amount of direct labor charged to the department. The change has a one-time impact on the financial statements of the Company. The benefits policy now provides that employees earn and use their paid time off in the same period. In the future, under this policy, unused hours can be banked but only used for extended illness, not carried over for use as vacation.\n\nCost of goods and services was $10.9 million, an increase of $0.4 million or 4.2%. The PCS cost of goods sold was $8.5 million, an increase of $0.2 million or 2.3%. This change is due primarily to higher volumes of handsets sold through Company owned stores and PCS handset subsidies paid to third-party retailers. In 2003, the Company recorded approximately $1.8 million in handset costs related to existing subscribers upgrading their handsets. Prior to 2003, the Company did not track the specific costs related to subsidizing new handsets to existing customers. The cost of handset up-grades sold to existing customers is expected to increase as the customer base matures and handset manufacturers introduce new technologies in new handsets. The cable television programming (cost of service) expense was $1.6 million, an increase of $0.2 million or 16.3%. The Company has seen continuing upward pressure on the cost of cable TV programming by cable TV program providers.\n\nNetwork operating costs were $33.6 million, an increase of $1.1 million or 3.4%. The largest item in network operating costs is travel expense. These costs made up 31.8% and 32.9% of the total network and other costs in 2003 and 2002, respectively. Travel expense is the cost of minutes used by the Company's PCS subscribers on Sprint or other Sprint Affiliates' networks. Travel expense in 2003 was $10.8 million, an increase of $0.1 million due to a significant increase in travel minutes in 2003 which was offset by the impact of the rate decline. The travel rate declined from $0.10 per minute in 2002 to $0.058 per minute in 2003. Our PCS customers increased their average monthly travel minutes by 22% compared to 2002. In 2002, the average customer's travel usage was 130 minutes per month and in 2003 that average travel usage increased to 159 minutes per month.\n\nNetwork infrastructure maintenance costs were $4.9 million or 14.6% of total network operating costs, a decrease of $0.2 million from 2002. Rent for towers, tower sites, and buildings increased $0.9 million or 27.3% to $4.2 million. Lease escalators plus the increase in the number of sites leased contributed to the increase. Line costs in 2003 were $9.8 million or 29.1% of the network operating costs, an increase of $0.1 million.\n\nDepreciation and amortization expense was $16.6 million, an increase of $2.1 million or 14.8%. The PCS operation had depreciation expense of $10.2 million, an increase of $1.6 million or 18.9%. The 16 additional PCS base stations placed in service during 2003 resulted in higher depreciation expense for the year. In the telephone operation, depreciation\n\n47\n\n2003 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n■", + "recall": 0.9861878453038674, + "true_md": "SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS\n\nFacility lease revenue contributed $5.5 million to wireline revenues, a decrease of $0.2 million or 3.5%. The decrease was primarily the result of the prolonged decline of lease rates associated with competitive pricing pressures and the economic downturn in the telecommunications industry. During 2002 the Company completed a second, diverse fiber route to its existing interconnection point in the Dulles airport area of Northern Virginia. This fiber route provides increased reliability for customers in the event of fiber cuts or breaks, and extends the availability of the Company’s fiber network to additional market locations but to date has not added additional revenue to the Company’s operation.\n\nBilling and collection services and other revenues contributed $0.4 million to wireline revenues, which was the same as 2002 results. Revenues from this service had declined in recent years, with interexchange carriers now issuing a greater proportion of their bills directly to their customers.\n\nWireline revenues from cable television services were $4.4 million, an increase of $0.1 million or 1.7%. The number of subscribers and service plan prices remained relatively constant during 2003.\n\nOther revenues, primarily consisting of Internet and 511Virginia service revenues were $5.8 million in 2003, an increase of $0.7 million or 13.5%. The Company had 17,420 dial-up Internet subscribers at December 31, 2003, compared to 18,050 at the end of the previous year. During 2003, the Company’s DSL high-speed Internet access subscriber count increased to 1,298 from 646. Total Internet service revenue was $4.5 million, an increase of $0.3 million or 10.7%. The 511Virginia contract with the Virginia Department of Transportation contributed $1.3 million to other revenues, an increase of $0.4 million or 41.3%. Telecommunications equipment sales, services and lease revenues were $1.1 million, which reflects a $0.1 million decrease from 2002 results.\n\nTotal operating expenses were $87.2 million, an increase of $3.6 million or 4.3%. The primary driver in the increase in operating expenses is continued growth in the PCS operation somewhat offset by a significant decline in bad debt expense compared to 2002.\n\nLate in 2003, the Company made an employee benefits policy change, which eliminated the requirement for the Company to accrue a vacation liability in advance of the year in which the benefit was used. The result of this change was a reduction of benefit expense of $0.5 million for the year compared to 2002. Benefit expenses impact all operating departments based on the amount of direct labor charged to the department. The change has a one-time impact on the financial statements of the Company. The benefits policy now provides that employees earn and use their paid time off in the same period. In the future, under this policy, unused hours can be banked but only used for extended illness, not carried over for use as vacation.\n\nCost of goods and services was $10.9 million, an increase of $0.4 million or 4.2%. The PCS cost of goods sold was $8.5 million, an increase of $0.2 million or 2.3%. This change is due primarily to higher volumes of handsets sold through Company owned stores and PCS handset subsidies paid to third-party retailers. In 2003, the Company recorded approximately $1.8 million in handset costs related to existing subscribers upgrading their handsets. Prior to 2003, the Company did not track the specific costs related to subsidizing new handsets to existing customers. The cost of handset up-grades sold to existing customers is expected to increase as the customer base matures and handset manufacturers introduce new technologies in new handsets. The cable television programming (cost of service) expense was $1.6 million, an increase of $0.2 million or 16.3%. The Company has seen continuing upward pressure on the cost of cable TV programming by cable TV program providers.\n\nNetwork operating costs were $33.6 million, an increase of $1.1 million or 3.4%. The largest item in network operating costs is travel expense. These costs made up 31.8% and 32.9% of the total network and other costs in 2003 and 2002, respectively. Travel expense is the cost of minutes used by the Company’s PCS subscribers on Sprint or other Sprint Affiliates’ networks. Travel expense in 2 003 was $10.8 million, an increase of $0.1 million due to a significant increase in travel minutes in 2003 which was offset by the impact of the rate decline. The travel rate declined from $0.10 per minute in 2002 to $0.058 per minute in 2003. Our PCS customers increased their average monthly travel minutes by 22% compared to 2002. In 2002, the average customer’s travel usage was 130 minutes per month and in 2003 that average travel usage increased to 159 minutes per month.\n\nNetwork infrastructure maintenance costs were $4.9 million or 14.6% of total network operating costs, a decrease of $0.2 million from 2002. Rent for towers, tower sites, and buildings increased $0.9 million or 27.3% to $4.2 million. Lease escalators plus the increase in the number of sites leased contributed to the increase. Line costs in 2003 were $9.8 million or 29.1% of the network operating costs, an increase of $0.1 million.\n\nDepreciation and amortization expense was $16.6 million, an increase of $2.1 million or 14.8%. The PCS operation had depreciation expense of $10.2 million, an increase of $1.6 million or 18.9%. The 16 additional PCS base stations placed in service during 2003 resulted in higher depreciation expense for the year. In the telephone operation, depreciation\n\n47 ■ 2003 ANNUAL REPORT" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.2011438821353907, + "doc_id": "86538d08a1ef02d17d39a0153b71cddc391d496cc7f79ff5b2ee8c885da456a9", + "edit_distance": 0.788235294117647, + "f1_score": 0.5813953488372093, + "meteor": 0.4341488148054253, + "precision": 0.8333333333333334, + "pred_md": "New Models for Fiscal Year 2005\n\n## Global Retail Sales Volume\n\n(Units: 1000s)\n\n2,597\n\n## Retail Sales by Region\n\n(Units: 1000s)\n\n*Including Mexico\n\nand Canada\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\n9\n\nPERFORMANCE", + "recall": 0.44642857142857145, + "true_md": "PERFORMANCE\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 9\n\n## Europe\n\n## Japan\n\n## US/Canada\n\n## GOM * /Mexico\n\n## New Models for Fiscal Year 2005\n\n## Global Retail Sales Volume\n\n(Units: 1000s)\n\n350Z Roadster Murano Pathfinder Navara Micra C+C\n\nSerena Otti Compact wagon M-class sedan Minicar\n\nQuest Pathfinder Navara Infiniti M Tiida hatchback Tiida sedan Lafesta Interstar Xterra\n\n*General Overseas Markets\n\nGOM*\n\nEurope\n\nU.S.\n\nJapan\n\n## Retail Sales by Region\n\n(Units: 1000s)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "94f10ea83c7a3e6b1b6e6e5a6e4b6a8ac9295ff6ab7a15312267a22b210bc72d", + "edit_distance": 0.788235294117647, + "f1_score": 0.5813953488372093, + "meteor": 0.4341488148054253, + "precision": 0.8333333333333334, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.44642857142857145, + "true_md": "" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6596296473256826, + "doc_id": "7e8360cb26b76109bdcf3fe392096ee19c617e376582274f8f5946ad4052c6fe", + "edit_distance": 0.3356164383561644, + "f1_score": 0.852112676056338, + "meteor": 0.8889090817224145, + "precision": 0.7908496732026143, + "pred_md": "C O R P O R A T E I N F O R M A T I O N\n\n## C o r p o r a t e O f f i c e :\n\nAtrion Corporation One Allentown Parkway Allen, Texas 75002 (972) 390-9800\n\nwww.atrioncorp.com\n\n## R e g i s t r a r a n d T r a n s f e r A g e n t\n\nAmerican Stock Transfer and Trust Company 59 Maiden Lane New York, New York 10007\n\n## F o r m 1 0 - K\n\nA copy of the Company's 2003 Annual Report on Form 10-K, as filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission, may be obtained by any stockholder without charge by written request to: Corporate Secretary Atrion Corporation One Allentown Parkway Allen, Texas 75002\n\n## S t o c k I n f o r m a t i o n\n\nThe Company's common stock is traded on The Nasdaq Stock Market (Symbol: ATRI). As of March 8, 2004, there were approximately 1,200 stockholders, including beneficial owners holding shares in nominee or 'street' name. The table below sets forth the high and low closing prices on The Nasdaq Stock Market and the quarterly dividends per share declared by the Company for each quarter of 2002 and 2003.\n\nThe Company paid no cash dividends on its common stock during 2002. In the third quarter of 2003 the Company began paying quarterly cash dividends and presently plans to pay quarterly cash dividends in the future.\n\nMPS and LacriCATH are registered trademarks of Atrion Corporation", + "recall": 0.9236641221374046, + "true_md": "## CORPORATE INFORMATION\n\n## Corporate Office:\n\n## Registrar and Transfer Agent\n\n## Form 10-K\n\n## Stock Information\n\nAtrion Corporation One Allentown Parkway Allen, Texas 75002 (972) 390-9800 www.atrioncorp.com\n\nAmerican Stock Transfer and Trust Company 59 Maiden Lane New York, New York 10007\n\nA copy of the Company’s 2003 Annual Report on Form 10-K, as filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission, may be obtained by any stockholder without charge by written request to:\n\nCorporate Secretary Atrion Corporation One Allentown Parkway Allen, Texas 75002\n\nThe Company’s common stock is traded on The Nasdaq Stock Market (Symbol: ATRI). As of March 8, 2004, there were approximately 1,200 stockholders, including beneficial owners holding shares in nominee or “street” name. The table below sets forth the high and low closing prices on The Nasdaq Stock Market and the quarterly dividends per share declared by the Company for each quarter of 2002 and 2003.\n\nThe Company paid no cash dividends on its common stock during 2002. In the third quarter of 2003 the Company began paying quarterly cash dividends and presently plans to pay quarterly cash dividends in the future.\n\nMPS and LacriCATH are registered trademarks of Atrion Corporation" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8727725447604234, + "doc_id": "1b53aa85278bc24c60cee19b407795605443daf57b7c27d6836633ba40f3d880", + "edit_distance": 0.10779816513761468, + "f1_score": 0.9234972677595629, + "meteor": 0.9305909692799792, + "precision": 0.9883040935672515, + "pred_md": "FINANCIAL SECTION\n\n## REPORT OF INDEPENDENT AUDITORS\n\nThe Board of Directors Nissan Motor Co., Ltd.\n\nWe have audited the accompanying consolidated balance sheets of Nissan Motor Co., Ltd. and consolidated subsidiaries as of March 31, 2005 and 2004, and the related consolidated statements of income, shareholders' equity, and cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended March 31, 2005, all expressed in yen. These financial statements are the responsibility of the Company's management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these financial statements based on our audits.\n\nWe conducted our audits in accordance with auditing standards generally accepted in Japan. Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement. An audit includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements. An audit also includes assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.\n\nIn our opinion, the financial statements referred to above present fairly, in all material respects, the consolidated financial position of Nissan Motor Co., Ltd. and consolidated subsidiaries at March 31, 2005 and 2004, and the consolidated results of their operations and their cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended March 31, 2005 in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in Japan.\n\n## Supplemental Information\n\nAs described in Note 2, effective April 1, 2003, the Company and certain subsidiaries changed their methods of accounting for inventories, retirement benefits and noncancelable lease transactions, and effective April 1, 2004, the Company and certain consolidated subsidiaries changed their method of accounting for freight and shipping costs.\n\nThe U.S. dollar amounts in the accompanying consolidated financial statements with respect to the year ended March 31, 2005 are presented solely for convenience. Our audit also included the translation of yen amounts into U.S. dollar amounts and, in our opinion, such translation has been made on the basis described in Note 3.\n\nJune 21, 2005\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 104", + "recall": 0.8666666666666667, + "true_md": "REPORT OF INDEPENDENT AUDITORS\n\n# Certified Public Accountants ibi i Bldg, Be ht Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo 100-0011 C.P.O. Box 1196, Tokyo 100-8641\n\n@ Phone:03 3503-1100 ax: - Fax: 03 3503-1197\n\nThe Board of Directors Nissan Motor Co., Ltd.\n\nWe have audited the accompanying consolidated balance sheets of Nissan Motor Co., Ltd. and consolidated subsidiaries as of March 31, 2005 and 2004, and the related consolidated statements of income, shareholders’ equity, and cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended March 31, 2005, all expressed in yen. These financial statements are the responsibility of the Company’s management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these financial statements based on our audits.\n\nWe conducted our audits in accordance with auditing standards generally accepted in Japan. Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement. An audit includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements. An audit also includes assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.\n\nIn our opinion, the financial statements referred to above present fairly, in all material respects, the consolidated financial position of Nissan Motor Co., Ltd. and consolidated subsidiaries at March 31, 2005 and 2004, and the consolidated results of their operations and their cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended March 31, 2005 in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in Japan. \n\nAs described in Note 2, effective April 1, 2003, the Company and certain subsidiaries changed their methods of accounting for inventories, retirement benefits and noncancelable lease transactions, and effective April 1, 2004, the Company and certain consolidated subsidiaries changed their method of accounting for freight and shipping costs.\n\nThe U.S. dollar amounts in the accompanying consolidated financial statements with respect to the year ended March 31, 2005 are presented solely for convenience. Our audit also included the translation of yen amounts into U.S. dollar amounts and, in our opinion, such translation has been made on the basis described in Note 3.\n\n## Supplemental Information\n\nJune 21, 2005\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 104\n\nFINANCIAL SECTION" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8582550447518337, + "doc_id": "0a4174e965554ed5a1fbe8c4f35e7fa804cb8a1cbd81516c8d4b8a5b5d226cf7", + "edit_distance": 0.14720812182741116, + "f1_score": 0.9487870619946092, + "meteor": 0.9416122909323428, + "precision": 0.9411764705882353, + "pred_md": "M A N A G E M E N T ' S D I S C U S S I O N\n\n## A N D A N A L Y S I S O F F I N A N C I A L C O N D I T I O N A N D R E S U L T S O F O P E R A T I O N S\n\nThe following discussion of the Company's financial condition and results of operations should be read together with the other financial information and consolidated financial statements included in this Annual Report. This discussion contains forward-looking statements that involve risks and uncertainties. The Company's actual results could differ materially from the results anticipated in the forward-looking statements as a result of a variety of factors, including those discussed in 'Forward Looking Statements' and elsewhere in this Annual Report.\n\n## OVERVIEW\n\nThe Company designs, develops, manufactures, markets, sells and distributes products and components, primarily for the medical and health care industry. The Company markets components to other equipment manufacturers for incorporation in their products and sells finished devices to physicians, hospitals, clinics and other treatment centers. The Company's products and services primarily range from ophthalmology and cardiovascular products to fluid delivery devices, contract manufacturing and kitting services. In 2003 approximately 26 percent of the Company's sales were outside the U.S.\n\nThe Company's products are used in a wide variety of applications by numerous customers, the largest of which accounted for approximately 14 percent of net sales in 2003. The Company encounters competition in all of its markets and competes primarily on the basis of product quality, price, engineering, customer service and delivery time.\n\nThe Company's strategy is to provide a broad selection of products and a high level of service in the areas in which it competes. The Company focuses its research and development efforts to improve current products and develop highly-engineered products that meet customer needs and have the potential for broad market applications and significant sales. Proposed new products may be subject to regulatory clearance or approval prior to commercialization and the time period for introducing a new product to the marketplace can be unpredictable. The Company is also focused on controlling costs. The Company does this by investing in modern manufacturing technologies and controlling purchasing processes. Over the past three years, the Company has continued to be faced with increasing costs associated with all lines of insurance, including group health benefits. The Company has been successful in consistently generating cash from operations and uses that cash to reduce indebtedness, to fund capital expenditures, to repurchase stock and, starting in 2003, to pay dividends. During 2003, the Company reduced debt by approximately $6.0 million.\n\nThe Company's strategic objective is to further enhance its position in its served markets by:\n\n- · Focusing on customer needs\n- · Expanding existing product lines and developing new products\n- · Maintaining a culture of controlling cost\n- · Preserving and fostering a collaborative, entrepreneurial management structure\n\nFor the year ended December 31, 2003, the Company reported revenues of $62.8 million, income from continuing operations of $4.9 million and net income of $5.1 million, up 5 percent, 20 percent and 95 percent, respectively, from 2002.\n\n## R E S U L T S O F O P E R A T I O N S\n\nThe Company's income from continuing operations was $4.9 million, or $2.86 per basic and $2.66 per diluted share, in 2003, compared to income from continuing operations of $4.1 million, or $2.37 per basic and $2.18 per diluted share, in 2002 and $4.3 million, or $2.10 per basic and $1.88 per diluted share, in 2001. Net income, including discontinued operations and cumulative effect of accounting change, totaled $5.1 million, or $2.96 per basic and $2.75 per diluted share, in 2003, compared with $2.6 million, or $1.51 per basic and $1.39 per diluted share, in 2002 and $9.8 million, or $4.80 per basic and $4.30 per diluted share, in 2001. The Company adopted Statement of Financial Accounting Standards ('SFAS') No. 142 effective January 1, 2002. The required adoption of SFAS No. 142 as discussed in Note 2 to the Company's Consolidated Financial Statements included herein is considered a change in accounting principle and the cumulative effect of adopting this standard resulted in a $1.6 million, or $ .96 per basic and $ .88 per diluted share, noncash, after-tax charge in 2002.\n\nOperating revenues were $62.8 million in 2003, compared with $59.5 million in 2002 and $57.6 million in 2001. These revenue increases are generally attributable to higher sales volumes. The 5 percent revenue increase in 2003 over the prior year is primarily attributable to an 8 percent increase in the revenues of the Company's ophthalmic products, an 8 percent increase in the revenues of the Company's cardiovascular products, a 3 percent increase in the Company's fluid delivery products and a 2 percent increase in the Company's other medical and non-medical products and services. The 3 percent revenue increase in 2002 over the prior year is primarily attributable to an 8 percent increase in the revenues of the Company's cardiovascular products, a 4 percent increase in the Company's fluid delivery products and a 4 percent increase in the Company's other medical and non-medical products and services.\n\nThe Company's cost of goods sold was $40.6 million in 2003, compared with $39.2 million in 2002 and $35.8 million in 2001. The increase in cost of goods sold for 2003 over 2002 was primarily related to the increase in revenues discussed above and increased insurance costs partially offset by an improvement in manufacturing variances resulting from increased production volumes. The increase in cost of goods sold for 2002 over 2001 was primarily related to a shift in product mix, which resulted in lower gross margins, and the increase in revenues discussed above.\n\nGross profit was $22.2 million in 2003, compared with $20.3 million in 2002 and $21.8 million in 2001. The Company's gross profit in 2003 was 35 percent of revenues compared with 34 percent of revenues in 2002 and 38 percent of revenues in 2001. The increase in gross profit percentage in 2003\n\n24", + "recall": 0.9565217391304348, + "true_md": "The following discussion of the Company’s financial condition and results of operations should be read together with the other financial information and consolidated financial statements included in this Annual Report. This discussion contains forward-looking statements that involve risks and uncertainties. The Company’s actual results could differ materially from the results anticipated in the forward-looking statements as a result of a variety of factors, including those discussed in “Forward Looking Statements” and elsewhere in this Annual Report. \n\nThe Company designs, develops, manufactures, markets, sells and distributes products and components, primarily for the medical and health care industry. The Company markets components to other equipment manufacturers for incorporation in their products and sells finished devices to physicians, hospitals, clinics and other treatment centers. The Company’s products and services primarily range from ophthalmology and cardiovascular products to fluid delivery devices, contract manufacturing and kitting services. In 2003 approximately 26 percent of the Company’s sales were outside the U.S.\n\nThe Company’s products are used in a wide variety of applications by numerous customers, the largest of which accounted for approximately 14 percent of net sales in 2003. The Company encounters competition in all of its markets and competes primarily on the basis of product quality, price, engineering, customer service and delivery time. \n\nThe Company’s strategy is to provide a broad selection of products and a high level of service in the areas in which it competes. The Company focuses its research and development efforts to improve current products and develop highly-engineered products that meet customer needs and have the potential for broad market applications and significant sales. Proposed new products may be subject to regulatory clearance or approval prior to commercialization and the time period for introducing a new product to the marketplace can be unpredictable. The Company is also focused on controlling costs. The Company does this by investing in modern manufacturing technologies and controlling purchasing processes. Over the past three years, the Company has continued to be faced with increasing costs associated with all lines of insurance, including group health benefits. The Company has been successful in consistently generating cash from operations and uses that cash to reduce indebtedness, to fund capital expenditures, to repurchase stock and, starting in 2003, to pay dividends. During 2003, the Company reduced debt by approximately $6.0 million.\n\nThe Company’s strategic objective is to further enhance its position in its served markets by: \n\n- • Focusing on customer needs \n\n- • Expanding existing product lines and developing new products\n\n- • Maintaining a culture of controlling cost \n\n- • Preserving and fostering a collaborative, entrepreneurial management structure \n\nFor the year ended December 31, 2003, the Company reported revenues of $62.8 million, income from continuing operations of $4.9 million and net income of $5.1 million, up 5 percent, 20 percent and 95 percent, respectively, from 2002.\n\nThe Company’s income from continuing operations was $4.9 million, or $2.86 per basic and $2.66 per diluted share, in 2003, compared to income from continuing operations of $4.1 million, or $2.37 per basic and $2.18 per diluted share, in 2002 and $4.3 million, or $2.10 per basic and $1.88 per diluted share, in 2001. Net income, including discontinued operations and cumulative effect of accounting change, totaled $5.1 million, or $2.96 per basic and $2.75 per diluted share, in 2003, compared with $2.6 million, or $1.51 per basic and $1.39 per diluted share, in 2002 and $9.8 million, or $4.80 per basic and $4.30 per diluted share, in 2001. The Company adopted Statement of Financial Accounting Standards (“SFAS”) No. 142 effective January 1, 2002. The required adoption of SFAS No. 142 as discussed in Note 2 to the Company’s Consolidated Financial Statements included herein is considered a change in accounting principle and the cumulative effect of adopting this standard resulted in a $1.6 million, or $ .96 per basic and $ .88 per diluted share, non- cash, after-tax charge in 2002.\n\nOperating revenues were $62.8 million in 2003, compared with $59.5 million in 2002 and $57.6 million in 2001. These revenue increases are generally attributable to higher sales volumes. The 5 percent revenue increase in 2003 over the prior year is primarily attributable to an 8 percent increase in the revenues of the Company’s ophthalmic products, an 8 percent increase in the revenues of the Company’s cardiovascular products, a 3 percent increase in the Company’s fluid delivery products and a 2 percent increase in the Company’s other medical and non-medical products and services. The 3 percent revenue increase in 2002 over the prior year is primarily attributable to an 8 percent increase in the revenues of the Company’s cardiovascular products, a 4 percent increase in the Company’s fluid delivery products and a 4 percent increase in the Company’s other medical and non-medical products and services.\n\nThe Company’s cost of goods sold was $40.6 million in 2003, compared with $39.2 million in 2002 and $35.8 million in 2001. The increase in cost of goods sold for 2003 over 2002 was primarily related to the increase in revenues discussed above and increased insurance costs partially offset by an improvement in manufacturing variances resulting from increased production volumes. The increase in cost of goods sold for 2002 over 2001 was primarily related to a shift in product mix, which resulted in lower gross margins, and the increase in revenues discussed above.\n\nGross profit was $22.2 million in 2003, compared with $20.3 million in 2002 and $21.8 million in 2001. The Company’s gross profit in 2003 was 35 percent of revenues compared with 34 percent of revenues in 2002 and 38 percent of revenues in 2001. The increase in gross profit percentage in 2003\n\n24\n\n## OVERVIEW\n\n## RESULTS OF OPERATIONS\n\n## MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION\n\n## AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7690236466472564, + "doc_id": "a9095d283c0cb3930326ea81229968113e53983f16e8670e5e2e9ad4272e2d75", + "edit_distance": 0.21518987341772153, + "f1_score": 0.9491525423728814, + "meteor": 0.8944725716373506, + "precision": 0.9824561403508771, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO AND FORMING PART OF THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR THE FINANCIAL YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2000\n\nFINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS (continued)\n\n29.\n\nInterest Rate Risk\n\n(b)\n\nThe economic entity's exposure to interest rate risks and the effective interest rates of financial assets and financial liabilities as at 30 June 2000 are as follows:\n\nN/a: not applicable for non-interest bearing financial instruments\n\n59", + "recall": 0.9180327868852459, + "true_md": "## NOTES TO AND FORMING PART OF THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR THE FINANCIAL YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2000\n\n## 29. FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS (continued)\n\n## (b) Interest Rate Risk\n\nThe economic entity’ s exposure to interest rate risks and the effective interest rates of financial assets and financial liabilities as at 30 June 2000 are as follows:\n\nN/a: not applicable for non-interest bearing financial instruments\n\n59 TIN TT ir" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8945475737889255, + "doc_id": "4803c5d64844461525b55835d90e828d66cc68b47822ccb0f29f14cf83c6d8d0", + "edit_distance": 0.37943262411347517, + "f1_score": 0.9802371541501975, + "meteor": 0.9315913934347909, + "precision": 0.9802371541501976, + "pred_md": "10\n\n## ANALYSING FINANCIAL PERFORMANCE\n\n'The sound operating results achieved in 2004 underline the changing face of Santos towards a higher value, higher margin business. We ended the year with a strong financial position and our financial flexibility intact. '\n\n## PETER WASOW\n\nChief Financial Officer\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\n## 2004 WAS A YEAR OF GOOD OPERATING RESULTS\n\nOverall the increase in 2004 profit of 16% reflected a year of sound operating performance. Sales revenue was a record $1,501 million, up 2.5% on 2003, reflecting higher prices across most products and was achieved despite lower production as a result of the Moomba incident and declining output from late life fields.\n\nSantos benefited from higher world oil prices and realised US$51.83 per boe in 2004, an increase of 19% over 2003. The benefit of higher world oil prices substantially offset the impact of lower production volumes.\n\nSantos was also able to negotiate higher domestic gas prices (up 4% on average) and deliver new revenue streams from project start-ups and acquisitions during the year.\n\n## PRODUCTION HAMPERED BY MOOMBA INCIDENT\n\n2004 production was lower due to the Moomba incident, which reduced production by 4.6 million\n\nboe. Field decline reduced production by a further 5.0 million boe.\n\nOffsetting these factors, Santos' growth projects are starting to come on line and have begun to reverse the decline experienced over the past three years. Two projects were commissioned in 2004: the Bayu-Undan liquids project and the Minerva gas project. In addition, acquisitions contributed 0.8 million boe to production.\n\nFor 2005, production is expected to improve by around 15%, or 4% excluding the impact of the Moomba incident. Santos now expects production to be around 54 million boe in 2005. This increase is largely driven by the commissioning of Mutineer-Exeter in March 2005 and the John Brookes gas field in the middle of the year.\n\n## PRODUCTION COSTS UNDER CONTROL\n\nProduction costs in 2004 were $309 million, up $45 million or 17% on 2003. Analysis shows that Santos was able to continue\n\n## PRODUCTION AND SALES REVENUE\n\nto effectively control its costs in the face of significant external pressures in the form of rising services and materials prices.\n\nExamining production costs in detail reveals:\n\n- · the start-up of Bayu-Undan and acquisitions added $16 million to Santos' cost base\n- · changes in our accounting added a further $16 million to Santos' production costs\n- · higher insurance premiums ($8 million) and one-off stock write-offs ($5 million) were offset by $17 million in cost savings largely as a result of Santos' continuous improvement initiatives\n- · the Moomba incident resulted in $17 million of one-off costs in 2004.\n\nPiecing this together, the key themes in our financial performance were:\n\n- · cost savings in established production areas more than offset increases in the price of services and materials\n- · Santos' cost base rose as production from new developments and acquisitions were added to the Company's expanding portfolio of producing assets.", + "recall": 0.9802371541501976, + "true_md": "## ANALYSING FINANCIAL PERFORMANCE\n\n## 2004 WAS A YEAR OF GOOD OPERATING RESULTS\n\n## PRODUCTION HAMPERED BY MOOMBA INCIDENT\n\n## PRODUCTION COSTS UNDER CONTROL\n\nPRODUCTION AND SALES REVENUE\n\n‘The sound operating results achieved in 2004 underline the changing face of Santos towards a higher value, higher margin business. We ended the year with a strong financial position and our financial flexibility intact.’\n\nPETER WASOW Chief Financial Officer\n\nOverall the increase in 2004 profit of 16% reflected a year of sound operating performance. Sales revenue was a record $1,501 million, up 2.5% on 2003, reflecting higher prices across most products and was achieved despite lower production as a result of the Moomba incident and declining output from late life fields.\n\nSantos benefited from higher world oil prices and realised US$51.83 per boe in 2004, an increase of 19% over 2003. The benefit of higher world oil prices substantially offset the impact of lower production volumes. \n\nSantos was also able to negotiate higher domestic gas prices (up 4% on average) and deliver new revenue streams from project start-ups and acquisitions during the year.\n\n2004 production was lower due to the Moomba incident, which reduced production by 4.6 million\n\nProduction costs in 2004 were $309 million, up $45 million or 17% on 2003. Analysis shows that Santos was able to continue\n\nPiecing this together, the key themes in our financial performance were:\n\nFor 2005, production is expected to improve by around 15%, or 4% excluding the impact of the Moomba incident. Santos now expects production to be around 54 million boe in 2005. This increase is largely driven by the commissioning of Mutineer-Exeter in March 2005 and the John Brookes gas field in the middle of the year.\n\nOffsetting these factors, Santos’ growth projects are starting to come on line and have begun to reverse the decline experienced over the past three years. Two projects were commissioned in 2004: the Bayu-Undan liquids project and the Minerva gas project. In addition, acquisitions contributed 0.8 million boe to production. \n\nboe. Field decline reduced production by a further 5.0 million boe.\n\nto effectively control its costs in the face of significant external pressures in the form of rising services and materials prices.\n\nExamining production costs in detail reveals:\n\n- • the start-up of Bayu-Undan and acquisitions added $16 million to Santos’ cost base\n\n- • changes in our accounting added a further $16 million to Santos’ production costs\n\n- • higher insurance premiums ($8 million) and one-off stock write-offs ($5 million) were offset by $17 million in cost savings largely as a result of Santos’ continuous improvement initiatives\n\n- • the Moomba incident resulted in $17 million of one-off costs in 2004.\n\n- • cost savings in established production areas more than offset increases in the price of services and materials\n\n- • Santos’ cost base rose as production from new developments and acquisitions were added to the Company’s expanding portfolio of producing assets.\n\n10\n\nAnnual Report 2004" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9819518447903489, + "doc_id": "df1effdf49c56b30ce35d512cf135d42997dec732502f7f70d9099fb90fcabb4", + "edit_distance": 0.39118457300275483, + "f1_score": 0.9898477157360407, + "meteor": 0.9037466629844427, + "precision": 0.9898477157360406, + "pred_md": "## OPERATIONS REVIEW\n\nDarwin is serviced by three marine infrastructure elements.\n\n- a. A public port adjacent to the main business centre, which is destined to be redeveloped as a cruise ship and tourism precinct .\n- b. A group of freehold water front properties on Frances Bay near to the main business center.\n- c. A recently commissioned public port and industrial estate at East Arm some 25 km from the main business district.\n\nDarwin already has an abundance of shore based logistics service providers who operate from onshore industrial estates through publicly owned facilities.\n\nThe Northern Territory Government has sponsored a study to determine the marine infrastructure deficits of the Darwin area. Mermaid has contributed to the study and is monitoring the subsequent planning processes.\n\nRegardless of industry trends, Mermaid has a need for a Darwin Base to service and care for Mermaid vessels working in the area. Too often vessels have been demobilised to Dampier at the conclusion of a contract then being required to return to Darwin within days or weeks for another assignment.\n\nMermaid has decided that needs and opportunities in the north of Australia can be best served by entering a co-operative arrangement with an established Darwin Company. Agreement has therefore been reached with Perkins Shipping Group, who are one of the freehold land owners on Frances Bay.\n\nPerkins Shipping, established in the 1950s is the major coastal shipping service provider in Australia's north, linking Darwin to mining and aboriginal committees from the Kimberly to Gulf of Carpenteria. Additionally Perkins operate services to East Timor, mining operations in Indonesia, as well as Singapore and East Malaysia. The Perkins and Mermaid businesses are different, but complementary, offering benefits to both. The arrangement with Perkins will give Mermaid well placed office facilities, open storage and waterfront access.\n\nOur intention is that Darwin become the third and final mainland entreport to service the Northwestern offshore oil and gas industry together with our other strategically placed facilities at Dampier and Broome.\n\n19", + "recall": 0.9898477157360406, + "true_md": "OPERATIONS REVIEW\n\nDarwin is serviced by three marine infrastructure elements.\n\nDarwin already has an abundance of shore based logistics service providers who operate from onshore industrial estates through publicly owned facilities. \n\nThe Northern Territory Government has sponsored a study to determine the marine infrastructure deficits of the Darwin area. Mermaid has contributed to the study and is monitoring the subsequent planning processes.\n\nRegardless of industry trends, Mermaid has a need for a Darwin Base to service and care for Mermaid vessels working in the area. Too often vessels have been demobilised to Dampier at the conclusion of a contract then being required to return to Darwin within days or weeks for another assignment.\n\nMermaid has decided that needs and opportunities in the north of Australia can be best served by entering a co-operative arrangement with an established Darwin Company. Agreement has therefore been reached with Perkins Shipping Group, who are one of the freehold land owners on Frances Bay.\n\nPerkins Shipping, established in the 1950s is the major coastal shipping service provider in Australia’s north, linking Darwin to mining and aboriginal committees from the Kimberly to Gulf of Carpenteria. Additionally Perkins operate services to East Timor, mining operations in Indonesia, as well as Singapore and East Malaysia. The Perkins and Mermaid businesses are different, but complementary, offering benefits to both. The arrangement with Perkins will give Mermaid well placed office facilities, open storage and waterfront access. \n\nOur intention is that Darwin become the third and final mainland entreport to service the Northwestern offshore oil and gas industry together with our other strategically placed facilities at Dampier and Broome. \n\n- a. A public port adjacent to the main business centre, which is destined to be redeveloped as a cruise ship and tourism precinct .\n\n- b. A group of freehold water front properties on Frances Bay near to the main business center.\n\n- c. A recently commissioned public port and industrial estate at East Arm some 25 km from the main business district.\n\n19" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8304839474497052, + "doc_id": "3ed4ee346cce22af41f7741a4e435b01b0fcb3063d20397a9b803716e9c45754", + "edit_distance": 0.17834394904458598, + "f1_score": 0.9297912713472484, + "meteor": 0.9478977272727273, + "precision": 0.9245283018867925, + "pred_md": "M A N A G E M E N T ' S D I S C U S S I O N\n\n## A N D A N A L Y S I S O F F I N A N C I A L C O N D I T I O N A N D R E S U L T S O F O P E R A T I O N S\n\n( C O N T I N U E D )\n\n## L I Q U I D I T Y A N D C A P I T A L R E S O U R C E S\n\nThe Company has a $25 million revolving credit facility (the 'Credit Facility') with a regional bank to be utilized for the funding of operations and for major capital projects or acquisitions subject to certain limitations and restrictions (see Note 4 of Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements). Borrowings under the Credit Facility bear interest that is payable monthly at 30-day, 60-day or 90-day LIBOR, as selected by the Company, plus one percent. At December 31, 2003, the Company had outstanding borrowings of $4.3 million under the Credit Facility. At December 31, 2003, the Company was in compliance with all financial covenants. The Credit Facility, which expires November 12, 2006, and may be extended under certain circumstances, contains various restrictive covenants, none of which is expected to impact the Company's liquidity or capital resources.\n\nAs of December 31, 2003, the Company had cash and cash equivalents of $298,000, compared with $353,000 at December 31, 2002. The Company had an outstanding balance under the Credit Facility as of December 31, 2003, of $4.3 million compared with $10.3 million as of December 31, 2002. The $6.0 million decrease in the Credit Facility balance in 2003 from 2002 is primarily attributable to the Company's use of cash flows from continuing operations to reduce its borrowing level. Cash provided by continuing operations increased to $12.7 million in 2003, compared to $9.9 million in 2002 and $8.7 million in 2001. Cash provided by continuing operations consists primarily of net income adjusted for certain non-cash items and changes in working capital items. Non-cash items include depreciation and amortization and deferred income taxes. Working capital items consist primarily of accounts receivable, accounts payable, inventories and other current assets and other current liabilities. Working capital at December 31, 2003 decreased primarily because of reduced accounts receivable, which is primarily related to the timing of revenues during the fourth quarter of 2003 as compared to the timing of revenues during the fourth quarter of 2002. Capital expenditures for property, plant and equipment totaled $4.2 million in 2003, compared with $3.3 million in 2002 and $2.8 million in 2001. The Company expects capital expenditures in 2004 to continue at approximately the same level as 2003.\n\nDuring 2003, the Company expended $4.9 million for the purchase of the Company's common stock. Included in this amount was $4.1 million in April 2003 for the completion of a tender offer in which a total of 173,614 shares of common stock were repurchased at a price of $23.00 per share. During the fourth quarter of 2003, the Company repurchased the following shares of the Company's common stock:\n\n(a) This program was announced in April 2000 and initially provided for 200,000 shares to be repurchased.\n\nThe Company received net proceeds of $2.7 million for the exercise of employee stock options during 2003.\n\nIn September 2003, the Company announced that its Board of Directors had approved a policy for the payment of regular quarterly cash dividends on the Company's common stock. During 2003 the Company paid dividends totaling $406,000 to its stockholders.\n\nThe table below summarizes debt, lease and other minimum contractual obligations outstanding at December 31, 2003:\n\nThe payment schedule for the Credit Facility assumes at maturity, November 2006, the Company would convert this outstanding debt to a two year term note as allowed by the terms of the agreement. The payment schedule for the operating lease assumes the lease expires in May 2006 (see Note 12 of Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements).\n\n26", + "recall": 0.9351145038167938, + "true_md": "MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION\n\n## LIQUIDITY AND CAPITAL RESOURCES\n\nThe Company has a $25 million revolving credit facility (the “Credit Facility”) with a regional bank to be utilized for the funding of operations and for major capital projects or acquisitions subject to certain limitations and restrictions (see Note 4 of Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements). Borrowings under the Credit Facility bear interest that is payable monthly at 30-day, 60-day or 90-day LIBOR, as selected by the Company, plus one percent. At December 31, 2003, the Company had outstanding borrowings of $4.3 million under the Credit Facility. At December 31, 2003, the Company was in compliance with all financial covenants. The Credit Facility, which expires November 12, 2006, and may be extended under certain circumstances, contains various restrictive covenants, none of which is expected to impact the Company’s liquidity or capital resources. \n\nAs of December 31, 2003, the Company had cash and cash equivalents of $298,000, compared with $353,000 at December 31, 2002. The Company had an outstanding balance under the Credit Facility as of December 31, 2003, of $4.3 million compared with $10.3 million as of December 31, 2002. The $6.0 million decrease in the Credit Facility balance in 2003 from 2002 is primarily attributable to the Company’s use of cash flows from continuing operations to reduce its borrowing level. Cash provided by continuing operations increased to $12.7 million in 2003, compared to $9.9 million in 2002 and $8.7 million in 2001. Cash provided by continuing operations consists primarily of net income adjusted for certain non-cash items and changes in working capital items. Non-cash items include depreciation and amortization and deferred income taxes. Working capital items consist primarily of accounts receivable, accounts payable, inventories and other current assets and other current liabilities. Working capital at December 31, 2003 decreased primarily because of reduced accounts receivable, which is primarily related to the timing of revenues during the fourth quarter of 2003 as compared to the timing of revenues during the fourth quarter of 2002. Capital expenditures for property, plant and equipment totaled $4.2 million in 2003, compared with $3.3 million in 2002 and $2.8 million in 2001. The Company expects capital expenditures in 2004 to continue at approximately the same level as 2003. \n\nDuring 2003, the Company expended $4.9 million for the purchase of the Company’s common stock. Included in this amount was $4.1 million in April 2003 for the completion of a tender offer in which a total of 173,614 shares of common stock were repurchased at a price of $23.00 per share. During the fourth quarter of 2003, the Company repurchased the following shares of the Company’s common stock:\n\n(a) This program was announced in April 2000 and initially provided for 200,000 shares to be repurchased.\n\nThe Company received net proceeds of $2.7 million for the exercise of employee stock options during 2003.\n\nIn September 2003, the Company announced that its Board of Directors had approved a policy for the payment of regular quarterly cash dividends on the Company’s common stock. During 2003 the Company paid dividends totaling $406,000 to its stockholders. \n\nThe table below summarizes debt, lease and other minimum contractual obligations outstanding at December 31, 2003:\n\nThe payment schedule for the Credit Facility assumes at maturity, November 2006, the Company would convert this outstanding debt to a two year term note as allowed by the terms of the agreement. The payment schedule for the operating lease assumes the lease expires in May 2006 (see Note 12 of Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements).\n\n26\n\nAND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS (CONTINUED)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6102265812444649, + "doc_id": "49e1a0c071375feee49831c48373d483678978a3f58ff98abbf7477ee719a6e6", + "edit_distance": 0.4943019943019943, + "f1_score": 0.8905109489051096, + "meteor": 0.7108577320244088, + "precision": 0.9277566539923955, + "pred_md": "Allsteel Inc. provides high quality office furniture solutions with advanced functionality and lifetime durability for the contract market. Products are distributed through a national network of aligned, independent contract dealers as well as our sales force, targeting corporate, government, and institutional markets.\n\n## HIGHLIGHTS/AWARDS:\n\n- · Major product introductions - Get Set TM and Terrace ® 2.6 have been well received by the market, winning industry awards.\n- · Get Set TM - 2003 Editor's Choice, Top Pick Annual Award by Buildings Magazine and the Chicago Atheneum Good Design Award.\n- · Terrace ® 2.6 - recognized among top products of 2003 by Architectural Record magazine.\n- · The #19 ® chair, introduced in 2002, continues to receive numerous awards including the California IIDA Acclaim Award and the Best of Category Award by I.D. magazine.\n- · Office Furniture Dealers Alliance (OFDA), 2003 Dealers Choice award for Management.\n- · General Services Administration's (GSA) 2003 'Evergreen Furniture and Furnishings Award' for environmental stewardship.\n\nW W W . A L L S T E E L O F F I C E . C O M\n\n## HON INDUSTRIES 2003\n\n## OFFICE FURNITURE AT-A-GLANCE\n\nThe Gunlocke Company L.L.C. is one of America's oldest and most respected producers of quality wood office furniture. The company handcrafts executive case goods, as well as a wide range of executive seating, lounge furniture, and conference tables. Known for more than a century for crafting elegantly tailored solutions for distinctive business and government clients, Gunlocke focuses primarily on the contract market and furniture specifying communities.\n\n## HIGHLIGHTS/AWARDS:\n\n- · Aggressive 2003 product launch of nine new seating lines: Amalfi TM , Valor TM , Porter TM , Tiara TM , Raffaella TM , Napoli TM , Sirmione TM , Fitzgerald TM , and Debonair TM .\n- · Launched Mantra TM , a new modular and contemporary case good line. Using mixed materials - from wood to brushed aluminum and glass - the line focuses on the integration of technology into today's executive office environments.\n- · The Amalfi TM line won the Silver Award at NeoCon.\n- · Experienced record operational performance.\n\nWWW.GUNLOCKE.COM\n\n28\n\nThe HON Company is North America's leading manufacturer and marketer of office solutions for small and medium-sized workplaces. Its strong distribution channel of independent dealers, wholesalers, and retailers supports the broadest mid-market product offering in the industry.\n\n## HIGHLIGHTS/AWARDS:\n\n- · Launched contemporary Perpetual ® collection targeting the 18- to 35-year-old segment.\n- · 2003 Shingo Award for Excellence in Manufacturing.\n- · Office Furniture Dealers Alliance (OFDA), 2003 Dealers' Choice Manufacturer of the Year, Best Support, Service, and Training, and Best Management.\n- · General Services Administration's (GSA) 2003 'Evergreen Furniture and Furnishings Award' for environmental stewardship.\n- · The Chicago Athenaeum: Museum of Architecture and Design Award for the Olson Flex Stacker TM Chair and Perpetual ® desking.\n- · Buildings Magazine' s Innovations Award and Editor's Top 100 - Perpetual ® desking.\n- · Today's Facilities Manager Readers' Choice Award - Non-task seating, storage, and conference room furnishings.\n\nWWW.HON.COM", + "recall": 0.856140350877193, + "true_md": "H O N I N D U S T R I E S 2 0 0 3\n\n## O F F I C E F U R N I T U R E A T - A - G L A N C E\n\nAllsteel Inc. provides high quality office furni- ture solutions with advanced functionality and lifetime durability for the contract mar- ket. Products are distributed through a na- tional network of aligned, independent contract dealers as well as our sales force, targeting corporate, government, and insti- tutional markets.\n\n• Major product introductions — Get Set TM and Terrace ® 2.6 have been well received by the market, winning industry awards. \n\n• Get Set TM – 2003 Editor’s Choice, Top Pick Annual Award by Buildings Magazine and the Chicago Atheneum Good Design Award.\n\n• Terrace ® 2.6 –recognized among top products of 2003 by Architectural Record magazine.\n\n• The #19 ® chair, introduced in 2002, contin- ues to receive numerous awards including the California IIDA Acclaim Award and the Best of Category Award by I.D. magazine.\n\n• Office Furniture Dealers Alliance (OFDA), 2003 Dealers Choice award for Management. • General Services Administration’s (GSA) 2003 “Evergreen Furniture and Furnishings Award” for environmental stewardship. \n\nW W W . A L L S T E E L O F F I C E . C O M\n\nW W W . G U N L O C K E . C O M\n\nW W W . H O N . C O M\n\n• The Amalfi TM line won the Silver Award at NeoCon. \n\n• Experienced record operational performance.\n\n• Launched Mantra TM , a new modular and contemporary case good line. Using mixed materials — from wood to brushed aluminum and glass — the line focuses on the integration of technology into today’s executive office environments. \n\n• Aggressive 2003 product launch of nine new seating lines: Amalfi TM , Valor TM , Porter TM , Tiara TM , Raffaella TM , Napoli TM , Sirmione TM , Fitzgerald TM , and Debonair TM . \n\nThe Gunlocke Company L.L.C. is one of America’s oldest and most respected produc- ers of quality wood office furniture. The company handcrafts executive case goods, as well as a wide range of executive seating, lounge furniture, and conference tables. Known for more than a century for crafting elegantly tailored solutions for distinctive business and government clients, Gunlocke focuses primarily on the contract market and furniture specifying communities.\n\nThe HON Company is North America’s lead- ing manufacturer and marketer of office solu- tions for small and medium-sized workplaces. Its strong distribution channel of independent dealers, wholesalers, and retailers supports the broadest mid-market product offering in the industry. \n\n• Launched contemporary Perpetual ® collec- tion targeting the 18- to 35-year-old segment. \n\n• 2003 Shingo Award for Excellence in Manufacturing.\n\n• Office Furniture Dealers Alliance (OFDA), 2003 Dealers’ Choice Manufacturer of the Year, Best Support, Service, and Training, and Best Management.\n\n• General Services Administration’s (GSA) 2003 “Evergreen Furniture and Furnishings Award” for environmental stewardship.\n\n• The Chicago Athenaeum: Museum of Arch- itecture and Design Award for the Olson Flex Stacker TM Chair and Perpetual ® desking.\n\n• Buildings Magazine’ s Innovations Award and Editor’s Top 100 — Perpetual ® desking.\n\n• Today’s Facilities Manager Readers’ Choice Award — Non-task seating, storage, and con- ference room furnishings.\n\n28\n\n## H I G H L I G H T S / A W A R D S :\n\n## H I G H L I G H T S / A W A R D S :\n\n## H I G H L I G H T S / A W A R D S :" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9688648057630576, + "doc_id": "19a19361902b57d0fe1312b701e423f75a8763a77a91e50547517206c7706543", + "edit_distance": 0.04365079365079365, + "f1_score": 0.984952120383037, + "meteor": 0.9827585766099605, + "precision": 0.9863013698630136, + "pred_md": "EUROPE\n\n## Making Profit as a Smaller Player\n\nDOMINIQUE THORMANN Senior Vice President Nissan Europe\n\nDOMINIQUE THORMANN Senior Vice President Nissan Europe\n\n'Europe is one of the most fragmented automotive market in the world and a highly competitive one besides. Despite our relatively small size, however, we have begun to demonstrate that it is possible to make money in Europe. In fact, although Nissan does not yet deliver the levels of profitability here\n\nthat the U.S. or other markets generate, we surpassed our NISSAN 180 business targets in fiscal 2004. Our profitability is now on par with the best European manufacturers. Nissan has a foundation for increasing profitability further in the coming years in Europe.\n\nNissan is already an established name around the region, and the brand is strongly associated with 4x4 technology, off-road vehicles and pickup trucks. However, there is also a solid heritage built around the Micra, a model designed for urban driving. Both the first and second generations of this car were very successful, and the third generation is performing well. To leverage our 4x4 heritage and SUV strength into the passenger car segment, Nissan is developing a series of crossover vehicles that blend car-like performance with 4x4 versatility. The Qashqai concept vehicle introduced at the 2004 Geneva Motor Show is the first of these-smaller, more affordable, and better adapted to European roads. The Qashqai will go into production in our plant in Sunderland in the UK in early 2007. The Murano, launched this year, is a precursor to the Qashqai in the larger executive segment. Europeans have already taken to the Murano, driving sales far past our initial forecasts in all markets. This car is helping make Nissan a brand that people aspire to own.\n\nNissan is still a small player in the region, selling 550,000 cars across a very large and diverse territory that stretches from the Atlantic Ocean to Russia, and from Finland to Israel. In the past we covered the area through multiple distribution channels, which we are currently in the process of simplifying. A few aspects of the European market have made profitability more difficult to achieve. For example, automakers must provide models with much diversity: diesel and gasoline powertrains; manual and automatic transmissions. The cars must also be engineered to suit the high driving speeds typical in the region and ensure superior handling, which results in higher costs.\n\nAs in many other mature markets, an incentive war is raging in Europe. Nissan's position here, as elsewhere, is to use incentives selectively and to always protect profitability. Providing products which customers recognize and appreciate for their style and attributes rather than being the best deal is the foundation of Nissan's profitable growth. We now have a wide range of products, five of which were newly launched in 2005, including the Pathfinder and the Navara pickup. We will release the Micra C+C at the Frankfurt Motor Show in September, giving customers the option of a unique standard glass roof in a fully retracting hard convertible top.\n\nNissan's manufacturing still defines the leading edge in Europe. According to The Harbour Report , our plant in Sunderland is the most productive plant in Europe. Sunderland will start production on a new B-segment car based on the Tone concept car in early 2006, followed by the Qashqai crossover vehicle in early 2007. Our Barcelona plant, which manufactures SUVs, 4x4s and light commercial vehicles, will reach full capacity in mid-2005. Finally, our truck plant in Avila, Spain, which specializes in light-duty trucks, will start producing a replacement for the popular Cabstar in late 2006. This efficient production base is a critical part of our profitable growth scenario.\n\nNISSAN Value-Up has given us a plan for building both profit and volume. We will not, however, sacrifice profit to gain volume. How far we can go depends on how fast we deliver results. I believe that we have much more room to grow, and to demonstrate that in even a crowded European market a smaller player can produce significant returns.'\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\n61\n\nOUR WORLD", + "recall": 0.9836065573770492, + "true_md": "## EUROPE\n\n## Making Profit as a Smaller Player\n\n“Europe is one of the most fragmented automotive market in the world and a highly competitive one besides. Despite our relatively small size, however, we have begun to demonstrate that it is possible to make money in Europe. In fact, although Nissan does not yet deliver the levels of profitability here\n\nthat the U.S. or other markets generate, we surpassed our NISSAN 180 business targets in fiscal 2004. Our profitability is now on par with the best European manufacturers. Nissan has a foundation for increasing profitability further in the coming years in Europe. \n\nNissan is already an established name around the region, and the brand is strongly associated with 4x4 technology, off-road vehicles and pickup trucks. However, there is also a solid heritage built around the Micra, a model designed for urban driving. Both the first and second generations of this car were very successful, and the third generation is performing well. To leverage our 4x4 heritage and SUV strength into the passenger car segment, Nissan is developing a series of crossover vehicles that blend car-like performance with 4x4 versatility. The Qashqai concept vehicle introduced at the 2004 Geneva Motor Show is the first of these—smaller, more affordable, and better adapted to European roads. The Qashqai will go into production in our plant in Sunderland in the UK in early 2007. The Murano, launched this year, is a precursor to the Qashqai in the larger executive segment. Europeans have already taken to the Murano, driving sales far past our initial forecasts in all markets. This car is helping make Nissan a brand that people aspire to own. \n\nNissan is still a small player in the region, selling 550,000 cars across a very large and diverse territory that stretches from the Atlantic Ocean to Russia, and from Finland to Israel. In the past we covered the area through multiple distribution channels, which we are currently in the process of simplifying. A few aspects of the European market have made profitability more difficult to achieve. For example, automakers must provide models with much diversity: diesel and gasoline powertrains; manual and automatic transmissions. The cars must also be engineered to suit the high driving speeds typical in the region and ensure superior handling, which results in higher costs. \n\nAs in many other mature markets, an incentive war is raging in Europe. Nissan’s position here, as elsewhere, is to use incentives selectively and to always protect profitability. Providing products which customers recognize and appreciate for their style and attributes rather than being the best deal is the foundation of Nissan’s profitable growth. We now have a wide range of products, five of which were newly launched in 2005, including the Pathfinder and the Navara pickup. We will release the Micra C+C at the Frankfurt Motor Show in September, giving customers the option of a unique standard glass roof in a fully retracting hard convertible top.\n\nNissan’s manufacturing still defines the leading edge in Europe. According to The Harbour Report , our plant in Sunderland is the most productive plant in Europe. Sunderland will start production on a new B-segment car based on the Tone concept car in early 2006, followed by the Qashqai crossover vehicle in early 2007. Our Barcelona plant, which manufactures SUVs, 4x4s and light commercial vehicles, will reach full capacity in mid-2005. Finally, our truck plant in Avila, Spain, which specializes in light-duty trucks, will start producing a replacement for the popular Cabstar in late 2006. This efficient production base is a critical part of our profitable growth scenario. \n\nNISSAN Value-Up has given us a plan for building both profit and volume. We will not, however, sacrifice profit to gain volume. How far we can go depends on how fast we deliver results. I believe that we have much more room to grow, and to demonstrate that in even a crowded European market a smaller player can produce significant returns.”\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 61\n\nOUR WORLD\n\nDOMINIQUE THORMANN Senior Vice President Nissan Europe" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9302847460361722, + "doc_id": "6a16657fe743b4db2b7711c8c325b7f06863766cc1c6a3ec0e06622f1df754df", + "edit_distance": 0.25287356321839083, + "f1_score": 0.9805194805194807, + "meteor": 0.9774038672903944, + "precision": 0.9805194805194806, + "pred_md": "## PROVEN PLUS PROBABLE RESERVES (SANTOS SHARE) BY ACTIVITY\n\n## PROVEN PLUS PROBABLE RESERVES (SANTOS SHARE) YEAR END 2004 BY AREA\n\n(mmboe)\n\n## RESERVES (SANTOS SHARE)\n\n(mmboe)\n\n- * Contingent resources excludes any contribution from Jeruk which was still under evaluation at year end.\n\n## DEFINING RESERVES\n\nSantos has in place an evaluation and reporting process that is in line with international industry practice and is in general conformity with reserves definitions and resource classification systems published by the Society of Petroleum Engineers (SPE), World Petroleum Congress (WPC) and the American\n\nAssociation of Petroleum Geologists (AAPG). The definitions used are consistent with the requirements of the Australian Stock Exchange Ltd (ASX).\n\nReserves are defined as those quantities of petroleum which are anticipated to be commercially recovered from known accumulations from a given date\n\nforward. Santos reports reserves net of the gas required for processing and transportation to the customer. Reserves reported are based on, and accurately reflect, information compiled by full-time employees of the Company who have the requisite qualifications and experience prescribed by the ASX Listing Rules.\n\n## EXTERNALLY REVIEWED BOOKING PROCESS\n\nSantos' reserves processes and procedures were reviewed by independent expert, Gaffney, Cline & Associates, and found to be 'appropriate to providing robust estimates of Santos' reserve position in accordance with international industry practice' .\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\n25", + "recall": 0.9805194805194806, + "true_md": "## PROVEN PLUS PROBABLE RESERVES (SANTOS SHARE) BY ACTIVITY\n\n## RESERVES (SANTOS SHARE)\n\n(mmboe)\n\n(mmboe)\n\n## PROVEN PLUS PROBABLE RESERVES (SANTOS SHARE) YEAR END 2004 BY AREA\n\n## DEFINING RESERVES\n\nSantos has in place an evaluation and reporting process that is in line with international industry practice and is in general conformity with reserves definitions and resource classification systems published by the Society of Petroleum Engineers (SPE), World Petroleum Congress (WPC) and the American\n\nAssociation of Petroleum Geologists (AAPG). The definitions used are consistent with the requirements of the Australian Stock Exchange Ltd (ASX).\n\nReserves are defined as those quantities of petroleum which are anticipated to be commercially recovered from known accumulations from a given date\n\nforward. Santos reports reserves net of the gas required for processing and transportation to the customer. Reserves reported are based on, and accurately reflect, information compiled by full-time employees of the Company who have the requisite qualifications and experience prescribed by the ASX Listing Rules.\n\nSantos’ reserves processes and procedures were reviewed by independent expert, Gaffney, Cline & Associates, and found to be ‘appropriate to providing robust estimates of Santos’ reserve position in accordance with international industry practice’.\n\n* Contingent resources excludes any contribution from Jeruk which was still under evaluation at year end.\n\nAnnual Report 2004 25\n\n## EXTERNALLY REVIEWED BOOKING PROCESS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9482457954244916, + "doc_id": "0870e46aa08411bed03fae24876fb71bebadf911d8d3b5138fdad63529e7719d", + "edit_distance": 0.6144736842105263, + "f1_score": 0.9779086892488954, + "meteor": 0.8621998873090422, + "precision": 0.9793510324483776, + "pred_md": "CONTROL\n\n## Decisions Based on Shareholder Expectations\n\n'Control oversees the entire Group's performance, and we measure that performance by what our shareholders expect as a return on their investment. Our primary role, therefore, is to ensure the creation of value. This is measured by operating profit, net income after tax, net present value of investments, and return on invested capital.\n\nWe help to set global objectives and then to create the model used to achieve them. At present, Control is committed to the objectives of the NISSAN Value-Up plan-deliver a top-level operating profit margin among global automakers in fiscal 2005-07, 4.2 millions units in fiscal 2008, and a 20 percent average ROIC over the course of the plan. Our task is to validate the resources required to achieve these objectives.\n\nWe also monitor the performance of each function, region and product relative to its respective objectives. To make that process work, we have controllers for every function and region. These controllers have two main responsibilities. The first is to monitor, challenge and support operations at the function, region and product levels. The second is to deliver financial information on Nissan's profitability and manage risks and opportunities. In addition to implementing and monitoring the annual objectives for each area, Control also oversees the budget and investment control processes.\n\nThe annual budget is based on the objectives of the three-year NISSAN Value-Up plan. It is devised to ensure consistency across the whole complex weave of our products, regions and functions. Once the budget is approved, we analyze and compare actual results to it on a monthly basis. This maintains adherence to the NISSAN Value-Up plan. To enhance management's understanding of the Group's overall performance, Control forecasts performance trends three times a year. As precisely and accurately as possible, we try to predict what will happen in the immediate future so we can see what needs to be done in the coming months. Control also strives to identify and mitigate risks and maximize benefits if opportunities arise.\n\nALAIN-PIERRE RAYNAUD Senior Vice President\n\nALAIN-PIERRE RAYNAUD Senior Vice President\n\nControl is also responsible for managing investments, an area of major concern to all stakeholders. Our investment decisions are based on profitability criteria. We have made sound investments in our product lineup, R&D, manufacturing capacity, and overseas operations. In fiscal year 2004, for example, our R&D expenditures were at 4.6 percent of turnover, which is in line with that of other Japanese carmakers. In years past, Nissan was slow in making the necessary investments in this field, and R&D suffered as a result. To reestablish our technological advantage and secure sustainable growth, we upgraded our R&D capabilities. Nissan's revival-along with the success of our lineup and our industry-leading operating margin over the past three years-are all evidence that the decision was the right one.\n\nOur overseas expansion provides another example of investment decisions based on profitability. Recently, we invested in China and Thailand to enlarge our markets and develop production capacity in these new competitive countries. Despite the risks associated with these markets, we were profitable in our first year of operations. Few companies have been able to do this.\n\nIn reviewing operations, we also monitor general and administrative costs and sales and marketing expenses. Sales and marketing expenses are of importance, as they illustrate our capability to manage the relationship between volume objectives and profitability. In North America, incentives for the Nissan and Infiniti brands are at the lowest end of the market, yet global retail sales volumes are up 22 percent over the past three years. We have successfully fought market pressures and kept incentives low, while greatly increasing sales.\n\nControl's overall mission is to support management in achieving the objectives set forth in NISSAN Value-Up. Although Nissan is a healthy company, we do not perceive ourselves as cash-rich when considering an investment. Control ensures that management decisions are based on creating value and meeting shareholder expectations.'\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\n53\n\nOUR WORK", + "recall": 0.9764705882352941, + "true_md": "OUR WORK\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 53\n\n“Control oversees the entire Group’s performance, and we measure that performance by what our shareholders expect as a return on their investment. Our primary role, therefore, is to ensure the creation of value. This is measured by operating profit, net income after tax, net present value of investments, and return on invested capital. \n\nWe help to set global objectives and then to create the model used to achieve them. At present, Control is committed to the objectives of the NISSAN Value-Up plan—deliver a top-level operating profit margin among global automakers in fiscal 2005-07, 4.2 millions units in fiscal 2008, and a 20 percent average ROIC over the course of the plan. Our task is to validate the resources required to achieve these objectives. \n\nControl is also responsible for managing investments, an area of major concern to all stakeholders. Our investment decisions are based on profitability criteria. We have made sound investments in our product lineup, R&D, manufacturing capacity, and overseas operations. In fiscal year 2004, for example, our R&D expenditures were at 4.6 percent of turnover, which is in line with that of other Japanese carmakers. In years past, Nissan was slow in making the necessary investments in this field, and R&D suffered as a result. To reestablish our technological advantage and secure sustainable growth, we upgraded our R&D capabilities. Nissan’s revival—along with the success of our lineup and our industry-leading operating margin over the past three years—are all evidence that the decision was the right one. \n\nWe also monitor the performance of each function, region and product relative to its respective objectives. To make that process work, we have controllers for every function and region. These controllers have two main responsibilities. The first is to monitor, challenge and support operations at the function, region and product levels. The second is to deliver financial information on Nissan’s profitability and manage risks and opportunities. In addition to implementing and monitoring the annual objectives for each area, Control also oversees the budget and investment control processes.\n\nThe annual budget is based on the objectives of the three-year NISSAN Value-Up plan. It is devised to ensure consistency across the whole complex weave of our products, regions and functions. Once the budget is approved, we analyze and compare actual results to it on a monthly basis. This maintains adherence to the NISSAN Value-Up plan. To enhance management’s understanding of the Group’s overall performance, Control forecasts performance trends three times a year. As precisely and accurately as possible, we try to predict what will happen in the immediate future so we can see what needs to be done in the coming months. Control also strives to identify and mitigate risks and maximize benefits if opportunities arise.\n\nControl’s overall mission is to support management in achieving the objectives set forth in NISSAN Value-Up. Although Nissan is a healthy company, we do not perceive ourselves as cash-rich when considering an investment. Control ensures that management decisions are based on creating value and meeting shareholder expectations.”\n\nIn reviewing operations, we also monitor general and administrative costs and sales and marketing expenses. Sales and marketing expenses are of importance, as they illustrate our capability to manage the relationship between volume objectives and profitability. In North America, incentives for the Nissan and Infiniti brands are at the lowest end of the market, yet global retail sales volumes are up 22 percent over the past three years. We have successfully fought market pressures and kept incentives low, while greatly increasing sales.\n\nOur overseas expansion provides another example of investment decisions based on profitability. Recently, we invested in China and Thailand to enlarge our markets and develop production capacity in these new competitive countries. Despite the risks associated with these markets, we were profitable in our first year of operations. Few companies have been able to do this.\n\nALAIN-PIERRE RAYNAUD Senior Vice President\n\n## Decisions Based on Shareholder Expectations\n\n## CONTROL" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8510175659291638, + "doc_id": "d2d2e87f4b7fba9177efe51713d4130f4de63600f0746868f4c4c2ec7ba23f7f", + "edit_distance": 0.8809248554913295, + "f1_score": 0.9237288135593219, + "meteor": 0.7109401174860737, + "precision": 0.9533527696793003, + "pred_md": "HON INDUSTRIES Inc. and SUBSIDIARIES\n\n## MANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS\n\nThe following discussion of the Company's historical results of operations and of its liquidity and capital resources should be read in conjunction with the Consolidated Financial Statements of the Company and related notes.\n\n## Overview\n\nThe Company has two reportable core operating segments: office furniture and hearth products. The Company is the second largest office furniture manufacturer in the United States and the nation's leading manufacturer and marketer of gas- and wood-burning fireplaces.\n\nFrom 2000 to 2003, the office furniture industry experienced an unprecedented three-year decline due to the challenging economic environment. In 2003, this decline negatively impacted the Company's office furniture segment. In contrast, the housing market was at record high levels during 2003, which positively impacted the Company's hearth segment. The Company outperformed its peers in both segments in which it competes. The Company gained market share by providing strong brands, innovative products and services, and greater value to its end-users. Fiscal 2003 also included an extra week of activity due to the Company's 52/53-week fiscal year.\n\nNet sales were $1.8 billion in 2003, as compared to $1.7 billion in 2002. The increase in net sales reflects the 9% increase in the hearth segment and the additional week of business activity. In 2003 and 2002, the Company recorded restructuring charges and accelerated depreciation related to the closure and consolidation of office furniture facilities totaling $15.2 million and $3.0 million, respectively. Gross margins increased to 36.4% in 2003 from 35.4% in 2002 due to benefits from restructuring initiatives and its rapid continuous improvement program, new products, and increased price realization. The Company also invested aggressively in brand building and selling initiatives in 2003. Net income was $98.1 million or $1.68 per diluted share in 2003, as compared to $91.4 million or $1.55 per diluted share in 2002.\n\nThe Company generated $141.3 million in cash flow from operating activities and increased its cash position, including shortterm investments, by $48.6 million to $204.2 million. The Company paid dividends of $30.3 million and repurchased $21.5 million of its common stock, while investing $35.7 million in net capital expenditures and repaying $20.2 million of debt.\n\n## Critical Accounting Policies and Estimates GENERAL\n\nManagement's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations is based upon the Consolidated Financial Statements, which have been prepared in accordance with GAAP. The preparation of these financial statements requires management to make estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets, liabilities, revenue and expenses, and related disclosure of contingent assets and liabilities. Management bases its estimates on historical experience and on various other assumptions that are believed to be reasonable under the circumstances, the results of which form the basis for making judgments about the carrying values of assets and liabilities that are not readily apparent from other sources. Senior management has discussed the development, selection and disclosure of these estimates with the Audit Committee of our Board of Directors. Actual results may differ from these estimates under different assumptions or conditions.\n\nAn accounting policy is deemed to be critical if it requires an accounting estimate to be made based on assumptions about matters that are uncertain at the time the estimate is made, and if different estimates that reasonably could have been used, or changes in the accounting estimates that are reasonably likely to occur periodically, could materially impact the financial statements. Management believes the following critical accounting policies reflect its more significant estimates and assumptions used in the preparation of the Consolidated Financial Statements.\n\nFiscal year end - The Company's fiscal year ends on the Saturday nearest December 31. Fiscal year 2003, the year ended January 3, 2004, contained 53 weeks, while fiscal year 2002, the year ended December 28, 2002, and fiscal year 2001, the year ended December 29, 2001, contained 52 weeks. A 53-week year occurs approximately every sixth year.\n\nRevenue recognition - Revenue is normally recognized upon shipment of goods to customers. In certain circumstances revenue is not recognized until the goods are received by the customer or upon installation and customer acceptance based on the terms of the sale agreement. Revenue includes freight charged to customers; related\n\n32", + "recall": 0.8958904109589041, + "true_md": "H O N I N D U S T R I E S I n c . a n d S U B S I D I A R I E S\n\n## M A N A G E M E N T ’ S D I S C U S S I O N A N D A N A L Y S I S\n\nThe following discussion of the Company’s historical results of opera- tions and of its liquidity and capital resources should be read in conjunction with the Consolidated Financial Statements of the Company and related notes.\n\nManagement’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations is based upon the Consolidated Financial Statements, which have been prepared in accordance with GAAP. The preparation of these financial statements requires management to make estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets, liabilities, revenue and expenses, and related disclosure of con- tingent assets and liabilities. Management bases its estimates on historical experience and on various other assumptions that are believed to be reasonable under the circumstances, the results of which form the basis for making judgments about the carrying values of assets and liabilities that are not readily apparent from other sources. Senior management has discussed the development, selection and disclosure of these estimates with the Audit Committee of our Board of Directors. Actual results may differ from these estimates under different assump- tions or conditions.\n\nAn accounting policy is deemed to be critical if it requires an accounting estimate to be made based on assumptions about matters that are uncertain at the time the estimate is made, and if different estimates that reasonably could have been used, or changes in the accounting estimates that are reasonably likely to occur periodically, could materially impact the financial statements. Management believes the following critical accounting policies reflect its more significant estimates and assumptions used in the preparation of the Consolidated Financial Statements.\n\nFiscal year end – The Company’s fiscal year ends on the Saturday nearest December 31. Fiscal year 2003, the year ended January 3, 2004, contained 53 weeks, while fiscal year 2002, the year ended December 28, 2002, and fiscal year 2001, the year ended December 29, 2001, contained 52 weeks. A 53-week year occurs approximately every sixth year.\n\nRevenue recognition – Revenue is normally recognized upon shipment of goods to customers. In certain circumstances revenue is not recognized until the goods are received by the customer or upon installation and customer acceptance based on the terms of the sale agreement. Revenue includes freight charged to customers; related \n\n32\n\nThe Company generated $141.3 million in cash flow from operating activities and increased its cash position, including short- term investments, by $48.6 million to $204.2 million. The Company paid dividends of $30.3 million and repurchased $21.5 million of its common stock, while investing $35.7 million in net capital expendi- tures and repaying $20.2 million of debt.\n\nNet sales were $1.8 billion in 2003, as compared to $1.7 bil- lion in 2002. The increase in net sales reflects the 9% increase in the hearth segment and the additional week of business activity. In 2003 and 2002, the Company recorded restructuring charges and accelerated depreciation related to the closure and consolidation of office furniture facilities totaling $15.2 million and $3.0 million, respectively. Gross margins increased to 36.4% in 2003 from 35.4% in 2002 due to benefits from restructuring initiatives and its rapid continuous improvement program, new products, and increased price realization. The Company also invested aggressively in brand building and selling initiatives in 2003. Net income was $98.1 million or $1.68 per diluted share in 2003, as compared to $91.4 million or $1.55 per diluted share in 2002.\n\nFrom 2000 to 2003, the office furniture industry experi- enced an unprecedented three-year decline due to the challenging economic environment. In 2003, this decline negatively impacted the Company’s office furniture segment. In contrast, the housing market was at record high levels during 2003, which positively impacted the Company’s hearth segment. The Company outperformed its peers in both segments in which it competes. The Company gained market share by providing strong brands, innovative products and services, and greater value to its end-users. Fiscal 2003 also included an extra week of activity due to the Company’s 52/53-week fiscal year.\n\nThe Company has two reportable core operating segments: office furni- ture and hearth products. The Company is the second largest office furniture manufacturer in the United States and the nation’s leading manufacturer and marketer of gas- and wood-burning fireplaces.\n\n## Critical Accounting Policies and Estimates\n\n## GENERAL\n\n## Overview" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8878269530014565, + "doc_id": "672b5b6c31d4ee2a015b738d8dcab0990b1ceba3c2cb68cdc32f31901fe09258", + "edit_distance": 0.08250825082508251, + "f1_score": 0.9290780141843973, + "meteor": 0.9490742719942071, + "precision": 0.9562043795620438, + "pred_md": "The 20 largest shareholders of redeemable convertible preference shares in Santos as shown in the Company's Register of Members at 28 February 2005 were:\n\nSubstantial Shareholders, as at 28 February 2005, as disclosed by notices received by the Company:\n\nFor Directors' Shareholdings see Directors' Statutory Report as set out on page 47 of this Annual Report.\n\n## Voting Rights\n\nEvery member present in person or by an attorney, a proxy or a representative shall on a show of hands, have one vote and upon a poll, one vote for every fully paid ordinary share held. Pursuant to the Rules of the Santos Executive Share Plan, Plan 2 and Plan 0 shares do not carry any voting rights except on a proposal to vary the rights attached to Plan shares.\n\nHolders of redeemable convertible preference shares ('Preference Shares') do not have voting rights at any general meeting of the Company except in the following circumstances:\n\n- (a) on a proposal:\n- (1) to reduce the share capital of the Company;\n- (2) that affects rights attached to the Preference Shares;\n- (3) to wind up the Company; or\n- (4) for the disposal of the whole of the property, business and undertaking of the Company;\n- (b) on a resolution to approve the terms of a buy-back agreement;\n- (c) during a period in which a dividend or part of a dividend on the Preference Shares is in arrears; or\n- (d) during the winding up of the Company.\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\n91", + "recall": 0.903448275862069, + "true_md": "The 20 largest shareholders of redeemable convertible preference shares in San tos as shown in the Company’s Register of Members at 28 February 2005 were:\n\nSubstantial Shareholders, as at 28 February 2005, as disclosed by notices r eceived by the Company:\n\nFor Directors’ Shareholdings see Directors’ Statutory Report as set out on pag e 47 of this Annual Report.\n\nEvery member present in person or by an attorney, a proxy or a representative shall on a show of hands, have one vote and upon a poll, one vote for every fully paid ordinary share held. Pursuant to the Rules of the Santos Executive Share Plan, Plan 2 and Plan 0 shares do not carry any voting rights except on a proposal to vary the rights attached to Plan shares.\n\nHolders of redeemable convertible preference shares (“Preference Shares”) do not have voting rights at any general meeting of the Company except in the following circumstances:\n\n## Voting Rights\n\n- (a) on a proposal:\n\n- (1) to reduce the share capital of the Company;\n\n- (2) that affects rights attached to the Preference Shares;\n\n- (3) to wind up the Company; or\n\n- (4) for the disposal of the whole of the property, business and undertakin g of the Company;\n\n- (b) on a resolution to approve the terms of a buy-back agreement;\n\n- (c) during a period in which a dividend or part of a dividend on the Preferen ce Shares is in arrears; or\n\n- (d) during the winding up of the Company.\n\nAnnual Report 2004 91" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9680891105688592, + "doc_id": "6ecf41e2841a1314ff67123bfe1dc1597e69f4c8365b3c1e2303b6a049948bc8", + "edit_distance": 0.05847953216374269, + "f1_score": 0.9911504424778761, + "meteor": 0.9881041393705193, + "precision": 0.9940828402366864, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO AND FORMING PART OF THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR THE FINANCIAL YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2000\n\n## 22. SUBSEQUENT EVENTS\n\nOn 25 August 2000 the Company announced that it had reached two agreements for the placement of a total of 16,666,666 ordinary fully paid shares in the Company at an issue price of 30 cents each (Shares).\n\nThe first agreement was with Mr Mark Bradley, who agreed to take a placement of 3,225,000 Shares by 29 September 2000, followed by, if approved of by shareholders at the Company's annual general meeting, a further 3,441,666 within 7 days of that meeting.\n\nOn Mr Bradley being appointed a Director of the Company, in order to comply with the requirements of the Corporations Law and the ASX Listing Rules, the Company and Mr Bradley agreed to defer the first issue of Shares, making both issues conditional on shareholder approval.\n\nThe second agreement was with Clough Engineering Limited, pursuant to which it agreed to take a placement of 3,225,000 Shares by 29 September 2000, followed by, if approved of by shareholders at the Company's annual general meeting, 6,775,000 shares, within 7 days of that meeting.\n\nOn 15 June 2000 the Company announced that with effect from 1 July 2000 it acquired a 50% interest in OIS MOC Joint Venture Pty Ltd, to be paid for by the issue of 800,000 Shares in the Company. OIS MOC Joint Venture Pty Ltd owns the goodwill of a successful labour hire company. That company is to be renamed Mermaid Labour and Management Limited (MLML).\n\nMLML offers a full labour hire service inclusive of industrial relations consultancy, negotiating agreements and awards and were appropriate, provides ongoing management of the labour force.\n\nThe financial effect of the above events have not been reflected in these financial statements.\n\n## 23. EARNINGS PER SHARE\n\n53", + "recall": 0.9882352941176471, + "true_md": "NOTES TO AND FORMING PART OF THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR THE FINANCIAL YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2000\n\n## 22. SUBSEQUENT EVENTS\n\n## 23. EARNINGS PER SHARE\n\nOn 25 August 2000 the Company announced that it had reached two agreements for the placement of a total of 16,666,666 ordinary fully paid shares in the Company at an issue price of 30 cents each (Shares).\n\nThe first agreement was with Mr Mark Bradley, who agreed to take a placement of 3,225,000 Shares by 29 September 2000, followed by, if approved of by shareholders at the Company’s annual general meeting, a further 3,441,666 within 7 days of that meeting.\n\nOn Mr Bradley being appointed a Director of the Company, in order to comply with the requirements of the Corporations Law and the ASX Listing Rules, the Company and Mr Bradley agreed to defer the first issue of Shares, making both issues conditional on shareholder approval.\n\nThe second agreement was with Clough Engineering Limited, pursuant to which it agreed to take a placement of 3,225,000 Shares by 29 September 2000, followed by, if approved of by shareholders at the Company’s annual general meeting, 6,775,000 shares, within 7 days of that meeting.\n\nOn 15 June 2000 the Company announced that with effect from 1 July 2000 it acquired a 50% interest in OIS MOC Joint Venture Pty Ltd, to be paid for by the issue of 800,000 Shares in the Company. OIS MOC Joint Venture Pty Ltd owns the goodwill of a successful labour hire company. That company is to be renamed Mermaid Labour and Management Limited (MLML).\n\nMLML offers a full labour hire service inclusive of industrial relations consultancy, negotiating agreements and awards and were appropriate, provides ongoing management of the labour force.\n\nThe financial effect of the above events have not been reflected in these financial statements.\n\n53" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "74b933d809ae9794c609ab2a82bce86cc3e846aa73e7d935eed7a7152294fd6c", + "edit_distance": 0.05847953216374269, + "f1_score": 0.9911504424778761, + "meteor": 0.9881041393705193, + "precision": 0.9940828402366864, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.9882352941176471, + "true_md": "" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9495980512527613, + "doc_id": "e3cac352a11fa7d4d7727a9a590bbb1be919a5f62d7ec3cad5733b0d3931ee4f", + "edit_distance": 0.5441919191919192, + "f1_score": 0.9697841726618704, + "meteor": 0.8713050557367104, + "precision": 0.9739884393063584, + "pred_md": "COMMUNICATIONS\n\n## Speed, relevance and trust\n\n'The role of Communications at Nissan is far more dynamic today than it has ever been. We are looking beyond traditional methods such as advertising to talk with stakeholders and approaching communications in a more strategic way. We are trying to not only become more effective but also more efficient and more proactive. We're not just pushing messages out and waiting to deal with issues that come up.\n\nAs part of that more proactive approach, we're reaching out across the world, talking with our stakeholders, and looking for issues-both positive and negative-that may affect our business. At Nissan, Communications is focused on creating opportunities for the company to tell its story in a relevant way to stakeholders.\n\nOne immediate need is to globalize the company's communications. We're working toward global consistency, behaving not as isolated regional units but as a single global entity with a strong single voice. However, that is not at the expense of local sensitivities and addressing the unique requirements of local stakeholders.\n\nWe take communications within Nissan itself just as seriously. Our new internal motto is 'No surprises.' That means no employee should ever read about something going on at Nissan in the media first. There is always speculation in the media, which employees naturally read like anyone else. We are focused on building our internal communications to the point where employees trust us over what they're hearing outside. Our hope is that, when they read something about Nissan, their first impulse is to confirm it internally.\n\nIt is our belief that Nissan employees deserve an internal communications system that operates at the same speed and effectiveness as an external news agency like CNN or the BBC. Last year we introduced a significant new internal communications tool called WIN-Workforce Integration at Nissan, our global employee intranet. WIN gives us a powerful global tool that links all employees who have access to a PC. Prior to WIN, it could take weeks to share video with employees of a major company event. WIN and technologies\n\nSIMON SPROULE\n\nSIMON SPROULE\n\nVice President\n\nsuch as streaming video have cut that communication time from weeks to just hours. But we are not resting here. We recognize that mobile communications is a growing new force in how people get news and information and have a number of projects looking at delivering important news to our employees via devices such as mobile phones.\n\nWhether it is with governments, local communities, pressure groups or non-governmental organizations, we also need to be able to respond to interest in our company across a wide variety of issues. For example, we are seeing increasing interest in Japan and elsewhere about Corporate Social Responsibility or CSR. This year, we decided to establish a dedicated function within Nissan that focuses solely on this area. Our first year will be spent defining CSR in Nissan, which areas we should concentrate on and how we will measure our progress. We are also taking a fresh look at corporate citizenship to ensure that we are giving back to society in a way that is consistent with the values of our company and employees.\n\nCSR and corporate citizenship are closely related because people naturally link the good works a company performs to its role in society. We want the company and its brands to touch everything we do, and corporate citizenship activities should reflect our values and attributes. The three pillars of Nissan's corporate citizenship are in education, the environment, and humanitarian activities. Meeting the latter commitment, to give one example, means not just reacting to disasters but being proactive as well. We want to move away from simply writing a check to a much deeper level of involvement, and we will be taking this policy beyond the local community perspective to the national and global level.\n\nWe see our share price as a direct function of communications, a function of expectations. Whether we are delivering results or providing information to investors, we know that speed and transparency are vital. Our Investor Relations division works hand-in-hand with our external and internal communications teams to ensure the timely delivery of that information. Speed, relevance and trust are at the core of all communications at Nissan.'\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\n43\n\nOUR WORK", + "recall": 0.9656160458452722, + "true_md": "SIMON SPROULE Vice President\n\n“The role of Communications at Nissan is far more dynamic today than it has ever been. We are looking beyond traditional methods such as advertising to talk with stakeholders and approaching communications in a more strategic way. We are trying to not only become more effective but also more efficient and more proactive. We’re not just pushing messages out and waiting to deal with issues that come up.\n\nAs part of that more proactive approach, we’re reaching out across the world, talking with our stakeholders, and looking for issues—both positive and negative—that may affect our business. At Nissan, Communications is focused on creating opportunities for the company to tell its story in a relevant way to stakeholders.\n\nsuch as streaming video have cut that communication time from weeks to just hours. But we are not resting here. We recognize that mobile communications is a growing new force in how people get news and information and have a number of projects looking at delivering important news to our employees via devices such as mobile phones.\n\nWhether it is with governments, local communities, pressure groups or non-governmental organizations, we also need to be able to respond to interest in our company across a wide variety of issues. For example, we are seeing increasing interest in Japan and elsewhere about Corporate Social Responsibility or CSR. This year, we decided to establish a dedicated function within Nissan that focuses solely on this area. Our first year will be spent defining CSR in Nissan, which areas we should concentrate on and how we will measure our progress. We are also taking a fresh look at corporate citizenship to ensure that we are giving back to society in a way that is consistent with the values of our company and employees. \n\nOne immediate need is to globalize the company’s communications. We’re working toward global consistency, behaving not as isolated regional units but as a single global entity with a strong single voice. However, that is not at the expense of local sensitivities and addressing the unique requirements of local stakeholders. \n\nWe take communications within Nissan itself just as seriously. Our new internal motto is ‘No surprises.’ That means no employee should ever read about something going on at Nissan in the media first. There is always speculation in the media, which employees naturally read like anyone else. We are focused on building our internal communications to the point where employees trust us over what they’re hearing outside. Our hope is that, when they read something about Nissan, their first impulse is to confirm it internally.\n\nIt is our belief that Nissan employees deserve an internal communications system that operates at the same speed and effectiveness as an external news agency like CNN or the BBC. Last year we introduced a significant new internal communications tool called WIN—Workforce Integration at Nissan, our global employee intranet. WIN gives us a powerful global tool that links all employees who have access to a PC. Prior to WIN, it could take weeks to share video with employees of a major company event. WIN and technologies\n\nCSR and corporate citizenship are closely related because people naturally link the good works a company performs to its role in society. We want the company and its brands to touch everything we do, and corporate citizenship activities should reflect our values and attributes. The three pillars of Nissan’s corporate citizenship are in education, the environment, and humanitarian activities. Meeting the latter commitment, to give one example, means not just reacting to disasters but being proactive as well. We want to move away from simply writing a check to a much deeper level of involvement, and we will be taking this policy beyond the local community perspective to the national and global level. \n\nWe see our share price as a direct function of communications, a function of expectations. Whether we are delivering results or providing information to investors, we know that speed and transparency are vital. Our Investor Relations division works hand-in-hand with our external and internal communications teams to ensure the timely delivery of that information. Speed, relevance and trust are at the core of all communications at Nissan.”\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 43\n\nOUR WORK\n\n## COMMUNICATIONS\n\n## Speed, relevance and trust" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "a68e7fcd8c0315012f0f86b1fb182c195561c1e20d9c7478a35bf6d5a80cd604", + "edit_distance": 0.5, + "f1_score": 0.6666666666666666, + "meteor": 0.2631578947368421, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "NOTES", + "recall": 0.5, + "true_md": "NOTES\n\n67" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.954277375642366, + "doc_id": "0ac7801f9a6362b3b14d0ad3de2566e50102c8d1483d3d68fa282d980a424efe", + "edit_distance": 0.18571428571428572, + "f1_score": 0.9639249639249639, + "meteor": 0.9447355586573793, + "precision": 0.9794721407624634, + "pred_md": "2004 impacted margins. The Grocery Products segment was most significantly impacted by the higher costs, including increases on beef-based inputs. Changes in the product mix have also contributed to a margin decrease in the Specialty Foods segment, as lower margined products are sold by Century Foods International, acquired late in fiscal 2003.\n\nThe company believes the strong demand for protein will continue into the upcoming year. The price outlook for grain is also favorable, which is a key input for the JOTS segment. Additionally, the company continues to expand sales of value-added product lines. These factors should all enhance gross profits during fiscal 2005.\n\nSelling and Delivery: Selling and delivery expenses for the fourth quarter and year were $166,196 and $621,694, respectively, compared to $144,083 and $583,964 last year. These increases were driven by increased tonnage volume over the prior year and $8,327 of early retirement, relocation, and other expenses related to the realignment of the company's sales organization to provide better service and additional leverage with customers. As a percent of net sales, selling and delivery expenses increased to 12.4 percent for the quarter compared to 12.3 percent in 2003 and decreased to 13.0 percent for the year compared to 13.9 percent in 2003. The twelve month percentage decrease is primarily due to improved market conditions over fiscal 2003, which resulted in product price increases exceeding increases in selling and delivery expenses. Additionally, marketing expenses were not as high as anticipated during the fourth quarter, as the company evaluated some of its planned programs and adjusted the timing of field initiatives planned to support new product launches late in fiscal 2004. As a percent of sales, the company expects selling and delivery expenses in fiscal 2005 to remain consistent with fiscal 2004 results.\n\nAdministrative and General: Administrative and general expenses were $38,779 and $146,488 for the quarter and year, respectively, compared to $35,182 and $124,665 last year. As a percent of net sales, administrative and general expenses for the quarter and year were 2.9 and 3.1 percent, respectively, compared to 3.0 percent for the quarter and year in fiscal 2003. Changes in the discount rate and expected rate of return on pension plan assets, both of which were effective with the beginning of the fiscal year, resulted in higher pension and medical expenses for the fourth quarter and year of approximately $2,300 and $11,300, respectively, compared to fiscal 2003. These increases were partially offset by reductions in postretirement benefits of $1,504 and $3,903 for the quarter and year, respectively, related to the Medicare Prescription Drug, Improvement and Modernization Act of 2003. (See further discussion in Note F 'Pension and Other Postretirement Health Care Benefits.') Other items significantly impacting fiscal 2004 include an increase in amortization of intangibles of $2,424 and an\n\nincrease in stock option expense of approximately $1,300, offset by a reduction in bad debt expenses of $5,244. The company expects administrative and general expenses, as a percent of sales, to approximate 3.1 percent in future periods.\n\nResearch and development expenses for the fourth quarter increased to $4,434 from $3,460 in the comparable quarter of 2003, and for the fiscal year increased to $15,944 from $13,165 in 2003. The acquisition of Century Foods International in July 2003, generated approximately $600 of the increase over the prior year. The remainder of the increase was distributed across various Hormel Foods and Jennie-O Turkey Store product lines, supporting the company's on-going initiatives to expand valueadded product offerings and focus on new product development. As the company continues to support these strategies, research and development expenses are expected to continue increasing at a similar rate in future periods.\n\nEquity in Earnings of Affiliates: Equity in earnings of affiliates were $1,282 and $6,458 for the quarter and year, respectively, compared to $2,174 and $5,886 last year. The twelve month increase in fiscal 2004 is due to improved results of the company's 49.0 percent owned joint venture, Carapelli USA, LLC. Minority interests in the company's consolidated investments are also reflected in these figures but are not significant at this time. The company expects equity in earnings of affiliates to increase slightly in fiscal 2005.\n\nIn conformity with U.S. generally accepted accounting principles, the company accounts for its majority-owned China and Australian operations under the consolidation method. Other international investments, such as Purefoods-Hormel and Hormel Alimentos, in which the company owns a minority interest, are accounted for under the equity or cost method. These international investments, along with investments in and receivables from other affiliates, are included in the balance sheet line item 'investments in and receivables from affiliates.' The composition of this line item at October 30, 2004, was as follows:\n\nIncome Taxes: The company's effective tax rate for the quarter and year was 36.5 percent in fiscal 2004 compared to 37.0 and 35.8 percent for the quarter and year, respectively, in fiscal 2003. The decrease in the fourth quarter rate as compared to the prior year primarily reflects a decrease in foreign taxes. The company expects the effective tax rate in fiscal 2005 to be reasonably consistent with fiscal 2004.\n\n2004 Annual Report\n\n19", + "recall": 0.9488636363636364, + "true_md": "2004 impacted margins. The Grocery Products segment was most significantly impacted by the higher costs, including increases on beef-based inputs. Changes in the product mix have also contributed to a margin decrease in the Specialty Foods segment, as lower margined products are sold by Century Foods International, acquired late in fiscal 2003.\n\nThe company believes the strong demand for protein will continue into the upcoming year. The price outlook for grain is also favorable, which is a key input for the JOTS segment. Additionally, the com- pany continues to expand sales of value-added product lines. These factors should all enhance gross profits during fiscal 2005.\n\nSelling and Delivery: Selling and delivery expenses for the fourth quarter and year were $166,196 and $621,694, respectively, compared to $144,083 and $583,964 last year. These increases were driven by increased tonnage volume over the prior year and $8,327 of early retirement, relocation, and other expenses related to the realignment of the company’s sales organization to provide better service and additional leverage with customers. As a percent of net sales, selling and delivery expenses increased to 12.4 per- cent for the quarter compared to 12.3 percent in 2003 and decreased to 13.0 percent for the year compared to 13.9 percent in 2003. The twelve month percentage decrease is primarily due to improved market conditions over fiscal 2003, which resulted in product price increases exceeding increases in selling and delivery expenses. Additionally, marketing expenses were not as high as anticipated during the fourth quarter, as the company evaluated some of its planned programs and adjusted the timing of field initiatives planned to support new product launches late in fiscal 2004. As a percent of sales, the company expects selling and delivery expenses in fiscal 2005 to remain consistent with fiscal 2004 results.\n\nAdministrative and General: Administrative and general expenses were $38,779 and $146,488 for the quarter and year, respectively, compared to $35,182 and $124,665 last year. As a percent of net sales, administrative and general expenses for the quarter and year were 2.9 and 3.1 percent, respectively, compared to 3.0 percent for the quarter and year in fiscal 2003. Changes in the discount rate and expected rate of return on pension plan assets, both of which were effective with the beginning of the fiscal year, resulted in higher pension and medical expenses for the fourth quarter and year of approximately $2,300 and $11,300, respectively, compared to fiscal 2003. These increases were partially offset by reductions in postretirement benefits of $1,504 and $3,903 for the quarter and year, respectively, related to the Medicare Prescription Drug, Improvement and Modernization Act of 2003. (See further discus- sion in Note F “Pension and Other Postretirement Health Care Benefits.”) Other items significantly impacting fiscal 2004 include an increase in amortization of intangibles of $2,424 and an\n\nIncome Taxes: The company’s effective tax rate for the quarter and year was 36.5 percent in fiscal 2004 compared to 37.0 and 35.8 percent for the quarter and year, respectively, in fiscal 2003. The decrease in the fourth quarter rate as compared to the prior year primarily reflects a decrease in foreign taxes. The company expects the effective tax rate in fiscal 2005 to be reasonably consistent with fiscal 2004.\n\nincrease in stock option expense of approximately $1,300, offset by a reduction in bad debt expenses of $5,244. The company expects administrative and general expenses, as a percent of sales, to approximate 3.1 percent in future periods. \n\nResearch and development expenses for the fourth quarter increased to $4,434 from $3,460 in the comparable quarter of 2003, and for the fiscal year increased to $15,944 from $13,165 in 2003. The acquisition of Century Foods International in July 2003, generated approximately $600 of the increase over the prior year. The remainder of the increase was distributed across various Hormel Foods and Jennie-O Turkey Store product lines, supporting the company’s on-going initiatives to expand value- added product offerings and focus on new product development. As the company continues to support these strategies, research and development expenses are expected to continue increasing at a similar rate in future periods. \n\nEquity in Earnings of Affiliates: Equity in earnings of affiliates were $1,282 and $6,458 for the quarter and year, respectively, compared to $2,174 and $5,886 last year. The twelve month increase in fiscal 2004 is due to improved results of the company’s 49.0 percent owned joint venture, Carapelli USA, LLC. Minority interests in the company’s consolidated investments are also reflected in these figures but are not significant at this time. The company expects equity in earnings of affiliates to increase slightly in fiscal 2005.\n\nIn conformity with U.S. generally accepted accounting principles, the company accounts for its majority-owned China and Australian operations under the consolidation method. Other international investments, such as Purefoods-Hormel and Hormel Alimentos, in which the company owns a minority interest, are accounted for under the equity or cost method. These international investments, along with investments in and receivables from other affiliates, are included in the balance sheet line item “investments in and receiv- ables from affiliates.” The composition of this line item at October 30, 2004, was as follows:\n\n2004 Annual Report 19" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9297709770688526, + "doc_id": "4219481cdf0ac108ce2139105053a1bf72eab47c7c57a418bf92496551afe1f6", + "edit_distance": 0.40370370370370373, + "f1_score": 0.9708737864077672, + "meteor": 0.9025945257907937, + "precision": 0.974025974025974, + "pred_md": "- > Any time of day, wherever you are, there's always a great reason to choose Hormel Foods. You provide the hunger, we'll deliver the great flavor and convenience that keeps you moving throughout the day.\n\n## tempting mid-day meals\n\n## taking time out for taste\n\nMemorable homemade sandwiches start with a visit to our Di Lusso Deli Company counter. This premium line of deli meats, cheeses, and condiments can be found in the deli case in select markets. Hormel pepperoni is another great choice for snacks that deliver taste and satisfaction. Our Di Lusso and other lines of pre-sliced meats generated double-digit sales gains in fiscal 2004.\n\nCasual lunchtime dining is a tasty mid-day booster with our Austin Blues BBQ and sandwiches made from Hormel Foods' Bread Ready line of pre-sliced luncheon meats. With nearly half of the average family food dollar spent away from home, Hormel Foods has worked to become a preferred supplier of preportioned, pre-sliced, and pre-flavored items that build repeat Foodservice business. Foodservice sales were up 22 percent in fiscal 2004.\n\n## getting a good start\n\nHormel Foods breakfast meats are great eye-openers, whether it's Hormel Canadian bacon, Hormel microwave bacon, Hormel fully cooked bacon, or the increasingly popular Jennie-O Turkey Store turkey bacon products. The popularity of Hormel microwave and fully cooked bacon grew again in fiscal 2004, with sales up 19 percent.\n\n2004 Annual Report\n\n13", + "recall": 0.967741935483871, + "true_md": "## tempting mid-day meals\n\n## taking time out for taste\n\nMemorable homemade sandwiches start with a visit to our Di Lusso Deli Company counter. This premium line of deli meats, cheeses, and condiments can be found in the deli case in select markets. Hormel pepperoni is another great choice for snacks that deliver taste and satisfaction. Our Di Lusso and other lines of pre-sliced meats generated double-digit sales gains in fiscal 2004.\n\nCasual lunchtime dining is a tasty mid-day booster with our Austin Blues BBQ and sandwiches made from Hormel Foods’ Bread Ready line of pre-sliced luncheon meats. With nearly half of the average family food dollar spent away from home, Hormel Foods has worked to become a preferred supplier of pre- portioned, pre-sliced, and pre-flavored items that build repeat Foodservice business. Foodservice sales were up 22 percent in fiscal 2004.\n\nHormel Foods breakfast meats are great eye-openers, whether it’s Hormel Canadian bacon, Hormel microwave bacon, Hormel fully cooked bacon, or the increasingly popular Jennie-O Turkey Store turkey bacon products. The popularity of Hormel microwave and fully cooked bacon grew again in fiscal 2004, with sales up 19 percent.\n\n## getting a good start\n\n- > Any time of day, wherever you are, there’s always a great reason to choose Hormel Foods. You provide the hunger, we’ll deliver the great flavor and convenience that keeps you moving throughout the day.\n\n2004 Annual Report\n\n13" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7349329023351313, + "doc_id": "9979bee13c0c1e147e3b7436dfba816f034903fecbdbeab2ac651ffe854768da", + "edit_distance": 0.22033898305084745, + "f1_score": 0.8611111111111113, + "meteor": 0.7895132015552332, + "precision": 0.9117647058823529, + "pred_md": "- /H17073 H usband-and-wife team Mike and Debbie Brown, senior vice president and vice president of UBS PaineWebber in Chattanooga, Tenn., left, like to cultivate relationships with investors such as Mac and Teresa Dean. One thing that strengthens their bonds is that the Browns don't ask clients to do anything they wouldn't do. 'My own family's money is with The Hartford,' Mike Brown says. The Browns share equally close relationships with the PLANCO wholesalers who support them.\n- /H17075 PLANCO organized some 5,000 instructional seminars in 2001. Brian Taggart, regional marketing director, center, educates banks' customer service specialists and branch-based advisors about The Hartford's variable annuities and mutual funds. The sessions give them the knowledge and confidence to sell The Hartford's products or refer potential customers to banks' financial advisors.\n\n24", + "recall": 0.8157894736842105, + "true_md": "- GLYPH<H17073> H usband-and-wife team Mike and Debbie Brown, senior vice president and vice president of UBS PaineWebber in Chattanooga, Tenn., left, like to cultivate relation- ships with investors such as Mac and Teresa Dean. One thing that strengthens their bonds is that the Browns don’t ask clients to do anything they wouldn’t do. “My own family’s money is with The Hartford,” Mike Brown says. The Browns share equally close relationships with the PLANCO wholesalers who support them.\n\n- GLYPH<H17075> PLANCO organized some 5,000 instructional seminars in 2001. Brian Taggart, regional marketing director, center, educates banks’ customer service specialists and branch-based advisors about The Hartford’s variable annuities and mutual funds. The sessions give them the knowledge and confi- dence to sell The Hartford’s prod- ucts or refer potential customers to banks’ financial advisors.\n\n24" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "2a32698036ca51186a1065f7a4e59c4f57bf3150f176bd41ac4d3989052c8bc1", + "edit_distance": 0.75, + "f1_score": 0.42857142857142855, + "meteor": 0.2302302302302302, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "ANNUAL REPORT 2004", + "recall": 0.2727272727272727, + "true_md": "# ANNUAL REPORT 2004\n\nRepublic Services, Inc. • 2004 Annual Report" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9098568877512878, + "doc_id": "df78e13d8c41d91ff015129095a51e863b77db98afd80f99b551634c41c3f073", + "edit_distance": 0.5281207133058985, + "f1_score": 0.9720670391061452, + "meteor": 0.895680923250515, + "precision": 0.9775280898876404, + "pred_md": "OUR WORLD\n\n64\n\n## Succeeding Despite Growing Competition\n\nKATSUMI NAKAMURA President & CEO, Dongfeng Motor Co., Ltd.\n\nKATSUMI NAKAMURA President & CEO, Dongfeng Motor Co., Ltd.\n\n'To understand the depth of Nissan's commitment to China, you need look no further than Dongfeng Motor Co., Ltd., our joint venture with Dongfeng Motor Corporation. DFL, as we refer to it, is the biggest JV in China's automotive industry, representing a 50-50 investment by Nissan and Dongfeng totaling RMB16.7\n\nbillion (US$2 billion). Dongfeng is the major commercial vehicle manufacturer in China, and the Dongfeng brand is famous throughout the country. With 70,000 employees and over fifty subsidiaries, DFL is a strategic alliance for both companies. In China, most joint ventures with foreign makers are small and focus only on producing the foreign partner's products. In contrast, DFL integrates Nissan's technology, products and the Nissan Management Way in the production of vehicles under both the Nissan and Dongfeng brands.\n\nGreater competition and a softer economy made 2004 a difficult year in the passenger vehicle market. Yet we sold approximately 92,000 passenger vehicles in China during the last calendar year. That number included 61,000 DFL-produced Nissan-branded vehicles, 21,000 Zhengzhou-produced Nissan pickups and SUVs, and 10,000 imported vehicles. We also sold nearly 88,000 light commercial vehicles under the Dongfeng brand.\n\nIncreases in raw material costs and reductions in selling price did affect the commercial vehicle business in fiscal 2004. As a result, operating profit from DFL to Nissan totaled ¥10 billion, which was lower than anticipated. While we work to manage material price increases, we're still focused on improving the quality and price competitiveness\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\nof our products. We're also planning to export these models to Africa, South America, and the Middle East.\n\nTwo or three years ago, the passenger vehicle market in China was a seller's market. That reversed during the last half of the year, influenced by macroeconomic controls and more products coming onto the market. As a result, most automakers entered into a price war. We stayed out of that because we didn't want to damage our brand image. Instead, we found alternative means to adapt to the market. For example, we did not discount the selling price of the Teana during its high-profile launch. In December 2004, we also announced to customers that we would give them a rebate if prices went down after they bought a Nissan. We released a model change for the Sunny, and kept firm on the Teana's pricing. These actions have helped keep our brand image high, while building customer loyalty, selling cars and reducing inventory.\n\nCalendar year 2005 looks very promising to us. The Teana has been a tremendous success, winning 12 awards-including Car of the Year for 2005 in China-and helping solidify Nissan's reputation for quality. The car continues to sell well, and opens the door for five models that will be launched in fiscal 2005: the Tiida sedan in April; Fuga in June; Quest in August, which is imported from the U.S.; the Tiida in the second half along; and the 350Z in calendar year 2006. The Tiida has already won two awards at the Shanghai Motor Show for best new model and roominess, and answers the strong demand in China for fuel efficiency.\n\nIn June 2005, the China State Administration for Industry and Commerce officially recognized the NISSAN trademark as a 'famous trademark.' Only trademarks with superior reputations receive this distinction. Not only does this represent an important milestone in Nissan's efforts to build its brand in China, it also represents the first time a Japanese automaker has had its trademark acknowledged in China. Currently, Nissan and YKK are the only Japanese companies to be awarded this status. Now that Nissan's brand image is respected in China, we must improve our", + "recall": 0.9666666666666667, + "true_md": "CHINA\n\n## Succeeding Despite Growing Competition\n\nKATSUMI NAKAMURA President & CEO, Dongfeng Motor Co., Ltd.\n\n“To understand the depth of Nissan’s commitment to China, you need look no further than Dongfeng Motor Co., Ltd., our joint venture with Dongfeng Motor Corporation. DFL, as we refer to it, is the biggest JV in China’s automotive industry, representing a 50-50 investment by Nissan and Dongfeng totaling RMB16.7\n\nbillion (US$2 billion). Dongfeng is the major commercial vehicle manufacturer in China, and the Dongfeng brand is famous throughout the country. With 70,000 employees and over fifty subsidiaries, DFL is a strategic alliance for both companies. In China, most joint ventures with foreign makers are small and focus only on producing the foreign partner’s products. In contrast, DFL integrates Nissan’s technology, products and the Nissan Management Way in the production of vehicles under both the Nissan and Dongfeng brands. \n\nGreater competition and a softer economy made 2004 a difficult year in the passenger vehicle market. Yet we sold approximately 92,000 passenger vehicles in China during the last calendar year. That number included 61,000 DFL-produced Nissan-branded vehicles, 21,000 Zhengzhou-produced Nissan pickups and SUVs, and 10,000 imported vehicles. We also sold nearly 88,000 light commercial vehicles under the Dongfeng brand. \n\nIncreases in raw material costs and reductions in selling price did affect the commercial vehicle business in fiscal 2004. As a result, operating profit from DFL to Nissan totaled ¥10 billion, which was lower than anticipated. While we work to manage material price increases, we’re still focused on improving the quality and price competitiveness\n\nIn June 2005, the China State Administration for Industry and Commerce officially recognized the NISSAN trademark as a “famous trademark.” Only trademarks with superior reputations receive this distinction. Not only does this represent an important milestone in Nissan’s efforts to build its brand in China, it also represents the first time a Japanese automaker has had its trademark acknowledged in China. Currently, Nissan and YKK are the only Japanese companies to be awarded this status. Now that Nissan’s brand image is respected in China, we must improve our\n\nCalendar year 2005 looks very promising to us. The Teana has been a tremendous success, winning 12 awards—including Car of the Year for 2005 in China—and helping solidify Nissan’s reputation for quality. The car continues to sell well, and opens the door for five models that will be launched in fiscal 2005: the Tiida sedan in April; Fuga in June; Quest in August, which is imported from the U.S.; the Tiida in the second half along; and the 350Z in calendar year 2006. The Tiida has already won two awards at the Shanghai Motor Show for best new model and roominess, and answers the strong demand in China for fuel efficiency. \n\nof our products. We’re also planning to export these models to Africa, South America, and the Middle East. \n\nInstead, we found alternative means to adapt to the market. For example, we did not discount the selling price of the Teana during its high-profile launch. In December 2004, we also announced to customers that we would give them a rebate if prices went down after they bought a Nissan. We released a model change for the Sunny, and kept firm on the Teana’s pricing. These actions have helped keep our brand image high, while building customer loyalty, selling cars and reducing inventory.\n\nTwo or three years ago, the passenger vehicle market in China was a seller’s market. That reversed during the last half of the year, influenced by macroeconomic controls and more products coming onto the market. As a result, most automakers entered into a price war. We stayed out of that because we didn’t want to damage our brand image.\n\nOUR WORLD\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 64" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8584292640506737, + "doc_id": "244fc4a32629cd658ac63569eaee8d6cd489d82469bf6a9334510b20178854d7", + "edit_distance": 0.09821428571428571, + "f1_score": 0.8985507246376813, + "meteor": 0.9434225055158578, + "precision": 0.8857142857142857, + "pred_md": "2\n\nFirst Financial Bankshares, Inc. is a financial holding company\n\nheadquartered in Abilene, Texas, with consolidated assets of $2.0 billion as of December 31, 2002. The corporation has 10 affiliate banks, which provide services from 28 full-service locations in the Central, West and High Plains regions of Texas. The common stock of First Financial Bankshares, Inc. is held by more than 3,500 shareholders and is listed on The NASDAQ Stock Market ¤ under the symbol FFIN.\n\n'Our 10 affiliate banks provide services from 28 full-service locations in the Central, W est and High Plains regions of T exas.'", + "recall": 0.9117647058823529, + "true_md": "First Financial Bankshares, Inc. is a financial holding company headquartered in Abilene, Texas, with consolidated assets of $2.0 billion as of December 31, 2002. The corporation has 10 affiliate banks, which provide services from 28 full-service locations in the Central, West and High Plains regions of Texas. The common stock of First Financial Bankshar es, Inc. is held by more than 3,500 shareholders and is listed on The NASDAQ Stock Market ® under the symbol FFIN.\n\n“Our 10 affiliate banks provide services from 28 full-service locations in the Central, West and High Plains regions of Texas.”" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9321128560447501, + "doc_id": "a4567f97cd68e82a05a876ae105ddba2ecbdfaa8730ef10ee0a41f499bdd03f8", + "edit_distance": 0.05004549590536852, + "f1_score": 0.9848693259972489, + "meteor": 0.9531833221135254, + "precision": 0.9862258953168044, + "pred_md": "SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## Note 7. Significant Contractual Relationship (Continued)\n\nAs an exclusive PCS Affiliate of Sprint, the Company has the exclusive right to build, own and maintain its portion of Sprint's nationwide PCS network, in the aforementioned areas, to Sprint's specifications. The initial term of the Agreement is for 20 years and is automatically renewable for three 10-year options, unless terminated by either party under provisions outlined in the Agreement.\n\nUnder the Sprint agreements, Sprint provides the Company significant support services such as customer service, billing, collections, long distance, national network operations support, inventory logistics support, use of the Sprint brand names, national advertising, national distribution and product development. Additionally, the Company derives substantial travel revenue and incurs substantial travel expenses when Sprint and Sprint's PCS Affiliate partners' subscribers incur minutes of use in the Company's territory and when the Company's subscribers incur minutes of use in Sprint and Sprint's PCS Affiliate partners' territories. These transactions are recorded as travel revenue, network operating cost and travel cost, cost of equipment and selling and marketing expense in the Company's consolidated statements of income. Cost of service related to access to the nationwide network, including travel transactions and long distance expenses, are recorded in network operating costs. The costs of services such as billing, collections and customer service are included in selling, general and administrative costs. Cost of equipment transactions between the Company and Sprint relate to inventory purchased and subsidized costs of handsets. These costs also include transactions related to subsidized costs on handsets and commissions paid to Sprint for sales of handsets through Sprint's national distribution programs.\n\nHistorically, Sprint determined monthly service charges at the beginning of each calendar year. Sprint calculated the costs to provide these services for its network partners and required a final settlement against the charges actually paid. If the costs to provide these services were less than the amounts paid by the Sprint's network partners, Sprint issued a credit for these amounts. If the costs to provide the services were more that the amounts paid by Sprint's network partners, Sprint charged the network partners for these amounts. For the years presented, the Company recorded the actual costs, after the adjustments, which were recorded for these services provided by Sprint.\n\nThe wireless market is characterized by significant risks as a result of rapid changes in technology, increasing competition and the cost associated with the build-out and enhancement of Sprint's nationwide digital wireless network. Sprint provides back-office and other services including travel clearing-house functions to the Company. In the past, there was no prescribed formula defined in the agreements with Sprint for the calculation of the fee charged to the Company for these services. Sprint adjusted these fees at least annually. This situation changed with the execution of an amendment to the Agreement which occurred on January 31, 2004, retroactive to January 1, 2004 (the Amended Agreement). The Amended Agreement provides greater certainty to the Company for certain future expenses and revenues during the term of the agreement and simplifies the methods used to settle revenue and expenses between the Company and Sprint. The Company's PCS subsidiary is dependent upon Sprint's ability to execute certain functions such as billing, customer care, collections and other operating activities under the Company's agreements with Sprint. Due to the high degree of integration within many of the Sprint systems, and the Company's dependency on these systems, in many cases it would be difficult for the Company to perform these services in-house or to outsource the services to another provider. If Sprint was unable to perform any such service, the change could result in increased operating expenses and have an adverse impact on the Company's operating results and cash flow. Additionally, the Company's ability to attract and maintain a sufficient customer base is critical to generating positive cash flow from operations and ultimately profitability for its PCS operation. Changes in technology, increased competition, or economic conditions in the wireless industry or the economy in general, individually and/or collectively, could have an adverse effect on the Company's financial position and results of operations.\n\nThrough December 31, 2003, the Agreement provided that Sprint retains 8% of all collected service revenue from subscribers with their service home in the Company's territory, and 8% of the roaming revenue generated by non-Sprint wireless subscribers who use the Company's network. With the adoption of the new Amended Agreement, the Company will record its service revenue and receive payment from Sprint based on billed revenue, net of the 8% of billed revenue retained by Sprint, customer credits and allocated write offs.\n\nThe Company receives and pays travel fees for inter-market usage of the network by Sprint wireless subscribers not homed in a market in which they may use the service. Sprint and its PCS Affiliates pay the Company for the use of its network by their wireless subscribers, while the Company pays Sprint and its PCS Affiliates reciprocal fees for Company subscribers using other segments of the network not operated by the Company. The rates paid on intermarket travel were reduced during 2001. The inter-market travel rate was $0.20 per minute from inception of the Sprint agreement through April 30, 2001, $0.15 per minute from May 1, 2001 through September 30, 2001, and $0.12 per minute from October 1, 2001 through December 31, 2001. The rate was further reduced to $0.10 per minute as of 29 ■ January 1, 2002. The $0.10 rate was in effect for the full year of 2002. The travel rate for 2003 was $0.058 per minute and will remain at this rate through December 31, 2006.\n\n2003 ANNUAL REPORT", + "recall": 0.9835164835164835, + "true_md": "SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## Note 7. Significant Contractual Relationship (Continued)\n\nAs an exclusive PCS Affiliate of Sprint, the Company has the exclusive right to build, own and maintain its portion of Sprint’s nationwide PCS network, in the aforementioned areas, to Sprint’s specifications. The initial term of the Agreement is for 20 years and is automatically renewable for three 10-year options, unless terminated by either party under provisions outlined in the Agreement.\n\nUnder the Sprint agreements, Sprint provides the Company significant support services such as customer service, billing, collections, long distance, national network operations support, inventory logistics support, use of the Sprint brand names, national advertising, national distribution and product development. Additionally, the Company derives substantial travel revenue and incurs substantial travel expenses when Sprint and Sprint’s PCS Aff iliate partners’ subscribers incur minutes of use in the Company’s territory and when the Company’s subscribers incur minutes of use in Sprint and Sprint’s PCS Aff iliate partners’ territories. These transactions are recorded as travel revenue, network operating cost and travel cost, cost of equipment and selling and marketing expense in the Company’s consolidated statements of income. Cost of service related to access to the nationwide network, including travel transactions and long distance expenses, are recorded in network operating costs. The costs of services such as billing, collections and customer service are included in selling, general and administrative costs. Cost of equipment transactions between the Company and Sprint relate to inventory purchased and subsidized costs of handsets. These costs also include transactions related to subsidized costs on handsets and commissions paid to Sprint for sales of handsets through Sprint’s national distribution programs.\n\nHistorically, Sprint determined monthly service charges at the beginning of each calendar year. Sprint calculated the costs to provide these services for its network partners and required a final settlement against the charges actually paid. If the costs to provide these services were less than the amounts paid by the Sprint’s network partners, Sprint issued a credit for these amounts. If the costs to provide the services were more that the amounts paid by Sprint’s network partners, Sprint charged the network partners for these amounts. For the years presented, the Company recorded the actual costs, after the adjustments, which were recorded for these services provided by Sprint.\n\nThe wireless market is characterized by significant risks as a result of rapid changes in technology, increasing competition and the cost associated with the build-out and enhancement of Sprint’s nationwide digital wireless network. Sprint provides back-office and other services including travel clearing-house functions to the Company. In the past, there was no prescribed formula defined in the agreements with Sprint for the calculation of the fee charged to the Company for these services. Sprint adjusted these fees at least annually. This situation changed with the execution of an amendment to the Agreement which occurred on January 31, 2004, retroactive to January 1, 2004 (the Amended Agreement). The Amended Agreement provides greater certainty to the Company for certain future expenses and revenues during the term of the agreement and simplifies the methods used to settle revenue and expenses between the Company and Sprint. The Company’s PCS subsidiary is dependent upon Sprint’s ability to execute certain functions such as billing, customer care, collections and other operating activities under the Company’s agreements with Sprint. Due to the high degree of integration within many of the Sprint systems, and the Company’s dependency on these systems, in many cases it would be difficult for the Company to perform these services in-house or to outsource the services to another provider. If Sprint was unable to perform any such service, the change could result in increased operating expenses and have an adverse impact on the Company’s operating results and cash flow. Additionally, the Company’s ability to attract and maintain a sufficient customer base is critical to generatingpositive cash flow from operations and ultimately profitability for its PCS operation. Changes in technology, increased competition, or economic conditions in the wireless industry or the economy in general, individually and/or collectively, could have an adverse effect on the Company’s financial position and results of operations.\n\nThrough December 31, 2003, the Agreement provided that Sprint retains 8% of all collected service revenue from subscribers with their service home in the Company’s territory, and 8% of the roaming revenue generated by non-Sprint wireless subscribers who use the Company’s network. With the adoption of the new Amended Agreement, the Company will record its service revenue and receive payment from Sprint based on billed revenue, net of the 8% of billed revenue retained by Sprint, customer credits and allocated write offs.\n\nThe Company receives and pays travel fees for inter-market usage of the network by Sprint wireless subscribers not homed in a market in which they may use the service. Sprint and its PCS Affiliates pay the Company for the use of its network by their wireless subscribers, while the Company pays Sprint and its PCS Affiliates reciprocal fees for Company subscribers using other segments of the network not operated by the Company. The rates paid on inter- market travel were reduced during 2001. The inter-market travel rate was $0.20 per minute from inception of the Sprint agreement through April 30, 2001, $0.15 per minute from May 1, 2001 through September 30, 2001, and $0.12 per minute from October 1, 2001 through December 31, 2001. The rate was further reduced to $0.10 per minute as of 29 ■ 2003 ANNUAL REPORT January 1, 2002. The $0.10 rate was in effect for the full year of 2002. The travel rate for 2003 was $0.058 per minute and will remain at this rate through December 31, 2006.\n\n29 ■ 2003 ANNUAL REPORT" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.416259565946994, + "doc_id": "2694bf6d1b147035c725505297753694ed5b02ef20a6a50935304d884222922c", + "edit_distance": 0.5263157894736842, + "f1_score": 0.8284789644012945, + "meteor": 0.7467881366155146, + "precision": 0.8366013071895425, + "pred_md": "## C O R N I N G T E C H N O L O G I E S\n\nEnvironmental Technologies is another growth business for and one in which we are focusing a significant portion o overall R&D investment. We have helped shape this industry si our invention of the ceramic catalytic converter substrate 1970s. Today, we are working globally with the automoti and truck industries to develop and manufacture innovative substrate and filter products to further reduce emissions both gasoline- and diesel-powered vehicles. By around 2008, diesel emission control business could be as big as our auto emission control business is today. Our new clean-air products in Erwin, N.Y., is expected to be up and running by mid-de in support of this great diesel opportunity.\n\nOur Semiconductor Optics business - with some exciting new developments in the production of calcium fluoride crys and continued breakthroughs in the creation of HPFS silica ® fused - is helping the semiconductor industry develop faster more powerful integrated circuits. Our long-standing leade in optical materials composition and optics design continues based on our unique set of skills in basic materials scienc chemistry and metrology.\n\nS E M I C O N D U C T O R O P T I C S : C A L C I U M F L U O R I D E C R Y S T A L S\n\nE N A B L I N G : M I C R O C I R C U I T L I N E S A T 1 / 1 0 0 0 T H E W I D T H O F A H U M A N H A I R\n\nE N A B L I N G : M I C R O C I R C U I T L I N E S A T 1 / 1 0 0 0 T H E W I D T H O F A H U M A N H A I R\n\n5", + "recall": 0.8205128205128205, + "true_md": "C ORNING T ECHNOLOGIES\n\nEnvironmental Technologies is another growth business for us, and one in which we are focusing a significant portion of our overall R&D investment. We have helped shape this industry since our invention of the ceramic catalytic converter substrate in the 1970s. Today, we are working globally with the automotive and truck industries to develop and manufacture innovative new substrate and filter products to further reduce emissions from both gasoline- and diesel-powered vehicles. By around 2008, the diesel emission control business could be as big as our automotive emission control business is today. Our new clean-air products plant in Erwin, N.Y., is expected to be up and running by mid-decade in support of this great diesel opportunity.\n\nOur Semiconductor Optics business — with some exciting new developments in the production of calcium fluoride crystals and continued breakthroughs in the creation of HPFS ® fused silica — is helping the semiconductor industry develop faster and more powerful integrated circuits. Our long-standing leadership in optical materials composition and optics design continues to be based on our unique set of skills in basic materials science, glass chemistry and metrology.\n\nS EMICONDUCTOR O PTICS: CALCIUM FLUORIDE CRYSTALS\n\nE NABLING: MICROCIRCUIT LINES AT 1/1000 THE WIDTH OF A HUMAN HAIR\n\n5" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.975224419295412, + "doc_id": "663dee3e76461d156e7f00727085a1f247850589c0775fcc5b825ce98b8d206c", + "edit_distance": 0.031818181818181815, + "f1_score": 0.9891067538126362, + "meteor": 0.9934032537241414, + "precision": 0.9912663755458515, + "pred_md": "WHO WE ARE\n\n22\n\n## AUTOMOBILES\n\n## Nissan\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\n## Exceeding expectations -the Nissan automobile\n\nAt the center of everything we do stands the Nissan automobile. Our vehicles are the most tangible expression of our brand and the values of our company. We make cars that both inspire passion and exceed the expectations of our customers. Through bold and thoughtful designs, innovative technologies, and a richer and more rewarding driving experience, we are defining our unique place in the auto industry.\n\nOur product development philosophy differs from that which many of our competitors follow. Rather than focus on what the competition is providing, we concentrate on what they do not. We listen to drivers to discover their unmet needs and desires, and follow the most promising threads of emerging trends. Our designs are bold, geared to electrify and inspire. We see little point in building vehicles that please everyone but excite no one.\n\nThe appeal of a Nissan goes much deeper than the fine lines of its body and the gleam of its paint. We make some of the world's most advanced high-performance engines and transmissions. From our renowned VQ engine series to the latest in high technology, continuously variable transmissions (CVT), we blend driving pleasure with safety, fuel efficiency, and real-world environmental solutions.\n\nNissan has a long history of leadership and innovation in the automotive industry. We began our quest to create the best cars in the world in 1933, when the company was founded in Yokohama. The first Datsun passenger car rolled off the assembly line two years later. In the years since, we have fashioned a reputation for bold and innovative products. We were the first company to design, manufacture and export a small pickup truck from Japan to the United States, and to build and export a sports sedan, the Datsun 510. And we were the first to produce a true sports car that was also affordable, the Z. Today, we build equally exceptional vehicles in factories throughout the world that consistently rank in the top tier for efficiency, productivity and quality.\n\nIn the future, we will take the Nissan brand into new segments and markets. We will accelerate the pace of automotive evolution. And our products will continue to define our brand with clarity and consistency that brings lasting value to all our stakeholders.", + "recall": 0.9869565217391304, + "true_md": "Nissan Annual Report 2004 22\n\n## AUTOMOBILES\n\n## Nissan\n\n## Exceeding expectations —the Nissan automobile\n\nWHO WE ARE\n\nAt the center of everything we do stands the Nissan automobile. Our vehicles are the most tangible expression of our brand and the values of our company. We make cars that both inspire passion and exceed the expectations of our customers. Through bold and thoughtful designs, innovative technologies, and a richer and more rewarding driving experience, we are defining our unique place in the auto industry.\n\nOur product development philosophy differs from that which many of our competitors follow. Rather than focus on what the competition is providing, we concentrate on what they do not. \n\nWe listen to drivers to discover their unmet needs and desires, and follow the most promising threads of emerging trends. Our designs are bold, geared to electrify and inspire. We see little point in building vehicles that please everyone but excite no one. \n\nThe appeal of a Nissan goes much deeper than the fine lines of its body and the gleam of its paint. We make some of the world’s most advanced high-performance engines and transmissions. From our renowned VQ engine series to the latest in high technology, continuously variable transmissions (CVT), we blend driving pleasure with safety, fuel efficiency, and real-world environmental solutions.\n\nNissan has a long history of leadership and innovation in the automotive industry. We began our quest to create the best cars in the world in 1933, when the company was founded in Yokohama. The first Datsun passenger car rolled off the assembly line two years later. In the years since, we have fashioned a reputation for bold and innovative products. We were the first company to design, manufacture and export a small pickup truck from Japan to the United States, and to build and export a sports sedan, the Datsun 510. And we were the first to produce a true sports car that was also affordable, the Z. Today, we build equally exceptional vehicles in factories throughout the world that consistently rank in the top tier for efficiency, productivity and quality. \n\nIn the future, we will take the Nissan brand into new segments and markets. We will accelerate the pace of automotive evolution. And our products will continue to define our brand with clarity and consistency that brings lasting value to all our stakeholders." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9175910649003681, + "doc_id": "0f000a321e072f4128a6d708522f2be9ff3a7b8e2bac4171534cd954cf90ecd0", + "edit_distance": 0.057803468208092484, + "f1_score": 0.9629629629629631, + "meteor": 0.9501678973065264, + "precision": 0.9530791788856305, + "pred_md": "## MA N A G E M N T'S E DI S C U S S IO N A N D AN A LY S I S O F FI N A N C I A L CO N D I I T O N A N D RE S U LT S O F OP E R AT I O N S\n\n## General Overv i e w\n\nE u ronet Worldwide is a leading provider of secure electronic financial transaction solutions. The Company provides financial payment m i ddlew a re, financial network gateways, outsourcing, and consulting services to financial institutions, retailers and mobile operators. The Company operates an independent automated teller machine ('ATM') network of over 2,600 ATMs in Europe and the United States, and t h ough its software subsidiary, Euronet USA Inc. (form e r l y, Arkansas Systems, Inc.)('Euronet USA'), offers a suite of integrated software r solutions for electronic payment and transaction delivery systems. Euronet Worldwide thus offers comprehensive electronic payment solutions consisting of ATM network participation, outsourced ATM management solutions and software solutions. Its principal customers are banks and other companies such as retail outlets that re q u i re transaction processing services. With eleven offices in Europe and three in the United States, the Company offers its solutions in more than 60 countries around the world.\n\nE u ronet Worldwide and its subsidiaries operate in two business segments: (1) a segment providing secure processing of financial transactions (the 'Network Services Segment'); and (2) a segment producing application software for the processing of secure electronic financial transaction (the ' S oftw a re Solutions Segment'). In addition, the Company's management divides the Network Services Segment into three sub-segments: 'Central E u ropean Sub-segment' (including Hungary, Poland, the Czech Republic, Croatia, Greece and Romania), 'We s t e rn European Sub-segment' (including Germ a n y, France and the United Kingdom) and 'Other Operations Sub-segment' (including the United States and unallocated p rocessing center costs). These business segments, and their sub-segments, are supported by a corporate service segment, which pro v i d e s corporate and other administrative services that are not directly identifiable with the two business segments (the 'Corporate Services Segment'). The accounting policies of each segment are the same as those described in the summary of significant accounting policies. The Company evaluates perf o rmance based on profit or loss from operations before income taxes not including nonre c u rring gains and net loss. Prior period segment information has been restated to conform to the current period's presentation. (See Note 19 to the Consolidated Financial Statements Business segment information.)\n\n## Comparison of Results of Operations for the Years Ended December 31, 2000, 1999 and 1998\n\nRevenues The Company's total revenues increased to $52.7 million for the year ended December 31, 2000 from $41.5 million for the year ended December 31, 1999 and $11.9 million for the year ended December 31, 1998. The increase in revenues from 1999 to 2000 is primarily due to two factors: (1) a $10.4 million increase in Network Services Segment revenues resulting from the i ease in transaction volumes in the Company owned ATMs and an increase in the number of AT M s ncr operated by the Company during this period; and (2) an increase of $800,000 in Software Solutions Segment revenues. The increase in revenues from 1998 to 1999 is primarily due to two factors: (1) a $15.0 million increase in Network Services Segment revenues resulting from the increase in transaction volume attributable to an increase in the number of ATMs operated by the Company during this period; and (2) the addition of $14.6 million of Software Solutions Segment re v e n u e s . Revenues for the years ended December 31, 2000 and 1999 are discussed more fully in the Segment Results of Operations sections below.\n\nOperating Expenses Total operating expenses increased to $88.1 million for the year ended December 31, 2000 from $68.3 million for the year ended December 31, 1999 and from $34.5 million for the year ended December 31, 1998. The increase from 1999 to 2000 can be broken down\n\nby segment as follows: (1) a $3.5 million increase in Network Services Segment operating costs due to growth in the size of the network operations; (2) a $15.2 million increase in Software Services Segment due to write down of intangibles of $11.2 million and investment in personnel and re s o u rces; and (3) a $1.1 million increase in Corporate Services Segment operating costs due to the expended operations. The i ease from 1998 to 1999 can be broken down by segment as follows: (1) a $13.0 million increase in Network Services Segment operating costs, ncr (2) the addition of $19.6 million of Software Solutions Segment operating costs, and (3) a $1.2 million increase in Corporate Services Segment operating costs. Operating expenses for the years ended December 31, 2000 and 1999 are discussed more fully in the Segment Results of Operations sections below.\n\nOperating Loss The Company generated an operating loss of $35.4 million for the year ended December 31, 2000 compared to $26.8 million for the year ended December 31, 1999 and $22.6 million for the year ended December 31, 1998. The increased operating loss from 1999 to 2000 is due to the net effect of three factors: (1) a $6.8 million decrease in the operating loss from the Company's Network Services Segment; (2) a $14.3 million increase in the operating loss from the Company's Software Solutions Segment; and (3) a $1.1 million increase in the operating loss f rom the Company's Corporate Services Segment. The increased operating loss from 1998 to 1999 is due to the net effect of three factors: (1) a $1.9 million decrease in operating losses from the Company's Network Services Segment; (2) the addition of $4.8 million in operating losses fro m the Company's Software Solutions Segment; and (3) a $1.3 million increase in operating losses from the Company's Corporate Services Segment.\n\n1 5", + "recall": 0.9730538922155688, + "true_md": "MA N A G E M E N T’S DI S C U S S I O N A N D AN A LY S I S O F FI N A N C I A L CO N D I T I O N A N D RE S U LT S O F OP E R AT I O N S\n\n## General Overv i e w\n\nE u ronet Worldwide is a leading provider of secure electronic financial transaction solutions. The Company provides financial payment m i d d l e w a re, financial network gateways, outsourcing, and consulting services to financial institutions, retailers and mobile operators. The Company operates an independent automated teller machine (“ATM”) network of over 2,600 ATMs in Europe and the United States, and t h rough its software subsidiary, Euronet USA Inc. (form e r l y, Arkansas Systems, Inc.)(“Euronet USA”), offers a suite of integrated software solutions for electronic payment and transaction delivery systems. Euronet Worldwide thus offers comprehensive electronic payment solutions consisting of ATM network participation, outsourced ATM management solutions and software solutions. Its principal customers are banks and other companies such as retail outlets that re q u i re transaction processing services. With eleven offices in Europe and three in the United States, the Company offers its solutions in more than 60 countries around the world. \n\nE u ronet Worldwide and its subsidiaries operate in two business segments: (1) a segment providing secure processing of financial transactions (the “Network Services Segment”); and (2) a segment producing application software for the processing of secure electronic financial transaction (the “ S o f t w a re Solutions Segment”). In addition, the Company’s management divides the Network Services Segment into three sub-segments: “Central E u ropean Sub-segment” (including Hungary, Poland, the Czech Republic, Croatia, Greece and Romania), “We s t e rn European Sub-segment” (including Germ a n y, France and the United Kingdom) and “Other Operations Sub-segment” (including the United States and unallocated p rocessing center costs). These business segments, and their sub-segments, are supported by a corporate service segment, which pro v i d e s corporate and other administrative services that are not directly identifiable with the two business segments (the “Corporate Services Segment”). The accounting policies of each segment are the same as those described in the summary of significant accounting policies. The Company evaluates perf o rmance based on profit or loss from operations before income taxes not including nonre c u rring gains and net loss. Prior period segment information has been restated to conform to the current period’s presentation. (See Note 19 to the Consolidated Financial Statements - Business segment information.) \n\n## Comparison of Results of Operations for the Years Ended December 31, 2000, 1999 and 1998\n\nRevenues The Company’s total revenues increased to $52.7 million for the year ended December 31, 2000 from $41.5 million for the year ended December 31, 1999 and $11.9 million for the year ended December 31, 1998. The increase in revenues from 1999 to 2000 is primarily due to two factors: (1) a $10.4 million increase in Network Services Segment revenues resulting from the i n c rease in transaction volumes in the Company owned ATMs and an increase in the number of AT M s operated by the Company during this period; and (2) an increase of $800,000 in Software Solutions Segment revenues. The increase in revenues from 1998 to 1999 is primarily due to two factors: (1) a $15.0 million increase in Network Services Segment revenues resulting from the increase in transaction volume attributable to an increase in the number of ATMs operated by the Company during this period; and (2) the addition of $14.6 million of Software Solutions Segment re v e n u e s . Revenues for the years ended December 31, 2000 and 1999 are discussed more fully in the Segment Results of Operations sections below. \n\nOperating Expenses Total operating expenses increased to $88.1 million for the year ended December 31, 2000 from $68.3 million for the year ended December 31, 1999 and from $34.5 million for the year ended December 31, 1998. The increase from 1999 to 2000 can be broken down\n\nby segment as follows: (1) a $3.5 million increase in Network Services Segment operating costs due to growth in the size of the network operations; (2) a $15.2 million increase in Software Services Segment due to write down of intangibles of $11.2 million and investment in personnel and re s o u rces; and (3) a $1.1 million increase in Corporate Services Segment operating costs due to the expended operations. The i n c rease from 1998 to 1999 can be broken down by segment as follows: (1) a $13.0 million increase in Network Services Segment operating costs, (2) the addition of $19.6 million of Software Solutions Segment operating costs, and (3) a $1.2 million increase in Corporate Services Segment operating costs. Operating expenses for the years ended December 31, 2000 and 1999 are discussed more fully in the Segment Results of Operations sections below. \n\nOperating Loss The Company generated an operating loss of $35.4 million for the year ended December 31, 2000 compared to $26.8 million for the year ended December 31, 1999 and $22.6 million for the year ended December 31, 1998. The increased operating loss from 1999 to 2000 is due to the net effect of three factors: (1) a $6.8 million decrease in the operating loss from the Company’s Network Services Segment; (2) a $14.3 million increase in the operating loss from the Company’s Software Solutions Segment; and (3) a $1.1 million increase in the operating loss f rom the Company’s Corporate Services Segment. The increased operating loss from 1998 to 1999 is due to the net effect of three factors: (1) a $1.9 million decrease in operating losses from the Company’s Network Services Segment; (2) the addition of $4.8 million in operating losses fro m the Company’s Software Solutions Segment; and (3) a $1.3 million increase in operating losses from the Company’s Corporate Services Segment.\n\n1 5" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8900693742588524, + "doc_id": "e90e9a528ff5a7ce409cc76b4612b4992bccc4a9b8edab1c233163c0c9d0e043", + "edit_distance": 0.3347457627118644, + "f1_score": 0.984375, + "meteor": 0.9685561233623192, + "precision": 0.9921259842519685, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO AND FORMING PART OF THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR THE FINANCIAL YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2000\n\n## (p) Receivables\n\nTrade receivables and other receivables are recorded at amounts due less any provision for doubtful debts.\n\nBills of exchange are recorded at amortised cost, with revenue recognised on an effective yield basis.\n\n## (q) Recoverable Amount of Non-Current Assets\n\nNon-current assets are written down to recoverable amount where the carrying value of any non-current asset exceeds recoverable amount. In determining the recoverable amount of noncurrent assets, the expected net cash flows have not been discounted to their discount value.\n\n## (r) Revenue Recognition\n\n## Sale of Goods and Disposal of Assets\n\nRevenue from the sale of goods and disposal of other assets is recognised when the economic entity has passed control of the goods or other assets to the buyer.\n\n## Rendering of Services\n\nRevenue from a contract to provide services is recognised by reference to the stage of completion of the contract.\n\n## Contribution of Assets\n\nRevenue arising from the contribution of assets is recognised when the economic entity gains control of the contribution or the right to receive the contribution.\n\n## Liabilities Forgiven\n\nThe gross amount of a liability forgiven by a credit provider is recognised as revenue.\n\n41", + "recall": 0.9767441860465116, + "true_md": "## NOTES TO AND FORMING PART OF THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR THE FINANCIAL YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2000\n\n## Sale of Goods and Disposal of Assets\n\n## Rendering of Services\n\n## Contribution of Assets\n\n## Liabilities Forgiven\n\n- (r) Revenue Recognition\n\n- (q) Recoverable Amount of Non-Current Assets\n\n- (p) Receivables\n\nTrade receivables and other receivables are recorded at amounts due less any provision for doubtful debts.\n\nBills of exchange are recorded at amortised cost, with revenue recognised on an effective yield basis.\n\nNon-current assets are written down to recoverable amount where the carrying value of any non-current asset exceeds recoverable amount. In determining the recoverable amount of non- current assets, the expected net cash flows have not been discounted to their discount value.\n\nRevenue from the sale of goods and disposal of other assets is recognised when the economic entity has passed control of the goods or other assets to the buyer.\n\nRevenue from a contract to provide services is recognised by reference to the stage of completion of the contract.\n\nRevenue arising from the contribution of assets is recognised when the economic entity gains control of the contribution or the right to receive the contribution.\n\nThe gross amount of a liability forgiven by a credit provider is recognised as revenue.\n\n41" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9404061474657173, + "doc_id": "d76fb9e4d583b2206cb21895c956b3882a92c9736007aaa895cf79a923a0d2ff", + "edit_distance": 0.7056338028169014, + "f1_score": 0.9746192893401017, + "meteor": 0.7375213789237736, + "precision": 0.9896907216494846, + "pred_md": "## > note E\n\n## Long-term Debt and Other Borrowing Arrangements\n\nLong-term debt consists of:\n\nAt October 30, 2004, the current interest rate on outstanding variable rate debt was 1.9%.\n\nAs of October 30, 2004, the company has unused lines of credit of $150.0 million which bear interest at variable rates below prime. A fixed fee is paid for the availability of these credit lines.\n\nThe company is required, by certain covenants in its debt agreements, to maintain specified levels of financial ratios and balance sheet position. At the end of the current fiscal year, the company was in compliance with all of these covenants.\n\nAggregate annual maturities of long-term debt for the five fiscal years after October 30, 2004, are as follows :\n\nTotal interest paid during fiscal 2004, 2003, and 2002 was $27.1 million, $32.5 million, and $31.6 million, respectively. Based on borrowing rates currently available to the company for long-term financing with similar terms and average maturities, the fair value of long-term debt, including current maturities, utilizing discounted cash flows, is $423.6 million.\n\n40\n\nHormel Foods Corporation\n\n## > note F\n\n## Pension and Other Postretirement Health Care Benefits\n\nThe company has several noncontributory defined benefit plans and defined contribution plans covering most employees. Total costs associated with the company's defined contribution benefit plans in fiscal 2004, 2003, and 2002 were $18.7 million, $17.0 million, and $15.8 million, respectively. Benefits for defined benefit pension plans covering hourly employees are provided based on stated amounts for each year of service, while plan benefits covering salaried employees are based on final average compensation. As part of the company's sales reorganization that took place in fiscal 2004, the company offered early retirement packages to certain employees. The acceptance of these offers resulted in an increase to the benefit obligation and recognition of a one-time charge of $1.9 million. The pension rates paid for years of service were increased as a result of labor negotiations in fiscal 2003, resulting in an increase in the company's benefit obligation of $3.5 million. The company's funding policy is to make annual contributions of not less than the minimum required by applicable regulations. Actuarial gains and losses and any adjustments resulting from plan amendments are deferred and amortized to expense over periods ranging from 10-14 years.\n\nCertain groups of employees are eligible for postretirement health or welfare benefits. Eligible employees who retired prior to January 1, 1987, receive the company-sponsored medical and life insurance benefits that were in effect when they retired. The medical plan for eligible employees who retired after January 1, 1987, is automatically modified to incorporate plan benefit and plan provision changes whenever they are made to the active employee plan. Contribution requirements for this group of retired employees are governed by the Retiree Health Care Payment Program and may change each year as the cost to provide coverage is determined. Eligible employees hired after January 1,1990, may receive postretirement medical coverage but must pay the full cost of the coverage. During fiscal 2004, the company incurred a one-time charge of $0.9 million for health care benefits offered as a result of the sales reorganization discussed above. The company also implemented a disease management program and increased the plan deductibles paid by post-1987 union retirees which reduced the benefit obligation by $4.4 million. During fiscal 2003, the company made certain changes to the Retiree Health Care Program for eligible bargaining employees that provided participants (retirees and current employees) two options for determining the amount the participants would be required to contribute for their coverage. Participants could continue under the existing program that contains a cap on the amount subsidized by the company. Continued coverage under this program would", + "recall": 0.96, + "true_md": "## > note F\n\n## > note E\n\n## Long-term Debt and Other Borrowing Arrangements\n\n## Pension and Other Postretirement Health Care Benefits\n\nCertain groups of employees are eligible for postretirement health or welfare benefits. Eligible employees who retired prior to January 1, 1987, receive the company-sponsored medical and life insurance benefits that were in effect when they retired. The medical plan for eligible employees who retired after January 1, 1987, is automatically modified to incorporate plan benefit and plan provision changes whenever they are made to the active employee plan. Contribution requirements for this group of retired employees are governed by the Retiree Health Care Payment Program and may change each year as the cost to provide cover- age is determined. Eligible employees hired after January 1,1990, may receive postretirement medical coverage but must pay the full cost of the coverage. During fiscal 2004, the company incurred a one-time charge of $0.9 million for health care benefits offered as a result of the sales reorganization discussed above. The company also implemented a disease management program and increased the plan deductibles paid by post-1987 union retirees which reduced the benefit obligation by $4.4 million. During fiscal 2003, the company made certain changes to the Retiree Health Care Program for eligible bargaining employees that provided participants (retirees and current employees) two options for determining the amount the participants would be required to contribute for their coverage. Participants could continue under the existing program that contains a cap on the amount subsidized by the company. Continued coverage under this program would\n\nThe company has several noncontributory defined benefit plans and defined contribution plans covering most employees. Total costs associated with the company’s defined contribution benefit plans in fiscal 2004, 2003, and 2002 were $18.7 million, $17.0 million, and $15.8 million, respectively. Benefits for defined benefit pension plans covering hourly employees are provided based on stated amounts for each year of service, while plan benefits cov- ering salaried employees are based on final average compensa- tion. As part of the company’s sales reorganization that took place in fiscal 2004, the company offered early retirement packages to certain employees. The acceptance of these offers resulted in an increase to the benefit obligation and recognition of a one-time charge of $1.9 million. The pension rates paid for years of service were increased as a result of labor negotiations in fiscal 2003, resulting in an increase in the company’s benefit obligation of $3.5 million. The company’s funding policy is to make annual contributions of not less than the minimum required by applicable regulations. Actuarial gains and losses and any adjustments result- ing from plan amendments are deferred and amortized to expense over periods ranging from 10-14 years.\n\nTotal interest paid during fiscal 2004, 2003, and 2002 was $27.1 million, $32.5 million, and $31.6 million, respectively. Based on borrowing rates currently available to the company for long-term financing with similar terms and average maturities, the fair value of long-term debt, including current maturities, utilizing discounted cash flows, is $423.6 million.\n\nAggregate annual maturities of long-term debt for the five fiscal years after October 30, 2004, are as follows :\n\nThe company is required, by certain covenants in its debt agree- ments, to maintain specified levels of financial ratios and balance sheet position. At the end of the current fiscal year, the company was in compliance with all of these covenants.\n\nAs of October 30, 2004, the company has unused lines of credit of $150.0 million which bear interest at variable rates below prime. A fixed fee is paid for the availability of these credit lines.\n\nAt October 30, 2004, the current interest rate on outstanding variable rate debt was 1.9%.\n\nLong-term debt consists of:\n\n40 Hormel Foods Corporation" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.29095809080840074, + "doc_id": "9085a6082402994abd702501541e985dc21286a799c004f1a280db1959196dd5", + "edit_distance": 0.6557377049180327, + "f1_score": 0.5714285714285714, + "meteor": 0.7337512256618574, + "precision": 0.43902439024390244, + "pred_md": "## F I N A N C I A L H I G H L I G H T S :\n\n$ 4,586 $ 3,687\n\n482 333\n\n34 88\n\n516 $\n\n515 $\n\n420\n\n0.61 $ 0\n\n0.07 0.05\n\n0.66\n\n* Net of preferred dividend requirements for Series B convertible preferred stock and Series C mandatory convertible preferred stock.", + "recall": 0.8181818181818182, + "true_md": "F INANCIAL H IGHLIGHTS:\n\n* Net of preferred dividend requirements for Series B convertible preferred stock and Series C mandatory convertible preferred st ock." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8894872182653568, + "doc_id": "62f7c0c4f9aff51179956a5374b1455ac6fbd6b629e3bb0928c470f8dad22e33", + "edit_distance": 0.06575963718820861, + "f1_score": 0.9162790697674418, + "meteor": 0.9398290865838125, + "precision": 0.9425837320574163, + "pred_md": "## 30. Superannuation Commitments (continued)\n\nThe Santos Superannuation Plan has employee accrued benefits and assets as disclosed in the most recent financial report of the plan, as follows:\n\nAt 31 December 2004 the vested benefits, or the benefits payable in the event of the termination of employment of each plan member, were $198.2 million (2003: $198.8 million) and the net market value of assets was $202.0 million (2003: $194.2 million).\n\nLegal advice in relation to the claims and litigation referred to above indicates that on the basis of available information, liability in respect of these claims is unlikely to exceed $1.0 million on a consolidated basis.\n\nA number of the Australian interests of the Santos Group are located within areas the subject of one or more claims or applications for native title determination. Whatever the outcome of those claims or applications, it is not believed that they will significantly impact the Santos Group's asset base. The decision of the High Court of Australia in the 'Wik' case has the potential to introduce delay in the grant of mineral and petroleum tenements and consequently to impact generally the timing of exploration, development and production operations. An assessment of the impact upon the timing of particular operations may require consideration and determination of complex legal and factual issues.\n\nGuarantees provided by Santos Ltd for borrowings in respect of controlled entities are disclosed in note 15.\n\nSantos Ltd has provided parent company guarantees in respect of:\n\n- (a) the funding obligations of its subsidiary companies, Santos Timor Sea Pipeline Pty Ltd and Santos Darwin LNG Pty Ltd, relating to the construction of a pipeline from the Bayu-Undan Field to Wickham Point in Darwin and the construction of the LNG Plant in Darwin respectively, and has provided a funding commitment letter to these subsidiary companies together with Santos (JPDA 91-12) Pty Ltd. As at 31 December 2004 the expenditure commitments of Santos Timor Sea Pipeline Pty Ltd and Santos Darwin LNG Pty Ltd for the above mentioned projects totalled US$41.3 million (2003: US$107.6 million);\n\n(b) payment of Santos Egypt Ltd's financial obligations under a farmout agreement and certain concessions in the Gulf of Suez in the Arab Republic of Egypt up to a maximum of US$46.9 million.\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\n83", + "recall": 0.8914027149321267, + "true_md": "## 30. Superannuation Commitments (continued)\n\nThe Santos Superannuation Plan has employee accrued benefits an assets as disclosed in the most recent financial report of the plan, as follows:\n\nAt 31 December 2004 the vested benefits, or the benefits payable in the even t of the termination of employment of each plan member, were $198.2 million (2003: $198.8 million) and the net market value of assets was $202.0 million (2003: $194.2 million).\n\nLegal advice in relation to the claims and litigation referred to above indi cates that on the basis of available information, liability in respect of these claims is unlikely to exceed $1.0 million on a consolidated basis.\n\nA number of the Australian interests of the Santos Group are located within ar eas the subject of one or more claims or applications for native title determination. Whatever the outcome of those claims or applications, it is n ot believed that they will significantly impact the Santos Group’s asset base. The decision of the High Court of Australia in the “Wik” case has th potential to introduce delay in the grant of mineral and petroleum tenements and consequently to impact generally the timing of exploration, d evelopment and production operations. An assessment of the impact upon the timing of particular operations may require consideration and de termination of complex legal and factual issues.\n\nGuarantees provided by Santos Ltd for borrowings in respect of controlled en tities are disclosed in note 15.\n\nSantos Ltd has provided parent company guarantees in respect of:\n\n(a) the funding obligations of its subsidiary companies, Santos Timor Sea Pipeline Pty Ltd and Santos Darwin LNG Pty Ltd, relating to the construction of a pipeline from the Bayu-Undan Field to Wickham Poin t in Darwin and the construction of the LNG Plant in Darwin respectively, and has provided a funding commitment letter to these subsidiary companies together with Santos (JPDA 91-12) Pty Ltd. As at 31 December 2004 the expenditure commitments of Santos Timor Sea Pipelin Pty Ltd and Santos Darwin LNG Pty Ltd for the above mentioned projects totalled US$41.3 million (2003: US$107.6 million);\n\n(b) payment of Santos Egypt Ltd’s financial obligations under a farmout agr eement and certain concessions in the Gulf of Suez in the Arab Republic of Egypt up to a maximum of US$46.9 million.\n\nAnnual Report 2004 83" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8791737358040805, + "doc_id": "7e1c6a4990cb11b2970af2f00f6c1b0b15d02deaaba77278291b63048424e688", + "edit_distance": 0.17960088691796008, + "f1_score": 0.9769820971867009, + "meteor": 0.9832782011936756, + "precision": 0.9744897959183674, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO AND FORMING PART OF THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR THE FINANCIAL YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2000\n\n## 7. RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS\n\nThe directors of Mermaid Marine Australia Limited during the Financial Year were:\n\nA G Birchmore\n\n(appointed 12 August 1998)\n\nJ H Carver\n\n(appointed 29 June 1998)\n\nD A Dillon\n\n(appointed 12 August 1998)\n\nJ A S Mews\n\n(appointed 12 August 1998)\n\nInterest in the shares of the Company held by directors and their director related entities as at 30 June 2000.\n\nThe following related party transactions occurred during the Financial Year:\n\n## Transactions with directors and director related entities\n\nDuring the Financial Year, a total of $75,000 for directors fees was paid to Chalfont Holdings Limited, a related entity of A G Birchmore. This is reflected in full in note 24 - Remuneration of Directors.\n\n## Transactions with other related parties\n\n## (a) Mermaid Achiever\n\nThe Achiever Partnership (comprising Delmark Investments Pty Ltd, a related entity of A G Birchmore, J H Carver, D A Dillon and P D M Holdings Pty Ltd, a related entity of J A S Mews) entered into a put and call option agreement with the Company on 12 April 1999, pursuant to which it was agreed that either party could, at any time between 30 June 2000 and the expiration of the Company's Charter of the Mermaid Achiever from the Achiever Partnership, oblige the other party to enter into an Agreement for the sale and purchase of that vessel at price fixed at $3,250,000.\n\nOn 24 September 1999 the Company exercised its option to acquire the Mermaid Achiever in accordance with the terms of the above option. Bareboat Charter Fees of $184,000 were paid for the period 1st July 1999 to the 30th September 2000 the effective date of settlement.\n\n## (b) Fremantle Premises\n\n- (i) The Achiever Partnership and the Company entered into a heads of agreement dated 12 April 1999 for the lease to the entity of its registered office at 20 Mews Road, Fremantle.\n- (ii) The term of the lease is 5 years with a 5 year option of renewal in favour of the Company.\n- (iii) The Company is responsible for all fitting out, maintenance (except capital works items), rates, taxes, insurance, and other usual variable outgoings.\n- (iv) The offices have undergone substantial refurbishment.", + "recall": 0.9794871794871794, + "true_md": "## NOTES TO AND FORMING PART OF THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR THE FINANCIAL YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2000\n\n## 7. RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS\n\n## Transactions with directors and director related entities\n\n## Transactions with other related parties\n\n## (a) Mermaid Achiever\n\n## (b) Fremantle Premises\n\n56\n\nThe directors of Mermaid Marine Australia Limited during the Financial Year were:\n\nInterest in the shares of the Company held by directors and their director related entities as at 30 June 2000.\n\nThe following related party transactions occurred during the Financial Year:\n\nDuring the Financial Year, a total of $75,000 for directors fees was paid to Chalfont Holdings Limited, a related entity of A G Birchmore. This is reflected in full in note 24 – Remuneration of Directors.\n\nThe Achiever Partnership (comprising Delmark Investments Pty Ltd, a related entity of A G Birchmore, J H Carver, D A Dillon and P D M Holdings Pty Ltd, a related entity of J A S Mews) entered into a put and call option agreement with the Company on 12 April 1999, pursuant to which it was agreed that either party could, at any time between 30 June 2000 and the expiration of the Company’s Charter of the Mermaid Achiever from the Achiever Partnership, oblige the other party to enter into an Agreement for the sale and purchase of that vessel at price fixed at $3,250,000.\n\nOn 24 September 1999 the Company exercised its option to acquire the Mermaid Achiever in accordance with the terms of the above option. Bareboat Charter Fees of $184,000 were paid for the period 1st July 1999 to the 30th September 2000 the effective date of settlement.\n\n- (i) The Achiever Partnership and the Company entered into a heads of agreement dated 12 April 1999 for the lease to the entity of its registered office at 20 Mews Road, Fremantle.\n\n- (ii) The term of the lease is 5 years with a 5 year option of renewal in favour of the Company.\n\n- (iii) The Company is responsible for all fitting out, maintenance (except capital works items), rates, taxes, insurance, and other usual variable outgoings.\n\n- (iv) The offices have undergone substantial refurbishment." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8964713307498476, + "doc_id": "71772191439681ccdf4e076c81bfe0ef9ab5766978f2b48657a0295b50496198", + "edit_distance": 0.11494252873563218, + "f1_score": 0.9583333333333334, + "meteor": 0.9285369951934141, + "precision": 0.9656488549618321, + "pred_md": "Ronnie Royster\n\nRonnie Royster\n\nPEOPLE OF SHENTEL\n\nRonnie Royster and his wife Ellen, not only open their hearts to children in need, they open their home to children in need of a place to stay. Ronnie, a staff accountant with Shentel for five years, became a foster parent 10 years ago when he lived in Danville, VA. Currently, he and Ellen are members of the Warren County, VA Foster Parent organization. They have hosted two children since moving to Warren County. In the past, they hosted three international children; one from the Philippines and two from Brazil. Ronnie and Ellen have one birth child, but they have chosen to officially adopt six other children ranging in age from an infant to 8 years old.\n\n'The Lord blessed us, so when there are children out there who need help, we are able to offer it to them.'\n\nDawn Sager, office assistant in the marketing department, has worked for Shentel since 1996. Her former job as a dispatcher with the Strasburg Police Department led to 21 years of volunteering with the Strasburg Rescue Squad. Dawn has served as secretary and building and grounds lieutenant for the squad. She currently is serving another term as the organization's treasurer. As an Emergency Medical Technician, she pulls regular duty; devoting up to 24 hours a month volunteering with the squad.\n\n'The potential is there to make a real difference for someone.'\n\nDawn Sager\n\nDawn Sager\n\nThere aren't many corners of Wakeman's Grove Church of the Brethren that Gary Shipe, who has worked as an installer repairman for Shentel since 1986, doesn't know. At Wakeman's Grove he serves on the executive committee, teaches Sunday school and sings in the choir. He does whatever is necessary to keep this tight-knit country church in good shape. Gary believes it is important to not just sit in the pew on Sunday.\n\n'I believe that you should help where you can.'\n\nGary Shipe\n\nGary Shipe\n\nAnn Masland has been a business-to-business sales representative in Central Pennsylvania for Shentel's PCS business for the past three years. In 2002, Ann joined the United Way of Carlisle and Cumberland County. In 2003, she was appointed to the United Way's Needs Assessment Committee. This nine-member group is responsible for reviewing data collected about community needs to provide an overview for the United Way board. The board uses the information as a basis for its strategic plan. Ann also finds the time to serve on the Board of Directors of the Carlisle, PA YWCA and is Chairperson of its Marketing Committee.\n\n'I've lived in Carlisle a long time. My kids are now old enough where I have some time to give and that's what I do.'\n\nAnn Masland\n\nAnn Masland\n\n■\n\n2003 ANNUAL REPORT", + "recall": 0.9511278195488722, + "true_md": "PEOPLE OF SHENTEL \n\nRonnie Royster and his wife Ellen, not only open their hearts to children in need, they open their home to children in need of a place to stay. Ronnie, a staff accountant with Shentel for five years, became a foster parent 10 years ago when he lived in Danville, VA. Currently, he and Ellen are members of the Warren County, VA Foster Parent organization. They have hosted two children since moving to Warren County. In the past, they hosted three international children; one from the Philippines and two from Brazil. Ronnie and Ellen have one birth child, but they have chosen to officially adopt six other children ranging in age from an infant to 8 years old.\n\n“The Lord blessed us, so when there are children out there who need help, we are able to offer it to them.”\n\nDawn Sager, office assistant in the marketing department, has worked for Shentel since 1996. Her former job as a dispatcher with the Strasburg Police Department led to 21 years of volunteering with the Strasburg Rescue Squad. Dawn has served as secretary and building and grounds lieutenant for the squad. She currently is serving another term as the organization’s treasurer. As an Emergency Medical Technician, she pulls regular duty; devoting up to 24 hours a month volunteering with the squad.\n\n“The potential is there to make a real difference for someone.”\n\nThere aren’t many corners of Wakeman’s Grove Church of the Brethren that Gary Shipe, who has worked as an installer repairman for Shentel since 1986, doesn’t know. At Wakeman’s Grove he serves on the executive committee, teaches Sunday school and sings in the choir. He does whatever is necessary to keep this tight-knit country church in good shape. Gary believes it is important to not just sit in the pew on Sunday.\n\n“I believe that you should help where you can.”\n\nAnn Masland has been a business-to-business sales representative in Central Pennsylvania for Shentel’s PCS business for the past three years. In 2002, Ann joined the United Way of Carlisle and Cumberland County. In 2003, she was appointed to the United Way’s Needs Assessment Committee. This nine-member group is responsible for reviewing data collected about community needs to provide an overview for the United Way board. The board uses the information as a basis for its strategic plan. Ann also finds the time to serve on the Board of Directors of the Carlisle, PA YWCA and is Chairperson of its Marketing Committee.\n\n“I’ve lived in Carlisle a long time. My kids are now old enough where I have some time to give and that’s what I do.”\n\n5 ■ 2003 ANNUAL REPORT\n\nAnn Masland\n\nGary Shipe\n\nDawn Sager\n\nRonnie Royster" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8261477368991507, + "doc_id": "67e8b46bf5a30e0f9021b08ef5fad265a76bf9830ecf0c22cb09f61cf6b2631a", + "edit_distance": 0.1622222222222222, + "f1_score": 0.9349112426035504, + "meteor": 0.9081475814018338, + "precision": 0.948, + "pred_md": "Tom Marra, President and Chief Operating Officer, Life Operations\n\nTom Marra, President and Chief Operating Officer, Life Operations\n\nRecognizing that technology can only supplement-not supplant-personal relationships, we created an organization of business technology solutions managers in our field offices. These specialists provide hands-on support to property-casualty agents who use The Hartford's online tools.\n\nThis successful high-tech, high-touch mix is one reason why we estimate our smallbusiness insurance growth rate is five to six times the industry average. Another reason is that we strategically target these businesses' unmet needs. Our new CyberFlex TM business insurance coverage, for example, is geared to traditional brick-and-mortar businesses that have some exposure for cyber-risk in their normal course of doing business-such as using e-mail or operating a Web site.\n\nOur focus on growth never distracts us from the bottom line. When markets or businesses prove unprofitable, we're nimble enough to take quick action. We exited the European property-casualty business in 2001, focusing instead on financial services in Asia. We also repositioned our reinsurance business to concentrate on the U.S. market, where we're already strong.\n\nIn all our operations, we've built a well-deserved reputation as a premier partner because we offer an exceptional value proposition that will never change: innovative products, world-class money management, value-added distribution, and outstanding service and technology.\n\nI'm deeply grateful to our employees, our business partners, our board of directors and, of course, our customers for their support during some of the most trying times we've ever experienced. I especially want to thank you, our shareholders, for allowing us to continue earning your support.\n\nMy confidence in our company and our industry has never wavered, even in the darkest moments following Sept. 11. True, we're still grappling with serious issues. The question of federal backstop legislation for terrorism is still unresolved, and the possibility of future terrorist attacks remains a serious concern. The world and its risks are much changed since I wrote my letter to you a year ago. But we'll continue to manage risks prudently while always thinking ahead for our shareholders, customers and partners. That's what we're in business to do. We'll continue to run our business the right way, and I believe we'll continue to earn your trust.\n\nSincerely,\n\nRamani Ayer Chairman, President and Chief Executive Officer\n\nRamani Ayer Chairman, President and Chief Executive Officer\n\n7", + "recall": 0.9221789883268483, + "true_md": "Recognizing that technology can only supplement—not supplant—personal relation- ships, we created an organization of business technology solutions managers in our field offices. These specialists provide hands-on support to property-casualty agents who use The Hartford’s online tools.\n\nThis successful high-tech, high-touch mix is one reason why we estimate our small- business insurance growth rate is five to six times the industry average. Another reason is that we strategically target these businesses’ unmet needs. Our new CyberFlex TM business insurance coverage, for example, is geared to traditional brick-and-mortar businesses that have some exposure for cyber-risk in their normal course of doing business—such as using e-mail or operating a Web site.\n\nOur focus on growth never distracts us from the bottom line. When markets or busi- nesses prove unprofitable, we’re nimble enough to take quick action. We exited the European property-casualty business in 2001, focusing instead on financial services in Asia. We also repositioned our reinsurance business to concentrate on the U.S. market, where we’re already strong. \n\nIn all our operations, we’ve built a well-deserved reputation as a premier partner because we offer an exceptional value proposition that will never change: innovative prod- ucts, world-class money management, value-added distribution, and outstanding service and technology. \n\nI’m deeply grateful to our employees, our business partners, our board of directors and, of course, our customers for their support during some of the most trying times we’ve ever experienced. I especially want to thank you, our shareholders, for allowing us to contin- ue earning your support.\n\nMy confidence in our company and our industry has never wavered, even in the darkest moments following Sept. 11. True, we’re still grappling with serious issues. The question of federal backstop legislation for terrorism is still unresolved, and the possibility of future terrorist attacks remains a serious concern. The world and its risks are much changed since I wrote my letter to you a year ago. But we’ll continue to manage risks pru- dently while always thinking ahead for our shareholders, customers and partners. That’s what we’re in business to do. We’ll continue to run our business the right way, and I believe we’ll continue to earn your trust.\n\nRamani Ayer Chairman, President and Chief Executive Officer\n\n7\n\nSincerely,\n\nTom Marra, President and Chief Operating Officer, Life Operations" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9605023583544486, + "doc_id": "aa678b278a6e151b78157322de6956c2c14c5b8d58b9b1c5fe4ce2825acf969c", + "edit_distance": 0.025664527956003668, + "f1_score": 0.9684210526315791, + "meteor": 0.9755160532979886, + "precision": 0.9865951742627346, + "pred_md": "processing at the company's Rochelle, Illinois, facility that was effective January 3, 2003, and a renovation at our Fremont, Nebraska, facility during the second quarter of fiscal 2004. The company's hog processing for the current year declined 0.7 percent to 6,855,000 hogs from 6,904,000 hogs for the comparable period last year. Converting the Rochelle facility to a 100 percent value-added product processing facility will address the increasing demand for the company's branded products. The Fremont facility returned to full processing levels in the third quarter of fiscal 2004.\n\nOperating profit decreased 25.4 percent for the fourth quarter, as compared to an unusually strong fourth quarter in fiscal 2003 when ideal market conditions resulted in optimal margins. However, operating profit for fiscal 2004 increased 37.0 percent over the prior year, as the company was able to attain higher prices on pork primals when compared to hog costs over fiscal 2003. Throughout fiscal 2004, the company was able to purchase raw materials under its hog procurement contracts at costs that more closely paralleled the cash market, which significantly increased the profitability of fresh pork over the previous year. Margins on valueadded product lines, however, were negatively impacted in the fourth quarter by primal costs that were higher than anticipated. The company expects input prices to remain higher into the first half of fiscal 2005.\n\nThis segment continues to focus on the expansion of the company's value-added products and improving product mix. Core product tonnage in the Meat Products business unit showed positive growth over the prior year fourth quarter, led by strong gains in refrigerated entrees (up 1,456,000 lbs., or 24.0 percent), retail flavored meats (up 1,269,000 lbs., or 20.8 percent), sliced meats (up 845,000 lbs., or 12.8 percent), and breakfast meats (up 762,000 lbs., or 3.1 percent). Continued strong consumer preference for branded product offerings was also evidenced by volume sales of sliced pepperoni (up 1,357,000 lbs., or 46.7 percent) and raw bacon (up 1,648,000 lbs., or 13.8 percent), compared to the fiscal 2003 fourth quarter.\n\nThe Foodservice business unit also contributed to strong results throughout fiscal 2004, as its premium value-added convenience products continued to find broader acceptance from foodservice customers. This business unit finished the fiscal year with a record shipping week for branded products, contributing to fourth quarter tonnage volume increases over the prior year comparable quarter for Always Tender pork (up 498,000 lbs., or 23.7 percent), Austin Blues BBQ products (up 649,000 lbs., or 46.9 percent), the café h line of products (up 495,000 lbs., or 88.7 percent), and Fast 'N Easy precooked bacon and sausage (up 753,000 lbs., or 29.4 percent).\n\nJennie-O Turkey Store: Jennie-O Turkey Store (JOTS) net sales for the quarter and year increased 18.3 and 13.9 percent, respectively, compared to fiscal 2003 periods. Tonnage volume increased\n\n5.3 percent for the quarter and 0.4 percent for the year compared to prior year results. Tonnage comparisons for the twelve months reflect the strategy implemented at the end of the third quarter of fiscal 2003, when JOTS began scaling back its live turkey production in order to accelerate its reduction of commodity product sales. Fiscal 2004 value-added tonnage represented 54.0 percent of this segment's business, exceeding commodity tonnage for the first time on an annual basis. The company expects a continuation of this trend in fiscal 2005.\n\nOperating profit increased 84.6 percent for the quarter and 91.4 percent for the year compared to fiscal 2003. These gains were largely driven by value-added growth, as well as excellent results in live production and plant operations. Commodity meat and wholebird markets considerably improved compared to fiscal 2003. These favorable conditions were mitigated by higher overall feed costs throughout much of fiscal 2004. Feed prices peaked and started to decline during the fourth quarter, and the company expects to benefit from lower feed costs in fiscal 2005. Independent industry reports indicate continued production restraint, at least in the first half of fiscal 2005. This should result in continued strength in the commodity meat markets and wholebird markets during that same time period.\n\nOperating results benefited from value-added sales growth. All three channels of value-added turkey sales (retail, foodservice, and deli) showed double-digit growth in the fourth quarter of fiscal 2004. Products reflecting significant increases over the prior year comparable quarter were the Jennie-O Turkey Store tray pack line (up 3,642,000 lbs., or 28.2 percent), the Jennie-O Turkey Store Grand Champion line (up 882,000 lbs., or 23.5 percent), Jennie-O Turkey Store marinated tenderloins (up 903,000 lbs., or 77.3 percent), and Jennie-O Turkey Store rotisserie products (up 1,318,000 lbs., or 101.1 percent).\n\nNew product development will continue to be a focus of this segment. The Jennie-O Turkey Store Oven Ready Turkey, a product that goes directly from freezer to oven, was launched in the fourth quarter of fiscal 2004 and is being well received by retailers and consumers. The company continually evaluates the performance of its new products and fiscal 2004 included gross sales of approximately $119,600 attributable to products introduced since 2001 (up from $70,000 in fiscal 2003).\n\nSpecialty Foods: Specialty Foods net sales were up 7.9 percent for the quarter and 48.4 percent for the twelve months compared to fiscal 2003. Operating profit increased 16.7 and 42.7 percent for the quarter and fiscal year, respectively, compared to the prior year. Sales tonnage increased 34.9 and 75.3 percent for the quarter and twelve months, respectively, compared to last year. The acquisitions of the Diamond Crystal Brands (DCB) and Century Foods International (CFI) businesses have increased all twelve month segment measures in fiscal 2004, while the fourth quarter results are comparable to the prior year.\n\n2004 Annual Report\n\n21", + "recall": 0.9509043927648578, + "true_md": "processing at the company’s Rochelle, Illinois, facility that was effective January 3, 2003, and a renovation at our Fremont, Nebraska, facility during the second quarter of fiscal 2004. The company’s hog processing for the current year declined 0.7 per- cent to 6,855,000 hogs from 6,904,000 hogs for the comparable period last year. Converting the Rochelle facility to a 100 percent value-added product processing facility will address the increasing demand for the company’s branded products. The Fremont facility returned to full processing levels in the third quarter of fiscal 2004.\n\nOperating profit decreased 25.4 percent for the fourth quarter, as compared to an unusually strong fourth quarter in fiscal 2003 when ideal market conditions resulted in optimal margins. However, operating profit for fiscal 2004 increased 37.0 percent over the prior year, as the company was able to attain higher prices on pork primals when compared to hog costs over fiscal 2003. Throughout fiscal 2004, the company was able to purchase raw materials under its hog procurement contracts at costs that more closely paralleled the cash market, which significantly increased the prof- itability of fresh pork over the previous year. Margins on value- added product lines, however, were negatively impacted in the fourth quarter by primal costs that were higher than anticipated. The company expects input prices to remain higher into the first half of fiscal 2005.\n\nThis segment continues to focus on the expansion of the company’s value-added products and improving product mix. Core product tonnage in the Meat Products business unit showed positive growth over the prior year fourth quarter, led by strong gains in refrigerated entrees (up 1,456,000 lbs., or 24.0 percent), retail flavored meats (up 1,269,000 lbs., or 20.8 percent), sliced meats (up 845,000 lbs., or 12.8 percent), and breakfast meats (up 762,000 lbs., or 3.1 percent). Continued strong consumer prefer- ence for branded product offerings was also evidenced by volume sales of sliced pepperoni (up 1,357,000 lbs., or 46.7 percent) and raw bacon (up 1,648,000 lbs., or 13.8 percent), compared to the fiscal 2003 fourth quarter.\n\nThe Foodservice business unit also contributed to strong results throughout fiscal 2004, as its premium value-added convenience products continued to find broader acceptance from foodservice customers. This business unit finished the fiscal year with a record shipping week for branded products, contributing to fourth quarter tonnage volume increases over the prior year comparable quarter for Always Tender pork (up 498,000 lbs., or 23.7 percent), Austin Blues BBQ products (up 649,000 lbs., or 46.9 percent), the café h line of products (up 495,000 lbs., or 88.7 percent), and Fast ’N Easy precooked bacon and sausage (up 753,000 lbs., or 29.4 percent).\n\nJennie-O Turkey Store: Jennie-O Turkey Store (JOTS) net sales for the quarter and year increased 18.3 and 13.9 percent, respec- tively, compared to fiscal 2003 periods. Tonnage volume increased\n\n5.3 percent for the quarter and 0.4 percent for the year compared to prior year results. Tonnage comparisons for the twelve months reflect the strategy implemented at the end of the third quarter of fiscal 2003, when JOTS began scaling back its live turkey pro- duction in order to accelerate its reduction of commodity product sales. Fiscal 2004 value-added tonnage represented 54.0 percent of this segment’s business, exceeding commodity tonnage for the first time on an annual basis. The company expects a continuation of this trend in fiscal 2005.\n\nOperating profit increased 84.6 percent for the quarter and 91.4 percent for the year compared to fiscal 2003. These gains were largely driven by value-added growth, as well as excellent results in live production and plant operations. Commodity meat and wholebird markets considerably improved compared to fiscal 2003. These favorable conditions were mitigated by higher overall feed costs throughout much of fiscal 2004. Feed prices peaked and started to decline during the fourth quarter, and the company expects to benefit from lower feed costs in fiscal 2005. Independent industry reports indicate continued production restraint, at least in the first half of fiscal 2005. This should result in continued strength in the commodity meat markets and wholebird markets during that same time period.\n\nOperating results benefited from value-added sales growth. All three channels of value-added turkey sales (retail, foodservice, and deli) showed double-digit growth in the fourth quarter of fiscal 2004. Products reflecting significant increases over the prior year comparable quarter were the Jennie-O Turkey Store tray pack line (up 3,642,000 lbs., or 28.2 percent), the Jennie-O Turkey Store Grand Champion line (up 882,000 lbs., or 23.5 percent), Jennie-O Turkey Store marinated tenderloins (up 903,000 lbs., or 77.3 percent), and Jennie-O Turkey Store rotisserie products (up 1,318,000 lbs., or 101.1 percent).\n\nNew product development will continue to be a focus of this seg- ment. The Jennie-O Turkey Store Oven Ready Turkey, a product that goes directly from freezer to oven, was launched in the fourth quarter of fiscal 2004 and is being well received by retailers and consumers. The company continually evaluates the performance of its new products and fiscal 2004 included gross sales of approximately $119,600 attributable to products introduced since 2001 (up from $70,000 in fiscal 2003).\n\nSpecialty Foods: Specialty Foods net sales were up 7.9 percent for the quarter and 48.4 percent for the twelve months compared to fiscal 2003. Operating profit increased 16.7 and 42.7 percent for the quarter and fiscal year, respectively, compared to the prior year. Sales tonnage increased 34.9 and 75.3 percent for the quar- ter and twelve months, respectively, compared to last year. The acquisitions of the Diamond Crystal Brands (DCB) and Century Foods International (CFI) businesses have increased all twelve month segment measures in fiscal 2004, while the fourth quarter results are comparable to the prior year. \n\n2004 Annual Report 21" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8718055004320383, + "doc_id": "e0faaae6f3683a81014b490ac08f12e3f4c26695c8360683f9bb32bf369b889d", + "edit_distance": 0.6957928802588996, + "f1_score": 0.9673590504451038, + "meteor": 0.892857354608974, + "precision": 0.9532163742690059, + "pred_md": "22\n\n## Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations\n\nrevenue enhancements from this process. We expect to realize efficiencies in operations and economies of scale in purchasing, as well as more effectively market to a broader base of customers. Our operating cash flow will increase substantially, as will our interest and tax charges.\n\n## Summary Financial Results\n\nThe following table summarizes our results of operations:\n\n## (In thousands, except per share data)\n\nIncome from continuing operations increased in 2004 due to our strong top-line growth and the fact that revenue growth was driven largely by increased prices of our rooms and strong casino revenue. Operating margins correspondingly increased to 22% in 2004 from 18% in 2003 and 20% in 2002. Results on a per share basis were positively impacted by a lower weighted average number of shares outstanding as the result of share repurchases throughout 2003 and 2004.\n\n## Operating Results\n\nThe following table includes key information about our operating results:\n\n## (In thousands)\n\nOn a consolidated basis, the most important factors and trends contributing to our operating performance over the last three years have been:\n\n- · The war with Iraq and the outbreak of SARS in Asia, both of which negatively impacted leisure travel and our high-end gaming business in late 2002 and early 2003;\n- · The new labor contract covering our Las Vegas Strip employees since mid-2002, which calls for significant annual wage and benefits increases through 2007;\n- · The current economic recovery in the United States, which began to impact our operations in the latter half of 2003 and continued to positively affect our results in 2004.", + "recall": 0.9819277108433735, + "true_md": "22\n\nManagement’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations\n\nThe following table includes key information about our operating results:\n\nrevenue enhancements from this process. We expect to realize efficiencies in operations and economies of scale in purchasing, as well as more effectively market to a broader base of customers. Our operating cash flow will increase substantially, as will our interest and tax charges.\n\nThe following table summarizes our results of operations:\n\n## Operating Results\n\n## Summary Financial Results\n\n- • The current economic recovery in the United States, which began to impact our operations in the latter half of 2003 and continued to positively affect our results in 2004.\n\n- • The new labor contract covering our Las Vegas Strip employees since mid-2002, which calls for significant annual wage and benefits increases through 2007;\n\n- • The war with Iraq and the outbreak of SARS in Asia, both of which negatively impacted leisure travel and our high-end gaming business in late 2002 and early 2003;\n\nOn a consolidated basis, the most important factors and trends contributing to our operating performance over the last three years have been:\n\nIncome from continuing operations increased in 2004 due to our strong top-line growth and the fact that revenue growth was driven largely by increased prices of our rooms and strong casino revenue. Operating margins correspondingly increased to 22% in 2004 from 18% in 2003 and 20% in 2002. Results on a per share basis were positively impacted by a lower weighted average number of shares outstanding as the result of share repurchases throughout 2003 and 2004." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8551709163263284, + "doc_id": "d3c17b01cb7c39b562d3da3187cc3a0a54abddf33d68d2d20c1aaa09027cd578", + "edit_distance": 0.1518324607329843, + "f1_score": 0.9283489096573209, + "meteor": 0.9146308943135977, + "precision": 0.9612903225806452, + "pred_md": "HON INDUSTRIES Inc. and SUBSIDIARIES\n\nSelf-insurance reserves - The Company is partially self-insured for general liability, product liability, workers' compensation, and certain employee health benefits. The general, product, and workers' compensation liabilities are managed using a wholly owned insurance captive; the related liabilities are included in the accompanying financial statements. The Company's policy is to accrue amounts in accordance with the actuarially determined liabilities. The actuarial valuations are based on historical information along with certain assumptions about future events. Changes in assumptions for such matters as claims, medical costs, and changes in actual experience could cause these estimates to change in the near term.\n\nStock-based compensation - The Company accounts for its stock-option plan using Accounting Principles Board Opinion No. 25, 'Accounting for Stock Issued to Employees,' which results in no charge to earnings when options are issued at fair market value. SFAS No. 123, 'Accounting for Stock-Based Compensation' issued subsequent to APB No. 25 and amended by SFAS No. 148 'Accounting for Stock-Based Compensation - Transition and Disclosure' defines a fair value-based method of accounting for employee stock options but allows companies to continue to measure compensation cost for employee stock options using the intrinsic value based method described in APB No. 25.\n\nThe Company has no immediate plans at this time to voluntarily change its accounting policy to the fair value based method; however, the Company continues to evaluate this alternative. In accordance with SFAS No. 148, the Company has been disclosing in the Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements the impact on net income and earnings per share had the fair value based method been adopted. If the fair value method had been adopted, net income for 2003, 2002, and 2001 would have been $3 million, $2.2 million, and $1.4 million lower than reported and earnings per share would have been reduced approximately $0.06, $0.04 and $0.02 per diluted share, respectively.\n\n## Recent Accounting Pronouncements\n\nSee the Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements for a full description of recent accounting pronouncements including the respective expected dates of adoption and effects on results of operations and financial conditions.\n\n## Results of Operations\n\nThe following table sets forth the percentage of consolidated net sales represented by certain items reflected in the Company's statements of income for the periods indicated.\n\n## NET SALES\n\nNet sales increased 3.7% in 2003 and decreased 5.6% in 2002. The increase in 2003 was due to the extra week in 2003 as a result of the Company's 52/53-week fiscal year and strong performance in the hearth products segment. The decrease in 2002 was due to the decline in the office furniture market due to unstable economic conditions and the deletion of less profitable product lines in the hearth products segment.\n\n## GROSS PROFIT\n\nGross profit as a percent of net sales improved 1.0 percentage point in 2003 as compared to fiscal 2002 and 1.3 percentage points in 2002 as compared to 2001. The improvement in both periods was a result of the continued net benefits of rapid continuous improvement, restructuring initiatives, business simplification, new products, and improved price realization. Included in 2003 gross profit was $6.7 million of accelerated depreciation, which reduced gross profits 0.4 percentage points. The Company expects to mitigate any future increases in material costs through various initiatives, including alternative materials and suppliers and its rapid continuous improvement program.\n\n## SELLING AND ADMINISTRATIVE EXPENSES\n\nSelling and administrative expenses, excluding restructuring charges, increased 5.8% in 2003 and decreased 2.2% in 2002. The increase in 2003 was due to additional investment of approximately $14 million in brand building and selling initiatives, and increased freight costs of $7 million due to rate increases, fuel surcharges, and volume. The decrease in 2002 was due to no longer amortizing goodwill and certain other intangible assets of approximately $9 million and lower overall\n\n34", + "recall": 0.8975903614457831, + "true_md": "## Results of Operations\n\n## H O N I N D U S T R I E S I n c . a n d S U B S I D I A R I E S\n\n## GROSS PROFIT\n\n## NET SALES\n\n## Recent Accounting Pronouncements\n\n## SELLING AND ADMINISTRATIVE EXPENSES\n\nSelf-insurance reserves – The Company is partially self-insured for general liability, product liability, workers’ compensation, and certain employee health benefits. The general, product, and workers’ compensation liabilities are managed using a wholly owned insurance captive; the related liabilities are included in the accompanying finan- cial statements. The Company’s policy is to accrue amounts in accordance with the actuarially determined liabilities. The actuarial valuations are based on historical information along with certain assumptions about future events. Changes in assumptions for such matters as claims, medical costs, and changes in actual experience could cause these estimates to change in the near term. \n\nStock-based compensation – The Company accounts for its stock-option plan using Accounting Principles Board Opinion No. 25, “Accounting for Stock Issued to Employees,” which results in no charge to earnings when options are issued at fair market value. SFAS No. 123, “Accounting for Stock-Based Compensation” issued subsequent to APB No. 25 and amended by SFAS No. 148 “Accounting for Stock-Based Compensation – Transition and Disclosure” defines a fair value-based method of accounting for employee stock options but allows companies to continue to measure compensation cost for employee stock options using the intrinsic value based method described in APB No. 25.\n\nThe Company has no immediate plans at this time to volun- tarily change its accounting policy to the fair value based method; however, the Company continues to evaluate this alternative. In accor- dance with SFAS No. 148, the Company has been disclosing in the Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements the impact on net income and earnings per share had the fair value based method been adopted. If the fair value method had been adopted, net income for 2003, 2002, and 2001 would have been $3 million, $2.2 million, and $1.4 million lower than reported and earnings per share would have been reduced approx- imately $0.06, $0.04 and $0.02 per diluted share, respectively.\n\nSee the Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements for a full description of recent accounting pronouncements including the respec- tive expected dates of adoption and effects on results of operations and financial conditions.\n\nThe following table sets forth the percentage of consolidated net sales represented by certain items reflected in the Company’s statements of income for the periods indicated.\n\nNet sales increased 3.7% in 2003 and decreased 5.6% in 2002. The increase in 2003 was due to the extra week in 2003 as a result of the Company’s 52/53-week fiscal year and strong performance in the hearth products segment. The decrease in 2002 was due to the decline in the office furniture market due to unstable economic conditions and the deletion of less profitable product lines in the hearth products segment.\n\nGross profit as a percent of net sales improved 1.0 percentage point in 2003 as compared to fiscal 2002 and 1.3 percentage points in 2002 as compared to 2001. The improvement in both periods was a result of the continued net benefits of rapid continuous improvement, restructuring initiatives, business simplification, new products, and improved price realization. Included in 2003 gross profit was $6.7 million of acceler- ated depreciation, which reduced gross profits 0.4 percentage points. The Company expects to mitigate any future increases in material costs through various initiatives, including alternative materials and sup- pliers and its rapid continuous improvement program.\n\nSelling and administrative expenses, excluding restructuring charges, increased 5.8% in 2003 and decreased 2.2% in 2002. The increase in 2003 was due to additional investment of approximately $14 million in brand building and selling initiatives, and increased freight costs of $7 million due to rate increases, fuel surcharges, and volume. The decrease in 2002 was due to no longer amortizing goodwill and certain other intangible assets of approximately $9 million and lower overall \n\n34" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9274889475939692, + "doc_id": "8580ed9a219062cbe34be8ae6aa167dec93dbfa13406e4617a954d40623fcdff", + "edit_distance": 0.1702127659574468, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9996917831309055, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## MERMAID MARINE AUSTRALIA LIMITED A.C.N. 083 185 693\n\n## CORPORATE DIRECTORY\n\n## Directors\n\nAlan Birchmore, Chairman\n\nMark Bradley, Director, CEO\n\nJames Carver, Executive Director\n\nDerrice Dillon, Executive Director\n\nJeff Mews, Non-Executive Director\n\nRichard Reid, Non-Executive Director\n\n## Company Secretary\n\nBrendan Gore\n\nNeil Roberts\n\n## REGISTERED OFFICE\n\nEagle Jetty,\n\n20 Mews Road,\n\nFremantle,\n\nWestern Australia 6160.\n\nTelephone: 61 8 9431 7431\n\nFacsimile: 61 8 9431 7432\n\nEmail: corporate@mermaidmarine.com.au\n\nInternet Site: www.mermaidmarine.com.au", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## MERMAID MARINE AUSTRALIA LIMITED A.C.N. 083 185 693\n\n## CORPORATE DIRECTORY\n\n## Directors\n\n## REGISTERED OFFICE\n\n## Company Secretary\n\nAlan Birchmore, Chairman\n\nMark Bradley, Director, CEO\n\nJames Carver, Executive Director\n\nDerrice Dillon, Executive Director\n\nJeff Mews, Non-Executive Director\n\nRichard Reid, Non-Executive Director\n\nBrendan Gore\n\nNeil Roberts\n\nEagle Jetty, 20 Mews Road, Fremantle, Western Australia 6160. Telephone: 61 8 9431 7431 Facsimile: 61 8 9431 7432 Email: corporate@mermaidmarine.com.au Internet Site: www.mermaidmarine.com.au" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.866240641805361, + "doc_id": "d8bdd2474ad3a1168714c1e545628dd99558243132f7f28546b4cae020f3ce15", + "edit_distance": 0.1455026455026455, + "f1_score": 0.9400479616306953, + "meteor": 0.9485082573321078, + "precision": 0.9311163895486936, + "pred_md": "The Company adopted SFAS No. 142 effective January 1, 2002. The required adoption of SFAS No. 142 is considered a change in accounting principle and the cumulative effect of adopting this standard resulted in a $1.6 million non-cash, after-tax charge in 2002. This charge had no effect on the Company's cash position or the balance of its outstanding indebtedness, and it did not have any impact on earnings from continuing operations in 2002. As previously discussed, the Company recorded a non-cash gain from discontinued operations during 2001 related to the reversal of a reserve established when the Company disposed of its natural gas operations in 1997. This gain had no effect on the Company's cash position or the balance of its outstanding indebtedness, and it did not have any impact on earnings from continuing operations in 2001.\n\nThe Company believes that its existing cash and cash equivalents, cash flows from operations and borrowings available under the Company's Credit Facility, supplemented, if necessary, with equity or debt financing, which the Company believes would be available, will be sufficient to fund the Company's cash requirements for at least the foreseeable future.\n\nCompanies sometimes establish legal entities for a specific business transaction or activity in the form of a Variable Interest Entity ('VIE'). VIEs may be used to facilitate off-balance sheet financing, acquire financial assets, raise cash from owned assets and similar transactions. The Company has no VIEs, no off-balance sheet financing arrangements or any derivative financial instruments.\n\n## I M P A C T O F I N F L A T I O N\n\nThe Company experiences the effects of inflation primarily in the prices it pays for labor, materials and services. Over the last three years, the Company has experienced the effects of moderate inflation in these costs. At times, the Company has been able to offset a portion of these increased costs by increasing the sales prices of its products. However, competitive pressures have not allowed for full recovery of these cost increases.\n\n## N E W A C C O U N T I N G P R O N O U N C E M E N T S\n\nIn December 2003, the Financial Accounting Standards Board ('FASB') issued a revised SFAS No. 132, 'Employers' Disclosures about Pensions and Other Postretirement Benefits.' The impact to the Company for this item is described in Note 1 of Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements.\n\n## C R I T I C A L A C C O U N T I N G P O L I C I E S\n\nIn the ordinary course of business, the Company makes estimates and assumptions relating to the reporting of results of operations and financial condition in the preparation of its financial statements in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America. The Company believes the following discussion addresses the Company's most critical accounting policies, which are those that are most important to the portrayal of the Company's financial condition and results and require management's most difficult, subjective and complex judgments, often as a result of the need to make estimates about the effect of matters that are inherently uncertain. Actual results could differ significantly from those estimates under different assumptions and conditions.\n\nThe Company assesses the impairment of its long-lived identifiable assets, excluding goodwill which is tested for impairment pursuant to SFAS No. 142 as explained below, whenever events or changes in circumstances indicate that the carrying value may not be recoverable. This review is based upon projections of anticipated future cash flows. While the Company believes that its estimates of future cash flows are reasonable, different assumptions regarding such cash flows or future changes in the Company's business plan could materially affect its evaluations. No such changes are anticipated at this time.\n\nThe Company assesses goodwill for impairment pursuant to SFAS No. 142 which requires that goodwill be assessed whenever events or changes in circumstances indicate that the carrying value may not be recoverable, or, at a minimum, on an annual basis by applying a fair value test.\n\n## F O R WA R D - L O O K I N G S T A T E M E N T S\n\nThe statements in this Management's Discussion and Analysis and elsewhere in this Annual Report that are forward-looking are based upon current expectations, and actual results may differ materially. Therefore, the inclusion of such forward-looking information should not be regarded as a representation by the Company that the objectives or plans of the Company will be achieved. Such statements include, but are not limited to, the Company's expectations regarding future revenues, cost of goods sold, gross profit, operating income, income from continuing operations, cash flows from operations, growth in product lines, annual growth in earnings per share from continuing operations, and availability of equity and debt financing. Words such as 'anticipates,' 'believes,' 'intends,' 'expects' and variations of such words and similar expressions are intended to identify such forward-looking statements. Forward-looking statements contained herein involve numerous risks and uncertainties, and there are a number of factors that could cause actual results to differ materially, including, but not limited to, the following: changing economic, market and business conditions; acts of war or terrorism; the effects of governmental regulation; the impact of competition and new technologies; slower-than-anticipated introduction of new products or implementation of marketing strategies; implementation of new manufacturing processes or implementation of new information systems; the Company's ability to protect its intellectual property; changes in the prices of raw materials; changes in product mix; product liability claims and product recalls; the ability to attract and retain qualified personnel and the loss of any significant customers. In addition, assumptions relating to budgeting, marketing, product development and other management decisions are subjective in many respects and thus susceptible to interpretations and periodic review which may cause the Company to alter its marketing, capital expenditures or other budgets, which in turn may affect the Company's results of operations and financial condition.\n\n27", + "recall": 0.9491525423728814, + "true_md": "## IMPACT OF INFLATION\n\n## NEW ACCOUNTING PRONOUNCEMENTS\n\n## CRITICAL ACCOUNTING POLICIES\n\n## FORWARD-LOOKING STATEMENTS\n\n27\n\nThe Company adopted SFAS No. 142 effective January 1, 2002. The required adoption of SFAS No. 142 is considered a change in accounting principle and the cumulative effect of adopting this standard resulted in a $1.6 million non-cash, after-tax charge in 2002. This charge had no effect on the Company’s cash position or the balance of its outstanding indebtedness, and it did not have any impact on earnings from continuing operations in 2002. As previously discussed, the Company recorded a non-cash gain from discontinued operations during 2001 related to the reversal of a reserve established when the Company disposed of its natural gas operations in 1997. This gain had no effect on the Company’s cash position or the balance of its outstanding indebtedness, and it did not have any impact on earnings from continuing operations in 2001.\n\nThe Company believes that its existing cash and cash equivalents, cash flows from operations and borrowings available under the Company’s Credit Facility, supplemented, if necessary, with equity or debt financing, which the Company believes would be available, will be sufficient to fund the Company’s cash requirements for at least the foreseeable future. \n\nCompanies sometimes establish legal entities for a specific business transaction or activity in the form of a Variable Interest Entity (“VIE”). VIEs may be used to facilitate off-balance sheet financing, acquire financial assets, raise cash from owned assets and similar transactions. The Company has no VIEs, no off-balance sheet financing arrangements or any derivative financial instruments.\n\nThe Company experiences the effects of inflation primarily in the prices it pays for labor, materials and services. Over the last three years, the Company has experienced the effects of moderate inflation in these costs. At times, the Company has been able to offset a portion of these increased costs by increasing the sales prices of its products. However, competitive pressures have not allowed for full recovery of these cost increases.\n\nIn December 2003, the Financial Accounting Standards Board (“FASB”) issued a revised SFAS No. 132, “Employers’ Disclosures about Pensions and Other Postretirement Benefits.” The impact to the Company for this item is described in Note 1 of Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements.\n\nIn the ordinary course of business, the Company makes estimates and assumptions relating to the reporting of results of operations and financial condition in the preparation of its financial statements in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America. The Company believes the following discussion addresses the Company's most critical accounting policies, which are those that are most important to the portrayal of the Company's financial condition and results and require management's most difficult, subjective and complex judgments, often as a result of the need to make estimates about the effect of matters that are inherently uncertain. Actual results could differ significantly from those estimates under different assumptions and conditions.\n\nThe Company assesses the impairment of its long-lived identifiable assets, excluding goodwill which is tested for impairment pursuant to SFAS No. 142 as explained below, whenever events or changes in circumstances indicate that the carrying value may not be recoverable. This review is based upon projections of anticipated future cash flows. While the Company believes that its estimates of future cash flows are reasonable, different assumptions regarding such cash flows or future changes in the Company’s business plan could materially affect its evaluations. No such changes are anticipated at this time.\n\nThe Company assesses goodwill for impairment pursuant to SFAS No. 142 which requires that goodwill be assessed whenever events or changes in circumstances indicate that the carrying value may not be recoverable, or, at a minimum, on an annual basis by applying a fair value test. \n\nThe statements in this Management’s Discussion and Analysis and elsewhere in this Annual Report that are forward-looking are based upon current expectations, and actual results may differ materially. Therefore, the inclusion of such forward-looking information should not be regarded as a representation by the Company that the objectives or plans of the Company will be achieved. Such statements include, but are not limited to, the Company’s expectations regarding future revenues, cost of goods sold, gross profit, operating income, income from continuing operations, cash flows from operations, growth in product lines, annual growth in earnings per share from continuing operations, and availability of equity and debt financing. Words such as “anticipates,” “believes,” “intends,” “expects” and variations of such words and similar expressions are intended to identify such forward-looking statements. Forward-looking statements contained herein involve numerous risks and uncertainties, and there are a number of factors that could cause actual results to differ materially, including, but not limited to, the following: changing economic, market and business conditions; acts of war or terrorism; the effects of governmental regulation; the impact of competition and new technologies; slower-than-anticipated introduction of new products or implementation of marketing strategies; implementation of new manufacturing processes or implementation of new information systems; the Company’s ability to protect its intellectual property; changes in the prices of raw materials; changes in product mix; product liability claims and product recalls; the ability to attract and retain qualified personnel and the loss of any significant customers. In addition, assumptions relating to budgeting, marketing, product development and other management decisions are subjective in many respects and thus susceptible to interpretations and periodic review which may cause the Company to alter its marketing, capital expenditures or other budgets, which in turn may affect the Company’s results of operations and financial condition." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9558497674894987, + "doc_id": "45b5e5e0bfa60fa11576f335ee4ea42aab91592fc0c64c9d2fe360f2df76e777", + "edit_distance": 0.3277545327754533, + "f1_score": 0.9790940766550521, + "meteor": 0.9447583125407012, + "precision": 0.9825174825174825, + "pred_md": "46\n\n## Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n## NOTE 1 - ORGANIZATION\n\nMGM MIRAGE (the 'Company'), formerly MGM Grand, Inc., is a Delaware corporation, incorporated on January 29, 1986. As of December 31, 2004 approximately 58% of the outstanding shares of the Company's common stock were owned by Tracinda Corporation, a Nevada corporation wholly owned by Kirk Kerkorian. MGM MIRAGE acts largely as a holding company and, through wholly-owned subsidiaries, owns and/or operates casino resorts.\n\nThe Company owns and operates the following casino resorts on the Las Vegas Strip in Las Vegas, Nevada: Bellagio, MGM Grand Las Vegas, The Mirage, Treasure Island ('TI'), New York-New York and the Boardwalk Hotel and Casino. The Company owns a 50% interest in the joint venture that owns and operates the Monte Carlo Resort & Casino, also located on the Las Vegas Strip.\n\nThe Company owns three resorts in Primm, Nevada at the California/Nevada state line - Whiskey Pete's, Buffalo Bill's and the Primm Valley Resort - as well as two championship golf courses located near the resorts. The Company also owns Shadow Creek, an exclusive world-class golf course located approximately ten miles north of its Las Vegas Strip resorts.\n\nThe Company, through its wholly owned subsidiary, MGM Grand Detroit, Inc., and its local partners formed MGM Grand Detroit, LLC, to develop a hotel, casino and entertainment complex in Detroit, Michigan. MGM Grand Detroit, LLC operates a casino in an interim facility in downtown Detroit. See Note 10 for discussion of the revised development agreement with the City of Detroit and plans for a permanent casino resort.\n\nThe Company owns and operates Beau Rivage, a beachfront resort located in Biloxi, Mississippi. The Company also owns a 50% interest in a limited liability company that owns Borgata, a casino resort at Renaissance Pointe, located in the Marina area\n\nof Atlantic City, New Jersey. Boyd Gaming Corporation owns the other 50% of Borgata and also operates the resort. Borgata opened in July 2003. The Company owns approximately 95 developable acres adjacent to Borgata, a portion of which consists of common roads, landscaping and master plan improvements which the Company designed and developed as required under the agreement with Boyd.\n\nUntil July 2004, the Company owned and operated MGM Grand Australia and until January 2004, the Company owned and operated the Golden Nugget Las Vegas in downtown Las Vegas and the Golden Nugget Laughlin in Laughlin, Nevada (the 'Golden Nugget Subsidiaries'). Until June 2003, the Company operated PLAYMGMMIRAGE.com, the Company's online gaming website based in the Isle of Man. See Note 3 for further information regarding these discontinued operations. In the second quarter of 2002, the Company received proceeds of $11 million upon termination of management agreements covering four casinos in the Republic of South Africa. Prior to the termination, the Company managed three permanent casinos and one interim casino and received management fees from its partner, Tsogo Sun Gaming & Entertainment. The termination fee was recorded as part of other revenues in the accompanying consolidated statements of income.\n\nThe Company is actively seeking future development opportunities in the United Kingdom. In May 2003, the Company acquired a 25% interest in Metro Casinos Limited, a United Kingdom gaming company which operates a casino in Bristol. See Note 10 for discussion of other potential developments in the United Kingdom.\n\nIn June 2004, the Company entered into a joint venture agreement to develop, build and operate a hotel-casino resort in Macau S.A.R. The agreement is subject to, among other things, the approval of the government of Macau S.A.R., and other regulatory approvals, as well as the entry into a subconcession agreement with the holder of one of the existing concessions.", + "recall": 0.9756944444444444, + "true_md": "Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n46\n\n## NOTE 1 — ORGANIZATION\n\nMGM MIRAGE (the “Company”), formerly MGM Grand, Inc., is a Delaware corporation, incorporated on January 29, 1986. As of December 31, 2004 approximately 58% of the outstanding shares of the Company's common stock were owned by Tracinda Corporation, a Nevada corporation wholly owned by Kirk Kerkorian. MGM MIRAGE acts largely as a holding company and, through wholly-owned subsidiaries, owns and/or operates casino resorts. \n\nThe Company owns and operates the following casino resorts on the Las Vegas Strip in Las Vegas, Nevada: Bellagio, MGM Grand Las Vegas, The Mirage, Treasure Island (“TI”), New York-New York and the Boardwalk Hotel and Casino. The Company owns a 50% interest in the joint venture that owns and operates the Monte Carlo Resort & Casino, also located on the Las Vegas Strip.\n\nThe Company owns three resorts in Primm, Nevada at the California/Nevada state line – Whiskey Pete’s, Buffalo Bill’s and the Primm Valley Resort – as well as two championship golf courses located near the resorts. The Company also owns Shadow Creek, an exclusive world-class golf course located approximately ten miles north of its Las Vegas Strip resorts. \n\nThe Company, through its wholly owned subsidiary, MGM Grand Detroit, Inc., and its local partners formed MGM Grand Detroit, LLC, to develop a hotel, casino and entertainment complex in Detroit, Michigan. MGM Grand Detroit, LLC operates a casino in an interim facility in downtown Detroit. See Note 10 for discussion of the revised development agreement with the City of Detroit and plans for a permanent casino resort.\n\nThe Company owns and operates Beau Rivage, a beachfront resort located in Biloxi, Mississippi. The Company also owns a 50% interest in a limited liability company that owns Borgata, a casino resort at Renaissance Pointe, located in the Marina area\n\nIn June 2004, the Company entered into a joint venture agreement to develop, build and operate a hotel-casino resort in Macau S.A.R. The agreement is subject to, among other things, the approval of the government of Macau S.A.R., and other regulatory approvals, as well as the entry into a subconcession agreement with the holder of one of the existing concessions.\n\nThe Company is actively seeking future development opportunities in the United Kingdom. In May 2003, the Company acquired a 25% interest in Metro Casinos Limited, a United Kingdom gaming company which operates a casino in Bristol. See Note 10 for discussion of other potential developments in the United Kingdom. \n\nUntil July 2004, the Company owned and operated MGM Grand Australia and until January 2004, the Company owned and operated the Golden Nugget Las Vegas in downtown Las Vegas and the Golden Nugget Laughlin in Laughlin, Nevada (the “Golden Nugget Subsidiaries”). Until June 2003, the Company operated PLAYMGMMIRAGE.com, the Company’s online gaming website based in the Isle of Man. See Note 3 for further information regarding these discontinued operations. In the second quarter of 2002, the Company received proceeds of $11 million upon termination of management agreements covering four casinos in the Republic of South Africa. Prior to the termination, the Company managed three permanent casinos and one interim casino and received management fees from its partner, Tsogo Sun Gaming & Entertainment. The termination fee was recorded as part of other revenues in the accompanying consolidated statements of income.\n\nof Atlantic City, New Jersey. Boyd Gaming Corporation owns the other 50% of Borgata and also operates the resort. Borgata opened in July 2003. The Company owns approximately 95 developable acres adjacent to Borgata, a portion of which consists of common roads, landscaping and master plan improvements which the Company designed and developed as required under the agreement with Boyd." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8525527020503189, + "doc_id": "44006dcbefbf7ab8cb145a81f7103d17272f36697584f2d37784fde9bf6b8549", + "edit_distance": 0.4824120603015075, + "f1_score": 0.9580838323353292, + "meteor": 0.9012058834870391, + "precision": 0.963855421686747, + "pred_md": "## Management's Annual Report on Internal Control Over Financial Reporting\n\n## Management's Responsibilities\n\n## Management's Evaluation\n\nManagement is responsible for establishing and maintaining adequate internal control over financial reporting for MGM MIRAGE (a Delaware corporation) and subsidiaries (the 'Company').\n\n## Objective of Internal Control Over Financial Reporting\n\nIn establishing adequate internal control over financial reporting, management has developed and maintained a system of internal control, policies and procedures designed to provide reasonable assurance that information contained in the accompanying consolidated financial statements and other information presented in this annual report is reliable, does not contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact, and fairly presents in all material respects the financial condition, results of operations and cash flows of the Company as of and for the periods presented in this annual report. Significant elements of the Company's internal control over financial reporting include, for example:\n\n- · Hiring skilled accounting personnel and training them appropriately;\n- · Written accounting policies;\n- · Written documentation of accounting systems and procedures;\n- · Segregation of incompatible duties;\n- · Internal audit function to monitor the effectiveness of the system of internal control;\n- · Oversight by an independent Audit Committee of the Board of Directors.\n\nManagement has evaluated the Company's internal control over financial reporting using the criteria established in Internal Control-Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission. Based on their evaluation as of December 31, 2004, management believes that the Company's internal control over financial reporting is effective in achieving the objectives described above.\n\n## Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm\n\nDeloitte & Touche LLP audited the Company's consolidated financial statements as of and for the period ended December 31, 2004 and issued their report thereon, which is included in this annual report. Deloitte & Touche LLP has also issued an attestation report on management's assessment and on the effectiveness of the Company's internal control over financial reporting, and such report is also included in this annual report.\n\n39", + "recall": 0.9523809523809523, + "true_md": "Management’s Annual Report on Internal Control Over Financial Reporting\n\n## Management’s Evaluation\n\n## Management’s Responsibilities\n\n## Objective of Internal Control Over Financial Reporting\n\nManagement is responsible for establishing and maintaining adequate internal control over financial reporting for MGM MIRAGE (a Delaware corporation) and subsidiaries (the “Company”).\n\nIn establishing adequate internal control over financial reporting, management has developed and maintained a system of internal control, policies and procedures designed to provide reasonable assurance that information contained in the accom- panying consolidated financial statements and other information presented in this annual report is reliable, does not contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact, and fairly presents in all material respects the financial condition, results of operations and cash flows of the Company as of and for the periods presented in this annual report. Significant elements of the Company’s internal control over financial reporting include, for example:\n\nManagement has evaluated the Company’s internal control over financial reporting using the criteria established in Internal Control—Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission. Based on their evaluation as of December 31, 2004, management believes that the Company’s internal control over financial reporting is effective in achieving the objectives described above.\n\nDeloitte & Touche LLP audited the Company’s consolidated financial statements as of and for the period ended December 31, 2004 and issued their report thereon, which is included in this annual report. Deloitte & Touche LLP has also issued an attestation report on management’s assessment and on the effectiveness of the Company’s internal control over financial reporting, and such report is also included in this annual report.\n\n## Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm\n\n- • Hiring skilled accounting personnel and training them appropriately;\n\n- • Written accounting policies;\n\n- • Written documentation of accounting systems and procedures;\n\n- • Segregation of incompatible duties;\n\n- • Internal audit function to monitor the effectiveness of the system of internal control;\n\n- • Oversight by an independent Audit Committee of the Board of Directors.\n\n39" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8946901377559187, + "doc_id": "c8790c4981c085dc36534f9141fd2107668e98c850cb8b26f0618c8eed3880d6", + "edit_distance": 0.15188583078491336, + "f1_score": 0.9417249417249417, + "meteor": 0.9457520234286554, + "precision": 0.9711538461538461, + "pred_md": "## shareholder information\n\n## Independent Auditors\n\nErnst & Young LLP 220 South Sixth Street, Ste 1400 Minneapolis, MN 55402-4509\n\n## Stock Listing\n\nHormel Foods Corporation's common stock is traded on the New York Stock Exchange under the symbol HRL. The\n\nCUSIP number is 440452100. There are approximately 11,300 record shareholders and approximately 30,000 shareholders whose shares are held in street name by brokerage firms and financial institutions.\n\nThe annual certification required by Section 303A. 12(a) of the New York Stock Exchange Listed Company Manual was submitted by the company on March 3, 2004.\n\n## Common Stock Data\n\nThe high and low closing price of the company's common stock and the dividends per share declared for each fiscal quarter of 2004 and 2003, respectively, are shown below:\n\n## Transfer Agent and Registrar\n\nWells Fargo Bank Minnesota, N.A. 161 North Concord Exchange P.O. Box 64854 South St. Paul, MN 55164-0854 www.shareowneronline.com\n\nFor the convenience of shareholders, a tollfree number (1-877-536-3559) can be used whenever questions arise regarding changes in registered ownership, lost or stolen certificates, address changes, or other matters pertaining to the transfer of stock or shareholder records. When requesting information, shareholders must provide their tax identification number, the name(s) in which their stock is registered, and their record address.\n\nAs of December 1, 2004, the company is participating in the Direct Registration Profile Modification System (DRPMS). Future transfers or issuances of shares will be issued in book-entry form, unless you specifically request a stock certificate. A statement will be delivered to you reflecting any transactions processed in your account.\n\nThe transfer agent makes shareholder account data available to shareholders of record via the Internet. This service allows shareholders to view various account details, such as certificate information, dividend payment history, and/or dividend reinvestment plan records, over a secure Internet connection with the required entry of a tax identification number and a PIN number. Information is available 24 hours per day, seven days a week. If you are interested, you may use the Web site www.shareowneronline.com and access 'FIRST TIME VISITOR' to arrange for a PIN setup.\n\n## Household Sorting\n\nIf you hold stock in more than one account, duplicate mailings of financial information may result. You can help eliminate the added expense by requesting only one copy be sent. Please supply the transfer agent with the names in which all accounts are registered and the name of the account for which you wish to receive mailings. This will not in any way affect dividend check mailings. We cannot household sort between record accounts and brokerage accounts.\n\n## Dividend Reinvestment Plan\n\nHormel Foods Corporation's Dividend Reinvestment Plan, available to record shareholders, allows for full dividend reinvestment and voluntary cash purchases with brokerage commissions or other service fees paid by the company. Automatic debit for cash contribution is also available. This is a convenient method to have money automatically withdrawn each month from a checking or savings account and invested in your Dividend Reinvestment Plan account. To enroll in the plan or obtain additional information, contact Wells Fargo Bank Minnesota, N.A., using the address or telephone number provided with its listing in this section as company transfer agent and registrar. Enrollment in the plan is also available on the Internet at www.shareowneronline.com.\n\nAn optional direct dividend deposit service offers shareholders a convenient method of having quarterly dividend payments electronically deposited into their personal checking or savings account. The dividend payment\n\nis made in the account each payment date, providing shareholders with immediate use of their money. For information about the service and how to participate, contact Wells Fargo Bank Minnesota, N.A., transfer agent. You may also activate this feature on the Internet at www.shareowneronline.com.\n\n## Dividends\n\nThe declaration of dividends and all dates related to the declaration of dividends are subject to the judgment and discretion of the Board of Directors of Hormel Foods Corporation. Quarterly dividends are typically paid on the 15th of February, May, August, and November. Postal delays may cause receipt dates to vary.\n\n## Reports and Publications\n\nCopies of the company's Form 10-K (annual report) and Form10-Q (quarterly report) to the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC), proxy statement, all news releases, and other corporate literature are available free upon request by calling (507) 437-5345 or by accessing the information on the Internet at www.hormel.com. The company's Annual Report to Shareholders is mailed approximately one month before the Annual Meeting.\n\n## Annual Meeting\n\nThe Annual Meeting of Shareholders will be held Tuesday, January 25, 2005, in the Richard L. Knowlton Auditorium at Austin (Minn.) High School. The meeting will convene at 8:00 p.m.\n\n## Questions about Hormel Foods\n\nShareholder Inquiries (507) 437-5944 Analyst/Investor Inquiries (507) 437-5007 Media Inquiries (507) 437-5355\n\n## Consumer Response\n\nInquiries regarding products of Hormel Foods Corporation should be addressed: Consumer Response Hormel Foods Corporation 1 Hormel Place Austin, MN 55912-3680 or call 1-800-523-4635\n\n## Trademarks\n\nReferences in italic within this report represent valuable trademarks owned or licensed by Hormel Foods Corporation or its subsidiaries.", + "recall": 0.9140271493212669, + "true_md": "## shareholder information\n\n## Independent Auditors\n\n## Dividends\n\n## Stock Listing\n\n## Common Stock Data\n\n## Household Sorting\n\n## Reports and Publications\n\n## Transfer Agent and Registrar\n\n## Dividend Reinvestment Plan\n\n## Annual Meeting\n\n## Questions about Hormel Foods\n\n## Consumer Response\n\n## Trademarks\n\nErnst & Young LLP 220 South Sixth Street, Ste 1400 Minneapolis, MN 55402-4509\n\nHormel Foods Corporation’s common stock is traded on the New York Stock Exchange under the symbol HRL. The\n\nCUSIP number is 440452100. There are approximately 11,300 record shareholders and approximately 30,000 shareholders whose shares are held in street name by brokerage firms and financial institutions.\n\nThe annual certification required by Section 303A.12(a) of the New York Stock Exchange Listed Company Manual was sub- mitted by the company on March 3, 2004.\n\nThe high and low closing price of the com- pany’s common stock and the dividends per share declared for each fiscal quarter of 2004 and 2003, respectively, are shown below:\n\nWells Fargo Bank Minnesota, N.A. 161 North Concord Exchange P.O. Box 64854 South St. Paul, MN 55164-0854 www.shareowneronline.com\n\nFor the convenience of shareholders, a toll- free number (1-877-536-3559) can be used whenever questions arise regarding changes in registered ownership, lost or stolen certifi- cates, address changes, or other matters pertaining to the transfer of stock or share- holder records. When requesting information, shareholders must provide their tax identifi- cation number, the name(s) in which their stock is registered, and their record address. \n\nAs of December 1, 2004, the company is participating in the Direct Registration Profile Modification System (DRPMS). Future transfers or issuances of shares will be issued in book-entry form, unless you specifically request a stock certificate. A statement will be delivered to you reflecting any transactions processed in your account.\n\nThe transfer agent makes shareholder account data available to shareholders of record via the Internet. This service allows shareholders to view various account details, such as certificate information, dividend pay- ment history, and/or dividend reinvestment plan records, over a secure Internet connec- tion with the required entry of a tax identifica- tion number and a PIN number. Information is available 24 hours per day, seven days a week. If you are interested, you may use the Web site www.shareowneronline.com and access “FIRST TIME VISITOR” to arrange for a PIN setup.\n\nIf you hold stock in more than one account, duplicate mailings of financial information may result. You can help eliminate the added expense by requesting only one copy be sent. Please supply the transfer agent with the names in which all accounts are regis- tered and the name of the account for which you wish to receive mailings. This will not in any way affect dividend check mailings. We cannot household sort between record accounts and brokerage accounts.\n\nHormel Foods Corporation’s Dividend Reinvestment Plan, available to record shareholders, allows for full dividend rein- vestment and voluntary cash purchases with brokerage commissions or other service fees paid by the company. Automatic debit for cash contribution is also available. This is a convenient method to have money automatically withdrawn each month from a checking or savings account and invested in your Dividend Reinvestment Plan account. To enroll in the plan or obtain additional infor- mation, contact Wells Fargo Bank Minnesota, N.A., using the address or telephone num- ber provided with its listing in this section as company transfer agent and registrar. Enrollment in the plan is also available on the Internet at www.shareowneronline.com.\n\nAn optional direct dividend deposit serv- ice offers shareholders a convenient method of having quarterly dividend payments elec- tronically deposited into their personal check- ing or savings account. The dividend payment\n\nis made in the account each payment date, providing shareholders with immediate use of their money. For information about the service and how to participate, contact Wells Fargo Bank Minnesota, N.A., transfer agent. You may also activate this feature on the Internet at www.shareowneronline.com.\n\nThe declaration of dividends and all dates related to the declaration of dividends are subject to the judgment and discretion of the Board of Directors of Hormel Foods Corporation. Quarterly dividends are typically paid on the 15th of February, May, August, and November. Postal delays may cause receipt dates to vary.\n\nCopies of the company’s Form 10-K (annual report) and Form10-Q (quarterly report) to the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC), proxy statement, all news releases, and other corporate literature are available free upon request by calling (507) 437-5345 or by accessing the information on the Internet at www.hormel.com. The company’s Annual Report to Shareholders is mailed approxi- mately one month before the Annual Meeting.\n\nThe Annual Meeting of Shareholders will be held Tuesday, January 25, 2005, in the Richard L. Knowlton Auditorium at Austin (Minn.) High School. The meeting will convene at 8:00 p.m.\n\nShareholder Inquiries (507) 437-5944 Analyst/Investor Inquiries (507) 437-5007 Media Inquiries (507) 437-5355\n\nInquiries regarding products of Hormel Foods Corporation should be addressed: Consumer Response Hormel Foods Corporation 1 Hormel Place Austin, MN 55912-3680 or call 1-800-523-4635\n\nReferences in italic within this report represent valuable trademarks owned or licensed by Hormel Foods Corporation or its subsidiaries." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9005647790615072, + "doc_id": "fa662a2160219eb04e3de1fcbf60199f097826250b6d5125804ed653e8dd6993", + "edit_distance": 0.7647679324894515, + "f1_score": 0.9906832298136644, + "meteor": 0.7394922995278232, + "precision": 0.9937694704049844, + "pred_md": "32\n\nrelationships between the auditors and the Company and confirming compliance with all professional and regulatory requirements relating to auditor independence; and\n\n- · referring matters of concern to the Board, as appropriate, and considering issues which may impact on the financial reports of the Company.\n\nIn order to ensure that truth and fairness is reflected in the preparation and publication of the Company's financial reports, the Audit Committee reviews the written statement of the CEO and CFO to the Board that the Consolidated Financial Report presents a true and fair view, in all material respects, of the financial condition and operational results of the Santos Group and is in accordance with Accounting Standards. This Statement also confirms that:\n\n- · the Consolidated Financial Report is founded on a sound system of risk management and internal compliance and control, which implements the policies adopted by the Board; and\n- · the Company's risk management and internal control systems, to the extent they relate to financial reporting, are operating effectively in all material respects.\n\nThe Chairman of the Audit Committee provides, and addresses, a written report together with the minutes and recommendations of the Audit Committee at the next Board Meeting. Similar procedures apply to all other Committees of the Board.\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\n## 6.3 Audit Committee Charter and Independence of Auditors\n\nThe Board has adopted a policy in relation to the provision of non-audit services by the Company's external auditor that is based on the principle that work that may detract from the external auditor's independence and impartiality, or be perceived as doing so, should not be carried out by the external auditor. The Audit Committee Charter clearly identifies those services that the external auditor may not provide, those that may be supplied and those that require specific approval of the Chairman of the Audit Committee, in consultation with other members of the Committee.\n\nIt also provides that:\n\n- · the Board will not invite any past or present lead audit partner of the firm currently engaged as the Company's external auditor to fill a vacancy on the Board;\n- · the lead audit partner will be required to rotate off the audit after a maximum of five years and there will be a period of at least three years before that partner can again be involved in the Company's audit; and\n- · internal audit function, if outsourced, will be provided by a firm other than the external audit firm.\n\nThese provisions reflect the current behaviours expected of the world's leading corporations and are consistent with the ethical values and integrity of the Company.\n\nThe Chairman of the Audit Committee provides the Board with a statement clarifying that\n\nthe provision of non-audit services by the external auditors is compatible with the general standard of independence for auditors.\n\n## 7. FINANCE COMMITTEE\n\nThe role of the Finance Committee is documented in a Charter, approved by the Board, and includes responsibility for considering and making recommendations to the Board on the Company's capital management strategy and the Company's funding requirements and specific funding proposals. The Committee also has responsibility for formulating and monitoring compliance with treasury policies and practices and the management of credit, liquidity and commodity market risks.\n\nThe current members of the Finance Committee, all of whom are independent non-executive Directors, are: Mr S Gerlach (Chairman), Mr P C Barnett and Mr G W McGregor.\n\n## 8. RISK MANAGEMENT\n\nAn Enterprise Wide Risk Management approach forms the cornerstone of Risk Management activities of the Company and is based on the relevant Australian Standard (AS/NZS 4360 : 2004).\n\nThis approach is incorporated in the Company's Risk Management Policy, and aims to ensure that major business risks facing the Company have been consistently identified, analysed and evaluated, and that active management plans and controls are in place for the ongoing management of these risks. Independent validation of controls is undertaken by internal audit as part of its risk based approach. The internal\n\naudit function is independent of the external auditor and reports to the Audit Committee.\n\nThe CEO and CFO have stated to the Board in writing that:\n\n- · the Consolidated Financial Report is founded on a sound system of risk management and internal compliance and control systems, which implements the policies adopted by the Board; and\n- · the Company's risk management and internal control systems, to the extent they relate to financial reporting, are operating efficiently and effectively in all material respects.\n\nThe Board has in place a number of arrangements and internal controls intended to identify and manage areas of significant business risk. These include the maintenance of:\n\n- · Board Committees;\n- · detailed and regular budgetary, financial and management reporting;\n- · established organisational structures, procedures, manuals and policies;\n- · audits (including internal and external financial, environmental and safety audits);\n- · comprehensive insurance programmes; and\n- · the retention of specialised staff and external advisors.\n\nExamples of management of specific risks are as follows:\n\n- · MANAGEMENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL AND SAFETY RISK - environmental and safety risk is managed", + "recall": 0.9876160990712074, + "true_md": "relationships between the auditors and the Company and confirming compliance with all professional and regulatory requirements relating to auditor independence; and \n\nIn order to ensure that truth and fairness is reflected in the preparation and publication of the Company’s financial reports, the Audit Committee reviews the written statement of the CEO and CFO to the Board that the Consolidated Financial Report presents a true and fair view, in all material respects, of the financial condition and operational results of the Santos Group and is in accordance with Accounting Standards. This Statement also confirms that:\n\nThe Chairman of the Audit Committee provides, and addresses, a written report together with the minutes and recommendations of the Audit Committee at the next Board Meeting. Similar procedures apply to all other Committees of the Board.\n\nThese provisions reflect the current behaviours expected of the world’s leading corporations and are consistent with the ethical values and integrity of the Company.\n\nThe Chairman of the Audit Committee provides the Board with a statement clarifying that\n\nthe provision of non-audit services by the external auditors is compatible with the general standard of independence for auditors.\n\naudit function is independent of the external auditor and reports to the Audit Committee. \n\nThe CEO and CFO have stated to the Board in writing that: \n\nThe Board has adopted a policy in relation to the provision of non-audit services by the Company’s external auditor that is based on the principle that work that may detract from the external auditor’s independence and impartiality, or be perceived as doing so, should not be carried out by the external auditor. The Audit Committee Charter clearly identifies those services that the external auditor may not provide, those that may be supplied and those that require specific approval of the Chairman of the Audit Committee, in consultation with other members of the Committee. \n\nThe role of the Finance Committee is documented in a Charter, approved by the Board, and includes responsibility for considering and making recommendations to the Board on the Company’s capital management strategy and the Company’s funding requirements and specific funding proposals.\n\nThe Committee also has responsibility for formulating and monitoring compliance with treasury policies and practices and the management of credit, liquidity and commodity market risks.\n\nIt also provides that:\n\nThis approach is incorporated in the Company’s Risk Management Policy, and aims to ensure that major business risks facing the Company have been consistently identified, analysed and evaluated, and that active management plans and controls are in place for the ongoing management of these risks.\n\nIndependent validation of controls is undertaken by internal audit as part of its risk based approach. The internal\n\nThe Board has in place a number of arrangements and internal controls intended to identify and manage areas of significant business risk. These include the maintenance of:\n\nExamples of management of specific risks are as follows:\n\n- • the Consolidated Financial Report is founded on a sound system of risk management and internal compliance and control, which implements the policies adopted by the Board; and\n\n- • the Company’s risk management and internal control systems, to the extent they relate to financial reporting, are operating effectively in all material respects.\n\n- • the Board will not invite any past or present lead audit partner of the firm currently engaged as the Company’s external auditor to fill a vacancy on the Board; \n\n- • the lead audit partner will be required to rotate off the audit after a maximum of five years and there will be a period of at least three years before that partner can again be involved in the Company’s audit; and \n\n- • internal audit function, if outsourced, will be provided by a firm other than the external audit firm. \n\n- • Board Committees; \n\n- • detailed and regular budgetary, financial and management reporting; \n\n- • established organisational structures, procedures, manuals and policies; \n\n- • audits (including internal and external financial, environmental and safety audits);\n\n- • comprehensive insurance programmes; and \n\n- • the retention of specialised staff and external advisors.\n\n- • MANAGEMENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL AND SAFETY RISK – environmental and safety risk is managed\n\nAn Enterprise Wide Risk Management approach forms the cornerstone of Risk Management activities of the Company and is based on the relevant Australian Standard (AS/NZS 4360 : 2004). \n\nThe current members of the Finance Committee, all of whom are independent non-executive Directors, are: Mr S Gerlach (Chairman), Mr P C Barnett and Mr G W McGregor.\n\n## 6.3 Audit Committee Charter and Independence of Auditors\n\n## 7. FINANCE COMMITTEE\n\n## 8. RISK MANAGEMENT\n\n- • the Consolidated Financial Report is founded on a sound system of risk management and internal compliance and control systems, which implements the policies adopted by the Board; and\n\n- • the Company’s risk management and internal control systems, to the extent they relate to financial reporting, are operating efficiently and effectively in all material respects.\n\n32\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\n- • referring matters of concern to the Board, as appropriate, and considering issues which may impact on the financial reports of the Company." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.806012518423274, + "doc_id": "75be1c65d751596aaf19c6ea3e0e16205469892282e55362cd31bc01413b381b", + "edit_distance": 0.5089605734767025, + "f1_score": 0.9584086799276674, + "meteor": 0.8805557552468082, + "precision": 0.9706959706959707, + "pred_md": "wide array of community needs. From homeless shelters to after-school programs, MGM MIRAGE employees have generously donated more than $8 million since 2001.\n\nYour company also sets aside a portion of its profits each year to be given to important programs intended to build stronger communities. Since 2001, your company has given more than $18 million to support such programs.\n\n## Defining Momentum in Our Family\n\nOur momentum is driven from within by acknowledging the contributions of each and every one of our employees, business partners and customers. Our commitment to diversity is recognition of the fact that in today's everchanging marketplace, we must reflect that which we see in the world around us.\n\nThis commitment should be seen as a commonsense business decision. That said, we are proud of the recognition our Diversity program has received, including accolades from prestigious media such as Fortune and DiversityInc. magazines.\n\nSince formalizing our program only four years ago, we've made enormous strides. There is still progress to be made and your company has the momentum to remain at the forefront on diversity initiatives, providing yet another advantage for sustaining performance in the long term.\n\nSENSI BELLAGIO An eclectic menu features diverse cuisines in an earthy arena replete with waterfalls and chrome. A bold wine list complements Chef Martin Heierling's sumptuous work.\n\nSENSI BELLAGIO An eclectic menu features diverse cuisines in an earthy arena replete with waterfalls and chrome. A bold wine list complements Chef Martin Heierling's sumptuous work.\n\nJEAN-PHILIPPE PATISSERIE BELLAGIO A mesmerizing fountain of cascading liquid chocolate showcases a splendid selection of chocolates, cakes, crêpes, salads and sandwiches.\n\nISLA TI Designed by Jeffrey Beers, Isla brightens all the senses. Chef Richard Sandoval gives an innovative and modern interpretation of traditional Mexican cuisine.\n\nISLA TI Designed by Jeffrey Beers, Isla brightens all the senses. Chef Richard Sandoval gives an innovative and modern interpretation of traditional Mexican cuisine.\n\n(from left to right) KENNETH ROSEVEAR President, MGM MIRAGE Development; JOHN T. REDMOND President & CEO, MGM Grand Resorts, LLC; J. TERRENCE LANNI Chairman & CEO, MGM MIRAGE; ROBERT H. BALDWIN President & CEO, Mirage Resorts, Incorporated & President, Project CityCenter; GARY N. JACOBS Executive Vice President, General Counsel & Secretary, MGM MIRAGE; JAMES J. MURREN President, CFO & Treasurer, MGM MIRAGE\n\n## Defining Momentum in the Future\n\nYour company achieved many business goals in 2004 and set in motion plans for future growth. These initiatives will provide unmatched returns. We have also created unrivaled opportunities for our employees and will continue our rich history of strengthening the communities in which we do business.\n\nAs exciting as 2004 was, our momentum will carry us to even greater achievements in 2005 and beyond.\n\nJ. TERRENCE LANNI Chairman of the Board & Chief Executive Officer March 31, 2005\n\nJ. TERRENCE LANNI Chairman of the Board & Chief Executive Officer March 31, 2005\n\n05", + "recall": 0.9464285714285714, + "true_md": "wide array of community needs. From homeless shelters to after-school programs, MGM MIRAGE employees have generously donated more than $8 million since 2001.\n\nYour company also sets aside a portion of its profits each year to be given to important programs intended to build stronger communities. Since 2001, your company has given more than $18 million to support such programs. \n\nOur momentum is driven from within by acknowledging the contributions of each and every one of our employees, business partners and customers. Our commitment to diversity is recognition of the fact that in today’s ever- changing marketplace, we must reflect that which we see in the world around us. \n\nThis commitment should be seen as a common- sense business decision. That said, we are proud of the recognition our Diversity program has received, including accolades from prestigious media such as Fortune and DiversityInc. magazines.\n\nSince formalizing our program only four years ago, we’ve made enormous strides. There is still progress to be made and your company has the momentum to remain at the forefront on diversity initiatives, provid- ing yet another advantage for sustaining performance in the long term.\n\nYour company achieved many business goals in 2004 and set in motion plans for future growth. These initiatives will provide unmatched returns. We have also created unri- valed opportunities for our employees and will continue our rich history of strengthening the communities in which we do business. \n\nAs exciting as 2004 was, our momentum will carry us to even greater achievements in 2005 and beyond.\n\n## Defining Momentum in the Future\n\n## Defining Momentum in Our Family\n\nISLA TI Designed by Jeffrey Beers, Isla bright- ens all the senses. Chef Richard Sandoval gives an innovative and modern interpretation of traditional Mexican cuisine.\n\nJEAN-PHILIPPE PATISSERIE BELLAGIO A mesmerizing fountain of cascading liquid chocolate showcases a splen- did selection of chocolates, cakes, crêpes, salads and sandwiches.\n\nSENSI BELLAGIO An eclectic menu features diverse cuisines in an earthy arena replete with waterfalls and chrome. A bold wine list complements Chef Martin Heierling’s sumptuous work. \n\n05\n\nJ. TERRENCE LANNI Chairman of the Board & Chief Executive Officer March 31, 2005\n\n(from left to right) KENNETH ROSEVEAR President, MGM MIRAGE Development; JOHN T. REDMOND President & CEO, MGM Grand Resorts, LLC; J. TERRENCE LANNI Chairman & CEO, MGM MIRAGE; ROBERT H. BALDWIN President & CEO, Mirage Resorts, Incorporated & President, Project CityCenter; GARY N. JACOBS Executive Vice President, General Counsel & Secretary, MGM MIRAGE; JAMES J. MURREN President, CFO & Treasurer, MGM MIRAGE" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8757154270015175, + "doc_id": "4b21629da625eb368f2df38e4310b9d5c4973f35230d727813af15deab1f4c27", + "edit_distance": 0.128125, + "f1_score": 0.9136690647482014, + "meteor": 0.9298336289518002, + "precision": 0.9136690647482014, + "pred_md": "90\n\n## STOCK EXCHANGE AND SHAREHOLDER INFORMATION\n\nListed on Australian Stock Exchange at 28 February 2005 were 585,390,738 fully paid ordinary shares and 6,000,000 redeemable convertible preference shares. Unlisted were 67,250 partly paid Plan 0 shares, 57,750 partly paid Plan 2 shares, 32,400 fully paid ordinary shares issued pursuant to the Santos Employee Share Purchase Plan ('SESPP') for General Employee Participation and 178,027 fully paid ordinary shares issued pursuant to SESPP for Senior Executive Long Term Incentive. Also unlisted were 50,000 fully paid ordinary shares issued consequent upon exercise of 50,000 options granted pursuant to the Santos Executive Share Option Plan, an application for quotation of which has been lodged with the Australian Stock Exchange. There were: 79,423 holders of all classes of issued ordinary shares (including 9 holders of Plan 0 shares; 8 holders of Plan 2 shares; and 76 holders of SESPP shares) compared with 84,977 a year earlier; 15,479 holders of redeemable convertible preference shares; and 22 holders of the 5,438,972 options granted pursuant to the Santos Executive Share Option Plan.\n\nThe listed issued ordinary shares plus the ordinary shares issued pursuant to SESPP represent all of the voting power in Santos. The holdings of the 20 largest holders of ordinary shares represent 52.65% of the total voting power in Santos (last year 48.2%) and the holdings of the 20 largest holders of redeemable convertible preference shares represent 43.08% of the issued redeemable convertible preference shares.\n\nThere is no current on-market buy-back.\n\nThe 20 largest shareholders of fully paid ordinary shares in Santos as shown in the Company's Register of Members at 28 February 2005 were:\n\n## Analysis of Shares - range of shares held\n\nLess than a marketable parcel of $500\n\n1,182\n\n-\n\nAnnual Report 2004", + "recall": 0.9136690647482014, + "true_md": "Listed on Australian Stock Exchange at 28 February 2005 wer 585,390,738 fully paid ordinary shares and 6,000,000 redeemable convertible preference shares. Unlisted were 67,250 partly paid Plan 0 shares 57,750 partly paid Plan 2 shares, 32,400 fully paid ordinary shares issued pursuant to the Santos Employee Share Purchase Plan (‘SESPP’) for General Employee P articipation and 178,027 fully paid ordinary shares issued pursuant to SESPP for Senior Executive Long Term Incentive. Also unlisted wer 50,000 fully paid ordinary shares issued consequent upon exercise of 50,000 options granted pursuant to the Santos Executive Share Option Plan, an appli cation for quotation of which has been lodged with the Australian Stock Exchange. There were: 79,423 holders of all classes of issued ordinary shares (including 9 holders of Plan 0 shares; 8 holders of Plan 2 shares; and 76 holders of SESPP shares) compared with 84,977 a year earlier; 15,479 holders of redeemable convertible preference shares; and 22 holders of the 5,438,972 options granted pursuant to the Santos Executive Share Option Plan.\n\nThe listed issued ordinary shares plus the ordinary shares issued pursuan to SESPP represent all of the voting power in Santos. The holdings of the 20 largest holders of ordinary shares represent 52.65% of the total votin power in Santos (last year 48.2%) and the holdings of the 20 largest holders of redeemable convertible preference shares represent 43.08% of th e issued redeemable convertible preference shares.\n\nThere is no current on-market buy-back.\n\nThe 20 largest shareholders of fully paid ordinary shares in Santos as shown in the Company’s Register of Members at 28 February 2005 were:\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\n90\n\n## Analysis of Shares - range of shares held\n\n## STOCK EXCHANGE AND SHAREHOLDER INFORMATION" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9368300158348727, + "doc_id": "de3a55e239baf50703bfd262c60658c683f35f5d8fae436e0326e9a7c43ff329", + "edit_distance": 0.03867403314917127, + "f1_score": 0.9587628865979382, + "meteor": 0.9629105459801188, + "precision": 0.96875, + "pred_md": "68\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n## NOTE 18 - SUBSEQUENT EVENT\n\nRedemption of Senior Notes. In January 2005, the Company announced that it had called all of its outstanding 6.875% Senior Notes due February 2008 for redemption. The notes were redeemed at the present value of future interest payments plus accrued interest at the date of redemption. The Company recorded a loss on retirement of debt of $20 million in the first quarter of 2005. As a result of the redemption of the February 2008 Senior Notes and the repayment of the $300 million 6.95% Senior Notes that matured in February 2005, the Company applied for, and received, release of collateral under its Senior Credit Facility and senior notes. Therefore, the Company's Senior Credit Facility and senior notes are now unsecured, but are still subject to guarantees by the Company and each of its material subsidiaries, excluding MGM Grand Detroit, LLC and the Company's foreign subsidiaries.", + "recall": 0.9489795918367347, + "true_md": "68\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n## NOTE 18 — SUBSEQUENT EVENT\n\nRedemption of Senior Notes. In January 2005, the Company announced that it had called all of its outstanding 6.875% Senior Notes due February 2008 for redemption. The notes were redeemed at the present value of future interest pay- ments plus accrued interest at the date of redemption. The Company recorded a loss on retirement of debt of $20 million in the first quarter of 2005. As a result of the redemption of the February 2008 Senior Notes and the repayment of the $300 million 6.95% Senior Notes that matured in February 2005, the Company applied for, and received, release of collateral under its Senior Credit Facility and senior notes. Therefore, the Company’s Senior Credit Facility and senior notes are now unsecured, but are still subject to guarantees by the Company and each of its material subsidiaries, excluding MGM Grand Detroit, LLC and the Company’s foreign subsidiaries." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9508882106798675, + "doc_id": "d3728a620b3d48bd3321f5d802faa07692c4e2ac48fc1315a9a931d5f5c0dd61", + "edit_distance": 0.09198813056379822, + "f1_score": 0.9897810218978103, + "meteor": 0.9856404699012403, + "precision": 0.9912280701754386, + "pred_md": "## Corporate Office\n\nOne Emmis Plaza, 40 Monument Circle, Suite 700, Indianapolis, Indiana 46204,\n\n317.266.0100.\n\n## Business\n\nEmmis Communications (NASDAQ: EMMS) is a diversified media firm with awardwinning radio broadcasting, television broadcasting and magazine publishing operations. Emmis' 23 FM and 4 AM domestic radio stations serve the nation's largest markets of New York, Los Angeles and Chicago as well as Phoenix, St. Louis, Austin, Indianapolis and Terre Haute, Ind. The company's 16 television stations are located in Albuquerque, N.M.; Fort Myers, Fla.; Green Bay, Wis.; Honolulu; Huntington, W.Va.; Mobile, Ala./Pensacola, Fla.; New Orleans; Omaha, Neb.; Orlando, Fla.; Portland, Ore.; Terre Haute, Ind.; Topeka, Kan.; Tucson, Ariz.; and Wichita, Kan. Emmis also publishes Indianapolis Monthly, Texas Monthly, Cincinnati, Atlanta, Los Angeles and Country Sampler Group magazines; has a 59.5% interest in Sláger Rádió, a national radio network in Hungary; operates nine FM radio stations serving more than 50 percent of the population in the Flanders region of Belgium; and has ancillary businesses in broadcast sales, publishing and interactive products.\n\n## Transfer Agent Register\n\nWachovia Bank N.A., Shareholder Services Group, 1525 West W.T. Harris Blvd., 3c3, Charlotte, North Carolina 28288-1153.\n\n## Annual Meeting\n\nThe Annual Meeting of shareholders will be held at 10 a.m. Central Time on Wednesday, June 30, 2004, at Emmis' Corporate office.\n\n## Form 10-K\n\nA copy of the Annual Report on Form 10-K for the fiscal year ended February 29, 2004, which was filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission, will be sent to shareholders without charge upon written request to Kate Healey, Emmis Communications Corporation, One Emmis Plaza, 40 Monument Circle, Suite 700, Indianapolis, Indiana 46204, or ir@emmis.com.\n\n## Market and Dividend Information\n\nThe Company's Class A Common Stock is traded in the over-the-counter market and is quoted on the National Association of Securities Dealers Automated Quotation (NASDAQ) National Market System under the symbol EMMS.\n\nThe following table sets forth the high and low bid prices of the Class A Common Stock for the periods indicated. No dividends were paid during any such periods.\n\nOn April 23, 2004, there were approximately 4,841 record holders of the Class A Common Stock and one record holder of the Class B Common Stock.\n\nEmmis intends to retain future earnings for use in its business and does not anticipate paying any dividends on shares of its common stock in the foreseeable future.\n\n## Executive Officers\n\nJeffrey H. Smulyan Chairman of the Board, President and Chief Executive Officer\n\nWalter Z. Berger\n\nExecutive Vice President, Chief Financial Officer and Treasurer\n\nRandall Bongarten Television Division President\n\nRichard F. Cummings Radio Division President\n\nGary L. Kaseff\n\nExecutive Vice President, General Counsel\n\nPaul W. Fiddick International Division President\n\nMichael Levitan Senior Vice President, Human Resources\n\nGary Thoe\n\nPublishing Division President\n\n## Board of Directors\n\nJeffrey H. Smulyan Chairman of the Board, President and Chief Executive Officer\n\nSusan B. Bayh\n\nFormer Commissioner of the International Joint Commission of the United States and Canada\n\nWalter Z. Berger\n\nExecutive Vice President,\n\nChief Financial Officer and Treasurer\n\nGary L. Kaseff Executive Vice President, General Counsel\n\nRichard A. Leventhal\n\nPresident and Majority Owner,\n\nLMCS, LLC\n\nPeter A. Lund\n\nMedia consultant and former President of CBS Inc.\n\nGreg A. Nathanson Media consultant and former President of Fox Television Stations and Emmis Television\n\nFrank V. Sica\n\nSenior Advisor\n\nSoros Fund Management LLC\n\nLawrence B. Sorrel Managing Partner and Co-CEO Tailwind Capital Partners", + "recall": 0.9883381924198251, + "true_md": "## Corporate Office\n\n## Business\n\n## Transfer Agent Register\n\n## Annual Meeting\n\n## Form 10-K\n\n## Market and Dividend Information\n\n## Executive Officers\n\nOne Emmis Plaza, 40 Monument Circle, Suite 700, Indianapolis, Indiana 46204, 317.266.0100.\n\nEmmis Communications (NASDAQ: EMMS) is a diversified media firm with award- winning radio broadcasting, television broadcasting and magazine publishing operations. Emmis’ 23 FM and 4 AM domestic radio stations serve the nation’s largest markets of New York, Los Angeles and Chicago as well as Phoenix, St. Louis, Austin, Indianapolis and Terre Haute, Ind. The company’s 16 television stations are located in Albuquerque, N.M.; Fort Myers, Fla.; Green Bay, Wis.; Honolulu; Huntington, W.Va.; Mobile, Ala./Pensacola, Fla.; New Orleans; Omaha, Neb.; Orlando, Fla.; Portland, Ore.; Terre Haute, Ind.; Topeka, Kan.; Tucson, Ariz.; and Wichita, Kan. Emmis also publishes Indianapolis Monthly, Texas Monthly, Cincinnati, Atlanta, Los Angeles and Country Sampler Group magazines; has a 59.5% interest in Sláger Rádió, a national radio network in Hungary; operates nine FM radio stations serving more than 50 percent of the population in the Flanders region of Belgium; and has ancillary businesses in broadcast sales, publishing and interactive products. \n\nWachovia Bank N.A., Shareholder Services Group, 1525 West W.T. Harris Blvd., 3c3, Charlotte, North Carolina 28288-1153.\n\nThe Annual Meeting of shareholders will be held at 10 a.m. Central Time on Wednesday, June 30, 2004, at Emmis’ Corporate office.\n\nA copy of the Annual Report on Form 10-K for the fiscal year ended February 29, 2004, which was filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission, will be sent to shareholders without charge upon written request to Kate Healey, Emmis Communications Corporation, One Emmis Plaza, 40 Monument Circle, Suite 700, Indianapolis, Indiana 46204, or ir@emmis.com.\n\nThe Company’s Class A Common Stock is traded in the over-the-counter market and is quoted on the National Association of Securities Dealers Automated Quotation (NASDAQ) National Market System under the symbol EMMS. \n\nThe following table sets forth the high and low bid prices of the Class A Common Stock for the periods indicated. No dividends were paid during any such periods.\n\nOn April 23, 2004, there were approximately 4,841 record holders of the Class A Common Stock and one record holder of the Class B Common Stock.\n\nEmmis intends to retain future earnings for use in its business and does not anticipate paying any dividends on shares of its common stock in the foreseeable future.\n\nJeffrey H. Smulyan Chairman of the Board, President and Chief Executive Officer\n\nWalter Z. Berger Executive Vice President, Chief Financial Officer and Treasurer\n\nRandall Bongarten Television Division President\n\nRichard F. Cummings Radio Division President\n\nGary L. Kaseff Executive Vice President, General Counsel\n\nPaul W. Fiddick International Division President\n\nMichael Levitan Senior Vice President, Human Resources\n\nGary Thoe Publishing Division President\n\n## Board of Directors\n\nJeffrey H. Smulyan Chairman of the Board, President and Chief Executive Officer\n\nSusan B. Bayh Former Commissioner of the International Joint Commission of the United States and Canada\n\nWalter Z. Berger Executive Vice President, Chief Financial Officer and Treasurer\n\nGary L. Kaseff Executive Vice President, General Counsel\n\nRichard A. Leventhal President and Majority Owner, LMCS, LLC\n\nPeter A. Lund Media consultant and former President of CBS Inc.\n\nGreg A. Nathanson Media consultant and former President of Fox Television Stations and Emmis Television \n\nFrank V. Sica Senior Advisor Soros Fund Management LLC\n\nLawrence B. Sorrel Managing Partner and Co-CEO Tailwind Capital Partners" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8916902093760346, + "doc_id": "4f89920b9e10a78a804cee7642415544de4f85d5cb0aa8b27f556730aa6b08eb", + "edit_distance": 0.8065934065934066, + "f1_score": 0.96, + "meteor": 0.7782556716685768, + "precision": 0.9827586206896551, + "pred_md": "Assets managed by the Trust Departments at First National Bank of Abilene, San Angelo National Bank, Stephenville Bank & Trust Co. and First National Bank, Sweetwater, increased $27.3 million during the past year to a December 31, 2002 book value of $986.2 million. However, due to depressed stock market values and volumes, trust department revenue declined in 2002. Trust combined revenues for the year were down slightly from $5.89 million in 2001 to $5.83 million for 2002. In 2003, we anticipate a return to improved income growth.\n\nThe performance of the stock market the past three years has been a challenge that our trust investment professionals have managed well. Not since 1939-1941 have we seen the S&P 500 drop 35% in a three-year period. Our portfolio managers outperformed their indices in Large Cap stocks by 83 basis points and Fixed Income securities by 168 basis points. This performance bodes well for the present and future of our client accounts.\n\nDuring 2002, we saw a successful conversion of Stephenville Bank & Trust to the SEI Corporation accounting system. In March 2003, we will be converting First National Bank, Sweetwater, to this system as well. This will provide all First Financial Bankshares trust clients with the strength and advantages of a uniform accounting system. Other operational systems have been examined and consistent practices and procedures have been implemented.\n\nTo further enhance our risk management assessments in 2003, we will be introducing an Operational Peer Review Team similar to the successful peer review teams used in the Personal Trust areas of our four locations.\n\nJ. Bruce Hildebrand Executive Vice President\n\nRobert S. Patterson First National Bank of Abilene\n\nPerry Elliott Stephenville Bank & Trust Co.\n\nPerry Elliott Stephenville Bank & Trust Co.\n\nJanis McDowell First National Bank, Sweetwater\n\nPlans for the formation of a First Financial Bankshares trust company are moving forward with regulatory approval anticipated in late Spring or early Summer. This will permit your Company to provide quality, locally delivered trust services to additional markets.\n\nWith skilled trust professionals offering a complete range of financial products and services, the future of our trust departments look bright. Through dedication to individualized portfolio design and personalized service, our trust departments stand ready to meet the needs of our present and future clients.\n\nSenior Vice President, Trust Services\n\n## TRUST ASSETS in millions\n\nDavid Byrd San Angelo National Bank\n\nDavid Byrd San Angelo National Bank\n\n13", + "recall": 0.9382716049382716, + "true_md": "Robert S. Patterson First National Bank of Abilene\n\nDavid Byrd San Angelo National Bank\n\nPerry Elliott Stephenville Bank & Trust Co.\n\nJanis McDowell First National Bank, Sweetwater\n\nTRUST FEES in millions\n\nTRUST ASSETS in millions\n\n13\n\nJ. Bruce Hildebrand Executive Vice President\n\nTo further enhance our risk management assessments in 2003, we will be introducing an Operational Peer Review Team similar to the successful peer review teams used in the Personal Trust areas of our four locations.\n\nDuring 2002, we saw a successful conversion of Stephenville Bank & Trust to the SEI Corporation account- ing system. In March 2003, we will be converting First National Bank, Sweetwater, to this system as well. This will provide all First Financial Bankshares trust clients with the strength and advantages of a uniform accounting system. Other operational systems have been examined and con- sistent practices and procedures have been implemented. \n\nThe performance of the stock market the past three years has been a challenge that our trust investment profes- sionals have managed well. Not since 1939-1941 have we seen the S&P 500 drop 35% in a three-year period. Our portfolio managers outperformed their indices in Large Cap stocks by 83 basis points and Fixed Income securi- ties by 168 basis points. This performance bodes well for the present and future of our client accounts.\n\nWith skilled trust professionals offering a complete range of financial products and services, the future of our trust departments look bright. Through dedication to individu- alized portfolio design and personalized service, our trust departments stand ready to meet the needs of our pres- ent and future clients.\n\nPlans for the formation of a First Financial Bankshares trust company are moving forward with regulatory approval anticipated in late Spring or early Summer. This will permit your Company to provide quality, locally delivered trust services to additional markets.\n\nAssets managed by the Trust Departments at First National Bank of Abilene, San Angelo National Bank, Stephenville Bank & Trust Co. and First National Bank, Sweetwater, increased $27.3 million during the past year to a December 31, 2002 book value of $986.2 million. However, due to depressed stock market values and volumes, trust department revenue declined in 2002. Trust combined revenues for the year were down slightly from $5.89 mil- lion in 2001 to $5.83 million for 2002. In 2003, we anticipate a return to improved income growth. \n\nRobert S. Patterson Senior Vice President, Trust Services" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "d4c0401fffc04d24e629a9fada23266a3b492ea63e889641b3c33adf815d44e3", + "edit_distance": 0.9142857142857143, + "f1_score": 0.2857142857142857, + "meteor": 0.10640315605796222, + "precision": 0.35714285714285715, + "pred_md": "glyph<c=19,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium> Àœ“Êglyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium>œ“«œ˜i˜ÌÃÊ̜Êglyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium>œ“«iÌiÊ-ÞÃÌi“Ã\n\nglyph<c=19,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium> Àœ“Êglyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium>œ“«œ˜i˜ÌÃÊ̜Êglyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium>œ“«iÌiÊ-ÞÃÌi“Ã", + "recall": 0.23809523809523808, + "true_md": "# À œ “ Ê œ “ « œ ˜ i ˜ Ì Ã Ê Ì œ Ê œ “ «  i Ì i Ê - Þ Ã Ì i “ Ã\n\nÓ ä ä { Ê ˜ ˜ Õ >  Ê , i « œ À Ì" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9513374359535353, + "doc_id": "d2765014678f3713c4f12243f6a53be44069f326a23663316ad3d4c37f964a22", + "edit_distance": 0.373015873015873, + "f1_score": 0.9802197802197801, + "meteor": 0.940457489954518, + "precision": 0.9823788546255506, + "pred_md": "62\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\npremises within the complex. The agreement is subject to the implementation of proposed gaming law reforms and a tax structure acceptable to the Company, and obtaining required planning and other approvals.\n\nMacau. In connection with the Company's pending joint venture in Macau (see Note 1), the Company has committed to invest up to $280 million in the entity in the form of capital contributions and shareholder loans.\n\nNew York Racing Association. The Company has an understanding with the New York Racing Association ('NYRA') to manage video lottery terminals ('VLTs') at NYRA's Aqueduct horseracing facility in metropolitan New York. The Company would assist in the development of the facility, including providing project financing, and would manage the facility for a fee. Work was halted on the VLT facility in August 2003 pending the outcome of an investigation of certain aspects of NYRA's operations by Federal prosecutors. In December 2003, NYRA reached agreement with the Justice Department whereby NYRA was indicted with prosecution deferred. NYRA agreed to pay a fine and the indictment will be dismissed with prejudice upon NYRA implementing certain reforms and otherwise complying with the terms of the agreement. The Company's participation is subject to a definitive agreement, regulatory approvals and certain legislative changes by the State of New York.\n\nThe Residences at MGM Grand. In July 2004, the venture obtained construction financing for up to $210 million for the development of the first tower. The Company has provided a guaranty for up to 50% of the interest and principal payment obligations on the construction financing as well as a joint and several completion guaranty with its partners. The Company recorded the value of the guaranty obligation, approximately $2 million, in other long-term liabilities.\n\nOther Guarantees. The Company is party to various guarantee contracts in the normal course of business, which are generally supported by letters of credit issued by financial institutions. The Company's Senior Credit Facility limits the amount of letters of credit that can be issued to $200 million, and the amount of available borrowings under the Senior Credit Facility is reduced by any outstanding letters of credit. At December 31, 2004, the Company had provided a $50 million letter of credit to support the Economic Development Corporation of the City of Detroit bonds referred to above, which are a liability of the Company.\n\nLitigation. The Company is a party to various legal proceedings, most of which relate to routine matters incidental to its business. Management does not believe that the outcome of such proceedings will have a material adverse effect on the Company's financial position or results of operations.", + "recall": 0.9780701754385965, + "true_md": "Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements 62\n\npremises within the complex. The agreement is subject to the implementation of proposed gaming law reforms and a tax structure acceptable to the Company, and obtaining required planning and other approvals.\n\nMacau. In connection with the Company’s pending joint venture in Macau (see Note 1), the Company has committed to invest up to $280 million in the entity in the form of capital contributions and shareholder loans.\n\nNew York Racing Association. The Company has an understanding with the New York Racing Association (“NYRA”) to manage video lottery terminals (“VLTs”) at NYRA’s Aqueduct horseracing facility in metropolitan New York. The Company would assist in the development of the facility, including providing project financing, and would manage the facility for a fee. Work was halted on the VLT facility in August 2003 pending the outcome of an investigation of certain aspects of NYRA’s operations by Federal prosecutors. In December 2003, NYRA reached agreement with the Justice Department whereby NYRA was indicted with prosecution deferred. NYRA agreed to pay a fine and the indictment will be dismissed with prejudice upon NYRA implementing certain reforms and otherwise complying with the terms of the agreement. The Company’s participation is subject to a definitive agreement, regulatory approvals and certain legislative changes by the State of New York.\n\nOther Guarantees. The Company is party to various guarantee contracts in the normal course of business, which are generally supported by letters of credit issued by financial institutions. The Company’s Senior Credit Facility limits the amount of letters of credit that can be issued to $200 million, and the amount of available borrowings under the Senior Credit Facility is reduced by any outstanding letters of credit. At December 31, 2004, the Company had provided a $50 million letter of credit to support the Economic Development Corporation of the City of Detroit bonds referred to above, which are a liability of the Company. \n\nLitigation. The Company is a party to various legal proceedings, most of which relate to routine matters incidental to its business. Management does not believe that the outcome of such proceedings will have a material adverse effect on the Company’s financial position or results of operations.\n\nThe Residences at MGM Grand. In July 2004, the venture obtained construction financing for up to $210 million for the development of the first tower. The Company has provided a guaranty for up to 50% of the interest and principal payment obligations on the construction financing as well as a joint and several completion guaranty with its partners. The Company recorded the value of the guaranty obligation, approximately $2 million, in other long-term liabilities." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "df9974ffc831cd793c690425aa8c850238e134d384e0b94099f26f0f956cc93f", + "edit_distance": 0.9583333333333334, + "f1_score": 0.1111111111111111, + "meteor": 0.08333333333333334, + "precision": 0.07142857142857142, + "pred_md": "2 0 0 3 F I N A N C I A L H I G H L I G H T S\n\n1", + "recall": 0.25, + "true_md": "2003 FINANCIAL HIGHLIGHTS\n\n1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9000521645185675, + "doc_id": "7737824476f0648fb959384e05cb3a85c42326bf65d35ca83ef0e050e5550d17", + "edit_distance": 0.7370304114490162, + "f1_score": 0.9330357142857144, + "meteor": 0.6777652808215608, + "precision": 0.9587155963302753, + "pred_md": "62\n\n## NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\nfor the year ended 31 December 2004\n\nMovement in fully paid ordinary shares\n\nThe market price of the Company's ordinary shares on 31 December 2004 was $8.48 (2003: $6.87).\n\n## (a) Santos Executive Share Plan\n\nThe Santos Executive Share Plan was approved by shareholders at a general meeting held on 22 December 1987.\n\nUnder the terms of the Plan, shares were initially issued as partly paid shares, paid to one cent. While partly paid, the Plan Shares are not transferable, carry no voting right and no entitlement to dividend but are entitled to participate in any bonus or rights issue.\n\nShares were issued principally on: 22 December 1987; 7 February and 5 December 1989; and 24 December 1990. In 1997 the Board determined that the Plan be discontinued and, accordingly, there has been no further issues of shares under the Plan.\n\nAt the beginning of the financial year there were 231,000 Plan Shares on issue. During the financial year 50,000 Plan Shares were fully paid and aggregate proceeds of $138,200 received by the Company. As at 31 December 2004 there were 181,000 Plan Shares outstanding.\n\n## (b) Santos Employee Share Acquisition Plan\n\nThe Santos Employee Share Acquisition Plan was approved by shareholders at the Annual General Meeting on 15 May 1997 and its continuation, with amendment, approved at the Annual General Meeting on 5 May 2000.\n\nBroadly, permanent eligible employees with at least a minimum period of service determined by Directors as at the offer date (one year of completed service for issues so far) are entitled to acquire shares under this Plan. Executives participating in the Santos Executive Share Option Plan (refer note 18(d)) or in the Executive Long Term Incentive Plan in 2004, casual employees and Directors of the Company are excluded from participating in this Plan. Employees are not eligible to participate under the Plan while they are resident overseas unless the Board decides otherwise.\n\nThe Plan provides for grants of fully paid ordinary shares in the capital of the Company up to a value determined by the Board which, to date, has been $1,000 per annum per eligible employee. A trustee is funded by the Santos Group to acquire shares directly from the Company or on market. The shares are then held by the trustee on behalf of eligible employees who have made applications under the Plan.\n\nThe employee's ownership of shares allocated under the Plan, and his or her right to deal with them, are subject to restrictions until the earlier of the expiration of the restriction period determined by the Board (being three years) and the time when he or she ceases to be an employee. Participants are entitled to instruct the trustee as to the exercise of voting rights, receive dividends and participate in bonus and rights issues during the restriction period. Shares are granted to eligible employees at no cost to the employee.\n\nAnnual Report 2004", + "recall": 0.908695652173913, + "true_md": "## NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STA TEMENTS for the year ended 31 December 2004\n\n## (a) Santos Executive Share Plan\n\n## (b) Santos Employee Share Acquisition Plan\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\n62\n\nThe Santos Employee Share Acquisition Plan was approved by sharehold ers at the Annual General Meeting on 15 May 1997 and its continuation, with amendment, approved at the Annual General Meeting on 5 May 2000.\n\nBroadly, permanent eligible employees with at least a minimum period of service determined by Directors as at the offer date (one year of completed service for issues so far) are entitled to acquire shares under this Plan. Ex ecutives participating in the Santos Executive Share Option Plan (refer note 18(d)) or in the Executive Long Term Incentive Plan in 2004, casual employees and Directors of the Company are excluded from participating in this Plan. Employees are not eligible to participate under the Plan while th ey are resident overseas unless the Board decides otherwise.\n\nThe Plan provides for grants of fully paid ordinary shares in the capital of the Company up to a value determined by the Board which, to date, has been $1,000 per annum per eligible employee. A trustee is funded by the Santos Group to acquire shares directly from the Company or on market. The shares are then held by the trustee on behalf of eligible employees who have made applications under the Plan.\n\nThe employee’s ownership of shares allocated under the Plan, and his or h er right to deal with them, are subject to restrictions until the earlier of the expiration of the restriction period determined by the Board (bein g three years) and the time when he or she ceases to be an employee. Participants are entitled to instruct the trustee as to the exercise of votin g rights, receive dividends and participate in bonus and rights issues during the restriction period. Shares are granted to eligible employees at no cost to the employee.\n\nThe Santos Executive Share Plan was approved by shareholders at a gener al meeting held on 22 December 1987.\n\nUnder the terms of the Plan, shares were initially issued as partly pai shares, paid to one cent. While partly paid, the Plan Shares are not transferable, carry no voting right and no entitlement to dividend but ar e entitled to participate in any bonus or rights issue.\n\nShares were issued principally on: 22 December 1987; 7 February an 5 December 1989; and 24 December 1990. In 1997 the Board determined that the Plan be discontinued and, accordingly, there has been no furth er issues of shares under the Plan.\n\nAt the beginning of the financial year there were 231,000 Plan Shares on issue. During the financial year 50,000 Plan Shares were fully paid and aggregate proceeds of $138,200 received by the Company. As at 31 December 2004 there were 181,000 Plan Shares outstanding.\n\nThe market price of the Company’s ordinary shares on 31 December 2004 was $8.48 (2003: $6.87)." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9537732299427604, + "doc_id": "65b50759b92931fb49a38ccfd5ae466e2aebdbc521bc6c3a0f3bad2c3510941b", + "edit_distance": 0.610655737704918, + "f1_score": 0.9791044776119402, + "meteor": 0.8487128300419364, + "precision": 0.9820359281437125, + "pred_md": "Middle East, Africa, Latin America and the Caribbean\n\n## Growing with Profit, not at Its Expense\n\nSHOICHI MIYATANI Vice President\n\nSHOICHI MIYATANI Vice President\n\n'Within the General Overseas Markets, or GOM, I'm responsible for Nissan business in nearly 110 countries, about 90 of which have Nissan national sales companies. It's a very diverse composition of small and large nations, and many languages and cultures.\n\nIn fiscal 2004 we met all our targets for sales and\n\nprofit. Out of Nissan's total unit sales of approximately 3.4 million vehicles, for example, GOM accounted for 678,000 units. We contribute to Nissan's performance in both volume expansion and profitability. And the operating profit margin for GOM is better than the corporate average.\n\nThe strongest regions in my territory were several African nations, such as South Africa, and Latin America. Our success was due in part to general market strength, but the continuing appeal of the Nissan Pickup in South Africa and Latin America was also a key. Aside from the Middle East, where larger vehicles like the Armada are preferred, sales for the Pickup and the X-TRAIL have been consistently strong in all markets. We produce the Pickup in South Africa and currently sell over 40,000 vehicles there every year; our market share is around 9 percent. In addition to Africa, the vehicles produced here will be sold in Europe, Australia and New Zealand starting at the beginning of 2006. In 2005, in the Middle East, we are already seeing significant increases in volume due to the launch of Infiniti and the introduction of new Nissan models in the latter half of 2004.\n\nThere are several risks associated with a diverse territory like ours, including political issues, economic issues, and a range of other external factors. At Nissan,\n\nour policy is to stay flexible and adapt to the situation. For example, we had initially planned to supply Pathfinder vehicles to the Middle East from Spain. However, the rise in the euro raised costs, so we quickly shifted production to the U.S. Because our job is so diversified, we felt we needed more strategic thinking within GOM. For this reason we established the GOM Plan Department, which is a cross-functional unit comprised of various departments, such as Manufacturing, Purchasing, and Engineering. This department is responsible for functions formerly performed by Marketing and Sales.\n\nSince we did not roll out many new models in our region, we had to upgrade our network structure to increase sales. The next new core model for us is the Tiida, which enjoyed a successful launch in China. It's a critical launch for us; through 2005 and 2006 we will complete the introduction of the model in all markets. The new model introductions will give us added strength in the markets during the NISSAN Value-Up period.\n\nAnother important development this year was the start of production of the Nissan Pickup in Egypt. Many in the industry doubted we would succeed, but we achieved our targets for quality. Vehicles produced here will also be exported to other countries in the region.\n\nEurope is a tough market, as is Japan. If Nissan becomes too dependent on its major markets like North America, there is an inherent risk, and GOM helps minimize that risk. The markets we represent will contribute substantially to Nissan's total profit. Our focus now is on deepening the foundations of our business. A few years ago, for instance, we designed six activities that all the national sales companies are required to carry out. In 2005, we'll establish even more advanced activities. We constantly review their performance and, if necessary, take aggressive actions, including replacing companies whose performance is consistently unsatisfactory. That is why our activities will expand with profit, not at its expense. The General Overseas Markets are where Nissan will really be growing.'\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\n67\n\nOUR WORLD", + "recall": 0.9761904761904762, + "true_md": "Nissan Annual Report 2004 67\n\nOUR WORLD\n\n“Within the General Overseas Markets, or GOM, I’m responsible for Nissan business in nearly 110 countries, about 90 of which have Nissan national sales companies. It’s a very diverse composition of small and large nations, and many languages and cultures. \n\nIn fiscal 2004 we met all our targets for sales and\n\nprofit. Out of Nissan’s total unit sales of approximately 3.4 million vehicles, for example, GOM accounted for 678,000 units. We contribute to Nissan’s performance in both volume expansion and profitability. And the operating profit margin for GOM is better than the corporate average. \n\nSHOICHI MIYATANI Vice President\n\nour policy is to stay flexible and adapt to the situation. For example, we had initially planned to supply Pathfinder vehicles to the Middle East from Spain. However, the rise in the euro raised costs, so we quickly shifted production to the U.S. Because our job is so diversified, we felt we needed more strategic thinking within GOM. For this reason we established the GOM Plan Department, which is a cross-functional unit comprised of various departments, such as Manufacturing, Purchasing, and Engineering. This department is responsible for functions formerly performed by Marketing and Sales. \n\nSince we did not roll out many new models in our region, we had to upgrade our network structure to increase sales. The next new core model for us is the Tiida, which enjoyed a successful launch in China. It’s a critical launch for us; through 2005 and 2006 we will complete the introduction of the model in all markets. The new model introductions will give us added strength in the markets during the NISSAN Value-Up period.\n\nThe strongest regions in my territory were several African nations, such as South Africa, and Latin America. Our success was due in part to general market strength, but the continuing appeal of the Nissan Pickup in South Africa and Latin America was also a key. Aside from the Middle East, where larger vehicles like the Armada are preferred, sales for the Pickup and the X-TRAIL have been consistently strong in all markets. We produce the Pickup in South Africa and currently sell over 40,000 vehicles there every year; our market share is around 9 percent. In addition to Africa, the vehicles produced here will be sold in Europe, Australia and New Zealand starting at the beginning of 2006. In 2005, in the Middle East, we are already seeing significant increases in volume due to the launch of Infiniti and the introduction of new Nissan models in the latter half of 2004. \n\nThere are several risks associated with a diverse territory like ours, including political issues, economic issues, and a range of other external factors. At Nissan, \n\nAnother important development this year was the start of production of the Nissan Pickup in Egypt. Many in the industry doubted we would succeed, but we achieved our targets for quality. Vehicles produced here will also be exported to other countries in the region.\n\nEurope is a tough market, as is Japan. If Nissan becomes too dependent on its major markets like North America, there is an inherent risk, and GOM helps minimize that risk. The markets we represent will contribute substantially to Nissan’s total profit. Our focus now is on deepening the foundations of our business. A few years ago, for instance, we designed six activities that all the national sales companies are required to carry out. In 2005, we’ll establish even more advanced activities. We constantly review their performance and, if necessary, take aggressive actions, including replacing companies whose performance is consistently unsatisfactory. That is why our activities will expand with profit, not at its expense. The General Overseas Markets are where Nissan will really be growing.”\n\n## Growing with Profit, not at Its Expense\n\nMiddle East, Africa, Latin America and the Caribbean" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9828879468668589, + "doc_id": "5a6aea28d296810cbcf11309dbef2b09822b427735a8bda0a2d6b7df0b1937d0", + "edit_distance": 0.015584415584415584, + "f1_score": 0.9882903981264638, + "meteor": 0.9901241672430215, + "precision": 0.9906103286384976, + "pred_md": "6\n\n## CHAIRMAN'S REPORT\n\nLabour hire is heavily dependent upon the quality of the personnel database and our intention has been announced to offer training at Dampier, Broome and Darwin for those who live in the North West and wish to work in the offshore industry there. Planning for this new initiative is well advanced and we expect to be running courses for prospective offshore employees in coming months. Although the training program is not directed to any particular community group, it has been encouraging to have active support from Aboriginal leaders in the Kimberley region.\n\nWorld prospects for energy, the need for Australia to add value to its resources, Government initiatives for the support of these activities and environmental imperatives, heavily favour gas, giving every indication that Mermaid Marine's development push has been extremely timely.\n\nIt is also important to draw attention to increased efforts in terms of health, safety and environmental protection. Our workplace is largely at sea, where operations involve natural dangers and the safety of our people is paramount. We also work in a setting where the tasks in which we are involved cast us in the role of environmental caretakers of the sea and coastline.\n\nOver the past twelve months, we have worked even more closely with producers to take this side of our business to the highest possible standard. We are proud of the achievement and at the time of this report, despite the inherent dangers involved in the work, our employees have accrued a record 348 days free of Lost Time Injuries, a tremendous effort.\n\nAverage turnover for the last two years was $20 million, our target in the near term is to achieve earnings of at least $100million, with appropriate levels of accompanying profit. That will be addressed through our policy of strategic positioning and development in the North West of Australia, and also by acquisition where merger or purchase will add to our earnings and strengths. Mermaid Marine Australia Limited is in excellent shape, with confidence that we are well able to pursue and secure our ambitious program.\n\nAlan Birchmore\n\nChairman", + "recall": 0.985981308411215, + "true_md": "## CHAIRMAN’ S REPORT\n\nLabour hire is heavily dependent upon the quality of the personnel database and our intention has been announced to offer training at Dampier, Broome and Darwin for those who live in the North West and wish to work in the offshore industry there. Planning for this new initiative is well advanced and we expect to be running courses for prospective offshore employees in coming months. Although the training program is not directed to any particular community group, it has been encouraging to have active support from Aboriginal leaders in the Kimberley region.\n\nWorld prospects for energy, the need for Australia to add value to its resources, Government initiatives for the support of these activities and environmental imperatives, heavily favour gas, giving every indication that Mermaid Marine’s development push has been extremely timely.\n\nIt is also important to draw attention to increased efforts in terms of health, safety and environmental protection. Our workplace is largely at sea, where operations involve natural dangers and the safety of our people is paramount. We also work in a setting where the tasks in which we are involved cast us in the role of environmental caretakers of the sea and coastline.\n\nOver the past twelve months, we have worked even more closely with producers to take this side of our business to the highest possible standard. We are proud of the achievement and at the time of this report, despite the inherent dangers involved in the work, our employees have accrued a record 348 days free of Lost Time Injuries, a tremendous effort.\n\nAverage turnover for the last two years was $20 million, our target in the near term is to achieve earnings of at least $100million, with appropriate levels of accompanying profit. That will be addressed through our policy of strategic positioning and development in the North West of Australia, and also by acquisition where merger or purchase will add to our earnings and strengths. Mermaid Marine Australia Limited is in excellent shape, with confidence that we are well able to pursue and secure our ambitious program.\n\nAlan Birchmore Chairman\n\n6" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.830780775164573, + "doc_id": "caf006ea693fc6289f1669eb5b8d09565783337bd01e2ceb0a555203a4abcd25", + "edit_distance": 0.8947368421052632, + "f1_score": 0.8787878787878788, + "meteor": 0.724269950704673, + "precision": 0.90625, + "pred_md": "- /H17074 J ohn Belisle, right, is senior vice president of Oswald, Trippe and Company, Inc. in Fort Myers, Fla., one of The Hartford's largest sellers of Select Customer commercial insurance. David van der Merwe, president of electronics manufacturer Saftronics, Inc., depends on him for reliable counsel, as well as products tailored to Saftronics' business.\n- /H17075 T he Hartford signed a new eightyear contract, beginning Jan.1, 2002, to continue its highly successful relationship with AARP. Property & Casualty Operations President and CEO Dave Zwiener, second from left, works closely with, left to right, Bill Farris, director, financial products, AARP Services, Inc.; Leisha Spaulding, manager, financial products, AARP Services, Inc.; and Steve Zaleznick, CEO, AARP Services, Inc.", + "recall": 0.8529411764705882, + "true_md": "GLYPH<H17075> T he Hartford signed a new eight- year contract, beginning Jan.1, 2002, to continue its highly suc- cessful relationship with AARP. Property & Casualty Operations President and CEO Dave Zwiener, second from left, works closely with, left to right, Bill Farris, director, financial products, AARP Services, Inc.; Leisha Spaulding, manager, financial products, AARP Services, Inc.; and Steve Zaleznick, CEO, AARP Services, Inc.\n\nGLYPH<H17074> J ohn Belisle, right, is senior vice president of Oswald, Trippe and Company, Inc. in Fort Myers, Fla., one of The Hartford’s largest sellers of Select Customer commercial insurance. David van der Merwe, president of electronics manufactur- er Saftronics, Inc., depends on him for reliable counsel, as well as prod- ucts tailored to Saftronics’ business." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9561515357308957, + "doc_id": "258b84390ca8d49c03d750ed1752a9ce8c2da1665e7b27475a92841d4776514c", + "edit_distance": 0.055876685934489405, + "f1_score": 0.9818913480885312, + "meteor": 0.9757685805182924, + "precision": 0.9838709677419355, + "pred_md": "## Risk Management System\n\nThe Company has been evaluating risk of the Company and the Nissan's Group from various points of view and has been considering the appropriate control system and methodology. A risk management team established in the Financial Department has worked with several global sections since 2004, sorted out the business risks, and prioritized them based on the probabilities, impacts, and relevant control level. Directors in charge were appointed and they have been taking concrete measures against the risks for which actions are required.\n\nFurthermore, since April 2004, the Company has established Intellectual Property Rights Management Department for the purpose of protecting intellectual property rights in specific areas, strengthening activities to protect Nissan's intellectual property rights, and abstracting new intellectual property rights. And the department has been performing various activities to protect and create Nissan Brand.\n\nSince the fiscal year beginning April 1, 2005, the scope of risk management has been expanded to address risks which are more strategic or those relate to business processes in addition to the original hazard risks. Functions or Departments, which operate risk control, report the status through the normal reporting lines and EC (Executive Committee) directly monitors the risk that must be controlled on corporate level.\n\nIn 2001, the Company established 'Nissan Global Code of Conduct' and distributed it to employees of domestic and foreign Group companies. Moreover, the Company established 'Nissan Code of Conduct (Japanese Edition) ~Our Promises~' and publicized it which should be applied to employees of domestic Group companies. This has been gradually implemented by the Group companies.\n\nThe Company emphasizes education of employees based on the idea that written conduct code must be understood by all employees and reflected to their actions. All employees must take learning programs by E-learning or VTR, and sign confirmations regarding code of conduct after finishing the programs. The confirmations have already been received from almost every employee, and compliance of corporate ethics has been penetrated into the Nissan group.\n\nFurthermore, Global Compliance Committee is established in order to review the status of compliance with the code of conduct and ensure that the code is fully complied. Managing Director in charge of Human Resource is appointed as Global Compliance Officer (GCO) and the chairman of regional compliance committees established in each area such as Japan, North America, Europe and Global Overseas Market. Those committees promote the improvement of code of conduct, resolution of issues and enlightenment activities. 'Easy Voice System', which was deployed in 2002 as a system that employees can freely communicate their opinions and demands to the companies, can acquaint violation of compliance and behaviors possibly resulting in violation and also contribute to improve business operations and to develop corporate culture emphasizing to comply corporate ethics.\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\n21\n\nWHO WE ARE", + "recall": 0.9799196787148594, + "true_md": "## Risk Management System\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 21\n\nWHO WE ARE\n\nThe Company has been evaluating risk of the Company and the Nissan’s Group from various points of view and has been considering the appropriate control system and methodology. A risk management team established in the Financial Department has worked with several global sections since 2004, sorted out the business risks, and prioritized them based on the probabilities, impacts, and relevant control level. Directors in charge were appointed and they have been taking concrete measures against the risks for which actions are required.\n\nFurthermore, since April 2004, the Company has established Intellectual Property Rights Management Department for the purpose of protecting intellectual property rights in specific areas, strengthening activities to protect Nissan’s intellectual property rights, and abstracting new intellectual property rights. And the department has been performing various activities to protect and create Nissan Brand.\n\nSince the fiscal year beginning April 1, 2005, the scope of risk management has been expanded to address risks which are more strategic or those relate to business processes in addition to the original hazard risks. Functions or Departments, which operate risk control, report the status through the normal reporting lines and EC (Executive Committee) directly monitors the risk that must be controlled on corporate level.\n\nIn 2001, the Company established “Nissan Global Code of Conduct” and distributed it to employees of domestic and foreign Group companies. Moreover, the Company established “Nissan Code of Conduct (Japanese Edition) ~Our Promises~” and publicized it which should be applied to employees of domestic Group companies. This has been gradually implemented by the Group companies.\n\nThe Company emphasizes education of employees based on the idea that written conduct code must be understood by all employees and reflected to their actions. All employees must take learning programs by E-learning or VTR, and sign confirmations regarding code of conduct after finishing the programs. The confirmations have already been received from almost every employee, and compliance of corporate ethics has been penetrated into the Nissan group. \n\nFurthermore, Global Compliance Committee is established in order to review the status of compliance with the code of conduct and ensure that the code is fully complied.\n\nManaging Director in charge of Human Resource is appointed as Global Compliance Officer (GCO) and the chairman of regional compliance committees established in each area such as Japan, North America, Europe and Global Overseas Market. Those committees promote the improvement of code of conduct, resolution of issues and enlightenment activities. “Easy Voice System”, which was deployed in 2002 as a system that employees can freely communicate their opinions and demands to the companies, can acquaint violation of compliance and behaviors possibly resulting in violation and also contribute to improve business operations and to develop corporate culture emphasizing to comply corporate ethics." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8311404136665732, + "doc_id": "9c3f05449b4f207cf138ec43cce1267bfa91b30f3cd92cb4ba258cafe92b386f", + "edit_distance": 0.125, + "f1_score": 0.9811320754716982, + "meteor": 0.9922001471670346, + "precision": 0.9629629629629629, + "pred_md": "SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS\n\n## Years Ended December 31, 2003, 2002 and 2001\n\nin thousands\n\n(Continued)\n\nSHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY\n\n16\n\n■", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS\n\nYears Ended December 31, 2003, 2002 and 2001 in thousands\n\n(Continued)\n\nSHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY ■ 16" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9602710401107192, + "doc_id": "80e85f3ab987408102f30c21dd46d21faacc16b69123f919bfc74b44774ca0fd", + "edit_distance": 0.18775510204081633, + "f1_score": 0.9883268482490273, + "meteor": 0.9684226279999096, + "precision": 0.9921875, + "pred_md": "fair value or intrinsic value, which generally leads to no expense being recorded. The Company opted to use this intrinsic value method and make required disclosures of fair value expense. SFAS 123(R) eliminates this intrinsic value alternative. SFAS 123(R) is effective for the Company on July 1, 2005, at which time all future share-based payments must be recorded at fair value.\n\nThe Company has adopted nonqualified stock option plans and incentive stock option plans which provide for the granting of stock options to eligible directors, officers and employees. The plans are administered by the Compensation and Stock Option Committee of the Board of Directors. Salaried officers, directors and other key employees of the Company and its subsidiaries are eligible to receive options. The exercise price in each instance is 100% of the fair market value of the Company's common stock on the date of grant. The options have 10-year terms and in most cases are exercisable in either four or five equal annual installments.\n\nAs of December 31, 2004, the aggregate number of stock options available for grant was 2.2 million. A summary of the status of the Company's stock option plans is presented below:\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nThe following table summarizes information about stock options outstanding at December 31, 2004:\n\n51", + "recall": 0.9844961240310077, + "true_md": "51\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nfair value or intrinsic value, which generally leads to no expense being recorded. The Company opted to use this intrinsic value method and make required disclosures of fair value expense. SFAS 123(R) eliminates this intrinsic value alternative. SFAS 123(R) is effective for the Company on July 1, 2005, at which time all future share-based payments must be recorded at fair value.\n\nThe following table summarizes information about stock options outstanding at December 31, 2004:\n\nThe Company has adopted nonqualified stock option plans and incentive stock option plans which provide for the granting of stock options to eligible directors, officers and employees. The plans are administered by the Compensation and Stock Option Committee of the Board of Directors. Salaried officers, directors and other key employees of the Company and its subsidiaries are eligible to receive options. The exercise price in each instance is 100% of the fair market value of the Company’s common stock on the date of grant. The options have 10-year terms and in most cases are exercisable in either four or five equal annual installments.\n\nAs of December 31, 2004, the aggregate number of stock options available for grant was 2.2 million. A summary of the status of the Company’s stock option plans is presented below:" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8381860800928371, + "doc_id": "2ecd3309e2c40d135221e748eae991890cc3cd25b331b30d68a00424008f3b45", + "edit_distance": 0.6684491978609626, + "f1_score": 0.8914285714285715, + "meteor": 0.8162866469105039, + "precision": 0.9512195121951219, + "pred_md": "14\n\n## First National Bank of Abilene\n\n## Main Office\n\n400 Pine Street Abilene, Texas 79601\n\nChartered 1890\n\n## Branches\n\n4400 Buffalo Gap Road\n\nAbilene, Texas 79606\n\n4350 Southwest Drive Abilene, Texas 79606\n\n920 N. Willis\n\nAbilene, Texas 79603\n\n3300 S. 14th Street\n\nAbilene, Texas 79605\n\n1010 N. Judge Ely Blvd.\n\nAbilene, Texas 79601\n\n701 Pine Street\n\nAbilene, Texas 79601\n\n1345 Barrow Street\n\nAbilene, Texas 79605\n\n## Senior Officers\n\nF. Scott Dueser\n\nChairman of the Board\n\nChuck A. Cowell\n\nPresident and Chief Executive Officer\n\nRon Fogle\n\nExecutive Vice President, Commercial Loans\n\nRobert S. Patterson\n\nExecutive Vice President and\n\nSenior Trust Officer\n\nJohn Prince\n\nExecutive Vice President, Personal Loans\n\nChuck A. Cowell President and Chief Executive Officer\n\nChuck A. Cowell President and Chief Executive Officer\n\nMario A. Luppino\n\nExecutive Vice President, Marketing and Retail\n\nGary Tucker, CDP\n\nExecutive Vice President and Chief Information Officer\n\nLeo Dennis\n\nExecutive Vice President, Chief Financial Officer and Cashier\n\n## Directors\n\nChuck A. Cowell\n\nPresident and Chief Executive Officer\n\nJ. Michael Alexander\n\nPresident, James M. Alexander & Co.\n\nTucker S. Bridwell\n\nPresident and Chief Executive Officer, Mansefeldt Investments, Inc.\n\nJoseph E. Canon\n\nExecutive Director, Dodge Jones Foundation\n\nDavid Copeland\n\nPresident, Shelton Family Foundation\n\nJoe Crawford\n\nPresident, Abilene Aero, Inc.\n\nF. Scott Dueser\n\nFirst Financial Bankshares, Inc.\n\nCharles Ezzell\n\nInvestments\n\nAllan D. Frizzell\n\nExecutive Vice President, Enrich Oil Corporation\n\nRaymond A. McDaniel, Jr. Investments\n\nTaylor County Deposit Market Share\n\n## Abilene\n\nBynum Miers\n\nRancher\n\nWilliam D. Minter\n\nVice President, CameraMouse\n\nStanley Morris, Jr. Investments\n\nKenneth T. Murphy First Financial Bankshares, Inc.\n\nJames Parker\n\nPresident, Parker Properties, Inc.\n\nJack D. Ramsey, M.D. Physician\n\nDian Graves Stai Investments\n\nMichael C. Waters, F .A.C.H.E.\n\nPresident, Hendrick Health System\n\n## Advisory\n\nBob J. Surovik McMahon, Surovik, Suttle, Buhrmann, Hicks and Gill, P .C.\n\nSteve Suttle\n\nMcMahon, Surovik, Suttle, Buhrmann, Hicks and Gill, P .C.", + "recall": 0.8387096774193549, + "true_md": "## First National B ank of Abilene\n\n## Senior Officers\n\n## Main Office 400 Pine Street\n\n## Branches 4400 Buffalo Gap Road\n\n## Advisory\n\nMain Office 400 Pine Street Abilene, Texas 79601 Chartered 1890 \n\nBranches 4400 Buffalo Gap Road Abilene, Texas 79606 4350 Southwest Drive Abilene, Texas 79606 920 N. Willis Abilene, Texas 79603 3300 S. 14th Street Abilene, Texas 79605 1010 N. Judge Ely Blvd. Abilene, Texas 79601 701 Pine Street Abilene, Texas 79601 1345 Barrow Street Abilene, Texas 79605\n\nF. Scott Dueser Chairman of the Board Chuck A. Cowell President and Chief Executive Officer Ron Fogle Executive Vice President, Commercial Loans Robert S. Patterson Executive Vice President and Senior Trust Officer John Prince Executive Vice President, Personal Loans\n\nBynum Miers Rancher William D. Minter Vice President, CameraMouse Stanley Morris, Jr. Investments Kenneth T. Murphy First Financial B ankshar es, Inc. James Parker President, Parker Properties, Inc. Jack D. Ramsey, M.D. Physician Dian Graves Stai Investments Michael C. Waters, F.A.C.H.E. President, Hendrick Health System\n\nBob J. Surovik McMahon, Surovik, Suttle, Buhrmann, Hicks and Gill, P.C. Steve Suttle McMahon, Surovik, Suttle, Buhrmann, Hicks and Gill, P.C.\n\n14\n\nA bilene Return on Average Equity 21.05 20.19 4 6 % Taylor County Deposit Market Share\n\nChuck A. Cowell President and Chief Executive Officer\n\n## Dir ectors\n\nMario A. Luppino Executive Vice President, Marketing and Retail Gary T ucker , CDP Executive Vice President and Chief I nfor mation Officer Leo Dennis Executive Vice President, Chief Financial Officerand C ashier\n\nChuck A. Cowell President and Chief Executive Officer J. Michael Alexander President, J ames M. Alexander & Co. Tucker S. Bridwell President and Chief Executive Officer, Mansefeldt I nvestments, Inc. Joseph E. Canon Executive Director, Dodge Jones Foundation David Copeland President, Shelton Family Foundation Joe Crawford President, Abilene Aero, Inc. F. Scott Dueser First Financial Bankshares, Inc. Charles Ezzell Investments Allan D. Frizzell Executive Vice President, Enrich Oil Corporation Raymond A. McDaniel, Jr. Investments" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "56a52ab22129f45986ea5c86553ec8ea8d488f132e14035238d3caee3464b23c", + "edit_distance": 0.6684491978609626, + "f1_score": 0.8914285714285715, + "meteor": 0.8162866469105039, + "precision": 0.9512195121951219, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.8387096774193549, + "true_md": "# Shenandoah Telecommunications Company 2003 Annual Report" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8800557388865035, + "doc_id": "7a37bda174ece049393bca78fd91a1a0e904e97254890cf83524e2568baca76c", + "edit_distance": 0.24210526315789474, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9909470899070235, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "board of\n\n## directors\n\nfront row, left to right: Joel W. Johnson, Jeffrey M. Ettinger back row, left to right: Dr. Robert R. Waller; John R. Block; E. Peter Gillette, Jr.; Michael J. McCoy; Luella G. Goldberg; Gary J. Ray; John G. Turner; Dakota A. Pippins; Susan I. Marvin; John L. Morrison; James W. Cavanaugh (corporate secretary); Dr. John W. Allen\n\n## John W. Allen, Ph.D.\n\nProfessor Emeritus, Food Marketing, Partnership for Food Industry Development Michigan State University Director since October 1989\n\n## John R. Block\n\nFormer U.S. Secretary of Agriculture Executive Vice President of Food Marketing Institute and President of its Wholesale Division\n\nDirector since October 1997\n\n## Jeffrey M. Ettinger\n\nPresident and Chief Operating Officer Director since May 2004\n\n## E. Peter Gillette, Jr.\n\nSenior Advisor to U.S. Trust Company Retired President, Piper Trust Company Director since July 1996\n\n48\n\nHormel Foods Corporation\n\n## Luella G. Goldberg\n\nTrustee, University of Minnesota Foundation Member, Board of Overseers, University of Minnesota Carlson School of Management Trustee and Chair Emerita, Wellesley College Past Board Chair, University of Minnesota Foundation Director since September 1993\n\n## Joel W. Johnson\n\nChairman of the Board and Chief Executive Officer Director since June 1991\n\n## Susan I. Marvin\n\nPresident, Marvin Windows and Doors Trustee, University of Minnesota Foundation Director since July 2002\n\n## Michael J. McCoy\n\nExecutive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer Director since May 2000\n\n## John L. Morrison\n\nManaging Director, Goldner Hawn Johnson & Morrison Incorporated Chairman, Callanish Capital Partners Director since November 2003\n\n## Dakota A. Pippins\n\nPresident and Chief Executive Officer, Pippins Strategies, LLC Adjunct Assistant Professor, New York University Director since January 2001\n\n## Gary J. Ray\n\nExecutive Vice President\n\nDirector since November 1990\n\n## John G. Turner\n\nChairman, Hillcrest Capital Partners Retired Chairman and CEO of ReliaStar Financial Corp. Director since March 2000\n\n## Robert R. Waller, MD\n\nPresident Emeritus, Mayo Foundation Professor of Ophthalmology, Mayo Medical School Director since January 1993", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## board of directors\n\nfront row, left to right: Joel W. Johnson, Jeffrey M. Ettinger back row, left to right: Dr. Robert R. Waller; John R. Block; E. Peter Gillette, Jr.; Michael J. McCoy; Luella G. Goldberg; Gary J. Ray; John G. Turner; Dakota A. Pippins; Susan I. Marvin; John L. Morrison; James W. Cavanaugh (corporate secretary); Dr. John W. Allen\n\nJohn W. Allen, Ph.D. Professor Emeritus, Food Marketing, Partnership for Food Industry Development Michigan State University Director since October 1989\n\nJohn R. Block Former U.S. Secretary of Agriculture Executive Vice President of Food Marketing Institute and President of its Wholesale Division Director since October 1997\n\nJeffrey M. Ettinger President and Chief Operating Officer Director since May 2004\n\nE. Peter Gillette, Jr. Senior Advisor to U.S. Trust Company Retired President, Piper Trust Company Director since July 1996\n\nLuella G. Goldberg Trustee, University of Minnesota Foundation Member, Board of Overseers, University of Minnesota Carlson School of Management Trustee and Chair Emerita, Wellesley College Past Board Chair, University of Minnesota Foundation Director since September 1993\n\nJoel W. Johnson Chairman of the Board and Chief Executive Officer Director since June 1991\n\nSusan I. Marvin President, Marvin Windows and Doors Trustee, University of Minnesota Foundation Director since July 2002\n\nMichael J. McCoy Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer Director since May 2000\n\nJohn L. Morrison Managing Director, Goldner Hawn Johnson & Morrison Incorporated Chairman, Callanish Capital Partners Director since November 2003\n\nRobert R. Waller, MD President Emeritus, Mayo Foundation Professor of Ophthalmology, Mayo Medical School Director since January 1993\n\nJohn G. Turner Chairman, Hillcrest Capital Partners Retired Chairman and CEO of ReliaStar Financial Corp. Director since March 2000\n\nGary J. Ray Executive Vice President Director since November 1990\n\nDakota A. Pippins President and Chief Executive Officer, Pippins Strategies, LLC Adjunct Assistant Professor, New York University Director since January 2001\n\n48 Hormel Foods Corporation" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6408581919218713, + "doc_id": "bc2f173c3d5041a60736274c012f3243c134f3cbe5249f183bf438eb18c729a1", + "edit_distance": 0.8421052631578947, + "f1_score": 0.9090909090909091, + "meteor": 0.8526024789000568, + "precision": 0.9375, + "pred_md": "56\n\n## NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\nfor the year ended 31 December 2004\n\nAnnual Report 2004", + "recall": 0.8823529411764706, + "true_md": "for the year ended 31 December 2004\n\n## NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STA TEMENTS\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\n56" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8425274634661079, + "doc_id": "270d58292819747be01637b21a54e2004acdd5db93f754fb43b3e18015ca9f5f", + "edit_distance": 0.09259259259259259, + "f1_score": 0.9315068493150686, + "meteor": 0.9384419965499687, + "precision": 0.918918918918919, + "pred_md": "## Corporate Headquarters\n\n110 SE 6th Street, 28th Floor, Fort Lauderdale, Florida 33301 Phone: (954) 769-2400 ¥ Fax: (954) 769-2664 ¥ www.republicservices.com\n\n'2005, RITM, LLC\n\nRepublic Services and Republic Services, Inc. names and logos are service marks of RITM, LLC", + "recall": 0.9444444444444444, + "true_md": "Corporate Headquarters 110 SE 6th Street, 28th Floor, Fort Lauderdale, Florida 33301 Phone: (954) 769-2400 • Fax: (954) 769-2664 • www.republicservices.com\n\n©2005, RITM, LLC Republic Services and Republic Services, Inc. names and logos are service marks of RITM, LLC" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.902611477891418, + "doc_id": "28c5d727438cbda1d32227f79884b264bd82f7368594baeda849a7f2a0d3a8d0", + "edit_distance": 0.06593406593406594, + "f1_score": 0.9761904761904762, + "meteor": 0.9560128321275765, + "precision": 0.9761904761904762, + "pred_md": "The accumulated benefit obligation for the pension plan was $4,801,000 and $4,170,000 at December 31, 2003 and 2002, respectively. The components of net periodic pension cost for 2003, 2002 and 2001 were as follows (in thousands):\n\n## Actuarial assumptions used to determine benefit obligations at December 31 were as follows:\n\n## Actuarial assumptions used to determine net periodic pension cost were as follows:\n\nThe Company's expected long-term rate of return assumption is based upon the plan's actual long-term investment results as well as the long-term outlook for investment returns in the marketplace at the time the assumption is made. The reduction in the Company's assumption for this expected return rate in the beginning of 2003 to 8 percent from 9 percent reflected the major downturn in returns on debt and equity investments that occurred in the investment markets in 2001 and 2002.\n\nThe Company's pension plan assets at December 31, 2003 and 2002 were invested in the following asset categories:\n\n21", + "recall": 0.9761904761904762, + "true_md": "The accumulated benefit obligation for the pension plan was $4,801,000 and $4,170,000 at December 31, 2003 and 2002, respectively. The components of net periodic pension cost for 2003, 2002 and 2001 were as follows (in thousands):\n\nActuarial assumptions used to determine benefit obligations at December 31 were as follows:\n\nActuarial assumptions used to determine net periodic pension cost were as follows:\n\nThe Company’s expected long-term rate of return assumption is based upon the plan’s actual long-term investment results as well as the long-term outlook for investment returns in the marketplace at the time the assumption is made. The reduction in the Company’s assumption for this expected return rate in the beginning of 2003 to 8 percent from 9 percent reflected the major downturn in returns on debt and equity investments that occurred in the investment markets in 2001 and 2002.\n\nThe Company’s pension plan assets at December 31, 2003 and 2002 were invested in the following asset categories:\n\n21" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9759281456262127, + "doc_id": "996af36a43ebed4190b8abac9ef9d3833ab80692a122688926876fdf67a56716", + "edit_distance": 0.020460358056265986, + "f1_score": 0.9903225806451613, + "meteor": 0.9851578623658706, + "precision": 0.9903225806451613, + "pred_md": "## SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES MANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS\n\nsignificant industry competition for subscriber additions and subscriber retention. These discounts and rebates are primarily transacted in the form of instant rebates, providing a second phone free when a customer purchases one, or providing free phones if the subscriber signs up for a specific contract term and a specific service plan. PCS equipment sales were $2.1 million, an increase of $0.4 million or 26.6%. The equipment sales are net of $1.7 million of rebates and discounts given at the time of sale. Rebates and discounts continue to be required to meet\n\nIn accordance with Sprint's requirements, the Company launched third generation (3G 1X) wireless service in August 2002. 3G 1X is the first of a four-stage migration path that will enable additional voice capacity and increased data speeds for subscribers. The network upgrades completed in 2002 were software changes, channel card upgrades, and some new network elements required for packet data. The Company's base stations were outfitted with network card enhancements, thereby allowing the Company to provide 3G 1X service without wholesale change-outs of base stations. 3G 1X is backwards compatible with the existing 2G network, thereby allowing continued use of current customer handsets. The impact of 3G 1X-network enhancements on revenues became more pronounced in 2003, as use of new 3G services and features generated approximately $1.0 million for the year, compared to $0.2 million in 2002. The growth in 3G revenue is the result of more subscribers on 3G plans and the increase in popularity of camera phones during 2003.\n\nWireless revenues included tower leases of $2.6 million, an increase of $0.5 million or 24.8%. The increase was the result of other wireless carriers executing additional leases to use space on the Company's portfolio of towers. Of the 88 towers and poles owned by the Company as of December 31, 2003, 52 towers have one or more external tenants, compared to 46 towers with external tenants at the end of 2002.\n\nWireless revenues from the Company's paging operation were $0.2 million, a decrease of $0.1 million as the customer base increasingly chose alternative wireless services. Paging service subscribers declined by 32.3% in 2003 from 2,940 subscribers to 1,989 subscribers. The paging operation continues to decline as more areas are covered by wireless voice services, which have features that surpass those of paging technologies. The Company anticipates that its paging customer base will continue to decline in the future.\n\nWithin wireline revenues, the Telephone operation contributed $22.7 million, an increase of $0.3 million, or 1.2%. Telephone access revenues were $11.6 million, an increase of $0.7 million or 6.7%. During 2003, the Company recorded a $1.2 million reduction to access revenue, of which $0.7 million was related to 2002, resolving disputes with interexchange carriers on the rating of long distance calls transiting the Telephone switching network for termination on wireless networks.\n\nOriginating access revenue increased in 2003 due in part to a shift from interstate to intrastate traffic. On similar traffic volume in both years, the Company generated an additional $0.4 million due to a favorable rate differential of $0.03 per minute on the increase in the mix of intrastate traffic. The Company's increased access revenue was also a result of the benefit gained through terminating more minutes through the switch, which increased 36.0 million minutes or 35.7% over 2002. The rates for terminating traffic were similar in both years, although the percentage of terminating traffic to total traffic increased from 58% in 2002 to 65% in 2003.\n\nThe shift in originating traffic is the result of implementing software capable of identifying actual interstate and intrastate traffic specifically delivered to the wireline switch, where previously usage was allocated between interstate and intrastate traffic types by the interexchange carriers.\n\nThe following table shows the access traffic minutes of use for the two years of 2003 and 2002.\n\n(1) Traffic sensitive revenue has been normalized in the proforma column to remove the impact of the access billing dispute adjustment and the impact of the NECA settlement adjustments.\n\nSHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY\n\n46\n\n■", + "recall": 0.9903225806451613, + "true_md": "SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS\n\nsignificant industry competition for subscriber additions and subscriber retention. These discounts and rebates are primarily transacted in the form of instant rebates, providing a second phone free when a customer purchases one, or providing free phones if the subscriber signs up for a specific contract term and a specific service plan. PCS equipment sales were $2.1 million, an increase of $0.4 million or 26.6%. The equipment sales are net of $1.7 million of rebates and discounts given at the time of sale. Rebates and discounts continue to be required to meet\n\nIn accordance with Sprint’s requirements, the Company launched third generation (3G 1X) wireless service in August 2002. 3G 1X is the first of a four-stage migration path that will enable additional voice capacity and increased data speeds for subscribers. The network upgrades completed in 2002 were software changes, channel card upgrades, and some new network elements required for packet data. The Company’s base stations were outfitted with network card enhancements, thereby allowing the Company to provide 3G 1X service without wholesale change-outs of base stations. 3G 1X is backwards compatible with the existing 2G network, thereby allowing continued use of current customer handsets. The impact of 3G 1X-network enhancements on revenues became more pronounced in 2003, as use of new 3G services and features generated approximately $1.0 million for the year, compared to $0.2 million in 2002. The growth in 3G revenue is the result of more subscribers on 3G plans and the increase in popularity of camera phones during 2003.\n\nWireless revenues included tower leases of $2.6 million, an increase of $0.5 million or 24.8%. The increase was the result of other wireless carriers executing additional leases to use space on the Company’s portfolio of towers. Of the 88 towers and poles owned by the Company as of December 31, 2003, 52 towers have one or more external tenants, compared to 46 towers with external tenants at the end of 2002.\n\nWireless revenues from the Company’s paging operation were $0.2 million, a decrease of $0.1 million as the customer base increasingly chose alternative wireless services. Paging service subscribers declined by 32.3% in 2003 from 2,940 subscribers to 1,989 subscribers. The paging operation continues to decline as more areas are covered by wireless voice services, which have features that surpass those of paging technologies. The Company anticipates that its paging customer base will continue to decline in the future.\n\nWithin wireline revenues, the Telephone operation contributed $22.7 million, an increase of $0.3 million, or 1.2%. Telephone access revenues were $11.6 million, an increase of $0.7 million or 6.7%. During 2003, the Company recorded a $1.2 million reduction to access revenue, of which $0.7 million was related to 2002, resolving disputes with interexchange carriers on the rating of long distance calls transiting the Telephone switching network for termination on wireless networks.\n\nOriginating access revenue increased in 2003 due in part to a shift from interstate to intrastate traffic. On similar traffic volume in both years, the Company generated an additional $0.4 million due to a favorable rate differential of $0.03 per minute on the increase in the mix of intrastate traffic. The Company’s increased access revenue was also a result of the benefit gained through terminating more minutes through the switch, which increased 36.0 million minutes or 35.7% over 2002. The rates for terminating traffic were similar in both years, although the percentage of terminating traffic to total traffic increased from 58% in 2002 to 65% in 2003.\n\nThe shift in originating traffic is the result of implementing software capable of identifying actual interstate and intrastate traffic specifically delivered to the wireline switch, where previously usage was allocated between interstate and intrastate traffic types by the interexchange carriers.\n\nThe following table shows the access traffic minutes of use for the two years of 2003 and 2002.\n\n(1) Traffic sensitive revenue has been normalized in the proforma column to remove the impact of the access billing dispute adjustment and the impact of the NECA settlement adjustments.\n\nSHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY ■ 46" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9745482523750373, + "doc_id": "d714c81af1f81e7d756eb91598a3716859a3f8bd6201a7425a8b66fdc9b82ab0", + "edit_distance": 0.01567398119122257, + "f1_score": 0.9874326750448833, + "meteor": 0.9849428562494207, + "precision": 0.9892086330935251, + "pred_md": "## ENHANCING THE PORTFOLIO\n\nIn 2004, Santos continued its normal business of actively managing its portfolio through the divestment of non-core assets and the acquisition of assets that fit well with existing Santos assets or can add to the ability of the Company to meet its strategic goals.\n\nAs a result of this activity, Santos realised an after-tax profit of $47.4 million on oil and gas asset sales and will continue to high-grade its portfolio on an ongoing basis.\n\nSantos entered into an agreement with PT Medco during the first half of 2004 to acquire some of Novus Petroleum's Indonesian and Cooper Basin assets conditional on the success of PT Medco's takeover offer for Novus, which was ultimately successful.\n\nSpecifically, Santos announced in September 2004 that it had executed formal agreements to acquire an additional 4.75% of the South Australian Cooper Basin, 18% of the Brantas PSC and 9% of the Kakap PSC from Medco for US$110 million. On 31 December 2004, Santos paid Medco US$98 million for the majority of the assets, with payment for the remaining 2.75% of Kakap PSC expected to be made in the first quarter of 2005.\n\nThis acquisition was an important piece in the strategic puzzle to tie up access to follow-up potential from the successful exploration at Jeruk and to provide a production base for the newly established Indonesian core area.\n\nAlso during the first half of 2004, Santos divested its remaining 18.4% shareholding in Magellan\n\nPetroleum Australia Ltd, raising approximately $10.6 million.\n\nEarly in the second half of 2004, Santos concluded the sale of its non-core onshore Otway Basin interests to Origin Energy for $25.75 million. This sale resulted in an after-tax profit of $18 million that was booked in 2004.\n\nIn addition, an exploration joint venture was formed with ConocoPhillips in the NT/P61 block offshore Darwin, Northern Territory, to drill the Caldita well and provide Santos with access rights to a potential expansion of the Wickham Point LNG facility. This deal further enhances Santos' infrastructure strategy to leverage its position within vital infrastructure to improve shareholder value while reducing the risk profile of the wildcat exploration program.\n\nDuring the third quarter, Santos expanded its offshore Victorian gas interests to 50% in both the Patricia-Baleen and the Sole gas fields through the acquisition from Trinity Gas Resources of an additional 30% interest in the Patricia-Baleen gas field and associated processing facilities in eastern Victoria and an additional 15% interest in the Sole gas field.\n\nSantos earned its 30% additional equity in the Patricia-Baleen gas field by meeting Trinity's remaining share of drilling costs on the Baleen 4 well which was drilled successfully as a sidetrack well of Baleen 3. Santos will earn its 15% additional equity in the Sole gas field by meeting certain development costs on behalf of Trinity, if and when the Sole joint venture partners proceed to develop this gas resource.\n\nThe acquisition of these Victorian gas interests strengthens Santos' domestic gas and infrastructure strategy that was further enhanced by the OMV purchase announced early in 2005. Importantly, Santos is now the operator of the strategic Orbost gas processing facility.\n\nLate in the year, Santos sold its 18.02% share in the Carpentaria Gas Pipeline between Ballera and Mount Isa in Queensland to Australian Pipeline Trust for $59 million, resulting in a $21 million after-tax profit that was booked in the 2004 financial year.\n\n## BRANTAS PSC\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\n23", + "recall": 0.985663082437276, + "true_md": "## ENHANCING THE POR TFOLIO\n\nIn 2004, Santos continued its normal business of actively managing its portfolio through the divestment of non-core assets and the acquisition of assets that fit well with existing Santos assets or can add to the ability of the Company to meet its strategic goals.\n\nAs a result of this activity, Santos realised an after-tax profit of $47.4 million on oil and gas asset sales and will continue to high-grade its portfolio on an ongoing basis. \n\nSantos entered into an agreement with PT Medco during the first half of 2004 to acquire some of Novus Petroleum’s Indonesian and Cooper Basin assets conditional on the success of PT Medco’s takeover offer for Novus, which was ultimately successful.\n\nSpecifically, Santos announced in September 2004 that it had executed formal agreements to acquire an additional 4.75% of the South Australian Cooper Basin, 18% of the Brantas PSC and 9% of the Kakap PSC from Medco for US$110 million. On 31 December 2004, Santos paid Medco US$98 million for the majority of the assets, with payment for the remaining 2.75% of Kakap PSC expected to be made in the first quarter of 2005.\n\nThis acquisition was an important piece in the strategic puzzle to tie up access to follow-up potential from the successful exploration at Jeruk and to provide a production base for the newly established Indonesian core area.\n\nAlso during the first half of 2004, Santos divested its remaining 18.4% shareholding in Magellan\n\nPetroleum Australia Ltd, raising approximately $10.6 million.\n\nEarly in the second half of 2004, Santos concluded the sale of its non-core onshore Otway Basin interests to Origin Energy for $25.75 million. This sale resulted in an after-tax profit of $18 million that was booked in 2004.\n\nIn addition, an exploration joint venture was formed with ConocoPhillips in the NT/P61 block offshore Darwin, Northern Territory, to drill the Caldita well and provide Santos with access rights to a potential expansion of the Wickham Point LNG facility. This deal further enhances Santos’ infrastructure strategy to leverage its position within vital infrastructure to improve shareholder value while reducing the risk profile of the wildcat exploration program.\n\nDuring the third quarter, Santos expanded its offshore Victorian gas interests to 50% in both the Patricia-Baleen and the Sole gas fields through the acquisition from Trinity Gas Resources of an additional 30% interest in the Patricia-Baleen gas field and associated processing facilities in eastern Victoria and an additional 15% interest in the Sole gas field. \n\nSantos earned its 30% additional equity in the Patricia-Baleen gas field by meeting Trinity’s remaining share of drilling costs on the Baleen 4 well which was drilled successfully as a sidetrack well of Baleen 3. Santos will earn its 15% additional equity in the Sole gas field by meeting certain development costs on behalf of Trinity, if and when the Sole joint venture partners proceed to develop this gas resource.\n\nThe acquisition of these Victorian gas interests strengthens Santos’ domestic gas and infrastructure strategy that was further enhanced by the OMV purchase announced early in 2005. Importantly, Santos is now the operator of the strategic Orbost gas processing facility.\n\nLate in the year, Santos sold its 18.02% share in the Carpentaria Gas Pipeline between Ballera and Mount Isa in Queensland to Australian Pipeline Trust for $59 million, resulting in a $21 million after-tax profit that was booked in the 2004 financial year.\n\n## BRANTAS PSC\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\n23" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9579405709384335, + "doc_id": "450ac3f09ba93a0074d034dc05a90db0505c573faa5d4c8476b279d36a1d8122", + "edit_distance": 0.175, + "f1_score": 0.9909909909909909, + "meteor": 0.9764137496931019, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "OUR WORLD\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 58\n\nOUR WORLD\n\nNISSAN HAS A GLOBAL PRESENCE. BORN IN JAPAN, WE ARE PERFECTLY AT HOME IN THE U.S., THE UK, SPAIN, THAILAND, CHINA, EGYPT, BRAZIL AND WELL OVER 150 OTHER NATIONS WHERE NISSAN CARS AND THEIR COMPONENT PARTS ARE PRODUCED, SOLD AND DRIVEN. WITH NISSAN, DRIVING PLEASURE IS A SENSATION THAT KNOWS NO BORDERS. THIS IS THE NISSAN SHIFT\\_", + "recall": 0.9821428571428571, + "true_md": "## OUR WORLD\n\nNISSAN HAS A GLOBAL PRESENCE. BORN IN JAPAN, WE ARE PERFECTLY AT HOME IN THE U.S., THE UK, SPAIN, THAILAND, CHINA, EGYPT, BRAZIL AND WELL OVER 150 OTHER NATIONS WHERE NISSAN CARS AND THEIR COMPONENT PARTS ARE PRODUCED, SOLD AND DRIVEN. WITH NISSAN, DRIVING PLEASURE IS A SENSATION THAT KNOWS NO BORDERS. THIS IS THE NISSAN SHIFT\\_\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 58\n\nOUR WORLD" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5540455159310717, + "doc_id": "448244e1967a35f1c17dfa52f7e004a01fcfead964f8548db370704dd5f462a6", + "edit_distance": 0.3612167300380228, + "f1_score": 0.8, + "meteor": 0.8731699728628798, + "precision": 0.7058823529411765, + "pred_md": "## 2004 HIGHLIGHTS\n\n- · Significant progress on new field developments:\n- > Bayu-Undan and Minerva commenced production\n- > John Brookes and Casino sanctioned\n- > Mutineer-Exeter ahead of schedule and Bayu-Undan LNG construction on track\n- > Oyong and Maleo progressed to imminent sanction.\n- · Seven of sixteen exploration wells discovered hydrocarbons, including Jeruk.\n- · Reserve replacement exceeded production for the third successive year.\n- · Indonesia established as a core area.\n- · New country entry to Egypt.\n- · Improved safety performance and first Sustainability Review released.\n\n## 2005 AND BEYOND\n\n- · New production to commence:\n- > Mutineer-Exeter, John Brookes and Oyong in 2005\n- > Bayu-Undan LNG, Casino and Maleo in 2006.\n- · Continuing high impact exploration program.\n- · Follow-up on recent exploration success:\n- > Jeruk early production potential\n- > Hiu Aman, Hurricane and Martha appraisal.\n- · Continued commercialisation of static gas resources.\n\n## EARNINGS AND DIVIDENDS PER SHARE\n\ncents\n\n## PRODUCTION BY PRODUCT\n\nmmboe\n\nNET PROFIT AFTER TAX $ million\n\nNET PROFIT AFTER TAX $ million\n\n## FINANCIAL STRENGTH\n\n$\n\nmillion\n\n## OPERATING CASH FLOW\n\n$ million\n\n## SALES REVENUE\n\n$\n\nmillion\n\nRETURN ON ORDINARY EQUITY %\n\nRETURN ON ORDINARY EQUITY %\n\n## SAFETY PERFORMANCE\n\nTRCFR (per million hours worked)\n\n10\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\n3", + "recall": 0.9230769230769231, + "true_md": "## 2004 HIGHLIGHTS\n\n## 2005 AND BEYOND\n\n- • Significant progress on new field developments:\n\n- > Bayu-Undan and Minerva commenced production\n\n- > John Brookes and Casino sanctioned\n\n- > Mutineer-Exeter ahead of schedule and Bayu-Und an LNG construction on track\n\n- > Oyong and Maleo progressed to imminent sancti on.\n\n- • Seven of sixteen exploration wells discovered hydr ocarbons, including Jeruk.\n\n- • Reserve replacement exceeded production for th third successive year.\n\n- • Indonesia established as a core area.\n\n- • New country entry to Egypt.\n\n- • Improved safety performance and first Sustainability Review released. \n\n- • New production to commence:\n\n- > Mutineer-Exeter, John Brookes and Oyon in 2005\n\n- > Bayu-Undan LNG, Casino and Maleo in 2006.\n\n- • Continuing high impact exploration program.\n\n- • Follow-up on recent exploration success:\n\n- > Jeruk early production potential\n\n- > Hiu Aman, Hurricane and Martha appraisal.\n\n- • Continued commercialisation of static gas resources.\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\n3" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.17398450483453448, + "doc_id": "53aeb1101f2956a77d6228f60ea7b6b40a477760ae05b7cc8e6fe044ef1e1428", + "edit_distance": 0.7134831460674157, + "f1_score": 0.60431654676259, + "meteor": 0.3977791397042043, + "precision": 0.9333333333333333, + "pred_md": "## Hereford State Bank\n\n## Office\n\n212 E. Third Street Hereford, Texas 79045 Chartered 1947\n\n## Senior Officers\n\nCraig Smith\n\nChairman of the Board\n\nMike Mauldin\n\nPresident and Chief Executive Officer\n\nTerry Bromlow\n\nExecutive Vice President\n\nSteve Gilbert\n\nSenior Vice President and Cashier\n\nJeff Brown\n\nSenior Vice President\n\nMike Mauldin President and Chief Executive Officer\n\nMike Mauldin President and Chief Executive Officer\n\nDeaf Smith County Deposit Market Share\n\n%\n\n48\n\n17", + "recall": 0.44680851063829785, + "true_md": "## Hereford S tate B ank\n\n## Directors\n\n## Office 212 E. Third Street\n\n## Senior Officers\n\nCraig Smith Chairman of the Board\n\nJoe Artho Retired General Manager, Hereford Grain Corp.\n\nTerry Bromlow Executive Vice President\n\nF. Scott Dueser First Financial Bankshares, Inc.\n\nTerry Langehennig Cowsert, Line and Langehennig, Attorneys\n\nSteve Lewis, D.V.M. Manager and Senior Partner, Hereford Veterinary Clinic\n\nMike Mauldin President and Chief Executive Officer\n\nJeff Brown Senior Vice President\n\nSteve Gilbert Senior Vice President and Cashier\n\nTerry Bromlow Executive Vice President\n\nMike Mauldin President and Chief Executive Officer\n\nCraig Smith Chairman of the Board\n\nOffice 212 E. Third Street Hereford,Texas 79045 Chartered 1947 \n\nGarth Merrick President and Chief Executive Officer, Merrick Petfoods, Inc.\n\nAllen Parson Restaurateur and Investments\n\nJerry Stevens Vice President and General Manager, Stevens 5-Star Car and Truck Center\n\nJohnny Trotter Ranching, Farming and Cattle Feeding\n\nRoger Williams Farming\n\nMike Mauldin President and Chief Executive Officer\n\n4 8 % Deaf Smith County Deposit Market Share\n\n17" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8490490609855706, + "doc_id": "0251dc23dd861cfc704cf90d99e4d1a7682ca4b55f8178f23b0f0ae747a14ceb", + "edit_distance": 0.13513513513513514, + "f1_score": 0.96875, + "meteor": 0.9693964798131465, + "precision": 0.96875, + "pred_md": "## CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF SHAREHOLDERS' EQUITY\n\nNissan Motor Co., Ltd. and Consolidated Subsidiaries Fiscal years 2004, 2003 and 2002\n\nSee notes to consolidated financial statements.\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\n75\n\nFINANCIAL SECTION", + "recall": 0.96875, + "true_md": "## CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF SHAREHOLDERS’ EQUITY\n\nNissan Motor Co., Ltd. and Consolidated Subsidiaries Fiscal years 2004, 2003 and 2002\n\nFINANCIAL SECTION\n\nSee notes to consolidated financial statements.\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 75" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9579405709384335, + "doc_id": "f59f736e29b9cd91ac724c31514ba149045535329504413ec1a2d368b2f3a4c6", + "edit_distance": 0.024096385542168676, + "f1_score": 0.984375, + "meteor": 0.9782535064835616, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO AND FORMING PART OF THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR THE FINANCIAL YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2000\n\n* Pursuant to ASIC Class Order 98/1418, relief has been granted to these wholly owned controlled entities from the Corporations Law requirements for preparation, audit and lodgement of the financial report. As a condition of the Class Order, Mermaid Marine Australia Limited and the controlled entities entered into a Deed of Cross Guarantee on 24 June 1999.", + "recall": 0.9692307692307692, + "true_md": "## NOTES TO AND FORMING PART OF THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR THE FINANCIAL YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2000\n\n- * Pursuant to ASIC Class Order 98/1418, relief has been granted to these wholly owned controlled entities from the Corporations Law requirements for preparation, audit and lodgement of the financial report. As a condition of the Class Order, Mermaid Marine Australia Limited and the controlled entities entered into a Deed of Cross Guarantee on 24 June 1999.\n\n46" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9292277264737975, + "doc_id": "ed7c158a14760304ce9b0329be67d455fad0c71817ac7dc6ac5d9ecc6810e0d0", + "edit_distance": 0.46060606060606063, + "f1_score": 0.944693572496263, + "meteor": 0.898514443342326, + "precision": 0.9546827794561934, + "pred_md": "Sales & Marketing\n\nSales & Marketing\n\nYUSUKE SEKIGUCHI Vice President\n\nYUSUKE SEKIGUCHI Vice President\n\n'In 2003, I was the 'pilot'-essentially the project leader-of a cross-functional team that redefined the traditional sales function as a marketing function. Now I cover car sales as well as traditional marketing activities such as advertising and sales promotion. This is part of our effort to address one of the most competitive auto markets in the world-Japan.\n\nOur dealers conduct sales activities in the marketplace, and our role is to ensure that what they do reflects Nissan's plans. We also gather customer feedback from the showroom to see how we can improve processes. Direct communication through online outlets is another new way of reaching out to customers.\n\nAlthough the total market in Japan was down in 2004, we managed to pick up market share. The two halves of the year were completely different, however. The first half was the 'dry season'-where we didn't have any new model introduction for over 12 months. We underestimated the impact that would have on our business, and the dealers had a tough time because of it. Then we organized the SHIFT\\_ event in the second half of the year, and for the first time ever introduced six new models simultaneously. This completely changed the playing field. While it was a challenge for the dealers to launch six models in five months, it had a significant and positive impact.\n\nJapan's population peaks in 2006, and automobile demand is expected to decline thereafter. With this in mind,\n\nwe've been focusing intensively for the past three years on building customer relationships. We realize we must increase and enrich our contact points with customers to raise our market presence. To this end, we decided to retail the full lineup through both our Red and Blue dealer channels, which formerly offered different products.\n\nOur next task is to improve the quality of the sales and service process. We have already upgraded the management of our brand identity through various methods. For example, individual dealers used to handle newspaper insert production. We moved all insert production to headquarters, which not only reduced costs but also created a more powerful, uniform communication to customers. Today, 15 percent of our showroom traffic is generated from these inserts, an increase from 6 percent prior to centralization.\n\nThe introduction of the Tiida provided an interesting test case in interactive communications for us. Not long before we launched the car, blogging became very popular in Japan, as it has been elsewhere. There are many carrelated blogs where people share information about their favorite cars. As an experiment, we started a blog about the Tiida and encouraged people to comment on the car. This was the first proactive usage of automotive blog in Japan and brought a tremendous response-it actually became the market leader in terms of unique visits. The blog proved to be an amazingly effective way to generate word-of-mouth and communication between Nissan and its customers, and we will continue to utilize this channel in various ways.\n\nAnother positive change in our division is a more cross-functional way of doing business. We communicate frequently with upstream functions such as Design, Product Planning and Communication through V-up and cross-functional activities. This is an essential exchange, because when Nissan creates a new product or service, we are responsible for communicating the unique value we provide to the customer through 'SHIFT\\_ points.' We are demand creators, and that is how we create value for the company.'\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\n41\n\nOUR WORK", + "recall": 0.9349112426035503, + "true_md": "## Sales & Marketing\n\nYUSUKE SEKIGUCHI Vice President\n\n“In 2003, I was the “pilot”—essentially the project leader—of a cross-functional team that redefined the traditional sales function as a marketing function. Now I cover car sales as well as traditional marketing activities such as advertising and sales promotion. This is part of our effort to address one of the most competitive auto markets in the world—Japan.\n\nOur dealers conduct sales activities in the marketplace, and our role is to ensure that what they do reflects Nissan’s plans. We also gather customer feedback from the showroom to see how we can improve processes. Direct communication through online outlets is another new way of reaching out to customers.\n\nAlthough the total market in Japan was down in 2004, we managed to pick up market share. The two halves of the year were completely different, however. The first half was the ‘dry season’—where we didn’t have any new model introduction for over 12 months. We underestimated the impact that would have on our business, and the dealers had a tough time because of it. Then we organized the SHIFT\\_ event in the second half of the year, and for the first time ever introduced six new models simultaneously. This completely changed the playing field. While it was a challenge for the dealers to launch six models in five months, it had a significant and positive impact.\n\nJapan’s population peaks in 2006, and automobile demand is expected to decline thereafter. With this in mind,\n\nAnother positive change in our division is a more cross-functional way of doing business. We communicate frequently with upstream functions such as Design, Product Planning and Communication through V-up and cross-functional activities. This is an essential exchange, because when Nissan creates a new product or service, we are responsible for communicating the unique value we provide to the customer through ‘SHIFT\\_ points.’ We are demand creators, and that is how we create value for the company.”\n\nThe introduction of the Tiida provided an interesting test case in interactive communications for us. Not long before we launched the car, blogging became very popular in Japan, as it has been elsewhere. There are many car- related blogs where people share information about their favorite cars. As an experiment, we started a blog about the Tiida and encouraged people to comment on the car. This was the first proactive usage of automotive blog in Japan and brought a tremendous response—it actually became the market leader in terms of unique visits. The blog proved to be an amazingly effective way to generate word-of-mouth and communication between Nissan and its customers, and we will continue to utilize this channel in various ways.\n\nOur next task is to improve the quality of the sales and service process. We have already upgraded the management of our brand identity through various methods. For example, individual dealers used to handle newspaper insert production. We moved all insert production to headquarters, which not only reduced costs but also created a more powerful, uniform communication to customers. Today, 15 percent of our showroom traffic is generated from these inserts, an increase from 6 percent prior to centralization. \n\nwe’ve been focusing intensively for the past three years on building customer relationships. We realize we must increase and enrich our contact points with customers to raise our market presence. To this end, we decided to retail the full lineup through both our Red and Blue dealer channels, which formerly offered different products. \n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 41\n\nOUR WORK" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8747174755744944, + "doc_id": "1b4eb3c0caa84af9bbff28f09347ef751be6fb62f436a443430e6d347a88b5fd", + "edit_distance": 0.5735849056603773, + "f1_score": 0.9637681159420289, + "meteor": 0.9451329639033456, + "precision": 0.9568345323741008, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO AND FORMING PART OF THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR THE FINANCIAL YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2000\n\n## 29. FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS (continued)\n\n## (c) Net fair values\n\nThe aggregrate net fair values of financial assets and liabilities are identical to the carrying amount in the balance sheet.\n\nThe following methods and assumptions are used to determine the net fair values of financial assets and liabilities:\n\n## Cash and cash equivalents\n\nThe carrying amount approximates fair value because of their short term to maturity.\n\n## Trade debtors, other debtors and loans\n\nThe carrying amount approximates fair value.\n\n## Investments\n\nFor investments where there is no quoted market price, a reasonable estimate of the fair value is calculated based on the underlying net asset base of the investment.\n\n## Trade creditors, other creditors and accruals\n\nThe carrying amount approximates fair value.\n\n## (d) Credit risk exposures\n\nThe economic entity's maximum exposure to credit risk at balance date in relation to each class of recognised financial assets is the carrying amount of those assets as indicated in the balance sheet.\n\nCompany\n\n2000\n\n1999\n\n$\n\n$\n\n18,447,843\n\n15,578,523\n\n## 30. CONTINGENT LIABILITIES\n\nAs detailed in Note 11, the company has entered into a deed of cross-guarantee with certain whollyowned controlled entities. The total liabilities of these wholly-owned controlled entities (excluding amounts owed to the parent entity) for which the Company is potentially liable are:\n\n61", + "recall": 0.9708029197080292, + "true_md": "## 29. FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS (continued)\n\n## (c) Net fair values\n\n## (d) Credit risk exposures\n\n## 30. CONTINGENT LIABILITIES\n\nNOTES TO AND FORMING PART OF THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR THE FINANCIAL YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 2000\n\n## Investments\n\n## Cash and cash equivalents\n\n## Trade debtors, other debtors and loans\n\n## Trade creditors, other creditors and accruals\n\nThe carrying amount approximates fair value.\n\nFor investments where there is no quoted market price, a reasonable estimate of the fair value is calculated based on the underlying net asset base of the investment.\n\nThe carrying amount approximates fair value.\n\nThe carrying amount approximates fair value because of their short term to maturity.\n\nThe following methods and assumptions are used to determine the net fair values of financial assets and liabilities:\n\nThe aggregrate net fair values of financial assets and liabilities are identical to the carrying amount in the balance sheet.\n\nThe economic entity’s maximum exposure to credit risk at balance date in relation to each class of recognised financial assets is the carrying amount of those assets as indicated in the balance sheet.\n\nAs detailed in Note 11, the company has entered into a deed of cross-guarantee with certain wholly- owned controlled entities. The total liabilities of these wholly-owned controlled entities (excluding amounts owed to the parent entity) for which the Company is potentially liable are:\n\n61" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "048a570b2e415b653a62313ef82504adfda480c99f69826fcbeb67758ea3c7a4", + "edit_distance": 0.8125, + "f1_score": 0.2954545454545454, + "meteor": 0.20405452317022196, + "precision": 0.23636363636363636, + "pred_md": "Ó\n\n-glyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman> glyph<c=31,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman> glyph<c=1,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>‡-glyph<c=10,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>glyph<c=22,font=/AAAAAD+HelveticaNeue-Roman>\n\n\"ÕÌÜÕÀVˆ˜}ʈÃÊLiVœ“ˆ˜}Ê ˆ˜VÀi>Ș}ÞʘiViÃÃ>ÀÞÊvœÀÊ \"Àˆ}ˆ˜>Êglyph<c=13,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium>µÕˆ«“i˜ÌÊglyph<c=31,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium>>˜Õv>VÌÕÀiÀÃÊ ­\"glyph<c=13,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium>glyph<c=31,font=/AAAAAC+HelveticaNeue-Medium>îʈ˜Ê̅iˆÀʵÕiÃÌÊ̜ÊLœœÃÌÊ ÊiÌÕÀ˜Êœ˜ÊV>«ˆÌ>Ê>˜'ÊvœVÕÃʜ˜Ê À VœÀiÊÊ Vœ“Ê «iÌi˜VˆiÃÊÃÕV…Ê>ÃÊ «Àœ'ÕVÌÊÊ 'iÛiœ«“i˜Ì]ʓ>ÀŽï˜}Ê >˜'ÊLÀ>˜'ˆ˜}°", + "recall": 0.3939393939393939, + "true_md": "Ó ‡ -\n\n\" Õ Ì Ã œ Õ À V ˆ ˜ } Ê ˆ Ã Ê L i V œ “ ˆ ˜ } Ê ˆ ˜ V À i > à ˆ ˜ }  Þ Ê ˜ i V à à > À Þ Ê v œ À Ê \" À ˆ } ˆ ˜ >  Ê µ Õ ˆ « “ i ˜ Ì Ê > ˜ Õ v > V Ì Õ À i À Ã Ê ­ \" à ® Ê ˆ ˜ Ê Ì … i ˆ À Ê µ Õ i Ã Ì Ê Ì œ Ê L œ œ Ã Ì Ê Ê À i Ì Õ À ˜ Ê œ ˜ Ê V > « ˆ Ì >  Ê > ˜ ` Ê v œ V Õ Ã Ê œ ˜ Ê V œ À i Ê Ê V œ “ Ê « i Ì i ˜ V ˆ i Ã Ê Ã Õ V … Ê > Ã Ê « À œ ` Õ V Ì Ê Ê ` i Û i  œ « “ i ˜ Ì ] Ê “ > À Ž i Ì ˆ ˜ } Ê > ˜ ` Ê L À > ˜ ` ˆ ˜ } °" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "10c1b4d06ebc124d0c973b2a5ccb57cf2421776185e9751e1b1411c0a4f0a879", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999142661179699, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## We focus on the fundamentals of growth.\n\nProfitability . Productivity. Strategic management.\n\n3", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## We focus on the fundamentals of growth.\n\nProfitability. Productivity. Strategic management.\n\n3" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8740558399810069, + "doc_id": "c79ad848a72c80500c642b2918c79459ea265316367c3c814f3ccd9cc362adf7", + "edit_distance": 0.8361266294227188, + "f1_score": 0.934453781512605, + "meteor": 0.7422309854589799, + "precision": 0.9586206896551724, + "pred_md": "OUR WORK\n\n## Aftersales\n\nJUNICHI ENDO Senior Vice President\n\nJUNICHI ENDO Senior Vice President\n\n'Aftersales was established in 2002 because Nissan wanted to expand the scope of what was once the Parts Division. Our primary objective is to extend the value chain. We are trying to engage new-car owners for a longer time by offering an extensive range of attractive aftersales products. These products include parts, service contracts, conversion-both accessories and customization-and new service methods such as quick inspection and quick body repair. Global Aftersales covers the downstream business in cooperation with other marketing and sales divisions.\n\nThis has become an increasingly global function as we deploy and monitor various programs throughout the world. For example, Project SX, the new Nissan service standard, should drastically improve dealer service operations. This program educates dealers on how to be more customeroriented by providing insights into productivity, marketing\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\nMotorsports\n\nMotorsports is a dynamic form of marketing that offers a natural forum for presenting the Nissan brand. On the track, Nissan's technologies are pushed to the limit-and sometimes beyondunder grueling conditions.\n\nNissan participates in a wide range of motorsports, including the Super GT Series.\n\nand management. To increase service productivity and efficiency, we send former factory foremen and engineers to various service workshops to analyze service staff performance. This will help cut repair times and improve customer satisfaction. The Nissan Sales and Service Way is also a tool used to increase the quality of service provided by all dealers. Its successful implementation has enhanced customer satisfaction worldwide.\n\nThe conversion business in Japan looks very promising. We discovered that 50 percent of car owners want to customize their vehicles, and 28 percent already had. Such a high penetration rate illustrates how much people want a car that's different from everyone else's. The Rider seriescustomized versions of Nissan cars developed by our wholly owned subsidiary Autech-are very popular, especially among younger Japanese. The series exemplifies the major potential of the conversion business.\n\nGlobal Aftersales is a young division, but we've performed well from the start, meeting our global commitments every year during NISSAN 180 and contributing to the Company's growth. We have expanded nearly 20 percent year-on-year between 2001 and 2004, and intend to continue this momentum during NISSAN Value-Up. We will optimize our cost structure by sourcing parts from the leading competitive countries. We are striving to develop an even tighter relationship with our customers and to provide them with new services throughout the ownership cycle. I believe this broader range of aftersales services will provide sustainable growth in Nissan's revenues and profit.'\n\nThis is the most popular racing series in Japan, and is increasingly broadcast around the world. Motorsports will remain an important marketing outlet that enhances both Nissan's brand presence and our engineering capabilities.", + "recall": 0.9114754098360656, + "true_md": "JUNICHI ENDO Senior Vice President\n\nand management. To increase service productivity and efficiency, we send former factory foremen and engineers to various service workshops to analyze service staff performance. This will help cut repair times and improve customer satisfaction. The Nissan Sales and Service Way is also a tool used to increase the quality of service provided by all dealers. Its successful implementation has enhanced customer satisfaction worldwide.\n\nThe conversion business in Japan looks very promising. We discovered that 50 percent of car owners want to customize their vehicles, and 28 percent already had. Such a high penetration rate illustrates how much people want a car that’s different from everyone else’s. The Rider series— customized versions of Nissan cars developed by our wholly owned subsidiary Autech—are very popular, especially among younger Japanese. The series exemplifies the major potential of the conversion business.\n\nGlobal Aftersales is a young division, but we’ve performed well from the start, meeting our global commitments every year during NISSAN 180 and contributing to the Company’s growth. We have expanded nearly 20 percent year-on-year between 2001 and 2004, and intend to continue this momentum during NISSAN Value-Up. We will optimize our cost structure by sourcing parts from the leading competitive countries. We are striving to develop an even tighter relationship with our customers and to provide them with new services throughout the ownership cycle. I believe this broader range of aftersales services will provide sustainable growth in Nissan’s revenues and profit.”\n\n“Aftersales was established in 2002 because Nissan wanted to expand the scope of what was once the Parts Division. Our primary objective is to extend the value chain. We are trying to engage new-car owners for a longer time by offering an extensive range of attractive aftersales products. These products include parts, service contracts, conversion—both accessories and customization—and new service methods such as quick inspection and quick body repair. Global Aftersales covers the downstream business in cooperation with other marketing and sales divisions.\n\nThis has become an increasingly global function as we deploy and monitor various programs throughout the world. For example, Project SX, the new Nissan service standard, should drastically improve dealer service operations. This program educates dealers on how to be more customer- oriented by providing insights into productivity, marketing\n\n## M Mo ot MOTORSPORTS\n\not to or rs sp po or rt ts s Motorsports is a dynamic form of marketing that offers a natural forum for presenting the Nissan brand. On the track, Nissan’s technologies are pushed to the limit—and sometimes beyond— under grueling conditions.\n\nNissan participates in a wide range of motorsports, including the Super GT Series. \n\nThis is the most popular racing series in Japan, and is increasingly broadcast around the world. Motorsports will remain an important marketing outlet that enhances both Nissan’s brand presence and our engineering capabilities.\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 42\n\nOUR WORK\n\n## Aftersales" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.15679243490509343, + "doc_id": "63948c9defbb262d59fd6c4ca11196b66caa9e12118d9d09169ecfed558446d1", + "edit_distance": 0.8253968253968254, + "f1_score": 0.46153846153846156, + "meteor": 0.49268404206675803, + "precision": 0.375, + "pred_md": "C O N S O L I D A T E D S T A T E M E N T O F C H A N G E S I N S T O C K H O L D E R S ' E Q U I T Y\n\nThe accompanying notes are an integral part of this statement.\n\n11", + "recall": 0.6, + "true_md": "11\n\nCONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF CHANGES IN STOCKHOLDERS’ EQUITY\n\nThe accompanying notes are an integral part of this statement." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "1372929d21ee42b32ce69d1d11ee299e723cd5d2bb5b6acce380b76434f57c39", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9814814814814815, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "SHENTEL SERVICE AREAS", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "SHENTEL SERVICE AREAS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9031731384225766, + "doc_id": "f713ad88040f6e6fe2a330ccadceabdc23853c2f4f3d032e5635ef8de924cb8a", + "edit_distance": 0.7647058823529411, + "f1_score": 0.960591133004926, + "meteor": 0.8062722446887888, + "precision": 0.9653465346534653, + "pred_md": "## To Our Shareholders\n\nIn our report to you last year, we noted that Euronet's success has been built in large part on the question 'Would you like another transaction?' The answer from our clients and their customers was a resounding 'Yes!'\n\nTo reflect the rapid changes taking place in financial transactions worldwide, even that question has evolved. So in 2000, we also began asking 'How would you like your next transaction?'\n\nIn 2000, Euronet Worldwide focused on providing ways people can access their financial accounts and transactions through various electronic touchpoints. New secure transaction types and touchpoints-ATMs, point-of-sale (POS) devices, the Internet and mobile phones-continued to fuel transaction growth every month. In 2000, we processed a record 52.7 million billable transactions, a 60% increase over 1999, and in December 2000, our transaction levels exceeded 5 million per month and continue to accelerate.\n\nTaken together, our transaction growth and expanding number of consumer touchpoints translated into an accelerating and recurring revenue stream, which greatly improved our bottom line. Our 2000 revenue of $52.7 million represented a 27% increase over the company's 1999 revenue of $41.5 million. Euronet's 2000 EBITDA also improved $2.4 million, or 14.5%, over 1999.\n\nThis year we continued to focus on our core business of ATM driving and transaction processing, and we pursued new transactions through our mobile and Internet banking solutions. We also implemented our bill payment initiative, starting with electronic payments for prepaid mobile airtime. We are pleased to report that in 2000 our Network Services business turned EBITDA positive and posted revenue of $36.9 million, an increase of 39% over 1999 revenue.\n\nAdditional milestones were reached through several new strategic partnerships we announced late in the year. Gemplus, Sila Communications and Aether Systems chose Euronet mobile products to supplement their product offerings, proving the strength of Euronet's mobile products. Teaming up with these partners will further increase the sales penetration of our suite of mobile payment solutions around the world.\n\n1", + "recall": 0.9558823529411765, + "true_md": "## To Our Shareholders\n\nIn 2000, Euronet Worldwide focused on providing ways people can access their financial accounts and transactions through various electronic touchpoints. New secure transaction types and touchpoints—ATMs, point-of-sale (POS) devices, the Internet and mobile phones—continued to fuel transaction growth every month. In 2000, we processed a record 52.7 million billable transactions, a 60% increase over 1999, and in December 2000, our transaction levels exceeded 5 million per month and continue to accelerate.\n\nTaken together, our transaction growth and expanding number of consumer touchpoints translated into an accelerating and recurring revenue stream, which greatly improved our bottom line. Our 2000 revenue of $52.7 million represented a 27% increase over the company’s 1999 revenue of $41.5 million. Euronet’s 2000 EBITDA also improved $2.4 million, or 14.5%, over 1999. \n\nAdditional milestones were reached through several new strategic partnerships we announced late in the year. Gemplus, Sila Communications and Aether Systems chose Euronet mobile products to supplement their product offerings, proving the strength of Euronet’s mobile products. Teaming up with these partners will further increase the sales penetration of our suite of mobile payment solutions around the world.\n\n1\n\n## In our report to you last year, we noted that Euronet’s success has been built in large part on the question “Would you like another transaction?” The answer from our clients and their customers was a resounding “Yes!”\n\n## To reflect the rapid changes taking place in financial transactions worldwide, even that question has evolved. So in 2000, we also began asking “How would you like your next transaction?”\n\nThis year we continued to focus on our core business of ATM driving and transaction processing, and we pursued new transactions through our mobile and Internet banking solutions. We also implemented our bill payment initiative, starting with electronic payments for prepaid mobile airtime. We are pleased to report that in 2000 our Network Services business turned EBITDA positive and posted revenue of $36.9 million, an increase of 39% over 1999 revenue." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.918292969054067, + "doc_id": "4a023e17449e7843214be37e9406dc5f782abf60af0e92822575fcf807e07242", + "edit_distance": 0.49256505576208176, + "f1_score": 0.9644859813084111, + "meteor": 0.9098052243413112, + "precision": 0.9662921348314607, + "pred_md": "outside the company: the U.S. economy, interest rates, oil prices and competitive actions. Incentives and aggressive discounting are both disturbing the marketplace. We've reached a level where this is actually confusing customers about the amount of discount that is available in the market. These are all things that we can't directly control.\n\nLooking longer term over the period of NISSAN ValueUp, I think it's fair to say that we will return to double-digit growth, because we're going to have some terrific new products that will allow us to enter new segments. The product will drive growth, but it would be a mistake to discount the increasing strength of brand recognition. We've spent roughly a billion dollars in upgrading Nissan dealer facilities up to 2004. This will continue to some degree in 2005 and 2006, while we've begun the same process for Infiniti. People see exciting change happening at Nissan and Infiniti.\n\nOver the long term, one minor risk for us is that we can no longer catch people by surprise. That was exciting, but that period is gone, which represents a challenge for us. As we come off a year with more than 20 percent growth, the media often ask me why we're not going to be in double digits again this year, as if that were the normal thing for us. The more successful you get, the harder it is to deliver\n\nALTIMA\n\nALTIMA\n\nQUEST\n\nINFINITI M45\n\nsome of the eye-popping numbers that we have in the past. The reality is, of course, that we're even stronger, but we must keep up the momentum.\n\nThe U.S. market will continue to be strong, but the competition will be even tougher. There may be some separation between those companies that approach the market the right way, and those that are struggling to find their place. I consider Nissan very definitely one of the former. We have a direction and a strategy, and we have confidence that we can successfully implement the strategy. If we stay focused, we will succeed.\n\nIt's important that we do. The North American market, and the U.S. in particular, is generally a large contributor to any foreign manufacturer's operations. It's a big and very dynamic market, and that spells good news for Nissan. Our growth, and our strength, is in the very areas where the U.S. market is growing. We're higher than average in the Sunbelt states, whose growth in the coming years will simply magnify ours. We score very well among young people, a group that is becoming increasingly important. We also rate highly among the rapidly growing Hispanic population and the African-American population. Everything is lining up for us-Nissan has the opportunity to pull away from other players.'\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\n63\n\nOUR WORLD", + "recall": 0.9626865671641791, + "true_md": "outside the company: the U.S. economy, interest rates, oil prices and competitive actions. Incentives and aggressive discounting are both disturbing the marketplace. We’ve reached a level where this is actually confusing customers about the amount of discount that is available in the market. These are all things that we can’t directly control.\n\nLooking longer term over the period of NISSAN Value- Up, I think it’s fair to say that we will return to double-digit growth, because we’re going to have some terrific new products that will allow us to enter new segments. The product will drive growth, but it would be a mistake to discount the increasing strength of brand recognition. We’ve spent roughly a billion dollars in upgrading Nissan dealer facilities up to 2004. This will continue to some degree in 2005 and 2006, while we’ve begun the same process for Infiniti. People see exciting change happening at Nissan and Infiniti. \n\nOver the long term, one minor risk for us is that we can no longer catch people by surprise. That was exciting, but that period is gone, which represents a challenge for us. As we come off a year with more than 20 percent growth, the media often ask me why we’re not going to be in double digits again this year, as if that were the normal thing for us. The more successful you get, the harder it is to deliver\n\nIt’s important that we do. The North American market, and the U.S. in particular, is generally a large contributor to any foreign manufacturer’s operations. It’s a big and very dynamic market, and that spells good news for Nissan. Our growth, and our strength, is in the very areas where the U.S. market is growing. We’re higher than average in the Sunbelt states, whose growth in the coming years will simply magnify ours. We score very well among young people, a group that is becoming increasingly important. We also rate highly among the rapidly growing Hispanic population and the African-American population. Everything is lining up for us—Nissan has the opportunity to pull away from other players.” \n\nsome of the eye-popping numbers that we have in the past. The reality is, of course, that we’re even stronger, but we must keep up the momentum.\n\nThe U.S. market will continue to be strong, but the competition will be even tougher. There may be some separation between those companies that approach the market the right way, and those that are struggling to find their place. I consider Nissan very definitely one of the former. We have a direction and a strategy, and we have confidence that we can successfully implement the strategy. If we stay focused, we will succeed.\n\nOUR WORLD\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 63\n\nALTIMA\n\nQUEST\n\nINFINITI M45" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.902683094269127, + "doc_id": "655a3a97e422508fe0bfba2e34d3c1399ac2a73b06b24cd4aeb42a2079c5a4ed", + "edit_distance": 0.07228915662650602, + "f1_score": 0.9656862745098039, + "meteor": 0.9511284680189548, + "precision": 0.9656862745098039, + "pred_md": "## SE L E C E D T CO N S O L ID AT E D FI N A N C IA L DATA\n\nThe summary consolidated financial data set forth below have been derived from, and are qualified by re f e rence to, the audited consolidated financial statements of the Company and the notes thereto, pre p a red in conformity with generally accepted accounting principles as applied in the United States ('U.S. GAAP'), which have been audited by KPMG Polska Sp. z o.o., independent public accountants. The Company believes that the period-to-period comparisons of its financial results are not necessarily meaningful due to its significant acquisitions in December 1998 and J a n u y 1999, and should not be relied upon as an indication of future perf o rmance. The following information should be read in conjunction ar with 'Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations' included herein.\n\n## Consolidated Statements of Operations Data:\n\nBrooklyn Bridge, New York\n\nBrooklyn Bridge, New York\n\n## B R I D G E O F D R E A M S\n\nIf you can dream it, build it.\n\nJust as bridges shape the skylines of the world's cities, they also still deeply influence our cultures, our commerce and our lives. Today, consumers are demanding greater convenience, personalized transactions, up-to-the-minute information and privacy as never before through the Internet, wireless access and other exciting new technologies.\n\nNew types of bridges - electronic bridges are emerging to link consumers with these services in innovative ways that redefine the financial transactions process. Now as we face a world constantly on the go, our mission is to create and implement flexible, secure solutions to connect people with their personal information.\n\n1 3", + "recall": 0.9656862745098039, + "true_md": "## SE L E C T E D CO N S O L I D AT E D FI N A N C I A L DATA\n\nThe summary consolidated financial data set forth below have been derived from, and are qualified by re f e rence to, the audited consolidated financial statements of the Company and the notes thereto, pre p a red in conformity with generally accepted accounting principles as applied in the United States (“U.S. GAAP”), which have been audited by KPMG Polska Sp. z o.o., independent public accountants. The Company believes that the period-to-period comparisons of its financial results are not necessarily meaningful due to its significant acquisitions in December 1998 and J a n u a ry 1999, and should not be relied upon as an indication of future perf o rmance. The following information should be read in conjunction with “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” included herein. \n\n## Consolidated Statements of Operations Data:\n\nBrooklyn Bridge, New York\n\n## B R I D G E O F D R E A M S\n\nIf you can dream it, build it. \n\nJust as bridges shape the skylines of the world‘s cities, they also still deeply influence our cultures, our commerce and our lives. Today, consumers are demanding greater convenience, personalized transactions, up-to-the-minute information and privacy as never before through the Internet, wireless access and other exciting new technologies.\n\nNew types of bridges - electronic bridges - are emerging to link consumers with these services in innovative ways that redefine the financial transactions process. Now as we face a world constantly on the go, our mission is to create and implement flexible, secure solutions to connect people with their personal information.\n\n1 3" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9531331418587754, + "doc_id": "c288a99e96ee77f99cce0190dcd8fca95dab53117d781f64643b769114eb094d", + "edit_distance": 0.03205128205128205, + "f1_score": 0.98, + "meteor": 0.9714697868404893, + "precision": 0.98, + "pred_md": "## (17) Valuation and Qualifying Accounts\n\n## (18) Stock Plans\n\nThe Company has established a share compensation plan that provides certain employees options to purchase shares of its common stock. The options vest over a period of five years from the date of grant. Options are exercisable during the term of employment or consulting a rrangements with the Company and its subsidiaries. At December 31, 2000, the Company has authorized options for the purchase of 6,463,991 shares of common shares, of which 4,584,508 have been awarded to employees and 2,441,928 remain unexercised.\n\nIn accordance with a shareholders' agreement dated Febru a ry 15, 1996 and amended on October 14, 1996, Euronet re s e rved 2,850,925 common shares for the purpose of awarding common shares ('milestone awards') to certain investors and options to acquire common share s ('milestone options') to the founders, management and key employees. The Company granted 800,520 milestone awards at an exerc i s e price of $0.02 per share and 2,050,405 milestone options at an exercise price of $2.14 per share.\n\nUpon the initial public offering of the Company on March 6, 1997, all milestone awards and milestone options granted under the milestone a rrangement (with the exception of 49,819 options to certain key employees which vested equally over the two years following the initial public offering) vested and all shares became immediately issuable to beneficiaries of milestone awards and options. At that time, 800,520 milestone awards and 232,078 milestone options were exercised. As of December 31, 2000 1,428,303 milestone options remain unexercised.\n\nS h e option activity during the periods indicated is as follows: ar\n\n3 9", + "recall": 0.98, + "true_md": "## (17) Valuation and Qualifying Accounts\n\n## (18) Stock Plans\n\nThe Company has established a share compensation plan that provides certain employees options to purchase shares of its common stock. The options vest over a period of five years from the date of grant. Options are exercisable during the term of employment or consulting a rrangements with the Company and its subsidiaries. At December 31, 2000, the Company has authorized options for the purchase of 6,463,991 shares of common shares, of which 4,584,508 have been awarded to employees and 2,441,928 remain unexercised. \n\nIn accordance with a shareholders’ agreement dated Febru a ry 15, 1996 and amended on October 14, 1996, Euronet re s e rved 2,850,925 common shares for the purpose of awarding common shares (“milestone awards”) to certain investors and options to acquire common share s (“milestone options”) to the founders, management and key employees. The Company granted 800,520 milestone awards at an exerc i s e price of $0.02 per share and 2,050,405 milestone options at an exercise price of $2.14 per share. \n\nUpon the initial public offering of the Company on March 6, 1997, all milestone awards and milestone options granted under the milestone a rrangement (with the exception of 49,819 options to certain key employees which vested equally over the two years following the initial public offering) vested and all shares became immediately issuable to beneficiaries of milestone awards and options. At that time, 800,520 milestone awards and 232,078 milestone options were exercised. As of December 31, 2000 1,428,303 milestone options remain unexercised. \n\nS h a re option activity during the periods indicated is as follows:\n\n3 9" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8339524246643016, + "doc_id": "b4491b100caaf68912d596e4f39cc5bf3c8e6d944d76b2198dd9f221dd756a91", + "edit_distance": 0.13636363636363635, + "f1_score": 0.9052631578947369, + "meteor": 0.8899916735923658, + "precision": 0.9555555555555556, + "pred_md": "## Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n## NOTE 17 - SELECTED QUARTERLY FINANCIAL RESULTS (UNAUDITED)\n\nResults for the fourth quarter of 2004 include a reduction of Borgata's state tax expense, our share of which is recorded as 'non-operating items from unconsolidated affiliates'. Borgata received a notice of refund of certain state tax credits and recorded a benefit for amounts earned in 2003 and 2004. Our share of the adjustment was $12 million, or $0.05 per share, net of tax.\n\nBecause income per share amounts are calculated using the weighted average number of common and dilutive common equivalent shares outstanding during each quarter, the sum of the per share amounts for the four quarters may not equal the total income per share amounts for the year.\n\n67", + "recall": 0.86, + "true_md": "67\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nFor the Year Ended December 31, 2002 (In thousands)\n\n## NOTE 17 — SELECTED QUARTERLY FINANCIAL RESULTS (UNAUDITED)\n\nResults for the fourth quarter of 2004 include a reduction of Borgata’s state tax expense, our share of which is recorded as “non-operating items from unconsolidated affiliates”. Borgata received a notice of refund of certain state tax credits and recorded a benefit for amounts earned in 2003 and 2004. Our share of the adjustment was $12 million, or $0.05 per share, net of tax. \n\nBecause income per share amounts are calculated using the weighted average number of common and dilutive common equivalent shares outstanding during each quarter, the sum of the per share amounts for the four quarters may not equal the total income per share amounts for the year." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9829993919351414, + "doc_id": "0048d478cabe28446c1592714dd308061f87bc287972ef3f885d2baf11611581", + "edit_distance": 0.1797752808988764, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9958636479050852, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "WHO WE ARE\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 16\n\nWHO WE ARE\n\nNISSAN IS ABOUT MEETING UNMET NEEDS, CRAFTING SINGULAR PRODUCTS AND TRANSFORMING BRAND STRENGTH AND INNOVATION INTO NEW BUSINESS OPPORTUNITIES. WE ARE NISSAN. WE ARE INFINITI. WE ARE NISSAN LIGHT COMMERCIAL VEHICLES, EXPANDING OUR RANGE. WE ARE NISSAN INDUSTRIAL MACHINERY, LEVERAGING OUR EXPERTISE TO BUILD FORKLIFTS AND MARINE PRODUCTS. AND WE ARE NISSAN FINANCIAL SERVICES, PROVIDING OUR CUSTOMERS WITH A COMPREHENSIVE LINEUP OF OFFERINGS. THIS IS THE NISSAN SHIFT\\_", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "WHO WE ARE\n\nNISSAN IS ABOUT MEETING UNMET NEEDS, CRAFTING SINGULAR PRODUCTS AND TRANSFORMING BRAND STRENGTH AND INNOVATION INTO NEW BUSINESS OPPORTUNITIES. WE ARE NISSAN. WE ARE INFINITI. WE ARE NISSAN LIGHT COMMERCIAL VEHICLES, EXPANDING OUR RANGE. WE ARE NISSAN INDUSTRIAL MACHINERY, LEVERAGING OUR EXPERTISE TO BUILD FORKLIFTS AND MARINE PRODUCTS. AND WE ARE NISSAN FINANCIAL SERVICES, PROVIDING OUR CUSTOMERS WITH A COMPREHENSIVE LINEUP OF OFFERINGS. THIS IS THE NISSAN SHIFT\\_\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 16\n\nWHO WE ARE" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9025874451317608, + "doc_id": "1f31b3b7ff2bafb01071b4386993c75a87bed51cecb35cba0bc7ff8913948dea", + "edit_distance": 0.1021671826625387, + "f1_score": 0.9848024316109422, + "meteor": 0.9438368440139966, + "precision": 0.9878048780487805, + "pred_md": "CORPORATE GOVERNANCE\n\n## Composition of the Board\n\nNo formal nomination committee or procedures have been adopted for the identification, appointment and review of Board membership, but an informal assessment process facilitated by the Chairman operates in consultation with Mermaid's professional advisors.\n\nIn relation to Board membership, Mermaid is committed to: -\n\n·\n\nIt's Board comprising directors with a blend of skills, experience and attributes appropriate to its business and stage of development; and\n\nThe principle criterion for the appointment of new directors being their ability to add value to Mermaid's business through their professionalism, integrity and experience.\n\n·\n\n## Remuneration Arrangements\n\nThe remuneration of executive directors will be decided by the Board without the affected executive director participating in that decision making process.\n\nThe maximum remuneration of non-executive directors is the subject of shareholder resolution in accordance with the Company's Constitution, Corporations Law and the ASX Listing Rules. The apportionment of non-executive director remuneration within that maximum is made by the Board having regard to the value to Mermaid of the contributions by non-executive directors\n\nThe Board may award additional remuneration to non-executive directors called upon to perform extra services or make special exertions on behalf of Mermaid.\n\n## Audit Committee\n\nThe Board has a separately constituted audit committee. The current members of the audit committee are: A G Birchmore (Chairman)\n\nJ A S Mews\n\n## Identification and Management of Risk\n\nThe Board's collective experience enables accurate identification of the principal risks which may affect the Company's business which are recurring items for deliberation at Board meetings.\n\n## Ethical Standards\n\nThe Board is committed to the establishment and maintenance of the highest ethical standards to underpin Mermaid's operations and corporate practices.\n\n25", + "recall": 0.9818181818181818, + "true_md": "CORPORATE GOVERNANCE\n\n## Composition of the Board\n\nNo formal nomination committee or procedures have been adopted for the identification, appointment and review of Board membership, but an informal assessment process facilitated by the Chairman operates in consultation with Mermaid’s professional advisors.\n\nIn relation to Board membership, Mermaid is committed to: -\n\n- It’s Board comprising directors with a blend of skills, experience and attributes appropriate to its business and stage of development; and •\n\n- The principle criterion for the appointment of new directors being their ability to add value to Mermaid’s business through their professionalism, integrity and experience. •\n\n## Remuneration Arrangements\n\nThe remuneration of executive directors will be decided by the Board without the affected executive director participating in that decision making process.\n\nThe maximum remuneration of non-executive directors is the subject of shareholder resolution in accordance with the Company’s Constitution, Corporations Law and the ASX Listing Rules. The apportionment of non-executive director remuneration within that maximum is made by the Board having regard to the value to Mermaid of the contributions by non-executive directors \n\nThe Board may award additional remuneration to non-executive directors called upon to perform extra services or make special exertions on behalf of Mermaid.\n\n## Audit Committee\n\nThe Board has a separately constituted audit committee. The current members of the audit\n\n- committee are: A G Birchmore (Chairman) J A S Mews\n\nThe Board’s collective experience enables accurate identification of the principal risks which may affect the Company’s business which are recurring items for deliberation at Board meetings.\n\n## Identification and Management of Risk\n\n## Ethical Standards\n\nThe Board is committed to the establishment and maintenance of the highest ethical standards to underpin Mermaid’s operations and corporate practices.\n\n25" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9478871160915857, + "doc_id": "b5f487bcdf843c6261dbcdf1d54d34c280fecfc346dbac048817ffabbd119b63", + "edit_distance": 0.40512820512820513, + "f1_score": 0.9807692307692306, + "meteor": 0.9022360781526139, + "precision": 0.9807692307692307, + "pred_md": "## 22. SUBSEQUENT EVENTS\n\n- a) In accordance with Articles 280-20 and 280-21 of the Commercial Code of Japan and a resolution approved at the annual general meeting of the shareholders held on June 23, 2004, the Board of Directors of the Company resolved on April 15, 2005 to grant stock subscription rights free of charge to certain employees of the Company and certain directors and employees of the Company's subsidiaries effective April 25, 2005. The holders of these rights are entitled to subscribe for shares of common stock of the Company at a fixed price of ¥1,119 per share. The maximum aggregate number of units and shares granted for subscription are 133,950 units and 13,395,000 shares, respectively.\n- b) The following appropriations of retained earnings of the Company were approved at a shareholders' meeting held on June 21, 2005:\n\n- c) The Company issued the following bonds in yen without collateral to fund the unfunded retirement benefit obligation on June 2, 2005 and June 15, 2005:\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\n103\n\nFINANCIAL SECTION", + "recall": 0.9807692307692307, + "true_md": "## 22. SUBSEQUENT EVENTS\n\n- c) The Company issued the following bonds in yen without collateral to fund the unfunded retirement benefit obligation on June 2, 2005 and June 15, 2005:\n\nFINANCIAL SECTION\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 103\n\n- a) In accordance with Articles 280-20 and 280-21 of the Commercial Code of Japan and a resolution approved at the annual general meeting of the shareholders held on June 23, 2004, the Board of Directors of the Company resolved on April 15, 2005 to grant stock subscription rights free of charge to certain employees of the Company and certain directors and employees of the Company’s subsidiaries effective April 25, 2005. The holders of these rights are entitled to subscribe for shares of common stock of the Company at a fixed price of ¥1,119 per share. The maximum aggregate number of units and shares granted for subscription are 133,950 units and 13,395,000 shares, respectively.\n\n- b) The following appropriations of retained earnings of the Company were approved at a shareholders’ meeting held on June 21, 2005:" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9107910694999569, + "doc_id": "54a4f371b330ec767d7ebb7d5b49e34bba762a9d9a2cfc71aaef266c444ccb83", + "edit_distance": 0.597997138769671, + "f1_score": 0.9637795275590553, + "meteor": 0.775617305817232, + "precision": 0.9683544303797469, + "pred_md": "Budapest Bank in Hungary, owned by GE Capital, renewed a long-term contract with us after the original contract ended. In addition, our Indonesian-based Cakra network consolidated its activities in 2000 and is now expanding its offerings to include ATM out-\n\nsourcing and mobile replenishment transaction processing.\n\n## Can you elaborate on Euronet's position on mobile recharge?\n\nI can't say this enough: the market for distribution of prepaid mobile airtime is huge in Europe. Right now in that market there are more than 300 million mobile customers and more than 50% are\n\nprepaid customers. The mobile phone market in Europe is expected to grow to more than 460 million by 2005. Prepaid is also the fastest growing segment for mobile phone operators in the US, and approximately 80% of all mobile service in Indonesia is prepaid.\n\nCurrently, replenishment of prepaid mobile airtime is an expensive distribution nightmare for mobile operators. We offer several electronic payment solutions to mobile operators that enable their customers to conveniently add prepaid minutes through one of our various electronic touchpoints. As more operators in more countries adopt our recharge solutions, we expect them to make a strong contribution to our revenue.\n\n## What is Euronet's mobile banking opportunity?\n\nEuronet's mobile banking product enables a bank's customers to gain full access to their accounts. In addition, those bank customers can receive instant messages about their account-such as deposit or overdraft notification-on a mobile device.\n\nI want to emphasize that Euronet's wireless business is not some tangent we're taking that will stretch our resources. This opportunity is simply opening up another customer touchpoint where we can drive transactions. It's fully integrated with our other electronic touch-\n\npoints, such as ATM, Internet and POS devices, and allows us to offer a comprehensive set of electronic solutions to financial institutions. It's extremely exciting, and it's going to be very powerful.\n\n## What industry trends interest you the most?\n\nAs an electronic payments processor and outsource provider to banks and mobile operators, we see four major trends driving the growth of our business. One is the tremendous growth worldwide in electronic financial transactions, particularly in emerging markets that are going from cash-based to electronic payments. Two, increased bank consolidation in Europe is creating more ATM outsourcing opportunities. Three, we see a continuing market for off-premise convenience ATMs in retail locations. Four, a whole new customer base of mobile phone operators is creating another electronic payment bridge to generate transactions.\n\n## What is your outlook for Euronet Worldwide?\n\nI have never been as excited about our potential since we started this company. The world is changing around us, and Euronet is uniquely positioned to provide the secure, integrated solutions that meet the growing demand. Our core business is now at a point where it is essentially meeting its cash needs through its recurring revenue stream. Our core transaction business grew 39% last year. Now that we've hit a critical mass, we have more opportunities to pursue with bank and mobile operator markets, and we continue to build on recurring revenue generated by our transaction-processing engine.\n\nWe remain committed to our core business of ATM and POS outsourcing, as well as electronic bill payment solutions. W e will continue to promote our unique capabilities to banks worldwide so that their customers can realize direct, secure connections through wireless and Internet banking. And, we will continuously evaluate new technology and market opportunities, such as mobile operator payment solutions, that help achieve our goal of increasing transactions. Euronet Worldwide is ready to capitalize on this fast-paced, ever-changing world.\n\nSo, let me ask you, how would you like your next transaction…\n\n5", + "recall": 0.9592476489028213, + "true_md": "Budapest Bank in Hungary, owned by GE Capital, renewed a long-term contract with us after the original contract ended. In addition, our Indonesian-based Cakra network consolidated its activities in 2000 and is now expanding its offerings to include ATM out-\n\nsourcing and mobile replenishment transaction processing.\n\npoints, such as ATM, Internet and POS devices, and allows us to offer a comprehensive set of electronic solutions to financial institutions. It’s extremely exciting, and it’s going to be very powerful.\n\nAs an electronic payments processor and outsource provider to banks and mobile operators, we see four major trends driving the growth of our business. One is the tremendous growth worldwide in electronic financial transactions, particularly in emerging markets that are going from cash-based to electronic payments. Two, increased bank consolidation in Europe is creating more ATM outsourcing opportunities. Three, we see a contin- uing market for off-premise convenience ATMs in retail locations. Four, a whole new customer base of mobile phone operators is creating another electronic payment bridge to generate transactions.\n\nI can’t say this enough: the market for distribu- tion of prepaid mobile airtime is huge in Europe. Right now in that market there are more than 300 million mobile customers and more than 50% are\n\nprepaid customers. The mobile phone market in Europe is expected to grow to more than 460 million by 2005. Prepaid is also the fastest growing segment for mobile phone operators in the US, and approximately 80% of all mobile service in Indonesia is prepaid.\n\nCurrently, replenishment of prepaid mobile airtime is an expensive distribution nightmare for mobile operators. We offer several electronic payment solutions to mobile operators that enable their customers to conveniently add prepaid minutes through one of our various elec- tronic touchpoints. As more operators in more countries adopt our recharge solutions, we expect them to make a strong contribution to our revenue.\n\nEuronet’s mobile banking product enables a bank’s customers to gain full access to their accounts. In addition, those bank customers can receive instant messages about their account—such as deposit or overdraft notification—on a mobile device. \n\nI want to emphasize that Euronet’s wireless business is not some tangent we’re taking that will stretch our resources. This opportunity is simply opening up another customer touchpoint where we can drive transactions. It’s fully integrated with our other electronic touch-\n\nSo, let me ask you, how would you like your next transaction…\n\nWe remain committed to our core business of ATM and POS outsourcing, as well as electronic bill payment solutions. We will continue to promote our unique capabilities to banks worldwide so that their customers can realize direct, secure connections through wireless and Internet banking. And, we will continuously evaluate new technology and market opportunities, such as mobile operator payment solutions, that help achieve our goal of increasing transactions. Euronet Worldwide is ready to capitalize on this fast-paced, ever-changing world.\n\nI have never been as excited about our potential since we started this company. The world is changing around us, and Euronet is uniquely positioned to provide the secure, integrated solutions that meet the growing demand. Our core business is now at a point where it is essentially meeting its cash needs through its recurring revenue stream. Our core transaction business grew 39% last year. Now that we’ve hit a critical mass, we have more opportunities to pursue with bank and mobile operator markets, and we continue to build on recurring revenue generated by our transaction-processing engine. \n\n## What is your outlook for Euronet Worldwide?\n\n## What is Euronet’s mobile banking opportunity?\n\n## Can you elaborate on Euronet’s position on mobile recharge?\n\n## What industry trends interest you the most?\n\n5" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6114820201672752, + "doc_id": "5b54868b27cf81ae678bc2d6f208955b99b58bb7b42d68f8f4ca8f5630ddddd3", + "edit_distance": 0.6065573770491803, + "f1_score": 0.7784431137724551, + "meteor": 0.7046739638681725, + "precision": 0.9027777777777778, + "pred_md": "22\n\n## First National Bank, Sweetwater\n\n## Main Office\n\n201 Elm Street Sweetwater, Texas 79556 Chartered 1948\n\n## Branches\n\n123 N. Concho Roby, Texas 79543 117 N. Main Trent, Texas 79561\n\n## Senior Officers\n\nJ.V. Martin\n\nChairman of the Board, President and Chief Executive Officer\n\nKirby Andrews\n\nSenior Vice President, Lending\n\nJ.V. Martin Chairman of the Board, President and Chief Executive Officer\n\nJ.V. Martin Chairman of the Board, President and Chief Executive Officer\n\nRodney Foster\n\nSenior Vice President, Lending Janis McDowell Senior Vice President, Trust Officer Donnie Ruppert Senior Vice President and Controller\n\n## Directors\n\nJ.V. Martin\n\nChairman of the Board, President and Chief Executive Officer\n\nGlenn D. Bennett Bennett & Associates\n\nLouis Brooks, Jr.\n\nRanching, Brooks-Maberry, Inc.\n\nNolan and Fisher Counties Deposit Market Share\n\n38", + "recall": 0.6842105263157895, + "true_md": "22\n\nJ.V. Martin Chairman of the Board, President and Chief Executive Officer\n\n## First National B ank, Sweetwater\n\n## Main Office 201 Elm Street\n\n## Directors\n\n## Senior Officers\n\nMain Office 201 Elm Street Sweetwater, Texas 79556 Chartered 1948 Branches 123 N. Concho Roby, Texas 79543 117 N. Main Trent, Texas 79561\n\nJ.V. Martin Chairman of the Board, President and Chief Executive Officer Kirby Andrews Senior Vice President, Lending\n\nRodney Foster Senior Vice President, Lending Janis McDowell Senior Vice President, Trust Officer Donnie Ruppert Senior Vice President and Controller\n\nJ.V. Martin Chairman of the Board, President and Chief Executive Officer Glenn D. Bennett Bennett & Associates Louis Brooks, Jr. Ranching, Brooks-Maberry, Inc.\n\nBill W. Burns President, Bill Burns Oil Co., Inc. Ronnie Cox Owner, Cox Jewelry F. Scott Dueser First Financial Bankshares, Inc. Cecil J. King Retired Pr esident, C itizens State Bank, Roby Thomas L. Rees, Sr. Rees and Rees, Attorneys" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9419022291373212, + "doc_id": "88b19b2f1a8b0a308c013abe5ee2f4880f204f3391bad1051e0bf25f56c3b045", + "edit_distance": 0.4632867132867133, + "f1_score": 0.9803921568627451, + "meteor": 0.9149013979862611, + "precision": 0.9803921568627451, + "pred_md": "LETTER FROM CEO\n\n2\n\n## LETTER FROM THE PRESIDENT AND CEO\n\nA public company has two key responsibilities to its shareholders: transparency and value creation.\n\nAt Nissan, transparency is essential to our business. Especially in uncertain times, it builds trust between a company and its shareholders. And we believe transparency is the best way to encourage long-term investment in our company.\n\nBut transparency is not yet universal. Nissan is still one of the few large corporations that publicly disclose future business plans, performance indicators, commitments and future dividends. We trust that these measures give shareholders a clear view of our company's future direction.\n\nFrom the start of the Nissan Revival Plan (NRP) in 1999, we have created value by focusing on key value drivers-particularly sales growth, operating profit margin, and return on invested capital.\n\nBy the end of fiscal 2001 we exceeded our NRP commitments by returning Nissan to profit one year ahead of schedule, halving the company's debt and over-delivering on our commitment to achieve a 4.5 percent operating profit margin.\n\nFollowing NRP, we launched a three-year business plan called NISSAN 180. By the end of the plan in fiscal 2004, we committed to achieve the following:\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\n- · An increase in global sales of 1 million units, compared to the start of the plan. We are confident of meeting this final commitment by the end of the measurement period in September 2005.\n- · An 8 percent operating profit margin. For every year of the NISSAN 180 plan our operating margin has been at or above 10 percent topping the performance of all global automakers.\n- · Zero net automotive debt. We now have more than ¥200 billion in net cash under the new and more demanding accounting standards.\n\n## Review of 2004\n\nNissan lived up to its challenges in fiscal 2004, despite a very challenging year in the global industry, full of risks both anticipated and unexpected.\n\nConsolidated net revenues reached ¥8 trillion 576.3 billion, up 15.4 percent from last year. Consolidated operating profit improved by 4.4 percent to a record ¥861.2 billion. As a percentage of net revenue, our operating profit margin came to 10 percent, which remains at the top level among global automakers. And our net income reached ¥512.3 billion, or ¥125.16 per share, compared to ¥122.02 per share for the previous fiscal year.\n\n## NISSAN Value-Up\n\nThe Nissan revival story is now complete. Our next three-year business plan, 'NISSAN Value-Up,' is focused, as its name suggests, on delivering sustainable long-term value to all our stakeholders. As such, it is evolutionary not revolutionary.\n\nAs with our previous business plans, NISSAN Value-Up establishes three core commitments. They are ambitious, and will require us to stretch our capabilities. But they are realistic.\n\nProfit: Nissan will maintain the top level of operating profit margin among global automakers for each of the three years of the plan. Operating profit remains at the center of our management system, as it is the most accurate measure of business performance.", + "recall": 0.9803921568627451, + "true_md": "LETTER FROM CEO\n\n## LETTER FROM THE PRESIDENT AND CEO\n\nA public company has two key responsibilities to its shareholders: transparency and value creation.\n\nAt Nissan, transparency is essential to our business. Especially in uncertain times, it builds trust between a company and its shareholders. And we believe transparency is the best way to encourage long-term investment in our company.\n\nBut transparency is not yet universal. Nissan is still one of the few large corporations that publicly disclose future business plans, performance indicators, commitments and future dividends. We trust that these measures give shareholders a clear view of our company’s future direction.\n\nFrom the start of the Nissan Revival Plan (NRP) in 1999, we have created value by focusing on key value drivers—particularly sales growth, operating profit margin, and return on invested capital. \n\nBy the end of fiscal 2001 we exceeded our NRP commitments by returning Nissan to profit one year ahead of schedule, halving the company’s debt and over-delivering on our commitment to achieve a 4.5 percent operating profit margin.\n\nFollowing NRP, we launched a three-year business plan called NISSAN 180. By the end of the plan in fiscal 2004, we committed to achieve the following:\n\nProfit: Nissan will maintain the top level of operating profit margin among global automakers for each of the three years of the plan. Operating profit remains at the center of our management system, as it is the most accurate measure of business performance. \n\nAs with our previous business plans, NISSAN Value-Up establishes three core commitments. They are ambitious, and will require us to stretch our capabilities. But they are realistic. \n\nThe Nissan revival story is now complete. Our next three-year business plan, ‘NISSAN Value-Up,’ is focused, as its name suggests, on delivering sustainable long-term value to all our stakeholders. As such, it is evolutionary not revolutionary.\n\nConsolidated net revenues reached ¥8 trillion 576.3 billion, up 15.4 percent from last year. Consolidated operating profit improved by 4.4 percent to a record ¥861.2 billion. As a percentage of net revenue, our operating profit margin came to 10 percent, which remains at the top level among global automakers. And our net income reached ¥512.3 billion, or ¥125.16 per share, compared to ¥122.02 per share for the previous fiscal year.\n\nNissan lived up to its challenges in fiscal 2004, despite a very challenging year in the global industry, full of risks both anticipated and unexpected.\n\n## Review of 2004\n\n## NISSAN Value-Up\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 2\n\n- • An increase in global sales of 1 million units, compared to the start of the plan. We are confident of meeting this final commitment by the end of the measurement period in September 2005.\n\n- • An 8 percent operating profit margin. For every year of the NISSAN 180 plan our operating margin has been at or above 10 percent topping the performance of all global automakers.\n\n- • Zero net automotive debt. We now have more than ¥200 billion in net cash under the new and more demanding accounting standards." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9391758192137527, + "doc_id": "ec61fa086e252a6a943f684fc7d1d8b6c9db8f3ca787aedf2ece5fa5444620d0", + "edit_distance": 0.4361036639857015, + "f1_score": 0.9475065616797901, + "meteor": 0.9060245511217756, + "precision": 0.9704301075268817, + "pred_md": "The Hormel HealthLabs sales tonnage for the fourth quarter increased 5.2 percent compared to the prior year, while sales tonnage for the fiscal year increased 1.4 percent compared to fiscal 2003. Product lines showing growth during the quarter include shelf-stable supplements (up 179,000 lbs., or 10.2 percent), thickened beverages (up 658,000 lbs., or 8.3 percent), and pureed side dishes (up 104,000 lbs., or 30.6 percent). This growth has been mitigated throughout fiscal 2004 due to additional competition, increased promotional expenses, and rising production costs, including freight, packaging, and milk prices, resulting in decreased operating profits. Advances have been made in new product development and strategies to secure new customer contracts, which should improve results during the second half of fiscal 2005. Additionally, the Hormel HealthLabs business will be consolidated into DCB effective November 1, 2004, which will further increase operating efficiencies within this segment.\n\nFollowing the DCB and CFI acquisitions, realignment of personnel and product lines within the Specialty Foods segment has enabled the company to more efficiently manage and market the segment's portfolio of products to customers. DCB's sugar substitute category showed strong sales growth in the fourth quarter, up 203.0 percent over the comparable quarter of fiscal 2003. Strong results from dessert and hot drink mixes also benefited the segment. The CFI business faced a challenging fourth quarter, including the loss of significant contract business and increased whey protein prices. These factors, combined with record high dairy markets, resulted in decreased operating profits during fiscal 2004. Efforts are being made to diversify the customer base for CFI during fiscal 2005, which should improve the results of this business.\n\nAll Other: All Other net sales decreased 7.7 percent for the quarter and increased 7.7 percent for the year compared to the comparable fiscal 2003 periods. Operating profit decreased 54.7 and 9.6 percent for the quarter and year, respectively, compared to last year. Comparisons for both the quarter and twelve months are impacted by the divestiture of Vista International Packaging, Inc. (Vista) during the third quarter of fiscal 2004.\n\nHormel Foods International (HFI) experienced strong international demand for commodity pork items throughout fiscal 2004, with export tonnage increasing to 80,100,000 lbs., or up 22.8 percent, over fiscal 2003. Volume gains were also seen on the SPAM family of products (up 475,000 lbs., or 2.8 percent) and Stagg chili (up 436,000 lbs., or 8.4 percent) compared to the prior year. Higher raw material prices offset the benefits of these volume gains, resulting in decreased operating profits. HFI opened a second plant in the Philippines in the fourth quarter and continues to pursue international growth opportunities. During the second quarter of fiscal 2004, the company completed the sale of its investment in Campofrio Alimentacion, S.A. The $6,222 pre-tax gain recorded on the sale is excluded from All Other operating profits and is included in 'net interest and investment income.'\n\n22\n\nHormel Foods Corporation\n\nDan's Prize, Inc., the company's marketer and seller of beef products, experienced another strong year with sales tonnage up 1,348,000 lbs., or 7.8 percent, over fiscal 2003. Increased margins resulting from favorable pricing strategies also increased the operating profits of this segment during fiscal 2004.\n\nAs previously noted, the company finalized the sale of Vista during the third quarter of fiscal 2004. The $18,063 pre-tax gain recorded on the sale is excluded from All Other operating profits and is included in 'general corporate expense.'\n\nUnallocated Income and Expenses: The company does not allocate investment income, interest expense, and interest income to its segments when measuring performance. The company also retains various other income and unallocated expenses at corporate. These items are included in the segment table for the purpose of reconciling segment results to earnings before income taxes.\n\nNet interest and investment income for the fourth quarter and year was a net expense of $5,198 and $12,779, respectively, compared to $6,645 and $21,079 for the comparable periods of fiscal 2003. The twelve month decrease in expense compared to fiscal 2003 primarily represents the $6,222 pre-tax gain on the sale of the company's investment in Campofrio Alimentacion, S.A. (Campofrio) during the second quarter. Other decreases in fiscal 2004 included reductions in interest expense due to lower debt levels and increased investment income from market gains on the company's rabbi trust for supplemental executive retirement plans and deferred income plans. The twelve month comparison is also impacted by a $2,314 dividend received from Campofrio during the third quarter of fiscal 2003.\n\nGeneral corporate expense for the fourth quarter and year was $8,374 and $20,400, respectively, compared to $10,315 and $30,363 for the prior year quarter and twelve months. Twelve month results include a pre-tax gain of $18,063 recorded on the sale of Vista International Packaging, Inc. during the third quarter of fiscal 2004. Fiscal 2004 also includes reductions in postretirement benefits of $1,504 and $3,903 for the quarter and year, respectively, related to the Medicare Prescription Drug, Improvement and Modernization Act of 2003. (See Note F 'Pension and Other Postretirement Health Care Benefits.') These decreases offset higher pension and medical costs of approximately $1,700 and $10,100 for the quarter and year, respectively, compared to fiscal 2003. In the fourth quarter of fiscal 2003, the company adopted the fair value method of accounting for employee stock options and recognized $1,887 in stock option expense related to the entire 2003 fiscal year. The company has now been expensing options throughout fiscal 2004, resulting in stock option expense decreasing approximately $1,300 for the fourth quarter and increasing approximately $900 for the year compared to the prior year. Other factors significantly impacting fiscal 2004 were a decrease in bad debt expenses of $5,244, increased inventory valuation adjustments of $3,507, and an increase in expenses of $6,132 related to the sales reorganization.", + "recall": 0.9256410256410257, + "true_md": "The Hormel HealthLabs sales tonnage for the fourth quarter increased 5.2 percent compared to the prior year, while sales ton- nage for the fiscal year increased 1.4 percent compared to fiscal 2003. Product lines showing growth during the quarter include shelf-stable supplements (up 179,000 lbs., or 10.2 percent), thick- ened beverages (up 658,000 lbs., or 8.3 percent), and pureed side dishes (up 104,000 lbs., or 30.6 percent). This growth has been mitigated throughout fiscal 2004 due to additional competition, increased promotional expenses, and rising production costs, including freight, packaging, and milk prices, resulting in decreased operating profits. Advances have been made in new product development and strategies to secure new customer contracts, which should improve results during the second half of fiscal 2005. Additionally, the Hormel HealthLabs business will be consol- idated into DCB effective November 1, 2004, which will further increase operating efficiencies within this segment. \n\nFollowing the DCB and CFI acquisitions, realignment of personnel and product lines within the Specialty Foods segment has enabled the company to more efficiently manage and market the segment’s portfolio of products to customers. DCB’s sugar substitute cate- gory showed strong sales growth in the fourth quarter, up 203.0 percent over the comparable quarter of fiscal 2003. Strong results from dessert and hot drink mixes also benefited the segment. The CFI business faced a challenging fourth quarter, including the loss of significant contract business and increased whey protein prices. These factors, combined with record high dairy markets, resulted in decreased operating profits during fiscal 2004. Efforts are being made to diversify the customer base for CFI during fiscal 2005, which should improve the results of this business.\n\nAll Other: All Other net sales decreased 7.7 percent for the quar- ter and increased 7.7 percent for the year compared to the com- parable fiscal 2003 periods. Operating profit decreased 54.7 and 9.6 percent for the quarter and year, respectively, compared to last year. Comparisons for both the quarter and twelve months are impacted by the divestiture of Vista International Packaging, Inc. (Vista) during the third quarter of fiscal 2004. \n\nHormel Foods International (HFI) experienced strong international demand for commodity pork items throughout fiscal 2004, with export tonnage increasing to 80,100,000 lbs., or up 22.8 percent, over fiscal 2003. Volume gains were also seen on the SPAM family of products (up 475,000 lbs., or 2.8 percent) and Stagg chili (up 436,000 lbs., or 8.4 percent) compared to the prior year. Higher raw material prices offset the benefits of these volume gains, resulting in decreased operating profits. HFI opened a second plant in the Philippines in the fourth quarter and continues to pur- sue international growth opportunities. During the second quarter of fiscal 2004, the company completed the sale of its investment in Campofrio Alimentacion, S.A. The $6,222 pre-tax gain recorded on the sale is excluded from All Other operating profits and is included in “net interest and investment income.”\n\nGeneral corporate expense for the fourth quarter and year was $8,374 and $20,400, respectively, compared to $10,315 and $30,363 for the prior year quarter and twelve months. Twelve month results include a pre-tax gain of $18,063 recorded on the sale of Vista International Packaging, Inc. during the third quarter of fiscal 2004. Fiscal 2004 also includes reductions in postretirement benefits of $1,504 and $3,903 for the quarter and year, respec- tively, related to the Medicare Prescription Drug, Improvement and Modernization Act of 2003. (See Note F “Pension and Other Postretirement Health Care Benefits.”) These decreases offset higher pension and medical costs of approximately $1,700 and $10,100 for the quarter and year, respectively, compared to fiscal 2003. In the fourth quarter of fiscal 2003, the company adopted the fair value method of accounting for employee stock options and recognized $1,887 in stock option expense related to the entire 2003 fiscal year. The company has now been expensing options throughout fiscal 2004, resulting in stock option expense decreasing approximately $1,300 for the fourth quarter and increasing approximately $900 for the year compared to the prior year. Other factors significantly impacting fiscal 2004 were a decrease in bad debt expenses of $5,244, increased inventory valuation adjustments of $3,507, and an increase in expenses of $6,132 related to the sales reorganization. \n\nNet interest and investment income for the fourth quarter and year was a net expense of $5,198 and $12,779, respectively, compared to $6,645 and $21,079 for the comparable periods of fiscal 2003. The twelve month decrease in expense compared to fiscal 2003 primarily represents the $6,222 pre-tax gain on the sale of the company’s investment in Campofrio Alimentacion, S.A. (Campofrio) during the second quarter. Other decreases in fiscal 2004 included reductions in interest expense due to lower debt levels and increased investment income from market gains on the company’s rabbi trust for supplemental executive retirement plans and deferred income plans. The twelve month comparison is also impacted by a $2,314 dividend received from Campofrio during the third quarter of fiscal 2003.\n\nUnallocated Income and Expenses: The company does not allocate investment income, interest expense, and interest income to its segments when measuring performance. The company also retains various other income and unallocated expenses at corpo- rate. These items are included in the segment table for the purpose of reconciling segment results to earnings before income taxes.\n\nAs previously noted, the company finalized the sale of Vista during the third quarter of fiscal 2004. The $18,063 pre-tax gain recorded on the sale is excluded from All Other operating profits and is included in “general corporate expense.”\n\nDan’s Prize, Inc., the company’s marketer and seller of beef products, experienced another strong year with sales tonnage up 1,348,000 lbs., or 7.8 percent, over fiscal 2003. Increased mar- gins resulting from favorable pricing strategies also increased the operating profits of this segment during fiscal 2004.\n\n22 Hormel Foods Corporation" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9696964119079678, + "doc_id": "789eda9e96078c6de99af2d2e27f8e48948633316d53cd9bab5bc596e1db2c39", + "edit_distance": 0.43013100436681223, + "f1_score": 0.9910600255427842, + "meteor": 0.9483122778411475, + "precision": 0.9948717948717949, + "pred_md": "12\n\nLeveraging Base Business\n\n## HARNESSING VALUE FROM OPERATIONS\n\nThe Santos base business comprises production from assets in all of the Company's existing producing fields.\n\nSantos is countering decline from mature fields with strategies such as optimisation and trialling new technologies to maximise output, while running an exploration program which aims to add new projects and production.\n\nAt all times, ensuring the safety of all operations and minimising any environmental impacts remains paramount.\n\n## 2004 PRODUCTION IMPACTED BY MOOMBA INCIDENT\n\nSantos' total production in 2004 fell from 54.2 million boe in 2003 to 47.1 million boe, primarily due to the effects of the 1 January incident at Moomba that resulted in a reduction of 4.6 million boe, together with declining performance from the East Spar and Stag fields in the Carnarvon Basin, offshore Western Australia.\n\nSales gas and ethane production fell 14% during the year from 222.8 PJ to 190.5 PJ. Production declined in the Cooper Basin and gas production from the onshore Otway Basin ceased with the divestment of these interests. However, gas production was steady or increased in four of five other areas of operation. This illustrates the success of Santos' continued efforts to diversify its base business and to optimise existing production.\n\nLower Cooper Basin gas production was partly offset by higher gas production from eastern Queensland through appraisal and development success at Churchie, new interests in Indonesia at Kakap and Brantas\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\nand increased interests at Patricia-Baleen. Amadeus Basin gas production remained flat as declining production was countered by successful development drilling during the second half of 2004 at Palm Valley and Mereenie.\n\nCrude oil production was 13% lower at 9.5 million barrels, down from 10.9 million barrels in the previous year as production declined at Stag, Legendre and Jabiru-Challis. Successful infill drilling at Legendre and Stag helped turn around declines for these fields during the second half of 2004. The program to improve production at Stag will continue into 2005 as simulation studies suggest further drilling and increased water injection could improve future production.\n\nCooper Basin oil production declined just 4% during 2004 due to successful delineation, development and production optimisation at several fields, particularly Merrimelia, Derrilyn and Mulberry. Amadeus Basin oil production declines were made less severe through successful drilling at Mereenie.\n\nCondensate production increased by 20% from 3.1 million barrels to 3.7 million barrels as BayuUndan liquids production commenced with better than expected performance during 2004, offsetting the lower condensate production from the Cooper Basin due to the Moomba incident and decline at East Spar as the field approached the end of its production life.\n\nCondensate production from the United States was also improved by almost 0.1 million barrels as successful development and\n\ndelineation wells on the deep Frio trend contributed with improved condensate content during the year.\n\nLPG production declined by 34% to 158,600 tonnes in 2004 from 240,700 tonnes in 2003, due mainly to the effects of the Moomba incident on the production of liquids through the liquids recovery plant. Production from Bayu-Undan was able to only partially offset this decrease.\n\n## APPLYING NEW TECHNOLOGIES\n\nReservoir studies have identified that some lower permeability reservoirs may have significant potential to increase recoveries through activities such as additional infill drilling, fracture stimulation and waterflooding.\n\nSantos tested new technologies in the Cooper Basin in drilling, completions and artificial lift optimisation during 2004 to improve product delivery and recovery in order to reduce production costs per unit.\n\nTo this end, further reductions in costs for 2005 are targeted by increasing the focus on fit for purpose rigs and larger campaigns. These efforts will be supported by a significant boost in 3D seismic acquisition that commenced at the end of 2003 and continues in 2005.\n\nCoiled tubing underbalanced drilling operations were performed at three gas wells and one oil well, while multiple pinpoint fracture stimulations were performed at five new gas wells, with between three and six fracs performed in each well.\n\nThese introductory programs are providing encouraging initial results. The underbalanced drilling\n\nprogram achieved better than predicted rate improvements for all three gas wells.\n\nThese programs will now be extended to a variety of more complex and possibly harsher oil and gas wellbore/reservoir environments during 2005.\n\nSantos increased gas well deliverability in the Cooper Basin by 63 TJ per day through numerous projects brought on line during 2004. Some 8 PJ of incremental gas production resulted during 2004 from this optimisation program. These results were achieved at a significantly lower cost than conventional development drilling and substantially exceeded targets set at the beginning of the year.\n\nWhile the Cooper Basin is a mature hydrocarbon area, Santos is drilling wells which can be commercialised quickly and cost-effectively, delivering strong cash flow which can be applied to other growth opportunities. A further focus in 2004 was to leverage Cooper Basin infrastructure; for example, via gas swaps, and increase prices under existing agreements.\n\nAn increased Gas Sales Agreement was reached with CS Energy which resulted in an additional seven wells being drilled at the Scotia coal seam methane gas field in eastern Queensland.", + "recall": 0.9872773536895675, + "true_md": "The Santos base business comprises production from assets in all of the Company's existing producing fields. \n\nSantos is countering decline from mature fields with strategies such as optimisation and trialling new technologies to maximise output, while running an exploration program which aims to add new projects and production.\n\nAt all times, ensuring the safety of all operations and minimising any environmental impacts remains paramount.\n\nSantos' total production in 2004 fell from 54.2 million boe in 2003 to 47.1 million boe, primarily due to the effects of the 1 January incident at Moomba that resulted in a reduction of 4.6 million boe, together with declining performance from the East Spar and Stag fields in the Carnarvon Basin, offshore Western Australia.\n\nSales gas and ethane production fell 14% during the year from 222.8 PJ to 190.5 PJ. Production declined in the Cooper Basin and gas production from the onshore Otway Basin ceased with the divestment of these interests. However, gas production was steady or increased in four of five other areas of operation. This illustrates the success of Santos' continued efforts to diversify its base business and to optimise existing production. \n\nLower Cooper Basin gas production was partly offset by higher gas production from eastern Queensland through appraisal and development success at Churchie, new interests in Indonesia at Kakap and Brantas\n\nCondensate production from the United States was also improved by almost 0.1 million barrels as successful development and\n\nCondensate production increased by 20% from 3.1 million barrels to 3.7 million barrels as Bayu- Undan liquids production commenced with better than expected performance during 2004, offsetting the lower condensate production from the Cooper Basin due to the Moomba incident and decline at East Spar as the field approached the end of its production life. \n\nCooper Basin oil production declined just 4% during 2004 due to successful delineation, development and production optimisation at several fields, particularly Merrimelia, Derrilyn and Mulberry. Amadeus Basin oil production declines were made less severe through successful drilling at Mereenie.\n\nCrude oil production was 13% lower at 9.5 million barrels, down from 10.9 million barrels in the previous year as production declined at Stag, Legendre and Jabiru-Challis. Successful infill drilling at Legendre and Stag helped turn around declines for these fields during the second half of 2004. The program to improve production at Stag will continue into 2005 as simulation studies suggest further drilling and increased water injection could improve future production. \n\nand increased interests at Patricia-Baleen. Amadeus Basin gas production remained flat as declining production was countered by successful development drilling during the second half of 2004 at Palm Valley and Mereenie.\n\ndelineation wells on the deep Frio trend contributed with improved condensate content during the year.\n\nLPG production declined by 34% to 158,600 tonnes in 2004 from 240,700 tonnes in 2003, due mainly to the effects of the Moomba incident on the production of liquids through the liquids recovery plant. Production from Bayu-Undan was able to only partially offset this decrease.\n\nReservoir studies have identified that some lower permeability reservoirs may have significant potential to increase recoveries through activities such as additional infill drilling, fracture stimulation and waterflooding. \n\nSantos tested new technologies in the Cooper Basin in drilling, completions and artificial lift optimisation during 2004 to improve product delivery and recovery in order to reduce production costs per unit.\n\nTo this end, further reductions in costs for 2005 are targeted by increasing the focus on fit for purpose rigs and larger campaigns. These efforts will be supported by a significant boost in 3D seismic acquisition that commenced at the end of 2003 and continues in 2005.\n\nCoiled tubing underbalanced drilling operations were performed at three gas wells and one oil well, while multiple pinpoint fracture stimulations were performed at five new gas wells, with between three and six fracs performed in each well. \n\nThese introductory programs are providing encouraging initial results. The underbalanced drilling\n\nAn increased Gas Sales Agreement was reached with CS Energy which resulted in an additional seven wells being drilled at the Scotia coal seam methane gas field in eastern Queensland.\n\nWhile the Cooper Basin is a mature hydrocarbon area, Santos is drilling wells which can be commercialised quickly and cost-effectively, delivering strong cash flow which can be applied to other growth opportunities. A further focus in 2004 was to leverage Cooper Basin infrastructure; for example, via gas swaps, and increase prices under existing agreements. \n\nSantos increased gas well deliverability in the Cooper Basin by 63 TJ per day through numerous projects brought on line during 2004. Some 8 PJ of incremental gas production resulted during 2004 from this optimisation program. These results were achieved at a significantly lower cost than conventional development drilling and substantially exceeded targets set at the beginning of the year.\n\nThese programs will now be extended to a variety of more complex and possibly harsher oil and gas wellbore/reservoir environments during 2005. \n\nprogram achieved better than predicted rate improvements for all three gas wells.\n\n## APPLYING NEW TECHNOLOGIES\n\n## 2004 PRODUCTION IMPACTED BY MOOMBA INCIDENT\n\n12\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\nLeveraging Base Business\n\n## HARNESSING VALUE FR OM OPERATIONS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9180305504119699, + "doc_id": "583a42749eb1a1a96eb08eb4a46d8cde139b996b6ba494928edeb1ee409bd447", + "edit_distance": 0.45144628099173556, + "f1_score": 0.9825503355704698, + "meteor": 0.9233162687173457, + "precision": 0.9838709677419355, + "pred_md": "## DIRECTORS' AND SENIOR EXECUTIVES' REMUNERATION\n\nThe Remuneration Committee is responsible for reviewing the remuneration policies and practices of the Company including: the compensation arrangements for the Managing Director and senior management; the Company's superannuation arrangements; employee share and option plans; executive and senior management performance review, succession planning, and, within the aggregate amount approved by shareholders, the fees for nonexecutive Directors. The role of the Remuneration Committee is documented in a Charter, approved by the Board, which Charter prescribes that the Committee must consist of at least three non-executive Directors. The Committee has access to independent advice and comparative studies on the appropriateness of remuneration arrangements.\n\nThe current members of the Remuneration Committee, all of whom are independent nonexecutive Directors, are: Professor J Sloan (Chairperson), Mr S Gerlach and Mr P C Barnett.\n\n## NON-EXECUTIVE DIRECTORS\n\nWithin the aggregate amount (being $1,500,000 per year) approved by shareholders at the Annual General Meeting of the Company held on 7 May 2004, the fees of the Chairman and non-executive Directors are set at levels which represent the responsibilities of and the time commitments provided by those Directors in discharging their duties. Regard is also had to the level of fees payable to non-executive Directors of comparable companies. As previously announced,\n\nnon-executive Directors' fees were increased effective 1 July 2004. Non-executive Directors, other than the Chairman, who are members of Board Committees receive additional fees. Nonexecutive Directors may not participate in any of the Company's bonus, share or option plans.\n\nThe Directors determined to cease retirement allowances to nonexecutive Directors effective from 30 June 2004. Non-executive Directors appointed before 1 January 2004 are entitled to receive benefits accrued to that date, payable upon ceasing to hold office as a Director. The retirement payment (inclusive of superannuation guarantee charge entitlements) is made pursuant to an agreement entered into with each non-executive Director on terms approved by shareholders at the 1989 Annual General Meeting. These benefits have been fully provided for by the Company.\n\n## EXECUTIVE DIRECTORS\n\nThe Managing Director, Mr J C Ellice-Flint, is currently the only Executive Director, he being appointed a Director on 19 December 2000.\n\nMr J C Ellice-Flint has an executive service agreement with the Company which continues until terminated by either party in accordance with the agreement. Termination arrangements relating to the Managing Director were agreed in advance of his appointment, and those relating to the equity component of his remuneration were notified at the time of the appointment.\n\nHis remuneration comprises a base salary reviewed annually and an\n\nannual bonus calculated on a formula that includes components to measure the growth of profitability, exploitable reserves and share price.\n\nHe also has an entitlement to 1,000,000 Restricted Shares, details of which are described in note 18(h) to the financial statements and holds 3,000,000 options under the Santos Executive Share Option Plan.\n\nIf the Company terminates Mr J C Ellice-Flint's appointment without cause, the Company may at its option, in lieu of part or all of the notice period of 24 months, pay to him an amount equal to a proportion or multiple of his annual base salary and the current year's potential bonus (excluding the application of any performance condition) at the time at which notice is given.\n\n## SENIOR EXECUTIVES (a) Remuneration Objectives and Principles\n\nThe objectives of the Company's remuneration policy are to attract, retain and motivate appropriately qualified and experienced executives capable of discharging their respective responsibilities to enable the Company to achieve its business strategy.\n\nThe principles underlying the remuneration policy are: to realistically reflect the responsibilities of executives and other employees; to be industry competitive and reasonable; that a significant portion of remuneration be at risk against individual and company performance and shareholder wealth creation; that performance, not failure, be rewarded so that the Company's best performers\n\nreceive more; and to encourage executives to manage from the perspective of the shareholders by rewarding them for aligning Company and shareholder returns.\n\n## (b) Remuneration Structure\n\nThe Company's remuneration structure for its non-award employees is based upon Target Total Remuneration (TTR), the components of which comprise:\n\n- · a fixed component called Fixed Annual Remuneration (FAR); and\n\ntwo variable components, called:\n\n- · the Short Term Incentive (STI) and\n- · the Long Term Incentive (LTI).\n\nFAR: comprises salary, superannuation and benefits; is quantified by reference to role and experience; and is industry benchmarked.\n\nSTI is represented as a percentage of base remuneration which is 'at risk' . The STI consists of an annual cash bonus paid to reward performance based on a mix of Company performance and individual performance measured against annual scorecards with target and stretch performance criteria determined in advance each year.\n\nLTI: in relation to executive remuneration includes a long term performance based component in the form of equity participation through the Santos Executive Share Option Plan (SESOP) and the Santos Employee Share Purchase Plan (SESPP).\n\nParticipation is determined by the Board, on recommendation of the Remuneration Committee, and only applies to executives who are\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\n37", + "recall": 0.9812332439678284, + "true_md": "## DIRECTORS’ AND SENIOR EXECUTIVES’ REMUNERATION\n\nThe Remuneration Committee is responsible for reviewing the remuneration policies and practices of the Company including: the compensation arrangements for the Managing Director and senior management; the Company’s superannuation arrangements; employee share and option plans; executive and senior management performance review, succession planning, and, within the aggregate amount approved by shareholders, the fees for non- executive Directors. The role of the Remuneration Committee is documented in a Charter, approved by the Board, which Charter prescribes that the Committee must consist of at least three non-executive Directors. The Committee has access to independent advice and comparative studies on the appropriateness of remuneration arrangements. \n\nThe current members of the Remuneration Committee, all of whom are independent non- executive Directors, are: Professor J Sloan (Chairperson), Mr S Gerlach and Mr P C Barnett. \n\nWithin the aggregate amount (being $1,500,000 per year) approved by shareholders at the Annual General Meeting of the Company held on 7 May 2004, the fees of the Chairman and non-executive Directors are set at levels which represent the responsibilities of and the time commitments provided by those Directors in discharging their duties. Regard is also had to the level of fees payable to non-executive Directors of comparable companies. As previously announced,\n\nHis remuneration comprises a base salary reviewed annually and an\n\nMr J C Ellice-Flint has an executive service agreement with the Company which continues until terminated by either party in accordance with the agreement. Termination arrangements relating to the Managing Director were agreed in advance of his appointment, and those relating to the equity component of his remuneration were notified at the time of the appointment. \n\nEXECUTIVE DIRECTORS The Managing Director, Mr J C Ellice-Flint, is currently the only Executive Director, he being appointed a Director on 19 December 2000. \n\nThe Directors determined to cease retirement allowances to non- executive Directors effective from 30 June 2004. Non-executive Directors appointed before 1 January 2004 are entitled to receive benefits accrued to that date, payable upon ceasing to hold office as a Director. The retirement payment (inclusive of superannuation guarantee charge entitlements) is made pursuant to an agreement entered into with each non-executive Director on terms approved by shareholders at the 1989 Annual General Meeting. These benefits have been fully provided for by the Company. \n\nnon-executive Directors’ fees were increased effective 1 July 2004. Non-executive Directors, other than the Chairman, who are members of Board Committees receive additional fees. Non- executive Directors may not participate in any of the Company’s bonus, share or option plans. \n\nannual bonus calculated on a formula that includes components to measure the growth of profitability, exploitable reserves and share price. \n\nHe also has an entitlement to 1,000,000 Restricted Shares, details of which are described in note 18(h) to the financial statements and holds 3,000,000 options under the Santos Executive Share Option Plan. \n\nIf the Company terminates Mr J C Ellice-Flint’s appointment without cause, the Company may at its option, in lieu of part or all of the notice period of 24 months, pay to him an amount equal to a proportion or multiple of his annual base salary and the current year’s potential bonus (excluding the application of any performance condition) at the time at which notice is given. \n\nThe objectives of the Company’s remuneration policy are to attract, retain and motivate appropriately qualified and experienced executives capable of discharging their respective responsibilities to enable the Company to achieve its business strategy. \n\nThe principles underlying the remuneration policy are: to realistically reflect the responsibilities of executives and other employees; to be industry competitive and reasonable; that a significant portion of remuneration be at risk against individual and company performance and shareholder wealth creation; that performance, not failure, be rewarded so that the Company’s best performers\n\nLTI: in relation to executive remuneration includes a long term performance based component in the form of equity participation through the Santos Executive Share Option Plan (SESOP) and the Santos Employee Share Purchase Plan (SESPP). Participation is determined by the Board, on recommendation of the Remuneration Committee, and only applies to executives who are\n\nSTI is represented as a percentage of base remuneration which is “at risk”. The STI consists of an annual cash bonus paid to reward performance based on a mix of Company performance and individual performance measured against annual scorecards with target and stretch performance criteria determined in advance each year. \n\nFAR: comprises salary, superannuation and benefits; is quantified by reference to role and experience; and is industry benchmarked. \n\nThe Company’s remuneration structure for its non-award employees is based upon Target Total Remuneration (TTR), the components of which comprise: \n\nreceive more; and to encourage executives to manage from the perspective of the shareholders by rewarding them for aligning Company and shareholder returns. \n\n## (b) Remuneration Structure\n\n## SENIOR EXECUTIVES\n\n## (a) Remuneration Objectives and Principles\n\n## NON-EXECUTIVE DIRECTORS\n\n37\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\n- • a fixed component called Fixed Annual Remuneration (FAR); and \n\n- • the Short Term Incentive (STI) and \n\n- • the Long Term Incentive (LTI). \n\ntwo variable components, called:" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.049787068367863944, + "doc_id": "4cd636088760b5b04a8b4f03798423573a01b67c60d33f0c382474a024428aa8", + "edit_distance": 0.75, + "f1_score": 0.5, + "meteor": 0.2681587837837837, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Annual Report 2004\n\n59", + "recall": 0.3333333333333333, + "true_md": "## 12. Other Financial Assets\n\n## 13. Intangibles\n\nAnnual Report 2004 59" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9228810381337891, + "doc_id": "24f776e6a26b1d6212578e98d19ecb3f2113dc251066d02e072480cb6ea5dbfc", + "edit_distance": 0.16, + "f1_score": 0.9604863221884496, + "meteor": 0.9584968588995527, + "precision": 0.9813664596273292, + "pred_md": "result in significant increases to participant contributions because expenses have already exceeded the company's cap limit. The company decided to offer a new option to participants that featured less volatile increases in participant contributions but still results in future increases that will be determined by the future rate of health care inflation. As a result of a significant number of participants choosing the new option, the company's benefit obligation increased by $37.6 million in fiscal 2003. Actuarial gains and losses and any adjustments resulting from plan amendments are deferred and amortized to expense over periods ranging from 10-18 years.\n\nThe annual measurement date used to determine pension and other postretirement benefit amounts is August 1.\n\nThe Medicare Prescription Drug, Improvement and Modernization Act of 2003 (the Act) resulted in a reduction of the company's accumulated postretirement benefit obligation (APBO) of $41.5 million in fiscal 2004, which represents an actuarial gain that will be amortized over future service periods. Application of the Act resulted in a decrease of $3.9 million in net periodic postretirement costs for the year. This decrease is made up of a reduction in loss amortization of $2.0 million, reduction in service cost of $0.2 million, and reduction in interest cost of $1.7 million.\n\nThe following is a reconciliation of the beginning and ending balances of the benefit obligation and the fair value of plan assets:\n\nAmounts recognized in the consolidated balance sheets as of October 30, 2004, and October 25, 2003, were as follows:\n\nThe projected benefit obligation, accumulated benefit obligation, and fair value of plan assets for the pension plans with accumulated benefit obligations in excess of plan assets were $101.8 million, $89.5 million, and $1.1 million, respectively, as of October 30, 2004, and $94.4 million, $76.7 million, and $0, respectively, as of October 25, 2003.\n\nNet periodic cost of defined benefit plans included the following:\n\n2004 Annual Report\n\n41", + "recall": 0.9404761904761905, + "true_md": "result in significant increases to participant contributions because expenses have already exceeded the company’s cap limit. The company decided to offer a new option to participants that fea- tured less volatile increases in participant contributions but still results in future increases that will be determined by the future rate of health care inflation. As a result of a significant number of participants choosing the new option, the company’s benefit obligation increased by $37.6 million in fiscal 2003. Actuarial gains and losses and any adjustments resulting from plan amendments are deferred and amortized to expense over periods ranging from 10-18 years.\n\nThe annual measurement date used to determine pension and other postretirement benefit amounts is August 1.\n\nThe Medicare Prescription Drug, Improvement and Modernization Act of 2003 (the Act) resulted in a reduction of the company’s accumulated postretirement benefit obligation (APBO) of $41.5 million in fiscal 2004, which represents an actuarial gain that will be amortized over future service periods. Application of the Act resulted in a decrease of $3.9 million in net periodic postretirement costs for the year. This decrease is made up of a reduction in loss amortization of $2.0 million, reduction in service cost of $0.2 mil- lion, and reduction in interest cost of $1.7 million. \n\nAmounts recognized in the consolidated balance sheets as of October 30, 2004, and October 25, 2003, were as follows:\n\nThe following is a reconciliation of the beginning and ending bal- ances of the benefit obligation and the fair value of plan assets:\n\nThe projected benefit obligation, accumulated benefit obligation, and fair value of plan assets for the pension plans with accumu- lated benefit obligations in excess of plan assets were $101.8 mil- lion, $89.5 million, and $1.1 million, respectively, as of October 30, 2004, and $94.4 million, $76.7 million, and $0, respectively, as of October 25, 2003.\n\nNet periodic cost of defined benefit plans included the following:\n\n2004 Annual Report 41" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9117927188013742, + "doc_id": "bbcebe7b4212907e9f14e2fd0785ed243923fa3e8a3630a453e16ab76efd113b", + "edit_distance": 0.8961156278229448, + "f1_score": 0.9706227967097533, + "meteor": 0.6463190782739799, + "precision": 0.9604651162790697, + "pred_md": "## (j) Investments in affiliates\n\nInvestment in the common stock of EFT Network Services, LLC ('Dash'), a 33 1/3% owned affiliate until wholly acquired on August 13, 1999, was accounted for by the equity method until the date of acquisition. Under this method, the Company's share of net income or loss was reflected in the Company's investment account, and dividends received are treated as a reduction of the investment account. The fair value of the investment in excess of the underlying equity in net assets is amortized over 10 years. The acquisition on August 13, 1999 was accounted for under the purchase method of accounting (see note 4).\n\n## (k) Income taxes\n\nIncome taxes are accounted for under the asset and liability method. Deferred tax assets and liabilities are recognized for the future tax consequences attributable to diff e rences between the financial statement carrying amounts of existing assets and liabilities and their respective tax bases and operating loss and tax credit carry f o rw a rds. Deferred tax assets and liabilities are measured using enacted tax rates expected to apply to taxable income in the years in which those temporary diff e rences are expected to be re c o v e red or settled. The e ffect on deferred tax assets and liabilities of a change in tax rates is recognized in income in the period that includes the enactment date.\n\n## (l) Risks and uncertainties\n\nThe Company has made a number of estimates and assumptions related to the re p o rting of assets and liabilities and the disclosure of contingent assets and liabilities to pre p a re these consolidated financial statements in conformity with generally accepted accounting principles. Actual results could differ from those estimates.\n\n## (m) Revenue recognition\n\nE u ronet recognizes revenue at the point at which the service is perf o rmed. Revenues from software licensing agreement contracts are recognized on a percentage of completion basis whereby a pro-rata portion of revenue and related costs are recognized as the work p ro esses. Revenues from software licensing agreement contracts re p resenting newly released products deemed to have a higher than gr n o mal risk of failure during installation are recognized on a completed contract basis whereby revenues and related costs are deferre d r until the contract is complete.\n\n## (n) Research and development costs\n\nThe Company applies SFAS 2 and 86 in re c o rding re s e a rch and development costs. Research costs aimed at the discovery of new knowledge with the hope that such knowledge will be useful in developing a new product or service or a new process or technique or in bringing about significant improvement to an existing product or process are expensed as incurred (refer to Note 24). Development costs aimed at the translation of re s e a rch findings or other knowledge into a plan or design for a new product or process or for a significant i m p rovement to an existing product or process whether intended for sale or use are capitalized on a pro d u c t - b y - p roduct basis when technological feasibility is established.\n\nTechnological feasibility of computer software products is established when the Company has completed all planning, designing, coding, and testing activities that are necessary to establish that the product can be produced to meet its design specifications including functions, f e atu res, and technical perf o rmance re q u i rements.\n\nCapitalized software costs are amortized on a pro d u c t - b y - p roduct basis equal to the greater of the amount computed using (a) the ratio that current gross revenues for a product bear to the total of current and anticipated future gross revenues for that product or (b) the straight-line method over the remaining estimated economic life of the product, generally three years, including the period being re p o rt e d on. Amortization commences in the period when the product is available for general release to customers.\n\n## (o) Loss per share\n\nLoss per share has been calculated by dividing the net loss attributable to common shareholders by the weighted-average number of s h es outstanding during the year. The effect of potential common shares (stock options and warrants outstanding) is anti-dilutive. ar A c d , dilutive loss per share does not assume the exercise of the stock options and warrants outstanding. cor ingly\n\n## (p) Stock-based compensation\n\nThe Company accounts for stock-based compensation using the intrinsic value method prescribed in Accounting Principles Board Opinion No. 25, 'Accounting for Stock Issued to Employees' and related Interpretations. Accord i n g l y, compensation cost for stock options is measured as the excess, if any, of the fair market value of the Company's shares at the date of the grant over the exercise price. Such compensation cost is charged to expense on a straight-line basis over the vesting period of the respective options. If vesting is accelerated as a result of certain milestones, the unrecognized compensation would be re c o rded as expense on the date such milestones have or have been deemed to have been achieved. The Company has adopted the disclosure-only provisions of SFAS No. 123 (see Note 18).\n\n## (q) Reclassifications\n\nC e tain amounts have been reclassified in the prior year consolidated financial statements to conform to the 2000 consolidated financial r statement presentation.\n\n## ( 4 ) A c quisitions\n\nOn March 26, 1999 the Company signed an agreement with Service Bank GmbH & Co. KG ('Service Bank') to acquire 252 installed AT M s in Germany and 36 ATMs in inventory. The purchase price for this established ATM network was 12.2 million Deutsche Marks ($6.7 million). Pursuant to the agreement, the Company receives monthly fees based on revenues realized from the ATMs less certain expenses and\n\n3 1", + "recall": 0.9809976247030879, + "true_md": "- (j) Investments in affiliates \n\n- (k) Income taxes \n\n- (l) Risks and uncertainties \n\n- (m) Revenue recognition \n\n- (n) Research and development costs \n\n- (o) Loss per share \n\n- (p) Stock-based compensation \n\n- (q) Reclassifications \n\n- ( 4 ) A c q u i s i t i o n s\n\nOn March 26, 1999 the Company signed an agreement with Service Bank GmbH & Co. KG (“Service Bank”) to acquire 252 installed AT M s in Germany and 36 ATMs in inventory. The purchase price for this established ATM network was 12.2 million Deutsche Marks ($6.7 million). Pursuant to the agreement, the Company receives monthly fees based on revenues realized from the ATMs less certain expenses and\n\n3 1\n\nC e rtain amounts have been reclassified in the prior year consolidated financial statements to conform to the 2000 consolidated financial statement presentation. \n\nThe Company accounts for stock-based compensation using the intrinsic value method prescribed in Accounting Principles Board Opinion No. 25, “Accounting for Stock Issued to Employees” and related Interpretations. Accord i n g l y, compensation cost for stock options is measured as the excess, if any, of the fair market value of the Company’s shares at the date of the grant over the exercise price. Such compensation cost is charged to expense on a straight-line basis over the vesting period of the respective options. If vesting is accelerated as a result of certain milestones, the unrecognized compensation would be re c o rded as expense on the date such milestones have or have been deemed to have been achieved. The Company has adopted the disclosure-only provisions of SFAS No. 123 (see Note 18). \n\nLoss per share has been calculated by dividing the net loss attributable to common shareholders by the weighted-average number of s h a res outstanding during the year. The effect of potential common shares (stock options and warrants outstanding) is anti-dilutive. A c c o rd i n g l y, dilutive loss per share does not assume the exercise of the stock options and warrants outstanding. \n\nCapitalized software costs are amortized on a pro d u c t - b y - p roduct basis equal to the greater of the amount computed using (a) the ratio that current gross revenues for a product bear to the total of current and anticipated future gross revenues for that product or (b) the straight-line method over the remaining estimated economic life of the product, generally three years, including the period being re p o rt e d on. Amortization commences in the period when the product is available for general release to customers. \n\nTechnological feasibility of computer software products is established when the Company has completed all planning, designing, coding, and testing activities that are necessary to establish that the product can be produced to meet its design specifications including functions, f e a t u res, and technical perf o rmance re q u i rements. \n\nThe Company applies SFAS 2 and 86 in re c o rding re s e a rch and development costs. Research costs aimed at the discovery of new knowledge with the hope that such knowledge will be useful in developing a new product or service or a new process or technique or in bringing about significant improvement to an existing product or process are expensed as incurred (refer to Note 24). Development costs aimed at the translation of re s e a rch findings or other knowledge into a plan or design for a new product or process or for a significant i m p rovement to an existing product or process whether intended for sale or use are capitalized on a pro d u c t - b y - p roduct basis when technological feasibility is established. \n\nE u ronet recognizes revenue at the point at which the service is perf o rmed. Revenues from software licensing agreement contracts are recognized on a percentage of completion basis whereby a pro-rata portion of revenue and related costs are recognized as the work p ro g resses. Revenues from software licensing agreement contracts re p resenting newly released products deemed to have a higher than n o rmal risk of failure during installation are recognized on a completed contract basis whereby revenues and related costs are deferre d until the contract is complete. \n\nThe Company has made a number of estimates and assumptions related to the re p o rting of assets and liabilities and the disclosure of contingent assets and liabilities to pre p a re these consolidated financial statements in conformity with generally accepted accounting principles. Actual results could differ from those estimates. \n\nIncome taxes are accounted for under the asset and liability method. Deferred tax assets and liabilities are recognized for the future tax consequences attributable to diff e rences between the financial statement carrying amounts of existing assets and liabilities and their respective tax bases and operating loss and tax credit carry f o rw a rds. Deferred tax assets and liabilities are measured using enacted tax rates expected to apply to taxable income in the years in which those temporary diff e rences are expected to be re c o v e red or settled. The e ffect on deferred tax assets and liabilities of a change in tax rates is recognized in income in the period that includes the enactment date. \n\nInvestment in the common stock of EFT Network Services, LLC (“Dash”), a 33 1/3% owned affiliate until wholly acquired on August 13, 1999, was accounted for by the equity method until the date of acquisition. Under this method, the Company’s share of net income or loss was reflected in the Company’s investment account, and dividends received are treated as a reduction of the investment account. The fair value of the investment in excess of the underlying equity in net assets is amortized over 10 years. The acquisition on August 13, 1999 was accounted for under the purchase method of accounting (see note 4)." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9146537420125839, + "doc_id": "d6c6a8193af03ff5a16256cfb3e91d945134060ca7508bc5cbc558735285b724", + "edit_distance": 0.08886389201349831, + "f1_score": 0.9544827586206898, + "meteor": 0.943298569879307, + "precision": 0.9664804469273743, + "pred_md": "## Contractual Obligations and Commercial Commitments\n\nThe following table outlines the company's future contractual financial obligations as of October 30, 2004. (For additional information regarding these obligations, see Note E 'Long-term Debt and Other Borrowing Arrangements' and Note H 'Commitments and Contingencies.')\n\n(1) In the normal course of business, the company commits to purchase fixed quantities of livestock and grain from producers to ensure a steady supply of production inputs. Certain of these contracts are based on market prices at the time of delivery, for which the company has estimated the purchase commitment using current market prices as of October 30, 2004. The company also utilizes various hedging programs to manage the price risk associated with these commitments. As of October 30, 2004, these hedging programs result in a net reduction of $2,462 in future cash payments associated with the purchase commitments in fiscal 2005, which is not reflected in the table above.\n\n(2) The company also utilizes grow-out contracts with independent farmers to raise turkeys for the company. Under these contracts, livestock, feed, and other supplies are owned by the company. The farmers provide the required labor in facilities that they either own or sublease from the company and receive a fee per pound when the turkeys are delivered. As of October 30, 2004, the company had approximately 100 active contracts ranging from two to twenty-five years in duration. The grow-out activity is assumed to continue through the term of these active contracts and amounts in the table represent the company's obligation based on turkeys expected to be delivered from these farmers.\n\n(3) Amounts presented for other purchase obligations represent all known open purchase orders and all known contracts exceeding $1,000, related to the procurement of materials, supplies, and various services. The company primarily purchases goods and services on an as-needed basis, with no unconditional commitment. Therefore, the amounts in the table represent only a portion of expected future cash expenditures.\n\n(4) Amounts presented for capital expenditures represent only the company's short-term commitments to complete construction in progress at various Hormel Foods and Jennie-O Turkey Store locations. The company estimates total capital expenditures for fiscal 2005 to be $100,000.\n\n(5) Other long-term liabilities primarily represents payments under the company's deferred compensation plans and minimum payments required under supply agreements related to the sale of Vista International Packaging, Inc. Minority interest related to the Precept Foods operation is not included in the table above. Payments under the company's defined benefit pension and other postretirement benefit plans are also excluded from the table. (See estimated benefit payments for the next ten fiscal years in Note F 'Pension and Other Postretirement Health Care Benefits.')\n\nIn addition to the commitments set forth in the above table, at October 30, 2004, the company had $62,263 in standby letters of credit issued on behalf of the company. The standby letters of credit are primarily related to the company's self-insured workers' compensation programs and collateral required for an Internal Revenue Service refund, pending audit completion.\n\nThe company believes its financial resources, including a threeyear revolving credit facility for $150,000 and anticipated funds from operations, will be adequate to meet all current commitments.\n\n## Off-Balance Sheet Arrangements\n\nThe company enters into various agreements guaranteeing specified obligations of affiliated parties. In some cases, the company guarantees payment for raw materials that were purchased by a supplier of Hormel Foods. In other cases, the company provides a standby letter of credit for obligations of an affiliated party that may arise under worker compensation claims. The company's guarantees either terminate in one year or remain in place until such time\n\n28\n\nHormel Foods Corporation\n\nas Hormel Foods revokes the agreement. Total guarantees provided by the company, as of October 30, 2004, amounted to $3,604. These potential obligations are not reflected in the company's consolidated balance sheet.\n\n## Forward-Looking Statements\n\nThis report may contain 'forward-looking' information within the meaning of the federal securities laws. The 'forward-looking' information may include statements concerning the company's outlook for the future as well as other statements of beliefs, future plans, strategies, or anticipated events and similar expressions concerning matters that are not historical facts. 'Forward-looking' statements are subject to risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from those expressed in, or implied by, the statements. Among the factors that may affect the operating results of the company are the following: (i) fluctuations in the cost and availability of raw materials, such as commodity pork, poultry, and feed grain costs; (ii) changes in the availability and relative", + "recall": 0.9427792915531336, + "true_md": "## Contractual Obligations and Commercial Commitments\n\n## Off-Balance Sheet Arrangements\n\n## Forward-Looking Statements\n\nThe following table outlines the company’s future contractual financial obligations as of October 30, 2004. (For additional information regarding these obligations, see Note E “Long-term Debt and Other Borrowing Arrangements” and Note H “Commitments and Contingencies.”)\n\n(1) In the normal course of business, the company commits to purchase fixed quantities of livestock and grain from producers to ensure a steady supply of production inputs. Certain of these contracts are based on market prices at the time of delivery, for which the company has estimated the purchase commitment using current market prices as of October 30, 2004. The company also utilizes various hedging programs to manage the price risk associated with these commitments. As of October 30, 2004, these hedging programs result in a net reduction of $2,462 in future cash payments associated with the purchase commitments in fiscal 2005, which is not reflected in the table above.\n\n(2) The company also utilizes grow-out contracts with independent farmers to raise turkeys for the company. Under these contracts, livestock, feed, and other supplies are owned by the company. The farmers provide the required labor in facilities that they either own or sublease from the company and receive a fee per pound when the turkeys are delivered. As of October 30, 2004, the company had approximately 100 active contracts ranging from two to twenty-five years in duration. The grow-out activity is assumed to continue through the term of these active contracts and amounts in the table represent the company’s obligation based on turkeys expected to be delivered from these farmers.\n\n(3) Amounts presented for other purchase obligations represent all known open purchase orders and all known contracts exceeding $1,000, related to the procurement of materials, supplies, and various services. The company primarily purchases goods and services on an as-needed basis, with no unconditional commitment. Therefore, the amounts in the table represent only a portion of expected future cash expenditures.\n\n(4) Amounts presented for capital expenditures represent only the company’s short-term commitments to complete construction in progress at various Hormel Foods and Jennie-O Turkey Store locations. The company estimates total capital expenditures for fiscal 2005 to be $100,000.\n\n(5) Other long-term liabilities primarily represents payments under the company’s deferred compensation plans and minimum payments required under supply agreements related to the sale of Vista International Packaging, Inc. Minority interest related to the Precept Foods operation is not included in the table above. Payments under the company’s defined benefit pension and other postretire- ment benefit plans are also excluded from the table. (See estimated benefit payments for the next ten fiscal years in Note F “Pension and Other Postretirement Health Care Benefits.”)\n\nIn addition to the commitments set forth in the above table, at October 30, 2004, the company had $62,263 in standby letters of credit issued on behalf of the company. The standby letters of credit are primarily related to the company’s self-insured workers’ compensation programs and collateral required for an Internal Revenue Service refund, pending audit completion.\n\nThe company believes its financial resources, including a three- year revolving credit facility for $150,000 and anticipated funds from operations, will be adequate to meet all current commitments. \n\nThe company enters into various agreements guaranteeing speci- fied obligations of affiliated parties. In some cases, the company guarantees payment for raw materials that were purchased by a supplier of Hormel Foods. In other cases, the company provides a standby letter of credit for obligations of an affiliated party that may arise under worker compensation claims. The company’s guaran- tees either terminate in one year or remain in place until such time\n\nas Hormel Foods revokes the agreement. Total guarantees provided by the company, as of October 30, 2004, amounted to $3,604. These potential obligations are not reflected in the com- pany’s consolidated balance sheet. \n\nThis report may contain “forward-looking” information within the meaning of the federal securities laws. The “forward-looking” infor- mation may include statements concerning the company’s outlook for the future as well as other statements of beliefs, future plans, strategies, or anticipated events and similar expressions concerning matters that are not historical facts. “Forward-looking” statements are subject to risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from those expressed in, or implied by, the statements. Among the factors that may affect the operating results of the company are the following: (i) fluctuations in the cost and availability of raw materials, such as commodity pork, poultry, and feed grain costs; (ii) changes in the availability and relative\n\n28 Hormel Foods Corporation" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9080120636960153, + "doc_id": "2f3717d120bfad80dc3ad5ef9f71dd42b8a0a927c6f1934c3adbb729879f3cc0", + "edit_distance": 0.46348314606741575, + "f1_score": 0.9746646795827123, + "meteor": 0.9375905646235827, + "precision": 0.9790419161676647, + "pred_md": "26\n\nSustainability\n\n## MANAGING FOR SUSTAINABLE GROWTH\n\n'The publication of our first Sustainability Review in 2004 was a major achievement for Santos. The next steps are to undertake projects to improve our performance - not just in Australia but worldwide - and to accurately collect, verify and report on a range of sustainability data. '\n\n## MARTYN EAMES\n\nVice President Corporate and People\n\nLate in 2004 Santos published First Steps: Sustainability Review , the Company's first standalone publication on this topic. It describes how Santos is implementing the principles of sustainability in the areas of corporate governance, the environment, social responsibility and economic performance.\n\nAnnual Report 2004\n\nThis was a significant milestone for Santos as it represents a starting point for the collection of data and the ongoing measurement of performance in the area of sustainability.\n\nCommunicating with stakeholders is an important activity and the publication of the Sustainability Review is a further extension of Santos' commitment in this regard. Santos applies considerable resources to the communication effort and aims to present information in a clear and concise manner in order to generate a greater understanding of the business by its stakeholders.\n\nSantos has been recognised for its achievements in this area. Santos' 2003 Annual Report was featured as an example of best practice reporting in PricewaterhouseCoopers' Trends in Corporate Reporting 2004 publication. Reports from companies worldwide are considered in compiling this publication and they must meet specified criteria. This is the third time a Santos annual report has been featured. Santos was also awarded a 2004 Silver Award for Excellence in Annual Reporting for the 2002 Annual Report by the Australasian Reporting Awards.\n\nReceiving independent recognition for these activities serves as a reference point for Santos' desire to continually improve communication performance.\n\nSantos has been listed as an inaugural member of the Australian SAM Sustainability Index (AuSSI). The AuSSI tracks the performance of around 70 Australian companies that lead their industry in terms of economic, environmental and\n\n## TOTAL RECORDABLE CASE FREQUENCY RATE\n\nTRCFR per millions hours worked\n\nsocial criteria. The index is calculated daily by Dow Jones Indexes and published in The Australian newspaper.\n\nFollowing is an overview of progress and achievements in the area of sustainability for 2004.\n\n## SAFETY IMPROVING\n\nThe health and safety of employees is of paramount concern to Santos. Santos delivered another year of improvement in 2004 and achieved its lowest total recordable case frequency rate of 6.4.\n\nFurther improvements were also made with the implementation of the Environment, Health and Safety Management System standards, with Santos operations undergoing full assessments against standards for the first time.\n\nThe results demonstrated considerable improvement over the baseline assessments conducted in 2003 with steady progress in the implementation of the procedures, processes and tools needed to achieve the requirements of the standards.\n\nProcess safety capability which deals with plant and equipment integrity assurance, design and construction, and maintenance, is being developed through the formation of a new set of standards to be incorporated\n\ninto the health and safety management system.\n\nThe safety focus in 2005 will be on finalising a comprehensive set of hazard standards which outline the required controls to ensure that hazards encountered across Santos' operations and activities are well managed.\n\n## POSITIONING THE WORKFORCE FOR THE FUTURE\n\nSantos commenced a major company-wide transformational change program in late 2003. The program was designed to significantly improve Santos' performance in four areas: key business processes, financial performance, organisation structure and company culture.\n\nReorganising and simplifying the Company's structure was one of the major outcomes and in May 2004 Santos began operating under a new functionally-based organisation structure.\n\nThe new structure is designed to support the explorationfocused growth strategy. It mirrors the 'conveyor belt' lifecycle of an exploration and production company where exploration success leads to commercialisation and development activity and finally revenue-generating production.\n\nIt also follows the principle that the majority of employees should", + "recall": 0.9703264094955489, + "true_md": "## Sustainability\n\n## MANAGING FOR SUST AINABLE GROWTH\n\n‘The publication of our first Sustainability Review in 2004 was a major achievement for Santos. The next steps are to undertake projects to improve our performance – not just in Australia but worldwide – and to accurately collect, verify and report on a range of sustainability data.’\n\nMARTYN EAMES Vice President Corporate and People\n\nLate in 2004 Santos published First Steps: Sustainability Review , the Company’s first standalone publication on this topic. It describes how Santos is implementing the principles of sustainability in the areas of corporate governance, the environment, social responsibility and economic performance.\n\nAnnual Report 2004 26\n\nThis was a significant milestone for Santos as it represents a starting point for the collection of data and the ongoing measurement of performance in the area of sustainability.\n\nTRCFR per millions hours worked\n\nCommunicating with stakeholders is an important activity and the publication of the Sustainability Review is a further extension of Santos’ commitment in this regard. Santos applies considerable resources to the communication effort and aims to present information in a clear and concise manner in order to generate a greater understanding of the business by its stakeholders. \n\nSantos has been recognised for its achievements in this area. Santos’ 2003 Annual Report was featured as an example of best practice reporting in PricewaterhouseCoopers’ Trends in Corporate Reporting 2004 publication. Reports from companies worldwide are considered in compiling this publication and they must meet specified criteria. This is the third time a Santos annual report has been featured. Santos was also awarded a 2004 Silver Award for Excellence in Annual Reporting for the 2002 Annual Report by the Australasian Reporting Awards. \n\nReceiving independent recognition for these activities serves as a reference point for Santos’ desire to continually improve communication performance.\n\nSantos has been listed as an inaugural member of the Australian SAM Sustainability Index (AuSSI). The AuSSI tracks the performance of around 70 Australian companies that lead their industry in terms of economic, environmental and \n\nProcess safety capability which deals with plant and equipment integrity assurance, design and construction, and maintenance, is being developed through the formation of a new set of standards to be incorporated \n\nIt also follows the principle that the majority of employees should\n\nThe new structure is designed to support the exploration- focused growth strategy. It mirrors the ‘conveyor belt’ lifecycle of an exploration and production company where exploration success leads to commercialisation and development activity and finally revenue-generating production. \n\nThe results demonstrated considerable improvement over the baseline assessments conducted in 2003 with steady progress in the implementation of the procedures, processes and tools needed to achieve the requirements of the standards.\n\nReorganising and simplifying the Company’s structure was one of the major outcomes and in May 2004 Santos began operating under a new functionally-based organisation structure.\n\nFurther improvements were also made with the implementation of the Environment, Health and Safety Management System standards, with Santos operations undergoing full assessments against standards for the first time. \n\nSantos commenced a major company-wide transformational change program in late 2003. The program was designed to significantly improve Santos’ performance in four areas: key business processes, financial performance, organisation structure and company culture. \n\n## POSITIONING THE WORKFORCE FOR THE FUTURE\n\n## SAFETY IMPROVING\n\n## TOTAL RECORDABLE CASE FREQUENCY RATE\n\ninto the health and safety management system. \n\nsocial criteria. The index is calculated daily by Dow Jones Indexes and published in The Australian newspaper.\n\nFollowing is an overview of progress and achievements in the area of sustainability for 2004. \n\nThe safety focus in 2005 will be on finalising a comprehensive set of hazard standards which outline the required controls to ensure that hazards encountered across Santos’ operations and activities are well managed. \n\nThe health and safety of employees is of paramount concern to Santos. Santos delivered another year of improvement in 2004 and achieved its lowest total recordable case frequency rate of 6.4." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6598442721163766, + "doc_id": "4ba6f01a9a0c8021de98827fd9ce4da270db2b5923ab64360cc1c5b367a74f0d", + "edit_distance": 0.6745562130177515, + "f1_score": 0.8297872340425531, + "meteor": 0.7586880685330742, + "precision": 0.7878787878787878, + "pred_md": "THE INTEGRATION OF OUR BELIEFS ,WISDOM ,CURIOSITY ,& KNOWLEDGE PROVIDES BALANCE & STABILITY .\n\nC O R P O R A T E V A L U E S :\n\nCorning's Values provide an unchanging moral and ethical compass that guides the actions of everyone in the company. The corporate values are: Quality, Integrity, Performance, Leadership, Innovation, Independence, and The Individual.\n\nquality i n teg ri performance leadership i n n o vati o n i n d ependence i i i i i i i T O T A L Q U A L I T Y : In alignment with the quality policy of the ion, our policy is orporat to achieve Total Quality performance. Total Quality performance means understanding who the customer is, what the requirements are, and meeting those requirements better than anyone else, without error, on time, every time.", + "recall": 0.8764044943820225, + "true_md": "## C ORPORATE VALUES:\n\n## T OTAL Q UALITY:\n\nCorning’s Values provide an unchanging moral and ethical compass that guides the actions of everyone in the company. The corporate values are: Quality, Integrity, Performance, Leadership, Innovation, Independence, and The Individual.\n\nIn alignment with the quality policy of the corporation, our policy is to achieve Total Quality performance. Total Quality performance means understanding who the customer is, what the requirements are, and meeting those requirements better than anyone else, without error, on time, every time.\n\nquality integrity performance i i i\n\nintegrity performance leadership innovation independence i i i i i i\n\nTHE INTEGRATION OF OUR BELIEFS, WISDOM, CURIOSITY, & KNOWLEDGE PROVIDES BALANCE & STABILITY." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8736867994898873, + "doc_id": "8ac917895d3c00e8cf1ee0d36706b41317b68985f9c3932238aa5537351d616a", + "edit_distance": 0.14772727272727273, + "f1_score": 0.9528535980148882, + "meteor": 0.9328937017478061, + "precision": 0.964824120603015, + "pred_md": "WHO WE ARE\n\n## AUTOMOBILES\n\n## Light Commercial Vehicles\n\n## Making Light Commercial Profitable\n\nANDY PALMER Vice President\n\nANDY PALMER Vice President\n\n'The auto industry has traditionally viewed light commercial vehicles-what we call LCVs-as factory-fillers; vehicles that were fine to turn out as long as they were marginally profitable. The difference today is that we think Nissan can profitably market LCVs in every segment and territory. Over the last two and a half years, for example, we've turned things around from a loss to an operating profit margin of 4 percent. That figure already exceeds the industry average. Now we're committed to bringing LCVs into line with the other areas of Nissan's business. By fiscal 2007, we plan to have an operating margin of eight percent and a 40 percent increase in volume to 434,000 units. That will bring us into the top rank of LCV producers and to the top in profitability.\n\nOne big consideration is that the average model in our lineup today is nearly ten years old. Creating a breakthrough with a lineup this old is difficult, and we examined the worth of continuing in this line of business. In the end, we decided to stay in and aggressively pursue profit. We came up with six strategies to make that happen:\n\n- · Renew the portfolio. During NISSAN Value-Up, we will start and finish nearly nine new vehicle actions.\n- · Reduce cost and increase value. We will accomplish these goals with the same customer-centered techniques used for passenger vehicles since the Nissan Revival Plan.\n- · Enter new territories. The market in Japan is flat or trending down, and there are many competitors in Europe. But China is an emerging market, and we have a strong relationship with Dongfeng, our partner there.\n- · Pursue OEM deals. We're open to cross-badging our vehicles under somebody else's name.", + "recall": 0.9411764705882353, + "true_md": "## Making Light Commercial Profitable\n\n“The auto industry has traditionally viewed light commercial vehicles—what we call LCVs—as factory-fillers; vehicles that were fine to turn out as long as they were marginally profitable. The difference today is that we think Nissan can profitably market LCVs in every segment and territory. Over the last two and a half years, for example, we’ve turned things around from a loss to an operating profit margin of 4 percent. That figure already exceeds the industry average. Now we’re committed to bringing LCVs into line with the other areas of Nissan’s business. By fiscal 2007, we plan to have an operating margin of eight percent and a 40 percent increase in volume to 434,000 units. That will bring us into the top rank of LCV producers and to the top in profitability.\n\nOne big consideration is that the average model in our lineup today is nearly ten years old. Creating a breakthrough with a lineup this old is difficult, and we examined the worth of continuing in this line of business. In the end, we decided to stay in and aggressively pursue profit. We came up with six strategies to make that happen:\n\n- • Renew the portfolio. During NISSAN Value-Up, we will start and finish nearly nine new vehicle actions. \n\n- • Reduce cost and increase value. We will accomplish these goals with the same customer-centered techniques used for passenger vehicles since the Nissan Revival Plan.\n\n- • Enter new territories. The market in Japan is flat or trending down, and there are many competitors in Europe. But China is an emerging market, and we have a strong relationship with Dongfeng, our partner there. \n\n- • Pursue OEM deals. We’re open to cross-badging our vehicles under somebody else’s name. \n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 26\n\nANDY PALMER Vice President\n\nWHO WE ARE\n\nAUTOMOBILES\n\nLight Commercial Vehicles" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8886605085390655, + "doc_id": "0c676a75589e625b3495c7abf4c9ec063e4eddffe8095a2d4b83b72d922ec50c", + "edit_distance": 0.2222222222222222, + "f1_score": 0.9836065573770493, + "meteor": 0.9914203039316862, + "precision": 0.967741935483871, + "pred_md": "FINANCIAL SECTION\n\n76\n\n## CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS\n\nNissan Motor Co., Ltd. and Consolidated Subsidiaries Fiscal years 2004, 2003 and 2002\n\nSee notes to consolidated financial statements.\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS\n\nNissan Motor Co., Ltd. and Consolidated Subsidiaries Fiscal years 2004, 2003 and 2002\n\nSee notes to consolidated financial statements.\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 76\n\nFINANCIAL SECTION" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9449658768087458, + "doc_id": "ce68ea1db9f2cc76ebff610f1936fc058c220fae55430db9b9dbb1bcb1d7221d", + "edit_distance": 0.046464646464646465, + "f1_score": 0.9649681528662422, + "meteor": 0.9735849817445781, + "precision": 0.9588607594936709, + "pred_md": "1 8\n\nOperating Loss The total Network Services Segment operating loss decreased to $6.1 million for the year ended December 31, 2000 from $12.9 million for the year ended December 31, 1999, an improvement of 53%, as a result of the factors discussed above. The Central European Subsegment re c o rded an operating loss of $3.1 million for the year ended December 31, 2000 compared to a loss of $8.0 million for the year ended December 30, 1999, an improvement of 61%, as a result of the factors discussed above. The We s t e rn European Sub-segment operating loss d e eased to $2.3 million for year ended December 31, 2000 compared to a loss of $3.8 million for the year ended December 31, 1999, an cr i m p rovement of 39%, as a result of the factors discussed above. The Other ATM Operations Sub-segment incurred an operating loss of $700,000 for the year ended December 31, 2000 compared to a loss of $1.0 million for the year ended December 31, 1999, an improvement of 30%, as a result of the factors discussed above.\n\n## Software Solutions Segment\n\nSoftware Solutions Revenue Revenues from the Software Solutions Segment totaled $16.0 million before inter-segment eliminations for the year ended December 31, 2000 as compared to revenue of $15.1 for the year ended December 31, 1999. Software revenues are grouped into four b road categories: software license fees, professional service fees, maintenance fees and hard w a re sales. Software license fees are the initial fees c h ged by the Company for the licensing of its pro p r i e t a ry application software to customers. Professional service fees are charged for ar customization, installation and consulting services provided to customers. Software maintenance fees are the ongoing fees charged to customers for the maintenance of the software products. Hard w a re sales revenues are derived from the sale of computer products and are re p o rted net of cost of sales. The components of software solutions revenue for the years ended December 31, 2000 and 1999 were:\n\nThe increases in software license fees from 1999 to 2000 can be attributed to an increased number of software sales contracts signed in 2000 as c o m p a ed to 1999, primarily in the first half of the year 2000. Sales of the Company's core software products have dropped off substantially in r the third and fourth quarter of 2000 and are expected to be soft again during 2001. The Company believes that revenues of the Software Solutions Segment will increasingly be derived from the Company's new set of software solutions, including its wireless banking solutions. The decreases in professional service fees from 1999 to 2000 can be attributed to increased efficiency in the installation of software.\n\nSoftware Sales Backlog The Company defines 'software sales backlog' as fees specified in contracts which have been executed by the Company and for which the Company expects recognition of the related revenue within one year. At December 31, 2000 the revenue backlog was $3.5 million, as compared to December 31, 1999 the revenue backlog was $3.1 million. The increase in backlog from December 31, 1999 re s u l t s principally from growth in software sales. It is management's intention to continue to focus on expediting delivery and implementation of software in an eff o rt to reduce backlog while continuing sales growth.\n\nT h e e can be no assurance that the contracts included in backlog will actually generate the specified revenues or that the revenues will be r generated within the one-year period.\n\nOperating Expenses S o f tw a re Solutions Segment operating expenses consist primarily of salaries and benefits, selling, general and administrative, and depreciation and amortization. In addition, the Company re c o rded a $11.2 million one-time write down of goodwill and other identifiable intangible assets associated with the Company's purchase of Euronet USA in December 1998 (see Note 10 to Consolidated Financial Statements - Asset Write Down). Total segment operating expenses increased to $37.5 million for the year ended December 31, 2000 from $22.3 million for the year ended December 31, 1999. The components of software solutions operating costs for the years ended December 31, 2000 and 1999 were:\n\nThe Company has made planned increases in staff in order to increase sales, accelerate development of certain software enhancements and re d u c e d e y times for software. These staff increases have resulted in a significant increase in salaries and benefits, which has contributed to the net liver losses of the Software Solutions Segment for the years ended December 31, 2000 and 1999. In January 2001, a reduction in the work force took place with the objective being to reduce costs to bring them more in line with the anticipated revenue.\n\nThe Company has an ongoing commitment to the development, maintenance and enhancement of its products and services. As a result of this commitment the Company has invested substantial amounts in re s e a rch and development. In part i c u l a r, the Company has invested and will continue to invest in new software products that will serve as the underlying application software that permits additional features and transactions", + "recall": 0.9711538461538461, + "true_md": "Operating Loss The total Network Services Segment operating loss decreased to $6.1 million for the year ended December 31, 2000 from $12.9 million for the year ended December 31, 1999, an improvement of 53%, as a result of the factors discussed above. The Central European Sub- segment re c o rded an operating loss of $3.1 million for the year ended December 31, 2000 compared to a loss of $8.0 million for the year ended December 30, 1999, an improvement of 61%, as a result of the factors discussed above. The We s t e rn European Sub-segment operating loss d e c reased to $2.3 million for year ended December 31, 2000 compared to a loss of $3.8 million for the year ended December 31, 1999, an i m p rovement of 39%, as a result of the factors discussed above. The Other ATM Operations Sub-segment incurred an operating loss of $700,000 for the year ended December 31, 2000 compared to a loss of $1.0 million for the year ended December 31, 1999, an improvement of 30%, as a result of the factors discussed above. \n\nSoftware Solutions Revenue Revenues from the Software Solutions Segment totaled $16.0 million before inter-segment eliminations for the year ended December 31, 2000 as compared to revenue of $15.1 for the year ended December 31, 1999. Software revenues are grouped into four b road categories: software license fees, professional service fees, maintenance fees and hard w a re sales. Software license fees are the initial fees c h a rged by the Company for the licensing of its pro p r i e t a ry application software to customers. Professional service fees are charged for customization, installation and consulting services provided to customers. Software maintenance fees are the ongoing fees charged to customers for the maintenance of the software products. Hard w a re sales revenues are derived from the sale of computer products and are re p o rted net of cost of sales. The components of software solutions revenue for the years ended December 31, 2000 and 1999 were: \n\nThe increases in software license fees from 1999 to 2000 can be attributed to an increased number of software sales contracts signed in 2000 as c o m p a red to 1999, primarily in the first half of the year 2000. Sales of the Company’s core software products have dropped off substantially in the third and fourth quarter of 2000 and are expected to be soft again during 2001. The Company believes that revenues of the Software Solutions Segment will increasingly be derived from the Company’s new set of software solutions, including its wireless banking solutions. The decreases in professional service fees from 1999 to 2000 can be attributed to increased efficiency in the installation of software. \n\n## Software Solutions Segment\n\nSoftware Sales Backlog The Company defines “software sales backlog” as fees specified in contracts which have been executed by the Company and for which the Company expects recognition of the related revenue within one year. At December 31, 2000 the revenue backlog was $3.5 million, as compared to December 31, 1999 the revenue backlog was $3.1 million. The increase in backlog from December 31, 1999 re s u l t s principally from growth in software sales. It is management’s intention to continue to focus on expediting delivery and implementation of software in an eff o rt to reduce backlog while continuing sales growth. \n\nT h e re can be no assurance that the contracts included in backlog will actually generate the specified revenues or that the revenues will be generated within the one-year period. \n\nOperating Expenses S o f t w a re Solutions Segment operating expenses consist primarily of salaries and benefits, selling, general and administrative, and depreciation and amortization. In addition, the Company re c o rded a $11.2 million one-time write down of goodwill and other identifiable intangible assets associated with the Company’s purchase of Euronet USA in December 1998 (see Note 10 to Consolidated Financial Statements – Asset Write Down). Total segment operating expenses increased to $37.5 million for the year ended December 31, 2000 from $22.3 million for the year ended December 31, 1999. The components of software solutions operating costs for the years ended December 31, 2000 and 1999 were: \n\nThe Company has made planned increases in staff in order to increase sales, accelerate development of certain software enhancements and re d u c e d e l i v e ry times for software. These staff increases have resulted in a significant increase in salaries and benefits, which has contributed to the net losses of the Software Solutions Segment for the years ended December 31, 2000 and 1999. In January 2001, a reduction in the work force took place with the objective being to reduce costs to bring them more in line with the anticipated revenue. \n\nThe Company has an ongoing commitment to the development, maintenance and enhancement of its products and services. As a result of this commitment the Company has invested substantial amounts in re s e a rch and development. In part i c u l a r, the Company has invested and will continue to invest in new software products that will serve as the underlying application software that permits additional features and transactions\n\n1 8" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9093312623544942, + "doc_id": "17dec04466517633d11a17c2edfe3b1a9f3edcb4c1c6137e6b7c632c46995112", + "edit_distance": 0.46502057613168724, + "f1_score": 0.9805447470817121, + "meteor": 0.886780083009134, + "precision": 0.972972972972973, + "pred_md": "## FISCAL YEAR 2004 SHARE PERFORMANCE\n\nDESPITE NISSAN'S RECORD OPERATING RESULT IN FISCAL 2004, ITS STOCK PERFORMANCE RETURN WAS NEGATIVE AND LOWER THAN THE TOPIX INDEX. THE INVESTOR RELATIONS TEAM WAS STRENGTHENED AT THE START OF FISCAL 2005 TO BETTER ADDRESS THE NEEDS OF INVESTORS AND ENHANCE THEIR UNDERSTANDING OF NISSAN'S PERFORMANCE. INVESTORS WILL NOW BE ABLE TO GAIN A MORE IN-DEPTH VIEW OF THE COMPANY'S OPERATIONS AND PERFORMANCE INDICATORS.\n\n## Share Performance in Fiscal 2004\n\nNissan's share price began at ¥1,143 at the beginning of fiscal 2004 and ended the fiscal year at ¥1,099, generating a negative return of 3.85 percent. Total shareholder return (TSR) was -1.67 percent, while the dividend yield came to 2.18 percent (¥24 per share dividend, divided by the ¥1,099 closing price). Adverse movements in foreign exchange rates and commodity price hikes adversely affected Nissan's profitability, which was reflected in the share price. In addition, specific events relating directly to the company also had a negative impact. Later in this report, corporate officers will explain what actions Nissan has undertaken to ensure better performance.\n\n## Payout Policy\n\nNissan announced its NISSAN Value-Up three-year dividend policy, covering the period from fiscal 2005 to fiscal 2007, at the annual general meeting of shareholders on June 23, 2004. Nissan proposes a long-term dividend policy to provide more visibility and improve transparency into the ways in which Nissan rewards its shareholders. Nissan believes that a long-term dividend policy reduces uncertainty for investors who already own or are considering acquiring Nissan stock.\n\n## Fiscal Year 2004 Share Performance\n\n(Index: April 1, 2004=100)\n\n## IR Activities\n\nUnder NISSAN Value-Up, the IR team's performance will be evaluated based on the price-earnings ratio (PER) and volatility relative to our major competitors. PER is used to measure how successfully the IR team manages market expectations about Nissan in order to maintain the Nissan share price close to an intrinsic value. The other measure, volatility, is used to measure the risk investors perceive when considering Nissan stock. If Nissan can successfully reduce volatility, the minimum return required by investors should decline. The IR team believes that a strengthening of disclosure activities is required to improve both measures. The team plans to disclose not only financial results but also more forward-looking information about Nissan fundamentals such as technology and product. Such forward-looking information helps investors to forecast future performance more precisely and reduces uncertainty about the future. As a consequence, Nissan will increase the number of investor conferences, events, and teleconferences during fiscal 2005.\n\n## Five-Year Share Performance\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004\n\n15\n\nPERFORMANCE", + "recall": 0.9882352941176471, + "true_md": "DESPITE NISSAN’S RECORD OPERATING RESULT IN FISCAL 2004, ITS STOCK PERFORMANCE RETURN WAS NEGATIVE AND LOWER THAN THE TOPIX INDEX. THE INVESTOR RELATIONS TEAM WAS STRENGTHENED AT THE START OF FISCAL 2005 TO BETTER ADDRESS THE NEEDS OF INVESTORS AND ENHANCE THEIR UNDERSTANDING OF NISSAN’S PERFORMANCE. INVESTORS WILL NOW BE ABLE TO GAIN A MORE IN-DEPTH VIEW OF THE COMPANY’S OPERATIONS AND PERFORMANCE INDICATORS.\n\nNissan’s share price began at ¥1,143 at the beginning of fiscal 2004 and ended the fiscal year at ¥1,099, generating a negative return of 3.85 percent. Total shareholder return (TSR) was -1.67 percent, while the dividend yield came to 2.18 percent (¥24 per share dividend, divided by the ¥1,099 closing price). Adverse movements in foreign exchange rates and commodity price hikes adversely affected Nissan’s profitability, which was reflected in the share price. In addition, specific events relating directly to the company also had a negative impact. Later in this report, corporate officers will explain what actions Nissan has undertaken to ensure better performance.\n\nUnder NISSAN Value-Up, the IR team’s performance will be evaluated based on the price-earnings ratio (PER) and volatility relative to our major competitors. PER is used to measure how successfully the IR team manages market expectations about Nissan in order to maintain the Nissan share price close to an intrinsic value. The other measure, volatility, is used to measure the risk investors perceive when considering Nissan stock. If Nissan can successfully reduce volatility, the minimum return required by investors should decline. The IR team believes that a strengthening of disclosure activities is required to improve both measures. The team plans to disclose not only financial results but also more forward-looking information about Nissan fundamentals such as technology and product. Such forward-looking information helps investors to forecast future performance more precisely and reduces uncertainty about the future. As a consequence, Nissan will increase the number of investor conferences, events, and teleconferences during fiscal 2005.\n\nNissan announced its NISSAN Value-Up three-year dividend policy, covering the period from fiscal 2005 to fiscal 2007, at the annual general meeting of shareholders on June 23, 2004. Nissan proposes a long-term dividend policy to provide more visibility and improve transparency into the ways in which Nissan rewards its shareholders. Nissan believes that a long-term dividend policy reduces uncertainty for investors who already own or are considering acquiring Nissan stock. \n\nFive-Year Share Performance\n\nFiscal Year 2004 Share Performance\n\nNissan Annual Report 2004 15\n\n## Payout Policy\n\n## IR Activities\n\n## Share Performance in Fiscal 2004\n\nPERFORMANCE\n\nFISCAL YEAR 2004 SHARE PERFORMANCE" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7995569646306252, + "doc_id": "1073c105c8213da579ddfa459a96b79f2635d68ff2a1343fcd9edc588b130980", + "edit_distance": 0.16666666666666666, + "f1_score": 0.8592592592592593, + "meteor": 0.8503123211901583, + "precision": 0.8992248062015504, + "pred_md": "- /H17076 T he Campbell Agency in Byron Center, Mich., found that by aligning its organization to mirror that of The Hartford, the two partners could work more closely-and grow more-together. For example, The Campbell Agency emulated The Hartford by dedicating a team to the small-business market.\n\nThat made the agency more proficient at identifying potential customers and setting sales targets, according to Mary Lou Barna, vice president, sales and marketing. In other words, she says, the partnership with The Hartford has made Barna and her colleagues better managers.\n\n- /H17073 D alal Maria Salomon, right, is managing director, investment officer of Salomon Group, part of First Union Securities in Richmond, Va. She strives to maintain high service levels for clients such as Daniel Austin, whose life insurance from The Hartford is part of\n\na diversified investment portfolio Salomon helps him manage. Salomon relies on The Hartford for outstanding service, versatile online tools and consistently strong returns. The Hartford's mutual funds are some of her first choices when designing a portfolio.\n\n15", + "recall": 0.8226950354609929, + "true_md": "15\n\nGLYPH<H17076> T he Campbell Agency in Byron Center, Mich., found that by align- ing its organization to mirror that of The Hartford, the two partners could work more closely—and grow more—together. For exam- ple, The Campbell Agency emulat- ed The Hartford by dedicating a team to the small-business market.\n\nThat made the agency more profi- cient at identifying potential cus- tomers and setting sales targets, according to Mary Lou Barna, vice president, sales and marketing. In other words, she says, the part- nership with The Hartford has made Barna and her colleagues better managers.\n\nGLYPH<H17073> D alal Maria Salomon, right, is managing director, investment officer of Salomon Group, part of First Union Securities in Richmond, Va. She strives to maintain high service levels for clients such as Daniel Austin, whose life insur- ance from The Hartford is part of \n\na diversified investment portfolio Salomon helps him manage. Salomon relies on The Hartford for outstanding service, versatile online tools and consistently strong returns. The Hartford’s mutual funds are some of her first choices when designing a portfolio." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.49041180180807975, + "doc_id": "06f36c467c2a3b2307be53bade626094cf2052758d88993af195b8501982dddc", + "edit_distance": 0.45161290322580644, + "f1_score": 0.84, + "meteor": 0.936868686868687, + "precision": 0.7241379310344828, + "pred_md": "SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEETS\n\nDecember 31, 2003, 2002 and 2001\n\nin thousands\n\nSee accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.\n\n13\n\n2003 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n■", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEETS\n\n13 ■ 2003 ANNUAL REPORT\n\nSee accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9087237060810788, + "doc_id": "6915ac44024d641be394ef25776f133a6ad5920efec077abe44bff1a0ed5ff08", + "edit_distance": 0.22485207100591717, + "f1_score": 0.9595959595959594, + "meteor": 0.9566614189078408, + "precision": 0.95, + "pred_md": "## OPERATIONS REVIEW\n\n## S E A G O I N G O P E R AT I O N S\n\nMermaid operates a fleet of fifteen (15) tugs, workboats and barges, undertaking all forms of offshore activity including exploration support, supply, survey and berthing assist. Lower vessel utilisation during the period allowed an acceleration of scheduled maintenance. Two tugs, Mermaid Commando and Mermaid Chieftan received extensive refits. In both cases the work increased productivity through enhanced bollard pull and consequent earnings.\n\nSafety was given the highest priority through new monitoring systems and awareness programs. Formalised on the job instruction and training courses have also lifted levels of experience and proficiency across the workforce.\n\nThe offshore waters and islands adjacent to Dampier, host in excess of 50% of all exploration and development budgets of Australia's offshore oil and gas industry. The Burrup Peninsular where the Base is located is the intended site of major new oil, gas, petrochemical and industrial mineral processing plants. The Port of Dampier is Australia's largest Port as measured by tonnage, but as identified in the 1997 W A Department of Commerce and Trade report, there remains an urgent need for additional marine support infrastructure. Mermaid is now well advanced in our plan to satisfy those needs and onshore work was announced to start on the 9th October 2000. DAMPIER BASE\n\nSince receiving approval in principle for development of the Dampier Base from the Western Australian Minister for the Environment in February 2000, engineering and general design work in connection with the base proceeded at an accelerated pace.\n\nThis work, assisted by technical studies and a re-assessment of an increased demand for services arising out of greater expectations for growth in the sector, has led to improvements and expansion of capacity over earlier plans.\n\nThe Dampier Base will now comprise:-\n\n·\n\n·\n\nAn 'all tides' approach channel to a minimum depth of 6 metres\n\nA wharf offering 7.5 metres depth at low tide, featuring a heavy loadout section to accommodate modules of up to 1500 tonnes to onshore projects on the Burrup Peninsular and adjacent mining centres. A subsea pipe reel loading facility will encourage the use of spool ships in the region for deepwater pipelay. On a project by project basis, pipeline protection rock dumping, specialist vessel rig up activities and the like will be facilitated, as will dry and bulk cargo handling, refuelling, watering and all categories of waste reception. The joint Commonwealth and WA State Government initiative to establish an integrated industrial estate at Jervoise Bay (south of Perth) serviced by high wide load corridors from Perth's industrial areas will see the heavy capacity wharf playing a strategic role in major capital works in the Pilbara, leading to significant cost savings.", + "recall": 0.9693877551020408, + "true_md": "- Mermaid operates a fleet of fifteen (15) tugs, workboats and barges, undertaking all forms of offshore activity including exploration support, supply, survey and berthing assist. Lower vessel utilisation during the period allowed an acceleration of scheduled maintenance. Two tugs, Mermaid Commando and Mermaid Chieftan received extensive refits. In both cases the work increased productivity through enhanced bollard pull and consequent earnings. SEAGOING OPERATIONS\n\n- The offshore waters and islands adjacent to Dampier, host in excess of 50% of all exploration and development budgets of Australia’s offshore oil and gas industry. The Burrup Peninsular where the Base is located is the intended site of major new oil, gas, petrochemical and industrial mineral processing plants. The Port of Dampier is Australia’s largest Port as measured by tonnage, but as identified in the 1997 WA Department of Commerce and Trade report, there remains an urgent need for additional marine support infrastructure. Mermaid is now well advanced in our plan to satisfy those needs and onshore work was announced to start on the 9th October 2000. D AMPIER BASE\n\nSafety was given the highest priority through new monitoring systems and awareness programs. Formalised on the job instruction and training courses have also lifted levels of experience and proficiency across the workforce.\n\nSince receiving approval in principle for development of the Dampier Base from the Western Australian Minister for the Environment in February 2000, engineering and general design work in connection with the base proceeded at an accelerated pace. \n\nThis work, assisted by technical studies and a re-assessment of an increased demand for services arising out of greater expectations for growth in the sector, has led to improvements and expansion of capacity over earlier plans.\n\nThe Dampier Base will now comprise:-\n\n- An “all tides” approach channel to a minimum depth of 6 metres •\n\n- A wharf offering 7.5 metres depth at low tide, featuring a heavy loadout section to accommodate modules of up to 1500 tonnes to onshore projects on the Burrup Peninsular and adjacent mining centres. A subsea pipe reel loading facility will encourage the use of spool ships in the region for deepwater pipelay. On a project by project basis, pipeline protection rock dumping, specialist vessel rig up activities and the like will be facilitated, as will dry and bulk cargo handling, refuelling, watering and all categories of waste reception. The joint Commonwealth and WA State Government initiative to establish an integrated industrial estate at Jervoise Bay (south of Perth) serviced by high wide load corridors from Perth’s industrial areas will see the heavy capacity wharf playing a strategic role in major capital works in the Pilbara, leading to significant cost savings. •\n\n8\n\n## OPERATIONS REVIEW" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "785d3b07b52395a609c7a4b34ec55e47c3e8ce94a52b6a05cedc1be09bff54df", + "edit_distance": 0.22485207100591717, + "f1_score": 0.9595959595959594, + "meteor": 0.9566614189078408, + "precision": 0.95, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.9693877551020408, + "true_md": "" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9692087571072525, + "doc_id": "b2b7893440ddc079e8b5a5e0ac15fa134f27f3f87a604bebe849ea6ec213665e", + "edit_distance": 0.31788079470198677, + "f1_score": 0.9936305732484076, + "meteor": 0.8358502148557397, + "precision": 0.9948979591836735, + "pred_md": "SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES\n\nMANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS\n\nThis annual report contains forward-looking statements within the meaning of Section 27A of the Securities Act of 1933 and Section 21E of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, including statements regarding our expectations, hopes, intentions, or strategies regarding the future. These statements are subject to certain risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from those anticipated in the forward-looking statements. Factors that might cause such a difference include, but are not limited to, changes in the interest rate environment, management's business strategy, national, regional and local market conditions, and legislative and regulatory conditions. The Company undertakes no obligation to publicly revise these forward-looking statements to reflect subsequent events or circumstances, except as required by law.\n\n## General\n\nShenandoah Telecommunications Company is a diversified telecommunications company providing both regulated and unregulated telecommunications services through its nine wholly owned subsidiaries. These subsidiaries provide local exchange telephone services, wireless personal communications services (PCS), as well as cable television, paging, Internet access, long distance, fiber optics facilities, and leased tower facilities. The Company is the exclusive provider of wireless mobility communications network products and services under the Sprint brand from Harrisonburg, Virginia to Harrisburg, York and Altoona, Pennsylvania. The Company refers to the Hagerstown, Maryland; Martinsburg, West Virginia; and Harrisonburg and Winchester, Virginia markets as its Quad State markets. The Company refers to the Altoona, Harrisburg, and York, Pennsylvania markets as its Central Penn markets. Competitive local exchange carrier (CLEC) services were established on a limited basis during 2002. In addition, the Company sells and leases equipment, mainly related to services it provides, and also participates in emerging services and technologies by direct investment in non-affiliated companies.\n\nThe Company reports revenues as wireless, wireline and other revenues. These revenue classifications are defined as follows: Wireless revenues are made up of the Personal Communications Company (a PCS Affiliate of Sprint), and the Mobile Company. Wireline revenues include the following subsidiary revenues in the financial results: Telephone Company, Network Company, Cable Television Company, and the Long Distance Company. Other revenues are comprised of the revenues of ShenTel Service Company, the Leasing Company, ShenTel Communications Company and the Holding Company. For additional information on the Company's business segments, see Note 14 to audited consolidated financial statements appearing elsewhere in this report.\n\nThe Company participates in the telecommunications industry, which requires substantial investment in fixed assets or plant. This significant capital requirement may preclude profitability during the initial years of operation. The strategy of the Company is to grow and diversify the business by adding services and geographic areas that can leverage the existing plant, but to do so within the opportunities and constraints presented by the industry. For many years the Company focused on reducing reliance on the regulated telephone operation, which up until 1981 was the primary business within the Company. This initial diversification was concentrated in other wireline businesses, such as the cable television and regional fiber facility businesses, but in 1990 the Company made its first significant investment in the wireless sector through its former investment in the Virginia 10 RSA Limited partnership. By 1998, revenues of the regulated telephone operation had decreased to 59.2% of total revenues. In that same year more than 76.6% of the Company's total revenue was generated by wireline operations, and initiatives were already underway to make wireless a more significant contributor to total revenues.\n\nDuring the 1990's significant investments were made in the cellular and PCS (wireless) businesses. The VA 10 RSA cellular operation, in which the Company held a 66% interest and was the general partner, experienced rapid revenue growth and excellent margins in the late 1990's. The cellular operation covered only six counties, and became increasingly dependent on roaming revenues. Management believed the roaming revenues and associated margins would be unsustainable as other wireless providers increasingly offered nationally-branded services with significantly reduced usage charges. To position it to participate in the newer, more advanced, digital wireless services, in 1995 the Company entered the PCS business through an affiliation with American Personal Communications (APC), initiating service along the Interstate 81 corridor from Harrisonburg, Virginia to Chambersburg, Pennsylvania. This territory was a very close match to the Company's fiber network, thereby providing economic integration that might not be available to other wireless carriers. In 1999, the Company entered a new affiliation arrangement with Sprint, the successor to APC (which introduced the Company to a nationally-branded wireless service) and expanded the PCS footprint further into Central Pennsylvania. The Company's combined capital investment in 2000 and 2001 in the PCS operation was $45.1 million.\n\n39\n\n2003 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n■", + "recall": 0.9923664122137404, + "true_md": "## SHENANDOAH TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS\n\n## General\n\nShenandoah Telecommunications Company is a diversified telecommunications company providing both regulated and unregulated telecommunications services through its nine wholly owned subsidiaries. These subsidiaries provide local exchange telephone services, wireless personal communications services (PCS), as well as cable television, paging, Internet access, long distance, fiber optics facilities, and leased tower facilities. The Company is the exclusive provider of wireless mobility communications network products and services under the Sprint brand from Harrisonburg, Virginia to Harrisburg, York and Altoona, Pennsylvania. The Company refers to the Hagerstown, Maryland; Martinsburg, West Virginia; and Harrisonburg and Winchester, Virginia markets as its Quad State markets. The Company refers to the Altoona, Harrisburg, and York, Pennsylvania markets as its Central Penn markets. Competitive local exchange carrier (CLEC) services were established on a limited basis during 2002. In addition, the Company sells and leases equipment, mainly related to services it provides, and also participates in emerging services and technologies by direct investment in non-affiliated companies.\n\nThe Company reports revenues as wireless, wireline and other revenues. These revenue classifications are defined as follows: Wireless revenues are made up of the Personal Communications Company (a PCS Affiliate of Sprint), and the Mobile Company. Wireline revenues include the following subsidiary revenues in the financial results: Telephone Company, Network Company, Cable Television Company, and the Long Distance Company. Other revenues are comprised of the revenues of ShenTel Service Company, the Leasing Company, ShenTel Communications Company and the Holding Company. For additional information on the Company’s business segments, see Note 14 to audited consolidated financial statements appearing elsewhere in this report.\n\nThe Company participates in the telecommunications industry, which requires substantial investment in fixed assets or plant. This significant capital requirement may preclude profitability during the initial years of operation. The strategy of the Company is to grow and diversify the business by adding services and geographic areas that can leverage the existing plant, but to do so within the opportunities and constraints presented by the industry. For many years the Company focused on reducing reliance on the regulated telephone operation, which up until 1981 was the primary business within the Company. This initial diversification was concentrated in other wireline businesses, such as the cable television and regional fiber facility businesses, but in 1990 the Company made its first significant investment in the wireless sector through its former investment in the Virginia 10 RSA Limited partnership. By 1998, revenues of the regulated telephone operation had decreased to 59.2% of total revenues. In that same year more than 76.6% of the Company’s total revenue was generated by wireline operations, and initiatives were already underway to make wireless a more significant contributor to total revenues.\n\nDuring the 1990’s significant investments were made in the cellular and PCS (wireless) businesses. The VA 10 RSA cellular operation, in which the Company held a 66% interest and was the general partner, experienced rapid revenue growth and excellent margins in the late 1990’s. The cellular operation covered only six counties, and became increasingly dependent on roaming revenues. Management believed the roaming revenues and associated margins would be unsustainable as other wireless providers increasingly offered nationally-branded services with significantly reduced usage charges. To position it to participate in the newer, more advanced, digital wireless services, in 1995 the Company entered the PCS business through an affiliation with American Personal Communications (APC), initiating service along the Interstate 81 corridor from Harrisonburg, Virginia to Chambersburg, Pennsylvania. This territory was a very close match to the Company’s fiber network, thereby providing economic integration that might not be available to other wireless carriers. In 1999, the Company entered a new affiliation arrangement with Sprint, the successor to APC (which introduced the Company to a nationally-branded wireless service) and expanded the PCS footprint further into Central Pennsylvania. The Company’s combined capital investment in 2000 and 2001 in the PCS operation was $45.1 million.\n\n39 ■ 2003 ANNUAL REPORT\n\nThis annual report contains forward-looking statements within the meaning of Section 27A of the Securities Act of 1933 and Section 21E of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, including statements regarding our expectations, hopes, intentions, or strategies regarding the future. These statements are subject to certain risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from those anticipated in the forward-looking statements. Factors that might cause such a difference include, but are not limited to, changes in the interest rate environment, management’s business strategy, national, regional and local market conditions, and legislative and regulatory conditions. The Company undertakes no obligation to publicly revise these forward-looking statements to reflect subsequent events or circumstances, except as required by law." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9627123019150392, + "doc_id": "ac016636ebdc97172497b130679278886185673f552fb2e0188fd00f3e334b95", + "edit_distance": 0.3536977491961415, + "f1_score": 0.9799732977303071, + "meteor": 0.9584318980352706, + "precision": 0.9786666666666667, + "pred_md": "## MANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS\n\n## OVERVIEW\n\nWith more than 4,600 associates across North America, Applied Industrial Technologies ('Applied,' the 'Company,' 'We,' 'Us' or 'Our') is a leading industrial distributor serving MRO and OEM customers in virtually every industry. In addition, Applied provides engineering, design and systems integration for industrial and fluid power applications, as well as customized mechanical, fabricated rubber and fluid power shop services. Applied also offers maintenance training and inventory management solutions that provide added value to its customers. We have a long tradition of growth dating back to 1923, the year our business was founded in Cleveland, Ohio. At June 30, 2012, business was conducted in the United States, Canada, Mexico and Puerto Rico from 476 facilities.\n\nWhen reviewing the discussion and analysis set forth below, please note that the majority of SKUs we sell in any given year were not sold in the prior year, resulting in the inability to quantify certain commonly used comparative metrics analyzing sales, such as changes in product mix and volume.\n\nOur fiscal 2012 sales were $2.4 billion, an increase of $162.6 million or 7.3% compared to the prior year. Net sales from acquired businesses added $16.6 million or 0.7% to the current year. Gross margin of 27.6% compares to 27.7% in the prior year. Our operating margin increased to 7.1% compared to the prior year's 6.8%. Our earnings per share was $2.54 versus $2.24 in fiscal year 2011, an increase of 13.4%.\n\nOur consolidated balance sheet remains strong. Shareholders' equity is $672.1 million, up from $633.6 million at June 30, 2011. Working capital increased $31.4 million from June 30, 2011 to $435.6 million at June 30, 2012. Our current ratio remains strong at 2.9 to 1, consistent with the June 30, 2011 level.\n\nApplied monitors several economic indices that have been key indicators for industrial economic activity in the United States. These include the Industrial Production and Manufacturing Capacity Utilization (MCU) indices published by the Federal Reserve Board and the Purchasing Managers Index (PMI) published by the Institute for Supply Management (ISM). Historically, our performance correlates well with the MCU which measures productivity and calculates a ratio of actual manufacturing output versus potential full capacity output. When manufacturing plants are running at a high rate of capacity, they tend to wear out machinery and require replacement parts. Our sales tend to lag the MCU by up to six months.\n\nIndustrial production increased 0.4% in June after having declined 0.2% in May. In the manufacturing sector, outputs advanced 0.7% in June, reversing a decline of 0.7% in May and increased at an annual rate of 1.4% in the second quarter. In June, capacity utilization for manufacturing moved up 0.4% to 77.7%, a rate 13.9 percentage points above its trough in June of 2009 and was still 1.1 percentage points below its long-run average. The ISM PMI registered 49.7 in June, the first time this indicator dropped below 50 (its expansionary threshold) since July 2009. We remain optimistic about the U.S. industrial economy for our fiscal 2013.\n\n## YEAR ENDED JUNE 30, 2012 vs. 2011\n\nThe following table is included to aid in review of Applied's statements of consolidated income.\n\nNet sales in fiscal 2012 were $2.4 billion, which was $162.6 million or 7.3% above the prior year, driven by improvements in the industrial economy as well as a continued focus on profitable sales growth. Incremental net sales from companies acquired since the prior year period contributed approximately $16.6 million or 0.7%. Currency translation decreased fiscal year sales by approximately $1.8 million or 0.1%. In local currency, net sales from our Canadian operations were up 12.2% from fiscal 2011, including 2.8% from acquisitions. In local currency, net sales from our Mexican operations were up 25.9%. The number of selling days in fiscal 2012 was the same as in fiscal 2011.\n\nNet sales of our Service Center Based Distribution segment increased $133.8 million, or 7.6%, compared to fiscal year 2011 led by improvements in the industrial economy as well as a continued focus on profitable sales growth, with acquisitions adding $16.6 million or 0.9%. Net sales of our Fluid Power Businesses segment increased $28.8 million or 6.5%, also driven by improvements in the industrial economy as well as a continued focus on profitable sales growth.\n\nThe sales product mix for fiscal 2012 was 70.8% industrial products and 29.2% fluid power products compared to 70.5% industrial and 29.5% fluid power in the prior year.\n\nAt June 30, 2012, we had a total of 476 operating facilities in the U.S., Canada and Mexico versus 474 at June 30, 2011.\n\nApplied Industrial Technologies, Inc. and Subsidiaries\n\n5\n\n1", + "recall": 0.9812834224598931, + "true_md": "## OVERVIEW\n\nMANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS\n\nWith more than 4,600 associates across North America, Applied Industrial Technologies (“Applied,” the “Company,” “We,” “Us” or “Our”) is a leading industrial distributor serving MRO and OEM customers in virtually every industry. In addition, Applied provides engineering, design and systems integration for industrial and fluid power applications, as well as customized mechanical, fabricated rubber and fluid power shop services.\n\nApplied also offers maintenance training and inventory management solutions that provide added value to its customers. We have a long tradition of growth dating back to 1923, the year our business was founded in Cleveland, Ohio. At June 30, 2012, business was conducted in the United States, Canada, Mexico and Puerto Rico from 476 facilities.\n\nWhen reviewing the discussion and analysis set forth below, please note that the majority of SKUs we sell in any given year were not sold in the prior year, resulting in the inability to quantify certain commonly used comparative metrics analyzing sales, such as changes in product mix and volume. \n\nOur fiscal 2012 sales were $2.4 billion, an increase of $162.6 million or 7.3% compared to the prior year. Net sales from acquired businesses added $16.6 million or 0.7% to the current year. Gross margin of 27.6% compares to 27.7% in the prior year. Our operating margin increased to 7.1% compared to the prior year’s 6.8%. Our earnings per share was $2.54 versus $2.24 in fiscal year 2011, an increase of 13.4%. \n\nOur consolidated balance sheet remains strong. Shareholders’ equity is $672.1 million, up from $633.6 million at June 30, 2011.\n\nWorking capital increased $31.4 million from June 30, 2011 to $435.6 million at June 30, 2012. Our current ratio remains strong at 2.9 to 1, consistent with the June 30, 2011 level. \n\nApplied monitors several economic indices that have been key indicators for industrial economic activity in the United States.\n\nThese include the Industrial Production and Manufacturing Capacity Utilization (MCU) indices published by the Federal Reserve Board and the Purchasing Managers Index (PMI) published by the Institute for Supply Management (ISM). \n\nHistorically, our performance correlates well with the MCU which measures productivity and calculates a ratio of actual manufacturing output versus potential full capacity output.\n\nWhen manufacturing plants are running at a high rate of capacity, they tend to wear out machinery and require replacement parts. Our sales tend to lag the MCU by up to six months. \n\nNet sales in fiscal 2012 were $2.4 billion, which was $162.6 million or 7.3% above the prior year, driven by improvements in the industrial economy as well as a continued focus on profitable sales growth. Incremental net sales from companies acquired since the prior year period contributed approximately $16.6 million or 0.7%. Currency translation decreased fiscal year sales by approximately $1.8 million or 0.1%. In local currency, net sales from our Canadian operations were up 12.2% from fiscal 2011, including 2.8% from acquisitions. In local currency, net sales from our Mexican operations were up 25.9%. The number of selling days in fiscal 2012 was the same as in fiscal 2011. \n\nNet sales of our Service Center Based Distribution segment increased $133.8 million, or 7.6%, compared to fiscal year 2011 led by improvements in the industrial economy as well as a continued focus on profitable sales growth, with acquisitions adding $16.6 million or 0.9%. Net sales of our Fluid Power Businesses segment increased $28.8 million or 6.5%, also driven by improvements in the industrial economy as well as a continued focus on profitable sales growth. \n\nThe sales product mix for fiscal 2012 was 70.8% industrial products and 29.2% fluid power products compared to 70.5% industrial and 29.5% fluid power in the prior year. \n\nAt June 30, 2012, we had a total of 476 operating facilities in the U.S., Canada and Mexico versus 474 at June 30, 2011. \n\n5 Applied Industrial Technologies, Inc. and Subsidiaries\n\nIndustrial production increased 0.4% in June after having declined 0.2% in May. In the manufacturing sector, outputs advanced 0.7% in June, reversing a decline of 0.7% in May and increased at an annual rate of 1.4% in the second quarter. In June, capacity utilization for manufacturing moved up 0.4% to 77.7%, a rate 13.9 percentage points above its trough in June of 2009 and was still 1.1 percentage points below its long-run average. The ISM PMI registered 49.7 in June, the first time this indicator dropped below 50 (its expansionary threshold) since July 2009. We remain optimistic about the U.S. industrial economy for our fiscal 2013. \n\nThe following table is included to aid in review of Applied’s statements of consolidated income. \n\n## YEAR ENDED JUNE 30, 2012 vs. 2011" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8454585629606707, + "doc_id": "6cec800894f2b4fc67db6ae77515feeb6fe5f74828dd3f6d716f63c474dfff83", + "edit_distance": 0.7568807339449541, + "f1_score": 0.9486166007905138, + "meteor": 0.8949059201468564, + "precision": 0.96, + "pred_md": "## Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nDollar amounts are in thousands of canadian dollars (except share and per share amounts)\n\n## 16. Capital Stock and Contributed Surplus (continued)\n\nDividend Reinvestment Plan\n\nKillam's Dividend reinvestment Plan ('DriP') allows common shareholders to elect to have all cash dividends from Killam reinvested in additional common shares. Shareholders who participate in the DRIP receive an additional dividend of common shares equal to 3% of each cash dividend that was reinvested. the price per share is calculated by reference to a ten day volume weighted average closing price of Killam's common shares on the Toronto Stock Exchange preceding the relevant dividend date, which typically is on or about the 15th day of the month following the dividend declaration.\n\n## Contributed Surplus\n\n## 17 Share-Based Compensation\n\nKillam did not issue stock options during 2013 or 2012.\n\nOptions exercised or forfeited during the years ended December 31 are as follows:\n\nThe following table summarizes the stock options outstanding:\n\nThe exercisable options had a weighted average exercise price of $7.60 at December 31, 2013 (December 31, 2012 - $7.25).\n\n86\n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013", + "recall": 0.9375, + "true_md": "Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except share and per share amounts)\n\n- 16. Capital Stock and Contributed Surplus (continued)\n\n- 17 Share‑Based Compensation\n\n86 Killam ProPerties inc | 2013\n\n## Dividend Reinvestment Plan\n\n## Contributed Surplus\n\nThe exercisable options had a weighted average exercise price of $7.60 at December 31, 2013 (December 31, 2012 ‑ $7.25).\n\nThe following table summarizes the stock options outstanding:\n\nOptions exercised or forfeited during the years ended December 31 are as follows:\n\nKillam did not issue stock options during 2013 or 2012.\n\nKillam’s Dividend reinvestment Plan (“DriP”) allows common shareholders to elect to have all cash dividends from Killam reinvested in additional common shares. Shareholders who participate in the DRIP receive an additional dividend of common shares equal to 3% of each cash dividend that was reinvested. the price per share is calculated by reference to a ten day volume weighted average closing price of Killam’s common shares on the Toronto Stock Exchange preceding the relevant dividend date, which typically is on or about the 15th day of the month following the dividend declaration." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9148214283346131, + "doc_id": "d5387b87888f7d208d72a5a27434fd86b9d71238ec32449243097ae1ebedad76", + "edit_distance": 0.6557377049180327, + "f1_score": 0.9600000000000002, + "meteor": 0.7781801581679333, + "precision": 0.9664429530201343, + "pred_md": "SMBC\n\nLoans (Nonconsolidated)\n\n## Classification under Self-Assessment, Disclosure of Problem Assets, and Write-Offs/Reserves\n\n- Notes: 1. Includes amount of direct reduction totaling ¥496.2 billion.\n- 2. Includes reserves for assets that are not subject to disclosure under the Financial Reconstruction Law. (Bankrupt/Effectively Bankrupt Borrowers: ¥4.1 billion; Potentially Bankrupt Borrowers: ¥18.3 billion)\n- 3. Reserve ratios for claims on Bankrupt/Effectively Bankrupt Borrowers, Potentially Bankrupt Borrowers, Substandard Borrowers, and Borrowers Requiring Caution: The proportion of each category's total unsecured claims covered by reserve for possible loan losses.\n- 4. Reserve ratios for claims on Normal Borrowers and Borrowers Requiring Caution (excluding claims to Substandard Borrowers): The proportion of each category's total claims covered by reserve for possible loan losses. The reserve ratio for unsecured claims on Borrowers Requiring Caution (excluding claims to Substandard Borrowers) is shown in brackets.\n- 5. Includes amount of specific reserve for Borrowers Requiring Caution totaling ¥0.2 billion.\n- 6. Ratio of problem assets to total assets subject to the Financial Reconstruction Law\n- 7. Reserve ratio = (Specific reserve + General reserve for substandard loans) / (Bankrupt and quasi-bankrupt assets + Doubtful assets + Substandard loans Portion secured by collateral or guarantees, etc.)\n\n## Off-Balancing Problem Assets\n\n- Notes: 1. The off-balancing (also known as 'final disposal') of problem assets refers to the removal of such assets from the bank's balance sheet by way of sale, direct write-off or other means.\n- 2. The figures shown in the above table under 'new occurrences' and 'off-balanced' are simple additions of the figures for the first and second halves of the 2 periods reviewed. Amounts of ¥179.6 billion for fiscal 2009 and ¥74.3 billion in fiscal 2010, recognized as 'new occurrences' in the first halves of the terms, were included in the amounts off-balanced in the respective second halves.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n170", + "recall": 0.9536423841059603, + "true_md": "SMBC Loans (Nonconsolidated)\n\n## Off-Balancing Problem Assets\n\nNotes: 1. The off-balancing (also known as “final disposal”) of problem assets refers to the removal of such assets from the bank’s balance sheet by way of sale, direct write-off or other means.\n\n2. The figures shown in the above table under “new occurrences” and “off-balanced” are simple additions of the figures for the first and second halves of the 2 periods reviewed. Amounts of ¥179.6 billion for fiscal 2009 and ¥74.3 billion in fiscal 2010, recognized as “new occurrences” in the first halves of the terms, were included in the amounts off-balanced in the respective second halves.\n\nSMFG 2011 170\n\n- 2. Includes reserves for assets that are not subject to disclosure under the Financial Reconstruction Law. (Bankrupt/Effectively Bankrupt Borrowers: ¥4.1 billion; Potentially Bankrupt Borrowers: ¥18.3 billion)\n\n- 3. Reserve ratios for claims on Bankrupt/Effectively Bankrupt Borrowers, Potentially Bankrupt Borrowers, Substandard Borrowers, and Borrowers Requiring Caution: The proportion of each category’s total unsecured claims covered by reserve for possible loan losses.\n\n- 4. Reserve ratios for claims on Normal Borrowers and Borrowers Requiring Caution (excluding claims to Substandard Borrowers): The proportion of each category’s total claims covered by reserve for possible loan losses. The reserve ratio for unsecured claims on Borrowers Requiring Caution (excluding claims to Substandard Borrowers) is shown in brackets.\n\n- 5. Includes amount of specific reserve for Borrowers Requiring Caution totaling ¥0.2 billion.\n\n- 6. Ratio of problem assets to total assets subject to the Financial Reconstruction Law\n\n- 7. Reserve ratio = (Specific reserve + General reserve for substandard loans) / (Bankrupt and quasi-bankrupt assets + Doubtful assets + Substandard loans – Portion secured by collateral or guarantees, etc.)\n\n## Classification under Self-Assessment, Disclosure of Problem Assets, and Write-Offs/Reserves\n\nNotes: 1. Includes amount of direct reduction totaling ¥496.2 billion." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7799950505759817, + "doc_id": "e14f51ff834581e39c372f322df879c217f1747558d6bffc5c37320cd71463c6", + "edit_distance": 0.3125, + "f1_score": 0.9032258064516129, + "meteor": 0.8792196123732511, + "precision": 0.9333333333333333, + "pred_md": "Designed and Produced by APM Graphics Management > 1800 806 930\n\nCorporate Information", + "recall": 0.875, + "true_md": "Corporate Inf ormation\n\nDesigned and Produced by APM Graphics Management > 1800 806 930" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9683082695123182, + "doc_id": "8db4c5729b9354a384b7a0c6c566934d7fba595dcaf2f1aa4c52bdef1ec8b6f5", + "edit_distance": 0.05574912891986063, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9930934407695625, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Asia and Oceania\n\n- ■ Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation (China) Limited Head Office (Shanghai)\n- ■ Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation (China) Limited Tianjin Branch\n- ■ Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation (China) Limited Guangzhou Branch\n- ■ Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation (China) Limited Suzhou Branch\n- ■ Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation (China) Limited Hangzhou Branch\n- ■ Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation (China) Limited Beijing Branch\n- ■ Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation (China) Limited Shenyang Branch\n- ■ Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation (China) Limited Shenzhen Branch\n\n224\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n- ■ Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation (China) Limited Tianjin Binhai Sub-Branch\n- ■ Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation (China) Limited Suzhou Industrial Park Sub-Branch\n- ■ Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation (China) Limited Changshu Sub-Branch\n- ■ Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation (China) Limited Shanghai Puxi Sub-Branch\n- ■ Shanghai Branch\n- ■ Dalian Representative Office\n- ■ Chongqing Representative Office\n- ■ Hong Kong Branch\n\nSMBC Capital Markets (Asia) Limited\n\n- ■ Taipei Branch\n- ■ Seoul Branch\n- ■ Singapore Branch\n- ■ Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation Malaysia Berhad\n- ■ Labuan Branch Kuala Lumpur Office\n- ■ Labuan Branch\n- ■ Ho Chi Minh City Branch\n- ■ Hanoi Branch\n- ■ Vietnam Export Import Commercial Joint Stock Bank\n- ■ Yangon Representative Office\n- ■ Bangkok Branch\n- SBCS Co., Limited\n- ■ Manila Representative Office\n- SMBC Metro Investment Corporation\n- ■ Sydney Branch\n\nSumitomo Mitsui Finance Australia Limited\n\n- ■ PT Bank Sumitomo Mitsui Indonesia\n- ■ New Delhi Representative Office SMBC Capital India Private Limited", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## Asia and Oceania\n\n- ■ Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation (China) Limited Head Office (Shanghai)\n\n- ■ Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation (China) Limited Tianjin Branch\n\n- ■ Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation (China) Limited Guangzhou Branch\n\n- ■ Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation (China) Limited Suzhou Branch\n\n- ■ Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation (China) Limited Hangzhou Branch\n\n- ■ Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation (China) Limited Beijing Branch\n\n- ■ Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation (China) Limited Shenyang Branch\n\n- ■ Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation (China) Limited Shenzhen Branch\n\n- ■ Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation (China) Limited Tianjin Binhai Sub-Branch\n\n- ■ Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation (China) Limited Suzhou Industrial Park Sub-Branch \n\n- ■ Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation (China) Limited Changshu Sub-Branch\n\n- ■ Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation (China) Limited Shanghai Puxi Sub-Branch\n\n- ■ Shanghai Branch\n\n- ■ Dalian Representative Office\n\n- ■ Chongqing Representative Office\n\n- ■ Taipei Branch\n\n- ■ Hong Kong Branch SMBC Capital Markets (Asia) Limited\n\n- ■ Seoul Branch\n\n- ■ Singapore Branch\n\n- ■ Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation Malaysia Berhad\n\n- ■ Labuan Branch Kuala Lumpur Office\n\n- ■ Labuan Branch\n\n- ■ Ho Chi Minh City Branch\n\n- ■ Hanoi Branch\n\n- ■ Vietnam Export Import Commercial Joint Stock Bank\n\n- ■ Yangon Representative Office\n\n- ■ Bangkok Branch SBCS Co., Limited\n\n- ■ Manila Representative Office SMBC Metro Investment Corporation\n\n- ■ Sydney Branch Sumitomo Mitsui Finance Australia Limited\n\n- ■ PT Bank Sumitomo Mitsui Indonesia\n\n- ■ New Delhi Representative Office SMBC Capital India Private Limited\n\nSMFG 2011 224" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9514976489003086, + "doc_id": "2ef391a87f5330c17c73d9c9c478316cdbca0ff12312d1f207c9590fc9595ca1", + "edit_distance": 0.5398230088495575, + "f1_score": 0.9754768392370572, + "meteor": 0.7366022817724186, + "precision": 0.9728260869565217, + "pred_md": "SMFG\n\nCapital Ratio Information\n\n## A. Measurement Using the Quantification Model\n\n- (A) Estimation of Loss Severity Distribution\n\n## a. Smoothed Bootstrap Method\n\nWe employ the 'smoothed bootstrap' method for generating the loss distribution. The smoothed bootstrap method is one of the methods that connect the distribution, of the realized risk and the potential risk event, smoothly. Under this method, no assumptions are made about the shape of the distribution as a whole, but assumptions are made on the individual distribution related to realized individual losses. Therefore, this method takes advantage of the widely known parametric method (method assuming a distribution) as well as the non-parametric one (method not assuming a distribution).\n\nUnder the non-parametric method, if we use historical internal loss data to generate the loss severity distribution, we are not able to create the samples outside the actual observation points, and also it is particularly difficult to create a distribution with a fat tail. However, through the use of the method that can combine such data (on actual observations) with data on potential risks, it becomes possible to create large losses that occur rarely (with a potential impact) and that have not actually been found in historical internal loss data. In generating the distribution, while 'high-frequency low-severity' events are based on sufficient historical internal loss data volume, for 'low-frequency high-severity' events in the tail of the distribution, the historical internal data volume is insufficient. This approach makes it possible to reflect the severity (frequency of occurrence) of potential risk that has been assessed in the risk control assessments. In this way, using this model, realized risks and potential risks can be combined with congruity.\n\nIn estimating the loss distribution under this method, the Kernell function (partially assumed function) is applied to the loss data by the pile-up of functions. In particular, the log-normal distribution is applied as the Kernell function.\n\n## b. Supplementing Results of Risk Control Assessments with Extreme Value Theory\n\nIn order to capture potential risks, a statistical method known as Extreme Value Theory is used in addition to the results of risk control assessments. Extreme Value Theory is the statistical assessment method by which risks that may occur in the future accompanying larger losses than the actually observed ones in the internal loss data can be quantified, and fulfills the role of supplementing the risk control assessments.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n206", + "recall": 0.9781420765027322, + "true_md": "SMFG\n\nCapital Ratio Information\n\n## A. Measurement Using the Quantification Model\n\n## (A) Estimation of Loss Severity Distribution\n\n## a. Smoothed Bootstrap Method\n\n## b. Supplementing Results of Risk Control Assessments with Extreme Value Theory\n\nSMFG 2011 206\n\nIn order to capture potential risks, a statistical method known as Extreme Value Theory is used in addition to the results of risk control assessments. Extreme Value Theory is the statistical assessment method by which risks that may occur in the future accompanying larger losses than the actually observed ones in the internal loss data can be quantified, and fulfills the role of supplementing the risk control assessments. \n\nIn estimating the loss distribution under this method, the Kernell function (partially assumed function) is applied to the loss data by the pile-up of functions. In particular, the log-normal distribution is applied as the Kernell function.\n\nUnder the non-parametric method, if we use historical internal loss data to generate the loss severity distribution, we are not able to create the samples outside the actual observation points, and also it is particularly difficult to create a distribution with a fat tail. However, through the use of the method that can combine such data (on actual observations) with data on potential risks, it becomes possible to create large losses that occur rarely (with a potential impact) and that have not actually been found in historical internal loss data. In generating the distribution, while “high-frequency low-severity” events are based on sufficient historical internal loss data volume, for “low-frequency high-severity” events in the tail of the distribution, the historical internal data volume is insufficient. This approach makes it possible to reflect the severity (frequency of occurrence) of potential risk that has been assessed in the risk control assessments. In this way, using this model, realized risks and potential risks can be combined with congruity.\n\nWe employ the “smoothed bootstrap” method for generating the loss distribution. The smoothed bootstrap method is one of the methods that connect the distribution, of the realized risk and the potential risk event, smoothly. Under this method, no assumptions are made about the shape of the distribution as a whole, but assumptions are made on the individual distribution related to realized individual losses. Therefore, this method takes advantage of the widely known parametric method (method assuming a distribution) as well as the non-parametric one (method not assuming a distribution)." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8612129336452159, + "doc_id": "40664bca725b7498f3b7cfc8f3d085cf34f832dcd8dbb302c7443efbbfcf4af4", + "edit_distance": 0.3831360946745562, + "f1_score": 0.9252525252525253, + "meteor": 0.9121389290542801, + "precision": 0.9233870967741935, + "pred_md": "As the pioneer in the issuance of the VISA Card in Japan and a leader in the domestic credit card industry, Sumitomo Mitsui Card Company, Limited, enjoys the strong support of its many customers and plays a major role as one of the strategic businesses of SMFG.\n\nLeveraging its strong brand image and its excellent capabilities across a wide range of card-related services, the company provides settlement and financing services focused around providing credit services that meet customer needs. Through its credit card business operations, the company aims to actively contribute to the realization of comfortable and affluent consumer lifestyles and make further\n\nCedyna Financial Corporation was formed in April 2009 as a result of the merger of OMC Card, Inc., Central Finance Co., Ltd. and QUOQ Inc., consolidating their client bases, marketing capabilities and expert knowledge. As a member of the SMFG Group, it strives to become 'the number one credit card business entity in Japan' by closely working with Sumitomo Mitsui Card.\n\nConcurrently, as a leading consumer finance company, it also provides the highest level of service for diverse consumer financial needs including credit cards, consumer credit, and solution marketing.\n\nSumitomo Mitsui Finance and Leasing Co., Ltd. (SMFL) was formed in October 2007 as a result of the merger of SMBC Leasing Company, Limited and Sumisho Lease Co., Ltd. SMFL strives to become one of the top leasing companies in Japan in terms of both quantity and quality by consolidating and leveraging the client portfolios and expert knowledge of SMBC Leasing Company based on the financial solution formulation capabilities of the SMFG Group, and those of Sumisho Lease Company based on its industrial association with the Sumitomo Corporation Group.\n\nSMFL meets the diversifying needs of our clients by providing high value-added services that go beyond the conventional level\n\ndramatic advances as a leading brand in its industry sector.\n\nCompany Name:\n\nSumitomo Mitsui Card\n\nCompany, Limited\n\nBusiness Profile:\n\nCredit card services\n\nEstablishment:\n\nDecember 26, 1967\n\nHead Office:\n\nTokyo Head Office:\n\n-2-20, Kaigan, 1\n\nMinato-ku, Tokyo\n\nOsaka Head Office:\n\n-5-15, Imab ashi,\n\n4\n\nChuo-ku, Osaka\n\nPresident & CEO:\n\nHideo Shimada\n\n(Appointed on June 29, 2011)\n\nNumber of Employees:\n\n2,300\n\n## www.smbc-card.com\n\n(Japanese only)\n\nCredit Ratings (as of June 30, 2011)\n\nLong-term\n\nShort-term\n\nJCR\n\nA+\n\nJ-1+\n\nFinancial Information (Years ended March 31)\n\n## www.cedyna.co.jp/english/\n\nCompany Name: Cedyna Financial Corporation Business Profile: Credit card services, consumer credit\n\nEstablishment: September 11, 1950 Head Office: Head Office: -23-20 Marunouchi, Naka-ku, 3 Nagoya Tokyo Head Office: -16-4 Konan, Minato-ku, 2 Tokyo President & CEO: Hajime Yamashita Number of Employees: 3,096\n\nCredit Ratings (as of June 30, 2011)\n\nJCR\n\nA\n\nJ-1\n\nFinancial Information (Years ended March 31)\n\n* OMC: OMC Card, Inc. CF: Central Finance Co., Ltd. QQ: QUOQ Inc.\n\nwww.smfl.co.jp/english/\n\nof leasing services, based on its decades of combined experiences of the different backgrounds and characteristics of the two companies. SMFL strives to contribute to society as a leading leasing company through quality leasing operations.\n\nCompany Name: Sumitomo Mitsui Finance and\n\nLeasing Co., Ltd.\n\nBusiness Profile: Leasing\n\nEstablishment: February 4, 1963\n\nHead Office:\n\nTokyo Head Office: 3-9-4, Nishi-Shimbashi, Minato-ku, Tokyo Osaka Head Office: -10-19, Minami-Semba, Chuo-ku, Osaka 3 President & CEO: Yoshinori Kawamura\n\n(Appointed on June 29, 2011) Number of Employees: 1,485\n\nCredit Ratings (as of June 30, 2011)\n\nFinancial Information (Years ended March 31)\n\nSMFG 2011\n\nLong-term\n\nShort-term\n\n17", + "recall": 0.9271255060728745, + "true_md": "As the pioneer in the issuance of the VISA Card in Japan and a leader in the domestic credit card industry, Sumitomo Mitsui Card Company, Limited, enjoys the strong support of its many customers and plays a major role as one of the strategic businesses of SMFG.\n\nLeveraging its strong brand image and its excellent capabilities across a wide range of card-related services, the company provides settlement and financing services focused around providing credit services that meet customer needs. Through its credit card busi- ness operations, the company aims to actively contribute to the realization of comfortable and affluent consumer lifestyles and make further \n\nCedyna Financial Corporation was formed in April 2009 as a result of the merger of OMC Card, Inc., Central Finance Co., Ltd. and QUOQ Inc., consolidating their client bases, marketing capabilities and expert knowledge. As a member of the SMFG Group, it strives to become “the number one credit card busi- ness entity in Japan” by closely working with Sumitomo Mitsui Card. \n\nConcurrently, as a leading consumer finance company, it also provides the highest level of service for diverse consumer finan- cial needs including credit cards, consumer credit, and solution marketing.\n\nSumitomo Mitsui Finance and Leasing Co., Ltd. (SMFL) was formed in October 2007 as a result of the merger of SMBC Leasing Company, Limited and Sumisho Lease Co., Ltd. SMFL strives to become one of the top leasing companies in Japan in terms of both quantity and quality by consolidating and leveraging the client portfolios and expert knowledge of SMBC Leasing Company based on the financial solution formulation capabilities of the SMFG Group, and those of Sumisho Lease Company based on its industrial association with the Sumitomo Corporation Group.\n\nSMFL meets the diversifying needs of our clients by providing high value-added ser- vices that go beyond the conventional level \n\nof leasing services, based on its decades of combined experiences of the different back- grounds and characteristics of the two com- panies. SMFL strives to contribute to society as a leading leasing company through quality leasing operations.\n\ndramatic advances as a leading brand in its industry sector.\n\nSMFG 2011 17\n\n## Financial Information (Years ended March 31)\n\n## Credit Ratings (as of June 30, 2011)\n\n(Japanese only)\n\nCompany Name: Sumitomo Mitsui Card Company, Limited\n\nTokyo Head Office: 1-2-20, Kaigan, Minato-ku, Tokyo\n\nOsaka Head Office: 4-5-15, Imab ashi, Chuo-ku, Osaka\n\nPresident & CEO: Hideo Shimada (Appointed on June 29, 2011)\n\nNumber of Employees: 2,300\n\nHead Office:\n\nEstablishment: December 26, 1967\n\nBusiness Profile: Credit card services\n\nCompany Name: Cedyna Financial Corporation\n\nBusiness Profile: Credit card services, consumer credit\n\nEstablishment: September 11, 1950\n\nHead Office:\n\nHead Office: 3-23-20 Marunouchi, Naka-ku, Nagoya\n\nTokyo Head Office: 2-16-4 Konan, Minato-ku, Tokyo\n\nPresident & CEO: Hajime Yamashita\n\nNumber of Employees: 3,096\n\nCompany Name: Sumitomo Mitsui Finance and Leasing Co., Ltd.\n\nBusiness Profile: Leasing\n\nEstablishment: February 4, 1963\n\nHead Office:\n\nTokyo Head Office: 3-9-4, Nishi-Shimbashi, Minato-ku, Tokyo Osaka Head Office: 3-10-19, Minami-Semba, Chuo-ku, Osaka\n\nPresident & CEO: Yoshinori Kawamura (Appointed on June 29, 2011)\n\nNumber of Employees: 1,485\n\n## Financial Information (Years ended March 31)\n\n## Credit Ratings (as of June 30, 2011)\n\n## www.smfl.co.jp/english/\n\n## Financial Information (Years ended March 31)\n\n## Credit Ratings (as of June 30, 2011)\n\n## www.cedyna.co.jp/english/\n\n## www.smbc-card.com\n\n* OMC: OMC Card, Inc. CF: Central Finance Co., Ltd. QQ: QUOQ Inc." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8135052987160233, + "doc_id": "91658f7ff9904adc3690ea962f9c64341f76b2e88eec4f69ff4214a5af0d8dd6", + "edit_distance": 0.17647058823529413, + "f1_score": 0.8999999999999999, + "meteor": 0.8975024215898382, + "precision": 0.9, + "pred_md": "Income Analysis (Consolidated)\n\nSMBC\n\n## Fees and Commissions\n\nNotes: 1. Domestic operations comprise the operations of SMBC (excluding overseas branches) and its domestic consolidated subsidiaries. Overseas operations comprise the operations of SMBC's overseas branches and its overseas consolidated subsidiaries.\n\n2. Intersegment transactions are reported in the 'Elimination' column.\n\n- 3. 'Investment trusts' are reported as sub-account of 'Fees and commissions' from the fiscal year ended March 31, 2011, because their significance increased.\n\n## Trading Income\n\nNotes: 1. Domestic operations comprise the operations of SMBC (excluding overseas branches) and its domestic consolidated subsidiaries. Overseas operations comprise the operations of SMBC's overseas branches and its overseas consolidated subsidiaries.\n\n2. Intersegment transactions are reported in the 'Elimination' column.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n157", + "recall": 0.9, + "true_md": "SMBC\n\nIncome Analysis (Consolidated)\n\n## Fees and Commissions\n\nNotes: 1. Domestic operations comprise the operations of SMBC (excluding overseas branches) and its domestic consolidated subsidiaries. Overseas operations comprise the operations of SMBC’s overseas branches and its overseas consolidated subsidiaries.\n\n2. Intersegment transactions are reported in the “Elimination” column.\n\n3. “Investment trusts” are reported as sub-account of “Fees and commissions” from the fiscal year ended March 31, 2011, because their significance increased.\n\nNotes: 1. Domestic operations comprise the operations of SMBC (excluding overseas branches) and its domestic consolidated subsidiaries. Overseas operations comprise the operations of SMBC’s overseas branches and its overseas consolidated subsidiaries.\n\n2. Intersegment transactions are reported in the “Elimination” column.\n\n## Trading Income\n\nSMFG 2011 157" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5307514409229971, + "doc_id": "90dda9d545cc1838b13fd9426406ea54028adfa3407971737ae2a3088b32a1da", + "edit_distance": 0.5, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.6090393718715905, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Nordstrom, Inc.\n\n## Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nDollar and share amounts in millions except per share, per option and per unit amounts\n\n## Assumptions\n\nWeighted-average assumptions used to determine our benefit obligation and SERP expense are as follows:\n\n## Future Benefit Payments and Contributions\n\nAs of January 31, 2015, the expected future benefit payments based upon the assumptions described above and including benefits attributable to estimated future employee service are as follows:\n\n## NOTE 8: DEBT AND CREDIT FACILITIES\n\n## Debt\n\nA summary of our long-term debt is as follows:\n\nAll of our Nordstrom private label card receivables and a 90% interest in our Nordstrom Visa credit card receivables serve as collateral for our Series 2011-1 Class A Notes.\n\n52", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## Nordstrom, Inc. Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n## Nordstrom, Inc. Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements Dollar and share amounts in millions except per share, per option and per unit amounts\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements Dollar and share amounts in millions except per share, per option and per unit amounts\n\nAssumptions Weighted-average assumptions used to determine our benefit obligation and SERP expense are as follows:\n\nFuture Benefit Payments and Contributions As of January 31, 2015, the expected future benefit payments based upon the assumptions described above and including benefits attributable to estimated future employee service are as follows:\n\nDebt A summary of our long-term debt is as follows:\n\nAll of our Nordstrom private label card receivables and a 90% interest in our Nordstrom Visa credit card receivables serve as collateral for our Series 2011-1 Class A Notes.\n\n## Assumptions Weighted-average assumptions used to determine our benefit obligation and SERP expense are as follows:\n\n## Future Benefit Payments and Contributions As of January 31, 2015, the expected future benefit payments based upon the assumptions described above and including benefits\n\n## NOTE 8: DEBT AND CREDIT FACILITIES\n\n## Debt A summary of our long-term debt is as follows:\n\n52" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6372942916254472, + "doc_id": "75086c6ba25323adb95ac28da4c1b8b16a25f958e89d578975e47faa6afc351c", + "edit_distance": 0.6296296296296297, + "f1_score": 0.96875, + "meteor": 0.8047730942844428, + "precision": 0.9789473684210527, + "pred_md": "## OFFICERS »\n\n## Aubrey K. McClendon\n\nChairman of the Board and Chief Executive Officer\n\n## Martha A. Burger\n\nSenior Vice President Human and Corporate Resources\n\nJames C. Johnson Senior Vice President -\n\nJames C. Johnson Senior Vice President -\n\nEnergy Marketing\n\n## Thomas S. Price, Jr.\n\nSenior Vice President Corporate Development and Government Relations\n\n## Cathy L. Tompkins\n\nSenior Vice President Information Technology and Chief Information Officer\n\n## Jeffrey L. Mobley\n\nSenior Vice President Investor Relations and Research\n\n## Jennifer M. Grigsby\n\nSenior Vice President, Treasurer and Corporate Secretary\n\n## Henry J. Hood\n\nSenior Vice President - Land and Legal and General Counsel\n\n## Douglas J. Jacobson\n\nExecutive Vice President Acquisitions and Divestitures\n\n## Domenic J. Dell'Osso, Jr.\n\nExecutive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer\n\n## Steven C. Dixon\n\nExecutive Vice President Operations and Geosciences and Chief Operating Officer\n\n## Jeffrey A. Fisher\n\nSenior Vice President Production\n\nMichael A. Johnson\n\nMichael A. Johnson\n\nSenior Vice President Accounting, Controller and Chief Accounting Officer\n\n## J. Mike Stice\n\nSenior Vice President - Natural Gas Projects and Chief Executive Officer Chesapeake Midstream Partners, L.P.\n\n## Stephen W. Miller\n\nSenior Vice President - Drilling\n\n2010 ANNUAL REPORT |\n\n29", + "recall": 0.9587628865979382, + "true_md": "2010 ANNUAL REPORT | 29\n\nAubrey K. McClendon Chairman of the Board and Chief Executive Officer \n\nSteven C. Dixon Executive Vice President – Operations and Geosciences and Chief Operating Officer\n\nDouglas J. Jacobson Executive Vice President – Acquisitions and Divestitures \n\nDomenic J. Dell’Osso, Jr. Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer\n\nMartha A. Burger Senior Vice President – Human and Corporate Resources\n\nJeffrey A. Fisher Senior Vice President – Production\n\nJennifer M. Grigsby Senior Vice President, Treasurer and Corporate Secretary\n\nHenry J. Hood Senior Vice President – Land and Legal and General Counsel\n\nJames C. Johnson Senior Vice President – Energy Marketing\n\nMichael A. Johnson Senior Vice President – Accounting, Controller and Chief Accounting Officer\n\nStephen W. Miller Senior Vice President – Drilling\n\nJeffrey L. Mobley Senior Vice President – Investor Relations and Research\n\nThomas S. Price, Jr. Senior Vice President – Corporate Development and Government Relations\n\nJ. Mike Stice Senior Vice President – Natural Gas Projects and Chief Executive Officer Chesapeake Midstream Partners, L.P.\n\nCathy L. Tompkins Senior Vice President – Information Technology and Chief Information Officer\n\n## OFFICERS »" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9404740433413382, + "doc_id": "d412ec7c0a4ff639f8b59f4bc21b3cc9b9fbc5a7f562362098fd7a4f07990b85", + "edit_distance": 0.46653543307086615, + "f1_score": 0.9900990099009901, + "meteor": 0.8386368635507144, + "precision": 0.9920634920634921, + "pred_md": "## We are a committed, strategic acquirer focused on clear priorities around our core industrial distribution business.\n\nMost recently, in April 2012, we announced our expansion into Australia and New Zealand with the definitive agreement to acquire the distribution businesses of SKF. We completed the acquisition effective August 1, 2012, subsequent to our year end. As one of the largest bearing suppliers in these markets, the SKF Distribution business provides an excellent foundation for growth. Both geographies present attractive markets, growing economies, and many common global customers. The business offers broad geographic coverage of Australia and New Zealand, with 37 locations reaching targeted vertical markets such as mining, steel, pulp and paper, agriculture, construction, and food and beverage. Furthermore, we have significant growth prospects by extending complementary product lines and solutions to these valued customers.\n\nBy completing this acquisition, we increase our footprint to more than 500 facilities across North America, Australia and New Zealand. Looking forward, acquisitions will continue to provide an excellent opportunity to extend our reach and serve our customers. We are a committed, strategic acquirer focused on clear priorities around our core industrial distribution business. With our strong financial position and proven integration capabilities, we are confident that we will generate sustained, long-term value for our shareholders.\n\n## Technology: Enhancing Our Capabilities\n\nWith hundreds of service centers and plans for future acquisitions, our need for an enhanced, unified information technology system became increasingly apparent. In October 2010 we embarked on a multi-year journey - an ERP initiative - to transform our company's technology platforms and enhance our business information and transaction systems. This initiative supports our current operations and provides a strong foundation for our acquisition strategy.\n\nWith our phased ERP roll-out, we have had two successful launches in Western Canada, and our teams are busy building and planning for our first U.S. deployments in the fourth quarter of the 2012 calendar year. We are encouraged by our progress to date and are confident in our ability to execute across our U.S., Mexico and Eastern Canadian locations. The common ERP system will help standardize and simplify our processes, amplify our operational excellence initiatives and generate value throughout our business enterprise.\n\n## Applied has strong capabilities, great potential and room to grow.\n\n## Long-Range Strategy:\n\n## Translating Potential Into Results\n\nWe remain proud of our past achievements, and we are encouraged - and energized - by the realm of future opportunities. We are especially excited about the shared belief among our management, our associates and our suppliers that we can do even more to generate profitable growth. Applied has strong capabilities, great potential and room to grow.\n\nApplied Industrial Technologies, Inc. and Subsidiaries\n\n3", + "recall": 0.9881422924901185, + "true_md": "We are a committed, strategic acquirer focused on clear priorities around our core industrial distribution business.\n\nWith hundreds of service centers and plans for future acquisitions, our need for an enhanced, unified information technology system became increasingly apparent. In October 2010 we embarked on a multi-year journey – an ERP initiative – to transform our company’s technology platforms and enhance our business information and transaction systems. This initiative supports our current operations and provides a strong foundation for our acquisition strategy.\n\nMost recently, in April 2012, we announced our expansion into Australia and New Zealand with the definitive agreement to acquire the distribution businesses of SKF. We completed the acquisition effective August 1, 2012, subsequent to our year end. As one of the largest bearing suppliers in these markets, the SKF Distribution business provides an excellent foundation for growth. Both geographies present attractive markets, growing economies, and many common global customers. The business offers broad geographic coverage of Australia and New Zealand, with 37 locations reaching targeted vertical markets such as mining, steel, pulp and paper, agriculture, construction, and food and beverage. Furthermore, we have significant growth prospects by extending complementary product lines and solutions to these valued customers.\n\nBy completing this acquisition, we increase our footprint to more than 500 facilities across North America, Australia and New Zealand. Looking forward, acquisitions will continue to provide an excellent opportunity to extend our reach and serve our customers. We are a committed, strategic acquirer focused on clear priorities around our core industrial distribution business. With our strong financial position and proven integration capabilities, we are confident that we will generate sustained, long-term value for our shareholders.\n\nWe remain proud of our past achievements, and we are encouraged – and energized – by the realm of future opportunities. We are especially excited about the shared belief among our management, our associates and our suppliers that we can do even more to generate profitable growth. Applied has strong capabilities, great potential and room to grow. \n\nApplied has strong capabilities, great potential and room to grow.\n\nWith our phased ERP roll-out, we have had two successful launches in Western Canada, and our teams are busy building and planning for our first U.S. deployments in the fourth quarter of the 2012 calendar year. We are encouraged by our progress to date and are confident in our ability to execute across our U.S., Mexico and Eastern Canadian locations. The common ERP system will help standardize and simplify our processes, amplify our operational excellence initiatives and generate value throughout our business enterprise.\n\n3 Applied Industrial Technologies, Inc. and Subsidiaries\n\n## Technology: Enhancing Our Capabilities\n\n## Long-Range Strategy: Translating Potential Into Results" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.897782982902293, + "doc_id": "c796ac204e1d7a445db3b63f0c19c27dbaeb615ff492f91d5223a964f5d3b1b8", + "edit_distance": 0.15079365079365079, + "f1_score": 0.9820554649265907, + "meteor": 0.8287294871816518, + "precision": 0.9868852459016394, + "pred_md": "## notes to the consolidated Financial statements\n\nDollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except share and per share amounts)\n\n## 2. Significant Accounting Policies (continued)\n\nDeferred income tax assets are recognized only to the extent that it is probable that taxable profit will be available against which deductible temporary differences, carried forward tax credits, or tax losses can be utilized. The carrying value of deferred income tax assets are reviewed at each reporting date and reduced to the extent it is no longer probable that the income tax asset will be recovered.\n\nThe Company determines the deferred tax consequences associated with temporary differences relating to investment properties as if the carrying amount of the investment property is recovered entirely through sale.\n\nDeferred income tax assets and liabilities are measured at the tax rates that are expected to apply to the year when the asset is realized or the liability is settled, based on tax rates (and tax laws) that have been enacted or substantively enacted at the reporting date.\n\nDeferred income tax relating to items recognized directly in equity is recognized in equity and not in profit or loss.\n\n## 3. Significant Accounting Judgments, Estimates and Assumptions\n\nIn the application of Killam's accounting policies, which are described in Note 2, Management is required to make judgments, estimates and assumptions about the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities that are not readily apparent from other sources. The estimates and associated assumptions are based on historical experience and other factors that are considered to be relevant. Actual results may differ from these estimates.\n\nThe judgments, estimates and underlying assumptions are reviewed on an ongoing basis. Revisions to accounting estimates are recognized in the period in which the estimate is revised if the revision affects only that period or in the period of the revision and future periods if the revision affects both current and future periods.\n\n## Judgments Other Than Estimates\n\nIn the process of applying the Company's accounting policies, management has made the following judgments, which have the most significant effect on the amounts recognized in the consolidated financial statements:\n\n## Property Acquisitions\n\nWhen investment properties are acquired, management considers whether the acquisition represents the acquisition of an asset or a business. The Company accounts for an acquisition as a business combination where an integrated set of activities is acquired in addition to the property. More specifically, consideration is made of the extent to which significant processes are acquired and, in particular, the extent of ancillary services provided by the subsidiary (e.g., maintenance, cleaning, security, bookkeeping, leasing operations, etc.).\n\nManagement believes that the majority of the Company's acquisitions will be classified as asset acquisitions. During the acquisition of most properties, Killam buys the asset itself and any short-term leases that are in place. Generally, Killam does not purchase any business systems or processes with a property. Management considers an acquisition to be a business combination if all the following criteria are met:\n\n- · The acquisition includes a property portfolio (multiple buildings),\n- · A significant staff complement is included, including a maintenance team, leasing representatives and property management personnel, and\n- · Systems are acquired and continue to be incorporated into operations.\n\n## Investment Properties\n\nThe Company's accounting policies relating to investment properties are described in Note 2(F). In applying this policy, judgment is applied in determining whether certain costs are additions to the carrying amount of the property and, for properties under construction, identifying the point at which substantial completion of the property occurs and identifying the directly attributable borrowing costs to be included in the carrying value of the development property. Judgment is also applied in determining the extent and frequency of independent appraisals.\n\n## Leases\n\nThe Company has entered into residential property leases on its investment property portfolio. The Company has determined, based on an evaluation of the terms and conditions of the arrangements, that it has not transferred all the significant risks and rewards of ownership of these properties and accounts for the contracts with tenants as operating leases.\n\n## Financial Instruments\n\nThe Company's accounting policies relating to financial instruments are described in Note 2(K). The critical judgments inherent in these policies relate to applying the criteria set out in IAS 39 to designate financial instruments as FVTPL and determining whether the Company has significant influence over investees with which it has contractual relationships in addition to the financial instrument it holds.\n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013\n\n75", + "recall": 0.9772727272727273, + "true_md": "## 2. Significant Accounting Policies (continued)\n\n## 3. Significant Accounting Judgments, Estimates and Assumptions\n\n## Investment Properties\n\n## Leases\n\n## Financial Instruments\n\nDeferred income tax assets are recognized only to the extent that it is probable that taxable profit will be available against which deductible temporary differences, carried forward tax credits, or tax losses can be utilized. The carrying value of deferred income tax assets are reviewed at each reporting date and reduced to the extent it is no longer probable that the income tax asset will be recovered.\n\nThe Company determines the deferred tax consequences associated with temporary differences relating to investment properties as if the carrying amount of the investment property is recovered entirely through sale.\n\nDeferred income tax assets and liabilities are measured at the tax rates that are expected to apply to the year when the asset is realized or the liability is settled, based on tax rates (and tax laws) that have been enacted or substantively enacted at the reporting date.\n\nDeferred income tax relating to items recognized directly in equity is recognized in equity and not in profit or loss.\n\nIn the application of Killam’s accounting policies, which are described in Note 2, Management is required to make judgments, estimates and assumptions about the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities that are not readily apparent from other sources. The estimates and associated assumptions are based on historical experience and other factors that are considered to be relevant. Actual results may differ from these estimates.\n\nThe judgments, estimates and underlying assumptions are reviewed on an ongoing basis. Revisions to accounting estimates are recognized in the period in which the estimate is revised if the revision affects only that period or in the period of the revision and future periods if the revision affects both current and future periods. \n\n## Judgments Other Than Estimates\n\nIn the process of applying the Company’s accounting policies, management has made the following judgments, which have the most significant effect on the amounts recognized in the consolidated financial statements:\n\n## Property Acquisitions\n\nWhen investment properties are acquired, management considers whether the acquisition represents the acquisition of an asset or a business. The Company accounts for an acquisition as a business combination where an integrated set of activities is acquired in addition to the property. More specifically, consideration is made of the extent to which significant processes are acquired and, in particular, the extent of ancillary services provided by the subsidiary (e.g., maintenance, cleaning, security, bookkeeping, leasing operations, etc.).\n\nManagement believes that the majority of the Company’s acquisitions will be classified as asset acquisitions. During the acquisition of most properties, Killam buys the asset itself and any short‑term leases that are in place. Generally, Killam does not purchase any business systems or processes with a property. Management considers an acquisition to be a business combination if all the following criteria are met:\n\n- • The acquisition includes a property portfolio (multiple buildings), • A significant staff complement is included, including a maintenance team, leasing representatives and property management personnel, \n\n- • The acquisition includes a property portfolio (multiple buildings), • A significant staff complement is included, including a maintenance team, leasing representatives and property management personnel, and • Systems are acquired and continue to be incorporated into operations.\n\n- and • Systems are acquired and continue to be incorporated into operations.\n\nThe Company’s accounting policies relating to investment properties are described in Note 2(F). In applying this policy, judgment is applied in determining whether certain costs are additions to the carrying amount of the property and, for properties under construction, identifying the point at which substantial completion of the property occurs and identifying the directly attributable borrowing costs to be included in the carrying value of the development property. Judgment is also applied in determining the extent and frequency of independent appraisals.\n\nThe Company has entered into residential property leases on its investment property portfolio. The Company has determined, based on an evaluation of the terms and conditions of the arrangements, that it has not transferred all the significant risks and rewards of ownership of these properties and accounts for the contracts with tenants as operating leases.\n\nThe Company’s accounting policies relating to financial instruments are described in Note 2(K). The critical judgments inherent in these policies relate to applying the criteria set out in IAS 39 to designate financial instruments as FVTPL and determining whether the Company has significant influence over investees with which it has contractual relationships in addition to the financial instrument it holds.\n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013 75\n\n## Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except share and per share amounts)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9062120226672078, + "doc_id": "f45c17626297f8140797c86ac1dff87b937adf42d13acbdbd61b34b037324cb9", + "edit_distance": 0.5279187817258884, + "f1_score": 0.9469964664310954, + "meteor": 0.7993596677190061, + "precision": 0.9745454545454545, + "pred_md": "## An Outline of the Group's Internal Audit System\n\nIn addition to the SMFG Auditing Committee, which functions as a governance committee reporting to the Board of Directors, we have established the Internal Auditing Committee, which is a part of the Management Committee, to give a higher profile to the internal auditing functions and facilitate effective conduct of internal audits. The Internal Auditing Committee meets every quarter, and its members discuss important matters related to internal auditing based on reports prepared by the departments responsible for internal audits. There is also the Audit Department, which is an internal auditing unit that is independent of the operational departments of the Group.\n\nThe Audit Department conducts internal audits of the operations of all the Group's units and departments to contribute to optimal management and ensure the proper conduct of the Group's operations and the soundness of its assets. These audits also have the function of verifying that the Group's internal control systems, including compliance and risk management, are operating appropriately and effectively. The Audit Department is also responsible for the overall supervision of the internal audit systems of Group companies. It monitors the appropriateness and effectiveness of the internal audit systems at Group companies by verifying past data related to internal auditing and monitoring activities, which include inspections and other activities based on actual samples, and, when deemed necessary, by conducting audits. Based on these activities, the Audit Department provides recommendations and guidance to the business units and departments as well as Group companies.\n\nAt SMBC, we have formed auditing departments that are independent of bank units involved in marketing and other business activities. Within the Internal Audit Unit of SMBC, we have formed two departments: the Internal Audit Department and the Credit Review Department. As at SMFG, SMBC has an Internal Auditing Committee which is a part of its Management Committee and responsible for examining and conducting deliberations on reports on important matters submitted by the Internal Audit Unit.\n\nThe Internal Audit Unit is responsible for auditing compliance and risk management at SMBC - its head office departments, domestic and overseas branches - and SMBC Group companies. Auditing of operations of head office departments is conducted by assessing the appropriateness of all internal control systems of each department. In addition, audits of head office departments focus on material issues that arise in the management of specific operations and categories of risk. These auditing activities emphasize the verification of 'Targeted Audit Items' across the whole of the bank's organization.\n\nMoreover, audits of branches and offices are not limited just to checking for control and other deficiencies but also include pointing out compliance and risk management problems and making recommendations for corrective action. In other Group companies, internal audit departments have been formed suited to the respective nature of each company's lines of business.\n\n## Initiatives to Enhance the Sophistication and Efficiency of Internal Auditing\n\nThe Audit Department has adopted methods following the standards of the Institute of Internal Auditors (IIA)*, an international organization. The Audit Department conducts risk-based audits and works to apply best practices to Group companies.\n\nTo fulfill effectively its role as the department in overall charge of internal auditing, the Audit Department is constantly endeavoring to advance the professional skills of personnel engaged in internal auditing. Activities include collecting the latest information on internal auditing from inside and outside Japan and disseminating it to all Group companies. Also, the Audit Department organizes training courses, led by outside experts, for the staff of Group companies and encourages them to obtain international qualifications to enhance their professional knowledge and skills in internal auditing. To improve further the effectiveness of auditing, we also take active measures on a Groupwide basis to assess the quality of our internal auditing in the light of IIA standards.\n\n- * The Institute of Internal Auditors (IIA) was founded in 1941 in the United States as an organization dedicated to helping raise the level of specialization and professionalism of internal auditing staff. In addition to conducting theoretical and practical research on internal auditing, the IIA administers examinations for Certified Internal Auditor (CIA), which is the internationally recognized qualification in this field.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n51", + "recall": 0.9209621993127147, + "true_md": "## Internal Audit System\n\n## An Outline of the Group’s Internal Audit System\n\nIn addition to the SMFG Auditing Committee, which functions as a governance committee reporting to the Board of Directors, we have established the Internal Auditing Committee, which is a part of the Management Committee, to give a higher profile to the internal auditing functions and facilitate effective conduct of internal audits. The Internal Auditing Committee meets every quarter, and its members discuss important matters related to internal auditing based on reports prepared by the depart- ments responsible for internal audits. There is also the Audit Department, which is an internal auditing unit that is indepen- dent of the operational departments of the Group. \n\nThe Internal Audit Unit is responsible for auditing compli- ance and risk management at SMBC — its head office depart- ments, domestic and overseas branches — and SMBC Group companies. Auditing of operations of head office departments is conducted by assessing the appropriateness of all internal control systems of each department. In addition, audits of head office departments focus on material issues that arise in the management of specific operations and categories of risk. These auditing activities emphasize the verification of “Targeted Audit Items” across the whole of the bank’s organization. \n\nThe Audit Department conducts internal audits of the opera- tions of all the Group’s units and departments to contribute to optimal management and ensure the proper conduct of the Group’s operations and the soundness of its assets. These audits also have the function of verifying that the Group’s internal control systems, including compliance and risk man- agement, are operating appropriately and effectively. The Audit Department is also responsible for the overall supervision of the internal audit systems of Group companies. It monitors the appropriateness and effectiveness of the internal audit systems at Group companies by verifying past data related to internal auditing and monitoring activities, which include inspections and other activities based on actual samples, and, when deemed necessary, by conducting audits. Based on these activities, the Audit Department provides recommendations and guid- ance to the business units and departments as well as Group companies. \n\nAt SMBC, we have formed auditing departments that are independent of bank units involved in marketing and other business activities. Within the Internal Audit Unit of SMBC, we have formed two departments: the Internal Audit Department and the Credit Review Department. As at SMFG, SMBC has an Internal Auditing Committee which is a part of its Management Committee and responsible for examining and conducting deliberations on reports on important matters submitted by the Internal Audit Unit. \n\n* The Institute of Internal Auditors (IIA) was founded in 1941 in the United States as an organization dedicated to helping raise the level of specialization and professionalism of internal auditing staff. In addition to conducting theoretical and practical research on internal auditing, the IIA administers examinations for Certified Internal Auditor (CIA), which is the internationally recognized qualification in this field.\n\nTo fulfill effectively its role as the department in overall charge of internal auditing, the Audit Department is constantly endeavor- ing to advance the professional skills of personnel engaged in internal auditing. Activities include collecting the latest information on internal auditing from inside and outside Japan and dis- seminating it to all Group companies. Also, the Audit Department organizes training courses, led by outside experts, for the staff of Group companies and encourages them to obtain international qualifications to enhance their professional knowledge and skills in internal auditing. To improve further the effectiveness of auditing, we also take active measures on a Groupwide basis to assess the quality of our internal auditing in the light of IIA standards.\n\nThe Audit Department has adopted methods following the stan- dards of the Institute of Internal Auditors (IIA)*, an international organization. The Audit Department conducts risk-based audits and works to apply best practices to Group companies. \n\n## Initiatives to Enhance the Sophistication and Efficiency of Internal Auditing\n\nMoreover, audits of branches and offices are not limited just to checking for control and other deficiencies but also include pointing out compliance and risk management problems and making recommendations for corrective action. In other Group companies, internal audit departments have been formed suited to the respective nature of each company’s lines of business. \n\nSMFG 2011 51" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9358983965821881, + "doc_id": "88731db7b12410b26342ed16974dbfe71fdee24d1baed36cb32a51facacb72c2", + "edit_distance": 0.0736196319018405, + "f1_score": 0.9662921348314606, + "meteor": 0.9757566731582598, + "precision": 0.947136563876652, + "pred_md": "## BOARD OF DIRECTORS AND ITS COMMITTEES\n\nCHAIR\n\n• MEMBER\n\n## CORPORATE GOVERNANCE\n\nRogers Communications' Board of Directors is strongly committed to sound corporate governance and continually reviews its governance practices and benchmarks them against acknowledged leaders and evolving legislation. We are a family-founded and controlled company and take pride in our proactive and disciplined approach towards ensuring that Rogers governance structures and practices are deserving of the confidence of the public capital markets.\n\nWith the December 2008 passing of Company founder and CEO Ted Rogers, his voting control of Rogers Communications passed to a trust of which members of the Rogers family are beneficiaries. This trust holds voting control of Rogers Communications for the benefit of successive generations of the Rogers family.\n\nAs substantial stakeholders, the Rogers family is represented on our Board and brings a long-term commitment to oversight and value creation. At the same time, we benefit from having outside Directors who are experienced North American business leaders.\n\nThe Rogers Communications Board believes that the Company's governance and risk management systems are effective and that the appropriate structures and procedures are in place.\n\nThe composition of our Board and structure of its various committees are outlined in the table above and on the following page. As well, we make available detailed information on our governance structures and practices - including our complete statement of Corporate Governance practices,\n\n18 ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\nour codes of conduct and ethics, full committee charters and Board member biographies - in the Corporate Governance section within the Investor Relations section of rogers.com. Also in the Corporate Governance portion of our website, you will find a summary of the differences between the NYSE corporate governance rules applicable to U.S.-based companies and our governance practices as a non-U.S.-based issuer that is listed on the NYSE.\n\nThe Audit Committee reviews the Company's accounting policies and practices, the integrity of the Company's financial reporting processes and procedures, and the financial statements and other relevant public disclosures to be provided to the public. The Committee also assists the Board in its oversight of the Company's compliance with legal and regulatory requirements relating to financial reporting and assesses the systems of internal accounting, financial controls, risk management and the qualifications, independence and work of external auditors and internal auditors.\n\nThe Corporate Governance Committee assists and makes recommendations to the Board to ensure the Board of Directors has developed appropriate systems and procedures to enable it to exercise and discharge its responsibilities. To carry this out, the Corporate Governance Committee assists the Board in developing, recommending and establishing corporate governance policies and practices and leads the Board in its periodic review of the performance of the Board and its committees.", + "recall": 0.9862385321100917, + "true_md": "## CORPORATE GOVERNANCE\n\nRogers Communications’ Board of Directors is strongly committed to sound corporate governance and continually reviews its governance practices and benchmarks them against acknowledged leaders and evolving legislation. We are a family-founded and controlled company and take pride in our proactive and disciplined approach towards ensuring that Rogers governance structures and practices are deserving of the confidence of the public capital markets.\n\nWith the December 2008 passing of Company founder and CEO Ted Rogers, his voting control of Rogers Communications passed to a trust of which members of the Rogers family are beneficiaries. This trust holds voting control of Rogers Communications for the benefit of successive generations of the Rogers family.\n\nAs substantial stakeholders, the Rogers family is represented on our Board and brings a long-term commitment to oversight and value creation. At the same time, we benefit from having outside Directors who are experienced North American business leaders.\n\nThe Rogers Communications Board believes that the Company’s governance and risk management systems are effective and that the appropriate structures and procedures are in place. \n\nThe composition of our Board and structure of its various committees are outlined in the table above and on the following page. As well, we make available detailed information on our governance structures and practices – including our complete statement of Corporate Governance practices, \n\nour codes of conduct and ethics, full committee charters and Board member biographies – in the Corporate Governance section within the Investor Relations section of rogers.com. Also in the Corporate Governance portion of our website, you will find a summary of the differences between the NYSE corporate governance rules applicable to U.S.-based companies and our governance practices as a non-U.S.-based issuer that is listed on the NYSE.\n\nThe Audit Committee reviews the Company’s accounting policies and practices, the integrity of the Company’s financial reporting processes and procedures, and the financial statements and other relevant public disclosures to be provided to the public. The Committee also assists the Board in its oversight of the Company’s compliance with legal and regulatory requirements relating to financial reporting and assesses the systems of internal accounting, financial controls, risk management and the qualifications, independence and work of external auditors and internal auditors.\n\nThe Corporate Governance Committee assists and makes recommendations to the Board to ensure the Board of Directors has developed appropriate systems and procedures to enable it to exercise and discharge its responsibilities. To carry this out, the Corporate Governance Committee assists the Board in developing, recommending and establishing corporate governance policies and practices and leads the Board in its periodic review of the performance of the Board and its committees.\n\n18 ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7270197838008926, + "doc_id": "0994da1c9ca75e348f1179cc3c4cb7cd863895addaf6a6d455c6d94e1cfb2613", + "edit_distance": 0.4318181818181818, + "f1_score": 0.9772727272727272, + "meteor": 0.7293471734064134, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Capital (Nonconsolidated)\n\n## Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation\n\n## Changes in Number of Shares Issued and Capital Stock\n\n## Remarks:\n\n- * 1 Conversion of 35,000 shares of preferred stock (Type 1) and 33,000 shares of preferred stock (Type 2) to 214,194 shares of common stock\n- * 2 Conversion of 67,000 shares of preferred stock (Type 2) to 173,770 shares of common stock\n- * 3 Conversion of 500,000 shares of preferred stock (Type 3) to 601,757 shares of common stock\n- * 4 Conversion of 195,000 shares of preferred stock (Type 3) to 153,181 shares of common stock\n- * 5 Cancellation of 35,000 shares of preferred stock (Type 1), 100,000 shares of preferred stock (Type 2) and 695,000 shares of preferred stock (Type 3)\n- * 6 Allotment to third parties: Common stock: 20,672,514 shares\n\nIssue price: ¥41,405 Capitalization: ¥20,702.5\n\n* 7\n\nAllotment to third parties: Common stock: 8,211,569 shares\n\nIssue price: ¥41,405 Capitalization: ¥20,702.5\n\n- * 8 Allotment to third parties: Common stock: 992,453 shares\n\nIssue price: ¥48,365 Capitalization: ¥24,182.5\n\n- * 9 Allotment to third parties: Common stock: 20,016,015 shares\n\nIssue price: ¥48,365 Capitalization: ¥24,182.5\n\n## Number of Shares Issued\n\nNote: The shares above are not listed on any stock exchange.\n\n## Principal Shareholders\n\n## a. Common Stock\n\n## b. Preferred Stock (1st series Type 6)\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n175\n\nSMBC", + "recall": 0.9555555555555556, + "true_md": "SMBC\n\nSMFG 2011 175\n\n## Capital (Nonconsolidated)\n\nSumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation\n\n## Number of Shares Issued\n\nNote: The shares above are not listed on any stock exchange.\n\n## Principal Shareholders\n\n- a. Common Stock\n\n- b. Preferred Stock (1st series Type 6)\n\n## Remarks:\n\n* $^{1}$ Conversion of 35,000 shares of preferred stock (Type 1) and 33,000 shares of preferred stock (Type 2) to 214,194 shares of common stock\n\n* $^{2}$ Conversion of 67,000 shares of preferred stock (Type 2) to 173,770 shares of common stock\n\n* $^{3}$ Conversion of 500,000 shares of preferred stock (Type 3) to 601,757 shares of common stock\n\n* $^{4}$ Conversion of 195,000 shares of preferred stock (Type 3) to 153,181 shares of common stock\n\n* $^{5}$ Cancellation of 35,000 shares of preferred stock (Type 1), 100,000 shares of preferred stock (Type 2) and 695,000 shares of preferred stock (Type 3)\n\n* $^{6}$ Allotment to third parties: Common stock: 20,672,514 shares Issue price: ¥41,405 Capitalization: ¥20,702.5\n\n* $^{7}$ Allotment to third parties: Common stock: 8,211,569 shares Issue price: ¥41,405 Capitalization: ¥20,702.5\n\n* $^{8}$ Allotment to third parties: Common stock: 992,453 shares Issue price: ¥48,365 Capitalization: ¥24,182.5\n\n* $^{9}$ Allotment to third parties: Common stock: 20,016,015 shares Issue price: ¥48,365 Capitalization: ¥24,182.5\n\n## Changes in Number of Shares Issued and Capital Stock" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.559224162807066, + "doc_id": "95f651346870c420585cc3476355c77cb40b31ca5178eb1cd3b6f8f1b5879630", + "edit_distance": 0.31683168316831684, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.6955767914922241, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Nordstrom, Inc.\n\n## Consolidated Statements of Earnings\n\nIn millions except per share amounts\n\nThe accompanying Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements are an integral part of these financial statements.\n\n## Nordstrom, Inc.\n\n## Consolidated Statements of Comprehensive Earnings\n\nIn millions\n\nThe accompanying Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements are an integral part of these financial statements.\n\nNordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 37", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## Nordstrom, Inc. Consolidated Statements of Earnings\n\n## Nordstrom, Inc. Consolidated Statements of Earnings In millions except per share amounts\n\nConsolidated Statements of Earnings In millions except per share amounts\n\nThe accompanying Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements are an integral part of these financial statements.\n\nConsolidated Statements of Comprehensive Earnings In millions\n\n## Nordstrom, Inc. Consolidated Statements of Comprehensive Earnings\n\n## Nordstrom, Inc. Consolidated Statements of Comprehensive Earnings In millions\n\nThe accompanying Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements are an integral part of these financial statements.\n\nNordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 37" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8634131130596602, + "doc_id": "47c5f627ce9b5085b64cecf3090ed4d1fea9ad562ea97ff342487760ac772051", + "edit_distance": 0.3563218390804598, + "f1_score": 0.9543147208121827, + "meteor": 0.9272192729014118, + "precision": 0.9591836734693877, + "pred_md": "SMBC\n\nLoans (Nonconsolidated)\n\n## Consumer Loans Outstanding\n\nNote: Housing loans include general-purpose loans used for housing purposes as well as housing loans and apartment house acquisition loans.\n\n## Breakdown of Reserve for Possible Loan Losses\n\n* Transfer from reserves by reversal or origination method\n\nNote: Figures in brackets [ ] indicate foreign exchange translation adjustments.\n\n* 1 ransfer from reserves by reversal or origination method T\n\n* 2 Others' under 'Decrease during the fiscal year' include the amount transferred to Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation (China) Limited in connection with a busi-' ness transfer. The transferred amount comprises ¥1,931 million for the general reserve for possible loan losses and ¥5,008 million for the specific reserve for possible loan losses for nonresident loans.\n\nNote: Figures in brackets [ ] indicate foreign exchange translation adjustments.\n\n## Write-Off of Loans\n\nNote: Write-off of loans include amount of direct reduction.\n\n## Specific Overseas Loans\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n168", + "recall": 0.9494949494949495, + "true_md": "SMBC Loans (Nonconsolidated)\n\n## Consumer Loans Outstanding\n\n## Breakdown of Reserve for Possible Loan Losses\n\n* Transfer from reserves by reversal or origination method\n\nNote: Figures in brackets [ ] indicate foreign exchange translation adjustments.\n\n* 1 Transfer from reserves by reversal or origination method\n\n* 2 “Others” under “Decrease during the fiscal year” include the amount transferred to Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation (China) Limited in connection with a busi- ness transfer. The transferred amount comprises ¥1,931 million for the general reserve for possible loan losses and ¥5,008 million for the specific reserve for pos- sible loan losses for nonresident loans.\n\nNote: Figures in brackets [ ] indicate foreign exchange translation adjustments.\n\n## Write-Off of Loans\n\n## Specific Overseas Loans\n\nSMFG 2011 168\n\nNote: Write-off of loans include amount of direct reduction.\n\nNote: Housing loans include general-purpose loans used for housing purposes as well as housing loans and apartment house acquisition loans." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.44706964279412365, + "doc_id": "f9194759ca3d7a41b9be32fc060d1305d7aa6c853ff4a430644011ab860dcd69", + "edit_distance": 0.4405940594059406, + "f1_score": 0.9552238805970149, + "meteor": 0.5748349297674541, + "precision": 0.9552238805970149, + "pred_md": "## Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nDollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except share and per share amounts)\n\n## 6. Investments in Joint Ventures\n\nThe Company has the following significant interest in a joint venture, which is measured using the equity method.\n\nThrough this joint venture, Killam owns:\n\n- a) 25% share in a 127-unit property located in London, Ontario;\n- b) 25% share in a 140-unit property located in Ottawa, Ontario; and,\n- c) 25% share in a 199-unit property located in Mississauga, Ontario.\n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013\n\n81", + "recall": 0.9552238805970149, + "true_md": "## Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except share and per share amounts)\n\nNotes to the Consolidated Financial Statements Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except share and per share amounts)\n\n## 6. Investments in Joint Ventures\n\nThe Company has the following significant interest in a joint venture, which is measured using the equity method. Through this joint venture, Killam owns:\n\n- a) 25% share in a 127‑unit property located in London, Ontario; b) 25% share in a 140‑unit property located in Ottawa, Ontario; and,\n\n- a) 25% share in a 127‑unit property located in London, Ontario; b) 25% share in a 140‑unit property located in Ottawa, Ontario; and, c) 25% share in a 199‑unit property located in Mississauga, Ontario.\n\n- b) 25% share in a 140‑unit property located in Ottawa, Ontario; and, c) 25% share in a 199‑unit property located in Mississauga, Ontario.\n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013 81" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "69677a582823c8366663c172e67409405d180e30aa61cdc316877868f8a59111", + "edit_distance": 0.4405940594059406, + "f1_score": 0.9552238805970149, + "meteor": 0.5748349297674541, + "precision": 0.9552238805970149, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.9552238805970149, + "true_md": "2013 REVENUE $12.7 billion\n\nADJUSTED OPERATING PROFIT ($ IN BILLIONS)\n\nREVENUE ($ IN BILLIONS)\n\nREVENUE ($ IN BILLIONS)\n\nADJUSTED OPERATING PROFIT ($ IN BILLIONS)\n\n2013 REVENUE $7.3 billion\n\nADJUSTED OPERATING PROFIT ($ IN BILLIONS)\n\n2013 REVENUE $3.8 billion\n\nREVENUE ($ IN BILLIONS)\n\nREVENUE ($ IN BILLIONS)\n\nADJUSTED OPERATING PROFIT ($ IN BILLIONS)\n\n2013 REVENUE $1.7 billion" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.54288205437378, + "doc_id": "0675151de310e1325a267c1984d266df80d03d59c0eb91023cd4fec25cfc2e91", + "edit_distance": 0.2972972972972973, + "f1_score": 0.7812500000000001, + "meteor": 0.7169243845826931, + "precision": 0.8928571428571429, + "pred_md": "Unconcerned by a Chesapeake drilling rig, antelope continue their daily routines in southeastern Wyoming's Powder River Basin where the company is developing the promising Niobrara Play.", + "recall": 0.6944444444444444, + "true_md": "2010 ANNUAL REPORT | 19\n\nUnconcerned by a Chesapeake drill- ing rig, antelope continue their daily routines in southeastern Wyoming’s Powder River Basin where the com- pany is developing the promising Niobrara Play." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8956800187156041, + "doc_id": "4d3f8bbbd4cdec7708fcc28daf59866f34e8473659014969d6cd3039a6a40a00", + "edit_distance": 0.10028653295128939, + "f1_score": 0.9655172413793105, + "meteor": 0.9226910970615267, + "precision": 0.9685534591194969, + "pred_md": "## Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nDollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except share and per share amounts)\n\n## 17 Share-Based Compensation (continued)\n\n## Restricted Share Unit Plan\n\nThe Restricted Share Unit ('RSU') Plan gives members of the senior executive team the right to receive a percentage of their annual bonus and non-executive members of the board of directors the right to receive a percentage of their annual retainer, in the form of restricted shares in lieu of cash. The Compensation Committee has established the following parameters on the percentage of the annual bonus and annual retainer which may be allocated to Restricted Shares:\n\nKillam will match the elected amount in the form of restricted shares having a value equal to the volume weighted average price of all common shares traded on the TSX for the five trading days immediately preceding the date on which the compensation is payable. The Restricted Shares earn notional dividends based on the same dividends paid on the common shares, and such notional dividends are used to acquire additional Restricted Shares. The initial Restricted Shares and Restricted Shares acquired through notional dividend reinvestment are credited to each person's account and are not issued to the employee or board member until they redeem such Restricted Shares.\n\nthe restricted shares will be redeemed and paid out by December 31 of the year in which the restricted shares have vested. the Restricted Shares shall vest with the following schedule; (a) 50% on the second anniversary of the grant date; and (b) 50% on the third anniversary of the grant date.\n\nThe details of the restricted share units issued under the RSU plan are shown below:\n\n## 18. Home Sales\n\n## 19. Corporate Income\n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013\n\n87", + "recall": 0.9625, + "true_md": "Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except share and per share amounts)\n\nNotes to the Consolidated Financial Statements Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except share and per share amounts)\n\n## 17 Share‑Based Compensation (continued)\n\n## Restricted Share Unit Plan\n\nThe Restricted Share Unit (“RSU”) Plan gives members of the senior executive team the right to receive a percentage of their annual bonus and non‑executive members of the board of directors the right to receive a percentage of their annual retainer, in the form of restricted shares in lieu of cash. The Compensation Committee has established the following parameters on the percentage of the annual bonus and annual retainer which may be allocated to Restricted Shares:\n\nKillam will match the elected amount in the form of restricted shares having a value equal to the volume weighted average price of all common shares traded on the TSX for the five trading days immediately preceding the date on which the compensation is payable. The Restricted Shares earn notional dividends based on the same dividends paid on the common shares, and such notional dividends are used to acquire additional Restricted Shares. The initial Restricted Shares and Restricted Shares acquired through notional dividend reinvestment are credited to each person’s account and are not issued to the employee or board member until they redeem such Restricted Shares.\n\nthe restricted shares will be redeemed and paid out by December 31 of the year in which the restricted shares have vested. the Restricted Shares shall vest with the following schedule; (a) 50% on the second anniversary of the grant date; and (b) 50% on the third anniversary of the grant date .\n\nThe details of the restricted share units issued under the RSU plan are shown below:\n\n## 19. Corporate Income\n\n## 18. Home Sales\n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013 87" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8802430800564833, + "doc_id": "f7875153745b668a25a8696b0647a5a464240389bdc67229a0502a2137bfec78", + "edit_distance": 0.43373493975903615, + "f1_score": 0.982456140350877, + "meteor": 0.9661014671416182, + "precision": 0.9824561403508771, + "pred_md": "## (Continued)\n\n## (Consolidated Statements of Comprehensive Income)\n\nNotes: 1. Amounts less than 1 million yen have been omitted.\n\n2. For the convenience of readers, the accompanying U.S. dollar financial statements have been translated from Japanese yen, as a matter of arithmetical computation only, at the rate of ·83.15 to US$1, the exchange rate prevailing at March 31, 2011.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\nSupplemental Information\n\nSMBC\n\n143", + "recall": 0.9824561403508771, + "true_md": "SMBC Supplemental Information\n\n## (Consolidated Statements of Comprehensive Income)\n\n## (Continued)\n\n2. For the convenience of readers, the accompanying U.S. dollar financial statements have been translated from Japanese yen, as a matter of arithmetical computation only, at the rate of ¥83.15 to US$1, the exchange rate prevailing at March 31, 2011.\n\nNotes: 1. Amounts less than 1 million yen have been omitted.\n\nSMFG 2011 143" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9008445976752698, + "doc_id": "5dcf74d3279eefdeb7ad9ee02d65ab087f1a6933cd126df43a02d29a959c3e6f", + "edit_distance": 0.5118110236220472, + "f1_score": 0.9943074003795066, + "meteor": 0.910163844088681, + "precision": 0.9961977186311787, + "pred_md": "(as of June 30, 2011)\n\nInternational Directory\n\n## Asia and Oceania\n\nSMBC Branches and Representative Offices\n\n## Hong Kong Branch\n\n7th & 8th Floor, One International Finance Centre, 1 Harbour View Street, Central, Hong Kong Special Administrative Region, The People's Republic of China Tel: 852 (2206) 2000 Fax: 852 (2206) 2888\n\n## Shanghai Branch\n\n11F, Shanghai World Financial Center, 100 Century Avenue, Pudong New Area, Shanghai 200120, The People's Republic of China\n\nTel:\n\n86 (21) 3860-9000\n\nFax: 86 (21) 3860-9999\n\n## Dalian Representative Office\n\nSenmao Building 9F, 147\n\nZhongshan Lu, Dalian 116011,\n\nThe People's Republic of China\n\nTel:\n\n86 (411) 8370-7873\n\nFax: 86 (411) 8370-7761\n\n## Chongqing Representative Office\n\n27F, Metropolitan Tower, 68 Zourong Road, Yuzhong District, Chongqing 400010, The People's Republic of China\n\nTel:\n\n86 (23) 6280-3394\n\nFax: 86 (23) 6280-3748\n\n## Taipei Branch\n\n3F, Walsin Lihwa Xinyi Building, Taipei 110, Taiwan\n\nNo. 1 Songzhi Road, Xinyi District, Tel: 886 (2) 2720-8100 Fax: 886 (2) 2720-8287\n\n## Seoul Branch\n\nYoung Poong Bldg. 7F, 33,\n\nSeorin-dong, Jongno-gu,\n\nSeoul, 110-752, Korea\n\nTel:\n\n82 (2) 732-1801\n\nFax: 82 (2) 399-6330\n\n## Singapore Branch\n\n3 Temasek Avenue #06-01, Centennial Tower, Singapore 039190, The Republic of Singapore Tel: 65-6882-0000/0001\n\nFax: 65-6887-0220/0330\n\n## Labuan Branch\n\nLevel 12 (B&C), Main Office Tower, Financial Park Labuan, Jalan Merdeka, 87000 Labuan, Federal Territory, Malaysia Tel: 60 (87) 410955 Fax: 60 (87) 410959\n\n## Labuan Branch Kuala Lumpur Office\n\nLevel 51, Vista Tower, The\n\nIntermark, 182, Jalan Tun Razak,\n\n50400 Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia\n\nTel:\n\n60 (3) 2168-1700\n\nFax: 60 (3) 2168-1785\n\n## Ho Chi Minh City Branch\n\n9th Floor, The Landmark, 5B Ton Duc Thang Street, District 1, Ho Chi Minh City,\n\nVietnam\n\nTel: 84 (8) 3520-2525\n\nFax: 84 (8) 3822-7762\n\n## Hanoi Branch\n\n1105, 11th Floor, Pacific Place\n\nBuilding, 83B Ly Thuong Kiet\n\nStreet, Hanoi, Vietnam\n\nTel: 84 (4) 3946-1100\n\nFax: 84 (4) 3946-1133\n\n## Yangon Representative Office\n\n#1217, 12A Floor Sakura Tower, No.339 Bogyoke Aung San Road, Kyauktada Township, Yangon,\n\nMyanmar\n\nTel:\n\n95 (1) 255397\n\n*relocated on August 1, 2011\n\n## Bangkok Branch\n\n8th-10th Floor, Q.House Lumpini Building, 1 South Sathorn Road, Tungmahamek, Sathorn, Bangkok 10120, Thailand\n\nTel:\n\n66 (2) 353-8000\n\nFax: 66 (2) 353-8282\n\n## Manila Representative Office\n\n20th Floor, Rufino Pacific Tower, 6784 Ayala Avenue, Makati City,\n\nMetro Manila, The Philippines Tel: 63 (2) 841-0098/9 Fax: 63 (2) 811-0877\n\n## Sydney Branch\n\nLevel 35, The Chifley Tower, 2 Chifley Square, Sydney, NSW 2000, Australia\n\nTel: 61 (2) 9376-1800\n\nFax: 61 (2) 9376-1863\n\n## New Delhi Representative Office\n\nB-14/A, Qutab Institutional Area, Katwaria Sarai, New Delhi-110016, India\n\nTel: 91 (11) 4670-9945\n\nFax: 91 (11) 4056-6216\n\nSMBC Principal Subsidiaries/ Affiliates SMFG Network\n\n## Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation (China) Limited Head Office (Shanghai)\n\n11F, Shanghai World Financial Center, 100 Century Avenue, Pudong New Area, Shanghai 200120, The People's Republic of China\n\nTel: 86 (21) 3860-9000\n\nFax: 86 (21) 3860-9999\n\n## Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation (China) Limited Shanghai Puxi Sub-Branch\n\n1, 12, 13, 12F , Maxdo Center, 8 Xingyi Road, Changning District, Shanghai, The People's Republic of China\n\nTel:\n\n86 (21) 2219-8000\n\nFax: 86 (21) 2219-8199\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n219", + "recall": 0.9924242424242424, + "true_md": "## International Directory (as of June 30, 2011)\n\n## Asia and Oceania\n\n## SMBC Branches and Representative Offices\n\n## Hong Kong Branch\n\n## Shanghai Branch\n\n## Dalian Representative Office\n\n## Chongqing Representative Office\n\n## Taipei Branch\n\n## Seoul Branch\n\n## Singapore Branch\n\n## Labuan Branch\n\n## Labuan Branch Kuala Lumpur Office\n\n## Ho Chi Minh City Branch\n\n## Hanoi Branch\n\n## Yangon Representative Office\n\n## Bangkok Branch\n\n## Manila Representative Office\n\n## Sydney Branch\n\n## New Delhi Representative Office\n\n## SMBC Principal Subsidiaries/ Affiliates SMFG Network\n\n## Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation (China) Limited Head Office (Shanghai)\n\n## Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation (China) Limited Shanghai Puxi Sub-Branch\n\n7th & 8th Floor, One International Finance Centre, 1 Harbour View Street, Central, Hong Kong Special Administrative Region, The People’s Republic of China Tel: 852 (2206) 2000 Fax: 852 (2206) 2888\n\n11F, Shanghai World Financial Center, 100 Century Avenue, Pudong New Area, Shanghai 200120, The People’s Republic of China Tel: 86 (21) 3860-9000 Fax: 86 (21) 3860-9999\n\nSenmao Building 9F, 147 Zhongshan Lu, Dalian 116011, The People’s Republic of China Tel: 86 (411) 8370-7873 Fax: 86 (411) 8370-7761\n\n27F, Metropolitan Tower, 68 Zourong Road, Yuzhong District, Chongqing 400010, The People’s Republic of China Tel: 86 (23) 6280-3394 Fax: 86 (23) 6280-3748\n\n3F, Walsin Lihwa Xinyi Building, No. 1 Songzhi Road, Xinyi District, Taipei 110, Taiwan Tel: 886 (2) 2720-8100 Fax: 886 (2) 2720-8287\n\nYoung Poong Bldg. 7F, 33, Seorin-dong, Jongno-gu, Seoul, 110-752, Korea Tel: 82 (2) 732-1801 Fax: 82 (2) 399-6330\n\n8th-10th Floor, Q.House Lumpini Building, 1 South Sathorn Road, Tungmahamek, Sathorn, Bangkok 10120, Thailand Tel: 66 (2) 353-8000 Fax: 66 (2) 353-8282\n\n#1217, 12A Floor Sakura Tower, No.339 Bogyoke Aung San Road, Kyauktada Township, Yangon, Myanmar Tel: 95 (1) 255397 *relocated on August 1, 2011\n\n1105, 11th Floor, Pacific Place Building, 83B Ly Thuong Kiet Street, Hanoi, Vietnam Tel: 84 (4) 3946-1100 Fax: 84 (4) 3946-1133\n\n9th Floor, The Landmark, 5B Ton Duc Thang Street, District 1, Ho Chi Minh City, Vietnam Tel: 84 (8) 3520-2525 Fax: 84 (8) 3822-7762\n\nLevel 51, Vista Tower, The Intermark, 182, Jalan Tun Razak, 50400 Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia Tel: 60 (3) 2168-1700 Fax: 60 (3) 2168-1785\n\nLevel 12 (B&C), Main Office Tower, Financial Park Labuan, Jalan Merdeka, 87000 Labuan, Federal Territory, Malaysia Tel: 60 (87) 410955 Fax: 60 (87) 410959\n\n3 Temasek Avenue #06-01, Centennial Tower, Singapore 039190, The Republic of Singapore Tel: 65-6882-0000/0001 Fax: 65-6887-0220/0330\n\n20th Floor, Rufino Pacific Tower, 6784 Ayala Avenue, Makati City, Metro Manila, The Philippines Tel: 63 (2) 841-0098/9 Fax: 63 (2) 811-0877\n\nLevel 35, The Chifley Tower, 2 Chifley Square, Sydney, NSW 2000, Australia Tel: 61 (2) 9376-1800 Fax: 61 (2) 9376-1863\n\nB-14/A, Qutab Institutional Area, Katwaria Sarai, New Delhi-110016, India Tel: 91 (11) 4670-9945 Fax: 91 (11) 4056-6216\n\n11F, Shanghai World Financial Center, 100 Century Avenue, Pudong New Area, Shanghai 200120, The People’s Republic of China Tel: 86 (21) 3860-9000 Fax: 86 (21) 3860-9999\n\n1, 12, 13, 12F, Maxdo Center, 8 Xingyi Road, Changning District, Shanghai, The People’s Republic of China Tel: 86 (21) 2219-8000 Fax: 86 (21) 2219-8199\n\nSMFG 2011 219" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5286356972510526, + "doc_id": "11dae8e2c4ad1e5a57221c1ba336e8013d99df10b9ab780d29d0e47bd1deba00", + "edit_distance": 0.4106280193236715, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.6213216084969603, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Nordstrom, Inc.\n\n## Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nDollar and share amounts in millions except per share, per option and per unit amounts\n\n## NOTE 17: SELECTED QUARTERLY DATA 1 (UNAUDITED)\n\n1 Quarterly totals may not foot across due to rounding.\n\n2 Comparable sales include sales from stores that have been open at least one full year at the beginning of the year. We also include sales from our online channels (Nordstrom.com, Nordstromrack.com and HauteLook) in comparable sales because of the integration with our stores.\n\n3 Gross profit is calculated as net sales less cost of sales and related buying and occupancy costs (for all segments).\n\nNordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 65", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Nordstrom, Inc. Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements Dollar and share amounts in millions except per share, per option and per unit amounts\n\n## NOTE 17: SELECTED QUARTERLY DATA 1 (UNAUDITED)\n\n1 Quarterly totals may not foot across due to rounding. Comparable sales include sales from stores that have been open at least one full year at the beginning of the year. We also include sales from our online channels \n\nQuarterly totals may not foot across due to rounding. 2 Comparable sales include sales from stores that have been open at least one full year at the beginning of the year. We also include sales from our online channels (Nordstrom.com, Nordstromrack.com and HauteLook) in comparable sales because of the integration with our stores. Gross profit is calculated as net sales less cost of sales and related buying and occupancy costs (for all segments).\n\n(Nordstrom.com, Nordstromrack.com and HauteLook) in comparable sales because of the integration with our stores. 3 Gross profit is calculated as net sales less cost of sales and related buying and occupancy costs (for all segments).\n\nNordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 65" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6736740766249408, + "doc_id": "41dbb72acd49237819584c711720278dac36394973e2b358f8a26323d04fa06c", + "edit_distance": 0.49767441860465117, + "f1_score": 0.9333333333333333, + "meteor": 0.9276657719981235, + "precision": 0.8814814814814815, + "pred_md": "34\n\n| EMPLOYEES\n\n| Lindsay Palazzolo Janie Palma |\n|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|\n| Kurt Palmer |\n| Robert Palmer Jr. Betty Paolini |\n| Candy Parker Julie Parker |\n| Carla Parrish Umesh Patel |\n| Monte Patterson John Paul |\n| Michael Payne Daniel Pearce Blain Pearson Kim Pearson |\n| Ariel Pena |\n| Danielle Penland Terry Perdue Joe Perez |\n| Marty Pierce James Pine Matt Pinion Jeff Pinter |\n| Roger Pippins Jr. Lara Pitchford Brooke Pittard Michael Pittser |\n| Filemon Plascencia-Aceves |\n| Lori Plumley Richard Pogue |\n| David Poindexter Randy Poindexter |\n| David Polve |\n| Taos Pool |\n| Richard Poindexter Matthew Pompa Timothy Poole Raymond Posey Nick Pottmeyer Jordan Powell Joseph Presock |\n| Marsha Presock Ricky Pryor Ronald Putman |\n| Matt Queen Maria Quezada Mary Quinn |\n| Barbie Quinn Davis |\n| Tyson Raasch |\n| Daren Rader Mark Raidt Johnny Rains Hermenegildo Ramirez Peter Ramirez Jr. Bonnie Ramon Arturo Ramos |\n| Jessie Ramos Cody Ramsey Gary Ramsey Greg Ramsey |\n| Roy Rash |\n| Aaron Ream Galen Reed |\n| Roger Redmond Jacob Reeves |\n| Christopher Register Sr. Keith Reightler John Reinhart Brad Rekieta |\n| Allen Remmers |\n| Santhanaraj Rengaiah Matt Reser Jorge Reyes |\n| Roger Reyes |\n| Justin Reynolds |\n| Chris Rice |\n| Beth Richards Gregory Rivera Courtney Roberts |\n| Henry Riffe Sandi Riley Larry Ritter Josh Roberts |\n| Matthew Roberts |\n| Raymond Roberts |\n| Stacy Roberts |\n| Daniel Robertson Michael Robertson |\n| Scott Robertson |\n\nScott Robinson\n\nPaul Rodesney\n\nJoel Rodriguez\n\nMaria A. Rodriguez\n\nRobert Rodriguez\n\nSarah Rodriguez\n\nJuan Rodriguez-Huerta\n\nJon Rogers\n\nBailey Rollins\n\nDanielle Roper\n\nVinson Roper\n\nGlenn Rose\n\nRichard Ross\n\nRobert Ross\n\nGreg Rossman\n\nScott Rotruck\n\nLoni Rowan\n\nDavid Rowland\n\nDaniel Rucker\n\nEric Rucker\n\nMichael Rushing\n\nDena Russell\n\nDon Russell\n\nJackie Russell\n\nDusty Rust\n\nTracy Rust\n\nJason Ruth\n\nMatthew Rutledge\n\nGurpreet Saluja\n\nKelly Sanders\n\nMatthew Sanders\n\nDale Sanderson\n\nJohn Satterfield II\n\nPhillip Saxon\n\nDavid Schmidt Jr.\n\nShawn Schmidt\n\nKaren Schmuhl\n\nLee Sconyers\n\nBannon Scott\n\nJoseph Scott\n\nKrystle Scott\n\nLarry Scott\n\nKevin Scoville\n\nDavid Searls\n\nScott Secrest\n\nDusty Seiger\n\nDebbie Seiverling\n\nDale Self\n\nKenneth Sell\n\nJobey Sellers\n\nJon Selzer\n\nLouis Senkyrik\n\nClint Sepulvado\n\nAmanda Serna\n\nJ.C. Settles\n\nBrooke Shannon\n\nDouglas Shannon Jr.\n\nJimmy Sharp Jr.\n\nWendie Sharp\n\nFarley Shaw\n\nFrederick Shaw Jr.\n\nCarroll Shearer\n\nDavid Shellstrom\n\nMichael Sherman\n\nMichael Shiers\n\nKurt Shipley\n\nCarl Shorter\n\nGregorio Silva\n\nTerry Simmons\n\nChristopher Sims\n\nC.J. Sims\n\nMary Sims\n\nRandy B. Sims\n\nRandy S. Sims\n\nRickie Sims\n\nRudy Sims Jr.\n\nWard Sims Jr.\n\nTrevor Sinclair\n\nJames Singhisen\n\nDanny Singleton\n\nCharles Sitton\n\nBryan Sloan\n\nNathan Smarr\n\nEric Smeltzer\n\nBrian E. Smith\n\nDeane Smith\n\nDenise Smith\n\nEmily Smith\n\nErnest Smith\n\nJason Smith\n\nJustin E. Smith\n\nKade Smith\n\nMichael C. Smith\n\nMichael E. Smith\n\nMitzi Smith\n\nMonte K. Smith\n\nRusty Smith\n\nBrian Snider\n\nChad Snow\n\nRich Snyder Jr.\n\nPam Soltani\n\nAnnie Southard\n\nBecky Southerland\n\nPete Spadafora\n\nRodney Spencer\n\nLou Spitznogle\n\nDerek Spreier\n\nSteve Stafford\n\nCraig Staley\n\nJason Staley\n\nDon Stanley Jr.\n\nRonnie Statton\n\nJohn Stephens\n\nPeter Stephens\n\nRobby Stevens\n\nRoger Stevens\n\nLyvonne Stewart\n\nJason Stollings\n\nMichael Stone\n\nRichard Stotler Jr.\n\nAndy Strealy\n\nRussell Streeter\n\nJohn Strickland\n\nRonnie Stroh\n\nPerry Studebaker\n\nRene St. Pierre\n\nJohn Suter\n\nRoger Sutterfield\n\nAnastasia Svec\n\nJayce Swartz\n\nJoshua Swartz\n\nDee Swiger\n\nKevin Swiger\n\nColby Tackett\n\nRonnie Tarver\n\nDonny Taulbee Jr.\n\nAlan Taylor\n\nDavid P. Taylor\n\nJack Taylor\n\nMatthew Taylor\n\nMike Taylor\n\nSarah Taylor\n\nAndrew Tencer\n\nNicholas Terech\n\nDaniel Terry\n\nSamson Tesfaselassie\n\nGwen Thomas\n\nLacey Thomas\n\nPaul Thomas\n\nRichard Thompson\n\nTravis Thompson\n\nElmo Tillis\n\nAndrew Tipton\n\nMikki Tomlinson\n\nScott Tomlinson\n\nJohn Toney\n\nBrandon Tree\n\nStacey Trivitt\n\nDanny Trowbridge\n\nDaniel Truong\n\nIrina Tucker\n\nSteve Turk\n\nChris Turner Jr.\n\nCorey Turner\n\nJaffe Turner\n\nJoshua Tycer\n\nShawna Vance\n\nJames Van Alstine\n\nJeffrey Van Grevenhof\n\nMartha Vasek\n\nDakota Vaught\n\nBrandt Vawter\n\nGerardo Velez\n\nRandy Villaire\n\nDustin Vinson\n\nBrenda Vitatoe\n\nJonathan Vogel\n\nCurtis Voyles\n\nRobert Wagoner\n\nHuey Wagstaff\n\n| Erin Leigh Walker |\n|------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|\n| Noah Walker |\n| Donnie Wallis Matthew Walters |\n| Matt Warren Wil Warren |\n| Keith Washington Matt Watkins |\n| Dusty Watson James Watson |\n| Luke Watson |\n| Matthew B. Watson |\n| Rod Weatherby |\n| Lauren Webb |\n| John Weber John Webster |\n| Brad Wechsler |\n| Donald Weed Jody Weidner Thomas Weidner Matt Weinreich John Weir Jr. Michael B. Welch |\n| Toyia Wells |\n| Ann Wendorff |\n| Leonard Wesley |\n| Luke Westfahl Sam Whitaker Robert Whitbeck James B. White James K. White Jerry D. White Jerry D. White Christy Whited Bernice Whiteshirt |\n| Billy White Joe Whiteside |\n| Kent Wilkinson |\n| Eric C. Williams Jim Williams |\n| Joshua Williams |\n| Justin Williams Marlene Williams |\n| Rashaw Williams |\n| Thad Williams Zachary Williams Jeff Willis Tyler Willyard Andrew Wilson Brent Wilson |\n| Chad Wilson |\n| Julie Wilson |\n| Steve Wilson |\n| Trista Wilson |\n| Jim Wimmler Amos Wise Ivan Wolanski Taunya Wood Tara Woods |\n| Franklin Windham |\n| Craig Wittenhagen Dan Woodzell Shawn Wreath |\n| Henry Woodruff Megan Woodworth Bradley Wright Erran Wright Mary Wright Michael Wright |\n| Keith Yankowsky |\n| Scott Young |\n| Mina Zaheri |\n| Jason Zielke Jeff Ziga 2007 (1,165) Kenneth Aaron II Robert Abbott Michael Abila Clifton Ables Rodney Acosta |\n| Chris Adair |\n| Christopher Adair |\n| David M. Adams |\n| Victoria Adams Jamie Adamson |\n| Jeremy Adams |\n| Kevin Agee |\n\nYemi Ajijolaiya\n\nClint Ake\n\nRaymond Akins\n\nAdrian Alaniz\n\nIsrael Alaniz Jr.\n\nLeonardo Alcantar-Lopez\n\nJohn Alcorta\n\nDebbie Allen\n\nRonnie Allen\n\nTucker Allen\n\nJacob Allyn\n\nArdy Amin\n\nJeff Amos\n\nBoz Anderson\n\nCody Anderson\n\nDusty Anderson\n\nMaribeth Anderson\n\nRick Anderson\n\nWayne Anderson\n\nClenda Andrews\n\nSteve Archer\n\nKolby Arnold\n\nRoger Arnold Jr.\n\nJerry Ashley\n\nRobert Atchison\n\nRickey Avery\n\nNoa Avila\n\nWilliam Aycock\n\nWilliam Bagley Jr.\n\nKevin N. Bailey\n\nDavid Baker\n\nGarrett Baker\n\nJoe Baker\n\nLeslie Baker\n\nTeddy Baker\n\nDavid Baker-Lattie\n\nChad Bakke\n\nRick Ball\n\nRobert Ball\n\nCindy Balsly\n\nJeremy Banes\n\nAmy Banu\n\nFreddie Barela\n\nJudson Barker\n\nBeata Barna\n\nCraig Barnard\n\nSharon Barnett\n\nMerrilee Barone\n\nJorge Barron\n\nJulie Barron\n\nRedmond Barry\n\nWayne Bartlett\n\nTravis Basinger\n\nStacey Baty\n\nLaura Bauer\n\nKimberly Beal\n\nDavid Beard\n\nJustin Beatty\n\nCory Beck\n\nLarry Beckwith\n\nArianna Bedell\n\nSam Bedri\n\nRodney Belcher\n\nBen Bell\n\nChristy Bell\n\nBrooks Bennett\n\nLaura Bennett\n\nNathan Berg\n\nBarry Bergstrom\n\nTy Bermea\n\nPam Bert\n\nJon Biegel\n\nMarvin Biggar\n\nBryce Biggs\n\nRandy Billings\n\nEd Birdshead\n\nJeremy Birkes\n\nWes Bishop\n\nRobert Bitner\n\nQuinton Black\n\nShawn Black\n\nCraig Blackburn\n\nTimothy Blackmon\n\nJerry Blair\n\nJohn Blake Jr.\n\nJared Blakley\n\nBrandon L. Blevins\n\nSammie Blevins\n\nBlake Boecking\n\nDebbie Boggs\n\nMercedes Bolen\n\nRichard Bolt\n\nGreg Bommer\n\nJustin Bond\n\nDustin Boone\n\nJared Boren\n\nRyan Bose\n\nRonald Bowden\n\nClayton Bowerman\n\nLesley Bowman\n\nMike Bownds\n\nChris Boyd\n\nDiana Boyd\n\nKyle G. Bradford\n\nCasey Brady\n\nDanny Branch\n\nJordan Brandenburg\n\nEugene Branham\n\nJoe Branham\n\nErika Braver\n\nDennis Breakfield\n\nDarryl Breland\n\nLance Breland\n\nJeff Bridgwater\n\nEric Britton\n\nKeri Brock\n\nTanner Broomfield\n\nDeanna Brouillette\n\nAaron Brown\n\nEddie Brown\n\nJason O. Brown\n\nKenneth Brown Jr.\n\nScott Brown\n\nJeff Browning\n\nJames Brumley\n\nKasey Bryan\n\nJoshua Bryant\n\nRusty Bryce\n\nJonathan Bryson\n\nTanna Buie\n\nKenton Bulson\n\nShannon Bunner\n\nTracy Burleson\n\nTom Burnett\n\nJerry Burnham\n\nJerry Burns\n\nSundee Busby\n\nLouis Bushiey\n\nRocky Butler\n\nDavid Byrne\n\nMatt Cagigal\n\nRaymond Cagle\n\nAlan Callahan\n\nAndria Campbell\n\nIan Campbell\n\nJeffrey Campbell\n\nRichard Campbell\n\nAdrianne Cannon\n\nJon Cantu\n\nChris Carender\n\nAlicia Carey\n\nTerry Cariker\n\nGrant Carlisle\n\nJohn Carney\n\nMark Carpenter\n\nEarl Carr\n\nAmanda Carroll\n\nDarry Carter Sr.\n\nHolly Cary\n\nBen Case\n\nAlex Castaneda\n\nJose Castellano\n\nRicardo Castillo\n\nJohn Casto\n\nJeremy Caywood\n\nCurtis Celestine Jr.\n\nCrystal Celsur\n\nWilliam Chambers\n\nKathy Chandler\n\nGordon Channel\n\nPhilip Chapman\n\nRyan Chappell\n\nWard Chase Jr.\n\nJamie Chastain\n\nLisa Chastain\n\nArmando Chavez Jr.\n\nSteve Chipera\n\nPhillip Chism\n\nMorgan Chrisman\n\nRonnie Christopher\n\nRichard Chumley\n\nJohn Churchwell\n\nRosa Cisneros\n\nBeth Clanton\n\nDarin Clanton\n\nMatt Clark\n\nSheridan Clark\n\nDusty Clayton\n\nCharles Clevenger\n\nColt Clinesmith\n\nThomas Clouette II\n\nWayne Cloutet\n\nAndrew Cludius\n\nRyan Coalmer\n\nTobie Coffey\n\nDon Cogar\n\nStephanie Coil\n\nKyle Coldiron\n\nAdam Cole\n\nAshley Cole\n\nDustin Cole\n\nBob Coleman\n\nRobert T. Coleman\n\nMark Collier\n\nJoshua Collins\n\nStephen Collins\n\nBrad Collison\n\nDenise Condos\n\nDustin Conley\n\nSteven Conn\n\nDustin Connor\n\nWilliam Connor\n\nBrandon Cook\n\nNathan Cook\n\nDouglas Cooper\n\nMisty Cooper\n\nCatie Coppage\n\nIsmael Correa\n\nChad Corwin\n\nDennis Cottrill Jr.\n\nMichael Counts Jr.\n\nTodd Courson\n\nBrian K. Cox\n\nJennifer Cox\n\nRobert Crank\n\nRex Cravens\n\nTracy Crawford\n\nGary Crenshaw\n\nDaniel Crihfield\n\nJeffrey Crihfield\n\nTimothy Criner\n\nHeath Criss\n\nSteve Crocker\n\nJade Crockett\n\nZachary Cromer\n\nK.W. Cryer\n\nRobert Cumberland Jr\n\nTerry Cumberledge\n\nJered Cunningham\n\nTimothy Curnutte\n\nTasie Dahl\n\nMonte Dain\n\nSteve Daniel\n\nJohn Daniels\n\nHaley Dark\n\nJosh Darr\n\nDavid C. Davis\n\nDavy Davis\n\nDonald Davis\n\nGayl Davis\n\nKiley Davis\n\nLynsey Davis\n\nNathan Davis\n\nNicole Davis\n\nDuane Decker\n\nNick Delaloye\n\nJeff Delancy\n\nEric Denneny\n\nWilliam Denny\n\nJerry Derr\n\nTracey Devera\n\nDewey Deville\n\nTrey Dewald\n\nHolly DeRousse\n\nLisa DeSpain\n\nAdam DeVries\n\nRoque De La Torre\n\nBryan Dilger\n\nKristopher Dobbs\n\nMartin Dobson\n\n| Jensen Doby Chelly Dolinar |\n|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|\n| Chad Dome |\n| William Donahoe III |\n| Michael Donisch |\n| Adam Doty Gary Driskell |\n| J.P. Dube Jed Dudley |\n| Tim Dugan Buck Duncan |\n| Jacob Dupuy Bunky Dussetschleger Jr. |\n| Brian Duvall |\n| Lauren Dye Laren Easley Randall Easley Dan Eaton |\n| Russ Eason Joseph F. Eddy Jr. Glenn Edwards |\n| Jason Elder James Ellard Jr. |\n| Ricky Ellington Catey Elliott |\n| John Elliott |\n| Lauren Elliott Murphy Elliott Adam Ellis Keith Elroy |\n| Bryan Ely Amber Embrey |\n| Alex Emerson |\n| Jeremy Engles |\n| Sef Escajeda Tom Esparza |\n| Joseph Etheredge Bobby Etheridge David W. Evans Megan Evans Daphne Everett John Everett David Fancher Rosa Farias |\n| Keith Faris Tim Farrington James Faulkner Steven Feisal Susan Fell Amy Ferguson Christina Ferguson |\n| David Ferguson William Ferrebee |\n| Joe Ferguson |\n| Faith Fields Elyse Fischer Jill Fisher |\n| Ranson Fisher Suzanne Fitzpatrick |\n| Sam Flaming Matt Fletcher |\n| Otoniel Flores Hoyt Ford |\n| Stephanie Fleet Armando Flores Rob Ford |\n| Christopher Fore Kodi Foreman |\n| Douglas Fortney II |\n| Jim Forney Jake Forrest Russell Fory Jerry Foster Jr. Daniel Foulke |\n| Jake Fowler |\n| Sonia Fowler |\n| Tamara Fox Patrick Franklin |\n| Daron Fredrickson Teri Freeland Holly Freeman Phillip Freeman Amanda Friese Joel Fulenwider |\n| Mark Fulkerson |\n| Kimberly Fuller William Fuller |\n| Randy Gafford |\n| David Gaddy |", + "recall": 0.9916666666666667, + "true_md": "## 2007 (1,165)\n\n34 | EMPLOYEES\n\nLindsay Palazzolo Janie Palma Kurt Palmer Robert Palmer Jr. Betty Paolini Candy Parker Julie Parker Carla Parrish Umesh Patel Monte Patterson John Paul Michael Payne Daniel Pearce Blain Pearson Kim Pearson Ariel Pena Danielle Penland Terry Perdue Joe Perez Marty Pierce James Pine Matt Pinion Jeff Pinter Roger Pippins Jr. Lara Pitchford Brooke Pittard Michael Pittser Filemon Plascencia-Aceves Lori Plumley Richard Pogue David Poindexter Randy Poindexter Richard Poindexter David Polve Matthew Pompa Taos Pool Timothy Poole Raymond Posey Nick Pottmeyer Jordan Powell Joseph Presock Marsha Presock Ricky Pryor Ronald Putman Matt Queen Maria Quezada Mary Quinn Barbie Quinn Davis Tyson Raasch Daren Rader Mark Raidt Johnny Rains Hermenegildo Ramirez Peter Ramirez Jr. Bonnie Ramon Arturo Ramos Jessie Ramos Cody Ramsey Gary Ramsey Greg Ramsey Roy Rash Aaron Ream Roger Redmond Galen Reed Jacob Reeves Christopher Register Sr. Keith Reightler John Reinhart Brad Rekieta Allen Remmers Santhanaraj Rengaiah Matt Reser Jorge Reyes Roger Reyes Justin Reynolds Chris Rice Beth Richards Henry Riffe Sandi Riley Larry Ritter Gregory Rivera Courtney Roberts Josh Roberts Matthew Roberts Raymond Roberts Stacy Roberts Daniel Robertson Michael Robertson Scott Robertson\n\nScott Robinson Paul Rodesney Joel Rodriguez Maria A. Rodriguez Robert Rodriguez Sarah Rodriguez Juan Rodriguez-Huerta Jon Rogers Bailey Rollins Danielle Roper Vinson Roper Glenn Rose Richard Ross Robert Ross Greg Rossman Scott Rotruck Loni Rowan David Rowland Daniel Rucker Eric Rucker Michael Rushing Dena Russell Don Russell Jackie Russell Dusty Rust Tracy Rust Jason Ruth Matthew Rutledge Gurpreet Saluja Kelly Sanders Matthew Sanders Dale Sanderson John Satterfield II Phillip Saxon David Schmidt Jr. Shawn Schmidt Karen Schmuhl Lee Sconyers Bannon Scott Joseph Scott Krystle Scott Larry Scott Kevin Scoville David Searls Scott Secrest Dusty Seiger Debbie Seiverling Dale Self Kenneth Sell Jobey Sellers Jon Selzer Louis Senkyrik Clint Sepulvado Amanda Serna J.C. Settles Brooke Shannon Douglas Shannon Jr. Jimmy Sharp Jr. Wendie Sharp Farley Shaw Frederick Shaw Jr. Carroll Shearer David Shellstrom Michael Sherman Michael Shiers Kurt Shipley Carl Shorter Gregorio Silva Terry Simmons Christopher Sims C.J. Sims Mary Sims Randy B. Sims Randy S. Sims Rickie Sims Rudy Sims Jr. Ward Sims Jr. Trevor Sinclair James Singhisen Danny Singleton Charles Sitton Bryan Sloan Nathan Smarr Eric Smeltzer Brian E. Smith Deane Smith Denise Smith Emily Smith Ernest Smith Jason Smith\n\nJustin E. Smith Kade Smith Michael C. Smith Michael E. Smith Mitzi Smith Monte K. Smith Rusty Smith Brian Snider Chad Snow Rich Snyder Jr. Pam Soltani Annie Southard Becky Southerland Pete Spadafora Rodney Spencer Lou Spitznogle Derek Spreier Steve Stafford Craig Staley Jason Staley Don Stanley Jr. Ronnie Statton John Stephens Peter Stephens Robby Stevens Roger Stevens Lyvonne Stewart Jason Stollings Michael Stone Richard Stotler Jr. Andy Strealy Russell Streeter John Strickland Ronnie Stroh Perry Studebaker Rene St. Pierre John Suter Roger Sutterfield Anastasia Svec Jayce Swartz Joshua Swartz Dee Swiger Kevin Swiger Colby Tackett Ronnie Tarver Donny Taulbee Jr. Alan Taylor David P. Taylor Jack Taylor Matthew Taylor Mike Taylor Sarah Taylor Andrew Tencer Nicholas Terech Daniel Terry Samson Tesfaselassie Gwen Thomas Lacey Thomas Paul Thomas Richard Thompson Travis Thompson Elmo Tillis Andrew Tipton Mikki Tomlinson Scott Tomlinson John Toney Brandon Tree Stacey Trivitt Danny Trowbridge Daniel Truong Irina Tucker Steve Turk Chris Turner Jr. Corey Turner Jaffe Turner Joshua Tycer Shawna Vance James Van Alstine Jeffrey Van Grevenhof Martha Vasek Dakota Vaught Brandt Vawter Gerardo Velez Randy Villaire Dustin Vinson Brenda Vitatoe Jonathan Vogel Curtis Voyles Robert Wagoner Huey Wagstaff\n\nKenneth Aaron II Robert Abbott Michael Abila Clifton Ables Rodney Acosta Chris Adair Christopher Adair David M. Adams Jeremy Adams Victoria Adams Jamie Adamson Kevin Agee Roberto Aguilar-Garza\n\nYemi Ajijolaiya Clint Ake Raymond Akins Adrian Alaniz Israel Alaniz Jr. Leonardo Alcantar-Lopez John Alcorta Debbie Allen Ronnie Allen Tucker Allen Jacob Allyn Ardy Amin Jeff Amos Boz Anderson Cody Anderson Dusty Anderson Maribeth Anderson Rick Anderson Wayne Anderson Clenda Andrews Steve Archer Kolby Arnold Roger Arnold Jr. Jerry Ashley Robert Atchison Rickey Avery Noa Avila William Aycock William Bagley Jr. Kevin N. Bailey David Baker Garrett Baker Joe Baker Leslie Baker Teddy Baker David Baker-Lattie Chad Bakke Rick Ball Robert Ball Cindy Balsly Jeremy Banes Amy Banu Freddie Barela Judson Barker Beata Barna Craig Barnard Sharon Barnett Merrilee Barone Jorge Barron Julie Barron Redmond Barry Wayne Bartlett Travis Basinger Stacey Baty Laura Bauer Kimberly Beal David Beard Justin Beatty Cory Beck Larry Beckwith Arianna Bedell Sam Bedri Rodney Belcher BenBell Christy Bell Brooks Bennett Laura Bennett Nathan Berg Barry Bergstrom Ty Bermea Pam Bert Jon Biegel Marvin Biggar Bryce Biggs Randy Billings Ed Birdshead Jeremy Birkes Wes Bishop Robert Bitner Quinton Black Shawn Black Craig Blackburn Timothy Blackmon Jerry Blair John Blake Jr. Jared Blakley Brandon L. Blevins Sammie Blevins Blake Boecking Debbie Boggs\n\nErin Leigh Walker Noah Walker Christopher Wallace Donnie Wallis Matthew Walters Matt Warren Wil Warren Keith Washington Matt Watkins Dusty Watson James Watson Luke Watson Matthew B. Watson Rod Weatherby Lauren Webb John Weber John Webster Brad Wechsler Donald Weed Jody Weidner Thomas Weidner Matt Weinreich John Weir Jr. Michael B. Welch Toyia Wells Ann Wendorff Leonard Wesley Luke Westfahl Sam Whitaker Robert Whitbeck Billy White James B. White James K. White Jerry D. White Jerry D. White Christy Whited Bernice Whiteshirt Joe Whiteside Kent Wilkinson Eric C. Williams Jim Williams Joshua Williams Justin Williams Marlene Williams Rashaw Williams Thad Williams Zachary Williams Jeff Willis Tyler Willyard Andrew Wilson Brent Wilson Chad Wilson Julie Wilson Steve Wilson Trista Wilson Jim Wimmler Franklin Windham Amos Wise Craig Wittenhagen Ivan Wolanski Taunya Wood Henry Woodruff Tara Woods Megan Woodworth Dan Woodzell Shawn Wreath Bradley Wright Erran Wright Mary Wright Michael Wright Keith Yankowsky Scott Young Mina Zaheri Jason Zielke Jeff Ziga\n\nMercedes Bolen Richard Bolt Greg Bommer Justin Bond DustinBoone Jared Boren Ryan Bose Ronald Bowden Clayton Bowerman Lesley Bowman Mike Bownds Chris Boyd Diana Boyd Kyle G. Bradford Casey Brady Danny Branch Jordan Brandenburg Eugene Branham Joe Branham Erika Braver Dennis Breakfield Darryl Breland Lance Breland Jeff Bridgwater Eric Britton Keri Brock Tanner Broomfield Deanna Brouillette Aaron Brown Eddie Brown Jason O. Brown Kenneth Brown Jr. Scott Brown Jeff Browning James Brumley Kasey Bryan Joshua Bryant Rusty Bryce Jonathan Bryson Tanna Buie Kenton Bulson Shannon Bunner Tracy Burleson Tom Burnett Jerry Burnham Jerry Burns Sundee Busby Louis Bushiey Rocky Butler David Byrne Matt Cagigal Raymond Cagle Alan Callahan Andria Campbell Ian Campbell Jeffrey Campbell Richard Campbell Adrianne Cannon Jon Cantu Chris Carender Alicia Carey Terry Cariker Grant Carlisle John Carney Mark Carpenter Earl Carr Amanda Carroll Darry Carter Sr. Holly Cary Ben Case Alex Castaneda Jose Castellano Ricardo Castillo John Casto Jeremy Caywood Curtis Celestine Jr. Crystal Celsur William Chambers Kathy Chandler Gordon Channel Philip Chapman Ryan Chappell Ward Chase Jr. Jamie Chastain Lisa Chastain Armando Chavez Jr. Steve Chipera Phillip Chism Morgan Chrisman Ronnie Christopher\n\nRichard Chumley John Churchwell Rosa Cisneros Beth Clanton Darin Clanton Matt Clark Sheridan Clark Dusty Clayton Charles Clevenger Colt Clinesmith Thomas Clouette II Wayne Cloutet Andrew Cludius Ryan Coalmer Tobie Coffey Don Cogar Stephanie Coil Kyle Coldiron Adam Cole Ashley Cole Dustin Cole Bob Coleman Robert T. Coleman Mark Collier Joshua Collins Stephen Collins Brad Collison Denise Condos Dustin Conley Steven Conn Dustin Connor William Connor Brandon Cook Nathan Cook DouglasCooper Misty Cooper Catie Coppage Ismael Correa Chad Corwin Dennis Cottrill Jr. Michael Counts Jr. Todd Courson Brian K. Cox Jennifer Cox Robert Crank Rex Cravens Tracy Crawford Gary Crenshaw Daniel Crihfield Jeffrey Crihfield Timothy Criner Heath Criss Steve Crocker Jade Crockett Zachary Cromer K.W. Cryer Robert Cumberland Jr Terry Cumberledge Jered Cunningham Timothy Curnutte Tasie Dahl Monte Dain Steve Daniel John Daniels Haley Dark Josh Darr David C. Davis Davy Davis Donald Davis Gayl Davis Kiley Davis Lynsey Davis Nathan Davis Nicole Davis Duane Decker Nick Delaloye Jeff Delancy Eric Denneny William Denny Jerry Derr Tracey Devera Dewey Deville Trey Dewald Holly DeRousse Lisa DeSpain Adam DeVries Roque De La Torre Bryan Dilger Kristopher Dobbs Martin Dobson" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.75596958909846, + "doc_id": "8fb7510d8cdb349c95cfc7ed89e1b0108da740a92d6b90f89e921716c682aebb", + "edit_distance": 0.4462809917355372, + "f1_score": 0.9402985074626866, + "meteor": 0.8117827359796771, + "precision": 0.9473684210526315, + "pred_md": "SMFG\n\n## Capital (Nonconsolidated)\n\nSumitomo Mitsui Financial Group, Inc.\n\n## Change in Number of Shares Issued and Capital Stock\n\n## Remarks:\n\n- * 1 Repurchase and cancellation of 35,000 shares of preferred stock (Type 1) and 33,000 shares of preferred stock (Type 2)\n- * 2 Capital reserve was transferred to other capital surplus pursuant to Article 448-1 of the Companies Act.\n- * 3 ncrease in the number of common stock as a result of share exchange for making SMBC Friend Securities Co., Ltd. our wholly-owned subsidiary (share exchange I ratio: 1-to-0.0008)\n- * 4 Repurchase and cancellation of 67,000 shares of preferred stock (Type 2)\n- * 5 Repurchase and cancellation of 500,000 shares of preferred stock (Type 3) and increase in shares of common stock of 60,466\n- * 6 Repurchase and cancellation of 195,000 shares of preferred stock (Type 3)\n- * 7 ncrease in shares of common stock of 157,151 as a result of exercise of rights to purchase all the shares of preferred stock (5th to 8th series Type 4) I\n- * 8 Decrease in shares of preferred stock (Type 4) of 16,700 as a result of cancellation of all the shares of preferred stock (5th to 8th series Type 4)\n- * 9 ncrease in shares of common stock of 781,189,672.23 as a result of 100-for-1 stock split I\n- * 10 Public offering: Common stock: 219,700,000 shares\n\nIssue price: ·3,766 Capitalization: ·1,883\n\n- * 11 Allotment to third parties: Common stock: 8,931,300 shares\n\nIssue price: ·3,766 Capitalization: ·1,883\n\n- * 12 Public offering: Common stock: 340,000,000 shares\n\nIssue price: ·2,702.81 Capitalization: ·1,351.405\n\n- * 13 ncrease in shares of common stock of 36,343,848 as a result of exercise of rights to purchase all the shares of preferred stock (1st to 4th and 9th to 12th series I Type 4)\n- * 14 Decrease in shares of preferred stock (Type 4) of 33,400 as a result of cancellation of all the shares of preferred stock (1st to 4th and 9th to 12th series Type 4)\n- * 15 Allotment to third parties: Common stock: 20,000,000 shares\n\nIssue price: ·2,702.81 Capitalization: ·1,351.405\n\nNote: The number of shares of preferred stock (Type 6) decreased by 70,001 as a result of repurchase and cancellation of all the shares of preferred stock (1st series Type 6) on April 1, 2011.\n\n## Number of Shares Issued\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n152", + "recall": 0.9333333333333333, + "true_md": "SMFG\n\n## Capital (Nonconsolidated)\n\nSMFG 2011 152\n\n## Number of Shares Issued\n\n## Remarks:\n\n* $^{1}$ Repurchase and cancellation of 35,000 shares of preferred stock (Type 1) and 33,000 shares of preferred stock (Type 2)\n\n* $^{2}$ Capital reserve was transferred to other capital surplus pursuant to Article 448-1 of the Companies Act.\n\n* $^{3}$ Increase in the number of common stock as a result of share exchange for making SMBC Friend Securities Co., Ltd. our wholly-owned subsidiary (share exchange ratio: 1-to-0.0008)\n\n* $^{4}$ Repurchase and cancellation of 67,000 shares of preferred stock (Type 2)\n\n* $^{5}$ Repurchase and cancellation of 500,000 shares of preferred stock (Type 3) and increase in shares of common stock of 60,466\n\n* $^{6}$ Repurchase and cancellation of 195,000 shares of preferred stock (Type 3)\n\n* $^{7}$ Increase in shares of common stock of 157,151 as a result of exercise of rights to purchase all the shares of preferred stock (5th to 8th series Type 4)\n\n* $^{8}$ Decrease in shares of preferred stock (Type 4) of 16,700 as a result of cancellation of all the shares of preferred stock (5th to 8th series Type 4)\n\n* $^{9}$ Increase in shares of common stock of 781,189,672.23 as a result of 100-for-1 stock split\n\nNote: The number of shares of preferred stock (Type 6) decreased by 70,001 as a result of repurchase and cancellation of all the shares of preferred stock (1st series Type 6) on April 1, 2011.\n\n* 15 Allotment to third parties: Common stock: 20,000,000 shares\n\n* 14 Decrease in shares of preferred stock (Type 4) of 33,400 as a result of cancellation of all the shares of preferred stock (1st to 4th and 9th to 12th series Type 4)\n\n* 13 Increase in shares of common stock of 36,343,848 as a result of exercise of rights to purchase all the shares of preferred stock (1st to 4th and 9th to 12th series Type 4)\n\n* 12 Public offering: Common stock: 340,000,000 shares\n\n* 11 Allotment to third parties: Common stock: 8,931,300 shares\n\n* 10 Public offering: Common stock: 219,700,000 shares\n\nChange in Number of Shares Issued and Capital Stock\n\nSumitomo Mitsui Financial Group, Inc.\n\nIssue price: ¥3,766\n\nCapitalization: ¥1,883\n\nIssue price: ¥3,766\n\nCapitalization: ¥1,883\n\nCapitalization: ¥1,351.405\n\nIssue price: ¥2,702.81\n\nCapitalization: ¥1,351.405\n\nIssue price: ¥2,702.81" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9384042777458095, + "doc_id": "cf82617c9ad1688f1772aae00b007711b31340cab8521d52eaa285ebf219406a", + "edit_distance": 0.06658739595719382, + "f1_score": 0.9856915739268679, + "meteor": 0.957497556601598, + "precision": 0.9872611464968153, + "pred_md": "## Management's Discussion and Analysis\n\nDollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\nKillam's weighted average cost of natural cost on a per Gj basis increased by 32% in the year. Excluding the delivery charge component of the cost, the actual commodity cost increased by a weighted average of 80% compared to 2012. This cost increase resulted in approximately $1.2 million in additional natural gas expense in the year. Killam saw a decrease in the cost per Gj in Nova Scotia in December year-over-year due to fixed contracts noted above, however colder than normal weather resulted in an increase of 17% in heating degree days in the fourth quarter, more than offsetting the price savings. Pricing increased in New Brunswick in December 2013, as noted in the graph above, and reflects the spike in day pricing during the exceptionally cold weather during the second half of December 2013.\n\nLooking forward, Management expects to see continued volatility in natural gas prices in New Brunswick and Nova Scotia in periods of cold weather in the Northeastern US due to limited pipeline capacity and increasing demand from utilities. Originally expected to be a 2013 winter costing issue, this volatility may continue in periods of cold weather until additional pipeline infrastructure is built. In the short-term, Management will continue to manage assets to minimize its natural gas usage and is working with natural gas suppliers to explore fixing a portion of its gas requirement in next year's heating season. Despite the volatility in gas prices since late 2012, natural gas is generally more economical than oil. Management monitors this price differential and has the capacity to switch to oil when it is more economical for a small number of assets with dual-fired capacity.\n\nElectricity costs also increased in 2013, up 11.3% year-over-year. Killam's rental incentives have increased the amount of rents with electricity included at certain New Brunswick properties to compete with similar promotions offered by other apartment owners in the market. Rents are typically increased to offset this additional expense, however tenants are attracted to fixing the cost of electricity in a monthly rental payment.\n\nSame store water expense increased by 3.1% for the year. Increased water rates in Halifax contributed to this increase, but were partially offset by water saving initiatives. Water cost as a percentage of revenue is expected to increase over the next year and a half due to increased water rates in Halifax that became effective July 2013. An additional increase will come into effect in April 2014. Killam is evaluating the full impact of these increases, but expects a 10% to 15% increase in water costs in 2014 compared to 2013. Killam will continue to invest in water saving initiatives to mitigate its exposure to these increased costs.\n\n## Apartment Same Store NOI by City\n\nNet revenue growth of 1.6%, offset by increased property operating expenses, has resulted in a decrease in same store apartment NOI by 1.0% during 2013. Excluding the impact of the spike in natural gas costs, same store NOI would have increased by 1.0% in 2013. Same store NOI results by city, as shown in the chart below, vary depending on changes in occupancy levels in each market and the higher utility costs experienced in some regions during 2013.\n\n## For the years ended December 31,\n\nHalifax's NOI was generally flat in 2013 as higher rental revenue was offset by increased utility expenses. The highest same store NOI growth for the year was achieved at properties located in the St. John's and Ontario markets, posting gains of 4.5% in each region. These markets were not impacted by higher natural gas costs and have experienced strong revenue growth year-over-year.\n\nSaint John was Killam's softest market with higher vacancy rates driving the 14.1% decline in NOI in 2013 compared to 2012. The decline in overall 2013 occupancy in Charlottetown compared to 2012 resulted in decreased NOI of 6.5%.\n\nFredericton and Moncton both recorded negative NOI growth, 1.1% and 2.6%, respectively, for the year due to higher vacancy in 2013 compared to 2012, partially offset by positive rental rate growth in each region.\n\nOther Atlantic locations include seven properties in other cities in Atlantic Canada. These properties realized NOI growth in 2013 due to rental rate increases, lower vacancy and minimal operating expense growth as they are not heated with natural gas.\n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013\n\n39", + "recall": 0.9841269841269841, + "true_md": "## Management’s Discussion and Analysis Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\nManagement’s Discussion and Analysis Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\nKillam’s weighted average cost of natural cost on a per Gj basis increased by 32% in the year. Excluding the delivery charge component of the cost, the actual commodity cost increased by a weighted average of 80% compared to 2012. This cost increase resulted in approximately $1.2 million in additional natural gas expense in the year. Killam saw a decrease in the cost per Gj in Nova Scotia in December year‑over‑year due to fixed contracts noted above, however colder than normal weather resulted in an increase of 17% in heating degree days in the fourth quarter, more than offsetting the price savings. Pricing increased in New Brunswick in December 2013, as noted in the graph above, and reflects the spike in day pricing during the exceptionally cold weather during the second half of December 2013. \n\nLooking forward, Management expects to see continued volatility in natural gas prices in New Brunswick and Nova Scotia in periods of cold weather in the Northeastern US due to limited pipeline capacity and increasing demand from utilities. Originally expected to be a 2013 winter costing issue, this volatility may continue in periods of cold weather until additional pipeline infrastructure is built. In the short‑term, Management will continue to manage assets to minimize its natural gas usage and is working with natural gas suppliers to explore fixing a portion of its gas requirement in next year’s heating season. Despite the volatility in gas prices since late 2012, natural gas is generally more economical than oil. Management monitors this price differential and has the capacity to switch to oil when it is more economical for a small number of assets with dual‑fired capacity.\n\nElectricity costs also increased in 2013, up 11.3% year‑over‑year. Killam’s rental incentives have increased the amount of rents with electricity included at certain New Brunswick properties to compete with similar promotions offered by other apartment owners in the market. Rents are typically increased to offset this additional expense, however tenants are attracted to fixing the cost of electricity in a monthly rental payment.\n\nSame store water expense increased by 3.1% for the year. Increased water rates in Halifax contributed to this increase, but were partially offset by water saving initiatives. Water cost as a percentage of revenue is expected to increase over the next year and a half due to increased water rates in Halifax that became effective July 2013. An additional increase will come into effect in April 2014. Killam is evaluating the full impact of these increases, but expects a 10% to 15% increase in water costs in 2014 compared to 2013. Killam will continue to invest in water saving initiatives to mitigate its exposure to these increased costs.\n\nNet revenue growth of 1.6%, offset by increased property operating expenses, has resulted in a decrease in same store apartment NOI by 1.0% during 2013. Excluding the impact of the spike in natural gas costs, same store NOI would have increased by 1.0% in 2013. Same store NOI results by city, as shown in the chart below, vary depending on changes in occupancy levels in each market and the higher utility costs experienced in some regions during 2013. \n\nFor the years ended December 31,\n\n## Apartment Same Store NOI by City\n\nHalifax’s NOI was generally flat in 2013 as higher rental revenue was offset by increased utility expenses. The highest same store NOI growth for the year was achieved at properties located in the St. John’s and Ontario markets, posting gains of 4.5% in each region. These markets were not impacted by higher natural gas costs and have experienced strong revenue growth year‑over‑year.\n\nSaint John was Killam’s softest market with higher vacancy rates driving the 14.1% decline in NOI in 2013 compared to 2012. The decline in overall 2013 occupancy in Charlottetown compared to 2012 resulted in decreased NOI of 6.5%.\n\nFredericton and Moncton both recorded negative NOI growth, 1.1% and 2.6%, respectively, for the year due to higher vacancy in 2013 compared to 2012, partially offset by positive rental rate growth in each region. \n\nOther Atlantic locations include seven properties in other cities in Atlantic Canada. These properties realized NOI growth in 2013 due to rental rate increases, lower vacancy and minimal operating expense growth as they are not heated with natural gas.\n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013 39" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8694390444484834, + "doc_id": "4b9e166a48d11b4a70e29eee19fdd472eea29e76f2affa0ee3f595467dff7fec", + "edit_distance": 0.2711864406779661, + "f1_score": 0.9552845528455285, + "meteor": 0.9186080764067408, + "precision": 0.9552845528455285, + "pred_md": "## notes to the consolidated Financial statements\n\nD\n\nollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except share and per share amounts)\n\n## 5. Investment Properties (continued)\n\nFor year ended December 31, 2013, interest costs associated with the general corporate borrowings used to fund development have been capitalized to the respective development using the Company's weighted average borrowing rate of 4.38% (December 31, 2012 - 4.50%). Interest costs associated with construction loans are capitalized to the respective development using the actual borrowing rate associated with the loan.\n\nInvestment properties with a fair value of $1,432,731 at December 31, 2013, (December 31, 2012 - $1,294,317) are pledged as collateral against the company's mortgages payable.\n\n## Valuation Process\n\nThe management group that determines the Company's valuation policies and procedures for investment property valuations comprises the Chief Executive Officer ('CEO') and Chief Financial Officer ('CFO'). Each year, the CEO and CFO decide which external valuator to appoint to be responsible for the external valuations of the Company's properties. Selection criteria include market knowledge, reputation, independence and whether professional standards are maintained.\n\nThe CEO and CFO decide each quarter after consultation with the Company's external valuator and the Company's finance department:\n\n- · whether a property's fair value can be reliably determined (IPUC are valued at cost until such time as fair value becomes reliably determinable);\n- · which valuation method should be applied for each property; and\n- · the assumptions made for unobservable inputs that are used in the valuation methods.\n\nValuations are performed on a quarterly basis at each interim reporting date. Valuations for interim reporting purposes are prepared internally by the Company's finance department using cap-rates provided by the Company's external valuator. On an annual basis the Company obtains full valuation reports from an external valuator for approximately 20% of its investment property portfolio, and therefore every property is externally valued at least once every five years.\n\nAt each reporting date, the finance department analyses the movement in each property's value. For this analysis, the finance department verifies the major inputs applied in the latest valuation by referencing supporting information in the calculation to market reports and other relevant documents. For each property, the latest valuation is also compared with the valuations in the preceding quarter. If the fair value change (positive or negative) is more than 5%, the change is further analyzed to ensure reasonability, as well as absence of expected changes.\n\nOn a quarterly basis, the finance department discusses assumptions used in the valuations, with an emphasis on: (i) properties with fair value changes outside of the relevant threshold set out above; and (ii) IPUC.\n\nThe following table presents the following for each class of investment property:\n\n- · the level of the fair value hierarchy;\n- · the carrying amount or fair value of the investment property;\n- · a description of the valuation technique; and\n- · for Level 3 fair value measurements, quantitative information about significant unobservable inputs.\n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013\n\n79", + "recall": 0.9552845528455285, + "true_md": "Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except share and per share amounts)\n\n## 5. Investment Properties (continued)\n\n## Valuation Process\n\nFor year ended December 31, 2013, interest costs associated with the general corporate borrowings used to fund development have been capitalized to the respective development using the Company’s weighted average borrowing rate of 4.38% (December 31, 2012 ‑ 4.50%). Interest costs associated with construction loans are capitalized to the respective development using the actual borrowing rate associated with the loan.\n\nInvestment properties with a fair value of $1,432,731 at December 31, 2013, (December 31, 2012 ‑ $1,294,317) are pledged as collateral against the company’s mortgages payable.\n\nThe management group that determines the Company’s valuation policies and procedures for investment property valuations comprises the Chief Executive Officer (“CEO”) and Chief Financial Officer (“CFO”). Each year, the CEO and CFO decide which external valuator to appoint to be responsible for the external valuations of the Company’s properties. Selection criteria include market knowledge, reputation, independence and whether professional standards are maintained.\n\nThe CEO and CFO decide each quarter after consultation with the Company’s external valuator and the Company’s finance department:\n\nValuations are performed on a quarterly basis at each interim reporting date. Valuations for interim reporting purposes are prepared internally by the Company’s finance department using cap‑rates provided by the Company’s external valuator. On an annual basis the Company obtains full valuation reports from an external valuator for approximately 20% of its investment property portfolio, and therefore every property is externally valued at least once every five years. \n\nAt each reporting date, the finance department analyses the movement in each property’s value. For this analysis, the finance department verifies the major inputs applied in the latest valuation by referencing supporting information in the calculation to market reports and other relevant documents. For each property, the latest valuation is also compared with the valuations in the preceding quarter. If the fair value change (positive or negative) is more than 5%, the change is further analyzed to ensure reasonability, as well as absence of expected changes. \n\nOn a quarterly basis, the finance department discusses assumptions used in the valuations, with an emphasis on: (i) properties with fair value changes outside of the relevant threshold set out above; and (ii) IPUC.\n\nThe following table presents the following for each class of investment property:\n\n• whether a property’s fair value can be reliably determined (IPUC are valued at cost until such time as fair value becomes reliably determinable); \n\n• which valuation method should be applied for each property; and\n\n• the assumptions made for unobservable inputs that are used in the valuation methods.\n\n- • the level of the fair value hierarchy;\n\n- • the carrying amount or fair value of the investment property;\n\n- • a description of the valuation technique; and\n\n- • for Level 3 fair value measurements, quantitative information about significant unobservable inputs.\n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013 79" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8495462898736923, + "doc_id": "3f017fbdf11f79eeab9d4be2ee6264f99d39372bc5bedb04ad23a1b7448e6351", + "edit_distance": 0.175, + "f1_score": 0.972972972972973, + "meteor": 0.9690088757396451, + "precision": 0.972972972972973, + "pred_md": "CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## Consolidated Statements of Changes in Shareholders' Equity\n\n(In millions of Canadian dollars)\n\nThe accompanying notes are an integral part of the consolidated financial statements.\n\n92\n\nROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT", + "recall": 0.972972972972973, + "true_md": "## Consolidated Statements of Changes in Shareholders’ Equity\n\n(In millions of Canadian dollars)\n\nCONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\nThe accompanying notes are an integral part of the consolidated financial statements.\n\n92 ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7938404789016338, + "doc_id": "3e0dee498a14b280246e0a0a93f03bb90ab35770b82ed04aec49d8b1c526c038", + "edit_distance": 0.6274509803921569, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.8930677054163975, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "SMFG\n\n## Consolidated Statements of Income and Consolidated Statements of Comprehensive Income\n\nSumitomo Mitsui Financial Group, Inc. and Subsidiaries\n\n(Consolidated Statements of Income)\n\n## (Consolidated Statements of Comprehensive Income)\n\nSee accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n72", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "SMFG\n\n## Consolidated Statements of Income and Consolidated Statements of Comprehensive Income\n\nSMFG 2011 72\n\n## (Consolidated Statements of Comprehensive Income)\n\nSee accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.\n\n## Sumitomo Mitsui Financial Group, Inc. and Subsidiaries\n\n## (Consolidated Statements of Income)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9173349788069162, + "doc_id": "8671dded9cd972dec94d6308ff66665a10ffcb95896a8dd5e88c308699a94975", + "edit_distance": 0.41379310344827586, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9850547377916273, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## 38. Parent Company\n\n## (1) Nonconsolidated Balance Sheets\n\nSumitomo Mitsui Financial Group, Inc.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n135\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nSMFG", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "SMFG Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n## 38. Parent Company\n\n## (1) Nonconsolidated Balance Sheets\n\nSumitomo Mitsui Financial Group, Inc.\n\nSMFG 2011 135" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9131746526566903, + "doc_id": "2b874a218eb28cade8ef2ad4e71faffbfa4d89ba8ac7cc0708f363d11bbe06a8", + "edit_distance": 0.5703839122486288, + "f1_score": 0.959090909090909, + "meteor": 0.7955132365378639, + "precision": 0.9723502304147466, + "pred_md": "## Basic Approach\n\nAs risks in the financial services increase in diversity and complexity, risk management-identifying, measuring, and controlling risk-has never been more important in the management of a financial holding company.\n\nSMFG has encapsulated the basic principles to be employed in risk management in the manual entitled Regulations on Risk Management . In the manual, we have specified the basic policies for risk management: 1) Set forth SMFG's Groupwide basic policies for risk management after specifying the categories of risk to which these policies apply; 2) Provide all necessary guidance to Group companies to enable them to follow the basic risk management policies set forth by SMFG and set up their own appropriate risk management systems; and 3) Monitor the implementation of risk management by all Group companies to ensure that their practices meet the relevant standards.\n\n## (1) Types of Risk to Be Managed\n\nAt SMFG, we classify risk into the following categories: (1) credit risk, (2) market risk, (3) liquidity risk and (4) operational risk (including processing risk and system risk). In addition, we provide individually tailored guidance to help Group companies identify categories of risk that need to be addressed. Risk categories are constantly reviewed, and new categories may be added in response to changes in the operating environment. The Corporate Risk Management Department works with the Corporate Planning Department to comprehensively and systematically manage all these categories of risk across the entire Group.\n\n## (2) Fundamental Principles and Basic Policies for Risk Management\n\nSMFG's Groupwide basic policies for risk management stipulate the fundamental principles for risk management that must be followed, and spell out risk management procedures from various perspectives. These include managing risk on a consolidated accounting basis, managing risk using quantification methods, ensuring consistency with business strategies, setting up a system of checks and balances, contingency planning for emergencies and serious situations, and verifying preparedness to handle all conceivable risk situations. In addition, there are specific operational policies for implementing appropriate management of risk by all Group companies.\n\nUnder SMFG's Groupwide basic policies for risk management, all Group companies periodically carry out reviews of the basic management policies for each risk category, or whenever deemed necessary, thus ensuring that the policies followed at any time are the most appropriate. The management of SMFG constantly monitors the conduct of risk management at Group companies, providing guidance when necessary.\n\n## Risk Management System\n\nTop management plays an active role in determining SMFG's Groupwide basic policies for risk management. The system works as follows: The basic policies for risk management are determined by the Management Committee before being authorized by the Board. The Management Committee, the designated board members, and the relevant risk management departments perform risk management according to the basic policies.\n\n## ■ SMFG's Risk Management System\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n32", + "recall": 0.9461883408071748, + "true_md": "## Risk Management\n\n## Basic Approach\n\n## (2) Fundamental Principles and Basic Policies for Risk Management\n\n## (1) Types of Risk to Be Managed\n\n## Risk Management System\n\n## ■ SMFG’s Risk Management System\n\nSMFG 2011 32\n\nAs risks in the financial services increase in diversity and complexity, risk management—identifying, measuring, and controlling risk—has never been more important in the management of a financial holding company.\n\nSMFG has encapsulated the basic principles to be employed in risk management in the manual entitled Regulations on Risk Management . In the manual, we have specified the basic policies for risk management: 1) Set forth SMFG’s Groupwide basic policies for risk management after specifying the categories of risk to which these policies apply; 2) Provide all necessary guidance to Group companies to enable them to follow the basic risk management policies set forth by SMFG and set up their own appropriate risk management systems; and 3) Monitor the implementation of risk management by all Group companies to ensure that their practices meet the relevant standards.\n\nSMFG’s Groupwide basic policies for risk management stipulate the fundamental principles for risk management that must be followed, and spell out risk management procedures from various perspec- tives. These include managing risk on a consolidated accounting basis, managing risk using quantification methods, ensuring con- sistency with business strategies, setting up a system of checks and balances, contingency planning for emergencies and serious situations, and verifying preparedness to handle all conceivable risk situations. In addition, there are specific operational policies for implementing appropriate management of risk by all Group companies.\n\nUnder SMFG’s Groupwide basic policies for risk management, all Group companies periodically carry out reviews of the basic management policies for each risk category, or whenever deemed necessary, thus ensuring that the policies followed at any time are the most appropriate. The management of SMFG constantly monitors the conduct of risk management at Group companies, providing guidance when necessary.\n\nTop management plays an active role in determining SMFG’s Groupwide basic policies for risk management. The system works as follows: The basic policies for risk management are determined by the Management Committee before being authorized by the Board. The Management Committee, the designated board mem- bers, and the relevant risk management departments perform risk management according to the basic policies.\n\nAt SMFG, we classify risk into the following categories: (1) credit risk, (2) market risk, (3) liquidity risk and (4) operational risk (including processing risk and system risk). In addition, we provide individually tailored guidance to help Group companies identify categories of risk that need to be addressed. Risk catego- ries are constantly reviewed, and new categories may be added in response to changes in the operating environment. The Corporate Risk Management Department works with the Corporate Planning Department to comprehensively and systematically manage all these categories of risk across the entire Group." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "56c753cb2a5439454e6c027adee18c6be0a5b17c6e1fef7bb459b8fdc0b53281", + "edit_distance": 0.7142857142857143, + "f1_score": 0.6666666666666666, + "meteor": 0.5943152454780362, + "precision": 0.6, + "pred_md": "## Corporate Governance\n\n- 46 -", + "recall": 0.75, + "true_md": "-46 - \n\nCorporate Governance" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9055285208654975, + "doc_id": "16573cfcb2022f97f71bc8d3698609d0c25fdd84f9bf74ed41853adcdd08eaff", + "edit_distance": 0.5724381625441696, + "f1_score": 0.955665024630542, + "meteor": 0.9084328475948878, + "precision": 0.9765100671140939, + "pred_md": "24\n\nOperations Report\n\n## CHALLENGER SUSTAINABILITY\n\n## Employees\n\nThe Challenger workforce totalled 272 at the end of the financial year comprising 100 Kingsgate personnel (employees and casual contractors to fill vacancies); and 172 contractors. Contractors on site include: Leighton with 154 personnel providing mining services; Sodexo, 12 personnel providing catering and cleaning services; Powerwest, 2 personnel for power supply services; and AWG, 4 personnel for air leg and rise mining services.\n\nTurnover for Challenger permanent employees during the financial year was 23%, with 23 terminations and 22 new starters. New employees recruited on a casual basis with a view to permanency accounted for 19 positions.\n\nDuring the year Kingsgate have rebuilt the Challenger management team improving the depth of mining engineering experience. The new management, combined with targeted training has brought about a cultural change with the emphasis now being on proper planning, appropriate contractor management, accountability. To encourage staff retention, there was a focus on improving the site facilities with an upgrade to the mining office as well as site communications to allow employees to communicate with their families while on site.\n\n## Community\n\nThe remoteness of Challenger mine - 310 kilometres by road from the nearest town at Coober Pedy - reduces the capacity for local involvement with surrounding communities. Challenger continued to support its nearest communities with local sponsorships including:\n\n- 〉 The Umoona Community Council;\n- 〉 Glendambo Pastoralists Ball;\n- 〉 The Royal Flying Doctor Service; and\n- 〉 The Coober Pedy Football Club.\n\nChallenger is located within the Commonwealth Government, Woomera Prohibitive Area (WPA). The Department of Defence (DOD) continues to utilise the area for rocket testing and other commercial activities. In the last 10 years DOD have not impacted on mine operations.\n\nChallenger Mine has fostered strong relations with the University of Adelaide over the past nine years. Each year selected students from the Schools of Geology and Mining Engineering undertake field trips to Challenger, where they experience a very detailed and hands-on introduction to mining. Kingsgate offers academic Bursaries and Prizes to students in both disciplines.\n\n## Environment\n\nFull details of all environmental monitoring reports and a detailed review of all environmental issues are contained within the 2013 Mining and Rehabilitation Compliance Report (MARCR). The MARCR can be downloaded from DMITRE's website www.minerals.dmitre.sa.gov. au and can be found using the search word 'Challenger'.\n\n## Water usage\n\nA supplementary groundwater extraction bore (Gusher 3) was commissioned at Challenger to increase the supply of potable water made available to the accommodation camp. A third reverse osmosis plant was also commissioned to accommodate the increase in volume of water that needs to be filtered for potable use.\n\nA total of 436,175 tonnes of water was used to process 556,631 tonnes of ore during the financial year with a ratio of 0.78 tonnes of water to one tonne of ore. Water usage was reduced onsite via recycling of supernatant water from Tailings Storage Facility (TSF) 2 via the decant water return system.", + "recall": 0.9356913183279743, + "true_md": "24 Operations Report\n\n## CHALLENGER SUSTAINABILITY\n\n## Community\n\n## Environment\n\n## Employees\n\n## Water usage\n\nwww.kingsgate.com.au\n\n- 〉 The Umoona Community Council;\n\n- 〉 Glendambo Pastoralists Ball;\n\n- 〉 The Royal Flying Doctor Service; and\n\n- 〉 The Coober Pedy Football Club.\n\nThe Challenger workforce totalled 272 at the end of the financial year comprising 100 Kingsgate personnel (employees and casual contractors to fill vacancies); and 172 contrac- tors. Contractors on site include: Leighton with 154 personnel providing mining services; Sodexo, 12 personnel providing catering and cleaning services; Powerwest, 2 personnel for power supply services; and AWG, 4 personnel for air leg and rise mining services.\n\nTurnover for Challenger permanent employees during the financial year was 23%, with 23 terminations and 22 new starters. New employees recruited on a casual basis with a view to permanency accounted for 19 positions.\n\nDuring the year Kingsgate have rebuilt the Challenger management team improving the depth of mining engineering experience. The new management, combined with targeted training has brought about a cultural change with the emphasis now being on proper plan- ning, appropriate contractor management, accountability. To encourage staff retention, there was a focus on improving the site facilities with an upgrade to the mining office as well as site communications to allow employees to communicate with their families while on site.\n\nChallenger Mine has fostered strong relations with the University of Adelaide over the past nine years. Each year selected students from the Schools of Geology and Mining Engineering undertake field trips to Challenger, where they experience a very detailed and hands-on intro- duction to mining. Kingsgate offers academic Bursaries and Prizes to students in both disciplines. \n\nChallenger is located within the Commonwealth Government, Woomera Prohibitive Area (WPA). The Department of Defence (DOD) continues to utilise the area for rocket testing and other commercial activities. In the last 10 years DOD have not impacted on mine operations.\n\nA supplementary groundwater extraction bore (Gusher 3) was commissioned at Challenger to increase the supply of potable water made available to the accommodation camp. A third reverse osmosis plant was also commissioned to accommodate the increase in volume of water that needs to be filtered for potable use.\n\nA total of 436,175 tonnes of water was used to process 556,631 tonnes of ore during the finan- cial year with a ratio of 0.78 tonnes of water to one tonne of ore. Water usage was reduced onsite via recycling of supernatant water from Tailings Storage Facility (TSF) 2 via the decant water return system. \n\nFull details of all environmental monitoring reports and a detailed review of all environ- mental issues are contained within the 2013 Mining and Rehabilitation Compliance Report (MARCR). The MARCR can be downloaded from DMITRE’s website www.minerals.dmitre.sa.gov. au and can be found using the search word “Challenger”.\n\nThe remoteness of Challenger mine – 310 kilo- metres by road from the nearest town at Coober Pedy – reduces the capacity for local involve- ment with surrounding communities. Challenger continued to support its nearest communities with local sponsorships including:" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7204501161574487, + "doc_id": "2b4abcd564dfc68dac55630b4fb60f3f52d3977a342c76b048f0bc5a5ddbee2f", + "edit_distance": 0.6388888888888888, + "f1_score": 0.8951048951048951, + "meteor": 0.7970311986239877, + "precision": 0.927536231884058, + "pred_md": "## 2013 CONSOLIDATED REVENUE AND ADJUSTED OPERATING PROFIT PROFILE\n\nREVENUE\n\n## ADJUSTED OPERATING PROFIT\n\n## FINANCIAL HIGHLIGHTS 2013\n\nFOR A DETAILED DISCUSSION OF OUR FINANCIAL AND OPERATING METRICS AND RESULTS, PLEASE SEE THE ACCOMPANYING MD&A LATER IN THIS REPORT.\n\n- 1 For a definition of these measures (which are non-GAAP) see 'Non-GAAP Measures' in Management's Discussion and Analysis.\n\n## TOTAL SHAREHOLDER RETURN\n\nTEN-YEAR COMPARATIVE TOTAL RETURN: 2004-2013\n\nONE-YEAR COMPARATIVE TOTAL RETURN: 2013\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 01", + "recall": 0.8648648648648649, + "true_md": "## 2013 CONSOLIDATED REVENUE AND ADJUSTED OPERATING PROFIT PROFILE\n\n## ADJUSTED OPERATING PROFIT\n\n## REVENUE\n\n## FINANCIAL HIGHLIGHTS 2013\n\n## TOTAL SHAREHOLDER RETURN\n\n## TEN-YEAR COMPARATIVE TOTAL RETURN: 2004–2013\n\n## ONE-YEAR COMPARATIVE TOTAL RETURN: 2013\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 01\n\n$^{1}$ For a definition of these measures (which are non-GAAP) see “Non-GAAP Measures” in Management’s Discussion and Analysis.\n\nFOR A DETAILED DISCUSSION OF OUR FINANCIAL AND OPERATING METRICS AND RESULTS, PLEASE SEE THE ACCOMPANYING MD&A LATER IN THIS REPORT." + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "b1b2333a015f0029a3377a99471420264729a66732641498e77f782bea373fbf", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999530428249437, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION\n\nThe accompanying notes are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements\n\n- 56 -", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION\n\nThe accompanying notes are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements\n\n- 56 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9348066792759789, + "doc_id": "3f191e41c342bbe52bf3f312eb211370538422fe28abd46f951642691a304ae0", + "edit_distance": 0.9346642468239564, + "f1_score": 0.9832402234636871, + "meteor": 0.6905175045828392, + "precision": 0.9865470852017937, + "pred_md": "MANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS\n\n## Television S ervices Distribution\n\nOn October 24, 2013, the CRTC launched a broad-based public consultation on the subject of television. The consultation covered three broad themes, asking what consumers think about:\n\n- GLYPH<129> the television programming available to them\n- GLYPH<129> the reception of television programming from service providers and other sources\n- GLYPH<129> whether they have enough information to make informed choices and seek solutions if they are not satisfied.\n\nComments were due on November 22, 2013. On November 14, 2013, the Government ordered the CRTC to report by April 30, 2014 on the steps it will take to maximize Canadians' ability to subscribe to pay and specialty services on a pick-and-pay basis. The Government asked that the report:\n\n- GLYPH<129> consider the effect on consumers and their ability to access affordable discretionary TV services\n- GLYPH<129> consider the effect on industry participants (i.e. programmers, distributors and producers)\n- GLYPH<129> ensure that the majority of services received by Canadians remain Canadian and that distributors continue to give priority to the carriage of Canadian services.\n\nThe CRTC is expected to launch a regulatory proceeding to explore new approaches at the same time it issues its report to the Government. A public hearing is expected to be held in September 2014 and a decision expected by early 2015. The Consultation will likely look at the regulatory treatment of over-the-top video services and the evolution of competitive services within the regulated system.\n\n## CRTC Review of Wholesale Internet S ervice Pricing and UsageBased Billing\n\nIn February 2011, the CRTC initiated a proceeding to review its previous decisions about the pricing of wholesale Internet services, where reselling ISPs would have to pay additional charges when their end users exceeded specific bandwidth caps.\n\nIn November 2011, the CRTC released Telecom Regulatory Policy 2011703, rejecting additional wholesale charges based on specific end-user traffic volumes. Instead, it put in place a monthly usage-based wholesale fee based on the capacity of the facility connecting the facilities-based wholesaler and the reselling ISP. The new rate structure, which came into effect in February 2012, includes a usage charge, a fixed monthly access fee per end user of the reselling ISP and one-time installation and maintenance fees. In February 2013, the CRTC released its decisions on seven applications to review and vary the November 2011 CRTC decisions about regulated wholesale Internet service prices. The decisions increased our wholesale rates, but the increase was not as high as we had asked for.\n\n## CRTC Review of Wholesale Telecommunications S ervices\n\nIn October 2013, the CRTC initiated its planned review of the telecommunications essential services rulings it released in March 2008. The review will culminate with a public hearing expected in November 2014.\n\n## Regulatory Approval of Recent Acquisition\n\nIn January 2013, we announced a multi-part strategic transaction with Shaw to acquire Mountain Cable (Shaw's cable system in Hamilton, Ontario), and to secure an option to purchase Shaw's Advanced Wireless Services spectrum holdings in 2014. As part of the agreement, we sold our one-third equity interest in the TVtropolis special channel to Shaw.\n\n70\n\nROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\nFollowing the CRTC's approval on May 1, 2013, we closed the portion of the multi-part agreement with Shaw to buy 100 % of Mountain Cable, and advanced $398 million, according to the terms of the agreement. We will require Industry Canada approval to close the spectrum portion of the transaction.\n\n## New Media Proceeding Follow-Up\n\nIn February 2012, the Supreme Court of Canada upheld a lower court decision that ISPs cannot be regulated under the Broadcasting Act, related to the CRTC's authority to levy a tax from ISPs like Rogers to fund the creation and promotion of Canadian 'webisodes'. The result is that ISPs, when offering connectivity to television and movie websites, are not considered to be acting as broadcasters and cannot be regulated under the Broadcasting Act.\n\n## Review of Broadcasting Regulations\n\nIn November 2012, the Supreme Court ruled that the CRTC did not have the authority to implement the value for signal regime outlined in Broadcasting Decision 2010-167, consistent with our recommendations. As a result, broadcasters will continue to charge rates to broadcasting distribution undertakings under the existing regulatory framework.\n\n## MEDIA\n\n## Licence Renewals\n\nThe CRTC considers group-based (conventional and discretionary specialty) licence renewal applications for major media companies. The Rogers group includes the City and OMNI conventional television stations and specialty channels G4 Canada, Outdoor Life Network, The Biography Channel (Canada) and FX (Canada).\n\nIn July 2011, the CRTC renewed the group's licence for three years, expiring on August 31, 2014. The terms of the renewal recognize the group's differences from the three other large English-language Canadian broadcast groups (Bell Media, Corus Entertainment and Shaw Media).\n\n## Distant S ignals\n\nConventional television stations have to agree to the carriage of their local signals into distant markets. BDUs that want to carry time-shifted US signals must therefore get the consent of each of the three large English-language networks besides CBC (CTV, Global and City) to carry their signals in those time zones. We are currently negotiating with various distributors regarding carriage of distant signals.\n\n## Regulatory Approval of Recent Acquisitions\n\nOn April 30, 2013, we acquired control of theScore after receiving final regulatory approval from the CRTC. theScore, which we have rebranded to Sportsnet 360, was Canada's third largest specialty sports channel. As part of the transaction, we received a 10 % interest in Score Media's digital media assets, which were spun out into a separate entity called Score Digital.", + "recall": 0.9799554565701559, + "true_md": "Following the CRTC’s approval on May 1, 2013, we closed the portion of the multi-part agreement with Shaw to buy 100 % of Mountain Cable, and advanced $398 million, according to the terms of the agreement. We will require Industry Canada approval to close the spectrum portion of the transaction.\n\nIn February 2012, the Supreme Court of Canada upheld a lower court decision that ISPs cannot be regulated under the Broadcasting Act, related to the CRTC’s authority to levy a tax from ISPs like Rogers to fund the creation and promotion of Canadian “webisodes”. The result is that ISPs, when offering connectivity to television and movie websites, are not considered to be acting as broadcasters and cannot be regulated under the Broadcasting Act.\n\nIn November 2012, the Supreme Court ruled that the CRTC did not have the authority to implement the value for signal regime outlined in Broadcasting Decision 2010-167, consistent with our recommendations. As a result, broadcasters will continue to charge rates to broadcasting distribution undertakings under the existing regulatory framework.\n\nThe CRTC considers group-based (conventional and discretionary specialty) licence renewal applications for major media companies. The Rogers group includes the City and OMNI conventional television stations and specialty channels G4 Canada, Outdoor Life Network, The Biography Channel (Canada) and FX (Canada).\n\nIn July 2011, the CRTC renewed the group’s licence for three years, expiring on August 31, 2014. The terms of the renewal recognize the group’s differences from the three other large English-language Canadian broadcast groups (Bell Media, Corus Entertainment and Shaw Media).\n\nConventional television stations have to agree to the carriage of their local signals into distant markets. BDUs that want to carry time-shifted US signals must therefore get the consent of each of the three large English-language networks besides CBC (CTV, Global and City) to carry their signals in those time zones. We are currently negotiating with various distributors regarding carriage of distant signals.\n\nOn April 30, 2013, we acquired control of theScore after receiving final regulatory approval from the CRTC. theScore, which we have rebranded to Sportsnet 360, was Canada’s third largest specialty sports channel. As part of the transaction, we received a 10 % interest in Score Media’s digital media assets, which were spun out into a separate entity called Score Digital.\n\nIn January 2013, we announced a multi-part strategic transaction with Shaw to acquire Mountain Cable (Shaw’s cable system in Hamilton, Ontario), and to secure an option to purchase Shaw’s Advanced Wireless Services spectrum holdings in 2014. As part of the agreement, we sold our one-third equity interest in the TVtropolis special channel to Shaw.\n\nIn October 2013, the CRTC initiated its planned review of the telecommunications essential services rulings it released in March 2008. The review will culminate with a public hearing expected in November 2014.\n\nIn November 2011, the CRTC released Telecom Regulatory Policy 2011- 703, rejecting additional wholesale charges based on specific end-user traffic volumes. Instead, it put in place a monthly usage-based wholesale fee based on the capacity of the facility connecting the facilities-based wholesaler and the reselling ISP. The new rate structure, which came into effect in February 2012, includes a usage charge, a fixed monthly access fee per end user of the reselling ISP and one-time installation and maintenance fees. In February 2013, the CRTC released its decisions on seven applications to review and vary the November 2011 CRTC decisions about regulated wholesale Internet service prices. The decisions increased our wholesale rates, but the increase was not as high as we had asked for.\n\nIn February 2011, the CRTC initiated a proceeding to review its previous decisions about the pricing of wholesale Internet services, where reselling ISPs would have to pay additional charges when their end users exceeded specific bandwidth caps.\n\nThe CRTC is expected to launch a regulatory proceeding to explore new approaches at the same time it issues its report to the Government. A public hearing is expected to be held in September 2014 and a decision expected by early 2015. The Consultation will likely look at the regulatory treatment of over-the-top video services and the evolution of competitive services within the regulated system.\n\nComments were due on November 22, 2013. On November 14, 2013, the Government ordered the CRTC to report by April 30, 2014 on the steps it will take to maximize Canadians’ ability to subscribe to pay and specialty services on a pick-and-pay basis. The Government asked that the report:\n\nOn October 24, 2013, the CRTC launched a broad-based public consultation on the subject of television. The consultation covered three broad themes, asking what consumers think about:\n\nMANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS\n\n## Television S ervices Distribution\n\n## New Media Proceeding Follow-Up\n\n## Review of Broadcasting Regulations\n\n## MEDIA\n\n## Licence Renewals\n\n## Distant S ignals\n\n## Regulatory Approval of Recent Acquisitions\n\n## CRTC Review of Wholesale Telecommunications S ervices\n\n## Regulatory Approval of Recent Acquisition\n\n70 ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n## CRTC Review of Wholesale Internet S ervice Pricing and Usage- Based Billing\n\n- GLYPH<129> consider the effect on consumers and their ability to access affordable discretionary TV services\n\n- GLYPH<129> consider the effect on industry participants (i.e. programmers, distributors and producers)\n\n- GLYPH<129> ensure that the majority of services received by Canadians remain Canadian and that distributors continue to give priority to the carriage of Canadian services.\n\n- GLYPH<129> whether they have enough information to make informed choices and seek solutions if they are not satisfied.\n\n- GLYPH<129> the reception of television programming from service providers and other sources\n\n- GLYPH<129> the television programming available to them" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8865221854591053, + "doc_id": "655d155bcadd11dce00e2625f9206b293cb64094a37f1ced16e896b0fa77a7f6", + "edit_distance": 0.5985401459854015, + "f1_score": 0.9823321554770319, + "meteor": 0.9000182152727818, + "precision": 0.9928571428571429, + "pred_md": "95\n\nNotes to the Financial Statements\n\nRefer Note 18 for the dividend reinvestment plan portion of total dividends.\n\nThe Group's franking credit balance as at 30 June 2013 is $880,548 (2012: $880,548).\n\n## 23. Related parties\n\n## Transaction with related parties\n\nInformation on remuneration of Directors and Key Management Personnel is disclosed in Note 29.\n\n## Controlling entity\n\nThe ultimate parent entity of the Group is Kingsgate Consolidated Limited.\n\n## 24. Employee benefits and share-based payments\n\n## Share-based payments\n\nThe following share-based payments were made during the year:\n\n- 〉 performance and deferred rights issued to employees $917,397 (2012: nil); and\n- 〉 shares issued as part consideration of a legal dispute $1,512,000 (2012: $3,024,000).\n\n## Superannuation\n\nThe Group makes contributions on behalf of employees to externally managed defined contribution superannuation funds. Contributions are based on percentages of employee's wages and salaries and include any salary-sacrifice amounts. Contributions to defined contribution plans for 2013 were $964,000 (2012: $752,000).\n\n## Kingsgate executive option plan\n\nThe terms of the options issued pursuant to the plan are as follows:\n\n- i. each option will entitle the holder to subscribe for one ordinary share of the Company;\n- ii. options are granted under the plan for no consideration; and\n- iii. options granted under the plan carry no dividend or voting rights.\n\ncontinued\n\nNotes to the Financial Statements\n\nu", + "recall": 0.972027972027972, + "true_md": "Notes to the Financial Statements 95\n\nNotes t o the Financial Statements\n\ncontinued u\n\n## 24. Employee benefits and share-based payments\n\n## 23. Related parties\n\n## Share-based payments\n\n## Superannuation\n\n## Kingsgate executive option plan\n\n## Controlling entity\n\n## Transaction with related parties\n\nRefer Note 18 for the dividend reinvestment plan portion of total dividends.\n\nThe Group’s franking credit balance as at 30 June 2013 is $880,548 (2012: $880,548).\n\nInformation on remuneration of Directors and Key Management Personnel is disclosed in Note 29.\n\nThe ultimate parent entity of the Group is Kingsgate Consolidated Limited.\n\nThe following share-based payments were made during the year:\n\nThe Group makes contributions on behalf of employees to externally managed defined contribution superannuation funds. Contributions are based on percentages of employee’s wages and salaries and include any salary-sacrifice amounts. Contributions to defined contribution plans for 2013 were $964,000 (2012: $752,000).\n\nThe terms of the options issued pursuant to the plan are as follows:\n\n- i. each option will entitle the holder to subscribe for one ordinary share of the Company;\n\n- ii. options are granted under the plan for no consideration; and\n\n- iii. options granted under the plan carry no dividend or voting rights.\n\n- 〉 performance and deferred rights issued to employees $917,397 (2012: nil); and\n\n- 〉 shares issued as part consideration of a legal dispute $1,512,000 (2012: $3,024,000)." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.783187588114458, + "doc_id": "72327af57f1f7dda5f65d1e207b946c0f458cb885b4f601c9ab77ed794270bc0", + "edit_distance": 0.1724137931034483, + "f1_score": 0.9006622516556291, + "meteor": 0.9289737678053914, + "precision": 0.8607594936708861, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 25 - ISSUED CAPITAL\n\nTotal ordinary shares issued and outstanding at each period end are fully paid. All shares issued are authorized. Shares have no par value.\n\nOrdinary shares participate in dividends and the proceeds on winding up of the Parent Company in proportion to the number of shares held. At shareholders' meetings each ordinary share is entitled to one vote when a poll is called, otherwise each shareholder has one vote on a show of hands.\n\n## c) Options on Issue\n\nDetails of the share options outstanding as at 31 December:\n\n- 89 -", + "recall": 0.9444444444444444, + "true_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 25 – ISSUED CAPITAL\n\nTotal ordinary shares issued and outstanding at each period end are fully paid. All shares issued are authorized. Shares have no par value. \n\nOrdinary shares participate in dividends and the proceeds on winding up of the Parent Company in proportion to the number of shares held. At shareholders’ meetings each ordinary share is entitled to one vote when a poll is called, otherwise each shareholder has one vote on a show of hands. 2014 2013 \n\n- 89 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.908086603435266, + "doc_id": "bd4a7c61d2309f9d565e703c680cc40f587e5fe9fde0174a3e86d327ca28d4aa", + "edit_distance": 0.1478494623655914, + "f1_score": 0.9640718562874253, + "meteor": 0.97250918196995, + "precision": 0.9583333333333334, + "pred_md": "M\n\n## anagement's Discussion and Analysis\n\nDollar amounts are in thousands of canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\n## Apartment Property Revenue\n\ntotal apartment property revenue for the year ended December 31, 2013, was $121.3 million, a 9.8% increase over 2012. this growth was attributable to acquisitions, the completion of four development projects during the year and growth in rental rates.\n\nSame store apartment net revenue increased 1.6% for the year ended December 31, 2013. Despite lower occupancy in the first half of the year, Killam achieved increased rental rates of 1.3%. Killam realized higher vacancy throughout 2013 compared to 2012 in its stabilized portfolio, but succeeded in achieving higher occupancy than 2012 for each of the last four months of 2013.\n\nBased on current rents, an annualized 100 bps change in apartment vacancy rates would impact the annualized rental revenue by $1.3 million.\n\n## Apartment Occupancy by Core Market\n\nas at December 31,\n\n(1) Includes all stabilized properties.\n\nKillam's Historic Apartment Occupancy by Quarter\n\nKillam's Historic Apartment Occupancy by Quarter\n\nKillam experienced softer occupancy levels in its apartment portfolio during the first half of 2013 followed by a strong uptick in occupancy in Q3 and a typical seasonal decrease in Q4. Overall Killam's occupancy levels were down in both 2012 and 2013 compared to highs maintained throughout 2010 and 2011. The decreased occupancy was primarily attributable to higher than normal amounts of new multi-family rental construction in Halifax, Moncton and Charlottetown, and softness in the Saint John economy. Offsetting an increase in supply was continued strong demand for rental product, population growth in urban centres and an aging population with an increased tendency to rent. Despite a decline in occupancy, Killam achieved an average rental rate increase in its apartment portfolio of 1.3% in 2013. Occupancy remains strong for the company's mHc business, ending the year with 98.1% occupancy. mHc rents increased an average of 3.7% during the year.\n\n36\n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013", + "recall": 0.9698795180722891, + "true_md": "Management’s Discussion and Analysis Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\n## Apartment Property Revenue\n\n## Apartment Occupancy by Core Market\n\ntotal apartment property revenue for the year ended December 31, 2013, was $121.3 million, a 9.8% increase over 2012. this growth was attributable to acquisitions, the completion of four development projects during the year and growth in rental rates.\n\nSame store apartment net revenue increased 1.6% for the year ended December 31, 2013. Despite lower occupancy in the first half of the year, Killam achieved increased rental rates of 1.3%. Killam realized higher vacancy throughout 2013 compared to 2012 in its stabilized portfolio, but succeeded in achieving higher occupancy than 2012 for each of the last four months of 2013.\n\nBased on current rents, an annualized 100 bps change in apartment vacancy rates would impact the annualized rental revenue by $1.3 million.\n\nas at December 31, \n\nKillam experienced softer occupancy levels in its apartment portfolio during the first half of 2013 followed by a strong uptick in occupancy in Q3 and a typical seasonal decrease in Q4. Overall Killam’s occupancy levels were down in both 2012 and 2013 compared to highs maintained throughout 2010 and 2011. The decreased occupancy was primarily attributable to higher than normal amounts of new multi‑family rental construction in Halifax, Moncton and Charlottetown, and softness in the Saint John economy. Offsetting an increase in supply was continued strong demand for rental product, population growth in urban centres and an aging population with an increased tendency to rent. Despite a decline in occupancy, Killam achieved an average rental rate increase in its apartment portfolio of 1.3% in 2013. Occupancy remains strong for the company’s mHc business, ending the year with 98.1% occupancy. mHc rents increased an average of 3.7% during the year. \n\n36 Killam ProPerties inc | 2013\n\n(1) Includes all stabilized properties." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9370011451812967, + "doc_id": "e4368f31e36d15dc5eb9ebbd606814efe6d6fb12137e9e08dc02aafde1d06f9c", + "edit_distance": 0.045454545454545456, + "f1_score": 0.9629629629629629, + "meteor": 0.9566681646082882, + "precision": 0.975, + "pred_md": "22\n\n| SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY\n\n## CHESAPEAKE'S COMMITMENT TO BEING A GOOD NEIGHBOR »\n\nThrough volunteer programs and responsible operations, we strive to be the best neighbor possible in every one of our operating areas by investing in our communities.", + "recall": 0.9512195121951219, + "true_md": "22 | SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY\n\n## CHESAPEAKE’S COMMITMENT TO BEING A GOOD NEIGHBOR »\n\nThrough volunteer programs and responsible operations, we strive to be the best neighbor possible in every one of our operating areas by investing in our communities." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8852770564525674, + "doc_id": "f5005432daf24fd64bbfd592b0807890fec06187db022c61f7f39a2f56f32145", + "edit_distance": 0.06741573033707865, + "f1_score": 0.9411764705882353, + "meteor": 0.9447822529836832, + "precision": 0.9491525423728814, + "pred_md": "Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nSMFG\n\n## (2) Fair value of financial instruments\n\n(a) Consolidated balance sheet amounts, fair values and net unrealized gains or losses of financial instruments as of March 31, 2011 and 2010 are as follows. The amounts shown in the following table do not include financial instruments whose fair values are extremely difficult to determine, such as unlisted stocks classified as 'other securities,' and stocks of subsidiaries and affiliates.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n101", + "recall": 0.9333333333333333, + "true_md": "Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nSMFG\n\n- (2) Fair value of financial instruments\n\n- (a) Consolidated balance sheet amounts, fair values and net unrealized gains or losses of financial instruments as of March 31, 2011 and 2010 are as follows. The amounts shown in the following table do not include financial instruments whose fair values are extremely difficult to determine, such as unlisted stocks classified as “other securities,” and stocks of subsidiaries and affiliates.\n\nSMFG 2011 101" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9440602839389667, + "doc_id": "ad95fab7c058d60e6b78536a426f72eca27f578d9db2bb4ac1f5fe3280822827", + "edit_distance": 0.04081632653061224, + "f1_score": 0.9655172413793103, + "meteor": 0.9611081641287131, + "precision": 0.9767441860465116, + "pred_md": "2010 ANNUAL REPORT |\n\n13\n\nDeveloping great assets begins with great people, such as the hardworking crews of Nomac, Chesapeake's wholly owned drilling subsidiary. Employees take pride in the critical roles they play in finding and delivering natural gas to their fellow Americans.", + "recall": 0.9545454545454546, + "true_md": "2010 ANNUAL REPORT | 13\n\nDeveloping great assets begins with great people, such as the hardworking crews of Nomac, Chesapeake’s wholly owned drilling subsidiary. Employees take pride in the critical roles they play in finding and delivering natural gas to their fellow Americans." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7102585094752843, + "doc_id": "165e0efbe1d4492360af077f42686989c8edd1dd55e70716ed1accc4dac7ca36", + "edit_distance": 0.6971153846153846, + "f1_score": 0.9538461538461539, + "meteor": 0.8395241140066515, + "precision": 0.9393939393939394, + "pred_md": "## SENIOR EXECUTIVE OFFICERS OF ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC.\n\nAS OF FEBRUARY 11, 2014\n\n## 14 Guy Laurence\n\nPresident and Chief Executive Officer\n\n## 15 Robert F. Berner\n\nExecutive Vice President, Network and Chief Technology Officer\n\n## 16 Robert W. Bruce\n\nPresident, Communications Division\n\n## 17 inda P. Jojo L\n\nExecutive Vice President, Information Technology and Chief Information Officer\n\n## 18 Philip B. Lind, CM\n\nExecutive Vice President, Regulatory and Vice Chairman\n\n## 19 David P. Miller\n\nSenior Vice President, Legal and General Counsel\n\n## 20 Keith W. Pelley\n\nPresident, Rogers Media\n\n## 21 im M. Reid J\n\nSenior Vice President, Human Resources and Chief Human Resources Officer\n\n## 22 Edward S. Rogers\n\nDeputy Chairman and Executive Vice President, Emerging Business, Corporate Development\n\n## 23 Melinda M. Rogers\n\nSenior Vice President, Strategy and Development\n\n## 24 Anthony Staffieri, FCPA, FCA\n\nExecutive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer\n\n## 25 errie L. Tweddle T\n\nVice President, Corporate Communications\n\n## SENIOR EXECUTIVE OFFICERS\n\nFor detailed biographical information of Rogers Executive Officers, go to\n\nrogers.com/investors\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 21", + "recall": 0.96875, + "true_md": "AS OF FEBRUARY 11, 2014\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 21\n\nFor detailed biographical information of Rogers Executive Officers, go to rogers.com/investors\n\n## SENIOR EXECUTIVE OFFICERS OF ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC.\n\n14 Guy Laurence President and Chief Executive Officer\n\n20 Keith W. Pelley President, Rogers Media\n\n21 Jim M. Reid Senior Vice President, Human Resources and Chief Human Resources Officer\n\n15 Robert F. Berner Executive Vice President, Network and Chief Technology Officer\n\n16 Robert W. Bruce President, Communications Division\n\n22 Edward S. Rogers Deputy Chairman and Executive Vice President, Emerging Business, Corporate Development\n\n17 Linda P. Jojo Executive Vice President, Information Technology and Chief Information Officer\n\n18 Philip B. Lind, CM Executive Vice President, Regulatory and Vice Chairman\n\n23 Melinda M. Rogers Senior Vice President, Strategy and Development\n\n24 Anthony Staffieri, FCPA, FCA Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer\n\n25 Terrie L. Tweddle Vice President, Corporate Communications\n\n19 David P. Miller Senior Vice President, Legal and General Counsel\n\nSENIOR EXECUTIVE OFFICERS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.908937543450656, + "doc_id": "2a321f66cc5ac84f66004b60090c1b83415687f98d55688e4846a694bdb727fb", + "edit_distance": 0.05835010060362173, + "f1_score": 0.9447236180904522, + "meteor": 0.9513217749407747, + "precision": 0.9591836734693877, + "pred_md": "80\n\nNotes to the Financial Statements\n\n## 5. Revenue and expenses continued\n\n## Impairment - Challenger Gold Project\n\nThe Group announced on 28 June 2013 the impairment of the carrying value of the Challenger Gold Mine as a result of the change of the mine plan to focus on the higher grade Challenger West orebody. The revised mine plan is the result of a strategic review of the Challenger Gold Mine in response to the significant and sustained decline in gold price and the mine's operating performance over the 2013 financial year.\n\nAn impairment is recognised when the carrying amount exceeds the recoverable amount. The recoverable amount for Challenger Gold Mine cash-generating unit has been determined based on its value in use ('VIU'). The impairment test is assessed at the cash-generating unit ('CGU') level, which is the lowest level for which identifiable cash inflows are largely independent of the cash flows of other assets. The VIU approach is based on the present value of the future cash flows expected to be derived from the CGU.\n\nWhile the Challenger Gold Project is expected to generate positive cash flows based on the revised plan, the cash flow estimates no longer support the full recovery of the carrying value. As a result of this assessment, the Group has recorded an impairment charge of $311,850,000 pre-tax, related to the carrying value of the property, plant and equipment and mine properties at Challenger Gold Project.\n\nThe key assumptions and estimates used in determining the recoverable amount (VIU) are related to gold price, gold production, discount rate, operating costs and capital expenditures. The basis for determination of the impairment was:\n\n- 〉 gold price - future gold price was primarily based on current hedging programs consisting of 50,000 ounces of gold at a delivery price of A$1,435 per ounce, 6,500 ounces at a delivery price of A$1,160 per ounce and a spot price of A$1,425 for the balance of production;\n- 〉 gold production - future gold production was based on the new mine plan;\n- 〉 discount rate - a pre-tax discount rate of 10%; and\n- 〉 operating costs and capital expenditure - these costs were based on historic mining costs, new mining contract cost estimates, existing royalty rates with the South Australian Government and the local land owners and management's best estimates at the time of the impairment testing.\n\nThe impact on recoverable amount from varying the above assumptions has been assessed and, given the relatively short period of the expected remaining mine life of the Challenger Gold Project, has been assessed as having an immaterial impact on the impairment charge.\n\nwww.kingsgate.com.au", + "recall": 0.9306930693069307, + "true_md": "Notes to the Financial Statements 80\n\n## 5. Revenue and expenses continued\n\nwww.kingsgate.com.au\n\n## Impairment – Challenger Gold Project\n\nThe Group announced on 28 June 2013 the impair- ment of the carrying value of the Challenger Gold Mine as a result of the change of the mine plan to focus on the higher grade Challenger West orebody. The revised mine plan is the result of a strategic review of the Challenger Gold Mine in response to the significant and sustained decline in gold price and the mine’s operating perfor- mance over the 2013 financial year.\n\nAn impairment is recognised when the carrying amount exceeds the recoverable amount. The recoverable amount for Challenger Gold Mine cash-generating unit has been determined based on its value in use (“VIU”). The impairment test is assessed at the cash-generating unit (“CGU”) level, which is the lowest level for which identifi- able cash inflows are largely independent of the cash flows of other assets. The VIU approach is based on the present value of the future cash flows expected to be derived from the CGU.\n\nWhile the Challenger Gold Project is expected to generate positive cash flows based on the revised plan, the cash flow estimates no longer support the full recovery of the carrying value. As a result of this assessment, the Group has recorded an impairment charge of $311,850,000 pre-tax, related to the carrying value of the property, plant and equipment and mine properties at Challenger Gold Project.\n\nThe key assumptions and estimates used in deter- mining the recoverable amount (VIU) are related to gold price, gold production, discount rate, operating costs and capital expenditures. The basis for determination of the impairment was:\n\n- 〉 gold price – future gold price was primarily based on current hedging programs consisting of 50,000 ounces of gold at a delivery price of A$1,435 per ounce, 6,500 ounces at a delivery price of A$1,160 per ounce and a spot price of A$1,425 for the balance of production;\n\n- 〉 gold production – future gold production was based on the new mine plan;\n\n- 〉 discount rate – a pre-tax discount rate of 10%; and\n\n- 〉 operating costs and capital expenditure – these costs were based on historic mining costs, new mining contract cost estimates, existing royalty rates with the South Australian Government and the local land owners and management’s best estimates at the time of the impairment testing.\n\nThe impact on recoverable amount from varying the above assumptions has been assessed and, given the relatively short period of the expected remaining mine life of the Challenger Gold Project, has been assessed as having an immate- rial impact on the impairment charge." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8972738451980303, + "doc_id": "748f97f8678001d68312fb55779f3eeba2594884dc02cf2ab550899884edd718", + "edit_distance": 0.11082802547770701, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9161776267766596, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Item 7A. Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures About Market Risk.\n\nDollars in millions\n\n## INTEREST RATE RISK\n\nWe are exposed to interest rate risk primarily from changes in short-term interest rates. As of January 31, 2015, we had cash and cash equivalents of $827, which generate interest income at variable rates, and gross credit card receivables of $2,284, which generate finance charge income at a combination of fixed and variable rates. Interest rate fluctuations can affect our interest income, credit card revenues and interest expense. See Note 3: Accounts Receivable in Item 8: Financial Statements and Supplementary Data for additional information.\n\nWe use sensitivity analyses to measure and assess our interest rate risk exposure. For purposes of presenting the potential earnings effect of a reasonably possible hypothetical change in interest rates from our reporting date, we utilized two sensitivity scenarios: (i) linear growth of approximately 225 basis points over the year and (ii) linear decline of approximately 15 basis points over the year, due to the fact that current interest rates are near historically low levels. Other key parameters and assumptions in our sensitivity analyses include the average cash and cash equivalents balance, average credit card receivables balance and no new floating rate debt. The first hypothetical scenario would result in an approximate $15 increase in future earnings, while the second hypothetical scenario would not have a material effect on future earnings.\n\nFor our long-term fixed-rate debt of $3,131, our exposure to interest rate risk is limited to changes in the fair value of our debt. As our debt is primarily fixed-rate, changes in interest rates do not impact our cash flows. However, changes in interest rates increase or decrease the fair value of our debt, depending on whether market rates are lower or higher than our fixed-rates. As of January 31, 2015, the fair value of our fixed-rate debt was $3,693. See Note 8: Debt and Credit Facilities and Note 9: Fair Value Measurements in Item 8: Financial Statements and Supplementary Data for additional information.\n\n## FOREIGN CURRENCY EXCHANGE RISK\n\nThe majority of our revenues, expenses and capital expenditures are transacted in U.S. Dollars. Our U.S. operation periodically enters into merchandise purchase orders denominated in British Pounds or Euros. From time to time, we may use forward contracts to hedge against fluctuations in foreign currency prices. As of January 31, 2015, our outstanding forward contracts did not have a material impact on our consolidated financial statements.\n\nAs of January 31, 2015, we have opened one full-line store in Canada and have announced plans to open five additional full-line stores in Canada over the next few years. The functional currency of our Canadian operations is the Canadian Dollar. We translate assets and liabilities into U.S. Dollars using the exchange rate in effect at the balance sheet date, while we translate revenues and expenses using a weighted-average exchange rate for the period. We record these translation adjustments as a component of accumulated other comprehensive loss on the Consolidated Balance Sheets in Item 8: Financial Statements and Supplementary Data. Our Canadian operations enter into merchandise purchase orders denominated in U.S. Dollars for approximately half of its inventory. As sales in Canada are denominated in the Canadian Dollar, gross profit for our Canadian operations can be impacted by foreign currency fluctuations.\n\nIn addition, our U.S. operations incurred certain expenditures denominated in Canadian Dollars and our Canadian operations incurred certain expenditures denominated in U.S. Dollars. This activity results in transaction gains and losses that arise from exchange rate fluctuations and are recorded as gains or losses in the Consolidated Statements of Earnings in Item 8: Financial Statements and Supplementary Data. As of January 31, 2015, activities associated with foreign currency exchange risk have not had a material impact on our consolidated financial statements.\n\nNordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 35", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## Item 7A. Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures About Market Risk. Dollars in millions\n\n## INTEREST RATE RISK We are exposed to interest rate risk primarily from changes in short-term interest rates. As of January 31, 2015, we had cash and cash\n\n## FOREIGN CURRENCY EXCHANGE RISK The majority of our revenues, expenses and capital expenditures are transacted in U.S. Dollars. Our U.S. operation periodically enters into\n\nNordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 35\n\nItem 7A. Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures About Market Risk. Dollars in millions\n\nINTEREST RATE RISK We are exposed to interest rate risk primarily from changes in short-term interest rates. As of January 31, 2015, we had cash and cash equivalents of $827, which generate interest income at variable rates, and gross credit card receivables of $2,284, which generate finance charge income at a combination of fixed and variable rates. Interest rate fluctuations can affect our interest income, credit card revenues and interest expense. See Note 3: Accounts Receivable in Item 8: Financial Statements and Supplementary Data for additional information.\n\nWe use sensitivity analyses to measure and assess our interest rate risk exposure. For purposes of presenting the potential earnings effect of a reasonably possible hypothetical change in interest rates from our reporting date, we utilized two sensitivity scenarios: (i) linear growth of approximately 225 basis points over the year and (ii) linear decline of approximately 15 basis points over the year, due to the fact that current interest rates are near historically low levels. Other key parameters and assumptions in our sensitivity analyses include the average cash and cash equivalents balance, average credit card receivables balance and no new floating rate debt. The first hypothetical scenario would result in an approximate $15 increase in future earnings, while the second hypothetical scenario would not have a material effect on future earnings.\n\nFor our long-term fixed-rate debt of $3,131, our exposure to interest rate risk is limited to changes in the fair value of our debt. As our debt is primarily fixed-rate, changes in interest rates do not impact our cash flows. However, changes in interest rates increase or decrease the fair value of our debt, depending on whether market rates are lower or higher than our fixed-rates. As of January 31, 2015, the fair value of our fixed-rate debt was $3,693. See Note 8: Debt and Credit Facilities and Note 9: Fair Value Measurements in Item 8: Financial Statements and Supplementary Data for additional information.\n\nFOREIGN CURRENCY EXCHANGE RISK The majority of our revenues, expenses and capital expenditures are transacted in U.S. Dollars. Our U.S. operation periodically enters into merchandise purchase orders denominated in British Pounds or Euros. From time to time, we may use forward contracts to hedge against fluctuations in foreign currency prices. As of January 31, 2015, our outstanding forward contracts did not have a material impact on our consolidated financial statements.\n\nAs of January 31, 2015, we have opened one full-line store in Canada and have announced plans to open five additional full-line stores in Canada over the next few years. The functional currency of our Canadian operations is the Canadian Dollar. We translate assets and liabilities into U.S. Dollars using the exchange rate in effect at the balance sheet date, while we translate revenues and expenses using a weighted-average exchange rate for the period. We record these translation adjustments as a component of accumulated other comprehensive loss on the Consolidated Balance Sheets in Item 8: Financial Statements and Supplementary Data. Our Canadian operations enter into merchandise purchase orders denominated in U.S. Dollars for approximately half of its inventory. As sales in Canada are denominated in the Canadian Dollar, gross profit for our Canadian operations can be impacted by foreign currency fluctuations. \n\nIn addition, our U.S. operations incurred certain expenditures denominated in Canadian Dollars and our Canadian operations incurred certain expenditures denominated in U.S. Dollars. This activity results in transaction gains and losses that arise from exchange rate fluctuations and are recorded as gains or losses in the Consolidated Statements of Earnings in Item 8: Financial Statements and Supplementary Data. As of January 31, 2015, activities associated with foreign currency exchange risk have not had a material impact on our consolidated financial statements." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9462412025688463, + "doc_id": "e11c64cdaf6dd561ef9fbf4f90fa6c2fe65aa16d75d42ae1c1ff7ffd35ceb936", + "edit_distance": 0.0759493670886076, + "f1_score": 0.9897435897435897, + "meteor": 0.9727996106069084, + "precision": 0.9948453608247423, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 33 - FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT continued\n\nThe Group's interest rate risk arises from its borrowings. Interest rate risk is the risk that the fair value of future cash flows of a financial instrument will fluctuate because of changes in market interest rates. The Group's exposure to the risk of changes in market interest rates relates primarily to the Group's long-term debt obligations with floating interest rates.\n\nDuring the year ended 31 December 2013, the Group entered into US dollar denominated interest rate swaps which fix the interest rate associated with the credit facilities to protect against the floating LIBOR rates through 2017. As at 31 December 2014 the Group had interest rate swaps with a notional contract amount of $15.0 million (2013: $15.0 million).\n\nThe net fair value of interest rate swaps at 31 December 2014 was relatively immaterial, comprising long-term assets of $0.1 million (2013: $0.2 million) and current liabilities of $0.1 million (2013: 0.1 million). These amounts were recognised as Level 2 fair value derivatives. (See Note 14)\n\n## iii) Commodity Price Risk Exposure and Management\n\nThe Board actively reviews oil and natural gas hedging on a monthly basis. Reports providing detailed analysis of the Group's hedging activity are continually monitored against Group policy. The Group sells its oil on market using Nymex and LLS market spot rates reduced for basis differentials in the basins from which the Company produces. Gas is sold using Henry Hub and Houston Ship Channel market spot prices. Forward contracts are used by the Group to manage its forward commodity price risk exposure. The Group's policy is to hedge less than 50% of anticipated future oil and gas production for up to 24 months. The Group may hedge over 50% or beyond 24 months with approval of the Board. The Group has not elected to utilise hedge accounting treatment and changes in fair value are recognised in the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income.\n\n## Commodity Hedge Contracts outstanding as at 31 December 2014\n\n- 98 -", + "recall": 0.9846938775510204, + "true_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 33 – FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT continued\n\nThe Group’s interest rate risk arises from its borrowings. Interest rate risk is the risk that the fair value of future cash flows of a financial instrument will fluctuate because of changes in market interest rates. The Group’s exposure to the risk of changes in market interest rates relates primarily to the Group’s long-term debt obligations with floating interest rates. \n\nDuring the year ended 31 December 2013, the Group entered into US dollar denominated interest rate swaps which fix the interest rate associated with the credit facilities to protect against the floating LIBOR rates through 2017. As at 31 December 2014 the Group had interest rate swaps with a notional contract amount of $15.0 million (2013: $15.0 million). \n\nThe net fair value of interest rate swaps at 31 December 2014 was relatively immaterial, comprising long-term assets of $0.1 million (2013: $0.2 million) and current liabilities of $0.1 million (2013: 0.1 million). These amounts were recognised as Level 2 fair value derivatives. (See Note 14)\n\nThe Board actively reviews oil and natural gas hedging on a monthly basis. Reports providing detailed analysis of the Group’s hedging activity are continually monitored against Group policy. The Group sells its oil on market using Nymex and LLS market spot rates reduced for basis differentials in the basins from which the Company produces. Gas is sold using Henry Hub and Houston Ship Channel market spot prices. Forward contracts are used by the Group to manage its forward commodity price risk exposure. The Group’s policy is to hedge less than 50% of anticipated future oil and gas production for up to 24 months. The Group may hedge over 50% or beyond 24 months with approval of the Board. The Group has not elected to utilise hedge accounting treatment and changes in fair value are recognised in the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income. \n\n## Commodity Hedge Contracts outstanding as at 31 December 2014\n\n- iii) Commodity Price Risk Exposure and Management \n\n- 98 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.17399007697516797, + "doc_id": "af8c3963dc3279e7a9cfbcc0d1c76a2b29f0bd9fc6ece6e2c8012b3a86e6beb4", + "edit_distance": 0.703125, + "f1_score": 0.696969696969697, + "meteor": 0.3930722544683988, + "precision": 0.92, + "pred_md": "$ 1 9 1 M\n\nAcquisitions & Developments Completed\n\n$\n\n0.72 Funds from Operations per Share\n\n52.9 % Debt as a Percentage of Total Assets", + "recall": 0.5609756097560976, + "true_md": "ruth Buckle Vice president property management\n\nphilip Fraser president & chief executive officer\n\npamela Crowell Vice president property management (mHc)\n\n## $ 191 M Acquisitions\n\n## $ 0.72 Funds from\n\n## 52.9 % Debt as a\n\n191 Acquisitions & Developments Completed\n\n0.72 Funds from Operations per Share\n\n52.9 Debt as a Percentage of Total Assets" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9598438751100581, + "doc_id": "012d676a06d23bf7216dc7ed4c99f699f239b72629973b4400d7b9df65447b4a", + "edit_distance": 0.8499043977055449, + "f1_score": 0.9978260869565219, + "meteor": 0.7201747156586504, + "precision": 0.9978260869565218, + "pred_md": "MANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS\n\n## Higher Handset S ubsidies\n\nOur wireless business model is based substantially on subsidizing the cost of subscriber handsets, similar to other North American wireless carriers. This attracts customers and in exchange they commit to a term with us. We also commit to a minimum subsidy with the supplier of certain smartphone devices.\n\n## National Wireless Tower Policy\n\nThe policy affects all parties that plan to install or modify an antenna system, including PCS, cellular and broadcasting service providers. The policy requires, among other things, that antenna proponents consider using existing antenna structures before proposing new structures and those owners of existing systems respond to requests to share antenna systems. Antenna proponents must follow a defined process for notifying the public and addressing local requirements and concerns.\n\nCertain types of antenna installations, however, are excluded from the consultation requirements with local authorities and the public.\n\n## Radio Frequency Emissions\n\nFrom time to time the media and other reports have highlighted alleged links between radio frequency emissions from wireless handsets and various health concerns, including cancer, and interference with various medical devices, including hearing aids and pacemakers. This may discourage the use of wireless handsets or expose us to potential litigation even though there are no definitive reports or studies stating that these health issues are directly attributable to radio frequency emissions.\n\nIt is also possible that future regulatory actions may result in more restrictive standards on radio frequency emissions from low-powered devices like wireless handsets. We cannot predict the nature or extent of any restrictions.\n\n## Obtaining Access to S upport S tructures and Municipal Rights of Way\n\nWe must have access to support structures and municipal rights of way for our cable facilities. We can apply to the CRTC to obtain a right of access under the Telecommunications Act in areas where we cannot secure access to municipal rights of way. Failure to obtain access could increase Cable costs and adversely affect our business.\n\nThe Supreme Court of Canada ruled in 2003, however, that the CRTC does not have the jurisdiction to establish the terms and conditions of accessing the poles of hydroelectric companies. As a result, we obtained access under orders from the Ontario Energy Board and the New Brunswick Public Utilities Board.\n\n## Dependence on Facilities and S ervices of ILECs\n\nBusiness telephony operations that are outside our cable territory highly depend on the availability of facilities and services acquired from incumbent telecom operators, according to CRTC rules. Changes to these rules could significantly affect the cost of operating these businesses.\n\n## Copyright Tariffs\n\nPressures on copyright tariffs continue to affect our services. Any increase in fees could negatively affect our results of operations.\n\n76\n\nROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n## BUSINESS RISKS\n\n## Revenue Expectations from New and Advanced S ervices\n\nWe expect that a substantial portion of our future revenue growth may come from new and advanced services, and we continue to invest significant capital resources to develop our networks so we can offer these services. It is possible, however, that there may not be sufficient consumer demand, or that we may not anticipate or satisfy demand for certain products and services, or be able to offer or market these new products and services successfully to subscribers. If we do not attract subscribers to new products and services profitably or keep pace with changing consumer preferences, we could experience slower revenue growth and increased churn. This could have a materially adverse effect on our business, results of operations and financial condition.\n\n## Acquisitions, Divestitures or Investments\n\nAcquiring complementary businesses and technologies, developing strategic alliances and divesting portions of our business are often required to optimally execute our business strategy.\n\nServices, technologies, key personnel or businesses of companies we acquire may not be effectively assimilated into our business or service offerings, or our alliances may not be successful. We also may not be able to successfully complete any divestitures on satisfactory terms, if at all. Divestitures may reduce our total revenues and net income by more than offset by the sales price.\n\n## Inventory Obsolescence\n\nOur inventory balance mainly consists of wireless handset devices, which generally have relatively short product life cycles due to frequent wireless handset introductions. If we cannot effectively manage inventory levels based on product demand, this may increase the risk of inventory obsolescence.\n\n## Complexity of Our Business\n\nOur businesses, technologies, processes and systems are operationally complex and increasingly interconnected. If we do not execute properly, or if manmade or natural disasters impact them, customers may have a negative experience, resulting in increased churn and lower revenue.\n\n## Reliance on Third Party S ervice Providers\n\nWe have outsourcing arrangements with third parties to provide certain essential components of our business operations to our employees and customers, including payroll, certain facilities or property management functions, call centre support, certain installation and service technicians, certain information technology functions, and invoice printing. Interruptions in these services can adversely affect our ability to service our customers.\n\n## Dependence on Certain Key Infrastructure and Handset Vendors\n\nOur wireless business has relationships with a relatively small number of essential network infrastructure and handset vendors. We do not have operational or financial control over them, and only have limited influence on how they conduct their business with us.\n\nIf one of our network infrastructure suppliers fails, it could delay adding network capacity or new capabilities and services across the business. Handsets and network infrastructure suppliers can extend delivery times, raise prices and limit supply due to their own shortages and business requirements, among other things. If these suppliers do not develop handsets that satisfy customer demands, or deliver products", + "recall": 0.9978260869565218, + "true_md": "MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS\n\n## BUSINESS RISKS\n\n## Higher Handset S ubsidies\n\n## National Wireless Tower Policy\n\n## Revenue Expectations from New and Advanced S ervices\n\n## Acquisitions, Divestitures or Investments\n\n## Radio Frequency Emissions\n\n## Inventory Obsolescence\n\n## Obtaining Access to S upport S tructures and Municipal Rights of Way\n\n## Complexity of Our Business\n\n## Reliance on Third Party S ervice Providers\n\n## Dependence on Facilities and S ervices of ILECs\n\n## Dependence on Certain Key Infrastructure and Handset Vendors\n\n## Copyright Tariffs\n\n76 ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\nPressures on copyright tariffs continue to affect our services. Any increase in fees could negatively affect our results of operations.\n\nIf one of our network infrastructure suppliers fails, it could delay adding network capacity or new capabilities and services across the business. Handsets and network infrastructure suppliers can extend delivery times, raise prices and limit supply due to their own shortages and business requirements, among other things. If these suppliers do not develop handsets that satisfy customer demands, or deliver products\n\nOur wireless business has relationships with a relatively small number of essential network infrastructure and handset vendors. We do not have operational or financial control over them, and only have limited influence on how they conduct their business with us.\n\nBusiness telephony operations that are outside our cable territory highly depend on the availability of facilities and services acquired from incumbent telecom operators, according to CRTC rules. Changes to these rules could significantly affect the cost of operating these businesses.\n\nWe have outsourcing arrangements with third parties to provide certain essential components of our business operations to our employees and customers, including payroll, certain facilities or property management functions, call centre support, certain installation and service technicians, certain information technology functions, and invoice printing. Interruptions in these services can adversely affect our ability to service our customers.\n\nThe Supreme Court of Canada ruled in 2003, however, that the CRTC does not have the jurisdiction to establish the terms and conditions of accessing the poles of hydroelectric companies. As a result, we obtained access under orders from the Ontario Energy Board and the New Brunswick Public Utilities Board.\n\nWe must have access to support structures and municipal rights of way for our cable facilities. We can apply to the CRTC to obtain a right of access under the Telecommunications Act in areas where we cannot secure access to municipal rights of way. Failure to obtain access could increase Cable costs and adversely affect our business.\n\nOur businesses, technologies, processes and systems are operationally complex and increasingly interconnected. If we do not execute properly, or if manmade or natural disasters impact them, customers may have a negative experience, resulting in increased churn and lower revenue.\n\nOur inventory balance mainly consists of wireless handset devices, which generally have relatively short product life cycles due to frequent wireless handset introductions. If we cannot effectively manage inventory levels based on product demand, this may increase the risk of inventory obsolescence.\n\nIt is also possible that future regulatory actions may result in more restrictive standards on radio frequency emissions from low-powered devices like wireless handsets. We cannot predict the nature or extent of any restrictions.\n\nFrom time to time the media and other reports have highlighted alleged links between radio frequency emissions from wireless handsets and various health concerns, including cancer, and interference with various medical devices, including hearing aids and pacemakers. This may discourage the use of wireless handsets or expose us to potential litigation even though there are no definitive reports or studies stating that these health issues are directly attributable to radio frequency emissions.\n\nServices, technologies, key personnel or businesses of companies we acquire may not be effectively assimilated into our business or service offerings, or our alliances may not be successful. We also may not be able to successfully complete any divestitures on satisfactory terms, if at all. Divestitures may reduce our total revenues and net income by more than offset by the sales price.\n\nAcquiring complementary businesses and technologies, developing strategic alliances and divesting portions of our business are often required to optimally execute our business strategy.\n\nCertain types of antenna installations, however, are excluded from the consultation requirements with local authorities and the public.\n\nThe policy affects all parties that plan to install or modify an antenna system, including PCS, cellular and broadcasting service providers. The policy requires, among other things, that antenna proponents consider using existing antenna structures before proposing new structures and those owners of existing systems respond to requests to share antenna systems. Antenna proponents must follow a defined process for notifying the public and addressing local requirements and concerns.\n\nWe expect that a substantial portion of our future revenue growth may come from new and advanced services, and we continue to invest significant capital resources to develop our networks so we can offer these services. It is possible, however, that there may not be sufficient consumer demand, or that we may not anticipate or satisfy demand for certain products and services, or be able to offer or market these new products and services successfully to subscribers. If we do not attract subscribers to new products and services profitably or keep pace with changing consumer preferences, we could experience slower revenue growth and increased churn. This could have a materially adverse effect on our business, results of operations and financial condition.\n\nOur wireless business model is based substantially on subsidizing the cost of subscriber handsets, similar to other North American wireless carriers. This attracts customers and in exchange they commit to a term with us. We also commit to a minimum subsidy with the supplier of certain smartphone devices." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9453890383618629, + "doc_id": "5505ab3ae5b67772084eae886137bc3755e9c61f91e2f6983011b5859ce5709d", + "edit_distance": 0.24, + "f1_score": 0.9799426934097419, + "meteor": 0.9690188498873309, + "precision": 0.9771428571428571, + "pred_md": "SMFG\n\nCapital Ratio Information\n\n## ■ Equity Exposures in Banking Book\n\n## 1. Risk Management Policy and Procedures\n\nSecurities in the banking book are properly managed, for example, by setting upper limits on the allowable amount of risk under the market or credit risk management framework selected according to their holding purpose and risk characteristics.\n\nFor securities held as 'available-for-sale securities,' the upper limits are also set in terms of price fluctuation risk.\n\nRegarding stocks of subsidiaries, assets and liabilities of subsidiaries are managed on a consolidated basis, and risks related to stocks of affiliates are recognized separately. Their risk as equity is not measured as upper limits on the allowable amount of risk are set for stocks of subsidiaries and affiliates, and the limits are established within the 'risk capital limit' of SMFG, taking into account the financial and business situations of the subsidiaries and affiliates.\n\n## 2. Valuation of Securities in Banking Book and Other Significant Accounting Policies\n\nStocks of subsidiaries and affiliates are carried at amortized cost using the moving-average method. Available-for-sale securities with market prices (including foreign stocks) are carried at their average market prices during the final month of the fiscal year. Securities other than these securities are carried at their fiscal year-end market prices (cost of securities sold is calculated using primarily the moving-average method) and those with no available market prices are carried at cost using the moving-average method.\n\nNet unrealized gains (losses) on available-for-sale securities and net of income taxes are reported as a component of 'net assets.' Derivative transactions are carried at fair value.\n\n## 3. Consolidated Balance Sheet Amounts and Fair Values\n\n## 4. Gains (Losses) on Sale and Devaluation of Stocks of Subsidiaries and Affiliates and Equity Exposures\n\nNote: The above amounts are gains (losses) on stocks and available-for-sale securities in the consolidated statements of income.\n\n## 5. Unrealized Gains (Losses) Recognized on Consolidated Balance Sheets but Not on Consolidated Statements of Income\n\nNote: The above amount is for stocks of Japanese companies and foreign stocks with market prices.\n\n## 6. Unrealized Gains (Losses) Not Recognized on Consolidated Balance Sheets or Consolidated Statements of Income\n\nNote: The above amount is for stocks of affiliates with market prices.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n196", + "recall": 0.9827586206896551, + "true_md": "SMFG Capital Ratio Information\n\n## ■ Equity Exposures in Banking Book\n\n## 1. Risk Management Policy and Procedures\n\nSecurities in the banking book are properly managed, for example, by setting upper limits on the allowable amount of risk under the market or credit risk management framework selected according to their holding purpose and risk characteristics. \n\nFor securities held as “available-for-sale securities,” the upper limits are also set in terms of price fluctuation risk.\n\nRegarding stocks of subsidiaries, assets and liabilities of subsidiaries are managed on a consolidated basis, and risks related to stocks of affiliates are recognized separately. Their risk as equity is not measured as upper limits on the allowable amount of risk are set for stocks of subsidiaries and affiliates, and the limits are established within the “risk capital limit” of SMFG, taking into account the financial and business situations of the subsidiaries and affiliates.\n\nStocks of subsidiaries and affiliates are carried at amortized cost using the moving-average method. Available-for-sale securities with market prices (including foreign stocks) are carried at their average market prices during the final month of the fiscal year. Securities other than these securities are carried at their fiscal year-end market prices (cost of securities sold is calculated using primarily the moving-average method) and those with no available market prices are carried at cost using the moving-average method.\n\nNet unrealized gains (losses) on available-for-sale securities and net of income taxes are reported as a component of “net assets.” Derivative transactions are carried at fair value.\n\n## 2. Valuation of Securities in Banking Book and Other Significant Accounting Policies\n\n## 3. Consolidated Balance Sheet Amounts and Fair Values\n\n## 4. Gains (Losses) on Sale and Devaluation of Stocks of Subsidiaries and Affiliates and Equity Exposures\n\n## 5. Unrealized Gains (Losses) Recognized on Consolidated Balance Sheets but Not on Consolidated Statements of Income\n\n## 6. Unrealized Gains (Losses) Not Recognized on Consolidated Balance Sheets or Consolidated Statements of Income\n\nNote: The above amounts are gains (losses) on stocks and available-for-sale securities in the consolidated statements of income.\n\nNote: The above amount is for stocks of affiliates with market prices.\n\nNote: The above amount is for stocks of Japanese companies and foreign stocks with market prices.\n\nSMFG 2011 196" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.783703272245674, + "doc_id": "a987d860d4d7e9d5eb5753f06972f774f0791483fecad6ce272b9dbf78a095d5", + "edit_distance": 0.25721153846153844, + "f1_score": 0.9962640099626402, + "meteor": 0.5706559325297396, + "precision": 0.9975062344139651, + "pred_md": "## Our customer and employee relationships could be negatively affected if we fail to maintain our corporate culture and reputation.\n\nWe have a well-recognized culture and reputation that consumers may associate with a high level of integrity, customer service and quality merchandise, and it is one of the reasons customers shop with us and employees choose us as a place of employment. Any significant damage to our reputation could negatively impact sales, diminish customer trust, reduce employee morale and productivity and lead to difficulties in recruiting and retaining qualified employees.\n\n## The potential transaction related to our credit card receivables could adversely impact our business.\n\nIn May 2014, we announced that we are reviewing options for a financial partner for our credit card receivables. This review may not result in a consummated transaction, and further, could divert management's attention away from our core Retail business, negatively impacting our execution on our customer strategy. If we do not successfully execute a transaction that meets our needs or fail to properly allocate our capital to maximize returns, our operations, cash flows and returns to shareholders could be adversely affected. Additionally, credit rating agencies may downgrade our business, which could adversely impact our operations and cash flows. Although we do not expect any change to the customer experience following a transaction, if such a transaction negatively impacts the customer service associated with our credit cards, this could harm our business and reputation, harming our competitive position.\n\n## The concentration of stock ownership in a small number of our shareholders could limit your ability to influence corporate matters.\n\nWe have regularly reported in our annual proxy statements the holdings of members of the Nordstrom family, including Bruce A. Nordstrom, our former Co-President and Chairman of the Board, his sister Anne E. Gittinger and members of the Nordstrom family within our Executive Team. In our proxy statement as of March 2, 2015, for the 2015 Annual Meeting of Shareholders, these individuals owned an aggregate of approximately 27% of our common stock. As a result, either individually or acting together, they may be able to exercise considerable influence over matters requiring shareholder approval. As reported in our periodic filings, our Board of Directors has from time to time authorized share repurchases. While these share repurchases may be offset in part by share issuances under our equity incentive plans and as consideration for acquisitions, the repurchases may nevertheless have the effect of increasing the overall percentage ownership held by these shareholders. The corporate law of the state of Washington, where the company is incorporated, provides that approval of a merger or similar significant corporate transaction requires the affirmative vote of two-thirds of a company's outstanding shares. The beneficial ownership of these shareholders may have the effect of discouraging offers to acquire us, delay or otherwise prevent a significant corporate transaction because the consummation of any such transaction would likely require the approval of these shareholders. As a result, the market price of our common stock could be affected.\n\n## Investment and partnerships in new business strategies and acquisitions could disrupt our core business.\n\nWe have invested in or are pursuing strategic growth opportunities, which may include acquisitions of, or investments in, other businesses, as well as new technologies or other investments to provide a superior customer shopping experience in our stores and online. Additionally, our business model will continue to rely more on partnerships with third parties for certain strategic initiatives and technologies. If these investments, acquisitions or partnerships do not perform as expected or create operational difficulties, our profitability and growth could be adversely affected.\n\n## RISKS DUE TO ECONOMIC AND EXTERNAL MARKET FACTORS\n\n## A downturn in economic conditions could have a significant adverse effect on our business.\n\nDuring economic downturns, fewer customers may shop for the high-quality items in our stores and on our websites as they may be seen as discretionary and those who do shop may limit the amount of their purchases. This reduced demand may lead to lower sales, higher markdowns and increased marketing and promotional spending.\n\n## Our business could suffer if we do not appropriately assess and react to competitive market forces and changes in customer behavior.\n\nWe compete with other national, regional, local and online retailers that may carry similar lines of merchandise, including department stores, specialty stores, off-price stores, boutiques and Internet businesses. The retail environment is rapidly evolving with customer shopping preferences continuing to shift online and we expect competition in the ecommerce market to intensify in the future as the Internet facilitates competitive entry and comparison shopping. We may lose market share to our competitors and our sales and profitability could suffer if we are unable to remain competitive in the key areas of price and value, fashion newness, quality of products, depth of selection, convenience, fulfillment, service and the shopping experience, including the online and store environment and store location. Our financial model is changing to match customer shopping preferences, but if we do not properly allocate our capital between the store and online environment, or adjust the effectiveness and efficiency of our stores, our overall sales and profitability could suffer.\n\nOur Credit segment faces competition from other retailers who also offer credit card products with associated loyalty programs, large banks and other credit card companies, some of which have substantial financial resources. If we do not effectively anticipate or respond to the competitive banking and credit card environments, we could lose market share to our competitors.\n\n8", + "recall": 0.9950248756218906, + "true_md": "Our customer and employee relationships could be negatively affected if we fail to maintain our corporate culture and reputation. We have a well-recognized culture and reputation that consumers may associate with a high level of integrity, customer service and quality merchandise, and it is one of the reasons customers shop with us and employees choose us as a place of employment. Any significant damage to our reputation could negatively impact sales, diminish customer trust, reduce employee morale and productivity and lead to difficulties in recruiting and retaining qualified employees.\n\nThe potential transaction related to our credit card receivables could adversely impact our business. In May 2014, we announced that we are reviewing options for a financial partner for our credit card receivables. This review may not result in a consummated transaction, and further, could divert management’s attention away from our core Retail business, negatively impacting our execution on our customer strategy. If we do not successfully execute a transaction that meets our needs or fail to properly allocate our capital to maximize returns, our operations, cash flows and returns to shareholders could be adversely affected. Additionally, credit rating agencies may downgrade our business, which could adversely impact our operations and cash flows. Although we do not expect any change to the customer experience following a transaction, if such a transaction negatively impacts the customer service associated with our credit cards, this could harm our business and reputation, harming our competitive position.\n\nThe concentration of stock ownership in a small number of our shareholders could limit your ability to influence corporate matters. We have regularly reported in our annual proxy statements the holdings of members of the Nordstrom family, including Bruce A. Nordstrom, our former Co-President and Chairman of the Board, his sister Anne E. Gittinger and members of the Nordstrom family within our Executive Team. In our proxy statement as of March 2, 2015, for the 2015 Annual Meeting of Shareholders, these individuals owned an aggregate of approximately 27% of our common stock. As a result, either individually or acting together, they may be able to exercise considerable influence over matters requiring shareholder approval. As reported in our periodic filings, our Board of Directors has from time to time authorized share repurchases. While these share repurchases may be offset in part by share issuances under our equity incentive plans and as consideration for acquisitions, the repurchases may nevertheless have the effect of increasing the overall percentage ownership held by these shareholders. The corporate law of the state of Washington, where the company is incorporated, provides that approval of a merger or similar significant corporate transaction requires the affirmative vote of two-thirds of a company’s outstanding shares. The beneficial ownership of these shareholders may have the effect of discouraging offers to acquire us, delay or otherwise prevent a significant corporate transaction because the consummation of any such transaction would likely require the approval of these shareholders. As a result, the market price of our common stock could be affected.\n\nInvestment and partnerships in new business strategies and acquisitions could disrupt our core business. We have invested in or are pursuing strategic growth opportunities, which may include acquisitions of, or investments in, other businesses, as well as new technologies or other investments to provide a superior customer shopping experience in our stores and online. Additionally, our business model will continue to rely more on partnerships with third parties for certain strategic initiatives and technologies. If these investments, acquisitions or partnerships do not perform as expected or create operational difficulties, our profitability and growth could be adversely affected. \n\nA downturn in economic conditions could have a significant adverse effect on our business. During economic downturns, fewer customers may shop for the high-quality items in our stores and on our websites as they may be seen as discretionary and those who do shop may limit the amount of their purchases. This reduced demand may lead to lower sales, higher markdowns and increased marketing and promotional spending.\n\nbehavior. We compete with other national, regional, local and online retailers that may carry similar lines of merchandise, including department stores, specialty stores, off-price stores, boutiques and Internet businesses. The retail environment is rapidly evolving with customer shopping preferences continuing to shift online and we expect competition in the ecommerce market to intensify in the future as the Internet facilitates competitive entry and comparison shopping. We may lose market share to our competitors and our sales and profitability could suffer if we are unable to remain competitive in the key areas of price and value, fashion newness, quality of products, depth of selection, convenience, fulfillment, service and the shopping experience, including the online and store environment and store location. Our financial model is changing to match customer shopping preferences, but if we do not properly allocate our capital between the store and online environment, or adjust the effectiveness and efficiency of our stores, our overall sales and profitability could suffer.\n\nOur Credit segment faces competition from other retailers who also offer credit card products with associated loyalty programs, large banks and other credit card companies, some of which have substantial financial resources. If we do not effectively anticipate or respond to the competitive banking and credit card environments, we could lose market share to our competitors.\n\n8\n\n## Our business could suffer if we do not appropriately assess and react to competitive market forces and changes in customer behavior. We compete with other national, regional, local and online retailers that may carry similar lines of merchandise, including department stores,\n\n## A downturn in economic conditions could have a significant adverse effect on our business. During economic downturns, fewer customers may shop for the high-quality items in our stores and on our websites as they may be seen as\n\n## RISKS DUE TO ECONOMIC AND EXTERNAL MARKET FACTORS\n\n## Investment and partnerships in new business strategies and acquisitions could disrupt our core business. We have invested in or are pursuing strategic growth opportunities, which may include acquisitions of, or investments in, other businesses,\n\n## The concentration of stock ownership in a small number of our shareholders could limit your ability to influence corporate matters. We have regularly reported in our annual proxy statements the holdings of members of the Nordstrom family, including Bruce A. Nordstrom,\n\n## The potential transaction related to our credit card receivables could adversely impact our business. In May 2014, we announced that we are reviewing options for a financial partner for our credit card receivables. This review may not result in\n\n## Our customer and employee relationships could be negatively affected if we fail to maintain our corporate culture and reputation. We have a well-recognized culture and reputation that consumers may associate with a high level of integrity, customer service and quality" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9370615707571084, + "doc_id": "211e1e9c0a0902099cebc114021babaae748582a613ba34faeaeb10dfce28b01", + "edit_distance": 0.041237113402061855, + "f1_score": 0.9866666666666666, + "meteor": 0.9720535040913288, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nSMFG\n\n- (3) Consolidated balance sheet amounts of financial instruments whose fair values are extremely difficult to determine are as follows:\n\n* 1 Beneficiary claims on loan trusts that (a) behave more like equity than debt, (b) do not have market prices, and (c) for which it is difficult to rationally estimate fair values.\n\n* 2 Not included in the scope of fair value disclosure since there are no market prices and it is extremely difficult to determine their fair values.\n\n* 3 Capital contributions with no market prices. The above-stated amount includes the book value amount of investments in the partnership of which the SMFG records net changes in their balance sheets and statements of income.\n\n* 4 Unlisted stocks and investments in partnership totaling ¥15,076 million ($181 million) and ¥26,770 million were written-down in the fiscal years ended March 31, 2011 and 2010, respectively.\n\n(4) Redemption schedule of monetary claims bought and securities with maturities\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n105", + "recall": 0.9736842105263158, + "true_md": "SMFG Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n- (3) Consolidated balance sheet amounts of financial instruments whose fair values are extremely difficult to determine are as follows:\n\n* 1 Beneficiary claims on loan trusts that (a) behave more like equity than debt, (b) do not have market prices, and (c) for which it is difficult to rationally estimate fair values. *$^{2}$ Not included in the scope of fair value disclosure since there are no market prices and it is extremely difficult to determine their fair values.\n\n* 3 Capital contributions with no market prices. The above-stated amount includes the book value amount of investments in the partnership of which the SMFG records net changes in their balance sheets and statements of income.\n\n* 4 Unlisted stocks and investments in partnership totaling ¥15,076 million ($181 million) and ¥26,770 million were written-down in the fiscal years ended March 31, 2011 and 2010, respectively.\n\n- (4) Redemption schedule of monetary claims bought and securities with maturities\n\nSMFG 2011 105" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.29615165360116247, + "doc_id": "5ea73d3af5e7fa0bec1200fb202fa61deed0e9081d26f06e2c4f6654c6396190", + "edit_distance": 0.75, + "f1_score": 0.8148148148148148, + "meteor": 0.8364355970061522, + "precision": 0.7857142857142857, + "pred_md": "AMED E\n\nCOMPENSATION (cont'd)\n\n## B. Executive Summary\n\n- 29 -", + "recall": 0.8461538461538461, + "true_md": "- 29 - \n\n## COMPENSATION (cont’d) B. Executive Summary" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6481011813007932, + "doc_id": "753f516c95bc26131b43cede013ad22c5b375dafb85bb857b5e35a588cb704ad", + "edit_distance": 0.42528735632183906, + "f1_score": 0.9257950530035335, + "meteor": 0.8290286290560873, + "precision": 0.9225352112676056, + "pred_md": "Basic policies\n\nBecome a globally competitive financial services group with the highest trust of our stakeholders by maximizing our strengths of 'Spirit of Innovation,' 'Speed' and 'Solution & Execution.'\n\n## Management plan for coming three years\n\n## Strongly support Japan's reconstruction on the financial front\n\n## Medium-term management plan (fiscal 2011 - 2013)\n\n## Management targets\n\n## Financial objectives\n\n## Strategic initiatives\n\n## Strategic business areas\n\n- /uni25CF Aim for top quality in strategic business areas\n- /uni25CF Establish a financial base and corporate infrastructure strong enough to address the new financial regulations and competitive environment\n\nWell-balanced and steady improvement of 'financial soundness,' 'profitability' and 'growth'\n\n- /uni25CF Achieve sufficient Core Tier I ratio as required for a global player\n- /uni25CF Enhance risk-return profile by improving asset quality\n- /uni25CF Aim for top-level cost efficiency among global players\n- /uni25CF Expand overseas business by capturing growing business opportunities especially in Asia\n\n## Key initiatives to achieve management and financial targets\n\n- /uni25CF Financial consulting for individuals\n- /uni25CF Solution providing for corporations\n- /uni25CF Commercial banking in emerging markets, especially in Asia\n- /uni25CF Broker-dealer/Investment banking\n- /uni25CF Non-asset business such as payment & settlement services and asset management\n\n- /uni25CF Strengthen group-wide management capabilities\n- /uni25CF Strengthen corporate infrastructure to support our global expansion\n- /uni25CF Pursue efficient operation\n\nCorporate base\n\nSMFG 2011\n\nCorporate slogan:\n\n## LEAD THE VALUE\n\n5", + "recall": 0.9290780141843972, + "true_md": "Become a globally competitive financial services group with the highest trust of our stakeholders by maximizing our strengths of “Spirit of Innovation,” “Speed” and “Solution & Execution.”\n\nBasic policies\n\nCorporate slogan: LEAD THE VALUE\n\nManagement plan for coming three years\n\nStrongly support Japan’s reconstruction on the financial front\n\nSMFG 2011 5\n\n## Medium-term management plan (fiscal 2011 - 2013)\n\nWell-balanced and steady improvement of “financial soundness,” “profitability” and “growth”\n\n- ● Aim for top quality in strategic business areas\n\n- ● Establish a financial base and corporate infrastructure strong enough to address the new financial regulations and competitive environment\n\n- ● Achieve sufficient Core Tier I ratio as required for a global player\n\n- ● Enhance risk-return profile by improving asset quality\n\n- ● Aim for top-level cost efficiency among global players\n\n- ● Expand overseas business by capturing growing business opportunities especially in Asia\n\n- ● Financial consulting for individuals\n\n- ● Solution providing for corporations\n\n- ● Commercial banking in emerging markets, especially in Asia\n\n- ● Broker-dealer/Investment banking\n\n- ● Non-asset business such as payment & settlement services and asset management\n\n- ● Strengthen group-wide management capabilities\n\n- ● Strengthen corporate infrastructure to support our global expansion\n\n- ● Pursue efficient operation\n\n## Key initiatives to achieve management and financial targets\n\n## Management targets\n\n## Financial objectives\n\n## Strategic initiatives\n\n## Strategic business areas\n\n## Corporate base" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8318857470374795, + "doc_id": "c05d68f53e2e865554fdc61ae3109c33a783a9d0596e1090822bdc6e5e5e9fa8", + "edit_distance": 0.5345060893098782, + "f1_score": 0.9499192245557351, + "meteor": 0.8187454223814592, + "precision": 0.9576547231270358, + "pred_md": "## Fundamental approach on social contribution activities\n\nSMFG and its Group companies, in consideration of the public service nature of the financial services industry, recognize the importance of using business operations to contribute to the development of society. In addition to this contribution to society through day-to-day business operations, we must also act as a responsible corporate citizen by engaging in activities that help lay the foundations for a better society in the future. In the spirit of corporate citizenship, SMFG and its Group companies will fulfill their social obligations through a broad range of activities.\n\n## Policy on social contribution activities\n\nSMFG and its Group companies understand their role as responsible corporate citizens, and undertake activities that contribute to the realization of a prosperous and sustainable society. We maintain an extensive social contribution program by planning and executing social contribution activities at the corporate level, as well as by encouraging employees to volunteer for worthwhile activities.\n\n## The central elements of our social contribution activities\n\nSMFG and its Group companies position the following four sectors as the core fields for social contributions: 1) social welfare; 2) local and international communities; 3) the environment; and 4) culture, the arts and education.\n\n## Activities Contributing to Social Welfare\n\n## ¥ Collection and Donation of Mistakenly-Written PostagePrepaid Postcards and Recycling of Other Used Items\n\nSMFG collects mistakenly-written postage-prepaid postcards from Group employees, exchanges them for new postage stamps, and donates the stamps to volunteer organizations to help them cover their postage costs. In addition, SMBC collects unused prepaid telephone cards, Sumitomo Mitsui Card, Sumitomo Mitsui Finance and Leasing (SMFL) and Cedyna collect PET bottle caps, and Sumitomo Mitsui Card and SMBC Friend Securities collect used postage stamps from employees, donating them to volunteer organizations. SMBC and SMBC Friend Securities also donate products given by the companies to their shareholders.\n\n## ¥ ign-Language Courses S\n\nIn order to enhance the capabilities of our employees allowing them to better communicate and offer personalized services to assist the hearing-challenged, sign-language workshops are held annually by SMBC. In fiscal 2010, the bank also organized seminars explaining the daily problems faced by the hearingchallenged, interpreted by a sign-language interpreter.\n\n## ¥ olunteer Activities, and Blood Donation Campaigns V\n\nSMBC offers educational workshops for volunteer activities in\n\norder to encourage its employees to participate in voluntary activities. In fiscal 2010, workshops were organized in Tokyo, Nagoya and Osaka, simulating experiences of global\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n58\n\npoverty, diversity, environment and other related issues.\n\nSMBC Friend Securities organizes personal awareness sessions during which our employees can actually experience some of the difficulties encountered and experienced by our senior citizens by using wheelchairs. At the same time, 'Senior Citizen Simulation' sessions are also organized.\n\nBlood donation campaigns at the workplace are organized by SMBC, Sumitomo Mitsui Card and SMBC Nikko Securities.\n\n## ¥ ale of Products Made by Social Welfare S Organizations\n\nIn the SMBC Head Office building, employees can buy products made by NPOs employing the physically challenged.\n\n## Volunteer Activities for Local and Overseas Communities\n\n## ¥ olunteer Fund V\n\nSMBC has a system in which volunteering employees may have ¥100 deducted monthly from their salaries to donate to volunteer organizations. As of June 2011, more than 11,000 employees participated in this program. The following are some of the 23 activities funded by the SMBC Volunteer Fund in fiscal 2010.\n\n## Overseas\n\n- · School meals program for elementary schools in Burkina Faso\n- · School library opened in Laos\n- · Support for elementary education in Afghanistan by performing the kamishibai (storytelling using pictures)\n- · In Indonesia, scholarships for intermediate and high school students, and a health program for infants\n- · Clean water project for elementary schools in Sudan", + "recall": 0.9423076923076923, + "true_md": "Social Contribution Activities\n\n## Fundamental approach on social contribution activities\n\n## Policy on social contribution activities\n\nSMFG and its Group companies, in consideration of the public service nature of the financial services industry, recognize the importance of using business operations to contribute to the development of society. In addition to this contribution to society through day-to-day business operations, we must also act as a responsible corporate citizen by engaging in activities that help lay the foundations for a better society in the future. In the spirit of corporate citizenship, SMFG and its Group companies will fulfill their social obligations through a broad range of activities.\n\nSMFG and its Group companies understand their role as responsible corporate citizens, and undertake activities that contribute to the realization of a prosperous and sustainable society. We maintain an extensive social contribution program by planning and executing social contribution activities at the corporate level, as well as by encouraging employees to volunteer for worthwhile activities.\n\nSMFG and its Group companies position the following four sectors as the core fields for social contributions: 1) social welfare; 2) local and international communities; 3) the environment; and 4) culture, the arts and education.\n\n## The central elements of our social contribution activities\n\n## Activities Contributing to Social Welfare •\n\n## Activities Contributing to Social Welfare • Collection and Donation of Mistakenly-Written Postage- Prepaid Postcards and Recycling of Other Used Items\n\npoverty, diversity, environment and other related issues.\n\nSMBC Friend Securities organizes personal awareness sessions during which our employees can actually experience some of the difficulties encountered and experienced by our senior citizens by using wheelchairs. At the same time, “Senior Citizen Simulation” sessions are also organized.\n\nBlood donation campaigns at the workplace are organized by SMBC, Sumitomo Mitsui Card and SMBC Nikko Securities.\n\nSMFG collects mistakenly-written postage-prepaid postcards from Group employees, exchanges them for new postage stamps, and donates the stamps to volunteer organizations to help them cover their postage costs. In addition, SMBC col- lects unused prepaid telephone cards, Sumitomo Mitsui Card, Sumitomo Mitsui Finance and Leasing (SMFL) and Cedyna collect PET bottle caps, and Sumitomo Mitsui Card and SMBC Friend Securities collect used postage stamps from employees, donating them to volunteer organizations. SMBC and SMBC Friend Securities also donate products given by the companies to their shareholders.\n\nIn the SMBC Head Office building, employees can buy products made by NPOs employing the physically challenged.\n\n## • Sale of Products Made by Social Welfare Organizations\n\n## • Sign-Language Courses In order to enhance the capabilities of our employees allowing\n\n## Volunteer Activities for Local and Overseas Communities •\n\n## Communities • Volunteer Fund SMBC has a system in which volunteering employees may have\n\n• In order to enhance the capabilities of our employees allowing them to better communicate and offer personalized services to assist the hearing-challenged, sign-language workshops are held annually by SMBC. In fiscal 2010, the bank also organized seminars explaining the daily problems faced by the hearing- challenged, interpreted by a sign-language interpreter.\n\n• SMBC has a system in which volunteering employees may have ¥100 deducted monthly from their salaries to donate to volunteer organizations. As of June 2011, more than 11,000 employees par- ticipated in this program. The following are some of the 23 activities funded by the SMBC Volunteer Fund in fiscal 2010.\n\nOverseas\n\n• SMBC offers educational workshops for volunteer activities in \n\n## • Volunteer Activities, and Blood Donation Campaigns SMBC offers educational workshops for volunteer activities in\n\n- • School meals program for elementary schools in Burkina Faso \n\n- • School library opened in Laos\n\n- • Support for elementary education in Afghanistan by perform- ing the kamishibai (storytelling using pictures)\n\n- • In Indonesia, scholarships for intermediate and high school students, and a health program for infants\n\n- • Clean water project for elementary schools in Sudan\n\nSMFG 2011 58\n\norder to encourage its employees to participate in voluntary activities. In fiscal 2010, workshops were orga- nized in Tokyo, Nagoya and Osaka, simulating experiences of global" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9197650857547204, + "doc_id": "354eb0df31e092c5422db7abef9437c2eb23e662141f5c9681ee8efed2d9e4c6", + "edit_distance": 0.9498069498069498, + "f1_score": 0.9641434262948207, + "meteor": 0.736575220207044, + "precision": 0.9718875502008032, + "pred_md": "## Notes to the Ore Reserves and Mineral Resources Table:\n\nSome rounding of figures may cause numbers to not add correctly.\n\n- (1) Nueva Esperanza equivalent factors:\n- · Silver equivalent: AgEq (g/t) = Ag (g/t) + Au(g/t) x 60;\n- · Gold Equivalent: AuEq (g/t) = Au (g/t) + Ag (g/t) / 60;\n- · Calculated from prices of US$1,380/ oz Au and US$21.50/oz Ag, and metallurgical recoveries of 70% Au and 75% Ag estimated from test work by Kingsgate, and metallurgical recoveries of 85% Au and 78% Ag estimated from test work by Kingsgate and Laguna.\n- (2) Bowdens equivalent factors:\n- · Silver equivalent: AgEq (g/t) = Ag (g/t) + 22.4 x Pb (%) + 25.5 x Zn (%);\n- · Gold equivalent: AuEq (g/t) = AgEq (g/t) /45 ;\n- · Calculated from prices of US$28/oz Ag, US$1250/oz Au, US$2200/t Pb, US$2200/t Zn and metallurgical recoveries of 81% Ag, 73% Pb, and 83% Zn estimated from test work by Silver Standard, and assuming consistent metallurgical recoveries for gold and silver of 81%.\n- (3) Chatree equivalent factors:\n- · Chatree gold equivalent: AuEq/t = Au (g/t) + Ag (g/t) /105;\n- · Silver equivalent: AgEq g/t = Au (g/t) x 105 + Ag g/t;\n- · Calculated from prices of US$1480/oz Au and US$26/oz Ag and metallurgical recoveries of 80.5% Au and 43.6% silver based on metallurgical testwork and plant performance.\n- (4) Challenger equivalent factors:\n- · Silver equivalent: AgEq/t = Au (g/t) x 57;\n- · Calculated from prices of US$1480/oz Au and US$26/oz Ag and consistent metallurgical recoveries for gold and silver.\n- (5) Cut-off grade for Chatree is 0.35g/t Au; Nueva Esperanza is 0.5g/t AuEq; Bowdens is 30g/t AgEq. For Challenger it is 1.5 Au g/t for open cut resources, and 5.0 g/t for undeground resources.\n- (6) t is the Company's opinion that all the I elements included in the metal equivalents calculation have a reasonable potential to be recovered.\n\n33\n\nOre Reserves and Mineral Resources\n\n## Competent Persons Statement\n\nIn this report, information concerning Thailand operations relates to Exploration Results, Mineral Resources and Ore Reserve estimates and is based on and fairly represents information compiled by the following Competent Persons: Ron James, Brendan Bradley, Kevin Woodward and Suphanit Suphananthi who are employees of the Kingsgate Group - all except Brendan Bradley are members of The Australasian Institute of Mining and Metallurgy. Brendan Bradley is a member of the Australian Institute of Geoscientists. These people qualify as Competent Persons as defined in the 'Australasian Code for Reporting of Exploration Results, Mineral Resources and Ore Reserves' (the JORC Code, 2012 edition) and possess relevant experience in relation to the mineralisation being reported herein as Exploration Results, Mineral Resources and Ore Reserves. Each Competent Person has consented to the public reporting of these statements and the inclusion of the material in the form and context in which it appears.\n\nIn this report, the information concerning Challenger operations that relates to Exploration Results, Mineral Resources and Ore Reserves estimates is based on and fairly represents information compiled by Stuart Hampton and Luke Phelps who are full-time employees of the Kingsgate Group. Both are members of The Australasian Institute of Mining and Metallurgy. These persons have sufficient experience that is relevant to the mineralisation and type of deposit under consideration and to the activity that they are undertaking to qualify as Competent Persons as defined in the 2012 Edition of the 'Australasian Code for Reporting of Exploration Results, Mineral Resources and Ore Reserves'. Stuart Hampton and Luke Phelps consent to the inclusion in the report of the matters based on their information in the form in which it appears.\n\nThe information in this report that relates to Bowdens Mineral Resource estimation is based on and fairly represents work completed by Jonathon Abbott who is a full-time employee of MPR Geological Consultants and a member of the Australasian Institute of Geoscientists, and Ron James, who is a member of The Australasian Institute of Mining and Metallurgy. Mr Abbott and Mr James have sufficient experience that is relevant to the style of mineralisation and type of deposit under consideration and to the activity that they are undertaking to qualify as a Competent Person as defined in the 2012 Edition of the 'Australasian Code for Reporting of Exploration Results, Mineral Resources and Ore Reserves'. Mr Abbott and Mr James consent to the inclusion in the report of the matters based on their information in the form and context in which it appears.\n\nThe information in this report that relates to Nueva Esperanza Mineral Resource estimation is based on and fairly represents work completed by Jonathon Abbott, Ron James and Maria Muñoz. These people qualify as Competent Persons as defined in the 'Australasian Code for Reporting of Exploration Results and Mineral Resources'(the JORC Code, 2012 edition) and possess relevant experience in relation to the mineralisation being reported herein as 'Exploration Results, Mineral Resources and Ore Reserves'. Mr Abbott, Mr James and Ms Muñoz consent to the inclusion in the report of the matters based on their information in the form and context in which it appears.\n\nOre Reserves and Mineral Resources", + "recall": 0.9565217391304348, + "true_md": "33 Ore Reserves and Mineral Resources\n\nOre Reserves and Mineral Resources\n\n## Competent Persons Statement\n\nIn this report, information concerning Thailand operations relates to Exploration Results, Mineral Resources and Ore Reserve estimates and is based on and fairly represents information compiled by the following Competent Persons: Ron James, Brendan Bradley, Kevin Woodward and Suphanit Suphananthi who are employees of the Kingsgate Group – all except Brendan Bradley are members of The Australasian Institute of Mining and Metallurgy. Brendan Bradley is a member of the Australian Institute of Geoscientists. These people qualify as Competent Persons as defined in the ‘Australasian Code for Reporting of Exploration Results, Mineral Resources and Ore Reserves’ (the JORC Code, 2012 edition) and possess relevant experience in relation to the mineralisa- tion being reported herein as Exploration Results, Mineral Resources and Ore Reserves. Each Competent Person has consented to the public reporting of these statements and the inclusion of the material in the form and context in which it appears.\n\nIn this report, the information concerning Challenger operations that relates to Exploration Results, Mineral Resources and Ore Reserves estimates is based on and fairly represents information compiled by Stuart Hampton and Luke Phelps who are full-time employees of the Kingsgate Group. Both are members of The Australasian Institute of Mining and Metallurgy. These persons have sufficient experience that is relevant to the mineralisation and type of deposit under consideration and to the activity that they are undertaking to qualify as Competent Persons as defined in the 2012 Edition of the ‘Australasian Code for Reporting of Exploration Results, Mineral Resources and Ore Reserves’. Stuart Hampton and Luke Phelps consent to the inclusion in the report of the matters based on their information in the form in which it appears.\n\nThe information in this report that relates to Nueva Esperanza Mineral Resource estimation is based on and fairly represents work completed by Jonathon Abbott, Ron James and Maria Muñoz. These people qualify as Competent Persons as defined in the ‘Australasian Code for Reporting of Exploration Results and Mineral Resources’(the JORC Code, 2012 edition) and possess relevant experience in relation to the mineralisation being reported herein as ‘Exploration Results, Mineral Resources and Ore Reserves’. Mr Abbott, Mr James and Ms Muñoz consent to the inclusion in the report of the matters based on their information in the form and context in which it appears.\n\nThe information in this report that relates to Bowdens Mineral Resource estimation is based on and fairly represents work completed by Jonathon Abbott who is a full-time employee of MPR Geological Consultants and a member of the Australasian Institute of Geoscientists, and Ron James, who is a member of The Australasian Institute of Mining and Metallurgy. Mr Abbott and Mr James have sufficient experience that is relevant to the style of mineralisation and type of deposit under consideration and to the activity that they are undertaking to qualify as a Competent Person as defined in the 2012 Edition of the ‘Australasian Code for Reporting of Exploration Results, Mineral Resources and Ore Reserves’. Mr Abbott and Mr James consent to the inclusion in the report of the matters based on their information in the form and context in which it appears.\n\nResources Table: Some rounding of figures may cause numbers to not add correctly.\n\n- (1) Nueva Esperanza equivalent factors: \n\n- (2) Bowdens equivalent factors:\n\n- (3) Chatree equivalent factors:\n\n- (4) Challenger equivalent factors:\n\n- (5) Cut-off grade for Chatree is 0.35g/t Au; Nueva Esperanza is 0.5g/t AuEq; Bowdens is 30g/t AgEq. For Challenger it is 1.5 Au g/t for open cut resources, and 5.0 g/t for undeground resources.\n\n- (6) It is the Company's opinion that all the elements included in the metal equiva- lents calculation have a reasonable potential to be recovered.\n\n- • Calculated from prices of US$1,380/ oz Au and US$21.50/oz Ag, and metallurgical recoveries of 70% Au and 75% Ag estimated from test work by Kingsgate, and metallurgical recoveries of 85% Au and 78% Ag estimated from test work by Kingsgate and Laguna. \n\n- • Calculated from prices of US$28/oz Ag, US$1250/oz Au, US$2200/t Pb, US$2200/t Zn and metallurgical recoveries of 81% Ag, 73% Pb, and 83% Zn estimated from test work by Silver Standard, and assuming consistent metallurgical recoveries for gold and silver of 81%. \n\n- • Calculated from prices of US$1480/oz Au and US$26/oz Ag and metallur- gical recoveries of 80.5% Au and 43.6% silver based on metallurgical testwork and plant performance.\n\n- • Calculated from prices of US$1480/oz Au and US$26/oz Ag and consistent metallurgical recoveries for gold and silver.\n\n## Notes to the Ore Reserves and Mineral Resources Table: Some rounding of figures may cause numbers\n\n- • Silver equivalent: AgEq (g/t) = Ag (g/t) + Au(g/t) x 60; \n\n- • Gold Equivalent: AuEq (g/t) = Au (g/t) + Ag (g/t) / 60; \n\n- • Silver equivalent: AgEq (g/t) = Ag (g/t) + 22.4 x Pb (%) + 25.5 x Zn (%); \n\n- • Gold equivalent: AuEq (g/t) = AgEq (g/t) /45 ;\n\n- • Chatree gold equivalent: AuEq/t = Au (g/t) + Ag (g/t) /105;\n\n- • Silver equivalent: AgEq g/t = Au (g/t) x 105 + Ag g/t;\n\n- • Silver equivalent: AgEq/t = Au (g/t) x 57;" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9093882739577841, + "doc_id": "4ef95cfc13b35935e6cd0d4e3a32e406d37fe5f8b7af040493ff6b9e8e7ba071", + "edit_distance": 0.06007067137809187, + "f1_score": 0.9692832764505119, + "meteor": 0.9479183058646758, + "precision": 0.9726027397260274, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 20 - OTHER NON-CURRENT ASSETS\n\n## NOTE 21 - TRADE AND OTHER PAYABLES AND ACCRUED EXPENSES\n\nAt 31 December 2013, the Group had payable balances of $16.7 million which was outside normal payment terms, offset by a receivable balance of $11.7 million to the same creditor company (see Note 12 for additional information). The Company's remaining Bakken assets were sold to this company in July 2014, for approximately $14.0 million, including the settlement of the net liability.\n\n## NOTE 22 - CREDIT FACILITIES\n\n## Junior Credit Facility\n\nIn August 2013, Sundance Energy, Inc. ('Sundance Energy'), a wholly owned subsidiary of the Company, entered into a second lien credit agreement with Wells Fargo Energy Capital, Inc., as the administrative agent (the 'Junior Credit Facility'), which provides for term loans to be made in a series of draws up to $100 million. The Junior Credit Facility matures in June 2018 and is secured by a second priority lien on substantially all of the Company's assets. Upon entering into the Junior Credit Facility, the Company immediately borrowed $15 million pursuant to the terms of the Junior Credit Facility and paid down the outstanding principal of the Senior Credit Facility. In May 2014, the Company's borrowing capacity increased to $35 million. As at 31 December 2014, the borrowing capacity under the Junior Credit Facility remains at $35 million.\n\n- 86 -", + "recall": 0.9659863945578231, + "true_md": "NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS \n\n## NOTE 20 – OTHER NON-CURRENT ASSETS\n\n## NOTE 21 – TRADE AND OTHER PAYABLES AND ACCRUED EXPENSES\n\nAt 31 December 2013, the Group had payable balances of $16.7 million which was outside normal payment terms, offset by a receivable balance of $11.7 million to the same creditor company (see Note 12 for additional information). The Company’s remaining Bakken assets were sold to this company in July 2014, for approximately $14.0 million, including the settlement of the net liability. \n\n## NOTE 22 – CREDIT FACILITIES\n\n## Junior Credit Facility\n\nIn August 2013, Sundance Energy, Inc. (“Sundance Energy”), a wholly owned subsidiary of the Company, entered into a second lien credit agreement with Wells Fargo Energy Capital, Inc., as the administrative agent (the “Junior Credit Facility”), which provides for term loans to be made in a series of draws up to $100 million. The Junior Credit Facility matures in June 2018 and is secured by a second priority lien on substantially all of the Company’s assets. Upon entering into the Junior Credit Facility, the Company immediately borrowed $15 million pursuant to the terms of the Junior Credit Facility and paid down the outstanding principal of the Senior Credit Facility. In May 2014, the Company’s borrowing capacity increased to $35 million. As at 31 December 2014, the borrowing capacity under the Junior Credit Facility remains at $35 million. \n\n- 86 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7546681433465171, + "doc_id": "6c809a4fce954f4077ed034784b4ba3e731d1f76b3fca3945137d40b585a5156", + "edit_distance": 0.30547550432276654, + "f1_score": 0.8796680497925311, + "meteor": 0.83897801702485, + "precision": 0.8833333333333333, + "pred_md": "SMFG\n\nCapital Ratio Information\n\n## 2. Exposure Balance by Type of Assets and Residual Term\n\nNotes: 1. The above amounts are exposures after CRM.\n\n2. The above amounts do not include 'securitization exposures' and 'credit risk-weighted assets under Article 145 of the Notification.'\n\n- 3. 'Loans, etc.' includes loans, commitments and off-balance sheet assets except derivatives, and 'Others' includes 'equity exposures' and standardized approach applied funds.\n\n4. 'No fixed maturity' includes exposures not classified by residual term.\n\n## 3. Term-End Balance of Exposures Past Due 3 Months or More or Defaulted and Their Breakdown\n\n## (1) By Geographic Region\n\nNotes: 1. The above amounts are credits subject to self-assessment, including mainly off-balance sheet credits to obligors categorized as 'Substandard Borrowers' or lower under self-assessment.\n\n2. The above amounts include partial direct write-offs (direct reductions).\n\n3. 'Domestic operations' comprises the operations of SMFG, its domestic consolidated banking subsidiaries (excluding overseas branches) and other domestic consolidated subsidiaries. 'Overseas operations' comprises the operations of the overseas branches of domestic consolidated banking subsidiaries and overseas consolidated subsidiaries, and the term-end balances are calculated based on the obligor's domicile country.\n\n## (2) By Industry\n\nNotes: 1. The above amounts are credits subject to self-assessment, including mainly off-balance sheet credits to obligors categorized as 'Substandard Borrowers' or lower under self-assessment.\n\n2. The above amounts include partial direct write-offs (direct reductions).\n\n3. 'Domestic operations' comprises the operations of SMFG, its domestic consolidated banking subsidiaries (excluding overseas branches) and other domestic consolidated subsidiaries. 'Overseas operations' comprises the operations of the overseas branches of domestic consolidated banking subsidiaries and overseas consolidated subsidiaries.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n198", + "recall": 0.8760330578512396, + "true_md": "SMFG\n\nCapital Ratio Information\n\n- 2. Exposure Balance by Type of Assets and Residual Term\n\n- 3. Term-End Balance of Exposures Past Due 3 Months or More or Defaulted and Their Breakdown\n\n- (1) By Geographic Region\n\n- Notes: 1. The above amounts are exposures after CRM.\n\n- 2. The above amounts do not include “securitization exposures” and “credit risk-weighted assets under Article 145 of the Notification.”\n\n- 3. “Loans, etc.” includes loans, commitments and off-balance sheet assets except derivatives, and “Others” includes “equity exposures” and standardized approach applied funds.\n\n- 4. “No fixed maturity” includes exposures not classified by residual term.\n\n- Notes: 1. The above amounts are credits subject to self-assessment, including mainly off-balance sheet credits to obligors categorized as “Substandard Borrowers” or lower under self-assessment.\n\n- 2. The above amounts include partial direct write-offs (direct reductions).\n\n- 3. “Domestic operations” comprises the operations of SMFG, its domestic consolidated banking subsidiaries (excluding overseas branches) and other domestic consolidated subsidiaries. “Overseas operations” comprises the operations of the overseas branches of domestic consolidated banking subsidiaries and overseas consolidated subsidiaries, and the term-end balances are calculated based on the obligor’s domicile country.\n\n- (2) By Industry\n\n- Notes: 1. The above amounts are credits subject to self-assessment, including mainly off-balance sheet credits to obligors categorized as “Substandard Borrowers” or lower under self-assessment.\n\n- 2. The above amounts include partial direct write-offs (direct reductions).\n\n- 3. “Domestic operations” comprises the operations of SMFG, its domestic consolidated banking subsidiaries (excluding overseas branches) and other domestic consolidated subsidiaries. “Overseas operations” comprises the operations of the overseas branches of domestic consolidated banking subsidiaries and overseas consolidated subsidiaries.\n\nSMFG 2011 198" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "397990fd19dadd0b758f8c3c06fc2afc62f5d1919d46c387d9350d30c3285c4b", + "edit_distance": 0.994413407821229, + "f1_score": 0.049180327868852465, + "meteor": 0.05220646178092988, + "precision": 0.025210084033613446, + "pred_md": "## Planning Dept., Consumer Banking Unit\n\nMarketing Dept.\n\nConsumer Compliance Dept.\n\nNext W-ing Project Dept.\n\nConsumer Facilitating Financing Dept.\n\nRetail Human Resources Dept.\n\nPersonal Product Development Dept.\n\n## Financial Consulting Dept.\n\nConsumer Loan Dept.\n\nMass Retail Dept.\n\nCredit Dept., Consumer Banking Unit\n\n## Business Promotion & Solution Dept.\n\nPublic & Financial Institutions Banking Dept.\n\nSmall and Medium Enterprises Marketing Dept.\n\nSmall Enterprises Credit Portfolio Administration Dept.\n\nCredit Dept. I, Middle Market Banking Unit\n\nCredit Monitoring Dept.\n\nCredit Monitoring Dept. Credit Dept. II, Middle Market Banking Unit\n\n## Planning Dept., Corporate Banking Unit & Middle Market Banking Unit\n\nMiddle Market Facilitating Financing Dept.\n\nCredit Dept., Corporate Banking Unit\n\n## Planning Dept., International Banking Unit\n\nIT & Business Administration Planning Dept.\n\nAsia Pacific Training Dept.\n\nGlobal Business Strategy Dept.\n\nPlanning Dept., Asia Pacific Division\n\nAsia Credit Dept., International Banking Unit\n\nEnvironment Analysis Dept., International Banking Unit Credit Management Dept., International Banking Unit\n\nPlanning Dept., Americas Division\n\nCredit Dept., Americas Division\n\nRisk Management Dept., Americas Division\n\nPlanning Dept., Europe Division\n\nCredit Dept., Europe Division\n\nRisk Management Dept., Europe Division\n\nCompliance Dept., Americas Division\n\n## Planning Dept., Treasury Unit\n\nTreasury Dept.\n\nInternational Treasury Dept.\n\nTrading Dept.\n\nTreasury Marketing Dept.\n\n## Planning Dept., Investment Banking Unit\n\n## Syndication Dept.\n\nSecurities Business Planning Dept.\n\nStrategic Products Dept.\n\n- Environmental Products Dept.\n- Shipping Finance Dept.\n\nSecurities Direct Sales Dept.\n\n## Structured Finance Dept.\n\nStock Execution Dept.\n\n- Trust Business Operations Dept.\n\n## Trust Services Dept.\n\nReal Estate Finance Dept.\n\nM&A Advisory Services Dept.\n\nMerchant Banking Dept.\n\nFinancial Products Marketing Dept.\n\nFinancial Products Dept.\n\n## Structured Finance Credit Dept.\n\n## Settlement Finance Unit\n\nElectronic Commerce Banking Dept.\n\nGlobal Transaction Banking Dept.\n\nAsset Finance Dept.\n\nGlobal Securities Business Dept.\n\n## Block Consumer Business Office\n\n## Middle Market Banking Division\n\nTokyo Corporate Banking Division\n\nOsaka Corporate Banking Division\n\nNagoya Corporate Banking Division\n\nAmericas Division\n\nEurope Division\n\nAsia Pacific Division\n\n## Branch\n\nConsumer Loan Promotion Office Apartment House Loan Promotion Office Loan Support Office\n\nPrivate Banking Dept.\n\nDirect Banking Dept.\n\nConsumer Finance Promotion Office\n\n## Corporate Business Office\n\nBusiness Promotion Office\n\nFinancial Development Office\n\nReal Estate Corporate Business Office Public Institutions Business Office\n\nBusiness Support Office\n\n## Corporate Advisory Division\n\n## Corporate Banking Dept.\n\nGlobal Client Business Dept.\n\nGlobal Corporate Investment Dept.\n\nGlobal Trade Finance Dept.\n\nGlobal Institutional Banking Dept.\n\nBranches/Representative Offices\n\nin North East Asia\n\nDepartments of Americas Division\n\nDepartments of Europe Division\n\nBranches/Representative Offices in Asia Pacific Division\n\nPrivate Advisory Dept.\n\nPrivate Advisory Business Dept.\n\nCorporate Employees Business Dept.\n\nDefined Contribution Dept.\n\nGlobal Advisory Dept.\n\nBranch Service Office\n\nHead/Main Service Office\n\nPublic Institutions Operations Office\n\nSMFG 2011 215", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "SMFG 2011 215" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8915131899564119, + "doc_id": "8adb774bd56b0843b85dac814c87a044e8a058e3d4895672867b64806855e495", + "edit_distance": 0.10699588477366255, + "f1_score": 0.9682151589242053, + "meteor": 0.9608239430539477, + "precision": 0.9611650485436893, + "pred_md": "## MANAGEMENT'S REPORT ON INTERNAL CONTROL OVER FINANCIAL REPORTING\n\n'\n\nMANAGEMENT S REPORT ON INTERNAL CONTROL OVER FINANCIAL REPORTING\n\nThe Management of Applied Industrial Technologies, Inc. is responsible for establishing and maintaining adequate internal control over financial reporting. Internal control over financial reporting is a process designed by, or under the supervision of, the Chief Executive Officer and the Vice President - Chief Financial Officer & Treasurer, and effected by the Company's Board of Directors, management and other personnel, to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of consolidated financial statements for external purposes in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America.\n\nThe Company's internal control over financial reporting includes those policies and procedures that: (1) pertain to the maintenance of records that, in reasonable detail, accurately and fairly reflect the transactions and dispositions of the assets of the Company; (2) provide reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded as necessary to permit preparation of consolidated financial statements in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America and that receipts and expenditures of the Company are being made only in accordance with authorizations of the Company's Management and Board of Directors; and (3) provide reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of unauthorized acquisition, use, or disposition of the Company's assets that could have a material effect on the consolidated financial statements.\n\nBecause of inherent limitations, internal control over financial reporting can provide only reasonable, not absolute, assurance with respect to the preparation and presentation of the consolidated financial statements and may not prevent or detect misstatements. Further, because of changes in conditions, effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting may vary over time.\n\nManagement conducted an evaluation of the effectiveness of the Company's internal control over financial reporting as of June 30, 2012. This evaluation was based on the criteria set forth in the framework Internal Control - Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission. Based on this evaluation, Management determined that the Company's internal control over financial reporting was effective as of June 30, 2012.\n\nThe effectiveness of the Company's internal control over financial reporting has been audited by Deloitte & Touche LLP, an independent registered public accounting firm, as stated in their report which is included herein.\n\nNeil A. Schrimsher Chief Executive Officer\n\nMark O. Eisele Vice President - Chief Financial Officer & Treasurer\n\nBenjamin J. Mondics President & Chief Operating Officer\n\nAugust 15, 2012\n\nDaniel T. Brezovec Corporate Controller\n\nApplied Industrial Technologies, Inc. and Subsidiaries\n\n39", + "recall": 0.9753694581280788, + "true_md": "## MANAGEMENT’S REPORT ON INTERNAL CONTROL OVER FINANCIAL REPORTING\n\nThe Management of Applied Industrial Technologies, Inc. is responsible for establishing and maintaining adequate internal control over financial reporting. Internal control over financial reporting is a process designed by, or under the supervision of, the Chief Executive Officer and the Vice President — Chief Financial Officer & Treasurer, and effected by the Company’s Board of Directors, management and other personnel, to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of consolidated financial statements for external purposes in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America. \n\nThe Company’s internal control over financial reporting includes those policies and procedures that: (1) pertain to the maintenance of records that, in reasonable detail, accurately and fairly reflect the transactions and dispositions of the assets of the Company; (2) provide reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded as necessary to permit preparation of consolidated financial statements in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America and that receipts and expenditures of the Company are being made only in accordance with authorizations of the Company’s Management and Board of Directors; and (3) provide reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of unauthorized acquisition, use, or disposition of the Company’s assets that could have a material effect on the consolidated financial statements. \n\nBecause of inherent limitations, internal control over financial reporting can provide only reasonable, not absolute, assurance with respect to the preparation and presentation of the consolidated financial statements and may not prevent or detect misstatements. Further, because of changes in conditions, effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting may vary over time. \n\nManagement conducted an evaluation of the effectiveness of the Company’s internal control over financial reporting as of June 30, 2012. This evaluation was based on the criteria set forth in the framework Internal Control—IntegratedFrameworkissued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission. Based on this evaluation, Management determined that the Company’s internal control over financial reporting was effective as of June 30, 2012. \n\nThe effectiveness of the Company’s internal control over financial reporting has been audited by Deloitte & Touche LLP, an independent registered public accounting firm, as stated in their report which is included herein. \n\nAugust 15, 2012 \n\nMark O. Eisele Vice President – Chief Financial Officer & Treasurer \n\n Daniel T. Brezovec Corporate Controller\n\nBenjamin J. Mondics President & Chief Operating Officer \n\nNeil A. Schrimsher Chief Executive Officer \n\n39 Applied Industrial Technologies, Inc. and Subsidiaries" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.28682812730144636, + "doc_id": "55f5fd301bc56f4f4b87edbb46943d9e3948953631c8ca26038ab01483ae7376", + "edit_distance": 0.34269662921348315, + "f1_score": 0.8600682593856657, + "meteor": 0.8723166430074915, + "precision": 0.7801857585139319, + "pred_md": "## Corporate Overview and Strategy\n\nSundance Energy Australia Limited (ASX: SEA) is an onshore oil and natural gas company focused on the exploration, development and production of large, repeatable resource plays in North America. The Company's oil and natural gas properties are located in premier U.S. oil and natural gas basins, and its current operational activities are focused in south Texas targeting the Eagle Ford formation (''Eagle Ford'') and north central Oklahoma targeting the Mississippian and Woodford formations (''Mississippian/Woodford'').\n\nThe Company utilises its U.S.-based management and technical team to appraise, develop, produce and grow its portfolio of assets. The Company's strategy focuses on generating cash flow from its existing production base, developing assets where it is the operator and has high working interests, exploring for additional resources within its existing basins and pursuing strategic merger and acquisition opportunities, which positions it to control the pace of its development and the allocation of capital resources.\n\n## Contents\n\n| Performance Summary .......................................................1 |\n|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|\n| Chairman's Letter................................................................2 |\n| Managing Director's Letter..................................................4 |\n| Financial Overview.............................................................6 |\n| Operations Overview..........................................................8 |\n| Eagle Ford.........................................................................10 |\n| Greater Anadarko .............................................................12 |\n| Directors' Report...............................................................15 |\n| Remuneration Report .......................................................28 |\n| Auditor's Independence Declaration.................................45 |\n| Corporate Governance......................................................46 |\n| Financial Information.......................................................54 |\n| Directors' Declaration .....................................................106 |\n| Auditor's Report..............................................................107 |\n| Additional Information...................................................109 |\n| Corporate Information....................................................111 |\n| Forward-Looking Statements .........................................111 |\n| Competent Persons Statement........................................111 |\n\n## Abbreviations & Definitions\n\n1P Reserves -proved reserves which have at least a 90% probability that the quantities actually recovered will equal or exceed the estimate\n\n2P Reserves -proved plus probable reserves which have at least a 50% probability that the quantities actually recovered will equal or exceed the estimate\n\n3P Reserves -proved plus probable plus possible reserves which have at least a 10% probability that the quantities actually recovered will equal or exceed the estimate\n\nEnterprise Value or EV -market capitalisation less cash plus debt\n\nPV10 -discounted cash flows of the Company's reserves using a 10% discount factor\n\nBbl -one barrel of oil\n\nBOE -a barrel of oil equivalent, using the ratio of six Mcf of natural gas to one Bbl of crude oil\n\nBOEPD -barrels of oil equivalent per day\n\nConstant Case -the reserve report case using first of month average pricing for the trailing 12 months held constant throughout the life of the reserves as prescribed by the US Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC)\n\nMBOE -a thousand barrels of oil equivalent MMBOE -a million barrels of oil equivalent MBbl -a thousand barrels of crude oil Mcf -one thousand cubic feet of natural gas MMcf -one million cubic feet of natural gas M -when used with $ equals millions\n\nNet Acres -gross acres multiplied by the Company's working interest\n\nNet Wells -gross wells multiplied by the Company's working interest\n\nPDP -proved developed producing reserves\n\nPUD -proved undeveloped reserves\n\nPV/I -net change in the proved PV10 of the constant case reserve report divided by development capital expenditures during the period under consideration less proceeds from divestitures\n\nROCE -return on capital employed defined as earnings before interest and taxes divided by assets minus current liabilities\n\nOne barrel of oil is the energy equivalent of six Mcf of natural gas.\n\nAll oil and gas quantity and revenue amounts presented in this report are net of royalties.\n\nAll currency amounts presented in this report are shown in US dollars except per share amounts which are presented in Australian dollars or unless otherwise noted by 'A$' , which represents Australian dollars.", + "recall": 0.9581749049429658, + "true_md": "## Corporate Overview and Strategy\n\n## Abbreviations & Definitions\n\nSundance Energy Australia Limited (ASX: SEA) is an onshore oil and natural gas company focused on the exploration, development and production of large, repeatable resource plays in North America. The Company’s oil and natural gas properties are located in premier U.S. oil and natural gas basins, and its current operational activities are focused in south Texas targeting the Eagle Ford formation (‘‘Eagle Ford’’) and north central Oklahoma targeting the Mississippian and Woodford formations (‘‘Mississippian/Woodford’’).\n\nThe Company utilises its U.S.-based management and technical team to appraise, develop, produce and grow its portfolio of assets. The Company’s strategy focuses on generating cash flow from its existing production base, developing assets where it is the operator and has high working interests, exploring for additional resources within its existing basins and pursuing strategic merger and acquisition opportunities, which positions it to control the pace of its development and the allocation of capital resources. \n\n1P Reserves — proved reserves which have at least a 90% probability that the quantities actually recovered will equal or exceed the estimate\n\n2P Reserves — proved plus probable reserves which have at least a 50% probability that the quantities actually recovered will equal or exceed the estimate\n\n3P Reserves — proved plus probable plus possible reserves which have at least a 10% probability that the quantities actually recovered will equal or exceed the estimate\n\nEnterprise Value or EV — market capitalisation less cash plus debt\n\nPV10 — discounted cash flows of the Company’s reserves using a 10% discount factor\n\nBbl — one barrel of oil\n\nBOE — a barrel of oil equivalent, using the ratio of six Mcf of natural gas to one Bbl of crude oil\n\nBOEPD — barrels of oil equivalent per day\n\nConstant Case — the reserve report case using first of month average pricing for the trailing 12 months held constant throughout the life of the reserves as prescribed by the US Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC)\n\nMBOE — a thousand barrels of oil equivalent\n\nMMBOE — a million barrels of oil equivalent\n\nMBbl — a thousand barrels of crude oil\n\nMcf — one thousand cubic feet of natural gas\n\nMMcf — one million cubic feet of natural gas\n\nM — when used with $ equals millions\n\nNet Acres — gross acres multiplied by the Company’s working interest \n\nNet Wells — gross wells multiplied by the Company’s working interest\n\nPDP — proved developed producing reserves\n\nPUD — proved undeveloped reserves\n\nPV/I — net change in the proved PV10 of the constant case reserve report divided by development capital expenditures during the period under consideration less proceeds from divestitures\n\nROCE — return on capital employed defined as earnings before interest and taxes divided by assets minus current liabilities\n\nOne barrel of oil is the energy equivalent of six Mcf of natural gas.\n\nAll oil and gas quantity and revenue amounts presented in this report are net of royalties.\n\nAll currency amounts presented in this report are shown in US dollars except per share amounts which are presented in Australian dollars or unless otherwise noted by “A$”, which represents Australian dollars.\n\n## Contents" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.803993879072144, + "doc_id": "36176facbbb52ae4c2a4d777dbdb9180183ebc75f54a71427e9d325e10f43d67", + "edit_distance": 0.6608391608391608, + "f1_score": 0.9954545454545455, + "meteor": 0.6694896890900341, + "precision": 0.9954545454545455, + "pred_md": "## Nordstrom, Inc.\n\n## Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nDollar and share amounts in millions except per share, per option and per unit amounts\n\nRent expense for 2014, 2013 and 2012 was as follows:\n\nThe rent expense above does not include common area charges, real estate taxes and other executory costs, which were $88 in 2014, $81 in 2013 and $74 in 2012.\n\n## NOTE 11: COMMITMENTS AND CONTINGENT LIABILITIES\n\nOur estimated total purchase obligations, capital expenditure contractual commitments and inventory purchase orders were $2,092 as of January 31, 2015. In connection with the purchase of foreign merchandise, we have outstanding trade letters of credit totaling $1 as of January 31, 2015.\n\nPlans for our Manhattan full-line store, which we currently expect to open in late 2018 to 2019, ultimately include owning a condominium interest in a mixed-use tower and leasing certain nearby properties. As of January 31, 2015, we had approximately $125 of fee interest in land, which is expected to convert to the condominium interest once the store is constructed. We have committed to make future installment payments based on the developer meeting pre-established construction and development milestones. Our fee interest in the land is currently and will continue to be subject to lien by project development lenders until project completion or fulfillment of our existing installment payment commitment. In the unlikely event that this project is not completed, the opening may be delayed and we may potentially be subject to future losses or capital commitments in order to complete construction or to monetize our previous investments in the land.\n\n## NOTE 12: SHAREHOLDERS' EQUITY\n\nIn February 2013, our Board of Directors authorized a program to repurchase up to $800 of our outstanding common stock, through March 1, 2015. In September 2014, our Board of Directors authorized a new program to repurchase up to $1,000 of our outstanding common stock through March 1, 2016, in addition to the remaining amount available for repurchase under the previously authorized program. The following is a summary of the activity related to our share repurchase programs in 2012, 2013 and 2014:\n\nThe actual number and timing of future share repurchases, if any, will be subject to market and economic conditions and applicable SEC rules.\n\nWe paid dividends of $1.32 per share in 2014, $1.20 per share in 2013 and $1.08 per share in 2012. In February 2015, we declared a quarterly dividend of $0.37 per share, increased from a quarterly dividend of $0.33 per share in 2014.\n\nNordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 55", + "recall": 0.9954545454545455, + "true_md": "## Nordstrom, Inc. Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n## Nordstrom, Inc. Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements Dollar and share amounts in millions except per share, per option and per unit amounts\n\n## NOTE 11: COMMITMENTS AND CONTINGENT LIABILITIES Our estimated total purchase obligations, capital expenditure contractual commitments and inventory purchase orders were $2,092 as of\n\n## NOTE 12: SHAREHOLDERS’ EQUITY In February 2013, our Board of Directors authorized a program to repurchase up to $800 of our outstanding common stock, through March 1,\n\nWe paid dividends of $1.32 per share in 2014, $1.20 per share in 2013 and $1.08 per share in 2012. In February 2015, we declared a quarterly dividend of $0.37 per share, increased from a quarterly dividend of $0.33 per share in 2014.\n\nThe actual number and timing of future share repurchases, if any, will be subject to market and economic conditions and applicable SEC rules.\n\nNOTE 12: SHAREHOLDERS’ EQUITY In February 2013, our Board of Directors authorized a program to repurchase up to $800 of our outstanding common stock, through March 1, 2015. In September 2014, our Board of Directors authorized a new program to repurchase up to $1,000 of our outstanding common stock through March 1, 2016, in addition to the remaining amount available for repurchase under the previously authorized program. The following is a summary of the activity related to our share repurchase programs in 2012, 2013 and 2014:\n\nPlans for our Manhattan full-line store, which we currently expect to open in late 2018 to 2019, ultimately include owning a condominium interest in a mixed-use tower and leasing certain nearby properties. As of January 31, 2015, we had approximately $125 of fee interest in land, which is expected to convert to the condominium interest once the store is constructed. We have committed to make future installment payments based on the developer meeting pre-established construction and development milestones. Our fee interest in the land is currently and will continue to be subject to lien by project development lenders until project completion or fulfillment of our existing installment payment commitment. In the unlikely event that this project is not completed, the opening may be delayed and we may potentially be subject to future losses or capital commitments in order to complete construction or to monetize our previous investments in the land. \n\nNOTE 11: COMMITMENTS AND CONTINGENT LIABILITIES Our estimated total purchase obligations, capital expenditure contractual commitments and inventory purchase orders were $2,092 as of January 31, 2015. In connection with the purchase of foreign merchandise, we have outstanding trade letters of credit totaling $1 as of January 31, 2015.\n\nThe rent expense above does not include common area charges, real estate taxes and other executory costs, which were $88 in 2014, $81 in 2013 and $74 in 2012.\n\nRent expense for 2014, 2013 and 2012 was as follows:\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements Dollar and share amounts in millions except per share, per option and per unit amounts\n\nNordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 55" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8623730340027268, + "doc_id": "646e80f9c4bae452a0d733e763ae787c3d91a0b6a64afe15de517dfb53afd4ef", + "edit_distance": 0.3062409288824383, + "f1_score": 0.8946564885496182, + "meteor": 0.7517328447559462, + "precision": 0.9361022364217252, + "pred_md": "## WHILE IT IS EARLY DAYS, I BELIEVE WE CAN EVOLVE THE BUSINESS IN A WAY THAT WILL BE EVEN MORE REWARDING FOR OUR CUSTOMERS, OUR SHAREHOLDERS AND EMPLOYEES.' '\n\nGUY LAURENCE\n\n## A MESSAGE FROM THE PRESIDENT & CEO\n\nAs I write these words after recently joining the company, I can say with genuine enthusiasm that it's great to be here at Rogers. I took this post because Rogers is a remarkable company with a rich history and an unrivalled mix of wireless, cable and media assets. It is a good match with my background and my experience.\n\nDuring the recruiting and onboarding process, I spent considerable time with the Rogers family, the Board of Directors and the leadership team. I am struck by their energy, passion and drive to win, which I think we can harness to do even greater things. I also value the support and longerterm focus of the founding Rogers family who own significant equity in the company.\n\nSince joining, I have criss-crossed Canada meeting my team, external stakeholders and customers. I have also conducted numerous business reviews, overseen the 700 MHz spectrum auction and reviewed the regulatory agenda. All this with the view to developing a detailed set of priorities and plans for the company going forward. After I complete this review in the Spring I will outline a detailed strategy and business plan working with my management team.\n\nRogers has many strengths and I intend to capitalize on them. This is a financially strong company with a solid balance sheet and investment grade credit ratings. We have highly advanced cable and wireless networks and a robust portfolio of media assets. We also have a strong pipeline of new products and services to offer to our customers and some of the most passionate, committed employees I have ever worked with.\n\nWhile it is early days, I believe we can evolve the business in a way that will be even more rewarding for our customers, our shareholders and employees. Our goal is clear - winning on a consistent basis. And while our industry faces the challenge of moderating growth and regulatory uncertainty, few industries are more dynamic and better at leveraging new technologies.\n\nTo win, we must put our customers' needs front and centre in everything we do. This means delivering a better and more consistent customer experience. It means strengthening our value proposition to make sure our customers can answer the question 'why Rogers?' As a company, we need to bring our collection of assets together in a way that strengthens and differentiates Rogers with our customers and our shareholders. We also need to align and focus our investments in key areas to accelerate our growth. Internally we need to execute with operational excellence. And we need to focus on clarifying accountabilities and strengthening our teams at all levels of the company.\n\nAs CEO, I will work to re-establish our leadership position and accelerate our growth. This will take time. It is a longterm effort that will require a clear strategy, rigorous prioritization and disciplined execution. It will not be easy, but it is the job I have signed up for, and it is a challenge I intend to meet head-on.\n\nI look forward to continuing Ted's legacy, and to leading Rogers through the next phase of growth and to serving you, our shareholders.\n\nThank you for your continued business, investment and support.\n\nGUY LAURENCE\n\nPRESIDENT AND CHIEF EXECUTIVE OFFICER ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC.\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 03", + "recall": 0.8567251461988304, + "true_md": "WH ILE IT IS EAR LY DAY S S, I I B E LIE VE W E CAN N EVOLVE T HE BUSINES S IN A W WA A Y T HAT W I LL B E EVEN MORE REWARDIN G FOR R O O U R C US TOM E RS , OUR SHAREH OLDERS AN D EM M P PL L OY EE S. ” “\n\nGUY LAURENCE\n\nDuring the recruiting and onboarding process, I spent considerable time with the Rogers family, the Board of Directors and the leadership team. I am struck by their energy, passion and drive to win, which I think we can harness to do even greater things. I also value the support and longer- term focus of the founding Rogers family who own significant equity in the company.\n\nSince joining, I have criss-crossed Canada meeting my team, external stakeholders and customers. I have also conducted numerous business reviews, overseen the 700 MHz spectrum auction and reviewed the regulatory agenda. All this with the view to developing a detailed set of priorities and plans for the company going forward. After I complete this review in the Spring I will outline a detailed strategy and business plan working with my management team.\n\nRogers has many strengths and I intend to capitalize on them. This is a financially strong company with a solid balance sheet and investment grade credit ratings. We have highly advanced cable and wireless networks and a robust portfolio of media assets. We also have a strong pipeline of new products and services to offer to our customers and some of the most passionate, committed employees I have ever worked with.\n\nWhile it is early days, I believe we can evolve the business in a way that will be even more rewarding for our customers, our shareholders and employees. Our goal is clear – winning on a consistent basis. And while our industry faces the challenge of moderating growth and regulatory uncertainty, few industries are more dynamic and better at leveraging new technologies. \n\nTo win, we must put our customers’ needs front and centre in everything we do. This means delivering a better and more consistent customer experience. It means strengthening our value proposition to make sure our customers can answer the question “why Rogers?” As a company, we need to bring our collection of assets together in a way that strengthens and differentiates Rogers with our customers and our shareholders. We also need to align and focus our investments in key areas to accelerate our growth. Internally we need to execute with operational excellence. And we need to focus on clarifying accountabilities and strengthening our teams at all levels of the company.\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 03\n\nGUY LAURENCE PRESIDENT AND CHIEF EXECUTIVE OFFICER ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC.\n\nAs CEO, I will work to re-establish our leadership position and accelerate our growth. This will take time. It is a long- term effort that will require a clear strategy, rigorous prioritization and disciplined execution. It will not be easy, but it is the job I have signed up for, and it is a challenge I intend to meet head-on.\n\nI look forward to continuing Ted’s legacy, and to leading Rogers through the next phase of growth and to serving you, our shareholders.\n\nThank you for your continued business, investment and support.\n\n## A MESSAGE FROM THE PRESIDENT & CEO\n\nAs I write these words after recently joining the company, I can say with genuine enthusiasm that it’s great to be here at Rogers. I took this post because Rogers is a remarkable company with a rich history and an unrivalled mix of wireless, cable and media assets. It is a good match with my background and my experience." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9391584478317844, + "doc_id": "4461f9efde5f47159b9a22ba1835e61574a1390315dfecbcaf346184d9617107", + "edit_distance": 0.4908616187989556, + "f1_score": 0.977893368010403, + "meteor": 0.9223593964334705, + "precision": 0.9817232375979112, + "pred_md": "It's been said on many di ff erent occasions that 'wherever people need to be protected, MSA will be there.' In 2011 that expression took on greater significance for MSA as another factor in our success was our ability to advance a second pillar of our strategy - Investing In and Growing In Emerging Markets.\n\nIndeed, we are earning business from more customers in more countries than ever before. In fact, in the pages that follow, you can read about some of our more recent successes in these key growth markets. They are all great stories, and they represent just the tip of the iceberg when it comes to broadening MSA's reach in these and other emerging markets around the globe.\n\n## A Sampling of 2011 Success\n\nOverall, I believe 2011 for MSA will be remembered as a year in which we strengthened our company and our brand, stayed true to our strategy, and established a new foundation for MSA that will serve us well in the years ahead. Indeed, 2011 was a year with many highlights for MSA, and I'd like to take the opportunity to share a few of them with you now.\n\n- t Gross margins in North America improved significantly over last year, due to such factors as improved sourcing and strategic pricing initiatives.\n- t ncome from our Asia Pacific Zone, which includes China, I Japan and Australia, grew by 400 percent in 2011.\n- t Our transformational reorganization e ff orts in Europe gained solid traction and showed positive results in a still challenging environment. Operating income in Western Europe increased 72 percent over 2010 levels. And in the Middle Eurasian countries, we achieved double-digit growth in three out of our five Core Product groups in 2011, with Fixed Gas and Flame Detection sales up 41 percent compared to 2010.\n\nCity of Pittsburgh Mayor Luke Ravenstahl, immediate right, visited MSA's Murrysville, Pa., facility with Pittsburgh Public Safety Director Mike Huss and Pittsburgh Firefighters Local No. 1 President Joe King, far right, in recognition of MSA's $2 million contract win for Self-Contained Breathing Apparatus (SCBA).\n\n- t A big part of our e ff ort in Europe involves expanding the number of distributors and channel partners who carry our products. We added 158 new channel partners in 2011, which is helping us to reach more customers in more industries.\n\nAs part of the company's emerging markets strategy, MSA's new o ffi ce in Moscow, shown at left, provides important access and entrée into one of the world's largest oil, gas and petrochemical markets.\n\n- t We planted a new MSA flag in Moscow and opened two other regional o ffi ces in Russia. We see this as an important strategic move for MSA as Russia is now the world's largest oil producer and the world's second largest natural gas producer. MSA is now better positioned to help ensure that the thousands of oil and gas workers in this region are working in an environment of optimum safety.\n- t The global fire service market, long a key business segment for MSA, has been weak in recent years due to strained municipal budgets in the U.S. and ongoing economic uncertainty and related austerity measures elsewhere around the world. However, that segment started to come back a bit in 2011. In particular, one key win in Latin America (highlighted on page 7) was a follow-up twoyear contract to supply 4,000 FireHawk® M7 Air Masks and related equipment to the Junta Nacional de Bomberos (JNB) of Chile. The JNB is an institution comprised of more than 37,000 volunteer firefighters and 307 fire departments throughout the country. We also had great competitive fire service wins in Halifax, Nova Scotia; Fresno, California; and with several other major departments in the U.S. But lastly, a particularly gratifying win for us was being selected as the Air Mask supplier for the Pittsburgh Bureau of Fire (PBF), located near our corporate headquarters, after a rigorous and thorough evaluation process.\n\nMSA 2011 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n3", + "recall": 0.9740932642487047, + "true_md": "It’s been said on many di ff erent occasions that “wherever people need to be protected, MSA will be there.” In 2011 that expression took on greater significance for MSA as another factor in our success was our ability to advance a second pillar of our strategy – Investing In and Growing In Emerging Markets. \n\nIndeed, we are earning business from more customers in more countries than ever before. In fact, in the pages that follow, you can read about some of our more recent successes in these key growth markets. They are all great stories, and they represent just the tip of the iceberg when it comes to broadening MSA’s reach in these and other emerging markets around the globe.\n\nOverall, I believe 2011 for MSA will be remembered as a year in which we strengthened our company and our brand, stayed true to our strategy, and established a new foundation for MSA that will serve us well in the years ahead. Indeed, 2011 was a year with many highlights for MSA, and I’d like to take the opportunity to share a few of them with you now.\n\n## A Sampling of 2011 Success\n\n- t Gross margins in North America improved significantly over last year, due to such factors as improved sourcing and strategic pricing initiatives.\n\n- t Income from our Asia Pacific Zone, which includes China, Japan and Australia, grew by 400 percent in 2011.\n\n- t Our transformational reorganization e ff orts in Europe gained solid traction and showed positive results in a still challenging environment. Operating income in Western Europe increased 72 percent over 2010 levels. And in the Middle Eurasian countries, we achieved double-digit growth in three out of our five Core Product groups in 2011, with Fixed Gas and Flame Detection sales up 41 percent compared to 2010.\n\n- t The global fire service market, long a key business segment for MSA, has been weak in recent years due to strained municipal budgets in the U.S. and ongoing economic uncertainty and related austerity measures elsewhere around the world. However, that segment started to come back a bit in 2011. In particular, one key win in Latin America (highlighted on page 7) was a follow-up two- year contract to supply 4,000 FireHawk® M7 Air Masks and related equipment to the Junta Nacional de Bomberos (JNB) of Chile. The JNB is an institution comprised of more than 37,000 volunteer firefighters and 307 fire departments throughout the country. We also had great competitive fire service wins in Halifax, Nova Scotia; Fresno, California; and with several other major departments in the U.S. But lastly, a particularly gratifying win for us was being selected as the Air Mask supplier for the Pittsburgh Bureau of Fire (PBF), located near our corporate headquarters, after a rigorous and thorough evaluation process.\n\n- t We planted a new MSA flag in Moscow and opened two other regional o ffi ces in Russia. We see this as an important strategic move for MSA as Russia is now the world’s largest oil producer and the world’s second largest natural gas producer. MSA is now better positioned to help ensure that the thousands of oil and gas workers in this region are working in an environment of optimum safety.\n\n- t A big part of our e ff ort in Europe involves expanding the number of distributors and channel partners who carry our products. We added 158 new channel partners in 2011, which is helping us to reach more customers in more industries.\n\nAs part of the company’s emerging markets strategy, MSA’s new o ffi ce in Moscow, shown at left, provides important access and entrée into one of the world’s largest oil, gas and petrochemical markets. \n\nCity of Pittsburgh Mayor Luke Ravenstahl, immediate right, visited MSA’s Murrysville, Pa., facility with Pittsburgh Public Safety Director Mike Huss and Pittsburgh Firefighters Local No. 1 President Joe King, far right, in recognition of MSA’s $2 million contract win for Self-Contained Breathing Apparatus (SCBA).\n\nMSA 2011 ANNUAL REPORT 3" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9602803141010411, + "doc_id": "8905cc679cc6fdd4dbaa867bb86bcffebfb0e041db9b4d598fe759c7f92c574c", + "edit_distance": 0.08465608465608465, + "f1_score": 0.9893333333333334, + "meteor": 0.9835634047237518, + "precision": 0.9893333333333333, + "pred_md": "MANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS\n\n## Key Achievements\n\n## Higher Operating Revenue and Adjusted Operating Profit\n\n- GLYPH<129> Consolidated operating revenue was 2 % higher this year compared to 2012, led by an increase in data revenue at Wireless, higher Internet revenue at Cable, higher Next Generation revenue at Business Solutions and higher subscriber revenue at Media. Revenue grew by 3 % in Cable, 7 % in Business Solutions and 5 % in Media, while revenue at Wireless remained unchanged as the increase in data revenue was offset by the decrease in voice revenue.\n- GLYPH<129> Consolidated adjusted operating profit rose 3 % this year to $4,993 million, with consolidated adjusted operating profit margins of 39.3 % , resulting from higher revenue, the realization of cost efficiencies and shifts in the mix of revenue from products and services sold.\n- GLYPH<129> Postpaid Wireless subscriber growth continued with net additions of 228,000 and lower churn of 1.24 % .\n- GLYPH<129> Cable high-speed Internet subscribers grew by 97,000 and cable telephony lines grew by 79,000, while television households decreased by 87,000 compared to 2012.\n\n## S trong Cash Flow\n\n- GLYPH<129> Pre-tax free cash flow, defined as adjusted operating profit less spending on property, plant and equipment, and interest on longterm debt (net of capitalized interest), increased by 1 % compared to 2012 to $2,044 million due to a 3 % increase in adjusted operating profit offset by higher spending on property, plant and equipment. After-tax cash flow decreased by 6 % from 2012 levels to $1,548 due to a 31 % increase in cash taxes.\n\n## S trong Balance S heet and Liquidity Position\n\n- GLYPH<129> Issued and fully hedged US$2.5 billion of ten and thirty year senior notes at some of the lowest coupon rates ever achieved for Rogers corporate debt, in two separate offerings comprising:\n- -US$500 million of 3.00 % senior notes due 2023 and US$500 million of 4.50 % senior notes due 2043\n- -US$850 million of 4.10 % senior notes due 2023 and US$650 million of 5.45 % senior notes due 2043\n- GLYPH<129> Our overall weighted average cost of debt was 5.50 % at December 31, 2013 compared to 6.10 % at December 31, 2012 and the weighted average term to maturity on our debt was 11.3 years, compared to 9.2 years at December 31, 2012.\n\n28\n\nROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n- GLYPH<129> Ended the year with $4.5 billion of available liquidity, comprised of $2.3 billion cash on hand, $2 billion available under our bank credit facility and $0.2 billion available under our $0.9 billion accounts receivable securitization program.\n- GLYPH<129> In May 2013, each of Fitch Ratings and Standard and Poor's Ratings Services upgraded RCI's senior unsecured debt to BBB+ (from BBB) with a stable outlook, while Moody's Investors Service's comparable rating is Baa1 with a stable outlook remained unchanged from last year.\n\n## G rowing Dividends\n\n- GLYPH<129> We increased our annualized dividend rate in February 2013 by 10 % to $1.74 per Class A Voting and Class B Non-Voting share and paid a quarterly dividend of $0.435 per share during 2013. We further increased our annualized dividend on February 12, 2014, by 5 % to $1.83.\n\n## New CEO\n\n- GLYPH<129> Guy Laurence joined Rogers in December 2013, as our new President and Chief Executive Officer, succeeding Nadir Mohamed who retired from Rogers. Mr. Laurence brings 30 years of global experience in the telecommunications and media industries.\n\n## S ignificant Developments\n\n- GLYPH<129> Exclusive 12-year licensing agreement to broadcast national NHL games, beginning with the 2014-2015 season was signed. The agreement grants Rogers the exclusive distribution rights of all national regular season and playoff games within Canada, in multiple languages, across all platforms. At the same time, we executed separate agreements to sublicence certain of these broadcasting rights to TVA Sports and CBC.\n- GLYPH<129> Strategic acquisitions of Score Media Inc. (theScore), Mountain Cablevision Ltd. (Mountain Cable), Blackiron Data ULC (Blackiron) and Pivot Data Centres were completed.\n- GLYPH<129> Rogers First Rewards, a new loyalty program allowing customers to earn points on their eligible purchases and redeem them online for a wide selection of Rogers products and services, was launched in the Greater Toronto Area, Ottawa, Kingston, Sudbury and other cities throughout Ontario. We also received regulatory approval to launch a Rogers credit card which augments this loyalty program and will accelerate the rate at which customers earn points.", + "recall": 0.9893333333333333, + "true_md": "MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS\n\n## Key Achievements\n\n## Higher Operating Revenue and Adjusted Operating Profit\n\n## New CEO\n\n## S trong Cash Flow\n\n## S trong Balance S heet and Liquidity Position\n\n## S ignificant Developments\n\n- GLYPH<129> Consolidated operating revenue was 2 % higher this year compared to 2012, led by an increase in data revenue at Wireless, higher Internet revenue at Cable, higher Next Generation revenue at Business Solutions and higher subscriber revenue at Media. Revenue grew by 3 % in Cable, 7 % in Business Solutions and 5 % in Media, while revenue at Wireless remained unchanged as the increase in data revenue was offset by the decrease in voice revenue.\n\n- GLYPH<129> Consolidated adjusted operating profit rose 3 % this year to $4,993 million, with consolidated adjusted operating profit margins of 39.3 % , resulting from higher revenue, the realization of cost efficiencies and shifts in the mix of revenue from products and services sold.\n\n- GLYPH<129> Postpaid Wireless subscriber growth continued with net additions of 228,000 and lower churn of 1.24 % .\n\n- GLYPH<129> Cable high-speed Internet subscribers grew by 97,000 and cable telephony lines grew by 79,000, while television households decreased by 87,000 compared to 2012.\n\n- GLYPH<129> Pre-tax free cash flow, defined as adjusted operating profit less spending on property, plant and equipment, and interest on long- term debt (net of capitalized interest), increased by 1 % compared to 2012 to $2,044 million due to a 3 % increase in adjusted operating profit offset by higher spending on property, plant and equipment. After-tax cash flow decreased by 6 % from 2012 levels to $1,548 due to a 31 % increase in cash taxes.\n\n- GLYPH<129> Issued and fully hedged US$2.5 billion of ten and thirty year senior notes at some of the lowest coupon rates ever achieved for Rogers corporate debt, in two separate offerings comprising:\n\n- – US$500 million of 3.00 % senior notes due 2023 and US$500 million of 4.50 % senior notes due 2043\n\n- – US$850 million of 4.10 % senior notes due 2023 and US$650 million of 5.45 % senior notes due 2043\n\n- GLYPH<129> Our overall weighted average cost of debt was 5.50 % at December 31, 2013 compared to 6.10 % at December 31, 2012 and the weighted average term to maturity on our debt was 11.3 years, compared to 9.2 years at December 31, 2012.\n\n- GLYPH<129> Ended the year with $4.5 billion of available liquidity, comprised of $2.3 billion cash on hand, $2 billion available under our bank credit facility and $0.2 billion available under our $0.9 billion accounts receivable securitization program.\n\n- GLYPH<129> In May 2013, each of Fitch Ratings and Standard and Poor’s Ratings Services upgraded RCI’s senior unsecured debt to BBB+ (from BBB) with a stable outlook, while Moody’s Investors Service’s comparable rating is Baa1 with a stable outlook remained unchanged from last year.\n\n## G rowing Dividends\n\n- GLYPH<129> We increased our annualized dividend rate in February 2013 by 10 % to $1.74 per Class A Voting and Class B Non-Voting share and paid a quarterly dividend of $0.435 per share during 2013. We further increased our annualized dividend on February 12, 2014, by 5 % to $1.83.\n\n- GLYPH<129> Guy Laurence joined Rogers in December 2013, as our new President and Chief Executive Officer, succeeding Nadir Mohamed who retired from Rogers. Mr. Laurence brings 30 years of global experience in the telecommunications and media industries.\n\n- GLYPH<129> Exclusive 12-year licensing agreement to broadcast national NHL games, beginning with the 2014-2015 season was signed. The agreement grants Rogers the exclusive distribution rights of all national regular season and playoff games within Canada, in multiple languages, across all platforms. At the same time, we executed separate agreements to sublicence certain of these broadcasting rights to TVA Sports and CBC.\n\n- GLYPH<129> Strategic acquisitions of Score Media Inc. (theScore), Mountain Cablevision Ltd. (Mountain Cable), Blackiron Data ULC (Blackiron) and Pivot Data Centres were completed.\n\n- GLYPH<129> Rogers First Rewards, a new loyalty program allowing customers to earn points on their eligible purchases and redeem them online for a wide selection of Rogers products and services, was launched in the Greater Toronto Area, Ottawa, Kingston, Sudbury and other cities throughout Ontario. We also received regulatory approval to launch a Rogers credit card which augments this loyalty program and will accelerate the rate at which customers earn points.\n\n28 ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9206732212861415, + "doc_id": "4276ba30326ac68317fa4bed2dde4fb2c17442b62555d5720edc6ce4438e06fe", + "edit_distance": 0.7747834456207893, + "f1_score": 0.9860228716645489, + "meteor": 0.5931231481016376, + "precision": 0.9872773536895675, + "pred_md": "## Item 7. Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations.\n\nDollar, share and square footage amounts in millions except percentages, per share and per square foot amounts\n\n## OVERVIEW\n\nNordstrom is a leading fashion specialty retailer offering apparel, shoes, cosmetics and accessories for women, men and children. We offer an extensive selection of high-quality brand-name and private label merchandise through our various channels: 'Nordstrom' branded full-line stores and online store at Nordstrom.com, Nordstrom Rack stores, Nordstromrack.com and HauteLook and other retail channels, including Trunk Club showrooms and TrunkClub.com, our Jeffrey boutiques and our clearance store that operates under the name 'Last Chance.' As of January 31, 2015, our stores are located in 38 states throughout the United States and in one province in Canada. In addition, we offer our customers a Nordstrom Rewards ™ loyalty program along with a variety of payment products and services, including credit and debit cards.\n\nWe continue to see the ongoing evolution of retail, with increasing customer interaction between our stores and ecommerce. We are making progress to meet customer expectations of a personalized experience that merges the richness of stores with the convenience of online. Because the customer views us simply as Nordstrom, we believe there is tremendous value in strengthening our platform for the customer experience that encompasses full-price, off-price, in-store and online. While each channel represents a substantial growth opportunity, there are significant synergies across channels to create a unique customer experience to gain market share.\n\nWe considered 2014 a watershed year in our company history, with our successful entry into Canada, continued expansion of our Nordstrom Rack business through store growth, the launch of Nordstromrack.com and the acquisition of Trunk Club. Our performance in 2014 reflected continued progress in executing our customer strategy through investments to drive growth across channels. We achieved total net sales growth of 7.8%, adding nearly $1 billion to our top-line and delivering record sales and earnings per diluted share. Our financial position remains strong and this marked the sixth consecutive year we generated over $1 billion in cash flow from operations.\n\nOur partnership with vendors and brands enhances our product offering. We offer Topshop merchandise at 53 full-line stores and online, with plans to reach over 80 stores in 2015. Our new partnership with Madewell in 2015, initially available at 15 of our stores and online, is another way to provide sought-after brands that appeal to new and existing customers.\n\nIn 2014, we opened our first full-line store in Canada in Calgary, Alberta, reflecting a multi-year effort from our team to address the unique challenges of crossing the border. With our store outperforming our expectations, we are encouraged with our customers' response in this market. We are looking forward to opening stores in 2015 in Ottawa, Ontario and Vancouver, British Columbia. In the U.S. we increased our presence with two full-line stores in The Woodlands, Texas and Jacksonville, Florida. In 2015, we plan to open three full-line stores in Puerto Rico, Minneapolis, Minnesota and Milwaukee, Wisconsin.\n\nAt Nordstrom Rack, we offer customers great brands at great prices, with 48 of the top 50 full-line brands represented. We opened 27 Nordstrom Rack stores in 2014, a record number of openings, contributing to Nordstrom Rack's total sales growth of 17%.\n\nOur online businesses continue to be our fastest-growing channels. In the spring of 2014, we expanded our capabilities through the launch of Nordstromrack.com, providing a seamless integration with HauteLook. We more than doubled our merchandise selection, which accelerated growth in this channel in the second half of 2014. Demonstrating synergies across our businesses, we enabled customers to return purchases from HauteLook and Nordstromrack.com to any of our Nordstrom Rack stores, which drove nearly one million incremental trips to Nordstrom Rack stores.\n\nNordstrom.com finished its fifth consecutive year of approximately 20% or more comparable sales growth, with a key driver being increased merchandise selection. In 2015, we plan to open our third fulfillment center, located in Pennsylvania, which will enhance the customer experience through faster delivery. Furthermore, we have extended our full-price offering with our acquisition of Trunk Club, a high-growth business offering a new approach to personalized service.\n\nOur credit business, through our Nordstrom Rewards program, continues to play an important role in attracting new customers and deepening our engagement with existing customers. The program contributes to our overall results, with members shopping more frequently and spending more on average than non-members. For the third consecutive year, we opened over one million new accounts. With over four million active members, 2014 sales from members represented approximately 40% of our sales.\n\nWe are confident in our ability to execute our customer strategy as we evolve with customers and continue to leverage capabilities across all channels to serve customers on their terms. To enhance the customer experience, we continue to make investments in our stores in new markets such as Canada, Puerto Rico and Manhattan, in our ecommerce and fulfillment capabilities and in technology to support growth across all channels. We believe these investments in our customer strategy will help us achieve long-term top-quartile shareholder returns through high single-digit total sales growth and mid-teens Return on Invested Capital.\n\n16", + "recall": 0.9847715736040609, + "true_md": "16\n\n## Item 7. Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations. Dollar, share and square footage amounts in millions except percentages, per share and per square foot amounts\n\n## OVERVIEW Nordstrom is a leading fashion specialty retailer offering apparel, shoes, cosmetics and accessories for women, men and children. We offer\n\nWe are confident in our ability to execute our customer strategy as we evolve with customers and continue to leverage capabilities across all channels to serve customers on their terms. To enhance the customer experience, we continue to make investments in our stores in new markets such as Canada, Puerto Rico and Manhattan, in our ecommerce and fulfillment capabilities and in technology to support growth across all channels. We believe these investments in our customer strategy will help us achieve long-term top-quartile shareholder returns through high single-digit total sales growth and mid-teens Return on Invested Capital.\n\nOur credit business, through our Nordstrom Rewards program, continues to play an important role in attracting new customers and deepening our engagement with existing customers. The program contributes to our overall results, with members shopping more frequently and spending more on average than non-members. For the third consecutive year, we opened over one million new accounts. With over four million active members, 2014 sales from members represented approximately 40% of our sales.\n\nNordstrom.com finished its fifth consecutive year of approximately 20% or more comparable sales growth, with a key driver being increased merchandise selection. In 2015, we plan to open our third fulfillment center, located in Pennsylvania, which will enhance the customer experience through faster delivery. Furthermore, we have extended our full-price offering with our acquisition of Trunk Club, a high-growth business offering a new approach to personalized service. \n\nOur online businesses continue to be our fastest-growing channels. In the spring of 2014, we expanded our capabilities through the launch of Nordstromrack.com, providing a seamless integration with HauteLook. We more than doubled our merchandise selection, which accelerated growth in this channel in the second half of 2014. Demonstrating synergies across our businesses, we enabled customers to return purchases from HauteLook and Nordstromrack.com to any of our Nordstrom Rack stores, which drove nearly one million incremental trips to Nordstrom Rack stores. \n\nAt Nordstrom Rack, we offer customers great brands at great prices, with 48 of the top 50 full-line brands represented. We opened 27 Nordstrom Rack stores in 2014, a record number of openings, contributing to Nordstrom Rack’s total sales growth of 17%. \n\nIn 2014, we opened our first full-line store in Canada in Calgary, Alberta, reflecting a multi-year effort from our team to address the unique challenges of crossing the border. With our store outperforming our expectations, we are encouraged with our customers’ response in this market. We are looking forward to opening stores in 2015 in Ottawa, Ontario and Vancouver, British Columbia. In the U.S. we increased our presence with two full-line stores in The Woodlands, Texas and Jacksonville, Florida. In 2015, we plan to open three full-line stores in Puerto Rico, Minneapolis, Minnesota and Milwaukee, Wisconsin.\n\nOur partnership with vendors and brands enhances our product offering. We offer Topshop merchandise at 53 full-line stores and online, with plans to reach over 80 stores in 2015. Our new partnership with Madewell in 2015, initially available at 15 of our stores and online, is another way to provide sought-after brands that appeal to new and existing customers.\n\nWe considered 2014 a watershed year in our company history, with our successful entry into Canada, continued expansion of our Nordstrom Rack business through store growth, the launch of Nordstromrack.com and the acquisition of Trunk Club. Our performance in 2014 reflected continued progress in executing our customer strategy through investments to drive growth across channels. We achieved total net sales growth of 7.8%, adding nearly $1 billion to our top-line and delivering record sales and earnings per diluted share. Our financial position remains strong and this marked the sixth consecutive year we generated over $1 billion in cash flow from operations. \n\nWe continue to see the ongoing evolution of retail, with increasing customer interaction between our stores and ecommerce. We are making progress to meet customer expectations of a personalized experience that merges the richness of stores with the convenience of online. Because the customer views us simply as Nordstrom, we believe there is tremendous value in strengthening our platform for the customer experience that encompasses full-price, off-price, in-store and online. While each channel represents a substantial growth opportunity, there are significant synergies across channels to create a unique customer experience to gain market share. \n\nOVERVIEW Nordstrom is a leading fashion specialty retailer offering apparel, shoes, cosmetics and accessories for women, men and children. We offer an extensive selection of high-quality brand-name and private label merchandise through our various channels: “Nordstrom” branded full-line stores and online store at Nordstrom.com, Nordstrom Rack stores, Nordstromrack.com and HauteLook and other retail channels, including Trunk Club showrooms and TrunkClub.com, our Jeffrey boutiques and our clearance store that operates under the name “Last Chance.” As of January 31, 2015, our stores are located in 38 states throughout the United States and in one province in Canada. In addition, we offer our customers a Nordstrom Rewards ™ loyalty program along with a variety of payment products and services, including credit and debit cards.\n\nItem 7. Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations. Dollar, share and square footage amounts in millions except percentages, per share and per square foot amounts" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8948237610565983, + "doc_id": "d05d5bf4207513e113603132bd231a5d6ec7b253dee6adf9000bbd6b6a6c0ae6", + "edit_distance": 0.18829516539440203, + "f1_score": 0.9856733524355301, + "meteor": 0.9119811866760325, + "precision": 0.9885057471264368, + "pred_md": "## Management's Discussion and Analysis\n\nDollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\n## Depreciation Expense\n\nFor the years ended December 31,\n\nDepreciation expense relates to the Company's head office building, vehicles, heavy equipment and administrative office furniture, fixtures and computer equipment. Although the vehicles and equipment are used at various properties, they are not considered part of investment properties and are depreciated for accounting purposes. The increase year-over-year was a result of depreciation of additional vehicles, computer software and leasehold improvements.\n\n## Amortization of Deferred Financing Costs\n\nFor the years ended December 31,\n\nDeferred financing amortization increased 2.4% as a result of refinancings and new debt placements on acquired properties and completed developments. This was partially offset by the sale of the MHCs portfolios in May 2012 and November 2013 and their related deferred financing costs.\n\nDeferred financing costs include mortgage assumption fees, application fees and legal costs related to obtaining financing, and these costs are amortized over the term of the respective mortgage. CMHC insurance fees are amortized over the amortization period of the mortgage. The costs associated with the convertible debentures are amortized over the terms of the debentures.\n\n## Administration Expenses\n\nFor the years ended December 31,\n\nAdministration expenses include expenses which are not specific to an individual property. These expenses include TSX related costs, management and head office salaries and benefits, marketing costs, office equipment leases, professional fees and other head office and regional office expenses.\n\nAdministrative expenses as a percentage of revenues were lower in 2013 due to increased capitalized overhead as a result of the increased capital spending on the developments and the remaining portfolio, a decrease in consulting and professional fees, lower incentive payments and a reduction in salary related costs year-over-year. Theses savings were offset by an increase in marketing costs which aided in Killam's success in reducing vacancy in most regions.\n\nManagement targets annualized administrative costs at approximately 6.0% of total revenues.\n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013\n\n43", + "recall": 0.9828571428571429, + "true_md": "## Management’s Discussion and Analysis Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\nManagement’s Discussion and Analysis Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\nDepreciation expense relates to the Company’s head office building, vehicles, heavy equipment and administrative office furniture, fixtures and computer equipment. Although the vehicles and equipment are used at various properties, they are not considered part of investment properties and are depreciated for accounting purposes. The increase year‑over‑year was a result of depreciation of additional vehicles, computer software and leasehold improvements.\n\nFor the years ended December 31,\n\nDeferred financing amortization increased 2.4% as a result of refinancings and new debt placements on acquired properties and completed developments. This was partially offset by the sale of the MHCs portfolios in May 2012 and November 2013 and their related deferred financing costs.\n\nDeferred financing costs include mortgage assumption fees, application fees and legal costs related to obtaining financing, and these costs are amortized over the term of the respective mortgage. CMHC insurance fees are amortized over the amortization period of the mortgage. The costs associated with the convertible debentures are amortized over the terms of the debentures.\n\nAdministration expenses include expenses which are not specific to an individual property. These expenses include TSX related costs, management and head office salaries and benefits, marketing costs, office equipment leases, professional fees and other head office and regional office expenses.\n\nAdministrative expenses as a percentage of revenues were lower in 2013 due to increased capitalized overhead as a result of the increased capital spending on the developments and the remaining portfolio, a decrease in consulting and professional fees, lower incentive payments and a reduction in salary related costs year‑over‑year. Theses savings were offset by an increase in marketing costs which aided in Killam’s success in reducing vacancy in most regions.\n\nManagement targets annualized administrative costs at approximately 6.0% of total revenues.\n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013 43\n\nFor the years ended December 31,\n\n## Administration Expenses\n\n## Depreciation Expense\n\nFor the years ended December 31,\n\n## Amortization of Deferred Financing Costs" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6864974153912888, + "doc_id": "b7cefcb25871686057e7da9b4f5265959d99ccb45e162d180611f6ea234ed988", + "edit_distance": 0.3363309352517986, + "f1_score": 0.9965870307167236, + "meteor": 0.6549576576806602, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Credit Card Revenues\n\nThe following is a summary of our Credit card revenues:\n\nCredit card revenues include finance charges, interchange fees, late fees and other revenue. Finance charges represent interest earned on unpaid balances while interchange fees are earned from the use of Nordstrom Visa credit cards at merchants outside of Nordstrom. Late fees are assessed when a credit card account becomes past due. We consider an account delinquent if the minimum payment is not received by the payment due date. Credit card revenues are recorded net of estimated uncollectible finance charges and fees.\n\n## Credit Card Revenues (2014 vs. 2013)\n\nCredit card revenues increased $22 in 2014 compared with 2013 primarily due to an increase in the average accounts receivable balance, slightly decreased payment rates and a 6.5% increase in total volume during 2014.\n\n## Credit Card Revenues (2013 vs. 2012)\n\nCredit card revenues were flat in 2013 compared with 2012. This was due to growth in total volume that was offset by continued improvement in cardholder payment rates.\n\n## Credit Expenses\n\nCredit expenses are summarized in the following table:\n\n## Credit Expenses (2014 vs. 2013)\n\nTotal Credit expenses increased $8 in 2014 compared with 2013, due to higher operational expenses resulting from increased volume in 2014 and lower operational expenses in 2013 resulting from the conversion of our Nordstrom Rewards travel benefits into Nordstrom Notes during that year. The increase in operational expenses was partially offset by a reduction in bad debt expense, which resulted in a reduction of our allowance for credit losses by $5 and recoveries from the sale of bad debt during 2014. We experienced continued improvement in our portfolio delinquencies and write-off results during 2014, which are further discussed below.\n\n## Credit Expenses (2013 vs. 2012)\n\nTotal Credit expenses decreased $4 in 2013 compared with 2012, due to lower operational and marketing expenses resulting primarily from the conversion of our Nordstrom Rewards travel benefit into Nordstrom Notes during 2013. Bad debt expense was lower in 2012 due to the $30 reduction of our allowance for credit losses in 2012 compared with a $5 reduction in 2013. We experienced continued improvement in our portfolio delinquencies and write-off results during 2013.\n\n22", + "recall": 0.9931972789115646, + "true_md": "## Credit Card Revenues The following is a summary of our Credit card revenues:\n\nCredit Card Revenues The following is a summary of our Credit card revenues:\n\nCredit card revenues include finance charges, interchange fees, late fees and other revenue. Finance charges represent interest earned on unpaid balances while interchange fees are earned from the use of Nordstrom Visa credit cards at merchants outside of Nordstrom. Late fees are assessed when a credit card account becomes past due. We consider an account delinquent if the minimum payment is not received by the payment due date. Credit card revenues are recorded net of estimated uncollectible finance charges and fees. \n\nCredit Card Revenues (2014 vs. 2013) Credit card revenues increased $22 in 2014 compared with 2013 primarily due to an increase in the average accounts receivable balance, slightly decreased payment rates and a 6.5% increase in total volume during 2014.\n\nCredit Expenses Credit expenses are summarized in the following table:\n\nCredit Card Revenues (2013 vs. 2012) Credit card revenues were flat in 2013 compared with 2012. This was due to growth in total volume that was offset by continued improvement in cardholder payment rates. \n\nCredit Expenses (2014 vs. 2013) Total Credit expenses increased $8 in 2014 compared with 2013, due to higher operational expenses resulting from increased volume in 2014 and lower operational expenses in 2013 resulting from the conversion of our Nordstrom Rewards travel benefits into Nordstrom Notes during that year. The increase in operational expenses was partially offset by a reduction in bad debt expense, which resulted in a reduction of our allowance for credit losses by $5 and recoveries from the sale of bad debt during 2014. We experienced continued improvement in our portfolio delinquencies and write-off results during 2014, which are further discussed below. \n\nCredit Expenses (2013 vs. 2012) Total Credit expenses decreased $4 in 2013 compared with 2012, due to lower operational and marketing expenses resulting primarily from the conversion of our Nordstrom Rewards travel benefit into Nordstrom Notes during 2013. Bad debt expense was lower in 2012 due to the $30 reduction of our allowance for credit losses in 2012 compared with a $5 reduction in 2013. We experienced continued improvement in our portfolio delinquencies and write-off results during 2013.\n\n## Credit Expenses (2013 vs. 2012) Total Credit expenses decreased $4 in 2013 compared with 2012, due to lower operational and marketing expenses resulting primarily from\n\n## Credit Expenses (2014 vs. 2013) Total Credit expenses increased $8 in 2014 compared with 2013, due to higher operational expenses resulting from increased volume in\n\n## Credit Card Revenues (2013 vs. 2012) Credit card revenues were flat in 2013 compared with 2012. This was due to growth in total volume that was offset by continued\n\n## Credit Expenses Credit expenses are summarized in the following table:\n\n## Credit Card Revenues (2014 vs. 2013) Credit card revenues increased $22 in 2014 compared with 2013 primarily due to an increase in the average accounts receivable balance,\n\n22" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8355310075200872, + "doc_id": "f5e310c29be1293bee853dc78b2777f8a670e221f34ddb87f5cd5f0d86171b6b", + "edit_distance": 0.2577639751552795, + "f1_score": 0.9260450160771704, + "meteor": 0.876201988059371, + "precision": 0.9290322580645162, + "pred_md": "## 34. Segment Information\n\nFiscal years ended March 31, 2011 and 2010\n\n## 1. Outline of reportable segments\n\nMFG Group's reportable segment is defined as an operating segment for which discrete financial information is available and reviewed by S the Board of Directors regularly in order to make decisions about resources to be allocated to the segment and assess its performance.\n\nBesides banking business, SMFG Group companies conduct businesses such as securities, leasing, credit card, invest banking, consumer finance, and venture capital. The primary businesses, 'Banking business,' 'Securities services,' 'Leasing,' and 'Credit card services,' are separate, reportable segments, and other businesses are aggregated as 'Other business.'\n\n'Banking business' includes deposit taking, lending, securities trading, securities investment, domestic and foreign exchange transactions, brokerage, etc. of financial futures transactions, etc., corporate bond trust services, trust business, sale of securities investment trusts, sale of insurance products, and securities intermediary services. SMBC assesses business performance by classifying businesses into 5 business units based on client segment: Consumer banking unit, Middle market banking unit, Corporate banking unit, International banking unit and Treasury unit.\n\n2. Method of calculating profit and loss amount by reportable segment Accounting method applied to the reported business segment is the same as described in 'Significant Accounting Policies.' However, profit or\n\nloss of the equity method affiliates is recorded in 'Other profit or loss' in the amount of ordinary profit multiplied by the ownership ratio.\n\nSMFG does not assess assets by business segment.\n\n- 3. Information on profit and loss amount by reportable segment\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nSMFG 2011\n\nSMFG\n\n125", + "recall": 0.9230769230769231, + "true_md": "SMFG\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n## 34. Segment Information\n\nSMFG 2011 125\n\nFiscal years ended March 31, 2011 and 2010\n\n SMFG Group’s reportable segment is defined as an operating segment for which discrete financial information is available and reviewed by the Board of Directors regularly in order to make decisions about resources to be allocated to the segment and assess its performance.\n\nBesides banking business, SMFG Group companies conduct businesses such as securities, leasing, credit card, invest banking, consumer finance, and venture capital. The primary businesses, “Banking business,” “Securities services,” “Leasing,” and “Credit card services,” are separate, reportable segments, and other businesses are aggregated as “Other business.”\n\n“Banking business” includes deposit taking, lending, securities trading, securities investment, domestic and foreign exchange transactions, brokerage, etc. of financial futures transactions, etc., corporate bond trust services, trust business, sale of securities investment trusts, sale of insurance products, and securities intermediary services. SMBC assesses business performance by classifying businesses into 5 business units based on client segment: Consumer banking unit, Middle market banking unit, Corporate banking unit, International banking unit and Treasury unit.\n\nAccounting method applied to the reported business segment is the same as described in “Significant Accounting Policies.” However, profit or loss of the equity method affiliates is recorded in “Other profit or loss” in the amount of ordinary profit multiplied by the ownership ratio.\n\nSMFG does not assess assets by business segment.\n\n- 1. Outline of reportable segments\n\n- 2. Method of calculating profit and loss amount by reportable segment\n\n- 3. Information on profit and loss amount by reportable segment" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9702989919467504, + "doc_id": "08cb5696a8c40ef56e5a1de079d458c34cb23f9e4ee8bf21ab7e0346d6e594cf", + "edit_distance": 0.8873483535528596, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.7383013854037184, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Other Claims\n\nThere are certain other claims and potential claims against us. We do not expect any of these to have materially adverse effect on our consolidated financial position.\n\nThe outcome of all the proceedings and claims against us, including the matters described above, is subject to future resolution that includes the uncertainties of litigation. Based on information currently known to us, we believe that it is not probable that the ultimate resolution of any of these proceedings and claims, individually or in total, will have a material adverse effect on our consolidated financial position or results of operations. If it becomes probable that we are liable, we will record a provision in the period the change in probability occurs, and it could be material to our consolidated financial position and results of operations.\n\n## NOTE 28: SUBSEQUENT EVENTS\n\nThe following events occurred after the year ended December 31, 2013:\n\n## Increase in Annual Dividend Rate and Declaration of Dividends\n\nIn February 2014, the Board approved an increase of 5% in the annualized dividend rate, to $1.83 per Class A Voting share and Class B Non-Voting share, effective immediately to be paid in quarterly amounts of $0.4575. The Board last increased the annualized dividend rate in February 2013, from $1.58 to $1.74 per Class A Voting and Class B Non-Voting share. Dividends are payable when declared by the Board.\n\nIn February 2014, the Board declared a quarterly dividend of $0.4575 per Class A Voting share and Class B Non-Voting share, to be paid on April 4, 2014, to shareholders of record on March 14, 2014. This is the first quarterly dividend in 2014 and reflects the new dividend rate.\n\n## Cash Tender Offers\n\nOn January 29, 2014, we announced that one of our wholly-owned subsidiaries commenced cash tender offers for any and all of our US $750 million 6.375% senior notes due 2014 and our US $350 million 5.500% senior notes due 2014. The tender offer consideration will be US $1,000 for each $1,000 principal amount of notes (plus accrued and unpaid interest to, but not including, the settlement date) and a consent payment equal to US $2.50 per US $1,000 principal amount of notes.\n\n## Normal Course Issuer Bid\n\nIn February 2014, we filed a notice with the TSX of our intention to renew our normal course issuer bid for our Class B Non-Voting shares for another year. Subject to acceptance by the TSX, this notice gives us the right to buy up to an aggregate $500 million or 35,780,234 Class B Non-Voting shares of RCI, whichever is less, on the TSX, NYSE and/or alternate trading systems any time between February 25, 2014 and February 24, 2015. The number of Class B Non-Voting shares we actually buy under the normal course issuer bid, if any, and when we buy them, will depend on our evaluation of market conditions, stock prices, our cash position, alternative uses of cash and other factors.\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC.\n\n125\n\nNOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 125\n\n## Other Claims\n\n## NOTE 28: SUBSEQUENT EVENTS\n\n## Increase in Annual Dividend Rate and Declaration of Dividends\n\n## Cash Tender Offers\n\n## Normal Course Issuer Bid\n\nIn February 2014, we filed a notice with the TSX of our intention to renew our normal course issuer bid for our Class B Non-Voting shares for another year. Subject to acceptance by the TSX, this notice gives us the right to buy up to an aggregate $500 million or 35,780,234 Class B Non-Voting shares of RCI, whichever is less, on the TSX, NYSE and/or alternate trading systems any time between February 25, 2014 and February 24, 2015. The number of Class B Non-Voting shares we actually buy under the normal course issuer bid, if any, and when we buy them, will depend on our evaluation of market conditions, stock prices, our cash position, alternative uses of cash and other factors.\n\nOn January 29, 2014, we announced that one of our wholly-owned subsidiaries commenced cash tender offers for any and all of our US $750 million 6.375% senior notes due 2014 and our US $350 million 5.500% senior notes due 2014. The tender offer consideration will be US $1,000 for each $1,000 principal amount of notes (plus accrued and unpaid interest to, but not including, the settlement date) and a consent payment equal to US $2.50 per US $1,000 principal amount of notes.\n\nIn February 2014, the Board declared a quarterly dividend of $0.4575 per Class A Voting share and Class B Non-Voting share, to be paid on April 4, 2014, to shareholders of record on March 14, 2014. This is the first quarterly dividend in 2014 and reflects the new dividend rate.\n\nIn February 2014, the Board approved an increase of 5% in the annualized dividend rate, to $1.83 per Class A Voting share and Class B Non-Voting share, effective immediately to be paid in quarterly amounts of $0.4575. The Board last increased the annualized dividend rate in February 2013, from $1.58 to $1.74 per Class A Voting and Class B Non-Voting share. Dividends are payable when declared by the Board.\n\nThe following events occurred after the year ended December 31, 2013:\n\nThe outcome of all the proceedings and claims against us, including the matters described above, is subject to future resolution that includes the uncertainties of litigation. Based on information currently known to us, we believe that it is not probable that the ultimate resolution of any of these proceedings and claims, individually or in total, will have a material adverse effect on our consolidated financial position or results of operations. If it becomes probable that we are liable, we will record a provision in the period the change in probability occurs, and it could be material to our consolidated financial position and results of operations.\n\nThere are certain other claims and potential claims against us. We do not expect any of these to have materially adverse effect on our consolidated financial position." + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "db83936cba18c7f2ea111d2e422d19bb21f55c8668689fba90e16213e5cdca2a", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999908878845313, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "2010 ANNUAL REPORT |\n\n23\n\nEmployees lend a helping hand at Rebuilding Together in Oklahoma City as part of Operation Blue. This annual volunteer initiative provides employees company time to work on projects in their communities.", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "2010 ANNUAL REPORT | 23\n\nEmployees lend a helping hand at Rebuilding Together in Oklahoma City as part of Operation Blue. This annual volunteer initiative provides employees company time to work on projects in their communities." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.822426664406519, + "doc_id": "9c2298000542dfc21dbf2197f329730a8c0a3b479e64a9b4035a094cb94a1d47", + "edit_distance": 0.164804469273743, + "f1_score": 0.9714285714285713, + "meteor": 0.7841109884143798, + "precision": 0.9807692307692307, + "pred_md": "## PART II\n\n## Item 5. Market for Registrant's Common Equity, Related Shareholder Matters and Issuer Purchases of Equity Securities.\n\n## MARKET, SHAREHOLDER AND DIVIDEND INFORMATION\n\nOur common stock, without par value, is traded on the New York Stock Exchange under the symbol 'JWN.' The approximate number of holders of common stock as of March 2, 2015 was 237,000 based upon the number of registered and beneficial shareholders and the number of employee shareholders in the Nordstrom 401(k) Plan and Profit Sharing Plan. On this date we had 190,405,729 shares of common stock outstanding.\n\nThe high and low prices of our common stock and dividends declared for each quarter of 2014 and 2013 are presented in the table below:\n\n## SHARE REPURCHASES\n\nDollar and share amounts in millions, except per share amounts\n\nThe following is a summary of our fourth quarter share repurchases:\n\n1 In February 2013, our Board of Directors authorized a program to repurchase up to $800 of our outstanding common stock, through March 1, 2015. In September 2014, our Board of Directors authorized a new program to repurchase up to $1,000 of our outstanding common stock, through March 1, 2016, in addition to the remaining amount available for repurchase under the previously authorized program. During 2014, we repurchased 8.9 shares of our common stock for an aggregate purchase price of $595 and had $1,075 remaining in share repurchase capacity as of January 31, 2015. The actual number and timing of future share repurchases, if any, will be subject to market and economic conditions and applicable SEC rules.\n\nNordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 13", + "recall": 0.9622641509433962, + "true_md": "## PART II\n\n## Item 5. Market for Registrant’s Common Equity, Related Shareholder Matters and Issuer Purchases of Equity Securities.\n\n## SHARE REPURCHASES Dollar and share amounts in millions, except per share amounts\n\nMARKET, SHAREHOLDER AND DIVIDEND INFORMATION Our common stock, without par value, is traded on the New York Stock Exchange under the symbol “JWN.” The approximate number of holders of common stock as of March 2, 2015 was 237,000 based upon the number of registered and beneficial shareholders and the number of employee shareholders in the Nordstrom 401(k) Plan and Profit Sharing Plan. On this date we had 190,405,729 shares of common stock outstanding.\n\nThe high and low prices of our common stock and dividends declared for each quarter of 2014 and 2013 are presented in the table below:\n\nSHARE REPURCHASES Dollar and share amounts in millions, except per share amounts\n\nThe following is a summary of our fourth quarter share repurchases:\n\n1 In February 2013, our Board of Directors authorized a program to repurchase up to $800 of our outstanding common stock, through March 1, 2015. In September 2014, our Board of Directors authorized a new program to repurchase up to $1,000 of our outstanding common stock, through March 1, 2016, in addition to the remaining amount available for repurchase under the previously authorized program. During 2014, we repurchased 8.9 shares of our common stock for an aggregate purchase price of $595 and had $1,075 remaining in share repurchase capacity as of January 31, 2015. The actual number and timing of future share repurchases, if any, will be subject to market and economic conditions and applicable SEC rules.\n\n## MARKET, SHAREHOLDER AND DIVIDEND INFORMATION Our common stock, without par value, is traded on the New York Stock Exchange under the symbol “JWN.” The approximate number of\n\n## Common Stock Price\n\nNordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 13" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9588185089507728, + "doc_id": "c946ea4f354e39653c501d5c01340e5251d3e7b70d836d9b6b2956db958bd334", + "edit_distance": 0.01639344262295082, + "f1_score": 0.989010989010989, + "meteor": 0.998317618783509, + "precision": 0.9782608695652174, + "pred_md": "## ◆ Nonconsolidated\n\nNotes: 1. All SMFG employees are on secondment assignment from SMBC, etc.\n\n2. SMFG implemented a 100-for-1 stock split of common stock on January 4, 2009. If the stock split had been implemented in the prior years, per share information would be as follows:\n\nYen\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n20", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## ◆ Nonconsolidated\n\nNotes: 1. All SMFG employees are on secondment assignment from SMBC, etc.\n\n2. SMFG implemented a 100-for-1 stock split of common stock on January 4, 2009. If the stock split had been implemented in the prior years, per share information would be as follows:\n\nSMFG 2011 20" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8871410095908102, + "doc_id": "91ea12583ccbe96b9822540277bc8c52654d979d7a0d9b2b1214560d3c1d9f35", + "edit_distance": 0.7115384615384616, + "f1_score": 0.9272151898734177, + "meteor": 0.7555723053142961, + "precision": 0.9451612903225807, + "pred_md": "growing Chinese market will further accelerate in the foreseeable future.\n\nIn order to more effectively meet the needs of such clients whose business straddles the Japanese and Chinese markets, in fiscal 2010, SMBC transferred its business responsibilities for the planning, promotion, and management of transactions between its Chinese subsidiary of Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporations (China) Limited and Japanese corporate clients from the International Banking Unit to the Corporate Banking Unit. The same was done for the Hong Kong and Taipei branches in fiscal 2011.\n\nThe Shenzhen Branch of Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation (China) Limited began its business operations on May 20, 2011. Under the Group network, including branches in Hong Kong and Guangzhou, we are strengthening our support for our clients' businesses in southern China.\n\nIn banking operations, we established a 'Fund for Supporting Companies Expanding their Business Operations in China' in cooperation with Chinese companies in fiscal 2010. The fund provides for equity and other types of investments for Japanese companies expanding their businesses into China. We also support such Japanese companies in Japan and China by providing them with necessary assistance and support for the globalization of their businesses. We continue to comprehensively provide our customized services to our clients by supporting their head offices in Japan and business operations in China.\n\n## Enhanced Initiatives for the Public and Financial Sectors\n\nAs our Japanese economy continuously evolves, the responsibilities of local government and financial institutions are becoming more sophisticated and diversified. We believe that an extensive international network, and accurate and timely collection of information are necessary for supporting regional industrial promotion, attracting companies, building social infrastructure, creating environmental measures, and supporting local companies expanding their businesses into overseas markets.\n\nIn order to respond to the needs of our clients, the Group provides diverse services by using its networks in Japan and overseas, while pursuing alliances with local government agencies and financial institutions. We executed an alliance agreement with the city of Kita-Kyushu in June 2011 for the industrial promotion of Kita-Kyushu, which strategically plans to further develop its growing industries. Since fiscal 2010, we have also established operational alliances with the Kansai Urban Banking Corporation, Mie Bank, Ltd. and four other banks to better support companies expanding their businesses into overseas markets.\n\nOur bank Group also offers diverse services for public benefit corporations which are faced with the need to modify their business or financial strategies due to the recent amendments to regulations governing such corporations.\n\nOur initiatives for the current fiscal year are focused on\n\nsupporting local public corporations that have incurred substantial damage due to the Great East Japan Earthquake for their recovery, in accordance with the recovery plan submitted by each prefecture, including Miyagi Prefecture, with which we executed a Cooperative Agreement for the Promotion of Industry in fiscal 2008.\n\n## Topics\n\n## ◆ PO Seminars I\n\nSMBC and SMBC Nikko Securities jointly held their first 'IPO Seminar' in February 2011. The seminar was held for IPO Navigator members with speakers from SMBC Nikko Securities and the Japan Research Institute. It was extremely successful and attended by approximately 120 members mostly from eastern Japan. We also held our second seminar\n\nin Osaka in July 2011 especially for our clients in western Japan, in order to continue supporting our clients who are planning for IPO by providing them with highquality information and content.\n\nIPO seminar\n\nIPO seminar\n\n## ◆ Launching of the 'SMBC Food and Agricultural Assessment Loan'\n\nSMBC has launched its 'SMBC Food and Agricultural Assessment Loan,' a type of loan which offers favorable terms and conditions based on the assessment results of surveys and interviews on the level of contributions made by the borrower in the areas of food or agricultural improvements, in accordance with the assessment standards set forth by the Japan Research Institute. We approved our first such loan to Asahi Breweries, Ltd., who contributed to the designing of the loan by giving us their opinions.\n\nSMBC will continue to support initiatives for 'improvements of eating habits' and the 'development of the agricultural, forestry and fisheries industries' in Japan by providing the 'SMBC Food and Agricultural Assessment Loan.'\n\nLoan Certificate awarded to Asahi Breweries, Ltd.\n\nLoan Certificate awarded to Asahi Breweries, Ltd.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n11", + "recall": 0.9099378881987578, + "true_md": "supporting local public corporations that have incurred sub- stantial damage due to the Great East Japan Earthquake for their recovery, in accordance with the recovery plan submitted by each prefecture, including Miyagi Prefecture, with which we executed a Cooperative Agreement for the Promotion of Industry in fiscal 2008.\n\ngrowing Chinese market will further accelerate in the foreseeable future.\n\nIn order to more effectively meet the needs of such clients whose business straddles the Japanese and Chinese markets, in fiscal 2010, SMBC transferred its business responsibilities for the planning, promotion, and management of transactions between its Chinese subsidiary of Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporations (China) Limited and Japanese corporate clients from the International Banking Unit to the Corporate Banking Unit. The same was done for the Hong Kong and Taipei branches in fiscal 2011.\n\nThe Shenzhen Branch of Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation (China) Limited began its business operations on May 20, 2011. Under the Group network, including branches in Hong Kong and Guangzhou, we are strengthening our support for our clients’ businesses in southern China.\n\nIn banking operations, we established a “Fund for Supporting Companies Expanding their Business Operations in China” in cooperation with Chinese companies in fiscal 2010. The fund provides for equity and other types of investments for Japanese companies expanding their businesses into China. We also support such Japanese companies in Japan and China by providing them with necessary assistance and support for the globalization of their businesses. We continue to compre- hensively provide our customized services to our clients by supporting their head offices in Japan and business operations in China.\n\nSMBC and SMBC Nikko Securities jointly held their first “IPO Seminar” in February 2011. The seminar was held for IPO Navigator members with speakers from SMBC Nikko Securities and the Japan Research Institute. It was extremely successful and attended by approximately 120 members mostly from eastern Japan. We also held our second seminar \n\nin Osaka in July 2011 especially for our clients in western Japan, in order to continue supporting our clients who are planning for IPO by providing them with high- quality information and content.\n\n## ◆ IPO Seminars\n\n## Topics\n\n## ◆ Launching of the “SMBC Food and Agricultural Assessment Loan”\n\n## Enhanced Initiatives for the Public and Financial Sectors\n\nSMBC has launched its “SMBC Food and Agricultural Assessment Loan,” a type of loan which offers favorable terms and conditions based on the assessment results of surveys and interviews on the level of contributions made by the borrower in the areas of food or agricultural improve- ments, in accordance with the assessment standards set forth by the Japan Research Institute. We approved our first such loan to Asahi Breweries, Ltd., who contributed to the designing of the loan by giving us their opinions.\n\nSMBC will continue to support initiatives for “improve- ments of eating habits” and the “development of the agricul- tural, forestry and fisheries industries” in Japan by providing the “SMBC Food and Agricultural Assessment Loan.”\n\nAs our Japanese economy continuously evolves, the responsibil- ities of local government and financial institutions are becoming more sophisticated and diversified. We believe that an exten- sive international network, and accurate and timely collection of information are necessary for supporting regional industrial promotion, attracting companies, building social infrastructure, creating environmental measures, and supporting local compa- nies expanding their businesses into overseas markets.\n\nIn order to respond to the needs of our clients, the Group provides diverse services by using its networks in Japan and overseas, while pursuing alliances with local government agen- cies and financial institutions. We executed an alliance agree- ment with the city of Kita-Kyushu in June 2011 for the industrial promotion of Kita-Kyushu, which strategically plans to further develop its growing industries. Since fiscal 2010, we have also established operational alliances with the Kansai Urban Banking Corporation, Mie Bank, Ltd. and four other banks to better support companies expanding their businesses into overseas markets.\n\nOur bank Group also offers diverse services for public ben- efit corporations which are faced with the need to modify their business or financial strategies due to the recent amendments to regulations governing such corporations.\n\nOur initiatives for the current fiscal year are focused on \n\nIPO seminar\n\nLoan Certificate awarded to Asahi Breweries, Ltd.\n\nSMFG 2011 11" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.870727615781352, + "doc_id": "1e3f83105bc809def45af4363dc5759037b6a2f291f2094376ab3f3b509b07fd", + "edit_distance": 0.4259012016021362, + "f1_score": 0.9732441471571908, + "meteor": 0.8314950582005173, + "precision": 0.9831081081081081, + "pred_md": "## Senior Management\n\nKingsgate's executives have a comprehensive range of skills and experience including mine development and operations, exploration, finance and administration. They are supported by highly qualified specialists, whose backgrounds cover the full scope of mining resources activities.\n\nSenior members of Kingsgate's management team are:\n\n## Gavin Thomas\n\nBSc (Geology), FAusIMM\n\n## Managing Director and Chief Executive Officer\n\nGavin Thomas was appointed Chief Executive Officer of Kingsgate in 2004 and joined the Kingsgate Board on 16th November 2007. Gavin has had a successful career in developing mining companies from the exploration phase into mid-tier gold or copper producers. He has over 42 years of international experience in exploring for, evaluating, developing, operating and reclaiming mines in North and South America, Australia, the Southwest Pacific, Asia and Europe. Amongst Gavin's credits is the discovery of 'Lihir' in Papua New Guinea, one of the largest gold deposits in the world. In particular, he has extensive experience in Thailand and South America.\n\n## Duane Woodbury\n\nBEc (Hons)\n\n## Chief Financial Officer\n\nDuane Woodbury was appointed Chief Financial Officer of Kingsgate on 1 September 2011. Duane has a BEc (Hons) Degree and has worked in various financial, accounting and advisory roles during his career in a number of locations, including London, New York and Singapore. He has been assisting Kingsgate in its business development initiatives since August 2007 and brings over 20 years of experience in financial markets and corporate finance transactions, principally with the Macquarie Group.\n\n## Tim Benfield\n\nDip CSM (mining), MBA, MAusIMM\n\n## Chief Operating Officer\n\nTim Benfield joined Kingsgate in February 2012 as Chief Operating Officer. Tim is a mining engineer with over 21 years underground and open pit experience in the mining industry in both operational and corporate roles. He has operational and project development experience in Australia, Africa and Saudi Arabia. This includes 10 years with Barrick Gold of Australia where he provided support to four operating mines and two development projects. Tim was most recently General Manager of the Pajingo Gold mine in Queensland for Evolution Mining Limited.\n\n## Ross Coyle\n\nBA, FCPA, FCIS\n\n## General Manager Finance and Administration Company Secretary\n\nRoss Coyle joined Kingsgate in March 2011 following the Company's acquisition of Dominion Mining Limited and was with the Dominion group for over 25 years. He is a qualified accountant and has over 30 years experience in finance and accounting within the resource industry. He was Finance Director of Dominion from 1996. Ross was appointed Kingsgate's Company Secretary in September 2011.\n\n## Joel Forwood\n\nBsc (Hons) FFin\n\n## General Manager Corporate and Markets\n\nJoel Forwood joined Kingsgate in November 2010 and has over 27 years experience in the resource and investment industries covering investor relations, funds management and exploration. For over 12 years, he has been leading investor relations at a number of listed companies, most recently for Lihir Gold Limited. Prior to this he was a fund manager with Queensland Investment Corporation (QIC) following his early career in mineral exploration with BHP and corporate development with RGC.\n\n## Ronald James\n\nBSc (Geology), MAusIMM, MAIG\n\n## General Manager Exploration and Resource Development\n\nRon James has 30 years of experience in exploration and mining at management level inclusive of setting up gold mines and exploration projects from their earliest stages through to development and sustainability. Before joining Kingsgate, he was Chief Mine Geologist at the Gold Ridge Mine in the Solomon Islands and later Group Exploration Manager for Ross Mining NL. Ron is familiar with the technical and operating requirements for emerging projects in a variety of terrains and environments and has a strong focus on maximising returns from ore bodies through optimum waste and ore classification as well as increasing reserves from nearmine resource development.\n\ncontinued\n\nu\n\n39\n\nSenior Management\n\nSenior Management", + "recall": 0.9635761589403974, + "true_md": "39 Senior Management\n\nSenior Management\n\nKingsgate’s executives have a comprehensive range of skills and experience including mine development and operations, exploration, finance and administration. They are supported by highly qualified specialists, whose backgrounds cover the full scope of mining resources activities.\n\nSenior members of Kingsgate’s management team are:\n\nGavin Thomas BSc (Geology), FAusIMM\n\nRoss Coyle BA, FCPA, FCIS\n\nTim Benfield Dip CSM (mining), MBA, MAusIMM\n\nGavin Thomas was appointed Chief Executive Officer of Kingsgate in 2004 and joined the Kingsgate Board on 16th November 2007. Gavin has had a successful career in developing mining companies from the exploration phase into mid-tier gold or copper producers. He has over 42 years of international experience in exploring for, evaluating, developing, operating and reclaiming mines in North and South America, Australia, the Southwest Pacific, Asia and Europe. Amongst Gavin’s credits is the discovery of “Lihir” in Papua New Guinea, one of the largest gold deposits in the world. In particular, he has extensive experience in Thailand and South America. \n\nDuane Woodbury BEc (Hons) \n\nDuane Woodbury was appointed Chief Financial Officer of Kingsgate on 1 September 2011. Duane has a BEc (Hons) Degree and has worked \n\nOfficer of Kingsgate on 1 September 2011. Duane has a BEc (Hons) Degree and has worked in various financial, accounting and advisory roles during his career in a number of locations, including London, New York and Singapore. He has been assisting Kingsgate in its business development initiatives since August 2007 and brings over 20 years of experience in financial markets and corporate finance transactions, principally with the Macquarie Group. \n\nRoss Coyle joined Kingsgate in March 2011 following the Company’s acquisition of Dominion Mining Limited and was with the Dominion group for over 25 years. He is a qualified accountant and has over 30 years experience in finance and accounting within the resource industry. He was Finance Director of Dominion from 1996. Ross was appointed Kingsgate’s Company Secretary in September 2011.\n\nTim Benfield joined Kingsgate in February 2012 as Chief Operating Officer. Tim is a mining engineer with over 21 years underground and open pit experience in the mining industry in both operational and corporate roles. He has operational and project development experience in Australia, Africa and Saudi Arabia. This includes 10 years with Barrick Gold of Australia where he provided support to four operating mines and two development projects. Tim was most recently General Manager of the Pajingo Gold mine in Queensland for Evolution Mining Limited.\n\nJoel Forwood Bsc (Hons) FFin\n\nJoel Forwood joined Kingsgate in November 2010 and has over 27 years experience in the resource and investment industries covering investor relations, funds management and exploration. For over 12 years, he has been leading investor relations at a number of listed companies, most recently for Lihir Gold Limited. Prior to this he was a fund manager with \n\ncompanies, most recently for Lihir Gold Limited. Prior to this he was a fund manager with Queensland Investment Corporation (QIC) following his early career in mineral exploration with BHP and corporate development with RGC.\n\nRon James has 30 years of experience in explora- tion and mining at management level inclusive of setting up gold mines and exploration projects from their earliest stages through to development and sustainability. Before joining Kingsgate, he was Chief Mine Geologist at the Gold Ridge Mine in the Solomon Islands and later Group Exploration Manager for Ross Mining NL. Ron is familiar with the technical and oper- ating requirements for emerging projects in a variety of terrains and environments and has a strong focus on maximising returns from ore bodies through optimum waste and ore classifi- cation as well as increasing reserves from near- mine resource development.\n\n## General Manager Exploration and Resource Development\n\nRonald James BSc (Geology), MAusIMM, MAIG \n\n## General Manager Corporate and Markets\n\n## General Manager Finance and Administration Company Secretary\n\n## Chief Operating Officer\n\n## Managing Director and Chief Executive Officer\n\n## Chief Financial Officer\n\ncontinued u\n\n## Senior Management" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "a8245d2d62d5cf94c59b683457f14f23ee37770e5fbc78e7377f28cb39c8b2cf", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9996243425995492, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "1000 Cranberry Woods Drive Cranberry Township, PA 16066 724-776-8600\n\nwww.MSAsafety.com", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "1000 Cranberry Woods Drive Cranberry Township, PA 16066 724-776-8600 www.MSAsafety.com" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8983257385303478, + "doc_id": "c7d0f1cf5fa6d8b488afb714f97d3075ca6db75bd28fd77234473456b82b083f", + "edit_distance": 0.12318840579710146, + "f1_score": 0.9677419354838711, + "meteor": 0.9510618751533227, + "precision": 0.967741935483871, + "pred_md": "Ernst & Young 680 George Street Sydney NSW 2000 Australia GPO Box 2646 Sydney NSW 2001\n\nTel: +61 2 9248 5555 Fax: +61 2 9248 5959 ey.com/au\n\n## Auditor's Independence Declaration to the Directors of Sundance Energy Australia Limited\n\nIn relation to our audit of the financial report of Sundance Energy Australia Limited for the financial year ended 31 December 2014, to the best of my knowledge and belief, there have been no contraventions of the auditor independence requirements of the Corporations Act 2001 or any applicable code of professional conduct.\n\nErnst & Young\n\nMichael Elliott Partner 31 March 2015\n\nA member firm of Ernst & Young Global Limited Liability limited by a scheme approved under Professional Standards Legislation\n\n- 45 -", + "recall": 0.967741935483871, + "true_md": "Ernst & Young 680 George Street Sydney NSW 2000 Australia GPO Box 2646 Sydney NSW 2001\n\nTel: +61 2 9248 5555 Fax: +61 2 9248 5959 ey.com/au \n\n## Auditor’s Independence Declaration to the Directors of Sundance Energy Australia Limited\n\nIn relation to our audit of the financial report of Sundance Energy Australia Limited for the financial year ended 31 December 2014, to the best of my knowledge and belief, there have been no contraventions of the auditor independence requirements of the CorporationsAct2001 or any applicable code of professional conduct.\n\nMichael Elliott Partner 31 March 2015 \n\nPartner 31 March 2015 \n\nErnst & Young \n\nA member firm of Ernst & Young Global Limited Liability limited by a scheme approved under Professional Standards Legislation \n\n- 45 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8049175158710495, + "doc_id": "06398f1a06f5fa63d535ecded9b3245b4cec61570ddc3eeb89fbca633c3a4053", + "edit_distance": 0.1723404255319149, + "f1_score": 0.9763779527559056, + "meteor": 0.787287893625811, + "precision": 0.9841269841269841, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 27 - CAPITAL AND OTHER EXPENDITURE COMMITMENTS continued\n\nThe following tables summarize the Group's contractual commitments not provided for in the consolidated financial statements:\n\n(1) As at 31 December 2014 the Company had one (2013: four) outstanding drilling rig contracts to explore and develop the Company's properties. The contracts generally have terms of 6 months. Amounts represent minimum expenditure commitments should the Company elect to terminate these contracts prior to term.\n\n(2) On 31 December 2012, the Company entered into an agreement to acquire certain oil and natural gas properties located in the Wattenberg Field and to drill 45 net wells by 31 December 2015 on the acquired properties (the 'Drilling Commitment'). As each qualifying well is drilled, approximately $67 thousand is paid from the escrow account to the Company. However, for each required net commitment well not completed by the Company during that prorated commitment year, the Company is to pay the seller of the properties approximately $67 thousand from the escrow account. Certain clawback provisions allow the Company to recoup amounts paid to the sellers if the total 45 wells are drilled by 31 December 2015. The Company sold the properties in July 2014 and should the buyer drill any qualifying wells, the obligation would be satisfied. As at 31 December 2014, the Company and the buyer had not drilled any wells and the Company does not expect any wells to be drilled under this provision in 2015. As such, the remaining commitment of $2.0 million was accrued in our consolidated statement of financial position and recognised against the gain on sale of assets in the consolidated statement of profit or loss and comprehensive income.\n\n(3) Represents commitments for minimum lease payments in relation to non-cancellable operating leases for office space not provided for in the consolidated financial statements.\n\n(4) Represents commitments for the payment of salaries and other remuneration under long-term employment and consultant contracts not provided for in the consolidated financial statements. Details relating to the employment contracts are set out in the Company's Remuneration Report.\n\n- 92 -", + "recall": 0.96875, + "true_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 27 – CAPITAL AND OTHER EXPENDITURE COMMITMENTS continued\n\nThe following tables summarize the Group’s contractual commitments not provided for in the consolidated financial statements: \n\n(1) As at 31 December 2014 the Company had one (2013: four) outstanding drilling rig contracts to explore and develop the Company’s properties. The contracts generally have terms of 6 months. Amounts represent minimum expenditure commitments should the Company elect to terminate these contracts prior to term. (2) On 31 December 2012, the Company entered into an agreement to acquire certain oil and natural \n\nthese contracts prior to term. (2) On 31 December 2012, the Company entered into an agreement to acquire certain oil and natural gas properties located in the Wattenberg Field and to drill 45 net wells by 31 December 2015 on the acquired properties (the “Drilling Commitment”). As each qualifying well is drilled, approximately $67 thousand is paid from the escrow account to the Company. However, for each required net commitment well not completed by the Company during that prorated commitment year, the Company is to pay the seller of the properties approximately $67 thousand from the escrow account. Certain clawback provisions allow the Company to recoup amounts paid to the sellers if the total 45 wells are drilled by 31 December 2015. The Company sold the properties in July 2014 and should the buyer drill any qualifying wells, the obligation would be satisfied. As at 31 December 2014, the Company and the buyer had not drilled any wells and the Company does not expect any wells to be drilled under this provision in 2015. As such, the remaining commitment of $2.0 million was accrued in our consolidated statement of financial position and recognised against the gain on sale of assets in the consolidated statement of profit or loss and comprehensive income. (3) Represents commitments for minimum lease payments in relation to non-cancellable operating \n\ncomprehensive income. (3) Represents commitments for minimum lease payments in relation to non-cancellable operating leases for office space not provided for in the consolidated financial statements. (4) Represents commitments for the payment of salaries and other remuneration under long-term \n\nleases for office space not provided for in the consolidated financial statements. (4) Represents commitments for the payment of salaries and other remuneration under long-term employment and consultant contracts not provided for in the consolidated financial statements. Details relating to the employment contracts are set out in the Company’s Remuneration Report. \n\n- 92 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8062559307688848, + "doc_id": "92daacc9c6e3e9af92067defa57ee4a89c23008caa97350e7100a876e08f68dc", + "edit_distance": 0.15789473684210525, + "f1_score": 0.9824561403508772, + "meteor": 0.8537541873618871, + "precision": 0.9882352941176471, + "pred_md": "## 5-Year Total Shareholder Return\n\nHasbro vs. S&P 500 and Russell 1000 Consumer Discretionary Index\n\nThe following graph tracks an assumed investment of $100 at the end of 2006 in the Company's Common Stock, the S&P 500 Index and the Russell 1000 Consumer Discretionary Index, assuming full reinvestment of dividends and no payment of brokerage or other commissions or fees. Past performance of the Company's Common Stock is not necessarily indicative of future performance.\n\nNote: Data refl ects Hasbro's fi scal year ends.\n\nSource: Data provided by Zacks Investment Research, Inc. Copyright @2012, Standard & Poors. All rights reserved. Used with permission.", + "recall": 0.9767441860465116, + "true_md": "## 5-Year Total Shareholder Return Hasbro vs. S&P 500 and Russell 1000 Consumer Discretionary Index\n\n5-Year Total Shareholder Return Hasbro vs. S&P 500 and Russell 1000 Consumer Discretionary Index\n\nThe following graph tracks an assumed investment of $100 at the end of 2006 in the Company’s Common Stock, the S&P 500 Index and the Russell 1000 Consumer Discretionary Index, assuming full reinvestment of dividends and no payment of brokerage or other commissions or fees. Past performance of the Company’s Common Stock is not necessarily indicative of future performance.\n\nNote: Data refl ects Hasbro’s fi scal year ends. Source: Data provided by Zacks Investment Research, Inc. Copyright @2012, Standard & Poors. All rights reserved. Used with permission." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9694415925817281, + "doc_id": "9763b16cb5c4eed903cec984202e07c4f44c6b9f3ff7e2ee6883338d9dc22a48", + "edit_distance": 0.6614535418583257, + "f1_score": 0.9851428571428571, + "meteor": 0.9245967117460292, + "precision": 0.9862700228832952, + "pred_md": "MANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS\n\n## RISKS AND UNCERTAINTIES AFFECTING OUR BUSINESS\n\nThis section describes the principal risks and uncertainties that could have a material adverse effect on our business and financial results.\n\n## GENERAL RISKS\n\n## Economic Conditions\n\nOur businesses are affected by general economic conditions and consumer confidence and spending. Recessions, declines in economic activity and economic uncertainty can erode consumer and business confidence and reduce discretionary spending. Any of these factors can negatively affect us through reduced advertising, lower demand for our products and services, decreased revenue and profitability, higher churn and bad debt expense. A significant portion of our broadcasting, publishing and digital revenues come from the sale of advertising.\n\nPoor economic conditions can also have an impact on our pension plans because there is no assurance that the plans will be able to earn the assumed rate of return. Capital market volatility may result in changes in the discount rates and other variables, requiring us to make contributions in the future that differ significantly from current contributions and assumptions being used in the actuarial valuation process.\n\n## S ubstantial Competition\n\nThere is no assurance that our current or future competitors will not provide services that are superior to ours or at lower prices, adapt more quickly to evolving industry trends or changing market requirements, enter markets we operate in, or introduce competing services. Any of these factors could reduce our business market share or revenues, or increase churn.\n\nWe expect to have ongoing re-pricing of products and services with our existing subscribers as we extend lower wireless pricing offers to attract and retain customers. As such, wireless penetration of the population deepens, new wireless customers may generate lower average monthly revenue and this could slow revenue growth.\n\nWireless could face increased competition due to recent changes to foreign ownership and control of wireless licences.\n\n- GLYPH<129> Foreign telecommunication companies could enter the Canadian market by acquiring wireless licences or a holder of wireless licences. If companies with significantly greater capital resources enter the Canadian market, it could reduce our wireless market share. See 'Foreign ownership and control' in 'Regulation in Our Industry' for details.\n- GLYPH<129> Industry Canada's new policy regarding the transfer of spectrum licenses, combined with 2012 legislation that allows foreign ownership of wireless providers with less than 10 % market share, could make it harder for incumbent wireless carriers to acquire additional spectrum, including the completion of our previously announced arrangements with Shaw and Videotron, while making it less expensive for foreign wireless carriers to enter the Canadian wireless market. This could increase the intensity of competition in the Canadian wireless sector.\n\nIn addition, the CRTC Broadcasting Distribution Regulations do not allow cable operators to obtain exclusive contracts in buildings where it is technically feasible to install two or more systems.\n\n74\n\nROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n## TECHNOLOGY RISKS\n\n## Competing Technologies\n\nSeveral technologies may affect the way our services are delivered, including:\n\n- GLYPH<129> broadband\n- GLYPH<129> IP-based voice, data and video delivery services\n- GLYPH<129> increased use of optical fibre technologies to businesses and, or residences\n- GLYPH<129> broadband wireless access and wireless services using a radio frequency spectrum that we may have limited access to.\n\nThese technologies may also lead to significantly different cost structures for users and therefore affect the long-term viability of some of our current technologies. Some of the new technologies may allow competitors to enter our markets with similar products or services at lower costs, and they may be larger and have greater access to financial resources than we have.\n\nImprovements in the quality of streaming video over the Internet, coupled with the increasing availability of television shows and movies online are anticipated to increase competition for Canadian cable television systems. If changes in technology are made to any alternative Canadian multi-channel broadcasting distribution system, our cable services may face increased competition. In addition, wireless Internet is, in some instances, replacing traditional wireline Internet as the technology for wireless Internet continues to develop.\n\nThe growing use of PVRs could affect our ability to generate television advertising revenues because viewers can skip advertising aired on the television networks. The emergence of subscriber-based satellite and digital radio products could change radio audience listening habits and have a negative effect on the results of our radio stations. Certain audiences are also migrating to the Internet as more video and audio content becomes available.\n\n## Dependence on Information Technology S ystems\n\nOur businesses depend on information technology systems for day-today operations. If we are unable to operate our systems or make enhancements to accommodate customer growth and new products and services or our systems go down, it could have an adverse effect on our ability to acquire new subscribers, service customers, manage subscriber churn, produce accurate and timely subscriber invoices, generate revenue growth and manage operating expenses. This could have an adverse impact on our results and financial position.\n\nMost of our employees and critical elements of our network infrastructure and information technology systems are concentrated in various physical facilities. If we cannot access one or more of these facilities because of a natural or manmade disaster or otherwise, our operations may be significantly affected to the extent that it may be difficult for us to recover without a significant interruption in service or negative impact to our revenue or customer base.\n\n## Information S ecurity Risk\n\nSecurity is essential to maintaining efficient, reliable business processes and to enabling sustained business growth. Technology advancements and the people using these technologies introduce new information security risks. Cyber threats are maturing with time and their sophistication and effectiveness are increasing. A security breach could result in loss of revenue, reputation, and resources, or handing", + "recall": 0.9840182648401826, + "true_md": "MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS\n\n## RISKS AND UNCERTAINTIES AFFECTING OUR BUSINESS\n\n## TECHNOLOGY RISKS\n\n## GENERAL RISKS\n\n## Economic Conditions\n\n## Information S ecurity Risk\n\n74 ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n## Competing Technologies\n\nThis section describes the principal risks and uncertainties that could have a material adverse effect on our business and financial results.\n\nOur businesses are affected by general economic conditions and consumer confidence and spending. Recessions, declines in economic activity and economic uncertainty can erode consumer and business confidence and reduce discretionary spending. Any of these factors can negatively affect us through reduced advertising, lower demand for our products and services, decreased revenue and profitability, higher churn and bad debt expense. A significant portion of our broadcasting, publishing and digital revenues come from the sale of advertising.\n\nPoor economic conditions can also have an impact on our pension plans because there is no assurance that the plans will be able to earn the assumed rate of return. Capital market volatility may result in changes in the discount rates and other variables, requiring us to make contributions in the future that differ significantly from current contributions and assumptions being used in the actuarial valuation process.\n\n## S ubstantial Competition\n\nThere is no assurance that our current or future competitors will not provide services that are superior to ours or at lower prices, adapt more quickly to evolving industry trends or changing market requirements, enter markets we operate in, or introduce competing services. Any of these factors could reduce our business market share or revenues, or increase churn.\n\nWe expect to have ongoing re-pricing of products and services with our existing subscribers as we extend lower wireless pricing offers to attract and retain customers. As such, wireless penetration of the population deepens, new wireless customers may generate lower average monthly revenue and this could slow revenue growth.\n\nWireless could face increased competition due to recent changes to foreign ownership and control of wireless licences.\n\nIn addition, the CRTC Broadcasting Distribution Regulations do not allow cable operators to obtain exclusive contracts in buildings where it is technically feasible to install two or more systems.\n\nSecurity is essential to maintaining efficient, reliable business processes and to enabling sustained business growth. Technology advancements and the people using these technologies introduce new information security risks. Cyber threats are maturing with time and their sophistication and effectiveness are increasing. A security breach could result in loss of revenue, reputation, and resources, or handing\n\nOur businesses depend on information technology systems for day-to- day operations. If we are unable to operate our systems or make enhancements to accommodate customer growth and new products and services or our systems go down, it could have an adverse effect on our ability to acquire new subscribers, service customers, manage subscriber churn, produce accurate and timely subscriber invoices, generate revenue growth and manage operating expenses. This could have an adverse impact on our results and financial position.\n\nThe growing use of PVRs could affect our ability to generate television advertising revenues because viewers can skip advertising aired on the television networks. The emergence of subscriber-based satellite and digital radio products could change radio audience listening habits and have a negative effect on the results of our radio stations. Certain audiences are also migrating to the Internet as more video and audio content becomes available.\n\nImprovements in the quality of streaming video over the Internet, coupled with the increasing availability of television shows and movies online are anticipated to increase competition for Canadian cable television systems. If changes in technology are made to any alternative Canadian multi-channel broadcasting distribution system, our cable services may face increased competition. In addition, wireless Internet is, in some instances, replacing traditional wireline Internet as the technology for wireless Internet continues to develop.\n\nSeveral technologies may affect the way our services are delivered, including:\n\n- GLYPH<129> Foreign telecommunication companies could enter the Canadian market by acquiring wireless licences or a holder of wireless licences. If companies with significantly greater capital resources enter the Canadian market, it could reduce our wireless market share. See “Foreign ownership and control” in “Regulation in Our Industry” for details.\n\n- GLYPH<129> Industry Canada’s new policy regarding the transfer of spectrum licenses, combined with 2012 legislation that allows foreign ownership of wireless providers with less than 10 % market share, could make it harder for incumbent wireless carriers to acquire additional spectrum, including the completion of our previously announced arrangements with Shaw and Videotron, while making it less expensive for foreign wireless carriers to enter the Canadian wireless market. This could increase the intensity of competition in the Canadian wireless sector.\n\n- GLYPH<129> broadband\n\n- GLYPH<129> IP-based voice, data and video delivery services\n\n- GLYPH<129> increased use of optical fibre technologies to businesses and, or residences\n\n- GLYPH<129> broadband wireless access and wireless services using a radio frequency spectrum that we may have limited access to.\n\nThese technologies may also lead to significantly different cost structures for users and therefore affect the long-term viability of some of our current technologies. Some of the new technologies may allow competitors to enter our markets with similar products or services at lower costs, and they may be larger and have greater access to financial resources than we have.\n\nMost of our employees and critical elements of our network infrastructure and information technology systems are concentrated in various physical facilities. If we cannot access one or more of these facilities because of a natural or manmade disaster or otherwise, our operations may be significantly affected to the extent that it may be difficult for us to recover without a significant interruption in service or negative impact to our revenue or customer base.\n\n## Dependence on Information Technology S ystems" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7617329181104102, + "doc_id": "f7da232b5c04bfb2d001b0a3a97e89d9daad470e547bdffc324ceb290637a232", + "edit_distance": 0.6153846153846154, + "f1_score": 0.9714285714285713, + "meteor": 0.9654805028766247, + "precision": 0.9714285714285714, + "pred_md": "Others (Nonconsolidated)\n\nSMBC\n\n## Foreign Exchange Transactions\n\nNote: The figures above include foreign exchange transactions by overseas branches.\n\n## Breakdown of Collateral for Customers' Liabilities for Acceptances and Guarantees\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n177", + "recall": 0.9714285714285714, + "true_md": "SMBC Others (Nonconsolidated)\n\n## Breakdown of Collateral for Customers’ Liabilities for Acceptances and Guarantees\n\nNote: The figures above include foreign exchange transactions by overseas branches.\n\n## Foreign Exchange Transactions\n\nSMFG 2011 177" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9734768970578698, + "doc_id": "00255b10693d35a8a093b01314fb15572a3711882baca4fc8006bb36b0264bec", + "edit_distance": 0.08833522083805209, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9878154978327182, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Capital Ratio Information\n\nSMFG\n\n## (B) Estimation of Loss Frequency Distribution\n\nThe Poisson distribution (probability distribution often used in estimating the number of occurrences of rare events) is used for generating the loss frequency distribution. To estimate the Poisson distribution, it is necessary to estimate the average number of annual losses, but in this model, we do not simply take the annual average of all cases of losses for the entire period (several fiscal years) but instead, estimate the annual average number of loss cases for each fiscal year individually. Through this approach, we are able to take account of the deviations in the historical incidence of losses for different periods and are able to estimate loss cases that may occur in the future more appropriately.\n\n## (C) Risk Capital Conversion Factor γ\n\nWe calculate 99.0% VaR from the estimated aggregated loss distribution, and then multiply the risk capital conversion factor γ (gamma) in order to compute 99.9% VaR. By introducing it is unnecessary to estimate 99.9% VaR directly which can be γ estimated with lower accuracy, and it provides with stable estimation results by estimating 99.0% VaR which can be estimated with higher accuracy.\n\nThe factor γ means the ratio between 99.9% VaR and 99.0% VaR. In other words, it is the risk profile of the loss distribution and an indicator for the characteristics of the tail part of the distribution. The risk profile of the loss distribution is different for each loss event type, by which the calculation is performed. In addition, we have verified statistically that it could differ among SMFG (consolidated), SMBC (consolidated), and SMBC (nonconsolidated). To reflect their characteristics, we set a different value of γ for each entity. There is a tendency for γ to become smaller, etc., when there is a distribution of large expected losses or when the tail of the distribution is highly dense.\n\nWhen setting initially, we conduct an analysis, taking into account the possibility of changes in the risk profiles of many types γ of loss distributions, and set values that maintain the stability and the conservativeness of capital. In addition, we assess changes in the risk profiles of the most recent loss distributions, including the present one, and, when changes are above a certain level, we conduct a review of the γ values. This makes it possible to keep values of γ appropriate to changes in the risk profile of the loss distribution and calculate stable values of required capital.\n\n## (D) Calculation of Required Capital\n\nWe calculate required capital by multiplying the 99.9% VaR calculated in the previous section by the multiplier for each loss event type that has been determined based on the number of breaches in back testing. As will be mentioned later, back testing is conducted periodically, and, when realized risk is found to be greater than the risks estimated with the quantification model (back testing excess), we take necessary steps, such as multiplying by the multiplier determined through prior analysis, to maintain the conservativeness of required capital estimates.\n\nWe then add the required capital amounts calculated for each loss event type to compute the required capital for SMFG (consolidated), SMBC (consolidated), and SMBC (nonconsolidated).\n\nPlease note that in calculating required capital, we do not subtract expected losses.\n\n## B. Verification of the Quantification Model\n\nWe conduct a range of sensitivity and verification tests to ensure that the measurement results of the quantification model are appropriate (quantification accuracy) and to confirm that our model is capable of measuring the amounts corresponding to the maximum losses from operational risk that may be incurred for a one year holding period, with a one-sided 99.9 percentile confidence interval. In the following paragraphs, we would like to explain the methods for assessing the quantification accuracy of our measurements and the framework we have in place for regular verifications.\n\n## (A) Verification of Quantification Accuracy\n\nWe have confirmed the reliability of the quantification model through a verification process from various perspectives. Specifically, we obtain a quantitative grasp of the possibilities for variation in measurement results that may arise from preconditions or assumptions made at the time the models were designed. In particular, we assess the possibilities for underestimating required capital and the possible magnitude of such underestimates. Then, in our periodic verification framework, which is described below, we make analyses of how to compensate for such underestimates. We apply our understanding of the possibilities for underestimation to the multiplier derived from back testing, and, if the accuracy of the quantification model deteriorates, we introduce a framework for making adjustments in the multiplier to avoid underestimating the amount of required capital.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n207", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "SMFG Capital Ratio Information\n\n## (B) Estimation of Loss Frequency Distribution\n\n## (C) Risk Capital Conversion Factor γ\n\n## (D) Calculation of Required Capital\n\n## B. Verification of the Quantification Model\n\n## (A) Verification of Quantification Accuracy\n\nThe Poisson distribution (probability distribution often used in estimating the number of occurrences of rare events) is used for generating the loss frequency distribution. To estimate the Poisson distribution, it is necessary to estimate the average number of annual losses, but in this model, we do not simply take the annual average of all cases of losses for the entire period (several fiscal years) but instead, estimate the annual average number of loss cases for each fiscal year individually. Through this approach, we are able to take account of the deviations in the historical incidence of losses for different periods and are able to estimate loss cases that may occur in the future more appropriately.\n\nWe calculate 99.0% VaR from the estimated aggregated loss distribution, and then multiply the risk capital conversion factor γ (gamma) in order to compute 99.9% VaR. By introducing γ it is unnecessary to estimate 99.9% VaR directly which can be estimated with lower accuracy, and it provides with stable estimation results by estimating 99.0% VaR which can be estimated with higher accuracy.\n\nThe factor γ means the ratio between 99.9% VaR and 99.0% VaR. In other words, it is the risk profile of the loss distribution and an indicator for the characteristics of the tail part of the distribution. The risk profile of the loss distribution is different for each loss event type, by which the calculation is performed. In addition, we have verified statistically that it could differ among SMFG (consolidated), SMBC (consolidated), and SMBC (nonconsolidated). To reflect their characteristics, we set a different value of γ for each entity. There is a tendency for γ to become smaller, etc., when there is a distribution of large expected losses or when the tail of the distribution is highly dense.\n\nWhen setting γ initially, we conduct an analysis, taking into account the possibility of changes in the risk profiles of many types of loss distributions, and set values that maintain the stability and the conservativeness of capital. In addition, we assess changes in the risk profiles of the most recent loss distributions, including the present one, and, when changes are above a certain level, we conduct a review of the γ values. This makes it possible to keep values of γ appropriate to changes in the risk profile of the loss distribution and calculate stable values of required capital.\n\nWe calculate required capital by multiplying the 99.9% VaR calculated in the previous section by the multiplier for each loss event type that has been determined based on the number of breaches in back testing. As will be mentioned later, back testing is conducted periodically, and, when realized risk is found to be greater than the risks estimated with the quantification model (back testing excess), we take necessary steps, such as multiplying by the multiplier determined through prior analysis, to maintain the conservativeness of required capital estimates.\n\nWe then add the required capital amounts calculated for each loss event type to compute the required capital for SMFG (consolidated), SMBC (consolidated), and SMBC (nonconsolidated).\n\nPlease note that in calculating required capital, we do not subtract expected losses.\n\nWe conduct a range of sensitivity and verification tests to ensure that the measurement results of the quantification model are appropriate (quantification accuracy) and to confirm that our model is capable of measuring the amounts corresponding to the maximum losses from operational risk that may be incurred for a one year holding period, with a one-sided 99.9 percentile confidence interval. In the following paragraphs, we would like to explain the methods for assessing the quantification accuracy of our measurements and the framework we have in place for regular verifications.\n\nWe have confirmed the reliability of the quantification model through a verification process from various perspectives. Specifically, we obtain a quantitative grasp of the possibilities for variation in measurement results that may arise from preconditions or assumptions made at the time the models were designed. In particular, we assess the possibilities for underestimating required capital and the possible magnitude of such underestimates. Then, in our periodic verification framework, which is described below, we make analyses of how to compensate for such underestimates. We apply our understanding of the possibilities for underestimation to the multiplier derived from back testing, and, if the accuracy of the quantification model deteriorates, we introduce a framework for making adjustments in the multiplier to avoid underestimating the amount of required capital.\n\nSMFG 2011 207" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8677236210023147, + "doc_id": "f8636feb5a8b87791d7ba08f0977ec6097eb00ecade88837805eb7a016d0dbe6", + "edit_distance": 0.12171052631578948, + "f1_score": 0.9913043478260869, + "meteor": 0.8511119088017478, + "precision": 0.9895833333333334, + "pred_md": "## Nordstrom, Inc.\n\n## Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nDollar and share amounts in millions except per share, per option and per unit amounts\n\nAs part of the acquisition, we created a Value Creation Plan ('VCP') to incentivize Trunk Club employees to increase the value of the Trunk Club business. The VCP has three payout scenarios that are determined based on the Trunk Club business meeting minimum or exceeding maximum fiscal 2018 sales and earnings metrics. If the minimum is not met, the payout is $0 ('Outcome A'); if the maximum is met, the payout is $100 ('Outcome B'). If the sales and earnings metrics surpass the minimum but do not reach the maximum, the payout is based on the incremental value growth of the Trunk Club business since acquisition, and will be between $0 and $100 ('Outcome C').\n\nWe estimate the grant date fair value for each outcome and recognize expense based upon Outcome C, deemed most probable. If at any time it becomes probable that another outcome will be achieved, compensation expense will be cumulatively adjusted based on the grant date fair value associated with that outcome.\n\nThe final payout amount will be determined at the end of fiscal 2018 and settled in fiscal 2019 at our discretion in either cash or stock. We intend to settle the VCP in stock.\n\nAs of the fiscal year ended January 31, 2015, based on the payout scenario we believe is probable, we estimated the grant date fair value of $10 per unit using the Black-Scholes valuation model. Stock-based compensation expense will be recognized on an accelerated basis due to the performance criteria and graded vesting features of the VCP. In 2014, we recognized $3 in stock-based compensation expense associated with the VCP.\n\nAs of January 31, 2015, we have granted 0.8 of the 1.0 units available for grant. Total unrecognized stock-based compensation expense related to nonvested VCP units was $6, which we expect to recognize over the next 43 months.\n\n## Performance Share Units\n\nWe generally grant performance share units to executive officers as one of the ways to align compensation with shareholder interests. Performance share units are earned after a three-year performance cycle only when our total shareholder return (reflecting daily stock price appreciation and compounded reinvestment of dividends) outperforms companies in a defined group of competitors determined by the Compensation Committee of our Board of Directors. Performance share units granted in 2012 and 2013 also require the total shareholder return to be positive for any payout. The percentage of units that are earned depends on our relative position at the end of the performance cycle and can range from 0% to 175% of the number of units granted.\n\nBecause performance share units are payable in either cash or stock as elected by the employee, they are classified as a liability award. The liability is remeasured, with a corresponding adjustment to earnings, at each fiscal quarter-end during the performance cycle. The performance share unit liability is remeasured using the estimated percentage of units earned multiplied by the closing market price of our common stock on the current period-end date and is pro-rated based on the amount of time that has passed in the vesting period. The price used to determine the amount of cash received for the performance share units upon vesting is the closing market price of our common stock on the last day of the performance cycle.\n\nThe following is a summary of performance share unit activity:\n\n1 Assumes performance share units at 100% of the number of units granted.\n\n2 On February 13, 2015, the Compensation Committee of our Board of Directors approved the vesting of 48,229 performance share units that were granted in 2012 and outstanding as of January 31, 2015. Those units were earned and vested at 75% based on the defined performance criteria above. For purposes of this footnote only, performance share units are stated in exact units instead of millions.\n\nNo performance share units were earned and vested in 2014. As of January 31, 2015, our current and non-current other liabilities included a total of $8 for performance share units. As of January 31, 2015, the remaining unrecognized stock-based compensation expense for unvested performance share units was $6, which is expected to be recognized over a weighted-average period of 21 months.\n\nNordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 59", + "recall": 0.9930313588850174, + "true_md": "## Nordstrom, Inc. Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n## Nordstrom, Inc. Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements Dollar and share amounts in millions except per share, per option and per unit amounts\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements Dollar and share amounts in millions except per share, per option and per unit amounts\n\n## Performance Share Units We generally grant performance share units to executive officers as one of the ways to align compensation with shareholder interests.\n\nAs part of the acquisition, we created a Value Creation Plan (“VCP”) to incentivize Trunk Club employees to increase the value of the Trunk Club business. The VCP has three payout scenarios that are determined based on the Trunk Club business meeting minimum or exceeding maximum fiscal 2018 sales and earnings metrics. If the minimum is not met, the payout is $0 (“Outcome A”); if the maximum is met, the payout is $100 (“Outcome B”). If the sales and earnings metrics surpass the minimum but do not reach the maximum, the payout is based on the incremental value growth of the Trunk Club business since acquisition, and will be between $0 and $100 (“Outcome C”). \n\nWe estimate the grant date fair value for each outcome and recognize expense based upon Outcome C, deemed most probable. If at any time it becomes probable that another outcome will be achieved, compensation expense will be cumulatively adjusted based on the grant date fair value associated with that outcome. \n\nThe final payout amount will be determined at the end of fiscal 2018 and settled in fiscal 2019 at our discretion in either cash or stock. We intend to settle the VCP in stock.\n\nAs of the fiscal year ended January 31, 2015, based on the payout scenario we believe is probable, we estimated the grant date fair value of $10 per unit using the Black-Scholes valuation model. Stock-based compensation expense will be recognized on an accelerated basis due to the performance criteria and graded vesting features of the VCP. In 2014, we recognized $3 in stock-based compensation expense associated with the VCP. \n\nAs of January 31, 2015, we have granted 0.8 of the 1.0 units available for grant. Total unrecognized stock-based compensation expense related to nonvested VCP units was $6, which we expect to recognize over the next 43 months.\n\nPerformance Share Units We generally grant performance share units to executive officers as one of the ways to align compensation with shareholder interests. Performance share units are earned after a three-year performance cycle only when our total shareholder return (reflecting daily stock price appreciation and compounded reinvestment of dividends) outperforms companies in a defined group of competitors determined by the Compensation Committee of our Board of Directors. Performance share units granted in 2012 and 2013 also require the total shareholder return to be positive for any payout. The percentage of units that are earned depends on our relative position at the end of the performance cycle and can range from 0% to 175% of the number of units granted.\n\nBecause performance share units are payable in either cash or stock as elected by the employee, they are classified as a liability award. The liability is remeasured, with a corresponding adjustment to earnings, at each fiscal quarter-end during the performance cycle. The performance share unit liability is remeasured using the estimated percentage of units earned multiplied by the closing market price of our common stock on the current period-end date and is pro-rated based on the amount of time that has passed in the vesting period. The price used to determine the amount of cash received for the performance share units upon vesting is the closing market price of our common stock on the last day of the performance cycle.\n\nThe following is a summary of performance share unit activity:\n\n1 Assumes performance share units at 100% of the number of units granted. On February 13, 2015, the Compensation Committee of our Board of Directors approved the vesting of 48,229 performance share units that were granted in 2012 and \n\nAssumes performance share units at 100% of the number of units granted. 2 On February 13, 2015, the Compensation Committee of our Board of Directors approved the vesting of 48,229 performance share units that were granted in 2012 and outstanding as of January 31, 2015. Those units were earned and vested at 75% based on the defined performance criteria above. For purposes of this footnote only, performance share units are stated in exact units instead of millions. \n\nNo performance share units were earned and vested in 2014. As of January 31, 2015, our current and non-current other liabilities included a total of $8 for performance share units. As of January 31, 2015, the remaining unrecognized stock-based compensation expense for unvested performance share units was $6, which is expected to be recognized over a weighted-average period of 21 months.\n\nNordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 59" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.988140471143255, + "doc_id": "fabf3516c1aca301149018c509b55b54ce4ba3bb162285ac5d094e6c72744718", + "edit_distance": 0.07291666666666667, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999980926513672, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 9: INCOME TAXES\n\n## Income Tax Expense (Benefit)\n\nThe table below shows the difference between income tax expense from continuing operations, and income tax expense computed by applying the statutory income tax rate to income before income taxes.\n\nOur statutory income tax rate increased from 26.4% in 2012 to 26.5% in 2013 because of changes in Canadian provincial corporate income tax rates.\n\n## Deferred Tax Assets and Liabilities\n\nThe table below summarizes the movement of net deferred tax assets and liabilities during 2013 and 2012.\n\nAs at December 31, 2013 and 2012, we had not recognized deferred tax assets for the following items.\n\n106\n\nROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\nThere are taxable temporary differences associated with our investment in Canadian domestic subsidiaries. We do not record deferred tax liabilities for temporary differences when we are able to control the timing of the reversal, and the reversal is not probable in the foreseeable future. Reversing these temporary differences would not result in any significant tax implications.", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 9: INCOME TAXES\n\n## Income Tax Expense (Benefit)\n\nThe table below shows the difference between income tax expense from continuing operations, and income tax expense computed by applying the statutory income tax rate to income before income taxes.\n\nOur statutory income tax rate increased from 26.4% in 2012 to 26.5% in 2013 because of changes in Canadian provincial corporate income tax rates.\n\n## Deferred Tax Assets and Liabilities\n\nThe table below summarizes the movement of net deferred tax assets and liabilities during 2013 and 2012.\n\nAs at December 31, 2013 and 2012, we had not recognized deferred tax assets for the following items.\n\nThere are taxable temporary differences associated with our investment in Canadian domestic subsidiaries. We do not record deferred tax liabilities for temporary differences when we are able to control the timing of the reversal, and the reversal is not probable in the foreseeable future. Reversing these temporary differences would not result in any significant tax implications.\n\n106 ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6777007177346568, + "doc_id": "3d155beb08a75e789024a61c4a69b54c7d954a476f53748437dda5077c6aab24", + "edit_distance": 0.4084507042253521, + "f1_score": 0.9779179810725553, + "meteor": 0.6926927648157667, + "precision": 0.9748427672955975, + "pred_md": "Total\n\n48,015\n\n857,481\n\n* C Gooden resigned as Company Secretary on 23 August 2013.\n\n(1) Non-monetary benefits includes car parking fringe benefits and payment of health premiums.\n\n(2) Fair value of services received in return for the options granted is measured using the Black-Scholes Option Pricing Model, as further discussed in Note 31 to the Financial Report, and represents the portion of the grant date fair value expense of the option during the year. Options were granted in December 2011.\n\n(3) Fair value of services received in return for the LTI share based awards are based on the allocable portion of aggregate fair value expense recognised under AASB 2 for the year. The aggregate fair value is based on the number of RSUs awarded valued at the Company's stock price at the date of grant, translated at the foreign exchange rate in effect on the date of grant. Vesting is 25% at the time of grant (following the performance period), with 25% cliff vesting each subsequent year on the date of grant. The amount included as remuneration is not related to or indicative of the benefit (if any) that individuals may ultimately realise when the RSUs vest.\n\n## K. Outstanding KMP Options and Restricted Share Units\n\n## Number of Options held by Key Management Personnel\n\n## Number of Restricted Shares Units held by Key Management Personnel\n\n(1) Market value based on the Company's closing stock price on 31 December 2014 or USD$0.43 based on the foreign currency exchange spot rate published by the Reserve Bank of Australia\n\n(2) Mr. McCrady's RSUs were approved by the shareholders at the Annual General Meeting held on 30 May 2014.\n\n- 42 -", + "recall": 0.9810126582278481, + "true_md": "* C Gooden resigned as Company Secretary on 23 August 2013. \n\n(1) Non-monetary benefits includes car parking fringe benefits and payment of health premiums. (2) Fair value of services received in return for the options granted is measured using the Black-Scholes Option Pricing \n\n(1) Non-monetary benefits includes car parking fringe benefits and payment of health premiums. (2) Fair value of services received in return for the options granted is measured using the Black-Scholes Option Pricing Model, as further discussed in Note 31 to the Financial Report, and represents the portion of the grant date fair value expense of the option during the year. Options were granted in December 2011. (3) Fair value of services received in return for the LTI share based awards are based on the allocable portion of aggregate \n\nexpense of the option during the year. Options were granted in December 2011. (3) Fair value of services received in return for the LTI share based awards are based on the allocable portion of aggregate fair value expense recognised under AASB 2 for the year. The aggregate fair value is based on the number of RSUs awarded valued at the Company’s stock price at the date of grant, translated at the foreign exchange rate in effect on the date of grant. Vesting is 25% at the time of grant (following the performance period), with 25% cliff vesting each subsequent year on the date of grant. The amount included as remuneration is not related to or indicative of the benefit (if any) that individuals may ultimately realise when the RSUs vest. \n\n(1) Market value based on the Company’s closing stock price on 31 December 2014 or USD$0.43 based on the foreign currency exchange spot rate published by the Reserve Bank of Australia (2) Mr. McCrady’s RSUs were approved by the shareholders at the Annual General Meeting held on 30 May 2014. \n\ncurrency exchange spot rate published by the Reserve Bank of Australia (2) Mr. McCrady’s RSUs were approved by the shareholders at the Annual General Meeting held on 30 May 2014. \n\n- 42 - \n\n## Number of Restricted Shares Units held by Key Management Personnel\n\n## Number of Options held by Key Management Personnel\n\n## K. Outstanding KMP Options and Restricted Share Units" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9279057605654323, + "doc_id": "cb8ee456fa0069cbb4bd041671db8e4fb1bb7a061085f40e76a19f7e96eeeb71", + "edit_distance": 0.6254416961130742, + "f1_score": 0.9918032786885246, + "meteor": 0.9242473056505496, + "precision": 0.9918032786885246, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 14 - FAIR VALUE MEASUREMENT\n\nThe following table presents financial assets and liabilities measured at fair value in the consolidated statement of financial position in accordance with the fair value hierarchy. This hierarchy groups financial assets and liabilities into three levels based on the significance of inputs used in measuring the fair value of the financial assets and liabilities. The fair value hierarchy has the following levels:\n\n- Level 1: quoted prices (unadjusted) in active markets for identical assets or liabilities;\n- Level 2: inputs other than quoted prices included within Level 1 that are observable for the asset or liability, either directly (i.e. as prices) or indirectly (i.e. derived from prices); and\n- Level 3: inputs for the asset or liability that are not based on observable market data (unobservable inputs).\n\nThe Level within which the financial asset or liability is classified is determined based on the lowest level of significant input to the fair value measurement. The financial assets and liabilities measured at fair value in the statement of financial position are grouped into the fair value hierarchy as follows:\n\n## Consolidated 31 December 2014\n\n(1) Excludes work-in-progress and restoration provision assets totaling $63.9 million.\n\n## Consolidated 31 December 2013\n\nDuring the years ended 31 December 2014 and 2013, respectively, there were no transfers between level 1 and level 2 fair value measurements, and no transfer into or out of level 3 fair value measurements.\n\n- 81 -", + "recall": 0.9918032786885246, + "true_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 14 – FAIR VALUE MEASUREMENT\n\nThe following table presents financial assets and liabilities measured at fair value in the consolidated statement of financial position in accordance with the fair value hierarchy. This hierarchy groups financial assets and liabilities into three levels based on the significance of inputs used in measuring the fair value of the financial assets and liabilities. The fair value hierarchy has the following levels: \n\nThe Level within which the financial asset or liability is classified is determined based on the lowest level of significant input to the fair value measurement. The financial assets and liabilities measured at fair value in the statement of financial position are grouped into the fair value hierarchy as follows: \n\n(1) Excludes work-in-progress and restoration provision assets totaling $63.9 million. \n\nDuring the years ended 31 December 2014 and 2013, respectively, there were no transfers between level 1 and level 2 fair value measurements, and no transfer into or out of level 3 fair value measurements. \n\n- 81 - \n\n- Level 1: quoted prices (unadjusted) in active markets for identical assets or liabilities; \n\n- Level 2: inputs other than quoted prices included within Level 1 that are observable for the asset or liability, either directly (i.e. as prices) or indirectly (i.e. derived from prices); and \n\n- Level 3: inputs for the asset or liability that are not based on observable market data (unobservable inputs)." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9096083676053001, + "doc_id": "8f0aa3ff2cff2207c5eeb1f570538b3c2998e05b6356af1b6eb788e119ac372b", + "edit_distance": 0.15384615384615385, + "f1_score": 0.979381443298969, + "meteor": 0.9741743944107932, + "precision": 0.9895833333333334, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 12 - TRADE AND OTHER RECEIVABLES\n\nAs at 31 December 2013, the Group had a receivable balance of $11.7 million, which was outside normal trading terms (the receivable was past due but not impaired), offset by a payable balance of $16.7 million to the same debtor company (see Note 20 for additional information). The Company's remaining Bakken assets were sold to the debtor company in July 2014, for approximately $14.0 million, including the settlement of the net liability due to the debtor company.\n\nDue to the short-term nature of trade and other receivables, their carrying amounts are assumed to approximate fair value. No receivables were outside of normal trading terms as at 31 December 2014.\n\n## NOTE 13 - DERIVATIVE FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS\n\n- 80 -", + "recall": 0.9693877551020408, + "true_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\nAs at 31 December 2013, the Group had a receivable balance of $11.7 million, which was outside normal trading terms (the receivable was past due but not impaired), offset by a payable balance of $16.7 million to the same debtor company (see Note 20 for additional information). The Company’s remaining Bakken assets were sold to the debtor company in July 2014, for approximately $14.0 million, including the settlement of the net liability due to the debtor company. \n\nDue to the short-term nature of trade and other receivables, their carrying amounts are assumed to approximate fair value. No receivables were outside of normal trading terms as at 31 December 2014. \n\n- 80 - \n\n## NOTE 13 – DERIVATIVE FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS\n\n## NOTE 12 – TRADE AND OTHER RECEIVABLES" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8988299169787682, + "doc_id": "d8b165b586a7a95231a66d10c87ba2b73dc0250e4834fa97d39bd974ec5e6f11", + "edit_distance": 0.08776978417266187, + "f1_score": 0.9865125240847784, + "meteor": 0.9081186699291587, + "precision": 0.9884169884169884, + "pred_md": "For the year ended 31 December 2014 (to be paid in 2015), the following metrics were adopted as targets:\n\n(1) Increase in PV10 of proved reserves divided by the capital spent to generate that growth during the period excluding acquisitions and dispositions\n\nThe amount of any STI and LTI bonuses relative to the year ended 31 December 2014 will be determined subsequent to the filing of this report and included in reported remuneration in next year's Directors' Report.\n\n## Long-Term Incentives\n\nWe have two active equity incentive plans under the LTI component of the incentive remuneration program. These are the Sundance Employee Option Plan (\"ESOP\") and the Sundance Energy Australia Limited Restricted Share Units available only to our U.S. employees under the Incentive Remuneration Plan (the \"RSU Plan\"). Any grants made to employees that also serve as a director are subject to shareholder approval prior to issuance.\n\n## ESOP Plan\n\nThe ESOP provides for the issuance of stock options at an exercise price determined at the time of the issue by a committee designated by the board (the \"Plan Committee\"). Options under the ESOP may be granted to eligible employees, as determined by the Plan Committee, and typically include our executive officers, directors and key employees.\n\nHistorically, the Plan Committee has granted options in connection with attracting new employees, which grant is made once employment has commenced. It is within the discretion of the Plan Committee, however, to authorize additional option grants during the tenure of employment. Generally, an option vests 20 percent on the 90th day following the grant date, with an additional 20 percent vesting on the first, second, third and fourth anniversaries thereof. Options are valued using the BlackScholes methodology and recognized as remuneration in accordance with their vesting conditions. In the event of a voluntary winding up of the Company, unvested stock options vest immediately. We may amend the ESOP or any portion thereof, or waive or modify the application of the ESOP rules in relation to a participant, at any time. Certain amendments to the ESOP may require the approval of the option holders.\n\nNo stock options were granted to any officers or directors during fiscal years 2013 or 2014.\n\n## RSU Plan\n\nThe RSU Plan provides for the issuance of restricted share units (\"RSUs\") to our U.S. employees. The purpose of issuing RSUs is to reward senior executives and employees for achievement of financial and operational performance targets established by our board. The RSU Plan is administered by our board. RSUs may be granted to eligible employees from a bonus pool established at the sole discretion of our board. The bonus pool is subject to board and management review of performance metrics with respect to both our and the individual employee's performance over a measured period determined by the Remuneration and Nominations Committee and the board. The RSUs may be settled in cash or shares at the discretion of our board.\n\nUnder the RSU Plan, which applies to 2014 payments earned in 2013, 25% of the RSUs vest upon satisfaction of the performance criteria and share award determination, and 25% vest on each of next three anniversaries. The RSUs are based on performance targets established and approved by our board. The number of RSUs awarded is calculated by dividing the value of the LTI award by the closing price of the Company's shares at the end of the fiscal year for which the award is granted.\n\n- 36 -", + "recall": 0.9846153846153847, + "true_md": "For the year ended 31 December 2014 (to be paid in 2015), the following metrics were adopted as targets: \n\n(1) Increase in PV10 of proved reserves divided by the capital spent to generate that growth during the period excluding acquisitions and dispositions \n\nThe amount of any STI and LTI bonuses relative to the year ended 31 December 2014 will be determined subsequent to the filing of this report and included in reported remuneration in next year’s Directors’ Report.\n\nLong-Term Incentives We have two active equity incentive plans under the LTI component of the incentive remuneration program. These are the \n\nLong-Term Incentives We have two active equity incentive plans under the LTI component of the incentive remuneration program. These are the Sundance Employee Option Plan (\"ESOP\") and the Sundance Energy Australia Limited Restricted Share Units available only to our U.S. employees under the Incentive Remuneration Plan (the \"RSU Plan\"). Any grants made to employees that also serve as a director are subject to shareholder approval prior to issuance.\n\nESOP Plan\n\nThe ESOP provides for the issuance of stock options at an exercise price determined at the time of the issue by a committee designated by the board (the \"Plan Committee\"). Options under the ESOP may be granted to eligible employees, as determined by the Plan Committee, and typically include our executive officers, directors and key employees.\n\nHistorically, the Plan Committee has granted options in connection with attracting new employees, which grant is made once employment has commenced. It is within the discretion of the Plan Committee, however, to authorize additional option grants during the tenure of employment. Generally, an option vests 20 percent on the 90th day following the grant date, with an additional 20 percent vesting on the first, second, third and fourth anniversaries thereof. Options are valued using the Black- Scholes methodology and recognized as remuneration in accordance with their vesting conditions. In the event of a voluntary winding up of the Company, unvested stock options vest immediately. We may amend the ESOP or any portion thereof, or waive or modify the application of the ESOP rules in relation to a participant, at any time. Certain amendments to the ESOP may require the approval of the option holders.\n\nNo stock options were granted to any officers or directors during fiscal years 2013 or 2014. \n\nRSU Plan The RSU Plan provides for the issuance of restricted share units (\"RSUs\") to our U.S. employees. The purpose of issuing RSUs is to \n\nRSU Plan The RSU Plan provides for the issuance of restricted share units (\"RSUs\") to our U.S. employees. The purpose of issuing RSUs is to reward senior executives and employees for achievement of financial and operational performance targets established by our board. The RSU Plan is administered by our board. RSUs may be granted to eligible employees from a bonus pool established at the sole discretion of our board. The bonus pool is subject to board and management review of performance metrics with respect to both our and the individual employee's performance over a measured period determined by the Remuneration and Nominations Committee and the board. The RSUs may be settled in cash or shares at the discretion of our board.\n\nUnder the RSU Plan, which applies to 2014 payments earned in 2013, 25% of the RSUs vest upon satisfaction of the performance criteria and share award determination, and 25% vest on each of next three anniversaries. The RSUs are based on performance targets established and approved by our board. The number of RSUs awarded is calculated by dividing the value of the LTI award by the closing price of the Company’s shares at the end of the fiscal year for which the award is granted.\n\n- 36 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6863672659296124, + "doc_id": "ae2a88d847f07dcc438135de5a30f6fd470d05960f9310814b87628d94b7afd2", + "edit_distance": 0.46846846846846846, + "f1_score": 0.9936708860759493, + "meteor": 0.7896659282200494, + "precision": 0.9936708860759493, + "pred_md": "## Board Committees\n\nChairmanship and current membership of each of the board committees at the date of this report are as follows:\n\n## Indemnifying Officers\n\nThe Company has paid premiums to insure each of the directors, officers and consultants against liabilities for costs and expenses incurred by them in defending any legal proceedings arising out of their conduct while acting in the capacity of director or executive of the Company, other than conduct involving a willful breach of duty in relation to the Company. The policy does not specify the individual premium for each officer covered and the amount paid is confidential.\n\nDuring or since the end of the reporting period, the Company has given an indemnity or entered into an agreement to indemnify, paid or agreed to pay insurance premiums as follows:\n\n- · Michael Hannell\n- · Eric McCrady\n- · Neville Martin\n- · Damien A Hannes\n- · Weldon Holcombe\n- · Cathy L. Anderson\n- · Grace L. Ford\n- · Damien Connor\n\n## Unlisted Options\n\nAt the date of this report, the options listed below are unexercised:\n\nNo person, or entity entitled to exercise the option had or has any right by virtue of the option to participate in any share issue of any other body corporate.\n\n## Unlisted Restricted Share Units\n\nAt 31 December 2014, 2,964,177 unlisted restricted share units remain unvested and will primarily vest over the next two years. Upon vesting, RSUs will be converted to ordinary shares.\n\n- 26 -", + "recall": 0.9936708860759493, + "true_md": "## Board Committees\n\n## Indemnifying Officers\n\n## Unlisted Options\n\nChairmanship and current membership of each of the board committees at the date of this report are as follows: \n\nThe Company has paid premiums to insure each of the directors, officers and consultants against liabilities for costs and expenses incurred by them in defending any legal proceedings arising out of their conduct while acting in the capacity of director or executive of the Company, other than conduct involving a willful breach of duty in relation to the Company. The policy does not specify the individual premium for each officer covered and the amount paid is confidential. \n\nDuring or since the end of the reporting period, the Company has given an indemnity or entered into an agreement to indemnify, paid or agreed to pay insurance premiums as follows: • Michael Hannell \n\nAt the date of this report, the options listed below are unexercised: \n\nNo person, or entity entitled to exercise the option had or has any right by virtue of the option to participate in any share issue of any other body corporate. \n\nAt 31 December 2014, 2,964,177 unlisted restricted share units remain unvested and will primarily vest over the next two years. Upon vesting, RSUs will be converted to ordinary shares.\n\n## Unlisted Restricted Share Units\n\n- indemnify, paid or agreed to pay insurance premiums as follows: • Michael Hannell • Eric McCrady \n\n- • Michael Hannell • Eric McCrady • Neville Martin \n\n- • Eric McCrady • Neville Martin • Damien A Hannes \n\n- • Neville Martin • Damien A Hannes • Weldon Holcombe \n\n- • Damien A Hannes • Weldon Holcombe • Cathy L. Anderson\n\n- • Weldon Holcombe • Cathy L. Anderson • Grace L. Ford\n\n- • Cathy L. Anderson • Grace L. Ford • Damien Connor\n\n- • Grace L. Ford • Damien Connor\n\n- 26 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.812490065632123, + "doc_id": "f11c0f7c44b18109fd19271a1d7137df0ed5db715d74eb4fe1e058b1d7d72683", + "edit_distance": 0.2972972972972973, + "f1_score": 0.9818181818181817, + "meteor": 0.9256762490218078, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Shareholder Information\n\nAs at 26 September 2013\n\n## Substantial shareholders\n\nSubstantial shareholders and their associates who have notified the Company are listed below:\n\n## Distribution of equity securities\n\nwww.kingsgate.com.au", + "recall": 0.9642857142857143, + "true_md": "114 Shareholder Information\n\n## Shareholder Information\n\n## Substantial shareholders\n\nAs at 26 September 2013\n\nSubstantial shareholders and their associates who have notified the Company are listed below:\n\n## Distribution of equity securities\n\nwww.kingsgate.com.au" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6499755906708033, + "doc_id": "66e20ef3dd2a32d94086c4530b56bd2257209851886cc0ccd9420d175d236404", + "edit_distance": 0.6997635933806147, + "f1_score": 0.9857142857142857, + "meteor": 0.5767662378107434, + "precision": 0.9928057553956835, + "pred_md": "## Stock Ownership Guidelines\n\nOwnership of our stock by our executives aligns their interests with the interests of our shareholders. Accordingly, the Board of Directors maintains stock ownership guidelines for certain key executive officers. The applicable level of ownership is required to be achieved within five years of the later of the date these guidelines were adopted or the date the person first became an executive officer and is based on the executive's salary at the time these guidelines were adopted or date person first became subject to guidelines. The net shares acquired through incentive compensation plans (through the exercise of stock options, or the vesting of RSUs or performance shares) must be retained if the executive has not satisfied his or her targeted ownership. An executive's failure to meet the stock ownership guidelines may influence an executive's future mix of cash and non-cash compensation awarded by the Committee. Executives are not permitted to pledge their shares or invest in derivatives involving Company shares. Ownership is reviewed at least annually when compensation decisions are made.\n\nThe following table shows share ownership as a multiple of base pay as at 31 December 2014, based on the Company's weighted average closing stock pricing of $0.95, calculated at the weighted average closing stock price translated into USD by multiplying by a weighted average FX rate (per the Reserve Bank of Australia), during the 2014 fiscal year.\n\n## Claw Back Provisions\n\nThe Board, in its sole discretion, shall reserve the right to claw back any incentive awards issued if any of the following conditions apply:\n\n- · The Company's financial statements are required to be restated due to material non-compliance with any financial reporting requirements under the federal securities laws (other than a restatement due to a change in accounting rules); and\n- o As a result of such restatement, a performance measure which was a material factor in determining the award is restated, and\n- o In the discretion of the Board, a lower payment would have been made to the executive officer based upon the restated financial results;\n- · Should it subsequently be found that the information or assumptions are materially erroneous;\n- · In the event that there is evidence of fraud by any employee resulting in material adverse change in the Company's financial statements;\n- · In the event that there is a material adverse change in the circumstances of the Company.\n\n## E. Remuneration Policy and Framework\n\n## The Remuneration and Nominations Committee\n\nThe Remuneration and Nominations Committee makes recommendations to our board of directors in relation to total remuneration of directors and executives and reviews their remuneration annually. The Committee members are all independent directors, and independent external advice is sought when required.\n\n## Remuneration Consultant\n\nGiven the unique structure of being traded on the ASX but having a U.S.-based management team and operations, the Remuneration and Nominations Committee retained Meridian Compensation Partners, LLC (Meridian) as its independent remuneration consultant for the 2014 fiscal year. Meridian was retained to provide executive and director remuneration consulting services to the Committee, including advice regarding the design and implementation of remuneration programs that are competitive and common among the U.S. oil and gas exploration and production industry, competitive market information, comparison advice with Australian companies and practice, regulatory updates and analyses and trends on executive base salary,\n\n- 32 -", + "recall": 0.9787234042553191, + "true_md": "## Stock Ownership Guidelines Ownership of our stock by our executives aligns their interests with the interests of our shareholders. Accordingly, the Board of\n\n## Claw Back Provisions The Board, in its sole discretion, shall reserve the right to claw back any incentive awards issued if any of the following conditions\n\n## E. Remuneration Policy and Framework\n\n- 32 - \n\n## Remuneration Consultant Given the unique structure of being traded on the ASX but having a U.S.-based management team and operations, the\n\n## The Remuneration and Nominations Committee The Remuneration and Nominations Committee makes recommendations to our board of directors in relation to total\n\nThe Remuneration and Nominations Committee The Remuneration and Nominations Committee makes recommendations to our board of directors in relation to total remuneration of directors and executives and reviews their remuneration annually. The Committee members are all independent directors, and independent external advice is sought when required. \n\nRemuneration Consultant Given the unique structure of being traded on the ASX but having a U.S.-based management team and operations, the Remuneration and Nominations Committee retained Meridian Compensation Partners, LLC (Meridian) as its independent remuneration consultant for the 2014 fiscal year. Meridian was retained to provide executive and director remuneration consulting services to the Committee, including advice regarding the design and implementation of remuneration programs that are competitive and common among the U.S. oil and gas exploration and production industry, competitive market information, comparison advice with Australian companies and practice, regulatory updates and analyses and trends on executive base salary, \n\nClaw Back Provisions The Board, in its sole discretion, shall reserve the right to claw back any incentive awards issued if any of the following conditions apply: • The Company’s financial statements are required to be restated due to material non-compliance with any financial \n\nStock Ownership Guidelines Ownership of our stock by our executives aligns their interests with the interests of our shareholders. Accordingly, the Board of Directors maintains stock ownership guidelines for certain key executive officers. The applicable level of ownership is required to be achieved within five years of the later of the date these guidelines were adopted or the date the person first became an executive officer and is based on the executive’s salary at the time these guidelines were adopted or date person first became subject to guidelines. The net shares acquired through incentive compensation plans (through the exercise of stock options, or the vesting of RSUs or performance shares) must be retained if the executive has not satisfied his or her targeted ownership. An executive’s failure to meet the stock ownership guidelines may influence an executive’s future mix of cash and non-cash compensation awarded by the Committee. Executives are not permitted to pledge their shares or invest in derivatives involving Company shares. Ownership is reviewed at least annually when compensation decisions are made. \n\nThe following table shows share ownership as a multiple of base pay as at 31 December 2014, based on the Company’s weighted average closing stock pricing of $0.95, calculated at the weighted average closing stock price translated into USD by multiplying by a weighted average FX rate (per the Reserve Bank of Australia), during the 2014 fiscal year.\n\n- apply: • The Company’s financial statements are required to be restated due to material non-compliance with any financial reporting requirements under the federal securities laws (other than a restatement due to a change in accounting rules); \n\n- $^{and }$o As a result of such restatement, a performance measure which was a material factor in determining the award is restated, and o In the discretion of the Board, a lower payment would have been made to the executive officer based upon the \n\n- is restated, and o In the discretion of the Board, a lower payment would have been made to the executive officer based upon the restated financial results; Should it subsequently be found that the information or assumptions are materially erroneous; \n\n- restated financial results; • Should it subsequently be found that the information or assumptions are materially erroneous; • In the event that there is evidence of fraud by any employee resulting in material adverse change in the Company’s \n\n- • Should it subsequently be found that the information or assumptions are materially erroneous; • In the event that there is evidence of fraud by any employee resulting in material adverse change in the Company’s financial statements; • In the event that there is a material adverse change in the circumstances of the Company. \n\n- financial statements; • In the event that there is a material adverse change in the circumstances of the Company." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8794572156092244, + "doc_id": "fe05a6c3c0d99c05b60d55ffc6f19c5207e86e48fe45457255ae4ab37bce868e", + "edit_distance": 0.10804597701149425, + "f1_score": 0.9613259668508286, + "meteor": 0.9397248069582371, + "precision": 0.9666666666666667, + "pred_md": "Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nSMFG\n\n- 8. Information on amortization of goodwill and unamortized balance by reportable segment\n\n9. Information on gains on negative goodwill by reportable segment There is no material information to be reported for the fiscal year ended March 31, 2011.\n\n- 0. Information on total credit cost by reportable segment 1\n\nNotes: 1. Total credit cost = Provision for reserve for possible loan losses + Write-off of loans + Losses on sales of delinquent loans + Gains on recoveries of written-off claims 2. 'Other business' includes profit or loss to be offset as internal transactions between segments.\n\n## Fiscal year ended March 31, 2010\n\n- (1) Business segment information\n\nNotes: 1. The business segmentation is classified based on SMFG's internal management purpose. Ordinary income and ordinary profit are presented as counterparts of sales and operating profit of companies in other industries.\n\n- 2. 'Other business' includes securities, credit card, investment banking, loans, venture capital, system development and information processing.\n- 3. Assets in Elimination include unallocated corporate assets of ¥6,214,065 million at March 31, 2010, which mainly consist of investments in subsidiaries and affiliates.\n- 4. Ordinary income represents total income excluding gains on disposal of fixed assets, recoveries of written-off claims and other extraordinary gains. Ordinary expenses represent total expenses excluding losses on disposal of fixed assets, losses on impairment of fixed assets and other extraordinary expenses.\n- 5. As mentioned in Note 2. (22) (a), 'Accounting Standard for Financial Instruments' (ASBJ Statement No. 10, partially revised on March 10, 2008) and 'Implementation Guidance on Disclosures about Fair Value of Financial Instruments' (ASBJ Guidance No. 19, issued on March 10, 2008) became effective from the fiscal year ending on and after March 31, 2010, and SMFG has applied them from the fiscal year ended March 31, 2010. As a result of the accounting change, Ordinary expenses of 'Banking business' for the year ended March 31, 2010 decreased by ¥19,251 million and Ordinary profit of 'Banking business' increased by ¥19,251 million as compared with the former method. Assets of 'Banking business' increased by ¥59,270 million and Assets of 'Other business' decreased by ¥703 million.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n129", + "recall": 0.9560439560439561, + "true_md": "SMFG Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n- 8. Information on amortization of goodwill and unamortized balance by reportable segment\n\n- 9. Information on gains on negative goodwill by reportable segment There is no material information to be reported for the fiscal year ended March 31, 2011.\n\n- 0. Information on total credit cost by reportable segment 1\n\nNotes: 1. Total credit cost = Provision for reserve for possible loan losses + Write-off of loans + Losses on sales of delinquent loans + Gains on recoveries of written-off claims\n\n2. “Other business” includes profit or loss to be offset as internal transactions between segments.\n\n## Fiscal year ended March 31, 2010\n\nNotes: 1. The business segmentation is classified based on SMFG’s internal management purpose. Ordinary income and ordinary profit are presented as counterparts of sales and operating profit of companies in other industries.\n\n2. “Other business” includes securities, credit card, investment banking, loans, venture capital, system development and information processing.\n\n3. Assets in Elimination include unallocated corporate assets of ¥6,214,065 million at March 31, 2010, which mainly consist of investments in subsidiaries and affiliates.\n\n4. Ordinary income represents total income excluding gains on disposal of fixed assets, recoveries of written-off claims and other extraordinary gains. Ordinary expenses represent total expenses excluding losses on disposal of fixed assets, losses on impairment of fixed assets and other extraordinary expenses.\n\n5. As mentioned in Note 2. (22) (a), “Accounting Standard for Financial Instruments” (ASBJ Statement No. 10, partially revised on March 10, 2008) and “Implementation Guidance on Disclosures about Fair Value of Financial Instruments” (ASBJ Guidance No. 19, issued on March 10, 2008) became effective from the fiscal year ending on and after March 31, 2010, and SMFG has applied them from the fiscal year ended March 31, 2010. As a result of the accounting change, Ordinary expenses of “Banking business” for the year ended March 31, 2010 decreased by ¥19,251 million and Ordinary profit of “Banking business” increased by ¥19,251 million as compared with the former method. Assets of “Banking business” increased by ¥59,270 million and Assets of “Other business” decreased by ¥703 million.\n\nSMFG 2011 129\n\n- (1) Business segment information" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7993880403826839, + "doc_id": "afb6bc96fb5010283391640dd92078e2a4ecd8f3f65b317fe1b9cba71d0123a0", + "edit_distance": 0.18882175226586104, + "f1_score": 0.9745958429561201, + "meteor": 0.84242265416087, + "precision": 0.9768518518518519, + "pred_md": "## Item 9. Changes in and Disagreements With Accountants on Accounting and Financial Disclosure.\n\nNone.\n\n## Item 9A. Controls and Procedures.\n\n## DISCLOSURE CONTROLS AND PROCEDURES\n\nAs of the end of the period covered by this Annual Report on Form 10-K, the Company performed an evaluation under the supervision and with the participation of management, including our President and Chief Financial Officer, of the design and effectiveness of our disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in rules 13a-15(e) or 15d-15(e) under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (the 'Exchange Act')). Based upon that evaluation, our President and Chief Financial Officer concluded that, as of the end of the period covered by this Annual Report, our disclosure controls and procedures were effective in the timely and accurate recording, processing, summarizing and reporting of material financial and non-financial information within the time periods specified within the Commission's rules and forms. Our President and Chief Financial Officer also concluded that our disclosure controls and procedures were effective to ensure that information required to be disclosed in the reports that we file or submit under the Exchange Act is accumulated and communicated to our management, including our President and Chief Financial Officer, to allow timely decisions regarding required disclosure.\n\n## CHANGES IN INTERNAL CONTROL OVER FINANCIAL REPORTING\n\nThere have been no changes in our internal control over financial reporting (as defined in Rules 13a-15(f) or 15d-15(f) of the Exchange Act) during our most recently completed fiscal quarter that have materially affected, or are reasonably likely to materially affect, our internal control over financial reporting.\n\n## MANAGEMENT'S REPORT ON INTERNAL CONTROL OVER FINANCIAL REPORTING\n\nOur management is responsible for establishing and maintaining adequate internal control over financial reporting, as is defined in the Securities Exchange Act of 1934. These internal controls are designed to provide reasonable assurance that the reported financial information is presented fairly, that disclosures are adequate and that the judgments inherent in the preparation of financial statements are reasonable. There are inherent limitations in the effectiveness of any system of internal control, including the possibility of human error and overriding of controls. Consequently, an effective internal control system can only provide reasonable, not absolute, assurance with respect to reporting financial information.\n\nManagement conducted an evaluation of the effectiveness of our internal control over financial reporting based on the framework and criteria established in Internal Control - Integrated Framework (2013), issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission. Based on this evaluation, management concluded that the Company's internal control over financial reporting was effective as of January 31, 2015.\n\nDeloitte & Touche LLP, an independent registered public accounting firm, is retained to audit Nordstrom's consolidated financial statements and the effectiveness of the Company's internal control over financial reporting. They have issued an attestation report on the Company's internal control over financial reporting as of January 31, 2015, which is included herein.\n\n66", + "recall": 0.9723502304147466, + "true_md": "## Item 9. Changes in and Disagreements With Accountants on Accounting and Financial Disclosure.\n\n## Item 9A. Controls and Procedures.\n\n## DISCLOSURE CONTROLS AND PROCEDURES As of the end of the period covered by this Annual Report on Form 10-K, the Company performed an evaluation under the supervision and\n\n## CHANGES IN INTERNAL CONTROL OVER FINANCIAL REPORTING There have been no changes in our internal control over financial reporting (as defined in Rules 13a-15(f) or 15d-15(f) of the Exchange Act)\n\n## MANAGEMENT’S REPORT ON INTERNAL CONTROL OVER FINANCIAL REPORTING Our management is responsible for establishing and maintaining adequate internal control over financial reporting, as is defined in the\n\nNone.\n\nDISCLOSURE CONTROLS AND PROCEDURES As of the end of the period covered by this Annual Report on Form 10-K, the Company performed an evaluation under the supervision and with the participation of management, including our President and Chief Financial Officer, of the design and effectiveness of our disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in rules 13a-15(e) or 15d-15(e) under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (the “Exchange Act”)). Based upon that evaluation, our President and Chief Financial Officer concluded that, as of the end of the period covered by this Annual Report, our disclosure controls and procedures were effective in the timely and accurate recording, processing, summarizing and reporting of material financial and non-financial information within the time periods specified within the Commission’s rules and forms. Our President and Chief Financial Officer also concluded that our disclosure controls and procedures were effective to ensure that information required to be disclosed in the reports that we file or submit under the Exchange Act is accumulated and communicated to our management, including our President and Chief Financial Officer, to allow timely decisions regarding required disclosure.\n\nCHANGES IN INTERNAL CONTROL OVER FINANCIAL REPORTING There have been no changes in our internal control over financial reporting (as defined in Rules 13a-15(f) or 15d-15(f) of the Exchange Act) during our most recently completed fiscal quarter that have materially affected, or are reasonably likely to materially affect, our internal control over financial reporting.\n\nMANAGEMENT’S REPORT ON INTERNAL CONTROL OVER FINANCIAL REPORTING Our management is responsible for establishing and maintaining adequate internal control over financial reporting, as is defined in the Securities Exchange Act of 1934. These internal controls are designed to provide reasonable assurance that the reported financial information is presented fairly, that disclosures are adequate and that the judgments inherent in the preparation of financial statements are reasonable. There are inherent limitations in the effectiveness of any system of internal control, including the possibility of human error and overriding of controls. Consequently, an effective internal control system can only provide reasonable, not absolute, assurance with respect to reporting financial information.\n\nManagement conducted an evaluation of the effectiveness of our internal control over financial reporting based on the framework and criteria established in Internal Control – Integrated Framework (2013), issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission. Based on this evaluation, management concluded that the Company’s internal control over financial reporting was effective as of January 31, 2015.\n\nDeloitte & Touche LLP, an independent registered public accounting firm, is retained to audit Nordstrom’s consolidated financial statements and the effectiveness of the Company’s internal control over financial reporting. They have issued an attestation report on the Company’s internal control over financial reporting as of January 31, 2015, which is included herein.\n\n66" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8901058240584605, + "doc_id": "f64441c6a0630308eab1552501777a48ca9d23c2ecbd9eb0f59915a89b8eda01", + "edit_distance": 0.1643002028397566, + "f1_score": 0.9755011135857461, + "meteor": 0.9113769864554502, + "precision": 0.9776785714285714, + "pred_md": "The Directors' fees for the 2014 fiscal year are:\n\n(Note: The above amounts are paid to the Australian non-executive directors in Australian dollars. For the US based nonexecutive director the same nominal amounts were paid in US dollars.)\n\nDuring 2013, on the recommendation of the Managing Director, an additional amount of A$85,000 was paid to each of the three Australian non-executive directors for the additional work carried out and additional time required during the second half of 2012 and the first quarter of 2013 related to the South Antelope sale, Wells Fargo Credit Facility, Wattenberg acquisition, and the Texon Scheme of Arrangement. Also during 2013, an amount of US$80,000 was paid to the US-based non-executive director upon joining the Board of Directors as an incentive to attract high calibre talent to the Board.\n\n## H. Voting and Comments made at the Company's Year Ended 31 December 2013 Annual General Meeting\n\nThe Company received more than 96% of 'yes' votes on its remuneration report for the financial year ended 31 December 2013. The Committee values feedback from the shareholders and engages in conversations with key shareholders and their advisors on a regular basis.\n\n## I. Employment Contracts\n\n## Eric McCrady -Managing Director and CEO\n\nThe Managing Director's employment contract has a three year term commencing 1 January 2014 with base remuneration of US$370,000 per year which is reviewed annually by the Remuneration and Nominations Committee. He is eligible to participate in the Incentive Compensation Plan. The Managing Director is entitled to the specified remuneration and benefits through the term of the agreement. The Company may terminate the Managing Director's employment at any time for good cause (for example, material breach of contract, gross negligence) without notice and the Managing Director may give 90 days' notice to terminate the employment contract; both of which result in the Managing Director receiving pay through the period of services performed.\n\nIn the instance of a change in control of the Company, at the instigation of the Board of Directors, if the Managing Director's title and duties are substantially reduced then the Managing Director, within two months of such reduction in status, may provide two weeks written notice to the Company as being terminated by the Company other than for good cause and will receive his base salary through the end of the contract term.\n\nAt the date of this report, no other directors nor other key management personnel have employment contracts.\n\n- 40 -", + "recall": 0.9733333333333334, + "true_md": "The Directors’ fees for the 2014 fiscal year are: \n\n(Note: The above amounts are paid to the Australian non-executive directors in Australian dollars. For the US based non- executive director the same nominal amounts were paid in US dollars.) \n\nDuring 2013, on the recommendation of the Managing Director, an additional amount of A$85,000 was paid to each of the three Australian non-executive directors for the additional work carried out and additional time required during the second half of 2012 and the first quarter of 2013 related to the South Antelope sale, Wells Fargo Credit Facility, Wattenberg acquisition, and the Texon Scheme of Arrangement. Also during 2013, an amount of US$80,000 was paid to the US-based non-executive director upon joining the Board of Directors as an incentive to attract high calibre talent to the Board. \n\nThe Company received more than 96% of ‘yes’ votes on its remuneration report for the financial year ended 31 December 2013. The Committee values feedback from the shareholders and engages in conversations with key shareholders and their advisors on a regular basis. \n\n## H. Voting and Comments made at the Company’s Year Ended 31 December 2013 Annual General Meeting\n\n## I. Employment Contracts\n\n## Eric McCrady - Managing Director and CEO The Managing Director’s employment contract has a three year term commencing 1 January 2014 with base remuneration of\n\nEric McCrady - Managing Director and CEO The Managing Director’s employment contract has a three year term commencing 1 January 2014 with base remuneration of US$370,000 per year which is reviewed annually by the Remuneration and Nominations Committee. He is eligible to participate in the Incentive Compensation Plan. The Managing Director is entitled to the specified remuneration and benefits through the term of the agreement. The Company may terminate the Managing Director’s employment at any time for good cause (for example, material breach of contract, gross negligence) without notice and the Managing Director may give 90 days’ notice to terminate the employment contract; both of which result in the Managing Director receiving pay through the period of services performed.\n\nIn the instance of a change in control of the Company, at the instigation of the Board of Directors, if the Managing Director’s title and duties are substantially reduced then the Managing Director, within two months of such reduction in status, may provide two weeks written notice to the Company as being terminated by the Company other than for good cause and will receive his base salary through the end of the contract term. \n\nAt the date of this report, no other directors nor other key management personnel have employment contracts. \n\n- 40 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6736301317954333, + "doc_id": "51d6194b62f6ac768916bcf0e695e189edb70e2b3ff3f20adaf66eff1c4be152", + "edit_distance": 0.3283582089552239, + "f1_score": 0.9858490566037736, + "meteor": 0.6430520927375921, + "precision": 0.990521327014218, + "pred_md": "## Allowance for Credit Losses and Credit Trends\n\nThe following table illustrates activity in the allowance for credit losses:\n\n## Credit Trends\n\nDuring 2014, our delinquency and net write-off results continued to improve. Net write-offs in 2014 were $46, compared with $57 in 2013 and $72 in 2012. As delinquencies and net write-offs improved in both 2014 and 2013, we reduced our allowance for credit losses by $5 in both 2014 and 2013.\n\n## Credit Quality\n\nThe quality of our credit card receivables at any time reflects, among other factors, general economic conditions, the creditworthiness of our cardholders and the success of our account management and collection activities. In general, credit quality tends to decline, and the risk of credit losses tends to increase, during periods of deteriorating economic conditions. Through our underwriting and risk management standards and practices, we seek to maintain a high-quality cardholder portfolio, thereby mitigating our exposure to credit losses. As of January 31, 2015, 79.0% of our credit card receivables were from cardholders with FICO scores of 660 or above (generally considered 'prime' according to industry standards) compared with 78.1% as of February 1, 2014. See Note 3: Accounts Receivable in Item 8: Financial Statements and Supplementary Data for additional information.\n\n## Intercompany Merchant Fees\n\nIntercompany merchant fees represent the estimated costs that would be incurred if our cardholders used third-party cards in our Nordstrom stores and online. In 2014, this estimate increased to $108 or 5.0% of average credit card receivables from $97 or 4.6% in 2013. This was primarily driven by the increased use of our credit and debit cards in store and online, as reflected by an increase in inside volume as a percent of total volume from 53.6% in 2013 to 55.8% in 2014.\n\n## TOTAL COMPANY RESULTS\n\n## Interest Expense, Net\n\nInterest expense is summarized in the following table:\n\n## Interest Expense, Net (2014 vs. 2013)\n\nInterest expense, net decreased $23 in 2014 compared with 2013 due to a non-recurring charge of $14 in 2013 related to our debt refinancing, as well as lower average interest rates on our notes in 2014 driven by our fourth quarter 2013 debt transactions.\n\n## Interest Expense, Net (2013 vs. 2012)\n\nInterest expense, net increased $1 in 2013 compared with 2012 due to $14 in non-recurring charges related to our debt refinancing, partially offset by an increase in capitalized interest resulting primarily from planned capital investments related to our Manhattan store and accelerated Nordstrom Rack growth.\n\nNordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 23", + "recall": 0.9812206572769953, + "true_md": "Allowance for Credit Losses and Credit Trends The following table illustrates activity in the allowance for credit losses:\n\n## Credit Trends During 2014, our delinquency and net write-off results continued to improve. Net write-offs in 2014 were $46, compared with $57 in 2013 and\n\n## Credit Quality The quality of our credit card receivables at any time reflects, among other factors, general economic conditions, the creditworthiness of our\n\n## Intercompany Merchant Fees Intercompany merchant fees represent the estimated costs that would be incurred if our cardholders used third-party cards in our Nordstrom\n\n## TOTAL COMPANY RESULTS\n\n## Interest Expense, Net Interest expense is summarized in the following table:\n\nCredit Trends During 2014, our delinquency and net write-off results continued to improve. Net write-offs in 2014 were $46, compared with $57 in 2013 and $72 in 2012. As delinquencies and net write-offs improved in both 2014 and 2013, we reduced our allowance for credit losses by $5 in both 2014 and 2013.\n\nCredit Quality The quality of our credit card receivables at any time reflects, among other factors, general economic conditions, the creditworthiness of our cardholders and the success of our account management and collection activities. In general, credit quality tends to decline, and the risk of credit losses tends to increase, during periods of deteriorating economic conditions. Through our underwriting and risk management standards and practices, we seek to maintain a high-quality cardholder portfolio, thereby mitigating our exposure to credit losses. As of January 31, 2015, 79.0% of our credit card receivables were from cardholders with FICO scores of 660 or above (generally considered “prime” according to industry standards) compared with 78.1% as of February 1, 2014. See Note 3: Accounts Receivable in Item 8: Financial Statements and Supplementary Data for additional information.\n\nIntercompany Merchant Fees Intercompany merchant fees represent the estimated costs that would be incurred if our cardholders used third-party cards in our Nordstrom stores and online. In 2014, this estimate increased to $108 or 5.0% of average credit card receivables from $97 or 4.6% in 2013. This was primarily driven by the increased use of our credit and debit cards in store and online, as reflected by an increase in inside volume as a percent of total volume from 53.6% in 2013 to 55.8% in 2014.\n\nInterest Expense, Net Interest expense is summarized in the following table:\n\nInterest Expense, Net (2014 vs. 2013) Interest expense, net decreased $23 in 2014 compared with 2013 due to a non-recurring charge of $14 in 2013 related to our debt refinancing, as well as lower average interest rates on our notes in 2014 driven by our fourth quarter 2013 debt transactions.\n\nInterest Expense, Net (2013 vs. 2012) Interest expense, net increased $1 in 2013 compared with 2012 due to $14 in non-recurring charges related to our debt refinancing, partially offset by an increase in capitalized interest resulting primarily from planned capital investments related to our Manhattan store and accelerated Nordstrom Rack growth.\n\n## Interest Expense, Net (2014 vs. 2013) Interest expense, net decreased $23 in 2014 compared with 2013 due to a non-recurring charge of $14 in 2013 related to our debt\n\n## Interest Expense, Net (2013 vs. 2012) Interest expense, net increased $1 in 2013 compared with 2012 due to $14 in non-recurring charges related to our debt refinancing, partially\n\nNordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 23\n\n## Allowance for Credit Losses and Credit Trends The following table illustrates activity in the allowance for credit losses:" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8919941837441826, + "doc_id": "806b75e88621b015bb500da2426e6040d0283208161ad10d7974a652e12734da", + "edit_distance": 0.9322916666666666, + "f1_score": 0.946188340807175, + "meteor": 0.6365534408172222, + "precision": 0.9634703196347032, + "pred_md": "## (1) Internal Loss Data\n\nInternal loss data are defined as 'the information on events in which SMFG and SMBC incur losses resulting from the realization of operational risk.' At SMFG and SMBC, internal loss data are collected for all cases where the gross loss amount is at least one yen (the threshold amount), and seven years of internal loss data are directly used in the quantification of required capital for operational risk.\n\n## (2) External Loss Data\n\nExternal loss data are defined as 'the information on events in which other banks, etc., incur losses resulting from the realization of operational risk.' SMFG and other Group companies collect external loss data where such losses may occur within the Group.\n\n## (3) Business Environment and Internal Control Factors (BEICFs)\n\nBEICFs are defined as 'indicators of operational risk profiles of SMFG and SMBC that reflect underlying business risk factors and an assessment of the effectiveness of the internal control factors.' The Group periodically collects data relating to changes in laws and regulations, changes in internal rules and processes, and launch of new business and products pertinent to the Group's business operations.\n\n## (4) Scenario Analysis through Risk Control Assessments\n\nRisk control assessment is defined as 'risk management methodology to (a) identify material operational risks, and describe them in terms of risk scenarios, (b) assess the risks and the effectiveness\n\nof controls, and (c) estimate the frequency and severity of risk scenarios.' SMFG and SMBC apply this methodology to their principal business activities.\n\nThe purpose of risk control assessment is to identify material and potential operational risks pertinent to business processes, to measure them, and to develop and carry out a risk mitigation plan to manage the risks. Another purpose of risk control assessment is to estimate the frequency of low-frequency and high-severity events for each scenario (which may be difficult to estimate using internal loss data alone).\n\nDuring the process of periodic risk control assessment, operational risks inherent in various business processes are recognized as 'scenarios.' The risk and control conditions for each scenario are assessed, and the frequency of occurrence and amount of losses are estimated based on them. The assessment process comprises three steps: (i) initial assessment, (ii) Operational Risk Management Department review, and (iii) final assessment. Through the process, the frequency of 'low-frequency and high-severity' events for each scenario are estimated in terms of four loss amounts (¥100 million, ¥1 billion, ¥5 billion, and ¥10 billion).\n\nAs an effective mechanism for mitigating operational risks, the maximum loss occurring once in 100 years (hereinafter, 'scenario exposure') is calculated for each scenario derived through the risk control assessment, and then a magnitude rating is provided by classifying them into five categories according to the severity of loss. Risk mitigation plans are developed by the relevant business units for those scenarios with high-severity risk identified through magnitude rating.\n\n## ■ Flowchart for Risk Control Assessment (Example)\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n44", + "recall": 0.9295154185022027, + "true_md": "of controls, and (c) estimate the frequency and severity of risk sce- narios.” SMFG and SMBC apply this methodology to their principal business activities.\n\nThe purpose of risk control assessment is to identify material and potential operational risks pertinent to business processes, to measure them, and to develop and carry out a risk mitigation plan to manage the risks. Another purpose of risk control assessment is to estimate the frequency of low-frequency and high-severity events for each scenario (which may be difficult to estimate using internal loss data alone).\n\nDuring the process of periodic risk control assessment, opera- tional risks inherent in various business processes are recognized as “scenarios.” The risk and control conditions for each scenario are assessed, and the frequency of occurrence and amount of losses are estimated based on them. The assessment process comprises three steps: (i) initial assessment, (ii) Operational Risk Management Department review, and (iii) final assessment. Through the process, the frequency of “low-frequency and high-severity” events for each scenario are estimated in terms of four loss amounts (¥100 million, ¥1 billion, ¥5 billion, and ¥10 billion).\n\nAs an effective mechanism for mitigating operational risks, the maximum loss occurring once in 100 years (hereinafter, “scenario exposure”) is calculated for each scenario derived through the risk control assessment, and then a magnitude rating is provided by classifying them into five categories according to the severity of loss. Risk mitigation plans are developed by the relevant business units for those scenarios with high-severity risk identified through magnitude rating.\n\nRisk control assessment is defined as “risk management methodol- ogy to (a) identify material operational risks, and describe them in terms of risk scenarios, (b) assess the risks and the effectiveness \n\n## (4) Scenario Analysis through Risk Control Assessments\n\n## (3) Business Environment and Internal Control Factors (BEICFs)\n\n## (2) External Loss Data\n\n## (1) Internal Loss Data\n\nInternal loss data are defined as “the information on events in which SMFG and SMBC incur losses resulting from the realization of oper- ational risk.” At SMFG and SMBC, internal loss data are collected for all cases where the gross loss amount is at least one yen (the threshold amount), and seven years of internal loss data are directly used in the quantification of required capital for operational risk.\n\nExternal loss data are defined as “the information on events in which other banks, etc., incur losses resulting from the realization of operational risk.” SMFG and other Group companies collect external loss data where such losses may occur within the Group.\n\nBEICFs are defined as “indicators of operational risk profiles of SMFG and SMBC that reflect underlying business risk factors and an assessment of the effectiveness of the internal control factors.” The Group periodically collects data relating to changes in laws and regulations, changes in internal rules and processes, and launch of new business and products pertinent to the Group’s business operations.\n\n■ Flowchart for Risk Control Assessment (Example)\n\n44\n\nSMFG 2011" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.820992419136635, + "doc_id": "cd753ba7051c1ac8d262ebd177c72456788e5eaae223843ec5b4e4e714b2b841", + "edit_distance": 0.33088235294117646, + "f1_score": 0.9379310344827586, + "meteor": 0.8937226684166162, + "precision": 0.9379310344827586, + "pred_md": "SMFG\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n## 14. Other Liabilities\n\nOther liabilities at March 31, 2011 and 2010 consisted of the following:\n\n*1 Referred to in Note 32\n\n*2 Average interest rate on lease liabilities for the year ended March 31, 2011 was 4.60%. Non-transfer ownership finance lease with the lease term commenced before April 1, 2008 is excluded from calculations of average interest rate.\n\nThe repayment schedule over the next 5 years on lease liabilities at March 31, 2011 was as follows:\n\n## 15. Land Revaluation Excess\n\nSMBC and certain consolidated subsidiary revaluated their own land for business activities in accordance with the 'Act on Revaluation of Land' (the 'Act') (Act No. 34, effective March 31, 1998) and 'Act for Partial Revision of Act on Revaluation of Land' (Act No. 19, effective March 31, 2001). The income taxes corresponding to the net unrealized gains are reported in 'Liabilities' as 'Deferred tax liabilities for land revaluation,' and the net unrealized gains, net of deferred taxes, are reported as 'Land revaluation excess' in 'Net assets.'\n\nA certain affiliate revaluated its own land for business activities in accordance with the Act. The net unrealized gains, net of deferred taxes, are reported as 'Land revaluation excess' in 'Net assets.'\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n88\n\nDate of the revaluation SMBC:\n\nMarch 31, 1998 and March 31, 2002\n\nA consolidated subsidiary and an affiliate:\n\nMarch 31, 1999 and March 31, 2002\n\nMethod of revaluation (stipulated in Article 3-3 of the Act) SMBC:\n\nFair values were determined by applying appropriate adjustments for land shape and timing of appraisal to the values stipulated in Article 2-3, 2-4 or 2-5 of 'Order for Enforcement of Act on Revaluation of Land' (Cabinet Order No. 119 of March 31, 1998).\n\n- A consolidated subsidiary and an affiliate:\n\nFair values were determined based on the values stipulated in Articles 2-3 and 2-5 of 'Order for Enforcement of Act on Revaluation of Land' (Cabinet Order No. 119 of March 31, 1998).", + "recall": 0.9379310344827586, + "true_md": "Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nSMFG\n\n## 14. Other Liabilities\n\n## 15. Land Revaluation Excess\n\nOther liabilities at March 31, 2011 and 2010 consisted of the following:\n\n$^{*1}$ Referred to in Note 32\n\n*2 Average interest rate on lease liabilities for the year ended March 31, 2011 was 4.60%. Non-transfer ownership finance lease with the lease term commenced before April 1, 2008 is excluded from calculations of average interest rate.\n\nThe repayment schedule over the next 5 years on lease liabilities at March 31, 2011 was as follows:\n\nSMBC and certain consolidated subsidiary revaluated their own land for business activities in accordance with the “Act on Revaluation of Land” (the “Act”) (Act No. 34, effective March 31, 1998) and “Act for Partial Revision of Act on Revaluation of Land” (Act No. 19, effective March 31, 2001). The income taxes corresponding to the net unrealized gains are reported in “Liabilities” as “Deferred tax liabilities for land revaluation,” and the net unrealized gains, net of deferred taxes, are reported as “Land revaluation excess” in “Net assets.”\n\nA certain affiliate revaluated its own land for business activities in accordance with the Act. The net unrealized gains, net of deferred taxes, are reported as “Land revaluation excess” in “Net assets.”\n\nDate of the revaluation\n\nMethod of revaluation (stipulated in Article 3-3 of the Act)\n\n Fair values were determined by applying appropriate adjustments for land shape and timing of appraisal to the values stipulated in Article 2-3, 2-4 or 2-5 of “Order for Enforcement of Act on Revaluation of Land” (Cabinet Order No. 119 of March 31, 1998).\n\n Fair values were determined based on the values stipulated in Articles 2-3 and 2-5 of “Order for Enforcement of Act on Revaluation of Land” (Cabinet Order No. 119 of March 31, 1998).\n\nSMBC: March 31, 1998 and March 31, 2002\n\nA consolidated subsidiary and an affiliate: March 31, 1999 and March 31, 2002\n\nSMBC:\n\nA consolidated subsidiary and an affiliate:\n\nSMFG 2011 88" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8615498618302286, + "doc_id": "7a6b5c3f309125f649b1432b53d907f852bb0a43ea89014e3ff3fe31aad5478c", + "edit_distance": 0.9332191780821918, + "f1_score": 0.9700000000000001, + "meteor": 0.7697653903080749, + "precision": 0.9651741293532339, + "pred_md": "## 3. Trading Assets\n\nTrading assets at March 31, 2011 and 2010 consisted of the following:\n\n## 4. Securities\n\nSecurities at March 31, 2011 and 2010 consisted of the following:\n\n*1 Unsecured loaned securities for which borrowers have the right to sell or pledge in the amount of ¥50,935 million ($613 million) and ¥41,826 million are included in Japanese government bonds in Securities and in trading securities in Trading assets at March 31, 2011 and 2010, respectively.\n\nSMBC has the right to sell or pledge, some of the unsecured borrowed securities, securities under resale agreements and securities borrowed with cash collateral. Of these securities, ¥3,032,285 million ($36,468 million) are pledged, and ¥232,420 million ($2,795 million) are held in hand at March 31, 2011. The respective amounts at March 31, 2010 were ¥3,840,308 million and ¥133,566 million.\n\n*2 apanese corporate bonds include private placement bonds (stipulated by Article 2-3 of the Financial Instruments and Exchange Act) which are guaranteed by banking subsidiaries in J the amount of ¥1,969,902 million ($23,691 million) and ¥2,136,145 million at March 31, 2011 and 2010, respectively.\n\n*3 apanese stocks and other include investments in unconsolidated subsidiaries and affiliates of ¥279,829 million ($3,365 million) and ¥321,897 million at March 31, 2011 and 2010, J respectively.\n\n*4 apanese stocks and other include investments in jointly controlled entities of ¥97,868 million ($1,177 million) and ¥94,369 million at March 31, 2011 and 2010, respectively. J\n\n## 5. Loans and Bills Discounted\n\n- (1) Loans and bills discounted at March 31, 2011 and 2010 consisted of the following:\n\n(2) Loans and bills discounted included the following 'Risk-monitored loans' stipulated in the Banking Act:\n\n*1 Bankrupt loans' are loans, after write-off, to legally bankrupt borrowers as defined in Articles 96-1-3 and 96-1-4 of the Enforcement Ordinance No. 97 of the Japanese Corporate ' Tax Law (issued in 1965) and on which accrued interest income is not recognized as there is substantial doubt about the ultimate collectability of either principal or interest because they are past due for a considerable period of time or for other reasons.\n\n*2 Non-accrual loans' are loans on which accrued interest income is not recognized, excluding 'Bankrupt loans' and loans on which interest payments are deferred in order to ' support the borrowers' recovery from financial difficulties.\n\n*3 Past due loans (3 months or more)' are loans on which the principal or interest is past due for 3 months or more, excluding 'Bankrupt loans' and 'Non-accrual loans.' '\n\n*4 Restructured loans' are loans on which terms and conditions have been amended in favor of the borrowers (e.g., reduction of the original interest rate, deferral of interest ' payments, extension of principal repayments or debt forgiveness) in order to support the borrowers' recovery from financial difficulties, excluding 'Bankrupt loans,' 'Non-accrual loans' and 'Past due loans (3 months or more).'\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n83\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nSMFG", + "recall": 0.9748743718592965, + "true_md": "Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nSMFG\n\n## 3. Trading Assets\n\n## 4. Securities\n\n## 5. Loans and Bills Discounted\n\nTrading assets at March 31, 2011 and 2010 consisted of the following:\n\nSecurities at March 31, 2011 and 2010 consisted of the following:\n\n- (1) Loans and bills discounted at March 31, 2011 and 2010 consisted of the following:\n\n- (2) Loans and bills discounted included the following “Risk-monitored loans” stipulated in the Banking Act:\n\n*1 “Bankrupt loans” are loans, after write-off, to legally bankrupt borrowers as defined in Articles 96-1-3 and 96-1-4 of the Enforcement Ordinance No. 97 of the Japanese Corporate Tax Law (issued in 1965) and on which accrued interest income is not recognized as there is substantial doubt about the ultimate collectability of either principal or interest because they are past due for a considerable period of time or for other reasons. \n\n*2 “Non-accrual loans” are loans on which accrued interest income is not recognized, excluding “Bankrupt loans” and loans on which interest payments are deferred in order to support the borrowers’ recovery from financial difficulties.\n\n*3 “Past due loans (3 months or more)” are loans on which the principal or interest is past due for 3 months or more, excluding “Bankrupt loans” and “Non-accrual loans.”\n\n*4 “Restructured loans” are loans on which terms and conditions have been amended in favor of the borrowers (e.g., reduction of the original interest rate, deferral of interest payments, extension of principal repayments or debt forgiveness) in order to support the borrowers’ recovery from financial difficulties, excluding “Bankrupt loans,” “Non-accrual loans” and “Past due loans (3 months or more).”\n\nSMFG 2011 83\n\n*1 Unsecured loaned securities for which borrowers have the right to sell or pledge in the amount of ¥50,935 million ($613 million) and ¥41,826 million are included in Japanese government bonds in Securities and in trading securities in Trading assets at March 31, 2011 and 2010, respectively.\n\nSMBC has the right to sell or pledge, some of the unsecured borrowed securities, securities under resale agreements and securities borrowed with cash collateral. Of these securities, ¥3,032,285 million ($36,468 million) are pledged, and ¥232,420 million ($2,795 million) are held in hand at March 31, 2011. The respective amounts at March 31, 2010 were ¥3,840,308 million and ¥133,566 million.\n\n*2 Japanese corporate bonds include private placement bonds (stipulated by Article 2-3 of the Financial Instruments and Exchange Act) which are guaranteed by banking subsidiaries in the amount of ¥1,969,902 million ($23,691 million) and ¥2,136,145 million at March 31, 2011 and 2010, respectively.\n\n*3 Japanese stocks and other include investments in unconsolidated subsidiaries and affiliates of ¥279,829 million ($3,365 million) and ¥321,897 million at March 31, 2011 and 2010, respectively.\n\n*4 Japanese stocks and other include investments in jointly controlled entities of ¥97,868 million ($1,177 million) and ¥94,369 million at March 31, 2011 and 2010, respectively." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9921444380692452, + "doc_id": "d6ec81a544cd9d055b0be271ee195f4b511fadb6642c75296daf5cc674f9d6bf", + "edit_distance": 0.006220839813374806, + "f1_score": 0.9934065934065932, + "meteor": 0.994088311975384, + "precision": 0.9955947136563876, + "pred_md": "Natural gas liquids sales (NGL) . NGL sales increased by $5.4 million (169.5%) to $8.6 million for the year ended 31 December 2014 from $3.2 million for the same period in prior year. The increase in NGL revenues was primarily the result of increased production volumes in the Eagle Ford and Anardarko Basins. NGL production volumes increased 172,131 Bbls (179.6%) to 267,952 Bbls for the year ended 31 December 2014 compared to 95,821 Bbls for the prior year. The average price we realised on the sale of our natural gas liquids decreased by 3.6% to $32.24 per Bbl for the year ended 31 December 2014 from $33.45 per Bbl for the prior year.\n\nLease operating expenses. Our lease operating expenses (LOE) increased by $1.4 million (11.6%) to $13.5 million for the year ended 31 December 2014 from $12.1 million for the same period in prior year but decreased $5.21 per Boe to $6.03 per Boe from $11.23 per Boe. The decrease in LOE per Boe is primarily due to the implementation of several cost saving initiatives in our field operations such as replacing contract lease operators with Company employees and reducing total field head count per well.\n\nProduction taxes. Our production taxes increased by $0.7 million (11.2%) to $7.0 million for the year ended 31 December 2014 from $6.3 million for the prior year but as a percent of revenue decreased 290 basis points to 4.4% from 7.3%. The decrease in production taxes as a percent of revenue is the result of exiting North Dakota and Colorado, both higher production tax rate jurisdictions, and increasing our investment in Texas and Oklahoma, which are lower production tax rate jurisdictions, as well as an adjustment for lower than anticipated ad valorem taxes.\n\nDepreciation and amortisation expense, including depletion. Our depreciation and amortisation expense increased by $49.4 million (136.3%) to $85.6 million for the year ended 31 December 2014 from $36.2 million for the prior year and increased $4.58 per Boe to $38.15 per Boe from $33.57 per Boe. The increase reflects our increase in production (107.9%), an increase in our asset base subject to amortisation as a result of our acquisition and development activity, and increased completion costs caused by high-demand for completion services and a shortage of trucks able to transport frac sand and resultant higher trucking rates.\n\nGeneral and administrative expenses. General and administrative expenses per Boe decreased by 51.2% to $6.92 for the year ended 31 December 2014 as compared to $14.18 per Boe for the prior year. The decrease in general and administrative expenses per Boe is driven by increased production levels diluting fixed general and administrative costs.\n\nImpairment expense. The Company recorded impairment expense of $71.2 million for the year ended 31 December 2014 on the Company's development and production assets that are located in Greater Anadarko and the Eagle Ford as the recoverable amount was less than the carrying value primarily as a result of lower commodity pricing. No impairment was necessary on the Company's exploration and evaluation assets. See Note 17 of the Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements for further discussion.\n\nExploration expense. The Company incurred exploration expense of $10.9 million for the year ended 31 December 2014 on three unsuccessful exploratory wells in the Anadarko Basin. The Company did not drill any unsuccessful exploratory wells in the prior year.\n\n- 17 -", + "recall": 0.9912280701754386, + "true_md": "Natural gas liquids sales (NGL) . NGL sales increased by $5.4 million (169.5%) to $8.6 million for the year ended 31 December 2014 from $3.2 million for the same period in prior year. The increase in NGL revenues was primarily the result of increased production volumes in the Eagle Ford and Anardarko Basins. NGL production volumes increased 172,131 Bbls (179.6%) to 267,952 Bbls for the year ended 31 December 2014 compared to 95,821 Bbls for the prior year. The average price we realised on the sale of our natural gas liquids decreased by 3.6% to $32.24 per Bbl for the year ended 31 December 2014 from $33.45 per Bbl for the prior year. \n\nLease operating expenses. Our lease operating expenses (LOE) increased by $1.4 million (11.6%) to $13.5 million for the year ended 31 December 2014 from $12.1 million for the same period in prior year but decreased $5.21 per Boe to $6.03 per Boe from $11.23 per Boe. The decrease in LOE per Boe is primarily due to the implementation of several cost saving initiatives in our field operations such as replacing contract lease operators with Company employees and reducing total field head count per well. \n\nProduction taxes. Our production taxes increased by $0.7 million (11.2%) to $7.0 million for the year ended 31 December 2014 from $6.3 million for the prior year but as a percent of revenue decreased 290 basis points to 4.4% from 7.3%. The decrease in production taxes as a percent of revenue is the result of exiting North Dakota and Colorado, both higher production tax rate jurisdictions, and increasing our investment in Texas and Oklahoma, which are lower production tax rate jurisdictions, as well as an adjustment for lower than anticipated ad valorem taxes. \n\nDepreciation and amortisation expense, including depletion. Our depreciation and amortisation expense increased by $49.4 million (136.3%) to $85.6 million for the year ended 31 December 2014 from $36.2 million for the prior year and increased $4.58 per Boe to $38.15 per Boe from $33.57 per Boe. The increase reflects our increase in production (107.9%), an increase in our asset base subject to amortisation as a result of our acquisition and development activity, and increased completion costs caused by high-demand for completion services and a shortage of trucks able to transport frac sand and resultant higher trucking rates. \n\nGeneral and administrative expenses. General and administrative expenses per Boe decreased by 51.2% to $6.92 for the year ended 31 December 2014 as compared to $14.18 per Boe for the prior year. The decrease in general and administrative expenses per Boe is driven by increased production levels diluting fixed general and administrative costs. \n\nImpairment expense. The Company recorded impairment expense of $71.2 million for the year ended 31 December 2014 on the Company’s development and production assets that are located in Greater Anadarko and the Eagle Ford as the recoverable amount was less than the carrying value primarily as a result of lower commodity pricing. No impairment was necessary on the Company’s exploration and evaluation assets. See Note 17 of the Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements for further discussion. \n\nExploration expense. The Company incurred exploration expense of $10.9 million for the year ended 31 December 2014 on three unsuccessful exploratory wells in the Anadarko Basin. The Company did not drill any unsuccessful exploratory wells in the prior year. \n\n- 17 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9724100237252261, + "doc_id": "40beeffdc93f2887c95f048d8bfab20b0038cfe68880328d3e0fec0b3e0f46e4", + "edit_distance": 0.07420494699646643, + "f1_score": 0.9932432432432432, + "meteor": 0.9961961168955283, + "precision": 0.9932432432432432, + "pred_md": "## NOTE 18: LONG-TERM DEBT\n\n1 Senior notes and debentures originally issued by Rogers Cable Inc. which are now unsecured obligations of RCI and for which Rogers Communications Partnership (RCP) is an unsecured guarantor.\n\n2 Senior notes originally issued by Rogers Wireless Inc. which are now unsecured obligations of RCI and for which RCP is an unsecured co-obligor.\n\n## Bank Credit and Letter of Credit Facilities\n\nWe have a total of $2.5 billion of bank credit and letter of credit facilities. Each of these facilities is unsecured and guaranteed by RCP and ranks equally with all of our senior notes and debentures.\n\nAs at December 31, 2013, there were no advances outstanding under our $2.0 billion bank credit facility and letters of credit outstanding under our letter of credit facilities totalled $0.5 billion.\n\nThe bank credit facility is available on a fully revolving basis until maturity on July 20, 2017 and there are no scheduled reductions prior to maturity. The interest rate charged on borrowings from the bank credit facility ranges from nil to 1.25% per annum over the bank prime rate or base rate, or 1.00% to 2.25% over the bankers' acceptance rate or London Inter-Bank Offered Rate.\n\n## S enior Notes\n\nInterest is paid semi-annually on all of our senior notes and debentures. We have the option to redeem each of our senior notes and debentures, in whole or in part, at any time, if we pay the specified premium.\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC.\n\n111\n\nNOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS", + "recall": 0.9932432432432432, + "true_md": "NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 18: LONG-TERM DEBT\n\n1 Senior notes and debentures originally issued by Rogers Cable Inc. which are now unsecured obligations of RCI and for which Rogers Communications Partnership (RCP) is an unsecured guarantor.\n\n2 Senior notes originally issued by Rogers Wireless Inc. which are now unsecured obligations of RCI and for which RCP is an unsecured co-obligor.\n\n## Bank Credit and Letter of Credit Facilities\n\nWe have a total of $2.5 billion of bank credit and letter of credit facilities. Each of these facilities is unsecured and guaranteed by RCP and ranks equally with all of our senior notes and debentures.\n\nAs at December 31, 2013, there were no advances outstanding under our $2.0 billion bank credit facility and letters of credit outstanding under our letter of credit facilities totalled $0.5 billion.\n\nThe bank credit facility is available on a fully revolving basis until maturity on July 20, 2017 and there are no scheduled reductions prior to maturity. The interest rate charged on borrowings from the bank credit facility ranges from nil to 1.25% per annum over the bank prime rate or base rate, or 1.00% to 2.25% over the bankers’ acceptance rate or London Inter-Bank Offered Rate.\n\nInterest is paid semi-annually on all of our senior notes and debentures. We have the option to redeem each of our senior notes and debentures, in whole or in part, at any time, if we pay the specified premium.\n\n## S enior Notes\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 111" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8931185873155607, + "doc_id": "1d4c6771c9fc4ac7d881c159610868d8dd3b4965a9e3ee118e52ec652aa9af88", + "edit_distance": 0.50418410041841, + "f1_score": 0.9701492537313432, + "meteor": 0.9250598561879686, + "precision": 0.9653465346534653, + "pred_md": "## Capital Ratio Information\n\nSumitomo Mitsui Financial Group, Inc. and Subsidiaries\n\nThe consolidated capital ratio is calculated using the method stipulated in 'Standards for Bank Holding Company to Examine the Adequacy of Its Capital Based on Assets, Etc. Held by It and Its Subsidiaries Pursuant to Article 52-25 of the Banking Act' (Notification No. 20 issued by the Japanese Financial Services Agency in 2006; hereinafter referred to as 'the Notification').\n\nIn addition to the method stipulated in the Notification to calculate the consolidated capital ratio (referred to as 'First Standard' in the Notification), SMFG has adopted the advanced internal ratings-based (IRB) approach for calculating credit risk-weighted asset amounts. Further, SMFG has implemented market risk controls, and, in calculating the amount corresponding to operational risk, the Advanced Measurement Approach (AMA).\n\n'Capital Ratio Information' was prepared based on the Notification, and the terms and details in the section may differ from the terms and details in other sections of this report.\n\n## ■ Scope of Consolidation\n\n## 1. Consolidated Capital Ratio Calculation\n\n- GLYPH<129> Number of consolidated subsidiaries: 327\n- Please refer to 'Principal Subsidiaries and Affiliates' on page 216 for their names and business outline.\n- GLYPH<129> Scope of consolidated subsidiaries for calculation of the consolidated capital ratio is based on the scope of consolidated subsidiaries for preparing consolidated financial statements.\n- GLYPH<129> There are no affiliates to which the proportionate consolidation method is applied.\n- GLYPH<129> There are no companies engaged exclusively in ancillary banking business or in developing new businesses as stipulated in Article 52-23 of the Banking Act.\n\n## 2. Deduction from Capital\n\n- GLYPH<129> Number of nonconsolidated subsidiaries subject to deduction from capital: 210 Principal subsidiaries: SMLC MAHOGANY CO., LTD. (Office rental, etc.)\n\nSBCS Co., Ltd. (Venture capital and consulting)\n\n- GLYPH<129> Number of financial affiliates subject to deduction from capital: 59\n\nPlease refer to 'Principal Subsidiaries and Affiliates' on page 216 for their names and business outline.\n\n## 3. Restrictions on Movement of Funds and Capital within Holding Company Group\n\nThere are no special restrictions on movement of funds and capital among SMFG and its group companies.\n\n- 4. Companies Subject to Deduction from Capital, with Capital below Basel I I Required Amount and Total Shortfall Amount\n\nNot applicable.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\nSMFG\n\n179", + "recall": 0.975, + "true_md": "SMFG\n\n## Capital Ratio Information\n\nSumitomo Mitsui Financial Group, Inc. and Subsidiaries\n\nThe consolidated capital ratio is calculated using the method stipulated in “Standards for Bank Holding Company to Examine the Adequacy of Its Capital Based on Assets, Etc. Held by It and Its Subsidiaries Pursuant to Article 52-25 of the Banking Act” (Notification No. 20 issued by the Japanese Financial Services Agency in 2006; hereinafter referred to as “the Notification”).\n\nIn addition to the method stipulated in the Notification to calculate the consolidated capital ratio (referred to as “First Standard” in the Notification), SMFG has adopted the advanced internal ratings-based (IRB) approach for calculating credit risk-weighted asset amounts. Further, SMFG has implemented market risk controls, and, in calculating the amount corresponding to operational risk, the Advanced Measurement Approach (AMA).\n\n“Capital Ratio Information” was prepared based on the Notification, and the terms and details in the section may differ from the terms and details in other sections of this report.\n\nSMFG 2011 179\n\n- 4. Companies Subject to Deduction from Capital, with Capital below Basel II Required Amount and Total Shortfall Amount Not applicable.\n\n- 3. Restrictions on Movement of Funds and Capital within Holding Company Group There are no special restrictions on movement of funds and capital among SMFG and its group companies.\n\n## ■ Scope of Consolidation\n\n- GLYPH<129> Number of financial affiliates subject to deduction from capital: 59 Please refer to “Principal Subsidiaries and Affiliates” on page 216 for their names and business outline.\n\n- 2. Deduction from Capital\n\n- GLYPH<129> There are no companies engaged exclusively in ancillary banking business or in developing new businesses as stipulated in Article 52-23 of the Banking Act.\n\n- GLYPH<129> There are no affiliates to which the proportionate consolidation method is applied.\n\n- GLYPH<129> Scope of consolidated subsidiaries for calculation of the consolidated capital ratio is based on the scope of consolidated subsidiaries for preparing consolidated financial statements.\n\n- GLYPH<129> Number of consolidated subsidiaries: 327 Please refer to “Principal Subsidiaries and Affiliates” on page 216 for their names and business outline.\n\n- 1. Consolidated Capital Ratio Calculation\n\n- GLYPH<129> Number of nonconsolidated subsidiaries subject to deduction from capital: 210 Principal subsidiaries: SMLC MAHOGANY CO., LTD. (Office rental, etc.) SBCS Co., Ltd. (Venture capital and consulting)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.833276840473127, + "doc_id": "dfd6991b344bb8423e3ca33969f76fc685b7eb9a3b5b64fd07fc5d36a57debc7", + "edit_distance": 0.24118476727785615, + "f1_score": 0.9184692179700501, + "meteor": 0.8620383184013595, + "precision": 0.9324324324324325, + "pred_md": "## ■ Investment Banking\n\nSMFG consolidates the resources from the Investment Banking Unit of SMBC and SMBC Nikko Securities and other Group companies to assist its clients with their business development and enhancement of their corporate value by providing optimized solutions for the needs of its clients in areas such as fund-raising and asset management, M&A, risk-hedging, and payment and settlement.\n\nAs the businesses of our corporate clients become further globalized and the number of investors increases, SMBC Nikko Securities has began its operations of M&A advisory services, underwriting bonds and brokerage services (for Japanese stocks) at its overseas offices. We plan to further globalize our operations, and respond appropriately and timely to the sophisticated financial needs of our clients.\n\n## Collaboration with SMBC Nikko Securities\n\nAs of April 1, 2011, Nikko Cordial Securities, which became a wholly owned subsidiary of SMBC on October 1, 2009, changed its corporate name to SMBC Nikko Securities Inc. As the core securities firm for the Group, it has expanded its retail and wholesale businesses by closely working with SMBC.\n\nIn the league tables published by Thomson Reuters for fiscal 2010, SMFG was ranked fourth in the M&A advisory services category for publicly announced mergers involving Japanese companies with a market share of 19.2%. We placed fifth for underwriting amount for the 'Japanese Corporate Bonds' category (market share of 16.6%). We continue to strengthen the cooperation between SMBC Nikko Securities and SMBC and to respond to the diverse needs of our clients for raising capital from the market, cross-border M&A transactions and securitization.\n\n## Number of referrals by SMBC to SMBC Nikko Securities\n\nUnderwriting amount for\n\n## 'Japanese Corporate Bonds' Market share*\n\n*Source: Thomson Reuters\n\nUnderwriting amount for 'Japanese Corporate Bonds'\n\nInformation contained in this document for the period prior to September 2009 is\n\nbased on the information provided by the former Nikko Cordial Securities Inc.\n\n## Topics\n\n## ◆ Expansion of Securities Businesses in Overseas Markets\n\nThe SMBC's subsidiaries, SMBC Nikko Capital Markets Limited (UK) and SMBC Nikko Securities America, Inc. (US), have begun and are expanding their securities business operations in London and New York, respectively. SMBC Nikko Securities' wholly owned subsidiaries in Hong Kong and Shanghai also commenced securities business and M&A advisory service operations in January 2011.\n\nJune 30, 2011\n\nJune 30, 2011\n\n## ◆ Environmental Business\n\nSMBC established its Environmental Products Department in October 2007 to promote its environmental businesses. It also developed a cross-organizational 'Growing Industrial Cluster* 1 Project Team' in July 2010 to promote businesses associated with four growing industrial sectors. It crossorganizationally promotes efforts aimed at expanding, identifying and creating mid- to long-term business opportunities for our clients by cooperating with industries, government and universities, and collecting information from the domestic and international networks.\n\nAs a result of these measures, a CDM* 2 project, which we supported in Singapore for the trading of emission credits, became the country's first such large project to be registered by the United Nations, and we provided financing by utilizing the Nippon Export and Investment Insurance ('NEXI') for Vietnam's first hydroelectric power generation business by the private sector. These initiatives contributed to our nomination for the award of 'Sustainable Bank of the Year 2011 (CrossRegional category),' organized by the Financial Times and the International Finance Corporation.\n\n- * 1 he four growing industrial sectors are: the 'Environment,' 'New T Energy,' 'Water' and 'Natural Resources.'\n\n* 2 'Clean Development Mechanism'\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n13", + "recall": 0.9049180327868852, + "true_md": "## Topics\n\n## ◆ Expansion of Securities Businesses in Overseas Markets\n\n## ■ Investment Banking\n\n## Collaboration with SMBC Nikko Securities\n\n## Underwriting amount for “Japanese Corporate Bonds” Market share*\n\n## Number of referrals by SMBC to SMBC Nikko Securities\n\n## ◆ Environmental Business\n\nSMFG consolidates the resources from the Investment Banking Unit of SMBC and SMBC Nikko Securities and other Group companies to assist its clients with their business develop- ment and enhancement of their corporate value by providing optimized solutions for the needs of its clients in areas such as fund-raising and asset management, M&A, risk-hedging, and payment and settlement.\n\nAs the businesses of our corporate clients become further globalized and the number of investors increases, SMBC Nikko Securities has began its operations of M&A advisory services, underwriting bonds and brokerage services (for Japanese stocks) at its overseas offices. We plan to further globalize our operations, and respond appropriately and timely to the sophis- ticated financial needs of our clients.\n\nAs of April 1, 2011, Nikko Cordial Securities, which became a wholly owned subsidiary of SMBC on October 1, 2009, changed its corporate name to SMBC Nikko Securities Inc. As the core securities firm for the Group, it has expanded its retail and wholesale businesses by closely working with SMBC. \n\nIn the league tables published by Thomson Reuters for fiscal 2010, SMFG was ranked fourth in the M&A advisory services category for publicly announced mergers involving Japanese companies with a market share of 19.2%. We placed fifth for underwriting amount for the “Japanese Corporate Bonds” category (market share of 16.6%). We continue to strengthen the cooperation between SMBC Nikko Securities and SMBC and to respond to the diverse needs of our clients for raising capital from the market, cross-border M&A transactions and securitization.\n\n*Source: Thomson Reuters Underwriting amount for “Japanese Corporate Bonds” Information contained in this document for the period prior to September 2009 is based on the information provided by the former Nikko Cordial Securities Inc.\n\nThe SMBC’s subsidiaries, SMBC Nikko Capital Markets Limited (UK) and SMBC Nikko Securities America, Inc. (US), have begun and are expanding their securities business operations in London and New York, respectively. SMBC Nikko Securities’ wholly owned subsidiaries in Hong Kong and Shanghai also commenced securities business and M&A advisory service operations in January 2011.\n\nJune 30, 2011\n\nSMBC established its Environmental Products Department in October 2007 to promote its environmental businesses. It also developed a cross-organizational “Growing Industrial Cluster*$^{1}$ Project Team” in July 2010 to promote businesses associated with four growing industrial sectors. It cross- organizationally promotes efforts aimed at expanding, identi- fying and creating mid- to long-term business opportunities for our clients by cooperating with industries, government and universities, and collecting information from the domestic and international networks.\n\nAs a result of these measures, a CDM*$^{2}$ project, which we supported in Singapore for the trading of emission credits, became the country’s first such large project to be registered by the United Nations, and we provided financing by utiliz- ing the Nippon Export and Investment Insurance (“NEXI”) for Vietnam’s first hydroelectric power generation business by the private sector. These initiatives contributed to our nomination for the award of “Sustainable Bank of the Year 2011 (Cross- Regional category),” organized by the Financial Times and the International Finance Corporation.\n\n- * 1 The four growing industrial sectors are: the “Environment,” “New Energy,” “Water” and “Natural Resources.”\n\n- *$^{2}$ “Clean Development Mechanism”\n\n13\n\nSMFG 2011" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.771145140806683, + "doc_id": "25ee324a9247f448c04de9f9d0ae5b654dfca09073d8b78d1da5a4deb5dcc619", + "edit_distance": 0.6198830409356725, + "f1_score": 0.8878504672897196, + "meteor": 0.6751431162862542, + "precision": 0.9895833333333334, + "pred_md": "## CONNECTED HOME\n\n08 ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\nROGERS CONTINUES TO DEFINE HOW FAMILIES COME TOGETHER AND CONNECT WITH THEIR WORLD. MILLIONS OF CANADIANS DEPEND ON ROGERS TO KEEP THEM INFORMED, CONNECTED AND ENTERTAINED WITH A COMBINATION OF THE FASTEST INTERNET SPEEDS AND THE MOST INNOVATIVE TELEVISION, TELEPHONY AND HOME MONITORING SOLUTIONS AVAILABLE.\n\nThe core of Rogers connected home strategy is to provide customers with the fastest broadband connections, together with the ability to seamlessly shift - to shift time, to shift screens and to shift places so they access what they want, when they want, on the screen of their choice.\n\nRogers offers the best in on-demand, sports, movies, specialty, episodic and multicultural programming. Customers can schedule, pause, rewind", + "recall": 0.8050847457627118, + "true_md": "## CONNECTED HOME\n\nBROADBAND INTERNET\n\nHOME TELEPHONY\n\nWHOLE HOME PVR\n\nCATEGORY- LEADING MEDIA CONTENT\n\nANY SCREEN STREAMING TV\n\nE-MAIL & MESSAGING\n\nON-DEMAND VIDEO CONTENT\n\nCONVERGED WIRELESS/ WIRELINE\n\nHOME MONITORING & AUTOMATION\n\n08 ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\nThe core of Rogers connected home strategy is to provide customers with the fastest broadband connections, together with the ability to seamlessly shift – to shift time, to shift screens and to shift places so they access what they want, when they want, on the screen of their choice.\n\nRogers offers the best in on-demand, sports, movies, specialty, episodic and multicultural programming. Customers can schedule, pause, rewind \n\nROGERS CONTINUES TO DEFINE HOW FAMILIES COME TOGETHER AND CONNECT WITH THEIR WORLD. MILLIONS OF CANADIANS DEPEND ON ROGERS TO KEEP THEM INFORMED, CONNECTED AND ENTERTAINED WITH A COMBINATION OF THE FASTEST INTERNET SPEEDS AND THE MOST INNOVATIVE TELEVISION, TELEPHONY AND HOME MONITORING SOLUTIONS AVAILABLE." + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "04d1b6a7be30aca58ade0ffca70bb7c53ea5ef797242ba5ce4d1b06f765dfcde", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9995, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Nordstrom, Inc. and Subsidiaries Exhibit Index\n\n78", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## Nordstrom, Inc. and Subsidiaries Exhibit Index\n\n78" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8492326635760689, + "doc_id": "2eaf120c6aeaf08b200005aeca08755463bf2a2345dd0dbc2891cc6cf2cab5df", + "edit_distance": 0.05263157894736842, + "f1_score": 0.9655172413793105, + "meteor": 0.9467186484730344, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 34 - PARENT COMPANY INFORMATION\n\n- 102 -", + "recall": 0.9333333333333333, + "true_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 34 – PARENT COMPANY INFORMATION\n\n- 102 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9174568808714948, + "doc_id": "0de3830b9889d9c537839ee228addeeeb43b90427175c6cdd9ccde8dbb796ae4", + "edit_distance": 0.712258064516129, + "f1_score": 0.9548022598870056, + "meteor": 0.7985520646048502, + "precision": 0.9712643678160919, + "pred_md": "8\n\n## Business Overview\n\n## ■ Consumer Banking\n\nSMFG Group companies are enhancing their financial services for clients. Some of SMBC's noteworthy achievements in this area for fiscal 2010 are investment trusts outstanding of ¥2.725 trillion (as of March 31, 2011); foreign bonds and yendenominated bond sales of ¥198 billion; pension-type insurance sales of ¥192.1 billion; single premium whole life insurance sales of ¥200.5 billion; and housing loans outstanding of ¥14.4908 trillion (as of March 31, 2011).\n\n## Financial Consulting Business\n\nIn fiscal 2010, SMBC continued to enhance its product line up of investment trusts, pension-type insurance, life insurance and other financial products.\n\nFor investment trusts, the bank has expanded its product range to include funds which invest in emerging market sovereign bonds and corporate bonds, funds which invest mainly in bonds issued by worldwide public utilities companies, and\n\nAustralian dollar-denominated foreign investment trusts which invest in international high-yield bonds.\n\nSMBC increased its number of funds to a total of 33 (as of March 31, 2011) for transactions available exclusively on the Internet and mobile phones; this particular service was launched in October 2009. The bank also conducted its time-limited campaign of charging no load and discounts on sales commissions, and cash back campaigns to clients.\n\nAs for insurance products, we respond to our clients' needs by selling\n\nlevel-premium life insurance products at all branches in Japan and enabling those clients having difficulties coming down to our branch during regular banking hours to request information materials and application forms through ATMs (started from August 2010) and the Internet (started from February 2011). In addition, the bank began offering four new types of over-\n\nthe-counter products: 1) pension-type insurance which switches to a stable investment strategy after securing the targeted profit; 2) a whole-life policy, of which the insured amount increases\n\nSMFG 2011\n\nATM screen\n\nATM screen\n\nproportionally to fund performance while guaranteeing a minimum death coverage; 3) whole-life insurance with an option enabling conversion to medical or nursing-care insurance; and 4) whole-life insurance with added-coverage for cancer surgeries and hospitalization.\n\nAs for Japanese government bonds for individuals, SMBC started offering three-year maturity products in June 2010 in addition to our existing five- and ten-year maturity products.\n\nWe continue to offer a wide range of foreign-currency and yendenominated bonds appropriate for our clients' needs. In April 2010, SMBC began financial instruments intermediary services for individuals as\n\nan agent of SMBC Nikko Securities, in addition to SMBC Friend Securities. In January 2011, the operations of SMBC Friend Securities related to SMBC's financial instruments intermediary and other services were integrated into those of SMBC Nikko Securities.\n\nWe believe that it is important to support and follow up our clients even after they have purchased our products. As part of our fulfilling this commitment, we take numerous measures to keep clients up-to-date with new developments - by having seminars regarding funds performances, monthly issuances of special market reports, and mailing of financial statements detailing assets performance.\n\n## Loan Business\n\nWe develop new products and services to enable us to respond to the diversified needs of our clients. For instance, our housing loan with insurance for major serious illnesses had an outstanding loan balance of ¥1,750 billion, as of March 31, 2011.\n\nIn September 2010, SMBC began accepting accelerated full-sum repayments of housing loans through the SMBC Direct online banking service. With this service, over-the-counter procedures can now be completed at home or other remote locations. This service significantly contributed to maximizing convenience for our clients.\n\nConsequently, we are accommodating the diverse needs of our housing loan clients via the Internet along with existing services for partial early repayment and the option to change the interest rate to either floating or fixed rates.\n\nFollowing the enactment of the 'Act Concerning Temporary Measures to Facilitate Financing for Small and Medium-Sized Enterprises, etc.,' we appointed specialists to provide consultations and assistance with clients having difficulties in repaying their mortgage at all bank branches as well as at the nine special Loan Support Offices located nationwide.\n\nWe will continue to provide more personalized and expedited support and services for such clients.", + "recall": 0.9388888888888889, + "true_md": "## ■ Consumer Banking\n\n## Financial Consulting Business\n\nSMFG 2011 8\n\nSMFG Group companies are enhancing their financial services for clients. Some of SMBC’s noteworthy achievements in this area for fiscal 2010 are investment trusts outstanding of ¥2.725 trillion (as of March 31, 2011); foreign bonds and yen- denominated bond sales of ¥198 billion; pension-type insurance sales of ¥192.1 billion; single premium whole life insurance sales of ¥200.5 billion; and housing loans outstanding of ¥14.4908 trillion (as of March 31, 2011).\n\nproportionally to fund performance while guaranteeing a minimum death coverage; 3) whole-life insurance with an option enabling conversion to medical or nursing-care insurance; and 4) whole-life insurance with added-coverage for cancer surger- ies and hospitalization.\n\nAs for Japanese government bonds for individuals, SMBC started offering three-year maturity products in June 2010 in addition to our existing five- and ten-year maturity products.\n\nWe continue to offer a wide range of foreign-currency and yen- denominated bonds appropriate for our clients’ needs. In April 2010, SMBC began financial instruments intermediary services for individuals as \n\nan agent of SMBC Nikko Securities, in addition to SMBC Friend Securities. In January 2011, the operations of SMBC Friend Securities related to SMBC’s financial instruments intermediary and other services were integrated into those of SMBC Nikko Securities.\n\nWe believe that it is important to support and follow up our clients even after they have purchased our products. As part of our fulfilling this commitment, we take numerous measures to keep clients up-to-date with new developments — by having seminars regarding funds performances, monthly issuances of special market reports, and mailing of financial statements detailing assets performance.\n\nWe develop new products and services to enable us to respond to the diversified needs of our clients. For instance, our housing loan with insurance for major serious illnesses had an outstanding loan balance of ¥1,750 billion, as of March 31, 2011.\n\nIn September 2010, SMBC began accepting accelerated full-sum repayments of housing loans through the SMBC Direct online banking service. With this service, over-the-counter procedures can now be completed at home or other remote locations. This service significantly contributed to maximizing convenience for our clients.\n\nConsequently, we are accommodating the diverse needs of our housing loan clients via the Internet along with existing services for partial early repayment and the option to change the interest rate to either floating or fixed rates.\n\nFollowing the enactment of the “Act Concerning Temporary Measures to Facilitate Financing for Small and Medium-Sized Enterprises, etc.,” we appointed specialists to provide consulta- tions and assistance with clients having difficulties in repaying their mortgage at all bank branches as well as at the nine special Loan Support Offices located nationwide.\n\nWe will continue to provide more personalized and expe- dited support and services for such clients.\n\nIn fiscal 2010, SMBC continued to enhance its product line up of invest- ment trusts, pension-type insurance, life insurance and other financial products.\n\nFor investment trusts, the bank has expanded its product range to include funds which invest in emerg- ing market sovereign bonds and corporate bonds, funds which invest mainly in bonds issued by worldwide public utilities companies, and \n\nAustralian dollar-denominated foreign investment trusts which invest in international high-yield bonds.\n\nSMBC increased its number of funds to a total of 33 (as of March 31, 2011) for transactions avail- able exclusively on the Internet and mobile phones; this particular service was launched in October 2009. The bank also conducted its time-limited campaign of charging no load and discounts on sales commissions, and cash back campaigns to clients.\n\nAs for insurance products, we respond to our clients’ needs by selling \n\nlevel-premium life insurance products at all branches in Japan and enabling those clients having difficulties coming down to our branch during regular banking hours to request information materials and application forms through ATMs (started from August 2010) and the Internet (started from February 2011). In addition, the bank began offering four new types of over-\n\nthe-counter products: 1) pension-type insur- ance which switches to a stable investment strategy after securing the targeted profit; 2) a whole-life policy, of which the insured amount increases\n\n## Loan Business\n\nATM screen\n\n## Business Overview" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9021902597862381, + "doc_id": "393c206f4fc3992fd42bda52ff33a907eb42317d021a5c62ae744bfd8d9cf319", + "edit_distance": 0.36807095343680707, + "f1_score": 0.9505882352941176, + "meteor": 0.9390826686591299, + "precision": 0.9619047619047619, + "pred_md": "10\n\n| LETTER TO SHAREHOLDERS\n\nwith these new play efforts, the most notable of which are described in the sections below.\n\nEagle Ford Shale - This South Texas shale is distinctive from the other shale plays described above because it has three components: an oil play, a wet natural gas play and a dry natural gas play. During 2009-10, Chesapeake acquired approximately 600,000 Eagle Ford net leasehold acres, all of which were in the liquids-rich portions of the play. Our initial wells were very successful, and in late 2010 we sold 33.3% of our assets in the play to Beijing-based Chinese National Offshore Oil Company (CNOOC) for $2.2 billion in cash and drilling carries. This was CNOOC's first investment in the U.S. onshore E&P industry, and we are proud that it chose Chesapeake as its first U.S. onshore partner. We are currently drilling with 16 rigs in this play and expect to accelerate our drilling to 40 rigs by year-end 2013. We believe our 470,000 net leasehold acre position could support the drilling of up to 5,500 additional net wells in the years ahead.\n\nPearsall Shale - This shale underlies most of our Eagle Ford acreage and is the second 'sleeper' of our natural gas shale plays. We have two rigs dedicated to testing this formation, and our first few wells have significantly exceeded our expectations. This formation is found about 3,000-4,000 feet deeper than the Eagle Ford and so for the play to become competitive with our other natural gas shale plays, we will need natural gas prices to strengthen from where they are today. We believe this will likely occur in 2013 at the latest. We believe our 350,000 net acre Pearsall leasehold position could support the drilling of up to 3,000 additional net wells.\n\nNiobrara Shale - The Niobrara is a two-basin play, covering substantial portions of both the Powder River Basin of east-central Wyoming and the DJ Basin of southeastern Wyoming and northeastern Colorado. During 2008-10, Chesapeake acquired approximately 800,000 net leasehold acres in these two liquids-rich basins, and in early 2011 we sold 33.3% of our assets in the play to CNOOC for approximately $1.3 billion\n\nA Chesapeake discovery, Louisiana's Haynesville Shale recently passed the Barnett Shale to become the nation's largest producing shale play. The Haynesville comes with an added attraction - much of it is overlain by another prolific natural gas-producing formation, the Bossier Shale.", + "recall": 0.9395348837209302, + "true_md": "with these new play efforts, the most notable of which are described in the sections below. \n\nEagle Ford Shale — This South Texas shale is distinctive from the other shale plays described above because it has three components: an oil play, a wet natural gas play and a dry natural gas play. During 2009–10, Chesapeake acquired approximately 600,000 Eagle Ford net leasehold acres, all of which were in the liquids-rich portions of the play. Our initial wells were very successful, and in late 2010 we sold 33.3% of our assets in the play to Beijing-based Chinese National Offshore Oil Company (CNOOC) for $2.2 billion in cash and drilling carries. This was CNOOC’s first investment in the U.S. onshore E&P industry, and we are proud that it chose Chesapeake as its first U.S. onshore partner. We are currently drilling with 16 rigs in this play and expect to accelerate our drilling to 40 rigs by year-end 2013. We believe our 470,000 net leasehold acre position could support the drilling of up to 5,500 additional net wells in the years ahead.\n\nNiobrara Shale — The Niobrara is a two-basin play, covering substan- tial portions of both the Powder River Basin of east-central Wyoming and the DJ Basin of southeastern Wyoming and northeastern Colorado. During 2008–10, Chesapeake acquired approximately 800,000 net lease- hold acres in these two liquids-rich basins, and in early 2011 we sold 33.3% of our assets in the play to CNOOC for approximately $1.3 billion \n\nPearsall Shale — This shale underlies most of our Eagle Ford acreage and is the second “sleeper” of our natural gas shale plays. We have two rigs dedicated to testing this formation, and our first few wells have significantly exceeded our expectations. This formation is found about 3,000–4,000 feet deeper than the Eagle Ford and so for the play to become competitive with our other natural gas shale plays, we will need natural gas prices to strengthen from where they are today. We believe this will likely occur in 2013 at the latest. We believe our 350,000 net acre Pearsall leasehold position could support the drilling of up to 3,000 additional net wells. \n\nA Chesapeake discovery, Louisiana’s Haynesville Shale recently passed the Barnett Shale to become the nation’s largest producing shale play. The Haynesville comes with an added attraction — much of it is overlain by another prolific natural gas-producing formation, the Bossier Shale.\n\n10 | LETTER TO SHAREHOLDERS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8480853706024039, + "doc_id": "610241dc52a112bc410185df3314523bf5b8bea7af1c089c659a0743ad2906fa", + "edit_distance": 0.13043478260869565, + "f1_score": 0.9465648854961832, + "meteor": 0.9232975927730117, + "precision": 0.9538461538461539, + "pred_md": "SMFG\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n* 1 The amounts shown in the table above do not include amounts for claims on bankrupt borrowers, effectively bankrupt borrowers and potentially bankrupt borrowers and other claims for which redemption is unlikely. The amounts for such claims are as follows:\n\n* 2 Does not include 'Monetary claims bought' and 'Loans and bills discounted' without tenure totaling ¥4,047million ($49 million) and ¥6,717,074 million ($80,783 million) at March 31, 2011, respectively. Does not include 'Loans and bills discounted' without tenure totaling ¥6,829,836 million at March 31, 2010.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n106", + "recall": 0.9393939393939394, + "true_md": "SMFG\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nSMFG 2011 106\n\n* 1 The amounts shown in the table above do not include amounts for claims on bankrupt borrowers, effectively bankrupt borrowers and potentially bankrupt borrowers and other claims for which redemption is unlikely. The amounts for such claims are as follows:\n\n* 2 Does not include “Monetary claims bought” and “Loans and bills discounted” without tenure totaling ¥4,047million ($49 million) and ¥6,717,074 million ($80,783 million) at March 31, 2011, respectively. Does not include “Loans and bills discounted” without tenure totaling ¥6,829,836 million at March 31, 2010." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.32473721471330225, + "doc_id": "020858039aa7f39a7fa92e422681ee9328f26460f27eae3a9b77a5dcd9c37551", + "edit_distance": 0.6951672862453532, + "f1_score": 0.972809667673716, + "meteor": 0.5691447559929397, + "precision": 0.9698795180722891, + "pred_md": "## 2013 Financial Report\n\n## 24 MANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS\n\n| 26 | Executive S ummary | Executive S ummary |\n|------|------------------------------------------------|---------------------------------------------------------------|\n| | 26 | About Rogers Communications Inc. |\n| | 27 | 2013 Highlights |\n| 29 | Understanding Our Business | Understanding Our Business |\n| | 30 | Our Strengths |\n| | 31 | Industry Trends |\n| | 32 | Our Strategy |\n| | 33 | Financial and Operating Guidance |\n| 34 | 2013 Financial Results | 2013 Financial Results |\n| | 34 | Summary of Consolidated Results |\n| | 35 | Key Highlights |\n| | 36 | Key Changes in Financial Results This Year Compared |\n| | | to 2012 |\n| | 37 | Wireless |\n| | 41 | Cable |\n| | 45 | Business Solutions |\n| | 47 | Media |\n| | 50 | Additions to Property, Plant and Equipment |\n| | 51 | Review of Consolidated Performance |\n| | 54 | Quarterly Results |\n| | 57 | |\n| 58 | | Balance Sheet Overview |\n| | Managing Our Liquidity and Financial Resources | Managing Our Liquidity and Financial Resources |\n| | 58 | Sources and Uses of Cash |\n| | 61 | Financial Condition |\n| | 62 | Financial Risk Management |\n| | 65 | Dividends and Share Information |\n| | 66 | Commitments and Other Contractual Obligations |\n| | 66 | Off-Balance Sheet Arrangements |\n| | Regulation in Our Industry | Regulation in Our Industry |\n| 71 | G overnance and Risk Management | G overnance and Risk Management |\n| | 71 | Governance at Rogers |\n| | 72 | Risk Management |\n| | 74 | Risks and Uncertainties Affecting Our Business |\n| | 78 | Controls and Procedures |\n| 79 | Other Information | Other Information |\n| | 79 | Accounting Policies |\n| | 82 | Key Performance Indicators |\n| | 84 | Additional GAAP Measures |\n| | 84 | Non-GAAP Measures |\n| | 86 | Summary of Financial Results of Long-Term Debt |\n| | 87 | Guarantor Five-Year Summary of Consolidated Financial Results |\n\n- 88 MANAGEMENT'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR FINANCIAL REPORTING\n\n## 88 INDEPENDENT AUDITORS' REPORT OF REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM\n\n## 89 CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## 89 Consolidated S tatements of Income\n\n- 90 Consolidated S tatements of Comprehensive Income\n- 91 Consolidated S tatements of Financial Position\n- 92 Consolidated S tatements of Changes in S hareholders' Equity\n\n## 93 Consolidated S tatements of Cash Flows\n\n## 94 NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC.\n\n23\n\nMANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS", + "recall": 0.9757575757575757, + "true_md": "MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AN D ANALYSIS\n\n2013 Financial Report\n\n- 89 Consolidated S tatements of Income\n\n- 90 Consolidated S tatements of Comprehensive Income\n\n- 91 Consolidated S tatements of Financial Position\n\n- 92 Consolidated S tatements of Changes in S hareholders’ Equity\n\n- 93 Consolidated S tatements of Cash Flows\n\n## 94 NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## 24 MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS\n\n## 88 MANAGEMENT’S RESPONSIBILITY FOR FINANCIAL REPORTING\n\n## 88 INDEPENDENT AUDITORS’ REPORT OF REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM\n\n## 89 CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n- 26 Executive S ummary\n\n- 26 About Rogers Communications Inc.\n\n- 27 2013 Highlights\n\n- 29 Understanding Our Business\n\n- 30 Our Strengths\n\n- 31 Industry Trends\n\n- 32 Our Strategy\n\n- 33 Financial and Operating Guidance\n\n- 34 2013 Financial Results\n\n- 34 Summary of Consolidated Results\n\n- 35 Key Highlights\n\n- 36 Key Changes in Financial Results This Year Compared to 2012\n\n- 37 Wireless\n\n- 41 Cable\n\n- 45 Business Solutions\n\n- 47 Media\n\n- 50 Additions to Property, Plant and Equipment\n\n- 51 Review of Consolidated Performance\n\n- 54 Quarterly Results\n\n- 57 Balance Sheet Overview\n\n- 58 Managing Our Liquidity and Financial Resources\n\n- 58 Sources and Uses of Cash\n\n- 61 Financial Condition\n\n- 62 Financial Risk Management\n\n- 65 Dividends and Share Information\n\n- 66 Commitments and Other Contractual Obligations\n\n- 66 Off-Balance Sheet Arrangements\n\n- 67 Regulation in Our Industry\n\n- 71 G overnance and Risk Management\n\n- 71 Governance at Rogers\n\n- 72 Risk Management\n\n- 74 Risks and Uncertainties Affecting Our Business\n\n- 78 Controls and Procedures\n\n- 79 Other Information\n\n- 79 Accounting Policies\n\n- 82 Key Performance Indicators\n\n- 84 Additional GAAP Measures\n\n- 84 Non-GAAP Measures\n\n- 87 Five-Year Summary of Consolidated Financial Results\n\n- 86 Summary of Financial Results of Long-Term Debt Guarantor\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 23" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8021698809351029, + "doc_id": "12ac66d3b5f0b78d71859d637d86084c3f80a2c64cb34179d43a7a7fe1fec7e3", + "edit_distance": 0.16216216216216217, + "f1_score": 0.9108910891089109, + "meteor": 0.9644638732600027, + "precision": 0.8518518518518519, + "pred_md": "- 1 Included in operating costs on the consolidated statements of income.\n\n## Revenue by Product\n\n## NOTE 4: OPERATING COSTS\n\n## NOTE 5: FINANCE COSTS\n\n## NOTE 6: DISCONTINUED OPERATIONS\n\nWe discontinued our Video segment in the second quarter of 2012 and reported the Video results of operations as discontinued operations at that time.\n\nAs of June 2012, Rogers' stores no longer offered video and game rentals or sales at its retail locations. Certain of these stores continue to serve customers' wireless and cable needs.\n\nThe Video segment did not have any results from discontinued operations in 2013 or any significant assets or liabilities as at December 31, 2013 and 2012. Cash flows from operating activities for the segment for 2013 were nil (2012 - $2 million). The Video segment did not have any cash flows from investing or financing activities for the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012.\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC.\n\n103\n\nNOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS", + "recall": 0.9787234042553191, + "true_md": "1 Included in operating costs on the consolidated statements of income.\n\nWe discontinued our Video segment in the second quarter of 2012 and reported the Video results of operations as discontinued operations at that time.\n\nAs of June 2012, Rogers’ stores no longer offered video and game rentals or sales at its retail locations. Certain of these stores continue to serve customers’ wireless and cable needs.\n\nThe Video segment did not have any results from discontinued operations in 2013 or any significant assets or liabilities as at December 31, 2013 and 2012. Cash flows from operating activities for the segment for 2013 were nil (2012 – $2 million). The Video segment did not have any cash flows from investing or financing activities for the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012.\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 103\n\nNOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9665900711881406, + "doc_id": "9550888735438b28a9c51fb23e82c8d9db76dd3fa52775f9d4ad94916afb3122", + "edit_distance": 0.06521739130434782, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999197367880333, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows\n\n(In millions of Canadian dollars)\n\nCash and cash equivalents (bank advances) are defined as cash and short-term deposits, which have an original maturity of less than 90 days, less bank advances. As at December 31, 2013 and 2012, the balance of cash and cash equivalents was comprised of cash and demand deposits.\n\nThe accompanying notes are an integral part of the consolidated financial statements.\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC.\n\n93\n\nCONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows\n\nCONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n(In millions of Canadian dollars)\n\nCash and cash equivalents (bank advances) are defined as cash and short-term deposits, which have an original maturity of less than 90 days, less bank advances. As at December 31, 2013 and 2012, the balance of cash and cash equivalents was comprised of cash and demand deposits.\n\nThe accompanying notes are an integral part of the consolidated financial statements.\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 93" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8773111338475472, + "doc_id": "d6fe0601c23d461a342869ae513f1236129e80fb6ae7ed3879ba788c4a6b6d3b", + "edit_distance": 0.4824399260628466, + "f1_score": 0.9556840077071291, + "meteor": 0.7889216561827673, + "precision": 0.9649805447470817, + "pred_md": "## ■ Back-Testing Results (Trading Book)\n\n## (c) Stress Testing\n\nThe market occasionally undergoes extreme fluctuations that exceed projections. To manage market risk, therefore, it is important to run simulations of unforeseen situations that may occur in financial markets (stress testing). The bank conducts stress tests on a monthly basis assuming various scenarios, and has measures in place for irregular events.\n\n## (d) Outlier Framework\n\nIn the event the economic value of a bank declines by more than 20% of the sum of Tier I and Tier II capital ('outlier ratio') as a result of interest rate shocks, the bank falls into the category of 'outlier bank,' as stipulated under the Second Pillar of Basel II.\n\nAs of March 31, 2011, the outlier ratio was around 8%, substantially below the 20% criterion.\n\n## (e) Managing Risk of Stocks Held for Strategic Purposes\n\nThe Corporate Risk Management Department establishes limits on allowable risk for strategic equity investments, and monitors the observance of those limits in order to control stock price fluctuation risk.\n\nSMBC has been reducing its strategic equity investments and the outstanding amount is now significantly below the amount of Tier I capital, the maximum level permitted under the Act on Financial Institutions (,etc.)', Limits for Share, etc. Holdings.\n\n## (2) Liquidity Risk Management\n\nAt SMBC, liquidity risk is regarded as one of the major risks. SMBC's liquidity risk management is based on a framework consisting of setting funding gap limits and guidelines, maintaining highly liquid supplementary funding sources, and establishing contingency plans.\n\nSo as not to be overly dependent on short-term market-based funding to cover cash outflows, SMBC sets funding gap limits and guidelines. The funding gap limits and guidelines are set Bank-wide and for each region, taking into account cash management plans, external environment, funding status, characteristics of local currency and other factors. Additionally, a risk limit is set by currency as needed to achieve more rigorous management.\n\nTo minimize the impact of crises on the SMBC's funding, SMBC manages highly liquid supplementary funding sources, whereby SMBC maintains high quality liquid assets, such as U.S. treasuries and has emergency borrowing facilities.\n\nIn addition, for emergency situations, there are contingency plans in place for addressing funding liquidity risk that include an action plan with measures for reducing funding gap limits and guidelines.\n\n## ■ Decline in Economic Value Based on Outlier Framework\n\n(Billions of yen)\n\nNote: 'Decline in economic value' is the decline of present value after interest rate shocks (1st and 99th percentile of observed interest rate changes using a 1-year holding period and 5 years of observations).\n\n## ■ Composition, by Industry, of Listed Equity Portfolio\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n41", + "recall": 0.9465648854961832, + "true_md": "SMFG (consolidated) \n\nSMBC (nonconsolidated)\n\nSMBC (consolidated) \n\n## ■ Back-Testing Results (Trading Book)\n\nTo minimize the impact of crises on the SMBC’s funding, SMBC manages highly liquid supplementary funding sources, whereby SMBC maintains high quality liquid assets, such as U.S. treasuries and has emergency borrowing facilities.\n\nIn addition, for emergency situations, there are contingency plans in place for addressing funding liquidity risk that include an action plan with measures for reducing funding gap limits and guidelines.\n\nThe market occasionally undergoes extreme fluctuations that exceed projections. To manage market risk, therefore, it is impor- tant to run simulations of unforeseen situations that may occur in financial markets (stress testing). The bank conducts stress tests on a monthly basis assuming various scenarios, and has measures in place for irregular events.\n\nIn the event the economic value of a bank declines by more than 20% of the sum of Tier I and Tier II capital (“outlier ratio”) as a result of interest rate shocks, the bank falls into the category of “outlier bank,” as stipulated under the Second Pillar of Basel II.\n\nAs of March 31, 2011, the outlier ratio was around 8%, sub- stantially below the 20% criterion.\n\nThe Corporate Risk Management Department establishes limits on allowable risk for strategic equity investments, and monitors the observance of those limits in order to control stock price fluctuation risk.\n\nSMBC has been reducing its strategic equity investments and the outstanding amount is now significantly below the amount of Tier I capital, the maximum level permitted under the Act on Financial Institutions (,etc.)’, Limits for Share, etc. Holdings.\n\nAt SMBC, liquidity risk is regarded as one of the major risks. SMBC’s liquidity risk management is based on a framework con- sisting of setting funding gap limits and guidelines, maintaining highly liquid supplementary funding sources, and establishing contingency plans. \n\nSo as not to be overly dependent on short-term market-based funding to cover cash outflows, SMBC sets funding gap limits and guidelines. The funding gap limits and guidelines are set Bank-wide and for each region, taking into account cash management plans, external environment, funding status, characteristics of local cur- rency and other factors. Additionally, a risk limit is set by currency as needed to achieve more rigorous management.\n\nNote: “Decline in economic value” is the decline of present value after interest rate shocks (1st and 99th percentile of observed interest rate changes using a 1-year holding period and 5 years of observations).\n\nSMFG 2011 41\n\n## ■ Composition, by Industry, of Listed Equity Portfolio\n\n## (e) Managing Risk of Stocks Held for Strategic Purposes\n\n## (2) Liquidity Risk Management\n\n## (d) Outlier Framework\n\n## (c) Stress Testing\n\n## ■ Decline in Economic Value Based on Outlier Framework" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.763892391230865, + "doc_id": "bfefa0bdd864ea163ccd34b77b45be4ff9afbc9524c3166c3e84e4c2dce30a11", + "edit_distance": 0.4225352112676056, + "f1_score": 0.8702702702702703, + "meteor": 0.8869803148575942, + "precision": 0.9096045197740112, + "pred_md": "## Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation (Nonconsolidated)\n\n## Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation\n\nThe following is a summary of SMBC's nonconsolidated financial results for the fiscal year ended March 31, 2011.\n\n## 1. Operating Results\n\nGross banking profit in fiscal 2010 increased by ·76.4 billion from the previous fiscal year to ·1,531.7 billion, and expenses (excluding nonrecurring losses) rose by ·13.4 billion to ·699.1 billion. As a result, banking profit (before provision for general reserve for possible loan losses) increased by ·63.0 billion to ·832.5 billion.\n\nOrdinary profit - banking profit (before provision for general reserve for possible loan losses) adjusted for nonrecurring items such as credit cost and net losses on stocks increased by ·132.9 billion to ·595.7 billion.\n\nAfter adjustment of ordinary profit for extraordinary gains and losses and income taxes, SMBC posted net income of ·421.1 billion, a year-on-year increase of ·103.1 billion.\n\n## 2. Income Analysis\n\n## Gross Banking Profit\n\nGross banking profit increased by ·76.4 billion year on year to ·1,531.7 billion. This was mainly due to increased gains on bonds by quickly responding to fluctuations in market interest rates, and higher total fees for loan-related services at the International Banking Unit.\n\n## Expenses\n\nExpenses (excluding nonrecurring losses) increased by ·13.4 billion to ·699.1 billion. This increase was due mainly to costs associated with a bolstering of personnel in strategic business domains and investments made in previous fiscal years in branches and computer systems, which outweighed the benefits of ongoing cost-cutting measures in publicity and advertising expenses and building and maintenance expenses.\n\n## Banking Profit\n\nBanking profit (before provision for general reserve for possible loan losses) increased by ·63.0 billion from the previous fiscal year to ·832.5 billion.\n\n## Banking Profit\n\n## <Reference>\n\n## Banking Profit by Business Unit\n\nNotes: 1. Year-on-year comparisons are those used for internal reporting and exclude changes due to interest rate and foreign exchange rate fluctuations.\n\n- 2. 'Head Office Account' consists of (1) financing costs on preferred securities and subordinated debt, (2) profit earned on investing the Bank's own capital, and (3) adjustment of inter-unit transactions, etc.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n26", + "recall": 0.8341968911917098, + "true_md": "## Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation (Nonconsolidated)\n\n## Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation\n\n## 1. Operating Results\n\n## 2. Income Analysis\n\n## Expenses\n\n## Gross Banking Profit\n\nThe following is a summary of SMBC’s nonconsolidated financial results for the fiscal year ended March 31, 2011.\n\nGross banking profit in fiscal 2010 increased by ¥76.4 billion from the previous fiscal year to ¥1,531.7 billion, and expenses (excluding nonrecurring losses) rose by ¥13.4 bil- lion to ¥699.1 billion. As a result, banking profit (before pro- vision for general reserve for possible loan losses) increased by ¥63.0 billion to ¥832.5 billion.\n\nGross banking profit increased by ¥76.4 billion year on year to ¥1,531.7 billion. This was mainly due to increased gains on bonds by quickly responding to fluctuations in market interest rates, and higher total fees for loan-related services at the International Banking Unit.\n\nOrdinary profit — banking profit (before provision for general reserve for possible loan losses) adjusted for nonre- curring items such as credit cost and net losses on stocks — increased by ¥132.9 billion to ¥595.7 billion.\n\nAfter adjustment of ordinary profit for extraordinary gains and losses and income taxes, SMBC posted net income of ¥421.1 billion, a year-on-year increase of ¥103.1 billion.\n\nExpenses (excluding nonrecurring losses) increased by ¥13.4 billion to ¥699.1 billion. This increase was due mainly to costs associated with a bolstering of personnel in stra- tegic business domains and investments made in previous fiscal years in branches and computer systems, which out- weighed the benefits of ongoing cost-cutting measures in publicity and advertising expenses and building and mainte- nance expenses.\n\nBanking profit (before provision for general reserve for pos- sible loan losses) increased by ¥63.0 billion from the previ- ous fiscal year to ¥832.5 billion.\n\n## Banking Profit\n\n## Banking Profit\n\n## <Reference>\n\n## Banking Profit by Business Unit\n\n- Notes: 1. Year-on-year comparisons are those used for internal reporting and exclude changes due to interest rate and foreign exchange rate fluctuations.\n\n- 2. “Head Office Account” consists of (1) financing costs on preferred securities and subordinated debt, (2) profit earned on investing the Bank’s own capital, and (3) adjustment of inter-unit transactions, etc.\n\nSMFG 2011 26" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.880022050774473, + "doc_id": "2245e1659a73598e9f767374d0bf054f2978bf4d4083c14e4f0268430b72084c", + "edit_distance": 0.43859649122807015, + "f1_score": 0.981366459627329, + "meteor": 0.89487630353478, + "precision": 0.9634146341463414, + "pred_md": "SMFG\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n## 23. Other Comprehensive Income\n\nOther comprehensive income for the fiscal year ended March 31, 2010 consisted of the following:\n\n## 24. Comprehensive Income\n\nComprehensive income for the fiscal year ended March 31, 2010 consisted of the following:\n\n## 25. Deferred Tax Assets and Liabilities\n\n- (1) Significant components of deferred tax assets and liabilities at March 31, 2011 and 2010 were as follows:\n\n(2) MFG and its domestic consolidated subsidiaries are subject to Japanese national and local income taxes, which, in the aggregate, would S result in an effective statutory tax rate of approximately 40.69% for the years ended March 31, 2011 and 2010. A reconciliation of the effective income tax rate reflected in the accompanying consolidated statements of income to the statutory tax rate for the years ended March 31, 2011 and 2010 was as follows:\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n92", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "SMFG Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n- 23. Other Comprehensive Income\n\n- 24. Comprehensive Income \n\n- 25. Deferred Tax Assets and Liabilities\n\n- (1) Significant components of deferred tax assets and liabilities at March 31, 2011 and 2010 were as follows:\n\n- (2) SMFG and its domestic consolidated subsidiaries are subject to Japanese national and local income taxes, which, in the aggregate, would result in an effective statutory tax rate of approximately 40.69% for the years ended March 31, 2011 and 2010. A reconciliation of the effective income tax rate reflected in the accompanying consolidated statements of income to the statutory tax rate for the years ended March 31, 2011 and 2010 was as follows:\n\nSMFG 2011 92\n\nComprehensive income for the fiscal year ended March 31, 2010 consisted of the following:\n\nOther comprehensive income for the fiscal year ended March 31, 2010 consisted of the following:" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "c5cfd5a73013957b72a80446b44bf819fec1f605577ba2a96621a96dd6da8d0b", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999142661179699, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "*This exhibit is a management contract, compensatory plan or arrangement\n\nNordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 73", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "*This exhibit is a management contract, compensatory plan or arrangement\n\nNordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 73" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8065170203767844, + "doc_id": "9667c65f800b1669ae93b2cb47390a654c846275372cf37930e7618fa8a6b21c", + "edit_distance": 0.8458618071374335, + "f1_score": 0.9762363519588951, + "meteor": 0.8382254144268899, + "precision": 0.9781209781209781, + "pred_md": "30\n\n| EMPLOYEES\n\n## FROM PENNSYLVANIA TO NEW MEXICO, WE THANK EVERY MEMBER OF TEAM CHESAPEAKE »\n\nWe would like to thank each of Chesapeake's 10,021 employees who brought a unique combination of experience, talent and positive attitude to the company in 2010. Last year the company was honored for the fourth consecutive year with inclusion in the FORTUNE 100 Best Companies to Work For ® list at #32, the highest-ranking company in the energy production industry.\n\nKinney Louthan Aubrey McClendon Patsy Watters\n\n## 1990 (3)\n\nKevin Decker David Higgins Cindi Williams\n\n## 1991 (4)\n\nSteve Dixon Marilyn Pollard Patti Schlegel Julie Washam\n\n## 1992 (2)\n\nTom Price\n\nMelanie Weaver\n\n## 1993 (5)\n\nRalph Ball\n\nDavid Desalvo Mike Johnson Randy Pierce Dave Wittman\n\n## 1994 (16)\n\nBarbara Bale Martha Burger Michael Coles Traci Cook Ron Goff Greg Knight Dan LeDonne Rich McClanahan Steve W. Miller Tommy Morphew Pat Pope Danny Rutledge Stephanie Shedden Ronnie Ward Shelly White Gerald Zgabay\n\n## 1995 (26)\n\nRichey Albright Paula Asher Eric Ashmore Randy Borlaug Shelli Butler Melissa Chambers Dale Cook Ted Davis Mandy Duane Steve Gaskins Jennifer Grigsby Gayle Harris Henry Hood Lorrie Jacobs Barry Langham Cindy LeBlanc Leland Murray Fred Portillo\n\nJohn Qualls Pat Rolla Hank Scheel Charles W. Scholz Stan Stinnett Brenda Stremble Greg Weinschenk Brian Winter\n\n## 1996 (29)\n\nHeather Anderson Jamie Carter Jasen Davis George Denny Tim Denny Gary Dunlap Laurie Eck Jan Fair Barbara Frailey Linda Gardner Charlene Glover Randy Goben Jim Gomez Melissa Gruenewald Doug W. Johnson Jim Johnson Taylor Kemp Mike Lebsack Steve Lepretre Larry Lunardi John Marks Sandi Michalicka Liz Muskrat Angela Ports Tommy Putz Bryan Sagebiel Kurt Schrantz Phyllis Trammell\n\nAllan Waldroup\n\n## 1997 (32)\n\nLinda Allen\n\nErick Porter\n\n| Karla Allford |\n|-------------------------------------------------------------------------|\n| Sara Caldwell Steve Cody |\n| Randy Cornelsen Michelle Cullen Bruce Dixon Greg Drwenski Mark B. Evans |\n| Joy Franklin Rob Gilkes |\n| Shane Hamilton |\n| Michael Horn Eric Hughes |\n| David B. Jones |\n| Mike Ludlow Sarah Lumen Lauren Matlock |\n| Sam McCaskill |\n| Bob Neely |\n\nJolene Schur Carolyn Simmons April Smith Wilma Smith Frank Unsicker Ivajean Wallace Craig White Dori Williams Curtis Williford\n\n## 1998 (62)\n\n| Stephen Adams |\n|--------------------------------------------------------------|\n| Francy Beesley |\n| Joel Bennett |\n| Leonard Berry Jr. Susan Bradford |\n| Mark Brown |\n| Randy Brown |\n| Lori Budde |\n| Terry Caldwell |\n| Bob Campbell Ted Campbell |\n| Sherri Childers |\n| Tana Clark |\n| David Craycraft |\n| Iris Drake |\n| Mac Drake |\n| Gary Egger |\n| Steve Emick |\n| Dan Estes |\n| Dennis Frick |\n| Stacy Gilbert |\n| Jim Gowens |\n| Kelsey Hammit |\n| Tresa Hammond |\n| Jeff L. Harris Debbie Hulett |\n| Julie Ingram Tammy Kelln Rose Kim |\n| Steve King |\n| Mike Lancaster Chris H. Lee Carrie Lewis-Crawford |\n| Craig Madsen John Marshall Kim Massey Allen May Dennis McGee |\n| Allen A. Miller |\n| Carey Milligan David Mobley Wesley Myers |\n| Bud Neff Jr. |\n| Kathy Nowlin |\n| Don Pannell Michael Park Mandy Pena |\n| Matt Rockers Kelly Ruminer |\n| Greg Small |\n\nBill Snyder George Soto Dan Sparks Linda Steen Becky Thomas Jennifer Van Meir Rusty Walker Lynn Whipple Mandy Whipple\n\n## 1999 (22)\n\nJonathan Ball\n\nMel Barker\n\nSue Black\n\nDory Douglas\n\nMark Edge\n\nJenny Ferguson\n\nJeanie Fuller\n\nSusan Green\n\nYamei Hou\n\nDoug Jacobson\n\nJim Kelley\n\nLynn Looper\n\nDea Mengers\n\nMichael Miller\n\nTammy Nguyen\n\nLaCosta Rawls\n\nLarry Shipley\n\nMichelle Smith\n\nConnie Turner\n\nCourtney Tyson\n\nTonya Vallerand\n\nTobin Yocham\n\n## 2000 (41)\n\nShellie Ashworth Pollard\n\nJohnnie Bartlett\n\nDoug Bellis\n\nJan Benton\n\nBobby Bolton\n\nJeff Brooks\n\nBecky Cassel\n\nRachel Clapp\n\nDebbie Curtis\n\nJennifer Dees\n\nTammy Fields\n\nRobin Gonzalez\n\nAnnie Hamilton\n\nTwila Hines\n\nEric Hoffman\n\nRonnie Howell\n\nJim Kuhlman\n\nDon Lee\n\nDebbie Lloyd\n\nJay May Jr.\n\nAndrea McCall\n\nCindy McClintock\n\nCollin McElrath\n\nCourtney Moad\n\nGeorgia Moller\n\nChantelle Porter\n\nEdward Puffinbarger\n\nMike Sawatzky\n\nCindy Schwieger\n\nBrent Scruggs Vance Shires Stuart Skelton David W. Smith Catherine Stairs Jerry Townley Nick Wavers Brenda Wheeler Bob Whitman David Whitten Brent Williams Bob Woodside\n\n## 2001 (98)\n\nJerry Aebi\n\nKaren Albornoz Cranford\n\nJeremy Allison\n\nTerry Ashton\n\nBetsy Ball\n\nGloria Bates\n\nMichelle Bender\n\nBruce Boeckman\n\nBoyce Boelen\n\nSharon Bradford\n\nVon Brinkley\n\nDeanne Brooks\n\nMarty Byrd\n\nCarlos Caraveo\n\nBiff Carter\n\nJohn Carter\n\nKeith Case\n\nMarika Chambers\n\nKristi Clemmens\n\nJohn Cook\n\nTim Cook\n\nJuanita Cooper\n\nJim Corsoro\n\nLeigh Ann Crain\n\nBrian Cunningham\n\nGarry Curry\n\nShawn Downey\n\nJeff Eager\n\nRichard Easterly\n\nTommy Edler\n\nAmanda Elam\n\nBrian Exline\n\nAlex Gallardo Jr.\n\nMatt Gambill\n\nRoy Gentry\n\nSuzie Goolsby\n\nRandy Grayson\n\nRick Green\n\nKajsa Greenhoward\n\nJackie Gross\n\nJohnny Harris\n\nJeremiah Jackson\n\nKrista Jacobson\n\nJustin Johnson\n\nKeith Johnson\n\nRob Jones\n\nJohn Kapchinske\n\nGinni Kennedy\n\nEdward Killen\n\nJulie Knox\n\nDaniel Koehn\n\nKennetta Lee\n\nJeff Lenocker\n\nJulia Lillard\n\nDarwin Lindenmuth\n\nTravis Long\n\nRita Marple\n\nJim McHenry\n\nDebbie McKee\n\nDon Messerly\n\nJ. C. Morris\n\nMelinda Neher\n\nLee Nelson\n\nKevin Newberry\n\nTim Newville\n\nDeborah O'Neal\n\nRicky Petty\n\nDianne Pickard\n\nCatherine Ratliff\n\nLynn Regouby\n\nGina Romano\n\nJohn Romine\n\nLarry Ross\n\nMike Rossiter\n\nLarry Settle\n\nDee Smith Jr.\n\nPatrick Smith\n\nChris Sorrells\n\nDennis Splan\n\nJason Stamper\n\nCindy Stevens\n\nBill Stillwell\n\nGary Stoner\n\nHoward Stout\n\nTim N. Taylor\n\nJason Thaxton\n\nAlvin Thomas\n\nRudy Thomas\n\nRobbie Thrash\n\nLarry Watters\n\nPaige Whitehead\n\nConnie Williams\n\nFreda Williams\n\nDawn Wilson\n\nBrandon Winsett\n\nMarvin Winter Jr.\n\nLarry Woodruff\n\nAmanda Young\n\n## 2002 (132)\n\nPaula Abla\n\nNicole Adams\n\nJenny Adkins\n\nRoger Aldrich\n\nJimmy Alexander\n\nBrian Babb\n\nCharlie Bagley\n\nBob Baker\n\nLynard Barrera\n\nCindy Barrios\n\nShane Barron\n\nDennis Bass\n\nJames Beavers\n\nRandy Bergen\n\nLeonard Blackwill Paul Bowyer Troy Bradford Robert Bradley Don Bredy Jim Brock Cindy Brown Kathy Brown Lynn Broyles Jason Budde Greg Burchett Aaron Bush Ernest Byrd Chris Carter Paul Childers Jackie Cooper Jr. Lori Crabtree Cary Crusinbery Jr. James Davis Trent Delano Cheryl Delzer Cathy DeGiusti Larry Dill Sherry Dixon Eldon Eagan Eric S. Edwards Michael Falen Mark Falk Shawn Fields Tom Flesher Viel Flores Justin Foust Adam Gaskill Tamara Gathers Fred Gipson Lisa Glover Cornelio Gomez David Gouker Steve Hall Melvin Harper John Henry John Hornsby John Hurst Todd Ice Bud Jackson Jay Jarvis Danny Jech Jim Jinkins Gary D. Johnson William D. Johnson Chris Jones Joe Jones Mike Kee Dax Kimble Nancy Knox Greg Kochenower Jeremie Koehn Spencer Land Steve Larman Ricky Laster Casidy Lee Ken Leedy\n\nStephen Lobaugh\n\nBilly Long\n\nShawn Marsh\n\nAndrew McCalmont\n\nMitch McNeill\n\nRichard Mieser\n\nSteve Mills\n\nSidney Mitchell\n\nClaudia Molina de Wolford\n\nNathan Morrison\n\nTodd Murphy\n\nCindy Murray\n\nJeff Newby\n\nRick Nunley\n\nJohn Ortiz\n\nDavid Parker\n\nRobert Pennel\n\nRyan Phillips\n\nSharon Pool\n\nBob Portman\n\nEric Powell\n\nMike L. Reddick\n\nRonald Reidle\n\nMartin Robertson II\n\nA.D. Robison\n\nRandy Rodrigue\n\nVern Roe Jr.\n\nDanny Schmidt\n\nKary Schneberger\n\nStacy Settles\n\nDewayne Shaw\n\nMichael Sherwood\n\nWill Shisler\n\nGreg Skiles\n\nChad Smith\n\nRobin Smith\n\nMaria Strain\n\nJosh Swift\n\nChris Townsend\n\nMichelle Townsend\n\nRyan Turner\n\nRodney Vaeth\n\nFred Vasquez\n\nRuben Vega Jr.\n\nAl Warner\n\nJames Warner\n\nMichael Weese\n\nHazel Welch\n\nLeslie Wertz\n\nEddie Whitehead\n\nJohn Wilken\n\nGary Willeford\n\nMark Willson\n\nJerry Wilson\n\nRobert A. Wilson\n\nRoy Wilson\n\n## 2003 (211)\n\nRonald Aaron\n\nPat Abla Corky Baker Mike Bechtel John Biggs\n\nStaci Barentine-Bogle\n\nCharlie Bateman\n\nTammi Bradford", + "recall": 0.9743589743589743, + "true_md": "30 | EMPLOYEES\n\n## FROM PENNSYLVANIA TO NEW MEXICO, WE THANK EVERY MEMBER OF TEAM CHESAPEAKE »\n\nWe would like to thank each of Chesapeake’s 10,021 employees who brought a unique combination of experience, talent and positive attitude to the company in 2010. Last year the company was honored for the fourth consecutive year with inclusion in the FORTUNE 100 Best Companies to Work For ® list at #32, the highest-ranking company in the energy production industry.\n\n## 1989 (3)\n\n## 1990 (3)\n\n## 1991 (4)\n\n## 1996 (29)\n\n## 1998 (62)\n\n## 1992 (2)\n\n## 1993 (5)\n\n## 1994 (16)\n\n## 2001 (98)\n\n## 1999 (22)\n\n## 2000 (41)\n\n## 1997 (32)\n\n## 1995 (26)\n\n## 2002 (132)\n\n## 2003 (211)\n\nRonald Aaron Pat Abla Corky Baker StaciBarentine-Bogle Charlie Bateman Mike Bechtel John Biggs Tammi Bradford\n\nShawn Marsh Andrew McCalmont Mitch McNeill Richard Mieser Steve Mills Sidney Mitchell Claudia Molina de Wolford Nathan Morrison Todd Murphy Cindy Murray Jeff Newby Rick Nunley John Ortiz David Parker Robert Pennel Ryan Phillips Sharon Pool Bob Portman Eric Powell Mike L. Reddick Ronald Reidle Martin Robertson II A.D. Robison Randy Rodrigue Vern Roe Jr. Danny Schmidt Kary Schneberger Stacy Settles Dewayne Shaw Michael Sherwood Will Shisler Greg Skiles Chad Smith Robin Smith Maria Strain Josh Swift Chris Townsend Michelle Townsend Ryan Turner Rodney Vaeth Fred Vasquez Ruben Vega Jr. Al Warner James Warner Michael Weese Hazel Welch Leslie Wertz Eddie Whitehead John Wilken Gary Willeford Mark Willson Jerry Wilson Robert A. Wilson Roy Wilson\n\nLeonard Blackwill Paul Bowyer Troy Bradford Robert Bradley Don Bredy Jim Brock Cindy Brown Kathy Brown Lynn Broyles Jason Budde Greg Burchett Aaron Bush Ernest Byrd Chris Carter Paul Childers Jackie Cooper Jr. Lori Crabtree Cary Crusinbery Jr. James Davis Trent Delano Cheryl Delzer Cathy DeGiusti Larry Dill Sherry Dixon Eldon Eagan Eric S. Edwards Michael Falen Mark Falk Shawn Fields Tom Flesher Viel Flores Justin Foust Adam Gaskill Tamara Gathers Fred Gipson Lisa Glover Cornelio Gomez David Gouker Steve Hall Melvin Harper John Henry John Hornsby John Hurst Todd Ice Bud Jackson Jay Jarvis Danny Jech Jim Jinkins Gary D. Johnson William D. Johnson Chris Jones Joe Jones Mike Kee Dax Kimble Nancy Knox Greg Kochenower Jeremie Koehn Spencer Land Steve Larman Ricky Laster Casidy Lee Ken Leedy Stephen Lobaugh Billy Long\n\nPaula Abla Nicole Adams Jenny Adkins Roger Aldrich Jimmy Alexander Brian Babb Charlie Bagley Bob Baker Lynard Barrera Cindy Barrios Shane Barron Dennis Bass James Beavers Randy Bergen\n\nDaniel Koehn Kennetta Lee Jeff Lenocker Julia Lillard Darwin Lindenmuth Travis Long Rita Marple JimMcHenry Debbie McKee Don Messerly J. C. Morris MelindaNeher Lee Nelson Kevin Newberry Tim Newville Deborah O’Neal Ricky Petty Dianne Pickard Catherine Ratliff Lynn Regouby Gina Romano John Romine Larry Ross Mike Rossiter Larry Settle Dee Smith Jr. Patrick Smith Chris Sorrells Dennis Splan Jason Stamper Cindy Stevens Bill Stillwell Gary Stoner Howard Stout Tim N. Taylor Jason Thaxton Alvin Thomas Rudy Thomas Robbie Thrash Larry Watters Paige Whitehead Connie Williams Freda Williams Dawn Wilson Brandon Winsett Marvin Winter Jr. Larry Woodruff Amanda Young\n\nBrent Scruggs Vance Shires Stuart Skelton David W. Smith Catherine Stairs Jerry Townley Nick Wavers Brenda Wheeler Bob Whitman David Whitten Brent Williams Bob Woodside\n\nJerry Aebi Karen Albornoz Cranford Jeremy Allison Terry Ashton Betsy Ball Gloria Bates Michelle Bender Bruce Boeckman Boyce Boelen Sharon Bradford Von Brinkley Deanne Brooks Marty Byrd Carlos Caraveo Biff Carter John Carter Keith Case Marika Chambers Kristi Clemmens John Cook TimCook Juanita Cooper Jim Corsoro Leigh Ann Crain Brian Cunningham Garry Curry Shawn Downey Jeff Eager Richard Easterly Tommy Edler Amanda Elam Brian Exline Alex Gallardo Jr. Matt Gambill Roy Gentry Suzie Goolsby Randy Grayson Rick Green Kajsa Greenhoward Jackie Gross Johnny Harris Jeremiah Jackson Krista Jacobson Justin Johnson Keith Johnson Rob Jones John Kapchinske Ginni Kennedy Edward Killen Julie Knox\n\nShellie Ashworth Pollard Johnnie Bartlett Doug Bellis Jan Benton Bobby Bolton Jeff Brooks Becky Cassel Rachel Clapp Debbie Curtis Jennifer Dees Tammy Fields Robin Gonzalez Annie Hamilton Twila Hines Eric Hoffman Ronnie Howell Jim Kuhlman Don Lee Debbie Lloyd Jay May Jr. Andrea McCall Cindy McClintock Collin McElrath Courtney Moad Georgia Moller Chantelle Porter Edward Puffinbarger Mike Sawatzky Cindy Schwieger\n\nLinda Allen Karla Allford Sara Caldwell Steve Cody Kristine Conway Randy Cornelsen Michelle Cullen Bruce Dixon Greg Drwenski Mark B. Evans Joy Franklin Rob Gilkes Shane Hamilton Michael Horn Eric Hughes David B. Jones Mike Ludlow Sarah Lumen Lauren Matlock Sam McCaskill Bob Neely Bob Pope Erick Porter\n\nRichey Albright Paula Asher Eric Ashmore Randy Borlaug Shelli Butler Melissa Chambers Dale Cook Ted Davis Mandy Duane Steve Gaskins Jennifer Grigsby Gayle Harris HenryHood Lorrie Jacobs Barry Langham Cindy LeBlanc Leland Murray Fred Portillo\n\nStephen Adams Crae Barr Francy Beesley JoelBennett Leonard Berry Jr. Susan Bradford Mark Brown Randy Brown Lori Budde Terry Caldwell Bob Campbell Ted Campbell Sherri Childers Tana Clark Jennifer Copeland David Craycraft Iris Drake Mac Drake Gary Egger Steve Emick Dan Estes Dennis Frick Stacy Gilbert Jim Gowens Kelsey Hammit Tresa Hammond Jeff L. Harris Debbie Hulett Julie Ingram Tammy Kelln Rose Kim Steve King Mike Lancaster Chris H. Lee Carrie Lewis-Crawford Craig Madsen John Marshall Kim Massey Allen May DennisMcGee Allen A. Miller Bill Miller Carey Milligan David Mobley Wesley Myers Bud Neff Jr. Kathy Nowlin Don Pannell Michael Park Mandy Pena Matt Rockers Kelly Ruminer Greg Small\n\nJonathan Ball Mel Barker Sue Black DoryDouglas Mark Edge Jenny Ferguson Jeanie Fuller Susan Green YameiHou Doug Jacobson Jim Kelley Lynn Looper Dea Mengers Michael Miller Tammy Nguyen LaCosta Rawls Larry Shipley Michelle Smith Connie Turner Courtney Tyson Tonya Vallerand Tobin Yocham\n\nBill Snyder George Soto Dan Sparks Linda Steen Becky Thomas Jennifer Van Meir Rusty Walker Lynn Whipple Mandy Whipple\n\nJolene Schur Carolyn Simmons April Smith Wilma Smith Frank Unsicker Ivajean Wallace Craig White Dori Williams Curtis Williford\n\nJohn Qualls Pat Rolla Hank Scheel Charles W. Scholz Stan Stinnett Brenda Stremble Greg Weinschenk Brian Winter\n\nKinney Louthan Aubrey McClendon Patsy Watters\n\nKevin Decker David Higgins Cindi Williams\n\nSteve Dixon Marilyn Pollard Patti Schlegel Julie Washam\n\nHeather Anderson Jamie Carter Jasen Davis George Denny TimDenny Gary Dunlap Laurie Eck Jan Fair Barbara Frailey Linda Gardner Charlene Glover Randy Goben Jim Gomez Melissa Gruenewald Doug W. Johnson Jim Johnson Taylor Kemp Mike Lebsack Steve Lepretre Larry Lunardi John Marks Sandi Michalicka Liz Muskrat Angela Ports Tommy Putz Bryan Sagebiel Kurt Schrantz Phyllis Trammell Allan Waldroup\n\nBarbara Bale Martha Burger Michael Coles Traci Cook Ron Goff Greg Knight Dan LeDonne Rich McClanahan Steve W. Miller Tommy Morphew Pat Pope Danny Rutledge Stephanie Shedden Ronnie Ward Shelly White Gerald Zgabay\n\nRalph Ball David Desalvo Mike Johnson Randy Pierce Dave Wittman\n\nTom Price Melanie Weaver" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8363568721753226, + "doc_id": "2700b4f4f923f2197b2ae987454f1bd33dffc1615137b96690b470caf6c25dbd", + "edit_distance": 0.6846153846153846, + "f1_score": 0.9696969696969697, + "meteor": 0.9424411475820277, + "precision": 0.9523809523809523, + "pred_md": "MANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS\n\n## SIGNIFICANT SPECTRUM POSITION\n\nOur wireless services are supported by our significant spectrum holdings in both high-band and low-band spectrum. As part of our network strategy, we expect to continue making significant capital investments in spectrum to:\n\n- GLYPH<129> support the rapidly growing usage of wireless data services\n- GLYPH<129> introduce new innovative network-enabled features and functionality.\n\n## Our spectrum holdings include:\n\n## CURRENT S PECTRUM LICENCE S\n\nWe also have access to additional spectrum through network sharing agreements:\n\n## We have certain arrangements to buy additional spectrum, subject to regulatory approvals:\n\n38\n\nROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT", + "recall": 0.9876543209876543, + "true_md": "MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS\n\n## SIGNIFICANT SPECTRUM POSITION\n\n38 ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\nWe have certain arrangements to buy additional spectrum, subject to regulatory approvals:\n\nWe also have access to additional spectrum through network sharing agreements:\n\nOur spectrum holdings include:\n\nOur wireless services are supported by our significant spectrum holdings in both high-band and low-band spectrum. As part of our network strategy, we expect to continue making significant capital investments in spectrum to:\n\n- GLYPH<129> support the rapidly growing usage of wireless data services\n\n- GLYPH<129> introduce new innovative network-enabled features and functionality." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7874740413753766, + "doc_id": "7f1ab71bd70d201c88ef6397316c40bf977759481e14e0c37fcaa2e075e02c8b", + "edit_distance": 0.5519125683060109, + "f1_score": 0.896551724137931, + "meteor": 0.7896824430035406, + "precision": 0.9904761904761905, + "pred_md": "## BUSINESS SOLUTIONS\n\n10 ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\nIN TODAY'S FAST-PACED DIGITAL WORLD OF BUSINESS, THE ABILITY TO COMMUNICATE AND ACCESS INFORMATION ANYTIME, ANYPLACE IS A COMPETITIVE ADVANTAGE THAT BUSINESS PROFESSIONALS LOOK TO ROGERS TO PROVIDE. ROGERS ENSURES THE INFORMATION THAT DRIVES COMMERCE FORWARD IS ALWAYS ON HAND AND HELPS BUSINESSES DEFINE HOW TO WIN IN THE DIGITAL WORLD.\n\nRogers provides a single reliable source for advanced business-focused voice, Internet and data networking solutions designed specifically for the most demanding of wireless and wired commercial requirements.\n\nBusinesses across Canada rely on Rogers for its national wireless network, world-leading LTE technology, seamless global connectivity, and the broadest array of wireless applications and devices, because they know that their mobility and remote connectivity needs are always covered with the most advanced solutions available. Because Rogers", + "recall": 0.8188976377952756, + "true_md": "## BUSINESS SOLUTIONS\n\nRogers provides a single reliable source for advanced business-focused voice, Internet and data networking solutions designed specifically for the most demanding of wireless and wired commercial requirements. \n\nIN TODAY’S FAST-PACED DIGITAL WORLD OF BUSINESS, THE ABILITY TO COMMUNICATE AND ACCESS INFORMATION ANYTIME, ANYPLACE IS A COMPETITIVE ADVANTAGE THAT BUSINESS PROFESSIONALS LOOK TO ROGERS TO PROVIDE. ROGERS ENSURES THE INFORMATION THAT DRIVES COMMERCE FORWARD IS ALWAYS ON HAND AND HELPS BUSINESSES DEFINE HOW TO WIN IN THE DIGITAL WORLD.\n\nBusinesses across Canada rely on Rogers for its national wireless network, world-leading LTE technology, seamless global connectivity, and the broadest array of wireless applications and devices, because they know that their mobility and remote connectivity needs are always covered with the most advanced solutions available. Because Rogers \n\n10 ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\nADVERTISING MEDIA SOLUTIONS\n\nDATA CENTRE & CLOUD SERVICES\n\nDATA NETWORKING\n\nVIRTUAL OFFICE\n\nADVANCED M2M SOLUTIONS\n\nBUSINESS TELEPHONY\n\nWIRELESS VOICE & DATA\n\nMOBILE INTERNET & E-MAIL\n\nBUSINESS IP SOLUTIONS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6160706847100156, + "doc_id": "fdc135a26166840d1cb611665bf9274d7285fe744f43d3c82f81e44efec1a4b2", + "edit_distance": 0.3020833333333333, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.7193978645496726, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Nordstrom, Inc.\n\n## Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nDollar and share amounts in millions except per share, per option and per unit amounts\n\nThe following table summarizes net sales within our reportable segments:\n\n1 Other retail includes our Jeffrey boutiques, Trunk Club and our Nordstrom Canada full-line store.\n\nThe following table summarizes net sales by merchandise category:\n\n64", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## Nordstrom, Inc. Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n## Nordstrom, Inc. Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements Dollar and share amounts in millions except per share, per option and per unit amounts\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements Dollar and share amounts in millions except per share, per option and per unit amounts\n\nThe following table summarizes net sales within our reportable segments:\n\n1 Other retail includes our Jeffrey boutiques, Trunk Club and our Nordstrom Canada full-line store.\n\nThe following table summarizes net sales by merchandise category:\n\n64" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8768598247070097, + "doc_id": "2b7b8355a42ebef0cf91583aad9f30f7c9fa63c5b05911730ba15275c024965b", + "edit_distance": 0.39313572542901715, + "f1_score": 0.9548989113530326, + "meteor": 0.9317133601455807, + "precision": 0.9623824451410659, + "pred_md": "## CORPORATE INFORMATION\n\n## Corporate Headquarters\n\n6100 North Western Avenue Oklahoma City, OK 73118 (405) 935-8000\n\n## Internet Address\n\nCompany financial information, public disclo sures and other information are available through Chesapeake's website at www.chk.com.\n\n## Common Stock\n\nChesapeake Energy Corporation's common stock is listed on the New York Stock Exchange (NYSE) under the symbol CHK. As of March 31, 2011, there were approximately 415,000 beneficial owners of our common stock.\n\n## Common Stock Dividends\n\nDuring 2010 the company declared a cash div idend of $0.075 per share on March 8, June 21, September 1 and December 20 for a total dividend declared of $0.30 per share.\n\n## Independent Public Accountants\n\nPricewaterhouseCoopers LLP 6120 South Yale, Suite 1850 Tulsa, OK 74136 (918) 524-1200\n\n## Stock Transfer Agent and Registrar\n\nCommunication concerning the transfer of shares, lost certificates, duplicate mailings or change of address notifications should be directed to our transfer agent:\n\nComputershare Trust Company, N.A. 250 Royall Street Canton, MA 02021 (800) 884-4225\n\nwww.computershare.com\n\n## Trustee for the Company's Senior Notes\n\nThe Bank of New York Mellon Trust Company, N.A. 101 Barclay Street, 8th Floor New York, NY 10286\n\nwww.bnymellon.com\n\n## Forward-looking Statements\n\nThis report includes 'forward-looking statements' that give our current expectations or forecasts\n\nof future events. They include estimates of nat ural gas and oil reserves, expected production, assumptions regarding future natural gas and oil prices, planned drilling activity and capital expenditures, and future asset sales, as well as statements concerning anticipated cash flow and liquidity, business strategy and other plans and objectives for future operations. Although we believe the expectations and forecasts reflected in these and other forward-looking statements are reasonable, we can give no assurance they will prove to have been correct. They can be af fected by inaccurate assumptions or by known or unknown risks and uncertainties.\n\nFactors that could cause actual results to differ materially from expected results are described under 'Risk Factors' in Item 1A of our 2010 Annual Report on Form 10-K included in this report. We caution you not to place undue reliance on for ward-looking statements, and we undertake no obligation to update this information. We urge you to carefully review and consider the disclo sures made in this report and our other filings with the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) regarding the risks and factors that may affect our business.\n\nThe SEC requires natural gas and oil companies, in filings made with the SEC, to disclose proved reserves and permits the optional disclosure of probable and possible reserves. While Chesapeake has elected not to report probable and possible reserves in its filings with the SEC, we have provided estimates in this report of what we consider to be our 'total resource base.' This term includes our estimated proved reserves as well as 'risked and unrisked unproved resources,' which represent Chesapeake's internal estimates of volumes of natural gas and oil that are not classified as proved reserves but are potentially recoverable through exploratory drilling or additional drilling or recovery techniques. Our estimates of unproved resources are not intended to correspond to probable and possible reserves, as defined by SEC regulations, and are by their nature more speculative than estimates of proved reserves and accordingly are subject to substantially greater risk of being ac tually realized by the company.\n\nWWW.CHK.COM", + "recall": 0.9475308641975309, + "true_md": "## CORPORATE INFORMATION\n\n## Corporate Headquarters\n\n## Internet Address\n\n## Common Stock\n\n## Common Stock Dividends\n\n## Independent Public Accountants\n\n## Stock Transfer Agent and Registrar\n\n## Trustee for the Company’s Senior Notes\n\n## Forward-looking Statements\n\nThis report includes “forward-looking statements” that give our current expectations or forecasts \n\nTheBank of New York Mellon Trust Company, N.A. 101 Barclay Street, 8th Floor New York, NY 10286 www.bnymellon.com\n\nCommunication concerning the transfer of shares, lost certificates, duplicate mailings or change of address notifications should be directed to our transfer agent: Computershare Trust Company, N.A. 250 Royall Street Canton, MA 02021 (800) 884-4225 www.computershare.com\n\nPricewaterhouseCoopers LLP 6120 South Yale, Suite 1850 Tulsa, OK 74136 (918) 524-1200\n\nDuring 2010 the company declared a cash div - idend of $0.075 per share on March 8, June 21, September 1 and December 20 for a total div- idend declared of $0.30 per share.\n\nChesapeake Energy Corporation’s common stock is listed on the New York Stock Exchange (NYSE) under the symbol CHK. As of March 31, 2011, there were approximately 415,000 beneficial owners of our common stock.\n\nCompany financial information, public disclo - sures and other information are available through Chesapeake’s website at www.chk.com.\n\n6100 North Western Avenue Oklahoma City, OK 73118 (405) 935-8000\n\nof future events. They include estimates of nat - ural gas and oil reserves, expected production, assumptions regarding future natural gas and oil prices, planned drilling activity and capital expenditures, and future asset sales, as well as statements concerning anticipated cash flow and liquidity, business strategy and other plans and objectives for future operations. Although we believe the expectations and forecasts reflected in these and other forward-looking statements are reasonable, we can give no assurance they will prove to have been correct. They can be af - fected by inaccurate assumptions or by known or unknown risks and uncertainties.\n\nFactors that could cause actual results to differ materially from expected results are described under “Risk Factors” in Item 1A of our 2010 Annual Report on Form 10-K included in this report. We caution you not to place undue reliance on for - ward-looking statements, and we undertake no obligation to update this information. We urge you to carefully review and consider the disclo - sures made in this report and our other filings with the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) regarding the risks and factors that may affect our business.\n\nThe SEC requires natural gas and oil companies, in filings made with the SEC, to disclose proved re- serves and permits the optional disclosure of probable and possible reserves. While Chesapeake has elected not to report probable and possible reserves in its filings with the SEC, we have pro- vided estimates in this report of what we consider to be our “total resource base.” This term includes our estimated proved reserves as well as “risked and unrisked unproved resources,” which repre- sent Chesapeake’s internal estimates of volumes of natural gas and oil that are not classified as proved reserves but are potentially recoverable through exploratory drilling or additional drilling or recovery techniques. Our estimates of unproved resources are not intended to correspond to probable and possible reserves, as defined by SEC regulations, and are by their nature more speculative than estimates of proved reserves and accordingly are subject to substantially greater risk of being ac- tually realized by the company.\n\nWWW.CHK.COM" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9002384878492671, + "doc_id": "5e11e9a75a03b6da31c63581abbe1ca20b5c98f163e17d6abe1f94e5bb50fb5a", + "edit_distance": 0.6403887688984882, + "f1_score": 0.9588652482269503, + "meteor": 0.8204969828045133, + "precision": 0.976878612716763, + "pred_md": "## Introduction\n\nThis Remuneration Report forms part of the Directors' Report. It outlines the Remuneration Policy and framework applied by the Company as well as details of the remuneration paid to Key Management Personnel. Key Management Personnel are defined as those persons having the authority and responsibility for planning, directing and controlling the activities of the Company, directly or indirectly, including Directors and members of the Executive Management group.\n\nThe information provided in this report has been prepared in accordance with s300A and audited as required by section 308 (3c) of the Corporations Act 2001 .\n\nThe objective of the Company's remuneration philosophy is to ensure that Directors and senior staff are remunerated fairly and responsibly at a level that is competitive, reasonable and appropriate, in order to attract and retain suitably skilled and experienced people.\n\nDuring the year the Company introduced a STI Plan that is based on Key Management Personnel individual performance measures and a LongTerm Incentive ('LTI') Executive Rights Plan that provides performance-based remuneration to members of management through the issue of Deferred Rights and Performance Rights vesting over a period of three years. These new plans are discussed in further detail later in this report.\n\n## Voting and comments made at the Company's 2012 AGM\n\nThe table below provides a summary of the Board's action and / or comments in response to concerns raised by shareholders at the 2012 AGM in relation to remuneration.\n\n## Concern\n\nKey issues raised were:\n\n- 〉 t he granting of deferred rights;\n- 〉 definition of what compromises 'fixed pay'; and\n- 〉 a lack of understanding of the TSR Alpha™ concept recommended as the LTI performance assessment process.\n\nwww.kingsgate.com.au\n\n## Remuneration Policy\n\nThe Remuneration Policy has been designed to align the interests of shareholders, Directors, and employees. This is achieved by setting a framework to:\n\n- 〉 help ensure an applicable balance of fixed and at-risk remuneration, with the at-risk component linking incentive and performance measures to both Group and individual performance;\n- 〉 provide an appropriate reward for Directors and Executive Management to manage and lead the business successfully and to drive strong, long-term growth in line with the Company's strategy and business objectives;\n- 〉 encourage executives to strive for superior performance;\n- 〉 facilitate transparency and fairness in executive remuneration policy and practices;\n- 〉 be competitive and cost effective in the current employment market; and\n- 〉 contribute to appropriate attraction and retention strategies for Directors and executives.\n\nIn consultation with external remuneration consultants, the Group has structured an executive remuneration framework that is market competitive and complimentary to the business strategy of the organisation.\n\nThe framework is intended to provide a mix of fixed and variable remuneration, with a blend of short and long-term incentives as appropriate. As executives gain seniority within the Group, the balance of this mix shifts to a higher proportion of 'at risk' rewards (refer to chart Remuneration Reward Mix on the following page).\n\n## Remuneration Governance\n\n## Role of the Remuneration Committee\n\nThe Remuneration Committee is a committee of the Board and has responsibility for setting policy for determining the nature and amount of emoluments of Board members and senior executives. The Committee makes recommendations to the Board concerning:\n\n- 〉 Non-Executive Director fees;\n- 〉 remuneration levels of Executive Directors and other Key Management Personnel;\n- 〉 the executive remuneration framework and operation of the incentive plan; and\n- 〉 key performance indicators and performance hurdles for the executive team.\n\nIn forming its recommendations the Committee takes into consideration the Group's stage of development, remuneration in the industry and performance. The Corporate Governance Statement provides further information on the role of this committee.\n\n## Remuneration Consultants\n\nThe Group engages the services of independent and specialist remuneration consultants from time to time. Under the Corporations Act 2001 , remuneration consultants must be engaged by the Non-Executive Directors and reporting of any remuneration recommendations must be made directly to the Remuneration Committee.\n\n## Action or Comment\n\nThe Company has benchmarked the issuing of LTIs to the Managing Director and other Key Management Personnel against all companies of comparable market position as part of a broader remuneration comparison using AON Hewitt / McDonald, a review of survey data from the Egan and Associates 'The KMP Report' and validation from Godfrey's Remuneration Group. The findings confirm the level of remuneration, inclusive of performance rights, to be comparable to similarly experienced Managing Directors and other Key Management Personnel with companies of comparable market positioning within the industry.\n\nThe Company has sought to discuss key elements contained in the Remuneration Report with shareholders, shareholder representative groups and proxy advisory groups. Further details regarding the TSR Alpha™ benchmarking methodology are included in the LTI section of this Report.\n\nDeferred rights for the Managing Director were transitional with eligibility for performance rights only in the future.\n\nDetails of the STI and LTI Plans are provided later in this Report.", + "recall": 0.9415041782729805, + "true_md": "Directors’ Report 50\n\n## Introduction\n\n## Remuneration Policy\n\n## Remuneration Governance\n\n## Voting and comments made at the Company’s 2012 AGM\n\n## Concern\n\n## Action or Comment\n\n## Remuneration Consultants\n\nThis Remuneration Report forms part of the Directors’ Report. It outlines the Remuneration Policy and framework applied by the Company as well as details of the remuneration paid to Key Management Personnel. Key Management Personnel are defined as those persons having the authority and responsibility for planning, directing and controlling the activities of the Company, directly or indirectly, including Directors and members of the Executive Management group.\n\nThe information provided in this report has been prepared in accordance with s300A and audited as required by section 308 (3c) of the Corporations Act 2001 .\n\nThe objective of the Company’s remuneration philosophy is to ensure that Directors and senior staff are remunerated fairly and responsibly at a level that is competitive, reasonable and appro- priate, in order to attract and retain suitably skilled and experienced people.\n\nDuring the year the Company introduced a STI Plan that is based on Key Management Personnel individual performance measures and a Long- Term Incentive (“LTI”) Executive Rights Plan that provides performance-based remuneration to members of management through the issue of Deferred Rights and Performance Rights vesting over a period of three years. These new plans are discussed in further detail later in this report. \n\nThe table below provides a summary of the Board’s action and / or comments in response to concerns raised by shareholders at the 2012 AGM in relation to remuneration.\n\nKey issues raised were:\n\nThe Remuneration Policy has been designed to align the interests of shareholders, Directors, and employees. This is achieved by setting a framework to:\n\nIn consultation with external remuneration consultants, the Group has structured an execu- tive remuneration framework that is market competitive and complimentary to the business strategy of the organisation.\n\nThe framework is intended to provide a mix of fixed and variable remuneration, with a blend of short and long-term incentives as appropriate. As executives gain seniority within the Group, the balance of this mix shifts to a higher propor- tion of “at risk” rewards (refer to chart – Remuneration Reward Mix on the following page).\n\nThe Company has benchmarked the issuing of LTIs to the Managing Director and other Key Management Personnel against all companies of comparable market position as part of a broader remuneration comparison using AON Hewitt / McDonald, a review of survey data from the Egan and Associates “The KMP Report” and validation from Godfrey’s Remuneration Group. The findings confirm the level of remuneration, inclusive of performance rights, to be comparable to similarly experienced Managing Directors and other Key Management Personnel with companies of comparable market positioning within the industry.\n\nThe Company has sought to discuss key elements contained in the Remuneration Report with shareholders, shareholder representative groups and proxy advisory groups. Further details regarding the TSR Alpha™ benchmarking methodology are included in the LTI section of this Report.\n\nDeferred rights for the Managing Director were transitional with eligibility for performance rights only in the future.\n\nDetails of the STI and LTI Plans are provided later in this Report.\n\nThe Remuneration Committee is a committee of the Board and has responsibility for setting policy for determining the nature and amount of emoluments of Board members and senior executives. The Committee makes recommenda- tions to the Board concerning:\n\nIn forming its recommendations the Committee takes into consideration the Group’s stage of development, remuneration in the industry and performance. The Corporate Governance Statement provides further information on the role of this committee.\n\nThe Group engages the services of independent and specialist remuneration consultants from time to time. Under the Corporations Act 2001 , remuneration consultants must be engaged by the Non-Executive Directors and reporting of any remuneration recommendations must be made directly to the Remuneration Committee.\n\n## Role of the Remuneration Committee\n\n- 〉 help ensure an applicable balance of fixed and at-risk remuneration, with the at-risk component linking incentive and perfor- mance measures to both Group and indi- vidual performance;\n\n- 〉 provide an appropriate reward for Directors and Executive Management to manage and lead the business successfully and to drive strong, long-term growth in line with the Company’s strategy and business objectives;\n\n- 〉 encourage executives to strive for superior performance;\n\n- 〉 facilitate transparency and fairness in execu- tive remuneration policy and practices;\n\n- 〉 be competitive and cost effective in the current employment market; and\n\n- 〉 contribute to appropriate attraction and retention strategies for Directors and executives.\n\n- 〉 Non-Executive Director fees;\n\n- 〉 remuneration levels of Executive Directors and other Key Management Personnel;\n\n- 〉 the executive remuneration framework and operation of the incentive plan; and\n\n- 〉 key performance indicators and performance hurdles for the executive team.\n\n- 〉 t he granting of deferred rights;\n\n- 〉 definition of what compromises ‘fixed pay’; and\n\n- 〉 a lack of understanding of the TSR Alpha™ concept recommended as the LTI performance assessment process.\n\nwww.kingsgate.com.au" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5807440571204237, + "doc_id": "3b7b66a168a4eee6a9f58212758e6e55d00a3de335ba34b3c49365f8f1ac8b0d", + "edit_distance": 0.6005665722379604, + "f1_score": 0.864, + "meteor": 0.7821640352632633, + "precision": 0.7769784172661871, + "pred_md": "96\n\nNotes to the Financial Statements\n\n## 24. Employee benefits and share-based payments continued\n\nSet out below are summaries of options under the plans.\n\nThe fair value of shares issued on the exercise of options is the weighted average price at which the Company's shares were traded on the Australian Securities Exchange on the day prior to the exercise of the options.\n\nThe weighted average remaining contractual life of share options outstanding at the end of the period was 2.59 years (2012: 2.95 years).\n\nYear ended 30 June 2013 - Other\n\n04 Apr 2008\n\n03 Apr 2013\n\n$6.00\n\n415,000\n\n-\n\n(415,000)\n\n-\n\n-\n\n04 Apr 2008\n\n03 Apr 2013\n\n$7.00\n\n500,000\n\n-\n\n(500,000)\n\n-\n\n-\n\n26 Aug 2011\n\n25 Aug 2014\n\n$10.36\n\n1,500,000\n\n-\n\n-\n\n1,500,000\n\n1,500,000\n\n23 Sep 2011\n\n22 Sep 2016\n\n$10.50\n\n3,333,334\n\n-\n\n-\n\n3,333,334\n\n3,333,334\n\nTotal\n\n5,748,334\n\n-\n\n(915,000)\n\n4,833,334\n\n4,833,334\n\nWeighted average exercise price\n\n$9.83\n\n$6.55\n\n$10.46\n\n$10.46\n\nYear ended 30 June 2012 - Other\n\n04 Apr 2008\n\n03 Apr 2013\n\n$6.00\n\n415,000\n\n-\n\n-\n\n415,000\n\n415,000\n\n04 Apr 2008\n\n03 Apr 2013\n\n$7.00\n\n500,000\n\n-\n\n-\n\n500,000\n\n500,000\n\n26 Aug 2011\n\n25 Aug 2014\n\n$10.36\n\n-\n\n1,500,000\n\n-\n\n1,500,000\n\n1,500,000\n\n23 Sep 2011\n\n22 Sep 2016\n\n$10.50\n\n-\n\n3,333,334\n\n-\n\n3,333,334\n\n3,333,334\n\nTotal\n\n915,000\n\n4,833,334\n\n-\n\n5,748,334\n\n5,748,334\n\nWeighted average exercise price\n\n$6.55\n\n$10.46\n\n$9.83\n\n$9.83\n\n## Executive Rights Plan\n\nOn 1 July 2012, the Company introduced an Executive Rights Plan which involves the grant of two types of rights being performance rights and deferred rights. Subject to the satisfaction of the performance condition at the end of a three year measurement period in respect of performance rights and the service condition at the end of the three year vesting period in respect of deferred rights, the rights will vest. The first $1,000 of value per individual award is settled by cash with the balance settled by shares.\n\nwww.kingsgate.com.au", + "recall": 0.972972972972973, + "true_md": "Notes to the Financial Statements 96\n\n## 24. Employee benefits and share-based payments continued\n\nSet out below are summaries of options under the plans.\n\nThe fair value of shares issued on the exercise of options is the weighted average price at which the Company’s shares were traded on the Australian Securities Exchange on the day prior to the exercise of the options.\n\nThe fair value of shares issued on the exercise of options is the weighted average price at which the Company’s shares were traded on the Australian Securities Exchange on the day prior to the exercise of the options.\n\nThe weighted average remaining contractual life of share options outstanding at the end of the period was 2.59 years (2012: 2.95 years).\n\nOn 1 July 2012, the Company introduced an Executive Rights Plan which involves the grant of two types of rights being performance rights and deferred rights. Subject to the satisfaction of the performance condition at the end of a three year measurement period in respect of performance rights and the service condition at the end of the three year vesting period in respect of deferred rights, the rights will vest. The first $1,000 of value per individual award is settled by cash with the balance settled by shares. \n\n## Executive Rights Plan\n\n## Year ended 30 June 2012 – Other\n\n## Year ended 30 June 2013 – Other\n\nwww.kingsgate.com.au" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4831965686709839, + "doc_id": "d6e59e4e87b227c61ae0a992ac5554043589009e440e21f252351033219839e7", + "edit_distance": 0.7822966507177034, + "f1_score": 0.9503546099290779, + "meteor": 0.48120838764271584, + "precision": 0.950354609929078, + "pred_md": "## Management's Discussion and Analysis\n\nDollar amounts are in thousands of canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\nA sensitivity analysis of all significant assumptions is shown below:\n\n- (1) If the 1% change is an increase in the noted vacancy or management fee, the impact would result in a decrease in value. Alternatively,\n- a decrease in the vacancy or management fee would result in an increase in value.\n\n## 2013 Acquisitions - Investment Properties\n\n- (1) Acquired as a portfolio.\n- (2) Purchase price on acquisition does not include transaction-related costs.\n- (3) Killam entered into a 50/50 joint development agreement with another company for the purchase of this land. The $1.8 million purchase price represents\n- Killam's interest in the land.\n- (4) Included in the acquisition is 21,242 square feet of commercial space.\n\nIn addition to apartment acquisitions during 2013, Killam purchased a MHC in Antigonish with 65 sites and three parcels of land for future development. The parcel of land located in Cambridge is 5.2 acres and is zoned for a maximum height of seven stories and a density of 180 units. The parcel of land in Moncton is 0.8 acres and the land located at 1057 Barrington Street in Halifax is 0.7 acres and was purchased under a joint development agreement for the purpose of developing a six -story mixed-use building.\n\n48\n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013", + "recall": 0.950354609929078, + "true_md": "A sensitivity analysis of all significant assumptions is shown below:\n\n(1) If the 1% change is an increase in the noted vacancy or management fee, the impact would result in a decrease in value. Alternatively, a decrease in the vacancy or management fee would result in an increase in value.\n\nIn addition to apartment acquisitions during 2013, Killam purchased a MHC in Antigonish with 65 sites and three parcels of land for future development. The parcel of land located in Cambridge is 5.2 acres and is zoned for a maximum height of seven stories and a density of 180 units. The parcel of land in Moncton is 0.8 acres and the land located at 1057 Barrington Street in Halifax is 0.7 acres and was purchased under a joint \n\ndevelopment. The parcel of land located in Cambridge is 5.2 acres and is zoned for a maximum height of seven stories and a density of 180 units. The parcel of land in Moncton is 0.8 acres and the land located at 1057 Barrington Street in Halifax is 0.7 acres and was purchased under a joint development agreement for the purpose of developing a six‑story mixed‑use building.\n\n(1) Acquired as a portfolio. (2) Purchase price on acquisition does not include transaction‑related costs.\n\n(1) Acquired as a portfolio. (2) Purchase price on acquisition does not include transaction‑related costs. (3) Killam entered into a 50/50 joint development agreement with another company for the purchase of this land. The $1.8 million purchase price represents \n\n(2) Purchase price on acquisition does not include transaction‑related costs. (3) Killam entered into a 50/50 joint development agreement with another company for the purchase of this land. The $1.8 million purchase price represents Killam’s interest in the land. (4) Included in the acquisition is 21,242 square feet of commercial space.\n\nKillam’s interest in the land. (4) Included in the acquisition is 21,242 square feet of commercial space.\n\n48 Killam ProPerties inc | 2013\n\n## 2013 Acquisitions ‑ Investment Properties\n\n## Management’s Discussion and Analysis Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\nManagement’s Discussion and Analysis Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9007826689639918, + "doc_id": "37e42771fb7e16e9a5097b2dbe494bcb6e3f8d47291f1b1ba0b3df57e437c6b2", + "edit_distance": 0.7662337662337663, + "f1_score": 0.9887640449438203, + "meteor": 0.9661396514522225, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "SMBC\n\n## Loans (Nonconsolidated)\n\nSumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation\n\n## Balance of Loans and Bills Discounted\n\n## Year-End Balance\n\n## Average Balance\n\nNote: The average balance of foreign-currency-denominated transactions by domestic branches in international operations is calculated by the monthly current method.\n\n## Balance of Loans and Bills Discounted, Classified by Purpose\n\n## Balance of Loans and Bills Discounted, Classified by Collateral\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n166", + "recall": 0.9777777777777777, + "true_md": "SMBC\n\n## Loans (Nonconsolidated)\n\n## Balance of Loans and Bills Discounted\n\n## Balance of Loans and Bills Discounted, Classified by Purpose\n\n## Balance of Loans and Bills Discounted, Classified by Collateral\n\nSMFG 2011 166\n\n## Year-End Balance\n\n## Average Balance\n\nSumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation\n\n- Note: The average balance of foreign-currency-denominated transactions by domestic branches in international operations is calculated by the monthly current method." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8770902158929966, + "doc_id": "8b5809c5a1a0bdbfbdefc29d44829982a24ad14c6bd8016b5768c9ba5f1fcd52", + "edit_distance": 0.10467706013363029, + "f1_score": 0.9675675675675677, + "meteor": 0.9202411500450637, + "precision": 0.9728260869565217, + "pred_md": "## Management's Discussion and Analysis\n\nDollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\n## Operating Facility\n\nAn operating facility which consists of a $1.0 million revolving demand facility for general business purposes, bearing interest at the lender's prime rate plus 1%. As at December 31, 2013, the Company had letters of credit totaling $0.5 million outstanding against this facility (December 31, 2012 - $0.3 million). The agreement includes certain covenants and undertakings of which the Company is in compliance.\n\n## Shareholders' Equity\n\nFor the year ended December 31, 2013, 144,349 stock options were exercised for common shares and cash proceeds to the Company of $1.0 million (December 31, 2012 - 471,953 and cash proceeds of $4.2 million). There were also 50,090 RSUs redeemed and 21,838 common shares issued related to the redemptions during 2013 (December 31, 2012 - Nil). The Company also issued 194,774 common shares related to property acquisitions for a total value of $2.4 million (2012 - Nil).\n\nDuring 2013 Killam paid a dividend of $0.04833 per share per month ($0.58 per share annualized). the dividend was increased to $0.05 per share per month ($0.60 per share annualized) effective for the January 2014 dividend payment in February 2014. The Company's Dividend Reinvestment Plan ('DRIP') allows shareholders to elect to have all cash dividends from the Company reinvested in additional common shares. Shareholders who participate in the DRIP receive an additional dividend of common shares equal to 3% of each cash dividend that was reinvested. The price per share is calculated by reference to the ten-day volume weighted average price of the Company's common shares on the Toronto Stock Exchange preceding the relevant dividend date, which typically is on or about the 15th day of the month following the dividend declaration. For the year ended December 31, 2013, the Company issued 296,004 common shares under the DRIP with a value of $3.3 million (December 31, 2012 - 347,473 common shares with a value of $4.4 million). For the year ended December 31, 2013, the average DriP participation rate was 10% (2012 - 15%).\n\n56\n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013", + "recall": 0.9623655913978495, + "true_md": "## Management’s Discussion and Analysis Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\n## Operating Facility\n\n## Shareholders’ Equity\n\nManagement’s Discussion and Analysis Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\nAn operating facility which consists of a $1.0 million revolving demand facility for general business purposes, bearing interest at the lender’s prime rate plus 1%. As at December 31, 2013, the Company had letters of credit totaling $0.5 million outstanding against this facility (December 31, 2012 ‑ $0.3 million). The agreement includes certain covenants and undertakings of which the Company is in compliance.\n\nFor the year ended December 31, 2013, 144,349 stock options were exercised for common shares and cash proceeds to the Company of $1.0 million (December 31, 2012 ‑ 471,953 and cash proceeds of $4.2 million). There were also 50,090 RSUs redeemed and 21,838 common shares issued related to the redemptions during 2013 (December 31, 2012 – Nil). The Company also issued 194,774 common shares related to property acquisitions for a total value of $2.4 million (2012 – Nil).\n\nDuring 2013 Killam paid a dividend of $0.04833 per share per month ($0.58 per share annualized). the dividend was increased to $0.05 per share per month ($0.60 per share annualized) effective for the January 2014 dividend payment in February 2014. The Company’s Dividend Reinvestment Plan (“DRIP”) allows shareholders to elect to have all cash dividends from the Company reinvested in additional common shares. Shareholders who participate in the DRIP receive an additional dividend of common shares equal to 3% of each cash dividend that was reinvested. The price per share is calculated by reference to the ten‑day volume weighted average price of the Company’s common shares on the Toronto Stock Exchange preceding the relevant dividend date, which typically is on or about the 15th day of the month following the dividend declaration. For the year ended December 31, 2013, the Company issued 296,004 common shares under the DRIP with a value of $3.3 million (December 31, 2012 – 347,473 common shares with a value of $4.4 million). For the year ended December 31, 2013, the average DriP participation rate was 10% (2012 ‑ 15%).\n\n56 Killam ProPerties inc | 2013" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9164512738880026, + "doc_id": "478340f28fe9ee856afdb2e0dd52ae31c77cdc64218815c38008ebb6f50aa3bf", + "edit_distance": 0.125, + "f1_score": 0.9807692307692306, + "meteor": 0.9851068460843307, + "precision": 0.9807692307692307, + "pred_md": "Supplemental Information\n\nSMBC\n\n(Continued)\n\nNotes: 1. Amounts less than 1 million yen have been omitted.\n\n2. For the convenience of readers, the accompanying U.S. dollar financial statements have been translated from Japanese yen, as a matter of arithmetical computation only, at the rate of ·83.15 to US$1, the exchange rate prevailing at March 31, 2011.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n141", + "recall": 0.9807692307692307, + "true_md": "SMFG 2011 141\n\nSMBC Supplemental Information\n\n(Continued)\n\nNotes: 1. Amounts less than 1 million yen have been omitted.\n\n2. For the convenience of readers, the accompanying U.S. dollar financial statements have been translated from Japanese yen, as a matter of arithmetical computation only, at the rate of ¥83.15 to US$1, the exchange rate prevailing at March 31, 2011." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9602147541972994, + "doc_id": "71df4fa28f0f10cc5f17c3026b66ab746ef04842939cfe53ed92791b57c65b22", + "edit_distance": 0.05555555555555555, + "f1_score": 0.9853658536585366, + "meteor": 0.9743563474387527, + "precision": 0.9901960784313726, + "pred_md": "## Additional Statutory Disclosures\n\n## Details of remuneration\n\nDetails of the nature and amount of each major element of the remuneration of the Directors and the Group executive managers are set out in the following tables.\n\n- 1 Non-monetary benefits relate to car parking, travel, life insurance, relocation, and accommodation allowance provided by the Company. Relocation and accommodation allowance is applicable to interstate recruitment of relevant personnel.\n- 2 Amortised value of rights comprises the fair value of performance and deferred rights expensed during the year. This is the first year rights were issued. This is an accounting expense and does not reflect the value to the executive of rights that vested in the financial year. Refer to the table on page 60 for the value of rights that have vested.\n- 3 Consulting Fees of $100,000 were paid or payable to Norwest Mining Consultants Ltd, of which Peter McAleer is an officer and director.\n\ncontinued\n\nDirectors' Report\n\nu", + "recall": 0.9805825242718447, + "true_md": "Directors’ Report 57\n\n## Additional Statutory Disclosures\n\nDirectors’ Report\n\n## Details of remuneration\n\nDetails of the nature and amount of each major element of the remuneration of the Directors and the Group executive managers are set out in the following tables.\n\n- 1 Non-monetary benefits relate to car parking, travel, life insurance, relocation, and accommodation allowance provided by the Company. Relocation and accommodation allowance is applicable to interstate recruitment of relevant personnel.\n\n- 2 Amortised value of rights comprises the fair value of performance and deferred rights expensed during the year. This is the first year rights were issued. This is an accounting expense and does not reflect the value to the executive of rights that vested in the financial year. Refer to the table on page 60 for the value of rights that have vested. \n\n- 3 Consulting Fees of $100,000 were paid or payable to Norwest Mining Consultants Ltd, of which Peter McAleer is an officer and director.\n\ncontinued u" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8257919438271589, + "doc_id": "7b121ca444b334731ecb50cf7fbd334d721ee0e23204dd253fe51d37eaaf333d", + "edit_distance": 0.16342412451361868, + "f1_score": 0.9867172675521823, + "meteor": 0.7908783935590854, + "precision": 0.9885931558935361, + "pred_md": "## Net Sales (2014 vs. 2013)\n\nIn 2014, total company net sales increased 7.8%, which was attributable to the comparable sales increase of 4.0%. During the year, we opened three Nordstrom full-line stores, including our first store in Canada, and 27 Nordstrom Rack stores. Additionally, as a result of the acquisition of Trunk Club, we acquired four Trunk Club showrooms and opened one additional Trunk Club showroom in 2014. These additions increased our square footage by 5.5% and represented 2.8% of our total net sales for 2014.\n\nNordstrom net sales, which consist of the U.S. full-line and Nordstrom.com businesses, were $9,678 in 2014, an increase of 3.8% compared with 2013, with comparable sales up 3.6%. These increases reflected continued momentum in our Nordstrom.com channel. Both the number of items sold and the average selling price increased on a comparable basis in 2014. Category highlights included Accessories, Cosmetics and Men's Apparel.\n\nU.S. full-line net sales for 2014 were $7,682, a decrease of 0.3% compared with 2013 and comparable sales decreased by 0.5%. The topperforming geographic regions for full-line stores were the Southeast and Southwest.\n\nOur Nordstrom.com, Nordstromrack.com and HauteLook channels continued to experience outsized growth. Nordstrom.com net sales increased 23% and Nordstromrack.com and HauteLook net sales increased 22%, both driven by expanded merchandise selection and ongoing technology investments to enhance the customer experience.\n\nNordstrom Rack net sales increased $477, or 17%, compared with 2013, reflecting incremental volume from existing stores and the impact of 27 new stores since fiscal 2013. Comparable sales increased 3.8% for the year. Shoes and Accessories were the top-performing categories for the year. On a comparable basis, the average selling price of Nordstrom Rack merchandise increased while the number of items sold was flat.\n\n## Net Sales (2013 vs. 2012)\n\nNet sales for 2013 increased 3.4% compared with 2012, driven by a comparable sales increase of 2.5%, attributable to growth at Nordstrom.com and Nordstrom Rack's accelerated store expansion. During 2013, we opened 22 Nordstrom Rack stores and relocated one Nordstrom full-line store and two Nordstrom Rack stores. These additions represented 1.6% of our total net sales for 2013 and increased our square footage by 2.9%. The 53 rd week in 2012 contributed approximately $162 in additional net sales.\n\nNordstrom net sales for 2013 were $9,327, an increase of 1.0% compared with 2012, with comparable sales up 2.3%. Strong growth at Nordstrom.com was partially offset by sales decreases at our full-line stores. Both the average selling price and the number of items sold increased on a comparable basis in 2013 compared with 2012. Category highlights included Cosmetics, Men's Shoes and Women's Apparel.\n\nFull-line net sales for 2013 were $7,705, a decrease of 3.3% compared with 2012, which was primarily driven by a comparable sales decrease of 2.1% for the year. The top-performing geographic regions for full-line stores for 2013 were the Southwest and Southeast. Nordstrom.com showed strong sales growth with net sales of $1,622, an increase of 28% compared with 2012, with comparable sales up 30% on a comparable 52-week basis. These increases were driven by expanded merchandise selection and ongoing technology investments to enhance the customer experience.\n\nNordstrom Rack net sales were $2,738, up 12.0% compared with 2012, primarily due to 37 new store openings in 2012 and 2013. Comparable sales increased 2.7% for the year. Cosmetics and Shoes were the strongest-performing categories for the year. Both the average selling price and the number of items sold increased on a comparable basis in 2013 compared with 2012.\n\n## Retail Business Gross Profit\n\nThe following table summarizes the Retail Business gross profit:\n\n1 Retailers do not uniformly record the costs of buying and occupancy and supply chain operations (freight, purchasing, receiving, distribution, etc.) between gross profit and selling, general and administrative expense. As such, our gross profit and selling, general and administrative expenses and rates may not be comparable to other retailers' expenses and rates.\n\n2 Ending inventory includes pack and hold inventory of $222, $173 and $125 in 2014, 2013 and 2012, which represents strategic purchases of merchandise for upcoming selling seasons.\n\n3 Inventory turnover rate is calculated as annual cost of sales and related buying and occupancy costs (for all segments) divided by 4-quarter average inventory. Retailers do not uniformly calculate inventory turnover as buying and occupancy costs may be included in selling, general and administrative expenses. As such, our inventory turnover rates may not be comparable to other retailers.\n\nNordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 19", + "recall": 0.9848484848484849, + "true_md": "## Net Sales (2014 vs. 2013) In 2014, total company net sales increased 7.8%, which was attributable to the comparable sales increase of 4.0%. During the year, we\n\n## Net Sales (2013 vs. 2012) Net sales for 2013 increased 3.4% compared with 2012, driven by a comparable sales increase of 2.5%, attributable to growth at\n\n## Retail Business Gross Profit The following table summarizes the Retail Business gross profit:\n\nNet Sales (2014 vs. 2013) In 2014, total company net sales increased 7.8%, which was attributable to the comparable sales increase of 4.0%. During the year, we opened three Nordstrom full-line stores, including our first store in Canada, and 27 Nordstrom Rack stores. Additionally, as a result of the acquisition of Trunk Club, we acquired four Trunk Club showrooms and opened one additional Trunk Club showroom in 2014. These additions increased our square footage by 5.5% and represented 2.8% of our total net sales for 2014. \n\nNordstrom net sales, which consist of the U.S. full-line and Nordstrom.com businesses, were $9,678 in 2014, an increase of 3.8% compared with 2013, with comparable sales up 3.6%. These increases reflected continued momentum in our Nordstrom.com channel. Both the number of items sold and the average selling price increased on a comparable basis in 2014. Category highlights included Accessories, Cosmetics and Men’s Apparel. \n\nU.S. full-line net sales for 2014 were $7,682, a decrease of 0.3% compared with 2013 and comparable sales decreased by 0.5%. The top- performing geographic regions for full-line stores were the Southeast and Southwest. \n\nOur Nordstrom.com, Nordstromrack.com and HauteLook channels continued to experience outsized growth. Nordstrom.com net sales increased 23% and Nordstromrack.com and HauteLook net sales increased 22%, both driven by expanded merchandise selection and ongoing technology investments to enhance the customer experience.\n\nNordstrom Rack net sales increased $477, or 17%, compared with 2013, reflecting incremental volume from existing stores and the impact of 27 new stores since fiscal 2013. Comparable sales increased 3.8% for the year. Shoes and Accessories were the top-performing categories for the year. On a comparable basis, the average selling price of Nordstrom Rack merchandise increased while the number of items sold was flat. \n\nNet Sales (2013 vs. 2012) Net sales for 2013 increased 3.4% compared with 2012, driven by a comparable sales increase of 2.5%, attributable to growth at Nordstrom.com and Nordstrom Rack’s accelerated store expansion. During 2013, we opened 22 Nordstrom Rack stores and relocated one Nordstrom full-line store and two Nordstrom Rack stores. These additions represented 1.6% of our total net sales for 2013 and increased our square footage by 2.9%. The 53 rd week in 2012 contributed approximately $162 in additional net sales.\n\nNordstrom net sales for 2013 were $9,327, an increase of 1.0% compared with 2012, with comparable sales up 2.3%. Strong growth at Nordstrom.com was partially offset by sales decreases at our full-line stores. Both the average selling price and the number of items sold increased on a comparable basis in 2013 compared with 2012. Category highlights included Cosmetics, Men’s Shoes and Women’s Apparel. \n\nFull-line net sales for 2013 were $7,705, a decrease of 3.3% compared with 2012, which was primarily driven by a comparable sales decrease of 2.1% for the year. The top-performing geographic regions for full-line stores for 2013 were the Southwest and Southeast. Nordstrom.com showed strong sales growth with net sales of $1,622, an increase of 28% compared with 2012, with comparable sales up 30% on a comparable 52-week basis. These increases were driven by expanded merchandise selection and ongoing technology investments to enhance the customer experience.\n\nNordstrom Rack net sales were $2,738, up 12.0% compared with 2012, primarily due to 37 new store openings in 2012 and 2013. Comparable sales increased 2.7% for the year. Cosmetics and Shoes were the strongest-performing categories for the year. Both the average selling price and the number of items sold increased on a comparable basis in 2013 compared with 2012.\n\nRetail Business Gross Profit The following table summarizes the Retail Business gross profit:\n\n1 Retailers do not uniformly record the costs of buying and occupancy and supply chain operations (freight, purchasing, receiving, distribution, etc.) between gross profit and selling, general and administrative expense. As such, our gross profit and selling, general and administrative expenses and rates may not be comparable to other retailers’ expenses and rates. Ending inventory includes pack and hold inventory of $222, $173 and $125 in 2014, 2013 and 2012, which represents strategic purchases of merchandise for upcoming selling \n\nexpenses and rates. 2 Ending inventory includes pack and hold inventory of $222, $173 and $125 in 2014, 2013 and 2012, which represents strategic purchases of merchandise for upcoming selling seasons. Inventory turnover rate is calculated as annual cost of sales and related buying and occupancy costs (for all segments) divided by 4-quarter average inventory. Retailers do not \n\nseasons. 3 Inventory turnover rate is calculated as annual cost of sales and related buying and occupancy costs (for all segments) divided by 4-quarter average inventory. Retailers do not uniformly calculate inventory turnover as buying and occupancy costs may be included in selling, general and administrative expenses. As such, our inventory turnover rates may not be comparable to other retailers. \n\nNordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 19" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8552086207821002, + "doc_id": "1f96268b389ff9143dcc14a9a170939647f104c9ff659edfa3c781ba9bcba63a", + "edit_distance": 0.2708585247883918, + "f1_score": 0.9749631811487484, + "meteor": 0.8227028983383787, + "precision": 0.9851190476190477, + "pred_md": "22\n\nOperations Report\n\nMine production for the year totalled 502,034 tonnes of ore at a reconciled grade of 4.17 g/t comprising 356,009 tonnes at 5.26 g/t of high grade ore and 146,025 tonnes @1.52 g/t of low grade ore.\n\nThe main M2 Lode provided 44% of mined ounces with 13% of ounces mined from M1. Compared to the previous financial year, M2 contributed a lower percentage of the total ounces mined due to increased contributions from the Challenger West. Challenger West Lode, which was mined for the first time in 2012, contributed an encouraging 32% of the total ounces.\n\nOre production from the Main M2 and M1 lodes during the year was strongly impacted by the 215 Shear due to its foreshortening of the lodes in advance of the predicted '79' fault. This resulted in less ore above the '79' fault.\n\n## Development\n\nThe current decline and mining front of the M1/ M2 orebodies has continued below the 215 Shear, with the establishment of the 205, 195, 175, 155 and 135 levels.\n\nStoping has been initiated on the 205, 195 and 175 levels where ground conditions in the stopes have led to greater than planned dilution. Poor ground conditions were noted in the levels just above the 215 Shear and are thought to be associated with the shear rather than with the depth of the mine. In an effort to control the dilution, stope dimensions, pillar placement and cable bolting is being trialled. A combination of these ground control methods has resulted in a degree of success in reducing the dilution.\n\nThe mine schedule continued with a combined focus of development and stoping on two separate work areas being the high grade shoot at Challenger West on the 790, 810, 890 and 870 levels, and the mining of high grade ore pods below the 215 Shear on M1 and M2.\n\nA total of 6,799 metres of development was achieved for the year (exclusive of exploration).\n\nThe Challenger West orebody has proven to have the highest grade in the mine and the potential to extend from the surface to the base of the current mine. Current diamond drilling is targeting the upper and lower ore zones. Challenger West is the primary target for the next nine months to continue stoping and prove up the identified ore lodes for the future of the Challenger underground. Significant development has set up two means of egress, flow through vent and stoping in the past 12 months. Challenger West will form the foundation of future mining activities at Challenger into the foreseeable future.\n\nwww.kingsgate.com.au\n\n## Occupational Health and Safety\n\nIn April 2013, Kingsgate was saddened to report that an employee was fatally injured off site while returning home from the Challenger Gold Mine. It's important to reflect for a moment to acknowledge the important contribution this individual made to his place of work but to also recognise the loss this person's family suffers. Kingsgate is fully cognisant of the valuable contribution and dedication shown by this individual and will strive to ensure that his legacy is respectfully remembered.\n\nDuring 2013 there were four incidents resulting in lost time injuries, three restricted work injuries, and six medically treated injuries, an overall reduction of 48 percent on the previous year's 25 recordable injuries. Total injuries reported have also decreased by 15 percent.\n\nThere were no air medical evacuations during the year.\n\nThe services provided by the OH & S team at Challenger include on-site emergency and clinical medical services for work related or private injuries, illness and counselling support services.\n\nHealth programs delivered on site include health assessments and lifestyle promotional programs. The Health Centre has continued with the remote health care clinic in conjunction with the Royal Flying Doctor Service. This program has provided advice to assist personnel in managing private medical conditions and other health related topics.\n\nThe site Emergency Management Team was involved in a large-scale exercise during the year that tested the team's training and allowed the opportunity to review the site emergency management plan.", + "recall": 0.9650145772594753, + "true_md": "22 Operations Report\n\nMine production for the year totalled 502,034 tonnes of ore at a reconciled grade of 4.17 g/t comprising 356,009 tonnes at 5.26 g/t of high grade ore and 146,025 tonnes @1.52 g/t of low grade ore. \n\nThe main M2 Lode provided 44% of mined ounces with 13% of ounces mined from M1. Compared to the previous financial year, M2 contributed a lower percentage of the total ounces mined due to increased contributions from the Challenger West. Challenger West Lode, which was mined for the first time in 2012, contributed an encour- aging 32% of the total ounces. \n\nOre production from the Main M2 and M1 lodes during the year was strongly impacted by the 215 Shear due to its foreshortening of the lodes in advance of the predicted ‘79’ fault. This resulted in less ore above the ‘79’ fault.\n\nThe current decline and mining front of the M1/ M2 orebodies has continued below the 215 Shear, with the establishment of the 205, 195, 175, 155 and 135 levels.\n\n## Development\n\n## Occupational Health and Safety\n\nStoping has been initiated on the 205, 195 and 175 levels where ground conditions in the stopes have led to greater than planned dilution. Poor ground conditions were noted in the levels \n\nstopes have led to greater than planned dilution. Poor ground conditions were noted in the levels just above the 215 Shear and are thought to be associated with the shear rather than with the depth of the mine. In an effort to control the dilution, stope dimensions, pillar placement and cable bolting is being trialled. A combination of these ground control methods has resulted in a degree of success in reducing the dilution.\n\nThe mine schedule continued with a combined focus of development and stoping on two separate work areas being the high grade shoot at Challenger West on the 790, 810, 890 and 870 levels, and the mining of high grade ore pods below the 215 Shear on M1 and M2.\n\nA total of 6,799 metres of development was achieved for the year (exclusive of exploration).\n\nThe Challenger West orebody has proven to have the highest grade in the mine and the potential to extend from the surface to the base of the current mine. Current diamond drilling is targeting the upper and lower ore zones. Challenger West is the primary target for the \n\ntargeting the upper and lower ore zones. Challenger West is the primary target for the next nine months to continue stoping and prove up the identified ore lodes for the future of the Challenger underground. Significant development has set up two means of egress, flow through vent and stoping in the past 12 months. Challenger West will form the founda- tion of future mining activities at Challenger into the foreseeable future.\n\nDuring 2013 there were four incidents resulting in lost time injuries, three restricted work inju- ries, and six medically treated injuries, an overall reduction of 48 percent on the previous year’s 25 recordable injuries. Total injuries reported have also decreased by 15 percent.\n\nThere were no air medical evacuations during the year.\n\nIn April 2013, Kingsgate was saddened to report that an employee was fatally injured off site while returning home from the Challenger Gold Mine. It’s important to reflect for a moment to \n\nreturning home from the Challenger Gold Mine. It’s important to reflect for a moment to acknowledge the important contribution this individual made to his place of work but to also recognise the loss this person’s family suffers. Kingsgate is fully cognisant of the valuable \n\nrecognise the loss this person’s family suffers. Kingsgate is fully cognisant of the valuable contribution and dedication shown by this indi- vidual and will strive to ensure that his legacy is respectfully remembered.\n\nThe services provided by the OH & S team at Challenger include on-site emergency and clinical medical services for work related or private injuries, illness and counselling support services. \n\nHealth programs delivered on site include health assessments and lifestyle promotional programs. The Health Centre has continued with the \n\nassessments and lifestyle promotional programs. The Health Centre has continued with the remote health care clinic in conjunction with the Royal Flying Doctor Service. This program has provided advice to assist personnel in managing private medical conditions and other health related topics. \n\nThe site Emergency Management Team was involved in a large-scale exercise during the year that tested the team’s training and allowed the opportunity to review the site emergency management plan. \n\nwww.kingsgate.com.au" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8979380200659713, + "doc_id": "557da004cc6ce4a199acf6eaf22683fb2f4fb9a057827f9c0b8809667800e110", + "edit_distance": 0.3491271820448878, + "f1_score": 0.9698795180722892, + "meteor": 0.925805801863069, + "precision": 0.9757575757575757, + "pred_md": "SMFG\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n## 28. Employee Retirement Benefits\n\n## (1) Outline of employee retirement benefits\n\nConsolidated subsidiaries in Japan have contributory and non-contributory funded or unfunded defined benefit pension plans such as employee pension plans, qualified pension plans and lump-sum severance indemnity plans. Consolidated subsidiaries in Japan have adopted the defined-contribution pension plan. Certain domestic consolidated subsidiaries have a general type of employee pension plans. They may grant additional benefits in cases where certain requirements are met when employees retire.\n\nSome overseas consolidated subsidiaries adopt defined benefit pension plans and defined-contribution pension plans. SMBC and some consolidated subsidiaries in Japan contributed some of their marketable equity securities to employee retirement benefits trusts.\n\n- (2) Projected benefit obligation\n\nNote: Some consolidated subsidiaries adopt the simple method in calculating the projected benefit obligation.\n\n## (3) Pension expenses\n\nNotes: 1. Pension expenses of consolidated subsidiaries which adopt the simple method are included in 'Service cost.'\n\n2. Premium paid to defined-contribution pension is included in 'Other.'\n\n## (4) Assumptions\n\nThe principal assumptions used in determining benefit obligation and pension expenses at or for the fiscal years ended March 31, 2011 and 2010 were as follows:\n\nEstimated amounts of retirement benefits are allocated to each period by the straight-line method.\n\nUnrecognized prior service cost is amortized using the straight-line method within the employees' average remaining service period from the fiscal year of its incurrence, over mainly 9 years for the fiscal years ended March 31, 2011 and 2010.\n\nUnrecognized net actuarial gain or loss is amortized using the straight-line method within the employees' average remaining service period, commencing from the next fiscal year of incurrence, over mainly 9 years for the fiscal years ended March 31, 2011 and 2010.\n\n## 29. Lease Transactions\n\n## (1) Financing leases\n\n- (a) Lessee side\n- (i) Lease assets\n\nTangible fixed assets mainly consisted of branches and equipment. Intangible fixed assets are software.\n\n- (ii) Depreciation method of lease assets\n\nDepreciation method of lease assets is reported in Note 2. (5) Depreciation.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n96", + "recall": 0.9640718562874252, + "true_md": "SMFG Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n## 28. Employee Retirement Benefits\n\n## (1) Outline of employee retirement benefits\n\n## (2) Projected benefit obligation\n\nConsolidated subsidiaries in Japan have contributory and non-contributory funded or unfunded defined benefit pension plans such as employee pension plans, qualified pension plans and lump-sum severance indemnity plans. Consolidated subsidiaries in Japan have adopted the defined-contribution pension plan. Certain domestic consolidated subsidiaries have a general type of employee pension plans. They may grant additional benefits in cases where certain requirements are met when employees retire. \n\nSome overseas consolidated subsidiaries adopt defined benefit pension plans and defined-contribution pension plans. SMBC and some consolidated subsidiaries in Japan contributed some of their marketable equity securities to employee retirement benefits trusts.\n\nNotes: 1. Pension expenses of consolidated subsidiaries which adopt the simple method are included in “Service cost.” \n\n2. Premium paid to defined-contribution pension is included in “Other.”\n\nThe principal assumptions used in determining benefit obligation and pension expenses at or for the fiscal years ended March 31, 2011 and 2010 were as follows:\n\nEstimated amounts of retirement benefits are allocated to each period by the straight-line method. \n\nUnrecognized prior service cost is amortized using the straight-line method within the employees’ average remaining service period from the fiscal year of its incurrence, over mainly 9 years for the fiscal years ended March 31, 2011 and 2010.\n\nUnrecognized net actuarial gain or loss is amortized using the straight-line method within the employees’ average remaining service period, commencing from the next fiscal year of incurrence, over mainly 9 years for the fiscal years ended March 31, 2011 and 2010.\n\nTangible fixed assets mainly consisted of branches and equipment. Intangible fixed assets are software.\n\nDepreciation method of lease assets is reported in Note 2. (5) Depreciation.\n\nSMFG 2011 96\n\n## (3) Pension expenses\n\n## (4) Assumptions\n\n## 29. Lease Transactions\n\n## (1) Financing leases\n\n## (a) Lessee side\n\n## (i) Lease assets\n\n## (ii) Depreciation method of lease assets\n\nNote: Some consolidated subsidiaries adopt the simple method in calculating the projected benefit obligation." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9182431237145333, + "doc_id": "e00aff94583f8ba08f70b08f0ec2a460487fc8ed398dd235b32480c61d89073d", + "edit_distance": 0.5928030303030303, + "f1_score": 0.9593147751605997, + "meteor": 0.7902310210447107, + "precision": 0.9739130434782609, + "pred_md": "99\n\nNotes to the Financial Statements\n\n## 27. Contingent liabilities\n\nThe Group had contingent liabilities at 30 June 2013 in respect of guarantees. Bank guarantees have been given by Kingsgate's controlled entities to participating banks in the syndicated loan facility and corporate loan facility as described in Note 16 as part of the security package. These guarantees may give rise to liabilities in the parent entity if the controlled entities do not meet their obligations under the terms of the loans subject to guarantees. No material losses are anticipated in respect of the above contingent liabilities.\n\nIncluded in non-current other asset is $1,838,000 relating to restricted cash deposits against bank guarantees supporting the rehabilitation bond requirements against the Group's mining operations.\n\n## 28. Financial risk management and instruments\n\n## Financial risk management\n\nThe Group's activities expose it to a variety of financial risks: market risk (including foreign currency risk, price risk, fair value risk, and interest rate risk), credit risk and liquidity risk.\n\nAt this point, the Directors believe that it is in the interest of shareholders to expose the Group to foreign currency risk, price risk and interest rate risk. Therefore, the Group does not employ any derivative hedging of foreign currency or interest rate risks though has entered into forward gold sale contracts to manage Australian gold price risk in respect of the forecast production from the Challenger Mine (refer 'commodity price risk' section below). The Directors and management monitor these risks, in particular market forecasts of future movements in foreign currency and prices movements and if it is to be believed to be in the interests of shareholders will implement risk management strategies to minimise potential adverse effects on the financial performance of the Group.\n\nRisk management is carried out by the senior executive team. The Board provides written principles for overall risk management, as well as policies covering specific areas, such as foreign exchange risk, interest rate risk, credit risk, use of derivative financial instruments and non-derivative financial instruments, and investment of excess liquidity.\n\nThe Group holds the following financial instruments:\n\n## (a) Market risk\n\n## Foreign exchange risk\n\nThe Group operates internationally and is exposed to foreign exchange risk arising from currency exposures, primarily with respect to the US dollar and Thai Baht and as discussed earlier, no financial instruments are employed to mitigate the exposed risks. This is the Group's current policy and it is reviewed regularly including forecast movements in these currencies by management and the Board.\n\nCurrent year foreign exchange risks arise primarily from:\n\n- 〉 the sale of gold, which is in US dollars;\n- 〉 payables denominated in US dollars; and\n- 〉 cash balances in US dollars.\n\nThe functional currency of the Thai subsidiaries is Thai Baht.\n\ncontinued\n\nNotes to the Financial Statements\n\nu", + "recall": 0.9451476793248945, + "true_md": "## 27. Contingent liabilities\n\n## 28. Financial risk management and instruments\n\nNotes to the Financial Statements 99\n\nNotes t o the Financial Statements\n\ncontinued u\n\nThe functional currency of the Thai subsidiaries is Thai Baht.\n\nThe Group operates internationally and is exposed to foreign exchange risk arising from currency exposures, primarily with respect to the US dollar and Thai Baht and as discussed earlier, no financial instruments are employed to mitigate the exposed risks. This is the Group’s current policy and it is reviewed regu- larly including forecast movements in these currencies by management and the Board.\n\nCurrent year foreign exchange risks arise primarily from:\n\nFinancial risk management The Group’s activities expose it to a variety of financial risks: market risk (including foreign currency risk, price risk, fair value risk, and interest rate risk), credit risk and liquidity risk.\n\nThe Group had contingent liabilities at 30 June 2013 in respect of guarantees. Bank guarantees have been given by Kingsgate’s controlled entities to partici- pating banks in the syndicated loan facility and corporate loan facility as described in Note 16 as part of the security package. These guarantees may give rise to liabilities in the parent entity if the controlled entities do not meet their obligations under the terms of the loans subject to guarantees. No material losses are anticipated in respect of the above contingent liabilities.\n\nIncluded in non-current other asset is $1,838,000 relating to restricted cash deposits against bank guarantees supporting the rehabilitation bond require- ments against the Group’s mining operations.\n\nAt this point, the Directors believe that it is in the interest of shareholders to expose the Group to foreign currency risk, price risk and interest rate risk. Therefore, the Group does not employ any derivative hedging of foreign currency or interest rate risks though has entered into forward gold sale contracts to manage Australian gold price risk in respect of the forecast production from the Challenger Mine (refer “commodity price risk” section below). The Directors and management monitor these risks, in particular market forecasts of future movements in foreign currency and prices movements and if it is to be believed to be in the interests of shareholders will implement risk management strategies to minimise potential adverse effects on the financial performance of the Group.\n\nRisk management is carried out by the senior executive team. The Board provides written principles for overall risk management, as well as policies covering specific areas, such as foreign exchange risk, interest rate risk, credit risk, use of derivative financial instruments and non-derivative financial instruments, and investment of excess liquidity.\n\nThe Group holds the following financial instruments:\n\n## (a) Market risk\n\n## Foreign exchange risk\n\n- 〉 the sale of gold, which is in US dollars;\n\n- 〉 payables denominated in US dollars; and\n\n- 〉 cash balances in US dollars." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9001023268591755, + "doc_id": "f56823f9c57be34f2be457105a7f972d3ba67d269b78e382c2423ca5d87ae898", + "edit_distance": 0.4817708333333333, + "f1_score": 0.9694555112881805, + "meteor": 0.9504962518538452, + "precision": 0.9681697612732095, + "pred_md": "## Shareholder Information\n\n## Stock Exchange Information\n\nThe common stock of Hasbro, Inc. is listed on The NASDAQ Global Select Market under the symbol HAS.\n\n## Annual Meeting\n\nThe annual meeting of shareholders will be held at 11:00 a.m. on Thursday, May 17, 2012 at:\n\nHasbro's Corporate O ce ffi\n\n1027 Newport Avenue Pawtucket, Rhode Island 02862-1059\n\n## Dividend Reinvestment and Cash Stock Purchase Program\n\nUnder this plan, Hasbro shareholders may reinvest their dividends or make optional cash payments towards the purchase of additional shares of common stock. Shareholders desiring information about this plan should contact the Transfer Agent and Registrar.\n\n## Transfer Agent and Registrar\n\nShareholders who wish to change the name or address on their record of stock ownership, report lost certifi cates, consolidate accounts or make other inquiries relating to stock certifi cates or the Dividend Reinvestment and Cash Stock Purchase Program should contact:\n\nComputershare Trust Company, N.A.\n\nP.O. Box 43078 Providence, RI 02940-3078 TEL: (781) 575-3400\n\n(800) 733-5001\n\nTo access and manage your registered shareholder account online in a secure web environment and to consent to receive proxy materials and tax documents electronically, register your account through 'Investor Centre' at www.computershare.com/investor.\n\n## Shareholders\n\nAs of March 16, 2012, there were approximately 9,028 shareholders of record of Hasbro's common stock.\n\n## Investor Information\n\nSecurities analysts, investors and others who wish information about Hasbro are invited to contact:\n\nHasbro Investor Relations 1027 Newport Avenue P.O. Box 1059 Pawtucket, Rhode Island 02862-1059 TEL: (401) 431-8447 EMAIL: Hasbro\\_investor\\_relations@hasbro.com WEB SITE: http://investor.hasbro.com\n\n## Form 10-K\n\nHasbro's Annual Report on Form 10-K fi led with the Securities and Exchange Commission provides certain additional information and is included herein. Shareholders may obtain an additional copy without charge by contacting the Investor Relations Department.\n\n## Corporate Social Responsibility\n\nHasbro's deep commitment to corporate social responsibility (CSR) refl ects our desire to play a part in building a safe and sustainable world for future generations. We embrace the responsibilities and opportunities that come with entertaining millions of children and families and employing thousands of people. We focus our CSR initiatives on three key areas: product safety, manufacturing ethics and environmental sustainability. These are core commitments that we think about and renew every day in the choices we make.\n\nWe work to bring 'the sparkle of Hope, the joy of Play and the power of Service' into the lives of children around the world through our philanthropic programs. Hasbro has a deep commitment to the local communities where our employees live and work, and strategic partnerships have been established with eight organizations to help us make an impactful di erence for children on both a national and global scale. ff\n\nIn 2011, our support totaled over $15 million to help make a di erence for more than four million children worldwide. ff\n\nTo learn more about our CSR progress visit www.hasbro.com/csr.\n\nThe discussion set forth in the letter to our shareholders, and in this annual report, contains forward-looking statements concerning our expectations and beliefs, including, without limitation, expectations regarding our business plans and goals, future product and entertainment plans, and anticipated future fi nancial performance, including expectations with respect to our revenues, operating margins, earnings and uses of funds. For a discussion of uncertainties, risks and assumptions associated with these statements, see Item 1A of our enclosed annual report on Form 10-K, under the heading, 'Forward-Looking Information and Risk Factors that May A ect Future Results.' The Company undertakes no obligation to make any revisions to the forward-looking ff statements contained in the letter to shareholders and in this annual report to refl ect subsequent events or circumstances.\n\n© 2012 Hasbro, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Hasbro, Inc. is an Equal Opportunity/A rmative Action Employer. The trademarks and logos displayed herein are trademarks of Hasbro, ffi its subsidiaries and others and are used with permission. SCRABBLE, the associated logo, the design of the distinctive SCRABBLE brand game board, and the distinctive letter tile designs are trademarks of Hasbro in the United States and Canada.", + "recall": 0.9707446808510638, + "true_md": "## Shareholder Information\n\n## Stock Exchange Information\n\n## Investor Information\n\n## Annual Meeting\n\n## Dividend Reinvestment and Cash Stock Purchase Program\n\n## Form 10-K\n\n## Corporate Social Responsibility\n\n## Transfer Agent and Registrar\n\n## Shareholders\n\nThe common stock of Hasbro, Inc. is listed on The NASDAQ Global Select Market under the symbol HAS.\n\nThe annual meeting of shareholders will be held at 11:00 a.m. on Thursday, May 17, 2012 at: \n\nHasbro’s Corporate O ffi ce 1027 Newport Avenue Pawtucket, Rhode Island 02862-1059\n\nSecurities analysts, investors and others who wish information about Hasbro are invited to contact:\n\nHasbro Investor Relations 1027 Newport Avenue P.O. Box 1059 Pawtucket, Rhode Island 02862-1059 TEL: (401) 431-8447 EMAIL: Hasbro\\_investor\\_relations@hasbro.com WEB SITE: http://investor.hasbro.com\n\nUnder this plan, Hasbro shareholders may reinvest their dividends or make optional cash payments towards the purchase of additional shares of common stock. Shareholders desiring information about this plan should contact the Transfer Agent and Registrar.\n\nHasbro’s Annual Report on Form 10-K filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission provides certain additional information and is included herein. Shareholders may obtain an additional copy without charge by contacting the Investor Relations Department.\n\nShareholders who wish to change the name or address on their record of stock ownership, report lost certificates, consolidate accounts or make other inquiries relating to stock certificates or the Dividend Reinvestment and Cash Stock Purchase Program should contact: \n\nComputershare Trust Company, N.A. P.O. Box 43078 Providence, RI 02940-3078 TEL: (781) 575-3400 (800) 733-5001\n\nHasbro’s deep commitment to corporate social responsibility (CSR) reflects our desire to play a part in building a safe and sustainable world for future generations. We embrace the responsibilities and opportunities that come with entertaining millions of children and families and employing thousands of people. We focus our CSR initiatives on three key areas: product safety, manufacturing ethics and environmental sustainability. These are core commitments that we think about and renew every day in the choices we make. \n\nTo access and manage your registered shareholder account online in a secure web environment and to consent to receive proxy materials and tax documents electronically, register your account through “Investor Centre” at www.computershare.com/investor.\n\nAs of March 16, 2012, there were approximately 9,028 shareholders of record of Hasbro’s common stock.\n\nWe work to bring ‘the sparkle of Hope, the joy of Play and the power of Service’ into the lives of children around the world through our philanthropic programs. Hasbro has a deep commitment to the local communities where our employees live and work, and strategic partnerships have been established with eight organizations to help us make an impactful di ff erence for children on both a national and global scale.\n\nIn 2011, our support totaled over $15 million to help make a di ff erence for more than four million children worldwide. \n\nTo learn more about our CSR progress visit www.hasbro.com/csr.\n\nThe discussion set forth in the letter to our shareholders, and in this annual report, contains forward-looking statements concerning our expectations and beliefs, including, without limitation, expectations regarding our business plans and goals, future product and entertainment plans, and anticipated future financial performance, including expectations with respect to our revenues, operating margins, earnings and uses of funds. For a discussion of uncertainties, risks and assumptions associated with these statements, see Item 1A of our enclosed annual report on Form 10-K, under the heading, “Forward-Looking Information and Risk Factors that May A ff ect Future Results.” The Company undertakes no obligation to make any revisions to the forward-looking statements contained in the letter to shareholders and in this annual report to refl ect subsequent events or circumstances.\n\n© 2012 Hasbro, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Hasbro, Inc. is an Equal Opportunity/A ffi rmative Action Employer. The trademarks and logos displayed herein are trademarks of Hasbro, its subsidiaries and others and are used with permission. SCRABBLE, the associated logo, the design of the distinctive SCRABBLE brand game board, and the distinctive letter tile designs are trademarks of Hasbro in the United States and Canada." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9137662426900951, + "doc_id": "8924d873e3e5b2a9b6fd2d5f68f7b307e960b282b61354b5fb0c7cf668fbfb11", + "edit_distance": 0.1716171617161716, + "f1_score": 0.9811320754716982, + "meteor": 0.9785008827074633, + "precision": 0.9811320754716981, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 14 - FAIR VALUE MEASUREMENT continued\n\n## Measurement of Fair Value\n\n## a) Derivatives\n\nDerivatives entered into by the Company consist of commodity contracts and interest rate swaps. The Company utilises present value techniques and option-pricing models for valuing its derivatives. Inputs to these valuation techniques include published forward prices, volatilities, and credit risk considerations, including the incorporation of published interest rates and credit spreads. All of the significant inputs are observable, either directly or indirectly; therefore, the Company's derivative instruments are included within the Level 2 fair value hierarchy.\n\n## b) Credit Facilities\n\nAs at 31 December 2014, the Company had $95 million and $35 million of principal debt outstanding on the Senior Credit Facility and the Junior Credit Facility, respectively. The estimated fair value of the Senior Credit Facility approximated its carrying amount due to the floating interest rate paid on such debt to be set for a period of three months or less. The estimated fair value of the Junior Credit Facility was approximately $41.8 million, based on indirect, observable inputs (Level 2) regarding interest rates available to the Company. The fair value of the Junior Credit Facility was determined by using a discounted cash flow model using a discount rate that reflects the Company's assumed borrowing rate at the end of the reporting period.\n\n## c) Other Financial Instruments\n\nThe carrying amounts of cash, accounts receivable, accounts payable and accrued liabilities approximate fair value due to their short-term nature.\n\n## NOTE 15 - OTHER CURRENT ASSETS\n\n685\n\n753\n\n14\n\n- 82 -", + "recall": 0.9811320754716981, + "true_md": "NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS \n\n## NOTE 14 – FAIR VALUE MEASUREMENT continued\n\n## Measurement of Fair Value\n\n## a) Derivatives\n\n## b) Credit Facilities\n\n## NOTE 15 – OTHER CURRENT ASSETS\n\n## c) Other Financial Instruments\n\nDerivatives entered into by the Company consist of commodity contracts and interest rate swaps. The Company utilises present value techniques and option-pricing models for valuing its derivatives. Inputs to these valuation techniques include published forward prices, volatilities, and credit risk considerations, including the incorporation of published interest rates and credit spreads. All of the significant inputs are observable, either directly or indirectly; therefore, the Company’s derivative instruments are included within the Level 2 fair value hierarchy.\n\nAs at 31 December 2014, the Company had $95 million and $35 million of principal debt outstanding on the Senior Credit Facility and the Junior Credit Facility, respectively. The estimated fair value of the Senior Credit Facility approximated its carrying amount due to the floating interest rate paid on such debt to be set for a period of three months or less. The estimated fair value of the Junior Credit Facility was approximately $41.8 million, based on indirect, observable inputs (Level 2) regarding interest rates available to the Company. The fair value of the Junior Credit Facility was determined by using a discounted cash flow model using a discount rate that reflects the Company’s assumed borrowing rate at the end of the reporting period. \n\nThe carrying amounts of cash, accounts receivable, accounts payable and accrued liabilities approximate fair value due to their short-term nature.\n\n- 82 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9507467247147795, + "doc_id": "665e5f75c18a18a5f7f2625a4a868c8b459648f44cf6df8c194c72914cdfdd06", + "edit_distance": 0.6219239373601789, + "f1_score": 0.9792802617230097, + "meteor": 0.8785248163695657, + "precision": 0.9824945295404814, + "pred_md": "MANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS\n\nCombined, these limits can enable effective foreign control of up to 46.7 % .\n\nThe chief executive officer and 80 % of the members of the Board of Directors of the operating licensee must be resident Canadians. There are no restrictions on the number of non-voting shares that may be held by non-Canadians at either the holding-company or licenseecompany level. Neither the Canadian carrier nor its parent may be otherwise controlled in fact by non-Canadians. Subject to appeal to the federal Cabinet, the CRTC has the jurisdiction to determine as a question of fact whether a given licensee is controlled by nonCanadians.\n\nPursuant to the Telecommunications Act and associated regulations, the same rules also apply to Canadian telecommunications carriers such as Wireless, except that there is no requirement that the chief executive officer be a resident Canadian. We believe we are in compliance with the foregoing foreign ownership and control requirements.\n\nOn June 29, 2012, Bill C-38 amending the Telecommunications Act passed into law. The amendments exempt telecommunications companies with less than 10 % of total Canadian telecommunications market measured by revenue from foreign investment restrictions. Companies that are successful in growing their market shares in excess of 10 % of total Canadian telecommunications market revenues other than by way of merger or acquisitions will continue to be exempt from the restrictions.\n\n## WIRELESS\n\n## Consultation on the Renewal of Cellular and Personal Communications S ervices (PC S ) S pectrum Licences\n\nIn March 2011, Industry Canada released its decisions about the renewal process for cellular and PCS licences that began expiring at that time. Key things to note:\n\n- GLYPH<129> At the end of the current licence term, new cellular and PCS licences with a 20-year term will be issued to licensees that are in compliance with all licence conditions.\n- GLYPH<129> The previously existing annual fee of $0.0351 per MHz per population of the licenced area will continue to apply to all cellular and PCS licences, including those initially assigned by auction. The Minister of Industry Canada may review and amend the fees during the licence term after further consultation with licensees.\n- GLYPH<129> A determination regarding existing research and development conditions of licence was not released at that time and will be released separately. A decision has not been made to date, and until such a time, the current conditions of licence remain in effect.\n\n## Consultation on a Policy and Technical Framework for the 700Mhz and 2500-2690Mhz Band and Aspects Related to Commercial Mobile S pectrum\n\nIn March 2012, Industry Canada released its policy and technical framework for the auction of spectrum in the 700 MHz and 2500-2690 MHz spectrum bands. Key things to note:\n\n- GLYPH<129> Industry Canada adopted an auction cap for the 700 MHZ (not a setaside like in the 2008 Advanced Wireless Services (AWS) spectrum auction). There are four blocks of spectrum that are considered 'prime'. Large domestic wireless carriers are restricted to a single block of prime spectrum each, while all other carriers are restricted to two blocks. Rogers, Bell and Telus are considered large carriers nationally. SaskTel is considered a large carrier in Saskatchewan, and MTS is considered a large carrier in Manitoba.\n\n68\n\nROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n- GLYPH<129> To encourage rural deployments, single carriers who win two paired blocks, or two carriers who share their two paired blocks, are required to use their 700 MHz spectrum to provide coverage to 90 % of their HSPA+ territory within five years and 97 % within seven years. Industry Canada will use Tier 2 licence areas for the 700Mhz auction. These are 14 large service areas covering all of Canada, and are generally the same size as individual provinces.\n\nIn March 2013, Industry Canada released Licensing Framework for Mobile Broadband Services (MBS) - 700 MHz Band . Key things to note:\n\n- GLYPH<129> Industry Canada confirmed that, for the most part, the policy and technical framework to auction spectrum in the 700 MHz band are the same as proposed in its March 14, 2012 consultation document.\n- GLYPH<129> The auction will use a combinatorial clock auction (CCA) format, where bids are made for packages of spectrum licences, rather than the simultaneous multiple round auction (SMRA) format used in the past, where bids are made on individual licences.\n- GLYPH<129> Associated entities can apply to bid separately and to have the auction cap applied individually. These bidders must demonstrate that they 'intend to separately and actively provide services' within a given licence area for the duration of the spectrum caps (five years after licensing). Industry Canada has determined that no registered bidders were associated with each other.\n\nThe auction was initially set to begin on November 19, 2013. In June 2013, Industry Canada moved the application deadline to September 17, 2013, and the auction start to January 14, 2014.\n\nIn October 2013, Industry Canada released its consultation paper, seeking comments on licencing considerations related to auction format, rules and processes, as well as on conditions of licence for spectrum in the 2500-2690 MHz band. The final policy was released on January 10, 2014.\n\nKey things to note about 2500-2690 MHz spectrum policy:\n\n- GLYPH<129> Industry Canada adopted a spectrum cap (not an auction cap like in the 700 MHz auction). No carrier participating in the auction may possess more than 40 MHz of 2500-2690 MHz spectrum. Rogers is grandfathered with respect to our holdings in those situations where we already hold more than 40 MHz of this spectrum. We will not be required to return spectrum.\n- GLYPH<129> There is no special roll-out requirement for 2500-2690 MHz spectrum. A general roll-out rule will be determined in the policy.\n- GLYPH<129> The auction is set to commence on April 15, 2015.\n- GLYPH<129> The 2500MHz auction will use Tier 3 licence areas.\n\n## Roaming and Tower S haring Policy\n\nIn March 2013, Industry Canada released Revised Frameworks for Mandatory Roaming and Antenna Tower and Site Sharing , concluding a consultation initiated in 2012. It sets out the current rules for roaming and tower and site sharing. Its key terms are:\n\n- GLYPH<129> All holders of spectrum licences, radio licences and broadcasting certificates must share towers and antenna sites, where technically feasible, at commercial rates.\n- GLYPH<129> All licensees were permitted to request roaming from other licensees at commercial rates.\n- GLYPH<129> The timeframe for negotiating agreements is 60 days, after which arbitration according to Industry Canada arbitration rules will begin.\n- GLYPH<129> The roaming capabilities must provide connectivity for digital voice and data services regardless of the spectrum band or underlying technology used.", + "recall": 0.9760869565217392, + "true_md": "MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS\n\nCombined, these limits can enable effective foreign control of up to 46.7 % .\n\nThe chief executive officer and 80 % of the members of the Board of Directors of the operating licensee must be resident Canadians. There are no restrictions on the number of non-voting shares that may be held by non-Canadians at either the holding-company or licensee- company level. Neither the Canadian carrier nor its parent may be otherwise controlled in fact by non-Canadians. Subject to appeal to the federal Cabinet, the CRTC has the jurisdiction to determine as a question of fact whether a given licensee is controlled by non- Canadians.\n\nPursuant to the Telecommunications Act and associated regulations, the same rules also apply to Canadian telecommunications carriers such as Wireless, except that there is no requirement that the chief executive officer be a resident Canadian. We believe we are in compliance with the foregoing foreign ownership and control requirements.\n\nOn June 29, 2012, Bill C-38 amending the Telecommunications Act passed into law. The amendments exempt telecommunications companies with less than 10 % of total Canadian telecommunications market measured by revenue from foreign investment restrictions. Companies that are successful in growing their market shares in excess of 10 % of total Canadian telecommunications market revenues other than by way of merger or acquisitions will continue to be exempt from the restrictions.\n\nIn March 2011, Industry Canada released its decisions about the renewal process for cellular and PCS licences that began expiring at that time. Key things to note:\n\nIn March 2012, Industry Canada released its policy and technical framework for the auction of spectrum in the 700 MHz and 2500–2690 MHz spectrum bands. Key things to note:\n\n68 ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\nIn March 2013, Industry Canada released Revised Frameworks for Mandatory Roaming and Antenna Tower and Site Sharing , concluding a consultation initiated in 2012. It sets out the current rules for roaming and tower and site sharing. Its key terms are:\n\nKey things to note about 2500–2690 MHz spectrum policy:\n\nIn October 2013, Industry Canada released its consultation paper, seeking comments on licencing considerations related to auction format, rules and processes, as well as on conditions of licence for spectrum in the 2500–2690 MHz band. The final policy was released on January 10, 2014.\n\nThe auction was initially set to begin on November 19, 2013. In June 2013, Industry Canada moved the application deadline to September 17, 2013, and the auction start to January 14, 2014.\n\nIn March 2013, Industry Canada released Licensing Framework for Mobile Broadband Services (MBS) – 700 MHz Band . Key things to note:\n\n- GLYPH<129> To encourage rural deployments, single carriers who win two paired blocks, or two carriers who share their two paired blocks, are required to use their 700 MHz spectrum to provide coverage to 90 % of their HSPA+ territory within five years and 97 % within seven years. Industry Canada will use Tier 2 licence areas for the 700Mhz auction. These are 14 large service areas covering all of Canada, and are generally the same size as individual provinces.\n\n- GLYPH<129> Industry Canada confirmed that, for the most part, the policy and technical framework to auction spectrum in the 700 MHz band are the same as proposed in its March 14, 2012 consultation document.\n\n- GLYPH<129> The auction will use a combinatorial clock auction (CCA) format, where bids are made for packages of spectrum licences, rather than the simultaneous multiple round auction (SMRA) format used in the past, where bids are made on individual licences.\n\n- GLYPH<129> Associated entities can apply to bid separately and to have the auction cap applied individually. These bidders must demonstrate that they “intend to separately and actively provide services” within a given licence area for the duration of the spectrum caps (five years after licensing). Industry Canada has determined that no registered bidders were associated with each other.\n\n- GLYPH<129> Industry Canada adopted a spectrum cap (not an auction cap like in the 700 MHz auction). No carrier participating in the auction may possess more than 40 MHz of 2500–2690 MHz spectrum. Rogers is grandfathered with respect to our holdings in those situations where we already hold more than 40 MHz of this spectrum. We will not be required to return spectrum.\n\n- GLYPH<129> There is no special roll-out requirement for 2500–2690 MHz spectrum. A general roll-out rule will be determined in the policy.\n\n- GLYPH<129> The auction is set to commence on April 15, 2015.\n\n- GLYPH<129> The 2500MHz auction will use Tier 3 licence areas.\n\n- GLYPH<129> All holders of spectrum licences, radio licences and broadcasting certificates must share towers and antenna sites, where technically feasible, at commercial rates.\n\n- GLYPH<129> All licensees were permitted to request roaming from other licensees at commercial rates.\n\n- GLYPH<129> The timeframe for negotiating agreements is 60 days, after which arbitration according to Industry Canada arbitration rules will begin.\n\n- GLYPH<129> The roaming capabilities must provide connectivity for digital voice and data services regardless of the spectrum band or underlying technology used.\n\n- GLYPH<129> Industry Canada adopted an auction cap for the 700 MHZ (not a set- aside like in the 2008 Advanced Wireless Services (AWS) spectrum auction). There are four blocks of spectrum that are considered “prime”. Large domestic wireless carriers are restricted to a single block of prime spectrum each, while all other carriers are restricted to two blocks. Rogers, Bell and Telus are considered large carriers nationally. SaskTel is considered a large carrier in Saskatchewan, and MTS is considered a large carrier in Manitoba.\n\n- GLYPH<129> A determination regarding existing research and development conditions of licence was not released at that time and will be released separately. A decision has not been made to date, and until such a time, the current conditions of licence remain in effect.\n\n- GLYPH<129> The previously existing annual fee of $0.0351 per MHz per population of the licenced area will continue to apply to all cellular and PCS licences, including those initially assigned by auction. The Minister of Industry Canada may review and amend the fees during the licence term after further consultation with licensees.\n\n- GLYPH<129> At the end of the current licence term, new cellular and PCS licences with a 20-year term will be issued to licensees that are in compliance with all licence conditions.\n\n## WIRELESS\n\n## Consultation on the Renewal of Cellular and Personal Communications S ervices (PC S ) S pectrum Licences\n\n## Consultation on a Policy and Technical Framework for the 700Mhz and 2500-2690Mhz Band and Aspects Related to Commercial Mobile S pectrum\n\n## Roaming and Tower S haring Policy" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8176786505097732, + "doc_id": "0eff60486b474411a4a6064afb871638b93ce711c8dbad368b7772b6b6eed588", + "edit_distance": 0.8502994011976048, + "f1_score": 0.9458483754512637, + "meteor": 0.8248733023366094, + "precision": 0.9492753623188406, + "pred_md": "## Exposure of Securitized Products (Sumitomo Mitsui Financial Group (Consolidated))\n\nThe figures contained in this section have been compiled on a managerial accounting basis.\n\n## 1. Securitized Products\n\n(Billions of yen)\n\n- Notes: 1. RMBS, etc. include approximately ·0.1 billion of sub-prime related products.\n- 2. There is no amount of ABCP .\n- 3. Excludes GSE and SMBC's exposure to subordinated beneficiaries owned through the securitization of SMBC's loan receivables.\n- 4. No loss was recorded on securitized products in the fiscal year ended March 31, 2011.\n\n## 2. Transactions with Monoline Insurance Companies\n\nCredit Derivatives (Credit Default Swap ['CDS']) Transactions with Monoline Insurance Companies\n\n- Notes: 1. Reference assets are rated investment grade or equivalent, and do not include sub-prime related assets.\n- 2. SMFG recorded loss on such transactions of approximately ·3.7 billion in the fiscal year ended March 31, 2011.\n\n## Loans and Investments Guaranteed by Monoline Insurance Companies, etc.\n\n(Billions of yen)\n\nNote: Underlying assets are those of project finance, etc., which are rated investment grade or equivalent, and include no sub-prime related assets.\n\n## 3. Leveraged Loans\n\n(Billions of yen)\n\nNotes: 1. Above figures include the amount to be sold of approximately ·3 billion.\n\n- In the fiscal year ended March 31, 2011, we sold leveraged loans of approximately ·24 billion, and loss on the sale amounted to approximately ·3 billion.\n- 2. Above figures do not include leveraged loans which are included in underlying assets of '1. Securitized Products.'\n- 3. Reserves do not include general reserve for possible loan losses for normal borrowers.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n30\n\n(Billions of yen)", + "recall": 0.9424460431654677, + "true_md": "The figures contained in this section have been compiled on a managerial accounting basis.\n\nNote: Underlying assets are those of project finance, etc., which are rated investment grade or equivalent, and include no sub-prime related assets.\n\n## 1. Securitized Products\n\n## 2. Transactions with Monoline Insurance Companies\n\n## Exposure of Securitized Products (Sumitomo Mitsui Financial Group (Consolidated))\n\n## Loans and Investments Guaranteed by Monoline Insurance Companies, etc.\n\n## 3. Leveraged Loans\n\n## Credit Derivatives (Credit Default Swap [“CDS”]) Transactions with Monoline Insurance Companies\n\n(Billions of yen)\n\n(Billions of yen)\n\n(Billions of yen)\n\n(Billions of yen)\n\n30\n\nSMFG 2011\n\nNotes: 1. Above figures include the amount to be sold of approximately ¥3 billion.\n\nIn the fiscal year ended March 31, 2011, we sold leveraged loans of approximately ¥24 billion, and loss on the sale amounted to approximately ¥3 billion.\n\n2. Above figures do not include leveraged loans which are included in underlying assets of “1. Securitized Products.”\n\n3. Reserves do not include general reserve for possible loan losses for normal borrowers.\n\n2. SMFG recorded loss on such transactions of approximately ¥3.7 billion in the fiscal year ended March 31, 2011.\n\nNotes: 1. Reference assets are rated investment grade or equivalent, and do not include sub-prime related assets.\n\n4. No loss was recorded on securitized products in the fiscal year ended March 31, 2011.\n\n3. Excludes GSE and SMBC's exposure to subordinated beneficiaries owned through the securitization of SMBC's loan receivables.\n\n2. There is no amount of ABCP.\n\nNotes: 1. RMBS, etc. include approximately ¥0.1 billion of sub-prime related products." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8888426104293771, + "doc_id": "1b0d7de5a1272233aaaac63d005f4684771e04d1c78851479d6f6e6bbec4e963", + "edit_distance": 0.14878048780487804, + "f1_score": 0.9682997118155618, + "meteor": 0.918148631761019, + "precision": 0.9767441860465116, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 5 - GENERAL AND ADMINISTRATIVE EXPENSES\n\nThe company capitalised overhead costs, including salaries, wages benefits and consulting fees, directly attributable to the exploration, acquisition and development of oil and gas properties of $4.5 million and $2.9 million for the years ended 31 December 2014 and 2013, respectively.\n\n## NOTE 6 - GAIN ON SALE OF NON-CURRENT ASSETS\n\n## Disposals in 2014\n\nIn July 2014, the Company sold its remaining Denver-Julesburg Basin assets for net proceeds of $108.8 million in cash, which includes the reimbursement of capital expenditures incurred on 8 gross (3.1 net) non-operated horizontal wells. The sale resulted in a pre-tax gain of $48.7 million, which is included in the gain on sale of noncurrent assets in the consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income for the year ended 31 December 2014.\n\nIn July 2014, the Company sold its remaining Bakken assets, located in the Williston Basin, for approximately $14.0 million, which included $10 million in cash and approximately $4.0 million in settlement of a net liability due to the buyer. The sale resulted in a pre-tax gain of $1.6 million, which is included in the gain on sale of non-current assets in the consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income for the year ended 31 December 2014. As at 31 December 2013, the carrying costs of these assets were $11.6 million and were classified as held for sale.\n\nFor the Denver-Julesburg Basin sales proceeds, the Company elected to apply Section 1031 'like-kind exchange' treatment under the US tax rules, which allow deferral of the gain if the proceeds are used to acquire 'like-kind property' within six months of the closing date of the transaction. In addition, the US tax rules allow the deduction of all intangible drilling costs ('IDCs') in the period incurred. In January 2015, the Company deferred majority of the taxable gain on the sale of the Denver-Julesburg Basin by acquiring qualified replacement properties.\n\n- 75 -", + "recall": 0.96, + "true_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 5 – GENERAL AND ADMINISTRATIVE EXPENSES\n\n## NOTE 6 – GAIN ON SALE OF NON-CURRENT ASSETS\n\n## Disposals in 2014 In July 2014, the Company sold its remaining Denver-Julesburg Basin assets for net proceeds of $108.8 million in\n\nThe company capitalised overhead costs, including salaries, wages benefits and consulting fees, directly attributable to the exploration, acquisition and development of oil and gas properties of $4.5 million and $2.9 million for the years ended 31 December 2014 and 2013, respectively. \n\nDisposals in 2014 In July 2014, the Company sold its remaining Denver-Julesburg Basin assets for net proceeds of $108.8 million in cash, which includes the reimbursement of capital expenditures incurred on 8 gross (3.1 net) non-operated horizontal wells. The sale resulted in a pre-tax gain of $48.7 million, which is included in the gain on sale of non- current assets in the consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income for the year ended 31 December 2014.\n\nIn July 2014, the Company sold its remaining Bakken assets, located in the Williston Basin, for approximately $14.0 million, which included $10 million in cash and approximately $4.0 million in settlement of a net liability due to the buyer. The sale resulted in a pre-tax gain of $1.6 million, which is included in the gain on sale of non-current assets in the consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income for the year ended 31 December 2014. As at 31 December 2013, the carrying costs of these assets were $11.6 million and were classified as held for sale. \n\nFor the Denver-Julesburg Basin sales proceeds, the Company elected to apply Section 1031 “like-kind exchange” treatment under the US tax rules, which allow deferral of the gain if the proceeds are used to acquire “like-kind property” within six months of the closing date of the transaction. In addition, the US tax rules allow the deduction of all intangible drilling costs (“IDCs”) in the period incurred. In January 2015, the Company deferred majority of the taxable gain on the sale of the Denver-Julesburg Basin by acquiring qualified replacement properties. \n\n- 75 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9378269607525497, + "doc_id": "1fbcffd0fb143a145d0f1b7c7f3dcfc7e1f5702c93fee44aaa96d12aa2e54557", + "edit_distance": 0.8280871670702179, + "f1_score": 0.968553459119497, + "meteor": 0.8249165339667286, + "precision": 0.9746835443037974, + "pred_md": "## Capital Intensity\n\nCapital intensity allows us to compare the level of our additions to property, plant and equipment to that of other companies within the same industry. We calculate it by dividing additions to property, plant and equipment by operating revenue. For Wireless, capital intensity is calculated using total network revenue. We use it to evaluate the performance of our assets and when making decisions about the capital expenditures. We believe that certain investors and analysts use capital intensity to measure the performance of asset purchases and construction in relation to revenue.\n\n## Dividend Payout Ratios\n\nWe calculate the dividend payout ratio by dividing dividends declared for the year by net income for the year. We use dividends as a percentage of pre-tax free cash flow to conduct analysis and assist with determining the dividends we should pay. We calculate dividends as a percentage of pre-tax cash flow as dividends declared for the year divided by pre-tax free cash flow for the year.\n\n1 Pre-tax free cash flow is a Non-GAAP measure and should not be considered as a substitute or alternative for GAAP measures. It is not a defined term under IFRS, and does not have a standard meaning, so may not be a reliable way to compare us to other companies. See 'Non-GAAP Measures' for information about these measures, including how we calculate them.\n\n## Return on Assets\n\nWe use return on assets to measure our efficiency in using our assets to generate net income. We calculate return on assets by dividing net income for the year by total assets as at year end.\n\n## Adjusted Net Debt to Adjusted Operating Profit\n\nWe use adjusted net debt to conduct valuation-related analysis and make capital structure related decisions and calculate it as adjusted net debt divided by adjusted operating profit.\n\n1 Adjusted operating profit and adjusted net debt are Non-GAAP measures and should not be considered as substitutes or alternatives for GAAP measures. They are not defined terms under IFRS, and do not have a standard meaning, so may not be a reliable way to compare us to other companies. See 'Non-GAAP Measures' for information about these measures, including how we calculate them.\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC.\n\n83\n\nMANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS", + "recall": 0.9625, + "true_md": "## Capital Intensity\n\n## Return on Assets\n\n## Dividend Payout Ratios\n\n1 Adjusted operating profit and adjusted net debt are Non-GAAP measures and should not be considered as substitutes or alternatives for GAAP measures. They are not defined terms under IFRS, and do not have a standard meaning, so may not be a reliable way to compare us to other companies. See “Non-GAAP Measures” for information about these measures, including how we calculate them.\n\n1 Pre-tax free cash flow is a Non-GAAP measure and should not be considered as a substitute or alternative for GAAP measures. It is not a defined term under IFRS, and does not have a standard meaning, so may not be a reliable way to compare us to other companies. See “Non-GAAP Measures” for information about these measures, including how we calculate them.\n\nCapital intensity allows us to compare the level of our additions to property, plant and equipment to that of other companies within the same industry. We calculate it by dividing additions to property, plant and equipment by operating revenue. For Wireless, capital intensity is calculated using total network revenue. We use it to evaluate the performance of our assets and when making decisions about the capital expenditures. We believe that certain investors and analysts use capital intensity to measure the performance of asset purchases and construction in relation to revenue.\n\nWe use return on assets to measure our efficiency in using our assets to generate net income. We calculate return on assets by dividing net income for the year by total assets as at year end.\n\nWe use adjusted net debt to conduct valuation-related analysis and make capital structure related decisions and calculate it as adjusted net debt divided by adjusted operating profit.\n\nWe calculate the dividend payout ratio by dividing dividends declared for the year by net income for the year. We use dividends as a percentage of pre-tax free cash flow to conduct analysis and assist with determining the dividends we should pay. We calculate dividends as a percentage of pre-tax cash flow as dividends declared for the year divided by pre-tax free cash flow for the year.\n\n## Adjusted Net Debt to Adjusted Operating Profit\n\nMANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AN D ANALYSIS\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 83" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9137948895289802, + "doc_id": "f255c80e43995bdaf30a521ed65d4b010d0ae67769299f493c4c787cbebffefb", + "edit_distance": 0.1127348643006263, + "f1_score": 0.9703504043126686, + "meteor": 0.9480532616995586, + "precision": 0.9782608695652174, + "pred_md": "## Independent Auditor's Report\n\n## Independent auditor's report to the members of Kingsgate Consolidated Limited\n\n## Report on the financial report\n\nWe have audited the accompanying financial report of Kingsgate Consolidated Limited (the company), which comprises the statement of financial position as at 30 June 2013, the statement of comprehensive income, statement of changes in equity and statement of cash flows for the year ended on that date, a summary of significant accounting policies, other explanatory notes and the directors' declaration for Kingsgate Group (the consolidated entity). The consolidated entity comprises the company and the entities it controlled at year's end or from time to time during the financial year.\n\n## Directors' responsibility for the financial report\n\nThe directors of the company are responsible for the preparation of the financial report that gives a true and fair view in accordance with Australian Accounting Standards and the Corporations Act 2001 and for such internal control as the directors determine is necessary to enable the preparation of the financial report that is free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error. In Note 1, the directors also state, in accordance with Accounting Standard AASB 101 Presentation of Financial Statements, that the financial statements comply with International Financial Reporting Standards.\n\n## Auditor's responsibility\n\nOur responsibility is to express an opinion on the financial report based on our audit. We conducted our audit in accordance with Australian Auditing Standards. Those standards require that we comply with relevant ethical requirements relating to audit engagements and plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance whether the financial report is free from material misstatement.\n\nAn audit involves performing procedures to obtain audit evidence about the amounts and disclosures in the financial report. The procedures selected depend on the auditor's judgement, including the assessment of the risks of material misstatement of the financial report, whether due to fraud or error. In making those risk assessments, the auditor considers internal control relevant to the consolidated entity's preparation and fair presentation of the financial report in order to design audit procedures that are appropriate in the circumstances, but not for the purpose of expressing an opinion on the effectiveness of the entity's internal control. An audit also includes evaluating the appropriateness of accounting policies used and the reasonableness of accounting estimates made by the directors, as well as evaluating the overall presentation of the financial report.\n\nWe believe that the audit evidence we have obtained is sufficient and appropriate to provide a basis for our audit opinion.\n\nwww.kingsgate.com.au", + "recall": 0.9625668449197861, + "true_md": "112 Independent Auditor’s Report\n\n## Independent Auditor’s Report\n\n## Independent auditor’s report to the members of Kingsgate Consolidated Limited\n\n## Report on the financial report\n\n## Directors’ responsibility for the financial report\n\n## Auditor’s responsibility\n\nwww.kingsgate.com.au\n\nWe have audited the accompanying financial report of Kingsgate Consolidated Limited (the company), which comprises the statement of financial position as at 30 June 2013, the statement of comprehen- sive income, statement of changes in equity and statement of cash flows for the year ended on that date, a summary of significant accounting policies, other explanatory notes and the directors’ declara- tion for Kingsgate Group (the consolidated entity). The consolidated entity comprises the company and the entities it controlled at year’s end or from time to time during the financial year.\n\nThe directors of the company are responsible for the preparation of the financial report that gives a true and fair view in accordance with Australian Accounting Standards and the Corporations Act 2001 and for such internal control as the directors determine is necessary to enable the preparation of the financial report that is free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error. In Note 1, the directors also state, in accordance with Accounting Standard AASB 101 Presentation of Financial Statements, that the financial statements comply with International Financial Reporting Standards.\n\nOur responsibility is to express an opinion on the financial report based on our audit. We conducted our audit in accordance with Australian Auditing Standards. Those standards require that we comply with relevant ethical requirements relating to audit engagements and plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance whether the financial report is free from material misstatement.\n\nAn audit involves performing procedures to obtain audit evidence about the amounts and disclosures in the financial report. The procedures selected depend on the auditor’s judgement, including the assessment of the risks of material misstatement of the financial report, whether due to fraud or error. In making those risk assessments, the auditor considers internal control relevant to the consolidated entity’s preparation and fair presentation of the financial report in order to design audit procedures that are appropriate in the circumstances, but not for the purpose of expressing an opinion on the effectiveness of the entity’s internal control. An audit also includes evaluating the appropriateness of accounting policies used and the reasonableness of accounting estimates made by the directors, as well as evaluating the overall presentation of the financial report.\n\nWe believe that the audit evidence we have obtained is sufficient and appropriate to provide a basis for our audit opinion." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.839284597527094, + "doc_id": "d1a9e50857de240adc6d35e4125e00e20ed302e754ffc89636c53909c9caebbd", + "edit_distance": 0.6628940986257074, + "f1_score": 0.9894179894179894, + "meteor": 0.5875934448844172, + "precision": 0.9894179894179894, + "pred_md": "## Our sales and customer relationships may be negatively impacted if we do not anticipate and respond to consumer preferences and fashion trends appropriately.\n\nOur ability to predict or respond to constantly changing fashion trends, consumer preferences and spending patterns significantly impacts our sales and operating results. If we do not identify and respond to emerging trends in consumer spending and preferences quickly enough, we may harm our ability to retain our existing customers or attract new customers. If we purchase too much inventory, we may be forced to sell our merchandise at lower average margins, which could harm our business. Conversely, if we fail to purchase enough merchandise, we may lose opportunities for additional sales and damage our relationships with our customers.\n\n## The results of our Credit operations could be adversely affected by changes in market conditions.\n\nOur credit card revenues and profitability are subject in large part to economic and market conditions that are beyond our control, including, but not limited to, interest rates, consumer credit availability, consumer debt levels, unemployment trends and other factors. These economic and market conditions could impair our credit card revenues and the profitability of our credit card business due to factors such as lower demand for credit, or could impair ability to assess the creditworthiness of our customers if the criteria and/or models we use to underwrite and manage our customers become less predictive of future losses, causing our losses to rise and have a negative impact on our results of operations. Deterioration of economic conditions and consumer confidence may also adversely affect our credit customers' payment patterns and delinquency rates, increasing our bad debt expense.\n\n## Our business and operations could be materially and adversely affected by supply chain disruptions, port disruptions, severe weather patterns, natural disasters, widespread pandemics and other natural or man-made disruptions.\n\nWe derive a significant amount of our total sales from stores located on the west and east coasts of the United States, particularly in California, which increases our exposure to conditions in these regions. Similarly, merchandise received through west coast ports could be adversely impacted by labor disruptions. These disruptions could cause, among other things, a decrease in consumer spending that would negatively impact our sales, staffing shortages in our stores, distribution centers or corporate offices, interruptions in the flow of merchandise to our stores, disruptions in the operations of our merchandise vendors or property developers, increased costs, and a negative impact on our reputation and long-term growth plans.\n\n## RISKS DUE TO LEGAL AND REGULATORY FACTORS\n\n## We are subject to certain laws, litigation, regulatory matters and ethical standards, and our failure to comply with or adequately address developments as they arise could adversely affect our reputation and operations.\n\nOur policies, procedures and practices and the technology we implement are designed to comply with federal, state, local and foreign laws, rules and regulations, including those imposed by the SEC and other regulatory agencies, the marketplace, the banking industry and foreign countries, as well as responsible business, social and environmental practices, all of which may change from time to time. Significant legislative changes, including those that relate to employment matters and health care reform, could impact our relationship with our workforce, which could increase our expenses and adversely affect our operations. In addition, if we fail to comply with applicable laws and regulations or implement responsible business, social, environmental and supply chain practices, we could be subject to damage to our reputation, class action lawsuits, legal and settlement costs, civil and criminal liability, increased cost of regulatory compliance, restatements of our financial statements, disruption of our business and loss of customers. Any required changes to our employment practices could result in the loss of employees, reduced sales, increased employment costs, low employee morale and harm to our business and results of operations. In addition, political and economic factors could lead to unfavorable changes in federal, state and foreign tax laws, which may increase our tax liabilities. An increase in our tax liabilities could adversely affect our results of operations. We are also regularly involved in various litigation matters that arise in the ordinary course of business. Litigation or regulatory developments could adversely affect our business and financial condition.\n\n## We continue to face uncertainties due to financial services industry regulation and supervision that could have an adverse affect on our operations.\n\nFederal and state regulation and supervision of the financial industry has increased in recent years due to implementation of consumer protection and financial reform legislation such as the Credit Card Accountability Responsibility and Disclosure Act of 2009 ('CARD Act') and the Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act of 2010 ('Financial Reform Act'). The Financial Reform Act significantly restructured regulatory oversight and other aspects of the financial industry, created the Consumer Financial Protection Bureau ('CFPB') to supervise and enforce consumer lending laws and regulations, and expanded state authority over consumer lending. The CARD Act included new and revised rules and restrictions on credit card pricing, finance charges and fees, customer billing practices and payment application. We anticipate more regulation and interpretations of the new rules to continue, and, depending on the nature and extent of these new regulations and interpretations, we may be required to make changes to our credit card practices and systems, which could adversely impact the revenues and profitability of our Credit segment. In addition, we operate in a regulated environment where financial supervisory agencies provide oversight over our activities. Compliance with applicable laws and regulations could limit or restrict our activities and the conduct of our business and enforcement actions by those agencies for failure to comply could have an adverse impact on us.\n\nNordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 9", + "recall": 0.9894179894179894, + "true_md": "## Our sales and customer relationships may be negatively impacted if we do not anticipate and respond to consumer preferences and fashion trends appropriately. Our ability to predict or respond to constantly changing fashion trends, consumer preferences and spending patterns significantly impacts our\n\n## The results of our Credit operations could be adversely affected by changes in market conditions. Our credit card revenues and profitability are subject in large part to economic and market conditions that are beyond our control, including,\n\n## Our business and operations could be materially and adversely affected by supply chain disruptions, port disruptions, severe weather patterns, natural disasters, widespread pandemics and other natural or man-made disruptions. We derive a significant amount of our total sales from stores located on the west and east coasts of the United States, particularly in\n\n## RISKS DUE TO LEGAL AND REGULATORY FACTORS\n\n## We are subject to certain laws, litigation, regulatory matters and ethical standards, and our failure to comply with or adequately address developments as they arise could adversely affect our reputation and operations. Our policies, procedures and practices and the technology we implement are designed to comply with federal, state, local and foreign laws,\n\n## We continue to face uncertainties due to financial services industry regulation and supervision that could have an adverse affect on our operations. Federal and state regulation and supervision of the financial industry has increased in recent years due to implementation of consumer\n\non our operations. Federal and state regulation and supervision of the financial industry has increased in recent years due to implementation of consumer protection and financial reform legislation such as the Credit Card Accountability Responsibility and Disclosure Act of 2009 (“CARD Act”) and the Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act of 2010 (“Financial Reform Act”). The Financial Reform Act significantly restructured regulatory oversight and other aspects of the financial industry, created the Consumer Financial Protection Bureau (“CFPB”) to supervise and enforce consumer lending laws and regulations, and expanded state authority over consumer lending. The CARD Act included new and revised rules and restrictions on credit card pricing, finance charges and fees, customer billing practices and payment application. We anticipate more regulation and interpretations of the new rules to continue, and, depending on the nature and extent of these new regulations and interpretations, we may be required to make changes to our credit card practices and systems, which could adversely impact the revenues and profitability of our Credit segment. In addition, we operate in a regulated environment where financial supervisory agencies provide oversight over our activities. Compliance with applicable laws and regulations could limit or restrict our activities and the conduct of our business and enforcement actions by those agencies for failure to comply could have an adverse impact on us.\n\naddress developments as they arise could adversely affect our reputation and operations. Our policies, procedures and practices and the technology we implement are designed to comply with federal, state, local and foreign laws, rules and regulations, including those imposed by the SEC and other regulatory agencies, the marketplace, the banking industry and foreign countries, as well as responsible business, social and environmental practices, all of which may change from time to time. Significant legislative changes, including those that relate to employment matters and health care reform, could impact our relationship with our workforce, which could increase our expenses and adversely affect our operations. In addition, if we fail to comply with applicable laws and regulations or implement responsible business, social, environmental and supply chain practices, we could be subject to damage to our reputation, class action lawsuits, legal and settlement costs, civil and criminal liability, increased cost of regulatory compliance, restatements of our financial statements, disruption of our business and loss of customers. Any required changes to our employment practices could result in the loss of employees, reduced sales, increased employment costs, low employee morale and harm to our business and results of operations. In addition, political and economic factors could lead to unfavorable changes in federal, state and foreign tax laws, which may increase our tax liabilities. An increase in our tax liabilities could adversely affect our results of operations. We are also regularly involved in various litigation matters that arise in the ordinary course of business. Litigation or regulatory developments could adversely affect our business and financial condition.\n\nand fashion trends appropriately. Our ability to predict or respond to constantly changing fashion trends, consumer preferences and spending patterns significantly impacts our sales and operating results. If we do not identify and respond to emerging trends in consumer spending and preferences quickly enough, we may harm our ability to retain our existing customers or attract new customers. If we purchase too much inventory, we may be forced to sell our merchandise at lower average margins, which could harm our business. Conversely, if we fail to purchase enough merchandise, we may lose opportunities for additional sales and damage our relationships with our customers.\n\nThe results of our Credit operations could be adversely affected by changes in market conditions. Our credit card revenues and profitability are subject in large part to economic and market conditions that are beyond our control, including, but not limited to, interest rates, consumer credit availability, consumer debt levels, unemployment trends and other factors. These economic and market conditions could impair our credit card revenues and the profitability of our credit card business due to factors such as lower demand for credit, or could impair ability to assess the creditworthiness of our customers if the criteria and/or models we use to underwrite and manage our customers become less predictive of future losses, causing our losses to rise and have a negative impact on our results of operations. Deterioration of economic conditions and consumer confidence may also adversely affect our credit customers’ payment patterns and delinquency rates, increasing our bad debt expense.\n\nweather patterns, natural disasters, widespread pandemics and other natural or man-made disruptions. We derive a significant amount of our total sales from stores located on the west and east coasts of the United States, particularly in California, which increases our exposure to conditions in these regions. Similarly, merchandise received through west coast ports could be adversely impacted by labor disruptions. These disruptions could cause, among other things, a decrease in consumer spending that would negatively impact our sales, staffing shortages in our stores, distribution centers or corporate offices, interruptions in the flow of merchandise to our stores, disruptions in the operations of our merchandise vendors or property developers, increased costs, and a negative impact on our reputation and long-term growth plans. \n\nNordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 9" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7840334457262277, + "doc_id": "32f15432d84409cd2e9f66b9fb3b0be7e2114b5c6b775b6f125ff7e01a1389ad", + "edit_distance": 0.6362515413070283, + "f1_score": 0.9411764705882353, + "meteor": 0.6972850925646603, + "precision": 0.9425287356321839, + "pred_md": "and it also provides matching donations to UNICEF, UNESCO, the World Wildlife Fund Japan and the World Food Program in addition to donations given directly to UNICEF by the company. It also offers the UNICEF VISA Card and other social contribution credit cards and donates a portion of credit card payments to charitable organizations.\n\nCedyna contributes to the Japan National Council of Protective Care Homes for Children and other organizations by issuing social contribution credit cards such as the ATOM Card, which supports 'Realizing children's dreams.' It also collects donations from cardholders using 'points' accumulated from their purchases, and also accepts online donations.\n\n## · Participation in the 'TABLE FOR TWO' Program\n\nSMBC's Head Office has a program that provides donations to the nonprofit organization TABLE FOR TWO International to fund school meals in developing countries, for every low-calorie meal ordered for lunch. SMBC Friend Securities has also installed vending machines selling healthy drinks, donating part of their sales to TABLE FOR TWO International.\n\n## · Social Contribution Activities of In-House Foundations\n\nBased in the United States, SMBC Global Foundation has provided scholarships to more than 5,000 university students in Asian countries since its establishment in\n\n1994. In the United States, it supports educational trips to Japan organized by a high school located in Harlem, New York City, and volunteer employees of SMBC and JRI to participate in school beautification programs. The foundation also provides matching gifts for SMBC employees.\n\nEstablished in 1990, the SMBC Foundation for International Cooperation strives to assist in developing human resources necessary to achieve sustainable growth in developing economies as well as to promote international exchange activities. Since its inception, the foundation has provided financial support for 7-8 students from Asian countries each year, enabling them to attend universities in Japan. The foundation also offers subsidies to research institutes and researchers undertaking projects related to developing countries.\n\n## Environmental Activities\n\n## · Participation in Environmental Preservation Initiatives\n\nSMFG organizes 'SMFG Clean-up Day' on which Group employees volunteer to clean up beaches. In fiscal 2010, some 120 employees participated in this activity in Kanagawa and Hyogo prefectures. SMBC Friend Securities organized its own beach cleanup events in Chiba and Hyogo Prefectures. Approximately 101 employees participated. In addition, employees of Cedyna, SMFL and JRI regularly participate in such cleanup activities near their offices.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n60\n\nIn autumn 2010, SMBC Nikko Securities established 'Green Week' for environmental protection and social contribution activities. A total of 2,211 employees and their family members participated in clean-ups and other group activities.\n\n## ¥ MBC Environmental Program NPO C.C.C Furano Field S\n\nSMBC also provides support to an environmental project in Furano, Hokkaido implemented by screenwriter, Soh Kuramoto. SMBC is providing support for forestation in a closed-down golf course in Furano. It supports environmental education programs under which children explore nature by using their five senses.\n\n## ¥ onations through Marketing of the World Bank D Green Fund\n\nSMBC and SMBC Nikko Securities donate a portion of the earnings from the 'SMBC Nikko World Bank Bond Fund' (simply referred to as 'World Bank Green Fund') to the Japanese Red Cross Society and the Japan Committee for UNICEF.\n\n## ¥ upport for the EARTH PHOTO CONTEST S\n\nSMFL supports a photography contest for communicating the importance of resolving environmental problems and encouraging people to take action. The company presents the Sumitomo Mitsui Finance and Leasing Prize for outstanding photographic entries.\n\n## Contributing to Cultural, Artistic, and Educational Activities\n\n## ¥ Concerts Held in the Reception Lobbies of Branches\n\nAt the SMBC Head Office and Osaka Head Office, we hold lobby concerts for the general public free of charge. The concerts held last March and April were organized to raise donations for the disaster recovery and reconstruction efforts after the Great East Japan Earthquake.\n\n## ¥ Support for Cultural and Artistic Ventures\n\nFor supporting kabuki and other traditional performing arts in Japan, Sumitomo Mitsui Card donated stage curtains to the", + "recall": 0.9398280802292264, + "true_md": "In autumn 2010, SMBC Nikko Securities established “Green Week” for environmental protection and social contribution activities. A total of 2,211 employees and their family members participated in clean-ups and other group activities.\n\nand it also provides matching donations to UNICEF, UNESCO, the World Wildlife Fund Japan and the World Food Program in addition to donations given directly to UNICEF by the company. It also offers the UNICEF VISA Card and other social contribu- tion credit cards and donates a portion of credit card payments to charitable organizations.\n\nCedyna contributes to the Japan National Council of Protective Care Homes for Children and other organizations by issuing social contribution credit cards such as the ATOM Card, which supports “Realizing children’s dreams.” It also collects donations from cardholders using “points” accumulated from their purchases, and also accepts online donations.\n\n• SMBC’s Head Office has a program that provides donations to the nonprofit organization TABLE FOR TWO International to fund school meals in developing countries, for every low-calorie meal ordered for lunch. SMBC Friend Securities has also installed vending machines selling healthy drinks, donating part of their sales to TABLE FOR TWO International.\n\n• SMBC also provides support to an environmental project in Furano, Hokkaido implemented by screenwriter, Soh Kuramoto. SMBC is providing support for forestation in a closed-down golf course in Furano. It supports environmental education programs under which children explore nature by using their five senses.\n\nSMBC and SMBC Nikko Securities donate a portion of the earnings from the “SMBC Nikko World Bank Bond Fund” (sim- ply referred to as “World Bank Green Fund”) to the Japanese Red Cross Society and the Japan Committee for UNICEF.\n\n1994. In the United States, it supports educational trips to Japan organized by a high school located in Harlem, New York City, and volunteer employees of SMBC and JRI to participate in school beautification programs. The foundation also provides matching gifts for SMBC employees.\n\nEstablished in 1990, the SMBC Foundation for International Cooperation strives to assist in developing human resources necessary to achieve sustainable growth in developing econo- mies as well as to promote international exchange activities. Since its inception, the foundation has provided financial sup- port for 7-8 students from Asian countries each year, enabling them to attend universities in Japan. The foundation also offers subsidies to research institutes and researchers undertaking projects related to developing countries. \n\n• SMFL supports a photography contest for communicating the importance of resolving environmental problems and encourag- ing people to take action. The company presents the Sumitomo Mitsui Finance and Leasing Prize for outstanding photographic entries.\n\n• At the SMBC Head Office and Osaka Head Office, we hold lobby concerts for the general public free of charge. The concerts held last March and April were organized to raise donations for the disaster recovery and reconstruction efforts after the Great East Japan Earthquake.\n\n• SMFG organizes “SMFG Clean-up Day” on which Group employees volunteer to clean up beaches. In fiscal 2010, some 120 employees participated in this activity in Kanagawa and Hyogo prefectures. SMBC Friend Securities organized its own beach cleanup events in Chiba and Hyogo Prefectures. Approximately 101 employees participated. In addition, employ- ees of Cedyna, SMFL and JRI regularly participate in such cleanup activities near their offices.\n\n• For supporting kabuki and other traditional performing arts in Japan, Sumitomo Mitsui Card donated stage curtains to the \n\n## • Support for Cultural and Artistic Ventures For supporting kabuki and other traditional performing arts in\n\n## Activities • Concerts Held in the Reception Lobbies of Branches At the SMBC Head Office and Osaka Head Office, we hold lobby\n\n## Contributing to Cultural, Artistic, and Educational Activities •\n\n## Environmental Activities • Participation in Environmental Preservation Initiatives SMFG organizes “SMFG Clean-up Day” on which Group\n\n## Environmental Activities •\n\n## • Support for the EARTH PHOTO CONTEST SMFL supports a photography contest for communicating the\n\n## • Donations through Marketing of the World Bank Green Fund\n\n## • Social Contribution Activities of In-House Foundations\n\n## • SMBC Environmental Program NPO C.C.C Furano Field SMBC also provides support to an environmental project in\n\n## • Participation in the “TABLE FOR TWO” Program SMBC’s Head Office has a program that provides donations to\n\nBased in the United States, SMBC Global Foundation has provided scholarships to more than 5,000 university students in Asian countries since its establishment in \n\nSMFG 2011 60" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.3530831883249346, + "doc_id": "3a270852cc93f4753a279877ca62fb44d7206cc3f00cfb3173cd587aee7e3df8", + "edit_distance": 0.5205570291777188, + "f1_score": 0.7232876712328767, + "meteor": 0.5186649070661795, + "precision": 0.9869158878504672, + "pred_md": "Tabb Minor\n\nRonald Marchbanks\n\nPaul Mares Jr.\n\nDennis Marsh\n\nGary Marsh\n\nClint Martin\n\nJimmie Martin\n\nMary Martin\n\nStacy Martin\n\nFabio Martinez\n\nJoe J. Martinez\n\nLeo Martinez\n\nLuis Martinez\n\nRodolfo Martinez\n\nTony Martinez\n\nCorina Martinez-Malone\n\nPam Massey\n\nJenn Masters\n\nLauren Masters\n\nMike Mathis\n\nTimothy Mathis\n\nBryan Matthews\n\nBrian Matula\n\nBrett Maughan\n\nAngel Maxwell\n\nTiffany Maxwell\n\nDavid May\n\nJohnny May\n\nDennis Mayo\n\nJoseph Mcalister\n\nSusan McAlister\n\nKim McAuliffe\n\nGarret McBrain\n\nAllison McBride\n\nRay McCallister\n\nGary McCartney\n\nDakota McCarty\n\nRandy McCarty\n\nRoy McCasland\n\nBranden McClain\n\nAlan McClure\n\nScott McCollum\n\nKevin McCotter\n\nDennis McCoy\n\nDon McCoy\n\nLance McCoy\n\nTommy McCoy\n\nJamie McCracken\n\nJeffrey McCroskey\n\nRick McCurdy\n\nBrandy McDaniel\n\nAlvin McDonald\n\nMatt McDonald\n\nShannon McDonald\n\nDanny McDowell\n\nTony McEntyre\n\nJulie McFarland\n\nBecky McGee\n\nJamie McGee\n\nRoderick McGee\n\nKiley McGlothlin\n\nKeri McGuire\n\nJason McIntosh\n\nCharles McIntyre\n\nTaylor McIntyre\n\nMarshal McKee\n\nRandy McKee\n\nThomas McKee\n\nLeslie McKeever\n\nRebekah McKenna\n\nRussell McKibben\n\nBrandon McKinley\n\nWillie McKinley\n\nAlicia McLaughlin\n\nCody McLaughlin\n\nKippy McLelland\n\nAron McPike\n\nCami McQuerry\n\nJohn Mease\n\nJames Meek\n\nRonnie Meeks\n\nDerrick Megli\n\nRyan Mehan\n\nAraceli Mejia\n\nAndy Melton\n\nZeke Melton\n\nJohn Melville\n\nTaron Mendez\n\nKevin Mendoza\n\nTatiana Mercer\n\nCarter Messer\n\nAlan Metz\n\nJosh Mey\n\nAdam Meyer\n\nTroy Meyers\n\nGordon Michaelis\n\nKevin Mick\n\nMichael Mikulenka Jr.\n\nDrew Miller\n\nEmily Miller\n\nJeanna Miller\n\nJosh Miller\n\nSteve A. Miller\n\nDan Mills\n\nScott Mills\n\nNichole Minnick\n\nKathy Mires\n\nJuliet Mitchell\n\nJeremy Mixon\n\nT-Roy Mize\n\nJeffrey Mohs\n\nJohn Montgomery\n\nMyron Montoya Jr.\n\nChristie Moody\n\nAmanda Moore\n\nLeland Moore II\n\nMichael L. Moore\n\nRex Moore\n\nRoy Moore\n\nTimothy Moore\n\nMandy Moreno\n\nRenita Moreno\n\nBrandon Morgan\n\nCharles Morgan\n\nEufaula Morgan\n\nShanon Morris\n\nHillary Moseley\n\nTerri Mosher\n\nTyson Moulder\n\nMichael Mowrer\n\nPat Mullen\n\nLester Mullins\n\nClint Mullis\n\nAdam Muncy\n\nBond Munson\n\nRafael Murillo Del Angel\n\nElise Murlin\n\nBridget Murphy\n\nChasidy Murray\n\nJerome Murray\n\nKevin Murray\n\nSteve Murray\n\nKatrina Myers\n\nHeather Myres\n\nShane Nafe\n\nGavin Nailon\n\nBobby Nance III\n\nCrystal Nance\n\nKyle Neuenschwander\n\nMike Newkirk\n\nCasey Newman\n\nDana Newman\n\nJoshua Newport\n\nSteven Newton Jr.\n\nChi Nguyen\n\nDerek Nicholas\n\nDerek Nichols\n\nRome Nichols\n\nBrandon Nicholson\n\nDiane Nickel\n\nMark Nipper\n\nGary Nix\n\nHenry Nixon\n\nChad Noland\n\nJoseph Norman\n\nChase Norris\n\nTony Norris\n\nJohn Nuckols\n\nAimee Null\n\nFred Nunn\n\nCassi Nunnery\n\nJane Nye\n\nJason Oblander\n\nJessica Ockershauser\n\nRay Ofosu\n\nJill Olney\n\nBrett Olson\n\nNate Olson\n\nFausto Ortiz\n\nPedro Ortiz\n\n2010 ANNUAL REPORT |\n\n37\n\nJames Osborn\n\nGregory Osbourne\n\nJeremy Otahal\n\nRay Oujesky\n\nAimee Owen\n\nCourtney Owens\n\nSavanna Owens Sr.\n\nDane O'Glee\n\nKyle O'Kelley\n\nChad O'Neal\n\nJon Pace\n\nLupe Pacheco\n\nAndrea Painter\n\nKim Painter\n\nBrenda Palacios\n\nTyler Palesano\n\nEmerson Palmer\n\nJames Palmer II\n\nMatt R. Palmer\n\nJay Parham\n\nChase Paris\n\nDrew Parker\n\nJoshua Parker\n\nTaylor Parker\n\nTommy Parker\n\nJordan Parmer\n\nErcil Parsons\n\nJason Parsons\n\nRanita Patel\n\nAlex Patton\n\nTravis Patty\n\nCayla Patzke\n\nJason Payne\n\nHenry Payton\n\nMatt Payton\n\nMatthew Peach\n\nJosh Pearman\n\nDarby Pearrow\n\nJarrod Pearrow\n\nJoe Peck\n\nKip Peck\n\nChristopher Pena\n\nChristina Pendarvis\n\nEric Pendleton\n\nTim Pendleton\n\nKeith Peppers\n\nAngela Perez\n\nCharles Perez\n\nFrancisco Perez\n\nJuan Perez\n\nJesus Perez-Garcia\n\nRichard Periman\n\nJerry Perkins\n\nKeera Perkins\n\nJamie Perot\n\nMelvin Perrin\n\nCharlie Perry Jr.\n\nFarron Perry\n\nMicah Perry\n\nGina Peterson\n\nMarie Peterson\n\nJarred Pettijohn\n\nSteven Phathong\n\nRicky Phillips\n\nVernon Phillips Jr.\n\nCharles Philyaw\n\nSam Pickett\n\nChristopher Pilgreen\n\nKevin Pinkston\n\nLindsey Pitt\n\nCindy Pittman\n\nAaron Place\n\nJeff Plangman\n\nWilliam Plant\n\nArturo Plascencia\n\nRyan Plummer\n\nAdam Podschun\n\nErryn Pollock\n\nEverett Poole\n\nJordan Pope\n\nMaria Postman\n\nBrian Potocki\n\nStacy Potter\n\nMicheal Potts\n\nJackie Potvin\n\nRandell Powell Jr.\n\nJosh Prater\n\nDevin Pratt\n\nPaul Pratt\n\nMike Priest\n\nLisa Pritchard\n\nSade Proby\n\nChristen Proctor\n\nBarry Pruitt Jr.\n\nDuane Puffer\n\nCody Puffinbarger\n\nNathan Pumphrey\n\nJody Purcell\n\nBrian Putnam\n\nRoger Putnam\n\nRandy Pyle\n\nT.J. Pyle\n\nAmber Qerama\n\nJacque Qualls\n\nRandall Radcliff\n\nTJ Ragsdale\n\nRyan Rainer\n\nMelissa Raley\n\nHector Ramirez\n\nJose Ramos\n\nNelson Ramos\n\nDavid Ramsey\n\nDerrek Ramsey\n\nPaul Ramsperger\n\nRoy Randolph III\n\nJared Ranum\n\nJenn Rauber\n\nShawn Rawls\n\nAmy Reames\n\nScott Reddick\n\nAustin Reed\n\nJamie Reed\n\nJim Reed\n\nLeah Reel\n\nKent Regens\n\nAndy Rehm\n\nJason Reid\n\nMark Reinhardt\n\nDanny Reno\n\nAlisha Reynolds\n\nJackie Reynolds\n\nAmanda Rice\n\nDon Richard\n\nMark Richards\n\nPat Richards\n\nHeath Richmond\n\nDale Riddle\n\nShane Ridenour\n\nWilliam Rieg Jr.\n\nBob Rieser\n\nChad Riley\n\nClaude Riley Jr.\n\nMatthew Riley\n\nBill Roach\n\nAdam Roberts\n\nMegan Roberts\n\nRhett Roberts\n\nBill Robinson\n\nCharles Robinson\n\nClarence Robinson\n\nDustin Robinson\n\nJonathan Robinson\n\nRob Robinson\n\nRobbie Robinson\n\nTim Robinson\n\nClayton Robison\n\nJustin Roby\n\nBertha Rodarte\n\nPaul Rodgers Jr.\n\nEustaquio Rodriguez\n\nRaul Rodriguez\n\nEddy Rodriquez\n\nRoberto Rodriquez Jr.\n\nJames M. Rogers\n\nMichael B. Rogers\n\nNathan Rogers\n\nTimothy Rogers Sr.\n\nJohn Roney\n\nRebecca Roper\n\nTrey Roper III\n\nManuel Rosas\n\nTeresa Rose\n\nJack Rosenberg\n\nDee Ross\n\nChris Rosson\n\nHarvey Rotramel Jr.\n\nStaci Rowell\n\nJason Rowland\n\nMark Rowold\n\nDavid Roy", + "recall": 0.5708108108108109, + "true_md": "2010 ANNUAL REPORT | 37\n\nJeff C. Glenn Larry Glime Brian Glover Chad Glover Robert Goff Jr. Tami Goike Sandy Goins Wayne Goldman Ryan Goltz Jose Gomez Juan Gomez Nate Gomez Eleuterio Gomez-Martinez Rachel Gonser Pete Gonzalez Cindy Goodwin Daniel Goodwin KatGoodwin Carol Gordon Tony Gore Gary Gould Corey Graham Julie Graham Lindsey Graham Neil Granberry Robert Grant Jr. Chris Gray Shane Gray Michael Gredler Billy Green Jr. Britton Green Jerod Green Kenny Green Jr. Mark Green Mattie Green Teddy Green Jr. Chris Greene Edgar Gregory Kevin Gregory Larry Gregory II Michael Gregory Owen Grimes Kenneth Grimsley Larry Grissom Mike Grooms Kenneth Grothe Tyler Groves Ramana Gudapati Eduardo Guerra Miguel Guillen John Guillory Greg Guinn Jacob Guinn Johnathan Guth Manuel Gutierrez Charley Gwin DJ Hackney Richard Haertlein Brooke Hagedorn Tim Haladay Michelle Hale Rick Hale Rusty Hale Julie Haley David Hall Jeff Hall Randall Hall Richard D. Hall Ron Hall Dale Hallet Lindsey Hall-Wiist Tyler Ham Joe Hamby Jimmie Hammontree Jr. Debra Haney Heather Hanmer Lee Hanna Jr. Mike Hanson Nicholas Hardwick Clarence Hardy Cleophus Hardy Dale Hardy James Hardy II Brett Hargrove Jimmie Hargrove Loretta Harkins Christopher Harman Jennifer Harms Casey Harrell Ben Harris\n\nJeannie Harris Lee Harris Mark A. Harris Mark L. Harris Drew Harrold Curtis Hartley Rowdy Hartley Steven C. Harvey Jeremy Harvill Eric Haskins Floyd Hathaway Jr. Kevin Hathaway Chalis Hatton Nathan Hatton Ashley Hausman Ronald Hawkins James Hayes Wesley Hayes Ray Hayford Kevin Haygood Terry Haynes Donnie Hays Terry Heard Timothy Hearnsberger Lesa Heilhecker Tony Hellar Norman Helmick Jeffrey Helwick John Hemmings Cory Hendrickson Eric Hendrix Curtis Henry Hayden D. Henry Hayden F. Henry Patrick Heringer Alex Hernandez Leslie Hernandez Norman Herrera Shawn Herring Thea Hibbard Jr. Charles Hicks Clint Hicks Freddy Hicks Jr. Mike Hicks Nicolai Hicks Nigel Hicks Ryan Hicks Adam Hill Amy Hill Jennifer Hill Lisa Hill Megan A. Hill Megan E. Hill Zach Hill Gwen Hillhouse Justen Hinkle Glenn Hively Robert Hixon Terry Hobock Sally Hoch Joannie Hodges Danielle Hoeltzel Ejli Hofeldt Stephen Hoff Craig Hoffman IraHoffman Austin Holland Michael Holland Molly Holley Jeffrey Holliday Crystal Holsinger John Holt Megan Honeycutt Wesley Hooper Deidre Hopkins Cliff Hornsby Ben Horton Janna Hoskins Amber Houston Trevor Houston Veda Howell Jared Howerton Chloe Howlett Clay Hubbard Mark Huckaby Levon Hudman Chris Huey Brian Huff John Huff Bryan Huffaker\n\nDaniel Hughes Kennith Hughes Walter S. Hughes Kasey Hundt Holly Hunter Michael Hunter Jared Hurst Patrick Hurst RobertHurt Chad Hutches Jessica Hutson Brian Hyden Jesse Hylton Jose Ibarra Braxton Imke Brian Ingalls Marcus Ingram Neil Ingram Steven Ireland Misty Isaacs Koby Ivey Paul Ivey David Ivy Adam Jackson Darrell Jackson Dwight Jackson Isaac Jacobson Travis Jacobson Skip Jacot Clifford James Kyle James Scott James Renner Jantz Timothy Janzen Carly Jaro Brent Jenkins Brandi Johnson Dawn Johnson Jake Johnson Jeremy S. Johnson Jeremy Johnson Joseph Johnson Lindsey Johnson Manny Johnson Rickey Johnson Michael A. Johnston Michael W. Johnston II Carrie Jones Cindy M. Jones Cody Jones Dustin Jones Grant Jones Jenny Jones Jody Jones Johnny Jones RJ Jones Stacey Jones Tim T. Jones Steve Jordan Sarie Joubert Kevin Judd Sylvie Kao Matt Karl Lindsey Karner John Kastelic Lauren Kastner Richard Kastner Russell Katigan Christopher Keith Christy Keith Kim Kelley Steven Kelley Pam Kelly Josh Kemp James Kennedy Walter Kennedy Clint Kenner Shane Kennon Sonia Kepler Bruce Kessler Branden Killingsworth Kristopher Killman Isaac Kimbrough Aaron King Jr. Justin King Leah King Jade Kingcade Kyle Kinney Bruce Kirkland Timothy Kirl\n\nDon Kirschener Steve Klassen Jake Klingenberg Gordon Klundt Bobby Knapp Shayne Knapp Blake Knight Tamara Knight Douglas Knighten Henry Konan Glennette Koon Justin Koonce Ryan Koontz Randy Kopisch Jr. Chuck Kordis Jr. Steven Kosciuk Sue Koskela Scott Kueck Rick Kuper Dustin Kurtz Kade Kusik Jeff Lagaly Michael Langford Nicole Lanphear Andy Large Autumn Lashley Bobby Laster Ryan Laster Chris Laughlin Michael Lawrence Kenneth Lawson Jr. Lawrence LaPlante Dustin Leavins Nick Leber Andrew Lee Jesse Lee Joshua Lee Kent Lee King Lee Homer Leger Sr. Tiesa Leggett Frederick Lembach III Robert Lemons John Lennon Tiffany Leschber Jacob Lester Donald Leverich Christopher Lewis Kent Lewis McKenzie Lewis Micah Lewis Blake LeBlanc Cody Light Wes Liles Brian Linger John Lingle Sandy Lister Travis Little Rick Little Axe Phil Logsdon Bryan Lohoff Richard Long Jr. Kristi Looper Blake Looney Andy Lopez Paul Lopez Robert Lopez Susan Lorenzen Cody J. Lucas Mikel Lucas Robert Lumley Cecil Luttrull Donald Lynch Grant Macdonald Greg Macksood Terra MacAloney Michael Madar Rafael Madrid Troy Mahurin Michael Major George Malone Tim Mangham Rico Manjarrez Jonathan Manning Mike Mannschreck Joe Manshack Matt Mantell Tyler Manwell Alberto Manzano Michael Mapp\n\nRonald Marchbanks Paul Mares Jr. Dennis Marsh Gary Marsh Clint Martin Jimmie Martin Mary Martin Stacy Martin Fabio Martinez Joe J. Martinez Leo Martinez Luis Martinez Rodolfo Martinez Tony Martinez Corina Martinez-Malone Pam Massey Jenn Masters Lauren Masters Mike Mathis Timothy Mathis Bryan Matthews Brian Matula Brett Maughan Angel Maxwell Tiffany Maxwell David May Johnny May Dennis Mayo Joseph Mcalister Susan McAlister Kim McAuliffe Garret McBrain Allison McBride Ray McCallister Gary McCartney Dakota McCarty Randy McCarty Roy McCasland Branden McClain Alan McClure Scott McCollum Kevin McCotter DennisMcCoy DonMcCoy Lance McCoy Tommy McCoy Jamie McCracken Jeffrey McCroskey Rick McCurdy Brandy McDaniel Alvin McDonald Matt McDonald Shannon McDonald Danny McDowell Tony McEntyre Julie McFarland Becky McGee Jamie McGee Roderick McGee Kiley McGlothlin Keri McGuire Jason McIntosh Charles McIntyre Taylor McIntyre Marshal McKee Randy McKee Thomas McKee Leslie McKeever Rebekah McKenna Russell McKibben Brandon McKinley Willie McKinley Alicia McLaughlin Cody McLaughlin Kippy McLelland Aron McPike Cami McQuerry John Mease James Meek Ronnie Meeks Derrick Megli Ryan Mehan Araceli Mejia Andy Melton Zeke Melton John Melville Taron Mendez Kevin Mendoza Tatiana Mercer Carter Messer\n\nAlan Metz Josh Mey Adam Meyer Troy Meyers Gordon Michaelis Kevin Mick Michael Mikulenka Jr. Drew Miller Emily Miller Jeanna Miller Josh Miller Steve A. Miller Dan Mills Scott Mills Nichole Minnick Tabb Minor Kathy Mires Juliet Mitchell Jeremy Mixon T-Roy Mize JeffreyMohs John Montgomery Myron Montoya Jr. Christie Moody Amanda Moore Leland Moore II Michael L. Moore Rex Moore Roy Moore Timothy Moore Mandy Moreno Renita Moreno Brandon Morgan Charles Morgan Eufaula Morgan Shanon Morris Hillary Moseley Terri Mosher Tyson Moulder Michael Mowrer Pat Mullen Lester Mullins Clint Mullis Adam Muncy Bond Munson Rafael Murillo Del Angel Elise Murlin Bridget Murphy Chasidy Murray Jerome Murray Kevin Murray Steve Murray Katrina Myers Heather Myres Shane Nafe Gavin Nailon Bobby Nance III Crystal Nance Kyle Neuenschwander Mike Newkirk Casey Newman Dana Newman Joshua Newport Steven Newton Jr. Chi Nguyen Derek Nicholas Derek Nichols Rome Nichols Brandon Nicholson Diane Nickel Mark Nipper Gary Nix Henry Nixon Chad Noland Joseph Norman Chase Norris Tony Norris John Nuckols Aimee Null Fred Nunn Cassi Nunnery Jane Nye Jason Oblander Jessica Ockershauser Ray Ofosu Jill Olney Brett Olson Nate Olson Fausto Ortiz Pedro Ortiz\n\nJames Osborn Gregory Osbourne Jeremy Otahal Ray Oujesky Aimee Owen Courtney Owens Savanna Owens Sr. Dane O’Glee Kyle O’Kelley Chad O’Neal Jon Pace Lupe Pacheco Andrea Painter Kim Painter Brenda Palacios Tyler Palesano Emerson Palmer James Palmer II Matt R. Palmer Jay Parham Chase Paris Drew Parker Joshua Parker Taylor Parker Tommy Parker Jordan Parmer Ercil Parsons Jason Parsons Ranita Patel Alex Patton Travis Patty Cayla Patzke Jason Payne Henry Payton Matt Payton Matthew Peach Josh Pearman Darby Pearrow Jarrod Pearrow Joe Peck Kip Peck Christopher Pena Christina Pendarvis Eric Pendleton Tim Pendleton Keith Peppers Angela Perez Charles Perez Francisco Perez Juan Perez Jesus Perez-Garcia Richard Periman Jerry Perkins Keera Perkins Jamie Perot Melvin Perrin Charlie Perry Jr. Farron Perry Micah Perry Gina Peterson Marie Peterson Jarred Pettijohn Steven Phathong Ricky Phillips Vernon Phillips Jr. Charles Philyaw Sam Pickett Christopher Pilgreen Kevin Pinkston Lindsey Pitt Cindy Pittman Aaron Place Jeff Plangman William Plant Arturo Plascencia Ryan Plummer Adam Podschun Erryn Pollock Everett Poole Jordan Pope Maria Postman Brian Potocki Stacy Potter Micheal Potts Jackie Potvin Randell Powell Jr. Josh Prater Devin Pratt Paul Pratt Mike Priest\n\nLisa Pritchard Sade Proby Christen Proctor Barry Pruitt Jr. DuanePuffer Cody Puffinbarger Nathan Pumphrey Jody Purcell Brian Putnam Roger Putnam Randy Pyle T.J. Pyle Amber Qerama Jacque Qualls Randall Radcliff TJ Ragsdale Ryan Rainer Melissa Raley Hector Ramirez Jose Ramos Nelson Ramos David Ramsey Derrek Ramsey Paul Ramsperger Roy Randolph III Jared Ranum Jenn Rauber Shawn Rawls Amy Reames Scott Reddick Austin Reed Jamie Reed Jim Reed Leah Reel Kent Regens Andy Rehm Jason Reid Mark Reinhardt Danny Reno Alisha Reynolds Jackie Reynolds Amanda Rice Don Richard Mark Richards Pat Richards Heath Richmond Dale Riddle Shane Ridenour William Rieg Jr. Bob Rieser Chad Riley Claude Riley Jr. Matthew Riley Bill Roach Adam Roberts Megan Roberts RhettRoberts Bill Robinson Charles Robinson Clarence Robinson Dustin Robinson Jonathan Robinson Rob Robinson Robbie Robinson Tim Robinson Clayton Robison Justin Roby Bertha Rodarte Paul Rodgers Jr. Eustaquio Rodriguez Raul Rodriguez Eddy Rodriquez Roberto Rodriquez Jr. James M. Rogers Michael B. Rogers Nathan Rogers Timothy Rogers Sr. John Roney Rebecca Roper Trey Roper III Manuel Rosas Teresa Rose Jack Rosenberg Dee Ross Chris Rosson Harvey Rotramel Jr. Staci Rowell Jason Rowland Mark Rowold David Roy" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.884127400419638, + "doc_id": "cf848b5b9b23b84836e8353df8605cb1dfd292c3db0d992a483a38fee5745773", + "edit_distance": 0.8167141500474834, + "f1_score": 0.9480874316939892, + "meteor": 0.678280679842451, + "precision": 0.9747191011235955, + "pred_md": "- 〉 is employed, or has previously been employed in an executive capacity by the Company, and there has not been a period of at least three years between ceasing such employment and serving on the Board;\n- 〉 has within the last three years been a principal of a material professional adviser or a material consultant to the Company, or an employee materially associated with the above mentioned adviser / consultant;\n- 〉 is a material supplier or customer of the Company, or an officer of or otherwise associated directly or indirectly with a material supplier or customer; and\n- 〉 has a material contractual relationship with the Company other than as a Director.\n\nThe concept of 'materiality' is considered from both the Company and the individual Director perspective. The determination of materiality requires consideration of both quantitative and qualitative elements. An item is presumed to be quantitatively immaterial if it is equal or less than 5% of the appropriate base amount. It is presumed to be material (unless there is qualitative evidence to the contrary) if it is equal to or greater than 10% of the appropriate base amount. Qualitative factors considered include whether a relationship is strategically important, the competitive landscape, the nature of the relationship and the contractual or other arrange ments governing it and other factors.\n\n## Appointment of Directors\n\nNominations of new Directors, recommended by the Nomination Committee, are considered by the full Board.\n\nThe Nomination Committee employs external consultants to access a wide base of potential Directors, considering their range of skills and experience required in light of the:\n\n- 〉 current composition of the Board;\n- 〉 need for independence;\n- 〉 the Company's Diversity Policy;\n- 〉 strategic direction and progress of the Company; and\n- 〉 nature of the Company's business.\n\nThe Board assesses nominated Directors against a range of criteria including experience, professional expertise, personal qualities, potential conflicts of interest and their capacity to commit themselves to the Board's activities.\n\n## Performance Review of the Board and Senior Executives\n\nEach year the Board receives reports from management detailing interactions with and outlining the expressed views of the Company's shareholders. The Nomination Committee is responsible for evaluation of the Board, its committees and its key executives.\n\nPerformance evaluations of the Board, its committees, the individual Directors and key executives were undertaken in the 2013 financial year in accordance with the above processes.\n\nThe Managing Director undertakes an annual review of the performance of each Senior Executive against individual tasks and objectives.\n\n## Independent Professional Advice\n\nDirectors are able to access members of the management team at any time to request relevant information.\n\nIt is also Board policy that Directors may seek independent advice at the Company's expense.\n\n## Board Committees\n\nTo assist the Board in fulfilling its responsibilities, the Board has established three committees to consider certain issues and functions. These committees are as follows:\n\n- 〉 Audit Committee;\n- 〉 Remuneration Committee; and\n- 〉 Nomination Committee.\n\nEach committee operates under its own charter.\n\n## Audit Committee\n\nThe members of the Audit Committee as at the date of this Report are:\n\n- 〉 Mr Craig Carracher (Chairman of Audit Committee);\n- 〉 Mr Ross Smyth-Kirk; and\n- 〉 Mr Peter McAleer.\n\nThe Committee has appropriate financial expertise. All members of the Committee are financially literate and have an appropriate under standing of the industry in which the Company operates.\n\nThe Audit Committee's role is to assist the Board to fulfil its responsibilities associated with the Company's accounts, its external financial reporting, its internal control structure, risk\n\n35\n\nCorporate Governance Statement\n\nmanagement systems and audit function. The primary functions of the Audit Committee are to:\n\n- 〉 review the financial information provided by the Board to shareholders and other parties ensuring that it is true and fair and complies with relevant accounting standards;\n- 〉 ensure that corporate risk management policies and internal controls are in place and are maintained in accordance with appropriate standards and statutory requirements;\n- 〉 oversee and evaluate the quality of the audits conducted by the external auditors;\n- 〉 provide for open communication between the external auditors and the Board for the exchange of views and information; and\n- 〉 recommend to the Board the nomination and remuneration of the external auditors and ensure their independence and integrity.\n\nIn fulfilling its responsibilities, the Audit Committee has rights of access to management and to auditors (external and internal) without management present and may seek explanations and additional information.\n\nThe Audit Committee met twice during the 2013 financial year.\n\nThe Audit Committee operates in accordance with a charter published in the 'Corporate Governance' section of the Company's website.\n\n## Auditor Independence and Engagement\n\nThe charter adopted by the Audit Committee confirms its role in assisting the Board in respect of the appointment, compensation, retention and oversight of the Company's external auditors. The external auditors are required to confirm that they have maintained their independence in accordance with the Corporations Act 2001 (Cth) and the rules of professional accounting bodies.\n\nThe performance of the external auditor is reviewed annually and applications for tender of external audit services are requested when deemed appropriate, taking into consideration assessment of performance, existing value and tender costs.\n\nAn analysis of fees paid to the external auditors, including a breakdown of fees for non-audit services, is provided in the Directors' Report. It is the policy of the external auditors to provide an annual declaration of their independence to the Audit Committee.\n\ncontinued\n\nu\n\nCorporate Governance Statement", + "recall": 0.9228723404255319, + "true_md": "35 Corporate Governance Statement\n\n35 Corporate Governance Statement\n\nCorporate Governance Statement\n\n## Performance Review of the Board and Senior Executives\n\n## Independent Professional Advice\n\n## Board Committees\n\n## Appointment of Directors\n\n## Auditor Independence and Engagement\n\n## Audit Committee\n\nThe concept of ‘materiality’ is considered from both the Company and the individual Director perspective. The determination of materiality requires consideration of both quantitative and qualitative elements. An item is presumed to be quantitatively immaterial if it is equal or less than 5% of the appropriate base amount. It is presumed to be material (unless there is qualita- tive evidence to the contrary) if it is equal to or greater than 10% of the appropriate base amount. Qualitative factors considered include whether a relationship is strategically impor- tant, the competitive landscape, the nature of the relationship and the contractual or other arrangements governing it and other factors.\n\nNominations of new Directors, recommended by the Nomination Committee, are considered by the full Board.\n\nThe Nomination Committee employs external consultants to access a wide base of potential Directors, considering their range of skills and experience required in light of the:\n\nThe Board assesses nominated Directors against a range of criteria including experience, profes- sional expertise, personal qualities, potential conflicts of interest and their capacity to commit themselves to the Board’s activities.\n\nThe Committee has appropriate financial exper- tise. All members of the Committee are financially literate and have an appropriate understanding of the industry in which the Company operates.\n\nThe Audit Committee’s role is to assist the Board to fulfil its responsibilities associated with the Company’s accounts, its external financial reporting, its internal control structure, risk \n\nAn analysis of fees paid to the external auditors, including a breakdown of fees for non-audit services, is provided in the Directors’ Report. It is the policy of the external auditors to provide an annual declaration of their independence to the Audit Committee.\n\nThe performance of the external auditor is reviewed annually and applications for tender of external audit services are requested when deemed appropriate, taking into consideration assessment of performance, existing value and tender costs.\n\nThe charter adopted by the Audit Committee confirms its role in assisting the Board in respect of the appointment, compensation, retention and oversight of the Company’s external audi- tors. The external auditors are required to confirm that they have maintained their inde- pendence in accordance with the Corporations Act 2001 (Cth) and the rules of professional accounting bodies.\n\nTo assist the Board in fulfilling its responsibili- ties, the Board has established three commit- tees to consider certain issues and functions. These committees are as follows:\n\nEach committee operates under its own charter.\n\nDirectors are able to access members of the management team at any time to request rele- vant information.\n\nIt is also Board policy that Directors may seek independent advice at the Company’s expense.\n\nThe Managing Director undertakes an annual review of the performance of each Senior Executive against individual tasks and objectives.\n\nPerformance evaluations of the Board, its committees, the individual Directors and key executives were undertaken in the 2013 finan- cial year in accordance with the above processes.\n\nEach year the Board receives reports from management detailing interactions with and outlining the expressed views of the Company’s shareholders. The Nomination Committee is responsible for evaluation of the Board, its committees and its key executives.\n\nmanagement systems and audit function. The primary functions of the Audit Committee are to:\n\nIn fulfilling its responsibilities, the Audit Committee has rights of access to management and to auditors (external and internal) without management present and may seek explanations and additional information.\n\nThe Audit Committee met twice during the 2013 financial year.\n\nThe Audit Committee operates in accordance with a charter published in the ‘Corporate Governance’ section of the Company’s website.\n\n- 〉 Mr Craig Carracher (Chairman of Audit Committee);\n\n- 〉 Mr Ross Smyth-Kirk; and\n\n- 〉 Mr Peter McAleer. \n\n- 〉 current composition of the Board;\n\n- 〉 need for independence;\n\n- 〉 the Company’s Diversity Policy;\n\n- 〉 strategic direction and progress of the Company; and\n\n- 〉 nature of the Company’s business.\n\n- 〉 Audit Committee;\n\n- 〉 Remuneration Committee; and\n\n- 〉 Nomination Committee.\n\nThe members of the Audit Committee as at the date of this Report are:\n\n- 〉 is employed, or has previously been employed in an executive capacity by the Company, and there has not been a period of at least three years between ceasing such employment and serving on the Board;\n\n- 〉 has within the last three years been a prin- cipal of a material professional adviser or a material consultant to the Company, or an employee materially associated with the above mentioned adviser / consultant;\n\n- 〉 is a material supplier or customer of the Company, or an officer of or otherwise associated directly or indirectly with a material supplier or customer; and\n\n- 〉 has a material contractual relationship with the Company other than as a Director.\n\n- 〉 review the financial information provided by the Board to shareholders and other parties ensuring that it is true and fair and complies with relevant accounting standards;\n\n- 〉 ensure that corporate risk management policies and internal controls are in place and are maintained in accordance with appro- priate standards and statutory requirements;\n\n- 〉 oversee and evaluate the quality of the audits conducted by the external auditors;\n\n- 〉 provide for open communication between the external auditors and the Board for the exchange of views and information; and\n\n- 〉 recommend to the Board the nomination and remuneration of the external auditors and ensure their independence and integrity.\n\ncontinued u" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9148808697136619, + "doc_id": "2e6739e37a6ea299430afc2b53ae1ac869e66d087f28627711628d383f29814b", + "edit_distance": 0.32075471698113206, + "f1_score": 0.9884169884169884, + "meteor": 0.9433322884659928, + "precision": 0.9922480620155039, + "pred_md": "## Increasing Geographic Diversification\n\nWe are increasing our geographic diversification by expanding our apartment ownership outside Atlantic Canada. Over the last four years we have invested approximately $200 million in apartments located in Ontario and at the end of 2013 owned 1,359 units in three core Ontario markets: Ottawa, Toronto and Southwestern Ontario. Our long-term goal is to have 50% of our earnings generated outside Atlantic Canada. We plan to achieve this by focusing future acquisition and development activity in Ontario, and potentially Western Canada.\n\n## annual apartment net operating and equity Income from atlantic Canada and ontario $ millions\n\n## Investing in newer properties\n\nWe are expanding our portfolio with a focus on acquiring newer properties and through development. We believe that newer buildings often generate higher total returns due to limited deferred maintenance requirements, lower operating costs and a preference for renters to live in newer buildings. With 35% of Killam's apartment portfolio constructed since the year 2000, Killam has one of the newest multi-family real estate portfolios in Canada.\n\n## apartment Value by Year of Construction\n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013\n\n5", + "recall": 0.9846153846153847, + "true_md": "## Investing in newer properties\n\n## Increasing Geographic Diversification\n\n## apartment Value by Year of Construction\n\n## annual apartment net operating and equity Income from atlantic Canada and ontario $ millions\n\natlantic Canada and ontario $ millions \n\nWe are increasing our geographic diversification by expanding our apartment ownership outside Atlantic Canada. Over the last four years we have invested approximately $200 million in apartments located in Ontario and at the end of 2013 owned 1,359 units in three core Ontario markets: Ottawa, Toronto and Southwestern Ontario. Our long-term goal is to have 50% of our earnings generated outside Atlantic Canada. We plan to achieve this by focusing future acquisition and development activity in Ontario, and potentially Western Canada.\n\nWe are expanding our portfolio with a focus on acquiring newer properties and through development. We believe that newer buildings often generate higher total returns due to limited deferred maintenance requirements, lower operating costs and a preference for renters to live in newer buildings. With 35% of Killam’s apartment portfolio constructed since the year 2000, Killam has one of the newest multi-family real estate portfolios in Canada.\n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013 5" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8766017372280127, + "doc_id": "ec71e98b70b396e82a2519d6fd4cbbace5b2249ad1868401ea439d43e23c72f6", + "edit_distance": 0.43661971830985913, + "f1_score": 0.968229954614221, + "meteor": 0.8628672544486243, + "precision": 0.9696969696969697, + "pred_md": "## management's Discussion and analysis\n\nD\n\nollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\n## PART II\n\n## Business Overview\n\nKillam Properties Inc., based in Halifax, Nova Scotia, is one of Canada's largest residential landlords, owning, operating, managing and developing multi-family residential and Manufactured Home Community ('MHC') properties. Killam's 164 apartment properties are located in Atlantic Canada's six largest urban centres and in Ontario. The Company's 35 MHCs are located in Ontario and Atlantic Canada. The value of Killam's real estate assets at December 31, 2013, was $1.5 billion. Killam is focused on growing its portfolio, maximizing the value of its properties and increasing FFo per share.\n\nKillam was founded in 2000, based on the recognition of an opportunity to create value through the consolidation of apartments in Atlantic Canada and MHCs across Canada. Killam's first apartment was purchased in 2002 and its first MHC was purchased in 2003. From 2002 to 2009, Killam's apartment portfolio grew through the acquisition of properties in Atlantic Canada's six largest cities, namely Halifax, Moncton, Saint John, Fredericton, St. John's and Charlottetown. Killam is now Atlantic Canada's largest residential landlord, with a 14.2% market share of the multi-family rental units in these core markets. Killam entered the Ontario apartment market in 2010, and today owns twelve properties in the province, including assets in Toronto, Ottawa, London and Cambridge. Killam plans to expand its presence in Ontario with additional acquisitions and developments. The apartment business is Killam's largest business segment, accounting for 86% of the Company's NOI from property operations and equity income in 2013. At December 31, 2013, Killam's apartment portfolio consisted of 12,647units.\n\nKillam complements its acquisition program with the construction of apartment buildings. During 2013, Killam completed the development of four projects totalling 282 units and commenced two additional projects in the second half of the year. Management does not expect developments to exceed 5% of the total asset base in any given year.\n\nIn addition, the Company owns MHCs, also known as land-lease communities or trailer parks. Killam owns the land and infrastructure supporting each community and leases the lots to tenants, who own their own homes and pay Killam a monthly site rent. Killam owns 35 communities which accounted for 14% of Killam's NOI in 2013. During the year Killam sold ten MHC properties located in New Brunswick, allowing the Company to crystallize the value of the properties at attractive cap-rates and use the funds to continue to grow the apartment portfolio.\n\n## Key Performance Indicators (KPIs)\n\nManagement measures Killam's performance based on the following KPIs:\n\n- 1. FFO per Share - A standard measure of earnings for real estate entities. Management is focused on growing FFO per share on an annual basis.\n- 2. Rental Increases - Management expects to achieve increases in average rental rates on an annual basis and measures the average rental increases achieved.\n- 3. Occupancy - Management is focused on maximizing occupancy levels while also managing the impact of higher rents. This measure considers units rented as a percentage of total stabilized units at a point in time.\n- 4. Same Store NOI Growth - This measure considers the Company's ability to increase the NOI at properties that it has owned for equivalent periods year-over-year, removing the impact of acquisitions, dispositions, developments and other non same store operating adjustments.\n- 5. Weighted average cost of Debt - Killam monitors the weighted average cost of its mortgage debt and total debt.\n- 6. Debt to total assets - Killam measures its debt levels as a percentage of total assets and works to ensure that the debt to total assets remains at a range of 55% to 65%.\n- 7. term to maturity - management monitors the average number of years to maturity on its debt.\n- 8. Interest Coverage Ratio - A common measure of credit risk used by lenders, this measure considers Killam's ability to pay interest on outstanding debt. Generally, the higher the interest coverage ratio, the lower the credit risk.\n- 9. Debt Service Coverage Ratio - A common measure of credit risk used by lenders, this measure considers Killam's ability to pay interest and principal on outstanding debt. Generally the higher the debt service coverage ratio, the lower the credit risk.\n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013\n\n23", + "recall": 0.9667673716012085, + "true_md": "Management’s Discussion and Analysis Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\n## PART II\n\n## Business Overview\n\n## Key Performance Indicators (KPIs)\n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013 23\n\nManagement measures Killam’s performance based on the following KPIs: \n\nIn addition, the Company owns MHCs, also known as land‑lease communities or trailer parks. Killam owns the land and infrastructure supporting each community and leases the lots to tenants, who own their own homes and pay Killam a monthly site rent. Killam owns 35 communities which accounted for 14% of Killam’s NOI in 2013. During the year Killam sold ten MHC properties located in New Brunswick, allowing the Company to crystallize the value of the properties at attractive cap‑rates and use the funds to continue to grow the apartment portfolio.\n\nKillam complements its acquisition program with the construction of apartment buildings. During 2013, Killam completed the development of four projects totalling 282 units and commenced two additional projects in the second half of the year. Management does not expect developments to exceed 5% of the total asset base in any given year.\n\nKillam was founded in 2000, based on the recognition of an opportunity to create value through the consolidation of apartments in Atlantic Canada and MHCs across Canada. Killam’s first apartment was purchased in 2002 and its first MHC was purchased in 2003. From 2002 to 2009, Killam’s apartment portfolio grew through the acquisition of properties in Atlantic Canada’s six largest cities, namely Halifax, Moncton, Saint John, Fredericton, St. John’s and Charlottetown. Killam is now Atlantic Canada’s largest residential landlord, with a 14.2% market share of the multi‑family rental units in these core markets. Killam entered the Ontario apartment market in 2010, and today owns twelve properties in the province, including assets in Toronto, Ottawa, London and Cambridge. Killam plans to expand its presence in Ontario with additional acquisitions and developments. The apartment business is Killam’s largest business segment, accounting for 86% of the Company’s NOI from property operations and equity income in 2013. At December 31, 2013, Killam’s apartment portfolio consisted of 12,647units.\n\nKillam Properties Inc., based in Halifax, Nova Scotia, is one of Canada’s largest residential landlords, owning, operating, managing and developing multi‑family residential and Manufactured Home Community (“MHC”) properties. Killam’s 164 apartment properties are located in Atlantic Canada’s six largest urban centres and in Ontario. The Company’s 35 MHCs are located in Ontario and Atlantic Canada. The value of Killam’s real estate assets at December 31, 2013, was $1.5 billion. Killam is focused on growing its portfolio, maximizing the value of its properties and increasing FFo per share.\n\n- 1. FFO per Share – A standard measure of earnings for real estate entities. Management is focused on growing FFO per share on an annual basis. \n\n- 2. Rental Increases – Management expects to achieve increases in average rental rates on an annual basis and measures the average rental increases achieved. \n\n- 3. Occupancy – Management is focused on maximizing occupancy levels while also managing the impact of higher rents. This measure considers units rented as a percentage of total stabilized units at a point in time. \n\n- 4. Same Store NOI Growth – This measure considers the Company’s ability to increase the NOI at properties that it has owned for equivalent periods year‑over‑year, removing the impact of acquisitions, dispositions, developments and other non same store operating adjustments. \n\n- 5. Weighted average cost of Debt – Killam monitors the weighted average cost of its mortgage debt and total debt.\n\n- 6. Debt to total assets – Killam measures its debt levels as a percentage of total assets and works to ensure that the debt to total assets remains at a range of 55% to 65%. \n\n- 7. term to maturity – management monitors the average number of years to maturity on its debt.\n\n- 8. Interest Coverage Ratio – A common measure of credit risk used by lenders, this measure considers Killam’s ability to pay interest on outstanding debt. Generally, the higher the interest coverage ratio, the lower the credit risk.\n\n- 9. Debt Service Coverage Ratio – A common measure of credit risk used by lenders, this measure considers Killam’s ability to pay interest and principal on outstanding debt. Generally the higher the debt service coverage ratio, the lower the credit risk." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8176202793967997, + "doc_id": "4e70dfeb310002b6e21e181f032448c47ce0451a69927073f7b45622a6311f42", + "edit_distance": 0.7797619047619048, + "f1_score": 0.9790575916230365, + "meteor": 0.8501416598496415, + "precision": 0.9842105263157894, + "pred_md": "BENJAMIN J. MONDICS\n\nNEIL A. SCHRIMSHER\n\nNEIL A. SCHRIMSHER\n\n## To Our Shareholders:\n\nFiscal 2012 was a successful year on multiple fronts for Applied Industrial Technologies. Our business performance resulted from sound operating discipline and a focus on operational excellence, including:\n\n## 2012 Financial Highlights:\n\n- · Record sales of $2.4 billion - an increase of 7.3%\n- · Record net income of $108.8 million, or $2.54 per share - an EPS increase of 13.4%\n- · Operating margin of 7.1% - solid improvement over last year's 6.8%\n- · Cash generated from operations of $90.4 million - adding to our financial strength and flexibility\n- · Return of $64.8 million to shareholders in dividends and share repurchases - providing enhanced shareholder value\n- · Improved after-tax return on assets of 11.8% -evidence of our continued focus on asset management\n\n## When combined with results from prior years and viewed over time, these achievements equate to:\n\n- · 10 consecutive quarters of growth - upon which we can build\n- · Excellent cash generation - to support our growth initiatives\n- · Ongoing reinforcement of our Four Cornerstones - Margin Enhancement, Asset Management, Cost Control and Profitable Sales Growth\n\nOur Financial Highlights provide a snapshot of our noteworthy achievements; however, there's much more to our story. Throughout Applied, we have a shared belief that we can and will profitably grow our business. The future we envision for the Company is made possible by our strong foundation and financial position, by our dedicated associates, by our best-in-class suppliers, and, of course, by our strong customer base. We are confident and committed to expanding our value-add, extending our reach, and enhancing our technology to serve our customers and generate shareholder value.\n\nApplied Industrial Technologies, Inc. and Subsidiaries\n\n1", + "recall": 0.9739583333333334, + "true_md": "BENJAMIN J. MONDICS\n\nNEIL A. SCHRIMSHER\n\n## To Our Shareholders:\n\nFiscal 2012 was a successful year on multiple fronts for Applied Industrial Technologies. Our business performance resulted from sound operating discipline and a focus on operational excellence, including:\n\nOur Financial Highlights provide a snapshot of our noteworthy achievements; however, there’s much more to our story. Throughout Applied, we have a shared belief that we can and will profitably grow our business. The future we envision for the Company is made possible by our strong foundation and financial position, by our dedicated associates, by our best-in-class suppliers, and, of course, by our strong customer base. We are confident and committed to expanding our value-add, extending our reach, and enhancing our technology to serve our customers and generate shareholder value.\n\n- • 10 consecutive quarters of growth – upon which we can build \n\n- • Excellent cash generation – to support our growth initiatives\n\n- • Ongoing reinforcement of our Four Cornerstones – Margin Enhancement, Asset Management, Cost Control and Profitable Sales Growth\n\n- • Record sales of $2.4 billion – an increase of 7.3%\n\n- • Record net income of $108.8 million, or $2.54 per share – an EPS increase of 13.4%\n\n- • Operating margin of 7.1% – solid improvement over last year’s 6.8%\n\n- • Cash generated from operations of $90.4 million – adding to our financial strength and flexibility\n\n- • Return of $64.8 million to shareholders in dividends and share repurchases – providing enhanced shareholder value\n\n- • Improved after-tax return on assets of 11.8% – evidence of our continued focus on asset management\n\n## When combined with results from prior years and viewed over time, these achievements equate to:\n\n## 2012 Financial Highlights:\n\n1 Applied Industrial Technologies, Inc. and Subsidiaries" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9649765398268303, + "doc_id": "922c6aa5bf319c903a26a4e1baaf8efeed9212cc06ff7097a75bbfe8739aa9e1", + "edit_distance": 0.8972491909385113, + "f1_score": 0.9855072463768116, + "meteor": 0.7939515504207566, + "precision": 0.9866071428571429, + "pred_md": "- GLYPH<129> In addition, a host network carrier is neither required to provide a roamer with a service that the carrier does not provide to its own subscribers, or to provide a roamer with a service, or level of service, that the roamer's network carrier does not provide. The policy does not require seamless communications handover.\n\n## Consultation on Transfers, Divisions and S ubordinate Licensing of S pectrum Licences\n\nIn June 2013, Industry Canada released Framework Relating to Transfers, Divisions and Subordinate Licensing of Spectrum Licences for Commercial Mobile Spectrum . The Framework lays out the criteria Industry Canada will consider and the processes it will use when it reviews spectrum licence transfers, including prospective transfers that could arise from purchase or sale options and other agreements. Key things to note:\n\n- GLYPH<129> Industry Canada will review all spectrum transfer requests, and will not allow any that result in 'undue spectrum concentration' and reduced competition. Decisions will be made on a case-by-case basis and will be issued publicly to increase transparency.\n- GLYPH<129> Licensees must ask for a review within 15 days of entering into any agreement that could lead to a prospective transfer. Industry Canada will review the agreement as though the licence transfer that could arise from it has been made.\n- GLYPH<129> This timing does not apply to agreements made before the Framework was released, which means the spectrum agreements we have with Shaw and Quebecor will not be reviewed under the Framework until 2014.\n\n## CRTC Wireless Code\n\nIn June 2013, the CRTC issued its wireless consumer code of conduct. Key things to note:\n\n- GLYPH<129> The code establishes several new obligations on wireless carriers, including contract term length, roaming caps, unlocking requirements and contract summaries. It also lays out the rules for device subsidies and early cancellation fees.\n- GLYPH<129> Under the code, if a customer cancels a contract early, carriers can only charge the outstanding balance of the device subsidy they received, which goes down by an equal amount every month over no more than 24 months. This effectively makes the maximum contract length two years.\n- GLYPH<129> The code applies to all contracts entered into or renewed after December 2, 2013.\n- GLYPH<129> As of June 3, 2015, the code will apply to all contracts, no matter when they were entered into, which means it will retroactively capture three-year contracts entered into between June 3, 2012 and December 2, 2013. Anyone entering into a three-year contract between June 3, 2012 and December 2, 2013 may therefore be entitled to cancel their agreement without paying back the full subsidy they received. We do not believe that the CRTC has the authority to do this, and on July 2, 2013, Rogers, Bell, Telus, MTS and Sasktel filed an appeal of this retroactivity provision of the code. The Court has granted leave to appeal and will hear the case in 2014.\n\n## CRTC Request for Information Regarding Domestic and U S Wireless Roaming\n\nIn August 2013, all Canadian wireless carriers received a letter from the CRTC asking that information about their retail and wholesale domestic and US roaming rates, revenues and agreements be filed by September 27, 2013. The Commission stated 'The data requested will\n\nprovide the Commission with information on wireless roaming in order to assess its impact on the competitiveness of the Canadian wireless industry and the choices available to Canadians'.\n\nFollowing the fact-finding exercise, on December 12, 2013, the CRTC issued a call for comments entitled Wholesale mobile wireless roaming in Canada - Unjust discrimination/undue preference (Telecom Notice of Consultation CRTC 2013-685). Following its earlier fact-finding exercise to assess the impact of wholesale mobile wireless roaming arrangements on the competitiveness of the Canadian wireless industry, the Commission initiated this proceeding to consider whether or not, as a question of fact, there is a situation of unjust discrimination or undue preference with respect to wholesale roaming arrangements in Canada. The Commission noted in particular that the wholesale roaming rates paid by Canadian carriers were higher than the rates paid by American carriers. In addition, the Commission intends to initiate a separate proceeding in early 2014 to further examine matters related to the wholesale mobile wireless roaming market in Canada and the impact on the competitiveness of the industry.\n\n## G overnment Announcement Regarding Roaming Rates and Enforcement\n\nIn December, the federal government announced that it would introduce legislation in 2014. Firstly, it would enact a legislation that would cap wholesale domestic roaming rates at a rate no higher than the rates the carrier charges its own retail customers. Secondly, the government would amend the Radio-communications Act and the Telecommunications Act to permit Industry Canada and the CRTC to impose monetary penalties in order to enforce telecommunications regulations. Details of the announced legislation have not yet been released.\n\n## CABLE\n\n## Vertical Integration\n\nThe CRTC considers our Cable business to be vertically integrated because we own or control both programming and distribution services. It sets out the rules for vertically integrated companies in the broadcast sector in its Broadcasting Regulatory Policy CRTC 2011-601. The policy:\n\n- GLYPH<129> Does not allow companies to make their television programs exclusive to their mobile or Internet subscribers. Any program broadcast on television, including hockey games and other live events, must be made available to competitors under fair and reasonable terms.\n- GLYPH<129> Allows companies to offer exclusive programming to their Internet or mobile customers provided it is produced specifically for an Internet portal or a mobile device.\n- GLYPH<129> Adopts a code of conduct to prevent anti-competitive behaviour and ensure all distributors, broadcasters and online programming services negotiate in good faith. To protect Canadians from losing availability of a television service during negotiations, broadcasters must continue to provide the service in question and distributors must continue to offer it to their subscribers.\n- GLYPH<129> Required vertically integrated entities to report by April 2012 on how they have provided consumers with more flexibility in the services that they can subscribe to through, for example, pick-and-pay models. In our April 2012 report, we presented the results of a market trial we conducted in London, Ontario that provides additional programming flexibility to consumers.\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC.\n\n69\n\nMANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS", + "recall": 0.9844097995545658, + "true_md": "- GLYPH<129> In addition, a host network carrier is neither required to provide a roamer with a service that the carrier does not provide to its own subscribers, or to provide a roamer with a service, or level of service, that the roamer’s network carrier does not provide. The policy does not require seamless communications handover.\n\nprovide the Commission with information on wireless roaming in order to assess its impact on the competitiveness of the Canadian wireless industry and the choices available to Canadians”.\n\nFollowing the fact-finding exercise, on December 12, 2013, the CRTC issued a call for comments entitled Wholesale mobile wireless roaming in Canada – Unjust discrimination/undue preference (Telecom Notice of Consultation CRTC 2013-685). Following its earlier fact-finding exercise to assess the impact of wholesale mobile wireless roaming arrangements on the competitiveness of the Canadian wireless industry, the Commission initiated this proceeding to consider whether or not, as a question of fact, there is a situation of unjust discrimination or undue preference with respect to wholesale roaming arrangements in Canada. The Commission noted in particular that the wholesale roaming rates paid by Canadian carriers were higher than the rates paid by American carriers. In addition, the Commission intends to initiate a separate proceeding in early 2014 to further examine matters related to the wholesale mobile wireless roaming market in Canada and the impact on the competitiveness of the industry.\n\nIn June 2013, Industry Canada released Framework Relating to Transfers, Divisions and Subordinate Licensing of Spectrum Licences for Commercial Mobile Spectrum . The Framework lays out the criteria Industry Canada will consider and the processes it will use when it reviews spectrum licence transfers, including prospective transfers that could arise from purchase or sale options and other agreements. Key things to note:\n\nIn December, the federal government announced that it would introduce legislation in 2014. Firstly, it would enact a legislation that would cap wholesale domestic roaming rates at a rate no higher than the rates the carrier charges its own retail customers. Secondly, the government would amend the Radio-communications Act and the Telecommunications Act to permit Industry Canada and the CRTC to impose monetary penalties in order to enforce telecommunications regulations. Details of the announced legislation have not yet been released.\n\nThe CRTC considers our Cable business to be vertically integrated because we own or control both programming and distribution services. It sets out the rules for vertically integrated companies in the broadcast sector in its Broadcasting Regulatory Policy CRTC 2011-601. The policy:\n\nIn June 2013, the CRTC issued its wireless consumer code of conduct. Key things to note:\n\nIn August 2013, all Canadian wireless carriers received a letter from the CRTC asking that information about their retail and wholesale domestic and US roaming rates, revenues and agreements be filed by September 27, 2013. The Commission stated “The data requested will\n\n- GLYPH<129> Does not allow companies to make their television programs exclusive to their mobile or Internet subscribers. Any program broadcast on television, including hockey games and other live events, must be made available to competitors under fair and reasonable terms.\n\n- GLYPH<129> Allows companies to offer exclusive programming to their Internet or mobile customers provided it is produced specifically for an Internet portal or a mobile device.\n\n- GLYPH<129> Adopts a code of conduct to prevent anti-competitive behaviour and ensure all distributors, broadcasters and online programming services negotiate in good faith. To protect Canadians from losing availability of a television service during negotiations, broadcasters must continue to provide the service in question and distributors must continue to offer it to their subscribers.\n\n- GLYPH<129> Required vertically integrated entities to report by April 2012 on how they have provided consumers with more flexibility in the services that they can subscribe to through, for example, pick-and-pay models. In our April 2012 report, we presented the results of a market trial we conducted in London, Ontario that provides additional programming flexibility to consumers.\n\n- GLYPH<129> As of June 3, 2015, the code will apply to all contracts, no matter when they were entered into, which means it will retroactively capture three-year contracts entered into between June 3, 2012 and December 2, 2013. Anyone entering into a three-year contract between June 3, 2012 and December 2, 2013 may therefore be entitled to cancel their agreement without paying back the full subsidy they received. We do not believe that the CRTC has the authority to do this, and on July 2, 2013, Rogers, Bell, Telus, MTS and Sasktel filed an appeal of this retroactivity provision of the code. The Court has granted leave to appeal and will hear the case in 2014.\n\n- GLYPH<129> The code applies to all contracts entered into or renewed after December 2, 2013.\n\n- GLYPH<129> Under the code, if a customer cancels a contract early, carriers can only charge the outstanding balance of the device subsidy they received, which goes down by an equal amount every month over no more than 24 months. This effectively makes the maximum contract length two years.\n\n- GLYPH<129> The code establishes several new obligations on wireless carriers, including contract term length, roaming caps, unlocking requirements and contract summaries. It also lays out the rules for device subsidies and early cancellation fees.\n\n- GLYPH<129> This timing does not apply to agreements made before the Framework was released, which means the spectrum agreements we have with Shaw and Quebecor will not be reviewed under the Framework until 2014.\n\n- GLYPH<129> Licensees must ask for a review within 15 days of entering into any agreement that could lead to a prospective transfer. Industry Canada will review the agreement as though the licence transfer that could arise from it has been made.\n\n- GLYPH<129> Industry Canada will review all spectrum transfer requests, and will not allow any that result in “undue spectrum concentration” and reduced competition. Decisions will be made on a case-by-case basis and will be issued publicly to increase transparency.\n\n## Consultation on Transfers, Divisions and S ubordinate Licensing of S pectrum Licences\n\n## G overnment Announcement Regarding Roaming Rates and Enforcement\n\n## CRTC Wireless Code\n\n## CABLE\n\n## Vertical Integration\n\n## CRTC Request for Information Regarding Domestic and U S Wireless Roaming\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 69\n\nMANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AN D ANALYSIS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9796658130026071, + "doc_id": "d35707369fa605d775349c2a0034bb2d9524cc0a9b2d109d4433d8709065ea7e", + "edit_distance": 0.046948356807511735, + "f1_score": 0.9876543209876544, + "meteor": 0.9910690285021158, + "precision": 0.9917355371900827, + "pred_md": "MANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS\n\n## ADDITIONAL GAAP MEASURES\n\nWe include operating income as an additional GAAP measure in our consolidated statements of income because we believe it is a representative of our normal course operating activities, provides relevant information that can be used to assess our consolidated performance, and is meaningful to investors. We calculate it by taking revenue and deducting operating expenses, including restructuring, acquisition and other expenses, and depreciation and amortization as shown in our consolidated statements of income.\n\n## NON-GAAP MEASURES\n\nWe use the following Non-GAAP measures. These are reviewed regularly by management and our Board in assessing our performance and making decisions regarding the ongoing operations of our business and its ability to generate cash flows. These measures are also used by investors, lending institutions and credit rating agencies as an indicator of our operating performance, our ability to incur and service debt, and as a measurement to value companies in the telecommunications sector. These are not recognized measures under GAAP and do not have standardized meaning under IFRS, so they may not be a reliable way to compare us to other companies.\n\n84\n\nROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT", + "recall": 0.9836065573770492, + "true_md": "MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS\n\n## ADDITIONAL GAAP MEASURES\n\n## NON-GAAP MEASURES\n\nWe include operating income as an additional GAAP measure in our consolidated statements of income because we believe it is a representative of our normal course operating activities, provides relevant information that can be used to assess our consolidated performance, and is meaningful to investors. We calculate it by taking revenue and deducting operating expenses, including restructuring, acquisition and other expenses, and depreciation and amortization as shown in our consolidated statements of income.\n\nWe use the following Non-GAAP measures. These are reviewed regularly by management and our Board in assessing our performance and making decisions regarding the ongoing operations of our business and its ability to generate cash flows. These measures are also used by investors, lending institutions and credit rating agencies as an indicator of our operating performance, our ability to incur and service debt, and as a measurement to value companies in the telecommunications sector. These are not recognized measures under GAAP and do not have standardized meaning under IFRS, so they may not be a reliable way to compare us to other companies.\n\n84 ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9385325920095594, + "doc_id": "31dc432dad1a975b176c7484097edf2f78f4e4babad467b68552e2abc4c02f99", + "edit_distance": 0.4533551554828151, + "f1_score": 0.9833641404805916, + "meteor": 0.9152915625995903, + "precision": 0.9888475836431226, + "pred_md": "SMFG\n\nCapital Ratio Information\n\n## ■ Standardized Approach\n\n## 1. Scope\n\nThe following consolidated subsidiaries have adopted the standardized approach for exposures as of March 31, 2011 (i.e. consolidated subsidiaries not listed in the 'Internal Ratings-Based (IRB) Approach: 1. Scope' on page 181).\n\n## (1) Consolidated Subsidiaries Planning to Adopt Phased Rollout of the IRB Approach\n\nSumitomo Mitsui Finance and Leasing Co., Ltd., Kansai Urban Banking Corporation and Cedyna Financial Corporation\n\n## (2) Other Consolidated Subsidiaries\n\nThese are consolidated subsidiaries judged not to be significant in terms of credit risk management based on the type of business, scale, and other factors. These subsidiaries will adopt the standardized approach on a permanent basis.\n\n## 2. Credit Risk-Weighted Asset Calculation Methodology\n\nA 100% risk weight is applied to claims on corporates in accordance with Article 45 of the Notification, and risk weights corresponding to country risk scores published by the Organization for Economic Co-operation and Development (OECD) are applied to claims on sovereigns and financial institutions.\n\n## 3. Exposure Balance by Risk Weight Segment\n\nNotes: 1. The above amounts are exposures after CRM (but before deduction of direct write-offs). Please note that for off-balance sheet assets the credit equivalent amount has been included.\n\n2. 'Securitization exposures' have not been included.\n\n## ■ Credit Risk Mitigation (CRM) Techniques\n\n## 1. Risk Management Policy and Procedures\n\nIn calculating credit risk-weighted asset amounts, SMFG takes into account credit risk mitigation (CRM) techniques. Specifically, amounts are adjusted for eligible financial or real estate collateral, guarantees, and credit derivatives or by netting loans against the obligors' deposits with SMFG financial institutions. The methods and scope of these adjustments and methods of management are as follows.\n\n## (1) Scope and Management\n\n## A. Collateral (Eligible Financial or Real Estate Collateral)\n\nSMBC designates deposits and securities as eligible financial collateral, and land and buildings as eligible real estate collateral. Real estate collateral is evaluated by taking into account its fair value, appraisal value, and current condition, as well as our lien position. Real estate collateral must maintain sufficient collateral value in the event security rights must be exercised due to delinquency. However, during the period from acquiring the rights to exercising the rights, the property may deteriorate or suffer damage from earthquakes or other natural disasters, or there may be changes in the lien position due to, for example, attachment or establishment of liens by a third party. Therefore, the regular monitoring of collateral is implemented according to the type of property and the type of security interest.\n\n## B. Guarantees and Credit Derivatives\n\nGuarantors are sovereigns, municipal corporations, credit guarantee corporations and other public entities, financial institutions, and C&I companies. Counterparties to credit derivative transactions are mostly domestic and overseas banks and securities companies.\n\nCredit risk-weighted asset amounts are calculated taking into account credit risk mitigation of guarantees and credit derivatives acquired from entities with sufficient ability to provide protection such as sovereigns, municipal corporations and other public sector entities of comparable credit quality, and financial institutions and C&I companies with sufficient credit ratings.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n190", + "recall": 0.9779411764705882, + "true_md": "SMFG Capital Ratio Information\n\n## ■ Standardized Approach\n\n## 1. Scope\n\n## 2. Credit Risk-Weighted Asset Calculation Methodology\n\n## 3. Exposure Balance by Risk Weight Segment\n\n## ■ Credit Risk Mitigation (CRM) Techniques\n\n## 1. Risk Management Policy and Procedures\n\n## A. Collateral (Eligible Financial or Real Estate Collateral)\n\n## B. Guarantees and Credit Derivatives\n\n## (1) Scope and Management\n\nThe following consolidated subsidiaries have adopted the standardized approach for exposures as of March 31, 2011 (i.e. consolidated subsidiaries not listed in the “Internal Ratings-Based (IRB) Approach: 1. Scope” on page 181).\n\nSumitomo Mitsui Finance and Leasing Co., Ltd., Kansai Urban Banking Corporation and Cedyna Financial Corporation\n\nThese are consolidated subsidiaries judged not to be significant in terms of credit risk management based on the type of business, scale, and other factors. These subsidiaries will adopt the standardized approach on a permanent basis. \n\nA 100% risk weight is applied to claims on corporates in accordance with Article 45 of the Notification, and risk weights corresponding to country risk scores published by the Organization for Economic Co-operation and Development (OECD) are applied to claims on sovereigns and financial institutions.\n\nIn calculating credit risk-weighted asset amounts, SMFG takes into account credit risk mitigation (CRM) techniques. Specifically, amounts are adjusted for eligible financial or real estate collateral, guarantees, and credit derivatives or by netting loans against the obligors’ deposits with SMFG financial institutions. The methods and scope of these adjustments and methods of management are as follows.\n\nSMBC designates deposits and securities as eligible financial collateral, and land and buildings as eligible real estate collateral. \n\nReal estate collateral is evaluated by taking into account its fair value, appraisal value, and current condition, as well as our lien position. Real estate collateral must maintain sufficient collateral value in the event security rights must be exercised due to delinquency. However, during the period from acquiring the rights to exercising the rights, the property may deteriorate or suffer damage from earthquakes or other natural disasters, or there may be changes in the lien position due to, for example, attachment or establishment of liens by a third party. Therefore, the regular monitoring of collateral is implemented according to the type of property and the type of security interest.\n\nGuarantors are sovereigns, municipal corporations, credit guarantee corporations and other public entities, financial institutions, and C&I companies. Counterparties to credit derivative transactions are mostly domestic and overseas banks and securities companies.\n\nCredit risk-weighted asset amounts are calculated taking into account credit risk mitigation of guarantees and credit derivatives acquired from entities with sufficient ability to provide protection such as sovereigns, municipal corporations and other public sector entities of comparable credit quality, and financial institutions and C&I companies with sufficient credit ratings.\n\nSMFG 2011 190\n\n- Notes: 1. The above amounts are exposures after CRM (but before deduction of direct write-offs). Please note that for off-balance sheet assets the credit equivalent amount has been included.\n\n- 2. “Securitization exposures” have not been included.\n\n## (1) Consolidated Subsidiaries Planning to Adopt Phased Rollout of the IRB Approach\n\n## (2) Other Consolidated Subsidiaries" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9742478233369124, + "doc_id": "a4a19d8fb4bb54e8f8e8a3aab49e30d061fe2d1d124506af8caf21f67b665fe6", + "edit_distance": 0.5410094637223974, + "f1_score": 0.9930313588850174, + "meteor": 0.9528164568783467, + "precision": 0.9965034965034965, + "pred_md": "NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n- GLYPH<129> IFRIC 21, Levies (IFRIC 21) - In May 2013, the IASB issued IFRIC 21, which provides guidance on when to recognise a liability for a levy imposed by a government, both for levies that are accounted for in accordance with IAS 37 Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets and those where the timing and amount of the levy is certain. The Interpretation identifies the obligating event for the recognition of a liability as the activity that triggers the payment of the levy in accordance with the relevant legislation. It provides the following guidance on recognition of a liability to pay levies (i) the liability is recognised progressively if the obligating event occurs over a period of time, and (ii) if an obligation is triggered on reaching a minimum threshold, the liability is recognised when that minimum threshold is reached. The standard is effective for annual periods beginning on or after January 1, 2014, with early adoption permitted. We are assessing the impact of this new standard on our consolidated financial statements.\n- GLYPH<129> IFRS 9, Financial Instruments (IFRS 9) - The IASB issued IFRS 9, which replaces IAS 39, Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement, establishes principles for the financial reporting of financial assets and financial liabilities that will present relevant and useful information to users of financial statements for their assessment of the amounts, timing and uncertainty of an entity's future cash flows. This new standard also includes a new general hedge accounting standard which will align hedge accounting more closely with risk management. It does not fundamentally change the types of hedging relationships or the requirement to measure and recognize ineffectiveness, however it will provide more hedging strategies that are used for risk management to qualify for hedge accounting and introduce more judgment to assess the effectiveness of a hedging relationship. The IASB has not yet communicated the mandatory effective date of IFRS 9. We are assessing the impact of this new standard on our consolidated financial statements.\n\n## NOTE 3: SEGMENTED INFORMATION\n\nOur reportable segments are Wireless, Cable, Business Solutions and Media. All four segments operate substantially in Canada. Corporate items and eliminations includes our interests in businesses that are not reportable operating segments, corporate administrative functions and eliminations of inter-segment revenue and costs. We follow the same accounting policies for our segments as those described in note 2 to these consolidated financial statements. Segment results include items directly attributable to a segment as well as those that can be allocated on a reasonable basis. We account for transactions between reportable segments in the same way we account for transactions with external parties and eliminate them on consolidation.\n\nThe Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer are the chief operating decision makers and regularly review our operations and performance by segment. They review adjusted operating profit as a key measure of performance for each segment and to make decisions about the allocation of resources. Adjusted operating profit is income before restructuring, acquisition and other expenses, stock-based compensation expense, depreciation and amortization, impairment of assets, finance costs, other income, and income taxes. This measure of segment operating results is different from operating income on the consolidated statements of income.\n\n## Information by S egment\n\n- 1 Included in operating costs on the consolidated statements of income.\n\n102\n\nROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT", + "recall": 0.9895833333333334, + "true_md": "- GLYPH<129> IFRS 9, Financial Instruments (IFRS 9) – The IASB issued IFRS 9, which replaces IAS 39, Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement, establishes principles for the financial reporting of financial assets and financial liabilities that will present relevant and useful information to users of financial statements for their assessment of the amounts, timing and uncertainty of an entity’s future cash flows. This new standard also includes a new general hedge accounting standard which will align hedge accounting more closely with risk management. It does not fundamentally change the types of hedging relationships or the requirement to measure and recognize ineffectiveness, however it will provide more hedging strategies that are used for risk management to qualify for hedge accounting and introduce more judgment to assess the effectiveness of a hedging relationship. The IASB has not yet communicated the mandatory effective date of IFRS 9. We are assessing the impact of this new standard on our consolidated financial statements.\n\n- GLYPH<129> IFRIC 21, Levies (IFRIC 21) – In May 2013, the IASB issued IFRIC 21, which provides guidance on when to recognise a liability for a levy imposed by a government, both for levies that are accounted for in accordance with IAS 37 Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets and those where the timing and amount of the levy is certain. The Interpretation identifies the obligating event for the recognition of a liability as the activity that triggers the payment of the levy in accordance with the relevant legislation. It provides the following guidance on recognition of a liability to pay levies (i) the liability is recognised progressively if the obligating event occurs over a period of time, and (ii) if an obligation is triggered on reaching a minimum threshold, the liability is recognised when that minimum threshold is reached. The standard is effective for annual periods beginning on or after January 1, 2014, with early adoption permitted. We are assessing the impact of this new standard on our consolidated financial statements.\n\nNOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 3: SEGMENTED INFORMATION\n\n## Information by S egment\n\nOur reportable segments are Wireless, Cable, Business Solutions and Media. All four segments operate substantially in Canada. Corporate items and eliminations includes our interests in businesses that are not reportable operating segments, corporate administrative functions and eliminations of inter-segment revenue and costs. We follow the same accounting policies for our segments as those described in note 2 to these consolidated financial statements. Segment results include items directly attributable to a segment as well as those that can be allocated on a reasonable basis. We account for transactions between reportable segments in the same way we account for transactions with external parties and eliminate them on consolidation.\n\nThe Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer are the chief operating decision makers and regularly review our operations and performance by segment. They review adjusted operating profit as a key measure of performance for each segment and to make decisions about the allocation of resources. Adjusted operating profit is income before restructuring, acquisition and other expenses, stock-based compensation expense, depreciation and amortization, impairment of assets, finance costs, other income, and income taxes. This measure of segment operating results is different from operating income on the consolidated statements of income.\n\n1 Included in operating costs on the consolidated statements of income.\n\n102 ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6872945775799499, + "doc_id": "9f8a3eb7eaa7dc44474116b9f412b1127a941df6f735881af27a282f3d7c80a2", + "edit_distance": 0.48148148148148145, + "f1_score": 0.8837209302325582, + "meteor": 0.8229253722103568, + "precision": 0.95, + "pred_md": "SMFG\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n## (2) Nonconsolidated Statements of Income\n\nSumitomo Mitsui Financial Group, Inc.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n136", + "recall": 0.8260869565217391, + "true_md": "SMFG Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nNonconsolidated Statements of Income\n\nSumitomo Mitsui Financial Group, Inc.\n\nSMFG 2011 136$^{(2)}$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9484022231230222, + "doc_id": "4e28f742f066993c1551c96aa4ef2b03be624e03005bc179770a879c555f874e", + "edit_distance": 0.07755102040816327, + "f1_score": 0.9590163934426229, + "meteor": 0.9561510245579999, + "precision": 0.975, + "pred_md": "82\n\nNotes to the Financial Statements\n\n## 6. Income tax continued\n\n## f) Tax consolidation group\n\nKingsgate Consolidated Limited and its whollyowned Australian subsidiary have implemented the tax consolidation legislation as of 1 July 2003. The accounting policy in relation to this legislation is set out in Note 2d.\n\nOn adoption of the tax consolidation legislation, the entities in the tax-consolidation group entered into a tax sharing agreement which, in the opinion of the Directors, limits the joint and several liabilities of the wholly-owned entities in\n\nthe case of default by the head entity, Kingsgate Consolidated Limited.\n\nThe entities have also entered into a tax funding agreement under which the wholly-owned entities fully compensate Kingsgate for any current tax payable assumed and are compensated for any current tax receivable and deferred assets relating to the unused tax losses or unused tax credits that are transferred to Kingsgate under the tax legislation. The funding\n\namounts are determined by reference to the amounts recognised in the wholly-owned entities' financial statements.\n\nThe amount receivable / payable under the tax funding agreement are due upon receipt of the funding advice from the head entity, which is issued as soon as practicable after the end of each financial year. The head entity may also require payment of interim funding amounts to assist with its obligations to pay tax instalments.\n\nwww.kingsgate.com.au", + "recall": 0.9435483870967742, + "true_md": "## 6. Income tax continued\n\n## f) Tax consolidation group\n\nKingsgate Consolidated Limited and its wholly- owned Australian subsidiary have implemented the tax consolidation legislation as of 1 July 2003. The accounting policy in relation to this legislation is set out in Note 2d.\n\nOn adoption of the tax consolidation legislation, the entities in the tax-consolidation group entered into a tax sharing agreement which, in the opinion of the Directors, limits the joint and several liabilities of the wholly-owned entities in \n\nthe case of default by the head entity, Kingsgate Consolidated Limited.\n\nThe entities have also entered into a tax funding agreement under which the wholly-owned entities fully compensate Kingsgate for any current tax payable assumed and are compen- sated for any current tax receivable and deferred assets relating to the unused tax losses or unused tax credits that are transferred to Kingsgate under the tax legislation. The funding \n\namounts are determined by reference to the amounts recognised in the wholly-owned enti- ties’ financial statements. \n\nThe amount receivable / payable under the tax funding agreement are due upon receipt of the funding advice from the head entity, which is issued as soon as practicable after the end of each financial year. The head entity may also require payment of interim funding amounts to assist with its obligations to pay tax instalments. \n\nwww.kingsgate.com.au\n\nNotes to the Financial Statements 82" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9387408336094619, + "doc_id": "a23549f368660f45eb79d11b1e4af737b49f62f91708a60166d95d6fdff49a43", + "edit_distance": 0.5322033898305085, + "f1_score": 0.9964912280701753, + "meteor": 0.8855860240220758, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Derivative Instruments\n\nAt December 31, 2013, all of our US dollar-denominated long-term debt instruments were hedged against fluctuations in foreign exchange rates for accounting purposes (2012 - 91.7%).\n\nThe tables below show our Derivatives net asset (liability) position at December 31, 2013 and 2012.\n\nThe table below shows derivative instruments asset and derivative instruments liability reflected in our consolidated statements of financial position.\n\nIn 2013, we recorded a $4 million increase to net income related to hedge ineffectiveness (2012 - $4 million decrease).\n\n## Debt Derivatives\n\nWe use cross currency interest exchange agreements to hedge the foreign exchange risk on all of the principal and interest obligations of our US dollar-denominated senior notes and debentures. We use Debt Derivatives for risk-management purposes only.\n\nWe completed the following transactions related to our Debt Derivatives in 2013:\n\n- GLYPH<129> entered into new Debt Derivatives to hedge senior notes issued during the year,\n- GLYPH<129> terminated existing Debt Derivatives and entered into Debt Derivatives with different terms to hedge existing senior notes, and\n- GLYPH<129> settled Debt Derivatives related to senior notes that matured during the year.\n\nAll of our currently outstanding Debt Derivatives have been designated as effective hedges against foreign exchange risk for accounting purposes as described below.\n\nNew Debt Derivatives to Hedge Senior Notes Issued in 2013\n\n1 Converting from a fixed US$ coupon rate to a weighted average Cdn$ fixed rate.\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC.\n\n115\n\nNOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS", + "recall": 0.993006993006993, + "true_md": "NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 115\n\n1 Converting from a fixed US$ coupon rate to a weighted average Cdn$ fixed rate.\n\nNew Debt Derivatives to Hedge Senior Notes Issued in 2013\n\nThe table below shows derivative instruments asset and derivative instruments liability reflected in our consolidated statements of financial position.\n\nIn 2013, we recorded a $4 million increase to net income related to hedge ineffectiveness (2012 – $4 million decrease).\n\nWe use cross currency interest exchange agreements to hedge the foreign exchange risk on all of the principal and interest obligations of our US dollar-denominated senior notes and debentures. We use Debt Derivatives for risk-management purposes only.\n\nWe completed the following transactions related to our Debt Derivatives in 2013:\n\nAt December 31, 2013, all of our US dollar-denominated long-term debt instruments were hedged against fluctuations in foreign exchange rates for accounting purposes (2012 – 91.7%).\n\nThe tables below show our Derivatives net asset (liability) position at December 31, 2013 and 2012.\n\n## Debt Derivatives\n\n## Derivative Instruments\n\n- GLYPH<129> entered into new Debt Derivatives to hedge senior notes issued during the year,\n\n- GLYPH<129> terminated existing Debt Derivatives and entered into Debt Derivatives with different terms to hedge existing senior notes, and\n\n- GLYPH<129> settled Debt Derivatives related to senior notes that matured during the year.\n\nAll of our currently outstanding Debt Derivatives have been designated as effective hedges against foreign exchange risk for accounting purposes as described below." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9729629573203703, + "doc_id": "cb02db3854dea8e9e2c0106e0186bb6d41a7a14c86424534577e4bbff1792ad0", + "edit_distance": 0.025974025974025976, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999704293008391, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nSMFG\n\nNotes: 1. The above transactions are valued at fair value and the valuation gains (losses) are accounted for in the consolidated statements of income.\n\n2. Fair value of transactions listed on exchange is calculated using the closing prices on the Tokyo Financial Exchange and others.\n\nFair value of OTC transactions is calculated using discounted present value and option pricing models.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n113", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "SMFG Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nNotes: 1. The above transactions are valued at fair value and the valuation gains (losses) are accounted for in the consolidated statements of income.\n\n2. Fair value of transactions listed on exchange is calculated using the closing prices on the Tokyo Financial Exchange and others. Fair value of OTC transactions is calculated using discounted present value and option pricing models.\n\nSMFG 2011 113" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9646471731366112, + "doc_id": "4a1280280ada2494dcc0c3fe0d67c64349cdd01676e76a9e2fed311bfaf56146", + "edit_distance": 0.22193548387096773, + "f1_score": 0.985553772070626, + "meteor": 0.8809606093603708, + "precision": 0.9903225806451613, + "pred_md": "CHAIRMAN'S LETTER\n\nCHAIRMAN'S LETTER\n\nDespite the reduction in crude oil and liquids prices towards the end of the year and continuing into 2015, the opertional performance and focused, value-adding transactions during the past year have positioned the Company very favourably for future growth in net asset value and shareholder returns.\n\n2\n\n## Dear Fellow Shareholders,\n\nI am pleased to present Sundance Energy Australia Limited's Annual Report for the 12 months ended 31 December 2014. It has been another year of significant progress for Sundance across our portfolio of liquids rich oil and gas assets in the US.\n\nThe Company's strategic focus on growing production, cash flows and reserves from large, repeatable resource plays in North America continues to deliver positive results with growth in production, cash flows, and reserves.\n\nDuring late 2013 and 2014, we completed the divestment of our interest in the Williston Basin in North Dakota for $51 million which realised an internal rate of return of 45 percent; and also opportunistically divested our interest in the Denver-Julesburg Basin in Colorado for $114 million which realised an internal rate of return of 104 percent. These divestitures of smaller, less scalable positions enabled us to focus on developing and growing our assets in the Eagle Ford in Texas and our Mississippian/Woodford assets in Oklahoma.\n\nDespite the reduction in crude oil and liquids prices towards the end of the year and continuing into 2015, the operational performance and focused, value-adding transactions during the past year have positioned the Company very favourably for future growth in net asset value and shareholder returns.\n\n## A year of growing production, cash flow and reserves\n\nIn line with our strategy we continued to increase the level of company operated assets, and successfully maintained a very strong focus on optimising our operations and reducing costs. This resulted in an impressive improvement in well performance combined with a top tier cost structure.\n\nThrough our operated development program, we ended 2014 with record production of 9,434 barrels of oil equivalent per day (BOEPD) compared with an exit rate of 5,028 BOEPD in December 2013 and an average annual production of 6,635 BOEPD compared to 3,015 BOEPD in 2013. During 2014 we drilled and completed 42.7 net wells, primarily in the Eagle Ford, bringing our total well count to 81.3 by 31 December 2014. High value oil comprised approximately 69 percent of our total 2014 annual production and production from Sundance-operated projects accounted for 89 percent of total production for the year.\n\nCorresponding with the growth in annual production, the Company's full year revenues increased to $159.8 million and Adjusted EBITDAX increased to $126.4 million.\n\nThe Company's development program also generated significant growth in Constant Case reserves during the year. More details are contained elsewhere in this Annual Report, but in summary our 1P Reserves at the end of 2014 were 26.0 MBOE, 2P Reserves 54.1 MBOE, and 3P Reserves 147.7 MBOE. This compares with Reserves of 20.7 MBOE, 34.6 MBOE, and 92.8 MBOE, respectively, at the end of 2013.\n\nIn the current price environment, we have elected to scale back our drilling program to mainly concentrate on limited drilling obligations to hold Eagle Ford acreage. This will enable us to maintain our low leverage profile, which was approximately 1.03x debt to Adjusted EBITDAX at year end, and focus on growing our drilling inventory in an environment with less competition for leases and small acquisitions. Liquidity was $84 million at year end, with a borrowing base redetermination in 2015 expected to materially increase debt availability if the use of such funds is justified in line with our strategy .\n\n## The Eagle Ford - driving value and production growth\n\nSundance has grown its Eagle Ford acreage position from ~7,200 acres upon entering the basin to approximately 26,160 net mineral acres in the Eagle Ford at the end of 2014 which includes the acquisition of approximately 18,000 net acreage in 2014. By the end of the first quarter 2015 this had grown to 38,701 net mineral acres. Our growing presence in this prolific oil and gas region has been driving significant value for the Company and our shareholders, and continues to form our priority focus for development and acreage growth in the coming years.", + "recall": 0.9808306709265175, + "true_md": "CHAIRMAN’S LETTER\n\nI am pleased to present Sundance Energy Australia Limited’s Annual Report for the 12 months ended 31 December 2014. It has been another year of significant progress for Sundance across our portfolio of liquids rich oil and gas assets in the US.\n\nThe Company’s strategic focus on growing production, cash flows and reserves from large, repeatable resource plays in North America continues to deliver positive results with growth in production, cash flows, and reserves.\n\nDuring late 2013 and 2014, we completed the divestment of our interest in the Williston Basin in North Dakota for $51 million which realised an internal rate of return of 45 percent; and also opportunistically divested our interest in the Denver-Julesburg Basin in Colorado for $114 million which realised an internal rate of return of 104 percent. These divestitures of smaller, less scalable positions enabled us to focus on developing and growing our assets in the Eagle Ford in Texas and our Mississippian/Woodford assets in Oklahoma.\n\nDespite the reduction in crude oil and liquids prices towards the end of the year and continuing into 2015, the operational performance and focused, value-adding transactions during the past year have positioned the Company very favourably for future growth in net asset value and shareholder returns. \n\nIn line with our strategy we continued to increase the level of company operated assets, and successfully maintained a very strong focus on optimising our operations and reducing costs. This resulted in an impressive improvement in well performance combined with a top tier cost structure. \n\nThrough our operated development program, we ended 2014 with record production of 9,434 barrels of oil equivalent per day (BOEPD) compared with an exit rate of 5,028 BOEPD in December 2013 and an average annual production of 6,635 BOEPD compared to 3,015 BOEPD in 2013. During 2014 we drilled and completed 42.7 net wells, primarily in the Eagle Ford, bringing our total well count to 81.3 by 31 December 2014. High value oil comprised approximately 69 percent of our total 2014 annual production and production from Sundance-operated projects accounted for 89 percent of total production for the year.\n\nCorresponding with the growth in annual production, the Company’s full year revenues increased to $159.8 million and Adjusted EBITDAX increased to $126.4 million. \n\nThe Company’s development program also generated significant growth in Constant Case reserves during the year. More details are contained elsewhere in this Annual Report, but in summary our 1P Reserves at the end of 2014 were 26.0 MBOE, 2P Reserves 54.1 MBOE, and 3P Reserves 147.7 MBOE. This compares with Reserves of 20.7 MBOE, 34.6 MBOE, and 92.8 MBOE, respectively, at the end of 2013.\n\nIn the current price environment, we have elected to scale back our drilling program to mainly concentrate on limited drilling obligations to hold Eagle Ford acreage. This will enable us to maintain our low leverage profile, which was approximately 1.03x debt to Adjusted EBITDAX at year end, and focus on growing our drilling inventory in an environ- ment with less competition for leases and small acquisitions. Liquidity was $84 million at year end, with a borrowing base redetermination in 2015 expected to materially increase debt availability if the use of such funds is justified in line with our strategy.\n\nSundance has grown its Eagle Ford acreage position from ~7,200 acres upon entering the basin to approximately 26,160 net mineral acres in the Eagle Ford at the end of 2014 which includes the acquisition of approximately 18,000 net acreage in 2014. By the end of the first quarter 2015 this had grown to 38,701 net mineral acres. Our growing presence in this prolific oil and gas region has been driving significant value for the Company and our shareholders, and continues to form our priority focus for development and acreage growth in the coming years.\n\nDespite the reduction in crude oil and liquids prices towards the end of the year and continuing into 2015, the opertional performance and focused, value-adding transactions during the past year have positioned the Company very favourably for future growth in net asset value and shareholder returns.\n\n## A year of growing production, cash flow and reserves\n\n## The Eagle Ford – driving value and production growth\n\n## Dear Fellow Shareholders,\n\n2" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8500110409661612, + "doc_id": "555613f1185e493f53a67ead19a3c50f48a0a40464ab26efdfe09091cb013fa9", + "edit_distance": 0.5251572327044025, + "f1_score": 0.9626168224299065, + "meteor": 0.8529693702775207, + "precision": 0.9716981132075472, + "pred_md": "investments by the equity method in the consolidated statements of income.\n\n- 3. Acquisition cost of the acquired company\n\n- 4. Difference between acquisition cost of the acquired company and total acquisition cost of individual transactions leading to acquisition\n\n- 5. Goodwill, reason for recognizing goodwill, amortization method and amortization period\n- (1) Amount of goodwill ¥9,671 million ($116 million)\n\n(2) Reason for recognizing goodwill MFG accounted for the difference between the acquisition S cost and the equivalent amount of SMFG's interests in Cedyna as goodwill.\n\n(3) Method and term to amortize goodwill Straight-line method over 20 years\n\n6. Amounts of assets and liabilities acquired on the day of the business combination\n\n(1) Assets\n\n## (2) Liabilities\n\n7. Approximate amounts of impact on the consolidated statements of income for the fiscal year ended March 31, 2011, assuming that the business combinations had been completed on the commencement date of the fiscal year\n\n(1) The difference between the ordinary income and other income data estimated, assuming that the business combinations had\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nSMFG\n\nbeen completed on the commencement date of the fiscal year and the actual ordinary income and other income data that are recorded in the consolidated statements of income is as follows:\n\nNote: Ordinary income is presented as a counterpart of sales of companies in other industries.\n\n- (2) Calculation method of the approximate amounts and material assumptions\n\nThe approximate amounts were calculated retroactively to the commencement date of the fiscal year based on the amounts stated in Cedyna and its consolidated subsidiaries' statements of income for the period from April 1, 2010 to June 30, 2010, including the amount of amortization of goodwill for the same period and are different from results of operation if the business combination had been completed on the commencement date of the fiscal year.\n\nThe information mentioned above has not been audited by KPMG AZSA LLC.\n\nFiscal year ended March 31, 2010\n\n<Purchase method>\n\nA merger of subsidiary bank\n\nKansai Urban Banking Corporation ('KUBC'), a consolidated subsidiary of SMFG, merged with The Biwako Bank, Limited ('Biwako Bank') on March 1, 2010. The outline of the merger is as follows:\n\n- 1. Outline of the business combination\n- (1) Name of the acquired company and its business Biwako Bank (Banking business)\n- (2) Reason for the business combination KUBC and Biwako Bank merged in order to become a regional bank with top-level financial soundness and a broad operating base in the Kansai area with a view to realizing a more stable operation as a regional financial institution.\n- (3) Date of the business combination March 1, 2010\n\n(4) Legal form of business combination The merger was a merger by absorption with KUBC as the surviving company. (Name of the new company: Kansai Urban Banking Corporation)\n\n(5) Name of the controlling entity after the business combination Sumitomo Mitsui Financial Group, Inc.\n\n(6) Percentage share of voting rights SMFG has acquired 56%\n\n2. Period of the acquired company's financial results included in the consolidated financial statements\n\nFrom March 1, 2010 to March 31, 2010\n\n- 3. Acquisition cost of the acquired company\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n131", + "recall": 0.9537037037037037, + "true_md": "SMFG Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\ninvestments by the equity method in the consolidated statements of income.\n\n- 3. Acquisition cost of the acquired company\n\n- 4. Difference between acquisition cost of the acquired company and total acquisition cost of individual transactions leading to acquisition\n\n- 5. Goodwill, reason for recognizing goodwill, amortization method and amortization period\n\n- 6. Amounts of assets and liabilities acquired on the day of the busi- ness combination\n\n- 7. Approximate amounts of impact on the consolidated statements of income for the fiscal year ended March 31, 2011, assuming that the business combinations had been completed on the commence- ment date of the fiscal year\n\n- (1) The difference between the ordinary income and other income data estimated, assuming that the business combinations had \n\n- (2) Calculation method of the approximate amounts and material assumptions\n\n- 1. Outline of the business combination\n\n- 2. Period of the acquired company’s financial results included in the consolidated financial statements\n\n- 3. Acquisition cost of the acquired company\n\nSMFG 2011 131\n\nbeen completed on the commencement date of the fiscal year and the actual ordinary income and other income data that are recorded in the consolidated statements of income is as follows:\n\nNote: Ordinary income is presented as a counterpart of sales of companies in other industries.\n\n The approximate amounts were calculated retroactively to the commencement date of the fiscal year based on the amounts stated in Cedyna and its consolidated subsidiaries’ statements of income for the period from April 1, 2010 to June 30, 2010, including the amount of amortization of goodwill for the same period and are different from results of operation if the business combination had been completed on the commencement date of the fiscal year.\n\nThe information mentioned above has not been audited by KPMG AZSA LLC.\n\nFiscal year ended March 31, 2010\n\n<Purchase method>\n\nA merger of subsidiary bank\n\nKansai Urban Banking Corporation (“KUBC”), a consolidated sub- sidiary of SMFG, merged with The Biwako Bank, Limited (“Biwako Bank”) on March 1, 2010. The outline of the merger is as follows:\n\nBiwako Bank (Banking business)\n\nKUBC and Biwako Bank merged in order to become a regional bank with top-level financial soundness and a broad operating base in the Kansai area with a view to realizing a more stable operation as a regional financial institution.\n\nMarch 1, 2010\n\nThe merger was a merger by absorption with KUBC as the surviving company. (Name of the new company: Kansai Urban Banking Corporation)\n\nSumitomo Mitsui Financial Group, Inc.\n\n56%\n\nFrom March 1, 2010 to March 31, 2010\n\n## (1) Name of the acquired company and its business\n\n## (2) Reason for the business combination\n\n## (3) Date of the business combination\n\n## (4) Legal form of business combination\n\n## (5) Name of the controlling entity after the business combination\n\n## (6) Percentage share of voting rights SMFG has acquired\n\n## (1) Assets\n\n## (2) Liabilities\n\n## (1) Amount of goodwill\n\n## (2) Reason for recognizing goodwill\n\n## (3) Method and term to amortize goodwill\n\n¥9,671 million ($116 million)\n\n SMFG accounted for the difference between the acquisition cost and the equivalent amount of SMFG’s interests in Cedyna as goodwill.\n\nStraight-line method over 20 years" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9424914476701831, + "doc_id": "142cd45e12db5bfa36244821e8d9834652a42da55b4d40f5371d4280304e69b1", + "edit_distance": 0.15706806282722513, + "f1_score": 0.9799498746867169, + "meteor": 0.9727589058003201, + "precision": 0.9848866498740554, + "pred_md": "Jeff Fisher Senior Vice President - Production\n\nJeff Fisher Senior Vice President - Production\n\n2010 ANNUAL REPORT |\n\n21\n\n## What advantages does CHK's unique vertical integration strategy provide?\n\nChesapeake has built a large inventory of low-risk natural gas and liquids-rich plays that we plan to develop aggressively over the next two decades. As a result, we know that our company will consistently utilize a tremendous (and growing) amount of oilfield services for this resource development. This high level of planned drilling activity will create value for the provider of oilfield services, and Chesapeake's strategy is to capture a portion of this value for our shareholders rather than transfer it to third-party vendors whose interests and investments are not always aligned with ours. To date, Chesapeake has invested in drilling rigs, rental tools, water management equipment, trucking, compression equipment, midstream services, and most recently pressure pumping and fracture stimulation equipment. Chesapeake's activities require a high level of planning and project coordination that is best accomplished through vertical integration and ownership of the oilfield services we utilize. This approach creates a multitude of cost savings, an alignment of interests, operational synergies, greater capacity of equipment, increased safety and better coordinated logistics. In addition, Chesapeake's control of a large portion of the oilfield service equipment it utilizes provides a unique advantage to control the timing of leasehold development. Simply put, faster development of resources maximizes the present value of leasehold. This has been a key advantage for\n\nChesapeake over the past three years as the company has monetized leasehold investments at premium values through our joint ventures.\n\n## Will U.S. natural gas prices reconnect with world natural gas prices?\n\nNatural gas is a premium product and a cleaner-burning fuel than coal or oil-related products, including gasoline, diesel and heating oil. Despite this fact, over the past two years natural gas has received a low price in the U.S. market relative to coal and oil-related products, primarily as a result of a temporary surplus of production. This surplus has been principally caused by high levels of drilling activity as producers focused on holding by produc tion (HBP) leasehold in new highly productive, low cost natural gas shale plays. In essence, producers reinvented U.S. supply ahead of reinventing of U.S. demand. We believe HBP-incentivized drilling on natural gas plays will largely come to an end in 2012, and U.S. demand will soon also be reinvented to allow U.S. natural gas prices to reconnect to price parity with world natural gas prices that have risen to more than double U.S. natural gas prices.\n\nThis surge in world natural gas prices has been in response to $100+ oil prices and surging global liquefied natural gas (LNG) demand. In our view, the arbitrage in value between competing fuels is simply too wide. Capital and ideas will flow toward projects that make the most of this price disparity. Chesapeake and other companies are working to create the ability to export natural gas from the U.S. Gulf Coast and other regions in the form of LNG to premium Pacific Rim, European and South American markets, perhaps as soon as 2015. This initiative will also be aided by the widening of the Panama Canal to accommodate large LNG vessels. Furthermore, we believe that the\n\nJeff Mobley Senior Vice President -\n\nJeff Mobley Senior Vice President -\n\nInvestor Relations and Research\n\ncurrent price disparity between natural gas and oil will increasingly lead to greater use of natural gas in the U.S. transportation system. Whether it be compressed natural gas (CNG) for medium and light-duty vehicles, LNG for heavy-duty vehicles or the commercialization of gas-to-liquids (GTL) natural gas refineries that supplement the U.S. liquid fuel supply stream, we believe that the marketplace will increasingly utilize and embrace natural gas. Chesapeake is working with industry, public policymakers and potential partners on each of these demand reinvention opportunities. Natural gas is clean, affordable, abundant and American. Why shouldn't it trade at a BTU premium in the years ahead?\n\nNick Dell'Osso\n\nNick Dell'Osso\n\nExecutive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer\n\n## Why is an investment grade rating on its debt securities important to CHK?\n\nWe believe that Chesapeake will benefit in multiple ways from an investment grade rating on our debt securities, which we hope to achieve in 2012 or 2013. First, a higher rating would obviously lower the company's borrowing costs over time. In addition, other less easily quantifiable benefits will also accrue to Chesapeake. Higher debt ratings would result in lower costs on long-term firm transportation contracts that we enter into in order to market our natural gas and oil production as well as facilitate our ability to enter into long-term contracts to sell our natural gas production to international buyers in the form of LNG. An improved rating will also enhance Chesapeake's ability to further attract world-class energy companies to participate in our joint venture projects, which profitably monetize a portion of our leasehold investments and also accelerate the development of our resource base. Finally, and perhaps most importantly, we believe that reduced financial leverage and an invest ment grade rating will lead to a higher stock price and provide further interest from worldwide equity investors.", + "recall": 0.9750623441396509, + "true_md": "2010 ANNUAL REPORT | 21\n\n## What advantages does CHK’s unique vertical integration strategy provide?\n\n## Will U.S. natural gas prices reconnect with world natural gas prices?\n\n## Why is an investment grade rating on its debt securities important to CHK?\n\nChesapeake has built a large inventory of low-risk natural gas and liquids-rich plays that we plan to develop aggressively over the next two decades. As a result, we know that our company will consistently utilize a tremen- dous (and growing) amount of oilfield services for this resource development. This high level of planned drilling activity will create value for the provider of oilfield services, and Chesapeake’s strategy is to capture a portion of this value for our shareholders rather than transfer it to third-party vendors whose interests and investments are not always aligned with ours. To date, Chesapeake has invested in drilling rigs, rental tools, water manage- ment equipment, trucking, compression equipment, midstream services, and most recently pressure pumping and fracture stimulation equipment. Chesapeake’s activities require a high level of planning and project coordination that is best accomplished through vertical integration and ownership of the oilfield services we utilize. This approach creates a multitude of cost savings, an alignment of interests, operational synergies, greater capacity of equipment, increased safety and better coordinated logistics. In addition, Chesapeake’s control of a large portion of the oilfield service equipment it utilizes provides a unique advantage to control the timing of leasehold development. Simply put, faster development of resources maximizes the present value of leasehold. This has been a key advantage for \n\nChesapeake over the past three years as the company has monetized leasehold investments at premium values through our joint ventures. \n\nNatural gas is a premium product and a cleaner-burning fuel than coal or oil-related products, including gasoline, diesel and heating oil. Despite this fact, over the past two years natural gas has received a low price in the U.S. market relative to coal and oil-related products, primarily as a result of a temporary surplus of production. This surplus has been principally caused by high levels of drilling activity as producers focused on holding by produc - tion (HBP) leasehold in new highly productive, low cost natural gas shale plays. In essence, producers reinvented U.S. supply ahead of reinventing of U.S. demand. We believe HBP-incentivized drilling on natural gas plays will largely come to an end in 2012, and U.S. demand will soon also be reinvented to allow U.S. natural gas prices to reconnect to price parity with world natural gas prices that have risen to more than double U.S. natural gas prices. \n\nThis surge in world natural gas prices has been in response to $100+ oil prices and surging global liquefied natural gas (LNG) demand. In our view, the arbitrage in value between competing fuels is simply too wide. Capital and ideas will flow toward projects that make the most of this price disparity. Chesapeake and other companies are working to create the ability to export natural gas from the U.S. Gulf Coast and other regions in the form of LNG to premium Pacific Rim, European and South American markets, perhaps as soon as 2015. This initiative will also be aided by the widening of the Panama Canal to accommodate large LNG vessels. Furthermore, we believe that the \n\ncurrent price disparity between natural gas and oil will increasingly lead to greater use of natural gas in the U.S. transportation system. Whether it be compressed natural gas (CNG) for medium and light-duty vehicles, LNG for heavy-duty vehicles or the commercialization of gas-to-liquids (GTL) natural gas refineries that supplement the U.S. liquid fuel supply stream, we believe that the marketplace will increasingly utilize and embrace natural gas. Chesapeake is working with industry, public policymakers and potential partners on each of these demand reinvention opportunities. Natural gas is clean, affordable, abundant and American. Why shouldn’t it trade at a BTU premium in the years ahead?\n\nWe believe that Chesapeake will benefit in multiple ways from an investment grade rating on our debt securities, which we hope to achieve in 2012 or 2013. First, a higher rating would obviously lower the company’s borrowing costs over time. In addition, other less easily quantifiable benefits will also accrue to Chesapeake. Higher debt ratings would result in lower costs on long-term firm transportation contracts that we enter into in order to market our natural gas and oil production as well as facilitate our ability to enter into long-term contracts to sell our natural gas production to international buyers in the form of LNG. An improved rating will also enhance Chesapeake’s ability to further attract world-class energy companies to participate in our joint venture projects, which profitably monetize a portion of our leasehold investments and also accelerate the development of our resource base. Finally, and perhaps most importantly, we believe that reduced financial leverage and an invest - ment grade rating will lead to a higher stock price and provide further interest from worldwide equity investors.\n\nNick Dell’Osso Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer\n\nJeff Fisher Senior Vice President – Production\n\nJeff Mobley Senior Vice President – Investor Relations and Research" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9656878488821722, + "doc_id": "5c12d26ef866aa6585b3c4259418ceb328d3505beb8b0b53f4f0da7aac0ef3c9", + "edit_distance": 0.5594817432273262, + "f1_score": 0.9867109634551495, + "meteor": 0.8655218103465178, + "precision": 0.99, + "pred_md": "MANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS\n\nNetwork revenue was higher this year compared to last year. This was the net effect of:\n\n- GLYPH<129> higher data revenue related to an increase in subscriber levels and higher usage of wireless data services\n- GLYPH<129> partially offset by our introduction of new lower priced US and international roaming plans and rates which offer consumers more value, and\n- GLYPH<129> the continued adoption of customer friendly simplified plans, which often bundle in certain features like voicemail, caller ID and long distance that we have charged for separately in the past.\n\nExcluding the decline in US and international roaming revenue this year, network revenue would have increased 1 % .\n\nData revenue was 17 % higher this year mainly because of the continued penetration and growing use of smartphones, tablet devices and wireless laptops, which increased the use of e-mail, wireless, Internet access, text messaging and other wireless data services. Data revenue represented approximately 47 % of total network revenue this year, compared to approximately 41 % last year.\n\nPostpaid churn was 1.24 % this year, compared to 1.29 % in 2012. The lower churn rate is partly attributable to the new simplified plans and the roaming plans we introduced.\n\nGross postpaid subscriber additions were 1.4 million this year, or 3 % lower than last year, which reduced net postpaid subscriber additions to 228,000, despite a lower postpaid churn. We believe the industry transition from three year to two year plans resulting from the recent adoption of the Canadian Radio-television and Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) Wireless Code may have slowed our overall wireless subscriber growth from the second half of the year. See 'Regulation in Our Industry' for more information on the Wireless Code.\n\nWe activated and upgraded approximately 2.7 million smartphones this year, compared to approximately 2.9 million in 2012. Approximately 34 % of these were for new subscribers. The decrease was mainly because there was a 10 % reduction in hardware upgrades by existing subscribers during the year, which we also believe is at least partly due to the move from three to two year contracts and the associated pricing changes.\n\nThe percentage of subscribers with smartphones increased to 75 % of our overall postpaid subscriber base, compared to 69 % at the end of 2012. Smartphone subscribers typically generate significantly higher ARPU and are less likely to churn.\n\nThe decrease in prepaid subscriber net additions was mainly because of increasing competition at the lower end of the wireless market where prepaid products are mainly sold.\n\nBlended ARPU was down slightly this year compared to last year because the voice component declined at a faster rate than the data component increased.\n\n40\n\nROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n## Lower Equipment Sales\n\nEquipment sales (net of subsidies) include revenue from sales to:\n\n- GLYPH<129> independent dealers, agents and retailers\n- GLYPH<129> directly to subscribers through fulfillment by Wireless' customer service groups, websites, telesales and corporate stores.\n\nRevenue from equipment sales was lower this year, mainly because fewer existing subscribers upgraded their devices and there were fewer gross activations.\n\n## Lower Operating Expenses\n\nWe assess operating expenses in two categories:\n\n- GLYPH<129> the cost of wireless handsets and equipment\n- GLYPH<129> all other expenses involved in day-to-day operations, to service existing subscriber relationships and attract new subscribers.\n\nThe cost of equipment was $50 million lower than last year, or 3 % , mainly because fewer existing subscribers upgraded hardware and fewer new customers were added during the year as discussed above. We activated and upgraded fewer devices compared to 2012.\n\nTotal customer retention spending (including subsidies on handset upgrades) was $939 million, 0.3 % lower than last year. The reduction was mainly because fewer existing subscribers upgraded their hardware as discussed above, which we partially attribute to the recent shift to two year contracts.\n\nOther operating expenses (excluding retention spending), were down slightly from 2012, due to a continued focus on cost productivity initiatives we are implementing across various functions.\n\n## Higher Adjusted Operating Profit\n\nAdjusted operating profit was 3 % higher this year compared to last year because of continued growth of wireless data, our improvements in cost management and efficiency and lower volumes of hardware sales and upgrades. Adjusted operating profit margin as a percentage of network revenue increased this year to 46.8 % from 45.6 % in 2012.", + "recall": 0.9834437086092715, + "true_md": "MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS\n\nNetwork revenue was higher this year compared to last year. This was the net effect of:\n\nExcluding the decline in US and international roaming revenue this year, network revenue would have increased 1 % .\n\nData revenue was 17 % higher this year mainly because of the continued penetration and growing use of smartphones, tablet devices and wireless laptops, which increased the use of e-mail, wireless, Internet access, text messaging and other wireless data services. Data revenue represented approximately 47 % of total network revenue this year, compared to approximately 41 % last year.\n\nPostpaid churn was 1.24 % this year, compared to 1.29 % in 2012. The lower churn rate is partly attributable to the new simplified plans and the roaming plans we introduced.\n\nGross postpaid subscriber additions were 1.4 million this year, or 3 % lower than last year, which reduced net postpaid subscriber additions to 228,000, despite a lower postpaid churn. We believe the industry transition from three year to two year plans resulting from the recent adoption of the Canadian Radio-television and Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) Wireless Code may have slowed our overall wireless subscriber growth from the second half of the year. See “Regulation in Our Industry” for more information on the Wireless Code.\n\nWe activated and upgraded approximately 2.7 million smartphones this year, compared to approximately 2.9 million in 2012. Approximately 34 % of these were for new subscribers. The decrease was mainly because there was a 10 % reduction in hardware upgrades by existing subscribers during the year, which we also believe is at least partly due to the move from three to two year contracts and the associated pricing changes.\n\nThe percentage of subscribers with smartphones increased to 75 % of our overall postpaid subscriber base, compared to 69 % at the end of 2012. Smartphone subscribers typically generate significantly higher ARPU and are less likely to churn.\n\nThe decrease in prepaid subscriber net additions was mainly because of increasing competition at the lower end of the wireless market where prepaid products are mainly sold.\n\nBlended ARPU was down slightly this year compared to last year because the voice component declined at a faster rate than the data component increased.\n\nEquipment sales (net of subsidies) include revenue from sales to:\n\nRevenue from equipment sales was lower this year, mainly because fewer existing subscribers upgraded their devices and there were fewer gross activations.\n\nWe assess operating expenses in two categories:\n\nOther operating expenses (excluding retention spending), were down slightly from 2012, due to a continued focus on cost productivity initiatives we are implementing across various functions.\n\nAdjusted operating profit was 3 % higher this year compared to last year because of continued growth of wireless data, our improvements in cost management and efficiency and lower volumes of hardware sales and upgrades. Adjusted operating profit margin as a percentage of network revenue increased this year to 46.8 % from 45.6 % in 2012.\n\n## Higher Adjusted Operating Profit\n\n## Lower Operating Expenses\n\n## Lower Equipment Sales\n\n40 ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n- GLYPH<129> higher data revenue related to an increase in subscriber levels and higher usage of wireless data services\n\n- GLYPH<129> partially offset by our introduction of new lower priced US and international roaming plans and rates which offer consumers more value, and\n\n- GLYPH<129> the continued adoption of customer friendly simplified plans, which often bundle in certain features like voicemail, caller ID and long distance that we have charged for separately in the past.\n\n- GLYPH<129> the cost of wireless handsets and equipment\n\n- GLYPH<129> all other expenses involved in day-to-day operations, to service existing subscriber relationships and attract new subscribers.\n\n- GLYPH<129> independent dealers, agents and retailers\n\n- GLYPH<129> directly to subscribers through fulfillment by Wireless’ customer service groups, websites, telesales and corporate stores.\n\nThe cost of equipment was $50 million lower than last year, or 3 % , mainly because fewer existing subscribers upgraded hardware and fewer new customers were added during the year as discussed above. We activated and upgraded fewer devices compared to 2012.\n\nTotal customer retention spending (including subsidies on handset upgrades) was $939 million, 0.3 % lower than last year. The reduction was mainly because fewer existing subscribers upgraded their hardware as discussed above, which we partially attribute to the recent shift to two year contracts." + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "95a3378f853f79c4aa5e8ddaf563fa399af7463b41550101d05d75abe9d5fcca", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9996243425995492, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## 2013 performance summary\n\nrichmond Hill, london, ontario", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## 2013 performance summary\n\nrichmond Hill, london, ontario" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9029528355268843, + "doc_id": "0d7083be43c1b1503c505b7ef77cb4a0e97555ce413e847b6c2eae18dab94cb4", + "edit_distance": 0.2767203513909224, + "f1_score": 0.9500924214417746, + "meteor": 0.9146284168950192, + "precision": 0.9589552238805971, + "pred_md": "## (c) Disclosure of Problem Assets\n\nProblem assets are loans and other claims of which recovery of either principal or interest appears doubtful, and are disclosed in accordance with the Banking Act (in which they are referred to as 'risk-monitored loans') and the Financial Reconstruction Law (where they are referred to as 'problem assets'). Problem assets are classified based on the borrower categories assigned during selfassessment. For detailed information on results of self-assessments, asset write-offs and provisions, and disclosure of problem assets at March 31, 2011, please refer to page 170.\n\n## 4. Risk Management of Marketable Credit Transactions\n\nFinancial products, such as investments in funds, securitized products, and credit derivatives, that bear indirect risk arising from underlying assets such as bonds and loan obligations, are considered to be exposed to both credit risk from the underlying assets as well as 'market risk' and 'liquidity risk' that arise from their trading as financial products. This is referred to as marketable credit risk.\n\nFor these types of products, we manage credit risk using the methods of analysis and assessment in detail of characteristics of underlying assets, but, for the sake of complete risk management, we also apply the methods for management of market and liquidity risks.\n\nIn addition, we have established guidelines based on the characteristics of these types of risk and appropriately manage the risk of losses.\n\n## Market and Liquidity Risks\n\n## 1. Basic Approach to Market and Liquidity Risk Management\n\n## (1) Definitions of Market and Liquidity Risks\n\nMarket risk is the possibility that fluctuations in interest rates, foreign exchange rates, stock prices, or other market prices will change the market value of financial products, leading to a loss.\n\nLiquidity risk is the risk that there may be difficulties in raising funds needed for settlements, as a result of the mismatching of uses of funds and sources of funds or unexpected outflows of funds, which may make it necessary to raise funds at higher rates than normal levels.\n\n## (2) Fundamental Principles for Market and Liquidity Risk Management\n\nSMFG is working to further enhance the effectiveness of its quantitative management of market and liquidity risks across the entire Group by setting allowable risk limits; ensuring the transparency of the risk management process; clearly separating front-office, middle-office and back-office operations; and establishing a highly efficient system of mutual checks and balances.\n\n## 2. Market and Liquidity Risk Management System\n\nOn the basis of SMFG's Groupwide basic policies for risk management, SMBC's Board of Directors authorizes important matters relating to the management of market and liquidity risks, such as basic policies and risk limits, which are decided by the Management Committee. Additionally, at SMBC, the Corporate Risk Management Department, which is the planning department of the Risk Management Unit, an independent of the business units that directly handle market transactions, manages market and liquidity risks in an integrated manner. The Corporate Risk Management Department not only monitors the current risk situations, but also reports regularly to the Management Committee and the Board of Directors. Furthermore, SMBC's ALM Committee meets on a monthly basis to examine reports on the state of observance of SMBC's limits on market and liquidity risks, and to review and discuss the SMBC's ALM operation.\n\nTo prevent unforeseen processing errors as well as fraudulent transactions, it is important to establish a system of checks on the business units (front office). At SMBC, both the processing\n\n## ■ SMBC's Market Risk and Liquidity Risk Management System\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n39", + "recall": 0.9413919413919414, + "true_md": "## (c) Disclosure of Problem Assets\n\n## 2. Market and Liquidity Risk Management System\n\n## 4. Risk Management of Marketable Credit Transactions\n\n## Market and Liquidity Risks\n\n## 1. Basic Approach to Market and Liquidity Risk Management\n\n## (1) Definitions of Market and Liquidity Risks\n\n## (2) Fundamental Principles for Market and Liquidity Risk Management\n\n## ■ SMBC’s Market Risk and Liquidity Risk Management System\n\nSMFG 2011 39\n\nProblem assets are loans and other claims of which recovery of either principal or interest appears doubtful, and are disclosed in accordance with the Banking Act (in which they are referred to as “risk-monitored loans”) and the Financial Reconstruction Law (where they are referred to as “problem assets”). Problem assets are classified based on the borrower categories assigned during self- assessment. For detailed information on results of self-assessments, asset write-offs and provisions, and disclosure of problem assets at March 31, 2011, please refer to page 170.\n\nFinancial products, such as investments in funds, securitized products, and credit derivatives, that bear indirect risk arising from underlying assets such as bonds and loan obligations, are consid- ered to be exposed to both credit risk from the underlying assets as well as “market risk” and “liquidity risk” that arise from their trading as financial products. This is referred to as marketable credit risk.\n\nFor these types of products, we manage credit risk using the methods of analysis and assessment in detail of characteristics of underlying assets, but, for the sake of complete risk management, we also apply the methods for management of market and liquidity risks.\n\nIn addition, we have established guidelines based on the char- acteristics of these types of risk and appropriately manage the risk of losses.\n\nMarket risk is the possibility that fluctuations in interest rates, foreign exchange rates, stock prices, or other market prices will change the market value of financial products, leading to a loss. \n\nLiquidity risk is the risk that there may be difficulties in raising funds needed for settlements, as a result of the mismatching of uses of funds and sources of funds or unexpected outflows of funds, which may make it necessary to raise funds at higher rates than normal levels.\n\nSMFG is working to further enhance the effectiveness of its quan- titative management of market and liquidity risks across the entire Group by setting allowable risk limits; ensuring the transparency of the risk management process; clearly separating front-office, middle-office and back-office operations; and establishing a highly efficient system of mutual checks and balances.\n\nOn the basis of SMFG’s Groupwide basic policies for risk management, SMBC’s Board of Directors authorizes important matters relating to the management of market and liquidity risks, such as basic policies and risk limits, which are decided by the Management Committee. Additionally, at SMBC, the Corporate Risk Management Department, which is the planning department of the Risk Management Unit, an independent of the business units that directly handle market transactions, manages market and liquidity risks in an integrated manner. The Corporate Risk Management Department not only monitors the current risk situations, but also reports regularly to the Management Committee and the Board of Directors. Furthermore, SMBC’s ALM Committee meets on a monthly basis to examine reports on the state of observance of SMBC’s limits on market and liquidity risks, and to review and dis- cuss the SMBC’s ALM operation. \n\nTo prevent unforeseen processing errors as well as fraudu- lent transactions, it is important to establish a system of checks on the business units (front office). At SMBC, both the processing" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9450354864600776, + "doc_id": "5a26880e5f4ece448eeb74ee031fe3578de2334eef3e916e6586ec7488a52d9d", + "edit_distance": 0.11491712707182321, + "f1_score": 0.9907038512616203, + "meteor": 0.9802587886896422, + "precision": 0.9920212765957447, + "pred_md": "## Management's Discussion and Analysis\n\nDollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\n## Environmental Risk\n\nAs an owner of real estate, Killam is subject to federal, provincial and municipal environmental regulations. These regulations may require the Company to fund the costs of removal and remediation of certain hazardous substances on its properties or releases from its properties. The failure to remediate such properties, if any, could adversely affect the Company's ability to borrow using the property as collateral or to sell the real estate. Killam is not aware of any material non-compliance with environmental laws at any of its properties. The Company has made, and will continue to make, the necessary capital expenditures to comply with environmental laws and regulations. Environmental laws and regulations can change rapidly, and the Company may be subject to more stringent environmental laws and regulations in the future. The Company mitigates its risk of losses associated with oil tank leaks by enforcing the requirement for appropriate insurance, performing regular oil tank inspections, and enforcing the removal of oil tanks when homes are sold.\n\n## General Uninsured Losses\n\nKillam carries comprehensive general liability, fire, flood, extended coverage and rental loss insurance with policy specifications, limits and deductibles customarily carried for similar companies. There are, however, certain types of risks (generally of a catastrophic nature) that are either uninsurable or would not be economically insurable.\n\n## Rent Control Risk\n\nRent control exists in some provinces in Canada, limiting the percentage of annual rental increases to existing tenants. Killam is exposed to the risk of the implementation of, or amendments to, existing legislative rent controls in the markets in which it operates, which may have an adverse impact on the Company's operations. In the provinces that Killam currently operates, Prince Edward Island, and Ontario have rent controls. As well, Nova Scotia has rent control for MHCs.\n\n## Utility and Property Tax Risk\n\nKillam is exposed to volatile utility costs and increasing property taxes. Utility expenses, mainly consisting of oil, natural gas, water and electricity charges, have been subject to considerable price fluctuations over the past several years. Killam has the ability to raise rents on the anniversary date of its leases, subject to the overall rental market conditions, to offset rising energy and utility costs, however rental increases may be limited by market conditions. Killam invests in energy efficiency initiatives to reduce its reliance on utility costs; however Killam remains exposed to price volatility. The Company has the ability to fix rates through the use of swap contracts for a portion of its oil and natural gas consumption to reduce the impact of fluctuations in commodity prices. To address the risk of property tax increases, Killam, along with the assistance of outside consultants, reviews property tax assessments and, where warranted, appeals them.\n\n## Taxes\n\nKillam is currently not cash-tax taxable due to its ability to reduce taxable income through unclaimed CCA, and does not expect to be cash taxable for at least the next three to five years. A change in circumstances that could result in the Company paying cash taxes in advance of this estimate may have a negative impact on Killam's liquidity. To mitigate against this risk, Killam is working with tax advisors to identify those issues that may impact a change in the Company's tax situation.\n\n## Dividend Payments\n\nDividend payments may exceed actual cash available from time to time because of items such as mortgage principal repayments, capital requirements, and redemption of shares, if any. The Company may be required to use part of its debt capacity, raise additional equity, or reduce dividends in order to accommodate such items, and there can be no assurance that funds from such sources will be available on favourable terms, or at all.\n\n## Significant Accounting Judgments, Estimates and Assumptions\n\nIn the application of Killam's accounting policies, which are described in Note 2 of the consolidated financial statements, Management is required to make judgments, estimates and assumptions about the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities that are not readily apparent from other sources. The estimates and associated assumptions are based on historical experience and other factors that are considered to be relevant. Actual results may differ from these estimates.\n\nThe judgments, estimates and underlying assumptions are reviewed on an ongoing basis. Revisions to accounting estimates are recognized in the period in which the estimate is revised if the revision affects only that period or in the period of the revision and future periods if the revision affects both current and future periods.\n\n## Judgments Other Than Estimates\n\nIn the process of applying the Company's accounting policies, Management has made the following judgments, which have the most significant effect on the amounts recognized in the consolidated financial statements:\n\n60\n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013", + "recall": 0.9893899204244032, + "true_md": "Management’s Discussion and Analysis Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\nAs an owner of real estate, Killam is subject to federal, provincial and municipal environmental regulations. These regulations may require the Company to fund the costs of removal and remediation of certain hazardous substances on its properties or releases from its properties. The failure to remediate such properties, if any, could adversely affect the Company’s ability to borrow using the property as collateral or to sell the real estate. Killam is not aware of any material non‑compliance with environmental laws at any of its properties. The Company has made, and will continue to make, the necessary capital expenditures to comply with environmental laws and regulations. Environmental laws and regulations can change rapidly, and the Company may be subject to more stringent environmental laws and regulations in the future. The Company mitigates its risk of losses associated with oil tank leaks by enforcing the requirement for appropriate insurance, performing regular oil tank inspections, and enforcing the removal of oil tanks when homes are sold.\n\nKillam carries comprehensive general liability, fire, flood, extended coverage and rental loss insurance with policy specifications, limits and deductibles customarily carried for similar companies. There are, however, certain types of risks (generally of a catastrophic nature) that are either uninsurable or would not be economically insurable.\n\nRent control exists in some provinces in Canada, limiting the percentage of annual rental increases to existing tenants. Killam is exposed to the risk of the implementation of, or amendments to, existing legislative rent controls in the markets in which it operates, which may have an adverse impact on the Company’s operations. In the provinces that Killam currently operates, Prince Edward Island, and Ontario have rent controls. As well, Nova Scotia has rent control for MHCs.\n\nKillam is exposed to volatile utility costs and increasing property taxes. Utility expenses, mainly consisting of oil, natural gas, water and electricity charges, have been subject to considerable price fluctuations over the past several years. Killam has the ability to raise rents on the anniversary date of its leases, subject to the overall rental market conditions, to offset rising energy and utility costs, however rental increases may be limited by market conditions. Killam invests in energy efficiency initiatives to reduce its reliance on utility costs; however Killam remains exposed to price volatility. The Company has the ability to fix rates through the use of swap contracts for a portion of its oil and natural gas consumption to reduce the impact of fluctuations in commodity prices. To address the risk of property tax increases, Killam, along with the assistance of outside consultants, reviews property tax assessments and, where warranted, appeals them.\n\nKillam is currently not cash‑tax taxable due to its ability to reduce taxable income through unclaimed CCA, and does not expect to be cash taxable for at least the next three to five years. A change in circumstances that could result in the Company paying cash taxes in advance of this estimate may have a negative impact on Killam’s liquidity. To mitigate against this risk, Killam is working with tax advisors to identify those issues that may impact a change in the Company’s tax situation.\n\nDividend payments may exceed actual cash available from time to time because of items such as mortgage principal repayments, capital requirements, and redemption of shares, if any. The Company may be required to use part of its debt capacity, raise additional equity, or reduce dividends in order to accommodate such items, and there can be no assurance that funds from such sources will be available on favourable terms, or at all.\n\nIn the application of Killam’s accounting policies, which are described in Note 2 of the consolidated financial statements, Management is required to make judgments, estimates and assumptions about the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities that are not readily apparent from other sources. The estimates and associated assumptions are based on historical experience and other factors that are considered to be relevant. Actual results may differ from these estimates.\n\nThe judgments, estimates and underlying assumptions are reviewed on an ongoing basis. Revisions to accounting estimates are recognized in the period in which the estimate is revised if the revision affects only that period or in the period of the revision and future periods if the revision affects both current and future periods. \n\nIn the process of applying the Company’s accounting policies, Management has made the following judgments, which have the most significant effect on the amounts recognized in the consolidated financial statements:\n\n## Environmental Risk\n\n## General Uninsured Losses\n\n## Rent Control Risk\n\n## Utility and Property Tax Risk\n\n## Taxes\n\n## Dividend Payments\n\n## Significant Accounting Judgments, Estimates and Assumptions\n\n## Judgments Other Than Estimates\n\n60 Killam ProPerties inc | 2013" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9127049618139839, + "doc_id": "72c6ff93aabd71face4315ba71ac3b5c72970732e7d11a1a65e302be1a56758c", + "edit_distance": 0.5225225225225225, + "f1_score": 0.9537223340040242, + "meteor": 0.7569177612001904, + "precision": 0.9634146341463414, + "pred_md": "are discussed. In this way, we realize a highly effective operational risk management framework. The operational risk situation is also reported to the Management Committee and the Board of Directors on a regular basis, for review of the basic policies on operational risk management. Moreover, the bank's independent Internal Audit Department conducts periodic audits to ensure that the operational risk management system is functioning properly.\n\n## 3. Operational Risk Management Methodology\n\nAs previously defined, operational risk covers a wide range of events, including the risk of losses due to errors in operation, system failures, and natural disasters. Also, operational risk events can occur virtually anywhere and everywhere. Thus, it is essential to check whether material operational risks have been overlooked, monitor the overall status of risks, and manage/control them. To this end, it is necessary to be able to quantify risks using a measurement methodology that can be applied to all types of operational risk, and to comprehensively and comparatively capture the status of and changes in potential operational risks of business processes. Also, from the viewpoint of internal control, the measurement methodology used to create a risk mitigation plan must be such that the implementation of the plan quantitatively reduces operational risk.\n\nSMFG and SMBC have received an approval from Japan's Financial Services Agency for the application of the Advanced Measurement Approach (AMA), which is the most sophisticated measurement method out of the three cited methods under Basel II for measurement of operational risk. SMFG and SMBC have adopted the AMA for operational risk management and for calculating operational risk-weighted assets. It has been used for calculating the capital adequacy ratio since March 31, 2008.\n\nWhen using the AMA, regulations require that the internal measurement system (hereinafter, the 'quantification model') must use four data elements (hereinafter, the 'four elements'): namely, internal loss data, external loss data, Business Environment and Internal Control Factors (BEICFs), and scenarios analysis through risk control assessments. In addition, the operational risk equivalent amount (hereinafter, 'required capital') calculated under the AMA must cover the maximum loss comparable to a one-year holding period and a 99.9 percentile confidence interval.\n\nThe basic framework of the AMA quantification model of SMFG and SMBC is outlined in the diagram below. Among the four elements, collected internal loss data and the results of scenarios analysis through risk control assessment are input directly into the quantification model described later in this section to calculate required capital and risk-weighted assets (= required capital divided by 8%). In addition, external loss data and BEICFs are used in verifying the assessment of scenarios, along with internal loss data, to increase objectivity, accuracy, and completeness.\n\nThe specific content, method of collection and use of the four elements are described below. In each group company the same four elements are collected and utilized.\n\n## ■ Basic Framework of Operational Risk Measurement of SMFG and SMBC\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n43", + "recall": 0.9442231075697212, + "true_md": "The basic framework of the AMA quantification model of SMFG and SMBC is outlined in the diagram below. Among the four elements, collected internal loss data and the results of scenarios analysis through risk control assessment are input directly into the quantification model described later in this sec- tion to calculate required capital and risk-weighted assets (= required capital divided by 8%). In addition, external loss data and BEICFs are used in verifying the assessment of scenarios, along with internal loss data, to increase objectivity, accuracy, and completeness.\n\nare discussed. In this way, we realize a highly effective operational risk management framework. The operational risk situation is also reported to the Management Committee and the Board of Directors on a regular basis, for review of the basic policies on operational risk management. Moreover, the bank’s independent Internal Audit Department conducts periodic audits to ensure that the operational risk management system is functioning properly.\n\nThe specific content, method of collection and use of the four elements are described below. In each group company the same four elements are collected and utilized.\n\nAs previously defined, operational risk covers a wide range of events, including the risk of losses due to errors in operation, sys- tem failures, and natural disasters. Also, operational risk events can occur virtually anywhere and everywhere. Thus, it is essential to check whether material operational risks have been overlooked, monitor the overall status of risks, and manage/control them. To this end, it is necessary to be able to quantify risks using a measure- ment methodology that can be applied to all types of operational risk, and to comprehensively and comparatively capture the status of and changes in potential operational risks of business processes. Also, from the viewpoint of internal control, the measurement meth- odology used to create a risk mitigation plan must be such that the implementation of the plan quantitatively reduces operational risk.\n\nSMFG and SMBC have received an approval from Japan’s Financial Services Agency for the application of the Advanced Measurement Approach (AMA), which is the most sophisticated measurement method out of the three cited methods under Basel II for measurement of operational risk. SMFG and SMBC have adopted the AMA for operational risk management and for calculat- ing operational risk-weighted assets. It has been used for calculating the capital adequacy ratio since March 31, 2008.\n\nWhen using the AMA, regulations require that the internal measurement system (hereinafter, the “quantification model”) must use four data elements (hereinafter, the “four elements”): namely, internal loss data, external loss data, Business Environment and Internal Control Factors (BEICFs), and scenarios analysis through risk control assessments. In addition, the operational risk equivalent amount (hereinafter, “required capital”) calculated under the AMA must cover the maximum loss comparable to a one-year holding period and a 99.9 percentile confidence interval.\n\nSMFG 2011 43\n\n## 3. Operational Risk Management Methodology" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "9de25f724141b9100746d3ef5325b8217f37fb7d377dfba4db8ae00260e6f181", + "edit_distance": 0.9090909090909091, + "f1_score": 0.2, + "meteor": 0.1724137931034483, + "precision": 0.125, + "pred_md": "SHAREHOLDER I N F O R M AT I O N", + "recall": 0.5, + "true_md": "SHAREHOLDER INFORMATION" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8255064914838012, + "doc_id": "804de2b30cba203ed5bcab1b7de8fd9828d410f000576950883045546a904c28", + "edit_distance": 0.7664670658682635, + "f1_score": 0.9473684210526315, + "meteor": 0.7413532372592713, + "precision": 0.9473684210526315, + "pred_md": "## notes to the consolidated Financial statements\n\nD\n\nollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except share and per share amounts)\n\n## 25. Financial Risk Management Objectives and Policies (continued)\n\nDuring the year ended December 31, 2013, the Company refinanced $66.7 million of maturing apartment mortgages with new mortgages totaling $96.7 million for net proceeds of $30.0 million. As well, during the year ended December 31, 2013, the Company refinanced $10.7 million of maturing mHc mortgages for net proceeds of $3.2 million.\n\nThe following table presents the contractual maturities of the Company's liabilities over the next five years:\n\n25. (Continued)\n\n## Capital Management\n\nThe primary objective of the Company's capital management is to ensure that it maintains a healthy capital ratio in order to support its business and maximize shareholder value. The Company manages its capital structure and makes adjustments to it in light of changes in economic conditions. To maintain or adjust the capital structure, the Company may adjust the dividend payment to shareholders, issue new shares, issue debt securities or adjust mortgage financing on properties.\n\nThe Company monitors capital using a total debt to total assets ratio. The Company's strategy is to maintain its total debt to total assets ratio between 55-65%. The calculation of the total debt to total assets is summarized as follows:\n\nThe above calculation is sensitive to changes in the fair value of investment properties, in particular, cap-rate changes. A 10 basis point increase in weighted average cap-rate as at December 31, 2013, would increase the debt as a percentage of assets by 80 basis points.\n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013\n\n93", + "recall": 0.9473684210526315, + "true_md": "Killam ProPerties inc | 2013 93\n\nThe above calculation is sensitive to changes in the fair value of investment properties, in particular, cap‑rate changes. A 10 basis point increase in weighted average cap‑rate as at December 31, 2013, would increase the debt as a percentage of assets by 80 basis points.\n\nThe Company monitors capital using a total debt to total assets ratio. The Company’s strategy is to maintain its total debt to total assets ratio between 55‑65%. The calculation of the total debt to total assets is summarized as follows:\n\nThe primary objective of the Company’s capital management is to ensure that it maintains a healthy capital ratio in order to support its business and maximize shareholder value. The Company manages its capital structure and makes adjustments to it in light of changes in economic conditions. To maintain or adjust the capital structure, the Company may adjust the dividend payment to shareholders, issue new shares, issue debt securities or adjust mortgage financing on properties.\n\n## 25. (Continued) Capital Management\n\n## 25. Financial Risk Management Objectives and Policies (continued)\n\nNotes to the Consolidated Financial Statements Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except share and per share amounts)\n\nThe following table presents the contractual maturities of the Company’s liabilities over the next five years:\n\nDuring the year ended December 31, 2013, the Company refinanced $66.7 million of maturing apartment mortgages with new mortgages totaling $96.7 million for net proceeds of $30.0 million. As well, during the year ended December 31, 2013, the Company refinanced $10.7 million of maturing mHc mortgages for net proceeds of $3.2 million.\n\nNotes to the Consolidated Financial Statements Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except share and per share amounts)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8246998330146482, + "doc_id": "47542e64d7246226a1ee9b307e8baafb37547b1e3eef7b7a6866f32fa90c1197", + "edit_distance": 0.917686318131257, + "f1_score": 0.9617834394904459, + "meteor": 0.6500165312496186, + "precision": 0.9556962025316456, + "pred_md": "SMFG\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n- 4. Merger ratio, calculation method, number of shares delivered and valuation\n- (1) Merger ratio\n- (2) Basis for calculation of the merger ratio\n- (a) Common stock\n\nCommon stock\n\nKUBC 1 : Biwako Bank 0.75\n\nPreferred stock (Type 1) KUBC 1 : Biwako Bank 1\n\nPreferred stock (Type 2) KUBC 1 : Biwako Bank 1\n\nIn order to ensure the fairness of the merger ratio, KUBC and Biwako Bank appointed Daiwa Securities Capital Markets Co. Ltd. and The Goldman Sachs Group, Inc., respectively, as their financial advisors and requested them to calculate the merger ratio of common stock. After conducting negotiations and discussions taking into account factors such as their financial conditions, asset quality and future prospects, the analysis of the merger ratio provided by each financial advisor and results of due diligence they carried out on each other, the 2 banks agreed and decided on the above merger ratio of common stock as being appropriate.\n\n- (b) Preferred stocks (Type 1 and Type 2)\n\nMarket prices of preferred stocks (Type 1 and Type 2) issued by Biwako Bank were not available (in contrast to common stock which market price was available). KUBC therefore decided to set the same conditions as those of Biwako Bank's preferred stocks on KUBC's newly-issued preferred stocks, taking the merger ratio of common stock into account.\n\n- (3) Number of shares delivered and value\n\nNumber of shares delivered\n\nCommon stock of KUBC\n\n103,532,913 shares\n\nPreferred stock of KUBC (Type 1)\n\n27,500,000 shares\n\nPreferred stock of KUBC (Type 2)\n\n23,125,000 shares\n\nValue\n\nCommon stock of KUBC\n\n¥12,803 million\n\nPreferred stock of KUBC (Type 1)\n\n¥19,025 million\n\nPreferred stock of KUBC (Type 2)\n\n¥16,500 million\n\n- 5. Goodwill, reason for recognizing goodwill, amortization method and amortization period\n- (1) Amount of goodwill ¥11,056 million\n- (2) Reason for recognizing goodwill SMFG accounted for the difference between the acquisition cost and the equivalent amount of SMFG's interests in Biwako Bank as goodwill.\n- (3) Method and term to amortize goodwill\n\nStraight-line method over 20 years\n\n- 6. Amounts of assets and liabilities acquired on the day of the business combination\n\n## (1) Assets\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n132\n\n## (2) Liabilities\n\n- 7. Approximate amounts of impact on the consolidated statement of operations for the fiscal year ended March 31, 2010, assuming that the business combinations had been completed on the commencement date of the fiscal year\n- (1) The difference between the ordinary income and other income data estimated, assuming that the business combinations had been completed on the commencement date of the fiscal year and the actual ordinary income and other income data that are recorded in the consolidated statement of income is as follows:\n\nNote: Ordinary income is presented as counterparts of sales of companies in other industries.\n\n- (2) Calculation method of the approximate amounts and material assumptions\n\nThe approximate amounts were calculated retroactively to the commencement date of the fiscal year based on the amounts stated in Biwako Bank's statement of income for the period from April 1, 2009 to February 28, 2010, including the amount of amortization of goodwill for the same period and are different from results of operation if the business combination had been completed on the commencement date of the fiscal year.\n\n- The information mentioned above has not been audited by KPMG AZSA & Co.\n- <Business combination of subsidiaries>\n\nA merger of credit card companies\n\nA consolidated subsidiary, QUOQ Inc. ('QUOQ') and equity method affiliates, Central Finance Co., Ltd. ('CF') and OMC Card, Inc. ('OMC Card') merged on April 1, 2009. The new company was named Cedyna Financial Corporation and became an equity method affiliate of SMFG. The outline of the merger is as follows:\n\n## 1. Outline of the business combination\n\n- (1) Company profiles\n\nSurviving company: OMC Card (Credit card business) Merged company: CF (Shopping credit business and general credit business) Merged company: QUOQ (Shopping credit business and general credit business)\n\n- (2) Reasons for the business combination\n\nThe credit card market is growing steadily, propelled by the expansion into new areas of settlement, such as for small purchases, the growing popularity of reward point programs, and other developments. Further substantial growth of the industry is anticipated with the greater use of credit cards to pay for public services charges and in other fields. At the same time, the business environment surrounding the industry is changing dramatically - development of new technologies and new services, such as electronic money; investment in systems that can respond to customers' needs for more in-depth, sophisticated and diverse services; enactment of", + "recall": 0.967948717948718, + "true_md": "SMFG Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nSMFG 2011 132\n\n- Merged company: CF (Shopping credit business and general credit business)\n\n- Merged company: QUOQ (Shopping credit business and general credit business)\n\n- (1) Company profiles\n\n- 1. Outline of the business combination\n\nA merger of credit card companies\n\nA consolidated subsidiary, QUOQ Inc. (“QUOQ”) and equity method affiliates, Central Finance Co., Ltd. (“CF”) and OMC Card, Inc. (“OMC Card”) merged on April 1, 2009. The new company was named Cedyna Financial Corporation and became an equity method affiliate of SMFG. The outline of the merger is as follows:\n\n<Business combination of subsidiaries>\n\nThe information mentioned above has not been audited by KPMG AZSA & Co.\n\nThe approximate amounts were calculated retroactively to the commencement date of the fiscal year based on the amounts stated in Biwako Bank’s statement of income for the period from April 1, 2009 to February 28, 2010, including the amount of amortization of goodwill for the same period and are different from results of operation if the business combination had been completed on the commencement date of the fiscal year.\n\nNote: Ordinary income is presented as counterparts of sales of companies in other industries.\n\n- (2) Calculation method of the approximate amounts and material assumptions\n\n- (1) The difference between the ordinary income and other income data estimated, assuming that the business combinations had been completed on the commencement date of the fiscal year and the actual ordinary income and other income data that are recorded in the consolidated statement of income is as follows:\n\n- 7. Approximate amounts of impact on the consolidated statement of operations for the fiscal year ended March 31, 2010, assuming that the business combinations had been completed on the commence- ment date of the fiscal year\n\n- (2) Liabilities\n\n- 4. Merger ratio, calculation method, number of shares delivered and valuation\n\n- (a) Common stock\n\n- (b) Preferred stocks (Type 1 and Type 2)\n\n- Surviving company: OMC Card (Credit card business)\n\n- (2) Reasons for the business combination\n\nThe credit card market is growing steadily, propelled by the expansion into new areas of settlement, such as for small purchases, the growing popularity of reward point programs, and other developments. Further substantial growth of the industry is anticipated with the greater use of credit cards to pay for public services charges and in other fields. At the same time, the business environment surrounding the industry is changing dramatically — development of new technologies and new services, such as electronic money; investment in systems that can respond to customers’ needs for more in-depth, sophisticated and diverse services; enactment of \n\n- (1) Assets\n\n- 6. Amounts of assets and liabilities acquired on the day of the busi- ness combination\n\n- (3) Method and term to amortize goodwill Straight-line method over 20 years\n\n- (2) Reason for recognizing goodwill SMFG accounted for the difference between the acquisition cost and the equivalent amount of SMFG’s interests in Biwako Bank as goodwill.\n\n- (1) Amount of goodwill ¥11,056 million\n\n- 5. Goodwill, reason for recognizing goodwill, amortization method and amortization period\n\n- (3) Number of shares delivered and value\n\nIn order to ensure the fairness of the merger ratio, KUBC and Biwako Bank appointed Daiwa Securities Capital Markets Co. Ltd. and The Goldman Sachs Group, Inc., respectively, as their financial advisors and requested them to calculate the merger ratio of common stock. After conducting negotiations and discussions taking into account factors such as their financial conditions, asset quality and future prospects, the analysis of the merger ratio provided by each financial advisor and results of due diligence they carried out on each other, the 2 banks agreed and decided on the above merger ratio of common stock as being appropriate.\n\nMarket prices of preferred stocks (Type 1 and Type 2) issued by Biwako Bank were not available (in contrast to common stock which market price was available). KUBC therefore decided to set the same conditions as those of Biwako Bank’s preferred stocks on KUBC’s newly-issued preferred stocks, taking the merger ratio of common stock into account.\n\n- (2) Basis for calculation of the merger ratio\n\n- (1) Merger ratio" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.70302977966134, + "doc_id": "f4e5a7b68ec2e8f17415bb74bb67a44bad111cd833e3857eb08ea4c516a0fab7", + "edit_distance": 0.3058823529411765, + "f1_score": 0.9809885931558935, + "meteor": 0.6316580593996569, + "precision": 0.9885057471264368, + "pred_md": "The Audit and Risk Management Committee's charter and information on the selection and appointment of the Company's external auditor is available in the corporate governance section on the Company's website. Information regarding qualifications and meeting attendance can be found in the Directors' Report of this Annual Report.\n\n## Principle 5: Make Timely and Balanced Disclosure\n\nThe Company has adopted a Market Disclosure Policy to ensure compliance with its continuous disclosure obligations whereby relevant information that could cause a reasonable person to expect a material effect on, or lead to a substantial movement in, the value of Sundance's share price, is immediately made available to shareholders and the public as a release to the ASX. D Connor, as Company Secretary, has been nominated as the person primarily responsible for communications with the ASX. All material information concerning the Company, including its financial situation, performance, ownership and governance is posted on the Company's web site to ensure all investors have equal and timely access. The Market Disclosure Policy is available in the corporate governance section on Sundance's website.\n\n## Principle 6: Respect the Rights of Shareholders\n\nThe Board fully recognises its responsibility to ensure that its shareholders are informed of all major developments affecting the Company. All shareholders, who have elected to do so, receive a copy of the Company's Annual Report and the Annual, Half Yearly and Quarterly Reports are prepared and posted on the Company's website in accordance with the ASX Listing Rules. Regular updates on operations are made via ASX releases. All information disclosed to the ASX is posted on Sundance's website as soon as possible after it is disclosed to the ASX. When analysts are briefed on aspects of the Company's operation, the material used in the presentation is immediately released to the ASX and posted on the Company's website. Sundance encourages its shareholders to attend its annual meetings and to discuss and question its Board and management. The Company's external auditor is requested to attend the annual general meeting and be available to answer shareholder questions about the conduct of the audit and the preparation and content of the audit report. The Shareholder Communications Policy is published on the Company's website under the corporate governance section.\n\n## Principle 7: Recognise and Manage Risk\n\n## 7.1 Risk Assessment and Management\n\nSundance has established a Risk Management Policy whereby the primary purpose of the policy is to ensure that:\n\n- · Appropriate systems are in place to identify, to the extent that is reasonably practical, all material risks that the Company faces in conducting its business;\n- · The financial impact of those risks is understood and appropriate controls are in place to limit exposures to them;\n- · Appropriate responsibilities are delegated to control the risks; and\n- · Any material changes to the Company's risk profile are disclosed in accordance with the Company's continuous Market Disclosure Policy.\n\nThe Audit and Risk Management Committee is responsible for approving and monitoring the overall financial and operational business risk profile of the Company, and reporting its findings to the full Board. In addition, by the nature of the upstream oil and gas business this topic is intrinsically covered during each Board meeting. The Board requires the executives to design and implement the risk management and internal control system to manage the Company, and to report to the Board.\n\nThe Board has received assurance from the Managing Director and Chief Financial Officer that the declaration provided in accordance with section 295A of the Corporations Act 2001 is founded on a sound system of risk management and internal control which is operating effectively.\n\n- 52 -", + "recall": 0.9735849056603774, + "true_md": "The Audit and Risk Management Committee’s charter and information on the selection and appointment of the Company’s external auditor is available in the corporate governance section on the Company’s website. Information regarding qualifications and meeting attendance can be found in the Directors’ Report of this Annual Report. \n\nThe Company has adopted a Market Disclosure Policy to ensure compliance with its continuous disclosure obligations whereby relevant information that could cause a reasonable person to expect a material effect on, or lead to a substantial movement in, the value of Sundance’s share price, is immediately made available to shareholders and the public as a release to the ASX. D Connor, as Company Secretary, has been nominated as the person primarily responsible for communications with the ASX. All material information concerning the Company, including its financial situation, performance, ownership and governance is posted on the Company’s web site to ensure all investors have equal and timely access. The Market Disclosure Policy is available in the corporate governance section on Sundance’s website. \n\nThe Board fully recognises its responsibility to ensure that its shareholders are informed of all major developments affecting the Company. All shareholders, who have elected to do so, receive a copy of the Company’s Annual Report and the Annual, Half Yearly and Quarterly Reports are prepared and posted on the Company’s website in accordance with the ASX Listing Rules. Regular updates on operations are made via ASX releases. All information disclosed to the ASX is posted on Sundance’s website as soon as possible after it is disclosed to the ASX. When analysts are briefed on aspects of the Company’s operation, the material used in the presentation is immediately released to the ASX and posted on the Company’s website. Sundance encourages its shareholders to attend its annual meetings and to discuss and question its Board and management. The Company’s external auditor is requested to attend the annual general meeting and be available to answer shareholder questions about the conduct of the audit and the preparation and content of the audit report. The Shareholder Communications Policy is published on the Company’s website under the corporate governance section. \n\n7.1 Risk Assessment and Management Sundance has established a Risk Management Policy whereby the primary purpose of the policy is to ensure that: • Appropriate systems are in place to identify, to the extent that is reasonably practical, all material risks that the \n\n- Sundance has established a Risk Management Policy whereby the primary purpose of the policy is to ensure that: • Appropriate systems are in place to identify, to the extent that is reasonably practical, all material risks that the Company faces in conducting its business; • The financial impact of those risks is understood and appropriate controls are in place to limit exposures to them; \n\n- Company faces in conducting its business; • The financial impact of those risks is understood and appropriate controls are in place to limit exposures to them; • Appropriate responsibilities are delegated to control the risks; and \n\n- • The financial impact of those risks is understood and appropriate controls are in place to limit exposures to them; • Appropriate responsibilities are delegated to control the risks; and • Any material changes to the Company’s risk profile are disclosed in accordance with the Company’s continuous Market \n\n- • Appropriate responsibilities are delegated to control the risks; and • Any material changes to the Company’s risk profile are disclosed in accordance with the Company’s continuous Market Disclosure Policy. \n\nThe Audit and Risk Management Committee is responsible for approving and monitoring the overall financial and operational business risk profile of the Company, and reporting its findings to the full Board. In addition, by the nature of the upstream oil and gas business this topic is intrinsically covered during each Board meeting. The Board requires the executives to design and implement the risk management and internal control system to manage the Company, and to report to the Board. \n\nThe Board has received assurance from the Managing Director and Chief Financial Officer that the declaration provided in accordance with section 295A of the Corporations Act 2001 is founded on a sound system of risk management and internal control which is operating effectively. \n\n- 52 - \n\n## $^{ }$Principle 7: Recognise and Manage Risk\n\n## 7.1 Risk Assessment and Management Sundance has established a Risk Management Policy whereby the primary purpose of the policy is to ensure that:\n\n## Principle 6: Respect the Rights of Shareholders\n\n## $^{ }$Principle 5: Make Timely and Balanced Disclosure" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7507221798318937, + "doc_id": "c0915758813969596046c3f7aecee6aebcf0b12116a6e6c356b4b8c578af8727", + "edit_distance": 0.2277992277992278, + "f1_score": 0.981651376146789, + "meteor": 0.8036785023733067, + "precision": 0.9907407407407407, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 33 - FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT continued\n\n## Interest Rate Risk\n\nInterest rate risk is the risk that the fair value of the future cash flows of a financial instrument will fluctuate because of changes in market interest rates. The Group's exposure to the risk of changes in market interest rates relates primarily to the Group's long-term debt obligations with floating interest rates.\n\n## Interest Rate Sensitivity Analysis\n\nBased on the net debt position as at 31 December 2014 and 2013, taking into account interest rate swaps, with all other variables remaining constant, the following table represents the effect on income as a result of changes in the interest rate. The impact on equity is the same as the impact on profit before tax.\n\nThis assumes that the change in interest rates is effective from the beginning of the financial year and the net debt position and fixed/floating mix is constant over the year. However, interest rates and the debt profile of the Group are unlikely to remain constant and therefore the above sensitivity analysis will be subject to change.\n\n- 101 -", + "recall": 0.9727272727272728, + "true_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 33 – FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT continued\n\n## Interest Rate Risk Interest rate risk is the risk that the fair value of the future cash flows of a financial instrument will fluctuate\n\n## Interest Rate Sensitivity Analysis Based on the net debt position as at 31 December 2014 and 2013, taking into account interest rate swaps, with\n\nInterest Rate Risk Interest rate risk is the risk that the fair value of the future cash flows of a financial instrument will fluctuate because of changes in market interest rates. The Group’s exposure to the risk of changes in market interest rates relates primarily to the Group’s long-term debt obligations with floating interest rates. \n\nInterest Rate Sensitivity Analysis Based on the net debt position as at 31 December 2014 and 2013, taking into account interest rate swaps, with all other variables remaining constant, the following table represents the effect on income as a result of changes in the interest rate. The impact on equity is the same as the impact on profit before tax. \n\nThis assumes that the change in interest rates is effective from the beginning of the financial year and the net debt position and fixed/floating mix is constant over the year. However, interest rates and the debt profile of the Group are unlikely to remain constant and therefore the above sensitivity analysis will be subject to change. \n\n- 101 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8918196081081021, + "doc_id": "bf33cdab54d7b1358467fe233a770b5f7ee826a6de70910423c0aa7ba82f79e3", + "edit_distance": 0.6633165829145728, + "f1_score": 0.9525547445255474, + "meteor": 0.7527581348540758, + "precision": 0.9702602230483272, + "pred_md": "to attend intensive educational training in Tokyo. Furthermore, we continue to focus on the development of human resources in Asia, where our business continues to develop tremendously, by providing our national staff with seminars and e-learning programs developed by the Asia Pacific Training Department, in order for them to be able to offer the best solutions for our clients.\n\n## Topics\n\n## ◆ Overseas Environmental Business Opportunities\n\nSMBC is enhancing its initiatives for global environmental businesses.\n\nIt has provided co-financing as the lead bank for the commercial solar power generation business project which is scheduled to start in the fiscal year 2014 in Spain. This financing utilized the insurance system of Nippon Export and Investment Insurance ('NEXI'), and was its first project to support Japanese companies going overseas for the purpose of engaging in power generation businesses utilizing renewable energies.\n\nSMBC continues to strengthen its initiatives for renewable energy businesses, and to proactively promote the development of overseas environmental businesses.\n\n## ■ Treasury Markets\n\nSMFG strives to offer increasingly high valued services to meet more sophisticated and diverse needs of its clients for transactions in the money, foreign exchange, bond and derivatives markets through the Treasury Unit of SMBC. In order to maintain and further enhance profitability while managing risks appropriately, the Treasury Unit focuses on the following three goals of: (a) increasing volumes generated from clients' transactions; (b) strengthening its Asset-Liability Management (ALM) system and trading skills; and (c) ensuring portfolio management of its assets and liabilities.\n\n## More Solutions and Services for Clients' Market Transactions\n\nSMBC offers solutions appropriate for the market transactional needs of its clients by working with branches to present to its corporate clients with the proposals for such as hedging transactions, reflecting the shifting trends in the financial markets.\n\nWe continue to improve the functions of i-Deal , a system which allows our clients to execute their foreign exchange transactions on the Internet. The Treasury Unit continues to fully support our clients by meeting their market transactional needs and offering the highest level of services in the industry.\n\n## ALM and Trading Operations\n\nThe Treasury Unit pursues to maximize its earnings through the ALM and trading operations, while controlling the market and liquidity risks, by searching for trends in the various financial markets.\n\nWe strive to perform appropriate ALM and trading operations by responding to the changes in the financial market to generate consistent earnings.\n\n## Topics\n\n## ◆ ssuance of U.S. Dollar-denominated Straight I Bonds in the Global Markets\n\nFor the environmental changes in the foreseeable future, we are taking measures to diversify the medium- to long-term fund procurement channels. In January 2011, we again issued the U.S. Dollar-denominated straight bonds in the United States and other global markets, following the issuance in 2010.\n\n## ◆ Expanded Offerings of Currencies of Asia and Other Emerging Markets\n\nIn order to meet our clients' market transaction needs, we are increasing our line-up of foreign currencies, mainly Asian and also other emerging-market currencies. We are also committed to updating our clients with the information related to the foreign exchange transactions by offering seminars conducted by economists specialized in Asian financial markets.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n15", + "recall": 0.9354838709677419, + "true_md": "We continue to improve the functions of i-Deal , a system which allows our clients to execute their foreign exchange transactions on the Internet. The Treasury Unit continues to fully support our clients by meeting their market transactional needs and offering the highest level of services in the industry.\n\nto attend intensive educational training in Tokyo. Furthermore, we continue to focus on the development of human resources in Asia, where our business continues to develop tremendously, by providing our national staff with seminars and e-learning programs developed by the Asia Pacific Training Department, in order for them to be able to offer the best solutions for our clients.\n\nSMBC is enhancing its initiatives for global environmental businesses. \n\nIt has provided co-financing as the lead bank for the commercial solar power generation business project which is scheduled to start in the fiscal year 2014 in Spain. This financing utilized the insurance system of Nippon Export and Investment Insurance (“NEXI”), and was its first project to support Japanese companies going overseas for the purpose of engaging in power generation businesses utilizing renewable energies.\n\nWe strive to perform appropriate ALM and trading opera- tions by responding to the changes in the financial market to generate consistent earnings.\n\nThe Treasury Unit pursues to maximize its earnings through the ALM and trading operations, while controlling the market and liquidity risks, by searching for trends in the various financial markets.\n\nSMBC continues to strengthen its initiatives for renew- able energy businesses, and to proactively promote the development of overseas environmental businesses.\n\nSMFG strives to offer increasingly high valued services to meet more sophisticated and diverse needs of its clients for trans- actions in the money, foreign exchange, bond and derivatives markets through the Treasury Unit of SMBC. In order to maintain and further enhance profitability while managing risks appro- priately, the Treasury Unit focuses on the following three goals of: (a) increasing volumes generated from clients’ transactions; (b) strengthening its Asset-Liability Management (ALM) system and trading skills; and (c) ensuring portfolio management of its assets and liabilities.\n\nFor the environmental changes in the foreseeable future, we are taking measures to diversify the medium- to long-term fund procurement channels. In January 2011, we again issued the U.S. Dollar-denominated straight bonds in the United States and other global markets, following the issu- ance in 2010.\n\nIn order to meet our clients’ market transaction needs, we are increasing our line-up of foreign currencies, mainly Asian and also other emerging-market currencies. We are also com- mitted to updating our clients with the information related to the foreign exchange transactions by offering seminars con- ducted by economists specialized in Asian financial markets.\n\nSMBC offers solutions appropriate for the market transactional needs of its clients by working with branches to present to its corporate clients with the proposals for such as hedging trans- actions, reflecting the shifting trends in the financial markets.\n\nSMFG 2011 15\n\n## ◆ Expanded Offerings of Currencies of Asia and Other Emerging Markets\n\n## More Solutions and Services for Clients’ Market Transactions\n\n## ◆ Issuance of U.S. Dollar-denominated Straight Bonds in the Global Markets\n\n## Topics\n\n## ■ Treasury Markets\n\n## ◆ Overseas Environmental Business Opportunities\n\n## Topics\n\n## ALM and Trading Operations" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.857033998280112, + "doc_id": "690e42aca0a0a2a6577e8fa48f526fe3a6fd713fa37f99211c567f95efeb0d51", + "edit_distance": 0.6012658227848101, + "f1_score": 0.9803921568627451, + "meteor": 0.8816053946200871, + "precision": 0.9615384615384616, + "pred_md": "SMBC\n\n## Deposits (Nonconsolidated)\n\nSumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation\n\n## Deposits and Negotiable Certificates of Deposit\n\nYear-End Balance\n\nNotes: 1. Liquid deposits = Current deposits + Ordinary deposits + Savings deposits + Deposits at notice\n\n2. Fixed-term deposits = Time deposits + Installment savings\n\n## Average Balance\n\nNotes: 1. Liquid deposits = Current deposits + Ordinary deposits + Savings deposits + Deposits at notice\n\n- 2. Fixed-term deposits = Time deposits + Installment savings\n\n3. The average balance of foreign-currency-denominated transactions by domestic branches in international operations is calculated by the monthly current method.\n\n## Balance of Deposits, Classified by Type of Depositor\n\nNotes: 1. Figures are before adjustment on interoffice accounts in transit.\n\n- 2. Negotiable certificates of deposit are excluded.\n\n3. Accounts at overseas branches and Japan offshore banking accounts are excluded.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n164", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "SMBC\n\n## Deposits (Nonconsolidated)\n\nSumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation\n\nDeposits and Negotiable Certificates of Deposit\n\n## Balance of Deposits, Classified by Type of Depositor\n\nSMFG 2011 164\n\nNotes: 1. Figures are before adjustment on interoffice accounts in transit.\n\n2. Negotiable certificates of deposit are excluded.\n\n3. Accounts at overseas branches and Japan offshore banking accounts are excluded.\n\nNotes: 1. Liquid deposits = Current deposits + Ordinary deposits + Savings deposits + Deposits at notice\n\n2. Fixed-term deposits = Time deposits + Installment savings\n\n3. The average balance of foreign-currency-denominated transactions by domestic branches in international operations is calculated by the monthly current method.\n\nNotes: 1. Liquid deposits = Current deposits + Ordinary deposits + Savings deposits + Deposits at notice\n\n2. Fixed-term deposits = Time deposits + Installment savings" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8669119364225718, + "doc_id": "37872d8b3af2904dcdb20c991f1baac6434dd86260f39a547a0a62800f52e058", + "edit_distance": 0.472, + "f1_score": 0.9325153374233128, + "meteor": 0.9434887666091399, + "precision": 0.926829268292683, + "pred_md": "1\n\n| FINANCIAL REVIEW\n\n## FINANCIAL REVIEW »\n\n($ in millions, except per share data)\n\nYears Ended December 31\n\n- * See page 14 for definition of this non-GAAP measure.\n- ** PV-10 is the present value (10% discount rate) of estimated future gross revenues to be generated from the production of proved reserves, net of production and future development costs, using assumed prices and costs. Please see page 113 of our Form 10-K for information on the standardized measure of discounted future net cash flows.\n- *** Adjusted for field differentials.\n- **** Excludes unrealized gains (losses) natural gas and oil hedging.", + "recall": 0.9382716049382716, + "true_md": "1 | FINANCIAL REVIEW\n\n## FINANCIAL REVIEW » ($ in millions, except per share data)\n\n* See page 14 for definition of this non-GAAP measure. \n\n*** Adjusted for field diff er entials.\n\n**** Excludes unrealized gains (losses) natural gas and oil hedging. \n\n- ** PV-10 is the present v alue (10% discount rate) of estimated future gross revenues to be generated from the production of proved reserves, net of production and future development costs, using assumed prices and costs. Please see page 113 of our Form 10-K for information on the standardized measure of discounted future net cash flows." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.627067529320606, + "doc_id": "99ba99bd5d186b439eb9ef6b7ddfc21fe2777095a154adea97c085f8e6542c54", + "edit_distance": 0.6, + "f1_score": 0.854368932038835, + "meteor": 0.703281627512466, + "precision": 0.8148148148148148, + "pred_md": "## management's Discussion and analysis\n\nD\n\nollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\n## Financial and Operational Highlights\n\nThe following table presents a summary of Killam's financial and operating performance for the year ended December 31, 2013 and 2012:\n\n## Results of Operations\n\n## Same Store Results\n\n## Balance Sheet\n\n## Ratios\n\n24\n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013", + "recall": 0.8979591836734694, + "true_md": "Management’s Discussion and Analysis Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\nManagement’s Discussion and Analysis Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\n## Financial and Operational Highlights\n\nThe following table presents a summary of Killam’s financial and operating performance for the year ended December 31, 2013 and 2012:\n\n24 Killam ProPerties inc | 2013\n\n## Results of Operations" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.917777648065638, + "doc_id": "10e151be5eda95f39bec0271f783ad664a8ff36f8a02cc459affe1486dd7737d", + "edit_distance": 0.7725040916530278, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.6822807386127753, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 1 - STATEMENT OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES continued\n\nFinance leases are capitalised by recording an asset and a liability at the lower of the amounts equal to the fair value of the leased property or the present value of the minimum lease payments, including any guaranteed residual values. Lease payments are allocated between the reduction of the lease liability and the lease interest expense for the period.\n\nAssets under financing leases are depreciated on a straight-line basis over the shorter of their estimated useful lives or the lease term. Lease payments for operating leases, where substantially all the risks and benefits remain with the lessor, are charged as expenses in the periods in which they are incurred.\n\nLease incentives under operating leases are recognised as a liability and amortised on a straight-line basis over the life of the lease term.\n\n## e) Financial Instruments\n\n## Recognition and Initial Measurement\n\nFinancial instruments, incorporating financial assets and financial liabilities, are recognised when the entity becomes a party to the contractual provisions of the instrument. Trade date accounting is adopted for financial assets that are delivered within timeframes established by marketplace convention.\n\nFinancial instruments are initially measured at fair value plus transactions costs where the instrument is not classified at fair value through profit or loss. Transaction costs related to instruments classified at fair value through profit or loss are expensed to profit or loss immediately. Financial instruments are classified and measured as set out below.\n\n## Derivative Financial Instruments\n\nThe Group uses derivative financial instruments to economically hedge its exposure to changes in commodity prices arising in the normal course of business. The principal derivatives that may be used are commodity crude oil price swap, option and costless collar contracts and interest rate swaps. Their use is subject to policies and procedures as approved by the Board of Directors. The Group does not trade in derivative financial instruments for speculative purposes.\n\nDerivative financial instruments are recognised at fair value. Subsequent to initial recognition, derivative financial instruments are recognised at fair value. The fair value of these derivative financial instruments is the estimated amount that the Group would receive or pay to terminate the contracts at the reporting date, taking into account current market prices and the current creditworthiness of the contract counterparties. The derivatives are valued on a mark to market valuation and the gain or loss on re-measurement to fair value is recognised through the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income.\n\n## i) Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss\n\nFinancial assets are classified at fair value through profit or loss when they are held for trading for the purpose of short term profit taking, when they are derivatives not held for hedging purposes, or designated as such to avoid an accounting mismatch or to enable performance evaluation where a group of financial assets is managed by key management personnel on a fair value basis in accordance with a documented risk management or investment strategy. Realised and unrealised gains and losses arising from changes in fair value are included in profit or loss in the period in which they arise.\n\n- 63 -", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 1 - STATEMENT OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES continued\n\n## e) Financial Instruments\n\n## Derivative Financial Instruments The Group uses derivative financial instruments to economically hedge its exposure to changes in commodity prices\n\n## Recognition and Initial Measurement Financial instruments, incorporating financial assets and financial liabilities, are recognised when the entity becomes\n\ni) Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss Financial assets are classified at fair value through profit or loss when they are held for trading for the purpose of short term profit taking, when they are derivatives not held for hedging purposes, or designated as such to avoid an accounting mismatch or to enable performance evaluation where a group of financial assets is managed by key management personnel on a fair value basis in accordance with a documented risk management or investment strategy. Realised and unrealised gains and losses arising from changes in fair value are included in profit or loss in the period in which they arise. \n\nDerivative financial instruments are recognised at fair value. Subsequent to initial recognition, derivative financial instruments are recognised at fair value. The fair value of these derivative financial instruments is the estimated amount that the Group would receive or pay to terminate the contracts at the reporting date, taking into account current market prices and the current creditworthiness of the contract counterparties. The derivatives are valued on a mark to market valuation and the gain or loss on re-measurement to fair value is recognised through the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income.\n\nDerivative Financial Instruments The Group uses derivative financial instruments to economically hedge its exposure to changes in commodity prices arising in the normal course of business. The principal derivatives that may be used are commodity crude oil price swap, option and costless collar contracts and interest rate swaps. Their use is subject to policies and procedures as approved by the Board of Directors. The Group does not trade in derivative financial instruments for speculative purposes.\n\nFinancial instruments are initially measured at fair value plus transactions costs where the instrument is not classified at fair value through profit or loss. Transaction costs related to instruments classified at fair value through profit or loss are expensed to profit or loss immediately. Financial instruments are classified and measured as set out below. \n\nRecognition and Initial Measurement Financial instruments, incorporating financial assets and financial liabilities, are recognised when the entity becomes a party to the contractual provisions of the instrument. Trade date accounting is adopted for financial assets that are delivered within timeframes established by marketplace convention. \n\nLease incentives under operating leases are recognised as a liability and amortised on a straight-line basis over the life of the lease term.\n\nAssets under financing leases are depreciated on a straight-line basis over the shorter of their estimated useful lives or the lease term. Lease payments for operating leases, where substantially all the risks and benefits remain with the lessor, are charged as expenses in the periods in which they are incurred. \n\nFinance leases are capitalised by recording an asset and a liability at the lower of the amounts equal to the fair value of the leased property or the present value of the minimum lease payments, including any guaranteed residual values. Lease payments are allocated between the reduction of the lease liability and the lease interest expense for the period.\n\n- 63 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9091317738126297, + "doc_id": "b6d0a10856a9ae869e15585bdcd0abe804f389a74ff03eafcae188f8c4cf5cf3", + "edit_distance": 0.5260663507109005, + "f1_score": 0.9547038327526134, + "meteor": 0.9478117567193801, + "precision": 0.9647887323943662, + "pred_md": "MANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS\n\n## Mark-to-Market Value\n\nWe record our derivatives using an estimated credit-adjusted, mark-tomarket valuation, in accordance with IFRS. The estimated creditadjusted values of the derivatives are subject to changes in credit spreads between us and our counterparties. The table below shows the net asset of our derivative instruments at December 31, 2013:\n\n64\n\nROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n## Adjusted Net Debt\n\nWe use adjusted net debt to conduct valuation-related analysis and make capital structure related decisions. Adjusted net debt includes long-term debt, net debt derivatives liabilities (assets), short-term borrowings and cash and cash equivalents.\n\n1 Before deducting any decrease in fair value arising from purchase accounting and deferred transaction costs.\n\n2 Includes current and long-term portions.\n\n3 Adjusted net debt is a non-GAAP measure and should not be considered as a substitute or alternative for GAAP measures. This is not a defined term under IFRS, and does not have a standard meaning, so may not be a reliable way to compare us to other companies. See 'Non-GAAP Measures' for information about this measure, including how we calculate it.", + "recall": 0.9448275862068966, + "true_md": "MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS\n\n## Adjusted Net Debt\n\n## Mark-to-Market Value\n\nWe use adjusted net debt to conduct valuation-related analysis and make capital structure related decisions. Adjusted net debt includes long-term debt, net debt derivatives liabilities (assets), short-term borrowings and cash and cash equivalents.\n\nWe record our derivatives using an estimated credit-adjusted, mark-to- market valuation, in accordance with IFRS. The estimated credit- adjusted values of the derivatives are subject to changes in credit spreads between us and our counterparties. The table below shows the net asset of our derivative instruments at December 31, 2013:\n\n1 Before deducting any decrease in fair value arising from purchase accounting and deferred transaction costs.\n\n2 Includes current and long-term portions.\n\n3 Adjusted net debt is a non-GAAP measure and should not be considered as a substitute or alternative for GAAP measures. This is not a defined term under IFRS, and does not have a standard meaning, so may not be a reliable way to compare us to other companies. See “Non-GAAP Measures” for information about this measure, including how we calculate it.\n\n64 ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9567892399765193, + "doc_id": "a7908de7123fa7e2347e3a28141e66e2a696832d4c4ccd8877e4c4bafe9feaed", + "edit_distance": 0.8790252393385553, + "f1_score": 0.9803921568627451, + "meteor": 0.7338115086170652, + "precision": 0.981675392670157, + "pred_md": "MANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS\n\n## LITIGATION RISKS\n\n## S ystem Access Fee S askatchewan\n\nIn 2004, a class action commenced against providers of wireless communications in Canada under the Class Actions Act (Saskatchewan). The class action related to the system access fee wireless carriers charged to some of their customers. The plaintiffs are seeking unspecified damages and punitive damages, which would effectively be a reimbursement of all system access fees collected.\n\nIn 2007, the Saskatchewan Court granted the plaintiffs' application to have the proceeding certified as a national, 'opt-in' class action where affected customers outside Saskatchewan must take specific steps to participate in the proceeding. In 2008, our motion to stay the proceeding based on the arbitration clause in our wireless service agreements was granted. The Saskatchewan Court directed that its order, in respect of the certification of the action, would exclude customers who are bound by an arbitration clause from the class of plaintiffs.\n\nWe appealed the 2007 certification decision, however, it was dismissed by the Saskatchewan Court of Appeal and leave to appeal to the Supreme Court of Canada was denied.\n\nIn 2012, the plaintiffs applied for an order seeking to extend the time they can appeal the 'opt-in' decision of the Saskatchewan Court. In March 2013, the Saskatchewan Court of Appeal denied the plaintiffs' application.\n\nIn August 2009, counsel for the plaintiffs began a second proceeding under the Class Actions Act (Saskatchewan) asserting the same claims as the original proceeding. If successful, this second class action would be an 'opt-out' class proceeding. This second proceeding was ordered conditionally stayed in 2009 on the basis that it was an abuse of process.\n\nIn April 2013, the plaintiffs applied for an order to be allowed to proceed with the second system access fee class action. In August 2013, the court denied this application and the second action remains conditionally stayed. In December 2013 the plaintiff applied for an order permitting them to amend the Statement of Claim to reintroduce the claims they were not permitted to proceed with in the 2007 certification decision. We are awaiting the decision of the Saskatchewan Court. We have not recorded a liability for this contingency.\n\n## S ystem Access Fee - British Columbia\n\nIn December 2011, a class action was launched in British Columbia against providers of wireless communications in Canada about the system access fee wireless carriers charge to some of their customers. The class action relates to allegations of misrepresentations contrary to the Business Practices and Consumer Protection Act (British Columbia), among other things. The plaintiffs are seeking unspecified damages and restitution. A certification hearing is scheduled for April 2014. We have not recorded a liability for this contingency.\n\n## 911 Fee\n\nIn June 2008, a class action was launched in Saskatchewan against providers of wireless communications services in Canada. It involves allegations of breach of contract, misrepresentation and false advertising, among other things, in relation to the 911 fee that had been charged by us and the other wireless communication providers in Canada. The plaintiffs are seeking unspecified damages and restitution.\n\n78\n\nROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\nThe plaintiffs intend to seek an order certifying the proceeding as a national class action in Saskatchewan. We have not recorded a liability for this contingency.\n\n## Cellular Devices\n\nIn July 2013, a class action was launched in British Columbia against providers of wireless communications in Canada and manufacturers of wireless devices. The class action relates to the alleged adverse health effects incurred by long-term users of cellular devices. The plaintiffs are seeking unspecified damages and punitive damages, effectively equal to the reimbursement of the portion of revenues the defendants have received that can reasonably be attributed to the sale of cellular phones in Canada. We have not recorded a liability for this contingency.\n\n## Other Claims\n\nThere are certain other claims and potential claims against us. We do not expect any of these to have a materially adverse effect on our consolidated financial position.\n\nThe outcome of all the proceedings and claims against us, including the matters described above, is subject to future resolution that includes the uncertainties of litigation. Based on information currently known to us, we believe that it is not probable that the ultimate resolution of any of these proceedings and claims, individually or in total, will have a material adverse effect on our consolidated financial position or results of operations. If it becomes probable that we are liable, we will record a provision in the period the change in probability occurs and it would be material to our consolidated financial position and results of operations.\n\n## OWNERSHIP RISK\n\n## Controlling S hareholder\n\nRogers is a family-founded, family-controlled company.\n\nVoting control of Rogers Communications is held by Rogers Control Trust whose beneficiaries are members of the Rogers family, several of whom are also directors of our Board. The trust holds voting control of Rogers Communications Inc. and its subsidiaries for the benefit of successive generations of the Rogers family. The trust also deals with Rogers on the company's long-term strategy and direction. The trustee is the trust company subsidiary of a Canadian chartered bank.\n\nAs of December 31, 2013, private Rogers family holding companies controlled by the trust owned approximately 90.9 % of our outstanding Class A Voting shares and approximately 9.8 % of our Class B NonVoting shares, or in total approximately 28 % of the total shares outstanding. Only Class A Voting shares carry the right to vote in most circumstances. As a result, the trust is able to elect all members of our Board and to control the vote on most matters submitted to a shareholder vote.\n\n## CONTROLS AND PROCEDURES\n\n## DISCLOSURE CONTROLS AND PROCEDURES\n\nWe conducted an evaluation of the effectiveness of the design and operation of our disclosure controls and procedures as of December 31, 2013, under the supervision and with the participation of our management, including the Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer, pursuant to Rule 13a-15 promulgated under the US Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended. Based on this evaluation, our Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer concluded that our disclosure controls and procedures were effective at that date.", + "recall": 0.97911227154047, + "true_md": "MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS\n\n## LITIGATION RISKS\n\n## S ystem Access Fee – S askatchewan\n\n## Cellular Devices\n\n## Other Claims\n\nThe plaintiffs intend to seek an order certifying the proceeding as a national class action in Saskatchewan. We have not recorded a liability for this contingency.\n\nIn July 2013, a class action was launched in British Columbia against providers of wireless communications in Canada and manufacturers of wireless devices. The class action relates to the alleged adverse health effects incurred by long-term users of cellular devices. The plaintiffs are seeking unspecified damages and punitive damages, effectively equal to the reimbursement of the portion of revenues the defendants have received that can reasonably be attributed to the sale of cellular phones in Canada. We have not recorded a liability for this contingency.\n\nIn 2004, a class action commenced against providers of wireless communications in Canada under the Class Actions Act (Saskatchewan). The class action related to the system access fee wireless carriers charged to some of their customers. The plaintiffs are seeking unspecified damages and punitive damages, which would effectively be a reimbursement of all system access fees collected.\n\nIn 2007, the Saskatchewan Court granted the plaintiffs’ application to have the proceeding certified as a national, “opt-in” class action where affected customers outside Saskatchewan must take specific steps to participate in the proceeding. In 2008, our motion to stay the proceeding based on the arbitration clause in our wireless service agreements was granted. The Saskatchewan Court directed that its order, in respect of the certification of the action, would exclude customers who are bound by an arbitration clause from the class of plaintiffs.\n\nThere are certain other claims and potential claims against us. We do not expect any of these to have a materially adverse effect on our consolidated financial position.\n\nThe outcome of all the proceedings and claims against us, including the matters described above, is subject to future resolution that includes the uncertainties of litigation. Based on information currently known to us, we believe that it is not probable that the ultimate resolution of any of these proceedings and claims, individually or in total, will have a material adverse effect on our consolidated financial position or results of operations. If it becomes probable that we are liable, we will record a provision in the period the change in probability occurs and it would be material to our consolidated financial position and results of operations.\n\nWe appealed the 2007 certification decision, however, it was dismissed by the Saskatchewan Court of Appeal and leave to appeal to the Supreme Court of Canada was denied.\n\nIn 2012, the plaintiffs applied for an order seeking to extend the time they can appeal the “opt-in” decision of the Saskatchewan Court. In March 2013, the Saskatchewan Court of Appeal denied the plaintiffs’ application.\n\nIn August 2009, counsel for the plaintiffs began a second proceeding under the Class Actions Act (Saskatchewan) asserting the same claims as the original proceeding. If successful, this second class action would be an “opt-out” class proceeding. This second proceeding was ordered conditionally stayed in 2009 on the basis that it was an abuse of process.\n\nRogers is a family-founded, family-controlled company.\n\nVoting control of Rogers Communications is held by Rogers Control Trust whose beneficiaries are members of the Rogers family, several of whom are also directors of our Board. The trust holds voting control of Rogers Communications Inc. and its subsidiaries for the benefit of successive generations of the Rogers family. The trust also deals with Rogers on the company’s long-term strategy and direction. The trustee is the trust company subsidiary of a Canadian chartered bank.\n\nIn April 2013, the plaintiffs applied for an order to be allowed to proceed with the second system access fee class action. In August 2013, the court denied this application and the second action remains conditionally stayed. In December 2013 the plaintiff applied for an order permitting them to amend the Statement of Claim to reintroduce the claims they were not permitted to proceed with in the 2007 certification decision. We are awaiting the decision of the Saskatchewan Court. We have not recorded a liability for this contingency.\n\nAs of December 31, 2013, private Rogers family holding companies controlled by the trust owned approximately 90.9 % of our outstanding Class A Voting shares and approximately 9.8 % of our Class B Non- Voting shares, or in total approximately 28 % of the total shares outstanding. Only Class A Voting shares carry the right to vote in most circumstances. As a result, the trust is able to elect all members of our Board and to control the vote on most matters submitted to a shareholder vote.\n\nIn December 2011, a class action was launched in British Columbia against providers of wireless communications in Canada about the system access fee wireless carriers charge to some of their customers. The class action relates to allegations of misrepresentations contrary to the Business Practices and Consumer Protection Act (British Columbia), among other things. The plaintiffs are seeking unspecified damages and restitution. A certification hearing is scheduled for April 2014. We have not recorded a liability for this contingency.\n\nWe conducted an evaluation of the effectiveness of the design and operation of our disclosure controls and procedures as of December 31, 2013, under the supervision and with the participation of our management, including the Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer, pursuant to Rule 13a-15 promulgated under the US Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended. Based on this evaluation, our Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer concluded that our disclosure controls and procedures were effective at that date.\n\nIn June 2008, a class action was launched in Saskatchewan against providers of wireless communications services in Canada. It involves allegations of breach of contract, misrepresentation and false advertising, among other things, in relation to the 911 fee that had been charged by us and the other wireless communication providers in Canada. The plaintiffs are seeking unspecified damages and restitution.\n\n78 ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n## CONTROLS AND PROCEDURES\n\n## DISCLOSURE CONTROLS AND PROCEDURES\n\n## 911 Fee\n\n## S ystem Access Fee – British Columbia\n\n## Controlling S hareholder\n\n## OWNERSHIP RISK" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "00cb5f015c4cc7a0d34f0b6785c80f3e2fec1ed358f01e578ed72d148ee21483", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9976851851851852, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Nordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 77", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Nordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 77" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8964989817853691, + "doc_id": "a60f4c5fb21555bacd7104111a264edd48d1b388ee6cf904dee534499d2d5a05", + "edit_distance": 0.7563739376770539, + "f1_score": 0.954621848739496, + "meteor": 0.8781698686219327, + "precision": 0.9594594594594594, + "pred_md": "MANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS\n\n## ACQUISITIONS\n\n- GLYPH<129> Closed our agreement to acquire Metro 14 Montreal for $10 million on February 4, 2013, and relaunched the station as City Montreal, expanding the City broadcast TV network into the largest market in Quebec and increasing the City television network reach to over 80 % of Canadian households.\n- GLYPH<129> Finalized our purchase of theScore, Canada's third largest specialty sports channel, for $167 million. We later rebranded theScore as Sportsnet 360.\n\n## NHL\n\n- GLYPH<129> Advanced our strategy of delivering highly sought-after sports content anywhere, anytime, on any platform and strengthening the value of our sports brand by entering into an exclusive 12-year licensing agreement with the NHL which begins with the 2014-2015 season and grants Rogers the following:\n- -national rights across television broadcasts, wireless and mobile tablets and Internet streaming\n- -national rights to all regular season games, all playoff games and the Stanley Cup Final, and all special events and nongame events (e.g. NHL All-Star Game, NHL Draft) - in multiple languages\n- -out-of-market rights for all regional games\n- -ownership of all linear and digital highlights, including condensed games and video archives\n- -NHL broadcast assets: Rogers to operate NHL Centre Ice and NHL Game Centre Live\n- -sponsorship rights to the NHL Shield logo as an official partner of the NHL\n- -Canadian representation of ad sales for NHL.com\n- -ownership of all commercial inventories for the television broadcasts\n- -rights to sublicense broadcasting rights to TVA and CBC\n- -rights to use the Hockey Night In Canada brand through the CBC sublicense agreement.\n\nThrough this agreement, Rogers plans to provide Canadians with a unique viewing experience that will feature expanded pre- and postgame coverage of regular season and playoff games and other enhanced NHL content. We expect this agreement to drive Sportsnet subscriber growth and to provide highly sought after content in multiple languages across all of Rogers' platforms.\n\n48\n\nROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n## MEDIA FINANCIAL RESULTS\n\n- 1 Results of operations include theScore's operating results as of April 30, 2013 (the date of acquisition).\n\n## Higher Operating Revenue\n\nMedia generates revenue in five areas:\n\n- GLYPH<129> advertising sales across its television, radio, publishing and digital media properties\n- GLYPH<129> circulation\n- GLYPH<129> subscriptions\n- GLYPH<129> retail product sales\n- GLYPH<129> ticket sales, receipts of MLB revenue sharing and concession sales associated with Rogers Sports Entertainment.\n\nOperating revenue was 5 % higher this year, mainly because of:\n\n- GLYPH<129> higher subscription and advertising revenue generated by the Sportsnet properties, including the acquisition of theScore, and overall growth in distribution of our other specialty channels\n- GLYPH<129> higher advertising revenue of $21 million resulting from timing of NHL hockey games. Advertising revenue last year was lower than normal due to the NHL player lockout which resulted in no NHL games being aired, and higher than normal this year due to the compressed 2012-2013 season which started in January 2013 and the compressed 2013-2014 NHL schedule in advance of the upcoming winter Olympics\n- GLYPH<129> higher attendance and merchandise sales at Blue Jays games\n- GLYPH<129> higher sales at The Shopping Channel.\n\nThe increases in revenue were partially offset by continuing volatility in advertising spending across most industry sectors, driven by a continued slow economy.", + "recall": 0.9498327759197325, + "true_md": "MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS\n\n## MEDIA FINANCIAL RESULTS\n\n## ACQUISITIONS\n\nYears ended December 31\n\n- GLYPH<129> Closed our agreement to acquire Metro 14 Montreal for $10 million on February 4, 2013, and relaunched the station as City Montreal, expanding the City broadcast TV network into the largest market in Quebec and increasing the City television network reach to over 80 % of Canadian households.\n\n- GLYPH<129> Finalized our purchase of theScore, Canada’s third largest specialty sports channel, for $167 million. We later rebranded theScore as Sportsnet 360.\n\n- GLYPH<129> Advanced our strategy of delivering highly sought-after sports content anywhere, anytime, on any platform and strengthening the value of our sports brand by entering into an exclusive 12-year licensing agreement with the NHL which begins with the 2014-2015 season and grants Rogers the following:\n\n- GLYPH<129> advertising sales across its television, radio, publishing and digital media properties\n\n- GLYPH<129> circulation\n\n- GLYPH<129> subscriptions\n\n- GLYPH<129> retail product sales\n\n- GLYPH<129> ticket sales, receipts of MLB revenue sharing and concession sales associated with Rogers Sports Entertainment.\n\n- GLYPH<129> higher subscription and advertising revenue generated by the Sportsnet properties, including the acquisition of theScore, and overall growth in distribution of our other specialty channels\n\n- GLYPH<129> higher advertising revenue of $21 million resulting from timing of NHL hockey games. Advertising revenue last year was lower than normal due to the NHL player lockout which resulted in no NHL games being aired, and higher than normal this year due to the compressed 2012-2013 season which started in January 2013 and the compressed 2013-2014 NHL schedule in advance of the upcoming winter Olympics\n\n- GLYPH<129> higher attendance and merchandise sales at Blue Jays games\n\n- GLYPH<129> higher sales at The Shopping Channel.\n\nThe increases in revenue were partially offset by continuing volatility in advertising spending across most industry sectors, driven by a continued slow economy.\n\nThrough this agreement, Rogers plans to provide Canadians with a unique viewing experience that will feature expanded pre- and post- game coverage of regular season and playoff games and other enhanced NHL content. We expect this agreement to drive Sportsnet subscriber growth and to provide highly sought after content in multiple languages across all of Rogers’ platforms.\n\n- - national rights across television broadcasts, wireless and mobile tablets and Internet streaming\n\n- - national rights to all regular season games, all playoff games and the Stanley Cup Final, and all special events and non- game events (e.g. NHL All-Star Game, NHL Draft) – in multiple languages\n\n- - out-of-market rights for all regional games\n\n- - ownership of all linear and digital highlights, including condensed games and video archives\n\n- - NHL broadcast assets: Rogers to operate NHL Centre Ice and NHL Game Centre Live\n\n- - sponsorship rights to the NHL Shield logo as an official partner of the NHL\n\n- - Canadian representation of ad sales for NHL.com\n\n- - ownership of all commercial inventories for the television broadcasts\n\n- - rights to sublicense broadcasting rights to TVA and CBC\n\n- - rights to use the Hockey Night In Canada brand through the CBC sublicense agreement.\n\nOperating revenue was 5 % higher this year, mainly because of:\n\n48 ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n## Higher Operating Revenue\n\nMedia generates revenue in five areas:\n\n- 1 Results of operations include theScore’s operating results as of April 30, 2013 (the date of acquisition).\n\n## NHL" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9196189291517938, + "doc_id": "a830c1b01af49336db8bdca899cec3a77f61fce76e4d45ce9edccf41f06cef2e", + "edit_distance": 0.8262295081967214, + "f1_score": 0.9672131147540984, + "meteor": 0.8013480970145317, + "precision": 0.9725274725274725, + "pred_md": "Our new wireless Share Everything plans were Canada's first to let individuals, families and small businesses share wireless data and unlimited nationwide talk and text, with up to 10 wireless devices. Rogers recently further enhanced its exciting One Number service by introducing smartphone apps which enable customers to use mobile data or Wi-Fi to talk, text and video chat using their existing Rogers wireless number from any device.\n\nWe also keep customers informed and entertained with Rogers nextgeneration NextBox 3.0 TV experience which allows customers to view and record up to eight HD programs simultaneously, store hundreds of hours of content and enjoy whole-home PVR capability. And with Rogers Anyplace TV, it's also a wireless experience where viewers can navigate their cable guide, use a virtual remote, set PVR recordings and stream live or on-demand content from a tablet, smartphone, laptop or gaming console.\n\nRogers continues to be Canada's innovation leader in rapidly growing areas such as wireless machine-to-machine communications, remote home monitoring and automation, mobile payments, in-car infotainment and telematics, and digital media. As well, Rogers has deployed a suite of unique local digital services that create virtual marketplaces for bringing consumers and businesses together and provide location-based targeted offers.\n\nThese are just a few examples of the ways Rogers continues to innovate and lead the way, introducing wireless, broadband and digital technologies and services that fundamentally change the way customers stay connected, informed and entertained anywhere they are. Canadians know there's one thing to be certain of - if they're with Rogers, they'll never miss a thing.\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 15", + "recall": 0.9619565217391305, + "true_md": "Rogers continues to be Canada’s innovation leader in rapidly growing areas such as wireless machine-to-machine communications, remote home monitoring and automation, mobile payments, in-car infotainment and telematics, and digital media. As well, Rogers has deployed a suite of unique local digital services that create virtual marketplaces for bringing consumers and businesses together and provide location-based targeted offers.\n\nThese are just a few examples of the ways Rogers continues to innovate and lead the way, introducing wireless, broadband and digital technologies and services that fundamentally change the way customers stay connected, informed and entertained anywhere they are. Canadians know there’s one thing to be certain of – if they’re with Rogers, they’ll never miss a thing.\n\nWe also keep customers informed and entertained with Rogers next- generation NextBox 3.0 TV experience which allows customers to view and record up to eight HD programs simultaneously, store hundreds of hours of content and enjoy whole-home PVR capability. And with Rogers Anyplace TV, it’s also a wireless experience where viewers can navigate their cable guide, use a virtual remote, set PVR recordings and stream live or on-demand content from a tablet, smartphone, laptop or gaming console.\n\nOur new wireless Share Everything plans were Canada’s first to let individuals, families and small businesses share wireless data and unlimited nationwide talk and text, with up to 10 wireless devices. Rogers recently further enhanced its exciting One Number service by introducing smartphone apps which enable customers to use mobile data or Wi-Fi to talk, text and video chat using their existing Rogers wireless number from any device.\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 15" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9708415807202813, + "doc_id": "06ac9dc51498066f03fc88c7bc312f886571f7c9d7a6297a9e97125c1ec516ee", + "edit_distance": 0.42843601895734595, + "f1_score": 0.994026284348865, + "meteor": 0.9610740438621332, + "precision": 0.9952153110047847, + "pred_md": "and services on a timely basis, it could have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations. Any interruption in the supply of equipment for our networks could also affect the quality of our service or impede network development and expansion.\n\n## Organizational S tructure and Talent\n\nThe industry is competitive in attracting and retaining a skilled workforce. Losing certain employees or changes in morale due to a restructuring or other event could affect our revenue and profitability in certain circumstances.\n\n## Holding Company S tructure\n\nAs a holding company, our ability to meet our financial obligations depends primarily on receiving interest and principal payments on intercompany advances, rental payments, cash dividends and other payments from our subsidiaries, together with proceeds raised by us through issuing debt and equity and selling assets.\n\nSubstantially all of our business activities are operated by our subsidiaries. All of our subsidiaries are distinct legal entities that have no obligation, contingent or otherwise, to make funds available to us whether by dividends, interest payments, loans, advances or other payments, subject to payment arrangements on intercompany advances. Any of these payments must meet statutory or contractual restrictions, are contingent on the earnings of those subsidiaries, and are subject to various businesses and other considerations.\n\n## Increasing Programming Costs\n\nAcquiring programming is the single most significant purchasing commitment in our cable business. Programming costs have increased significantly over the past few years, particularly with the recent growth in subscriptions to digital specialty channels. Programming is also a material cost for Media television properties. Higher programming costs could adversely affect the operating results of our business if we are unable to pass on these costs to subscribers.\n\n## Channel Placement\n\nUnfavourable channel placement could negatively affect the tier status and results of certain channels, including The Shopping Channel, Sportsnet, SportsnetONE, Sportsnet World, and our specialty channels, including Outdoor Life Network, The Biography Channel (Canada), G4 Canada, and FX (Canada).\n\n## Migrating from Conventional Media to New Media\n\nOur Media business operates in many industries that can be affected by customers migrating from conventional to digital media, which is driving shifts in the quality and accessibility of data and mobile alternatives to conventional media. We have been shifting our focus towards the digital market to limit this risk. Our Media results could be negatively affected if we are unsuccessful in anticipating the shift in advertising dollars from conventional to digital platforms.\n\n## Our Market Position in Radio, Television or Magazine Readership\n\nAdvertising dollars typically migrate to media properties that are leaders in their respective markets and categories, particularly when advertising budgets are tight. Although most of our radio, television and magazine properties currently perform well in their respective markets, this may not continue in the future. Advertisers base a substantial part of their purchasing decisions on ratings and readership data generated by\n\nindustry associations and agencies. If our radio and television ratings or magazine readership levels decrease substantially, our advertising sales volumes and the rates that we charge advertisers could be adversely affected.\n\n## FINANCIAL RISKS\n\n## Capital Commitments Liquidity, Debt and Interest Payments\n\nOur capital commitments and financing obligations could have important consequences including:\n\n- GLYPH<129> requiring us to dedicate a substantial portion of cash flow from operations to pay dividends, interest and principal, which reduce funds available for other business purposes including other financial operations\n- GLYPH<129> making us more vulnerable to adverse economic and industry conditions\n- GLYPH<129> limiting our flexibility in planning for, and/or reacting to, changes in our business and/or industry\n- GLYPH<129> putting us at a competitive disadvantage compared to competitors who may have more financial resources and, or less financial leverage, or\n- GLYPH<129> restricting our ability to obtain additional financing to fund working capital and capital expenditures and for other general corporate purposes.\n\nOur ability to satisfy our financial obligations depends on our future operating performance and economic, financial, competitive and other factors, many of which are beyond our control. Our business may not generate sufficient cash flow and future financings may not be available to provide sufficient net proceeds to meet these obligations or to successfully execute our business strategy.\n\n## Income Tax and Other Taxes\n\nWe collect, pay and accrue significant amounts of income and other taxes such as federal and provincial sales tax, employment taxes and property taxes, for and to various taxation authorities.\n\nWe have recorded significant amounts of deferred income tax liabilities and current income tax expense, and calculated these amounts based on substantively enacted income tax rates in effect at the relevant time. A legislative change in these rates could have a material impact on the amounts recorded and payable in the future.\n\nWe have also recorded the benefit of income and other tax positions that are more likely than not of being sustained on examination and are measured at the amount expected to be realized when we have an ultimate settlement with taxation authorities.\n\nWhile we believe we have paid and provided for adequate amounts of tax, our business is complex and significant judgement is required in interpreting tax legislation and regulations. Our tax filings are subject to audit by the relevant government revenue authorities and the results of the government audit could materially change the amount of our actual income tax expense, income taxes payable or receivable, other taxes payable or receivable and deferred income tax assets or liabilities and could, in certain circumstances, result in an assessment of interest and penalties.\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC.\n\n77\n\nMANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS", + "recall": 0.9928400954653938, + "true_md": "and services on a timely basis, it could have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations. Any interruption in the supply of equipment for our networks could also affect the quality of our service or impede network development and expansion.\n\nThe industry is competitive in attracting and retaining a skilled workforce. Losing certain employees or changes in morale due to a restructuring or other event could affect our revenue and profitability in certain circumstances.\n\nAs a holding company, our ability to meet our financial obligations depends primarily on receiving interest and principal payments on intercompany advances, rental payments, cash dividends and other payments from our subsidiaries, together with proceeds raised by us through issuing debt and equity and selling assets.\n\nSubstantially all of our business activities are operated by our subsidiaries. All of our subsidiaries are distinct legal entities that have no obligation, contingent or otherwise, to make funds available to us whether by dividends, interest payments, loans, advances or other payments, subject to payment arrangements on intercompany advances. Any of these payments must meet statutory or contractual restrictions, are contingent on the earnings of those subsidiaries, and are subject to various businesses and other considerations.\n\nAcquiring programming is the single most significant purchasing commitment in our cable business. Programming costs have increased significantly over the past few years, particularly with the recent growth in subscriptions to digital specialty channels. Programming is also a material cost for Media television properties. Higher programming costs could adversely affect the operating results of our business if we are unable to pass on these costs to subscribers.\n\nUnfavourable channel placement could negatively affect the tier status and results of certain channels, including The Shopping Channel, Sportsnet, SportsnetONE, Sportsnet World, and our specialty channels, including Outdoor Life Network, The Biography Channel (Canada), G4 Canada, and FX (Canada).\n\nOur Media business operates in many industries that can be affected by customers migrating from conventional to digital media, which is driving shifts in the quality and accessibility of data and mobile alternatives to conventional media. We have been shifting our focus towards the digital market to limit this risk. Our Media results could be negatively affected if we are unsuccessful in anticipating the shift in advertising dollars from conventional to digital platforms.\n\nAdvertising dollars typically migrate to media properties that are leaders in their respective markets and categories, particularly when advertising budgets are tight. Although most of our radio, television and magazine properties currently perform well in their respective markets, this may not continue in the future. Advertisers base a substantial part of their purchasing decisions on ratings and readership data generated by\n\nindustry associations and agencies. If our radio and television ratings or magazine readership levels decrease substantially, our advertising sales volumes and the rates that we charge advertisers could be adversely affected.\n\nOur ability to satisfy our financial obligations depends on our future operating performance and economic, financial, competitive and other factors, many of which are beyond our control. Our business may not generate sufficient cash flow and future financings may not be available to provide sufficient net proceeds to meet these obligations or to successfully execute our business strategy.\n\nWe collect, pay and accrue significant amounts of income and other taxes such as federal and provincial sales tax, employment taxes and property taxes, for and to various taxation authorities.\n\nWe have recorded significant amounts of deferred income tax liabilities and current income tax expense, and calculated these amounts based on substantively enacted income tax rates in effect at the relevant time. A legislative change in these rates could have a material impact on the amounts recorded and payable in the future.\n\nWe have also recorded the benefit of income and other tax positions that are more likely than not of being sustained on examination and are measured at the amount expected to be realized when we have an ultimate settlement with taxation authorities.\n\nWhile we believe we have paid and provided for adequate amounts of tax, our business is complex and significant judgement is required in interpreting tax legislation and regulations. Our tax filings are subject to audit by the relevant government revenue authorities and the results of the government audit could materially change the amount of our actual income tax expense, income taxes payable or receivable, other taxes payable or receivable and deferred income tax assets or liabilities and could, in certain circumstances, result in an assessment of interest and penalties.\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 77\n\n## Our Market Position in Radio, Television or Magazine Readership\n\n## Migrating from Conventional Media to New Media\n\n## Channel Placement\n\n## Increasing Programming Costs\n\n## Holding Company S tructure\n\n## Organizational S tructure and Talent\n\n## FINANCIAL RISKS\n\n- GLYPH<129> requiring us to dedicate a substantial portion of cash flow from operations to pay dividends, interest and principal, which reduce funds available for other business purposes including other financial operations\n\n- GLYPH<129> making us more vulnerable to adverse economic and industry conditions\n\n- GLYPH<129> limiting our flexibility in planning for, and/or reacting to, changes in our business and/or industry\n\n- GLYPH<129> putting us at a competitive disadvantage compared to competitors who may have more financial resources and, or less financial leverage, or\n\n- GLYPH<129> restricting our ability to obtain additional financing to fund working capital and capital expenditures and for other general corporate purposes.\n\n## Income Tax and Other Taxes\n\n## Capital Commitments Liquidity, Debt and Interest Payments\n\nOur capital commitments and financing obligations could have important consequences including:\n\nMANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AN D ANALYSIS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "2713202d764155ceffc034d8745f85dbe405e29a885762184a1c6e0840461e8a", + "edit_distance": 0.42843601895734595, + "f1_score": 0.994026284348865, + "meteor": 0.9610740438621332, + "precision": 0.9952153110047847, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.9928400954653938, + "true_md": "6100 NORTH WESTERN AVENUE OKLAHOMA CITY, OK 73118 WWW.CHK.COM" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9714681922645424, + "doc_id": "07602f85158b9d1f84f2ca9c2f0deb9a38277945afac61d266da1eef244ad23d", + "edit_distance": 0.14151624548736463, + "f1_score": 0.9852104664391355, + "meteor": 0.9882939178941981, + "precision": 0.9840909090909091, + "pred_md": "Allison Earl\n\nShannon Earley\n\nJeremy Easton\n\nJanelle Eaton\n\nLayna Edd\n\nJoseph F. Eddy III\n\nJarrod Edens\n\nChristopher Edge\n\nMichael Edie\n\nJeremy Edmister\n\nKelly Edson\n\nRaymond Edwards\n\nDaniel Eidt\n\nLuis Elizondo\n\nJohn Elkins\n\nJohn Ellard\n\nDon Elliott\n\nGilbert Ellis\n\nJim Ellis\n\nAmanda Embry\n\nJoseph Emerson\n\nGary Emmert\n\nTyler Emrich\n\nThomas Erp\n\nChristopher Escher\n\nJevon Escobar\n\nKeith Eubanks\n\nDon Evans\n\nJason Evener\n\nLyric Ewing\n\nRichard Faries\n\nChris Feazell\n\nZachary Fegley\n\nAmy N. Ferguson\n\nRonnie Ferguson\n\nTyler Ferguson\n\nMaria Fernandez\n\nMichael Fesmire\n\nLinette Fibiger\n\nBrandin Fields\n\nCasey Fields\n\nKevin Fields\n\nPeggy Fields\n\nBrett Finley\n\nAmanda Finney\n\nJesse Fisher\n\nMike Fisher\n\nRandy Fite\n\nBilly Fitt\n\nWilliam Fitzgerald\n\nJared Flesher\n\nRonald Fletcher\n\nToni Flowers\n\nRobert Foland\n\nTim Fordenbacher\n\nRhonda Fortuin\n\nChris Fournier\n\nBobby Fowler\n\nSandra Fraley\n\nChris Frazier\n\nLeeAnn Frazier\n\nLynn French\n\nTina Fruge\n\nTyler Gage\n\nDarren Gagliardi\n\nCecil Gamble\n\nMatthew Gammon\n\nJim Gann\n\nAlfonso Garcia\n\nJames Garcia\n\nMaria Garcia\n\nJoshua Garcie Greg Garrison\n\nDan Garwood\n\nAlan Gary\n\nNaomi Garza\n\nLynda Gearheart\n\nNicole Geisinger\n\nRyan George\n\nTodd George\n\nKayla Geurkink\n\nMark Geurkink\n\nBert Gibson\n\nJosh D. Gibson\n\nRobert Gifford\n\nMichael Gilbert\n\nJennifer Gilliam\n\nEllen Gilliland\n\nFlorence Gills Jr.\n\nJames Gilpin\n\nTim Gilpin\n\nShannon Glancy\n\nTravis Glauser\n\nMichael Gleason\n\nBradley Glosup\n\nKarl Goebel\n\nDarrell Goeringer\n\nDevin Golden\n\nJose Gonzales\n\nCirilo Gonzalez\n\nMark Goodin\n\nRichard Goodrich\n\nDaniel Gorham\n\nJulian Gorman\n\nRyan Gorman\n\nShawn Goss\n\nAdam Gossen\n\nJoseph Gottschall\n\nMelissa Goyer\n\nMike Grady\n\nInna Graham\n\nCaleb Grantges\n\nMatt Grassmyer\n\nMike Graves\n\nJames Gray Jr.\n\nStanford Gray\n\nTrey Graybill III\n\nLance Green\n\nMike Green\n\nWhit Green\n\nAllan Greenawalt\n\nDustin Greenway\n\nJosh Grellner\n\nLambert Grim\n\nBrian Grove\n\nChristopher Guajardo\n\nRich Guenther\n\nGlenda Guerra\n\nRene Guerra\n\nAngel Guerrero\n\nBrian Gunsaulis\n\nBoJames Gunter\n\nPaul Gutta\n\nSarah Hacker\n\nRyan Haffner\n\nAugust Hadwiger\n\nDavid Hagadorn\n\nKeith Haggard\n\nStephen Haggerty\n\nGreg Hakman\n\nBrian Hale\n\nBrandon Hall\n\nDustin Hall\n\nRenee Hall\n\nRick Hall\n\nZach Hall\n\nLynne Hames\n\nClint Hamilton\n\nJames Hamilton\n\nWilliam Han\n\nNick Hancock\n\nKristi Hanna\n\nSean Hansen David Harbin\n\nDaniel Hardy II\n\nStephen Hardy\n\nEddie Hare\n\nAlysia Hargus\n\nAaron Harper\n\nAdam Harper\n\nChristopher Harper\n\nJackie Harris\n\nJerry Harris\n\nBerlin Harrison\n\nMark R. Harrison\n\nCharles Hart\n\nKevin Hart\n\nLarry Hartgrave\n\nMatthew Harville\n\nLeonard Harzinski Jr.\n\nHeath Hatcher\n\nErin Hathaway\n\nJohn Hatton\n\nThomas Haun\n\nRobert Havens Jr.\n\nWilliam Hawkins Jr.\n\nD.J. Haydon Jr.\n\nAdam Haynes\n\nKenneth Hays\n\nAllen Head\n\nJennie Heard\n\nGreg Heater\n\nKellie Hefner\n\nJeremiah Heldreth\n\nJames Henderson\n\nRob Hendle Jr.\n\nSandra Hendrix\n\nDavid Hennessy\n\nMarcus Henry\n\nPhil Hensley\n\nParish Henson\n\nBrandi Hernandez\n\nJose Hernandez\n\nRaymond Herndon III\n\nMike Hershberger\n\nKurt Hibbard\n\nAlyssa Hickey\n\nCarlos Hicks\n\nGary Hicks\n\nJacala Hicks\n\nJason Hicks\n\nMichael Hicks\n\nDean Higganbotham\n\nDuke Hightower\n\nChristopher Hill\n\nChase Hines\n\nEdgar Hinojos\n\nKerry Hinsley\n\nCory Hixson\n\nAngi Hodge\n\nSteven Hodges\n\nJaime Hodson\n\nRussell L. Hogue\n\nDustin Holben\n\nBrandon Holley\n\nJohn Hollister\n\nJolene Holloman\n\nLaura Holmes\n\nClay Holt\n\nGene Holt\n\nThomas Hood\n\nMatt Hoops\n\nWes Hope\n\nAmy Hopmann\n\nJason Horn\n\nJennifer Horrigan\n\nSherry Hosey\n\nLanny Hotaling\n\nSara Howard\n\nSherry Howell\n\nEddie Howen\n\nMorgan Hudson\n\nStacy Hudson\n\nDaniel Hudspeth\n\nNathaniel Huggans\n\nLori Hughes\n\nHayley Humpert\n\nJeremy Hunter\n\nEddie Hurst\n\nEdward Hurst\n\nKollin Hurt\n\nKyle Hurt\n\nLisa Hutcherson\n\nAllen Hutchins\n\nKevin Hutchins\n\nJon Hyde\n\nWesley Hyde\n\nNeal Impson\n\nDonnie Ingram\n\nPatrick Innes\n\nEric Inskeep\n\nOrlando Isaias\n\nBlake Jackson\n\nBrian Jackson\n\nMark Jackson\n\nShawn Jackson\n\nKenneth James II\n\nLarry James\n\nLamont Janz\n\nRyan Jarratt\n\nCalvin Jarrell\n\nRobert E. Jarvis\n\nVictor Jarvis Jr.\n\nDavid Jennings\n\nErinn Jennings\n\nBob Joest\n\nBradford Johnson\n\nBraydn Johnson\n\nBrian Johnson\n\nGary W. Johnson\n\nJimmy J. Johnson\n\nKevin Johnson\n\nLarry Johnson\n\nMatt Johnson\n\nMichael Johnson\n\nRich Johnson II\n\nScott Johnson\n\nSteve M. Johnson\n\nAmy Jones\n\nBobby Jones\n\nBrady Jones\n\nCyndi Jones\n\nDaniel Jones\n\nEmily Jones\n\nJennifer Jones\n\nJeremy Jones\n\nJulie Jones\n\nScott Jones\n\nWhitney Jones\n\nXavier Jones\n\nWill Jordan\n\nEd Jozwick\n\nRon Juratovac\n\nAlex Karim\n\nClint Keating\n\nCale Keim\n\nMark Keitz\n\nChad Kelley\n\nJordan Kelley\n\nMatt Kemper\n\nJosh Kendrick\n\nGreg Kennedy\n\nCheryl Kerr\n\nJohn Kiehlmeier\n\nJohn Kilgallon\n\nColby King\n\nJeremy King\n\nMelissa Kingry\n\nWill Kington\n\nWoody Kinney\n\nMichael Kinsey\n\nKenny Kipper\n\nWayne Kirk Jr.\n\nWhitney Kirk\n\nKerry Kirksmith\n\nHeidi Kirsch\n\nJohn Kitchen\n\nShayna Kjellsen\n\nJosh Kling\n\nZackery Knell\n\nAaron Knight\n\nChuck Knight\n\nJames Knight\n\nJohn G. Knox\n\nJohn M. Knox\n\nTodd Kreamer\n\nBen Lacy\n\nJV Laffitte\n\nJohn Lair\n\nDaniel Lancaster\n\nBobby Landrum Jr.\n\nKim Landry\n\nDavid Lane\n\nRichard F. Lane\n\nClay Langley\n\nMike Langley\n\nJimmie Laningham\n\nDaniel Lara\n\nCorey Lasley\n\nJoe Latham\n\nBrian Layman\n\nLucy Lazos\n\nJulia LaBella\n\nClaudia LaPlante\n\nCourtney Leach\n\nScott Ledbetter\n\nAaron Lee\n\nAlexa Lee\n\nChristopher Lee\n\nClayton Lee\n\nDale Lee\n\nTot Lee III\n\nWill Lee Jr.\n\nBryan Legg\n\nMarie Leifheit\n\nWesley Lemens\n\nJared Leseman\n\nAndy Levine\n\nMark Levingston\n\nChad Lewis\n\nTim Lewis\n\nTaylor Ley\n\nMicah LeGall\n\nSam Liebhart\n\nEric Lindberg\n\nJeffrey Lindsey\n\nLarry Lines\n\nAndrew Linguist\n\nRosie Linton\n\nJohn Little\n\nMichael Little\n\nRobby Little\n\nMichael Livingston\n\nNeil Lloyd\n\nLogan Lobue\n\nScott Locklear\n\nLyndel Loman\n\nAngie Long\n\nCarson Long\n\nDavid Long\n\nDiana Long\n\nEddy Long\n\nDan C. Lopata\n\nJohn Lorentz\n\nJames Louiso\n\nOwen Love\n\nFrancisco Lozano\n\nPetra Lozano De\n\nThompson\n\nBonnie Lucas\n\nCody J. Lucas\n\nHarvey Lucas Jr.\n\nTyler Lumpkin\n\nBill Lusk\n\nDustin Lynn\n\nGerald Mackenzie Jr.\n\nShad MacNaughton\n\nAshley Madison\n\nDaniel Maffei\n\nMarissa Mahan\n\nNicolas Mahan\n\nDamon Maikell\n\nBob Malecki\n\nJim Malone Jr.\n\nDale Manahan\n\nSid Manning\n\nJoe Marecic\n\nAaron Marlow\n\nStanley Marlow\n\nMichael Mars II\n\nLester Marsh\n\nEvan Marshall\n\nDan Martin\n\nJohn Martin Jr.\n\nMichael L. Martin\n\nRick Martin\n\nShane Martin\n\nStephen Martin\n\nJoe M. Martinez\n\nJoel Martinez Jr.\n\nRick Martinez\n\nPaul Marton\n\nJerry Massey Jr.\n\nEfraim Mata\n\nBrandon Mattison\n\nTamara Mauk\n\nJess Maulsby\n\nMatt Mayhew\n\nKevin McBee\n\nGary McBride\n\nJesse McCabe\n\nThomas McCambridge\n\nStu McCarthy\n\nBrad McCarty\n\nMichael McCarty\n\nJeff McCathern\n\nMichael McClintic\n\nOG McClinton Jr.\n\nBill McClure\n\nGlen McConnell\n\nChad McCool\n\nBrian McCoy\n\nKatie McCullin\n\nCrystal McCusker\n\nCalvin McDaniel\n\nDave McDiffitt\n\nBryan McDonald\n\nMickey McDonald Jr.\n\nDavid McFall\n\nChristopher W. McGinnis\n\nTravis McGloughlin\n\nRichard McGuire\n\nJasen McKay\n\nJames McKee\n\nMike McKee\n\nNathan McKeehan\n\nStephanie McLaughlin\n\nSteve McLaughlin\n\nNathan McMullen\n\nJanie McNabb\n\nKyle McNayr\n\nThomas Measel\n\nFidel Mendoza\n\nTay Mendoza\n\nLeah Merciez\n\nRyan Meyer\n\nRandal Mick\n\nTravis Miles\n\nKen Miller\n\nKenneth Miller\n\nKerri Miller\n\nKirby Miller\n\nMarianne Miller\n\nMike E. Miller Sr.\n\nSedrick Miller\n\nTim Miller\n\nDanya Mills\n\nKaren Mills\n\nRichard Minshew\n\nDanelle Minton\n\nTommy Mitch\n\nChris Mitchel\n\nRandall Mitchell\n\nRyan Mixon\n\nJames Mode\n\nDarin Molone\n\nCorey Montgomery\n\nRobert Montgomery\n\nCharlene Moore\n\nCliff Moore\n\nDaylan Moore\n\nDensel R. Moore Sr.\n\nDensel R. Moore Jr.\n\nJoel Moore\n\nMargaret Moore\n\nPhilip Moore\n\nErik Moorman\n\nAbel Morales-Macias\n\nKevin Morehead\n\nDuane Moreland\n\nArmando Moreno\n\nMark Muegge Jr.\n\nJared Mueller\n\nStacey Mullenax\n\nLevi Mullins\n\nLawrence R. Munsey\n\nBrian Murnahan\n\nRobert Murphy Jr.\n\nChristopher Musgrave\n\nKathy Myers\n\nMike Narcavage III\n\nRobbi Nartey\n\nTyrel Naugle\n\nAmy Neal\n\nGary Neal\n\nMichael Neal\n\nFreddy Neighbors\n\nRick Neiswonger\n\nTerry Neitzler\n\nJohnathon Nelson\n\nLisa Nelson\n\nSky Nelson\n\nMatthew Neubert\n\nBenjamin Nevill\n\nColin Newhouse\n\nO'Ryan Newton\n\nChris Nichols\n\nJonathan Nichols\n\nLuke Nichols\n\nSean Nichols\n\nKenneth Nickeson\n\nCassie Niemann\n\nJason Nieuwenhuis\n\nJustin Norman\n\nJames Novak\n\nConnie Nowell\n\nSelena Nunez\n\nJared Nutter\n\nDaniel Odell\n\nDean Ogden\n\nCharles Ohlson\n\nVictor Okeh\n\nJames Olive\n\nMichael S. Oliver\n\nDoug Olivier\n\nJames K. Olson Jr.\n\nBrent Opfer\n\nPam Orth\n\nRobert Ostrander Jr.\n\nAshley Overstreet II\n\nStacey Owen\n\nBlake O'Neill\n\n2010 ANNUAL REPORT |\n\n39\n\nJoseph Paup\n\nKathleen Penn\n\nSiva Pennabadi\n\nJames Penzo\n\nJames Perkins\n\nJoshua Perkins\n\nChris Persellin\n\nCatherine Peterson\n\nJay Petree\n\nJ R Pettijohn Jr.\n\nTu Phan\n\nKnut Philippi\n\nDaniel Phillips\n\nDustin Phillips\n\nLyn Phillips\n\nRichard Phillips\n\nJayson Pihajlic\n\nTimothy Place\n\nMonte Plummer\n\nJohn Poarch\n\nLevi Poe\n\nVenkat Pokkuluri\n\nAngie Pool\n\nCharles Poole\n\nKerry Poole\n\nTy Porche\n\nKenneth Porter\n\nAdia Powell\n\nNathan Powell\n\nNatalie Pralle\n\nChad Preston\n\nJerren Preston\n\nKyle Preston\n\nJames Price\n\nJeffrey Price\n\nJames Pritchard\n\nChase Pritchett\n\nJustin Pritchett\n\nAlan Procell\n\nMichael Proctor\n\nEstevan Puente\n\nKyle Puffinbarger\n\nBob Purgason\n\nMickle Putnam\n\nStony Queen\n\nStephanie Quinn\n\nAaron Rachall\n\nJeff Ragan\n\nMichael Raisig\n\nJuan J. Ramirez Jr.\n\nTim Ramirez\n\n## OKLAHOMA CITY, OKLAHOMA Largest in\n\nthe industry, Chesapeake's Geographic Information Systems department employs more than 60 geographers, cartographers and specialists.\n\nChristopher Morgan\n\nJames Morgan\n\nJustin Morgan\n\nNathan Morgan\n\nSloane Morgan\n\nDavid A. Morris\n\nDavid Morris Jr.\n\nJoseph Morris\n\nSydney Morris\n\nJames Mosby\n\nJason Mosley\n\nJames Mossor\n\nJustin Moxley\n\nKevin Pack\n\nMeosha Paige\n\nAllen Pair\n\nCristian Parau\n\nBill F. Parker\n\nNicholas Parker\n\nLaura Parrish\n\nEddie Parsons\n\nKevin Parsons\n\nReema Patel\n\nDavid Patterson II\n\nKathleen Patton\n\nBen Paugh\n\nTimothy Ramsey\n\nCathy Raney\n\nWill Ratcliffe\n\nGerald Ratliff\n\nCharles Ratts\n\nHillary Raubach\n\nDavid Rauh\n\nChristopher Ray\n\nDavid Ray\n\nJoseph Raybon\n\nReid Reagan\n\nMike L. Reddick\n\nJerry Reel", + "recall": 0.9863325740318907, + "true_md": "Allison Earl Shannon Earley Jeremy Easton Janelle Eaton Layna Edd Joseph F. Eddy III Jarrod Edens Christopher Edge Michael Edie Jeremy Edmister Kelly Edson Raymond Edwards Daniel Eidt Luis Elizondo John Elkins John Ellard Don Elliott Gilbert Ellis Jim Ellis Amanda Embry Joseph Emerson Gary Emmert Tyler Emrich Thomas Erp Christopher Escher Jevon Escobar Keith Eubanks Don Evans Jason Evener Lyric Ewing Richard Faries Chris Feazell Zachary Fegley Amy N. Ferguson Ronnie Ferguson Tyler Ferguson Maria Fernandez Michael Fesmire Linette Fibiger Brandin Fields Casey Fields Kevin Fields Peggy Fields Brett Finley Amanda Finney Jesse Fisher Mike Fisher Randy Fite Billy Fitt William Fitzgerald Jared Flesher Ronald Fletcher Toni Flowers Robert Foland Tim Fordenbacher Rhonda Fortuin Chris Fournier Bobby Fowler Sandra Fraley Chris Frazier LeeAnn Frazier Lynn French Tina Fruge Tyler Gage Darren Gagliardi Cecil Gamble Matthew Gammon Jim Gann Alfonso Garcia James Garcia Maria Garcia Joshua Garcie Greg Garrison Dan Garwood Alan Gary Naomi Garza Lynda Gearheart Nicole Geisinger Ryan George Todd George Kayla Geurkink Mark Geurkink Bert Gibson Josh D. Gibson Robert Gifford Michael Gilbert Jennifer Gilliam Ellen Gilliland Florence Gills Jr. James Gilpin\n\nTim Gilpin Shannon Glancy Travis Glauser Michael Gleason Bradley Glosup Karl Goebel Darrell Goeringer Devin Golden Jose Gonzales Cirilo Gonzalez Mark Goodin Richard Goodrich Daniel Gorham Julian Gorman Ryan Gorman Shawn Goss Adam Gossen Joseph Gottschall Melissa Goyer Mike Grady Inna Graham Caleb Grantges Matt Grassmyer Mike Graves James Gray Jr. Stanford Gray Trey Graybill III Lance Green Mike Green Whit Green Allan Greenawalt Dustin Greenway Josh Grellner Lambert Grim Brian Grove Christopher Guajardo Rich Guenther Glenda Guerra Rene Guerra Angel Guerrero Brian Gunsaulis BoJames Gunter Paul Gutta Sarah Hacker Ryan Haffner August Hadwiger David Hagadorn Keith Haggard Stephen Haggerty Greg Hakman Brian Hale Brandon Hall Dustin Hall Renee Hall Rick Hall Zach Hall Lynne Hames Clint Hamilton James Hamilton William Han Nick Hancock Kristi Hanna Sean Hansen David Harbin Daniel Hardy II Stephen Hardy Eddie Hare Alysia Hargus Aaron Harper Adam Harper Christopher Harper Jackie Harris Jerry Harris Berlin Harrison Mark R. Harrison Charles Hart Kevin Hart Larry Hartgrave Matthew Harville Leonard Harzinski Jr. Heath Hatcher Erin Hathaway John Hatton Thomas Haun Robert Havens Jr. William Hawkins Jr. D.J. Haydon Jr. Adam Haynes Kenneth Hays Allen Head\n\nJennie Heard Greg Heater Kellie Hefner Jeremiah Heldreth James Henderson Rob Hendle Jr. Sandra Hendrix David Hennessy Marcus Henry Phil Hensley Parish Henson Brandi Hernandez Jose Hernandez Raymond Herndon III Mike Hershberger Kurt Hibbard Alyssa Hickey Carlos Hicks Gary Hicks Jacala Hicks Jason Hicks Michael Hicks Dean Higganbotham Duke Hightower Christopher Hill Chase Hines Edgar Hinojos Kerry Hinsley Cory Hixson Angi Hodge Steven Hodges JaimeHodson Russell L. Hogue Dustin Holben Brandon Holley John Hollister Jolene Holloman Laura Holmes Clay Holt Gene Holt Thomas Hood Matt Hoops Wes Hope Amy Hopmann Jason Horn Jennifer Horrigan Sherry Hosey Lanny Hotaling Sara Howard Sherry Howell Eddie Howen Morgan Hudson Stacy Hudson Daniel Hudspeth Nathaniel Huggans Lori Hughes Hayley Humpert Jeremy Hunter Eddie Hurst Edward Hurst Kollin Hurt Kyle Hurt Lisa Hutcherson Allen Hutchins Kevin Hutchins Jon Hyde Wesley Hyde Neal Impson Donnie Ingram Patrick Innes Eric Inskeep Orlando Isaias Blake Jackson Brian Jackson Mark Jackson Shawn Jackson Kenneth James II Larry James Lamont Janz Ryan Jarratt Calvin Jarrell Robert E. Jarvis Victor Jarvis Jr. David Jennings Erinn Jennings Bob Joest Bradford Johnson Braydn Johnson Brian Johnson Gary W. Johnson\n\nJimmy J. Johnson Kevin Johnson Larry Johnson Matt Johnson Michael Johnson Rich Johnson II Scott Johnson Steve M. Johnson Amy Jones Bobby Jones Brady Jones Cyndi Jones Daniel Jones Emily Jones Jennifer Jones Jeremy Jones Julie Jones Scott Jones Whitney Jones Xavier Jones Will Jordan Ed Jozwick Ron Juratovac Alex Karim Clint Keating Cale Keim Mark Keitz Chad Kelley Jordan Kelley Matt Kemper Josh Kendrick Greg Kennedy Cheryl Kerr John Kiehlmeier John Kilgallon Colby King Jeremy King Melissa Kingry Will Kington WoodyKinney Michael Kinsey Kenny Kipper Wayne Kirk Jr. Whitney Kirk Kerry Kirksmith Heidi Kirsch John Kitchen Shayna Kjellsen Josh Kling Zackery Knell Aaron Knight Chuck Knight James Knight John G. Knox John M. Knox Todd Kreamer Ben Lacy JV Laffitte John Lair Daniel Lancaster Bobby Landrum Jr. Kim Landry David Lane Richard F. Lane Clay Langley Mike Langley Jimmie Laningham Daniel Lara Corey Lasley Joe Latham Brian Layman Lucy Lazos Julia LaBella Claudia LaPlante Courtney Leach ScottLedbetter Aaron Lee Alexa Lee Christopher Lee Clayton Lee Dale Lee Tot Lee III Will Lee Jr. Bryan Legg Marie Leifheit Wesley Lemens Jared Leseman Andy Levine Mark Levingston Chad Lewis\n\nTim Lewis Taylor Ley Micah LeGall Sam Liebhart Eric Lindberg Jeffrey Lindsey Larry Lines Andrew Linguist Rosie Linton John Little Michael Little Robby Little Michael Livingston Neil Lloyd Logan Lobue Scott Locklear Lyndel Loman Angie Long Carson Long David Long Diana Long Eddy Long Dan C. Lopata John Lorentz James Louiso Owen Love Francisco Lozano Petra Lozano De Thompson Bonnie Lucas Cody J. Lucas Harvey Lucas Jr. Tyler Lumpkin Bill Lusk Dustin Lynn Gerald Mackenzie Jr. Shad MacNaughton Ashley Madison Daniel Maffei Marissa Mahan Nicolas Mahan Damon Maikell Bob Malecki Jim Malone Jr. Dale Manahan Sid Manning Joe Marecic Aaron Marlow Stanley Marlow Michael Mars II Lester Marsh Evan Marshall Dan Martin John Martin Jr. Michael L. Martin Rick Martin Shane Martin Stephen Martin Joe M. Martinez Joel Martinez Jr. Rick Martinez Paul Marton Jerry Massey Jr. Efraim Mata Brandon Mattison Tamara Mauk Jess Maulsby Matt Mayhew Kevin McBee Gary McBride Jesse McCabe Thomas McCambridge Stu McCarthy Brad McCarty Michael McCarty Jeff McCathern Michael McClintic OG McClinton Jr. Bill McClure Glen McConnell ChadMcCool Brian McCoy Katie McCullin Crystal McCusker Calvin McDaniel Dave McDiffitt Bryan McDonald Mickey McDonald Jr. David McFall Christopher W. McGinnis\n\nChristopher Morgan James Morgan Justin Morgan Nathan Morgan Sloane Morgan David A. Morris David Morris Jr. Joseph Morris Sydney Morris James Mosby Jason Mosley James Mossor Justin Moxley\n\nKevin Pack Meosha Paige Allen Pair Cristian Parau Bill F. Parker Nicholas Parker Laura Parrish Eddie Parsons Kevin Parsons Reema Patel David Patterson II Kathleen Patton Ben Paugh\n\nTimothy Ramsey Cathy Raney Will Ratcliffe Gerald Ratliff Charles Ratts Hillary Raubach David Rauh Christopher Ray David Ray Joseph Raybon Reid Reagan Mike L. Reddick Jerry Reel\n\nTravis McGloughlin Richard McGuire JasenMcKay James McKee Mike McKee Nathan McKeehan Stephanie McLaughlin Steve McLaughlin Nathan McMullen Janie McNabb Kyle McNayr Thomas Measel Fidel Mendoza Tay Mendoza Leah Merciez Ryan Meyer Randal Mick Travis Miles Ken Miller Kenneth Miller Kerri Miller Kirby Miller Marianne Miller Mike E. Miller Sr. Sedrick Miller Tim Miller Danya Mills Karen Mills Richard Minshew Danelle Minton Tommy Mitch Chris Mitchel Randall Mitchell Ryan Mixon James Mode Darin Molone Corey Montgomery Robert Montgomery Charlene Moore Cliff Moore Daylan Moore Densel R. Moore Sr. Densel R. Moore Jr. JoelMoore Margaret Moore Philip Moore Erik Moorman Abel Morales-Macias KevinMorehead Duane Moreland Armando Moreno\n\nMark Muegge Jr. Jared Mueller Stacey Mullenax Levi Mullins Lawrence R. Munsey Brian Murnahan Robert Murphy Jr. Christopher Musgrave Kathy Myers Mike Narcavage III Robbi Nartey Tyrel Naugle Amy Neal Gary Neal Michael Neal Freddy Neighbors Rick Neiswonger Terry Neitzler Johnathon Nelson Lisa Nelson Sky Nelson Matthew Neubert Benjamin Nevill Colin Newhouse O’RyanNewton Chris Nichols Jonathan Nichols Luke Nichols Sean Nichols Kenneth Nickeson Cassie Niemann Jason Nieuwenhuis Justin Norman James Novak Connie Nowell Selena Nunez Jared Nutter Daniel Odell Dean Ogden Charles Ohlson Victor Okeh James Olive Michael S. Oliver Doug Olivier James K. Olson Jr. Brent Opfer Pam Orth Robert Ostrander Jr. Ashley Overstreet II Stacey Owen Blake O’Neill\n\nJoseph Paup Kathleen Penn Siva Pennabadi James Penzo James Perkins Joshua Perkins Chris Persellin Catherine Peterson Jay Petree J R Pettijohn Jr. Tu Phan Knut Philippi Daniel Phillips Dustin Phillips Lyn Phillips Richard Phillips Jayson Pihajlic Timothy Place Monte Plummer John Poarch Levi Poe Venkat Pokkuluri Angie Pool Charles Poole Kerry Poole Ty Porche Kenneth Porter Adia Powell Nathan Powell Natalie Pralle Chad Preston Jerren Preston Kyle Preston James Price Jeffrey Price James Pritchard Chase Pritchett Justin Pritchett Alan Procell Michael Proctor Estevan Puente Kyle Puffinbarger Bob Purgason Mickle Putnam Stony Queen Stephanie Quinn Aaron Rachall Jeff Ragan Michael Raisig Juan J. Ramirez Jr. Tim Ramirez\n\n2010 ANNUAL REPORT | 39\n\nOKLAHOMA CITY, OKLAHOMA Largest in the industry, Chesapeake’s Geographic Information Systems department employs more than 60 geographers, cartographers and specialists." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9307740827573925, + "doc_id": "5210723e3ff1a361ff24eab3acf345b6a77f91791c03032552df3df1c5742718", + "edit_distance": 0.58, + "f1_score": 0.9750000000000001, + "meteor": 0.9265388502919106, + "precision": 0.9855595667870036, + "pred_md": "17\n\nOperations Report\n\n## CHATREE EXPLORATION\n\nChatree Geologist examining drill core\n\nChatree Geologist examining drill core\n\nWith the approvals of the Special Prospecting Licence (\"SPL\") applications still awaiting the Minister of Industry's consent, exploration attention over the past 12 months has focused on new exploration opportunities and Mineral Resource enhancement targets within the Chatree Mining Leases. This exploration formed part of a strategic exploration program within the mining leases that commenced in late 2012 and was designed to investigate a number of specific areas that had the potential to upgrade both Mineral Resources and ore reserves at Chatree and included:\n\n- 〉 Upgrading Inferred Resources for optimal long term mine planning;\n- 〉 Targeting extensions to currently known areas of mineralisation; and\n- 〉 Exploring deeper higher grade structures that may have the potential to extend the pit deeper or potential for underground mining.\n\nHighlights from this drilling program were most notable at A Prospect and Q Prospect.\n\nExploration drilling within the Mining Lease north of A Pit identified a new area of broad high grade gold mineralisation confirming the continuation of the A East Structure north of the existing resource.\n\nSignificant results from these two holes include:\n\n- 〉 07559DD - 49.4 m @ 4.3 g/t Au from 227 m (including 29.8 m @ 6.25 g/t Au from 246 m); and\n- 〉 07575RD - 35.8 m @ 5.3 g/t Au from 235 m (including 3 m @ 45.30 Au g/t from 255 m).\n\nAt Q Prospect, immediately to the north of A Pit, exploration drilling encountered broad high grade gold mineralisation at surface that was not identified in previous campaigns. Significant results include:\n\n- 〉 4715RC - 24.0 m @ 5.6 g/t Au from surface (including 8 m @ 11.3 g/t Au from 14 m);\n- 〉 4718RC - 34.0 m @ 1.7 g/t Au from surface;\n- 〉 4720RC - 26.0 m @ 0.9 g/t Au from surface;\n- 〉 4636DD - 7.4 m @ 5.5 g/t Au from 219 m; and\n- 〉 4732RC - 21.0 m @ 2.2 g/t Au from 111 m.\n\nThe success from this discovery of near surface gold mineralisation at Q Prospect allowed for commencement of mining activities in the area which has in turn had a positive impact on the Chatree operations in the latter half of the year.\n\nGuided by this exploration strategy, drilling activity has successfully defined several new\n\nareas of mineralisation within the Mining Lease, most notably at Q and A North Prospects, and has also upgraded several larger areas of Inferred Resources to the Measured and Indicated Mineral Resource category. This activity sees an additional 30,300 metres of reverse circulation and diamond drilling included into the estimation of a new Mineral Resource and Ore Reserve at Chatree.\n\nAs at the end of April 2013, the Mineral Resource estimate at Chatree using 0.30 g/t cut-off grade totals 4.03 million ounces of gold and 32.8 million ounces silver in 188.3 million tonnes of rock. The upgraded resource, including depletion from production to the end of April 2013, represents an increase of 356,000 ounces of gold and 2,162,000 ounces of silver when compared to the June 2012 Mineral Resource estimate for Chatree at the same cut-off grade.\n\nWith the sharp fall in the gold price during April 2013, exploration drilling focus shifted to near surface oxide gold targets within the mining lease. Discovery of additional oxide gold mineralisation would have immediate benefits to the operation. Longer term exploration targets were temporarily suspended whilst the drilling focused on shorter term oxide targets in the early part of the new year.\n\ncontinued\n\nu\n\nOperations Report", + "recall": 0.9646643109540636, + "true_md": "Operations Report 17\n\nOperations Report\n\n## CHATREE EXPLORATION\n\nChatree Geologist examining drill core\n\nWith the approvals of the Special Prospecting Licence (\"SPL\") applications still awaiting the Minister of Industry’s consent, exploration attention over the past 12 months has focused on new exploration opportunities and Mineral Resource enhancement targets within the Chatree Mining Leases. This exploration formed part of a strategic exploration program within the mining leases that commenced in late 2012 and was designed to investigate a number of specific areas that had the potential to upgrade both Mineral Resources and ore reserves at Chatree and included:\n\nHighlights from this drilling program were most notable at A Prospect and Q Prospect. \n\nExploration drilling within the Mining Lease north of A Pit identified a new area of broad high grade gold mineralisation confirming the contin- uation of the A East Structure north of the existing resource. \n\nSignificant results from these two holes include:\n\nAt Q Prospect, immediately to the north of A Pit, exploration drilling encountered broad high grade gold mineralisation at surface that was not identified in previous campaigns. Significant results include:\n\nThe success from this discovery of near surface gold mineralisation at Q Prospect allowed for commencement of mining activities in the area which has in turn had a positive impact on the Chatree operations in the latter half of the year.\n\nGuided by this exploration strategy, drilling activity has successfully defined several new \n\nareas of mineralisation within the Mining Lease, most notably at Q and A North Prospects, and has also upgraded several larger areas of Inferred Resources to the Measured and Indicated Mineral Resource category. This activity sees an additional 30,300 metres of reverse circulation and diamond drilling included into the estima- tion of a new Mineral Resource and Ore Reserve at Chatree.\n\nAs at the end of April 2013, the Mineral Resource estimate at Chatree using 0.30 g/t cut-off grade totals 4.03 million ounces of gold and 32.8 million ounces silver in 188.3 million tonnes of rock. The upgraded resource, including deple- tion from production to the end of April 2013, represents an increase of 356,000 ounces of gold and 2,162,000 ounces of silver when compared to the June 2012 Mineral Resource estimate for Chatree at the same cut-off grade.\n\nWith the sharp fall in the gold price during April 2013, exploration drilling focus shifted to near surface oxide gold targets within the mining lease. Discovery of additional oxide gold miner- alisation would have immediate benefits to the operation. Longer term exploration targets were temporarily suspended whilst the drilling focused on shorter term oxide targets in the early part of the new year. \n\n- 〉 Upgrading Inferred Resources for optimal long term mine planning;\n\n- 〉 Targeting extensions to currently known areas of mineralisation; and\n\n- 〉 Exploring deeper higher grade structures that may have the potential to extend the pit deeper or potential for underground mining.\n\n- 〉 07559DD – 49.4 m @ 4.3 g/t Au from 227 m (including 29.8 m @ 6.25 g/t Au from 246 m); and \n\n- 〉 07575RD – 35.8 m @ 5.3 g/t Au from 235 m (including 3 m @ 45.30 Au g/t from 255 m).\n\n- 〉 4715RC – 24.0 m @ 5.6 g/t Au from surface (including 8 m @ 11.3 g/t Au from 14 m);\n\n- 〉 4718RC – 34.0 m @ 1.7 g/t Au from surface;\n\n- 〉 4720RC – 26.0 m @ 0.9 g/t Au from surface;\n\n- 〉 4636DD – 7.4 m @ 5.5 g/t Au from 219 m; and\n\n- 〉 4732RC – 21.0 m @ 2.2 g/t Au from 111 m.\n\ncontinued u" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8053905798551774, + "doc_id": "10ecf01290eb3e7ad1143dfb950173c54a26bf6649a9e8f978f426ecfafffec9", + "edit_distance": 0.12643678160919541, + "f1_score": 0.9600000000000002, + "meteor": 0.9358723958333334, + "precision": 0.967741935483871, + "pred_md": "SMBC\n\n## Trust Assets and Liabilities (Nonconsolidated)\n\nSumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation\n\n## Statements of Trust Assets and Liabilities\n\n- Notes: 1. Amounts less than 1 million yen have been omitted.\n- 2. SMBC has no co-operative trusts under any other trust bank's administration as of the year-end.\n- 3. SMBC does not deal with any trusts with principal indemnification.\n- 4. Excludes trusts whose monetary values are difficult to calculate.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n178", + "recall": 0.9523809523809523, + "true_md": "SMBC\n\n## Trust Assets and Liabilities (Nonconsolidated)\n\nSumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation\n\nStatements of Trust Assets and Liabilities\n\nNotes: 1. Amounts less than 1 million yen have been omitted.\n\n2. SMBC has no co-operative trusts under any other trust bank’s administration as of the year-end.\n\n3. SMBC does not deal with any trusts with principal indemnification.\n\n4. Excludes trusts whose monetary values are difficult to calculate.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n178\n\nMillions of yen" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "36177391ef802645898153f0d0d629dbf9e79608e144d5da3f22d54cb25766b7", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.999958905235473, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CHANGES IN EQUITY\n\nThe accompanying notes are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements\n\n- 57 -", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CHANGES IN EQUITY\n\nThe accompanying notes are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements \n\n- 57 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8352639084690539, + "doc_id": "f4b122a7df157179cf455249e529886d5e03ebe096446a8d0e13f52a62402380", + "edit_distance": 0.14285714285714285, + "f1_score": 0.9689922480620154, + "meteor": 0.8347825346770367, + "precision": 0.984251968503937, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 31 - SHARE BASED PAYMENTS continued\n\nThe following table summarises the key assumptions used to calculate the estimated fair value awarded or granted during the year ended 31 December 2013:\n\n2013\n\n## Restricted Share Units\n\nDuring the years ended 31 December 2014 and 2013, the Board of Directors awarded 2,839,626 and 1,237,994 RSUs to certain employees. These awards were made in accordance with the long-term equity component of the Company's incentive compensation plan, the details of which are described in more detail in the remuneration section of the Directors' Report. Share based payment expense for RSUs awarded was calculated pursuant to AASB 2 / IFRS 2. The fair values of RSUs were estimated at the date they were approved by the Board of Directors (the measurement dates) based on the Company's stock price at the date of grant. The value of the vested portion of these awards has been recognised within the financial statements. This information is summarised for the Group for the years ended 31 December 2014 and 2013, respectively, below:\n\nThe following tables summarise the RSUs issued and their related grant date, fair value and vesting conditions:\n\n## RSUs awarded during the year ended 31 December 2014:\n\n- 96 -", + "recall": 0.9541984732824428, + "true_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 31 – SHARE BASED PAYMENTS continued\n\nThe following table summarises the key assumptions used to calculate the estimated fair value awarded or granted during the year ended 31 December 2013: 2013 \n\nRestricted Share Units During the years ended 31 December 2014 and 2013, the Board of Directors awarded 2,839,626 and 1,237,994 RSUs to certain employees. These awards were made in accordance with the long-term equity component of the Company’s incentive compensation plan, the details of which are described in more detail in the remuneration section of the Directors’ Report. Share based payment expense for RSUs awarded was calculated pursuant to AASB 2 / IFRS 2. The fair values of RSUs were estimated at the date they were approved by the Board of Directors (the measurement dates) based on the Company’s stock price at the date of grant. The value of the vested portion of these awards has been recognised within the financial statements. This information is summarised for the Group for the years ended 31 December 2014 and 2013, respectively, below: \n\n## Restricted Share Units During the years ended 31 December 2014 and 2013, the Board of Directors awarded 2,839,626 and 1,237,994 RSUs\n\nThe following tables summarise the RSUs issued and their related grant date, fair value and vesting conditions: \n\nRSUs awarded during the year ended 31 December 2014: Estimated Fair Value \n\n- 96 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8921804196548989, + "doc_id": "ec1b8b26d559fc7f0f301805fd360fa5acb4703ab97032102e5b92d7e000fa0b", + "edit_distance": 0.826625386996904, + "f1_score": 0.9499192245557351, + "meteor": 0.5887037216948993, + "precision": 0.9702970297029703, + "pred_md": "SMFG\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n## 30. Financial Instruments\n\n## (1) Status of financial instruments\n\n## (a) Policies on financial instruments\n\nSMFG conducts banking and other financial services such as securities, leasing, credit card, invest banking, consumer finance, and venture capital. Its banking business includes deposit taking, lending, securities trading, securities investment, domestic and foreign exchange transactions, brokerage, etc. of financial futures transactions, etc., corporate bond trust services, trust business, sale of securities investment trusts, sale of insurance products, and securities intermediary services.\n\nThese services entail holding of financial assets such as loans and bills discounted, bonds, and stocks. Meanwhile, SMFG raises funds through deposit taking, borrowing, bond offering, etc. Furthermore, it undertakes derivative transactions to meet customers' hedging needs, to control market risk associated with deposit taking and lending ('ALM purposes'), and to make profit on short-term fluctuations in interest rates, foreign exchange rates, etc. ('trading purposes').\n\n(b) Details of financial instruments and associated risks\n\n## (i) Financial assets\n\nThe main financial assets held by SMFG include loans to foreign and domestic companies and domestic individuals, and securities such as bonds (government and corporate bonds) and stocks (foreign and domestic stocks), etc. Bonds such as government bonds are held for both trading and ALM purposes, and certain bonds are held as held-to-maturity securities. Stocks are held mainly for strategic purposes. These assets expose SMFG to credit risk, market risk and liquidity risk. Credit risk is the risk of loss arising from nonperformance of obligations by the borrower or issuer due to factors such as deterioration in the borrower's/issuer's financial conditions. Market risk is the risk stemming from fluctuations in interest rates, exchange rates, or share prices. Liquidity risk is the risk arising from difficulty executing transactions in desired quantities at appropriate prices due to low market liquidity. These risks are properly monitored and managed based on '(c) Risk management framework for financial instruments' below.\n\n## (ii) Financial liabilities\n\nFinancial liabilities of SMFG include borrowed money and bonds, etc. in addition to deposits. Deposits mainly comprise deposits of domestic and foreign companies and domestic individuals. Borrowed money and bonds include subordinated borrowings and subordinated bonds. Also, financial liabilities, like financial assets, expose SMFG to not only market risk but also funding liquidity risk: the risk of SMFG not being able to raise funds due to market turmoil, deterioration in its creditworthiness or other factors. These risks are properly monitored and managed based on '(c) Risk management framework for financial instruments' below.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n98\n\n## (iii) Derivative transactions\n\nDerivatives handled by SMFG include foreign exchange futures; futures, forwards, swaps and options related to interest rates, currencies, equities, bonds and commodities; and credit and weather derivatives.\n\nMajor risks associated with derivatives include market risk, liquidity risk, and credit risk arising from nonperformance of contractual obligations due to deterioration in the counterparty's financial conditions. These risks are properly monitored and managed based on '(c) Risk management framework for financial instruments' below.\n\nHedge accounting is applied to derivative transactions executed for ALM purposes, as necessary. Hedging instruments, hedged items, hedging policy and the method to assess the effectiveness of hedging are described in Note 2. (17) Hedge accounting.\n\n## (c) Risk management framework for financial instruments\n\nThe fundamental matters on risk management for SMFG are set forth in 'Risk Management Regulations.' SMFG's Management Committee establishes the basic risk management policy, based on the Regulations, which is then approved by the Board of Directors. SMFG has a risk management system based on the basic policy. The Corporate Risk Management Department, which, together with the Corporate Planning Department, controls risk management across SMFG by monitoring the development and implementation of SMFG's risk management system, and gives appropriate guidance as needed. Under this framework, SMFG comprehensively and systematically manages risks.\n\n## (i) Management of credit risk\n\nSMFG conducts integrated management of credit risk according to its operational characteristics, and the credit risk inherent in its entire portfolio as well as the risk in individual credits are managed quantitatively and continuously.\n\n- i. Credit risk management system\n\nAt SMBC, basic policies on credit risk management and other significant matters require the resolution of the Management Committee and the approval of the Board of Directors.\n\nThe Credit & Investment Planning Department of the Risk Management Unit is responsible for the comprehensive management of credit risk. This department establishes, revises or abolishes credit policies, the internal rating system, credit authority regulations, credit application regulations, and manages nonperforming loans and other aspects of credit portfolio management. The department also controls SMBC's total credit risk by quantifying credit risk (i.e. calculating risk capital and risk-weighted assets) in cooperation with the Corporate Risk Management Department. The department also monitors risk situations and regularly reports to the Management Committee and the Board of Directors.", + "recall": 0.930379746835443, + "true_md": "SMFG Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n## 30. Financial Instruments\n\nSMFG 2011 98\n\nThe Credit & Investment Planning Department of the Risk Management Unit is responsible for the comprehensive management of credit risk. This depart- ment establishes, revises or abolishes credit policies, the internal rating system, credit authority regulations, credit application regulations, and manages non- performing loans and other aspects of credit portfolio management. The department also controls SMBC’s total credit risk by quantifying credit risk (i.e. calculat- ing risk capital and risk-weighted assets) in cooperation with the Corporate Risk Management Department. \n\nThe department also monitors risk situations and regularly reports to the Management Committee and the Board of Directors.\n\nFinancial liabilities of SMFG include borrowed money and bonds, etc. in addition to deposits. Deposits mainly comprise deposits of domestic and foreign companies and domestic individuals. Borrowed money and bonds include subordinated borrowings and subordinated bonds. Also, financial liabilities, like financial assets, expose SMFG to not only market risk but also funding liquidity risk: the risk of SMFG not being able to raise funds due to market turmoil, deterioration in its creditworthiness or other factors. These risks are properly monitored and managed based on “(c) Risk management framework for financial instruments” below.\n\nSMFG conducts integrated management of credit risk according to its operational characteristics, and the credit risk inherent in its entire portfolio as well as the risk in individual credits are managed quantitatively and continuously.\n\nSMFG conducts banking and other financial services such as securities, leasing, credit card, invest banking, consumer finance, and venture capital. Its banking business includes deposit taking, lending, securities trading, securities investment, domestic and foreign exchange transactions, brokerage, etc. of financial futures transactions, etc., cor- porate bond trust services, trust business, sale of securities investment trusts, sale of insurance products, and securities intermediary services.\n\nDerivatives handled by SMFG include foreign exchange futures; futures, forwards, swaps and options related to interest rates, currencies, equities, bonds and commodi- ties; and credit and weather derivatives.\n\nMajor risks associated with derivatives include market risk, liquidity risk, and credit risk arising from nonperformance of contractual obligations due to deterioration in the counterparty’s financial conditions. These risks are properly monitored and managed based on “(c) Risk management framework for financial instruments” below.\n\nHedge accounting is applied to derivative transac- tions executed for ALM purposes, as necessary. Hedging instruments, hedged items, hedging policy and the method to assess the effectiveness of hedging are described in Note 2. (17) Hedge accounting.\n\nThe fundamental matters on risk management for SMFG are set forth in “Risk Management Regulations.” SMFG’s Management Committee establishes the basic risk management policy, based on the Regulations, which is then approved by the Board of Directors. SMFG has a risk management system based on the basic policy. The Corporate Risk Management Department, which, together with the Corporate Planning Department, controls risk management across SMFG by monitoring the development and implementation of SMFG’s risk management system, and gives appropriate guidance as needed. Under this framework, SMFG comprehensively and systematically manages risks.\n\nAt SMBC, basic policies on credit risk management and other significant matters require the resolution of the Management Committee and the approval of the Board of Directors.\n\nThe main financial assets held by SMFG include loans to foreign and domestic companies and domestic individuals, and securities such as bonds (government and corporate bonds) and stocks (foreign and domestic stocks), etc. Bonds such as government bonds are held for both trading and ALM purposes, and certain bonds are held as held-to-maturity securities. Stocks are held mainly for strategic purposes. These assets expose SMFG to credit risk, market risk and liquidity risk. \n\nCredit risk is the risk of loss arising from nonperfor- mance of obligations by the borrower or issuer due to factors such as deterioration in the borrower’s/issuer’s financial conditions. Market risk is the risk stemming from fluctuations in interest rates, exchange rates, or share prices. Liquidity risk is the risk arising from difficulty executing transactions in desired quantities at appropriate prices due to low market liquidity. These risks are properly monitored and managed based on “(c) Risk management framework for financial instru- ments” below.\n\nThese services entail holding of financial assets such as loans and bills discounted, bonds, and stocks. Meanwhile, SMFG raises funds through deposit taking, borrowing, bond offering, etc. Furthermore, it undertakes derivative transactions to meet customers’ hedging needs, to control market risk associated with deposit taking and lending (“ALM purposes”), and to make profit on short-term fluctuations in interest rates, foreign exchange rates, etc. (“trading purposes”).\n\n- (b) Details of financial instruments and associated risks\n\n- (i) Financial assets\n\n- (c) Risk management framework for financial instruments\n\n- (ii) Financial liabilities\n\n- i. Credit risk management system\n\n- (i) Management of credit risk\n\n- (iii) Derivative transactions\n\n- (a) Policies on financial instruments\n\n- (1) Status of financial instruments" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9567077594790548, + "doc_id": "af336178f1eefca6da8b633a5c45f02b64c27b856a87e5da734ff8118c3d50c2", + "edit_distance": 0.04326923076923077, + "f1_score": 0.9743589743589742, + "meteor": 0.9809281488550236, + "precision": 0.9827586206896551, + "pred_md": "## Independent Auditors' Report\n\nTo the Board of Directors of Sumitomo Mitsui Financial Group, Inc.:\n\nWe have audited the accompanying consolidated balance sheets of Sumitomo Mitsui Financial Group, Inc. ('SMFG') and subsidiaries as of March 31, 2011 and 2010, and the related consolidated statements of income, changes in net assets and cash flows for the years then ended, and the consolidated statement of comprehensive income for the year ended March 31, 2011 expressed in Japanese yen. These consolidated financial statements are the responsibility of SMFG's management. Our responsibility is to independently express an opinion on these consolidated financial statements based on our audits.\n\nWe conducted our audits in accordance with auditing standards generally accepted in Japan. Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement. An audit includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements. An audit also includes assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.\n\nIn our opinion, the consolidated financial statements referred to above present fairly, in all material respects, the consolidated financial position of SMFG and subsidiaries as of March 31, 2011 and 2010, and the consolidated results of their operations and their cash flows for the years then ended, in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in Japan.\n\n## Additional Information:\n\nAs discussed in Note 37 to the consolidated financial statements, SMFG acquired and cancelled its 1st series Type 6 preferred stock on April 1, 2011, based on a resolution at the meeting of the Board of Directors held on February 28, 2011.\n\nThe consolidated financial statements as of and for the year ended March 31, 2011 have been translated into United States dollars solely for convenience of the readers. We have recomputed the translation, and, in our opinion, the consolidated financial statements expressed in Japanese yen have been translated into United States dollars on the basis set forth in Note 1 to the consolidated financial statements.\n\nTokyo, Japan\n\nJune 29, 2011\n\nSMFG 2011\n\nSMFG\n\n139", + "recall": 0.9661016949152542, + "true_md": "SMFG\n\n## Independent Auditors’ Report\n\nTo the Board of Directors of\n\nSumitomo Mitsui Financial Group, Inc.:\n\nWe have audited the accompanying consolidated balance sheets of Sumitomo Mitsui Financial Group, Inc. (“SMFG”) and subsidiaries as of March 31, 2011 and 2010, and the related consolidated statements of income, changes in net assets and cash flows for the years then ended, and the consolidated statement of comprehensive income for the year ended March 31, 2011 expressed in Japanese yen. These consolidated financial statements are the responsibility of SMFG’s management. Our responsibility is to independently express an opinion on these consolidated financial state- ments based on our audits.\n\nWe conducted our audits in accordance with auditing standards generally accepted in Japan. Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement. An audit includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements. An audit also includes assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.\n\nIn our opinion, the consolidated financial statements referred to above present fairly, in all material respects, the consolidated financial position of SMFG and subsidiaries as of March 31, 2011 and 2010, and the consolidated results of their operations and their cash flows for the years then ended, in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in Japan.\n\nAdditional Information: As discussed in Note 37 to the consolidated financial statements, SMFG acquired and cancelled its 1st series Type 6 preferred stock on April 1, 2011, based on a resolution at the meeting of the Board of Directors held on February 28, 2011.\n\nThe consolidated financial statements as of and for the year ended March 31, 2011 have been translated into United States dollars solely for convenience of the readers. We have recomputed the translation, and, in our opinion, the consolidated financial statements expressed in Japanese yen have been translated into United States dollars on the basis set forth in Note 1 to the consolidated financial statements.\n\nSMFG 2011 139\n\nTokyo, Japan\n\nJune 29, 2011" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.537811555155629, + "doc_id": "c8e0e352e156042b8384870978d73542bf65a01f3dddae005e703b7a9a622f48", + "edit_distance": 0.5195652173913043, + "f1_score": 0.9665427509293681, + "meteor": 0.537432620867628, + "precision": 0.9701492537313433, + "pred_md": "## 7.2 Reserves Committee\n\nDuring July 2014, the Board established a Reserves Committee to assist the Board in monitoring:\n\n- · The integrity of the Company's oil, natural gas, and natural gas liquid reserves (the 'Reserves');\n- · The independence, qualifications and performance of the Company's independent reservoir engineers; and\n- · The compliance by the Company with legal and regulatory requirements.\n\nThe Reserves Committee consists of three members, H W Holcombe (chairman), M D Hannell, and N Martin, all whom are independent Non-Executive Directors. Formal minutes are kept of each meeting and submitted to the Board for review.\n\nThe Reserves Committee Charter is available in the corporate governance section of Sundance's website.\n\n## Principle 8: Remunerate Fairly and Responsibly\n\n## 8.1 Remuneration and Nominations Committee\n\nThe Remuneration and Nominations Committee has three members, M D Hannell (chairman), D Hannes and H W Holcombe, all whom are independent Non-Executive Directors, and reports its recommendations to the Board for approval. The Committee determines remuneration levels of senior staff on an individual basis. Advice is sought from an independent consultant based in the U.S.\n\nThe remuneration of Non-Executive Directors is structured separately from that of the executive Director and senior executives. The Remuneration Report at pages 28 to 43 of this Annual Report sets out details of the Company's policies and practices for remunerating Directors (Executive and Non-Executive) and Key Management Personnel.\n\nThe Remuneration and Nominations Committee Charter is available in the corporate governance section of Sundance's website.\n\n- 53 -", + "recall": 0.9629629629629629, + "true_md": "## 7.2 Reserves Committee During July 2014, the Board established a Reserves Committee to assist the Board in monitoring:\n\n## Principle 8: Remunerate Fairly and Responsibly\n\n## 8.1 Remuneration and Nominations Committee The Remuneration and Nominations Committee has three members, M D Hannell (chairman), D Hannes and H W Holcombe, all\n\n7.2 Reserves Committee During July 2014, the Board established a Reserves Committee to assist the Board in monitoring: • The integrity of the Company’s oil, natural gas, and natural gas liquid reserves (the “Reserves”); \n\nThe Reserves Committee consists of three members, H W Holcombe (chairman), M D Hannell, and N Martin, all whom are independent Non-Executive Directors. Formal minutes are kept of each meeting and submitted to the Board for review. \n\nThe Reserves Committee Charter is available in the corporate governance section of Sundance’s website.\n\n8.1 Remuneration and Nominations Committee The Remuneration and Nominations Committee has three members, M D Hannell (chairman), D Hannes and H W Holcombe, all whom are independent Non-Executive Directors, and reports its recommendations to the Board for approval. The Committee determines remuneration levels of senior staff on an individual basis. Advice is sought from an independent consultant based in the U.S. \n\nThe remuneration of Non-Executive Directors is structured separately from that of the executive Director and senior executives. The Remuneration Report at pages 28 to 43 of this Annual Report sets out details of the Company’s policies and practices for remunerating Directors (Executive and Non-Executive) and Key Management Personnel. \n\nThe Remuneration and Nominations Committee Charter is available in the corporate governance section of Sundance’s website. \n\n- During July 2014, the Board established a Reserves Committee to assist the Board in monitoring: • The integrity of the Company’s oil, natural gas, and natural gas liquid reserves (the “Reserves”); • The independence, qualifications and performance of the Company’s independent reservoir engineers; and \n\n- • The integrity of the Company’s oil, natural gas, and natural gas liquid reserves (the “Reserves”); • The independence, qualifications and performance of the Company’s independent reservoir engineers; and • The compliance by the Company with legal and regulatory requirements. \n\n- • The independence, qualifications and performance of the Company’s independent reservoir engineers; and • The compliance by the Company with legal and regulatory requirements. \n\n- 53 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7373779344359596, + "doc_id": "33927ebaa37c18d9218a8f6eb29f0501d9b4606557d51890cea6b34aea8888b2", + "edit_distance": 0.3273809523809524, + "f1_score": 0.8841201716738197, + "meteor": 0.813779825847671, + "precision": 0.9809523809523809, + "pred_md": "## SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY\n\n16 ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\nATTAINING LEADERSHIP IN OUR INDUSTRY AND THE PRIVILEGE OF BEING CANADIANS' COMPANY-OF-CHOICE IS ABOUT DELIVERING THE BEST INNOVATIVE SERVICES WHILE BEING A RESPONSIBLE BUSINESS - AIMS THAT ARE DEEPLY CONNECTED.\n\nEach year we work hard to build a more sustainable business and contribute to building a more sustainable world. Applying social and environmental responsibility throughout Rogers' daily operations - and beyond our own walls to our supply chain and communities - helps us attract customers, enhance employee recruitment and retention, mitigate risks and provide value to all of our stakeholders.\n\nTo create a great workplace, we focus on all aspects of the employee experience - investing millions in employee training and development, providing attractive compensation and benefits, and developing a", + "recall": 0.8046875, + "true_md": "ATTAINING LEADERSHIP IN OUR INDUSTRY AND THE PRIVILEGE OF BEING CANADIANS’ COMPANY-OF-CHOICE IS ABOUT DELIVERING THE BEST INNOVATIVE SERVICES WHILE BEING A RESPONSIBLE BUSINESS – AIMS THAT ARE DEEPLY CONNECTED. \n\nEach year we work hard to build a more sustainable business and contribute to building a more sustainable world. Applying social and environmental responsibility throughout Rogers’ daily operations – and beyond our own walls to our supply chain and communities – helps us attract customers, enhance employee recruitment and retention, mitigate risks and provide value to all of our stakeholders. \n\nTo create a great workplace, we focus on all aspects of the employee experience – investing millions in employee training and development, providing attractive compensation and benefits, and developing a \n\n16 ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n## SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY\n\nYOUTH EDUCATION\n\nEMPLOYEE EXPERIENCE\n\nCOMMUNITY INVESTMENT\n\nECONOMIC CONTRIBUTIONS\n\nENVIRONMENTAL RESPONSIBILITY\n\nGOOD GOVERNANCE\n\nARTS & CULTURE\n\nETHICAL SUPPLY CHAIN\n\nLOCAL SHELTERS & FOOD BANKS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8673894317885111, + "doc_id": "480c9abfc0e81d40c5ff1cee510e6dcf77ba3a7e9465df7f3cddc65acdf3ab80", + "edit_distance": 0.7589041095890411, + "f1_score": 0.9779005524861878, + "meteor": 0.7306226460408503, + "precision": 0.9833333333333333, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 28 - CONTINGENT ASSETS AND LIABILITIES\n\nAt the date of signing this report, the Group is not aware of any contingent assets or liabilities that should be recognised or disclosed in accordance with AASB 137/IFRS 37 Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets.\n\n## NOTE 29 - OPERATING SEGMENTS\n\nThe Company's strategic focus is the exploration, development and production of large, repeatable onshore resource plays in North America, which is the Company's only major line of business and only major geographic area of operations. All of the basins and/or formations in which the Company operates have common operational characteristics, challenges and economic characteristics. As such, Management has determined, based upon the reports reviewed and used to make strategic decisions by the Chief Operating Decision Maker ('CODM'), whom is the Company's Managing Director and Chief Executive Officer, that the Company has one reportable segment being oil and natural gas exploration and production in North America.\n\nThe CODM reviews internal management reports on a monthly basis that are consistent with the information provided in the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income, statement of financial position and statement of cash flows. As a result no reconciliation is required, because the information as presented is used by the CODM to make strategic decisions.\n\n## Geographic Information\n\nThe operations of the Group are located in only one geographic location, North America. All revenue is generated from sales to customers located in North America.\n\nRevenue from one major customer exceeded 10 percent of Group consolidated revenue for the year ended 31 December 2014 and accounted for 65 percent (2013: four major customers accounted for 47 percent, 15 percent, 10 percent and 10 percent) of our consolidated oil, natural gas and NGL revenues.\n\n- 93 -", + "recall": 0.9725274725274725, + "true_md": "- 93 - \n\nRevenue from one major customer exceeded 10 percent of Group consolidated revenue for the year ended 31 December 2014 and accounted for 65 percent (2013: four major customers accounted for 47 percent, 15 percent, 10 percent and 10 percent) of our consolidated oil, natural gas and NGL revenues. \n\nGeographic Information The operations of the Group are located in only one geographic location, North America. All revenue is generated from sales to customers located in North America. \n\nThe CODM reviews internal management reports on a monthly basis that are consistent with the information provided in the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income, statement of financial position and statement of cash flows. As a result no reconciliation is required, because the information as presented is used by the CODM to make strategic decisions. \n\nThe Company’s strategic focus is the exploration, development and production of large, repeatable onshore resource plays in North America, which is the Company’s only major line of business and only major geographic area of operations. All of the basins and/or formations in which the Company operates have common operational characteristics, challenges and economic characteristics. As such, Management has determined, based upon the reports reviewed and used to make strategic decisions by the Chief Operating Decision Maker (“CODM”), whom is the Company’s Managing Director and Chief Executive Officer, that the Company has one reportable segment being oil and natural gas exploration and production in North America. \n\n## Geographic Information The operations of the Group are located in only one geographic location, North America. All revenue is generated\n\n## NOTE 29 – OPERATING SEGMENTS\n\nAt the date of signing this report, the Group is not aware of any contingent assets or liabilities that should be recognised or disclosed in accordance with AASB 137/IFRS 37 – Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets.\n\n## NOTE 28 – CONTINGENT ASSETS AND LIABILITIES\n\n## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8307888989958154, + "doc_id": "6d9929713f0628fe28c3b4cf2eda9702bafb4b014fb7941d41dc869ea1e15edd", + "edit_distance": 0.19430051813471502, + "f1_score": 0.9329073482428115, + "meteor": 0.9038778433758464, + "precision": 0.9419354838709677, + "pred_md": "## Sumitomo Mitsui Financial Group (Consolidated)\n\n## Sumitomo Mitsui Financial Group, Inc. and Subsidiaries\n\nThe following is a summary of SMFG's consolidated financial results for the fiscal year ended March 31, 2011.\n\n## 1. Operating Results\n\nOperating results for fiscal 2010 include the results of 327 consolidated subsidiaries and 47 subsidiaries and affiliates accounted for by the equity method.\n\nIn fiscal 2010, net interest income decreased due mainly to deterioration in interest margins on deposits and loans resulting from lower interest rates in Japan. However, SMBC increased gains on bonds by quickly responding to fluctuations in market interest rates, and SMFG's net fees and commissions increased mainly because of an increase in the number of consolidated subsidiaries. As a result, gross profit increased by ·268.0 billion year on year to ·2,504.7\n\nbillion. After adjusting for general and administrative expenses, credit cost, net losses on stocks, equity in losses of affiliates and other items, ordinary profit increased by ·266.6 billion year on year to ·825.4 billion, due mainly to a decrease in SMBC's credit cost as a result of the tailored efforts to assist certain debtors to improve their businesses and financial conditions.\n\nAfter adjusting ordinary profit for extraordinary gains and losses, income taxes, and other items, net income increased by ·204.3 billion year on year to ·475.8 billion.\n\n## Number of Consolidated Subsidiaries, and Subsidiaries and Affiliates Accounted for by the Equity Method\n\n## Income Summary\n\nNotes: 1. Consolidated gross profit = (Interest income - Interest expenses) + Trust fees + (Fees and commissions - Fees and commissions payments) + (Trading income - Trading losses) + (Other operating income - Other operating expenses)\n\n- 2. Consolidated net business profit = SMBC's nonconsolidated banking profit (before provision for general reserve for possible loan losses)\n- + SMFG's ordinary profit + Other subsidiaries' ordinary profit (excluding nonrecurring factors) + Equity method affiliates' ordinary profit\n- ✕ Ownership ratio - Internal transactions (dividends, etc.)\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n23", + "recall": 0.9240506329113924, + "true_md": "Financial Review\n\n## Sumitomo Mitsui Financial Group (Consolidated)\n\n## Sumitomo Mitsui Financial Group, Inc. and Subsidiaries\n\n## Number of Consolidated Subsidiaries, and Subsidiaries and Affiliates Accounted for by the Equity Method\n\n- 1. Operating Results\n\nThe following is a summary of SMFG’s consolidated financial results for the fiscal year ended March 31, 2011.\n\nOperating results for fiscal 2010 include the results of 327 consolidated subsidiaries and 47 subsidiaries and affiliates accounted for by the equity method.\n\nIn fiscal 2010, net interest income decreased due mainly to deterioration in interest margins on deposits and loans resulting from lower interest rates in Japan. However, SMBC increased gains on bonds by quickly responding to fluctua- tions in market interest rates, and SMFG’s net fees and commissions increased mainly because of an increase in the number of consolidated subsidiaries. As a result, gross profit increased by ¥268.0 billion year on year to ¥2,504.7 \n\nbillion. After adjusting for general and administrative expenses, credit cost, net losses on stocks, equity in losses of affiliates and other items, ordinary profit increased by ¥266.6 billion year on year to ¥825.4 billion, due mainly to a decrease in SMBC’s credit cost as a result of the tailored efforts to assist certain debtors to improve their businesses and financial conditions.\n\nAfter adjusting ordinary profit for extraordinary gains and losses, income taxes, and other items, net income increased by ¥204.3 billion year on year to ¥475.8 billion.\n\n## Income Summary\n\n- Notes: 1. Consolidated gross profit = (Interest income – Interest expenses) + Trust fees + (Fees and commissions – Fees and commissions payments) + (Trading income – Trading losses) + (Other operating income – Other operating expenses)\n\n- 2. Consolidated net business profit = SMBC’s nonconsolidated banking profit (before provision for general reserve for possible loan losses) + SMFG’s ordinary profit + Other subsidiaries’ ordinary profit (excluding nonrecurring factors) + Equity method affiliates’ ordinary profit ✕ Ownership ratio – Internal transactions (dividends, etc.)\n\nSMFG 2011 23" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8886100790120649, + "doc_id": "6683c8b3f775b6016352c2b199141923673774c64b70588b07c3cb5f7c863618", + "edit_distance": 0.11073825503355705, + "f1_score": 0.9473684210526315, + "meteor": 0.9399677781623058, + "precision": 0.9473684210526315, + "pred_md": "SMFG\n\nCapital Ratio Information\n\n## (A) Deriving and Scoring Scenarios\n\n## a. Deriving Scenarios\n\nIn order to grasp all potential risks of a business/product, we first identify 'business processes & /products' stipulated in the 'Common Procedures of Operations.' Then, we derive all possible scenarios for the generation of a loss event of prescribed magnitude by breaking down the operation process of each 'business processes & /products' into 'processing types.' We evaluate each individual scenario on an operation process basis.\n\n## Classification of Business, Products and Processing Type (Example)\n\n## b. Scenario Assessment\n\nIn order to assess scenarios, it is necessary to quantify loss frequency and amount for each scenario. At SMBC, in order to quantify loss frequency for each scenario, we execute risk control assessments on each scenario.\n\nIn risk assessment, in order to measure the easiness of loss occurrence in each operation process before taking into account the risk management (control) situation, we set standards for various assessment items - transaction volume, volatility of transaction volume, time limits and so on - and the operation process is scored on how well the standards are met.\n\n## Risk Scoring (Examples)\n\nControl assessment is executed from the perspective of preventive control and detection & recovery control. We set standards for various items - establishment of manuals and procedures, processing authority and pre-process check, post-process check, and so on - and the operation process is scored on how well the standards are met.\n\n## Control Assessment (Examples)\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n202", + "recall": 0.9473684210526315, + "true_md": "SMFG Capital Ratio Information\n\n## (A) Deriving and Scoring Scenarios\n\n## a. Deriving Scenarios\n\nIn order to grasp all potential risks of a business/product, we first identify “business processes & /products” stipulated in the “Common Procedures of Operations.” Then, we derive all possible scenarios for the generation of a loss event of prescribed magnitude by breaking down the operation process of each “business processes & /products” into “processing types.”\n\nWe evaluate each individual scenario on an operation process basis.\n\n## Classification of Business, Products and Processing Type (Example)\n\n## b. Scenario Assessment\n\nIn order to assess scenarios, it is necessary to quantify loss frequency and amount for each scenario. At SMBC, in order to quantify loss frequency for each scenario, we execute risk control assessments on each scenario.\n\nIn risk assessment, in order to measure the easiness of loss occurrence in each operation process before taking into account the risk management (control) situation, we set standards for various assessment items — transaction volume, volatility of transaction volume, time limits and so on — and the operation process is scored on how well the standards are met.\n\n## Risk Scoring (Examples)\n\n## Control Assessment (Examples)\n\nControl assessment is executed from the perspective of preventive control and detection & recovery control. We set standards for various items — establishment of manuals and procedures, processing authority and pre-process check, post-process check, and so on — and the operation process is scored on how well the standards are met. \n\nSMFG 2011 202" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "506ec8bbe17ce18b846b2e0d02c9f05a64296f2823b55b4587b5dfa3cefd3be0", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999271030762502, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Killam properties Inc. suite 100 3700 Kempt road Halifax, nova scotia B3K 4X8\n\n1.866.453.8900 killamproperties.com tsx: kmp", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Killam properties Inc. suite 100 3700 Kempt road Halifax, nova scotia B3K 4X8\n\n1.866.453.8900 killamproperties.com tsx: kmp" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9329892163610425, + "doc_id": "b71da2bb9884ee242dcdc1c547c348481bddc7723ec01d7798c6f88985e9db20", + "edit_distance": 0.6359832635983264, + "f1_score": 0.9557251908396945, + "meteor": 0.8924559900135638, + "precision": 0.9690402476780186, + "pred_md": "## Geology\n\nThe silver and gold mineralisation is hosted within tertiary-aged volcanic units at Arqueros and Teterita, and in Paleozoic sediments at Chimberos. The alteration and mineralisation are all Miocene in age and associated with the Cerros Bravos paleovolcano.\n\nMineralisation comprises two main components. Silver-rich horizontal units termed 'mantos' (Spanish for blanket) and a series of near-vertical, cross-cutting gold-rich structures. The mantos silver mineralisation is hosted by vuggy silica within dacitic lapilli tuff. Mantos occurs at Arqueros and Teterita where the mineralising process has replaced horizontal porous tuffs. At Chimberos, silver mineralisation is hosted in vuggy silica hydrothermal breccia superimposed on folded Paleozoic sediments.\n\nThe vertical gold-rich mineralisation, also characterised by vuggy silica, is well-developed at Arqueros. It has been interpreted as feeders for mineralising fluids. Nonetheless, this style of mineralisation has not yet been observed at Teterita and is poorly preserved at Chimberos.\n\n## Resource\n\nKingsgate has updated the project resource base to incorporate the recent drilling on the Chimberos project and using the current gold/ silver ratio of 60 (previously 45) for its gold equivalent (AuEq60) and silver equivalent (AgEq60) calculations.The combined Measured, Indicated and Inferred mineral resource for the Nueva Esperanza Project is based on resource block modelling of Arqueros, Chimberos and Teterita, and has been estimated at a cut-off grade of 0.5 grams per tonne (g/t), gold equivalent (AuEq60) to be 28.9 million tonnes at 0.27 g/t gold and 84 g/t silver.\n\nThis represents about 250,000 ounces of gold and 78.5 million ounces of silver.\n\nThe Measured, Indicated and Inferred resource may be expressed in gold or silver equivalent ounces as:\n\n- 〉 Gold equivalent ounces (AuEQ60): 1.6 million ounces at 1.7 g/t gold equivalent; and\n- 〉 Silver equivalent ounces (AgEQ60): 93.5 million ounces at 100 g/t silver equivalent.\n\n29\n\nProjects Report\n\n## Feasibility Study\n\nA Definitive Feasibility Study commenced on the project at the end of May 2011 with the focus on Arqueros, and open pit mining of that deposit with processing by traditional mill and agiitation leaching in cyanide. Subsequent acquisition of the Teterita and Chimberos deposits resulted in an expansion of the feasibility study to incorporate their resources.\n\nIn late 2012, a decision was taken to examine lower cost options for processing using heap leaching. With major engineering already done, technical studies focussed on metallurgical testwork and heap leach design. It has been established that the mineralisation from the three deposits can be processed by HPGR (High Pressure Grinding Rolls) crushing and heap leaching with silver and gold recoveries of the order of 70% to 75% for silver and 65% to 70% for gold. The project development plan is now focussed on a 3 million tonne per annum heap leach operation with an initial mine life of over 6 years. Annualised production levels (post rampup) are estimated at 6.0-8.0 million ounces of silver and 18,000-22,000 ounces of gold, at an indicative start-up capital cost between US$130-150 million (inclusive of 25% contingency).\n\nThese project parameters are based on preliminary results only and are insufficient to provide assurance as to the economic development of the project at this stage and these parameters may also change following completion of the Definitive Feasibility Study.\n\nWith the technical and economical feasibility of heap leaching being established, the project will now move into the final feasibility and design stage with results expected to be available during the March quarter 2014.\n\nThe environmental permitting process for the original Arqueros project has been completed, with approval to commence construction and mining granted by the Chilean authorities. A modification of the environmental assessment is being prepared to have the approvals modified for heap leaching and on-site power generation.\n\nExtensive community consultation has been undertaken with positive outcomes, and relationships with indigenous rural and urban communities remain a priority.\n\nProjects Report", + "recall": 0.9427710843373494, + "true_md": "29 Projects Report\n\nProjects Report\n\n## Geology\n\n## Feasibility Study\n\n## Resource\n\nThe silver and gold mineralisation is hosted within tertiary-aged volcanic units at Arqueros and Teterita, and in Paleozoic sediments at Chimberos. The alteration and mineralisation are all Miocene in age and associated with the Cerros Bravos paleovolcano.\n\nMineralisation comprises two main compo- nents. Silver-rich horizontal units termed ‘mantos’ (Spanish for blanket) and a series of near-vertical, cross-cutting gold-rich structures. The mantos silver mineralisation is hosted by vuggy silica within dacitic lapilli tuff. Mantos occurs at Arqueros and Teterita where the mineralising process has replaced horizontal porous tuffs. At Chimberos, silver mineralisation is hosted in vuggy silica hydrothermal breccia superimposed on folded Paleozoic sediments.\n\nThe vertical gold-rich mineralisation, also charac- terised by vuggy silica, is well-developed at Arqueros. It has been interpreted as feeders for mineralising fluids. Nonetheless, this style of mineralisation has not yet been observed at Teterita and is poorly preserved at Chimberos.\n\nA Definitive Feasibility Study commenced on the project at the end of May 2011 with the focus on Arqueros, and open pit mining of that deposit with processing by traditional mill and agiitation leaching in cyanide. Subsequent acquisition of the Teterita and Chimberos deposits resulted in an expansion of the feasibility study to incorpo- rate their resources.\n\nThe environmental permitting process for the original Arqueros project has been completed, with approval to commence construction and mining granted by the Chilean authorities. A modification of the environmental assessment is being prepared to have the approvals modified for heap leaching and on-site power generation. \n\nExtensive community consultation has been undertaken with positive outcomes, and rela- tionships with indigenous rural and urban communities remain a priority.\n\nIn late 2012, a decision was taken to examine lower cost options for processing using heap leaching. With major engineering already done, technical studies focussed on metallurgical testwork and heap leach design. It has been established that the mineralisation from the three deposits can be processed by HPGR (High Pressure Grinding Rolls) crushing and heap leaching with silver and gold recoveries of the order of 70% to 75% for silver and 65% to 70% for gold. The project development plan is now focussed on a 3 million tonne per annum heap leach operation with an initial mine life of over 6 years. Annualised production levels (post ramp- up) are estimated at 6.0–8.0 million ounces of silver and 18,000–22,000 ounces of gold, at an indicative start-up capital cost between US$130–150 million (inclusive of 25% contingency).\n\nKingsgate has updated the project resource base to incorporate the recent drilling on the Chimberos project and using the current gold/ silver ratio of 60 (previously 45) for its gold equivalent (AuEq60) and silver equivalent (AgEq60) calculations.The combined Measured, Indicated and Inferred mineral resource for the Nueva Esperanza Project is based on resource block modelling of Arqueros, Chimberos and Teterita, and has been estimated at a cut-off grade of 0.5 grams per tonne (g/t), gold equiva- lent (AuEq60) to be 28.9 million tonnes at 0.27 g/t gold and 84 g/t silver.\n\nThis represents about 250,000 ounces of gold and 78.5 million ounces of silver. \n\nThe Measured, Indicated and Inferred resource may be expressed in gold or silver equivalent ounces as:\n\nThese project parameters are based on prelimi- nary results only and are insufficient to provide assurance as to the economic development of the project at this stage and these parameters may also change following completion of the Definitive Feasibility Study.\n\nWith the technical and economical feasibility of heap leaching being established, the project will now move into the final feasibility and design stage with results expected to be available during the March quarter 2014.\n\n- 〉 Gold equivalent ounces (AuEQ60): 1.6 million ounces at 1.7 g/t gold equivalent; and\n\n- 〉 Silver equivalent ounces (AgEQ60): 93.5 million ounces at 100 g/t silver equivalent." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6692659987919781, + "doc_id": "831a7777878a58157adb41ab18556f27ae1ddd689a7bdbe3b28942844f4e72a1", + "edit_distance": 0.4956140350877193, + "f1_score": 0.7843137254901962, + "meteor": 0.6901453154283878, + "precision": 0.7751937984496124, + "pred_md": "00\n\n01\n\n02\n\n3000\n\n2500\n\n2000\n\n1500\n\n1000\n\n500\n\n0\n\n3,000\n\n2,500\n\n2,000\n\n1,500\n\n1,000\n\n500\n\n0\n\nCHK Stock Price\n\n0\n\n0\n\n0\n\n2010 ANNUAL REPORT |\n\n3\n\n0\n\n0\n\n0\n\n0\n\n## Chesapeake's Five-Year and Ten-Year Common Stock Performance\n\n80 The graphs below compare the performance of our common stock to the S&P 500 Stock Index and a group of peer companies for the past five and 10 years. The graph on the left assumes an investment of $100 on December 31, 2004 and the reinvestment of all dividends. The graph on the right assumes an invest -ment of $100 on December 31, 1999 and the reinvestment of all dividends. The graphs show the value of the investment at the end of each year.\n\n70\n\n## FIVE-YEAR PERFORMANCE\n\n60\n\n50\n\n40\n\n30\n\n20\n\n10\n\n0\n\n150\n\n120\n\n## TEN-YEAR PERFORMANCE\n\n- (1) The 2010 peer group is comprised of Anadarko Petroleum Corp., Apache Corp., Devon Energy Corp., Encana Corp. and EOG Resources, Inc. XTO Energy, Inc. was not included in the 2010 peer group due to its acquisition by Exxon Mobil Corp. 500150\n\n400120\n\n20\n\n15\n\n10\n\n5\n\n0\n\n10\n\n08\n\n09\n\n10\n\n500\n\n400", + "recall": 0.7936507936507936, + "true_md": "2010 ANNUAL REPORT | 3\n\n70 80 The graphs below compare the performance of our common stock to the S&P 500 Stock Index and a group of peer companies for the past five and 10 years. The graph on the left assumes an investment of $100 on December 31, 2004 and the reinvestment of all dividends. The graph on the right assumes an invest - ment of $100 on December 31, 1999 and the reinvestment of all dividends. The graphs show the value of the investment at the end of each year.\n\n## Chesapeake’s Five-Year and Ten-Year Common Stock Performance\n\nTEN-YEAR PERFORMANCE As of December 31 CHK\n\nFIVE-YEAR PERFORMANCE As of December 31 CHK 2010 Peer Group 60 70\n\n$^{(1)$\\_{ }$}$ The 2010 peer group is comprised of Anadarko Petroleum Corp., Apache Corp., Devon Energy Corp., Encana Corp. and EOG Resources, Inc. XTO Energy, Inc. was not included in the 2010 peer group due to its acquisition by Exxon Mobil Corp. 500 150 150\n\nTotal Resource Base Growth * Bcfe at end of year\n\nProved Reserve Growth Bcfe at end of year\n\nProduction Growth Average mmcfe per day for year\n\n*Proved and unrisked, unproved reserves" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9476856139670329, + "doc_id": "d3bd920cc62168f47533aad8db9a278d94c364dd17d01c8593e528bd756c72cf", + "edit_distance": 0.3072983354673495, + "f1_score": 0.9797979797979799, + "meteor": 0.838566281395743, + "precision": 0.9931740614334471, + "pred_md": "103\n\nNotes to the Financial Statements\n\nThe contractual cash flows presented above in respect of 30 June 2013 and the increase in the one year or less time category of $46,132,000 when compared to 30 June 2012 mainly relates to classification of the corporate loan facility of $20,000,000 and the convertible loan facility of $35,000,000 as current liability at 30 June 2013. These facilities were mainly included in the one to two years and two to five years' time category at 30 June 2012. As indicated in Note 16, these facilities have been classified as current liabilities at 30 June 2013 on the basis that at balance sheet date it was the Group's intention to restructure and amalgamate these facilities in the next financial year.\n\nSubsequent to the end of the financial year, the Group has received from its lenders a credit approved term sheet (subject to formal documentation) for the restructure of the corporate loan and convertible loan facilities. Following completion of the restructure the total amount outstanding will be reduced to $40,000,000. This loan will be provided through a single senior corporate facility which will consist of two tranches:\n\n- 〉 Tranche one will be a $25,000,000 Akara Pre IPO Bond with a maturity date of 31 July 2015. The current intention is for this tranche to be repaid as part of the Akara IPO although at Kingsgate's election repayment can be made by either cash or in Kingsgate's shares.\n- 〉 Tranche two is an amortising facility with $5,000,000 to be repaid during the 2014 financial year and the balance of $10,000,000 repaid during the 2015 financial year.\n\nThe Group also has a three year $25,000,000 Convertible Revolving Credit Facility available. At the date of this report the facility is undrawn. Under the terms of this facility, Kingsgate has the option of repaying any funds drawn down under the facility through either cash or by issuing ordinary shares. It is intended that this facility will be utilised during the 2014 financial year for corporate and working capital purposes. It is the current intention of the Company to repay any cash drawdown under the facility by issuance of fully paid ordinary shares which would rank parri pasu with all existing ordinary shares, although this position will be reviewed at the appropriate time. The number of shares has not yet been determined and they will be issued at a 2.5% discount to VWAP over a period by reference to the draw down date. Shareholder approval is not required.\n\nAs indicated in Note 16, Kingsgate's Thai operating subsidiary, Akara, established a six year amortising multi-currency loan facility equivalent to US$125,000,000 (fully drawn as at year end) and an additional Thai Baht denominated working capital facility equivalent to US$15,000,000 (undrawn as at year end) during the period. The proceeds from these borrowings were used to fully repay the outstanding balance on the US$100,000,000 Baht denominated syndicated loan facility in existence at the beginning of the period as well as to repay part of the corporate loan facility noted above.\n\n## (d) Fair value measurements\n\nThe carrying values of financial assets and liabilities of the Group approximate their fair values. Fair values of financial assets and liabilities have been determined for measurement and / or disclosure purposes.\n\n## Fair value hierarchy\n\nThe Group classifies assets and liabilities carried at fair value using a fair value hierarchy that reflects the significance of the inputs used in determining that value. The table following analyses financial instruments carried at fair value, by the valuation method. The different levels in the hierarchy have been defined as follows:\n\n- 〉 Level 1: quoted prices (unadjusted) in active markets for identical assets or liabilities;\n- 〉 Level 2: inputs other than quoted prices included within Level 1 that are observable for the asset or liability, either directly (as prices) or indirectly (derived from prices); and\n- 〉 Level 3: inputs for the asset or liability that are not based on observable market data (unobservable inputs).\n\n- * Level 1 asset includes available-for-sale financial assets of $767,000 at 30 June 2013 which relate to investments in listed entities.\n\ncontinued\n\nNotes to the Financial Statements\n\nu", + "recall": 0.9667774086378738, + "true_md": "Notes to the Financial Statements 103\n\nNotes t o the Financial Statements\n\ncontinued u\n\n* Level 1 asset includes available-for-sale financial assets of $767,000 at 30 June 2013 which relate to investments in listed entities.\n\nThe contractual cash flows presented above in respect of 30 June 2013 and the increase in the one year or less time category of $46,132,000 when compared to 30 June 2012 mainly relates to classification of the corporate loan facility of $20,000,000 and the convertible loan facility of $35,000,000 as current liability at 30 June 2013. These facilities were mainly included in the one to two years and two to five years’ time category at 30 June 2012. As indi- cated in Note 16, these facilities have been classified as current liabilities at 30 June 2013 on the basis that at balance sheet date it was the Group’s intention to restructure and amalgamate these facilities in the next financial year.\n\nSubsequent to the end of the financial year, the Group has received from its lenders a credit approved term sheet (subject to formal documentation) for the restructure of the corporate loan and convertible loan facilities. Following completion of the restructure the total amount outstanding will be reduced to $40,000,000. This loan will be provided through a single senior corporate facility which will consist of two tranches:\n\nThe Group also has a three year $25,000,000 Convertible Revolving Credit Facility available. At the date of this report the facility is undrawn. Under the terms of this facility, Kingsgate has the option of repaying any funds drawn down under the facility through either cash or by issuing ordinary shares. It is intended that this facility will be utilised during the 2014 financial year for corporate and working capital purposes. It is the current intention of the Company to repay any cash drawdown under the facility by issuance of fully paid ordinary shares which would rank parri pasu with all existing ordinary shares, although this position will be reviewed at the appropriate time. The number of shares has not yet been determined and they will be issued at a 2.5% discount to VWAP over a period by reference to the draw down date. Shareholder approval is not required.\n\nAs indicated in Note 16, Kingsgate’s Thai operating subsidiary, Akara, established a six year amortising multi-currency loan facility equivalent to US$125,000,000 (fully drawn as at year end) and an additional Thai Baht denominated working capital facility equivalent to US$15,000,000 (undrawn as at year end) during the period. The proceeds from these borrowings were used to fully repay the outstanding balance on the US$100,000,000 Baht denomi- nated syndicated loan facility in existence at the beginning of the period as well as to repay part of the corporate loan facility noted above.\n\nThe carrying values of financial assets and liabilities of the Group approximate their fair values. Fair values of financial assets and liabilities have been deter- mined for measurement and / or disclosure purposes.\n\nThe Group classifies assets and liabilities carried at fair value using a fair value hierarchy that reflects the significance of the inputs used in determining that value. The table following analyses financial instruments carried at fair value, by the valuation method. The different levels in the hierarchy have been defined as follows:\n\n- 〉 Level 1: quoted prices (unadjusted) in active markets for identical assets or liabilities;\n\n- 〉 Level 2: inputs other than quoted prices included within Level 1 that are observable for the asset or liability, either directly (as prices) or indirectly (derived from prices); and\n\n- 〉 Level 3: inputs for the asset or liability that are not based on observable market data (unobservable inputs).\n\n## (d) Fair value measurements\n\n## Fair value hierarchy\n\n- 〉 Tranche one will be a $25,000,000 Akara Pre IPO Bond with a maturity date of 31 July 2015. The current intention is for this tranche to be repaid as part of the Akara IPO although at Kingsgate’s election repayment can be made by either cash or in Kingsgate’s shares.\n\n- 〉 Tranche two is an amortising facility with $5,000,000 to be repaid during the 2014 financial year and the balance of $10,000,000 repaid during the 2015 financial year." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8546108979048123, + "doc_id": "3b8f244787ea9a052863272b704e924e5a1e8da817b3e7634a45e6d24fd058df", + "edit_distance": 0.6482084690553745, + "f1_score": 0.9397590361445783, + "meteor": 0.8488715096281989, + "precision": 0.9285714285714286, + "pred_md": "## Sumitomo Mitsui Card ◆\n\n- * he number of full-time employees, including employees seconded to other T companies and organizations. The following list of employees is deducted from the total number of employees: executive officers, employees on short-term contracts, part-time employees, employees of temporary employment agencies, and national staff at overseas branches.\n\n- ** Includes contract employees\n\n## Cedyna ◆\n\n- * xcluding employees seconded from other companies, employees on shortE term contracts and part-time employees.\n- ** As of March 31, 2009, the total number of employees includes employees of OMC Card, Inc., Central Finance Co., Ltd., and QUOQ Inc.\n\n- *** For fiscal year 2008, the total number of employees includes employees of OMC Card, Inc., Central Finance Co., Ltd., and QUOQ Inc.\n\n## Sumitomo Mitsui Finance and Leasing ◆\n\n- * he number of full-time employees, including employees seconded to other T companies and organizations. The following list of employees is deducted from the total number of employees: employees seconded from other companies and organizations, executive officers, employees on short-term contracts, parttime employees, employees of temporary employment agencies, and full-time employees of affiliates (including overseas subsidiaries).\n\n## Japan Research Institute ◆\n\n- * he number of full-time employees, including employees seconded to other T companies and organizations. The following list of employees is deducted from the total number of employees: executive officers, employees on short-term contracts, part-time employees, employees of temporary employment agencies, and national staff at overseas branches.\n\n- ** Includes only sogoshoku staff. Ippanshoku staff are excluded.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n65", + "recall": 0.9512195121951219, + "true_md": "* The number of full-time employees, including employees seconded to other companies and organizations. The following list of employees is deducted from the total number of employees: employees seconded from other companies and organizations, executive officers, employees on short-term contracts, part- time employees, employees of temporary employment agencies, and full-time employees of affiliates (including overseas subsidiaries).\n\n* The number of full-time employees, including employees seconded to other companies and organizations. The following list of employees is deducted from the total number of employees: executive officers, employees on short-term contracts, part-time employees, employees of temporary employment agencies, and national staff at overseas branches.\n\n** Includes contract employees\n\n* Excluding employees seconded from other companies, employees on short- term contracts and part-time employees.\n\n** As of March 31, 2009, the total number of employees includes employees of OMC Card, Inc., Central Finance Co., Ltd., and QUOQ Inc.\n\n* The number of full-time employees, including employees seconded to other companies and organizations. The following list of employees is deducted from the total number of employees: executive officers, employees on short-term contracts, part-time employees, employees of temporary employment agencies, and national staff at overseas branches.\n\n** Includes only sogoshoku staff. Ippanshoku staff are excluded.\n\n*** For fiscal year 2008, the total number of employees includes employees of OMC Card, Inc., Central Finance Co., Ltd., and QUOQ Inc.\n\nSMFG 2011 65\n\n## Japan Research Institute ◆\n\n## Cedyna ◆\n\n## Sumitomo Mitsui Card ◆\n\n## Sumitomo Mitsui Finance and Leasing ◆" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9004261451096648, + "doc_id": "b8b68c40e7227b2f3118144ab0087be6385ccb7215127f271d0f04c96a24f548", + "edit_distance": 0.29331823329558326, + "f1_score": 0.9720101781170483, + "meteor": 0.8659226598573659, + "precision": 0.9794871794871794, + "pred_md": "6\n\n| LETTER TO SHAREHOLDERS\n\nvs. an asset gatherer - namely, lower debt and higher returns on capital. The market has received this plan with favor to date as our stock price is already up 30% in the first quarter of 2011. In addition, having recently closed the sale of our Fayetteville Shale assets to BHP Billiton and recently initiated tender offers for repayment of at least $2.0 billion of our long-term debt, we are already close to accomplishing the 25% long-term debt reduction portion of our 25/25 Plan. Now we will focus on delivering the other part of the equation, 25% growth in production by year-end 2012.\n\nBeyond the next two years, there will be many other benefits of the three-way transition we began in 2010. In fact, we are increasingly con fident that we can double our cash flow and net income by year-end 2015. By accomplishing these goals and also having our historic trading multiples expand a bit, we are hopeful that we can achieve a $100 stock price by year-end 2015, perhaps creating the need for a '100/15' plan in the process! Clearly it would be an ambitious goal, and to achieve it we will need the world's economy to continue growing, China and other emerging economies to continue their rapidly growing thirst for oil and natural gas, our new plays to meet expectations, oil prices to remain strong and natural gas prices not to weaken from where they are today.\n\nHowever, Chesapeake's growth from here on will be very mechanical with our 'factories' (meaning both our individual wells and our large plays) needing only four inputs for success: land, science, people and capital. We now have gathered enough of these four inputs so that our\n\nfactories can run in harvest mode for decades to come, which hopefully can lead to a $100 stock price by year-end 2015. Again, this would be a very considerable achievement, but your management team enjoys big challenges and we look forward to discussing it further with you in the quarters ahead.\n\n## Great Assets = A Great Future\n\nThe very significant upward trajectory of value creation that Chesapeake is on today is primarily driven by the quality of our assets, which feature dominant positions in 16 of the 20 most important major unconvention al natural gas and liquids plays in the U.S. - the Barnett, Haynesville, Bossier, Marcellus, Eagle Ford, Pearsall, Niobrara and Utica shales and the Granite Wash, Cleveland, Tonkawa, Mississippian, Bone Spring, Avalon, Wolfcamp and Wolfberry tight sands and fractured carbonates. Having only missed the Bakken Shale play in the Williston Basin, having passed on the Cana Shale play in Oklahoma and having sold out of the Woodford and Fayetteville shale plays in Oklahoma and Arkansas (for overall value creation of $5.4 billion), Chesapeake's unrivaled posi tion in the 16 other major U.S. unconventional plays is remarkable and unprecedented and should form the foundation of further substantial value creation for Chesapeake's shareholders for decades to come.\n\nThe gathering of these assets has been hard work for our employ ees and management team, and during 2010 it stretched our balance sheet and tested the patience of some of our shareholders. What is\n\nThe knowledge and experience Chesapeake gained in the Barnett Shale, the granddaddy of all U.S. shale plays, has been instrumental in the company's successful development of all subsequent unconventional natural gas and liquids plays.\n\nThe knowledge and experience Chesapeake gained in the Barnett Shale, the granddaddy of all U.S. shale plays, has been instrumental in the company's successful development of all subsequent unconventional natural gas and liquids plays.\n\nclear now, however, is that we have created a tremendous storehouse of value and an abundance of opportunities for bountiful harvests for years to come for our shareholders.\n\nGiven the importance of these 16 unconventional plays, I have provided below a brief summary of our position in each of them:\n\nBarnett Shale - Discovered in the 1990s, the Barnett is the granddaddy of all U.S. shale plays. Chesapeake acquired its first assets in the Barnett in 2001, and in 2005 we began aggressively leasing in the core of the play in Johnson and Tarrant counties. Today we own approximately 220,000 net leasehold acres, on which we estimate we could drill up to 2,300 future net wells in addition to our 965 net wells currently producing. We are currently using 18 rigs to develop this inventory of drillsites and our gross operated production in the Barnett recently set a record of more than 1.3 bcfe per day.\n\nOur most important development in the Barnett Shale during 2010 was closing the joint venture agreement on 25% of our assets in the Barnett to Paris-based Total, the fifth-largest oil company in the world. Total paid", + "recall": 0.9646464646464646, + "true_md": "6 | LETTER TO SHAREHOLDERS\n\nvs. an asset gatherer — namely, lower debt and higher returns on capi- tal. The market has received this plan with favor to date as our stock price is already up 30% in the first quarter of 2011. In addition, having recently closed the sale of our Fayetteville Shale assets to BHP Billiton and recently initiated tender offers for repayment of at least $2.0 billion of our long-term debt, we are already close to accomplishing the 25% long-term debt reduction portion of our 25/25 Plan. Now we will focus on delivering the other part of the equation, 25% growth in production by year-end 2012.\n\nfactories can run in harvest mode for decades to come, which hopefully can lead to a $100 stock price by year-end 2015. Again, this would be a very considerable achievement, but your management team enjoys big challenges and we look forward to discussing it further with you in the quarters ahead. \n\nBeyond the next two years, there will be many other benefits of the three-way transition we began in 2010. In fact, we are increasingly con - fident that we can double our cash flow and net income by year-end 2015. By accomplishing these goals and also having our historic trading multiples expand a bit, we are hopeful that we can achieve a $100 stock price by year-end 2015, perhaps creating the need for a “100/15” plan in the process! Clearly it would be an ambitious goal, and to achieve it we will need the world’s economy to continue growing, China and other emerging economies to continue their rapidly growing thirst for oil and natural gas, our new plays to meet expectations, oil prices to remain strong and natural gas prices not to weaken from where they are today. \n\nHowever, Chesapeake’s growth from here on will be very mechanical with our “factories” (meaning both our individual wells and our large plays) needing only four inputs for success: land, science, people and capital. We now have gathered enough of these four inputs so that our \n\n## Great Assets = A Great Future\n\nThe very significant upward trajectory of value creation that Chesapeake is on today is primarily driven by the quality of our assets, which feature dominant positions in 16 of the 20 most important major unconvention - al natural gas and liquids plays in the U.S. — the Barnett, Haynesville, Bossier, Marcellus, Eagle Ford, Pearsall, Niobrara and Utica shales and the Granite Wash, Cleveland, Tonkawa, Mississippian, Bone Spring, Avalon, Wolfcamp and Wolfberry tight sands and fractured carbonates. Having only missed the Bakken Shale play in the Williston Basin, having passed on the Cana Shale play in Oklahoma and having sold out of the Woodford and Fayetteville shale plays in Oklahoma and Arkansas (for overall value creation of $5.4 billion), Chesapeake’s unrivaled posi - tion in the 16 other major U.S. unconventional plays is remarkable and unprecedented and should form the foundation of further substantial value creation for Chesapeake’s shareholders for decades to come. \n\nThe gathering of these assets has been hard work for our employ - ees and management team, and during 2010 it stretched our balance sheet and tested the patience of some of our shareholders. What is \n\nclear now, however, is that we have created a tremen - dous storehouse of value and an abundance of oppor- tunities for bountiful harvests for years to come for our shareholders. \n\nGiven the importance of these 16 unconventional plays, I have provided below a brief summary of our posi- tion in each of them:\n\nBarnett Shale — Discovered in the 1990s, the Barnett is the granddaddy of all U.S. shale plays. Chesapeake acquired its first assets in the Barnett in 2001, and in 2005 we began aggressively leasing in the core of the play in Johnson and Tarrant counties. Today we own approximately 220,000 net leasehold acres, on which we estimate we could drill up to 2,300 future net wells in addition to our 965 net wells currently producing. We are currently using 18 rigs to develop this inventory of drillsites and our gross operated production in the Barnett recently set a record of more than 1.3 bcfe per day. \n\nOur most important development in the Barnett Shale during 2010 was closing the joint venture agreement on 25% of our assets in the Barnett to Paris-based Total, the fifth-largest oil company in the world. Total paid \n\nThe knowledge and experience Chesapeake gained in the Barnett Shale, the granddaddy of all U.S. shale plays, has been instrumental in the company’s successful development of all subsequent unconventional natural gas and liquids plays." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9512955719122766, + "doc_id": "0ff560d0d2106cd119b339bc2eb02e9e2f8768d4fb580195464e32be769b70d9", + "edit_distance": 0.5203562340966921, + "f1_score": 0.9866666666666666, + "meteor": 0.9075387955147739, + "precision": 0.9881305637982196, + "pred_md": "NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## Issuance of Senior Notes\n\nThe table below provides a summary of the senior notes that we issued in 2013 and 2012.\n\n- 1 Gross proceeds before transaction costs and discounts.\n- 2 Transaction costs and discounts are included as deferred transaction costs in the carrying value of the long-term debt, and recognized in net income using the effective interest method.\n\nEach of the above senior notes are unsecured and guaranteed by RCP, ranking equally with all of RCI's other senior notes and debentures, bank credit and letter of credit facilities. We use derivatives to hedge the foreign exchange risk associated with the principal and interest components of all our US dollar denominated senior notes and debentures (see note 20).\n\nRepayment of Senior Notes and Related Derivative Settlements In June 2013, we repaid or bought the entire outstanding principal amount of our US $350 million ($356 million) senior notes due 2013. At the same time, the associated Debt Derivatives were also settled at maturity. See note 20 for more information about our Debt Derivatives.\n\n## Principal Repayments\n\nThe table below shows the principal repayments on our long-term debt due in each of the next five years and thereafter as at December 31, 2013.\n\n## Foreign Exchange\n\nWe recorded $23 million in foreign exchange losses in 2013 (2012 $9 million gain) in finance costs in the consolidated statements of income. These were related to the translation of long-term debt that was not hedged on an accounting basis.\n\n## Weighted Average Interest Rate\n\nOur effective weighted average rate on all debt and short-term borrowings, as at December 31, 2013, including the effect of all of the associated Debt Derivative instruments (see note 20), was 5.5% (2012 - 6.1%).\n\n## Terms and Conditions\n\nThe provisions of our $2.0 billion bank credit facility described above impose certain restrictions on our operations and activities, the most significant of which are leverage related maintenance tests.\n\nThe 8.75% debentures due in 2032 contain debt incurrence tests and restrictions on additional investments, sales of assets and payment of\n\n112\n\nROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\ndividends, all of which are suspended in the event the public debt securities are assigned investment grade ratings by at least two of three specified credit rating agencies. As at December 31, 2013, these public debt securities were assigned an investment grade rating by each of the three specified credit rating agencies and, accordingly, these restrictions have been suspended as long as the investment grade ratings are maintained. Our other senior notes do not have any of these restrictions, regardless of the related credit ratings.\n\nThe repayment dates of certain debt agreements can also be accelerated if there is a change in control of RCI.\n\nAt December 31, 2013 and 2012, we were in compliance with all financial covenants, financial ratios and all of the terms and conditions of our long-term debt agreements.\n\n## NOTE 19: CAPITAL RISK MANAGEMENT\n\nOur objectives in managing capital are to ensure we have sufficient liquidity to meet all of our commitments and to execute our business plan. We define capital that we manage as shareholders' equity (including issued capital, share premium, retained earnings, hedging reserve and available-for-sale financial assets reserve) and indebtedness (including current portion of our long-term debt, long-term debt and short-term borrowings).\n\nWe manage our capital structure commitments and maturities and make adjustments based on general economic conditions, financial markets and operating risks and our investment and working capital requirements. To maintain or adjust our capital structure, we may, with approval from our Board of Directors, issue or repay debt and/or shortterm borrowings, issue shares, repurchase shares, pay dividends or undertake other activities as deemed appropriate under the circumstances. The board reviews and approves any material transactions that are not part of the ordinary course of business, including proposals for acquisitions or other major investments or divestitures, financing transactions and annual capital and operating budgets.\n\nWe monitor debt leverage ratios such as adjusted net debt to adjusted operating profit as part of the management of liquidity and shareholders' return to sustain future development of the business, conduct valuation-related analyses and make decisions about capital.", + "recall": 0.985207100591716, + "true_md": "NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## Issuance of Senior Notes\n\nThe table below provides a summary of the senior notes that we issued in 2013 and 2012.\n\n1 Gross proceeds before transaction costs and discounts.\n\n2 Transaction costs and discounts are included as deferred transaction costs in the carrying value of the long-term debt, and recognized in net income using the effective interest method.\n\nEach of the above senior notes are unsecured and guaranteed by RCP, ranking equally with all of RCI’s other senior notes and debentures, bank credit and letter of credit facilities. We use derivatives to hedge the foreign exchange risk associated with the principal and interest components of all our US dollar denominated senior notes and debentures (see note 20).\n\nRepayment of Senior Notes and Related Derivative Settlements In June 2013, we repaid or bought the entire outstanding principal amount of our US $350 million ($356 million) senior notes due 2013. At the same time, the associated Debt Derivatives were also settled at maturity. See note 20 for more information about our Debt Derivatives.\n\nThe table below shows the principal repayments on our long-term debt due in each of the next five years and thereafter as at December 31, 2013.\n\nAt December 31, 2013 and 2012, we were in compliance with all financial covenants, financial ratios and all of the terms and conditions of our long-term debt agreements.\n\nThe repayment dates of certain debt agreements can also be accelerated if there is a change in control of RCI.\n\ndividends, all of which are suspended in the event the public debt securities are assigned investment grade ratings by at least two of three specified credit rating agencies. As at December 31, 2013, these public debt securities were assigned an investment grade rating by each of the three specified credit rating agencies and, accordingly, these restrictions have been suspended as long as the investment grade ratings are maintained. Our other senior notes do not have any of these restrictions, regardless of the related credit ratings.\n\nOur objectives in managing capital are to ensure we have sufficient liquidity to meet all of our commitments and to execute our business plan. We define capital that we manage as shareholders’ equity (including issued capital, share premium, retained earnings, hedging reserve and available-for-sale financial assets reserve) and indebtedness (including current portion of our long-term debt, long-term debt and short-term borrowings).\n\nWe manage our capital structure commitments and maturities and make adjustments based on general economic conditions, financial markets and operating risks and our investment and working capital requirements. To maintain or adjust our capital structure, we may, with approval from our Board of Directors, issue or repay debt and/or short- term borrowings, issue shares, repurchase shares, pay dividends or undertake other activities as deemed appropriate under the circumstances. The board reviews and approves any material transactions that are not part of the ordinary course of business, including proposals for acquisitions or other major investments or divestitures, financing transactions and annual capital and operating budgets.\n\nWe monitor debt leverage ratios such as adjusted net debt to adjusted operating profit as part of the management of liquidity and shareholders’ return to sustain future development of the business, conduct valuation-related analyses and make decisions about capital.\n\nThe 8.75% debentures due in 2032 contain debt incurrence tests and restrictions on additional investments, sales of assets and payment of\n\nThe provisions of our $2.0 billion bank credit facility described above impose certain restrictions on our operations and activities, the most significant of which are leverage related maintenance tests.\n\nOur effective weighted average rate on all debt and short-term borrowings, as at December 31, 2013, including the effect of all of the associated Debt Derivative instruments (see note 20), was 5.5% (2012 – 6.1%).\n\nWe recorded $23 million in foreign exchange losses in 2013 (2012 – $9 million gain) in finance costs in the consolidated statements of income. These were related to the translation of long-term debt that was not hedged on an accounting basis.\n\n## NOTE 19: CAPITAL RISK MANAGEMENT\n\n## Principal Repayments\n\n## Foreign Exchange\n\n## Weighted Average Interest Rate\n\n## Terms and Conditions\n\n112 ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7507576598048311, + "doc_id": "c7935cb0847a8a39b2f417197d2dd2bf303fe5a99375376a121eb72543a0e213", + "edit_distance": 0.2777777777777778, + "f1_score": 0.8769230769230769, + "meteor": 0.7729417348844353, + "precision": 0.991304347826087, + "pred_md": "## LEADING CONTENT\n\n12 ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\nROGERS IS COMMITTED TO DELIVERING WORLD-CLASS CONTENT AND EXPERIENCES TO CONSUMERS AND ADVERTISING SOLUTIONS TO BUSINESSES. THE COMPANY HAS A STRONG LEGACY OF BUILDING POWERFUL MEDIA BRANDS WITH COMPELLING CONTENT THAT RESONATES WITH AUDIENCES ACROSS MULTIPLE PLATFORMS ON ANY DEVICE.\n\nToday, businesses across Canada connect with customers through Rogers category-leading television and radio assets, sports entertainment, televised and online shopping, publishing, and digital media properties as the one-stop solution for all their local and national advertising needs.\n\nRogers Media is Canada's premier combination of diversified broadcast, specialty, sports, print and online media assets which together touch nearly 90% of Canadians every week. This includes over 50 popular AM and FM radio stations across Canada. In television, it includes the seven station City network which broadcasts intensely local, urban-oriented", + "recall": 0.7862068965517242, + "true_md": "## LEADING CONTENT\n\n## ROGERS IS COMMITTED TO DELIVERING WORLD-CLASS CONTENT AND EXPERIENCES TO CONSUMERS AND ADVERTISING SOLUTIONS TO BUSINESSES. THE COMPANY HAS A STRONG LEGACY OF BUILDING POWERFUL MEDIA BRANDS WITH COMPELLING CONTENT THAT RESONATES WITH AUDIENCES ACROSS MULTIPLE PLATFORMS ON ANY DEVICE.\n\nToday, businesses across Canada connect with customers through Rogers category-leading television and radio assets, sports entertainment, televised and online shopping, publishing, and digital media properties as the one-stop solution for all their local and national advertising needs.\n\nRogers Media is Canada’s premier combination of diversified broadcast, specialty, sports, print and online media assets which together touch nearly 90% of Canadians every week. This includes over 50 popular AM and FM radio stations across Canada. In television, it includes the seven station City network which broadcasts intensely local, urban-oriented \n\n12 ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\nLEADING SPORTSNET TV FRANCHISE\n\nNATIONAL RADIO PORTFOLIO\n\nCITY NATIONAL TELEVISION NETWORK\n\nTORONTO BLUE JAYS BASEBALL TEAM\n\nDIGITAL MEDIA PORTFOLIO\n\nICONIC MAGAZINE BRANDS\n\nTELEVISED SHOPPING NETWORK\n\nOMNI MULTICULTURAL NETWORK\n\n37.5% OWNERSHIP OF LEAFS, RAPTORS & TFC" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8934497414966948, + "doc_id": "3094a763486b7128d42712c411b426b00042c49b0186ab6e3673bf04aae043e0", + "edit_distance": 0.2976190476190476, + "f1_score": 0.9714285714285713, + "meteor": 0.9618410533465588, + "precision": 0.9714285714285714, + "pred_md": "SMBC\n\n## Assets and Liabilities (Consolidated)\n\nSumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation and Subsidiaries\n\n## Deposits and Negotiable Certificates of Deposit\n\n## Year-End Balance\n\n- Notes: 1. Domestic operations comprise the operations of SMBC (excluding overseas branches) and its domestic consolidated subsidiaries. Overseas operations comprise the operations of SMBC's overseas branches and its overseas consolidated subsidiaries.\n- 2. Liquid deposits = Current deposits + Ordinary deposits + Savings deposits + Deposits at notice\n- 3. Fixed-term deposits = Time deposits + Installment savings\n\n## Balance of Loan Portfolio, Classified by Industry\n\n## Year-End Balance\n\n- Notes: 1. Domestic operations comprise the operations of SMBC (excluding overseas branches) and its domestic consolidated subsidiaries. Overseas operations comprise the operations of SMBC's overseas branches and its overseas consolidated subsidiaries.\n- 2. Japan offshore banking accounts are included in overseas operations' accounts.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n158", + "recall": 0.9714285714285714, + "true_md": "SMBC\n\n## Assets and Liabilities (Consolidated)\n\n## Deposits and Negotiable Certificates of Deposit\n\n## Balance of Loan Portfolio, Classified by Industry\n\nSMFG 2011 158\n\n- Notes: 1. Domestic operations comprise the operations of SMBC (excluding overseas branches) and its domestic consolidated subsidiaries. Overseas operations comprise the operations of SMBC’s overseas branches and its overseas consolidated subsidiaries.\n\n- 2. Liquid deposits = Current deposits + Ordinary deposits + Savings deposits + Deposits at notice\n\n- 3. Fixed-term deposits = Time deposits + Installment savings\n\n- Notes: 1. Domestic operations comprise the operations of SMBC (excluding overseas branches) and its domestic consolidated subsidiaries. Overseas operations comprise the operations of SMBC’s overseas branches and its overseas consolidated subsidiaries.\n\n- 2. Japan offshore banking accounts are included in overseas operations’ accounts.\n\nSumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation and Subsidiaries\n\n## Year-End Balance\n\n## Year-End Balance" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9068804255413558, + "doc_id": "194f01319620df5785a6b7623feda816921de1f3b700094b06408d1951758e20", + "edit_distance": 0.08615384615384615, + "f1_score": 0.9902534113060429, + "meteor": 0.9132804187441419, + "precision": 0.9921875, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 1 - STATEMENT OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES continued\n\nThe recoverable amount of an asset is the greater of its fair value less costs to sell (FVLCS) and its value-in-use (VIU). In assessing VIU, an asset's estimated future cash flows are discounted to their present value using an appropriate discount rate that reflects current market assessments of the time value of money and the risks specific to the assets/CGUs. In addition, the Group considers market data related to recent transactions for similar assets. In determining the fair value of the Group's investment in shale properties, the Group considers a variety of valuation metrics from recent comparable transactions in the market. These metrics include price per flowing barrel of oil equivalent and undeveloped land values per acre held. Where an asset does not generate cash flows that are largely independent from other assets or groups of assets, the recoverable amount is determined for the cash-generating unit to which the asset belongs.\n\nFor development and production assets, the estimated future cash flows for the VIU calculation are based on estimates, the most significant of which are hydrocarbon reserves, future production profiles, commodity prices, operating costs and any future development costs necessary to produce the reserves. Under a FVLCS calculation, future cash flows are based on estimates of hydrocarbon reserves in addition to other relevant factors such as value attributable to additional reserves based on production plans.\n\nEstimates of future commodity prices are based on the Group's best estimates of future market prices with reference to external market analysts' forecasts, current spot prices and forward curves. At 31 December 2014, future NYMEX strip prices, adjusted for basis differentials, were applied in 2015 and gradually increased through 2016 to $75/bbl in 2017 and thereafter.\n\nThe discount rates applied to the future forecast cash flows are based on a third party participant's post-tax weighted average cost of capital, adjusted for the risk profile of the asset.\n\nAn impairment loss is reversed if there has been an increase in the estimated recoverable amount of a previously impaired assets. An impairment loss is reversed only to the extent that the asset's carrying amount does not exceed the carrying amount that would have been determined, net of depreciation or depletion if no impairment loss had been recognized. The Company has not reversed an impairment loss during the years ended 31 December 2014 or 2013.\n\n## g) Foreign Currency Transactions and Balances\n\n## Functional and presentation currency\n\nBoth the functional currency and the presentation currency of the Group is US dollars. Some subsidiaries have Australian dollar functional currencies which are translated to the presentation currency. All operations of the Group are incurred at subsidiaries where the functional currency is the US dollar as all oil and gas properties are located in North America.\n\n## Transactions and Balances\n\nForeign currency transactions are translated into the functional currency using the exchange rates prevailing at the date of the transaction. Foreign currency monetary items are translated at the year-end exchange rate. Nonmonetary items measured at historical cost continue to be carried at the exchange rate at the date of the transaction. Non-monetary items measured at fair value are reported at the exchange rate at the date when fair values were determined.\n\n- 65 -", + "recall": 0.9883268482490273, + "true_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 1 - STATEMENT OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES continued\n\nThe recoverable amount of an asset is the greater of its fair value less costs to sell (FVLCS) and its value-in-use (VIU). In assessing VIU, an asset’s estimated future cash flows are discounted to their present value using an appropriate discount rate that reflects current market assessments of the time value of money and the risks specific to the assets/CGUs. In addition, the Group considers market data related to recent transactions for similar assets. In determining the fair value of the Group's investment in shale properties, the Group considers a variety of valuation metrics from recent comparable transactions in the market. These metrics include price per flowing barrel of oil equivalent and undeveloped land values per acre held. Where an asset does not generate cash flows that are largely independent from other assets or groups of assets, the recoverable amount is determined for the cash-generating unit to which the asset belongs. \n\nFor development and production assets, the estimated future cash flows for the VIU calculation are based on estimates, the most significant of which are hydrocarbon reserves, future production profiles, commodity prices, operating costs and any future development costs necessary to produce the reserves. Under a FVLCS calculation, future cash flows are based on estimates of hydrocarbon reserves in addition to other relevant factors such as value attributable to additional reserves based on production plans. \n\nEstimates of future commodity prices are based on the Group’s best estimates of future market prices with reference to external market analysts’ forecasts, current spot prices and forward curves. At 31 December 2014, future NYMEX strip prices, adjusted for basis differentials, were applied in 2015 and gradually increased through 2016 to $75/bbl in 2017 and thereafter.\n\nThe discount rates applied to the future forecast cash flows are based on a third party participant’s post-tax weighted average cost of capital, adjusted for the risk profile of the asset. \n\nAn impairment loss is reversed if there has been an increase in the estimated recoverable amount of a previously impaired assets. An impairment loss is reversed only to the extent that the asset’s carrying amount does not exceed the carrying amount that would have been determined, net of depreciation or depletion if no impairment loss had been recognized. The Company has not reversed an impairment loss during the years ended 31 December 2014 or 2013. \n\n## g) Foreign Currency Transactions and Balances\n\n## Functional and presentation currency Both the functional currency and the presentation currency of the Group is US dollars. Some subsidiaries have\n\n## Transactions and Balances Foreign currency transactions are translated into the functional currency using the exchange rates prevailing at the\n\nFunctional and presentation currency Both the functional currency and the presentation currency of the Group is US dollars. Some subsidiaries have Australian dollar functional currencies which are translated to the presentation currency. All operations of the Group are incurred at subsidiaries where the functional currency is the US dollar as all oil and gas properties are located in North America.\n\nTransactions and Balances Foreign currency transactions are translated into the functional currency using the exchange rates prevailing at the date of the transaction. Foreign currency monetary items are translated at the year-end exchange rate. Non- monetary items measured at historical cost continue to be carried at the exchange rate at the date of the transaction. Non-monetary items measured at fair value are reported at the exchange rate at the date when fair values were determined. \n\n- 65 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8481274884140935, + "doc_id": "c36040243c4fa67fc31099447492f6f779ed1cedeb146dd484a3b918ed57eb5f", + "edit_distance": 0.07317073170731707, + "f1_score": 0.96875, + "meteor": 0.9688224320198994, + "precision": 0.96875, + "pred_md": "## Nordstrom, Inc.\n\n## Consolidated Statements of Shareholders' Equity\n\nIn millions except per share amounts\n\nThe accompanying Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements are an integral part of these financial statements.\n\nNordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 39", + "recall": 0.96875, + "true_md": "## Nordstrom, Inc. Consolidated Statements of Shareholders’ Equity In millions except per share amounts\n\nThe accompanying Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements are an integral part of these financial statements.\n\nNordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 39" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8410626894538508, + "doc_id": "8caf93f75a67418f9a693ffd4bf747f40910ac1b1bb37a3b5139efdbde20aac3", + "edit_distance": 0.19623655913978494, + "f1_score": 0.9929245283018868, + "meteor": 0.9732483423106476, + "precision": 0.9929245283018868, + "pred_md": "44\n\n| EMPLOYEES\n\n| Drew Russell Jake Russell |\n|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|\n| John Russell Jr. |\n| Matthew Russell |\n| Michelle Russell |\n| Ricky Russell |\n| John Rutan Tony Rutigliano |\n| Britanni Rutledge |\n| Malcolm Rutledge |\n| Tyson Rutledge Chase Ryan Dennis Ryans Derek Rylant |\n| RJ Saladin |\n| Jaime Saenz Javier Saenz |\n| Eduardo Saldana |\n| Ramses Salinas Tobie Salisbury Sonny Samaniego Jamie Sampson Stuart Sampson Jose Sanchez |\n| Eli Sanchez |\n| Laura Sanchez |\n| Roland Sanders |\n| Terry Sanders Noble Sandlin III Sankaranarayanan |\n| Buvana Justin Sanner John Sansing James Santello Ramon Santos Willy Santos III |\n| David San Miguel |\n| Will Satterfield |\n| Bobby Saucedo Brandon Saunders Maggie Savoie Gbenga Sawyerr |\n| Sareenah Sayall Jeff Scarboro Pat Scarborough |\n| Danielle Schaad Matt Schaefer |\n| Zack Schaffer |\n| Gary Schellenger Mark Schemm |\n| Andrew Schlosser Shelby Schluchter Jessie Schmac Angela Schmidt |\n| Steve Schmidt Jr. Cory Schneberger |\n| Meredith Schneberger |\n| Rob Schneider |\n| Scott Schoener Jeff Schoonover Jessie Schott Gary Schrader Steven Schrader Jr. Brandon Schreck Joseph Schulker II Doug Schultz Trevor Schultz Chris Schumacher Sarah Schuster |\n| Britni Schwarz Chris Schwarz |\n| Kevin Schwind |\n| Colby Scifres |\n| Richard Scipione |\n| Bill Scott Chris Scott |\n| Richelle Scrivner Charlie Sebesta |\n| James Scott Mark Scott Matt Scott Jeff Seal Gabe Seeley Tim Seeley James Seidel Joe Seiter Gregory Selan |\n| Anthony Selbe |\n| Jeffery Self |\n| Travis Selman |\n\nJamison Sepelak\n\nEnrique Sepulveda\n\nScott Setzer\n\nRonald Severin\n\nRamon Sevilla Ortiz\n\nBarb Sexton\n\nBen Sexton\n\nJacob Seymore\n\nLori Shabazian\n\nLes Shade Jr.\n\nRichard Shafer\n\nWednesday Shafer\n\nBill Shaffer\n\nEric Shaffer\n\nMichelle Shaffer\n\nAndrew Shankles\n\nMatt Shandy\n\nKody Shannon\n\nKenneth Sharp\n\nTrent Sharp\n\nJosh Sharpe\n\nClinton Sharpley Jr.\n\nJerry Shea\n\nDan Shearer\n\nJason Shedd\n\nJohn Sheets\n\nRachel Sheets\n\nRandall Sheets II\n\nStephen Sheffield\n\nDustin Shellenberger\n\nJames Shelton\n\nJerry Shelton\n\nRyan Shelton\n\nBrad Shepard\n\nBrandon Shepard\n\nByron Shepard\n\nBrittany Sherman\n\nMike Sherman\n\nDave Shiels\n\nJohn Shifflett\n\nWilliam Shipley\n\nMarsha Shipman\n\nLucas Shipper\n\nChristopher Shiraldi\n\nBryan Shires\n\nZach Shirley\n\nJames Shoats\n\nCory Shoemake\n\nChelsea Shores\n\nCraig Shores\n\nDerek Shrader\n\nTony Shu\n\nNathan Shultz\n\nTyler Shupp\n\nRomel Siddique\n\nErnesto Sigala\n\nRoyce Sigler\n\nTommy Sigler\n\nJohn Sikes\n\nGeorge Siller Jr.\n\nVincent Silva\n\nLaylon Simms\n\nGarret Simon\n\nRobert Simon\n\nKaren Simonsen\n\nJason Simpson\n\nMike Simpson\n\nNicholas Simpson\n\nReyes Simpson\n\nJames Sinclair\n\nStan Singer\n\nRandy Sirois\n\nMonica Skaggs\n\nAaron Skiles\n\nBuddy Skinner\n\nErick Skinner\n\nJohn Skordynski\n\nJames Slack\n\nKevin Slater\n\nLehne Slater\n\nAngela Slayton\n\nMisti Sloan\n\nKeith Slone II\n\nScott Smallridge\n\nMatthew Smarkusky\n\nCurtis Smelley\n\nAngela Smith\n\nAshley Smith\n\nBart Smith\n\nBrittany Smith\n\n| Calvin Smith Jr. Candace Smith |\n|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|\n| Cassidy Smith |\n| Charlie W. Smith Charlie W. Smith Jr. |\n| Chris Smith Claude Smith |\n| Clifton Smith Daniel Smith |\n| Dave Smith David M. Smith |\n| Denice Smith |\n| Elizabeth Smith George Smith |\n| Ivan Smith Jeff Smith |\n| Jeffery N. Smith Jennifer Smith Jessica Smith Johnny Smith II Joshua L. Smith Kason Smith Kenneth Smith |\n| Lori Smith Louis Smith Mandy Smith |\n| Michael A. Smith Michael D. Smith |\n| Mickey Smith Mike A. Smith Mike G. Smith Mike M. Smith Oran Smith Paul Smith Jr. Pete Smith Randy L. Smith Ransom Smith |\n| Rickey Smith |\n| Sam Smith Jr. |\n| Tim D. Smith Tim W. Smith Travis Smith Trevor Smith |\n| Whitney Smith |\n| William Smith Zack Smith Kimberlee Smithton Tim Sneed |\n| Evan Snider John Snoddy |\n| Keith Snodgress |\n| Greg Snyder Jesse Snyder |\n| Keith Snyder Linda Snyder |\n| Anthony Sofio |\n| Josh Sohosky Cesar Solis Doug Solley Steven Sopp Noel Sorber Edwin Soriano Abraham Soto Humberto Soto Jay Soulek Jim Soulsby Will Southerland Danielle Sowle David Spahr Shane Spann Tim Sparks Rachel Spears |\n| Eric Sperling |\n| Richard Spence Kacia Spencer |\n| Dean Spirlock Jim Spoon |\n| Clayton Sporich Carlyn Sportsman Andrew Springer Zachary Sprowl David Spruill Robert Spurr John Stafford |\n| Savannah Stafford John Stallard |\n| Jacque Stamatopoulos |\n| Seth Stamper |\n| Bill Stanger Jr. |\n\nDaniel Stanton\n\nSteve Stapleton\n\nAlbert Stapp Jr.\n\nJoshua Stapp\n\nGregory Starcher\n\nBrian Stark Jr.\n\nChris Stark\n\nMichael Starkey\n\nKevin Starks Jr.\n\nJim Starr Jr.\n\nJason Statham\n\nBrian Statler\n\nEmerson Steele\n\nMike Steele\n\nZachary Stell\n\nGary Stephens Jr.\n\nLynn Stephens\n\nTasha Stephens\n\nTodd Stephenson\n\nCalvin Stevens\n\nJimmy Stevens\n\nHomer Stewart\n\nJeremy Stewart\n\nLarry Stewart\n\nMarlon Stewart\n\nJake Stippel\n\nJonathon Stitt\n\nAllison Stone\n\nChris Stone\n\nNate Stone\n\nRussell Storch\n\nMarianna Storozyszyn\n\nJason Stovall\n\nRob Stover\n\nRichard Strachan\n\nSaxby Stradinger\n\nTravis Strawbridge\n\nSteven Street\n\nShay Stricklin\n\nKim Stroh\n\nJoe Strotman\n\nMarty Stroud\n\nStephanie Stroud\n\nTommy Stroud\n\nTracy Stroup Jr.\n\nCody Stuart\n\nJames Stuart\n\nTimothy Studer\n\nMichael Sturgis\n\nJessica Suazo\n\nJenni Sudduth\n\nPeter Sulak\n\nKimberly Sullivan\n\nPaula Sullivan\n\nShawn Sullivan\n\nWill Sullivan\n\nKaren Summers\n\nRobert Summers\n\nKim Sutton\n\nDanny Swain\n\nMitchell Swartz\n\nDan Sweeney\n\nRory Sweeney\n\nAlex Swisher\n\nAmanda Syed\n\nMark Szollosy\n\nPaul Tackett\n\nAfshean Talasaz\n\nMichael Talbert\n\nMichael Talbott\n\nLandon Tanner\n\nTony Tarpenning\n\nShawn Tarron\n\nDavid Tarwater\n\nReid Tausch\n\nCole Taylor\n\nDavid A. Taylor\n\nElvin Taylor Jr.\n\nJason Taylor\n\nJustin Taylor\n\nMelissa Taylor\n\nMichael Taylor\n\nMichele Taylor\n\nRobert D. Taylor\n\nSteven Taylor\n\nSusie Taylor\n\nZachariah Taylor\n\nCasey Teachman\n\nDoyle Tenney\n\nCameron Tenorio\n\nCynthia Terbush\n\nMarlena Terrana\n\nCarlos Terrazas\n\nFrederick Terrell\n\nAdam Terry\n\nJacob Terry\n\nMelanie Terry\n\nRick Thacker\n\nBrittany Thomas\n\nChristopher Thomas\n\nDanny Thomas\n\nJim Thomas\n\nJosh Thomas\n\nKimberly Thomas\n\nLevi Thomas\n\nTodd Thomas\n\nTravis Thomas\n\nBen Thompson\n\nBrad Thompson\n\nCameron R. Thompson\n\nChase Thompson\n\nGavin Thompson\n\nHolly Thompson\n\nJack Thompson III\n\nJeff D. Thompson\n\nJoe Thompson\n\nKim Thompson\n\nNathan Thompson\n\nPaul Thompson\n\nRichard G. Thompson\n\nRobbie Thompson\n\nRonald Thompson II\n\nRobert Thoms\n\nKen Thorne\n\nJoey Thornton\n\nScott Throckmorton\n\nScott Tidwell\n\nTodd Tidwell\n\nJustin Tikhonoff\n\nTodd Tilford\n\nVernon Tillery Jr.\n\nAllen Timmons\n\nAubrey Timmons\n\nMichael Tinline\n\nAllen Tinsley\n\nLou Tinucci\n\nJesse Tippitt\n\nBrent Tipton\n\nVearl Tolbert Jr.\n\nDavid Tollison\n\nJohn M. Tomascik Jr.\n\nJohn M. Tomascik III\n\nAngel Torres\n\nAntonio Torres\n\nRolando Torres\n\nAngelo Torrey\n\nLin Tovar\n\nDarren Townley\n\nBill Townson Jr.\n\nScotty Trahan\n\nStephen Trahan\n\nJamye Trammell\n\nTyler Trammell\n\nAndy Travis\n\nJames Travis\n\nNick Traylor\n\nCorey Treadway\n\nThomas Treece\n\nEddie Trevino\n\nJuan Trevino\n\nVictor Trigo\n\nPaul Trimble\n\nAaron Tripi\n\nBrandon Triplett\n\nJoshua Triplett\n\nStephen Trosclair\n\nBilly Trout\n\nCortney Trumbly\n\nBrian Tschider\n\nValerie Tubbs\n\nKody Tucker\n\nAlan Tullius\n\nZack Turlington\n\nBrian Turner\n\nDonald Turner\n\nEric Turner\n\nHeather Turner\n\nMichele Turner\n\nNicole Turner\n\nPatricia Turner\n\nTodd Turner\n\nJoe Turpin\n\nSkyler Tuter\n\nRichard Tuttle\n\nZachary Twist\n\nDavid Tyree\n\nBrooke Unruh\n\nFelix Urbina\n\nMelissa Vahlberg\n\nGeorgi Vajarov\n\nMax Vangieson\n\nFrank Van Alstyne III\n\nGeorge Van Deusen\n\nCaleb Van Dolah\n\nTom Van Kirk\n\nDavid Van Winkle\n\nRubenia Vasquez\n\nMellisa Vasquez Cancino\n\nDavid Vassar\n\nRobert Vaughn\n\nAmber Vawter\n\nJenifer Veach\n\nCorey Veer\n\nRafael Vela\n\nRicardo Vela Jr.\n\nGary Velardo\n\nMaria Velez\n\nTimothy Venable\n\nRaymond E. Verhoeven\n\nPete Vermillion\n\nChris Verner\n\nChuck Vessey Jr.\n\nJames Vest\n\nKate Via\n\nMike Viator\n\nJohn Vick Jr.\n\nDanny Vickery\n\nCoral Viezcas\n\nJose Villalobos\n\nOrlando Villarreal\n\nBrad Vinsek\n\nDerek Vinyard\n\nAllyson Vistica\n\nJohn Voda\n\nLarry Vogel\n\nRobert Vogelgesang\n\nNathan Voorhees\n\nJason Voreis\n\nKenneth Wade\n\nNikki Wade\n\nRob Wade\n\nBrad Waggoner\n\nRobert Wagner\n\nRich Wagoner\n\nBrent Waidmann\n\nDennis Walden\n\nTodd Waldron\n\nMichael Wales\n\nBilly Walker\n\nBritt Walker\n\nDouglas Walker\n\nFloyd Walker\n\nGreg Walker\n\nJason Walker\n\nJulie Walker\n\nMitch Walker\n\nRyan Walker\n\nChris Walla\n\nDeborah Wallace\n\nJoshua Wallace\n\nLindsey Wallace\n\nNolan Wallace\n\nJames Walley\n\nDoyle Walls\n\nHenry Walston\n\nBret Walters\n\nClinton Walton\n\nBrooke Waltrip\n\nDonald Wamsley II\n\nDavid Wanzer\n\nDallas Warburton\n\nTracy Wardlow\n\nMilton Ware\n\nAcea Warn\n\nSherry Warner\n\nCody Warren\n\nJeffery Waters\n\nKimberly Watkins\n\nScott Watkins\n\nJesse Watson\n\nCarl Watt\n\nMichael Watts\n\nNathan Watts\n\nLacy Waugh\n\nJoshua Waychoff\n\nTony Waychoff Jr.\n\nJuan Weatherton\n\nAudrey Weaver\n\nBrian Weaver\n\nDerrick Weaver\n\nDustin Weaver\n\nMatthew Weaver\n\nPat Weaver\n\nRoss Weaver\n\nKathy Weeks\n\nCollin Weibel\n\nMarissa Weichbrodt\n\nDan Weinmeister\n\nLauren Weir\n\nCody Weisinger\n\nJames Welch\n\nMichael D. Welch\n\nAshley Wells\n\nDaniel Wells\n\nLaura Wells\n\nShelli Wells\n\nJason Welty\n\nTodd Wenrich\n\nGarin Wente\n\nTimothy Wescott\n\nTony Wesolick\n\nEric West\n\nKelly West\n\nJosh Westbrook\n\nLarry Westbrook\n\nDaniel Westcott\n\nAdam Westerman\n\nJenae Whatley\n\nRobert Whatley\n\nAndy Wheat\n\nKip Wheeler\n\nClarence Whipkey\n\nBob Whipp\n\nLeo Whitaker\n\nChris C. White\n\nChris D. White\n\nHaver White\n\nJonathan White\n\nLindsey White\n\nMicheal White\n\nRandall White II\n\nTamela White\n\nTony White\n\nTyler White\n\nWilliam White III\n\nJohn Whited\n\nTaryn Whitefield\n\nAndrew Whiteneck\n\nJohn Whitesell\n\nWhitney Whitlow\n\nJulie Whitmore\n\nDerek Whitten\n\nKatie Whittern\n\nScott Whytsell\n\nKarl Wickman\n\nRyan Wieder\n\nAndrew Wiggins\n\nJohn Wiggins\n\nRobert Wiggins\n\nRandy Wilde Jr.\n\nJason Wiley\n\nKristen Wiley\n\nAaron Wilfong\n\nJR Wilhoit Jr.\n\nSkylar Wilhoit\n\nHeath Wilkerson\n\nJason Wilkins\n\nNichlos Wilkinson\n\nRoberto Willars II\n\nTyler Willey\n\nBrian D. Williams\n\nBrooke Williams\n\nCameron Williams\n\nCody L. Williams\n\nDaniel Williams\n\nDavid Williams\n\nEddie Williams\n\nEric Williams\n\nFariba Williams\n\nGlenn Williams\n\nJason B. Williams\n\nLesley Williams\n\nLisa Williams\n\nMelissa Williams\n\nMichael Williams\n\nPhillip Williams\n\nRod Williams\n\nSonji Williams\n\nTimothy Williams\n\nTyler Williams\n\nWayne Williams\n\nWalt Willoughby\n\nBetina Wills\n\nAlan L. Wilson\n\nBrandon Wilson\n\nCandace Wilson\n\nCilff Wilson\n\nCody Wilson\n\nEric Wilson\n\nErnie Wilson\n\nJeremy Wilson\n\nJohn Wilson\n\nMarcus Wilson\n\nMichele Wilson\n\nMisty Wilson\n\nTerry Wilson\n\nRayna Wiltz\n\nRita Winn-Lott\n\nJohn Winzeler\n\nWilliam Wirth Jr.\n\nNicole Wise\n\nStephen Wisecarver Jr.\n\nGeorge Wittrock\n\nKevin Wolf\n\nMicah Wolter\n\nNathan Wood\n\nRobin Wood\n\nTerianne Wood\n\nAlicia Woodring\n\nScott Woodruff\n\nShane Woods\n\nBenjamin Wooten\n\nBryan Work\n\nChad Workman\n\nJanie Worsham\n\nPhillip Worsham\n\nMatthew Wragge\n\nDavid Wright Jr.\n\nJake Wright\n\nJeff Wright\n\nJerod Wright\n\nJohn V. Wright\n\nKatie Wright\n\nKrystal Wright\n\nFred Wrisley\n\nLindsey Wyatt\n\nJonathan Wynn\n\nJake Wynne\n\nCathie Wythe\n\nDominick Wytovich\n\nBrad Yanchuk\n\nJessie Yankey\n\nTanya Yanney\n\nBea Yates\n\nBoyd Yates\n\nMichael Yates\n\nSloan Yates\n\nJason Yeager\n\nMark Yeager\n\nDavid Yeary\n\nBryan Yeasted\n\nColin Yocum\n\nChristopher Yoder\n\nMarty Yoho\n\nJeremy Youells\n\nJeffrey Youells Jr.\n\nAshley Young\n\nDavid Young\n\nJeffrey Young\n\nMike Young\n\nSteve Young\n\nTony Younker\n\nJoshua Zabler\n\nPaula Zambrano\n\nJeff Zanotti\n\nChad Zickefoose\n\nCarlene Zuech\n\nBill Zurn\n\nArthur Zwierlein\n\nKade Zybach", + "recall": 0.9929245283018868, + "true_md": "## 44 | EMPLOYEES\n\nDrew Russell Jake Russell John Russell Jr. Matthew Russell Michelle Russell Ricky Russell John Rutan Tony Rutigliano Britanni Rutledge Malcolm Rutledge Tyson Rutledge Chase Ryan Dennis Ryans Derek Rylant JaimeSaenz Javier Saenz RJ Saladin Eduardo Saldana Ramses Salinas Tobie Salisbury Sonny Samaniego Jamie Sampson Stuart Sampson Eli Sanchez Jose Sanchez Laura Sanchez Roland Sanders Terry Sanders Noble Sandlin III Buvana Sankaranarayanan Justin Sanner John Sansing James Santello Ramon Santos Willy Santos III David San Miguel Will Satterfield Bobby Saucedo Brandon Saunders Maggie Savoie Gbenga Sawyerr Sareenah Sayall Jeff Scarboro Pat Scarborough Danielle Schaad Matt Schaefer Zack Schaffer Gary Schellenger Mark Schemm Andrew Schlosser Shelby Schluchter Jessie Schmac Angela Schmidt Steve Schmidt Jr. Cory Schneberger Meredith Schneberger Rob Schneider Scott Schoener Jeff Schoonover Jessie Schott Gary Schrader Steven Schrader Jr. Brandon Schreck Joseph Schulker II Doug Schultz Trevor Schultz Chris Schumacher Sarah Schuster Britni Schwarz Chris Schwarz Kevin Schwind Colby Scifres Richard Scipione Bill Scott Chris Scott James Scott Mark Scott MattScott Richelle Scrivner Jeff Seal Charlie Sebesta Gabe Seeley Tim Seeley James Seidel Joe Seiter Gregory Selan Anthony Selbe Jeffery Self Travis Selman\n\nJamison Sepelak Enrique Sepulveda Scott Setzer Ronald Severin Ramon Sevilla Ortiz Barb Sexton Ben Sexton Jacob Seymore Lori Shabazian Les Shade Jr. Richard Shafer Wednesday Shafer Bill Shaffer Eric Shaffer Michelle Shaffer Andrew Shankles Matt Shandy Kody Shannon Kenneth Sharp Trent Sharp Josh Sharpe Clinton Sharpley Jr. Jerry Shea Dan Shearer Jason Shedd John Sheets Rachel Sheets Randall Sheets II Stephen Sheffield Dustin Shellenberger James Shelton Jerry Shelton Ryan Shelton Brad Shepard Brandon Shepard Byron Shepard Brittany Sherman Mike Sherman Dave Shiels John Shifflett William Shipley Marsha Shipman Lucas Shipper Christopher Shiraldi Bryan Shires Zach Shirley James Shoats Cory Shoemake Chelsea Shores Craig Shores Derek Shrader Tony Shu Nathan Shultz Tyler Shupp Romel Siddique Ernesto Sigala Royce Sigler Tommy Sigler John Sikes George Siller Jr. Vincent Silva Laylon Simms Garret Simon Robert Simon Karen Simonsen Jason Simpson Mike Simpson Nicholas Simpson Reyes Simpson James Sinclair Stan Singer Randy Sirois Monica Skaggs Aaron Skiles Buddy Skinner Erick Skinner John Skordynski James Slack Kevin Slater Lehne Slater Angela Slayton Misti Sloan Keith Slone II Scott Smallridge Matthew Smarkusky Curtis Smelley Angela Smith Ashley Smith Bart Smith Brittany Smith\n\nCalvin Smith Jr. Candace Smith Cassidy Smith Charlie W. Smith Charlie W. Smith Jr. Chris Smith Claude Smith Clifton Smith Daniel Smith Dave Smith David M. Smith Denice Smith Elizabeth Smith George Smith Ivan Smith Jeff Smith Jeffery N. Smith Jennifer Smith Jessica Smith Johnny Smith II Joshua L. Smith Kason Smith Kenneth Smith Lori Smith Louis Smith Mandy Smith Michael A. Smith Michael D. Smith Mickey Smith Mike A. Smith Mike G. Smith Mike M. Smith Oran Smith Paul Smith Jr. Pete Smith Randy L. Smith Ransom Smith Rickey Smith Sam Smith Jr. Tim D. Smith Tim W. Smith Travis Smith Trevor Smith Whitney Smith William Smith Zack Smith Kimberlee Smithton Tim Sneed Evan Snider John Snoddy Keith Snodgress Greg Snyder Jesse Snyder Keith Snyder Linda Snyder Anthony Sofio Josh Sohosky Cesar Solis Doug Solley Steven Sopp Noel Sorber Edwin Soriano Abraham Soto Humberto Soto Jay Soulek Jim Soulsby Will Southerland Danielle Sowle David Spahr Shane Spann Tim Sparks Rachel Spears Richard Spence Kacia Spencer Eric Sperling Dean Spirlock Jim Spoon Clayton Sporich Carlyn Sportsman Andrew Springer Zachary Sprowl David Spruill Robert Spurr John Stafford Savannah Stafford John Stallard Jacque Stamatopoulos Seth Stamper Bill Stanger Jr. Daniel Stanton\n\nSteve Stapleton Albert Stapp Jr. Joshua Stapp Gregory Starcher Brian Stark Jr. Chris Stark Michael Starkey Kevin Starks Jr. Jim Starr Jr. Jason Statham Brian Statler Emerson Steele Mike Steele Zachary Stell Gary Stephens Jr. Lynn Stephens Tasha Stephens Todd Stephenson Calvin Stevens Jimmy Stevens Homer Stewart Jeremy Stewart Larry Stewart Marlon Stewart Jake Stippel Jonathon Stitt Allison Stone Chris Stone Nate Stone Russell Storch Marianna Storozyszyn Jason Stovall Rob Stover Richard Strachan Saxby Stradinger Travis Strawbridge Steven Street Shay Stricklin Kim Stroh Joe Strotman Marty Stroud Stephanie Stroud Tommy Stroud Tracy Stroup Jr. Cody Stuart James Stuart Timothy Studer Michael Sturgis Jessica Suazo Jenni Sudduth Peter Sulak Kimberly Sullivan Paula Sullivan Shawn Sullivan Will Sullivan Karen Summers Robert Summers Kim Sutton Danny Swain Mitchell Swartz Dan Sweeney Rory Sweeney Alex Swisher Amanda Syed Mark Szollosy Paul Tackett Afshean Talasaz Michael Talbert Michael Talbott Landon Tanner Tony Tarpenning Shawn Tarron David Tarwater Reid Tausch Cole Taylor David A. Taylor Elvin Taylor Jr. Jason Taylor Justin Taylor Melissa Taylor Michael Taylor Michele Taylor Robert D. Taylor Steven Taylor Susie Taylor Zachariah Taylor Casey Teachman Doyle Tenney Cameron Tenorio Cynthia Terbush\n\nMarlena Terrana Carlos Terrazas Frederick Terrell Adam Terry Jacob Terry Melanie Terry Rick Thacker Brittany Thomas Christopher Thomas Danny Thomas Jim Thomas Josh Thomas Kimberly Thomas Levi Thomas Todd Thomas Travis Thomas Ben Thompson Brad Thompson Cameron R. Thompson Chase Thompson Gavin Thompson Holly Thompson Jack Thompson III Jeff D. Thompson Joe Thompson Kim Thompson Nathan Thompson Paul Thompson Richard G. Thompson Robbie Thompson Ronald Thompson II Robert Thoms Ken Thorne Joey Thornton Scott Throckmorton Scott Tidwell Todd Tidwell Justin Tikhonoff Todd Tilford Vernon Tillery Jr. Allen Timmons Aubrey Timmons Michael Tinline Allen Tinsley Lou Tinucci Jesse Tippitt Brent Tipton Vearl Tolbert Jr. David Tollison John M. Tomascik Jr. John M. Tomascik III Angel Torres Antonio Torres Rolando Torres Angelo Torrey Lin Tovar Darren Townley Bill Townson Jr. Scotty Trahan Stephen Trahan Jamye Trammell Tyler Trammell Andy Travis James Travis Nick Traylor Corey Treadway Thomas Treece Eddie Trevino Juan Trevino Victor Trigo Paul Trimble Aaron Tripi Brandon Triplett Joshua Triplett Stephen Trosclair Billy Trout Cortney Trumbly Brian Tschider Valerie Tubbs Kody Tucker Alan Tullius Zack Turlington Brian Turner Donald Turner Eric Turner Heather Turner Michele Turner Nicole Turner Patricia Turner Todd Turner\n\nJoe Turpin Skyler Tuter Richard Tuttle Zachary Twist David Tyree Brooke Unruh Felix Urbina Melissa Vahlberg Georgi Vajarov Max Vangieson Frank Van Alstyne III George Van Deusen Caleb Van Dolah Tom Van Kirk David Van Winkle Rubenia Vasquez Mellisa Vasquez Cancino DavidVassar Robert Vaughn Amber Vawter Jenifer Veach Corey Veer Rafael Vela Ricardo Vela Jr. Gary Velardo Maria Velez Timothy Venable Raymond E. Verhoeven Pete Vermillion Chris Verner Chuck Vessey Jr. James Vest Kate Via Mike Viator John Vick Jr. Danny Vickery Coral Viezcas Jose Villalobos Orlando Villarreal Brad Vinsek Derek Vinyard Allyson Vistica John Voda Larry Vogel Robert Vogelgesang Nathan Voorhees Jason Voreis Kenneth Wade Nikki Wade Rob Wade Brad Waggoner Robert Wagner Rich Wagoner Brent Waidmann Dennis Walden Todd Waldron Michael Wales Billy Walker Britt Walker Douglas Walker Floyd Walker Greg Walker Jason Walker Julie Walker Mitch Walker Ryan Walker Chris Walla Deborah Wallace Joshua Wallace Lindsey Wallace Nolan Wallace James Walley Doyle Walls Henry Walston Bret Walters Clinton Walton Brooke Waltrip Donald Wamsley II David Wanzer Dallas Warburton Tracy Wardlow Milton Ware Acea Warn Sherry Warner Cody Warren Jeffery Waters Kimberly Watkins Scott Watkins Jesse Watson Carl Watt\n\nMichael Watts Nathan Watts Lacy Waugh Joshua Waychoff Tony Waychoff Jr. Juan Weatherton Audrey Weaver Brian Weaver Derrick Weaver Dustin Weaver Matthew Weaver Pat Weaver Ross Weaver Kathy Weeks Collin Weibel Marissa Weichbrodt Dan Weinmeister Lauren Weir Cody Weisinger James Welch Michael D. Welch Ashley Wells Daniel Wells Laura Wells Shelli Wells Jason Welty Todd Wenrich Garin Wente Timothy Wescott Tony Wesolick Eric West Kelly West Josh Westbrook Larry Westbrook Daniel Westcott Adam Westerman Jenae Whatley Robert Whatley Andy Wheat Kip Wheeler Clarence Whipkey Bob Whipp Leo Whitaker Chris C. White Chris D. White Haver White Jonathan White Lindsey White Micheal White Randall White II Tamela White Tony White Tyler White William White III John Whited Taryn Whitefield Andrew Whiteneck John Whitesell Whitney Whitlow Julie Whitmore Derek Whitten Katie Whittern Scott Whytsell Karl Wickman Ryan Wieder Andrew Wiggins John Wiggins Robert Wiggins Randy Wilde Jr. Jason Wiley Kristen Wiley Aaron Wilfong JR Wilhoit Jr. Skylar Wilhoit Heath Wilkerson Jason Wilkins Nichlos Wilkinson Roberto Willars II Tyler Willey Brian D. Williams Brooke Williams Cameron Williams Cody L. Williams Daniel Williams David Williams Eddie Williams Eric Williams Fariba Williams Glenn Williams Jason B. Williams\n\nLesley Williams Lisa Williams Melissa Williams Michael Williams Phillip Williams Rod Williams Sonji Williams Timothy Williams Tyler Williams Wayne Williams Walt Willoughby Betina Wills Alan L. Wilson Brandon Wilson Candace Wilson Cilff Wilson Cody Wilson Eric Wilson Ernie Wilson Jeremy Wilson John Wilson Marcus Wilson Michele Wilson Misty Wilson Terry Wilson Rayna Wiltz Rita Winn-Lott John Winzeler William Wirth Jr. Nicole Wise Stephen Wisecarver Jr. George Wittrock Kevin Wolf Micah Wolter Nathan Wood Robin Wood Terianne Wood Alicia Woodring ScottWoodruff ShaneWoods Benjamin Wooten Bryan Work Chad Workman Janie Worsham Phillip Worsham Matthew Wragge David Wright Jr. Jake Wright Jeff Wright Jerod Wright John V. Wright Katie Wright Krystal Wright Fred Wrisley Lindsey Wyatt Jonathan Wynn Jake Wynne Cathie Wythe Dominick Wytovich Brad Yanchuk Jessie Yankey Tanya Yanney Bea Yates Boyd Yates Michael Yates Sloan Yates Jason Yeager Mark Yeager David Yeary Bryan Yeasted Colin Yocum Christopher Yoder Marty Yoho Jeremy Youells Jeffrey Youells Jr. Ashley Young David Young Jeffrey Young Mike Young Steve Young Tony Younker Joshua Zabler Paula Zambrano Jeff Zanotti Chad Zickefoose Carlene Zuech Bill Zurn Arthur Zwierlein Kade Zybach" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8691108317639846, + "doc_id": "ae924dbc134e0ace2e73c126eacc2f7e1c3d700dff2ce1bca09420f30a7ec9e6", + "edit_distance": 0.7005813953488372, + "f1_score": 0.9756097560975611, + "meteor": 0.9125938147714168, + "precision": 0.9803921568627451, + "pred_md": "## WHY INVEST IN ROGERS\n\nRogers Communications has excellent positions in growing markets, powerful brands that stand for innovation, proven management, a long record of driving growth and shareholder value, and the financial strength to continue to deliver long-term growth.\n\n## LEADER IN CANADIAN COMMUNICATIONS INDUSTRY\n\nCanada's largest wireless carrier and a leading cable television provider, offering a 'quadruple play' of wireless, Internet, television and telephony services to consumers and businesses.\n\n## SUPERIOR ASSET MIX\n\nMajority of revenue and cash flow is generated from wireless and broadband services, the fastest growing segments of the telecommunications industry.\n\n## PROVEN LEADERSHIP AND ENGAGED EMPLOYEE BASE\n\nExperienced, performance-oriented management and operating teams with solid industry expertise, supported by the spirit of innovation and an entrepreneurial culture.\n\n## MUST-HAVE PRODUCTS AND SERVICES\n\nA leading provider of communications and entertainment products and services that are increasingly becoming integrated necessities in today's world.\n\n## STRONG FRANCHISES AND POWERFUL BRANDS\n\nStrong franchises with nationally recognized and highly respected brands that stand solidly in Canada for innovation, choice and value.\n\n## FINANCIAL STRENGTH AND FLEXIBILITY\n\nFinancially strong with an investment grade balance sheet, conservative debt leverage, and significant available financial liquidity.\n\n## ANNUALIZED DIVIDENDS PER SHARE: 2008-2013\n\n## CATEGORY-LEADING MEDIA ASSETS\n\nUnique and complementary collection of leading broadcast radio and television, specialty TV, sports entertainment, publishing and digital media assets.\n\n## LEADING NETWORKS AND INNOVATIVE PRODUCTS\n\nLeading wireless and broadband network platforms that deliver the most innovative communications, information and entertainment services.\n\n## HEALTHY TRADING VOLUME AND GROWING DIVIDENDS\n\nRCI common stock actively trades on the TSX and NYSE, with average daily trading volume of approximately 1.6 million shares. Each share pays an annualized dividend of $1.83 per share in 2014.\n\n## ADJUSTED NET INCOME AND EARNINGS PER SHARE\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 05", + "recall": 0.970873786407767, + "true_md": "## WHY INVEST IN ROGERS\n\nRogers Communications has excellent positions in growing markets, powerful brands that stand for innovation, proven management, a long record of driving growth and shareholder value, and the financial strength to continue to deliver long-term growth.\n\nCanada’s largest wireless carrier and a leading cable television provider, offering a “quadruple play” of wireless, Internet, television and telephony services to consumers and businesses. \n\nA leading provider of communications and entertainment products and services that are increasingly becoming integrated necessities in today’s world.\n\nUnique and complementary collection of leading broadcast radio and television, specialty TV, sports entertainment, publishing and digital media assets. \n\nMajority of revenue and cash flow is generated from wireless and broadband services, the fastest growing segments of the telecommunications industry.\n\nStrong franchises with nationally recognized and highly respected brands that stand solidly in Canada for innovation, choice and value.\n\nLeading wireless and broadband network platforms that deliver the most innovative communications, information and entertainment services.\n\nExperienced, performance-oriented management and operating teams with solid industry expertise, supported by the spirit of innovation and an entrepreneurial culture.\n\nFinancially strong with an investment grade balance sheet, conservative debt leverage, and significant available financial liquidity. \n\nRCI common stock actively trades on the TSX and NYSE, with average daily trading volume of approximately 1.6 million shares. Each share pays an annualized dividend of $1.83 per share in 2014.\n\n## HEALTHY TRADING VOLUME AND GROWING DIVIDENDS\n\n## FINANCIAL STRENGTH AND FLEXIBILITY\n\n## PROVEN LEADERSHIP AND ENGAGED EMPLOYEE BASE\n\n## SUPERIOR ASSET MIX\n\n## STRONG FRANCHISES AND POWERFUL BRANDS\n\n## LEADING NETWORKS AND INNOVATIVE PRODUCTS\n\n## CATEGORY-LEADING MEDIA ASSETS\n\n## MUST-HAVE PRODUCTS AND SERVICES\n\n## LEADER IN CANADIAN COMMUNICATIONS INDUSTRY\n\nADJUSTED NET INCOME AND EARNINGS PER SHARE\n\nANNUALIZED DIVIDENDS PER SHARE: 2008–2013\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 05" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9943593482348148, + "doc_id": "75d2e8a88a457e3c48e622d7f3298eaa763d4a02b235de388c83d1690bca6c3e", + "edit_distance": 0.00991407799074686, + "f1_score": 0.9967141292442497, + "meteor": 0.99777678984404, + "precision": 0.9956236323851203, + "pred_md": "Michael Bowling\n\nJesse Bowman\n\nMatthew Bowman\n\nJoe Box\n\nBobby Boydstun\n\nAshley Braden\n\nKyle W. Bradford\n\nReagan Bradford\n\nDon Bradley\n\nJames Bradley\n\nJase Bradley\n\nJason Bradshaw\n\nZac Bradt\n\nTim Brady\n\nLarissa Braker\n\nBradley Brasington\n\nBlake Braswell\n\nDanny Bratcher II\n\nCory Bratina\n\nLee Ann Bratten\n\nAllen Bratton Jr.\n\nJason Bratton\n\nMike Bread\n\nDax Brecher\n\nCache Breedlove\n\nGerry Brem\n\nMatt Brennan\n\nJayson Breunig\n\nCody Brevelle\n\nBrian Brewer\n\nTim Brewer\n\nBlaire Bridges\n\nJason Bridges\n\nJason Briggs\n\nMark Brinegar\n\nLarry Briscoe\n\nDavid Bristol\n\nCourtney Britt\n\nGreg Britt\n\nSteve Brominski\n\nBuddie Brooks\n\nJustin Brooks\n\nChristopher Brosius\n\nRobert Brosko\n\nHolly Brotherton\n\nAngela Brown\n\nChris Brown\n\nChristopher Brown\n\nDavid Brown\n\nHeather Brown\n\nHenry Brown\n\nJosh Brown\n\nMark A. Brown\n\nMichael Brown II\n\nMoriah Brown\n\nRodney J. Brown\n\nRonald Brown\n\nWillie Brown III\n\nMike Brownell\n\nRick Browning\n\nMichael Brunsman\n\nCorey Brutsman\n\nErik Bryan\n\nRichard Bryant\n\nScott Bryant\n\nBrad Buchan\n\nAlex Buchanan\n\nTrey Buchmeyer\n\nJuan Bucio\n\nKylie Buckles\n\nEmily Buckmaster\n\nEric Buddenbohn\n\nRyan Buersmeyer\n\nMichael Bullock\n\nBobby Bumgarner\n\nRobert Bunke\n\nChris Bunn\n\nStephen Burchard\n\nSam Burdge\n\nBrett Burger\n\nCarl Burkhammer\n\nBruce Burkhardt Jr.\n\nCody Burnett\n\nDon Burnett\n\nJake L. Burnett\n\nJami Burnett\n\nTy Burnett\n\nDelvin Burns\n\nJames Burns\n\nSarah Burns\n\nJustin Burris\n\nHarriet Burrow\n\nJeff Burson\n\nJeff Burt\n\nKyle Burt\n\nJeremy Burton\n\nMichael Burton Sr.\n\nThomas Burton Jr.\n\nJulie Bushong\n\nBrian Bussie\n\nJuan Bustamante\n\nLea Ann Butcher\n\nAmy Butler\n\nCharles Butler\n\nCosey Butler Jr.\n\nEric Butler\n\nSteven Butler\n\nJoe Button\n\nStephen Button\n\nZack Butts\n\nRobert Byers\n\nKelly Byford\n\nCharlie Byrd\n\nBryan Bone\n\nJames Cahoon Jr.\n\nRyan Cain\n\nBrian Calder\n\nJavier Calderon\n\nClayton Calhoun\n\nJerry Callahan\n\nRick Callahan\n\nKatie Callaway\n\nJason Callen\n\nNoel Camacho\n\nCarlos Camacho-Martinez\n\nNicholas Camburn\n\nMarissa Camp\n\nAlan Campbell\n\nAshley Campbell\n\nJessica Campbell\n\nKelsey Campbell\n\nRon Campbell Jr.\n\nJoesph Canaday\n\nChris Cannon\n\nLindi Cantrell\n\nSalvador Cantu Jr.\n\nCharles Caraway\n\nJordan Carden\n\nNikki Cardenas\n\nVictor Cardenas Sr.\n\nVictor Cardenas Jr.\n\nArnold Carey Jr.\n\nAdam Carleton\n\nBrian Carlozzi\n\nDavid Carlson\n\nTrinity Carman\n\nCandace Carollo\n\nJason Carpenter\n\nDavid Carrico\n\nJose A. Carrizales\n\nJames Carroll\n\nShawn Carroll\n\nRobbie Carson\n\nDusty Carter\n\nGail Carter\n\nJonathan Carter\n\nMeg Carter\n\nRoger Carter\n\nDusty Cartrette\n\nMac Carver\n\nHeleodoro Casarez\n\nAllison Cashman\n\nNik Casiano\n\nLauren Cassel\n\nScott Castaneda\n\nBrad Castle\n\nJosh Castleberry\n\nEncarnacion Castro\n\nPete Castro\n\nSean Cates\n\nAllen Catlett\n\nRolando Cavazos\n\nAshley Cawthron\n\nNicholas Cerbone\n\nDoug Cerretani\n\nMike Cervantes\n\nBrandon Chabot\n\nDavid Chadwick\n\nJake Chambers\n\nJonathan Chambers\n\nJordan Chambers\n\nWilliard Champagne Jr.\n\nAaron Chang\n\nGustavo Chang-Koo\n\nBounyeme Chansombat\n\nTerry Chapman\n\nEric Charoonsak\n\nKenneth Chase\n\nZac Chastain\n\nMelissa Chasteen\n\nJerry Chavez\n\nJose Chavez\n\nMarcos Chavez\n\nPaula Cheater\n\nWhitney Cheek\n\nBrian Chenault\n\nStephanie Cheng\n\nTaylor Chennault\n\nTerry Cheramie\n\nJohn Chidester Jr.\n\nTheo Chidester\n\nDave Childers\n\nBilly Childress\n\nSteve Childress\n\nDavid Childs Jr.\n\nBilly Chilson\n\nDaniel Chilson\n\nEric Chilson\n\nGretchen Chilson\n\nJason Chilson\n\nJeffrey Chilvers\n\nEric Chipps\n\nJoshua Chonko\n\nJonathan Christian\n\nLiza Christian\n\nJerome Christopher\n\nJacob Chrones\n\nEric Cindric\n\nJerry Circelli\n\nCason Clagg\n\nDaniel Clampet\n\nAbby Clapp\n\nCheryn Clapp\n\nJesse Clapp\n\nChris Clark\n\nJosh Clark\n\nPaul Clark\n\nStewart Clayton\n\nJames Clements\n\nKen Clemons\n\nTom Cleveland\n\nJosh Clifford\n\nZsanett Clifford\n\nJessica Clifton\n\nRichard Clifton\n\nCharla Cline\n\nJack Clinger\n\nPatrick Close\n\nBrian Closson\n\nGlen Clothier\n\nTricia Clothier\n\nTravis Clutter\n\nJessica Coats\n\nKristyna Coats\n\nChris Cobbs\n\nRobert Cockburn\n\nTimothy Cockerham II\n\nKyle Coe\n\nPaul Cogar\n\nWeston Cogburn\n\nMatt Coker\n\nSherry Coker\n\nAlex Colarusso\n\nQuincy Colbert\n\nJeremy Cole\n\nBrandon Coleman\n\nJason Coleman\n\nJeffrey Coleman\n\nAnn Coleson\n\nKari Collard\n\nSuzi Collier\n\nBill Collins\n\nBilly Collins\n\nCindy Collins\n\nCody Collins\n\nGary Collins\n\nJohn Collins\n\nLaurie Collins\n\nJack Colten\n\nDrew Columbus Jr.\n\nEdwin Combs\n\nDanielle Comer\n\nMaggie Conell\n\nDuane Confer II\n\nBen Conley\n\nChris Conner\n\nDavid Conner\n\nRobert Conner\n\nKandi Connor\n\nDenver Conrad\n\nJesse Conrad\n\nFrank Conserette III\n\nRobert Conway Jr.\n\nSeth Conway\n\nCody G. Cook\n\nCody Cook\n\nEric Cook\n\nRyvers Cook\n\nZackery Cook\n\nJohnathon Cooke\n\nShane Cooley Jr.\n\nKyle Coon\n\nKyle Cooper\n\nLarry L. Cooper\n\nKaraBeth Copenhaver\n\nWill Corbyn\n\nAllan Cormier\n\nMike Cornell\n\nCarl Corner\n\nAmy Cornforth-Long\n\nKate Cornwell\n\nEdgard Corona\n\nEvaristo Correa\n\nWesley Corrick\n\nAaron Corter\n\nNeil Cory Jr.\n\nHarold Cosner\n\nJosh Cosner\n\nFernando Cossio\n\nDan Costello\n\nClayton Costlow\n\nKirk Cotham\n\nMegan Cotton\n\nChester Cottrill\n\nMarc Coughanour\n\nVashon Coverson\n\nMargaret Covington\n\nAshley Cowan\n\nCharles Cox\n\nClayton Cox\n\nDustin Cox\n\nOrrin Cox\n\nJoe Craig\n\nKara Crain\n\nJason Crawford\n\nKenneth Creel Jr.\n\nGail Creighton\n\nMonte Creps\n\nAlex Criner\n\nDorine Crisman\n\nTaylor Crisp\n\nMark Crocker\n\nIan Cronkhite\n\nBrittany Croslin\n\nTroy Crossen\n\nMichael Crouch\n\nKari Crow\n\nOdis Crow\n\nNicole Crowl\n\nAcacia Croy\n\nPatrick Crump\n\nConner Cruson\n\nEduardo Cruz\n\nCarmen Csizmadia\n\nKeeley Cuccio\n\nJames Cudd\n\nAndrew Cullen\n\nBart Cullins Jr.\n\nKerry Culver\n\nKatie Cummings\n\nKelly Cummings\n\nShaun Cummings\n\nTim Cummings\n\nDanielle Cummins\n\nMike Cummins\n\nDavid Curtis\n\nTrevor Curtis\n\nEdward Cutright\n\nJames Cyr\n\nWalter Dahm\n\nMalori Dahmen\n\nDallas Daley\n\nClay Dallison\n\nJamal DaneshFar\n\nPaige Danford\n\nSeth Daniel\n\nAndy Darne\n\nStephen Darwent\n\nJohn Daugherty Jr.\n\nFelipe Davalos\n\nJohn Davenport\n\nKeely Davenport\n\nMark Davidovich\n\nDerek Davidson\n\nSteve Davidson\n\nWilliam Davidson\n\nBart Davis\n\nBennett Davis\n\nBeverly Davis\n\nBradley Davis\n\nBrian Davis\n\nCollette Davis\n\nDustin W. Davis\n\nFelicha Davis\n\nJason Davis\n\nJohn W. Davis\n\nKim Davis\n\nKristin Davis\n\nMegan Davis\n\nMichael Davis II\n\nScott Davis\n\nSeslie Davis\n\nTad Davis\n\nTyler Davis\n\nBryan Davison\n\nDanny Davisson II\n\nBrett Dawkins\n\nSarah Daws\n\nMonica Day\n\nRoger Day\n\nTrey Day III\n\nEric Dean\n\nGreg Dean\n\nJohn Debruin\n\nBenay Deckard\n\nJameson Deen\n\nBarry Dees\n\nDerek Dehoyos\n\nTimothy Delaney\n\nJames Delauder\n\nMike Delauder\n\nHeather Demarest\n\nAngela Dempsey\n\nJoshua Desko\n\nJoshua Deville\n\nKyle Deville\n\nJack Dewbre\n\nTimothy DeHaan\n\nTimothy DeKinder\n\nWalt DeLap II\n\nStacey DeLaune\n\nEdward DeLaO\n\nBronson DeLeeuw\n\nTom DeMann\n\nSean DePriest\n\nLance DeSpain\n\nKyle DeVoe\n\nGary De Los Santos\n\nAnthony De Los Santos\n\nNicole De Luna\n\nSandra Dias\n\nBen Dickason\n\nJeff Dietert\n\nAshlee Dieu\n\nDaniel Diffey\n\nJohn Dill\n\nEddie Dillard\n\nMichael Dinelli\n\nRobert Diosdado\n\nHilary Dittman\n\nBelinda Dixon\n\nJoel Dixon\n\nAmy DiMaria\n\nTaiz DiRienzo\n\nJason Doan\n\nBob Dobkin\n\nChristopher Dockery\n\nPeter Dodgen\n\nCharlie Dolezal\n\nJaclynn Dollins\n\nBrian Dombroski\n\nBeth Donaldson\n\nWayne Donaldson\n\nMatt Donley\n\nBrian Donovan\n\nThomas Donovan\n\nDewey Dooley II\n\nMatt Doporto\n\nJoe Doran\n\nStuart Doss\n\nJeff Dotson\n\nCord Doucet\n\nRyan Doud\n\nScott Doud\n\nCole Dougherty\n\nSarah Douthitt\n\nJohn Dowdell\n\nEric Dowell\n\nAshley Doyle\n\nKathy Doyon\n\nAaron Drabnis\n\nLuis Dragustinovis\n\nKristina Drawbridge\n\nMichael Driscoll\n\nJason Driver\n\nDana Drury\n\nMichael Dube\n\nBenjamin Duckworth\n\nRonnie Dudgeon II\n\nEric Dudley\n\nAmy Dugan\n\nDug Dugan\n\nBernard Duke\n\nDave Duke\n\nErnest Duke\n\nJames Duke\n\nJeff Dukes\n\nCameron Dullea\n\nDavid Duncan\n\nJames Duncan\n\nChelsea Dunlap\n\nLarry Dunlap\n\nCraig Dunn\n\nMichael Dunn\n\nWoody Dupre\n\nJoe Durham\n\nRobert Durham\n\nJessica Durrett\n\nAllison Dvorak\n\nCindy Dykes\n\nJude Dysart\n\nRichard Eads\n\nStephanie Eagle\n\nCody Eakle\n\nMark Earl\n\nReed Early\n\nBrian Earnest\n\nZach Eastham\n\nGarry Eastwood\n\nJoshua Eaton\n\nJose Echavarria\n\nDustin Eck\n\nJason Eddy\n\nWesley Eddy\n\nChance Edge\n\nDave Edgmon\n\nLanese Edmond\n\nMandy Edmonds\n\nMichael Edmonds\n\nChad Edmondson\n\nCody Edwards\n\nEric R. Edwards\n\nJohnson Edwards\n\nJonathan Edwards\n\nMike Edwards\n\nSamantha Edwards\n\nSeth Edwards\n\nWyatt Edwards\n\nAngela Eicholz\n\nDarius Ekhtiar\n\nTim Eklund\n\nRania Elghazi\n\nMario Elizondo\n\nTrey Ellers\n\nBrad Elliott\n\nMichael Emanis\n\nJerry Embrey\n\nMichael Embrey\n\nKevin Emfinger\n\nRoger Emmelhainz\n\nTerry Endicott\n\nJames Epley\n\nAdam Eppes\n\nDerrick Erb\n\nJustin Erskine\n\nAntone Erve\n\nWade Erwin\n\nDerek Esau\n\nAaron Escobedo\n\nVictor Escobedo\n\nBruce Escovedo\n\nNick Esker\n\nEnrique Espinoza\n\nDennis Espy\n\nDelfino Esquivel\n\nPhillip Estepp\n\nKirk Estes\n\nMartin Etem\n\nDebbye Eubanks\n\nRobert Eutsey\n\nBrandon Evans\n\nDavid E. Evans II\n\nDonald Evans\n\nJeffrey Evans\n\nKevin Evans\n\nLesley Evans\n\nMark K. Evans\n\nRoy Evans\n\nSteve Evans\n\nBryan Eveland\n\nRobert Evers Jr.\n\nRichard Ewald\n\nKristin Ewert\n\nJustin Ezell\n\nStacy Ezell\n\nEric Ezzolo\n\nAnthony Falkowski\n\nRicky Farmer\n\nDavid Farnsworth\n\nJon Fason\n\nDwight Faux\n\nSammy Feagin\n\nHeather Felder\n\nLori Felder\n\nAbraham Felix\n\nJacob Fellenz\n\nWilliam Feltner\n\nAlex Fennema\n\nDavid Fenton\n\nRyan Fenton\n\nJames Ferguson\n\nJonathan Ferguson\n\nKevin Ferguson\n\nNeeley Ferguson\n\nPatrick Ferrebee Jr.\n\nHeather Ferrin\n\nTrevor Fessler\n\nBobby Ficco\n\nClara Fidalgo\n\nShelby Fidler\n\nDaniel Fieker\n\nJon Filbert\n\nClint Filson\n\nMark Fimple\n\nLawrence Finch\n\nIsaac Finkbeiner\n\nJeremy Finkbeiner\n\nLezli Finsterwald\n\nNick Fischietto\n\nKurtis Fish\n\nAngela Fisher\n\nCharles Fisher\n\nClay Fisher\n\nJeremy Fisher\n\nRobert Fisher\n\nAdam Fitzgibbon\n\nJason Flaherty\n\nJody Fletcher\n\nFrankie Flores\n\nMark Flores\n\nToby Floyd\n\nJed Foley\n\nAlexander Fontaine\n\nPete Foradori Jr.\n\nAshley Ford\n\nDarren Ford\n\nSloane Ford\n\nTara Ford\n\nGary Fordyce Jr.\n\nElwood Foreman Jr.\n\n2010 ANNUAL REPORT |\n\n41\n\nMatue Forh\n\nJames Forney\n\nChristina Forth\n\nShawn Fortney\n\nAndrew Foshee\n\nDanny Foster\n\nGlen Foster\n\nJason Foster\n\nStephany Foutch\n\nCarl Fowler\n\nSacia Fowler\n\nGreg Fox\n\nHoward Fox\n\nLogan Franklin\n\nBrandon Frazier\n\nChase Frazier\n\nMichelle Frazier\n\nKeith Free\n\nLindsey Free\n\nJames Freeman\n\nMichael Freeman\n\nDonnie French\n\nJames Fretwell\n\nKristin Friday\n\nJames Friend Jr.\n\nFrank Frieri\n\nShawn Fromille\n\nBrian Fuentes\n\nBryant Fulk\n\nAl Fuller\n\nJosh Fuller\n\nRoland Fuller\n\nTerry Fuller\n\nBrett Fullmer\n\nChristi Fulton\n\nJoAnn Fulton\n\nRussell Fultz Jr.\n\nKevin Furr\n\nKyle Gabb\n\nWilliam Gaddy\n\nDrue Gage\n\nDrew Gagliardi\n\nJill Gagliardi\n\nKyle Gagliardi\n\nSarah Gainer\n\nKristi Galbraith\n\nBrad Gale\n\nRandall Gall\n\nRandis Gallaway\n\nBilly Galloway\n\nEileen Galvan\n\nGerardo Galvan\n\nCurtis Gambill\n\nJake Gamboa\n\nStephanie Gannaway\n\nDeborah Garbark\n\nAntonia Garcia\n\nGuadalupe Garcia\n\nHeriberto Garcia\n\nJesus Garcia Jr.\n\nMario Garcia\n\nMartin Garcia Jr.\n\nJordan Gardner\n\nRodolfo Garduno\n\nLoni Garis\n\nDavid R. Garner\n\nDavid Garner\n\nDaNeil Garner\n\nPhillip Garner\n\nStan Garner\n\nChelsea Garrapy\n\nBryan Garrett\n\nNick Garrison\n\nStephanie Garrison\n\nTammy Garvin\n\nMatthew Garwood\n\nDolores Garza\n\nEduardo Garza\n\nMary Gaskill\n\nBeth Gaston\n\nTim Gaston\n\nBlaine Gatian\n\nJustin Gauthier\n\nTravis Gay\n\nAlbert Gaylord III\n\nJeff Gearhart\n\nJohn Gebhardt\n\nBrad Geer\n\nWarren Geionety\n\nJerry Gentry Jr.", + "recall": 0.9978070175438597, + "true_md": "Michael Bowling Jesse Bowman Matthew Bowman JoeBox Bobby Boydstun Ashley Braden Kyle W. Bradford Reagan Bradford Don Bradley James Bradley Jase Bradley Jason Bradshaw Zac Bradt Tim Brady Larissa Braker Bradley Brasington Blake Braswell Danny Bratcher II Cory Bratina Lee Ann Bratten Allen Bratton Jr. Jason Bratton Mike Bread Dax Brecher Cache Breedlove Gerry Brem Matt Brennan Jayson Breunig Cody Brevelle Brian Brewer Tim Brewer Blaire Bridges Jason Bridges Jason Briggs Mark Brinegar Larry Briscoe David Bristol Courtney Britt Greg Britt Steve Brominski Buddie Brooks Justin Brooks Christopher Brosius Robert Brosko Holly Brotherton Angela Brown Chris Brown Christopher Brown David Brown Heather Brown Henry Brown Josh Brown Mark A. Brown Michael Brown II Moriah Brown Rodney J. Brown Ronald Brown Willie Brown III Mike Brownell Rick Browning Michael Brunsman Corey Brutsman Erik Bryan Richard Bryant Scott Bryant Brad Buchan Alex Buchanan Trey Buchmeyer Juan Bucio Kylie Buckles Emily Buckmaster Eric Buddenbohn Ryan Buersmeyer Michael Bullock Bobby Bumgarner Robert Bunke Chris Bunn Stephen Burchard Sam Burdge Brett Burger Carl Burkhammer Bruce Burkhardt Jr. Cody Burnett Don Burnett Jake L. Burnett Jami Burnett Ty Burnett Delvin Burns James Burns Sarah Burns\n\nJustin Burris Harriet Burrow Jeff Burson Jeff Burt Kyle Burt Jeremy Burton Michael Burton Sr. Thomas Burton Jr. Julie Bushong Brian Bussie Juan Bustamante Lea Ann Butcher Amy Butler Charles Butler Cosey Butler Jr. Eric Butler Steven Butler Joe Button Stephen Button Zack Butts Robert Byers Kelly Byford Charlie Byrd Bryan Bone James Cahoon Jr. Ryan Cain Brian Calder Javier Calderon Clayton Calhoun Jerry Callahan Rick Callahan Katie Callaway Jason Callen Noel Camacho Carlos Camacho-Martinez Nicholas Camburn Marissa Camp Alan Campbell Ashley Campbell Jessica Campbell Kelsey Campbell Ron Campbell Jr. Joesph Canaday Chris Cannon Lindi Cantrell Salvador Cantu Jr. Charles Caraway Jordan Carden Nikki Cardenas Victor Cardenas Sr. Victor Cardenas Jr. Arnold Carey Jr. Adam Carleton Brian Carlozzi David Carlson Trinity Carman Candace Carollo Jason Carpenter David Carrico Jose A. Carrizales James Carroll Shawn Carroll Robbie Carson Dusty Carter Gail Carter Jonathan Carter Meg Carter Roger Carter Dusty Cartrette Mac Carver Heleodoro Casarez Allison Cashman Nik Casiano Lauren Cassel Scott Castaneda Brad Castle Josh Castleberry Encarnacion Castro Pete Castro Sean Cates Allen Catlett Rolando Cavazos Ashley Cawthron Nicholas Cerbone Doug Cerretani Mike Cervantes Brandon Chabot David Chadwick Jake Chambers Jonathan Chambers\n\nJordan Chambers Williard Champagne Jr. Aaron Chang Gustavo Chang-Koo Bounyeme Chansombat Terry Chapman Eric Charoonsak Kenneth Chase Zac Chastain Melissa Chasteen Jerry Chavez Jose Chavez Marcos Chavez Paula Cheater Whitney Cheek Brian Chenault Stephanie Cheng Taylor Chennault Terry Cheramie John Chidester Jr. Theo Chidester Dave Childers Billy Childress Steve Childress David Childs Jr. Billy Chilson Daniel Chilson Eric Chilson Gretchen Chilson Jason Chilson Jeffrey Chilvers Eric Chipps Joshua Chonko Jonathan Christian Liza Christian Jerome Christopher Jacob Chrones Eric Cindric Jerry Circelli Cason Clagg Daniel Clampet Abby Clapp Cheryn Clapp Jesse Clapp Chris Clark Josh Clark Paul Clark Stewart Clayton James Clements Ken Clemons Tom Cleveland Josh Clifford Zsanett Clifford Jessica Clifton Richard Clifton Charla Cline Jack Clinger Patrick Close Brian Closson Glen Clothier Tricia Clothier Travis Clutter Jessica Coats Kristyna Coats Chris Cobbs Robert Cockburn Timothy Cockerham II Kyle Coe Paul Cogar Weston Cogburn Matt Coker Sherry Coker Alex Colarusso Quincy Colbert Jeremy Cole Brandon Coleman Jason Coleman Jeffrey Coleman Ann Coleson Kari Collard Suzi Collier Bill Collins Billy Collins Cindy Collins Cody Collins Gary Collins John Collins Laurie Collins Jack Colten Drew Columbus Jr.\n\nEdwin Combs Danielle Comer Maggie Conell Duane Confer II Ben Conley Chris Conner David Conner Robert Conner Kandi Connor Denver Conrad Jesse Conrad Frank Conserette III Robert Conway Jr. Seth Conway Cody G. Cook Cody Cook Eric Cook Ryvers Cook Zackery Cook Johnathon Cooke Shane Cooley Jr. Kyle Coon Kyle Cooper Larry L. Cooper KaraBeth Copenhaver Will Corbyn Allan Cormier Mike Cornell Carl Corner Amy Cornforth-Long Kate Cornwell Edgard Corona Evaristo Correa Wesley Corrick Aaron Corter Neil Cory Jr. Harold Cosner Josh Cosner Fernando Cossio Dan Costello Clayton Costlow Kirk Cotham Megan Cotton Chester Cottrill Marc Coughanour Vashon Coverson Margaret Covington Ashley Cowan Charles Cox Clayton Cox Dustin Cox Orrin Cox Joe Craig Kara Crain Jason Crawford Kenneth Creel Jr. Gail Creighton Monte Creps Alex Criner Dorine Crisman Taylor Crisp Mark Crocker Ian Cronkhite Brittany Croslin Troy Crossen Michael Crouch Kari Crow Odis Crow Nicole Crowl Acacia Croy Patrick Crump Conner Cruson Eduardo Cruz Carmen Csizmadia Keeley Cuccio James Cudd Andrew Cullen Bart Cullins Jr. Kerry Culver Katie Cummings Kelly Cummings Shaun Cummings Tim Cummings Danielle Cummins Mike Cummins David Curtis Trevor Curtis Edward Cutright James Cyr Walter Dahm\n\nMalori Dahmen Dallas Daley Clay Dallison Jamal DaneshFar Paige Danford Seth Daniel Andy Darne Stephen Darwent John Daugherty Jr. Felipe Davalos John Davenport Keely Davenport Mark Davidovich Derek Davidson Steve Davidson William Davidson Bart Davis Bennett Davis Beverly Davis Bradley Davis Brian Davis Collette Davis Dustin W. Davis Felicha Davis Jason Davis John W. Davis Kim Davis Kristin Davis Megan Davis Michael Davis II Scott Davis Seslie Davis Tad Davis Tyler Davis Bryan Davison Danny Davisson II Brett Dawkins Sarah Daws Monica Day Roger Day Trey Day III Eric Dean Greg Dean John Debruin Benay Deckard Jameson Deen Barry Dees Derek Dehoyos Timothy Delaney James Delauder Mike Delauder Heather Demarest Angela Dempsey Joshua Desko Joshua Deville Kyle Deville Jack Dewbre Timothy DeHaan Timothy DeKinder Walt DeLap II Stacey DeLaune Edward DeLaO Bronson DeLeeuw Tom DeMann Sean DePriest Lance DeSpain Kyle DeVoe Gary De Los Santos Anthony De Los Santos Nicole De Luna Sandra Dias Ben Dickason Jeff Dietert Ashlee Dieu Daniel Diffey John Dill Eddie Dillard Michael Dinelli Robert Diosdado Hilary Dittman Belinda Dixon Joel Dixon Amy DiMaria Taiz DiRienzo Jason Doan Bob Dobkin Christopher Dockery Peter Dodgen Charlie Dolezal Jaclynn Dollins\n\nBrian Dombroski Beth Donaldson Wayne Donaldson Matt Donley Brian Donovan Thomas Donovan Dewey Dooley II Matt Doporto Joe Doran Stuart Doss Jeff Dotson Cord Doucet Ryan Doud Scott Doud Cole Dougherty Sarah Douthitt John Dowdell Eric Dowell Ashley Doyle Kathy Doyon Aaron Drabnis Luis Dragustinovis Kristina Drawbridge Michael Driscoll Jason Driver Dana Drury Michael Dube Benjamin Duckworth Ronnie Dudgeon II Eric Dudley Amy Dugan Dug Dugan Bernard Duke Dave Duke Ernest Duke James Duke Jeff Dukes Cameron Dullea David Duncan James Duncan Chelsea Dunlap Larry Dunlap Craig Dunn Michael Dunn WoodyDupre Joe Durham Robert Durham Jessica Durrett Allison Dvorak Cindy Dykes Jude Dysart Richard Eads Stephanie Eagle Cody Eakle Mark Earl Reed Early Brian Earnest Zach Eastham Garry Eastwood Joshua Eaton Jose Echavarria Dustin Eck Jason Eddy Wesley Eddy Chance Edge Dave Edgmon Lanese Edmond Mandy Edmonds Michael Edmonds Chad Edmondson Cody Edwards Eric R. Edwards Johnson Edwards Jonathan Edwards Mike Edwards Samantha Edwards Seth Edwards Wyatt Edwards Angela Eicholz Darius Ekhtiar Tim Eklund Rania Elghazi Mario Elizondo Trey Ellers Brad Elliott Michael Emanis Jerry Embrey Michael Embrey Kevin Emfinger Roger Emmelhainz\n\nTerry Endicott James Epley Adam Eppes Derrick Erb Justin Erskine Antone Erve Wade Erwin Derek Esau Aaron Escobedo Victor Escobedo Bruce Escovedo Nick Esker Enrique Espinoza Dennis Espy Delfino Esquivel Phillip Estepp Kirk Estes Martin Etem Debbye Eubanks Robert Eutsey Brandon Evans David E. Evans II Donald Evans Jeffrey Evans Kevin Evans Lesley Evans Mark K. Evans Roy Evans Steve Evans Bryan Eveland Robert Evers Jr. Richard Ewald Kristin Ewert Justin Ezell Stacy Ezell Eric Ezzolo Anthony Falkowski Ricky Farmer David Farnsworth Jon Fason Dwight Faux Sammy Feagin Heather Felder Lori Felder Abraham Felix Jacob Fellenz William Feltner Alex Fennema David Fenton Ryan Fenton James Ferguson Jonathan Ferguson Kevin Ferguson Neeley Ferguson Patrick Ferrebee Jr. Heather Ferrin Trevor Fessler Bobby Ficco Clara Fidalgo Shelby Fidler Daniel Fieker Jon Filbert Clint Filson Mark Fimple Lawrence Finch Isaac Finkbeiner Jeremy Finkbeiner Lezli Finsterwald Nick Fischietto Kurtis Fish Angela Fisher Charles Fisher Clay Fisher Jeremy Fisher Robert Fisher Adam Fitzgibbon Jason Flaherty Jody Fletcher Frankie Flores Mark Flores Toby Floyd Jed Foley Alexander Fontaine Pete Foradori Jr. Ashley Ford Darren Ford Sloane Ford Tara Ford Gary Fordyce Jr. Elwood Foreman Jr.\n\nMatue Forh James Forney Christina Forth Shawn Fortney Andrew Foshee Danny Foster Glen Foster Jason Foster Stephany Foutch Carl Fowler Sacia Fowler Greg Fox Howard Fox Logan Franklin Brandon Frazier Chase Frazier Michelle Frazier Keith Free Lindsey Free James Freeman Michael Freeman Donnie French James Fretwell Kristin Friday James Friend Jr. Frank Frieri Shawn Fromille Brian Fuentes Bryant Fulk Al Fuller Josh Fuller Roland Fuller Terry Fuller Brett Fullmer Christi Fulton JoAnn Fulton Russell Fultz Jr. Kevin Furr Kyle Gabb William Gaddy Drue Gage Drew Gagliardi Jill Gagliardi Kyle Gagliardi Sarah Gainer Kristi Galbraith Brad Gale Randall Gall Randis Gallaway Billy Galloway Eileen Galvan Gerardo Galvan Curtis Gambill Jake Gamboa Stephanie Gannaway Deborah Garbark Antonia Garcia Guadalupe Garcia Heriberto Garcia Jesus Garcia Jr. Mario Garcia Martin Garcia Jr. Jordan Gardner Rodolfo Garduno Loni Garis David R. Garner David Garner DaNeil Garner Phillip Garner Stan Garner Chelsea Garrapy Bryan Garrett Nick Garrison Stephanie Garrison Tammy Garvin Matthew Garwood Dolores Garza Eduardo Garza Mary Gaskill Beth Gaston Tim Gaston Blaine Gatian Justin Gauthier Travis Gay Albert Gaylord III Jeff Gearhart John Gebhardt Brad Geer Warren Geionety Jerry Gentry Jr.\n\n2010 ANNUAL REPORT | 41" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9018262770761202, + "doc_id": "970211ca09bc966d0a7e2340f47c8e7ee510adb333dd4aa300f6e6eae9ed5005", + "edit_distance": 0.726790450928382, + "f1_score": 0.9386666666666666, + "meteor": 0.7812077948603198, + "precision": 0.967032967032967, + "pred_md": "## Net Income\n\nNet income from continuing operations was 3 % lower than last year. See 'Key Changes in Financial Results this Year Compared to 2012', for further details.\n\nExcluding certain items, adjusted net income was 1 % lower compared to 2012, mainly from higher adjusted operating profit and lower income tax expense, partially offset by higher depreciation and amortization.\n\n1 Adjusted operating profit, adjusted net income, adjusted basic and diluted earnings per share are non-GAAP measures and should not be considered as a substitute or alternative for GAAP measures. These are not defined terms under IFRS, and do not have standard meanings, so may not be a reliable way to compare us to other companies. See 'Non-GAAP Measures' for information about these measures, including how we calculate them.\n\n2 Other income excludes $47 million gain on the sale of TVtropolis investment for the year ended December 31, 2013. Other income also excludes the $233 gain on spectrum sale for the year ended December 31, 2012.\n\n3 Income tax expense excludes $22 million recovery (2012 - $40 million expense) for the year ended December 31, 2013 related to adjusted items.\n\n## Employees\n\nEmployee salaries and benefits represent a material portion of our expenses. At December 31, 2013, we had 28,026 (2012 - 26,801) employees across all of our operating groups, including shared services and the corporate office. Total salaries and benefits for full time employees (FTE) and part-time employees (PTE) in 2013 were approximately $1,940 million, up 7 % from $1,813 million in 2012 due to the increase in the number of employees, higher baseball player costs and employee benefit costs, an increase in pension expense due to higher service costs, and an increase in stock-based compensation expense due to a larger increase in our share price compared to 2012.\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC.\n\n53\n\nMANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS", + "recall": 0.9119170984455959, + "true_md": "## Net Income\n\n## Employees\n\n## CONSOLIDATED ADJUSTED NET INCOME\n\nEmployee salaries and benefits represent a material portion of our expenses. At December 31, 2013, we had 28,026 (2012 – 26,801) employees across all of our operating groups, including shared services and the corporate office. Total salaries and benefits for full time employees (FTE) and part-time employees (PTE) in 2013 were approximately $1,940 million, up 7 % from $1,813 million in 2012 due to the increase in the number of employees, higher baseball player costs and employee benefit costs, an increase in pension expense due to higher service costs, and an increase in stock-based compensation expense due to a larger increase in our share price compared to 2012.\n\nNet income from continuing operations was 3 % lower than last year. See “Key Changes in Financial Results this Year Compared to 2012”, for further details.\n\nExcluding certain items, adjusted net income was 1 % lower compared to 2012, mainly from higher adjusted operating profit and lower income tax expense, partially offset by higher depreciation and amortization.\n\n1 Adjusted operating profit, adjusted net income, adjusted basic and diluted earnings per share are non-GAAP measures and should not be considered as a substitute or alternative for GAAP measures. These are not defined terms under IFRS, and do not have standard meanings, so may not be a reliable way to compare us to other companies. See “Non-GAAP Measures” for information about these measures, including how we calculate them.\n\n2 Other income excludes $47 million gain on the sale of TVtropolis investment for the year ended December 31, 2013. Other income also excludes the $233 gain on spectrum sale for the year ended December 31, 2012.\n\n3 Income tax expense excludes $22 million recovery (2012 – $40 million expense) for the year ended December 31, 2013 related to adjusted items.\n\n(IN MILLIONS OF DOLLARS)\n\nMANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AN D ANALYSIS\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 53" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.905027489618047, + "doc_id": "c52c3b20f10542c5ca263781401605ddb99f4363e1c551470ae0d471ee9f35ff", + "edit_distance": 0.1452513966480447, + "f1_score": 0.97196261682243, + "meteor": 0.9266180703872225, + "precision": 0.9811320754716981, + "pred_md": "MANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS\n\n## Executive Summary\n\n## ABOUT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC.\n\n## Rogers Communications is one of Canada's leading diversified communications and media companies.\n\nWe provide a broad range of services: wireless and wired voice and data communications, cable television, high-speed Internet, cable telephony, wired telecom and data networking services to consumers and businesses. We also compete in television and radio broadcasting, multi-platform shopping, sports media and entertainment, digital media and consumer, trade and professional publications.\n\nAlmost all of our operations and sales are in Canada. We have a highly skilled and diversified workforce of approximately 28,000 employees. Our head-office is in Toronto, Ontario and we have numerous offices across Canada.\n\n## FOUR BUSINESS SEGMENTS\n\nWe report our results of operations in four segments.\n\n26\n\nROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n## (%) 20 1 3 CONSOLIDATED ADJUSTED OPERATING PROFIT BY SEGMENT", + "recall": 0.9629629629629629, + "true_md": "MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS\n\n## Executive Summary\n\n## ABOUT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC.\n\n## Rogers Communications is one of Canada’s leading diversified communications and media companies.\n\nWe provide a broad range of services: wireless and wired voice and data communications, cable television, high-speed Internet, cable telephony, wired telecom and data networking services to consumers and businesses. We also compete in television and radio broadcasting, multi-platform shopping, sports media and entertainment, digital media and consumer, trade and professional publications.\n\nAlmost all of our operations and sales are in Canada. We have a highly skilled and diversified workforce of approximately 28,000 employees. Our head-office is in Toronto, Ontario and we have numerous offices across Canada.\n\n## FOUR BUSINESS SEGMENTS\n\nWe report our results of operations in four segments.\n\n(%) 20 1 3 CONSOLIDATED ADJUSTED OPERATING PROFIT BY SEGMENT\n\n(%) 20 1 3 CONSOLIDATED REVENUE BY SEGMENT\n\n26 ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9175324309194862, + "doc_id": "8a23e629f4fdc2adca1912629e601d6060154a1042782891e3cadaab63291a5c", + "edit_distance": 0.10512129380053908, + "f1_score": 0.9602649006622516, + "meteor": 0.9491050336808097, + "precision": 0.9602649006622517, + "pred_md": "## C. Other Retail Exposures\n\n## (A) Rating Procedures\n\n- GLYPH<129> 'Other retail exposures' includes business loans such as apartment construction loans, standardized SME loans, and consumer loans such as My Car Loan.\n- GLYPH<129> Business loans, standardized SME loans and consumer loans are rated as follows.\n- a. Business loans and standardized SME loans are allocated to a portfolio segment with similar risk characteristics in terms of (a) default risk determined using loan contract information, results of exclusive grading model and borrower category under self-assessment executed in accordance with the financial inspection manual of the Japanese FSA, and (b) recovery risk determined based on, for standardized SME loans, obligor attributes and, for business loans, LTV . PDs and LGDs are estimated based on the default experience for each segment and taking into account the possibility of estimation errors.\n- b. Rating procedures for consumer loans depends on whether the loan is collateralized. Collateralized consumer loans are allocated to a portfolio segment using the same standards as for mortgage loans of 'A. Residential Mortgage Exposures.' Uncollateralized consumer loans are allocated to a portfolio segment based on account history. PDs and LGDs are estimated based on the default experience for each segment and taking into account the possibility of estimation errors.\n\nFurther, the effectiveness of segmentation in terms of default risk and recovery risk is validated periodically.\n\nInternal data are used to estimate and validate PDs and LGDs. The definition of default is the definition stipulated in the Notification.\n\n## (B) Portfolio\n\nNotes: 1. 'Business loans' includes apartment construction loans and standardized SME loans.\n\n2. 'Others' includes loans guaranteed by employers.\n\n3. 'Delinquent' loans are past due loans and loans to obligors categorized as 'Borrowers Requiring Caution' that do not satisfy the definition of default stipulated in the Notification.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n187\n\nCapital Ratio Information\n\nSMFG", + "recall": 0.9602649006622517, + "true_md": "SMFG\n\nCapital Ratio Information\n\n## C. Other Retail Exposures\n\n## (A) Rating Procedures\n\n## (B) Portfolio\n\n- GLYPH<129> “Other retail exposures” includes business loans such as apartment construction loans, standardized SME loans, and consumer loans such as My Car Loan. \n\n- GLYPH<129> Business loans, standardized SME loans and consumer loans are rated as follows.\n\n- a. Business loans and standardized SME loans are allocated to a portfolio segment with similar risk characteristics in terms of (a) default risk determined using loan contract information, results of exclusive grading model and borrower category under self-assessment executed in accordance with the financial inspection manual of the Japanese FSA, and (b) recovery risk determined based on, for standardized SME loans, obligor attributes and, for business loans, LTV. PDs and LGDs are estimated based on the default experience for each segment and taking into account the possibility of estimation errors. \n\n- b. Rating procedures for consumer loans depends on whether the loan is collateralized. Collateralized consumer loans are allocated to a portfolio segment using the same standards as for mortgage loans of “A. Residential Mortgage Exposures.” Uncollateralized consumer loans are allocated to a portfolio segment based on account history. PDs and LGDs are estimated based on the default experience for each segment and taking into account the possibility of estimation errors.\n\nFurther, the effectiveness of segmentation in terms of default risk and recovery risk is validated periodically. \n\nInternal data are used to estimate and validate PDs and LGDs. The definition of default is the definition stipulated in the Notification.\n\nNotes: 1. “Business loans” includes apartment construction loans and standardized SME loans.\n\n2. “Others” includes loans guaranteed by employers.\n\n3. “Delinquent” loans are past due loans and loans to obligors categorized as “Borrowers Requiring Caution” that do not satisfy the definition of default stipulated in the Notification.\n\nSMFG 2011 187" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9410350372127545, + "doc_id": "263eba4c28ab0b2d29132afd90725604edb5f00150bb398a4724fe7a53bee20a", + "edit_distance": 0.2064676616915423, + "f1_score": 0.988179669030733, + "meteor": 0.9419234299833891, + "precision": 0.990521327014218, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 17 - IMPAIRMENT OF NON-CURRENT ASSETS\n\nAt 31 December 2014, the Group reassessed the carrying amount of its non-current assets for indicators of impairment in accordance with the Group's accounting policy. Due to the change in the oil pricing environment at year-end, the Company determined that there was an indication of impairment for development and production assets.\n\nEach of the Group's development and production asset CGUs include all of its developed producing properties, shared infrastructure supporting its production and undeveloped acreage that the Group considers technically feasible and commercially viable.\n\nEstimates of recoverable amounts are based on the higher of an asset's value-in-use or fair value less costs to sell (level 3 fair value hierarchy), using a discounted cash flow method, and are most sensitive to the key assumptions such as pricing, discount rates, and reserve risk factors. The Group has used the FVLCS calculation whereby future cash flows are based on estimates of hydrocarbon reserves in addition to other relevant factors such as value attributable to additional reserves based on production plans.\n\nEstimates of future commodity prices are based on the Group's best estimates of future market prices with reference to external market analysts' forecasts, current spot prices and forward curves. At 31 December 2014, future NYMEX strip prices, adjusted for basis differentials, were applied in 2015 and gradually increased through 2016 to $75/bbl in 2017 and thereafter.\n\nThe post-tax discount rate that has been applied to the above non-current assets was 8.0%. The Group also applied further risk-adjustments appropriate for risks associated with its developed and undeveloped reserves using a weighted average risk-adjustment rate of 6% and 17%, respectively, based on the risk associate with each reserve category.\n\nRecoverable amounts and resulting impairment write-downs recognized in the Consolidated Statements of Profit or Loss and Other Comprehensive Income for the year ended 31 December 2014 are presented in the table below:\n\n(1) Carrying costs exclude work-in-progress that is not subject to impairment analysis.\n\nThe impairment charge of $71.2 million noted above is primarily the result from the lower oil price environment.\n\n- 84 -", + "recall": 0.9858490566037735, + "true_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 17 – IMPAIRMENT OF NON-CURRENT ASSETS\n\n## The impairment charge of $71.2 million noted above is primarily the result from the lower oil price environment.\n\n- (1) Carrying costs exclude work-in-progress that is not subject to impairment analysis. \n\nAt 31 December 2014, the Group reassessed the carrying amount of its non-current assets for indicators of impairment in accordance with the Group’s accounting policy. Due to the change in the oil pricing environment at year-end, the Company determined that there was an indication of impairment for development and production assets. \n\nEach of the Group’s development and production asset CGUs include all of its developed producing properties, shared infrastructure supporting its production and undeveloped acreage that the Group considers technically feasible and commercially viable. \n\nEstimates of recoverable amounts are based on the higher of an asset’s value-in-use or fair value less costs to sell (level 3 fair value hierarchy), using a discounted cash flow method, and are most sensitive to the key assumptions such as pricing, discount rates, and reserve risk factors. The Group has used the FVLCS calculation whereby future cash flows are based on estimates of hydrocarbon reserves in addition to other relevant factors such as value attributable to additional reserves based on production plans. \n\nEstimates of future commodity prices are based on the Group’s best estimates of future market prices with reference to external market analysts’ forecasts, current spot prices and forward curves. At 31 December 2014, future NYMEX strip prices, adjusted for basis differentials, were applied in 2015 and gradually increased through 2016 to $75/bbl in 2017 and thereafter.\n\nThe post-tax discount rate that has been applied to the above non-current assets was 8.0%. The Group also applied further risk-adjustments appropriate for risks associated with its developed and undeveloped reserves using a weighted average risk-adjustment rate of 6% and 17%, respectively, based on the risk associate with each reserve category. \n\nRecoverable amounts and resulting impairment write-downs recognized in the Consolidated Statements of Profit or Loss and Other Comprehensive Income for the year ended 31 December 2014 are presented in the table below: \n\n- 84 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.923271141840288, + "doc_id": "47e5a20daa940199ab60335e10f5e0dc5c30a620f30d576d01ae880a9555752e", + "edit_distance": 0.44, + "f1_score": 0.9915966386554622, + "meteor": 0.975392013635257, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 16 - DEVELOPMENT AND PRODUCTION ASSETS\n\nBorrowing costs relating to drilling of development wells that have been capitalized as part of oil and gas properties during the year ended 31 December 2014 was $3.4 million (2013: $1.3 million). The interest capitalization rate for both years ended 31 December 2014 and 2013 was 100%.\n\n- 83 -", + "recall": 0.9833333333333333, + "true_md": "- 83 - \n\nBorrowing costs relating to drilling of development wells that have been capitalized as part of oil and gas properties during the year ended 31 December 2014 was $3.4 million (2013: $1.3 million). The interest capitalization rate for both years ended 31 December 2014 and 2013 was 100%. \n\n## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 16 – DEVELOPMENT AND PRODUCTION ASSETS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9967103032342537, + "doc_id": "c146eec0c36e32dfe212a6263fc32aac45bb1f87917da7b0fc227a3839ff821b", + "edit_distance": 0.005847953216374269, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999994640851156, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Item 1B. Unresolved Staff Comments.\n\nNone.\n\n## Item 2. Properties.\n\nThe following table summarizes the number of retail stores we own or lease, and the percentage of total store square footage represented by each listed category as of January 31, 2015:\n\nThe following table summarizes our store activity during the last three years:\n\n1 Other includes Jeffrey boutiques, Trunk Club showrooms, our Nordstrom Canada full-line store and Last Chance.\n\nIn 2014, we opened three Nordstrom full-line stores (The Woodlands, Texas; Calgary, Alberta; and Jacksonville, Florida) and 27 Nordstrom Rack stores (Palm Desert, California; San Francisco, California; Chicago, Illinois; Riverside, California; Skokie, Illinois; Tulsa, Oklahoma; Wauwatosa, Wisconsin; Brooklyn, New York; Columbus, Ohio; Houston, Texas; Manhassett, New York; Chicago, Illinois; Dayton, Ohio; Houston, Texas; Queens, New York; Brentwood, Tennessee; Greenville, South Carolina; Madison, Wisconsin; Tempe, Arizona; Brooklyn, New York; Livingston, New Jersey; West Palm Beach, Florida; Brandon, Florida; Columbia, South Carolina; Des Moines, Iowa; Philadelphia, Pennsylvania; and Summerlin, Nevada). As part of our purchase of Trunk Club in August 2014, we acquired four Trunk Club showrooms (Los Angeles, California; Chicago, Illinois; Dallas, Texas; and Washington D.C.) and opened one additional Trunk Club showroom (New York City, New York) in December 2014. Additionally, in 2014, we closed three Nordstrom full-line stores (Orlando, Florida; Vancouver, Washington; and Portland, Oregon).\n\nTo date in 2015, we have opened one Nordstrom full-line store in Ottawa, Ontario. During the remainder of 2015, we have announced the opening of four additional Nordstrom full-line stores (San Juan, Puerto Rico; Vancouver, British Columbia; Minneapolis, Minnesota; and Wauwatosa, Wisconsin) and the opening of 27 additional Nordstrom Rack stores (Bakersfield, California; Redlands, California; Reno, Nevada; Princeton, New Jersey; Westwood, Massachusetts; Webster, Texas; Laguna Niguel, California; Miami, Florida; Springfield, Virginia; St. Louis Park, Minnesota; Dublin, California; Albany, New York; Anchorage, Alaska; Baton Rouge, Louisiana; Buffalo, New York; Cerritos, California; Clearwater, Florida; Eatontown, New Jersey; Emeryville, California; Fort Collins, Colorado; Long Beach, California; Mount Pleasant, South Carolina; Newark, Delaware; Rockaway, New Jersey; Syracuse, New York; Thousand Oaks, California; and Wayne, New Jersey).\n\nWe also own six merchandise distribution centers (Portland, Oregon; Dubuque, Iowa; Ontario, California; Newark, California; Upper Marlboro, Maryland; and Gainesville, Florida) and we own one fulfillment center on leased land (Cedar Rapids, Iowa), all of which are utilized by our Retail segment. Trunk Club and HauteLook, which are included in our Retail segment, lease three administrative offices (Chicago, Illinois; Los Angeles, California and New York City, New York) and one fulfillment center (San Bernardino, California). We plan to open a third, owned fulfillment center (Elizabethtown, Pennsylvania) in the second half of 2015. We lease office buildings in Centennial, Colorado and Scottsdale, Arizona, both for use by our Credit segment. Our administrative offices in Seattle, Washington are a combination of leased and owned space. We also lease a data center in Centennial, Colorado.\n\n10", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## Item 1B. Unresolved Staff Comments.\n\n## Item 2. Properties.\n\nNone.\n\nThe following table summarizes the number of retail stores we own or lease, and the percentage of total store square footage represented by each listed category as of January 31, 2015:\n\nThe following table summarizes our store activity during the last three years:\n\n1 Other includes Jeffrey boutiques, Trunk Club showrooms, our Nordstrom Canada full-line store and Last Chance.\n\nIn 2014, we opened three Nordstrom full-line stores (The Woodlands, Texas; Calgary, Alberta; and Jacksonville, Florida) and 27 Nordstrom Rack stores (Palm Desert, California; San Francisco, California; Chicago, Illinois; Riverside, California; Skokie, Illinois; Tulsa, Oklahoma; Wauwatosa, Wisconsin; Brooklyn, New York; Columbus, Ohio; Houston, Texas; Manhassett, New York; Chicago, Illinois; Dayton, Ohio; Houston, Texas; Queens, New York; Brentwood, Tennessee; Greenville, South Carolina; Madison, Wisconsin; Tempe, Arizona; Brooklyn, New York; Livingston, New Jersey; West Palm Beach, Florida; Brandon, Florida; Columbia, South Carolina; Des Moines, Iowa; Philadelphia, Pennsylvania; and Summerlin, Nevada). As part of our purchase of Trunk Club in August 2014, we acquired four Trunk Club showrooms (Los Angeles, California; Chicago, Illinois; Dallas, Texas; and Washington D.C.) and opened one additional Trunk Club showroom (New York City, New York) in December 2014. Additionally, in 2014, we closed three Nordstrom full-line stores (Orlando, Florida; Vancouver, Washington; and Portland, Oregon). \n\nTo date in 2015, we have opened one Nordstrom full-line store in Ottawa, Ontario. During the remainder of 2015, we have announced the opening of four additional Nordstrom full-line stores (San Juan, Puerto Rico; Vancouver, British Columbia; Minneapolis, Minnesota; and Wauwatosa, Wisconsin) and the opening of 27 additional Nordstrom Rack stores (Bakersfield, California; Redlands, California; Reno, Nevada; Princeton, New Jersey; Westwood, Massachusetts; Webster, Texas; Laguna Niguel, California; Miami, Florida; Springfield, Virginia; St. Louis Park, Minnesota; Dublin, California; Albany, New York; Anchorage, Alaska; Baton Rouge, Louisiana; Buffalo, New York; Cerritos, California; Clearwater, Florida; Eatontown, New Jersey; Emeryville, California; Fort Collins, Colorado; Long Beach, California; Mount Pleasant, South Carolina; Newark, Delaware; Rockaway, New Jersey; Syracuse, New York; Thousand Oaks, California; and Wayne, New Jersey). \n\nWe also own six merchandise distribution centers (Portland, Oregon; Dubuque, Iowa; Ontario, California; Newark, California; Upper Marlboro, Maryland; and Gainesville, Florida) and we own one fulfillment center on leased land (Cedar Rapids, Iowa), all of which are utilized by our Retail segment. Trunk Club and HauteLook, which are included in our Retail segment, lease three administrative offices (Chicago, Illinois; Los Angeles, California and New York City, New York) and one fulfillment center (San Bernardino, California). We plan to open a third, owned fulfillment center (Elizabethtown, Pennsylvania) in the second half of 2015. We lease office buildings in Centennial, Colorado and Scottsdale, Arizona, both for use by our Credit segment. Our administrative offices in Seattle, Washington are a combination of leased and owned space. We also lease a data center in Centennial, Colorado.\n\n10" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9405588528980834, + "doc_id": "4835a549ab11e8521d2175c9b7a44a2f86e56a315b6100bfac1a00a9b2efaa5a", + "edit_distance": 0.7551342812006319, + "f1_score": 0.9811320754716982, + "meteor": 0.7955207347203769, + "precision": 0.9811320754716981, + "pred_md": "NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 23: SHAREHOLDERS' EQUITY\n\n## Capital S tock\n\nRCI's Articles of Continuance under the Company Act (British Columbia) impose restrictions on the transfer, voting and issue of the Class A Voting and Class B Non-Voting shares to ensure that we remain qualified to hold or obtain licences required to carry on certain of our business undertakings in Canada. We are authorized to refuse to register transfers of any of our shares to any person who is not a Canadian in order to ensure that Rogers remains qualified to hold the licences referred to above.\n\n## Dividends\n\nIn 2013 and 2012, we declared and paid the following dividends on our outstanding Class A Voting and Class B Non-Voting shares:\n\nThe holders of Class A shares are entitled to receive dividends at the rate of up to five cents per share but only after dividends at the rate of five cents per share have been paid or set aside on the Class B shares. Class A Voting and Class B Non-Voting shares therefore participate equally in dividends.\n\n## Normal Course Issuer Bid\n\nIn February 2013, we renewed our normal course issuer bid. During the 12-month period commencing February 25, 2013 and ending February 24, 2014, we may purchase on the TSX, the NYSE and/or alternative trading systems up to the lesser of 35.8 million Class B NonVoting shares, representing approximately 10% of the then issued and outstanding Class B Non-Voting shares, and that number of Class B Non-Voting shares that can be purchased under the normal course issuer bid for an aggregate purchase price of $500 million. The actual number of Class B Non-Voting shares purchased, if any, and the timing of such purchases will be determined by considering market conditions, share prices, our cash position, and other factors.\n\n120\n\nROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\nIn 2013, we repurchased for cancellation a total of 546,674 (2012 9,637,230) Class B Non-Voting shares for total proceeds of $22 million (2012 - $350 million), resulting in a reduction to Class B Non-Voting share capital, share premium and retained earnings of $1 million, nil and $21 million (2012 - $10 million, $243 million and $97 million), respectively. All of the 2013 purchases were made in June 2013 and were carried out through the facilities of the TSX. In 2013, we cancelled 43,993 Class B Non-Voting shares that related to old employee share plans for proceeds of nil.\n\n## Available-forS ale Financial Assets Reserve\n\nWe carry available-for-sale investments at fair value on the consolidated statements of financial position, and record changes in fair value in the available-for-sale financial assets reserve as a component of equity, through other comprehensive income, until the investments are disposed of or impaired, at which time we record the change in fair value in net income.\n\n## Hedging Reserve\n\nWe measure all derivatives at fair value on the consolidated statements of financial position, and record changes in fair value of cash flow hedging derivatives in the fair value reserve as a component of equity through other comprehensive income, if the derivatives are effective and until we recognize the hedged asset or liability in net income.\n\n## Defined Benefit Pension Plans\n\nOur defined benefit pension plan obligation is actuarially determined at the end of the year, and we recognize remeasurements in other comprehensive income and retained earnings.", + "recall": 0.9811320754716981, + "true_md": "120 ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\nNOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 23: SHAREHOLDERS’ EQUITY\n\n## Capital S tock\n\n## Dividends\n\n## Available-for- S ale Financial Assets Reserve\n\n## Hedging Reserve\n\n## Defined Benefit Pension Plans\n\n## Normal Course Issuer Bid\n\nIn February 2013, we renewed our normal course issuer bid. During the 12-month period commencing February 25, 2013 and ending February 24, 2014, we may purchase on the TSX, the NYSE and/or alternative trading systems up to the lesser of 35.8 million Class B Non- Voting shares, representing approximately 10% of the then issued and outstanding Class B Non-Voting shares, and that number of Class B Non-Voting shares that can be purchased under the normal course issuer bid for an aggregate purchase price of $500 million. The actual number of Class B Non-Voting shares purchased, if any, and the timing of such purchases will be determined by considering market conditions, share prices, our cash position, and other factors.\n\nThe holders of Class A shares are entitled to receive dividends at the rate of up to five cents per share but only after dividends at the rate of five cents per share have been paid or set aside on the Class B shares. Class A Voting and Class B Non-Voting shares therefore participate equally in dividends.\n\nOur defined benefit pension plan obligation is actuarially determined at the end of the year, and we recognize remeasurements in other comprehensive income and retained earnings.\n\nWe measure all derivatives at fair value on the consolidated statements of financial position, and record changes in fair value of cash flow hedging derivatives in the fair value reserve as a component of equity through other comprehensive income, if the derivatives are effective and until we recognize the hedged asset or liability in net income.\n\nWe carry available-for-sale investments at fair value on the consolidated statements of financial position, and record changes in fair value in the available-for-sale financial assets reserve as a component of equity, through other comprehensive income, until the investments are disposed of or impaired, at which time we record the change in fair value in net income.\n\nIn 2013 and 2012, we declared and paid the following dividends on our outstanding Class A Voting and Class B Non-Voting shares:\n\nIn 2013, we repurchased for cancellation a total of 546,674 (2012 – 9,637,230) Class B Non-Voting shares for total proceeds of $22 million (2012 – $350 million), resulting in a reduction to Class B Non-Voting share capital, share premium and retained earnings of $1 million, nil and $21 million (2012 – $10 million, $243 million and $97 million), respectively. All of the 2013 purchases were made in June 2013 and were carried out through the facilities of the TSX. In 2013, we cancelled 43,993 Class B Non-Voting shares that related to old employee share plans for proceeds of nil.\n\nRCI’s Articles of Continuance under the Company Act (British Columbia) impose restrictions on the transfer, voting and issue of the Class A Voting and Class B Non-Voting shares to ensure that we remain qualified to hold or obtain licences required to carry on certain of our business undertakings in Canada. We are authorized to refuse to register transfers of any of our shares to any person who is not a Canadian in order to ensure that Rogers remains qualified to hold the licences referred to above." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6037362234737282, + "doc_id": "111475f27ca8e25cd3d01c1a643611168b5836f549eb4279814a58c45b09a309", + "edit_distance": 0.3826086956521739, + "f1_score": 0.9279999999999999, + "meteor": 0.6941803339666262, + "precision": 0.9354838709677419, + "pred_md": "## management's Discussion and analysis\n\nDollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\n## Part VII\n\n## Quarterly Results & Discussion of Q4 Operations\n\n## Summary of Quarterly Results\n\nAn eight quarter trend highlighting key operating results is shown below:\n\n## Q4 - Consolidated Statements of Income\n\nIn thousands (except per share amounts)\n\n## For the three months ended December 31,\n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013\n\n57", + "recall": 0.9206349206349206, + "true_md": "Management’s Discussion and Analysis Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\nManagement’s Discussion and Analysis Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\n## Part VII\n\n## Quarterly Results & Discussion of Q4 Operations\n\n## Summary of Quarterly Results\n\nAn eight quarter trend highlighting key operating results is shown below:\n\nQ4 ‑ Consolidated Statements of Income In thousands (except per share amounts)\n\nFor the three months ended December 31,\n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013 57\n\n## Q4 ‑ Consolidated Statements of Income In thousands (except per share amounts)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9003259008687549, + "doc_id": "a35083236088727b9080200299de3064e480a417fbe61493c5f409d4a50c71df", + "edit_distance": 0.7555228276877761, + "f1_score": 0.9555950266429839, + "meteor": 0.7916214356821627, + "precision": 0.9746376811594203, + "pred_md": "## Managing Director and CEO's Report\n\nKingsgate had a solid year with gold production of 199,897 ounces at a total cash cost of US$888 per ounce (including royalties).\n\nChatree had a strong year following receipt of the final approvals for the expansion plant and the combined plant has been operating at a steady rate of 6.2 million tonnes per annum, 24% above nameplate capacity.\n\nChallenger had a difficult year and was severely impacted by an unplanned dilution and depletion at Challenger Deeps, that when coupled with the lower gold price and ongoing metal price uncertainty, led to a major restructure of mining at Challenger to focus primarily on the higher grade Challenger West orebody.\n\nKingsgate management and staff continue to work towards realising the operational potential of the Company's two gold mines and to complete the feasibility studies currently underway at Nueva Esperanza and Bowdens.\n\n## Operations\n\n## Chatree\n\nChatree continued as Kingsgate's primary production asset throughout the year, producing 133,681 ounces of gold and 1,000,569 ounces of silver. The strong production performance was achieved despite some operational hurdles with slower than anticipated Government approvals to allow full utilisation of the expanded plant.\n\nThe delay of 63 days in approval of Plant #2 Metallurgical License and lower than expected availability of some of the mining contractors' major mining equipment negatively impacted production. However, near surface higher grades in Q Prospect mitigated these difficulties resulting in a strong final quarter for the year.\n\nTotal mill throughput for the year was 5.7 million tonnes, 11.4% higher than 2012, despite the impact of the 63 day delay during which the new plant was not operating.\n\nThe overall plant availability of 98.1% was slightly lower than the previous year's 98.4%. The expanded plant is operating around 24% above the annual 'nameplate' throughput rate at 6.2 million tonnes per annum and this is expected to continue.\n\nTotal cash costs for the year were US$767 per ounce (US$620 per ounce exclusive of Thai royalties). The average royalty paid to the Thai Government was $US147 per ounce of gold.\n\nChatree continues to demonstrate world's best practice for safety and the environment with no lost time incidents ('LTI') or reportable environmental incidents occurring at Chatree during the year.\n\n## Challenger\n\nThe Challenger Mine had a difficult year and produced 66,216 ounces of gold at a total cash cost of US$1,135/oz. The grade of the processed ore was 3.91 grams per tonne, which was lower than expected due to a shortfall in ore supply from the mine that was supplemented by low grade ore from stockpiles. Higher dilution in stopes at the base of the mine (Challenger Deeps) and depletion on those levels, due to the additional displacement of the ore horizons following the identification of the '215 Shear', contributed to the lower than expected production from the lower levels. A shortfall in underground development also limited access to ore sources.\n\nDevelopment and mining commenced at the higher grade Challenger West orebody during the year but was insufficient to offset the shortfall from Challenger Deeps.\n\nThe transition to the new mine plan, focussing primarily on the higher grade Challenger West orebody, will take around three months before the cost and operational benefits start to be realised. These changes are complemented by the changeover to a new mining contractor who commenced operations on 1 August 2013.\n\n3\n\nManaging Director and CEO's Report\n\nChatree's Total mill throughput for the year was 5.7 million tonnes, 11.4% higher than 2012...\n\nGavin Thomas Managing Director and CEO\n\ncontinued\n\nMD and CEO's Report\n\nu", + "recall": 0.9372822299651568, + "true_md": "Managing Director and CEO’s Report 3\n\nMD and CEO’ Report\n\ncontinued u\n\nGavin Thomas Managing Director and CEO\n\nChatree's Total mill throughput for the year was 5.7 million tonnes, 11.4% higher than 2012...\n\n## Managing Director and CEO’s Report\n\n## Challenger\n\n## Operations\n\n## Chatree\n\nKingsgate had a solid year with gold production of 199,897 ounces at a total cash cost of US$888 per ounce (including royalties). \n\nThe overall plant availability of 98.1% was slightly lower than the previous year’s 98.4%. The expanded plant is operating around 24% above the annual “nameplate” throughput rate at 6.2 million tonnes per annum and this is expected to continue.\n\nTotal cash costs for the year were US$767 per ounce (US$620 per ounce exclusive of Thai royalties). The average royalty paid to the Thai Government was $US147 per ounce of gold.\n\nChatree continues to demonstrate world’s best practice for safety and the environment with no lost time incidents (“LTI”) or reportable environ- mental incidents occurring at Chatree during the year.\n\nChatree had a strong year following receipt of the final approvals for the expansion plant and the combined plant has been operating at a steady rate of 6.2 million tonnes per annum, 24% above nameplate capacity. \n\nChallenger had a difficult year and was severely impacted by an unplanned dilution and deple- tion at Challenger Deeps, that when coupled with the lower gold price and ongoing metal price uncertainty, led to a major restructure of mining at Challenger to focus primarily on the higher grade Challenger West orebody. \n\nKingsgate management and staff continue to work towards realising the operational poten- tial of the Company’s two gold mines and to complete the feasibility studies currently underway at Nueva Esperanza and Bowdens.\n\nThe Challenger Mine had a difficult year and produced 66,216 ounces of gold at a total cash cost of US$1,135/oz. The grade of the processed ore was 3.91 grams per tonne, which was lower than expected due to a shortfall in ore supply from the mine that was supplemented by low grade ore from stockpiles. Higher dilution in stopes at the base of the mine (Challenger Deeps) and depletion on those levels, due to the additional displacement of the ore horizons following the identification of the ‘215 Shear’, contributed to the lower than expected produc- tion from the lower levels. A shortfall in under- ground development also limited access to ore sources.\n\nChatree continued as Kingsgate’s primary production asset throughout the year, producing 133,681 ounces of gold and 1,000,569 ounces of silver. The strong production performance was achieved despite some operational hurdles with slower than anticipated Government approvals to allow full utilisation of the expanded plant.\n\nDevelopment and mining commenced at the higher grade Challenger West orebody during the year but was insufficient to offset the short- fall from Challenger Deeps.\n\nThe transition to the new mine plan, focussing primarily on the higher grade Challenger West orebody, will take around three months before the cost and operational benefits start to be realised. These changes are complemented by the changeover to a new mining contractor who commenced operations on 1 August 2013.\n\nThe delay of 63 days in approval of Plant #2 Metallurgical License and lower than expected availability of some of the mining contractors’ major mining equipment negatively impacted production. However, near surface higher grades in Q Prospect mitigated these difficulties resulting in a strong final quarter for the year.\n\nTotal mill throughput for the year was 5.7 million tonnes, 11.4% higher than 2012, despite the impact of the 63 day delay during which the new plant was not operating." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6837922931121102, + "doc_id": "aef4a7681fa545b6102d954b301c6ba8e1ddb645f3d0285850b607198f305020", + "edit_distance": 0.35, + "f1_score": 0.8918918918918918, + "meteor": 0.8915601023017903, + "precision": 0.8918918918918919, + "pred_md": "Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nSMFG\n\n- (5) Redemption schedule of bonds, borrowed money and other interest-bearing debts\n\n* Demand deposits are included in 'Within 1 year.' Deposits include current deposits.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n107", + "recall": 0.8918918918918919, + "true_md": "SMFG Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n(5) Redemption schedule of bonds, borrowed money and other interest-bearing debts\n\nSMFG 2011 107\n\n* Demand deposits are included in “Within 1 year.” Deposits include current deposits." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9450223720037131, + "doc_id": "3f070e86850ce9c7ec52a961a23dfd50078a8529efc4ce3309c83028c6e8a38c", + "edit_distance": 0.636098981077147, + "f1_score": 0.9733727810650888, + "meteor": 0.8850575047370546, + "precision": 0.9850299401197605, + "pred_md": "12\n\n| LETTER TO SHAREHOLDERS\n\nwet natural gas and dry natural gas), similar to the components of the Eagle Ford Shale. We have made a large commitment to this play and have acquired approximately 1.2 million net leasehold acres and expect to increase this total to as much as 1.5 million net leasehold acres in the coming months. We are currently using three rigs to evaluate the play and believe our leasehold could support the drilling of up to 12,000 net wells. This is an area where we anticipate bringing in a joint venture partner late in 2011 or early in 2012.\n\n## Our People\n\nGreat assets cannot exist without great people, so we take great pride in hiring, training, motivating, rewarding and retaining what we regard\n\nas the best employees in the industry. From our beginning 22 years ago with 10 employees in Oklahoma City to employing more than 10,000 people across 15 states today, Chesapeake has always focused on building first-class human resources within a distinctive corporate culture. Talk to Chesapeake employees and you will note genuine pride and great enthusiasm about the company and the critical role that we play in delivering increasing quantities of clean and affordable American natural gas and valuable and reliable liquids to energy consumers across the country.\n\nChesapeake employees are distinctive in other ways as well. They are much younger than the industry average, with half of our almost 4,000 Oklahoma City-based headquarters employees 33 years old or younger. Their enthusiasm and willingness to learn create an\n\natmosphere of vitality and energy at Chesapeake, important ingredients of our distinctive culture. These attributes, along with a vibrant and attractive corporate headquarters campus, low levels of bureaucracy, great assets and a well-executed corporate strategy combine to create our culture of success and innovation.\n\nThis has generated extremely positive external feedback as Chesapeake was recently recognized for the fourth consecutive year as one of the FORTUNE 100 Best Companies to Work For ®(3) in the U.S. In fact, we moved up to #32 overall and #1 in our industry - we are very proud of having created and sustained what is now considered the best place to work in all of the U.S. energy production industry.\n\nIn addition, we were honored in December 2010 at the 12th Annual Platts Global Energy Awards as finalists for CEO of the Year, Community\n\nFrom our beginning 22 years ago with 10 employees in Oklahoma City to employing more than 10,000 people across 15 states today, Chesapeake has always focused on building first-class human resources within a distinctive corporate culture.\n\n<< A Chesapeake rig drills in the Marcellus Shale, where the company is the leading leasehold owner, largest producer and most active driller.\n\nDevelopment Program of the Year, Deal of the Year, Energy Producer of the Year and the Industry Leadership Award. Chesapeake was one of only two companies selected as a finalist in five or more categories. The company was also honored in 2010 with a Certificate of Recognition for our military reserve recruiting efforts, named a 2010 Best Diversity Company by Engineering & Information Technology Magazine and recognized for Best Investor Relations in Energy Sector and Best Investor Relations Website at the 2010 IR Magazine U.S. Awards.\n\n## Recent Events and a Better Way Forward\n\nYou may be aware that I have been outspoken in attempting to persuade our country's political leadership to recognize that the discovery of vast resources of unconventional natural gas and oil in the U.S. is a complete game changer for our country from an economic, national security and environmental perspective. After two years of my best efforts and the efforts of many others in the industry, most notably T. Boone Pickens,", + "recall": 0.9619883040935673, + "true_md": "12 | LETTER TO SHAREHOLDERS\n\nwet natural gas and dry natural gas), similar to the components of the Eagle Ford Shale. We have made a large commitment to this play and have acquired approximately 1.2 million net leasehold acres and expect to increase this total to as much as 1.5 million net leasehold acres in the coming months. We are currently using three rigs to evaluate the play and believe our leasehold could support the drilling of up to 12,000 net wells. This is an area where we anticipate bringing in a joint venture partner late in 2011 or early in 2012.\n\nGreat assets cannot exist without great people, so we take great pride in hiring, training, motivating, rewarding and retaining what we regard \n\natmosphere of vitality and energy at Chesapeake, important ingredi- ents of our distinctive culture. These attributes, along with a vibrant and attractive corporate headquarters campus, low levels of bureau- cracy, great assets and a well-executed corporate strategy combine to create our culture of success and innovation. \n\nThis has generated extremely positive external feedback as Chesapeake was recently recognized for the fourth consecutive year as one of the FORTUNE 100 Best Companies to Work For ®(3) in the U.S. In fact, we moved up to #32 overall and #1 in our industry — we are very proud of having created and sustained what is now considered the best place to work in all of the U.S. energy production industry. \n\nIn addition, we were honored in December 2010 at the 12th Annual Platts Global Energy Awards as finalists for CEO of the Year, Community \n\nDevelopment Program of the Year, Deal of the Year, Energy Producer of the Year and the Industry Leadership Award. Chesapeake was one of only two companies selected as a finalist in five or more categories. The company was also honored in 2010 with a Certificate of Recognition for our military reserve recruiting efforts, named a 2010 Best Diversity Company by Engineering & Information Technology Magazine and rec- ognized for Best Investor Relations in Energy Sector and Best Investor Relations Website at the 2010 IR Magazine U.S. Awards.\n\nas the best employees in the industry. From our beginning 22 years ago with 10 employees in Oklahoma City to employing more than 10,000 people across 15 states today, Chesapeake has always focused on build- ing first-class human resources within a distinctive corporate culture. Talk to Chesapeake employees and you will note genuine pride and great enthusiasm about the company and the critical role that we play in deliv- ering increasing quantities of clean and affordable American natural gas and valuable and reliable liquids to energy consumers across the country.\n\nChesapeake employees are distinctive in other ways as well. They are much younger than the industry average, with half of our almost 4,000 Oklahoma City-based headquarters employees 33 years old or younger. Their enthusiasm and willingness to learn create an \n\nYou may be aware that I have been outspoken in attempting to persuade our country’s political leadership to recognize that the discovery of vast resources of unconventional natural gas and oil in the U.S. is a complete game changer for our country from an economic, national security and environmental perspective. After two years of my best efforts and the efforts of many others in the industry, most notably T. Boone Pickens,\n\n## Recent Events and a Better Way Forward\n\n## Our People\n\n<< A Chesapeake rig drills in the Marcellus Shale, where the company is the leading leasehold owner, largest producer and most active driller.\n\n## From our beginning 22 years ago with 10 employees in Oklahoma City to employing more than 10,000 people across 15 states today, Chesapeake has always focused on building first-class human resources within a distinctive corporate culture." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8344182899479116, + "doc_id": "58d298adb366796ebbe78cf58536b93c4d3bc0a1011114c064b31e0fbed1d80f", + "edit_distance": 0.25752508361204013, + "f1_score": 0.9973262032085561, + "meteor": 0.6495099348125348, + "precision": 0.9973262032085561, + "pred_md": "We are continuing our plan to accelerate the number of new Nordstrom Rack store openings. New store openings both at the Rack and in our full-line stores involve certain risks, including the availability of suitable locations, constructing, furnishing and supplying a store in a timely and cost-effective manner and properly balancing our capital investments between new stores, remodels, technology and ecommerce. In addition, we may not accurately assess the demographic or retail environment for a particular location and sales at new, relocated or remodeled stores may not meet our projections, particularly in light of the changing trends between online and brick-and-mortar shopping channels, which could adversely affect our return on investment. We also intend to open stores in new and international markets, such as Canada, Puerto Rico and Manhattan, and expansion will require additional management attention and resources and may distract us from executing our core operations. In addition, competition from strong local competitors, compliance with foreign and local laws and regulatory requirements and potentially unfavorable tax consequences may cause our business to be adversely impacted.\n\nAs we execute our plans and continue to evolve and transform our strategy, we may not adequately manage the related organizational changes to align with our strategy or appropriately monitor, report or communicate the changes in an effective manner. In addition, we may not gather accurate and relevant data or effectively utilize that data, which may impact our strategic planning and decision making.\n\n## Our stores located in shopping malls may be adversely affected if the consumer traffic of malls decline.\n\nMany of our stores are located in desirable locations within shopping malls and benefit from the abilities that we and other anchor tenants have to generate consumer traffic. A substantial decline in mall traffic, the development of new shopping malls, the availability of locations within existing or new shopping malls, the success of individual shopping malls and the success of other anchor tenants may negatively impact our ability to maintain or grow our sales in existing stores, as well as our ability to open new stores, which could have an adverse effect on our financial condition or results of operations.\n\n## Improvements to our merchandise buying processes and systems could adversely affect our business if not successfully executed.\n\nWe are making investments to improve our merchandise planning, procurement and allocation capabilities through changes in personnel, processes and technology over a period of several years. If we encounter challenges associated with change management, the ability to hire and retain key personnel involved in these efforts, implementation of associated information technology or adoption of new processes, our ability to continue to successfully execute our strategy or evolve our strategy as the retail environment changes could be adversely affected. As a result, we may not derive the expected benefits to our sales and profitability, or we may incur increased costs relative to our current expectations.\n\n## If we do not effectively design and implement our strategic and business planning processes to attract, retain, train and develop talent and future leaders, our business may suffer .\n\nWe rely on the experience of our senior management, who have specific knowledge relating to us and our industry that is difficult to replace, and the talents of our workforce to execute our business strategies and objectives. If unexpected turnover occurs without adequate succession plans, the loss of the services of any of these individuals, or any resulting negative perceptions of our business, could damage our reputation and our business.\n\n## Even if we take appropriate measures to safeguard our information security and privacy environment from security breaches, our customers and our business could still be exposed to risk.\n\nOur Retail and Credit segments involve the collection, storage and transmission of customers' personal information, consumer preferences and credit card information. In addition, our operations involve the collection, storage and transmission of employee information and company financial and strategic data. Any measures we implement to prevent a security or cybersecurity threat may not be totally effective and may have the potential to harm relations with our customers or decrease activity on our websites by making them more difficult to use. In addition, the regulatory environment surrounding information security, cybersecurity and privacy is increasingly demanding, with new and constantly changing requirements. Security breaches and cyber incidents and their remediation, whether at our company, our third-party providers or other retailers, could expose us to a risk of loss or misappropriation of this information, litigation, potential liability, reputation damage and loss of customers' trust and business, which could adversely impact our sales. Any such breaches or incidents could subject us to investigation, notification and remediation costs, and if there is additional information that is later discovered related to such security breach or incident, there could be further loss of customers' trust and business, based upon their reactions to this additional information. Additionally, as a credit card issuer, we could be subject to credit card fraud losses due to external credit card fraud.\n\n## If we fail to appropriately manage our capital, we may negatively impact our operations and shareholder return.\n\nWe utilize capital to finance our operations, make capital expenditures and acquisitions, manage our debt levels and return value to our shareholders through dividends and share repurchases. If our access to capital is restricted or our borrowing costs increase, our operations and financial condition could be adversely impacted. Further, if we do not properly allocate our capital to maximize returns, our operations, cash flows and returns to shareholders could be adversely affected.\n\nNordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 7", + "recall": 0.9973262032085561, + "true_md": "We are continuing our plan to accelerate the number of new Nordstrom Rack store openings. New store openings both at the Rack and in our full-line stores involve certain risks, including the availability of suitable locations, constructing, furnishing and supplying a store in a timely and cost-effective manner and properly balancing our capital investments between new stores, remodels, technology and ecommerce. In addition, we may not accurately assess the demographic or retail environment for a particular location and sales at new, relocated or remodeled stores may not meet our projections, particularly in light of the changing trends between online and brick-and-mortar shopping channels, which could adversely affect our return on investment. We also intend to open stores in new and international markets, such as Canada, Puerto Rico and Manhattan, and expansion will require additional management attention and resources and may distract us from executing our core operations. In addition, competition from strong local competitors, compliance with foreign and local laws and regulatory requirements and potentially unfavorable tax consequences may cause our business to be adversely impacted.\n\nAs we execute our plans and continue to evolve and transform our strategy, we may not adequately manage the related organizational changes to align with our strategy or appropriately monitor, report or communicate the changes in an effective manner. In addition, we may not gather accurate and relevant data or effectively utilize that data, which may impact our strategic planning and decision making.\n\nOur stores located in shopping malls may be adversely affected if the consumer traffic of malls decline. Many of our stores are located in desirable locations within shopping malls and benefit from the abilities that we and other anchor tenants have to generate consumer traffic. A substantial decline in mall traffic, the development of new shopping malls, the availability of locations within existing or new shopping malls, the success of individual shopping malls and the success of other anchor tenants may negatively impact our ability to maintain or grow our sales in existing stores, as well as our ability to open new stores, which could have an adverse effect on our financial condition or results of operations.\n\nexecuted. We are making investments to improve our merchandise planning, procurement and allocation capabilities through changes in personnel, processes and technology over a period of several years. If we encounter challenges associated with change management, the ability to hire and retain key personnel involved in these efforts, implementation of associated information technology or adoption of new processes, our ability to continue to successfully execute our strategy or evolve our strategy as the retail environment changes could be adversely affected. As a result, we may not derive the expected benefits to our sales and profitability, or we may incur increased costs relative to our current expectations.\n\ntalent and future leaders, our business may suffer . We rely on the experience of our senior management, who have specific knowledge relating to us and our industry that is difficult to replace, and the talents of our workforce to execute our business strategies and objectives. If unexpected turnover occurs without adequate succession plans, the loss of the services of any of these individuals, or any resulting negative perceptions of our business, could damage our reputation and our business.\n\ncustomers and our business could still be exposed to risk. Our Retail and Credit segments involve the collection, storage and transmission of customers’ personal information, consumer preferences and credit card information. In addition, our operations involve the collection, storage and transmission of employee information and company financial and strategic data. Any measures we implement to prevent a security or cybersecurity threat may not be totally effective and may have the potential to harm relations with our customers or decrease activity on our websites by making them more difficult to use. In addition, the regulatory environment surrounding information security, cybersecurity and privacy is increasingly demanding, with new and constantly changing requirements. Security breaches and cyber incidents and their remediation, whether at our company, our third-party providers or other retailers, could expose us to a risk of loss or misappropriation of this information, litigation, potential liability, reputation damage and loss of customers’ trust and business, which could adversely impact our sales. Any such breaches or incidents could subject us to investigation, notification and remediation costs, and if there is additional information that is later discovered related to such security breach or incident, there could be further loss of customers’ trust and business, based upon their reactions to this additional information. Additionally, as a credit card issuer, we could be subject to credit card fraud losses due to external credit card fraud.\n\nIf we fail to appropriately manage our capital, we may negatively impact our operations and shareholder return. We utilize capital to finance our operations, make capital expenditures and acquisitions, manage our debt levels and return value to our shareholders through dividends and share repurchases. If our access to capital is restricted or our borrowing costs increase, our operations and financial condition could be adversely impacted. Further, if we do not properly allocate our capital to maximize returns, our operations, cash flows and returns to shareholders could be adversely affected.\n\nNordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 7\n\n## Our stores located in shopping malls may be adversely affected if the consumer traffic of malls decline. Many of our stores are located in desirable locations within shopping malls and benefit from the abilities that we and other anchor tenants\n\n## Improvements to our merchandise buying processes and systems could adversely affect our business if not successfully executed. We are making investments to improve our merchandise planning, procurement and allocation capabilities through changes in personnel,\n\n## If we do not effectively design and implement our strategic and business planning processes to attract, retain, train and develop talent and future leaders, our business may suffer . We rely on the experience of our senior management, who have specific knowledge relating to us and our industry that is difficult to replace,\n\n## If we fail to appropriately manage our capital, we may negatively impact our operations and shareholder return. We utilize capital to finance our operations, make capital expenditures and acquisitions, manage our debt levels and return value to our\n\n## Even if we take appropriate measures to safeguard our information security and privacy environment from security breaches, our customers and our business could still be exposed to risk. Our Retail and Credit segments involve the collection, storage and transmission of customers’ personal information, consumer preferences" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7682825927261497, + "doc_id": "bf224e0fb68bc2f1f06ce1427fba0c9e16270384e39bd55e3ed5cca31c289780", + "edit_distance": 0.7763578274760383, + "f1_score": 0.8693009118541033, + "meteor": 0.68720773047925, + "precision": 0.9166666666666666, + "pred_md": "MSA 2011 EMERGING MARKETS SUCCESS\n\n## A Keen Focus on Emerging Markets - Helping Drive MSA's Success in 2011\n\nIn the very early years of MSA, the company predominantly served customers in the United States. Today, however, more than half of MSA's business is derived from outside the U.S., as we help protect people throughout the world.\n\nOur e ff orts to increase MSA's presence in growing, emerging markets have been a key element of the company's growth for decades. For this reason, in 2008, MSA's Corporate Strategy charted a new long-range course for the company that included placing an even greater focus on growing the MSA brand in emerging markets of the world. In particular, these markets include Latin America, Eastern Europe and the Russian CIS region, China, the Middle East, India, and in Southeast Asia, with an emphasis on key industrial markets such as oil, gas and petrochemicals, mining, and construction.\n\n6\n\nMSA 2011 ANNUAL REPORT\n\nAs an essential element of our Corporate Strategy, MSA's focus on emerging markets was indeed an important driver behind our record sales in 2011, with, for example, sales in Asia up 25 percent year over year, and sales in Latin America up 28 percent. During 2012 and beyond, we plan to continue to make investments in these regions as we advance MSA's strong positions in these critical markets.\n\nHere, briefly, are the stories of four global successes in 2011, representative of the many accomplishments MSA achieved in emerging markets over the past year.", + "recall": 0.8265895953757225, + "true_md": "## MSA 2011 EMERGING MARKETS SUCCESS\n\n## A K een F ocus on E mer ging Mark ets – Helping Dr ive MSA’s Success in 2011\n\nIn the very early years of MSA, the company predominantly served customers in the United States. Today, however, more than half of MSA’ business is derived from outside the U.S., as we help protec t people throughout the world. \n\nAs an essential element of our Cor porate Strategy, MSA’s focus on emerging markets was indeed an important driver behind our recor sales in 2011, with, for example, sales in Asia up 25 percent year over year, and sales in Latin America up 28 percent. During 2012 and beyond, we plan to continue to make investments in these regions as we advance MSA’s strong positions in these critical markets.\n\nHere, briefly, are the stories of four global successes in 2011, representative of the many acc omplishmen ts MSA achieved in emerging markets over the past y ear. \n\nOur e ff orts to increase MSA ’s presence in growing, emerging markets hav been a key element of the company’s growth for decades. For this reason, in 2008, MSA’s Corporate Strategy charted a new long-range course for the compan that included placing an even greater focus on growing the MSA brand in emerging markets of the world. I particular, these markets include Latin America, Eastern Eur ope and the Russian CIS region, China, the Middle East, I ndia, and in Southeast Asia, with an emphasis on key industrial markets such as oil, gas and petrochemicals, mining and construction. \n\n6 MSA 2011 ANNUAL REPORT" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8483770937361235, + "doc_id": "77ff0a1f0dd4856889b3306e88ac58be7cc649c1a5321cd63f176953fb04fcfb", + "edit_distance": 0.21283783783783783, + "f1_score": 0.9864864864864864, + "meteor": 0.9818417947587311, + "precision": 0.9798657718120806, + "pred_md": "## DIRECTORS OF ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC.\n\nAS OF FEBRUARY 11, 2014\n\n## DIRECTORS\n\n- 1 Alan D. Horn, CPA, CA\n\nChairman, President and Chief Executive Officer,\n\n- Rogers Telecommunications Ltd.\n- 2 Peter C. Godsoe, O.C., O. Ont.\n\nLead Director,\n\nCompany Director\n\n## 14 Guy Laurence*\n\nPresident and Chief Executive Officer, Rogers Communications\n\n- 3 Charles William David Birchall Vice Chairman, Barrick Gold Corporation\n- 4 Stephen A. Burch Chairman, University of Maryland Medical Systems\n- 5 ohn H. Clappison, FCPA, FCA J Company Director\n\n- 6 Thomas I. Hull Chairman and Chief Executive Officer,\n\nThe Hull Group of Companies\n\n## 18\n\n- Philip B. Lind, CM* Executive Vice President, Regulatory and Vice Chairman, Rogers Communications\n\n## 7 John A. MacDonald\n\nCompany Director\n\n- 8 sabelle Marcoux I\n- Chair,\n\nTranscontinental Inc.\n\n- 9 The Hon. David R. Peterson, PC, QC Senior Partner and Chairman,\n\nCassels Brock & Blackwell LLP\n\n## 22 Edward S. Rogers*\n\nDeputy Chairman and Executive Vice President, Emerging Business, Corporate Development, Rogers Communications\n\n- * Management Directors are pictured on the following page.\n\n20 ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n## 10\n\n## 11\n\n## 23\n\n- Loretta A. Rogers Company Director\n- Martha L. Rogers Doctor of Naturopathic Medicine\n- Melinda M. Rogers* Senior Vice President, Strategy and Development, Rogers Communications\n- 12 Dr. Charles Sirois Chief Executive Officer,\n\nTelesystem Ltd.\n\n## 13\n\n- John H. Tory, O. Ont. Company Director\n\nFor detailed biographical information of Rogers Directors, go to rogers.com/investors", + "recall": 0.9931972789115646, + "true_md": "## DIRECTORS OF ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC.\n\nAS OF FEBRUARY 11, 2014\n\n## DIRECTORS\n\n- 1 Alan D. Horn, CPA, CA Chairman, President and Chief Executive Officer, Rogers Telecommunications Ltd.\n\n- 2 Peter C. Godsoe, O.C., O. Ont. Lead Director, Company Director\n\n- 14 Guy Laurence* President and Chief Executive Officer, Rogers Communications\n\n- 3 Charles William David Birchall Vice Chairman, Barrick Gold Corporation\n\n- 4 Stephen A. Burch Chairman, University of Maryland Medical Systems\n\n- 5 John H. Clappison, FCPA, FCA Company Director\n\n- 6 Thomas I. Hull Chairman and Chief Executive Officer, The Hull Group of Companies\n\n- 18 Philip B. Lind, CM* Executive Vice President, Regulatory and Vice Chairman, Rogers Communications \n\n- 7 John A. MacDonald Company Director\n\n- 8 Isabelle Marcoux Chair, Transcontinental Inc.\n\n- 9 The Hon. David R. Peterson, PC, QC Senior Partner and Chairman, Cassels Brock & Blackwell LLP\n\n- 22 Edward S. Rogers* Deputy Chairman and Executive Vice President, Emerging Business, Corporate Development, Rogers Communications\n\n- 10 Loretta A. Rogers Company Director\n\n- 11 Martha L. Rogers Doctor of Naturopathic Medicine\n\n- 23 Melinda M. Rogers* Senior Vice President, Strategy and Development, Rogers Communications\n\n- 12 Dr. Charles Sirois Chief Executive Officer, Telesystem Ltd.\n\n- 13 John H. Tory, O. Ont. Company Director\n\nFor detailed biographical information of Rogers Directors, go to rogers.com/investors\n\n* Management Directors are pictured on the following page.\n\n20 ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9109175843622503, + "doc_id": "65ddb6b12262d542df5739602efd25529926a7d8f3d822587a12d08fe878bade", + "edit_distance": 0.2717842323651452, + "f1_score": 0.951841359773371, + "meteor": 0.9102856683979886, + "precision": 0.9655172413793104, + "pred_md": "SMFG\n\nCapital Ratio Information\n\n## (3) Equity Exposures and Credit Risk-Weighted Assets under Article 145 of the Notification\n\n## A. Equity Exposures\n\n## (A) Rating Procedures\n\nWhen acquiring equities subject to the PD/LGD approach, issuers are assigned obligor grades using the same rules as those of general credits to C&I companies, sovereigns and financial institutions. The obligors are monitored (for details, please refer to page 37) and their grades are revised if necessary (credit risk-weighted asset amount is set to 1.5 times when they are not monitored individually). In the case there is no credit transaction with the issuer or it is difficult to obtain financial information, internal grades are assigned using ratings of external rating agencies if it is a qualifying investment. In the case it is difficult to obtain financial information and it is not a qualifying investment, the simple risk weight method under the market-based approach is applied.\n\n## (B) Portfolio\n\n## a. Equity Exposure Amounts\n\nNotes: 1. The above exposures are 'equity exposures' stipulated in the Notification and differ from 'stocks' described in the consolidated financial statements.\n\n2. 'Grandfathered equity exposures' amount is calculated in accordance with Supplementary Provision 13 of the Notification.\n\n## b. PD/LGD Approach\n\nNotes: 1. The above exposures are 'equity exposures' stipulated in the Notification to which the PD/LGD approach is applied and differ from 'stocks' described in the consolidated financial statements.\n\n2. 'Others' includes exposures to overseas corporate entities.\n\n## B. Credit Risk-Weighted Assets under Article 145 of the Notification\n\n## (A) Outline of method for calculating credit risk assets\n\nExposures under Article 145 of the Notification include credits to funds. In the case of such exposures, in principle, each underlying asset of the fund is assigned an obligor grade to calculate the asset's credit risk-weighted asset amount and the amounts are totaled to derive the credit risk-weighted asset amount of the fund. When equity exposures account for more than half of the underlying assets of the fund, or it is difficult to directly calculate the credit risk-weighted asset amount of individual underlying assets, the credit risk-weighted asset amount of the fund is calculated using the simple majority adjustment method, in which credit risk-weighted assets are calculated using a risk weight of 400% (when the risk-weighted average of individual assets underlying the portfolio is less than 400%) or a risk weight of 1250% (in other cases).\n\n## (B) Portfolio\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n188", + "recall": 0.9385474860335196, + "true_md": "SMFG Capital Ratio Information\n\n## (B) Portfolio\n\n## (B) Portfolio\n\n## A. Equity Exposures\n\n## (A) Rating Procedures\n\n## a. Equity Exposure Amounts\n\n## b. PD/LGD Approach\n\n## B. Credit Risk-Weighted Assets under Article 145 of the Notification\n\n## (A) Outline of method for calculating credit risk assets\n\nWhen acquiring equities subject to the PD/LGD approach, issuers are assigned obligor grades using the same rules as those of general credits to C&I companies, sovereigns and financial institutions. The obligors are monitored (for details, please refer to page 37) and their grades are revised if necessary (credit risk-weighted asset amount is set to 1.5 times when they are not monitored individually). In the case there is no credit transaction with the issuer or it is difficult to obtain financial information, internal grades are assigned using ratings of external rating agencies if it is a qualifying investment. In the case it is difficult to obtain financial information and it is not a qualifying investment, the simple risk weight method under the market-based approach is applied. \n\nNotes: 1. The above exposures are “equity exposures” stipulated in the Notification and differ from “stocks” described in the consolidated financial statements.\n\n2. “Grandfathered equity exposures” amount is calculated in accordance with Supplementary Provision 13 of the Notification.\n\nNotes: 1. The above exposures are “equity exposures” stipulated in the Notification to which the PD/LGD approach is applied and differ from “stocks” described in the consolidated financial statements.\n\n2. “Others” includes exposures to overseas corporate entities.\n\nExposures under Article 145 of the Notification include credits to funds. In the case of such exposures, in principle, each underlying asset of the fund is assigned an obligor grade to calculate the asset’s credit risk-weighted asset amount and the amounts are totaled to derive the credit risk-weighted asset amount of the fund. When equity exposures account for more than half of the underlying assets of the fund, or it is difficult to directly calculate the credit risk-weighted asset amount of individual underlying assets, the credit risk-weighted asset amount of the fund is calculated using the simple majority adjustment method, in which credit risk-weighted assets are calculated using a risk weight of 400% (when the risk-weighted average of individual assets underlying the portfolio is less than 400%) or a risk weight of 1250% (in other cases).\n\nSMFG 2011 188$^{(3) Equity Exposures and Credit Risk-Weighted Assets under Article 145 of the Notification}$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9653777059777465, + "doc_id": "2fd1f1afdbe5ad21e0adb37755b523d392507dae78c4a09e8c70234c1235e269", + "edit_distance": 0.6212319790301442, + "f1_score": 0.9826589595375723, + "meteor": 0.8449724509360279, + "precision": 0.9883720930232558, + "pred_md": "The March 6, 2013 termination is related to Debt Derivatives hedging the US $350 million senior notes due 2038 (2038 Notes). The Debt Derivatives that were terminated on March 6, 2013 were not designated as effective hedges for accounting purposes and had an original term of 10 years to August 15, 2018. The new Debt Derivatives hedge the foreign exchange risk associated with the principal and interest obligations on the 2038 Notes to their maturity at market rates on the respective dates of the transactions and are designated as effective hedges for accounting purposes.\n\nThe September 27, 2013 termination is related to Debt Derivatives hedging senior notes scheduled to mature in 2014 and 2015. Only the fixed foreign exchange rate was changed for the new Debt Derivatives. All other terms are the same as the terminated Debt Derivatives they replaced. Before the Debt Derivatives were terminated on September 27, 2013, changes in their fair value were recorded in other comprehensive income and were periodically reclassified to net income to offset foreign exchange gains or losses on the related debt or to modify interest expense to its hedged amount. On the termination date, the balance in the hedging reserve related to these Debt Derivatives was a $10 million loss. $1 million of this related to future periodic exchanges of interest and will be recorded in net income over the remaining life of the related debt securities. The remaining $8 million, net of income taxes of $1 million, will remain in the hedging reserve until such time as the related debt is settled.\n\n## Debt Derivatives Settled at Maturity\n\nIn June 2013, when we repaid and bought our US $350 million ($356 million) senior notes due 2013, the associated Debt Derivatives were settled at maturity, resulting in total payments of approximately $104 million.\n\nAt December 31, 2013, we had US$6.4 billion of US dollar denominated senior notes and debentures, all of which had been hedged using Debt Derivatives.\n\n1 Pursuant to the requirements for hedge accounting under IAS 39, Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement, on December 31, 2013, and December 31, 2012, RCI accounted for 100 % of its Debt Derivatives as hedges against designated US dollar-denominated debt. As a result, on December 31, 2013, 100 % of US dollar-denominated debt is hedged for accounting purposes compared to 100 % on an economic basis.\n\n2 Long-term debt includes the effect of the Debt Derivatives.\n\n3 Weighted average term to maturity excludes US$1.1 billion senior notes due March 2014.\n\n## Expenditure Derivatives\n\nWe use foreign currency forward contracts (Expenditure Derivatives), to hedge the foreign exchange risk on the notional amount of certain forecasted expenditures. We use Expenditure Derivatives for riskmanagement purposes only.\n\n## In 2013, we:\n\n- GLYPH<129> entered into US$955 million of Expenditure Derivatives maturing from April 2013 through December 2014 at an average rate of $1.0341/US$1\n- GLYPH<129> settled US$435 million of Expenditure Derivatives for $430 million\n\nAt December 31, 2013, we had US$900 million of Expenditure Derivatives outstanding with terms to maturity ranging from January 2014 to December 2014 at an average rate of 1.0262/US$, all of which have been designated as hedges for accounting purposes.\n\n## Equity Derivatives\n\nWe use stock-based compensation derivatives (Equity Derivatives), to hedge the market price appreciation risk of the RCI Class B Non-Voting shares granted under our stock-based compensation programs. We use Equity Derivatives for risk-management purposes only.\n\nIn 2013 we entered into Equity Derivatives for 5.7 million RCI Class B Non-Voting shares with a weighted average price of $50.37. These Equity Derivatives have not been designated as hedges for accounting purposes, so we record changes in their fair value as a stock-based compensation expense and offset a portion of the impact of changes in the market price of RCI Class B Non-Voting shares in the accrued value of the stock-based compensation liability for our stock-based compensation programs.\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC.\n\n63\n\nMANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS", + "recall": 0.9770114942528736, + "true_md": "## Expenditure Derivatives\n\n## Equity Derivatives\n\n## Debt Derivatives Settled at Maturity\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 63\n\n1 Pursuant to the requirements for hedge accounting under IAS 39, Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement, on December 31, 2013, and December 31, 2012, RCI accounted for 100 % of its Debt Derivatives as hedges against designated US dollar-denominated debt. As a result, on December 31, 2013, 100 % of US dollar-denominated debt is hedged for accounting purposes compared to 100 % on an economic basis.\n\n2 Long-term debt includes the effect of the Debt Derivatives.\n\n3 Weighted average term to maturity excludes US$1.1 billion senior notes due March 2014.\n\nAt December 31, 2013, we had US$6.4 billion of US dollar denominated senior notes and debentures, all of which had been hedged using Debt Derivatives.\n\nIn June 2013, when we repaid and bought our US $350 million ($356 million) senior notes due 2013, the associated Debt Derivatives were settled at maturity, resulting in total payments of approximately $104 million.\n\nThe September 27, 2013 termination is related to Debt Derivatives hedging senior notes scheduled to mature in 2014 and 2015. Only the fixed foreign exchange rate was changed for the new Debt Derivatives. All other terms are the same as the terminated Debt Derivatives they replaced. Before the Debt Derivatives were terminated on September 27, 2013, changes in their fair value were recorded in other comprehensive income and were periodically reclassified to net income to offset foreign exchange gains or losses on the related debt or to modify interest expense to its hedged amount. On the termination date, the balance in the hedging reserve related to these Debt Derivatives was a $10 million loss. $1 million of this related to future periodic exchanges of interest and will be recorded in net income over the remaining life of the related debt securities. The remaining $8 million, net of income taxes of $1 million, will remain in the hedging reserve until such time as the related debt is settled.\n\nThe March 6, 2013 termination is related to Debt Derivatives hedging the US $350 million senior notes due 2038 (2038 Notes). The Debt Derivatives that were terminated on March 6, 2013 were not designated as effective hedges for accounting purposes and had an original term of 10 years to August 15, 2018. The new Debt Derivatives hedge the foreign exchange risk associated with the principal and interest obligations on the 2038 Notes to their maturity at market rates on the respective dates of the transactions and are designated as effective hedges for accounting purposes.\n\nWe use foreign currency forward contracts (Expenditure Derivatives), to hedge the foreign exchange risk on the notional amount of certain forecasted expenditures. We use Expenditure Derivatives for risk- management purposes only.\n\nIn 2013, we:\n\nAt December 31, 2013, we had US$900 million of Expenditure Derivatives outstanding with terms to maturity ranging from January 2014 to December 2014 at an average rate of 1.0262/US$, all of which have been designated as hedges for accounting purposes.\n\nWe use stock-based compensation derivatives (Equity Derivatives), to hedge the market price appreciation risk of the RCI Class B Non-Voting shares granted under our stock-based compensation programs. We use Equity Derivatives for risk-management purposes only.\n\nIn 2013 we entered into Equity Derivatives for 5.7 million RCI Class B Non-Voting shares with a weighted average price of $50.37. These Equity Derivatives have not been designated as hedges for accounting purposes, so we record changes in their fair value as a stock-based compensation expense and offset a portion of the impact of changes in the market price of RCI Class B Non-Voting shares in the accrued value of the stock-based compensation liability for our stock-based compensation programs.\n\n- GLYPH<129> entered into US$955 million of Expenditure Derivatives maturing from April 2013 through December 2014 at an average rate of $1.0341/US$1\n\n- GLYPH<129> settled US$435 million of Expenditure Derivatives for $430 million\n\nMANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AN D ANALYSIS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8155960507291924, + "doc_id": "c7d1ae3697d146af2de5f1251e940a71e207670cb6b128a28278f1d681a5ec1e", + "edit_distance": 0.2608695652173913, + "f1_score": 0.9365079365079365, + "meteor": 0.8790135645604396, + "precision": 0.9672131147540983, + "pred_md": "SMBC\n\nSupplemental Information\n\n## Nonconsolidated Balance Sheets (Unaudited)\n\nSumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation\n\nNotes: 1. Amounts less than 1 million yen have been omitted.\n\n- 2. For the convenience of readers, the accompanying U.S. dollar financial statements have been translated from Japanese yen, as a matter of arithmetical computation only, at the rate of ·83.15 to US$1, the exchange rate prevailing at March 31, 2011.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n144", + "recall": 0.9076923076923077, + "true_md": "SMBC\n\nSupplemental Information\n\n## Liabilities and net assets Liabilities\n\n## Net assets\n\nNotes: 1. Amounts less than 1 million yen have been omitted.\n\n2. For the convenience of readers, the accompanying U.S. dollar financial statements have been translated from Japanese yen, as a matter of arithmetical computation only, at the rate of ¥83.15 to US$1, the exchange rate prevailing at March 31, 2011.\n\nSMFG 2011 144\n\n## Nonconsolidated Balance Sheets (Unaudited) Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9321182035503273, + "doc_id": "b0c379dd94a7051176613cba6feb62f073077c806df87f2e9af006e778a6ecbb", + "edit_distance": 0.5079617834394905, + "f1_score": 0.9626556016597511, + "meteor": 0.9143052295509215, + "precision": 0.9872340425531915, + "pred_md": "MANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS\n\nBusiness Solutions generates revenue from services and equipment sales.\n\nNext generation revenue is generated by the provision of high-speed, high-reliability data and voice communications, provided on Rogers advanced IP and Ethernet and Cloud platforms and mainly over the extensive Rogers fibre, cable and wireless networks. Next generation revenue also includes Data Centre services revenue from the 2013 dates of business acquisitions.\n\nLegacy revenue is generated mainly by long distance, switched voice services and lower speed data communications, provided over TDM and end of life data platforms with client access primarily delivered through the use of third-party networks and tariffed ILEC services.\n\nBusiness Solutions continues to focus mainly on next generation IPbased services, and on leveraging higher margin on-net and near-net service revenue opportunities, using existing network facilities to expand offerings to the medium and large sized enterprise, public sector and carrier markets. Next generation services now represent 59 % of total service revenue.\n\nRevenue from the lower margin off-net legacy business generally includes local and long-distance voice services and legacy data services which often use facilities that are leased rather than owned.\n\nFollowing our recent data centre business acquisitions, Business Solutions is now also focused on data centre colocation, hosting, cloud and disaster recovery services.\n\n## Higher Operating Revenue\n\nOperating revenue was 7 % higher this year compared to last year, the net result of:\n\n- GLYPH<129> higher revenue from next generation services, which grew by 31 % , reflecting the impact of our acquisitions of Blackiron and Pivot Data Centres\n- GLYPH<129> continued execution of our plan to grow higher margin on-net and next generation IP-based services revenue\n- GLYPH<129> partially offset by ongoing decline in the legacy voice and data business, a trend management expects to continue as customers move to faster and more reliable IP services.\n\n46\n\nROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n## Higher Operating Expenses\n\nWe assess Business Solutions operating expenses in two categories:\n\n- GLYPH<129> the cost of operating and maintaining telecom and data networking equipment\n- GLYPH<129> all other expenses involved in day-to-day operations, to service existing subscriber relationships and attract new subscribers.\n\nOperating expenses were higher this year, the net result of:\n\n- GLYPH<129> higher expenses related to our data centre acquisitions\n- GLYPH<129> partially offset by expected lower legacy service-related costs related to lower volumes and customer levels and ongoing initiatives to improve costs and productivity.\n\n## Higher Adjusted Operating Profit\n\nAdjusted operating profit was 19 % higher this year because of the contribution of new data centres, the ongoing growth in the higher margin on-net next generation business and cost efficiencies.\n\nExcluding the impact of the Blackiron and Pivot Data Centres acquisitions:\n\n- GLYPH<129> operating revenue would have been 3 % lower this year compared to last year, instead of 7 % higher as reported\n- GLYPH<129> adjusted operating profit would have been 11 % higher this year compared to last year, instead of 19 % higher as reported\n\nWe continue to work on data centre business integration and the optimization of Business Solutions' overall cost structures.", + "recall": 0.9392712550607287, + "true_md": "Business Solutions generates revenue from services and equipment sales.\n\nNext generation revenue is generated by the provision of high-speed, high-reliability data and voice communications, provided on Rogers advanced IP and Ethernet and Cloud platforms and mainly over the extensive Rogers fibre, cable and wireless networks. Next generation revenue also includes Data Centre services revenue from the 2013 dates of business acquisitions.\n\nLegacy revenue is generated mainly by long distance, switched voice services and lower speed data communications, provided over TDM and end of life data platforms with client access primarily delivered through the use of third-party networks and tariffed ILEC services.\n\nBusiness Solutions continues to focus mainly on next generation IP- based services, and on leveraging higher margin on-net and near-net service revenue opportunities, using existing network facilities to expand offerings to the medium and large sized enterprise, public sector and carrier markets. Next generation services now represent 59 % of total service revenue.\n\nRevenue from the lower margin off-net legacy business generally includes local and long-distance voice services and legacy data services which often use facilities that are leased rather than owned.\n\nFollowing our recent data centre business acquisitions, Business Solutions is now also focused on data centre colocation, hosting, cloud and disaster recovery services.\n\nWe continue to work on data centre business integration and the optimization of Business Solutions’ overall cost structures.\n\nExcluding the impact of the Blackiron and Pivot Data Centres acquisitions:\n\nAdjusted operating profit was 19 % higher this year because of the contribution of new data centres, the ongoing growth in the higher margin on-net next generation business and cost efficiencies.\n\nOperating revenue was 7 % higher this year compared to last year, the net result of:\n\n## Higher Operating Revenue\n\n## Higher Adjusted Operating Profit\n\n## Higher Operating Expenses\n\n- GLYPH<129> the cost of operating and maintaining telecom and data networking equipment\n\n- GLYPH<129> all other expenses involved in day-to-day operations, to service existing subscriber relationships and attract new subscribers.\n\n- GLYPH<129> higher expenses related to our data centre acquisitions\n\n- GLYPH<129> partially offset by expected lower legacy service-related costs related to lower volumes and customer levels and ongoing initiatives to improve costs and productivity.\n\n- GLYPH<129> operating revenue would have been 3 % lower this year compared to last year, instead of 7 % higher as reported\n\n- GLYPH<129> adjusted operating profit would have been 11 % higher this year compared to last year, instead of 19 % higher as reported\n\n- GLYPH<129> higher revenue from next generation services, which grew by 31 % , reflecting the impact of our acquisitions of Blackiron and Pivot Data Centres\n\n- GLYPH<129> continued execution of our plan to grow higher margin on-net and next generation IP-based services revenue\n\n- GLYPH<129> partially offset by ongoing decline in the legacy voice and data business, a trend management expects to continue as customers move to faster and more reliable IP services.\n\nWe assess Business Solutions operating expenses in two categories:\n\nOperating expenses were higher this year, the net result of:\n\n(IN MILLIONS OF DOLLARS) BUSINESS SOLUTIONS ADJUSTED OPERATING PROFIT\n\n46 ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\nMANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9220956070832717, + "doc_id": "e0d358268290ec88a26ed4146b821851b2c5560f553e5cc3e1e028e878af6eec", + "edit_distance": 0.215311004784689, + "f1_score": 0.9746192893401014, + "meteor": 0.9565040256908736, + "precision": 0.9846153846153847, + "pred_md": "## Chatree - Ore Mined and Treated\n\n## Chatree - Cash Costs and Total Costs\n\n13\n\nOperations Report\n\n## Production and Costs\n\nProduction for the year was 133,681 ounces of gold and 1,000,569 ounces of silver.\n\nTotal mill throughput of 5.7 million tonnes was 11.4% higher than 2012 despite the 63 days that the new plant was shut down during the process for the granting of its Metallurgical License. The overall plant availability was 98.1%.\n\nTotal cash costs for the year were $US767 per ounce ($US620 per ounce exclusive of Thai royalties). The average royalty paid to the Thai Government was $US147 per ounce of gold. Total production costs after depreciation and amortisation were $US952 per ounce of gold produced.\n\nAt year end, 9.7 million tonnes of ore was stockpiled with an average contained gold grade of 0.57 grams per tonne (g/t) representing 178,086 ounces of gold.\n\n## Operational Performance\n\nDuring the year 7.1 million tonnes of ore was mined, with a waste-to-ore strip ratio of 2.09:1. The average grade of mined ore was 0.72 g/t gold and 8.56 g/t silver.\n\nAdditional ore was generated by revising the mining sequence in A Pit Stage 2 and accessing near surface high grade oxide ore tonnes from Q Prospect.\n\nTotal volume of material mined at Chatree for the year was 8.4 million Bank Cubic Metres (\"BCM\") including 2.7 million BCM of ore.\n\nAn additional 566,000 BCM of laterite and clay material was excavated and used for the construction of the second lift of second tailings storage facility (TSF#2).\n\nSome 1.3 million loose cubic metres (LCM) of ore was relocated from the Marginal Grade Stockpiles to the primary crusher to supplement ore from the mining pits.\n\nTwo areas were mined during the year:\n\n- 〉 A Pit, where 8.3 million BCM of material was mined (2.7 million BCM of ore) at a stripping ratio of 2.09:1 waste to ore; and\n- 〉 Q Prospect where 298 thousand BCM of material was mined (143 thousand BCM of ore) at a stripping ratio of 1.1:1 waste to ore.\n\nThe mechanical reliability and hence availability of the major fleet items has been below expectations over the last few years.\n\ncontinued\n\nu\n\nOperations Report", + "recall": 0.964824120603015, + "true_md": "13 Operations Report\n\n13 Operations Report\n\nOperations Report\n\nProduction for the year was 133,681 ounces of gold and 1,000,569 ounces of silver.\n\nTotal mill throughput of 5.7 million tonnes was 11.4% higher than 2012 despite the 63 days that the new plant was shut down during the process for the granting of its Metallurgical License. The overall plant availability was 98.1%.\n\nTotal cash costs for the year were $US767 per ounce ($US620 per ounce exclusive of Thai royalties). The average royalty paid to the Thai Government was $US147 per ounce of gold. Total production costs after depreciation and amorti- sation were $US952 per ounce of gold produced. \n\nAt year end, 9.7 million tonnes of ore was stock- piled with an average contained gold grade of 0.57 grams per tonne (g/t) representing 178,086 ounces of gold.\n\nDuring the year 7.1 million tonnes of ore was mined, with a waste-to-ore strip ratio of 2.09:1. The average grade of mined ore was 0.72 g/t gold and 8.56 g/t silver.\n\nAdditional ore was generated by revising the mining sequence in A Pit Stage 2 and accessing near surface high grade oxide ore tonnes from Q Prospect.\n\nTotal volume of material mined at Chatree for the year was 8.4 million Bank Cubic Metres (\"BCM\") including 2.7 million BCM of ore. \n\nAn additional 566,000 BCM of laterite and clay material was excavated and used for the construction of the second lift of second tailings storage facility (TSF#2).\n\nSome 1.3 million loose cubic metres (LCM) of ore was relocated from the Marginal Grade Stockpiles to the primary crusher to supplement ore from the mining pits.\n\nTwo areas were mined during the year:\n\nThe mechanical reliability and hence availability of the major fleet items has been below expecta- tions over the last few years. \n\ncontinued u\n\n## Production and Costs\n\n## Operational Performance\n\n- 〉 A Pit, where 8.3 million BCM of material was mined (2.7 million BCM of ore) at a stripping ratio of 2.09:1 waste to ore; and\n\n- 〉 Q Prospect where 298 thousand BCM of material was mined (143 thousand BCM of ore) at a stripping ratio of 1.1:1 waste to ore.\n\nChatree – Production\n\nChatree – Ore Mined and Treated\n\nChatree – Cash Costs and Total Costs" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.877152045609936, + "doc_id": "08643b9612ec95082daa8bdb0bdaab45adb2c3618a9e8015fc82876ef45c0fc7", + "edit_distance": 0.33093525179856115, + "f1_score": 0.9404186795491144, + "meteor": 0.9216122824605957, + "precision": 0.9733333333333334, + "pred_md": "## Settlement and Consumer Finance Business\n\nIn March 2011, we began offering a new service 'SMBC First Pack Debut,' which was especially designed for students between the ages of 18 and 23, under our settlement service platform of 'SMBC First Pack.' When students make automatic bill payments for their mobile phones using the account registered with the service, they are not\n\ncharged in the month following the next month, for after business hours service fees for ATMs located at domestic branches and @B Λ NK ATMs installed at convenience stores and other locations. Such services are designed specifically for the needs and lifestyle of students.\n\nThe iD* credit service, which was created as a result of the strategic alliance of SMFG and NTT DoCoMo, Inc., continues to further evolve. As of March 31, 2011, there were approximately 15.84 million subscribers for this service and approximately 510,000 terminals for such credit services installed on the premises of affiliated merchants.\n\n## * 'iD' is a trademark of NTT DoCoMo, Inc.\n\nAs of the end of March 2011, there were 719 automatic contract machines for our consumer finance business with Promise Co., Ltd., and the outstanding balance of card loans made by the bank and guaranteed by Promise was approximately ¥340 billion. At-Loan Co., Ltd., the former business partner for this affiliation was absorbed and merged into Promise in April 2011, as part of a reorganization plan.\n\n## Transaction Channels\n\nFor SMBC Direct online banking services, we are constantly adding highly advanced services to meet our clients' needs to improve convenience and reinforce security. In November 2010, we launched an online overseas remittance service for individual clients through SMBC Direct , improving the service previously offered only at our branches. This is another way for us to better accommodate our clients by simplifying the procedures, increasing their choices and maximizing convenience. As of March 31, 2011, there were approximately 10.86 million registered clients.\n\nOur call centers located in Tokyo, Kobe and Fukuoka for our retail clients also take calls from our retail online clients who prefer to speak with our staff on important issues. The operation of these three call centers enhances our services by offering telephone consultations for inquiries on asset management or loans, as well as any information related to our financial services to provide the type of services best accommodated to the lifestyle and needs of our clients.\n\n## Topics\n\n## ◆ Joint Business Operations of SMBC and SMBC Nikko Securities\n\nSMBC Nikko Securities became a wholly-owned subsidiary of SMBC on October 1, 2009, the milestone event which has further enhanced our Group to be able to offer our clients more competitive products and services.\n\nSince October 2009, SMBC has been working with SMBC Nikko Securities to offer investment trust products, organize seminars, and provide financial instruments intermediary services for our individual clients.\n\nIn April 2010, SMBC began financial instruments intermediary services for individuals as an agent of SMBC Nikko Securities, in addition to SMBC Friend Securities. In June 2010, SMBC expanded the services' portfolio to include structured bonds, and started to offer a single premium whole life insurance with variable benefit, jointly developed for the first time with SMBC Nikko Securities for over-the-counter sales. In October 2010, SMBC Nikko Securities also became SMBC's banking agent. Further, in January 2011, the operations of SMBC Friend Securities related to the financial instruments intermediary and other services were integrated into those of SMBC Nikko Securities. We continue to proactively develop both our banking and securities businesses.\n\nA seminar jointly held with SMBC Nikko Securities\n\nA seminar jointly held with SMBC Nikko Securities\n\nAn SMBC ATM installed at SMBC Nikko Securities' Sendai Branch\n\nAn SMBC ATM installed at SMBC Nikko Securities' Sendai Branch\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n9", + "recall": 0.9096573208722741, + "true_md": "## Topics\n\n## Settlement and Consumer Finance Business\n\n## Transaction Channels\n\nSMFG 2011 9\n\nA seminar jointly held with SMBC Nikko Securities\n\nAn SMBC ATM installed at SMBC Nikko Securities’ Sendai Branch\n\nIn March 2011, we began offering a new service “SMBC First Pack Debut,” which was especially designed for stu- dents between the ages of 18 and 23, under our settlement service platform of “SMBC First Pack.” When students make automatic bill payments for their mobile phones using the account reg- istered with the service, they are not \n\ncharged in the month following the next month, for after busi- ness hours service fees for ATMs located at domestic branches and @B Λ NK ATMs installed at convenience stores and other locations. Such services are designed specifically for the needs and lifestyle of students.\n\nThe iD* credit service, which was created as a result of the strategic alliance of SMFG and NTT DoCoMo, Inc., continues to further evolve. As of March 31, 2011, there were approximately 15.84 million subscribers for this service and approximately 510,000 terminals for such credit services installed on the prem- ises of affiliated merchants.\n\n* “iD” is a trademark of NTT DoCoMo, Inc.\n\nAs of the end of March 2011, there were 719 automatic contract machines for our consumer finance business with Promise Co., Ltd., and the outstanding balance of card loans made by the bank and guaranteed by Promise was approxi- mately ¥340 billion. At-Loan Co., Ltd., the former business part- ner for this affiliation was absorbed and merged into Promise in April 2011, as part of a reorganization plan.\n\nFor SMBC Direct online banking services, we are constantly adding highly advanced services to meet our clients’ needs to improve convenience and reinforce security. In November 2010, we launched an online overseas remittance service for individual clients through SMBC Direct , improving the service previously offered only at our branches. This is another way for us to better accommodate our clients by simplifying the procedures, increas- ing their choices and maximizing convenience. As of March 31, 2011, there were approximately 10.86 million registered clients.\n\nOur call centers located in Tokyo, Kobe and Fukuoka for our retail clients also take calls from our retail online clients who prefer to speak with our staff on important issues. The operation of these three call centers enhances our services by offering telephone consultations for inquiries on asset management or loans, as well as any information related to our financial services to provide the type of services best accommodated to the life- style and needs of our clients.\n\nIn April 2010, SMBC began financial instruments inter- mediary services for individuals as an agent of SMBC Nikko Securities, in addition to SMBC Friend Securities. In June 2010, SMBC expanded the services’ portfolio to include structured bonds, and started to offer a single premium whole life insurance with variable benefit, jointly developed for the first time with SMBC Nikko Securities for over-the-counter sales. In October 2010, SMBC Nikko Securities also became SMBC’s banking agent. Further, in January 2011, the opera- tions of SMBC Friend Securities related to the financial instru- ments intermediary and other services were integrated into those of SMBC Nikko Securities. We continue to proactively develop both our banking and securities businesses.\n\nSince October 2009, SMBC has been working with SMBC Nikko Securities to offer investment trust products, organize seminars, and provide financial instruments interme- diary services for our individual clients.\n\nSMBC Nikko Securities became a wholly-owned subsidiary of SMBC on October 1, 2009, the milestone event which has further enhanced our Group to be able to offer our clients more competitive products and services.\n\n## ◆ Joint Business Operations of SMBC and SMBC Nikko Securities" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8115656345115305, + "doc_id": "6f14bcf36bc9c4f11c6ce188acf95ca41ecae9fb76e8172734ca0bb52cc53360", + "edit_distance": 0.35833333333333334, + "f1_score": 0.972972972972973, + "meteor": 0.8497593438316482, + "precision": 0.9863013698630136, + "pred_md": "## 13. Bonds\n\nBonds at March 31, 2011 and 2010 consisted of the following:\n\nMarch 31\n\n*1 Figures in ( ) are the balances in the original currency of the foreign currency denominated bonds, and figures in { } are the amounts to be redeemed within 1 year.\n\n*2 Interest rates indicate nominal interest rates which are applied at the consolidated balance sheet dates. Therefore, they may differ from actual interest rates.\n\nThe redemption schedule over the next 5 years on bonds at March 31, 2011 was as follows:\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n87\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nSMFG", + "recall": 0.96, + "true_md": "SMFG\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n- 13. Bonds\n\n$^{*1}$ Figures in ( ) are the balances in the original currency of the foreign currency denominated bonds, and figures in { } are the amounts to be redeemed within 1 year.\n\n$^{*2}$ Interest rates indicate nominal interest rates which are applied at the consolidated balance sheet dates. Therefore, they may differ from actual interest rates.\n\nThe redemption schedule over the next 5 years on bonds at March 31, 2011 was as follows:\n\nBonds at March 31, 2011 and 2010 consisted of the following:\n\nMarch 31\n\nSMFG 2011 87" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7458467165969126, + "doc_id": "2d51a523f05474a5036a6f39c46f40109cf3ee56bdaba4f7d80de6190af64404", + "edit_distance": 0.3300653594771242, + "f1_score": 0.9216867469879517, + "meteor": 0.8269102299794003, + "precision": 0.9503105590062112, + "pred_md": "## Management's Discussion and Analysis\n\nDollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\n## Continued Geographic Expansion in Ontario\n\nKillam acquired two buildings in Ontario during 2013 including a 102-unit building located in Ottawa for $10.4 million as well as a newly constructed, 8-storey, mixed-use complex containing 21,242 square feet of street level retail (TD Bank, Shoppers Drug Mart and Tim Hortons) and 179 apartment units in downtown Toronto for $40.0 million. With the completion of these two acquisitions, Killam's future NOI generated from its Ontario properties is expected to increase to 15.0% from 7.5%.\n\n## Reduced Cap-Rate Compression in 2013\n\nDuring 2013 Killam recorded $13.1 million in fair value gains related to its portfolio compared to $37.7 million in 2012. This decrease year-over-year was driven by a combination of reduced cap-rate compression in 2013 and a slight uptick in cap-rates of 25 bps in the Saint John market in the fourth quarter of 2013. The net gain in real estate valuations does not impact the Company's FFO per share, its key measure of performance.\n\n## Dividend Increase\n\non December 23, 2013, Killam announced an increase in its annual dividend by 3.4% to $0.60 per share from $0.58 per share. the increase reflects Management's expectation of earning's growth to be generated in 2014.\n\n## Performance Compared to 2013 Key Objectives\n\n26\n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013", + "recall": 0.8947368421052632, + "true_md": "## Management’s Discussion and Analysis Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\n## Continued Geographic Expansion in Ontario\n\n## Reduced Cap‑Rate Compression in 2013\n\n## Dividend Increase\n\n## Performance Compared to 2013 Key Objectives\n\n## Consolidation of Multi‑family Residential Real Estate Market\n\n## Increase Investment in New Properties\n\n26 Killam ProPerties inc | 2013\n\nManagement’s Discussion and Analysis Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\nKillam acquired two buildings in Ontario during 2013 including a 102‑unit building located in Ottawa for $10.4 million as well as a newly constructed, 8‑storey, mixed‑use complex containing 21,242 square feet of street level retail (TD Bank, Shoppers Drug Mart and Tim Hortons) and 179 apartment units in downtown Toronto for $40.0 million. With the completion of these two acquisitions, Killam’s future NOI generated from its Ontario properties is expected to increase to 15.0% from 7.5%. \n\nDuring 2013 Killam recorded $13.1 million in fair value gains related to its portfolio compared to $37.7 million in 2012. This decrease year‑over‑year was driven by a combination of reduced cap‑rate compression in 2013 and a slight uptick in cap‑rates of 25 bps in the Saint John market in the fourth quarter of 2013. The net gain in real estate valuations does not impact the Company’s FFO per share, its key measure of performance.\n\non December 23, 2013, Killam announced an increase in its annual dividend by 3.4% to $0.60 per share from $0.58 per share. the increase reflects Management’s expectation of earning’s growth to be generated in 2014." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.960884286376962, + "doc_id": "7f714d8f6bc0b74322956e26dfd3cf68354185ce533cd5eaf4418961864a2bdf", + "edit_distance": 0.7719298245614035, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.6861582224005703, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 1 - STATEMENT OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES continued\n\nDeferred tax assets and liabilities are ascertained based on temporary differences arising between the tax bases of assets and liabilities and their carrying amounts in the financial statements. Deferred tax assets also result where amounts have been fully expensed but future tax deductions are available. No deferred income tax will be recognised from the initial recognition of an asset or liability, excluding a business combination, where there is no effect on accounting or taxable profit or loss.\n\nDeferred tax assets and liabilities are calculated at the tax rates that are expected to apply to the period when the asset recognised or the liability is settled, based on tax rates enacted or substantively enacted at the reporting date. Their measurement also reflects the manner in which management expects to recover or settle the carrying amount of the related asset or liability.\n\nDeferred tax assets relating to temporary differences and unused tax losses are recognised only to the extent that it is probable that future taxable profit will be available against which the benefits of the deferred tax asset can be utilized. Where temporary differences exist in relation to investments in subsidiaries, branches, associates, and joint ventures, deferred tax assets and liabilities are not recognised where the timing of the reversal of the temporary difference can be controlled and it is not probable that the reversal will occur in the foreseeable future.\n\nCurrent tax assets and liabilities are offset where a legally enforceable right of set-off exists and it is intended that net settlement or simultaneous realisation and settlement of the respective asset and liability will occur. Deferred tax assets and liabilities are offset where a legally enforceable right of set-off exists, the deferred tax assets and liabilities relate to income taxes levied by the same taxation authority on either the same taxable entity or different taxable entities where it is intended that net settlement or simultaneous realisation and settlement of the respective asset and liability will occur in future periods in which significant amounts of deferred tax assets or liabilities are expected to be recovered or settled.\n\n## Tax Consolidation\n\nSundance Energy Australia Limited and its wholly-owned Australian controlled entities have agreed to implement the income tax consolidation regime, with Sundance Energy Australia Limited being the head company of the newly consolidated group. Under this regime the group entities will be taxed as a single taxpayer. Whilst this choice is yet to be communicated to the Australian Taxation Office, it is intended to be communicated prior to lodgement of the 31 December 2014 income tax return and will be effective from 1 January 2014. Sundance Energy Australia Limited and its wholly-owned Australian controlled entities intend to enter into a Tax Sharing Agreement and Tax Funding Agreement in due course.\n\nThe head entity of the income tax consolidated group and the controlled entities in the tax consolidated group account for their own current and deferred tax amounts. These tax amounts are measured as if each entity in the tax consolidated group continues to be a standalone taxpayer in its own right.\n\nIn addition to its own current and deferred tax amounts, Sundance Energy Australia Limited, as head company, also recognises the current tax liabilities (or assets) and the deferred tax assets arising from unused tax losses and unused tax credits assumed from controlled entities in the tax consolidated group.\n\n- 60 -", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "- 60 - \n\nIn addition to its own current and deferred tax amounts, Sundance Energy Australia Limited, as head company, also recognises the current tax liabilities (or assets) and the deferred tax assets arising from unused tax losses and unused tax credits assumed from controlled entities in the tax consolidated group. \n\nThe head entity of the income tax consolidated group and the controlled entities in the tax consolidated group account for their own current and deferred tax amounts. These tax amounts are measured as if each entity in the tax consolidated group continues to be a standalone taxpayer in its own right. \n\nTax Consolidation Sundance Energy Australia Limited and its wholly-owned Australian controlled entities have agreed to implement the income tax consolidation regime, with Sundance Energy Australia Limited being the head company of the newly consolidated group. Under this regime the group entities will be taxed as a single taxpayer. Whilst this choice is yet to be communicated to the Australian Taxation Office, it is intended to be communicated prior to lodgement of the 31 December 2014 income tax return and will be effective from 1 January 2014. Sundance Energy Australia Limited and its wholly-owned Australian controlled entities intend to enter into a Tax Sharing Agreement and Tax Funding Agreement in due course.\n\nCurrent tax assets and liabilities are offset where a legally enforceable right of set-off exists and it is intended that net settlement or simultaneous realisation and settlement of the respective asset and liability will occur. Deferred tax assets and liabilities are offset where a legally enforceable right of set-off exists, the deferred tax assets and liabilities relate to income taxes levied by the same taxation authority on either the same taxable entity or different taxable entities where it is intended that net settlement or simultaneous realisation and settlement of the respective asset and liability will occur in future periods in which significant amounts of deferred tax assets or liabilities are expected to be recovered or settled. \n\n## Tax Consolidation Sundance Energy Australia Limited and its wholly-owned Australian controlled entities have agreed to implement\n\nDeferred tax assets relating to temporary differences and unused tax losses are recognised only to the extent that it is probable that future taxable profit will be available against which the benefits of the deferred tax asset can be utilized. Where temporary differences exist in relation to investments in subsidiaries, branches, associates, and joint ventures, deferred tax assets and liabilities are not recognised where the timing of the reversal of the temporary difference can be controlled and it is not probable that the reversal will occur in the foreseeable future. \n\nDeferred tax assets and liabilities are calculated at the tax rates that are expected to apply to the period when the asset recognised or the liability is settled, based on tax rates enacted or substantively enacted at the reporting date. Their measurement also reflects the manner in which management expects to recover or settle the carrying amount of the related asset or liability. \n\nDeferred tax assets and liabilities are ascertained based on temporary differences arising between the tax bases of assets and liabilities and their carrying amounts in the financial statements. Deferred tax assets also result where amounts have been fully expensed but future tax deductions are available. No deferred income tax will be recognised from the initial recognition of an asset or liability, excluding a business combination, where there is no effect on accounting or taxable profit or loss. \n\n## NOTE 1 - STATEMENT OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES continued\n\n## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9172673563956911, + "doc_id": "983c24bf8c7470867da8a31f0330edb1fa7c7fdc5f3806e418a418bf1fee7083", + "edit_distance": 0.5080745341614907, + "f1_score": 0.9822646657571624, + "meteor": 0.9272637279642213, + "precision": 0.9917355371900827, + "pred_md": "20\n\n| INVESTOR Q&A\n\n## CHESAPEAKE MANAGEMENT PERSPECTIVES »\n\nSteve Dixon Operations and Geosciences and\n\nSteve Dixon Operations and Geosciences and\n\n## What innovations and advancements have led to CHK's ability to produce liquids from shales and other tight reservoirs?\n\nDuring the past five years, Chesapeake and a few other leaders in the independent E&P industry have developed expertise in exploiting shales and other tight reservoir formations targeting natural gas through the combination of horizontal drilling and advanced fracture stimulation techniques. This has allowed the commercialization of plays that were previously uneconomic, most notably in shale formations. Part of our success in producing liquids from tight reservoirs has come from the company's ability to extend the technological advances gained in the development of tight natural gas formations to new formations known to contain substantial liquids. This led to our first liquids-rich play discovery in the Colony Granite Wash in 2007. As we have increased our focus on liquids-rich plays, we have benefited from a growing understanding and mapping of petrophysical properties in unconventional formations as well as an enhanced understanding of the geochemical nature of liquids-rich reservoirs. This has allowed Chesapeake to better identify formations most likely to generate liquids-rich production, including more than a dozen new plays for the company. We have subsequently improved the success of our liquids-rich plays through the use of optimal wellbore lateral lengths, better placement of well laterals though advanced wellbore steering techniques and customized fracture stimulation designs for liquids-rich plays that allow the company to achieve a greater stimulated rock volume in low permeability reservoirs. Finally, the advancements Chesapeake has made in developing liquids-rich plays have\n\nExecutive Vice President Chief Operating Officer\n\nbeen made possible through the use of our proprietary Reservoir Technology Center that has become the industry's most advanced shale core laboratory.\n\n## It is often said that the energy industry has an aging work force that is fast approaching retirement age. How is Chesapeake addressing this?\n\nIt is no secret that there is a shortage of experienced professionals in the natural gas and oil industry. The industry down turn of the 1980s and 1990s discouraged many from pursuing energy careers. In the following decades, strong competition from other industries lured away many of the best and brightest science and technology graduates, and today many experienced professionals who stayed in the industry through the downturn are approaching retirement age. As a result, one of our industry's greatest challenges over the past 10 years has been to develop a new generation of natural gas and oil professionals who have the knowledge and experience required to meet the nation's growing energy needs.\n\nIn 2000 Chesapeake was one of the first companies to recognize this trend and to understand how recruiting and training a new generation of energy professionals would impact the company's future success and its ability to compete in the industry. At that time, Chesapeake formulated a business strategy to address future staffing needs and decided to create a world-class college recruiting and intern program to recruit the most promising industry talent. Today, Chesapeake hosts more than 150 interns every summer in its internship program, many of whom go on to become full-time Chesapeake employees upon graduation. In addition, we have 350 students who receive\n\nMartha Burger\n\nMartha Burger\n\nSenior Vice President Human and Corporate Resources\n\nscholarships through Chesapeake programs, and our staff of college recruiters has developed strong relationships with professors, department heads and career counselors at the more than 31 universities where we actively recruit.\n\nAs a result of these efforts, young professionals in a wide range of disciplines, from scientists and engineers to land management and legal specialists, are being groomed to take over the reins as they learn the business through mentoring, extensive training, development opportunities and challenging work assignments. They are generously rewarded with excellent compensation and benefits, as well as an industry-leading working environment that encourages camaraderie and teamwork. The success of Chesapeake's strategy is apparent: the average age of the company's geoscience, land and engineering departments has dropped from 49 in 2000 to 36 today. In addition, the average age of the company's 4,000 Oklahoma City headquarters employees is 33. Even as some of Chesapeake's employees retire, the company is well equipped with a seasoned work force that is prepared to support and lead the way in Chesapeake's continued growth.", + "recall": 0.972972972972973, + "true_md": "20 | INVESTOR Q&A\n\n## CHESAPEAKE MANAGEMENT PERSPECTIVES »\n\n## What innovations and advancements have led to CHK’s ability to produce liquids from shales and other tight reservoirs?\n\nSteve Dixon Executive Vice President – Operations and Geosciences and Chief Operating Officer\n\n## It is often said that the energy industry has an aging work force that is fast approaching retirement age. How is Chesapeake addressing this?\n\nDuring the past five years, Chesapeake and a few other leaders in the independent E&P industry have developed expertise in exploiting shales and other tight reservoir formations targeting natural gas through the combination of horizontal drilling and advanced fracture stimulation techniques. This has allowed the commercialization of plays that were previously uneconomic, most notably in shale formations. Part of our success in producing liquids from tight reservoirs has come from the company’s ability to extend the technological advances gained in the development of tight natural gas formations to new formations known to contain substantial liquids. This led to our first liquids-rich play discovery in the Colony Granite Wash in 2007. As we have increased our focus on liquids-rich plays, we have ben- efited from a growing understanding and mapping of petrophysical properties in unconventional formations as well as an enhanced understanding of the geochemical nature of liquids-rich reservoirs. This has allowed Chesapeake to better identify formations most likely to generate liquids-rich production, including more than a dozen new plays for the company. We have subsequently improved the success of our liquids-rich plays through the use of optimal well- bore lateral lengths, better placement of well laterals though advanced wellbore steering techniques and customized fracture stimulation designs for liquids-rich plays that allow the company to achieve a greater stimulated rock volume in low permeability reservoirs. Finally, the advancements Chesapeake has made in developing liquids-rich plays have \n\nbeen made possible through the use of our proprietary Reservoir Technology Center that has become the industry’s most advanced shale core laboratory.\n\nIt is no secret that there is a shortage of experienced professionals in the natural gas and oil industry. The industry down - turn of the 1980s and 1990s discouraged many from pursuing energy careers. In the following decades, strong compe- tition from other industries lured away many of the best and brightest science and technology graduates, and today many experienced professionals who stayed in the industry through the downturn are approaching retirement age. As a result, one of our industry’s greatest challenges over the past 10 years has been to develop a new generation of natural gas and oil professionals who have the knowledge and experience required to meet the nation’s growing energy needs.\n\nAs a result of these efforts, young professionals in a wide range of disciplines, from scientists and engineers to land management and legal specialists, are being groomed to take over the reins as they learn the business through mentoring, extensive training, development opportunities and challenging work assignments. They are generously rewarded with excellent compensation and benefits, as well as an industry-leading working environment that encourages camaraderie and teamwork. The success of Chesapeake’s strategy is apparent: the average age of the company’s geoscience, land and engineering departments has dropped from 49 in 2000 to 36 today. In addition, the average age of the company’s 4,000 Oklahoma City headquarters employees is 33. Even as some of Chesapeake’s employees retire, the company is well equipped with a seasoned work force that is prepared to support and lead the way in Chesapeake’s continued growth. \n\nMartha Burger Senior Vice President – Human and Corporate Resources\n\nIn 2000 Chesapeake was one of the first companies to recognize this trend and to understand how recruiting and training a new generation of energy professionals would impact the company’s future success and its ability to compete in the industry. At that time, Chesapeake formulated a business strategy to address future staffing needs and decided to create a world-class college recruiting and intern program to recruit the most promising industry talent. Today, Chesapeake hosts more than 150 interns every summer in its internship program, many of whom go on to become full-time Chesapeake employees upon graduation. In addition, we have 350 students who receive \n\nscholarships through Chesapeake programs, and our staff of college recruiters has developed strong relationships with professors, department heads and career counselors at the more than 31 universities where we actively recruit." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.947100083576663, + "doc_id": "2710f9e2e1ab81de78c68089918b01b16d4b2db06ee8a54a6464c0b75f4eeb24", + "edit_distance": 0.696, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.8175654187255419, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Opinion\n\n## In our opinion:\n\n- a. the financial report of Sundance Energy Australia is in accordance with the Corporations Act 2001 , including:\n- i giving a true and fair view of the consolidated entity's financial position as at 31 December 2014 and of its performance for the year ended on that date; and\n- ii complying with Australian Accounting Standards and the Corporations Regulations 2001 ; and\n- b. the financial report also complies with International Financial Reporting Standards issued by the IASB as disclosed in Note 1.\n\n## Report on the remuneration report\n\nWe have audited the Remuneration Report included in pages 28 to 43 of the directors' report for the year ended 31 December 2014. The directors of the company are responsible for the preparation and presentation of the Remuneration Report in accordance with section 300A of the Corporations Act 2001 . Our responsibility is to express an opinion on the Remuneration Report, based on our audit conducted in accordance with Australian Auditing Standards.\n\n## Opinion\n\nIn our opinion, the Remuneration Report of Sundance Energy Australia Limited for the year ended 31 December 2014, complies with section 300A of the Corporations Act 2001 .\n\nErnst & Young\n\nMichael Elliott Partner Sydney 31 March 2015\n\nA member firm of Ernst & Young Global Limited Liability limited by a scheme approved under Professional Standards Legislation\n\n- 108 -", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## Opinion\n\n## Report on the remuneration report\n\n## Opinion\n\nA member firm of Ernst & Young Global Limited Liability limited by a scheme approved under Professional Standards Legislation\n\n- 108 - \n\nMichael Elliott Partner Sydney 31 March 2015 \n\nErnst & Young \n\nIn our opinion, the Remuneration Report of Sundance Energy Australia Limited for the year ended 31 December 2014, complies with section 300A of the Corporations Act 2001 . \n\nWe have audited the Remuneration Report included in pages 28 to 43 of the directors' report for the year ended 31 December 2014. The directors of the company are responsible for the preparation and presentation of the Remuneration Report in accordance with section 300A of the Corporations Act 2001 . Our responsibility is to express an opinion on the Remuneration Report, based on our audit conducted in accordance with Australian Auditing Standards. \n\nIn our opinion:\n\n- a. the financial report of Sundance Energy Australia is in accordance with the Corporations Act 2001 , including: \n\n- i giving a true and fair view of the consolidated entity's financial position as at 31 December 2014 and of its performance for the year ended on that date; and \n\n- ii complying with Australian Accounting Standards and the Corporations Regulations 2001 ; and \n\n- b. the financial report also complies with International Financial Reporting Standards issued by the IASB as disclosed in Note 1 ." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.891629911554898, + "doc_id": "ee564f4ce7b44a11dd4890a7c13a988126afadfa529eb0a60821b223b529702d", + "edit_distance": 0.12017167381974249, + "f1_score": 0.9690444145356664, + "meteor": 0.9375518383506591, + "precision": 0.9703504043126685, + "pred_md": "## Management's Discussion and Analysis\n\nDollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\n## Business Strategy\n\n## Maximize NOI from Existing Portfolio\n\nManagement is focused on increasing the value of its real estate portfolio by maximizing revenue and operating efficiencies. To achieve NOI growth, Killam must address three critical factors; occupancy, rental rates, and operating costs. The Company focuses on customer service, investing in its properties, leasing and marketing initiatives, and training its employees to maximize these outcomes.\n\nManagement is able to directly control approximately 40% of operating expenses, including labour costs, repairs and maintenance and property general and administrative expenses. The remaining operating costs, including utilities and property taxes, are less controllable. Killam's apartments are currently heated with a combination of natural gas, electricity and oil. Volatile oil and natural gas prices have an impact on Killam's operating costs. To mitigate this volatility, the Company is active in energy conservation initiatives and regularly monitors its energy usage.\n\n## Growth through Acquisitions\n\nKillam is expanding its portfolio by acquiring newer, centrally located buildings and is focused on Ontario. During 2013 Killam completed $121.1 million in acquisitions, including properties in Toronto, Ottawa, Moncton and Prince Edward Island.\n\n## Growth through Development\n\nKillam enhances its portfolio growth opportunities by developing properties. Killam started apartment developments in 2010 and has completed five properties to-date, including four in 2013. Building new properties directly allows Killam to control the quality and features of the buildings, maximizes the use of excess land and eliminates the seller's profit, generating higher returns than through acquisitions. Management expects to limit development projects to approximately 5% of the balance sheet on an annual basis.\n\n## Investment in New Properties\n\nIn addition to developing new properties, Killam also acquires newly constructed assets. Management believes that increasing Killam's ownership in new, high-quality buildings will result in above-market and long-term demand for the Company's assets from an aging population, reduce annual capital requirements for deferred maintenance, and transform Killam's portfolio, over time, into one of the highest quality portfolios in canada.\n\nDemand by renters for newly constructed rental apartments is strong, with high occupancy rates and above-average rents. CMHC's Fall 2013 Halifax Rental Market Report reported 97.3% occupancy for properties built in 2000 or later, compared to 96.8% for all rental markets in the city. The average rent for a two-bedroom unit in these newer buildings was $1,320 per month, compared to a market average two-bedroom rent of $976.\n\nThe new properties added to Killam's portfolio are condo quality, providing tenants with features and amenities traditionally associated with ownership. The Company believes that demand for this type of rental accommodation will grow given an increasing number of homeowners reaching retirement age and looking for alternatives to home ownership. Killam is also attracted to the low capital spend requirements from new assets compared to older buildings, which often include significant capital investment to address deferred maintenance. Generally, the amount of annual capital to maintain a property increases as the building ages. In addition, with energy efficient features, the NOI margins are generally higher in newer buildings.\n\nWith strong demand for the acquisition of apartments over the last three years, cap-rates have declined and the pricing differential between older and newer buildings has reduced. This enables Killam to increase the amount of newer apartments in its portfolio without paying a significant premium for quality assets.\n\n## Geographic Diversification\n\nGeographic diversification in the apartment segment is a priority for Killam. With a 14.2% market share in its core markets in Atlantic Canada, Killam is the region's largest residential landlord. The maximum market share Management foresees Killam reaching in Atlantic Canada is between 15%-18%. With Atlantic Canada representing only 4.9% of the Canadian rental market, Killam's growth opportunities increase significantly when considering assets outside Atlantic Canada.\n\nWith its strong operating platform, Killam can support a larger and more geographically diverse portfolio. The Company is actively building a portfolio in targeted Ontario markets, including Ottawa, the Greater Toronto Area, and Southwestern Ontario. An increased investment in Ontario, and potentially Western Canada, will increase the Company's diversification and exposure in high growth centres in Canada. Based on the Company's portfolio at year-end, 15% of Killam's 2014 NOI will be generated in Ontario. Management has set a long-term target of growing the amount of NOI generated outside of Atlantic Canada to 50%.\n\nIn 2013, Killam sold a portfolio of ten MHCs in New Brunswick that allowed Killam to crystallize the increased value of this portfolio at attractive cap-rates. This creates moderate short-term dilution but it provides the Company with funds to continue its geographic diversification by accretively growing its apartment portfolio in Ontario.\n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013\n\n29", + "recall": 0.967741935483871, + "true_md": "Management’s Discussion and Analysis Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\nManagement’s Discussion and Analysis Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\n## Business Strategy\n\n## Maximize NOI from Existing Portfolio\n\n## Growth through Acquisitions\n\n## Growth through Development\n\n## Investment in New Properties\n\n## Geographic Diversification\n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013 29\n\nManagement is focused on increasing the value of its real estate portfolio by maximizing revenue and operating efficiencies. To achieve NOI growth, Killam must address three critical factors; occupancy, rental rates, and operating costs. The Company focuses on customer service, investing in its properties, leasing and marketing initiatives, and training its employees to maximize these outcomes.\n\nManagement is able to directly control approximately 40% of operating expenses, including labour costs, repairs and maintenance and property general and administrative expenses. The remaining operating costs, including utilities and property taxes, are less controllable. Killam’s apartments are currently heated with a combination of natural gas, electricity and oil. Volatile oil and natural gas prices have an impact on Killam’s operating costs. To mitigate this volatility, the Company is active in energy conservation initiatives and regularly monitors its energy usage.\n\nKillam is expanding its portfolio by acquiring newer, centrally located buildings and is focused on Ontario. During 2013 Killam completed $121.1 million in acquisitions, including properties in Toronto, Ottawa, Moncton and Prince Edward Island.\n\nKillam enhances its portfolio growth opportunities by developing properties. Killam started apartment developments in 2010 and has completed five properties to‑date, including four in 2013. Building new properties directly allows Killam to control the quality and features of the buildings, maximizes the use of excess land and eliminates the seller’s profit, generating higher returns than through acquisitions. Management expects to limit development projects to approximately 5% of the balance sheet on an annual basis. \n\nIn addition to developing new properties, Killam also acquires newly constructed assets. Management believes that increasing Killam’s ownership in new, high‑quality buildings will result in above‑market and long‑term demand for the Company’s assets from an aging population, reduce annual capital requirements for deferred maintenance, and transform Killam’s portfolio, over time, into one of the highest quality portfolios in canada. \n\nDemand by renters for newly constructed rental apartments is strong, with high occupancy rates and above‑average rents. CMHC’s Fall 2013 Halifax Rental Market Report reported 97.3% occupancy for properties built in 2000 or later, compared to 96.8% for all rental markets in the city. The average rent for a two‑bedroom unit in these newer buildings was $1,320 per month, compared to a market average two‑bedroom rent of $976. \n\nThe new properties added to Killam’s portfolio are condo quality, providing tenants with features and amenities traditionally associated with ownership. The Company believes that demand for this type of rental accommodation will grow given an increasing number of homeowners reaching retirement age and looking for alternatives to home ownership. Killam is also attracted to the low capital spend requirements from new assets compared to older buildings, which often include significant capital investment to address deferred maintenance. Generally, the amount of annual capital to maintain a property increases as the building ages. In addition, with energy efficient features, the NOI margins are generally higher in newer buildings.\n\nWith strong demand for the acquisition of apartments over the last three years, cap‑rates have declined and the pricing differential between older and newer buildings has reduced. This enables Killam to increase the amount of newer apartments in its portfolio without paying a significant premium for quality assets. \n\nGeographic diversification in the apartment segment is a priority for Killam. With a 14.2% market share in its core markets in Atlantic Canada, Killam is the region’s largest residential landlord. The maximum market share Management foresees Killam reaching in Atlantic Canada is between 15%‑18%. With Atlantic Canada representing only 4.9% of the Canadian rental market, Killam’s growth opportunities increase significantly when considering assets outside Atlantic Canada.\n\nWith its strong operating platform, Killam can support a larger and more geographically diverse portfolio. The Company is actively building a portfolio in targeted Ontario markets, including Ottawa, the Greater Toronto Area, and Southwestern Ontario. An increased investment in Ontario, and potentially Western Canada, will increase the Company’s diversification and exposure in high growth centres in Canada. Based on the Company’s portfolio at year‑end, 15% of Killam’s 2014 NOI will be generated in Ontario. Management has set a long‑term target of growing the amount of NOI generated outside of Atlantic Canada to 50%. \n\nIn 2013, Killam sold a portfolio of ten MHCs in New Brunswick that allowed Killam to crystallize the increased value of this portfolio at attractive cap‑rates. This creates moderate short‑term dilution but it provides the Company with funds to continue its geographic diversification by accretively growing its apartment portfolio in Ontario." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8999190966936913, + "doc_id": "ac1392a075f14ff016e25f82b10b9c81a14b4a9699ecc1b250f16e8867d343d4", + "edit_distance": 0.08441558441558442, + "f1_score": 0.9620253164556962, + "meteor": 0.91713045562272, + "precision": 0.987012987012987, + "pred_md": "## opportunities for Growth\n\nKillam's growth opportunities include increasing earnings of its existing portfolio and expanding the portfolio through acquisitions and development. acquisitions have been an important part of Killam's growth, having completed over $1.1 billion in acquisitions since the first property was acquired in 2002. Killam began development as a complement to its acquisition program in 2010, and to-date has invested approximately $90 million in new developments. 2013 was Killam's largest year for growth since 2005, adding $191 million of properties to the portfolio, including $121 million in acquisitions and $70 million in new developments. looking ahead to 2014, Killam has targeted a minimum of $75 million in acquisitions, and the development of two new apartment buildings totaling approximately $46 million.", + "recall": 0.9382716049382716, + "true_md": "## opportunities for Growth\n\nKillam’s growth opportunities include increasing earnings of its existing portfolio and expanding the portfolio through acquisitions and development.\n\nacquisitions have been an important part of Killam’s growth, having completed over $1.1 billion in acquisitions since the first property was acquired in 2002. \n\nKillam began development as a complement to its acquisition program in 2010, and to-date has invested approximately $90 million in new developments.\n\n2013 was Killam’s largest year for growth since 2005, adding $191 million of properties to the portfolio, including $121 million in acquisitions and $70 million in new developments. looking ahead to 2014, Killam has targeted a minimum of $75 million in acquisitions, and the development of two new apartment buildings totaling approximately $46 million. \n\nthe plaza, Fredericton, new Brunswick" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.92787958024548, + "doc_id": "f0d5b60cefe1c2760c77da0e18adc2d0c5df4cf2a99879907d670d76d93fcd02", + "edit_distance": 0.8435643564356435, + "f1_score": 0.9878934624697338, + "meteor": 0.8147649326279583, + "precision": 0.9902912621359223, + "pred_md": "## NOTE 24: STOCK OPTIONS, SHARE UNITS AND SHARE PURCHASE PLANS\n\nWe measure stock-based compensation to employees at fair value. We determine fair value using our Class B Non-Voting share price, and the Black-Scholes option pricing model or trinomial option pricing models, depending on the nature of the share-based award.\n\nThe table below is a summary of our stock-based compensation expense, which is included in employee salaries and benefits expense:\n\nAt December 31, 2013, we had a total liability recorded at its fair value of $164 million (December 31, 2012 - $195 million) related to stockbased compensation, including stock options, RSUs and DSUs. The current portion of this is $128 million (December 31, 2012 -$158 million) and is included in accounts payable and accrued liabilities.\n\nThe total intrinsic value of vested liabilities, which is the difference between the strike price of the share-based awards and the trading price of the RCI Class B Non-Voting shares for all vested share-based awards at December 31, 2013 was $85 million (December 31, 2012 $109 million).\n\n## Summary of Stock Options\n\nThe table below is a summary of the stock option plans, including performance options:\n\nThe table below shows the range of exercise prices, the weighted average exercise price and the weighted average remaining contractual life at December 31, 2013:\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC.\n\n121\n\nWe paid $101 million in 2013 (2012 - $76 million) to holders of stock options, RSUs and DSUs upon exercise, representing a weighted average share price on the date of exercise of $48.18 (2012 - $39.42).\n\n## S tock Options\n\n## Stock Option Plans\n\nOptions to purchase our Class B Non-Voting shares on a one-for-one basis may be granted to our employees, directors and officers by the Board of Directors or our Management Compensation Committee. There are 65 million options authorized under various plans, and each option has a term of seven to ten years. The vesting period is generally graded vesting over four years, however, the Management Compensation Committee may adjust the vesting terms on the grant date. The exercise price is equal to the fair market value of the Class B Non-Voting shares, determined as the five-day average before the grant date as quoted on the TSX.\n\n## Performance Options\n\nWe granted 1,415,482 performance-based options in 2013 (2012 806,100) to certain key executives. These options vest on a graded basis over four years provided that certain targeted stock prices are met on or after each anniversary date. At December 31, 2013, we had 4,728,959 performance options (December 31, 2012 - 5,435,555) outstanding.\n\nNOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS", + "recall": 0.9855072463768116, + "true_md": "## NOTE 24: STOCK OPTIONS, SHARE UNITS AND SHARE PURCHASE PLANS\n\n## S tock Options\n\nNOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 121\n\nWe paid $101 million in 2013 (2012 – $76 million) to holders of stock options, RSUs and DSUs upon exercise, representing a weighted average share price on the date of exercise of $48.18 (2012 – $39.42).\n\nStock Option Plans\n\nOptions to purchase our Class B Non-Voting shares on a one-for-one basis may be granted to our employees, directors and officers by the Board of Directors or our Management Compensation Committee. There are 65 million options authorized under various plans, and each option has a term of seven to ten years. The vesting period is generally graded vesting over four years, however, the Management Compensation Committee may adjust the vesting terms on the grant date. The exercise price is equal to the fair market value of the Class B Non-Voting shares, determined as the five-day average before the grant date as quoted on the TSX.\n\nWe measure stock-based compensation to employees at fair value. We determine fair value using our Class B Non-Voting share price, and the Black-Scholes option pricing model or trinomial option pricing models, depending on the nature of the share-based award.\n\nThe table below is a summary of our stock-based compensation expense, which is included in employee salaries and benefits expense:\n\nAt December 31, 2013, we had a total liability recorded at its fair value of $164 million (December 31, 2012 – $195 million) related to stock- based compensation, including stock options, RSUs and DSUs. The current portion of this is $128 million (December 31, 2012 – $158 million) and is included in accounts payable and accrued liabilities.\n\nThe total intrinsic value of vested liabilities, which is the difference between the strike price of the share-based awards and the trading price of the RCI Class B Non-Voting shares for all vested share-based awards at December 31, 2013 was $85 million (December 31, 2012 – $109 million).\n\nSummary of Stock Options\n\nThe table below is a summary of the stock option plans, including performance options:\n\nPerformance Options\n\nWe granted 1,415,482 performance-based options in 2013 (2012 – 806,100) to certain key executives. These options vest on a graded basis over four years provided that certain targeted stock prices are met on or after each anniversary date. At December 31, 2013, we had 4,728,959 performance options (December 31, 2012 – 5,435,555) outstanding.\n\nThe table below shows the range of exercise prices, the weighted average exercise price and the weighted average remaining contractual life at December 31, 2013:" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9605587570327461, + "doc_id": "f99a9d810fe348fdc790c5801563a8ea4a21802bcb56c95a161aa584d7789eaa", + "edit_distance": 0.06701570680628273, + "f1_score": 0.9961977186311788, + "meteor": 0.9809400352884762, + "precision": 0.9974619289340102, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (Continued)\n\n(In thousands, except per share amounts)\n\nThe Company's cash and cash equivalents consists of deposits with commercial banks. While Applied monitors the creditworthiness of these commercial banks and institutions, a crisis in the U.S., Canadian or Mexican financial systems could limit access to funds and/or result in the loss of principal. The terms of these deposits and investments provide that all monies are available to the Company upon demand.\n\n## Allowances for Doubtful Accounts\n\nThe Company evaluates the collectibility of trade accounts receivable based on a combination of factors. Initially, the Company estimates an allowance for doubtful accounts as a percentage of net sales based on historical bad debt experience. This initial estimate is adjusted based on recent trends of customers and industries estimated to be greater credit risks, trends within the entire customer pool and changes in the overall aging of accounts receivable. Accounts are written off against the allowance when it becomes evident collection will not occur. While the Company has a large customer base that is geographically dispersed, a general economic downturn in any of the industry segments in which the Company operates could result in higher than expected defaults, and therefore, the need to revise estimates for bad debts.\n\n## Inventories\n\nInventories are valued at the lower of cost or market, using the last-in, first-out (LIFO) method for U.S. inventories and the average cost method for foreign inventories. The Company adopted the link chain dollar value LIFO method of accounting for U.S. inventories in fiscal 1974. At June 30, 2012, approximately 37% of the Company's domestic inventory dollars relate to LIFO layers added in the 1970s. The Company maintains five LIFO pools based on the following product groupings: bearings, power transmission products, rubber products, fluid power products and other products. LIFO layers and/or liquidations are determined consistently year-to-year.\n\nThe Company evaluates the recoverability of its slow moving or obsolete inventories at least quarterly. The Company estimates the recoverable cost of such inventory by product type while considering factors such as its age, historic and current demand trends, the physical condition of the inventory as well as assumptions regarding future demand. The Company's ability to recover its cost for slow moving or obsolete inventory can be affected by such factors as general market conditions, future customer demand and relationships with suppliers. Historically, the Company's inventories have demonstrated long shelf lives, are not highly susceptible to obsolescence and are eligible for return under various supplier return programs.\n\n## Supplier Purchasing Programs\n\nThe Company enters into agreements with certain suppliers providing for inventory purchase incentives. The Company's inventory purchase incentive arrangements are unique to each supplier and are generally annual programs ending at either the Company's fiscal year end or the supplier's year end. Incentives are received in the form of cash or credits against purchases upon attainment of specified purchase volumes and are received monthly, quarterly or annually. The incentives are generally a specified percentage of the Company's net purchases based upon achieving specific purchasing volume levels. These percentages can increase or decrease based on changes in the volume of purchases. The Company accrues for the receipt of these inventory purchase incentives based upon cumulative purchases of inventory. The percentage level utilized is based upon the estimated total volume of purchases expected during the life of the program. Supplier programs are analyzed each quarter to determine the appropriateness of the amount of purchase incentives accrued. Upon program completion, differences between estimates and actual incentives subsequently received have not been material. Benefits under these supplier purchasing programs are recognized under the Company's LIFO inventory accounting method as a reduction of cost of sales when the inventories representing these purchases are recorded as cost of sales. Accrued incentives expected to be settled as a credit against purchases are reported on the consolidated balance sheet as an offset to amounts due to the related supplier.\n\n## Property and Related Depreciation and Amortization\n\nProperty and equipment are recorded at cost. Depreciation is computed using the straight-line method over the estimated useful lives of the assets and is included in selling, distribution and administrative expenses in the accompanying statements of consolidated income. Buildings, building improvements and leasehold improvements are depreciated over ten to thirty years or the life of the lease if a shorter period, and equipment is depreciated over three to eight years. The Company capitalizes internal use software development costs in accordance with guidance on accounting for costs of computer software developed or obtained for internal use. Amortization of software begins when it is ready for its intended use, and is amortized on a straight-line basis over the estimated useful life of the software, generally not to exceed twelve years. Capitalized software and hardware costs are classified as property on the consolidated balance sheets. The carrying values of property and equipment are reviewed for impairment when events or changes in circumstances indicate that the recorded value cannot be recovered from undiscounted future cash flows. Impairment losses, if any, would be measured based upon the difference between the carrying amount and the fair value of the assets.\n\n20 Applied Industrial Technologies, Inc. and Subsidiaries", + "recall": 0.9949367088607595, + "true_md": "NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (Continued)\n\n(In thousands, except per share amounts)\n\nThe Company’s cash and cash equivalents consists of deposits with commercial banks. While Applied monitors the creditworthiness of these commercial banks and institutions, a crisis in the U.S., Canadian or Mexican financial systems could limit access to funds and/or result in the loss of principal. The terms of these deposits and investments provide that all monies are available to the Company upon demand. \n\nThe Company evaluates the collectibility of trade accounts receivable based on a combination of factors. Initially, the Company estimates an allowance for doubtful accounts as a percentage of net sales based on historical bad debt experience. This initial estimate is adjusted based on recent trends of customers and industries estimated to be greater credit risks, trends within the entire customer pool and changes in the overall aging of accounts receivable. Accounts are written off against the allowance when it becomes evident collection will not occur. While the Company has a large customer base that is geographically dispersed, a general economic downturn in any of the industry segments in which the Company operates could result in higher than expected defaults, and therefore, the need to revise estimates for bad debts. \n\nInventories are valued at the lower of cost or market, using the last-in, first-out (LIFO) method for U.S. inventories and the average cost method for foreign inventories. The Company adopted the link chain dollar value LIFO method of accounting for U.S. inventories in fiscal 1974. At June 30, 2012, approximately 37% of the Company’s domestic inventory dollars relate to LIFO layers added in the 1970s. The Company maintains five LIFO pools based on the following product groupings: bearings, power transmission products, rubber products, fluid power products and other products. LIFO layers and/or liquidations are determined consistently year-to-year. \n\nThe Company evaluates the recoverability of its slow moving or obsolete inventories at least quarterly. The Company estimates the recoverable cost of such inventory by product type while considering factors such as its age, historic and current demand trends, the physical condition of the inventory as well as assumptions regarding future demand. The Company’s ability to recover its cost for slow moving or obsolete inventory can be affected by such factors as general market conditions, future customer demand and relationships with suppliers. Historically, the Company’s inventories have demonstrated long shelf lives, are not highly susceptible to obsolescence and are eligible for return under various supplier return programs. \n\nThe Company enters into agreements with certain suppliers providing for inventory purchase incentives. The Company’s inventory purchase incentive arrangements are unique to each supplier and are generally annual programs ending at either the Company’s fiscal year end or the supplier’s year end. Incentives are received in the form of cash or credits against purchases upon attainment of specified purchase volumes and are received monthly, quarterly or annually. The incentives are generally a specified percentage of the Company’s net purchases based upon achieving specific purchasing volume levels. These percentages can increase or decrease based on changes in the volume of purchases. The Company accrues for the receipt of these inventory purchase incentives based upon cumulative purchases of inventory. The percentage level utilized is based upon the estimated total volume of purchases expected during the life of the program. Supplier programs are analyzed each quarter to determine the appropriateness of the amount of purchase incentives accrued. Upon program completion, differences between estimates and actual incentives subsequently received have not been material. Benefits under these supplier purchasing programs are recognized under the Company’s LIFO inventory accounting method as a reduction of cost of sales when the inventories representing these purchases are recorded as cost of sales. Accrued incentives expected to be settled as a credit against purchases are reported on the consolidated balance sheet as an offset to amounts due to the related supplier. \n\nProperty and equipment are recorded at cost. Depreciation is computed using the straight-line method over the estimated useful lives of the assets and is included in selling, distribution and administrative expenses in the accompanying statements of consolidated income. Buildings, building improvements and leasehold improvements are depreciated over ten to thirty years or the life of the lease if a shorter period, and equipment is depreciated over three to eight years. The Company capitalizes internal use software development costs in accordance with guidance on accounting for costs of computer software developed or obtained for internal use. Amortization of software begins when it is ready for its intended use, and is amortized on a straight-line basis over the estimated useful life of the software, generally not to exceed twelve years. Capitalized software and hardware costs are classified as property on the consolidated balance sheets. The carrying values of property and equipment are reviewed for impairment when events or changes in circumstances indicate that the recorded value cannot be recovered from undiscounted future cash flows. Impairment losses, if any, would be measured based upon the difference between the carrying amount and the fair value of the assets. \n\n## Property and Related Depreciation and Amortization\n\n## Supplier Purchasing Programs\n\n## Inventories\n\n## Allowances for Doubtful Accounts\n\n20 Applied Industrial Technologies, Inc. and Subsidiaries" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8582209837094475, + "doc_id": "79b5cecd4ba0d1ba52a3cad4322eb997b810aa051c9174560264cd00c962da76", + "edit_distance": 0.3389830508474576, + "f1_score": 0.9523809523809523, + "meteor": 0.9484431439702368, + "precision": 0.9615384615384616, + "pred_md": "## (B) Securitization Exposures\n\n## a. Underlying Assets by Asset Type\n\nNote: 'Other claims' includes lease fees.\n\n## b. Risk Weights\n\n## (C) Amount of Credit Risk-Weighted Assets Calculated Using Supplementary Provision 15 of the Notification\n\n## (2) Securitization Transactions in which the Group is the Investor\n\nSecuritization Exposures\n\n## (A) Underlying Assets by Asset Type\n\nNote: 'Other claims' includes securitization products.\n\n## (B) Risk Weights\n\n## (C) Amount of Credit Risk-Weighted Assets Calculated Using Supplementary Provision 15 of the Notification\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n195\n\nCapital Ratio Information\n\nSMFG", + "recall": 0.9433962264150944, + "true_md": "Capital Ratio Information\n\nSMFG\n\n## (B) Securitization Exposures\n\n## a. Underlying Assets by Asset Type\n\n## b. Risk Weights\n\nNote: “Other claims” includes lease fees.\n\n## (C) Amount of Credit Risk-Weighted Assets Calculated Using Supplementary Provision 15 of the Notification\n\n## (2) Securitization Transactions in which the Group is the Investor\n\n## (A) Underlying Assets by Asset Type\n\nSecuritization Exposures\n\n## (B) Risk Weights\n\n## (C) Amount of Credit Risk-Weighted Assets Calculated Using Supplementary Provision 15 of the Notification\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n195\n\nNote: “Other claims” includes securitization products." + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "66bbe25a5847611cdf964fd1bff6bfaf48eee075334227a8433b40bb2dd752a1", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9996243425995492, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Corporate Headquarters\n\n1 Applied Plaza Cleveland, Ohio 44115 216/426-4000 Applied.com", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Corporate Headquarters 1 Applied Plaza Cleveland, Ohio 44115 216/426-4000 Applied.com" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.947780989673347, + "doc_id": "0e87c6968db94332ed8d88d3eb4f46ba63d85b0dafb6a0495e4776049446478e", + "edit_distance": 0.0935374149659864, + "f1_score": 0.9716775599128539, + "meteor": 0.9667843436337499, + "precision": 0.9823788546255506, + "pred_md": "## Operational Risk\n\n## 1. Basic Approach to Operational Risk Management\n\n## (1) Definition of Operational Risk\n\nOperational risk is the risk of loss resulting from inadequate or failed internal processes, people and systems or from external events. Specifically, Basel II-which, in addition to processing risk and system risk, also covers legal risk, personnel risk, and physical asset risk-defines the following seven types of events that may lead to the risk of loss: (1) internal fraud, (2) external fraud, (3) employment practices and workplace safety, (4) clients, products and business practices, (5) damage to physical assets, (6) business disruption and system failures, and (7) execution, delivery, and process management.\n\n## (2) Fundamental Principles for Operational Risk Management\n\nSMFG and SMBC have drawn up the Regulations on Operational Risk Management to define the basic rules to be observed in the conduct of operational risk management across the entire Group. Under these regulations, SMFG and SMBC have been working to enhance the operational risk management framework across the whole Group by establishing an effective system for identification, assessment, controlling, and monitoring of material operational risk and a system for executing contingency and business continuity plans. In view of the inclusion of operational risk in the framework of the capital adequacy requirements of Basel II, SMFG has been working on a continuing basis to create a more sophisticated quantification model and to enhance operational risk management throughout the Group.\n\n## 2. Operational Risk Management System\n\nSMFG has designed and implemented an operational risk management framework for Groupwide basic policies for risk management.\n\nAt SMBC, the Management Committee makes decisions on important matters such as basic policies for operational risk management, and these decisions are authorized by the SMBC Board of Directors. In addition, SMBC has established its Operational Risk Management Department, within the Corporate Risk Management Department as an integrated operational risk management department. This department works together with other departments responsible for controlling processing risk and system risk.\n\nThe operational risk management framework is described in more detail in the later part of this section, but it can be outlined as follows: operational risk is managed by (1) collecting and analyzing internal loss data, and (2) comprehensively identifying risk scenarios in each business process through a regular risk control assessment to estimate the loss severity and frequency. Operational risk impact is assessed for each risk scenario. When high-severity scenarios are identified, each branch/department establishes a risk mitigation plan and the Operational Risk Management Department monitors the progress. Furthermore, operational risk is quantified using the internal loss data and scenarios, and the results of quantification are used to manage and reduce operational risk.\n\nThe generation of internal loss data, scenarios identified through risk control assessments, and status of risk mitigation activities are regularly reported to the director in charge of the Operational Risk Management Department. In addition, there is the Operational Risk Committee, comprising all relevant units of the bank, where operational risk information is reported and risk mitigation plans\n\n## ■ SMBC's Operational Risk Management System\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n42", + "recall": 0.9612068965517241, + "true_md": "## (1) Definition of Operational Risk\n\n## 2. Operational Risk Management System\n\nOperational risk is the risk of loss resulting from inadequate or failed internal processes, people and systems or from external events. Specifically, Basel II—which, in addition to processing risk and sys- tem risk, also covers legal risk, personnel risk, and physical asset risk—defines the following seven types of events that may lead to the risk of loss: (1) internal fraud, (2) external fraud, (3) employment practices and workplace safety, (4) clients, products and business practices, (5) damage to physical assets, (6) business disruption and system failures, and (7) execution, delivery, and process management. \n\nSMFG and SMBC have drawn up the Regulations on Operational Risk Management to define the basic rules to be observed in the conduct of operational risk management across the entire Group. Under these regulations, SMFG and SMBC have been working to enhance the operational risk management framework across the whole Group by establishing an effective system for identification, assessment, controlling, and monitoring of material operational risk and a system for executing contingency and business continuity plans. In view of the inclusion of operational risk in the framework of the capital adequacy requirements of Basel II, SMFG has been working on a continuing basis to create a more sophisticated quantification model and to enhance operational risk management throughout the Group.\n\n## (2) Fundamental Principles for Operational Risk Management\n\nSMFG has designed and implemented an operational risk manage- ment framework for Groupwide basic policies for risk management.\n\nAt SMBC, the Management Committee makes decisions on important matters such as basic policies for operational risk man- agement, and these decisions are authorized by the SMBC Board of Directors. In addition, SMBC has established its Operational Risk Management Department, within the Corporate Risk Management Department as an integrated operational risk management depart- ment. This department works together with other departments responsible for controlling processing risk and system risk.\n\nThe operational risk management framework is described in more detail in the later part of this section, but it can be outlined as follows: operational risk is managed by (1) collecting and analyzing internal loss data, and (2) comprehensively identifying risk scenarios in each business process through a regular risk control assessment to estimate the loss severity and frequency. Operational risk impact is assessed for each risk scenario. When high-severity scenarios are identified, each branch/department establishes a risk mitigation plan and the Operational Risk Management Department monitors the progress. Furthermore, operational risk is quantified using the internal loss data and scenarios, and the results of quantification are used to manage and reduce operational risk.\n\nThe generation of internal loss data, scenarios identified through risk control assessments, and status of risk mitigation activities are regularly reported to the director in charge of the Operational Risk Management Department. In addition, there is the Operational Risk Committee, comprising all relevant units of the bank, where operational risk information is reported and risk mitigation plans \n\nSMFG 2011 42\n\n## 1. Basic Approach to Operational Risk Management\n\n## Operational Risk" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5059972007784728, + "doc_id": "2ddcd3d3fc77b8b019815aa2224fef9c330a3e3c19154f0d130b87c38c76c4f5", + "edit_distance": 0.3957845433255269, + "f1_score": 0.9808102345415778, + "meteor": 0.5709199524093799, + "precision": 0.9913793103448276, + "pred_md": "Historically, the oil and gas industry is a male dominated work force. The proportion of women employees in the whole organisation, women in senior executive positions and women on the board is listed in the following table.\n\n## 3.3 Securities Trading Policy\n\nSundance has a Securities Trading Policy that regulates dealing in its securities by Directors, Key Management Personnel, employees (personnel) and their associates. The Board restricts personnel from acting on inside information that is generally available and if it were generally available, would, or would be likely to, influence persons who commonly invest in securities in deciding whether to acquire or dispose of the relevant securities.\n\n## The Securities Trading Policy outlines:\n\n- · When personnel may and may not deal in shares of the Company, options over those shares and any other financial products of the Company traded on the ASX (company Securities):\n- · When personnel may and may not deal in listed securities of another entity;\n- · The procedure for obtaining prior clearance in exceptional circumstances for trading that would otherwise be contrary to the Securities Trading Policy; and\n- · Procedures to reduce the risk of insider trading.\n\nThe Securities Trading Policy was updated in February 2015 and is available in the corporate governance section of Sundance's website.\n\n## Principle 4: Safeguard Integrity in Financial Reporting\n\n## 4.1 Audit and Risk Management Committee\n\nThe Audit and Risk Management Committee has three members, D Hannes (chairman), M D Hannell, and N Martin, all whom are independent Non-Executive Directors. The Managing Director and Chief Executive Officer as well as the Chief Financial Officer are non-voting management representatives who advise the committee as appropriate.\n\nThe objectives of the Audit and Risk Management Committee is to assist the Board in:\n\n- · Ensuring the quality of financial controls is appropriate to Sundance;\n- · Making informed decisions regarding accounting , policies, practices and disclosures;\n- · Reviewing the adequacy of the accounting and reporting systems;\n- · Reviewing matters of significance affecting the financial welfare and risk exposure of Sundance;\n- · Reviewing the scope and results of external and internal audits;\n- · Maintaining open lines of communication between the Board, management and external auditors, thus enabling information and points of view to be freely exchanged; and\n- · Meeting its compliance obligations imposed by the energy regulators.\n\nThe specific attributes of the Audit and Risk Management Committee members that are relevant to this committee include financial acumen, technical industry knowledge, experience in risk management and oversight. The Audit and Risk Management Committee meets at least three times a year and the external auditor, Managing Director and Chief Financial Officer are invited to attend the meetings, at the discretion of the Audit and Risk Management Committee. The committee keeps minutes of meetings, which are submitted to the full Board for review.\n\n- 51 -", + "recall": 0.9704641350210971, + "true_md": "Historically, the oil and gas industry is a male dominated work force. The proportion of women employees in the whole organisation, women in senior executive positions and women on the board is listed in the following table. \n\n## 3.3 Securities Trading Policy\n\nSundance has a Securities Trading Policy that regulates dealing in its securities by Directors, Key Management Personnel, employees (personnel) and their associates. The Board restricts personnel from acting on inside information that is generally available and if it were generally available, would, or would be likely to, influence persons who commonly invest in securities in deciding whether to acquire or dispose of the relevant securities.\n\nThe Securities Trading Policy outlines: • When personnel may and may not deal in shares of the Company, options over those shares and any other financial \n\n- The Securities Trading Policy outlines: • When personnel may and may not deal in shares of the Company, options over those shares and any other financial products of the Company traded on the ASX (company Securities): • When personnel may and may not deal in listed securities of another entity; \n\n- products of the Company traded on the ASX (company Securities): • When personnel may and may not deal in listed securities of another entity; • The procedure for obtaining prior clearance in exceptional circumstances for trading that would otherwise be contrary \n\n- • When personnel may and may not deal in listed securities of another entity; • The procedure for obtaining prior clearance in exceptional circumstances for trading that would otherwise be contrary to the Securities Trading Policy; and • Procedures to reduce the risk of insider trading. \n\n- to the Securities Trading Policy; and • Procedures to reduce the risk of insider trading. \n\nThe Securities Trading Policy was updated in February 2015 and is available in the corporate governance section of Sundance’s website. \n\n## $^{ }$Principle 4: Safeguard Integrity in Financial Reporting\n\n## 4.1 Audit and Risk Management Committee The Audit and Risk Management Committee has three members, D Hannes (chairman), M D Hannell, and N Martin, all whom\n\n4.1 Audit and Risk Management Committee The Audit and Risk Management Committee has three members, D Hannes (chairman), M D Hannell, and N Martin, all whom are independent Non-Executive Directors. The Managing Director and Chief Executive Officer as well as the Chief Financial Officer are non-voting management representatives who advise the committee as appropriate. \n\nThe objectives of the Audit and Risk Management Committee is to assist the Board in: • Ensuring the quality of financial controls is appropriate to Sundance; \n\n- The objectives of the Audit and Risk Management Committee is to assist the Board in: • Ensuring the quality of financial controls is appropriate to Sundance; • Making informed decisions regarding accounting , policies, practices and disclosures; \n\n- • Ensuring the quality of financial controls is appropriate to Sundance; • Making informed decisions regarding accounting , policies, practices and disclosures; • Reviewing the adequacy of the accounting and reporting systems; \n\n- • Making informed decisions regarding accounting , policies, practices and disclosures; • Reviewing the adequacy of the accounting and reporting systems; • Reviewing matters of significance affecting the financial welfare and risk exposure of Sundance; \n\n- • Reviewing the adequacy of the accounting and reporting systems; • Reviewing matters of significance affecting the financial welfare and risk exposure of Sundance; • Reviewing the scope and results of external and internal audits; \n\n- • Reviewing matters of significance affecting the financial welfare and risk exposure of Sundance; • Reviewing the scope and results of external and internal audits; • Maintaining open lines of communication between the Board, management and external auditors, thus enabling \n\n- • Reviewing the scope and results of external and internal audits; • Maintaining open lines of communication between the Board, management and external auditors, thus enabling information and points of view to be freely exchanged; and • Meeting its compliance obligations imposed by the energy regulators. \n\n- information and points of view to be freely exchanged; and • Meeting its compliance obligations imposed by the energy regulators. \n\nThe specific attributes of the Audit and Risk Management Committee members that are relevant to this committee include financial acumen, technical industry knowledge, experience in risk management and oversight. The Audit and Risk Management Committee meets at least three times a year and the external auditor, Managing Director and Chief Financial Officer are invited to attend the meetings, at the discretion of the Audit and Risk Management Committee. The committee keeps minutes of meetings, which are submitted to the full Board for review. \n\n- 51 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9253104122650259, + "doc_id": "a2377b678473a9871719006e155a4ab6b9ba1eb967ba10c49f820e606979c90f", + "edit_distance": 0.6157760814249363, + "f1_score": 0.9688249400479616, + "meteor": 0.8707605313393946, + "precision": 0.9758454106280193, + "pred_md": "## In Chile, Protecting the Men and Women of the Chilean National Firefighters Council\n\nThe fire service is a key customer segment for MSA all around the world. Although recently weakened in some regions due to economic challenges, this market began to show signs of renewed strength in 2011. This was especially true in Latin America, and perhaps no other 2011 'win' better symbolizes MSA perseverance than our winning the confidence of the Chilean National Firefighters Council.\n\nThe Chilean National Firefighters Council, a collection of more than 300 fire departments throughout the country, had been served exclusively by a safety products competitor for decades. Nevertheless, MSA's sales team prepared a very competitive bid emphasizing the many benefits of a relationship with MSA: an industry-leading Self-Contained Breathing Apparatus (SCBA) design with chemical-biological-radiological-nuclear protection; ongoing training; and access to a responsive service organization located 'in country,' with engineering expertise to meet the specific needs of fire service customers.\n\nIn January, the Council announced that MSA had been granted an order for 1,000 FireHawk® M7 Air Masks. Another request for proposal later in the year was met with an even more challenging situation, with the incumbent competitor aggressively fighting for the business.\n\nHowever, having already seen first hand the advantages of MSA's products and service, the Council once again selected MSA, purchasing an additional 4,000 Air Masks, as well as fire helmets and related equipment.\n\nNo wonder that MSA Chairman John Ryan III, who helped to establish MSA's presence in Chile back in the 1970s, referred to this as a 'breakthrough order.' Not only does it demonstrate the value of perseverance and the ultimate reward of a superior o ff ering, it positions MSA well for future opportunities in the emerging Latin America region and elsewhere throughout the world.\n\nIn 2011 MSA was awarded several contracts for a total of 5,000 Self-Contained Breathing Apparatus from the Chilean National Firefighters Council. Because of their confidence in MSA, they placed an order for helmets and other related equipment as well.\n\nMSA 2011 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n7\n\nMSA EMERGING MARKETS: CHILE", + "recall": 0.9619047619047619, + "true_md": "MSA EMERGING MARKETS: CHILE\n\nCHILE h\n\n## In Chile, Protecting the Men and Women of the Chilean National Firefighters Council\n\nHowever, having already seen first hand the advantages of MSA’s products and service, the Council once again selected MSA, purchasing an additional 4,000 Air Masks, as well as fire helmets and related equipment.\n\nThe fire service is a key customer segment for MSA all around the world. Although recently weakened in some regions due to economic challenges, this market began to show signs of renewed strength in 2011. This was especially true in Latin America, and perhaps no other 2011 “win” better symbolizes MSA perseverance than our winning the confidence of the Chilean National Firefighters Council. \n\nNo wonder that MSA Chairman John Ryan III, who helped to establish MSA’s presence in Chile back in the 1970s, referred to this as a “breakthrough order.” Not only does it demonstrate the value of perseverance and the ultimate reward of a superior o ff ering, it positions MSA well for future opportunities in the emerging Latin America region and elsewhere throughout the world.\n\nThe Chilean National Firefighters Council, a collection of more than 300 fire departments throughout the country, had been served exclusively by a safety products competitor for decades. Nevertheless, MSA’s sales team prepared a very competitive bid emphasizing the many benefits of a relationship with MSA: an industry-leading Self-Contained Breathing Apparatus (SCBA) design with chemical-biological-radiological-nuclear protection; ongoing training; and access to a responsive service organization located “in country,” with engineering expertise to meet the specific needs of fire service customers.\n\nIn January, the Council announced that MSA had been granted an order for 1,000 FireHawk® M7 Air Masks. Another request for proposal later in the year was met with an even more challenging situation, with the incumbent competitor aggressively fighting for the business.\n\nIn 2011 MSA was awarded several contracts for a total of 5,000 Self-Contained Breathing Apparatus from the Chilean National Firefighters Council. Because of their confidence in MSA, they placed an order for helmets and other related equipment as well.\n\nMSA 2011 ANNUAL REPORT 7" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9133923581969577, + "doc_id": "d9655c6ba5f7e6db0d04deadfc7e3efc4ef1a0d205ae01d463f5689a6357272a", + "edit_distance": 0.4367015098722416, + "f1_score": 0.9765990639625584, + "meteor": 0.9547903625409929, + "precision": 0.978125, + "pred_md": "NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\nUnrecognized stock-based compensation expense at December 31, 2013 related to stock-option plans was $11 million (2012 -$11 million), and will be recorded in net income over the next four years as the options vest.\n\n## Restricted S hare Units\n\n## RSU Plan\n\nThe RSU plan allows employees, officers and directors to participate in the growth and development of Rogers. Under the terms of the plan, RSUs are issued to the participant and the units issued cliff vest over a period of up to three years from the grant date.\n\nOn the vesting date, we will redeem all of the participants' RSUs in cash or by issuing one Class B Non-Voting share for each RSU. We have reserved 4,000,000 Class B Non-Voting shares for issue under this plan. We granted 871,988 RSUs in 2013 (2012 - 721,005).\n\n## Performance RSUs\n\nWe granted 232,220 performance-based RSUs in 2013 (2012 -172,779) to certain key executives. The number of units that vest and will be paid three years from the grant date will be within 50% to 150% of the initial number granted based upon the achievement of certain annual and cumulative three-year non-market targets.\n\n## Summary of RSUs\n\nThe table below is a summary of the RSUs outstanding, including performance RSUs.\n\nUnrecognized stock-based compensation expense at December 31, 2013 related to these RSUs was $42 million (2012 - $37 million) and will be recorded in net income over the next three years as the RSUs vest.\n\n## Deferred S hare Unit Plan\n\nThe DSU plan allows directors and certain key executives to elect to receive certain types of compensation in DSUs, which are classified as a liability on the consolidated statements of financial position.\n\nWe granted 103,990 DSUs in 2013 (2012 - 115,964). At December 31, 2013, 700,912 DSUs (2012 -741,423) were outstanding. Unrecognized stock-based compensation expense at December 31, 2013, related to these DSUs was $2 million (2012 - nil) and will be recorded in net income over the next three years as the executive DSUs vest. All other DSUs are fully vested.\n\n## Employee S hare Accumulation Plan\n\nParticipation in the plan is voluntary. Employees can contribute up to 10% of their regular earnings through payroll deductions (up to an annual maximum of $25,000). The plan administrator purchases our Class B Non-Voting shares on a monthly basis on the open market on behalf of the employee. At the end of each month, we make a contribution of 25% to 50% of the employee's contribution that month, and the plan administrator uses this amount to purchase additional shares on behalf of the employee. We record our contributions made as a compensation expense.\n\n122\n\nROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\nCompensation expense related to the employee share accumulation plan was $30 million in 2013 (2012 - $26 million), which we included in employee salaries and benefits.\n\n## Hedging of S tock-Based Compensation\n\nWe entered into Equity Derivatives to hedge a portion of our stockbased compensation expense in 2013 (see note 20) and recognized a $8 million loss in stock-based compensation expense for these derivatives.\n\n## Assumptions\n\nSignificant management estimates are used to determine the fair value of stock options, RSUs and DSUs. The table below shows the weightedaverage fair value of stock options granted during the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012, and the principal assumptions used in applying the Black-Scholes model for non performance-based options and trinomial option pricing models for performance-based options to determine their fair value at grant date:\n\nVolatility has been estimated based on the actual trading statistics of our Class B Non-Voting shares.\n\n## NOTE 25: RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS\n\n## Controlling S hareholder\n\nOur ultimate controlling shareholder is the Rogers Control Trust (the Trust) which holds voting control of Rogers. The beneficiaries of the Trust are members of the Rogers family. Certain directors, senior executives and corporate officers of Rogers represent the Rogers family.\n\nWe entered into certain transactions with the ultimate controlling shareholder and private Rogers' family holding companies controlled by the Trust. These transactions, as summarized below, were recorded at the amount agreed to by the related parties and are subject to the terms and conditions of formal agreements approved by the Audit Committee.\n\n## Transactions with Key Management Personnel\n\nKey management personnel include the directors and our most senior corporate officers who are primarily responsible for planning, directing and controlling our business activities.\n\n## Compensation\n\nThe compensation expense for key management for employee services was included in employee salaries and benefits as follows:", + "recall": 0.9750778816199377, + "true_md": "NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\nUnrecognized stock-based compensation expense at December 31, 2013 related to stock-option plans was $11 million (2012 – $11 million), and will be recorded in net income over the next four years as the options vest.\n\nThe RSU plan allows employees, officers and directors to participate in the growth and development of Rogers. Under the terms of the plan, RSUs are issued to the participant and the units issued cliff vest over a period of up to three years from the grant date.\n\nRSU Plan\n\nOn the vesting date, we will redeem all of the participants’ RSUs in cash or by issuing one Class B Non-Voting share for each RSU. We have reserved 4,000,000 Class B Non-Voting shares for issue under this plan. We granted 871,988 RSUs in 2013 (2012 – 721,005).\n\nPerformance RSUs\n\nWe granted 232,220 performance-based RSUs in 2013 (2012 – 172,779) to certain key executives. The number of units that vest and will be paid three years from the grant date will be within 50% to 150% of the initial number granted based upon the achievement of certain annual and cumulative three-year non-market targets.\n\nSummary of RSUs\n\nThe table below is a summary of the RSUs outstanding, including performance RSUs.\n\nUnrecognized stock-based compensation expense at December 31, 2013 related to these RSUs was $42 million (2012 – $37 million) and will be recorded in net income over the next three years as the RSUs vest.\n\nThe DSU plan allows directors and certain key executives to elect to receive certain types of compensation in DSUs, which are classified as a liability on the consolidated statements of financial position.\n\nWe granted 103,990 DSUs in 2013 (2012 – 115,964). At December 31, 2013, 700,912 DSUs (2012 – 741,423) were outstanding. Unrecognized stock-based compensation expense at December 31, 2013, related to these DSUs was $2 million (2012 – nil) and will be recorded in net income over the next three years as the executive DSUs vest. All other DSUs are fully vested.\n\nParticipation in the plan is voluntary. Employees can contribute up to 10% of their regular earnings through payroll deductions (up to an annual maximum of $25,000). The plan administrator purchases our Class B Non-Voting shares on a monthly basis on the open market on behalf of the employee. At the end of each month, we make a contribution of 25% to 50% of the employee’s contribution that month, and the plan administrator uses this amount to purchase additional shares on behalf of the employee. We record our contributions made as a compensation expense.\n\nThe compensation expense for key management for employee services was included in employee salaries and benefits as follows:\n\nKey management personnel include the directors and our most senior corporate officers who are primarily responsible for planning, directing and controlling our business activities.\n\nWe entered into certain transactions with the ultimate controlling shareholder and private Rogers’ family holding companies controlled by the Trust. These transactions, as summarized below, were recorded at the amount agreed to by the related parties and are subject to the terms and conditions of formal agreements approved by the Audit Committee.\n\nOur ultimate controlling shareholder is the Rogers Control Trust (the Trust) which holds voting control of Rogers. The beneficiaries of the Trust are members of the Rogers family. Certain directors, senior executives and corporate officers of Rogers represent the Rogers family.\n\nVolatility has been estimated based on the actual trading statistics of our Class B Non-Voting shares.\n\nSignificant management estimates are used to determine the fair value of stock options, RSUs and DSUs. The table below shows the weighted- average fair value of stock options granted during the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012, and the principal assumptions used in applying the Black-Scholes model for non performance-based options and trinomial option pricing models for performance-based options to determine their fair value at grant date:\n\nWe entered into Equity Derivatives to hedge a portion of our stock- based compensation expense in 2013 (see note 20) and recognized a $8 million loss in stock-based compensation expense for these derivatives.\n\nCompensation expense related to the employee share accumulation plan was $30 million in 2013 (2012 – $26 million), which we included in employee salaries and benefits.\n\n## Hedging of S tock-Based Compensation\n\n## Assumptions\n\n## NOTE 25: RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS\n\n## Controlling S hareholder\n\n## Transactions with Key Management Personnel\n\nCompensation\n\n## Employee S hare Accumulation Plan\n\n## Deferred S hare Unit Plan\n\n## Restricted S hare Units\n\n122 ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9582964082157419, + "doc_id": "74e9201af285ff6a593ad63c18f5221f5daf3fa09f993edb6b6eb711b7702e65", + "edit_distance": 0.8248847926267281, + "f1_score": 0.9736070381231673, + "meteor": 0.7560272303579931, + "precision": 0.9822485207100592, + "pred_md": "Loans (Nonconsolidated)\n\nSMBC\n\n## Risk-Monitored Loans\n\n## Notes: Definition of risk-monitored loan categories\n\n- 1. Bankrupt loans: Credits for which accrued interest is not accounted in revenue; credits extended to borrowers that are undergoing bankruptcy, corporate reorganization and rehabilitation proceedings or debtors receiving orders of disposition by suspension of business at bill clearinghouses\n- 2. Non-accrual loans: Credits for which accrued interest is not accounted in revenue; credits, excluding loans to bankrupt borrowers and loans with grace for interest payment to assist in corporate reorganization or to support business\n- 3. Past due loans (3 months or more): Loans with payment of principal or interest in arrears for more than 3 months, calculated from the day following the contractual due date, excluding borrowers in categories 1. and 2.\n- 4. Restructured loans: Loans to borrowers in severe financial condition given certain favorable terms and conditions to assist in corporate rehabilitation or to support business, excluding borrowers in categories 1. through 3.\n\n## Problem Assets Based on the Financial Reconstruction Law\n\nNotes:\n\nDefinition of problem asset categories\n\nThese assets are disclosed based on the provisions of Article 7 of the Financial Reconstruction Law (Law No. 132 of 1998) and classified into the 4 categories based on financial position and business performance of obligors in accordance with Article 6 of the Law. Assets in question include private placement bonds, loans and bills discounted, foreign exchanges, accrued interest, and suspense payment in 'other assets,' customers' liabilities for acceptances and guarantees, and securities lent under the loan for consumption or leasing agreements.\n\n- 1. Bankrupt and quasi-bankrupt assets: Credits to borrowers undergoing bankruptcy, corporate reorganization, and rehabilitation proceedings, as well as claims of a similar nature\n- 2. Doubtful assets: Credits for which final collection of principal and interest in line with original agreements is highly improbable due to deterioration of financial position and business performance, but not insolvency of the borrower\n- 3. Substandard loans: Past due loans (3 months or more) and restructured loans, excluding 1. and 2.\n- 4. Normal assets: Credits to borrowers with good business performance and in financial standing without identified problems and not classified into the 3 categories above\n\n## Problem Assets Based on the Financial Reconstruction Law, and Risk-Monitored Loans\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n169", + "recall": 0.9651162790697675, + "true_md": "Loans (Nonconsolidated)\n\nSMBC\n\n## Risk-Monitored Loans\n\n## Problem Assets Based on the Financial Reconstruction Law, and Risk-Monitored Loans\n\nNotes: Definition of risk-monitored loan categories\n\nNotes: Definition of problem asset categories\n\nThese assets are disclosed based on the provisions of Article 7 of the Financial Reconstruction Law (Law No. 132 of 1998) and classified into the 4 categories based on financial position and business performance of obligors in accordance with Article 6 of the Law. Assets in question include private place- ment bonds, loans and bills discounted, foreign exchanges, accrued interest, and suspense payment in “other assets,” customers’ liabilities for acceptances and guarantees, and securities lent under the loan for consumption or leasing agreements.\n\n- 1. Bankrupt and quasi-bankrupt assets: Credits to borrowers undergoing bankruptcy, corporate reorganization, and rehabilitation proceedings, as well as claims of a similar nature\n\n- 2. Doubtful assets: Credits for which final collection of principal and interest in line with original agreements is highly improbable due to deterioration of financial position and business performance, but not insolvency of the borrower\n\n- 3. Substandard loans: Past due loans (3 months or more) and restructured loans, excluding 1. and 2.\n\n- 4. Normal assets: Credits to borrowers with good business performance and in financial standing without identified problems and not classified into the 3 categories above\n\n- 1. Bankrupt loans: Credits for which accrued interest is not accounted in revenue; credits extended to borrowers that are undergoing bankruptcy, corporate reorganization and rehabilitation proceedings or debtors receiving orders of disposition by suspension of business at bill clearinghouses\n\n- 2. Non-accrual loans: Credits for which accrued interest is not accounted in revenue; credits, excluding loans to bankrupt borrowers and loans with grace for interest payment to assist in corporate reorganization or to support business\n\n- 3. Past due loans (3 months or more): Loans with payment of principal or interest in arrears for more than 3 months, calculated from the day following the contractual due date, excluding borrowers in categories 1. and 2.\n\n- 4. Restructured loans: Loans to borrowers in severe financial condition given certain favorable terms and conditions to assist in corporate rehabilitation or to support business, excluding borrowers in categories 1. through 3.\n\nSMFG 2011 169\n\n## Problem Assets Based on the Financial Reconstruction Law" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9439768321090002, + "doc_id": "fc81591b30bdc2ae03137b01b1643a43b17a89cce7d3a87cccc2523408e0cf7d", + "edit_distance": 0.19554455445544555, + "f1_score": 0.993103448275862, + "meteor": 0.981078828505324, + "precision": 0.9953917050691244, + "pred_md": "## Doing the right thing\n\nAt Killam we are investing in our communities, as well as our real estate. We believe that giving back to the community is an important part of being a responsible corporate citizen.\n\n## Supporting Killam Families with Scholarship program\n\nKillam's Scholarship Program awards three $3,000 scholarships to children or grandchildren of Killam employees on an annual basis. After a competitive application process in 2013, Bradley Price, Hayley Gillis and Georgia Telman were selected for demonstrating an outstanding combination of academic excellence and community involvement.\n\n## Home away from Home\n\nOn an annual basis, Killam donates six fully furnished apartments to hospitals in Halifax, Saint John, Moncton, Fredericton and Charlottetown. These units are used by families of patients who need to travel away from home for health care.\n\n## red Cross\n\nKillam has partnered with the Red Cross in many of its core markets. The Red Cross is on hand to help when emergencies and disasters impact communities. Over the last six years, Killam has provided the Red Cross with financial assistance to fund their operations. In return, the Red Cross has provided emergency training to Killam staff, helping us react effectively to emergencies when required.\n\n## Supporting Higher education in atlantic Canada\n\nOn an annual basis, Killam's board of directors join together to support a common charity or organization. During 2013 the board members together donated $100,000 to establish an endowment at Mount Allison University in Sackville, New Brunswick, providing an annual entrance scholarship to the university. Previous $100,000 board donations supported the Boys and Girls Clubs of Prince Edward Island, the YMCA of Greater Halifax/Dartmouth and Saint Mary's University in Halifax.\n\n20\n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013\n\n## Caring for Kids\n\nDuring 2013 Killam organized the Caring for Kids Lottery, a fundraiser in support of the IWK Health Centre in Halifax. The IWK Health Centre provides quality medical care to women, children, youth and families in the Maritime provinces. Killam tenants supported the cause through the purchase of lottery tickets for the chance to win free rent for a year. All funds raised went directly to the IWK Foundation.", + "recall": 0.9908256880733946, + "true_md": "## Doing the right thing\n\nAt Killam we are investing in our communities, as well as our real estate. We believe that giving back to the community is an important part of being a responsible corporate citizen.\n\nKillam’s Scholarship Program awards three $3,000 scholarships to children or grandchildren of Killam employees on an annual basis. After a competitive application process in 2013, Bradley Price, Hayley Gillis and Georgia Telman were selected for demonstrating an outstanding combination of academic excellence and community involvement.\n\nOn an annual basis, Killam donates six fully furnished apartments to hospitals in Halifax, Saint John, Moncton, Fredericton and Charlottetown. These units are used by families of patients who need to travel away from home for health care. \n\nKillam has partnered with the Red Cross in many of its core markets. The Red Cross is on hand to help when emergencies and disasters impact communities. Over the last six years, Killam has provided the Red Cross with financial assistance to fund their operations. In return, the Red Cross has provided emergency training to Killam staff, helping us react effectively to emergencies when required. \n\nOn an annual basis, Killam’s board of directors join together to support a common charity or organization. During 2013 the board members together donated $100,000 to establish an endowment at Mount Allison University in Sackville, New Brunswick, providing an annual entrance scholarship to the university. Previous $100,000 board donations supported the Boys and Girls Clubs of Prince Edward Island, the YMCA of Greater Halifax/Dartmouth and Saint Mary’s University in Halifax.\n\nDuring 2013 Killam organized the Caring for Kids Lottery, a fundraiser in support of the IWK Health Centre in Halifax. The IWK Health Centre provides quality medical care to women, children, youth and families in the Maritime provinces. Killam tenants supported the cause through the purchase of lottery tickets for the chance to win free rent for a year. All funds raised went directly to the IWK Foundation. \n\n## Caring for Kids\n\n## Supporting Higher education in atlantic Canada\n\n## red Cross\n\n## Home away from Home\n\n## Supporting Killam Families with Scholarship program\n\n20 Killam ProPerties inc | 2013" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9049946061382921, + "doc_id": "abd8df0b30f3dd1d1da59f26ecace8b0fa0d08f3065fc7072f696e3ed19e34ff", + "edit_distance": 0.49292452830188677, + "f1_score": 0.947839046199702, + "meteor": 0.7448450064635025, + "precision": 0.9724770642201835, + "pred_md": "## b . Foreign currency translation\n\n## (i) Transactions and balances\n\nForeign currency transactions are translated into the respective functional currencies of the Group entities at exchange rates on the dates of the transactions. Foreign exchange gains and losses resulting from the settlement of such transactions and from the translation at yearend exchange rates of monetary assets and liabilities denominated in foreign currencies are recognised in the profit or loss, except when they are deferred in equity as qualifying cash flow hedges and qualifying net investment hedges or are attributable to part of the net investment in a foreign operation.\n\nTranslation differences on assets and liabilities carried at fair value are reported as part of the fair value gain or loss. Translation differences on non-monetary assets and liabilities such as equities held at fair value through profit or loss are recognised in profit or loss as part of the fair value gain or loss. Translation differences on non-monetary assets are included in the fair value reserve in equity.\n\nExchange gains and losses which arise on balances between Group entities are taken to the foreign currency translation reserve where the intra-group balances are in substance part of the Group's net investment. Where as a result of a change in circumstances, a previously designated intra-group balance is intended to be settled in the foreseeable future, the intra-group balance is no longer regarded as part of net investment. The exchange differences for such balance previously taken directly to the foreign currency translation reserves are recognised in the profit or loss.\n\n## (ii) Foreign operations\n\nThe results and financial position of all the Group entities (none of which has the currency of a hyperinflationary economy) that have a functional currency different from the presentation currency are translated into the presentation currency as follows:\n\n- 〉 the assets and liabilities of the foreign operations, including goodwill and fair value adjustments arising on acquisition, are translated at the year-end exchange rate;\n- 〉 the income and expenses of foreign operations are translated at average exchange rates (unless this is not a reasonable approximation of the cumulative effect of the rate prevailing on the transaction dates, in which case income and expenses are translated at the dates of the transactions); and\n- 〉 foreign currency differences are recognised in other comprehensive income, and presented in the foreign currency translation reserve.\n\n## c . Revenue\n\nRevenue is measured at the fair value of the consideration received or receivable. Sales revenue represents the net proceeds receivable from the buyer.\n\n## Gold and silver sales\n\nGold and silver revenue is recognised when the refinery process has been finalised at which point the sale transaction to a third party is also completed. Transportation and refinery costs are expensed when incurred.\n\n## d . Income tax\n\nIncome tax expense comprises current and deferred tax. Current tax and deferred tax is recognised in profit or loss except to the extent that it relates to a business combination, or items recognised directly in equity or in other comprehensive income.\n\nCurrent tax is the expected tax payable or receivable on the taxable income or loss for the year, using tax rates enacted or substantively enacted at the reporting date, and any adjustment to tax payable in respect of previous years. Deferred tax is provided using the liability method, providing for temporary differences between the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities for financial reporting purposes and the amounts used for taxation purposes. The amount of deferred tax provided is based on the expected manner of realisation or settlement of the carrying amount of assets and liabilities, using tax rates enacted or substantively enacted at the reporting date.\n\nA deferred tax asset is recognised for unused tax losses, tax credits and deductible temporary differences, to the extent that it is probable that future taxable profits will be available against which they can be utilised. Deferred tax assets are reviewed at each reporting date and are reduced to the extent that it is no longer probable that the related tax benefit will be realised.\n\nDeferred tax is not recognised for:\n\n- 〉 temporary differences on the initial recognition of assets or liabilities in a transaction that is not a business combination and that affects neither accounting nor taxable profit or loss;\n- 〉 temporary differences related to investments in subsidiaries where the Company is able to control the timing of the reversal of the temporary differences and it is probable that they will not reverse in the foreseeable future; and\n- 〉 taxable temporary differences arising on the initial recognition of goodwill.\n\n69\n\nNotes to the Financial Statements\n\nDeferred tax assets and liabilities are offset if there is a legally enforceable right to offset current tax liabilities and assets, and they relate to income taxes levied by the same tax authority on the same taxable entity.\n\nAdditional income tax expenses that arise from the distribution of cash dividends are recognised at the same time that the liability to pay the related dividend is recognised.\n\n## Tax consolidation\n\nThe Company and its wholly-owned Australian resident entities formed a tax-consolidation group with effect from 1 July 2003 and are therefore taxed as a single entity from that date. The head entity within the tax-consolidation group is Kingsgate Consolidated Limited.\n\nCurrent tax expense or benefit, deferred tax assets and deferred tax liabilities arising from temporary differences of the members of the tax-consolidation group are recognised in the separate financial statements of the members of the tax-consolidation group using the 'stand alone taxpayer' approach by reference to the carrying amounts in the separate financial statements of each entity and the tax values applying under tax consolidation.\n\nCurrent tax assets or liabilities and deferred tax assets arising from unused tax losses assumed by the head entity from the subsidiaries in the tax-consolidation group, are recognised as amounts receivable or payable to other entities in the tax-consolidation group in conjunction with any tax funding agreement amounts.\n\nThe Company recognises deferred tax assets arising from unused tax losses of the tax-consolidation group to the extent that it is probable that future taxable profits of the tax-consolidation group will be available against which the asset can be utilised.\n\n## Tax funding and sharing agreements\n\nThe members of the tax-consolidation group have entered into a funding agreement that sets out the funding obligations of members of the tax-consolidation group in respect of tax amounts. The tax funding arrangements require payments to or from the head entity equal to the current tax liability or asset assumed by the head entity and any deferred tax asset assumed by the head entity, resulting in the head entity recognising an intra-group receivable or payable in the separate financial statements of the members of the tax-consolidation group equal in amount to the tax liability or asset assumed. The intra-group receivables or payables are at call.\n\ncontinued\n\nu\n\nNotes to the Financial Statements", + "recall": 0.9244186046511628, + "true_md": "Notes to the Financial Statements 69\n\n## c . Revenue\n\n## Gold and silver sales\n\n## d . Income tax\n\n## Tax consolidation\n\n## b . Foreign currency translation\n\n## (i) Transactions and balances\n\n## (ii) Foreign operations\n\n## Tax funding and sharing agreements\n\nForeign currency transactions are translated into the respective functional currencies of the Group entities at exchange rates on the dates of the transactions. Foreign exchange gains and losses resulting from the settlement of such transactions and from the translation at year- end exchange rates of monetary assets and liabilities denominated in foreign currencies are recognised in the profit or loss, except when they are deferred in equity as qualifying cash flow hedges and qualifying net investment hedges or are attributable to part of the net investment in a foreign operation.\n\nRevenue is measured at the fair value of the consideration received or receivable. Sales revenue represents the net proceeds receivable from the buyer. \n\nGold and silver revenue is recognised when the refinery process has been finalised at which point the sale transaction to a third party is also completed. Transportation and refinery costs are expensed when incurred. \n\nTranslation differences on assets and liabilities carried at fair value are reported as part of the fair value gain or loss. Translation differences on non-monetary assets and liabilities such as equities held at fair value through profit or loss are recognised in profit or loss as part of the fair value gain or loss. Translation differences on non-monetary assets are included in the fair value reserve in equity.\n\nExchange gains and losses which arise on balances between Group entities are taken to the foreign currency translation reserve where the intra-group balances are in substance part of the Group’s net investment. Where as a result of a change in circumstances, a previously desig- nated intra-group balance is intended to be settled in the foreseeable future, the intra-group balance is no longer regarded as part of net investment. The exchange differences for such balance previously taken directly to the foreign currency translation reserves are recognised in the profit or loss. \n\nThe results and financial position of all the Group entities (none of which has the currency of a hyperinflationary economy) that have a functional currency different from the presenta- tion currency are translated into the presenta- tion currency as follows:\n\nIncome tax expense comprises current and deferred tax. Current tax and deferred tax is recognised in profit or loss except to the extent that it relates to a business combination, or items recognised directly in equity or in other comprehensive income.\n\nCurrent tax is the expected tax payable or receivable on the taxable income or loss for the year, using tax rates enacted or substantively enacted at the reporting date, and any adjust- ment to tax payable in respect of previous years. Deferred tax is provided using the liability \n\nment to tax payable in respect of previous years. Deferred tax is provided using the liability method, providing for temporary differences between the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities for financial reporting purposes and the amounts used for taxation purposes. The amount of deferred tax provided is based on the expected manner of realisation or settlement of the carrying amount of assets and liabilities, using tax rates enacted or substantively enacted at the reporting date. \n\nA deferred tax asset is recognised for unused tax losses, tax credits and deductible temporary differences, to the extent that it is probable that future taxable profits will be available against which they can be utilised. Deferred tax assets are reviewed at each reporting date and are reduced to the extent that it is no longer prob- able that the related tax benefit will be realised.\n\nDeferred tax is not recognised for:\n\nThe members of the tax-consolidation group have entered into a funding agreement that sets out the funding obligations of members of the tax-consolidation group in respect of tax amounts. The tax funding arrangements require payments to or from the head entity equal to the current tax liability or asset assumed by the head entity and any deferred tax asset assumed by the head entity, resulting in the head entity recognising an intra-group receivable or payable in the separate financial statements of the members of the tax-consolidation group equal in amount to the tax liability or asset assumed. The intra-group receivables or payables are at call.\n\nDeferred tax assets and liabilities are offset if there is a legally enforceable right to offset current tax liabilities and assets, and they relate to income taxes levied by the same tax authority on the same taxable entity.\n\nAdditional income tax expenses that arise from the distribution of cash dividends are recognised at the same time that the liability to pay the related dividend is recognised.\n\nThe Company and its wholly-owned Australian resident entities formed a tax-consolidation group with effect from 1 July 2003 and are therefore taxed as a single entity from that date. The head entity within the tax-consolidation \n\ntherefore taxed as a single entity from that date. The head entity within the tax-consolidation group is Kingsgate Consolidated Limited.\n\nCurrent tax expense or benefit, deferred tax assets and deferred tax liabilities arising from temporary differences of the members of the tax-consolidation group are recognised in the separate financial statements of the members of the tax-consolidation group using the “stand alone taxpayer” approach by reference to the carrying amounts in the separate financial statements of each entity and the tax values applying under tax consolidation.\n\nCurrent tax assets or liabilities and deferred tax assets arising from unused tax losses assumed by the head entity from the subsidiaries in the tax-consolidation group, are recognised as amounts receivable or payable to other entities in the tax-consolidation group in conjunction with any tax funding agreement amounts.\n\nThe Company recognises deferred tax assets arising from unused tax losses of the tax-consoli- dation group to the extent that it is probable that future taxable profits of the tax-consolida- tion group will be available against which the asset can be utilised.\n\n- 〉 the assets and liabilities of the foreign opera- tions, including goodwill and fair value adjustments arising on acquisition, are translated at the year-end exchange rate;\n\n- 〉 the income and expenses of foreign opera- tions are translated at average exchange rates (unless this is not a reasonable approxi- mation of the cumulative effect of the rate prevailing on the transaction dates, in which case income and expenses are translated at the dates of the transactions); and \n\n- 〉 foreign currency differences are recognised in other comprehensive income, and presented in the foreign currency translation reserve.\n\n- 〉 taxable temporary differences arising on the initial recognition of goodwill.\n\n- 〉 temporary differences related to invest- ments in subsidiaries where the Company is able to control the timing of the reversal of the temporary differences and it is probable that they will not reverse in the foreseeable future; and\n\n- 〉 temporary differences on the initial recogni- tion of assets or liabilities in a transaction that is not a business combination and that affects neither accounting nor taxable profit or loss;\n\nNotes t o the Financial Statements\n\ncontinued u" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9285354683992723, + "doc_id": "c0ef0bde4cde7525cd69027d49c0ee14f7547554fe570cce70c87bf2acc2dd21", + "edit_distance": 0.1320754716981132, + "f1_score": 0.9600000000000002, + "meteor": 0.9541117310558903, + "precision": 0.9836065573770492, + "pred_md": "87\n\nNotes to the Financial Statements\n\n## Capitalised borrowing costs\n\nIncluded in mine buildings, plant and equipment is an amount of $851,000 and in exploration is an amount of $4,112,000 that represents borrowing costs capitalised during the year ($6,939,000 during the year ended 30 June 2012). The capitalisation rate used to determine the amount of borrowing costs to be capitalised is the weighted average interest rate applicable to the entity's outstanding borrowings during the year, in this case 10.7% (2012: 9.7%).\n\ncontinued\n\nu\n\nNotes to the Financial Statements", + "recall": 0.9375, + "true_md": "Notes to the Financial Statements 87\n\nNotes t o the Financial Statements\n\n## Capitalised borrowing costs\n\nIncluded in mine buildings, plant and equipment is an amount of $851,000 and in exploration is an amount of $4,112,000 that represents borrowing costs capitalised during the year ($6,939,000 during the year ended 30 June 2012). The capitalisation rate used to determine the amount of borrowing costs to be capitalised is the weighted average interest rate applicable to the entity’s outstanding borrowings during the year, in this case 10.7% (2012: 9.7%).\n\ncontinued u" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8052466318925323, + "doc_id": "f88bb566605396dd4c8cf36bc6a2026a65508c2d82fc35c9d21814f83b5666df", + "edit_distance": 0.15671641791044777, + "f1_score": 0.9318181818181818, + "meteor": 0.891574277460337, + "precision": 0.9318181818181818, + "pred_md": "## notes to the consolidated Financial statements\n\nD\n\nollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except share and per share amounts)\n\n## 5. Investment Properties (continued)\n\nThe investment property segment defined as Other consists of one commercial property of which the Company has a 50% ownership. The property has a fair value of $2.2 million (December 31, 2012 - $2.1 million).\n\nIPUC includes land held for future development, which is recorded at a fair value of $2.8 million (December 31, 2012 - $5.2 million) and properties under construction of $21.6 million (December 31, 2012 - $52.7 million). Fair value cannot be reliably determined for properties under construction as the projects are in the early stages of development and therefore IPUC is recorded at cost.\n\n## Sensitivity Analysis\n\nThe significant unobservable inputs used in the fair value measurements categorized within Level 3 of the fair value hierarchy include cap-rates, vacancy rates and management fee rates. Investment property valuations are most sensitive to changes in the cap-rate. The cap-rate assumptions for the investment properties are included in the following table:\n\nThe quantitative sensitivity analysis shown below illustrates the value increase or decrease in the Company's portfolio of properties given the change in the noted input.\n\n80\n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013", + "recall": 0.9318181818181818, + "true_md": "## Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except share and per share amounts)\n\nNotes to the Consolidated Financial Statements Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except share and per share amounts)\n\n## 5. Investment Properties (continued)\n\n## Sensitivity Analysis\n\nThe investment property segment defined as Other consists of one commercial property of which the Company has a 50% ownership. The property has a fair value of $2.2 million (December 31, 2012 ‑ $2.1 million).\n\nIPUC includes land held for future development, which is recorded at a fair value of $2.8 million (December 31, 2012 ‑ $5.2 million) and properties under construction of $21.6 million (December 31, 2012 ‑ $52.7 million). Fair value cannot be reliably determined for properties under construction as the projects are in the early stages of development and therefore IPUC is recorded at cost.\n\nThe significant unobservable inputs used in the fair value measurements categorized within Level 3 of the fair value hierarchy include cap‑rates, vacancy rates and management fee rates. Investment property valuations are most sensitive to changes in the cap‑rate. The cap‑rate assumptions for the investment properties are included in the following table:\n\nThe quantitative sensitivity analysis shown below illustrates the value increase or decrease in the Company’s portfolio of properties given the change in the noted input.\n\n80 Killam ProPerties inc | 2013" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9213724519373645, + "doc_id": "2423956c7842d6c17665bad6458277856d89ae3e5b55d28093c876099ef15431", + "edit_distance": 0.12274368231046931, + "f1_score": 0.972972972972973, + "meteor": 0.9448424275994691, + "precision": 0.9795918367346939, + "pred_md": "## 102\n\nNotes to the Financial Statements\n\n## 28. Financial risk management and instruments continued\n\nA change of 100 basis points ('bps'') in interest rate at the reporting date would have increased / (decreased) equity and profit or loss by the amounts shown below. This analysis assumes that all other variables, in particular foreign exchange rates, remain constant.\n\n## (b) Credit risk\n\nCredit risk arises from cash and cash equivalents, deposits with banks and financial institutions, as well as credit exposures to customers including, outstanding receivables and committed transactions.\n\nThe Group has no significant concentrations of credit risk. The sale of gold and other cash transactions are limited to counterparties with sound credit ratings.\n\nThe maximum exposure to credit risk is represented by the carrying value of the Group's financial assets in the statement of financial position. The maximum exposure to credit risk at reporting date was:\n\n## (c) Liquidity risk\n\nThe Group's liquidity requirements are based upon cash flow forecasts which are based upon forward production, operations, exploration and capital projections. Liquidity management, including debt / equity management, is carried out under policies approved by the Board and forecast material liquidity changes are discussed at Board meetings. The following table analyses the Company's financial assets and liabilities into relevant maturity groupings based on the remaining period at the reporting date. The amounts disclosed are the contractual undiscounted cash flows.\n\nwww.kingsgate.com.au", + "recall": 0.9664429530201343, + "true_md": "Notes to the Financial Statements 102\n\nFinancial risk management and instruments continued\n\n## 28. Financial risk management and instruments continued\n\nA change of 100 basis points (“bps”’) in interest rate at the reporting date would have increased / (decreased) equity and profit or loss by the amounts shown below. This analysis assumes that all other variables, in particular foreign exchange rates, remain constant. \n\nCredit risk arises from cash and cash equivalents, deposits with banks and financial institutions, as well as credit exposures to customers including, outstanding receivables and committed transactions.\n\nThe Group has no significant concentrations of credit risk. The sale of gold and other cash transactions are limited to counterparties with sound credit ratings.\n\nThe maximum exposure to credit risk is represented by the carrying value of the Group’s financial assets in the statement of financial position. The maximum exposure to credit risk at reporting date was:\n\n## (b) Credit risk\n\n## (c) Liquidity risk\n\nThe Group’s liquidity requirements are based upon cash flow forecasts which are based upon forward production, operations, exploration and capital projections. Liquidity management, including debt / equity management, is carried out under policies approved by the Board and forecast material liquidity changes are discussed at Board meetings. The following table analyses the Company’s financial assets and liabilities into relevant maturity groupings based on the remaining period at the reporting date. The amounts disclosed are the contractual undiscounted cash flows.\n\nwww.kingsgate.com.au" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "3dabc0777ef3fecee5e1f5e15b4e1fcd92b8c36a6446ae3eb376187ba275346b", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999530428249437, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Nordstrom, Inc. and Subsidiaries Exhibit Index\n\n*This exhibit is a management contract, compensatory plan or arrangement\n\n74", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## Nordstrom, Inc. and Subsidiaries Exhibit Index\n\n *This exhibit is a management contract, compensatory plan or arrangement\n\n74" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9214489281286409, + "doc_id": "20cc1ffa2b416f68ee22195d460d441de20880016c234014a395d77479a83914", + "edit_distance": 0.049441786283891544, + "f1_score": 0.9575757575757575, + "meteor": 0.9529627019519183, + "precision": 0.9723076923076923, + "pred_md": "26\n\n| ENVIRONMENTAL, HEALTH & SAFETY\n\n## INVESTING IN OUR WORLD AND OUR PEOPLE »\n\nAs we explore for and produce clean, affordable, abundant, American natural gas, we provide an important solution to our nation's energy challenges and its quest for energy independence. With at least a 200year supply of natural gas located right here in the U.S., this versatile fuel can be used to not only heat homes, create electricity and meet America's transportation needs, but also to fuel the country's future by creating jobs and stimulating local and national economies through investment and taxes.\n\n## Environmentally Friendly Operations\n\nAt Chesapeake, we realize that the way a great product is produced is as important as the product itself. For example, we have helped pioneer the use of multiwell padsites to drill up to 16 wells from a single location, greatly reducing our land and road use and overall environmental footprint. We use the latest horizontal and directional drilling technology to place wells at a safe distance from homes, schools and businesses. In addition, we build and maintain access roads and work to eliminate soil erosion near our sites, as well as restore local vegetation.\n\nWe implement advanced, modern protective measures known as Best Management Practices (BMPs) to help ensure energy development is conducted in an environmentally responsible manner. Procedures are implemented throughout our operations to protect freshwater aquifers and reduce environmental impacts. BMPs protect wildlife, air quality, water and landscapes as we work to develop vitally needed domestic energy sources.\n\nImplemented throughout the entire life cycle of a well, BMPs can be as simple as strategically placing a berm, or land barrier, on locations to control surface water runoff. Others involve cutting-edge operational technologies such as utilizing the most advanced techniques offered in drilling fluids, well casing and cement design. Regardless of complexity, all BMPs are based on the idea that the environmental footprint of\n\nenergy development should be as small and temporary as possible. These practices are continually evolving and further improving as Chesapeake and the industry develop new innovative techniques and approaches to business.\n\nIn addition to our BMPs, Chesapeake has also initiated several innovative internal programs focused on water recycling and greener hydraulic fracturing processes.\n\n## Aqua Renew ®\n\nCreated to meet the challenge of reducing our water usage, Chesapeake's Aqua Renew ® program uses state-of-the-art technology to recycle pro-\n\nduced water. Since the company's preliminary reclamation project in\n\n2006, our focus on water reuse and conservation has become a companywide endeavor, stretching from the Barnett Shale of North Texas to the Marcellus Shale of northern Pennsylvania.\n\nThe Aqua Renew program has yet to find a limit to how much recycled water could be used without compromising well production. In fact, our Marcellus Shale operations are treating and recycling virtually 100% of produced water (more than 10 million gallons per month) for reuse in our hydraulic fracturing operations. Properly conducted modern fracking is a highly engineered, controlled, sophisticated and safe procedure.\n\nWith such large volumes of recycled water, the company is seeing more than just environmental advantages. We estimate that this\n\nGreen operations - Chesapeake's Best Management Practices ensure our operations are as environmentally friendly as possible, while protecting our employees, neighbors and the areas where we operate.", + "recall": 0.9432835820895522, + "true_md": "26 | ENVIRONMENTAL, HEALTH & SAFETY\n\n## INVESTING IN OUR WORLD AND OUR PEOPLE »\n\nAs we explore for and produce clean, affordable, abundant, American natural gas, we provide an important solution to our nation’s energy challenges and its quest for energy independence. With at least a 200- year supply of natural gas located right here in the U.S., this versatile fuel can be used to not only heat homes, create electricity and meet America’s transportation needs, but also to fuel the country’s future by creating jobs and stimulating local and national economies through investment and taxes. \n\n## Environmentally Friendly Operations\n\nAt Chesapeake, we realize that the way a great product is produced is as important as the product itself. For example, we have helped pioneer the use of multiwell padsites to drill up to 16 wells from a single loca- tion, greatly reducing our land and road use and overall environmental footprint. We use the latest horizontal and directional drilling technology to place wells at a safe distance from homes, schools and businesses. In addition, we build and maintain access roads and work to eliminate soil erosion near our sites, as well as restore local vegetation. \n\nWe implement advanced, modern protective measures known as Best Management Practices (BMPs) to help ensure energy development is con- ducted in an environmentally responsible manner. Procedures are imple- mented throughout our operations to protect freshwater aquifers and reduce environmental impacts. BMPs protect wildlife, air quality, water and landscapes as we work to develop vitally needed domestic energy sources. \n\nImplemented throughout the entire life cycle of a well, BMPs can be as simple as strategically placing a berm, or land barrier, on locations to control surface water runoff. Others involve cutting-edge operational technologies such as utilizing the most advanced techniques offered in drilling fluids, well casing and cement design. Regardless of complex- ity, all BMPs are based on the idea that the environmental footprint of \n\nenergy development should be as small and temporary as possible. These practices are continually evolving and further improving as Chesapeake and the industry develop new innovative techniques and approaches to business. \n\nIn addition to our BMPs, Chesapeake has also initiated several innovative internal programs focused on water recycling and greener hydraulic fracturing processes. \n\n## Aqua Renew ®\n\nCreated to meet the challenge of reducing our water usage, Chesapeake’s Aqua Renew ® program uses state-of-the-art technology to recycle pro-\n\nduced water. Since the company’s preliminary reclamation project in \n\n2006, our focus on water reuse and conservation has become a company- wide endeavor, stretching from the Barnett Shale of North Texas to the Marcellus Shale of northern Pennsylvania. \n\nThe Aqua Renew program has yet to find a limit to how much recycled water could be used without compromising well production. \n\nIn fact, our Marcellus Shale operations are treating and recycling virtu- ally 100% of produced water (more than 10 million gallons per month) for reuse in our hydraulic fracturing operations. Properly conducted modern fracking is a highly engineered, controlled, sophisticated and safe procedure.\n\nWith such large volumes of recycled water, the company is see- ing more than just environmental advantages. We estimate that this \n\n## Green operations — Chesapeake’s Best Management Practices ensure our operations are as environmentally friendly as possible, while protecting our employees, neighbors and the areas where we operate." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8683103701625393, + "doc_id": "2ec760661a3e0c1baab2a2f96c55281ef6c94d6fee64420e3e8c5155a8aeeac6", + "edit_distance": 0.4453551912568306, + "f1_score": 0.9281767955801106, + "meteor": 0.9157106214563542, + "precision": 0.9491525423728814, + "pred_md": "## 3. Consolidated Capital Ratio\n\nSMFG's consolidated capital ratio as of March 31, 2011 was 16.63%, 1.61 percentage points higher than at March 31, 2010.\n\nTotal capital, which is the numerator in the capital ratio calculation equation, rose by ·304.6 billion year on year\n\nto ·8,432.8 billion. This was due mainly to recording of net income. Risk-adjusted assets, the denominator in the equation, decreased by ·3,390.7 billion year on year to ·50,693.6 billion due in part to a reduction in corporate exposures.\n\n## Consolidated Capital Ratio\n\n## 4. Dividend Policy\n\nIn view of the public nature of its business, SMFG has set a fundamental policy of increasing profit distribution stably and continuously through sustainable growth in enterprise value, while enhancing the Group's capital to maintain a sound financial position. SMFG aims for a dividend payout ratio of over 20% on a consolidated net income basis, and its fundamental policy is to distribute dividends from retained earnings twice a year in the form of an interim dividend and a yearend dividend. An interim dividend can be declared by the Board of Directors, with September 30 of each year as the recorded\n\n## 5. Deferred Tax Assets\n\nNet deferred tax assets decreased by ·77.8 billion from the end of the previous fiscal year to ·624.2 billion.\n\ndate, but the approval of shareholders at the annual general meeting is required to pay a yearend dividend.\n\nAfter taking into account the fiscal 2010 business performance, SMFG has decided to pay a term-end dividend of ·100 per share of common stock for the fiscal year.\n\nSMFG will employ its retained earnings to increase its enterprise value by aiming for top quality in strategic business areas, and establishing a solid financial base and corporate infrastructure enough to address the new financial regulations and competitive environment.\n\nSMFG takes a conservative approach to recognizing deferred tax assets in order to secure a sound financial position.\n\n## Deferred Tax Assets\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n25", + "recall": 0.9081081081081082, + "true_md": "## 3. Consolidated Capital Ratio\n\n## Consolidated Capital Ratio\n\n## 4. Dividend Policy\n\n## 5. Deferred Tax Assets\n\n## Deferred Tax Assets\n\nSMFG 2011 25\n\nto ¥8,432.8 billion. This was due mainly to recording of net income. Risk-adjusted assets, the denominator in the equation, decreased by ¥3,390.7 billion year on year to ¥50,693.6 billion due in part to a reduction in corporate exposures.\n\nSMFG’s consolidated capital ratio as of March 31, 2011 was 16.63%, 1.61 percentage points higher than at March 31, 2010.\n\nTotal capital, which is the numerator in the capital ratio calculation equation, rose by ¥304.6 billion year on year \n\nIn view of the public nature of its business, SMFG has set a fundamental policy of increasing profit distribution stably and continuously through sustainable growth in enterprise value, while enhancing the Group’s capital to maintain a sound financial position. SMFG aims for a dividend payout ratio of over 20% on a consolidated net income basis, and its funda- mental policy is to distribute dividends from retained earnings twice a year in the form of an interim dividend and a yearend dividend. An interim dividend can be declared by the Board of Directors, with September 30 of each year as the recorded \n\ndate, but the approval of shareholders at the annual general meeting is required to pay a yearend dividend. \n\nAfter taking into account the fiscal 2010 business perfor- mance, SMFG has decided to pay a term-end dividend of ¥100 per share of common stock for the fiscal year.\n\nSMFG will employ its retained earnings to increase its enterprise value by aiming for top quality in strategic busi- ness areas, and establishing a solid financial base and cor- porate infrastructure enough to address the new financial regulations and competitive environment.\n\nNet deferred tax assets decreased by ¥77.8 billion from the end of the previous fiscal year to ¥624.2 billion.\n\nSMFG takes a conservative approach to recognizing deferred tax assets in order to secure a sound financial position." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7819705625734845, + "doc_id": "5a331ae8d04b7e3712a4e7d4e89d7710fdb527e4d5e55164afc5e08dc9a02600", + "edit_distance": 0.27194860813704497, + "f1_score": 0.9784791965566715, + "meteor": 0.6561340858715694, + "precision": 0.9770773638968482, + "pred_md": "- · compliance with debt covenants, availability and cost of credit, changes in interest rates, and trends in debt repayment patterns, personal bankruptcies and bad debt write-offs, and\n- · the timing and amounts of share repurchases by the company, if any, or any share issuances by the company, including issuances associated with option exercises or other matters.\n\nThese and other factors, including those factors described in Item 1A: Risk Factors, could affect our financial results and cause actual results to differ materially from any forward-looking information we may provide. We undertake no obligation to update or revise any forward-looking statements to reflect subsequent events, new information or future circumstances.\n\n## SEC FILINGS\n\nWe file annual, quarterly and current reports, proxy statements and other documents with the Securities and Exchange Commission ('SEC'). All material we file with the SEC is publicly available at the SEC's Public Reference Room at 100 F Street NE, Washington, DC 20549. You may obtain information on the operation of the Public Reference Room by calling the SEC at 1-800-SEC-0330. In addition, the SEC maintains a website at www.sec.gov that contains reports, proxy and information statements and other information regarding issuers that file electronically with the SEC.\n\n## WEBSITE ACCESS\n\nOur website address is Nordstrom.com. Our annual and quarterly reports on Form 10-K and Form 10-Q (including related filings in eXtensible Business Reporting Language ('XBRL') format), current reports on Form 8-K, proxy statements, our executives' statements of changes in beneficial ownership of securities on Form 4 and amendments to those reports filed or furnished pursuant to Section 13(a) or 15 (d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended (the 'Exchange Act') are available for free on or through our website as soon as reasonably practicable after we electronically file the report with or furnish it to the SEC. Interested parties may also access a webcast of quarterly earnings conference calls and other financial events through our website.\n\n## CORPORATE GOVERNANCE\n\nWe have a long-standing commitment to upholding a high level of ethical standards. In addition, as the listing standards of the New York Stock Exchange ('NYSE') and the rules of the SEC require, we have adopted Codes of Business Conduct and Ethics for our employees, officers and directors ('Codes of Ethics') and Corporate Governance Guidelines. Our Codes of Ethics, Corporate Governance Guidelines and Committee Charters for the Audit, Compensation, Corporate Governance and Nominating, Finance and Technology Committees are posted on our website. Any amendments to these documents, or waivers of the requirements they contain, will also be available on our website.\n\nFor printed versions of these items or any other inquiries, please contact:\n\nNordstrom Investor Relations PO Box 2737 Seattle, Washington 98111 (206) 303-3200 invrelations@nordstrom.com\n\n## Item 1A. Risk Factors.\n\nOur business faces many risks. We believe the risks described below outline the items of most concern to us.\n\n## RISKS DUE TO STRATEGIC AND OPERATIONAL FACTORS\n\nOur customer strategy focuses on providing a seamless, cohesive and high-quality experience across all Nordstrom channels and failure to successfully execute our plans could negatively impact our current business and future profitability.\n\nWe are enhancing our customer shopping experience in our stores, online, and in mobile and social channels by pursuing a heightened focus on technology and ecommerce to fuel our growth. With the accelerated pace of change in the retail environment, we may not be able to meet our customers' changing expectations in how they shop in stores or through ecommerce. If we target the wrong opportunities, fail to make investments at the right time or pace, fail to make the best investments in the right channels or make an investment commitment significantly above or below our needs, it may result in the loss of our competitive position. If these technologies and investments do not perform as expected or are not seamlessly integrated, our profitability and growth could be adversely affected. In addition, if we do not maintain our current systems, we may see interruptions to our business and increased costs in order to bring our systems up to date.\n\n6", + "recall": 0.9798850574712644, + "true_md": "- • compliance with debt covenants, availability and cost of credit, changes in interest rates, and trends in debt repayment patterns, personal bankruptcies and bad debt write-offs, and • the timing and amounts of share repurchases by the company, if any, or any share issuances by the company, including issuances \n\n- personal bankruptcies and bad debt write-offs, and • the timing and amounts of share repurchases by the company, if any, or any share issuances by the company, including issuances associated with option exercises or other matters.\n\nThese and other factors, including those factors described in Item 1A: Risk Factors, could affect our financial results and cause actual results to differ materially from any forward-looking information we may provide. We undertake no obligation to update or revise any forward-looking statements to reflect subsequent events, new information or future circumstances.\n\nSEC FILINGS We file annual, quarterly and current reports, proxy statements and other documents with the Securities and Exchange Commission (“SEC”). All material we file with the SEC is publicly available at the SEC’s Public Reference Room at 100 F Street NE, Washington, DC 20549. You may obtain information on the operation of the Public Reference Room by calling the SEC at 1-800-SEC-0330. In addition, the SEC maintains a website at www.sec.gov that contains reports, proxy and information statements and other information regarding issuers that file electronically with the SEC.\n\nWEBSITE ACCESS Our website address is Nordstrom.com. Our annual and quarterly reports on Form 10-K and Form 10-Q (including related filings in eXtensible Business Reporting Language (“XBRL”) format), current reports on Form 8-K, proxy statements, our executives’ statements of changes in beneficial ownership of securities on Form 4 and amendments to those reports filed or furnished pursuant to Section 13(a) or 15 (d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended (the “Exchange Act”) are available for free on or through our website as soon as reasonably practicable after we electronically file the report with or furnish it to the SEC. Interested parties may also access a webcast of quarterly earnings conference calls and other financial events through our website.\n\nCORPORATE GOVERNANCE We have a long-standing commitment to upholding a high level of ethical standards. In addition, as the listing standards of the New York Stock Exchange (“NYSE”) and the rules of the SEC require, we have adopted Codes of Business Conduct and Ethics for our employees, officers and directors (“Codes of Ethics”) and Corporate Governance Guidelines. Our Codes of Ethics, Corporate Governance Guidelines and Committee Charters for the Audit, Compensation, Corporate Governance and Nominating, Finance and Technology Committees are posted on our website. Any amendments to these documents, or waivers of the requirements they contain, will also be available on our website.\n\nFor printed versions of these items or any other inquiries, please contact:\n\nNordstrom Investor Relations PO Box 2737 Seattle, Washington 98111 (206) 303-3200 invrelations@nordstrom.com\n\nOur business faces many risks. We believe the risks described below outline the items of most concern to us.\n\nfailure to successfully execute our plans could negatively impact our current business and future profitability. We are enhancing our customer shopping experience in our stores, online, and in mobile and social channels by pursuing a heightened focus on technology and ecommerce to fuel our growth. With the accelerated pace of change in the retail environment, we may not be able to meet our customers’ changing expectations in how they shop in stores or through ecommerce. If we target the wrong opportunities, fail to make investments at the right time or pace, fail to make the best investments in the right channels or make an investment commitment significantly above or below our needs, it may result in the loss of our competitive position. If these technologies and investments do not perform as expected or are not seamlessly integrated, our profitability and growth could be adversely affected. In addition, if we do not maintain our current systems, we may see interruptions to our business and increased costs in order to bring our systems up to date.\n\nOur customer strategy focuses on providing a seamless, cohesive and high-quality experience across all Nordstrom channels and failure to successfully execute our plans could negatively impact our current business and future profitability. We are enhancing our customer shopping experience in our stores, online, and in mobile and social channels by pursuing a heightened \n\n## RISKS DUE TO STRATEGIC AND OPERATIONAL FACTORS\n\n## Item 1A. Risk Factors.\n\n## CORPORATE GOVERNANCE We have a long-standing commitment to upholding a high level of ethical standards. In addition, as the listing standards of the New York\n\n## WEBSITE ACCESS Our website address is Nordstrom.com. Our annual and quarterly reports on Form 10-K and Form 10-Q (including related filings in\n\n## SEC FILINGS We file annual, quarterly and current reports, proxy statements and other documents with the Securities and Exchange Commission (“SEC”).\n\n6" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9344372310859256, + "doc_id": "0ef90754c44461177b7d29ca9074e8a6810bc4b96f1e7aab53051d0b5adfe38a", + "edit_distance": 0.49612403100775193, + "f1_score": 0.9717314487632509, + "meteor": 0.945208583511877, + "precision": 0.9892086330935251, + "pred_md": "horizontal wells drilled just to the Bossier may not always hold Haynesville rights. Therefore, Chesapeake and other producers have been drilling aggressively to hold all rights through the Haynesville before the initial three-year term of a typical lease expires. As a result, there has not been much drilling to the Bossier to date. However, once our leases are held by production (HBP) by Haynesville drilling (we expect to be largely complete with HBP drilling by year-end 2011 and completely finished by year-end 2012), we will begin developing the Bossier Shale more aggressively in 2013. In the Bossier play, we own 205,000 net leasehold acres and estimate we could drill up to 2,600 net wells in the years ahead.\n\n2010 ANNUAL REPORT |\n\n9\n\nlargest and most respected European energy companies. In this transaction, we sold Statoil 32.5% of our Marcellus assets for $3.375 billion in cash and drilling carries. Today, having sold 32.5% of our original 1.8 million net leasehold acres, we have returned to owning 1.7 million net leasehold acres in the play and are the industry's leading leasehold owner, largest producer and most active developer. We are producing from more than 100 net wells in the Marcellus on our 1.7 million net acres, are currently drilling with 32 rigs and estimate we could drill up to 21,000 additional net wells in the years ahead.\n\nGenerating the highest returns in the company, plays like the Oklahoma Colony Granite Wash inspire Chesapeake to find other liquids-rich opportunities.\n\nMarcellus Shale - We first became aware of the Marcellus in 2005 when we were negotiating our $2.2 billion acquisition of Appalachia's second-largest natural gas producer, Columbia Natural Resources, LLC. In 2007 we aggressively accelerated our Marcellus leasehold acquisition efforts and began to prepare for our first drilling activities. By early 2008, we had determined the Marcellus could be prospective over an area of approximately 15 million net acres (approximately five times larger than the prospective Haynesville core area and 10 times larger than the Barnett core area).\n\nAfter acquiring 1.8 million net leasehold acres, we entered into a joint venture agreement in late 2008 with Oslo-based Statoil, one of the\n\nColony and Texas Panhandle Granite Wash - These liquids-rich plays generate the company's highest returns (routinely more than 100%) and provided the inspiration\n\nThe very significant upward trajectory of value creation that Chesapeake is on today is primarily driven by the quality of our assets, which feature dominant positions in 16 of the 20 most important major unconventional natural gas and liquids plays in the U.S.\n\nfor the company to find other liquids-rich plays in 2010. The Granite Wash, and other plays with liquids-rich gas production streams, provide the strongest economics in the industry today because they possess the best of both worlds: high-volume natural gas production along with\n\nsignificant volumes of highly valued liquids that dramatically increase investment returns.\n\nWe are producing from approximately 150 net Granite Wash wells, are currently drilling with 16 rigs and estimate we could drill up to 1,700 additional net wells on our 215,000 net leasehold acres in the years ahead. Based on current NYMEX futures prices for natural gas and oil, each Granite Wash well should generate approximately $11.5 million of present value (or up to an undiscounted total of $19.5 billion for all 1,700 wells), making it obvious why finding, leasing and developing more unconventional liquids-rich plays was Chesapeake's number one priority for 2010. We were very successful", + "recall": 0.9548611111111112, + "true_md": "2010 ANNUAL REPORT | 9\n\nhorizontal wells drilled just to the Bossier may not always hold Haynes- ville rights. Therefore, Chesapeake and other producers have been drilling aggressively to hold all rights through the Haynesville before the initial three-year term of a typical lease expires. As a result, there has not been much drilling to the Bossier to date. However, once our leases are held by production (HBP) by Haynesville drilling (we expect to be largely complete with HBP drilling by year-end 2011 and completely finished by year-end 2012), we will begin developing the Bossier Shale more aggressively in 2013. In the Bossier play, we own 205,000 net leasehold acres and esti- mate we could drill up to 2,600 net wells in the years ahead. \n\nlargest and most respected European energy companies. In this trans- action, we sold Statoil 32.5% of our Marcellus assets for $3.375 billion in cash and drilling carries. Today, having sold 32.5% of our original 1.8 million net leasehold acres, we have returned to owning 1.7 million net leasehold acres in the play and are the industry’s leading leasehold owner, largest producer and most active developer. We are producing from more than 100 net wells in the Marcellus on our 1.7 million net acres, are currently drilling with 32 rigs and estimate we could drill up to 21,000 additional net wells in the years ahead. \n\nColony and Texas Panhandle Granite Wash — These liquids-rich plays generate the company’s highest returns (routinely more than 100%) and provided the inspiration \n\nThe very significant upward trajectory of value creation that Chesapeake is on today is primarily driven by the quality of our assets, which feature dominant positions in 16 of the 20 most important major unconventional natural gas and liquids plays in the U.S.\n\nfor the company to find other liquids-rich plays in 2010. The Granite Wash, and other plays with liquids-rich gas production streams, provide the strongest economics in the industry today because they possess the best of both worlds: high-volume natural gas production along with \n\nsignificant volumes of highly valued liquids that dramatically increase investment returns. \n\nMarcellus Shale — We first became aware of the Marcellus in 2005 when we were negotiating our $2.2 billion acquisition of Appalachia’s second-largest natural gas producer, Columbia Natural Resources, LLC. In 2007 we aggressively accelerated our Marcellus leasehold acquisition efforts and began to prepare for our first drilling activities. By early 2008, we had determined the Marcellus could be prospective over an area of approximately 15 million net acres (approximately five times larger than the prospective Haynesville core area and 10 times larger than the Barnett core area). \n\nWe are producing from approximately 150 net Granite Wash wells, are currently drilling with 16 rigs and estimate we could drill up to 1,700 additional net wells on our 215,000 net leasehold acres in the years ahead. Based on current NYMEX futures prices for natu- ral gas and oil, each Granite Wash well should generate approxi- mately $11.5 million of present value (or up to an undiscounted total of $19.5 billion for all 1,700 wells), making it obvious why finding, leasing and developing more unconventional liquids-rich plays was Chesapeake’s number one priority for 2010. We were very successful \n\nAfter acquiring 1.8 million net leasehold acres, we entered into a joint venture agreement in late 2008 with Oslo-based Statoil, one of the \n\nGenerating the highest returns in the company, plays like the Oklahoma Colony Granite Wash inspire Chesapeake to find other liquids-rich opportunities." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7365793309185674, + "doc_id": "bd7b14e2637606482bbe7f7bf6081fa44eedfd71bf3f2f6082f8f7430808ca0d", + "edit_distance": 0.25096525096525096, + "f1_score": 0.98005698005698, + "meteor": 0.65937632712083, + "precision": 0.9828571428571429, + "pred_md": "## Gross Profit (2014 vs. 2013)\n\nOur Retail gross profit rate decreased 52 basis points compared with 2013 due to increased markdowns and Nordstrom Rack's accelerated store expansion. The growth in Nordstrom Rack stores resulted in a higher occupancy expense as sales volume at new stores typically take several years to reach the average of our mature stores and also have substantial pre-opening costs. Retail gross profit increased $275 in 2014 due to an increase in net sales, partially offset by increased markdowns.\n\nOur inventory turnover rate decreased to 4.67 times in 2014, from 5.07 times in 2013. Ending inventory per square foot increased 8.8% compared with the same period in 2013, which outpaced the total sales per square foot increase of 3.9% primarily due to planned inventory growth related to Nordstrom Rack and Nordstromrack.com and HauteLook.\n\n## Gross Profit (2013 vs. 2012)\n\nOur Retail gross profit rate decreased 41 basis points compared with 2012 primarily due to higher expenses associated with the growth in the Nordstrom Rewards customer loyalty program and higher occupancy costs related to Nordstrom Rack's accelerated store expansion. Retail gross profit increased $99 in 2013 compared with 2012 due to an increase in net sales at Nordstrom.com and Nordstrom Rack, which was partially offset by a decrease in full-line net sales and increased occupancy costs related to Nordstrom Rack's accelerated store expansion.\n\nOur inventory turnover rate decreased to 5.07 times in 2013, from 5.37 times in 2012. This was primarily due to our increased investment in pack and hold inventory at Nordstrom Rack, which helped fuel the growth in that channel. On a per square foot basis, we ended the year with a 9.4% increase in our ending inventory on a 0.8% increase in sales compared with 2012. The increase in ending inventory per square foot relative to the increase in sales per square foot was primarily due to the impact of the 53 rd week in 2012, which decreased inventory levels in our full-line stores and included an additional week of sales in 2012. In 2013, we also planned inventory increases in full-line stores to fuel growth in well-performing merchandise categories and increased our pack and hold inventory at Nordstrom Rack.\n\n## Retail Business Selling, General and Administrative Expenses\n\nRetail Business selling, general and administrative expenses ('Retail SG&A') are summarized in the following table:\n\n## Selling, General and Administrative Expenses (2014 vs. 2013)\n\nOur Retail SG&A rate increased 48 basis points in 2014 compared with 2013 primarily due to expenses related to the acquisition of Trunk Club and ongoing fulfillment and technology investments. Our Retail SG&A increased $316 in 2014 due primarily to growth-related investments in fulfillment and technology.\n\n## Selling, General and Administrative Expenses (2013 vs. 2012)\n\nOur Retail SG&A rate decreased 8 basis points in 2013 compared with 2012 due to expense leverage from increased sales volume. Our Retail SG&A expenses increased $100 in 2013 compared with 2012 due primarily to growth-related investments in our ecommerce business, Nordstrom Rack's accelerated store expansion and Canada pre-opening expenses. The increase also reflected expenses associated with higher sales volume and the opening of 22 Nordstrom Rack stores in 2013.\n\n20", + "recall": 0.9772727272727273, + "true_md": "Gross Profit (2014 vs. 2013) Our Retail gross profit rate decreased 52 basis points compared with 2013 due to increased markdowns and Nordstrom Rack’s accelerated store expansion. The growth in Nordstrom Rack stores resulted in a higher occupancy expense as sales volume at new stores typically take several years to reach the average of our mature stores and also have substantial pre-opening costs. Retail gross profit increased $275 in 2014 due to an increase in net sales, partially offset by increased markdowns. \n\nOur inventory turnover rate decreased to 4.67 times in 2014, from 5.07 times in 2013. Ending inventory per square foot increased 8.8% compared with the same period in 2013, which outpaced the total sales per square foot increase of 3.9% primarily due to planned inventory growth related to Nordstrom Rack and Nordstromrack.com and HauteLook.\n\nGross Profit (2013 vs. 2012) Our Retail gross profit rate decreased 41 basis points compared with 2012 primarily due to higher expenses associated with the growth in the Nordstrom Rewards customer loyalty program and higher occupancy costs related to Nordstrom Rack’s accelerated store expansion. Retail gross profit increased $99 in 2013 compared with 2012 due to an increase in net sales at Nordstrom.com and Nordstrom Rack, which was partially offset by a decrease in full-line net sales and increased occupancy costs related to Nordstrom Rack’s accelerated store expansion.\n\n## Gross Profit (2013 vs. 2012) Our Retail gross profit rate decreased 41 basis points compared with 2012 primarily due to higher expenses associated with the growth in the\n\n## Gross Profit (2014 vs. 2013) Our Retail gross profit rate decreased 52 basis points compared with 2013 due to increased markdowns and Nordstrom Rack’s accelerated\n\nOur inventory turnover rate decreased to 5.07 times in 2013, from 5.37 times in 2012. This was primarily due to our increased investment in pack and hold inventory at Nordstrom Rack, which helped fuel the growth in that channel. On a per square foot basis, we ended the year with a 9.4% increase in our ending inventory on a 0.8% increase in sales compared with 2012. The increase in ending inventory per square foot relative to the increase in sales per square foot was primarily due to the impact of the 53 rd week in 2012, which decreased inventory levels in our full-line stores and included an additional week of sales in 2012. In 2013, we also planned inventory increases in full-line stores to fuel growth in well-performing merchandise categories and increased our pack and hold inventory at Nordstrom Rack.\n\nRetail Business Selling, General and Administrative Expenses Retail Business selling, general and administrative expenses (“Retail SG&A”) are summarized in the following table:\n\n## Retail Business Selling, General and Administrative Expenses Retail Business selling, general and administrative expenses (“Retail SG&A”) are summarized in the following table:\n\nSelling, General and Administrative Expenses (2014 vs. 2013) Our Retail SG&A rate increased 48 basis points in 2014 compared with 2013 primarily due to expenses related to the acquisition of Trunk Club and ongoing fulfillment and technology investments. Our Retail SG&A increased $316 in 2014 due primarily to growth-related investments in fulfillment and technology.\n\nSelling, General and Administrative Expenses (2013 vs. 2012) Our Retail SG&A rate decreased 8 basis points in 2013 compared with 2012 due to expense leverage from increased sales volume. Our Retail SG&A expenses increased $100 in 2013 compared with 2012 due primarily to growth-related investments in our ecommerce business, Nordstrom Rack’s accelerated store expansion and Canada pre-opening expenses. The increase also reflected expenses associated with higher sales volume and the opening of 22 Nordstrom Rack stores in 2013.\n\n## Selling, General and Administrative Expenses (2014 vs. 2013) Our Retail SG&A rate increased 48 basis points in 2014 compared with 2013 primarily due to expenses related to the acquisition of Trunk\n\n## Selling, General and Administrative Expenses (2013 vs. 2012) Our Retail SG&A rate decreased 8 basis points in 2013 compared with 2012 due to expense leverage from increased sales volume. Our\n\n20" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9608765190171094, + "doc_id": "455c78dc165a911823c70926edad08222be64d40e16f5045ec40726761a1d8b7", + "edit_distance": 0.40217391304347827, + "f1_score": 0.9970674486803519, + "meteor": 0.9680705260494121, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "SMFG\n\nCapital Ratio Information\n\n## (B) Implementation of Regular Verification Process\n\nTo confirm the appropriateness of the quantification model on a continuing basis, we conduct a regular verification process. Specifically, there are two types of verifications. One is back testing, which enables us to make a comprehensive judgment on the appropriateness of measurement results, and the other is pre-testing, in which we verify the accuracy of the quantification model prior to conducting actual measurements. In the following paragraphs, we present an explanation of these two test types.\n\n## a. Back Testing\n\nIn conducting back tests, we compare the estimates made by the quantification model with the maximum loss arising from business activities to verify on an ex post facto basis whether the measurement results obtained from the model are conservative enough and appropriate. When actual losses become greater than the losses estimated by the model (actual losses exceed the estimate when back tests are conducted), we apply the multiplier factor in accordance with the number of excesses in order to ensure conservativeness of quantification results.\n\nBack testing is a well-known method for verifying comprehensively the appropriateness of VaR (statistical) models. We employ the test to obtain the maximum loss amount with the given confidence interval which the tests work effectively. By comparing the test results with the losses that actually occur, we increase the effectiveness of back testing.\n\n## b. Pre-testing\n\nPre-testing is conducted periodically, prior to use of the model for actual measurements, to verify whether the possibility of underestimation is increasing (model risk is rising), since it is possible that the multiplier used in back testing may lead to underestimation. As a result of pre-test verifications, we are able to confirm, on a continuing basis, whether the multiplier used in back testing is conservative enough or model risk is emerging.\n\n## 3. Usage of Insurance to Mitigate Risk\n\nSMFG had not taken measures to mitigate operational risk through insurance coverage for exposures.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n208", + "recall": 0.9941520467836257, + "true_md": "SMFG Capital Ratio Information\n\n## (B) Implementation of Regular Verification Process\n\nTo confirm the appropriateness of the quantification model on a continuing basis, we conduct a regular verification process. Specifically, there are two types of verifications. One is back testing, which enables us to make a comprehensive judgment on the appropriateness of measurement results, and the other is pre-testing, in which we verify the accuracy of the quantification model prior to conducting actual measurements. In the following paragraphs, we present an explanation of these two test types. \n\nBack testing is a well-known method for verifying comprehensively the appropriateness of VaR (statistical) models. We employ the test to obtain the maximum loss amount with the given confidence interval which the tests work effectively. By comparing the test results with the losses that actually occur, we increase the effectiveness of back testing.\n\nIn conducting back tests, we compare the estimates made by the quantification model with the maximum loss arising from business activities to verify on an ex post facto basis whether the measurement results obtained from the model are conservative enough and appropriate. When actual losses become greater than the losses estimated by the model (actual losses exceed the estimate when back tests are conducted), we apply the multiplier factor in accordance with the number of excesses in order to ensure conservativeness of quantification results.\n\nPre-testing is conducted periodically, prior to use of the model for actual measurements, to verify whether the possibility of underestimation is increasing (model risk is rising), since it is possible that the multiplier used in back testing may lead to underestimation. As a result of pre-test verifications, we are able to confirm, on a continuing basis, whether the multiplier used in back testing is conservative enough or model risk is emerging.\n\nSMFG had not taken measures to mitigate operational risk through insurance coverage for exposures.\n\n## 3. Usage of Insurance to Mitigate Risk\n\n- b. Pre-testing\n\n- a. Back Testing\n\nSMFG 2011 208" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7096591754610982, + "doc_id": "fc13939e449c71617fc42f84196193c01f250882c80b5a70c5b1fad6e5300e5d", + "edit_distance": 0.22402597402597402, + "f1_score": 0.868804664723032, + "meteor": 0.8007369614512472, + "precision": 0.9675324675324676, + "pred_md": "16\n\nOperations Report\n\nwith an availability of 98.2%. Works continued throughout the year to eliminate processing bottlenecks and maximise recoveries with the conversion of the Leach/Carbon-In-Pulp circuit to straight Carbon-In-Leach.\n\nThe older Plant #1 continues to perform very well with an availability of 98.3% despite the replacement of a mill trunnion bearing, the first after 12 years of operation. Plant #1 achieved record processing throughputs after the installation of a second set of cyclones and cyclone feed pump upgrade. The original design was 2.3 Mtpa and it is currently operating at 2.9 Mtpa or 25% above design.\n\n## Safety\n\nChatree achieved an enviable 10.5 year period representing 23.6 million man hours of operations and construction activity without a lost time injury. Management continues to be grateful to all of our employees and contractors for the attention to safety and care for each other - and without whom this notable achievement would not be possible.\n\nIn recognition of this achievement, and of our safety standards and emergency response preparedness, Chatree Mine received the 'Thailand National Occupational Health and\n\nSafety Award 2013' on July 03, 2013 and also received the 'Thai Zero Accident Gold Award 2013'.\n\nDuring the year the operation and the Sydney office undertook a major incident exercise to test the sites management and rescue teams' ability to respond as well as to test the Kingsgate corporate Crisis Management Plan.", + "recall": 0.7883597883597884, + "true_md": "Operations Report 16\n\nwith an availability of 98.2%. Works continued throughout the year to eliminate processing bottlenecks and maximise recoveries with the conversion of the Leach/Carbon-In-Pulp circuit to straight Carbon-In-Leach. \n\nThe older Plant #1 continues to perform very well with an availability of 98.3% despite the replacement of a mill trunnion bearing, the first after 12 years of operation. Plant #1 achieved record processing throughputs after the installa- tion of a second set of cyclones and cyclone feed pump upgrade. The original design was 2.3 Mtpa and it is currently operating at 2.9 Mtpa or 25% above design.\n\nThe combined plants are currently operating at 27% above design. A study was completed during the year that has identified the next best expansion opportunities with minimum capital expenditure. These opportunities are being assessed with plant upgrades aimed to continue to increase throughput into the future. \n\nChatree achieved an enviable 10.5 year period representing 23.6 million man hours of opera- tions and construction activity without a lost time injury. Management continues to be grateful to all of our employees and contractors for the attention to safety and care for each other - and without whom this notable achieve- ment would not be possible.\n\nIn recognition of this achievement, and of our safety standards and emergency response preparedness, Chatree Mine received the ‘Thailand National Occupational Health and \n\nSafety Award 2013’ on July 03, 2013 and also received the ‘Thai Zero Accident Gold Award 2013’. \n\nDuring the year the operation and the Sydney office undertook a major incident exercise to test the sites management and rescue teams’ ability to respond as well as to test the Kingsgate corporate Crisis Management Plan.\n\n## Safety\n\nwww.kingsgate.com.au" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5101073577836615, + "doc_id": "f83a4f2fce3f3da60b857fcbbabf3f9c5b8882a229e641688d7b37699330722f", + "edit_distance": 0.5733333333333334, + "f1_score": 0.8347107438016529, + "meteor": 0.9052220401082806, + "precision": 0.7163120567375887, + "pred_md": "SCORECARD A LOOK AT THE NUMBERS\n\nNET SALES ($)\n\n## NET SALES PERCENTAGE INCREASE\n\n## INVENTORY TURN**\n\nSALES PER SQUARE FOOT AND 4-WALL SALES PER SQUARE FOOT ($)*\n\nSALES PER SQUARE FOOT AND 4-WALL SALES PER SQUARE FOOT ($)*\n\n## COMPARABLE SALES PERCENTAGE INCREASE\n\n4-Wall Sales Per Square Foot Sales Per Square Foot\n\nCASH FLOW FROM OPERATIONS ($)\n\nEARNINGS BEFORE INTEREST AND INCOME TAXES (EBIT) ($)\n\nCASH FLOW FROM OPERATIONS ($)EARNINGS BEFORE INTEREST AND INCOME TAXES (EBIT) ($)\n\n'10\n\n'11\n\n'12\n\n'13\n\n'14\n\nRETURN ON ASSETS AND RETURN ON INVESTED CAPITAL (ROIC) (%)***\n\nRETURN ON ASSETS AND RETURN ON INVESTED CAPITAL (ROIC) (%)***\n\nReturn on Assets\n\nReturn on Invested Capital\n\n## Dollars in millions except per share and per square foot amounts.\n\n*4-wall sales per square foot is calculated as sales for Nordstrom U.S. full-line stores, Nordstrom Rack stores, Jeffrey boutiques, our Canada full-line store, Last Chance and Trunk Club showrooms divided by their weighted-average square footage.\n\n**Inventory Turn is calculated as annual cost of sales and related buying and occupancy costs (for all segments) divided by 4-quarter average inventory. Our inventory turnover rate decreased in 2012, 2013 and 2014 primarily due to increasing our investment in pack and hold inventory beginning in 2012, which helped fuel the growth of Nordstrom Rack. ***See Return on Invested Capital (ROIC) Non-GAAP financial measure on page 26 for additional information and reconciliation to the most directly comparable GAAP financial measure.\n\nnordstrom.com/companyreview", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "SCORECARD A LOOK AT THE NUMBERS\n\nnordstrom.com/companyreview\n\n*4-wall sales per square foot is calculated as sales for Nordstrom U.S. full-line stores, Nordstrom Rack stores, Jeffrey boutiques, our Canada full-line store, Last Chance and Trunk Club showrooms divided by their weighted-average square footage. \n\n**Inventory Turn is calculated as annual cost of sales and related buying and occupancy costs (for all segments) divided by 4-quarter average inventory. Our inventory turnover rate decreased in 2012, 2013 and 2014 primarily due to increasing our investment in pack and hold inventory beginning in 2012, which helped fuel the growth of Nordstrom Rack.\n\n***See Return on Invested Capital (ROIC) Non-GAAP financial measure on page 26 for additional information and reconciliation to the most directly comparable GAAP financial measure.\n\n## Dollars in millions except per share and per square foot amounts." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8864437785914496, + "doc_id": "0c9ab29d4b835dd37fb8c98f7ae48de39228d8e174cc9fac0ff52b192ce3de0a", + "edit_distance": 0.18711018711018712, + "f1_score": 0.9516539440203563, + "meteor": 0.9061352316853609, + "precision": 0.949238578680203, + "pred_md": "## management's Discussion and analysis\n\nD\n\nollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\n## Mortgages and Other Loans\n\nBelow are Killam's key debt metrics:\n\n## as at December 31,\n\nThe Company's long-term debt consists largely of fixed-rate, long-term mortgage financing. In certain cases the Company will also utilize VTB mortgages as part of an acquisition. Mortgages are secured by a first or second charge against the individual properties and the vendor financing is secured by a general corporate guarantee.\n\nAs at December 31, 2013, only the construction financing loan of $14.8 million and four demand loans, totaling $3.9 million, had floating interest rates. These demand loans carry an interest rate of prime plus 1.0% - 2.0%. The construction financing has a floating interest rate of prime plus 0.75%. The construction loan will be repaid in full and converted into a CMHC insured mortgage once rental targets are achieved.\n\nKillam's December 31, 2013, weighted average interest rate on mortgages improved to 4.05% compared to 4.48% as at December 31, 2012, as a result of refinancings at lower interest rates during the year. Killam's weighted average interest rate is expected to continue to improve throughout the next twelve months when $139.3 million of current mortgage balances are expected to be refinanced at lower interest rates than their current weighted average rate of 4.61% (20% of the portfolio). In 2015 and 2016 a combined $219 million of mortgages will also mature; by December 31, 2016, 49% of Killam's current mortgages are expected to be refinanced and the weighted average years to maturity lengthened.\n\nTotal debt as a percentage of total assets has increased 130 bps to 52.9% from December 31, 2012. Management expects to maintain the percentage of debt to total assets between 55% and 65%. This ratio is sensitive to changes in the fair value of investment properties, in particular cap-rate changes. A 10 basis point increase in the weighted average cap-rate at December 31, 2013, would have increased the ratio of debt as a percentage of total assets by 80 bps.\n\n## 2013 Refinancings\n\nDuring the year ended December 31, 2013, Killam refinanced the following mortgages:\n\nThe Company also placed $76.0 million in new financing on unencumbered properties acquired and developments completed during the year ended December 31, 2013, at a weighted average interest rate of 3.44%.\n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013\n\n53", + "recall": 0.9540816326530612, + "true_md": "Killam ProPerties inc | 2013 53\n\nBelow are Killam’s key debt metrics:\n\n## Mortgages and Other Loans\n\nThe Company’s long‑term debt consists largely of fixed‑rate, long‑term mortgage financing. In certain cases the Company will also utilize VTB mortgages as part of an acquisition. Mortgages are secured by a first or second charge against the individual properties and the vendor financing is secured by a general corporate guarantee. \n\nAs at December 31, 2013, only the construction financing loan of $14.8 million and four demand loans, totaling $3.9million, had floating interest rates. These demand loans carry an interest rate of prime plus 1.0% ‑ 2.0%. The construction financing has a floating interest rate of prime plus 0.75%. The construction loan will be repaid in full and converted into a CMHC insured mortgage once rental targets are achieved.\n\nKillam’s December 31, 2013, weighted average interest rate on mortgages improved to 4.05% compared to 4.48% as at December 31, 2012, as a result of refinancings at lower interest rates during the year. Killam’s weighted average interest rate is expected to continue to improve throughout the next twelve months when $139.3 million of current mortgage balances are expected to be refinanced at lower interest rates than their current weighted average rate of 4.61% (20% of the portfolio). In 2015 and 2016 a combined $219 million of mortgages will also mature; by December 31, 2016, 49% of Killam’s current mortgages are expected to be refinanced and the weighted average years to maturity lengthened. \n\nTotal debt as a percentage of total assets has increased 130 bps to 52.9% from December 31, 2012. Management expects to maintain the percentage of debt to total assets between 55% and 65%. This ratio is sensitive to changes in the fair value of investment properties, in particular cap‑rate changes. A 10 basis point increase in the weighted average cap‑rate at December 31, 2013, would have increased the ratio of debt as a percentage of total assets by 80 bps.\n\n## 2013 Refinancings\n\nDuring the year ended December 31, 2013, Killam refinanced the following mortgages:\n\nThe Company also placed $76.0 million in new financing on unencumbered properties acquired and developments completed during the year ended December 31, 2013, at a weighted average interest rate of 3.44%.\n\nManagement’s Discussion and Analysis Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\n## Management’s Discussion and Analysis Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9042045350367302, + "doc_id": "50bdab7d9dca799a38372e785cbab6b234c9803b1c5e19f33ff476e56d013403", + "edit_distance": 0.1733477789815818, + "f1_score": 0.9574105621805791, + "meteor": 0.9291285764829502, + "precision": 0.95578231292517, + "pred_md": "## notes to the consolidated Financial statements\n\nD\n\nollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except share and per share amounts)\n\n## 2. Significant Accounting Policies (continued)\n\nThe cost of equity-settled transactions is recognized, together with a corresponding increase in contributed surplus in equity, over the period in which the performance and/or service conditions are fulfilled. The cumulative expense recognized for equity-settled transactions at each reporting date until the vesting date reflects the extent to which the vesting period has expired and the Company's best estimate of the number of equity instruments that will ultimately vest. The movement in cumulative expense recognized at the beginning and end of a period is recognized in administration expense.\n\nWhere the terms of an equity-settled transaction award are modified, the minimum expense recognized is the expense as if the terms had not been modified, if the original terms of the award are met. An additional expense is recognized for any modification that increases the total fair value of the share-based payment transaction, or is otherwise beneficial to the employee as measured at the date of modification.\n\nWhere an equity-settled award is cancelled, it is treated as if it vested on the date of cancellation, and any expense not yet recognized for the award is recognized immediately. This includes any award where non-vesting conditions within the control of either the entity or the employee are not met. However, if a new award is substituted for the cancelled award, and designated as a replacement award on the date that it is granted, the cancelled and new awards are treated as if they were a modification of the original award, as described in the previous paragraph.\n\nThe dilutive effect of share-based awards is reflected as additional share dilution in the computation of diluted earnings per share (further details are given in note 22).\n\n## (K) Financial Assets and Liabilities\n\nFinancial instruments are accounted for, presented, and disclosed in accordance with IFRS 7 - Financial Instruments: Disclosures ('IFRS 7'), IAS 32 - Financial Instruments: Presentation ('IAS 32') and IAS 39 - Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement ('IAS 39'). The Company recognizes financial assets and financial liabilities when the Company becomes a party to a contract. Financial assets and financial liabilities, with the exception of financial assets classified at fair value through profit or loss, are measured at fair value plus transaction costs on initial recognition. Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss are measured at fair value on initial recognition and transaction costs are expensed when incurred.\n\nMeasurement in subsequent periods depends on the classification of the financial instrument as follows:\n\n## Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss ('FVTPL')\n\nFinancial assets are classified as FVTPL when acquired principally for the purpose of trading, if so designated by management (fair value option), or if they are derivative assets. Financial assets classified as FVTPL are measured at fair value, with changes recognized in the consolidated statements of income and comprehensive income.\n\n## Loans and receivables\n\nLoans and receivables are non-derivative financial assets that have fixed or determinable payments and are not quoted in an active market. Subsequent to initial recognition, loans and receivables are carried at amortized cost, using the effective interest method, less a provision for impairment. A provision for impairment is established when there is objective evidence that collection will not be possible under the original terms of the contract. Indicators of impairment include delinquency of payment and significant financial difficulty of the holder. The carrying amount of the financial asset is reduced through an allowance account, and the amount of the loss is recognized in the Consolidated Statements of Income and Comprehensive Income. Any subsequent reversal of an impairment loss is recognized in profit or loss.\n\n## Financial liabilities at FVTPL\n\nFinancial liabilities are classified as FVTPL if they meet certain conditions and are designated as such by management, or they are derivative liabilities. Financial liabilities classified as FVTPL are measured at fair value, with changes recognized in the Consolidated Statements of income and comprehensive income.\n\n## Other financial liabilities\n\nOther financial liabilities are financial liabilities that are not classified as FVTPL. Subsequent to initial recognition, other financial liabilities are measured at amortized cost using the effective interest method. The effective interest method is a method of calculating the amortized cost of an instrument and of allocating interest income over the relevant period. The effective interest rate is the rate that exactly discounts estimated future cash receipts (including all transaction costs and other premiums or discounts) through the expected life of the debt instrument to the net carrying amount of the initial recognition.\n\nFair value measurements recognized in the Consolidated Statements of Financial Position are categorized using a fair value hierarchy that reflects the significance of inputs used in determining the fair values:\n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013\n\n73", + "recall": 0.9590443686006825, + "true_md": "Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except share and per share amounts)\n\nNotes to the Consolidated Financial Statements Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except share and per share amounts)\n\n## 2. Significant Accounting Policies (continued)\n\nThe cost of equity‑settled transactions is recognized, together with a corresponding increase in contributed surplus in equity, over the period in which the performance and/or service conditions are fulfilled. The cumulative expense recognized for equity‑settled transactions at each reporting date until the vesting date reflects the extent to which the vesting period has expired and the Company’s best estimate of the number of equity instruments that will ultimately vest. The movement in cumulative expense recognized at the beginning and end of a period is recognized in administration expense.\n\nWhere the terms of an equity‑settled transaction award are modified, the minimum expense recognized is the expense as if the terms had not been modified, if the original terms of the award are met. An additional expense is recognized for any modification that increases the total fair value of the share‑based payment transaction, or is otherwise beneficial to the employee as measured at the date of modification.\n\nWhere an equity‑settled award is cancelled, it is treated as if it vested on the date of cancellation, and any expense not yet recognized for the award is recognized immediately. This includes any award where non‑vesting conditions within the control of either the entity or the employee are not met. However, if a new award is substituted for the cancelled award, and designated as a replacement award on the date that it is granted, the cancelled and new awards are treated as if they were a modification of the original award, as described in the previous paragraph. \n\nThe dilutive effect of share‑based awards is reflected as additional share dilution in the computation of diluted earnings per share (further details are given in note 22).\n\nFinancial instruments are accounted for, presented, and disclosed in accordance with IFRS 7 – Financial Instruments: Disclosures (“IFRS 7”), IAS 32 ‑ Financial Instruments: Presentation (“IAS 32”) and IAS 39 ‑ Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement (“IAS 39”). The Company recognizes financial assets and financial liabilities when the Company becomes a party to a contract. Financial assets and financial liabilities, with the exception of financial assets classified at fair value through profit or loss, are measured at fair value plus transaction costs on initial recognition. Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss are measured at fair value on initial recognition and transaction costs are expensed when incurred.\n\nFinancial assets are classified as FVTPL when acquired principally for the purpose of trading, if so designated by management (fair value option), or if they are derivative assets. Financial assets classified as FVTPL are measured at fair value, with changes recognized in the consolidated statements of income and comprehensive income.\n\nLoans and receivables are non‑derivative financial assets that have fixed or determinable payments and are not quoted in an active market. Subsequent to initial recognition, loans and receivables are carried at amortized cost, using the effective interest method, less a provision for impairment. A provision for impairment is established when there is objective evidence that collection will not be possible under the original terms of the contract. Indicators of impairment include delinquency of payment and significant financial difficulty of the holder. The carrying amount of the financial asset is reduced through an allowance account, and the amount of the loss is recognized in the Consolidated Statements of Income and Comprehensive Income. Any subsequent reversal of an impairment loss is recognized in profit or loss.\n\nFinancial liabilities are classified as FVTPL if they meet certain conditions and are designated as such by management, or they are derivative liabilities. Financial liabilities classified as FVTPL are measured at fair value, with changes recognized in the Consolidated Statements of income and comprehensive income.\n\nOther financial liabilities are financial liabilities that are not classified as FVTPL. Subsequent to initial recognition, other financial liabilities are measured at amortized cost using the effective interest method. The effective interest method is a method of calculating the amortized cost of an instrument and of allocating interest income over the relevant period. The effective interest rate is the rate that exactly discounts estimated future cash receipts (including all transaction costs and other premiums or discounts) through the expected life of the debt instrument to the net carrying amount of the initial recognition.\n\nFair value measurements recognized in the Consolidated Statements of Financial Position are categorized using a fair value hierarchy that reflects the significance of inputs used in determining the fair values:\n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013 73\n\n## (K) Financial Assets and Liabilities\n\n## Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss (“FVTPL”)\n\n## Loans and receivables\n\n## Financial liabilities at FVTPL\n\n## Other financial liabilities\n\n Measurement in subsequent periods depends on the classification of the financial instrument as follows:" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9420896521326988, + "doc_id": "0cd2dfc717b8acb06026a2ca8421664028a44f5e6abc25dcca8c25250d22d2a4", + "edit_distance": 0.045584045584045586, + "f1_score": 0.9758064516129031, + "meteor": 0.9683863477553406, + "precision": 0.9718875502008032, + "pred_md": "## REPORT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM REPORT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM\n\n## To the Board of Directors and Shareholders of Applied Industrial Technologies, Inc. Cleveland, Ohio\n\nWe have audited the internal control over financial reporting of Applied Industrial Technologies, Inc. and subsidiaries (the 'Company') as of June 30, 2012, based on criteria established in Internal Control - Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission. The Company's management is responsible for maintaining effective internal control over financial reporting and for its assessment of the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting, included in the accompanying Management's Report on Internal Control Over Financial Reporting. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on the Company's internal control over financial reporting based on our audit.\n\nWe conducted our audit in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether effective internal control over financial reporting was maintained in all material respects. Our audit included obtaining an understanding of internal control over financial reporting, assessing the risk that a material weakness exists, testing and evaluating the design and operating effectiveness of internal control based on the assessed risk, and performing such other procedures as we considered necessary in the circumstances. We believe that our audit provides a reasonable basis for our opinion.\n\nA company's internal control over financial reporting is a process designed by, or under the supervision of, the company's principal executive and principal financial officers, or persons performing similar functions, and effected by the company's board of directors, management, and other personnel to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles. A company's internal control over financial reporting includes those policies and procedures that (1) pertain to the maintenance of records that, in reasonable detail, accurately and fairly reflect the transactions and dispositions of the assets of the company; (2) provide reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded as necessary to permit preparation of financial statements in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles, and that receipts and expenditures of the company are being made only in accordance with authorizations of management and directors of the company; and (3) provide reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of unauthorized acquisition, use, or disposition of the company's assets that could have a material effect on the financial statements.\n\nBecause of the inherent limitations of internal control over financial reporting, including the possibility of collusion or improper management override of controls, material misstatements due to error or fraud may not be prevented or detected on a timely basis. Also, projections of any evaluation of the effectiveness of the internal control over financial reporting to future periods are subject to the risk that the controls may become inadequate because of changes in conditions, or that the degree of compliance with the policies or procedures may deteriorate.\n\nIn our opinion, the Company maintained, in all material respects, effective internal control over financial reporting as of June 30, 2012, based on the criteria established in Internal Control - Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission.\n\nWe have also audited, in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States), the consolidated balance sheet and the related statements of consolidated income, comprehensive income, shareholders' equity and cash flows as of and for the year ended June 30, 2012 of the Company and our report dated August 15, 2012 expressed an unqualified opinion on those consolidated financial statements.\n\nCleveland, Ohio August 15, 2012\n\n40\n\nApplied Industrial Technologies, Inc. and Subsidiaries", + "recall": 0.979757085020243, + "true_md": "REPORT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM REPORT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM\n\n## To the Board of Directors and Shareholders of Applied Industrial Technologies, Inc. Cleveland, Ohio\n\nWe have audited the internal control over financial reporting of Applied Industrial Technologies, Inc. and subsidiaries (the “Company”) as of June 30, 2012, based on criteria established in Internal Control—IntegratedFrameworkissued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission. The Company’s management is responsible for maintaining effective internal control over financial reporting and for its assessment of the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting, included in the accompanying Management’s Report on Internal Control Over Financial Reporting. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on the Company’s internal control over financial reporting based on our audit. \n\nWe conducted our audit in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether effective internal control over financial reporting was maintained in all material respects. Our audit included obtaining an understanding of internal control over financial reporting, assessing the risk that a material weakness exists, testing and evaluating the design and operating effectiveness of internal control based on the assessed risk, and performing such other procedures as we considered necessary in the circumstances. We believe that our audit provides a reasonable basis for our opinion. \n\nA company’s internal control over financial reporting is a process designed by, or under the supervision of, the company’s principal executive and principal financial officers, or persons performing similar functions, and effected by the company’s board of directors, management, and other personnel to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles. A company’s internal control over financial reporting includes those policies and procedures that (1) pertain to the maintenance of records that, in reasonable detail, accurately and fairly reflect the transactions and dispositions of the assets of the company; (2) provide reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded as necessary to permit preparation of financial statements in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles, and that receipts and expenditures of the company are being made only in accordance with authorizations of management and directors of the company; and (3) provide reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of unauthorized acquisition, use, or disposition of the company’s assets that could have a material effect on the financial statements. \n\nBecause of the inherent limitations of internal control over financial reporting, including the possibility of collusion or improper management override of controls, material misstatements due to error or fraud may not be prevented or detected on a timely basis. Also, projections of any evaluation of the effectiveness of the internal control over financial reporting to future periods are subject to the risk that the controls may become inadequate because of changes in conditions, or that the degree of compliance with the policies or procedures may deteriorate. \n\nIn our opinion, the Company maintained, in all material respects, effective internal control over financial reporting as of June 30, 2012, based on the criteria established in Internal Control—IntegratedFrameworkissued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission. \n\nWe have also audited, in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States), the consolidated balance sheet and the related statements of consolidated income, comprehensive income, shareholders’ equity and cash flows as of and for the year ended June 30, 2012 of the Company and our report dated August 15, 2012 expressed an unqualified opinion on those consolidated financial statements. \n\nCleveland, Ohio August 15, 2012 \n\n40 Applied Industrial Technologies, Inc. and Subsidiaries" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9191351340378173, + "doc_id": "4f0008fcbe249661e738152882694349d46205559680c331b818098f4ec717a9", + "edit_distance": 0.4527027027027027, + "f1_score": 0.9661399548532731, + "meteor": 0.9008116503550935, + "precision": 0.9771689497716894, + "pred_md": "MANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS\n\n## ADDITIONS TO PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT\n\nAdditions to property, plant and equipment include costs associated with acquiring and placing property, plant and equipment into service. The telecommunications business requires extensive and continual investments, including investment in new technologies and expansion of geographical reach and capacity capital.\n\nManagement focuses on the planning, funding and management of additions to property, plant and equipment, because they are significant, and have a material impact on our cash flow.\n\nAdditions to property, plant and equipment before related changes to non-cash working capital represent capital assets that we actually took title to and were ready for use in the period. We believe that this measure best reflects our cost of property, plant and equipment in a given period, and is a simpler measure for comparing between periods.\n\n- 1 Capital intensity is a key performance indicator. See 'Key Performance Indicators'.\n\n50\n\nROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n## WIRELESS\n\nWireless additions were 23 % lower this year compared to last year because we invested significantly less in HSPA capacity and spent less on deployment of our LTE network, offset by higher investments to improve the quality and coverage of the wireless network. Our LTE network reached approximately 73 % of Canada's population as at December 31, 2013.\n\n## CABLE\n\nCable additions were higher this year compared to last year because of the timing of initiatives related to service enhancements, reflecting increasing our investment in improving our video and Internet platforms and in customer premise equipment related to the rollout of NextBox 2.0 and NextBox 3.0 digital set-top boxes and continuation of the ongoing analog to digital subscriber migration.\n\nMigrating subscribers from analog to digital will continue to strengthen the customer experience and is allowing us to reclaim significant amounts of network capacity and reduce network operating and maintenance costs. This effort requires additional spending because it involves fitting analog homes with digital converters and removing existing analog filtering equipment from the network.\n\n## BUSINESS SOLUTIONS\n\nBusiness Solutions additions were higher this year compared to last year because we spent more on expanding customer specific networks, and because of capital investments made by Blackiron Data and Pivot Data Centres which we acquired this year.\n\n## MEDIA\n\nMedia additions increased this year compared to last year because of higher expenditures on digital and broadcast facilities.", + "recall": 0.9553571428571429, + "true_md": "MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS\n\n## ADDITIONS TO PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT\n\nAdditions to property, plant and equipment include costs associated with acquiring and placing property, plant and equipment into service. The telecommunications business requires extensive and continual investments, including investment in new technologies and expansion of geographical reach and capacity capital.\n\nManagement focuses on the planning, funding and management of additions to property, plant and equipment, because they are significant, and have a material impact on our cash flow.\n\nWireless additions were 23 % lower this year compared to last year because we invested significantly less in HSPA capacity and spent less on deployment of our LTE network, offset by higher investments to improve the quality and coverage of the wireless network. Our LTE network reached approximately 73 % of Canada’s population as at December 31, 2013.\n\nAdditions to property, plant and equipment before related changes to non-cash working capital represent capital assets that we actually took title to and were ready for use in the period. We believe that this measure best reflects our cost of property, plant and equipment in a given period, and is a simpler measure for comparing between periods.\n\nCable additions were higher this year compared to last year because of the timing of initiatives related to service enhancements, reflecting increasing our investment in improving our video and Internet platforms and in customer premise equipment related to the rollout of NextBox 2.0 and NextBox 3.0 digital set-top boxes and continuation of the ongoing analog to digital subscriber migration.\n\nMigrating subscribers from analog to digital will continue to strengthen the customer experience and is allowing us to reclaim significant amounts of network capacity and reduce network operating and maintenance costs. This effort requires additional spending because it involves fitting analog homes with digital converters and removing existing analog filtering equipment from the network.\n\nBusiness Solutions additions were higher this year compared to last year because we spent more on expanding customer specific networks, and because of capital investments made by Blackiron Data and Pivot Data Centres which we acquired this year.\n\nMedia additions increased this year compared to last year because of higher expenditures on digital and broadcast facilities.\n\n## MEDIA\n\n## BUSINESS SOLUTIONS\n\n## CABLE\n\n## WIRELESS\n\n1 Capital intensity is a key performance indicator. See “Key Performance Indicators”.\n\n(%) 20 1 3 ADDITIONS TO PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT\n\n50 ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7075525214516879, + "doc_id": "ddc9505cfd9fba6ad224b72efa3c1a8713ad9157ea3c54951f9e2f208621e5fc", + "edit_distance": 0.7246376811594203, + "f1_score": 0.9911504424778759, + "meteor": 0.909378887380702, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Sumitomo Mitsui Financial Group, Inc.\n\n*Authorized Management Committee Members\n\n## ■ Board of Directors, Corporate Auditors, and Executive Officers (as of June 30, 2011)\n\n## BOARD OF DIRECTORS\n\n## Masayuki Oku\n\nChairman of the Board\n\n## Koichi Miyata\n\nPresident\n\n## Takeshi Kunibe\n\nDirector\n\n## Tetsuya Kubo*\n\nDirector\n\nPublic Relations Dept., Corporate Planning Dept., Financial Accounting Dept., Subsidiaries & Affiliates Dept.\n\n## Satoru Nakanishi*\n\nDirector\n\nConsumer Business Planning Dept.\n\n## Kazuya Jono*\n\nDirector\n\nCorporate Risk Management Dept.\n\n## Koichi Danno*\n\nDirector\n\nAudit Dept.\n\n## Yujiro Ito*\n\nDirector\n\nGeneral Affairs Dept., Human Resources Dept.\n\n## Masahiro Fuchizaki*\n\nDirector\n\nIT Planning Dept., Director of The Japan Research Institute, Limited\n\n## Shigeru Iwamoto\n\nDirector (outside)\n\n## Yoshinori Yokoyama\n\nDirector (outside)\n\n## Kuniaki Nomura\n\nDirector (outside)\n\n## CORPORATE AUDITORS\n\nJun Mizoguchi\n\nCorporate Auditor\n\nYoji Yamaguchi\n\nCorporate Auditor\n\n## Shin Kawaguchi\n\nCorporate Auditor\n\n## Hiroshi Araki\n\nCorporate Auditor (outside)\n\nIkuo Uno\n\nCorporate Auditor (outside)\n\n## Satoshi Ito\n\nCorporate Auditor (outside)\n\n## EXECUTIVE OFFICERS\n\n## Hidetoshi Furukawa*\n\nManaging Director Investment Banking Planning Dept.\n\n## Ikuhiko Morikawa*\n\nManaging Director Card Business Dept.\n\nPresident of SMFG Card & Credit, Inc.\n\n## ■ SMFG Organization (as of June 30, 2011)\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n211", + "recall": 0.9824561403508771, + "true_md": "## Corporate Data\n\n## Sumitomo Mitsui Financial Group, Inc.\n\n## ■ Board of Directors, Corporate Auditors, and Executive Officers\n\n*Authorized Management Committee Members\n\n(as of June 30, 2011)\n\nDirector (outside)\n\nDirector (outside)\n\nChairman of the Board\n\nPresident\n\nDirector\n\nDirector Public Relations Dept., Corporate Planning Dept., Financial Accounting Dept., Subsidiaries & Affiliates Dept.\n\nDirector Consumer Business Planning Dept.\n\nDirector Corporate Risk Management Dept.\n\nDirector Audit Dept.\n\nDirector General Affairs Dept., Human Resources Dept.\n\nDirector IT Planning Dept., Director of The Japan Research Institute, Limited\n\nDirector (outside)\n\n(as of June 30, 2011)\n\nManaging Director Card Business Dept. President of SMFG Card & Credit, Inc.\n\nManaging Director Investment Banking Planning Dept.\n\nCorporate Auditor (outside)\n\nCorporate Auditor\n\nCorporate Auditor\n\nCorporate Auditor\n\nCorporate Auditor (outside)\n\nCorporate Auditor (outside)\n\n## BOARD OF DIRECTORS\n\n## Masayuki Oku\n\n## Koichi Miyata\n\n## Takeshi Kunibe\n\n## Tetsuya Kubo*\n\n## Satoru Nakanishi*\n\n## Kazuya Jono*\n\n## Koichi Danno*\n\n## Yujiro Ito*\n\n## Masahiro Fuchizaki*\n\n## Shigeru Iwamoto\n\n## Yoshinori Yokoyama\n\n## Kuniaki Nomura\n\n## Jun Mizoguchi\n\n## Yoji Yamaguchi\n\n## Shin Kawaguchi\n\n## Hiroshi Araki\n\n## Ikuo Uno\n\n## EXECUTIVE OFFICERS\n\n## Hidetoshi Furukawa*\n\n## Ikuhiko Morikawa*\n\n## ■ SMFG Organization\n\n211\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n## CORPORATE AUDITORS\n\n## Satoshi Ito" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5200773522320529, + "doc_id": "8912efb8d811c70eddfd330ef3ba2daeb4e870c75bf24176c95f3f602bff00dc", + "edit_distance": 0.4447421299397187, + "f1_score": 0.7908131595282433, + "meteor": 0.6341415567703986, + "precision": 0.9845440494590417, + "pred_md": "Alfonso Duenez\n\nAlberto Gonzalez\n\n| Dustin Dunlap |\n|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|\n| Paul Duren |\n| Jim Durst |\n| Dustin Dye |\n| Tammy Eaton Robin Ebarb |\n| Michael Eddins Johnny Egnor Sr. |\n| Craig Elder Jammie Elder Jeff Elder Ebbin Elliott Jr. Jordan Elliott |\n| Melanie Ellis |\n| Jon English |\n| Richard Enoff Jarrod Esparza Jonathan Eubank |\n| Steven Epps Gary Evans Jody Evans |\n| Ricky Evans Ronald Evans Leann Evers Ronnie Ezernack Ricky Farnsworth |\n| Andrew Farris |\n| Shyla Fast |\n| Marcie Farris Bryan Ferguson |\n| Keith Ferguson Teresita Ferguson Perry Fields III Tommy Fillman Thomas Finch Brent Finley Steven Fisbeck Dave Fisher Jerry Fisher |\n| John Fisher |\n| Chris Flanagan |\n| Michael Flanery Matt Fleischer Brenda Flesher |\n| Jose Flores Jr. Garrett Flowers Terry Floyd Jr. Danny Ford Martha Ford Jimmy Forsyth Clarence Foster Clayton Foutch Jason Franze |\n| Mandie Frazier |\n| Travis Frels Nicole Fritz |\n| Larry Frost Sam Frydenlund Evan Fuqua Jr. Carol Gaddis |\n| Javier Garza |\n| Frank Gagliardi Martin Garcia Sr. April Gardner George Garfield Javier H. Garza Jr. Joel Garza |\n| Raul Garzes John Gasaway Douglas Gaston Scott Gaston Brian Gauntt Kennie Gay Anne George Jim Gerstner Bobby Gibson Steven Giddings Timothy Giddings |\n| Jon Giffin |\n| Anthony Gilliam Cameron Gilmer |\n| Jim Gipson Jr. Ryan Glenn Jesse Gomez Lindi Gomez |\n| Zac Gonsior |\n\nApril Gonzalez\n\nEdgar Gonzalez\n\nJulio Gonzalez\n\nBilly Goodnight\n\nJustin Goodson\n\nLacey Goodwin\n\nElijah Gordon\n\nLindsay Gowan\n\nMitch Grant\n\nKenneth W. Graves\n\nBilly Gravitt\n\nRon Gray\n\nGabe Green\n\nCamm Grim\n\nLane Grimes III\n\nRafael Guerra\n\nHenry Gutierrez Jr.\n\nRicardo Guzman\n\nDarryl Haas\n\nScott Hackworth\n\nLance Haffner\n\nLarry Hagelberg\n\nRobert Hagerdon\n\nWayne Haire\n\nFreddy Hale\n\nKim Haley\n\nBilly Hallman\n\nJohn Hamilton\n\nJoy Hamilton\n\nNathan Hamilton\n\nNathan Hanks\n\nJoe Hanna\n\nRobert Hanna\n\nTony Hansen\n\nRandy Hansford\n\nDustin Hanson\n\nJosh Hardie\n\nDean Harding\n\nFawn Hardman\n\nJames Hardway\n\nRyan Harkins\n\nJames Harman\n\nCody Harrel\n\nBryan Harris\n\nMike Harris\n\nRobert L. Harris\n\nTerry Harris\n\nSamuel Harroff\n\nDarrel Hart\n\nDonald Hart\n\nKevin Hartl\n\nRoger Hartley\n\nSteven R. Harvey\n\nDon Harville\n\nTimmy Hass\n\nDarcy Hawkins\n\nCarroll Hayes\n\nEric Hayes\n\nChristopher Hayward\n\nRobert Hayward\n\nTeresa Hearn\n\nBrad Heath\n\nSabrina Hedrick\n\nDaniel Henderson\n\nGeorge Henderson\n\nNicholas Henderson\n\nMary Henning\n\nMark Henry\n\nDan Hensley\n\nArmando Hernandez\n\nRafael Hernandez\n\nMatthew Herrin\n\nJamie Hibbs\n\nJoe Hicks\n\nSid Hicks\n\nTerry Hicks\n\nJennifer Higgins\n\nMichelle Hileman\n\nChad Hill\n\nJames Hill\n\nClyde Hinson\n\nMark Hlatky\n\nChad Hledik\n\nJustin Hobbs\n\nJimmy Hodges\n\nJoseph Hodges\n\nJustin Hodges\n\nPatty Hoecker\n\nEric Hoehne\n\nChad Hoffman\n\nHenry Hoffman\n\nLisa Hoffman\n\nTom Holland\n\nMike Hollis\n\nBradley Holman\n\nBryce Holmes\n\nTimothy Holmes\n\nMichael Holson\n\nLarry Holt\n\nDustin Homesley\n\nMichael Hommertzheim\n\nBill Hooper\n\nKevin Hooper\n\nDavid Hoover\n\nMelissa Hoppe\n\nRonnie Hoskins\n\nBonnie House\n\nDebbie Houston\n\nScott Howard\n\nSeth Howard\n\nJason Howe\n\nKenneth Hubbard\n\nRachel Hubbard\n\nCheryl Hudak\n\nMark Hughes\n\nMarshall Hughes\n\nKirk Hungerford\n\nFrankie Hunt\n\nBret Hunter\n\nTami Hunter\n\nElbert Idlett\n\nLoyd Idlett\n\nPete Irby\n\nJeff Iven\n\nSherry Izell\n\nJoe R. Jackson\n\nLindsay Jackson\n\nMarianne Jackson\n\nPamela Jackson\n\nJavey Jamison\n\nLance Jamison\n\nTodd Jamison\n\nEric Jenkinson\n\nJessica Jennings\n\nJon Jernigan\n\nDavid Jirousek\n\nAlex Johnson\n\nDonald Johnson\n\nRandy Johnson\n\nSteve G. Johnson\n\nWilliam Johnson\n\nJeri Johnston\n\nJoy Johnston\n\nCindy M. Jones\n\nGary Jones\n\nKyle Jones\n\nTravis Jones\n\nBev Jordan\n\nDoug Jordan\n\nLauren Jordan\n\nJeffery Judd\n\nHunter Kam\n\nHemant Kataria\n\nLisa Kaulaity\n\nTroy Keel\n\nMarvin Keeling Jr.\n\nKenneth Keeton\n\nBelo Kellam III\n\nLarry Keller\n\nDiana Kelley\n\nTommy Kelley\n\nTracy Kelting\n\nSammy Kendall\n\nKris Kendrick\n\nJosh Kennedy\n\nJoe Ketzner\n\nRussell Kidd\n\nJohn Kieschnick\n\nJeff Kiker\n\nWayne Kimberling\n\nJohn Kimbleton\n\nFay Kincher\n\nJessica King\n\nRichard King\n\nNathan Kirtley\n\nJeffrey Klingel\n\nBuzz Knapp\n\nAllen Knippers\n\nJeff Knoblock\n\nCharles Knotts\n\nSteve Knowles\n\nLaurie Knox\n\nSanjay Kodam\n\nBlake Koonce\n\nNathan Kress\n\nMuhamed Kuburic\n\nSunita Kuburic\n\nCameron Kuykendall\n\nHoang Lam\n\nJane Lam\n\nTony Lamas\n\nJerry Lambert Jr.\n\nCorbin Land\n\nSandra Landgraf\n\nBob Langdon\n\nChris Lauhon\n\nJohn Lawman Jr.\n\nKelly Lawson\n\nTom Layman\n\nRyan Lee\n\nDave Leopold\n\nCindy Lewis\n\nFred Lewis\n\nJames LeBouef\n\nKaren Liles\n\nJim Lindley\n\nTrey Littau\n\nCharles Livingston\n\nRonald Loeffler\n\nClayton Long\n\nEllen Long\n\nTeresa Long\n\nJames Looney\n\nDavid Lopez\n\nJaime Lopez\n\nCandice Love\n\nMorgan Love\n\nDustin Lovell\n\nSilvano Lozada-Luna\n\nDavid Luke\n\nCharlie Lumpkin III\n\nBrent Lurry\n\nJosh Lyons\n\nEmily Lytle\n\nKevin Mackey\n\nJeffrey MacKay\n\nJamie Maddy\n\nJorge Maldonado\n\nJuan Maldonado\n\nRamon Maldonado\n\nMonica Malkey\n\nJames Manning\n\nJuan Manriquez\n\nJimmy Manry\n\nKerry Manuel\n\nLaura Marcellus\n\nMarkus Marr\n\nPatty Martin\n\nBraulio Martinez\n\nValente Martinez\n\nMissy Martini\n\nMichael Marunowski\n\nBobby Matthews\n\nMaya Maximova\n\nDelores Maxwell\n\nGreg May\n\nMichael Mayfield\n\nMonty Mayfield\n\nChris Mccormack\n\nHarry Mcgarr\n\nRichard Mcguire\n\nAngela McAlister\n\nJulie McCann\n\nKatie McCord\n\nLacy McCornack\n\nGarrett McCullough\n\nShaun McDaniel\n\nDavid McDougal\n\nJenni McEachern\n\nKelle McEwen\n\nRay McFarland\n\nMeghan McGhee\n\nTodd McGinley\n\nChristopher L. McGinnis\n\nCurtis McIntyre\n\nIrma McIntyre\n\nPatrick McKim\n\nJessica McLain\n\nAmy McLanahan\n\nWalter McLaughlin\n\n2010 ANNUAL REPORT |\n\n33\n\nAaron McLean\n\nCaleb McLoud\n\nMatthew McMahon\n\nSteve McMillen\n\nBeau McMillin\n\nHeather McNeil\n\nDanny McRae\n\nJames McWhirter\n\nDonnie McWhorter\n\nEd Meade\n\nTom Meadows\n\nJunior Melendez\n\nDouglas Melton\n\nWes Merchant\n\nCurtis Merilatt\n\nJarod Merle\n\nSteven Meyer\n\nBarry Michels\n\nAllen Middleman\n\nAllen J. Miller II\n\nGreg Miller\n\nGregory Miller\n\nMatthew Miller\n\nRonald E. Miller\n\nToni Millican\n\nAudrey Mimbs\n\nBenjamin Miner\n\nJerame Mink\n\nDustin Minton\n\nSantiago Miranda\n\nGeorge Moats Jr.\n\nChris Mobley\n\nJanice Modisette\n\nKeith Moffatt\n\nJohn Moles\n\nAngela Moniger\n\nAndrew Montgomery\n\nTom Mooney\n\nDeanne Moore\n\nLarry Moore\n\nMichael S. Moore\n\nWalter Moore\n\nArturo Morales\n\nGuillermo Morales\n\nHector Morales\n\nGuillermo Morales-Mata\n\nCarroll Morgan\n\nJay Morgan\n\nRoger Morgan\n\nNick Morland\n\nTim Morphis\n\nJames Morris\n\nMike Morris\n\nNicholas Morris\n\nRalph Morris\n\nBilly Morsko\n\nJoseph Mortashed\n\nJohnathan Mueller\n\nGregory Mumme II\n\nLewis Munn\n\nDanny Murray\n\nMatt Murry\n\nAntoinette Nell\n\nBree Nelson\n\nJW Nelson\n\nLacey Neuman\n\nKyle Nevels\n\nJere Newberry\n\nTravis Newberry\n\nLori Nguyen\n\nThomas Nguyen\n\nNick Niemann\n\nDrew Nugent\n\nMarvin Odermatt\n\nJason Offerman\n\nMichael Ogletree\n\nDennis O'Handley\n\nAnthony Olivas\n\nMichael J. Oliver\n\nMark Orgren\n\nChristy Orosco\n\nRandy Orsburn\n\nDon Osborn\n\nDarrel Overgaard\n\nCasey Overhultz\n\nDe Overstreet\n\nTammie Owens\n\nDavid O'Brien\n\nChris Pace\n\nThomas Pace", + "recall": 0.6607883817427386, + "true_md": "2010 ANNUAL REPORT | 33\n\nDaniel Alford Kenny Alford Jamie Allen Joshua W. Allen Jimmy Allred Billy Alven Joe E. Aly James Amelung Bob Amyx Carol Anderson Gary Anderson Randi Anderson Shelby Andrew Melanie Andrews Howard Arnold Zachary Arnold Liz Arthur Thad Ashcraft Kevin Ashley Amy Askew Micah Assulin Jennifer Atwell Roger Averitt David Avery Ed Back Misty Baeza Tim Bagby Allen Bagley Michael Bahrenburg Ronald Bailey Butch Baird Charles A. Baker Dennis Baker Sitaraman Balakrishnan Boomi Balasubramaniyan Christa Ball Michael T. Ball Lisa Ballard Janice Balliet William Barker Dean Barnes Keith Barrett Cecelia Barrington Joshua Barton Lorie Barton Brandon Bashaw Warren Bass Douglas Baughman Tammy Baxter Tim Beard Tiffany Beaver Terri Becker Steven Beckett Jim Bedford Clint Beeby Steve Beeson Danny Beets Bo Bekendam Robyn Belew Paige Benedict Cheryl Bennett Garrett Benton John Bergman Sharon Berkley Eric Bess Robert Bevel Amar Bhakta Randy Bickel Jr. Liz Bicoy Jacob Biernacki Pam Billingsley Matthew Birch Jeremy Black David Black Jr Willis Blaker III Phillip Blankenship Emily Blaschke Tony Blasier Jimmy Blevins Doug Bohlen Richard Bolding Brandi Bonner Daniel Borowski John Bottrell II Brian Bounds Barbara Bowersox Deven Bowles Donald Bowman Drew Boyer Phillip Bradford III\n\nJohn Bradshaw Mark Brannon James Branton Krystal Brauchi James Bray Michael Brenizer Bradie Brewton H Briant Melvin Bright Jr. Wesley Brogdin David Brooks Vernon Broomfield Rob Brott Natascha Brown Rodney G. Brown Sr. T. Brown Tyanne Bruce Timothy Brummage Greg Bruton CherylBryan J.D. Bryant Kala Buerger Joshua Buie Todd Bules Clifton Bullard Blair Bunch Niki Burch Roger Burford Darrel Burghardt Julie Burk John Burkhouse Jr. Jake R. Burnett Jim Burnett Aaron Burns Charles Burnsworth Richard Burrhus Phil Burrow Joseph Burton Dustin Bushnell Eric Bynum Tom A. Bynum Tom Bynum Scott Byrum Stephanie Cahill Jerry Caldwell Rickie Callender III Jason Cameron Johnnie Campbell Karen Campbell Kenneth Campbell Shanna Campbell John Canary Bryan Carey Colt Carpenter Connie Carpenter Octavio Carpio Deborah Carroll Stephan Carroll James Carter Alex Casias Bernardino Castaneda Jr. Charles Castelli Jose Castelo Aaron Casto Brandon Cates Scott Cavner Gregory Cavness Cassie Cawyer Rosa Chacon Tim Chaloupek Harvey Chambliss Paul Charles David Chavarria Oscar Chavez Kathy Cheesman James Cheshire Henry Childress Richard Childress Stephanie Choate Twila Christy Kerry Clapp Suzanne Clapper Brandon Clark David Clark Dustin Clark James Clark Leon Clark Steve Clark Jason Claunch Brad Claypool\n\nErin Clayton Eric Clements Michael Clevenger Ronald Clift Lindy Cochran Robert Cochran Brent Cockrell Lauren Coco Virgil Coleman Katie Collins Dee Combs Jason Conaway Greg Condray Andy Conyers Blayne Cook Jim Cook Jacob Cooper Linda Cooper Christy Copeland Scott Copeland Jeff Cornelius Justin Cornell Steve Cornett Preston Corp Diego Cortez Mario Cortez Janice Cory Bob Costello Bobby Costello Cody Costello Larry Costello Stoney Costello William Coston Crystal Cottrell Jereme Cowan Chris Cox Jeremy Cox Steven Cox Donnie Craft Tina Craft Grant Travis Craig Denise Cramer Bud Cravey Joe Creech Scott Crim Jimmy Crone Murphy Crosby Paul Crow Casey Culpepper Melissa Cummens Ray Cunningham II Aaron Daharsh Laurie Damron David Dani David Danley Beverly Dart Jeffrie Davidson Betsy Davis Chad Davis Garry Davis Kathy Davis Megan Davis Rodger Davis Ron Davis Kenny Dawson Robert Day Landon Dean Stanley Dean Kevin Deeds Matthew Deel Tim Deffenbaugh Gary Dennis Mark Deshazo Karl Dexter Donald DeForest Jr. Gianny Diaz Andrew Dickins Ed Dillard Robert Dison Linda Dixon Michelle Dodd Nicolas Dominguez Gary Donley Stephanie Doty Dawn Douglas Greg Douglas Lorie Douglas Johnny Dowdy John Downing Tammy Dresser\n\nAlfonso Duenez DustinDunlap Regina Dunlap Curtis Dunn Jr. Paul Duren Jim Durst Dustin Dye Tammy Eaton Robin Ebarb Michael Eddins Johnny Egnor Sr. Craig Elder Jammie Elder Jeff Elder Ebbin Elliott Jr. Jordan Elliott Melanie Ellis Jon English Richard Enoff Steven Epps Jarrod Esparza Jonathan Eubank Gary Evans Jody Evans Ricky Evans Ronald Evans Leann Evers Ronnie Ezernack Ricky Farnsworth Andrew Farris Marcie Farris Shyla Fast Bryan Ferguson Keith Ferguson Teresita Ferguson Perry Fields III Tommy Fillman Thomas Finch Brent Finley Steven Fisbeck Dave Fisher Jerry Fisher John Fisher Chris Flanagan Michael Flanery Matt Fleischer Brenda Flesher Jose Flores Jr. Garrett Flowers Terry Floyd Jr. Danny Ford Martha Ford Jimmy Forsyth Clarence Foster Clayton Foutch Jason Franze Mandie Frazier Travis Frels Nicole Fritz Larry Frost Sam Frydenlund Evan Fuqua Jr. Carol Gaddis Frank Gagliardi Martin Garcia Sr. April Gardner George Garfield Javier Garza Javier H. Garza Jr. Joel Garza Raul Garzes John Gasaway Douglas Gaston Scott Gaston Brian Gauntt Kennie Gay Anne George Jim Gerstner Bobby Gibson Steven Giddings Timothy Giddings Jon Giffin Anthony Gilliam Cameron Gilmer Jim Gipson Jr. Ryan Glenn Jesse Gomez Lindi Gomez Zac Gonsior Alberto Gonzalez\n\nApril Gonzalez Edgar Gonzalez Julio Gonzalez Billy Goodnight Justin Goodson Lacey Goodwin Elijah Gordon Lindsay Gowan Mitch Grant Kenneth W. Graves Billy Gravitt Ron Gray Gabe Green Camm Grim Lane Grimes III Rafael Guerra Henry Gutierrez Jr. Ricardo Guzman Darryl Haas Scott Hackworth Lance Haffner Larry Hagelberg Robert Hagerdon Wayne Haire Freddy Hale Kim Haley Billy Hallman John Hamilton Joy Hamilton Nathan Hamilton Nathan Hanks Joe Hanna Robert Hanna Tony Hansen Randy Hansford Dustin Hanson Josh Hardie Dean Harding Fawn Hardman James Hardway Ryan Harkins James Harman Cody Harrel Bryan Harris Mike Harris Robert L. Harris Terry Harris Samuel Harroff Darrel Hart Donald Hart Kevin Hartl Roger Hartley Steven R. Harvey Don Harville Timmy Hass Darcy Hawkins Carroll Hayes Eric Hayes Christopher Hayward Robert Hayward Teresa Hearn Brad Heath Sabrina Hedrick Daniel Henderson George Henderson Nicholas Henderson Mary Henning Mark Henry Dan Hensley Armando Hernandez Rafael Hernandez Matthew Herrin Jamie Hibbs Joe Hicks Sid Hicks Terry Hicks Jennifer Higgins Michelle Hileman Chad Hill James Hill Clyde Hinson Mark Hlatky Chad Hledik Justin Hobbs Jimmy Hodges Joseph Hodges Justin Hodges Patty Hoecker Eric Hoehne Chad Hoffman\n\nHenryHoffman Lisa Hoffman Tom Holland Mike Hollis Bradley Holman BryceHolmes Timothy Holmes Michael Holson Larry Holt Dustin Homesley Michael Hommertzheim Bill Hooper KevinHooper David Hoover Melissa Hoppe Ronnie Hoskins Bonnie House Debbie Houston Scott Howard Seth Howard Jason Howe Kenneth Hubbard Rachel Hubbard Cheryl Hudak Mark Hughes Marshall Hughes Kirk Hungerford Frankie Hunt Bret Hunter Tami Hunter Elbert Idlett Loyd Idlett Pete Irby Jeff Iven Sherry Izell Joe R. Jackson Lindsay Jackson Marianne Jackson Pamela Jackson Javey Jamison Lance Jamison Todd Jamison Eric Jenkinson Jessica Jennings Jon Jernigan David Jirousek Alex Johnson Donald Johnson Randy Johnson Steve G. Johnson William Johnson Jeri Johnston Joy Johnston Cindy M. Jones Gary Jones Kyle Jones Travis Jones Bev Jordan Doug Jordan Lauren Jordan Jeffery Judd Hunter Kam Hemant Kataria Lisa Kaulaity Troy Keel Marvin Keeling Jr. Kenneth Keeton Belo Kellam III Larry Keller Diana Kelley Tommy Kelley Tracy Kelting Sammy Kendall Kris Kendrick Josh Kennedy Joe Ketzner Russell Kidd John Kieschnick JeffKiker Wayne Kimberling John Kimbleton Fay Kincher Jessica King Richard King Nathan Kirtley Jeffrey Klingel Buzz Knapp Allen Knippers Jeff Knoblock Charles Knotts\n\nSteve Knowles Laurie Knox Sanjay Kodam Blake Koonce Nathan Kress Muhamed Kuburic Sunita Kuburic Cameron Kuykendall Hoang Lam Jane Lam Tony Lamas Jerry Lambert Jr. Corbin Land Sandra Landgraf Bob Langdon Chris Lauhon John Lawman Jr. Kelly Lawson Tom Layman Ryan Lee Dave Leopold Cindy Lewis Fred Lewis James LeBouef Karen Liles Jim Lindley Trey Littau Charles Livingston Ronald Loeffler Clayton Long Ellen Long Teresa Long James Looney David Lopez Jaime Lopez Candice Love Morgan Love Dustin Lovell Silvano Lozada-Luna David Luke Charlie Lumpkin III Brent Lurry Josh Lyons Emily Lytle Kevin Mackey JeffreyMacKay Jamie Maddy Jorge Maldonado Juan Maldonado Ramon Maldonado Monica Malkey James Manning Juan Manriquez Jimmy Manry Kerry Manuel Laura Marcellus Markus Marr Patty Martin Braulio Martinez Valente Martinez Missy Martini Michael Marunowski Bobby Matthews Maya Maximova Delores Maxwell Greg May Michael Mayfield Monty Mayfield Chris Mccormack Harry Mcgarr Richard Mcguire Angela McAlister Julie McCann KatieMcCord Lacy McCornack Garrett McCullough Shaun McDaniel David McDougal Jenni McEachern Kelle McEwen Ray McFarland Meghan McGhee Todd McGinley Christopher L. McGinnis Curtis McIntyre Irma McIntyre Patrick McKim Jessica McLain Amy McLanahan Walter McLaughlin\n\nAaron McLean Caleb McLoud Matthew McMahon Steve McMillen Beau McMillin Heather McNeil Danny McRae James McWhirter Donnie McWhorter Ed Meade Tom Meadows Junior Melendez Douglas Melton Wes Merchant Curtis Merilatt Jarod Merle Steven Meyer Barry Michels Allen Middleman Allen J. Miller II Greg Miller Gregory Miller Matthew Miller Ronald E. Miller Toni Millican Audrey Mimbs Benjamin Miner Jerame Mink Dustin Minton Santiago Miranda George Moats Jr. Chris Mobley Janice Modisette Keith Moffatt John Moles Angela Moniger Andrew Montgomery Tom Mooney Deanne Moore Larry Moore Michael S. Moore Walter Moore Arturo Morales Guillermo Morales Hector Morales Guillermo Morales-Mata Carroll Morgan Jay Morgan Roger Morgan Nick Morland Tim Morphis James Morris Mike Morris Nicholas Morris Ralph Morris Billy Morsko Joseph Mortashed Johnathan Mueller Gregory Mumme II Lewis Munn Danny Murray Matt Murry AntoinetteNell Bree Nelson JW Nelson Lacey Neuman Kyle Nevels Jere Newberry Travis Newberry Lori Nguyen Thomas Nguyen Nick Niemann Drew Nugent Marvin Odermatt Jason Offerman Michael Ogletree Dennis O’Handley Anthony Olivas Michael J. Oliver Mark Orgren Christy Orosco Randy Orsburn Don Osborn Darrel Overgaard Casey Overhultz De Overstreet Tammie Owens David O’Brien Chris Pace Thomas Pace" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9236154104108328, + "doc_id": "606e734a70541fed5063d5baff7d906a838ee7cd1be556e6c3d9a421186344fe", + "edit_distance": 0.07744565217391304, + "f1_score": 0.9944547134935307, + "meteor": 0.9345917246305888, + "precision": 0.9962962962962963, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 1 - STATEMENT OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES continued\n\n## b) Exploration and Evaluation Expenditure\n\nExploration and evaluation expenditures incurred are accumulated in respect of each identifiable area of interest. These costs are capitalised to the extent that they are expected to be recouped through the successful development of the area or where activities in the area have not yet reached a stage that permits reasonable assessment of the existence of economically recoverable reserves. Any such estimates and assumptions may change as new information becomes available. If, after the expenditure is capitalized, information becomes available suggesting that the recovery of the expenditure is unlikely, for example a dry hole, the relevant capitalized amount is written off in the consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income in the period in which new information becomes available. The costs of assets constructed within the Group includes the leasehold cost, geological and geophysical costs, and an appropriate proportion of fixed and variable overheads directly attributable to the exploration and acquisition of undeveloped oil and gas properties.\n\nWhen approval of commercial development of a discovered oil or gas field occurs, the accumulated costs for the relevant area of interest are transferred to development and production assets. The costs of developed and producing assets are amortised over the life of the area according to the rate of depletion of the proved and probable developed reserves. The costs associated with the undeveloped acreage are not subject to depletion.\n\nThe carrying amounts of the Group's exploration and evaluation assets are reviewed at each reporting date, in conjunction with the impairment review process referred to in Note 1(f), to determine whether any of impairment indicators exists. Impairment indicators could include i) tenure over the licence area has expired during the period or will expire in the near future, and is not expected to be renewed, ii) substantive expenditure on further exploration for and evaluation of mineral resources in the specific area is not budgeted or planned, iii) exploration for and evaluation of resources in the specific area have not led to the discovery of commercially viable quantities of resources, and the Group has decided to discontinue activities in the specific area, or iv) sufficient data exist to indicate that although a development is likely to proceed, the carrying amount of the exploration and evaluation asset is unlikely to be recovered in full from successful development or from sale. Where an indicator of impairment exists, a formal estimate of the recoverable amount is made and any resulting impairment loss is recognized in the income statement.\n\n## c) Development and Production Assets and Property and Equipment\n\nDevelopment and production assets, and property and equipment are carried at cost less, where applicable, any accumulated depreciation, amortisation and impairment losses. The costs of assets constructed within the Group includes the cost of materials, direct labor, borrowing costs and an appropriate proportion of fixed and variable overheads directly attributable to the acquisition or development of oil and gas properties and facilities necessary for the extraction of resources.\n\nThe carrying amount of development and production assets and property and equipment are reviewed at each reporting date to ensure that they are not in excess of the recoverable amount from these assets. Development and production assets are assessed for impairment on a cash-generating unit basis. A cash-generating unit is the smallest grouping of assets that generates independent cash inflows. Management has assessed its CGUs as being an individual basin, which is the lowest level for which cash inflows are largely independent of those of other assets. Impairment losses recongised in respect of cash-generating units are allocated to reduce the carrying amount of the assets in the unit on a pro-rata basis.\n\n- 61 -", + "recall": 0.992619926199262, + "true_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 1 - STATEMENT OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES continued\n\n## b) Exploration and Evaluation Expenditure Exploration and evaluation expenditures incurred are accumulated in respect of each identifiable area of interest.\n\n## c) Development and Production Assets and Property and Equipment Development and production assets, and property and equipment are carried at cost less, where applicable, any\n\nb) Exploration and Evaluation Expenditure Exploration and evaluation expenditures incurred are accumulated in respect of each identifiable area of interest. These costs are capitalised to the extent that they are expected to be recouped through the successful development of the area or where activities in the area have not yet reached a stage that permits reasonable assessment of the existence of economically recoverable reserves. Any such estimates and assumptions may change as new information becomes available. If, after the expenditure is capitalized, information becomes available suggesting that the recovery of the expenditure is unlikely, for example a dry hole, the relevant capitalized amount is written off in the consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income in the period in which new information becomes available. The costs of assets constructed within the Group includes the leasehold cost, geological and geophysical costs, and an appropriate proportion of fixed and variable overheads directly attributable to the exploration and acquisition of undeveloped oil and gas properties. \n\nWhen approval of commercial development of a discovered oil or gas field occurs, the accumulated costs for the relevant area of interest are transferred to development and production assets. The costs of developed and producing assets are amortised over the life of the area according to the rate of depletion of the proved and probable developed reserves. The costs associated with the undeveloped acreage are not subject to depletion. \n\nThe carrying amounts of the Group’s exploration and evaluation assets are reviewed at each reporting date, in conjunction with the impairment review process referred to in Note 1(f), to determine whether any of impairment indicators exists. Impairment indicators could include i) tenure over the licence area has expired during the period or will expire in the near future, and is not expected to be renewed, ii) substantive expenditure on further exploration for and evaluation of mineral resources in the specific area is not budgeted or planned, iii) exploration for and evaluation of resources in the specific area have not led to the discovery of commercially viable quantities of resources, and the Group has decided to discontinue activities in the specific area, or iv) sufficient data exist to indicate that although a development is likely to proceed, the carrying amount of the exploration and evaluation asset is unlikely to be recovered in full from successful development or from sale. Where an indicator of impairment exists, a formal estimate of the recoverable amount is made and any resulting impairment loss is recognized in the income statement. \n\nc) Development and Production Assets and Property and Equipment Development and production assets, and property and equipment are carried at cost less, where applicable, any accumulated depreciation, amortisation and impairment losses. The costs of assets constructed within the Group includes the cost of materials, direct labor, borrowing costs and an appropriate proportion of fixed and variable overheads directly attributable to the acquisition or development of oil and gas properties and facilities necessary for the extraction of resources. \n\nThe carrying amount of development and production assets and property and equipment are reviewed at each reporting date to ensure that they are not in excess of the recoverable amount from these assets. Development and production assets are assessed for impairment on a cash-generating unit basis. A cash-generating unit is the smallest grouping of assets that generates independent cash inflows. Management has assessed its CGUs as being an individual basin, which is the lowest level for which cash inflows are largely independent of those of other assets. Impairment losses recongised in respect of cash-generating units are allocated to reduce the carrying amount of the assets in the unit on a pro-rata basis. \n\n- 61 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "c5671c3a35c5f099d08b25634d86ccb4c3dccf83a9ab5b21df2fe908ce733be8", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9998177842565598, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Principal Work-Life Balance Systems (Employee Support Programs)\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n67", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## Principal Work-Life Balance Systems (Employee Support Programs)\n\nSMFG 2011 67" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.929127324847982, + "doc_id": "bd0bf2fb31cad9b200fe9cd17d161b54c2fcc22e9f24ba0d30c5e5437fe9c9b6", + "edit_distance": 0.728538283062645, + "f1_score": 0.9711751662971175, + "meteor": 0.8745412847492032, + "precision": 0.9776785714285714, + "pred_md": "## ◎ Establish a solid financial base and corporate infrastructure\n\nOur group has been rapidly expanding our business operations as each group company has been growing to become a major player in its business area and we have increased the number of group companies through acquisitions, including SMBC Nikko Securities. Also, in order to meet the global strengthening of financial regulations, we are required to focus further on the enhancement of our risk-return and cost-return profiles and steadily expand our bottom-line profit. Therefore, we will strengthen our group management capabilities including risk management, control consolidated overhead ratio at 50-55% and develop human resources required for global business expansions.\n\n## ◎ Capital Policy and Returns for Shareholders\n\nIn the medium-term management plan, we have set a management goal to achieve Core Tier I ratio* of approximately 8% on March 31, 2014. This means that we will strive to achieve a capital ratio of approximately 1% higher than the Basel III required level of 7% by five years earlier than the Basel III full implementation deadline of March 2019.\n\n- * Calculated based on the definition under Basel III in 2019; all regulatory adjustments are deducted from Common Equity Tier I, excluding net unrealized gains (losses) on other securities (SMFG consolidated).\n\nMeanwhile, our basic policy on returns to shareholders is to increase returns consistently and continuously through the sustainable growth of enterprise value, by sustaining a consolidated payout ratio of over 20%, while prudently managing the level of retained earnings to maintain our financial soundness in view of the public nature of banking business operations.\n\nIn order to achieve these two goals, we will proactively allocate risk-adjusted assets into strategic business areas while controlling aggregate volume of risk-adjusted assets by reducing low-yielding assets, and strengthen our capital base by consistently accumulating retained earnings. We will consider any increases of shareholders returns, by taking into account the level of our regulatory capital, payout ratio and dividends.\n\nWe shall sincerely and faithfully pursue these initiatives to meet the expectations of our stakeholders.\n\nSeptember 2011\n\nKoichi Miyata President Sumitomo Mitsui Financial Group, Inc.\n\nTakeshi Kunibe President and CEO\n\nSumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation\n\n## ◎ Group Structure*\n\n* As of Jun. 30, 2011 for shareholding ratio and as of Mar. 31, 2011 for other figures.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n7", + "recall": 0.9647577092511013, + "true_md": "Meanwhile, our basic policy on returns to shareholders is to increase returns consistently and continuously through the sustain- able growth of enterprise value, by sustaining a consolidated payout ratio of over 20%, while prudently managing the level of retained earnings to maintain our financial soundness in view of the public nature of banking business operations.\n\nOur group has been rapidly expanding our business operations as each group company has been growing to become a major player in its business area and we have increased the number of group com- panies through acquisitions, including SMBC Nikko Securities. Also, in order to meet the global strengthening of financial regulations, we are required to focus further on the enhancement of our risk-return and cost-return profiles and steadily expand our bottom-line profit. Therefore, we will strengthen our group management capabilities including risk management, control consolidated overhead ratio at 50-55% and develop human resources required for global business expansions.\n\nIn order to achieve these two goals, we will proactively allocate risk-adjusted assets into strategic business areas while controlling aggregate volume of risk-adjusted assets by reducing low-yielding assets, and strengthen our capital base by consistently accumulat- ing retained earnings. We will consider any increases of shareholders returns, by taking into account the level of our regulatory capital, payout ratio and dividends.\n\n## ◎ Establish a solid financial base and corporate infrastructure\n\n## ◎ Capital Policy and Returns for Shareholders\n\nWe shall sincerely and faithfully pursue these initiatives to meet the expectations of our stakeholders.\n\nIn the medium-term management plan, we have set a management goal to achieve Core Tier I ratio* of approximately 8% on March 31, 2014. This means that we will strive to achieve a capital ratio of approximately 1% higher than the Basel III required level of 7% by five years earlier than the Basel III full implementation deadline of March 2019.\n\n* Calculated based on the definition under Basel III in 2019; all regulatory adjustments are deducted from Common Equity Tier I, excluding net unreal- ized gains (losses) on other securities (SMFG consolidated).\n\n## ◎ Group Structure*\n\nSeptember 2011\n\nTakeshi Kunibe President and CEO Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation\n\nKoichi Miyata President Sumitomo Mitsui Financial Group, Inc.\n\n* As of Jun. 30, 2011 for shareholding ratio and as of Mar. 31, 2011 for other figures.\n\nSMFG 2011 7" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9655541425637927, + "doc_id": "f9c17e25e47312784839e9a54df528bdb0cf01e00c73db775f9537fbc95940f0", + "edit_distance": 0.6121794871794872, + "f1_score": 0.9914110429447852, + "meteor": 0.7301126997400234, + "precision": 0.9926289926289926, + "pred_md": "## Contingencies\n\nConsiderable judgement is involved in the determination of contingent liabilities. Our judgement is based on information currently known to us, and the probability of the ultimate resolution of the contingencies. If it becomes probable that a contingent liability will result in an outflow of economic resources, we will record a provision in the period the change in probability occurs, and it could be material to our consolidated financial position and results of operations.\n\n## Transactions with Related Parties\n\nWe have entered into certain transactions in the normal course of business with related parties in which we have an equity interest. The amounts paid to these parties were as follows:\n\nWe have entered into certain transactions with companies, the partners or senior officers of which are Directors of Rogers and/or our subsidiary companies. Total amounts paid to these related parties, directly or indirectly, were as follows:\n\nWe have entered into certain transactions with our controlling shareholder and companies it controls. These transactions are subject to formal agreements approved by the Audit Committee. Total amounts paid to these related parties generally reflects the charges to Rogers for occasional business use of aircraft, net of other administrative services, and were less than $1 million for 2013 and 2012 combined.\n\nThese transactions are measured at the exchange amount, being the amount agreed to by the related parties are at market terms and conditions and are reviewed by the Audit Committee.\n\n## New Accounting S tandards\n\nWe adopted the following new accounting standards effective January 1, 2013, of which none had a material impact on prior periods.\n\n- GLYPH<129> IFRS 10, Consolidated Financial Statements (IFRS 10) As a result of the adoption of IFRS 10, we have changed our approach to determining whether we have control over and consequently whether we consolidate our investees. IFRS 10 introduces a new control model that is applicable to all investees. Among other things, it requires the consolidation of an investee if we control the investee on the basis of de facto circumstances. In accordance with the transitional provisions of IFRS 10, we re-assessed the control conclusion for our investees at January 1, 2013. We made no changes in the current or comparative period as a result of this assessment.\n- GLYPH<129> IFRS 11, Joint Arrangements (IFRS 11) As a result of the adoption of IFRS 11, we have changed how we evaluate our interests in joint arrangements. Under IFRS 11, we classify our interests in joint arrangements as either joint operations or joint ventures depending on our right to the assets and obligations for the liabilities of the arrangements. When making this assessment, we consider the structure of the arrangements, the legal form of any separate vehicles, the contractual terms of the arrangements and other facts\n\nand circumstances. We have re-evaluated our involvement in our joint arrangements and have accounted for these either using the proportionate consolidation method, or the equity method depending on whether the investment is defined as a joint operation or a joint venture, respectively. The adoption of IFRS 11 was not material to the current or comparative years.\n\n- GLYPH<129> IFRS 13, Fair Value Measurement (IFRS 13) On January 1, 2013, we adopted IFRS 13, on a prospective basis, which provides a single source of guidance on how fair value is measured, replacing the fair value measurement guidance contained in individual IFRSs. IFRS 13 defines fair value and establishes a framework for measuring fair value. It does not introduce new fair value measurements or eliminate the practicability exceptions to fair value measurements that currently exist in certain standards. We have incorporated the fair value requirements throughout our annual consolidated financial statements.\n- GLYPH<129> IAS 19, Employee Benefits (2011) (IAS 19) On January 1, 2013, we adopted IAS 19, which changes the basis for determining the income or expense related to defined benefit plans. This amendment eliminated the concept of return on plan assets and interest cost (income) and replaced it with a net interest cost that is calculated by applying the discount rate to the net liability (asset). The net interest cost takes into account any changes in the net defined benefit liability (asset) during the period as a result of contributions and benefit payments. The adoption of the amended standard resulted in an increase in finance costs of $7 million and a decrease in other comprehensive income, for a net effect of nil in comprehensive income for the year ended December 31, 2012 and did not have a material impact on net assets as at December 31, 2012. See note 22 of the annual consolidated financial statements for more information about our pension plans.\n- GLYPH<129> IAS 36, Impairment of Asset (IAS 36) -In May 2013, the IASB amended IAS 36 to clarify the circumstances in which the recoverable amount of assets or cash-generating units is required to be disclosed, to clarify the disclosures required, and to introduce an explicit requirement to disclose the discount rate used in determining impairment (or reversals) where the recoverable amount (based on fair value less costs of disposal) is determined using a present value technique. The amendments are effective for annual periods beginning on or after January 1, 2014, with early adoption permitted. We early adopted this policy as of January 1, 2013 and made the required disclosures.\n\n## Recent Accounting Pronouncements\n\nWe are required to adopt the following revised accounting standards on or after January 1, 2014. We are assessing the impact of adopting these revised standards on our 2014 interim and consolidated financial statements.\n\n- GLYPH<129> IAS 32, Financial Instruments: Presentation (IAS 32) - In December 2011, the IASB amended IAS 32 to clarify the meaning of when an entity has a current legally enforceable right of set-off. The amendments are effective for annual periods beginning on or after January 1, 2014 and are required to be applied retrospectively. We do not expect this to have a significant impact on our consolidated financial statements.\n- GLYPH<129> IAS 39, Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement (IAS 39) - In June 2013, the IASB amended IAS 39 to provide relief from discontinuing an existing hedging relationship when a novation that was not contemplated in the original hedging documentation meets specific criteria. The amendments are effective for annual periods beginning on or after January 1, 2014 and are required to be applied\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC.\n\n81\n\nMANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS", + "recall": 0.9901960784313726, + "true_md": "## Contingencies\n\n## Transactions with Related Parties\n\n## New Accounting S tandards\n\n## Recent Accounting Pronouncements\n\nWe adopted the following new accounting standards effective January 1, 2013, of which none had a material impact on prior periods.\n\nWe are required to adopt the following revised accounting standards on or after January 1, 2014. We are assessing the impact of adopting these revised standards on our 2014 interim and consolidated financial statements.\n\nConsiderable judgement is involved in the determination of contingent liabilities. Our judgement is based on information currently known to us, and the probability of the ultimate resolution of the contingencies. If it becomes probable that a contingent liability will result in an outflow of economic resources, we will record a provision in the period the change in probability occurs, and it could be material to our consolidated financial position and results of operations.\n\nWe have entered into certain transactions in the normal course of business with related parties in which we have an equity interest. The amounts paid to these parties were as follows:\n\nWe have entered into certain transactions with companies, the partners or senior officers of which are Directors of Rogers and/or our subsidiary companies. Total amounts paid to these related parties, directly or indirectly, were as follows:\n\nand circumstances. We have re-evaluated our involvement in our joint arrangements and have accounted for these either using the proportionate consolidation method, or the equity method depending on whether the investment is defined as a joint operation or a joint venture, respectively. The adoption of IFRS 11 was not material to the current or comparative years.\n\nMANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AN D ANALYSIS\n\n– In June 2013, the IASB amended IAS 39 to provide relief from discontinuing an existing hedging relationship when a novation that was not contemplated in the original hedging documentation meets specific criteria. The amendments are effective for annual periods beginning on or after January 1, 2014 and are required to be applied\n\n- GLYPH<129> IAS 32, Financial Instruments: Presentation (IAS 32) – In December 2011, the IASB amended IAS 32 to clarify the meaning of when an entity has a current legally enforceable right of set-off. The amendments are effective for annual periods beginning on or after January 1, 2014 and are required to be applied retrospectively. We do not expect this to have a significant impact on our consolidated financial statements.\n\n- GLYPH<129> IAS 39, Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement (IAS 39)\n\n- GLYPH<129> IFRS 10, Consolidated Financial Statements (IFRS 10) – As a result of the adoption of IFRS 10, we have changed our approach to determining whether we have control over and consequently whether we consolidate our investees. IFRS 10 introduces a new control model that is applicable to all investees. Among other things, it requires the consolidation of an investee if we control the investee on the basis of de facto circumstances. In accordance with the transitional provisions of IFRS 10, we re-assessed the control conclusion for our investees at January 1, 2013. We made no changes in the current or comparative period as a result of this assessment.\n\n- GLYPH<129> IFRS 11, Joint Arrangements (IFRS 11) – As a result of the adoption of IFRS 11, we have changed how we evaluate our interests in joint arrangements. Under IFRS 11, we classify our interests in joint arrangements as either joint operations or joint ventures depending on our right to the assets and obligations for the liabilities of the arrangements. When making this assessment, we consider the structure of the arrangements, the legal form of any separate vehicles, the contractual terms of the arrangements and other facts\n\n- GLYPH<129> IAS 36, Impairment of Asset (IAS 36) – In May 2013, the IASB amended IAS 36 to clarify the circumstances in which the recoverable amount of assets or cash-generating units is required to be disclosed, to clarify the disclosures required, and to introduce an explicit requirement to disclose the discount rate used in determining impairment (or reversals) where the recoverable amount (based on fair value less costs of disposal) is determined using a present value technique. The amendments are effective for annual periods beginning on or after January 1, 2014, with early adoption permitted. We early adopted this policy as of January 1, 2013 and made the required disclosures.\n\n- GLYPH<129> IAS 19, Employee Benefits (2011) (IAS 19) – On January 1, 2013, we adopted IAS 19, which changes the basis for determining the income or expense related to defined benefit plans. This amendment eliminated the concept of return on plan assets and interest cost (income) and replaced it with a net interest cost that is calculated by applying the discount rate to the net liability (asset). The net interest cost takes into account any changes in the net defined benefit liability (asset) during the period as a result of contributions and benefit payments. The adoption of the amended standard resulted in an increase in finance costs of $7 million and a decrease in other comprehensive income, for a net effect of nil in comprehensive income for the year ended December 31, 2012 and did not have a material impact on net assets as at December 31, 2012. See note 22 of the annual consolidated financial statements for more information about our pension plans.\n\n- GLYPH<129> IFRS 13, Fair Value Measurement (IFRS 13) – On January 1, 2013, we adopted IFRS 13, on a prospective basis, which provides a single source of guidance on how fair value is measured, replacing the fair value measurement guidance contained in individual IFRSs. IFRS 13 defines fair value and establishes a framework for measuring fair value. It does not introduce new fair value measurements or eliminate the practicability exceptions to fair value measurements that currently exist in certain standards. We have incorporated the fair value requirements throughout our annual consolidated financial statements.\n\nWe have entered into certain transactions with our controlling shareholder and companies it controls. These transactions are subject to formal agreements approved by the Audit Committee. Total amounts paid to these related parties generally reflects the charges to Rogers for occasional business use of aircraft, net of other administrative services, and were less than $1 million for 2013 and 2012 combined.\n\nThese transactions are measured at the exchange amount, being the amount agreed to by the related parties are at market terms and conditions and are reviewed by the Audit Committee.\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 81" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8716462533309883, + "doc_id": "cf7f4ddedf12285af10720ff4b4082aea9d2abf1326353600c2e7a19de283dfb", + "edit_distance": 0.19395465994962216, + "f1_score": 0.9473684210526315, + "meteor": 0.9197886604188851, + "precision": 0.9402985074626866, + "pred_md": "SMBC\n\n## Income Analysis (Nonconsolidated)\n\nSumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation\n\n## Gross Banking Profit, Classified by Domestic and International Operations\n\nMillions of yen\n\nNotes: 1. Domestic operations include yen-denominated transactions by domestic branches, while international operations include foreign-currency-denominated transactions by domestic branches and operations by overseas branches. Yen-denominated nonresident transactions and Japan offshore banking accounts are included in international operations.\n\n- 2. Income and expenses resulting from money held in trust are included in 'Other income' and 'Other expenses.' Therefore, 'Interest expenses' are shown after deduction of expenses (2011, ¥16 million; 2010, ¥20 million) related to the management of money held in trust.\n\n3. Figures in brackets [ ] indicate interest payments between domestic and international operations. As net interest figures are shown for interest rate swaps and similar instruments, some figures for domestic and international operations do not add up to their sums.\n\n- 4. Gross banking profit rate = Gross banking profit / Average balance of interest-earning assets ✕ 100\n\n## Average Balance, Interest and Earnings Yield of Interest-Earning Assets and Interest-Bearing Liabilities\n\n## Domestic Operations\n\nMillions of yen\n\nNotes: 1. 'Interest-earning assets' are shown after deduction of the average balance of noninterest-earning deposits (2011, ¥1,008,208 million; 2010, ¥875,040 million).\n\n- 2. Income and expenses resulting from money held in trust are included in 'Other income' and 'Other expenses.' Therefore, 'Interest-earning assets' are shown after deduction of the average balance of money held in trust (2011, ¥10,640 million; 2010, ¥10,191 million). 'Interest-bearing liabilities' are shown after deduction of amounts equivalent to the average balance of money held in trust (2011, ¥10,640 million; 2010, ¥10,191 million) and corresponding interest (2011, ¥16 million; 2010, ¥20 million).\n\n3. Figures in brackets [ ] indicate the average balances of interdepartmental lending and borrowing activities between domestic and international operations and related interest expenses. As net interest figures are shown for interest rate swaps and similar instruments, some figures for domestic and international operations do not add up to their sums.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n160", + "recall": 0.9545454545454546, + "true_md": "SMBC\n\n## Income Analysis (Nonconsolidated)\n\n## Gross Banking Profit, Classified by Domestic and International Operations\n\n## Average Balance, Interest and Earnings Yield of Interest-Earning Assets and Interest-Bearing Liabilities\n\n## Domestic Operations\n\nSumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation\n\nNotes: 1. Domestic operations include yen-denominated transactions by domestic branches, while international operations include foreign-currency-denominated transactions by domestic branches and operations by overseas branches. Yen-denominated nonresident transactions and Japan offshore banking accounts are included in international operations.\n\n2. Income and expenses resulting from money held in trust are included in “Other income” and “Other expenses.” Therefore, “Interest expenses” are shown after deduction of expenses (2011, ¥16 million; 2010, ¥20 million) related to the management of money held in trust.\n\n3. Figures in brackets [ ] indicate interest payments between domestic and international operations. As net interest figures are shown for interest rate swaps and similar instruments, some figures for domestic and international operations do not add up to their sums.\n\n4. Gross banking profit rate = Gross banking profit / Average balance of interest-earning assets ✕ 100\n\nNotes: 1. “Interest-earning assets” are shown after deduction of the average balance of noninterest-earning deposits (2011, ¥1,008,208 million; 2010, ¥875,040 million).\n\n2. Income and expenses resulting from money held in trust are included in “Other income” and “Other expenses.” Therefore, “Interest-earning assets” are shown after deduction of the average balance of money held in trust (2011, ¥10,640 million; 2010, ¥10,191 million). “Interest-bearing liabilities” are shown after deduction of amounts equivalent to the average balance of money held in trust (2011, ¥10,640 million; 2010, ¥10,191 million) and corresponding interest (2011, ¥16 million; 2010, ¥20 million).\n\n3. Figures in brackets [ ] indicate the average balances of interdepartmental lending and borrowing activities between domestic and international operations and related interest expenses. As net interest figures are shown for interest rate swaps and similar instruments, some figures for domestic and international operations do not add up to their sums.\n\nSMFG 2011 160" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9298765545297202, + "doc_id": "4640934f1d7dcf55b43a90038cdb2d91299a20e6d929605a2b6cf1ae7d8da4c4", + "edit_distance": 0.09, + "f1_score": 0.9928057553956834, + "meteor": 0.8863807691141719, + "precision": 0.9951923076923077, + "pred_md": "The following table presents a reconciliation of the profit (loss) attributable to owners of Sundance to Adjusted EBITDAX:\n\n## Exploration and Development\n\nFor the month of December 2014, the Company achieved record production of 9,434 Boe/d, which included 869 Boe/d of flared gas from wells waiting to hook-up to pipelines. The December 2014 exit rate increased 88% over prior year's exit rate of 5,028 Boe/d. During the year ended 31 December 2014, the Company produced 2.4 MMBoe, which included 0.2 MMBoe of flared gas. This result was more than double the production in prior year, primarily as a result of increased drilling activity and production in the Eagle Ford Basin.\n\nThe Company's exploration and development activities are focused in the Eagle Ford and the Mississippian/Woodford Formations. Costs incurred for development and production expenditures for the Eagle Ford and Mississippian/Woodford Formations during the year ended 31 December 2014 totalled $324.0 million, which included $295.9 million of drilling and development expenditure related to our 2014 plan, $3.8 million on infrastructure, and $24.3 million of drilling and development expenditure related to our 2015 plan. This investment resulted in the addition of 75 gross (42.7 net) wells into production, including 50 gross (39.5 net) Sundance-operated horizontal wells. An additional 24 gross (13.7 net) wells were drilling, being prepared for fracture stimulation or testing as at 31 December 2014, an increase of 7 gross (3.0 net) compared to the beginning of the year.\n\n## Acquisitions\n\nIn April 2014, the Company acquired approximately 4,800 net acres in the Eagle Ford for an initial purchase price of approximately $10.5 million and two separate earn out payments due upon commencement of drilling in each of three blocks of acreage (total for all three blocks of $7.7 million) and payout of the first two wells drilled on each block of the acreage ($7.7 million). The term of the agreement is two years and provides a one year extension for $500 per acre extended. This acquired acreage is adjacent to our existing acreage in McMullen County, Texas.\n\nIn July 2014, the Company completed the acquisition of approximately 5,700 net Eagle Ford acres in Dimmit County, South Texas, for approximately $36 million and a commitment to drill four Eagle Ford wells. The Company also has the option, at its sole discretion, to acquire the Seller's remaining working interest for an additional $45 million for the earlier of one year from closing the acquisition or six months from first production of hydrocarbons.\n\n- 19 -", + "recall": 0.9904306220095693, + "true_md": "- 19 - \n\nThe following table presents a reconciliation of the profit (loss) attributable to owners of Sundance to Adjusted EBITDAX: \n\nFor the month of December 2014, the Company achieved record production of 9,434 Boe/d, which included 869 Boe/d of flared gas from wells waiting to hook-up to pipelines. The December 2014 exit rate increased 88% over prior year’s exit rate of 5,028 Boe/d. During the year ended 31 December 2014, the Company produced 2.4 MMBoe, which included 0.2 MMBoe of flared gas. This result was more than double the production in prior year, primarily as a result of increased drilling activity and production in the Eagle Ford Basin. \n\nThe Company’s exploration and development activities are focused in the Eagle Ford and the Mississippian/Woodford Formations. Costs incurred for development and production expenditures for the Eagle Ford and Mississippian/Woodford Formations during the year ended 31 December 2014 totalled $324.0 million, which included $295.9 million of drilling and development expenditure related to our 2014 plan, $3.8 million on infrastructure, and $24.3 million of drilling and development expenditure related to our 2015 plan. This investment resulted in the addition of 75 gross (42.7 net) wells into production, including 50 gross (39.5 net) Sundance-operated horizontal wells. An additional 24 gross (13.7 net) wells were drilling, being prepared for fracture stimulation or testing as at 31 December 2014, an increase of 7 gross (3.0 net) compared to the beginning of the year. \n\nAcquisitions In April 2014, the Company acquired approximately 4,800 net acres in the Eagle Ford for an initial purchase price of approximately $10.5 million and two separate earn out payments due upon commencement of drilling in each of three blocks of acreage (total for all three blocks of $7.7 million) and payout of the first two wells drilled on each block of the acreage ($7.7 million). The term of the agreement is two years and provides a one year extension for $500 per acre extended. This acquired acreage is adjacent to our existing acreage in McMullen County, Texas. \n\nIn July 2014, the Company completed the acquisition of approximately 5,700 net Eagle Ford acres in Dimmit County, South Texas, for approximately $36 million and a commitment to drill four Eagle Ford wells. The Company also has the option, at its sole discretion, to acquire the Seller’s remaining working interest for an additional $45 million for the earlier of one year from closing the acquisition or six months from first production of hydrocarbons. \n\n## Acquisitions In April 2014, the Company acquired approximately 4,800 net acres in the Eagle Ford for an initial purchase price of\n\n## Exploration and Development" + }, + { + "bleu": 2.4181282417663505e-10, + "doc_id": "4b87e05b899ea977d0c8908d757e2024db38ff0682aaa0a93975bf6f606eb92a", + "edit_distance": 0.9556962025316456, + "f1_score": 0.08421052631578947, + "meteor": 0.03356136016337956, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "30\n\nExploration Report\n\n## Exploration Report", + "recall": 0.04395604395604396, + "true_md": "30 Exploration Report\n\n## Exploration Report\n\n## Summary\n\nKingsgate has a portfolio of exploration tene- ments and applications in Thailand, Chile and Lao PDR. Following the sale of exploration tenements to Caravel Minerals, exploration in Australia is currently only conducted in the vicinity of the Challenger Mine in South Australia and the Bowdens Silver Project in New South Wales.\n\nKingsgate’s South East Asian exploration team continued their exploration activities on Thailand and surrounding countries. Strategically the team has turned the majority of their attention to projects which have the capacity to add value to the Company through exploration drilling subsequent resource expansion. These projects include the granted Mining Leases at Chatree and the granted Sayabouly Concession in the Lao PDR.\n\nOutside of these active areas, the South East Asian exploration team continues to review new opportunities throughout Thailand, Laos and their neighbouring countries. \n\nwww.kingsgate.com.au" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9359593043231663, + "doc_id": "11b45998428272a3ad3f9d5b3f85bdffcc00c060e62627d2849a586a539db797", + "edit_distance": 0.29449838187702265, + "f1_score": 0.9788359788359788, + "meteor": 0.9178807491324917, + "precision": 0.9788359788359788, + "pred_md": "## (B) Quantifying Loss Frequency of Each Scenario\n\n## a. Generation of 'Average Frequency Table' for Domestic Business Offices\n\nTo quantify loss frequency for domestic branches, we assume future loss frequency is similar to historical loss frequency. And we generate an average frequency table, which is used to estimate future loss frequency. The average frequency table comprises rows of total risk score and columns of total control score and the number of loss occurrences in a one-year period for each combination of scores is given.\n\nAs risk and control assessment items are expected to have different loss occurrence contribution ratios, we analyze their loss occurrence contribution ratios for each assessment item by executing a regression analysis and weight each assessment item.\n\n## Average Frequency Table (Example)\n\n(Times/Year)\n\n## b. Quantifying Loss Frequency of Each Scenario\n\nTotal risk assessment score and total control assessment score are calculated for each scenario taking into account the weight of each assessment item described above. Then, the loss frequency of each scenario (the number of times the loss event described in the scenario occurs during a one-year period) is estimated using the average frequency table.\n\n## (C) Quantifying Loss Amount for Each Scenario\n\nIn order to quantify the loss amount for each scenario, we generate loss distribution for each 'business process & product' by using the historical transaction data of SMBC. Specifically, we assume that the historical transaction volume follows a log-normal distribution (distribution in which the logarithm of a variable follows the normal distribution) for each 'business process & product' and generate the loss-severity distribution.\n\n## (D) Estimating the Frequency of Occurrence of the 'Low-Frequency and High-Severity' Events\n\nIn order to estimate the probability of occurrence in terms of four loss amounts (¥100 million, ¥1 billion, ¥5 billion, and ¥10 billion) for each scenario, we use a log-normal distribution function for each scenario.\n\nBecause we assume the log-normal distribution to each 'business process & product,' in case one loss event occurs in a one-year period, potential loss can be regarded as likewise arising from log-normal distribution. Therefore, in this case, we estimate the probability of occurrence of four loss amounts by substituting each loss amount for the loss amount of log-normal distribution.\n\nIn case that one loss event occurs in a one-year period, the method described above is followed. However, in case that several numbers of loss events occur in a one-year period, it is conceivable that the events occurred independently of each other. Therefore, the probability of occurrence of several loss events can be calculated by the probability of one loss event raised to the power of its loss frequency.\n\nAs we quantify the loss frequency for each scenario using the average frequency table for loss events over a one-year period, we are able to estimate the probability of four loss amounts by the probability arising from the above log-normal distribution function, raised to the power of loss frequency derived from the frequency table.\n\nAfter estimating the loss frequency in terms of the four loss amounts for each scenario, we sum results for each loss event type and input them into the quantification model for SMFG (consolidated), SMBC (consolidated), and SMBC (nonconsolidated).\n\nSMFG 2011\n\nCapital Ratio Information\n\nSMFG\n\n203", + "recall": 0.9788359788359788, + "true_md": "SMFG Capital Ratio Information\n\n## (B) Quantifying Loss Frequency of Each Scenario\n\n## a. Generation of “Average Frequency Table” for Domestic Business Offices\n\nTo quantify loss frequency for domestic branches, we assume future loss frequency is similar to historical loss frequency. And we generate an average frequency table, which is used to estimate future loss frequency. The average frequency table comprises rows of total risk score and columns of total control score and the number of loss occurrences in a one-year period for each combination of scores is given. \n\nAs risk and control assessment items are expected to have different loss occurrence contribution ratios, we analyze their loss occurrence contribution ratios for each assessment item by executing a regression analysis and weight each assessment item. \n\nTotal risk assessment score and total control assessment score are calculated for each scenario taking into account the weight of each assessment item described above. Then, the loss frequency of each scenario (the number of times the loss event described in the scenario occurs during a one-year period) is estimated using the average frequency table.\n\nIn order to estimate the probability of occurrence in terms of four loss amounts (¥100 million, ¥1 billion, ¥5 billion, and ¥10 billion) for each scenario, we use a log-normal distribution function for each scenario.\n\nIn order to quantify the loss amount for each scenario, we generate loss distribution for each “business process & product” by using the historical transaction data of SMBC. Specifically, we assume that the historical transaction volume follows a log-normal \n\ndistribution (distribution in which the logarithm of a variable follows the normal distribution) for each “business process & product” and generate the loss-severity distribution. \n\nBecause we assume the log-normal distribution to each “business process & product,” in case one loss event occurs in a one-year period, potential loss can be regarded as likewise arising from log-normal distribution. Therefore, in this case, we estimate the probability of occurrence of four loss amounts by substituting each loss amount for the loss amount of log-normal distribution.\n\nIn case that one loss event occurs in a one-year period, the method described above is followed. However, in case that several numbers of loss events occur in a one-year period, it is conceivable that the events occurred independently of each other. Therefore, the probability of occurrence of several loss events can be calculated by the probability of one loss event raised to the power of its loss frequency.\n\nAs we quantify the loss frequency for each scenario using the average frequency table for loss events over a one-year period, we are able to estimate the probability of four loss amounts by the probability arising from the above log-normal distribution function, raised to the power of loss frequency derived from the frequency table.\n\nAfter estimating the loss frequency in terms of the four loss amounts for each scenario, we sum results for each loss event type and input them into the quantification model for SMFG (consolidated), SMBC (consolidated), and SMBC (nonconsolidated).\n\nSMFG 2011 203\n\n## (D) Estimating the Frequency of Occurrence of the “Low-Frequency and High-Severity” Events\n\n## (C) Quantifying Loss Amount for Each Scenario\n\n## b. Quantifying Loss Frequency of Each Scenario\n\nAverage Frequency Table (Example)\n\n(Times/Year)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9427774294456092, + "doc_id": "78b3009624a18645a29144cea2eef91ce878ce4b5ded905fef1aa50acfb2dac6", + "edit_distance": 0.055408970976253295, + "f1_score": 0.9750692520775622, + "meteor": 0.9714791655022428, + "precision": 0.9777777777777777, + "pred_md": "## Management's Discussion and Analysis\n\nDollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\n## PART III\n\n## 2013 Financial Overview\n\n## Consolidated Results\n\nFor the years ended December 31,\n\nTotal property revenue for the year ended December 31, 2013, excluding the properties held through the Company's joint ventures, was $141.1 million, a 5.6% increase in revenue over the same periods in 2012. The growth was generated through revenue from acquisitions, developments and increased rental rates, partially offset by increased vacancy.\n\nKillam's total property operating expenses increased 9.2% for 2013 compared to 2012, decreasing the operating margins by 140 bps during the year. The overall decrease in the operating margin can be attributed to higher utility costs and new acquisitions and developments in the lease-up phase that were not yet stabilized during 2013. As well, 2013 had a higher percentage of apartment units versus MHC sites than 2012, which operate with a slightly lower margin.\n\nSame store property NOI reflects the 172 stabilized properties that Killam has owned for equivalent periods in 2013 and 2012. The same store analysis includes 15,848 units and sites, or 89% of Killam's portfolio. Home sales are excluded from the analysis. Same store properties realized net revenue growth of 1.8% in 2013. This growth was offset by a 5.0% increase in same store expenses. The main driver of the increased property expenses was higher utility costs, generating a decrease in NOI of 40 bps compared to 2012. These variances are discussed in more detail in the Apartment and MHC results sections of the MD&A.\n\nNon same store property NOI consists of properties acquired in both 2012 and 2013, MHC properties sold in Q2 2012 and Q4 2013, completed development projects, other non-stabilized properties and adjustments to normalize for non-operational revenue or expense items. Details of properties acquired in 2013 are found on page 48.\n\n## Apartment Results\n\nFor the years ended December 31,\n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013\n\n35", + "recall": 0.9723756906077348, + "true_md": "Management’s Discussion and Analysis Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\n## PART III\n\n## 2013 Financial Overview\n\n## Consolidated Results\n\nFor the years ended December 31,\n\nTotal property revenue for the year ended December 31, 2013, excluding the properties held through the Company’s joint ventures, was $141.1 million, a 5.6% increase in revenue over the same periods in 2012. The growth was generated through revenue from acquisitions, developments and increased rental rates, partially offset by increased vacancy.\n\nKillam’s total property operating expenses increased 9.2% for 2013 compared to 2012, decreasing the operating margins by 140 bps during the year. The overall decrease in the operating margin can be attributed to higher utility costs and new acquisitions and developments in the lease‑up phase that were not yet stabilized during 2013. As well, 2013 had a higher percentage of apartment units versus MHC sites than 2012, which operate with a slightly lower margin.\n\nSame store property NOI reflects the 172 stabilized properties that Killam has owned for equivalent periods in 2013 and 2012. The same store analysis includes 15,848 units and sites, or 89% of Killam’s portfolio. Home sales are excluded from the analysis. Same store properties realized net revenue growth of 1.8% in 2013. This growth was offset by a 5.0% increase in same store expenses. The main driver of the increased property expenses was higher utility costs, generating a decrease in NOI of 40 bps compared to 2012. These variances are discussed in more detail in the Apartment and MHC results sections of the MD&A.\n\nNon same store property NOI consists of properties acquired in both 2012 and 2013, MHC properties sold in Q2 2012 and Q4 2013, completed development projects, other non‑stabilized properties and adjustments to normalize for non‑operational revenue or expense items. Details of properties acquired in 2013 are found on page 48.\n\nFor the years ended December 31,\n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013 35\n\n## Apartment Results" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8388870904650976, + "doc_id": "edddef5d2e5d3e97ba1b1d3d7e10e0c27afb5d6a0a8bcdab674802ac01b5f080", + "edit_distance": 0.2727272727272727, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9987321562734786, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "SMBC\n\n## Supplemental Information\n\n## Consolidated Balance Sheets (Unaudited)\n\nSumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation and Subsidiaries\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n140", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "SMBC\n\n## Supplemental Information\n\n## Consolidated Balance Sheets (Unaudited)\n\nSMFG 2011 140\n\nSumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation and Subsidiaries" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5699972432181335, + "doc_id": "3ac17443d575066c167fd2659dd2020971026af86ed9889e1b58d63ca09fe910", + "edit_distance": 0.7083333333333334, + "f1_score": 0.9333333333333333, + "meteor": 0.9330386207217263, + "precision": 0.875, + "pred_md": "SMBC\n\nIncome Analysis (Nonconsolidated)\n\n## Breakdown of Interest Income and Interest Expenses\n\n## Domestic Operations\n\n## International Operations\n\n## Total of Domestic and International Operations\n\nNote: Volume/rate variance is prorated according to changes in volume and rate.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n162", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "SMBC Income Analysis (Nonconsolidated)\n\nSMFG 2011 162\n\nNote: Volume/rate variance is prorated according to changes in volume and rate.\n\n## Breakdown of Interest Income and Interest Expenses" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9433377634923249, + "doc_id": "bf5235e04415b9ab780f4eadd4ec63ba6ad2cc852b6909189425b470e831503e", + "edit_distance": 0.041916167664670656, + "f1_score": 0.9574468085106385, + "meteor": 0.9646350439040836, + "precision": 0.9574468085106383, + "pred_md": "SMFG\n\nCapital Ratio Information\n\n## ■ Capital Structure Information (Consolidated Capital Ratio (First Standard))\n\nRegarding the calculation of the capital ratio, certain procedures were performed by KPMG AZSA LLC pursuant to 'Treatment of Inspection of the Capital Ratio Calculation Framework Based on Agreed-Upon Procedures' (JICPA Industry Committee Report No. 30). The certain procedures performed by the external auditor are not part of the audit of consolidated financial statements. The certain procedures performed on our internal control framework for calculating the capital ratio are based on procedures agreed upon by SMFG and the external auditor and are not a validation of appropriateness of the capital ratio itself or opinion on the internal controls related to the capital ratio calculation.\n\n- * 'Deductions' refers to deductions stipulated in Article 8-1 of the Notification and includes willful holding of securities issued by other financial institutions and securities stipulated in Clause 2.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n180", + "recall": 0.9574468085106383, + "true_md": "SMFG Capital Ratio Information\n\n## ■ Capital Structure Information (Consolidated Capital Ratio (First Standard))\n\nRegarding the calculation of the capital ratio, certain procedures were performed by KPMG AZSA LLC pursuant to “Treatment of Inspection of the Capital Ratio Calculation Framework Based on Agreed-Upon Procedures” (JICPA Industry Committee Report No. 30). The certain procedures performed by the external auditor are not part of the audit of consolidated financial statements. The certain procedures performed on our internal control framework for calculating the capital ratio are based on procedures agreed upon by SMFG and the external auditor and are not a validation of appropriateness of the capital ratio itself or opinion on the internal controls related to the capital ratio calculation.\n\n* “Deductions” refers to deductions stipulated in Article 8-1 of the Notification and includes willful holding of securities issued by other financial institutions and securities stipulated in Clause 2.\n\nSMFG 2011 180" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9446246846567267, + "doc_id": "fd6fc2527aad305de42df6398dbd7fa36f6eb8df9696c14f58887dfa4de5fe04", + "edit_distance": 0.17258883248730963, + "f1_score": 0.965079365079365, + "meteor": 0.9787558392875501, + "precision": 0.9743589743589743, + "pred_md": "## Higher Operating Revenue\n\nOverall Cable revenue grew 3 % this year compared to last year, the net result of:\n\n- GLYPH<129> continued growth in subscribers for our Internet and phone products\n- GLYPH<129> the May 2013 acquisition of Mountain Cable\n- GLYPH<129> partially offset by television subscriber losses.\n\n## Lower Television Revenue\n\nRevenue from television was 3 % lower this year, compared to 2012, the net result of:\n\n- GLYPH<129> the year-over-year decline in television subscribers\n- GLYPH<129> the impact of promotional and retention pricing activity associated with heightened pay TV competition from IPTV offerings\n- GLYPH<129> partially offset by pricing increases during the year and the acquisition of Mountain Cable.\n\nWe continue to offer competitive strategic bundling and retention initiatives to transition portions of the subscriber base to term contracts.\n\nThe digital cable subscriber base represents 84 % of our total television subscribers, compared to 80 % at the end of 2012. We believe that the larger selection of digital content, video on-demand, HDTV and PVR equipment combined with the ongoing analog to digital conversion initiative continues to contribute to the increasing penetration of the digital subscriber base as a percentage of our total television subscriber base.\n\n## Higher Internet and Subscribers\n\nInternet revenue increased by 16 % in 2013, compared to last year, the result of a larger Internet subscriber base, general movement to higher end speed and usage tiers and changes in Internet service pricing. The increase was also affected by the timing and mix of promotional programs.\n\nOur Internet customer base is approximately 2.0 million subscribers, and Internet penetration represents:\n\n- GLYPH<129> 92 % of our television subscribers, compared to 84 % for 2012\n- GLYPH<129> 49 % of the homes passed by our cable network; or the same as 2012.\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC.\n\n43\n\nMANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS", + "recall": 0.9559748427672956, + "true_md": "## Higher Operating Revenue\n\nOverall Cable revenue grew 3 % this year compared to last year, the net result of:\n\nRevenue from television was 3 % lower this year, compared to 2012, the net result of:\n\n- GLYPH<129> continued growth in subscribers for our Internet and phone products\n\n- GLYPH<129> the May 2013 acquisition of Mountain Cable\n\n- GLYPH<129> partially offset by television subscriber losses.\n\n- GLYPH<129> the year-over-year decline in television subscribers\n\n- GLYPH<129> the impact of promotional and retention pricing activity associated with heightened pay TV competition from IPTV offerings\n\n- GLYPH<129> partially offset by pricing increases during the year and the acquisition of Mountain Cable.\n\nWe continue to offer competitive strategic bundling and retention initiatives to transition portions of the subscriber base to term contracts.\n\n## Lower Television Revenue\n\nThe digital cable subscriber base represents 84 % of our total television subscribers, compared to 80 % at the end of 2012. We believe that the larger selection of digital content, video on-demand, HDTV and PVR equipment combined with the ongoing analog to digital conversion initiative continues to contribute to the increasing penetration of the digital subscriber base as a percentage of our total television subscriber base.\n\nInternet revenue increased by 16 % in 2013, compared to last year, the result of a larger Internet subscriber base, general movement to higher end speed and usage tiers and changes in Internet service pricing. The increase was also affected by the timing and mix of promotional programs.\n\nOur Internet customer base is approximately 2.0 million subscribers, and Internet penetration represents:\n\n- GLYPH<129>9 2 % of our television subscribers, compared to 84 % for 2012\n\n- GLYPH<129>4 9 % of the homes passed by our cable network; or the same as 2012.\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 43\n\nMANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AN D ANALYSIS\n\n## Higher Internet and Subscribers" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7104160547826522, + "doc_id": "7dedfa0ce5359fa0bd4ee67d6547b334247cbc1753c01cdd11c0d06b94604e77", + "edit_distance": 0.5481283422459893, + "f1_score": 0.9791666666666665, + "meteor": 0.6907802017181958, + "precision": 0.9791666666666666, + "pred_md": "## Proceedings on Behalf of Company\n\nNo person has applied to the Court for leave to bring proceedings on behalf of the Company or to intervene in any proceedings to which the Company is a party for the purpose of taking responsibility on behalf of the Company for all or any part of those proceedings. The Company was not a party to any such proceedings during the year.\n\n## Non-Audit Services\n\nThe Board of Directors is satisfied that the provision of non-audit services during the reporting period is compatible with the general standard of independence for auditors imposed by the Corporations Act 2001. The Directors are satisfied that the services disclosed below did not compromise the external auditor's independence for the following reasons:\n\n- · all non-audit services are reviewed and approved by the Board prior to commencement to ensure they do not adversely affect the integrity and objectivity of the auditor; and\n- · the nature of the services provided do not compromise the general principles relating to auditor independence in accordance with APES 10 : Code of Ethics for Professional Accountants set by the Accounting Professional Ethics Standards Board.\n\nThe following fees for non-audit services were incurred related to services performed by the external auditors during the year ended 31 December 2014:\n\n- · Australian taxation services - $68,815\n\n## Rounding of Amounts\n\nThe Company is an entity to which ASIC Class Order 98/100, issued by the Australian Securities and Investments Commission, applies relating to the rounding off of amounts in the Directors' Report. Accordingly, amounts in the Directors' Report have been rounded to the nearest thousand dollars, unless shown otherwise.\n\n- 27 -", + "recall": 0.9791666666666666, + "true_md": "- 27 - \n\nThe Company is an entity to which ASIC Class Order 98/100, issued by the Australian Securities and Investments Commission, applies relating to the rounding off of amounts in the Directors’ Report. Accordingly, amounts in the Directors’ Report have been rounded to the nearest thousand dollars, unless shown otherwise. \n\n## Rounding of Amounts\n\n## Non-Audit Services\n\n## Proceedings on Behalf of Company\n\nNo person has applied to the Court for leave to bring proceedings on behalf of the Company or to intervene in any proceedings to which the Company is a party for the purpose of taking responsibility on behalf of the Company for all or any part of those proceedings. The Company was not a party to any such proceedings during the year.\n\nThe Board of Directors is satisfied that the provision of non-audit services during the reporting period is compatible with the general standard of independence for auditors imposed by the Corporations Act 2001. The Directors are satisfied that the services disclosed below did not compromise the external auditor’s independence for the following reasons: • all non-audit services are reviewed and approved by the Board prior to commencement to ensure they do not adversely \n\n- services disclosed below did not compromise the external auditor’s independence for the following reasons: • all non-audit services are reviewed and approved by the Board prior to commencement to ensure they do not adversely affect the integrity and objectivity of the auditor; and • the nature of the services provided do not compromise the general principles relating to auditor independence in \n\n- affect the integrity and objectivity of the auditor; and • the nature of the services provided do not compromise the general principles relating to auditor independence in accordance with APES 10 : Code of Ethics for Professional Accountants set by the Accounting Professional Ethics Standards Board. \n\nThe following fees for non-audit services were incurred related to services performed by the external auditors during the year ended 31 December 2014: • Australian taxation services - $68,815 \n\n- ended 31 December 2014: • Australian taxation services - $68,815" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8591135290008018, + "doc_id": "8b43f6fce73b3df52d3ab3fbc000c3799ca994ea1ea73f3d7d671c7433980a5f", + "edit_distance": 0.1826086956521739, + "f1_score": 0.9261744966442954, + "meteor": 0.9191214725417446, + "precision": 0.9324324324324325, + "pred_md": "SMFG\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n## (b) Currency derivatives\n\nNotes: 1. SMFG applies deferred hedge accounting stipulated in 'Treatment for Accounting and Auditing Concerning Accounting for Foreign Currency Transactions in Banking Industry' (JICPA Industry Audit Committee Report No. 25).\n\n2. Fair value is calculated using discounted present value.\n\n3. Forward foreign exchange amounts treated by the allocation method are treated with the deposit or other transaction that is subject to the hedge. Therefore such fair value is included in the fair value of the relevant transaction subject to the hedge in '30. Financial Instruments.'\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n120", + "recall": 0.92, + "true_md": "Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nSMFG\n\nNotes: 1. SMFG applies deferred hedge accounting stipulated in “Treatment for Accounting and Auditing Concerning Accounting for Foreign Currency Transactions in \n\nBanking Industry” (JICPA Industry Audit Committee Report No. 25).\n\n2. Fair value is calculated using discounted present value.\n\n3. Forward foreign exchange amounts treated by the allocation method are treated with the deposit or other transaction that is subject to the hedge. Therefore such fair value is included in the fair value of the relevant transaction subject to the hedge in “30. Financial Instruments.”\n\n- (b) Currency derivatives\n\nSMFG 2011 120" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8834895332157128, + "doc_id": "064a7db6fe4743f902d5e6ae240c33cc981c5fc9e2698381f365e79aafd81146", + "edit_distance": 0.1592920353982301, + "f1_score": 0.9508196721311476, + "meteor": 0.9186072216300283, + "precision": 0.9830508474576272, + "pred_md": "The following summarises the performance of the Group over the last five years:\n\n## Short-Term Incentives\n\nEffective from 1 July 2012, the Group implemented an STI Plan. The objectives of the STI Plan are to link the remuneration of certain executives to their performance and the performance of the Group. The Board set key performance measures and indicators for individual executives on an annual basis that reinforce the Group's business plan and targets for the year.\n\nKey features of the STI Plan are outlined in the following table.\n\n## Overview of the STI Plan\n\nwww.kingsgate.com.au", + "recall": 0.9206349206349206, + "true_md": "Directors’ Report 52\n\nDirectors’ Report 52\n\nThe following summarises the performance of the Group over the last five years:\n\nEffective from 1 July 2012, the Group implemented an STI Plan. The objectives of the STI Plan are to link the remuneration of certain executives to their performance and the performance of the Group. The Board set key performance measures and indicators for individual executives on an annual basis that reinforce the Group’s business plan and targets for the year.\n\nKey features of the STI Plan are outlined in the following table.\n\n## Overview of the STI Plan\n\n## Short-Term Incentives\n\nwww.kingsgate.com.au" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8577477992666745, + "doc_id": "eb3a9eb318b6418caf56d972741819ef17cb619bf197e5959587de773c65ed85", + "edit_distance": 0.6258992805755396, + "f1_score": 0.9247311827956988, + "meteor": 0.9506140430538851, + "precision": 0.9247311827956989, + "pred_md": "## notes to the consolidated Financial statements\n\nD\n\nollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except share and per share amounts)\n\n## 20. Financing Costs\n\n## 21. Income Taxes\n\nThe income tax provisions differ from that computed using the statutory rates for the following reasons:\n\nDeferred income taxes reflect the net effects of temporary differences between the carrying amount of assets and liabilities for financial reporting purposes and the amounts used for income tax purposes. Significant components of the Company's deferred income tax assets and liabilities are as follows:\n\nThe temporary differences associated with investments in subsidiaries for which a deferred tax liability has not been recognized, aggregate to $Nil (December 31, 2012 - $65,186).\n\n88\n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013", + "recall": 0.9247311827956989, + "true_md": "Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except share and per share amounts)\n\n## 20. Financing Costs\n\n## 21. Income Taxes\n\nThe temporary differences associated with investments in subsidiaries for which a deferred tax liability has not been recognized, aggregate to $Nil (December 31, 2012 ‑ $65,186).\n\nThe income tax provisions differ from that computed using the statutory rates for the following reasons:\n\n88 Killam ProPerties inc | 2013\n\nDeferred income taxes reflect the net effects of temporary differences between the carrying amount of assets and liabilities for financial reporting purposes and the amounts used for income tax purposes. Significant components of the Company’s deferred income tax assets and liabilities are as follows:" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9671784328892424, + "doc_id": "867a49f95819a66de8c56aff997aec5a640e44afb04ee38e23bac396b09c07d3", + "edit_distance": 0.1159274193548387, + "f1_score": 0.9871134020618557, + "meteor": 0.9722312229822383, + "precision": 0.9922279792746114, + "pred_md": "## MANAGEMENT'S REPORT ON INTERNAL CONTROL OVER FINANCIAL REPORTING\n\nManagement is responsible for establishing and maintaining adequate internal controls over financial reporting.\n\nOur internal control system is designed to give management and the Board reasonable assurance that our financial statements are prepared and fairly presented in accordance with Generally Accepted Accounting Principles. The system assures all transactions are authorized by management, assets are safeguarded and financial records are reliable. Management also takes steps to assure the flow of information and communication is effective, and monitors performance and our internal control procedures.\n\nManagement assessed the effectiveness of our internal controls over financial reporting as of December 31, 2013, based on the criteria set out in the Internal Control - Integrated Framework (1992) issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission (COSO), and concluded that it was effective at that date. Our independent auditor, KPMG LLP, issued an audit report stating that, as of December 31, 2013, we had effective internal controls over financial reporting in all material respects, based on the same criteria.\n\nAll internal control systems, however, no matter how well designed, have inherent limitations, and even systems that have been determined to be effective can only provide reasonable assurance about the preparation and presentation of financial statements.\n\n## CHANGES IN INTERNAL CONTROL OVER FINANCIAL REPORTING AND DISCLOSURE CONTROLS AND PROCEDURES\n\nThere were no changes in 2013 that materially affected, or are reasonably likely to materially affect, our internal controls over financial reporting.\n\n## Other Information\n\n## ACCOUNTING POLICIES\n\n## Critical Accounting Estimates\n\nManagement makes judgments, estimates and assumptions that affect how accounting policies are applied and the amounts we report in assets, liabilities, revenue and expenses and our related disclosure about contingent assets and liabilities. Significant changes in our assumptions, including those related to our future business plans and cash flows, could cause our actual results to be materially different.\n\nThese estimates are critical to our business operations and understanding our results of operations. We may need to use additional judgment because of the sensitivity of the methods and assumptions used in determining the asset, liability, revenue and expense amounts.\n\n## Fair Value\n\nWe use considerable judgment to estimate the fair value of tangible and intangible assets acquired and liabilities assumed in an acquisition, using the best available information including information from financial markets. This may include discounted cash flow analyses which utilize key assumptions such as discount rates, attrition rates, and terminal growth rates to estimate future earnings. Actual results may differ from these estimates.\n\n## Useful Lives\n\nWe depreciate the cost of property, plant and equipment over their estimated useful lives by considering industry trends and companyspecific factors, including changing technologies and expectations for the in-service period of certain assets at the time. We reassess our estimates of useful lives annually or when circumstances change to ensure they match the anticipated life of the technology from a revenue-producing perspective. If technological change happens more quickly, or in a different way than anticipated, we might have to reduce the estimated life of property, plant and equipment, which could result in a higher depreciation expense in future periods or an impairment charge to write down the value. We will change our depreciation methods, depreciation rates or asset useful lives if they are different from our previous estimates. We recognize the effect of these changes in net income prospectively.\n\nOur intangible assets have increased mainly because of acquisitions. We amortize the cost of intangible assets with finite lives over their estimated useful lives. We use judgment to determine the life of these assets, analyzing all relevant factors, including the expected usage of the asset, the typical life cycle of the asset and anticipated changes in the market demand for the products and services that the asset helps generate.\n\nWe do not amortize intangible assets with indefinite lives (spectrum and broadcast licences) because there is no foreseeable limit to the period that these assets are expected to generate net cash inflows for us. After review of the competitive, legal, regulatory and other factors, it is our view that these factors do not limit the useful lives of our spectrum and broadcast licences.\n\nThe table below shows the impact that changing the useful lives of the finite-lived intangible assets by one year would have on annual net income:\n\nWe will change our depreciation methods, depreciation rates or asset useful lives if they are determined to be different from our previous estimates. We recognize the effect of these changes in net income prospectively.\n\n## Capitalizing Direct Labour, Overhead and Interest\n\nCertain direct labour and indirect costs associated with the acquisition, construction, development or improvements of our networks are capitalized to property, plant and equipment. The capitalized amounts are calculated based on estimated costs of projects that are capital in nature, and are generally based on a rate per hour. In addition, interest costs are capitalized during development and construction of certain property, plant and equipment. Capitalized amounts increase the cost of the asset and result in a higher depreciation expense in future periods.\n\n## Impairment of Assets\n\nIndefinite-lived intangible assets (including goodwill and spectrum and/ or broadcast licences) and definite life assets (including property, plant and equipment and other intangible assets) are assessed for impairment\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC.\n\n79\n\nMANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS", + "recall": 0.982051282051282, + "true_md": "MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AN D ANALYSIS\n\n## Useful Lives\n\n## MANAGEMENT’S REPORT ON INTERNAL CONTROL OVER FINANCIAL REPORTING\n\n## CHANGES IN INTERNAL CONTROL OVER FINANCIAL REPORTING AND DISCLOSURE CONTROLS AND PROCEDURES\n\n## Other Information\n\n## ACCOUNTING POLICIES\n\n## Critical Accounting Estimates\n\n## Fair Value\n\n## Impairment of Assets\n\n## Capitalizing Direct Labour, Overhead and Interest\n\nManagement is responsible for establishing and maintaining adequate internal controls over financial reporting.\n\nOur internal control system is designed to give management and the Board reasonable assurance that our financial statements are prepared and fairly presented in accordance with Generally Accepted Accounting Principles. The system assures all transactions are authorized by management, assets are safeguarded and financial records are reliable. Management also takes steps to assure the flow of information and communication is effective, and monitors performance and our internal control procedures.\n\nManagement assessed the effectiveness of our internal controls over financial reporting as of December 31, 2013, based on the criteria set out in the Internal Control – Integrated Framework (1992) issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission (COSO), and concluded that it was effective at that date. Our independent auditor, KPMG LLP, issued an audit report stating that, as of December 31, 2013, we had effective internal controls over financial reporting in all material respects, based on the same criteria.\n\nAll internal control systems, however, no matter how well designed, have inherent limitations, and even systems that have been determined to be effective can only provide reasonable assurance about the preparation and presentation of financial statements.\n\nThere were no changes in 2013 that materially affected, or are reasonably likely to materially affect, our internal controls over financial reporting.\n\nManagement makes judgments, estimates and assumptions that affect how accounting policies are applied and the amounts we report in assets, liabilities, revenue and expenses and our related disclosure about contingent assets and liabilities. Significant changes in our assumptions, including those related to our future business plans and cash flows, could cause our actual results to be materially different.\n\nThese estimates are critical to our business operations and understanding our results of operations. We may need to use additional judgment because of the sensitivity of the methods and assumptions used in determining the asset, liability, revenue and expense amounts.\n\nWe use considerable judgment to estimate the fair value of tangible and intangible assets acquired and liabilities assumed in an acquisition, using the best available information including information from financial markets. This may include discounted cash flow analyses which utilize key assumptions such as discount rates, attrition rates, and terminal growth rates to estimate future earnings. Actual results may differ from these estimates.\n\nWe depreciate the cost of property, plant and equipment over their estimated useful lives by considering industry trends and company- specific factors, including changing technologies and expectations for the in-service period of certain assets at the time. We reassess our estimates of useful lives annually or when circumstances change to ensure they match the anticipated life of the technology from a revenue-producing perspective. If technological change happens more quickly, or in a different way than anticipated, we might have to reduce the estimated life of property, plant and equipment, which could result in a higher depreciation expense in future periods or an impairment charge to write down the value. We will change our depreciation methods, depreciation rates or asset useful lives if they are different from our previous estimates. We recognize the effect of these changes in net income prospectively.\n\nOur intangible assets have increased mainly because of acquisitions. We amortize the cost of intangible assets with finite lives over their estimated useful lives. We use judgment to determine the life of these assets, analyzing all relevant factors, including the expected usage of the asset, the typical life cycle of the asset and anticipated changes in the market demand for the products and services that the asset helps generate.\n\nWe do not amortize intangible assets with indefinite lives (spectrum and broadcast licences) because there is no foreseeable limit to the period that these assets are expected to generate net cash inflows for us. After review of the competitive, legal, regulatory and other factors, it is our view that these factors do not limit the useful lives of our spectrum and broadcast licences.\n\nThe table below shows the impact that changing the useful lives of the finite-lived intangible assets by one year would have on annual net income:\n\nWe will change our depreciation methods, depreciation rates or asset useful lives if they are determined to be different from our previous estimates. We recognize the effect of these changes in net income prospectively.\n\nCertain direct labour and indirect costs associated with the acquisition, construction, development or improvements of our networks are capitalized to property, plant and equipment. The capitalized amounts are calculated based on estimated costs of projects that are capital in nature, and are generally based on a rate per hour. In addition, interest costs are capitalized during development and construction of certain property, plant and equipment. Capitalized amounts increase the cost of the asset and result in a higher depreciation expense in future periods.\n\nIndefinite-lived intangible assets (including goodwill and spectrum and/ or broadcast licences) and definite life assets (including property, plant and equipment and other intangible assets) are assessed for impairment\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 79" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9368508081722039, + "doc_id": "a6c7c71673a53f4ef291665f410d64e47bce818c65a186628155488ed12cca07", + "edit_distance": 0.13785557986870897, + "f1_score": 0.9684499314128943, + "meteor": 0.9674924199859348, + "precision": 0.9697802197802198, + "pred_md": "## Management's Discussion and Analysis\n\nDollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\n## Summary of 2013 Results and Operations\n\n## Acquisitions and Developments Drive Revenue Growth of 5.6%\n\nKillam completed $114.2 million in property acquisitions throughout 2013 and also completed $69.6 million of development projects in the first half of 2013, adding 1,025 apartment units and 65 MHC sites to the portfolio. $84.8 million of acquisitions completed throughout 2012 also contributed to revenue growth in 2013. This growth was partially offset by the disposition of ten MHC properties located in New Brunswick for proceeds of $69.0 million during the fourth quarter of 2013 and the disposition of twelve MHCs during 2012 for $72.9 million. The development projects completed in 2013 located in Halifax and Fredericton are expected to be substantially leased by mid-2014 and will generate additional revenue growth for the company in 2014.\n\n## Consolidated Same Store Revenue Growth of 1.8%\n\nKillam's same store portfolio posted a 1.8% increase in revenue growth compared to 2012, driven by an increase of 1.3% in rental rates related to the apartment portfolio and a 3.7% increase in rental rates related to the MHC portfolio. These rental rate gains were partially offset by higher vacancy during the first half of 2013, compared to 2012, and higher rental incentives due to increased competition in certain of the Company's core markets in Atlantic Canada as a result of increased supply.\n\nThe Halifax market, which comprises approximately 50% of the Company's same store apartments, contributed to the rental growth, posting a 2.5% increase in residential rents. The improved top-line growth in Halifax reflects the marketing and leasing changes implemented in 2013 and the quality and location of the Company's assets in the city. Growth in Halifax offset the Charlottetown and Saint John markets, which saw flat revenues year-over-year and a decline of 2.4% in revenue, respectively.\n\n## 14% Increase in Same Store Utility Costs Due to Pressure on Natural Gas Pricing\n\nDuring the first quarter of 2013 the Company experienced high natural gas prices as a result of supply constraints and high demand from utilities in New England, which drove up pricing within Atlantic Canada. Unanticipated disruptions at the Sable Offshore Energy project and delays in the Deep Panuke Project coming on-line created a regional supply deficit and forced distributors to purchase the commodity at higher prices from the day markets in the Northeastern United States. During the fourth quarter of 2013 Killam also saw a spike in pricing, specifically in the New Brunswick market, as colder than normal weather increased demand from utilities in Northeast New England and placed added pressure on day pricing in a market with a shortage of gas pipeline capacity. Pricing was more stable during the fourth quarter in Nova Scotia as the region's largest supplier had previously entered into a number of fixed gas-supply contracts for the 2013-2014 heating season.\n\n## Stability in Controllable Operating Costs\n\nExcluding energy and property taxes, Killam delivered an impressively modest 0.3% increase in same store operating expenses in 2013 compared to 2012. Killam managed operating costs by renegotiating key contracts, including garbage and elevator contracts, and reducing repair and maintenance and property administrative expenses through a company-wide focus on minimizing discretionary spending. In addition, the increase in same store property tax expense was managed to 2.8% as a result of successful assessment appeals.\n\n## Interest Cost Savings on Refinancings\n\nDuring 2013 Killam successfully refinanced $66.7 million of maturing apartment mortgages at a weighted average interest rate of 3.03%, 155 basis points ('bps') lower than the weighted average interest rate prior to refinancing. The Company also refinanced $10.7 million of MHC mortgages at a weighted average interest rate of 4.34%, 190 bps lower than the weighted average interest rate prior to refinancing. These refinancings create interest savings of $1.2 million on an annualized basis.\n\n## Stable FFO Despite Pressures on Non-Controllable Costs\n\nKillam generated FFo per share of $0.72 during 2013 consistent with FFo per share of $0.72 in 2012. lower interest costs, earnings associated with new acquisitions and developments, and savings in administrative costs were offset by an unprecedented increase in natural gas pricing in Atlantic Canada, a reduction in NOI related to the disposition of ten MHCs in December 2013 and twelve MHCs in May 2012, and an 8.9% increase in the weighted average number of shares outstanding. the equity raise in late 2012 included funds to support development and acquisitions, the full benefit of which was not realized until halfway through 2013. The Company also acquired land for future development of $2.9 million and incurred costs related to two new developments projects in St. John's and Cambridge totalling $12.7 million during 2013. The benefit on FFO of the deployment of these funds will not be realized until the respective projects are completed in Q3 2014 and early 2015.\n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013\n\n25", + "recall": 0.9671232876712329, + "true_md": "Management’s Discussion and Analysis Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\n## Summary of 2013 Results and Operations\n\n## Acquisitions and Developments Drive Revenue Growth of 5.6%\n\n## Consolidated Same Store Revenue Growth of 1.8%\n\nKillam completed $114.2 million in property acquisitions throughout 2013 and also completed $69.6 million of development projects in the first half of 2013, adding 1,025 apartment units and 65 MHC sites to the portfolio. $84.8 million of acquisitions completed throughout 2012 also contributed to revenue growth in 2013. This growth was partially offset by the disposition of ten MHC properties located in New Brunswick for proceeds of $69.0 million during the fourth quarter of 2013 and the disposition of twelve MHCs during 2012 for $72.9 million. The development projects completed in 2013 located in Halifax and Fredericton are expected to be substantially leased by mid‑2014 and will generate additional revenue growth for the company in 2014.\n\nKillam’s same store portfolio posted a 1.8% increase in revenue growth compared to 2012, driven by an increase of 1.3% in rental rates related to the apartment portfolio and a 3.7% increase in rental rates related to the MHC portfolio. These rental rate gains were partially offset by higher vacancy during the first half of 2013, compared to 2012, and higher rental incentives due to increased competition in certain of the Company’s core markets in Atlantic Canada as a result of increased supply. \n\nThe Halifax market, which comprises approximately 50% of the Company’s same store apartments, contributed to the rental growth, posting a 2.5% increase in residential rents. The improved top‑line growth in Halifax reflects the marketing and leasing changes implemented in 2013 and the quality and location of the Company’s assets in the city. Growth in Halifax offset the Charlottetown and Saint John markets, which saw flat revenues year‑over‑year and a decline of 2.4% in revenue, respectively. \n\nDuring the first quarter of 2013 the Company experienced high natural gas prices as a result of supply constraints and high demand from utilities in New England, which drove up pricing within Atlantic Canada. Unanticipated disruptions at the Sable Offshore Energy project and delays in the Deep Panuke Project coming on‑line created a regional supply deficit and forced distributors to purchase the commodity at higher prices from the day markets in the Northeastern United States. During the fourth quarter of 2013 Killam also saw a spike in pricing, specifically in the New Brunswick market, as colder than normal weather increased demand from utilities in Northeast New England and placed added pressure on day pricing in a market with a shortage of gas pipeline capacity. Pricing was more stable during the fourth quarter in Nova Scotia as the region’s largest supplier had previously entered into a number of fixed gas‑supply contracts for the 2013‑2014 heating season. \n\nExcluding energy and property taxes, Killam delivered an impressively modest 0.3% increase in same store operating expenses in 2013 compared to 2012. Killam managed operating costs by renegotiating key contracts, including garbage and elevator contracts, and reducing repair and maintenance and property administrative expenses through a company‑wide focus on minimizing discretionary spending. In addition, the increase in same store property tax expense was managed to 2.8% as a result of successful assessment appeals.\n\nDuring 2013 Killam successfully refinanced $66.7 million of maturing apartment mortgages at a weighted average interest rate of 3.03%, 155 basis points (“bps”) lower than the weighted average interest rate prior to refinancing. The Company also refinanced $10.7 million of MHC mortgages at a weighted average interest rate of 4.34%, 190 bps lower than the weighted average interest rate prior to refinancing. These refinancings create interest savings of $1.2 million on an annualized basis.\n\nKillam generated FFo per share of $0.72 during 2013 consistent with FFo per share of $0.72 in 2012. lower interest costs, earnings associated with new acquisitions and developments, and savings in administrative costs were offset by an unprecedented increase in natural gas pricing in Atlantic Canada, a reduction in NOI related to the disposition of ten MHCs in December 2013 and twelve MHCs in May 2012, and an 8.9% increase in the weighted average number of shares outstanding. the equity raise in late 2012 included funds to support development and acquisitions, the full benefit of which was not realized until halfway through 2013. The Company also acquired land for future development of $2.9 million and incurred costs related to two new developments projects in St. John’s and Cambridge totalling $12.7 million during 2013. The benefit on FFO of the deployment of these funds will not be realized until the respective projects are completed in Q3 2014 and early 2015.\n\n## Stable FFO Despite Pressures on Non‑Controllable Costs\n\n## Interest Cost Savings on Refinancings\n\n## Stability in Controllable Operating Costs\n\n## 14% Increase in Same Store Utility Costs Due to Pressure on Natural Gas Pricing\n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013 25" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6099476066586177, + "doc_id": "b5afcd1a8329b52926ae46ff7a78b8dee0c0adeafff89c0d54cd652561ec1613", + "edit_distance": 0.35106382978723405, + "f1_score": 0.8973607038123167, + "meteor": 0.6648714420626545, + "precision": 0.9935064935064936, + "pred_md": "TSR will be compared to a set of 22 oil and gas exploration and production companies headquartered in the United States and Australia. The Australian-headquartered companies are highlighted. The chart on the right depicts the TSR over a three year period ending 31 December 2014. Diamondback Energy Inc, Matador Resources Co and Midstates Petroleum Co Inc were excluded from the chart as there was not enough historical data to measure the defined TSR.\n\nRetirement and Other Benefits\n\nExecutive management participates in the same benefit plans and on the same basis as other employees. Those plans include health, dental and vision insurance (for which a premium contribution is required by the participant) and a 401(k) retirement plan under which the Company makes an annual contribution equal to 3 percent of the participant's eligible compensation.\n\nPost-Termination and Change In Control Benefits\n\nThe Managing Director's employment contract provides for payment of his base salary through the end of the contract term in the event he is terminated as a result of a change in control event. Additionally, in the event of a corporate take-over or change in control (as defined in the RSU Plan), our board in its discretion may cause all unvested RSUs to vest and be satisfied by the issue of one share each or provide for the cancellation of outstanding RSUs and a cash payment equal to the then-fair market value of the RSUs.\n\n- 38 -", + "recall": 0.8181818181818182, + "true_md": "TSR will be compared to a set of 22 oil and gas exploration and production companies headquartered in the United States and Australia. The Australian-headquartered companies are highlighted. The chart on the right depicts the TSR over a three year period ending 31 December 2014. Diamondback Energy Inc, Matador Resources Co and Midstates Petroleum Co Inc were excluded from the chart as there was not enough historical data to measure the defined TSR. \n\nRetirement and Other Benefits Executive management participates in the same benefit plans and on the same basis as other employees. Those plans include health, dental and vision insurance (for which a premium contribution is required by the participant) and a 401(k) retirement plan under which the Company makes an annual contribution equal to 3 percent of the participant’s eligible compensation.\n\nThe Managing Director’s employment contract provides for payment of his base salary through the end of the contract term in the event he is terminated as a result of a change in control event. Additionally, in the event of a corporate take-over or change in control (as defined in the RSU Plan), our board in its discretion may cause all unvested RSUs to vest and be satisfied by the issue of one share each or provide for the cancellation of outstanding RSUs and a cash payment equal to the then-fair market value of the RSUs. \n\n## Retirement and Other Benefits Executive management participates in the same benefit plans and on the same basis as other employees. Those plans include\n\n## Post-Termination and Change In Control Benefits\n\n## Company Abraxas Petroleum Corp/NV\n\nCompany Abraxas Petroleum Corp/NV Approach Resources Inc Austex Oil Ltd Beach Energy Ltd Bonanza Creek Energy Inc. Callon Petroleum CO/DE Carrizo Oil & Gas Inc Contango Oil & Gas Co Diamondback Energy Inc Drillsearch Energy Ltd Emerald Oil Inc Goodrich Petroleum Corp Lonestar Resources Ltd Matador Resources Co Midstates Petroleum Co Inc Panhandle Oil & Gas Inc Red Fork Energy Ltd Rex Energy Corp Sanchez Energy Corp Senex Energy Ltd Synergy Resources Corp Triangle Petroleum Corp \n\n- 38 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9433781029688333, + "doc_id": "50072e04b6968171184ac4fd1247cad0027cd1d1078bac43a7c2d93c35192fc5", + "edit_distance": 0.7423795476892822, + "f1_score": 0.9614147909967846, + "meteor": 0.7376502561761901, + "precision": 0.9835526315789473, + "pred_md": "## Our Stance on Corporate Governance\n\nSMFG and its Group companies follow the SMFG management philosophy as a universal guide for Group management and position this philosophy as the anchor for corporate action. To implement the ideas contained in our Group philosophy, we believe one of the issues with highest priority is strengthening and improving our corporate governance system.\n\n## The SMFG Corporate Governance System\n\nSMFG employs the 'corporate auditor' governance model in which statutory auditors oversee the execution of business by the directors. At SMFG, we have six corporate auditors, three of whom are outside auditors. The auditors monitor the execution of business operations of SMFG and its subsidiaries by attending meetings of the Board of Directors and listen to reports on operations from the directors and others. They also examine documents relating to important decisions and receive reports from the internal audit departments, representatives of subsidiaries of SMFG, and the CPAs.\n\nThe chairman of SMFG serves as the chairman of the Board of Directors of SMFG. This separates the role of the president, whose responsibility is the overall supervision of business activities of SMFG and other Group companies, from the role of supervising management. To enhance the effectiveness of the Board, we have appointed outside directors and formed four governance committees: namely, the Auditing Committee, the Risk Management Committee, the Compensation Committee, and the Nominating Committee. Outside directors have been appointed to all four of these committees to provide for corporate governance from an objective perspective. As the need for objectivity is particularly acute in the case of the Auditing Committee and the Compensation Committee, outside directors serve as the chairmen of these committees. To ensure that the execution of the Group's business operations is in conformity both with legal regulations and generally accepted practices, the outside directors have been selected from among the ranks of specialists (including CPAs, lawyers, and consultants).\n\nSMFG has created the Management Committee to serve as the top decision-making body, and it is under the direct supervision of the Board of Directors and chaired by the president of SMFG. This committee is composed of directors chosen by the president. Its role is to consider important matters related to the execution of business and to make decisions for or against the execution of matters in accord with the basic policies of the Board of Directors. SMFG also has a Group Strategy Committee that serves as a forum for the top managers of SMFG and all other Group companies to exchange opinions and information on their respective business plans. To enable SMFG to monitor the execution of day-to-day business operations at SMBC, 10 SMFG directors (including three outside directors) of the total of 12 SMFG directors (including three outside directors) also serve as directors of SMBC. To monitor the conduct of operations at\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n50\n\nthree major Group companies, namely, SMFG Card & Credit, Inc., Sumitomo Mitsui Finance and Leasing Co., Ltd., and The Japan Research Institute, Limited, the SMFG director in charge of each of these subsidiaries serves as a director (and can be an outside director) of these companies.\n\nFurthermore, to maintain the soundness of management, SMFG has established internal control systems to ensure the proper conduct of company operations following the Japanese Company Law. Designing and implementing an internal control system, to strengthen management systems, is regarded as a major issue, and initiatives are under way to enhance such internal control systems.\n\n## The SMBC Corporate Governance System\n\nSMBC employs the corporate auditor governance model. Of the six statutory auditors appointed, three are from outside the bank. To ensure sound and transparent management, SMBC separates the two functions of management decision-making at the operational level and the overall supervision of the conduct of duties by the management of the bank. For this purpose, the bank employs a system under which executive officers are responsible for operational duties, while the supervisory functions are performed principally by the Board.\n\nThe chairman of the bank serves as the chairman of the Board of Directors, and, to clearly separate his functions from those of the president of the bank, who is responsible for the overall supervision of the bank's activities, the chairman does not simultaneously serve as an executive officer and is primarily responsible for supervising management's execution of their duties. As at SMFG and to ensure a robust supervisory function, outside directors are appointed to the Board of Directors. At SMBC, three outside directors currently serve on the Board, which has a total membership of sixteen.\n\nExecutive officers are appointed by the Board to manage the operation of SMBC's businesses. As of June 30, 2011, SMBC has 73 executive officers, including the president, and 11 serve concurrently as directors. The Management Committee of SMBC is the highest decision-making body at the operational level and is under the direct supervision of the Board of Directors. The president chairs this committee and selects its members from the executive officers. The committee members consider important management issues based on policies set by the Board of Directors, and the president has the authority to make the final decision after considering the committee's recommendations.\n\nThe president designates certain members of the Management Committee to be Authorized Management Committee members in charge of particular Head Office departments or units. All of these designated individuals are in charge of implementing the directives of the Management Committee within the businesses they oversee.", + "recall": 0.940251572327044, + "true_md": "## Our Stance on Corporate Governance\n\n## The SMFG Corporate Governance System\n\n## The SMBC Corporate Governance System\n\nSMFG and its Group companies follow the SMFG management philosophy as a universal guide for Group management and position this philosophy as the anchor for corporate action. To implement the ideas contained in our Group philosophy, we believe one of the issues with highest priority is strengthening and improving our corporate governance system. \n\nSMFG employs the “corporate auditor” governance model in which statutory auditors oversee the execution of business by the directors. At SMFG, we have six corporate auditors, three of whom are outside auditors. The auditors monitor the execution of business operations of SMFG and its subsidiaries by attend- ing meetings of the Board of Directors and listen to reports on operations from the directors and others. They also examine documents relating to important decisions and receive reports from the internal audit departments, representatives of subsid- iaries of SMFG, and the CPAs. \n\nthree major Group companies, namely, SMFG Card & Credit, Inc., Sumitomo Mitsui Finance and Leasing Co., Ltd., and The Japan Research Institute, Limited, the SMFG director in charge of each of these subsidiaries serves as a director (and can be an outside director) of these companies. \n\nFurthermore, to maintain the soundness of management, SMFG has established internal control systems to ensure the proper conduct of company operations following the Japanese Company Law. Designing and implementing an internal control system, to strengthen management systems, is regarded as a major issue, and initiatives are under way to enhance such internal control systems.\n\nSMBC employs the corporate auditor governance model. Of the six statutory auditors appointed, three are from outside the bank. To ensure sound and transparent management, SMBC separates the two functions of management decision-making at the operational level and the overall supervision of the conduct of duties by the management of the bank. For this purpose, the bank employs a system under which executive officers are responsible for operational duties, while the supervisory func- tions are performed principally by the Board. \n\nThe chairman of the bank serves as the chairman of the Board of Directors, and, to clearly separate his functions from those of the president of the bank, who is responsible for the overall supervision of the bank’s activities, the chairman does not simultaneously serve as an executive officer and is primarily responsible for supervising management’s execution of their duties. As at SMFG and to ensure a robust supervisory func- tion, outside directors are appointed to the Board of Directors. At SMBC, three outside directors currently serve on the Board, which has a total membership of sixteen. \n\nThe chairman of SMFG serves as the chairman of the Board of Directors of SMFG. This separates the role of the president, whose responsibility is the overall supervision of business activities of SMFG and other Group companies, from the role of supervising management. To enhance the effectiveness of the Board, we have appointed outside directors and formed four governance committees: namely, the Auditing Committee, the Risk Management Committee, the Compensation Committee, and the Nominating Committee. Outside directors have been appointed to all four of these committees to provide for cor- porate governance from an objective perspective. As the need for objectivity is particularly acute in the case of the Auditing Committee and the Compensation Committee, outside directors serve as the chairmen of these committees. To ensure that the execution of the Group’s business operations is in conformity both with legal regulations and generally accepted practices, the outside directors have been selected from among the ranks of specialists (including CPAs, lawyers, and consultants). \n\nExecutive officers are appointed by the Board to manage the operation of SMBC’s businesses. As of June 30, 2011, SMBC has 73 executive officers, including the president, and 11 serve concurrently as directors. The Management Committee of SMBC is the highest decision-making body at the opera- tional level and is under the direct supervision of the Board of Directors. The president chairs this committee and selects its members from the executive officers. The committee members consider important management issues based on policies set by the Board of Directors, and the president has the authority to make the final decision after considering the committee’s recommendations. \n\nThe president designates certain members of the Management Committee to be Authorized Management Committee members in charge of particular Head Office depart- ments or units. All of these designated individuals are in charge of implementing the directives of the Management Committee within the businesses they oversee. \n\nSMFG has created the Management Committee to serve as the top decision-making body, and it is under the direct supervi- sion of the Board of Directors and chaired by the president of SMFG. This committee is composed of directors chosen by the president. Its role is to consider important matters related to the execution of business and to make decisions for or against the execution of matters in accord with the basic policies of the Board of Directors. SMFG also has a Group Strategy Committee that serves as a forum for the top managers of SMFG and all other Group companies to exchange opinions and information on their respective business plans. To enable SMFG to monitor the execution of day-to-day business operations at SMBC, 10 SMFG directors (including three outside directors) of the total of 12 SMFG directors (including three outside directors) also serve as directors of SMBC. To monitor the conduct of operations at \n\nSMFG 2011 50\n\nCorporate Governance" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.21591971647465963, + "doc_id": "5f41a2d2009cd2c286ef3a733797b63f3bef9c043ddea9b7ef26d0b266a1e48b", + "edit_distance": 0.5392296718972895, + "f1_score": 0.7837338262476895, + "meteor": 0.8503277795568145, + "precision": 0.6730158730158731, + "pred_md": "These activities are supported by our three core strengths:\n\nWe create new VALUE by forming teams of specialists in various fields and providing optimal services to our customers through two-way communication.\n\nAs a result, we will be selected as a truly trusted partner.\n\n## CONTENTS\n\n| · Message from Top Management ............................... | 2 |\n|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|-----|\n| · Business Overview.................................................... | 8 |\n| Consumer Banking .................................................................. | 8 |\n| Corporate Banking ................................................................... | 10 |\n| Services for High Networth Individuals, Business Owners and Employees ......................................... | 12 |\n| Investment Banking ................................................................. | 13 |\n| International Banking ............................................................... | 14 |\n| Treasury Markets...................................................................... | 15 |\n| · Group Companies .................................................... 16 | |\n| · Financial Highlights ................................................... 19 | |\n| · Financial Review ....................................................... 23 | |\n| · Risk Management ..................................................... 32 | |\n| · Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) ....................... 48 | |\n| · Initiatives for Enhancing Customer Satisfaction (CS) and Quality ............................................................ 49 | |\n| · Corporate Governance ............................................. 50 | |\n| · Internal Audit System ................................................ 51 | |\n| · Compliance .............................................................. 52 | |\n| · Environmental Preservation Initiatives ........................ 54 | |\n| · Social Contribution Activities ..................................... 58 | |\n| · Human Resources .................................................... 62 | |\n| · Financial Section and Corporate Data ....................... 69 | |\n| Financial Section ...................................................................... | 70 |\n| Corporate Data ........................................................................ 211 | |\n\n## CAUTIONARY STATEMENT REGARDING FORWARD-LOOKING STATEMENTS\n\nThis material contains 'forward-looking statements' (as defined in the U.S. Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995), regarding the intent, belief or current expectations of us and our managements with respect to our future financial condition and results of operations. In many cases but not all, these statements contain words such as 'anticipate,' 'estimate,' 'expect,' 'intend,' 'may,' 'plan,' 'probability,' 'risk,' 'project,' 'should,' 'seek,' 'target' and similar expressions. Such forward-looking statements are not guarantees of future performance and involve risks and uncertainties, and actual results may differ from those expressed in or implied by such forward-looking statements contained or deemed to be contained herein. The risks and uncertainties which may affect future performance include the fragility of any economic recovery, both globally and in Japan; our ability to successfully implement its business and capital strategy; the success of our business alliances including those in the consumer finance industry; exposure to new risks as we expand the scope of our business; significant credit-related costs; declines in the value of our securities portfolio. Given these and other risks and uncertainties, you should not place undue reliance on forward-looking statements, which speak only as of the date of this material. We undertake no obligation to update or revise any forward-looking statements.\n\nPlease refer to our most recent disclosure documents such as our annual report or the registration statement on Form 20-F filed with the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission, as well as our earnings press release for a more detailed description of the risks and uncertainties that may affect our financial conditions, our operating results, and investors' decisions.\n\n## Sumitomo Mitsui Financial Group, Inc.\n\nSeptember 2011\n\nPublic Relations Department\n\n-2, Marunouchi 1-chome, Chiyoda-ku, 1\n\nTokyo 100-0005, Japan\n\nTEL: +81-3-3282-8111\n\n## Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation\n\nPublic Relations Department\n\n-2, Marunouchi 1-chome, Chiyoda-ku, 1 Tokyo 100-0005, Japan TEL: +81-3-3282-1111\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n1", + "recall": 0.9380530973451328, + "true_md": "These activities are supported by our three core strengths:\n\nWe create new VALUE by forming teams of specialists in various fields and providing optimal services to our customers through two-way communication. As a result, we will be selected as a truly trusted partner.\n\nSeptember 2011\n\nPublic Relations Department 1-2, Marunouchi 1-chome, Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo 100-0005, Japan TEL: +81-3-3282-8111\n\nPublic Relations Department 1-2, Marunouchi 1-chome, Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo 100-0005, Japan TEL: +81-3-3282-1111\n\n## CAUTIONARY STATEMENT REGARDING FORWARD-LOOKING STATEMENTS\n\n## CONTENTS\n\n## Sumitomo Mitsui Financial Group, Inc.\n\n## Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation\n\nSMFG 2011 1\n\nThis material contains “forward-looking statements” (as defined in the U.S. Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995), regarding the intent, belief or current expectations of us and our managements with respect to our future financial condition and results of operations. In many cases but not all, these statements contain words such as “anticipate,” “estimate,” “expect,” “intend,” “may,” “plan,” “probability,” “risk,” “project,” “should,” “seek,” “target” and similar expressions. Such forward-looking statements are not guarantees of future performance and involve risks and uncertainties, and actual results may differ from those expressed in or implied by such forward-looking statements contained or deemed to be contained herein. The risks and uncertainties which may affect future performance include the fragility of any economic recovery, both globally and in Japan; our ability to successfully implement its business and capital strategy; the success of our business alliances including those in the consumer finance industry; exposure to new risks as we expand the scope of our business; significant credit-related costs; declines in the value of our securities portfolio. Given these and other risks and uncertainties, you should not place undue reliance on forward-looking statements, which speak only as of the date of this material. We undertake no obligation to update or revise any forward-looking statements.\n\nPlease refer to our most recent disclosure documents such as our annual report or the registration statement on Form 20-F filed with the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission, as well as our earnings press release for a more detailed description of the risks and uncertainties that may affect our financial conditions, our operating results, and investors’ decisions." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9532343940882657, + "doc_id": "a7a6d468b55e8cc498ac69f80fa35c8dfaf8dda16f3e752b8a975b2683d30380", + "edit_distance": 0.15432098765432098, + "f1_score": 0.9825783972125434, + "meteor": 0.9879333307597282, + "precision": 0.986013986013986, + "pred_md": "MANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS\n\n## Media\n\nThe trends in Media's results are generally the result of continual investment in prime-time and specialty programming, higher sports rights costs, higher subscriber fees, and fluctuations in advertising and consumer market conditions.\n\nSeasonal fluctuations relate to periods of increased consumer activity and their impact on advertising and related retail cycles, the MLB season, where revenues and expenses are concentrated in the spring, summer and fall months, and the NHL season, where advertising revenues and programming expenses are concentrated in the fall and winter months.\n\n## 2012 FULL YEAR RESULTS COMPARED TO 2011\n\n## Operating Revenue\n\nConsolidated revenue increased in 2012 by $140 million from 2011, Wireless contributed $142 million, Cable contributed $49 million and Media contributed $9 million, partially offset by decreases in revenue of $54 million in Business Solutions and in corporate items and intercompany eliminations of $6 million. The increase was due to overall higher subscriber levels, data revenue and equipment sales at Wireless and higher Internet revenue at Cable, partially offset by lower overall revenue at Business Solutions due to the phased exit of the legacy services business.\n\n## Adjusted Operating Profit\n\nConsolidated adjusted operating profit increased in 2012 by $95 million from 2011, Wireless contributed $27 million, Cable contributed $56 million, Business Solutions contributed $3 million, and Media contributed $10 million. The increases at Wireless and Cable were due to the revenue growth described above combined with cost efficiencies.\n\n## Adjusted Net Income\n\nConsolidated adjusted net income increased to $1,781 million in 2012, from $1,736 million in 2011, primarily due to increase in adjusted operating profit of 2 % .\n\n56\n\nROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT", + "recall": 0.9791666666666666, + "true_md": "MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS\n\n## Media\n\n## 2012 FULL YEAR RESULTS COMPARED TO 2011\n\n## Operating Revenue\n\nThe trends in Media’s results are generally the result of continual investment in prime-time and specialty programming, higher sports rights costs, higher subscriber fees, and fluctuations in advertising and consumer market conditions.\n\nSeasonal fluctuations relate to periods of increased consumer activity and their impact on advertising and related retail cycles, the MLB season, where revenues and expenses are concentrated in the spring, summer and fall months, and the NHL season, where advertising revenues and programming expenses are concentrated in the fall and winter months.\n\nConsolidated revenue increased in 2012 by $140 million from 2011, Wireless contributed $142 million, Cable contributed $49 million and Media contributed $9 million, partially offset by decreases in revenue of $54 million in Business Solutions and in corporate items and intercompany eliminations of $6 million. The increase was due to overall higher subscriber levels, data revenue and equipment sales at Wireless and higher Internet revenue at Cable, partially offset by lower overall revenue at Business Solutions due to the phased exit of the legacy services business.\n\nConsolidated adjusted operating profit increased in 2012 by $95 million from 2011, Wireless contributed $27 million, Cable contributed $56 million, Business Solutions contributed $3 million, and Media contributed $10 million. The increases at Wireless and Cable were due to the revenue growth described above combined with cost efficiencies.\n\nConsolidated adjusted net income increased to $1,781 million in 2012, from $1,736 million in 2011, primarily due to increase in adjusted operating profit of 2 % .\n\n## Adjusted Net Income\n\n## Adjusted Operating Profit\n\n56 ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8366279735644093, + "doc_id": "cb0511b25496e402be537fc3e0f5eff9fd99d60b1a33ed1c4a09c1e3423e98df", + "edit_distance": 0.21962616822429906, + "f1_score": 0.9841269841269842, + "meteor": 0.9420161867415376, + "precision": 0.992, + "pred_md": "Notes to the Financial Statements\n\n## Cash on hand\n\nThese are petty cash balances held by subsidiaries.\n\nDeposits at call\n\nThe deposits at call are bearing floating interest rates and they may be accessed daily.\n\n## Other deposits\n\nThis represents restricted cash held on deposit with financial institutions.\n\nRestricted cash\n\nUnder the terms of the loan facilities (see Note 16), the Group is required to maintain a minimum cash balance of US$5 million in respect of Akara.\n\nRisk exposure\n\nThe Group's exposure to interest rate risk and a sensitivity analysis for financial assets and liabilities are disclosed in Note 28.\n\n## 8. Receivables\n\n## Trade receivables\n\nTrade receivables represent gold sales at the end of the financial year, where payment was yet to be received. No trade receivables were past due or impaired as at 30 June 2013 (2012: nil).\n\n## Other debtors\n\nOther debtors mainly relate to GST / VAT receivables, advances made for land acquisition and diesel fuel tax credits.\n\nRisk exposure\n\nThe Group's exposure to credit and currency is disclosed in Note 28.\n\nwww.kingsgate.com.au", + "recall": 0.9763779527559056, + "true_md": "Notes to the Financial Statements 84\n\n## Cash on hand\n\n## Deposits at call\n\n## Other deposits\n\n## Restricted cash\n\n## Risk exposure\n\nThese are petty cash balances held by subsidiaries.\n\nThe deposits at call are bearing floating interest rates and they may be accessed daily.\n\nThis represents restricted cash held on deposit with financial institutions.\n\nUnder the terms of the loan facilities (see Note 16), the Group is required to maintain a minimum cash balance of US$5 million in respect of Akara. \n\nThe Group’s exposure to interest rate risk and a sensitivity analysis for financial assets and liabilities are disclosed in Note 28.\n\n## 8. Receivables\n\n## Trade receivables\n\n## Other debtors\n\n## Risk exposure\n\nTrade receivables represent gold sales at the end of the financial year, where payment was yet to be received. No trade receivables were past due or impaired as at 30 June 2013 (2012: nil).\n\nOther debtors mainly relate to GST / VAT receivables, advances made for land acquisition and diesel fuel tax credits.\n\nThe Group’s exposure to credit and currency is disclosed in Note 28.\n\nwww.kingsgate.com.au" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7301235867769638, + "doc_id": "d326a564747f4ee35d78921be8e5df640417c5a5f735c164945c623e8bea498e", + "edit_distance": 0.22885572139303484, + "f1_score": 0.948905109489051, + "meteor": 0.7867479412836672, + "precision": 0.9558823529411765, + "pred_md": "## STOCK PRICE PERFORMANCE\n\nThe following graph compares the cumulative total return of Nordstrom common stock, Standard & Poor's Retail Index ('S&P Retail') and Standard & Poor's 500 Index ('S&P 500') for each of the last five fiscal years, ending January 31, 2015. The Retail Index is composed of 31 retail companies, including Nordstrom, representing an industry group of the S&P 500 Index. The following graph assumes an initial investment of $100 each in Nordstrom common stock, the S&P Retail and the S&P 500 on January 30, 2010 and assumes reinvestment of dividends on the Nordstrom common stock as well as the S&P Retail and S&P 500 Indexes.\n\n14", + "recall": 0.9420289855072463, + "true_md": "## STOCK PRICE PERFORMANCE The following graph compares the cumulative total return of Nordstrom common stock, Standard & Poor’s Retail Index (“S&P Retail”) and\n\nSTOCK PRICE PERFORMANCE The following graph compares the cumulative total return of Nordstrom common stock, Standard & Poor’s Retail Index (“S&P Retail”) and Standard & Poor’s 500 Index (“S&P 500”) for each of the last five fiscal years, ending January 31, 2015. The Retail Index is composed of 31 retail companies, including Nordstrom, representing an industry group of the S&P 500 Index. The following graph assumes an initial investment of $100 each in Nordstrom common stock, the S&P Retail and the S&P 500 on January 30, 2010 and assumes reinvestment of dividends on the Nordstrom common stock as well as the S&P Retail and S&P 500 Indexes.\n\n14" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9671327362738308, + "doc_id": "fb43913afad4d7b32c20d95d754fab756b9a177f8b63b3877e8e75d3fc96c5ae", + "edit_distance": 0.07313540912382331, + "f1_score": 0.9854586129753916, + "meteor": 0.9871608459209981, + "precision": 0.9854586129753915, + "pred_md": "32\n\n| EMPLOYEES\n\nDana Clayton\n\nJack Clement Jr.\n\nBryan Clevinger\n\nPaul Coffey\n\nJackie Cole\n\nRobert W. Coleman\n\nKevin Collins\n\nTiffany Collins\n\nChristian Combs\n\nDouglas Combs\n\nGary Compton\n\nMichele Compton\n\nBill Connard\n\nPaul Conway\n\nRicky Endicott\n\nAngie England\n\nRanulfo Escamilla\n\nAlison Estus\n\nDavid Eudey\n\nSara Everett\n\nStacy Evett\n\nDeanna Farmer\n\nK.C. Ferguson Mark Ferman\n\nCori-Dawn Fields\n\nBrad Finley\n\nDonald Fisher\n\nDoyle Fisher\n\nGreg Gromadzki\n\nRonnie Guerrero\n\nDave Gum\n\nTodd Gum\n\nJim Gumm\n\nRodney Gunter\n\nRoberto Gutierrez\n\nJohn Gwynn\n\nPatty Haffey\n\nLea Hain\n\nRonald Halbert\n\nDonny Hale\n\nGarrett Hale\n\nPaul Hale\n\nSLIGO, LOUISIANA Wellsite planning is critical to the development of regions where one play is stacked atop another, such as the Haynesville and Bossier shales in northwestern Louisiana.\n\nPhyllis Copley\n\nCurtis Corcoran\n\nMike Cornette\n\nGeron Cottam\n\nTim Cottrell\n\nA.J. Cox\n\nElsie Cox\n\nMarisa Craig\n\nDennis Crisp\n\nVernon Crumm III\n\nJoshua Crystal\n\nCharlotte Cullifer\n\nLarry Cunningham\n\nRonnie Cunningham\n\nArthur Curry\n\nBilly Curry\n\nDavid Cutright\n\nBo Daniel\n\nChristy Dare\n\nFred Daugherty\n\nDonald Davey\n\nEmily Davis\n\nJacob Davis\n\nKhari Davis\n\nLisa Davis\n\nRod Davis\n\nRicky Daw\n\nIrene Da Rocha\n\nMario Delao\n\nAletha Dewbre-King\n\nHank DeWitt\n\nBrent Dixon\n\nDarrell Dollens\n\nPete Dominguez\n\nTyler Doolen\n\nBarney Dosier\n\nDustin Durkee\n\nStephen DuBois\n\nHouston Eagleston\n\nJoe Earley\n\nAnthony Earnest\n\nNate Easter\n\nMichael Edwards\n\nWilliam Edwards\n\nTravis Egner\n\nEric Eller\n\nRobert Elliott\n\nBryan Ellis\n\nLinda Ellis\n\nKay Elrod\n\nAlan Elswick\n\nJeff Lane Fisher\n\nMarc Fleischer\n\nAdam Flores\n\nMeara Foreman\n\nDarcie Foster\n\nJason Fournier\n\nRicky French\n\nVictor Frias\n\nBret Frie\n\nMike Friend\n\nRodney Friend\n\nMindi Friese\n\nAndy Fritsch\n\nRachael Fugate\n\nToby Fullbright\n\nDennis Gagliardi\n\nMichael Gallo\n\nBeau Galloway\n\nCleab Gamble\n\nAlma Garcia\n\nLori Garcia\n\nTonya Garrett\n\nFred Gates\n\nLiz Gerhard\n\nJosh Gibson\n\nJohn Gilbert\n\nRhonda Giles\n\nDavid Gilliam\n\nKeith Glasgow\n\nDavid Glass\n\nZane Glasscock\n\nJason Glassey\n\nMitch Goble\n\nDave Gocke\n\nBrian Goins\n\nHeather Gomez\n\nAlex Gonzalez\n\nMartin Gonzalez\n\nPaula Grace\n\nBrian Graefnitz\n\nDaniel Graham\n\nHenry Granados\n\nJay Gray\n\nKenneth Gray\n\nStephen Gray\n\nRodney Greathouse\n\nMarcus C. Green\n\nShane Green\n\nTracy Green\n\nBrady Greer\n\nDavid Griffith\n\nBarb Hall\n\nDon Hall\n\nMarcus Hall\n\nMike Hall\n\nJoe Halstead\n\nWheeler Hammit\n\nBuddy Harbison\n\nRusty Hardin\n\nLonnie Harl\n\nDewey Harless\n\nMike Harless\n\nNathan Harless\n\nShanna Harmon\n\nEarl Harris\n\nMichelle Harris\n\nPhyllis Harris\n\nTom Harris\n\nDenise E. Hart\n\nKenneth Hartfield\n\nSteve Harvath\n\nRandy Hatfield\n\nDaniel Hattaway\n\nTyler Hawkins\n\nJoe Hays\n\nWilliam Hays\n\nBrian Heckert\n\nFred Hein\n\nJustin Heinken\n\nJill Heitert\n\nDarin Herndon\n\nCraig Hicks\n\nEric Higgins\n\nJohn Highfield\n\nDonna Hilderbrandt\n\nRick Hill\n\nKay Hillabold\n\nJuan Hinojosa\n\nArthur Hoehne\n\nGary Hohenberger\n\nThomas Holland\n\nNathan Holloway\n\nPat Holman\n\nAlfred Hooper Jr.\n\nRandy Hooper\n\nDrew Hopkins\n\nTim J. House\n\nTim M. House\n\nLindsay Houston\n\nBrian Howard\n\nDoyle Howard\n\nKelli Howard\n\nGreg Howell\n\nSonny Htoon\n\nPaul Hudgins\n\nJeff Huelskamp\n\nChristine Hughes\n\nLarry Hughes\n\nRodney Hughes\n\nZachary Humphrey\n\nJason Ille\n\nBetsy Ireson\n\nWilliam Ireson\n\nJohnny Ison\n\nBryan Jackson\n\nMike Jackson\n\nKris Janzen\n\nBruce Johnson\n\nGeorge Johnson\n\nMark Johnson\n\nP.J. Johnson\n\nSteve S. Johnson\n\nKevin Johnston\n\nLonnie Johnston\n\nDavid S. Jones\n\nFred Jones\n\nMark Jones\n\nPat Jones\n\nGreg Jordan\n\nJessica Jorns\n\nFrances Jowers\n\nJoe Juarez\n\nLarry Justice\n\nErin Kaiser\n\nBrandon Kammerer\n\nKevin Kappes\n\nEarl Karickhoff\n\nRobert Keenan\n\nJohn Keller\n\nEarnest Kelough\n\nBrad Kemp\n\nRon Kendrick\n\nMike Key\n\nTommy Kidd\n\nDonna King\n\nGary King\n\nRyan Klein\n\nMark Knapp\n\nBrad Knight\n\nAndrew Kock\n\nJennifer Kraszewski\n\nRusty Kreizenbeck\n\nKim Kremer\n\nKris Kuehn\n\nLinda Kurtz\n\nJim Kwasny\n\nAnthony Lafferty\n\nBill Lafferty\n\nPaul Lafferty\n\nSidney Lane\n\nKaren Langley\n\nHenry Latimer\n\nMike Laue\n\nWill Lawler\n\nRonnie Lawrence\n\nGina Lawson\n\nJoshua Lawson\n\nLarry Lee\n\nKeith Lehman\n\nBrad Lemon\n\nJames Lenhart\n\nShannon Lenhart\n\nMarty Lesley\n\nJohn Paul Leslie\n\nDustin Lewis\n\nAl Leyva\n\nJason Lierle\n\nWayne Light Jr.\n\nDan J. Lopata\n\nBecky Lorton\n\nMichael Lovelace\n\nMichael Lovero\n\nDwayne Lowe\n\nJason Lundy\n\nPaul Lupardus\n\nShauna Lyon\n\nSean Macias\n\nAngie Mackey\n\nCraig Manaugh\n\nAmy Marburger\n\nRobert Marsh III\n\nJace Marshall\n\nBilly Martin\n\nDanny Martin\n\nDeb Martin\n\nJames Martin\n\nRandy Martin\n\nRobert Martin\n\nThomas Martin\n\nChema Martinez\n\nHomer Martinez\n\nBill Mathews\n\nThomson Mathews\n\nMack Matthews\n\nBruce Matthey\n\nJeff Maxwell\n\nMike May\n\nJames Maynard\n\nAndrea Mays\n\nVicki McCabe\n\nDax McCauley\n\nChris McClaine\n\nMike McClellan\n\nJackie McComas\n\nThomas McComas\n\nMeri McCorkle\n\nJohnny McCoy Jr.\n\nRocky McCoy\n\nGene McCutcheon\n\nCasey McDonough\n\nVanessa McDougal\n\nWilliam McFadden\n\nTerry McGrady\n\nJeff McGuire\n\nDonny McHenry\n\nAmy McIlhenny\n\nArlie McKee\n\nKeith McKee\n\nNick McKenzie\n\nBill McKinney\n\nDoug McPherson\n\nDirk McReynolds\n\nDonnie Meade\n\nDan Melcher\n\nBruce Melton\n\nOscar Mendoza\n\nSaxon Mesa\n\nPaul Messer\n\nCasey Miller\n\nCathy Miller\n\nDaryl Miller\n\nJeff Miller\n\nKelli Miller\n\nMark Miller\n\nEligah Mills\n\nTom Mills\n\nMaya Mims\n\nKyle Minyard\n\nGreg Mitchum\n\nJeff Mobley\n\nCheryn Mok\n\nStephen Mollett\n\nJim Moore\n\nMichael L. Moore\n\nSherrie Moore\n\nTeresa Moore\n\nDave Morehouse\n\nJose Moreno III\n\nPhil Moser\n\nJim Mottesheard\n\nDoug Mullins\n\nJaime Munoz\n\nDan Muret\n\nSean Murphy\n\nJustin Murray\n\nBhavin Naik\n\nTim Nance\n\nTim Napier\n\nRusty Nash\n\nJames Neal Jr.\n\nScott Nease\n\nDonna Neel\n\nJarrod Newberry\n\nKena Newman\n\nRoger Newsome Jr.\n\nRobert Niavez\n\nSid Niles\n\nJustin Nimrod\n\nKelly Nix\n\nCurtis Nixon Jr.\n\nKenneth Nolan\n\nGreg Northern\n\nAdam Olivares Jr.\n\nMichele Oliver\n\nDara Oney\n\nCharles Osborn\n\nBilly Osendott\n\nBryan Ott\n\nKary Ott\n\nKatie Overton\n\nRodney O'Brien\n\nJohn O'Neal\n\nTony Padgett\n\nJoe Paetzold\n\nWray Paine\n\nBill G. Parker\n\nMatthew Parker\n\nMichael W. Parker\n\nToni Parks-Payne\n\nAmanda Parsons\n\nTrisha Pate\n\nHoot Patterson\n\nKevin Patterson\n\nKenneth Payne\n\nDeborah Payne-\n\nSherwood\n\nTom Pepper\n\nBrooks Perry\n\nGena Perry\n\nJody Perry\n\nMike Perry\n\nJoe Peterson\n\nDonald Petzold Jr.\n\nTeresa Pexa\n\nKevin Pfister\n\nGreg Pichler\n\nMichael Pickens\n\nSusan Pickens\n\nJoe Pierce\n\nBilly Pillars\n\nJosh Pitts\n\nSteve Poe Jr.\n\nHarold Porter\n\nJohnny Porter\n\nLaTonya Porter\n\nLeon Potter\n\nJared Pounds\n\nCara Pourtorkan\n\nReco Preece\n\nBob Price\n\nJohn Prichard Jr.\n\nJennifer Prince\n\nMartin Province\n\nBobby Putman\n\nJeff Raines\n\nWeldon Rainey\n\nLarry Raleigh\n\nKeith Rasmussen\n\nBilly Ratliff\n\nJennifer Ratliff\n\nPeter Rauscher\n\nDonna Ray\n\nLonnie Ray\n\nVickie Ray\n\nGavin Reed\n\nKenneth Reed\n\nMelissa Reed\n\nNathan Reed\n\nStevie Reed\n\nBrian Reeder\n\nLorrie Renfro\n\nPhilip Renner\n\nR.J. Retzer\n\nJeffery Rhoades\n\nStewart Rhoades\n\nJerad Rhodes\n\nMike Rice\n\nRay Rice\n\nBill Richardson\n\nChad Richardson\n\nJoni Richardson\n\nRalph Riffle Jr.\n\nJohndetta Riley\n\nJohney Riley\n\nSteven Riley\n\nBrandon Ripley\n\nAJ Risner\n\nNakita Rizzo\n\nJohn Robinson\n\nRusty L. Robinson\n\nPedro Rodriguez\n\nBrad Rogers\n\nCliff Rogers\n\nDionne Rogers\n\nJohn F. Rogers\n\nChuck Rose\n\nDayton Rose\n\nKristin Rose\n\nHargis Ross\n\nLloyd Rubottom\n\nGary Russell\n\nGeorge Russell\n\nJim Russell\n\nJohn Ryza\n\nScott Sachs\n\nClinton Salyers\n\nGary Sanders\n\nJason Sarakatsannis\n\nCarl Sargent\n\nJay Savill\n\nBrandon Scheffler\n\nRob Schindler\n\nDoug Schmidt\n\nRandall Schultz\n\nGreg Schwerdtfeger\n\nEmily Scott\n\nKathy Scott\n\nBart Seaman\n\nJennifer Sebo\n\nLarry Segar\n\nSteve Seliquini\n\nIvan Semien\n\nPerry Settles\n\nGail Shackelford\n\nTommy Shaffer\n\nArco Sharp Jr.\n\nJackie Shaver\n\nStan Shaw\n\nDonald Shelley\n\nMarvin Shepherd\n\nGreg Shingleton\n\nTammy Shingleton\n\nMike Short\n\nJohn Shreve II\n\nOdie Shreve\n\nLee Shreves\n\nDerrick Sier\n\nBob Simmons II\n\nBrian Simmons\n\nJustin Simonton\n\nBilly Sims Jr.\n\nCami Sims\n\nLeo Sinnott Jr.\n\nBrian Skidmore\n\nRalph Skinner Jr.\n\nCharles Sloan\n\nMalcom Slone\n\nMiranda Small\n\nEric Smith\n\nJohn Smith\n\nJonathan J. Smith\n\nLindsey Smith\n\nRoy Smith\n\nScott Smith\n\nStephen Smith\n\nRonald Snyder Jr.\n\nManuel Soriano Jr.\n\nMyron Sowards\n\nJames Spiller\n\nKeith Spitzenberger\n\nLarry Stacy\n\nBriana Steelman\n\nTarza Steiner\n\nRobert E. Stickler II\n\nRobert Stickler\n\nJason Stidham\n\nJustin Stinson\n\nJayson Stock\n\nBrandon Strack\n\nLola Strickland\n\nDave Stumbo\n\nScott Sullivan\n\nTravis Sullivan\n\nTodd Swartzbaugh\n\nAnthony Sweeney\n\nCharles Switzer Jr.\n\nJim Tampke\n\nPhilip Tanner\n\nMike Tarpley\n\nBrian Tatro\n\nGearold Taylor\n\nJody Taylor\n\nStephen Taylor\n\nCarole Tear\n\nEric Tennant\n\nSteve Tharp\n\nJoe Thomas\n\nLawrence Thomas\n\nVal Thomas\n\nWillie Thompson Jr.\n\nMike Tigner\n\nBilly Timmons\n\nKelly Torri\n\nCheryl Tramell\n\nHuy Tran\n\nMatej Triska\n\nScott Truesdale\n\nVernetta Tubbs\n\nKristi Turner\n\nMatt Turner\n\nSusan Tuter\n\nKenna Ulderich\n\nSharon Ulmer\n\nJason Updegraff\n\nDana Vaden\n\nJoseph Valerio II\n\nBanner Vanderpool\n\nJakie Vaughan\n\nRyan Veirs\n\nSuzanne Victoria\n\nLupe Villarreal Jr.\n\nTammie Voelker\n\nLindsey Von Tungeln\n\nKenneth Wagoner\n\nBenny Wallace\n\nCharles Wallen\n\nRichard Walls\n\nLeonard Walters\n\nJustin Wardrop\n\nBrian Wasinger\n\nKaren Watson\n\nJohn Weaver\n\nGinny Webb\n\nThomas Webb\n\nLisa Webb Johnson\n\nShae Weddle\n\nJeff Weides\n\nKeith Wells\n\nLee Wescott\n\nKyle White\n\nLarry White\n\nMallorie White\n\nDan Whitmarsh\n\nValerie Wible\n\nCharles Wilburn\n\nDale Wildman\n\nBrooke Wiley\n\nMark Wiley II\n\nLisa Wilkinson\n\nDallas Williams\n\nDavid S. Williams\n\nNancy Williams\n\nTerry Williams\n\nB.J. Williamson\n\nJason Williamson\n\nHack Willis\n\nRonnie Willis\n\nKent Willoughby\n\nBrian Wines\n\nKelli Witte\n\nBrad Wittrock\n\nJustin Wollenberg\n\nJulie Woodard\n\nDonald Woody\n\nRicky Workman\n\nLeann Wright\n\nYandy Yarbrough\n\nDoug Yeager\n\nDanna Yeargin\n\nBo Youngblood III\n\nJustin Zerkle\n\n## 2006 (1,073)\n\nRussell Ables\n\nJessica Acker\n\nClaude Adams\n\nJames Adams\n\nKelli Adams\n\nWilliam Adkison\n\nEthan Adler\n\nRohit Aggarwal\n\nKris Aldridge", + "recall": 0.9854586129753915, + "true_md": "32 | EMPLOYEES\n\nSLIGO, LOUISIANA Wellsite planning is critical to the development of regions where one play is stacked atop another, such as the Haynesville and Bossier shales in northwestern Louisiana. \n\nDana Clayton Jack Clement Jr. Bryan Clevinger Paul Coffey Jackie Cole Robert W. Coleman Kevin Collins Tiffany Collins Christian Combs Douglas Combs Gary Compton Michele Compton Bill Connard Paul Conway\n\nRicky Endicott Angie England Ranulfo Escamilla Alison Estus David Eudey Sara Everett Stacy Evett Deanna Farmer K.C. Ferguson Mark Ferman Cori-Dawn Fields Brad Finley Donald Fisher Doyle Fisher\n\nGreg Gromadzki Ronnie Guerrero Dave Gum Todd Gum Jim Gumm Rodney Gunter Roberto Gutierrez John Gwynn Patty Haffey Lea Hain Ronald Halbert Donny Hale Garrett Hale Paul Hale\n\nPhyllis Copley Curtis Corcoran Mike Cornette Geron Cottam Tim Cottrell A.J. Cox Elsie Cox Marisa Craig Dennis Crisp Vernon Crumm III Joshua Crystal Charlotte Cullifer Larry Cunningham Ronnie Cunningham Arthur Curry Billy Curry David Cutright Bo Daniel Christy Dare Fred Daugherty Donald Davey Emily Davis Jacob Davis Khari Davis Lisa Davis Rod Davis Ricky Daw Irene Da Rocha Mario Delao Aletha Dewbre-King Hank DeWitt Brent Dixon Darrell Dollens Pete Dominguez Tyler Doolen Barney Dosier Dustin Durkee Stephen DuBois Houston Eagleston Joe Earley Anthony Earnest Nate Easter Michael Edwards William Edwards Travis Egner Eric Eller Robert Elliott Bryan Ellis Linda Ellis Kay Elrod Alan Elswick\n\nJeff Lane Fisher Marc Fleischer Adam Flores Meara Foreman Darcie Foster Jason Fournier Ricky French Victor Frias Bret Frie Mike Friend Rodney Friend Mindi Friese Andy Fritsch Rachael Fugate Toby Fullbright Dennis Gagliardi Michael Gallo Beau Galloway Cleab Gamble Alma Garcia Lori Garcia Tonya Garrett Fred Gates Liz Gerhard Josh Gibson John Gilbert Rhonda Giles David Gilliam Keith Glasgow David Glass Zane Glasscock Jason Glassey Mitch Goble Dave Gocke Brian Goins Heather Gomez Alex Gonzalez Martin Gonzalez Paula Grace Brian Graefnitz Daniel Graham Henry Granados Jay Gray Kenneth Gray Stephen Gray Rodney Greathouse Marcus C. Green Shane Green Tracy Green Brady Greer David Griffith\n\nBarb Hall Don Hall Marcus Hall Mike Hall Joe Halstead Wheeler Hammit Buddy Harbison Rusty Hardin Lonnie Harl Dewey Harless Mike Harless Nathan Harless Shanna Harmon Earl Harris Michelle Harris Phyllis Harris Tom Harris Denise E. Hart Kenneth Hartfield Steve Harvath Randy Hatfield Daniel Hattaway Tyler Hawkins Joe Hays William Hays Brian Heckert Fred Hein Justin Heinken Jill Heitert Darin Herndon Craig Hicks Eric Higgins John Highfield Donna Hilderbrandt Rick Hill Kay Hillabold Juan Hinojosa Arthur Hoehne Gary Hohenberger Thomas Holland Nathan Holloway Pat Holman AlfredHooper Jr. Randy Hooper Drew Hopkins Tim J. House Tim M. House Lindsay Houston Brian Howard Doyle Howard Kelli Howard\n\nGreg Howell Sonny Htoon Paul Hudgins Jeff Huelskamp Christine Hughes Larry Hughes Rodney Hughes Zachary Humphrey Jason Ille Betsy Ireson William Ireson Johnny Ison Bryan Jackson Mike Jackson Kris Janzen Bruce Johnson George Johnson Mark Johnson P.J. Johnson Steve S. Johnson Kevin Johnston Lonnie Johnston David S. Jones Fred Jones Mark Jones Pat Jones Greg Jordan Jessica Jorns Frances Jowers Joe Juarez Larry Justice Erin Kaiser Brandon Kammerer Kevin Kappes Earl Karickhoff Robert Keenan John Keller Earnest Kelough Brad Kemp Ron Kendrick Mike Key Tommy Kidd Donna King Gary King RyanKlein Mark Knapp Brad Knight Andrew Kock Jennifer Kraszewski Rusty Kreizenbeck Kim Kremer Kris Kuehn Linda Kurtz Jim Kwasny Anthony Lafferty Bill Lafferty Paul Lafferty Sidney Lane Karen Langley Henry Latimer Mike Laue Will Lawler Ronnie Lawrence Gina Lawson Joshua Lawson Larry Lee Keith Lehman Brad Lemon James Lenhart Shannon Lenhart Marty Lesley John Paul Leslie Dustin Lewis Al Leyva Jason Lierle Wayne Light Jr. Dan J. Lopata Becky Lorton Michael Lovelace Michael Lovero Dwayne Lowe Jason Lundy Paul Lupardus Shauna Lyon Sean Macias Angie Mackey Craig Manaugh Amy Marburger Robert Marsh III Jace Marshall\n\nBilly Martin Danny Martin Deb Martin James Martin Randy Martin Robert Martin Thomas Martin Chema Martinez HomerMartinez Bill Mathews Thomson Mathews Mack Matthews BruceMatthey Jeff Maxwell Mike May James Maynard Andrea Mays Vicki McCabe Dax McCauley Chris McClaine Mike McClellan Jackie McComas Thomas McComas Meri McCorkle Johnny McCoy Jr. RockyMcCoy Gene McCutcheon Casey McDonough Vanessa McDougal William McFadden Terry McGrady Jeff McGuire Donny McHenry AmyMcIlhenny Arlie McKee Keith McKee Nick McKenzie Bill McKinney Doug McPherson Dirk McReynolds Donnie Meade DanMelcher Bruce Melton Oscar Mendoza Saxon Mesa Paul Messer Casey Miller Cathy Miller Daryl Miller Jeff Miller Kelli Miller Mark Miller Eligah Mills Tom Mills Maya Mims Kyle Minyard Greg Mitchum Jeff Mobley Cheryn Mok Stephen Mollett Jim Moore Michael L. Moore Sherrie Moore Teresa Moore Dave Morehouse Jose Moreno III Phil Moser Jim Mottesheard Doug Mullins Jaime Munoz Dan Muret Sean Murphy Justin Murray Bhavin Naik Tim Nance Tim Napier Rusty Nash James Neal Jr. Scott Nease Donna Neel Jarrod Newberry Kena Newman RogerNewsomeJr. Robert Niavez Sid Niles Justin Nimrod Kelly Nix Curtis Nixon Jr. Kenneth Nolan Greg Northern\n\nAdam Olivares Jr. Michele Oliver Dara Oney Charles Osborn Billy Osendott Bryan Ott Kary Ott Katie Overton Rodney O’Brien John O’Neal Tony Padgett Joe Paetzold Wray Paine Bill G. Parker Matthew Parker Michael W. Parker Toni Parks-Payne Amanda Parsons Trisha Pate Hoot Patterson Kevin Patterson Kenneth Payne Deborah Payne- Sherwood Tom Pepper Brooks Perry Gena Perry Jody Perry Mike Perry Joe Peterson Donald Petzold Jr. Teresa Pexa Kevin Pfister Greg Pichler Michael Pickens Susan Pickens Joe Pierce Billy Pillars Josh Pitts Steve Poe Jr. Harold Porter Johnny Porter LaTonya Porter Leon Potter Jared Pounds Cara Pourtorkan Reco Preece Bob Price John Prichard Jr. Jennifer Prince Martin Province Bobby Putman Jeff Raines Weldon Rainey Larry Raleigh Keith Rasmussen Billy Ratliff Jennifer Ratliff Peter Rauscher Donna Ray Lonnie Ray Vickie Ray Gavin Reed Kenneth Reed Melissa Reed Nathan Reed Stevie Reed Brian Reeder Lorrie Renfro Philip Renner R.J.Retzer Jeffery Rhoades Stewart Rhoades Jerad Rhodes Mike Rice Ray Rice Bill Richardson Chad Richardson Joni Richardson Ralph Riffle Jr. Johndetta Riley Johney Riley Steven Riley Brandon Ripley AJ Risner Nakita Rizzo John Robinson Rusty L. Robinson Pedro Rodriguez Brad Rogers\n\nCliff Rogers Dionne Rogers John F. Rogers Chuck Rose Dayton Rose Kristin Rose Hargis Ross Lloyd Rubottom Gary Russell George Russell Jim Russell John Ryza Scott Sachs Clinton Salyers Gary Sanders Jason Sarakatsannis Carl Sargent Jay Savill Brandon Scheffler Rob Schindler Doug Schmidt Randall Schultz Greg Schwerdtfeger Emily Scott Kathy Scott Bart Seaman Jennifer Sebo Larry Segar Steve Seliquini Ivan Semien Perry Settles Gail Shackelford Tommy Shaffer Arco Sharp Jr. Jackie Shaver Stan Shaw Donald Shelley Marvin Shepherd Greg Shingleton Tammy Shingleton Mike Short John Shreve II Odie Shreve Lee Shreves Derrick Sier Bob Simmons II Brian Simmons Justin Simonton Billy Sims Jr. Cami Sims Leo Sinnott Jr. Brian Skidmore Ralph Skinner Jr. Charles Sloan Malcom Slone Miranda Small Eric Smith John Smith Jonathan J. Smith Lindsey Smith Roy Smith Scott Smith Stephen Smith Ronald Snyder Jr. Manuel Soriano Jr. Myron Sowards James Spiller Keith Spitzenberger Larry Stacy Briana Steelman Tarza Steiner Robert E. Stickler II Robert Stickler Jason Stidham Justin Stinson Jayson Stock Brandon Strack Lola Strickland Dave Stumbo Scott Sullivan Travis Sullivan Todd Swartzbaugh Anthony Sweeney Charles Switzer Jr. Jim Tampke Philip Tanner Mike Tarpley Brian Tatro Gearold Taylor Jody Taylor\n\nStephen Taylor Carole Tear Eric Tennant Steve Tharp JoeThomas Lawrence Thomas Val Thomas Willie Thompson Jr. Mike Tigner Billy Timmons Kelly Torri Cheryl Tramell Huy Tran Matej Triska Scott Truesdale Vernetta Tubbs Kristi Turner Matt Turner Susan Tuter Kenna Ulderich Sharon Ulmer Jason Updegraff Dana Vaden Joseph Valerio II Banner Vanderpool Jakie Vaughan Ryan Veirs Suzanne Victoria Lupe Villarreal Jr. Tammie Voelker Lindsey Von Tungeln Kenneth Wagoner Benny Wallace Charles Wallen Richard Walls Leonard Walters Justin Wardrop Brian Wasinger Karen Watson John Weaver Ginny Webb Thomas Webb Lisa Webb Johnson Shae Weddle Jeff Weides Keith Wells Lee Wescott Kyle White Larry White Mallorie White Dan Whitmarsh Valerie Wible Charles Wilburn Dale Wildman Brooke Wiley Mark Wiley II Lisa Wilkinson Dallas Williams David S. Williams Nancy Williams Terry Williams B.J. Williamson Jason Williamson Hack Willis Ronnie Willis Kent Willoughby Brian Wines Kelli Witte Brad Wittrock Justin Wollenberg Julie Woodard Donald Woody Ricky Workman Leann Wright Yandy Yarbrough Doug Yeager Danna Yeargin Bo Youngblood III Justin Zerkle\n\nRussell Ables Jessica Acker Claude Adams James Adams Kelli Adams William Adkison Ethan Adler Rohit Aggarwal Kris Aldridge\n\n## 2006 (1,073)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.972170798686721, + "doc_id": "55067d52544edd2c9e4036c5702011fc4bdfb986ef9c9472c973995d08a67c3c", + "edit_distance": 0.12612612612612611, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999543005386687, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "SMFG\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n## 17. Fees and Commissions\n\nFees and commissions for the fiscal years ended March 31, 2011 and 2010 consisted of the following:\n\n## 18. Trading Income\n\nTrading income for the fiscal years ended March 31, 2011 and 2010 consisted of the following:\n\n## 19. Other Operating Income\n\nOther operating income for the fiscal years ended March 31, 2011 and 2010 consisted of the following:\n\n## 20. Other Operating Expenses\n\nOther operating expenses for the fiscal years ended March 31, 2011 and 2010 consisted of the following:\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n90", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "SMFG Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n## 17. Fees and Commissions\n\nFees and commissions for the fiscal years ended March 31, 2011 and 2010 consisted of the following:\n\n## 18. Trading Income\n\nTrading income for the fiscal years ended March 31, 2011 and 2010 consisted of the following:\n\n## 19. Other Operating Income\n\nOther operating income for the fiscal years ended March 31, 2011 and 2010 consisted of the following:\n\nOther operating expenses for the fiscal years ended March 31, 2011 and 2010 consisted of the following:\n\nSMFG 2011 90\n\n## 20. Other Operating Expenses" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8805064269694748, + "doc_id": "c737496fd552241741a70c6fd28df938a2b388731c5e2b1ba470a6517d6a40cd", + "edit_distance": 0.11940298507462686, + "f1_score": 0.9942196531791907, + "meteor": 0.9006194116184332, + "precision": 0.9961389961389961, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 1 - STATEMENT OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES continued\n\nThe excess of the consideration transferred, the amount of any non-controlling interest in the acquiree and the acquisition-date fair value of any previous equity interest in the acquiree over the fair value of the net identifiable asset acquired, if any, is recorded as goodwill. If those amounts are less than the fair value of the net identifiable assets of the subsidiary acquired and the measurement of all amounts has been reviewed, the difference is recognised directly in the consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income as a bargain purchase. Adjustments to the purchase price and excess on consideration transferred may be made up to one year from the acquisition date.\n\n## o) Assets Held for Sale\n\nThe Company classifies property as held for sale when management commits to a plan to sell the property, the plan has appropriate approvals, the sale of the property is probable within the next twelve months, and certain other criteria are met. At such time, the respective assets and liabilities are presented separately on the Company's consolidated statement of financial position and amortisation is no longer recognized. Assets held for sale are reported at the lower of their carrying amount or their estimated fair value, less the costs to sell the assets. The Company recognizes an impairment loss if the current net book value of the property exceeds its fair value, less selling costs. The company did not have any assets classified as held for sale as at 31 December 2014. As at 31 December 2013, all of the Company's Williston properties were classified as held for sale.\n\n## p) Critical Accounting Estimates and Judgements\n\nThe Directors evaluate estimates and judgements incorporated into the financial report based on historical knowledge and best available current information. Estimates assume a reasonable expectation of future events and are based on current trends and economic data obtained both externally and within the Group. Revisions to accounting estimates are recognised in the period in which the estimate is revised if the revision affects only that period, or in the period of the revision and future periods if the revision affects both current and future periods.\n\nManagement has made the following judgements, which have the most significant effect on the amounts recognised in the consolidated financial statements.\n\n## Estimates of reserve quantities\n\nThe estimated quantities of hydrocarbon reserves reported by the Group are integral to the calculation of amortisation (depletion) and to assessments of possible impairment of assets. Estimated reserve quantities are based upon interpretations of geological and geophysical models and assessment of the technical feasibility and commercial viability of producing the reserves. Management prepares reserve estimates which conform to guidelines prepared by the Society of Petroleum Engineers. Management also prepares reserve estimates under SEC guidelines. Reserve estimates conforming to the guidelines prepared by the Society of Petroleum Engineers are utilized for accounting purposes. These assessments require assumptions to be made regarding future development and production costs, commodity prices, exchange rates and fiscal regimes. The estimates of reserves may change from period to period as the economic assumptions used to estimate the reserves can change from period to period, and as additional geological data is generated during the course of operations.\n\n- 68 -", + "recall": 0.9923076923076923, + "true_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 1 - STATEMENT OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES continued\n\nThe excess of the consideration transferred, the amount of any non-controlling interest in the acquiree and the acquisition-date fair value of any previous equity interest in the acquiree over the fair value of the net identifiable asset acquired, if any, is recorded as goodwill. If those amounts are less than the fair value of the net identifiable assets of the subsidiary acquired and the measurement of all amounts has been reviewed, the difference is recognised directly in the consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income as a bargain purchase. Adjustments to the purchase price and excess on consideration transferred may be made up to one year from the acquisition date. \n\n## o) Assets Held for Sale The Company classifies property as held for sale when management commits to a plan to sell the property, the plan\n\n## p) Critical Accounting Estimates and Judgements The Directors evaluate estimates and judgements incorporated into the financial report based on historical\n\n## Estimates of reserve quantities The estimated quantities of hydrocarbon reserves reported by the Group are integral to the calculation of\n\no) Assets Held for Sale The Company classifies property as held for sale when management commits to a plan to sell the property, the plan has appropriate approvals, the sale of the property is probable within the next twelve months, and certain other criteria are met. At such time, the respective assets and liabilities are presented separately on the Company’s consolidated statement of financial position and amortisation is no longer recognized. Assets held for sale are reported at the lower of their carrying amount or their estimated fair value, less the costs to sell the assets. The Company recognizes an impairment loss if the current net book value of the property exceeds its fair value, less selling costs. The company did not have any assets classified as held for sale as at 31 December 2014. As at 31 December 2013, all of the Company’s Williston properties were classified as held for sale.\n\np) Critical Accounting Estimates and Judgements The Directors evaluate estimates and judgements incorporated into the financial report based on historical knowledge and best available current information. Estimates assume a reasonable expectation of future events and are based on current trends and economic data obtained both externally and within the Group. Revisions to accounting estimates are recognised in the period in which the estimate is revised if the revision affects only that period, or in the period of the revision and future periods if the revision affects both current and future periods. \n\nManagement has made the following judgements, which have the most significant effect on the amounts recognised in the consolidated financial statements. \n\nEstimates of reserve quantities The estimated quantities of hydrocarbon reserves reported by the Group are integral to the calculation of amortisation (depletion) and to assessments of possible impairment of assets. Estimated reserve quantities are based upon interpretations of geological and geophysical models and assessment of the technical feasibility and commercial viability of producing the reserves. Management prepares reserve estimates which conform to guidelines prepared by the Society of Petroleum Engineers. Management also prepares reserve estimates under SEC guidelines. Reserve estimates conforming to the guidelines prepared by the Society of Petroleum Engineers are utilized for accounting purposes. These assessments require assumptions to be made regarding future development and production costs, commodity prices, exchange rates and fiscal regimes. The estimates of reserves may change from period to period as the economic assumptions used to estimate the reserves can change from period to period, and as additional geological data is generated during the course of operations. \n\n- 68 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7080625272245707, + "doc_id": "886e1e6e7aa39c5af175cab8a45944e551aef47d285f5940c0c4cabea9f5094d", + "edit_distance": 0.24725274725274726, + "f1_score": 0.9605263157894738, + "meteor": 0.8685087350034889, + "precision": 0.9733333333333334, + "pred_md": "## Ratios (Nonconsolidated)\n\nSumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation\n\n## Income Ratio\n\n- Notes: 1. Ordinary profit (net income) to total assets = Ordinary profit (net income) / Average balance of total assets excluding customers' liabilities for acceptances and guarantees ✕ 100\n- 2. Ordinary profit (net income) to stockholders' equity = (Ordinary profit (net income) - Preferred dividends) / {(Net assets at the beginning of the fiscal year - Number of shares of preferred stock outstanding at the beginning of the fiscal year ✕ Issue price) + (Net assets at the end of the fiscal year - Number of shares of preferred stock outstanding at the end of the fiscal year ✕ Issue price)} divided by 2 ✕ 100\n\n## Yield/Interest Rate\n\n## Loan-Deposit Ratio\n\nNote: Deposits include negotiable certificates of deposit.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\nSMBC\n\n173", + "recall": 0.948051948051948, + "true_md": "## Ratios (Nonconsolidated)\n\n## Yield/Interest Rate\n\n## Income Ratio\n\n## Loan-Deposit Ratio\n\nSumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation\n\nNotes: 1. Ordinary profit (net income) to total assets = Ordinary profit (net income) / Average balance of total assets excluding customers’ liabilities for acceptances and guarantees $_{✕}$ 100\n\n2. Ordinary profit (net income) to stockholders’ equity = (Ordinary profit (net income) – Preferred dividends) / {(Net assets at the beginning of the fiscal year – Number of shares of preferred stock outstanding at the beginning of the fiscal year $_{✕}$ Issue price) + (Net assets at the end of the fiscal year – Number of shares of preferred stock outstanding at the end of the fiscal year $_{✕}$ Issue price)} divided by 2 $_{✕}$ 100\n\nNote: Deposits include negotiable certificates of deposit.\n\nSMFG 2011 173\n\nSMBC" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9092361757574018, + "doc_id": "eda055a37dcc7d573d75ff8637d2ea535f23e7a1ef1d5fb055088892736fc2f0", + "edit_distance": 0.7536, + "f1_score": 0.9514563106796117, + "meteor": 0.7311026870675703, + "precision": 0.953307392996109, + "pred_md": "N\n\n## otes to the Consolidated Financial Statemns\n\nDollar amounts are in thousands of canadian dollars (except share and per share amounts)\n\n## 12. Mortgages and Loans Payable (continued)\n\nEstimated future principal payments required to meet mortgage obligations as at December 31, 2013 are as follows:\n\nThe Company has credit facilities set out as follows:\n\n- I. A credit facility with a major financial institution, which consists of a $2.0 million revolving demand facility that can be used for the Company's acquisition program and for general business purposes. The interest rate on the debt is prime plus 125 basis points on prime rate advances or 225 basis points over Banker's acceptances ('Bas'). Killam has the right to choose between prime rate advances and BAs based on available rates and timing requirements. As at December 31, 2013, the Company had assets with a fair value of $1.7 million pledged as collateral to the line and had a balance outstanding of $Nil (December 31, 2012 - $Nil).\n\nII. An operating facility which consists of a $1.0 million revolving demand facility for general business purposes, bearing interest at the lender's prime rate plus 1%. As at December 31, 2013, the Company had letters of credit totaling $0.5 million outstanding against this facility (December 31, 2012 - $0.3 million). The agreement includes certain covenants and undertakings of which the Company is in compliance.\n\n## 13. Construction Loan\n\nAt December 31, 2013, the Company had access to a floating rate non-revolving demand construction loan for the purpose of financing the development of The Plaza and payments are made monthly on an interest-only basis. The construction loan has an interest rate of prime plus 0.75%. The construction loan will be repaid in full and converted into a first mortgage once rental targets have been achieved. As at December 31, 2013, $14.8 million was drawn at an interest rate of 3.75% (December 31, 2012 - $14.1 million at 3.68%).\n\n## 14. Convertible Debentures\n\nKillam's $57.5 million convertible subordinated debentures are redeemable at the option of Killam after November 30, 2013, and on or before november 30, 2015 (provided that the current market price of the common shares of the company on the date on which the notice of redemption is given is not less than 125% of the conversion price). After November 30, 2015, the debentures are redeemable at face value. Upon maturity or redemption, Killam may elect to repay all or any portion of the debentures outstanding by issuing the number of common shares obtained by dividing the aggregate of the principal amount of the debentures that have matured or are being redeemed by 95% of the weighted average market price of the common shares for the preceding 20 days (ending 5 days preceding the fixed date for redemption or maturing). At the time of issuance, the fair value of Killam's obligation to make principal and interest payments was $52.5 million and the fair value of the holders' conversion option was $5.0 million (which is reflected in 'Other paid-in capital'). The effective rate of interest on the liability component, which is paid semiannually, is calculated at 7.3%.\n\n84\n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013", + "recall": 0.9496124031007752, + "true_md": "Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except share and per share amounts)\n\n## 12. Mortgages and Loans Payable (continued)\n\n## 13. Construction Loan\n\n## 14. Convertible Debentures\n\n84 Killam ProPerties inc | 2013\n\nKillam’s $57.5 million convertible subordinated debentures are redeemable at the option of Killam after November 30, 2013, and on or before november 30, 2015 (provided that the current market price of the common shares of the company on the date on which the notice of redemption is given is not less than 125% of the conversion price). After November 30, 2015, the debentures are redeemable at face value. Upon maturity or redemption, Killam may elect to repay all or any portion of the debentures outstanding by issuing the number of common shares obtained by dividing the aggregate of the principal amount of the debentures that have matured or are being redeemed by 95% of the weighted average market price of the common shares for the preceding 20 days (ending 5 days preceding the fixed date for redemption or maturing). At the time of issuance, the fair value of Killam’s obligation to make principal and interest payments was $52.5 million and the fair value of the holders’ conversion option was $5.0 million (which is reflected in “Other paid‑in capital”). The effective rate of interest on the liability component, which is paid semiannually, is calculated at 7.3%.\n\nAt December 31, 2013, the Company had access to a floating rate non‑revolving demand construction loan for the purpose of financing the development of The Plaza and payments are made monthly on an interest‑only basis. The construction loan has an interest rate of prime plus 0.75%. The construction loan will be repaid in full and converted into a first mortgage once rental targets have been achieved. As at December 31, 2013, $14.8 million was drawn at an interest rate of 3.75% (December 31, 2012 ‑ $14.1 million at 3.68%).\n\nII. An operating facility which consists of a $1.0 million revolving demand facility for general business purposes, bearing interest at the lender’s prime rate plus 1%. As at December 31, 2013, the Company had letters of credit totaling $0.5 million outstanding against this facility (December 31, 2012 ‑ $0.3 million). The agreement includes certain covenants and undertakings of which the Company is in compliance.\n\nI. A credit facility with a major financial institution, which consists of a $2.0 million revolving demand facility that can be used for the Company’s acquisition program and for general business purposes. The interest rate on the debt is prime plus 125 basis points on prime rate advances or 225 basis points over Banker’s acceptances (“Bas”). Killam has the right to choose between prime rate advances and BAs based on available rates and timing requirements. As at December 31, 2013, the Company had assets with a fair value of $1.7 million pledged as collateral to the line and had a balance outstanding of $Nil (December 31, 2012 ‑ $Nil). \n\nThe Company has credit facilities set out as follows:\n\nEstimated future principal payments required to meet mortgage obligations as at December 31, 2013 are as follows:" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7772037056688034, + "doc_id": "cd95a6c67a700ddcb435f9ea3a0809626a1d8a501c2725957262a6f54257872d", + "edit_distance": 0.6623711340206185, + "f1_score": 0.9793510324483775, + "meteor": 0.664311883239226, + "precision": 0.9822485207100592, + "pred_md": "## Nordstrom, Inc.\n\n## Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nDollar and share amounts in millions except per share, per option and per unit amounts\n\n## NOTE 5: SELF-INSURANCE\n\nOur self-insurance reserves are summarized as follows:\n\nOur workers' compensation policies have a retention per claim of $1 or less and no policy limits.\n\nWe are self-insured for the majority of our employee health and welfare coverage and we do not use stop-loss coverage. Participants contribute to the cost of their coverage through both premiums and out-of-pocket expenses and are subject to certain plan limits and deductibles.\n\nOur general liability policies, encompassing employment practices liability and commercial general liability, have a retention per claim of $3 or less and a policy limit up to $30 and $150, respectively.\n\n## NOTE 6: 401(k) PLAN\n\nWe provide a 401(k) plan for our employees that allows for employee elective contributions and discretionary company contributions. Employee elective contributions are funded through voluntary payroll deductions. Our discretionary company contribution is funded in an amount determined by our Board of Directors each year. Our expense related to company contributions totaled $77, $77 and $83 in 2014, 2013 and 2012.\n\n## NOTE 7: POSTRETIREMENT BENEFITS\n\nWe have an unfunded defined benefit Supplemental Executive Retirement Plan ('SERP'), which provides retirement benefits to certain officers and select employees. The SERP has different benefit levels depending on the participant's role in the company. At the end of 2014, we had 59 participants in the plan, including 27 officers and select employees eligible for SERP benefits, 31 retirees and 1 beneficiary. This plan is non-qualified and does not have a minimum funding requirement.\n\n50", + "recall": 0.9764705882352941, + "true_md": "Nordstrom, Inc. Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements Dollar and share amounts in millions except per share, per option and per unit amounts\n\n## NOTE 5: SELF-INSURANCE Our self-insurance reserves are summarized as follows:\n\n## NOTE 6: 401(k) PLAN We provide a 401(k) plan for our employees that allows for employee elective contributions and discretionary company contributions.\n\n## NOTE 7: POSTRETIREMENT BENEFITS We have an unfunded defined benefit Supplemental Executive Retirement Plan (“SERP”), which provides retirement benefits to certain\n\n50\n\nNOTE 7: POSTRETIREMENT BENEFITS We have an unfunded defined benefit Supplemental Executive Retirement Plan (“SERP”), which provides retirement benefits to certain officers and select employees. The SERP has different benefit levels depending on the participant’s role in the company. At the end of 2014, we had 59 participants in the plan, including 27 officers and select employees eligible for SERP benefits, 31 retirees and 1 beneficiary. This plan is non-qualified and does not have a minimum funding requirement.\n\nNOTE 6: 401(k) PLAN We provide a 401(k) plan for our employees that allows for employee elective contributions and discretionary company contributions. Employee elective contributions are funded through voluntary payroll deductions. Our discretionary company contribution is funded in an amount determined by our Board of Directors each year. Our expense related to company contributions totaled $77, $77 and $83 in 2014, 2013 and 2012.\n\nOur workers’ compensation policies have a retention per claim of $1 or less and no policy limits.\n\nWe are self-insured for the majority of our employee health and welfare coverage and we do not use stop-loss coverage. Participants contribute to the cost of their coverage through both premiums and out-of-pocket expenses and are subject to certain plan limits and deductibles.\n\nOur general liability policies, encompassing employment practices liability and commercial general liability, have a retention per claim of $3 or less and a policy limit up to $30 and $150, respectively.\n\nNOTE 5: SELF-INSURANCE Our self-insurance reserves are summarized as follows:" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8385766789076257, + "doc_id": "141e0d52530ad60ac8c92ab6463f511935a2e42c19359a2722ac2403a3972f08", + "edit_distance": 0.3333333333333333, + "f1_score": 0.8888888888888888, + "meteor": 0.9449404761904763, + "precision": 0.8, + "pred_md": "## www.smfg.co.jp/english\n\nPrinted in Japan", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "www.smfg.co.jp/english\n\nPrinted in Japan" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8822210533508916, + "doc_id": "f2307e618f615247b8afdebec7de61295d9d15b935a993a8792207d91a39ad22", + "edit_distance": 0.5703001579778831, + "f1_score": 0.965964343598055, + "meteor": 0.8082454188533452, + "precision": 0.9551282051282052, + "pred_md": "a\n\nn\n\nn\n\nu\n\na\n\nl\n\nr\n\ne\n\np\n\no\n\nr\n\nt\n\n2\n\n0\n\n1\n\n1\n\nThe combination of global fi lm, television and licensing e orts provides Hasbro with a foundation ff upon which we can expand our global consumers' immersive experiences with Hasbro brands.\n\n## Playing Right\n\nHasbro's heritage of playing right - for our customers, our environment, our communities and our employees - is embedded in our culture. We believe it will be the companies that recognize, systematically address and sustain strong corporate social responsibility (CSR) practices, and view such practices as a strategic imperative that will enjoy the greatest success today and well into the future.\n\nIn 2011, we took great strides in our CSR e orts ff when we issued our fi rst comprehensive CSR report. Hasbro has already begun to phase out PVC from some packaging, and has set a goal to completely eliminate PVC in new packaging produced by Hasbro beginning in 2013. Phasing out PVC in packaging is the most recent e ort in a long series of sustainable ff packaging initiatives we have undertaken, all of which are designed to minimize the impact on our natural resources.\n\nWe are also honored to be the recent recipient of several prestigious recognitions, including being named on Ethisphere's 2012 'World's Most Ethical Companies' list; receiving the U.S. EPA's Climate Leadership Award for Excellence in Greenhouse Gas Management Goal Achievement; and for the second year in a row, being named on Fortune's 2012 '100 Best Companies to Work For' list.\n\nImportantly, in 2011, Hasbro contributed over $15 million in philanthropic support through the Hasbro Children's Fund and our Gift of Play product donation program to help make a di erence for more than ff\n\nBrian D. Goldner\n\nPresident and Chief Executive O cer ffi\n\nfour million children worldwide. Our Team Hasbro employee volunteers also contributed over 18,000 hours to make a di erence in our communities and ff we continue working to inspire young people to make their mark on the world through our founding support of generationOn, the global youth service movement and youth enterprise of Points of Light. Our e orts in ff our communities are something Hasbro employees globally are proud to be a part of.\n\nFor Hasbro, CSR is a journey of innovation and continuous improvement. We invite you to learn more about our e orts at www.hasbro.com/csr. ff\n\n## Transforming into a Global Branded Play Company\n\nToday, our global Hasbro teams are focused on the core tenants of our branded play strategy: creating the most innovative play experiences in the industry, inventing new brands, keeping momentum in our international businesses, and regaining it in the U.S. and Canada, and delivering new immersive brand experiences for our consumers.\n\nWe are committed to returning our U.S. and Canada segment to historical levels of performance and transforming our traditional games business into a globally expansive Hasbro gaming enterprise.\n\nWe have invested in the infrastructure to move from global aspirations to global execution and are positioned to capitalize on the innovation in our brands all around the world.\n\nWe are committed to our branded play strategy and believe it is working, but we recognize there are areas where we need to improve our execution. We value your continued support and participation along this journey as we strive to unlock greater potential from our Hasbro brands globally and share that success with you, our fellow shareholders.\n\nAlfred J. Verrecchia\n\nChairman of the Board", + "recall": 0.9770491803278688, + "true_md": "annual report 2011\n\nThe combination of global fi lm, television and licensing e ff orts provides Hasbro with a foundation upon which we can expand our global consumers’ immersive experiences with Hasbro brands. \n\nfour million children worldwide. Our Team Hasbro employee volunteers also contributed over 18,000 hours to make a di ff erence in our communities and we continue working to inspire young people to make their mark on the world through our founding support of generationOn, the global youth service movement and youth enterprise of Points of Light. Our e ff orts in our communities are something Hasbro employees globally are proud to be a part of. \n\nHasbro’s heritage of playing right - for our customers, our environment, our communities and our employees - is embedded in our culture. We believe it will be the companies that recognize, systematically address and sustain strong corporate social responsibility (CSR) practices, and view such practices as a strategic imperative that will enjoy the greatest success today and well into the future.\n\nIn 2011, we took great strides in our CSR e ff orts when we issued our fi rst comprehensive CSR report. Hasbro has already begun to phase out PVC from some packaging, and has set a goal to completely eliminate PVC in new packaging produced by Hasbro beginning in 2013. Phasing out PVC in packaging is the most recent e ff ort in a long series of sustainable packaging initiatives we have undertaken, all of which are designed to minimize the impact on our natural resources. \n\nWe are also honored to be the recent recipient of several prestigious recognitions, including being named on Ethisphere’s 2012 “World’s Most Ethical Companies” list; receiving the U.S. EPA’s Climate Leadership Award for Excellence in Greenhouse Gas Management Goal Achievement; and for the second year in a row, being named on Fortune’s 2012 “100 Best Companies to Work For” list.\n\nImportantly, in 2011, Hasbro contributed over $15 million in philanthropic support through the Hasbro Children’s Fund and our Gift of Play product donation program to help make a di ff erence for more than \n\nWe are committed to our branded play strategy and believe it is working, but we recognize there are areas where we need to improve our execution. We value your continued support and participation along this journey as we strive to unlock greater potential from our Hasbro brands globally and share that success with you, our fellow shareholders. \n\nWe have invested in the infrastructure to move from global aspirations to global execution and are positioned to capitalize on the innovation in our brands all around the world.\n\nWe are committed to returning our U.S. and Canada segment to historical levels of performance and transforming our traditional games business into a globally expansive Hasbro gaming enterprise.\n\nToday, our global Hasbro teams are focused on the core tenants of our branded play strategy: creating the most innovative play experiences in the industry, inventing new brands, keeping momentum in our international businesses, and regaining it in the U.S. and Canada, and delivering new immersive brand experiences for our consumers. \n\nFor Hasbro, CSR is a journey of innovation and continuous improvement. We invite you to learn more about our e ff orts at www.hasbro.com/csr.\n\n## Playing Right\n\n## Transforming into a Global Branded Play Company\n\nAlfred J. Verrecchia Chairman of the Board\n\nBrian D. Goldner President and Chief Executive O ffi cer" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "73a3bf70b4bdd96da83480adeaa37554fdfd0db5b0bd9b3f6fa1e73e04e72020", + "edit_distance": 0.5703001579778831, + "f1_score": 0.965964343598055, + "meteor": 0.8082454188533452, + "precision": 0.9551282051282052, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.9770491803278688, + "true_md": "" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "0fdc02ec1efed48b0f4431cd0f7a4a12d52290c4fa7701df7a08e2c4ad5024bb", + "edit_distance": 0.9, + "f1_score": 0.2, + "meteor": 0.17857142857142858, + "precision": 0.125, + "pred_md": "FI N A N C I A L S 2014", + "recall": 0.5, + "true_md": "FINANCIALS 2014" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9056687360137324, + "doc_id": "f06064c13bad900c8fed196389aefcb61812be1cf2042f249b1d604c92a9a33a", + "edit_distance": 0.1875, + "f1_score": 0.9818181818181817, + "meteor": 0.9842982068986155, + "precision": 0.9818181818181818, + "pred_md": "Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nSMFG\n\n## (c) Equity derivatives\n\nNotes: 1. The above transactions are valued at fair value and the valuation gains (losses) are accounted for in the consolidated statements of income.\n\n2. Fair value of transactions listed on exchange is calculated using the closing prices on the Tokyo Stock Exchange and others.\n\nFair value of OTC transactions is calculated using option pricing models.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n115", + "recall": 0.9818181818181818, + "true_md": "SMFG\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nNotes: 1. The above transactions are valued at fair value and the valuation gains (losses) are accounted for in the consolidated statements of income.\n\n2. Fair value of transactions listed on exchange is calculated using the closing prices on the Tokyo Stock Exchange and others. Fair value of OTC transactions is calculated using option pricing models.\n\n- (c) Equity derivatives\n\nSMFG 2011 115" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9126996867990271, + "doc_id": "e3f077916210dc9f0892fe4a9d013d0cceebcd44b3f402ce7d9698b656c74677", + "edit_distance": 0.42857142857142855, + "f1_score": 0.9659442724458204, + "meteor": 0.9009320314277872, + "precision": 0.9770354906054279, + "pred_md": "to selected students pursuing careers in finance, economics, accounting, marketing, business administration, computer science and information technology. In addition, scholars will take part in a Chesapeake Presidential Leadership Course facilitated by faculty members in coordination with designated Chesapeake leadership coaches, including a Chesapeake senior vice president and OCU alumni.\n\nIn 2007 Chesapeake launched a scholarship program in Texas with an initial $1.25 million contribution, challenging the cities of Fort Worth and Dal las to match its gift within a year. The cities responded and matched the gift, so Chesapeake in 2008 added another $1.25 million to the fund, bringing the total to $3.75 million. The Chesapeake Scholarship Fund currently funds the cost of higher education for 48 minority students. The fund provides each student $20,000 a year for up to four years at the school of their choice. To date more than $1.0 million has been distributed to deserving local students.\n\nTo help ensure the training of qualified geologists, engineers, landmen and energy lawyers in the next generation, we award scholarships to students pursuing energy-related degrees. We also help mentor them through Chesapeake's Peak Program. Junior- and senior-level scholarship recipients are paired with Chesapeake employee mentors who help develop students' knowledge and provide career advice. There are currently 25 mentors and 40 scholarship recipients participating in the Peak Program.\n\nOur recruiting team also initiated a strategic military recruitment effort during the past two years to hire former military personnel to work in a variety of leadership and crew positions. This effort earned Chesapeake an honor from G.I. JOBS magazine when we were named a 2011 Top 100 Military-Friendly Employer. Chesapeake currently employs 37 men and women who formerly served as junior military officers and more than 100 former servicemen and servicewomen who joined the company through a program called Troops 2 Roughnecks.\n\nIn addition to our specific scholarship programs, one-time educational donations and recruitment efforts, in 2010 we gave more than $1.8 million to fund higher education for nearly 400 other students in 12 states through our Chesapeake Scholars program. Chesapeake's scholarships help recruit the best and brightest students and provide educational opportunities in communities where we operate. In Oklahoma City, more than 400 employees volunteer for up to an hour a week on company time at four local public schools. Chesapeake's program has grown to become the largest corporate mentoring program in Oklahoma.\n\n## Community Impact\n\nChesapeake employees have been enriching their hometowns as volunteers for many years. We formalized those efforts in 2009 by establishing an official employee volunteer program, the H.E.L.P . (Helping Energize Local Progress) Initiative, wherein employees are invited to volunteer each month for a variety of organizations from food pantries to animal shelters. Through that program, employees donated more than 26,000 hours to their communities in 2009.\n\nIn the summer of 2010, Chesapeake took the H.E.L.P . Initiative to a higher level through the launch of Operation Blue. From Memorial Day through Labor Day, each employee was given four hours of company time to complete the volunteer project of their choice. Our employees eagerly accepted the challenge, and in three months more than 4,900 employees donated 30,900 hours of service to 519 organizations in more than 96 communities across the country. Operation Blue is now an annual\n\n2010 ANNUAL REPORT |\n\n25\n\nvolunteer program in which employees roll up their sleeves in the communities they call home.\n\nChesapeake's contributions take many forms: financial and equipment donations, volunteerism and scholarships. Last year, we made numerous in-kind donations of laptops, reconditioned Chesapeake fleet vehicles and subsidized office space. These contributions provide essential operating tools as nonprofit organizations across the nation attempt to serve more people - often with lower budgets - in tough economic times.\n\nFor example, in Louisiana we donated 12 vehicles in 2010, including one to the Panola College Oil and Natural Gas Technology Program, which teaches students about the natural gas industry and provides them with hands-on technical training. Across many of the company's operating areas, we've donated computers to deserving students, schools and organizations through Chesapeake's Discovering Tomorrow's Leaders program. In 2010 the company equipped 14 students with laptops and donated 70 computers to schools or supporting nonprofit organizations.\n\nChesapeake partners with other companies and organizations to meet basic, practical needs in hundreds of communities. An example is our\n\nPutting food on the table - Employees volunteer at the Regional Food Bank of Oklahoma as part of Operation Blue.\n\nPutting food on the table - Employees volunteer at the Regional Food Bank of Oklahoma as part of Operation Blue.\n\nsponsorship of the annual Day of Caring at the Ganus Center of Harding University in White County, Arkansas. During the event, approximately 1,200 uninsured or underinsured residents received a day of free medical, dental and eye screenings.\n\nTo help cultivate an appreciation for the great outdoors, in 2010 Chesapeake provided $25,000 to REAL School Gardens, a Fort Worthbased organization that establishes gardens at approximately 70 lower income elementary schools in North Texas. At I.M. Terrell Elementary School, students, parents, teachers and volunteers from Chesapeake and other groups worked together to prepare vegetable gardens and flower beds. In addition to teamwork skills and gardening, students learned about nutrition and took home food from the garden's bounty.\n\nWe supported servicemen and servicewomen by partnering with the Shreveport Chapter of Operation Support Our Troops, Inc. Our contribution helped offset the postage to send more than 100 care packages to troops overseas. The shipment was the largest in the organization's history and included Christmas cards, games and nonperishable food items.\n\nBy investing in the communities where we operate and the people whose lives we touch, we ensure a stronger today and a more hopeful tomorrow.", + "recall": 0.9551020408163265, + "true_md": "25\n\n2010 ANNUAL REPORT\n\nto selected students pursuing careers in finance, economics, accounting, marketing, business administration, computer science and information technology. In addition, scholars will take part in a Chesapeake Presiden- tial Leadership Course facilitated by faculty members in coordination with designated Chesapeake leadership coaches, including a Chesapeake senior vice president and OCU alumni. \n\nIn 2007 Chesapeake launched a scholarship program in Texas with an initial $1.25 million contribution, challenging the cities of Fort Worth and Dal- las to match its gift within a year. The cities responded and matched the gift, so Chesapeake in 2008 added another $1.25 million to the fund, bringing the total to $3.75 million. The Chesapeake Scholarship Fund currently funds the cost of higher education for 48 minority students. The fund provides each student $20,000 a year for up to four years at the school of their choice. To date more than $1.0 million has been distributed to deserving local students.\n\nTo help ensure the training of qualified geologists, engineers, land- men and energy lawyers in the next generation, we award scholarships to students pursuing energy-related degrees. We also help mentor them through Chesapeake’s Peak Program. Junior- and senior-level scholarship recipients are paired with Chesapeake employee mentors who help devel- op students’ knowledge and provide career advice. There are currently 25 mentors and 40 scholarship recipients participating in the Peak Program. \n\nOur recruiting team also initiated a strategic military recruitment effort during the past two years to hire former military personnel to work in a variety of leadership and crew positions. This effort earned Chesapeake an honor from G.I. JOBS magazine when we were named a 2011 Top 100 Military-Friendly Employer. Chesapeake currently employs 37 men and women who formerly served as junior military officers and more than 100 former servicemen and servicewomen who joined the company through a program called Troops 2 Roughnecks.\n\nIn addition to our specific scholarship programs, one-time educational donations and recruitment efforts, in 2010 we gave more than $1.8 million to fund higher education for nearly 400 other students in 12 states through our Chesapeake Scholars program. Chesapeake’s scholarships help recruit the best and brightest students and provide educational opportunities in communities where we operate. In Oklahoma City, more than 400 em- ployees volunteer for up to an hour a week on company time at four local public schools. Chesapeake’s program has grown to become the largest corporate mentoring program in Oklahoma.\n\nChesapeake employees have been enriching their hometowns as volun- teers for many years. We formalized those efforts in 2009 by establishing an official employee volunteer program, the H.E.L.P. (Helping Energize Local Progress) Initiative, wherein employees are invited to volunteer each month for a variety of organizations from food pantries to animal shelters. Through that program, employees donated more than 26,000 hours to their communities in 2009. \n\nIn the summer of 2010, Chesapeake took the H.E.L.P. Initiative to a higher level through the launch of Operation Blue. From Memorial Day through Labor Day, each employee was given four hours of company time to complete the volunteer project of their choice. Our employees eagerly accepted the challenge, and in three months more than 4,900 employ- ees donated 30,900 hours of service to 519 organizations in more than 96 communities across the country. Operation Blue is now an annual\n\nBy investing in the communities where we operate and the people whose lives we touch, we ensure a stronger today and a more hope- ful tomorrow.\n\nWe supported servicemen and servicewomen by partnering with the Shreveport Chapter of Operation Support Our Troops, Inc. Our contribution helped offset the postage to send more than 100 care packages to troops overseas. The shipment was the largest in the organization’s history and included Christmas cards, games and nonperishable food items.\n\nTo help cultivate an appreciation for the great outdoors, in 2010 Chesapeake provided $25,000 to REAL School Gardens, a Fort Worth- based organization that establishes gardens at approximately 70 lower income elementary schools in North Texas. At I.M. Terrell Elementary School, students, parents, teachers and volunteers from Chesapeake and other groups worked together to prepare vegetable gardens and flower beds. In addition to teamwork skills and gardening, students learned about nutrition and took home food from the garden’s bounty. \n\nsponsorship of the annual Day of Caring at the Ganus Center of Harding University in White County, Arkansas. During the event, approximately 1,200 uninsured or underinsured residents received a day of free medical, dental and eye screenings. \n\nChesapeake partners with other companies and organizations to meet basic, practical needs in hundreds of communities. An example is our \n\nFor example, in Louisiana we donated 12 vehicles in 2010, including one to the Panola College Oil and Natural Gas Technology Program, which teaches students about the natural gas industry and provides them with hands-on technical training. Across many of the company’s operating areas, we’ve donated computers to deserving students, schools and organizations through Chesapeake’s Discovering Tomorrow’s Leaders program. In 2010 the company equipped 14 students with laptops and donated 70 computers to schools or supporting nonprofit organizations.\n\nChesapeake’s contributions take many forms: financial and equipment donations, volunteerism and scholarships. Last year, we made numerous in-kind donations of laptops, reconditioned Chesapeake fleet vehicles and subsidized office space. These contributions provide essential operating tools as nonprofit organizations across the nation attempt to serve more people — often with lower budgets — in tough economic times.\n\nvolunteer program in which employees roll up their sleeves in the com- munities they call home.\n\nPutting food on the table — Employees volunteer at the Regional Food Bank of Oklahoma as part of Operation Blue.\n\n## Community Impact" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8744613328244379, + "doc_id": "e7453092e7cfa195ddba4617d4126c9e185af221084f43fb56322e5df1d7e517", + "edit_distance": 0.3028169014084507, + "f1_score": 0.9790209790209791, + "meteor": 0.923110602411276, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Diluted loss per share\n\nAs the Group made a loss for the year, diluted loss per share is the same as basic loss per share as the impact of dilution would be to reduce the loss per share.\n\n## Options\n\nOptions granted to employees and Directors are considered to be potential ordinary shares and have been included in the determination of diluted earnings per share. The options have not been included in the determination of basic earnings per share. Details relating to the options are set out in Note 24.\n\n## 32. Parent entity financial information\n\nAs at, and throughout, the financial year ending 30 June 2013 the parent entity of the Group was Kingsgate.\n\ncontinued\n\nu\n\nNotes to the Financial Statements", + "recall": 0.958904109589041, + "true_md": "Notes to the Financial Statements 109\n\nNotes t o the Financial Statements\n\ncontinued u\n\n## Diluted loss per share\n\n## 32. Parent entity financial information\n\n## Options\n\nAs the Group made a loss for the year, diluted loss per share is the same as basic loss per share as the impact of dilution would be to reduce the loss per share.\n\nOptions granted to employees and Directors are considered to be potential ordinary shares and have been included in the determination of diluted earnings per share. The options have not been included in the determination of basic earnings per share. Details relating to the options are set out in Note 24.\n\nAs at, and throughout, the financial year ending 30 June 2013 the parent entity of the Group was Kingsgate." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9826440683565533, + "doc_id": "e75ee7ae88e7189dae54a023d74f5699782f2ef67cebc018cba1687b698f4e44", + "edit_distance": 0.12698412698412698, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9995680812007343, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Item 3. Legal Proceedings.\n\nWe are subject from time to time to various claims and lawsuits arising in the ordinary course of business, including lawsuits alleging violations of state and/or federal wage and hour and other employment laws, privacy and other consumer-based claims. Some of these lawsuits include certified classes of litigants, or purport or may be determined to be class or collective actions and seek substantial damages or injunctive relief, or both, and some may remain unresolved for several years. We believe the recorded reserves in our consolidated financial statements are adequate in light of the probable and estimable liabilities. As of the date of this report, we do not believe any currently identified claim, proceeding or litigation, either alone or in the aggregate, will have a material impact on our results of operations, financial position or cash flows. Since these matters are subject to inherent uncertainties, our view of them may change in the future.\n\n## Item 4. Mine Safety Disclosures.\n\nNone.\n\n12", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## Item 3. Legal Proceedings.\n\n## Item 4. Mine Safety Disclosures.\n\n12\n\nNone.\n\nWe are subject from time to time to various claims and lawsuits arising in the ordinary course of business, including lawsuits alleging violations of state and/or federal wage and hour and other employment laws, privacy and other consumer-based claims. Some of these lawsuits include certified classes of litigants, or purport or may be determined to be class or collective actions and seek substantial damages or injunctive relief, or both, and some may remain unresolved for several years. We believe the recorded reserves in our consolidated financial statements are adequate in light of the probable and estimable liabilities. As of the date of this report, we do not believe any currently identified claim, proceeding or litigation, either alone or in the aggregate, will have a material impact on our results of operations, financial position or cash flows. Since these matters are subject to inherent uncertainties, our view of them may change in the future." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7392134644024438, + "doc_id": "2aa9187ad9a3fb3a0242cdfd99d04d9ddee2503a448036850aead6bd856ee2a8", + "edit_distance": 0.2570281124497992, + "f1_score": 0.7607361963190185, + "meteor": 0.785361391257742, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "- ■ New York Branch SMBC Capital Markets, Inc. SMBC Leasing and Finance, Inc. SMBC Nikko Securities America, Inc.\n- ■ Los Angeles Branch *\n- ■ San Francisco Branch *\n- ■ Houston Representative Office *\n- ■ Mexico City Representative Office *\n- ■ Bogota Representative Office *\n- ■ Cayman Branch\n- ■ Manufacturers Bank\n- ■ Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation of Canada\n- ■ Banco Sumitomo Mitsui Brasileiro S.A.\n- ■ Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation Europe Limited SMBC Nikko Capital Markets Limited\n- ■ Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation Europe Limited Paris Branch\n- ■ Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation Europe Limited Milan Branch\n- ■ Düsseldorf Branch\n- ■ Brussels Branch\n- ■ SMBC Amsterdam Representative Office\n- ■ Madrid Representative Office\n- ■ Prague Representative Office\n- ■ ZAO Sumitomo Mitsui Rus Bank Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation Europe Limited Moscow Representative Office\n- ■ Sumitomo Mitsui Finance Dublin Limited\n- ■ Dubai Branch\n- ■ Doha QFC Office\n- ■ Bahrain Representative Office\n- ■ Tehran Representative Office\n- ■ Cairo Representative Office\n- ■ Dubai Branch Johannesburg Representative Office *\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n225", + "recall": 0.6138613861386139, + "true_md": "## Overseas service network (as of June 30, 2011) Branches*: 15 Sub-Branches*: 7 Representative Offices: 12 Total: 34\n\nAlso showing principal overseas subsidiaries\n\n* Number of each status is based on the definition in Japan.\n\n## The Americas\n\n## Europe, Middle East and Africa\n\nSMFG 2011 225\n\n- ■ New York Branch SMBC Capital Markets, Inc. SMBC Leasing and Finance, Inc. SMBC Nikko Securities America, Inc.\n\n- ■ Los Angeles Branch *\n\n- ■ San Francisco Branch *\n\n- ■ Houston Representative Office *\n\n- ■ Mexico City Representative Office *\n\n- ■ Bogota Representative Office *\n\n- ■ Cayman Branch\n\n- ■ Manufacturers Bank\n\n- ■ Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation of Canada\n\n- ■ Banco Sumitomo Mitsui Brasileiro S.A.\n\n- ■ Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation Europe Limited SMBC Nikko Capital Markets Limited\n\n- ■ Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation Europe Limited Paris Branch\n\n- ■ Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation Europe Limited Milan Branch\n\n- ■ Düsseldorf Branch\n\n- ■ Brussels Branch\n\n- ■ SMBC Amsterdam Representative Office\n\n- ■ Madrid Representative Office\n\n- ■ Prague Representative Office\n\n- ■ ZAO Sumitomo Mitsui Rus Bank Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation Europe Limited Moscow Representative Office\n\n- ■ Sumitomo Mitsui Finance Dublin Limited\n\n- ■ Dubai Branch\n\n- ■ Doha QFC Office\n\n- ■ Bahrain Representative Office\n\n- ■ Tehran Representative Office\n\n- ■ Cairo Representative Office\n\n- ■ Dubai Branch Johannesburg Representative Office *" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9236654075196216, + "doc_id": "77885e98e3508c5862a698cbcbc0d1735fda05a435eb9604dbf7aee6d42108fb", + "edit_distance": 0.1411042944785276, + "f1_score": 0.9673202614379085, + "meteor": 0.9233296372847813, + "precision": 0.9866666666666667, + "pred_md": "## Performance rights\n\nKingsgate issued the following performance rights during the year:\n\nThe fair value of the performance rights was estimated using Monte Carlo simulation, taking into account the terms and conditions upon which the awards were granted.\n\nThe following table lists the inputs to the model used for the performance rights granted for the year:\n\nThe volatility above was determined with reference to the historical volatility of the Company's share price from June 2008 to November 2012.\n\n## Deferred rights\n\nKingsgate issued the following deferred rights during the year:\n\nThe fair value of the deferred rights was estimated based on the share price less the present value of projected dividends over the expected term of each deferred right.\n\nThe following table lists the inputs to the model used for the deferred rights granted for the year:\n\ncontinued\n\nu\n\n97\n\nNotes to the Financial Statements\n\nNotes to the Financial Statements", + "recall": 0.9487179487179487, + "true_md": "Notes to the Financial Statements 97\n\n## Performance rights\n\n## Deferred rights\n\nKingsgate issued the following performance rights during the year:\n\nThe fair value of the performance rights was estimated using Monte Carlo simulation, taking into account the terms and conditions upon which the awards were granted. \n\nThe following table lists the inputs to the model used for the performance rights granted for the year:\n\nThe volatility above was determined with reference to the historical volatility of the Company’s share price from June 2008 to November 2012. \n\nKingsgate issued the following deferred rights during the year:\n\nThe fair value of the deferred rights was estimated based on the share price less the present value of projected dividends over the expected term of each deferred right.\n\nThe following table lists the inputs to the model used for the deferred rights granted for the year:\n\ncontinued u\n\nNotes t o the Financial Statements" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9545557945753025, + "doc_id": "fc9b7866e22cff48c8c0fd912f7a202dd30050388e144017b32199f2affe7461", + "edit_distance": 0.8242924528301887, + "f1_score": 0.992, + "meteor": 0.8363597312539184, + "precision": 0.9935897435897436, + "pred_md": "NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## Private Companies\n\nIn October 2012, Media completed the purchase of 100% of the outstanding shares of theScore for $167 million. The shares were transferred to an interim CRTC-approved trust which was responsible for the independent management of the business in the normal course of operations until final approval by the CRTC was obtained. The shares were accounted for as an investment in a private company as at December 31, 2012.\n\nIn 2013, we received final regulatory approval to transfer the Score Media Inc. business under the control of Rogers and we accounted for the acquisition of control under IFRS 3 (note 7).\n\n## Investments in Joint Arrangements and Associates\n\nWe have interests in a number of associates and joint arrangements. Certain transactions that occurred in 2012 are described below.\n\n## MLSE\n\nMLSE, a sports and entertainment company, owns and operates the Air Canada Centre, the NHL's Toronto Maple Leafs, the NBA's Toronto Raptors, the MLS' Toronto FC, the AHL's Toronto Marlies and other assets. In August 2012, we, along with BCE Inc., closed the joint acquisition of a net 75% equity interest in MLSE. Following a leveraged recapitalization of MLSE, our net cash investment was $540 million, representing a 37.5% equity interest in MLSE. Our investment in MLSE is a joint venture and is accounted for using the equity method.\n\n## Inukshuk\n\nInukshuk is a joint operation owned 50% by Rogers that was created to operate a national fixed wireless telecommunications network to be used by the partners and their subsidiaries. In December 2012, Inukshuk sold certain spectrum licences and network equipment to its owners at fair market value. We and the other non-related venturer each purchased 50% of the assets at a fair market value of $1,181 million and a carrying value of $250 million. As a result, we recorded:\n\n- GLYPH<129> a gain on investment of $233 million in other income in the consolidated statement of income, representing our 50% share of the Inukshuk gain relating to the assets sold to the other venturer,\n- GLYPH<129> spectrum licences of $360 million, which includes a $15 million fee paid in 2011 to the other venturer to acquire certain blocks of spectrum, and network equipment of $13 million representing the fair value of the assets purchased less our share of the Inukshuk gain, and\n- GLYPH<129> a decrease of $125 million in our investment in Inukshuk, representing the carrying value of the assets sold.\n\nThe following tables provide summary financial information for the joint ventures and associates and our portion. We record our investments in joint ventures and associates using the equity method.\n\n110\n\nROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\nCertain of our joint ventures have non-controlling shareholders that have a right to require our joint venture to purchase the non-controlling interest at a future date.\n\n## NOTE 15: OTHER LONG-TERM ASSETS\n\n## NOTE 16: ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE SECURITIZATION\n\nWe entered into an accounts receivable securitization program with a Canadian financial institution effective December 31, 2012, which allows us to sell certain trade receivables into the program. The proceeds of the sales are committed up to a maximum of $900 million.\n\nWe received funding of $650 million under the program in 2013. We continue to service and retain substantially all of the risks and rewards relating to the accounts receivables we sold, and therefore, the receivables remain recognized on our consolidated statements of financial position and the funding received is recorded as short-term borrowings. The buyer's interest in these trade receivables ranks ahead of our interest. The program restricts us from using the receivables as collateral for any other purpose. The buyer of our trade receivables has no claim on any of our other assets. The terms of our accounts receivable securitization program are committed until it expires on December 31, 2015.\n\nAs at December 31, 2013, $1,091 million of trade accounts receivables were sold to the buyer as security for sale proceeds of $650 million, resulting in an overcollateralization of $441 million. We incurred interest costs of $7 million in 2013 (2012 - nil) which we recorded in finance costs.\n\n## NOTE 17: PROVISIONS\n\nThe table below shows our provisions and their classification between current and long-term as at December 31, 2012 and 2013.\n\nOther provisions include product guarantee provisions, onerous contracts and legal provisions.", + "recall": 0.9904153354632588, + "true_md": "NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## Private Companies\n\n## NOTE 15: OTHER LONG-TERM ASSETS\n\n## NOTE 16: ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE SECURITIZATION\n\n## MLSE\n\n## Investments in Joint Arrangements and Associates\n\n## Inukshuk\n\n## NOTE 17: PROVISIONS\n\nIn October 2012, Media completed the purchase of 100% of the outstanding shares of theScore for $167 million. The shares were transferred to an interim CRTC-approved trust which was responsible for the independent management of the business in the normal course of operations until final approval by the CRTC was obtained. The shares were accounted for as an investment in a private company as at December 31, 2012.\n\nIn 2013, we received final regulatory approval to transfer the Score Media Inc. business under the control of Rogers and we accounted for the acquisition of control under IFRS 3 (note 7).\n\nCertain of our joint ventures have non-controlling shareholders that have a right to require our joint venture to purchase the non-controlling interest at a future date.\n\nWe entered into an accounts receivable securitization program with a Canadian financial institution effective December 31, 2012, which allows us to sell certain trade receivables into the program. The proceeds of the sales are committed up to a maximum of $900 million.\n\nWe received funding of $650 million under the program in 2013. We continue to service and retain substantially all of the risks and rewards relating to the accounts receivables we sold, and therefore, the receivables remain recognized on our consolidated statements of financial position and the funding received is recorded as short-term borrowings. The buyer’s interest in these trade receivables ranks ahead of our interest. The program restricts us from using the receivables as collateral for any other purpose. The buyer of our trade receivables has no claim on any of our other assets. The terms of our accounts receivable securitization program are committed until it expires on December 31, 2015.\n\nAs at December 31, 2013, $1,091 million of trade accounts receivables were sold to the buyer as security for sale proceeds of $650 million, resulting in an overcollateralization of $441 million. We incurred interest costs of $7 million in 2013 (2012 – nil) which we recorded in finance costs.\n\nWe have interests in a number of associates and joint arrangements. Certain transactions that occurred in 2012 are described below.\n\nMLSE, a sports and entertainment company, owns and operates the Air Canada Centre, the NHL’s Toronto Maple Leafs, the NBA’s Toronto Raptors, the MLS’ Toronto FC, the AHL’s Toronto Marlies and other assets. In August 2012, we, along with BCE Inc., closed the joint acquisition of a net 75% equity interest in MLSE. Following a leveraged recapitalization of MLSE, our net cash investment was $540 million, representing a 37.5% equity interest in MLSE. Our investment in MLSE is a joint venture and is accounted for using the equity method.\n\nInukshuk is a joint operation owned 50% by Rogers that was created to operate a national fixed wireless telecommunications network to be used by the partners and their subsidiaries. In December 2012, Inukshuk sold certain spectrum licences and network equipment to its owners at fair market value. We and the other non-related venturer each purchased 50% of the assets at a fair market value of $1,181 million and a carrying value of $250 million. As a result, we recorded:\n\nThe following tables provide summary financial information for the joint ventures and associates and our portion. We record our investments in joint ventures and associates using the equity method.\n\nThe table below shows our provisions and their classification between current and long-term as at December 31, 2012 and 2013.\n\n- GLYPH<129> a gain on investment of $233 million in other income in the consolidated statement of income, representing our 50% share of the Inukshuk gain relating to the assets sold to the other venturer,\n\n- GLYPH<129> spectrum licences of $360 million, which includes a $15 million fee paid in 2011 to the other venturer to acquire certain blocks of spectrum, and network equipment of $13 million representing the fair value of the assets purchased less our share of the Inukshuk gain, and\n\n- GLYPH<129> a decrease of $125 million in our investment in Inukshuk, representing the carrying value of the assets sold.\n\nOther provisions include product guarantee provisions, onerous contracts and legal provisions.\n\n110 ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9391521643652928, + "doc_id": "605ea15acdd5a1361274cbbd19632eb0e18712b2c0fabf9a9ae2de5b86eeedf5", + "edit_distance": 0.36717428087986465, + "f1_score": 0.9798657718120807, + "meteor": 0.9162983549903039, + "precision": 0.9831649831649831, + "pred_md": "## The year after 'The Year of General Monitors'\n\nAs you may recall, in my letter in last year's annual report, I referred to 2010 as 'The Year of General Monitors' a year in which we made the largest acquisition in our company's long history. Clearly, with the integration of our two companies now complete, combining the capabilities and resources of MSA and General Monitors has now established us as the global leader in Fixed Gas and Flame Detection (FGFD) technology.\n\nIn short, our FGFD line has become one of our hottest and most active Core Product areas. For instance, in 2011, the General Monitors' product line achieved the highest sales in its 50-year history, with revenues exceeding $86 million, besting its prior sales record by almost 15 percent. Further, the profit contribution of those sales exceeded our most optimistic expectations.\n\nThose sales and profits are driven by strategy and innovation. Working together, MSA and General Monitors launched six cross-branded product platforms in 2011, including the GM PA4000/MSA Chemgard® instrument and the MSA Flamegard® 5 Flame Detection System. Cross-branded products are the products one company has that e ff ectively meet an unmet need within the distribution channel of the other. Very simply, they represent an e ffi cient way for MSA and our customers to quickly benefit from the synergies of our two organizations.\n\nPartnering with a team from TOTAL Oil & Gas - Indonesia, a team of General Monitors associates conducted an on-site trial of the Gassonic Ultrasonic Gas Leak Detector to ensure their network of unmanned wellhead facilities in the shallow waters near the city of Balikpapan are properly monitored for gas leaks. Balikpapan is a seaport city on the eastern coast of the island of Borneo, Indonesia, a resource-rich region well known for its timber, mining and petroleum export products.\n\n## Well positioned for a great 2012\n\nWhile no one has a crystal ball, I am cautiously optimistic that 2012 will be another strong year for MSA. While there are many market influences outside of our control, I believe MSA is well positioned for the future.\n\nBy following our Corporate Strategy, we are focusing on our strongest products, we are lowering our operating costs, we are working hard in profitable new markets, and, overall, we are taking the actions I believe will continue to lead to success for MSA.\n\nIn closing, I'd like to thank each of our more than 5,300 associates around the world, our Board of Directors and our Executive Leadership Team for the outstanding e ff orts that helped make this a record year for MSA. I'd like to thank our shareholders for your continuing confidence in our company.\n\nAnd lastly, I want to thank our growing ranks of distributors and customers around the world for 'choosing to purchase' MSA and for placing their trust in our hands. It's a responsibility we take very seriously, and one we will work hard to earn each and every day throughout the coming year, and long beyond.\n\nSincerely,\n\nWilliam M. Lambert\n\nPresident and Chief Executive O ffi cer\n\nMSA 2011 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n5", + "recall": 0.9765886287625418, + "true_md": "Partnering with a team from TOTAL Oil & Gas - Indonesia, a team of General Monitors associates conducted an on-site trial of the Gassonic Ultrasonic Gas Leak Detector to ensure their network of unmanned wellhead facilities in the shallow waters near the city of Balikpapan are properly monitored for gas leaks. Balikpapan is a seaport city on the eastern coast of the island of Borneo, Indonesia, a resource-rich region well known for its timber, mining and petroleum export products.\n\nAs you may recall, in my letter in last year’s annual report, I referred to 2010 as “The Year of General Monitors” – a year in which we made the largest acquisition in our company’s long history. Clearly, with the integration of our two companies now complete, combining the capabilities and resources of MSA and General Monitors has now established us as the global leader in Fixed Gas and Flame Detection (FGFD) technology.\n\nIn short, our FGFD line has become one of our hottest and most active Core Product areas. For instance, in 2011, the General Monitors’ product line achieved the highest sales in its 50-year history, with revenues exceeding $86 million, besting its prior sales record by almost 15 percent. Further, the profit contribution of those sales exceeded our most optimistic expectations. \n\nThose sales and profits are driven by strategy and innovation. Working together, MSA and General Monitors launched six cross-branded product platforms in 2011, including the GM PA4000/MSA Chemgard® instrument and the MSA Flamegard® 5 Flame Detection System. Cross-branded products are the products one company has that e ff ectively meet an unmet need within the distribution channel of the other. Very simply, they represent an e ffi cient way for MSA and our customers to quickly benefit from the synergies of our two organizations. \n\nWhile no one has a crystal ball, I am cautiously optimistic that 2012 will be another strong year for MSA. While there are many market influences outside of our control, I believe MSA is well positioned for the future.\n\nBy following our Corporate Strategy, we are focusing on our strongest products, we are lowering our operating costs, we are working hard in profitable new markets, and, overall, we are taking the actions I believe will continue to lead to success for MSA.\n\nIn closing, I’d like to thank each of our more than 5,300 associates around the world, our Board of Directors and our Executive Leadership Team for the outstanding e ff orts that helped make this a record year for MSA. I’d like to thank our shareholders for your continuing confidence in our company.\n\nAnd lastly, I want to thank our growing ranks of distributors and customers around the world for “choosing to purchase” MSA and for placing their trust in our hands. It’s a responsibility we take very seriously, and one we will work hard to earn each and every day throughout the coming year, and long beyond.\n\nSincerely,\n\nWilliam M. Lambert President and Chief Executive O ffi cer\n\nMSA 2011 ANNUAL REPORT 5\n\n## The year after “The Year of General Monitors”\n\n## Well positioned for a great 2012" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8747451803361639, + "doc_id": "0473fa1c515715c85903e7493ae0e4d7002001ae52a4c9b3df10406c4adc5ba5", + "edit_distance": 0.36, + "f1_score": 0.9550173010380623, + "meteor": 0.9389629093289243, + "precision": 0.965034965034965, + "pred_md": "## DELIVERING WHAT'S NEXT\n\nLEADING NEXT GENERATION NETWORKS\n\nDIGITAL MEDIA\n\nADVANCED IP SOLUTIONS\n\nMOBILE COMMERCE\n\nHOME AUTOMATION\n\nENTERPRISE MOBILE APPLICATIONS\n\nMACHINE-TOMACHINE COMMUNICATIONS\n\nMOBILE STREAMING TELEVISION\n\nCONVERGED WIRELESS/ WIRELINE\n\n14 ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\nINNOVATION AND A DRIVE TO BE FIRST TO DELIVER THE MOST ADVANCED INFORMATION, COMMUNICATIONS, ENTERTAINMENT AND TRANSACTION SERVICES, SOLUTIONS AND DEVICES ARE AT THE VERY CORE OF ROGERS.\n\nAs one of the first carriers in the world to offer the telecommunications 'quadruple play' of wireless, television, Internet and telephony services over its own networks, few have more capabilities or success in enabling subscribers to enjoy their experiences across multiple screens.\n\nRogers has a long history of firsts, including the first cellular call in Canada, the world's first high-speed cable modem service, the first digital cellular network in North America, Canada's first video-on-demand and mobile TV services, the first HSPA and LTE networks and the first to offer iPhone, Android, BlackBerry and Windows 8 in Canada. With the combination of our advanced next-generation national wireless network, our powerful broadband cable infrastructure and our category-leading media assets, we are in a unique position to help Canadians to live like never before.", + "recall": 0.9452054794520548, + "true_md": "## INNOVATION AND A DRIVE TO BE FIRST TO DELIVER THE MOST ADVANCED INFORMATION, COMMUNICATIONS, ENTERTAINMENT AND TRANSACTION SERVICES, SOLUTIONS AND DEVICES ARE AT THE VERY CORE OF ROGERS.\n\nAs one of the first carriers in the world to offer the telecommunications “quadruple play” of wireless, television, Internet and telephony services over its own networks, few have more capabilities or success in enabling subscribers to enjoy their experiences across multiple screens.\n\nRogers has a long history of firsts, including the first cellular call in Canada, the world’s first high-speed cable modem service, the first digital cellular network in North America, Canada’s first video-on-demand and mobile TV services, the first HSPA and LTE networks and the first to offer iPhone, Android, BlackBerry and Windows 8 in Canada. With the combination of our advanced next-generation national wireless network, our powerful broadband cable infrastructure and our category-leading media assets, we are in a unique position to help Canadians to live like never before.\n\n14 ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n## DELIVERING WHAT’S NEXT\n\nMOBILE COMMERCE\n\nMACHINE-TO- MACHINE COMMUNICATIONS\n\nLEADING NEXT GENERATION NETWORKS\n\nDIGITAL MEDIA\n\nMOBILE STREAMING TELEVISION\n\nHOME AUTOMATION\n\nENTERPRISE MOBILE APPLICATIONS\n\nCONVERGED WIRELESS/ WIRELINE\n\nADVANCED IP SOLUTIONS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9526418411630626, + "doc_id": "fae65a99935b81606dc2761350fea2c9a3bef3cb0328290884d332eaae772f24", + "edit_distance": 0.16951566951566951, + "f1_score": 0.9887640449438203, + "meteor": 0.9584742803792162, + "precision": 0.9903536977491961, + "pred_md": "## Understanding Our Business\n\nRogers Communications is one of Canada's leading diversified communications and media companies.\n\nOur vision is to be known for leading the enablement and delivery of seamless, customer-driven communications, entertainment, information and transactional experiences across any device, place or time.\n\nWireless provides wireless voice and data communication services, including machine to machine to both consumer and enterprise businesses, governments and other telecommunications service providers. Cable provides voice and data communications, home monitoring, television and high-speed Internet services to both consumers and businesses. Business S olutions provides voice and data communications and advanced services including data centre based solutions and cloud computing services to a wide range of medium to large businesses, including other service providers, and government either wirelessly or over our terrestrial network. Revenue generated from these segments is generally based on monthly subscription and network usage rates. Costs include attracting, setting-up and retaining customers, content, and the costs of upgrading and maintaining the underlying network.\n\nOur wireless network is currently one of the most extensive and advanced independent high-speed wireless data networks in Canada, capable of supporting wireless services on smartphones, tablets, computers and a broad variety of machine-to-machine and specialized devices. We built the first Long Term Evolution (LTE) high speed network in Canada, reaching nearly 73 % of the Canadian population at December 31, 2013. We also have roaming agreements with international carriers in more than 200 other countries, including 5 LTE roaming operators and have network sharing arrangements with several carriers in Canada.\n\nOur expansive fibre and hybrid fibre coaxial infrastructure delivers services to consumers and businesses in Ontario, New Brunswick and\n\n## WIRELE SS\n\nsee page 37\n\nCanada's largest provider of wireless communications services.\n\n## CABLE\n\nsee page 41\n\nOne of Canada's leading providers of cable television, high-speed Internet and cable telephony services to consumers and businesses.\n\nNewfoundland. We also operate a North American transcontinental fibre-optic network that extends over 41,000 route kilometres that is used to serve enterprise customers, including government and other telecommunications service providers. In Canada, the network extends coast to coast and includes local and regional fibre, transmission electronics and systems, hubs, POPs and IP Routing and switching infrastructure. The network also extends to the US, from Vancouver south to Seattle, from the Manitoba-Minnesota border through Minneapolis, Milwaukee and Chicago, and from Toronto, through Buffalo, and Montreal, through Albany, to New York City, allowing us to connect Canada's largest markets, while also reaching key US markets for the exchange of data and voice traffic.\n\nMedia provides television and radio broadcasting services to end customers over both traditional broadcast networks and new digital networks as well as multi-platform shopping, consumer and trade publications and sports media and entertainment experiences, primarily through its ownership of the Toronto Blue Jays. Revenue is largely driven by advertising and, in the case of TV broadcasting and publishing by additional revenues from monthly subscriptions. Revenue is also generated by the sale of merchandise and event tickets. Costs include sports programming, broadcast content (including TV studios, writers and on air and on field talent), the cost of merchandise and the production costs associated with each medium.\n\nWe report our results of operations in four segments, which reflect how we manage our operations and measure our performance.\n\n## BU INE S SS S OLUTION S see page 45\n\nProvides Canadian enterprises, government and other telecommunications service providers and partners with highly reliable network and data centre solutions.\n\n## MEDIA\n\nsee page 47\n\nA diversified Canadian media company that engages in television and radio broadcasting, multi-platform shopping, publishing, digital, and sports media and entertainment.\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC.\n\n29\n\nMANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS", + "recall": 0.9871794871794872, + "true_md": "## Understanding Our Business\n\n## Rogers Communications is one of Canada’s leading diversified communications and media companies.\n\n## CABLE\n\n## MEDIA\n\n## BU S INE SS S OLUTION S\n\nMANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AN D ANALYSIS\n\nOur vision is to be known for leading the enablement and delivery of seamless, customer-driven communications, entertainment, information and transactional experiences across any device, place or time.\n\nWireless provides wireless voice and data communication services, including machine to machine to both consumer and enterprise businesses, governments and other telecommunications service providers. Cable provides voice and data communications, home monitoring, television and high-speed Internet services to both consumers and businesses. Business S olutions provides voice and data communications and advanced services including data centre based solutions and cloud computing services to a wide range of medium to large businesses, including other service providers, and government either wirelessly or over our terrestrial network. Revenue generated from these segments is generally based on monthly subscription and network usage rates. Costs include attracting, setting-up and retaining customers, content, and the costs of upgrading and maintaining the underlying network.\n\nOur wireless network is currently one of the most extensive and advanced independent high-speed wireless data networks in Canada, capable of supporting wireless services on smartphones, tablets, computers and a broad variety of machine-to-machine and specialized devices. We built the first Long Term Evolution (LTE) high speed network in Canada, reaching nearly 73 % of the Canadian population at December 31, 2013. We also have roaming agreements with international carriers in more than 200 other countries, including 5 LTE roaming operators and have network sharing arrangements with several carriers in Canada.\n\nOur expansive fibre and hybrid fibre coaxial infrastructure delivers services to consumers and businesses in Ontario, New Brunswick and\n\nNewfoundland. We also operate a North American transcontinental fibre-optic network that extends over 41,000 route kilometres that is used to serve enterprise customers, including government and other telecommunications service providers. In Canada, the network extends coast to coast and includes local and regional fibre, transmission electronics and systems, hubs, POPs and IP Routing and switching infrastructure. The network also extends to the US, from Vancouver south to Seattle, from the Manitoba-Minnesota border through Minneapolis, Milwaukee and Chicago, and from Toronto, through Buffalo, and Montreal, through Albany, to New York City, allowing us to connect Canada’s largest markets, while also reaching key US markets for the exchange of data and voice traffic.\n\nMedia provides television and radio broadcasting services to end customers over both traditional broadcast networks and new digital networks as well as multi-platform shopping, consumer and trade publications and sports media and entertainment experiences, primarily through its ownership of the Toronto Blue Jays. Revenue is largely driven by advertising and, in the case of TV broadcasting and publishing by additional revenues from monthly subscriptions. Revenue is also generated by the sale of merchandise and event tickets. Costs include sports programming, broadcast content (including TV studios, writers and on air and on field talent), the cost of merchandise and the production costs associated with each medium.\n\nWe report our results of operations in four segments, which reflect how we manage our operations and measure our performance.\n\n## WIRELE SS\n\nsee page 37\n\nCanada’s largest provider of wireless communications services.\n\nsee page 41\n\nOne of Canada’s leading providers of cable television, high-speed Internet and cable telephony services to consumers and businesses.\n\nsee page 45\n\nProvides Canadian enterprises, government and other telecommunications service providers and partners with highly reliable network and data centre solutions.\n\nsee page 47\n\nA diversified Canadian media company that engages in television and radio broadcasting, multi-platform shopping, publishing, digital, and sports media and entertainment.\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 29" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9566758893610273, + "doc_id": "2243bc9116a8ba9da5245c09fe88efcfe9fee64194c73b28e94cb7a16d1040d0", + "edit_distance": 0.016666666666666666, + "f1_score": 0.9887640449438203, + "meteor": 0.9982885093893803, + "precision": 0.9777777777777777, + "pred_md": "## ■ Principal Overseas Subsidiaries\n\n- * 3 SMBC Cayman LC Limited, like other subsidiaries of SMBC, is a separate corporate entity with its own separate creditors and the claims of such creditors are prior to the claims of SMBC, as the direct or indirect holder of the equity in such subsidiary.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n217", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## ■ Principal Overseas Subsidiaries\n\n* 3 SMBC Cayman LC Limited, like other subsidiaries of SMBC, is a separate corporate entity with its own separate creditors and the claims of such creditors are prior to the claims of SMBC, as the direct or indirect holder of the equity in such subsidiary.\n\nSMFG 2011 217" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9493889837313801, + "doc_id": "3cad1a78b074b96ff4e329bf4c2e3c0628719961c238f0d6adfaf2b7d63a9f1b", + "edit_distance": 0.19464720194647203, + "f1_score": 0.9743589743589745, + "meteor": 0.8741456405260596, + "precision": 0.9771428571428571, + "pred_md": "## Item 8. Financial Statements and Supplementary Data.\n\n## REPORT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM\n\nTo the Board of Directors and Shareholders of Nordstrom, Inc. Seattle, Washington\n\nWe have audited the accompanying consolidated balance sheets of Nordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries (the 'Company') as of January 31, 2015 and February 1, 2014, and the related consolidated statements of earnings, comprehensive earnings, shareholders' equity, and cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended January 31, 2015. These financial statements are the responsibility of the Company's management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these financial statements based on our audits.\n\nWe conducted our audits in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement. An audit includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements. An audit also includes assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.\n\nIn our opinion, such consolidated financial statements present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of Nordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries as of January 31, 2015 and February 1, 2014, and the results of their operations and their cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended January 31, 2015, in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America.\n\nWe have also audited, in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States), the Company's internal control over financial reporting as of January 31, 2015, based on the criteria established in Internal Control - Integrated Framework (2013) issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission and our report dated March 16, 2015 expressed an unqualified opinion on the Company's internal control over financial reporting.\n\n/s/ Deloitte & Touche LLP Seattle, Washington March 16, 2015\n\n36", + "recall": 0.9715909090909091, + "true_md": "We have audited the accompanying consolidated balance sheets of Nordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries (the “Company”) as of January 31, 2015 and February 1, 2014, and the related consolidated statements of earnings, comprehensive earnings, shareholders’ equity, and cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended January 31, 2015. These financial statements are the responsibility of the Company’s management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these financial statements based on our audits.\n\nWe conducted our audits in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement. An audit includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements. An audit also includes assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.\n\nIn our opinion, such consolidated financial statements present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of Nordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries as of January 31, 2015 and February 1, 2014, and the results of their operations and their cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended January 31, 2015, in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America.\n\nWe have also audited, in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States), the Company’s internal control over financial reporting as of January 31, 2015, based on the criteria established in Internal Control – Integrated Framework (2013) issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission and our report dated March 16, 2015 expressed an unqualified opinion on the Company’s internal control over financial reporting.\n\nTo the Board of Directors and Shareholders of Nordstrom, Inc. Seattle, Washington\n\n36\n\n/s/ Deloitte & Touche LLP Seattle, Washington March 16, 2015 \n\n## Item 8. Financial Statements and Supplementary Data.\n\n## REPORT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8126926304791507, + "doc_id": "fc5cf1167f5470941877747da0a62693cb4639f2b3d2a2893b487056d83c260c", + "edit_distance": 0.16455696202531644, + "f1_score": 0.979591836734694, + "meteor": 0.8443272963850301, + "precision": 0.9795918367346939, + "pred_md": "## RESULTS OF OPERATIONS\n\nOur reportable segments are Retail and Credit. Our Retail segment includes our U.S. Nordstrom branded full-line stores and online store, Nordstrom Rack stores, Nordstromrack.com and HauteLook and other retail channels, including Trunk Club, Jeffrey, our Canada store and our Last Chance clearance store. For purposes of discussion and analysis of our results of operations of our Retail Business, we combine our Retail segment results with revenues and expenses in the 'Corporate/Other' column of Note 16: Segment Reporting in the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements of Item 8: Financial Statements and Supplementary Data. We analyze our results of operations through earnings before interest and income taxes for our Retail Business and Credit, while interest expense and income taxes are discussed on a total company basis.\n\nSimilar to many other retailers, Nordstrom follows the retail 4-5-4 reporting calendar, which included an extra week in the fourth quarter of 2012 (the '53 rd week'). The analysis of our results of operations, liquidity and capital resources compares the 52 weeks in 2013 to the 53 weeks in 2012. However, the 53 rd week is not included in comparable sales calculations. In 2012, the 53 rd week contributed approximately $0.04 to earnings per diluted share.\n\n## RETAIL BUSINESS\n\n## Summary\n\nThe following table summarizes the results of our Retail Business for the past three years:\n\n1 Subtotals and totals may not foot due to rounding.\n\nNordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 17", + "recall": 0.9795918367346939, + "true_md": "## RESULTS OF OPERATIONS Our reportable segments are Retail and Credit. Our Retail segment includes our U.S. Nordstrom branded full-line stores and online store,\n\nRESULTS OF OPERATIONS Our reportable segments are Retail and Credit. Our Retail segment includes our U.S. Nordstrom branded full-line stores and online store, Nordstrom Rack stores, Nordstromrack.com and HauteLook and other retail channels, including Trunk Club, Jeffrey, our Canada store and our Last Chance clearance store. For purposes of discussion and analysis of our results of operations of our Retail Business, we combine our Retail segment results with revenues and expenses in the “Corporate/Other” column of Note 16: Segment Reporting in the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements of Item 8: Financial Statements and Supplementary Data. We analyze our results of operations through earnings before interest and income taxes for our Retail Business and Credit, while interest expense and income taxes are discussed on a total company basis.\n\nSimilar to many other retailers, Nordstrom follows the retail 4-5-4 reporting calendar, which included an extra week in the fourth quarter of 2012 (the “53 rd week”). The analysis of our results of operations, liquidity and capital resources compares the 52 weeks in 2013 to the 53 weeks in 2012. However, the 53 rd week is not included in comparable sales calculations. In 2012, the 53 rd week contributed approximately $0.04 to earnings per diluted share.\n\nSummary The following table summarizes the results of our Retail Business for the past three years:\n\n## Summary The following table summarizes the results of our Retail Business for the past three years:\n\n## RETAIL BUSINESS\n\n1 Subtotals and totals may not foot due to rounding. \n\nNordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 17" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9621954581957615, + "doc_id": "86b19be38b9ea2a0b15aae4ccf5091972e3e009d7b5e1cb36b361d3531bcc432", + "edit_distance": 0.09523809523809523, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9965446496058741, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Consolidated Statements of Changes in Net Assets\n\nSumitomo Mitsui Financial Group, Inc. and Subsidiaries\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n73\n\nSMFG", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "SMFG\n\n## Consolidated Statements of Changes in Net Assets\n\nSumitomo Mitsui Financial Group, Inc. and Subsidiaries\n\nSMFG 2011 73" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7154653708524203, + "doc_id": "01b58f5f3a86262bd2a69db13eb46d5445951e506841b8c62c00164835933966", + "edit_distance": 0.5714285714285714, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9940291545189505, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "SMBC\n\nSupplemental Information\n\n## Consolidated Statements of Income and\n\n## Consolidated Statements of Comprehensive Income (Unaudited)\n\nSumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation and Subsidiaries\n\n(Consolidated Statements of Income)\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n142", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "SMFG 2011 142\n\n## Consolidated Statements of Income and Consolidated Statements of Comprehensive Income (Unaudited)\n\n## (Consolidated Statements of Income)\n\nSumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation and Subsidiaries\n\nSupplemental Information\n\nSMBC" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8700799388989681, + "doc_id": "c71ddda7552aa3de4e88bdfb295c344dd950ed143dc85e49922f9b31f61bcf73", + "edit_distance": 0.6352459016393442, + "f1_score": 0.9467939972714873, + "meteor": 0.9002379515727188, + "precision": 0.9036458333333334, + "pred_md": "NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nWe us our , , , Rogers , Rogers Communications and the Company refer to Rogers Communications Inc. and our subsidiaries. RCI refers to the legal entity Rogers Communications Inc., not including our subsidiaries. RCI also holds interests in various investments and ventures.\n\n## NOTE 1: NATURE OF THE BUSINESS\n\nRogers Communications is a diversified Canadian communications and media group. Substantially all of our operations and sales are in Canada. RCI is incorporated in Canada and its registered office is located at 333 Bloor Street East, Toronto, Ontario, M4W 1G9. RCI's shares are publicly traded on the Toronto Stock Exchange (TSX: RCI.A and RCI.B) and on the New York Stock Exchange (NYSE: RCI).\n\nWe report our results of operations in four segments:\n\nWireless\n\nWireless telecommunications operations for consumers and businesses\n\nCable\n\nCable telecommunications operations, including cable television, Internet and cable telephony for Canadian consumers and businesses\n\nBusiness Solutions\n\nNetwork connectivity through our fibre network assets to support a range of voice, data, networking, data centre and cloud- based services for medium and large Canadian businesses, governments, and other telecommunications providers\n\nMedia\n\nA diversified portfolio of media properties, including television and radio broadcasting, digital media, multi-platform shopping, publishing and sports media and entertainment\n\nWireless, Cable and Business Solutions are operated by our subsidiary, Rogers Communications Partnership, and our other wholly owned subsidiaries. Media is operated by our wholly owned subsidiary Rogers Media Inc. and its subsidiaries.\n\nSee note 3 for more information about our operating segments.\n\n## S tatement of Compliance\n\nWe prepared our consolidated financial statements according to International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board (IASB). Our Board of Directors approved the consolidated financial statements for the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012 on February 12, 2014.\n\n## NOTE 2: SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES\n\n## Basis of Presentation\n\nAll amounts, except per share amounts, are in Canadian dollars, which is our functional currency, and rounded to the nearest million, unless otherwise noted. We prepare the consolidated financial statements on a historical cost basis, except for certain financial instruments, liabilities for cash-settled share-based payments and the net deferred pension liability, which we measure at fair value as described in the notes.\n\n94\n\nROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n## Basis of Consolidation\n\nSubsidiaries\n\nSubsidiaries are entities we control. We include the financial statements of our subsidiaries in our consolidated financial statements from the date we gain control of them until our control ceases. We eliminate all intercompany transactions and balances on consolidation.\n\n## Business Combinations\n\nWe account for acquisitions of subsidiaries using the acquisition method of accounting. We calculate the fair value of the consideration paid as the fair value at the acquisition date of the following:\n\n- GLYPH<129> assets given, plus\n- GLYPH<129> equity instruments issued, less\n- GLYPH<129> liabilities incurred or assumed at the date of exchange.\n\nWe measure goodwill as the fair value of the consideration transferred, less the net recognized amount of the identifiable assets acquired and liabilities assumed, all measured at fair value as of the acquisition date. When the excess is negative, a bargain purchase gain is recognized immediately in profit or loss.\n\nWe use estimates and judgment to determine the fair value of assets acquired and liabilities assumed, using the best available information including information from financial markets. This may include discounted cash flow analyses which utilize key assumptions such as discount rates, attrition rates, and terminal growth rates to estimate future earnings. We expense the transaction costs associated with the acquisitions as we incur them.\n\nSee note 7 for information related to business combinations in 2013 and 2012.\n\n## Use of Estimates and Judgments\n\nWhen preparing our financial statements, management makes judgments, estimates and assumptions that affect how accounting policies are applied and the amounts we report as assets, liabilities, revenue and expenses. Significant changes in the assumptions, including those related to our future business plans and cash flows, could materially change the carrying amounts we record. Actual results could be different from these estimates.\n\nWe use estimates that are inherently uncertain in the following key areas:\n\n- GLYPH<129> considering inputs to determine the fair value of assets acquired and liabilities assumed in business combinations (see Basis of Consolidation , above)\n- GLYPH<129> considering industry trends and other factors to determine the estimated useful lives of property, plant and equipment (see Property, Plant and Equipment , below)\n- GLYPH<129> capitalizing direct labour, overhead and interest costs to property, plant and equipment (see Property, Plant and Equipment , below)\n- GLYPH<129> determining the recoverable amount of non-financial assets when testing for impairment (see Impairment , below), and\n- GLYPH<129> measuring the fair value of derivative instruments (see note 20), pension obligations (see note 22) and stock-based compensation liabilities (see note 24).", + "recall": 0.994269340974212, + "true_md": "NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nWe , us , our , Rogers , Rogers Communications and the Company refer to Rogers Communications Inc. and our subsidiaries. RCI refers to the legal entity Rogers Communications Inc., not including our subsidiaries. RCI also holds interests in various investments and ventures.\n\nRogers Communications is a diversified Canadian communications and media group. Substantially all of our operations and sales are in Canada. RCI is incorporated in Canada and its registered office is located at 333 Bloor Street East, Toronto, Ontario, M4W 1G9. RCI’s shares are publicly traded on the Toronto Stock Exchange (TSX: RCI.A and RCI.B) and on the New York Stock Exchange (NYSE: RCI).\n\nWe report our results of operations in four segments:\n\nSubsidiaries are entities we control. We include the financial statements of our subsidiaries in our consolidated financial statements from the date we gain control of them until our control ceases. We eliminate all intercompany transactions and balances on consolidation.\n\nWe account for acquisitions of subsidiaries using the acquisition method of accounting. We calculate the fair value of the consideration paid as the fair value at the acquisition date of the following:\n\nWe measure goodwill as the fair value of the consideration transferred, less the net recognized amount of the identifiable assets acquired and liabilities assumed, all measured at fair value as of the acquisition date. When the excess is negative, a bargain purchase gain is recognized immediately in profit or loss.\n\nWe use estimates and judgment to determine the fair value of assets acquired and liabilities assumed, using the best available information including information from financial markets. This may include discounted cash flow analyses which utilize key assumptions such as discount rates, attrition rates, and terminal growth rates to estimate future earnings. We expense the transaction costs associated with the acquisitions as we incur them.\n\nSee note 7 for information related to business combinations in 2013 and 2012.\n\nWhen preparing our financial statements, management makes judgments, estimates and assumptions that affect how accounting policies are applied and the amounts we report as assets, liabilities, revenue and expenses. Significant changes in the assumptions, including those related to our future business plans and cash flows, could materially change the carrying amounts we record. Actual results could be different from these estimates.\n\nWireless, Cable and Business Solutions are operated by our subsidiary, Rogers Communications Partnership, and our other wholly owned subsidiaries. Media is operated by our wholly owned subsidiary Rogers Media Inc. and its subsidiaries.\n\nSee note 3 for more information about our operating segments.\n\nWe prepared our consolidated financial statements according to International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board (IASB). Our Board of Directors approved the consolidated financial statements for the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012 on February 12, 2014.\n\nAll amounts, except per share amounts, are in Canadian dollars, which is our functional currency, and rounded to the nearest million, unless otherwise noted. We prepare the consolidated financial statements on a historical cost basis, except for certain financial instruments, liabilities for cash-settled share-based payments and the net deferred pension liability, which we measure at fair value as described in the notes.\n\nWe use estimates that are inherently uncertain in the following key areas:\n\n## Use of Estimates and Judgments\n\n## S tatement of Compliance\n\n## NOTE 2: SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES\n\n## Basis of Presentation\n\n## Business Combinations\n\n## Basis of Consolidation\n\n## Subsidiaries\n\n- GLYPH<129> assets given, plus\n\n- GLYPH<129> equity instruments issued, less\n\n- GLYPH<129> liabilities incurred or assumed at the date of exchange.\n\n## NOTE 1: NATURE OF THE BUSINESS\n\n- GLYPH<129> considering inputs to determine the fair value of assets acquired and liabilities assumed in business combinations (see Basis of Consolidation , above)\n\n- GLYPH<129> considering industry trends and other factors to determine the estimated useful lives of property, plant and equipment (see Property, Plant and Equipment , below)\n\n- GLYPH<129> capitalizing direct labour, overhead and interest costs to property, plant and equipment (see Property, Plant and Equipment , below)\n\n- GLYPH<129> determining the recoverable amount of non-financial assets when testing for impairment (see Impairment , below), and\n\n- GLYPH<129> measuring the fair value of derivative instruments (see note 20), pension obligations (see note 22) and stock-based compensation liabilities (see note 24).\n\n94 ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9247637047790588, + "doc_id": "4a3ee46572b08dd24a1be9be1424334c2d6a3d5df50f50572507b91eb3c23ee7", + "edit_distance": 0.16602316602316602, + "f1_score": 0.9767441860465117, + "meteor": 0.9553238058452426, + "precision": 0.98, + "pred_md": "## 110\n\nNotes to the Financial Statements\n\n## 32. Parent entity financial information continued\n\n## Contingent liabilities of the parent entity\n\nBank guarantees have been given by Kingsgate's controlled entities to participating banks in the syndicated loan facility and revolving loan facility as described in Note 16 as part of the security package.\n\nThese guarantees may give rise to liabilities in the parent entity if the controlled entities do not meet their obligations under the terms of the loans subject to guarantees. No material losses are anticipated in respect of the above contingent liabilities.\n\n## 33. Sale of exploration assets\n\nOn 28 March 2013, the Group sold its exploration assets in Western Australia and Queensland through the sale of shares in its subsidiary company, Quadrio Resources Limited, to Caravel Minerals Limited ('Caravel'), an Australian company listed on the ASX.\n\nKingsgate received 135,000,000 fully paid ordinary shares in the issued capital of Caravel and 20,000,000 unlisted options to acquire Caravel shares exercisable at 10 cents on or before three years from the date of issue. Subsequent to the sale, Kingsgate became the largest shareholder in Caravel with 35.54% held at 30 June 2013. Kingsgate's holding in Caravel reduced to 27.04% post 30 June 2013 following a rights issue by Caravel that Kingsgate did not participate in.\n\nThe financial impact of the sale transaction as at the date of disposal is summarised below:\n\nwww.kingsgate.com.au", + "recall": 0.9735099337748344, + "true_md": "Notes to the Financial Statements 110\n\n## 32. Parent entity financial information continued\n\nBank guarantees have been given by Kingsgate’s controlled entities to participating banks in the syndicated loan facility and revolving loan facility as described in Note 16 as part of the security package.\n\nThese guarantees may give rise to liabilities in the parent entity if the controlled entities do not meet their obligations under the terms of the loans subject to guarantees. No material losses are anticipated in respect of the above contingent liabilities.\n\nOn 28 March 2013, the Group sold its exploration assets in Western Australia and Queensland through the sale of shares in its subsidiary company, Quadrio Resources Limited, to Caravel Minerals Limited (“Caravel”), an Australian company listed on the ASX.\n\nKingsgate received 135,000,000 fully paid ordinary shares in the issued capital of Caravel and 20,000,000 unlisted options to acquire Caravel shares exercisable at 10 cents on or before three years from the date of issue. Subsequent to the sale, Kingsgate became the largest shareholder in Caravel with 35.54% held at 30 June 2013. Kingsgate’s holding in Caravel reduced to 27.04% post 30 June 2013 following a rights issue by Caravel that Kingsgate did not participate in.\n\nThe financial impact of the sale transaction as at the date of disposal is summarised below:\n\n## 33. Sale of exploration assets\n\n## Contingent liabilities of the parent entity\n\nwww.kingsgate.com.au" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5317423251740696, + "doc_id": "fbb251c2b84e83aada58c6ac8a93a00c22717da2070bcbc02795a97bc26d2868", + "edit_distance": 0.4659090909090909, + "f1_score": 0.9545454545454545, + "meteor": 0.8490774029006882, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "nordstrom.com/companyreview | Connect with us:\n\n#NORDSTROM\n\nThis annual report is printed on FSC ® certified paper. The recycled content of our paper is 30% post-consumer waste. ©2015 Nordstrom, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in the USA. 374047840 PLEASE RECYCLE.\n\nThis annual report is printed on FSC ® certified paper. The recycled content of our paper is 30% post-consumer waste. ©2015 Nordstrom, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in the USA. 374047840 PLEASE RECYCLE.", + "recall": 0.9130434782608695, + "true_md": "nordstrom.com/companyreview | Connect with us:\n\n#NORDSTROM\n\nThis annual report is printed on FSC$^{®}$ certified paper. The recycled content of our paper is 30% post-consumer waste. ©2015 Nordstrom, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in the USA. 374047840 PLEASE RECYCLE." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8159630873375958, + "doc_id": "17535a4422d861e96409774e7e78ae4a14b2722839ed295f4d6138bce29cd7e1", + "edit_distance": 0.20606060606060606, + "f1_score": 0.9349112426035504, + "meteor": 0.9116966619270094, + "precision": 0.9294117647058824, + "pred_md": "SMBC\n\n## Others (Nonconsolidated)\n\nSumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation\n\n## Employees\n\n- Notes: 1. Temporary and part-time staff are excluded from the above calculations but includes overseas local staff. Executive officers who do not concurrently serve as Directors are excluded from 'Number of employees.'\n- 2. 'Average annual salary' includes bonus, overtime pay and other fringe benefits.\n- 3. Overseas local staff are excluded from the above calculations other than 'Number of employees.'\n\n## Number of Offices\n\nNote: 'Main offices and branches' includes the International Business Operations Dept. (2011, 2 branches; 2010, 2 branches), specialized deposit account branches (2011, 38 branches; 2010, 38 branches) and ATM administration branches (2011, 17 branches; 2010, 17 branches).\n\n## Number of Automated Service Centers\n\n## Domestic Exchange Transactions\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n176", + "recall": 0.9404761904761905, + "true_md": "SMBC\n\n## Others (Nonconsolidated)\n\nSumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation\n\n## Employees\n\nNotes: 1. Temporary and part-time staff are excluded from the above calculations but includes overseas local staff. Executive officers who do not concurrently serve as Directors are excluded from “Number of employees.”\n\n2. “Average annual salary” includes bonus, overtime pay and other fringe benefits.\n\n3. Overseas local staff are excluded from the above calculations other than “Number of employees.”\n\nNote: “Main offices and branches” includes the International Business Operations Dept. (2011, 2 branches; 2010, 2 branches), specialized deposit account branches (2011, 38 branches; 2010, 38 branches) and ATM administration branches (2011, 17 branches; 2010, 17 branches).\n\n## Number of Offices\n\n## Number of Automated Service Centers\n\nSMFG 2011 176\n\n## Domestic Exchange Transactions" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6370035174593224, + "doc_id": "126cd16e78171cdbb5f9d8fb53d2d9e9957ee3caf46759112ac608bfafa7780b", + "edit_distance": 0.43804537521815007, + "f1_score": 0.8447488584474887, + "meteor": 0.8416566007146729, + "precision": 0.7581967213114754, + "pred_md": "The Internal Audit Unit, operating independently of the business units, audits asset quality, accuracy of gradings and self-assessment, and state of credit risk management, and reports the results directly to the Board of Directors and the Management Committee.\n\nSMBC has established the Credit Risk Committee, as a consultative body, to round out its oversight system for undertaking flexible and efficient control of credit risk, and ensuring the overall soundness of the bank's loan operations.\n\n## ■ SMBC's Credit Risk Management System\n\n## Board of Directors\n\n## Management Committee\n\n## Corporate Auditors\n\n## External Audit (Auditing Firm)\n\n## Internal Audit Unit\n\n## Internal Audit Dept.\n\n·Audits credit risk management\n\n## Credit Review Dept.\n\n- ·Audits self-assessments, grading (obligors and facilities), and effectiveness of write-offs and reserves\n\n## Corporate Services Unit\n\n## Corporate Research Dept.\n\n- ·Industry trend research\n- ·Credit assessment of major industry players\n\n## Credit Administration Dept.\n\n- ·Manages problem assets (plans, implements corporate rehabilitation program, sells off the revitalized company)\n\n## 3. Credit Risk Management Methods\n\n## (1) Credit Risk Assessment and Quantification\n\nAt SMBC, to effectively manage the risk involved in individual loans as well as the credit portfolio as a whole, we first acknowledge that every loan entails credit risks, assess the credit risk posed by each borrower and loan using an internal rating system, and quantify that risk for control purposes.\n\n## (a) Internal Rating System\n\nThere is an internal rating system for each asset control category set according to portfolio characteristics. For example, credits to commercial and industrial (C&I) companies, individuals for business purposes (domestic only), sovereigns, public-sector entities, and financial institutions are assigned an 'obligor grade,' which indicates the borrower's creditworthiness, and/or\n\n'facility grade,' which indicates the collectibility of assets taking into account transaction conditions such as guarantee/collateral, and tenor. An obligor grade is determined by first assigning a financial grade using a financial strength grading model and data obtained from the obligor's financial statements. The financial grade is then adjusted taking into account the actual state of the obligor's balance sheet and qualitative factors to derive the obligor grade. In the event that the borrower is domiciled overseas, internal ratings for credit are made after taking into consideration country rank, which represents an assessment of the credit quality of each country, based on its political and economic situation, as well as its current account balance and external debt. Self-assessment is the obligor grading process for assigning lower grades, and the borrower categories used in self-assessment are consistent with the obligor grade categories.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n35\n\n## Risk Management Unit\n\n## Corporate Risk Management Dept.\n\n·Aggregates risk for comprehensive management ·Plans and proposes risk quantification methods\n\n## Credit & Investment Planning Dept.\n\n- ·Aggregates credit risk for unified management\n- ·Plans and proposes basic credit policies\n- ·Drafts, administers, and examines internal rating system\n\n## Credit Portfolio Management Dept.\n\n·Undertakes active portfolio management", + "recall": 0.9536082474226805, + "true_md": "SMBC has established the Credit Risk Committee, as a con- sultative body, to round out its oversight system for undertaking flexible and efficient control of credit risk, and ensuring the overall soundness of the bank’s loan operations.\n\nThe Internal Audit Unit, operating independently of the business units, audits asset quality, accuracy of gradings and self-assessment, and state of credit risk management, and reports the results directly to the Board of Directors and the Management Committee. \n\nAt SMBC, to effectively manage the risk involved in individual loans as well as the credit portfolio as a whole, we first acknowledge that every loan entails credit risks, assess the credit risk posed by each borrower and loan using an internal rating system, and quantify that risk for control purposes.\n\nThere is an internal rating system for each asset control cat- egory set according to portfolio characteristics. For example, credits to commercial and industrial (C&I) companies, individuals for business purposes (domestic only), sovereigns, public-sector entities, and financial institutions are assigned an “obligor grade,” which indicates the borrower’s creditworthiness, and/or \n\n“facility grade,” which indicates the collectibility of assets taking into account transaction conditions such as guarantee/collateral, and tenor. An obligor grade is determined by first assigning a financial grade using a financial strength grading model and data obtained from the obligor’s financial statements. The financial grade is then adjusted taking into account the actual state of the obligor’s balance sheet and qualitative factors to derive the obligor grade. In the event that the borrower is domiciled overseas, internal ratings for credit are made after taking into consideration country rank, which represents an assessment of the credit quality of each country, based on its political and economic situation, as well as its current account balance and external debt. Self-assessment is the obligor grading process for assigning lower grades, and the borrower categories used in self-assessment are consistent with the obligor grade categories. \n\nSMFG 2011 35\n\n## (a) Internal Rating System\n\n## (1) Credit Risk Assessment and Quantification\n\n## 3. Credit Risk Management Methods\n\n## ■ SMBC’s Credit Risk Management System" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8501138373683796, + "doc_id": "3a3a132491c67be1b29f0dd1f51e6af94c6f37207babc9380759ca3f04fd39b5", + "edit_distance": 0.27844311377245506, + "f1_score": 0.9162995594713658, + "meteor": 0.820288693499264, + "precision": 0.9122807017543859, + "pred_md": "## Income Analysis (Consolidated)\n\nSumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation and Subsidiaries\n\n## Operating Income, Classified by Domestic and Overseas Operations\n\nNotes: 1. Domestic operations comprise the operations of SMBC (excluding overseas branches) and its domestic consolidated subsidiaries. Overseas operations comprise the operations of SMBC's overseas branches and its overseas consolidated subsidiaries.\n\n2. Income and expenses resulting from money held in trust are included in 'Other income' and 'Other expenses.' Therefore, 'Interest expenses' are shown after deduction of expenses (2011, ¥16 million; 2010, ¥20 million) related to the management of money held in trust.\n\n3. Intersegment transactions are reported in the 'Elimination' column.\n\n## Average Balance, Interest and Earnings Yield of Interest-Earning Assets and Interest-Bearing Liabilities\n\n## Domestic Operations\n\nMillions of yen\n\n- Notes: 1. Domestic operations comprise the operations of SMBC (excluding overseas branches) and its domestic consolidated subsidiaries.\n- 2. In principle, average balances are calculated by using daily balances. However, some consolidated subsidiaries use weekly, monthly or quarterly balances instead.\n- 3. 'Interest-earning assets' are shown after deduction of the average balance of noninterest-earning deposits (2011, ¥1,143,287 million; 2010, ¥946,938 million).\n\n4. Income and expenses resulting from money held in trust are included in 'Other income' and 'Other expenses.' Therefore, 'Interest-earning assets' are shown after deduction of the average balance of money held in trust (2011, ¥18,676 million; 2010, ¥12,392 million). 'Interest-bearing liabilities' are shown after deduction of amounts equivalent to the average balance of money held in trust (2011, ¥18,676 million; 2010, ¥12,392 million) and corresponding interest (2011, ¥16 million; 2010, ¥20 million).\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n155\n\nSMBC", + "recall": 0.9203539823008849, + "true_md": "SMFG 2011 155\n\nSMBC\n\n## Income Analysis (Consolidated)\n\nSumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation and Subsidiaries\n\nNotes: 1. Domestic operations comprise the operations of SMBC (excluding overseas branches) and its domestic consolidated subsidiaries. Overseas operations comprise the operations of SMBC’s overseas branches and its overseas consolidated subsidiaries.\n\n2. Income and expenses resulting from money held in trust are included in “Other income” and “Other expenses.” Therefore, “Interest expenses” are shown after deduction of expenses (2011, ¥16 million; 2010, ¥20 million) related to the management of money held in trust.\n\n3. Intersegment transactions are reported in the “Elimination” column.\n\n## Domestic Operations\n\nNotes: 1. Domestic operations comprise the operations of SMBC (excluding overseas branches) and its domestic consolidated subsidiaries.\n\n2. In principle, average balances are calculated by using daily balances. However, some consolidated subsidiaries use weekly, monthly or quarterly balances instead.\n\n3. “Interest-earning assets” are shown after deduction of the average balance of noninterest-earning deposits (2011, ¥1,143,287 million; 2010, ¥946,938 million).\n\n4. Income and expenses resulting from money held in trust are included in “Other income” and “Other expenses.” Therefore, “Interest-earning assets” are shown after deduction of the average balance of money held in trust (2011, ¥18,676 million; 2010, ¥12,392 million). “Interest-bearing liabilities” are shown after deduction of amounts equivalent to the average balance of money held in trust (2011, ¥18,676 million; 2010, ¥12,392 million) and corresponding interest (2011, ¥16 million; 2010, ¥20 million).\n\n## Average Balance, Interest and Earnings Yield of Interest-Earning Assets and Interest-Bearing Liabilities\n\n## Operating Income, Classified by Domestic and Overseas Operations" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9218112319990955, + "doc_id": "09585f8fa147a8ff9c0a52de39186fb1df1559c3a73cfe92ee1eed494c47f81f", + "edit_distance": 0.7760141093474426, + "f1_score": 0.9620853080568721, + "meteor": 0.6981943919122371, + "precision": 0.9530516431924883, + "pred_md": "SMFG\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n## 37. Subsequent Events\n\n- 1. Acquisition and cancellation of preferred stock\n- MFG resolved, at a meeting of the Board of Directors held on S February 28, 2011, to acquire its preferred stock (1st series Type 6), in accordance with the provisions of Article 18 of the Articles of Incorporation of SMFG and to cancel its preferred stock (1st series Type 6) in accordance with the provisions of Article 178 of the Companies Act, as described below. According to the resolution, SMFG acquired and cancelled its preferred stock (1st series Type 6) on April 1, 2011. Capital surplus was reduced by the cancellation.\n- (1) Class of shares to be acquired and cancelled: Preferred stock (1st series Type 6)\n- (2) Total number of shares to be acquired and cancelled: 70,001 shares\n- (3) Total amount of acquisition: ¥210,003,000,000\n\n2. Transactions under common control Making Cedyna Financial Corporation a wholly-owned subsidiary MFG Card & Credit, Inc. ('FGCC') made Cedyna Financial S Corporation ('Cedyna') a wholly-owned subsidiary by a share exchange with an effective date of May 1, 2011 (the 'Share Exchange'). The outline of transactions under common control is as follows:\n\n- (1) Outline of the transactions\n- (a) Name and business of combined entities\n\nAcquisition company: FGCC (Management of subsidiaries and affiliates)\n\nAcquired company: Cedyna (Credit Card Services)\n\n- (b) Date of business combination\n\nMay 1, 2011\n\n- (c) Legal form of the business combination Exchange of shares\n- (d) Name of the entity after the business combination Sumitomo Mitsui Financial Group, Inc.\n- (e) Purpose of the transactions\n\nSMFG and FGCC decided to organize a system which allowed more timely and flexible decision making in order to 'establish the number one credit card business entity in Japan.'\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n134\n\n- (2) hare exchange ratio, its basis for determination, number of S shares delivered\n- (a) Type of shares and share exchange ratio\n\nCommon shares\n\nSMFG 1 : Cedyna 0.06\n\n- Note: 0.06 shares of SMFG common stock was allotted and delivered per share of Cedyna common stock.\n- (b) Basis for determination of share exchange ratio\n\nNikko Cordial Securities Inc. and Nomura Securities Co., Ltd. were appointed by FGCC and Cedyna, respectively, as third party valuation institutions in order to ensure the fairness and appropriateness in determining the share exchange ratio for the Share Exchange. FGCC and Cedyna engaged in negotiations and discussions with reference to the share exchange ratio analysis provided by the above third party valuation institutions and with consideration for SMFG's and Cedyna's financial conditions, performance trends and stock price movements. As a result, FGCC and Cedyna each determined that the share exchange ratio set forth in (a) above was beneficial to the shareholders of both SMFG and Cedyna.\n\n- (c) Number of shares delivered 14,702 thousand common shares of SMFG", + "recall": 0.9712918660287081, + "true_md": "SMFG Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nSMFG 2011 134\n\n## 37. Subsequent Events\n\n- (c) Number of shares delivered 14,702 thousand common shares of SMFG\n\n- (b) Basis for determination of share exchange ratio Nikko Cordial Securities Inc. and Nomura Securities Co., Ltd. were appointed by FGCC and Cedyna, respectively, as third party valuation institutions in order to ensure the fairness and appropriateness in determining the share exchange ratio for the Share Exchange. FGCC and Cedyna engaged in negotiations and discussions with reference to the share exchange ratio analysis provided by the above third party valuation institutions and with consideration for SMFG’s and Cedyna’s financial conditions, performance trends and stock price movements. As a result, FGCC and Cedyna each determined that the share exchange ratio set forth in (a) above was beneficial to the shareholders of both SMFG and Cedyna.\n\n- (1) Class of shares to be acquired and cancelled: Preferred stock (1st series Type 6)\n\n- (2) Total number of shares to be acquired and cancelled: 70,001 shares\n\n- (3) Total amount of acquisition: ¥210,003,000,000\n\n- (a) Name and business of combined entities Acquisition company: FGCC (Management of subsidiaries and affiliates) Acquired company: Cedyna (Credit Card Services)\n\n- (b) Date of business combination May 1, 2011\n\n- (c) Legal form of the business combination Exchange of shares\n\n- (d) Name of the entity after the business combination Sumitomo Mitsui Financial Group, Inc.\n\n- (e) Purpose of the transactions SMFG and FGCC decided to organize a system which allowed more timely and flexible decision making in order to “establish the number one credit card business entity in Japan.”\n\n- 1. Acquisition and cancellation of preferred stock SMFG resolved, at a meeting of the Board of Directors held on February 28, 2011, to acquire its preferred stock (1st series Type 6), in accordance with the provisions of Article 18 of the Articles of Incorporation of SMFG and to cancel its preferred stock (1st series Type 6) in accordance with the provisions of Article 178 of the Companies Act, as described below. According to the resolution, SMFG acquired and cancelled its preferred stock (1st series Type 6) on April 1, 2011. Capital surplus was reduced by the cancellation.\n\n- 2. Transactions under common control Making Cedyna Financial Corporation a wholly-owned subsidiary SMFG Card & Credit, Inc. (“FGCC”) made Cedyna Financial Corporation (“Cedyna”) a wholly-owned subsidiary by a share exchange with an effective date of May 1, 2011 (the “Share Exchange”). The outline of transactions under common control is as follows:\n\n- (1) Outline of the transactions\n\n- (2) Share exchange ratio, its basis for determination, number of shares delivered\n\n- (a) Type of shares and share exchange ratio Common shares SMFG 1 : Cedyna 0.06\n\nNote: 0.06 shares of SMFG common stock was allotted and delivered per share of Cedyna common stock." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9623496510828833, + "doc_id": "512644e27f6b207ef7cd616c3b68e58650f7c510ef9f541183ecb8f8d704b68b", + "edit_distance": 0.8037267080745342, + "f1_score": 0.9934210526315789, + "meteor": 0.8697579522862823, + "precision": 0.9966996699669967, + "pred_md": "## Transactions\n\nWe have entered into business transactions with companies whose partners or senior officers are directors of Rogers, including the chairman and chief executive officer of a firm that is paid commissions for insurance coverage, the senior partner and chairman of a law firm that provides legal services, and the chairman of a company that provides printing services.\n\nWe record these transactions at the amount agreed to by the related parties. The transactions are reviewed by the Audit Committee of our Board of Directors. The amounts owing are unsecured, interest-free and due for payment in cash within one month from the date of the transaction. There are no significant outstanding balances with these related parties at December 31, 2013.\n\nSubsidiaries, Joint Arrangements and Associates We have the following significant subsidiaries:\n\n- GLYPH<129> Rogers Communications Partnership\n- GLYPH<129> Rogers Media Inc.\n\nWe have 100% ownership interest in all of these subsidiaries. Our subsidiaries are incorporated in Canada and have the same reporting period for annual financial statements reporting.\n\nWhen necessary, adjustments are made to conform the accounting policies with those of Rogers. There are no significant restrictions on the ability of subsidiaries, joint arrangements and associates to transfer funds to Rogers as cash dividends or to repay loans or advances.\n\nWe carried out the following business transactions with our joint arrangements and associates. Transactions between us and our subsidiaries have been eliminated on consolidation and are not disclosed in this note.\n\nSales to and purchases from our joint arrangements and associates are made at terms equivalent to those that prevail in arm's length transactions. Outstanding balances at year-end are unsecured and interest-free, and settled in cash. The outstanding balances with these related parties relating to similar business transactions as at December 31, 2013 was $14 million and included in accounts payable and accrued liabilities (December 31, 2012 - $1 million payable).\n\nIn 2012, we acquired certain network assets and 2500 MHz spectrum from Inukshuk, a 50% owned joint venture. As a result, we recorded a gain of $233 million in other income, as the portion of the excess of fair value over carrying value related to the other non-related venturer's 50% interest in the spectrum licences (see note 14).\n\n## NOTE 26: GUARANTEES\n\nWe had the following guarantees at December 31, 2013 and 2012 as part of our normal course of business:\n\n## Business S ale and Business Combination Agreements\n\nAs part of transactions involving business dispositions, sales of assets or other business combinations, we may be required to pay counterparties for costs and losses incurred as a result of breaches of representations and warranties, intellectual property right infringement, loss or damages to property, environmental liabilities, changes in laws and regulations (including tax legislation), litigation against the counterparties, contingent liabilities of a disposed business or reassessments of previous tax filings of the corporation that carries on the business.\n\n## S ales of S ervices\n\nAs part of transactions involving sales of services, we may be required to make payments to counterparties as a result of breaches of representations and warranties, changes in laws and regulations (including tax legislation) or litigation against the counterparties.\n\n## Purchases and Development of Assets\n\nAs part of transactions involving purchases and development of assets, we may be required to pay counterparties for costs and losses incurred as a result of breaches of representations and warranties, loss or damages to property, changes in laws and regulations (including tax legislation) or litigation against the counterparties.\n\n## Indemnifications\n\nWe indemnify our directors, officers and employees against claims reasonably incurred and resulting from the performance of their services to Rogers. We have liability insurance for our directors and officers and those of our subsidiaries.\n\nWe are unable to make a reasonable estimate of the maximum potential amount we would be required to pay to counterparties. The amount also depends on the outcome of future events and conditions, which cannot be predicted. No amount has been accrued in the consolidated statements of financial position relating to these types of indemnifications or guarantees at December 31, 2013 or 2012. Historically, we have not made any significant payments under these indemnifications or guarantees.\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC.\n\n123\n\nNOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS", + "recall": 0.9901639344262295, + "true_md": "## Transactions\n\nWe have entered into business transactions with companies whose partners or senior officers are directors of Rogers, including the chairman and chief executive officer of a firm that is paid commissions for insurance coverage, the senior partner and chairman of a law firm that provides legal services, and the chairman of a company that provides printing services.\n\nWe record these transactions at the amount agreed to by the related parties. The transactions are reviewed by the Audit Committee of our Board of Directors. The amounts owing are unsecured, interest-free and due for payment in cash within one month from the date of the transaction. There are no significant outstanding balances with these related parties at December 31, 2013.\n\nWe had the following guarantees at December 31, 2013 and 2012 as part of our normal course of business:\n\nAs part of transactions involving business dispositions, sales of assets or other business combinations, we may be required to pay counterparties for costs and losses incurred as a result of breaches of representations and warranties, intellectual property right infringement, loss or damages to property, environmental liabilities, changes in laws and regulations (including tax legislation), litigation against the counterparties, contingent liabilities of a disposed business or reassessments of previous tax filings of the corporation that carries on the business.\n\nAs part of transactions involving sales of services, we may be required to make payments to counterparties as a result of breaches of representations and warranties, changes in laws and regulations (including tax legislation) or litigation against the counterparties.\n\nSubsidiaries, Joint Arrangements and Associates We have the following significant subsidiaries:\n\nWe have 100% ownership interest in all of these subsidiaries. Our subsidiaries are incorporated in Canada and have the same reporting period for annual financial statements reporting.\n\nWhen necessary, adjustments are made to conform the accounting policies with those of Rogers. There are no significant restrictions on the ability of subsidiaries, joint arrangements and associates to transfer funds to Rogers as cash dividends or to repay loans or advances.\n\nAs part of transactions involving purchases and development of assets, we may be required to pay counterparties for costs and losses incurred as a result of breaches of representations and warranties, loss or damages to property, changes in laws and regulations (including tax legislation) or litigation against the counterparties.\n\nWe indemnify our directors, officers and employees against claims reasonably incurred and resulting from the performance of their services to Rogers. We have liability insurance for our directors and officers and those of our subsidiaries.\n\nWe carried out the following business transactions with our joint arrangements and associates. Transactions between us and our subsidiaries have been eliminated on consolidation and are not disclosed in this note.\n\nWe are unable to make a reasonable estimate of the maximum potential amount we would be required to pay to counterparties. The amount also depends on the outcome of future events and conditions, which cannot be predicted. No amount has been accrued in the consolidated statements of financial position relating to these types of indemnifications or guarantees at December 31, 2013 or 2012. Historically, we have not made any significant payments under these indemnifications or guarantees.\n\nSales to and purchases from our joint arrangements and associates are made at terms equivalent to those that prevail in arm’s length transactions. Outstanding balances at year-end are unsecured and interest-free, and settled in cash. The outstanding balances with these related parties relating to similar business transactions as at December 31, 2013 was $14 million and included in accounts payable and accrued liabilities (December 31, 2012 – $1 million payable).\n\nIn 2012, we acquired certain network assets and 2500 MHz spectrum from Inukshuk, a 50% owned joint venture. As a result, we recorded a gain of $233 million in other income, as the portion of the excess of fair value over carrying value related to the other non-related venturer’s 50% interest in the spectrum licences (see note 14).\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 123\n\n## S ales of S ervices\n\n## Purchases and Development of Assets\n\n## Indemnifications\n\n- GLYPH<129> Rogers Communications Partnership\n\n- GLYPH<129> Rogers Media Inc.\n\n## Business S ale and Business Combination Agreements\n\n## NOTE 26: GUARANTEES\n\nNOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8507773051414781, + "doc_id": "c6cfb9258fcc8bd115d762e2be528cc1dd50c4c22b164d75861493ba21bc4209", + "edit_distance": 0.23722627737226276, + "f1_score": 0.9127516778523491, + "meteor": 0.905101411268866, + "precision": 0.912751677852349, + "pred_md": "## notes to the consolidated Financial statements\n\nD\n\nollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except share and per share amounts)\n\n## 7. Property and Equipment\n\nLand and building represents the Company's ownership of a 50% interest in the land and building that its head office occupies. Under IFRS, owner-occupied property is required to be accounted for as property and equipment and not investment property. Property with a fair value of $4.2 million (December 31, 2012 - $4.2 million) is pledged as collateral against the Company's mortgages payable.\n\n## 8. Rent and Other Receivables\n\nIncluded in other receivables are laundry revenue, commission revenues and other non-rental income. The majority of these receivables are less than 60 days old.\n\nThe Company's policy is to write-off tenant receivables when the tenant vacates the unit and any subsequent receipt of funds is netted against bad debts. The Company's bad debt expense experience has historically been less than 0.4% of revenues. As a result of the low bad debt experience, no allowance for doubtful accounts is recorded in the accounts.\n\n## 9. Inventory\n\nInventory relates to manufactured homes for which sales have not closed at year-end, as well as four stock homes (2012 - eight stock homes) and related expenses. As at December 31, 2013, no amount of the inventory is pledged as collateral related to short-term or long-term financing.\n\n82\n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013", + "recall": 0.912751677852349, + "true_md": "## 7. Property and Equipment\n\nLand and building represents the Company’s ownership of a 50% interest in the land and building that its head office occupies. Under IFRS, owner‑occupied property is required to be accounted for as property and equipment and not investment property. Property with a fair value of $4.2 million (December 31, 2012 ‑ $4.2 million) is pledged as collateral against the Company’s mortgages payable.\n\n## 8. Rent and Other Receivables\n\nIncluded in other receivables are laundry revenue, commission revenues and other non‑rental income. The majority of these receivables are less than 60 days old. \n\nThe Company’s policy is to write‑off tenant receivables when the tenant vacates the unit and any subsequent receipt of funds is netted against bad debts. The Company’s bad debt expense experience has historically been less than 0.4% of revenues. As a result of the low bad debt experience, no allowance for doubtful accounts is recorded in the accounts. \n\n## 9. Inventory\n\nInventory relates to manufactured homes for which sales have not closed at year‑end, as well as four stock homes (2012 ‑ eight stock homes) and related expenses. As at December 31, 2013, no amount of the inventory is pledged as collateral related to short‑term or long‑term financing.\n\n82 Killam ProPerties inc | 2013\n\n## Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except share and per share amounts)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8898607030070133, + "doc_id": "ff69e9cd316e51f70c13116a77e3bd753ac906ed2c2daac4129f93bb20d1b6c6", + "edit_distance": 0.13643410852713178, + "f1_score": 0.9595375722543352, + "meteor": 0.8017825740848512, + "precision": 0.939622641509434, + "pred_md": "We have a registration statement on file with the SEC using a 'shelf' registration process. Under this shelf registration process, we may offer and sell, from time to time, any combination of the securities described in a prospectus to the registration statement, including registered debt, provided we maintain Well-known Seasoned Issuer ('WKSI') status.\n\nWe maintain trade and standby letters of credit to facilitate international payments. As of January 31, 2015, we have $8 available under a trade letter of credit, with $1 outstanding, and $15 available under the standby letter of credit, with $7 outstanding at the end of the year.\n\nPlans for our Manhattan full-line store, which we currently expect to open in late 2018 to 2019, ultimately include owning a condominium interest in a mixed-use tower and leasing certain nearby properties. As of January 31, 2015, we had approximately $125 of fee interest in land, which is expected to convert to the condominium interest once the store is constructed. We have committed to make future installment payments based on the developer meeting pre-established construction and development milestones. Our fee interest in the land is currently and will continue to be subject to lien by project development lenders until project completion or fulfillment of our existing installment payment commitment. In the unlikely event that this project is not completed, the opening may be delayed and we may potentially be subject to future losses or capital commitments in order to complete construction or to monetize our previous investments in the land.\n\n## Impact of Credit Ratings\n\nUnder the terms of our revolver, any borrowings we may enter into will accrue interest for Euro-Dollar Rate Loans at a floating base rate tied to LIBOR, for Canadian Dealer Offer Rate Loans at a floating rate tied to CDOR, and for Base Rate Loans at the highest of: (i) the EuroDollar rate plus 100 basis points, (ii) the federal funds rate plus 50 basis points and (iii) the prime rate.\n\nThe rate depends upon the type of borrowing incurred, plus in each case an applicable margin. This applicable margin varies depending upon the credit ratings assigned to our long-term unsecured debt. At the time of this report, our long-term unsecured debt ratings, outlook and resulting applicable margin were as follows:\n\nCredit Ratings\n\nOutlook\n\nMoody's\n\nBaa1\n\nStable\n\nStandard & Poor's\n\nA-\n\nStable\n\nShould the ratings assigned to our long-term unsecured debt improve, the applicable margin associated with any such borrowings may decrease, resulting in a slightly lower borrowing cost under this facility. Should the ratings assigned to our long-term unsecured debt worsen, the applicable margin associated with our borrowings may increase, resulting in a slightly higher borrowing cost under this facility.\n\n## Debt Covenants\n\nThe revolver requires that we maintain an adjusted debt to earnings before interest, income taxes, depreciation, amortization and rent ('EBITDAR') leverage ratio of less than four times (see the following additional discussion of Adjusted Debt to EBITDAR).\n\nAs of January 31, 2015 and February 1, 2014, we were in compliance with this covenant. We will continue to monitor this covenant and believe that we will remain in compliance with this covenant during 2015.\n\n30", + "recall": 0.9803149606299213, + "true_md": "We have a registration statement on file with the SEC using a “shelf” registration process. Under this shelf registration process, we may offer and sell, from time to time, any combination of the securities described in a prospectus to the registration statement, including registered debt, provided we maintain Well-known Seasoned Issuer (“WKSI”) status.\n\nWe maintain trade and standby letters of credit to facilitate international payments. As of January 31, 2015, we have $8 available under a trade letter of credit, with $1 outstanding, and $15 available under the standby letter of credit, with $7 outstanding at the end of the year.\n\nPlans for our Manhattan full-line store, which we currently expect to open in late 2018 to 2019, ultimately include owning a condominium interest in a mixed-use tower and leasing certain nearby properties. As of January 31, 2015, we had approximately $125 of fee interest in land, which is expected to convert to the condominium interest once the store is constructed. We have committed to make future installment payments based on the developer meeting pre-established construction and development milestones. Our fee interest in the land is currently and will continue to be subject to lien by project development lenders until project completion or fulfillment of our existing installment payment commitment. In the unlikely event that this project is not completed, the opening may be delayed and we may potentially be subject to future losses or capital commitments in order to complete construction or to monetize our previous investments in the land. \n\nImpact of Credit Ratings Under the terms of our revolver, any borrowings we may enter into will accrue interest for Euro-Dollar Rate Loans at a floating base rate tied to LIBOR, for Canadian Dealer Offer Rate Loans at a floating rate tied to CDOR, and for Base Rate Loans at the highest of: (i) the Euro- Dollar rate plus 100 basis points, (ii) the federal funds rate plus 50 basis points and (iii) the prime rate.\n\nThe rate depends upon the type of borrowing incurred, plus in each case an applicable margin. This applicable margin varies depending upon the credit ratings assigned to our long-term unsecured debt. At the time of this report, our long-term unsecured debt ratings, outlook and resulting applicable margin were as follows:\n\nShould the ratings assigned to our long-term unsecured debt improve, the applicable margin associated with any such borrowings may decrease, resulting in a slightly lower borrowing cost under this facility. Should the ratings assigned to our long-term unsecured debt worsen, the applicable margin associated with our borrowings may increase, resulting in a slightly higher borrowing cost under this facility.\n\nDebt Covenants The revolver requires that we maintain an adjusted debt to earnings before interest, income taxes, depreciation, amortization and rent (“EBITDAR”) leverage ratio of less than four times (see the following additional discussion of Adjusted Debt to EBITDAR).\n\nAs of January 31, 2015 and February 1, 2014, we were in compliance with this covenant. We will continue to monitor this covenant and believe that we will remain in compliance with this covenant during 2015.\n\n## Debt Covenants The revolver requires that we maintain an adjusted debt to earnings before interest, income taxes, depreciation, amortization and rent\n\n## Impact of Credit Ratings Under the terms of our revolver, any borrowings we may enter into will accrue interest for Euro-Dollar Rate Loans at a floating base rate tied\n\n30" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9598305604339571, + "doc_id": "c3f2a635b58a672a73aba1be23cc27cb391c59926fd2c002cde0f0623fa8e757", + "edit_distance": 0.4192399049881235, + "f1_score": 0.9834254143646409, + "meteor": 0.9497697236614586, + "precision": 0.9834254143646409, + "pred_md": "entire customer pool and changes in the overall aging of accounts receivable. While we have a large customer base that is geographically dispersed, a general economic downturn in any of the industry segments in which we operate could result in higher than expected defaults, and therefore, the need to revise estimates for bad debts. Accounts are written off against the allowance when it becomes evident collection will not occur. As of June 30, 2012 and 2011, our allowance for doubtful accounts was 2.6% and 2.4% of gross receivables, respectively. Our provision for losses on accounts receivable was $3.9 million, $2.0 million and $2.5 million in fiscal 2012, 2011 and 2010, respectively.\n\n## Goodwill and Intangibles\n\nGoodwill is recognized as the amount by which the cost of an acquired entity exceeds the net amount assigned to assets acquired and liabilities assumed. As part of acquisition accounting, we also recognize acquired intangible assets such as customer relationships, vendor relationships, trade names, and noncompetition agreements apart from goodwill. Finite-lived intangibles are evaluated for impairment when changes in conditions indicate carrying value may not be recoverable. We evaluate goodwill and indefinite-lived intangibles for impairment at least annually. This evaluation requires significant judgment by management, including estimated future operating results, estimated future cash flows, the long-term rate of growth of our business, and determination of an appropriate discount rate. While we use available information to prepare the estimates and evaluations, actual results could differ significantly. For example, a worsening of economic conditions beyond those assumed in an impairment analysis could impact the estimates of future growth and result in an impairment charge in a future period. Any resulting impairment charge could be viewed as having a material adverse impact on our financial condition and results of operations. All of the goodwill remaining on our consolidated financial statements is related to the Service Center Based Distribution segment. We believe the fair value of this segment is well in excess of its carrying value.\n\n## Self-Insurance Liabilities\n\nWe maintain business insurance programs with significant selfinsured retention covering workers' compensation, business, automobile, general product liability and other claims. We accrue estimated losses using actuarial calculations, models and assumptions based on historical loss experience. We maintain a self-insured health benefits plan, which provides medical benefits to U.S. based employees electing coverage. We maintain a reserve for all unpaid medical claims including those incurred but not reported based on historical experience and other assumptions.\n\n7\n\nAlthough management believes that the estimated liabilities for self-insurance are adequate, the estimates described above may not be indicative of current and future losses. In addition, the actuarial calculations used to estimate self-insurance liabilities are based on numerous assumptions, some of which are subjective. We will continue to adjust our estimated liabilities for selfinsurance, as deemed necessary, in the event that future loss experience differs from historical loss patterns.\n\n## Pension and Other Postemployment Benefit Plans\n\nThe measurement of liabilities related to pension plans and other postemployment benefit plans is based on management's assumptions related to future events including interest rates, return on pension plan assets, and healthcare cost trend rates. We evaluate these assumptions and adjust them as necessary. Changes to these assumptions could result in a material change to the Company's pension obligation causing a related increase or decrease in reported net operating results in the period of change in the estimate. At June 30, 2012, a 1% point change would have the following effects (in thousands):\n\n)\n\nEffective December 31, 2011, participant benefits and entry into the SERP was frozen. As such, compensation increases no longer have an impact on the postemployment liability or the associated periodic benefit cost. Additionally, a 1% change in the return on assets is not material since most of the plans are non-qualified and unfunded.\n\n## Income Taxes\n\nDeferred income taxes are recorded for estimated future tax effects of differences between the bases of assets and liabilities for financial reporting and income tax purposes, giving consideration to enacted tax laws. As of June 30, 2012, the Company had recognized $34.4 million of net deferred tax assets. This includes a $0.2 million valuation allowance recorded related to estimated limitations in the deductibility of certain expenses. Management believes that sufficient income will be earned in the future to realize its deferred income tax assets. The realization of these deferred tax assets can be impacted by changes to tax laws, statutory tax rates and future taxable income levels.\n\nApplied Industrial Technologies, Inc. and Subsidiaries\n\n11", + "recall": 0.9834254143646409, + "true_md": "entire customer pool and changes in the overall aging of accounts receivable. While we have a large customer base that is geographically dispersed, a general economic downturn in any of the industry segments in which we operate could result in higher than expected defaults, and therefore, the need to revise estimates for bad debts. Accounts are written off against the allowance when it becomes evident collection will not occur. As of June 30, 2012 and 2011, our allowance for doubtful accounts was 2.6% and 2.4% of gross receivables, respectively. Our provision for losses on accounts receivable was $3.9 million, $2.0 million and $2.5 million in fiscal 2012, 2011 and 2010, respectively. \n\nGoodwill is recognized as the amount by which the cost of an acquired entity exceeds the net amount assigned to assets acquired and liabilities assumed. As part of acquisition accounting, we also recognize acquired intangible assets such as customer relationships, vendor relationships, trade names, and non- competition agreements apart from goodwill. Finite-lived intangibles are evaluated for impairment when changes in conditions indicate carrying value may not be recoverable. We evaluate goodwill and indefinite-lived intangibles for impairment at least annually. This evaluation requires significant judgment by management, including estimated future operating results, estimated future cash flows, the long-term rate of growth of our business, and determination of an appropriate discount rate. While we use available information to prepare the estimates and evaluations, actual results could differ significantly. For example, a worsening of economic conditions beyond those assumed in an impairment analysis could impact the estimates of future growth and result in an impairment charge in a future period. Any resulting impairment charge could be viewed as having a material adverse impact on our financial condition and results of operations. All of the goodwill remaining on our consolidated financial statements is related to the Service Center Based Distribution segment. We believe the fair value of this segment is well in excess of its carrying value. \n\nWe maintain business insurance programs with significant self- insured retention covering workers’ compensation, business, automobile, general product liability and other claims. We accrue estimated losses using actuarial calculations, models and assumptions based on historical loss experience. We maintain a self-insured health benefits plan, which provides medical benefits to U.S. based employees electing coverage. We maintain a reserve for all unpaid medical claims including those incurred but not reported based on historical experience and other assumptions.\n\nDeferred income taxes are recorded for estimated future tax effects of differences between the bases of assets and liabilities for financial reporting and income tax purposes, giving consideration to enacted tax laws. As of June 30, 2012, the Company had recognized $34.4 million of net deferred tax assets. This includes a $0.2 million valuation allowance recorded related to estimated limitations in the deductibility of certain expenses. Management believes that sufficient income will be earned in the future to realize its deferred income tax assets. The realization of these deferred tax assets can be impacted by changes to tax laws, statutory tax rates and future taxable income levels. \n\nEffective December 31, 2011, participant benefits and entry into the SERP was frozen. As such, compensation increases no longer have an impact on the postemployment liability or the associated periodic benefit cost. Additionally, a 1% change in the return on assets is not material since most of the plans are non-qualified and unfunded. \n\nThe measurement of liabilities related to pension plans and other postemployment benefit plans is based on management’s assumptions related to future events including interest rates, return on pension plan assets, and healthcare cost trend rates. We evaluate these assumptions and adjust them as necessary. Changes to these assumptions could result in a material change to the Company’s pension obligation causing a related increase or decrease in reported net operating results in the period of change in the estimate. At June 30, 2012, a 1% point change would have the following effects (in thousands):\n\nAlthough management believes that the estimated liabilities for self-insurance are adequate, the estimates described above may not be indicative of current and future losses. In addition, the actuarial calculations used to estimate self-insurance liabilities are based on numerous assumptions, some of which are subjective. We will continue to adjust our estimated liabilities for self- insurance, as deemed necessary, in the event that future loss experience differs from historical loss patterns. \n\n## Goodwill and Intangibles\n\n## Pension and Other Postemployment Benefit Plans\n\n## Income Taxes\n\n## Self-Insurance Liabilities\n\n11 Applied Industrial Technologies, Inc. and Subsidiaries" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9849643288031845, + "doc_id": "ac5a0123c7468638876092dd1eff918a75f8ac074eea66000b5935ab3f3403a7", + "edit_distance": 0.752112676056338, + "f1_score": 0.9957805907172996, + "meteor": 0.9400576293015442, + "precision": 0.9957805907172996, + "pred_md": "NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 22: PENSIONS\n\nWe have contributory and non-contributory defined benefit pension plans that are made available to most of our employees. The plans provide pensions based on years of service, years of contributions and earnings. We do not provide any non-pension post-retirement benefits. We also provide unfunded supplemental pension benefits to certain executives.\n\nThe assets of the defined benefit pension plans are held in segregated accounts isolated from our assets. We administer the defined benefit pension plans pursuant to applicable regulations, the Statement of Investment Policies and Procedures and to the mandate of the Pension Committee of the Board of Directors. The Pension Committee of the Board of Directors oversees our administration of the defined benefits pension plans, which includes the following principal areas:\n\n- GLYPH<129> overseeing the funding, administration, communication and investment management of the plans\n- GLYPH<129> selecting and monitoring the performance of all third parties performing duties in respect of the plans, including audit, actuarial and investment management services\n- GLYPH<129> proposing, considering and approving amendments to the defined benefit pension plans\n- GLYPH<129> proposing, considering and approving amendments of the Statement of Investment Policies and Procedures\n- GLYPH<129> reviewing management and actuarial reports prepared in respect of the administration of the defined benefit pension plans\n- GLYPH<129> reviewing and approving the audited financial statements of the defined benefit pension plan funds.\n\nThe assets of the defined benefit pension plans are invested and managed following all applicable regulations and the Statement of Investment Policies and Procedures, and reflect the characteristics and asset mix of each defined benefit pension plan. Investment and market return risk is managed by:\n\n- GLYPH<129> contracting professional investment managers to execute the investment strategy following the Statement of Investment Policies and Procedures and regulatory requirements\n- GLYPH<129> specifying the kinds of investments that can be held in the plans and monitoring compliance\n- GLYPH<129> using asset allocation and diversification strategies, and\n- GLYPH<129> purchasing annuities from time to time.\n\nThe funded pension plans are registered with the Office of the Superintendent of Financial Institutions and are subject to the Federal Pension Benefits Standards Act. The plans are also registered with the Canada Revenue Agency and are subject to the Canada Income Tax Act. The benefits provided under the plans and the contributions to the plans are funded and administered in accordance with all applicable legislation and regulations.\n\nSignificant estimates are involved in determining pension related balances. Actuarial estimates are based on projections of employees' compensation levels at the time of retirement. Maximum retirement benefits are primarily based on career average earnings, subject to certain adjustments. The most recent actuarial valuations were completed as at January 1, 2013.\n\n118\n\nROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\nThe table below sets out the estimated present value of accrued plan benefits and the estimated market value of the net assets available to provide these benefits for our funded plans at December 31, 2013 and 2012.\n\nThe table below shows our pension fund assets for the years ended 2013 and 2012.\n\nThe table below shows the accrued benefit obligations arising from funded obligations for the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012.\n\nThe table below shows the effect of the asset ceiling for the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012.\n\nPlan assets are comprised mainly of pooled funds that invest in common stocks and bonds that are traded in an active market. The table below shows the fair value of the total pension plan assets by major category for the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012.", + "recall": 0.9957805907172996, + "true_md": "NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 22: PENSIONS\n\nWe have contributory and non-contributory defined benefit pension plans that are made available to most of our employees. The plans provide pensions based on years of service, years of contributions and earnings. We do not provide any non-pension post-retirement benefits.\n\nWe also provide unfunded supplemental pension benefits to certain executives.\n\nThe assets of the defined benefit pension plans are held in segregated accounts isolated from our assets. We administer the defined benefit pension plans pursuant to applicable regulations, the Statement of Investment Policies and Procedures and to the mandate of the Pension Committee of the Board of Directors. The Pension Committee of the Board of Directors oversees our administration of the defined benefits pension plans, which includes the following principal areas:\n\nThe assets of the defined benefit pension plans are invested and managed following all applicable regulations and the Statement of Investment Policies and Procedures, and reflect the characteristics and asset mix of each defined benefit pension plan. Investment and market return risk is managed by:\n\nThe funded pension plans are registered with the Office of the Superintendent of Financial Institutions and are subject to the Federal Pension Benefits Standards Act. The plans are also registered with the Canada Revenue Agency and are subject to the Canada Income Tax Act. The benefits provided under the plans and the contributions to the plans are funded and administered in accordance with all applicable legislation and regulations.\n\nSignificant estimates are involved in determining pension related balances. Actuarial estimates are based on projections of employees’ compensation levels at the time of retirement. Maximum retirement benefits are primarily based on career average earnings, subject to certain adjustments. The most recent actuarial valuations were completed as at January 1, 2013.\n\nPlan assets are comprised mainly of pooled funds that invest in common stocks and bonds that are traded in an active market. The table below shows the fair value of the total pension plan assets by major category for the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012.\n\nThe table below shows the accrued benefit obligations arising from funded obligations for the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012.\n\nThe table below shows our pension fund assets for the years ended 2013 and 2012.\n\nThe table below sets out the estimated present value of accrued plan benefits and the estimated market value of the net assets available to provide these benefits for our funded plans at December 31, 2013 and 2012.\n\n- GLYPH<129> overseeing the funding, administration, communication and investment management of the plans\n\n- GLYPH<129> selecting and monitoring the performance of all third parties performing duties in respect of the plans, including audit, actuarial and investment management services\n\n- GLYPH<129> proposing, considering and approving amendments to the defined benefit pension plans\n\n- GLYPH<129> proposing, considering and approving amendments of the Statement of Investment Policies and Procedures\n\n- GLYPH<129> reviewing management and actuarial reports prepared in respect of the administration of the defined benefit pension plans\n\n- GLYPH<129> reviewing and approving the audited financial statements of the defined benefit pension plan funds.\n\n- GLYPH<129> contracting professional investment managers to execute the investment strategy following the Statement of Investment Policies and Procedures and regulatory requirements\n\n- GLYPH<129> specifying the kinds of investments that can be held in the plans and monitoring compliance\n\n- GLYPH<129> using asset allocation and diversification strategies, and\n\n- GLYPH<129> purchasing annuities from time to time.\n\n118 ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\nThe table below shows the effect of the asset ceiling for the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8449288620794824, + "doc_id": "ba9f72b776c931f53059eaf6314cd789d2b2067f52cfbe6d0902b9afccf2abf8", + "edit_distance": 0.21739130434782608, + "f1_score": 0.9559748427672956, + "meteor": 0.9523825964367146, + "precision": 0.9620253164556962, + "pred_md": "## 4. Asset Backed Commercial Paper (ABCP) Programs as Sponsor\n\nWe sponsor issuance of ABCP, whose reference assets are such as clients' receivables, in order to fulfill clients' financing needs. Most of the reference assets are high-grade\n\nclaims of corporate clients and do not include sub-prime related assets.\n\n(Billions of yen)\n\nReference: In addition, we provide liquidity supports for ABCP programs which are sponsored by other banks. Total notional amount of reference assets of such programs is approximately ·47 billion.\n\n## 5. Others\n\nWe have no securities issued by structured investment vehicles.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n31", + "recall": 0.95, + "true_md": "## 4. Asset Backed Commercial Paper (ABCP) Programs as Sponsor\n\n## 5. Others\n\nWe sponsor issuance of ABCP, whose reference assets are such as clients’ receivables, in order to fulfill clients’ financ- ing needs. Most of the reference assets are high-grade \n\nclaims of corporate clients and do not include sub-prime related assets.\n\nReference: In addition, we provide liquidity supports for ABCP programs which are sponsored by other banks. Total notional amount of reference assets of such programs is approximately ¥47 billion.\n\nWe have no securities issued by structured investment vehicles.\n\n(Billions of yen)\n\nSMFG 2011 31" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9699915845792605, + "doc_id": "3cbc29b7289d0cceeee49ff4c65d89baa9193dcb1bf8ab458d18d632ec045338", + "edit_distance": 0.5909451945988881, + "f1_score": 0.998650472334683, + "meteor": 0.9322875297855441, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Discontinued Operations\n\nA discontinued operation is a component of our business that has operations and cash flows that are clearly distinguished from the rest of Rogers and:\n\n- GLYPH<129> represents a separate major line of business\n- GLYPH<129> is part of a single coordinated plan to dispose of a separate major line of business, or\n- GLYPH<129> is a subsidiary we have acquired with the intention to re-sell.\n\nWhen we classify a component as a discontinued operation, we restate our comparative income and comprehensive income as though the operation had been discontinued from the start of the comparative year.\n\nSee note 6 for information about discontinued operations.\n\n## New Accounting Pronouncements Effective in 2013\n\nWe adopted the following accounting changes for our 2013 consolidated financial statements on January 1, 2013.\n\n- GLYPH<129> IFRS 10, Consolidated Financial Statements\n- GLYPH<129> IFRS 11, Joint Arrangements\n- GLYPH<129> IFRS 12, Disclosure of Interest in Other Entities\n- GLYPH<129> IFRS 13, Fair Value Measurement\n- GLYPH<129> IAS 19, Employee Benefits (2011)\n- GLYPH<129> IAS 28, Investments in Associates and Joint Ventures\n- GLYPH<129> IAS 36, Impairment of Assets\n\nThe accounting pronouncements we adopted that had an impact on our financial results or require further explanation are explained as follows:\n\n- GLYPH<129> IFRS 10, Consolidated Financial Statements (IFRS 10) - As a result of the adoption of IFRS 10, we have changed our approach to determining whether we have control over and consequently whether we consolidate our investees. IFRS 10 introduces a new control model that is applicable to all investees. Among other things, it requires the consolidation of an investee if we control the investee on the basis of de facto circumstances. In accordance with the transitional provisions of IFRS 10, we re-assessed the control conclusion for our investees at January 1, 2013. We made no changes in the current or comparative period as a result of this assessment.\n- GLYPH<129> IFRS 11, Joint Arrangements (IFRS 11) - As a result of the adoption of IFRS 11, we have changed how we evaluate our interests in joint arrangements. Under IFRS 11, we classify our interests in joint arrangements as either joint operations or joint ventures depending on our right to the assets and obligations for the liabilities of the arrangements. When making this assessment, we consider the structure of the arrangements, the legal form of any separate vehicles, the contractual terms of the arrangements and other facts and circumstances. We have re-evaluated our involvement in our joint arrangements and have accounted for these either using the proportionate consolidation method, or the equity method depending on whether the investment is defined as a joint operation or a joint venture, respectively. The adoption of IFRS 11 was not material to the current or comparative year.\n- GLYPH<129> IFRS 13, Fair Value Measurement (IFRS 13) - On January 1, 2013, we adopted IFRS 13, on a prospective basis, which provides a single source of guidance on how fair value is measured, replacing the fair value measurement guidance contained in individual IFRSs. IFRS 13 defines fair value and establishes a framework for measuring fair value. It does not introduce new fair value measurements or eliminate the practicability exceptions to fair value measurements that currently exist in certain standards. We have incorporated the relevant fair value requirements throughout these consolidated financial statements.\n- GLYPH<129> IAS 19, Employee Benefits (2011) (IAS 19) - On January 1, 2013, we adopted IAS 19, which changes the basis for determining the income or expense related to defined benefit plans. This amendment eliminated the concept of return on plan assets and interest cost (income) and replaced it with a net interest cost that is calculated by applying the discount rate to the net liability (asset). The net interest cost takes into account any changes in the net defined benefit liability (asset) during the period as a result of contributions and benefit payments. The adoption of the amended standard resulted in an increase in finance costs of $7 million and a decrease in other comprehensive income, for a net effect of nil in comprehensive income for the year ended December 31, 2012 and did not have a material impact on net assets as at December 31, 2012. See note 22 for more information about our pension plans.\n- GLYPH<129> IAS 36, Impairment of Assets (IAS 36) - In May 2013, the IASB amended IAS 36 to clarify the circumstances in which the recoverable amount of assets or cash-generating units is required to be disclosed, to clarify the disclosures required, and to introduce an explicit requirement to disclose the discount rate used in determining impairment (or reversals) where the recoverable amount (based on fair value less costs of disposal) is determined using a present value technique. The amendments are effective for annual periods beginning on or after January 1, 2014, with early adoption permitted. We early adopted this policy as of January 1, 2013 and made the required disclosures.\n\n## Recent Accounting Pronouncements\n\nThe IASB has issued new standards and amendments to existing standards. These changes in accounting are not yet effective at December 31, 2013, and could have an impact on future periods.\n\n- GLYPH<129> IAS 32, Financial Instruments: Presentation (IAS 32) - In December 2011, the IASB amended IAS 32 to clarify the meaning of when an entity has a current legally enforceable right of set-off. The amendments are effective for annual periods beginning on or after January 1, 2014 and are required to be applied retrospectively. We do not expect this to have a significant impact on our consolidated financial statements.\n- GLYPH<129> IAS 39, Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement (IAS 39) - In June 2013, the IASB amended IAS 39 to provide relief from discontinuing an existing hedging relationship when a novation that was not contemplated in the original hedging documentation meets specific criteria. The amendments are effective for annual periods beginning on or after January 1, 2014 and are required to be applied retrospectively. We are assessing the impact of this amendment on our consolidated financial statements.\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC.\n\n101\n\nNOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS", + "recall": 0.9973045822102425, + "true_md": "A discontinued operation is a component of our business that has operations and cash flows that are clearly distinguished from the rest of Rogers and:\n\nWhen we classify a component as a discontinued operation, we restate our comparative income and comprehensive income as though the operation had been discontinued from the start of the comparative year.\n\nSee note 6 for information about discontinued operations.\n\nWe adopted the following accounting changes for our 2013 consolidated financial statements on January 1, 2013.\n\nThe accounting pronouncements we adopted that had an impact on our financial results or require further explanation are explained as follows:\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 101\n\n## Recent Accounting Pronouncements\n\n## Discontinued Operations\n\n## New Accounting Pronouncements Effective in 2013\n\n- GLYPH<129> represents a separate major line of business\n\n- GLYPH<129> is part of a single coordinated plan to dispose of a separate major line of business, or\n\n- GLYPH<129> is a subsidiary we have acquired with the intention to re-sell.\n\n- GLYPH<129> IFRS 10, Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n- GLYPH<129> IFRS 11, Joint Arrangements\n\n- GLYPH<129> IFRS 12, Disclosure of Interest in Other Entities\n\n- GLYPH<129> IFRS 13, Fair Value Measurement\n\n- GLYPH<129> IAS 19, Employee Benefits (2011)\n\n- GLYPH<129> IAS 28, Investments in Associates and Joint Ventures\n\n- GLYPH<129> IAS 36, Impairment of Assets\n\n- GLYPH<129> IFRS 10, Consolidated Financial Statements (IFRS 10) – As a result of the adoption of IFRS 10, we have changed our approach to determining whether we have control over and consequently whether we consolidate our investees. IFRS 10 introduces a new control model that is applicable to all investees. Among other things, it requires the consolidation of an investee if we control the investee on the basis of de facto circumstances. In accordance with the transitional provisions of IFRS 10, we re-assessed the control conclusion for our investees at January 1, 2013. We made no changes in the current or comparative period as a result of this assessment.\n\n- GLYPH<129> IFRS 11, Joint Arrangements (IFRS 11) – As a result of the adoption of IFRS 11, we have changed how we evaluate our interests in joint arrangements. Under IFRS 11, we classify our interests in joint arrangements as either joint operations or joint ventures depending on our right to the assets and obligations for the liabilities of the arrangements. When making this assessment, we consider the structure of the arrangements, the legal form of any separate vehicles, the contractual terms of the arrangements and other facts and circumstances. We have re-evaluated our involvement in our joint arrangements and have accounted for these either using the proportionate consolidation method, or the equity method depending on whether the investment is defined as a joint operation or a joint venture, respectively. The adoption of IFRS 11 was not material to the current or comparative year.\n\n- GLYPH<129> IAS 39, Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement (IAS 39) – In June 2013, the IASB amended IAS 39 to provide relief from discontinuing an existing hedging relationship when a novation that was not contemplated in the original hedging documentation meets specific criteria. The amendments are effective for annual periods beginning on or after January 1, 2014 and are required to be applied retrospectively. We are assessing the impact of this amendment on our consolidated financial statements.\n\n- GLYPH<129> IAS 32, Financial Instruments: Presentation (IAS 32) – In December 2011, the IASB amended IAS 32 to clarify the meaning of when an entity has a current legally enforceable right of set-off. The amendments are effective for annual periods beginning on or after January 1, 2014 and are required to be applied retrospectively. We do not expect this to have a significant impact on our consolidated financial statements.\n\n- GLYPH<129> IAS 36, Impairment of Assets (IAS 36) – In May 2013, the IASB amended IAS 36 to clarify the circumstances in which the recoverable amount of assets or cash-generating units is required to be disclosed, to clarify the disclosures required, and to introduce an explicit requirement to disclose the discount rate used in determining impairment (or reversals) where the recoverable amount (based on fair value less costs of disposal) is determined using a present value technique. The amendments are effective for annual periods beginning on or after January 1, 2014, with early adoption permitted. We early adopted this policy as of January 1, 2013 and made the required disclosures.\n\n- GLYPH<129> IAS 19, Employee Benefits (2011) (IAS 19) – On January 1, 2013, we adopted IAS 19, which changes the basis for determining the income or expense related to defined benefit plans. This amendment eliminated the concept of return on plan assets and interest cost (income) and replaced it with a net interest cost that is calculated by applying the discount rate to the net liability (asset). The net interest cost takes into account any changes in the net defined benefit liability (asset) during the period as a result of contributions and benefit payments. The adoption of the amended standard resulted in an increase in finance costs of $7 million and a decrease in other comprehensive income, for a net effect of nil in comprehensive income for the year ended December 31, 2012 and did not have a material impact on net assets as at December 31, 2012. See note 22 for more information about our pension plans.\n\n- GLYPH<129> IFRS 13, Fair Value Measurement (IFRS 13) – On January 1, 2013, we adopted IFRS 13, on a prospective basis, which provides a single source of guidance on how fair value is measured, replacing the fair value measurement guidance contained in individual IFRSs. IFRS 13 defines fair value and establishes a framework for measuring fair value. It does not introduce new fair value measurements or eliminate the practicability exceptions to fair value measurements that currently exist in certain standards. We have incorporated the relevant fair value requirements throughout these consolidated financial statements.\n\nThe IASB has issued new standards and amendments to existing standards. These changes in accounting are not yet effective at December 31, 2013, and could have an impact on future periods.\n\nNOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.760856626273165, + "doc_id": "bbb70e8bfa80b8fa1ed3caa38385ffb4ecf007f23767cf3ad1c5409430de94c9", + "edit_distance": 0.25, + "f1_score": 0.9047619047619049, + "meteor": 0.8972972972972975, + "precision": 0.8636363636363636, + "pred_md": "Nordstrom, Inc. and Subsidiaries Exhibit Index\n\nExhibit\n\nMethod of Filing\n\n*This exhibit is a management contract, compensatory plan or arrangement\n\n72", + "recall": 0.95, + "true_md": "## Nordstrom, Inc. and Subsidiaries Exhibit Index\n\n *This exhibit is a management contract, compensatory plan or arrangement\n\n72" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9455625394588036, + "doc_id": "28b44b01ec5989bf6a9bc0040defe4d44a0e612c2ea42d7c7a1a4d379b9f7aee", + "edit_distance": 0.674, + "f1_score": 0.9783281733746129, + "meteor": 0.839985021587034, + "precision": 0.9813664596273292, + "pred_md": "## Item 9B. Other Information.\n\nNone.\n\n## PART III\n\n## Item 10. Directors, Executive Officers and Corporate Governance.\n\nThe information required under this item is included in the following sections of our Proxy Statement for our 2015 Annual Meeting of Shareholders, the sections of which are incorporated by reference herein and will be filed within 120 days after the end of our fiscal year:\n\nExecutive Officers Director Elections Board Committees and Charters Director Nominating Process Website Access to Corporate Governance Documents\n\nSection 16(a) Beneficial Ownership Reporting Compliance\n\nCorporate Governance\n\nThe certifications of our President and Chief Financial Officer required pursuant to Sections 302 and 906 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 are included as exhibits to this Annual Report on Form 10-K and were included as exhibits to each of our quarterly reports on Form 10-Q. Our President certified to the New York Stock Exchange ('NYSE') on May 15, 2014 pursuant to Section 303A.12(a) of the NYSE's listing standards, that he was not aware of any violation by the Company of the NYSE's corporate governance listing standards as of that date.\n\n## Item 11. Executive Compensation.\n\nThe information required under this item is included in the following sections of our Proxy Statement for our 2015 Annual Meeting of Shareholders, the sections of which are incorporated by reference herein and will be filed within 120 days after the end of our fiscal year:\n\nCompensation of Executive Officers\n\nCompensation Discussion and Analysis\n\nDirector Compensation\n\nCompensation Committee Interlocks and Insider Participation\n\n## Item 12. Security Ownership of Certain Beneficial Owners and Management and Related Shareholder Matters.\n\nThe information required under this item is included in the following sections of our Proxy Statement for our 2015 Annual Meeting of Shareholders, the sections of which are incorporated by reference herein and will be filed within 120 days after the end of our fiscal year:\n\nSecurity Ownership of Certain Beneficial Owners and Management Equity Compensation Plans\n\n## Item 13. Certain Relationships and Related Transactions, and Director Independence.\n\nThe information required under this item is included in the following sections of our Proxy Statement for our 2015 Annual Meeting of Shareholders, the sections of which are incorporated by reference herein and will be filed within 120 days after the end of our fiscal year:\n\nElection of Directors\n\nCertain Relationships and Related Transactions\n\n## Item 14. Principal Accounting Fees and Services.\n\nThe information required under this item is included in the following section of our Proxy Statement for our 2015 Annual Meeting of Shareholders, the section of which is incorporated by reference herein and will be filed within 120 days after the end of our fiscal year:\n\nRatification of the Appointment of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm\n\n68", + "recall": 0.9753086419753086, + "true_md": "## Item 9B. Other Information.\n\n## PART III\n\n## Item 10. Directors, Executive Officers and Corporate Governance.\n\n## Item 11. Executive Compensation.\n\n## Item 12. Security Ownership of Certain Beneficial Owners and Management and Related Shareholder Matters.\n\n## Item 13. Certain Relationships and Related Transactions, and Director Independence.\n\n## Item 14. Principal Accounting Fees and Services.\n\n68\n\nRatification of the Appointment of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm\n\nThe information required under this item is included in the following section of our Proxy Statement for our 2015 Annual Meeting of Shareholders, the section of which is incorporated by reference herein and will be filed within 120 days after the end of our fiscal year:\n\nElection of Directors Certain Relationships and Related Transactions\n\nThe information required under this item is included in the following sections of our Proxy Statement for our 2015 Annual Meeting of Shareholders, the sections of which are incorporated by reference herein and will be filed within 120 days after the end of our fiscal year:\n\nSecurity Ownership of Certain Beneficial Owners and Management Equity Compensation Plans\n\nThe information required under this item is included in the following sections of our Proxy Statement for our 2015 Annual Meeting of Shareholders, the sections of which are incorporated by reference herein and will be filed within 120 days after the end of our fiscal year:\n\nCompensation of Executive Officers Compensation Discussion and Analysis Director Compensation Compensation Committee Interlocks and Insider Participation\n\nThe information required under this item is included in the following sections of our Proxy Statement for our 2015 Annual Meeting of Shareholders, the sections of which are incorporated by reference herein and will be filed within 120 days after the end of our fiscal year:\n\nThe certifications of our President and Chief Financial Officer required pursuant to Sections 302 and 906 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 are included as exhibits to this Annual Report on Form 10-K and were included as exhibits to each of our quarterly reports on Form 10-Q. Our President certified to the New York Stock Exchange (“NYSE”) on May 15, 2014 pursuant to Section 303A.12(a) of the NYSE’s listing standards, that he was not aware of any violation by the Company of the NYSE’s corporate governance listing standards as of that date.\n\nExecutive Officers Director Elections Board Committees and Charters Director Nominating Process Website Access to Corporate Governance Documents Section 16(a) Beneficial Ownership Reporting Compliance Corporate Governance\n\nThe information required under this item is included in the following sections of our Proxy Statement for our 2015 Annual Meeting of Shareholders, the sections of which are incorporated by reference herein and will be filed within 120 days after the end of our fiscal year:\n\nNone." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8579940999063999, + "doc_id": "ba71b16bbddc641de072aa88750464194aef26158d24f261e3d221b1422cf8d1", + "edit_distance": 0.7113259668508287, + "f1_score": 0.994475138121547, + "meteor": 0.6550736441083784, + "precision": 0.996309963099631, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 1 - STATEMENT OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES continued\n\n## Impairment of Non-Financial Assets\n\nThe Group assesses impairment at each reporting date by evaluating conditions specific to the Group that may lead to impairment of assets. Where an indicator of impairment exists, the recoverable amount of the cash-generating unit to which the assets belong is then estimated based on the present value of future discounted cash flows. For development and production assets, the expected future cash flow estimation is always based on a number of factors, variables and assumptions, the most important of which are estimates of reserves, future production profiles, commodity prices and costs. In most cases, the present value of future cash flows is most sensitive to estimates of future oil price and discount rates. A change in the modeled assumptions in isolation could materially change the recoverable amount. However, due to the interrelated nature of the assumptions, movements in any one variable can have an indirect impact on others and individual variables rarely change in isolation. Additional, management can be expected to respond to some movements, to mitigate downsides and take advantage of upsides, as circumstances allow. Consequently, it is impracticable to estimate the indirect impact that a change in one assumption has on other variables and therefore, on the extent of impairments under different sets of assumptions in subsequent reporting periods. In the event that future circumstances vary from these assumptions, the recoverable amount of the Group's development and production assets could change materially and result in impairment losses or the reversal of previous impairment losses.\n\n## Exploration and Evaluation\n\nThe Company's policy for exploration and evaluation is discussed in Note 1 (b). The application of this policy requires the Company to make certain estimates and assumptions as to future events and circumstances, particularly in relation to the assessment of whether economic quantities of reserves have been found. Any such estimates and assumptions may change as new information becomes available. If, after having capitalised exploration and evaluation expenditure, management concludes that the capitalised expenditure is unlikely to be recovered by future sale or exploitation, then the relevant capitalised amount will be written off through the consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income.\n\n## Restoration Provision\n\nA provision for rehabilitation and restoration is provided by the Group to meet all future obligations for the restoration and rehabilitation of oil and gas producing areas when oil and gas reserves are exhausted and the oil and gas fields are abandoned. Restoration liabilities are discounted to present value and capitalised as a component part of capitalised development expenditure. The capitalised costs are amortised over the units of production and the provision is revised at each balance sheet date through the consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income as the discounting of the liability unwinds.\n\nIn most instances, the removal of the assets associated with these oil and gas producing areas will occur many years in the future. The estimate of future removal costs therefore requires management to make significant judgements regarding removal date or well lives, the extent of restoration activities required, discount and inflation rates.\n\n## Units of Production Depreciation\n\nDevelopment and production assets are depreciated using the units of production method over economically recoverable reserves representing total proved and probable developed reserves. This results in a depreciation or amortisation charge proportional to the depletion of the anticipated remaining production from the area of interest.\n\n- 69 -", + "recall": 0.9926470588235294, + "true_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 1 - STATEMENT OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES continued\n\n## Impairment of Non-Financial Assets The Group assesses impairment at each reporting date by evaluating conditions specific to the Group that may lead\n\n## Exploration and Evaluation The Company’s policy for exploration and evaluation is discussed in Note 1 (b). The application of this policy requires\n\n## Restoration Provision A provision for rehabilitation and restoration is provided by the Group to meet all future obligations for the\n\n## Units of Production Depreciation Development and production assets are depreciated using the units of production method over economically\n\n- 69 - \n\nUnits of Production Depreciation Development and production assets are depreciated using the units of production method over economically recoverable reserves representing total proved and probable developed reserves. This results in a depreciation or amortisation charge proportional to the depletion of the anticipated remaining production from the area of interest. \n\nIn most instances, the removal of the assets associated with these oil and gas producing areas will occur many years in the future. The estimate of future removal costs therefore requires management to make significant judgements regarding removal date or well lives, the extent of restoration activities required, discount and inflation rates.\n\nRestoration Provision A provision for rehabilitation and restoration is provided by the Group to meet all future obligations for the restoration and rehabilitation of oil and gas producing areas when oil and gas reserves are exhausted and the oil and gas fields are abandoned. Restoration liabilities are discounted to present value and capitalised as a component part of capitalised development expenditure. The capitalised costs are amortised over the units of production and the provision is revised at each balance sheet date through the consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income as the discounting of the liability unwinds.\n\nExploration and Evaluation The Company’s policy for exploration and evaluation is discussed in Note 1 (b). The application of this policy requires the Company to make certain estimates and assumptions as to future events and circumstances, particularly in relation to the assessment of whether economic quantities of reserves have been found. Any such estimates and assumptions may change as new information becomes available. If, after having capitalised exploration and evaluation expenditure, management concludes that the capitalised expenditure is unlikely to be recovered by future sale or exploitation, then the relevant capitalised amount will be written off through the consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income. \n\nImpairment of Non-Financial Assets The Group assesses impairment at each reporting date by evaluating conditions specific to the Group that may lead to impairment of assets. Where an indicator of impairment exists, the recoverable amount of the cash-generating unit to which the assets belong is then estimated based on the present value of future discounted cash flows. For development and production assets, the expected future cash flow estimation is always based on a number of factors, variables and assumptions, the most important of which are estimates of reserves, future production profiles, commodity prices and costs. In most cases, the present value of future cash flows is most sensitive to estimates of future oil price and discount rates. A change in the modeled assumptions in isolation could materially change the recoverable amount. However, due to the interrelated nature of the assumptions, movements in any one variable can have an indirect impact on others and individual variables rarely change in isolation. Additional, management can be expected to respond to some movements, to mitigate downsides and take advantage of upsides, as circumstances allow. Consequently, it is impracticable to estimate the indirect impact that a change in one assumption has on other variables and therefore, on the extent of impairments under different sets of assumptions in subsequent reporting periods. In the event that future circumstances vary from these assumptions, the recoverable amount of the Group’s development and production assets could change materially and result in impairment losses or the reversal of previous impairment losses." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9216533215253907, + "doc_id": "57a42641628535414e26f3d6360727d4e1e07bd43211d7b27e4fcd2b02876097", + "edit_distance": 0.722972972972973, + "f1_score": 0.9562171628721543, + "meteor": 0.8956901717170357, + "precision": 0.9680851063829787, + "pred_md": "for a new energy future with greater natural gas usage and increased domestic oil production as two of its primary attributes, it is encouraging to see our political leadership finally grasp that natural gas stands alone as the only affordable, scalable and immediately available alternative to foreign oil and that U.S. oil production can be increased significantly in the years ahead.\n\nThe events of the past few months have unmistakably driven home the fact that it is insanity to rely on the Middle East to provide our economy's lifeline of oil. This should be especially obvious when one realizes that during the next 10 years, America will likely export at least another $4 trillion in national wealth to oil exporters around the world. Clearly, our country must demand from its leaders a new and more sustainable energy future.\n\nAdvancing technology for cleaner operations: solar panels at a West Texas well power telemetry systems that provide pumpers with real-time information on oil and water tank levels to alarm them when levels near capacity, preventing tank spills.\n\nThe good news, however, is that America can now secure a new energy future thanks to Chesapeake and a handful of other leading U.S. E&P companies that have reinvented the process of finding natural gas and oil during the past five years. In doing so, we have discovered twice the resources of natural gas in the U.S. that Saudi Arabia possesses in oil. Furthermore, these same few companies that led the unconventional natural gas revolution have in just the past two years also reinvented the way in which we can find large new oil resources onshore in the U.S. In fact, I believe the U.S. can possibly increase its production of oil from the current 5.8 million barrels per day by 30-50% during the next 5-10 years, thereby potentially reaching the President's 2025 goal of reducing foreign oil imports by 33%, 5-10 years earlier than hoped.\n\n2010 ANNUAL REPORT |\n\n15\n\nThe combination of these vast new discoveries of unconventional natural gas and liquids provides America with a unique future pathway toward greater energy independence, an industrial renaissance, economic rejuvenation and greater national security. I remain fully confident that the marketplace understands this and that over time the U.S. will more fully embrace and utilize clean, affordable, abundant American natural gas and increased domestic oil production as the best alternatives to burning environmentally challenged coal and expensive and dangerous foreign oil.\n\nThere is now a clear road ahead toward a more sustainable, affordable, dynamic and independent future if America embraces the remarkable gift of energy abundance that Chesapeake has helped discover in the U.S. You have my commitment, and the commitment of more than\n\nThe combination of these vast new discoveries of unconventional natural gas and liquids provides America with a unique future pathway toward greater energy independence, an industrial renaissance, economic rejuvenation and greater national security.\n\n10,000 other Chesapeake employees, that every day we are working hard to create shareholder value and a better future for our communities, our states and our country through the continued discovery and development of unconventional natural gas and liquids.\n\nBest regards,\n\nAubrey K. McClendon\n\nChairman and Chief Executive Officer April 15, 2011", + "recall": 0.9446366782006921, + "true_md": "2010 ANNUAL REPORT | 15\n\nfor a new energy future with greater natural gas usage and increased domestic oil production as two of its primary attributes, it is encouraging to see our political leadership finally grasp that natural gas stands alone as the only affordable, scalable and immediately available alternative to foreign oil and that U.S. oil production can be increased significantly in the years ahead. \n\nThe events of the past few months have unmistakably driven home the fact that it is insanity to rely on the Middle East to provide our econ- omy’s lifeline of oil. This should be especially obvious when one realizes that during the next 10 years, America will likely export at least another $4 trillion in national wealth to oil exporters around the world. Clearly, our country must demand from its leaders a new and more sustainable energy future. \n\nThe combination of these vast new discoveries of unconventional natural gas and liquids provides America with a unique future path- way toward greater energy independence, an industrial renaissance, economic rejuvenation and greater national security. I remain fully con- fident that the marketplace understands this and that over time the U.S. will more fully embrace and utilize clean, affordable, abundant American natural gas and increased domestic oil production as the best alterna- tives to burning environmentally challenged coal and expensive and dangerous foreign oil. \n\nThere is now a clear road ahead toward a more sustainable, afford- able, dynamic and independent future if America embraces the remark- able gift of energy abundance that Chesapeake has helped discover in the U.S. You have my commitment, and the commitment of more than \n\nThe combination of these vast new discoveries of unconventional natural gas and liquids provides America with a unique future path- way toward greater energy independence, an industrial renaissance, economic rejuvenation and greater national security.\n\nAdvancing technology for cleaner operations: solar panels at a West Texas well power telemetry systems that provide pumpers with real-time information on oil and water tank levels to alarm them when levels near capacity, preventing tank spills.\n\n10,000 other Chesapeake employees, that every day we are working hard to create shareholder value and a better future for our communi- ties, our states and our country through the continued discovery and development of unconventional natural gas and liquids.\n\nThe good news, however, is that America can now secure a new energy future thanks to Chesapeake and a handful of other leading U.S. E&P companies that have reinvented the process of finding natural gas and oil during the past five years. In doing so, we have discovered twice the resources of natural gas in the U.S. that Saudi Arabia possesses in oil. Furthermore, these same few companies that led the unconventional natural gas revolution have in just the past two years also reinvented the way in which we can find large new oil resources onshore in the U.S. In fact, I believe the U.S. can possibly increase its production of oil from the current 5.8 million barrels per day by 30–50% during the next 5–10 years, thereby potentially reaching the President’s 2025 goal of reducing foreign oil imports by 33%, 5–10 years earlier than hoped. \n\nBest regards,\n\nApril 15, 2011\n\nAubrey K. McClendon Chairman and Chief Executive Officer" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8632447383591769, + "doc_id": "dff33f8e2894ff55c2df61f3f62acfe19145fb54df2b37619c7fb72087d69bef", + "edit_distance": 0.4667651403249631, + "f1_score": 0.9457943925233646, + "meteor": 0.8172180953105179, + "precision": 0.9693486590038314, + "pred_md": "The Remuneration Committee engaged the services of the Godfrey Remuneration Group Pty Ltd during 2012 to review its remuneration practice revisions and to provide further validation in respect of both the executive short-term and long-term incentive plan design and standards. These recommendations covered the remuneration treatment of the Group's Non-Executive Directors and Key Management Personnel.\n\nUnder the terms of the engagement, the Godfrey Remuneration Group Pty Ltd provided remuneration recommendations as defined in section 9B of the Corporations Act 2001 and was paid $76,520 in financial year 2012 for these services. The Company did not pay Godfrey Remuneration Group Pty Ltd any further fees this financial year in relation to other services.\n\nThe Godfrey Remuneration Group Pty Ltd has confirmed that the above recommendations have been made free from undue influence by members of the Group's Key Management Personnel.\n\nThe following arrangements were implemented by the Remuneration Committee to ensure that the remuneration recommendations were free from undue influence:\n\n- 〉 The Godfrey Remuneration Group Pty Ltd was engaged by, and reported directly to, the Chair of the Remuneration Committee. The agreement for the provision of remuneration consulting services was executed by the Chair of the Remuneration Committee under delegated authority on behalf of the Board; and\n- 〉 Any remuneration recommendations by the Godfrey Remuneration Group Pty Ltd were made directly to the Chair of the Remuneration Committee.\n\nAs a consequence, the Board is satisfied that the recommendations were made free from undue influence from any members of the Group's Key Management Personnel.\n\n## Remuneration Reward Mix (based on the achievement of STI / LTI targets)\n\n## Executive director and key management personnel remuneration\n\nThe executive pay and reward framework is comprised of three components:\n\n- 〉 fixed remuneration including superannuation;\n- 〉 short-term performance incentives; and\n- 〉 long-term incentives through participation in the Executive Rights Plan.\n\n## Reward Mix\n\nThe above chart represents the remuneration reward mix for the various Key Management Personnel based on achievement of all stretch targets.\n\n## Fixed remuneration\n\nTotal fixed remuneration ('TFR') is structured as a total employment cost package, including base pay and superannuation. Base pay may be delivered as a mix of cash, statutory and salary sacrificed superannuation, and prescribed non-financial benefits, at the executive's discretion.\n\nExecutives are offered a competitive base pay. Base pay for senior executives is reviewed annually to ensure the executive's pay is competitive with the market. An executive's pay is also reviewed on promotion.\n\nIn addition to using the AON Hewitt / McDonald Survey (resources industry) Remuneration Report as an annual benchmarking tool and the Egan and Associates 'The KMP Report'; external remuneration consultants provide analysis and advice to ensure base pay is set to reflect the market for a comparable role. The 5th Edition of Egan and Associates 'The KMP Report' (August 2013) shows overall Non-Executive Directors' remuneration for Kingsgate to be below the average for ASX 101 - 200 peer group companies. Significantly, average Non-Executive Directors fee increases of 8.7% for the ASX 101 - 200 and 6.5% for the ASX 201 - 300 groups over the period compares to no increase in fees for Kingsgate Non - Executive Directors.\n\nThe Board annually reviews and determines the fixed remuneration for the CEO / Managing Director. The CEO / Managing Director does the same for his direct reports. The Executive Management group reviews and recommends fixed remuneration for other senior management, for the CEO / Managing Director's approval.\n\nThere are no guaranteed increases to fixed remuneration incorporated into any senior executives' agreements.\n\ncontinued\n\nDirectors' Report\n\nu", + "recall": 0.9233576642335767, + "true_md": "Directors’ Report 51\n\nDirectors’ Report\n\ncontinued u\n\nThe Remuneration Committee engaged the services of the Godfrey Remuneration Group Pty Ltd during 2012 to review its remuneration prac- tice revisions and to provide further validation in respect of both the executive short-term and long-term incentive plan design and standards. These recommendations covered the remunera- tion treatment of the Group’s Non-Executive Directors and Key Management Personnel.\n\nUnder the terms of the engagement, the Godfrey Remuneration Group Pty Ltd provided remuneration recommendations as defined in section 9B of the Corporations Act 2001 and was paid $76,520 in financial year 2012 for these services. The Company did not pay Godfrey Remuneration Group Pty Ltd any further fees this financial year in relation to other services.\n\nThe Godfrey Remuneration Group Pty Ltd has confirmed that the above recommendations have been made free from undue influence by members of the Group’s Key Management Personnel.\n\nThe following arrangements were implemented by the Remuneration Committee to ensure that the remuneration recommendations were free from undue influence:\n\nAs a consequence, the Board is satisfied that the recommendations were made free from undue influence from any members of the Group’s Key Management Personnel.\n\nThe executive pay and reward framework is comprised of three components:\n\nThe above chart represents the remuneration reward mix for the various Key Management Personnel based on achievement of all stretch targets.\n\nTotal fixed remuneration (“TFR”) is structured as a total employment cost package, including base pay and superannuation. Base pay may be delivered as a mix of cash, statutory and salary sacrificed superannuation, and prescribed non-financial benefits, at the executive’s discretion.\n\nExecutives are offered a competitive base pay. Base pay for senior executives is reviewed annu- ally to ensure the executive’s pay is competitive with the market. An executive’s pay is also reviewed on promotion. \n\nIn addition to using the AON Hewitt / McDonald Survey (resources industry) Remuneration Report as an annual benchmarking tool and the Egan and Associates ‘The KMP Report’; external remuneration consultants provide analysis and advice to ensure base pay is set to reflect the market for a comparable role. The 5th Edition of Egan and Associates ‘The KMP Report’ (August 2013) shows overall Non-Executive Directors’ remuneration for Kingsgate to be below the average for ASX 101 – 200 peer group compa- nies. Significantly, average Non-Executive Directors fee increases of 8.7% for the ASX 101 – 200 and 6.5% for the ASX 201 – 300 groups over the period compares to no increase in fees for Kingsgate Non – Executive Directors.\n\nThe Board annually reviews and determines the fixed remuneration for the CEO / Managing Director. The CEO / Managing Director does the same for his direct reports. The Executive Management group reviews and recommends fixed remuneration for other senior manage- ment, for the CEO / Managing Director’s approval.\n\nThere are no guaranteed increases to fixed remuneration incorporated into any senior executives’ agreements.\n\n- 〉 The Godfrey Remuneration Group Pty Ltd was engaged by, and reported directly to, the Chair of the Remuneration Committee. The agree- ment for the provision of remuneration consulting services was executed by the Chair of the Remuneration Committee under dele- gated authority on behalf of the Board; and\n\n- 〉 Any remuneration recommendations by the Godfrey Remuneration Group Pty Ltd were made directly to the Chair of the Remuneration Committee.\n\n- 〉 fixed remuneration including superannuation;\n\n- 〉 short-term performance incentives; and\n\n- 〉 long-term incentives through participation in the Executive Rights Plan.\n\n## Executive director and key management personnel remuneration\n\n## Reward Mix\n\n## Fixed remuneration\n\nRemuneration Reward Mix (based on the achievement of STI / LTI targets)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9304115785028084, + "doc_id": "5092cd93b4ecfd73998d2b4aeee8cf749b31e02cd6d10c29d075abce1e5aa46d", + "edit_distance": 0.07464788732394366, + "f1_score": 0.9787928221859706, + "meteor": 0.9493441601869289, + "precision": 0.9771986970684039, + "pred_md": "## Environmental Issues\n\nThe Group is committed to the environmentally sustainable development of its operations and, while the Group's operations are subject to significant environmental regulation under the laws of the states in which we operate and the United States of America, no notice of any breach has been received and the Directors believe no material breach of any environment regulations has occurred. The Company maintains strict internal performance and reporting guidelines to capture all spills and emissions. Additionally, a third party firm is used to conduct quarterly environmental inspections to ensure the company is meeting both internal and external standards.\n\nIn the Group's Oklahoma asset, significant company and regulatory scrutiny has been placed on seismic events in proximity to salt water disposal wells ('SWDs'). Prior to the development and operation of our SWDs, the company undertook a study of the state approved disposal zones and successfully drilled and completed its SWDs in state approved zones that accept sufficient volumes of water to meet the company's operational objectives while minimizing the potential risk of seismic events. During 2014, all of the Group's SWDs were reviewed and approved by the state regulatory agency.\n\nDuring 2014 the Group undertook a review of its operations in Texas and has identified two main opportunities to reduce its environmental impact: 1) water recycling and re-use for completion operations in the Eagle Ford; and 2) more efficient and less environmentally impactful treatment of hydrogen sulphide (H2S) from the company's natural gas production in the Eagle Ford. During 2015 the Company expects to implement operational changes to capitalize on these opportunities to reduce its environmental impact.\n\n## Health and Safety\n\nThe Company is committed to providing a best in class health and safety environment for its employees, contractors and communities with a zero-defect target. The Company tracks both company and company plus contractor incident rates. During 2014 the company had an Occupational Safety and Health Administration ('OSHA') Recordable Incident Rate ('ORIR') of 0.0 per 200,000 man hours and company plus contractor ORIR of 0.25 per 200,000 man hours.\n\nThe Company maintains a comprehensive safety program that includes annual training of employees and regular monitoring of employee and contractor safety certifications. The company uses a third party expert to conduct random safety audits of its key operational activities and implements any changes identified by these audits. During 2014 the Company's drilling operations achieved a 98% audit rating. The Company expects to conduct further random safety audits for both its drilling and completion operations in 2015.\n\nThe Company uses subcontractors and vendors ('Contractors') for execution of a significant portion of its operating activities. Prior to utilising the Contractors, the Company investigates the historical safety ratings of the Contractor utilizing the Contractor's Workers Compensation Experience Modification Ratio ('EMR'). Only contractors with EMRs below 1.0 are utilized unless executive exception is granted. The Company investigates the safety certifications and experience of key Contractor employees expected to work on the Company's assets. As part of the Company's policy all Contractors must provide written documentation that they will comply with the Company's comprehensive written Health, Safety and Environmental Plan.\n\nThe Company actively encourages its employees to participate in a variety of health and wellness programs, either self-directed or those sponsored by the Company. As a result, many employees utilize the Company's dedicated wellness centre to assist in achievement of their individual health and wellness goals. Additionally, in 2014, the Company sponsored a 30-day walking competition where company sponsored teams collectively walked 7.85 million steps or 3,925 miles with each participating employee walking an average of 3.25 miles per day.\n\n## Dividends\n\nNo dividends were declared or paid during the financial year. No recommendation for payment of dividends has been made.\n\n- 22 -", + "recall": 0.9803921568627451, + "true_md": "## Environmental Issues\n\nThe Group is committed to the environmentally sustainable development of its operations and, while the Group’s operations are subject to significant environmental regulation under the laws of the states in which we operate and the United States of America, no notice of any breach has been received and the Directors believe no material breach of any environment regulations has occurred. The Company maintains strict internal performance and reporting guidelines to capture all spills and emissions. Additionally, a third party firm is used to conduct quarterly environmental inspections to ensure the company is meeting both internal and external standards.\n\nIn the Group’s Oklahoma asset, significant company and regulatory scrutiny has been placed on seismic events in proximity to salt water disposal wells (“SWDs”). Prior to the development and operation of our SWDs, the company undertook a study of the state approved disposal zones and successfully drilled and completed its SWDs in state approved zones that accept sufficient volumes of water to meet the company’s operational objectives while minimizing the potential risk of seismic events. During 2014, all of the Group’s SWDs were reviewed and approved by the state regulatory agency. \n\nDuring 2014 the Group undertook a review of its operations in Texas and has identified two main opportunities to reduce its environmental impact: 1) water recycling and re-use for completion operations in the Eagle Ford; and 2) more efficient and less environmentally impactful treatment of hydrogen sulphide (H2S) from the company’s natural gas production in the Eagle Ford. During 2015 the Company expects to implement operational changes to capitalize on these opportunities to reduce its environmental impact.\n\nThe Company is committed to providing a best in class health and safety environment for its employees, contractors and communities with a zero-defect target. The Company tracks both company and company plus contractor incident rates. During 2014 the company had an Occupational Safety and Health Administration (“OSHA”) Recordable Incident Rate (“ORIR”) of 0.0 per 200,000 man hours and company plus contractor ORIR of 0.25 per 200,000 man hours.\n\nThe Company maintains a comprehensive safety program that includes annual training of employees and regular monitoring of employee and contractor safety certifications. The company uses a third party expert to conduct random safety audits of its key operational activities and implements any changes identified by these audits. During 2014 the Company’s drilling operations achieved a 98% audit rating. The Company expects to conduct further random safety audits for both its drilling and completion operations in 2015.\n\nThe Company uses subcontractors and vendors (“Contractors”) for execution of a significant portion of its operating activities. Prior to utilising the Contractors, the Company investigates the historical safety ratings of the Contractor utilizing the Contractor’s Workers Compensation Experience Modification Ratio (“EMR”). Only contractors with EMRs below 1.0 are utilized unless executive exception is granted. The Company investigates the safety certifications and experience of key Contractor employees expected to work on the Company’s assets. As part of the Company’s policy all Contractors must provide written documentation that they will comply with the Company’s comprehensive written Health, Safety and Environmental Plan. \n\nThe Company actively encourages its employees to participate in a variety of health and wellness programs, either self-directed or those sponsored by the Company. As a result, many employees utilize the Company’s dedicated wellness centre to assist in achievement of their individual health and wellness goals. Additionally, in 2014, the Company sponsored a 30-day walking competition where company sponsored teams collectively walked 7.85 million steps or 3,925 miles with each participating employee walking an average of 3.25 miles per day. \n\nNo dividends were declared or paid during the financial year. No recommendation for payment of dividends has been made. \n\n## Dividends\n\n## Health and Safety\n\n- 22 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.25245707588616273, + "doc_id": "bc57f871e022f7c7e5ce515c9896f4dda2d3f570cdfe12d5792236286e805db5", + "edit_distance": 0.6144578313253012, + "f1_score": 0.8040540540540541, + "meteor": 0.8438043012643961, + "precision": 0.6878612716763006, + "pred_md": "Grant date .......................................................................\n\nCondition for vesting .......................................................\n\nRequisite service period ...................................................\n\nExercise period ................................................................\n\nJune 28, 2001\n\nJune 27, 2002\n\nJune 27, 2003\n\nJune 29, 2004\n\nJune 29, 2005\n\nJune 29, 2006\n\nDirectors and\n\nemployees\n\n45\n\nDirectors and\n\nemployees\n\n44\n\nNumber of stock options ................................................. Common shares Common shares\n\n238,000\n\n234,000\n\nJuly 31, 2001\n\nJuly 31, 2002\n\nJuly 31, 2003\n\nJuly 30, 2004\n\nJuly 29, 2005\n\nJuly 31, 2006\n\nN.A.\n\nN.A.\n\nN.A.\n\nN.A.\n\nN.A.\n\nN.A.\n\nN.A.\n\nN.A.\n\nN.A.\n\nN.A.\n\nN.A.\n\nN.A.\n\nJune 29, 2003\n\nto June 28,\n\n2011\n\nJune 28, 2004\n\nto June 27,\n\n2012\n\nJune 28, 2005\n\nto June 27,\n\n2013\n\nJune 30, 2006\n\nto June 29,\n\n2014\n\nJune 30, 2007\n\nto June 29,\n\n2015\n\nJune 30, 2008\n\nto June 29,\n\n2016\n\nSMFG 2011\n\nDirectors and\n\nemployees\n\n65\n\nDirectors and\n\nemployees\n\n174\n\nDirectors and\n\nemployees\n\n183\n\nCommon shares Common shares Common shares Common shares\n\n306,000\n\n399,000\n\n464,000\n\n162,000\n\nDirectors\n\n9\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n## (c) Valuation technique used for valuating fair value of stock options\n\nStock options granted in the fiscal year ended March 31, 2011 were valued using the Black-Scholes option pricing model and the principal parameters were as follows:\n\n- *1 Expected volatility is calculated based on the closing price of common shares of SMFG on each trading day in the 4 years between August 14, 2006 and August 13, 2010.\n\n*2\n\nThe average expected life could not be estimated rationally due to insufficient amount of data.\n\nTherefore, it was estimated based on average assumption periods of directors of SMFG and SMBC.\n\n*3 Expected dividends are based on the actual dividends on common stock for the fiscal year ended March 31, 2011.\n\n*4 Japanese government bond yield corresponding to the average expected life.\n\n## (d) Method of estimating number of stock options vested\n\nOnly the actual number of forfeited stock options is reflected because it is difficult to rationally estimate the actual number of stock options that will be forfeited in the future.\n\n## (2) Kansai Urban Banking Corporation\n\n## (a) Outline of stock options\n\nDate of resolution\n\nTitle and number of grantees ...........................................\n\nSMFG\n\n123", + "recall": 0.967479674796748, + "true_md": "SMFG Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n- (c) Valuation technique used for valuating fair value of stock options \n\nStock options granted in the fiscal year ended March 31, 2011 were valued using the Black-Scholes option pricing model and the principal parameters were as follows:\n\n- *1 Expected volatility is calculated based on the closing price of common shares of SMFG on each trading day in the 4 years between August 14, 2006 and August 13, 2010.\n\n- *2 The average expected life could not be estimated rationally due to insufficient amount of data.\n\n- $^{*3}$ Expected dividends are based on the actual dividends on common stock for the fiscal year ended March 31, 2011.\n\n- $^{*4}$ Japanese government bond yield corresponding to the average expected life.\n\nTherefore, it was estimated based on average assumption periods of directors of SMFG and SMBC.\n\nOnly the actual number of forfeited stock options is reflected because it is difficult to rationally estimate the actual number of stock options that will be forfeited in the future. \n\n- (d) Method of estimating number of stock options vested \n\n- (2) Kansai Urban Banking Corporation \n\n- (a) Outline of stock options \n\nSMFG 2011 123" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8935712685818812, + "doc_id": "a5a538a8db9a9213e6ae3cb9997fc779892165346915edf4ff383b20e898140e", + "edit_distance": 0.9257688229056203, + "f1_score": 0.9512195121951219, + "meteor": 0.6204182562580253, + "precision": 0.9696132596685083, + "pred_md": "Moreover, the Credit Portfolio Management Department within the Credit & Investment Planning Department works to stabilize SMBC's overall credit portfolio through market transactions such as loan securitization. In the Corporate Services Unit, the Corporate Research Department analyzes industries as well as investigates the borrower's business situation to detect early signs of problems. The Credit Administration Department is responsible for formulating and implementing measures to reduce SMBC's exposures mainly to borrowers classified as potentially bankrupt or lower.\n\nThe Credit Departments of Consumer Banking Unit, Middle Market Banking Unit and other business units play a central role in credit screening and managing their units' credit portfolios. Each business unit establishes its credit limits based on the baseline amounts for each borrower credit grading category. Borrowers or loans perceived to have high credit risk undergo intensive evaluation and administration by the unit's Credit Department.\n\nMoreover, the Credit Risk Committee, a consultative body straddling the business units, rounds out SMBC's oversight system for undertaking flexible and efficient control of credit risk and ensuring the overall soundness of the bank's loan operations.\n\nIn addition to these, the Internal Audit Unit, operating independently from the business units, audits asset quality, credit grading accuracy, self-assessment, and appropriateness of credit risk management system, and reports the results directly to the Board of Directors and the Management Committee.\n\n- ii. Method of credit risk management\n\nSMBC properly manages the credit risk inherent in individual loans and the entire portfolio by assessing and quantifying the credit risk of each borrower/ loan using the internal rating system. In addition to management of individual loans through credit screening and monitoring, it manages the credit portfolio as described below in order to secure and improve the credit portfolio's soundness and medium-term profitability.\n\n- - Appropriate risk-taking within the scope of capital To limit credit risks to a permissible level relative to capital, 'credit risk capital limit' has been established for internal control purposes. Under this limit, a general guideline and designated guidelines for real estate finance, investment in funds and securitization products, etc. are set for each business unit. Regular monitoring is conducted to ensure that these guidelines are being followed.\n- - Controlling concentration risk\n\nConcentration of risk in specific borrowers/industries/ countries could severely reduce a bank's capital should it materialize. SMBC therefore implements measures to prevent concentration of credit risk in specific industries, and control large exposures to individual borrowers by setting guidelines for maximum loan amounts and conducting thorough loan reviews. To\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nmanage country risk, SMBC also has credit limit guidelines based on each country's creditworthiness.\n\n- - Greater understanding of actual corporate conditions and balancing returns and risks\n\nSMBC runs credit operations on the basic principle of thoroughly understanding actual corporate conditions and gaining profit commensurate with the level of credit risk entailed, and makes every effort to improve profit at after-cost (credit cost, capital cost and overhead) level.\n\n- - Reduction and prevention of non-performing loans On non-performing loans and potential non-performing loans, SMBC carries out loan reviews to clarify credit policies and action plans, enabling it to swiftly implement measures to prevent deterioration of borrowers' business situations, support business recoveries, collect on loans, and enhance loan security.\n\n- Approaches to active portfolio management SMBC is committed to agile portfolio management, such as using credit derivatives and selling loan claims, to stabilize its credit portfolio.\n\nIn regards to financial instruments such as investments in certain funds, securitized products and credit derivatives that indirectly retain risks related to assets such as corporate bonds and loan claims (underlying assets), such instruments entail market and liquidity risks in addition to credit risk, since such instruments are traded on the market. Credit risk management for these instruments involving detailed analysis and evaluation of characteristics of underlying assets is performed while market risk is comprehensively managed within the framework for managing market and liquidity risks. Moreover, guidelines have been established based on the characteristics of each type of risk.\n\nIn regards to credit risk of derivative transactions, the potential exposure based on the market price is regularly calculated and properly managed. When the counterparty is a financial institution with whom SMBC frequently conducts derivative transactions, measures such as a close-out netting provision, which provide that offsetting credit exposures between the 2 parties will be combined into a single net payment from one party to the other in case of bankruptcy or other default event, are implemented to reduce credit risk.\n\n- (ii) Management of market and liquidity risks SMFG manages market and liquidity risks by setting allowable risk limits; ensuring the transparency of the risk management process; and clearly separating frontoffice, middle-office, and back-office operations for a highly efficient system of mutual checks and balances. i. Market and liquidity risk management systems At SMBC, important matters such as basic policies for managing market and liquidity risks and risk management framework are determined by the Management Committee and then approved by the Board of Directors.\n\nThe aforementioned Corporate Risk Management\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n99\n\nSMFG", + "recall": 0.9335106382978723, + "true_md": "Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nSMFG\n\nmanage country risk, SMBC also has credit limit guidelines based on each country’s creditworthiness. — Greater understanding of actual corporate condi- tions and balancing returns and risks SMBC runs credit operations on the basic principle of thoroughly understanding actual corporate conditions and gaining profit commensurate with the level of credit risk entailed, and makes every effort to improve profit at after-cost (credit cost, capital cost and overhead) level.\n\n— Reduction and prevention of non-performing loans On non-performing loans and potential non-performing loans, SMBC carries out loan reviews to clarify credit policies and action plans, enabling it to swiftly imple- ment measures to prevent deterioration of borrowers’ business situations, support business recoveries, collect on loans, and enhance loan security.\n\n— Approaches to active portfolio management SMBC is committed to agile portfolio management, such as using credit derivatives and selling loan claims, to stabilize its credit portfolio.\n\nIn regards to financial instruments such as invest- ments in certain funds, securitized products and credit derivatives that indirectly retain risks related to assets such as corporate bonds and loan claims (underlying assets), such instruments entail market and liquidity risks in addition to credit risk, since such instruments are traded on the market. Credit risk management for these instruments involving detailed analysis and evalu- ation of characteristics of underlying assets is performed while market risk is comprehensively managed within the framework for managing market and liquidity risks. Moreover, guidelines have been established based on the characteristics of each type of risk. \n\nIn regards to credit risk of derivative transactions, the potential exposure based on the market price is regularly calculated and properly managed. When the counterparty is a financial institution with whom SMBC frequently conducts derivative transactions, measures such as a close-out netting provision, which provide that offsetting credit exposures between the 2 parties will be combined into a single net payment from one party to the other in case of bankruptcy or other default event, are implemented to reduce credit risk.\n\nSMFG manages market and liquidity risks by setting allowable risk limits; ensuring the transparency of the risk management process; and clearly separating front- office, middle-office, and back-office operations for a highly efficient system of mutual checks and balances. i. Market and liquidity risk management systems At SMBC, important matters such as basic policies for managing market and liquidity risks and risk manage- ment framework are determined by the Management Committee and then approved by the Board of Directors. \n\nThe aforementioned Corporate Risk Management \n\nConcentration of risk in specific borrowers/industries/ countries could severely reduce a bank’s capital should it materialize. SMBC therefore implements measures to prevent concentration of credit risk in specific industries, and control large exposures to individual borrowers by setting guidelines for maximum loan amounts and conducting thorough loan reviews. To \n\n— Controlling concentration risk\n\n— Appropriate risk-taking within the scope of capital To limit credit risks to a permissible level relative to capital, “credit risk capital limit” has been established for internal control purposes. Under this limit, a general guideline and designated guidelines for real estate finance, investment in funds and securitization products, etc. are set for each business unit. Regular monitoring is conducted to ensure that these guidelines are being followed.\n\n## (ii) Management of market and liquidity risks\n\nSMFG 2011 99\n\nIn addition to these, the Internal Audit Unit, operat- ing independently from the business units, audits asset quality, credit grading accuracy, self-assessment, and appropriateness of credit risk management system, and reports the results directly to the Board of Directors and the Management Committee. ii. Method of credit risk management\n\nSMBC properly manages the credit risk inherent in individual loans and the entire portfolio by assessing and quantifying the credit risk of each borrower/ loan using the internal rating system. In addition to management of individual loans through credit screen- ing and monitoring, it manages the credit portfolio as described below in order to secure and improve the credit portfolio’s soundness and medium-term profitability.\n\nMoreover, the Credit Risk Committee, a consultative body straddling the business units, rounds out SMBC’s oversight system for undertaking flexible and efficient control of credit risk and ensuring the overall soundness of the bank’s loan operations.\n\nThe Credit Departments of Consumer Banking Unit, Middle Market Banking Unit and other business units play a central role in credit screening and managing their units’ credit portfolios. Each business unit estab- lishes its credit limits based on the baseline amounts for each borrower credit grading category. Borrowers or loans perceived to have high credit risk undergo intensive evaluation and administration by the unit’s Credit Department.\n\nMoreover, the Credit Portfolio Management Department within the Credit & Investment Planning Department works to stabilize SMBC’s overall credit portfolio through market transactions such as loan securitization. In the Corporate Services Unit, the Corporate Research Department analyzes industries as well as investigates the borrower’s business situ- ation to detect early signs of problems. The Credit Administration Department is responsible for formu- lating and implementing measures to reduce SMBC’s exposures mainly to borrowers classified as potentially bankrupt or lower." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8013644467707304, + "doc_id": "9b325bf950e6cc8f33ed74665200345e917483fb05c68ecce5f2477ee05324dc", + "edit_distance": 0.3943089430894309, + "f1_score": 0.9315068493150686, + "meteor": 0.8724981159510237, + "precision": 0.9784172661870504, + "pred_md": "## DEAR\n\n## CUSTOMERS, EMPLOYEES AND SHAREHOLDERS,\n\nFor 114 years, our focus has been on our customers. We have been most successful when we view our business through their eyes. In today's rapidly changing retail landscape, this approach has never been more important, so our strategy remains squarely focused on serving\n\ncustomers on their terms. Knowing customers increasingly desire an experience that's both personalized and convenient, we continue to make investments that further integrate our store and online experience to enable our customers to shop seamlessly any way they choose.\n\nA RECORD\n\nIN TOTAL COMPANY SALES. WITH SALES GROWTH OF 7.8% AND COMPARABLE SALES INCREASE OF 4%, WE BEAT OUR OWN EXPECTATIONS.\n\nNEARLY\n\nNEW CUSTOMERS SHOPPED AT NORDSTROM RACK-THAT'S MORE THAN AT ANY OTHER CHANNEL.\n\n27\n\nNEW NORDSTROM RACK STORES. PLUS, RACK SALES INCREASED 17% AND RACK COMPARABLE SALES GAINED 3.8%.\n\nMORE THAN\n\n## 1 million\n\nSTORE VISITS FROM CUSTOMERS RETURNING THEIR HAUTELOOK AND NORDSTROMRACK.COM PURCHASES TO NORDSTROM RACK.\n\nALMOST\n\nIN NORDSTROM.COM SALES. THAT'S MORE THAN DOUBLE OUR SALES\n\nFROM JUST THREE YEARS AGO.\n\nMORE THAN\n\n## 1 million\n\nNEW MEMBERS JOINED OUR NORDSTROM REWARDS™ PROGRAM FOR THE THIRD YEAR IN A ROW.", + "recall": 0.8888888888888888, + "true_md": "## DEAR CUSTOMERS, EMPLOYEES AND SHAREHOLDERS,\n\nFor 114 years, our focus has been on our customers. We have been most successful when we view our business through their eyes. In today’s rapidly changing retail landscape, this approach has never been more important, so our strategy remains squarely focused on serving \n\ncustomers on their terms. Knowing customers increasingly desire an experience that’s both personalized and convenient, we continue to make investments that further integrate our store and online experience to enable our customers to shop seamlessly any way they choose.\n\n$13.1 billion IN TOTAL COMPANY SALES. WITH SALES GROWTH OF 7.8% AND COMPARABLE SALES INCREASE OF 4%, WE BEAT OUR OWN EXPECTATIONS. A RECORD\n\n1 million STORE VISITS FROM CUSTOMERS RETURNING THEIR HAUTELOOK AND NORDSTROMRACK.COM PURCHASES TO NORDSTROM RACK. MORE THAN\n\n4 million NEW CUSTOMERS SHOPPED AT NORDSTROM RACKGLYPH<emdash.case>THAT’S MORE THAN AT ANY OTHER CHANNEL. NEARLY\n\nIN NORDSTROM.COM SALES. THAT’S MORE THAN DOUBLE OUR SALES FROM JUST THREE YEARS AGO. $2 billion ALMOST\n\n27 $^{NEW NORDSTROM RACK STORES.}$ PLUS, RACK SALES INCREASED 17% AND RACK COMPARABLE SALES GAINED 3.8%.\n\n1 million NEW MEMBERS JOINED OUR NORDSTROM REWARDS™ PROGRAM FOR THE THIRD YEAR IN A ROW. MORE THAN\n\n3" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8713366274599341, + "doc_id": "36c9ccee5f81559bda029f2401bdb35afab07f04be1f0bb3c8ffa37861598aaa", + "edit_distance": 0.5702702702702702, + "f1_score": 0.9720279720279722, + "meteor": 0.8516573921230083, + "precision": 0.9586206896551724, + "pred_md": "SMFG\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n## 5. Additional information\n\nMFG has applied 'Accounting Standard for Disclosures about Segments of an Enterprise and Related Information' (ASBJ Statement S No. 17, issued on March 27, 2009) and 'Guidance on the Accounting Standard for Disclosures about Segments of an Enterprise and Related Information' (ASBJ Guidance No. 20, issued on March 21, 2008) from the fiscal year ended March 31, 2011.\n\n## 6. Related information\n\n## (1) Business segment information\n\nNotes: 1. Ordinary income is presented as a counterpart of sales of companies in other industries.\n\n2. Ordinary income represents total income excluding gains on disposal of fixed assets, gains on recoveries of written-off claims and other extraordinary gains.\n\n(2) Geographic segment information (a) Ordinary income\n\nNotes: 1. Ordinary income is presented as a counterpart of sales of companies in other industries.\n\n2. Ordinary income from transactions by SMFG and its domestic consolidated banking subsidiaries (excluding overseas branches) and other domestic consolidated subsidiaries is categorized as Japan. Ordinary income from transactions by overseas branches of domestic consolidated banking subsidiaries and overseas consolidated subsidiaries is categorized as The Americas, Europe and Middle East, or Asia and Oceania, based on their locations and in consideration of their geographic proximity and other factors.\n\n- 3. The Americas includes the United States, Brazil, Canada and others; Europe and Middle East includes the United Kingdom, Germany, France and others; Asia and Oceania includes China, Singapore, Australia and others except Japan.\n\n4. Ordinary income represents total income excluding gains on disposal of fixed assets, gains on recoveries of written-off claims and other extraordinary gains.\n\n## (b) Tangible fixed assets\n\n## (3) Information by major customer\n\nThere are no major customers individually accounting for 10% or more of ordinary income.\n\n- 7. Information on losses on impairment of fixed assets by reportable segment\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n128", + "recall": 0.9858156028368794, + "true_md": "Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nSMFG\n\nSMFG 2011 128\n\n- 5. Additional information\n\n- 6. Related information\n\n- (1) Business segment information\n\n- (2) Geographic segment information\n\n- (a) Ordinary income\n\n- (b) Tangible fixed assets\n\n- (3) Information by major customer\n\n- 7. Information on losses on impairment of fixed assets by reportable segment\n\nThere are no major customers individually accounting for 10% or more of ordinary income.\n\nNotes: 1. Ordinary income is presented as a counterpart of sales of companies in other industries.\n\nNotes: 1. Ordinary income is presented as a counterpart of sales of companies in other industries.\n\n SMFG has applied “Accounting Standard for Disclosures about Segments of an Enterprise and Related Information” (ASBJ Statement No. 17, issued on March 27, 2009) and “Guidance on the Accounting Standard for Disclosures about Segments of an Enterprise and Related Information” (ASBJ Guidance No. 20, issued on March 21, 2008) from the fiscal year ended March 31, 2011.\n\n- 2. Ordinary income from transactions by SMFG and its domestic consolidated banking subsidiaries (excluding overseas branches) and other domestic consolidated subsidiaries is categorized as Japan. Ordinary income from transactions by overseas branches of domestic consolidated banking subsidiaries and overseas consolidated subsidiaries is categorized as The Americas, Europe and Middle East, or Asia and Oceania, based on their locations and in consideration of their geographic proximity and other factors.\n\n- 3. The Americas includes the United States, Brazil, Canada and others; Europe and Middle East includes the United Kingdom, Germany, France and others; Asia and Oceania includes China, Singapore, Australia and others except Japan.\n\n2. Ordinary income represents total income excluding gains on disposal of fixed assets, gains on recoveries of written-off claims and other extraordinary gains.\n\n4. Ordinary income represents total income excluding gains on disposal of fixed assets, gains on recoveries of written-off claims and other extraordinary gains." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "77b1fb06f8cf0444c0f3482e1528980b98dbfdfa515c515f510c47668090ea19", + "edit_distance": 0.92, + "f1_score": 0.18604651162790697, + "meteor": 0.4099893162393163, + "precision": 0.10256410256410256, + "pred_md": "FULL-PRICE\n\nOFF-PRICE\n\nSTORES\n\nONLINE\n\n## IT'S ALL ABOUT OUR CUSTOMER\n\nCUSTOMERS INCREASINGLY EXPECT A PERSONALIZED EXPERIENCE THAT MERGES THE RICHNESS OF STORES WITH THE CONVENIENCE OF ONLINE. WE'RE UNIQUELY POSITIONED TO CREATE THIS EXPERIENCE WITH OUR FOCUS ON SERVICE, PRODUCT AND CAPABILITIES.\n\nSTORES\n\nONLINE", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "ONLINE\n\nSTORES\n\nFULL-PRICE\n\nOFF-PRICE\n\nONLINE\n\nSTORES" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9569726062204452, + "doc_id": "7d93f7205653a61db94da2a01c72bbea072541593ce47379ffc1b5813c78da8f", + "edit_distance": 0.08683473389355742, + "f1_score": 0.9947826086956522, + "meteor": 0.960013000723489, + "precision": 0.9965156794425087, + "pred_md": "## Financial Position\n\nIn May 2014, the borrowing capacity under our credit facilities increased from an aggregate of $63 million to $135 million. The increase in the borrowing capacity was driven by the significant uplift of the Company's proved oil and gas reserves as at 31 December 2013. In conjunction with the increase in the Company's borrowing capacity, the Company expanded the syndicate of banks under the Senior Credit Facility. Bank of America Merrill Lynch and the Bank of Nova Scotia have now joined the bank group which is led by Wells Fargo.\n\nIn July 2014, the borrowing capacity increased an additional net $10 million, to $145 million, after taking into consideration the removal of proved oil and gas reserves associated with the DJ and Williston Basin dispositions and the development of proved oil and gas reserves in the Eagle Ford Formation.\n\nAt 31 December 2014, the Company had $130 million outstanding under our credit facilities and $15 million available under our borrowing capacity. Ending cash at 31 December 2014 was $69.2 million.\n\n## Cashflow\n\nCash provided by operating activities for the year ended 31 December 2014 increased 104.5% to $128.1 million compared to the prior year. This increase was primarily due to receipts from sales increasing $85.7 million, or 101.2%, to $170.4 million, while keeping payments to suppliers and employees relatively stable with an increase of $8.2 million, or 37.7%, to $30.0 million. See Review of Operations for more information.\n\nCash used in investing activities for the year ended 31 December 2014 increased $158.9 million, or 96.7%, to $323.2 million. This increase is due to successful implementation of the Company's strategy to develop and grow the reserves from our high working interest, repeatable resource plays, primarily in the Eagle Ford. Due to funding available to the Company through asset sales, capital raises and credit facilities, the Company was able to accelerate its 2015 drilling program into 2014. However, due to the reduction in crude oil prices in the fourth quarter of 2014 and continuing into early 2015, the Company will scale back its drilling program to concentrate on limited drilling obligations to hold Eagle Ford acreage during the 2015 year.\n\nCash provided by financing activities for the year ended 31 December 2014 increased $123.1 million, or 277.0%, to $167.6 million. This increase is a result of the increased availability and draws under the Company's credit facilities and proceeds received in a private placement of shares. In February 2014, the Company completed a private placement in which we sold 84.2 million ordinary shares at A$0.95 per share, resulting in net proceeds of approximately $68.4 million. The first tranche of 63.7 million shares was issued in March 2014 and the second tranche of 20.5 million shares was issued in April 2014.\n\n## Matters Subsequent to the End of the Financial Year\n\nSubsequent to 31 December 2014, an additional $13.9 million was drawn-down the credit facilities, bringing total outstanding debt to $143.9 million, with undrawn funds of $1.1 million.\n\nIn January 2015, the company acquired three leases totalling approximately 14,180 net acres in the Eagle Ford for approximately $13.4 million.\n\n## Future Developments, Prospects and Business Strategies\n\nThe Group's business strategies and prospects for growth in future financial years are presently concentrated on growing the value of the Group's current resource plays through direct leasing from mineral owners, small acquisitions of producing properties, drilling inventory within the Group's current balance sheet capabilities, and development of the Group's current acreage. Further information on likely development in the operations of the Group and expected results of operations has not been included because the Directors believe it would result in unreasonable prejudice to the Group.\n\n- 21 -", + "recall": 0.9930555555555556, + "true_md": "## Financial Position\n\n## Cashflow\n\n## Matters Subsequent to the End of the Financial Year\n\n## Future Developments, Prospects and Business Strategies\n\nIn May 2014, the borrowing capacity under our credit facilities increased from an aggregate of $63 million to $135 million. The increase in the borrowing capacity was driven by the significant uplift of the Company’s proved oil and gas reserves as at 31 December 2013. In conjunction with the increase in the Company’s borrowing capacity, the Company expanded the syndicate of banks under the Senior Credit Facility. Bank of America Merrill Lynch and the Bank of Nova Scotia have now joined the bank group which is led by Wells Fargo. \n\nIn July 2014, the borrowing capacity increased an additional net $10 million, to $145 million, after taking into consideration the removal of proved oil and gas reserves associated with the DJ and Williston Basin dispositions and the development of proved oil and gas reserves in the Eagle Ford Formation.\n\nAt 31 December 2014, the Company had $130 million outstanding under our credit facilities and $15 million available under our borrowing capacity. Ending cash at 31 December 2014 was $69.2 million. \n\nCash provided by operating activities for the year ended 31 December 2014 increased 104.5% to $128.1 million compared to the prior year. This increase was primarily due to receipts from sales increasing $85.7 million, or 101.2%, to $170.4 million, while keeping payments to suppliers and employees relatively stable with an increase of $8.2 million, or 37.7%, to $30.0 million. See Review of Operations for more information. \n\nCash used in investing activities for the year ended 31 December 2014 increased $158.9 million, or 96.7%, to $323.2 million. This increase is due to successful implementation of the Company’s strategy to develop and grow the reserves from our high working interest, repeatable resource plays, primarily in the Eagle Ford. Due to funding available to the Company through asset sales, capital raises and credit facilities, the Company was able to accelerate its 2015 drilling program into 2014. However, due to the reduction in crude oil prices in the fourth quarter of 2014 and continuing into early 2015, the Company will scale back its drilling program to concentrate on limited drilling obligations to hold Eagle Ford acreage during the 2015 year.\n\nCash provided by financing activities for the year ended 31 December 2014 increased $123.1 million, or 277.0%, to $167.6 million. This increase is a result of the increased availability and draws under the Company’s credit facilities and proceeds received in a private placement of shares. In February 2014, the Company completed a private placement in which we sold 84.2 million ordinary shares at A$0.95 per share, resulting in net proceeds of approximately $68.4 million. The first tranche of 63.7 million shares was issued in March 2014 and the second tranche of 20.5 million shares was issued in April 2014. \n\nSubsequent to 31 December 2014, an additional $13.9 million was drawn-down the credit facilities, bringing total outstanding debt to $143.9 million, with undrawn funds of $1.1 million.\n\nIn January 2015, the company acquired three leases totalling approximately 14,180 net acres in the Eagle Ford for approximately $13.4 million. \n\nThe Group’s business strategies and prospects for growth in future financial years are presently concentrated on growing the value of the Group’s current resource plays through direct leasing from mineral owners, small acquisitions of producing properties, drilling inventory within the Group’s current balance sheet capabilities, and development of the Group’s current acreage. Further information on likely development in the operations of the Group and expected results of operations has not been included because the Directors believe it would result in unreasonable prejudice to the Group. \n\n- 21 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "7a3772096a57711ee047cf88106d104611bb338feb3dc967b78e34315fc8f743", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999901289163524, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## Consolidated Statements of Comprehensive Income\n\n(In millions of Canadian dollars)\n\nThe accompanying notes are an integral part of the consolidated financial statements.\n\n90\n\nROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## Consolidated Statements of Comprehensive Income\n\n(In millions of Canadian dollars)\n\nThe accompanying notes are an integral part of the consolidated financial statements.\n\n90 ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.847766700804661, + "doc_id": "ffe949aee0067d7064d477ab0cafc99faaa9fc90086b9a5199a4b3b96682a63b", + "edit_distance": 0.15693430656934307, + "f1_score": 0.9285714285714286, + "meteor": 0.9162291331522381, + "precision": 0.9381443298969072, + "pred_md": "SMBC\n\nIncome Analysis (Consolidated)\n\n## Overseas Operations\n\nNotes: 1. Overseas operations comprise the operations of SMBC's overseas branches and its overseas consolidated subsidiaries.\n\n- 2. In principle, average balances are calculated by using daily balances. However, some consolidated subsidiaries use weekly, monthly or quarterly balances instead.\n- 3. 'Interest-earning assets' are shown after deduction of the average balance of noninterest-earning deposits (2011, ¥103,430 million; 2010, ¥156,324 million).\n\n## Total of Domestic and Overseas Operations\n\n- Notes: 1. The figures above comprise totals for domestic and overseas operations after intersegment eliminations.\n- 2. In principle, average balances are calculated by using daily balances. However, some consolidated subsidiaries use weekly, monthly or quarterly balances instead.\n- 3. 'Interest-earning assets' are shown after deduction of the average balance of noninterest-earning deposits (2011, ¥1,239,571 million; 2010, ¥1,103,197 million).\n- 4. Income and expenses resulting from money held in trust are included in 'Other income' and 'Other expenses.' Therefore, 'Interest-earning assets' are shown after deduction of the average balance of money held in trust (2011, ¥18,676 million; 2010, ¥12,392 million). 'Interest-bearing liabilities' are shown after deduction of amounts equivalent to the average balance of money held in trust (2011, ¥18,676 million; 2010, ¥12,392 million) and corresponding interest (2011, ¥16 million; 2010, ¥20 million).\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n156", + "recall": 0.9191919191919192, + "true_md": "SMBC Income Analysis (Consolidated)\n\n## Overseas Operations\n\n## Total of Domestic and Overseas Operations\n\nNotes: 1. Overseas operations comprise the operations of SMBC’s overseas branches and its overseas consolidated subsidiaries.\n\n2. In principle, average balances are calculated by using daily balances. However, some consolidated subsidiaries use weekly, monthly or quarterly balances instead.\n\n3. “Interest-earning assets” are shown after deduction of the average balance of noninterest-earning deposits (2011, ¥103,430 million; 2010, ¥156,324 million).\n\nNotes: 1. The figures above comprise totals for domestic and overseas operations after intersegment eliminations.\n\n2. In principle, average balances are calculated by using daily balances. However, some consolidated subsidiaries use weekly, monthly or quarterly balances instead.\n\n3. “Interest-earning assets” are shown after deduction of the average balance of noninterest-earning deposits (2011, ¥1,239,571 million; 2010, ¥1,103,197 million).\n\n4. Income and expenses resulting from money held in trust are included in “Other income” and “Other expenses.” Therefore, “Interest-earning assets” are shown after deduction of the average balance of money held in trust (2011, ¥18,676 million; 2010, ¥12,392 million). “Interest-bearing liabilities” are shown after deduction of amounts equivalent to the average balance of money held in trust (2011, ¥18,676 million; 2010, ¥12,392 million) and corresponding interest (2011, ¥16 million; 2010, ¥20 million).\n\nSMFG 2011 156" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9160382689042366, + "doc_id": "88ece6b0297ec1402dbcf76f26c8362d102a3228fc58ecfbf230b0a4e5d37500", + "edit_distance": 0.5581395348837209, + "f1_score": 0.9850746268656717, + "meteor": 0.9464870539120073, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## 8. Intangible Fixed Assets\n\nIntangible fixed assets at March 31, 2011 and 2010 consisted of the following:\n\n## 9. Assets Pledged as Collateral\n\nAssets pledged as collateral at March 31, 2011 and 2010 consisted of the following:\n\nIn addition to the assets presented above, the following assets were pledged as collateral for cash settlements, variation margins of futures market transactions and certain other purposes at March 31, 2011 and 2010:\n\nAt March 31, 2011, other assets included surety deposits of ¥119,299 million ($1,435 million), variation margins of futures market transactions of ¥18,029 million ($217 million) and other variation margins of ¥84,382 million ($1,015 million). At March 31, 2010, other assets included surety deposits of ¥102,085 million, variation margins of futures market transactions of ¥8,457 million and other variation margins of ¥83,768 million.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n85\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nSMFG", + "recall": 0.9705882352941176, + "true_md": "SMFG\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n## 8. Intangible Fixed Assets\n\n## 9. Assets Pledged as Collateral\n\nIntangible fixed assets at March 31, 2011 and 2010 consisted of the following:\n\nAssets pledged as collateral at March 31, 2011 and 2010 consisted of the following:\n\nAt March 31, 2011, other assets included surety deposits of ¥119,299 million ($1,435 million), variation margins of futures market transac- tions of ¥18,029 million ($217 million) and other variation margins of ¥84,382 million ($1,015 million). At March 31, 2010, other assets included surety deposits of ¥102,085 million, variation margins of futures market transactions of ¥8,457 million and other variation margins of ¥83,768 million.\n\nIn addition to the assets presented above, the following assets were pledged as collateral for cash settlements, variation margins of futures market transactions and certain other purposes at March 31, 2011 and 2010:\n\nSMFG 2011 85" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9661666140437467, + "doc_id": "f9d0d827884650551326f8f07783599dd863e6e8ed5b9f51f77853531dff0921", + "edit_distance": 0.39337175792507206, + "f1_score": 0.9825174825174825, + "meteor": 0.9601826574598034, + "precision": 0.9859649122807017, + "pred_md": "MANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS\n\nWe used a combination of value-in-use and fair-value-less-costs-to-sell methodologies with pre-tax discount rates of approximately 10 % in arriving at the impairment amount in 2012. The recoverable amounts of the cash generating units declined in 2012 mainly because advertising revenue was lower in certain markets.\n\n## Finance Costs\n\nInterest on long-term debt was higher in 2013, the net effect of an increase in the amount of outstanding debt, partially offset by a decrease in the weighted average interest rate on our outstanding debt, mainly related to refinancing activities completed in 2013. See 'Managing Our Liquidity and Financial Resources' for more information.\n\nIn 2013, the foreign exchange loss of $23 million primarily relates to the depreciation in the Canadian dollar relative to the US dollar and its impact on our US$350 million of senior notes due 2038, which was not hedged for accounting purposes prior to March 6, 2013. Most of the foreign exchange loss was offset by the change in the fair value of the associated Debt Derivatives as discussed below. We use cross currency interest rate exchange agreements (Debt Derivatives) to hedge the foreign exchange risk on all of our US$ denominated senior notes and debentures.\n\nThe non-cash gain on the fair value of derivative instruments in 2013 was primarily from the change in fair value of the Debt Derivatives prior to March 6, 2013. Subsequently, all Debt Derivatives were designated as hedges for accounting purposes.\n\n## Other Income\n\nOther income was lower this year, largely due to a $233 million gain recorded in 2012 related to the sale of spectrum licenses by Inukshuk, a 50 % owned joint venture, to the other non-related venture.\n\nOther income of $81 million this year mainly reflects a $47 million gain from the sale of TVtropolis and certain other investment income.\n\n## Income Taxes\n\nOur effective income tax rate was 26.3 % for 2013 and 26.4 % for 2012.\n\n52\n\nROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\nThe 2013 and 2012 effective income tax rates were consistent with the statutory income tax rates. For both years, this is the net effect of several offsetting adjustments to our income tax expense. The most significant adjustments were:\n\n- GLYPH<129> realizing capital gains (of which only 50 % are taxable)\n- GLYPH<129> recognizing and using losses and other tax attributes that were not previously recognized\n- GLYPH<129> offset by a tax charge relating to the revaluation of our net deferred tax liability to reflect an increase in tax rates and non-deductible stock-based compensation.\n\nWe paid $116 million more in cash income taxes in 2013 than in 2012, mainly because we used substantially all of our remaining non-capital income tax loss carryforwards in 2012. In 2011, legislative changes eliminated the deferral of partnership income, accelerating the payment of approximately $700 million of previously deferred cash taxes over a five year amortization period, beginning in 2012 at 15 % , 20 % in each of 2013 through 2015, and 25 % in 2016. Our cash tax payments for the 2014 to 2016 taxation years will include these additional amounts.\n\nWhile the elimination of the partnership deferral affects the timing of cash tax payments, it does not impact our income tax expense for accounting purposes.\n\nThe table below shows the difference between income tax expense from continuing operations, and income tax expense computed by applying the statutory income tax rate to income before income taxes:\n\n## Discontinued Operations\n\nAs discussed in the Cable segment, the second quarter of 2012 was the last period of operations for our Video business, from which point the associated results were treated as discontinued operations for accounting and reporting purposes.", + "recall": 0.9790940766550522, + "true_md": "MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS\n\nWe used a combination of value-in-use and fair-value-less-costs-to-sell methodologies with pre-tax discount rates of approximately 10 % in arriving at the impairment amount in 2012. The recoverable amounts of the cash generating units declined in 2012 mainly because advertising revenue was lower in certain markets.\n\nInterest on long-term debt was higher in 2013, the net effect of an increase in the amount of outstanding debt, partially offset by a decrease in the weighted average interest rate on our outstanding debt, mainly related to refinancing activities completed in 2013. See “Managing Our Liquidity and Financial Resources” for more information.\n\nIn 2013, the foreign exchange loss of $23 million primarily relates to the depreciation in the Canadian dollar relative to the US dollar and its impact on our US$350 million of senior notes due 2038, which was not hedged for accounting purposes prior to March 6, 2013. Most of the foreign exchange loss was offset by the change in the fair value of the associated Debt Derivatives as discussed below. We use cross currency interest rate exchange agreements (Debt Derivatives) to hedge the foreign exchange risk on all of our US$ denominated senior notes and debentures.\n\nThe non-cash gain on the fair value of derivative instruments in 2013 was primarily from the change in fair value of the Debt Derivatives prior to March 6, 2013. Subsequently, all Debt Derivatives were designated as hedges for accounting purposes.\n\nOther income was lower this year, largely due to a $233 million gain recorded in 2012 related to the sale of spectrum licenses by Inukshuk, a 50 % owned joint venture, to the other non-related venture.\n\nOther income of $81 million this year mainly reflects a $47 million gain from the sale of TVtropolis and certain other investment income.\n\nOur effective income tax rate was 26.3 % for 2013 and 26.4 % for 2012.\n\nAs discussed in the Cable segment, the second quarter of 2012 was the last period of operations for our Video business, from which point the associated results were treated as discontinued operations for accounting and reporting purposes.\n\nThe table below shows the difference between income tax expense from continuing operations, and income tax expense computed by applying the statutory income tax rate to income before income taxes:\n\nWhile the elimination of the partnership deferral affects the timing of cash tax payments, it does not impact our income tax expense for accounting purposes.\n\nWe paid $116 million more in cash income taxes in 2013 than in 2012, mainly because we used substantially all of our remaining non-capital income tax loss carryforwards in 2012. In 2011, legislative changes eliminated the deferral of partnership income, accelerating the payment of approximately $700 million of previously deferred cash taxes over a five year amortization period, beginning in 2012 at 15 % ,20 % in each of 2013 through 2015, and 25 % in 2016. Our cash tax payments for the 2014 to 2016 taxation years will include these additional amounts.\n\nThe 2013 and 2012 effective income tax rates were consistent with the statutory income tax rates. For both years, this is the net effect of several offsetting adjustments to our income tax expense. The most significant adjustments were:\n\n- GLYPH<129> realizing capital gains (of which only 50 % are taxable)\n\n- GLYPH<129> recognizing and using losses and other tax attributes that were not previously recognized\n\n- GLYPH<129> offset by a tax charge relating to the revaluation of our net deferred tax liability to reflect an increase in tax rates and non-deductible stock-based compensation.\n\n## Finance Costs\n\n## Other Income\n\n## Income Taxes\n\n## Discontinued Operations\n\n52 ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "e713ef84e861ec0db825be03f136fe8571af80a16dad05a35254a391536a93e7", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9990234375, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "[This page intentionally left blank.]", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "[This page intentionally left blank.]" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9669860100880411, + "doc_id": "d513d9ee170b652f07b5b47b0c5f370c5c927da0bad7d08eaa6cf71e0d92bb6c", + "edit_distance": 0.8787128712871287, + "f1_score": 0.9923195084485407, + "meteor": 0.7000610073277809, + "precision": 0.9938461538461538, + "pred_md": "The Rogers First Rewards Credit Card program (operated through a 100% owned subsidiary of RCI) is regulated by the Office of the Superintendent of Financial Institutions, which requires that a minimum level of regulatory capital be maintained. Rogers is in compliance with that requirement as at December 31, 2013. This program was launched in the fourth quarter of 2013 and the capital requirements are not material as at December 31, 2013.\n\nWith the exception of Rogers First Rewards Credit Card program, we are not subject to externally imposed capital requirements. Our overall strategy for capital risk management has not changed since December 31, 2012.\n\n## NOTE 20: FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT AND FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS\n\nWe are exposed to credit risk, liquidity risk and market risk. Our primary risk management objective is to protect our income and cash flows and, ultimately, shareholder value. We design and implement the risk management strategies discussed below to ensure our risks and the related exposures are consistent with our business objectives and risk tolerance.\n\n## Credit Risk\n\nCredit risk represents the financial loss we could experience if a counterparty to a financial instrument, in which we have an amount owing from the counterparty, failed to meet its obligations under the terms and conditions of its contracts with us.\n\nOur credit risk is primarily attributable to our accounts receivable. Our broad customer base limits the concentration of this risk. Our accounts receivable in the consolidated statements of financial position are net of allowances for doubtful accounts, which management estimates based on prior experience and an assessment of the current economic environment. Management uses estimates to determine the allowance for doubtful accounts, taking into account factors such as our experience in collections and write-offs, the number of days the counterparty is past due and the status of the account. We believe that our allowance for doubtful accounts sufficiently reflects the related credit risk associated with our accounts receivable.\n\nAt December 31, 2013, we had accounts receivable of $1,509 million (December 31, 2012 - $1,536 million), net of an allowance for doubtful accounts of $104 million (December 31, 2012 -$119 million). At December 31, 2013, $452 million (December 31, 2012 - $492 million) of accounts receivable are considered past due, which is defined as amounts outstanding beyond normal credit terms and conditions for the respective customers.\n\nWe use various internal controls, such as credit checks, deposits on account and billing in advance, to mitigate credit risk, and will suspend services when customers have fully used their approved credit limits or violated established payment terms. While our credit controls and processes have been effective in managing credit risk, they cannot eliminate credit risk and there can be no assurance that these controls will continue to be effective or that our current credit loss experience will continue.\n\nCredit risk related to our Debt Derivatives, Expenditure Derivatives and Equity Derivatives (Derivatives) arises from the possibility that the counterparties to the agreements may default on their obligations. We assess the creditworthiness of the counterparties to minimize the risk of counterparty default, and do not require collateral or other security to support the credit risk associated with these Derivatives. The entire portfolio of our Derivatives is held by financial institutions with a Standard & Poor's rating (or the equivalent) ranging from A- to AA-.\n\n## Liquidity Risk\n\nLiquidity risk is the risk that we will not be able to meet our financial obligations as they fall due. We manage liquidity risk by managing our commitments and maturities, capital structure and financial leverage, as outlined in note 19. We also manage liquidity risk by continually monitoring actual and projected cash flows to ensure that we will have sufficient liquidity to meet our liabilities when due, under both normal and stressed conditions, without incurring unacceptable losses or risking damage to our reputation.\n\nThe tables below sets out the undiscounted contractual maturities of our financial liabilities and the receivable components of our derivatives at December 31, 2013 and 2012.\n\n1 The terms of our accounts receivable securitization program are committed until it expires on December 31, 2015.\n\n2 Represents Canadian dollar equivalent amount of US dollar inflows matched to an equal amount of US dollar maturities in long-term debt for Debt Derivatives.\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC.\n\n113\n\nNOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS", + "recall": 0.99079754601227, + "true_md": "NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n1 The terms of our accounts receivable securitization program are committed until it expires on December 31, 2015.\n\n2 Represents Canadian dollar equivalent amount of US dollar inflows matched to an equal amount of US dollar maturities in long-term debt for Debt Derivatives.\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 113\n\nThe tables below sets out the undiscounted contractual maturities of our financial liabilities and the receivable components of our derivatives at December 31, 2013 and 2012.\n\nOur credit risk is primarily attributable to our accounts receivable. Our broad customer base limits the concentration of this risk. Our accounts receivable in the consolidated statements of financial position are net of allowances for doubtful accounts, which management estimates based on prior experience and an assessment of the current economic environment. Management uses estimates to determine the allowance for doubtful accounts, taking into account factors such as our experience in collections and write-offs, the number of days the counterparty is past due and the status of the account. We believe that our allowance for doubtful accounts sufficiently reflects the related credit risk associated with our accounts receivable.\n\nLiquidity risk is the risk that we will not be able to meet our financial obligations as they fall due. We manage liquidity risk by managing our commitments and maturities, capital structure and financial leverage, as outlined in note 19. We also manage liquidity risk by continually monitoring actual and projected cash flows to ensure that we will have sufficient liquidity to meet our liabilities when due, under both normal and stressed conditions, without incurring unacceptable losses or risking damage to our reputation.\n\nCredit risk related to our Debt Derivatives, Expenditure Derivatives and Equity Derivatives (Derivatives) arises from the possibility that the counterparties to the agreements may default on their obligations. We assess the creditworthiness of the counterparties to minimize the risk of counterparty default, and do not require collateral or other security to support the credit risk associated with these Derivatives. The entire portfolio of our Derivatives is held by financial institutions with a Standard & Poor’s rating (or the equivalent) ranging from A- to AA-.\n\nCredit risk represents the financial loss we could experience if a counterparty to a financial instrument, in which we have an amount owing from the counterparty, failed to meet its obligations under the terms and conditions of its contracts with us.\n\nWe are exposed to credit risk, liquidity risk and market risk. Our primary risk management objective is to protect our income and cash flows and, ultimately, shareholder value. We design and implement the risk management strategies discussed below to ensure our risks and the related exposures are consistent with our business objectives and risk tolerance.\n\nWe use various internal controls, such as credit checks, deposits on account and billing in advance, to mitigate credit risk, and will suspend services when customers have fully used their approved credit limits or violated established payment terms. While our credit controls and processes have been effective in managing credit risk, they cannot eliminate credit risk and there can be no assurance that these controls will continue to be effective or that our current credit loss experience will continue.\n\nWith the exception of Rogers First Rewards Credit Card program, we are not subject to externally imposed capital requirements. Our overall strategy for capital risk management has not changed since December 31, 2012.\n\nThe Rogers First Rewards Credit Card program (operated through a 100% owned subsidiary of RCI) is regulated by the Office of the Superintendent of Financial Institutions, which requires that a minimum level of regulatory capital be maintained. Rogers is in compliance with that requirement as at December 31, 2013. This program was launched in the fourth quarter of 2013 and the capital requirements are not material as at December 31, 2013.\n\nAt December 31, 2013, we had accounts receivable of $1,509 million (December 31, 2012 – $1,536 million), net of an allowance for doubtful accounts of $104 million (December 31, 2012 – $119 million). At December 31, 2013, $452 million (December 31, 2012 – $492 million) of accounts receivable are considered past due, which is defined as amounts outstanding beyond normal credit terms and conditions for the respective customers.\n\n## Liquidity Risk\n\n## NOTE 20: FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT AND FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS\n\n## Credit Risk" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6147881529512643, + "doc_id": "00960af20489edf2344a6e4b1c1c22a1c00b2ab5f88a43554d869d63981ddd3d", + "edit_distance": 0.2857142857142857, + "f1_score": 0.8888888888888888, + "meteor": 0.9576923076923077, + "precision": 0.8, + "pred_md": "## Financial Information\n\n- 54 -", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Financial Information \n\n- 54 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8238442337111735, + "doc_id": "cde96e5d7566a8d077c82dc149fed0bbd2710a267231158f63b7bed33445d6f4", + "edit_distance": 0.6563876651982379, + "f1_score": 0.9401709401709403, + "meteor": 0.8486453145334512, + "precision": 0.9482758620689655, + "pred_md": "## Stock Exchange Listings\n\nTokyo Stock Exchange (First Section) Osaka Securities Exchange (First Section) Nagoya Stock Exchange (First Section) New York Stock Exchange*\n\n- * SMFG listed its ARDs on the New York Stock Exchange as of November 1, 2010.\n\n## Number of Common Shares, Classified by Type of Shareholders\n\n- Notes: 1. Of 3,762,514 shares in treasury stock, 37,625 units are included in 'Individuals and others' and the remaining 14 shares are included in 'Fractional shares.'\n- 2. 'Other institutions' include 28 units held by the Securities Custody Association.\n- 3. The number of shares constituting 1 unit is 100.\n\n## Principal Shareholders\n\n## a. Common Stock\n\n- * Standing agent: The HongKong and Shanghai Banking Corporation Limited's Tokyo Branch\n- ** Standing agent: Mizuho Corporate Bank, Ltd.\n- *** Standing agent: Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation\n\nNote: Pursuant to Article 67 of the Enforcement Ordinance of the Companies Act, the exercise of voting rights of common shares held by SMFG Card & Credit, Inc. is restricted.\n\n## b. Preferred Stock (1st series Type 6)\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n153\n\nCapital (Nonconsolidated)\n\nSMFG", + "recall": 0.9322033898305084, + "true_md": "Capital (Nonconsolidated)\n\nSMFG\n\nTokyo Stock Exchange (First Section) Osaka Securities Exchange (First Section) Nagoya Stock Exchange (First Section) New York Stock Exchange*\n\n* SMFG listed its ARDs on the New York Stock Exchange as of November 1, 2010.\n\n## Stock Exchange Listings\n\n## Number of Common Shares, Classified by Type of Shareholders\n\n## Principal Shareholders\n\n## a. Common Stock\n\n## b. Preferred Stock (1st series Type 6)\n\n* Standing agent: The HongKong and Shanghai Banking Corporation Limited’s Tokyo Branch\n\n** Standing agent: Mizuho Corporate Bank, Ltd.\n\n*** Standing agent: Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation\n\nNote: Pursuant to Article 67 of the Enforcement Ordinance of the Companies Act, the exercise of voting rights of common shares held by SMFG Card & Credit, Inc. is restricted.\n\nSMFG 2011 153\n\nNotes: 1. Of 3,762,514 shares in treasury stock, 37,625 units are included in “Individuals and others” and the remaining 14 shares are included in “Fractional shares.”\n\n2. “Other institutions” include 28 units held by the Securities Custody Association.\n\n3. The number of shares constituting 1 unit is 100." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9063855098373502, + "doc_id": "da127567fa483e8b38d644ae261935b0d7c1a5e73a874ae5e1f8dd2b4f094fa1", + "edit_distance": 0.7456140350877193, + "f1_score": 0.9461883408071747, + "meteor": 0.7578395398496928, + "precision": 0.9547511312217195, + "pred_md": "6\n\n## ◎ wo main initiatives for strategic business areas T\n\n## · Initiatives to pursue synergies between SMBC and SMBC Nikko Securities\n\nSMBC Nikko Securities, which is the principal business operation of our securities business, has been consistently earning profits from its established retail business and increasing its market share in the wholesale business. While strengthening its cross-sell with SMBC, SMBC Nikko Securities has fortified its wholesale business by installing a market transaction system, enhancing its equity sales capabilities targeting institutional investors by establishing the Equity Research Division and developing its overseas operations by commencing business operations in London, New York, Hong Kong and Shanghai.\n\nWe will continue to strengthen the wholesale capabilities of SMBC Nikko Securities and promote its cooperation with other group companies including SMBC.\n\n## Strengthen wholesale securities business of SMBC Nikko Securities\n\n- /uni25CF Increase overseas personnel and business operations\n- ✔ Global offerings\n- ✔ Cross-border M&As, etc.\n- /uni25CF Strengthen sales and trading capabilities for institutional investors in Japan, other Asia countries, the U.S. and Europe\n\nStrengthen cross-sell among SMBC Nikko Securities, SMBC and other group companies\n\n## · Initiatives for global expansion\n\nOur competitors of top-tier financial institutions develop their business operations globally, while sustaining their solid business operations in their home countries. We similarly strive to develop a platform for achieving top quality in commercial banking operations in emerging markets mainly in Asia where higher growth is expected to capture expanding business opportunities, while sustaining and further strengthening our solid business operations in Japan.\n\nSpecifically, we are strengthening our business operations by enhancing our channel network and allocating human resources focusing on Asia. We will also proactively respond to the needs for deposits, foreign exchange and other services related to payment and settlement which are expected to grow in emerging countries experiencing high economic growth and to the increasing demand for infrastructure financing in emerging countries. We are also expanding the collaboration of business operations and redeployment of human resources between SMBC's domestic and overseas offices in order to effectively and quickly accommodate the needs of our corporate clients in Japan for their global business expansion.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\nThrough such initiatives, we strive to increase our overseas banking profit ratio to 30% in fiscal 2013 from 23% in fiscal 2010 and grow our banking profits in Asia by 50% in fiscal 2013 compared with fiscal 2010.\n\nSum of SMBC and its overseas subsidiaries.\n\nSpecifically in the wholesale business, we are enhancing the capabilities of SMBC Nikko Securities to accommodate the needs of Japanese corporate clients for tapping into global capital markets and cross-boarder M&As by increasing its overseas staff, while improving its sales and trading capabilities for institutional investors in Japan, other Asian countries, the U.S. and Europe.\n\nConcurrently, we are accelerating the alignment of SMBC and SMBC Nikko Securities through the redeployment of human resources and greater collaboration, in order to respond to the growing and diversifying need for wealth management of Japanese individual clients and provide advanced financial solutions for Japanese corporate clients. We strive to further strengthen our solid business operations in Japan by implementing these initiatives.", + "recall": 0.9377777777777778, + "true_md": "## ◎ Two main initiatives for strategic business areas\n\n## • Initiatives to pursue synergies between SMBC and SMBC Nikko Securities\n\n## • Initiatives for global expansion\n\nSMFG 2011 6\n\nSpecifically in the wholesale business, we are enhancing the capabilities of SMBC Nikko Securities to accommodate the needs of Japanese corporate clients for tapping into global capital markets and cross-boarder M&As by increasing its overseas staff, while improving its sales and trading capabilities for institutional investors in Japan, other Asian countries, the U.S. and Europe.\n\nConcurrently, we are accelerating the alignment of SMBC and SMBC Nikko Securities through the redeployment of human resources and greater collaboration, in order to respond to the grow- ing and diversifying need for wealth management of Japanese indi- vidual clients and provide advanced financial solutions for Japanese corporate clients. We strive to further strengthen our solid business operations in Japan by implementing these initiatives.\n\nSMBC Nikko Securities, which is the principal business operation of our securities business, has been consistently earning profits from its established retail business and increasing its market share in the wholesale business. While strengthening its cross-sell with SMBC, SMBC Nikko Securities has fortified its wholesale business by installing a market transaction system, enhancing its equity sales capabilities targeting institutional investors by establishing the Equity Research Division and developing its overseas operations by com- mencing business operations in London, New York, Hong Kong and Shanghai. \n\nWe will continue to strengthen the wholesale capabilities of SMBC Nikko Securities and promote its cooperation with other group companies including SMBC.\n\nOur competitors of top-tier financial institutions develop their business operations globally, while sustaining their solid business operations in their home countries. We similarly strive to develop a platform for achieving top quality in commercial banking operations in emerging markets mainly in Asia where higher growth is expected to capture expanding business opportunities, while sustaining and further strengthening our solid business operations in Japan.\n\nThrough such initiatives, we strive to increase our overseas banking profit ratio to 30% in fiscal 2013 from 23% in fiscal 2010 and grow our banking profits in Asia by 50% in fiscal 2013 compared with fiscal 2010.\n\nSpecifically, we are strengthening our business operations by enhancing our channel network and allocating human resources focusing on Asia. We will also proactively respond to the needs for deposits, foreign exchange and other services related to payment and settlement which are expected to grow in emerging countries experiencing high economic growth and to the increasing demand for infrastructure financing in emerging countries. We are also expanding the collaboration of business operations and redeploy- ment of human resources between SMBC’s domestic and overseas offices in order to effectively and quickly accommodate the needs of our corporate clients in Japan for their global business expansion. \n\nStrengthen wholesale securities business of SMBC Nikko Securities\n\nStrengthen cross-sell among SMBC Nikko Securities, SMBC and other group companies\n\n- ● Increase overseas personnel and business operations\n\n- ✔ Global offerings\n\n- ✔ Cross-border M&As, etc.\n\n- ● Strengthen sales and trading capabilities for institutional investors in Japan, other Asia countries, the U.S. and Europe\n\nMeeting clients’ diversifying needs" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9045740338238774, + "doc_id": "cdda2a8d0561cb1929d523a92ffed929203bc216a1e0e23c941abc30c63c9179", + "edit_distance": 0.5017421602787456, + "f1_score": 0.9798270893371759, + "meteor": 0.951879758130187, + "precision": 0.9941520467836257, + "pred_md": "CORPORATE PROFILE\n\n## Chesapeake Energy Corporation is the second-largest producer of natural gas, a Top 15 producer of oil and natural gas liquids and the most active driller of new wells in the U.S.\n\nHeadquartered in Oklahoma City, the company's operations are focused on discovering and developing unconventional natural gas and oil fields onshore in the U.S. Chesapeake owns leading positions in the Barnett, Haynesville, Bossier, Marcellus and Pearsall natural gas shale plays and in the Granite Wash, Cleveland, Tonkawa, Mississippian, Bone Spring, Avalon, Wolfcamp, Wolfberry, Eagle Ford,\n\n## CONTENTS\n\n- 1 Financial Review\n- 4 Letter to Shareholders\n- 16 Operating Areas\n- 20 Investor Q&A\n- 22 Social Responsibility\n- 24 Community Relations\n- 26 Environmental, Health & Safety\n- 28 Board of Directors\n- 28 Governance\n- 29 Officers\n- 30 Employees\n- 45 Form 10-K\n\nInside Back Cover\n\nCorporate Information\n\nNiobrara and Utica unconventional liquids-rich plays. The company has also vertically integrated its operations and owns substantial midstream, compression, drilling and oilfield service assets. Chesapeake's stock is listed on the New York Stock Exchange under the symbol CHK. Further information is available at www.chk.com where Chesapeake routinely posts announcements, updates, events, investor information, presentations and press releases.\n\nON THE COVER Moving west, a Chesapeake rig drills toward the Niobrara Shale in the Powder River Basin of southeastern Wyoming, one of several new liquids-rich plays that are enabling the company to increase its profitability and return on capital.", + "recall": 0.9659090909090909, + "true_md": "## CORPORATE PROFILE\n\nChesapeake Energy Corporation is the second-largest producer of natural gas, a Top 15 producer of oil and natural gas liquids and the most active driller of new wells in the U.S. \n\nHeadquartered in Oklahoma City, the company’s operations are focused on discovering and developing unconventional natural gas and oil fields onshore in the U.S. Chesapeake owns leading positions in the Barnett, Haynesville, Bossier, Marcellus and Pearsall natural gas shale plays and in the Granite Wash, Cleveland, Tonkawa, Mississippian, Bone Spring, Avalon, Wolfcamp, Wolfberry, Eagle Ford, \n\nNiobrara and Utica unconventional liquids-rich plays. The company has also vertically integrated its oper- ations and owns substantial midstream, compression, drilling and oilfield service assets. Chesapeake’s stock is listed on the New York Stock Exchange under the symbol CHK. Further information is available at www.chk.com where Chesapeake routinely posts announcements, updates, events, investor informa- tion, presentations and press releases.\n\n## CONTENTS\n\n## ON THE COVER\n\nMoving west, a Chesapeake rig drills toward the Niobrara Shale in the Powder River Basin of southeastern Wyoming, one of several new liquids-rich plays that are enabling the company to increase its profitability and return on capital.\n\n- 1 Financial Review\n\n- 4 Letter to Shareholders\n\n- 16 Operating Areas\n\n- 20 Investor Q&A\n\n- 22 Social Responsibility\n\n- 24 Community Relations\n\n- 26 Environmental, Health & Safety\n\n- 28 Board of Directors\n\n- 28 Governance\n\n- 29 Officers\n\n- 30 Employees\n\n- 45 Form 10-K\n\n- Inside Back Cover \n\n- Corporate Information" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8140690779312978, + "doc_id": "3fad769e72b8ef8882f9c1ce9e5acf475c948e0423cf8de32dbee6c7f7cac9f7", + "edit_distance": 0.3407821229050279, + "f1_score": 0.9756097560975611, + "meteor": 0.7148541346817884, + "precision": 0.9865470852017937, + "pred_md": "## H. Weldon Holcombe\n\nDirector, BS in Civil Engineering\n\n## Experience\n\nWeldon has been a Director since December 2012. Mr. Holcombe has over 30 years of onshore and offshore U.S. oil and gas industry experience, including technology, reservoir engineering, drilling and completions, production operations, construction, field development and optimization, Health, Safety and Environmental ('HSE'), and management of office, field and contract personnel. Most recently, Mr. Holcombe served as the Executive Vice President, Mid Continental Region, for Petrohawk Energy Corporation from 2006 until its acquisition by BHP Billiton in 2011, after which Mr. Holcombe served as Vice President of New Technology Development for BHP Billiton. In his capacity as Executive Vice President for Petrohawk Energy Corporation, Mr. Holcombe managed development of leading unconventional resource plays, including the Haynesville, Fayetteville and Permian areas. In addition, Mr. Holcombe served as President of Big Hawk LLC, a subsidiary of Petrohawk Energy Corporation, a provider of basic oil and gas construction, logistics and rental services. Mr. Holcombe also served as corporate HSE officer for Petrohawk and joint chairperson of the steering committee that managed construction and operation of a gathering system in Petrohawk's Haynesville field with one billion cubic feet of natural gas of production per day. Prior to Petrohawk, Mr. Holcombe served in a variety of senior level management, operations and engineering roles for KCS Energy and Exxon. Mr. Holcombe holds a Bachelor of Science degree in civil engineering from the University of Auburn.\n\n## Interest in Shares :\n\n596,700 Ordinary Shares in Sundance Energy Australia Limited\n\n## Special Responsibilities:\n\n- -Chairman of the Reserves Committee\n\n-Member of the Remuneration and Nominations Committee\n\n## Other Directorships :\n\nNil\n\n## Meetings of Directors\n\nThe table below shows the number of meetings held during each Director's tenure and the attendance by each Director and respective members of the Committees. In addition to the formal meetings held and noted below, a number of informal meetings were also held.\n\nThe Audit and Risk Management, the Remuneration and Nominations, and the Reserves Committees both have charters approved by the Committees and, subsequently, the Board, which sets out the Committees' objectives, composition, meeting frequency, access, duties and responsibilities. Minutes are kept of all meetings and are tabled for adoption at the following Committee meetings. These minutes are subsequently provided to the Board for information and any discussion that may be necessary. The Audit and Risk Management Committee meets with the external auditor at least twice a year.\n\n- 25 -", + "recall": 0.9649122807017544, + "true_md": "Experience Weldon has been a Director since December 2012. Mr. Holcombe has over 30 years of onshore and offshore U.S. oil and gas industry experience, including technology, reservoir engineering, drilling and completions, production operations, construction, field development and optimization, Health, Safety and Environmental (“HSE”), and management of office, field and contract personnel. Most recently, Mr. Holcombe served as the Executive Vice President, Mid Continental Region, for Petrohawk Energy Corporation from 2006 until its acquisition by BHP Billiton in 2011, after which Mr. Holcombe served as Vice President of New Technology Development for BHP Billiton. In his capacity as Executive Vice President for Petrohawk Energy Corporation, Mr. Holcombe managed development of leading unconventional resource plays, including the Haynesville, Fayetteville and Permian areas. In addition, Mr. Holcombe served as President of Big Hawk LLC, a subsidiary of Petrohawk Energy Corporation, a provider of basic oil and gas construction, logistics and rental services. Mr. Holcombe also served as corporate HSE officer for Petrohawk and joint chairperson of the steering committee that managed construction and operation of a gathering system in Petrohawk’s Haynesville field with one billion cubic feet of natural gas of production per day. Prior to Petrohawk, Mr. Holcombe served in a variety of senior level management, operations and engineering roles for KCS Energy and Exxon. Mr. Holcombe holds a Bachelor of Science degree in civil engineering from the University of Auburn. \n\nThe table below shows the number of meetings held during each Director’s tenure and the attendance by each Director and respective members of the Committees. In addition to the formal meetings held and noted below, a number of informal meetings were also held. \n\n## Meetings of Directors\n\n$^{ }$The Audit and Risk Management, the Remuneration and Nominations, and the Reserves Committees both have charters approved by the Committees and, subsequently, the Board, which sets out the Committees’ objectives, composition, meeting frequency, access, duties and responsibilities. Minutes are kept of all meetings and are tabled for adoption at the following Committee meetings. These minutes are subsequently provided to the Board for information and any discussion that may be necessary. The Audit and Risk Management Committee meets with the external auditor at least twice a year. \n\n- 25 - \n\n## H. Weldon Holcombe Director, BS in Civil Engineering\n\n- -Chairman of the Reserves Committee -Member of the Remuneration and Nominations Committee \n\n- Special Responsibilities: -Chairman of the Reserves Committee -Member of the Remuneration and Nominations Committee \n\nSpecial Responsibilities: -Chairman of the Reserves Committee \n\nOther Directorships : Nil \n\nInterest in Shares : 596,700 Ordinary Shares in Sundance Energy Australia Limited \n\nInterest in Shares : 596,700 Ordinary Shares in Sundance Energy Australia Limited \n\nExperience Weldon has been a Director since December 2012. Mr. Holcombe has over 30 years of onshore and offshore U.S. oil and gas \n\nH. Weldon Holcombe Director, BS in Civil Engineering" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8004501726714073, + "doc_id": "1791cfbd1e3007a5ee8aa979fa1e4455bb8fae3c1c30a0fbbb8780e12e848c3a", + "edit_distance": 0.4495192307692308, + "f1_score": 0.9871465295629821, + "meteor": 0.8164922200743217, + "precision": 0.9896907216494846, + "pred_md": "## Shareholder Information\n\n## Independent Registered Public\n\n## Form 10-K\n\nAccounting Firm\n\nDeloitte & Touche LLP\n\nSeattle, Washington\n\n## Counsel\n\nLane Powell PC Seattle, Washington\n\n## Transfer Agent and Registrar\n\nComputershare PO Box 30170 College Station, Texas 77842 Telephone (800) 318-7045 TDD for Hearing Impaired (800) 952-9245 Foreign Shareholders (201) 680-6578 TDD Foreign Shareholders (781) 575-4592 computershare.com/investor\n\n## General Offices\n\n1617 Sixth Avenue\n\nSeattle, Washington 98101\n\nTelephone (206) 628-2111\n\n## Annual Meeting\n\nMay 5, 2015 at 11:00 a.m. Pacific Standard Time Nordstrom Downtown Seattle Store John W. Nordstrom Room, fifth floor 1617 Sixth Avenue Seattle, Washington 98101\n\n82\n\nThe Company's Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended January 31, 2015 will be provided to shareholders upon request to:\n\nNordstrom Investor Relations PO Box 2737 Seattle, Washington 98111 (206) 303-3200 invrelations@nordstrom.com\n\n## Shareholder Information\n\nAdditional shareholder information, including Nordstrom's Corporate Governance Guidelines and Code of Business Conduct and Ethics, is available online at investor.nordstrom.com (Investor Relations, Corporate Governance). The Company intends to provide disclosure of any amendments or waivers to its Code of Business Conduct and Ethics online within four business days following the date of amendment or waiver. In addition, the Company is always willing to discuss matters of concern to shareholders. Shareholders may contact the Company at: (206) 303-3200 invrelations@nordstrom.com\n\n## Certifications\n\nWe have filed the required certifications under Section 302 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 regarding the quality of our public disclosures as Exhibits 31.1 and 31.2 to our annual report on Form 10-K for the year ended January 31, 2015. After our 2015 Annual Meeting of Shareholders, we intend to file with the New York Stock Exchange the CEO certification regarding our compliance with the NYSE's corporate governance listing standards as required by NYSE Rule 303A.12(a).\n\n© 2015 Nordstrom, Inc.", + "recall": 0.9846153846153847, + "true_md": "## Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm Deloitte & Touche LLP\n\nAccounting Firm Deloitte & Touche LLP Seattle, Washington\n\nCounsel Lane Powell PC Seattle, Washington\n\nTransfer Agent and Registrar Computershare PO Box 30170 College Station, Texas 77842 Telephone (800) 318-7045 TDD for Hearing Impaired (800) 952-9245 Foreign Shareholders (201) 680-6578 TDD Foreign Shareholders (781) 575-4592 computershare.com/investor\n\nForm 10-K The Company’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended January 31, 2015 will be provided to shareholders upon request to:\n\nNordstrom Investor Relations PO Box 2737 Seattle, Washington 98111 (206) 303-3200 invrelations@nordstrom.com\n\nShareholder Information Additional shareholder information, including Nordstrom’s Corporate Governance Guidelines and Code of Business Conduct and Ethics, is available online at investor.nordstrom.com (Investor Relations, Corporate Governance). The Company intends to provide disclosure of any amendments or waivers to its Code of Business Conduct and Ethics online within four business days following the date of amendment or waiver. In addition, the Company is always willing to discuss matters of concern to shareholders. Shareholders may contact the Company at: (206) 303-3200 invrelations@nordstrom.com\n\nCertifications We have filed the required certifications under Section 302 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 regarding the quality of our public disclosures as Exhibits 31.1 and 31.2 to our annual report on Form 10-K for the year ended January 31, 2015. After our 2015 Annual Meeting of Shareholders, we intend to file with the New York Stock Exchange the CEO certification regarding our compliance with the NYSE’s corporate governance listing standards as required by NYSE Rule 303A.12(a).\n\nAnnual Meeting May 5, 2015 at 11:00 a.m. Pacific Standard Time Nordstrom Downtown Seattle Store John W. Nordstrom Room, fifth floor 1617 Sixth Avenue Seattle, Washington 98101\n\nGeneral Offices 1617 Sixth Avenue Seattle, Washington 98101 Telephone (206) 628-2111\n\n© 2015 Nordstrom, Inc.\n\n82\n\n## Form 10-K The Company’s Annual Report on Form 10-K\n\n## Counsel Lane Powell PC\n\n## Transfer Agent and Registrar Computershare\n\n## Shareholder Information Additional shareholder information, including\n\n## General Offices 1617 Sixth Avenue\n\n## Annual Meeting May 5, 2015 at 11:00 a.m.\n\n## Certifications We have filed the required certifications under\n\n## Shareholder Information" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7430439198081312, + "doc_id": "acbd70f639c7945de698b23f74fbe38b6dc3a055af3e8b06da8745cdc879d303", + "edit_distance": 0.25671140939597314, + "f1_score": 0.9852216748768472, + "meteor": 0.6764772666201937, + "precision": 0.9900990099009901, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 1 - STATEMENT OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES continued\n\n## ii) Loans and receivables\n\nLoans and receivables are non-derivative financial assets with fixed or determinable payments that are not quoted in an active market and are subsequently measured at amortised cost using the effective interest rate method.\n\n## iii) Held-to-maturity investments\n\nHeld-to-maturity investments are non-derivative financial assets that have fixed maturities and fixed or determinable payments, and it is the Group's intention to hold these investments to maturity. They are subsequently measured at amortised cost using the effective interest rate method.\n\n## iv) Available-for-sale financial assets\n\nAvailable-for-sale financial assets are non-derivative financial assets that are either designated as such or that are not classified in any of the other categories. They comprise investments in the equity of other entities where there is neither a fixed maturity nor fixed determinable payments.\n\n## v) Financial liabilities\n\nNon-derivative financial liabilities (excluding financial guarantees) are subsequently measured at amortised cost using the effective interest rate method.\n\n## Derecognition\n\nFinancial assets are derecognised when the contractual right to receipt of cash flows expires or the asset is transferred to another party whereby the entity no longer has any significant continuing involvement in the risks and benefits associated with the asset. Financial liabilities are derecognised when the related obligations are either discharged, cancelled or expire. The difference between the carrying value of the financial liability extinguished or transferred to another party and the fair value of consideration paid, including the transfer of non-cash assets or liabilities assumed, is recognised in profit or loss.\n\n## f) Impairment of Non-Financial Assets\n\nThe carrying amounts of the Group's assets are reviewed at each reporting date to determine whether there is any indication of impairment. Where an indicator of impairment exists, a formal estimate of the recoverable amount is made.\n\nExploration and evaluation assets are assessed for impairment in accordance with Note 1(b).\n\nDevelopment and production assets are assessed for impairment on a cash-generating unit basis. A cash-generating unit is the smallest grouping of assets that generates independent cash inflows. Management has assessed its CGUs as being an individual basin, which is the lowest level for which cash inflows are largely independent of those of other assets. Impairment losses recognised in respect of cash-generating units are allocated to reduce the carrying amount of the assets in the unit on a pro-rata basis.\n\nAn impairment loss is recognized in the income statement whenever the carrying amount of an asset or its cashgenerating unit exceeds its recoverable amount.\n\n- 64 -", + "recall": 0.9803921568627451, + "true_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 1 - STATEMENT OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES continued\n\nii) Loans and receivables Loans and receivables are non-derivative financial assets with fixed or determinable payments that are not quoted in an active market and are subsequently measured at amortised cost using the effective interest rate method. \n\niii) Held-to-maturity investments Held-to-maturity investments are non-derivative financial assets that have fixed maturities and fixed or determinable payments, and it is the Group’s intention to hold these investments to maturity. They are subsequently measured at amortised cost using the effective interest rate method. \n\niv) Available-for-sale financial assets Available-for-sale financial assets are non-derivative financial assets that are either designated as such or that are not classified in any of the other categories. They comprise investments in the equity of other entities where there is neither a fixed maturity nor fixed determinable payments. \n\nv) Financial liabilities Non-derivative financial liabilities (excluding financial guarantees) are subsequently measured at amortised cost using the effective interest rate method. \n\nDerecognition Financial assets are derecognised when the contractual right to receipt of cash flows expires or the asset is transferred to another party whereby the entity no longer has any significant continuing involvement in the risks and benefits associated with the asset. Financial liabilities are derecognised when the related obligations are either discharged, cancelled or expire. The difference between the carrying value of the financial liability extinguished or transferred to another party and the fair value of consideration paid, including the transfer of non-cash assets or liabilities assumed, is recognised in profit or loss. \n\nf) Impairment of Non-Financial Assets The carrying amounts of the Group’s assets are reviewed at each reporting date to determine whether there is any indication of impairment. Where an indicator of impairment exists, a formal estimate of the recoverable amount is made. \n\nExploration and evaluation assets are assessed for impairment in accordance with Note 1(b). \n\nDevelopment and production assets are assessed for impairment on a cash-generating unit basis. A cash-generating unit is the smallest grouping of assets that generates independent cash inflows. Management has assessed its CGUs as being an individual basin, which is the lowest level for which cash inflows are largely independent of those of other assets. Impairment losses recognised in respect of cash-generating units are allocated to reduce the carrying amount of the assets in the unit on a pro-rata basis. \n\nAn impairment loss is recognized in the income statement whenever the carrying amount of an asset or its cash- generating unit exceeds its recoverable amount. \n\n- 64 - \n\n## f) Impairment of Non-Financial Assets The carrying amounts of the Group’s assets are reviewed at each reporting date to determine whether there is any\n\n## Derecognition Financial assets are derecognised when the contractual right to receipt of cash flows expires or the asset is\n\n## v) Financial liabilities Non-derivative financial liabilities (excluding financial guarantees) are subsequently measured at amortised cost\n\n## iv) Available-for-sale financial assets Available-for-sale financial assets are non-derivative financial assets that are either designated as such or that are\n\n## iii) Held-to-maturity investments Held-to-maturity investments are non-derivative financial assets that have fixed maturities and fixed or\n\n## ii) Loans and receivables Loans and receivables are non-derivative financial assets with fixed or determinable payments that are not quoted" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9124454714485066, + "doc_id": "4f10982374b0f06658fa5da2769ddcaf2732b9b0655604a70c965ffe58b6ee90", + "edit_distance": 0.08333333333333333, + "f1_score": 0.9681528662420382, + "meteor": 0.962770030164776, + "precision": 0.987012987012987, + "pred_md": "## Principal Subsidiaries and Affiliates (as of March 31, 2011)\n\nAll companies shown hereunder are consolidated subsidiaries or affiliates of Sumitomo Mitsui Financial Group, Inc. Those printed in green ink are consolidated subsidiaries or affiliates of Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation.\n\n## ■ Principal Domestic Subsidiaries\n\nNote: Figures in parentheses ( ) in the voting rights columns indicate voting rights held indirectly via subsidiaries and affiliates.\n\n- * 1 Cedyna Financial Corporation became a wholly-owned subsidiary of SMFG Card & Credit, Inc., a consolidated subsidiary of SMFG, on May 1, 2011.\n- * 2 Nikko Cordial Securities Inc. changed its company name to SMBC Nikko Securities Inc. on April 1, 2011.\n\n216\n\nSMFG 2011", + "recall": 0.95, + "true_md": "Principal Subsidiaries and Affiliates (as of March 31, 2011)\n\nAll companies shown hereunder are consolidated subsidiaries or affiliates of Sumitomo Mitsui Financial Group, Inc. Those printed in green ink are consolidated subsidiaries or affiliates of Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation.\n\n## ■ Principal Domestic Subsidiaries\n\nNote: Figures in parentheses ( ) in the voting rights columns indicate voting rights held indirectly via subsidiaries and affiliates.\n\n*$^{1}$ Cedyna Financial Corporation became a wholly-owned subsidiary of SMFG Card & Credit, Inc., a consolidated subsidiary of SMFG, on May 1, 2011.\n\n* 2 Nikko Cordial Securities Inc. changed its company name to SMBC Nikko Securities Inc. on April 1, 2011.\n\nSMFG 2011 216" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.770529825777523, + "doc_id": "db2876eb7db83c4eea1ed2da122f72dad0b53c75241f3ca56fc764de67e82d8e", + "edit_distance": 0.8443743427970557, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.5382899587649559, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Nordstrom, Inc.\n\n## Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nDollar and share amounts in millions except per share, per option and per unit amounts\n\n## Loyalty Program\n\nCustomers who use our Nordstrom private label credit or debit card or our Nordstrom Visa credit cards can participate in the Nordstrom Rewards program through which customers accumulate points based on their level of spending. Upon reaching a certain points threshold, customers receive Nordstrom Notes, which can be redeemed for goods or services at Nordstrom full-line stores in the U.S. and Canada, Nordstrom Rack stores and at Nordstrom.com. Nordstrom Rewards customers receive reimbursements for alterations, get Personal Triple Points days and have early access to sales events. With increased spending, they can receive additional amounts of these benefits as well as access to exclusive fashion and shopping events.\n\nWe estimate the net cost of Nordstrom Notes that will be issued and redeemed and record this cost as rewards points are accumulated. These costs, as well as reimbursed alterations, are recorded in cost of sales given that we provide customers with products and services for these rewards. Other costs of the loyalty program, including shopping and fashion events, are recorded in selling, general and administrative expenses.\n\n## Buying and Occupancy Costs\n\nBuying costs consist primarily of compensation and other costs incurred by our merchandising and product development groups. Occupancy costs include rent, depreciation, property taxes and facility operating costs of our retail, corporate center and distribution operations.\n\n## Rent\n\nWe recognize minimum rent expense, net of landlord reimbursements, on a straight-line basis over the minimum lease term from the time that we control the leased property. For leases that contain predetermined, fixed escalations of the minimum rent, we recognize the rent expense on a straight-line basis and record the difference between the rent expense and the rent payable as a deferred credit. Contingent rental payments, typically based on a percentage of sales, are recognized in rent expense when payment of the contingent rent is probable.\n\nWe receive incentives from landlords to construct stores in certain developments. These property incentives are recorded as a deferred credit and recognized as a reduction of rent expense on a straight-line basis over the lease term. At the end of 2014 and 2013, the deferred credit balance was $570 and $561.\n\n## Selling, General and Administrative Expenses\n\nSelling, general and administrative expenses consist primarily of compensation and benefit costs, advertising, shipping and handling costs, bad debt expense related to our credit card operations and other miscellaneous expenses.\n\n## Advertising\n\nAdvertising production costs for Internet, magazines, store events and other media are expensed the first time the advertisement is run. Online marketing costs are expensed when incurred. Total advertising expenses, net of vendor allowances, of $195, $167 and $161 in 2014, 2013 and 2012 were included in selling, general and administrative expenses.\n\n## Vendor Allowances\n\nWe receive allowances from merchandise vendors for cosmetic selling expenses, purchase price adjustments, cooperative advertising and promotion programs and various other expenses. Allowances for cosmetic selling expenses are recorded in selling, general and administrative expenses as a reduction of the related costs when incurred. Purchase price adjustments are recorded as a reduction of cost of sales at the point they have been earned and the related merchandise has been marked down or sold. Allowances for cooperative advertising and promotion programs and other expenses are recorded in selling, general and administrative expenses as a reduction of the related costs when incurred. Any allowances in excess of actual costs incurred that are included in selling, general and administrative expenses are recorded as a reduction of cost of sales. Vendor allowances earned are as follows:\n\n## Shipping and Handling Costs\n\nOur shipping and handling costs include payments to third-party shippers and costs to hold, move and prepare merchandise for shipment. These costs do not include in-bound freight to our distribution centers, which we include in the cost of our inventory. Shipping and handling costs of $348, $267 and $240 in 2014, 2013 and 2012 were included in selling, general and administrative expenses.\n\n42", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## Loyalty Program Customers who use our Nordstrom private label credit or debit card or our Nordstrom Visa credit cards can participate in the Nordstrom\n\n## Buying and Occupancy Costs Buying costs consist primarily of compensation and other costs incurred by our merchandising and product development groups. Occupancy\n\n## Rent We recognize minimum rent expense, net of landlord reimbursements, on a straight-line basis over the minimum lease term from the time\n\n## Selling, General and Administrative Expenses Selling, general and administrative expenses consist primarily of compensation and benefit costs, advertising, shipping and handling costs,\n\n## Advertising Advertising production costs for Internet, magazines, store events and other media are expensed the first time the advertisement is run.\n\n## Vendor Allowances We receive allowances from merchandise vendors for cosmetic selling expenses, purchase price adjustments, cooperative advertising and\n\n## Shipping and Handling Costs Our shipping and handling costs include payments to third-party shippers and costs to hold, move and prepare merchandise for shipment.\n\nShipping and Handling Costs Our shipping and handling costs include payments to third-party shippers and costs to hold, move and prepare merchandise for shipment. These costs do not include in-bound freight to our distribution centers, which we include in the cost of our inventory. Shipping and handling costs of $348, $267 and $240 in 2014, 2013 and 2012 were included in selling, general and administrative expenses.\n\n42\n\nVendor Allowances We receive allowances from merchandise vendors for cosmetic selling expenses, purchase price adjustments, cooperative advertising and promotion programs and various other expenses. Allowances for cosmetic selling expenses are recorded in selling, general and administrative expenses as a reduction of the related costs when incurred. Purchase price adjustments are recorded as a reduction of cost of sales at the point they have been earned and the related merchandise has been marked down or sold. Allowances for cooperative advertising and promotion programs and other expenses are recorded in selling, general and administrative expenses as a reduction of the related costs when incurred. Any allowances in excess of actual costs incurred that are included in selling, general and administrative expenses are recorded as a reduction of cost of sales. Vendor allowances earned are as follows:\n\nAdvertising Advertising production costs for Internet, magazines, store events and other media are expensed the first time the advertisement is run. Online marketing costs are expensed when incurred. Total advertising expenses, net of vendor allowances, of $195, $167 and $161 in 2014, 2013 and 2012 were included in selling, general and administrative expenses.\n\nSelling, General and Administrative Expenses Selling, general and administrative expenses consist primarily of compensation and benefit costs, advertising, shipping and handling costs, bad debt expense related to our credit card operations and other miscellaneous expenses.\n\nWe receive incentives from landlords to construct stores in certain developments. These property incentives are recorded as a deferred credit and recognized as a reduction of rent expense on a straight-line basis over the lease term. At the end of 2014 and 2013, the deferred credit balance was $570 and $561.\n\nRent We recognize minimum rent expense, net of landlord reimbursements, on a straight-line basis over the minimum lease term from the time that we control the leased property. For leases that contain predetermined, fixed escalations of the minimum rent, we recognize the rent expense on a straight-line basis and record the difference between the rent expense and the rent payable as a deferred credit. Contingent rental payments, typically based on a percentage of sales, are recognized in rent expense when payment of the contingent rent is probable.\n\nBuying and Occupancy Costs Buying costs consist primarily of compensation and other costs incurred by our merchandising and product development groups. Occupancy costs include rent, depreciation, property taxes and facility operating costs of our retail, corporate center and distribution operations.\n\nWe estimate the net cost of Nordstrom Notes that will be issued and redeemed and record this cost as rewards points are accumulated. These costs, as well as reimbursed alterations, are recorded in cost of sales given that we provide customers with products and services for these rewards. Other costs of the loyalty program, including shopping and fashion events, are recorded in selling, general and administrative expenses.\n\nLoyalty Program Customers who use our Nordstrom private label credit or debit card or our Nordstrom Visa credit cards can participate in the Nordstrom Rewards program through which customers accumulate points based on their level of spending. Upon reaching a certain points threshold, customers receive Nordstrom Notes, which can be redeemed for goods or services at Nordstrom full-line stores in the U.S. and Canada, Nordstrom Rack stores and at Nordstrom.com. Nordstrom Rewards customers receive reimbursements for alterations, get Personal Triple Points days and have early access to sales events. With increased spending, they can receive additional amounts of these benefits as well as access to exclusive fashion and shopping events.\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements Dollar and share amounts in millions except per share, per option and per unit amounts\n\n## Nordstrom, Inc. Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements Dollar and share amounts in millions except per share, per option and per unit amounts" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9198611470479862, + "doc_id": "cf1f2bbb00b9ebf37e84169f179f6992677cf9be58f0bf84cfd68fd0f0bfdbc7", + "edit_distance": 0.7431693989071039, + "f1_score": 0.9641025641025642, + "meteor": 0.8883920639777368, + "precision": 0.9690721649484536, + "pred_md": "MANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS\n\nHigher Cable Telephony Revenue and Growing Subscriber Base Phone revenue was 4 % higher in 2013, compared to last year, the net result of:\n\n- GLYPH<129> higher phone subscriber base\n- GLYPH<129> partially offset by higher promotional pricing activity.\n\nPhone subscribers grew 7 % in 2013, compared to last year and represent:\n\n- GLYPH<129> 54 % of our television subscribers, compared to 49 % last year\n- GLYPH<129> 29 % of the homes passed by our cable network, compared to 28 % last year.\n\n## Lower Equipment Sales\n\nEquipment sales include revenues generated from the sale of digital cable set-top terminals and Internet modems.\n\nLower equipment revenue this year compared to 2012 reflects the reduction of cable boxes sales versus rentals.\n\n## Discontinued Operations\n\nIn 2012, we closed our Video store operations, which offered DVD and video game rentals of equipment and sales in many of our corporateowned retail locations. The results of the Video business were treated as discontinued operations for accounting and reporting purposes. See 'Review of Consolidated Performance'.\n\n## Higher Operating Expenses\n\nWe assess Cable operating expenses in three categories:\n\n- GLYPH<129> the cost of equipment sales (cable digital set-top box and Internet modem equipment)\n\n44\n\nROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n- GLYPH<129> the cost of programming\n- GLYPH<129> all other expenses involved in day-to-day operations, to service existing subscriber relationships and attract new subscribers.\n\nOverall operating expenses increased slightly this year compared to last year mainly due to:\n\n- GLYPH<129> operating expenses generated by Mountain Cable which we acquired earlier this year\n- GLYPH<129> higher investments in customer care and network\n- GLYPH<129> partially offset by savings from improvements in our cost structure and productivity and lower subscriber additions.\n\n## Higher Adjusted Operating Profit\n\nAdjusted operating profit was 7 % higher this year mainly the net result of higher service revenue, partially offset by higher operating expenses. The increase in the adjusted operating profit margin reflects a continued shift in product mix to the higher margin Internet and phone products combined with efficiency gains. This increased our adjusted operating profit margin to 49.4 % , compared to 47.8 % in 2012.\n\nExcluding the results of Mountain Cable which we acquired in the second quarter of 2013:\n\n- GLYPH<129> revenue would have been 2 % higher this year compared to last year, instead of 3 % higher as reported\n- GLYPH<129> adjusted operating profit would have been 5 % higher this year compared to last year, instead of 7 % higher as reported.", + "recall": 0.9591836734693877, + "true_md": "MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS\n\n## Higher Cable Telephony Revenue and Growing Subscriber Base\n\n## Lower Equipment Sales\n\n## Discontinued Operations\n\n## Higher Operating Expenses\n\n## Higher Adjusted Operating Profit\n\nAdjusted operating profit was 7 % higher this year mainly the net result of higher service revenue, partially offset by higher operating expenses. The increase in the adjusted operating profit margin reflects a continued shift in product mix to the higher margin Internet and phone products combined with efficiency gains. This increased our adjusted operating profit margin to 49.4 % , compared to 47.8 % in 2012.\n\nExcluding the results of Mountain Cable which we acquired in the second quarter of 2013:\n\nIn 2012, we closed our Video store operations, which offered DVD and video game rentals of equipment and sales in many of our corporate- owned retail locations. The results of the Video business were treated as discontinued operations for accounting and reporting purposes. See “Review of Consolidated Performance”.\n\nWe assess Cable operating expenses in three categories:\n\nEquipment sales include revenues generated from the sale of digital cable set-top terminals and Internet modems.\n\nLower equipment revenue this year compared to 2012 reflects the reduction of cable boxes sales versus rentals.\n\nPhone revenue was 4 % higher in 2013, compared to last year, the net result of:\n\nOverall operating expenses increased slightly this year compared to last year mainly due to:\n\n- GLYPH<129> higher phone subscriber base\n\n- GLYPH<129> partially offset by higher promotional pricing activity.\n\n- GLYPH<129>5 4 % of our television subscribers, compared to 49 % last year\n\n- GLYPH<129>2 9 % of the homes passed by our cable network, compared to 28 % last year.\n\nPhone subscribers grew 7 % in 2013, compared to last year and represent:\n\n- GLYPH<129> the cost of programming\n\n- GLYPH<129> all other expenses involved in day-to-day operations, to service existing subscriber relationships and attract new subscribers.\n\n- GLYPH<129> operating expenses generated by Mountain Cable which we acquired earlier this year\n\n- GLYPH<129> higher investments in customer care and network\n\n- GLYPH<129> partially offset by savings from improvements in our cost structure and productivity and lower subscriber additions.\n\n- GLYPH<129> revenue would have been 2 % higher this year compared to last year, instead of 3 % higher as reported\n\n- GLYPH<129> adjusted operating profit would have been 5 % higher this year compared to last year, instead of 7 % higher as reported.\n\n- GLYPH<129> the cost of equipment sales (cable digital set-top box and Internet modem equipment)\n\n44 ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC.\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7697113410575246, + "doc_id": "c86868ca21d5f2cb0e764d8899fa1516cf1f3195271b8138d263d6dba697dc71", + "edit_distance": 0.2356687898089172, + "f1_score": 0.8607594936708862, + "meteor": 0.8363266283524904, + "precision": 0.8607594936708861, + "pred_md": "## ■ Exposure Balance by Type of Assets, Geographic Region, Industry and Residual Term\n\n- 1. Exposure Balance by Type of Assets, Geographic Region and Industry\n\nNotes: 1. The above amounts are exposures after CRM.\n\n- 2. The above amounts do not include 'securitization exposures' and 'credit risk-weighted assets under Article 145 of the Notification.'\n- 3. 'Loans, etc.' includes loans, commitments and off-balance sheet assets except derivatives, and 'Others' includes 'equity exposures' and standardized approach applied funds.\n\n4. 'Domestic operations' comprises the operations of SMFG, its domestic consolidated banking subsidiaries (excluding overseas branches) and other domestic consolidated subsidiaries. 'Overseas operations' comprises the operations of the overseas branches of domestic consolidated banking subsidiaries and overseas consolidated subsidiaries.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n197\n\nCapital Ratio Information\n\nSMFG", + "recall": 0.8607594936708861, + "true_md": "SMFG Capital Ratio Information\n\n## ■ Exposure Balance by Type of Assets, Geographic Region, Industry and Residual Term\n\n## 1. Exposure Balance by Type of Assets, Geographic Region and Industry\n\nNotes: 1. The above amounts are exposures after CRM.\n\n2. The above amounts do not include “securitization exposures” and “credit risk-weighted assets under Article 145 of the Notification.”\n\n3. “Loans, etc.” includes loans, commitments and off-balance sheet assets except derivatives, and “Others” includes “equity exposures” and standardized approach applied funds.\n\n4. “Domestic operations” comprises the operations of SMFG, its domestic consolidated banking subsidiaries (excluding overseas branches) and other domestic consolidated subsidiaries. “Overseas operations” comprises the operations of the overseas branches of domestic consolidated banking subsidiaries and overseas consolidated subsidiaries.\n\nSMFG 2011 197" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9569603208799925, + "doc_id": "4c9ac17754778bd721855f2dc04868b2a4c21664ef655a94006d1f470e228ebe", + "edit_distance": 0.030560271646859084, + "f1_score": 0.9787928221859706, + "meteor": 0.9831846200536661, + "precision": 0.9868421052631579, + "pred_md": "## 14\n\nOperations Report\n\nFor the 12 months to June 2013, the availability of the RH90 fleet has been at 80%, with the RH40 fleet at 78%. The target availabilities for these fleets are 88% and 85% respectively. Availability of the haul trucks was 85% versus a target of 90% for the 777D fleet. A commitment has been undertaken by the contractor to address the under performance.\n\nApproximately 2.5 days of production were lost due to rainfall during the year. Total rainfall for the year was 1.3 metres which is in line with the long term average.\n\nMining operations continued on a 24 hour per day basis throughout the year, with the exception of the development of Q prospect.\n\nDue to the proximity of Q prospect to the community and the local roads, development began in March 2013 on a 5 day week basis on day shift only. In April this was extended to 7 days per week on day shift only.\n\nUpon completion of mining of the C North Cutback, it was backfilled to allow the reinstatement of Highway 1301 as well as to improve access for waste rock haulage to TSF#2. The reinstatement of the section of Highway 1301 that passes through the C North area is still pending final approval from the Department of Highways in Bangkok and Phitchit.\n\nThe engineered fill for the second lift of TSF#2 was constructed from November 2012 to May 2013. This will provide an additional 10.4 million tonnes of storage capacity. Waste rock from A Pit is being continuously sent to TSF#2 at a rate of approximately 7,000 BCM per day for the construction of the downstream embankment.\n\nDuring the year, a number of cost saving initiatives were identified and implemented. The initiatives included trials using reduced explosive powder factors and changing from blasting 6 metre benches to 9 metre benches, with subsequent savings in bulk explosive and drilling costs. Work was also undertaken to validate increasing the size of the grade control drilling pattern, without decreasing the accuracy of grade estimation. This has resulted in a significant saving in grade control drilling costs.\n\nAs part of the budget/life of mine planning cycle, opportunities for improving project value were identified through the fine tuning of pit designs and sequencing of push backs within each of the pits. This involved running optimisations on individual ore bodies and targeting areas of high value within the pit shells.\n\nTo test the robustness of the life of mine plan, various scenarios were investigated at varying gold prices. The result of this work highlighted that A Pit was still very robust.\n\nwww.kingsgate.com.au\n\nThe new plant, Chatree North, continued to operate in commissioning and optimisation mode from the start of July 2012 until its completion at the middle of August. The Plant was shut down for a total of 63 days while undertaking a drawn-out process for the\n\ngranting of a Metallurgical License. The Plant resumed operation in October and quickly exceeded design processing capacity with throughput of 3.47 million tonnes per annum (Mtpa) or 28% above the design rate of 2.7 Mtpa. The Plant performed extremely well\n\n- * After waste capitalised to TSF\n\n- ** Net of silver royalties", + "recall": 0.970873786407767, + "true_md": "Operations Report 14\n\nFor the 12 months to June 2013, the availability of the RH90 fleet has been at 80%, with the RH40 fleet at 78%. The target availabilities for these fleets are 88% and 85% respectively. Availability of the haul trucks was 85% versus a target of 90% for the 777D fleet. A commit- ment has been undertaken by the contractor to address the under performance.\n\nApproximately 2.5 days of production were lost due to rainfall during the year. Total rainfall for the year was 1.3 metres which is in line with the long term average.\n\nMining operations continued on a 24 hour per day basis throughout the year, with the excep- tion of the development of Q prospect. \n\nDue to the proximity of Q prospect to the community and the local roads, development began in March 2013 on a 5 day week basis on day shift only. In April this was extended to 7 days per week on day shift only. \n\nUpon completion of mining of the C North Cutback, it was backfilled to allow the reinstate- ment of Highway 1301 as well as to improve access for waste rock haulage to TSF#2. The reinstatement of the section of Highway 1301 that passes through the C North area is still pending final approval from the Department of Highways in Bangkok and Phitchit.\n\nThe engineered fill for the second lift of TSF#2 was constructed from November 2012 to May 2013. This will provide an additional 10.4 million tonnes of storage capacity. Waste rock from A Pit is being continuously sent to TSF#2 at a rate of approximately 7,000 BCM per day for the construction of the downstream embankment. \n\nDuring the year, a number of cost saving initia- tives were identified and implemented. The initiatives included trials using reduced explosive powder factors and changing from blasting 6 metre benches to 9 metre benches, with subsequent savings in bulk explosive and drilling costs. Work was also undertaken to validate increasing the size of the grade control drilling pattern, without decreasing the accuracy of grade estimation. This has resulted in a signifi- cant saving in grade control drilling costs.\n\nAs part of the budget/life of mine planning cycle, opportunities for improving project value were identified through the fine tuning of pit designs and sequencing of push backs within each of the pits. This involved running optimisations on individual ore bodies and targeting areas of high value within the pit shells. \n\nTo test the robustness of the life of mine plan, various scenarios were investigated at varying gold prices. The result of this work highlighted that A Pit was still very robust. \n\nThe new plant, Chatree North, continued to operate in commissioning and optimisation mode from the start of July 2012 until its completion at the middle of August. The Plant was shut down for a total of 63 days while undertaking a drawn-out process for the \n\ngranting of a Metallurgical License. The Plant resumed operation in October and quickly exceeded design processing capacity with throughput of 3.47 million tonnes per annum (Mtpa) or 28% above the design rate of 2.7 Mtpa. The Plant performed extremely well \n\n* After waste capitalised to TSF\n\n** Net of silver royalties\n\nwww.kingsgate.com.au" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.955156482299116, + "doc_id": "a452468bdc0d2381fe0c09ed50a9e9d741249b32a8567dae919e567c6a2d3708", + "edit_distance": 0.5035460992907801, + "f1_score": 0.9760589318600368, + "meteor": 0.8208795579680025, + "precision": 0.9814814814814815, + "pred_md": "MANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS\n\n## Normal Course Issuer Bid Share Purchases\n\nIn February 2013, we renewed our normal course issuer bid for our Class B Non-Voting shares for another 12-month period. This allowed us to purchase up to the lesser of 35.8 million Class B Non-Voting shares and the number of Class B Non-Voting shares that can be purchased by Rogers under the normal course issuer bid for a total purchase price of $500 million during a twelve-month period commencing February 25, 2013 and ending February 24, 2014.\n\nDuring 2013 we purchased 546,674 Class B Non-Voting shares for cancellation under the NCIB for a purchase price of $22 million, all of which were made through the facilities of the TSX in June 2013.\n\nDuring 2012 we purchased 9,637,230 Class B Non-Voting shares for cancellation under the NCIB for a purchase price of $350 million.\n\nIn February 2014, we filed a notice with the TSX of our intention to renew our normal course issuer bid for our Class B Non-Voting shares for another year. Subject to acceptance by the TSX, this notice gives us the right to buy up to an aggregate $500 million or 35,780,234 Class B Non-Voting shares of RCI, whichever is less, on the TSX, the NYSE and/ or alternate trading systems any time between February 25, 2014 and February 24, 2015. The number of Class B Non-Voting shares we actually buy under the normal course issuer bid, if any, and when we buy them, will depend upon our evaluation of market conditions, stock prices, our cash position, alternative uses of cash and other factors.\n\n## Dividends\n\nIn 2013, we declared and paid dividends on each of our outstanding Class A Voting and Class B Non-Voting shares. We paid $876 million in cash dividends, an increase of $73 million from 2012. See 'Dividend and Share Information'.\n\n## Shelf Prospectuses\n\nOur two shelf prospectuses expired in January 2014. One shelf prospectus qualified the public offering of our debt securities in each of the provinces of Canada (Canadian Shelf) and the other shelf prospectus (together with a corresponding registration statement filed with the US Securities and Exchange Commission) qualified the public offering of our debt securities in the United States and Ontario (US Shelf). We issued an aggregate of US$2.5 billion of debt securities under the US Shelf during 2013 and, in 2012, we issued an aggregate\n\n60\n\nROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\nof $1.1 billion of debt securities under the Canadian Shelf. We intend to replace these expired shelf prospectuses with a new Canadian Shelf, qualifying up to $4 billion of debt securities, and a new US Shelf, qualifying up to US$4 billion of debt securities. We have no immediate intention to offer securities pursuant to either of these new shelf prospectuses. The notice set forth in this paragraph does not constitute an offer of any securities for sale or an offer to sell or the solicitation of an offer to buy any securities.\n\nPre-tax and After-tax Free Cash Flow\n\n1 Pre-tax free cash flow, after-tax cash flow and adjusted operating profit are nonGAAP measures and should not be considered as a substitute or alternative for GAAP measures. They are not defined terms under IFRS, and do not have standard meanings, so may not be a reliable way to compare us to other companies. See 'NonGAAP Measures' for information about these measures, including how we calculate them.\n\nPre-tax cash flow was up 1% this year compared to last year due to higher adjusted operating profit, partially offset by higher additions to property, plant and equipment and higher interest on our long-term debt. After-tax free cash flow was 6 percent lower than last year because of higher cash income taxes.", + "recall": 0.9706959706959707, + "true_md": "MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS\n\n## Normal Course Issuer Bid Share Purchases\n\nof $1.1 billion of debt securities under the Canadian Shelf. We intend to replace these expired shelf prospectuses with a new Canadian Shelf, qualifying up to $4 billion of debt securities, and a new US Shelf, qualifying up to US$4 billion of debt securities. We have no immediate intention to offer securities pursuant to either of these new shelf prospectuses. The notice set forth in this paragraph does not constitute an offer of any securities for sale or an offer to sell or the solicitation of an offer to buy any securities.\n\nIn February 2013, we renewed our normal course issuer bid for our Class B Non-Voting shares for another 12-month period. This allowed us to purchase up to the lesser of 35.8 million Class B Non-Voting shares and the number of Class B Non-Voting shares that can be purchased by Rogers under the normal course issuer bid for a total purchase price of $500 million during a twelve-month period commencing February 25, 2013 and ending February 24, 2014.\n\n## Pre-tax and After-tax Free Cash Flow\n\nDuring 2013 we purchased 546,674 Class B Non-Voting shares for cancellation under the NCIB for a purchase price of $22 million, all of which were made through the facilities of the TSX in June 2013.\n\nDuring 2012 we purchased 9,637,230 Class B Non-Voting shares for cancellation under the NCIB for a purchase price of $350 million.\n\nIn February 2014, we filed a notice with the TSX of our intention to renew our normal course issuer bid for our Class B Non-Voting shares for another year. Subject to acceptance by the TSX, this notice gives us the right to buy up to an aggregate $500 million or 35,780,234 Class B Non-Voting shares of RCI, whichever is less, on the TSX, the NYSE and/ or alternate trading systems any time between February 25, 2014 and February 24, 2015. The number of Class B Non-Voting shares we actually buy under the normal course issuer bid, if any, and when we buy them, will depend upon our evaluation of market conditions, stock prices, our cash position, alternative uses of cash and other factors.\n\nPre-tax cash flow was up 1% this year compared to last year due to higher adjusted operating profit, partially offset by higher additions to property, plant and equipment and higher interest on our long-term debt. After-tax free cash flow was 6 percent lower than last year because of higher cash income taxes.\n\nIn 2013, we declared and paid dividends on each of our outstanding Class A Voting and Class B Non-Voting shares. We paid $876 million in cash dividends, an increase of $73 million from 2012. See “Dividend and Share Information”.\n\nOur two shelf prospectuses expired in January 2014. One shelf prospectus qualified the public offering of our debt securities in each of the provinces of Canada (Canadian Shelf) and the other shelf prospectus (together with a corresponding registration statement filed with the US Securities and Exchange Commission) qualified the public offering of our debt securities in the United States and Ontario (US Shelf). We issued an aggregate of US$2.5 billion of debt securities under the US Shelf during 2013 and, in 2012, we issued an aggregate\n\n## Dividends\n\n## Shelf Prospectuses\n\n60 ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n- 1 Pre-tax free cash flow, after-tax cash flow and adjusted operating profit are non- GAAP measures and should not be considered as a substitute or alternative for GAAP measures. They are not defined terms under IFRS, and do not have standard meanings, so may not be a reliable way to compare us to other companies. See “Non- GAAP Measures” for information about these measures, including how we calculate them." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9721100874907884, + "doc_id": "2c34c0208b5745d19950f8ee53cb37c30bb294b272420b2b8146182f0b4bfa36", + "edit_distance": 0.07692307692307693, + "f1_score": 0.9861111111111112, + "meteor": 0.9888216840811062, + "precision": 0.9861111111111112, + "pred_md": "Capital Ratio Information\n\nSMFG\n\n## (b) Income-Producing Real Estate (IPRE)\n\n## (2) Retail Exposures\n\n## A. Residential Mortgage Exposures\n\n## (A) Rating Procedures\n\n- GLYPH<129> 'Residential mortgage exposures' includes mortgage loans to individuals and some real estate loans in which the property consists of both residential and commercial facilities such as a store or rental apartment units, but excludes apartment construction loans.\n- GLYPH<129> Mortgage loans are rated as follows.\n\nMortgage loans are allocated to a portfolio segment with similar risk characteristics in terms of (a) default risk determined using loan contract information, results of an exclusive grading model and a borrower category under self-assessment executed in accordance with the financial inspection manual of the Japanese FSA, and (b) recovery risk at the time of default determined using Loan To Value (LTV) calculated based on the assessment value of collateral real estate. PDs and LGDs are estimated based on the default experience for each segment and taking into account the possibility of estimation errors.\n\nFurther, the portfolio is subdivided based on the lapse of years from the contract date, and the effectiveness of segmentation in terms of default risk and recovery risk is validated periodically.\n\nInternal data are used to estimate and validate PDs and LGDs. The definition of default is the definition stipulated in the Notification.\n\n## (B) Portfolio\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n185", + "recall": 0.9861111111111112, + "true_md": "Capital Ratio Information\n\nSMFG\n\n## (b) Income-Producing Real Estate (IPRE)\n\n## (2) Retail Exposures\n\n## A. Residential Mortgage Exposures\n\n## (A) Rating Procedures\n\n## (B) Portfolio\n\nSMFG 2011 185\n\n- GLYPH<129> “Residential mortgage exposures” includes mortgage loans to individuals and some real estate loans in which the property consists of both residential and commercial facilities such as a store or rental apartment units, but excludes apartment construction loans.\n\n- GLYPH<129> Mortgage loans are rated as follows.\n\nMortgage loans are allocated to a portfolio segment with similar risk characteristics in terms of (a) default risk determined using loan contract information, results of an exclusive grading model and a borrower category under self-assessment executed in accordance with the financial inspection manual of the Japanese FSA, and (b) recovery risk at the time of default determined using Loan To Value (LTV) calculated based on the assessment value of collateral real estate. PDs and LGDs are estimated based on the default experience for each segment and taking into account the possibility of estimation errors.\n\nFurther, the portfolio is subdivided based on the lapse of years from the contract date, and the effectiveness of segmentation in terms of default risk and recovery risk is validated periodically.\n\nInternal data are used to estimate and validate PDs and LGDs. The definition of default is the definition stipulated in the Notification." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9108789171402869, + "doc_id": "fdb6ae632f12f695e2474123c7b904806f93ebfe573d696b183a434612138ba7", + "edit_distance": 0.10629067245119306, + "f1_score": 0.9605568445475638, + "meteor": 0.9353469294950756, + "precision": 0.9539170506912442, + "pred_md": "## management's Discussion and analysis\n\nD\n\nollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\nConsistent with the Company's strategy to continue to add to its portfolio through developments, a second project in St. John's was started during the second half of 2013 within close proximity to Bennett House. The design and site planning for the 101-unit complex is completed and construction commenced at the end of the third quarter of 2013. In order to generate higher returns, the Company has approved a lower per unit development cost. The Company has spent $7.1 million on this project to date including the cost of land and has satisfied the equity component in order to obtain construction financing. Management expects an all cash yield of approximately 6% on this project.\n\nKillam acquired land in Cambridge in early 2013, which consisted of a 5.2 acre site and developed a two-phase plan for development for 244 units. Phase one will include 122 units and construction commenced in the fourth quarter of 2013, with development expected to be completed in the spring of 2015. The Company has already contributed $6.0 million to phase one of the project, which represents approximately 82% of the required equity contribution and the expected yield on this project is approximately 6%.\n\n## Capital Improvements\n\nKillam invests capital to maintain and improve the operating performance of its properties. During the year ended December 31, 2013, Killam invested a total of $21.6 million in its portfolio, compared to $22.5 million in 2012.\n\n## For the years ended December 31,\n\n## Apartments - Capital Spend\n\nA summary of the capital spend on the apartment segment is included below:\n\n## For the years ended December 31,\n\nKillam estimates that $450 per unit of the capital spending relates to maintenance capital, and the remainder relates to value enhancing upgrades. Maintenance capital varies with market conditions and relates to investments that are not expected to lead to an increase in NOI, or increased efficiency, of a building; however, it is expected to extend the life of a building. Examples of maintenance capital include roof and structural repairs and are in addition to regular repairs and maintenance costs that are expensed to NOI. Value enhancing upgrades are investments in the properties that are expected to result in higher rents and/or increased efficiencies. This includes unit and common area upgrades and energy investments, such as natural gas conversions.\n\n50\n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013", + "recall": 0.9672897196261683, + "true_md": "## Management’s Discussion and Analysis Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\nManagement’s Discussion and Analysis Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\nConsistent with the Company’s strategy to continue to add to its portfolio through developments, a second project in St. John’s was started during the second half of 2013 within close proximity to Bennett House. The design and site planning for the 101‑unit complex is completed and construction commenced at the end of the third quarter of 2013. In order to generate higher returns, the Company has approved a lower per unit development cost. The Company has spent $7.1 million on this project to date including the cost of land and has satisfied the equity component in order to obtain construction financing. Management expects an all cash yield of approximately 6% on this project.\n\nKillam acquired land in Cambridge in early 2013, which consisted of a 5.2 acre site and developed a two‑phase plan for development for 244 units. Phase one will include 122 units and construction commenced in the fourth quarter of 2013, with development expected to be completed in the spring of 2015. The Company has already contributed $6.0 million to phase one of the project, which represents approximately 82% of the required equity contribution and the expected yield on this project is approximately 6%. \n\n## Capital Improvements\n\nKillam invests capital to maintain and improve the operating performance of its properties. During the year ended December 31, 2013, Killam invested a total of $21.6 million in its portfolio, compared to $22.5 million in 2012.\n\n## Apartments ‑ Capital Spend\n\nA summary of the capital spend on the apartment segment is included below:\n\nKillam estimates that $450 per unit of the capital spending relates to maintenance capital, and the remainder relates to value enhancing upgrades. Maintenance capital varies with market conditions and relates to investments that are not expected to lead to an increase in NOI, or increased efficiency, of a building; however, it is expected to extend the life of a building. Examples of maintenance capital include roof and structural repairs and are in addition to regular repairs and maintenance costs that are expensed to NOI. Value enhancing upgrades are investments in the properties that are expected to result in higher rents and/or increased efficiencies. This includes unit and common area upgrades and energy investments, such as natural gas conversions. \n\n50 Killam ProPerties inc | 2013" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9331456876188281, + "doc_id": "7937b803166f476a469b6cf0ac9d5bb213a3f3e2ecbd3f2c1e3430c4b0bb2e03", + "edit_distance": 0.6314553990610329, + "f1_score": 0.9916666666666667, + "meteor": 0.9295680779511332, + "precision": 0.99581589958159, + "pred_md": "## STRATEGIC OBJECTIVES AND VALUE DRIVERS\n\nAt Rogers, our purpose is to easily connect customers with what matters most. Our vision is to be known for leading the enablement of seamless, and reliable experiences across any device, place or time.\n\n## DELIVER INDUSTRY-LEADING SHAREHOLDER RETURNS\n\nOur mandate is to deliver long-term value and industry-leading shareholder returns. To sustain our lead as the top integrated telecommunications and media company in Canada, our actions and investments are guided by the following six long-term strategic objectives:\n\n## DELIVER DIFFERENTIATED END-TO-END CUSTOMER EXPERIENCES\n\nFocus on evolving our cross-device integration to enable seamless, reliable and easy-to-use experiences anytime, anyplace and anywhere; on delivering a differentiated range of devices and device-related services; and on enabling greater integration of our media assets across screens.\n\n## STRENGTHEN THE CUSTOMER EXPERIENCE\n\nConstantly improve the experience that customers have using our products and services by making it easier for them; providing the tools and resources customers need to use our products with confidence; being attuned to our customers' evolving needs; and continuing to simplify our product offerings.\n\n## MAINTAIN INDUSTRY-LEADING NETWORKS\n\nReinforce our fastest and most reliable networks by expanding our LTE network to a wider proportion of the Canadian population, continuing to increase broadband Internet speeds to capture and monetize the growth in data consumption, and further enhancing our TV platform with next generation features and functionality.\n\n## IMPROVE PRODUCTIVITY AND COST STRUCTURE\n\nContinue to focus on cost-optimization initiatives and organizational efficiency by improving service delivery; reducing complexity; focusing on fewer, more impactful projects; managing expenses, and working closely with key suppliers.\n\nFOR A DETAILED DISCUSSION OF OUR STRATEGIC GOALS AND OBJECTIVES, SEE THE ' OUR STRATEGY ' SECTION IN THE ACCOMPANYING MD&A LATER IN THE REPORT.\n\n04 ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n## EXPAND OUR SERVICES REACH\n\nExpand the reach of our networks and services through new construction and targeted acquisitions that complement our existing platforms; by more widely deploying products and services; and by expanding the reach of key media brands nationally and across our digital platforms.\n\n## DRIVE FUTURE GROWTH OPPORTUNITIES\n\nContinue to develop targeted new growth areas of our business, including machine-to-machine communications, mobile commerce and video, sports, business communications services, local and digital media services, and home automation.", + "recall": 0.9875518672199171, + "true_md": "## STRATEGIC OBJECTIVES AND VALUE DRIVERS\n\nAt Rogers, our purpose is to easily connect customers with what matters most. Our vision is to be known for leading the enablement of seamless, and reliable experiences across any device, place or time. \n\nOur mandate is to deliver long-term value and industry-leading shareholder returns. To sustain our lead as the top integrated telecommunications and media company in Canada, our actions and investments are guided by the following six long-term strategic objectives:\n\nFocus on evolving our cross-device integration to enable seamless, reliable and easy-to-use experiences anytime, anyplace and anywhere; on delivering a differentiated range of devices and device-related services; and on enabling greater integration of our media assets across screens.\n\nReinforce our fastest and most reliable networks by expanding our LTE network to a wider proportion of the Canadian population, continuing to increase broadband Internet speeds to capture and monetize the growth in data consumption, and further enhancing our TV platform with next generation features and functionality.\n\nExpand the reach of our networks and services through new construction and targeted acquisitions that complement our existing platforms; by more widely deploying products and services; and by expanding the reach of key media brands nationally and across our digital platforms.\n\nConstantly improve the experience that customers have using our products and services by making it easier for them; providing the tools and resources customers need to use our products with confidence; being attuned to our customers’ evolving needs; and continuing to simplify our product offerings.\n\nContinue to focus on cost-optimization initiatives and organizational efficiency by improving service delivery; reducing complexity; focusing on fewer, more impactful projects; managing expenses, and working closely with key suppliers.\n\nContinue to develop targeted new growth areas of our business, including machine-to-machine communications, mobile commerce and video, sports, business communications services, local and digital media services, and home automation.\n\nFOR A DETAILED DISCUSSION OF OUR STRATEGIC GOALS AND OBJECTIVES, SEE THE “ OUR STRATEGY ” SECTION IN THE ACCOMPANYING MD&A LATER IN THE REPORT.\n\n04 ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n## DRIVE FUTURE GROWTH OPPORTUNITIES\n\n## IMPROVE PRODUCTIVITY AND COST STRUCTURE\n\n## STRENGTHEN THE CUSTOMER EXPERIENCE\n\n## DELIVER DIFFERENTIATED END-TO-END CUSTOMER EXPERIENCES\n\n## MAINTAIN INDUSTRY-LEADING NETWORKS\n\n## EXPAND OUR SERVICES REACH\n\n## DELIVER INDUSTRY-LEADING SHAREHOLDER RETURNS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8350776701959166, + "doc_id": "71c5afb587fc69f37f400070d88025f8ce0b39f62a9c4f4fe72ace628f5b6de9", + "edit_distance": 0.15289256198347106, + "f1_score": 0.9338235294117648, + "meteor": 0.8978014088092566, + "precision": 0.9407407407407408, + "pred_md": "MANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS\n\n## 2013 Financial Results\n\nPlease see 'Critical Accounting Estimates' and 'New Accounting Standards , in 'Accounting Policies' in this MD&A, and the Notes to our 2013 ' Audited Consolidated Financial Statements for important accounting policies and estimates as they relate to the following discussion.\n\nWe use several key performance indicators to measure our performance against our strategies and the results of our peers and competitors. Many of these are not defined terms under IFRS and so should not be considered as alternative measures to net income or any other financial measure of performance under IFRS. See 'Key Performance Indicators' and 'Non-GAAP Measures' for more information.\n\n## SUMMARY OF CONSOLIDATED RESULTS\n\n1 Adjusted operating profit, adjusted net income, adjusted diluted earnings per share, pre-tax free cash flow and after-tax free cash flow are non-GAAP measures and should not be considered as a substitute or alternative for GAAP measures. These are not defined terms under IFRS and do not have standard meanings, so may not be a reliable way to compare us to other companies. See 'Non-GAAP Measures' for information about these measures, including how we calculate them.\n\n2 As defined. See 'Additional GAAP Measures'.\n\n34\n\nROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT", + "recall": 0.927007299270073, + "true_md": "MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS\n\n## 2013 Financial Results\n\n## SUMMARY OF CONSOLIDATED RESULTS\n\nPlease see “Critical Accounting Estimates” and “New Accounting Standards ” , in “Accounting Policies” in this MD&A, and the Notes to our 2013 Audited Consolidated Financial Statements for important accounting policies and estimates as they relate to the following discussion.\n\nWe use several key performance indicators to measure our performance against our strategies and the results of our peers and competitors. Many of these are not defined terms under IFRS and so should not be considered as alternative measures to net income or any other financial measure of performance under IFRS. See “Key Performance Indicators” and “Non-GAAP Measures” for more information.\n\n- 1 Adjusted operating profit, adjusted net income, adjusted diluted earnings per share, pre-tax free cash flow and after-tax free cash flow are non-GAAP measures and should not be considered as a substitute or alternative for GAAP measures. These are not defined terms under IFRS and do not have standard meanings, so may not be a reliable way to compare us to other companies. See “Non-GAAP Measures” for information about these measures, including how we calculate them.\n\n- 2 As defined. See “Additional GAAP Measures”.\n\n34 ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9431324303062454, + "doc_id": "2800a9572e8e01cff52505f2397a131d5e21df79d9dcb399a2258beca063be79", + "edit_distance": 0.706199460916442, + "f1_score": 0.9662576687116565, + "meteor": 0.9015013603071004, + "precision": 0.9782608695652174, + "pred_md": "in cash and drilling carries. This was CNOOC's second investment with Chesapeake and its second investment in the U.S. onshore E&P industry. We are currently drilling with five rigs in this play and expect to accelerate our drilling to 15 rigs by year-end 2013. We believe our leasehold position could support the drilling of up to 7,600 additional net wells.\n\nCleveland, Tonkawa and Mississippian Plays - These three liquids-rich plays of the Anadarko Basin should become significant contributors to our growth in the years ahead. The Cleveland and Tonkawa plays are tight sandstones located in western Oklahoma and the eastern Texas Panhandle, and they provide returns that are some of the very best in\n\n## Fracking Operations Transparency\n\nNatural gas and oil operations continue to grow and expand across the country as vast new resources are unlocked through the process of hydraulic fracturing, or 'fracking,' a proven technology that has been used safely and successfully in the completion of more than 1 million U.S. wells since 1949.\n\nDuring the fracking process, a mixture of approximately 99% water and sand, combined with a small amount of chemical additives, is pumped at high pressure into a targeted formation to create small fissures or fractures in the surrounding rock or shale. These fractures are kept propped open by the sand to allow the natural gas or oil to freely flow into a wellbore.\n\nIn our continuing efforts to educate the public and alleviate common misconceptions about hydraulic fracturing, Chesapeake became one of the first energy companies to disclose the additives used in the process. We are actively participating in a national, publicly accessible web-based registry developed by the Ground Water Protection Council and the Interstate Oil and Gas Compact Commission, with support of the U.S. Department of Energy. The registry allows for fracking additives to be reported on a well-by-well basis and offers public access to that material on its website. Chesapeake began loading well completion data onto the registry on February 15, 2011, for wells where completion reports have been filed with the appropriate state agencies.\n\n2010 ANNUAL REPORT |\n\n11\n\nthe company. We have acquired approximately 600,000 net leasehold acres prospective for these plays and have drilled 75 net wells to date. We are currently using eight rigs and believe our leasehold could support the drilling of up to an additional 3,700 net wells.\n\nThe Mississippian fractured carbonate is primarily an oil play and is located on the Anadarko Basin shelf of northern Oklahoma and southern Kansas. We have acquired approximately 900,000 net leasehold acres prospective for this play and have drilled 40 net wells to date. We are currently using four rigs and believe our leasehold could support the drilling of up to an additional 6,000 net wells. This is an area where we anticipate bringing in a joint venture partner later in 2011 or in early 2012.\n\nBone Spring, Avalon, Wolfcamp and Wolfberry Plays - These four liquids-rich plays of the Permian Basin should also become significant contributors to our growth in the years ahead. To date, we have acquired approximately 560,000 net leasehold acres that we believe are prospective for these plays and have drilled 155 net wells. We are currently using eight rigs and believe our leasehold could support the drilling of up to an additional 4,400 net wells.\n\nUtica Shale - Chesapeake has high hopes for this emerging shale play in eastern Ohio, especially because it would become the fourth large unconventional play (along with the Haynesville and Bossier shales and the Mississippian carbonate) that Chesapeake has discovered. In addition, we believe the play will have three distinct components (oil,\n\nTo view the listings and learn more about the fracking process, the additives used and measures taken to protect fresh ground water aquifers, visit www.fracfocus.org.\n\nA prime example of Best Management Practices for fracture stimulation, this well in Bradford County, Pennsylvania, is now producing natural gas from the Marcellus Shale. A closely regulated completion technique, fracking is necessary to allow natural gas or oil to freely flow into the wellbore.", + "recall": 0.9545454545454546, + "true_md": "2010 ANNUAL REPORT | 11\n\nin cash and drilling carries. This was CNOOC’s second investment with Chesapeake and its second investment in the U.S. onshore E&P industry. We are currently drilling with five rigs in this play and expect to acceler- ate our drilling to 15 rigs by year-end 2013. We believe our leasehold position could support the drilling of up to 7,600 additional net wells.\n\nCleveland, Tonkawa and Mississippian Plays — These three liquids-rich plays of the Anadarko Basin should become significant contributors to our growth in the years ahead. The Cleveland and Tonkawa plays are tight sandstones located in western Oklahoma and the eastern Texas Panhandle, and they provide returns that are some of the very best in \n\nthe company. We have acquired approximately 600,000 net leasehold acres prospective for these plays and have drilled 75 net wells to date. We are currently using eight rigs and believe our leasehold could sup- port the drilling of up to an additional 3,700 net wells. \n\nThe Mississippian fractured carbonate is primarily an oil play and is located on the Anadarko Basin shelf of northern Oklahoma and southern Kansas. We have acquired approximately 900,000 net leasehold acres prospective for this play and have drilled 40 net wells to date. We are currently using four rigs and believe our leasehold could support the drilling of up to an additional 6,000 net wells. This is an area where we anticipate bringing in a joint venture partner later in 2011 or in early 2012. \n\nBone Spring, Avalon, Wolfcamp and Wolfberry Plays — These four liquids-rich plays of the Permian Basin should also become significant contributors to our growth in the years ahead. To date, we have acquired approximately 560,000 net leasehold acres that we believe are prospec- tive for these plays and have drilled 155 net wells. We are currently using eight rigs and believe our leasehold could support the drilling of up to an additional 4,400 net wells. \n\nUtica Shale — Chesapeake has high hopes for this emerging shale play in eastern Ohio, especially because it would become the fourth large unconventional play (along with the Haynesville and Bossier shales and the Mississippian carbonate) that Chesapeake has discovered. In addition, we believe the play will have three distinct components (oil, \n\nNatural gas and oil operations continue to grow and ex- pand across the country as vast new resources are un- locked through the process of hydraulic fracturing, or “fracking,” a proven technology that has been used safely and successfully in the completion of more than 1 million U.S. wells since 1949.\n\nIn our continuing efforts to educate the public and alleviate common misconceptions about hydraulic fracturing, Chesapeake became one of the first energy companies to disclose the additives used in the process. We are actively participating in a national, publicly accessible web-based registry developed by the Ground Water Protection Council and the Interstate Oil and Gas Compact Commission, with support of the U.S. Department of Energy. The registry allows for fracking additives to be reported on a well-by-well basis and offers public access to that material on its website. Chesapeake began loading well completion data onto the registry on February 15, 2011, for wells where completion reports have been filed with the appropriate state agencies. \n\nDuring the fracking process, a mixture of approximately 99% water and sand, combined with a small amount of chemical additives, is pumped at high pressure into a targeted formation to create small fissures or fractures in \n\nthe surrounding rock or shale. These fractures are kept propped open by the sand to allow the natural gas or oil to freely flow into a wellbore.\n\nTo view the listings and learn more about the fracking process, the additives used and measures taken to protect fresh ground water aquifers, visit www.fracfocus.org.\n\n## Fracking Operations Transparency\n\nA prime example of Best Management Practices for fracture stimulation, this well in Bradford County, Pennsylvania, is now producing natural gas from the Marcellus Shale. A closely regulated completion technique, fracking is necessary to allow natural gas or oil to freely flow into the wellbore." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8165159287401601, + "doc_id": "08b34283e3db2d2cd0c0f6e33bed9e6cac82f8d610b6b56640de8da7a1ecb280", + "edit_distance": 0.18213866039952997, + "f1_score": 0.9877408056042031, + "meteor": 0.6673936964782634, + "precision": 0.9894736842105263, + "pred_md": "We received property incentives from our developers of $110 in 2014, $89 in 2013 and $58 in 2012. These incentives are included in our cash provided by operations in our Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows in Item 8: Financial Statements and Supplementary Data. However, operationally we view these as an offset to our capital expenditures. Our capital expenditure percentages, net of property incentives, by category are summarized as follows:\n\nOther capital expenditures consist of ongoing improvements to our stores in the ordinary course of business and expenditures related to various growth initiatives.\n\nWe expect to significantly increase our capital expenditures, net of property incentives, over the next five years to approximately $4,300, compared with $2,700 over the previous five years. We plan to spend approximately $1,200 in 2015 compared with $751 in 2014. Both of these increases are primarily due to our continued expansion into new markets such as Canada, Puerto Rico and Manhattan, investment in new Nordstrom Rack and full-line stores and remodels of existing stores. Over these next five years, we expect that 62% of our net capital expenditures will be for new store openings, relocations and remodels and 34% for ecommerce and information technology. We believe that we have the capacity for additional capital investments should opportunities arise.\n\n## Change in Restricted Cash\n\nIn connection with the $500 debt maturity in the first quarter of 2012, we began making required monthly cash deposits of $100 into a restricted account in December 2011 until we accumulated $500 by April 2012 to retire the debt. As of January 28, 2012, we had accumulated $200. During the first quarter of 2012, the net amount withdrawn from restricted cash of $200 was recorded as cash received from investing activities.\n\n## Change in Credit Card Receivables Originated at Third Parties\n\nThe Nordstrom Visa credit cards allow our customers to make purchases at merchants outside of our stores and accumulate points for our Nordstrom Rewards program. In 2014, the change in credit card receivables from customers' third-party purchases using their Nordstrom Visa credit cards was relatively flat compared with 2013.\n\nIn 2013, the change in credit card receivables from customers' third-party purchases using their Nordstrom Visa credit cards decreased to $6, compared with $42 in 2012, as payment rates slightly increased in 2013.\n\n## Financing Activities\n\nNet cash used in financing activities was $698 in 2014 compared with $589 in 2013 and $1,333 in 2012. Our financing activities include repurchases of common stock, our short-term and long-term borrowing activity, and payment of dividends.\n\n## Short-term and Long-term Borrowing Activity\n\nIn the fourth quarter of 2013, we issued $665 of 5.00% senior unsecured notes due January 2044 ('2044 Notes'). We used $400 of the proceeds to retire all 6.75% senior unsecured notes due June 2014. We exchanged $201 of the 7.00% senior unsecured notes due January 2038 ('2038 Notes') for $265 of the 2044 Notes. The $64 in excess of the outstanding principal of the 2038 Notes relates to the lower interest rate and longer maturity of the new 2044 Notes, and we recorded it as part of the discount to be amortized over the term of the 2044 Notes. As of January 31, 2015, we had $598 of outstanding 2044 Notes, net of a $67 discount. The 2044 Notes exchanged for the 2038 Notes and the related discounts represented a non-cash activity of $201 that had no impact to our 2013 Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows. See Note 8: Debt and Credit Facilities in Item 8: Financial Statements and Supplementary Data for additional information.\n\nDuring 2012, we retired our $500 securitized Series 2007-2 Class A & B Notes upon maturity in April 2012 using accumulated restricted cash described in Investing Activities above.\n\n28", + "recall": 0.986013986013986, + "true_md": "We received property incentives from our developers of $110 in 2014, $89 in 2013 and $58 in 2012. These incentives are included in our cash provided by operations in our Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows in Item 8: Financial Statements and Supplementary Data. However, operationally we view these as an offset to our capital expenditures. Our capital expenditure percentages, net of property incentives, by category are summarized as follows:\n\nOther capital expenditures consist of ongoing improvements to our stores in the ordinary course of business and expenditures related to various growth initiatives.\n\nWe expect to significantly increase our capital expenditures, net of property incentives, over the next five years to approximately $4,300, compared with $2,700 over the previous five years. We plan to spend approximately $1,200 in 2015 compared with $751 in 2014. Both of these increases are primarily due to our continued expansion into new markets such as Canada, Puerto Rico and Manhattan, investment in new Nordstrom Rack and full-line stores and remodels of existing stores. Over these next five years, we expect that 62% of our net capital expenditures will be for new store openings, relocations and remodels and 34% for ecommerce and information technology. We believe that we have the capacity for additional capital investments should opportunities arise.\n\nChange in Restricted Cash In connection with the $500 debt maturity in the first quarter of 2012, we began making required monthly cash deposits of $100 into a restricted account in December 2011 until we accumulated $500 by April 2012 to retire the debt. As of January 28, 2012, we had accumulated $200. During the first quarter of 2012, the net amount withdrawn from restricted cash of $200 was recorded as cash received from investing activities.\n\nChange in Credit Card Receivables Originated at Third Parties The Nordstrom Visa credit cards allow our customers to make purchases at merchants outside of our stores and accumulate points for our Nordstrom Rewards program. In 2014, the change in credit card receivables from customers’ third-party purchases using their Nordstrom Visa credit cards was relatively flat compared with 2013.\n\nIn 2013, the change in credit card receivables from customers’ third-party purchases using their Nordstrom Visa credit cards decreased to $6, compared with $42 in 2012, as payment rates slightly increased in 2013.\n\nFinancing Activities Net cash used in financing activities was $698 in 2014 compared with $589 in 2013 and $1,333 in 2012. Our financing activities include repurchases of common stock, our short-term and long-term borrowing activity, and payment of dividends.\n\nShort-term and Long-term Borrowing Activity In the fourth quarter of 2013, we issued $665 of 5.00% senior unsecured notes due January 2044 (“2044 Notes”). We used $400 of the proceeds to retire all 6.75% senior unsecured notes due June 2014. We exchanged $201 of the 7.00% senior unsecured notes due January 2038 (“2038 Notes”) for $265 of the 2044 Notes. The $64 in excess of the outstanding principal of the 2038 Notes relates to the lower interest rate and longer maturity of the new 2044 Notes, and we recorded it as part of the discount to be amortized over the term of the 2044 Notes. As of January 31, 2015, we had $598 of outstanding 2044 Notes, net of a $67 discount. The 2044 Notes exchanged for the 2038 Notes and the related discounts represented a non-cash activity of $201 that had no impact to our 2013 Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows. See Note 8: Debt and Credit Facilities in Item 8: Financial Statements and Supplementary Data for additional information. \n\nDuring 2012, we retired our $500 securitized Series 2007-2 Class A & B Notes upon maturity in April 2012 using accumulated restricted cash described in Investing Activities above. \n\n28\n\n## Change in Restricted Cash In connection with the $500 debt maturity in the first quarter of 2012, we began making required monthly cash deposits of $100 into a\n\n## Change in Credit Card Receivables Originated at Third Parties The Nordstrom Visa credit cards allow our customers to make purchases at merchants outside of our stores and accumulate points for our\n\n## Financing Activities Net cash used in financing activities was $698 in 2014 compared with $589 in 2013 and $1,333 in 2012. Our financing activities include\n\n## Short-term and Long-term Borrowing Activity In the fourth quarter of 2013, we issued $665 of 5.00% senior unsecured notes due January 2044 (“2044 Notes”). We used $400 of the" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.961357117875151, + "doc_id": "f133e5e5b1ad4157303761c9f9157202f09510ca0d70fcce09d5512a2411ab2a", + "edit_distance": 0.3581730769230769, + "f1_score": 0.9754500818330604, + "meteor": 0.851516911267847, + "precision": 0.9802631578947368, + "pred_md": "On October 2, 2013, we issued US$1.5 billion of senior notes for total net proceeds of approximately Cdn$1,528 million (US$1,481 million), after deducting the original issue discount and debt issuance costs, with proceeds used for general corporate purposes. The notes issued consisted of the following:\n\n- GLYPH<129> US$850 million of 4.1 % senior notes due in 2023 (the October 2023 Notes )\n- GLYPH<129> US$650 million of 5.45 % senior notes due in 2043 (the October 2043 Notes ).\n\nIn June 2012, we issued Cdn$1.1 billion senior notes for total net proceeds of approximately Cdn$1,091 million, after deducting the original issue discount and debt issuance costs, with the proceeds used to repay outstanding advances under our bank credit facility and for general corporate purposes. The notes issued consisted of the following:\n\n- GLYPH<129> Cdn$500 million of 3.0 % senior notes due 2017 (the June 2017 Notes )\n- GLYPH<129> Cdn$600 million of 4.0 % senior notes due 2022 (the June 2022 Notes ).\n\nEach of the notes issued in 2013 and 2012 are guaranteed by Rogers Communications Partnership and rank equally with all of our other senior unsecured notes and debentures, bank credit and letter of credit facilities. At December 31, 2013, 100 % of the foreign exchange risk on our US$ denominated senior notes and debentures was hedged against fluctuations in foreign exchange and interest rates. See 'Managing foreign currency, interest rates and equity compensation' as described below for information about our hedging transactions.\n\n## Debt Payments and Related Derivative Settlements\n\nIn June 2013, we repaid and bought the entire outstanding principal amount of our US$350 million ($356 million) 6.25 % senior notes. Concurrent with this repayment, the associated Debt Derivatives were also settled at maturity, resulting in an aggregate net payment on settlement of approximately $104 million.\n\nIn September 2013, we paid Cdn$263 million to terminate US$1,075 million ($1,360 million) aggregate notional amount of Debt Derivatives and entered into new Debt Derivatives with a notional amount of US$1,075 million ($1,110 million) under the same terms, but at the lower prevailing foreign exchange rate. See 'Financial Risk Management' for further details.\n\n## Weighted Average Cost of Debt\n\nOur weighted average cost of debt, including short-term borrowings was 5.5 % with weighted average term to maturity of 11.3 years at December 31, 2013, compared to 6.1 % with a weighted average term to maturity of 9.2 years at December 31, 2012. This lower average rate and longer term to maturity primarily reflects the US $2.5 billion of ten and thirty year notes, issued in 2013 at some of the lowest coupon rates ever achieved for Rogers corporate debt, combined with the establishment of our securitization program and the maturity of our 6.25 % senior notes due 2013.\n\n## Debt Tender Offer\n\nOn January 29, 2014, we announced that one of our wholly-owned subsidiaries had commenced cash tender offers for any and all of our US $750 million 6.375 % senior notes due 2014 and our US $350 million 5.500 % senior notes due 2014. The tender offer consideration will be US$1,000 for each $1,000 principal amount of notes (plus accrued and unpaid interest to, but not including, the settlement date) and a consent payment equal to US$2.50 per US$1,000 principal amount of notes.\n\n## Accounts Receivable Securitization\n\nWe received funding of $650 million under our accounts receivable securitization program during 2013. We have committed funding under the program up to a maximum of $900 million. We continue to service and retain substantially all of the risks and rewards relating to the accounts receivable we sold, and therefore, the receivables remain recognized on our statement of financial position and the funding received is recorded as short-term borrowings on our statement of financial position.\n\nThe buyer's interest in these secured trade receivables ranks ahead of our interest. The buyer of our trade receivables has no claim on any of our other assets. The terms of our accounts receivable securitization program are committed by the participating financial institution until expiry on December 31, 2015.\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC.\n\n59\n\nMANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS", + "recall": 0.9706840390879479, + "true_md": "MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AN D ANALYSIS\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 59\n\nOn October 2, 2013, we issued US$1.5 billion of senior notes for total net proceeds of approximately Cdn$1,528 million (US$1,481 million), after deducting the original issue discount and debt issuance costs, with proceeds used for general corporate purposes. The notes issued consisted of the following:\n\nOn January 29, 2014, we announced that one of our wholly-owned subsidiaries had commenced cash tender offers for any and all of our US $750 million 6.375 % senior notes due 2014 and our US $350 million 5.500 % senior notes due 2014. The tender offer consideration will be US$1,000 for each $1,000 principal amount of notes (plus accrued and unpaid interest to, but not including, the settlement date) and a consent payment equal to US$2.50 per US$1,000 principal amount of notes.\n\n- GLYPH<129> US$850 million of 4.1 % senior notes due in 2023 (the October 2023 Notes )\n\n- GLYPH<129> US$650 million of 5.45 % senior notes due in 2043 (the October 2043 Notes ).\n\nIn June 2012, we issued Cdn$1.1 billion senior notes for total net proceeds of approximately Cdn$1,091 million, after deducting the original issue discount and debt issuance costs, with the proceeds used to repay outstanding advances under our bank credit facility and for general corporate purposes. The notes issued consisted of the following:\n\n- GLYPH<129> Cdn$500 million of 3.0 % senior notes due 2017 (the June 2017 Notes )\n\n- GLYPH<129> Cdn$600 million of 4.0 % senior notes due 2022 (the June 2022 Notes ).\n\nEach of the notes issued in 2013 and 2012 are guaranteed by Rogers Communications Partnership and rank equally with all of our other senior unsecured notes and debentures, bank credit and letter of credit facilities. At December 31, 2013, 100 % of the foreign exchange risk on our US$ denominated senior notes and debentures was hedged against fluctuations in foreign exchange and interest rates. See “Managing foreign currency, interest rates and equity compensation” as described below for information about our hedging transactions.\n\nIn June 2013, we repaid and bought the entire outstanding principal amount of our US$350 million ($356 million) 6.25 % senior notes. Concurrent with this repayment, the associated Debt Derivatives were also settled at maturity, resulting in an aggregate net payment on settlement of approximately $104 million.\n\nIn September 2013, we paid Cdn$263 million to terminate US$1,075 million ($1,360 million) aggregate notional amount of Debt Derivatives and entered into new Debt Derivatives with a notional amount of US$1,075 million ($1,110 million) under the same terms, but at the lower prevailing foreign exchange rate. See “Financial Risk Management” for further details.\n\nOur weighted average cost of debt, including short-term borrowings was 5.5 % with weighted average term to maturity of 11.3 years at December 31, 2013, compared to 6.1 % with a weighted average term to maturity of 9.2 years at December 31, 2012. This lower average rate and longer term to maturity primarily reflects the US $2.5 billion of ten and thirty year notes, issued in 2013 at some of the lowest coupon rates ever achieved for Rogers corporate debt, combined with the establishment of our securitization program and the maturity of our 6.25 % senior notes due 2013.\n\nThe buyer’s interest in these secured trade receivables ranks ahead of our interest. The buyer of our trade receivables has no claim on any of our other assets. The terms of our accounts receivable securitization program are committed by the participating financial institution until expiry on December 31, 2015.\n\nWe received funding of $650 million under our accounts receivable securitization program during 2013. We have committed funding under the program up to a maximum of $900 million. We continue to service and retain substantially all of the risks and rewards relating to the accounts receivable we sold, and therefore, the receivables remain recognized on our statement of financial position and the funding received is recorded as short-term borrowings on our statement of financial position.\n\n## Debt Tender Offer\n\n## Accounts Receivable Securitization\n\n## Debt Payments and Related Derivative Settlements\n\n## Weighted Average Cost of Debt" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9485556756326493, + "doc_id": "c32fccb8e12c7f174de461c08d8f58bbab986c14ac7e62329a95af0ee6c17251", + "edit_distance": 0.08096280087527352, + "f1_score": 0.9662921348314606, + "meteor": 0.9694290388603217, + "precision": 0.9772727272727273, + "pred_md": "## Initiatives for Enhancing Customer Satisfaction (CS) and Quality\n\nWorking closely with Group companies, SMFG is taking initiatives to enhance customer satisfaction and the quality of the Group's services and products. SMFG regularly holds its Group Customer Satisfaction Committee meetings to review reports on the analyses of the Voice of the Customers (VOC), and discuss measures to increase customer satisfaction.\n\nSMBC has created the Quality Management Department to establish the structure to proactively utilize the VOC in order to improve the bank's businesses and management. The Quality Management Department is primarily responsible for analyzing the VOC data. Reports prepared by this department are discussed by the CS and Quality Improvement Committee, consisting of the president and directors who are also members of the bank's Management Committee, and such reports are to be proactively applied to enhance the satisfaction of our clients and the quality of our services offered.\n\nConcurrently with these activities, we have been undertaking a wide range of initiatives for improving the customer satisfaction and quality. Such initiatives include offering a toll-free telephone service and conducting surveys to obtain the opinions of our diverse clients visiting our branches and offices, or mailing them such surveys. We also provide training and educational programs to our employees in order to offer the kind of services to further satisfy our clients.\n\n## VOC Database\n\nWe record in the VOC database the opinions of our clients collected mainly at our branches, and we share such database within the bank. Furthermore, such data collected is analyzed and utilized by the Quality Management Department to provide guidance for our branches and propose any improvements to Head Office departments for the overall CS measures for the bank.\n\nHead Office departments also analyze such VOC data and apply the results to make appropriate improvements in our products and services.\n\n## CS and Quality Improvement Committee\n\nThe CS and Quality Improvement Committee, which is chaired by the president of SMBC, meets regularly to review reports on the specific opinions expressed by our clients, and discuss and analyze any monthly changes to the number of opinions collected. The committee also reviews reports on the results of the analyses of the VOC, and considers appropriate improvement measures.\n\nFurthermore, the reports on the regularly held educational programs or initiatives are submitted to the CS and Quality Improvement Committee to further enhance and establish our awareness of 'Our Clients Always Come First.'\n\n## ■ Activities to Obtain and Act on Voice of the Customers\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n49", + "recall": 0.9555555555555556, + "true_md": "Initiatives for Enhancing Customer Satisfaction (CS) and Quality\n\nWorking closely with Group companies, SMFG is taking initiatives to enhance customer satisfaction and the quality of the Group’s services and products. SMFG regularly holds its Group Customer Satisfaction Committee meetings to review reports on the analyses of the Voice of the Customers (VOC), and discuss measures to increase customer satisfaction.\n\nSMBC has created the Quality Management Department to establish the structure to proactively utilize the VOC in order to improve the bank’s businesses and management. The Quality Management Department is primarily responsible for analyzing the VOC data. Reports prepared by this department are discussed by the CS and Quality Improvement Committee, consisting of the president and directors who are also members of the bank’s Management Committee, and such reports are to be proactively applied to enhance the satisfaction of our clients and the quality of our services offered.\n\nConcurrently with these activities, we have been undertaking a wide range of initiatives for improving the customer satisfaction and quality. Such initiatives include offering a toll-free telephone service and conducting surveys to obtain the opinions of our diverse clients visiting our branches and offices, or mailing them such surveys. We also provide training and educational programs to our employees in order to offer the kind of services to further satisfy our clients.\n\nWe record in the VOC database the opinions of our clients collected mainly at our branches, and we share such database within the bank. Furthermore, such data collected is analyzed and utilized by the Quality Management Department to provide guidance for our branches and propose any improvements to Head Office depart- ments for the overall CS measures for the bank.\n\nHead Office departments also analyze such VOC data and apply the results to make appropriate improvements in our products and services.\n\nThe CS and Quality Improvement Committee, which is chaired by the president of SMBC, meets regularly to review reports on the specific opinions expressed by our clients, and discuss and analyze any monthly changes to the number of opinions collected. The committee also reviews reports on the results of the analyses of the VOC, and considers appropriate improvement measures.\n\nFurthermore, the reports on the regularly held educational programs or initiatives are submitted to the CS and Quality Improvement Committee to further enhance and establish our awareness of “Our Clients Always Come First.”\n\n## ■ Activities to Obtain and Act on Voice of the Customers\n\nSMFG 2011 49\n\n## CS and Quality Improvement Committee\n\n## VOC Database" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9693242091662282, + "doc_id": "065faea37a6222fe326364753584d72170c49317f96674f65e94ce67f2538526", + "edit_distance": 0.13861386138613863, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9980122313770442, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nSMFG\n\n## (e) Commodity derivatives\n\nNotes: 1. The above transactions are valued at fair value and the valuation gains (losses) are accounted for in the consolidated statements of income.\n\n2. Fair value of transactions listed on exchange is calculated using the closing prices on the New York Mercantile Exchange and others.\n\nFair value of OTC transactions is calculated based on factors such as price of the relevant commodity and contract term.\n\n3. Commodity derivatives are transactions on fuel and metal.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n117", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nSMFG\n\nNotes: 1. The above transactions are valued at fair value and the valuation gains (losses) are accounted for in the consolidated statements of income.\n\n2. Fair value of transactions listed on exchange is calculated using the closing prices on the New York Mercantile Exchange and others. Fair value of OTC transactions is calculated based on factors such as price of the relevant commodity and contract term.\n\n3. Commodity derivatives are transactions on fuel and metal.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n117\n\n## (e) Commodity derivatives" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5717861142460565, + "doc_id": "4ac62c1f51be9f84458a7d534ea151f09229f885808cbca2ac9416346f8fe32c", + "edit_distance": 0.5812431842966194, + "f1_score": 0.858108108108108, + "meteor": 0.6638237572288485, + "precision": 0.7987421383647799, + "pred_md": "## (4) Self-Assessment, Asset Write-Offs and Provisions, and Disclosure of Problem Assets\n\n(a) Self-Assessment\n\nSMBC conducts rigorous self-assessment of asset quality using criteria based on the Financial Inspection Manual of the Financial Services Agency and the Practical Guideline published by the Japanese Institute of Certified Public Accountants. Self-assessment is the latter stage of the obligor grading process for determining the borrower's ability to fulfill debt obligations, and the obligor grade criteria are consistent with the categories used in self-assessment.\n\nAt the same time, self-assessment is a preparatory task for ensuring SMBC's asset quality and calculating the appropriate level of write-offs and provisions. Each asset is assessed individually for its security and collectibility. Depending on the borrower's current situation, the borrower is assigned to one of five categories: Normal Borrowers, Borrowers Requiring Caution, Potentially Bankrupt Borrowers, Effectively Bankrupt Borrowers, and Bankrupt Borrowers. Based on the borrower's category, claims on the borrower are classified into Classification I, II, III, and IV assets according to their default and impairment risk levels, taking into account such factors as collateral and guarantees. As part of our efforts to bolster risk management throughout the Group, our consolidated subsidiaries carry out self-assessment in substantially the same manner.\n\n## Borrower Categories, Defined\n\n## Asset Classifications, Defined\n\n## (b) Asset Write-Offs and Provisions\n\nIn cases where claims have been determined to be uncollectible, or deemed to be uncollectible, write-offs signify the recognition of losses on the account books with respect to such claims. Writeoffs can be made either in the form of loss recognition by offsetting uncollectible amounts against corresponding balance sheet items, referred to as a direct write-off, or else by recognition of a loan loss provision on a contra-asset account in the amount deemed uncollectible, referred to as an indirect write-off. Recognition of indirect\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n38\n\nwrite-offs is generally known as provision for the reserve for possible loan losses.\n\nSMBC's write-off and provision criteria for each selfassessment borrower category are shown in the table below. As part of our overall measures to strengthen risk management throughout the Group, all consolidated subsidiaries use substantially the same standards as SMBC for write-offs and provisions.\n\n## Self-Assessment Borrower Categories\n\n## Standards for Write-Offs and Provisions\n\nNormal Borrowers\n\nBorrowers Requiring Caution\n\nPotentially Bankrupt Borrowers\n\nEffectively Bankrupt/ Bankrupt Borrowers\n\nGeneral reserve\n\nNotes\n\nThe expected loss amount for the next 12 months is calculated for each grade based on the grade's historical bankruptcy rate, and the total amount is recorded as 'provision for the general reserve for possible loan losses.'\n\nThese assets are divided into groups according to the level of default risk. Amounts are recorded as provisions for the general reserve in proportion to the expected losses based on the historical bankruptcy rate of each group. The groups are 'claims on Substandard Borrowers' and 'claims on other Borrowers Requiring Caution.' The latter group is further subdivided according to the borrower's financial position, credit situation, and other factors. Further, when cash flows can be estimated reasonably accurately, the discounted cash flow (DCF) method is applied mainly to large claims for calculating the provision amount.\n\nA provision for the specific reserve for possible loan losses is made for the portion of Classification III assets (calculated for each borrower) not secured by collateral, guarantee, or other means. Further, when cash flows can be estimated reasonably accurately, the DCF method is applied mainly to large claims for calculating the provision amount.\n\nClassification III asset and Classification IV asset amounts for each borrower are calculated, and the full amount of Classification IV assets (deemed to be uncollectible or of no value) is written off in principle and provision for the specific reserve is made for the full amount of Classification III assets.\n\nProvisions made in accordance with general inherent default risk of loans, unrelated to specific individual loans or other claims\n\nProvisions made for claims that have been found uncollectible in part or in total (individually evaluated claims)\n\nSpecific reserve\n\n## Discounted Cash Flow Method\n\nSMBC uses the discounted cash flow (DCF) method to calculate the provision amounts for large claims on Substandard Borrowers and Potentially Bankrupt Borrowers when the cash flow from repayment of principal and interest received can be estimated reasonably accurately. SMBC then makes provisions equivalent to the excess of the book value of the claims over the said cash inflow discounted by the initial contractual interest rate or the effective interest rate at the time of origination. One of the major advantages of the DCF method over conventional methods of calculating the provision amount is that it enables effective evaluation of each individual borrower. However, as the provision amount depends on the future cash flow estimated on the basis of the borrower's business reconstruction plan and the DCF formula input values, such as the discount rate and the probability of the borrower going into bankruptcy, SMBC makes every effort to utilize up-to-date and correct data to realize the most accurate estimates possible.", + "recall": 0.927007299270073, + "true_md": "## (4) Self-Assessment, Asset Write-Offs and Provisions, and Disclosure of Problem Assets\n\n## (a) Self-Assessment\n\nSMBC conducts rigorous self-assessment of asset quality using criteria based on the Financial Inspection Manual of the Financial Services Agency and the Practical Guideline published by the Japanese Institute of Certified Public Accountants. Self-assessment is the latter stage of the obligor grading process for determining the borrower’s ability to fulfill debt obligations, and the obligor grade criteria are consistent with the categories used in self-assessment.\n\nAt the same time, self-assessment is a preparatory task for ensuring SMBC’s asset quality and calculating the appropriate level of write-offs and provisions. Each asset is assessed individually for its security and collectibility. Depending on the borrower’s cur- rent situation, the borrower is assigned to one of five categories: Normal Borrowers, Borrowers Requiring Caution, Potentially Bankrupt Borrowers, Effectively Bankrupt Borrowers, and Bankrupt Borrowers. Based on the borrower’s category, claims on the bor- rower are classified into Classification I, II, III, and IV assets accord- ing to their default and impairment risk levels, taking into account such factors as collateral and guarantees. As part of our efforts to bolster risk management throughout the Group, our consolidated subsidiaries carry out self-assessment in substantially the same manner.\n\nIn cases where claims have been determined to be uncollectible, or deemed to be uncollectible, write-offs signify the recognition of losses on the account books with respect to such claims. Write- offs can be made either in the form of loss recognition by offsetting uncollectible amounts against corresponding balance sheet items, referred to as a direct write-off, or else by recognition of a loan loss provision on a contra-asset account in the amount deemed uncol- lectible, referred to as an indirect write-off. Recognition of indirect \n\nSMBC uses the discounted cash flow (DCF) method to calculate the provision amounts for large claims on Substandard Borrowers and Potentially Bankrupt Borrowers when the cash flow from repayment of principal and interest received can be estimated reasonably accurately. SMBC then makes provisions equivalent to the excess of the book value of the claims over the said cash inflow discounted by the initial contractual interest rate or the effective interest rate at the time of origination. One of the major advantages of the DCF method over conventional methods of calculating the provision amount is that it enables effective evalua- tion of each individual borrower. However, as the provision amount depends on the future cash flow estimated on the basis of the borrower’s business reconstruction plan and the DCF formula input values, such as the discount rate and the probability of the borrower going into bankruptcy, SMBC makes every effort to uti- lize up-to-date and correct data to realize the most accurate esti- mates possible.\n\nSMBC’s write-off and provision criteria for each self- assessment borrower category are shown in the table below. As part of our overall measures to strengthen risk management throughout the Group, all consolidated subsidiaries use substantially the same standards as SMBC for write-offs and provisions.\n\nwrite-offs is generally known as provision for the reserve for possible loan losses.\n\n## Discounted Cash Flow Method\n\n## (b) Asset Write-Offs and Provisions\n\nSMFG 2011 38" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8794080115781636, + "doc_id": "e3b7277b10aa639a718efe1c949e0ff6d48d6521fe6c8403621e582509a51ad1", + "edit_distance": 0.14078374455732948, + "f1_score": 0.9628318584070796, + "meteor": 0.9130071321653122, + "precision": 0.9611307420494699, + "pred_md": "## management's Discussion and analysis\n\nD\n\nollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\n## Urbanization Leading to Population Growth in Killam's Core Markets\n\nThe urbanization trend is strong across Atlantic Canada, driving population growth in each of the core cities. The net change in population in Killam's core markets, as measured by Statistics Canada in the 2011 Census, is shown in the following graph. Immigration is also contributing to population growth in the urban centres.\n\n## 47% of Killam's Apartment NOI Generated in Halifax\n\n47% of Killam's 2013 apartment NOI was earned in Halifax. Killam's investment in Halifax corresponds to the city's rental unit base as a percentage of the rental units in Atlantic Canada, with Halifax rental units accounting for 46% of the total rental universe as measured by CMHC.\n\nHalifax is the largest city in the region and home to 17% of Atlantic Canadians. It is the economic hub of the region and attracts a diverse population base, both from rural areas of Nova Scotia and internationally. With six degree-granting universities and three large community college campuses, Halifax is home to approximately 35,000 students per year, including 4,000 international students.\n\nHalifax's employment base is well diversified, with jobs focused around retail and wholesale trade, health care, public administration and education among the largest sectors. Halifax is home to the largest Canadian Forces Base by number of personnel in Canada and the Department of National Defence is the largest employer in the city.\n\nManagement expects population growth in Halifax to exceed recent growth levels due to large-scale projects taking place in the region. Irving Shipyard's award of the $25 billion, 25-year shipbuilding contract will have positive long-term implications for Halifax and Atlantic Canada. The contract is expected to generate an average of 8,500 direct and indirect jobs, and up to 11,500 jobs during its peak year in 2020. The shipyard is scheduled to begin to cut steel in 2015. In the meantime, Irving is working on $350 million in infrastructure upgrades to facilitate the work. Investment in offshore energy in Nova Scotia is also projected to lead to future growth for both Halifax and Nova Scotia with $2 billion in exploration commitments awarded in the last two years.\n\nWith a diversified asset base of almost 5,000 centrally located apartment units in Halifax and 1,100 MHC sites in and around the city, Killam expects to benefit from increased demand for housing that will come from economic and population growth.\n\n## Growing Investment in St. John's\n\nSt. John's, NL has been transformed by offshore investments, with exceptionally strong economic growth in recent years. The strength of the oil business has resulted in both a growing population base in the city and a 21% increase in the average home price over the last three years as per CMHC's Fall 2013 Housing Market Outlook. The decrease in home affordability coupled with an absence of new rental unit construction for the last twenty years, is generating strong demand for rental units in St. John's.\n\nWith 813 apartment units in the city, Killam has a 22% market share of the rental product, as measured by CMHC, including a new 71-unit property development which opened in 2013. the company's highest rental growth and noi growth has been earned in st. John's over the last four years. Despite this, the current average rent for a two-bedroom unit in St. John's is $864 per CMHC, which is very affordable.\n\n32\n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013", + "recall": 0.9645390070921985, + "true_md": "Management’s Discussion and Analysis Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\nManagement’s Discussion and Analysis Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\n## Urbanization Leading to Population Growth in Killam’s Core Markets\n\nThe urbanization trend is strong across Atlantic Canada, driving population growth in each of the core cities. The net change in population in Killam’s core markets, as measured by Statistics Canada in the 2011 Census, is shown in the following graph. Immigration is also contributing to population growth in the urban centres.\n\n47% of Killam’s 2013 apartment NOI was earned in Halifax. Killam’s investment in Halifax corresponds to the city’s rental unit base as a percentage of the rental units in Atlantic Canada, with Halifax rental units accounting for 46% of the total rental universe as measured by CMHC.\n\nHalifax is the largest city in the region and home to 17% of Atlantic Canadians. It is the economic hub of the region and attracts a diverse population base, both from rural areas of Nova Scotia and internationally. With six degree‑granting universities and three large community college campuses, Halifax is home to approximately 35,000 students per year, including 4,000 international students. \n\nHalifax’s employment base is well diversified, with jobs focused around retail and wholesale trade, health care, public administration and education among the largest sectors. Halifax is home to the largest Canadian Forces Base by number of personnel in Canada and the Department of National Defence is the largest employer in the city.\n\nManagement expects population growth in Halifax to exceed recent growth levels due to large‑scale projects taking place in the region. Irving Shipyard’s award of the $25 billion, 25‑year shipbuilding contract will have positive long‑term implications for Halifax and Atlantic Canada. The contract is expected to generate an average of 8,500 direct and indirect jobs, and up to 11,500 jobs during its peak year in 2020. The shipyard is scheduled to begin to cut steel in 2015. In the meantime, Irving is working on $350 million in infrastructure upgrades to facilitate the work. Investment in offshore energy in Nova Scotia is also projected to lead to future growth for both Halifax and Nova Scotia with $2 billion in exploration commitments awarded in the last two years. \n\nWith a diversified asset base of almost 5,000 centrally located apartment units in Halifax and 1,100 MHC sites in and around the city, Killam expects to benefit from increased demand for housing that will come from economic and population growth.\n\nSt. John’s, NL has been transformed by offshore investments, with exceptionally strong economic growth in recent years. The strength of the oil business has resulted in both a growing population base in the city and a 21% increase in the average home price over the last three years as per CMHC’s Fall 2013 Housing Market Outlook. The decrease in home affordability coupled with an absence of new rental unit construction for the last twenty years, is generating strong demand for rental units in St. John’s. \n\nWith 813 apartment units in the city, Killam has a 22% market share of the rental product, as measured by CMHC, including a new 71‑unit property development which opened in 2013. the company’s highest rental growth and noi growth has been earned in st. John’s over the last four years. Despite this, the current average rent for a two‑bedroom unit in St. John’s is $864 per CMHC, which is very affordable.\n\n## Growing Investment in St. John’s\n\n## 47% of Killam’s Apartment NOI Generated in Halifax\n\n32 Killam ProPerties inc | 2013" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9154088097886002, + "doc_id": "5613d85b2d992d7ba41a16fab9ae18f6196ef8805f6cdfbe5dad703a187d7d04", + "edit_distance": 0.4160346695557963, + "f1_score": 0.9737704918032788, + "meteor": 0.8604417795155216, + "precision": 0.9705882352941176, + "pred_md": "## management's Discussion and analysis\n\nDollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\n## Future Accounting Policy Changes\n\nIFRS 9 - Financial Instruments ('IFRS 9')\n\nIFRS 9, as issued in 2010, reflects the first phase of the IASB's work on the replacement of IAS 39 and applies to classification and measurement of financial assets and financial liabilities as defined in IAS 39. The standard was initially effective for annual periods beginning on or after January 1, 2013. In November 2013, Chapter 6 of IFRS 9 on hedge accounting was published. At the same time, Chapter 7, containing the effective date and transition provisions, was amended to remove the mandatory effective date of IFRS 9. This was intended to provide sufficient time for preparers to make the transition to the new requirements. The Company may still choose to apply IFRS immediately, but is not required to do so.\n\nIn subsequent phases, the IASB is addressing impairment of financial assets. The adoption of the first phase of IFRS will have an effect on the classification and measurement of the Company's financial assets, but will not have an impact on the classification measurements of financial liabilities. The Company is in the process of assessing the impact IFRS 9 may have on future financial statements.\n\nIFRIC Interpretation 21 - Levies ('IFRIC 21')\n\nIFRIC 21 clarifies that an entity recognises a liability for a levy when the activity that triggers payment, as identified by the relevant legislation, occurs. IFRIC 21 is effective for annual periods beginning on or after January 1, 2014. The Company is in the process of assessing the impact IFRIC 21 may have on future financial statements.\n\n## Disclosure Controls and Procedures and Internal Controls\n\nThe Company's management, including the Chief Executive Officer and the Chief Financial Officer, does not expect that the Company's Disclosure Controls and Procedures and Internal Controls will prevent or detect all error and all fraud. Because of the inherent limitations in all control systems, an evaluation of controls can provide only reasonable, not absolute, assurance that all control issues and instances of fraud or error, if any, within the company have been detected.\n\n## Disclosure Controls and Procedures\n\nAs of December 31, 2013, the Company's management evaluated the effectiveness of the operation of its disclosure controls and procedures ('Disclosure Controls'), as defined under rules adopted by the Canadian Securities Administrators. This evaluation was performed under the supervision of, and with the participation of, the Chief Executive Officer and the Chief Financial Officer.\n\nDisclosure controls and procedures are designed to ensure that information required to be disclosed in documents filed with securities regulatory authorities is recorded, processed, summarized and reported on a timely basis, and is accumulated and communicated to the Company's management, including the Chief Executive Officer and the Chief Financial Officer, as appropriate, to allow timely decisions regarding required disclosure.\n\nBased on the evaluation of Disclosure Controls, the Chief Executive Officer and the Chief Financial Officer have concluded that, subject to the inherent limitations noted above, the Company's Disclosure Controls are effective in ensuring that material information relating to the Company and its consolidated subsidiaries is made known to the Company's management on a timely basis by others within those entities, and is included as appropriate in this mD&a.\n\n## Internal Controls over Financial Reportin g\n\nInternal controls over financial reporting ('ICFR') are designed to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of the Company's financial reporting and its preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with IFRS. Management's documentation and assessment of the effectiveness of the Company's ICFR continues as of the date of this MD&A with the focus on processes and controls in areas identified as being 'key risks'.\n\nAs of the financial year ended December 31, 2013, the certifying Officers have evaluated the design and effectiveness of such ICFR, or caused them to be designed and evaluated under their supervision. The certifying Officers have concluded that the design and effectiveness of ICFR were operating effectively as at December 31, 2013, to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with IFRS. The certifying Officers have evaluated whether there were any changes to the Company's ICFR during the year ended December 31, 2013 that have materially affected, or are reasonably likely to materially affect its ICFR. No changes were identified through their evaluation.\n\n## Subsequent Events\n\non January 20, 2014, and February 18, 2014, the company announced dividends of $0.05 per share, payable on February 17, 2014, and march 17, 2014, to shareholders of record on January 31, 2014, and February 28, 2014.\n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013\n\n63", + "recall": 0.9769736842105263, + "true_md": "Management’s Discussion and Analysis Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\nIFRS 9, as issued in 2010, reflects the first phase of the IASB’s work on the replacement of IAS 39 and applies to classification and measurement of financial assets and financial liabilities as defined in IAS 39. The standard was initially effective for annual periods beginning on or after January 1, 2013. In November 2013, Chapter 6 of IFRS 9 on hedge accounting was published. At the same time, Chapter 7, containing the effective date and transition provisions, was amended to remove the mandatory effective date of IFRS 9. This was intended to provide sufficient time for preparers to make the transition to the new requirements. The Company may still choose to apply IFRS immediately, but is not required to do so. \n\nIFRIC 21 clarifies that an entity recognises a liability for a levy when the activity that triggers payment, as identified by the relevant legislation, occurs. IFRIC 21 is effective for annual periods beginning on or after January 1, 2014. The Company is in the process of assessing the impact IFRIC 21 may have on future financial statements.\n\nThe Company’s management, including the Chief Executive Officer and the Chief Financial Officer, does not expect that the Company’s Disclosure Controls and Procedures and Internal Controls will prevent or detect all error and all fraud. Because of the inherent limitations in all control systems, an evaluation of controls can provide only reasonable, not absolute, assurance that all control issues and instances of fraud or error, if any, within the company have been detected.\n\nAs of December 31, 2013, the Company’s management evaluated the effectiveness of the operation of its disclosure controls and procedures (“Disclosure Controls”), as defined under rules adopted by the Canadian Securities Administrators. This evaluation was performed under the supervision of, and with the participation of, the Chief Executive Officer and the Chief Financial Officer.\n\nDisclosure controls and procedures are designed to ensure that information required to be disclosed in documents filed with securities regulatory authorities is recorded, processed, summarized and reported on a timely basis, and is accumulated and communicated to the Company’s management, including the Chief Executive Officer and the Chief Financial Officer, as appropriate, to allow timely decisions regarding required disclosure.\n\nBased on the evaluation of Disclosure Controls, the Chief Executive Officer and the Chief Financial Officer have concluded that, subject to the inherent limitations noted above, the Company’s Disclosure Controls are effective in ensuring that material information relating to the Company and its consolidated subsidiaries is made known to the Company’s management on a timely basis by others within those entities, and is included as appropriate in this mD&a.\n\nInternal controls over financial reporting (“ICFR”) are designed to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of the Company’s financial reporting and its preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with IFRS. Management’s documentation and assessment of the effectiveness of the Company’s ICFR continues as of the date of this MD&A with the focus on processes and controls in areas identified as being “key risks”.\n\non January 20, 2014, and February 18, 2014, the company announced dividends of $0.05 per share, payable on February 17, 2014, and march 17, 2014, to shareholders of record on January 31, 2014, and February 28, 2014.\n\n## Future Accounting Policy Changes\n\nIn subsequent phases, the IASB is addressing impairment of financial assets. The adoption of the first phase of IFRS will have an effect on the classification and measurement of the Company’s financial assets, but will not have an impact on the classification measurements of financial liabilities. The Company is in the process of assessing the impact IFRS 9 may have on future financial statements.\n\n## Disclosure Controls and Procedures and Internal Controls\n\n## IFRIC Interpretation 21 ‑ Levies (“IFRIC 21”)\n\n## Disclosure Controls and Procedures\n\n## Internal Controls over Financial Reportin g\n\n## Subsequent Events\n\nAs of the financial year ended December 31, 2013, the certifying Officers have evaluated the design and effectiveness of such ICFR, or caused them to be designed and evaluated under their supervision. The certifying Officers have concluded that the design and effectiveness of ICFR were operating effectively as at December 31, 2013, to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with IFRS. The certifying Officers have evaluated whether there were any changes to the Company’s ICFR during the year ended December 31, 2013 that have materially affected, or are reasonably likely to materially affect its ICFR. No changes were identified through their evaluation.\n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013 63\n\n## IFRS 9 ‑ Financial Instruments (“IFRS 9”)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.86559563845886, + "doc_id": "0323a32581dc697bde1c85775a8ce0f0cd1ac0b6913066076d2ce5dca12799c7", + "edit_distance": 0.8719758064516129, + "f1_score": 0.9512820512820511, + "meteor": 0.6586247642765515, + "precision": 0.9686684073107049, + "pred_md": "## Diversity\n\nThe Company has a policy to improve the diversity of its workforce over time by identifying women and individuals from under-represented backgrounds for recruitment, and by rewarding and promoting employees on the basis of performance.\n\nHowever, at this stage of its development, the Company has a small Board of Directors, and a small management team which is geographically dispersed and because of the industry in which the Company operates, the Board does not consider it to be practicable to set measurable objectives to achieve greater gender diversity at this time.\n\nIn addition, the Board acknowledges the benefits of seeking to improve gender diversity at all levels in the Company over time and will keep this issue under review.\n\nThe Company aims to foster continuous improvement in the area of diversity; building on achievement realised through the implementation of historical diversity initiatives, by applying principles successfully used at our leading operation in this area, to other parts of the business.\n\nOur flagship 'Chatree' Mine in Thailand boasts the enviable statistic of having equal representation by women on the senior management team. Recruitment, training and promotion principles employed at Chatree are currently being applied to our 'Challenger' Mine in Australia, where we currently have 14% representation of women across the senior management and professional categories and to other parts of the business.\n\nThere is currently no representation by women on our Board of Directors. Whilst this is in part reflective of the relatively small size of the Board and stage of development of key elements of the business, it forms part of an overall business review process to consider the issue of gender diversity at this level and will be the subject of ongoing review.\n\nThe Company considers that it will benefit from its ongoing commitment to promote a diverse workforce with treatment of employees and future employees on the basis of merit, abilities and potential, regardless of gender, colour, ethnic or national origin, race, disability, age, sexual orientation, gender reassignment, socioeconomic background, religious or political belief, non / trade union membership, family circumstances or other irrelevant distinction.\n\nThe Company has set various criteria and procedures in order to support equality and diversity in the workforce and applies these principles to:\n\n- 〉 Provide fair access to workplace opportunities and benefits, including internal promotion, leadership development, flexible work practices and fair and comparable wages;\n- 〉 Attracting and retaining a skilled and diverse workforce;\n- 〉 Creating an inclusive workplace culture where discriminatory behaviour is unacceptable; and\n- 〉 Providing an effective grievance mechanism for employees.\n\n## Current Proportion of Women Employees\n\n## Share Trading Policy\n\nIn the interests of shareholder confidence and compliance with insider trading laws, the Company has formal policies governing the trading of the Company's securities by Directors, officers and employees. Details of Directors' shareholdings are disclosed in the Directors' Report.\n\nThe policy prohibits Directors and employees from engaging in short-term trading of any of the Company's securities and buying or selling the Company's securities if they possess unpublished, price-sensitive information.\n\nDirectors and senior management may buy or sell Company securities in the four week period following significant announcements by the Company, including the release of the quarterly report, half-yearly results, the preliminary annual results and the lodgement of the Company's Annual Report (subject to the prohibition of dealing in the Company's securities if they possess unpublished price sensitive information).\n\nDirectors and senior management must also receive approval from the Chairman before buying or selling Company securities.\n\nThe Company's Share Trading Policy is available in the 'Corporate Governance' section of the Company's website.\n\n37\n\nCorporate Governance Statement\n\n## Communication with Shareholders and Continuous Disclosure\n\nThe Company is committed to providing relevant and timely information to its shareholders in accordance with its continuous disclosure obligations under the ASX Listing Rules and the Corporations Act 2001 (Cth).\n\nInformation is communicated to shareholders through the distribution of the Company's Annual Report and other communications. All releases are posted on the Company's website and released to the ASX in a timely manner.\n\nThe Company has practices in place throughout the year governing who may authorise and make disclosures and the method by which the market is to be informed of any price sensitive information.\n\nThe Company Secretary is responsible for communications with the ASX and ensuring that the Company meets its continuous disclosure obligations.\n\nThe Company's Continuous Disclosure is available in the 'Corporate Governance' section of the Company's website.\n\n## Annual General Meeting\n\nAll shareholders are encouraged to attend and participate in the Company's Annual General Meeting. Shareholders may attend in person or send a proxy as their representative.\n\nThe Company's external auditor is routinely invited to and attends the Annual General Meeting in order to respond to questions raised by shareholders relating to the content and conduct of the audit and accounting policies adopted by the Company in relation to the preparation of the financial statements.\n\n## Corporate Governance Disclosure\n\nThe Company's governance policies and procedures comply in all substantial respects with the Australian Securities Exchange Corporate Governance Principles and Recommendations with 2010 Amendments. The following table compares the ASX Recommendations and the Company's corporate governance policies and practices.\n\ncontinued\n\nu\n\nCorporate Governance Statement", + "recall": 0.9345088161209067, + "true_md": "37 Corporate Governance Statement\n\nCorporate Governance Statement\n\nThe Company’s governance policies and proce- dures comply in all substantial respects with the Australian Securities Exchange Corporate Governance Principles and Recommendations with 2010 Amendments. The following table compares the ASX Recommendations and the Company’s corporate governance policies and practices. \n\nDirectors and senior management must also receive approval from the Chairman before buying or selling Company securities.\n\nThe Company’s Share Trading Policy is available in the ‘Corporate Governance’ section of the Company’s website.\n\nThe Company considers that it will benefit from its ongoing commitment to promote a diverse workforce with treatment of employees and future employees on the basis of merit, abilities and potential, regardless of gender, colour, ethnic or national origin, race, disability, age, sexual orientation, gender reassignment, socio- economic background, religious or political belief, non / trade union membership, family circumstances or other irrelevant distinction.\n\n## Corporate Governance Disclosure\n\nDirectors and senior management may buy or sell Company securities in the four week period following significant announcements by the Company, including the release of the quarterly report, half-yearly results, the preliminary annual results and the lodgement of the Company’s Annual Report (subject to the prohibition of dealing in the Company’s securities if they possess unpublished price sensitive information).\n\nThe Company has set various criteria and proce- dures in order to support equality and diversity in the workforce and applies these principles to:\n\nThere is currently no representation by women on our Board of Directors. Whilst this is in part reflective of the relatively small size of the Board and stage of development of key elements of the business, it forms part of an overall business review process to consider the issue of gender diversity at this level and will be the subject of ongoing review.\n\nThe policy prohibits Directors and employees from engaging in short-term trading of any of the Company’s securities and buying or selling the Company’s securities if they possess unpub- lished, price-sensitive information.\n\nThe Company’s external auditor is routinely invited to and attends the Annual General Meeting in order to respond to questions raised by shareholders relating to the content and conduct of the audit and accounting policies adopted by the Company in relation to the preparation of the financial statements.\n\nAll shareholders are encouraged to attend and participate in the Company’s Annual General Meeting. Shareholders may attend in person or send a proxy as their representative.\n\nIn the interests of shareholder confidence and compliance with insider trading laws, the Company has formal policies governing the trading of the Company’s securities by Directors, officers and employees. Details of Directors’ shareholdings are disclosed in the Directors’ Report.\n\nOur flagship ‘Chatree’ Mine in Thailand boasts the enviable statistic of having equal representa- tion by women on the senior management team. Recruitment, training and promotion principles employed at Chatree are currently being applied to our ‘Challenger’ Mine in Australia, where we currently have 14% representation of women across the senior management and professional categories and to other parts of the business.\n\n## Annual General Meeting\n\n## Share Trading Policy\n\nThe Company’s Continuous Disclosure is avail- able in the ‘Corporate Governance’ section of the Company’s website.\n\nThe Company Secretary is responsible for communications with the ASX and ensuring that the Company meets its continuous disclosure obligations.\n\nThe Company has practices in place throughout the year governing who may authorise and make disclosures and the method by which the market is to be informed of any price sensitive information.\n\nThe Company aims to foster continuous improve- ment in the area of diversity; building on achieve- ment realised through the implementation of historical diversity initiatives, by applying princi- ples successfully used at our leading operation in this area, to other parts of the business.\n\nIn addition, the Board acknowledges the bene- fits of seeking to improve gender diversity at all levels in the Company over time and will keep this issue under review.\n\nHowever, at this stage of its development, the Company has a small Board of Directors, and a small management team which is geographically dispersed and because of the industry in which the Company operates, the Board does not consider it to be practicable to set measurable objectives to achieve greater gender diversity at this time. \n\nThe Company has a policy to improve the diver- sity of its workforce over time by identifying women and individuals from under-represented backgrounds for recruitment, and by rewarding and promoting employees on the basis of performance. \n\nThe Company is committed to providing relevant and timely information to its shareholders in accordance with its continuous disclosure obligations under the ASX Listing Rules and the Corporations Act 2001 (Cth).\n\nInformation is communicated to shareholders through the distribution of the Company’s Annual Report and other communications. All releases are posted on the Company’s website and released to the ASX in a timely manner.\n\n## Communication with Shareholders and Continuous Disclosure\n\n## Diversity\n\n## Current Proportion of Women Employees\n\n- 〉 Provide fair access to workplace opportuni- ties and benefits, including internal promo- tion, leadership development, flexible work practices and fair and comparable wages;\n\n- 〉 Attracting and retaining a skilled and diverse workforce;\n\n- 〉 Creating an inclusive workplace culture where discriminatory behaviour is unacceptable; and\n\n- 〉 Providing an effective grievance mechanism for employees." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9180704865059869, + "doc_id": "e02bfff18c518e983079972190784dfe2ac4dd92225202da82e82ae73dd6b872", + "edit_distance": 0.48229665071770333, + "f1_score": 0.9590062111801243, + "meteor": 0.8823895529364582, + "precision": 0.9796954314720813, + "pred_md": "## Revenue\n\nTotal revenue for the Group for the year was $329,282,000 down 8% from the previous year. Gold revenue decreased by 8% to $302,996,000 and silver revenue decreased by 5% to $26,286,000.\n\nThe decrease in gold revenue reflects a lower gold price and a decrease in gold production from Challenger partially offset by an increase in gold production from the Chatree Mine.\n\nThe average US$ gold price received was US$1,588 (2012: US$1,663). The decrease in silver revenue reflects a lower silver price received of US$28/oz (2012: US$32/oz).\n\n## Costs\n\nThe overall increase in cost of sales to $195,064,000 including royalties and before depreciation and amortisation largely reflects increased throughput and production from the Chatree Mine due to the expanded Chatree process plant. On a unit cost basis, total cash costs for the Group were US$888/oz up from $US720/oz in the previous year. The total unit cash costs for Challenger for the year were US$1,135/oz (2012: US$862/oz), with the increase mainly due to lower throughput and production from the Challenger Mine. The total unit cash costs for Chatree for the year were US$767/oz up from US$618/oz in 2012.\n\n## Impairment of assets\n\nFollowing a strategic review of the Challenger Gold Operations a new mine plan focussing mainly on the Challenger West orebody was implemented effective 1 July 2013.\n\nAs a result of the new mine plan together with the continuing low gold price environment, an assessment was conducted as at 30 June 2013 of the carrying value of the Challenger Gold Operations and associated assets. This assessment resulted in a pre-tax impairment of $311,850,000 ($291,259,000 post-tax).\n\nA review of the carrying value of all regional greenfield exploration projects was also conducted which resulted in the write down of $6,141,000 primarily against the Barton West Mineral Sands project in South Australia and the write down of $14,280,000 against the carrying value of exploration projects in Thailand that fall outside the Chatree Mine area of influence.\n\n## Depreciation and amortisation\n\nThe increase in depreciation and amortisation to $85,595,000 reflects amortisation of the higher capitalised development costs at the Challenger Mine, depreciation of the second plant at Chatree and commencement of amortising the capital cost of the Chatree Tailings Storage Facility #2.\n\n## Exploration\n\nExploration expense was $675,000 and relates to exploration licences in Chile that were relinquished or disposed of during the year.\n\n## Cash flow\n\nOperating cash inflow was $85,020,000. Net investing cash outflow was $142,425,000. Net cash outflows from financing activities was $1,691,000, including a drawdown (net of transaction costs) of $36,700,000 of the multicurrency and syndicated loan facilities following a loan restructure by Kingsgate's Thai subsidiary Akara Resources Public Company Limited ('Akara'), net repayment (net of transaction costs) of $20,000,000 of the corporate loan facility, and $19,409,000 dividends paid during the year.\n\n## Material business risks\n\nThe Group uses a range of assumptions and forecasts in determining estimates of production and financial performance. There is uncertainty associated with these assumptions that could result in actual performance differing from expected outcomes.\n\nThe material business risks that may have an impact on the operating and financial prospects of the Group are:\n\n## Revenue\n\nRevenue, and hence operating margins, are exposed to fluctuations including currency in the gold price and to a degree in the silver price. Management continually monitors operating margins and responds to changes to commodity prices as necessary to address this risk, including reviewing mine plans and entering into forward gold sale contracts.\n\nChanges in the gold and silver price also impact assessments of the feasibility of exploration and the Group's two development projects, Nueva Esperanza and Bowdens.\n\n## Mineral reserves and resources\n\nOre reserves and mineral resources are estimates. These estimates are substantially based on interpretations of geological data obtained from drill holes and other sampling techniques. Actual mineralisation or geological conditions may be different from those predicted and, as a consequence, there is a risk that any part or all of mineral resources will not be converted into reserves.\n\nMarket price fluctuations of gold and silver, as well as increased production and capital costs, may render ore reserves unprofitable to develop at a particular site for periods of time.\n\n## Replacement of depleted reserves\n\nThe Group aims to continually replace reserves depleted by production to maintain production levels over the long term. Reserves can be replaced by expanding known ore bodies, locating new deposits or making acquisitions.\n\nAs a result, there is a risk that depletion of reserves will not be offset by discoveries or acquisitions. The mineral base may decline if reserves are mined without adequate replacement and as a consequence the Group may not be able to sustain production beyond the current mine lives, based on current production rates.\n\n## Mining risks and insurance risks\n\nThe mining industry is subject to significant risks and hazards, including environmental hazards, industrial accidents, unusual or unexpected geological conditions, unavailability of materials and unplanned equipment failures. These risks and hazards could result in significant costs or delays that could have a material adverse impact on the Group's financial performance and position.\n\nThe Group maintains insurance to cover some of these risks and hazards at levels that are believed to be appropriate for the circumstances surrounding each identified risk, however there remains the possibility that the level of insurance may not provide sufficient coverage for losses related to specific loss events.\n\ncontinued\n\nu\n\nDirectors' Report", + "recall": 0.9391727493917275, + "true_md": "Total revenue for the Group for the year was $329,282,000 down 8% from the previous year. Gold revenue decreased by 8% to $302,996,000 and silver revenue decreased by 5% to $26,286,000.\n\nThe decrease in gold revenue reflects a lower gold price and a decrease in gold production from Challenger partially offset by an increase in gold production from the Chatree Mine.\n\nThe average US$ gold price received was US$1,588 (2012: US$1,663). The decrease in silver revenue reflects a lower silver price received of US$28/oz (2012: US$32/oz).\n\nThe overall increase in cost of sales to $195,064,000 including royalties and before depreciation and amortisation largely reflects increased throughput and production from the Chatree Mine due to the expanded Chatree process plant. On a unit cost basis, total cash costs for the Group were US$888/oz up from $US720/oz in the previous year. The total unit cash costs for Challenger for the year were US$1,135/oz (2012: US$862/oz), with the increase mainly due to lower throughput and production from the Challenger Mine. The total unit cash costs for Chatree for the year were US$767/oz up from US$618/oz in 2012.\n\nFollowing a strategic review of the Challenger Gold Operations a new mine plan focussing mainly on the Challenger West orebody was implemented effective 1 July 2013.\n\nAs a result of the new mine plan together with the continuing low gold price environment, an assessment was conducted as at 30 June 2013 of the carrying value of the Challenger Gold Operations and associated assets. This assess- ment resulted in a pre-tax impairment of $311,850,000 ($291,259,000 post-tax).\n\nA review of the carrying value of all regional greenfield exploration projects was also conducted which resulted in the write down of $6,141,000 primarily against the Barton West Mineral Sands project in South Australia and the write down of $14,280,000 against the carrying value of exploration projects in Thailand that fall outside the Chatree Mine area of influence.\n\nRevenue, and hence operating margins, are exposed to fluctuations including currency in the gold price and to a degree in the silver price. Management continually monitors operating margins and responds to changes to commodity prices as necessary to address this risk, including reviewing mine plans and entering into forward gold sale contracts.\n\nChanges in the gold and silver price also impact assessments of the feasibility of exploration and the Group’s two development projects, Nueva Esperanza and Bowdens.\n\nThe Group maintains insurance to cover some of these risks and hazards at levels that are believed to be appropriate for the circumstances surrounding each identified risk, however there remains the possibility that the level of insur- ance may not provide sufficient coverage for losses related to specific loss events.\n\nThe material business risks that may have an impact on the operating and financial prospects of the Group are:\n\nThe Group uses a range of assumptions and forecasts in determining estimates of produc- tion and financial performance. There is uncer- tainty associated with these assumptions that could result in actual performance differing from expected outcomes. \n\nThe mining industry is subject to significant risks and hazards, including environmental hazards, industrial accidents, unusual or unex- pected geological conditions, unavailability of materials and unplanned equipment failures. These risks and hazards could result in signifi- cant costs or delays that could have a material adverse impact on the Group’s financial perfor- mance and position. \n\nOperating cash inflow was $85,020,000. Net investing cash outflow was $142,425,000. Net cash outflows from financing activities was $1,691,000, including a drawdown (net of transaction costs) of $36,700,000 of the multi- currency and syndicated loan facilities following a loan restructure by Kingsgate’s Thai subsidiary Akara Resources Public Company Limited (“Akara”), net repayment (net of transaction costs) of $20,000,000 of the corporate loan facility, and $19,409,000 dividends paid during the year.\n\nExploration expense was $675,000 and relates to exploration licences in Chile that were relin- quished or disposed of during the year.\n\nThe increase in depreciation and amortisation to $85,595,000 reflects amortisation of the higher capitalised development costs at the Challenger Mine, depreciation of the second plant at Chatree and commencement of amortising the capital cost of the Chatree Tailings Storage Facility #2.\n\nOre reserves and mineral resources are esti- mates. These estimates are substantially based on interpretations of geological data obtained from drill holes and other sampling techniques. Actual mineralisation or geological conditions may be different from those predicted and, as a consequence, there is a risk that any part or all of mineral resources will not be converted into reserves.\n\nMarket price fluctuations of gold and silver, as well as increased production and capital costs, may render ore reserves unprofitable to develop at a particular site for periods of time. \n\nThe Group aims to continually replace reserves depleted by production to maintain production levels over the long term. Reserves can be replaced by expanding known ore bodies, locating new deposits or making acquisitions.\n\nAs a result, there is a risk that depletion of reserves will not be offset by discoveries or acquisitions. The mineral base may decline if reserves are mined without adequate replace- ment and as a consequence the Group may not be able to sustain production beyond the current mine lives, based on current production rates.\n\n## Revenue\n\n## Mineral reserves and resources\n\n## Depreciation and amortisation\n\n## Exploration\n\n## Cash flow\n\n## Costs\n\n## Impairment of assets\n\n## Material business risks\n\n## Revenue\n\n## Mining risks and insurance risks\n\n## Replacement of depleted reserves\n\nDirectors’ Report 45\n\nDirectors’ Report\n\ncontinued u" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.988724413191883, + "doc_id": "d19a879874e4381b791b31b41e1e0a6c975a6a8094c5210d45aebc28cb94ef40", + "edit_distance": 0.14105263157894737, + "f1_score": 0.9896907216494847, + "meteor": 0.9611052677409267, + "precision": 0.993103448275862, + "pred_md": "## Review of Operations\n\nRevenues and Production. The following table provides the components of our revenues for the year ended 31 December 2014 and 2013, as well as each year's respective sales volumes:\n\nBarrel of oil equivalent (Boe) and average net daily production (Boe/d ). Sales volume increased by 1,164,576 Boe (107.9%) to 2,243,529 Boe (6,147 Boe/d) for the year ended 31 December 2014 compared to 1,078,953 Boe (2,956 Boe/d) for the prior year due to successfully bringing online 88 gross (50.1 net) producing wells primarily in the Eagle Ford and Mississippian/Woodford Formations.\n\nThe Eagle Ford contributed 4,187 Boe/d (68.1%) of total sales volume during the year ended 31 December 2014 compared to 1,371 Boe/d (46.4%) during the prior year. Mississippian/Woodford contributed 1,433 Boe/d (23.2%) of total sales volume during the year ended 31 December 2014 compared to 503 Boe/d (17.0%) during the prior year. Our sales volume is oil-weighted, with oil representing 75% and 77% of total sales volume for the year ended 31 December 2014 and 2013, respectively.\n\nOil sales. Oil sales increased by $65.6 million (82.7%) to $145.0 million for the year ended 31 December 2014 from $79.4 million for the prior year. The increase in oil revenues was the result of increased oil production volumes ($81.3 million) offset by a decrease in product pricing ($15.7 million). Oil production volumes increased 102.4% to 1,675,078 Bbls for the year ended 31 December 2014 compared to 827,432 Bbls for the prior year. The average price we realised on (NGL) the sale of our oil decreased by 9.8% to $86.56 per Bbl for the year ended 31 December 2014 from $95.92 per Bbl for the prior year.\n\nNatural gas sales. Natural gas sales increased by $3.4 million (122.1%) to $6.2 million for the year ended 31 December 2014 from $2.8 million for the prior year. The increase in natural gas revenues was primarily the result of increased production volumes ($2.6 million) and improved product pricing ($0.8 million). Natural gas production volumes increased 868,800 Mcf (93.0%) to 1,803,000 Mcf for the year ended 31 December 2014 compared to 934,200 Mcf for the prior year. The average price we realised on the sale of our natural gas increased by 15.1% to $3.42 per Mcf for the year ended 31 December 2014 from $2.97 per Mcf for the prior year.\n\n- 16 -", + "recall": 0.9863013698630136, + "true_md": "## Review of Operations\n\nBarrel of oil equivalent (Boe) and average net daily production (Boe/d ). Sales volume increased by 1,164,576 Boe (107.9%) to 2,243,529 Boe (6,147 Boe/d) for the year ended 31 December 2014 compared to 1,078,953 Boe (2,956 Boe/d) for the prior year due to successfully bringing online 88 gross (50.1 net) producing wells primarily in the Eagle Ford and Mississippian/Woodford Formations.\n\nThe Eagle Ford contributed 4,187 Boe/d (68.1%) of total sales volume during the year ended 31 December 2014 compared to 1,371 Boe/d (46.4%) during the prior year. Mississippian/Woodford contributed 1,433 Boe/d (23.2%) of total sales volume during the year ended 31 December 2014 compared to 503 Boe/d (17.0%) during the prior year. Our sales volume is oil-weighted, with oil representing 75% and 77% of total sales volume for the year ended 31 December 2014 and 2013, respectively. \n\nOil sales. Oil sales increased by $65.6 million (82.7%) to $145.0 million for the year ended 31 December 2014 from $79.4 million for the prior year. The increase in oil revenues was the result of increased oil production volumes ($81.3 million) offset by a decrease in product pricing ($15.7 million). Oil production volumes increased 102.4% to 1,675,078 Bbls for the year ended 31 December 2014 compared to 827,432 Bbls for the prior year. The average price we realised on (NGL) the sale of our oil decreased by 9.8% to $86.56 per Bbl for the year ended 31 December 2014 from $95.92 per Bbl for the prior year. \n\nNatural gas sales. Natural gas sales increased by $3.4 million (122.1%) to $6.2 million for the year ended 31 December 2014 from $2.8 million for the prior year. The increase in natural gas revenues was primarily the result of increased production volumes ($2.6 million) and improved product pricing ($0.8 million). Natural gas production volumes increased 868,800 Mcf (93.0%) to 1,803,000 Mcf for the year ended 31 December 2014 compared to 934,200 Mcf for the prior year. The average price we realised on the sale of our natural gas increased by 15.1% to $3.42 per Mcf for the year ended 31 December 2014 from $2.97 per Mcf for the prior year. \n\n- 16 - \n\nRevenues and Production. The following table provides the components of our revenues for the year ended 31 December 2014 and 2013, as well as each year’s respective sales volumes:" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9433696442183843, + "doc_id": "ed81a39d3db4263ffef7acc6dc8ce90ec8c78fdc0610c94d0edd7ce45e3747e0", + "edit_distance": 0.05246913580246913, + "f1_score": 0.971830985915493, + "meteor": 0.9873242767146191, + "precision": 0.9583333333333334, + "pred_md": "Finance costs. Finance costs, net of amounts capitalised to exploration and development, increased by $0.9 million to $0.7 million for the year ended 31 December 2014 as compared to net interest income of $0.2 million in the prior year. The increase primarily relates to an increase in amortisation of deferred financing fees and additional interest incurred on undrawn funds.\n\nGain (loss) on derivative financial instruments . The net gain (loss) on derivative financial instruments changed by $11.6 million to an $11.0 million gain for the year ended 31 December 2014 as compared to the prior year. The gain on commodity hedging consisted of $9.7 million of unrealised gains on commodity derivative contracts and $1.3 of realised gains on commodity derivative contracts.\n\nThe Company had the following open contracts at 31 December 2014:\n\nIncome taxes. The components of our provision for income taxes are as follows:\n\nOur combined Federal and state effective tax rates differ from the Group's statutory tax rate of 30% primarily due to US federal and state tax rates, non-deductible expenses and the recognition of previously unrecognised tax losses. See Note 7 in the Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements of this report for further information regarding our income taxes.\n\nAdjusted EBITDAX . Adjusted EBITDAX is defined as earnings before interest expense, income taxes, depreciation, depletion and amortisation, property impairments, gain/(loss) on sale of non-current assets, exploration expense, share-based compensation and gains and losses on commodity hedging, net of settlements of commodity hedging.\n\nFor the year ended 31 December 2014, adjusted EBITDAX was $126.4 million, or 79% of revenue, compared to $52.6 million, or 62% of revenue, from the prior year.\n\n- 18 -", + "recall": 0.9857142857142858, + "true_md": "Finance costs. Finance costs, net of amounts capitalised to exploration and development, increased by $0.9 million to $0.7 million for the year ended 31 December 2014 as compared to net interest income of $0.2 million in the prior year. The increase primarily relates to an increase in amortisation of deferred financing fees and additional interest incurred on undrawn funds.\n\nGain (loss) on derivative financial instruments . The net gain (loss) on derivative financial instruments changed by $11.6 million to an $11.0 million gain for the year ended 31 December 2014 as compared to the prior year. The gain on commodity hedging consisted of $9.7 million of unrealised gains on commodity derivative contracts and $1.3 of realised gains on commodity derivative contracts. \n\nThe Company had the following open contracts at 31 December 2014: \n\nOur combined Federal and state effective tax rates differ from the Group’s statutory tax rate of 30% primarily due to US federal and state tax rates, non-deductible expenses and the recognition of previously unrecognised tax losses. See Note 7 in the Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements of this report for further information regarding our income taxes. \n\nAdjusted EBITDAX . Adjusted EBITDAX is defined as earnings before interest expense, income taxes, depreciation, depletion and amortisation, property impairments, gain/(loss) on sale of non-current assets, exploration expense, share-based compensation and gains and losses on commodity hedging, net of settlements of commodity hedging. \n\nFor the year ended 31 December 2014, adjusted EBITDAX was $126.4 million, or 79% of revenue, compared to $52.6 million, or 62% of revenue, from the prior year. \n\n- 18 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8328695331347074, + "doc_id": "c2d90613ec54bf01d269d588095c4be866d7e8d7101e4083a255e3a63fbec155", + "edit_distance": 0.48464912280701755, + "f1_score": 0.980561555075594, + "meteor": 0.8685330317894953, + "precision": 0.9869565217391304, + "pred_md": "STYLE ON YOUR SCHEDULE TO HELP BUSY GUYS LOOK THEIR BEST, TRUNK CLUB STYLISTS SEND CUSTOMERS CLOTHES BASED ON THEIR PREFERENCES AND NEEDS. THEY KEEP WHAT THEY LIKE AND SEND BACK THE REST. AT TRUNK CLUB SHOWROOMS, CUSTOMERS CAN MEET STYLISTS FOR AN IN-PERSON FITTING.\n\nSTYLE ON YOUR SCHEDULE TO HELP BUSY GUYS LOOK THEIR BEST, TRUNK CLUB STYLISTS SEND CUSTOMERS CLOTHES BASED ON THEIR PREFERENCES AND NEEDS. THEY KEEP WHAT THEY LIKE AND SEND BACK THE REST. AT TRUNK CLUB SHOWROOMS, CUSTOMERS CAN MEET STYLISTS FOR AN IN-PERSON FITTING.\n\nWe are uniquely positioned to serve customers through full-price, off-price, stores and online. Each offers a way for customers to shop with us, and collectively they represent a significant growth opportunity. The real success lies in how our business works together to better serve customers and help us attract and retain customers, now and in the future. We see a meaningful opportunity in this synergy through a focus on service, product and capabilities.\n\n## FULL-PRICE: NORDSTROM, NORDSTROM.COM AND TRUNK CLUB\n\n2014 marked an important milestone in our company's history as we opened our first international store in Calgary, Alberta, Canada. We were humbled as more than 2,000 customers welcomed us when we opened our doors. In the first six months, we outperformed our expectations and are\n\n' Trunk Club and Nordstrom are a perfect pairboth enhance the personal shopper experience. '\n\nOUR CUSTOMER, RICHARD F.\n\nextremely pleased with the efforts of our team. Their successful planning, preparation and navigation of many complex issues for several years helped us put our best foot forward. It's only one market though. We still have a lot to learn about serving Canadians and will continue learning from each community as we expand further. On March 6, 2015, we opened a store in Ottawa, Ontario, and we will open another in Vancouver, British Columbia, on September 18. Both stores are in terrific retail locations, and we look forward to serving more customers in Canada in the coming years.\n\nIn 2014, we also opened new stores in the United States at The Woodlands Mall in The Woodlands, Texas, and St. Johns Town Center in Jacksonville, Florida. Both these stores and those in Canada opened with our new store design, reflecting an energized\n\n' Love the order online, pick up in store option at Nordstrom. It's like takeout for cocktail frocks. '\n\nOUR CUSTOMER, JAYMIE G.\n\n5", + "recall": 0.9742489270386266, + "true_md": "STYLE ON YOUR SCHEDULE TO HELP BUSY GUYS LOOK THEIR BEST, TRUNK CLUB STYLISTS SEND CUSTOMERS CLOTHES BASED ON THEIR PREFERENCES AND NEEDS. THEY KEEP WHAT THEY LIKE AND SEND BACK THE REST. AT TRUNK CLUB SHOWROOMS, CUSTOMERS CAN MEET STYLISTS FOR AN IN-PERSON FITTING.\n\n“ Trunk Club and Nordstrom are a perfect pair— both enhance the personal shopper experience. ” OUR CUSTOMER, RICHARD F. \n\nWe are uniquely positioned to serve customers through full-price, off-price, stores and online. Each offers a way for customers to shop with us, and collectively they represent a significant growth opportunity. The real success lies in how our business works together to better serve customers and help us attract and retain customers, now and in the future. We see a meaningful opportunity in this synergy through a focus on service, product and capabilities.\n\nextremely pleased with the efforts of our team. Their successful planning, preparation and navigation of many complex issues for several years helped us put our best foot forward. It’s only one market though. We still have a lot to learn about serving Canadians and will continue learning from each community as we expand further. On March 6, 2015, we opened a store in Ottawa, Ontario, and we will open another in Vancouver, British Columbia, on September 18. Both stores are in terrific retail locations, and we look forward to serving more customers in Canada in the coming years.\n\n“ Love the order online, pick up in store option at Nordstrom. It’s like takeout for cocktail frocks. ” OUR CUSTOMER, JAYMIE G.\n\nIn 2014, we also opened new stores in the United States at The Woodlands Mall in The Woodlands, Texas, and St. Johns Town Center in Jacksonville, Florida. Both these stores and those in Canada opened with our new store design, reflecting an energized \n\n2014 marked an important milestone in our company’s history as we opened our first international store in Calgary, Alberta, Canada. We were humbled as more than 2,000 customers welcomed us when we opened our doors. In the first six months, we outperformed our expectations and are \n\n## FULL-PRICE: NORDSTROM, NORDSTROM.COM AND TRUNK CLUB\n\n5" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5412995892845799, + "doc_id": "19705a96cfac1a896ffc3c63315b5be6ca44beb39efa175ccc4bb59e3449298d", + "edit_distance": 0.50625, + "f1_score": 0.9197080291970802, + "meteor": 0.6316084587193308, + "precision": 0.9130434782608695, + "pred_md": "## Twenty largest holders of fully paid Ordinary Shares\n\n% Issued Capital\n\n## Stock Exchange on which the Company's Securities are quoted\n\nThe Company's listed equity securities are quoted on the Australian Securities Exchange, under Ticker 'SEA'.\n\n## Petroleum Exploration Licenses\n\nAs the Company is a petroleum exploration Company, below is a list of its interests in petroleum exploration licences granted, where the licences are situated and the percentage interest held.\n\n## Exploration & Development Assets\n\n## On Market Buy-back\n\nThere is currently no on-market buy-back.\n\n- 110 -", + "recall": 0.9264705882352942, + "true_md": "## Twenty largest holders of fully paid Ordinary Shares\n\n## Stock Exchange on which the Company’s Securities are quoted The Company’s listed equity securities are quoted on the Australian Securities Exchange, under Ticker “SEA”.\n\n## Petroleum Exploration Licenses As the Company is a petroleum exploration Company, below is a list of its interests in petroleum exploration licences\n\n## Exploration & Development Assets\n\nStock Exchange on which the Company’s Securities are quoted The Company’s listed equity securities are quoted on the Australian Securities Exchange, under Ticker “SEA”.\n\nPetroleum Exploration Licenses As the Company is a petroleum exploration Company, below is a list of its interests in petroleum exploration licences granted, where the licences are situated and the percentage interest held. \n\n## On Market Buy-back\n\nThere is currently no on-market buy-back. \n\n- 110 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9287678210790395, + "doc_id": "f03690cd7a8d39c2270144de27aa7efe21b24ce5fdc78260306eeee7479db565", + "edit_distance": 0.06033182503770739, + "f1_score": 0.960747663551402, + "meteor": 0.9514334135258798, + "precision": 0.9625468164794008, + "pred_md": "## management's Discussion and analysis\n\nD\n\nollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\nKillam spent $1,482 per unit for the year ended December 31, 2013, compared to $1,683 per unit for the year ended December 31, 2012. Approximately 40% of the capital spend during the year was invested in suite renovations. The increase year-over-year was a result of unit upgrades to improve quality and increase occupancy, increase yields on properties identified for repositioning, and support the Company's commitment to increasing unit quality to maximize rental increases.\n\nAs an example, in 2013 the Company has been actively working to reposition Brentwood Apartments, a 45-year old, 240-unit, property located in Halifax, that was acquired in 2012. The Company identified that significant value could be created at this property by improving the quality of the units and generating increased NOI through higher rents. Unit upgrades have averaged $15,000 per unit and have consisted of new appliances, flooring and kitchen and bathroom upgrades. The Company has achieved a corresponding lift in rents of approximately 15% on the 53 units it has completed to date. Based on a 5-year project timeline, with 20% of the units renovated each year, the Company expects to see the return on the total investment improve 145 bps from 6.25% to 7.70%.\n\nKillam has also invested in suite renovations to reposition an Ottawa portfolio acquired in 2012. Kitchen, bathroom, flooring and appliance upgrades have improved the quality of the Ottawa units, leading to a 1,100 bps increase in occupancy in the past 12 months. Excluding the repositioning of the Brentwood and the Ottawa portfolio in 2013, suite renovation costs would have been $6.0 million, or a 21% increase from 2012.\n\nThe Company has also identified additional properties in the Atlantic region as well as Ontario for repositioning and will continue to invest in upgrades where these higher yields can be achieved. One such property identified for 2014 is Shaunslieve, the 154-unit property adjacent to S2 in Halifax. Killam expects to recover the renovation costs through increased rental rates. Capital spend on appliances increased in 2013 as well, which was directly correlated to the increased suite renovation work.\n\nBoiler and heating equipment costs have decreased significantly in 2013, as the Company converted twenty properties to natural gas in 2012, compared to one in 2013.\n\nThe majority of the remaining capital expenditures during 2013 related to exterior building repairs, including roofing and balcony upgrades, brick replacement and exterior facade upgrades. The timing of capital spending is influenced by tenant turnover, market conditions, and individual property requirements, causing variability. In addition, the length of time that Killam has owned a property and the age of the property also influences the capital requirements.\n\n## Average Capital Spend Per Unit by Building Age\n\nAs the above chart highlights, the capital spend per unit is less for newer properties, averaging $364 per unit in 2013, compared to $2,248 per unit for buildings over 40 years old. This analysis excludes capital spending on development and energy projects. Killam's continual focus on developing and acquiring new properties aids in maintaining lower capital requirements on a per unit basis. 20% of Killam's apartments as of December 31, 2013, have been built in the past ten years.\n\nKillam expects to invest approximately $22 million to $24 million during 2014 on apartment portfolio capital investments.\n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013\n\n51", + "recall": 0.9589552238805971, + "true_md": "Management’s Discussion and Analysis Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\n## Management’s Discussion and Analysis Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\nKillam spent $1,482 per unit for the year ended December 31, 2013, compared to $1,683 per unit for the year ended December 31, 2012. Approximately 40% of the capital spend during the year was invested in suite renovations. The increase year‑over‑year was a result of unit upgrades to improve quality and increase occupancy, increase yields on properties identified for repositioning, and support the Company’s commitment to increasing unit quality to maximize rental increases.\n\nAs an example, in 2013 the Company has been actively working to reposition Brentwood Apartments, a 45‑year old, 240‑unit, property located in Halifax, that was acquired in 2012. The Company identified that significant value could be created at this property by improving the quality of the units and generating increased NOI through higher rents. Unit upgrades have averaged $15,000 per unit and have consisted of new appliances, flooring and kitchen and bathroom upgrades. The Company has achieved a corresponding lift in rents of approximately 15% on the 53 units it has completed to date. Based on a 5‑year project timeline, with 20% of the units renovated each year, the Company expects to see the return on the total investment improve 145 bps from 6.25% to 7.70%. \n\nKillam has also invested in suite renovations to reposition an Ottawa portfolio acquired in 2012. Kitchen, bathroom, flooring and appliance upgrades have improved the quality of the Ottawa units, leading to a 1,100 bps increase in occupancy in the past 12 months. Excluding the repositioning of the Brentwood and the Ottawa portfolio in 2013, suite renovation costs would have been $6.0 million, or a 21% increase from 2012.\n\nThe Company has also identified additional properties in the Atlantic region as well as Ontario for repositioning and will continue to invest in upgrades where these higher yields can be achieved. One such property identified for 2014 is Shaunslieve, the 154‑unit property adjacent to S2 in Halifax. Killam expects to recover the renovation costs through increased rental rates. Capital spend on appliances increased in 2013 as well, which was directly correlated to the increased suite renovation work.\n\nBoiler and heating equipment costs have decreased significantly in 2013, as the Company converted twentyproperties to natural gas in 2012, compared to one in 2013. \n\nThe majority of the remaining capital expenditures during 2013 related to exterior building repairs, including roofing and balcony upgrades, brick replacement and exterior facade upgrades. The timing of capital spending is influenced by tenant turnover, market conditions, and individual property requirements, causing variability. In addition, the length of time that Killam has owned a property and the age of the property also influences the capital requirements. \n\nAverage Capital Spend Per Unit by Building Age\n\nAs the above chart highlights, the capital spend per unit is less for newer properties, averaging $364 per unit in 2013, compared to $2,248 per unit for buildings over 40 years old. This analysis excludes capital spending on development and energy projects. Killam’s continual focus on developing and acquiring new properties aids in maintaining lower capital requirements on a per unit basis. 20% of Killam’s apartments as of December 31, 2013, have been built in the past ten years.\n\nKillam expects to invest approximately $22 million to $24 million during 2014 on apartment portfolio capital investments.\n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013 51" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9480774751069186, + "doc_id": "6fe631c91df5682c70da6cb080153926ce826beae342ff1254d2424a92d341f2", + "edit_distance": 0.061611374407582936, + "f1_score": 0.9752650176678447, + "meteor": 0.9709866480706817, + "precision": 0.9857142857142858, + "pred_md": "Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n## 16. Capital Stock\n\nCapital stock consists of common stock and preferred stock. Common stock and preferred stock at March 31, 2011 and 2010 were as follows:\n\nAll of the preferred stock is noncumulative and nonparticipating for dividend payments, and shareholders of the preferred stock are not entitled to vote at a general meeting of shareholders except when the proposal to pay the prescribed dividends to shareholders is not submitted to the general meeting of shareholders or is rejected at the general meeting of shareholders.\n\nIn the event that SMFG pays dividends, SMFG shall pay to holders of shares of its preferred stock, in preference to the holders of its common stock, cash dividends in the amounts as described below. If preferred interim dividends stipulated in the Articles of Incorporation of SMFG were paid during the relevant fiscal year, the amount of such preferred interim dividends shall be subtracted from such amount of annual preferred dividends. Preferred stock (Type 6) bears an annual noncumulative dividend of ¥88,500 per share and, in the event SMFG pays an interim dividend, holders are entitled to receive ¥44,250 in preference to common shareholders. Holders of preferred stock are not entitled to any further dividends in excess of\n\nthe amount as described above.\n\nIn the event of SMFG's voluntary or involuntary liquidation, holders of its preferred stock will be entitled, equally in rank as among themselves and in preference over shares of its common stock, to receive out of SMFG's residual assets upon liquidation a distribution of ¥3,000,000 per share in the case of Type 6 preferred stock. Holders of preferred stock are not entitled to any further dividends or other participation or distribution of SMFG's residual assets upon SMFG's liquidation.\n\nSMFG may, subject to the requirements provided in the Companies Act, purchase any shares of the preferred stock then outstanding at any time and retire such preferred stock out of distributable amounts of SMFG. SMFG may also, subject to the requirements provided in the Companies Act, redeem all or some of preferred stock (Type 6) out of distributable amounts of SMFG at any time on and after March 31, 2011 at a price of ¥3,000,000 per share. Preferred stock (Type 6) is non-convertible.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n89\n\nSMFG", + "recall": 0.965034965034965, + "true_md": "SMFG\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n- 16. Capital Stock\n\nCapital stock consists of common stock and preferred stock. Common stock and preferred stock at March 31, 2011 and 2010 were as follows:\n\nthe amount as described above.\n\nAll of the preferred stock is noncumulative and nonparticipating for dividend payments, and shareholders of the preferred stock are not entitled to vote at a general meeting of shareholders except when the proposal to pay the prescribed dividends to shareholders is not submitted to the general meeting of shareholders or is rejected at the general meeting of shareholders. \n\nIn the event that SMFG pays dividends, SMFG shall pay to holders of shares of its preferred stock, in preference to the holders of its common stock, cash dividends in the amounts as described below. If preferred interim dividends stipulated in the Articles of Incorporation of SMFG were paid during the relevant fiscal year, the amount of such preferred interim dividends shall be subtracted from such amount of annual preferred dividends. Preferred stock (Type 6) bears an annual noncumulative dividend of ¥88,500 per share and, in the event SMFG pays an interim dividend, holders are entitled to receive ¥44,250 in preference to common shareholders. Holders of preferred stock are not entitled to any further dividends in excess of \n\nIn the event of SMFG’s voluntary or involuntary liquidation, hold- ers of its preferred stock will be entitled, equally in rank as among themselves and in preference over shares of its common stock, to receive out of SMFG’s residual assets upon liquidation a distribution of ¥3,000,000 per share in the case of Type 6 preferred stock. Holders of preferred stock are not entitled to any further dividends or other participation or distribution of SMFG’s residual assets upon SMFG’s liquidation.\n\nSMFG may, subject to the requirements provided in the Companies Act, purchase any shares of the preferred stock then outstanding at any time and retire such preferred stock out of distributable amounts of SMFG. SMFG may also, subject to the requirements provided in the Companies Act, redeem all or some of preferred stock (Type 6) out of distributable amounts of SMFG at any time on and after March 31, 2011 at a price of ¥3,000,000 per share.\n\nPreferred stock (Type 6) is non-convertible.\n\nSMFG 2011 89" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9302217404769496, + "doc_id": "1e7ad8a2d43fed09308c3d4b918718497b51cf7caa1a9ce347d1b7de6fcc8236", + "edit_distance": 0.27335640138408307, + "f1_score": 0.983177570093458, + "meteor": 0.8629087485023836, + "precision": 0.9887218045112782, + "pred_md": "At year end, we had 197 gross 3P Reserves drilling locations across our Eagle Ford acreage where we continue to pursue operational and drilling efficiencies, opportunities to further improve well economics by improving recoveries and reducing costs. In 2014 this included a switch to pad drilling with zipper fracs and new completion techniques that have provided significant upside in production.\n\nDespite our current scaling back of drilling activity , we have set 2015 production guidance at 7,850 - 8,500 BOEPD, an increase from the previous year of some 13 - 17 percent, but a target that we believe is achievable while maintaining acceptable levels of liquidity given our demonstrated abilities and growing footprint in the Eagle Ford.\n\n## Safety and Environment\n\nSundance has a strong culture throughout the organisation of ensuring that high standards of safety are maintained and that our operations are conducted in an environmentally responsible way. During 2014 our comprehensive safety program was enhanced and further improvements will be a strong focus throughout 2015.\n\n## A strong financial position\n\nSundance is well placed for future growth in the Eagle Ford. The Company has a strong balance sheet to withstand the current low oil price environment, and our sound financial management strategy has seen the Company well supported by both new and existing investors in Australia and internationally .\n\nWe expect that Sundance will grow organically and also through further leasing or bolt-on acquisitions in our core Eagle Ford focus area within our current, conservative balance sheet parameters.\n\n## Positive outlook for 2015\n\nDespite the current oil pricing scenario, Sundance's medium-to-long term growth trajectory looks very positive.\n\nWe can demonstrate this through:\n\n- · A track record of capital efficient growth\n- · A track record of value creation\n- · Being a low cost/high margin operator\n- · Having top tier Eagle Ford assets with an extensive drilling inventory\n- · Having a clean balance sheet\n\nAs a mid-tier oil and gas producer and explorer in the S&P/ASX All Australian 200 index, and with the increasing interest and support from institutional and retail investors. I believe that Sundance will deliver significant long-term value from our assets for our shareholders.\n\n## Thank you for your support\n\nWe have had a busy year at Sundance and I would like to recognise the efforts and valued contribution of the Board of Directors, management team and all staff and contractors of the Company in helping us achieve our strategic goals. I am confident that we have the right team and excellent assets in place to execute our clear and focused strategy that we expect to deliver significant value for our shareholders.\n\nOn behalf of the Board and Company, I would like to thank our shareholders for your strong support of the Company throughout the year. We are committed to delivering long-term value for our shareholders and I look forward to reporting over the rest of the coming year on the continued value creation and growth of Sundance.\n\nYours sincerely ,\n\nMIKE HANNELL\n\nChairman\n\nThe Company has a strong balance sheet to withstand the current low oil price environment, and our sound financial management strategy has seen the Company well supported by both new and existing investors in Australia and internationally.\n\n3", + "recall": 0.9776951672862454, + "true_md": "The Company has a strong balance sheet to withstand the current low oil price environment, and our sound financial management strategy has seen the Company well supported by both new and existing investors in Australia and internationally.\n\nAt year end, we had 197 gross 3P Reserves drilling locations across our Eagle Ford acreage where we continue to pursue operational and drilling efficiencies, opportunities to further improve well economics by improving recoveries and reducing costs. In 2014 this included a switch to pad drilling with zipper fracs and new completion techniques that have provided significant upside in production.\n\nDespite our current scaling back of drilling activity, we have set 2015 production guidance at 7,850 – 8,500 BOEPD, an increase from the previous year of some 13 – 17 percent, but a target that we believe is achievable while maintaining acceptable levels of liquidity given our demonstrated abilities and growing footprint in the Eagle Ford. \n\nSundance has a strong culture throughout the organisation of ensuring that high standards of safety are maintained and that our operations are conducted in an environmentally responsible way. During 2014 our comprehensive safety program was enhanced and further improvements will be a strong focus throughout 2015.\n\nSundance is well placed for future growth in the Eagle Ford. The Company has a strong balance sheet to withstand the current low oil price environment, and our sound financial management strategy has seen the Company well supported by both new and existing investors in Australia and internationally.\n\nWe expect that Sundance will grow organically and also through further leasing or bolt-on acquisitions in our core Eagle Ford focus area within our current, conservative balance sheet parameters. \n\nDespite the current oil pricing scenario, Sundance’s medium-to-long term growth trajectory looks very positive. \n\nWe can demonstrate this through:\n\n## Safety and Environment\n\n## A strong financial position\n\n## Positive outlook for 2015\n\n## Thank you for your support\n\nAs a mid-tier oil and gas producer and explorer in the S&P/ASX All Australian 200 index, and with the increasing interest and support from institutional and retail investors. I believe that Sundance will deliver significant long-term value from our assets for our shareholders.\n\nWe have had a busy year at Sundance and I would like to recognise the efforts and valued contribution of the Board of Directors, management team and all staff and contractors of the Company in helping us achieve our strategic goals. I am confident that we have the right team and excellent assets in place to execute our clear and focused strategy that we expect to deliver significant value for our shareholders.\n\nOn behalf of the Board and Company, I would like to thank our shareholders for your strong support of the Company throughout the year. We are committed to delivering long-term value for our shareholders and I look forward to reporting over the rest of the coming year on the continued value creation and growth of Sundance.\n\nYours sincerely,\n\nM IKE HANNELL Chairman\n\n- • A track record of capital efficient growth\n\n- • A track record of value creation\n\n- • Being a low cost/high margin operator\n\n- • Having top tier Eagle Ford assets with an extensive drilling inventory\n\n- • Having a clean balance sheet\n\n3" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "658a824bf976c8f542055043b4564af9546254844d04c533816e9b68740cc9a2", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9997724169321802, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "cover: 100 & 200 eagle street, cambridge, ontario", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "cover: 100 & 200 eagle street, cambridge, ontario" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7602506523116062, + "doc_id": "9135478da6b51ea3a949ce557fa03f0e45622a7a67c26c8d95ac0c2d9211a56c", + "edit_distance": 0.4027777777777778, + "f1_score": 0.9029126213592233, + "meteor": 0.9179077487118509, + "precision": 0.8378378378378378, + "pred_md": "GREATER ANADARKO\n\n## The Company and offset operators continue to have success in the Greater Anadarko Basin.\n\nDuring 2014, the Company increased its production to 1,460 BOEPD; a 957 BOEPD (190 percent) increase compared to 503 BOEPD of production in 2013.\n\nIn 2014, the Company brought 40 gross (16.6 net) Greater Anadarko wells into production by D&P investments of $79.9 million. The Company maintained a strong acreage position of 40,937 net acres, with 259.3 net 3P Reserves drilling locations (over six years of drilling inventory assuming a two-rig program drilling 18 wells/year).\n\n## NET GREATER ANADARKO DRILLING LOCATIONS\n\n(excluding contingent resources)\n\n■\n\n■\n\nPROVED\n\nPROBABLE AND POSSIBLE\n\n-DRILLING INVENTORY (YEARS)\n\n12\n\nAs at 31 December 2014, the Company's Greater Anadarko 1P\n\n## GREATER ANADARKO\n\nAs at and for the Year Ended 31 December 2014\n\nReserves increased to 7,849 MBOE (PV10 of $82.4 million); a 3,445 MBOE (78 percent) increase compared to 4,404 MBOE (PV10 of $66.7 million) at 31 December 2013.\n\n## GREATER ANADARKO CONSTANT CARE RESERVES\n\nAs at and for the Year Ended 31 December 2014", + "recall": 0.9789473684210527, + "true_md": "During 2014, the Company increased its production to 1,460 BOEPD; a 957 BOEPD (190 percent) increase compared to 503 BOEPD of production in 2013.\n\nIn 2014, the Company brought 40 gross (16.6 net) Greater Anadarko wells into production by D&P investments of $79.9 million. The Company maintained a strong acreage position of 40,937 net acres, with 259.3 net 3P Reserves drilling locations (over six years of drilling inventory assuming a two-rig program drilling 18 wells/year).\n\nAs at 31 December 2014, the Company’s Greater Anadarko 1P\n\nReserves increased to 7,849 MBOE (PV10 of $82.4 million); a 3,445 MBOE (78 percent) increase compared to 4,404 MBOE (PV10 of $66.7 million) at 31 December 2013.\n\n## GREATER ANADARKO\n\n## The Company and offset operators continue to have success in the Greater Anadarko Basin.\n\n## GREATER ANADARKO\n\n## GREATER ANADARKO CONSTANT CARE RESERVES\n\n12" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "f19dca9f10018d5df969dfde785318618f6d520b1d5fafbcb1c58bfc0784248d", + "edit_distance": 0.6666666666666666, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.8518518518518519, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "68\n\nSMFG 2011", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "SMFG 2011 68" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "1b4cf335a4548195ecf9b105492f580b2ce49a64918b62efa0a3053007dc95fc", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9921875, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "MEDIA WIRELESS CABLE\n\nROGERS.COM", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "MEDIA WIRELESS CABLE\n\nROGERS.COM" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9018194896294621, + "doc_id": "6bcfe353715cf9c1ef37928c344fc81e34a85a70d4953fe0f5f555b5c0d979bf", + "edit_distance": 0.5757575757575758, + "f1_score": 0.9547325102880659, + "meteor": 0.8457694453701662, + "precision": 0.9830508474576272, + "pred_md": "12\n\n## ■ Services for High Networth Individuals, Business Owners and Employees\n\n## Private Advisory Department\n\nThe Private Advisory Department (PAD) of SMBC specializes in products and services which meet the diverse requirements of business owners and high networth individuals. Activities of this department cover three types of business operations as follows. One such business operation is the business and asset transfer for which we offer our services based on our extensive knowledge and experience accumulated over the years, and the additional expertise provided by alliance partners such as major tax accounting firms. The second business is the private banking services which provide comprehensive financial services for managing our clients' financial assets. The third business is the workplace banking services that support the HR strategies of our corporate clients. This particular business provides assistance for designing the employee savings and other employee financial benefit programs, and defined-contribution pension plans.\n\nPAD consistently provides diverse products and services for both individuals and corporate clients by working with other SMBC Group companies and alliance partners.\n\n## Support for Business and Asset Transfers\n\nPAD specialists prepare customized proposals for business owners concerned about their business and asset transfers. Our customized and diverse consulting services cover various matters for both individuals and companies. We offer a variety of seminars to provide our clients with up-to-date information and advice.\n\n## Private Banking\n\nPAD offers comprehensive financial advisory services for our clients' financial assets by truly understanding their financial goals and providing appropriate advice for their risk profiles. Based on discussions on their goals, it prepares proposals for their asset\n\nSMFG 2011\n\nallocation and management. It strives to provide diverse asset management services and, established a joint-venture business in June 2010.\n\n## Topics\n\n## ◆ Joint-venture businesses within our asset management services\n\nSMBC, SMBC Nikko Securities and Barclays PLC established 'SMBC Barclays Wealth Division' within SMBC Nikko Securities to provide new asset management services leveraging the knowledge of Barclays Wealth, known for its leading global private banking services.\n\nThe purposes of this joint-venture business are for expanding our product portfolio, improving research skills,\n\nand meeting the need for high quality asset management proposals for business owners and high networth individuals. We experimentally began offering the services in some of our branches in June 2010, and will roll out these services at all branches in Japan during the fiscal year ending March 31, 2012, in order to assist as many clients as possible.\n\n## Life Planning Support for Employees\n\nThe management environment for SMBC's corporate clients is undergoing dramatic changes, as the life planning needs of their employees are becoming diversified.\n\nIn responding to the challenges presented by such changes for our corporate clients' personnel matters and financial strategies, PAD utilizes the diverse financial products and services offered by SMBC to support our corporate clients by creating employee financial benefit programs and defined-contribution pension plans.\n\nFurthermore, the SMBC products and services are offered to employees, through their employers, in an effort to achieve their financial or other life planning goals.", + "recall": 0.928, + "true_md": "## Private Advisory Department\n\n## Topics\n\nallocation and management. It strives to provide diverse asset management services and, established a joint-venture business in June 2010.\n\nThe Private Advisory Department (PAD) of SMBC specializes in products and services which meet the diverse requirements of business owners and high networth individuals. Activities of this department cover three types of business operations as follows. One such business operation is the business and asset transfer for which we offer our services based on our extensive knowledge and experience accumulated over the years, and the additional expertise provided by alliance partners such as major tax accounting firms. The second business is the private bank- ing services which provide comprehensive financial services for managing our clients’ financial assets. The third business is the workplace banking services that support the HR strategies of our corporate clients. This particular business provides assis- tance for designing the employee savings and other employee financial benefit programs, and defined-contribution pension plans.\n\nPAD consistently provides diverse products and services for both individuals and corporate clients by working with other SMBC Group companies and alliance partners.\n\n## ■ Services for High Networth Individuals, Business Owners and Employees\n\n## ◆ Joint-venture businesses within our asset man- agement services\n\n## Life Planning Support for Employees\n\n## Support for Business and Asset Transfers\n\n## Private Banking\n\nSMFG 2011 12\n\nPAD offers comprehensive financial advisory services for our cli- ents’ financial assets by truly understanding their financial goals and providing appropriate advice for their risk profiles. Based on discussions on their goals, it prepares proposals for their asset \n\nPAD specialists prepare customized proposals for business owners concerned about their business and asset transfers. Our customized and diverse consulting services cover various matters for both individuals and companies. We offer a variety of seminars to provide our clients with up-to-date information and advice.\n\nFurthermore, the SMBC products and services are offered to employees, through their employers, in an effort to achieve their financial or other life planning goals.\n\nIn responding to the challenges presented by such changes for our corporate clients’ personnel matters and financial strate- gies, PAD utilizes the diverse financial products and services offered by SMBC to support our corporate clients by creating employee financial benefit programs and defined-contribution pension plans. \n\nThe management environment for SMBC’s corporate clients is undergoing dramatic changes, as the life planning needs of their employees are becoming diversified. \n\nSMBC, SMBC Nikko Securities and Barclays PLC estab- lished “SMBC Barclays Wealth Division” within SMBC Nikko Securities to provide new asset management services leveraging the knowledge of Barclays Wealth, known for its leading global private banking services.\n\nThe purposes of this joint-venture business are for expanding our product portfolio, improving research skills, \n\nand meeting the need for high quality asset management pro- posals for business owners and high networth individuals. We experimentally began offering the services in some of our branches in June 2010, and will roll out these services at all branches in Japan during the fiscal year ending March 31, 2012, in order to assist as many clients as possible." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7938047857077988, + "doc_id": "c582675e5fd0f9cbed4781bfc1acbcb0dfca147db9b0a37fad5f25e1f8dc2e2b", + "edit_distance": 0.5555555555555556, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9705932784636488, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "SMBC\n\nSecurities (Nonconsolidated)\n\n## Balance of Securities Held, Classified by Maturity\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n172", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## Balance of Securities Held, Classified by Maturity\n\nSMBC\n\nSecurities (Nonconsolidated)\n\nSMFG 2011 172" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9627228048520229, + "doc_id": "f84f6544b37cd2c63e4e76d1165f6e41435324a2e0688393d1eeb7273c8365d2", + "edit_distance": 0.0655940594059406, + "f1_score": 0.9924585218702866, + "meteor": 0.9914635857869522, + "precision": 0.9939577039274925, + "pred_md": "## Goodwill and Intangible Assets\n\nGoodwill is recognized as the excess cost of an acquired entity over the net amount assigned to assets acquired and liabilities assumed. Goodwill is not amortized. Goodwill is reviewed for impairment annually as of January 1 or whenever changes in conditions indicate an evaluation should be completed. These conditions could include a significant change in the business climate, legal factors, operating performance indicators, competition, or sale or disposition of a significant portion of a reporting unit. The Company utilizes discounted cash flow models and market multiples for comparable businesses to determine the fair value of reporting units. Evaluating impairment requires significant judgment by management, including estimated future operating results, estimated future cash flows, the long-term rate of growth of the business, and determination of an appropriate discount rate. While the Company uses available information to prepare the estimates and evaluations, actual results could differ significantly.\n\nThe Company recognizes acquired intangible assets such as customer relationships, trade names, vendor relationships, and noncompetition agreements apart from goodwill. Customer relationship intangibles are amortized using the sum-of-the-years-digits method over estimated useful lives consistent with assumptions used in the determination of their value. Amortization of all other finite-lived intangible assets is computed using the straight-line method over the estimated period of benefit. The Company also maintains intangible assets with indefinite lives which are not amortized. Amortization of intangible assets is included in selling, distribution and administrative expenses in the accompanying statements of consolidated income. Intangible assets with finite lives are reviewed for impairment when changes in conditions indicate carrying value may not be recoverable. Intangible assets with indefinite lives are reviewed for impairment on an annual basis or whenever changes in conditions indicate an evaluation should be completed.\n\n## Self-Insurance Liabilities\n\nThe Company maintains business insurance programs with significant self-insured retention covering workers' compensation, business, automobile, general product liability and other claims. The Company accrues estimated losses including those incurred but not reported using actuarial calculations, models and assumptions based on historical loss experience. The Company maintains a self-insured health benefits plan, which provides medical benefits to U.S. based employees electing coverage under the plan. The Company estimates its reserve for all unpaid medical claims including those incurred but not reported based on historical experience, adjusted as necessary based upon management's reasoned judgment.\n\n## Revenue Recognition\n\nSales are recognized when the sales price is fixed, collectability is reasonably assured and the product's title and risk of loss is transferred to the customer. Typically, these conditions are met when the product is shipped to the customer. The Company charges shipping and handling fees when products are shipped or delivered to a customer, and includes such amounts in net sales. The Company reports its sales net of actual sales returns and the amount of reserves established for anticipated sales returns based on historical rates. Sales tax collected from customers is excluded from net sales in the accompanying statements of consolidated income.\n\n## Shipping and Handling Costs\n\nThe Company records freight payments to third parties in cost of sales and internal delivery costs in selling, distribution and administrative expenses in the accompanying statements of consolidated income. Internal delivery costs in selling, distribution and administrative expenses were approximately $15,500, $15,400 and $14,400 for the fiscal years ended June 30, 2012, 2011 and 2010, respectively.\n\n## Income Taxes\n\nIncome taxes are determined based upon income and expenses recorded for financial reporting purposes. Deferred income taxes are recorded for estimated future tax effects of differences between the bases of assets and liabilities for financial reporting and income tax purposes, giving consideration to enacted tax laws. Uncertain tax positions meeting a more-likely-than-not recognition threshold are recognized in accordance with the Income Taxes topic of the ASC. The Company recognizes accrued interest and penalties related to unrecognized income tax benefits in the provision for income taxes.\n\n## Share-Based Compensation\n\nFollowing approval by the Company's shareholders in October 2011, the 2011 Long-Term Performance Plan (the \"2011 Plan\") replaced the 2007 Long-Term Performance Plan (the \"2007 Plan\"). Share-based compensation represents the cost related to share-based awards granted to associates under either the 2011 Plan or the 2007 Plan. The Company measures share-based compensation cost at grant date, based on the estimated fair value of the award and recognizes the cost over the requisite service\n\nApplied Industrial Technologies, Inc. and Subsidiaries\n\n21", + "recall": 0.9909638554216867, + "true_md": "## Goodwill and Intangible Assets\n\n## Self-Insurance Liabilities\n\n## Revenue Recognition\n\n## Shipping and Handling Costs\n\n## Income Taxes\n\n## Share-Based Compensation\n\nGoodwill is recognized as the excess cost of an acquired entity over the net amount assigned to assets acquired and liabilities assumed. Goodwill is not amortized. Goodwill is reviewed for impairment annually as of January 1 or whenever changes in conditions indicate an evaluation should be completed. These conditions could include a significant change in the business climate, legal factors, operating performance indicators, competition, or sale or disposition of a significant portion of a reporting unit. The Company utilizes discounted cash flow models and market multiples for comparable businesses to determine the fair value of reporting units. Evaluating impairment requires significant judgment by management, including estimated future operating results, estimated future cash flows, the long-term rate of growth of the business, and determination of an appropriate discount rate. While the Company uses available information to prepare the estimates and evaluations, actual results could differ significantly. \n\nThe Company recognizes acquired intangible assets such as customer relationships, trade names, vendor relationships, and non- competition agreements apart from goodwill. Customer relationship intangibles are amortized using the sum-of-the-years-digits method over estimated useful lives consistent with assumptions used in the determination of their value. Amortization of all other finite-lived intangible assets is computed using the straight-line method over the estimated period of benefit. The Company also maintains intangible assets with indefinite lives which are not amortized. Amortization of intangible assets is included in selling, distribution and administrative expenses in the accompanying statements of consolidated income. Intangible assets with finite lives are reviewed for impairment when changes in conditions indicate carrying value may not be recoverable. Intangible assets with indefinite lives are reviewed for impairment on an annual basis or whenever changes in conditions indicate an evaluation should be completed. \n\nThe Company maintains business insurance programs with significant self-insured retention covering workers’ compensation, business, automobile, general product liability and other claims. The Company accrues estimated losses including those incurred but not reported using actuarial calculations, models and assumptions based on historical loss experience. The Company maintains a self-insured health benefits plan, which provides medical benefits to U.S. based employees electing coverage under the plan. The Company estimates its reserve for all unpaid medical claims including those incurred but not reported based on historical experience, adjusted as necessary based upon management’s reasoned judgment. \n\nSales are recognized when the sales price is fixed, collectability is reasonably assured and the product’s title and risk of loss is transferred to the customer. Typically, these conditions are met when the product is shipped to the customer. The Company charges shipping and handling fees when products are shipped or delivered to a customer, and includes such amounts in net sales. The Company reports its sales net of actual sales returns and the amount of reserves established for anticipated sales returns based on historical rates. Sales tax collected from customers is excluded from net sales in the accompanying statements of consolidated income. \n\nThe Company records freight payments to third parties in cost of sales and internal delivery costs in selling, distribution and administrative expenses in the accompanying statements of consolidated income. Internal delivery costs in selling, distribution and administrative expenses were approximately $15,500, $15,400 and $14,400 for the fiscal years ended June 30, 2012, 2011 and 2010, respectively. \n\nIncome taxes are determined based upon income and expenses recorded for financial reporting purposes. Deferred income taxes are recorded for estimated future tax effects of differences between the bases of assets and liabilities for financial reporting and income tax purposes, giving consideration to enacted tax laws. Uncertain tax positions meeting a more-likely-than-not recognition threshold are recognized in accordance with the Income Taxes topic of the ASC. The Company recognizes accrued interest and penalties related to unrecognized income tax benefits in the provision for income taxes. \n\nFollowing approval by the Company's shareholders in October 2011, the 2011 Long-Term Performance Plan (the \"2011 Plan\") replaced the 2007 Long-Term Performance Plan (the \"2007 Plan\"). Share-based compensation represents the cost related to share-based awards granted to associates under either the 2011 Plan or the 2007 Plan. The Company measures share-based compensation cost at grant date, based on the estimated fair value of the award and recognizes the cost over the requisite service\n\n21 Applied Industrial Technologies, Inc. and Subsidiaries" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6748913185157768, + "doc_id": "59f661f2ad1d04657f386281c6f75214c07d3f702378f3be574bf4ebfcfd0bc2", + "edit_distance": 0.5, + "f1_score": 0.8717948717948718, + "meteor": 0.9498207885304659, + "precision": 0.7727272727272727, + "pred_md": "Exhibit\n\n## Method of Filing\n\n*This exhibit is a management contract, compensatory plan or arrangement\n\nNordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 75", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Nordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 75\n\n *This exhibit is a management contract, compensatory plan or arrangement" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9557973421167789, + "doc_id": "f56dd299fb8aae383c96d303220d189408d89aec5fe2153d601d29cf9c557778", + "edit_distance": 0.39293139293139295, + "f1_score": 0.9857549857549858, + "meteor": 0.9408360922267666, + "precision": 0.9885714285714285, + "pred_md": "NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 27: COMMITMENTS AND CONTINGENT LIABILITIES\n\n## Commitments\n\nThe table below shows the future minimum payments under operating leases and other contractual arrangements at December 31, 2013:\n\nOperating leases are for office premises and retail outlets across the country. The majority of the lease terms range from five to ten years. Rent expense for 2013 was $198 million (2012 - $189 million).\n\nPlayer contracts are Blue Jays players' salary contracts we have entered into and are contractually obligated to pay.\n\nPurchase obligations are the contractual obligations under service, product and handset contracts that we have committed to for at least the next five years.\n\nProgram rights are the agreements we have entered into to acquire broadcasting rights for sports broadcasting programs and films for periods ranging from one to twelve years.\n\n## Contingent Liabilities\n\nWe have the following contingent liabilities as at December 31, 2013:\n\n## System Access Fee - Saskatchewan\n\nIn 2004, a class action commenced against providers of wireless communications in Canada under the Class Actions Act (Saskatchewan). The class action related to the system access fee wireless carriers charged to some of their customers. The plaintiffs are seeking unspecified damages and punitive damages, which would effectively be a reimbursement of all system access fees collected.\n\nIn 2007, the Saskatchewan Court granted the plaintiffs' application to have the proceeding certified as a national, 'opt-in' class action where affected customers outside Saskatchewan must take specific steps to participate in the proceeding. In 2008, our motion to stay the proceeding based on the arbitration clause in our wireless service agreements was granted. The Saskatchewan Court directed that its order, in respect of the certification of the action, would exclude customers who are bound by an arbitration clause from the class of plaintiffs.\n\nWe appealed the 2007 certification decision, however, it was dismissed by the Saskatchewan Court of Appeal and leave to appeal to the Supreme Court of Canada was denied.\n\nIn 2012, the plaintiffs applied for an order seeking to extend the time they can appeal the 'opt-in' decision of the Saskatchewan Court. In March 2013, the Saskatchewan Court of Appeal denied the plaintiffs' application.\n\nIn August 2009, counsel for the plaintiffs began a second proceeding under the Class Actions Act (Saskatchewan) asserting the same claims as the original proceeding. If successful, this second class action would be an 'opt-out' class proceeding. This second proceeding was ordered conditionally stayed in 2009 on the basis that it was an abuse of process.\n\n124\n\nROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\nIn April 2013, the plaintiffs applied for an order to be allowed to proceed with the second system access fee class action. In August 2013, the court denied this application and the second action remains conditionally stayed. In December 2013 the plaintiff applied for an order permitting them to amend the Statement of Claim to reintroduce the claims they were not permitted to proceed with in the 2007 certification decision. We are awaiting the decision of the Saskatchewan Court. We have not recorded a liability for this contingency.\n\n## System Access Fee - British Columbia\n\nIn December 2011, a class action was launched in British Columbia against providers of wireless communications in Canada about the system access fee wireless carriers charge to some of their customers. The class action relates to allegations of misrepresentations contrary to the Business Practices and Consumer Protection Act (British Columbia), among other things. The plaintiffs are seeking unspecified damages and restitution. A certification hearing is scheduled for April 2014. We have not recorded a liability for this contingency.\n\n## 911 Fee\n\nIn June 2008, a class action was launched in Saskatchewan against providers of wireless communications services in Canada. It involves allegations of breach of contract, misrepresentation and false advertising, among other things, in relation to the 911 fee that had been charged by us and the other wireless communication providers in Canada. The plaintiffs are seeking unspecified damages and restitution. The plaintiffs intend to seek an order certifying the proceeding as a national class action in Saskatchewan. We have not recorded a liability for this contingency.\n\n## Cellular Devices\n\nIn July 2013, a class action was launched in British Columbia against providers of wireless communications in Canada and manufacturers of wireless devices. The class action relates to the alleged adverse health effects incurred by long-term users of cellular devices. The plaintiffs are seeking unspecified damages and punitive damages, effectively equal to the reimbursement of the portion of revenues the defendants have received that can reasonably be attributed to the sale of cellular phones in Canada. We have not recorded a liability for this contingency.\n\n## Income and Indirect Taxes\n\nWe provide for income and indirect taxes based on all of the information that is currently available and believe that we have adequately provided these items. The calculation of applicable taxes in many cases, however, requires significant judgment in interpreting tax rules and regulations. Our tax filings are subject to audits, which could materially change the amount of current and deferred income tax assets and liabilities and provisions, and could, in certain circumstances, result in the assessment of interest and penalties.", + "recall": 0.9829545454545454, + "true_md": "NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 27: COMMITMENTS AND CONTINGENT LIABILITIES\n\n## Commitments\n\nThe table below shows the future minimum payments under operating leases and other contractual arrangements at December 31, 2013:\n\nOperating leases are for office premises and retail outlets across the country. The majority of the lease terms range from five to ten years. Rent expense for 2013 was $198 million (2012 – $189 million).\n\nPlayer contracts are Blue Jays players’ salary contracts we have entered into and are contractually obligated to pay.\n\nPurchase obligations are the contractual obligations under service, product and handset contracts that we have committed to for at least the next five years.\n\nProgram rights are the agreements we have entered into to acquire broadcasting rights for sports broadcasting programs and films for periods ranging from one to twelve years.\n\nWe have the following contingent liabilities as at December 31, 2013:\n\nIn 2004, a class action commenced against providers of wireless communications in Canada under the Class Actions Act (Saskatchewan). The class action related to the system access fee wireless carriers charged to some of their customers. The plaintiffs are seeking unspecified damages and punitive damages, which would effectively be a reimbursement of all system access fees collected.\n\nIn 2007, the Saskatchewan Court granted the plaintiffs’ application to have the proceeding certified as a national, “opt-in” class action where affected customers outside Saskatchewan must take specific steps to participate in the proceeding. In 2008, our motion to stay the proceeding based on the arbitration clause in our wireless service agreements was granted. The Saskatchewan Court directed that its order, in respect of the certification of the action, would exclude customers who are bound by an arbitration clause from the class of plaintiffs.\n\nWe appealed the 2007 certification decision, however, it was dismissed by the Saskatchewan Court of Appeal and leave to appeal to the Supreme Court of Canada was denied.\n\nIn 2012, the plaintiffs applied for an order seeking to extend the time they can appeal the “opt-in” decision of the Saskatchewan Court. In March 2013, the Saskatchewan Court of Appeal denied the plaintiffs’ application.\n\nIn August 2009, counsel for the plaintiffs began a second proceeding under the Class Actions Act (Saskatchewan) asserting the same claims as the original proceeding. If successful, this second class action would be an “opt-out’ class proceeding. This second proceeding was ordered conditionally stayed in 2009 on the basis that it was an abuse of process.\n\nWe provide for income and indirect taxes based on all of the information that is currently available and believe that we have adequately provided these items. The calculation of applicable taxes in many cases, however, requires significant judgment in interpreting tax rules and regulations. Our tax filings are subject to audits, which could materially change the amount of current and deferred income tax assets and liabilities and provisions, and could, in certain circumstances, result in the assessment of interest and penalties.\n\nIn July 2013, a class action was launched in British Columbia against providers of wireless communications in Canada and manufacturers of wireless devices. The class action relates to the alleged adverse health effects incurred by long-term users of cellular devices. The plaintiffs are seeking unspecified damages and punitive damages, effectively equal to the reimbursement of the portion of revenues the defendants have received that can reasonably be attributed to the sale of cellular phones in Canada. We have not recorded a liability for this contingency.\n\nIn June 2008, a class action was launched in Saskatchewan against providers of wireless communications services in Canada. It involves allegations of breach of contract, misrepresentation and false advertising, among other things, in relation to the 911 fee that had been charged by us and the other wireless communication providers in Canada. The plaintiffs are seeking unspecified damages and restitution. The plaintiffs intend to seek an order certifying the proceeding as a national class action in Saskatchewan. We have not recorded a liability for this contingency.\n\nIn December 2011, a class action was launched in British Columbia against providers of wireless communications in Canada about the system access fee wireless carriers charge to some of their customers. The class action relates to allegations of misrepresentations contrary to the Business Practices and Consumer Protection Act (British Columbia), among other things. The plaintiffs are seeking unspecified damages and restitution. A certification hearing is scheduled for April 2014. We have not recorded a liability for this contingency.\n\nIn April 2013, the plaintiffs applied for an order to be allowed to proceed with the second system access fee class action. In August 2013, the court denied this application and the second action remains conditionally stayed. In December 2013 the plaintiff applied for an order permitting them to amend the Statement of Claim to reintroduce the claims they were not permitted to proceed with in the 2007 certification decision. We are awaiting the decision of the Saskatchewan Court. We have not recorded a liability for this contingency.\n\n124 ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n## Contingent Liabilities\n\n## System Access Fee – Saskatchewan\n\n## System Access Fee – British Columbia\n\n## 911 Fee\n\n## Income and Indirect Taxes\n\n## Cellular Devices" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9109050521683102, + "doc_id": "cc6cd3cfa39c64b73f03fa7609867c8403ff531b741ef33ec0778afe47b8c1c7", + "edit_distance": 0.09162717219589257, + "f1_score": 0.9871086556169429, + "meteor": 0.9218265186598519, + "precision": 0.988929889298893, + "pred_md": "## Dispositions\n\nIn July 2014, the Company sold its remaining Denver-Julesburg Basin assets. The net proceeds of approximately $108.8 million in cash includes the reimbursement of capital expenditures incurred on 8 gross (3.1 net) non-operated horizontal wells.\n\nIn July 2014, the Company sold its remaining Williston assets for approximately $14.0 million, which included $10 million in cash and approximately $4.0 million in settlement of a net liability due to the buyer.\n\n## Reserves\n\nThe Company's reserves at 31 December 2014 were announced on 29 January 2015. Even though the Company disposed of the remaining assets in the Williston and Denver-Julesburg Basins, the Company saw significant increases across 1P, 2P and 3P reserves as compared to reserves at 31 December 2013 primarily through successful implementation of our drilling program and the acquisition of acreage in the Eagle Ford.\n\nThe Company's Proved, Probable and Possible reserve estimates are calculated by Netherland, Sewell & Associates, Inc. (NSAI) as at 31 December 2014 in accordance with SEC guidelines. The reserve estimates are based on, and fairly represent, information, supporting documentation prepared by, or under supervision of, Mr. Neil H. Little. Mr. Little is a Licensed Professional Engineer in the State of Texas (No. 117966) with over 12 years of practical experience in petroleum engineering studies and over 5 years of practical experience in evaluation of reserves. Mr. Little meets or exceeds the education, training and experience requirements set forth in the Standards Pertaining to the Estimating and Auditing of Oil and Gas Reserves Information promulgated by the Society of Petroleum Engineers. We believe that he is proficient in judiciously applying industry standard practices to engineering and geoscience evaluations as well as applying SEC and other industry reserves definitions and guidelines. Mr. Little consents to the inclusion in this report of the information and context in which it appears.\n\nAlthough current market prices have fallen significantly, under SEC guidelines, the commodity prices used in the 31 December 2014 reserve estimates were based on the 12-month unweighted arithmetic average of the first day of the month prices for the prior 1 January 2014 through 1 December 2014, adjusted by lease for transportation fees and regional price differentials. For crude oil volumes, the average West Texas Intermediate posted price of $91.48 per barrel used to calculate PV-10 at 31 December 2014 was down $1.94 per barrel from the average price of $93.42 per barrel used to calculate PV-10 at 31 December 2013. For natural gas volumes, the average Henry Hub spot price of $4.35 per million British thermal units ('MMBTU') used to calculate PV-10 at 31 December 2014 was up $0.68 per MMBTU from the average price of $3.67 per MMBTU used to calculate PV-10 at 31 December 2013. All prices were held constant throughout the estimated economic life of the properties.\n\nSummary reserve information based on NSAI SEC Constant Case is provided below. For management's case reserve report assumptions, see Note 17 for further information.\n\n(1) One barrel of oil is the energy equivalent of six Mcf of natural gas.\n\nNote: Totals may not foot due to rounding.\n\n- 20 -", + "recall": 0.9852941176470589, + "true_md": "## Dispositions In July 2014, the Company sold its remaining Denver-Julesburg Basin assets. The net proceeds of approximately $108.8 million\n\n## Reserves The Company’s reserves at 31 December 2014 were announced on 29 January 2015. Even though the Company disposed of\n\nDispositions In July 2014, the Company sold its remaining Denver-Julesburg Basin assets. The net proceeds of approximately $108.8 million in cash includes the reimbursement of capital expenditures incurred on 8 gross (3.1 net) non-operated horizontal wells.\n\nIn July 2014, the Company sold its remaining Williston assets for approximately $14.0 million, which included $10 million in cash and approximately $4.0 million in settlement of a net liability due to the buyer.\n\nReserves The Company’s reserves at 31 December 2014 were announced on 29 January 2015. Even though the Company disposed of the remaining assets in the Williston and Denver-Julesburg Basins, the Company saw significant increases across 1P, 2P and 3P reserves as compared to reserves at 31 December 2013 primarily through successful implementation of our drilling program and the acquisition of acreage in the Eagle Ford.\n\nThe Company’s Proved, Probable and Possible reserve estimates are calculated by Netherland, Sewell & Associates, Inc. (NSAI) as at 31 December 2014 in accordance with SEC guidelines. The reserve estimates are based on, and fairly represent, information, supporting documentation prepared by, or under supervision of, Mr. Neil H. Little. Mr. Little is a Licensed Professional Engineer in the State of Texas (No. 117966) with over 12 years of practical experience in petroleum engineering studies and over 5 years of practical experience in evaluation of reserves. Mr. Little meets or exceeds the education, training and experience requirements set forth in the Standards Pertaining to the Estimating and Auditing of Oil and Gas Reserves Information promulgated by the Society of Petroleum Engineers. We believe that he is proficient in judiciously applying industry standard practices to engineering and geoscience evaluations as well as applying SEC and other industry reserves definitions and guidelines. Mr. Little consents to the inclusion in this report of the information and context in which it appears. \n\nAlthough current market prices have fallen significantly, under SEC guidelines, the commodity prices used in the 31 December 2014 reserve estimates were based on the 12-month unweighted arithmetic average of the first day of the month prices for the prior 1 January 2014 through 1 December 2014, adjusted by lease for transportation fees and regional price differentials. For crude oil volumes, the average West Texas Intermediate posted price of $91.48 per barrel used to calculate PV-10 at 31 December 2014 was down $1.94 per barrel from the average price of $93.42 per barrel used to calculate PV-10 at 31 December 2013. For natural gas volumes, the average Henry Hub spot price of $4.35 per million British thermal units (“MMBTU”) used to calculate PV-10 at 31 December 2014 was up $0.68 per MMBTU from the average price of $3.67 per MMBTU used to calculate PV-10 at 31 December 2013. All prices were held constant throughout the estimated economic life of the properties. \n\nSummary reserve information based on NSAI SEC Constant Case is provided below. For management’s case reserve report assumptions, see Note 17 for further information. \n\n(1) One barrel of oil is the energy equivalent of six Mcf of natural gas. \n\nNote: Totals may not foot due to rounding.\n\n- 20 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7030350057173405, + "doc_id": "c28300d0b90f495b592949495906539bf6aa0b48b33cb962f6b8cea558ed96c4", + "edit_distance": 0.23232323232323232, + "f1_score": 0.9119999999999999, + "meteor": 0.8597195262610066, + "precision": 0.9193548387096774, + "pred_md": "SMFG\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n## 31. Fair Value Information\n\n## (1) Securities\n\nThe amounts shown in the following tables include trading securities and short-term bonds classified as 'Trading assets,' negotiable certificates of deposit bought classified as 'Deposits with banks,' and beneficiary claims on loan trusts classified as 'Monetary claims bought,' in addition to 'Securities' stated in the consolidated balance sheets.\n\n(a) Securities classified as trading purposes\n\n(b) Bonds classified as held-to-maturity\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n108", + "recall": 0.9047619047619048, + "true_md": "SMFG Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n## 31. Fair Value Information\n\n- (1) Securities\n\nThe amounts shown in the following tables include trading securities and short-term bonds classified as “Trading assets,” negotiable certificates of deposit bought classified as “Deposits with banks,” and beneficiary claims on loan trusts classified as “Monetary claims bought,” in addition to “Securities” stated in the consolidated balance sheets.\n\n- (a) Securities classified as trading purposes\n\nSMFG 2011 108\n\n## (b) Bonds classified as held-to-maturity" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9502696200842277, + "doc_id": "bd514fc317a7f82f2b778631eb3629df7725594519f9c148759d357a1c6c45a9", + "edit_distance": 0.5533333333333333, + "f1_score": 0.988835725677831, + "meteor": 0.8856809195100532, + "precision": 0.9904153354632588, + "pred_md": "## Classification and Measurement\n\nWe measure financial instruments by grouping them into classes on initial recognition, based on the purpose of the individual instruments. We classify all of our non-derivative financial assets as either availablefor-sale or loans and receivables. We classify non-derivative financial liabilities as other financial liabilities.\n\n- GLYPH<129> Available-for-sale financial assets - include our publicly traded and private investments. We initially measure these assets at fair value plus transaction costs directly attributable to acquiring them, and record them on the consolidated statements of financial position. We record subsequent changes in their fair value, other than impairment losses, in other comprehensive income. When we dispose of the assets, we reclassify the cumulative change in fair value recorded in the available-for-sale financial assets reserve to net income.\n- GLYPH<129> Loans and receivables -includes accounts receivable. We initially measure these assets at fair value plus transaction costs directly attributable to acquiring them, and then at amortized cost using the effective interest method, recording changes through net income.\n- GLYPH<129> Other financial liabilities - includes short-term borrowings, accounts payable and accrued liabilities, and long-term debt. We initially measure these liabilities at fair value plus transaction costs directly\n\nattributable to issuing them, and then at amortized cost using the effective interest method.\n\n## Fair Value\n\nWe estimate fair values at a specific point in time, based on relevant market information and information about the financial instruments. Our estimates are subjective and involve uncertainties and significant judgment. Changes in assumptions could significantly affect the estimates.\n\n## Current and Non-Current Classification\n\nWe classify financial assets and financial liabilities as non-current when they are due in part or in whole more than one year from the date of the consolidated statements of financial position. All other financial assets and liabilities, including the portion of long-term liabilities due within one year from the date of the consolidated statements of financial position, are classified as current liabilities.\n\n## Offsetting Financial Assets and Liabilities\n\nWe offset financial assets and financial liabilities and present the net amount in the consolidated statements of financial position when we have a legal right to offset them and intend to settle on a net basis or realize the asset and liability simultaneously.\n\n## Derivative Instruments\n\nWe use derivative instruments to manage risks related to certain activities we are involved with. They include:\n\nWe use derivatives only to manage risk, and not for speculative purposes.\n\nWe record all derivatives on our consolidated statements of financial position at their estimated fair value. We record changes in the estimated fair value of derivative instruments that are effective accounting hedges in other comprehensive income until the hedged item impacts net income. Hedge ineffectiveness is recognized in net income immediately. Any changes in the estimated fair value of derivative instruments that have not been designated as hedging instruments for accounting purposes are recognized immediately in net income.\n\nWhen we designate a derivative instrument as a hedging instrument for accounting purposes, we:\n\n- GLYPH<129> first determine that the hedging instrument will be highly effective in offsetting the changes in fair value or cash flows of the item it is hedging, and\n- GLYPH<129> formally document the relationship between the hedging instrument and hedged item, including the risk management objectives and strategy, and the methods we will use to assess the ongoing effectiveness of the hedging relationship.\n\nWe assess quarterly whether the hedging instrument continues to be highly effective in offsetting the changes in the fair value or cash flows of the item it is hedging.\n\nWe assess whether an embedded derivative is required to be separated from the host contract and accounted for as a derivative when we first become a party to the contract.\n\n## Earnings Per S hare\n\nWe calculate basic earnings per share by dividing the net income or loss attributable to our Class A and B shareholders by the weighted average number of Class A and B shares outstanding during the year.\n\nWe calculate diluted earnings per share by adjusting the net income or loss attributable to Class A and B shareholders and the weighted average number of Class A and B shares outstanding for the effect of all dilutive potential common shares. We use the treasury stock method for calculating diluted earnings per share, which considers the impact of employee stock options and other potentially dilutive instruments.\n\nSee note 10 for our calculations of basic and diluted net income per share.\n\n## Inventories\n\nWe measure inventories, including handsets, digital cable equipment and merchandise for resale, at the lower of cost (determined on a firstin, first-out basis) and its net realizable value. We will reverse a previous write down to net realizable value if the inventories later increase in value.\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC.\n\n97\n\nNOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS", + "recall": 0.9872611464968153, + "true_md": "NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\nattributable to issuing them, and then at amortized cost using the effective interest method.\n\nWe estimate fair values at a specific point in time, based on relevant market information and information about the financial instruments. Our estimates are subjective and involve uncertainties and significant judgment. Changes in assumptions could significantly affect the estimates.\n\nWe measure financial instruments by grouping them into classes on initial recognition, based on the purpose of the individual instruments. We classify all of our non-derivative financial assets as either available- for-sale or loans and receivables. We classify non-derivative financial liabilities as other financial liabilities.\n\n## Fair Value\n\n## Classification and Measurement\n\n- GLYPH<129> Available-for-sale financial assets – include our publicly traded and private investments. We initially measure these assets at fair value plus transaction costs directly attributable to acquiring them, and record them on the consolidated statements of financial position. We record subsequent changes in their fair value, other than impairment losses, in other comprehensive income. When we dispose of the assets, we reclassify the cumulative change in fair value recorded in the available-for-sale financial assets reserve to net income.\n\n- GLYPH<129> Loans and receivables – includes accounts receivable. We initially measure these assets at fair value plus transaction costs directly attributable to acquiring them, and then at amortized cost using the effective interest method, recording changes through net income.\n\n- GLYPH<129> Other financial liabilities – includes short-term borrowings, accounts payable and accrued liabilities, and long-term debt. We initially measure these liabilities at fair value plus transaction costs directly\n\n## Current and Non-Current Classification\n\nWe classify financial assets and financial liabilities as non-current when they are due in part or in whole more than one year from the date of the consolidated statements of financial position. All other financial assets and liabilities, including the portion of long-term liabilities due within one year from the date of the consolidated statements of financial position, are classified as current liabilities.\n\nWe offset financial assets and financial liabilities and present the net amount in the consolidated statements of financial position when we have a legal right to offset them and intend to settle on a net basis or realize the asset and liability simultaneously.\n\n## Offsetting Financial Assets and Liabilities\n\n## Derivative Instruments\n\nWe use derivative instruments to manage risks related to certain activities we are involved with. They include:\n\nWe assess whether an embedded derivative is required to be separated from the host contract and accounted for as a derivative when we first become a party to the contract.\n\nWe use derivatives only to manage risk, and not for speculative purposes.\n\nWe record all derivatives on our consolidated statements of financial position at their estimated fair value. We record changes in the estimated fair value of derivative instruments that are effective accounting hedges in other comprehensive income until the hedged item impacts net income. Hedge ineffectiveness is recognized in net income immediately. Any changes in the estimated fair value of derivative instruments that have not been designated as hedging instruments for accounting purposes are recognized immediately in net income.\n\nWe calculate basic earnings per share by dividing the net income or loss attributable to our Class A and B shareholders by the weighted average number of Class A and B shares outstanding during the year.\n\nWe calculate diluted earnings per share by adjusting the net income or loss attributable to Class A and B shareholders and the weighted average number of Class A and B shares outstanding for the effect of all dilutive potential common shares. We use the treasury stock method for calculating diluted earnings per share, which considers the impact of employee stock options and other potentially dilutive instruments.\n\nWhen we designate a derivative instrument as a hedging instrument for accounting purposes, we:\n\nSee note 10 for our calculations of basic and diluted net income per share.\n\nWe measure inventories, including handsets, digital cable equipment and merchandise for resale, at the lower of cost (determined on a first- in, first-out basis) and its net realizable value. We will reverse a previous write down to net realizable value if the inventories later increase in value.\n\neffectiveness of the hedging relationship. We assess quarterly whether the hedging instrument continues to be highly effective in offsetting the changes in the fair value or cash flows of the item it is hedging.\n\n- GLYPH<129> formally document the relationship between the hedging instrument and hedged item, including the risk management objectives and strategy, and the methods we will use to assess the ongoing\n\n- GLYPH<129> first determine that the hedging instrument will be highly effective in offsetting the changes in fair value or cash flows of the item it is hedging, and\n\n## Earnings Per S hare\n\n## Inventories\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 97" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9955257000626653, + "doc_id": "c8e8a5bf9b5e4227bf4287855367688b5bb8e979ecad15733ec2619e9ecf5fae", + "edit_distance": 0.002560819462227913, + "f1_score": 0.995850622406639, + "meteor": 0.9975669015347519, + "precision": 0.997229916897507, + "pred_md": "As oil prices started to tumble, we reacted swiftly. In early November 2014, we began terminating short-term service contracts (we had no long-term agreements), pushing service providers to offer lower rates, extending drilling obligations with land owners, and moderating forward capital deployment for drilling, leasing and acquisitions. These actions are consistent with our core strategy of being a low cost operator and maintaining a strong balance sheet as they have increased our flexibility in seeking ways to preserve and ultimately grow shareholder value.\n\nBecause of our position as a low cost operator with a clean balance sheet, the Company remains in a strong position to not only survive, but also to add both short and long-term shareholder value during the pendency of this downturn in market prices.\n\n## Forward Strategy\n\nAs dire as the oil markets may appear today, they do remain very efficient in reacting swiftly to changing prices. Logic would dictate that the highest cost barrel would be the first off the market, but many of these high cost barrels come from long lead time projects that have significant sunk costs so are comparatively slow to react. US shale plays, for the most part, are not the marginal cost barrel but, because of the short lead times, are often the quickest to react.\n\nThis has resulted in an extraordinarily fast reduction in active drilling rigs in the US slowing the pace of growth which will ultimately and unavoidably lead to supply restrictions from the US. While the rig count reduction is encouraging, some of the wells drilled prior to the reduction are still waiting upon completion and the remaining active rigs continue to drill away meaning new wells will continue to come online with high flush production so we are unlikely to see a flattening and ultimate reduction in US supply until late this year. The good news is that high initial production rates fade fast so, as long as prices stay relatively low , there is likely to be a material decline in U.S. production (say 8-9%) over the course of 2016.\n\nWhile the supply reaction is well under way , demand continues to grow with the economy (net of efficiency improvements) meaning that, like often in history , market fundamentals will ultimately come back into balance and beyond, resulting in a period of under-supply and, therefore, higher than normal prices. While this scenario seems likely as a historical matter, it is also virtually impossible to predict timing with any degree of accuracy. Fortunately , since US shale is not the marginal cost barrel in the long term, it will survive, become more efficient, and outperform in when prices ultimately recover.\n\nOur shareholders will benefit from our exposure to some of the highest quality US shale acreage and production in the Eagle Ford along with our leading cost structure and strong balance sheet. While prices are down, we intend to invest capital in development opportunities with reasonable returns and to maintain leases and sustain production levels while protecting our balance sheet and patiently increasing the size and quality of our drilling inventory.\n\nTo implement this strategy, we will continue to drive down development costs by capitalizing on weak service demand and improving efficiency to create a sustainable cost advantage, leasing expired mineral rights in our core areas relinquished by peers with weaker balance sheets, and striving to acquire additional Eagle Ford assets with current production within our current, conservative balance sheet parameters. By creating a sustainable cost advantage and growing drilling inventory while prices are low, we anticipate generating strong shareholder returns through this cycle.\n\nFinally , our Company remains well positioned because of the hard and creative work put forth by our employees, board of directors, partners, contractors, and consultants. With prices low we have a new set of circumstances we can capitalize on to strengthen our business. Thanks to each and every one of you for your continued focus and passion to take the calculated risks needed for generating superior shareholder returns and building a stable, flourishing enterprise.\n\nSincerely ,\n\nERIC MCCRADY\n\nManaging Director & CEO\n\nOur shareholders will benefit from our exposure to some of the highest quality US shale acreage and production in the Eagle Ford along with our leading cost structure and strong balance sheet.\n\n5", + "recall": 0.994475138121547, + "true_md": "As oil prices started to tumble, we reacted swiftly. In early November 2014, we began terminating short-term service contracts (we had no long-term agreements), pushing service providers to offer lower rates, extending drilling obligations with land owners, and moderating forward capital deployment for drilling, leasing and acquisitions. These actions are consistent with our core strategy of being a low cost operator and maintaining a strong balance sheet as they have increased our flexibility in seeking ways to preserve and ultimately grow shareholder value.\n\nBecause of our position as a low cost operator with a clean balance sheet, the Company remains in a strong position to not only survive, but also to add both short and long-term shareholder value during the pendency of this downturn in market prices.\n\n## Forward Strategy\n\nAs dire as the oil markets may appear today, they do remain very efficient in reacting swiftly to changing prices. Logic would dictate that the highest cost barrel would be the first off the market, but many of these high cost barrels come from long lead time projects that have significant sunk costs so are comparatively slow to react. US shale plays, for the most part, are not the marginal cost barrel but, because of the short lead times, are often the quickest to react.\n\nThis has resulted in an extraordinarily fast reduction in active drilling rigs in the US slowing the pace of growth which will ultimately and unavoidably lead to supply restrictions from the US. While the rig count reduction is encouraging, some of the wells drilled prior to the reduction are still waiting upon completion and the remaining active rigs continue to drill away meaning new wells will continue to come online with high flush production so we are unlikely to see a flattening and ultimate reduction in US supply until late this year. The good news is that high initial production rates fade fast so, as long as prices stay relatively low, there is likely to be a material decline in U.S. production (say 8-9%) over the course of 2016.\n\nWhile the supply reaction is well under way, demand continues to grow with the economy (net of efficiency improvements) meaning that, like often in history, market fundamentals will ultimately come back into balance and beyond, resulting in a period of under-supply and, therefore, higher than normal prices. While this scenario seems likely as a historical matter, it is also virtually impossible to predict timing with any degree of accuracy. Fortunately, since US shale is not the marginal cost barrel in the long term, it will survive, become more efficient, and outperform in when prices ultimately recover.\n\nOur shareholders will benefit from our exposure to some of the highest quality US shale acreage and production in the Eagle Ford along with our leading cost structure and strong balance sheet. While prices are down, we intend to invest capital in development opportunities with reasonable returns and to maintain leases and sustain production levels while protecting our balance sheet and patiently increasing the size and quality of our drilling inventory.\n\nTo implement this strategy, we will continue to drive down development costs by capitalizing on weak service demand and improving efficiency to create a sustainable cost advantage, leasing expired mineral rights in our core areas relinquished by peers with weaker balance sheets, and striving to acquire additional Eagle Ford assets with current production within our current, conservative balance sheet parameters. By creating a sustainable cost advantage and growing drilling inventory while prices are low, we anticipate generating strong shareholder returns through this cycle.\n\nFinally, our Company remains well positioned because of the hard and creative work put forth by our employees, board of directors, partners, contractors, and consultants. With prices low we have a new set of circumstances we can capitalize on to strengthen our business. Thanks to each and every one of you for your continued focus and passion to take the calculated risks needed for generating superior shareholder returns and building a stable, flourishing enterprise. \n\nSincerely,\n\nE RIC MCCRADY Managing Director & CEO\n\nOur shareholders will benefit from our exposure to some of the highest quality US shale acreage and production in the Eagle Ford along with our leading cost structure and strong balance sheet.\n\n5" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7393608661916602, + "doc_id": "47146bedee8f591bb7876a5536e40ff9220f918c194a8596a67970344ce0d1d6", + "edit_distance": 0.2549889135254989, + "f1_score": 0.9883040935672514, + "meteor": 0.7795849538364756, + "precision": 0.9883040935672515, + "pred_md": "## Potential payments Upon Termination of Employment or Change of Control\n\nThe following tables shows the estimated potential payments and benefits that would be received by the Managing Director and CEO in the event of his termination of employment as a result of various circumstances discussed within his employment contract and assumes that any termination was effective as of 31 December 2014. The actual amounts to be paid can only be determined at the time of the Managing Director's actual termination.\n\n## J. Details of Remuneration\n\nIncentive compensation (STI and LTI) paid during 2014 relates to performance for the year ended 31 December 2013.\n\nDirector and KMP remuneration paid in accordance with Accounting Standards for fiscal years ended 31 December 2014 and 2013.\n\nTotal\n\n(1) Non-monetary benefits includes car parking fringe benefits and payment of health premiums.\n\n(2) Fair value of services received in return for the options granted is measured using the Black-Scholes Option Pricing Model, as further discussed in Note 31 to the Financial Report, and represents the portion of the grant date fair value expense of the option during the year. Options were granted to Anderson and Ford in December 2011 and September 2011, respectively.\n\n(3) Fair value of services received in return for the LTI share based awards are based on the allocable portion of aggregate fair value expense recognised under AASB 2 for the year. The aggregate fair value is based on the number of RSUs awarded valued at the Company's stock price at the date of grant, translated at the foreign exchange rate in effect on the date of grant. Vesting is 25% at the time of grant (following the performance period), with 25% cliff vesting each subsequent year on the date of grant. The amount included as remuneration is not related to or indicative of the benefit (if any) that individuals may ultimately realise when the RSUs vest.\n\n- 41 -", + "recall": 0.9883040935672515, + "true_md": "## Potential payments Upon Termination of Employment or Change of Control The following tables shows the estimated potential payments and benefits that would be received by the Managing Director and\n\nPotential payments Upon Termination of Employment or Change of Control The following tables shows the estimated potential payments and benefits that would be received by the Managing Director and CEO in the event of his termination of employment as a result of various circumstances discussed within his employment contract and assumes that any termination was effective as of 31 December 2014. The actual amounts to be paid can only be determined at the time of the Managing Director’s actual termination. \n\nIncentive compensation (STI and LTI) paid during 2014 relates to performance for the year ended 31 December 2013.\n\nDirector and KMP remuneration paid in accordance with Accounting Standards for fiscal years ended 31 December 2014 and 2013.\n\n## J. Details of Remuneration\n\n- (1) Non-monetary benefits includes car parking fringe benefits and payment of health premiums. (2) Fair value of services received in return for the options granted is measured using the Black-Scholes Option Pricing \n\n- (1) Non-monetary benefits includes car parking fringe benefits and payment of health premiums. (2) Fair value of services received in return for the options granted is measured using the Black-Scholes Option Pricing Model, as further discussed in Note 31 to the Financial Report, and represents the portion of the grant date fair value expense of the option during the year. Options were granted to Anderson and Ford in December 2011 and September 2011, respectively. (3) Fair value of services received in return for the LTI share based awards are based on the allocable portion of aggregate \n\n- 2011, respectively. (3) Fair value of services received in return for the LTI share based awards are based on the allocable portion of aggregate fair value expense recognised under AASB 2 for the year. The aggregate fair value is based on the number of RSUs awarded valued at the Company’s stock price at the date of grant, translated at the foreign exchange rate in effect on the date of grant. Vesting is 25% at the time of grant (following the performance period), with 25% cliff vesting each subsequent year on the date of grant. The amount included as remuneration is not related to or indicative of the benefit (if any) that individuals may ultimately realise when the RSUs vest. \n\n- 41 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.918504448250212, + "doc_id": "a2b98c9f2165fe6ef0e71f33ba16492d3e554d05739cd658fa3cd8b65f44ac27", + "edit_distance": 0.3767605633802817, + "f1_score": 0.9244060475161987, + "meteor": 0.8663275110283912, + "precision": 0.9385964912280702, + "pred_md": "Risk management systems are in place at the individual Group companies in accordance with SMFG's Groupwide basic policies for risk management. For example, at SMBC, specific departments have been appointed to oversee the handling of the four risk categories listed above, in addition to risks associated with settlement. Each risk category is managed taking into account the particular characteristics of that category. In addition, the Risk Management Unit has been establishedindependent of the business units-and the risk management framework has been strengthened by consolidating the functions for managing major risks-credit, market, liquidity and operational-into the Risk Management Unit and enhancing our across-the-board risk monitoring ability. A board member is assigned to oversee the Risk Management Unit comprising the Corporate Risk Management Department and Credit & Investment Planning Department. The Corporate Risk Management Department-the unit's planning department-comprehensively and systematically manages all categories of risk in cooperation with the Corporate Planning Department. Moreover, the Internal Audit Unit-independent of all business units-conducts periodic audits to ensure that the management system is functioning properly.\n\nFurthermore, under our system top management plays an active role in the approval of basic policies for risk management. The decision-making process for addressing credit, market, and liquidity risk at the operating level is strengthened by the Credit Risk Management Committee and the Market Risk Management Committee, which are subcommittees of the Management Committee. The Management Committee is also attended by the relevant department heads.\n\n## ■ Risk Management Framework\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n33\n\n## Integrated Risk Management\n\n## (1) Risk Capital-Based Management\n\nIn order to maintain a balance between risk and return as well as ensure the soundness of the Group from an overall perspective, we employ the risk capital-based management method. We measure 'risk capital' based on value at risk (VaR), etc. as a uniform basic measure of credit, market, and operational risk, taking account of the special characteristics of each type of risk and the business activities of each Group company. We then allocate capital appropriately and effectively to each unit to keep total exposure to various risks within the scope of our resources, i.e., capital.\n\nIn the case of credit and market risk, we set maximum risk capital limits, which indicate the maximum risk that may be taken during the period, taking account the level of stress stipulated in business plans. In addition, for operational risk, we also allocate risk capital, and, for the Group as a whole, we set total risk capital allocations within SMFG's capital. Risk capital limits are subdivided into guidelines or ceilings for each business including VaR and loss limits. Therefore, by strictly observing the VaR and loss limits, and other factors, SMFG maintains the soundness of the Group as a whole.\n\nIn this framework, risk capital includes credit concentration risk and interest rate risk in the banking book which are taken into account under the Second Pillar of Basel II. In addition, we conduct risk capital-based management activities on a consolidated basis, including each Group company.", + "recall": 0.9106382978723404, + "true_md": "## Integrated Risk Management\n\n## (1) Risk Capital-Based Management\n\nRisk management systems are in place at the individual Group companies in accordance with SMFG’s Groupwide basic policies for risk management. For example, at SMBC, specific departments have been appointed to oversee the handling of the four risk categories listed above, in addition to risks associ- ated with settlement. Each risk category is managed taking into account the particular characteristics of that category. In addition, the Risk Management Unit has been established— independent of the business units—and the risk management framework has been strengthened by consolidating the functions for managing major risks—credit, market, liquidity and operational—into the Risk Management Unit and enhancing our across-the-board risk monitoring ability. A board member is assigned to oversee the Risk Management Unit comprising the Corporate Risk Management Department and Credit & Investment Planning Department. The Corporate Risk Management Department—the unit’s plan- ning department—comprehensively and systematically manages all categories of risk in cooperation with the Corporate Planning Department. Moreover, the Internal Audit Unit—independent of all business units—conducts periodic audits to ensure that the man- agement system is functioning properly.\n\nIn order to maintain a balance between risk and return as well as ensure the soundness of the Group from an overall perspective, we employ the risk capital-based management method. We measure “risk capital” based on value at risk (VaR), etc. as a uniform basic measure of credit, market, and operational risk, taking account of the special characteristics of each type of risk and the business activities of each Group company. We then allocate capital appro- priately and effectively to each unit to keep total exposure to various risks within the scope of our resources, i.e., capital.\n\nIn the case of credit and market risk, we set maximum risk capital limits, which indicate the maximum risk that may be taken during the period, taking account the level of stress stipulated in business plans. In addition, for operational risk, we also allocate risk capital, and, for the Group as a whole, we set total risk capital allocations within SMFG’s capital. Risk capital limits are subdivided into guidelines or ceilings for each business including VaR and loss limits. Therefore, by strictly observing the VaR and loss limits, and other factors, SMFG maintains the soundness of the Group as a whole.\n\nIn this framework, risk capital includes credit concentration risk and interest rate risk in the banking book which are taken into account under the Second Pillar of Basel II. In addition, we conduct risk capital-based management activities on a consolidated basis, including each Group company.\n\nFurthermore, under our system top management plays an active role in the approval of basic policies for risk management. The decision-making process for addressing credit, market, and liquidity risk at the operating level is strengthened by the Credit Risk Management Committee and the Market Risk Management Committee, which are subcommittees of the Management Committee. The Management Committee is also attended by the relevant department heads.\n\n## ■ Risk Management Framework\n\nSMFG 2011 33" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "1f03e0da4e9c044b59a6d65c5f38aaffecf802b0ee48160a42c79afde0d14991", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9990234375, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "[This page intentionally left blank.]", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "[This page intentionally left blank.]" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5170227784186746, + "doc_id": "e6b48ea49a040e5b0bc6838b314350746168f8d0dd57571dad2b7d172a08b4ed", + "edit_distance": 0.7448559670781894, + "f1_score": 0.9928057553956834, + "meteor": 0.5223583627665666, + "precision": 0.9951923076923077, + "pred_md": "## Item 6. Selected Financial Data.\n\nDollars in millions except per square foot and per share amounts\n\nThe following selected financial data are derived from the audited consolidated financial statements and should be read in conjunction with Item 1A: Risk Factors, Item 7: Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations and the consolidated financial statements and related notes included in Item 8: Financial Statements and Supplementary Data of this Annual Report on Form 10-K.\n\n1 Gross profit is calculated as net sales less cost of sales and related buying and occupancy costs (for all segments).\n\n2 Comparable sales include sales from stores that have been open at least one full year at the beginning of the year. We also include sales from our online channels (Nordstrom.com, Nordstromrack.com and HauteLook) in comparable sales because of the integration with our stores. Fiscal year 2012 includes an extra week (the 53 rd week) as a result of our 4-5-4 retail reporting calendar. The 53 rd week is not included in comparable sales calculations.\n\n3 See ROIC (Non-GAAP financial measure) on page 26 for additional information and reconciliation to the most directly comparable GAAP financial measure.\n\n4 Sales per square foot is calculated as net sales divided by weighted-average square footage. Weighted-average square footage includes a percentage of year-end square footage for new stores equal to the percentage of the year during which they were open. 4-wall sales per square foot is calculated as sales for Nordstrom U.S. full-line stores, Nordstrom Rack stores, Jeffrey boutiques, our Canada full-line store, Last Chance and Trunk Club showrooms divided by their weighted-average square footage.\n\n5 Ending inventory includes pack and hold inventory of $222, $173, $125, $34 and $0 in 2014, 2013, 2012, 2011 and 2010, which represents strategic purchases of merchandise for upcoming selling seasons.\n\n6 Inventory turnover rate is calculated as annual cost of sales and related buying and occupancy costs (for all segments) divided by 4-quarter average inventory. Retailers do not uniformly calculate inventory turnover as buying and occupancy costs may be included in selling, general and administrative expenses. As such, our inventory turnover rates may not be comparable to other retailers.\n\n7 Other stores include Jeffrey boutiques, Trunk Club showrooms, our Nordstrom Canada full-line store and Last Chance.\n\nNordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 15", + "recall": 0.9904306220095693, + "true_md": "## Item 6. Selected Financial Data. Dollars in millions except per square foot and per share amounts\n\nNordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 15\n\nmay not be comparable to other retailers. 7 Other stores include Jeffrey boutiques, Trunk Club showrooms, our Nordstrom Canada full-line store and Last Chance.\n\nmerchandise for upcoming selling seasons. 6 Inventory turnover rate is calculated as annual cost of sales and related buying and occupancy costs (for all segments) divided by 4-quarter average inventory. Retailers do not uniformly calculate inventory turnover as buying and occupancy costs may be included in selling, general and administrative expenses. As such, our inventory turnover rates may not be comparable to other retailers. Other stores include Jeffrey boutiques, Trunk Club showrooms, our Nordstrom Canada full-line store and Last Chance.\n\nNordstrom Rack stores, Jeffrey boutiques, our Canada full-line store, Last Chance and Trunk Club showrooms divided by their weighted-average square footage. 5 Ending inventory includes pack and hold inventory of $222, $173, $125, $34 and $0 in 2014, 2013, 2012, 2011 and 2010, which represents strategic purchases of merchandise for upcoming selling seasons. Inventory turnover rate is calculated as annual cost of sales and related buying and occupancy costs (for all segments) divided by 4-quarter average inventory. Retailers do not \n\nas a result of our 4-5-4 retail reporting calendar. The 53 week is not included in comparable sales calculations. 3 See ROIC (Non-GAAP financial measure) on page 26 for additional information and reconciliation to the most directly comparable GAAP financial measure. Sales per square foot is calculated as net sales divided by weighted-average square footage. Weighted-average square footage includes a percentage of year-end square \n\n1 Gross profit is calculated as net sales less cost of sales and related buying and occupancy costs (for all segments). Comparable sales include sales from stores that have been open at least one full year at the beginning of the year. We also include sales from our online channels \n\nGross profit is calculated as net sales less cost of sales and related buying and occupancy costs (for all segments). 2 Comparable sales include sales from stores that have been open at least one full year at the beginning of the year. We also include sales from our online channels (Nordstrom.com, Nordstromrack.com and HauteLook) in comparable sales because of the integration with our stores. Fiscal year 2012 includes an extra week (the 53 rd week) as a result of our 4-5-4 retail reporting calendar. The 53 rd week is not included in comparable sales calculations. See ROIC (Non-GAAP financial measure) on page 26 for additional information and reconciliation to the most directly comparable GAAP financial measure.\n\nItem 6. Selected Financial Data. Dollars in millions except per square foot and per share amounts\n\nThe following selected financial data are derived from the audited consolidated financial statements and should be read in conjunction with Item 1A: Risk Factors, Item 7: Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations and the consolidated financial statements and related notes included in Item 8: Financial Statements and Supplementary Data of this Annual Report on Form 10-K.\n\nSee ROIC (Non-GAAP financial measure) on page 26 for additional information and reconciliation to the most directly comparable GAAP financial measure. 4 Sales per square foot is calculated as net sales divided by weighted-average square footage. Weighted-average square footage includes a percentage of year-end square footage for new stores equal to the percentage of the year during which they were open. 4-wall sales per square foot is calculated as sales for Nordstrom U.S. full-line stores, Nordstrom Rack stores, Jeffrey boutiques, our Canada full-line store, Last Chance and Trunk Club showrooms divided by their weighted-average square footage. Ending inventory includes pack and hold inventory of $222, $173, $125, $34 and $0 in 2014, 2013, 2012, 2011 and 2010, which represents strategic purchases of" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9326945824257024, + "doc_id": "7e8c275033acbf27ddae0ab6704158833a97a3035302600a68d270d33de47d70", + "edit_distance": 0.2620481927710843, + "f1_score": 0.985250737463127, + "meteor": 0.9249637282134523, + "precision": 0.9881656804733728, + "pred_md": "## Management's Discussion and Analysis\n\nDollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\n## Limited Exposure to Rent Control\n\nThe majority of Killam's portfolio does not fall under rent control, allowing Killam to move rents to market on an annual basis. PEI is the one province in Atlantic Canada with rent control for apartments, and this represents only 6.9% of Killam's apartment units. Ontario has rent control; however the legislation excludes properties built after 1991. Six of Killam's twelve properties in Ontario (814 units) are newer properties (built after 2004) and therefore do not fall under the rent control guideline.\n\nOntario and Nova Scotia both have rent control for MHCs. In both provinces owners may apply for above-guideline increases to offset significant capital expenditures. Higher rent increases are also allowed for new tenants entering the communities.\n\nTo determine rental increases for its portfolio, the Company analyzes each property on a regular basis, considering its location, tenant base and vacancy, to evaluate the ability to increase rents for both existing tenants and on turnovers.\n\n## CMHC Insured Debt Available for 90% of Killam's Portfolio\n\ncanadian apartment owners can apply for cmHc mortgage loan insurance. the mortgage insurance guarantees the repayment of the loan to the lender, eliminating default risk to the lender which results in lower interest rates for the borrower than with conventional mortgages. Killam uses CMHC insurance and has 72% of its apartments financed with CMHC insured debt. As mortgages are renewed or new properties are financed, Killam expects to use CMHC insurance and increase the percentage of insured debt. CMHC insurance is not available for the owners of MHCs, however, it is available for the individual homeowners.\n\n34 Killam ProPerties inc | 2013", + "recall": 0.9823529411764705, + "true_md": "The majority of Killam’s portfolio does not fall under rent control, allowing Killam to move rents to market on an annual basis. PEI is the one province in Atlantic Canada with rent control for apartments, and this represents only 6.9% of Killam’s apartment units. Ontario has rent control; however the legislation excludes properties built after 1991. Six of Killam’s twelve properties in Ontario (814 units) are newer properties (built after 2004) and therefore do not fall under the rent control guideline.\n\nOntario and Nova Scotia both have rent control for MHCs. In both provinces owners may apply for above‑guideline increases to offset significant capital expenditures. Higher rent increases are also allowed for new tenants entering the communities.\n\nTo determine rental increases for its portfolio, the Company analyzes each property on a regular basis, considering its location, tenant base and vacancy, to evaluate the ability to increase rents for both existing tenants and on turnovers.\n\ncanadian apartment owners can apply for cmHc mortgage loan insurance. the mortgage insurance guarantees the repayment of the loan to the lender, eliminating default risk to the lender which results in lower interest rates for the borrower than with conventional mortgages. Killam uses CMHC insurance and has 72% of its apartments financed with CMHC insured debt. As mortgages are renewed or new properties are financed, Killam expects to use CMHC insurance and increase the percentage of insured debt. CMHC insurance is not available for the owners of MHCs, however, it is available for the individual homeowners.\n\n## CMHC Insured Debt Available for 90% of Killam’s Portfolio\n\n## Limited Exposure to Rent Control\n\nManagement’s Discussion and Analysis Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\n34 Killam ProPerties inc | 2013" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.883273089493666, + "doc_id": "bcb724a708fd55f25e27048046c1efde75897f3047061ad5bebfd564ed5804c7", + "edit_distance": 0.10596026490066225, + "f1_score": 0.9781021897810219, + "meteor": 0.9071400469401747, + "precision": 0.9781021897810219, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 31 - SHARE BASED PAYMENTS\n\n## Options\n\nDuring the years ended 31 December 2014 and 2013, a total of nil and 2,000,000 options were granted to employees pursuant to employment agreements and a total of 431,666 and 2,725,000 previously issued options were exercised, respectively. There were 700,000 awarded options that the Company issued in early 2013 for which Company employees rendered services during the six month period ended 31 December 2012.\n\nThe following tables summarise the options issued and awarded and their related grant date, fair value and vesting conditions for the year ended 31 December 2013. No options were issued during the year ended 31 December 2014.\n\nFor options outstanding as at 31 December 2014, the exercise price ranged from A$0.65 to A$0.95 and the weighted average remaining contractual life was 3.5 years.\n\nOptions issued during the year ended 31 December 2013:\n\nShare based payments expense related to options is determined pursuant to AASB 2 - Share Based Payments ('AASB 2') / IFRS 2 - Share Based Payments ('IFRS 2'), and is recognised pursuant to the attached vesting conditions. The fair value of the options awarded ranged from A$0.53 to A$0.59 for the year ended 31 December 2013, which were calculated using a Black-Sholes options pricing model. Expected volatilities are based upon the historical volatility of the ordinary shares. Historical data is also used to estimate the probability of option exercise and potential forfeitures.\n\n- 95 -", + "recall": 0.9781021897810219, + "true_md": "NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS \n\n## NOTE 31 – SHARE BASED PAYMENTS\n\n## Options During the years ended 31 December 2014 and 2013, a total of nil and 2,000,000 options were granted to employees\n\nOptions During the years ended 31 December 2014 and 2013, a total of nil and 2,000,000 options were granted to employees pursuant to employment agreements and a total of 431,666 and 2,725,000 previously issued options were exercised, respectively. There were 700,000 awarded options that the Company issued in early 2013 for which Company employees rendered services during the six month period ended 31 December 2012.\n\nThe following tables summarise the options issued and awarded and their related grant date, fair value and vesting conditions for the year ended 31 December 2013. No options were issued during the year ended 31 December 2014. \n\nFor options outstanding as at 31 December 2014, the exercise price ranged from A$0.65 to A$0.95 and the weighted average remaining contractual life was 3.5 years. \n\nOptions issued during the year ended 31 December 2013: \n\nShare based payments expense related to options is determined pursuant to AASB 2 - Share Based Payments (“AASB 2”) / IFRS 2 – Share Based Payments (“IFRS 2”), and is recognised pursuant to the attached vesting conditions. The fair value of the options awarded ranged from A$0.53 to A$0.59 for the year ended 31 December 2013, which were calculated using a Black-Sholes options pricing model. Expected volatilities are based upon the historical volatility of the ordinary shares. Historical data is also used to estimate the probability of option exercise and potential forfeitures.\n\n- 95 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9360768684355544, + "doc_id": "abf2105932331d1d3fdd619a7b816a7ecaae8891f4d5aad7284926a2b20dbbf3", + "edit_distance": 0.845945945945946, + "f1_score": 0.9874999999999999, + "meteor": 0.7717603755561542, + "precision": 0.9895615866388309, + "pred_md": "MANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS\n\n## OUR STRATEGY\n\nTo achieve our vision and drive our future growth, we have six strategic objectives. We made significant progress this year against each of these, across all business segments. See 'Key Highlights' for more detail about individual highlights.\n\n## 1. DELIVER DIFFERENTIATED END-TO-END CUSTOMER EXPERIENCES\n\nFocus on evolving our cross-device, multi-screen integration to enable seamless, reliable and easy-to-use product experiences anytime, anyplace and anywhere; on delivering a differentiated range of devices and device-related services; and on enabling greater integration of our media assets across screens.\n\n## OUR PROGRESS IN 2013\n\nWe continued to evolve our wireless offering this year, redesigning and simplifying wireless offerings and pricing tiers, and introducing Canada's first wireless Share Everything plan. We also launched a hybrid wireless home and small business phone solution that operates on our national wireless network.\n\nCable unveiled the next generation of TV experience with NextBox 3.0, and Media made significant progress this year, announcing a landmark exclusive 12-year licensing agreement to broadcast national NHL games, launching a subscription digital magazine service, upgrading The Shopping Channel, and including adding a mobile app and social media. It also launched Sportsnet 360, and announced a 10-year partnership extension with the Vancouver Canucks.\n\n## 2. MAINTAIN INDUSTRY-LEADING NETWORKS\n\nReinforce our network's reliability and speed to capture and monetize the growth in data consumption by expanding our LTE network to a wider proportion of the Canadian population, continuing to increase broadband Internet speeds, and further enhancing our TV platforms with next generation features and functionality.\n\n## OUR PROGRESS IN 2013\n\nWe continued to expand our high speed wireless LTE 4G broadband network this year, and offered the largest selection of LTE devices of any carrier in Canada. Our LTE 4G network was the first in Canada, which covered approximately 73 % of the Canadian population at December 31, 2013.\n\nWe were also recognized for our networks: PCMag.com named us Canada's fastest broadband Internet service provider and wireless network in October 2013, and SamKnows stated through in-home testing in May 2013, that we delivered, on average, 100 % or more of our advertised download speeds on our most popular Internet packages, better than most providers they tested in the US and Europe.\n\n## 3. EXPAND OUR SERVICES REACH\n\nExpand the reach of our networks and services through new construction and targeted acquisitions that complement our existing platforms; by more widely deploying products and services; and by expanding the reach of our key media brands nationally and across our digital platforms.\n\n## OUR PROGRESS IN 2013\n\nWe expanded our wireless network by establishing key network sharing agreements to bring LTE to more customers at faster speeds to customers in Manitoba, Quebec and the Ottawa region, and through our relationship with AT&T to become the first Canadian carrier to offer LTE roaming for customers travelling to the US. We also secured an option to buy Shaw's Advanced Wireless Service (AWS) spectrum holdings.\n\n32\n\nROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\nWe launched new products, including Rogers Smart Home Monitoring, to customers in Ontario's Golden Horseshoe area and Atlantic Canada. We completed several strategic acquisitions this year that strengthened our offering of cable television, Internet and telephony services in the Hamilton, Ontario area, established Business Solutions as a leader in Canadian data centre and hosting services and increased the reach of our television broadcast network to over 80 % of Canadian households.\n\n## 4. STRENGTHEN THE CUSTOMER EXPERIENCE\n\nConstantly improve the experience that customers have using our products and services by making it easier for them, providing the tools and resources customers need to use our products with confidence, being attuned to our customers' evolving needs and continuing to simplify our product offerings.\n\n## OUR PROGRESS IN 2013\n\nWe launched several new programs this year to improve the customer experience, including Canada's first Share Everything plans for individuals, families and small businesses, our 'worry free' $7.99 per day US wireless data roaming plan, a new suite of simplified travel value packs of voice, text and data roaming, and the Rogers First Rewards loyalty program, and we received regulatory approval for the Rogers credit card. Connected for Success, our new broadband Internet pilot project is designed to provide affordable broadband Internet, computers and software to residents of Toronto Community Housing as part of the Rogers Youth Fund program.\n\n## 5. IMPROVE PRODUCTIVITY AND COST STRUCTURE\n\nContinue to focus on cost-optimization initiatives and organizational efficiency by improving service delivery, reducing complexity, focusing on fewer projects with more impact, managing expenses and working more closely with key suppliers.\n\n## OUR PROGRESS IN 2013\n\nWe continued to make progress on our cost efficiency initiatives this year, which contributed to a 3 % increase in consolidated adjusted operating profit and a 6 basis point increase in our consolidated adjusted operating profit margin to 39.3 % , driven mostly by Wireless and Cable.\n\n## 6. DRIVE FUTURE GROWTH OPPORTUNITIES\n\nContinue to develop targeted new growth areas of our business, including machine-to-machine (M2M) communications, mobile commerce and video, business communications services, local and digital media services, home automation and sports.\n\n## OUR PROGRESS IN 2013\n\nWe made strides in the M2M market this year, demonstrating a single, worldwide SIM card with our M2M global alliance partners that will strengthen our M2M offering to multinational customers, and announcing an M2M agreement with Sprint to bring a comprehensive in-car infotainment solution to the Canadian market. We also certified the Suretap wallet, our mobile payment service, for the Android and BlackBerry 10 operating smartphone systems. We received a licence to operate a bank for the purposes of launching a Rogers' branded credit card. In addition, we expanded our Rogers Smart Home Monitoring footprint, and launched other initiatives such as Outrank, an online site for marketing and advertising small business, introduced Rogers Alerts and other digital opportunities.", + "recall": 0.9854469854469855, + "true_md": "MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS\n\n## OUR STRATEGY\n\n## 1. DELIVER DIFFERENTIATED END-TO-END CUSTOMER EXPERIENCES\n\n## OUR PROGRESS IN 2013\n\n## 4. STRENGTHEN THE CUSTOMER EXPERIENCE\n\n## OUR PROGRESS IN 2013\n\n## 2. MAINTAIN INDUSTRY-LEADING NETWORKS\n\n## OUR PROGRESS IN 2013\n\n## OUR PROGRESS IN 2013\n\n## 5. IMPROVE PRODUCTIVITY AND COST STRUCTURE\n\n## 3. EXPAND OUR SERVICES REACH\n\n## 6. DRIVE FUTURE GROWTH OPPORTUNITIES\n\n## OUR PROGRESS IN 2013\n\n## OUR PROGRESS IN 2013\n\n32 ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\nFocus on evolving our cross-device, multi-screen integration to enable seamless, reliable and easy-to-use product experiences anytime, anyplace and anywhere; on delivering a differentiated range of devices and device-related services; and on enabling greater integration of our media assets across screens.\n\nWe launched new products, including Rogers Smart Home Monitoring, to customers in Ontario’s Golden Horseshoe area and Atlantic Canada.\n\nWe completed several strategic acquisitions this year that strengthened our offering of cable television, Internet and telephony services in the Hamilton, Ontario area, established Business Solutions as a leader in Canadian data centre and hosting services and increased the reach of our television broadcast network to over 80 % of Canadian households.\n\nWe continued to evolve our wireless offering this year, redesigning and simplifying wireless offerings and pricing tiers, and introducing Canada’s first wireless Share Everything plan. We also launched a hybrid wireless home and small business phone solution that operates on our national wireless network.\n\nCable unveiled the next generation of TV experience with NextBox 3.0, and Media made significant progress this year, announcing a landmark exclusive 12-year licensing agreement to broadcast national NHL games, launching a subscription digital magazine service, upgrading The Shopping Channel, and including adding a mobile app and social media. It also launched Sportsnet 360, and announced a 10-year partnership extension with the Vancouver Canucks.\n\nConstantly improve the experience that customers have using our products and services by making it easier for them, providing the tools and resources customers need to use our products with confidence, being attuned to our customers’ evolving needs and continuing to simplify our product offerings.\n\nWe launched several new programs this year to improve the customer experience, including Canada’s first Share Everything plans for individuals, families and small businesses, our “worry free” $7.99 per day US wireless data roaming plan, a new suite of simplified travel value packs of voice, text and data roaming, and the Rogers First Rewards loyalty program, and we received regulatory approval for the Rogers credit card. Connected for Success, our new broadband Internet pilot project is designed to provide affordable broadband Internet, computers and software to residents of Toronto Community Housing as part of the Rogers Youth Fund program.\n\nReinforce our network’s reliability and speed to capture and monetize the growth in data consumption by expanding our LTE network to a wider proportion of the Canadian population, continuing to increase broadband Internet speeds, and further enhancing our TV platforms with next generation features and functionality.\n\nWe continued to expand our high speed wireless LTE 4G broadband network this year, and offered the largest selection of LTE devices of any carrier in Canada. Our LTE 4G network was the first in Canada, which covered approximately 73 % of the Canadian population at December 31, 2013.\n\nContinue to focus on cost-optimization initiatives and organizational efficiency by improving service delivery, reducing complexity, focusing on fewer projects with more impact, managing expenses and working more closely with key suppliers.\n\nWe continued to make progress on our cost efficiency initiatives this year, which contributed to a 3 % increase in consolidated adjusted operating profit and a 6 basis point increase in our consolidated adjusted operating profit margin to 39.3 % , driven mostly by Wireless and Cable.\n\nWe were also recognized for our networks: PCMag.com named us Canada’s fastest broadband Internet service provider and wireless network in October 2013, and SamKnows stated through in-home testing in May 2013, that we delivered, on average, 100 % or more of our advertised download speeds on our most popular Internet packages, better than most providers they tested in the US and Europe.\n\nContinue to develop targeted new growth areas of our business, including machine-to-machine (M2M) communications, mobile commerce and video, business communications services, local and digital media services, home automation and sports.\n\nExpand the reach of our networks and services through new construction and targeted acquisitions that complement our existing platforms; by more widely deploying products and services; and by expanding the reach of our key media brands nationally and across our digital platforms.\n\nWe made strides in the M2M market this year, demonstrating a single, worldwide SIM card with our M2M global alliance partners that will strengthen our M2M offering to multinational customers, and announcing an M2M agreement with Sprint to bring a comprehensive in-car infotainment solution to the Canadian market. We also certified the Suretap wallet, our mobile payment service, for the Android and BlackBerry 10 operating smartphone systems. We received a licence to operate a bank for the purposes of launching a Rogers’ branded credit card. In addition, we expanded our Rogers Smart Home Monitoring footprint, and launched other initiatives such as Outrank, an online site for marketing and advertising small business, introduced Rogers Alerts and other digital opportunities.\n\nWe expanded our wireless network by establishing key network sharing agreements to bring LTE to more customers at faster speeds to customers in Manitoba, Quebec and the Ottawa region, and through our relationship with AT&T to become the first Canadian carrier to offer LTE roaming for customers travelling to the US. We also secured an option to buy Shaw’s Advanced Wireless Service (AWS) spectrum holdings.\n\nTo achieve our vision and drive our future growth, we have six strategic objectives. We made significant progress this year against each of these, across all business segments. See “Key Highlights” for more detail about individual highlights." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8978554601156932, + "doc_id": "b2bde62cf81ba96629d29e5a6e6e03f60e9058077bd240a64f5741067692794a", + "edit_distance": 0.35789473684210527, + "f1_score": 0.9562682215743439, + "meteor": 0.9120661264793368, + "precision": 0.9479768786127167, + "pred_md": "SMFG\n\nCapital Ratio Information\n\n## B. Specialized Lending (SL)\n\n## (A) Rating Procedures\n\n- GLYPH<129> 'Specialized lending' is sub-classified into 'project finance,' 'object finance,' 'commodity finance,' 'income-producing real estate' (IPRE) and 'high-volatility commercial real estate' (HVCRE) in accordance with the Notification. Project finance is financing of a single project, such as a power plant or transportation infrastructure, and cash flows generated by the project are the primary source of repayment. Object finance includes aircraft finance and ship finance, and IPRE and HVCRE include real estate finance (a primary example is non-recourse real estate finance). There were no commodity finance exposures as of March 31, 2011.\n- GLYPH<129> Each SL product is classified as either a facility assigned a PD grade and LGD grade or a facility assigned a grade based primarily on the expected loss ratio, both using grading models and qualitative assessment. The former has the same grading structure as that of corporate, and the latter has ten grade levels as with obligor grades but the definition of each grade differs from that of the obligor grade which is focused on PD.\n\nFor the credit risk-weighted asset amount for the SL category, the former facility is calculated in a manner similar to corporate exposures, while the latter facility is calculated by mapping the expected loss-based facility grades to the below five categories (hereinafter the 'slotting criteria') of the Notification because it does not satisfy the requirements for PD application specified in the Notification.\n\n## (B) Portfolio\n\n## a. Slotting Criteria Applicable Portion\n\n## (a) Project Finance and Object Finance\n\nNote: A portion of 'Object finance' is calculated using the PD/LGD approach.\n\n## (b) High-Volatility Commercial Real Estate (HVCRE)\n\n## b. PD/LGD Approach Applicable Portion, Other Than Slotting Criteria Applicable Portion\n\n## (a) Object Finance\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n184", + "recall": 0.9647058823529412, + "true_md": "SMFG Capital Ratio Information\n\n## B. Specialized Lending (SL)\n\n## (A) Rating Procedures\n\n## (B) Portfolio\n\n## a. Slotting Criteria Applicable Portion\n\n## (a) Project Finance and Object Finance\n\n## (b) High-Volatility Commercial Real Estate (HVCRE)\n\n## b. PD/LGD Approach Applicable Portion, Other Than Slotting Criteria Applicable Portion\n\n## (a) Object Finance\n\n- GLYPH<129> “Specialized lending” is sub-classified into “project finance,” “object finance,” “commodity finance,” “income-producing real estate” (IPRE) and “high-volatility commercial real estate” (HVCRE) in accordance with the Notification. Project finance is financing of a single project, such as a power plant or transportation infrastructure, and cash flows generated by the project are the primary source of repayment. Object finance includes aircraft finance and ship finance, and IPRE and HVCRE include real estate finance (a primary example is non-recourse real estate finance). There were no commodity finance exposures as of March 31, 2011.\n\n- GLYPH<129> Each SL product is classified as either a facility assigned a PD grade and LGD grade or a facility assigned a grade based primarily on the expected loss ratio, both using grading models and qualitative assessment. The former has the same grading structure as that of corporate, and the latter has ten grade levels as with obligor grades but the definition of each grade differs from that of the obligor grade which is focused on PD.\n\nFor the credit risk-weighted asset amount for the SL category, the former facility is calculated in a manner similar to corporate exposures, while the latter facility is calculated by mapping the expected loss-based facility grades to the below five categories (hereinafter the “slotting criteria”) of the Notification because it does not satisfy the requirements for PD application specified in the Notification.\n\nNote: A portion of “Object finance” is calculated using the PD/LGD approach.\n\nSMFG 2011 184" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9526848547438783, + "doc_id": "a48d437b506ff5c5ab7284375606672d6862c585c534413d2cf7ff977aee112a", + "edit_distance": 0.046511627906976744, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9976019802220175, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## 108\n\nNotes to the Financial Statements\n\n## 29. Key management personnel disclosures continued\n\n## Loan to Director\n\nDetails of the loan made to a Director of Kingsgate are set out below:\n\nThere were no loans to Directors or other Key Management Personnel at any time during the previous year.\n\nNo write-downs or allowances for doubtful receivables have been recognised in relation to the loan made to Gavin Thomas.\n\nThis loan was repaid in full post year-end.\n\nwww.kingsgate.com.au", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Notes to the Financial Statements 108\n\n## 29. Key management personnel disclosures continued\n\n## Loan to Director\n\nDetails of the loan made to a Director of Kingsgate are set out below:\n\nThere were no loans to Directors or other Key Management Personnel at any time during the previous year.\n\nNo write-downs or allowances for doubtful receivables have been recognised in relation to the loan made to Gavin Thomas.\n\nThis loan was repaid in full post year-end.\n\nwww.kingsgate.com.au" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8590888738245122, + "doc_id": "6daf26a3213b0ce7f4d3ed5a00fb6dd72d02af7eaf2ada5fbe47a2ee81e5f6c1", + "edit_distance": 0.07407407407407407, + "f1_score": 0.9583333333333334, + "meteor": 0.9576091954022988, + "precision": 0.9583333333333334, + "pred_md": "Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nSMFG\n\n## (c) Equity derivatives\n\nNote: Fair value is calculated using discounted present value.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n121", + "recall": 0.9583333333333334, + "true_md": "Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nSMFG\n\n- (c) Equity derivatives\n\nNote: Fair value is calculated using discounted present value.\n\nSMFG 2011 121" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9679424741985699, + "doc_id": "b5a6e2b52098a67fda636ba6b33841fc11b133145d98da5f10bbafeb413af145", + "edit_distance": 0.0977112676056338, + "f1_score": 0.9826187717265353, + "meteor": 0.9752808003080289, + "precision": 0.986046511627907, + "pred_md": "advantage to a competitor. Annual investments in new capabilities, education and continuous improvement help to maintain and improve RCI's security posture. These are focused on protection and prevention, robust detection and advance preparation and planning to help prevent a potential breach from turning into a crisis. Risk management resources continue to be focused in this area.\n\nWe use standard industry practices for network and information technology security, survivability and disaster recovery. Our ongoing success partly depends on protecting our corporate business-sensitive data, including personal information about our customers and employees. We treat this information as intellectual property and protect it from unauthorized access and compromise. We rely on our policies and procedures and information technology systems to protect this information. If we do not secure our data and the privacy of our customer information, we may not be in compliance with regulatory standards and it could result in negative publicity, litigation and damage to our reputation. Any of these outcomes can cause us to lose customers or public confidence, or experience financial losses.\n\n## Impact of Network Failures on Revenue and Customer S ervice\n\nIf our networks or key network components fail, it could, in some circumstances, result in a loss of service for our customers for an indefinite period and have an adverse effect on our results and financial position. We rely on business partners to carry some traffic for some of our customers. If one of these carriers has a service failure, it might also cause a service interruption for our customers that would last until we could reroute the traffic to another carrier.\n\n## Unauthorized Access to Digital Boxes or Internet Modems\n\nWe use encryption technology developed and supported by our vendors to protect our cable signals from unauthorized access and to control access to programming based on subscription packages. We also use encryption and security technologies to prevent unauthorized access to our Internet service.\n\nThere is no assurance that we will be able to effectively prevent unauthorized decoding of television signals or Internet access in the future. If we are unable to control cable access with our encryption technology, subscriptions to digital programming, including premium VOD and SVOD, and Internet service revenues may decrease, which could result in a decline in our cable revenues.\n\n## REGULATORY RISKS\n\n## Changes in G overnment Regulations\n\nSubstantially all of our business activities are regulated by Industry Canada and/or the CRTC, and any regulatory changes or decisions could adversely affect our consolidated results of operations. See 'Regulation in Our Industry'.\n\nRegulatory changes or decisions made by these regulators could adversely impact our results of operations on a consolidated basis. This regulation relates to, among other things, licencing, competition, the cable television programming services that we must distribute, wireless and wireline interconnection agreements, the rates we may charge to provide access to our network by third parties, the resale of our networks and roaming on our networks, our operation and ownership of communications systems and our ability to acquire an interest in other communications systems. In addition, the costs of providing\n\nservices may be increased from time-to-time as a result of compliance with industry or legislative initiatives to address consumer protection concerns or such Internet-related issues as copyright infringement, unsolicited commercial e-mail, cybercrime and lawful access. Our cable, wireless and broadcasting licences may not generally be transferred without regulatory approval.\n\nGenerally, our licences are granted for a specified term and are subject to conditions on the maintenance of these licences. These licencing conditions may be modified at any time by the regulators. The regulators may decide not to renew a licence when it expires, and any failure by us to comply with the conditions on the maintenance of a licence could result in a revocation or forfeiture of any of our licences or the imposition of fines.\n\nThe licences include conditions requiring us to comply with Canadian ownership restrictions of the applicable legislation. We are currently in compliance with all of these Canadian ownership and control requirements. However, if these requirements are violated, we would be subject to various penalties, possibly including, in the extreme case, the loss of a licence.\n\n## The Wireless Code\n\nThe CRTC's decision to implement its wireless consumer code of conduct, among other things, effectively requires Canadian wireless carriers to move away from offering three-year service contracts and instead offer two-year contracts, and this could change our customer acquisition and retention costs and subscriber churn. The Wireless Code also sets billing caps on data roaming and domestic data overage charges, creates a prohibition on requiring customers to provide 30days' notice of cancellation, and requires the payment of interest on security deposits, which could also reduce our results of operations.\n\nOur wireless business could be materially adversely affected if laws, regulation or customer behaviour makes it difficult for us to impose term commitments or early cancellation fees on customers or receive the service revenues we anticipate from the term commitments.\n\n## S pectrum\n\nRadio spectrum is one of the fundamental assets required to carry on the wireless business. Our ability to continue to offer and improve current services and to offer new services depends on, among other factors, continued access to and deployment of adequate spectrum, including both the ability to renew current spectrum licenses and acquire new spectrum licenses.\n\nIf we cannot acquire and retain needed spectrum, we may not be able to continue to offer and improve our current services and deploy new services on a timely basis including providing competitive data speeds that customers want. As a result, our ability to attract and retain customers could be materially adversely affected. In addition, an inability to acquire and retain needed spectrum could affect network quality and result in higher capital expenditures, as a consequence of network densification and other related network upgrades.\n\n## S pectrum Fees\n\nChanges to government spectrum fees could significantly increase our payments and therefore materially reduce our operating profit. Spectrum licences are an indefinite life intangible asset and we do not amortize them, however, any potential increases in spectrum licence fees may affect our current accounting policies.\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC.\n\n75\n\nMANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS", + "recall": 0.9792147806004619, + "true_md": "MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AN D ANALYSIS\n\nadvantage to a competitor. Annual investments in new capabilities, education and continuous improvement help to maintain and improve RCI’s security posture. These are focused on protection and prevention, robust detection and advance preparation and planning to help prevent a potential breach from turning into a crisis. Risk management resources continue to be focused in this area.\n\nWe use standard industry practices for network and information technology security, survivability and disaster recovery. Our ongoing success partly depends on protecting our corporate business-sensitive data, including personal information about our customers and employees. We treat this information as intellectual property and protect it from unauthorized access and compromise. We rely on our policies and procedures and information technology systems to protect this information. If we do not secure our data and the privacy of our customer information, we may not be in compliance with regulatory standards and it could result in negative publicity, litigation and damage to our reputation. Any of these outcomes can cause us to lose customers or public confidence, or experience financial losses.\n\nIf our networks or key network components fail, it could, in some circumstances, result in a loss of service for our customers for an indefinite period and have an adverse effect on our results and financial position. We rely on business partners to carry some traffic for some of our customers. If one of these carriers has a service failure, it might also cause a service interruption for our customers that would last until we could reroute the traffic to another carrier.\n\nWe use encryption technology developed and supported by our vendors to protect our cable signals from unauthorized access and to control access to programming based on subscription packages. We also use encryption and security technologies to prevent unauthorized access to our Internet service.\n\nThere is no assurance that we will be able to effectively prevent unauthorized decoding of television signals or Internet access in the future. If we are unable to control cable access with our encryption technology, subscriptions to digital programming, including premium VOD and SVOD, and Internet service revenues may decrease, which could result in a decline in our cable revenues.\n\nSubstantially all of our business activities are regulated by Industry Canada and/or the CRTC, and any regulatory changes or decisions could adversely affect our consolidated results of operations. See “Regulation in Our Industry”.\n\nRegulatory changes or decisions made by these regulators could adversely impact our results of operations on a consolidated basis. This regulation relates to, among other things, licencing, competition, the cable television programming services that we must distribute, wireless and wireline interconnection agreements, the rates we may charge to provide access to our network by third parties, the resale of our networks and roaming on our networks, our operation and ownership of communications systems and our ability to acquire an interest in other communications systems. In addition, the costs of providing\n\nservices may be increased from time-to-time as a result of compliance with industry or legislative initiatives to address consumer protection concerns or such Internet-related issues as copyright infringement, unsolicited commercial e-mail, cybercrime and lawful access. Our cable, wireless and broadcasting licences may not generally be transferred without regulatory approval.\n\nGenerally, our licences are granted for a specified term and are subject to conditions on the maintenance of these licences. These licencing conditions may be modified at any time by the regulators. The regulators may decide not to renew a licence when it expires, and any failure by us to comply with the conditions on the maintenance of a licence could result in a revocation or forfeiture of any of our licences or the imposition of fines.\n\nThe licences include conditions requiring us to comply with Canadian ownership restrictions of the applicable legislation. We are currently in compliance with all of these Canadian ownership and control requirements. However, if these requirements are violated, we would be subject to various penalties, possibly including, in the extreme case, the loss of a licence.\n\nThe CRTC’s decision to implement its wireless consumer code of conduct, among other things, effectively requires Canadian wireless carriers to move away from offering three-year service contracts and instead offer two-year contracts, and this could change our customer acquisition and retention costs and subscriber churn. The Wireless Code also sets billing caps on data roaming and domestic data overage charges, creates a prohibition on requiring customers to provide 30- days’ notice of cancellation, and requires the payment of interest on security deposits, which could also reduce our results of operations.\n\nOur wireless business could be materially adversely affected if laws, regulation or customer behaviour makes it difficult for us to impose term commitments or early cancellation fees on customers or receive the service revenues we anticipate from the term commitments.\n\nRadio spectrum is one of the fundamental assets required to carry on the wireless business. Our ability to continue to offer and improve current services and to offer new services depends on, among other factors, continued access to and deployment of adequate spectrum, including both the ability to renew current spectrum licenses and acquire new spectrum licenses.\n\nIf we cannot acquire and retain needed spectrum, we may not be able to continue to offer and improve our current services and deploy new services on a timely basis including providing competitive data speeds that customers want. As a result, our ability to attract and retain customers could be materially adversely affected. In addition, an inability to acquire and retain needed spectrum could affect network quality and result in higher capital expenditures, as a consequence of network densification and other related network upgrades.\n\nChanges to government spectrum fees could significantly increase our payments and therefore materially reduce our operating profit. Spectrum licences are an indefinite life intangible asset and we do not amortize them, however, any potential increases in spectrum licence fees may affect our current accounting policies.\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 75\n\n## REGULATORY RISKS\n\n## Changes in G overnment Regulations\n\n## S pectrum Fees\n\n## S pectrum\n\n## The Wireless Code\n\n## Impact of Network Failures on Revenue and Customer S ervice\n\n## Unauthorized Access to Digital Boxes or Internet Modems" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7815041695105952, + "doc_id": "94915fd3c2a1138c7bde448023b7312094102ca35730adaf6d76e65d962e7a01", + "edit_distance": 0.2264957264957265, + "f1_score": 0.9292035398230089, + "meteor": 0.8681631628816843, + "precision": 0.9292035398230089, + "pred_md": "## management's Discussion and analysis\n\nD\n\nollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\n## PART VI\n\n## Investment Properties\n\n## as at December 31,\n\n## Continuity of Investment Properties\n\nThe following table summarizes the changes in value of Killam's investment properties for the years ended December 31, 2013, and 2012.\n\n## as at and for the years ended December 31,\n\nThe key valuation assumption used to determine the fair market value, using the direct capitalization method, is the cap-rate. A summary of the high, low and weighted average cap-rates used in the valuation models as at December 31, 2013 and 2012 as provided by Killam's External Valuator, are as follows:\n\n## Capitalization Rates\n\nAs highlighted in the above chart, the effective weighted average cap-rate used to value the apartment properties decreased by 14 bps year-over-year, generating an increased valuation for some properties. This was partially offset by a rise in cap-rates in the Saint John market in late 2013 due to the softening economy. The effective weighted average cap-rate used to value the MHCs decreased 18 bps from December 31, 2012, reflecting increased valuations for most properties in the MHC portfolio.\n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013\n\n47", + "recall": 0.9292035398230089, + "true_md": "## Management’s Discussion and Analysis Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\nManagement’s Discussion and Analysis Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\n## PART VI\n\n## Investment Properties\n\nThe following table summarizes the changes in value of Killam’s investment properties for the years ended December 31, 2013, and 2012.\n\n## Continuity of Investment Properties\n\n## Capitalization Rates\n\nThe key valuation assumption used to determine the fair market value, using the direct capitalization method, is the cap‑rate. A summary of the high, low and weighted average cap‑rates used in the valuation models as at December 31, 2013 and 2012 as provided by Killam’s External \n\nValuator, are as follows:\n\nAs highlighted in the above chart, the effective weighted average cap‑rate used to value the apartment properties decreased by 14 bps year‑over‑year, generating an increased valuation for some properties. This was partially offset by a rise in cap‑rates in the Saint John market in late 2013 due to the softening economy. The effective weighted average cap‑rate used to value the MHCs decreased 18 bps from December 31, 2012, reflecting increased valuations for most properties in the MHC portfolio.\n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013 47" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9350985237962582, + "doc_id": "55c84b8f2702eaad75daf80fa6249e7b2a0a3bede6d6338a6ab5c7e875413f7a", + "edit_distance": 0.21965317919075145, + "f1_score": 0.9625668449197863, + "meteor": 0.946903566370542, + "precision": 0.967741935483871, + "pred_md": "SMFG\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n## (f) Credit derivative transactions\n\nNotes: 1. The above transactions are valued at fair value and the valuation gains (losses) are accounted for in the consolidated statements of income.\n\n2. Fair value is calculated using discounted present value and option pricing models.\n\n3. 'Sold' represents transactions in which the credit risk is accepted; 'Bought' represents transactions in which the credit risk is transferred.\n\n## (2) Derivative transactions to which the hedge accounting method is applied\n\nThe following tables set forth the contract amount or the amount equivalent to the principal, fair value and calculation method of the relevant commodities by category with respect to derivative transactions to which the hedge accounting method is applied at the end of the fiscal year. Contract amount does not indicate the market risk relating to derivative transactions.\n\n(a) Interest rate derivatives\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n118", + "recall": 0.9574468085106383, + "true_md": "SMFG Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n## (f) Credit derivative transactions\n\nNotes: 1. The above transactions are valued at fair value and the valuation gains (losses) are accounted for in the consolidated statements of income.\n\n2. Fair value is calculated using discounted present value and option pricing models.\n\n3. “Sold” represents transactions in which the credit risk is accepted; “Bought” represents transactions in which the credit risk is transferred.\n\nThe following tables set forth the contract amount or the amount equivalent to the principal, fair value and calculation method of the relevant commodities by category with respect to derivative transactions to which the hedge accounting method is applied at the end of the fiscal year. Contract amount does not indicate the market risk relating to derivative transactions.\n\n## (2) Derivative transactions to which the hedge accounting method is applied\n\n## (a) Interest rate derivatives\n\nSMFG 2011 118" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8070616468681003, + "doc_id": "8e89391a6a84f807065dbcd006674b5a45e0a4fe311b1f18f888567d3991c583", + "edit_distance": 0.1740139211136891, + "f1_score": 0.9933774834437087, + "meteor": 0.8336259270160638, + "precision": 0.9933774834437086, + "pred_md": "## Adjusted Debt to EBITDAR (Non-GAAP financial measure)\n\nAdjusted Debt to EBITDAR is one of our key financial metrics, and we believe that our debt levels are best analyzed using this measure. Our goal is to manage debt levels to maintain an investment-grade credit rating and operate with an efficient capital structure. In evaluating our debt levels, this measure provides a reflection of our credit worthiness that could impact our credit rating and borrowing costs. We also have a debt covenant that requires an adjusted debt to EBITDAR leverage ratio of less than four times. As of January 31, 2015 and February 1, 2014, our Adjusted Debt to EBITDAR was 2.1.\n\nAdjusted Debt to EBITDAR is not a measure of financial performance under GAAP and should be considered in addition to, and not as a substitute for, debt to net earnings, net earnings, debt or other financial measures prepared in accordance with GAAP. Our method of determining non-GAAP financial measures may differ from other companies' methods and therefore may not be comparable to those used by other companies. The financial measure calculated under GAAP which is most directly comparable to Adjusted Debt to EBITDAR is debt to net earnings. The following is a reconciliation of the components of Adjusted Debt to EBITDAR and debt to net earnings:\n\n1 The components of Adjusted Debt are as of January 31, 2015 and February 1, 2014, while the components of EBITDAR are for the 12 months ended January 31, 2015 and February 1, 2014.\n\n2 Based upon the estimated lease liability as of the end of the period, calculated as the trailing 12 months of rent expense multiplied by eight. The multiple of eight times rent expense is a commonly used method of estimating the debt we would record for our leases that are classified as operating if they had met the criteria for a capital lease or we had purchased the property.\n\nNordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 31", + "recall": 0.9933774834437086, + "true_md": "## Adjusted Debt to EBITDAR (Non-GAAP financial measure) Adjusted Debt to EBITDAR is one of our key financial metrics, and we believe that our debt levels are best analyzed using this measure. Our\n\nAdjusted Debt to EBITDAR (Non-GAAP financial measure) Adjusted Debt to EBITDAR is one of our key financial metrics, and we believe that our debt levels are best analyzed using this measure. Our goal is to manage debt levels to maintain an investment-grade credit rating and operate with an efficient capital structure. In evaluating our debt levels, this measure provides a reflection of our credit worthiness that could impact our credit rating and borrowing costs. We also have a debt covenant that requires an adjusted debt to EBITDAR leverage ratio of less than four times. As of January 31, 2015 and February 1, 2014, our Adjusted Debt to EBITDAR was 2.1.\n\nAdjusted Debt to EBITDAR is not a measure of financial performance under GAAP and should be considered in addition to, and not as a substitute for, debt to net earnings, net earnings, debt or other financial measures prepared in accordance with GAAP. Our method of determining non-GAAP financial measures may differ from other companies’ methods and therefore may not be comparable to those used by other companies. The financial measure calculated under GAAP which is most directly comparable to Adjusted Debt to EBITDAR is debt to net earnings. The following is a reconciliation of the components of Adjusted Debt to EBITDAR and debt to net earnings:\n\n1 The components of Adjusted Debt are as of January 31, 2015 and February 1, 2014, while the components of EBITDAR are for the 12 months ended January 31, 2015 and February 1, 2014. Based upon the estimated lease liability as of the end of the period, calculated as the trailing 12 months of rent expense multiplied by eight. The multiple of eight times rent \n\nFebruary 1, 2014. 2 Based upon the estimated lease liability as of the end of the period, calculated as the trailing 12 months of rent expense multiplied by eight. The multiple of eight times rent expense is a commonly used method of estimating the debt we would record for our leases that are classified as operating if they had met the criteria for a capital lease or we had purchased the property.\n\nNordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 31" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8040549961849687, + "doc_id": "ed16f4b14e6bf853316053a4f38c067df29a48ef9c635629452a9c57b26b38a4", + "edit_distance": 0.1908713692946058, + "f1_score": 0.9887640449438201, + "meteor": 0.6967949518675703, + "precision": 0.9887640449438202, + "pred_md": "## CREDIT SEGMENT\n\nThe Nordstrom credit and debit card products are designed to strengthen customer relationships and grow retail sales by providing loyalty benefits, valuable services and payment products. We believe our credit business allows us to build deeper relationships with our customers by fully integrating the Nordstrom Rewards program with our retail stores and providing better service, which in turn fosters greater customer loyalty. Our cardholders tend to visit our stores more frequently and spend more with us than non-cardholders. Our Nordstrom private label credit and debit cards can be used only at our Nordstrom full-line stores in the U.S., Nordstrom Rack stores and online at Nordstrom.com, Nordstromrack.com and HauteLook ('inside volume'), while our Nordstrom Visa credit cards also may be used for purchases outside of Nordstrom ('outside volume'). Cardholders participate in the Nordstrom Rewards program through which cardholders accumulate points for their purchases. Upon reaching a certain points threshold, cardholders receive Nordstrom Notes ® , which can be redeemed for goods or services at Nordstrom full-line stores in the U.S. and Canada, Nordstrom Rack stores and at Nordstrom.com. Nordstrom Rewards customers receive reimbursements for alterations, get Personal Triple Points days and have early access to sales events. With increased spending, they can receive additional amounts of these benefits as well as access to exclusive fashion and shopping events.\n\nIn May 2014, we announced our plan to review options for a potential financial partner for our credit card receivables portfolio. We intend to execute a transaction only if our strategic and financial requirements are met. In the event a transaction is finalized, we will classify the relevant credit card receivables as held for sale, which could result in a gain or loss upon reclassification.\n\n## Summary\n\nThe table below provides a detailed view of the operational results of our Credit segment, consistent with Note 16: Segment Reporting in the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements of Item 8: Financial Statements and Supplementary Data. In order to better reflect the economic contribution of our credit and debit card program, intercompany merchant fees are also included in the table below, which represent the estimated costs that would be incurred if our cardholders used third-party cards instead of ours.\n\nInterest expense at the Credit segment is equal to the amount of interest related to securitized debt plus an amount assigned to the Credit segment in proportion to the estimated debt and equity needed to fund our credit card receivables. Based on our research, debt as a percentage of credit card receivables for other credit card companies ranges from 70% to 90%. As such, we believe a mix of 80% debt and 20% equity is appropriate, and therefore assign interest expense to the Credit segment as if it carried debt of up to 80% of the credit card receivables. Our average credit card receivable investment metric below represents the remaining 20% to fund our credit card receivables.\n\n1 Subtotals and totals may not foot due to rounding.\n\n2 As presented in Note 16: Segment Reporting in the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.\n\n3 Volume represents sales plus applicable taxes.\n\n4 Credit segment contribution, net of tax, calculated as a percentage of our average credit card receivable investment.\n\nNordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 21", + "recall": 0.9887640449438202, + "true_md": "CREDIT SEGMENT The Nordstrom credit and debit card products are designed to strengthen customer relationships and grow retail sales by providing loyalty benefits, valuable services and payment products. We believe our credit business allows us to build deeper relationships with our customers by fully integrating the Nordstrom Rewards program with our retail stores and providing better service, which in turn fosters greater customer loyalty. Our cardholders tend to visit our stores more frequently and spend more with us than non-cardholders. Our Nordstrom private label credit and debit cards can be used only at our Nordstrom full-line stores in the U.S., Nordstrom Rack stores and online at Nordstrom.com, Nordstromrack.com and HauteLook (“inside volume”), while our Nordstrom Visa credit cards also may be used for purchases outside of Nordstrom (“outside volume”). Cardholders participate in the Nordstrom Rewards program through which cardholders accumulate points for their purchases. Upon reaching a certain points threshold, cardholders receive Nordstrom Notes ® , which can be redeemed for goods or services at Nordstrom full-line stores in the U.S. and Canada, Nordstrom Rack stores and at Nordstrom.com. Nordstrom Rewards customers receive reimbursements for alterations, get Personal Triple Points days and have early access to sales events. With increased spending, they can receive additional amounts of these benefits as well as access to exclusive fashion and shopping events.\n\nIn May 2014, we announced our plan to review options for a potential financial partner for our credit card receivables portfolio. We intend to execute a transaction only if our strategic and financial requirements are met. In the event a transaction is finalized, we will classify the relevant credit card receivables as held for sale, which could result in a gain or loss upon reclassification.\n\nSummary The table below provides a detailed view of the operational results of our Credit segment, consistent with Note 16: Segment Reporting in the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements of Item 8: Financial Statements and Supplementary Data. In order to better reflect the economic contribution of our credit and debit card program, intercompany merchant fees are also included in the table below, which represent the estimated costs that would be incurred if our cardholders used third-party cards instead of ours.\n\nInterest expense at the Credit segment is equal to the amount of interest related to securitized debt plus an amount assigned to the Credit segment in proportion to the estimated debt and equity needed to fund our credit card receivables. Based on our research, debt as a percentage of credit card receivables for other credit card companies ranges from 70% to 90%. As such, we believe a mix of 80% debt and 20% equity is appropriate, and therefore assign interest expense to the Credit segment as if it carried debt of up to 80% of the credit card receivables. Our average credit card receivable investment metric below represents the remaining 20% to fund our credit card receivables.\n\n1 Subtotals and totals may not foot due to rounding. As presented in Note 16: Segment Reporting in the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements. \n\nSubtotals and totals may not foot due to rounding. 2 As presented in Note 16: Segment Reporting in the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements. Volume represents sales plus applicable taxes.\n\nAs presented in Note 16: Segment Reporting in the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements. 3 Volume represents sales plus applicable taxes. Credit segment contribution, net of tax, calculated as a percentage of our average credit card receivable investment.\n\nVolume represents sales plus applicable taxes. 4 Credit segment contribution, net of tax, calculated as a percentage of our average credit card receivable investment.\n\nNordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 21\n\n## Summary The table below provides a detailed view of the operational results of our Credit segment, consistent with Note 16: Segment Reporting in the\n\n## CREDIT SEGMENT The Nordstrom credit and debit card products are designed to strengthen customer relationships and grow retail sales by providing loyalty" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.577241177437713, + "doc_id": "113fc5489c10cec6aeb669113493fc1c40c722095af7f41f8ef6bf09eb9508d1", + "edit_distance": 0.36257309941520466, + "f1_score": 0.9793103448275863, + "meteor": 0.655188737944438, + "precision": 0.9861111111111112, + "pred_md": "## Nordstrom, Inc.\n\n## Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nDollar and share amounts in millions except per share, per option and per unit amounts\n\nThe following table sets forth information for our reportable segments:\n\n1 Total Retail Business is not a reportable segment, but represents a subtotal of the Retail segment and Corporate/Other, and is consistent with our presentation in Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations.\n\n2 Assets in Corporate/Other include unallocated assets in corporate headquarters, consisting primarily of cash, land, buildings and equipment and deferred tax assets.\n\nNordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 63", + "recall": 0.9726027397260274, + "true_md": "## Nordstrom, Inc. Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements Dollar and share amounts in millions except per share, per option and per unit amounts\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements Dollar and share amounts in millions except per share, per option and per unit amounts\n\nThe following table sets forth information for our reportable segments:\n\n1 Total Retail Business is not a reportable segment, but represents a subtotal of the Retail segment and Corporate/Other, and is consistent with our presentation in Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations. Assets in Corporate/Other include unallocated assets in corporate headquarters, consisting primarily of cash, land, buildings and equipment and deferred tax assets.\n\nManagement’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations. 2 Assets in Corporate/Other include unallocated assets in corporate headquarters, consisting primarily of cash, land, buildings and equipment and deferred tax assets.\n\nNordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 63" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8313054996856851, + "doc_id": "59ed20e2ffc4bd9080d4759fca3805c8bcc15ca06544e6b3fd87698c8c637af4", + "edit_distance": 0.16335540838852097, + "f1_score": 0.990791896869245, + "meteor": 0.7465800658601864, + "precision": 0.992619926199262, + "pred_md": "## Share Repurchases\n\nIn February 2013, our Board of Directors authorized a program to repurchase up to $800 of our outstanding common stock, through March 1, 2015. In September 2014, our Board of Directors authorized a new program to repurchase up to $1,000 of our outstanding common stock, through March 1, 2016, in addition to the remaining amount available for repurchase under previously authorized programs. During 2014, we repurchased 8.9 shares of our common stock for an aggregate purchase price of $595 and had $1,075 remaining in share repurchase capacity as of January 31, 2015. The actual number and timing of future share repurchases, if any, will be subject to market and economic conditions and applicable SEC rules.\n\n## Dividends\n\nIn 2014, we paid dividends of $251, or $1.32 per share, compared with $234, or $1.20 per share, in 2013 and $220, or $1.08 per share, in 2012. During the first quarter of 2014, we increased our quarterly dividend from $0.30 per share to $0.33 per share. In determining the amount of dividends to pay, we analyze our dividend payout ratio and dividend yield, while taking into consideration our current and projected operating performance and liquidity. Our dividend payout ratio target range is 30% to 35% and is calculated as our dividend payments divided by net earnings.\n\nIn February 2015, we declared a quarterly dividend of $0.37 per share, increased from a quarterly dividend of $0.33 per share in 2014.\n\n## Free Cash Flow (Non-GAAP financial measure)\n\nFree Cash Flow is one of our key liquidity measures, and when used in conjunction with GAAP measures, provides investors with a meaningful analysis of our ability to generate cash from our business. For the year ended January 31, 2015, Free Cash Flow decreased to $96 compared with $324 for the year ended February 1, 2014, primarily due to a decrease in cash provided by operating activities and an increase in capital investments.\n\nFree Cash Flow is not a measure of financial performance under GAAP and should be considered in addition to, and not as a substitute for, operating cash flows or other financial measures prepared in accordance with GAAP. Our method of determining non-GAAP financial measures may differ from other companies' methods and therefore may not be comparable to those used by other companies. The financial measure calculated under GAAP which is most directly comparable to Free Cash Flow is net cash provided by operating activities. The following is a reconciliation of net cash provided by operating activities to Free Cash Flow:\n\n## Credit Capacity and Commitments\n\nAs of January 31, 2015, we had total short-term borrowing capacity available for general corporate purposes of $800, which is our five-year $800 senior unsecured revolving credit facility ('revolver') that expires in March 2018. Under the terms of our revolver, we pay a variable rate of interest and a commitment fee based on our debt rating. The revolver is available for working capital, capital expenditures and general corporate purposes and backs our commercial paper program. We have the option to increase the revolving commitment by up to $200, to a total of $1,000, provided that we obtain written consent from the lenders.\n\nOur $800 commercial paper program allows us to use the proceeds to fund operating cash requirements. Under the terms of the commercial paper agreement, we pay a rate of interest based on, among other factors, the maturity of the issuance and market conditions. The issuance of commercial paper has the effect, while it is outstanding, of reducing borrowing capacity under our revolver by an amount equal to the principal amount of commercial paper.\n\nDuring 2014 and 2013, we had no issuances under our commercial paper program and no borrowings under our revolver.\n\nIn November 2013, our wholly owned subsidiary in Puerto Rico entered into a $52 unsecured borrowing facility that expires in November 2018 to support our expansion into that market. As of January 31, 2015, we had $37 outstanding on this facility.\n\nNordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 29", + "recall": 0.9889705882352942, + "true_md": "## Share Repurchases In February 2013, our Board of Directors authorized a program to repurchase up to $800 of our outstanding common stock, through March 1,\n\nShare Repurchases In February 2013, our Board of Directors authorized a program to repurchase up to $800 of our outstanding common stock, through March 1, 2015. In September 2014, our Board of Directors authorized a new program to repurchase up to $1,000 of our outstanding common stock, through March 1, 2016, in addition to the remaining amount available for repurchase under previously authorized programs. During 2014, we repurchased 8.9 shares of our common stock for an aggregate purchase price of $595 and had $1,075 remaining in share repurchase capacity as of January 31, 2015. The actual number and timing of future share repurchases, if any, will be subject to market and economic conditions and applicable SEC rules.\n\nDividends In 2014, we paid dividends of $251, or $1.32 per share, compared with $234, or $1.20 per share, in 2013 and $220, or $1.08 per share, in 2012. During the first quarter of 2014, we increased our quarterly dividend from $0.30 per share to $0.33 per share. In determining the amount of dividends to pay, we analyze our dividend payout ratio and dividend yield, while taking into consideration our current and projected operating performance and liquidity. Our dividend payout ratio target range is 30% to 35% and is calculated as our dividend payments divided by net earnings.\n\nIn February 2015, we declared a quarterly dividend of $0.37 per share, increased from a quarterly dividend of $0.33 per share in 2014.\n\nFree Cash Flow (Non-GAAP financial measure) Free Cash Flow is one of our key liquidity measures, and when used in conjunction with GAAP measures, provides investors with a meaningful analysis of our ability to generate cash from our business. For the year ended January 31, 2015, Free Cash Flow decreased to $96 compared with $324 for the year ended February 1, 2014, primarily due to a decrease in cash provided by operating activities and an increase in capital investments.\n\nFree Cash Flow is not a measure of financial performance under GAAP and should be considered in addition to, and not as a substitute for, operating cash flows or other financial measures prepared in accordance with GAAP. Our method of determining non-GAAP financial measures may differ from other companies’ methods and therefore may not be comparable to those used by other companies. The financial measure calculated under GAAP which is most directly comparable to Free Cash Flow is net cash provided by operating activities. The following is a reconciliation of net cash provided by operating activities to Free Cash Flow:\n\nCredit Capacity and Commitments As of January 31, 2015, we had total short-term borrowing capacity available for general corporate purposes of $800, which is our five-year $800 senior unsecured revolving credit facility (“revolver”) that expires in March 2018. Under the terms of our revolver, we pay a variable rate of interest and a commitment fee based on our debt rating. The revolver is available for working capital, capital expenditures and general corporate purposes and backs our commercial paper program. We have the option to increase the revolving commitment by up to $200, to a total of $1,000, provided that we obtain written consent from the lenders. \n\nOur $800 commercial paper program allows us to use the proceeds to fund operating cash requirements. Under the terms of the commercial paper agreement, we pay a rate of interest based on, among other factors, the maturity of the issuance and market conditions. The issuance of commercial paper has the effect, while it is outstanding, of reducing borrowing capacity under our revolver by an amount equal to the principal amount of commercial paper. \n\nDuring 2014 and 2013, we had no issuances under our commercial paper program and no borrowings under our revolver.\n\nIn November 2013, our wholly owned subsidiary in Puerto Rico entered into a $52 unsecured borrowing facility that expires in November 2018 to support our expansion into that market. As of January 31, 2015, we had $37 outstanding on this facility.\n\n## Credit Capacity and Commitments As of January 31, 2015, we had total short-term borrowing capacity available for general corporate purposes of $800, which is our five-year\n\n## Free Cash Flow (Non-GAAP financial measure) Free Cash Flow is one of our key liquidity measures, and when used in conjunction with GAAP measures, provides investors with a\n\n## Dividends In 2014, we paid dividends of $251, or $1.32 per share, compared with $234, or $1.20 per share, in 2013 and $220, or $1.08 per share, in\n\nNordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 29" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9491233047917967, + "doc_id": "8585d01ff813914fd60f8af1b9e559c8ddc54b046542da0cc7733b79ecbaf9a8", + "edit_distance": 0.32463295269168024, + "f1_score": 0.9919354838709676, + "meteor": 0.9512428637846888, + "precision": 0.9959514170040485, + "pred_md": "MANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS\n\n## Pension Obligations\n\nOur retiree pension plans had a funding deficit of approximately $172 million at December 31, 2013. We have been making special minimum monthly payments in addition to our regular contributions to eliminate the pension liability. During 2013, our funding deficit was reduced by $162 million.\n\nThe special payments, including contributions associated with benefits paid from the plans, were approximately $7 million in 2013. We expect our total estimated funding requirements to be $96 million in 2014 and to be adjusted annually thereafter, based on various market factors such as interest rates and expected returns and staffing assumptions.\n\nChanges in factors such as the discount rate, increase in compensation and the expected return on plan assets can affect the accrued benefit obligation, pension expense and the deficiency of plan assets over\n\naccrued obligations in the future. See Critical accounting estimates for more information.\n\n## Purchase of Annuities\n\nFrom time to time we have made additional lump-sum contributions to our pension plans, and the pension plans have purchased annuities from insurance companies to fund the pension benefit obligations for certain groups of retired employees in the plans. Purchasing the annuities relieves us of our primary responsibility for that portion of the accrued benefit obligations for the retired employees and eliminates the significant risk associated with the obligations.\n\nWe did not make any additional lump-sum contributions to our pension plans in 2013 or 2012, and the pension plans did not purchase additional annuities.\n\n## FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT\n\nWe normally use three categories of derivative instruments to manage risks related to our business activities:\n\nWe also manage our exposure to fluctuating interest rates and we have fixed the interest rate on 95.3 % of our debt including short-term borrowings at December 31, 2013 (2012 - 100 % ).\n\n## Debt Derivatives\n\nWe use cross currency interest exchange agreements (Debt Derivatives), to hedge the foreign exchange risk on all of the principal and interest obligations of our US dollar denominated senior notes and debentures. At December 31, 2013 we used Debt Derivatives to hedge the foreign exchange risk on 100 % of the principal and interest obligations on all our US dollar denominated debt. We use Debt Derivatives for risk management purposes only.\n\nDuring 2013, we completed Debt Derivatives transactions as follows:\n\n- GLYPH<129> entered into new Debt Derivatives to hedge senior notes issued in 2013\n- GLYPH<129> terminated existing Debt Derivatives and entered into Debt Derivatives with different terms to hedge existing senior notes\n- GLYPH<129> settled Debt Derivatives related to senior notes that matured during the year.\n\n## Terminated and Replaced Existing Debt Derivatives\n\n## Terminated Debt Derivatives\n\n- 1 Converting from a fixed US$ coupon rate to a weighted average Cdn$ fixed rate.\n- 2 Converting from a fixed US$ principal amount to a fixed Cdn$ principal amount.\n\n62\n\nROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\nAll of our Debt Derivatives currently outstanding have been designated as effective hedges against foreign exchange risk for accounting purposes as described below and in note 20 to the consolidated financial statements.\n\nNew Debt Derivatives to Hedge Senior Notes Issued In 2013\n\n- 1 Converting from a fixed US$ coupon rate to a weighted average Cdn$ fixed rate.", + "recall": 0.9879518072289156, + "true_md": "MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS\n\n## Pension Obligations\n\naccrued obligations in the future. See Critical accounting estimates for more information.\n\nOur retiree pension plans had a funding deficit of approximately $172 million at December 31, 2013. We have been making special minimum monthly payments in addition to our regular contributions to eliminate the pension liability. During 2013, our funding deficit was reduced by $162 million.\n\nThe special payments, including contributions associated with benefits paid from the plans, were approximately $7 million in 2013. We expect our total estimated funding requirements to be $96 million in 2014 and to be adjusted annually thereafter, based on various market factors such as interest rates and expected returns and staffing assumptions.\n\nChanges in factors such as the discount rate, increase in compensation and the expected return on plan assets can affect the accrued benefit obligation, pension expense and the deficiency of plan assets over\n\nWe did not make any additional lump-sum contributions to our pension plans in 2013 or 2012, and the pension plans did not purchase additional annuities.\n\nFrom time to time we have made additional lump-sum contributions to our pension plans, and the pension plans have purchased annuities from insurance companies to fund the pension benefit obligations for certain groups of retired employees in the plans. Purchasing the annuities relieves us of our primary responsibility for that portion of the accrued benefit obligations for the retired employees and eliminates the significant risk associated with the obligations.\n\n## Purchase of Annuities\n\n## FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT\n\nWe normally use three categories of derivative instruments to manage risks related to our business activities:\n\nWe also manage our exposure to fluctuating interest rates and we have fixed the interest rate on 95.3 % of our debt including short-term borrowings at December 31, 2013 (2012 – 100 % ).\n\nAll of our Debt Derivatives currently outstanding have been designated as effective hedges against foreign exchange risk for accounting purposes as described below and in note 20 to the consolidated financial statements.\n\n## Debt Derivatives\n\nNew Debt Derivatives to Hedge Senior Notes Issued In 2013\n\nWe use cross currency interest exchange agreements (Debt Derivatives), to hedge the foreign exchange risk on all of the principal and interest obligations of our US dollar denominated senior notes and debentures. At December 31, 2013 we used Debt Derivatives to hedge the foreign exchange risk on 100 % of the principal and interest obligations on all our US dollar denominated debt. We use Debt Derivatives for risk management purposes only.\n\nDuring 2013, we completed Debt Derivatives transactions as follows:\n\n- GLYPH<129> entered into new Debt Derivatives to hedge senior notes issued in 2013\n\n- GLYPH<129> terminated existing Debt Derivatives and entered into Debt Derivatives with different terms to hedge existing senior notes\n\n- GLYPH<129> settled Debt Derivatives related to senior notes that matured during the year.\n\n1 Converting from a fixed US$ coupon rate to a weighted average Cdn$ fixed rate.\n\n## Terminated and Replaced Existing Debt Derivatives\n\n1 Converting from a fixed US$ coupon rate to a weighted average Cdn$ fixed rate.\n\n2 Converting from a fixed US$ principal amount to a fixed Cdn$ principal amount.\n\n62 ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8649181158937376, + "doc_id": "f6647d2d03fb2e909782ce23d48574c449bbae29394375b38c640f69a7bc3e79", + "edit_distance": 0.8912671232876712, + "f1_score": 0.9445438282647586, + "meteor": 0.7192573510884746, + "precision": 0.946236559139785, + "pred_md": "SMFG\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nAs a result, income before income taxes and minority interests increased by ¥19,251 million as compared with the former method.\n\n- (b) Accounting standard for asset retirement obligations 'Accounting Standard for Asset Retirement Obligations' (ASBJ Statement No. 18, issued on March 31, 2008) and 'Guidance on Accounting Standard for Asset Retirement Obligations' (ASBJ Guidance No. 21, issued on March 31, 2008) became effective for fiscal years beginning on or after April 1, 2010. Accordingly, income before income taxes and minority interests decreased by ¥4,215 million ($51 million) compared with the previous accounting method.\n\n## (c) Accounting standard for business combinations\n\n'Accounting Standard for Business Combinations' (ASBJ Statement No. 21, revised on December 26, 2008), 'Accounting Standard for Consolidated Financial Statements' (ASBJ Statement No. 22, issued on December 26, 2008), 'Partial Amendment to Accounting Standard for Research and Development Costs' (ASBJ Statement No. 23, issued on December 26, 2008), 'Accounting Standard for Business Divestitures' (ASBJ Statement No. 7, revised on December 26, 2008), 'Accounting Standard for Equity Method of Accounting for Investments' (ASBJ Statement No. 16, announced on December 26, 2008) and 'Guidance on Accounting Standard for Business Combinations and Accounting Standard for Business Divestitures' (ASBJ Guidance No. 10, revised on December 26, 2008) became effective for fiscal years beginning on or after April 1, 2010, and SMFG has applied them from the fiscal year ended March 31, 2011.\n\n## (23) Changes in presentation\n\n## (a) Consolidated balance sheets\n\n'Other liabilities' as of March 31, 2010, included 'Reserve for point service program' of ¥14,091 million and 'Reserve for loss on interest repayment' of ¥9,735 million. From the fiscal year ended March 31, 2011, they are presented individually because the amounts have become significant.\n\n(b) Consolidated statements of income SMFG presents 'Income before minority interests' on the consolidated statement of income from the fiscal year ended March 31, 2011 because 'Cabinet Office Ordinance of Partial Amendment to Regulation for Terminology, Forms and Preparation of Financial Statements' (Cabinet Office Ordinance No. 5, March 24, 2009) became effective for fiscal years beginning on or after April 1, 2010.\n\n(c) Consolidated statements of cash flows In the fiscal year ended March 31, 2010, 'Other, net' included 'Net change in reserve for point service program' and 'Net change in reserve for loss on interest repayment,' a decrease of ¥879 million and an increase of ¥1,040 million, respectively. From the fiscal year ended March 31, 2011, they are presented individually because the amounts have become significant.\n\n- (24) Accounting standard for equity method of accounting for investments\n\nSMFG has applied 'Accounting Standard for Equity Method of Accounting for Investments' (ASBJ Statement No. 16, issued on March 10, 2008) and 'Practical Solution on\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n82\n\nUnification of Accounting Policies Applied to Associates Accounted for Using the Equity Method' (ASBJ Practical Issues Task Force No. 24, issued on March 10, 2008) because they became effective for the fiscal years beginning on or after April l, 2010. This accounting change had no impact on the consolidated financial statements.\n\n- (25) Accounting standard for presentation of comprehensive income\n\n'Accounting Standard for Presentation of Comprehensive Income' (ASBJ Statement No. 25, issued June 30, 2010) became effective for consolidated financial statements for the fiscal years ending on or after March 31, 2011. Accordingly, SMFG has applied this standard and presents 'Valuation and transaction adjustments' and 'Total valuation and transaction adjustments' as of and for the fiscal year ended March 31, 2010 as 'Accumulated other comprehensive income' and 'Total accumulated other comprehensive income' as of and for the fiscal year ended March 31, 2011, respectively.\n\n## (26) Issuance of new shares\n\nOn June 22, 2009, SMFG issued 219,700 thousand new shares of common stock at ¥3,766 per share (issue price) for final allocation by underwriters at ¥3,928 per share (offer price). Furthermore, in connection with the over-allotment of 15,300 thousand shares of common stock offered for sale at ¥3,928 per share (sales price) in the public offering, SMFG issued 8,931 thousand new shares of common stock at ¥3,766 per share (issue price) through third-party allocation to the underwriter who conducted the over-allotment on July 27, 2009. The purchase agreement for the offering prescribes that the total amount of issue price be treated as the total amount of subscription price and no underwriting commission be paid. Accordingly, other expenses do not include the amount equivalent to the underwriting commission for the offering in the amount of ¥37,038 million. Out of the issue price per share, ¥1,883 is accounted for as capital stock and ¥1,883 as capital surplus.\n\nOn January 27, 2010, SMFG issued 340,000 thousand new shares of common stock at ¥2,702.81 per share (issue price) for final allocation by underwriters at ¥2,804 per share (offer price). Furthermore, in connection with the over-allotment of 20,000 thousand shares of common stock offered for sale at ¥2,804 per share (sales price) in the public offering, SMFG issued 20,000 thousand new shares of common stock at ¥2,702.81 per share (issue price) through third-party allocation to the underwriter who conducted the over-allotment on February 10, 2010. The purchase agreement for the offering prescribes that the total amount of issue price be treated as the total amount of subscription price and no underwriting commission be paid. Accordingly, other expenses do not include the amount equivalent to the underwriting commission for the offering in the amount of ¥36,428 million. Out of the issue price per share, ¥1,351.405 is accounted for as capital stock and ¥1,351.405 as capital surplus.\n\nEquity of ¥11,075 million attributable to SMFG, which a consolidated subsidiary and an equity method affiliated company of SMFG recorded as earnings under the purchase agreement for the offering, was accounted for as 'Capital surplus.'", + "recall": 0.9428571428571428, + "true_md": "SMFG\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nAs a result, income before income taxes and minority interests increased by ¥19,251 million as compared with the former method.\n\nUnification of Accounting Policies Applied to Associates Accounted for Using the Equity Method” (ASBJ Practical Issues Task Force No. 24, issued on March 10, 2008) because they became effective for the fiscal years beginning on or after April l, 2010. This accounting change had no impact on the consolidated financial statements.\n\n“Accounting Standard for Presentation of Comprehensive Income” (ASBJ Statement No. 25, issued June 30, 2010) became effective for consolidated financial statements for the fiscal years ending on or after March 31, 2011. Accordingly, SMFG has applied this standard and presents “Valuation and transaction adjustments” and “Total valuation and transaction adjustments” as of and for the fiscal year ended March 31, 2010 as “Accumulated other comprehensive income” and “Total accumulated other comprehensive income” as of and for the fiscal year ended March 31, 2011, respectively.\n\n“Accounting Standard for Asset Retirement Obligations” (ASBJ Statement No. 18, issued on March 31, 2008) and “Guidance on Accounting Standard for Asset Retirement Obligations” (ASBJ Guidance No. 21, issued on March 31, 2008) became effective for fiscal years beginning on or after April 1, 2010. Accordingly, income before income taxes and minority interests decreased by ¥4,215 million ($51 million) compared with the previous accounting method.\n\nOn June 22, 2009, SMFG issued 219,700 thousand new shares of common stock at ¥3,766 per share (issue price) for final allocation by underwriters at ¥3,928 per share (offer price). Furthermore, in connection with the over-allotment of 15,300 thousand shares of common stock offered for sale at ¥3,928 per share (sales price) in the public offering, SMFG issued 8,931 thousand new shares of common stock at ¥3,766 per share (issue price) through third-party allocation to the underwriter who conducted the over-allotment on July 27, 2009. The purchase agreement for the offering prescribes that the total amount of issue price be treated as the total amount of subscription price and no underwriting commission be paid. Accordingly, other expenses do not include the amount equivalent to the underwriting commission for the offering in the amount of ¥37,038 million. Out of the issue price per share, ¥1,883 is accounted for as capital stock and ¥1,883 as capital surplus.\n\nOn January 27, 2010, SMFG issued 340,000 thousand new shares of common stock at ¥2,702.81 per share (issue price) for final allocation by underwriters at ¥2,804 per share (offer price). Furthermore, in connection with the over-allotment of 20,000 thousand shares of common stock offered for sale at ¥2,804 per share (sales price) in the public offering, SMFG issued 20,000 thousand new shares of common stock at ¥2,702.81 per share (issue price) through third-party alloca- tion to the underwriter who conducted the over-allotment on February 10, 2010. The purchase agreement for the offering prescribes that the total amount of issue price be treated as the total amount of subscription price and no underwriting com- mission be paid. Accordingly, other expenses do not include the amount equivalent to the underwriting commission for the offering in the amount of ¥36,428 million. Out of the issue price per share, ¥1,351.405 is accounted for as capital stock and ¥1,351.405 as capital surplus.\n\nEquity of ¥11,075 million attributable to SMFG, which a consolidated subsidiary and an equity method affiliated company of SMFG recorded as earnings under the purchase agreement for the offering, was accounted for as “Capital surplus.”\n\nSMFG has applied “Accounting Standard for Equity Method of Accounting for Investments” (ASBJ Statement No. 16, issued on March 10, 2008) and “Practical Solution on \n\nIn the fiscal year ended March 31, 2010, “Other, net” included “Net change in reserve for point service program” and “Net change in reserve for loss on interest repayment,” a decrease of ¥879 million and an increase of ¥1,040 million, respectively. From the fiscal year ended March 31, 2011, they are presented individually because the amounts have become significant.\n\nSMFG presents “Income before minority interests” on the consolidated statement of income from the fiscal year ended March 31, 2011 because “Cabinet Office Ordinance of Partial Amendment to Regulation for Terminology, Forms and Preparation of Financial Statements” (Cabinet Office Ordinance No. 5, March 24, 2009) became effective for fiscal years beginning on or after April 1, 2010.\n\n“Other liabilities” as of March 31, 2010, included “Reserve for point service program” of ¥14,091 million and “Reserve for loss on interest repayment” of ¥9,735 million. From the fiscal year ended March 31, 2011, they are presented individually because the amounts have become significant.\n\n“Accounting Standard for Business Combinations” (ASBJ Statement No. 21, revised on December 26, 2008), “Accounting Standard for Consolidated Financial Statements” (ASBJ Statement No. 22, issued on December 26, 2008), “Partial Amendment to Accounting Standard for Research and Development Costs” (ASBJ Statement No. 23, issued on December 26, 2008), “Accounting Standard for Business Divestitures” (ASBJ Statement No. 7, revised on December 26, 2008), “Accounting Standard for Equity Method of Accounting for Investments” (ASBJ Statement No. 16, announced on December 26, 2008) and “Guidance on Accounting Standard for Business Combinations and Accounting Standard for Business Divestitures” (ASBJ Guidance No. 10, revised on December 26, 2008) became effective for fiscal years begin- ning on or after April 1, 2010, and SMFG has applied them from the fiscal year ended March 31, 2011.\n\n- (b) Accounting standard for asset retirement obligations\n\n- (25) Accounting standard for presentation of comprehensive income\n\n- (c) Accounting standard for business combinations\n\n- (26) Issuance of new shares\n\n- (23) Changes in presentation\n\n- (a) Consolidated balance sheets\n\n- (b) Consolidated statements of income\n\n- (c) Consolidated statements of cash flows\n\n- (24) Accounting standard for equity method of accounting for investments\n\nSMFG 2011 82" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.2622077226639585, + "doc_id": "25b8972f3c669f836f626c2367aca081bb0ca60cea7a424bce8869ab21e5d82e", + "edit_distance": 0.42207792207792205, + "f1_score": 0.8974358974358974, + "meteor": 0.9440095738977585, + "precision": 0.8203125, + "pred_md": "SMFG\n\nCapital (Nonconsolidated)\n\n## Stock Options\n\n## March 31\n\n## 2011\n\nNumber of shares granted............................................................................................................\n\nType of stock ................................................................................................................................\n\nCommon stock\n\nIssue price ....................................................................................................................................\n\n·6,649 per share\n\nAmount capitalized when shares are issued ................................................................................\n\n·3,325 per share\n\nExercise period of stock options ..................................................................................................\n\nFrom June 28, 2004 to June 27, 2012\n\nDate of resolution: Ordinary general meeting of shareholders held on June 27, 2002\n\nMarch 31\n\n2011\n\nDate of resolution: Meeting of the Board of Directors held on July 28, 2010\n\n- Note: Former SMBC issued and granted stock options to certain directors and employees pursuant to the resolution of the ordinary general meeting of shareholders held on June 27, 2002. SMFG succeeded the obligations related to the stock options at the time of its establishment pursuant to the resolution of the preferred shareholders' meeting held on September 26, 2002 and the extraordinary shareholders' meeting held on September 27, 2002.\n\n## Common Stock Price Range\n\n## Stock Price Performance\n\n- Notes: 1. Stock prices of common shares as quoted on the Tokyo Stock Exchange (First Section).\n- 2. SMFG implemented 100-for-1 stock split on January 4, 2009. Stock prices for the year ended March 31, 2009 are reported assuming that the stock split had been effective from April 1, 2008.\n- 3. Preferred stocks (1st series Type 6) are not listed on exchanges.\n\n## Six-Month Performance\n\n- Notes: 1. Stock prices of common shares as quoted on the Tokyo Stock Exchange (First Section).\n- 2. Preferred stocks (1st series Type 6) are not listed on exchanges.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n154\n\n108,100 shares", + "recall": 0.9905660377358491, + "true_md": "SMFG Capital (Nonconsolidated)\n\n## Stock Options\n\nDate of resolution: Ordinary general meeting of shareholders held on June 27, 2002\n\nDate of resolution: Meeting of the Board of Directors held on July 28, 2010\n\nNote: Former SMBC issued and granted stock options to certain directors and employees pursuant to the resolution of the ordinary general meeting of shareholders held on June 27, 2002. SMFG succeeded the obligations related to the stock options at the time of its establishment pursuant to the resolution of the preferred shareholders’ meeting held on September 26, 2002 and the extraordinary shareholders’ meeting held on September 27, 2002.\n\n2. SMFG implemented 100-for-1 stock split on January 4, 2009. Stock prices for the year ended March 31, 2009 are reported assuming that the stock split had been effective from April 1, 2008.\n\n3. Preferred stocks (1st series Type 6) are not listed on exchanges.\n\nNotes: 1. Stock prices of common shares as quoted on the Tokyo Stock Exchange (First Section).\n\n2. Preferred stocks (1st series Type 6) are not listed on exchanges.\n\nSMFG 2011 154\n\nNotes: 1. Stock prices of common shares as quoted on the Tokyo Stock Exchange (First Section).\n\n## Common Stock Price Range Stock Price Performance\n\n## Six-Month Performance" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9674035834044616, + "doc_id": "eb1fd216f943d98e6bb71adf0b0ea191ffb971ef6e528cfd44a49a0c84c49705", + "edit_distance": 0.8340147179067866, + "f1_score": 0.9866666666666666, + "meteor": 0.8020962724391341, + "precision": 0.9897119341563786, + "pred_md": "## KEY HIGHLIGHTS\n\n## WIRELESS\n\n- GLYPH<129> Canada's first and fastest wireless LTE 4G broadband network continued its expansion. Our network covered approximately 73 % of the Canadian population at December 31, 2013, while continuing to offer the largest selection of LTE devices of any carrier in Canada. We were also the first carrier in North America and one of the first in the world to offer international LTE roaming to wireless customers.\n- GLYPH<129> Our wireless offerings and pricing tiers were simplified, reducing complexity and service times for our sales and support teams and adding customer value. These innovations include Canada's first complete wireless Share Everything plan which allows individuals, families and small businesses to share wireless data, unlimited nationwide talk and text and calling features across 1 to 10 wireless devices.\n- GLYPH<129> Our 'worry free' $7.99 per day US wireless data roaming plan was launched, with twice the daily data capacity (50 MB) typically used daily by consumers for wireless Internet, as well as enhanced voice, text and data roaming value packages.\n- GLYPH<129> A hybrid wireless home and small business phone solution was launched, that operates on our national wireless network. The service is available in regions outside Rogers' cable territories and offers a traditional home or office phone service and features without the need for a landline or Internet connection.\n- GLYPH<129> The M2M World Alliance, an organization comprised of eight leading international mobile operators including Rogers, demonstrated a single global SIM card which makes it easier to deploy connected devices in multiple countries and expected to drive further growth for our machine-to-machine business.\n\n## CABLE\n\n- GLYPH<129> Acquisition of Mountain Cable, Shaw Communications' (Shaw) cable system in Hamilton, Ontario was completed.\n- GLYPH<129> Next generation TV experience was unveiled with NextBox 3.0 giving viewers access to record up to eight HD programs at one time and store up to 240 hours of HD content. The NextBox 3.0 experience includes Whole Home PVR capability and becomes a wireless TV experience allowing viewers to navigate their cable guide, use a virtual remote, set PVR recordings and live stream channels all from a tablet or smartphone while at home or away.\n- GLYPH<129> Rogers was named both the fastest broadband Internet service provider and the fastest wireless network in Canada in October 2013 by PCMag.com, a leading US based technology website.\n- GLYPH<129> SamKnows, an independent broadband performance company, stated through in-home testing in May 2013 that we delivered, on average, 100 % or more of our advertised download speeds on our most popular Internet packages, better than most providers in the US and Europe that were tested.\n- GLYPH<129> MLB Network, a 24-hour network dedicated exclusively to baseball was launched on Rogers digital television, marking the first time this network is available in Canada. MLB Network's year-round programming features live games, news, highlights, and the game's top analysts.\n- GLYPH<129> Our TV experience was significantly enriched with the launch of our Recommendations App for NextBox, giving customers access to personalized live, rental, on-demand and previously recorded program recommendations displayed on their TV screens. A Canadian cable industry first, the application recommends similar\n\nprograms based on what customers are viewing, helping Canadians to explore and uncover more programming that appeals to their individual tastes.\n\n## BUSINESS SOLUTIONS\n\n- GLYPH<129> Following the acquisition of Blackiron and Pivot Data Centres this year, Business Solutions announced it is expanding its hosting and colocation business in Western Canada through a newly expanded data centre in Edmonton and a new Western Canada flagship data centre in Calgary.\n- GLYPH<129> SIP Trunking, a new IP-based voice solution, was announced for enterprises designed to complement our fibre-based Internet and WAN connectivity services. Merging voice services with a business data network, SIP Trunking solutions dynamically allocate bandwidth as needed to support voice and/or data needs depending upon capacity requirements during peak hours and also provide a platform for next generation IP-based video, mobile and productivity applications and services.\n\n## MEDIA\n\n- GLYPH<129> Exclusive NHL 12-year licensing agreement to broadcast national NHL games beginning with the 2014-2015 season was signed. The agreement grants Rogers the exclusive distribution of all national live and in-progress regular season and playoff games within Canada, in multiple languages, across all platforms. We executed separate agreements to sublicense certain of these broadcasting rights to TVA Sports and CBC.\n- GLYPH<129> Sportsnet 360 was launched, which is comprised of the rebranded theScore assets. The acquisition of theScore received final regulatory approval in the first half of this year.\n- GLYPH<129> Sportsnet announced a 10-year partnership extension with the Vancouver Canucks through the 2022-2023 NHL seasons, continuing a 14-year network tradition as the regional television broadcaster of Canucks hockey. The new agreement features a comprehensive suite of multimedia rights including television, online and mobile, delivering up to 60 regular season Vancouver Canucks games each season. Sportsnet is also the official regional television broadcast rights holder for the Toronto Maple Leafs, Calgary Flames and Edmonton Oilers.\n- GLYPH<129> Next Issue Canada, an innovative, all-you-can-read subscription digital magazine service that provides consumers with exclusive and unlimited access to a catalogue of more than 100 premium Canadian and US titles was launched. Next Issue Canada delivers access to our leading publishing brands alongside many of the most popular US magazine titles.\n- GLYPH<129> The Shopping Channel launched a brighter, easier, and more engaging multi-channel retail experience and a refreshed on-air and online look, an all-new mobile app, special-themed programming and improved shipping. The leading interactive and only national Canadian multi-channel retailer also added on-air social media engagement, new leading brands and more celebrity guest appearances.\n- GLYPH<129> Sportsnet announced an eight-year multi-platform broadcast rights extension with MLB Properties and MLB Advanced Media to show live and in-progress regular season and playoff baseball games and highlights within Canada.\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC.\n\n35\n\nMANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS", + "recall": 0.983640081799591, + "true_md": "## KEY HIGHLIGHTS\n\n## WIRELESS\n\n## BUSINESS SOLUTIONS\n\n## MEDIA\n\n## CABLE\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 35\n\nMANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AN D ANALYSIS\n\nprograms based on what customers are viewing, helping Canadians to explore and uncover more programming that appeals to their individual tastes.\n\n- GLYPH<129> Our TV experience was significantly enriched with the launch of our Recommendations App for NextBox, giving customers access to personalized live, rental, on-demand and previously recorded program recommendations displayed on their TV screens. A Canadian cable industry first, the application recommends similar\n\n- GLYPH<129> Sportsnet announced an eight-year multi-platform broadcast rights extension with MLB Properties and MLB Advanced Media to show live and in-progress regular season and playoff baseball games and highlights within Canada.\n\n- GLYPH<129> The Shopping Channel launched a brighter, easier, and more engaging multi-channel retail experience and a refreshed on-air and online look, an all-new mobile app, special-themed programming and improved shipping. The leading interactive and only national Canadian multi-channel retailer also added on-air social media engagement, new leading brands and more celebrity guest appearances.\n\n- GLYPH<129> MLB Network, a 24-hour network dedicated exclusively to baseball was launched on Rogers digital television, marking the first time this network is available in Canada. MLB Network’s year-round programming features live games, news, highlights, and the game’s top analysts.\n\n- GLYPH<129> SamKnows, an independent broadband performance company, stated through in-home testing in May 2013 that we delivered, on average, 100 % or more of our advertised download speeds on our most popular Internet packages, better than most providers in the US and Europe that were tested.\n\n- GLYPH<129> Rogers was named both the fastest broadband Internet service provider and the fastest wireless network in Canada in October 2013 by PCMag.com, a leading US based technology website.\n\n- GLYPH<129> Next generation TV experience was unveiled with NextBox 3.0 giving viewers access to record up to eight HD programs at one time and store up to 240 hours of HD content. The NextBox 3.0 experience includes Whole Home PVR capability and becomes a wireless TV experience allowing viewers to navigate their cable guide, use a virtual remote, set PVR recordings and live stream channels all from a tablet or smartphone while at home or away.\n\n- GLYPH<129> Acquisition of Mountain Cable, Shaw Communications’ (Shaw) cable system in Hamilton, Ontario was completed.\n\n- GLYPH<129> Next Issue Canada, an innovative, all-you-can-read subscription digital magazine service that provides consumers with exclusive and unlimited access to a catalogue of more than 100 premium Canadian and US titles was launched. Next Issue Canada delivers access to our leading publishing brands alongside many of the most popular US magazine titles.\n\n- GLYPH<129> Sportsnet announced a 10-year partnership extension with the Vancouver Canucks through the 2022-2023 NHL seasons, continuing a 14-year network tradition as the regional television broadcaster of Canucks hockey. The new agreement features a comprehensive suite of multimedia rights including television, online and mobile, delivering up to 60 regular season Vancouver Canucks games each season. Sportsnet is also the official regional television broadcast rights holder for the Toronto Maple Leafs, Calgary Flames and Edmonton Oilers.\n\n- GLYPH<129> Sportsnet 360 was launched, which is comprised of the rebranded theScore assets. The acquisition of theScore received final regulatory approval in the first half of this year.\n\n- GLYPH<129> Exclusive NHL 12-year licensing agreement to broadcast national NHL games beginning with the 2014-2015 season was signed. The agreement grants Rogers the exclusive distribution of all national live and in-progress regular season and playoff games within Canada, in multiple languages, across all platforms. We executed separate agreements to sublicense certain of these broadcasting rights to TVA Sports and CBC.\n\n- GLYPH<129> The M2M World Alliance, an organization comprised of eight leading international mobile operators including Rogers, demonstrated a single global SIM card which makes it easier to deploy connected devices in multiple countries and expected to drive further growth for our machine-to-machine business.\n\n- GLYPH<129> A hybrid wireless home and small business phone solution was launched, that operates on our national wireless network. The service is available in regions outside Rogers’ cable territories and offers a traditional home or office phone service and features without the need for a landline or Internet connection.\n\n- GLYPH<129> Our “worry free” $7.99 per day US wireless data roaming plan was launched, with twice the daily data capacity (50 MB) typically used daily by consumers for wireless Internet, as well as enhanced voice, text and data roaming value packages.\n\n- GLYPH<129> SIP Trunking, a new IP-based voice solution, was announced for enterprises designed to complement our fibre-based Internet and WAN connectivity services. Merging voice services with a business data network, SIP Trunking solutions dynamically allocate bandwidth as needed to support voice and/or data needs depending upon capacity requirements during peak hours and also provide a platform for next generation IP-based video, mobile and productivity applications and services.\n\n- GLYPH<129> Following the acquisition of Blackiron and Pivot Data Centres this year, Business Solutions announced it is expanding its hosting and colocation business in Western Canada through a newly expanded data centre in Edmonton and a new Western Canada flagship data centre in Calgary.\n\n- GLYPH<129> Canada’s first and fastest wireless LTE 4G broadband network continued its expansion. Our network covered approximately 73 % of the Canadian population at December 31, 2013, while continuing to offer the largest selection of LTE devices of any carrier in Canada. We were also the first carrier in North America and one of the first in the world to offer international LTE roaming to wireless customers.\n\n- GLYPH<129> Our wireless offerings and pricing tiers were simplified, reducing complexity and service times for our sales and support teams and adding customer value. These innovations include Canada’s first complete wireless Share Everything plan which allows individuals, families and small businesses to share wireless data, unlimited nationwide talk and text and calling features across 1 to 10 wireless devices." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9235020542951148, + "doc_id": "4f27b98d2f10b1be1bf86215353a1b413b1ba4a27376170616322930655c4be7", + "edit_distance": 0.08095238095238096, + "f1_score": 0.9593495934959351, + "meteor": 0.9757225832036454, + "precision": 0.944, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (Continued)\n\n(In thousands, except per share amounts)\n\n## Salary Continuation Benefits\n\nThe Company has agreements with certain retirees of acquired companies to pay monthly retirement benefits through fiscal 2020.\n\n## Retiree Health Care Benefits\n\nThe Company provides health care benefits to eligible retired associates who pay the Company a specified monthly premium. Premium payments are based upon current insurance rates for the type of coverage provided and are adjusted annually. Certain monthly health care premium payments are partially subsidized by the Company. Additionally, in conjunction with a fiscal 1998 acquisition, the Company assumed the obligation for a postretirement medical benefit plan which provides health care benefits to eligible retired associates at no cost to the individual.\n\nThe Company uses a June 30 measurement date for all plans.\n\nThe following table sets forth the changes in benefit obligations and plan assets during the year and the funded status for the postemployment plans at June 30:\n\nThe amounts recognized in the consolidated balance sheets and in accumulated other comprehensive income (loss) for the postemployment plans were as follows:\n\n32 Applied Industrial Technologies, Inc. and Subsidiaries", + "recall": 0.9752066115702479, + "true_md": "NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (Continued)\n\n(In thousands, except per share amounts)\n\nThe Company has agreements with certain retirees of acquired companies to pay monthly retirement benefits through fiscal 2020. \n\nThe Company provides health care benefits to eligible retired associates who pay the Company a specified monthly premium. Premium payments are based upon current insurance rates for the type of coverage provided and are adjusted annually. Certain monthly health care premium payments are partially subsidized by the Company. Additionally, in conjunction with a fiscal 1998 acquisition, the Company assumed the obligation for a postretirement medical benefit plan which provides health care benefits to eligible retired associates at no cost to the individual. \n\nThe Company uses a June 30 measurement date for all plans. \n\nThe following table sets forth the changes in benefit obligations and plan assets during the year and the funded status for the postemployment plans at June 30:\n\nThe amounts recognized in the consolidated balance sheets and in accumulated other comprehensive income (loss) for the postemployment plans were as follows:\n\n32 Applied Industrial Technologies, Inc. and Subsidiaries\n\n- SalaryContinuationBenefits \n\n- RetireeHealthCareBenefits" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9361390962896687, + "doc_id": "4463280155e20504eef0e6172dcdd3ae06df8790cfe1395b2590e31898f20fa0", + "edit_distance": 0.08536585365853659, + "f1_score": 0.9833333333333334, + "meteor": 0.9876887074769239, + "precision": 0.9833333333333333, + "pred_md": "## Nonconsolidated Statements of Income (Unaudited)\n\nSumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation\n\nNotes: 1. Amounts less than 1 million yen have been omitted.\n\n2. For the convenience of readers, the accompanying U.S. dollar financial statements have been translated from Japanese yen, as a matter of arithmetical computation only, at the rate of ·83.15 to US$1, the exchange rate prevailing at March 31, 2011.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\nSupplemental Information\n\nSMBC\n\n145", + "recall": 0.9833333333333333, + "true_md": "SMBC Supplemental Information\n\n## Nonconsolidated Statements of Income (Unaudited)\n\nSumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation\n\nNotes: 1. Amounts less than 1 million yen have been omitted.\n\n2. For the convenience of readers, the accompanying U.S. dollar financial statements have been translated from Japanese yen, as a matter of arithmetical computation only, at the rate of ¥83.15 to US$1, the exchange rate prevailing at March 31, 2011.\n\nSMFG 2011 145" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6779130385498294, + "doc_id": "10a02e967efbc9edfa849ae8bd035efd773d12e8a44b249b1a29bc1fc99596a7", + "edit_distance": 0.40271493212669685, + "f1_score": 0.8814432989690723, + "meteor": 0.7686396654823792, + "precision": 0.8181818181818182, + "pred_md": "laws on money lending business; etc. - and the industry is at a major turning point. In the shopping credit business, the Installment Sales Act is being revised amid the trend to strengthen consumer protection. Under these circumstances, the companies need to restructure their operations in order to establish new business models.\n\n- On April 1, 2009, CF, OMC Card and QUOQ merged to create one of the largest consumer finance companies in Japan with a high level of specialization and flexibility in its core businesses of credit cards and shopping credit by combining the customer bases, marketing capabilities, know-how and other resources of the 3 companies.\n- (3) Date of business combination April 1, 2009\n\n(4) Legal form of the business combination The merger was a merger by absorption with OMC Card as\n\nthe surviving company. (Name of the new company: Cedyna Financial Corporation)\n\nSMFG\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n- 2. Outline of accounting method MFG applies the accounting procedures stipulated by Articles 39, S 42 and 48 of the 'Accounting Standard for Business Divestitures' (ASBJ Statement No. 7).\n- 3. Name of the business segment, in which the subsidiary was included, in the segment information Other business\n- 4. Approximate amounts of the subsidiary's earnings included in\n- the consolidated statement of operations for the fiscal year ended March 31, 2010 MFG did not record profit or loss of QUOQ and its subsidiaries S because they were excluded from the scope of consolidation at the beginning of the fiscal year.\n- 5. Status after the business combination QUOQ and its subsidiaries are excluded from the scope of consolidation, and Cedyna Financial Corporation has become an affiliated company accounted for by the equity method.\n\n## 36. Per Share Data\n\nNotes: 1. Net income per share and Net income per share (diluted) are calculated based on the following.\n\nOutline of dilutive shares which were not included in the calculation of 'Net income per share (diluted)' for the fiscal years ended March 31, 2011 and 2010 because they do not have dilutive effect:\n\n## Stock acquisition rights: 1 type\n\n(Number of stock acquisition rights issued by resolution at the general shareholders' meeting on June 27, 2002: 1,081 units)\n\n2. Net assets per share is calculated based on the following:\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n133", + "recall": 0.9553072625698324, + "true_md": "SMFG\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nlaws on money lending business; etc. — and the industry is at a major turning point. In the shopping credit business, the Installment Sales Act is being revised amid the trend to strengthen consumer protection. Under these circumstances, the companies need to restructure their operations in order to establish new business models.\n\nOn April 1, 2009, CF, OMC Card and QUOQ merged to create one of the largest consumer finance companies in Japan with a high level of specialization and flexibility in its core businesses of credit cards and shopping credit by combining the customer bases, marketing capabilities, know-how and other resources of the 3 companies.\n\n- 2. Outline of accounting method SMFG applies the accounting procedures stipulated by Articles 39, 42 and 48 of the “Accounting Standard for Business Divestitures” (ASBJ Statement No. 7).\n\n- 3. Name of the business segment, in which the subsidiary was included, in the segment information Other business\n\n- 4. Approximate amounts of the subsidiary’s earnings included in the consolidated statement of operations for the fiscal year ended March 31, 2010 SMFG did not record profit or loss of QUOQ and its subsidiaries because they were excluded from the scope of consolidation at the beginning of the fiscal year.\n\n- 5. Status after the business combination QUOQ and its subsidiaries are excluded from the scope of consoli- dation, and Cedyna Financial Corporation has become an affiliated company accounted for by the equity method.\n\n- (3) Date of business combination April 1, 2009\n\n- (4) Legal form of the business combination The merger was a merger by absorption with OMC Card as the surviving company. (Name of the new company: Cedyna Financial Corporation)\n\n## 36. Per Share Data\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n133" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9162657545759243, + "doc_id": "58bf18863db3b498d1704abcaef3de88058ccfb48132ed58406d51c6e6f270f6", + "edit_distance": 0.428125, + "f1_score": 0.9551451187335092, + "meteor": 0.9398989229684108, + "precision": 0.9627659574468085, + "pred_md": "- * The figures in the chart are targeted goals for fiscal 2013. Core Tier I ratio: Calculated based on the definition under Basel III in 2019; all regulatory adjustments are deducted, excluding net unrealized gains (losses) on other securities (SMFG consolidated). Overseas banking profit ratio: Managerial accounting basis.\n\nIn order to implement our new medium-term management plan, first of all, we will proactively strive to facilitate our financial intermediary services to fulfill our corporate social responsibility as a leading financial services group in Japan, which is faced with unprecedented difficult challenges resulting from the Great East Japan Earthquake last March. We firmly support Japan's reconstruction financially, and are making every effort as a financial institution to put our economy back on track for sustainable growth of the global economy.\n\nMy mission as President and CEO of SMBC is to move the company forward quickly and steadily for the next level of growth, building on our business franchise, capital foundation and sense of unity, which we have created and strengthened in the first decade of our operations.\n\n'Provide the most sophisticated products and services to our clients,' 'Act with global perspective' and 'Constantly innovate, proactively respond to the changes in business environment and stay ahead of the times' - these are my principles for SMBC.\n\nTakeshi Kunibe\n\nPresident and CEO Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation\n\nHaving that in mind, we will strive to further accommodate our clients' financial needs in a timely and effective manner in Japan, our geographic original domain, and establish a globally competitive business platform, financial base and corporate infrastructure by focusing on our five strategic business areas, while addressing new financial regulations and other issues.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n3", + "recall": 0.9476439790575916, + "true_md": "* The figures in the chart are targeted goals for fiscal 2013.\n\nCore Tier I ratio: Calculated based on the definition under Basel III in 2019; all regulatory adjustments are deducted, excluding net unrealized gains (losses) on other securities (SMFG consolidated). \n\nOverseas banking profit ratio: Managerial accounting basis.\n\nIn order to implement our new medium-term management plan, first of all, we will proactively strive to facilitate our financial intermedi- ary services to fulfill our corporate social responsibility as a leading financial services group in Japan, which is faced with unprecedented difficult challenges resulting from the Great East Japan Earthquake last March. We firmly support Japan’s reconstruction financially, and are making every effort as a financial institution to put our economy back on track for sustainable growth of the global economy. \n\nHaving that in mind, we will strive to further accommodate our clients’ financial needs in a timely and effective manner in Japan, our geographic original domain, and establish a globally competitive business platform, financial base and corporate infrastructure by focusing on our five strategic business areas, while addressing new financial regulations and other issues.\n\nMy mission as President and CEO of SMBC is to move the company forward quickly and steadily for the next level of growth, building on our business franchise, capital foundation and sense of unity, which we have created and strengthened in the first decade of our operations.\n\n“Provide the most sophisticated products and services to our clients,” “Act with global perspective” and “Constantly innovate, proactively respond to the changes in business environment and stay ahead of the times” — these are my principles for SMBC.\n\nTakeshi Kunibe President and CEO Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation\n\nSMFG 2011 3" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6504886171413401, + "doc_id": "ea2dcce63effb30c2f661cbaffea6922c3d586d9f938f0a2f0c4036a6113c08a", + "edit_distance": 0.6770186335403726, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.6254634206623826, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Nordstrom, Inc.\n\n## Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nDollar and share amounts in millions except per share, per option and per unit amounts\n\n## NOTE 14: INCOME TAXES\n\nIncome tax expense consists of the following:\n\nA reconciliation of the statutory federal income tax rate to the effective tax rate on earnings before income taxes is as follows:\n\nIn 2014, we acquired Trunk Club in a tax-free merger transaction. Tax adjustments related to a reassessment of our deferred tax assets related to acquisitions resulted in an increase in our effective tax rate in 2014.\n\nThe major components of deferred tax assets and liabilities are as follows:\n\n60", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## NOTE 14: INCOME TAXES Income tax expense consists of the following:\n\n## Nordstrom, Inc. Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n## Nordstrom, Inc. Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements Dollar and share amounts in millions except per share, per option and per unit amounts\n\n60\n\nThe major components of deferred tax assets and liabilities are as follows:\n\nIn 2014, we acquired Trunk Club in a tax-free merger transaction. Tax adjustments related to a reassessment of our deferred tax assets related to acquisitions resulted in an increase in our effective tax rate in 2014.\n\nA reconciliation of the statutory federal income tax rate to the effective tax rate on earnings before income taxes is as follows:\n\nNOTE 14: INCOME TAXES Income tax expense consists of the following:\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements Dollar and share amounts in millions except per share, per option and per unit amounts" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "be4038c016dd25e9a0edf00ffdb5d52d88d578d70e8f81cd82759ce17b0f6e49", + "edit_distance": 0.6770186335403726, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.6254634206623826, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9008246176471184, + "doc_id": "603c8129903787ba573fc7962c9e4d149cc9b5df5ec5fc5bcc342eb002ff78fb", + "edit_distance": 0.10683229813664596, + "f1_score": 0.9357326478149098, + "meteor": 0.9235038216499911, + "precision": 0.9578947368421052, + "pred_md": "'ROGERS MADE CLEAR PROGRESS ON A NUMBER OF STRATEGIC FRONTS, WHILE CONTINUING TO DELIVER STRONG RETURNS TO SHAREHOLDERS AND BUILDING UPON THE COMPANY'S DEEP-ROOTED FOUNDATIONS FOR THE FUTURE BENEFIT OF ALL OUR STAKEHOLDERS.'\n\nALAN HORN, CPA, CA\n\n## A MESSAGE FROM THE CHAIRMAN\n\n2013 was another solid year in which Rogers made clear progress on a number of strategic fronts, while continuing to deliver strong returns to shareholders and building upon the company's deep-rooted foundations for the future benefit of all our stakeholders. Our management team delivered on their financial guidance targets in what continue to be highly competitive and regulatorily intense markets.\n\nRogers continued to deliver on the evolution and expansion of its core services. It quickly expanded the reach of Canada's first and fastest LTE wireless network to 73% of the Canadian population, introduced significant enhancements to its broadband data speeds and cable TV platform, and further added to its leading sports content and digital media assets.\n\nThe company executed several strategic transactions that support Rogers core growth strategies, including in the areas of wireless spectrum and network sharing, cable footprint expansion, and significantly expanding its data centre, colocation and managed services capabilities for businesses. In addition, it struck a landmark 12 year agreement with the NHL for the exclusive national hockey broadcast rights across Canada.\n\nRogers also continued to deliver on its innovation agenda, being first to market with a series of new services in 2013, including in the quickly growing areas of mobile payments, machine-to-machine communications, home monitoring, local digital services, and a new and unique customer loyalty program.\n\nWe continued to return increasing amounts of cash to shareholders. In 2013, the company's significant cash generation allowed the Board to increase the dividend\n\nby 10% and return approximately $900 million to our shareholders in the form of dividends and share buybacks. And we further increased the dividend by 5% in February 2014, continuing a multi-year trend of dividend growth. As you read on in this report, you will find many more examples and much detail of the company's operational and financial accomplishments over the past year.\n\nI would like to take the opportunity to thank our recently retired President and Chief Executive Officer Nadir Mohamed for his leadership and substantial contributions at Rogers over the past 13 years. Succeeding a founder with professional management is always a delicate and important transition in the life cycle of a company, and Nadir provided important continuity and solid leadership as CEO over the course of the past five years for which the Board and management team are thankful.\n\nFollowing an extensive international search process, in September, 2013 the Board announced that Guy Laurence would become President and Chief Executive Officer of Rogers effective in December 2013. Guy brings 30 years of global experience in telecom, pay television and media, and is a proven, hands-on executive who has consistently delivered strong financial and operating results in highly complex and\n\n02 ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\ncompetitive markets. Guy is an excellent fit for this role on many levels and the entire Board look forward to his leadership for many years to come.\n\nI would encourage you to review the discussions around our corporate governance, community investments and sustainability initiatives later in this annual report. First class corporate governance practices have always been a strong tenet at Rogers, and as an entrepreneur founded and family controlled company, our Board takes pride in what is a proactive and disciplined approach to ensuring that our governance practices continue to justify the confidence of the public capital markets. Giving back to the communities we serve is also an important part of our culture at Rogers and the Board is very proud of the significant initiatives and investments which the company undertook over the past year on the corporate social responsibility front.\n\nI would like to thank Rogers' 28,000 employees for their ongoing dedication to our customers and striving to make Rogers better every day, my fellow Board members for their counsel and drive towards delivering continued value to our shareholders, and you our shareholders for your continued investment in this great company.\n\nALAN HORN, CPA, CA\n\nCHAIRMAN OF THE BOARD ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC.", + "recall": 0.914572864321608, + "true_md": "“ R O G E R S S MADE C LEAR PROG RESS ON A NUMBER OF S T TR RA AT T EGIC FRONTS, W HILE CONTINUING TO DELIVER S T TRONG RETURNS T O SHAREHOLDERS AND BUILDING U UP P O N TH E COMPAN Y’S DEEP-ROOTED FOUNDATIONS F O R R T T H E F UTURE BENE FIT OF ALL OUR STAKEHOLDERS.”\n\n## A MESSAGE FROM THE CHAIRMAN\n\n2013 was another solid year in which Rogers made clear progress on a number of strategic fronts, while continuing to deliver strong returns to shareholders and building upon the company’s deep-rooted foundations for the future benefit of all our stakeholders. Our management team delivered on their financial guidance targets in what continue to be highly competitive and regulatorily intense markets.\n\nRogers continued to deliver on the evolution and expansion of its core services. It quickly expanded the reach of Canada’s first and fastest LTE wireless network to 73% of the Canadian population, introduced significant enhancements to its broadband data speeds and cable TV platform, and further added to its leading sports content and digital media assets. \n\nThe company executed several strategic transactions that support Rogers core growth strategies, including in the areas of wireless spectrum and network sharing, cable footprint expansion, and significantly expanding its data centre, colocation and managed services capabilities for businesses. In addition, it struck a landmark 12 year agreement with the NHL for the exclusive national hockey broadcast rights across Canada.\n\nRogers also continued to deliver on its innovation agenda, being first to market with a series of new services in 2013, including in the quickly growing areas of mobile payments, machine-to-machine communications, home monitoring, local digital services, and a new and unique customer loyalty program. \n\nWe continued to return increasing amounts of cash to shareholders. In 2013, the company’s significant cash generation allowed the Board to increase the dividend\n\nby 10% and return approximately $900 million to our shareholders in the form of dividends and share buybacks. And we further increased the dividend by 5% in February 2014, continuing a multi-year trend of dividend growth. As you read on in this report, you will find many more examples and much detail of the company’s operational and financial accomplishments over the past year.\n\nI would like to take the opportunity to thank our recently retired President and Chief Executive Officer Nadir Mohamed for his leadership and substantial contributions at Rogers over the past 13 years. Succeeding a founder with professional management is always a delicate and important transition in the life cycle of a company, and Nadir provided important continuity and solid leadership as CEO over the course of the past five years for which the Board and management team are thankful. \n\nFollowing an extensive international search process, in September, 2013 the Board announced that Guy Laurence would become President and Chief Executive Officer of Rogers effective in December 2013. Guy brings 30 years of global experience in telecom, pay television and media, and is a proven, hands-on executive who has consistently delivered strong financial and operating results in highly complex and \n\ncompetitive markets. Guy is an excellent fit for this role on many levels and the entire Board look forward to his leadership for many years to come.\n\nI would encourage you to review the discussions around our corporate governance, community investments and sustainability initiatives later in this annual report. First class corporate governance practices have always been a strong tenet at Rogers, and as an entrepreneur founded and family controlled company, our Board takes pride in what is a proactive and disciplined approach to ensuring that our governance practices continue to justify the confidence of the public capital markets. Giving back to the communities we serve is also an important part of our culture at Rogers and the Board is very proud of the significant initiatives and investments which the company undertook over the past year on the corporate social responsibility front.\n\nI would like to thank Rogers’ 28,000 employees for their ongoing dedication to our customers and striving to make Rogers better every day, my fellow Board members for their counsel and drive towards delivering continued value to our shareholders, and you our shareholders for your continued investment in this great company.\n\n02 ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\nALAN HORN, CPA, CA CHAIRMAN OF THE BOARD ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. ALAN HORN\n\nALAN HORN, CPA, CA" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.28612847285744597, + "doc_id": "503f17deaa87644909f36d99e0897a5274586da7ca875db4f7877028a395de9b", + "edit_distance": 0.8639455782312925, + "f1_score": 0.5045045045045045, + "meteor": 0.7431045562023121, + "precision": 0.35443037974683544, + "pred_md": "## 29. Key management personnel disclosures\n\n## (a) Directors\n\nThe following persons were Directors of Kingsgate during the financial year.\n\n- 〉 Ross Smyth-Kirk\n\nChairman\n\n- 〉 Peter Alexander\n\nNon-Executive Director\n\n- 〉 Craig Carracher\n\nNon-Executive Director\n\n- 〉 Peter McAleer\n\nNon-Executive Director\n\n- 〉 Gavin Thomas\n\nManaging Director\n\n## (b) Other key management personnel\n\n- 〉 Duane Woodbury\n\nChief Financial Officer\n\n- 〉 Tim Benfield\n\nChief Operating Officer\n\n- 〉 Phil MacIntyre\n\nChief Operating Officer and General Manager - Akara Mining Limited (retired 30 June 2013)\n\n- 〉 Ron James\n\nGeneral Manager Exploration and Resources Development\n\n- 〉 Ross Coyle\n\nGeneral Manager Finance and Administration and Company Secretary\n\n- 〉 Joel Forwood\n\nGeneral Manager Corporate and Markets\n\n- 〉 Brett Dunstone\n\nGeneral Manager Human Resources\n\n## (c) Key management personnel compensation\n\nwww.kingsgate.com.au", + "recall": 0.875, + "true_md": "Notes to the Financial Statements 104\n\n## 29. Key management personnel disclosures\n\n## (a) Directors\n\n## (b) Other key management personnel\n\n## (c) Key management personnel compensation\n\nThe following persons were Directors of Kingsgate during the financial year.\n\nwww.kingsgate.com.au" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8956894486617933, + "doc_id": "5e3ac2d2a926923dceca54d3953518bfa27d1ec25174666855b7d22a3983f2d5", + "edit_distance": 0.11447811447811448, + "f1_score": 0.9699248120300752, + "meteor": 0.9689017836330743, + "precision": 0.9626865671641791, + "pred_md": "Directors' Report\n\n## Value of share rights\n\n- 1 The minimum value of the rights yet to vest is nil, as the rights will be forfeited if the Key Management Personnel fails to meet a vesting condition.\n- 2 The maximum value of the share rights yet to vest has been determined as the fair value of the rights at the grant date that is yet to be expensed.\n- 3 he value at vesting date (30 June 2013) is the number of rights vesting multiplied by the Company's share price on the vesting date. As rights convert to ordinary T shares on the vesting date, this date is also the exercise date. No payment by the holder of the right is required on vesting of the right.\n- 4 The value at lapse date is the number of rights lapsing multiplied by the Company's share price at the close of business on that day. No rights lapsed on the 2013 financial year.\n- 5 he fair value of the performance rights was estimated using Monte Carlo simulation, taking into account the terms and conditions upon which the awards were T granted (refer to Note 24 of the Financial Statements).\n\n## Share options issued under the previous LTI Plan\n\nNo shares were issued during the year on the exercise of options. All options held by Key Management Personnel at the beginning of the year issued under this plan expired during the year and no further options have been issued. These options vested in a prior period hence there was no impact on Key Management Personnel remuneration for the year.\n\nEnd of Remuneration Report\n\nwww.kingsgate.com.au", + "recall": 0.9772727272727273, + "true_md": "Directors’ Report 60\n\n## Value of share rights\n\n## Share options issued under the previous LTI Plan\n\n1 The minimum value of the rights yet to vest is nil, as the rights will be forfeited if the Key Management Personnel fails to meet a vesting condition.\n\n2 The maximum value of the share rights yet to vest has been determined as the fair value of the rights at the grant date that is yet to be expensed.\n\n3 The value at vesting date (30 June 2013) is the number of rights vesting multiplied by the Company’s share price on the vesting date. As rights convert to ordinary shares on the vesting date, this date is also the exercise date. No payment by the holder of the right is required on vesting of the right.\n\n4 The value at lapse date is the number of rights lapsing multiplied by the Company’s share price at the close of business on that day. No rights lapsed on the 2013 financial year.\n\n5 The fair value of the performance rights was estimated using Monte Carlo simulation, taking into account the terms and conditions upon which the awards were granted (refer to Note 24 of the Financial Statements).\n\nNo shares were issued during the year on the exercise of options. All options held by Key Management Personnel at the beginning of the year issued under this plan expired during the year and no further options have been issued. These options vested in a prior period hence there was no impact on Key Management Personnel remuneration for the year.\n\nEnd of Remuneration Report\n\nwww.kingsgate.com.au" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8764805415642464, + "doc_id": "359af830dc56c46697311b4d7b08309ce5d4828b8945df02aa352bdc9c9b1954", + "edit_distance": 0.13565891472868216, + "f1_score": 0.9772329246935203, + "meteor": 0.9273736930967925, + "precision": 0.9789473684210527, + "pred_md": "## Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nDollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except share and per share amounts)\n\n## 25. Financial Risk Management Objectives and Policies\n\nThe Company's principal financial liabilities are comprised of mortgages, construction loans, debentures and trade payables. The main purpose of these financial liabilities is to finance the Company's investment properties and operations. The Company has various financial assets such as trade receivables and cash, which arise directly from its operations.\n\nThe Company may also enter into derivative transactions, primarily natural gas and oil swap contracts, to manage the price risk arising from fluctuations in these commodities. The Company did not enter into any derivative transactions in 2013 or 2012. It is, and has been, the Company's policy that no speculative trading in derivatives shall be undertaken.\n\nThe main risks arising from the Company's financial instruments are interest rate risk, credit risk, and liquidity risk. These risks are managed as follows:\n\n## (i) Interest rate risk\n\nThe Company is exposed to interest rate risk as a result of its mortgages and loans payable, however this risk is mitigated through the Company's strategy to have the majority of its mortgages payable in fixed-term arrangements. The Company also structures its financings so as to stagger the maturities of its debt, minimizing the Company's exposure to interest rate volatility in any one year.\n\nAs at December 31, 2013, no mortgages or vendor debt had floating interest rates except for four demand loans totaling 3.9 million. $ These loans have an interest rate of prime plus 1.0% - 2.0% (December 31, 2012 - prime plus 1.0% - 1.5%). Killam also has one construction loan of $14.8 million with a floating interest rate of prime plus 0.75% and consequently, Killam is exposed to short-term interest rate risk on this loan.\n\nAn annualized 100 basis point change in the interest rate on Killam's entire mortgage and vendor debt at December 31, 2013, would affect financing costs by approximately $7.1 million per year. However, only $141.4 million of Killam's fixed mortgage and vendor debt matures in the next twelve months. Assuming these mortgages are refinanced at similar terms, except at a 100 basis point increase in interest rates, financing costs would increase by $1.4 million per year.\n\n## (ii) Credit risk\n\nCredit risk arises from the possibility that tenants may experience financial difficulty and be unable to fulfill their lease term commitments. The Company mitigates the risk of credit loss through the diversification of its existing portfolio and limiting its exposure to any one tenant. Credit assessments are conducted with respect to all new leasing and the Company also obtains a security deposit to assist in potential recovery requirements. In addition, the receivable balances are monitored on an ongoing basis with the result that the Company's exposure to bad debt is not significant. The Company's bad debt expense experience has historically been less than 0.4% of revenues. None of Killam's tenants account for more than 1% of the tenant receivables as at each of the year-ends presented in these financial statements. The maximum exposure to credit risk is the carrying amount of each class of financial assets as disclosed in this note.\n\n## (iii) Liquidity risk\n\nManagement manages the Company's cash resources based on financial forecasts and anticipated cash flows. The Company structures its financings so as to stagger the maturities of its debt, thereby minimizing the Company's exposure to liquidity risk in any one year. In addition, the Company's apartments qualify for CMHC insured debt, thereby reducing the refinancing risk on mortgage maturities. The Company's MHCs do not qualify for CMHC insured debt, however, they continue to have access to mortgage debt. Management does not anticipate liquidity concerns on the maturity of its mortgages as funds continue to be accessible in the multi-residential sector.\n\n92\n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013", + "recall": 0.9755244755244755, + "true_md": "## Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except share and per share amounts)\n\n## 25. Financial Risk Management Objectives and Policies\n\n## (i) Interest rate risk\n\n## (ii) Credit risk\n\n## (iii) Liquidity risk\n\nNotes to the Consolidated Financial Statements Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except share and per share amounts)\n\nThe Company’s principal financial liabilities are comprised of mortgages, construction loans, debentures and trade payables. The main purpose of these financial liabilities is to finance the Company’s investment properties and operations. The Company has various financial assets such as trade receivables and cash, which arise directly from its operations.\n\nThe Company may also enter into derivative transactions, primarily natural gas and oil swap contracts, to manage the price risk arising from fluctuations in these commodities. The Company did not enter into any derivative transactions in 2013 or 2012. It is, and has been, the Company’s policy that no speculative trading in derivatives shall be undertaken.\n\nThe main risks arising from the Company’s financial instruments are interest rate risk, credit risk, and liquidity risk. These risks are managed as follows:\n\nThe Company is exposed to interest rate risk as a result of its mortgages and loans payable, however this risk is mitigated through the Company’s strategy to have the majority of its mortgages payable in fixed‑term arrangements. The Company also structures its financings so as to stagger the maturities of its debt, minimizing the Company’s exposure to interest rate volatility in any one year.\n\nAs at December 31, 2013, no mortgages or vendor debt had floating interest rates except for four demand loans totaling$3.9 million. These loans have an interest rate of prime plus 1.0% ‑ 2.0% (December 31, 2012 ‑ prime plus 1.0% ‑ 1.5%). Killam also has one construction loan of $14.8 million with a floating interest rate of prime plus 0.75% and consequently, Killam is exposed to short‑term interest rate risk on this loan.\n\nAn annualized 100 basis point change in the interest rate on Killam’s entire mortgage and vendor debt at December 31, 2013, would affect financing costs by approximately $7.1 million per year. However, only $141.4 million of Killam’s fixed mortgage and vendor debt matures in the next twelve months. Assuming these mortgages are refinanced at similar terms, except at a 100 basis point increase in interest rates, financing costs would increase by $1.4 million per year.\n\nCredit risk arises from the possibility that tenants may experience financial difficulty and be unable to fulfill their lease term commitments. The Company mitigates the risk of credit loss through the diversification of its existing portfolio and limiting its exposure to any one tenant. Credit assessments are conducted with respect to all new leasing and the Company also obtains a security deposit to assist in potential recovery requirements. In addition, the receivable balances are monitored on an ongoing basis with the result that the Company’s exposure to bad debt is not significant. The Company’s bad debt expense experience has historically been less than 0.4% of revenues. None of Killam’s tenants account for more than 1% of the tenant receivables as at each of the year‑ends presented in these financial statements. The maximum exposure to credit risk is the carrying amount of each class of financial assets as disclosed in this note.\n\nManagement manages the Company’s cash resources based on financial forecasts and anticipated cash flows. The Company structures its financings so as to stagger the maturities of its debt, thereby minimizing the Company’s exposure to liquidity risk in any one year. In addition, the Company’s apartments qualify for CMHC insured debt, thereby reducing the refinancing risk on mortgage maturities. The Company’s MHCs do not qualify for CMHC insured debt, however, they continue to have access to mortgage debt. Management does not anticipate liquidity concerns on the maturity of its mortgages as funds continue to be accessible in the multi‑residential sector.\n\n92 Killam ProPerties inc | 2013" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8434981300023627, + "doc_id": "dbfb974cbdd2d8108f7e58b531c19d44bed55b0e104010d52b001a1908190af6", + "edit_distance": 0.09803921568627451, + "f1_score": 0.9484536082474226, + "meteor": 0.9152645786895529, + "precision": 0.9484536082474226, + "pred_md": "## Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation\n\n## ◆ Consolidated\n\nNotes: 1. 'Net unrealized gains (losses) on other securities' represent the difference between the market prices and acquisition costs (or amortized costs) of 'other securities.' In principle, the values of stocks are calculated using the average market prices during the final month.\n\n- 2. 'Number of employees' has been reported on the basis of full-time workers. 'Number of employees' includes locally hired overseas staff members but excludes contract employees and temporary staff.\n- 3. The consolidated capital ratio is calculated according to the formula specified in the FSA Notification No. 19 issued in fiscal 2006, which is based on Article 14-2 of the Banking Act of Japan. The consolidated capital ratio of SMBC is calculated under Basel II.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n21", + "recall": 0.9484536082474226, + "true_md": "## Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation\n\n## ◆ Consolidated\n\nNotes: 1. “Net unrealized gains (losses) on other securities” represent the difference between the market prices and acquisition costs (or amortized costs) of “other securities.” In principle, the values of stocks are calculated using the average market prices during the final month.\n\n2. “Number of employees” has been reported on the basis of full-time workers. “Number of employees” includes locally hired overseas staff members but excludes contract employees and temporary staff.\n\n3. The consolidated capital ratio is calculated according to the formula specified in the FSA Notification No. 19 issued in fiscal 2006, which is based on Article 14-2 of the Banking Act of Japan. The consolidated capital ratio of SMBC is calculated under Basel II.\n\nSMFG 2011 21" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8689646837686211, + "doc_id": "13ceb594a46253ffa2989fe446a029540aa1d7849e6198c580ae5879a236b476", + "edit_distance": 0.10526315789473684, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9908878845312727, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows\n\nSumitomo Mitsui Financial Group, Inc. and Subsidiaries\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n75\n\nSMFG", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows\n\nSMFG\n\nSumitomo Mitsui Financial Group, Inc. and Subsidiaries\n\nSMFG 2011 75" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8233193872241197, + "doc_id": "200ba8a6cf2007f94f270db43bfc0eb18d58334fef4a2f07930ad68e060ce437", + "edit_distance": 0.16, + "f1_score": 0.9261363636363636, + "meteor": 0.8508128380382884, + "precision": 0.9819277108433735, + "pred_md": "16\n\n| OPERATING AREAS\n\n## AMERICA'S PREMIER ENERGY RESOURCE BASE »\n\nChesapeake is the second-largest producer of U.S. natural gas and a Top 15 producer of U.S. oil and natural gas liquids. The company has built a large resource base of high-quality U.S. assets in the Barnett, Haynesville, Bossier, Marcellus and Pearsall natural gas shale plays and in the Granite Wash, Cleveland, Tonkawa, Mississippian, Bone Spring, Avalon, Wolfcamp, Wolfberry, Eagle Ford, Niobrara and Utica unconventional liquids plays. In 2010 Chesapeake increased its focus on applying the geoscientific and horizontal drilling expertise gained from developing unconventional natural gas shale plays to unconventional liquids-rich plays. Our goal is to reach a balanced mix of natural gas and liquids revenue as quickly as possible through organic drilling. We invested approximately $4.7 billion in 2010, net of divestitures, primarily in liquids-rich acreage to provide the foundation for this shift toward more profitable plays.\n\nWe own interests in approximately 46,000 producing natural gas and oil wells, and in 2010 we produced approximately 1.035 trillion cubic feet of natural gas equivalent (tcfe) for an average of 2.8 billion cubic feet of natural gas equivalent (bcfe) per day. At year-end 2010, our proved reserves were 17.1 trillion cubic feet of natural gas equivalent, of which 90% were natural gas and all were onshore in the U.S. We have also captured an inventory of up to 115,000 unrisked net future drilling opportunities - almost 50 years worth of drilling opportunities - on approximately 13.2 million net leasehold acres in the U.S. The following highlights Chesapeake's ownership position in our key operating areas.", + "recall": 0.8763440860215054, + "true_md": "16 | OPERATING AREAS\n\n## AMERICA’S PREMIER ENERGY RESOURCE BASE »\n\nChesapeake is the second-largest producer of U.S. natural gas and a Top 15 producer of U.S. oil and natural gas liquids. The company has built a large resource base of high-quality U.S. assets in the Barnett, Haynesville, Bossier, Marcellus and Pearsall natural gas shale plays and in the Granite Wash, Cleveland, Tonkawa, Mississippian, Bone Spring, Avalon, Wolfcamp, Wolfberry, Eagle Ford, Niobrara and Utica unconventional liquids plays. In 2010 Chesapeake increased its focus on applying the geoscientific and horizontal drilling expertise gained from developing unconventional natural gas shale plays to unconventional liquids-rich plays. Our goal is to reach a balanced mix of natural gas and liquids revenue as quickly as possible through organic drilling. We invested approximately $4.7 billion in 2010, net of divestitures, primarily in liquids-rich acreage to provide the foundation for this shift toward more profitable plays.\n\nWe own interests in approximately 46,000 producing natural gas and oil wells, and in 2010 we produced approximately 1.035 trillion cubic feet of natural gas equivalent (tcfe) for an average of 2.8 billion cubic feet of natural gas equivalent (bcfe) per day. At year-end 2010, our proved reserves were 17.1 trillion cubic feet of natural gas equivalent, of which 90% were natural gas and all were onshore in the U.S. We have also captured an inventory of up to 115,000 unrisked net future drilling opportunities — almost 50 years worth of drilling opportunities — on approximately 13.2 million net leasehold acres in the U.S. The following highlights Chesapeake’s ownership position in our key operating areas.\n\nNatural Gas Shale Areas Liquids-Rich Areas Operating States \n\nAnadarko Basin\n\nPermian Basin\n\nEagle Ford Shale\n\nBarnett Shale\n\nHaynesville Shale\n\nBossier Shale\n\nMarcellus Shale\n\n8 Rockies\n\n## 4\n\n## 8 Rockies\n\n## 5\n\n## 7\n\n## 1 3 Barnett Shale\n\n## 6\n\n## 2" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8830882952821401, + "doc_id": "221dda6342a80d9fe9e1571eac13978e0bfd41e3614d0a812d731e686873c245", + "edit_distance": 0.11144578313253012, + "f1_score": 0.9504950495049503, + "meteor": 0.9258446703538377, + "precision": 0.9536423841059603, + "pred_md": "SMFG\n\nCapital Ratio Information\n\nNotes: 1. 'Others' includes loans guaranteed by employers.\n\n2. 'Delinquent' loans are past due loans and loans to obligors categorized as 'Borrowers Requiring Caution' that do not satisfy the definition of default stipulated in the Notification.\n\n## B. Qualifying Revolving Retail Exposures (QRRE)\n\n## (A) Rating Procedures\n\n- GLYPH<129> 'Qualifying revolving retail exposures' includes card loans and credit card balances.\n- GLYPH<129> Card loans and credit card balances are rated as follows.\n\nCard loans and credit card balances are allocated to a portfolio segment with similar risk characteristics determined based, for card loans, on the credit quality of the loan guarantee company, credit limit, settlement account balance and payment history, and, for credit card balances, on repayment history and frequency of use.\n\nPDs and LGDs used to calculate credit risk-weighted asset amounts are estimated based on the default experience for each segment and taking into account the possibility of estimation errors.\n\nFurther, the effectiveness of segmentation in terms of default risk and recovery risk is validated periodically.\n\nInternal data are used to estimate and validate PDs and LGDs. The definition of default is the definition stipulated in the Notification.\n\n## (B) Portfolio\n\nNotes: 1. The on-balance sheet exposure amount is estimated by estimating the amount of increase in each transaction balance and not by multiplying the undrawn amount by the CCF.\n\n2. 'Weighted average CCF' is 'On-balance sheet exposure amount ÷ Undrawn amount' and provided for reference only. It is not used for estimating on-balance sheet exposure amounts.\n\n3. Past due loans of less than three months are recorded in 'Delinquent.'\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n186", + "recall": 0.9473684210526315, + "true_md": "SMFG Capital Ratio Information\n\nNotes: 1. “Others” includes loans guaranteed by employers.\n\n2. “Delinquent” loans are past due loans and loans to obligors categorized as “Borrowers Requiring Caution” that do not satisfy the definition of default stipulated in the Notification.\n\n## (A) Rating Procedures\n\n- B. Qualifying Revolving Retail Exposures (QRRE)\n\n- GLYPH<129> “Qualifying revolving retail exposures” includes card loans and credit card balances.\n\n- GLYPH<129> Card loans and credit card balances are rated as follows.\n\n- Card loans and credit card balances are allocated to a portfolio segment with similar risk characteristics determined based, for card \n\nloans, on the credit quality of the loan guarantee company, credit limit, settlement account balance and payment history, and, for credit card balances, on repayment history and frequency of use.\n\nPDs and LGDs used to calculate credit risk-weighted asset amounts are estimated based on the default experience for each segment and taking into account the possibility of estimation errors.\n\nFurther, the effectiveness of segmentation in terms of default risk and recovery risk is validated periodically. \n\nInternal data are used to estimate and validate PDs and LGDs. The definition of default is the definition stipulated in the Notification.\n\n- (B) Portfolio\n\nNotes: 1. The on-balance sheet exposure amount is estimated by estimating the amount of increase in each transaction balance and not by multiplying the undrawn amount by the CCF.\n\n2. “Weighted average CCF” is “On-balance sheet exposure amount ÷ Undrawn amount” and provided for reference only. It is not used for estimating on-balance sheet exposure amounts.\n\n3. Past due loans of less than three months are recorded in “Delinquent.”\n\nSMFG 2011 186" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7839204411491599, + "doc_id": "196de379779e7a476094ff3f23bcb38fe43d2e73a1311351e3880e8bb12f9b71", + "edit_distance": 0.25, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9810649611957458, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## 78\n\nNotes to the Financial Statements\n\n## 4. Segment information continued\n\nwww.kingsgate.com.au", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Notes to the Financial Statements 78\n\n## 4. Segment information continued\n\nwww.kingsgate.com.au" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8162940278792582, + "doc_id": "1481476385d7e3c3b8acf3d9ada66f5af7147fc00691fa4a696285c277b91b74", + "edit_distance": 0.41366459627329194, + "f1_score": 0.9743589743589745, + "meteor": 0.745885517403635, + "precision": 0.9855907780979827, + "pred_md": "- · Improvement and expansion of elementary school facilities in deprived areas in China\n- · Support mothers with children through health and literacy programs organized by agricultural organizations in the Philippines\n- · Project for helping women become self-supporting in Myanmar\n- · Support for the improvement of living standards of deprived women and elderly people in rural Bangladesh\n\n## Japan\n\n- · For terminally ill young children, SMBC provides funds for family trips\n- · Sponsorship for workshops held at primary schools for puppet plays performed by speech- and hearing-challenged persons\n\n· Support for the training of guide dogs (Wakaba program)\n\nAt Group member SAKURA KCS Corp., as of February 2011, 891 employees (approximately 80% of the company's total employees) have participated as volunteers by engaging in welfare and environmental contribution activities.\n\n## ¥ Supporting Education in Developing Countries by Recycling Used Books\n\nSumitomo Mitsui Card collects old unwanted books from employees to send to libraries in developing countries. It also asks its cardholders to participate in this effort.\n\n## ¥ Activities of YUI, SMBC's Volunteer Organization\n\nSMBC also provides support for YUI, an in-house volunteer organization which provides opportunities for SMBC employees to plan and perform volunteer activities. YUI volunteer activities performed regularly include social events at schools for the hearing-challenged, beach-cleaning, and the organization of singing performances by senior citizens. Other activities include holding charitable bazaars for the sale of hand-crafted products.\n\n## · Contributing to Local Communities\n\nSMBC has been promoting and performing volunteer activities planned by its branches and other offices in Japan to contribute to local communities. These activities include branch tours, clean up of the local environment, such as parks and other\n\nareas in the vicinity of SMBC branches, participation in local festivals and events, exhibitions of children's art from around the world and concerts in the lobbies of SMBC branches. Similarly, SMBC Nikko Securities is proactively involved in clean-ups and volunteer activities at its branches, assisting in resolving issues and problems faced by local communities and supporting the development of local society.\n\n## · Local Community Contributions by Overseas Offices\n\nOverseas offices conducted the following activities in fiscal 2010.\n\n- · Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation (China) Limited established a scholarship program for students of\n\n- Zhejiang University, Shanghai International Studies University, Sun Yat-sen University, and other universities.\n- · SMBC's Hong Kong Branch gave donations in support of an orchestra composed of young Asian musicians.\n- · SMBC's Seoul Branch assisted South Korean students in improving their Japanese language skills and in aquiring a deeper understanding of Japanese culture through donations to a nationwide Japanese drama convention.\n- · SMBC's Labuan Branch in Malaysia, following its relocation, donated desks, chairs and cabinets to occupational training centers for the disabled.\n- · SMBC's Hanoi Branch provided international school students with vocational experiences.\n- · SMBC's Bangkok Branch assisted farmers in northeast Thailand by donating underground water storage tanks and assisting with vegetable planting and harvesting.\n- · Employees of Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation Europe (SMBCE) conducted volunteer activities in their time off. SMBCE contributes to charitable organizations through an in-house fund and also uses a matching gifts program under which it donates a certain amount for every donation made by its employees.\n\n· The European office of the Japan Research Institute (JRI)\n\n- made a donation in support of a Japanese-language speech contest.\n\n## ¥ Donation Boxes for Foreign Currency Coins\n\nSMBC cooperates in fundraising activities by UNICEF. As a member of the UNICEF foreign currency coin donation committee, it places donation boxes for foreign currency coins at the entrances of all manned branches and offices in Japan, and sorts such collected coins by currency for delivery to UNICEF.\n\n## · Support through Products and Services\n\nSMBC offers ordinary deposit accounts from which the accrued interest (after tax) is donated to UNICEF, and SMBC also makes donations matching the amount donated by its clients. Sumitomo Mitsui Card collects donations from cardholders through the World Gifts Point Service of VJA group companies,\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n59", + "recall": 0.9633802816901409, + "true_md": "- • Improvement and expansion of elementary school facilities in deprived areas in China\n\n- • Support mothers with children through health and literacy programs organized by agricultural organizations in the Philippines\n\n- • Project for helping women become self-supporting in Myanmar\n\n- • Support for the improvement of living standards of deprived women and elderly people in rural Bangladesh\n\n- • For terminally ill young children, SMBC provides funds for family trips\n\n- • Sponsorship for workshops held at primary schools for pup- pet plays performed by speech- and hearing-challenged persons \n\n- • Support for the training of guide dogs (Wakaba program) \n\nAt Group member SAKURA KCS Corp., as of February 2011, 891 employees (approximately 80% of the company’s total employees) have participated as volunteers by engaging in welfare and environmental contribution activities.\n\nSumitomo Mitsui Card collects old unwanted books from employees to send to libraries in developing countries. It also asks its cardholders to participate in this effort.\n\n• SMBC also provides support for YUI, an in-house volunteer organization which provides opportunities for SMBC employees to plan and perform volunteer activities. YUI volunteer activi- ties performed regularly include social events at schools for the hearing-challenged, beach-cleaning, and the organization of singing performances by senior citizens. Other activities include holding charitable bazaars for the sale of hand-crafted products.\n\n• SMBC has been promoting and performing volunteer activities planned by its branches and other offices in Japan to contribute to local communities. These activities include branch tours, clean up of the local environment, such as parks and other \n\n• SMBC offers ordinary deposit accounts from which the accrued interest (after tax) is donated to UNICEF, and SMBC also makes donations matching the amount donated by its clients. Sumitomo Mitsui Card collects donations from cardholders through the World Gifts Point Service of VJA group companies, \n\n• SMBC cooperates in fundraising activities by UNICEF. As a member of the UNICEF foreign currency coin donation com- mittee, it places donation boxes for foreign currency coins at the entrances of all manned branches and offices in Japan, and sorts such collected coins by currency for delivery to UNICEF.\n\nareas in the vicinity of SMBC branches, participation in local festivals and events, exhibitions of children’s art from around the world and concerts in the lobbies of SMBC branches. Similarly, SMBC Nikko Securities is proactively involved in clean-ups and volunteer activities at its branches, assisting in resolving issues and problems faced by local communities and supporting the development of local society.\n\n- • Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation (China) Limited established a scholarship program for students of \n\n- Zhejiang University, Shanghai International Studies University, Sun Yat-sen University, and other universities.\n\n- • SMBC’s Hong Kong Branch gave donations in support of an orchestra composed of young Asian musicians.\n\n- • SMBC’s Seoul Branch assisted South Korean students in improving their Japanese language skills and in aquiring a deeper understanding of Japanese culture through dona- tions to a nationwide Japanese drama convention.\n\n- • SMBC’s Labuan Branch in Malaysia, following its relocation, donated desks, chairs and cabinets to occupational training centers for the disabled.\n\n- • SMBC’s Hanoi Branch provided international school stu- dents with vocational experiences.\n\n- • SMBC’s Bangkok Branch assisted farmers in northeast Thailand by donating underground water storage tanks and assisting with vegetable planting and harvesting.\n\n- • Employees of Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation Europe (SMBCE) conducted volunteer activities in their time off. SMBCE contributes to charitable organizations through an in-house fund and also uses a matching gifts program under which it donates a certain amount for every donation made by its employees.\n\n## • Donation Boxes for Foreign Currency Coins SMBC cooperates in fundraising activities by UNICEF. As a\n\n## • Support through Products and Services SMBC offers ordinary deposit accounts from which the accrued\n\n## Japan\n\n## • Supporting Education in Developing Countries by Recycling Used Books\n\n## • Activities of YUI, SMBC’s Volunteer Organization SMBC also provides support for YUI, an in-house volunteer\n\n## • Contributing to Local Communities SMBC has been promoting and performing volunteer activities\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n59\n\n## • Local Community Contributions by Overseas Offices Overseas offices conducted\n\n• Overseas offices conducted the following activities in fiscal 2010.\n\n- • The European office of the Japan Research Institute (JRI) \n\n- made a donation in support of a Japanese-language speech contest." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8265634537072559, + "doc_id": "e26f43d9f29b9b26d82089860c7a05b6decbb01d256b0621add41d5a44f6616c", + "edit_distance": 0.1813953488372093, + "f1_score": 0.9870129870129871, + "meteor": 0.8525567077791967, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "short-term incentives, long-term incentives, benefits and perquisites. Amounts paid to Meridian for these services during fiscal year 2014 was di minimis. Meridian did not provide any other services to the Company.\n\nIn order to ensure that any remuneration recommendations made by Meridian were free from undue influence by management, the Remuneration and Nominations Committee engaged Meridian and any advice, work or recommendations made by Meridian were provided to the committee chairman.\n\nElements of Remuneration\n\n## Base Salary\n\nBase salaries for executives recognize their qualifications, experience and responsibilities as well as their unique value and historical contributions to Sundance. In addition to being important to attracting and retaining executives, setting base salaries at appropriate levels motivates employees to aspire to and accept enlarged opportunities. We do not consider base salaries to be part of performance-based remuneration. In setting the amount, the individuals' performance is considered as well as the length of time in their current position without a salary increase.\n\n2013 Base Salaries and 2014 Salary Adjustments\n\n- 33 -", + "recall": 0.9743589743589743, + "true_md": "short-term incentives, long-term incentives, benefits and perquisites. Amounts paid to Meridian for these services during fiscal year 2014 was di minimis. Meridian did not provide any other services to the Company. \n\nIn order to ensure that any remuneration recommendations made by Meridian were free from undue influence by management, the Remuneration and Nominations Committee engaged Meridian and any advice, work or recommendations made by Meridian were provided to the committee chairman.\n\nBase Salary Base salaries for executives recognize their qualifications, experience and responsibilities as well as their unique value and historical contributions to Sundance. In addition to being important to attracting and retaining executives, setting base salaries at appropriate levels motivates employees to aspire to and accept enlarged opportunities. We do not consider base salaries to be part of performance-based remuneration. In setting the amount, the individuals' performance is considered as well as the length of time in their current position without a salary increase. \n\n## Elements of Remuneration Component\n\n## Base Salary Base salaries for executives recognize their qualifications, experience and responsibilities as well as their unique value and\n\n## 2013 Base Salaries and 2014 Salary Adjustments Name Title 2014 Salary\n\n- 33 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.2203644821253883, + "doc_id": "a8637e086d725075ef6bd8a594e0ca1088777dc01d6b064cc3ad621e71728f82", + "edit_distance": 0.9036144578313253, + "f1_score": 0.8260869565217391, + "meteor": 0.5331286681715575, + "precision": 0.7307692307692307, + "pred_md": "## Shareholders' Equity\n\n(Dollars in Millions)\n\n$\n\n## Dividends Per Share\n\n(Dollars)\n\n$\n\n$\n\nApplied Industrial Technologies, Inc. and Subsidiaries\n\n$\n\n$\n\n6\n\n$\n\n5\n\n$\n\n4\n\n$\n\n3\n\n$\n\n$\n\n$\n\n$\n\n3\n\n$\n\n3\n\n$\n\n3\n\n4\n\n$\n\n5\n\n4\n\n$\n\n5\n\n$\n\n5\n\n$\n\n.\n\n5\n\n$\n\n$\n\n6\n\n3\n\n.\n\n$\n\n6\n\n$\n\n$\n\n$\n\n$\n\n$\n\n$\n\n$\n\n$\n\n$\n\n$\n\n$\n\n$\n\n$\n\n$\n\n$\n\n$\n\n$\n\n$\n\n43", + "recall": 0.95, + "true_md": "43 Applied Industrial Technologies, Inc. and Subsidiaries\n\n## Dividends Per Share (Dollars)\n\n## Shareholders’ Equity (Dollars in Millions)\n\nDividends Per Share (Dollars)\n\nShareholders’ Equity (Dollars in Millions)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7938047857077988, + "doc_id": "f6ed068463affbed54bb610ad9f5088762c8715ff62ddfbbfbe3a14227672fd5", + "edit_distance": 0.35294117647058826, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9972521880724609, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "SMFG\n\n## Consolidated Balance Sheets\n\nSumitomo Mitsui Financial Group, Inc. and Subsidiaries\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n70", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "SMFG\n\n## Consolidated Balance Sheets\n\nSMFG 2011 70\n\nSumitomo Mitsui Financial Group, Inc. and Subsidiaries" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9232926202777381, + "doc_id": "212701df9e26d2b6e7c4bc778c7a7ff413dc02a5cc4e0709236d21dd647f7839", + "edit_distance": 0.35526315789473684, + "f1_score": 0.9873417721518988, + "meteor": 0.998262464861666, + "precision": 0.975, + "pred_md": "32\n\nOre Reserves and Mineral Resources\n\n## Ore Reserves and Mineral Resources\n\nas at 30 June 2013\n\n## Challenger and Chatree* Ore Reserves\n\n## Challenger and Chatree* Mineral Resources (inclusive of Ore Reserves)\n\n## Nueva Esperanza and Bowdens Mineral Resources\n\n- * Chatree data as at 30 April 2013\n\nDetailed individual Mineral Resources and Ore Reserve reports for each project are available on the company website.\n\nwww.kingsgate.com.au", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "32 Ore Reserves and Mineral Resources\n\nas at 30 June 2013\n\n## Ore Reserves and Mineral Resources\n\n## Challenger and Chatree* Ore Reserves\n\n## Challenger and Chatree* Mineral Resources (inclusive of Ore Reserves)\n\n## Nueva Esperanza and Bowdens Mineral Resources\n\nDetailed individual Mineral Resources and Ore Reserve reports for each project are available on the company website.\n\n* Chatree data as at 30 April 2013\n\nwww.kingsgate.com.au" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.713629908728023, + "doc_id": "92c3bcd0d3c5a0b2aa089e15af8f223a1af8e971b4b3d832fc496123fda795f5", + "edit_distance": 0.2861635220125786, + "f1_score": 0.9848484848484849, + "meteor": 0.7089134316302081, + "precision": 0.9923664122137404, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 33 - FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT continued\n\nThe Company has the following commitments related to its financial liabilities (US$'000):\n\n## e) Market Risk\n\nMarket risk is the risk that the fair value of future cash flows of a financial instrument will fluctuate because of changes in market prices. Market risk comprises three types of risk: commodity price risk, interest rate risk and foreign currency risk. Financial instruments affected by market risk include loans and borrowings, deposits, trade receivables, trade payables, accrued liabilities and derivative financial instruments.\n\n## Commodity Price Risk\n\nThe Group is exposed to the risk of fluctuations in prevailing market commodity prices on the mix of oil and gas products it produce.\n\n## Commodity Price Risk Sensitivity Analysis\n\nThe table below summarises the impact on profit before tax for changes in commodity prices on the fair value of derivative financial instruments. The impact on equity is the same as the impact on profit before tax as these derivative financial instruments have not been designated as hedges and are and therefore adjusted to fair value through profit and loss. The analysis assumes that the crude oil and natural gas price moves $10 per barrel and $0.50 per mcf, with all other variables remaining constant, respectively.\n\n- 100 -", + "recall": 0.9774436090225563, + "true_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 33 – FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT continued\n\nThe Company has the following commitments related to its financial liabilities (US$’000): \n\nMarket Risk Market risk is the risk that the fair value of future cash flows of a financial instrument will fluctuate because of changes in market prices. Market risk comprises three types of risk: commodity price risk, interest rate risk and foreign currency risk. Financial instruments affected by market risk include loans and borrowings, deposits, trade receivables, trade payables, accrued liabilities and derivative financial instruments. \n\nCommodity Price Risk The Group is exposed to the risk of fluctuations in prevailing market commodity prices on the mix of oil and gas products it produce. \n\nCommodity Price Risk Sensitivity Analysis The table below summarises the impact on profit before tax for changes in commodity prices on the fair value of derivative financial instruments. The impact on equity is the same as the impact on profit before tax as these derivative financial instruments have not been designated as hedges and are and therefore adjusted to fair value through profit and loss. The analysis assumes that the crude oil and natural gas price moves $10 per barrel and $0.50 per mcf, with all other variables remaining constant, respectively. \n\n## e) Market Risk Market risk is the risk that the fair value of future cash flows of a financial instrument will fluctuate because of\n\n## Commodity Price Risk The Group is exposed to the risk of fluctuations in prevailing market commodity prices on the mix of oil and gas\n\n## Commodity Price Risk Sensitivity Analysis The table below summarises the impact on profit before tax for changes in commodity prices on the fair value of\n\n- 100 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9567014082803008, + "doc_id": "002d5c889bf2fdaa7dffb59dd3ef0f350733cfbe87dc36c85f374ca491191ed1", + "edit_distance": 0.1553784860557769, + "f1_score": 0.9777777777777777, + "meteor": 0.976248931745318, + "precision": 0.9753694581280788, + "pred_md": "## ■ Operational Risk\n\n## 1. Operational Risk Equivalent Amount Calculation Methodology\n\nSMFG adopted the Advanced Measurement Approach (AMA) for exposures as of March 31, 2008. As of March 31, 2011, the following consolidated subsidiaries have also adopted the AMA, and the remaining consolidated subsidiaries have adopted the Basic Indicator Approach (BIA).\n\numitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation, Sumitomo Mitsui Card Company, Limited, The Japan Research Institute, Limited, SMBC S Friend Securities Co., Ltd., Sumitomo Mitsui Finance and Leasing Co., Ltd., Kansai Urban Banking Corporation, The Japan Net Bank, Limited, SMBC Guarantee Co., Ltd., SMBC Finance Service Co., Ltd., THE MINATO BANK, LTD., SMBC Center Service Co., Ltd., SMBC Delivery Service Co., Ltd., SMBC Green Service Co., Ltd., SMBC International Business Co., Ltd., SMBC International Operations Co., Ltd., SMBC Loan Business Service Co., Ltd., SMBC Market Service Co., Ltd., SMBC Loan Administration and Operations Service Co., Ltd., Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation Europe Limited and Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation (China) Limited.\n\nAmong consolidated subsidiaries adopting the BIA, the following companies are preparing to implement the AMA.\n\nCedyna Financial Corporation, SMBC Nikko Securities Inc.\n\n## 2. Outline of the AMA\n\nAn outline of the AMA for operational risk management is described in the section on Risk Management. In this section, we would like to present an explanation of the preparation of data that is input into the quantification model and the verification of scenario assessment using internal loss data, external loss data, and Business Environment and Internal Control Factors (BEICFs). We will also give an outline of the methodology for measuring the operational risk equivalent amount ('required capital') using the quantification model.\n\n## (1) Scenario Analysis through Risk Control Assessments\n\n## A. Preparation of Data Input into the Quantification Model\n\nIn order to estimate the frequency of occurrence of 'low-frequency and high-severity' events, which is the purpose of risk control assessment, we estimate the loss frequency in terms of four loss amounts (¥100 million, ¥1 billion, ¥5 billion, and ¥10 billion) for each scenario, then input the total amount by loss event type for each entity, namely, SMFG (consolidated), SMBC (consolidated), and SMBC (nonconsolidated), into the quantification model.\n\nAt SMFG and SMBC, by using a different assessment method according to loss event type and organizational classification, we obtain a proper grasp of operational risk profile of the Group. The following section provides typical calculation examples for scenarios of SMBC domestic business offices.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n201\n\nCapital Ratio Information\n\nSMFG", + "recall": 0.9801980198019802, + "true_md": "SMFG Capital Ratio Information\n\n## ■ Operational Risk\n\n## 1. Operational Risk Equivalent Amount Calculation Methodology\n\n## 2. Outline of the AMA\n\n## (1) Scenario Analysis through Risk Control Assessments\n\n## A. Preparation of Data Input into the Quantification Model\n\nSMFG adopted the Advanced Measurement Approach (AMA) for exposures as of March 31, 2008. As of March 31, 2011, the following consolidated subsidiaries have also adopted the AMA, and the remaining consolidated subsidiaries have adopted the Basic Indicator Approach (BIA).\n\n Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation, Sumitomo Mitsui Card Company, Limited, The Japan Research Institute, Limited, SMBC Friend Securities Co., Ltd., Sumitomo Mitsui Finance and Leasing Co., Ltd., Kansai Urban Banking Corporation, The Japan Net Bank, Limited, SMBC Guarantee Co., Ltd., SMBC Finance Service Co., Ltd., THE MINATO BANK, LTD., SMBC Center Service Co., Ltd., SMBC Delivery Service Co., Ltd., SMBC Green Service Co., Ltd., SMBC International Business Co., Ltd., SMBC International Operations Co., Ltd., SMBC Loan Business Service Co., Ltd., SMBC Market Service Co., Ltd., SMBC Loan Administration and Operations Service Co., Ltd., Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation Europe Limited and Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation (China) Limited.\n\nAmong consolidated subsidiaries adopting the BIA, the following companies are preparing to implement the AMA.\n\nCedyna Financial Corporation, SMBC Nikko Securities Inc.\n\nAn outline of the AMA for operational risk management is described in the section on Risk Management. In this section, we would like to present an explanation of the preparation of data that is input into the quantification model and the verification of scenario assessment using internal loss data, external loss data, and Business Environment and Internal Control Factors (BEICFs). We will also give an outline of the methodology for measuring the operational risk equivalent amount (“required capital”) using the quantification model.\n\nIn order to estimate the frequency of occurrence of “low-frequency and high-severity” events, which is the purpose of risk control assessment, we estimate the loss frequency in terms of four loss amounts (¥100 million, ¥1 billion, ¥5 billion, and ¥10 billion) for each scenario, then input the total amount by loss event type for each entity, namely, SMFG (consolidated), SMBC (consolidated), and SMBC (nonconsolidated), into the quantification model.\n\nAt SMFG and SMBC, by using a different assessment method according to loss event type and organizational classification, we obtain a proper grasp of operational risk profile of the Group. The following section provides typical calculation examples for scenarios of SMBC domestic business offices.\n\nSMFG 2011 201" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9040033764684493, + "doc_id": "0841581e6ebf4a0b90a37ecd7fb8d4ea078cd51d1cd69bfe599ce02a2b48e722", + "edit_distance": 0.14893617021276595, + "f1_score": 0.9543147208121827, + "meteor": 0.9433813887376168, + "precision": 0.9591836734693877, + "pred_md": "MANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS\n\n## QUARTERLY RESULTS\n\nThe table below shows our quarterly consolidated financial results and key performance indicators for 2013 and 2012.\n\n## QUARTERLY CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL SUMMARY\n\n2013\n\n2012\n\n1 Adjusted operating profit, adjusted net income, adjusted basic and diluted earnings per share, pre-tax free cash flow and after-tax free cash flow are Non-GAAP measures and should not be considered as a substitute or alternative for GAAP measures. They are not defined terms under IFRS, and do not have standard meanings, so may not be a reliable way to compare us to other companies. See 'Non-GAAP Measures' for information about these measures, including how we calculate them.\n\n2 As defined. See 'Additional GAAP Measures'.\n\n54\n\nROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT", + "recall": 0.9494949494949495, + "true_md": "MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS\n\n## QUARTERLY RESULTS\n\nThe table below shows our quarterly consolidated financial results and key performance indicators for 2013 and 2012.\n\n## QUARTERLY CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL SUMMARY\n\n54 ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n1 Adjusted operating profit, adjusted net income, adjusted basic and diluted earnings per share, pre-tax free cash flow and after-tax free cash flow are Non-GAAP measures and should not be considered as a substitute or alternative for GAAP measures. They are not defined terms under IFRS, and do not have standard meanings, so may not be a reliable way to compare us to other companies. See “Non-GAAP Measures” for information about these measures, including how we calculate them.\n\n2 As defined. See “Additional GAAP Measures”." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9222544920614069, + "doc_id": "106fac05018eeec57554ac78a0160892ecb907f5992384158cc86424fdd73e7e", + "edit_distance": 0.5604606525911708, + "f1_score": 0.9648093841642228, + "meteor": 0.8258681055150606, + "precision": 0.9733727810650887, + "pred_md": "SMFG\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nfrom these operating sections, reviews their assessment. The reserves are provided for based on the results of these assessments.\n\nThe reserve for possible loan losses of other consolidated subsidiaries for general claims is provided for in the amount deemed necessary based on the historical loan-loss ratios, and for doubtful claims in the amount deemed uncollectible based on assessment of each claim.\n\nFor collateralized or guaranteed claims on bankrupt borrowers and effectively bankrupt borrowers, the amount exceeding the estimated value of collateral and guarantees is deemed to be uncollectible and written off against the total outstanding amount of the claims. The amount of write-off was ¥867,866 million ($10,437 million) and ¥843,781 million at March 31, 2011 and 2010, respectively.\n\n- (7) Reserve for employee bonuses The reserve for employee bonuses is provided for payment of bonuses to employees, in the amount of estimated bonuses, which are attributable to the respective fiscal year.\n- (8) Reserve for executive bonuses The reserve for executive bonuses is provided for payment of bonuses to executives, in the amount of estimated bonuses, which are attributable to the respective fiscal year.\n\n## (9)\n\n- Reserve for employee retirement benefits at the fiscal year-end.\n\nThe reserve for employee retirement benefits is provided for payment of retirement benefits to employees, in the amount deemed accrued at the fiscal year-end, based on the projected retirement benefit obligation and the fair value of plan assets\n\nUnrecognized prior service cost is amortized using the straight-line method, primarily over 9 years, over the employees' estimated average remaining service period from the fiscal year of its incurrence.\n\nUnrecognized net actuarial gain or loss is amortized using the straight-line method, primarily over 9 years, over the employees' average remaining service period, commencing from the next fiscal year of incurrence.\n\n'Partial Amendments to Accounting Standard for Retirement Benefits (Part 3)' (Accounting Standard Board of Japan ('ASBJ') Statement No. 19, issued on July 31, 2008) became effective from the fiscal year beginning on and after April 1, 2009. Accordingly, SMFG has applied them from the fiscal year ended March 31, 2010. This accounting method has no impact on the consolidated financial statements for the fiscal year ended March 31, 2010.\n\n## (10) Reserve for executive retirement benefits\n\nThe reserve for executive retirement benefits is provided for payment of retirement benefits to directors, corporate auditors and other executive officers, in the amount deemed accrued at the fiscal year-end based on the internal regulations.\n\n## (11) Reserve for point service program\n\nThe reserve for point service program is provided for the potential future redemption of points awarded to customers under the 'SMBC Point Pack,' credit card points programs, and other customer points award programs. The amount is calculated by converting the outstanding points into a monetary amount, and rationally estimating and recognizing the amount that will be redeemed in the future.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n80\n\n## (12) Reserve for reimbursement of deposits\n\nThe reserve for reimbursement of deposits which were derecognized as liabilities under certain conditions is provided for the possible losses on the future claims of withdrawal based on the historical reimbursements.\n\nThe reserve for loss on interest repayment is provided for the possible losses on future claims of repayment of interest based\n\n- (13) Reserve for loss on interest repayment on historical interest repayment experience.\n\n## (14) Reserve under the special laws\n\nThe reserve under the special laws is a reserve for eventual future operating losses from financial instruments transactions pursuant to Article 46-5 of the Financial Instruments and Exchange Act.\n\n- (15) Translation of foreign currency assets and liabilities Assets and liabilities of SMFG and SMBC denominated in foreign currencies and accounts of SMBC overseas branches are translated into Japanese yen mainly at the exchange rates prevailing at the consolidated balance sheet date, with the exception of stocks of subsidiaries and affiliates translated at rates prevailing at the time of acquisition.\n\nOther consolidated subsidiaries' assets and liabilities denominated in foreign currencies are translated into Japanese yen at the exchange rates prevailing at their respective balance sheet dates.\n\n## (16) Lease transactions\n\n- (a) Recognition of income on finance leases Interest income is allocated to each period, based on the interest method.\n- (b) Recognition of income on operating leases Primarily, lease-related income is recognized on a straight-line basis over the term of the lease, based on the contractual amount of lease fees per month.\n- (c) Recognition of income and expenses on installment sales Primarily, installment-sales-related income and installmentsales-related expenses are recognized on a due-date accrual basis over the period of the installment sales.\n\n## (17) Hedge accounting\n\n- (a) Hedging against interest rate changes\n- As for the hedge accounting method applied to hedging\n\ntransactions for interest rate risk arising from financial assets and liabilities, SMBC applies deferred hedge accounting.\n\nSMBC applies deferred hedge accounting stipulated in 'Treatment for Accounting and Auditing of Application of Accounting Standard for Financial Instruments in Banking Industry' (Japanese Institute of Certified Public Accountants ('JICPA') Industry Audit Committee Report No. 24) to portfolio hedges on groups of large-volume, small-value monetary claims and debts.\n\nAs for the portfolio hedges to offset market fluctuation, SMBC assesses the effectiveness of such hedges by classifying the hedged items (such as deposits and loans) and the hedging instruments (such as interest rate swaps) by their maturity. As for the portfolio hedges to fix cash flows, SMBC assesses the effectiveness of such hedges by verifying the correlation between the hedged items and the hedging instruments.", + "recall": 0.9563953488372093, + "true_md": "Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nSMFG\n\nfrom these operating sections, reviews their assessment. The reserves are provided for based on the results of these assessments.\n\nThe reserve for possible loan losses of other consolidated subsidiaries for general claims is provided for in the amount deemed necessary based on the historical loan-loss ratios, and for doubtful claims in the amount deemed uncollectible based on assessment of each claim.\n\nFor collateralized or guaranteed claims on bankrupt borrow- ers and effectively bankrupt borrowers, the amount exceeding the estimated value of collateral and guarantees is deemed to be uncollectible and written off against the total outstanding amount of the claims. The amount of write-off was ¥867,866 million ($10,437 million) and ¥843,781 million at March 31, 2011 and 2010, respectively.\n\nUnrecognized prior service cost is amortized using the straight-line method, primarily over 9 years, over the employ- ees’ estimated average remaining service period from the fiscal year of its incurrence.\n\nUnrecognized net actuarial gain or loss is amortized using the straight-line method, primarily over 9 years, over the employees’ average remaining service period, commencing from the next fiscal year of incurrence.\n\n“Partial Amendments to Accounting Standard for Retirement Benefits (Part 3)” (Accounting Standard Board of Japan (“ASBJ”) Statement No. 19, issued on July 31, 2008) became effective from the fiscal year beginning on and after April 1, 2009. Accordingly, SMFG has applied them from the fiscal year ended March 31, 2010. This accounting method has no impact on the consolidated financial statements for the fiscal year ended March 31, 2010.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n80\n\nAs for the portfolio hedges to offset market fluctuation, SMBC assesses the effectiveness of such hedges by clas- sifying the hedged items (such as deposits and loans) and the hedging instruments (such as interest rate swaps) by their maturity. As for the portfolio hedges to fix cash flows, SMBC assesses the effectiveness of such hedges by verifying the correlation between the hedged items and the hedging instruments. \n\nSMBC applies deferred hedge accounting stipulated in “Treatment for Accounting and Auditing of Application of Accounting Standard for Financial Instruments in Banking Industry” (Japanese Institute of Certified Public Accountants (“JICPA”) Industry Audit Committee Report No. 24) to portfolio hedges on groups of large-volume, small-value monetary claims and debts. \n\n- (7) Reserve for employee bonuses The reserve for employee bonuses is provided for payment of bonuses to employees, in the amount of estimated bonuses, which are attributable to the respective fiscal year.\n\n- (8) Reserve for executive bonuses The reserve for executive bonuses is provided for payment of bonuses to executives, in the amount of estimated bonuses, which are attributable to the respective fiscal year.\n\n- (9) Reserve for employee retirement benefits The reserve for employee retirement benefits is provided for payment of retirement benefits to employees, in the amount deemed accrued at the fiscal year-end, based on the projected retirement benefit obligation and the fair value of plan assets at the fiscal year-end.\n\n- (12) Reserve for reimbursement of deposits The reserve for reimbursement of deposits which were derecognized as liabilities under certain conditions is provided for the possible losses on the future claims of withdrawal based on the historical reimbursements.\n\n- (13) Reserve for loss on interest repayment The reserve for loss on interest repayment is provided for the possible losses on future claims of repayment of interest based on historical interest repayment experience.\n\n- (14) Reserve under the special laws The reserve under the special laws is a reserve for eventual future operating losses from financial instruments transactions pursuant to Article 46-5 of the Financial Instruments and Exchange Act.\n\n- (15) Translation of foreign currency assets and liabilities Assets and liabilities of SMFG and SMBC denominated in foreign currencies and accounts of SMBC overseas branches are translated into Japanese yen mainly at the exchange rates prevailing at the consolidated balance sheet date, with the exception of stocks of subsidiaries and affiliates translated at rates prevailing at the time of acquisition.\n\n- (16) Lease transactions\n\n- (a) Recognition of income on finance leases Interest income is allocated to each period, based on the interest method.\n\n- (b) Recognition of income on operating leases Primarily, lease-related income is recognized on a straight-line basis over the term of the lease, based on the contractual amount of lease fees per month.\n\n- (c) Recognition of income and expenses on installment sales Primarily, installment-sales-related income and installment- sales-related expenses are recognized on a due-date accrual basis over the period of the installment sales.\n\n- (17) Hedge accounting\n\n- (a) Hedging against interest rate changes As for the hedge accounting method applied to hedging transactions for interest rate risk arising from financial assets and liabilities, SMBC applies deferred hedge accounting.\n\n- (10) Reserve for executive retirement benefits The reserve for executive retirement benefits is provided for payment of retirement benefits to directors, corporate auditors and other executive officers, in the amount deemed accrued at the fiscal year-end based on the internal regulations. \n\n- (11) Reserve for point service program The reserve for point service program is provided for the potential future redemption of points awarded to customers under the “SMBC Point Pack,” credit card points programs, and other customer points award programs. The amount is calculated by converting the outstanding points into a monetary amount, and rationally estimating and recognizing the amount that will be redeemed in the future.\n\nOther consolidated subsidiaries’ assets and liabilities denominated in foreign currencies are translated into Japanese yen at the exchange rates prevailing at their respective balance sheet dates." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9008065318543933, + "doc_id": "ece32106e57436fc97a734d158319a960b5736765f365760f11fad16b23c3f2d", + "edit_distance": 0.184375, + "f1_score": 0.9395017793594306, + "meteor": 0.9172002011320177, + "precision": 0.9635036496350365, + "pred_md": "## ■ Breakdown of Consolidated Risk-Weighted Assets by Event Type\n\n(March 31, 2011)\n\nNote: Only risk-weighted assets calculated under the AMA.\n\n## (6) Risk Mitigation Initiatives\n\nTo mitigate risk using the quantitative results of the AMA, SMFG and SMBC implement risk mitigation measures to high-severity risk scenarios identified in the previously mentioned magnitude rating.\n\nIn addition to the above, the operational risk-weighted assets calculated using the quantification methods are allocated to the business units of SMBC and other Group companies, as part of initiatives to mitigate risk for the Group as a whole.\n\nSpecifically, (1) at the beginning of each fiscal year, the operational risk-weighted assets calculated using the internal loss data and the scenario exposure determined from the risk control assessment are allocated to each business unit and Group company, (2) during the fiscal year, each business unit and Group company work to prevent the realization of operational risk and improve scenario control by implementing risk mitigation measures, (3) during the first and second halves of the fiscal year, the measurements of risk-weighted assets of each business unit and Group company and an analysis of factors causing the change from the previous halfyear period (including the frequency and severity of scenario) are fed back to the business units and Group companies for revising their plans, and, (4) finally, at the end of the fiscal year, by comparing the planned versus actual results, we endeavor to enhance the awareness of operational risk, improve the effectiveness of operational risk management, and mitigate operational risk within the Group as a whole.\n\n## ■ SMFG's Operational Risk Mitigation Activities on a Semi-Annual Basis\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n46", + "recall": 0.9166666666666666, + "true_md": "## (6) Risk Mitigation Initiatives\n\n## ■ Breakdown of Consolidated Risk-Weighted Assets by Event Type\n\n## ■ SMFG’s Operational Risk Mitigation Activities on a Semi-Annual Basis\n\nSMFG 2011 46\n\n(March 31, 2011)\n\nTo mitigate risk using the quantitative results of the AMA, SMFG and SMBC implement risk mitigation measures to high-severity risk sce- narios identified in the previously mentioned magnitude rating.\n\nIn addition to the above, the operational risk-weighted assets calculated using the quantification methods are allocated to the business units of SMBC and other Group companies, as part of initiatives to mitigate risk for the Group as a whole.\n\nSpecifically, (1) at the beginning of each fiscal year, the opera- tional risk-weighted assets calculated using the internal loss data and the scenario exposure determined from the risk control assess- ment are allocated to each business unit and Group company, (2) during the fiscal year, each business unit and Group company work to prevent the realization of operational risk and improve sce- nario control by implementing risk mitigation measures, (3) during the first and second halves of the fiscal year, the measurements of risk-weighted assets of each business unit and Group company and an analysis of factors causing the change from the previous half- year period (including the frequency and severity of scenario) are fed back to the business units and Group companies for revising their plans, and, (4) finally, at the end of the fiscal year, by comparing the planned versus actual results, we endeavor to enhance the aware- ness of operational risk, improve the effectiveness of operational risk management, and mitigate operational risk within the Group as a whole.\n\nNote: Only risk-weighted assets calculated under the AMA." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9153981742929453, + "doc_id": "bed230de5c55f86e99148a53fdf248c8c2efde80f0e2441ea860b0d6c61fd5ef", + "edit_distance": 0.7739234449760766, + "f1_score": 0.9903660886319846, + "meteor": 0.755012331836094, + "precision": 0.9922779922779923, + "pred_md": "## SBCS Co., Limited\n\n10th Floor, Q. House Lumpini\n\nBuilding, No.1 South Sathorn Road, Tungmahamek, Sathorn, Bangkok 10120, Thailand Tel: 66 (2) 677-7270~5\n\nFax: 66 (2) 677-7279\n\n## BSL Leasing Co., Ltd.\n\n19th Floor, Sathorn City Tower,\n\n175 South Sathorn Road,\n\nThungmahamek, Sathorn,\n\nBangkok, 10120, Thailand\n\nTel: 66 (2) 670-4700\n\nFax: 66 (2) 679-6160\n\n## SMBC Capital India Private Limited\n\nB-14/A, Qutab Institutional Area, Katwaria Sarai, New Delhi-\n\n110016, India\n\nTel:\n\n91 (11) 4607-8366\n\nFax: 91 (11) 4607-8355\n\n## The Japan Research Institute (Shanghai) Solution Co., Ltd.\n\nUnit 141, 18F , Hang Seng Bank Tower,\n\n1000 Lujiazui Ring Road,\n\nPudong New Area,\n\nShanghai, 200120, The People's\n\nRepublic of China\n\nTel:\n\n86 (21) 6841-2788\n\nFax: 86 (21) 6841-1287\n\n## The Japan Research Institute (Shanghai) Consulting Co., Ltd.\n\nUnit 41, 18F , Hang Seng Bank Tower, 1000 Lujiazui Ring Road, Pudong New Area, Shanghai, 200120, The People's Republic of China\n\nTel:\n\n86 (21) 6841-1288\n\nFax: 86 (21) 6841-1287\n\n## The Japan Research Institute (Shanghai) Consulting Co., Ltd. Beijing Branch\n\nUnit 906, 9F , North Tower, Beijing Kerry Centre, No.1, Guanghua Road, Chaoyang District, Beijing 100020, The People's Republic of China\n\nTel:\n\n86 (10) 8529-8141\n\nFax: 86 (10) 8529-7343\n\n## Sumitomo Mitsui Finance and Leasing (Singapore) Pte. Ltd.\n\n152 Beach Road,\n\nGateway East #21-5,\n\nSingapore 189721\n\nTel:\n\n65-6224-2955\n\nFax: 65-6225-3570\n\n## Sumitomo Mitsui Finance and Leasing (Hong Kong) Ltd.\n\nUnit 913, 9/F , Miramar Tower, 132 Nathan Road, Tsim Sha Tsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong\n\nThe People's Republic of China\n\nTel:\n\n852-2523-4155\n\nFax: 852-2845-9246\n\n## SMFL Leasing (Thailand) Co., Ltd.\n\n30th Floor, Q. House\n\nLumpini Building,\n\n1 South Sathorn Road,\n\nTungmahamek, Sathorn,\n\nBangkok 10120, Thailand\n\nTel:\n\n66 (2) 677-7400\n\nFax: 66 (2) 677-7413\n\n## Sumitomo Mitsui Finance and Leasing (China) Co., Ltd.\n\nRoom 2502-2503, Goldlion Tower, 138 Ti Yu Dong Road, Guangzhou, 510620,\n\nThe People's Republic of China\n\nTel:\n\n86 (20) 8755-0021\n\nFax: 86 (20) 8755-0422\n\n## Sumitomo Mitsui Finance and Leasing (China) Co., Ltd. Shanghai Branch\n\nUnit 2301-2303,Lippo Plaza, 222 Middle Huaihai Road, Luwan District, Shanghai, 200021, The People's Republic of China Tel: 86 (21) 5396-5522\n\nFax: 86 (21) 5396-5552\n\n## SMFL Leasing (Malaysia) Sdn. Bhd.\n\nLetter Box No.58, 11th Floor, UBN Tower, 10 Jalan P . Ramlee, 50250 Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia Tel: 60 (3) 2026-2619 Fax: 60 (3) 2026-2627\n\n## PT. SMFL Leasing Indonesia\n\nSummitmas II, 12th Floor, Jl.Jend.\n\nSudirman Kav. 61-62 Jakarta\n\nSelatan 12190, Indonesia\n\nTel:\n\n62 (21) 520-2083\n\nFax: 62 (21) 520-2088\n\n## Sumitomo Mitsui Auto Leasing & Service (Thailand) Co., Ltd.\n\n161, Nuntawan Building, 10th Floor,\n\nRajdamri Road,\n\nKhwaeng Lumpinee,\n\nKhet Pathumwan,\n\nBangkok 10330, Thailand\n\nTel:\n\n66-2252-9511\n\nFax: 66-2255-3130\n\n## PROMISE (HONG KONG) CO., LTD.\n\n14th Floor, Luk Kwok Centre, 72 Gloucester Road,Wanchai, Hong Kong Special Administrative Region, The People's Republic of China\n\nTel:\n\n852 (3199) 1000\n\nFax: 852 (2528) 5472\n\n## PROMISE (THAILAND) CO., LTD.\n\n15th Floor, Capital Tower, All Seasons Place, 87/1 Wireless Road, Lumpini, Phatumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand Tel: 66 (2) 655-8574 Fax: 66 (2) 655-8170\n\n## PROMISE (SHENZHEN) CO., LTD.\n\nRoom 911-912, Ying Long Development Center, Shennan Road 6025, Fu Tian District, Shenzhen 518040, The People's Republic of China\n\nTel:\n\n86 (755) 2396-6200\n\nFax: 86 (755) 2396-6379\n\n## PROMISE (SHENYANG) CO., LTD.\n\nRoom 1501/1502, No.1 Yuebin Street,\n\nShenhe District, Shenyang,\n\nLiaoning Province 110013,\n\nThe People's Republic of China\n\nTel:\n\n86 (24) 2250-6200\n\nFax: 86 (24) 2250-6220\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n221", + "recall": 0.9884615384615385, + "true_md": "## PT. SMFL Leasing Indonesia\n\n## Sumitomo Mitsui Finance and Leasing (Singapore) Pte. Ltd.\n\n## SBCS Co., Limited\n\n## BSL Leasing Co., Ltd.\n\n## Sumitomo Mitsui Finance and Leasing (Hong Kong) Ltd.\n\n## Sumitomo Mitsui Auto Leasing & Service (Thailand) Co., Ltd.\n\n## PROMISE (HONG KONG) CO., LTD.\n\n## SMFL Leasing (Thailand) Co., Ltd.\n\n## SMBC Capital India Private Limited\n\n## The Japan Research Institute (Shanghai) Solution Co., Ltd.\n\n## Sumitomo Mitsui Finance and Leasing (China) Co., Ltd.\n\n## PROMISE (THAILAND) CO., LTD.\n\n## PROMISE (SHENZHEN) CO., LTD.\n\n## Sumitomo Mitsui Finance and Leasing (China) Co., Ltd. Shanghai Branch\n\n## The Japan Research Institute (Shanghai) Consulting Co., Ltd.\n\n## PROMISE (SHENYANG) CO., LTD.\n\n## SMFL Leasing (Malaysia) Sdn. Bhd.\n\n## The Japan Research Institute (Shanghai) Consulting Co., Ltd. Beijing Branch\n\nSMFG 2011 221\n\n10th Floor, Q. House Lumpini Building, No.1 South Sathorn Road, Tungmahamek, Sathorn, Bangkok 10120, Thailand Tel: 66 (2) 677-7270~5 Fax: 66 (2) 677-7279\n\n152 Beach Road, Gateway East #21-5, Singapore 189721 Tel: 65-6224-2955 Fax: 65-6225-3570\n\nSummitmas II, 12th Floor, Jl.Jend. Sudirman Kav. 61-62 Jakarta Selatan 12190, Indonesia Tel: 62 (21) 520-2083 Fax: 62 (21) 520-2088\n\n19th Floor, Sathorn City Tower, 175 South Sathorn Road, Thungmahamek, Sathorn, Bangkok, 10120, Thailand Tel: 66 (2) 670-4700 Fax: 66 (2) 679-6160\n\nUnit 913, 9/F, Miramar Tower, 132 Nathan Road, Tsim Sha Tsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong The People’s Republic of China Tel: 852-2523-4155 Fax: 852-2845-9246\n\n161, Nuntawan Building, 10th Floor, Rajdamri Road, Khwaeng Lumpinee, Khet Pathumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand Tel: 66-2252-9511 Fax: 66-2255-3130\n\nB-14/A, Qutab Institutional Area, Katwaria Sarai, New Delhi- 110016, India Tel: 91 (11) 4607-8366 Fax: 91 (11) 4607-8355\n\n30th Floor, Q. House Lumpini Building, 1 South Sathorn Road, Tungmahamek, Sathorn, Bangkok 10120, Thailand Tel: 66 (2) 677-7400 Fax: 66 (2) 677-7413\n\n14th Floor, Luk Kwok Centre, 72 Gloucester Road,Wanchai, Hong Kong Special Administrative Region, The People’s Republic of China Tel: 852 (3199) 1000 Fax: 852 (2528) 5472\n\n15th Floor, Capital Tower, All Seasons Place, 87/1 Wireless Road, Lumpini, Phatumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand Tel: 66 (2) 655-8574 Fax: 66 (2) 655-8170\n\nRoom 2502-2503, Goldlion Tower, 138 Ti Yu Dong Road, Guangzhou, 510620, The People’s Republic of China Tel: 86 (20) 8755-0021 Fax: 86 (20) 8755-0422\n\nUnit 141, 18F, Hang Seng Bank Tower, 1000 Lujiazui Ring Road, Pudong New Area, Shanghai, 200120, The People’s Republic of China Tel: 86 (21) 6841-2788 Fax: 86 (21) 6841-1287\n\nUnit 41, 18F, Hang Seng Bank Tower, 1000 Lujiazui Ring Road, Pudong New Area, Shanghai, 200120, The People’s Republic of China Tel: 86 (21) 6841-1288 Fax: 86 (21) 6841-1287\n\nUnit 2301-2303,Lippo Plaza, 222 Middle Huaihai Road, Luwan District, Shanghai, 200021, The People’s Republic of China Tel: 86 (21) 5396-5522 Fax: 86 (21) 5396-5552\n\nRoom 911-912, Ying Long Development Center, Shennan Road 6025, Fu Tian District, Shenzhen 518040, The People’s Republic of China Tel: 86 (755) 2396-6200 Fax: 86 (755) 2396-6379\n\nRoom 1501/1502, No.1 Yuebin Street, Shenhe District, Shenyang, Liaoning Province 110013, The People’s Republic of China Tel: 86 (24) 2250-6200 Fax: 86 (24) 2250-6220\n\nLetter Box No.58, 11th Floor, UBN Tower, 10 Jalan P. Ramlee, 50250 Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia Tel: 60 (3) 2026-2619 Fax: 60 (3) 2026-2627\n\nUnit 906, 9F, North Tower, Beijing Kerry Centre, No.1, Guanghua Road, Chaoyang District, Beijing 100020, The People’s Republic of China Tel: 86 (10) 8529-8141 Fax: 86 (10) 8529-7343" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.814074487180613, + "doc_id": "23c6e567b1945a81abeb4fdb807f3abe8e83b0b508679bc1713f8489a409d6b5", + "edit_distance": 0.5115384615384615, + "f1_score": 0.9187279151943462, + "meteor": 0.8703625942617433, + "precision": 0.9252669039145908, + "pred_md": "## Sundance Energy Australia Limited\n\nABN 76 112 202 883\n\n## Directors\n\nMichael D. Hannell - Chairman Eric McCrady- Managing Director and CEO Damien A. Hannes- Non-Executive Director Neville W. Martin - Non-Executive Director Weldon Holcombe- Non-Executive Director\n\n## Company Secretary\n\nDamien Connor\n\n## Registered Office\n\n32 Beulah Road\n\nNorwood SA 5067\n\nPhone: (61 8) 8363 0388\n\nFax: (61 8) 8132 0766\n\nWebsite: www.sundanceenergy.com.au\n\n## Corporate Headquarters\n\n## Sundance Energy, Inc.\n\n633 17th Street, Suite 1950\n\nDenver, CO 80202 USA\n\nPhone: (303) 543-5700\n\nFax: (303) 543-5701\n\nWebsite: www.sundanceenergy.net\n\n## Auditors\n\nErnst & Young Ernst & Young Centre 680 George Street Sydney NSW 2000\n\n## Australian Legal Advisors\n\nBaker & McKenzie Level 27, AMP Centre 50 Bridge Street Sydney, NSW 2000 Australia\n\n## Bankers\n\nNational Australia Bank Limited - Australia Wells Fargo - United States\n\n## Share Registry\n\nComputershare Investor Services Pty Ltd Level 5, 115 Grenfell Street\n\nAdelaide SA 5000\n\n## Securities Exchange Listing\n\nAustralian Securities Exchange (ASX)\n\nASX Code: SEA\n\n## Forward-Looking Statements\n\nThis Annual Report includes forward-looking statements. These statements relate to Sundance's expectations, beliefs, intentions or strategies regarding the future. These statements can be identified by the use of words like 'anticipate', 'believe', 'intend', 'estimate', 'expect', 'may', 'plan', 'project', 'will', 'should', 'seek' and similar words or expressions containing same. The forward-looking statements reflect the Company's views and assumptions with respect to future events as of the date of this presentation and are subject to a variety of unpredictable risks, uncertainties, and other unknowns. Actual and future results and trends could differ materially from those set forth in such statements due to various factors, many of which are beyond our ability to control or predict. Given these uncertainties, no one should place undue reliance on any forward-looking statements attributable to Sundance, or any of its affiliates or persons acting on its behalf. Although every effort has been made to ensure this report sets forth a fair and accurate view , we do not undertake any obligation to update or revise any forward-looking statements, whether as a result of new information, future events or otherwise.\n\n## Competent Persons Statement\n\nThis report contains information on Sundance Energy's reserves and resources which has been reviewed by David Ramsden-Wood, Professional Engineer, who is licensed in Alberta, Canada and is qualified in accordance with ASX Listing Rule 5.11 and has consented to the inclusion of this information in the form and context in which it appears.\n\nDESIGN BY:\n\nMark Mulvany Graphic Design (Denver, CO)\n\nPHOTOGRAPHY BY:\n\nMichael McConnell Photography (Denver, CO)", + "recall": 0.9122807017543859, + "true_md": "## Forward-Looking Statements\n\n## Directors\n\n## Sundance Energy Australia Limited\n\n## Company Secretary\n\n## Registered Office\n\n## Corporate Headquarters Sundance Energy, Inc.\n\n## Competent Persons Statement\n\n## Auditors\n\n## Australian Legal Advisors\n\n## Bankers\n\n## Share Registry\n\n## Securities Exchange Listing\n\nDESIGN BY: Mark Mulvany Graphic Design (Denver, CO)\n\nPHOTOGRAPHY BY: Michael McConnell Photography (Denver, CO)\n\nAustralian Securities Exchange (ASX) ASX Code: SEA\n\nComputershare Investor Services Pty Ltd Level 5, 115 Grenfell Street Adelaide SA 5000\n\nNational Australia Bank Limited–Australia Wells Fargo–United States\n\nBaker & McKenzie Level 27, AMP Centre 50 Bridge Street Sydney, NSW 2000 Australia\n\nErnst & Young Ernst & Young Centre 680 George Street Sydney NSW 2000\n\n633 17th Street, Suite 1950 Denver, CO 80202 USA Phone: (303) 543-5700 Fax: (303) 543-5701 Website: www.sundanceenergy.net\n\n32 Beulah Road Norwood SA 5067 Phone: (61 8) 8363 0388 Fax: (61 8) 8132 0766 Website: www.sundanceenergy.com.au\n\nDamien Connor\n\nMichael D. Hannell– Chairman Eric McCrady– Managing Director and CEO Damien A. Hannes– Non-Executive Director Neville W. Martin– Non-Executive Director Weldon Holcombe– Non-Executive Director\n\nABN 76 112 202 883\n\nThis Annual Report includes forward-looking statements.\n\nThese statements relate to Sundance’s expectations, beliefs, intentions or strategies regarding the future. These statements can be identified by the use of words like “anticipate”, “believe”, “intend”, “estimate”, “expect”, “may”, “plan”, “project”, “will”, “should”, “seek” and similar words or expressions containing same. The forward-looking state- ments reflect the Company’s views and assumptions with respect to future events as of the date of this presentation and are subject to a variety of unpredictable risks, uncertain- ties, and other unknowns. Actual and future results and trends could differ materially from those set forth in such statements due to various factors, many of which are beyond our ability to control or predict. Given these uncertainties, no one should place undue reliance on any forward-looking statements attributable to Sundance, or any of its affiliates or persons acting on its behalf. \n\nAlthough every effort has been made to ensure this report sets forth a fair and accurate view, we do not undertake any obligation to update or revise any forward-looking statements, whether as a result of new information, future events or otherwise.\n\nThis report contains information on Sundance Energy’s reserves and resources which has been reviewed by David Ramsden-Wood, Professional Engineer, who is licensed in Alberta, Canada and is qualified in accordance with ASX Listing Rule 5.11 and has consented to the inclusion of this information in the form and context in which it appears." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8968284037404375, + "doc_id": "8c2dc71460bb7705100909bfa4462af05d1356da480944ca7ae3512c60f3f4ec", + "edit_distance": 0.0632688927943761, + "f1_score": 0.9533898305084745, + "meteor": 0.9394893478219758, + "precision": 0.9533898305084746, + "pred_md": "SMFG\n\nCapital Ratio Information\n\n## 2. Exposures by Asset Class\n\n## (1) Corporate Exposures\n\n## A. Corporate, Sovereign and Bank Exposures\n\n## (A) Rating Procedures\n\n- GLYPH<129> 'Corporate, sovereign and bank exposures' includes credits to domestic and overseas commercial/industrial (C&I) companies, individuals for business purposes (domestic only), sovereigns, public sector entities, and financial institutions. Business loans such as apartment construction loans, and small and medium-sized enterprises (SME) loans with standardized screening process (hereinafter referred to as 'standardized SME loans') are, in principle, included in 'retail exposures.' However, credits of more than ¥100 million are treated as corporate exposures in accordance with the Notification.\n- GLYPH<129> An obligor is assigned an obligor grade by first assigning a financial grade using a financial strength grading model and data obtained from the obligor's financial statements. The financial grade is then adjusted taking into account the actual state of the obligor's balance sheet and qualitative factors to derive the obligor grade (for details, please refer to 'Credit Risk Assessment and Quantification' on page 35). Different rating series are used for domestic and overseas obligors - J1 ~ J10 for domestic obligors and G1 ~ G10 for overseas obligors - as shown below due to differences in actual default rate levels and portfolios' grade distribution. Different Probability of Default (PD) values are applied also.\n- GLYPH<129> n addition to the above basic rating procedure which builds on the financial grade assigned at the beginning, in some cases, the I obligor grade is assigned based on the parent company's credit quality or credit ratings published by external rating agencies. The Japanese government, local authorities and other public sector entities with special basis for existence and unconventional financial statements are assigned obligor grades based on their attributes (for example, 'local municipal corporations'), as the data on these obligors are not suitable for conventional grading models. Further, credits to individuals for business purposes, business loans and standardized SME loans are assigned obligor grades using grading models developed specifically for these exposures.\n- GLYPH<129> PDs used for calculating credit risk-weighted assets are estimated based on the default experience for each grade and taking into account the possibility of estimation errors. In addition to internal data, external data are used to estimate and validate PDs. The definition of default is the definition stipulated in the Notification (an event that would lead to an exposure being classified as 'substandard loans,' 'doubtful assets' or 'bankrupt and quasi-bankrupt assets' occurring to the obligor).\n- GLYPH<129> Loss given defaults (LGDs) used in the calculation of credit risk-weighted assets are estimated based on historical loss experience of credits in default, taking into account the possibility of estimation errors.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n182", + "recall": 0.9533898305084746, + "true_md": "SMFG\n\nCapital Ratio Information\n\n## 2. Exposures by Asset Class\n\n## (1) Corporate Exposures\n\n## A. Corporate, Sovereign and Bank Exposures\n\n## (A) Rating Procedures\n\n- GLYPH<129> “Corporate, sovereign and bank exposures” includes credits to domestic and overseas commercial/industrial (C&I) companies, individuals for business purposes (domestic only), sovereigns, public sector entities, and financial institutions. Business loans such as apartment construction loans, and small and medium-sized enterprises (SME) loans with standardized screening process (hereinafter referred to as “standardized SME loans”) are, in principle, included in “retail exposures.” However, credits of more than ¥100 million are treated as corporate exposures in accordance with the Notification.\n\n- GLYPH<129> An obligor is assigned an obligor grade by first assigning a financial grade using a financial strength grading model and data obtained from the obligor’s financial statements. The financial grade is then adjusted taking into account the actual state of the obligor’s balance sheet and qualitative factors to derive the obligor grade (for details, please refer to “Credit Risk Assessment and Quantification” on page 35). Different rating series are used for domestic and overseas obligors — J1 ~ J10 for domestic obligors and G1 ~ G10 for overseas obligors — as shown below due to differences in actual default rate levels and portfolios’ grade distribution. Different Probability of Default (PD) values are applied also.\n\n- GLYPH<129> In addition to the above basic rating procedure which builds on the financial grade assigned at the beginning, in some cases, the obligor grade is assigned based on the parent company’s credit quality or credit ratings published by external rating agencies. The Japanese government, local authorities and other public sector entities with special basis for existence and unconventional financial statements are assigned obligor grades based on their attributes (for example, “local municipal corporations”), as the data on these obligors are not suitable for conventional grading models. Further, credits to individuals for business purposes, business loans and standardized SME loans are assigned obligor grades using grading models developed specifically for these exposures.\n\n- GLYPH<129> PDs used for calculating credit risk-weighted assets are estimated based on the default experience for each grade and taking into account the possibility of estimation errors. In addition to internal data, external data are used to estimate and validate PDs. The definition of default is the definition stipulated in the Notification (an event that would lead to an exposure being classified as “substandard loans,” “doubtful assets” or “bankrupt and quasi-bankrupt assets” occurring to the obligor).\n\n- GLYPH<129> Loss given defaults (LGDs) used in the calculation of credit risk-weighted assets are estimated based on historical loss experience of credits in default, taking into account the possibility of estimation errors.\n\nSMFG 2011 182" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8985030839226462, + "doc_id": "72fa00e1efe4081351da2efb0af57cd57ff608a73571698e4706ce7fc6c3a70e", + "edit_distance": 0.34782608695652173, + "f1_score": 0.9637305699481865, + "meteor": 0.908665617920283, + "precision": 0.9587628865979382, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 35 - DEED OF CROSS GUARANTEE\n\nPursuant to Class Order 98/1418, the wholly-owned subsidiary, Armadillo Petroleum Limited ('APL'), is relieved from the Corporations Act 2001 requirements for preparation, audit and lodgement of its financial reports.\n\nAs a condition of the Class Order, SEAL and APL ('the Closed Group') have entered into a Deed of Cross Guarantee ('Deed'). The effect of the Deed is that SEAL has guaranteed to pay any deficiency in the event of the winding up of APL under certain provision of the Corporations Act 2001 . APL has also given a similar guarantee in the event that SEAL is wound up.\n\nSet out below is a consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income and retained earnings of the Closed Group:\n\n- 103 -", + "recall": 0.96875, + "true_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 35 – DEED OF CROSS GUARANTEE\n\nPursuant to Class Order 98/1418, the wholly-owned subsidiary, Armadillo Petroleum Limited (“APL”), is relieved from the Corporations Act 2001 requirements for preparation, audit and lodgement of its financial reports.\n\nSet out below is a consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income and retained earnings of the Closed Group: \n\nAs a condition of the Class Order, SEAL and APL (“the Closed Group”) have entered into a Deed of Cross Guarantee (“Deed”). The effect of the Deed is that SEAL has guaranteed to pay any deficiency in the event of the winding up of APL under certain provision of the Corporations Act 2001 . APL has also given a similar guarantee in the event that SEAL is wound up. \n\n- 103 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9405577654434838, + "doc_id": "9ec95de83c77d6ad0b170538af1a9885b65e0e2425f484bd8c339f09a47f2537", + "edit_distance": 0.04610951008645533, + "f1_score": 0.9589041095890413, + "meteor": 0.9552573537842017, + "precision": 0.9668508287292817, + "pred_md": "With Canada's first and fastest LTE wireless network - the global gold standard in wireless network technology - Rogers makes 'placeshifting' a reality so customers can connect to their communications, information and entertainment from almost anywhere, easily and seamlessly. With Rogers, watching TV on the train, conducting a virtual white-boarding session from the beach, disarming a home monitoring system from a smartphone, or answering a home phone from 5,000 kilometers away are becoming everyday activities. Rogers customers no longer have to pick up the phone to check their voicemail; they don't need to be in town to catch their local news; and they don't have to be at their PCs to access their e-mail. And with Rogers, businesses no longer need to work in traditional offices because we help them to quickly set up virtual workspaces, with complete access to customers, colleagues, files and corporate applications, so they are as productive on the road as they are in the office.\n\nAnd now, small businesses as well as households can enjoy the flexibility and value of Rogers new Wireless Home and Small Business Phone products as well.\n\nCustomers know that Rogers makes it easy and seamless to connect with the same personalized information, communications and entertainment experiences no matter where they are - at work, at school, at home or away, including when travelling to more than 200 countries around the world. And they know that only Rogers is there first with innovative new services, such as mobile TV, remote home monitoring, and Rogers One Number, which allows them to switch calls between their wireless device, computer, and home phone without interruption; manage e-mails, text messages and voicemail; hold live video chats; and combine and sync contacts from across multiple devices - no matter where they are.\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 07", + "recall": 0.9510869565217391, + "true_md": "With Canada’s first and fastest LTE wireless network – the global gold standard in wireless network technology – Rogers makes “place- shifting” a reality so customers can connect to their communications, information and entertainment from almost anywhere, easily and seamlessly. With Rogers, watching TV on the train, conducting a virtual white-boarding session from the beach, disarming a home monitoring system from a smartphone, or answering a home phone from 5,000 kilometers away are becoming everyday activities. Rogers customers no longer have to pick up the phone to check their voicemail; they don’t need to be in town to catch their local news; and they don’t have to be at their PCs to access their e-mail. And with Rogers, businesses no longer need to work in traditional offices because we help them to quickly set up virtual workspaces, with complete access to customers, colleagues, files and corporate applications, so they are as productive on the road as they are in the office.\n\nAnd now, small businesses as well as households can enjoy the flexibility and value of Rogers new Wireless Home and Small Business Phone products as well.\n\nCustomers know that Rogers makes it easy and seamless to connect with the same personalized information, communications and entertainment experiences no matter where they are – at work, at school, at home or away, including when travelling to more than 200 countries around the world. And they know that only Rogers is there first with innovative new services, such as mobile TV, remote home monitoring, and Rogers One Number, which allows them to switch calls between their wireless device, computer, and home phone without interruption; manage e-mails, text messages and voicemail; hold live video chats; and combine and sync contacts from across multiple devices – no matter where they are.\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 07" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8237626864800492, + "doc_id": "0dbe16de358ab0e1e6f6a7bee35ac4d9694d39435697771117d054e79da22bb1", + "edit_distance": 0.5304568527918782, + "f1_score": 0.9220779220779222, + "meteor": 0.8149535939894124, + "precision": 0.9015873015873016, + "pred_md": "## Compliance at SMBC\n\n## Strengthening the Compliance System\n\nTo be in compliance with laws, regulations, and other social standards is basically and generally required for all corporations. Especially for banks, compliance-related issues are particularly important as their public missions and corporate social responsibilities are considered critical in the financial markets.\n\nIn accordance with the basic policies of SMFG, SMBC requires its management and staff to have the highest values to gain public trust, abide by relevant laws and regulations, uphold high ethical standards, and act fairly and sincerely. Therefore, SMBC considers that being fully in compliance is one of the most critical issues for management to appropriately deal with the issues related to the Banking Law, the Financial Instruments and Exchange Act, compliance with other related ordinances, and elimination of anti-social organizations.\n\n## Management of the Compliance System\n\nSMBC adopts a two-tiered structure as its basic compliance system as follows. At the first level, each department and office is individually responsible for making preliminary decisions to ensure that its conduct is in compliance with laws and regulations. At the next level, the independent Internal Audit Unit conducts strict audits of such departments or offices.\n\nIn order to maintain this two-tiered structure and ensure its effective operation, the Compliance Unit, made up of the General Affairs Department and the Legal Department, plans and implements the kind of systems and improvements to be in compliance, under the directions of the management. The Compliance Unit also provides guidance for and monitors the activities of all departments and branches, and assists such departments and branches to make appropriate compliancerelated decisions.\n\nSMBC commits to the following activities to ensure that such compliance structure functions effectively.\n\n## Preparation of a Compliance Manual\n\nSMBC has prepared its Compliance Manual by stating the objectives, guidance and 60 compliance principles in order to assist the management and staff to be fully in compliance. This manual has been approved by the Board of Directors.\n\n## Development of Compliance Programs\n\nThe Board of Directors develops a specific annual plan for compliance-related activities for each fiscal year, including amendments to the rules and regulations and training, for the objectives of the compliance system for SMBC and its consolidated subsidiaries to function effectively. During the fiscal year 2011, SMBC will continue to strengthen its compliance measures in order to quickly adapt to any changes in the social environment. Such measures include strengthening the monitoring of marketing and sales of risk products, appropriately managing conflicts of interest as the cooperation among Group\n\ncompanies intensify further, responding to amendments to the Act on Prevention of Transfer of Criminal Proceeds, further strengthening measures to eliminate transactions associated with anti-social organizations, and strengthening the overseas compliance measures appropriate for the growing overseas operation and further strengthened regulations of each country.\n\n## Appointment of Compliance Officers\n\nIn addition to appointing compliance officers to each branch and department of the bank, the 'Area Compliance Officers,' who independently function from frontline departments, are appointed for the Middle Market Banking Unit and Consumer Banking Unit to direct and oversee compliance activities at the branches and offices.\n\n## Creation of the Compliance Committee\n\nThe Compliance Committee, which consists of crossdepartmental compliance members, chaired by the director in charge of compliance, has been created in order to comprehensively review and discuss compliance related issues. To enhance fair and objective deliberations by the Compliance Committee, outside members are also invited to participate in such Compliance Committee meetings.\n\nFor the handling of any complaints from and conflicts with our clients, SMBC has executed agreements, respectively, with the Japanese Bankers Association, a designated dispute resolution agency under the Banking Act, and the Trust Companies Association of Japan, a Designated Dispute Resolution Organization under the Trust Business Act and Act on Provision, etc. of Trust Business by Financial Institutions.\n\nJapanese Bankers Association:\n\nContact information: Consultation office,\n\nJapanese Bankers Association\n\nTelephone numbers: (Japan) 0570-017109 or 03-5252-3772\n\nBusiness hours:\n\nMonday through Friday 9:00 am to 5:00 pm\n\n(except public and bank holidays)\n\nTrust Companies Association of Japan:\n\nContact information: Consultation office, Trust Companies Association of Japan\n\nTelephone numbers: (Japan) 0120-817335 or 03-3241-7335\n\nBusiness hours:\n\nMonday through Friday (except public and bank holidays) 9:00 am to 5:15 pm\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n53", + "recall": 0.9435215946843853, + "true_md": "SMFG 2011 53\n\n## Compliance at SMBC\n\n## Strengthening the Compliance System\n\n## Appointment of Compliance Officers\n\n## Creation of the Compliance Committee\n\n## Management of the Compliance System\n\n## Development of Compliance Programs\n\n## Preparation of a Compliance Manual\n\nTo be in compliance with laws, regulations, and other social standards is basically and generally required for all corporations. Especially for banks, compliance-related issues are particularly important as their public missions and corporate social respon- sibilities are considered critical in the financial markets.\n\nIn accordance with the basic policies of SMFG, SMBC requires its management and staff to have the highest values to gain public trust, abide by relevant laws and regulations, uphold high ethical standards, and act fairly and sincerely. Therefore, SMBC considers that being fully in compliance is one of the most critical issues for management to appropriately deal with the issues related to the Banking Law, the Financial Instruments and Exchange Act, compliance with other related ordinances, and elimination of anti-social organizations.\n\nSMBC adopts a two-tiered structure as its basic compliance system as follows. At the first level, each department and office is individually responsible for making preliminary decisions to ensure that its conduct is in compliance with laws and regula- tions. At the next level, the independent Internal Audit Unit con- ducts strict audits of such departments or offices.\n\nIn order to maintain this two-tiered structure and ensure its effective operation, the Compliance Unit, made up of the General Affairs Department and the Legal Department, plans and implements the kind of systems and improvements to be in compliance, under the directions of the management. The Compliance Unit also provides guidance for and monitors the activities of all departments and branches, and assists such departments and branches to make appropriate compliance- related decisions.\n\nSMBC commits to the following activities to ensure that such compliance structure functions effectively.\n\ncompanies intensify further, responding to amendments to the Act on Prevention of Transfer of Criminal Proceeds, further strengthening measures to eliminate transactions associated with anti-social organizations, and strengthening the overseas compliance measures appropriate for the growing overseas operation and further strengthened regulations of each country.\n\nIn addition to appointing compliance officers to each branch and department of the bank, the “Area Compliance Officers,” who independently function from frontline departments, are appointed for the Middle Market Banking Unit and Consumer Banking Unit to direct and oversee compliance activities at the branches and offices.\n\nThe Compliance Committee, which consists of cross- departmental compliance members, chaired by the director in charge of compliance, has been created in order to com- prehensively review and discuss compliance related issues. To enhance fair and objective deliberations by the Compliance Committee, outside members are also invited to participate in such Compliance Committee meetings.\n\nSMBC has prepared its Compliance Manual by stating the objectives, guidance and 60 compliance principles in order to assist the management and staff to be fully in compliance. This manual has been approved by the Board of Directors.\n\nThe Board of Directors develops a specific annual plan for compliance-related activities for each fiscal year, including amendments to the rules and regulations and training, for the objectives of the compliance system for SMBC and its con- solidated subsidiaries to function effectively. During the fiscal year 2011, SMBC will continue to strengthen its compliance measures in order to quickly adapt to any changes in the social environment. Such measures include strengthening the moni- toring of marketing and sales of risk products, appropriately managing conflicts of interest as the cooperation among Group \n\nFor the handling of any complaints from and conflicts with our clients, SMBC has executed agreements, respectively, with the Japanese Bankers Association, a designated dispute resolution agency under the Banking Act, and the Trust Companies Association of Japan, a Designated Dispute Resolution Organization under the Trust Business Act and Act on Provision, etc. of Trust Business by Financial Institutions.\n\nJapanese Bankers Association:\n\nTrust Companies Association of Japan:" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9156170895338536, + "doc_id": "8c98bf45ed0a19437945e9f5a5d6bac668507a78a37f0ebf8ad433a75a1cfb0c", + "edit_distance": 0.5445544554455446, + "f1_score": 0.9834254143646409, + "meteor": 0.9226192772459367, + "precision": 0.9834254143646409, + "pred_md": "SMFG\n\nCapital Ratio Information\n\n## 2. Credit Equivalent Amounts\n\n## (1) Derivative Transactions and Long Settlement Transactions\n\n## A. Calculation Method\n\nCurrent exposure method\n\n## B. Credit Equivalent Amounts\n\n## (2) Notional Principal Amounts of Credit Derivatives\n\n## Credit Default Swaps\n\nNote: 'Notional principal amount' is defined as the total of 'amounts subject to calculation of credit equivalents' and 'amounts employed for CRM.'\n\n## ■ Securitization Exposures\n\n## 1. Risk Management Policy and Procedures\n\nDefinition of securitization exposure has been clarified in order to properly identify, measure, evaluate and report risks, and a risk management department, independent of business units, has been established to centrally manage risks from recognizing securitization exposures to measuring, evaluating and reporting credit risk-weighted assets.\n\nThe Group takes one of the following positions in securitization transactions.\n\n- GLYPH<129> Originator (a direct or indirect originator of underlying assets or a sponsor of an ABCP conduit or a similar program that acquires exposures from third-party entities)\n- GLYPH<129> Investor\n- GLYPH<129> Others (for example, provider of swap for preventing a mismatch between the dividend on trust beneficiary rights and cash flows generated by underlying assets on which the rights are issued)\n\n## 2. Credit Risk-Weighted Asset Calculation Methodology\n\nThere are three methods of calculating the credit risk-weighted asset amount of securitization exposures subject to the IRB approach: the ratings-based approach, the supervisory formula, and the internal assessment approach. The methods are used as follows.\n\n- GLYPH<129> First, securitization exposures are examined and the ratings-based approach is applied to qualifying exposures.\n- GLYPH<129> The remaining exposures are examined and the supervisory formula is applied to qualifying exposures.\n- GLYPH<129> The remaining exposures are deducted from capital.\n\nThe credit risk-weighted asset amount for securitization exposures subject to the standardized approach is calculated mostly using ratings\n\npublished by qualifying rating agencies or based on weighted average risk weights of underlying assets as stipulated in the Notification.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n192", + "recall": 0.9834254143646409, + "true_md": "SMFG\n\nCapital Ratio Information\n\n## 2. Credit Equivalent Amounts\n\n## B. Credit Equivalent Amounts\n\n## A. Calculation Method\n\n(1) Derivative Transactions and Long Settlement Transactions\n\nCurrent exposure method\n\n## (2) Notional Principal Amounts of Credit Derivatives Credit Default Swaps\n\n## ■ Securitization Exposures\n\n## 1. Risk Management Policy and Procedures\n\nDefinition of securitization exposure has been clarified in order to properly identify, measure, evaluate and report risks, and a risk management department, independent of business units, has been established to centrally manage risks from recognizing securitization exposures to measuring, evaluating and reporting credit risk-weighted assets.\n\nThe Group takes one of the following positions in securitization transactions.\n\n There are three methods of calculating the credit risk-weighted asset amount of securitization exposures subject to the IRB approach: the ratings-based approach, the supervisory formula, and the internal assessment approach. The methods are used as follows.\n\nThe credit risk-weighted asset amount for securitization exposures subject to the standardized approach is calculated mostly using ratings published by qualifying rating agencies or based on weighted average risk weights of underlying assets as stipulated in the Notification.\n\n- GLYPH<129> Originator (a direct or indirect originator of underlying assets or a sponsor of an ABCP conduit or a similar program that acquires exposures from third-party entities)\n\n- GLYPH<129> Investor\n\n- GLYPH<129> Others (for example, provider of swap for preventing a mismatch between the dividend on trust beneficiary rights and cash flows generated by underlying assets on which the rights are issued)\n\n- GLYPH<129> First, securitization exposures are examined and the ratings-based approach is applied to qualifying exposures.\n\n- GLYPH<129> The remaining exposures are examined and the supervisory formula is applied to qualifying exposures.\n\n- GLYPH<129> The remaining exposures are deducted from capital.\n\n## 2. Credit Risk-Weighted Asset Calculation Methodology\n\nSMFG 2011 192\n\nNote: “Notional principal amount” is defined as the total of “amounts subject to calculation of credit equivalents” and “amounts employed for CRM.”" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9441793315625259, + "doc_id": "4ff9c0fdb3d3d14bd567b6670b284425c11fc5dfb8fbc980adbabcd3bcb1039d", + "edit_distance": 0.116751269035533, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9973784299467893, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nSMFG\n\n- (c) Dividends to be paid in the fiscal year ending March 31, 2012\n\nDate of resolution: Ordinary general meeting of shareholders held on June 29, 2011\n\n## 27. Cash Flows\n\n## Fiscal year ended March 31, 2011\n\nSignificant non-money transactions\n\nCedyna Financial Corporation and 8 other companies were newly consolidated through a third-party allotment of new shares issued by the company. Their major assets and liabilities are as follows:\n\n## Fiscal year ended March 31, 2010\n\n- (1) Reconciliation of the opening balance and the net cash payment for acquisition with respect to acquisition of 18 companies including Nikko Cordial Securities Inc. is as follows:\n\n- (2) The major assets and liabilities which were acquired due to a merger between Kansai Urban Banking Corporation and The Biwako Bank, Limited are as follows:\n\n- (3) QUOQ Inc. and 1 other company were excluded from the scope of consolidation due to a merger with OMC Card, Inc. Their major assets and liabilities are as follows:\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n95", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nSMFG\n\n(c) Dividends to be paid in the fiscal year ending March 31, 2012\n\nDate of resolution: Ordinary general meeting of shareholders held on June 29, 2011\n\n## 27. Cash Flows\n\nCedyna Financial Corporation and 8 other companies were newly consolidated through a third-party allotment of new shares issued by the company. Their major assets and liabilities are as follows:\n\nFiscal year ended March 31, 2011\n\nSignificant non-money transactions\n\nFiscal year ended March 31, 2010\n\n- (1) Reconciliation of the opening balance and the net cash payment for acquisition with respect to acquisition of 18 companies including Nikko Cordial Securities Inc. is as follows:\n\n- (2) The major assets and liabilities which were acquired due to a merger between Kansai Urban Banking Corporation and The Biwako Bank, Limited are as follows:\n\n- (3) QUOQ Inc. and 1 other company were excluded from the scope of consolidation due to a merger with OMC Card, Inc. Their major assets and liabilities are as follows:\n\nSMFG 2011 95" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.21709559809625478, + "doc_id": "128509ddbb8f43e4c9f83dea5944f278d16e3bb4ce1199e2163c80cb66a3ab99", + "edit_distance": 0.7913669064748201, + "f1_score": 0.44755244755244755, + "meteor": 0.6978870493950042, + "precision": 0.3076923076923077, + "pred_md": "## asset portfolio\n\n## Apartment Portfolio\n\n18\n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013\n\nMoncton, NB\n\n## St. John's, NL\n\n## Charlottetown, PE\n\n198 Spring Park Road\n\n2006\n\n32\n\n27 Longworth Avenue\n\n1983\n\n24\n\n280 Shakespeare Drive\n\n2010\n\n26\n\n319-323 Shakespeare Drive\n\n2004\n\n22\n\n36 Westridge Crescent\n\n1985\n\n8\n\n505-525 University Avenue\n\n2003\n\n35\n\nBridlewood Apartments\n\n1998/99\n\n66\n\nBrowns Court\n\n1997\n\n52\n\nBrighton House\n\n2013\n\n47\n\nBurns/University\n\n2003\n\n95\n\nCharlotte Court\n\n2011\n\n49\n\nCountry Place\n\n1998/02\n\n39\n\nDesBarres House\n\n1978\n\n51\n\nDucks Landing\n\n2005/12\n\n138\n\nHorton Park\n\n1987\n\n69\n\nKensington Court\n\n1990\n\n105\n\nQueen Street\n\n1978\n\n48\n\nCharlottetown Total\n\n906\n\n## Charlottetown Average Rent\n\n$878\n\n## London, ON\n\n180 Mill Street (2)\n\n2011\n\n127\n\nRichmond Hill Apartments\n\n2009\n\n137\n\nLondon Total\n\n264\n\nLondon Average Rent\n\n$1,632", + "recall": 0.8205128205128205, + "true_md": "## asset portfolio\n\n## Moncton, NB 100 Archibald Street\n\n## St. John’s, NL Bennett House\n\n## Charlottetown, PE 198 Spring Park Road\n\n## London, ON 180 Mill Street (2)\n\n18 Killam ProPerties inc | 2013\n\n## Apartment Portfolio Halifax,NS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8268341435187753, + "doc_id": "6dfd1c0c7f2ad130d3a4ceb626be26ae0967dff537cd8ed821bf3d575b2ce867", + "edit_distance": 0.5863095238095238, + "f1_score": 0.9258160237388723, + "meteor": 0.8874490720443982, + "precision": 0.8914285714285715, + "pred_md": "6\n\nTHE WOODLANDS, TEXAS\n\nTHE WOODLANDS, TEXAS\n\n' Just visited the first Nordstrom in Canada. Well done. It's a fantastic store. '\n\nOUR CUSTOMER, ROB\n\nOH, CANADA! BY 2017, WE'LL HAVE SIX STORES IN CANADAFROM VANCOUVER TO OTTAWA.\n\nOH, CANADA! BY 2017, WE'LL HAVE SIX STORES IN CANADAFROM VANCOUVER TO OTTAWA.\n\ncustomer experience that will allow us to evolve with our customers in the years to come. In January 2015, the Retail Design Institute recognized Nordstrom The Woodlands with First Place for a New or Remodeled Department Store and Innovation in Store Planning. We appreciate their recognition, but the true measure of success will come from our customers' experiences in our new stores.\n\nIn addition to our two new stores in Canada this year, we'll also open stores in Puerto Rico, Milwaukee and a second store in Minneapolis, which has long been a terrific market for us.\n\nWe are also mindful of serving customers better through product, speed and convenience. Expanded merchandise selection and growing customer adoption of mobile shopping are two factors contributing to the\n\ncontinued growth of Nordstrom.com. First, we've expanded Nordstrom.com selection by three times from three years ago, so customers have greater choice of their favorite brands. Second, a great mobile experience is a vital link to many customers, and we are working hard behind the scenes to improve this experience. We have enhanced our mobile app with localized inventory and personalized homepage features, and more features are coming this year.\n\nWe are also opening a fulfillment center in Elizabethtown, Pennsylvania, in 2015 that, when combined with our fulfillment center in Cedar Rapids, Iowa, and our Nordstromrack.com/HauteLook fulfillment center in San Bernardino, California, will greatly increase our capabilities.\n\nThese fulfillment centers will allow us", + "recall": 0.9629629629629629, + "true_md": "“ Just visited the first Nordstrom in Canada. Well done. It’s a fantastic store. ” OUR CUSTOMER, ROB\n\n” OUR CUSTOMER, ROB\n\ncustomer experience that will allow us to evolve with our customers in the years to come. In January 2015, the Retail Design Institute recognized Nordstrom The Woodlands with First Place for a New or Remodeled Department Store and Innovation in Store Planning. We appreciate their recognition, but the true measure of success will come from our customers’ experiences in our new stores.\n\ncontinued growth of Nordstrom.com. First, we’ve expanded Nordstrom.com selection by three times from three years ago, so customers have greater choice of their favorite brands. Second, a great mobile experience is a vital link to many customers, and we are working hard behind the scenes to improve this experience. We have enhanced our mobile app with localized inventory and personalized homepage features, and more features are coming this year. \n\nIn addition to our two new stores in Canada this year, we’ll also open stores in Puerto Rico, Milwaukee and a second store in Minneapolis, which has long been a terrific market for us.\n\nWe are also mindful of serving customers better through product, speed and convenience. Expanded merchandise selection and growing customer adoption of mobile shopping are two factors contributing to the \n\nWe are also opening a fulfillment center in Elizabethtown, Pennsylvania, in 2015 that, when combined with our fulfillment center in Cedar Rapids, Iowa, and our Nordstromrack.com/HauteLook fulfillment center in San Bernardino, California, will greatly increase our capabilities. These fulfillment centers will allow us \n\n6\n\nTHE WOODLANDS, TEXAS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7597297669796814, + "doc_id": "3364d73ebe146eba6b6f7d420c41b559d590cdc636c827a478870db2acf11a65", + "edit_distance": 1.0, + "f1_score": 0.9183673469387754, + "meteor": 0.8905029296875, + "precision": 0.9375, + "pred_md": "Dale noseworthy Vice president investor relations and corporate planning\n\nerin Cleveland Vice president Finance\n\nJeremy Jackson Vice president marketing\n\nrobert richardson executive Vice president & chief Financial officer\n\nMichael Mclean Vice president Development\n\n## 2013 Financial & operating Highlights\n\n+ 5.6 % Property Revenue Growth\n\n+ 1 .8 Same Store Revenue Growth\n\n%\n\n96.3 %\n\nApartment Occupancy at December 31, 2013", + "recall": 0.9, + "true_md": "## management team\n\n## 2013 Financial & operating Highlights\n\n+ 5.6 % Property Revenue Growth\n\n+ 1.8 % Same Store Revenue Growth\n\n9 6.3 % Apartment Occupancy at December 31, 2013\n\nDale noseworthy Vice president investor relations and corporate planning\n\nJeremy Jackson Vice president marketing\n\nrobert richardson executive Vice president & chief Financial officer\n\nMichael Mclean Vice president Development\n\nerin Cleveland Vice president Finance" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9267943686184666, + "doc_id": "f989c6f6eb57d0ed1793e457226abb811d9f36652268309686792f1b4aac3f44", + "edit_distance": 0.17721518987341772, + "f1_score": 0.9734513274336283, + "meteor": 0.9414444617920995, + "precision": 0.9821428571428571, + "pred_md": "## Share Rights Held by Key Management Personnel\n\nDetails of each grant of share rights included in the Key Management Personnel remuneration tables on previous pages are noted in the following tables.\n\nThe percentage of rights grants to Key Management Personnel on issue that have vested and the percentage that was forfeited because the person did not meet the service or performance criteria is set out below:\n\nDirectors' Report\n\ncontinued\n\nu", + "recall": 0.9649122807017544, + "true_md": "Directors’ Report 59\n\nDirectors’ Report\n\ncontinued u\n\n## Share Rights Held by Key Management Personnel\n\nDetails of each grant of share rights included in the Key Management Personnel remuneration tables on previous pages are noted in the following tables. \n\nThe percentage of rights grants to Key Management Personnel on issue that have vested and the percentage that was forfeited because the person did not meet the service or performance criteria is set out below:" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8262795807748236, + "doc_id": "5a6688d813c1b084dec0ad5c7b566e8ec7bfb1f623163b0e468e9110a482940f", + "edit_distance": 0.1875, + "f1_score": 0.9382716049382716, + "meteor": 0.9098086880037815, + "precision": 0.9382716049382716, + "pred_md": "## (4) Analysis of Actual Losses\n\n## A. Year-on-Year Comparison of Actual Losses\n\nSMFG recorded total credit costs (the total of the general reserve, non-performing loan write-offs, and gains on collection of written-off claims) of ¥217.3 billion on a consolidated basis for fiscal year 2010, a decrease of ¥255.7 billion compared to the previous fiscal year.\n\nSMBC recorded ¥94.3 billion in total credit costs on a non-consolidated basis in fiscal year 2010, a decrease of ¥160.4 billion compared to the previous fiscal year. By exposure category, the credit cost for 'corporate exposures' decreased by ¥144.7 billion compared to the previous year, to ¥71.9 billion. The credit cost for 'bank exposures' decreased by ¥17.5 billion compared to the previous year, to ¥(14.0) billion. These results are primarily due to the measures taken by SMBC to improve the business and financial conditions of borrowers according to the circumstances of each borrower, and a partial reversal of the loan-loss reserve.\n\n## Total Credit Costs\n\nNotes: 1. The above amounts do not include gains/losses on 'equity exposures,' 'exposures on capital market-driven transactions (such as bonds)' and 'exposures under Article 145 of the Notification' that were recognized as gains/losses on bonds and stocks in the statements of income.\n\n- 2. Exposure category amounts do not include general reserve for Normal Borrowers.\n- 3. Bracketed fiscal year amounts indicate gains generated by the reversal of reserve, etc.\n- 4. Credit costs for 'Residential mortgage exposures' and 'QRRE' guaranteed by consolidated subsidiaries are not included in the total credit costs of SMBC (nonconsolidated).\n\n## B. Comparison of Estimated and Actual Losses\n\nNotes: 1. Amounts on consumer loans guaranteed by consolidated subsidiaries or affiliates as well as on 'equity exposures' and 'exposures under Article 145 of the Notification' are excluded.\n\n- 2. 'Estimated loss amounts' are the EL at the beginning of the term.\n- 3. 'After deduction of reserves' represents the estimated loss amounts after deduction of reserves for possible losses on substandard borrowers or below.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\nCapital Ratio Information\n\nSMFG\n\n189", + "recall": 0.9382716049382716, + "true_md": "SMFG Capital Ratio Information\n\n## (4) Analysis of Actual Losses\n\n## A. Year-on-Year Comparison of Actual Losses\n\nSMFG recorded total credit costs (the total of the general reserve, non-performing loan write-offs, and gains on collection of written-off claims) of ¥217.3 billion on a consolidated basis for fiscal year 2010, a decrease of ¥255.7 billion compared to the previous fiscal year.\n\nSMBC recorded ¥94.3 billion in total credit costs on a non-consolidated basis in fiscal year 2010, a decrease of ¥160.4 billion com- pared to the previous fiscal year. By exposure category, the credit cost for “corporate exposures” decreased by ¥144.7 billion compared to the previous year, to ¥71.9 billion. The credit cost for “bank exposures” decreased by ¥17.5 billion compared to the previous year, to ¥(14.0) billion. These results are primarily due to the measures taken by SMBC to improve the business and financial conditions of borrowers according to the circumstances of each borrower, and a partial reversal of the loan-loss reserve.\n\nNotes: 1. The above amounts do not include gains/losses on “equity exposures,” “exposures on capital market-driven transactions (such as bonds)” and “exposures under Article 145 of the Notification” that were recognized as gains/losses on bonds and stocks in the statements of income.\n\n2. Exposure category amounts do not include general reserve for Normal Borrowers.\n\n3. Bracketed fiscal year amounts indicate gains generated by the reversal of reserve, etc.\n\n4. Credit costs for “Residential mortgage exposures” and “QRRE” guaranteed by consolidated subsidiaries are not included in the total credit costs of SMBC (nonconsolidated).\n\nNotes: 1. Amounts on consumer loans guaranteed by consolidated subsidiaries or affiliates as well as on “equity exposures” and “exposures under Article 145 of the Notification” are excluded.\n\n2. “Estimated loss amounts” are the EL at the beginning of the term.\n\n3. “After deduction of reserves” represents the estimated loss amounts after deduction of reserves for possible losses on substandard borrowers or below.\n\n## Total Credit Costs\n\nSMFG 2011 189\n\n## B. Comparison of Estimated and Actual Losses" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8714686099945068, + "doc_id": "f506e4692e3d2f686b55f35712574b0eb72e23a666743e910574e99d5e08cb54", + "edit_distance": 0.07692307692307693, + "f1_score": 0.9464285714285714, + "meteor": 0.9759759587602388, + "precision": 0.9464285714285714, + "pred_md": "79\n\nNotes to the Financial Statements\n\nNotes to the Financial Statements\n\n- (i) ax benefit on the impairment of Challenger Gold Project amounts to $20,600,000. The impairment of Challenger Gold Project after tax is $291,300,000. Impairment charge T includes property, plant, and equipment $64,897,000, mine properties $239,848,000, and exploration and evaluation $7,105,000 (refer Notes 12 and 13). The tax benefit relating to the impairment has not been recognised in the financial statements.\n\ncontinued\n\nu", + "recall": 0.9464285714285714, + "true_md": "Notes to the Financial Statements 79\n\nNotes t o the Financial Statements\n\n(i) Tax benefit on the impairment of Challenger Gold Project amounts to $20,600,000. The impairment of Challenger Gold Project after tax is $291,300,000. Impairment charge includes property, plant, and equipment $64,897,000, mine properties $239,848,000, and exploration and evaluation $7,105,000 (refer Notes 12 and 13). The tax benefit relating to the impairment has not been recognised in the financial statements.\n\ncontinued u" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9199838635342763, + "doc_id": "a2380b506d9a42febca6c16a1c82c3db6b843054acfe6ba2f688d4837da115fb", + "edit_distance": 0.059574468085106386, + "f1_score": 0.9448818897637795, + "meteor": 0.9619708854801838, + "precision": 0.96, + "pred_md": "20\n\nOperations Report\n\nu\n\n## Challenger Gold Mine\n\n## South Australia\n\n## Summary\n\n35° The Challenger Mine produced 66,216 ounces of gold for the year with an average milled grade of 3.91 grams per tonne (g/t), and a total cash cost of $1,107 per ounce. The grade was low due to a shortfall in ore supply from the mine that was supplemented by low grade ore from stockpiles. Higher dilution in stopes at the base of the mine and depletion on those levels due to the additional displacement of the ore horizons following the identification of the '215 Shear', contributed to the lower than expected production from the lower levels. A shortfall in underground development also limited access to ore sources.\n\nDevelopment and mining commenced at the higher grade Challenger West orebody during the year but was insufficient to offset the shortfall from the base of the mine.\n\nBecause of the poor ore recovery from the bottom of the mine and the drop in the gold price, a strategic review of the mine operation was carried out. This resulted in a new plan that focuses on the higher grade Challenger West as the main ore supply.\n\nOngoing improvements in site communications continued with the installation of a dedicated microwave link to the site. This greatly improves", + "recall": 0.9302325581395349, + "true_md": "20 Operations Report\n\n## Challenger Gold Mine\n\n## Summary\n\nSouth Australia\n\n35° The Challenger Mine produced 66,216 ounces of gold for the year with an average milled grade of 3.91 grams per tonne (g/t), and a total cash cost of $1,107 per ounce. The grade was low due to a shortfall in ore supply from the mine that was supplemented by low grade ore from stockpiles. Higher dilution in stopes at the base of the mine and depletion on those levels due to the addi- tional displacement of the ore horizons following the identification of the ‘215 Shear’, contributed to the lower than expected production from the lower levels. A shortfall in underground develop- ment also limited access to ore sources.\n\nDevelopment and mining commenced at the higher grade Challenger West orebody during the year but was insufficient to offset the short- fall from the base of the mine.\n\nBecause of the poor ore recovery from the bottom of the mine and the drop in the gold price, a strategic review of the mine operation was carried out. This resulted in a new plan that focuses on the higher grade Challenger West as the main ore supply.\n\nOngoing improvements in site communications continued with the installation of a dedicated microwave link to the site. This greatly improves" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.821165742029716, + "doc_id": "f42586f9756f51d2b7151be2482351143d96970b23cfed8e1b1cbbda8cacd7fa", + "edit_distance": 0.21585903083700442, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.8358442223129435, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Nordstrom, Inc.\n\n## Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nDollar and share amounts in millions except per share, per option and per unit amounts\n\n## Benefit Obligations and Funded Status\n\nOur benefit obligation and funded status is as follows:\n\nThe accumulated benefit obligation, which is the present value of benefits, assuming no future compensation changes, was $197 and $162 at the end of 2014 and 2013. 2014 includes an actuarial loss of $36 driven by decreased interest rates and updated mortality rates, and will be amortized over the average remaining future service years.\n\nAmounts recognized as liabilities in the Consolidated Balance Sheets consist of the following:\n\n## Components of SERP Expense\n\nThe components of SERP expense recognized in the Consolidated Statements of Earnings are as follows:\n\nAmounts not yet reflected in SERP expense and included in accumulated other comprehensive loss (pre-tax) consist of the following:\n\nIn 2015, we expect $10 of costs currently in accumulated other comprehensive loss to be recognized as components of SERP expense.\n\nNordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 51", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Nordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 51\n\nNordstrom, Inc. Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements Dollar and share amounts in millions except per share, per option and per unit amounts\n\n## Benefit Obligations and Funded Status Our benefit obligation and funded status is as follows:\n\nBenefit Obligations and Funded Status Our benefit obligation and funded status is as follows:\n\nThe accumulated benefit obligation, which is the present value of benefits, assuming no future compensation changes, was $197 and $162 at the end of 2014 and 2013. 2014 includes an actuarial loss of $36 driven by decreased interest rates and updated mortality rates, and will be amortized over the average remaining future service years.\n\nAmounts recognized as liabilities in the Consolidated Balance Sheets consist of the following:\n\nComponents of SERP Expense The components of SERP expense recognized in the Consolidated Statements of Earnings are as follows:\n\n## Components of SERP Expense The components of SERP expense recognized in the Consolidated Statements of Earnings are as follows:\n\nAmounts not yet reflected in SERP expense and included in accumulated other comprehensive loss (pre-tax) consist of the following:\n\nIn 2015, we expect $10 of costs currently in accumulated other comprehensive loss to be recognized as components of SERP expense." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8966389598756626, + "doc_id": "dfa702cc2246e0e3cc49a06348d99be80e28a4b2bd3d893d1c6a9eae295cbd98", + "edit_distance": 0.6095617529880478, + "f1_score": 0.9826302729528535, + "meteor": 0.8614531581236695, + "precision": 0.9753694581280788, + "pred_md": "The table below shows our net pension expense for the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012. Net interest cost is included in finance costs and other pension expenses are included in the salaries and benefits expense in the consolidated statements of income.\n\nNet interest cost, a component of the plan cost above is included in finance costs and is outlined as follows.\n\nThe remeasurement recognized in other comprehensive income, is determined as follows.\n\nWe also provide supplemental unfunded pension benefits to certain executives. The table below includes our accrued benefit obligations, pension expense included in employee salaries and benefits, net interest cost and other comprehensive income.\n\nCertain subsidiaries have defined contribution plans with total pension expense of $2 million in 2013 (2012 - $2 million), which is included in employee salaries and benefits expense.\n\n## Assumptions\n\nThere are significant assumptions that are used in the calculations provided by our actuaries, and it is the responsibility of management to determine which assumptions could result in a significant impact when determining the accrued benefit obligations and pension expense.\n\nPrincipal Actuarial Assumptions\n\n## Sensitivity of Key Assumptions\n\nIn the sensitivity analysis shown below, we determine the defined benefit obligation using the same method used to calculate the defined benefit obligation we recognize in the consolidated statements of financial position. We calculate sensitivity by changing one assumption while holding the others constant. The actual change in defined benefit obligation will likely be different from that shown in the table, since it is likely that more than one assumption will change at a time, and that some assumptions are correlated.\n\n## Allocation of Plan Assets\n\nPlan assets consist primarily of pooled funds that invest in common stocks and bonds. The pooled Canadian equity funds has investments in our equity securities. As a result, approximately $3 million (2012 -$2 million) of the plans' assets are indirectly invested in our own equity securities.\n\nWe make contributions to the plans to secure the benefits of plan members and invest in permitted investments using the target ranges established by our Pension Committee, which reviews actuarial assumptions on an annual basis.\n\nThe table below shows the actual contributions to the plans for the years ended December 31:\n\nWe estimate our 2014 employer contributions to be $96 million. The average duration of the defined benefit obligation at December 31, 2013 is 19 years.\n\nActual return on plan assets was $102 million in 2013 (2012 -$75 million).\n\nWe have recognized a cumulative loss in other comprehensive income and retained earnings of $201 million at December 31, 2013 (December 31, 2012 - $299 million).\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC.\n\n119\n\nNOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS", + "recall": 0.99, + "true_md": "The table below shows our net pension expense for the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012. Net interest cost is included in finance costs and other pension expenses are included in the salaries and benefits expense in the consolidated statements of income.\n\nWe also provide supplemental unfunded pension benefits to certain executives. The table below includes our accrued benefit obligations, pension expense included in employee salaries and benefits, net interest cost and other comprehensive income.\n\nCertain subsidiaries have defined contribution plans with total pension expense of $2 million in 2013 (2012 – $2 million), which is included in employee salaries and benefits expense.\n\nThere are significant assumptions that are used in the calculations provided by our actuaries, and it is the responsibility of management to determine which assumptions could result in a significant impact when determining the accrued benefit obligations and pension expense.\n\nWe estimate our 2014 employer contributions to be $96 million. The average duration of the defined benefit obligation at December 31, 2013 is 19 years.\n\nActual return on plan assets was $102 million in 2013 (2012 – $75 million).\n\nWe have recognized a cumulative loss in other comprehensive income and retained earnings of $201 million at December 31, 2013 (December 31, 2012 – $299 million).\n\nThe table below shows the actual contributions to the plans for the years ended December 31:\n\nWe make contributions to the plans to secure the benefits of plan members and invest in permitted investments using the target ranges established by our Pension Committee, which reviews actuarial assumptions on an annual basis.\n\nPlan assets consist primarily of pooled funds that invest in common stocks and bonds. The pooled Canadian equity funds has investments in our equity securities. As a result, approximately $3 million (2012 – $2 million) of the plans’ assets are indirectly invested in our own equity securities.\n\nIn the sensitivity analysis shown below, we determine the defined benefit obligation using the same method used to calculate the defined benefit obligation we recognize in the consolidated statements of financial position. We calculate sensitivity by changing one assumption while holding the others constant. The actual change in defined benefit obligation will likely be different from that shown in the table, since it is likely that more than one assumption will change at a time, and that some assumptions are correlated.\n\n## Sensitivity of Key Assumptions\n\n## Allocation of Plan Assets\n\n## Assumptions\n\n## Principal Actuarial Assumptions\n\nNOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 119\n\nThe remeasurement recognized in other comprehensive income, is determined as follows." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9148958067394566, + "doc_id": "6a0e26835ada64e98d3867e633265916832a2f127ac8501cc2f3bb5c4736717c", + "edit_distance": 0.5206489675516224, + "f1_score": 0.9493243243243242, + "meteor": 0.8790556648480992, + "precision": 0.9689655172413794, + "pred_md": "## 4. Processing Risk\n\nProcessing risk is the possibility of losses arising from negligent processing by employees, accidents, or unauthorized activities.\n\nSMFG recognizes that all operations entail processing risk. We are, therefore, working to raise the level of sophistication of our management of processing risk across the whole Group by ensuring that each branch conducts its own regular investigations of processing risk; minimizing losses in the event of processing errors or negligence by drafting exhaustive contingency plans; and carrying out thorough quantification of the risk under management.\n\nIn the administrative regulations of SMBC, in line with SMFG's Groupwide basic policies for risk management, the basic administrative regulations are defined as 'comprehending the risks and costs of administration and transaction processing, and managing them accordingly,' and 'seeking to raise the quality of administration to deliver high-quality service to customers.' Adding new policies or making major revisions to existing ones for processing risk management requires the approval of both the Management Committee and the Board of Directors.\n\nIn the administrative regulations, SMBC has also defined specific rules for processing risk management. The rules allocate processing risk management tasks among six types of departments: operations planning departments, compliance departments, operations departments, transaction execution departments (primarily front-office departments, branches, and branch service offices), internal audit departments, and the customer support departments. In addition, there is a specialized group within the Operations Planning Department to strengthen administrative procedures throughout the Group.\n\n## 5. System Risk\n\nSystem risk is the possibility of a loss arising from the failure, malfunction, or unauthorized use of computer systems.\n\nSMFG recognizes that reliable computer systems are essential for the effective implementation of management strategy in view of the IT revolution. We strive to minimize system risk by drafting regulations and specific management standards, including a security policy. We also have contingency plans with the goal of minimizing losses in the event of a system failure. The development of such a system risk management system ensures that the Group as a whole is undertaking adequate risk management.\n\nAt SMBC, safety measures are strengthened according to risk assessment based on the Financial Services Agency's Financial Inspection Manual , and the Security Guidelines published by the Center for Financial Industry Information Systems (FISC).\n\nComputer-related trouble at financial institutions now has great potential to impact society, with system risk diversifying owing to advances in IT and expansion of business fields. To prevent any computer system breakdowns, we have taken numerous measures, including constant maintenance of our computer system to ensure steady and uninterrupted operation, duplication of various systems and infrastructures, and the establishment of a disaster-prevention system consisting of computer centers in eastern and western Japan. And to maintain the confidentiality of customer information and prevent information leaks, sensitive information is encrypted, unauthorized external access is blocked, and all known countermeasures to secure data are implemented. There are also contingency plans and training sessions held as necessary to ensure full preparedness in the event of an emergency. To maintain security, countermeasures are revised as new technologies and usage patterns emerge.\n\n## Settlement Risk\n\nSettlement risk is the possibility of a loss arising from a transaction that cannot be settled as planned. Because this risk comprises elements of several types of risk, including credit, liquidity, processing, and system risk, it requires interdisciplinary management.\n\nAt SMBC, the Operations Planning Department is responsible for coordinating the management of settlement risk with the Credit & Investment Planning Department, which oversees credit risk, and the Corporate Risk Management Department, which oversees liquidity risk.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n47", + "recall": 0.9304635761589404, + "true_md": "## 4. Processing Risk\n\n## Settlement Risk\n\n## 5. System Risk\n\nSMFG 2011 47\n\nAt SMBC, safety measures are strengthened according to risk assessment based on the Financial Services Agency’s Financial Inspection Manual , and the Security Guidelines published by the Center for Financial Industry Information Systems (FISC). \n\nSMFG recognizes that reliable computer systems are essential for the effective implementation of management strategy in view of the IT revolution. We strive to minimize system risk by drafting regulations and specific management standards, including a security policy. We also have contingency plans with the goal of minimizing losses in the event of a system failure. The development of such a system risk management system ensures that the Group as a whole is undertaking adequate risk management. \n\nSystem risk is the possibility of a loss arising from the failure, mal- function, or unauthorized use of computer systems. \n\nIn the administrative regulations, SMBC has also defined specific rules for processing risk management. The rules allocate processing risk management tasks among six types of departments: operations planning departments, compliance departments, operations depart- ments, transaction execution departments (primarily front-office departments, branches, and branch service offices), internal audit departments, and the customer support departments. In addi- tion, there is a specialized group within the Operations Planning Department to strengthen administrative procedures throughout the Group.\n\nIn the administrative regulations of SMBC, in line with SMFG’s Groupwide basic policies for risk management, the basic administrative regulations are defined as “comprehending the risks and costs of administration and transaction processing, and managing them accordingly,” and “seeking to raise the quality of administration to deliver high-quality service to customers.” Adding new policies or making major revisions to existing ones for process- ing risk management requires the approval of both the Management Committee and the Board of Directors.\n\nSMFG recognizes that all operations entail processing risk. We are, therefore, working to raise the level of sophistication of our management of processing risk across the whole Group by ensuring that each branch conducts its own regular investigations of processing risk; minimizing losses in the event of processing errors or negligence by drafting exhaustive contingency plans; and carrying out thorough quantification of the risk under management. \n\nProcessing risk is the possibility of losses arising from negligent processing by employees, accidents, or unauthorized activities. \n\nComputer-related trouble at financial institutions now has great potential to impact society, with system risk diversifying owing to advances in IT and expansion of business fields. To prevent any computer system breakdowns, we have taken numerous measures, including constant maintenance of our computer system to ensure steady and uninterrupted operation, duplication of various systems and infrastructures, and the establishment of a disaster-prevention system consisting of computer centers in eastern and western Japan. And to maintain the confidentiality of customer information and prevent information leaks, sensitive information is encrypted, unauthorized external access is blocked, and all known counter- measures to secure data are implemented. There are also contin- gency plans and training sessions held as necessary to ensure full preparedness in the event of an emergency. To maintain security, countermeasures are revised as new technologies and usage pat- terns emerge.\n\nSettlement risk is the possibility of a loss arising from a transaction that cannot be settled as planned. Because this risk comprises ele- ments of several types of risk, including credit, liquidity, processing, and system risk, it requires interdisciplinary management.\n\nAt SMBC, the Operations Planning Department is responsible for coordinating the management of settlement risk with the Credit & Investment Planning Department, which oversees credit risk, and the Corporate Risk Management Department, which oversees liquidity risk." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "ee69cccdc1594fea1aa285b394e1ae259b0533884e6f34c528ba1ddfb2f1d30d", + "edit_distance": 0.8333333333333334, + "f1_score": 0.6666666666666666, + "meteor": 0.7744107744107744, + "precision": 0.5, + "pred_md": "Internal Audit Unit\n\n214\n\nSMFG 2011", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "SMFG 2011 214" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8838443654048354, + "doc_id": "0d76bcb6117d37b51a6a2844386a919231642e29291932258e075c75a4460e3f", + "edit_distance": 0.7551789077212806, + "f1_score": 0.9394495412844037, + "meteor": 0.7294456115435067, + "precision": 0.9411764705882353, + "pred_md": "## Our Vision\n\nTo be the world's leading provider of safety solutions that protect workers when life is on the line. We pursue this vision with an unsurpassed commitment to integrity, customer service and product innovation that creates exceptional value for all MSA stakeholders.\n\n## Business of MSA\n\nMSA is in the business of developing, manufacturing and selling innovative products that enhance the safety and health of workers throughout the world. Critical to MSA's mission is a clear understanding of customer processes and safety needs. MSA dedicates significant resources to research which allows the company to develop a keen understanding of customer safety requirements for a diverse range of markets, including the fire service, law enforcement, construction, public utilities, mining, chemical, petroleum, HVAC, hazardous materials remediation, military, and retail. MSA's principal products, each designed to serve the needs of these target markets, include\n\nrespiratory protective equipment, thermal imaging cameras, gas and flame detection instruments, ballistic helmets, as well as head, eye, face, hearing, and fall protection products.\n\nMSA was founded in 1914 by John T. Ryan and George H. Deike, two mining engineers who had firsthand knowledge of the terrible human loss that was occurring in underground coal mines at that time. Their knowledge of the mining industry provided the foundation for the development of safety equipment to better protect underground miners. While the range of markets served by MSA has expanded greatly over the years, the founding philosophy of understanding customer safety needs and designing innovative safety equipment solutions remains unchanged.\n\nMSA is headquartered in Cranberry Township, Pennsylvania, with operations employing 5,300 associates throughout the world. A publicly held company, MSA's stock is traded on the New York Stock Exchange under the symbol MSA.\n\n## OUR MISSION\n\nThat men and women may work in safety and that they, their families and their communities may live in health throughout the world.\n\n## About the Cover\n\nA key element of MSA's Corporate Strategy focuses on investing in and growing the 'Core of MSA' - in other words concentrating on and investing in the 'Core Products' of MSA that provide a distinct and sustainable competitive advantage. Shown on the cover are our five Core Product Groups: Fall Protection; Portable Gas Detection and Sensors; Supplied-Air Respirators; Fixed Gas and Flame Detection; and Industrial Head Protection . In essence, these Core Products represent a set of products, capabilities, channels, and geographies that drive growth at MSA, provide economic value for our company and shareholders, and best leverage our expertise to keep customers safe. Accordingly, they receive the highest levels of investment and resources at MSA, because they promise the greatest return for all.\n\nMSA\\_2011 Annual Report Covers FIN.indd 1\n\n3/21/12 2:43 PM", + "recall": 0.9377289377289377, + "true_md": "## OUR MISSION That men and women may work in safety\n\nOUR MISSION That men and women may work in safety and that they, their families and their c ommunities may live in health throughout the world. \n\nA key element of MSA’s Corporate Strategy focuses on investing in and growing the “C or e of MSA” – in other words concentrating on and investing in the “Core Products” of MSA that provide a distinc t and sustainable competitive advantage. Shown on the cover are our five Core Product Groups: Fall Prot ection; Portable Gas Detection and Sensors; Supplied-Air Respirators; Fixed Gas and Flame Detection; a nd Industrial Head Protection . In essence, these Core Products represent a set of products, capabilities , channels, and geographies that drive growth at MSA, provide economic value for our company and share holders, and best leverage our expertise to keep customers safe. Accordingly, they receive the highest levels of investment and resources at MSA, because they promise the greatest return for all.\n\n## About the Cover\n\n## Business of MSA\n\n## Our Vision\n\nTo be the world’s leading provider of safety solutions that protect workers when life is on the line. We pursue this vision with an unsurpassed commitment to integrity, customer service and product innovation that creates exceptional value for all MSA stakeholders.\n\nMSA is in the business of developing, manufacturing and selling innovative products that enhance the safety and health of workers throughout the world. Critical to MSA’s mission is a clear understanding of customer processes and safety needs. MSA dedicates significant resources to research which allows the company to develop a keen understanding of customer safety requirements for a diverse range of markets, including the fire service, law enforcement, construction, public utilities, mining, chemical, petroleum, HVAC, hazardous materials remediation, military, and retail. MSA’s principal products, each designed to serve the needs of these target markets, include\n\nrespiratory protective equipment, thermal imaging cameras, gas and flame detection instruments, ballistic helmets, as well as head, eye, face, hearing, and fall protection products.\n\nMSA was founded in 1914 by John T. Ryan and George H. Deike, two mining engineers who had firsthand knowledge of the terrible human loss that was occurring in underground coal mines at that time. Their knowledge of the mining industry provided the foundation for the development of safety equipment to better protect underground miners. While the range of markets served by MSA has expanded greatly over the years, the founding philosophy of understanding customer safety needs and designing innovative safety equipment solutions remains unchanged. \n\nMSA is headquartered in Cranberry Township, Pennsylvania, with operations employing 5,300 associates throughout the world. A publicly held company, MSA’s stock is traded on the New York Stock Exchange under the symbol MSA." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8959699797475829, + "doc_id": "ce64271d383e95359912e1f112e6bad809b7eaf5131cd57216e529e43ec686b1", + "edit_distance": 0.14130434782608695, + "f1_score": 0.9784172661870504, + "meteor": 0.9874568057409414, + "precision": 0.9714285714285714, + "pred_md": "## Assets and Liabilities (Consolidated)\n\nSumitomo Mitsui Financial Group, Inc. and Subsidiaries\n\n## Deposits and Negotiable Certificates of Deposit\n\n## Year-End Balance\n\nNotes: 1. Domestic operations comprise the operations of SMFG, its domestic consolidated banking subsidiaries (excluding overseas branches) and other domestic consolidated subsidiaries. Overseas operations comprise the operations of the overseas branches of domestic consolidated banking subsidiaries and overseas consolidated subsidiaries.\n\n- 2. Liquid deposits = Current deposits + Ordinary deposits + Savings deposits + Deposits at notice\n- 3. Fixed-term deposits = Time deposits + Installment savings\n\n## Balance of Loan Portfolio, Classified by Industry\n\n## Year-End Balance\n\nNotes: 1. Domestic operations comprise the operations of SMFG, its domestic consolidated banking subsidiaries (excluding overseas branches) and other domestic consolidated subsidiaries. Overseas operations comprise the operations of the overseas branches of domestic consolidated banking subsidiaries and overseas consolidated subsidiaries.\n\n- 2. Japan offshore banking accounts are included in overseas operations' accounts.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\nSMFG\n\n149", + "recall": 0.9855072463768116, + "true_md": "SMFG\n\n## Assets and Liabilities (Consolidated)\n\nSumitomo Mitsui Financial Group, Inc. and Subsidiaries\n\n## Deposits and Negotiable Certificates of Deposit\n\n## Balance of Loan Portfolio, Classified by Industry\n\nYear-End Balance\n\nNotes: 1. Domestic operations comprise the operations of SMFG, its domestic consolidated banking subsidiaries (excluding overseas branches) and other domestic consolidated subsidiaries. Overseas operations comprise the operations of the overseas branches of domestic consolidated banking subsidiaries and overseas consolidated subsidiaries.\n\n2. Liquid deposits = Current deposits + Ordinary deposits + Savings deposits + Deposits at notice\n\n3. Fixed-term deposits = Time deposits + Installment savings\n\nYear-End Balance\n\nNotes: 1. Domestic operations comprise the operations of SMFG, its domestic consolidated banking subsidiaries (excluding overseas branches) and other domestic consolidated subsidiaries. Overseas operations comprise the operations of the overseas branches of domestic consolidated banking subsidiaries and overseas consolidated subsidiaries.\n\n2. Japan offshore banking accounts are included in overseas operations’ accounts.\n\nSMFG 2011 149" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5766720863318805, + "doc_id": "5459ba0589654c384ad96e218d674f75365b3379ea2e55b9b0096b186694de9c", + "edit_distance": 0.6273972602739726, + "f1_score": 0.9865125240847784, + "meteor": 0.6262008992346543, + "precision": 0.9884169884169884, + "pred_md": "## Remuneration Practices and Policies\n\nOur board of directors recognizes that the attraction and retention of high-calibre directors and executives with appropriate incentives is critical to generating shareholder value. We have designed our remuneration program to provide rewards for individual performance and corporate results and to encourage an ownership mentality among our executives and other key employees. We believe a significant portion of our executives' pay should be at-risk to performance.\n\nSundance stock is traded on the Australian Stock Exchange (ASX) and all of our management team and operations are located in the United States. In order to retain our current talent and continue to attract highly skilled talent in the U.S., we have adopted remuneration programs that align with best practices and competitive design in the U.S. marketplace while also meeting ASX listing requirements.\n\n## The objectives of our compensation program are to:\n\n- · Attract and retain highly trained, experienced, and committed executives who have the skills, education, business acumen, and background to lead a mid-tier oil and gas business;\n- · Motivate and reward executives to drive and achieve our goal of increasing shareholder value;\n- · Provide balanced incentives for the achievement of near-term and long-term objectives, without motivating executives to take excessive risk; and\n- · Track and respond to developments such as the tightening in the labor market or changes in competitive pay practices.\n\nThe primary components of our executive compensation program consist of long-term equity incentive awards, the opportunity to receive an annual performance cash bonus, and base salary. We generally target each component, as well as the aggregate of the components, at between approximately the 25 th and 50 th percentile of market compensation comparable within a group of similarly-sized ASX and U.S. listed oil and gas exploration and production companies. Individual compensation levels may vary from these targets based on performance, expertise, experience, or other factors unique to the individual or the Company. We also provide retirement and other benefits typical for our peer group.\n\n## C. Directors and Key Management Personnel\n\n- · Michael D Hannell (Chairman)\n- · Eric P McCrady (Managing Director and Chief Executive Officer)\n- · Damien A Hannes (Non-Executive Director)\n- · Neville W Martin (Non-Executive Director)\n- · H. Weldon Holcombe (Non-Executive Director)\n- · Cathy L Anderson (Chief Financial Officer)\n- · Grace Ford (Vice President of Exploration and Development) - appointed as KMP 1 January 2014\n\nBased on her increased responsibilities due to the Company's growth, Ms. Ford was deemed to be a Key Management Personnel during the 2014 fiscal year. Prior to that time, Ms. Ford was not considered to be Key Management Personnel.\n\n- 30 -", + "recall": 0.9846153846153847, + "true_md": "- The objectives of our compensation program are to: • Attract and retain highly trained, experienced, and committed executives who have the skills, education, business acumen, and background to lead a mid-tier oil and gas business; • Motivate and reward executives to drive and achieve our goal of increasing shareholder value; \n\n- acumen, and background to lead a mid-tier oil and gas business; • Motivate and reward executives to drive and achieve our goal of increasing shareholder value; • Provide balanced incentives for the achievement of near-term and long-term objectives, without motivating executives \n\n- • Motivate and reward executives to drive and achieve our goal of increasing shareholder value; • Provide balanced incentives for the achievement of near-term and long-term objectives, without motivating executives to take excessive risk; and • Track and respond to developments such as the tightening in the labor market or changes in competitive pay practices. \n\n- to take excessive risk; and • Track and respond to developments such as the tightening in the labor market or changes in competitive pay practices. \n\n## Remuneration Practices and Policies\n\nOur board of directors recognizes that the attraction and retention of high-calibre directors and executives with appropriate incentives is critical to generating shareholder value. We have designed our remuneration program to provide rewards for individual performance and corporate results and to encourage an ownership mentality among our executives and other key employees. We believe a significant portion of our executives’ pay should be at-risk to performance. \n\nSundance stock is traded on the Australian Stock Exchange (ASX) and all of our management team and operations are located in the United States. In order to retain our current talent and continue to attract highly skilled talent in the U.S., we have adopted remuneration programs that align with best practices and competitive design in the U.S. marketplace while also meeting ASX listing requirements.\n\nThe objectives of our compensation program are to: • Attract and retain highly trained, experienced, and committed executives who have the skills, education, business \n\nThe primary components of our executive compensation program consist of long-term equity incentive awards, the opportunity to receive an annual performance cash bonus, and base salary. We generally target each component, as well as the aggregate of the components, at between approximately the 25 th and 50 th percentile of market compensation comparable within a group of similarly-sized ASX and U.S. listed oil and gas exploration and production companies. Individual compensation levels may vary from these targets based on performance, expertise, experience, or other factors unique to the individual or the Company. We also provide retirement and other benefits typical for our peer group. \n\nBased on her increased responsibilities due to the Company’s growth, Ms. Ford was deemed to be a Key Management Personnel during the 2014 fiscal year. Prior to that time, Ms. Ford was not considered to be Key Management Personnel. \n\n## C. Directors and Key Management Personnel\n\n- • Michael D Hannell (Chairman) • Eric P McCrady (Managing Director and Chief Executive Officer) \n\n- • Michael D Hannell (Chairman) • Eric P McCrady (Managing Director and Chief Executive Officer) • Damien A Hannes (Non-Executive Director) \n\n- • Eric P McCrady (Managing Director and Chief Executive Officer) • Damien A Hannes (Non-Executive Director) • Neville W Martin (Non-Executive Director) \n\n- • Damien A Hannes (Non-Executive Director) • Neville W Martin (Non-Executive Director) • H. Weldon Holcombe (Non-Executive Director) \n\n- • Neville W Martin (Non-Executive Director) • H. Weldon Holcombe (Non-Executive Director) • Cathy L Anderson (Chief Financial Officer) \n\n- • H. Weldon Holcombe (Non-Executive Director) • Cathy L Anderson (Chief Financial Officer) • Grace Ford (Vice President of Exploration and Development) – appointed as KMP 1 January 2014 \n\n- • Cathy L Anderson (Chief Financial Officer) • Grace Ford (Vice President of Exploration and Development) – appointed as KMP 1 January 2014 \n\n- 30 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9491111330744982, + "doc_id": "1759b68616c993031979211e53a3ac7db93ae30a3124957d1cd955f250c7dedf", + "edit_distance": 0.8232445520581114, + "f1_score": 0.972972972972973, + "meteor": 0.8976430976430977, + "precision": 0.9795918367346939, + "pred_md": "## Higher Operating Expenses\n\nWe assess Media operating expenses in four areas:\n\n- GLYPH<129> the cost of broadcast content (including sports programming)\n- GLYPH<129> the cost of retail products sold by The Shopping Channel and Sports Entertainment\n- GLYPH<129> Blue Jays player payroll\n- GLYPH<129> all other expenses involved in day-to-day operations.\n\nOperating expenses were 8 % higher than 2012, mainly because of higher programming costs at Sportsnet, higher Toronto Blue Jays player salaries, higher merchandise spending at The Shopping Channel and costs associated with our launch of Next Issue Canada.\n\nThe higher programming costs this year are a combination of lower costs in 2012 because of the NHL player lockout, and higher costs this year because more hockey games than normal were aired because of the compressed NHL hockey schedule due in part to upcoming winter Olympics. Approximately $62 million of Media's year over year increase in operating expense this year resulted from the 2012 NHL lockout and the timing of games aired in 2013. Player salaries at the Toronto Blue Jays were $34 million higher this year.\n\n## Lower Adjusted Operating Profit\n\nAdjusted operating profit was down compared to last year mainly because of revenue and expenses changes described above.\n\nExcluding the impact of the 2012 NHL lockout and the compressed NHL schedule:\n\n- GLYPH<129> operating revenue would have been 4 % higher this year compared to last year, instead of 5 % higher as reported\n- GLYPH<129> adjusted operating profit would have been 7 % higher this year compared to last year, instead of 15 % lower as reported.\n\nExcluding the acquisition of theScore:\n\n- GLYPH<129> operating revenue would have been 4 % higher this year compared to last year, instead of 5 % higher as reported\n- GLYPH<129> adjusted operating profit would have been 19 % lower this year compared to last year, instead of 15 % lower as reported.\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC.\n\n49\n\nMANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS", + "recall": 0.9664429530201343, + "true_md": "MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AN D ANALYSIS\n\nWe assess Media operating expenses in four areas:\n\nAdjusted operating profit was down compared to last year mainly because of revenue and expenses changes described above.\n\nExcluding the impact of the 2012 NHL lockout and the compressed NHL schedule:\n\n- GLYPH<129> the cost of broadcast content (including sports programming)\n\n- GLYPH<129> the cost of retail products sold by The Shopping Channel and Sports Entertainment\n\n- GLYPH<129> Blue Jays player payroll\n\n- GLYPH<129> all other expenses involved in day-to-day operations.\n\n- GLYPH<129> operating revenue would have been 4 % higher this year compared to last year, instead of 5 % higher as reported\n\n- GLYPH<129> adjusted operating profit would have been 7 % higher this year compared to last year, instead of 15 % lower as reported.\n\n- GLYPH<129> operating revenue would have been 4 % higher this year compared to last year, instead of 5 % higher as reported\n\n- GLYPH<129> adjusted operating profit would have been 19 % lower this year compared to last year, instead of 15 % lower as reported.\n\nOperating expenses were 8 % higher than 2012, mainly because of higher programming costs at Sportsnet, higher Toronto Blue Jays player salaries, higher merchandise spending at The Shopping Channel and costs associated with our launch of Next Issue Canada.\n\nThe higher programming costs this year are a combination of lower costs in 2012 because of the NHL player lockout, and higher costs this year because more hockey games than normal were aired because of the compressed NHL hockey schedule due in part to upcoming winter Olympics. Approximately $62 million of Media’s year over year increase in operating expense this year resulted from the 2012 NHL lockout and the timing of games aired in 2013. Player salaries at the Toronto Blue Jays were $34 million higher this year.\n\n## Excluding the acquisition of theScore:\n\n## Lower Adjusted Operating Profit\n\n## Higher Operating Expenses\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 49" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8293181259810137, + "doc_id": "e19c5ff3093b63d1fea64cc3a76d716b6ab59e558fe0039cee13b1fc27b02e9d", + "edit_distance": 0.1111111111111111, + "f1_score": 0.9491525423728815, + "meteor": 0.8934864917946926, + "precision": 0.9655172413793104, + "pred_md": "2010 ANNUAL REPORT |\n\n7\n\nDeveloping America's fuel in the backyard of America's team: a Chesapeake rig drills deep in the Barnett Shale near Cowboys Stadium in Arlington, Texas.", + "recall": 0.9333333333333333, + "true_md": "2010 ANNUAL REPORT | 7\n\nDeveloping America’s fuel in the backyard of America’s team: a Chesapeake rig drills deep in the Barnett Shale near Cowboys Stadium in Arlington, Texas." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8116370227116315, + "doc_id": "9d15554b988fee40b78d28978e9101a3e584f9170d8f02a56ada3db0bb61397d", + "edit_distance": 0.592948717948718, + "f1_score": 0.9201877934272302, + "meteor": 0.8980667737636875, + "precision": 0.9333333333333333, + "pred_md": "## SMBC Friend Securities ◆\n\n- * he number of full-time employees, including employees seconded to other T companies and organizations. The following list of employees is deducted from the total number of employees: executive officers, employees on short-term contracts, part-time employees, employees of temporary employment agencies, and national staff at overseas branches.\n\n- ** Both non-area specified and area specified staff\n\n## SMBC Nikko Securities ◆\n\n- * As of March 1 of the respective years\n- ** he number of full-time employees. The following list of employees is deducted T from the total number of employees: executive officers, employees seconded to other companies and organizations employees on short-term contracts, parttime employees, employees of temporary employment agencies, and national staff at overseas branches.\n\n- *** Professional staff (Classes I-II), FA, and specialists\n\n## THE MINATO BANK ◆\n\n- * he number of full-time employees including executives and employees secT onded to other companies or organizations. Excluded employees on short-term contracts, and part-time employees.\n\n## Kansai Urban Banking ◆\n\n- * otal is for full-time non-executive employees of the bank, including employees T seconded to other companies and organizations. Excluded are executive officers, employees on short-term contracts, part-time employees, employees of temporary employment agencies.\n- ** Up to March 31, 2009, figures are those of prior to the merger with The Biwako Bank, Ltd.\n\n- *** Up to fiscal 2009, figures are those prior to the merger with The Biwako Bank, Ltd.\n- ¥ The combined employment ratio for persons with disabilities for the above nine companies was 1.87% as of March 2011.\n\n66\n\nSMFG 2011", + "recall": 0.9074074074074074, + "true_md": "## SMBC Friend Securities ◆\n\n## THE MINATO BANK ◆\n\n## SMBC Nikko Securities ◆\n\n## Kansai Urban Banking ◆\n\n* The number of full-time employees, including employees seconded to other companies and organizations. The following list of employees is deducted from the total number of employees: executive officers, employees on short-term contracts, part-time employees, employees of temporary employment agen- cies, and national staff at overseas branches.\n\n* The number of full-time employees including executives and employees sec- onded to other companies or organizations.\n\nExcluded employees on short-term contracts, and part-time employees.\n\n** Both non-area specified and area specified staff\n\n* As of March 1 of the respective years\n\n** The number of full-time employees. The following list of employees is deducted from the total number of employees: executive officers, employees seconded to other companies and organizations employees on short-term contracts, part- time employees, employees of temporary employment agencies, and national staff at overseas branches.\n\n* Total is for full-time non-executive employees of the bank, including employees seconded to other companies and organizations. Excluded are executive offi- cers, employees on short-term contracts, part-time employees, employees of temporary employment agencies. \n\n** Up to March 31, 2009, figures are those of prior to the merger with The Biwako Bank, Ltd.\n\n• The combined employment ratio for persons with disabilities for the above nine companies was 1.87% as of March 2011.\n\nSMFG 2011 66\n\n*** Professional staff (Classes I-II), FA, and specialists\n\n*** Up to fiscal 2009, figures are those prior to the merger with The Biwako Bank, Ltd." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7756599807575704, + "doc_id": "ec6da34516edd6f846dfe2e0bd8a2d19efc6514639ece06ab00f9f5054672101", + "edit_distance": 0.43792325056433407, + "f1_score": 0.9277899343544859, + "meteor": 0.8382222537342294, + "precision": 0.9422222222222222, + "pred_md": "»› THAT'S BRILLIANT! WE'LL HAVE TOPSHOP IN 80 STORES BY THE END OF 2015-AND THAT'S JUST ONE OF THE WAYS WE'RE ATTRACTING NEW YOUNG CUSTOMERS WITH GREAT BRANDS AT ACCESSIBLE PRICE POINTS.\n\n»› THAT'S BRILLIANT! WE'LL HAVE TOPSHOP IN 80 STORES BY THE END OF 2015-AND THAT'S JUST ONE OF THE WAYS WE'RE ATTRACTING NEW YOUNG CUSTOMERS WITH GREAT BRANDS AT ACCESSIBLE PRICE POINTS.\n\n' Praise the fashion gods. Nordstrom Downtown Portland is opening Topshop in the next month.\n\n'\n\nOUR CUSTOMER, KARLY T.\n\n«‹ A PERFECT PAIR: SHOES AND SJP ACTRESS AND STYLE ICON SARAH JESSICA PARKER DESIGNED HER OWN SHOE LINE, SJP, AND WE WERE THE EXCLUSIVE RETAILER FOR ITS LAUNCH.\n\n«‹ A PERFECT PAIR: SHOES AND SJP ACTRESS AND STYLE ICON SARAH JESSICA PARKER DESIGNED HER OWN SHOE LINE, SJP, AND WE WERE THE EXCLUSIVE RETAILER FOR ITS LAUNCH.\n\nIn addition to our new stores, we improved our online/off-price capabilities with the launch of Nordstromrack.com. Combined with HauteLook, the integrated ecommerce site offers a consistent merchandise selection as well as flash sales in a single web or mobile experience, providing customers a wide range of merchandise with one easy-to-use, shared checkout. Since the launch last spring, we've more than doubled the selection at Nordstromrack.com. We will continue to work on ways to further integrate our business to improve our customer experience.\n\n## INCREASING RELEVANCE\n\nWe know ultimately customers come to Nordstrom for great merchandise. They continue to respond to fresh, relevant brands. Last year, we were the exclusive retail partner for the global launch of\n\nSarah Jessica Parker's SJP line of shoes and launched Charlotte Tilbury in Beauty. We increased the number of full-line stores with Topshop to 53 and launched Kate Moss for Topshop, which helped us rapidly grow the number of Topshop customers, including a younger customer who in many cases is new to Nordstrom. By the end of 2015, we plan to have Topshop in more than 80 stores.\n\nThis March, we were excited to begin carrying Madewell, representing a new partnership with J.Crew. Our initial launch was on Nordstrom.com and in 15 of our stores in our t.b.d. department. This is a terrific example of our continued focus to bring great fashion brands to customers at accessible price points.\n\nFinally, Nordstrom Rewards has been a successful program enabling us to deepen\n\n8", + "recall": 0.9137931034482759, + "true_md": "GLYPH<guillemotright.case>GLYPH<guilsinglright.case> THAT’S BRILLIANT! WE’LL HAVE TOPSHOP IN 80 STORES BY THE END OF 2015GLYPH<emdash.case>AND THAT’S JUST ONE OF THE WAYS WE’RE ATTRACTING NEW YOUNG CUSTOMERS WITH GREAT BRANDS AT ACCESSIBLE PRICE POINTS. \n\nGLYPH<guillemotleft.case>GLYPH<guilsinglleft.case> A PERFECT PAIR: SHOES AND SJP ACTRESS AND STYLE ICON SARAH JESSICA PARKER DESIGNED HER OWN SHOE LINE, SJP, AND WE WERE THE EXCLUSIVE RETAILER FOR ITS LAUNCH.\n\n8\n\n## INCREASING RELEVANCE\n\n“ Praise the fashion gods. Nordstrom Downtown Portland is opening Topshop in the next month. ” OUR CUSTOMER, KARLY T.\n\nIn addition to our new stores, we improved our online/off-price capabilities with the launch of Nordstromrack.com. Combined with HauteLook, the integrated ecommerce site offers a consistent merchandise selection as well as flash sales in a single web or mobile experience, providing customers a wide range of merchandise with one easy-to-use, shared checkout. Since the launch last spring, we’ve more than doubled the selection at Nordstromrack.com. We will continue to work on ways to further integrate our business to improve our customer experience.\n\nSarah Jessica Parker’s SJP line of shoes and launched Charlotte Tilbury in Beauty. We increased the number of full-line stores with Topshop to 53 and launched Kate Moss for Topshop, which helped us rapidly grow the number of Topshop customers, including a younger customer who in many cases is new to Nordstrom. By the end of 2015, we plan to have Topshop in more than 80 stores.\n\nThis March, we were excited to begin carrying Madewell, representing a new partnership with J.Crew. Our initial launch was on Nordstrom.com and in 15 of our stores in our t.b.d. department. This is a terrific example of our continued focus to bring great fashion brands to customers at accessible price points.\n\nWe know ultimately customers come to Nordstrom for great merchandise. They continue to respond to fresh, relevant brands. Last year, we were the exclusive retail partner for the global launch of\n\nFinally, Nordstrom Rewards has been a successful program enabling us to deepen" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8854224047232359, + "doc_id": "5a64a80615e5cc81590f2548368336eaae1b5f864609cc98c70c2d578d404837", + "edit_distance": 0.7874601487778958, + "f1_score": 0.984423676012461, + "meteor": 0.9142239593391894, + "precision": 0.9813664596273292, + "pred_md": "## CORPORATE AND SHAREHOLDER INFORMATION\n\n## CORPORATE OFFICES\n\nRogers Communications Inc. 333 Bloor Street East, 10th Floor Toronto, ON M4W 1G9 416-935-7777\n\n## CUSTOMER SERVICE AND PRODUCT INFORMATION\n\n888-764-3771 or rogers.com\n\n## SHAREHOLDER SERVICES\n\nIf you are a registered shareholder and have inquiries regarding your account, wish to change your name or address, or have questions about lost stock certificates, share transfers, estate settlements or dividends, please contact our transfer agent and registrar:\n\n## CST Trust Company\n\nP.O. Box 700, Postal Station B Montreal, QC H3B 3K3, Canada 416-682-3860 or 800-387-0825 inquiries@canstockta.com\n\n## Duplicate Mailings\n\nIf you receive duplicate shareholder mailings from Rogers Communications, please contact CST Trust Company as detailed above to consolidate your accounts.\n\n## INVESTOR RELATIONS\n\nInstitutional investors, securities analysts and others requiring additional financial information can visit rogers.com/investors or contact us at:\n\n## 1-855-300-7922 or\n\n416-935-3551 (outside North America) or investor.relations@rci.rogers.com\n\nMedia inquiries: 416-935-7777\n\n## CORPORATE PHILANTHROPY\n\nFor information relating to Rogers various philanthropic endeavours, refer to the 'About Rogers' section of rogers.com\n\n## SUSTAINABILITY\n\nRogers is committed to continuing to grow responsibly and we focus our social and environmental sustainability efforts where we can make the most meaningful impacts on both. To learn more, please visit rogers.com/csr\n\n## COMMON STOCK TRADING AND DIVIDEND INFORMATION\n\n## Shares Outstanding at December 31, 2013\n\nClass A\n\n112,462,000\n\nClass B\n\n402,281,178\n\n## 2014 Expected Dividend Dates\n\n* Subject to Board approval\n\nUnless indicated otherwise, all dividends paid by Rogers Communications are designated as 'eligible' dividends for the purposes of the Income Tax Act (Canada) and any similar provincial legislation.\n\n## DIRECT DEPOSIT SERVICE\n\nShareholders may have dividends deposited directly into accounts held at financial institutions. To arrange direct deposit service, please contact CST Trust Company as detailed earlier on this page.\n\n## DIVIDEND REINVESTMENT PLAN (DRIP)\n\nRogers offers a convenient dividend reinvestment program for eligible shareholders to purchase additional Rogers Communications shares by reinvesting their cash dividends without incurring brokerage fees or administration fees. For plan information and enrolment materials or to learn more about Rogers DRIP, please visit www. canstockta.com/en/InvestorServices/Dividend\\_ Reinvestment\\_Plans or contact CST Trust Company as detailed earlier on this page.\n\n## ELECTRONIC DELIVERY OF SHAREHOLDER MATERIALS\n\nRegistered shareholders can receive electronic notice of financial reports and proxy materials and utilize the Internet to submit proxies on-line by registering at www.canstockta.com/ en/InvestorServices/Delivery\\_of\\_Investor\\_ Materials/Electronic\\_Consent . This approach gets information to shareholders more quickly than conventional mail and helps Rogers protect the environment and reduce printing and postage costs.\n\n## GLOSSARY OF TERMS\n\nFor a comprehensive glossary of industry and technology terms, go to rogers.com/glossary\n\n## STOCK EXCHANGE LISTINGS Toronto Stock Exchange (TSX):\n\nRCI.b - Class B Non-Voting shares (CUSIP # 775109200) RCI.a - Class A Voting shares (CUSIP # 775109101)\n\n## New York Stock Exchange (NYSE):\n\nRCI\n\n- Class B Non-Voting shares\n\n(CUSIP # 775109200)\n\n## Equity Index Inclusions:\n\nDow Jones Canada Titans 60 Index\n\nDow Jones Telecom Titans 30 Index\n\nFTSE Global Telecoms Index\n\nFTSE All-World Index Series\n\nFTSE4Good Global Index\n\nJantzi Social Index\n\nS&P/TSX 60 Index\n\nS&P/TSX Composite Dividend Index\n\nS&P/TSX Composite Index\n\nS&P/TSX Telecom Services Index\n\n## DEBT SECURITIES\n\nFor details of the public debt securities of the Rogers companies, please refer to the 'Debt Securities' section under rogers.com/investors\n\n## INDEPENDENT AUDITORS\n\nKPMG LLP\n\n## ON-LINE INFORMATION\n\nRogers is committed to open and full financial disclosure and best practices in corporate governance. We invite you to visit the Investor Relations section of rogers.com/investors where you will find additional information about our business, including events and presentations, news releases, regulatory filings, governance practices, corporate social responsibility and our continuous disclosure materials, including quarterly financial releases, annual information forms and management information circulars. You may also subscribe to our news by e-mail or RSS feeds to automatically receive Rogers news releases electronically.\n\n## FOLLOW ROGERS THROUGH THESE SOCIAL MEDIA LINKS\n\nFACEBOOK\n\nfacebook.com/rogers\n\nGOOGLE +\n\ngoogle.com/+Rogers\n\nREDBOARD\n\nredboard.rogers.com\n\nSOCIAL\n\nhttp://social.rogers.com\n\nTWITTER\n\ntwitter.com/rogersbuzz\n\n## SCAN THIS TO LEARN MORE\n\n## rogers.com/investors\n\nStay up-to-date with the latest Rogers investor information\n\n## CAUTION REGARDING FORWARD-LOOKING INFORMATION AND OTHER RISKS\n\nThis annual report includes forward-looking statements about the financial condition and prospects of Rogers Communications that involve significant risks and uncertainties that are detailed in the 'Risks and Uncertainties That Could Affect our Businesses' and 'Caution Regarding Forward-Looking Statements, Risks and Assumptions' sections of the MD&A contained herein, which should be read in conjunction with all sections of this annual report.\n\nThe fibre used in the manufacture of the stock comes from well managed forests, controlled sources and recycled wood or fibre.\n\nThis annual report is recyclable.\n\n3 trees preserved for the future\n\n4,581 litres of wastewater flow saved\n\n61 kg solid waste not generated\n\n120 kg net greenhouse gases prevented\n\n126 ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n© 2014 Rogers Communications Inc. Other registered trademarks that appear are the property of the respective owners.\n\nDesign: Interbrand Printed in Canada\n\n2,017,818 BTUs energy not consumed", + "recall": 0.9875, + "true_md": "## CORPORATE AND SHAREHOLDER INFORMATION\n\n## CORPORATE OFFICES\n\n## CUSTOMER SERVICE AND PRODUCT INFORMATION\n\n## SHAREHOLDER SERVICES\n\n## CST Trust Company\n\n## Duplicate Mailings\n\n## INVESTOR RELATIONS\n\n## CORPORATE PHILANTHROPY\n\n## SUSTAINABILITY\n\n## STOCK EXCHANGE LISTINGS Toronto Stock Exchange (TSX):\n\n## New York Stock Exchange (NYSE):\n\n## Equity Index Inclusions:\n\n## DEBT SECURITIES\n\n## INDEPENDENT AUDITORS\n\n## ON-LINE INFORMATION\n\n## FOLLOW ROGERS THROUGH THESE SOCIAL MEDIA LINKS\n\n## Shares Outstanding at December 31, 2013\n\n## 2014 Expected Dividend Dates\n\n## DIRECT DEPOSIT SERVICE\n\n## DIVIDEND REINVESTMENT PLAN (DRIP)\n\n## ELECTRONIC DELIVERY OF SHAREHOLDER MATERIALS\n\n## GLOSSARY OF TERMS\n\nRogers Communications Inc. 333 Bloor Street East, 10th Floor Toronto, ON M4W 1G9 416-935-7777\n\n888-764-3771 or rogers.com\n\nIf you are a registered shareholder and have inquiries regarding your account, wish to change your name or address, or have questions about lost stock certificates, share transfers, estate settlements or dividends, please contact our transfer agent and registrar:\n\nP.O. Box 700, Postal Station B Montreal, QC H3B 3K3, Canada 416-682-3860 or 800-387-0825 inquiries@canstockta.com\n\nIf you receive duplicate shareholder mailings from Rogers Communications, please contact CST Trust Company as detailed above to consolidate your accounts.\n\nInstitutional investors, securities analysts and others requiring additional financial information can visit rogers.com/investors or contact us at:\n\n1-855-300-7922 or 416-935-3551 (outside North America) or investor.relations@rci.rogers.com\n\nMedia inquiries: 416-935-7777\n\nFor information relating to Rogers various philanthropic endeavours, refer to the “About Rogers” section of rogers.com\n\nRogers is committed to continuing to grow responsibly and we focus our social and environmental sustainability efforts where we can make the most meaningful impacts on both. To learn more, please visit rogers.com/csr \n\nRCI.b – Class B Non-Voting shares (CUSIP # 775109200) RCI.a – Class A Voting shares (CUSIP # 775109101)\n\nRCI – Class B Non-Voting shares (CUSIP # 775109200)\n\nDow Jones Canada Titans 60 Index Dow Jones Telecom Titans 30 Index FTSE Global Telecoms Index FTSE All-World Index Series FTSE4Good Global Index Jantzi Social Index S&P/TSX 60 Index S&P/TSX Composite Dividend Index S&P/TSX Composite Index S&P/TSX Telecom Services Index\n\nFor details of the public debt securities of the Rogers companies, please refer to the “Debt Securities” section under rogers.com/investors\n\nKPMG LLP\n\nRogers is committed to open and full financial disclosure and best practices in corporate governance. We invite you to visit the Investor Relations section of rogers.com/investors where you will find additional information about our business, including events and presentations, news releases, regulatory filings, governance practices, corporate social responsibility and our continuous disclosure materials, including quarterly financial releases, annual information forms and management information circulars. You may also subscribe to our news by e-mail or RSS feeds to automatically receive Rogers news releases electronically.\n\nUnless indicated otherwise, all dividends paid by Rogers Communications are designated as “eligible” dividends for the purposes of the Income Tax Act (Canada) and any similar provincial legislation.\n\nShareholders may have dividends deposited directly into accounts held at financial institutions. To arrange direct deposit service, please contact CST Trust Company as detailed earlier on this page. \n\nRogers offers a convenient dividend reinvestment program for eligible shareholders to purchase additional Rogers Communications shares by reinvesting their cash dividends without incurring brokerage fees or administration fees. For plan information and enrolment materials or to learn more about Rogers DRIP, please visit www. canstockta.com/en/InvestorServices/Dividend\\_ Reinvestment\\_Plans or contact CST Trust Company as detailed earlier on this page.\n\nRegistered shareholders can receive electronic notice of financial reports and proxy materials and utilize the Internet to submit proxies on-line by registering at www.canstockta.com/ en/InvestorServices/Delivery\\_of\\_Investor\\_ Materials/Electronic\\_Consent . This approach gets information to shareholders more quickly than conventional mail and helps Rogers protect the environment and reduce printing and postage costs.\n\nFor a comprehensive glossary of industry and technology terms, go to rogers.com/glossary \n\nSCAN THIS TO LEARN MORE\n\nrogers.com/investors Stay up-to-date with the latest Rogers investor information\n\nFACEBOOK facebook.com/rogers\n\nTWITTER twitter.com/rogersbuzz\n\nGOOGLE + google.com/+Rogers\n\nREDBOARD redboard.rogers.com\n\nSOCIAL http://social.rogers.com\n\nThis annual report includes forward-looking statements about the financial condition and prospects of Rogers Communications that involve significant risks and uncertainties that are detailed in the “Risks and Uncertainties That Could Affect our Businesses” and “Caution Regarding Forward-Looking Statements, Risks and Assumptions” sections of the MD&A contained herein, which should be read in conjunction with all sections of this annual report.\n\nThe fibre used in the manufacture of the stock comes from well managed forests, controlled sources and recycled wood or fibre. \n\n© 2014 Rogers Communications Inc. Other registered trademarks that appear are the property of the respective owners. \n\nDesign: Interbrand Printed in Canada\n\n2,017,818 BTUs energy not consumed\n\n120 kg net greenhouse gases prevented \n\n61 kg solid waste not generated\n\n4,581 litres of wastewater flow saved\n\n3 trees preserved for the future \n\nThis annual report is recyclable.\n\n126 ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n## CAUTION REGARDING FORWARD-LOOKING INFORMATION AND OTHER RISKS\n\n## COMMON STOCK TRADING AND DIVIDEND INFORMATION\n\n* Subject to Board approval" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9131979434174635, + "doc_id": "af136cd2c0e7c0b6f65d885cee26d7ff69677eb3d3ee9ceea848a1ac680a1ee2", + "edit_distance": 0.06944444444444445, + "f1_score": 0.9540229885057472, + "meteor": 0.9487962552359728, + "precision": 0.9651162790697675, + "pred_md": "Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nSMFG\n\nNotes: 1. SMFG applies deferred hedge accounting stipulated in 'Treatment for Accounting and Auditing of Application of Accounting Standard for Financial Instruments in Banking Industry' (JICPA Industry Audit Committee Report No. 24).\n\n2. Fair value of transactions listed on exchange is calculated using the closing prices on the Tokyo Financial Exchange and others. Fair value of OTC transactions is calculated using discounted present value and option pricing models.\n\n3. Interest rate swap amounts measured by the special treatment for interest rate swaps are treated with the borrowed money or other transaction that is subject to the hedge. Therefore such fair value is included in the fair value of the relevant transaction subject to the hedge in '30. Financial Instruments.'\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n119", + "recall": 0.9431818181818182, + "true_md": "SMFG Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nNotes: 1. SMFG applies deferred hedge accounting stipulated in “Treatment for Accounting and Auditing of Application of Accounting Standard for Financial Instruments in Banking Industry” (JICPA Industry Audit Committee Report No. 24).\n\n2. Fair value of transactions listed on exchange is calculated using the closing prices on the Tokyo Financial Exchange and others. \n\nFair value of OTC transactions is calculated using discounted present value and option pricing models.\n\n3. Interest rate swap amounts measured by the special treatment for interest rate swaps are treated with the borrowed money or other transaction that is subject to the hedge. Therefore such fair value is included in the fair value of the relevant transaction subject to the hedge in “30. Financial Instruments.”\n\nSMFG 2011 119" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7941951004769251, + "doc_id": "d43260529a3c2d768d4b1f18e93b4f34eeda96cb8fb31aa378f3083f8ecd6fc1", + "edit_distance": 0.8447937131630648, + "f1_score": 0.858611825192802, + "meteor": 0.6600736526120498, + "precision": 0.8652849740932642, + "pred_md": "Deposits (excluding negotiable certificates of deposit) at the end of the fiscal year under review rose by ·3,350.3 billion in comparison with March 31, 2010 to ·81,998.9 billion, and negotiable certificates of deposit increased by ·1,370.7 billion to ·8,366.3 billion.\n\nMeanwhile, loans and bills discounted decreased by\n\n·1,352.6 billion year on year to ·61,348.3 billion, and the balance of securities increased by ·11,328.1 billion to ·39,952.1 billion.\n\nNet assets amounted to ·7,132.0 billion, and, of this total, stockholders' equity was ·4,921.4 billion, due mainly to recording of net income.\n\n## Assets, Liabilities and Net Assets\n\n## 2. Unrealized Gains (Losses) on Securities\n\nNet unrealized gains on securities as of March 31, 2011 amounted to ·430.7 billion, a decrease of ·214.2 billion from the previous fiscal year-end, reflecting a decrease in the value of equities and other factors. Of this total, net\n\nunrealized gains on other securities, including 'other money held in trust,' which are directly debited to net assets, amounted to ·370.9 billion, a decrease of ·215.5 billion from the previous fiscal year-end.\n\n## Unrealized Gains (Losses) on Securities\n\nMillions of yen\n\nNotes: 1. The figures above include unrealized gains (losses) on negotiable certificates of deposit in 'Cash and due from banks' and 'Deposits with banks' and beneficiary claims on loan trusts in 'Monetary claims bought,' etc.\n\n2. Unrealized gains (losses) on stocks (including foreign stocks) are mainly calculated using the average market price during the final month of the respective reporting period. The rest of the securities are valuated at the market price as of the balance sheet date.\n\n3. 'Other securities' and 'Other money held in trust' are valuated and recorded on the consolidated balance sheet at market prices. The figures in the table\n\nabove indicate the differences between the acquisition costs (or amortized costs) and the balance sheet amounts. Net unrealized gains (losses) on other securities, as of March 31, 2011 and 2010, included gains of ·1,153 million and ·105 million, respectively, which were recognized in the statements of income by applying fair value hedge accounting. As a result, the amounts recorded in net assets, as of March 31, 2011 and 2010, were reduced by ·1,153 million and ·105 million, respectively.\n\n4. Floating-rate Japanese government bonds which SMFG held as 'Other securities' are carried on the consolidated balance sheet at their reasonably estimated amounts in accordance with the 'Practical Solution on Measurement of Fair Value for Financial Assets' (Accounting Standards Board of Japan ('ASBJ') Practical Issues Task Force No. 25).\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n24", + "recall": 0.8520408163265306, + "true_md": "## Assets, Liabilities and Net Assets\n\nSMFG 2011 24$^{Deposits (excluding negotiable certificates of deposit) at }$\n\nNotes: 1. The figures above include unrealized gains (losses) on negotiable certificates of deposit in “Cash and due from banks” and “Deposits with banks” and beneficiary claims on loan trusts in “Monetary claims bought,” etc.\n\n2. Unrealized gains (losses) on stocks (including foreign stocks) are mainly calculated using the average market price during the final month of the respective reporting period. The rest of the securities are valuated at the market price as of the balance sheet date.\n\n3. “Other securities” and “Other money held in trust” are valuated and recorded on the consolidated balance sheet at market prices. The figures in the table above indicate the differences between the acquisition costs (or amortized costs) and the balance sheet amounts.\n\nNet unrealized gains (losses) on other securities, as of March 31, 2011 and 2010, included gains of ¥1,153 million and ¥105 million, respectively, which were recognized in the statements of income by applying fair value hedge accounting. As a result, the amounts recorded in net assets, as of March 31, 2011 and 2010, were reduced by ¥1,153 million and ¥105 million, respectively.\n\n4. Floating-rate Japanese government bonds which SMFG held as “Other securities” are carried on the consolidated balance sheet at their reasonably estimated amounts in accordance with the “Practical Solution on Measurement of Fair Value for Financial Assets” (Accounting Standards Board of Japan (“ASBJ”) Practical Issues Task Force No. 25).\n\n## Unrealized Gains (Losses) on Securities\n\n## 2. Unrealized Gains (Losses) on Securities\n\nNet unrealized gains on securities as of March 31, 2011 amounted to ¥430.7 billion, a decrease of ¥214.2 billion from the previous fiscal year-end, reflecting a decrease in the value of equities and other factors. Of this total, net \n\nunrealized gains on other securities, including “other money held in trust,” which are directly debited to net assets, amounted to ¥370.9 billion, a decrease of ¥215.5 billion from the previous fiscal year-end.\n\nthe end of the fiscal year under review rose by ¥3,350.3 bil- lion in comparison with March 31, 2010 to ¥81,998.9 billion, and negotiable certificates of deposit increased by ¥1,370.7 billion to ¥8,366.3 billion.\n\nMeanwhile, loans and bills discounted decreased by \n\n¥1,352.6 billion year on year to ¥61,348.3 billion, and the balance of securities increased by ¥11,328.1 billion to ¥39,952.1 billion. \n\nNet assets amounted to ¥7,132.0 billion, and, of this total, stockholders’ equity was ¥4,921.4 billion, due mainly to recording of net income." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6168673431811788, + "doc_id": "434f2450e165becb7bcae8653ab1d20ea01421452658b39853a4b398ce86cd78", + "edit_distance": 0.5, + "f1_score": 0.9629629629629631, + "meteor": 0.8757427021441488, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nSMFG\n\n(c) Other securities\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n109", + "recall": 0.9285714285714286, + "true_md": "SMFG Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nSMFG 2011 109\n\n## (c) Other securities" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7111055925713908, + "doc_id": "04b36bcaf395ffa8300a0e1b11e683bb47f8e50ccbcd67fd56a04356782fdd31", + "edit_distance": 0.17142857142857143, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.8419171528910766, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Nordstrom, Inc.\n\n## Consolidated Balance Sheets\n\nIn millions\n\nThe accompanying Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements are an integral part of these financial statements.\n\n38", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## Nordstrom, Inc. Consolidated Balance Sheets\n\n## Nordstrom, Inc. Consolidated Balance Sheets In millions\n\nThe accompanying Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements are an integral part of these financial statements.\n\n38" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7663800155891025, + "doc_id": "c019b886d1e4066ad35120e5cfac5b9412730f69221138c2dfefb91517e20dc3", + "edit_distance": 0.21529745042492918, + "f1_score": 0.8771929824561403, + "meteor": 0.8522434180052144, + "precision": 0.8771929824561403, + "pred_md": "SMFG\n\n## Income Analysis (Consolidated)\n\nSumitomo Mitsui Financial Group, Inc. and Subsidiaries\n\n## Operating Income, Classified by Domestic and Overseas Operations\n\nMillions of yen\n\nNotes: 1. Domestic operations comprise the operations of SMFG, its domestic consolidated banking subsidiaries (excluding overseas branches) and other domestic consolidated subsidiaries. Overseas operations comprise the operations of the overseas branches of domestic consolidated banking subsidiaries and overseas consolidated subsidiaries.\n\n2. Income and expenses resulting from money held in trust are included in 'Other income' and 'Other expenses.' Therefore, 'Interest expenses' are shown after deduction of expenses (2011, ·16 million; 2010, ·20 million) related to the management of money held in trust.\n\n3. Intersegment transactions are reported in the 'Elimination' column.\n\n## Average Balance, Interest and Earnings Yield of Interest-Earning Assets and Interest-Bearing Liabilities\n\n## Domestic Operations\n\nMillions of yen\n\nNotes: 1. Domestic operations comprise the operations of SMFG, its domestic consolidated banking subsidiaries (excluding overseas branches) and other domestic consolidated subsidiaries.\n\n2. In principle, average balances are calculated by using daily balances. However, some consolidated subsidiaries use weekly, monthly or quarterly balances instead.\n\n3. 'Interest-earning assets' are shown after deduction of the average balance of noninterest-earning deposits (2011, ·1,188,255 million; 2010, ·965,438 million).\n\n4. Income and expenses resulting from money held in trust are included in 'Other income' and 'Other expenses.' Therefore, 'Interest-earning assets' are shown after deduction of the average balance of money held in trust (2011, ·21,928 million; 2010, ·12,392 million). 'Interest-bearing liabilities' are shown after deduction of amounts equivalent to the average balance of money held in trust (2011, ·21,928 million; 2010, ·12,392 million) and corresponding interest (2011, ·16 million; 2010, ·20 million).\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n146", + "recall": 0.8771929824561403, + "true_md": "SMFG\n\n## Operating Income, Classified by Domestic and Overseas Operations\n\n## Income Analysis (Consolidated) Sumitomo Mitsui Financial Group, Inc. and Subsidiaries\n\n- Notes: 1. Domestic operations comprise the operations of SMFG, its domestic consolidated banking subsidiaries (excluding overseas branches) and other domestic consolidated subsidiaries. Overseas operations comprise the operations of the overseas branches of domestic consolidated banking subsidiaries and overseas consolidated subsidiaries.\n\n- 2. Income and expenses resulting from money held in trust are included in “Other income” and “Other expenses.” Therefore, “Interest expenses” are shown after deduction of expenses (2011, ¥16 million; 2010, ¥20 million) related to the management of money held in trust.\n\n- 3. Intersegment transactions are reported in the “Elimination” column.\n\n## Average Balance, Interest and Earnings Yield of Interest-Earning Assets and Interest-Bearing Liabilities\n\n- Notes: 1. Domestic operations comprise the operations of SMFG, its domestic consolidated banking subsidiaries (excluding overseas branches) and other domestic consolidated subsidiaries.\n\n- 2. In principle, average balances are calculated by using daily balances. However, some consolidated subsidiaries use weekly, monthly or quarterly balances instead.\n\n- 3. “Interest-earning assets” are shown after deduction of the average balance of noninterest-earning deposits (2011, ¥1,188,255 million; 2010, ¥965,438 million).\n\n- 4. Income and expenses resulting from money held in trust are included in “Other income” and “Other expenses.” Therefore, “Interest-earning assets” are shown after deduction of the average balance of money held in trust (2011, ¥21,928 million; 2010, ¥12,392 million). “Interest-bearing liabilities” are shown after deduction of amounts equivalent to the average balance of money held in trust (2011, ¥21,928 million; 2010, ¥12,392 million) and corresponding interest (2011, ¥16 million; 2010, ¥20 million).\n\nSMFG 2011 146" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8170599479535045, + "doc_id": "018f36418a6895a4c90c2acb8eab1c1c20a6723619c368dbf3fa63d5f3bc84a3", + "edit_distance": 0.17704918032786884, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.8499983596052801, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Income Taxes\n\nWe regularly evaluate the likelihood of realizing the benefit for income tax positions we have taken in various federal, state and foreign filings by considering all relevant facts, circumstances and information available. If we believe it is more likely than not that our position will be sustained, we recognize a benefit at the largest amount that we believe is cumulatively greater than 50% likely to be realized. Our unrecognized tax benefit was $15 as of January 31, 2015 and $14 as of February 1, 2014.\n\nUnrecognized tax benefits require significant management judgment regarding applicable statutes and their related interpretation, the status of various income tax audits and our particular facts and circumstances. Also, as audits are completed or statutes of limitations lapse, it may be necessary to record adjustments to our taxes payable, deferred taxes, tax reserves or income tax expense. Such adjustments did not materially impact our effective income tax rate in 2014 or 2013.\n\n## RECENT ACCOUNTING PRONOUNCEMENTS\n\nSee Note 1: Nature of Operations and Summary of Significant Accounting Policies in the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements of Item 8: Financial Statements and Supplementary Data for a discussion of recent accounting pronouncements. We are currently evaluating the impact of these standards or do not expect any of these pronouncements to have a material effect on our results of operations, liquidity or capital resources.\n\n34", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## Income Taxes We regularly evaluate the likelihood of realizing the benefit for income tax positions we have taken in various federal, state and foreign filings\n\n## RECENT ACCOUNTING PRONOUNCEMENTS See Note 1: Nature of Operations and Summary of Significant Accounting Policies in the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements of\n\nIncome Taxes We regularly evaluate the likelihood of realizing the benefit for income tax positions we have taken in various federal, state and foreign filings by considering all relevant facts, circumstances and information available. If we believe it is more likely than not that our position will be sustained, we recognize a benefit at the largest amount that we believe is cumulatively greater than 50% likely to be realized. Our unrecognized tax benefit was $15 as of January 31, 2015 and $14 as of February 1, 2014.\n\nUnrecognized tax benefits require significant management judgment regarding applicable statutes and their related interpretation, the status of various income tax audits and our particular facts and circumstances. Also, as audits are completed or statutes of limitations lapse, it may be necessary to record adjustments to our taxes payable, deferred taxes, tax reserves or income tax expense. Such adjustments did not materially impact our effective income tax rate in 2014 or 2013.\n\nRECENT ACCOUNTING PRONOUNCEMENTS See Note 1: Nature of Operations and Summary of Significant Accounting Policies in the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements of Item 8: Financial Statements and Supplementary Data for a discussion of recent accounting pronouncements. We are currently evaluating the impact of these standards or do not expect any of these pronouncements to have a material effect on our results of operations, liquidity or capital resources.\n\n34" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8868576538521794, + "doc_id": "5d10b1b28e760877e82c55eb145dae5af5cb3f1dab87f407538142240a8572f0", + "edit_distance": 0.13725490196078433, + "f1_score": 0.9473684210526315, + "meteor": 0.9629349109944993, + "precision": 0.9435483870967742, + "pred_md": "Assets and Liabilities (Consolidated)\n\nSMBC\n\n## Risk-Monitored Loans\n\n## Notes: Definition of risk-monitored loan categories\n\n- 1. Bankrupt loans: Credits for which accrued interest is not accounted in revenue; credits extended to borrowers that are undergoing bankruptcy, corporate reorganization and rehabilitation proceedings or debtors receiving orders of disposition by suspension of business at bill clearinghouses\n- 2. Non-accrual loans: Credits for which accrued interest is not accounted in revenue; credits, excluding loans to bankrupt borrowers and loans with grace for interest payment to assist in corporate reorganization or to support business\n- 3. Past due loans (3 months or more): Loans with payment of principal or interest in arrears for more than 3 months, calculated from the day following the contractual due date, excluding borrowers in categories 1. and 2.\n- 4. Restructured loans: Loans to borrowers in severe financial condition given certain favorable terms and conditions to assist in corporate rehabilitation or to support business, excluding borrowers in categories 1. through 3.\n\n## Securities\n\n## Year-End Balance\n\nNotes: 1. Domestic operations comprise the operations of SMBC (excluding overseas branches) and its domestic consolidated subsidiaries. Overseas operations comprise the operations of SMBC's overseas branches and its overseas consolidated subsidiaries.\n\n2. 'Others' include foreign bonds and foreign stocks.\n\n## Trading Assets and Liabilities\n\nMillions of yen\n\nNotes: 1. Domestic operations comprise the operations of SMBC (excluding overseas branches) and its domestic consolidated subsidiaries. Overseas operations comprise the operations of SMBC's overseas branches and its overseas consolidated subsidiaries.\n\n- 2. Intersegment transactions are reported in the 'Elimination' column.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n159", + "recall": 0.9512195121951219, + "true_md": "Assets and Liabilities (Consolidated)\n\nSMBC\n\n## Risk-Monitored Loans\n\n## Securities\n\n## Year-End Balance\n\n## Trading Assets and Liabilities\n\nNotes: Definition of risk-monitored loan categories\n\n1. Bankrupt loans: Credits for which accrued interest is not accounted in revenue; credits extended to borrowers that are undergoing bankruptcy, corporate reorganization and rehabilitation proceedings or debtors receiving orders of disposition by suspension of business at bill clearinghouses\n\n2. Non-accrual loans: Credits for which accrued interest is not accounted in revenue; credits, excluding loans to bankrupt borrowers and loans with grace for interest payment to assist in corporate reorganization or to support business\n\n3. Past due loans (3 months or more): Loans with payment of principal or interest in arrears for more than 3 months, calculated from the day following the contractual due date, excluding borrowers in categories 1. and 2.\n\n4. Restructured loans: Loans to borrowers in severe financial condition given certain favorable terms and conditions to assist in corporate rehabilitation or to support business, excluding borrowers in categories 1. through 3.\n\nNotes: 1. Domestic operations comprise the operations of SMBC (excluding overseas branches) and its domestic consolidated subsidiaries. Overseas operations comprise the operations of SMBC’s overseas branches and its overseas consolidated subsidiaries.\n\n2. “Others” include foreign bonds and foreign stocks.\n\nNotes: 1. Domestic operations comprise the operations of SMBC (excluding overseas branches) and its domestic consolidated subsidiaries. Overseas operations comprise the operations of SMBC’s overseas branches and its overseas consolidated subsidiaries.\n\n2. Intersegment transactions are reported in the “Elimination” column.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n159" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6261390536637286, + "doc_id": "ff0145bbb090acb0083814b7df0694b90916c9a3534504e99bdf7fa5487a4315", + "edit_distance": 0.46215139442231074, + "f1_score": 0.9699999999999999, + "meteor": 0.6911354669613082, + "precision": 0.97, + "pred_md": "## Management's Discussion and Analysis\n\nDollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\n## Portfolio Summary\n\nThe following table summarizes Killam's apartment portfolio by market as at and for the year ended December 31, 2013:\n\n## Apartment Properties\n\n(1) Unit count includes properties held through Killam's partnerships and joint ventures.\n\n- (2) Killam owns a 47% interest in and manages Garden Park Apartments, a 246-unit building located in Halifax, NS. Killam's 47% ownership interest represents 116 of the 246 units related to this property.\n\n(3) Killam owns three buildings located in Ontario through a joint venture, with Killam having a 25% ownership interest and managing the properties. Killam's 25% ownership interest represents 118 of the 472 units related to these properties.\n\n## Manufactured Home Communities Portfolio\n\nThe following table summarizes Killam's MHC investment by province as at and for the year ended December 31, 2013:\n\n30\n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013", + "recall": 0.97, + "true_md": "## Management’s Discussion and Analysis Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\nManagement’s Discussion and Analysis Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\nThe following table summarizes Killam’s apartment portfolio by market as at and for the year ended December 31, 2013:\n\n## Portfolio Summary\n\n## Apartment Properties\n\n## Manufactured Home Communities Portfolio\n\nThe following table summarizes Killam’s MHC investment by province as at and for the year ended December 31, 2013:\n\n(1) Unit count includes properties held through Killam’s partnerships and joint ventures.\n\n(2) Killam owns a 47% interest in and manages Garden Park Apartments, a 246‑unit building located in Halifax, NS. Killam’s 47% ownership interest represents 116 of the 246 units related to this property. (3) Killam owns three buildings located in Ontario through a joint venture, with Killam having a 25% ownership interest and managing the properties.\n\nrepresents 116 of the 246 units related to this property. (3) Killam owns three buildings located in Ontario through a joint venture, with Killam having a 25% ownership interest and managing the properties. Killam’s 25% ownership interest represents 118 of the 472 units related to these properties.\n\n30 Killam ProPerties inc | 2013" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6214476461335476, + "doc_id": "4f0fdb0c58392df039aa4209494d838607533be424f6d6376b995cbdc719d8ad", + "edit_distance": 0.38786279683377306, + "f1_score": 0.9745454545454545, + "meteor": 0.6314264523501449, + "precision": 0.9925925925925926, + "pred_md": "## Nordstrom, Inc.\n\n## Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nDollar and share amounts in millions except per share, per option and per unit amounts\n\n## Credit Quality\n\nThe primary indicators of the credit quality of our credit card receivables are aging and delinquency, particularly the levels of account balances delinquent 30 days or more, as these are the accounts most likely to be written off. The following table illustrates the aging and delinquency status of our credit card receivables:\n\nWe also evaluate credit quality using FICO credit scores. The following table illustrates the distribution of our credit card receivables across FICO score ranges:\n\n1 Credit scores for our credit cardholders are updated at least every 60 days for active accounts and every 90 days for inactive accounts. Amounts listed in the table reflect the most recently obtained credit scores as of the dates indicated.\n\n2 Other consists of amounts not yet posted to customers' accounts and receivables from customers for whom FICO scores are temporarily unavailable.\n\n## NOTE 4: LAND, PROPERTY AND EQUIPMENT\n\nLand, property and equipment consist of the following:\n\nThe total cost of property and equipment held under capital lease obligations was $28 at the end of both 2014 and 2013, with related accumulated amortization of $26 in 2014 and $25 in 2013. Depreciation expense was $498 in 2014, $444 in 2013 and $410 in 2012.\n\nNordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 49", + "recall": 0.9571428571428572, + "true_md": "## Credit Quality The primary indicators of the credit quality of our credit card receivables are aging and delinquency, particularly the levels of account\n\nCredit Quality The primary indicators of the credit quality of our credit card receivables are aging and delinquency, particularly the levels of account balances delinquent 30 days or more, as these are the accounts most likely to be written off. The following table illustrates the aging and delinquency status of our credit card receivables:\n\nWe also evaluate credit quality using FICO credit scores. The following table illustrates the distribution of our credit card receivables across FICO score ranges:\n\n- $^{$\\_{1}$ }$Credit scores for our credit cardholders are updated at least every 60 days for active accounts and every 90 days for inactive accounts. Amounts listed in the table reflect the most recently obtained credit scores as of the dates indicated. Other consists of amounts not yet posted to customers’ accounts and receivables from customers for whom FICO scores are temporarily unavailable.\n\n- most recently obtained credit scores as of the dates indicated. 2 Other consists of amounts not yet posted to customers’ accounts and receivables from customers for whom FICO scores are temporarily unavailable.\n\n## NOTE 4: LAND, PROPERTY AND EQUIPMENT Land, property and equipment consist of the following:\n\nNOTE 4: LAND, PROPERTY AND EQUIPMENT Land, property and equipment consist of the following:\n\nThe total cost of property and equipment held under capital lease obligations was $28 at the end of both 2014 and 2013, with related accumulated amortization of $26 in 2014 and $25 in 2013. Depreciation expense was $498 in 2014, $444 in 2013 and $410 in 2012. \n\nNordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 49\n\nNordstrom, Inc. Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n## Nordstrom, Inc. Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements Dollar and share amounts in millions except per share, per option and per unit amounts\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements Dollar and share amounts in millions except per share, per option and per unit amounts" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8831327813975379, + "doc_id": "519d62ff89d76175a39f10340b1bcca877f5bfdace29adeab78222d1f235128a", + "edit_distance": 0.6694630872483222, + "f1_score": 0.9836734693877551, + "meteor": 0.8766912809763142, + "precision": 0.9877049180327869, + "pred_md": "## DIRECTORS\n\nJOHN F. MEIER (3, 4) Age 64 Former Chairman and Chief Executive Officer Libbey Inc. (Tableware Products) Chairman of the Board of Directors\n\nWILLIAM G. BARES (4) Age 71\n\nFormer Chairman and Chief Executive Officer The Lubrizol Corporation (Specialty Chemical Products)\n\nTHOMAS A. COMMES (1, 3) Age 70 Former President and Chief Operating Officer The Sherwin-Williams Company (Paints and Coatings)\n\nPETER A. DORSMAN (2) Age 57 Executive Vice President & Chief Quality Officer NCR Corporation (Self-Service Technology Solutions)\n\nL. THOMAS HILTZ (2, 3) Age 66\n\nAttorney\n\nEDITH KELLY-GREEN (2) Age 59\n\nFormer Vice President and Chief Sourcing Officer FedEx Express (Express Transportation)\n\nDAN P. KOMNENOVICH (2) Age 60 President and Chief Executive Officer Aviall, Inc. (Aviation Parts, Related Aftermarket Operations)\n\nJ. MICHAEL MOORE (1) Age 69\n\nPresident Oak Grove Consulting Group, Inc. (Management Consulting) Former Chairman and Chief Executive Officer Invetech Company (Industrial Distributor)\n\nVINCENT K. PETRELLA (1) Age 52 Senior Vice President, Chief Financial Officer and Treasurer Lincoln Electric Holdings, Inc. (Welding, Brazing Products Manufacturer)\n\nNEIL A. SCHRIMSHER (3) Age 48\n\nChief Executive Officer Applied Industrial Technologies, Inc.\n\nJERRY SUE THORNTON, Ph.D. (1) Age 65 President Cuyahoga Community College\n\n(Two-Year Educational Institution)\n\nPETER C. WALLACE (3, 4) Age 58\n\nPresident and Chief Executive Officer Robbins & Myers, Inc. (Equipment Manufacturer)\n\n## Committees of The Board\n\n(1) Audit Committee\n\nChairman: Thomas A. Commes\n\n- (2) Corporate Governance Committee\n\nChairman: L. Thomas Hiltz\n\n- (3) Executive Committee\n\nChairman: John F. Meier\n\n(4) Executive Organization and Compensation\n\nCommittee\n\nChairman: Peter C. Wallace\n\n## OFFICERS\n\nNEIL A. SCHRIMSHER Age 48\n\nChief Executive Officer\n\nBENJAMIN J. MONDICS Age 54\n\nPresident & Chief Operating Officer\n\nTHOMAS E. ARMOLD Age 57\n\nVice President - Marketing and Strategic Accounts\n\nTODD A. BARLETT Age 57\n\nVice President - Acquisitions and Global Business Development\n\nFRED D. BAUER Age 46\n\nVice President - General Counsel & Secretary\n\nMICHAEL L. COTICCHIA Age 49\n\nVice President - Chief Human Resources Officer\n\nMARK O. EISELE Age 55\n\nVice President - Chief Financial Officer & Treasurer DANIEL T. BREZOVEC Age 51 Corporate Controller JODY A. CHABOWSKI Age 52 Assistant Controller\n\n## OTHER KEY MANAGEMENT\n\nDARREN B. 'BEN' PADD Age 39\n\nVice President - Midwest Area IVAN J. BATISTA Age 39 General Director - Rafael Benitez Carrillo, Inc. (Puerto Rico) ROBERT E. CURLEY Age 52 Vice President - Southeast Area BARBARA D. EMERY Age 53 Vice President - Human Resources\n\nWARREN E. 'BUD' HOFFNER Age 52\n\nVice President, General Manager - Fluid Power JAMES A. JEFFIERS Age 38 Vice President - Central States Area LONNY D. LAWRENCE Age 49 Vice President - Information Technology JOHN M. LEYO Age 61 Vice President - North Atlantic Area\n\nSERGIO H. NEVÁREZ Age 54 General Director - Applied Mexico\n\nJILL A. OLSEN Age 54\n\nVice President - Project Genesis\n\nRONALD A. SOWINSKI Age 51\n\nPresident & Chief Operating Officer - Applied Industrial Technologies Ltd. (Canada)\n\nKURT J. WEINHEIMER Age 56 Vice President - Western Area\n\n44 Applied Industrial Technologies, Inc. and Subsidiaries", + "recall": 0.9796747967479674, + "true_md": "## DIRECTORS\n\nJOHN F. MEIER (3, 4) Age 64 Former Chairman and Chief Executive Officer Libbey Inc. (Tableware Products) Chairman of the Board of Directors \n\nDAN P. KOMNENOVICH (2) Age 60 President and Chief Executive Officer Aviall, Inc. (Aviation Parts, Related Aftermarket Operations)\n\nJERRY SUE THORNTON, Ph.D. (1) Age 65 President Cuyahoga Community College (Two-Year Educational Institution) \n\nPETER C. WALLACE (3, 4) Age 58 President and Chief Executive Officer Robbins & Myers, Inc. (Equipment Manufacturer)\n\nJ. MICHAEL MOORE (1) Age 69 President Oak Grove Consulting Group, Inc. (Management Consulting) Former Chairman and Chief Executive Officer Invetech Company (Industrial Distributor)\n\nWILLIAM G. BARES (4) Age 71 Former Chairman and Chief Executive Officer The Lubrizol Corporation (Specialty Chemical Products)\n\nTHOMAS A. COMMES (1, 3) Age 70 Former President and Chief Operating Officer The Sherwin-Williams Company (Paints and Coatings)\n\nPETER A. DORSMAN (2) Age 57 Executive Vice President & Chief Quality Officer NCR Corporation (Self-Service Technology Solutions)\n\nVINCENT K. PETRELLA (1) Age 52 Senior Vice President, Chief Financial Officer and Treasurer Lincoln Electric Holdings, Inc. (Welding, Brazing Products Manufacturer)\n\nNEIL A. SCHRIMSHER (3) Age 48 Chief Executive Officer Applied Industrial Technologies, Inc.\n\nL. THOMAS HILTZ (2, 3) Age 66 Attorney\n\nEDITH KELLY-GREEN (2) Age 59 Former Vice President and Chief Sourcing Officer FedEx Express (Express Transportation)\n\nNEIL A. SCHRIMSHER Age 48 Chief Executive Officer\n\nBENJAMIN J. MONDICS Age 54 President & Chief Operating Officer\n\nTHOMAS E. ARMOLD Age 57 Vice President – Marketing and Strategic Accounts\n\nTODD A. BARLETT Age 57 Vice President – Acquisitions and Global Business Development\n\nFRED D. BAUER Age 46 Vice President – General Counsel & Secretary\n\nMICHAEL L. COTICCHIA Age 49 Vice President – Chief Human Resources Officer\n\nMARK O. EISELE Age 55 Vice President – Chief Financial Officer & Treasurer\n\nDANIEL T. BREZOVEC Age 51 Corporate Controller\n\nJODY A. CHABOWSKI Age 52 Assistant Controller\n\nDARREN B. “BEN” PADD Age 39 Vice President – Midwest Area\n\nWARREN E. “BUD” HOFFNER Age 52 Vice President, General Manager – Fluid Power\n\nJAMES A. JEFFIERS Age 38 Vice President – Central States Area\n\nSERGIO H. NEVÁREZ Age 54 General Director – Applied Mexico\n\nJILL A. OLSEN Age 54 Vice President – Project Genesis\n\nRONALD A. SOWINSKI Age 51 President & Chief Operating Officer – Applied Industrial Technologies Ltd. (Canada)\n\nKURT J. WEINHEIMER Age 56 Vice President – Western Area\n\nLONNY D. LAWRENCE Age 49 Vice President – Information Technology\n\nJOHN M. LEYO Age 61 Vice President – North Atlantic Area\n\nIVAN J. BATISTA Age 39 General Director – Rafael Benitez Carrillo, Inc. (Puerto Rico)\n\nROBERT E. CURLEY Age 52 Vice President – Southeast Area\n\nBARBARA D. EMERY Age 53 Vice President – Human Resources\n\n44 Applied Industrial Technologies, Inc. and Subsidiaries\n\n## OTHER KEY MANAGEMENT\n\n## OFFICERS\n\n## Committees of The Board\n\n- (1) Audit Committee Chairman: Thomas A. Commes\n\n- (2) Corporate Governance Committee Chairman: L. Thomas Hiltz\n\n- (3) Executive Committee Chairman: John F. Meier\n\n- (4) Executive Organization and Compensation Committee \n\nChairman: Peter C. Wallace" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8404283402517497, + "doc_id": "65d7cdb1071de8deaf3e8f38c4672d96fdf4422946219b237d1d416bdd665871", + "edit_distance": 0.1111111111111111, + "f1_score": 0.9756097560975611, + "meteor": 0.9943548935591376, + "precision": 0.9523809523809523, + "pred_md": "## ■ Principal Affiliates\n\n- * At-Loan Co., Ltd. was merged with Promise Co., Ltd. on April 1, 2011.\n\n218\n\nSMFG 2011", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## ■ Principal Affiliates\n\n* At-Loan Co., Ltd. was merged with Promise Co., Ltd. on April 1, 2011.\n\nSMFG 2011 218" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7537553651201042, + "doc_id": "06208477987dfc91b06c6833a550d0491207583e96f179f5602bbaf6f7b145d1", + "edit_distance": 0.2899305555555556, + "f1_score": 0.9503546099290779, + "meteor": 0.7743511533718634, + "precision": 0.95260663507109, + "pred_md": "## notes to the consolidated Financial statements\n\nD\n\nollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except share and per share amounts)\n\n## 14. Convertible Debentures (continued)\n\nKillam's $46.0 million convertible subordinated debentures are redeemable at the option of Killam after June 30, 2014, and on or before June 30, 2016 (provided that the current market price of the common shares of the company on the date on which the notice of redemption is given is not less than 125% of the conversion price). After June 30, 2016, the debentures are redeemable at face value. Upon maturity or redemption, Killam may elect to repay all or any portion of the debentures outstanding by issuing the number of common shares obtained by dividing the aggregate of the principal amount of the debentures that have matured or are being redeemed by 95% of the weighted average market price of the common shares for the preceding 20 days (ending 5 days preceding the fixed date for redemption or maturing). At the time of issuance, the fair value of Killam's obligation to make principal and interest payments was $43.9 million and the fair value of the holders' conversion option was $2.1 million (which is reflected in 'Other paid-in capital'). The effective rate of interest on the liability component, which is paid semiannually, is calculated at 6.3%.\n\n## 15. Subordinated Debentures\n\nThe Company's $10.0 million of unsecured subordinated debentures expired, and were repaid, on January 4, 2013 and consisted of three tranches of $2.5 million, $2.5 million and $5.0 million, bearing interest at 5.92%, 6.06% and 6.33%, respectively. Related warrants associated with the subordinated debentures also expired on January 4, 2013.\n\n## 16. Capital Stock and Contributed Surplus\n\n## Capital Stock\n\nAuthorized:\n\nUnlimited number of common shares, with no par value\n\nUnlimited number of preferred shares, issuable in series, with no par value\n\n## Issued:\n\nThe following table summarizes the changes in issued common shares of the Company:\n\n- (i) Net of issue costs of $Nil (2012 - $1,616)\n- (ii) Net of issue costs of $31 (2012 - $29 )\n\n## Dividends\n\nKillam paid monthly dividends as declared by the Board of Directors on or about the 15th day of each month. an annualized dividend of $0.58 was paid in 2013. the dividend increased to $0.60 on an annualized basis for the January 2014 dividend payable on February 17, 2014.\n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013\n\n85", + "recall": 0.9481132075471698, + "true_md": "## Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except share and per share amounts)\n\nNotes to the Consolidated Financial Statements Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except share and per share amounts)\n\nKillam’s $46.0 million convertible subordinated debentures are redeemable at the option of Killam after June 30, 2014, and on or before June 30, 2016 (provided that the current market price of the common shares of the company on the date on which the notice of redemption is given is not less than 125% of the conversion price). After June 30, 2016, the debentures are redeemable at face value. Upon maturity or redemption, Killam may elect to repay all or any portion of the debentures outstanding by issuing the number of common shares obtained by dividing the aggregate of the principal amount of the debentures that have matured or are being redeemed by 95% of the weighted average market price of the common shares for the preceding 20 days (ending 5 days preceding the fixed date for redemption or maturing). At the time of issuance, the fair value of Killam’s obligation to make principal and interest payments was $43.9 million and the fair value of the holders’ conversion option was $2.1 million (which is reflected in “Other paid‑in capital”). The effective rate of interest on the liability component, which is paid semiannually, is calculated at 6.3%.\n\nThe Company’s $10.0 million of unsecured subordinated debentures expired, and were repaid, on January 4, 2013 and consisted of three tranches of $2.5 million, $2.5 million and $5.0 million, bearing interest at 5.92%, 6.06% and 6.33%, respectively. Related warrants associated with the subordinated debentures also expired on January 4, 2013.\n\nAuthorized: Unlimited number of common shares, with no par value\n\nAuthorized: Unlimited number of common shares, with no par value Unlimited number of preferred shares, issuable in series, with no par value\n\nUnlimited number of common shares, with no par value Unlimited number of preferred shares, issuable in series, with no par value\n\nIssued: The following table summarizes the changes in issued common shares of the Company:\n\nIssued: The following table summarizes the changes in issued common shares of the Company:\n\n(i) Net of issue costs of $Nil (2012 ‑ $1,616) )\n\nKillam paid monthly dividends as declared by the Board of Directors on or about the 15th day of each month. an annualized dividend of $0.58 was paid in 2013. the dividend increased to $0.60 on an annualized basis for the January 2014 dividend payable on February 17, 2014.\n\n## Dividends\n\n## 16. Capital Stock and Contributed Surplus\n\n## Capital Stock\n\n## 15. Subordinated Debentures\n\n## 14. Convertible Debentures (continued)\n\n(i) Net of issue costs of $Nil (2012 ‑ $1,616) (ii) Net of issue costs of $31 (2012 ‑ $29 )\n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013 85" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9261421095028738, + "doc_id": "d4a08aac840bbf61e9dbf418ea0284cfa37beed7e212dc90f8d801f1e8f6ab47", + "edit_distance": 0.7753950338600452, + "f1_score": 0.9726443768996959, + "meteor": 0.7226830830310487, + "precision": 0.9815950920245399, + "pred_md": "34\n\nCorporate Governance Statement\n\n## Corporate Governance Statement\n\n## Corporate Governance Practices\n\nThis statement provides an outline of the main corporate governance policies and practices that the Company had in place during the financial year.\n\nThe Board places considerable importance on high standards of ethical behaviour, governance and accountability. The Board is committed to ensuring its corporate governance policies adhere, as much as is practicable, to the ASX Corporate Governance Council's Corporate Governance Principles and Recommendations.\n\nThe Board has recognised the need for the continual development of the Company's corporate governance policies and practices, particularly in view of the Australian Securities Exchange Corporate Governance Principles and Recommendations with 2010 Amendments.\n\n## Roles and Responsibilities of the Board\n\nThe Board of Directors is accountable to shareholders for the proper and prudent investment and preservation of shareholder funds.\n\nThe Board is responsible for:\n\n- 〉 overseeing the Company, including its control and accountability systems;\n- 〉 providing leadership of the Company within a framework of prudent and effective controls which enable risks to be assessed and managed;\n- 〉 providing input into and final approval of management's development of corporate strategy and performance objectives;\n- 〉 reviewing, ratifying and monitoring systems of risk management and internal control, codes of conduct and legal compliance;\n- 〉 setting the Company's direction, strategies and financial objectives;\n- 〉 ensuring compliance with regulatory and ethical standards;\n\nwww.kingsgate.com.au\n\n- 〉 approving and monitoring the progress of major capital expenditure, capital management and acquisitions and divestitures;\n- 〉 approving and monitoring financial and other reporting;\n- 〉 appointing, terminating and reviewing the performance of the Managing Director;\n- 〉 ratifying the appointment and the termination of senior executives;\n- 〉 monitoring senior executives' performance and implementation of strategy; and\n- 〉 ensuring appropriate resources are available to senior executives.\n\nResponsibility for the day-to-day management of the Company is delegated to the Managing Director and the senior executives.\n\nIn carrying out its duties the Board meets formally at least nine times per year. Additional meetings are held to address specific issues or are held as the need arises. Directors also participate in meetings of various Board committees. In the financial year ending 30 June 2013, the Board met eleven times and there were four Committee meetings.\n\n## Composition of the Board\n\nThe Board may, in accordance with the Company's constitution, be comprised of a minimum of three and a maximum of ten Directors.\n\nThe roles of the Non-Executive Chairman and the Managing Director / Chief Executive Officer are exercised by different individuals.\n\nDuring the 2013 financial year there were five Directors. Details of the Directors who held office during the 2013 financial year, including their qualifications, experience and the period for which each Director has held office are set out on page 48 of this Report.\n\nAt each Annual General Meeting of the Company, one third of the Directors (or the number nearest one-third) must retire from office. In addition any\n\nother Director who has held office (without re-election) for three years or more must also retire from office. The Directors to retire at any Annual General Meeting must be those who have been in office the longest since their last election. The retirement of Directors who were elected on the same day, must be determined by lot (unless they agree otherwise between themselves). A retiring Director is eligible for re-election.\n\nA Director appointed to fill a casual vacancy or as an addition to the existing Directors will hold office until the next Annual General Meeting at which he or she may be re-elected.\n\nThe Managing Director is not subject to retirement by rotation and along with any Director appointed as an additional or casual Director, is not to be taken into account in determining the number of Directors required to retire by rotation.\n\n## Director Independence\n\nThe Board considers that independence from management and non-alignment with other interests or relationships with the Company is essential for impartial decision making and effective governance.\n\nDirectors are deemed to be independent if they are independent of management and have no material business or other relationship with the Company that could materially impede their objectivity or the exercise of independent judgement or materially influence their ability to act in the best interests of the Company.\n\nFor the 2013 financial year, four of the Company's five Directors (including the Non-Executive Chairman) were considered by the Board to be independent throughout the year. Those Directors were Mr Ross Smyth-Kirk, Mr Peter McAleer, Mr Craig Carracher and Mr Peter Alexander.\n\nIn assessing independence, the Board has regard to whether any Director:\n\n- 〉 is a substantial shareholder of the Company or an officer of, or otherwise associated directly with, a substantial shareholder of the Company;", + "recall": 0.963855421686747, + "true_md": "34 Corporate Governance Statement\n\n## Corporate Governance Statement\n\n## Corporate Governance Practices\n\n## Roles and Responsibilities of the Board\n\n## Director Independence\n\n## Composition of the Board\n\nwww.kingsgate.com.au\n\nAt each Annual General Meeting of the Company, one third of the Directors (or the number nearest one-third) must retire from office. In addition any \n\nDuring the 2013 financial year there were five Directors. Details of the Directors who held office during the 2013 financial year, including their qualifications, experience and the period for which each Director has held office are set out on page 48 of this Report.\n\nThe roles of the Non-Executive Chairman and the Managing Director / Chief Executive Officer are exercised by different individuals.\n\nThe Board may, in accordance with the Company’s constitution, be comprised of a minimum of three and a maximum of ten Directors.\n\nDirectors are deemed to be independent if they are independent of management and have no material business or other relationship with the Company that could materially impede their objectivity or the exercise of independent judge- ment or materially influence their ability to act in the best interests of the Company.\n\nFor the 2013 financial year, four of the Company’s five Directors (including the Non-Executive Chairman) were considered by the Board to be independent throughout the year. Those Directors were Mr Ross Smyth-Kirk, Mr Peter McAleer, Mr Craig Carracher and Mr Peter Alexander. \n\nIn assessing independence, the Board has regard to whether any Director:\n\nThe Board considers that independence from management and non-alignment with other interests or relationships with the Company is essential for impartial decision making and effective governance.\n\nIn carrying out its duties the Board meets formally at least nine times per year. Additional meetings are held to address specific issues or are held as the need arises. Directors also partici- pate in meetings of various Board committees. In the financial year ending 30 June 2013, the Board met eleven times and there were four Committee meetings.\n\nResponsibility for the day-to-day management of the Company is delegated to the Managing Director and the senior executives.\n\nThe Managing Director is not subject to retire- ment by rotation and along with any Director appointed as an additional or casual Director, is not to be taken into account in determining the number of Directors required to retire by rotation.\n\nThe Board has recognised the need for the continual development of the Company’s corporate governance policies and practices, particularly in view of the Australian Securities Exchange Corporate Governance Principles and Recommendations with 2010 Amendments.\n\nThe Board of Directors is accountable to share- holders for the proper and prudent investment and preservation of shareholder funds.\n\nThe Board is responsible for:\n\nother Director who has held office (without re-election) for three years or more must also retire from office. The Directors to retire at any Annual General Meeting must be those who have been in office the longest since their last election. The retirement of Directors who were elected on the same day, must be determined by lot (unless they agree otherwise between themselves). A retiring Director is eligible for re-election.\n\nA Director appointed to fill a casual vacancy or as an addition to the existing Directors will hold office until the next Annual General Meeting at which he or she may be re-elected.\n\nThis statement provides an outline of the main corporate governance policies and practices that the Company had in place during the financial year.\n\nThe Board places considerable importance on high standards of ethical behaviour, governance and accountability. The Board is committed to ensuring its corporate governance policies adhere, as much as is practicable, to the ASX Corporate Governance Council’s Corporate Governance Principles and Recommendations.\n\n- 〉 is a substantial shareholder of the Company or an officer of, or otherwise associated directly with, a substantial shareholder of the Company;\n\n- 〉 ensuring compliance with regulatory and ethical standards;\n\n- 〉 setting the Company’s direction, strategies and financial objectives;\n\n- 〉 reviewing, ratifying and monitoring systems of risk management and internal control, codes of conduct and legal compliance;\n\n- 〉 providing input into and final approval of management’s development of corporate strategy and performance objectives;\n\n- 〉 providing leadership of the Company within a framework of prudent and effective controls which enable risks to be assessed and managed;\n\n- 〉 overseeing the Company, including its control and accountability systems;\n\n- 〉 approving and monitoring the progress of major capital expenditure, capital manage- ment and acquisitions and divestitures;\n\n- 〉 approving and monitoring financial and other reporting;\n\n- 〉 appointing, terminating and reviewing the performance of the Managing Director;\n\n- 〉 ratifying the appointment and the termina- tion of senior executives;\n\n- 〉 monitoring senior executives’ performance and implementation of strategy; and\n\n- 〉 ensuring appropriate resources are available to senior executives." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9212296393101024, + "doc_id": "b01aad6a2b235c6db6533cce9b9e518bf5e74aa4796b6cb6833e5fc9463f0fdd", + "edit_distance": 0.8029850746268656, + "f1_score": 0.9964157706093191, + "meteor": 0.7940829855454415, + "precision": 0.9928571428571429, + "pred_md": "SMFG\n\nAssets and Liabilities (Consolidated)\n\n## Reserve for Possible Loan Losses\n\n## Risk-Monitored Loans\n\n## Notes: Definition of risk-monitored loan categories\n\n- 1. Bankrupt loans: Credits for which accrued interest is not accounted in revenue; credits extended to borrowers that are undergoing bankruptcy, corporate reorganization and rehabilitation proceedings or debtors receiving orders of disposition by suspension of business at bill clearinghouses\n\n2. Non-accrual loans: Credits for which accrued interest is not accounted in revenue; credits, excluding loans to bankrupt borrowers and loans with grace for\n\ninterest payment to assist in corporate reorganization or to support business\n\n- 3. Past due loans (3 months or more): Loans with payment of principal or interest in arrears for more than 3 months, calculated from the day following the contractual due date, excluding borrowers in categories 1. and 2.\n- 4. Restructured loans: Loans to borrowers in severe financial condition given certain favorable terms and conditions to assist in corporate rehabilitation or to support business, excluding borrowers in categories 1. through 3.\n\n## Problem Assets Based on the Financial Reconstruction Law\n\n## Notes: Definition of problem asset categories\n\n- 1. Bankrupt and quasi-bankrupt assets: Credits to borrowers undergoing bankruptcy, corporate reorganization, and rehabilitation proceedings, as well as claims of a similar nature\n- 2. Doubtful assets: Credits for which final collection of principal and interest in line with original agreements is highly improbable due to deterioration of financial position and business performance, but not insolvency of the borrower\n- 3. Substandard loans: Past due loans (3 months or more) and restructured loans, excluding 1. and 2.\n- 4. Normal assets: Credits to borrowers with good business performance and in financial standing without identified problems and not classified into the 3 categories above\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n150", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "SMFG Assets and Liabilities (Consolidated)\n\n## Reserve for Possible Loan Losses\n\n## Risk-Monitored Loans\n\n## Problem Assets Based on the Financial Reconstruction Law\n\nNotes: Definition of problem asset categories\n\n1. Bankrupt and quasi-bankrupt assets: Credits to borrowers undergoing bankruptcy, corporate reorganization, and rehabilitation proceedings, as well as claims of a similar nature\n\n2. Doubtful assets: Credits for which final collection of principal and interest in line with original agreements is highly improbable due to deterioration of financial position and business performance, but not insolvency of the borrower\n\n3. Substandard loans: Past due loans (3 months or more) and restructured loans, excluding 1. and 2.\n\n4. Normal assets: Credits to borrowers with good business performance and in financial standing without identified problems and not classified into the 3 categories above\n\nNotes: Definition of risk-monitored loan categories\n\n1. Bankrupt loans: Credits for which accrued interest is not accounted in revenue; credits extended to borrowers that are undergoing bankruptcy, corporate reorganization and rehabilitation proceedings or debtors receiving orders of disposition by suspension of business at bill clearinghouses\n\n2. Non-accrual loans: Credits for which accrued interest is not accounted in revenue; credits, excluding loans to bankrupt borrowers and loans with grace for interest payment to assist in corporate reorganization or to support business\n\n3. Past due loans (3 months or more): Loans with payment of principal or interest in arrears for more than 3 months, calculated from the day following the contractual due date, excluding borrowers in categories 1. and 2.\n\n4. Restructured loans: Loans to borrowers in severe financial condition given certain favorable terms and conditions to assist in corporate rehabilitation or to support business, excluding borrowers in categories 1. through 3.\n\nSMFG 2011 150" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9450855174327989, + "doc_id": "8fdcb01902ebd828054e6826d02008c9619b9be8fef8ffb84fbbd1b7fa8cc11f", + "edit_distance": 0.17517006802721088, + "f1_score": 0.958904109589041, + "meteor": 0.9623047133404522, + "precision": 0.9722222222222222, + "pred_md": "4 | LETTER TO SHAREHOLDERS\n\n## DEAR FELLOW SHAREHOLDERS »\n\n2010 was a very important year of transition and achievement for Chesapeake, a year in which we initiated three very important strategic shifts: from asset gathering to asset harvesting, from focusing exclusively on natural gas to a balanced focus on natural gas and liquids and from having a leveraged balance sheet to one worthy of an investment grade rating.\n\nHome to three distinct forms of hydrocarbons: dry natural gas, natural gas liquids and oil, the Eagle Ford Shale in South Texas epitomizes Chesapeake's shift to a balanced focus on natural gas and liquids.\n\n2010 also marked a truly transformative year for our industry. We and a handful of our peers enhanced our capabilities to find and produce significant new resources of oil and natural gas liquids (collectively, 'liquids') in unconventional formations. Chesapeake and these other companies combined creativity, innovation and technology to reinvent the way that our industry explores for and produces natural gas and liquids.\n\nFurthermore, 2010 was the year when global energy companies more fully recognized the importance of these developments and the tremendous opportunities that have emerged in the U.S. Through a wide variety of transactions, including several led by Chesapeake, the global energy industry made it clear that the assets owned by Chesapeake and some of its peers are the most attractive in the world. This realization has already increased the value of highquality unconventional assets in the U.S. and, in time, should lead to higher\n\nstock prices for the leading U.S. onshore E&P companies, especially Chesapeake. Simply put, the global energy industry is beating a path to our door, and we are welcoming it with open arms.\n\nBefore we move ahead, I want to emphasize that even though 2010 was a year of transition and achievement, our stock price was essentially unchanged. Nevertheless, it was still a very strong year for the company operationally and financially. Here are the year's highlights for your review:\n\n- >> Average daily natural gas and oil production increased 14% from 2.5 billion cubic feet of natural gas equivalent (bcfe) in 2009 to 2.8 bcfe in 2010;\n- >> Proved natural gas and oil reserves increased 20% in 2010, from 14.3 trillion cubic feet of natural gas equivalent (tcfe) to 17.1 tcfe;\n- >> Reserve replacement for 2010 reached 375% at a drilling, completion and net acquisition cost of only $0.76 per thousand cubic feet of natural gas equivalent (mcfe) (1) ;\n- >> Realized hedging gains were $2.1 billion;\n- >> Revenues increased 22% to $9.4 billion;\n- >> Adjusted ebitda (2) increased 15% to $5.1 billion;\n- >> Operating cash flow (2) increased 5% to $4.5 billion; and\n- >> Adjusted earnings per fully diluted share (2) increased 16% to $2.95.", + "recall": 0.9459459459459459, + "true_md": "## DEAR FELLOW SHAREHOLDERS »\n\n2010 was a very important year of transition and achievement for Chesapeake, a year in which we initiated three very important strategic shifts: from asset gathering to asset harvesting, from focusing exclusively on natural gas to a balanced focus on natural gas and liquids and from having a leveraged balance sheet to one worthy of an investment grade rating. \n\n2010 also marked a truly transformative year for our industry. We and a handful of our peers enhanced our capabilities to find and produce sig- nificant new resources of oil and natural gas liquids (collectively, “liquids”) in unconventional formations. Chesapeake and these other companies combined creativity, innovation and technology to reinvent the way that our industry explores for and produces natural gas and liquids. \n\nFurthermore, 2010 was the year when global energy companies more fully recognized the importance of these developments and the tremendous opportunities that have emerged in the U.S. Through a wide variety of trans- actions, including several led by Chesapeake, the global energy industry made it clear that the assets owned by Chesapeake and some of its peers are the most attractive in the world. This realization has already increased the value of high- quality unconventional assets in the U.S. and, in time, should lead to higher \n\nHome to three distinct forms of hydrocarbons: dry natural gas, natural gas liquids and oil, the Eagle Ford Shale in South Texas epitomizes Chesapeake’s shift to a bal- anced focus on natural gas and liquids.\n\nstock prices for the leading U.S. onshore E&P companies, especially Chesapeake. Simply put, the global energy industry is beating a path to our door, and we are welcoming it with open arms. \n\nBefore we move ahead, I want to emphasize that even though 2010 was a year of transition and achievement, our stock price was essentially unchanged. Nevertheless, it was still a very strong year for the company operation- ally and financially. Here are the year’s highlights for your review: \n\n- >> Average daily natural gas and oil production increased 14% from 2.5 billion cubic feet of natural gas equivalent (bcfe) in 2009 to 2.8 bcfe in 2010; \n\n- >> Proved natural gas and oil reserves increased 20% in 2010, from 14.3 trillion cubic feet of natural gas equivalent (tcfe) to 17.1 tcfe; \n\n- >> Reserve replacement for 2010 reached 375% at a drilling, completion and net acquisition cost of only $0.76 per thousand cubic feet of natural gas equivalent (mcfe) (1) ; \n\n- >> Realized hedging gains were $2.1 billion;\n\n- >> Revenues increased 22% to $9.4 billion; \n\n- >> Adjusted ebitda (2) increased 15% to $5.1 billion; \n\n- >> Operating cash flow (2) increased 5% to $4.5 billion; and\n\n- >> Adjusted earnings per fully diluted share (2) increased 16% to $2.95.\n\n4 | LETTER TO SHAREHOLDERS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.868575950794195, + "doc_id": "1e05a944686b8ffa5de3b64a145bd6464339b132cfb33b57bce3e1903410f396", + "edit_distance": 0.2916666666666667, + "f1_score": 0.9673913043478262, + "meteor": 0.7777507764710766, + "precision": 0.9888888888888889, + "pred_md": "## Earned LTI Awards for 2014\n\nThe Earned LTI Awards for 2014 were related to performance during the year ended 31 December 2013 and granted during 2014.\n\n(1) LTI amount calculated based on a stock price at 15 April 2014 but grant date based on stock price at 30 May 2014, date of approval at Annual General Shareholders Meeting.\n\nWe may amend, suspend or terminate the RSU Plan or any portion thereof at any time. Certain amendments to the RSU Plan may require approval of the holders of the RSUs who will be affected by the amendment. In the event of a corporate take-over or change in control (as defined in the RSU Plan), our board in its discretion may cause all unvested RSUs to vest and be satisfied by the issue of one ordinary share each or provide for the cancellation of outstanding RSUs and a cash payment equal to the thenfair market value of the RSUs.\n\n## 2015 RSU Plan\n\nStarting with the 2015 fiscal year, the RSU Plan has been amended for executives to reflect 50% time based vesting and 50% vesting based on total shareholder return (TSR) relative to our peer group over a three-year period. The time-based vesting will vest 1/3 on each of the three anniversaries following the grant date subject to continued employment with Sundance. TSR is calculated as the change in stock price plus dividends over the three year period. The stock price used to calculate the starting stock price value will be the average price of Sundance's stock for the 20 trading days before the first day of the measurement period. The ending-period stock price will be the average price of Sundance's stock for the last 20 trading days of the measurement period.\n\nThe number of shares that can be earned under TSR performance ranges from 0% to 200% of the target share grant based on Sundance's percentile rank among the peer set. If Sundance's TSR is negative for the three-year period, but the percentile rank is above median, the payout will be capped at the target payout. If Sundance's TSR is between any of the percentile ranks listed in the table below, the payout as a percent of target will be on a pro-rata basis.\n\n- 37 -", + "recall": 0.9468085106382979, + "true_md": "Earned LTI Awards for 2014 The Earned LTI Awards for 2014 were related to performance during the year ended 31 December 2013 and granted during 2014.\n\nWe may amend, suspend or terminate the RSU Plan or any portion thereof at any time. Certain amendments to the RSU Plan may require approval of the holders of the RSUs who will be affected by the amendment. In the event of a corporate take-over or change in control (as defined in the RSU Plan), our board in its discretion may cause all unvested RSUs to vest and be satisfied by the issue of one ordinary share each or provide for the cancellation of outstanding RSUs and a cash payment equal to the then- fair market value of the RSUs. \n\nStarting with the 2015 fiscal year, the RSU Plan has been amended for executives to reflect 50% time based vesting and 50% vesting based on total shareholder return (TSR) relative to our peer group over a three-year period. The time-based vesting will vest 1/3 on each of the three anniversaries following the grant date subject to continued employment with Sundance. TSR is calculated as the change in stock price plus dividends over the three year period. The stock price used to calculate the starting stock price value will be the average price of Sundance’s stock for the 20 trading days before the first day of the measurement period. The ending-period stock price will be the average price of Sundance’s stock for the last 20 trading days of the measurement period. \n\nThe number of shares that can be earned under TSR performance ranges from 0% to 200% of the target share grant based on Sundance’s percentile rank among the peer set. If Sundance’s TSR is negative for the three-year period, but the percentile rank is above median, the payout will be capped at the target payout. If Sundance’s TSR is between any of the percentile ranks listed in the table below, the payout as a percent of target will be on a pro-rata basis. \n\n## 2015 RSU Plan\n\n## Earned LTI Awards for 2014 The Earned LTI Awards for 2014 were related to performance during the year ended 31 December 2013 and granted during 2014.\n\n- 37 - \n\n- G. Ford $230,000 394,473 $344,885 (1) LTI amount calculated based on a stock price at 15 April 2014 but grant date based on stock price at 30 May 2014, date of approval at Annual General Shareholders Meeting." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.873262097633174, + "doc_id": "236be13d53efa3b3c4cd212c514f02168fadec2f1d379151273f663dab65f34e", + "edit_distance": 0.2222222222222222, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9993141289437586, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF PROFIT OR LOSS AND OTHER COMPREHENSIVE INCOME\n\nThe accompanying notes are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements\n\n- 55 -", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF PROFIT OR LOSS AND OTHER COMPREHENSIVE INCOME\n\n- 55 - \n\nThe accompanying notes are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9420798742707049, + "doc_id": "e99161b12d11e99d30193380a13b9e8292d087b209a493c1201c2b5074b63351", + "edit_distance": 0.8310344827586207, + "f1_score": 0.9774436090225564, + "meteor": 0.8202567186976836, + "precision": 0.982367758186398, + "pred_md": "## Regulation in Our Industry\n\nOur business, except for the non-broadcasting operations of Media, is regulated by two groups:\n\n- GLYPH<129> the Canadian Federal Department of Industry on behalf of the Minister of Industry (Canada) (together, Industry Canada)\n- GLYPH<129> the CRTC, under the Telecommunications Act (Canada) (Telecommunications Act) and the Broadcasting Act (Canada) (Broadcasting Act).\n\nRegulation relates to the following, among other things:\n\n- GLYPH<129> wireless spectrum and broadcasting licensing\n- GLYPH<129> competition\n- GLYPH<129> the cable television programming services we must, and can, distribute\n- GLYPH<129> wireless and wireline interconnection agreements\n- GLYPH<129> rates we can charge third parties for access to our network\n- GLYPH<129> the resale of our networks\n- GLYPH<129> roaming on our networks\n- GLYPH<129> ownership and operation of our communications systems\n- GLYPH<129> our ability to acquire an interest in other communications systems.\n\nRegulatory changes or decisions can adversely affect our consolidated results of operations.\n\nOur costs of providing services may increase from time to time as we comply with industry or legislative initiatives to address consumer protection concerns or Internet-related issues like copyright infringement, unsolicited commercial e-mail, cybercrime and lawful access.\n\nGenerally, our spectrum and broadcast licences are granted for a specified term and are subject to conditions for maintaining these licences. The regulators can modify these licensing conditions at any time, and they can decide not to renew a licence when it expires. If we do not comply with the conditions, a licence may be forfeited or revoked, or we may be fined.\n\nThe licences have conditions that require us, amongst other things, to comply with Canadian ownership restrictions of the applicable legislation, and we are currently in compliance with them. If we violate the requirements, we would be subject to various penalties and it could include losing a licence in extreme cases.\n\nCable, wireless and broadcasting licences generally cannot be transferred without regulatory approval.\n\n## Canadian Broadcasting Operations\n\nOur Canadian broadcasting operations - including our cable television systems, radio and television stations, and specialty services -are licenced (or operated under an exemption order) and regulated by the CRTC under the Broadcasting Act.\n\nThe CRTC is responsible for regulating and supervising all aspects of the Canadian broadcasting system. It is also responsible under the Telecommunications Act for the regulation of telecommunications carriers, including:\n\n- GLYPH<129> Wireless' mobile voice and data operations\n- GLYPH<129> Cable's Internet and telephone services.\n\nOur cable and telecommunications retail services are not subject to price regulation, because the CRTC believes there is enough competition for these services provided by other carriers to protect the interests of users, so has forborne from regulating them. Regulations\n\ncan and do, however, affect the terms and conditions under which we offer these services.\n\n## S pectrum Licences\n\nIndustry Canada sets technical standards for telecommunications under the Radiocommunication Act (Canada) (Radiocommunication Act) and the Telecommunications Act. It licences and oversees:\n\n- GLYPH<129> the technical aspects of the operation of radio and television stations\n- GLYPH<129> the frequency-related operations of cable television networks\n- GLYPH<129> awarding and supervising spectrum for wireless communications systems in Canada.\n\n## Royalties\n\nThe Copyright Board of Canada (Copyright Board) oversees the administration of copyright royalties in Canada and establishes the royalties to be paid for the use of certain copyrighted works. It sets the copyright tariff royalties that Canadian broadcasting undertakings, including cable, radio, television and specialty services, pay to copyright collectives.\n\n## Billing and Contracts\n\nThe Quebec Consumer Protection Act amendments, effective June 2010, introduced new provisions applicable to wireless, wireline and Internet service contracts. These amendments include new rules on the content of such contracts, the determination of the early cancellation fees that can be charged to customers, the use of security deposits and the cancellation and renewal rights of the consumers. The amendments also established new provisions on the sale of prepaid cards and the disclosure of related costs.\n\nAmendments to the Manitoba Consumer Protection Act took effect in September 2012 and parallel the changes to the Quebec Consumer Protection Act. Similar legislation also came into effect in September 2012 in Newfoundland and Labrador and has been tabled in Nova Scotia. A private member's bill proposing similar legislation has been introduced in New Brunswick.\n\nIn April 2012, the Ontario government announced that it would be introducing legislation addressing wireless bills and contracts. The legislation seeks to ensure that contracts are written in plain language and spell out which services come with the basic fee and which would result in a higher bill. It requires providers to obtain consent in writing before they renew or amend a contract. The legislation also seeks a cap on the cost of cancelling a fixed-term contract that would vary depending on the circumstances of the contract. The proposed legislation, which would affect new contracts, would take effect six months after being passed and would also cover existing agreements that are amended, renewed or extended after that date. The legislation was passed into law in October 2013.\n\nSee also 'CRTC Wireless Code' section under Wireless Regulation.\n\n## Foreign Ownership and Control\n\nNon-Canadians can own and control directly or indirectly:\n\n- GLYPH<129> up to 33.3 % of the voting shares and the related votes of a holding company that has a subsidiary operating company licenced under the Broadcasting Act, and\n- GLYPH<129> up to 20 % of the voting shares and the related votes of the operating licensee company may be owned and controlled directly or indirectly by non-Canadians.\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC.\n\n67\n\nMANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS", + "recall": 0.972568578553616, + "true_md": "## Regulation in Our Industry\n\n## S pectrum Licences\n\n## Royalties\n\n## Billing and Contracts\n\n## Canadian Broadcasting Operations\n\n## Foreign Ownership and Control\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 67\n\nMANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AN D ANALYSIS\n\ncan and do, however, affect the terms and conditions under which we offer these services.\n\nOur business, except for the non-broadcasting operations of Media, is regulated by two groups:\n\nRegulation relates to the following, among other things:\n\nRegulatory changes or decisions can adversely affect our consolidated results of operations.\n\nThe Copyright Board of Canada (Copyright Board) oversees the administration of copyright royalties in Canada and establishes the royalties to be paid for the use of certain copyrighted works. It sets the copyright tariff royalties that Canadian broadcasting undertakings, including cable, radio, television and specialty services, pay to copyright collectives.\n\nIndustry Canada sets technical standards for telecommunications under the Radiocommunication Act (Canada) (Radiocommunication Act) and the Telecommunications Act. It licences and oversees:\n\nThe Quebec Consumer Protection Act amendments, effective June 2010, introduced new provisions applicable to wireless, wireline and Internet service contracts. These amendments include new rules on the content of such contracts, the determination of the early cancellation fees that can be charged to customers, the use of security deposits and the cancellation and renewal rights of the consumers. The amendments also established new provisions on the sale of prepaid cards and the disclosure of related costs.\n\nAmendments to the Manitoba Consumer Protection Act took effect in September 2012 and parallel the changes to the Quebec Consumer Protection Act. Similar legislation also came into effect in September 2012 in Newfoundland and Labrador and has been tabled in Nova Scotia. A private member’s bill proposing similar legislation has been introduced in New Brunswick.\n\nOur costs of providing services may increase from time to time as we comply with industry or legislative initiatives to address consumer protection concerns or Internet-related issues like copyright infringement, unsolicited commercial e-mail, cybercrime and lawful access.\n\nGenerally, our spectrum and broadcast licences are granted for a specified term and are subject to conditions for maintaining these licences. The regulators can modify these licensing conditions at any time, and they can decide not to renew a licence when it expires. If we do not comply with the conditions, a licence may be forfeited or revoked, or we may be fined.\n\nThe licences have conditions that require us, amongst other things, to comply with Canadian ownership restrictions of the applicable legislation, and we are currently in compliance with them. If we violate the requirements, we would be subject to various penalties and it could include losing a licence in extreme cases.\n\nCable, wireless and broadcasting licences generally cannot be transferred without regulatory approval.\n\nIn April 2012, the Ontario government announced that it would be introducing legislation addressing wireless bills and contracts. The legislation seeks to ensure that contracts are written in plain language and spell out which services come with the basic fee and which would result in a higher bill. It requires providers to obtain consent in writing before they renew or amend a contract. The legislation also seeks a cap on the cost of cancelling a fixed-term contract that would vary depending on the circumstances of the contract. The proposed legislation, which would affect new contracts, would take effect six months after being passed and would also cover existing agreements that are amended, renewed or extended after that date. The legislation was passed into law in October 2013.\n\nOur Canadian broadcasting operations – including our cable television systems, radio and television stations, and specialty services – are licenced (or operated under an exemption order) and regulated by the CRTC under the Broadcasting Act.\n\nSee also “CRTC Wireless Code” section under Wireless Regulation.\n\nThe CRTC is responsible for regulating and supervising all aspects of the Canadian broadcasting system. It is also responsible under the Telecommunications Act for the regulation of telecommunications carriers, including:\n\nOur cable and telecommunications retail services are not subject to price regulation, because the CRTC believes there is enough competition for these services provided by other carriers to protect the interests of users, so has forborne from regulating them. Regulations\n\nNon-Canadians can own and control directly or indirectly:\n\n- GLYPH<129>u pt o2 0 % of the voting shares and the related votes of the operating licensee company may be owned and controlled directly or indirectly by non-Canadians.\n\n- GLYPH<129> up to 33.3 % of the voting shares and the related votes of a holding company that has a subsidiary operating company licenced under the Broadcasting Act, and\n\n- GLYPH<129> Cable’s Internet and telephone services.\n\n- GLYPH<129> Wireless’ mobile voice and data operations\n\n- GLYPH<129> our ability to acquire an interest in other communications systems.\n\n- GLYPH<129> ownership and operation of our communications systems\n\n- GLYPH<129> roaming on our networks\n\n- GLYPH<129> the resale of our networks\n\n- GLYPH<129> rates we can charge third parties for access to our network\n\n- GLYPH<129> wireless and wireline interconnection agreements\n\n- GLYPH<129> the cable television programming services we must, and can, distribute\n\n- GLYPH<129> wireless spectrum and broadcasting licensing\n\n- GLYPH<129> competition\n\n- GLYPH<129> awarding and supervising spectrum for wireless communications systems in Canada.\n\n- GLYPH<129> the frequency-related operations of cable television networks\n\n- GLYPH<129> the technical aspects of the operation of radio and television stations\n\n- GLYPH<129> the CRTC, under the Telecommunications Act (Canada) (Telecommunications Act) and the Broadcasting Act (Canada) (Broadcasting Act).\n\n- GLYPH<129> the Canadian Federal Department of Industry on behalf of the Minister of Industry (Canada) (together, Industry Canada)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9224951628801696, + "doc_id": "a5f8560952882e69e3e767f25906822d2a65ab427ba5621167a135777f418328", + "edit_distance": 0.8462515883100381, + "f1_score": 0.9565217391304348, + "meteor": 0.7713744906684293, + "precision": 0.9815384615384616, + "pred_md": "process is saving the company an average of $12 million per year in the Marcellus Shale alone.\n\n## Green Frac ®\n\nChesapeake's Green Frac ® program was launched in October 2009 to evaluate the types of additives typically used in the fracking process. As\n\nan industry-leading program, Green Frac is a decisive move toward an even greener fluid\n\nsystem. By reviewing all of the ingredients typically used in each fracking operation, the program identifies additives that can be removed and tests alternatives. To date, the company has eliminated 25% of the additives used in frack fluids in most of its shale plays.\n\nGreen Frac is also establishing simple guidelines for the company and its vendors to select fracking ingredients that present minimal risks to people and the environment. These guidelines will also be used to\n\nLearning from the best - Our commitment to creating a safe work environment continued to grow in 2010 with the founding of the Chesapeake SAFE program. Focused on developing safe behaviors, promoting a safety-conscious culture and eliminating risk in all operating areas, the program has trained more than 4,200 employees and consultants.\n\nincrease public understanding of the process and its necessity in the production of American natural gas.\n\n## Employees\n\nFrom state-of-the-art training facilities to extensive health and wellness programs, Chesapeake provides employees with the skills they need to succeed both in the field and at the office while creating a well-rounded environment for employees and their families. We are committed to the safety and well-being of our employees, contractors and local populations.\n\nWe provide initial and refresher safety and environmental training to our employees and contractors. In addition to classroom and hands-on training, we utilize online environmental, health and safety training focused on company policy and procedures for topics pertinent to the management of our field assets. The range of\n\n2010 ANNUAL REPORT |\n\n27\n\ntopics covered includes Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)-required safety training, such as hazard communication, personal protective equipment, confined spaces and respiratory protection. In addition to operations training, we also provide safe work practices, vehicle safety and specialized training for employees and contractors who perform specific tasks such as emergency response. Specialized environmental training is also provided to address topics such as air compliance, waste management and spill prevention.\n\nIn 2010 we conducted a total of 2,306 instructor-led training courses and 67 web-based training courses on safety and environmental programs for employees, contractors, vendors and visitors.\n\nTo further our training efforts and emphasize the importance of creating a safe work environment, the company established the Chesapeake SAFE program in July 2010. Through workshop training courses, the program focuses on developing safe behaviors, promoting a safety-conscious culture and reducing risk in all operating areas. By year-end 2010, more than 4,200 employees and consultants participated in 121 workshops in 18 cities across the country.\n\nFrom state-of-the-art training facilities to extensive health and wellness programs, Chesapeake provides employees with the skills they need to succeed both in the field and at the office while creating a well-rounded environment for employees and their families.\n\nChesapeake's commitment to employee health and wellness is also evident at our 72,000-square-foot fitness center, which provides Oklahoma City headquarters employees and their families with on-site access to state-of-the-art health equipment, recreation leagues and group exercise classes. For employees who work outside of our headquarters, we subsidize family fitness memberships and recreational entry fees.\n\nTo further promote healthy lifestyles, the company-wide Living Well program provides financial incentives for employees who participate in regular exercise, education, motivation and intervention. In 2010 more than 6,900 employees participated in Chesapeake's Living Well program with more than 70% earning financial awards.\n\nIn addition, we provide discounted or free memberships to organizations such as Weight Watchers and cover the cost of most registration fees for local races and fitness events. Throughout the year the company also hosts a number of health-related classes and programs, including our award-winning Live Better Forever program, a dynamic new Your Life Matters mental health initiative and Lunch and Learn seminars.\n\nFrom our extensive required safety training to our award-winning health and wellness benefits, Chesapeake is dedicated to providing quality resources to ensure the health and well-being of each of our employees.", + "recall": 0.9327485380116959, + "true_md": "2010 ANNUAL REPORT | 27\n\ntopics covered includes Occupational Safety and Health Administra- tion (OSHA)-required safety training, such as hazard communica- tion, personal protective equipment, confined spaces and respiratory protection. In addition to operations training, we also provide safe work practices, vehicle safety and specialized training for employees and contractors who perform specific tasks such as emergency response. Specialized environmental training is also provided to address topics such as air compliance, waste management and spill prevention.\n\nIn 2010 we conducted a total of 2,306 instructor-led training courses and 67 web-based training courses on safety and environmental pro- grams for employees, contractors, vendors and visitors.\n\nTo further our training efforts and emphasize the importance of creating a safe work environment, the company established the Chesapeake SAFE program in July 2010. Through workshop training courses, the program focuses on developing safe behaviors, promot- ing a safety-conscious culture and reducing risk in all operating areas. By year-end 2010, more than 4,200 employees and consultants partici- pated in 121 workshops in 18 cities across the country.\n\nGreen Frac is also establishing simple guidelines for the company and its vendors to select fracking ingredients that present minimal risks to people and the environment. These guidelines will also be used to\n\nsystem. By reviewing all of the ingredients typically used in each fracking operation, the program identifies additives that can be removed and tests alternatives. To date, the company has eliminated 25% of the additives used in frack fluids in most of its shale plays.\n\nan industry-leading program, Green Frac is a decisive move toward an even greener fluid \n\nChesapeake’s Green Frac ® program was launched in October 2009 to evaluate the types of additives typically used in the fracking process. As \n\nprocess is saving the company an average of $12 million per year in the Marcellus Shale alone. \n\n## Green Frac ®\n\nFrom state-of-the-art training facilities to extensive health and wellness programs, Chesapeake provides employees with the skills they need to succeed both in the field and at the office while creating a well-rounded envi- ronment for employees and their families.\n\nChesapeake’s commitment to employee health and wellness is also evident at our 72,000-square-foot fitness center, which provides Oklahoma City headquarters employees and their families with on-site access to state-of-the-art health equipment, recreation leagues and group exercise classes. For employees who work outside of our headquarters, we subsi- dize family fitness memberships and recreational entry fees. \n\nLearning from the best — Our commitment to creating a safe work environ- ment continued to grow in 2010 with the founding of the Chesapeake SAFE program. Focused on developing safe behaviors, promoting a safety-conscious culture and eliminating risk in all operating areas, the program has trained more than 4,200 employees and consultants. \n\nincrease public understanding of the process and its necessity in the production of American natural gas.\n\nTo further promote healthy lifestyles, the company-wide Living Well program provides financial incentives for employees who participate in regular exercise, education, motivation and intervention. In 2010 more than 6,900 employees participated in Chesapeake’s Living Well program with more than 70% earning financial awards.\n\nIn addition, we provide discounted or free memberships to organiza- tions such as Weight Watchers and cover the cost of most registration fees for local races and fitness events. Throughout the year the company also hosts a number of health-related classes and programs, including our award-winning Live Better Forever program, a dynamic new Your Life Matters mental health initiative and Lunch and Learn seminars.\n\nFrom state-of-the-art training facilities to extensive health and wellness programs, Chesapeake provides employees with the skills they need to succeed both in the field and at the office while creating a well-rounded environment for employees and their families. We are committed to the safety and well-being of our employees, contractors and local populations. We provide initial and refresher safety and environmental train- ing to our employees and contractors. In addition to classroom and hands-on training, we utilize online environmental, health and safety training focused on company policy and procedures for top- ics pertinent to the management of our field assets. The range of \n\nFrom our extensive required safety training to our award-winning health and wellness benefits, Chesapeake is dedicated to providing quality resources to ensure the health and well-being of each of our employees.\n\n## Employees" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.870837878622698, + "doc_id": "011f277928ad2cc1c9ead5031eff65b8e5fcd8c6d7b8faca00aa4134fa80f1dd", + "edit_distance": 0.12962962962962962, + "f1_score": 0.9872122762148338, + "meteor": 0.8922176907498576, + "precision": 0.9897435897435898, + "pred_md": "## Nordstrom, Inc.\n\n## Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nDollar and share amounts in millions except per share, per option and per unit amounts\n\n## NOTE 16: SEGMENT REPORTING\n\n## Segments\n\nWe have two reportable segments: Retail and Credit . Our Retail segment includes our 'Nordstrom' operating segment, which is composed of our Nordstrom full-line stores in the U.S. and our online store at Nordstrom.com. Through our multi-channel initiatives, we have integrated the operations, merchandising and technology of our Nordstrom full-line and online stores, consistent with our customers' expectations of a seamless shopping experience regardless of channel. Our internal reporting to our president, who is our chief operating decision maker, is consistent with these multi-channel initiatives. We aggregate our Nordstrom Rack operating segment into the Retail reporting segment, based on similar economic and other qualitative characteristics. Additionally, we include Nordstromrack.com, HauteLook, Jeffrey, Trunk Club and our Canadian operations in the Retail reporting segment.\n\nThrough our Credit segment, we provide our customers with a variety of payment products and services, including a Nordstrom private label card, two Nordstrom Visa credit cards and a debit card for Nordstrom purchases. Our credit and debit card products also include a loyalty program that provides benefits to our cardholders based on their level of spending.\n\nAmounts in the Corporate/Other column include unallocated corporate expenses and assets, sales return reserve, inter-segment eliminations and other adjustments to segment results necessary for the presentation of consolidated financial results in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles.\n\n## Accounting Policy\n\nIn general, we use the same measurements to compute earnings before income taxes for reportable segments as we do for the consolidated company. However, redemptions of our Nordstrom Notes are included in net sales for our Retail segment. The sales amount in our Corporate/Other column includes an entry to eliminate these transactions from our consolidated net sales. The related Nordstrom Notes expenses are included in our Retail segment at face value. Our Corporate/Other column includes an adjustment to reduce the Nordstrom Notes expense from face value to their estimated cost. In addition, our sales return reserve and other corporate adjustments are recorded in the Corporate/Other column. Other than as described above, the accounting policies of the operating segments are the same as those described in Note 1: Nature of Operations and Summary of Significant Accounting Policies.\n\n62", + "recall": 0.9846938775510204, + "true_md": "## Nordstrom, Inc. Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements Dollar and share amounts in millions except per share, per option and per unit amounts\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements Dollar and share amounts in millions except per share, per option and per unit amounts\n\n## NOTE 16: SEGMENT REPORTING\n\n## Segments We have two reportable segments:\n\n## Accounting Policy In general, we use the same measurements to compute earnings before income taxes for reportable segments as we do for the consolidated\n\n62\n\nSegments We have two reportable segments: Retail and Credit . Our Retail segment includes our “Nordstrom” operating segment, which is composed of our Nordstrom full-line stores in the U.S. and our online store at Nordstrom.com. Through our multi-channel initiatives, we have integrated the operations, merchandising and technology of our Nordstrom full-line and online stores, consistent with our customers’ expectations of a seamless shopping experience regardless of channel. Our internal reporting to our president, who is our chief operating decision maker, is consistent with these multi-channel initiatives. We aggregate our Nordstrom Rack operating segment into the Retail reporting segment, based on similar economic and other qualitative characteristics. Additionally, we include Nordstromrack.com, HauteLook, Jeffrey, Trunk Club and our Canadian operations in the Retail reporting segment.\n\nThrough our Credit segment, we provide our customers with a variety of payment products and services, including a Nordstrom private label card, two Nordstrom Visa credit cards and a debit card for Nordstrom purchases. Our credit and debit card products also include a loyalty program that provides benefits to our cardholders based on their level of spending.\n\nAmounts in the Corporate/Other column include unallocated corporate expenses and assets, sales return reserve, inter-segment eliminations and other adjustments to segment results necessary for the presentation of consolidated financial results in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles. \n\nAccounting Policy In general, we use the same measurements to compute earnings before income taxes for reportable segments as we do for the consolidated company. However, redemptions of our Nordstrom Notes are included in net sales for our Retail segment. The sales amount in our Corporate/Other column includes an entry to eliminate these transactions from our consolidated net sales. The related Nordstrom Notes expenses are included in our Retail segment at face value. Our Corporate/Other column includes an adjustment to reduce the Nordstrom Notes expense from face value to their estimated cost. In addition, our sales return reserve and other corporate adjustments are recorded in the Corporate/Other column. Other than as described above, the accounting policies of the operating segments are the same as those described in Note 1: Nature of Operations and Summary of Significant Accounting Policies." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9467192277644224, + "doc_id": "390d12d6d0656d59bff93cab6ff0e315a9f6734ab288153b775865d253eeead0", + "edit_distance": 0.3723849372384937, + "f1_score": 0.9820359281437125, + "meteor": 0.9432110863829496, + "precision": 0.9820359281437125, + "pred_md": "## Governance and Risk Management\n\n## GOVERNANCE AT ROGERS\n\nRogers is a family-founded, family-controlled company, and we take pride in our proactive and disciplined approach to ensuring that our governance structure and practices instil the confidence of our shareholders.\n\nWith the passing in December 2008 of our founder and previous CEO, Ted Rogers, his voting control of Rogers Communications passed to a trust whose beneficiaries are members of the Rogers family. The trust holds voting control of Rogers Communications for the benefit of successive generations of the Rogers family. The Rogers family are substantial stakeholders, and owned approximately 28 % of our equity as of December 31, 2013.\n\nOur Board of Directors is made up of four members of the Rogers family, and another 13 directors who bring a mix of experience as business leaders in North America. All of our directors are firmly committed to strong oversight and the ongoing creation of shareholder value. The Board as a whole is committed to sound corporate governance, and continually reviews its governance practices and benchmarks them against acknowledged leaders and evolving legislation. The Board believes that Rogers' governance system is effective and that there are appropriate structures and procedures in place.\n\n## G overnance Best Practices\n\nThe majority of our directors are independent and we have adopted many best practices for effective governance:\n\n- GLYPH<129> Separation of CEO and chairman roles\n- GLYPH<129> Independent lead director\n- GLYPH<129> Formal corporate governance policy and charters\n- GLYPH<129> Code of business conduct and whistleblower hotline\n- GLYPH<129> Director share ownership guidelines\n- GLYPH<129> Board and committee in camera discussions\n- GLYPH<129> Annual reviews of Board and director performance\n- GLYPH<129> Audit Committee meetings with internal and external auditors\n- GLYPH<129> Orientation programs for new directors\n- GLYPH<129> Regular Board education sessions\n- GLYPH<129> Committee authority to retain independent advisors\n- GLYPH<129> Director material relationship standards.\n\nWe comply with corporate governance guidelines and standards as a Canadian public company listed on the TSX and as a foreign private issuer listed on the NYSE in the US.\n\n## Board Oversight\n\nThe Board delegates certain responsibilities to its seven standing committees to ensure proper oversight and accountability:\n\n- GLYPH<129> A udit Committee -reviews our accounting policies and practices, the integrity of our financial reporting processes and procedures and the financial statements and other relevant disclosure for release to the public. It also assists the Board in its oversight of our compliance with legal and regulatory requirements for financial reporting, and assesses our internal accounting and financial control systems and the qualifications, independence and work of our internal and external auditors.\n- GLYPH<129> Corporate Governance Committee -assists the Board so it has appropriate systems and procedures for carrying out its responsibilities. This committee develops governance policies and practices and recommends them to the board for approval, and leads the Board in its periodic review of board and committee performance.\n- GLYPH<129> Nominating Committee - identifies prospective candidates to serve on our Board. Nominated directors are either elected by shareholders at a meeting, or appointed by the Board. The committee also recommends nominees for each Board committee, including each committee chair.\n- GLYPH<129> Human Resources Committee -assists the Board in monitoring, reviewing and approving compensation and benefit policies and practices. It is also responsible for recommending the compensation of senior management and monitoring the senior executive succession plan.\n- GLYPH<129> Executive Committee -assists the Board in discharging its responsibilities between meetings, including to act in such areas as specifically designated and authorized at a preceding board meeting to consider matters that may arise from time to time.\n- GLYPH<129> Finance Committee - reviews our investment strategies and general debt and equity structure and reports on them to the Board.\n- GLYPH<129> Pension Committee -oversees the administration of our retiree pension plans and reviews the investment performance and provisions of the plans.\n\nYou can find more details about governance at Rogers in the Investor Relations section of our website (rogers.com/governance), including:\n\n- GLYPH<129> a complete statement of our corporate governance practices\n- GLYPH<129> our codes of conduct and ethics\n- GLYPH<129> full committee charters\n- GLYPH<129> director biographies\n- GLYPH<129> a summary of the differences between the NYSE corporate governance rules that apply to US-based companies and our governance practices as a non-US-based issuer listed on the NYSE.\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC.\n\n71\n\nMANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS", + "recall": 0.9820359281437125, + "true_md": "Rogers is a family-founded, family-controlled company, and we take pride in our proactive and disciplined approach to ensuring that our governance structure and practices instil the confidence of our shareholders.\n\nWith the passing in December 2008 of our founder and previous CEO, Ted Rogers, his voting control of Rogers Communications passed to a trust whose beneficiaries are members of the Rogers family. The trust holds voting control of Rogers Communications for the benefit of successive generations of the Rogers family. The Rogers family are substantial stakeholders, and owned approximately 28 % of our equity as of December 31, 2013.\n\nOur Board of Directors is made up of four members of the Rogers family, and another 13 directors who bring a mix of experience as business leaders in North America. All of our directors are firmly committed to strong oversight and the ongoing creation of shareholder value. The Board as a whole is committed to sound corporate governance, and continually reviews its governance practices and benchmarks them against acknowledged leaders and evolving legislation. The Board believes that Rogers’ governance system is effective and that there are appropriate structures and procedures in place.\n\nThe majority of our directors are independent and we have adopted many best practices for effective governance:\n\nWe comply with corporate governance guidelines and standards as a Canadian public company listed on the TSX and as a foreign private issuer listed on the NYSE in the US.\n\n- GLYPH<129> Separation of CEO and chairman roles\n\n- GLYPH<129> Independent lead director\n\n- GLYPH<129> Formal corporate governance policy and charters\n\n- GLYPH<129> Code of business conduct and whistleblower hotline\n\n- GLYPH<129> Director share ownership guidelines\n\n- GLYPH<129> Board and committee in camera discussions\n\n- GLYPH<129> Annual reviews of Board and director performance\n\n- GLYPH<129> Audit Committee meetings with internal and external auditors\n\n- GLYPH<129> Orientation programs for new directors\n\n- GLYPH<129> Regular Board education sessions\n\n- GLYPH<129> Committee authority to retain independent advisors\n\n- GLYPH<129> Director material relationship standards.\n\n## Governance and Risk Management\n\n## GOVERNANCE AT ROGERS\n\n- GLYPH<129> Corporate Governance Committee – assists the Board so it has appropriate systems and procedures for carrying out its responsibilities. This committee develops governance policies and practices and recommends them to the board for approval, and leads the Board in its periodic review of board and committee performance.\n\n- GLYPH<129> Nominating Committee – identifies prospective candidates to serve on our Board. Nominated directors are either elected by shareholders at a meeting, or appointed by the Board. The committee also recommends nominees for each Board committee, including each committee chair.\n\n- GLYPH<129> Human Resources Committee – assists the Board in monitoring, reviewing and approving compensation and benefit policies and practices. It is also responsible for recommending the compensation of senior management and monitoring the senior executive succession plan.\n\n- GLYPH<129> Executive Committee – assists the Board in discharging its responsibilities between meetings, including to act in such areas as specifically designated and authorized at a preceding board meeting to consider matters that may arise from time to time.\n\n- GLYPH<129> Finance Committee – reviews our investment strategies and general debt and equity structure and reports on them to the Board.\n\n- GLYPH<129> Pension Committee – oversees the administration of our retiree pension plans and reviews the investment performance and provisions of the plans.\n\n- GLYPH<129> a complete statement of our corporate governance practices\n\n- GLYPH<129> our codes of conduct and ethics\n\n- GLYPH<129> full committee charters\n\n- GLYPH<129> director biographies\n\n- GLYPH<129> a summary of the differences between the NYSE corporate governance rules that apply to US-based companies and our governance practices as a non-US-based issuer listed on the NYSE.\n\n- GLYPH<129>A udit Committee – reviews our accounting policies and practices, the integrity of our financial reporting processes and procedures and the financial statements and other relevant disclosure for release to the public. It also assists the Board in its oversight of our compliance with legal and regulatory requirements for financial reporting, and assesses our internal accounting and financial control systems and the qualifications, independence and work of our internal and external auditors.\n\nYou can find more details about governance at Rogers in the Investor Relations section of our website (rogers.com/governance), including:\n\nThe Board delegates certain responsibilities to its seven standing committees to ensure proper oversight and accountability:\n\n## Board Oversight\n\n## G overnance Best Practices\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 71\n\nMANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AN D ANALYSIS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9171577045558618, + "doc_id": "25cd8fde84eb574ba964e55d916ed413104fbad0cec6aa73d3335ad2d4ebf9fc", + "edit_distance": 0.7485632183908046, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.8055833648441996, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## The Americas\n\nSMBC Branches and Representative Offices\n\n## New York Branch\n\n277 Park Avenue, New York,\n\nNY 10172, U.S.A.\n\nTel: 1 (212) 224-4000\n\nFax: 1 (212) 593-9522\n\n## Cayman Branch\n\nP.O. Box 694, Edward Street, George Town, Grand Cayman, Cayman Islands\n\n## Los Angeles Branch\n\n601 South Figueroa Street, Suite 1800, Los Angeles, CA 90017, U.S.A.\n\nTel: 1 (213) 452-7800\n\nFax: 1 (213) 623-6832\n\n## San Francisco Branch\n\n555 California Street, Suite 3350,\n\nSan Francisco, CA 94104, U.S.A.\n\nTel:\n\n1 (415) 616-3000\n\nFax: 1 (415) 397-1475\n\n## Houston Representative Office\n\nTwo Allen Center, 1200 Smith Street, Suite 1140 Houston, Texas\n\n77002, U.S.A.\n\nTel:\n\n1 (713) 277-3500\n\nFax: 1 (713) 277-3555\n\n## Mexico City Representative Office\n\nTorre Altiva Boulevard Manuel Avila Camacho 138 Piso 2, Loc. B Lomas de Chapultepec, 11000,\n\nMexico, D.F.\n\nTel: 52 (55) 2623-0200\n\nFax: 52 (55) 2623-1375\n\n## Bogota Representative Office\n\nCarrera 9 #113-52 Oficina 808,\n\nEdificio Torres Unidas 2, Bogotá D.C., Colombia Tel: 57 (1) 619-7200 Fax: 57 (1) 629-4288\n\n222\n\nSMFG 2011\n\nSMBC Principal Subsidiaries/ Affiliates\n\nSMFG Network\n\n## Manufacturers Bank\n\n515 South Figueroa Street,\n\nLos Angeles, CA 90071, U.S.A.\n\nTel: 1 (213) 489-6200\n\nFax: 1 (213) 489-6254\n\n## Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation of Canada\n\nErnst & Young Tower, Toronto Dominion Centre, Suite 1400, P.O. Box 172, 222 Bay Street, Toronto, Ontario M5K 1H6, Canada Tel: 1 (416) 368-4766 Fax: 1 (416) 367-3565\n\n## Banco Sumitomo Mitsui Brasileiro S.A.\n\nAvenida Paulista, 37-11 e 12 andar, Sao Paulo-SP-CEP 01311- 902, Brazil\n\nTel:\n\n55 (11) 3178-8000\n\nFax: 55 (11) 3289-1668\n\n## SMBC Capital Markets, Inc.\n\n277 Park Avenue, New York,\n\nNY 10172, U.S.A.\n\nTel: 1 (212) 224-5100\n\nFax: 1 (212) 224-5181\n\n## SMBC Leasing and Finance, Inc.\n\n277 Park Avenue, New York,\n\nNY 10172, U.S.A.\n\nTel:\n\n1 (212) 224-5200\n\nFax: 1 (212) 224-5222\n\n## SMBC Nikko Securities America, Inc.\n\n277 Park Avenue, New York,\n\nNY 10172, U.S.A.\n\nTel: 1 (212) 224-5300\n\nFax: 1 (212) 224-5333\n\n## JRI America, Inc.\n\n277 Park Avenue, New York, NY 10172, U.S.A. Tel: 1 (212) 224-4200 Fax: 1 (212) 224-4379\n\n## Europe, Middle-East and Africa\n\nSMBC Branches and Representative Offices\n\n## Düsseldorf Branch\n\nPrinzenallee 7, 40549 Düsseldorf, Federal Republic of Germany Tel: 49 (211) 36190 Fax: 49 (211) 3619236\n\n## Brussels Branch\n\nNeo Building, Rue Montoyer 51,\n\nBox 6, 1000 Brussels, Belgium\n\nTel:\n\n32 (2) 551-5000\n\nFax: 32 (2) 513-4100\n\n## Dubai Branch\n\nBuilding One, 5th Floor, Gate\n\nPrecinct, Dubai International\n\nFinancial Centre, PO Box 506559\n\nDubai, United Arab Emirates\n\nTel:\n\n971 (4) 428-8000\n\nFax: 971 (4) 428-8001\n\n## Madrid Representative Office\n\nVillanueva, 12-1. B, 28001 Madrid,\n\nSpain\n\nTel:\n\n34 (91) 576-6196\n\nFax: 34 (91) 577-7525\n\n## SMBC Amsterdam Representative Office\n\nWorld Trade Center, Tower D Level 12, Strawinskylaan 1733, 1077 XX Amsterdam, The Netherlands\n\nTel:\n\n31 (20) 718-3888\n\nFax: 31 (20) 718-3889\n\n## Prague Representative Office\n\nInternational Business Centre, Pobrezni 3,186 00 Prague 8, Czech Republic Tel: 420-224-832-911 Fax: 420-224-832-933", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## Europe, Middle-East and Africa\n\n## The Americas\n\n## New York Branch\n\n## Manufacturers Bank\n\n## Düsseldorf Branch\n\n## Cayman Branch\n\n## Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation of Canada\n\n## Brussels Branch\n\n## Los Angeles Branch\n\n## Banco Sumitomo Mitsui Brasileiro S.A.\n\n## San Francisco Branch\n\n## Dubai Branch\n\n## Madrid Representative Office\n\n## Houston Representative Office\n\n## SMBC Capital Markets, Inc.\n\n## SMBC Amsterdam Representative Office\n\n## SMBC Leasing and Finance, Inc.\n\n## Mexico City Representative Office\n\n## SMBC Nikko Securities America, Inc.\n\n## Prague Representative Office\n\n## Bogota Representative Office\n\n## JRI America, Inc.\n\nSMFG 2011 222\n\nInternational Business Centre, Pobrezni 3,186 00 Prague 8, Czech Republic Tel: 420-224-832-911 Fax: 420-224-832-933\n\n277 Park Avenue, New York, NY 10172, U.S.A. Tel: 1 (212) 224-5300 Fax: 1 (212) 224-5333\n\n277 Park Avenue, New York, NY 10172, U.S.A. Tel: 1 (212) 224-4200 Fax: 1 (212) 224-4379\n\nCarrera 9 #113-52 Oficina 808, Edificio Torres Unidas 2, Bogotá D.C., Colombia Tel: 57 (1) 619-7200 Fax: 57 (1) 629-4288\n\nTorre Altiva Boulevard Manuel Avila Camacho 138 Piso 2, Loc. B Lomas de Chapultepec, 11000, Mexico, D.F. Tel: 52 (55) 2623-0200 Fax: 52 (55) 2623-1375\n\n277 Park Avenue, New York, NY 10172, U.S.A. Tel: 1 (212) 224-5200 Fax: 1 (212) 224-5222\n\nWorld Trade Center, Tower D Level 12, Strawinskylaan 1733, 1077 XX Amsterdam, The Netherlands Tel: 31 (20) 718-3888 Fax: 31 (20) 718-3889\n\nVillanueva, 12-1. B, 28001 Madrid, Spain Tel: 34 (91) 576-6196 Fax: 34 (91) 577-7525\n\n277 Park Avenue, New York, NY 10172, U.S.A. Tel: 1 (212) 224-5100 Fax: 1 (212) 224-5181\n\nTwo Allen Center, 1200 Smith Street, Suite 1140 Houston, Texas 77002, U.S.A. Tel: 1 (713) 277-3500 Fax: 1 (713) 277-3555\n\nAvenida Paulista, 37-11 e 12 andar, Sao Paulo-SP-CEP 01311- 902, Brazil Tel: 55 (11) 3178-8000 Fax: 55 (11) 3289-1668\n\nBuilding One, 5th Floor, Gate Precinct, Dubai International Financial Centre, PO Box 506559 Dubai, United Arab Emirates Tel: 971 (4) 428-8000 Fax: 971 (4) 428-8001\n\n555 California Street, Suite 3350, San Francisco, CA 94104, U.S.A. Tel: 1 (415) 616-3000 Fax: 1 (415) 397-1475\n\n601 South Figueroa Street, Suite 1800, Los Angeles, CA 90017, U.S.A. Tel: 1 (213) 452-7800 Fax: 1 (213) 623-6832\n\nErnst & Young Tower, Toronto Dominion Centre, Suite 1400, P.O. Box 172, 222 Bay Street, Toronto, Ontario M5K 1H6, Canada Tel: 1 (416) 368-4766 Fax: 1 (416) 367-3565\n\nNeo Building, Rue Montoyer 51, Box 6, 1000 Brussels, Belgium Tel: 32 (2) 551-5000 Fax: 32 (2) 513-4100\n\nP.O. Box 694, Edward Street, George Town, Grand Cayman, Cayman Islands\n\n277 Park Avenue, New York, NY 10172, U.S.A. Tel: 1 (212) 224-4000 Fax: 1 (212) 593-9522\n\n515 South Figueroa Street, Los Angeles, CA 90071, U.S.A. Tel: 1 (213) 489-6200 Fax: 1 (213) 489-6254\n\nPrinzenallee 7, 40549 Düsseldorf, Federal Republic of Germany Tel: 49 (211) 36190 Fax: 49 (211) 3619236\n\nSMBC Branches and Representative Offices\n\nSMBC Principal Subsidiaries/ Affiliates SMFG Network\n\nSMBC Branches and Representative Offices" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9218282863119294, + "doc_id": "cdd940bbf19e4a9381b1c62f6abc2ae994c3a745222946995698fbcf4bc7a09b", + "edit_distance": 0.5515088449531738, + "f1_score": 0.9775112443778111, + "meteor": 0.8457674855330723, + "precision": 0.9819277108433735, + "pred_md": "## FINANCIAL CONDITION\n\n## Capital Resources\n\nOur capital resources consist primarily of cash flow from operations, cash and cash equivalents, available lines of credit, funds available under our accounts receivable securitization program and issuances of long-term debt.\n\nThis information is forward-looking and should be read in conjunction with 'About forward-looking information' and 'Risks and Uncertainties Affecting Our Business' and other disclosure about various economic, competitive and regulatory assumptions, factors and risks that could cause our actual future financial and operating results to differ from those currently expected.\n\nWe anticipate generating a net cash surplus in 2014 from our cash from operations. We expect that we will have sufficient capital resources to satisfy our cash funding requirements in 2014, including the funding of dividends on our common shares, repayment of maturing long-term debt and other financing activities, investing activities, and other requirements, taking into account our opening cash balance, cash from operations, the amount available under our $2.0 billion bank credit facility, and our accounts securitization program and from the issuance of short-term and, or long-term debt from time to time. At December 31, 2013, there were no significant restrictions on the flow of funds between Rogers and its subsidiary companies.\n\nWe believe that we can satisfy foreseeable additional funding requirements by issuing additional debt financing, which, depending on market conditions, could include restructuring our existing bank credit and letter of credit facilities, issuing public or private debt, amending the terms of our accounts receivable securitization program or issuing equity. We may also refinance a portion of existing debt depending on market conditions and other factors. There is no assurance, however, that this will or can be done.\n\n## Bank Credit and Letter of Credit Facilities\n\nWe have $2.5 billion of bank credit and letter of credit facilities. Each of these facilities is unsecured and guaranteed by Rogers Communications Partnership and ranks equally with all of our senior notes and debentures. The terms of our bank credit facility are committed by the participating financial institutions until it expires in July 2017. As at December 31, 2013, there were no advances outstanding under our $2.0 billion bank credit facility and there were letters of credit totalling $0.5 billion outstanding under our letter of credit facilities.\n\n## Liquidity\n\nWe had approximately $4.5 billion of available liquidity at December 31, 2013, as compared to $3.1 billion available at December 31, 2012:\n\n- GLYPH<129> $2.3 billion in cash and cash equivalents (2012 - $0.2 billion)\n- GLYPH<129> $2.0 billion available under our bank credit facility (2012 - $2.0 billion)\n- GLYPH<129> $0.2 billion available under the $0.9 billion accounts receivable securitization program (2012 - $0.9 billion).\n\n## Covenants\n\nWe are currently in compliance with all covenants under our debt instruments. At December 31, 2013, there were no financial leverage covenants in effect other than those under our bank credit and letter of credit facilities (see Terms and conditions under Note 18 to the 2013 audited consolidated financial statements).\n\n## Credit Ratings\n\nCredit ratings provide an independent measure of credit quality of an issue of securities, and can affect our ability to obtain short-term and long-term financing and the terms of the financing. If rating agencies lower the credit ratings on our debt, particularly a downgrade below investment grade, it could adversely affect our cost of financing and access to liquidity and capital.\n\nWe have engaged each of Fitch Ratings (Fitch), Moody's Investors Service (Moody's) and Standard & Poor's Ratings Services (Standard & Poor's) to rate our public debt issues. In May 2013, each of Fitch and Standard & Poor's upgraded RCI's senior unsecured debt to BBB+ (from BBB) with a stable outlook. Moody's comparably equivalent rating of Baa1 with a stable outlook has not changed from last year.\n\nThe table below shows the credit ratings on our borrowings received from the rating agencies as of December 31, 2013:\n\nRatings for debt instruments across the universe of composite rates range from AAA (Standard & Poor's and Fitch) or Aaa (Moody's) representing the highest quality of securities rated, to D (Standard & Poor's), C (Moody's) and Substantial Risk (Fitch) for the lowest quality of securities rated.\n\nCredit ratings are not recommendations for investors to purchase, hold or sell the rated securities, nor are they a comment on market price or investor suitability. There is no assurance that a rating will remain in effect for a given period of time, or that a rating will not be revised or withdrawn entirely by a rating agency if it believes circumstances warrant it. The ratings on our senior debt provided by Standard & Poor's, Fitch and Moody's are investment grade ratings.\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC.\n\n61\n\nMANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS", + "recall": 0.9731343283582089, + "true_md": "MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AN D ANALYSIS\n\n## Covenants\n\n## FINANCIAL CONDITION\n\n## Capital Resources\n\n## Credit Ratings\n\n## Bank Credit and Letter of Credit Facilities\n\n## Liquidity\n\nWe have $2.5 billion of bank credit and letter of credit facilities. Each of these facilities is unsecured and guaranteed by Rogers Communications Partnership and ranks equally with all of our senior notes and debentures. The terms of our bank credit facility are committed by the participating financial institutions until it expires in July 2017. As at December 31, 2013, there were no advances outstanding under our $2.0 billion bank credit facility and there were letters of credit totalling $0.5 billion outstanding under our letter of credit facilities.\n\nWe had approximately $4.5 billion of available liquidity at December 31, 2013, as compared to $3.1 billion available at December 31, 2012:\n\nWe believe that we can satisfy foreseeable additional funding requirements by issuing additional debt financing, which, depending on market conditions, could include restructuring our existing bank credit and letter of credit facilities, issuing public or private debt, amending the terms of our accounts receivable securitization program or issuing equity. We may also refinance a portion of existing debt depending on market conditions and other factors. There is no assurance, however, that this will or can be done.\n\nWe anticipate generating a net cash surplus in 2014 from our cash from operations. We expect that we will have sufficient capital resources to satisfy our cash funding requirements in 2014, including the funding of dividends on our common shares, repayment of maturing long-term debt and other financing activities, investing activities, and other requirements, taking into account our opening cash balance, cash from operations, the amount available under our $2.0 billion bank credit facility, and our accounts securitization program and from the issuance of short-term and, or long-term debt from time to time. At December 31, 2013, there were no significant restrictions on the flow of funds between Rogers and its subsidiary companies.\n\nThis information is forward-looking and should be read in conjunction with “About forward-looking information” and “Risks and Uncertainties Affecting Our Business” and other disclosure about various economic, competitive and regulatory assumptions, factors and risks that could cause our actual future financial and operating results to differ from those currently expected.\n\nOur capital resources consist primarily of cash flow from operations, cash and cash equivalents, available lines of credit, funds available under our accounts receivable securitization program and issuances of long-term debt.\n\nWe are currently in compliance with all covenants under our debt instruments. At December 31, 2013, there were no financial leverage covenants in effect other than those under our bank credit and letter of credit facilities (see Terms and conditions under Note 18 to the 2013 audited consolidated financial statements).\n\nCredit ratings provide an independent measure of credit quality of an issue of securities, and can affect our ability to obtain short-term and long-term financing and the terms of the financing. If rating agencies lower the credit ratings on our debt, particularly a downgrade below investment grade, it could adversely affect our cost of financing and access to liquidity and capital.\n\nWe have engaged each of Fitch Ratings (Fitch), Moody’s Investors Service (Moody’s) and Standard & Poor’s Ratings Services (Standard & Poor’s) to rate our public debt issues. In May 2013, each of Fitch and Standard & Poor’s upgraded RCI’s senior unsecured debt to BBB+ (from BBB) with a stable outlook. Moody’s comparably equivalent rating of Baa1 with a stable outlook has not changed from last year.\n\nThe table below shows the credit ratings on our borrowings received from the rating agencies as of December 31, 2013:\n\nRatings for debt instruments across the universe of composite rates range from AAA (Standard & Poor’s and Fitch) or Aaa (Moody’s) representing the highest quality of securities rated, to D (Standard & Poor’s), C (Moody’s) and Substantial Risk (Fitch) for the lowest quality of securities rated.\n\nCredit ratings are not recommendations for investors to purchase, hold or sell the rated securities, nor are they a comment on market price or investor suitability. There is no assurance that a rating will remain in effect for a given period of time, or that a rating will not be revised or withdrawn entirely by a rating agency if it believes circumstances warrant it. The ratings on our senior debt provided by Standard & Poor’s, Fitch and Moody’s are investment grade ratings.\n\n- GLYPH<129> $2.3 billion in cash and cash equivalents (2012 – $0.2 billion)\n\n- GLYPH<129> $2.0 billion available under our bank credit facility (2012 – $2.0 billion)\n\n- GLYPH<129> $0.2 billion available under the $0.9 billion accounts receivable securitization program (2012 – $0.9 billion).\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 61" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8343685812604109, + "doc_id": "e22d429e2bcf7ee4b1880068e1fab5d0576f47139b8010ae5469d3e236df8029", + "edit_distance": 0.26556016597510373, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.764172786035842, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Nordstrom Rack net sales for the quarter increased $130, or 17%, reflecting 27 new Nordstrom Rack store openings since the fourth quarter of 2013, while comparable sales increased 3.2%. On a comparable basis, the average selling price of Nordstrom Rack merchandise increased while the number of items sold was flat. Shoes and Accessories were the category highlights for Nordstrom Rack.\n\n## Gross Profit\n\nOur total company gross profit rate decreased 53 basis points compared with the same period in the prior year, primarily due to increased markdowns at Nordstrom Rack.\n\n## Retail Selling, General, and Administrative Expenses\n\nOur Retail SG&A rate increased 80 basis points primarily due to expenses related to the acquisition of Trunk Club and ongoing technology and fulfillment expenses.\n\n## Credit Expenses\n\nIn the fourth quarter, expenses for our Credit segment of $54 increased from $38 in the prior year. The increase was primarily driven by higher operational expenses resulting from a 6% increase in credit volume during the fourth quarter of 2014. The fourth quarter of 2013 also included the impact of the conversion of our Nordstrom Rewards travel benefit into Nordstrom Notes, which decreased operational expenses in the prior year.\n\nFor further information on our quarterly results in 2014 and 2013, refer to Note 17: Selected Quarterly Data in the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements in Item 8: Financial Statements and Supplementary Data.\n\n## 2015 Outlook\n\nOur expectations for 2015 are as follows:\n\n1 This outlook does not include the impact of any future share repurchases.\n\nCapital expenditures, net of property incentives, of approximately $1.2 billion are expected in 2015, an increase from $751 in 2014. The increase relates to store expansion, including Canada and Manhattan, and ongoing investments to improve the customer experience through flagship store remodels and a third fulfillment center expected to open in the second half of the year. To date in 2015, we have opened our second full-line store in Canada. We plan to open 27 Nordstrom Rack stores, three additional Nordstrom full-line stores in the U.S. and another full-line store in Canada during 2015. Planned net store openings are expected to increase our retail square footage by approximately 6.1%.\n\nNordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 25", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Nordstrom Rack net sales for the quarter increased $130, or 17%, reflecting 27 new Nordstrom Rack store openings since the fourth quarter of 2013, while comparable sales increased 3.2%. On a comparable basis, the average selling price of Nordstrom Rack merchandise increased while the number of items sold was flat. Shoes and Accessories were the category highlights for Nordstrom Rack.\n\nGross Profit Our total company gross profit rate decreased 53 basis points compared with the same period in the prior year, primarily due to increased markdowns at Nordstrom Rack.\n\nRetail Selling, General, and Administrative Expenses Our Retail SG&A rate increased 80 basis points primarily due to expenses related to the acquisition of Trunk Club and ongoing technology and fulfillment expenses.\n\nCredit Expenses In the fourth quarter, expenses for our Credit segment of $54 increased from $38 in the prior year. The increase was primarily driven by higher operational expenses resulting from a 6% increase in credit volume during the fourth quarter of 2014. The fourth quarter of 2013 also included the impact of the conversion of our Nordstrom Rewards travel benefit into Nordstrom Notes, which decreased operational expenses in the prior year.\n\nFor further information on our quarterly results in 2014 and 2013, refer to Note 17: Selected Quarterly Data in the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements in Item 8: Financial Statements and Supplementary Data.\n\nCapital expenditures, net of property incentives, of approximately $1.2 billion are expected in 2015, an increase from $751 in 2014. The increase relates to store expansion, including Canada and Manhattan, and ongoing investments to improve the customer experience through flagship store remodels and a third fulfillment center expected to open in the second half of the year. To date in 2015, we have opened our second full-line store in Canada. We plan to open 27 Nordstrom Rack stores, three additional Nordstrom full-line stores in the U.S. and another full-line store in Canada during 2015. Planned net store openings are expected to increase our retail square footage by approximately 6.1%.\n\n1 This outlook does not include the impact of any future share repurchases.\n\n2015 Outlook Our expectations for 2015 are as follows:\n\n## 2015 Outlook Our expectations for 2015 are as follows:\n\nNordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 25\n\n## Gross Profit Our total company gross profit rate decreased 53 basis points compared with the same period in the prior year, primarily due to increased\n\n## Credit Expenses In the fourth quarter, expenses for our Credit segment of $54 increased from $38 in the prior year. The increase was primarily driven by" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7344516052752916, + "doc_id": "4a035e72f01588594971e94d08710f57a6a4f0f12ae7052cf5587fc3eaca222d", + "edit_distance": 0.5914285714285714, + "f1_score": 0.9114583333333335, + "meteor": 0.7421077772875375, + "precision": 0.9308510638297872, + "pred_md": "»› THE RACK GOES ONLINE SHOPPING GENIUSES CAN NOW CONTINUE THEIR STYLE SEARCH AT NORDSTROMRACK.COM, WHERE CUSTOMERS CAN EASILY CHOOSE HOW THEY SHOP BOTH HAUTELOOK AND NORDSTROM RACK.\n\n»› THE RACK GOES ONLINE SHOPPING GENIUSES CAN NOW CONTINUE THEIR STYLE SEARCH AT NORDSTROMRACK.COM, WHERE CUSTOMERS CAN EASILY CHOOSE HOW THEY SHOP BOTH HAUTELOOK AND NORDSTROM RACK.\n\nour engagement with customers. In 2014, we added more than 1 million new Rewards accounts, a 15% increase from the previous year. We want to give customers more choices with our loyalty program, and our goal is to provide an integrated multi-tender program in all stores and online later this year. We know our Rewards members are many of our most loyal and best customers. So growing these relationships by offering programs that appeal to more customers will be beneficial in the long term.\n\n## CONCLUSION\n\nOur strategy is based on the customer and will remain so. Customers' expectations of speed, convenience, personalization and mobile are increasing. As we continue on our journey, we recognize it's imperative for us to invest for the future and find ways to make our stores more\n\n«‹ THAT'S A RECORD! WE OPENED 27 NEW NORDSTROM RACK STORES IN 2014-THE MOST WE'VE EVER OPENED IN ONE YEAR.\n\n«‹ THAT'S A RECORD! WE OPENED 27 NEW NORDSTROM RACK STORES IN 2014-THE MOST WE'VE EVER OPENED IN ONE YEAR.\n\nconvenient and our online experience richer. We believe we are well positioned to deliver a great experience for our customers-no matter how they choose to shop with Nordstrom.\n\n## Blake W. Nordstrom\n\nPresident, Nordstrom, Inc.\n\nPeter E. Nordstrom\n\nPresident of Merchandising, Nordstrom, Inc.\n\n## Erik B. Nordstrom\n\nPresident of Nordstrom.com, Nordstrom, Inc.\n\n' I don't think I could've received better news today. Nordstrom Rack has now launched online! '\n\nOUR CUSTOMER, JOANNA D.\n\n9", + "recall": 0.8928571428571429, + "true_md": "GLYPH<guillemotleft.case>GLYPH<guilsinglleft.case> THAT’S A RECORD! WE OPENED 27 NEW NORDSTROM RACK STORES IN 2014GLYPH<emdash.case>THE MOST WE’VE EVER OPENED IN ONE YEAR.\n\nGLYPH<guillemotright.case>GLYPH<guilsinglright.case> THE RACK GOES ONLINE SHOPPING GENIUSES CAN NOW CONTINUE THEIR STYLE SEARCH AT NORDSTROMRACK.COM, WHERE CUSTOMERS CAN EASILY CHOOSE HOW THEY SHOP BOTH HAUTELOOK AND NORDSTROM RACK. \n\nconvenient and our online experience richer. We believe we are well positioned to deliver a great experience for our customers—no matter how they choose to shop with Nordstrom. \n\nour engagement with customers. In 2014, we added more than 1 million new Rewards accounts, a 15% increase from the previous year. We want to give customers more choices with our loyalty program, and our goal is to provide an integrated multi-tender program in all stores and online later this year. We know our Rewards members are many of our most loyal and best customers. So growing these relationships by offering programs that appeal to more customers will be beneficial in the long term.\n\nOur strategy is based on the customer and will remain so. Customers’ expectations of speed, convenience, personalization and mobile are increasing. As we continue on our journey, we recognize it’s imperative for us to invest for the future and find ways to make our stores more \n\n“ I don’t think I could’ve received better news today. Nordstrom Rack has now launched online! ” OUR CUSTOMER, JOANNA D. \n\n## CONCLUSION\n\nBlake W. Nordstrom President, Nordstrom, Inc.\n\nPeter E. Nordstrom President of Merchandising, Nordstrom, Inc.\n\nErik B. Nordstrom President of Nordstrom.com, Nordstrom, Inc.\n\n9" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8804940707681058, + "doc_id": "25e1713e965a0cf878b91449787d3d221e8a30b8a25d6bda62e3b781ae3b5528", + "edit_distance": 0.6586206896551724, + "f1_score": 0.9657794676806084, + "meteor": 0.7886461184325336, + "precision": 0.9694656488549618, + "pred_md": "## (b) Lessor side\n\n## (i) Breakdown of lease investment assets\n\n(ii) The scheduled collections of lease receivables and investment assets are as follows:\n\nLease payments receivable related to lease receivables\n\nLease payments receivable related to investment assets\n\n(iii) Non-transfer ownership finance leases, which commenced in fiscal years beginning before April 1, 2008, are valued at their appropriate book value, net of accumulated depreciation, as of March 31, 2008, and recorded as the beginning balance of fiscal 2008 of 'Lease receivables and investment assets.' Moreover, interest on such non-transfer ownership finance leases during the remaining term of the leases is allocated over the lease term using the straight-line method. As a result of this accounting treatment, 'Income before income taxes and minority interests' for the fiscal year ended March 31, 2011 was ¥10,115 million ($122 million) more than it would have been if such transactions had been treated in a similar way to sales of the underlying assets.\n\n(2) Operating leases\n\n## (a) Lessee side\n\nFuture minimum lease payments on operating leases which were not cancelable at March 31, 2011 and 2010 were as follows:\n\n## (b) Lessor side\n\nFuture minimum lease payments on operating leases which were not cancelable at March 31, 2011 and 2010 were as follows:\n\nFuture lease payments receivable on operating leases which were not cancelable amounting to ¥0 million ($0 million) on the lessor side were pledged as collateral for borrowings.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n97\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nSMFG", + "recall": 0.9621212121212122, + "true_md": "SMFG Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n- (b) Lessor side\n\n- (b) Lessor side\n\nFuture lease payments receivable on operating leases which were not cancelable amounting to ¥0 million ($0 million) on the lessor side were pledged as collateral for borrowings.\n\nFuture minimum lease payments on operating leases which were not cancelable at March 31, 2011 and 2010 were as follows:\n\nFuture minimum lease payments on operating leases which were not cancelable at March 31, 2011 and 2010 were as follows:\n\n- (2) Operating leases\n\n- (a) Lessee side\n\n(iii) Non-transfer ownership finance leases, which commenced in fiscal years beginning before April 1, 2008, are valued at their appropriate book value, net of accumulated depreciation, as of March 31, 2008, and recorded as the beginning balance of fiscal 2008 of “Lease receivables and investment assets.” Moreover, interest on such non-transfer ownership finance leases during the remaining term of the leases is allocated over the lease term using the straight-line method. As a result of this accounting treatment, “Income before income taxes and minority interests” for the fiscal year ended March 31, 2011 was ¥10,115 million ($122 million) more than it would have been if such transactions had been treated in a similar way to sales of the underlying assets.\n\nLease payments receivable related to investment assets\n\n(ii) The scheduled collections of lease receivables and investment assets are as follows: Lease payments receivable related to lease receivables\n\nSMFG 2011 97\n\n(i) Breakdown of lease investment assets" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.884042100167749, + "doc_id": "23d29f9030e4a4bad6451ab5a465da0938a64560c9f639bd28c3a7fb3d93606c", + "edit_distance": 0.35658914728682173, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9880867052703434, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## SIGNATURES\n\nPursuant to the requirements of Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, the registrant has duly caused this report to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned, thereunto duly authorized.\n\n## NORDSTROM, INC.\n\n(Registrant)\n\n/s/\n\nMichael G. Koppel\n\nMichael G. Koppel\n\nExecutive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer\n\n(Principal Financial Officer)\n\nDate: March 16, 2015\n\nPursuant to the requirements of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, this report has been signed below by the following persons on behalf of the registrant and in the capacities and on the date indicated.\n\nPrincipal Financial Officer:\n\nPrincipal Executive Officer:\n\nDate:\n\nMarch 16, 2015\n\n70", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## SIGNATURES\n\nPursuant to the requirements of Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, the registrant has duly caused this report to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned, thereunto duly authorized.\n\nNORDSTROM, INC. (Registrant)\n\nDate: March 16, 2015 \n\nPursuant to the requirements of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, this report has been signed below by the following persons on behalf of the registrant and in the capacities and on the date indicated.\n\nDate: March 16, 2015\n\n70\n\n/s/ Michael G. Koppel Michael G. Koppel Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer (Principal Financial Officer)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9103925050527525, + "doc_id": "b793cff8e41c6ce5bab121cd92f3fc7b0e2b5fbdd3916754f20c29f6e7625e86", + "edit_distance": 0.37423312883435583, + "f1_score": 0.96, + "meteor": 0.9608808095906228, + "precision": 0.9767441860465116, + "pred_md": "SMFG\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nNotes: 1. Net unrealized gains (losses) on other securities shown above include gains of ¥1,153 million ($14 million) for the fiscal year ended March 31, 2011 and ¥105 million for the fiscal year ended March 31, 2010 that are recognized in the fiscal year's earnings by applying fair value hedge accounting.\n\n2. Consolidated balance sheet amounts of other securities whose fair values are extremely difficult to determine are as follows:\n\nThese amounts are not included in '(c) Other securities' since there are no market prices and it is extremely difficult to determine their fair values.\n\n(d) Held-to-maturity bonds sold during the years ended March 31, 2011 and 2010\n\nThere are no corresponding transactions.\n\n(e) Other securities sold during the years ended March 31, 2011 and 2010\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n110", + "recall": 0.9438202247191011, + "true_md": "SMFG Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nNotes: 1. Net unrealized gains (losses) on other securities shown above include gains of ¥1,153 million ($14 million) for the fiscal year ended March 31, 2011 and ¥105 million for the fiscal year ended March 31, 2010 that are recognized in the fiscal year’s earnings by applying fair value hedge accounting.\n\n2. Consolidated balance sheet amounts of other securities whose fair values are extremely difficult to determine are as follows:\n\n- (d) Held-to-maturity bonds sold during the years ended March 31, 2011 and 2010 There are no corresponding transactions.\n\n- (e) Other securities sold during the years ended March 31, 2011 and 2010\n\nSMFG 2011 110\n\nThese amounts are not included in “(c) Other securities” since there are no market prices and it is extremely difficult to determine their fair values." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.889287699968307, + "doc_id": "e81dc5a166638bd030cb65ce96de9ea83cd3084a5e9a3b02055cd46173c77ba6", + "edit_distance": 0.21029082774049218, + "f1_score": 0.9748743718592966, + "meteor": 0.9733578840920594, + "precision": 0.9651741293532339, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 31 - SHARE BASED PAYMENTS continued\n\nRSUs awarded during the year ended 31 December 2013:\n\nEstimated Fair Value\n\nUpon vesting, and after a certain administrative period, the RSUs are converted to ordinary shares of the Company. Once converted to ordinary shares, the RSUs are no longer restricted. As the daily closing price of the Company's ordinary shares approximates its estimated fair value at that time, the Company used the grant date closing price to estimate the fair value of the RSUs.\n\nThe total share based compensation expense for the years ended 31 December 2014 and 2013 was $1.9 million and $1.6 million, respectively.\n\n## NOTE 32 - RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS\n\nN Martin was previously a partner of Minter Ellison Lawyers and is now a consultant for Minter Ellison Lawyers as well as a Director of the Company. Minter Ellison Lawyers were paid a non material amount for legal services for the year ended 31 December 2014 and $0.2 million for legal services for the years ended 31 December 2013.\n\n## NOTE 33 - FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT\n\n## a) Financial Risk Management Policies\n\nThe Group is exposed to a variety of financial market risks including interest rate, commodity prices, foreign exchange and liquidity risk. The Group's risk management strategy focuses on the volatility of commodity markets and protecting cash flow in the event of declines in commodity pricing. The Group utilises derivative financial instruments to hedge exposure to fluctuations in interest rates and commodity prices. The Group's financial instruments consist mainly of deposits with banks, short term investments, accounts receivable, derivative financial instruments, finance facility, and payables. The main purpose of non-derivative financial instruments is to raise finance for the Group operations.\n\n## i) Treasury Risk Management\n\nFinancial risk management is carried out by Management. The Board sets financial risk management policies and procedures by which Management are to adhere. Management identifies and evaluates all financial risks and enters into financial risk instruments to mitigate these risk exposures in accordance with the policies and procedures outlined by the Board.\n\n## ii) Financial Risk Exposure and Management\n\nInterest rate risk is managed with a mixture of fixed and floating rate cash deposits. As at 31 December 2014 and 2013 approximately nil of Group deposits are fixed. It is the policy of the Group to keep surplus cash in interest yielding deposits.\n\n- 97 -", + "recall": 0.9847715736040609, + "true_md": "## NOTE 31 – SHARE BASED PAYMENTS continued\n\n## NOTE 32 – RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS\n\n## NOTE 33 – FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT\n\n## a) Financial Risk Management Policies\n\nNOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\nUpon vesting, and after a certain administrative period, the RSUs are converted to ordinary shares of the Company. Once converted to ordinary shares, the RSUs are no longer restricted. As the daily closing price of the Company’s ordinary shares approximates its estimated fair value at that time, the Company used the grant date closing price to estimate the fair value of the RSUs. \n\nThe total share based compensation expense for the years ended 31 December 2014 and 2013 was $1.9 million and $1.6 million, respectively. \n\nN Martin was previously a partner of Minter Ellison Lawyers and is now a consultant for Minter Ellison Lawyers as well as a Director of the Company. Minter Ellison Lawyers were paid a non material amount for legal services for the year ended 31 December 2014 and $0.2 million for legal services for the years ended 31 December 2013. \n\nThe Group is exposed to a variety of financial market risks including interest rate, commodity prices, foreign exchange and liquidity risk. The Group’s risk management strategy focuses on the volatility of commodity markets and protecting cash flow in the event of declines in commodity pricing. The Group utilises derivative financial instruments to hedge exposure to fluctuations in interest rates and commodity prices. The Group’s financial instruments consist mainly of deposits with banks, short term investments, accounts receivable, derivative financial instruments, finance facility, and payables. The main purpose of non-derivative financial instruments is to raise finance for the Group operations. \n\nFinancial risk management is carried out by Management. The Board sets financial risk management policies and procedures by which Management are to adhere. Management identifies and evaluates all financial risks and enters into financial risk instruments to mitigate these risk exposures in accordance with the policies and procedures outlined by the Board. \n\nInterest rate risk is managed with a mixture of fixed and floating rate cash deposits. As at 31 December 2014 and 2013 approximately nil of Group deposits are fixed. It is the policy of the Group to keep surplus cash in interest yielding deposits. \n\n- 97 - \n\n- ii) Financial Risk Exposure and Management \n\n- i) Treasury Risk Management" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9719531822559286, + "doc_id": "ecf379ea85f0a4b70e8e9563b4d200f3a893b48053986ae93b5f585a7c79444e", + "edit_distance": 0.6582867783985102, + "f1_score": 0.9939577039274923, + "meteor": 0.837673095857407, + "precision": 0.996969696969697, + "pred_md": "NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\nTerminated and Replaced Existing Debt Derivatives and Entered into New Debt Derivatives\n\n1 Converting from a fixed US$ coupon rate to a weighted average Cdn$ fixed rate.\n\n2 Converting from a fixed US$ principal amount to a fixed Cdn$ principal amount.\n\nThe March 6, 2013 termination is related to Debt Derivatives hedging the US $350 million senior notes due 2038 (2038 Notes). The Debt Derivatives that were terminated on March 6, 2013 were not designated as effective hedges for accounting purposes and had an original term of 10 years to August 15, 2018. The new Debt Derivatives hedge the foreign exchange risk associated with the principal and interest obligations on the 2038 Notes to their maturity at market rates on the respective dates of the transactions and are designated as effective hedges for accounting purposes.\n\nThe September 27, 2013 termination is related to Debt Derivatives hedging senior notes scheduled to mature in 2014 and 2015. Only the fixed foreign exchange rate was changed for the new Debt Derivatives. All other terms are the same as the terminated Debt Derivatives they replaced. Before the Debt Derivatives were terminated on September 27, 2013, changes in their fair value were recorded in other comprehensive income and were periodically reclassified to net income to offset foreign exchange gains or losses on the related debt or to modify interest expense to its hedged amount. On the termination date, the balance in the hedging reserve related to these Debt Derivatives was a $10 million loss. $1 million of this related to future periodic exchanges of interest and will be recorded in net income over the remaining life of the related debt securities. The remaining $8 million, net of income taxes of $1 million, will remain in the hedging reserve until such time as the related debt is settled.\n\nRepayment of Senior Notes and Related Derivative Settlements In June 2013, when we repaid or bought our US $350 million ($356 million) senior notes due 2013, the associated Debt Derivatives were settled at maturity, resulting in total payments of approximately $104 million. The settlements of these Debt Derivatives did not impact net income for the year ended December 31, 2013.\n\nAt December 31, 2013 we have US $6.4 billion (2012 - US $4.2 billion) of US Dollar denominated senior notes and debentures, all of which have been hedged using Debt Derivatives (2012 - 91.7%).\n\n## Expenditure Derivatives\n\nWe use foreign currency forward contracts (Expenditure Derivatives) to hedge the foreign exchange risk on the notional amount of certain forecasted expenditures. We use Expenditure Derivatives for riskmanagement purposes only.\n\nIn 2013, we entered into an additional US $955 million of Expenditure Derivatives maturing from April 2013 through December 2014, at an average rate of $1.0341/US $1. As at December 31, 2013, we had a total of US $900 million ($923 million) of Expenditure Derivatives for our forecasted US dollar denominated expenditures at an average rate of $1.0262/US $1 which have been designated as hedges for accounting purposes. We record changes in fair value of these Expenditure Derivatives in other comprehensive income. Once the\n\n116\n\nROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\nhedged transaction affects net income, equivalent amounts are recycled into net income from the hedging reserve. We settled US $435 million of Expenditure Derivatives in the year ended December 31, 2013 for Cdn $430 million and the Expenditure Derivatives remaining at December 31, 2013 have terms to maturity ranging from January 2014 to December 2014. All of our currently outstanding Expenditure Derivatives have been designated as effective hedges against foreign exchange risk for accounting purposes.\n\n## Equity Derivatives\n\nWe use stock-based compensation derivatives (Equity Derivatives) to hedge the market price appreciation risk of the RCI Class B shares granted under our stock-based compensation programs. We use Equity Derivatives for risk-management purposes only.\n\nIn 2013, we entered into Equity Derivatives to offset the price appreciation risk associated with 5.7 million RCI Class B Non-Voting shares that were granted under our stock-based compensation programs for stock options, RSUs and DSUs (see note 24). The Equity Derivatives were entered into at a weighted average price of $50.37 with original terms to maturity of one year, extendible for further one year periods with the consent of the hedge counterparties. The Equity Derivatives have not been designated as hedges for accounting purposes. We record changes in their fair value as stock-based compensation expense, offsetting a portion of the impact of changes in the market price of RCI Class B Non-Voting shares contained in the recorded amount of the stock-based compensation liability for stock options, RSUs and DSUs.\n\n## Fair Values\n\nThe carrying value of cash and cash equivalents, accounts receivable, short-term borrowings, and accounts payable and accrued liabilities approximate their fair values because of the short-term nature of these financial instruments.\n\nWe determine the fair value of each of our publicly traded investments using quoted market values. We determine the fair value of our private investments by using market values from similar transactions or well established market, asset based or projected income valuation techniques. These are applied appropriately to each investment depending on its future operating and profitability prospects.\n\nThe fair values of each of our public debt instruments are based on the year-end trading values. We determine the fair values of our Debt Derivatives and Expenditure Derivatives (Derivatives) using an estimated credit-adjusted mark-to-market valuation by discounting cash flows to the measurement date. In the case of Derivatives in an asset position, the credit spread for the financial institution counterparty is added to the risk-free discount rate to determine the estimated credit-adjusted value for each derivative. For Derivatives in a liability position, our credit spread is added to the risk-free discount rate for each derivative.", + "recall": 0.9909638554216867, + "true_md": "NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\nTerminated and Replaced Existing Debt Derivatives and Entered into New Debt Derivatives\n\nhedged transaction affects net income, equivalent amounts are recycled into net income from the hedging reserve. We settled US $435 million of Expenditure Derivatives in the year ended December 31, 2013 for Cdn $430 million and the Expenditure Derivatives remaining at December 31, 2013 have terms to maturity ranging from January 2014 to December 2014. All of our currently outstanding Expenditure Derivatives have been designated as effective hedges against foreign exchange risk for accounting purposes.\n\nThe March 6, 2013 termination is related to Debt Derivatives hedging the US $350 million senior notes due 2038 (2038 Notes). The Debt Derivatives that were terminated on March 6, 2013 were not designated as effective hedges for accounting purposes and had an original term of 10 years to August 15, 2018. The new Debt Derivatives hedge the foreign exchange risk associated with the principal and interest obligations on the 2038 Notes to their maturity at market rates on the respective dates of the transactions and are designated as effective hedges for accounting purposes.\n\nThe September 27, 2013 termination is related to Debt Derivatives hedging senior notes scheduled to mature in 2014 and 2015. Only the fixed foreign exchange rate was changed for the new Debt Derivatives.\n\nAll other terms are the same as the terminated Debt Derivatives they replaced. Before the Debt Derivatives were terminated on September 27, 2013, changes in their fair value were recorded in other comprehensive income and were periodically reclassified to net income to offset foreign exchange gains or losses on the related debt or to modify interest expense to its hedged amount. On the termination date, the balance in the hedging reserve related to these Debt Derivatives was a $10 million loss. $1 million of this related to future periodic exchanges of interest and will be recorded in net income over the remaining life of the related debt securities. The remaining $8 million, net of income taxes of $1 million, will remain in the hedging reserve until such time as the related debt is settled.\n\nWe use stock-based compensation derivatives (Equity Derivatives) to hedge the market price appreciation risk of the RCI Class B shares granted under our stock-based compensation programs. We use Equity Derivatives for risk-management purposes only.\n\nIn 2013, we entered into Equity Derivatives to offset the price appreciation risk associated with 5.7 million RCI Class B Non-Voting shares that were granted under our stock-based compensation programs for stock options, RSUs and DSUs (see note 24). The Equity Derivatives were entered into at a weighted average price of $50.37 with original terms to maturity of one year, extendible for further one year periods with the consent of the hedge counterparties. The Equity Derivatives have not been designated as hedges for accounting purposes. We record changes in their fair value as stock-based compensation expense, offsetting a portion of the impact of changes in the market price of RCI Class B Non-Voting shares contained in the recorded amount of the stock-based compensation liability for stock options, RSUs and DSUs.\n\nRepayment of Senior Notes and Related Derivative Settlements In June 2013, when we repaid or bought our US $350 million ($356 million) senior notes due 2013, the associated Debt Derivatives were settled at maturity, resulting in total payments of approximately $104 million. The settlements of these Debt Derivatives did not impact net income for the year ended December 31, 2013.\n\nThe carrying value of cash and cash equivalents, accounts receivable, short-term borrowings, and accounts payable and accrued liabilities approximate their fair values because of the short-term nature of these financial instruments.\n\nAt December 31, 2013 we have US $6.4 billion (2012 – US $4.2 billion) of US Dollar denominated senior notes and debentures, all of which have been hedged using Debt Derivatives (2012 – 91.7%).\n\nWe use foreign currency forward contracts (Expenditure Derivatives) to hedge the foreign exchange risk on the notional amount of certain forecasted expenditures. We use Expenditure Derivatives for risk- management purposes only.\n\nWe determine the fair value of each of our publicly traded investments using quoted market values. We determine the fair value of our private investments by using market values from similar transactions or well established market, asset based or projected income valuation techniques. These are applied appropriately to each investment depending on its future operating and profitability prospects.\n\nIn 2013, we entered into an additional US $955 million of Expenditure Derivatives maturing from April 2013 through December 2014, at an average rate of $1.0341/US $1. As at December 31, 2013, we had a total of US $900 million ($923 million) of Expenditure Derivatives for our forecasted US dollar denominated expenditures at an average rate of $1.0262/US $1 which have been designated as hedges for accounting purposes. We record changes in fair value of these Expenditure Derivatives in other comprehensive income. Once the\n\nThe fair values of each of our public debt instruments are based on the year-end trading values. We determine the fair values of our Debt Derivatives and Expenditure Derivatives (Derivatives) using an estimated credit-adjusted mark-to-market valuation by discounting cash flows to the measurement date. In the case of Derivatives in an asset position, the credit spread for the financial institution counterparty is added to the risk-free discount rate to determine the estimated credit-adjusted value for each derivative. For Derivatives in a liability position, our credit spread is added to the risk-free discount rate for each derivative.\n\n116 ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n## Expenditure Derivatives\n\n## Fair Values\n\n## Equity Derivatives\n\n- 1 Converting from a fixed US$ coupon rate to a weighted average Cdn$ fixed rate.\n\n- 2 Converting from a fixed US$ principal amount to a fixed Cdn$ principal amount." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8427033973211436, + "doc_id": "333258ba34d732055a19ca2fa357127049c122489f6fb888263765ee0460456e", + "edit_distance": 0.48157894736842105, + "f1_score": 0.9301075268817204, + "meteor": 0.9300405827317566, + "precision": 0.8826530612244898, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 7 - INCOME TAX EXPENSE continued\n\n- 1) The Oklahoma US state tax jurisdiction computes income taxes on a direct accounting basis. A significant portion of the 2014 impairment related to this jurisdiction resulting in a deferred tax benefit of $3,044 creating deferred tax assets, of which $2,064 were unrecognized.\n- 2) The change in apportioned state tax rates in US controlled entities is a result of the Company disposing of its property in Colorado (income tax rate of 4.63%) (2013: North Dakota with income tax rate of 4.53%) through a tax deferred sale and reinvesting the property in Texas (margin tax rate of 1%). As the Texas margin tax computation is similar in nature to an income tax computation, it is treated as an income tax for financial reporting purposes.\n- 3) This income tax benefit results from the election to consolidate certain Australian subsidiaries for income tax purposes effective 1 January 2014, making previously unrecognized deferred tax assets of one of these Australian subsidiaries available for utilization against future income of the consolidated Australian entities. These deferred tax assets were previously unrecognized due to the lack of evidence of future taxable income for these Australian subsidiaries on a stand-alone basis.\n\n## NOTE 8 - KEY MANAGEMENT PERSONNEL COMPENSATION\n\n- a) Names and positions held of Consolidated Group key management personnel in office at any time during\n\n## the financial period are:\n\nMr M Hannell\n\nChairman Non-executive\n\nMr E McCrady\n\nManaging Director and Chief Executive Officer\n\nMr D Hannes\n\nDirector - Non-executive\n\nMr N Martin\n\nDirector - Non-executive\n\nMr W Holcombe Director - Non-executive\n\nMs C Anderson\n\nChief Financial Officer\n\nMs G Ford\n\nVice President of Exploration and Development\n\nBased on her increased responsibilities due to the Company's growth, Ms. Ford was deemed to be a KMP during the 2014 fiscal year. Prior to that time, Ms. Ford was not considered to be KMP\n\nOther than Directors and Officers of the Company listed above, there are no additional key management personnel.\n\n- 77 -", + "recall": 0.9829545454545454, + "true_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 7 – INCOME TAX EXPENSE continued\n\n## NOTE 8 – KEY MANAGEMENT PERSONNEL COMPENSATION\n\nBased on her increased responsibilities due to the Company’s growth, Ms. Ford was deemed to be a KMP during the 2014 fiscal year. Prior to that time, Ms. Ford was not considered to be KMP \n\nOther than Directors and Officers of the Company listed above, there are no additional key management personnel. \n\n- 1) The Oklahoma US state tax jurisdiction computes income taxes on a direct accounting basis. A significant portion of the 2014 impairment related to this jurisdiction resulting in a deferred tax benefit of $3,044 creating deferred tax assets, of which $2,064 were unrecognized.\n\n- 2) The change in apportioned state tax rates in US controlled entities is a result of the Company disposing of its property in Colorado (income tax rate of 4.63%) (2013: North Dakota with income tax rate of 4.53%) through a tax deferred sale and reinvesting the property in Texas (margin tax rate of 1%). As the Texas margin tax computation is similar in nature to an income tax computation, it is treated as an income tax for financial reporting purposes. \n\n- 3) This income tax benefit results from the election to consolidate certain Australian subsidiaries for income tax purposes effective 1 January 2014, making previously unrecognized deferred tax assets of one of these Australian subsidiaries available for utilization against future income of the consolidated Australian entities. These deferred tax assets were previously unrecognized due to the lack of evidence of future taxable income for these Australian subsidiaries on a stand-alone basis. \n\n- 77 - \n\n## a) Names and positions held of Consolidated Group key management personnel in office at any time during the financial period are: Mr M Hannell Chairman Non-executive" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9673033628588064, + "doc_id": "818765513196ab6aa1442646bf648935b244fc4c3b92b29dc2ede03b2380e3c1", + "edit_distance": 0.4660471765546819, + "f1_score": 0.9885057471264368, + "meteor": 0.9898649775510145, + "precision": 0.9873708381171068, + "pred_md": "40\n\n| EMPLOYEES\n\nRoy Reel\n\nFlint Reeve\n\nDamon Reeves\n\nDavid Reeves\n\nReagan Register\n\nAndy Reinert\n\nJohn Repp\n\nBrandon Reyes\n\nJimmy Rhodes\n\nRory Rice\n\nPatrice Rich\n\nBobby Richards Jr.\n\nRene Richards\n\nJames Richardson\n\nJoseph Richardson\n\nLuke Richardson\n\nRodney Riffle\n\nRichard Riggins\n\nJohn Riggs\n\nCassie Rigsby\n\nJames Riley\n\nFreddy Rios\n\nOscar Riveracano\n\nCandace Robert\n\nMichael Robert\n\nJoseph Roberts\n\nRonald Roberts\n\nDiana Robertson\n\nBrian Robinson\n\nChad Robinson IV\n\nShae Robinson\n\nSarah Robinson-Garcia\n\nKaylan Roby\n\nWoodrow Rodgers Jr.\n\nMichael Rodrigues\n\nMarc Sanders\n\nSteven J. Sanders\n\nBrad Sandifer\n\nKara Sardis\n\nJames Saultz\n\nJohn Saxon Jr.\n\nHarley Scanlon\n\nGabe Scheer\n\nJess Schenk\n\nJames Schlarb\n\nCrystal Schmeckenbecher\n\nJason Schmitz\n\nEric Schneider\n\nAshton Schoaps\n\nRobert Schoenfeldt Jr.\n\nCassie Schoshke\n\nEli Schrock\n\nPhillip Schroeder\n\nTony Schroeder\n\nChris Schuman\n\nMichael Schweighart\n\nJoshua Sconyers\n\nBrian Scott\n\nCandace Scudder\n\nTanner Seal\n\nJames Sears\n\nStephen Seibert\n\nJohn Seifreid III\n\nJosh Sentyz\n\nBrandon Sepulvado\n\nRaquel Shacklett\n\nJames Shamblin\n\nWillie Sharp\n\nDan Sharpe\n\nShea Shelby\n\nMatthew Smith\n\nMichael W. Smith\n\nMike R. Smith\n\nShawn Smith\n\nAmy Snedeker\n\nCasey Snow\n\nCory Snyder\n\nKendel Snyder\n\nRichard Snyder\n\nStephen Socha\n\nJason Sonnema\n\nFrank Sopher\n\nDanielle Southall\n\nLawerance Southerland\n\nBobby Sparkman Jr.\n\nJack Sparks Jr.\n\nRick Sparks\n\nGary Spencer II\n\nLevi Spencer\n\nRick Spicer\n\nDave Spigelmyer\n\nShelly Spitznogle\n\nJustin Spruell\n\nCurtis Spruill\n\nLoni Staats\n\nStan Stacy Jr.\n\nTimothy Stamper\n\nRyan Stamps\n\nRichard Standage\n\nAmy Stanley\n\nHarold Starr\n\nHancel Steen\n\nMichael Stephens\n\nTeena Sterling\n\nBilly Stevens Jr.\n\n## BIG WELLS, TEXAS In the heart of the Eagle Ford Shale, Chesapeake's vertical integration strategy allows the company to rapidly accelerate its drilling activities.\n\nChance Rodriguez\n\nGustavo Rodriguez\n\nJohn G. Rogers\n\nKathy Rogers\n\nMark Rohrbough\n\nRobert Rollins\n\nMarc Rome\n\nDomingo Romero-Luna\n\nJacque Ross\n\nJessica Ross\n\nRhonda Ross Sr.\n\nTerry Rowe\n\nJulie Roy\n\nChris Royse\n\nAustin Rupard\n\nRick Rupard\n\nMichael Rupp\n\nJason Ruppert\n\nJoanna Rus\n\nRon Rush Jr.\n\nJackie Rutherford Jr.\n\nStacy Rutledge\n\nPeter Rutt Sr.\n\nThom Rychecky\n\nJesus Salinas\n\nGene Sampson\n\nZack Samuels\n\nLucio Sanchez\n\nChase Sanders\n\nDaniela Sanders\n\nDavid Sanders\n\nJason Shelhamer\n\nTom Sheme Jr.\n\nWilliam Shepardson IV\n\nJustin Shields\n\nSherri Shirley\n\nRob Shores\n\nJesse Short\n\nTroy Short II\n\nTim Shue\n\nJames Shull\n\nLynette Shults\n\nClayton Shumway\n\nAnthony Shuster\n\nDarren Silcott\n\nCorinne Simon\n\nNicholas Sims\n\nGreg Singleton\n\nJonathan Sisk\n\nBuddy Sissom Jr.\n\nRandy Skinner\n\nKristy Skiro\n\nReggie Sloan\n\nDavid Smarkusky\n\nBrian Smith\n\nBryan L. Smith\n\nJarrett Smith\n\nJerry Smith\n\nJoshua J. Smith\n\nJ.D. Smith\n\nKatherine Smith\n\nLisa Smith\n\nJeremiah Stevens Eric Stewart Jeffrey Stewart Joshua Stiles Mike Stivers Dillon Storer Kim Stovall Eugene Stradley Sean Strange Elizabeth Strawn Jake Swanson Sherrie Swift Steven Talada David Talley Kevin Tapia Steven Tatro Jonathan Tatum Ryan Tatum Amanda Taylor Barbara Taylor Chad Taylor Chaya Taylor Darrell Taylor Jason A. Taylor Jeremy Taylor John Taylor Kyle Taylor Simone Taylor Jeffrey Tedesco Jr. Wossen Tefera David Templet\n\nAmy Tennison\n\nErin Tewell\n\nCody Theimer\n\nColby Therwhanger\n\nAndrea Thomas Ashley Thomas\n\nRay Thomas\n\nTommy Thomas\n\nJeff L. Thompson\n\nJustin Thompson\n\nRene' Thurman\n\nJames Tillman\n\nJoseph Tingler\n\nTaylor Tisdal\n\nGregory Tomlinson\n\nPhilip Tomlinson\n\nJeffrey Toot\n\nDonald Torres Jr.\n\nRogelio Torres\n\nRichard Trammell\n\nDonie Treadaway\n\nTyler Treece\n\nAlejandro Trejo\n\nAlina Trepagnier\n\nMarsela Treska\n\nAddie Triska\n\nCody Trisler\n\nMichael Tucker\n\nRandy Tullos\n\nBronson Turley\n\nMichael Turner\n\nJesse Tuthill\n\nJackie Tuttle II\n\nNick Tyler\n\nJack Tyre\n\nDon Tyson\n\nChristopher Underwood\n\nKie Vander Sys\n\nMark Vannasdall\n\nPhillip Vanover\n\nRoger VanRyn III\n\nJoseph Vargas\n\nAndrew Vargeson\n\nTodd Varner II\n\nStephanie Vaughan\n\nPeyton Vaughn\n\nMarcelo Vera\n\nRaymond E. Verhoeven\n\nRick Vickers\n\nDerek Viljoen\n\nMichael Vincent\n\nBilly Vo\n\nGregory Vogel\n\nMatthew Volner\n\nCasey Voss\n\nAlyssa Vowell\n\nJason Waldenville\n\nConnie Waldrop\n\nAudie Walker\n\nChristopher Walker\n\nDoyle Walker\n\nBill Walko\n\nBilly Wallace\n\nBrandon W. Wallace\n\nJason Wallace\n\nKristin Wallace\n\nMichael Wallace\n\nKaren Walters\n\nTony Ward\n\nCraig Warren\n\nJoseph Warren\n\nLarry Warren\n\nMichael Warren\n\nJerry Watkins\n\nBrent Watson\n\nRusty Webb\n\nVance Webster II\n\nBlake Wedel\n\nDarren Weed\n\nCharles Wegman\n\nCutter Weiand\n\nJared Weingartner\n\nJason Weingartner\n\nRalph Welch Jr.\n\nDerek Wells\n\nSean Wells\n\nDavid West\n\nLee West\n\nZach White\n\nJimmy Whitehead\n\nDaniel Whiteman\n\nGary Whitis\n\nTaylor Whitis\n\nCole Whitman\n\nEmily Whitney\n\nTyler Whitsett\n\nJeremy Wiedenmann\n\nKristel Wiewel\n\nJames Wiggins\n\nMichael Wiggins\n\nTodd Wilfong\n\nDustin Willbanks\n\nAaron Williams\n\nAmy E. Williams\n\nJeff Williams\n\nJordan Williams\n\nJoseph Williams\n\nLisa D. Williams\n\nStephanie Williams\n\nTy Williams\n\nJosh Williamson\n\nDoug Willits\n\nKendra Wilmeth\n\nAlan L. Wilson\n\nKory Wilson\n\nPreston Wilson\n\nChristopher Wilt\n\nWilliam Winstead\n\nBrandon Winters\n\nTravis Wishon\n\nAri Wolever\n\nRonald Wolfe\n\nKenneth Wood\n\nJana Woodard\n\nJR Woodfin\n\nJoshua Woods\n\nKatie Wooten\n\nLarry Wooten\n\nAndrew Work\n\nRick Worley\n\nBrandon L. Wright\n\nBrian Wright\n\nJohn K. Wright\n\nMike W. Wright\n\nSammy Wyatt\n\nDwayne Wylie\n\nSteve Wyman\n\nLarry Yawn\n\nAmanda Yeager\n\nJason Young\n\nRandy Young\n\nBrett Yourish\n\nArt Ysaguirre Jr.\n\nSam Yule\n\nDoug Yurek\n\nJohn Zimmerman Jr.\n\n2010 (3,105)\n\nRobie Abbott Jr.\n\nJohn Abeid\n\nBilly Abernathy\n\nSasha Abernathy\n\nRandy Abigt\n\nJustin Abma\n\nMike Achee\n\nDiana Acker\n\nLuis Acosta\n\nBrooke Adams\n\nJunior Adams\n\nNealon Adams\n\nRonley Adams\n\nElizabeth Adcock\n\nChad Addison\n\nRebecca Addison\n\nRochelle Adickas\n\nMark E. Adkins\n\nNathan Adkins\n\nSteve Aduddell\n\nJason Agee\n\nCarlos Aguilar\n\nDustin Aguilera\n\nBrady Aguillard\n\nNadia Ahmed\n\nBrenda Aiken\n\nArt Alarcon\n\nRichard Albaugh\n\nSherri Albert\n\nAdrian Alcala\n\nPeter Alcorn\n\nRachel Alden\n\nJeremy Alexander\n\nMason Alexander\n\nNicholas Alexander\n\nSteven Alexander\n\nTodd Alexander\n\nJordan Alford\n\nLoretta Alfrey\n\nChris Allen\n\nEmory Allen\n\nEric Allen\n\nJames H. Allen\n\nJames P. Allen\n\nJerad Allen\n\nJesse Allen\n\nJessica Allen\n\nJoshua L. Allen\n\nKevin Allen\n\nRick Allen\n\nRob Allen Jr.\n\nRoseanne Allis\n\nBeth Allison\n\nRick Alliss\n\nRicky Allums\n\nDouglas Almgren\n\nJoel Alpers\n\nAlex Altman\n\nJorge Alvidrez\n\nJennifer Ammari\n\nRichard Amorose\n\nNicholas Amos\n\nMark Anders\n\nChase Anderson\n\nColby Anderson\n\nJason Anderson\n\nJeff D. Anderson\n\nJimmy Anderson Marjorie Anderson\n\nPrentice Anderson Jr.\n\nZack Anderson\n\nAaron Andrews\n\nTroy Andrews Jr.\n\nMike Angeles\n\nJohn Angiulli\n\nCoby Aparicio\n\nShauna Apolinar\n\nChris Applegate\n\nAmber Archer\n\nGerman Arellanes\n\nJose Arellanes\n\nJoel Arellanes - Najera\n\nRobert Arens\n\nEric Armenta\n\nAllen Armstead\n\nChad Arnold\n\nTerri Arnold\n\nLeornardo Arroyo\n\nMark Ash\n\nJames Ashcraft\n\nAlan Ashford\n\nJason Ashinhurst\n\nTravis Ashley\n\nJason Ashmun\n\nBlake Ashton\n\nRyan Astheimer\n\nJesse Ates\n\nSam Atkins\n\nBilly Atkinson\n\nLisa Austin\n\nDoug Avellino\n\nEmily Avery\n\nTyler Avery\n\nJesse Ayala\n\nDarren Ayers\n\nJason Ayers\n\nEdon Babcock\n\nTC Babineaux\n\nDonald Baccus\n\nCharlie Baeza\n\nStephen Bafumo\n\nMichael Baggett Jeremy Bagley\n\nDianna Bailey\n\nKevin W. Bailey\n\nSherri Bailey\n\nDonald Baker\n\nGrant Baker\n\nJamie Baker\n\nMatt Baker\n\nMatthew Baker\n\nTim Baker\n\nTimothy Bala\n\nAmanda Balcom\n\nRoel Balderas\n\nSandra Balderrama\n\nAmanda Baldwin\n\nJaryd Baldwin\n\nTim Baldwin\n\nAlex Bales\n\nBetsy E. Ball\n\nJohn Balog\n\nDiane Balogh\n\nBlake Baptist\n\nAdrienne Barber\n\nRodney Barber Jr.\n\nBen Barichivich\n\nDaniel Barker\n\nJames A. Barker\n\nJames A. Barker\n\nJeff Barksdale\n\nKody Barmore\n\nKevin Barnard\n\nJonathan Barnett\n\nJoey Barnhill II\n\nPatrick Barnum\n\nPeter Barnum\n\nJason Barr\n\nNathan Barrett\n\nMilo Barrington\n\nCorey Barrios\n\nJohn Barrios Jr.\n\nSammy Barron\n\nDave Bartgis\n\nPatton Bartholomew\n\nJustin Bartlett\n\nSam Bartley\n\nRichie Bartosh Jr.\n\nChris Bartran\n\nSonny Barve\n\nZach Basden\n\nPhil Base\n\nAdam Basquez\n\nAdam P. Basquez Jr.\n\nAdam Bates\n\nCliff Bates\n\nKyle Bates\n\nTarah Bates\n\nScott Batson\n\nDamien Batten\n\nJanet Battle\n\nJeremy Battle\n\nMitchell Batts\n\nBrittany Baucom\n\nJosh Bavari\n\nBryan Bays\n\nEric Bazan\n\nAnthony Bear\n\nRobe-Hofwolt\n\nBrandt Beasley\n\nJessse Beason\n\nBrent Beaty\n\nMira Beavers\n\nGubany Becerra\n\nTracy Becerra\n\nJeff Bechtel\n\nBrian Beck\n\nRyan Beck\n\nDon Becker\n\nJoshua Becker\n\nEllie Beckers\n\nCallie Beckham\n\nJordan Bedwell\n\nDuane Beecher\n\nRicky Beene\n\nJared Begemann\n\nNicole Bekker\n\nBlake Belanger\n\nJeremy Bell\n\nJerry Bell\n\nLouis Bell\n\nRussell Bell\n\nSam Bellinger\n\nStacee Bellows\n\nMike Belman III\n\nIsaiah Beloncik\n\nRon Belstra\n\nJohnnie Benefield\n\nNancy Benham\n\nMichael Benjamin\n\nJerome Bennett\n\nTammy Bennett\n\nTony Bennett\n\nSean Benson\n\nJessica Beres\n\nBrad Berga\n\nPeter Bergman\n\nEdwin Bergner\n\nMatt Berkeley\n\nLeonardo Bermudez\n\nDavid Bernal\n\nNatasha Bernhardt\n\nWilliam Berry II\n\nSergio Berumen\n\nJay Bessinger\n\nMorgan Beuchaw\n\nCody Bevan\n\nJared Bialas\n\nLyndsay Biby\n\nGeoffrey Bice\n\nDonald Bickford\n\nTravas Bickhart\n\nSean Bidwell\n\nMark Biefeldt\n\nMichael Bierly\n\nCorey Bigelow\n\nCarl Biggs\n\nBryan Billings\n\nRoy Bills\n\nPatty Bingham\n\nNathan Binswanger\n\nScott Bird\n\nBenjamin Bishop\n\nBlake Bixler\n\nAmy Black\n\nMelody Black\n\nNiki Black\n\nTravis Black\n\nMark Blackburn\n\nDustin Blackman\n\nRobert Blain\n\nNoelia Blair\n\nJustin Blake\n\nRoy Blanchard\n\nTed Blanchard\n\nRay Blanco Jr.\n\nJames Bland\n\nTim Blasz\n\nMarla Bleakley\n\nAlan Bledsoe\n\nAndrew Bledsoe\n\nShane Blehm\n\nCody Bleigh\n\nLaren Blevins\n\nTom Blevins\n\nJames Blewer\n\nJason Blewer\n\nCody Blosch\n\nTravis Bly\n\nJon Boardman\n\nJason Boatright\n\nJosh Boaz\n\nLori Boecking\n\nBrian Boerner\n\nRyan Bogaczyk\n\nCarrie Bogle\n\nSandra Bogle\n\nTJ Bogle\n\nKatrina Bohannan\n\nRobert Bolden\n\nWilliam Bolin\n\nCaleb Bolton\n\nDave Bolton\n\nSherry Bonawitz\n\nWilliam Bonecutter\n\nTravis Bonine\n\nChris Bono\n\nClaude Bonura\n\nBlaine Booher\n\nBobby Boone\n\nBrandon Boone\n\nStephanie Boone\n\nMatthew Booth\n\nHenry Bordelon\n\nMike Bordelon\n\nRoger Bordelon\n\nKane Borek\n\nSteve Bornsen\n\nDensiel Bottger\n\nTyler Bottger\n\nSteven Boulware\n\nSteve Bowers", + "recall": 0.9896432681242808, + "true_md": "40 | EMPLOYEES\n\nRoy Reel Flint Reeve Damon Reeves David Reeves Reagan Register Andy Reinert John Repp Brandon Reyes Jimmy Rhodes Rory Rice Patrice Rich Bobby Richards Jr. Rene Richards James Richardson Joseph Richardson Luke Richardson Rodney Riffle Richard Riggins John Riggs Cassie Rigsby James Riley Freddy Rios Oscar Riveracano Candace Robert Michael Robert Joseph Roberts Ronald Roberts Diana Robertson Brian Robinson Chad Robinson IV Shae Robinson Sarah Robinson-Garcia Kaylan Roby Woodrow Rodgers Jr. Michael Rodrigues\n\nMatthew Smith Michael W. Smith Mike R. Smith Shawn Smith Amy Snedeker Casey Snow Cory Snyder Kendel Snyder Richard Snyder Stephen Socha Jason Sonnema Frank Sopher Danielle Southall Lawerance Southerland Bobby Sparkman Jr. Jack Sparks Jr. Rick Sparks Gary Spencer II Levi Spencer Rick Spicer Dave Spigelmyer Shelly Spitznogle Justin Spruell Curtis Spruill Loni Staats Stan Stacy Jr. Timothy Stamper Ryan Stamps Richard Standage Amy Stanley Harold Starr Hancel Steen Michael Stephens Teena Sterling Billy Stevens Jr.\n\nMarc Sanders Steven J. Sanders Brad Sandifer Kara Sardis James Saultz John Saxon Jr. Harley Scanlon Gabe Scheer Jess Schenk James Schlarb Crystal Schmeckenbecher Jason Schmitz Eric Schneider Ashton Schoaps Robert Schoenfeldt Jr. Cassie Schoshke Eli Schrock Phillip Schroeder Tony Schroeder Chris Schuman Michael Schweighart Joshua Sconyers Brian Scott Candace Scudder Tanner Seal James Sears Stephen Seibert John Seifreid III Josh Sentyz Brandon Sepulvado Raquel Shacklett James Shamblin Willie Sharp Dan Sharpe Shea Shelby\n\nBIG WELLS, TEXAS In the heart of the Eagle Ford Shale, Chesapeake’s vertical integration strategy allows the company to rapidly accelerate its drilling activities.\n\nAmy Tennison Erin Tewell Cody Theimer Colby Therwhanger Andrea Thomas Ashley Thomas Ray Thomas Tommy Thomas Jeff L. Thompson Justin Thompson Rene’ Thurman James Tillman Joseph Tingler Taylor Tisdal Gregory Tomlinson Philip Tomlinson Jeffrey Toot Donald Torres Jr. Rogelio Torres Richard Trammell Donie Treadaway Tyler Treece Alejandro Trejo Alina Trepagnier Marsela Treska Addie Triska Cody Trisler Michael Tucker Randy Tullos Bronson Turley Michael Turner Jesse Tuthill Jackie Tuttle II Nick Tyler Jack Tyre Don Tyson Christopher Underwood Kie Vander Sys Mark Vannasdall Phillip Vanover Roger VanRyn III Joseph Vargas Andrew Vargeson Todd Varner II Stephanie Vaughan Peyton Vaughn Marcelo Vera Raymond E. Verhoeven Rick Vickers Derek Viljoen Michael Vincent Billy Vo Gregory Vogel Matthew Volner Casey Voss Alyssa Vowell Jason Waldenville Connie Waldrop Audie Walker Christopher Walker Doyle Walker Bill Walko Billy Wallace Brandon W. Wallace Jason Wallace Kristin Wallace Michael Wallace Karen Walters Tony Ward Craig Warren Joseph Warren Larry Warren Michael Warren Jerry Watkins Brent Watson Rusty Webb Vance Webster II Blake Wedel Darren Weed Charles Wegman Cutter Weiand Jared Weingartner Jason Weingartner Ralph Welch Jr. Derek Wells Sean Wells David West Lee West Zach White Jimmy Whitehead\n\nJeremiah Stevens Eric Stewart Jeffrey Stewart Joshua Stiles Mike Stivers Dillon Storer Kim Stovall Eugene Stradley Sean Strange Elizabeth Strawn Jake Swanson Sherrie Swift Steven Talada David Talley Kevin Tapia Steven Tatro Jonathan Tatum Ryan Tatum Amanda Taylor Barbara Taylor Chad Taylor Chaya Taylor Darrell Taylor Jason A. Taylor Jeremy Taylor John Taylor Kyle Taylor Simone Taylor Jeffrey Tedesco Jr. Wossen Tefera David Templet\n\nJason Shelhamer Tom Sheme Jr. William Shepardson IV Justin Shields Sherri Shirley Rob Shores Jesse Short Troy Short II Tim Shue James Shull Lynette Shults Clayton Shumway Anthony Shuster Darren Silcott Corinne Simon Nicholas Sims Greg Singleton Jonathan Sisk Buddy Sissom Jr. Randy Skinner Kristy Skiro Reggie Sloan David Smarkusky Brian Smith Bryan L. Smith Jarrett Smith Jerry Smith Joshua J. Smith J.D. Smith Katherine Smith Lisa Smith\n\nChance Rodriguez Gustavo Rodriguez John G. Rogers KathyRogers Mark Rohrbough Robert Rollins Marc Rome Domingo Romero-Luna Jacque Ross Jessica Ross Rhonda Ross Sr. Terry Rowe Julie Roy Chris Royse Austin Rupard Rick Rupard Michael Rupp Jason Ruppert Joanna Rus Ron Rush Jr. Jackie Rutherford Jr. Stacy Rutledge Peter Rutt Sr. Thom Rychecky Jesus Salinas Gene Sampson Zack Samuels Lucio Sanchez Chase Sanders Daniela Sanders David Sanders\n\nDaniel Whiteman Gary Whitis Taylor Whitis Cole Whitman Emily Whitney Tyler Whitsett Jeremy Wiedenmann Kristel Wiewel James Wiggins Michael Wiggins Todd Wilfong Dustin Willbanks Aaron Williams Amy E. Williams Jeff Williams Jordan Williams Joseph Williams Lisa D. Williams Stephanie Williams Ty Williams Josh Williamson Doug Willits Kendra Wilmeth Alan L. Wilson Kory Wilson Preston Wilson Christopher Wilt William Winstead Brandon Winters Travis Wishon Ari Wolever Ronald Wolfe KennethWood Jana Woodard JR Woodfin Joshua Woods Katie Wooten Larry Wooten Andrew Work Rick Worley Brandon L. Wright Brian Wright John K. Wright Mike W. Wright Sammy Wyatt Dwayne Wylie Steve Wyman Larry Yawn Amanda Yeager Jason Young Randy Young Brett Yourish Art Ysaguirre Jr. Sam Yule Doug Yurek John Zimmerman Jr.\n\nJeremy Alexander Mason Alexander Nicholas Alexander Steven Alexander Todd Alexander Jordan Alford Loretta Alfrey Chris Allen Emory Allen Eric Allen James H. Allen James P. Allen Jerad Allen Jesse Allen Jessica Allen Joshua L. Allen Kevin Allen Rick Allen Rob Allen Jr. Roseanne Allis Beth Allison Rick Alliss Ricky Allums Douglas Almgren Joel Alpers Alex Altman Jorge Alvidrez Jennifer Ammari Richard Amorose Nicholas Amos Mark Anders Chase Anderson Colby Anderson Jason Anderson Jeff D. Anderson Jimmy Anderson Marjorie Anderson Prentice Anderson Jr. Zack Anderson Aaron Andrews Troy Andrews Jr. Mike Angeles John Angiulli Coby Aparicio Shauna Apolinar Chris Applegate Amber Archer German Arellanes Jose Arellanes Joel Arellanes - Najera Robert Arens Eric Armenta Allen Armstead Chad Arnold Terri Arnold Leornardo Arroyo Mark Ash James Ashcraft Alan Ashford Jason Ashinhurst Travis Ashley Jason Ashmun Blake Ashton Ryan Astheimer Jesse Ates Sam Atkins Billy Atkinson Lisa Austin Doug Avellino Emily Avery Tyler Avery Jesse Ayala Darren Ayers Jason Ayers Edon Babcock TC Babineaux Donald Baccus Charlie Baeza Stephen Bafumo Michael Baggett Jeremy Bagley Dianna Bailey Kevin W. Bailey Sherri Bailey Donald Baker Grant Baker Jamie Baker Matt Baker Matthew Baker Tim Baker\n\n## 2010 (3,105)\n\nRobie Abbott Jr. John Abeid Billy Abernathy Sasha Abernathy Randy Abigt Justin Abma Mike Achee Diana Acker Luis Acosta Brooke Adams Junior Adams Nealon Adams Ronley Adams Elizabeth Adcock Chad Addison Rebecca Addison Rochelle Adickas Mark E. Adkins Nathan Adkins Steve Aduddell Jason Agee Carlos Aguilar Dustin Aguilera Brady Aguillard Nadia Ahmed Brenda Aiken Art Alarcon Richard Albaugh Sherri Albert Adrian Alcala Peter Alcorn Rachel Alden\n\nTimothy Bala Amanda Balcom Roel Balderas Sandra Balderrama Amanda Baldwin Jaryd Baldwin Tim Baldwin Alex Bales Betsy E. Ball John Balog Diane Balogh Blake Baptist Adrienne Barber Rodney Barber Jr. Ben Barichivich Daniel Barker James A. Barker James A. Barker Jeff Barksdale Kody Barmore Kevin Barnard Jonathan Barnett Joey Barnhill II Patrick Barnum Peter Barnum Jason Barr Nathan Barrett Milo Barrington Corey Barrios John Barrios Jr. Sammy Barron Dave Bartgis Patton Bartholomew Justin Bartlett Sam Bartley Richie Bartosh Jr. Chris Bartran Sonny Barve Zach Basden Phil Base Adam Basquez Adam P. Basquez Jr. Adam Bates Cliff Bates Kyle Bates Tarah Bates Scott Batson Damien Batten Janet Battle Jeremy Battle MitchellBatts Brittany Baucom Josh Bavari Bryan Bays Eric Bazan Anthony Bear Robe-Hofwolt Brandt Beasley Jessse Beason Brent Beaty Mira Beavers Gubany Becerra Tracy Becerra JeffBechtel Brian Beck Ryan Beck Don Becker Joshua Becker Ellie Beckers Callie Beckham Jordan Bedwell Duane Beecher Ricky Beene Jared Begemann Nicole Bekker Blake Belanger Jeremy Bell JerryBell Louis Bell Russell Bell Sam Bellinger Stacee Bellows Mike Belman III Isaiah Beloncik Ron Belstra Johnnie Benefield Nancy Benham Michael Benjamin Jerome Bennett Tammy Bennett\n\nTony Bennett Sean Benson Jessica Beres Brad Berga Peter Bergman Edwin Bergner Matt Berkeley Leonardo Bermudez David Bernal Natasha Bernhardt William Berry II Sergio Berumen Jay Bessinger Morgan Beuchaw Cody Bevan Jared Bialas Lyndsay Biby Geoffrey Bice Donald Bickford Travas Bickhart Sean Bidwell Mark Biefeldt Michael Bierly Corey Bigelow Carl Biggs Bryan Billings Roy Bills Patty Bingham Nathan Binswanger Scott Bird Benjamin Bishop Blake Bixler Amy Black Melody Black Niki Black Travis Black Mark Blackburn Dustin Blackman Robert Blain Noelia Blair Justin Blake Roy Blanchard Ted Blanchard Ray Blanco Jr. James Bland Tim Blasz Marla Bleakley Alan Bledsoe Andrew Bledsoe Shane Blehm Cody Bleigh Laren Blevins Tom Blevins James Blewer Jason Blewer Cody Blosch Travis Bly Jon Boardman Jason Boatright JoshBoaz Lori Boecking Brian Boerner Ryan Bogaczyk Carrie Bogle Sandra Bogle TJ Bogle Katrina Bohannan Robert Bolden William Bolin Caleb Bolton Dave Bolton Sherry Bonawitz William Bonecutter Travis Bonine Chris Bono Claude Bonura BlaineBooher Bobby Boone Brandon Boone Stephanie Boone Matthew Booth Henry Bordelon Mike Bordelon Roger Bordelon Kane Borek Steve Bornsen Densiel Bottger Tyler Bottger Steven Boulware Steve Bowers" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9535941161553164, + "doc_id": "d6fb64f3db75eeb5acaa0677bf8ccdbbd2c8f39020294877f679d33017a3b4a1", + "edit_distance": 0.4460093896713615, + "f1_score": 0.989384288747346, + "meteor": 0.9676132396157732, + "precision": 0.9957264957264957, + "pred_md": "## WIRELESS\n\n## ROGERS IS CANADA'S LARGEST WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SERVICE PROVIDER\n\nAs at December 31, 2013, we had:\n\n- GLYPH<129> approximately 9.5 million subscribers\n- GLYPH<129> approximately 34 % share of the Canadian wireless market.\n\n## PRODUCTS AND SERVICES\n\nRogers is a Canadian leader in innovative new wireless network technologies and services. We provide wireless voice and advanced high-speed data communication services to subscribers across Canada under the Rogers, Fido and Chatr brands, and provide our customers with the best and latest wireless devices and applications including:\n\n- GLYPH<129> mobile high speed Internet access\n- GLYPH<129> wireless voice and enhanced voice features\n- GLYPH<129> wireless home phone\n- GLYPH<129> device protection\n- GLYPH<129> text messaging\n- GLYPH<129> e-mail\n- GLYPH<129> global voice and data roaming\n- GLYPH<129> machine-to-machine solutions\n- GLYPH<129> advanced business solutions\n- GLYPH<129> Suretap mobile wallet\n- GLYPH<129> Rogers AnyPlace TV\n- GLYPH<129> Rogers One Number\n- GLYPH<129> Rogers First Rewards Loyalty Program.\n\n## NATIONAL DISTRIBUTION\n\nWe distribute our wireless products using various channels including:\n\n- GLYPH<129> independent dealer networks\n- GLYPH<129> company-owned Rogers, Fido and Chatr retail stores\n- GLYPH<129> customer self-serve rogers.com, fido.ca, chatrwireless.com, ecommerce sites\n- GLYPH<129> Rogers call centres and outbound telemarketing\n- GLYPH<129> major retail chains and convenience stores.\n\n## EXTENSIVE WIRELESS NETWORK\n\nRogers has one of the most extensive and advanced wireless networks in Canada:\n\n- GLYPH<129> supports wireless services on smartphone, tablets, computers and a broad variety of M2M, mobile commerce, retail point of sale and other specialized devices\n- GLYPH<129> the first LTE high-speed network in Canada, which reached more than 73 % of the Canadian population at December 31, 2013\n- GLYPH<129> voice and data roaming agreements with international carriers in more than 200 countries\n- GLYPH<129> network sharing arrangements with several regional wireless operators in Canada.\n\nWe are continuously enhancing our IP service infrastructure for all of our wireless services. Advances in technology have transformed how our customers interact and how they use the variety of tools that are available to them in their personal and professional lives. Technology has also changed the way businesses operate.\n\nNew technologies allow us to offer new services, such as Rogers One Number, which makes enhanced wireless services available to subscribers on their computer, tablet, or smartphone and can be used as an alternative to fixed line telephony. Users enjoy the same services and features across the coverage area, thanks to the seamless integrated nature of the Rogers network and those of our roaming and network sharing partners.\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC.\n\n37\n\nMANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS", + "recall": 0.9831223628691983, + "true_md": "## WIRELESS\n\n## ROGERS IS CANADA’S LARGEST WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SERVICE PROVIDER\n\nAs at December 31, 2013, we had:\n\n- GLYPH<129> approximately 9.5 million subscribers\n\n- GLYPH<129> approximately 34 % share of the Canadian wireless market.\n\n- GLYPH<129> mobile high speed Internet access\n\n- GLYPH<129> wireless voice and enhanced voice features\n\n- GLYPH<129> wireless home phone\n\n- GLYPH<129> device protection\n\n- GLYPH<129> text messaging\n\n- GLYPH<129> e-mail\n\n- GLYPH<129> global voice and data roaming\n\n- GLYPH<129> machine-to-machine solutions\n\n- GLYPH<129> advanced business solutions\n\n- GLYPH<129> Suretap mobile wallet\n\n- GLYPH<129> Rogers AnyPlace TV\n\n- GLYPH<129> Rogers One Number\n\n- GLYPH<129> Rogers First Rewards Loyalty Program.\n\n- GLYPH<129> independent dealer networks\n\n- GLYPH<129> company-owned Rogers, Fido and Chatr retail stores\n\n- GLYPH<129> customer self-serve rogers.com, fido.ca, chatrwireless.com, ecommerce sites\n\n- GLYPH<129> Rogers call centres and outbound telemarketing\n\n- GLYPH<129> major retail chains and convenience stores.\n\n- GLYPH<129> network sharing arrangements with several regional wireless operators in Canada.\n\n- GLYPH<129> voice and data roaming agreements with international carriers in more than 200 countries\n\n- GLYPH<129> the first LTE high-speed network in Canada, which reached more than 73 % of the Canadian population at December 31, 2013\n\n- GLYPH<129> supports wireless services on smartphone, tablets, computers and a broad variety of M2M, mobile commerce, retail point of sale and other specialized devices\n\nRogers has one of the most extensive and advanced wireless networks in Canada:\n\n## EXTENSIVE WIRELESS NETWORK\n\nRogers is a Canadian leader in innovative new wireless network technologies and services. We provide wireless voice and advanced high-speed data communication services to subscribers across Canada under the Rogers, Fido and Chatr brands, and provide our customers with the best and latest wireless devices and applications including:\n\nWe distribute our wireless products using various channels including:\n\nNew technologies allow us to offer new services, such as Rogers One Number, which makes enhanced wireless services available to subscribers on their computer, tablet, or smartphone and can be used as an alternative to fixed line telephony. Users enjoy the same services and features across the coverage area, thanks to the seamless integrated nature of the Rogers network and those of our roaming and network sharing partners.\n\nWe are continuously enhancing our IP service infrastructure for all of our wireless services. Advances in technology have transformed how our customers interact and how they use the variety of tools that are available to them in their personal and professional lives. Technology has also changed the way businesses operate.\n\nMANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AN D ANALYSIS\n\n## PRODUCTS AND SERVICES\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 37\n\n## NATIONAL DISTRIBUTION" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9679353558939898, + "doc_id": "74b5c3cf7044e8048b8a40643cf541d0aa4aaabdfd51c8fef383f9966e6c2796", + "edit_distance": 0.6794871794871795, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9561042524005487, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "We also use significant judgment in the following areas:\n\n- GLYPH<129> determining cash generating units and the allocation of goodwill for the purpose of impairment testing (see note 13)\n- GLYPH<129> choosing methods for depreciating our property, plant, and equipment that we believe most accurately represent the consumption of benefits derived from those assets and are more representative of the economic substance of the use of the underlying assets (see Property, Plant and Equipment , below)\n- GLYPH<129> deciding to designate our spectrum licences as assets with indefinite useful lives since we believe they are likely to be renewed for the foreseeable future (see Goodwill and Intangible assets , below)\n- GLYPH<129> interpreting tax rules and regulations when we calculate income taxes (see note 27), and\n- GLYPH<129> determining the probability of loss when we assess contingent liabilities (see note 27).\n\n## Revenue Recognition\n\nWe recognize revenue when we can estimate its amount and are reasonably assured that we can collect it. Revenue is recorded net of discounts.\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC.\n\n95\n\nNOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "We also use significant judgment in the following areas:\n\n- GLYPH<129> deciding to designate our spectrum licences as assets with indefinite useful lives since we believe they are likely to be renewed for the foreseeable future (see Goodwill and Intangible assets , below)\n\n- GLYPH<129> interpreting tax rules and regulations when we calculate income taxes (see note 27), and\n\n- GLYPH<129> determining the probability of loss when we assess contingent liabilities (see note 27).\n\n- GLYPH<129> choosing methods for depreciating our property, plant, and equipment that we believe most accurately represent the consumption of benefits derived from those assets and are more representative of the economic substance of the use of the underlying assets (see Property, Plant and Equipment , below)\n\n- GLYPH<129> determining cash generating units and the allocation of goodwill for the purpose of impairment testing (see note 13)\n\nNOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\nWe recognize revenue when we can estimate its amount and are reasonably assured that we can collect it. Revenue is recorded net of discounts.\n\n## Revenue Recognition\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 95" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9346714428226638, + "doc_id": "72edf859ff84292fa90292bc6046a8d3f49468f8eb71ee439999f7d728b042d2", + "edit_distance": 0.04892966360856269, + "f1_score": 0.9604519774011299, + "meteor": 0.9730389752111602, + "precision": 0.9714285714285714, + "pred_md": "www.kingsgate.com.au\n\nu\n\n## Nueva Esperanza Project\n\n## Chile\n\n## Summary\n\nThe Nueva Esperanza Project is 100% owned by Kingsgate since February 2012. Nueva Esperanza is located in the Maricunga Gold Belt near Copiapó, a regional mining centre in Northern Chile. The silver-rich mineralisation is hosted by the Esperanza high-sulphidation epithermal alteration system associated with the Cerros Bravos volcanic complex.\n\nThe project consists of three well-defined mineralised deposits and a number of undeveloped exploration targets. The main deposits are Arqueros, Chimberos and Teterita. Arqueros was previously mined on a limited scale by underground methods and Chimberos was exploited as an open pit mine, delivering about 40 million ounces of silver in 1998/99. All three deposits currently have a combined Mineral Resources of about 93 million ounces of silver equivalent or 1.6 million ounces of gold equivalent (EQ60) . 1\n\nA feasibility study for a decision to mine the Arqueros portion of Nueva Esperanza was completed in late 2012, demonstrating that open pit mining at two million tonnes per year and processing by milling and agitation leaching in cyanide was technically feasible. Work remained to integrate the Teterita and Chimberos deposits into the project, as well as to test lower cost options for processing. Continued metallurgical testwork has shown that mineralisation from all three deposits by heap leaching is technically and economically feasible and the preferred alternative for development.\n\nEnvironmental approvals to commence construction and mining at Nueva Esperanza were granted in July 2013 for the original Arqueros project. Work is underway to modify and update the environmental assessment to incorporate the heap leach process.\n\n- 1 Equivalence is based on gold/silver price ratio of 60. Gold equivalence = gold content plus (silver content divided by 60), whereas Silver equivalent silver content plus (gold content multiplied by 60).", + "recall": 0.9497206703910615, + "true_md": "www.kingsgate.com.au\n\n28 Projects Report\n\n## Nueva Esperanza Project\n\n## Summary\n\nChile\n\nThe Nueva Esperanza Project is 100% owned by Kingsgate since February 2012. Nueva Esperanza is located in the Maricunga Gold Belt near Copiapó, a regional mining centre in Northern Chile. The silver-rich mineralisation is hosted by the Esperanza high-sulphidation epithermal alteration system associated with the Cerros Bravos volcanic complex.\n\nThe project consists of three well-defined miner- alised deposits and a number of undeveloped exploration targets. The main deposits are Arqueros, Chimberos and Teterita. Arqueros was previously mined on a limited scale by under- ground methods and Chimberos was exploited as an open pit mine, delivering about 40 million ounces of silver in 1998/99. All three deposits currently have a combined Mineral Resources of about 93 million ounces of silver equivalent or 1.6 million ounces of gold equivalent (EQ60) 1 .\n\nA feasibility study for a decision to mine the Arqueros portion of Nueva Esperanza was completed in late 2012, demonstrating that open pit mining at two million tonnes per year and processing by milling and agitation leaching in cyanide was technically feasible. Work remained to integrate the Teterita and Chimberos deposits into the project, as well as to test lower cost options for processing. Continued metallurgical testwork has shown that mineralisation from all three deposits by heap leaching is technically and economically feasible and the preferred alterna- tive for development.\n\nEnvironmental approvals to commence construction and mining at Nueva Esperanza were granted in July 2013 for the original Arqueros project. Work is underway to modify and update the environmental assessment to incorporate the heap leach process.\n\n1 Equivalence is based on gold/silver price ratio of 60. Gold equivalence = gold content plus (silver content divided by 60), whereas Silver equivalent silver content plus (gold content multiplied by 60)." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.855278941355657, + "doc_id": "5a6fa79462456bf6bd08ab3d94dea576dedd9648418327c61abde0c87ffe6c12", + "edit_distance": 0.14697406340057637, + "f1_score": 0.984993178717599, + "meteor": 0.7574663241793206, + "precision": 0.9863387978142076, + "pred_md": "## Item 1. Business.\n\n## DESCRIPTION OF BUSINESS\n\nFounded in 1901 as a retail shoe business in Seattle, Nordstrom later incorporated in Washington state in 1946 and went on to become one of the leading fashion specialty retailers based in the U.S. As of March 16, 2015, we operate 290 U.S. stores located in 38 states as well as a robust ecommerce business through Nordstrom.com, Nordstromrack.com and HauteLook and TrunkClub.com. We also operate two Nordstrom full-line stores in Canada. The west and east coasts of the U.S. are the areas in which we have the largest presence. We have two reportable segments: Retail and Credit.\n\nAs of March 16, 2015, the Retail segment includes our 115 'Nordstrom' branded full-line stores in the U.S. and Nordstrom.com, 167 off-price Nordstrom Rack stores, two Canada full-line stores, Nordstromrack.com and HauteLook, and other retail channels including five Trunk Club showrooms and TrunkClub.com, our two Jeffrey boutiques and one clearance store that operates under the name 'Last Chance.' Through these multiple retail channels, we strive to deliver the best customer experience possible. We offer an extensive selection of high-quality brand-name and private label merchandise focused on apparel, shoes, cosmetics and accessories. Our integrated Nordstrom full-line stores and online store allow us to provide our customers with a seamless shopping experience. In-store purchases are primarily fulfilled from that store's inventory, but when inventory is unavailable at that store it may also be shipped to our customers from our fulfillment center in Cedar Rapids, Iowa, or from other Nordstrom full-line stores. Online purchases are primarily shipped to our customers from our Cedar Rapids fulfillment center, but may also be shipped from our Nordstrom full-line stores. Our customers can also pick up online orders in our Nordstrom full-line stores if inventory is available at one of our locations. These capabilities allow us to better serve customers across various channels and improve sales. Nordstrom Rack stores purchase high-quality brand-name merchandise primarily from the same vendors carried in Nordstrom full-line stores and also serve as outlets for clearance merchandise from our Nordstrom stores and other retail channels. During the year, we launched Nordstromrack.com and the associated mobile app. Nordstromrack.com combines the technology expertise of HauteLook with the merchant expertise of Nordstrom Rack. Nordstromrack.com and HauteLook offer limited-time sale events on fashion and lifestyle brands as well as a persistent selection of off-price, high-quality brand-name merchandise and are integrated with a single customer log-in, shared shopping cart and streamlined checkout process. Furthermore, we can accommodate returns from these sites by mail or at any Nordstrom Rack location.\n\nOur Credit segment includes our wholly owned federal savings bank, Nordstrom fsb, through which we provide a private label credit card, two Nordstrom Visa credit cards and a debit card. The credit and debit cards feature a loyalty program designed to increase customer visits and spending. Although the primary purposes of our Credit segment are to foster greater customer loyalty and drive more sales, we also generate revenues from finance charges and other fees on these cards. In addition, we save on interchange fees that the Retail segment would incur if our customers used third-party cards.\n\nFor more information about our business and our reportable segments, see Item 7: Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations and Note 16: Segment Reporting in Item 8: Financial Statements and Supplementary Data.\n\n## FISCAL YEAR\n\nWe operate on a 52/53-week fiscal year ending on the Saturday closest to January 31 st . References to 2014 and all years within this document are based on a 52-week fiscal year, except 2012, which is based on a 53-week fiscal year.\n\n## TRADEMARKS\n\nWe have 156 trademarks, each of which is the subject of one or more trademark registrations and/or trademark applications. Our most notable trademarks include Nordstrom, Nordstrom Rack, HauteLook, Halogen, BP., Zella, Caslon and Trunk Club. Each of our trademarks is renewable indefinitely, provided that it is still used in commerce at the time of the renewal.\n\n## RETURN POLICY\n\nWe have a fair and liberal approach to returns as part of our objective to provide high-quality customer service. We do not have a formal return policy at our Nordstrom full-line stores or online at Nordstrom.com. Our goal is to take care of our customers, which includes making returns and exchanges easy, whether in stores or online, where we offer free shipping and free returns. Our Nordstrom Rack stores generally accept returns up to 90 days from the date of purchase with the original price tag and sales receipt, and also accept returns of Nordstromrack.com and HauteLook merchandise. Nordstromrack.com and HauteLook generally accept returns of apparel, footwear and accessories within 90 days from the date of shipment.\n\n## SEASONALITY\n\nDue to our Anniversary Sale in July and the holidays in December, our sales are typically higher in the second and fourth quarters than in the first and third quarters of the fiscal year.\n\n4\n\n## PART I", + "recall": 0.9836512261580381, + "true_md": "PART I\n\n## Item 1. Business.\n\n## DESCRIPTION OF BUSINESS Founded in 1901 as a retail shoe business in Seattle, Nordstrom later incorporated in Washington state in 1946 and went on to become one\n\nDESCRIPTION OF BUSINESS Founded in 1901 as a retail shoe business in Seattle, Nordstrom later incorporated in Washington state in 1946 and went on to become one of the leading fashion specialty retailers based in the U.S. As of March 16, 2015, we operate 290 U.S. stores located in 38 states as well as a robust ecommerce business through Nordstrom.com, Nordstromrack.com and HauteLook and TrunkClub.com. We also operate two Nordstrom full-line stores in Canada. The west and east coasts of the U.S. are the areas in which we have the largest presence. We have two reportable segments: Retail and Credit.\n\nAs of March 16, 2015, the Retail segment includes our 115 “Nordstrom” branded full-line stores in the U.S. and Nordstrom.com, 167 off-price Nordstrom Rack stores, two Canada full-line stores, Nordstromrack.com and HauteLook, and other retail channels including five Trunk Club showrooms and TrunkClub.com, our two Jeffrey boutiques and one clearance store that operates under the name “Last Chance.” Through these multiple retail channels, we strive to deliver the best customer experience possible. We offer an extensive selection of high-quality brand-name and private label merchandise focused on apparel, shoes, cosmetics and accessories. Our integrated Nordstrom full-line stores and online store allow us to provide our customers with a seamless shopping experience. In-store purchases are primarily fulfilled from that store’s inventory, but when inventory is unavailable at that store it may also be shipped to our customers from our fulfillment center in Cedar Rapids, Iowa, or from other Nordstrom full-line stores. Online purchases are primarily shipped to our customers from our Cedar Rapids fulfillment center, but may also be shipped from our Nordstrom full-line stores. Our customers can also pick up online orders in our Nordstrom full-line stores if inventory is available at one of our locations. These capabilities allow us to better serve customers across various channels and improve sales. Nordstrom Rack stores purchase high-quality brand-name merchandise primarily from the same vendors carried in Nordstrom full-line stores and also serve as outlets for clearance merchandise from our Nordstrom stores and other retail channels. During the year, we launched Nordstromrack.com and the associated mobile app. Nordstromrack.com combines the technology expertise of HauteLook with the merchant expertise of Nordstrom Rack. Nordstromrack.com and HauteLook offer limited-time sale events on fashion and lifestyle brands as well as a persistent selection of off-price, high-quality brand-name merchandise and are integrated with a single customer log-in, shared shopping cart and streamlined checkout process. Furthermore, we can accommodate returns from these sites by mail or at any Nordstrom Rack location. \n\nOur Credit segment includes our wholly owned federal savings bank, Nordstrom fsb, through which we provide a private label credit card, two Nordstrom Visa credit cards and a debit card. The credit and debit cards feature a loyalty program designed to increase customer visits and spending. Although the primary purposes of our Credit segment are to foster greater customer loyalty and drive more sales, we also generate revenues from finance charges and other fees on these cards. In addition, we save on interchange fees that the Retail segment would incur if our customers used third-party cards.\n\nFor more information about our business and our reportable segments, see Item 7: Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations and Note 16: Segment Reporting in Item 8: Financial Statements and Supplementary Data.\n\nFISCAL YEAR We operate on a 52/53-week fiscal year ending on the Saturday closest to January 31 st . References to 2014 and all years within this document are based on a 52-week fiscal year, except 2012, which is based on a 53-week fiscal year.\n\nTRADEMARKS We have 156 trademarks, each of which is the subject of one or more trademark registrations and/or trademark applications. Our most notable trademarks include Nordstrom, Nordstrom Rack, HauteLook, Halogen, BP., Zella, Caslon and Trunk Club. Each of our trademarks is renewable indefinitely, provided that it is still used in commerce at the time of the renewal.\n\nRETURN POLICY We have a fair and liberal approach to returns as part of our objective to provide high-quality customer service. We do not have a formal return policy at our Nordstrom full-line stores or online at Nordstrom.com. Our goal is to take care of our customers, which includes making returns and exchanges easy, whether in stores or online, where we offer free shipping and free returns. Our Nordstrom Rack stores generally accept returns up to 90 days from the date of purchase with the original price tag and sales receipt, and also accept returns of Nordstromrack.com and HauteLook merchandise. Nordstromrack.com and HauteLook generally accept returns of apparel, footwear and accessories within 90 days from the date of shipment.\n\nSEASONALITY Due to our Anniversary Sale in July and the holidays in December, our sales are typically higher in the second and fourth quarters than in the first and third quarters of the fiscal year.\n\n## FISCAL YEAR We operate on a 52/53-week fiscal year ending on the Saturday closest to January 31\n\n## TRADEMARKS We have 156 trademarks, each of which is the subject of one or more trademark registrations and/or trademark applications. Our most\n\n## RETURN POLICY We have a fair and liberal approach to returns as part of our objective to provide high-quality customer service. We do not have a formal\n\n## SEASONALITY Due to our Anniversary Sale in July and the holidays in December, our sales are typically higher in the second and fourth quarters than in the\n\n4" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.56016736042397, + "doc_id": "d95ce6dca423d8a81fe5740efffa101aa3f1518e5635c884f3144d886650c655", + "edit_distance": 0.7002997002997003, + "f1_score": 0.9166666666666667, + "meteor": 0.4570255245315166, + "precision": 0.8784722222222222, + "pred_md": "## CORPORATE GOVERNANCE\n\nThe Board of Sundance Energy Australia Limited ('Sundance' or 'the Company') is committed to the Principles and Recommendations underpinning best practices in corporate governance as specified by the Australian Securities Exchange (the 'ASX') Corporate Governance Council's 2nd Edition of Corporate Governance Principles and Recommendations with 2010 Amendments . Sundance's Board has taken, and will continue to take, all necessary actions to adopt the amended Principles in each instance where that is appropriate, or to design policies and procedures to adopt them in a fashion modified appropriately to the Company's particular circumstances.\n\nSundance's Board has carefully reviewed the Corporate Governance Principles and Recommendations . As is set forth below, the vast majority of these have already been achieved in total accordance with the Principles and Recommendations. In a few instances, the Company has adopted hybrid methodologies of compliance deemed appropriate to its size, structure and situation. The Board is comfortable that its practices are satisfactory for an entity of its structure and size. In some instances disclosures recommended by the ASX have been made in other areas of the Annual Report, namely the Directors' Report, and therefore will not be restated under this section.\n\nIn March 2014, the ASX Corporate Governance Council release the 3 rd edition of the Corporate Governance Principles and Recommendations , which applies to ASX listed companies in respect of their first full financial year commencing on or after 1 July 2014. Accordingly, the 3 rd edition of the Corporate Governance Principles and Recommendations will apply to Sundance for its financial year ended 31 December 2015. Sundance will report its compliance against those recommendations in the Company's Corporate Governance Statement for fiscal year 2015.\n\nDuring fiscal year 2014, the Company's corporate governance practices and policies discussed below have complied with those outlined in the Corporate Governance Principles and Recommendations (2 nd Edition), except as noted otherwise.\n\n## Principle 1: Lay Solid Foundations for Management and Oversight\n\nThe respective roles and responsibilities of the Board and management, including those matter expressly reserved to the Board, are set out in the Board Charter, which is available in the corporate governance section of Sundance's website.\n\n## 1.1 Roles and Responsibilities\n\nThe Board is responsible for the corporate governance of the Company, including the setting and monitoring of objectives, goals and corporate strategy. Management is responsible for the implementation of the strategy and running the day to day business of the Company's affairs.\n\nResponsibilities of the board include -\n\n- · Providing input into and final approval of management's development of corporate strategy and performance objectives;\n- · Monitoring senior executives' performance and implementation of the Company's strategy;\n- · Approving and monitoring the business plan, budget and corporate policies;\n- · Monitoring and the approval of financial and other reporting;\n- · Ensuring an effective system of internal controls exists and is functioning as required;\n- · Establishing Sundance's vision, mission, values and ethical standards as reflected in a Code of Conduct;\n- · Delegating an appropriate level of authority to management and approving any additional change to those delegations;\n- · Ensuring appropriate resources are available to senior executives;\n- · Appointment, succession, performance assessment, remuneration and dismissal of the Managing Director;\n- · Reviewing, ratifying and monitoring systems of risk management and internal control, codes of conduct, and legal compliance; and\n- · Approving and monitoring the progress of major capital expenditure, capital management, and acquisitions and divestitures.\n\nThe Board has delegated responsibility to the Managing Director ('MD') and the executive management team to manage the day-to-day operations and administration of the Company. In carrying out this delegation, the MD, supported by the senior executives, routinely reports to the Board regarding Sundance's progress on achieving both the short and long-term plans for the Company. The MD is accountable to the Board for the authority that is delegated by the Board.\n\n- 47 -", + "recall": 0.9583333333333334, + "true_md": "## CORPORATE GOVERNANCE $_{The Board of Sundance Energy Australia Limited (“Sundance” or “the Company”) is committed to the Principles and }$\n\nThe Board has delegated responsibility to the Managing Director (“MD”) and the executive management team to manage the day-to-day operations and administration of the Company. In carrying out this delegation, the MD, supported by the senior executives, routinely reports to the Board regarding Sundance’s progress on achieving both the short and long-term plans for the Company. The MD is accountable to the Board for the authority that is delegated by the Board. \n\n1.1 Roles and Responsibilities The Board is responsible for the corporate governance of the Company, including the setting and monitoring of objectives, goals and corporate strategy. Management is responsible for the implementation of the strategy and running the day to day business of the Company’s affairs.\n\nResponsibilities of the board include – • Providing input into and final approval of management’s development of corporate strategy and performance \n\nThe respective roles and responsibilities of the Board and management, including those matter expressly reserved to the Board, are set out in the Board Charter, which is available in the corporate governance section of Sundance’s website.\n\nDuring fiscal year 2014, the Company’s corporate governance practices and policies discussed below have complied with those outlined in the Corporate Governance Principles and Recommendations (2 nd Edition), except as noted otherwise. \n\nIn March 2014, the ASX Corporate Governance Council release the 3 rd edition of the Corporate Governance Principles and Recommendations , which applies to ASX listed companies in respect of their first full financial year commencing on or after 1 July 2014. Accordingly, the 3 rd edition of the Corporate Governance Principles and Recommendations will apply to Sundance for its financial year ended 31 December 2015. Sundance will report its compliance against those recommendations in the Company’s Corporate Governance Statement for fiscal year 2015. \n\nSundance’s Board has carefully reviewed the Corporate Governance Principles and Recommendations . As is set forth below, the vast majority of these have already been achieved in total accordance with the Principles and Recommendations. In a few instances, the Company has adopted hybrid methodologies of compliance deemed appropriate to its size, structure and situation. The Board is comfortable that its practices are satisfactory for an entity of its structure and size. In some instances disclosures recommended by the ASX have been made in other areas of the Annual Report, namely the Directors’ Report, and therefore will not be restated under this section.\n\n## $^{ }$Principle 1: Lay Solid Foundations for Management and Oversight\n\n## 1.1 Roles and Responsibilities The Board is responsible for the corporate governance of the Company, including the setting and monitoring of objectives, goals\n\n- 47 - \n\n- Responsibilities of the board include – • Providing input into and final approval of management’s development of corporate strategy and performance objectives; • Monitoring senior executives’ performance and implementation of the Company’s strategy; \n\n- objectives; • Monitoring senior executives’ performance and implementation of the Company’s strategy; • Approving and monitoring the business plan, budget and corporate policies; \n\n- • Monitoring senior executives’ performance and implementation of the Company’s strategy; • Approving and monitoring the business plan, budget and corporate policies; • Monitoring and the approval of financial and other reporting; \n\n- • Approving and monitoring the business plan, budget and corporate policies; • Monitoring and the approval of financial and other reporting; • Ensuring an effective system of internal controls exists and is functioning as required; \n\n- • Monitoring and the approval of financial and other reporting; • Ensuring an effective system of internal controls exists and is functioning as required; • Establishing Sundance’s vision, mission, values and ethical standards as reflected in a Code of Conduct; \n\n- • Ensuring an effective system of internal controls exists and is functioning as required; • Establishing Sundance’s vision, mission, values and ethical standards as reflected in a Code of Conduct; • Delegating an appropriate level of authority to management and approving any additional change to those delegations; \n\n- • Establishing Sundance’s vision, mission, values and ethical standards as reflected in a Code of Conduct; • Delegating an appropriate level of authority to management and approving any additional change to those delegations; • Ensuring appropriate resources are available to senior executives; \n\n- • Delegating an appropriate level of authority to management and approving any additional change to those delegations; • Ensuring appropriate resources are available to senior executives; • Appointment, succession, performance assessment, remuneration and dismissal of the Managing Director; \n\n- • Ensuring appropriate resources are available to senior executives; • Appointment, succession, performance assessment, remuneration and dismissal of the Managing Director; • Reviewing, ratifying and monitoring systems of risk management and internal control, codes of conduct, and legal \n\n- • Appointment, succession, performance assessment, remuneration and dismissal of the Managing Director; • Reviewing, ratifying and monitoring systems of risk management and internal control, codes of conduct, and legal compliance; and • Approving and monitoring the progress of major capital expenditure, capital management, and acquisitions and \n\n- compliance; and • Approving and monitoring the progress of major capital expenditure, capital management, and acquisitions and divestitures." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9504227400931663, + "doc_id": "4312e1d86dca2de387689f0421c47c8dc64a75bb5614d1855331576f4c0fe644", + "edit_distance": 0.5928571428571429, + "f1_score": 0.993006993006993, + "meteor": 0.7729774911477975, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## NOTE 11: LEASES\n\nThe Company leases its corporate headquarters facility along with many service center and distribution center facilities, vehicles and equipment under non-cancelable lease agreements accounted for as operating leases. The minimum annual rental commitments under non-cancelable operating leases as of June 30, 2012 are as follows:\n\nRental expenses incurred for operating leases, principally from leases for real property, vehicles and computer equipment were $31,200 in 2012, $31,400 in 2011 and $30,700 in 2010.\n\n## NOTE 12: SEGMENT AND GEOGRAPHIC INFORMATION\n\nThe Company's reportable segments are: Service Center Based Distribution and Fluid Power Businesses. The Service Center Based Distribution segment provides customers with solutions to their maintenance, repair and original equipment manufacturing needs through the distribution of industrial products including bearings, power transmission components, fluid power components, industrial rubber products, linear motion products, safety products, general maintenance and a variety of mill supply products. The Fluid Power Businesses segment distributes fluid power components and operates shops that assemble fluid power systems and components, performs equipment repair, and offers technical advice to customers.\n\nThe accounting policies of the Company's reportable segments are generally the same as those described in Note 1. Sales primarily from the Fluid Power Businesses segment to the Service Center Based Distribution segment of $18,097, $17,665 and $14,006, in fiscal 2012, 2011 and 2010, respectively, have been eliminated in the table below.\n\n## Segment Financial Information\n\nApplied Industrial Technologies, Inc. and Subsidiaries\n\n35", + "recall": 0.9861111111111112, + "true_md": "## NOTE 11: LEASES\n\n## NOTE 12: SEGMENT AND GEOGRAPHIC INFORMATION\n\n## Segment Financial Information\n\n35 Applied Industrial Technologies, Inc. and Subsidiaries\n\nThe accounting policies of the Company’s reportable segments are generally the same as those described in Note 1. Sales primarily from the Fluid Power Businesses segment to the Service Center Based Distribution segment of $18,097, $17,665 and $14,006, in fiscal 2012, 2011 and 2010, respectively, have been eliminated in the table below. \n\nThe Company's reportable segments are: Service Center Based Distribution and Fluid Power Businesses. The Service Center Based Distribution segment provides customers with solutions to their maintenance, repair and original equipment manufacturing needs through the distribution of industrial products including bearings, power transmission components, fluid power components, industrial rubber products, linear motion products, safety products, general maintenance and a variety of mill supply products. The Fluid Power Businesses segment distributes fluid power components and operates shops that assemble fluid power systems and components, performs equipment repair, and offers technical advice to customers. \n\nRental expenses incurred for operating leases, principally from leases for real property, vehicles and computer equipment were $31,200 in 2012, $31,400 in 2011 and $30,700 in 2010.\n\nThe Company leases its corporate headquarters facility along with many service center and distribution center facilities, vehicles and equipment under non-cancelable lease agreements accounted for as operating leases. The minimum annual rental commitments under non-cancelable operating leases as of June 30, 2012 are as follows:" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7658540971877065, + "doc_id": "db04b2275478b2c103861f987220a4ff9fc7927d569f13bf731f886c6aa189bd", + "edit_distance": 0.30927835051546393, + "f1_score": 0.9545454545454545, + "meteor": 0.9305707886766004, + "precision": 0.9692307692307692, + "pred_md": "## 16. Borrowings\n\nThis note provides information about the contractual terms of the Group's interest-bearing loans and borrowings. For more information about the Group's exposure to interest rate and liquidity risk, see Note 28.\n\n## Terms and debt repayment schedule\n\nTerms and conditions of outstanding loans were as follows:\n\n- 1 BBSY means bank bill swap bid rate\n- 2 THBFIX means Thai Baht interest rate fixing\n- 3 LIBOR means London interbank offered rate\n\n89\n\nNotes to the Financial Statements\n\ncontinued\n\nNotes to the Financial Statements\n\nu", + "recall": 0.9402985074626866, + "true_md": "Notes to the Financial Statements 89\n\n## 16. Borrowings\n\nThis note provides information about the contractual terms of the Group’s interest-bearing loans and borrowings. For more information about the Group’s exposure to interest rate and liquidity risk, see Note 28.\n\nNotes t o the Financial Statements\n\n## Terms and debt repayment schedule\n\nTerms and conditions of outstanding loans were as follows:\n\n1 BBSY means bank bill swap bid rate\n\n2 THBFIX means Thai Baht interest rate fixing\n\n3 LIBOR means London interbank offered rate\n\ncontinued u" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7288052006491229, + "doc_id": "a19e81e49a31a98eec850c6d2ed82fecd6d7222380bbce462c2dad50035e55ea", + "edit_distance": 0.3659217877094972, + "f1_score": 0.9028571428571428, + "meteor": 0.74381695647763, + "precision": 0.9349112426035503, + "pred_md": "EAGLE FORD\n\nEAGLE FORD\n\n## The Eagle Ford continues to have one of the highest internal rates of return of any of the US unconventional resource plays.\n\nBecause of its relatively low operating costs, the Eagle Ford to remains profitable during current oil commodity pricing conditions. Sundance has quickly transformed the Eagle Ford position acquired in its merger with Texon Petroleum Ltd to its most valuable asset in its portfolio through development and growing its drilling inventory.\n\n## NET EAGLE FORD DRILLING LOCATIONS\n\n(excluding contingent resources)\n\n■\n\nPROVED\n\n- ■ PROBABLE AND POSSIBLE\n- -DRILLING INVENTORY (YEARS)\n\nIn 2014, the Company brought 35 gross (26.1 net) Eagle Ford wells into\n\n## EAGLE FORD\n\nAs at and for the Year Ended 31 December 2014\n\nproduction by D&P investments of $244 million. Through $26 million of direct mineral leases and $36 million of acquisitions in 2014, the Company increased its Eagle Ford acreage position to 20,742 net acres, which represents 153.7 net undrilled 3P Reserves locations.\n\nSince its entrance into the Eagle Ford in March 2013, the Company has:\n\n- · increased its production over 10x to a 2014 exit rate of 8,177 BOEPD (a 290 percent CAGR);\n- · increased 1P Constant Case Reserves by 10x to 18,132 MBOE (PV10 of $449.3 million (an 18x increase));\n- · increased its acreage to approximately 33,000 net acres, primarily in the volatile oil and condensate window of the Eagle Ford (includes 14,180 net acres acquired in January 2015 and excludes 5,418 net acres targeting the Georgetown Formation in neighboring Maverick County);\n\n## EAGLE FORD CONSTANT CASE RESERVES", + "recall": 0.8729281767955801, + "true_md": "EAGLE FORD\n\nThe Eagle Ford continues to have one of the highest internal rates of return of any of the US unconventional resource plays. \n\nBecause of its relatively low operating costs, the Eagle Ford to remains profitable during current oil commodity pricing conditions. Sundance has quickly transformed the Eagle Ford position acquired in its merger with Texon Petroleum Ltd to its most valuable asset in its portfolio through development and growing its drilling inventory. \n\n## EAGLE FORD\n\nAs at and for theYear Ended 31 December 2014 \n\nIn 2014, the Company brought 35 gross (26.1 net) Eagle Ford wells into\n\nproduction by D&P investments of $244 million. Through $26 million of direct mineral leases and $36 million of acquisitions in 2014, the Company increased its Eagle Ford acreage position to 20,742 net acres, which represents 153.7 net undrilled 3P Reserves locations.\n\nSince its entrance into the Eagle Ford in March 2013, the Company has:\n\n• increased its production over 10x to a 2014 exit rate of 8,177 BOEPD (a 290 percent CAGR);\n\n• increased 1P Constant Case Reserves by 10x to 18,132 MBOE (PV10 of $449.3 million (an 18x increase));\n\n• increased its acreage to approximately 33,000 net acres, primarily in the volatile oil and condensate window of the Eagle Ford (includes 14,180 net acres acquired in January 2015 and excludes 5,418 net acres targeting the Georgetown Formation in neighboring Maverick County);\n\n• increased its producing well count to 77 gross (53.8 net), with an additional 19 gross (10.6 net) wells in progress at year-end;\n\nAs at and for theYear Ended 31 December 2014 \n\n## EAGLE FORD CONSTANT CASE RESERVES\n\n• increased its undrilled 3P Reserves drilling locations to 153.7 net; which represents a 4.3 year drilling inventory (assuming two rig program drilling 36 net wells per year and 40-80 acre spacing)\n\n## NET EAGLE FORD DRILLING LOCATIONS\n\n(excluding contingent resources)\n\n10" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9463864444621076, + "doc_id": "529bd18767e170a4fe84fcc8a4e240ba37d32b70e2d8d169b50ac760b133f6a4", + "edit_distance": 0.4332552693208431, + "f1_score": 0.9905213270142181, + "meteor": 0.9696442302588718, + "precision": 0.9952380952380953, + "pred_md": "## Final Fair Values of Assets Acquired and Liabilities Assumed\n\nThe table below summarizes the final fair values of the assets acquired and liabilities assumed for all the acquisitions described above.\n\n1 We paid the $167 million related to theScore on October 19, 2012.\n\n2 Customer relationships are amortized over a period ranging from 5 to 10 years.\n\n3 Broadcast licence is an indefinite life intangible asset.\n\n4 Acquisition transaction costs for theScore include $17 million related to the CRTC tangible benefits commitments that were required as a condition of the CRTC's approval of the transaction.\n\n5 Goodwill related to other acquisitions was allocated to Media and Business Solutions.\n\n## Pro Forma Disclosures\n\nThe table below shows the incremental revenue, operating income (loss), depreciation and amortization and restructuring, acquisition and other expenses for each acquisition since the respective dates of acquisition to December 31, 2013.\n\n1 Excludes acquisition transaction costs.\n\nIf all of the above acquisitions had occurred on January 1, 2013, we estimate our incremental revenue from these acquisitions would have been $172 million and incremental operating income would have been $3 million for 2013.\n\nThe pro forma disclosures are based on estimates and assumptions we believe are reasonable. The information provided is not necessarily an indication of what our consolidated financial results will be in the future.\n\n## 2012 Acquisitions\n\nThere were no individually material business combinations or divestitures in 2012.\n\n## NOTE 8: RESTRUCTURING, ACQUISITION AND OTHER EXPENSES\n\nIn 2013, we incurred:\n\n- GLYPH<129> $53 million of restructuring expenses related to severances resulting from the targeted restructuring of our employee base and to improve our cost structure (2012 - $89 million), and\n- GLYPH<129> $32 million of acquisition transaction costs and other costs (2012 - $3 million).\n\nThe table below shows the additions to liabilities related to the restructuring, acquisition and other costs and payments made against the liabilities in 2013.\n\nThe remaining liability of $63 million as at December 31, 2013, is included in accounts payable and accrued liabilities and other long-term liabilities. We expect to pay the remaining liability over the next two years.\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC.\n\n105\n\nNOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS", + "recall": 0.9858490566037735, + "true_md": "The table below summarizes the final fair values of the assets acquired and liabilities assumed for all the acquisitions described above.\n\n1 We paid the $167 million related to theScore on October 19, 2012.\n\n2 Customer relationships are amortized over a period ranging from 5 to 10 years.\n\n3 Broadcast licence is an indefinite life intangible asset.\n\n4 Acquisition transaction costs for theScore include $17 million related to the CRTC tangible benefits commitments that were required as a condition of the CRTC’s approval of the transaction.\n\n5 Goodwill related to other acquisitions was allocated to Media and Business Solutions.\n\nThe table below shows the incremental revenue, operating income (loss), depreciation and amortization and restructuring, acquisition and other expenses for each acquisition since the respective dates of acquisition to December 31, 2013.\n\n1 Excludes acquisition transaction costs.\n\nIf all of the above acquisitions had occurred on January 1, 2013, we estimate our incremental revenue from these acquisitions would have been $172 million and incremental operating income would have been $3 million for 2013.\n\nThe pro forma disclosures are based on estimates and assumptions we believe are reasonable. The information provided is not necessarily an indication of what our consolidated financial results will be in the future.\n\nThere were no individually material business combinations or divestitures in 2012.\n\nIn 2013, we incurred:\n\nThe table below shows the additions to liabilities related to the restructuring, acquisition and other costs and payments made against the liabilities in 2013.\n\nThe remaining liability of $63 million as at December 31, 2013, is included in accounts payable and accrued liabilities and other long-term liabilities. We expect to pay the remaining liability over the next two years.\n\n## Final Fair Values of Assets Acquired and Liabilities Assumed\n\n## 2012 Acquisitions\n\n## NOTE 8: RESTRUCTURING, ACQUISITION AND OTHER EXPENSES\n\n- GLYPH<129> $53 million of restructuring expenses related to severances resulting from the targeted restructuring of our employee base and to improve our cost structure (2012 – $89 million), and\n\n- GLYPH<129> $32 million of acquisition transaction costs and other costs (2012 – $3 million).\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 105\n\n## Pro Forma Disclosures\n\nNOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.866728893197625, + "doc_id": "643a160b5671476067bc5c7cbd07e795c0cb9e0bad699ac25083c47bb1063355", + "edit_distance": 0.11973018549747048, + "f1_score": 0.9813084112149534, + "meteor": 0.8896932100590708, + "precision": 0.9767441860465116, + "pred_md": "## Nordstrom, Inc.\n\n## Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nDollar and share amounts in millions except per share, per option and per unit amounts\n\n## NOTE 13: STOCK-BASED COMPENSATION\n\nWe currently have three stock-based compensation plans: the 2010 Equity Incentive Plan ('2010 Plan'), the Employee Stock Purchase Plan ('ESPP') and the 2002 Nonemployee Director Stock Incentive Plan. Additionally, as part of our acquisitions of HauteLook in 2011 and Trunk Club in 2014, we replaced and/or granted awards from shares available that were not allocated to a specific plan, as well as created an additional long-term incentive plan for certain Trunk Club employees.\n\nIn 2010, our shareholders approved the adoption of the 2010 Plan, which replaced the 2004 Equity Incentive Plan ('2004 Plan'). The 2010 Plan authorizes the grant of stock options, performance share units, restricted stock units, stock appreciation rights and both restricted and unrestricted shares of common stock to employees. The aggregate number of shares to be issued under the 2010 Plan may not exceed 27.6 plus any shares currently outstanding under the 2004 Plan which are forfeited or which expire during the term of the 2010 Plan. No future grants will be made under the 2004 Plan. As of January 31, 2015, we have 70.4 shares authorized, 40.4 shares issued and outstanding and 16.7 shares remaining available for future grants under the 2010 Plan.\n\nUnder the ESPP, employees may make payroll deductions of up to 10% of their base and bonus compensation. At the end of each six-month offering period, participants may apply their accumulated payroll deductions toward the purchase of shares of our common stock at 90% of the fair market value on the last day of the offer period. As of January 31, 2015, we had 12.6 shares authorized and 3.3 shares available for issuance under the ESPP. We issued 0.3 shares under the ESPP during 2014. At the end of both 2014 and 2013, we had current liabilities of $6 for future purchases of shares under the ESPP.\n\nThe 2002 Nonemployee Director Stock Incentive Plan authorizes the grant of stock awards to our nonemployee directors. These awards may be deferred or issued in the form of restricted or unrestricted stock, non-qualified stock options or stock appreciation rights. As of January 31, 2015, we had 0.9 shares authorized and 0.5 shares available for issuance under this plan. In 2014, we deferred shares with a total expense of less than $1.\n\nThe following table summarizes our stock-based compensation expense:\n\nThe stock-based compensation expense before income tax benefit was recorded in our Consolidated Statements of Earnings as follows:\n\nThe benefit of tax deductions in excess of the compensation cost recognized for stock-based awards is classified as financing cash inflows and are reflected as 'Excess tax benefit from stock-based compensation' in the Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows.\n\n56", + "recall": 0.9859154929577465, + "true_md": "## Nordstrom, Inc. Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n## Nordstrom, Inc. Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements Dollar and share amounts in millions except per share, per option and per unit amounts\n\n## NOTE 13: STOCK-BASED COMPENSATION We currently have three stock-based compensation plans: the 2010 Equity Incentive Plan (“2010 Plan”), the Employee Stock Purchase Plan\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements Dollar and share amounts in millions except per share, per option and per unit amounts\n\nNOTE 13: STOCK-BASED COMPENSATION We currently have three stock-based compensation plans: the 2010 Equity Incentive Plan (“2010 Plan”), the Employee Stock Purchase Plan (“ESPP”) and the 2002 Nonemployee Director Stock Incentive Plan. Additionally, as part of our acquisitions of HauteLook in 2011 and Trunk Club in 2014, we replaced and/or granted awards from shares available that were not allocated to a specific plan, as well as created an additional long-term incentive plan for certain Trunk Club employees.\n\nIn 2010, our shareholders approved the adoption of the 2010 Plan, which replaced the 2004 Equity Incentive Plan (“2004 Plan”). The 2010 Plan authorizes the grant of stock options, performance share units, restricted stock units, stock appreciation rights and both restricted and unrestricted shares of common stock to employees. The aggregate number of shares to be issued under the 2010 Plan may not exceed 27.6 plus any shares currently outstanding under the 2004 Plan which are forfeited or which expire during the term of the 2010 Plan. No future grants will be made under the 2004 Plan. As of January 31, 2015, we have 70.4 shares authorized, 40.4 shares issued and outstanding and 16.7 shares remaining available for future grants under the 2010 Plan.\n\nUnder the ESPP, employees may make payroll deductions of up to 10% of their base and bonus compensation. At the end of each six-month offering period, participants may apply their accumulated payroll deductions toward the purchase of shares of our common stock at 90% of the fair market value on the last day of the offer period. As of January 31, 2015, we had 12.6 shares authorized and 3.3 shares available for issuance under the ESPP. We issued 0.3 shares under the ESPP during 2014. At the end of both 2014 and 2013, we had current liabilities of $6 for future purchases of shares under the ESPP.\n\nThe 2002 Nonemployee Director Stock Incentive Plan authorizes the grant of stock awards to our nonemployee directors. These awards may be deferred or issued in the form of restricted or unrestricted stock, non-qualified stock options or stock appreciation rights. As of January 31, 2015, we had 0.9 shares authorized and 0.5 shares available for issuance under this plan. In 2014, we deferred shares with a total expense of less than $1.\n\nThe following table summarizes our stock-based compensation expense:\n\nThe stock-based compensation expense before income tax benefit was recorded in our Consolidated Statements of Earnings as follows:\n\nThe benefit of tax deductions in excess of the compensation cost recognized for stock-based awards is classified as financing cash inflows and are reflected as “Excess tax benefit from stock-based compensation” in the Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows.\n\n56" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9098348126932946, + "doc_id": "b3f73e1b712acbebb7d49e9a09780d7865ea9e4fc7f85368f027253e8ff5dac0", + "edit_distance": 0.11597374179431072, + "f1_score": 0.9605568445475638, + "meteor": 0.9502720847126928, + "precision": 0.9539170506912442, + "pred_md": "## COSTS PER BARREL OF OIL EQUIVALENT\n\nIn addition to the significantly improved operating profitability , the Company exited two non-core basins which resulted in a gain on sales of non-current assets of $50.3 million. The DJ and Bakken dispositions that occurred in 2014 are further proving the Company's track-record of large opportunistic dispositions that result in a high internal rate of return; allowing the Company to reinvest proceeds in basins with higher risk-adjusted\n\nreturns. Since 2007, the Company disposed of six prospects or basins with an aggregate transaction value of nearly $400 million. These dispositions had a transaction value weighted return of 83 percent. The 2014 DJ disposition (transaction value of $113 million) yielded the Company's highest internal rate of return to date of 104 percent.\n\nAs a result of the increased revenue, cost controlled operating and G&A expenses and gain on sales, offset by the Company's non-cash impairment of $71.2 million (due to the depressed oil commodity pricing at year-end), the Company reported profits before income tax for the year of $14.5 million.\n\n## INTERNAL RATE OF RETURN AND TRANSACTION VALUES\n\n· ASHLAND · NIOBRARA · SOUTH ANTELOPE · PHOENIX · DJ · GOLIATH\n\nAs mentioned above, the Company's Adjusted EBITDAX for the period ($126.4 million) approximates its operating cash flow of $128.1 million. This operating cash flow , along with i) net proceeds from the disposition of the DJ and Bakken basins ($118.8 million), ii) net proceeds from issuance of equity ($68.7 million) and iii) net debt draws ($100.0 million) were the Company's primary sources of cash (collectively $415.6 million), funding $437.2 million of cash uses including, i) development expenditures ($362.0 million), ii) exploration expenditures ($39.6 million) and iii) an acquisition of primarily undeveloped acreage in the Eagle Ford ($35.6 million).\n\nDespite the Company's robust 2014 drilling and completion program, it continued to preserve liquidity with $69.2 million of cash and equivalents and $15.0 million of undrawn borrowing capacity at year-end. The Company also maintains a low-leverage model with outstanding principal of $130.0 million at year-end, which represents 1.0x the Company's 2014 Adjusted EBITDAX. The Company ranks among the lowest of its peers in this leverage metric, a full 272 absolute basis points below the mean of its peers (3.8x).\n\n7", + "recall": 0.9672897196261683, + "true_md": "## COSTS PER BARREL OF OIL EQUIVALENT\n\n## INTERNAL RATE OF RETURN AND TRANSACTION VALUES\n\n(in millions)\n\nIn addition to the significantly improved operating profitability, the Company exited two non-core basins which resulted in a gain on sales of non-current assets of $50.3 million. The DJ and Bakken dispositions that occurred in 2014 are further proving the Company’s track-record of large opportunistic dispositions that result in a high internal rate of return; allowing the Company to reinvest proceeds in basins with higher risk-adjusted\n\nreturns. Since 2007, the Company disposed of six prospects or basins with an aggregate transaction value of nearly $400 million. These dispositions had a transaction value weighted return of 83 percent. The 2014 DJ disposition (transaction value of $113 million) yielded the Company’s highest internal rate of return to date of 104 percent.\n\nAs a result of the increased revenue, cost controlled operating and G&A expenses and gain on sales, offset by the Company’s non-cash impairment of $71.2 million (due to the depressed oil commodity pricing at year-end), the Company reported profits before income tax for the year of $14.5 million.\n\nAs mentioned above, the Company’s Adjusted EBITDAX for the period ($126.4 million) approximates its operating cash flow of $128.1 million. This operating cash flow, along with i) net proceeds from the disposition of the DJ and Bakken basins ($118.8 million), ii) net proceeds from issuance of equity ($68.7 million) and iii) net debt draws ($100.0 million) were the Company’s primary sources of cash (collectively $415.6 million), fund- ing $437.2 million of cash uses including, i) development expenditures ($362.0 million), ii) exploration expenditures ($39.6 million) and iii) an acquisition of primarily undevel- oped acreage in the Eagle Ford ($35.6 million).\n\nDespite the Company’s robust 2014 drilling and completion program, it continued to preserve liquidity with $69.2 million of cash and equivalents and $15.0 million of undrawn borrowing capacity at year-end. The Company also maintains a low-leverage model with outstanding principal of $130.0 million at year-end, which represents 1.0x the Company’s 2014 Adjusted EBITDAX. The Company ranks among the lowest of its peers in this leverage metric, a full 272 absolute basis points below the mean of its peers (3.8x).\n\n7" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8646933853057132, + "doc_id": "8024ae40d6c73c4911648545eb925a80c7f75d3204df1e37fbd8a298e55bf695", + "edit_distance": 0.11501597444089456, + "f1_score": 0.927659574468085, + "meteor": 0.9286103743709477, + "precision": 0.9083333333333333, + "pred_md": "Income Analysis (Nonconsolidated)\n\nSMBC\n\n## International Operations\n\nNotes: 1. 'Interest-earning assets' are shown after deduction of the average balance of noninterest-earning deposits (2011, ¥61,902 million; 2010, ¥138,379 million).\n\n2. Figures in brackets [ ] indicate the average balances of interdepartmental lending and borrowing activities between domestic and international operations and related interest expenses. As net interest figures are shown for interest rate swaps and similar instruments, some figures for domestic and international operations do not add up to their sums.\n\n3. The average balance of foreign-currency-denominated transactions by domestic branches in international operations is calculated by the monthly current method, under which the TT middle rate at the end of the previous month is applied to nonexchange transactions of the month concerned.\n\n## Total of Domestic and International Operations\n\nMillions of yen\n\nNotes: 1. 'Interest-earning assets' are shown after deduction of the average balance of noninterest-earning deposits (2011, ¥1,070,110 million; 2010, ¥1,013,420 million).\n\n2. Income and expenses resulting from money held in trust are included in 'Other income' and 'Other expenses.' Therefore, 'Interest-earning assets' are shown after deduction of the average balance of money held in trust (2011, ¥10,640 million; 2010, ¥10,191 million). 'Interest-bearing liabilities' are shown after deduction of amounts equivalent to the average balance of money held in trust (2011, ¥10,640 million; 2010, ¥10,191 million) and corresponding interest (2011, ¥16 million; 2010, ¥20 million).\n\n3. Figures in the table above indicate the net average balances of amounts adjusted for interdepartmental lending and borrowing activities between domestic and international operations and related interest expenses.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n161", + "recall": 0.9478260869565217, + "true_md": "Income Analysis (Nonconsolidated)\n\nSMBC\n\nNotes: 1. “Interest-earning assets” are shown after deduction of the average balance of noninterest-earning deposits (2011, ¥61,902 million; 2010, ¥138,379 million).\n\n2. Figures in brackets [ ] indicate the average balances of interdepartmental lending and borrowing activities between domestic and international operations and related interest expenses. As net interest figures are shown for interest rate swaps and similar instruments, some figures for domestic and international operations do not add up to their sums.\n\n3. The average balance of foreign-currency-denominated transactions by domestic branches in international operations is calculated by the monthly current method, under which the TT middle rate at the end of the previous month is applied to nonexchange transactions of the month concerned.\n\nNotes: 1. “Interest-earning assets” are shown after deduction of the average balance of noninterest-earning deposits (2011, ¥1,070,110 million; 2010, ¥1,013,420 million).\n\n2. Income and expenses resulting from money held in trust are included in “Other income” and “Other expenses.” Therefore, “Interest-earning assets” are shown after deduction of the average balance of money held in trust (2011, ¥10,640 million; 2010, ¥10,191 million). “Interest-bearing liabilities” are shown after deduction of amounts equivalent to the average balance of money held in trust (2011, ¥10,640 million; 2010, ¥10,191 million) and corresponding interest (2011, ¥16 million; 2010, ¥20 million).\n\n3. Figures in the table above indicate the net average balances of amounts adjusted for interdepartmental lending and borrowing activities between domestic and international operations and related interest expenses.\n\n161\n\nSMFG 2011" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "6e2f40befdde59d71778735af2b2ac6246e59079cda926177e2966d4132ed2e0", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999530428249437, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "SMBC\n\nCapital Ratio Information\n\n## ■ Capital Structure Information (Nonconsolidated Capital Ratio (International Standard))\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n210", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "SMBC\n\nCapital Ratio Information\n\n## ■ Capital Structure Information (Nonconsolidated Capital Ratio (International Standard))\n\nSMFG 2011 210" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "638b3894d4e49690c9a54a1c47f160d95ed0e91ae86134010092c2a2fd6fc5d9", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999530428249437, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Aiming to become a globally competitive financial services group with the highest trust\n\nWe are a group of highly qualified professionals that can provide truly valuable financial services to our customers. Each of us thinks and acts with pride as experts in each business area in order to LEAD the competition in creating and delivering customer VALUE in a continually changing business environment." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7989757373154784, + "doc_id": "132134f3a96ff2a346c1245dc1f64fe0ec409e45ef2ef3afeab1e277a7743158", + "edit_distance": 0.34591194968553457, + "f1_score": 0.904109589041096, + "meteor": 0.9460273806090206, + "precision": 0.853448275862069, + "pred_md": "## about Killam properties inc.\n\nKillam Properties Inc. is a growth oriented Canadian real estate company. We own, manage and develop multi-family residential properties in Atlantic Canada and Ontario. Since our first acquisition in 2002, our real estate portfolio has grown to $1.5 billion and includes 12,647 apartment units and 5,164 manufactured home community (MHC) sites. We are committed to growing Killam's earnings by maximizing the returns from our existing portfolio and expanding through acquisitions and development.\n\n## our mission\n\nTo have a team of caring staff deliver clean, safe, quality housing to tenants who are proud to call our properties home.\n\n## our core Values\n\nBuild Community\n\nCurb Appeal\n\nDo the Right Thing\n\npresident's letter\n\n9\n\nasset portfolio\n\n18\n\nMD&a\n\n21\n\nFinancial Statements\n\n66\n\nFive-Year Summary\n\n96\n\nStrong Customer Relationships\n\n180 mill street, london, ontario", + "recall": 0.9611650485436893, + "true_md": "## about Killam properties inc.\n\n## our mission\n\n## our core Values\n\n180 mill street, london, ontario\n\nKillam Properties Inc. is a growth oriented Canadian real estate company. We own, manage and develop multi-family residential properties in Atlantic Canada and Ontario. Since our first acquisition in 2002, our real estate portfolio has grown to $1.5 billion and includes 12,647 apartment units and 5,164 manufactured home community (MHC) sites. We are committed to growing Killam’s earnings by maximizing the returns from our existing portfolio and expanding through acquisitions and development.\n\nTo have a team of caring staff deliver clean, safe, quality housing to tenants who are proud to call our properties home.\n\nBuild Community\n\nDo the Right Thing\n\nCurb Appeal\n\nStrong Customer Relationships\n\nCreative Solutions" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9590850696448983, + "doc_id": "0add4f32396c0c9d7194435d0f57838b994e911f1fbea3ff55e9f4e579b1a975", + "edit_distance": 0.030346820809248554, + "f1_score": 0.9815950920245401, + "meteor": 0.9709131544316543, + "precision": 0.9836065573770492, + "pred_md": "## REPORT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM\n\nTo the Board of Directors and Shareholders of Nordstrom, Inc. Seattle, Washington\n\nWe have audited the internal control over financial reporting of Nordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries (the 'Company') as of January 31, 2015, based on criteria established in Internal Control - Integrated Framework (2013), issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission. The Company's management is responsible for maintaining effective internal control over financial reporting and for its assessment of the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting, included in the accompanying Management's Report on Internal Control Over Financial Reporting. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on the Company's internal control over financial reporting based on our audit.\n\nWe conducted our audit in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether effective internal control over financial reporting was maintained in all material respects. Our audit included obtaining an understanding of internal control over financial reporting, assessing the risk that a material weakness exists, testing and evaluating the design and operating effectiveness of internal control based on the assessed risk, and performing such other procedures as we considered necessary in the circumstances. We believe that our audit provides a reasonable basis for our opinion.\n\nA company's internal control over financial reporting is a process designed by, or under the supervision of, the company's principal executive and principal financial officers, or persons performing similar functions, and effected by the company's board of directors, management, and other personnel to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles. A company's internal control over financial reporting includes those policies and procedures that (1) pertain to the maintenance of records that, in reasonable detail, accurately and fairly reflect the transactions and dispositions of the assets of the company; (2) provide reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded as necessary to permit preparation of financial statements in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles, and that receipts and expenditures of the company are being made only in accordance with authorizations of management and directors of the company; and (3) provide reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of unauthorized acquisition, use, or disposition of the company's assets that could have a material effect on the financial statements.\n\nBecause of the inherent limitations of internal control over financial reporting, including the possibility of collusion or improper management override of controls, material misstatements due to error or fraud may not be prevented or detected on a timely basis. Also, projections of any evaluation of the effectiveness of the internal control over financial reporting to future periods are subject to the risk that the controls may become inadequate because of changes in conditions, or that the degree of compliance with the policies or procedures may deteriorate.\n\nIn our opinion, the Company maintained, in all material respects, effective internal control over financial reporting as of January 31, 2015, based on the criteria established in Internal Control - Integrated Framework (2013) issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission.\n\nWe have also audited, in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States), the consolidated financial statements as of and for the year ended January 31, 2015 of the Company and our report dated March 16, 2015 expressed an unqualified opinion on those financial statements.\n\n/s/ Deloitte & Touche LLP Seattle, Washington March 16, 2015\n\nNordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 67", + "recall": 0.9795918367346939, + "true_md": "## REPORT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM\n\nTo the Board of Directors and Shareholders of Nordstrom, Inc. Seattle, Washington\n\nWe have audited the internal control over financial reporting of Nordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries (the “Company”) as of January 31, 2015, based on criteria established in Internal Control – Integrated Framework (2013), issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission. The Company’s management is responsible for maintaining effective internal control over financial reporting and for its assessment of the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting, included in the accompanying Management’s Report on Internal Control Over Financial Reporting. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on the Company’s internal control over financial reporting based on our audit.\n\nWe conducted our audit in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether effective internal control over financial reporting was maintained in all material respects. Our audit included obtaining an understanding of internal control over financial reporting, assessing the risk that a material weakness exists, testing and evaluating the design and operating effectiveness of internal control based on the assessed risk, and performing such other procedures as we considered necessary in the circumstances. We believe that our audit provides a reasonable basis for our opinion.\n\nA company’s internal control over financial reporting is a process designed by, or under the supervision of, the company’s principal executive and principal financial officers, or persons performing similar functions, and effected by the company’s board of directors, management, and other personnel to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles. A company’s internal control over financial reporting includes those policies and procedures that (1) pertain to the maintenance of records that, in reasonable detail, accurately and fairly reflect the transactions and dispositions of the assets of the company; (2) provide reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded as necessary to permit preparation of financial statements in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles, and that receipts and expenditures of the company are being made only in accordance with authorizations of management and directors of the company; and (3) provide reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of unauthorized acquisition, use, or disposition of the company’s assets that could have a material effect on the financial statements.\n\nBecause of the inherent limitations of internal control over financial reporting, including the possibility of collusion or improper management override of controls, material misstatements due to error or fraud may not be prevented or detected on a timely basis. Also, projections of any evaluation of the effectiveness of the internal control over financial reporting to future periods are subject to the risk that the controls may become inadequate because of changes in conditions, or that the degree of compliance with the policies or procedures may deteriorate.\n\nIn our opinion, the Company maintained, in all material respects, effective internal control over financial reporting as of January 31, 2015, based on the criteria established in Internal Control – Integrated Framework (2013) issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission.\n\nWe have also audited, in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States), the consolidated financial statements as of and for the year ended January 31, 2015 of the Company and our report dated March 16, 2015 expressed an unqualified opinion on those financial statements.\n\n/s/ Deloitte & Touche LLP Seattle, Washington March 16, 2015 \n\nNordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 67" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9382370405189846, + "doc_id": "a39e9f2d8e5881bf0a27f76b279c3930ca4541ccd8300a3d5a1679af3956899d", + "edit_distance": 0.06153846153846154, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9967816240420219, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## 106\n\nNotes to the Financial Statements\n\n## 29. Key management personnel disclosures continued\n\n## Option holdings\n\nThe number of options over ordinary shares in the Company held during the financial year by each Director of Kingsgate Consolidated Limited and each of the specified executives of the Group, including their personally-related entities, are set out as follows:\n\nwww.kingsgate.com.au", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Notes to the Financial Statements 106\n\n## 29. Key management personnel disclosures continued\n\n## Option holdings\n\nThe number of options over ordinary shares in the Company held during the financial year by each Director of Kingsgate Consolidated Limited and each of the specified executives of the Group, including their personally-related entities, are set out as follows:\n\nwww.kingsgate.com.au" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7607614666645081, + "doc_id": "a45e3e5c1c530a4e25a7d3c390955ea647876b7669728fa2e86b0d22100c3f38", + "edit_distance": 0.34, + "f1_score": 0.977035490605428, + "meteor": 0.7281993242344056, + "precision": 0.9790794979079498, + "pred_md": "## Nordstrom, Inc.\n\n## Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nDollar and share amounts in millions except per share, per option and per unit amounts\n\n## NOTE 9: FAIR VALUE MEASUREMENTS\n\nWe disclose our financial assets and liabilities that are measured at fair value in our Consolidated Balance Sheets by level within the fair value hierarchy as defined by applicable accounting standards:\n\n- Level 1: Quoted market prices in active markets for identical assets or liabilities\n- Level 2: Other observable market-based inputs or unobservable inputs that are corroborated by market data\n- Level 3: Unobservable inputs that cannot be corroborated by market data that reflect the reporting entity's own assumptions\n\nWe did not have any financial assets or liabilities that were measured at fair value on a recurring basis as of January 31, 2015 or February 1, 2014.\n\nFinancial instruments not measured at fair value on a recurring basis include cash and cash equivalents, accounts receivable and accounts payable and approximate fair value due to their short-term nature. We estimate the fair value of long-term debt using quoted market prices of the same or similar issues and, as such, this is considered a Level 2 fair value measurement. The following table summarizes the carrying value and fair value estimate of our long-term debt, including current maturities:\n\n1 The carrying value of long-term debt includes the remaining unamortized adjustment from our previous effective fair value hedge.\n\nWe also measure certain non-financial assets at fair value on a nonrecurring basis, primarily goodwill and long-lived tangible and intangible assets, in connection with periodic evaluations for potential impairment. See Note 1: Nature of Operations and Summary of Significant Accounting Policies for additional information related to goodwill, intangible assets and long-lived assets. We recorded no material impairment charges for these assets in 2014, 2013 and 2012. We estimate the fair value of goodwill and long-lived tangible and intangible assets using primarily unobservable inputs and, as such, these are considered Level 3 fair value measurements.\n\n## NOTE 10: LEASES\n\nWe lease the land or the land and buildings at many of our stores. Additionally, we lease office facilities, warehouses and equipment. Most of these leases are classified as operating leases and they expire at various dates through 2080. The majority of our fixed, non-cancelable lease terms are 15 to 30 years for Nordstrom full-line stores and 10 to 15 years for Nordstrom Rack stores. Many of our leases include options that allow us to extend the lease term beyond the initial commitment period, subject to terms agreed to at lease inception. Most of our leases also provide for payment of operating expenses, such as common area charges, real estate taxes and other executory costs, and some leases require additional payments based on sales, referred to as 'percentage rent.'\n\nFuture minimum lease payments as of January 31, 2015 are as follows:\n\n54", + "recall": 0.975, + "true_md": "Nordstrom, Inc. Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements Dollar and share amounts in millions except per share, per option and per unit amounts\n\n## NOTE 9: FAIR VALUE MEASUREMENTS We disclose our financial assets and liabilities that are measured at fair value in our Consolidated Balance Sheets by level within the fair\n\nNOTE 9: FAIR VALUE MEASUREMENTS We disclose our financial assets and liabilities that are measured at fair value in our Consolidated Balance Sheets by level within the fair value hierarchy as defined by applicable accounting standards:\n\nWe did not have any financial assets or liabilities that were measured at fair value on a recurring basis as of January 31, 2015 or February 1, 2014. \n\nFinancial instruments not measured at fair value on a recurring basis include cash and cash equivalents, accounts receivable and accounts payable and approximate fair value due to their short-term nature. We estimate the fair value of long-term debt using quoted market prices of the same or similar issues and, as such, this is considered a Level 2 fair value measurement. The following table summarizes the carrying value and fair value estimate of our long-term debt, including current maturities:\n\nLevel 1: Quoted market prices in active markets for identical assets or liabilities Level 2: Other observable market-based inputs or unobservable inputs that are corroborated by market data\n\nLevel 1: Quoted market prices in active markets for identical assets or liabilities Level 2: Other observable market-based inputs or unobservable inputs that are corroborated by market data Level 3: Unobservable inputs that cannot be corroborated by market data that reflect the reporting entity’s own \n\nLevel 2: Other observable market-based inputs or unobservable inputs that are corroborated by market data Level 3: Unobservable inputs that cannot be corroborated by market data that reflect the reporting entity’s own assumptions\n\n1 The carrying value of long-term debt includes the remaining unamortized adjustment from our previous effective fair value hedge.\n\nWe also measure certain non-financial assets at fair value on a nonrecurring basis, primarily goodwill and long-lived tangible and intangible assets, in connection with periodic evaluations for potential impairment. See Note 1: Nature of Operations and Summary of Significant Accounting Policies for additional information related to goodwill, intangible assets and long-lived assets. We recorded no material impairment charges for these assets in 2014, 2013 and 2012. We estimate the fair value of goodwill and long-lived tangible and intangible assets using primarily unobservable inputs and, as such, these are considered Level 3 fair value measurements.\n\nNOTE 10: LEASES We lease the land or the land and buildings at many of our stores. Additionally, we lease office facilities, warehouses and equipment. Most of these leases are classified as operating leases and they expire at various dates through 2080. The majority of our fixed, non-cancelable lease terms are 15 to 30 years for Nordstrom full-line stores and 10 to 15 years for Nordstrom Rack stores. Many of our leases include options that allow us to extend the lease term beyond the initial commitment period, subject to terms agreed to at lease inception. Most of our leases also provide for payment of operating expenses, such as common area charges, real estate taxes and other executory costs, and some leases require additional payments based on sales, referred to as “percentage rent.”\n\nFuture minimum lease payments as of January 31, 2015 are as follows:\n\n## NOTE 10: LEASES We lease the land or the land and buildings at many of our stores. Additionally, we lease office facilities, warehouses and equipment. Most of\n\n54" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "7d6fb5739c56eb27a55c27920792f16fa37a408655f9c326447f1b5c790b8fc1", + "edit_distance": 0.34, + "f1_score": 0.977035490605428, + "meteor": 0.7281993242344056, + "precision": 0.9790794979079498, + "pred_md": "u", + "recall": 0.975, + "true_md": "" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8856929544139895, + "doc_id": "66716571170f8698c98a2e172d9fb46b0835faedb02f01c1f8fd5984f0566a6e", + "edit_distance": 0.12233285917496443, + "f1_score": 0.9838056680161944, + "meteor": 0.8814546797919243, + "precision": 0.9798387096774194, + "pred_md": "## Nordstrom, Inc.\n\n## Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nDollar and share amounts in millions except per share, per option and per unit amounts\n\nIn the fourth quarter of 2013, we issued $665 of 5.00% senior unsecured notes due January 2044 ('2044 Notes'). We used $400 of the proceeds to retire all 6.75% senior unsecured notes due June 2014. We exchanged $201 of the 7.00% senior unsecured notes due January 2038 ('2038 Notes') for $265 of the 2044 Notes. The $64 in excess of the outstanding principal of the 2038 Notes relates to the lower interest rate and longer maturity of the new 2044 Notes, and we recorded it as part of the discount to be amortized over the term of the 2044 Notes. As of January 31, 2015, we had $598 of outstanding 2044 Notes, net of a $67 discount. The 2044 Notes exchanged for the 2038 Notes and the related discounts represented a non-cash activity of $201 that had no impact to our 2013 Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows.\n\nOur mortgage payable is secured by an office building that had a net book value of $64 at the end of 2014. Other secured debt as of January 31, 2015 consisted primarily of capital lease obligations.\n\nRequired principal payments on long-term debt, excluding capital lease obligations, are as follows:\n\n## Interest Expense\n\nThe components of interest expense, net are as follows:\n\n## Credit Facilities\n\nAs of January 31, 2015, we had total short-term borrowing capacity available for general corporate purposes of $800, which is our five-year $800 senior unsecured revolving credit facility ('revolver') that expires in March 2018. Under the terms of our revolver, we pay a variable rate of interest and a commitment fee based on our debt rating. The revolver is available for working capital, capital expenditures and general corporate purposes and backs our commercial paper program. We have the option to increase the revolving commitment by up to $200, to a total of $1,000, provided that we obtain written consent from the lenders.\n\nThe revolver requires that we maintain an adjusted debt to earnings before interest, income taxes, depreciation, amortization and rent ('EBITDAR') leverage ratio of less than four times. As of January 31, 2015 and February 1, 2014, we were in compliance with this covenant.\n\nOur $800 commercial paper program allows us to use the proceeds to fund operating cash requirements. Under the terms of the commercial paper agreement, we pay a rate of interest based on, among other factors, the maturity of the issuance and market conditions. The issuance of commercial paper has the effect, while it is outstanding, of reducing borrowing capacity under our revolver by an amount equal to the principal amount of commercial paper.\n\nDuring 2014, 2013 and 2012, we had no issuances under our commercial paper program and no borrowings under our revolver.\n\nIn November 2013, our wholly owned subsidiary in Puerto Rico entered into a $52 unsecured borrowing facility to support our expansion into that market. The facility expires in November 2018 and borrowings on this facility incur interest based upon the LIBOR plus 1.275% per annum and also incurs a fee based on our unused commitment. As of January 31, 2015, we had $37 outstanding on this facility.\n\nNordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 53", + "recall": 0.9878048780487805, + "true_md": "Nordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 53\n\n## Nordstrom, Inc. Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements Dollar and share amounts in millions except per share, per option and per unit amounts\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements Dollar and share amounts in millions except per share, per option and per unit amounts\n\nIn the fourth quarter of 2013, we issued $665 of 5.00% senior unsecured notes due January 2044 (“2044 Notes”). We used $400 of the proceeds to retire all 6.75% senior unsecured notes due June 2014. We exchanged $201 of the 7.00% senior unsecured notes due January 2038 (“2038 Notes”) for $265 of the 2044 Notes. The $64 in excess of the outstanding principal of the 2038 Notes relates to the lower interest rate and longer maturity of the new 2044 Notes, and we recorded it as part of the discount to be amortized over the term of the 2044 Notes. As of January 31, 2015, we had $598 of outstanding 2044 Notes, net of a $67 discount. The 2044 Notes exchanged for the 2038 Notes and the related discounts represented a non-cash activity of $201 that had no impact to our 2013 Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows.\n\nOur mortgage payable is secured by an office building that had a net book value of $64 at the end of 2014. Other secured debt as of January 31, 2015 consisted primarily of capital lease obligations. \n\nRequired principal payments on long-term debt, excluding capital lease obligations, are as follows:\n\n## Interest Expense The components of interest expense, net are as follows:\n\nInterest Expense The components of interest expense, net are as follows:\n\n## Credit Facilities As of January 31, 2015, we had total short-term borrowing capacity available for general corporate purposes of $800, which is our five-year\n\nCredit Facilities As of January 31, 2015, we had total short-term borrowing capacity available for general corporate purposes of $800, which is our five-year $800 senior unsecured revolving credit facility (“revolver”) that expires in March 2018. Under the terms of our revolver, we pay a variable rate of interest and a commitment fee based on our debt rating. The revolver is available for working capital, capital expenditures and general corporate purposes and backs our commercial paper program. We have the option to increase the revolving commitment by up to $200, to a total of $1,000, provided that we obtain written consent from the lenders. \n\nThe revolver requires that we maintain an adjusted debt to earnings before interest, income taxes, depreciation, amortization and rent (“EBITDAR”) leverage ratio of less than four times. As of January 31, 2015 and February 1, 2014, we were in compliance with this covenant. \n\nOur $800 commercial paper program allows us to use the proceeds to fund operating cash requirements. Under the terms of the commercial paper agreement, we pay a rate of interest based on, among other factors, the maturity of the issuance and market conditions. The issuance of commercial paper has the effect, while it is outstanding, of reducing borrowing capacity under our revolver by an amount equal to the principal amount of commercial paper. \n\nDuring 2014, 2013 and 2012, we had no issuances under our commercial paper program and no borrowings under our revolver.\n\nIn November 2013, our wholly owned subsidiary in Puerto Rico entered into a $52 unsecured borrowing facility to support our expansion into that market. The facility expires in November 2018 and borrowings on this facility incur interest based upon the LIBOR plus 1.275% per annum and also incurs a fee based on our unused commitment. As of January 31, 2015, we had $37 outstanding on this facility." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5654065505920092, + "doc_id": "3b90276b94928064c1a415dd3349cc283fcde23d1d19784c502c96f0772d4588", + "edit_distance": 0.4253731343283582, + "f1_score": 0.9756097560975611, + "meteor": 0.629084741778441, + "precision": 0.9523809523809523, + "pred_md": "The following table lists our U.S. and Canada retail store count and facility square footage by state/province as of January 31, 2015:\n\nNordstrom Full-Line Stores -\n\n1 Other includes one Nordstrom Canada full-line store, five Trunk Club showrooms, one Last Chance clearance store and two Jeffrey boutiques.\n\n2 California, Texas and Florida had the highest square footage, with a combined 10,692 square feet, representing 40% of the total company square footage.\n\nNordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 11", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "The following table lists our U.S. and Canada retail store count and facility square footage by state/province as of January 31, 2015:\n\nOther includes one Nordstrom Canada full-line store, five Trunk Club showrooms, one Last Chance clearance store and two Jeffrey boutiques. 2 California, Texas and Florida had the highest square footage, with a combined 10,692 square feet, representing 40% of the total company square footage.\n\nNordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 11\n\n1 Other includes one Nordstrom Canada full-line store, five Trunk Club showrooms, one Last Chance clearance store and two Jeffrey boutiques. California, Texas and Florida had the highest square footage, with a combined 10,692 square feet, representing 40% of the total company square footage." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9265742210035767, + "doc_id": "cef9df2d1f772ddf7b17309de5f6a5f1ac4dde6833e7708a71e25126c76b3843", + "edit_distance": 0.4669260700389105, + "f1_score": 0.9732283464566929, + "meteor": 0.9209543557684737, + "precision": 0.9840764331210191, + "pred_md": "SMFG\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nDepartment, which is independent from the business units that directly handle business transactions, manages market and liquidity risks in an integrated manner. The department also monitors market and liquidity risk situations and regularly reports to the Management Committee and the Board of Directors.\n\nFurthermore, SMBC's cross-departmental 'ALM Committee' reports on the state of observance of market risk capital and liquidity risk capital limits, and deliberates on administration of ALM policies. SMBC also has a system whereby front-office departments, middle-office departments and back-office departments check each other's work in order to prevent clerical errors, unauthorized transactions, etc.\n\nIn addition, SMBC's Internal Audit Unit, which is independent from other departments, periodically performs comprehensive internal audits to verify that the risk management framework is properly functioning and reports the audit results to the Management Committee, the Board of Directors and other concerned committees and departments.\n\n- ii. Market and liquidity risk management methodology - Market risk management\n\nSMBC manages market risk by setting maximum loss and VaR (value at risk: maximum potential loss for a given probability) within the risk capital limit that is set taking into account stockholders' equity and other factors and in accordance with the market transaction policies.\n\nSMBC uses the historical simulation method (a method for estimating the maximum loss by running simulations of changes in profit and loss on market fluctuation scenarios based on historical data) to measure VaR and, based on 4 years of historical observation, calculates the maximum loss that may occur as a result of market fluctuations in 1 day with a probability of 1%.\n\nRegarding risks associated with foreign exchange rates, interest rates, equity risk, option prices and other market risk factors, SMBC manages such risks by setting a maximum limit on the indicator suited for each market risk factor such as BPV (basis point value: denotes the change in value of a financial instrument resulting from a 0.01 percentage-point change in the yield).\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n100\n\n- Quantitative information on market risks As of March 31, 2011, total VaR of SMBC and other major consolidated subsidiaries was ¥48.6 billion in the banking book (market operations for generating profit through management of interest rates, terms, and other aspects of assets (loans, bonds, etc.) and liabilities (deposits, etc.)), ¥6.8 billion in the trading book (market operations for generating profit by taking advantage of short-term fluctuations in market values and differences in value among markets) and ¥114.1 billion in the holding of shares (listed shares) for the purpose of strategic investment.\n\nHowever, it should be noted that these figures are statistical figures that change according to changes in the assumptions and the calculation methods, and may not cover the risk of future market conditions fluctuating drastically compared to market fluctuations of the past.\n\n- - Liquidity risk management\n\nAt SMBC, funding liquidity risk is managed based on a framework consisting of setting funding gap limits and guidelines, maintaining a system of highly liquid supplementary funding sources, and establishing contingency plans. SMBC tries to avoid excessive reliance on short-term funds by managing funding gap limits and guidelines and has established a contingency plan covering emergency action plans such as reducing funding gap limits and guidelines. In addition, to ensure smooth fulfillment of transactions in face of market turmoil, SMBC holds assets such as U.S. treasuries that can be sold immediately and emergency committed lines as supplemental liquidity.\n\nMoreover, to manage the liquidity risk of marketable instruments, derivative transactions, etc., SMBC has trading limits for each business office classified by currency, instrument, transaction period, etc. As for financial futures, etc., risks are managed by restricting positions within a certain percentage of open interest in the entire market.\n\n- (d) Supplementary explanations about matters concerning fair value of financial instruments\n\nFair values of financial instruments are based on their market prices and, in cases where market prices are not available, reasonably calculated prices. Such prices have been calculated using certain assumptions, and may differ if calculated based on different assumptions.", + "recall": 0.9626168224299065, + "true_md": "Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nSMFG\n\nDepartment, which is independent from the business units that directly handle business transactions, manages market and liquidity risks in an integrated manner. The department also monitors market and liquidity risk situations and regularly reports to the Management Committee and the Board of Directors.\n\nFurthermore, SMBC’s cross-departmental “ALM Committee” reports on the state of observance of market risk capital and liquidity risk capital limits, and deliberates on administration of ALM policies. SMBC also has a system whereby front-office departments, middle-office departments and back-office departments check each other’s work in order to prevent clerical errors, unauthorized transactions, etc. \n\nIn addition, SMBC’s Internal Audit Unit, which is independent from other departments, periodically performs comprehensive internal audits to verify that the risk management framework is properly function- ing and reports the audit results to the Management Committee, the Board of Directors and other concerned committees and departments.\n\nSMBC manages market risk by setting maximum loss and VaR (value at risk: maximum potential loss for a given probability) within the risk capital limit that is set taking into account stockholders’ equity and other factors and in accordance with the market transaction policies. \n\nSMBC uses the historical simulation method (a method for estimating the maximum loss by running simulations of changes in profit and loss on market fluctuation scenarios based on historical data) to measure VaR and, based on 4 years of historical observation, calculates the maximum loss that may occur as a result of market fluctuations in 1 day with a probability of 1%. Regarding risks associated with foreign exchange \n\nrates, interest rates, equity risk, option prices and other market risk factors, SMBC manages such risks by setting a maximum limit on the indicator suited for each market risk factor such as BPV (basis point value: denotes the change in value of a financial instrument resulting from a 0.01 percentage-point change in the yield).\n\nMoreover, to manage the liquidity risk of marketable instruments, derivative transactions, etc., SMBC has trading limits for each business office classified by currency, instrument, transaction period, etc. As for financial futures, etc., risks are managed by restricting positions within a certain percentage of open interest in the entire market.\n\nAt SMBC, funding liquidity risk is managed based on a framework consisting of setting funding gap limits and guidelines, maintaining a system of highly liquid supplementary funding sources, and establishing con- tingency plans. SMBC tries to avoid excessive reliance on short-term funds by managing funding gap limits and guidelines and has established a contingency plan covering emergency action plans such as reducing fund- ing gap limits and guidelines. In addition, to ensure smooth fulfillment of transactions in face of market turmoil, SMBC holds assets such as U.S. treasuries that can be sold immediately and emergency committed lines as supplemental liquidity.\n\nHowever, it should be noted that these figures are statistical figures that change according to changes in the assumptions and the calculation methods, and may not cover the risk of future market conditions fluctuat- ing drastically compared to market fluctuations of the past.\n\nAs of March 31, 2011, total VaR of SMBC and other major consolidated subsidiaries was ¥48.6 billion in the banking book (market operations for generating profit through management of interest rates, terms, and other aspects of assets (loans, bonds, etc.) and liabilities (deposits, etc.)), ¥6.8 billion in the trading book (market operations for generating profit by taking advantage of short-term fluctuations in market values and differences in value among markets) and ¥114.1 billion in the holding of shares (listed shares) for the purpose of strategic investment.\n\nFair values of financial instruments are based on their market prices and, in cases where market prices are not available, reasonably calculated prices. Such prices have been calculated using certain assumptions, and may differ if calculated based on different assumptions.\n\nSMFG 2011 100\n\n## — Quantitative information on market risks\n\n## ii. Market and liquidity risk management methodology\n\n## — Market risk management\n\n## — Liquidity risk management\n\n- (d) Supplementary explanations about matters concerning fair value of financial instruments" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8095302632638588, + "doc_id": "4fbc53411a5f55ceaa59b376bdd872d42c5515483390e4fe620d3fd47a45cb98", + "edit_distance": 0.4028950542822678, + "f1_score": 0.9495548961424332, + "meteor": 0.8184092289104482, + "precision": 0.960960960960961, + "pred_md": "## Creating a Corporate Culture which Derives Strength from Diversity\n\n## ¥ Human Resources Diversity\n\nThe Group is implementing its initiatives to create diversity (e.g. gender, nationality) at work. In April 2008, the Diversity and Inclusion Department was established in the Human Resources Department, and other initiatives were implemented for creating the kind of corporate culture which derives its strength from diversity.\n\n## ¥ Personnel System\n\nIn order to motivate employees to take on more challenges in performing difficult tasks for promotion, SMBC has introduced a new workplace hierarchy system in which job rankings are more finely subdivided. This system will make it possible for talented individuals to be quickly promoted to mid-management levels. In order to enhance a sense of unity as 'Team SMBC' and to achieve a proactive and energetic bank, our employees' performances are evaluated not simply in terms of one fiscal year's achievements but also evaluated on their overall contributions to the company.\n\n## ¥ Developing Employees for Global Operations\n\nIn order to respond to the rapid globalization of society and businesses, SMBC is striving to develop global human resources with practical language skills and an international business sense. In fiscal 2010, in order to enhance the overseas market presence and internal globalization of the company, the bank substantially increased the number of employees taking language classes or having overseas business experience, and those employed locally by overseas offices and subsidiaries, and\n\npromoted the exchange of employees between offices in Japan and overseas.\n\nDiscussion session\n\nDiscussion session\n\n## ¥ Employing Persons with Disabilities\n\nSMBC has established a special company called SMBC Green Service Co., Ltd. which provides employment opportunities for the physically-challenged. In December 2008, the company opened its Kobe Branch, and the Unagidani Office in Osaka in February 2009 for creating jobs not limited to the physicallychallenged but also including the mentally-challenged. As of March 2011, physically-challenged employees accounted for 1.95% of our total number of employees, more than the legally mandated level of 1.8%.\n\n## ¥ Providing Support for Good Work-Life Balance\n\nThe Group has an employee support program which provides assistance and support for maintaining a proper work-life balance. In fiscal 2008, Sumitomo Mitsui Card, SMFL, JRI, and SMBC Friend Securities developed their 'Work-Life Balance Guidebook,' based on actual experiences at SMBC. All Group companies have already implemented the programs for parental leave, leave for taking care of ill children, and shorter working hours. Such programs provide more employee benefits than those mandated by law. In addition, SMBC, Sumitomo Mitsui Card, and JRI provide child-care subsidies, while SMBC, Sumitomo Mitsui Card, Cedyna, SMFL, and Kansai Urban Banking have implemented a program for rehiring former employees. These programs assist and support in realizing a good work-life balance for the Group's employees. There is also an annual visitation day for the employee's children and other family members to give them an opportunity to see the employee at work at SMBC, Sumitomo Mitsui Card, SMFL, JRI, and SMBC Friend Securities. JRI also organizes 'Mama & Papa Lunches' for an opportunity for employees to exchange information on raising children. SMBC has promoted a 'Go Home Early to the Family Day,' while SMFL has a campaign to encourage employees to take their summer vacations and to reduce overtime work. SMBC Nikko Securities has introduced an online support program for employees returning to work after parental leave. Cedyna was awarded the 'Best Balance Award' in 2010, under the 'Promotion of Work Life Balance Certification System' organized by Shinjuku Ward in Tokyo, recognized for its diverse human resources programs and achievements. The Minato Bank regularly provides training programs for employees coming back to work after maternity leave. SMBC, Sumitomo Mitsui Card, Cedyna, JRI and The Minato Bank have all obtained 'Kurumin certification' issued by the Japanese Ministry of Health, Labour and Welfare, for programs in compliance with the Law to Promote Measures to Support the Development of the Next Generation.\n\nChildren's Visitation Day\n\nChildren's Visitation Day\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n63", + "recall": 0.9384164222873901, + "true_md": "## Creating a Corporate Culture which Derives Strength from Diversity •\n\n## Strength from Diversity • Human Resources Diversity The Group is implementing its initiatives to create diversity (e.g.\n\n## • Providing Support for Good Work-Life Balance The Group has an employee support program which provides\n\n## diversity. • Personnel System In order to motivate employees to take on more challenges in\n\n## the company. • Developing Employees for Global Operations In order to respond to the rapid globalization of society and busi-\n\n## • Employing Persons with Disabilities SMBC has established a special company called SMBC Green\n\n• The Group is implementing its initiatives to create diversity (e.g. gender, nationality) at work. In April 2008, the Diversity and Inclusion Department was established in the Human Resources Department, and other initiatives were implemented for creating the kind of corporate culture which derives its strength from diversity. •\n\n• In order to motivate employees to take on more challenges in performing difficult tasks for promotion, SMBC has introduced a new workplace hierarchy system in which job rankings are more finely subdivided. This system will make it possible for talented individuals to be quickly promoted to mid-management levels. In order to enhance a sense of unity as “Team SMBC” and to achieve a proactive and energetic bank, our employees’ per- formances are evaluated not simply in terms of one fiscal year’s achievements but also evaluated on their overall contributions to the company. •\n\n• In order to respond to the rapid globalization of society and busi- nesses, SMBC is striving to develop global human resources with practical language skills and an international business sense. In fiscal 2010, in order to enhance the overseas market presence and internal globalization of the company, the bank substantially increased the number of employees taking lan- guage classes or having overseas business experience, and those employed locally by overseas offices and subsidiaries, and \n\npromoted the exchange of employees between offices in Japan and overseas.\n\n• The Group has an employee support program which provides assistance and support for maintaining a proper work-life bal- ance. In fiscal 2008, Sumitomo Mitsui Card, SMFL, JRI, and SMBC Friend Securities developed their “Work-Life Balance Guidebook,” based on actual experiences at SMBC. All Group companies have already implemented the programs for parental leave, leave for taking care of ill children, and shorter working hours. Such programs provide more employee benefits than those mandated by law. In addition, SMBC, Sumitomo Mitsui Card, and JRI provide child-care subsidies, while SMBC, Sumitomo Mitsui Card, Cedyna, SMFL, and Kansai Urban Banking have implemented a program for rehiring former employees. These programs assist and support in realizing a good work-life balance for the Group’s employees. There is also an annual visitation day for the employee’s children and other family members to give them an opportunity to see the employee at work at SMBC, Sumitomo Mitsui Card, SMFL, JRI, and SMBC Friend Securities. JRI also organizes “Mama & Papa Lunches” for an opportunity for employees to exchange information on raising children. SMBC has promoted a “Go Home Early to the Family Day,” while SMFL has a campaign to encourage employees to take their summer vacations and to reduce overtime work. SMBC Nikko Securities has introduced an online support program for employees returning to work after parental leave. Cedyna was awarded the “Best Balance Award” in 2010, under the “Promotion of Work Life Balance Certification System” organized by Shinjuku Ward in Tokyo, recognized for its diverse human resources programs and achievements. The Minato Bank regularly provides training programs for employees coming back to work after maternity leave. SMBC, Sumitomo Mitsui Card, Cedyna, JRI and The Minato Bank have all obtained “Kurumin certification” issued by the Japanese Ministry of Health, Labour and Welfare, for programs in compliance with the Law to Promote Measures to Support the Development of the Next Generation.\n\nDiscussion session\n\nChildren’s Visitation Day\n\n• SMBC has established a special company called SMBC Green Service Co., Ltd. which provides employment opportunities for the physically-challenged. In December 2008, the company opened its Kobe Branch, and the Unagidani Office in Osaka in February 2009 for creating jobs not limited to the physically- challenged but also including the mentally-challenged. As of March 2011, physically-challenged employees accounted for 1.95% of our total number of employees, more than the legally mandated level of 1.8%.\n\nSMFG 2011 63" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7673657721071822, + "doc_id": "944a8215748bc179517400fd65c94acc40493f80b373050a2df4109f1b02cc1c", + "edit_distance": 0.2849162011173184, + "f1_score": 0.9222222222222223, + "meteor": 0.8498026383198609, + "precision": 0.9222222222222223, + "pred_md": "## notes to the consolidated Financial statements\n\nD\n\nollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except share and per share amounts)\n\n## 10. Other Current Assets\n\nRestricted cash consists of security deposits, funds held in trust and property tax reserves.\n\n## 11. Accounts Payable and Other Liabilities\n\n## 12. Mortgages and Loans Payable\n\nMortgages are collateralized by a first charge on the properties of the Company and vendor mortgages are collateralized by either a second charge on the property and/or a general corporate guarantee.\n\nAs of December 31, 2013, unamortized deferred financing costs of $11.9 million (December 31, 2012 - $9.6 million) and mark-to-market premiums on mortgages assumed on acquisition of $1.7 million (December 31, 2012 - $1.7 million) are netted against mortgages and loans payable.\n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013\n\n83", + "recall": 0.9222222222222223, + "true_md": "## Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except share and per share amounts)\n\nNotes to the Consolidated Financial Statements Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except share and per share amounts)\n\n## 10. Other Current Assets\n\n## 11. Accounts Payable and Other Liabilities\n\n## 12. Mortgages and Loans Payable\n\nMortgages are collateralized by a first charge on the properties of the Company and vendor mortgages are collateralized by either a second charge on the property and/or a general corporate guarantee. \n\nAs of December 31, 2013, unamortized deferred financing costs of $11.9 million (December 31, 2012 ‑ $9.6 million) and mark‑to‑market premiums on mortgages assumed on acquisition of $1.7 million (December 31, 2012 – $1.7 million) are netted against mortgages and loans payable.\n\nRestricted cash consists of security deposits, funds held in trust and property tax reserves.\n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013 83" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8975407570101307, + "doc_id": "053b301c01293d42b0c64a67965dce285f861e8d0a7b64720de121e5a3796f31", + "edit_distance": 0.05555555555555555, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9493944636678201, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows\n\nin thousands of Canadian dollars\n\nFor the Years Ended December 31,\n\nSee accompanying notes to the consolidated financial statements .\n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013\n\n69", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows in thousands of Canadian dollars\n\n## For the Years Ended December 31,\n\nSee accompanying notes to the consolidated financial statements .\n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013 69" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7993144512001613, + "doc_id": "781c0aa2a09e7097e20db8aecb89ee5cbf72fee043b5421122cd7ca036f7c20b", + "edit_distance": 0.5988023952095808, + "f1_score": 0.9703872437357632, + "meteor": 0.8882242884287024, + "precision": 0.9594594594594594, + "pred_md": "## Corporate Information\n\n## Board of Directors\n\n## Timothy R. Banks (3)\n\nPresident & CEO, APM Group of Companies\n\nCharlottetown, Prince Edward Island\n\n## Philip D. Fraser\n\nPresident & CEO, Killam Properties Inc. Halifax, Nova Scotia\n\n## Robert G. Kay (1)\n\nChairmen of the Board, Killam Properties Inc. Chairman, Springwall Group International and Springwall Sleep Products Inc.\n\nMoncton, New Brunswick\n\nJames C. Lawley (1)(2)\n\nGeneral Manager, Scotia Fuels Ltd.\n\nHalifax, Nova Scotia\n\n## Arthur G. Lloyd (2)\n\nExecutive Vice President Investments,\n\nWestern North America, Ivanhoé Cambridge Calgary, Alberta\n\n## Karine L. MacIndoe\n\nCorporate Director,\n\nToronto, Ontario\n\n## Robert G. Richardson, FCA\n\nExecutive Vice President & CFO,\n\nKillam Properties Inc. Halifax, Nova Scotia\n\n## Manfred J. Walt, CA (2)(3)\n\nPresident & CEO,\n\nWalt & Co. Inc.\n\nToronto, Ontario\n\n## G. Wayne Watson, CA (1)(3)\n\nCorporate Director, Halifax, Nova Scotia\n\n- (1) member of the Audit Committee\n- (2) member of the Corporate Governance, Nomination and Succession Committee\n- (3) member of the Compensation Committee\n\n## Executive Team\n\n## Philip Fraser\n\nPresident & Chief Executive Officer\n\n## Robert Richardson, FCA\n\nExecutive Vice President & Chief Financial Officer\n\n## Ruth Buckle\n\nVice President, Property management\n\n## Erin Cleveland, CA\n\nVice President, Finance\n\n## Pamela Crowell\n\nVice President,\n\nProperty management (mHcs)\n\n## Jeremy Jackson\n\nVice President, Marketing\n\n## Michael McLean\n\nVice President, Development\n\n## Dale Noseworthy, CA, CFA\n\nVice President, Investor Relations and corporate Planning\n\n## Investor Inquiries\n\ninvestorrelations@killamproperties.com 902.442.0388\n\n## Auditors\n\n## Ernst & Young, LLP\n\nHalifax, NS\n\n## Solicitors\n\nBennett Jones, LLP\n\ncalgary, aB\n\nStewart McKelvey Halifax, NS\n\n## Registrar and Transfer Agent\n\nComputershare Investor Services Inc. suite 2008, Purdy's Wharf, tower ii Halifax, NS B3J 3R7\n\n## Share Listing\n\nToronto Stock Exchange (TSX) Trading Symbol: KMP\n\n## Monthly Dividend\n\n$0.05 per share\n\n## Head Office\n\nsuite 100 3700 Kempt road Halifax, NS B3K 4X8 902.453.9000 866.453.8900\n\n## Annual General Meeting\n\nThe Annual General Meeting of Shareholders will be held on Wednesday, May 7, 2014, at 2:00 pm Atlantic Time at the Halifax Marriott Harbourfront Hotel, 1919 Upper Water Street, Halifax, Nova Scotia.\n\nour annual report is printed on stock containing recycled material. Please recycle. our report is also available on-line at: killamproperties.com/ financial-reports\n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013\n\n97", + "recall": 0.9815668202764977, + "true_md": "## Corporate Information\n\n## Executive Team\n\n## Board of Directors\n\n## Auditors\n\n## Solicitors\n\n## Registrar and Transfer Agent\n\n## Share Listing\n\n## Monthly Dividend\n\n## Head Office\n\n## Investor Inquiries investorrelations@killamproperties.com\n\n## Annual General Meeting\n\nour annual report is printed on stock containing recycled material. Please recycle. our report is also available on‑line at: killamproperties.com/ financial‑reports\n\nThe Annual General Meeting of Shareholders will be held on Wednesday, May 7, 2014, at 2:00 pm Atlantic Time at the Halifax Marriott Harbourfront Hotel, 1919 Upper Water Street, Halifax, Nova Scotia.\n\n(1) member of the Audit Committee\n\n(2) member of the Corporate Governance, Nomination and Succession Committee\n\n(3) member of the Compensation Committee\n\nTimothy R. Banks (3) President & CEO, APM Group of Companies Charlottetown, Prince Edward Island\n\nPhilip D. Fraser President & CEO, Killam Properties Inc. Halifax, Nova Scotia\n\nRobert G. Kay (1) Chairmen of the Board, Killam Properties Inc. Chairman, Springwall Group International and Springwall Sleep Products Inc. Moncton, New Brunswick\n\nJames C. Lawley (1)(2) General Manager, Scotia Fuels Ltd. Halifax, Nova Scotia\n\nArthur G. Lloyd (2) Executive Vice President Investments, Western North America, Ivanhoé Cambridge Calgary, Alberta\n\nKarine L. MacIndoe Corporate Director, Toronto, Ontario\n\nRobert G. Richardson, FCA Executive Vice President & CFO, Killam Properties Inc. Halifax, Nova Scotia\n\nManfred J. Walt, CA (2)(3) President & CEO, Walt & Co. Inc. Toronto, Ontario\n\nG. Wayne Watson, CA (1)(3) Corporate Director, Halifax, Nova Scotia\n\nPhilip Fraser President & Chief Executive Officer\n\nRobert Richardson, FCA Executive Vice President & Chief Financial Officer\n\nRuth Buckle Vice President, Property management\n\nErin Cleveland, CA Vice President, Finance\n\nPamela Crowell Vice President, Property management (mHcs)\n\nJeremy Jackson Vice President, Marketing\n\nMichael McLean Vice President, Development\n\nDale Noseworthy, CA, CFA Vice President, Investor Relations and corporate Planning\n\nInvestor Inquiries investorrelations@killamproperties.com 902.442.0388\n\nErnst & Young, LLP Halifax, NS \n\nBennett Jones, LLP calgary, aB \n\nStewart McKelvey Halifax, NS \n\nComputershare Investor Services Inc. suite 2008, Purdy’s Wharf, tower ii Halifax, NS B3J 3R7 \n\nToronto Stock Exchange (TSX) Trading Symbol: KMP \n\n$0.05 per share\n\nsuite 100 3700 Kempt road Halifax, NS B3K 4X8 902.453.9000 866.453.8900" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9580175461930228, + "doc_id": "8103799aae08172c7bb6591721a152b8513bf0d071f29713fb07e0f39b883d37", + "edit_distance": 0.8085642317380353, + "f1_score": 0.9780701754385964, + "meteor": 0.8315790782238113, + "precision": 0.9780701754385965, + "pred_md": "TO OUR SHAREHOLDERS, CUSTOMERS, CHANNEL PARTNERS, AND ASSOCIATES:\n\n## I am pleased to report that in 2011 MSA achieved its highest annual net sales in our 97-year history.\n\nMore customers, in more countries around the world, are placing their trust in the MSA brand. In 2011, this resulted in customers choosing to purchase nearly $1.2 billion in MSA products.\n\nThe phrase 'choosing to purchase' is significant, because our 2011 sales actually represent an aggregation of thousands of individual decisions - single instances of safety professionals carefully weighing their options and purposefully selecting MSA to protect them and their co-workers on the job. Each decision showed confidence that the MSA o ff ering was the one that would help keep their people safe, whether they be oil workers on an o ff shore rig, firefighters bravely entering a burning building, construction professionals working atop sca ff olding hundreds of feet above the earth, miners laboring hundreds of feet below it, or any of the other millions of men and women around the globe who depend on MSA to protect them each and every day.\n\n2\n\nMSA 2011 ANNUAL REPORT\n\nThere is no doubt that, in addition to the skill and dedication of our 5,300 associates worldwide, part of what helped drive each of these customers to make their decision was our company's relentless pursuit of our Corporate Strategy. And a key part of this strategy is to focus on our core strengths as we advance our mission to protect workers around the world.\n\nWhile every product we produce provides value to our company and our customers, in 2011 we placed a special focus on investing in and further improving the development, manufacturing, marketing, and distribution of five Core Product families: Supplied-Air Respirators, Industrial Head Protection, Portable Gas Detection Instruments and Sensors, Fixed Gas and Flame Detection Systems, and Fall Protection products. Our cross-functional, cross-geographic teams worked tirelessly to make these products more durable, more e ff ective, and engineered with innovative features that not only delight our customers, but help them reduce total cost of ownership, thereby providing even greater value to those who choose MSA.", + "recall": 0.9780701754385965, + "true_md": "TO OUR SHAREHOLDERS, CUSTOMERS, CHANNEL PARTNERS, AND ASSOCIATES:\n\nMore customers, in more countries around the world, are placing their trust in the MSA brand. In 2011, this resulted in customers choosing to purchase nearly $1.2 billion in MSA products.\n\nThere is no doubt that, in addition to the skill and dedication of our 5,300 associates worldwide, part of what helped drive each of these customers to make their decision was our company’s relentless pursuit of our Corporate Strategy. And a key part of this strategy is to focus on our core strengths as we advance our mission to protect workers around the world.\n\nWhile every product we produce provides value to our company and our customers, in 2011 we placed a special focus on investing in and further improving the development, manufacturing, marketing, and distribution of five Core Product families: Supplied-Air Respirators, Industrial Head Protection, Portable Gas Detection Instruments and Sensors, Fixed Gas and Flame Detection Systems, and Fall Protection products. Our cross-functional, cross-geographic teams worked tirelessly to make these products more durable, more e ff ective, and engineered with innovative features that not only delight our customers, but help them reduce total cost of ownership, thereby providing even greater value to those who choose MSA.\n\nThe phrase “choosing to purchase” is significant, because our 2011 sales actually represent an aggregation of thousands of individual decisions – single instances of safety professionals carefully weighing their options and purposefully selecting MSA to protect them and their co-workers on the job. Each decision showed confidence that the MSA o ff ering was the one that would help keep their people safe, whether they be oil workers on an o ff shore rig, firefighters bravely entering a burning building, construction professionals working atop sca ff olding hundreds of feet above the earth, miners laboring hundreds of feet below it, or any of the other millions of men and women around the globe who depend on MSA to protect them each and every day.\n\n2 MSA 2011 ANNUAL REPORT\n\nI am pleased to report that in 2011 MSA achieved its highest annual net sales in our 97-year history." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8897995368046966, + "doc_id": "f4d9ef406c7971bd69ae32a8159ac0718ec4b8895fbf9e9add35383c4e203142", + "edit_distance": 0.30839002267573695, + "f1_score": 0.9528301886792453, + "meteor": 0.9300201762114084, + "precision": 0.9528301886792453, + "pred_md": "## Enhancing Awareness of Individual Rights\n\nSMBC has implemented in its corporate principles of action concepts which state that 'we will respect the individual human dignity of our clients and employees' and 'we will not allow any discrimination.' Training seminars and study sessions on human rights issues and discrimination are organized for general managers of branches and departments, employees newly-appointed to management positions, and newly hired employees. Campaigns for creating slogans promoting individual human rights are also organized to motivate our employees to reflect and think about individual human rights and to come up with a slogan for the campaign.\n\nKansai Urban Banking is implementing measures to further enhance awareness of individual human rights by organizing human rights awareness study sessions for each regional group and inviting employees to think and come up with an individual human rights slogan. SMFG and its Group companies participate in the 'United Nations Global Compact,' and also endorse and support its 10 principles in the areas of human rights, labor standards, environment and anti-corruption measures.\n\n## ◆ SMBC was Named as One of the Best 25 Companies to Work in Japan in the 'Great Place to Work' Ranking\n\nIn March 2011, SMBC was selected for the forth consecutive year as one of the best companies in Japan to work in the survey conducted by Great Place to Work® Institute Japan.\n\n- * Great Place to Work® Institute, Inc., incorporated in the U.S., is a survey organization which provides data for the annual list of the '100 Best Places to Work' published by Fortune magazine. The survey consists of two main sections: a survey on the internal\n\nsystems and corporate culture of respondent companies, and a questionnaire survey by the employees of these companies. The employee survey carries a two-thirds weight in determining final results.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n64\n\n## Staff Profile\n\n## SMBC ◆\n\n- * he number of full-time employees, including employees seconded to other T companies and organizations. The following list of employees is deducted from the total number of employees: executive officers, employees on short-term contracts, part-time employees, employees of temporary employment agencies, and national staff at overseas branches.\n- ** As of each March 31; job grades above assistant vice president\n- *** As of March 1 of the respective years\n\n**** Includes sogoshoku staff and consumer service staff. Business Career Path employees are excluded.", + "recall": 0.9528301886792453, + "true_md": "SMBC has implemented in its corporate principles of action concepts which state that “we will respect the individual human dignity of our clients and employees” and “we will not allow any discrimination.” Training seminars and study sessions on human rights issues and discrimination are organized for general managers of branches and departments, employees newly-appointed to management positions, and newly hired employees. Campaigns for creating slogans promoting individual human rights are also organized to motivate our employees to reflect and think about individual human rights and to come up with a slogan for the campaign. \n\nKansai Urban Banking is implementing measures to further enhance awareness of individual human rights by organizing human rights awareness study sessions for each regional group and inviting employees to think and come up with an individual human rights slogan. SMFG and its Group companies partici- pate in the “United Nations Global Compact,” and also endorse and support its 10 principles in the areas of human rights, labor standards, environment and anti-corruption measures.\n\n## Enhancing Awareness of Individual Rights\n\n## Staff Profile\n\n## SMBC ◆\n\n## ◆ SMBC was Named as One of the Best 25 Companies to Work in Japan in the “Great Place to Work” Ranking\n\nIn March 2011, SMBC was selected for the forth consecutive year as one of the best companies in Japan to work in the survey conducted by Great Place to Work® Institute Japan. \n\n* Great Place to Work® Institute, Inc., incorporated in the U.S., is a survey organization which provides data for the annual list of the “100 Best Places to Work” published by Fortune magazine. The survey consists of two main sections: a survey on the internal \n\nsystems and corporate culture of respondent companies, and a ques- tionnaire survey by the employees of these companies. The employee survey carries a two-thirds weight in determining final results.\n\n**** Includes sogoshoku staff and consumer service staff. Business Career Path employees are excluded.\n\n** As of each March 31; job grades above assistant vice president\n\n*** As of March 1 of the respective years\n\n* The number of full-time employees, including employees seconded to other companies and organizations. The following list of employees is deducted from the total number of employees: executive officers, employees on short-term contracts, part-time employees, employees of temporary employment agencies, and national staff at overseas branches.\n\nSMFG 2011 64" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8378818966346024, + "doc_id": "628f5140005e653b5540538b0cb481600f94fc6ba56379eedd8bb0b4e3cb9b13", + "edit_distance": 0.13144329896907217, + "f1_score": 0.91875, + "meteor": 0.9183163731520858, + "precision": 0.9130434782608695, + "pred_md": "## 4. Unrealized Gains (Losses) on Securities\n\nNet unrealized gains on securities as of March 31, 2011 amounted to ·336.6 billion, a decrease of ·229.2 billion from the previous fiscal year-end, reflecting a decrease in the value of equities and other factors. Of this total, net\n\nunrealized gains on other securities, including 'other money held in trust,' which are directly debited to net assets, amounted to ·305.6 billion, a decrease of ·215.7 billion from the previous fiscal year-end.\n\n## Unrealized Gains (Losses) on Securities\n\nNotes: 1. The figures above include unrealized gains (losses) on negotiable certificates of deposit in 'Cash and due from banks' and 'Deposits with banks' and beneficiary claims on loan trusts in 'Monetary claims bought,' etc.\n\n- 2. Unrealized gains (losses) on stocks (excluding stocks of subsidiaries and affiliates) (including foreign stocks) are calculated using the average market price during the final month of the respective reporting period. The rest of the securities are valuated at the market price as of the balance sheet date.\n\n3. 'Other securities' and 'Other money held in trust' are valuated and recorded on the balance sheet at market prices. The figures in the table above indicate the differences between the acquisition costs (or amortized costs) and the balance sheet amounts. Net unrealized gains (losses) on other securities, as of March 31, 2011 and 2010, included gains of ·1,153 million and ·105 million, respectively, which were recognized in the statements of income by applying fair value hedge accounting. As a result, the amounts recorded in net assets, as of March 31,\n\n2011 and 2010, were reduced by ·1,153 million and ·105 million, respectively.\n\n4. Floating-rate Japanese government bonds which SMBC held as 'Other securities' are carried on the balance sheet at their reasonably estimated amounts in accordance with the 'Practical Solution on Measurement of Fair Value for Financial Assets' (ASBJ Practical Issues Task Force No. 25).\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n29", + "recall": 0.9245283018867925, + "true_md": "## 4. Unrealized Gains (Losses) on Securities\n\n## Unrealized Gains (Losses) on Securities\n\nNet unrealized gains on securities as of March 31, 2011 amounted to ¥336.6 billion, a decrease of ¥229.2 billion from the previous fiscal year-end, reflecting a decrease in the value of equities and other factors. Of this total, net \n\nunrealized gains on other securities, including “other money held in trust,” which are directly debited to net assets, amounted to ¥305.6 billion, a decrease of ¥215.7 billion from the previous fiscal year-end.\n\nNotes: 1. The figures above include unrealized gains (losses) on negotiable certificates of deposit in “Cash and due from banks” and “Deposits with banks” and beneficiary claims on loan trusts in “Monetary claims bought,” etc.\n\n2. Unrealized gains (losses) on stocks (excluding stocks of subsidiaries and affiliates) (including foreign stocks) are calculated using the average market price during the final month of the respective reporting period. The rest of the securities are valuated at the market price as of the balance sheet date.\n\n3. “Other securities” and “Other money held in trust” are valuated and recorded on the balance sheet at market prices. The figures in the table above indicate the differences between the acquisition costs (or amortized costs) and the balance sheet amounts. Net unrealized gains (losses) on other securities, as of March 31, 2011 and 2010, included gains of ¥1,153 million and ¥105 million, respectively, which were recognized in the statements of income by applying fair value hedge accounting. As a result, the amounts recorded in net assets, as of March 31, 2011 and 2010, were reduced by ¥1,153 million and ¥105 million, respectively.\n\n4. Floating-rate Japanese government bonds which SMBC held as “Other securities” are carried on the balance sheet at their reasonably estimated amounts in accordance with the “Practical Solution on Measurement of Fair Value for Financial Assets” (ASBJ Practical Issues Task Force No. 25).\n\nSMFG 2011 29" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9194644220060401, + "doc_id": "f585d647107f6c587233bbde1cc7e28558164506b2e04a951f928fca3ae47d1b", + "edit_distance": 0.18439716312056736, + "f1_score": 0.9793103448275863, + "meteor": 0.9910712072432236, + "precision": 0.9726027397260274, + "pred_md": "SMFG\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n## 10. Deposits\n\nDeposits at March 31, 2011 and 2010 consisted of the following:\n\n## 11. Trading Liabilities\n\nTrading liabilities at March 31, 2011 and 2010 consisted of the following:\n\n## 12. Borrowed Money\n\nBorrowed money at March 31, 2011 and 2010 consisted of the following:\n\n*1 Average interest rate represents the weighted average interest rate based on the balances and rates at respective year-end of SMBC and other consolidated subsidiaries.\n\n*2 ncludes subordinated borrowings of ¥371,232 million ($4,465 million) and ¥378,729 million at March 31, 2011 and 2010, respectively. I\n\nThe repayment schedule over the next 5 years on borrowed money at March 31, 2011 was as follows:\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n86", + "recall": 0.9861111111111112, + "true_md": "SMFG\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n## 10. Deposits\n\nDeposits at March 31, 2011 and 2010 consisted of the following:\n\nTrading liabilities at March 31, 2011 and 2010 consisted of the following:\n\nBorrowed money at March 31, 2011 and 2010 consisted of the following:\n\n*1 Average interest rate represents the weighted average interest rate based on the balances and rates at respective year-end of SMBC and other consolidated subsidiaries.\n\n*2 Includes subordinated borrowings of ¥371,232 million ($4,465 million) and ¥378,729 million at March 31, 2011 and 2010, respectively.\n\nThe repayment schedule over the next 5 years on borrowed money at March 31, 2011 was as follows:\n\nSMFG 2011 86\n\n## 11. Trading Liabilities\n\n## 12. Borrowed Money" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9551506692137123, + "doc_id": "c1f3862708eb1f3fda308a8d0242bef0ea33d953fb8fe54075e28b32a2b8cdf9", + "edit_distance": 0.7959927140255009, + "f1_score": 0.9887640449438201, + "meteor": 0.8548524494127953, + "precision": 0.9887640449438202, + "pred_md": "## FOURTH QUARTER 2013 RESULTS\n\n## Operating Revenue\n\nWireless network revenue was lower this quarter compared to the same period last year, mainly because of the recent introduction of lower priced roaming plans and pricing changes made over the past year primarily associated with our new simplified plans.\n\nCable operating revenue was higher this quarter compared to the same period last year, mainly because of Internet growth and the acquisition of Mountain Cable, partially offset by a decline in television revenue with competitive TV subscriber losses.\n\nBusiness Solutions operating revenue was higher this quarter compared to the same period last year, mainly because we completed the acquisitions of Blackiron Data and Pivot Data Centres earlier this year, combined with the continuing growth in on-net and next-generation services.\n\nMedia operating revenue was higher this quarter compared to the same period last year, mainly because of revenue growth at Sportsnet and higher sales at The Shopping Channel.\n\n## Adjusted Operating Profit\n\nWireless adjusted operating profit was higher this quarter compared to the same period last year, mainly because of cost management and productivity initiatives implemented across various areas, including cost of equipment, offset by reduced network revenue described above.\n\nCable adjusted operating profit was higher this quarter compared to the same period last year because of the continued shift in our product mix towards higher margin Internet and phone products.\n\nMedia's adjusted operating profit was lower this quarter compared to the same period last year. The increase in Media's operating revenue this year was more than offset by the combined impacts of the lower number of games broadcast in the fourth quarter of 2012 resulting from the NHL lockout compared with having to broadcast more NHL hockey games in the fourth quarter of 2013 because of the compressed 2013-2014 schedule associated with the upcoming winter Olympics. Excluding the impact of these items, Media's consolidated adjusted operating profit would have increased by 22 % .\n\n## Operating Income and Net Income\n\nOperating income was higher than the same quarter last year because stock-based compensation was lower and we realized an $80 million impairment charge in 2012. This was partially offset by higher depreciation and amortization, restructuring, acquisition and other expenses.\n\nNet income this quarter was lower than the same quarter last year because of the changes in revenue, adjusted operating profit and operating income. Also, in 2012 we realized a $233 million gain on spectrum licenses that Inukshuk sold to our non-related venture partner and recorded the related income tax benefits that year.\n\nNet income from continuing operations was $320 million this quarter, with basic and diluted earnings per share from continuing operations of $0.62. In the fourth quarter of 2012, net income from continuing operations was $522 million, basic earnings per share from continuing operations was $1.01 and diluted earnings per share from continuing operations was $1.01. The decrease this quarter was largely because of the $233 million gain on spectrum licenses in 2012 noted above.\n\n## QUARTERLY TRENDS\n\nOur operating results generally vary from quarter to quarter because of changes in general economic conditions and seasonal fluctuations, in each of our business segments, which have a material impact. As such, one quarter's operating results are not necessarily indicative of our results in a subsequent quarter. Wireless, Cable and Media each have unique seasonal aspects to their businesses.\n\nFluctuations in net income from quarter to quarter can also be attributed to losses on the repayment of debt, foreign exchange gains or losses, changes in the fair value of derivative instruments, other income and expenses, impairment of assets and changes in income tax expense.\n\n## Wireless\n\nThe trends in Wireless revenue and adjusted operating profit reflect:\n\n- GLYPH<129> the growing number of wireless voice and data subscribers\n- GLYPH<129> decreased churn\n- GLYPH<129> higher usage of wireless data\n- GLYPH<129> higher handset subsidies as more consumers shift to smartphones\n- GLYPH<129> a slight decrease in blended ARPU due to changes in wireless price plans.\n\nWe continue to target higher value postpaid subscribers, which has contributed to the significantly heavier mix of postpaid versus prepaid subscribers. Growth in our customer base and overall market penetration have resulted in higher costs over time for customer service, retention, credit and collection; however, most of the cost increases have been offset by gains in operating efficiencies.\n\nWireless' operating results are influenced by the timing of our marketing and promotional expenditures and higher levels of subscriber additions and related subsidies, resulting in higher subscriber acquisition and activation-related expenses in certain periods. This increased activity generally occurs in the third and fourth quarters, and can also occur or be accentuated by the launch of popular new wireless handset models.\n\n## Cable\n\nThe trends in Cable services revenue and operating profit increases are primarily due to:\n\n- GLYPH<129> higher penetration and usage of Internet, digital and telephony products and services\n- GLYPH<129> offset by competitive losses of television subscribers and pricing changes over the past year.\n\nCable's operating results are affected by modest seasonal fluctuations in subscriber additions and disconnections, typically caused by:\n\n- GLYPH<129> university and college students moving\n- GLYPH<129> individuals temporarily suspending service for extended vacations or seasonal relocations\n- GLYPH<129> the concentrated marketing we generally conduct in our fourth quarter.\n\n## Business S olutions\n\nThe trends in Business Solutions operating profit margin primarily reflect the ongoing shift from lower-margin, off-net legacy long distance and data services to higher-margin, on-net next generation IP-based services.\n\nBusiness Solutions does not generally have any unique seasonal aspects to its business.\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC.\n\n55\n\nMANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS", + "recall": 0.9887640449438202, + "true_md": "MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AN D ANALYSIS\n\n## QUARTERLY TRENDS\n\n## FOURTH QUARTER 2013 RESULTS\n\n## Operating Revenue\n\n## Wireless\n\nOur operating results generally vary from quarter to quarter because of changes in general economic conditions and seasonal fluctuations, in each of our business segments, which have a material impact. As such, one quarter’s operating results are not necessarily indicative of our results in a subsequent quarter. Wireless, Cable and Media each have unique seasonal aspects to their businesses.\n\nFluctuations in net income from quarter to quarter can also be attributed to losses on the repayment of debt, foreign exchange gains or losses, changes in the fair value of derivative instruments, other income and expenses, impairment of assets and changes in income tax expense.\n\nWireless network revenue was lower this quarter compared to the same period last year, mainly because of the recent introduction of lower priced roaming plans and pricing changes made over the past year primarily associated with our new simplified plans.\n\nCable operating revenue was higher this quarter compared to the same period last year, mainly because of Internet growth and the acquisition of Mountain Cable, partially offset by a decline in television revenue with competitive TV subscriber losses.\n\nBusiness Solutions operating revenue was higher this quarter compared to the same period last year, mainly because we completed the acquisitions of Blackiron Data and Pivot Data Centres earlier this year, combined with the continuing growth in on-net and next-generation services.\n\nMedia operating revenue was higher this quarter compared to the same period last year, mainly because of revenue growth at Sportsnet and higher sales at The Shopping Channel.\n\nThe trends in Wireless revenue and adjusted operating profit reflect:\n\nWireless adjusted operating profit was higher this quarter compared to the same period last year, mainly because of cost management and productivity initiatives implemented across various areas, including cost of equipment, offset by reduced network revenue described above.\n\nCable adjusted operating profit was higher this quarter compared to the same period last year because of the continued shift in our product mix towards higher margin Internet and phone products.\n\nWe continue to target higher value postpaid subscribers, which has contributed to the significantly heavier mix of postpaid versus prepaid subscribers. Growth in our customer base and overall market penetration have resulted in higher costs over time for customer service, retention, credit and collection; however, most of the cost increases have been offset by gains in operating efficiencies.\n\nWireless’ operating results are influenced by the timing of our marketing and promotional expenditures and higher levels of subscriber additions and related subsidies, resulting in higher subscriber acquisition and activation-related expenses in certain periods. This increased activity generally occurs in the third and fourth quarters, and can also occur or be accentuated by the launch of popular new wireless handset models.\n\n- GLYPH<129> the growing number of wireless voice and data subscribers\n\n- GLYPH<129> decreased churn\n\n- GLYPH<129> higher usage of wireless data\n\n- GLYPH<129> higher handset subsidies as more consumers shift to smartphones\n\n- GLYPH<129> a slight decrease in blended ARPU due to changes in wireless price plans.\n\n## Adjusted Operating Profit\n\n## Cable\n\n## Operating Income and Net Income\n\nMedia’s adjusted operating profit was lower this quarter compared to the same period last year. The increase in Media’s operating revenue this year was more than offset by the combined impacts of the lower number of games broadcast in the fourth quarter of 2012 resulting from the NHL lockout compared with having to broadcast more NHL hockey games in the fourth quarter of 2013 because of the compressed 2013-2014 schedule associated with the upcoming winter Olympics. Excluding the impact of these items, Media’s consolidated adjusted operating profit would have increased by 22 % .\n\nThe trends in Cable services revenue and operating profit increases are primarily due to:\n\nOperating income was higher than the same quarter last year because stock-based compensation was lower and we realized an $80 million impairment charge in 2012. This was partially offset by higher depreciation and amortization, restructuring, acquisition and other expenses.\n\nCable’s operating results are affected by modest seasonal fluctuations in subscriber additions and disconnections, typically caused by:\n\nNet income this quarter was lower than the same quarter last year because of the changes in revenue, adjusted operating profit and operating income. Also, in 2012 we realized a $233 million gain on spectrum licenses that Inukshuk sold to our non-related venture partner and recorded the related income tax benefits that year.\n\nThe trends in Business Solutions operating profit margin primarily reflect the ongoing shift from lower-margin, off-net legacy long distance and data services to higher-margin, on-net next generation IP-based services.\n\n- GLYPH<129> higher penetration and usage of Internet, digital and telephony products and services\n\n- GLYPH<129> offset by competitive losses of television subscribers and pricing changes over the past year.\n\n- GLYPH<129> university and college students moving\n\n- GLYPH<129> individuals temporarily suspending service for extended vacations or seasonal relocations\n\n- GLYPH<129> the concentrated marketing we generally conduct in our fourth quarter.\n\n## Business S olutions\n\nBusiness Solutions does not generally have any unique seasonal aspects to its business.\n\nNet income from continuing operations was $320 million this quarter, with basic and diluted earnings per share from continuing operations of $0.62. In the fourth quarter of 2012, net income from continuing operations was $522 million, basic earnings per share from continuing operations was $1.01 and diluted earnings per share from continuing operations was $1.01. The decrease this quarter was largely because of the $233 million gain on spectrum licenses in 2012 noted above.\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 55" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9379267888550061, + "doc_id": "31c9cf90f6128420b8ddea6c9f64a7be2670c4755c24fed3959d71f9e70dfdb2", + "edit_distance": 0.8512241054613936, + "f1_score": 0.9747899159663864, + "meteor": 0.8085759343069701, + "precision": 0.9789029535864979, + "pred_md": "MANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS\n\n## KEY CHANGES IN FINANCIAL RESULTS THIS YEAR COMPARED TO 2012\n\n1 Adjusted operating profit is a Non-GAAP measure and should not be considered as a substitute or alternative for GAAP measure. It is not a defined term under IFRS, and does not have a standard meaning, so may not be a reliable way to compare us to other companies. See 'Non-GAAP Measures' for information about these measures, including how we calculate them.\n\n2 As defined. See 'Additional GAAP Measures'.\n\n36\n\nROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n## Operating Revenue\n\nWireless network revenue was higher than last year because of higher adoption and usage of wireless data services, partially offset by the introduction of lower priced roaming plans and pricing changes made over this year.\n\nCable operating revenue was higher than last year mainly because of growth in Internet and phone revenues and the acquisition of Mountain Cable, partially offset by a decline in television revenue related principally from competitive TV subscriber losses.\n\nBusiness Solutions operating revenue was higher than last year mainly because we completed the acquisitions of Blackiron Data and Pivot Data Centres earlier this year combined with the continued growth in on-net and next generation services, partially offset by planned decline in legacy voice and data services.\n\nMedia operating revenue was higher than last year mainly because of revenue growth at Sportsnet, higher attendance at Toronto Blue Jays games and higher sales at The Shopping Channel.\n\n## Adjusted Operating Profit\n\nWireless adjusted operating profit was higher this year because of higher network revenue, our continued cost management and productivity initiatives implemented across various areas and lower cost of equipment.\n\nCable adjusted operating profit was higher than last year because of the continued growth in revenue combined with a shift in our product mix towards higher margin Internet and phone products.\n\nMedia's adjusted operating profit was lower compared to last year. The increase in operating revenue this year was more than offset by the combined impact of higher player salaries at the Toronto Blue Jays, the NHL player lockout in 2012 and the costs associated with broadcasting more NHL hockey games in 2013 because of the condensed 2012-2013 season which started in January 2013 and the compressed 2013-2014 season schedule associated with the upcoming winter Olympics.\n\nAdjusted operating profit relating to Corporate items and intercompany eliminations was lower compared to last year because of continued investment in growth initiatives such as Rogers' credit card, Outrank, Rogers Alerts and other digital opportunities.\n\n## Operating Income and Net Income\n\nOperating income was higher than last year while net income was lower. The increase in operating income is mainly because of the increase in adjusted operating profit. Net income was lower mainly because in 2012 we realized a $233 million gain on spectrum licenses that Inukshuk sold to our non-related venture partner as well as the related income tax benefits we recorded that year.", + "recall": 0.9707112970711297, + "true_md": "MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS\n\n## KEY CHANGES IN FINANCIAL RESULTS THIS YEAR COMPARED TO 2012\n\n## Operating Revenue\n\n## Adjusted Operating Profit\n\n## Operating Income and Net Income\n\n36 ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\nOperating income was higher than last year while net income was lower. The increase in operating income is mainly because of the increase in adjusted operating profit. Net income was lower mainly because in 2012 we realized a $233 million gain on spectrum licenses that Inukshuk sold to our non-related venture partner as well as the related income tax benefits we recorded that year.\n\nAdjusted operating profit relating to Corporate items and intercompany eliminations was lower compared to last year because of continued investment in growth initiatives such as Rogers’ credit card, Outrank, Rogers Alerts and other digital opportunities.\n\nMedia’s adjusted operating profit was lower compared to last year. The increase in operating revenue this year was more than offset by the combined impact of higher player salaries at the Toronto Blue Jays, the NHL player lockout in 2012 and the costs associated with broadcasting more NHL hockey games in 2013 because of the condensed 2012-2013 season which started in January 2013 and the compressed 2013-2014 season schedule associated with the upcoming winter Olympics.\n\nCable adjusted operating profit was higher than last year because of the continued growth in revenue combined with a shift in our product mix towards higher margin Internet and phone products.\n\nWireless adjusted operating profit was higher this year because of higher network revenue, our continued cost management and productivity initiatives implemented across various areas and lower cost of equipment.\n\nMedia operating revenue was higher than last year mainly because of revenue growth at Sportsnet, higher attendance at Toronto Blue Jays games and higher sales at The Shopping Channel.\n\nBusiness Solutions operating revenue was higher than last year mainly because we completed the acquisitions of Blackiron Data and Pivot Data Centres earlier this year combined with the continued growth in on-net and next generation services, partially offset by planned decline in legacy voice and data services.\n\nCable operating revenue was higher than last year mainly because of growth in Internet and phone revenues and the acquisition of Mountain Cable, partially offset by a decline in television revenue related principally from competitive TV subscriber losses.\n\nWireless network revenue was higher than last year because of higher adoption and usage of wireless data services, partially offset by the introduction of lower priced roaming plans and pricing changes made over this year.\n\n- 1 Adjusted operating profit is a Non-GAAP measure and should not be considered as a substitute or alternative for GAAP measure. It is not a defined term under IFRS, and does not have a standard meaning, so may not be a reliable way to compare us to other companies. See “Non-GAAP Measures” for information about these measures, including how we calculate them.\n\n- 2 As defined. See “Additional GAAP Measures”." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.910777199656997, + "doc_id": "bb6fa71795fc03f8582ecce774259e1c30ab983437c2c939baeb1229d1433994", + "edit_distance": 0.8920765027322405, + "f1_score": 0.9747048903878582, + "meteor": 0.7884215179326926, + "precision": 0.9763513513513513, + "pred_md": "## REVIEW OF CONSOLIDATED PERFORMANCE\n\nThis section discusses our consolidated operating income, net income and other expenses that do not form part of the segment discussions above.\n\n1 Adjusted operating profit is a non-GAAP measure and should not be considered as a substitute or alternative for GAAP measures. It is not a defined term under IFRS and does not have a standard meaning, so may not be a reliable way to compare us to other companies. See 'Non-GAAP Measures' for information about these measures, including how we calculate them.\n\n2 As defined. See 'Additional GAAP Measures'.\n\nn/m: not meaningful.\n\n## Adjusted Operating Profit\n\nPlease see '2013 Financial Results' for a discussion of the increase in adjusted operating profit this year.\n\n## S tock-Based Compensation Expense\n\nOur stock-based compensation expense for stock options (including stock appreciation rights), restricted share units and deferred share units is generally determined by:\n\n- GLYPH<129> vesting of stock options and share units\n- GLYPH<129> changes in the market price of RCI Class B shares\n- GLYPH<129> offset by the impact of the stock-based compensation derivative instruments that offset a portion of the price appreciation risk for our stock-based compensation program starting March 2013. See 'Financial Risk Management' for information about Equity Derivatives.\n\nStock-based compensation expense increased to $84 million from $77 million in 2012. Stock-based compensation of $84 million was mainly the result of the vesting of share-based options and units and the increase in the RCI Class B share price during the first two months of this year prior to entering into the Equity Derivatives.\n\nWe had a liability of $164 million at December 31, 2013 (2012 - $195 million) related to stock-based compensation recorded at its fair value, including stock options, restricted share units and deferred share units.\n\nWe paid $101 million in 2013 (2012 - $76 million) to holders of stock options, restricted share units and deferred share units upon exercise. All stock options holders exercised their stock options through optional share appreciation rights (SARs). We use derivative instruments from time to time to manage our exposure to market-based fluctuations in our stock-based compensation expense.\n\n## Restructuring, Acquisition and Other Expenses\n\nRestructuring, acquisition and other expenses associated with initiatives aimed at improving our cost structure mainly included:\n\n- GLYPH<129> $53 million in severance costs associated with the targeted restructuring of our employee base (2012 - $89 million)\n- GLYPH<129> $32 million in acquisition transaction costs (2012 - $3 million).\n\n## Depreciation and Amortization Expense\n\nDepreciation and amortization expense were both higher this year mainly because of:\n\n- GLYPH<129> our significant investment and roll out of new customer premise equipment, mostly NextBox 2.0 and 3.0 set-top boxes at Cable; these are now amortized over three years, compared to five years prior to 2012, which also contributed to the increase\n- GLYPH<129> the timing of readiness of certain network and system initiatives, including the launch of our LTE network in various municipalities\n- GLYPH<129> new property, plant and equipment and intangible assets resulting from our recent acquisitions in Cable, Business Solutions and Media.\n\n## Impairment of Assets\n\nThere was no impairment of assets this year. In 2012, we recorded an $80 million impairment charge in the Media segment that included:\n\n- GLYPH<129> $67 million in goodwill\n- GLYPH<129> $8 million in broadcast licences\n- GLYPH<129> $5 million in program rights.\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC.\n\n51\n\nMANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS", + "recall": 0.9730639730639731, + "true_md": "MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AN D ANALYSIS\n\n## REVIEW OF CONSOLIDATED PERFORMANCE\n\n## Restructuring, Acquisition and Other Expenses\n\n## Depreciation and Amortization Expense\n\n## Adjusted Operating Profit\n\n## Impairment of Assets\n\n- GLYPH<129> $67 million in goodwill\n\n- GLYPH<129> $8 million in broadcast licences\n\n- GLYPH<129> $5 million in program rights.\n\nThere was no impairment of assets this year. In 2012, we recorded an $80 million impairment charge in the Media segment that included:\n\n- GLYPH<129> our significant investment and roll out of new customer premise equipment, mostly NextBox 2.0 and 3.0 set-top boxes at Cable; these are now amortized over three years, compared to five years prior to 2012, which also contributed to the increase\n\n- GLYPH<129> the timing of readiness of certain network and system initiatives, including the launch of our LTE network in various municipalities\n\n- GLYPH<129> new property, plant and equipment and intangible assets resulting from our recent acquisitions in Cable, Business Solutions and Media.\n\nDepreciation and amortization expense were both higher this year mainly because of:\n\n- GLYPH<129> vesting of stock options and share units\n\n- GLYPH<129> changes in the market price of RCI Class B shares\n\n- GLYPH<129> offset by the impact of the stock-based compensation derivative instruments that offset a portion of the price appreciation risk for our stock-based compensation program starting March 2013. See “Financial Risk Management” for information about Equity Derivatives.\n\n- 1 Adjusted operating profit is a non-GAAP measure and should not be considered as a substitute or alternative for GAAP measures. It is not a defined term under IFRS and does not have a standard meaning, so may not be a reliable way to compare us to other companies. See “Non-GAAP Measures” for information about these measures, including how we calculate them.\n\n- 2 As defined. See “Additional GAAP Measures”.\n\n- GLYPH<129> $32 million in acquisition transaction costs (2012 – $3 million).\n\n- GLYPH<129> $53 million in severance costs associated with the targeted restructuring of our employee base (2012 – $89 million)\n\nStock-based compensation expense increased to $84 million from $77 million in 2012. Stock-based compensation of $84 million was mainly the result of the vesting of share-based options and units and the increase in the RCI Class B share price during the first two months of this year prior to entering into the Equity Derivatives.\n\nThis section discusses our consolidated operating income, net income and other expenses that do not form part of the segment discussions above.\n\nWe had a liability of $164 million at December 31, 2013 (2012 – $195 million) related to stock-based compensation recorded at its fair value, including stock options, restricted share units and deferred share units.\n\nWe paid $101 million in 2013 (2012 – $76 million) to holders of stock options, restricted share units and deferred share units upon exercise. All stock options holders exercised their stock options through optional share appreciation rights (SARs). We use derivative instruments from time to time to manage our exposure to market-based fluctuations in our stock-based compensation expense.\n\nRestructuring, acquisition and other expenses associated with initiatives aimed at improving our cost structure mainly included:\n\nPlease see “2013 Financial Results” for a discussion of the increase in adjusted operating profit this year.\n\nOur stock-based compensation expense for stock options (including stock appreciation rights), restricted share units and deferred share units is generally determined by:\n\n## S tock-Based Compensation Expense\n\nn/m: not meaningful.\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 51" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9505192602654254, + "doc_id": "4f50c8508cfe8366478cc6007435e8a46038f9b111f4a8a66570c101f1e0700f", + "edit_distance": 0.5609467455621302, + "f1_score": 0.989159891598916, + "meteor": 0.8963759530716996, + "precision": 0.9918478260869565, + "pred_md": "## INDUSTRY TRENDS\n\nThe telecommunications industry in Canada, and our business segments, is affected by several overarching trends.\n\n## CHANGING TECHNOLOGIES AND CONSUMER DEMANDS\n\nConsumer demand for mobile devices, digital media and on-demand content across platforms is pushing providers to build networks that can provide more data faster, cheaper and more easily. Increased adoption of smartphones and double digit growth in our data revenue continued this year, reflecting expanded use of applications, mobile video, messaging and other wireless data.\n\n## COMPETITION\n\nCompetition in wireless from national and regional operators as well as smaller new entrants changes how we compete for wireless services. This puts downward pressure on pricing affecting profit margins and impacts customer churn.\n\nTraditional wireline telephone and television services are now offered over the Internet, opening the door to more non-traditional competitors, and changing how traditional providers compete. This is changing the mix of packages and pricing that service providers offer, affecting profit margins and customer churn.\n\n## WIRELE SS TREND S\n\nMore sophisticated wireless networks, devices and applications are making it easier and faster to receive data, driving growth in wireless data services.\n\nWireless providers are investing in the next generation of broadband wireless data networks, such as LTE, to support the growing data demand.\n\nWireless market penetration in Canada is approximately 80 % of the population, and is expected to grow at an estimated 2 % annually.\n\nThe new CRTC code of conduct has limited wireless term contracts to two years from three years. Although the code of conduct has only been in place for a month, we believe this is currently reducing churn and slowing growth in the wireless marketplace.\n\n## CABLE TREND S\n\nYounger generations are increasingly using the Internet and social media as a substitute for traditional wireline telephone services, and televised content is increasingly available online, both on wireline and on wireless devices.\n\nWe face new competition from companies like Skype and Vonage, who market Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) telephony services, and Netflix and Apple TV, who provide televised content over the Internet.\n\nNorth American cable companies are improving their cable networks and expanding their service offerings to include Internet, digital cable and VoIP telephony services, while competition from telco IPTV deployments and non-facilities based service providers continues to cause pricing pressures which negatively impacts revenue growth.\n\nIn the media industry, there continues to be a shift towards on-line media consumption by consumers which in turn drives advertisers to spend more on-line versus traditional media. In addition, there are more media competitors as additional on-line media companies enter the market, including large global companies.\n\n## REGULATION\n\nMost areas of our business are highly regulated, which affects who we compete with, the programming we can offer, where and how we use our networks, how we build our businesses and the spectrum we purchase. The telecommunications industry is being affected by more regulation and more reviews of the current regulations.\n\n## ECONOMIC CONDITIONS\n\nOur businesses are affected by general economic conditions and consumer confidence and spending, especially in our Media segment, where advertising revenue is directly affected by the economy.\n\n## BU INE S SS S OLUTION S TREND S\n\nCompanies are using fibre-based access and cloud computing to capture and share information in more volume and detail. This, combined with the rise of multimedia and Internet-based applications, is driving exponential growth in data demand.\n\nLarge enterprises and all levels of government are dramatically transforming data centre infrastructure and moving toward virtual data storage and hosting. This is driving demand for more advanced network functionality, robust, scalable services and supportive dynamic network infrastructure.\n\nIn response, carriers are dismantling legacy networks and investing in next generation platforms that converge voice, data and video solutions onto a single distribution and access platform.\n\n## MEDIA TREND S\n\nConsumer demand for digital media, mobile devices and ondemand content is pushing advertisers to shift some of their spending to digital platforms.\n\nTraditional media assets in Canada have become increasingly controlled by a small number of competitors with significant scale and financial resources, while technology has allowed new entrants and even individuals to become media players in their own right. Across both traditional and emerging platforms, many players have become more vertically integrated, as both providers and purchasers of content.\n\nAccess to premium content has become even more important for acquiring audiences that attract advertisers and subscribers. Ownership of content or longterm agreements with content owners, have also become increasingly important to Media companies.\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC.\n\n31\n\nMANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS", + "recall": 0.9864864864864865, + "true_md": "## CHANGING TECHNOLOGIES AND CONSUMER DEMANDS\n\n## COMPETITION\n\n## REGULATION\n\n## ECONOMIC CONDITIONS\n\n## WIRELE SS TREND S\n\n## CABLE TREND S\n\nMANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AN D ANALYSIS\n\nConsumer demand for mobile devices, digital media and on-demand content across platforms is pushing providers to build networks that can provide more data faster, cheaper and more easily. Increased adoption of smartphones and double digit growth in our data revenue continued this year, reflecting expanded use of applications, mobile video, messaging and other wireless data.\n\nIn the media industry, there continues to be a shift towards on-line media consumption by consumers which in turn drives advertisers to spend more on-line versus traditional media. In addition, there are more media competitors as additional on-line media companies enter the market, including large global companies.\n\nMost areas of our business are highly regulated, which affects who we compete with, the programming we can offer, where and how we use our networks, how we build our businesses and the spectrum we purchase. The telecommunications industry is being affected by more regulation and more reviews of the current regulations.\n\nCompetition in wireless from national and regional operators as well as smaller new entrants changes how we compete for wireless services. This puts downward pressure on pricing affecting profit margins and impacts customer churn.\n\nTraditional wireline telephone and television services are now offered over the Internet, opening the door to more non-traditional competitors, and changing how traditional providers compete. This is changing the mix of packages and pricing that service providers offer, affecting profit margins and customer churn.\n\nOur businesses are affected by general economic conditions and consumer confidence and spending, especially in our Media segment, where advertising revenue is directly affected by the economy.\n\n## MEDIA TREND S\n\n## BU S INE SS S OLUTION S TREND S\n\nMore sophisticated wireless networks, devices and applications are making it easier and faster to receive data, driving growth in wireless data services.\n\nYounger generations are increasingly using the Internet and social media as a substitute for traditional wireline telephone services, and televised content is increasingly available online, both on wireline and on wireless devices.\n\nWireless providers are investing in the next generation of broadband wireless data networks, such as LTE, to support the growing data demand.\n\nWireless market penetration in Canada is approximately 80 % of the population, and is expected to grow at an estimated 2 % annually.\n\nThe new CRTC code of conduct has limited wireless term contracts to two years from three years. Although the code of conduct has only been in place for a month, we believe this is currently reducing churn and slowing growth in the wireless marketplace.\n\nNorth American cable companies are improving their cable networks and expanding their service offerings to include Internet, digital cable and VoIP telephony services, while competition from telco IPTV deployments and non-facilities based service providers continues to cause pricing pressures which negatively impacts revenue growth.\n\nWe face new competition from companies like Skype and Vonage, who market Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) telephony services, and Netflix and Apple TV, who provide televised content over the Internet.\n\nCompanies are using fibre-based access and cloud computing to capture and share information in more volume and detail. This, combined with the rise of multimedia and Internet-based applications, is driving exponential growth in data demand.\n\nLarge enterprises and all levels of government are dramatically transforming data centre infrastructure and moving toward virtual data storage and hosting. This is driving demand for more advanced network functionality, robust, scalable services and supportive dynamic network infrastructure.\n\nIn response, carriers are dismantling legacy networks and investing in next generation platforms that converge voice, data and video solutions onto a single distribution and access platform.\n\nConsumer demand for digital media, mobile devices and on- demand content is pushing advertisers to shift some of their spending to digital platforms.\n\nTraditional media assets in Canada have become increasingly controlled by a small number of competitors with significant scale and financial resources, while technology has allowed new entrants and even individuals to become media players in their own right. Across both traditional and emerging platforms, many players have become more vertically integrated, as both providers and purchasers of content.\n\nAccess to premium content has become even more important for acquiring audiences that attract advertisers and subscribers. Ownership of content or long- term agreements with content owners, have also become increasingly important to Media companies.\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 31\n\n## The telecommunications industry in Canada, and our business segments, is affected by several overarching trends.\n\nINDUSTRY TRENDS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8245658306975039, + "doc_id": "6d18a62d742faa69862e92eea4f9ae89867cf8c30368e1b03ea9fbfca8bf3ee1", + "edit_distance": 0.21367521367521367, + "f1_score": 0.9552238805970149, + "meteor": 0.8785028615557764, + "precision": 0.9846153846153847, + "pred_md": "A 10% increase / (decrease) of the share price for the equity securities at 30 June 2013 would have increased / (decreased) equity by the amounts shown as follows:\n\n## Interest rate risk\n\nThe Group's exposure to interest rate risk for classes of financial assets and financial liabilities, at 30 June 2013 and 30 June 2012 are set out as follows:\n\nThe weighted average rate on floating rate borrowings was 5.87% for the year ended 30 June 2013 (2012: 6.36%).\n\ncontinued\n\nNotes to the Financial Statements\n\nu", + "recall": 0.927536231884058, + "true_md": "Notes to the Financial Statements 101\n\nNotes to the Financial Statements 101\n\nA 10% increase / (decrease) of the share price for the equity securities at 30 June 2013 would have increased / (decreased) equity by the amounts shown as follows: \n\nNotes t o the Financial Statements\n\n## Interest rate risk\n\nThe Group’s exposure to interest rate risk for classes of financial assets and financial liabilities, at 30 June 2013 and 30 June 2012 are set out as follows:\n\nThe weighted average rate on floating rate borrowings was 5.87% for the year ended 30 June 2013 (2012: 6.36%).\n\ncontinued u" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9605561735260199, + "doc_id": "e2a6eb54158cc29a1b58170db6c203c1fcc0b5335d5e7ac29c3112cdeeb164be", + "edit_distance": 0.5166051660516605, + "f1_score": 0.9960159362549801, + "meteor": 0.9607771691545476, + "precision": 0.9973404255319149, + "pred_md": "NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## Deferred Transaction Costs\n\nWe defer transaction costs associated with issuing long-term debt and direct costs we pay to lenders to obtain revolving credit facilities, and amortize them using the effective interest method over the life of the related instrument.\n\n## Provisions\n\nWe record a provision when a past event creates a legal or constructive obligation that can be reasonably estimated and is likely to result in an outflow of economic resources. We recognize a provision even when the timing or amount of the obligation may be uncertain.\n\nWe make significant estimates when measuring a provision for a present obligation, basing the provision on the amount we estimate will be required to settle it, using the most reliable evidence available at the reporting date and including the risks and uncertainties associated with the obligations. We then discount our expected future cash flows to the date of the consolidated statements of financial position at a pre-tax rate that reflects current market assessments of the time value of money and the risks specific to the liability.\n\n## Decommissioning and Restoration Costs\n\nWe use network and other assets on leased premises in some of our business activities. We expect to exit these premises in the future, so we make provisions for the costs associated with decommissioning the assets and restoring the locations to their original standards when we have a legal or constructive obligation to do so. We calculate these costs based on a current estimate of the costs that will be incurred, project those costs into the future based on management's best estimates of future trends in prices, inflation and other factors, and discount them to their present value. We revise our forecasts when business conditions or technological requirements change.\n\nWhen we record a decommissioning liability, we record a corresponding asset in property, plant and equipment and depreciate the asset based on its useful life following our depreciation policies for property, plant and equipment. We record the accretion of the liability as a charge to finance costs in the consolidated statements of income.\n\n## Restructuring\n\nWe make provisions for restructuring when we have approved a detailed and formal restructuring plan, and either the restructuring has started or management has announced the plan's main features to the employees affected by it.\n\n## Onerous Contracts\n\nWe make provisions for onerous contracts when the unavoidable costs of meeting our obligation under the contract exceed the benefits we expect to realize from it. We measure these provisions at the present value of the expected cost of terminating the contract or the expected cost of continuing with the contract (whichever is lower). We recognize any impairment loss on the assets associated with the contract before we make the provision.\n\nSee note 17 for a breakdown of our provisions.\n\n## Employee Benefits\n\n## Pension Benefits\n\nWe offer contributory and non-contributory defined benefit pension plans that provide employees with a lifetime monthly pension on retirement.\n\n98\n\nROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\nWe separately calculate our net obligation for each defined benefit plan by estimating the amount of future benefits that employees have earned in return for their service in the current and prior years, and discounting those benefits to determine their present value.\n\nWe accrue our pension plan obligations as employees provide the services necessary to earn the pension. We use a discount rate based on market yields on high quality corporate bonds at the measurement date to calculate the accrued pension benefit obligation. Remeasurements of the accrued pension benefit obligation are determined at the end of the year, and include actuarial gains and losses, return on plan assets and any change in the effect of the asset ceiling. These are recognized in other comprehensive income and retained earnings.\n\nThe cost of pensions is actuarially determined and takes into account the following assumptions and methods for pension accounting related to our defined benefit plans:\n\n- GLYPH<129> the expected rates of salary increases for calculating increases in future benefits\n- GLYPH<129> mortality rates for calculating the life expectancy of plan members, and\n- GLYPH<129> past service costs from plan amendments are immediately expensed in net income.\n\nWe recognize contributions to defined contribution plans as an employee benefit expense in operating costs in the consolidated statements of income in the periods the employees provide the related services.\n\nSee note 22 for more information about our pension plans.\n\n## Termination Benefits\n\nWe recognize termination benefits as an expense when we are committed to a formal detailed plan to terminate employment before the normal retirement date and it is not realistic that we will withdraw it.\n\n## Property, Plant and Equipment\n\nRecognition and Measurement\n\nWe recognize property, plant and equipment at cost, less accumulated depreciation and accumulated impairment losses.\n\nCost includes expenditures that are directly attributable to the acquisition of the asset. The cost of self-constructed assets also includes:\n\n- GLYPH<129> the cost of materials and direct labour\n- GLYPH<129> costs directly associated with bringing the assets to a working condition for their intended use\n- GLYPH<129> costs of dismantling and removing the items and restoring the site where they are located (see Provisions , above), and\n- GLYPH<129> borrowing costs on qualifying assets.\n\nWe use estimates to determine certain costs that are directly attributable to self-constructed assets. These estimates primarily include certain internal and external direct labour associated with the acquisition, construction, development or betterment of our network. They also include interest costs, which we capitalize to certain property, plant and equipment during construction and development.\n\nWe use significant estimates to determine the estimated useful lives of property, plant and equipment, considering industry trends such as technological advancements, our past experience, our expected use and our review of asset lives.", + "recall": 0.9946949602122016, + "true_md": "NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## Deferred Transaction Costs\n\n## Provisions\n\n## Decommissioning and Restoration Costs\n\n## Restructuring\n\n## Onerous Contracts\n\n## Employee Benefits\n\n## Pension Benefits\n\nWe defer transaction costs associated with issuing long-term debt and direct costs we pay to lenders to obtain revolving credit facilities, and amortize them using the effective interest method over the life of the related instrument.\n\nWe record a provision when a past event creates a legal or constructive obligation that can be reasonably estimated and is likely to result in an outflow of economic resources. We recognize a provision even when the timing or amount of the obligation may be uncertain.\n\nWe make significant estimates when measuring a provision for a present obligation, basing the provision on the amount we estimate will be required to settle it, using the most reliable evidence available at the reporting date and including the risks and uncertainties associated with the obligations. We then discount our expected future cash flows to the date of the consolidated statements of financial position at a pre-tax rate that reflects current market assessments of the time value of money and the risks specific to the liability.\n\nWe use network and other assets on leased premises in some of our business activities. We expect to exit these premises in the future, so we make provisions for the costs associated with decommissioning the assets and restoring the locations to their original standards when we have a legal or constructive obligation to do so. We calculate these costs based on a current estimate of the costs that will be incurred, project those costs into the future based on management’s best estimates of future trends in prices, inflation and other factors, and discount them to their present value. We revise our forecasts when business conditions or technological requirements change.\n\nWhen we record a decommissioning liability, we record a corresponding asset in property, plant and equipment and depreciate the asset based on its useful life following our depreciation policies for property, plant and equipment. We record the accretion of the liability as a charge to finance costs in the consolidated statements of income.\n\nWe make provisions for restructuring when we have approved a detailed and formal restructuring plan, and either the restructuring has started or management has announced the plan’s main features to the employees affected by it.\n\nWe make provisions for onerous contracts when the unavoidable costs of meeting our obligation under the contract exceed the benefits we expect to realize from it. We measure these provisions at the present value of the expected cost of terminating the contract or the expected cost of continuing with the contract (whichever is lower). We recognize any impairment loss on the assets associated with the contract before we make the provision.\n\nSee note 17 for a breakdown of our provisions.\n\nWe offer contributory and non-contributory defined benefit pension plans that provide employees with a lifetime monthly pension on retirement.\n\nWe use significant estimates to determine the estimated useful lives of property, plant and equipment, considering industry trends such as technological advancements, our past experience, our expected use and our review of asset lives.\n\nWe use estimates to determine certain costs that are directly attributable to self-constructed assets. These estimates primarily include certain internal and external direct labour associated with the acquisition, construction, development or betterment of our network. They also include interest costs, which we capitalize to certain property, plant and equipment during construction and development.\n\nCost includes expenditures that are directly attributable to the acquisition of the asset. The cost of self-constructed assets also includes:\n\nWe recognize property, plant and equipment at cost, less accumulated depreciation and accumulated impairment losses.\n\nWe recognize termination benefits as an expense when we are committed to a formal detailed plan to terminate employment before the normal retirement date and it is not realistic that we will withdraw it.\n\nSee note 22 for more information about our pension plans.\n\nWe recognize contributions to defined contribution plans as an employee benefit expense in operating costs in the consolidated statements of income in the periods the employees provide the related services.\n\nThe cost of pensions is actuarially determined and takes into account the following assumptions and methods for pension accounting related to our defined benefit plans:\n\nWe accrue our pension plan obligations as employees provide the services necessary to earn the pension. We use a discount rate based on market yields on high quality corporate bonds at the measurement date to calculate the accrued pension benefit obligation. Remeasurements of the accrued pension benefit obligation are determined at the end of the year, and include actuarial gains and losses, return on plan assets and any change in the effect of the asset ceiling. These are recognized in other comprehensive income and retained earnings.\n\nWe separately calculate our net obligation for each defined benefit plan by estimating the amount of future benefits that employees have earned in return for their service in the current and prior years, and discounting those benefits to determine their present value.\n\n## Termination Benefits\n\n## Property, Plant and Equipment\n\n## Recognition and Measurement\n\n98 ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n- GLYPH<129> the expected rates of salary increases for calculating increases in future benefits\n\n- GLYPH<129> mortality rates for calculating the life expectancy of plan members, and\n\n- GLYPH<129> past service costs from plan amendments are immediately expensed in net income.\n\n- GLYPH<129> the cost of materials and direct labour\n\n- GLYPH<129> costs directly associated with bringing the assets to a working condition for their intended use\n\n- GLYPH<129> costs of dismantling and removing the items and restoring the site where they are located (see Provisions , above), and\n\n- GLYPH<129> borrowing costs on qualifying assets." + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "543382b50ee9fa4090acdee7462bcdef6e1d9e59af22fb47e58353c7482825c1", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999941303531179, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## L. Shareholdings\n\n## Number of Shares held by Key Management Personnel\n\n(1) Includes market purchases and sales of shares to cover tax withholding liability related to shares issued on option exercises and vesting of RSUs.\n\n- 43 -", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## L. Shareholdings\n\n## Number of Shares held by Key Management Personnel\n\n(1) Includes market purchases and sales of shares to cover tax withholding liability related to shares issued on option exercises and vesting of RSUs. \n\n- 43 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9846375189435109, + "doc_id": "ebfcc4b83b31f963df79cac7c6816bc413fcd4f848dc51abe9e154072634f9d7", + "edit_distance": 0.007575757575757576, + "f1_score": 0.9871794871794873, + "meteor": 0.9924224766162881, + "precision": 0.9871794871794872, + "pred_md": "## CONSENT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM\n\nWe consent to the incorporation by reference in Registration Statement Nos. 333-166961, 333-161803, 333-63403, 333-40064, 333-40066, 333-79791, 333-101110, 333-118756, 333-146049, 333-174336, 333-173020, 333-189301 and 333-198413 on Form S-8 and 333-198408 on Form S-3 of our reports dated March 16, 2015, relating to the financial statements of Nordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries, and the effectiveness of Nordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries' internal control over financial reporting, appearing in the Annual Report on Form 10-K of Nordstrom, Inc. for the year ended January 31, 2015.\n\n/s/ Deloitte & Touche LLP Seattle, Washington March 16, 2015\n\nNordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 71", + "recall": 0.9871794871794872, + "true_md": "## CONSENT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM\n\nWe consent to the incorporation by reference in Registration Statement Nos. 333-166961, 333-161803, 333-63403, 333-40064, 333-40066, 333-79791, 333-101110, 333-118756, 333-146049, 333-174336, 333-173020, 333-189301 and 333-198413 on Form S-8 and 333-198408 on Form S-3 of our reports dated March 16, 2015, relating to the financial statements of Nordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries, and the effectiveness of Nordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries’ internal control over financial reporting, appearing in the Annual Report on Form 10-K of Nordstrom, Inc. for the year ended January 31, 2015.\n\n/s/ Deloitte & Touche LLP Seattle, Washington March 16, 2015 \n\nNordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 71" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9640766031987713, + "doc_id": "56cb55da1cefd08130c6df13c99a3954fd06fb10cfd2bb3512823b1357404942", + "edit_distance": 0.08484848484848485, + "f1_score": 0.9867109634551495, + "meteor": 0.9849286974435183, + "precision": 0.99, + "pred_md": "## BUSINESS SOLUTIONS\n\n## LEADING-EDGE COMMUNICATIONS SERVICES TO CANADIAN BUSINESSES\n\n- GLYPH<129> sells to medium and large enterprises, governments and financial institutions amongst others\n- GLYPH<129> 7,298 on-net fibre connected buildings\n- GLYPH<129> fibre passes next to an additional 20,014 near-net buildings.\n\n## SERVICES THAT MEET THE INCREASING DEMANDS OF TODAY'S CRITICAL BUSINESS APPLICATIONS\n\n- GLYPH<129> voice, data networking, Internet protocol (IP) and ethernet services over multiservice customer access devices that allow customers to scale and add services such as private networking, Internet, IP voice (SIP) and cloud solutions which blend seamlessly to grow with their business requirements\n- GLYPH<129> optical wave, Internet, ethernet and multi-protocol label switching (MPLS) services provide scalable and secure metro and wide area private networking that enable and interconnect critical business applications for businesses that have one or many offices, data centres or points of presence (as well as cloud applications) across Canada\n- GLYPH<129> extensive wireless and cable access networks services for primary, bridging and back-up connectivity\n- GLYPH<129> contracts are typically for 1 to 5 year terms, supported by comprehensive service level agreements.\n\n## NETWORK\n\nBusiness Solutions is supported by Rogers networks and a dedicated business support network monitoring team that provides Business Solutions customers with proactive network monitoring and problem resolution.\n\n## DISTRIBUTION\n\nOur enterprise and carrier wholesale sales team sells Business Solutions services to Canadian business and public sector telecom customers. An extensive network of third-party channel distributors deal with IT integrators, consultants, local service providers and other indirect sales relationships. This diverse approach gives greater breadth of coverage and sustains strong sales growth for next generation services.\n\n## COMPETITION\n\nA number of different players in the Canadian market compete for enterprise network and communications services. There are relatively few national providers, but each market has its own competitors that usually focus on the geographic markets where they have the most extensive networks.\n\nIn the wireline voice and data market, we compete with facilities and non-facilities-based telecommunications service providers. In markets where we own network infrastructure, we compete with incumbent fibre-based providers. The following are our main competitors, but there are also regional competitors:\n\n- GLYPH<129> Ontario: Bell, Cogeco Data Services and Allstream\n- GLYPH<129> Quebec: predominantly Bell and Videotron\n- GLYPH<129> Atlantic Canada: Bell Alliant and Eastlink.\n- GLYPH<129> Western Canada: Shaw and Telus\n\n## ACQUISITIONS\n\nWe made two major acquisitions this year that allow Business Solutions to further enhance its suite of enterprise-level data centre and cloud computing services, enabling Canadian businesses to benefit from a single provider able to ensure end-to-end security and reliability of critical business applications.\n\n- GLYPH<129> Blackiron (from Primus Telecommunications Canada Inc.) for $198 million on April 17, 2013\n- GLYPH<129> Pivot Data Centres for $158 million on October 1, 2013.\n\n## BUSINESS SOLUTIONS FINANCIAL RESULTS\n\n- 1 Results of operations include Blackiron's operating results as of April 17, 2013 and Pivot Data Centres as of October 1, 2013 (the dates of acquisition).\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC.\n\n45\n\nMANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS", + "recall": 0.9834437086092715, + "true_md": "MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AN D ANALYSIS\n\n## BUSINESS SOLUTIONS\n\n## LEADING-EDGE COMMUNICATIONS SERVICES TO CANADIAN BUSINESSES\n\n- GLYPH<129> sells to medium and large enterprises, governments and financial institutions amongst others\n\n- GLYPH<129> 7,298 on-net fibre connected buildings\n\n- GLYPH<129> fibre passes next to an additional 20,014 near-net buildings.\n\n- GLYPH<129> voice, data networking, Internet protocol (IP) and ethernet services over multiservice customer access devices that allow customers to scale and add services such as private networking, Internet, IP voice (SIP) and cloud solutions which blend seamlessly to grow with their business requirements\n\n- GLYPH<129> optical wave, Internet, ethernet and multi-protocol label switching (MPLS) services provide scalable and secure metro and wide area private networking that enable and interconnect critical business applications for businesses that have one or many offices, data centres or points of presence (as well as cloud applications) across Canada\n\n- GLYPH<129> extensive wireless and cable access networks services for primary, bridging and back-up connectivity\n\n- GLYPH<129> contracts are typically for 1 to 5 year terms, supported by comprehensive service level agreements.\n\n## SERVICES THAT MEET THE INCREASING DEMANDS OF TODAY’S CRITICAL BUSINESS APPLICATIONS\n\n## NETWORK\n\n## DISTRIBUTION\n\n## COMPETITION\n\nBusiness Solutions is supported by Rogers networks and a dedicated business support network monitoring team that provides Business Solutions customers with proactive network monitoring and problem resolution.\n\nOur enterprise and carrier wholesale sales team sells Business Solutions services to Canadian business and public sector telecom customers. An extensive network of third-party channel distributors deal with IT integrators, consultants, local service providers and other indirect sales relationships. This diverse approach gives greater breadth of coverage and sustains strong sales growth for next generation services.\n\nA number of different players in the Canadian market compete for enterprise network and communications services. There are relatively few national providers, but each market has its own competitors that usually focus on the geographic markets where they have the most extensive networks.\n\nIn the wireline voice and data market, we compete with facilities and non-facilities-based telecommunications service providers. In markets where we own network infrastructure, we compete with incumbent fibre-based providers. The following are our main competitors, but there are also regional competitors:\n\n- GLYPH<129> Ontario: Bell, Cogeco Data Services and Allstream\n\n- GLYPH<129> Quebec: predominantly Bell and Videotron\n\n- GLYPH<129> Atlantic Canada: Bell Alliant and Eastlink.\n\n- GLYPH<129> Western Canada: Shaw and Telus\n\n## ACQUISITIONS\n\nWe made two major acquisitions this year that allow Business Solutions to further enhance its suite of enterprise-level data centre and cloud computing services, enabling Canadian businesses to benefit from a single provider able to ensure end-to-end security and reliability of critical business applications.\n\n- GLYPH<129> Blackiron (from Primus Telecommunications Canada Inc.) for $198 million on April 17, 2013\n\n- GLYPH<129> Pivot Data Centres for $158 million on October 1, 2013.\n\n## BUSINESS SOLUTIONS FINANCIAL RESULTS\n\n1 Results of operations include Blackiron’s operating results as of April 17, 2013 and Pivot Data Centres as of October 1, 2013 (the dates of acquisition).\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 45" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9633000713374938, + "doc_id": "fb94ebad1accbdf51b790bde12ae59187e3b1e2bbf61a8215fd4cb0c658c8b5e", + "edit_distance": 0.11065989847715736, + "f1_score": 0.9887005649717515, + "meteor": 0.9889178184171659, + "precision": 0.9887005649717514, + "pred_md": "MANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS\n\non an annual basis or more often if events or circumstances warrant. A cash generating unit is the smallest identifiable group of assets that generates cash inflows that are largely independent of the cash inflows from other assets or groups of assets. Goodwill and indefinite life intangible assets are allocated to cash generating units (or groups of cash generating units) based on the level at which management monitors goodwill, which is not higher than an operating segment. The allocation involves significant estimates of future cash flows, estimated periods of use, applicable discount rates and considerable management judgment, and is made to cash generating units (or groups of cash generating units) that are expected to benefit from the synergies of the business combination. If key estimates differ unfavourably in the future, we could experience impairment charges that could decrease net income. We did not record an impairment charge in 2013 since the recoverable amounts of the cash generating units exceeded their carrying values. In 2012, we recorded an impairment charge of $80 million related to certain Media assets, due to the challenging economic conditions, weakening industry expectations and a decline in advertising revenues.\n\n## Financial Instruments\n\nThe fair values of our Derivatives are recorded using an estimated credit-adjusted mark-to-market valuation. If the Derivatives are in an asset position (i.e., the counterparty owes Rogers), the credit spread for the bank counterparty is added to the risk-free discount rate to determine the estimated credit-adjusted value. If the Derivatives are in a liability position (i.e., Rogers owes the counterparty), our credit spread is added to the risk-free discount rate. The estimated credit-adjusted value of Derivatives is affected by changes in credit spreads between us and our counterparties.\n\n## Income and Other Taxes\n\nWe make income and other tax provisions based on information currently available in each of the jurisdictions in which we operate. While we believe we have paid and provided for adequate amounts of tax, our business is complex and significant judgement is required in interpreting tax legislation and regulations and estimating future levels of taxable income. Our tax filings are subject to audit by the relevant government revenue authorities and the results of the government audit could materially change the amount of our actual income tax expense, income taxes payable or receivable, other taxes payable or receivable and deferred income tax assets and liabilities and could, in certain circumstances, result in the assessment of interest and penalties.\n\n## Pension Benefits\n\nWhen we account for defined benefit pension plans, assumptions are made in determining the valuation of benefit obligations. Assumptions and estimates include the discount rate, the rate of compensation increase and the mortality rate. Changes to these primary assumptions and estimates would affect the pension expense, pension asset and liability and other comprehensive income. Changes in economic conditions may also have an impact on our pension plan because there is no assurance that the plan will be able to earn the assumed rate of return. Market-driven changes may also result in changes in the discount rates and other variables that would require us to make contributions in the future that differ significantly from the current contributions and assumptions incorporated into the actuarial valuation process.\n\n80\n\nROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\nThe table below shows what the impact of an increase or decrease in the primary assumptions and estimates on our accrued benefit obligation and pension expense for 2013 would be:\n\n## S tock-Based Compensation\n\n## Stock Option Plans\n\nOur employee stock option plans attach cash-settled share appreciation rights (SARs) to all new and previously granted options. The SARs feature allows the option holder to elect to receive in cash an amount equal to the intrinsic value, instead of exercising the option and acquiring Class B Non-Voting shares.\n\nWe measure stock-based compensation to employees at fair value. We determine fair value of options using our Class B Non-Voting share price and option pricing models, and record all outstanding stock options as liabilities. The liability is marked-to-market in each period and is amortized to expense using a graded vesting approach over the period when employee services are rendered, or over the period to the date an employee is eligible to retire, whichever is shorter. The expense in each period is affected by the change in the price of our Class B NonVoting shares during the life of the option.\n\n## Restricted Share Unit (RSU) Plan\n\nWe record outstanding RSUs as liabilities, measuring our liabilities and compensation costs based on the award's fair value, and recording it as a charge to operating costs over the vesting period of the award. If the award's fair value changes after it has been granted and before the settlement date, we record the resulting changes in the liability as a charge to operating costs in the year that the change occurs. The payment amount is established as of the vesting date.\n\n## Deferred Share Unit (DSU) Plan\n\nWe record outstanding DSUs as liabilities, measuring our liabilities and compensation costs based on the awards' fair values at the grant date. If an award's fair value changes after it has been granted and before the settlement date, we record the resulting changes in our liability as a charge to operating costs in the year that the change occurs. The payment amount is established as of the exercise date.", + "recall": 0.9887005649717514, + "true_md": "MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS\n\n## Financial Instruments\n\n## Income and Other Taxes\n\n## S tock-Based Compensation\n\n## Stock Option Plans\n\n## Restricted Share Unit (RSU) Plan\n\n## Pension Benefits\n\non an annual basis or more often if events or circumstances warrant. A cash generating unit is the smallest identifiable group of assets that generates cash inflows that are largely independent of the cash inflows from other assets or groups of assets. Goodwill and indefinite life intangible assets are allocated to cash generating units (or groups of cash generating units) based on the level at which management monitors goodwill, which is not higher than an operating segment. The allocation involves significant estimates of future cash flows, estimated periods of use, applicable discount rates and considerable management judgment, and is made to cash generating units (or groups of cash generating units) that are expected to benefit from the synergies of the business combination. If key estimates differ unfavourably in the future, we could experience impairment charges that could decrease net income. We did not record an impairment charge in 2013 since the recoverable amounts of the cash generating units exceeded their carrying values. In 2012, we recorded an impairment charge of $80 million related to certain Media assets, due to the challenging economic conditions, weakening industry expectations and a decline in advertising revenues.\n\nThe fair values of our Derivatives are recorded using an estimated credit-adjusted mark-to-market valuation. If the Derivatives are in an asset position (i.e., the counterparty owes Rogers), the credit spread for the bank counterparty is added to the risk-free discount rate to determine the estimated credit-adjusted value. If the Derivatives are in a liability position (i.e., Rogers owes the counterparty), our credit spread is added to the risk-free discount rate. The estimated credit-adjusted value of Derivatives is affected by changes in credit spreads between us and our counterparties.\n\nWe make income and other tax provisions based on information currently available in each of the jurisdictions in which we operate. While we believe we have paid and provided for adequate amounts of tax, our business is complex and significant judgement is required in interpreting tax legislation and regulations and estimating future levels of taxable income. Our tax filings are subject to audit by the relevant government revenue authorities and the results of the government audit could materially change the amount of our actual income tax expense, income taxes payable or receivable, other taxes payable or receivable and deferred income tax assets and liabilities and could, in certain circumstances, result in the assessment of interest and penalties.\n\nWhen we account for defined benefit pension plans, assumptions are made in determining the valuation of benefit obligations. Assumptions and estimates include the discount rate, the rate of compensation increase and the mortality rate. Changes to these primary assumptions and estimates would affect the pension expense, pension asset and liability and other comprehensive income. Changes in economic conditions may also have an impact on our pension plan because there is no assurance that the plan will be able to earn the assumed rate of return. Market-driven changes may also result in changes in the discount rates and other variables that would require us to make contributions in the future that differ significantly from the current contributions and assumptions incorporated into the actuarial valuation process.\n\nThe table below shows what the impact of an increase or decrease in the primary assumptions and estimates on our accrued benefit obligation and pension expense for 2013 would be:\n\nOur employee stock option plans attach cash-settled share appreciation rights (SARs) to all new and previously granted options. The SARs feature allows the option holder to elect to receive in cash an amount equal to the intrinsic value, instead of exercising the option and acquiring Class B Non-Voting shares.\n\nWe measure stock-based compensation to employees at fair value. We determine fair value of options using our Class B Non-Voting share price and option pricing models, and record all outstanding stock options as liabilities. The liability is marked-to-market in each period and is amortized to expense using a graded vesting approach over the period when employee services are rendered, or over the period to the date an employee is eligible to retire, whichever is shorter. The expense in each period is affected by the change in the price of our Class B Non- Voting shares during the life of the option.\n\nWe record outstanding RSUs as liabilities, measuring our liabilities and compensation costs based on the award’s fair value, and recording it as a charge to operating costs over the vesting period of the award. If the award’s fair value changes after it has been granted and before the settlement date, we record the resulting changes in the liability as a charge to operating costs in the year that the change occurs. The payment amount is established as of the vesting date.\n\nWe record outstanding DSUs as liabilities, measuring our liabilities and compensation costs based on the awards’ fair values at the grant date. If an award’s fair value changes after it has been granted and before the settlement date, we record the resulting changes in our liability as a charge to operating costs in the year that the change occurs. The payment amount is established as of the exercise date.\n\n## Deferred Share Unit (DSU) Plan\n\n80 ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8823051786911775, + "doc_id": "71cddc2f86f3df8d351ba6992d6c73aeaceda5f95e1607967c989c84c1eafabc", + "edit_distance": 0.4878048780487805, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9903440170630142, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Consolidated Statements of Income\n\n(In millions of Canadian dollars, except per share amounts)\n\nThe accompanying notes are an integral part of the consolidated financial statements.\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC.\n\n89\n\nCONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## Consolidated Statements of Income\n\n(In millions of Canadian dollars, except per share amounts)\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 89\n\nThe accompanying notes are an integral part of the consolidated financial statements." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8774659549177265, + "doc_id": "b0bd2b6ba104961eaa3c7d4232a5df66b33ca99d3061cc30742c43b80ae8c548", + "edit_distance": 0.0821917808219178, + "f1_score": 0.9588014981273408, + "meteor": 0.9233129237219856, + "precision": 0.9624060150375939, + "pred_md": "## ◆ Nonconsolidated\n\nNotes: 1. Please refer to page 169 for the definitions of risk-monitored loans and problem assets based on the Financial Reconstruction Law.\n\n- 2. 'Net unrealized gains (losses) on other securities' represent the difference between the market prices and acquisition costs (or amortized costs) of 'other securities.' The values of stocks are calculated using the average market prices during the final month. For details, please refer to page 29.\n\n3. 'Number of employees' has been reported on the basis of full-time workers. 'Number of employees' includes locally hired overseas staff members but excludes contract employees, temporary staff, and executive officers who are not also Board members.\n\n4. The nonconsolidated capital ratio is calculated according to the formula specified in the FSA Notification No. 19 issued in fiscal 2006, which is based on Article 14-2 of the Banking Act of Japan. The nonconsolidated capital ratio of SMBC is calculated under Basel II.\n\n5. 'Net income - diluted' per share for the fiscal years ended March 31, 2008 and after is not reported because no potentially dilutive shares have been issued.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n22", + "recall": 0.9552238805970149, + "true_md": "## ◆ Nonconsolidated\n\nNotes: 1. Please refer to page 169 for the definitions of risk-monitored loans and problem assets based on the Financial Reconstruction Law.\n\n2. “Net unrealized gains (losses) on other securities” represent the difference between the market prices and acquisition costs (or amortized costs) of “other securities.” The values of stocks are calculated using the average market prices during the final month. For details, please refer to page 29.\n\n3. “Number of employees” has been reported on the basis of full-time workers. “Number of employees” includes locally hired overseas staff members but excludes contract employees, temporary staff, and executive officers who are not also Board members.\n\n4. The nonconsolidated capital ratio is calculated according to the formula specified in the FSA Notification No. 19 issued in fiscal 2006, which is based on Article 14-2 of the Banking Act of Japan. The nonconsolidated capital ratio of SMBC is calculated under Basel II.\n\n5. “Net income — diluted” per share for the fiscal years ended March 31, 2008 and after is not reported because no potentially dilutive shares have been issued.\n\nSMFG 2011 22" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9581803833808026, + "doc_id": "ae455e73fedbe4ba4cf40c05a4d714b5351543466107e856a63774129428a067", + "edit_distance": 0.05246913580246913, + "f1_score": 0.9871794871794871, + "meteor": 0.9788256101335668, + "precision": 0.9935483870967742, + "pred_md": "In the event of the completion of a takeover (relevant interest exceeds 50%) the executive will receive a lump sum gross payment equal to between six to 12 months of the Total Remuneration Package (all executives are entitled to 12 months except Ross Coyle, Joel Forwood and Ron James who are entitled to six months). If within six months after the completion of the takeover the executive elects to terminate his employment or his employment is terminated by the Company the executive will not be entitled to any notice of termination or payment in lieu of notice.\n\n## Non-Executive Directors Fees\n\nNon-Executive Directors, including the Chairman, are paid fixed fees for their services to the Group plus statutory superannuation contributions the Company is required by law to make on behalf of Non-Executive Directors. Those fees are inclusive of any salary-sacrificed contribution to superannuation that Non-Executive Directors wish to make.\n\nThe level of Non-Executive Directors fees is set so as to attract the best candidates for the Board while maintaining a level commensurate with boards of similar size and type. The Board may also seek the advice of independent remuneration consultants, including survey data, to ensure Non-Executive Directors' fees and payments are consistent with the current market.\n\nNon-Executive Directors' base fees inclusive of committee membership but not including statutory superannuation are outlined below.\n\nThe aggregate remuneration of Non-Executive Directors is set by shareholders in general meeting in accordance with the Constitution of the Company, with individual Non-Executive Directors remuneration determined by the Board within the aggregate total. The aggregate amount of Non-Executive Directors' fees approved by shareholders on 13 November 2008 is $1,000,000.\n\nNon-Executive Directors do not receive any additional fees for serving on committees.\n\nThere are no retirement allowances for Non-Executive Directors.\n\nwww.kingsgate.com.au", + "recall": 0.9808917197452229, + "true_md": "Directors’ Report 56\n\nIn the event of the completion of a takeover (relevant interest exceeds 50%) the executive will receive a lump sum gross payment equal to between six to 12 months of the Total Remuneration Package (all executives are entitled to 12 months except Ross Coyle, Joel Forwood and Ron James who are entitled to six months). If within six months after the completion of the takeover the executive elects to terminate his employment or his employment is terminated by the Company the executive will not be entitled to any notice of termination or payment in lieu of notice.\n\nNon-Executive Directors, including the Chairman, are paid fixed fees for their services to the Group plus statutory superannuation contributions the Company is required by law to make on behalf of Non-Executive Directors. Those fees are inclusive of any salary-sacrificed contribution to superannuation that Non-Executive Directors wish to make. \n\nThe level of Non-Executive Directors fees is set so as to attract the best candidates for the Board while maintaining a level commensurate with boards of similar size and type. The Board may also seek the advice of independent remuneration consultants, including survey data, to ensure Non-Executive Directors’ fees and payments are consistent with the current market. \n\nNon-Executive Directors’ base fees inclusive of committee membership but not including statutory superannuation are outlined below.\n\nThe aggregate remuneration of Non-Executive Directors is set by shareholders in general meeting in accordance with the Constitution of the Company, with individual Non-Executive Directors remuneration determined by the Board within the aggregate total. The aggregate amount of Non-Executive Directors’ fees approved by shareholders on 13 November 2008 is $1,000,000.\n\nNon-Executive Directors do not receive any additional fees for serving on committees. \n\nThere are no retirement allowances for Non-Executive Directors.\n\nwww.kingsgate.com.au\n\n## Non-Executive Directors Fees" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6147881529512643, + "doc_id": "1223ad4f5324a87a340f9e542f3b0d80005fee7e95da6759e626aeaa1d81ef39", + "edit_distance": 0.2857142857142857, + "f1_score": 0.8333333333333334, + "meteor": 0.9576923076923077, + "precision": 0.7142857142857143, + "pred_md": "Six Months\n\n2010 ANNUAL REPORT |\n\n2", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "2010 ANNUAL REPORT | 2" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9562871294779193, + "doc_id": "21c2716c0b45d87af6c4806796aa430bf9f593a6ac1a61308f2bd587085097dd", + "edit_distance": 0.9015256588072122, + "f1_score": 0.9776536312849163, + "meteor": 0.7158641694927251, + "precision": 0.9803921568627451, + "pred_md": "CEO'S REPORT\n\nCEO'S REPORT\n\n4\n\n## Dear Fellow Shareholders,\n\n2014 Review -2014 was a year of stark economic contrasts in our industry. During the first half as in the past several years, historically volatile West Texas Intermediate oil prices seemed range bound between $80 and $110 with geopolitical events driving prices towards the ceiling and demand risks pushing prices towards the floor of the range.\n\nIn the US, E&P companies were spending record amounts of capital, fueled by cheap and plentiful debt, on horizontal drilling and completions to drive production growth while making material strategic acquisitions in order to increase their long-term exposure to oil prices.\n\nThe easy credit environment caused asset prices to increase significantly to the point where, in our view , risk adjusted returns on new acquisitions were threatening cyclical lows. In line with our strategy , Sundance had monetized several mature assets realizing\n\n~$50 million in current period gains while freeing up ~$165 million in invested capital.\n\nWe primarily reinvested this capital in production growth and cash flow with only about $75 million reinvested in acquiring oil and gas leases and producing properties. This resulted in our production increasing from 5,028 BOEPD to 9,434 BOEPD by December 2014 and full year EBITDAX increasing $73.8 million to $126.4 million in 2014. Had prices stayed steady, we likely would have generated earnings before income taxes of over $85 million and a return on capital in excess of 20%.\n\nOur second capital priority for the year was to conclude the appraisal of the Woodford formation in our Logan County, Oklahoma assets. We viewed this relatively modest, but higher risk, investment as having a 25% chance of success with a 15x upside. Unfortunately , we met with mixed success in our appraisal activities proving that in today's onshore US oil and gas industry that the best absolute returns are generated by drilling in proved regions. There are plenty of solid opportunities to efficiently grow the business without exposure to undue geologic risk.\n\nLike many prior bubbles driven by new technologies, the second half of the year saw the pricing environment come crashing down around us. The market became fundamentally unbalanced, driving prices down almost 50% and rendering material portions of global oil and gas development uneconomic.\n\nOur peers went from talking about their growth prospects to fretting about cash costs and liquidity , a stark contrast from the go-go growth times which existed in the first half of the year. This shift in industry strategy has now come in line with our general business philosophy-in the resource space, low-cost, low debt businesses will survive and thrive across cycles; and, relative to our US onshore peer group, Sundance boasts a top 15% cost structure and balance sheet.\n\nOur position as a cost and balance sheet leader is underpinned by two key philosophies: 1) investment in a leading technical team that is encouraged to take reasonable risks to improve recoveries and/or reduce costs, and 2) a ruthless focus on portfolio returns as demonstrated by our consistent track record of divesting assets that don't fit our strategic objectives or promise lower forward return profiles.\n\nOur high quality Eagle Ford acreage produces strong recoveries at reasonable costs and thus generates good returns, even in a low price environment. Because of these characteristics, the majority of our forward capital is expected to be invested generating strong growth and shareholder returns in the Eagle Ford.\n\nWith mixed appraisal results in the Woodford, Sundance's Mississippian/Woodford position generally requires higher prices to meet our hurdle rates. Because of the mixed Woodford results, higher overall unit costs, and depressed pricing at year end, we recognized an impairment charge of ~$60 million on these assets at year 2014. Had prices maintained their strength, we likely would have been in a position to recover our investment from these assets.", + "recall": 0.9749303621169917, + "true_md": "## Dear Fellow Shareholders,\n\n## CEO’S REPORT\n\n4\n\nWith mixed appraisal results in the Woodford, Sundance’s Mississippian/Woodford position generally requires higher prices to meet our hurdle rates. Because of the mixed Woodford results, higher overall unit costs, and depressed pricing at year end, we recognized an impairment charge of ~$60 million on these assets at year 2014. Had prices maintained their strength, we likely would have been in a position to recover our investment from these assets.\n\nOur high quality Eagle Ford acreage produces strong recoveries at reasonable costs and thus generates good returns, even in a low price environment. Because of these character- istics, the majority of our forward capital is expected to be invested generating strong growth and shareholder returns in the Eagle Ford.\n\nOur position as a cost and balance sheet leader is underpinned by two key philosophies: 1) investment in a leading technical team that is encouraged to take reasonable risks to improve recoveries and/or reduce costs, and 2) a ruthless focus on portfolio returns as demonstrated by our consistent track record of divesting assets that don’t fit our strategic objectives or promise lower forward return profiles.\n\nOur peers went from talking about their growth prospects to fretting about cash costs and liquidity, a stark contrast from the go-go growth times which existed in the first half of the year. This shift in industry strategy has now come in line with our general business philosophy — in the resource space, low-cost, low debt businesses will survive and thrive across cycles; and, relative to our US onshore peer group, Sundance boasts a top 15% cost structure and balance sheet.\n\nLike many prior bubbles driven by new technologies, the second half of the year saw the pricing environment come crashing down around us. The market became fundamentally unbalanced, driving prices down almost 50% and rendering material portions of global oil and gas development uneconomic.\n\nOur second capital priority for the year was to conclude the appraisal of the Woodford formation in our Logan County, Oklahoma assets. We viewed this relatively modest, but higher risk, investment as having a 25% chance of success with a 15x upside. Unfortunately, we met with mixed success in our appraisal activities proving that in today’s onshore US oil and gas industry that the best absolute returns are generated by drilling in proved regions. There are plenty of solid opportunities to efficiently grow the business without exposure to undue geologic risk.\n\nWe primarily reinvested this capital in production growth and cash flow with only about $75 million reinvested in acquiring oil and gas leases and producing properties. This resulted in our production increasing from 5,028 BOEPD to 9,434 BOEPD by December 2014 and full year EBITDAX increasing $73.8 million to $126.4 million in 2014. Had prices stayed steady, we likely would have generated earnings before income taxes of over $85 million and a return on capital in excess of 20%.\n\nThe easy credit environment caused asset prices to increase significantly to the point where, in our view, risk adjusted returns on new acquisitions were threatening cyclical lows. In line with our strategy, Sundance had monetized several mature assets realizing\n\n~$50 million in current period gains while freeing up ~$165 million in invested capital.\n\nIn the US, E&P companies were spending record amounts of capital, fueled by cheap and plentiful debt, on horizontal drilling and completions to drive production growth while making material strategic acquisitions in order to increase their long-term exposure to oil prices.\n\n2014 Review — 2014 was a year of stark economic contrasts in our industry. During the first half as in the past several years, historically volatile West Texas Intermediate oil prices seemed range bound between $80 and $110 with geopolitical events driving prices towards the ceiling and demand risks pushing prices towards the floor of the range." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9706696209290658, + "doc_id": "85ae4260c1b8acd2c612854bd0d7537e3e85171d9e792676d239ca0a1fcb56ed", + "edit_distance": 0.48864468864468863, + "f1_score": 0.9866381614110101, + "meteor": 0.9890693364838973, + "precision": 0.9850586979722519, + "pred_md": "George Bradley\n\nKim Brady\n\nDavid Brannen\n\nAron Bridges\n\nRonald Bromlow\n\nJennifer Broomfield\n\nBryan Brown\n\nJeff Brown\n\nHeather Brunker\n\nKenneth Brunson\n\nJohn Bullard\n\nBayley Burns\n\nCyndy Burris\n\nBuster Burton Jr.\n\nAra Bush\n\nLori Byrd\n\nKeith Cameron\n\nBob O. Campbell\n\nCarol Capek\n\nPat Carson\n\nGary Carter\n\nDennis Cerny\n\nDavid Chisum\n\nMike Churchwell\n\nTony Clark\n\nMichael Clinton\n\nKim Combs\n\nTom Corley\n\nBrian J. Cox Jr.\n\nBryan Cox\n\nMichael Cramer\n\nAnn Croan\n\nJarod Cunningham\n\nWendy Cunningham\n\nJohn D. Davis\n\nJon Davis\n\nRyan C. Dean\n\nScott Dickson\n\nDennis Dix\n\nDerek Dixon\n\nSteve Donley\n\nShanon Dunlap\n\nJody Dunn\n\nJack Elliott\n\nJimmy Embery\n\nCharlene Ernest\n\nKeith Ervin\n\nSerena Evans\n\nJim Fansher\n\nUrsula Faus\n\nMark Ferbrache\n\nJeff Fisher\n\nMitch Floresca\n\nTommy Foust\n\nT. R. Fox\n\nJustin Froehlich\n\nEdd Gabbart\n\nFred Gagliardi\n\nTravis George\n\nB.K. Gibson\n\nKenneth Gideon\n\nDana Ginanni\n\nJohn Gist\n\nRandy Gladden\n\nDavid Godsey\n\nJeff Gorton\n\nJim Govenlock\n\nPablo Hadzeriga Jr.\n\nPaul Hagemeier\n\nBuck Hall\n\nMichael Hall\n\nRonnie Haney\n\nJessie Hardin\n\nGraham Harris\n\nRoger Harrod\n\nLisa Hartman\n\nRich Hearst\n\nPancho Hendricks\n\nTara Henry\n\nGlen Hensley\n\nSue Ann Henthorn\n\nCatherine Hester\n\nAnita Hixon\n\nLanny Holman\n\nMisty Holtgrefe\n\nPaul House\n\nBrian L. Howard\n\nRoy Howe\n\nDonna Huff\n\nRosie Hutton\n\nAngela Ingargiola\n\nJames Inman\n\nJohn Jackson\n\nDave Johns\n\nTommy Johnson\n\nJoseph Kennedy\n\nDavid Kerrigan\n\nMelissa Ketchum\n\nJoe Kidwell\n\nNeil Kincade\n\nDanny King\n\nMelvin Kingcade\n\nMatthew Klaassen\n\nJennifer Knott\n\nPete Lane Jr.\n\nJeff Lasater\n\nAl Lavenue\n\nKathy Leasure\n\nDustin Lenhart\n\nNick Little\n\nDustin Locke\n\nGeorge Loman\n\nClint Lord\n\nJason Lowrey\n\nJack Lowry\n\nSergio Lujan\n\nShane Lukasek Jr.\n\nSharon Luttrell\n\nMark Mabe\n\nAli Mallett\n\nJeremy Marple\n\nShelly Martin\n\nAlex McCalmont\n\nDanielle McCoy\n\nKenneth McGuire Sr.\n\nMenecca McHone\n\nCarol McKenzie\n\nRyan Meacham\n\nEddie Merkel\n\nR.T. Miller\n\nJay Monroe\n\nAlfredo Montiel\n\nLucretia Morris\n\nHuey Morton\n\nLarry Mossman\n\nPaul Munding\n\nMaureen Nelson\n\nJason Nichols\n\nTal Oden\n\nTony Olivier\n\nRena Owen\n\nAshley Paine\n\nTobin Paris\n\nNancy Parker\n\nGary Parks\n\nGale Parman\n\nKellie Patterson\n\nDonnie Patton Sr.\n\nAndrea Patzkowsky\n\nMichael Phillips\n\nRonnie Pitts\n\nBrent Pletcher\n\nJerry Preston\n\nJennifer Pryse\n\nKen Rechlin\n\nWes Redding\n\nJim Reisch\n\nMindi Richardson\n\nMatt Roberts\n\nJody Robertson\n\nKristen Rogstad\n\nDoug Romero\n\nMark Russo\n\nBeverly Sampson\n\nLarry Savage\n\nBob Schmicker\n\nDave Schoonmaker\n\nKily Seaman\n\nJanet Selling\n\nKeith Shahan\n\nClay Shamblin\n\nAaron Siemers\n\nStacy Smith\n\nJoyce Stanmire\n\nScott Stearman\n\nMarla Strack\n\nLuke Strickland\n\nMichelle Surratt\n\nBlake Surrell\n\nJaime Tatro\n\nAmber Thomas\n\nChevy Thomason\n\nJerry Todd\n\nScottie Trejo\n\nSeth Unruh\n\nJulio Vasquez\n\nLarry Ventris\n\nJohnny Voth\n\nKeith Wagnon\n\nJosh Wangler\n\nBrad Watkins\n\nNoel Way\n\nDan Welch\n\nDavid Wernli\n\nDe Ann Williams\n\nNicole Williams\n\nDavid B. Willis\n\nBill Wince Jr.\n\nMartin Wise\n\nJames Worsham Jr.\n\nTodd Wright\n\nLinn Yousey\n\nLori Zang\n\n## 2004 (326)\n\nGreg Adams\n\nJustin Adams\n\nCarol Adler\n\nGary Allen\n\nStephanie Allsbury\n\nTim Andrews\n\nRonald Babers\n\nKristi Bacon\n\nJeffrey Bailey\n\nBobby Baker\n\nJeff Ballard\n\nEric Barbee\n\nPaul Baresel\n\nTina Barnhill\n\nDamon Beasley\n\nGeoff Beaulieu\n\nCurtis Blake\n\nLorraine Blanchard\n\nKelsey Blenden\n\nBradley Blevins\n\nLee Blevins\n\nAaron Bloedow\n\nCourtney Blood\n\nDeborah Bond\n\nBrian Booker\n\nTad Boone\n\nKristin Bottom\n\nThomas Boucher\n\nAngela Boulware\n\nRudy Bravo Jr.\n\nAvis Bray\n\nJeff Bray\n\nDustin Brinkley\n\nJeff Brinlee\n\nTerri Bristow\n\nDarren Brittain\n\nAnita Brodrick\n\nDonald Bromlow\n\nBrad Brown\n\nDan Brown\n\nDiana Brown\n\nHarlan Brown\n\nJason J. Brown\n\nPamela Brown\n\nTravis Brown\n\nAaron Buchanan\n\nCraig Buck\n\nKingsley Burke\n\nJackie Burks\n\nJosh Burris\n\nTim Butkus\n\nAmber Butler\n\nJuan Calbillo\n\nMike Campbell\n\nChristopher Cantrell\n\nRandy Cantwell\n\nLarry Carter\n\nLupe Castro\n\nJana Cathers\n\nMichael Chester\n\nYong Cho\n\nTony Churchill\n\nCherokee Clark\n\nJustin Clark\n\nCarolyn Coble\n\nBrenda Coffman\n\nRich Colbert\n\nPaul Coleman\n\nCraig Collins\n\nAndrea Conner\n\nHershel Conrad\n\nJennifer Cooksey\n\nMelissa Costello\n\nDanielle Costilla\n\nLorrie Cottam\n\nCole Courson\n\nPatrick Crain\n\nSharon Crain\n\nTim Crissup\n\nKizzy Crowell\n\nJustin Cruse\n\nCathy Curtis\n\nRyan Curtis\n\nGlenn Cushenbery\n\nClint Daily\n\nEvelyn Daniel\n\nRobbie Dean\n\nDavid DeLaO\n\nAlene Do\n\nKelly Dobbs\n\nJohna Dodson\n\nKirk Dougherty\n\nDustin Drew\n\nChuck Duginski\n\nPeggi Elliott\n\nBrian Ellithorp\n\nCarlos Evans\n\nRobin Evans\n\nSheila Even\n\nRon Everett\n\nLibby Fanning\n\nErik Fares\n\nFred Ferbrache\n\nDustin Fick\n\nJeremy Finefrock\n\nJeff Finnell\n\nJarod Fite\n\nWalter Fletcher\n\nTommy Ford Jr.\n\nAnville Francis\n\nLinda Fries\n\nTerry Frohnapfel\n\nGary Garrison\n\nJohn Garrison\n\nGuy Gaskill\n\nPaul Geisinger\n\nRonnie Givens\n\nJosh Glancy\n\nJohn Glynn\n\nLinda Good\n\nMichael Goossen\n\nJennifer Granger\n\nAngie Green\n\nCoty Greer\n\nBonnie Griggs\n\nMark Hadlock\n\nVictor Haley\n\nKaty Hampton\n\nRachael Hanoch\n\nAndrew Hanscom\n\nJoel Harris\n\nRobert Hart\n\nMelanie Harvey\n\nLinda Havrilla\n\nHeather Hawkins\n\nRebecca Henderson\n\nTim Henley\n\nChris Henry\n\nFrancisco Hernandez\n\nRandy Herring\n\nJ. D. Hertweck\n\nMelissa Heusel\n\nKevin Hill\n\nDanny Hink\n\nRandy Hodge\n\nBuz Holloway\n\nLatania Holt\n\nAlan Horton\n\nDoug Howeth\n\nWill Hubbard\n\nLauren Humphrey\n\nCristy Hutchens\n\nMark Hylton\n\nJamie Jackson\n\nRandy R. Jackson\n\nJeff James\n\nRyan Jameson\n\nJayson Janes\n\nAmanda Jeantet\n\nJeff L. Jones\n\nSteven Jones\n\nJohn Keeling\n\nShamara Keith\n\nBill Kerby\n\nJason Kneedy\n\nBrenda Knight\n\nBrett Knight\n\nJosh Komarek\n\nMatt Kopf\n\nPam Koscinski\n\nJennifer Landers\n\nJames Lardner\n\nCory Lewis\n\nShea Lewis\n\nBrent Lightsey\n\nMelvin Like\n\nHarold Lopez\n\nJustin Lucas\n\nBarbara Lydick\n\nLuke Lyons\n\nStanley Major\n\nTara Martin\n\nLolo Martinez\n\nRogelio Martinez\n\nBill McBrayer\n\nJohn McCartney\n\nKelly McConnell\n\nDuane McDowell\n\nMike McGinnis\n\nDonna McGriff\n\nNatalie McNeil\n\nRyan McNeil\n\nCliff Merritt\n\nMatthew Milledge\n\nPat Mills\n\nSheldon Mills\n\nRodolfo Molina\n\nElton Monroe\n\nKendra Monroe\n\nPenny Montgomery\n\nDana Moore\n\nSim Morgan\n\nJimmy Morris\n\nElisa Mount\n\nMark Murray\n\nTim Murray\n\nChuck Myers\n\nTodd Nance\n\nMichael New\n\nRich Newton\n\nShery Orahood\n\nSteven Owen\n\nRegan Paquette\n\nLindsey Pargeter\n\nGlenn Parker\n\nRyan Parman\n\nWalter Patten\n\nDeone Pearcy\n\nChris Pennel\n\nAndrea Penner\n\nRaymond Perez\n\nDwain Peterson\n\nRandall Pierce\n\nDebbie Piette\n\nDennis Plemons\n\nKeitha Plumlee\n\nBryan Potter\n\nJanae Power\n\nKelly Price\n\nJohn Priest\n\nFlo Prieto\n\nJosh Purcell\n\nOdie Quigley\n\nShelly Quimby\n\nLoren Raley\n\nBrad Ralstin\n\nJuan Ramirez\n\nJeff Ramsdell\n\nTom Reasnor\n\nShannon Reed\n\nDoug Reuss\n\nJack Rhine\n\nDusty Rhoads\n\nTiffany Rhodes\n\nJerry Rhymes\n\nRenee Riebe\n\nGary Robbins\n\nBill Roberts\n\nChip Roemisch Jr.\n\nRichard Rosencrans\n\nKelly Rother\n\nMary Ann Sanders\n\nLarry Satterfield Jr.\n\nPerry Scheffler\n\nHeather Scoggins\n\nJoel Scott\n\nJohn Seldenrust\n\nJuan Serna\n\nSteve Serna\n\nJohn Sharp\n\nJack Shaver\n\nPaul Shelite\n\nGene Shepard\n\nKyle Shipley\n\nPaul Skelton Jr.\n\nStacy Slater\n\nJulie Slaton\n\nClay Smith\n\nMark Smith\n\nMonte Smith\n\nJewel Sneed\n\nGail Spencer\n\nRobert Sperandio\n\nAdria Sprigler\n\nTerry Stafford\n\nDaryl Stallings\n\nSteve Steadham\n\nJoe Stewart\n\nPete Stewart\n\nDavid Stone\n\nTravis Stout\n\nJohn Stoute Jr.\n\nTom Stovall\n\nBob Streeter\n\nKelsey Swinford\n\nMark Syzemore\n\nBarry Tarman\n\nRay Taylor\n\nJon Terrell\n\nRandall Thomas\n\nRenee Thomas\n\n2010 ANNUAL REPORT |\n\n31\n\nTyler Beaver\n\nJohn Beckwith\n\nWilliam Bennett\n\nCornelius Birmingham\n\nAndrew Black\n\nKenneth Blackburn\n\nJackie Blanchard\n\nRon Bliss\n\nDot Blythe\n\nBuddy Boeckman\n\nNick Boeckman\n\nCharlie Boggs\n\nTimothy Bohannan\n\nRaymond Bohnet\n\nK.P. Boland\n\nCorey Bolding\n\nRonnie Bonnett\n\nAdam Bos\n\nTim Bostick\n\nMark Bottrell\n\nJoe Bradford\n\nEverett Bradley\n\nKenny Bragg\n\nDavid Branham\n\nDebra Branham\n\nGail Branham\n\nDel Brazeal\n\nChris Brennan\n\nJordan Brim\n\nRonald Brisendine\n\nBrent Bromlow\n\nDonna Brown\n\nRichard Brown\n\nKathy Buckley\n\nNichole Buersmeyer\n\nVicki Bumpas\n\nKara Burch\n\nRodney Burgess\n\nSteve Burnett\n\nAbiel Buruato\n\nRonnie Bynum\n\nGavan Byrd\n\nSkye Callantine\n\nDeric Canary\n\nMichelle Cantrell\n\nSteve Cantrell\n\nChase Williams\n\nRandy Williams\n\nAntoine Wilson\n\nKelly Wilson\n\nDave Winchester\n\nJeff Wolf\n\nDana Woo\n\nCarla Wood\n\nHarold Wooley\n\nLandon Worth\n\nJose Yanez\n\nMark Yeisley\n\nBecky Young\n\nJosh Young\n\nDavid Zerger\n\nSteve Zmek\n\n## 2005 (745)\n\nDaniel Abeyta Jr.\n\nJim Adams\n\nJulius Adams\n\nRobert Adams\n\nTony Adams\n\nRonald Addington\n\nChrista Adkins\n\nJamie Adkins\n\nJeff A. Adkins\n\nJeff J. Adkins\n\nWayne Adkins\n\nNancy Aguilar\n\nReford Alcorn\n\nBill Allbright\n\nCindy Allen\n\nClaude Allen\n\nErin Allen\n\nSandy Alvarado\n\nFred Amburgey\n\nDavid Anderson\n\nJeff D. Anderson\n\nGary Anthony\n\nRandy Anthony\n\nLinda Arambula\n\nDawn Arismendez\n\nLee Arnold\n\nDavid Atha\n\nMatt Atkins\n\nOKLAHOMA CITY, OKLAHOMA Chesapeake's IT team manages nearly 2,000 servers and 1.5 million gigabytes of storage to support business functions for more than 10,000 employees.\n\nRobert Thompson\n\nKelly Thomsen\n\nRyan Thomsen\n\nCathy Tompkins\n\nTom Treece\n\nT.J. Treece\n\nBilly Trent\n\nJohn Uhlenhake\n\nBilly Uptigrove\n\nAnji VonTungeln\n\nAaron Vrbenec\n\nFred Wanker\n\nBryce Ward\n\nKyle Welcher\n\nTom Wible\n\nJackie Wicks\n\nAndy Widmer\n\nLeon Wildman\n\nJill Willey\n\nMelissa Atkinson\n\nJeffrey Atteberry\n\nRyan Atwell\n\nRebecca Avant\n\nBrian Bailey\n\nLeigh Ann Bailey\n\nMarty Bain\n\nKyle Baker\n\nMelvin Baldridge\n\nGary Barnard\n\nRick Barnes\n\nMark Barringer\n\nShawn Barron\n\nKaren Bartley\n\nCody Barton\n\nBob Bary\n\nDustin Baxter\n\nTraci Bean\n\nThomas Beaty\n\nSilas Carnes\n\nDennis Carpenter\n\nKrista Carpenter\n\nMendy Carpenter\n\nShannon Carrion\n\nCathy Carter\n\nKyle Carter\n\nZulema Casas\n\nCassie Casto\n\nLuAnn Chance\n\nDarrel Chandler\n\nDonald Chaney\n\nMike Chapman\n\nRichard Chin\n\nNikki Church Lemon\n\nCathy Clark\n\nCharles Clark\n\nLinda Clark\n\nJames Clay", + "recall": 0.9882226980728052, + "true_md": "2010 ANNUAL REPORT | 31\n\nGeorge Bradley Kim Brady David Brannen Aron Bridges Ronald Bromlow Jennifer Broomfield Bryan Brown Jeff Brown Heather Brunker Kenneth Brunson John Bullard Bayley Burns Cyndy Burris Buster Burton Jr. Ara Bush Lori Byrd Keith Cameron Bob O. Campbell Carol Capek Pat Carson Gary Carter Dennis Cerny David Chisum Mike Churchwell Tony Clark Michael Clinton Kim Combs Tom Corley Brian J. Cox Jr. Bryan Cox Michael Cramer Ann Croan Jarod Cunningham Wendy Cunningham John D. Davis Jon Davis Ryan C. Dean Scott Dickson Dennis Dix Derek Dixon Steve Donley Shanon Dunlap Jody Dunn Jack Elliott Jimmy Embery Charlene Ernest Keith Ervin Serena Evans Jim Fansher Ursula Faus Mark Ferbrache Jeff Fisher Mitch Floresca Tommy Foust T. R. Fox Justin Froehlich Edd Gabbart Fred Gagliardi Travis George B.K. Gibson Kenneth Gideon Dana Ginanni John Gist Randy Gladden David Godsey Jeff Gorton Jim Govenlock Pablo Hadzeriga Jr. Paul Hagemeier Buck Hall Michael Hall Ronnie Haney Jessie Hardin Graham Harris Roger Harrod Lisa Hartman Rich Hearst Pancho Hendricks Tara Henry Glen Hensley Sue Ann Henthorn Catherine Hester Anita Hixon Lanny Holman Misty Holtgrefe Paul House Brian L. Howard Roy Howe Donna Huff Rosie Hutton\n\nAngela Ingargiola James Inman John Jackson Dave Johns Tommy Johnson Joseph Kennedy David Kerrigan Melissa Ketchum Joe Kidwell Neil Kincade Danny King Melvin Kingcade Matthew Klaassen Jennifer Knott Pete Lane Jr. Jeff Lasater Al Lavenue Kathy Leasure Dustin Lenhart Nick Little Dustin Locke George Loman Clint Lord Jason Lowrey Jack Lowry Sergio Lujan Shane Lukasek Jr. Sharon Luttrell Mark Mabe Ali Mallett Jeremy Marple Shelly Martin Alex McCalmont Danielle McCoy Kenneth McGuire Sr. MeneccaMcHone Carol McKenzie Ryan Meacham Eddie Merkel R.T. Miller Jay Monroe Alfredo Montiel Lucretia Morris Huey Morton Larry Mossman Paul Munding Maureen Nelson Jason Nichols Tal Oden Tony Olivier Rena Owen Ashley Paine Tobin Paris Nancy Parker Gary Parks Gale Parman Kellie Patterson Donnie Patton Sr. Andrea Patzkowsky Michael Phillips Ronnie Pitts Brent Pletcher Jerry Preston Jennifer Pryse Ken Rechlin Wes Redding Jim Reisch Mindi Richardson Matt Roberts Jody Robertson Kristen Rogstad Doug Romero Mark Russo Beverly Sampson Larry Savage Bob Schmicker Dave Schoonmaker Kily Seaman Janet Selling Keith Shahan Clay Shamblin Aaron Siemers Stacy Smith Joyce Stanmire Scott Stearman Marla Strack Luke Strickland Michelle Surratt Blake Surrell Jaime Tatro\n\nAmber Thomas Chevy Thomason Jerry Todd Scottie Trejo Seth Unruh Julio Vasquez Larry Ventris Johnny Voth Keith Wagnon Josh Wangler Brad Watkins Noel Way Dan Welch David Wernli De Ann Williams Nicole Williams David B. Willis Bill Wince Jr. Martin Wise James Worsham Jr. Todd Wright Linn Yousey Lori Zang\n\nBrenda Coffman Rich Colbert Paul Coleman Craig Collins Andrea Conner Hershel Conrad Jennifer Cooksey Melissa Costello Danielle Costilla Lorrie Cottam Cole Courson Patrick Crain Sharon Crain Tim Crissup Kizzy Crowell Justin Cruse Cathy Curtis Ryan Curtis Glenn Cushenbery Clint Daily Evelyn Daniel Robbie Dean David DeLaO Alene Do Kelly Dobbs Johna Dodson Kirk Dougherty Dustin Drew Chuck Duginski Peggi Elliott Brian Ellithorp Carlos Evans Robin Evans Sheila Even Ron Everett Libby Fanning Erik Fares Fred Ferbrache Dustin Fick Jeremy Finefrock Jeff Finnell Jarod Fite Walter Fletcher Tommy Ford Jr. Anville Francis Linda Fries Terry Frohnapfel Gary Garrison John Garrison Guy Gaskill Paul Geisinger Ronnie Givens Josh Glancy John Glynn Linda Good Michael Goossen Jennifer Granger Angie Green Coty Greer Bonnie Griggs Mark Hadlock Victor Haley Katy Hampton Rachael Hanoch Andrew Hanscom Joel Harris Robert Hart Melanie Harvey Linda Havrilla Heather Hawkins Rebecca Henderson Tim Henley Chris Henry Francisco Hernandez Randy Herring J. D. Hertweck Melissa Heusel Kevin Hill Danny Hink Randy Hodge Buz Holloway Latania Holt Alan Horton Doug Howeth Will Hubbard Lauren Humphrey Cristy Hutchens Mark Hylton Jamie Jackson Randy R. Jackson\n\nGreg Adams Justin Adams Carol Adler Gary Allen Stephanie Allsbury Tim Andrews Ronald Babers Kristi Bacon Jeffrey Bailey Bobby Baker Jeff Ballard Eric Barbee Paul Baresel Tina Barnhill Damon Beasley Geoff Beaulieu Curtis Blake Lorraine Blanchard Kelsey Blenden Bradley Blevins Lee Blevins Aaron Bloedow CourtneyBlood Deborah Bond Brian Booker Tad Boone Kristin Bottom Thomas Boucher Angela Boulware Rudy Bravo Jr. Avis Bray Jeff Bray Dustin Brinkley Jeff Brinlee Terri Bristow Darren Brittain Anita Brodrick Donald Bromlow Brad Brown Dan Brown Diana Brown Harlan Brown Jason J. Brown Pamela Brown Travis Brown Aaron Buchanan Craig Buck Kingsley Burke Jackie Burks Josh Burris Tim Butkus Amber Butler Juan Calbillo Mike Campbell Christopher Cantrell Randy Cantwell Larry Carter Lupe Castro Jana Cathers Michael Chester Yong Cho Tony Churchill Cherokee Clark Justin Clark Carolyn Coble\n\nJeff James Ryan Jameson Jayson Janes Amanda Jeantet Jeff L. Jones Steven Jones John Keeling Shamara Keith Bill Kerby Jason Kneedy Brenda Knight Brett Knight Josh Komarek Matt Kopf Pam Koscinski Jennifer Landers James Lardner Cory Lewis Shea Lewis Brent Lightsey Melvin Like Harold Lopez Justin Lucas Barbara Lydick Luke Lyons Stanley Major Tara Martin Lolo Martinez Rogelio Martinez Bill McBrayer John McCartney Kelly McConnell DuaneMcDowell Mike McGinnis Donna McGriff Natalie McNeil Ryan McNeil Cliff Merritt Matthew Milledge Pat Mills Sheldon Mills Rodolfo Molina Elton Monroe Kendra Monroe Penny Montgomery Dana Moore Sim Morgan Jimmy Morris Elisa Mount Mark Murray Tim Murray Chuck Myers Todd Nance Michael New Rich Newton SheryOrahood Steven Owen Regan Paquette Lindsey Pargeter Glenn Parker Ryan Parman Walter Patten Deone Pearcy Chris Pennel Andrea Penner Raymond Perez Dwain Peterson Randall Pierce Debbie Piette Dennis Plemons Keitha Plumlee Bryan Potter Janae Power Kelly Price John Priest Flo Prieto Josh Purcell Odie Quigley Shelly Quimby Loren Raley Brad Ralstin Juan Ramirez Jeff Ramsdell Tom Reasnor Shannon Reed Doug Reuss Jack Rhine Dusty Rhoads Tiffany Rhodes Jerry Rhymes\n\nRobert Thompson Kelly Thomsen Ryan Thomsen Cathy Tompkins Tom Treece T.J. Treece Billy Trent John Uhlenhake Billy Uptigrove Anji VonTungeln Aaron Vrbenec Fred Wanker Bryce Ward Kyle Welcher Tom Wible Jackie Wicks Andy Widmer Leon Wildman Jill Willey\n\nMelissa Atkinson Jeffrey Atteberry RyanAtwell Rebecca Avant Brian Bailey Leigh Ann Bailey Marty Bain Kyle Baker Melvin Baldridge Gary Barnard Rick Barnes Mark Barringer Shawn Barron Karen Bartley Cody Barton Bob Bary Dustin Baxter Traci Bean ThomasBeaty\n\nSilas Carnes Dennis Carpenter Krista Carpenter Mendy Carpenter Shannon Carrion Cathy Carter Kyle Carter Zulema Casas Cassie Casto LuAnn Chance Darrel Chandler Donald Chaney Mike Chapman Richard Chin Nikki Church Lemon Cathy Clark Charles Clark Linda Clark James Clay\n\nOKLAHOMA CITY, OKLAHOMA Chesapeake’s IT team manages nearly 2,000 servers and 1.5 million giga- bytes of storage to support business functions for more than 10,000 employees.\n\nRenee Riebe Gary Robbins Bill Roberts Chip Roemisch Jr. Richard Rosencrans Kelly Rother Mary Ann Sanders Larry Satterfield Jr. Perry Scheffler Heather Scoggins Joel Scott John Seldenrust Juan Serna Steve Serna John Sharp Jack Shaver Paul Shelite Gene Shepard Kyle Shipley Paul Skelton Jr. Stacy Slater Julie Slaton Clay Smith Mark Smith Monte Smith Jewel Sneed Gail Spencer Robert Sperandio Adria Sprigler Terry Stafford Daryl Stallings Steve Steadham Joe Stewart Pete Stewart David Stone Travis Stout John Stoute Jr. Tom Stovall Bob Streeter Kelsey Swinford Mark Syzemore Barry Tarman Ray Taylor Jon Terrell Randall Thomas Renee Thomas\n\nDaniel Abeyta Jr. Jim Adams Julius Adams Robert Adams Tony Adams Ronald Addington Christa Adkins Jamie Adkins Jeff A. Adkins Jeff J. Adkins Wayne Adkins Nancy Aguilar Reford Alcorn Bill Allbright Cindy Allen Claude Allen Erin Allen Sandy Alvarado Fred Amburgey David Anderson Jeff D. Anderson Gary Anthony Randy Anthony Linda Arambula Dawn Arismendez Lee Arnold David Atha Matt Atkins\n\nTyler Beaver John Beckwith William Bennett Cornelius Birmingham Andrew Black Kenneth Blackburn Jackie Blanchard Ron Bliss Dot Blythe Buddy Boeckman Nick Boeckman Charlie Boggs Timothy Bohannan Raymond Bohnet K.P.Boland Corey Bolding Ronnie Bonnett Adam Bos Tim Bostick Mark Bottrell Joe Bradford Everett Bradley Kenny Bragg David Branham Debra Branham Gail Branham Del Brazeal Chris Brennan Jordan Brim Ronald Brisendine Brent Bromlow Donna Brown Richard Brown Kathy Buckley Nichole Buersmeyer Vicki Bumpas Kara Burch Rodney Burgess Steve Burnett Abiel Buruato Ronnie Bynum Gavan Byrd Skye Callantine Deric Canary Michelle Cantrell Steve Cantrell\n\nChase Williams Randy Williams Antoine Wilson Kelly Wilson Dave Winchester Jeff Wolf Dana Woo Carla Wood Harold Wooley Landon Worth Jose Yanez Mark Yeisley Becky Young Josh Young David Zerger Steve Zmek\n\n## 2005 (745)\n\n## 2004 (326)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8163076863908701, + "doc_id": "72551e37742dba6d77ed70b0f141816ce10e38bf9981d146229f669eef4ee508", + "edit_distance": 0.6041666666666666, + "f1_score": 0.9552238805970149, + "meteor": 0.9559916060283978, + "precision": 0.9142857142857143, + "pred_md": "Income Analysis (Nonconsolidated)\n\nSMBC\n\n## Fees and Commissions\n\n## Trading Income\n\nMillions of yen\n\nNote: Figures represent net gains after offsetting income against expenses.\n\n## Net Other Operating Income (Expenses)\n\n## General and Administrative Expenses\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n163", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "SMBC\n\nIncome Analysis (Nonconsolidated)\n\n## Fees and Commissions\n\n## Trading Income\n\n## Net Other Operating Income (Expenses)\n\n## General and Administrative Expenses\n\nSMFG 2011 163\n\nNote: Figures represent net gains after offsetting income against expenses." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "94a98bb9e76c7e4c07d0a0e2bdaaa4662c397dd9c66412be755789ed8534f285", + "edit_distance": 0.6041666666666666, + "f1_score": 0.9552238805970149, + "meteor": 0.9559916060283978, + "precision": 0.9142857142857143, + "pred_md": "14", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9554714867496391, + "doc_id": "c6aa27f6c0380cc7d036124a88a9dd7ab1491304fdeccaae57a41cd2bc501281", + "edit_distance": 0.4624676445211389, + "f1_score": 0.9914110429447852, + "meteor": 0.9430024419711971, + "precision": 0.9950738916256158, + "pred_md": "NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## Multiple Deliverable Arrangements\n\nWe offer some products and services as part of multiple deliverable arrangements. We record these as follows:\n\n- GLYPH<129> Divide the products and services into separate units of accounting, as long as the delivered elements have stand-alone value to customers and we can determine the fair value of any undelivered elements objectively and reliably.\n- GLYPH<129> Measure and allocate the arrangement consideration among the accounting units based on their relative fair values and recognize revenue when the relevant criteria are met for each unit.\n\n## Unearned Revenue\n\nWe record payments we receive in advance of providing goods and services as unearned revenue. Advance payments include subscriber deposits, cable installation fees and amounts subscribers pay for services and subscriptions that will be provided in future periods.\n\n## S tock-Based Compensation and Other S tock-Based Payments\n\n## Stock Option Plans\n\nCash-settled share appreciation rights (SARs) are attached to all stock options granted under our employee stock option plan. This feature allows the option holder to choose to receive a cash payment equal to the intrinsic value of the option (the amount by which the market price of the Class B Non-Voting share exceeds the exercise price of the option on the exercise date) instead of exercising the option to acquire Class B Non-Voting shares. We classify all outstanding stock options as liabilities and carry them at their fair value, determined using option valuation techniques that comply with IFRS 2, Share-based Payment. We remeasure the fair value of the liability each period and amortize it to operating costs using graded vesting, either over the four-year vesting period or to the date an employee is eligible to retire (whichever is shorter).\n\n## Restricted Share Unit (RSU) Plan\n\nWe record outstanding RSUs as liabilities, measuring the liabilities and compensation costs based on the award's fair value, and recording it as a charge to operating costs over the vesting period of the award. If the award's fair value changes after it has been granted and before the settlement date, we record the resulting changes in the liability as a charge to operating costs in the year that the change occurs. The payment amount is established as of the vesting date.\n\n## Deferred Share Unit (DSU) Plan\n\nWe record outstanding DSUs as liabilities, measuring the liabilities and compensation costs based on the award's fair value at the grant date. If the award's fair value changes after it has been granted and before the settlement date, we record the resulting changes in our liability as a charge to operating costs in the year that the change occurs. The payment amount is established as of the exercise date.\n\n## Employee Share Accumulation Plan\n\nEmployees voluntarily participate in the share accumulation plan by contributing a specified percentage of their regular earnings. We match employee contributions up to a certain amount, and record our contributions as a compensation expense in the year we make them.\n\nSee note 24 for more information about our stock-based compensation and other stock-based payments.\n\n96\n\nROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n## Income Taxes\n\nIncome tax expense includes both current and deferred taxes. We use judgment to interpret tax rules and regulations to calculate the expense recorded each period. We recognize income tax expense in net income unless it relates to an item recognized directly in equity or other comprehensive income.\n\nCurrent tax expense is tax we expect to pay or receive based on our taxable income or loss during the year. We calculate the current tax expense using tax rates enacted or substantively enacted at the reporting date, and including any adjustment to taxes payable or receivable related to previous years.\n\nDeferred tax assets and liabilities arise from temporary differences between the carrying amounts of the assets and liabilities we record in our consolidated statements of financial position and their respective tax bases. We calculate deferred tax assets and liabilities using enacted or substantively enacted tax rates that will apply in the years the temporary differences are expected to reverse.\n\nDeferred tax assets and liabilities are offset if there is a legally enforceable right to offset current tax liabilities and assets and they relate to income taxes levied by the same authority on:\n\n- GLYPH<129> the same taxable entity, or\n- GLYPH<129> different tax entities where these entities intend to settle current tax liabilities and assets on a net basis or the tax assets and liabilities will be realized simultaneously.\n\nWe recognize a deferred tax asset for unused losses, tax credits and deductible temporary differences to the extent that it is probable that future taxable income will be available to use the asset. We use judgement to evaluate whether we can recover a deferred tax asset based on our assessment on existing tax laws, estimates of future profitability and tax planning strategies.\n\nWe rely on estimates and assumptions when determining the amount of current and deferred tax, and take into account the impact of uncertain tax positions and whether additional taxes and interest may be due. If new information becomes available and changes our judgment on the adequacy of existing tax liabilities, these changes would affect the income tax expense in the period that we make this determination.\n\nSee note 9 for more information about our income taxes.\n\n## Foreign Currency Translation\n\nWe translate amounts denominated in foreign currencies into Canadian dollars as follows:\n\n- GLYPH<129> monetary assets and monetary liabilities - at the exchange rate in effect at the date of the consolidated statements of financial position\n- GLYPH<129> non-monetary assets, non-monetary liabilities and related depreciation and amortization expenses - at the historical exchange rates\n- GLYPH<129> revenue and expenses other than depreciation and amortization - at the average rate for the month when the transaction was recorded.\n\n## Financial Instruments\n\n## Recognition\n\nWe initially recognize cash and cash equivalents, accounts receivables, debt securities and accounts payable and accrued liabilities on the date they originate, and apply the criteria noted below. All other financial assets and financial liabilities are initially recognized on the trade date when we become a party to the contractual provision of the instrument.", + "recall": 0.9877750611246944, + "true_md": "NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## Multiple Deliverable Arrangements\n\n## Unearned Revenue\n\n## Income Taxes\n\nWe offer some products and services as part of multiple deliverable arrangements. We record these as follows:\n\n- GLYPH<129> Divide the products and services into separate units of accounting, as long as the delivered elements have stand-alone value to customers and we can determine the fair value of any undelivered elements objectively and reliably.\n\n- GLYPH<129> Measure and allocate the arrangement consideration among the accounting units based on their relative fair values and recognize revenue when the relevant criteria are met for each unit.\n\nWe record payments we receive in advance of providing goods and services as unearned revenue. Advance payments include subscriber deposits, cable installation fees and amounts subscribers pay for services and subscriptions that will be provided in future periods.\n\n## S tock-Based Compensation and Other S tock-Based Payments\n\n## Stock Option Plans\n\n## Restricted Share Unit (RSU) Plan\n\nCash-settled share appreciation rights (SARs) are attached to all stock options granted under our employee stock option plan. This feature allows the option holder to choose to receive a cash payment equal to the intrinsic value of the option (the amount by which the market price of the Class B Non-Voting share exceeds the exercise price of the option on the exercise date) instead of exercising the option to acquire Class B Non-Voting shares. We classify all outstanding stock options as liabilities and carry them at their fair value, determined using option valuation techniques that comply with IFRS 2, Share-based Payment. We re- measure the fair value of the liability each period and amortize it to operating costs using graded vesting, either over the four-year vesting period or to the date an employee is eligible to retire (whichever is shorter).\n\nWe record outstanding RSUs as liabilities, measuring the liabilities and compensation costs based on the award’s fair value, and recording it as a charge to operating costs over the vesting period of the award. If the award’s fair value changes after it has been granted and before the settlement date, we record the resulting changes in the liability as a charge to operating costs in the year that the change occurs. The payment amount is established as of the vesting date.\n\n## Deferred Share Unit (DSU) Plan\n\nWe record outstanding DSUs as liabilities, measuring the liabilities and compensation costs based on the award’s fair value at the grant date. If the award’s fair value changes after it has been granted and before the settlement date, we record the resulting changes in our liability as a charge to operating costs in the year that the change occurs. The payment amount is established as of the exercise date.\n\n## Employee Share Accumulation Plan\n\nEmployees voluntarily participate in the share accumulation plan by contributing a specified percentage of their regular earnings. We match employee contributions up to a certain amount, and record our contributions as a compensation expense in the year we make them.\n\nSee note 24 for more information about our stock-based compensation and other stock-based payments.\n\n96 ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\nWe initially recognize cash and cash equivalents, accounts receivables, debt securities and accounts payable and accrued liabilities on the date they originate, and apply the criteria noted below. All other financial assets and financial liabilities are initially recognized on the trade date when we become a party to the contractual provision of the instrument.\n\n## Financial Instruments\n\n## Recognition\n\n- GLYPH<129> revenue and expenses other than depreciation and amortization – at the average rate for the month when the transaction was recorded.\n\n- GLYPH<129> non-monetary assets, non-monetary liabilities and related depreciation and amortization expenses – at the historical exchange rates\n\n- GLYPH<129> monetary assets and monetary liabilities – at the exchange rate in effect at the date of the consolidated statements of financial position\n\n## Foreign Currency Translation\n\nWe translate amounts denominated in foreign currencies into Canadian dollars as follows:\n\nSee note 9 for more information about our income taxes.\n\nWe rely on estimates and assumptions when determining the amount of current and deferred tax, and take into account the impact of uncertain tax positions and whether additional taxes and interest may be due. If new information becomes available and changes our judgment on the adequacy of existing tax liabilities, these changes would affect the income tax expense in the period that we make this determination.\n\nWe recognize a deferred tax asset for unused losses, tax credits and deductible temporary differences to the extent that it is probable that future taxable income will be available to use the asset. We use judgement to evaluate whether we can recover a deferred tax asset based on our assessment on existing tax laws, estimates of future profitability and tax planning strategies.\n\n- GLYPH<129> different tax entities where these entities intend to settle current tax liabilities and assets on a net basis or the tax assets and liabilities will be realized simultaneously.\n\n- GLYPH<129> the same taxable entity, or\n\nDeferred tax assets and liabilities are offset if there is a legally enforceable right to offset current tax liabilities and assets and they relate to income taxes levied by the same authority on:\n\nDeferred tax assets and liabilities arise from temporary differences between the carrying amounts of the assets and liabilities we record in our consolidated statements of financial position and their respective tax bases. We calculate deferred tax assets and liabilities using enacted or substantively enacted tax rates that will apply in the years the temporary differences are expected to reverse.\n\nCurrent tax expense is tax we expect to pay or receive based on our taxable income or loss during the year. We calculate the current tax expense using tax rates enacted or substantively enacted at the reporting date, and including any adjustment to taxes payable or receivable related to previous years.\n\nIncome tax expense includes both current and deferred taxes. We use judgment to interpret tax rules and regulations to calculate the expense recorded each period. We recognize income tax expense in net income unless it relates to an item recognized directly in equity or other comprehensive income." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8902064137581056, + "doc_id": "69ec956d1a3446659c1a9fe9fefb14aad76d89815e195aeb41159457fa2f95ca", + "edit_distance": 0.6074498567335244, + "f1_score": 0.975206611570248, + "meteor": 0.8224796260524989, + "precision": 0.9833333333333333, + "pred_md": "MSA EMERGING MARKETS: CHINA\n\nCHINA\n\n## In China, Enhancing Worker Safety in the Growing Oil and Gas Market\n\nChina's oil, gas and petrochemical industry is booming, and MSA is right there to support the industry's workers to help ensure they work in optimum safety. In one key Core Product area - Fixed Gas and Flame Detection - MSA's sales in China grew by more than 30 percent in 2011, making China the third largest global market for these life-saving systems, right behind the U.S. and Germany.\n\nOne key customer for fixed gas and flame detection products in 2011 was the Sinopec Group, a state-owned petroleum and petrochemical enterprise. The oil and gas giant has numerous subsidiaries and a myriad of projects underway, and calls on MSA to provide safety support in operations throughout the vast country.\n\nOpened in 2009, MSA's state-of-the-art facility in Suzhou, China is the only MSA factory that currently produces products representing each of MSA's Core Product lines.\n\n10\n\nMSA 2011 ANNUAL REPORT\n\nMany of the high-quality safety products used by Sinopec and other Chinese customers are manufactured at MSA's Suzhou facility, just outside of Shanghai. This state-of-theart facility, opened in early 2009, is the only MSA factory that currently manufactures products from all five of MSA's Core Product lines, and ships many around the world.\n\nFor example, MSA's new PrimaX Gas Detection System, launched in 2011, ships to Europe and other countries globally, but is manufactured solely at the Suzhou facility. This innovative new product was co-developed by engineers at our Suzhou R&D Center working with colleagues in Berlin. Technology transferred to the plant under Project Magellan is helping ensure that all Suzhou operations are truly world class, and will continue to drive cost savings and profitability well into the future.", + "recall": 0.9672131147540983, + "true_md": "MSA EMERGING MARKETS: CHINA\n\n## In China, Enhancing Worker Safety in the Growing Oil and Gas Market\n\nMany of the high-quality safety products used by Sinopec and other Chinese customers are manufactured at MSA’s Suzhou facility, just outside of Shanghai. This state-of-the- art facility, opened in early 2009, is the only MSA factory that currently manufactures products from all five of MSA’s Core Product lines, and ships many around the world.\n\nChina’s oil, gas and petrochemical industry is booming, and MSA is right there to support the industry’s workers to help ensure they work in optimum safety. In one key Core Product area – Fixed Gas and Flame Detection – MSA’s sales in China grew by more than 30 percent in 2011, making China the third largest global market for these life-saving systems, right behind the U.S. and Germany.\n\nOne key customer for fixed gas and flame detection products in 2011 was the Sinopec Group, a state-owned petroleum and petrochemical enterprise. The oil and gas giant has numerous subsidiaries and a myriad of projects underway, and calls on MSA to provide safety support in operations throughout the vast country.\n\nFor example, MSA’s new PrimaX Gas Detection System, launched in 2011, ships to Europe and other countries globally, but is manufactured solely at the Suzhou facility. This innovative new product was co-developed by engineers at our Suzhou R&D Center working with colleagues in Berlin. Technology transferred to the plant under Project Magellan is helping ensure that all Suzhou operations are truly world class, and will continue to drive cost savings and profitability well into the future.\n\n10 MSA 2011 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n## CHINA h\n\nOpened in 2009, MSA’s state-of-the-art facility in Suzhou, China is the only MSA factory that currently produces products representing each of MSA’s Core Product lines." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7846758781265986, + "doc_id": "db838e4c8492795d7b05bcbb746fcbe240965e2fc46ca50e67b59e8b10712029", + "edit_distance": 0.22468354430379747, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.6506989686359849, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Nordstrom, Inc.\n\n## Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nDollar and share amounts in millions except per share, per option and per unit amounts\n\n## Stock-Based Compensation\n\nWe recognize stock-based compensation expense related to stock options and restricted stock at their estimated grant date fair value, recorded on a straight-line basis over the requisite service period. The total compensation expense is reduced by estimated forfeitures expected to occur over the vesting period of the award. We estimate the grant date fair value of stock options using the Binomial Lattice option valuation model. Stock-based compensation expense also includes amounts related to HauteLook and Trunk Club stock compensation based on the grant date fair value. Stock-based compensation expense related to the Trunk Club Value Creation Plan is based on the grant date fair value of the payout scenario we believe is probable using the Black-Scholes valuation model and is recognized on an accelerated basis due to performance criteria and graded vesting features of the plan. We also recognize stock-based compensation expense for performance share units and our Employee Stock Purchase Plan, which are based on their fair values as of the end of each reporting period.\n\n## New Store Opening Costs\n\nNon-capital expenditures associated with opening new stores, including marketing expenses, relocation expenses and temporary occupancy costs, are charged to expense as incurred. These costs are included in both buying and occupancy costs and selling, general and administrative expenses according to their nature as disclosed above.\n\n## Gift Cards\n\nWe recognize revenue from the sale of gift cards when the gift card is redeemed by the customer, or we recognize breakage income when the likelihood of redemption, based on historical experience, is deemed to be remote. Based on an analysis of our program since its inception in 1999, we determined that balances remaining on cards issued beyond five years are unlikely to be redeemed and therefore may be recognized as income. Breakage income was $8, $9 and $10 in 2014, 2013 and 2012. To date, our breakage rate is approximately 3% of the amount initially issued as gift cards. Gift card breakage income is included in selling, general and administrative expenses in our Consolidated Statements of Earnings. We had outstanding gift card liabilities of $286 and $255 at the end of 2014 and 2013, which are included in other current liabilities.\n\n## Income Taxes\n\nWe use the asset and liability method of accounting for income taxes. Using this method, deferred tax assets and liabilities are recorded based on differences between the financial reporting and tax basis of assets and liabilities. The deferred tax assets and liabilities are calculated using the enacted tax rates and laws that are expected to be in effect when the differences are expected to reverse. We routinely evaluate the likelihood of realizing the benefit of our deferred tax assets and may record a valuation allowance if, based on all available evidence, it is determined that some portion of the tax benefit will not be realized.\n\nWe regularly evaluate the likelihood of realizing the benefit for income tax positions we have taken in various federal, state and foreign filings by considering all relevant facts, circumstances and information available. If we believe it is more likely than not that our position will be sustained, we recognize a benefit at the largest amount that we believe is cumulatively greater than 50% likely to be realized.\n\nInterest and penalties related to income tax matters are classified as a component of income tax expense.\n\n## Comprehensive Net Earnings\n\nComprehensive net earnings consist of net earnings and other gains and losses affecting equity that are excluded from net earnings. These consist of postretirement plan adjustments, net of related income tax effects and foreign currency translation adjustments.\n\n## Cash Equivalents\n\nCash equivalents are short-term investments with a maturity of three months or less from the date of purchase and are carried at amortized cost, which approximates fair value. Our cash management system provides for the reimbursement of all major bank disbursement accounts on a daily basis. Accounts payable at the end of 2014 and 2013 included $129 and $133 of checks not yet presented for payment drawn in excess of our bank deposit balances.\n\nNordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 43", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements Dollar and share amounts in millions except per share, per option and per unit amounts\n\nStock-Based Compensation We recognize stock-based compensation expense related to stock options and restricted stock at their estimated grant date fair value, recorded on a straight-line basis over the requisite service period. The total compensation expense is reduced by estimated forfeitures expected to occur over the vesting period of the award. We estimate the grant date fair value of stock options using the Binomial Lattice option valuation model. Stock-based compensation expense also includes amounts related to HauteLook and Trunk Club stock compensation based on the grant date fair value. Stock-based compensation expense related to the Trunk Club Value Creation Plan is based on the grant date fair value of the payout scenario we believe is probable using the Black-Scholes valuation model and is recognized on an accelerated basis due to performance criteria and graded vesting features of the plan. We also recognize stock-based compensation expense for performance share units and our Employee Stock Purchase Plan, which are based on their fair values as of the end of each reporting period.\n\nNew Store Opening Costs Non-capital expenditures associated with opening new stores, including marketing expenses, relocation expenses and temporary occupancy costs, are charged to expense as incurred. These costs are included in both buying and occupancy costs and selling, general and administrative expenses according to their nature as disclosed above.\n\nGift Cards We recognize revenue from the sale of gift cards when the gift card is redeemed by the customer, or we recognize breakage income when the likelihood of redemption, based on historical experience, is deemed to be remote. Based on an analysis of our program since its inception in 1999, we determined that balances remaining on cards issued beyond five years are unlikely to be redeemed and therefore may be recognized as income. Breakage income was $8, $9 and $10 in 2014, 2013 and 2012. To date, our breakage rate is approximately 3% of the amount initially issued as gift cards. Gift card breakage income is included in selling, general and administrative expenses in our Consolidated Statements of Earnings. We had outstanding gift card liabilities of $286 and $255 at the end of 2014 and 2013, which are included in other current liabilities.\n\nIncome Taxes We use the asset and liability method of accounting for income taxes. Using this method, deferred tax assets and liabilities are recorded based on differences between the financial reporting and tax basis of assets and liabilities. The deferred tax assets and liabilities are calculated using the enacted tax rates and laws that are expected to be in effect when the differences are expected to reverse. We routinely evaluate the likelihood of realizing the benefit of our deferred tax assets and may record a valuation allowance if, based on all available evidence, it is determined that some portion of the tax benefit will not be realized.\n\nWe regularly evaluate the likelihood of realizing the benefit for income tax positions we have taken in various federal, state and foreign filings by considering all relevant facts, circumstances and information available. If we believe it is more likely than not that our position will be sustained, we recognize a benefit at the largest amount that we believe is cumulatively greater than 50% likely to be realized.\n\nInterest and penalties related to income tax matters are classified as a component of income tax expense.\n\nComprehensive Net Earnings Comprehensive net earnings consist of net earnings and other gains and losses affecting equity that are excluded from net earnings. These consist of postretirement plan adjustments, net of related income tax effects and foreign currency translation adjustments. \n\nCash Equivalents Cash equivalents are short-term investments with a maturity of three months or less from the date of purchase and are carried at amortized cost, which approximates fair value. Our cash management system provides for the reimbursement of all major bank disbursement accounts on a daily basis. Accounts payable at the end of 2014 and 2013 included $129 and $133 of checks not yet presented for payment drawn in excess of our bank deposit balances.\n\nNordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 43\n\n## Stock-Based Compensation We recognize stock-based compensation expense related to stock options and restricted stock at their estimated grant date fair value,\n\n## New Store Opening Costs Non-capital expenditures associated with opening new stores, including marketing expenses, relocation expenses and temporary occupancy\n\n## Gift Cards We recognize revenue from the sale of gift cards when the gift card is redeemed by the customer, or we recognize breakage income when\n\n## Income Taxes We use the asset and liability method of accounting for income taxes. Using this method, deferred tax assets and liabilities are recorded\n\n## Comprehensive Net Earnings Comprehensive net earnings consist of net earnings and other gains and losses affecting equity that are excluded from net earnings. These\n\n## Cash Equivalents Cash equivalents are short-term investments with a maturity of three months or less from the date of purchase and are carried at amortized\n\n## Nordstrom, Inc. Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n## Nordstrom, Inc. Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements Dollar and share amounts in millions except per share, per option and per unit amounts" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8691112452060252, + "doc_id": "2182f377e7607ed0a1386715d24de4cbc3ff1314170486a33b434b4eddbc540a", + "edit_distance": 0.12206572769953052, + "f1_score": 0.9411764705882353, + "meteor": 0.9537784942349484, + "precision": 0.916030534351145, + "pred_md": "MANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS\n\n## SUMMARY OF FINANCIAL RESULTS OF LONG-TERM DEBT GUARANTOR\n\nOur outstanding public debt, $2.5 billion bank credit and letter of credit facilities and Derivatives are unsecured obligations of RCI, as obligor, and Rogers Communications Partnership (RCP), as either co-obligor or guarantor, as applicable.\n\nThe following table sets forth the selected unaudited consolidating summary financial information for RCI for the periods identified below, presented with a separate column for: (i) RCI, (ii) RCP, (iii) our nonguarantor subsidiaries (Other Subsidiaries) on a combined basis, (iv) consolidating adjustments, and (v) the total consolidated amounts.\n\n## Years ended December 31 (unaudited)\n\n## As at period end December 31 (unaudited)\n\n1 For the purposes of this table, investments in subsidiary companies are accounted for by the equity method.\n\n2 Amounts recorded in current liabilities and non-current liabilities for RCP do not include any obligations arising as a result of being a guarantor or co-obligor, as the case may be, under any of RCI's long-term debt.\n\n86\n\nROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT", + "recall": 0.967741935483871, + "true_md": "MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS\n\n## SUMMARY OF FINANCIAL RESULTS OF LONG-TERM DEBT GUARANTOR\n\nOur outstanding public debt, $2.5 billion bank credit and letter of credit facilities and Derivatives are unsecured obligations of RCI, as obligor, and Rogers Communications Partnership (RCP), as either co-obligor or guarantor, as applicable.\n\nThe following table sets forth the selected unaudited consolidating summary financial information for RCI for the periods identified below, presented with a separate column for: (i) RCI, (ii) RCP, (iii) our non- guarantor subsidiaries (Other Subsidiaries) on a combined basis, (iv) consolidating adjustments, and (v) the total consolidated amounts.\n\n1 For the purposes of this table, investments in subsidiary companies are accounted for by the equity method.\n\n2 Amounts recorded in current liabilities and non-current liabilities for RCP do not include any obligations arising as a result of being a guarantor or co-obligor, as the case may be, under any of RCI’s long-term debt.\n\n86 ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8434441079412132, + "doc_id": "ba03f4fe725e7a0bbf3e3dfcf1fd3727687da8c307e84be7f3d99f4e7929c2b6", + "edit_distance": 0.24819494584837545, + "f1_score": 0.9706293706293706, + "meteor": 0.7911127098246982, + "precision": 0.9692737430167597, + "pred_md": "## management's Discussion and analysis\n\nDollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\nIPUC is also valued at fair value, except if such values cannot be reliably determined. In the case when a fair value cannot be reliably determined, such property is recorded at cost. The fair value of IPUC is determined using the capitalization of net income method.\n\nThe determination of the fair value of investment property requires the use of estimates such as future cash flows from assets and cap-rates applicable to those assets. In addition, development risks (such as construction and leasing risks) are also taken into consideration when determining the fair value of IPUC. These estimates are based on local market conditions existing at the reporting date. In arriving at their estimates of market values, the external valuator uses their market knowledge and professional judgment and does not rely solely on historical transaction comparables. The critical estimates and assumptions underlying the valuation of investment properties and developments are set out in note 5.\n\n## Fair Value of Financial Instruments\n\nWhere the fair value of financial assets and financial liabilities recorded in the Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements cannot be derived from active markets, they are determined using valuation techniques, including the discounted cash flow model. Inputs to these models are taken from observable markets where possible, but where this is not feasible a degree of judgment is required in establishing fair values. The judgments include considerations of inputs such as liquidity risk, credit risk and volatility. Changes in assumptions about these factors could affect the reported fair value of financial instruments.\n\n## Changes in Accounting Policies\n\nThe accounting policies applied during the year ended December 31, 2013, are consistent with those used in the audited consolidated financial statements for the year ended December 31, 2012, except for the following new and amended IFRS and International Financial Reporting Interpretations Committee ('IFRIC') interpretations which were effective for periods beginning on or after July 1, 2012, and January 1, 2013:\n\n## IAS 1 - Financial Statement Presentation ('IAS 1') - Presentation of Items of Other Comprehensive Income ('OCI')\n\nThe amendments to IAS 1 change the grouping of items presented in OCI. Items that could be reclassified (or recycled) to profit or loss at a future point in time (for example, upon derecognition or settlement) would be presented separately from items that will never be reclassified. The adoption of this standard did not have an impact on the Company's financial position or performance.\n\n## IFRS 10 - Consolidated Financial Statements ('IFRS 10')\n\nIFRS 10 replaces the portion of IAS 27 - Consolidated and Separate Financial Statements ('IAS 27') that addresses the accounting for consolidated financial statements. IFRS 10 establishes a single control model that applies to all entities including special purpose entities. The changes introduced by IFRS 10 require Management to exercise significant judgment to determine which entities are controlled, and therefore, are required to be consolidated by a parent, compared with the requirements that were in IAS 27. The adoption of this standard did not have an impact on the Company's financial position or performance.\n\n## IFRS 11 - Joint Arrangements ('IFRS 11')\n\nIFRS 11 replaces IAS 31 - Interests in Joint Ventures and SIC 13 - Jointly controlled Entities - Non monetary Contributions by Venturers. IFRS 11 removes the option to account for jointly controlled entities using proportionate consolidation. Instead, joint arrangements that meet the definition of a joint venture must be accounted for using the equity method. Otherwise joint arrangements are classified as joint operations and are accounted for by recognizing the Company's share of the arrangement's assets and liabilities. The adoption of this standard did not have an impact on the Company's accounting treatment of its joint arrangements as they meet the definition of joint ventures and were previously accounted for using the equity method.\n\n## IFRS 12 - Disclosure of Interest in Other Entities ('IFRS 12')\n\nIFRS 12 includes all of the disclosures that were previously in IAS 27 related to consolidated financial statements, as well as all of the disclosures that were previously included in IAS 31 and IAS 28. These disclosures relate to an entity's interests in subsidiaries, joint arrangements, associates and structured entities. A number of new disclosures are also required, including:\n\n- · A requirement to disclose judgments made in determining if the Company controls, has joint control, or significant influence over an entity; and\n- · A requirement to disclose judgments made in determining the type of joint arrangement in which the Company has an interest.\n\nThe Company adopted this standard and included the required disclosures related to the Company's interest in subsidiaries, joint arrangements and associates in the notes of these consolidated financial statements.\n\n## IFRS 13 - Fair Value Measurement ('IFRS 13')\n\nIFRS 13 establishes a single source of guidance under IFRS for all fair value measurements. IFRS 13 does not change when an entity is required to use fair value, but rather provides guidance on how to measure fair value under IFRS when fair value is required or permitted. The Company adopted the standard and concluded that the definition of fair value applied in IFRS 13 does not differ materially from the Company's current definition and therefore there was no impact on the Company's financial position. However, IFRS 13 does expand the disclosure requirements in respect of fair value measurement, and these additional disclosures are included in Note 5 of these consolidated financial statements.\n\n62\n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013", + "recall": 0.9719887955182073, + "true_md": "## Management’s Discussion and Analysis Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\nManagement’s Discussion and Analysis Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\nIPUC is also valued at fair value, except if such values cannot be reliably determined. In the case when a fair value cannot be reliably determined, such property is recorded at cost. The fair value of IPUC is determined using the capitalization of net income method.\n\nThe determination of the fair value of investment property requires the use of estimates such as future cash flows from assets and cap‑rates applicable to those assets. In addition, development risks (such as construction and leasing risks) are also taken into consideration when determining the fair value of IPUC. These estimates are based on local market conditions existing at the reporting date. In arriving at their estimates of market values, the external valuator uses their market knowledge and professional judgment and does not rely solely on historical transaction comparables. The critical estimates and assumptions underlying the valuation of investment properties and developments are set out in note 5.\n\nWhere the fair value of financial assets and financial liabilities recorded in the Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements cannot be derived from active markets, they are determined using valuation techniques, including the discounted cash flow model. Inputs to these models are taken from observable markets where possible, but where this is not feasible a degree of judgment is required in establishing fair values. The judgments include considerations of inputs such as liquidity risk, credit risk and volatility. Changes in assumptions about these factors could affect the reported fair value of financial instruments.\n\nThe accounting policies applied during the year ended December 31, 2013, are consistent with those used in the audited consolidated financial statements for the year ended December 31, 2012, except for the following new and amended IFRS and International Financial Reporting Interpretations Committee (“IFRIC”) interpretations which were effective for periods beginning on or after July 1, 2012, and January 1, 2013:\n\nIAS 1 ‑ Financial Statement Presentation (“IAS 1”) — Presentation of Items of Other Comprehensive Income (“OCI”)\n\nThe amendments to IAS 1 change the grouping of items presented in OCI. Items that could be reclassified (or recycled) to profit or loss at a future point in time (for example, upon derecognition or settlement) would be presented separately from items that will never be reclassified. The adoption of this standard did not have an impact on the Company’s financial position or performance.\n\nIFRS 10 replaces the portion of IAS 27 ‑ Consolidated and Separate Financial Statements (“IAS 27”) that addresses the accounting for consolidated financial statements. IFRS 10 establishes a single control model that applies to all entities including special purpose entities. The changes introduced by IFRS 10 require Management to exercise significant judgment to determine which entities are controlled, and therefore, are required to be consolidated by a parent, compared with the requirements that were in IAS 27. The adoption of this standard did not have an impact on the Company’s financial position or performance.\n\nIFRS 10 ‑ Consolidated Financial Statements (“IFRS 10”)\n\nIFRS 11 ‑ Joint Arrangements (“IFRS 11”)\n\nIFRS 11 replaces IAS 31 ‑ Interests in Joint Ventures and SIC 13 ‑ Jointly controlled Entities — Non monetary Contributions by Venturers. IFRS 11 removes the option to account for jointly controlled entities using proportionate consolidation. Instead, joint arrangements that meet the definition of a joint venture must be accounted for using the equity method. Otherwise joint arrangements are classified as joint operations and are accounted for by recognizing the Company’s share of the arrangement’s assets and liabilities. The adoption of this standard did not have an impact on the Company’s accounting treatment of its joint arrangements as they meet the definition of joint ventures and were previously accounted for using the equity method. \n\nIFRS 12 ‑ Disclosure of Interest in Other Entities (“IFRS 12”)\n\nIFRS 12 includes all of the disclosures that were previously in IAS 27 related to consolidated financial statements, as well as all of the disclosures that were previously included in IAS 31 and IAS 28. These disclosures relate to an entity’s interests in subsidiaries, joint arrangements, associates and structured entities. A number of new disclosures are also required, including:\n\nThe Company adopted this standard and included the required disclosures related to the Company’s interest in subsidiaries, joint arrangements and associates in the notes of these consolidated financial statements.\n\nIFRS 13 ‑ Fair Value Measurement (“IFRS 13”)\n\nIFRS 13 establishes a single source of guidance under IFRS for all fair value measurements. IFRS 13 does not change when an entity is required to use fair value, but rather provides guidance on how to measure fair value under IFRS when fair value is required or permitted. The Company adopted the standard and concluded that the definition of fair value applied in IFRS 13 does not differ materially from the Company’s current definition and therefore there was no impact on the Company’s financial position. However, IFRS 13 does expand the disclosure requirements in respect of fair value measurement, and these additional disclosures are included in Note 5 of these consolidated financial statements.\n\n• A requirement to disclose judgments made in determining if the Company controls, has joint control, or significant influence over an entity; and • A requirement to disclose judgments made in determining the type of joint arrangement in which the Company has an interest.\n\n• A requirement to disclose judgments made in determining if the Company controls, has joint control, or significant influence over an entity; and • A requirement to disclose judgments made in determining the type of joint arrangement in which the Company has an interest.\n\n62 Killam ProPerties inc | 2013\n\n## Changes in Accounting Policies\n\n## Fair Value of Financial Instruments" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7821142649955588, + "doc_id": "3228cecc97e6e002e483eafa8d919695deaef1293b281e8750f1a3ae80c6f5a1", + "edit_distance": 0.6822033898305084, + "f1_score": 0.9934210526315789, + "meteor": 0.6145684317302983, + "precision": 0.993421052631579, + "pred_md": "## Nordstrom, Inc.\n\n## Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nDollar and share amounts in millions except per share, per option and per unit amounts\n\n## Stock Options\n\nWe used the following assumptions to estimate the fair value for stock options at grant date:\n\nThe weighted-average fair value per option at the grant date was $16, $14 and $15 in 2014, 2013 and 2012. In 2014, 2013 and 2012, stock option awards to employees were approved by the Compensation Committee of our Board of Directors and their exercise price was set at $61, $54 and $53, the closing price of our common stock on March 3, 2014, March 4, 2013 and February 22, 2012 (the dates of grant). The awards are determined based upon a percentage of the recipients' base salaries' and the fair value of the stock options. Options vest over four years, and expire 10 years after the date of grant. In 2014, we awarded stock options to 1,799 employees, compared with 1,625 and 1,477 employees in 2013 and 2012.\n\nA summary of stock option activity (excluding Trunk Club) for 2014 is presented below:\n\nThe aggregate intrinsic value of options exercised during 2014, 2013 and 2012 was $89, $89 and $90. The total fair value of stock options vested during 2014, 2013 and 2012 was $39, $34 and $32. As of January 31, 2015, the total unrecognized stock-based compensation expense related to nonvested stock options was $49, which is expected to be recognized over a weighted-average period of 27 months.\n\n## Restricted Stock Units\n\nBeginning in the quarter ended May 3, 2014, we grant our employees a combination of restricted stock units and stock options. In 2014, restricted stock units granted to employees were approved by the Compensation Committee of our Board of Directors, and are determined based upon a percentage of the recipients' base salaries' and the fair value of the restricted stock units. Restricted stock units typically vest over four years.\n\nNordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 57", + "recall": 0.993421052631579, + "true_md": "## Nordstrom, Inc. Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n## Nordstrom, Inc. Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements Dollar and share amounts in millions except per share, per option and per unit amounts\n\n## Stock Options We used the following assumptions to estimate the fair value for stock options at grant date:\n\n## Restricted Stock Units Beginning in the quarter ended May 3, 2014, we grant our employees a combination of restricted stock units and stock options. In 2014,\n\nNordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 57\n\nRestricted Stock Units Beginning in the quarter ended May 3, 2014, we grant our employees a combination of restricted stock units and stock options. In 2014, restricted stock units granted to employees were approved by the Compensation Committee of our Board of Directors, and are determined based upon a percentage of the recipients’ base salaries’ and the fair value of the restricted stock units. Restricted stock units typically vest over four years. \n\nThe aggregate intrinsic value of options exercised during 2014, 2013 and 2012 was $89, $89 and $90. The total fair value of stock options vested during 2014, 2013 and 2012 was $39, $34 and $32. As of January 31, 2015, the total unrecognized stock-based compensation expense related to nonvested stock options was $49, which is expected to be recognized over a weighted-average period of 27 months.\n\nA summary of stock option activity (excluding Trunk Club) for 2014 is presented below:\n\nThe weighted-average fair value per option at the grant date was $16, $14 and $15 in 2014, 2013 and 2012. In 2014, 2013 and 2012, stock option awards to employees were approved by the Compensation Committee of our Board of Directors and their exercise price was set at $61, $54 and $53, the closing price of our common stock on March 3, 2014, March 4, 2013 and February 22, 2012 (the dates of grant). The awards are determined based upon a percentage of the recipients’ base salaries’ and the fair value of the stock options. Options vest over four years, and expire 10 years after the date of grant. In 2014, we awarded stock options to 1,799 employees, compared with 1,625 and 1,477 employees in 2013 and 2012.\n\nStock Options We used the following assumptions to estimate the fair value for stock options at grant date:\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements Dollar and share amounts in millions except per share, per option and per unit amounts" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9184412827510829, + "doc_id": "2f4c28265a54c626756c71d61a69b818efa16bbebd93ee76fd8fc35acbe4dd89", + "edit_distance": 0.725925925925926, + "f1_score": 0.9752475247524752, + "meteor": 0.8958010579453918, + "precision": 0.9752475247524752, + "pred_md": "## Bahrain Representative Office\n\nNo.406 & 407 (Entrance 3, 4th Floor) Manama Centre,\n\nGovernment Road, Manama,\n\nState of Bahrain\n\nTel:\n\n973-17223211\n\nFax: 973-17224424\n\n## Tehran Representative Office\n\n4th Floor, 80 Nezami Gangavi Street, Vali-e-Asr Avenue, Tehran\n\n14348, Islamic Republic of Iran\n\nTel: 98 (21) 8879-4586/4587\n\nFax: 98 (21) 8820-6523\n\n## Doha QFC Office\n\nOffice 1901, 19th Floor, Qatar\n\nFinancial Centre Tower,\n\nDiplomatic Area-West bay, Doha,\n\nQatar, P .O. Box 23769\n\nTel:\n\n974-4496-7572\n\nFax: 974-4496-7576\n\n## Cairo Representative Office\n\nFlat No.6 of the 14th Fl., 3 Ibn\n\nKasir Street, Cornish El Nile, Giza,\n\nArab Republic of Egypt\n\nTel:\n\n20 (2) 3761-7657\n\nFax: 20 (2) 3761-7658\n\n## Johannesburg Representative Office\n\nBuilding Four, First Floor,\n\nCommerce Square,\n\n39 Rivonia Road, Sandhurst,\n\nSandton 2196, South Africa\n\nTel:\n\n27 (11) 502-1780\n\nFax: 27 (11) 502-1790\n\nSMBC Principal Subsidiaries/ Affiliates SMFG Network\n\n## Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation Europe Limited Head Office\n\n99 Queen Victoria Street, London EC4V 4EH, U.K.\n\nTel:\n\n44 (20) 7786-1000\n\nFax: 44 (20) 7236-0049\n\n## Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation Europe Limited Paris Branch\n\n20, Rue de la Ville l'Evêque, 75008 Paris, France\n\nTel:\n\n33 (1) 44 (71) 40-00\n\nFax: 33 (1) 44 (71) 40-50\n\n## Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation Europe Limited Milan Branch\n\nVia della Spiga 30/ Via Senato 25, 20121 Milan, Italy\n\nTel:\n\n39 (02) 7636-1700\n\nFax: 39 (02) 7636-1701\n\n## Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation Europe Limited Moscow Representative Office\n\nPresnenskaya naberezhnaya, house 10, block C, Moscow, 123317, Russian Federation\n\nTel:\n\n7 (495) 287-8265\n\nFax: 7 (495) 287-8266\n\n## SMBC Nikko Capital Markets Limited\n\n99 Queen Victoria Street, London EC4V 4EH, U.K.\n\nTel: 44 (20) 7786-1400\n\nFax: 44 (20) 7786-1490\n\n## SMBC Derivative Products Limited\n\n99 Queen Victoria Street, London EC4V 4EH, U.K.\n\nTel: 44 (20) 7786-1400\n\nFax: 44 (20) 7786-1490\n\n## ZAO Sumitomo Mitsui Rus Bank\n\nPresnenskaya naberezhnaya,\n\nhouse 10, block C, Moscow\n\n123317, Russian Federation\n\nTel:\n\n7 (495) 287-8200\n\nFax: 7 (495) 287-8201\n\n## Sumitomo Mitsui Finance Dublin Limited\n\nLa Touche House, I.F .S.C.,\n\nCustom House Docks, Dublin 1, Ireland\n\nTel: 353 (1) 670-0066\n\nFax: 353 (1) 670-0353\n\n## JRI Europe, Limited\n\n99 Queen Victoria Street, London EC4V 4EH, U.K.\n\nTel: 44 (20) 7406-2700\n\nFax: 44 (20) 7406-2799\n\n## SMFL Aircraft Capital Corporation B.V.\n\nWorld Trade Center Amsterdam, Strawinskylaan 907, 1077 XX Amsterdam,\n\nThe Netherlands\n\nTel:\n\n31-20-575-2570\n\nFax: 31-20-575-2571\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n223", + "recall": 0.9752475247524752, + "true_md": "## Bahrain Representative Office\n\n## Tehran Representative Office\n\n## Doha QFC Office\n\n## Cairo Representative Office\n\n## Johannesburg Representative Office\n\n## Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation Europe Limited Moscow Representative Office\n\n## SMBC Nikko Capital Markets Limited\n\n## SMBC Derivative Products Limited\n\nSMFG 2011 223\n\n## SMFL Aircraft Capital Corporation B.V.\n\n## Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation Europe Limited Milan Branch\n\n## Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation Europe Limited Paris Branch\n\n## JRI Europe, Limited\n\n## Sumitomo Mitsui Finance Dublin Limited\n\n## Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation Europe Limited Head Office\n\n## ZAO Sumitomo Mitsui Rus Bank\n\nNo.406 & 407 (Entrance 3, 4th Floor) Manama Centre, Government Road, Manama, State of Bahrain Tel: 973-17223211 Fax: 973-17224424\n\n4th Floor, 80 Nezami Gangavi Street, Vali-e-Asr Avenue, Tehran 14348, Islamic Republic of Iran Tel: 98 (21) 8879-4586/4587 Fax: 98 (21) 8820-6523\n\n99 Queen Victoria Street, London EC4V 4EH, U.K. Tel: 44 (20) 7786-1000 Fax: 44 (20) 7236-0049\n\nLa Touche House, I.F.S.C., Custom House Docks, Dublin 1, Ireland Tel: 353 (1) 670-0066 Fax: 353 (1) 670-0353\n\nPresnenskaya naberezhnaya, house 10, block C, Moscow 123317, Russian Federation Tel: 7 (495) 287-8200 Fax: 7 (495) 287-8201\n\n20, Rue de la Ville l’Evêque, 75008 Paris, France Tel: 33 (1) 44 (71) 40-00 Fax: 33 (1) 44 (71) 40-50\n\n99 Queen Victoria Street, London EC4V 4EH, U.K. Tel: 44 (20) 7406-2700 Fax: 44 (20) 7406-2799\n\nVia della Spiga 30/ Via Senato 25, 20121 Milan, Italy Tel: 39 (02) 7636-1700 Fax: 39 (02) 7636-1701\n\nOffice 1901, 19th Floor, Qatar Financial Centre Tower, Diplomatic Area-West bay, Doha, Qatar, P.O. Box 23769 Tel: 974-4496-7572 Fax: 974-4496-7576\n\nFlat No.6 of the 14th Fl., 3 Ibn Kasir Street, Cornish El Nile, Giza, Arab Republic of Egypt Tel: 20 (2) 3761-7657 Fax: 20 (2) 3761-7658\n\nBuilding Four, First Floor, Commerce Square, 39 Rivonia Road, Sandhurst, Sandton 2196, South Africa Tel: 27 (11) 502-1780 Fax: 27 (11) 502-1790\n\nPresnenskaya naberezhnaya, house 10, block C, Moscow, 123317, Russian Federation Tel: 7 (495) 287-8265 Fax: 7 (495) 287-8266\n\n99 Queen Victoria Street, London EC4V 4EH, U.K. Tel: 44 (20) 7786-1400 Fax: 44 (20) 7786-1490\n\n99 Queen Victoria Street, London EC4V 4EH, U.K. Tel: 44 (20) 7786-1400 Fax: 44 (20) 7786-1490\n\nWorld Trade Center Amsterdam, Strawinskylaan 907, 1077 XX Amsterdam, The Netherlands Tel: 31-20-575-2570 Fax: 31-20-575-2571\n\n## SMBC Principal Subsidiaries/ Affiliates SMFG Network" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "b9f0dbb1ccb42953e01f849b47376558cf3fa2879dcf088730741bf47900d109", + "edit_distance": 0.725925925925926, + "f1_score": 0.9752475247524752, + "meteor": 0.8958010579453918, + "precision": 0.9752475247524752, + "pred_md": "9", + "recall": 0.9752475247524752, + "true_md": "" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9633986883969017, + "doc_id": "967c3dba9bcd925a8679d9083ea07f353115170ad530006a0c9747590e760789", + "edit_distance": 0.038461538461538464, + "f1_score": 0.9818181818181817, + "meteor": 0.9881003921227414, + "precision": 0.9926470588235294, + "pred_md": "The following table provides information for pension plans with projected benefit obligations and accumulated benefit obligations in excess of plan assets:\n\nThe net periodic costs are as follows:\n\nThe estimated net actuarial loss and prior service cost for the pension plans that will be amortized from accumulated other comprehensive income (loss) into net periodic benefit cost over the next fiscal year are $735 and $83, respectively. The estimated net actuarial gain and prior service cost for the retiree health care benefits that will be amortized from accumulated other comprehensive income (loss) into net periodic benefit cost over the next fiscal year are $(53) and $107, respectively.\n\n## Assumptions\n\nThe discount rate is used to determine the present value of future payments. In general, the Company's liability increases as the discount rate decreases and decreases as the discount rate increases. The Company computes a weighted-average discount rate taking into account anticipated plan payments and the associated interest rates from the Citigroup Pension Discount Yield Curve.\n\nThe weighted-average actuarial assumptions used to determine benefit obligations and net periodic benefit cost for the plans were as follows:\n\nDue to freezing participant benefits in the SERP plan, the rate of compensation increase is no longer applicable. The assumed health care cost trend rates used in measuring the accumulated benefit obligation for retiree health care benefits were 7.5% and 8% as of June 30, 2012 and 2011, respectively, decreasing to 5% by 2018.\n\nA one-percentage point change in the assumed health care cost trend rates would have had the following effects as of June 30, 2012 and for the year then ended:\n\nApplied Industrial Technologies, Inc. and Subsidiaries\n\n33", + "recall": 0.9712230215827338, + "true_md": "The following table provides information for pension plans with projected benefit obligations and accumulated benefit obligations in excess of plan assets:\n\nThe net periodic costs are as follows:\n\nThe estimated net actuarial loss and prior service cost for the pension plans that will be amortized from accumulated other comprehensive income (loss) into net periodic benefit cost over the next fiscal year are $735 and $83, respectively. The estimated net actuarial gain and prior service cost for the retiree health care benefits that will be amortized from accumulated other comprehensive income (loss) into net periodic benefit cost over the next fiscal year are $(53) and $107, respectively. \n\nThe discount rate is used to determine the present value of future payments. In general, the Company’s liability increases as the discount rate decreases and decreases as the discount rate increases. The Company computes a weighted-average discount rate taking into account anticipated plan payments and the associated interest rates from the Citigroup Pension Discount Yield Curve. \n\nThe weighted-average actuarial assumptions used to determine benefit obligations and net periodic benefit cost for the plans were as follows:\n\n## Assumptions\n\nDue to freezing participant benefits in the SERP plan, the rate of compensation increase is no longer applicable. The assumed health care cost trend rates used in measuring the accumulated benefit obligation for retiree health care benefits were 7.5% and 8% as of June 30, 2012 and 2011, respectively, decreasing to 5% by 2018.\n\nA one-percentage point change in the assumed health care cost trend rates would have had the following effects as of June 30, 2012 and for the year then ended: One-Percentage Point \n\n33 Applied Industrial Technologies, Inc. and Subsidiaries" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9605154382787601, + "doc_id": "5197303e6610d8050f88d6b7069c9d1890d9d77a9fefeb382d6d8f626e5b9d09", + "edit_distance": 0.025, + "f1_score": 0.9774436090225562, + "meteor": 0.9756846599648294, + "precision": 0.9774436090225563, + "pred_md": "Capital Ratio Information\n\nSMFG\n\n## (2) Measurement Using the Quantification Model\n\nWhen calculating operational risk using the quantification model, firstly, we input seven-year historical internal loss data (realized risks) and the data on the frequency of 'low-frequency and high-severity' events (potential risks) in terms of four loss amounts, which have been estimated through risk control assessments, and generate a loss distribution. Secondly, we use this distribution to estimate the maximum loss amount with a 99.0 percentile confidence interval (hereinafter referred to as 99.0% VaR). Thirdly, we multiply this maximum loss by a number, which we call 'the risk capital conversion factor,' to estimate 99.9% VaR. Finally, we calculate required capital by using a multiplier that has been determined based on the number of times in which actual losses have exceeded predicted losses through the use of back testing. In estimation of the aggregated loss distribution, we need to estimate the loss severity and frequency distribution.\n\nIn addition, we confirm whether the quantification model is functioning appropriately and conservatively in measuring operational risk by implementing various types of sensitivity analysis and verification tests.\n\nThe following chart puts the main points of this quantification method in order and explains how the results of measurement are verified.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n205", + "recall": 0.9774436090225563, + "true_md": "Capital Ratio Information\n\nSMFG\n\n## (2) Measurement Using the Quantification Model\n\nWhen calculating operational risk using the quantification model, firstly, we input seven-year historical internal loss data (realized risks) and the data on the frequency of “low-frequency and high-severity” events (potential risks) in terms of four loss amounts, which have been estimated through risk control assessments, and generate a loss distribution. Secondly, we use this distribution to estimate the maximum loss amount with a 99.0 percentile confidence interval (hereinafter referred to as 99.0% VaR). Thirdly, we multiply this maximum loss by a number, which we call “the risk capital conversion factor,” to estimate 99.9% VaR. Finally, we calculate required capital by using a multiplier that has been determined based on the number of times in which actual losses have exceeded predicted losses through the use of back testing. In estimation of the aggregated loss distribution, we need to estimate the loss severity and frequency distribution.\n\nIn addition, we confirm whether the quantification model is functioning appropriately and conservatively in measuring operational risk by implementing various types of sensitivity analysis and verification tests.\n\nThe following chart puts the main points of this quantification method in order and explains how the results of measurement are verified.\n\nSMFG 2011 205" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7143117276536526, + "doc_id": "ac684993418467553cb9b16da4d1a9f8ec1f10300eb781030d0191eb619cdba0", + "edit_distance": 0.4034090909090909, + "f1_score": 0.9186046511627907, + "meteor": 0.8058048426862857, + "precision": 0.9186046511627907, + "pred_md": "## management's Discussion and analysis\n\nD\n\nollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\n## Killam's NOI by Province\n\nCombining apartment and MHC's, the following chart highlights the percentage of Killam's forward-looking NOI by province based on ownership interest at December 31, 2013:\n\n## NOI by Province\n\n## The Multi-family Market Leader in Atlantic Canada\n\nAtlantic Canada is home to 2.3 million people, approximately 43% of whom live in the six largest cities, representing Killam's core markets in the region. Killam has a 14.2% market share of apartment units in these six largest centres. The chart below highlights the apartment NOI generated from each of the key urban markets in Atlantic Canada in 2013, and Killam's market share in each.\n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013\n\n31", + "recall": 0.9186046511627907, + "true_md": "Killam ProPerties inc | 2013 31\n\n## Management’s Discussion and Analysis Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\n## Killam’s NOI by Province\n\n## The Multi‑family Market Leader in Atlantic Canada\n\nManagement’s Discussion and Analysis Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\nCombining apartment and MHC’s, the following chart highlights the percentage of Killam’s forward‑looking NOI by province based on ownership interest at December 31, 2013:\n\nAtlantic Canada is home to 2.3 million people, approximately 43% of whom live in the six largest cities, representing Killam’s core markets in the region. Killam has a 14.2% market share of apartment units in these six largest centres. The chart below highlights the apartment NOI generated from each of the key urban markets in Atlantic Canada in 2013, and Killam’s market share in each.\n\n## NOI by Province" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8917775146471343, + "doc_id": "14afc24756d246bc62b37a60776084477b2708a326366c36a699895b6c895209", + "edit_distance": 0.19487179487179487, + "f1_score": 0.9397590361445781, + "meteor": 0.9275523040005166, + "precision": 0.970954356846473, + "pred_md": "Directors' Report\n\n## Vesting schedule for Performance Rights\n\nThe Performance Rights are subject to a hurdle that is derived for the three year vesting period using the external performance measuring metric, TSR Alpha™.\n\nTotal Shareholder Return measures the percentage return received by a shareholder from investing in a company's shares over a period of time. Broadly, it is share price growth plus dividends over the period. TSR Alpha™ takes into account market movement over the vesting period and the additional return (risk premium) that shareholders expect from the share market performance over the vesting period. In essence it measures whether shareholders have received a return over the period that is consistent with their expectations (TSR Alpha™ of zero) or more or less.\n\nThe adjacent diagram provides an overview of TSR Alpha™ performance and vesting.\n\nThe Board chose this performance measure because:\n\n- 〉 it focuses on performance from an investor's perspective;\n- 〉 it takes into account both market movements over the vesting period and the excess return that an investor expects to receive by investing in the underlying security;\n- 〉 it has a focus on consistency of over-performance and under-performance relative to market; and\n- 〉 it provides a genuine market relevant long term measurement.\n\nTSR Alpha™ can measure the return to shareholders in excess of expectation at the end of the measurement period (retrospectively) and equals the difference between 'TSR Delivered' and the 'TSR Required' by investors to preserve value of investment over a given period.\n\nIt quantifies actual wealth created as a result of earnings on market value investment at the beginning of each period and creates a clear picture of the company's consistency in performance in terms of creating shareholder wealth. Performance vesting criteria for the measurement period are based on the accompanying TSR Alpha™ vesting scale:\n\nwww.kingsgate.com.au\n\nThe Board believes this Vesting Schedule is appropriate because it does not reward under-performance but creates an ongoing incentive to perform between target and stretch measures.\n\n## Kingsgate TSR Alpha™ performance\n\nWhere the TSR Alpha™ is 0%, or close to it, the Company has delivered returns that are consistent with shareholder expectations, whereas if the TSR Alpha™ is positive then the performance is in excess of shareholder expectations. However, if the TSR Alpha™ is negative, then shareholder expectations have not been met. Approximately, 50% of companies achieve TSR Alpha™ of ≥'0' which means that it is akin to 50th percentile performance and +20% TSR Alpha™ will be exceeded by less than 25% of companies meaning that it is in excess of 75th percentile performance.\n\nThe Board will commission an independent expert to review the operation of all remuneration instruments including TSR Alpha™ prior to the conclusion of the 2014 financial year.\n\n## Previous LTI Plan\n\nThe previous LTI Plan involved awarding participants options over shares. This Plan ceased prior to 1 July 2012 and no options over ordinary shares in the Company were provided as remuneration to the KMP of the parent entity and Group during the current or previous year. There are no options currently on issue that were issued under this Plan.", + "recall": 0.9105058365758755, + "true_md": "Directors’ Report 54\n\n## Vesting schedule for Performance Rights\n\nThe Performance Rights are subject to a hurdle that is derived for the three year vesting period using the external performance measuring metric, TSR Alpha™.\n\nTotal Shareholder Return measures the percentage return received by a shareholder from investing in a company’s shares over a period of time. Broadly, it is share price growth plus dividends over the period. TSR Alpha™ takes into account market movement over the vesting period and the additional return (risk premium) that shareholders expect from the share market performance over the vesting period. In essence it measures whether share- holders have received a return over the period that is consistent with their expectations (TSR Alpha™ of zero) or more or less.\n\nThe adjacent diagram provides an overview of TSR Alpha™ performance and vesting.\n\nThe Board chose this performance measure because:\n\n- 〉 it focuses on performance from an investor’s perspective;\n\n- 〉 it takes into account both market move- ments over the vesting period and the excess return that an investor expects to receive by investing in the underlying security; \n\n- 〉 it has a focus on consistency of over-perfor- mance and under-performance relative to market; and\n\n- 〉 it provides a genuine market relevant long term measurement.\n\nTSR Alpha™ can measure the return to share- holders in excess of expectation at the end of the measurement period (retrospectively) and equals the difference between ‘TSR Delivered’ and the ‘TSR Required’ by investors to preserve value of investment over a given period. \n\nIt quantifies actual wealth created as a result of earnings on market value investment at the beginning of each period and creates a clear picture of the company’s consistency in perfor- mance in terms of creating shareholder wealth. Performance vesting criteria for the measure- ment period are based on the accompanying TSR Alpha™ vesting scale:\n\nWhere the TSR Alpha™ is 0%, or close to it, the Company has delivered returns that are consistent with shareholder expectations, whereas if the TSR Alpha™ is positive then the performance is in excess of shareholder expecta- tions. However, if the TSR Alpha™ is negative, then shareholder expectations have not been met. Approximately, 50% of companies achieve TSR Alpha™ of ≥“0” which means that it is akin to 50th percentile performance and +20% TSR Alpha™ will be exceeded by less than 25% of companies meaning that it is in excess of 75th percentile performance. \n\nThe Board will commission an independent expert to review the operation of all remunera- tion instruments including TSR Alpha™ prior to the conclusion of the 2014 financial year. \n\nThe previous LTI Plan involved awarding partici- pants options over shares. This Plan ceased prior to 1 July 2012 and no options over ordinary shares in the Company were provided as remu- neration to the KMP of the parent entity and Group during the current or previous year. There are no options currently on issue that were issued under this Plan.\n\nThe Board believes this Vesting Schedule is appropriate because it does not reward under-performance but creates an ongoing incentive to perform between target and stretch measures. \n\n## Kingsgate TSR Alpha™ performance\n\n## Previous LTI Plan\n\nwww.kingsgate.com.au" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7446438978297071, + "doc_id": "39d6814be245fbdb19bb2734f75069fa5e248a016ace7a6c7ac98691870c6e3b", + "edit_distance": 0.8233766233766234, + "f1_score": 0.9642857142857143, + "meteor": 0.7809467641149735, + "precision": 0.9792746113989638, + "pred_md": "28\n\n| BOARD OF DIRECTORS AND OFFICERS\n\n## BOARD OF DIRECTORS »\n\n## STANDING (LEFT TO RIGHT)\n\n## Merrill A. ete' Miller, Jr. 'P (1,2)\n\nChairman, President and CEO National Oilwell Varco, Inc. Houston, Texas\n\n## SEATED (LEFT TO RIGHT)\n\n## Don Nickles (4)\n\nFormer U.S. Senator, Oklahoma Founder and President The Nickles Group, LLC Washington, D.C.\n\n## Louis A. Simpson\n\nChairman SQ Advisors, LLC Naples, Florida\n\nNominated for election in June 2011\n\n## V. Burns Hargis (1)\n\nPresident Oklahoma State University Stillwater, Oklahoma\n\n## Charles T. Maxwell (3,4)\n\nSenior Energy Analyst Weeden & Co. Greenwich, Connecticut\n\n## Aubrey K. McClendon\n\nChairman of the Board and Chief Executive Officer Chesapeake Energy Corporation Oklahoma City, Oklahoma\n\n## Frederick B. Whittemore (3,4)\n\nAdvisory Director Morgan Stanley New York, New York\n\nRetiring from the Board in June 2011\n\n## Governance\n\nOur Board of Directors is responsible to our shareholders for the oversight of the company and for the imple mentation and operation of an effective and sound corporate governance environment. We believe that effec tive corporate governance contributes to long-term corporate performance. An effective governance structure should reinforce a culture of corporate integrity, foster the company's pursuit of long-term strategic goals of growth and profit and ensure quality and continuity of corporate leadership. Our directors will continue to be diligent in their efforts to preserve the public trust while fostering the long-term success of the company.\n\n## Richard K Davidson (1 )\n\nRetired Chairman and CEO Union Pacific Corporation Bonita Springs, Florida\n\n## Frank Keating (3)\n\nFormer Governor, Oklahoma President and CEO American Bankers Association Washington, D.C.\n\n## Kathleen M. Eisbrenner (3,4)\n\nFounder and CEO Next Decade The Woodlands, Texas\n\n- (1) Audit Committee\n- (2) Lead Independent Director\n- (3) Compensation Committee\n- (4) Nominating and Corporate Governance Committee", + "recall": 0.949748743718593, + "true_md": "28 | BOARD OF DIRECTORS AND OFFICERS\n\n## BOARD OF DIRECTORS »\n\n## STANDING (LEFT TO RIGHT)\n\n## SEATED (LEFT TO RIGHT)\n\nOur Board of Directors is responsible to our shareholders for the oversight of the company and for the imple - mentation and operation of an effective and sound corporate governance environment. We believe that effec - tive corporate governance contributes to long-term corporate performance. An effective governance structure should reinforce a culture of corporate integrity, foster the company’s pursuit of long-term strategic goals of growth and profit and ensure quality and continuity of corporate leadership. Our directors will continue to be diligent in their efforts to preserve the public trust while fostering the long-term success of the company.\n\n## Governance\n\nNominated for election in June 2011\n\nKathleen M. Eisbrenner $_{(3,4)}$ Founder and CEO Next Decade The Woodlands, Texas\n\nRichard K Davidson $_{(1)}$ Retired Chairman and CEO Union Pacific Corporation Bonita Springs, Florida\n\nAubrey K. McClendon Chairman of the Board and Chief Executive Officer Chesapeake Energy Corporation Oklahoma City, Oklahoma\n\nV. Burns Hargis $_{(1)}$ President Oklahoma State University Stillwater, Oklahoma\n\nMerrill A. “Pete” Miller, Jr. $_{(1,2)}$ Chairman, President and CEO National Oilwell Varco, Inc. Houston, Texas\n\nDon Nickles $_{(4)}$ Former U.S. Senator, Oklahoma Founder and President The Nickles Group, LLC Washington, D.C.\n\nCharles T. Maxwell $_{(3,4)}$ Senior Energy Analyst Weeden & Co. Greenwich, Connecticut\n\nFrederick B. Whittemore $_{(3,4)}$ Advisory Director Morgan Stanley New York, New York\n\nRetiring from the Board in June 2011\n\nFrank Keating $_{(3)}$ Former Governor, Oklahoma President and CEO American Bankers Association Washington, D.C.\n\nLouis A. Simpson Chairman SQ Advisors, LLC Naples, Florida\n\n(1) Audit Committee\n\n(2) Lead Independent Director\n\n(3) Compensation Committee\n\n(4) Nominating and Corporate Governance Committee" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6491987265063699, + "doc_id": "6b2033c4ecba60e557775f7c153b41df164a395bd36eff32baaebda29f93e859", + "edit_distance": 0.8958333333333334, + "f1_score": 0.7822222222222223, + "meteor": 0.6396647174928193, + "precision": 0.8, + "pred_md": "## Nonrecurring Losses (Credit Cost, etc.)\n\nNonrecurring losses amounted to ·249.1 billion, an improvement of ·66.6 billion from the previous fiscal year. This was due mainly to a ·156.1 billion drop in credit cost to ·107.6 billion, as a result of the tailored efforts to assist certain debtors to improve their businesses and financial conditions, which outweighed the impact of a ·91.1 billion worsening in net losses on stocks to ·87.2 billion, due to increased write-offs.\n\nNet total credit cost - the sum of credit cost of ·107.6 billion recorded under 'Nonrecurring losses,' provision for general reserve for possible loan losses, and gains on recoveries of written-off claims - amounted to ·94.2 billion, a year-on-year decrease of ·160.3 billion.\n\n## Ordinary Profit\n\nAs a result of the foregoing, ordinary profit totaled ·595.7 billion, ·132.9 billion higher than in the previous fiscal year.\n\n## Extraordinary Gains (Losses)\n\nExtraordinary losses amounted to ·6.8 billion, a decrease of ·1.1 billion from the previous year.\n\n## Net Income\n\nCurrent income taxes amounted to ·42.3 billion, and deferred income taxes were ·125.2 billion. As a result, net income increased by ·103.1 billion year on year to ·421.1 billion.\n\n## Ordinary Profit and Net Income\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n27", + "recall": 0.7652173913043478, + "true_md": "## Ordinary Profit\n\n## Extraordinary Gains (Losses)\n\n## Net Income\n\n## Nonrecurring Losses (Credit Cost, etc.)\n\n## Ordinary Profit and Net Income\n\nAs a result of the foregoing, ordinary profit totaled ¥595.7 bil- lion, ¥132.9 billion higher than in the previous fiscal year.\n\nExtraordinary losses amounted to ¥6.8 billion, a decrease of ¥1.1 billion from the previous year.\n\nCurrent income taxes amounted to ¥42.3 billion, and deferred income taxes were ¥125.2 billion. As a result, net income increased by ¥103.1 billion year on year to ¥421.1 billion.\n\nNonrecurring losses amounted to ¥249.1 billion, an improve- ment of ¥66.6 billion from the previous fiscal year. This was due mainly to a ¥156.1 billion drop in credit cost to ¥107.6 bil- lion, as a result of the tailored efforts to assist certain debtors to improve their businesses and financial conditions, which out- weighed the impact of a ¥91.1 billion worsening in net losses on stocks to ¥87.2 billion, due to increased write-offs.\n\nNet total credit cost — the sum of credit cost of ¥107.6 bil- lion recorded under “Nonrecurring losses,” provision for gen- eral reserve for possible loan losses, and gains on recoveries of written-off claims — amounted to ¥94.2 billion, a year-on-year decrease of ¥160.3 billion.\n\nSMFG 2011 27" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.914252398406581, + "doc_id": "7ac396b807b677bdca5b5eb3ecaf3cc9ec45da10060f0ae89043a90e5d16d2d4", + "edit_distance": 0.6146788990825688, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9873485458626795, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## PART IV\n\n## Item 15. Exhibits and Financial Statement Schedules.\n\nThe following information required under this item is filed as part of this report:\n\n## (a)1. FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## (a)3. EXHIBITS\n\nExhibits are incorporated herein by reference or are filed with this report as set forth in the Index to Exhibits on pages 72 through 78 hereof.\n\nAll other schedules and exhibits are omitted because they are not applicable, not required or because the information required has been given as part of this report.\n\nNordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 69", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## PART IV\n\n## Item 15. Exhibits and Financial Statement Schedules.\n\n## (a)1. FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\nThe following information required under this item is filed as part of this report:\n\nAll other schedules and exhibits are omitted because they are not applicable, not required or because the information required has been given as part of this report.\n\nExhibits are incorporated herein by reference or are filed with this report as set forth in the Index to Exhibits on pages 72 through 78 hereof.\n\n## (a)3. EXHIBITS\n\nNordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 69" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.830025330968121, + "doc_id": "6a7c4f207a8463bc6d4421833c8b93618ff6fa23b289a2e3571f852028492502", + "edit_distance": 0.18055555555555555, + "f1_score": 0.8865979381443299, + "meteor": 0.9500180644779272, + "precision": 0.8269230769230769, + "pred_md": "THAI\n\nL\n\nA\n\nN\n\nD\n\nwww.kingsgate.com.au\n\nKingsgate is a highly successful gold mining, development and exploration company with two operating gold mines and two advanced development projects. Shareholders can look forward to the benefits of this strong operating and development platform, where Kingsgate aims to build value though operating, earnings and dividend growth for the benefit of all stakeholders.\n\nA\n\nU\n\nST\n\nR\n\nA\n\nL\n\nI\n\nA", + "recall": 0.9555555555555556, + "true_md": "AUSTRALIA\n\nTHAILAND\n\nwww.kingsgate.com.au\n\nKingsgate is a highly successful gold mining, development and exploration company with two operating gold mines and two advanced development projects. Shareholders can look forward to the benefits of this strong operating and development platform, where Kingsgate aims to build value though operating, earnings and dividend growth for the benefit of all stakeholders." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8916353419238056, + "doc_id": "82058586486da127cbb7414546fd4e342c93bb3902dbb14c25325f289885fcd9", + "edit_distance": 0.8166058394160584, + "f1_score": 0.9926793557833089, + "meteor": 0.6031151601070118, + "precision": 0.9941348973607038, + "pred_md": "## Revenue Recognition\n\nWe recognize revenue from sales at our retail stores at the point of sale, net of estimated sales returns and excluding sales taxes. Revenue from sales to customers shipped directly from our stores, website and catalog, which includes shipping revenue when applicable, is recognized upon estimated receipt by the customer. We estimate customer merchandise returns based on historical return patterns and reduce sales and cost of sales accordingly.\n\nAlthough we believe we have sufficient current and historical knowledge to record reasonable estimates of sales returns, there is a possibility that actual returns could differ from recorded amounts. In the past three years, there were no significant changes in customer behavior and we have made no material changes to our estimates included in the calculations of our sales return reserve. A 10% change in the sales return reserve would have had a $10 impact on our net earnings for the year ended January 31, 2015.\n\n## Inventory\n\nOur merchandise inventories are generally stated at the lower of cost or market value using the retail inventory method. Under the retail method, the valuation of inventories and the resulting gross margins are determined by applying a calculated cost-to-retail ratio to the retail value of ending inventory. The value of our inventory on the balance sheet is then reduced by a charge to cost of sales for retail inventory markdowns taken on the selling floor. To determine if the retail value of our inventory should be marked down, we consider current and anticipated demand, customer preferences, age of the merchandise and fashion trends. Inherent in the retail inventory method are certain management judgments that may affect the ending inventory valuation as well as gross margin.\n\nWe reserve for obsolescence based on historical trends and specific identification. Our obsolescence reserve contains uncertainties as the calculations require management to make assumptions and to apply judgment regarding a number of factors, including market conditions, the selling environment, historical results and current inventory trends.\n\nWe do not believe that the assumptions used in these estimates will change significantly based on prior experience. In the past three years, we have made no material changes to our estimates included in the calculations of the obsolescence reserve. A 10% change in the obsolescence reserve would have had no material impact on our net earnings for the year ended January 31, 2015.\n\n## Goodwill\n\nWe review our goodwill annually for impairment or when circumstances indicate its carrying value may not be recoverable. We perform this evaluation at the reporting unit level, comprised of the principal business units within our Retail segment, through the application of a twostep fair value test. The first step compares the carrying value of the reporting unit to its estimated fair value, which is based on the expected present value of future cash flows (income approach), comparable public companies and acquisitions (market approach) or a combination of both. If fair value is lower than the carrying value, then a second step is performed to quantify the amount of the impairment.\n\nAs part of our impairment testing, we utilize certain assumptions and apply judgment regarding a number of factors. Significant estimates in the market approach include identifying similar companies and acquisitions with comparable business factors such as size, growth, profitability, risk and return of investment and assessing comparable earnings or revenue multiples in estimating the fair value of the reporting unit. Assumptions in the income approach include future cash flows for the business, future growth rates and discount rates. Estimates of cash flows may differ from actual cash flows due to, among other things, economic conditions, changes to the business model or changes in operating performance. For Nordstrom.com, Jeffrey and HauteLook, the fair values substantially exceeded carrying values and therefore we had no goodwill impairment in 2014, 2013 or 2012. The fair value of Trunk Club's reporting unit will be tested in 2015. A 10% change in the fair value of any of our reporting units would not have had an impact on our net earnings for the fiscal year ended January 31, 2015.\n\n## Stock-Based Compensation Expense\n\nWe recognize stock-based compensation expense related to stock options and restricted stock at their estimated grant date fair value, recorded on a straight-line basis over the requisite service period. The total compensation expense is reduced by estimated forfeitures expected to occur over the vesting period of the award. We estimate the grant date fair value of stock options using the Binomial Lattice option valuation model. Stock-based compensation expense also includes amounts related to HauteLook and Trunk Club stock compensation based on the grant date fair value. Stock-based compensation expense related to the Trunk Club Value Creation Plan is based on the grant date fair value of the payout scenario we believe is probable using the Black-Scholes valuation model and is recognized on an accelerated basis due to performance criteria and graded vesting features of the plan. We also recognize stock-based compensation expense for performance share units and our Employee Stock Purchase Plan, which are based on their fair values as of the end of each reporting period.\n\nCalculating the grant date fair value of stock-based awards is based on certain assumptions and requires judgment, including estimating stock price volatility, forfeiture rates, expected life and performance criteria. A 10% change in stock-based compensation expense would have a $4 impact on our net earnings for the year ended January 31, 2015.\n\nNordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 33", + "recall": 0.9912280701754386, + "true_md": "Nordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 33\n\nCalculating the grant date fair value of stock-based awards is based on certain assumptions and requires judgment, including estimating stock price volatility, forfeiture rates, expected life and performance criteria. A 10% change in stock-based compensation expense would have a $4 impact on our net earnings for the year ended January 31, 2015.\n\nStock-Based Compensation Expense We recognize stock-based compensation expense related to stock options and restricted stock at their estimated grant date fair value, recorded on a straight-line basis over the requisite service period. The total compensation expense is reduced by estimated forfeitures expected to occur over the vesting period of the award. We estimate the grant date fair value of stock options using the Binomial Lattice option valuation model. Stock-based compensation expense also includes amounts related to HauteLook and Trunk Club stock compensation based on the grant date fair value. Stock-based compensation expense related to the Trunk Club Value Creation Plan is based on the grant date fair value of the payout scenario we believe is probable using the Black-Scholes valuation model and is recognized on an accelerated basis due to performance criteria and graded vesting features of the plan. We also recognize stock-based compensation expense for performance share units and our Employee Stock Purchase Plan, which are based on their fair values as of the end of each reporting period.\n\n## Stock-Based Compensation Expense We recognize stock-based compensation expense related to stock options and restricted stock at their estimated grant date fair value,\n\nAs part of our impairment testing, we utilize certain assumptions and apply judgment regarding a number of factors. Significant estimates in the market approach include identifying similar companies and acquisitions with comparable business factors such as size, growth, profitability, risk and return of investment and assessing comparable earnings or revenue multiples in estimating the fair value of the reporting unit. Assumptions in the income approach include future cash flows for the business, future growth rates and discount rates. Estimates of cash flows may differ from actual cash flows due to, among other things, economic conditions, changes to the business model or changes in operating performance. For Nordstrom.com, Jeffrey and HauteLook, the fair values substantially exceeded carrying values and therefore we had no goodwill impairment in 2014, 2013 or 2012. The fair value of Trunk Club’s reporting unit will be tested in 2015. A 10% change in the fair value of any of our reporting units would not have had an impact on our net earnings for the fiscal year ended January 31, 2015. \n\nGoodwill We review our goodwill annually for impairment or when circumstances indicate its carrying value may not be recoverable. We perform this evaluation at the reporting unit level, comprised of the principal business units within our Retail segment, through the application of a two- step fair value test. The first step compares the carrying value of the reporting unit to its estimated fair value, which is based on the expected present value of future cash flows (income approach), comparable public companies and acquisitions (market approach) or a combination of both. If fair value is lower than the carrying value, then a second step is performed to quantify the amount of the impairment. \n\n## Goodwill We review our goodwill annually for impairment or when circumstances indicate its carrying value may not be recoverable. We perform this\n\nWe do not believe that the assumptions used in these estimates will change significantly based on prior experience. In the past three years, we have made no material changes to our estimates included in the calculations of the obsolescence reserve. A 10% change in the obsolescence reserve would have had no material impact on our net earnings for the year ended January 31, 2015.\n\nWe reserve for obsolescence based on historical trends and specific identification. Our obsolescence reserve contains uncertainties as the calculations require management to make assumptions and to apply judgment regarding a number of factors, including market conditions, the selling environment, historical results and current inventory trends.\n\nInventory Our merchandise inventories are generally stated at the lower of cost or market value using the retail inventory method. Under the retail method, the valuation of inventories and the resulting gross margins are determined by applying a calculated cost-to-retail ratio to the retail value of ending inventory. The value of our inventory on the balance sheet is then reduced by a charge to cost of sales for retail inventory markdowns taken on the selling floor. To determine if the retail value of our inventory should be marked down, we consider current and anticipated demand, customer preferences, age of the merchandise and fashion trends. Inherent in the retail inventory method are certain management judgments that may affect the ending inventory valuation as well as gross margin.\n\n## Inventory Our merchandise inventories are generally stated at the lower of cost or market value using the retail inventory method. Under the retail\n\nAlthough we believe we have sufficient current and historical knowledge to record reasonable estimates of sales returns, there is a possibility that actual returns could differ from recorded amounts. In the past three years, there were no significant changes in customer behavior and we have made no material changes to our estimates included in the calculations of our sales return reserve. A 10% change in the sales return reserve would have had a $10 impact on our net earnings for the year ended January 31, 2015.\n\nRevenue Recognition We recognize revenue from sales at our retail stores at the point of sale, net of estimated sales returns and excluding sales taxes. Revenue from sales to customers shipped directly from our stores, website and catalog, which includes shipping revenue when applicable, is recognized upon estimated receipt by the customer. We estimate customer merchandise returns based on historical return patterns and reduce sales and cost of sales accordingly.\n\n## Revenue Recognition We recognize revenue from sales at our retail stores at the point of sale, net of estimated sales returns and excluding sales taxes. Revenue" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8938622598813513, + "doc_id": "e6a5451f83c0413bb8c34daf259a6414c35bb9d3c33ac61f7eb5f66a014d8932", + "edit_distance": 0.55893536121673, + "f1_score": 0.9551020408163264, + "meteor": 0.8824113955803091, + "precision": 0.975, + "pred_md": "81\n\nNotes to the Financial Statements\n\nAkara Resources Public Company Limited ('Akara'), a controlled entity, has received approval from The Royal Thai Board of Investment (BOI) of the Office of the Prime Minister for promotion of the Chatree Mine.\n\nSubject to meeting the BOI conditions and based on an annual production limit of 178,416 ounces of gold and 583,733 ounces of silver, Akara's Chatree Mine is entitled to:\n\n- i) an eight year full corporate tax holiday commencing at first gold pour on metal sales. The full tax holiday expired in November 2009;\n- ii) further five years half tax holiday a following i) above; and\n- iii) other benefits.\n\nThe start of the promotion period was 27 November 2001.\n\nAkara also received on 18 June 2010 a BOI promotion for the Chatree North gold processing plant. Based on annual production limit from the new processing plant of 185,200 ounces of gold and 1,080,400 ounces of silver, Akara is entitled to:\n\n- i) an eight year tax holiday on income derived from the new processing plant with tax savings limited to the capital cost of the new treatment plant;\n- ii) 25% investment allowance on the capital cost of certain assets of the new processing plant; and\n- iii) other benefits.\n\nThe start of the promotion period was\n\n- 1 November 2012.\n\nNotes to the Financial Statements\n\ncontinued\n\nu", + "recall": 0.936, + "true_md": "Notes to the Financial Statements 81\n\nNotes t o the Financial Statements\n\ncontinued u\n\nAkara Resources Public Company Limited (“Akara”), a controlled entity, has received approval from The Royal Thai Board of Investment (BOI) of the Office of the Prime Minister for promotion of the Chatree Mine.\n\nSubject to meeting the BOI conditions and based on an annual production limit of 178,416 ounces of gold and 583,733 ounces of silver, Akara‘s Chatree Mine is entitled to:\n\nAkara also received on 18 June 2010 a BOI promotion for the Chatree North gold processing plant. Based on annual produc- tion limit from the new processing plant of 185,200 ounces of gold and 1,080,400 ounces of silver, Akara is entitled to:\n\nThe start of the promotion period was 27 November 2001.\n\nThe start of the promotion period was 1 November 2012.\n\n- i) an eight year tax holiday on income derived from the new processing plant with tax savings limited to the capital cost of the new treatment plant;\n\n- ii) 25% investment allowance on the capital cost of certain assets of the new processing plant; and\n\n- iii) other benefits.\n\n- i) an eight year full corporate tax holiday commencing at first gold pour on metal sales. The full tax holiday expired in November 2009;\n\n- ii) a further five years half tax holiday following i) above; and\n\n- iii) other benefits." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.019243080939125228, + "doc_id": "cc74c12efa67613e2697baa70aff4267ebf9aa2fc6a8105624d38c70211a998a", + "edit_distance": 0.9225806451612903, + "f1_score": 0.3357664233576642, + "meteor": 0.35906826293872696, + "precision": 0.20175438596491227, + "pred_md": "## Financial Section and Corporate Data\n\n## Financial Data\n\n## Corporate Data\n\n| SMFG | |\n|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|----|\n| Consolidated Balance Sheets ..................................... | 70 |\n| Consolidated Statements of Income and Consolidated Statements of Comprehensive Income ... | 72 |\n| Consolidated Statements of Changes in Net Assets .............................................. | 73 |\n| Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows .................... | 75 |\n| Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements .............. | 77 |\n| Independent Auditors' Report ..................................... 139 | |\n| SMBC | |\n| Supplemental Information ........................................... 140 | |\n| SMFG | |\n| Income Analysis (Consolidated) .................................. 146 | |\n| Assets and Liabilities (Consolidated)........................... 149 | |\n| Capital (Nonconsolidated) ........................................... 152 | |\n| SMBC | |\n| Income Analysis (Consolidated) .................................. 155 | |\n| Assets and Liabilities (Consolidated)........................... 158 | |\n| Income Analysis (Nonconsolidated) ............................ 160 | |\n| Deposits (Nonconsolidated) ........................................ 164 | |\n| Loans (Nonconsolidated)............................................. 166 | |\n| Securities (Nonconsolidated) ...................................... 171 | |\n| Ratios (Nonconsolidated) ............................................ 173 | |\n| Capital (Nonconsolidated) ........................................... 175 | |\n| Others (Nonconsolidated)............................................ 176 | |\n| Trust Assets and Liabilities (Nonconsolidated) ............ 178 | |\n| Capital Ratio Information | |\n| SMFG | |\n| Capital Ratio Information (Consolidated) .................... 179 | |\n| SMBC | |\n| Capital Ratio Information ............................................. 209 | |\n\n| Sumitomo Mitsui Financial Group, Inc. |\n|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|\n| Board of Directors, Corporate Auditors, and Executive Officers .......................................... 211 |\n| SMFG Organization ................................................. 211 |\n| Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation |\n| Board of Directors, Corporate Auditors, and Executive Officers .......................................... 212 |\n| SMBC Organization ................................................ 214 |\n| Principal Subsidiaries and Affiliates |\n| Principal Domestic Subsidiaries ............................. 216 |\n| Principal Overseas Subsidiaries ............................. 217 |\n| Principal Affiliates .................................................... 218 |\n| International Directory ................................................. 219 |\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n69", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## Financial Section and Corporate Data\n\n## Financial Data\n\n## SMFG\n\n## Corporate Data\n\n## SMBC\n\n## SMFG\n\n## SMBC\n\n## Capital Ratio Information\n\n## SMFG\n\n## SMBC\n\nSMFG 2011 69\n\nSumitomo Mitsui Financial Group, Inc.\n\nSumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation\n\nPrincipal Subsidiaries and Affiliates" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9280593886492331, + "doc_id": "0afa9d89ec484eb7b5816e5751b0002d0f27666c39ab5a9e115dee0a3244acb4", + "edit_distance": 0.441025641025641, + "f1_score": 0.9621993127147765, + "meteor": 0.9200859423165234, + "precision": 0.9722222222222222, + "pred_md": "## Message from Top Management\n\nWe extend our deepest sympathies and heartfelt condolences to all those who have suffered and the families and friends of those who tragically lost their lives in the Great East Japan Earthquake which struck Northeastern Japan in March 2011. We pray for the earliest recovery for the affected people and areas.\n\nWe would like to thank all of our stakeholders for your continued support and patronage.\n\nWe, Koichi Miyata and Takeshi Kunibe, succeeded the management in April 2011, and assumed the positions of President of Sumitomo Mitsui Financial Group and President and CEO of Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation, respectively. In this annual report, we would like to present our initiatives implemented in fiscal 2010 and our management policies going forward.\n\n## Principal Initiatives in Fiscal 2010\n\nIn fiscal 2010, we implemented our initiatives to secure a resilient capital base and enhance our business portfolio in order to achieve sustainable growth in accordance with the following two management policies: 1) 'forward looking' - transforming our business model to grow steadily under a new regulatory and competitive environment, and 2) emphasizing return on risks and costs in order to improve our asset quality and thoroughly control expenses and credit costs.\n\nSMFG's consolidated ordinary profit increased by ¥266.7 billion to ¥825.4 billion and net income increased by ¥204.3 billion to ¥475.9 billion. This significant increase was due mainly to:\n\n- - an increase in SMBC's banking profit due to an increase in gains on sale of bonds by successfully managing interest-rate fluctuation,\n- - a decrease in total credit cost as a result of tailored efforts to assist clients to improve their businesses and financial condition, and,\n- - an earnings contribution of SMBC Nikko Securities (formerly Nikko Cordial Securities), in addition to the improved\n\n2\n\nSMFG 2011\n\nearnings of consolidated subsidiaries such as Kansai Urban Banking Corporation and Cedyna.\n\nAlso, in order to achieve medium- to long-term growth, we made steady progress in strengthening our focused business areas by enhancing collaboration between SMBC's domestic and overseas branches, expanding our overseas channel network especially in Asia, strengthening alliances with major local banks, and improving capabilities of SMBC Nikko Securities. To accelerate our business development as a global player, we listed on the New York Stock Exchange in November 2010.\n\n## Management Policies Going Forward\n\n## -Overview of the Medium-term Management Plan-\n\nIn May 2011, we launched our medium-term management plan starting from fiscal 2011 and ending in 2013, for the first three years of the second decade of our business operations; our group was originally formed at the establishment of SMBC in 2001.\n\nI sincerely believe that my mission as President of SMFG is to orchestrate the group in its next stage of development by further strengthening cooperation among our group companies and improving our ability to act with speed, leveraging our existing business platform and corporate infrastructure we have created as a leading financial services group.\n\nWe, the SMFG group, strive to enhance our capabilities to comprehensively provide our clients with diverse and sophisticated financial products and services, including broker/dealer services in addition to our core commercial banking services.\n\n## Koichi Miyata\n\nPresident\n\nSumitomo Mitsui Financial Group, Inc.", + "recall": 0.9523809523809523, + "true_md": "Message from Top Management\n\nWe extend our deepest sympathies and heartfelt condolences to all those who have suffered and the families and friends of those who tragically lost their lives in the Great East Japan Earthquake which struck Northeastern Japan in March 2011. We pray for the earliest recovery for the affected people and areas.\n\nWe would like to thank all of our stakeholders for your continued support and patronage.\n\nWe, Koichi Miyata and Takeshi Kunibe, succeeded the management in April 2011, and assumed the positions of President of Sumitomo Mitsui Financial Group and President and CEO of Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation, respectively. In this annual report, we would like to present our initiatives implemented in fiscal 2010 and our management policies going forward.\n\nIn fiscal 2010, we implemented our initiatives to secure a resilient capital base and enhance our business portfolio in order to achieve sustainable growth in accordance with the following two manage- ment policies: 1) “forward looking” — transforming our business model to grow steadily under a new regulatory and competitive environment, and 2) emphasizing return on risks and costs in order to improve our asset quality and thoroughly control expenses and credit costs.\n\nearnings of consolidated subsidiaries such as Kansai Urban Banking Corporation and Cedyna.\n\nAlso, in order to achieve medium- to long-term growth, we made steady progress in strengthening our focused business areas by enhancing collaboration between SMBC’s domestic and overseas branches, expanding our overseas channel network especially in Asia, strengthening alliances with major local banks, and improving capabilities of SMBC Nikko Securities. To accelerate our business development as a global player, we listed on the New York Stock Exchange in November 2010.\n\nSMFG’s consolidated ordinary profit increased by ¥266.7 billion to ¥825.4 billion and net income increased by ¥204.3 billion to ¥475.9 billion. This significant increase was due mainly to:\n\nIn May 2011, we launched our medium-term management plan starting from fiscal 2011 and ending in 2013, for the first three years of the second decade of our business operations; our group was originally formed at the establishment of SMBC in 2001.\n\nI sincerely believe that my mission as President of SMFG is to orchestrate the group in its next stage of development by further strengthening cooperation among our group companies and improving our ability to act with speed, leverag- ing our existing business platform and corporate infrastructure we have created as a leading financial services group. \n\nWe, the SMFG group, strive to enhance our capabilities to comprehensively provide our clients with diverse and sophisticated financial products and services, including broker/dealer services in addition to our core commercial banking services. \n\nKoichi Miyata President Sumitomo Mitsui Financial Group, Inc.\n\n- - an increase in SMBC’s banking profit due to an increase in gains on sale of bonds by successfully managing interest-rate fluctuation, \n\n- - a decrease in total credit cost as a result of tailored efforts to assist clients to improve their businesses and financial condition, and, \n\n- - an earnings contribution of SMBC Nikko Securities (for- merly Nikko Cordial Securities), in addition to the improved \n\n## Management Policies Going Forward —Overview of the Medium-term Management Plan—\n\n## Principal Initiatives in Fiscal 2010\n\nSMFG 2011 2" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7222226488723062, + "doc_id": "24873adc5dad5544621cbb701c18bb730d2feb78dd66b2f0d36cd185cef9f268", + "edit_distance": 0.7697841726618705, + "f1_score": 0.9312977099236641, + "meteor": 0.8227674597763697, + "precision": 0.8970588235294118, + "pred_md": "SMFG\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n## 33. Stock Options\n\n- 1. Share-based compensation expenses which were accounted for as general and administrative expenses in the fiscal years ended March 31, 2011 and 2010 are as follows:\n\n- 2. Outline of stock options and changes is as follows:\n- (1) SMFG\n\n(a) Outline of stock options\n\n- * 'Number of stock options' is reported in consideration of the 100-for-1 stock split implemented on January 4, 2009.\n\n## (b) Stock options granted and changes\n\nNumber of stock options\n\n- * Number of stock as of the previous fiscal year-end is reported in consideration of the 100-for-1 stock split implemented on January 4, 2009.\n\nPrice information (Yen)\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n122", + "recall": 0.9682539682539683, + "true_md": "SMFG 2011 122\n\n* Number of stock as of the previous fiscal year-end is reported in consideration of the 100-for-1 stock split implemented on January 4, 2009.\n\n- 2. Outline of stock options and changes is as follows:\n\n- 1. Share-based compensation expenses which were accounted for as general and administrative expenses in the fiscal years ended March 31, \n\n- 33. Stock Options\n\n2011 and 2010 are as follows:\n\n* “Number of stock options” is reported in consideration of the 100-for-1 stock split implemented on January 4, 2009.\n\n- (1) SMFG\n\n- (b) Stock options granted and changes\n\nSMFG Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9009206081557549, + "doc_id": "ad165dca858fda8e1360f0ab6d9c5437cdd8d0f3d62ce2808981527c975b7e0f", + "edit_distance": 0.8495145631067961, + "f1_score": 0.9894736842105265, + "meteor": 0.6749542835386637, + "precision": 0.9964664310954063, + "pred_md": "## Performance Grants\n\nIn fiscal 2009 and 2008, the Executive Organization and Compensation Committee made annual awards of three-year performance grants to key officers. A target payout was established at the beginning of each three-year performance period. The actual payout at the end of the period is calculated based upon the Company's achievement of sales growth, return on sales, and total shareholder return targets. All performance periods had expired by June 30, 2011. During fiscal 2011 and 2010, the Company recorded $1,020 and $(231), respectively, of compensation expense (income) for achievement relative to the total shareholder return-based goals of the Company's performance grants. The liability at June 30, 2011 was $1,558; this was paid in fiscal 2012.\n\n## NOTE 10: BENEFIT PLANS\n\n## Retirement Savings Plan\n\nSubstantially all U.S. associates participate in the Applied Industrial Technologies, Inc. Retirement Savings Plan. Participants may elect to contribute up to 50% of their compensation, subject to Internal Revenue Code maximums. The Company makes a discretionary profit-sharing contribution to the Retirement Savings Plan generally based upon a percentage of the Company's U.S. income before income taxes and before the amount of the contribution (5% for fiscal 2012, 2011 and 2010). The Company partially matches 401(k) contributions by participants; this match was suspended from January 1, 2009 to June 30, 2010. The Company's expense for profit sharing and matching of associates' 401(k) contributions was $10,866, $11,251 and $4,891 during fiscal 2012, 2011 and 2010, respectively.\n\n## Deferred Compensation Plans\n\nThe Company has deferred compensation plans that enable certain associates of the Company to defer receipt of a portion of their compensation and non-employee directors to defer receipt of director fees. The Company funds these deferred compensation liabilities by making contributions to rabbi trusts. Assets held in these rabbi trusts consist of investments in money market and mutual funds and Company common stock.\n\n## Postemployment Benefit Plans\n\nThe Company provides the following postemployment benefits which, except for the Qualified Defined Benefit Retirement Plan, are unfunded:\n\n## Supplemental Executive Retirement Benefits Plan\n\nThe Company has a non-qualified pension plan to provide supplemental retirement benefits to certain officers. Benefits are payable beginning at retirement and determinable at retirement based upon a percentage of the participant's historical compensation. On December 19, 2011, the Executive Organization and Compensation Committee of the Board of Directors froze participant benefits (credited service and final average earnings) and entry into the Supplemental Executive Retirement Benefits Plan (SERP) effective December 31, 2011. This action constituted a plan curtailment. The plan liability was remeasured in conjunction with the curtailment using a 3.5% discount rate and participant final average earnings through the curtailment date. The remeasurement in conjunction with the curtailment resulted in an actuarial loss (recorded in other comprehensive income (loss)) of $302 ($492 loss, net of income tax of $190).\n\nThe curtailment is reflected in the Company's consolidated balance sheets as: 1) a reduction to the overall SERP liability (included in postemployment benefits) of $8,860, 2) a reduction to deferred tax assets of $3,411 and 3) an increase in accumulated other comprehensive income (loss) of $5,449. Prior service costs previously recorded through accumulated other comprehensive income (loss) were reclassified into the statements of consolidated income ($3,117 gross expense, net of income tax of $1,200). The gross expense is recorded in selling, distribution and administrative expense in fiscal 2012.\n\n## Key Executive Restoration Plan\n\nIn fiscal 2012, the Executive Organization & Compensation Committee of the Board of Directors adopted the Key Executive Restoration Plan (KERP), an unfunded, non-qualified deferred compensation plan, to replace the SERP. The Company recorded $128 of expense associated with this plan in fiscal 2012.\n\n## Qualified Defined Benefit Retirement Plan\n\nThe Company has a qualified defined benefit retirement plan that provides benefits to certain hourly associates at retirement. These associates do not participate in the Retirement Savings Plan. The benefits are based on length of service and date of retirement.\n\nApplied Industrial Technologies, Inc. and Subsidiaries\n\n31", + "recall": 0.9825783972125436, + "true_md": "## Performance Grants\n\n## NOTE 10: BENEFIT PLANS\n\n## Retirement Savings Plan\n\n## Deferred Compensation Plans\n\n## Postemployment Benefit Plans\n\n## Supplemental ExecutiveRetirementBenefitsPlan\n\n## KeyExecutiveRestorationPlan\n\n## QualifiedDefinedBenefitRetirementPlan\n\nThe Company has a qualified defined benefit retirement plan that provides benefits to certain hourly associates at retirement. These associates do not participate in the Retirement Savings Plan. The benefits are based on length of service and date of \n\nThe Company has a qualified defined benefit retirement plan that provides benefits to certain hourly associates at retirement. These associates do not participate in the Retirement Savings Plan. The benefits are based on length of service and date of retirement. \n\nIn fiscal 2012, the Executive Organization & Compensation Committee of the Board of Directors adopted the Key Executive Restoration Plan (KERP), an unfunded, non-qualified deferred compensation plan, to replace the SERP. The Company recorded $128 of expense associated with this plan in fiscal 2012. \n\nThe curtailment is reflected in the Company's consolidated balance sheets as: 1) a reduction to the overall SERP liability (included in postemployment benefits) of $8,860, 2) a reduction to deferred tax assets of $3,411 and 3) an increase in accumulated other comprehensive income (loss) of $5,449. Prior service costs previously recorded through accumulated other comprehensive income (loss) were reclassified into the statements of consolidated income ($3,117 gross expense, net of income tax of $1,200). The gross expense is recorded in selling, distribution and administrative expense in fiscal 2012. \n\nThe Company has a non-qualified pension plan to provide supplemental retirement benefits to certain officers. Benefits are payable beginning at retirement and determinable at retirement based upon a percentage of the participant’s historical compensation. On December 19, 2011, the Executive Organization and Compensation Committee of the Board of Directors froze participant benefits (credited service and final average earnings) and entry into the Supplemental Executive Retirement Benefits Plan (SERP) effective December 31, 2011. This action constituted a plan curtailment. The plan liability was remeasured in conjunction with the curtailment using a 3.5% discount rate and participant final average earnings through the curtailment date. The remeasurement in conjunction with the curtailment resulted in an actuarial loss (recorded in other comprehensive income (loss)) of $302 ($492 loss, net of income tax of $190).\n\nThe Company provides the following postemployment benefits which, except for the Qualified Defined Benefit Retirement Plan, are unfunded: \n\nThe Company has deferred compensation plans that enable certain associates of the Company to defer receipt of a portion of their compensation and non-employee directors to defer receipt of director fees. The Company funds these deferred compensation liabilities by making contributions to rabbi trusts. Assets held in these rabbi trusts consist of investments in money market and mutual funds and Company common stock. \n\nSubstantially all U.S. associates participate in the Applied Industrial Technologies, Inc. Retirement Savings Plan. Participants may elect to contribute up to 50% of their compensation, subject to Internal Revenue Code maximums. The Company makes a discretionary profit-sharing contribution to the Retirement Savings Plan generally based upon a percentage of the Company’s U.S. income before income taxes and before the amount of the contribution (5% for fiscal 2012, 2011 and 2010). The Company partially matches 401(k) contributions by participants; this match was suspended from January 1, 2009 to June 30, 2010. The Company’s expense for profit sharing and matching of associates’ 401(k) contributions was $10,866, $11,251 and $4,891 during fiscal 2012, 2011 and 2010, respectively. \n\nIn fiscal 2009 and 2008, the Executive Organization and Compensation Committee made annual awards of three-year performance grants to key officers. A target payout was established at the beginning of each three-year performance period. The actual payout at the end of the period is calculated based upon the Company’s achievement of sales growth, return on sales, and total shareholder return targets. All performance periods had expired by June 30, 2011. During fiscal 2011 and 2010, the Company recorded $1,020 and $(231), respectively, of compensation expense (income) for achievement relative to the total shareholder return-based goals of the Company’s performance grants. The liability at June 30, 2011 was $1,558; this was paid in fiscal 2012.\n\n31 Applied Industrial Technologies, Inc. and Subsidiaries" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9161871255043332, + "doc_id": "f2cf7c6d1874d7a0b5aa5ce617a30301f0851cacca4bd8eed496748c878f1076", + "edit_distance": 0.47784431137724553, + "f1_score": 0.9777070063694268, + "meteor": 0.8130544603761117, + "precision": 0.9839743589743589, + "pred_md": "## Contributing to\n\n## the Sustainable Development of Society\n\nSMFG's goal is to earn the highest trust of society by meeting the public's expectations and fulfilling its social responsibilities. Earning the highest level of trust requires us to equally provide the most value to our customers, our shareholders and the market, the environment and society, and our employees. Through this process, we strongly believe that contributing to the sustainable development of society as a whole is vital for us to fulfill our corporate social responsibilities.\n\n## Basic CSR Policies\n\nIn implementing CSR activities, SMFG has defined CSR and put in place a set of common principles regarding business ethics for the Group.\n\n## SMFG's Definition of CSR\n\nIn the conduct of its business activities, SMFG fulfills its social responsibilities by contributing to the sustainable development of society as a whole through offering higher added value to (i) customers, (ii) shareholders and the market, (iii) the environment and society, and (iv) employees.\n\n## Common SMFG CSR Philosophy: Business Ethics\n\n## I. Satisfactory Customer Services\n\nWe intend to be a financial services group that has the complete trust and support of our customers. For this purpose, we will always provide services that meet the true needs of our customers to assure their satisfaction and earn confidence in the Group.\n\n## II. Sound Management\n\nWe intend to be a financial services group that maintains fair, transparent, and sound management based on the principle of self-responsibility. For this purpose, along with earning the firm confidence of our shareholders, our customers, and the general public, we take a long-term view of our business and operate it efficiently, and actively disclose accurate business information about the Group. Through these activities, we work to maintain continued growth based on a sound financial position.\n\n## III. Contributing to Social Development\n\nWe intend to be a financial services group that contributes to the healthy development of society. For this purpose, we recognize the importance of our mission to serve as a crucial part of the public infrastructure and also our social responsibilities. With such recognition, we undertake business operations that contribute to the steady development of Japan and the rest of the world, and endeavor, as a good corporate citizen, to make a positive contribution to society.\n\n## IV. Free and Active Business Environment\n\nWe intend to be a financial services group for which all officers and employees work with pride and commitment. For this purpose, we respect people and develop employees with extensive professional knowledge and capabilities, thereby creating a free and active business environment.\n\n## V. Compliance\n\nWe intend to be a financial services group that always keeps in mind the importance of compliance. For this purpose, we reflect our awareness of Business Ethics in our business activities at all times. In addition, we respond promptly to directives from auditors and inspectors. Through these actions, we observe all laws and regulations, and uphold moral standards in our business practices.\n\n## Key Points of CSR Activities\n\nThe following are the key points of our CSR activities. First, we have created a solid management framework, including corporate governance, internal auditing, compliance, and risk management systems. Secondly, we offer the most value for our four major stakeholder groups as follows.\n\n- · We shall endeavor to develop and prosper with our customers by offering top-quality, highly-valued products and services.\n- · We shall maintain the solid management by disclosing appropriate information, developing our internal control system and operate solid management to maximize our shareholders' value.\n- · We shall contribute to society and preserve the natural environment by continuously and proactively implementing initiatives including social and environmental activities.\n- · We shall foster a free and active business environment which respects individuals and allows each employee to realize his or her full potential.\n\nLastly, we shall strive to ultimately contribute to the sustainable development of society through such activities.\n\n## ■ SMFG CSR Values\n\n## Integrally Implementing CSR Activities and Business Strategies\n\nCSR activities are considered the foundation of the business strategies of SMFG and Group companies as well as the fulfillment of management policies and business goals.\n\nCompletely and fully performing CSR activities is undoubtedly the essence of 'management itself,' and sincerely committing to the implementation of CSR initiatives is considered the shortest path for achieving management policies and business goals.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n48", + "recall": 0.9715189873417721, + "true_md": "## Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR)\n\n## Contributing to the Sustainable Development of Society\n\n## Key Points of CSR Activities\n\n## Basic CSR Policies\n\n## SMFG’s Definition of CSR\n\n## ■ SMFG CSR Values\n\n## Common SMFG CSR Philosophy: Business Ethics\n\n## Integrally Implementing CSR Activities and Business Strategies\n\n## I. Satisfactory Customer Services\n\n## II. Sound Management\n\n## III. Contributing to Social Development\n\n## V. Compliance\n\n## IV. Free and Active Business Environment\n\nSMFG 2011 48\n\nSMFG’s goal is to earn the highest trust of society by meeting the public’s expectations and fulfilling its social responsibilities. Earning the highest level of trust requires us to equally provide the most value to our customers, our shareholders and the market, the environment and society, and our employees. Through this process, we strongly believe that contributing to the sustainable development of society as a whole is vital for us to fulfill our corporate social responsibilities.\n\nThe following are the key points of our CSR activities. First, we have created a solid management framework, including corporate governance, internal auditing, compliance, and risk management systems. Secondly, we offer the most value for our four major stakeholder groups as follows.\n\nIn implementing CSR activities, SMFG has defined CSR and put in place a set of common principles regarding business ethics for the Group.\n\nIn the conduct of its business activities, SMFG fulfills its social responsibilities by contributing to the sustainable development of society as a whole through offering higher added value to (i) customers, (ii) shareholders and the market, (iii) the environment and society, and (iv) employees.\n\nWe intend to be a financial services group that has the complete trust and support of our customers. For this purpose, we will always provide services that meet the true needs of our customers to assure their satisfaction and earn confidence in the Group.\n\nWe intend to be a financial services group that maintains fair, transparent, and sound management based on the principle of self-responsibility. For this purpose, along with earning the firm confidence of our shareholders, our customers, and the general public, we take a long-term view of our business and operate it efficiently, and actively disclose accurate business information about the Group. Through these activities, we work to maintain continued growth based on a sound financial position.\n\nWe intend to be a financial services group that contributes to the healthy development of society. For this purpose, we recognize the importance of our mission to serve as a crucial part of the public infrastructure and also our social responsibilities. With such recognition, we undertake business operations that contribute to the steady development of Japan and the rest of the world, and endeavor, as a good corporate citizen, to make a positive contribution to society.\n\nWe intend to be a financial services group for which all officers and employees work with pride and commitment. For this purpose, we respect people and develop employees with extensive professional knowledge and capabilities, thereby creating a free and active business environment.\n\nWe intend to be a financial services group that always keeps in mind the importance of compliance. For this purpose, we reflect our awareness of Business Ethics in our business activities at all times. In addition, we respond promptly to directives from auditors and inspectors. Through these actions, we observe all laws and regulations, and uphold moral standards in our business practices.\n\nCompletely and fully performing CSR activities is undoubtedly the essence of “management itself,” and sincerely committing to the implementation of CSR initiatives is considered the shortest path for achieving management policies and business goals.\n\nCSR activities are considered the foundation of the business strategies of SMFG and Group companies as well as the fulfillment of management policies and business goals.\n\nLastly, we shall strive to ultimately contribute to the sustainable development of society through such activities.\n\n- • We shall foster a free and active business environment which respects individuals and allows each employee to realize his or her full potential.\n\n- • We shall contribute to society and preserve the natural environment by continuously and proactively implementing initiatives including social and environmental activities.\n\n- • We shall maintain the solid management by disclosing appro- priate information, developing our internal control system and operate solid management to maximize our shareholders’ value.\n\n- • We shall endeavor to develop and prosper with our customers by offering top-quality, highly-valued products and services." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8695768282940423, + "doc_id": "1ea508b9bb3c4cfed5d8f82c1409cd76172e641c0b669cd3754c99b4133f3953", + "edit_distance": 0.8743509865005192, + "f1_score": 0.9594594594594595, + "meteor": 0.6696456468415739, + "precision": 0.9806629834254144, + "pred_md": "76\n\nNotes to the Financial Statements\n\n## (iv) Impairment of assets\n\nThe Group assesses each cash-generating unit half-yearly, to determine whether there is any indication of impairment. Where an indicator of impairment exists, a formal estimate of the recoverable amount is made, which is deemed as being the higher of the fair value less costs to sell and value in use calculated in accordance with accounting policy Note 2f. These assumptions require the use of estimates and assumptions such as discount rates, exchange rates, commodity prices, future operating development and sustaining capital requirements, mineral resources and reserves and operating performance (including the magnitude and time of related cash flows). For details of impairment assessment for the current year, refer to Note 5j.\n\n## (v) Restoration and rehabilitation provision\n\nSignificant judgement is required in determining the restoration and rehabilitation provision as there are many transactions and factors that will affect the ultimate liability payable to rehabilitate the mine site. Factors that will affect this liability include change in mineral resources and reserves estimates, changes in technology, commodity price changes and changes in interest rates.\n\nA change in any, or a combination of, the key assumptions used to determine the provisions could have a material impact on the carrying value of the provisions (see Note 17). The provision recognised for each site is reviewed at each reporting date and updated based on the facts and circumstances available at the time. Changes to the estimated future costs for operating sites are recognised in the statement of financial position by adjusting both the restoration and rehabilitation asset and provision.\n\n## (vi) Units-of-production method of depreciation\n\nThe Group applies the units-of-production method for depreciation and amortisation of its mine properties, mine buildings, plant and equipment. These calculations require the use of estimates and assumptions and significant judgement is required in assessing the estimated recoverable reserves used in the determination of the depreciation and amortisation charges. Factors that must be considered in determining estimated recoverable reserves (which includes both reserves and resources) and production capacity are the history of converting resources to reserves and the relevant time frames, anticipated mining method and costs, the complexity of metallurgy, markets, and future developments.\n\nwww.kingsgate.com.au\n\n## (vii) Share-based payments\n\nThe Group measures share-based payments at fair value at the grant date. The fair value is determined by an external valuer using a Monte Carlo simulation model or other valuation technique appropriate for the instrument being valued.\n\n## (viii) Deferred tax balances\n\nDeferred tax assets in respect of tax losses for the Kingsgate tax-consolidation group (Note 6) are not recognised in the financial statements as management considers that it is currently not probable that future taxable profits will be available to utilise those tax losses. Management reviews on a regular basis the future profitability of the entities included in the tax-consolidation group to consider if tax losses should be recognised and to ensure that any tax losses recognised will be utilised.\n\nDeferred tax balances for temporary differences in respect of Akara Mining Limited are measured based on their expected rate of reversal which is different for the two Royal Thai Board of Investment ('BOI') activities (Note 6).\n\n## (ix) Income taxes\n\nThe Group is subject to income taxes in Australia and jurisdictions where it has foreign operations. Significant judgement is required in determining the worldwide provision for income taxes. There are certain transactions and calculations undertaken during the ordinary course of business for which the ultimate tax determination is uncertain. The Group estimates its tax liabilities based on the Group understanding of the tax law. Where the final tax outcome of these matters is different from the amounts that were initially recorded, such differences will impact the current and deferred income tax assets and liabilities in the period in which such determination is made.\n\n## (x) Capitalisation of borrowing costs to exploration, evaluation and development\n\nThe Group's funding of Bowdens Silver Project included borrowings of $35,000,000. In applying the Group's accounting policy on borrowing costs (see Note 2s), the Bowdens Silver Project is considered to be a qualifying asset as defined in AASB 123. As such finance costs in relation to these borrowings have been capitalised as part of the Bowdens Silver Project.\n\n## 4. Segment information\n\nThe Group's operating segments are based on the internal management reports that are reviewed and used by the Board of Directors (chief operating decision maker). The operating segments represent the Group's operating mines and projects and include the following:\n\n- 〉 Chatree Mine, Thailand;\n- 〉 Challenger Mine, South Australia, Australia;\n- 〉 Bowdens Silver Project, New South Wales, Australia;\n- 〉 Nueva Esperanza Silver / Gold Project, Chile; and\n- 〉 Exploration, South East Asia.\n\nInformation regarding the results of each reportable segment is included as follows:", + "recall": 0.9391534391534392, + "true_md": "Notes to the Financial Statements 76\n\nwww.kingsgate.com.au\n\n## (iv) Impairment of assets\n\n## (v) Restoration and rehabilitation provision\n\n## (vi) Units-of-production method of depreciation\n\n## (x) Capitalisation of borrowing costs to exploration, evaluation and development\n\n## (ix) Income taxes\n\n## (viii) Deferred tax balances\n\n## (vii) Share-based payments\n\n## 4. Segment information\n\nThe Group’s operating segments are based on the internal management reports that are reviewed and used by the Board of Directors (chief operating decision maker). The operating segments represent the Group’s operating mines and projects and include the following:\n\nInformation regarding the results of each reportable segment is included as follows:\n\n- 〉 Chatree Mine, Thailand;\n\n- 〉 Challenger Mine, South Australia, Australia;\n\n- 〉 Bowdens Silver Project, New South Wales, Australia;\n\n- 〉 Nueva Esperanza Silver / Gold Project, Chile; and\n\n- 〉 Exploration, South East Asia.\n\nThe Group’s funding of Bowdens Silver Project included borrowings of $35,000,000. In applying the Group’s accounting policy on borrowing costs (see Note 2s), the Bowdens Silver Project is considered to be a qualifying asset as defined in AASB 123. As such finance costs in relation to these borrowings have been capitalised as part of the Bowdens Silver Project.\n\nThe Group is subject to income taxes in Australia and jurisdictions where it has foreign operations. Significant judgement is required in determining \n\nand jurisdictions where it has foreign operations. Significant judgement is required in determining the worldwide provision for income taxes. There are certain transactions and calculations under- taken during the ordinary course of business for which the ultimate tax determination is uncer- tain. The Group estimates its tax liabilities based on the Group understanding of the tax law. Where the final tax outcome of these matters is \n\non the Group understanding of the tax law. Where the final tax outcome of these matters is different from the amounts that were initially recorded, such differences will impact the current and deferred income tax assets and liabilities in the period in which such determina- tion is made.\n\nDeferred tax balances for temporary differences in respect of Akara Mining Limited are measured based on their expected rate of reversal which is different for the two Royal Thai Board of Investment (“BOI”) activities (Note 6).\n\nDeferred tax assets in respect of tax losses for the Kingsgate tax-consolidation group (Note 6) are not recognised in the financial statements as management considers that it is currently not probable that future taxable profits will be available to utilise those tax losses. Management reviews on a regular basis the future profitability of the entities included in the tax-consolidation group to consider if tax losses should be recog- nised and to ensure that any tax losses recog- nised will be utilised. \n\nThe Group assesses each cash-generating unit half-yearly, to determine whether there is any indication of impairment. Where an indicator of impairment exists, a formal estimate of the recoverable amount is made, which is deemed as being the higher of the fair value less costs to sell and value in use calculated in accordance with accounting policy Note 2f. These assump- tions require the use of estimates and assump- tions such as discount rates, exchange rates, commodity prices, future operating develop- ment and sustaining capital requirements, mineral resources and reserves and operating performance (including the magnitude and time of related cash flows). For details of impairment assessment for the current year, refer to Note 5j.\n\nSignificant judgement is required in determining the restoration and rehabilitation provision as there are many transactions and factors that will affect the ultimate liability payable to rehabilitate the mine site. Factors that will affect this liability include change in mineral resources and reserves estimates, changes in technology, commodity price changes and changes in interest rates. \n\nA change in any, or a combination of, the key assumptions used to determine the provisions could have a material impact on the carrying value of the provisions (see Note 17). The provi- sion recognised for each site is reviewed at each reporting date and updated based on the facts and circumstances available at the time. Changes to the estimated future costs for operating sites are recognised in the statement of financial position by adjusting both the restoration and rehabilitation asset and provision.\n\nThe Group applies the units-of-production method for depreciation and amortisation of its mine properties, mine buildings, plant and equipment. These calculations require the use of estimates and assumptions and significant judgement is required in assessing the estimated recoverable reserves used in the determination of the depreciation and amortisation charges. Factors that must be considered in determining \n\nof the depreciation and amortisation charges. Factors that must be considered in determining estimated recoverable reserves (which includes both reserves and resources) and production capacity are the history of converting resources to reserves and the relevant time frames, antici- pated mining method and costs, the complexity of metallurgy, markets, and future developments. \n\nThe Group measures share-based payments at fair value at the grant date. The fair value is determined by an external valuer using a Monte Carlo simulation model or other valuation tech- nique appropriate for the instrument being valued." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9605007596529973, + "doc_id": "f87863db95152be1dad5e72791fcf5ca7ac5d167bfdeb44bed9ac3797391fa6c", + "edit_distance": 0.18386491557223264, + "f1_score": 0.993103448275862, + "meteor": 0.9910237690388283, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Ernst & Young 680 George Street Sydney NSW 2000 Australia GPO Box 2646 Sydney NSW 2001\n\nTel: +61 2 9248 5555 Fax: +61 2 9248 5959 ey.com/au\n\n## Independent auditor's report to the members of Sundance Energy Australia Limited\n\n## Report on the financial report\n\nWe have audited the accompanying financial report of Sundance Energy Australia Limited, which comprises the consolidated statement of financial position as at 31 December 2014 the consolidated statement of comprehensive income, the consolidated statement of changes in equity and the consolidated statement of cash flows for the year then ended, notes comprising a summary of significant accounting policies and other explanatory information, and the directors' declaration of the consolidated entity comprising the company Sundance Energy Australia Limited and the entities it controlled at the year's end or from time to time during the financial year.\n\n## Directors' responsibility for the financial report\n\nThe directors of the company Sundance Energy Australia Limited are responsible for the preparation of the financial report that gives a true and fair view in accordance with Australian Accounting Standards and the Corporations Act 2001 and for such internal controls as the directors determine are necessary to enable the preparation of the financial report that is free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error.\n\n## Auditor's responsibility\n\nOur responsibility is to express an opinion on the financial report based on our audit. We conducted our audit in accordance with Australian Auditing Standards. Those standards require that we comply with relevant ethical requirements relating to audit engagements and plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial report is free from material misstatement.\n\nAn audit involves performing procedures to obtain audit evidence about the amounts and disclosures in the financial report. The procedures selected depend on the auditor's judgment, including the assessment of the risks of material misstatement of the financial report, whether due to fraud or error. In making those risk assessments, the auditor considers internal controls relevant to the entity's preparation and fair presentation of the financial report in order to design audit procedures that are appropriate in the circumstances, but not for the purpose of expressing an opinion on the effectiveness of the entity's internal controls. An audit also includes evaluating the appropriateness of accounting policies used and the reasonableness of accounting estimates made by the directors, as well as evaluating the overall presentation of the financial report.\n\nWe believe that the audit evidence we have obtained is sufficient and appropriate to provide a basis for our audit opinion.\n\n## Independence\n\nIn conducting our audit we have complied with the independence requirements of the Corporations Act 2001 . We have given to the directors of the company a written Auditor's Independence Declaration, a copy of which is included in the directors' report.\n\nA member firm of Ernst & Young Global Limited Liability limited by a scheme approved under Professional Standards Legislation\n\n- 107 -", + "recall": 0.9863013698630136, + "true_md": "## Independent auditor's report to the members of Sundance Energy AustraliaLimited\n\n## Report on the financial report\n\n## Directors' responsibility for the financial report\n\n## Auditor's responsibility\n\n## Independence\n\nWe have audited the accompanying financial report of Sundance Energy Australia Limited, which comprises the consolidated statement of financial position as at 31 December 2014 the consolidated statement of comprehensive income, the consolidated statement of changes in equity and the consolidated statement of cash flows for the year then ended, notes comprising a summary of significant accounting policies and other explanatory information, and the directors' declaration of the consolidated entity comprising the company Sundance Energy Australia Limited and the entities it controlled at the year's end or from time to time during the financial year. \n\nThe directors of the company Sundance Energy Australia Limited are responsible for the preparation of the financial report that gives a true and fair view in accordance with Australian Accounting Standards and the Corporations Act 2001 and for such internal controls as the directors determine are necessary to enable the preparation of the financial report that is free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error. \n\nOur responsibility is to express an opinion on the financial report based on our audit. We conducted our audit in accordance with Australian Auditing Standards. Those standards require that we comply with relevant ethical requirements relating to audit engagements and plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial report is free from material misstatement. \n\nAn audit involves performing procedures to obtain audit evidence about the amounts and disclosures in the financial report. The procedures selected depend on the auditor's judgment, including the assessment of the risks of material misstatement of the financial report, whether due to fraud or error. In making those risk assessments, the auditor considers internal controls relevant to the entity's preparation and fair presentation of the financial report in order to design audit procedures that are appropriate in the circumstances, but not for the purpose of expressing an opinion on the effectiveness of the entity's internal controls. An audit also includes evaluating the appropriateness of accounting policies used and the reasonableness of accounting estimates made by the directors, as well as evaluating the overall presentation of the financial report. \n\nWe believe that the audit evidence we have obtained is sufficient and appropriate to provide a basis for our audit opinion. \n\nIn conducting our audit we have complied with the independence requirements of the Corporations Act 2001 . We have given to the directors of the company a written Auditor’s Independence Declaration, a copy of which is included in the directors’ report. \n\nA member firm of Ernst & Young Global Limited Liability limited by a scheme approved under Professional Standards Legislation \n\n- 107 - \n\nErnst & Young 680 George Street Sydney NSW 2000 Australia GPO Box 2646 Sydney NSW 2001\n\nTel: +61 2 9248 5555 Fax: +61 2 9248 5959 ey.com/au" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8835096343527368, + "doc_id": "3748fbb6a3d514630f60a7116ab223b7d5b368804f3827d3daac04e495aec8b8", + "edit_distance": 0.4707724425887265, + "f1_score": 0.9500756429652044, + "meteor": 0.8687389634785415, + "precision": 0.9631901840490797, + "pred_md": "As for the individual hedges, SMBC assesses the effectiveness of such individual hedges.\n\nAs a result of the application of JICPA Industry Audit Committee Report No. 24, SMBC discontinued the application of hedge accounting or applied fair value hedge accounting to a portion of the hedging instruments using 'macro hedge,' which had been applied in order to manage interest rate risk arising from large-volume transactions in loans, deposits and other interest-earning assets and interest-bearing liabilities as a whole using derivatives pursuant to 'Temporary Treatment for Accounting and Auditing of Application of Accounting Standard for Financial Instruments in Banking Industry' (JICPA Industry Audit Committee Report No. 15). The deferred hedge losses and gains related to such a portion of hedging instruments are charged to 'Interest income' or 'Interest expenses' over a 12-year period (maximum) according to their maturity from the fiscal year ended March 31, 2004. Gross amounts of deferred hedge losses on 'macro hedge' (before deducting tax effect) at March 31, 2011 and 2010 were ¥999 million ($12 million) and ¥2,470 million, respectively. Gross amounts of deferred hedge gains on 'macro hedge' (before deducting tax effect) at March 31, 2011 and 2010 were ¥960 million ($12 million) and ¥2,416 million, respectively.\n\n## (b) Hedging against currency fluctuations\n\nSMBC applies deferred hedge accounting stipulated in 'Treatment of Accounting and Auditing Concerning Accounting for Foreign Currency Transactions in Banking Industry' (JICPA Industry Audit Committee Report No. 25) to currency swap and foreign exchange swap transactions executed for the purpose of lending or borrowing funds in different currencies.\n\nPursuant to JICPA Industry Audit Committee Report No. 25, SMBC assesses the effectiveness of currency swap and foreign exchange swap transactions executed for the purpose of offsetting the risk of changes in currency exchange rates by verifying that there are foreign-currency monetary claims and debts corresponding to the foreigncurrency positions.\n\nIn order to hedge risk arising from volatility of exchange rates for stocks of subsidiaries and affiliates and other securities (excluding bonds) denominated in foreign currencies, SMBC applies deferred hedge accounting or fair value hedge accounting, on the conditions that the hedged securities are designated in advance and that sufficient on-balance (actual) or off-balance (forward) liability exposure exists to cover the cost of the hedged securities denominated in the same foreign currencies.\n\n(c) Hedging against share price fluctuations SMBC applies fair value hedge accounting to individual hedges offsetting the price fluctuation of the shares that are classified under other securities, and that are held for the purpose of strategic investment, and accordingly evaluates the effectiveness of such individual hedges.\n\n(d) Transactions between consolidated subsidiaries As for derivative transactions between consolidated subsidiaries or internal transactions between trading accounts\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nSMFG\n\nand other accounts (or among internal sections), SMBC manages the interest rate swaps and currency swaps that are designated as hedging instruments in accordance with the non-arbitrary and strict criteria for external transactions stipulated in JICPA Industry Audit Committee Report No. 24 and No. 25. Therefore, SMBC accounts for the gains or losses that arise from interest rate swaps and currency swaps in its earnings or defers them, rather than eliminating them.\n\nCertain other consolidated subsidiaries apply the deferred hedge accounting, fair value hedge accounting or the special treatment for interest rate swaps. A consolidated domestic subsidiary (a leasing company) partly applies the accounting method that is permitted by 'Temporary Treatment for Accounting and Auditing of Application of Accounting Standard for Financial Instruments in Leasing Industry' (JICPA Industry Audit Committee Report No. 19).\n\n## (18) Amortization of goodwill\n\nGoodwill on SMBC Friend Securities Co., Ltd., Sumitomo Mitsui Finance and Leasing Company, Limited, Nikko Cordial Securities Inc., Kansai Urban Banking Corporation and Cedyna Financial Corporation is amortized using the straightline method over 20 years. Goodwill on other companies is charged or credited to income directly when incurred or benefited.\n\n## (19) Statements of cash flows\n\nFor the purposes of presenting the consolidated statements of cash flows, cash and cash equivalents represent cash and due from banks.\n\n## (20) Consumption taxes\n\nNational and local consumption taxes of SMFG and its consolidated domestic subsidiaries are accounted for using the tax-excluded method.\n\n(21) Valuation of consolidated subsidiaries' assets and liabilities Assets and liabilities of consolidated subsidiaries including the portion attributable to the minority stockholders are valued for consolidation at fair value when SMFG acquires control.\n\n(22) Application of new accounting standards\n\n(a) Accounting standard for financial instruments 'Accounting Standard for Financial Instruments' (ASBJ Statement No. 10, partially revised on March 10, 2008) and 'Implementation Guidance on Disclosures about Fair Value of Financial Instruments' (ASBJ Guidance No. 19, issued on March 10, 2008) became effective from the fiscal year ending on and after March 31, 2010. SMFG has applied them from the fiscal year ended March 31, 2010. Accordingly, this accounting change had the following impact on the consolidated financial statements as compared with the previous accounting method:\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n81", + "recall": 0.9373134328358209, + "true_md": "SMFG Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nAs for the individual hedges, SMBC assesses the effectiveness of such individual hedges.\n\nAs a result of the application of JICPA Industry Audit Committee Report No. 24, SMBC discontinued the application of hedge accounting or applied fair value hedge accounting to a portion of the hedging instruments using “macro hedge,” which had been applied in order to manage interest rate risk arising from large-volume transactions in loans, deposits and other interest-earning assets and interest-bearing liabilities as a whole using derivatives pursuant to “Temporary Treatment for Accounting and Auditing of Application of Accounting Standard for Financial Instruments in Banking Industry” (JICPA Industry Audit Committee Report No. 15). The deferred hedge losses and gains related to such a portion of hedging instruments are charged to “Interest income” or “Interest expenses” over a 12-year period (maximum) according to their maturity from the fiscal year ended March 31, 2004. Gross amounts of deferred hedge losses on “macro hedge” (before deducting tax effect) at March 31, 2011 and 2010 were ¥999 million ($12 million) and ¥2,470 million, respectively. Gross amounts of deferred hedge gains on “macro hedge” (before deducting tax effect) at March 31, 2011 and 2010 were ¥960 million ($12 million) and ¥2,416 million, respectively.\n\nand other accounts (or among internal sections), SMBC manages the interest rate swaps and currency swaps that are designated as hedging instruments in accordance with the non-arbitrary and strict criteria for external transac- tions stipulated in JICPA Industry Audit Committee Report No. 24 and No. 25. Therefore, SMBC accounts for the gains or losses that arise from interest rate swaps and currency swaps in its earnings or defers them, rather than eliminating them.\n\nCertain other consolidated subsidiaries apply the deferred hedge accounting, fair value hedge accounting or the special treatment for interest rate swaps. A consolidated domestic subsidiary (a leasing company) partly applies the accounting method that is permitted by “Temporary Treatment for Accounting and Auditing of Application of Accounting Standard for Financial Instruments in Leasing Industry” (JICPA Industry Audit Committee Report No. 19).\n\nSMBC applies deferred hedge accounting stipulated in “Treatment of Accounting and Auditing Concerning Accounting for Foreign Currency Transactions in Banking Industry” (JICPA Industry Audit Committee Report No. 25) to currency swap and foreign exchange swap trans- actions executed for the purpose of lending or borrowing funds in different currencies.\n\nPursuant to JICPA Industry Audit Committee Report No. 25, SMBC assesses the effectiveness of currency swap and foreign exchange swap transactions executed for the purpose of offsetting the risk of changes in currency exchange rates by verifying that there are foreign-currency monetary claims and debts corresponding to the foreign- currency positions.\n\nIn order to hedge risk arising from volatility of exchange rates for stocks of subsidiaries and affiliates and other securities (excluding bonds) denominated in foreign currencies, SMBC applies deferred hedge accounting or fair value hedge accounting, on the conditions that the hedged securities are designated in advance and that suf- ficient on-balance (actual) or off-balance (forward) liability exposure exists to cover the cost of the hedged securities denominated in the same foreign currencies.\n\nSMBC applies fair value hedge accounting to individual hedges offsetting the price fluctuation of the shares that are classified under other securities, and that are held for the purpose of strategic investment, and accordingly evaluates the effectiveness of such individual hedges.\n\nAs for derivative transactions between consolidated sub- sidiaries or internal transactions between trading accounts \n\nFor the purposes of presenting the consolidated statements of cash flows, cash and cash equivalents represent cash and due from banks.\n\nNational and local consumption taxes of SMFG and its consolidated domestic subsidiaries are accounted for using the tax-excluded method.\n\nAssets and liabilities of consolidated subsidiaries including the portion attributable to the minority stockholders are valued for consolidation at fair value when SMFG acquires control.\n\nGoodwill on SMBC Friend Securities Co., Ltd., Sumitomo Mitsui Finance and Leasing Company, Limited, Nikko Cordial Securities Inc., Kansai Urban Banking Corporation and Cedyna Financial Corporation is amortized using the straight- line method over 20 years. Goodwill on other companies is charged or credited to income directly when incurred or benefited.\n\n- (18) Amortization of goodwill\n\n- (b) Hedging against currency fluctuations\n\n- (c) Hedging against share price fluctuations\n\n- (d) Transactions between consolidated subsidiaries\n\n- (22) Application of new accounting standards\n\n- (21) Valuation of consolidated subsidiaries’ assets and liabilities\n\n- (20) Consumption taxes\n\n- (19) Statements of cash flows\n\nSMFG 2011 81\n\n- (a) Accounting standard for financial instruments\n\n“Accounting Standard for Financial Instruments” (ASBJ Statement No. 10, partially revised on March 10, 2008) and “Implementation Guidance on Disclosures about Fair Value of Financial Instruments” (ASBJ Guidance No. 19, issued on March 10, 2008) became effective from the fiscal year ending on and after March 31, 2010. SMFG has applied them from the fiscal year ended March 31, 2010. Accordingly, this accounting change had the fol- lowing impact on the consolidated financial statements as compared with the previous accounting method:" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8868724779942981, + "doc_id": "886c8b6a8fcae39e8fc7b6810db9b9821c64e04e4f08bb7d957ef3b6beafcd37", + "edit_distance": 0.7424242424242424, + "f1_score": 0.9651162790697675, + "meteor": 0.8768475636278216, + "precision": 0.9707602339181286, + "pred_md": "MANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS\n\n## Managing Our Liquidity and Financial Resources\n\n## SOURCES AND USES OF CASH\n\n## CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS\n\n## Operating Activities\n\nCash provided by operations was 17 % higher this year compared to 2012.\n\nThe changes were the net effect of:\n\n- GLYPH<129> a 5 % increase in cash from operations before changes in non-cash operating items\n- GLYPH<129> net funding provided by non-cash working capital this year compared to a net investment in 2012\n- GLYPH<129> a 3 % increase in interest paid on long-term debt due to an increase in the amount of outstanding debt, partially offset by a decrease in the weighted-average interest rate\n- GLYPH<129> higher cash income tax payments in 2013.\n\n## Investing Activities\n\nProperty, Plant and Equipment\n\nWe spent $2,240 million this year, excluding $114 million of related changes in non-cash working capital, compared to $2,142 million in 2012. See 'Additions to Property, Plant and Equipment'.\n\n58\n\nROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\nAcquisitions and Strategic Initiatives\n\nWe made net investments of $1,080 million this year mainly to acquire theScore, Blackiron, Mountain Cable and Pivot Data Centres. In 2012, we made net investments of $707 million to acquire our 37.5 % interest in MLSE and for certain deposits related to our acquisition of theScore.\n\n## Financing Activities\n\nDebt Issuances\n\nOn March 7, 2013 we issued US$1.0 billion of senior notes for total net proceeds of approximately Cdn$1,015 million (US$985 million), after deducting the original issue discount and debt issuance costs, with the proceeds used for general corporate purposes. The notes issued consisted of the following:\n\n- GLYPH<129> US$500 million of 3.0 % senior notes due in 2023 (the March 2023 Notes )\n- GLYPH<129> US$500 million of 4.5 % senior notes due in 2043 (the March 2043 Notes ).", + "recall": 0.9595375722543352, + "true_md": "MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS\n\n## Managing Our Liquidity and Financial Resources\n\n## SOURCES AND USES OF CASH\n\n## Operating Activities\n\n## Financing Activities\n\n## Debt Issuances\n\n## Investing Activities\n\n## Property, Plant and Equipment\n\n## Acquisitions and Strategic Initiatives\n\nCash provided by operations was 17 % higher this year compared to 2012.\n\nWe made net investments of $1,080 million this year mainly to acquire theScore, Blackiron, Mountain Cable and Pivot Data Centres. In 2012, we made net investments of $707 million to acquire our 37.5 % interest in MLSE and for certain deposits related to our acquisition of theScore.\n\nThe changes were the net effect of:\n\nOn March 7, 2013 we issued US$1.0 billion of senior notes for total net proceeds of approximately Cdn$1,015 million (US$985 million), after deducting the original issue discount and debt issuance costs, with the proceeds used for general corporate purposes. The notes issued consisted of the following:\n\nNotes )\n\nNotes ).\n\nWe spent $2,240 million this year, excluding $114 million of related changes in non-cash working capital, compared to $2,142 million in 2012. See “Additions to Property, Plant and Equipment”.\n\n- GLYPH<129>a5 % increase in cash from operations before changes in non-cash operating items\n\n- GLYPH<129> net funding provided by non-cash working capital this year compared to a net investment in 2012\n\n- GLYPH<129>a3 % increase in interest paid on long-term debt due to an increase in the amount of outstanding debt, partially offset by a decrease in the weighted-average interest rate\n\n- GLYPH<129> higher cash income tax payments in 2013.\n\n- GLYPH<129> US$500 million of 3.0 % senior notes due in 2023 (the March 2023\n\n- GLYPH<129> US$500 million of 4.5 % senior notes due in 2043 (the March 2043\n\n58 ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n## CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9678539667114133, + "doc_id": "71fdde0ad23312c2b58d41fcb383070e884062f863ef5009dd28a10837396dd6", + "edit_distance": 0.4807073954983923, + "f1_score": 0.9891304347826088, + "meteor": 0.9174023304481427, + "precision": 0.9891304347826086, + "pred_md": "## Management's Discussion and Analysis\n\nFOR THE YEAR ENDED DECEMBER 31, 2013\n\nThis Management's Discussion and Analysis (MD&A) contains important information about our business and our performance for the year ended December 31, 2013. This MD&A is current as of February 12, 2014 and was approved by our Board of Directors.\n\nYou should read this MD&A together with our 2013 Audited Consolidated Financial Statements and Notes, which have been prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS).\n\nWe report our results of operations in four segments: Wireless, Cable, Business Solutions and Media. Wireless, Cable and Business Solutions are operated by Rogers Communications Partnership and our other wholly owned subsidiaries. Media is operated by our wholly owned subsidiary Rogers Media Inc. and its subsidiaries.\n\nWe us our , , , Rogers , Rogers Communications and the Company refer to Rogers Communications Inc. and our subsidiaries.\n\nRCI refers to the legal entity Rogers Communications Inc., not including our subsidiaries. RCI also holds interests in various investments and ventures.\n\nWe are publicly traded on the Toronto Stock Exchange (TSX: RCI.A and RCI.B) and on the New York Stock Exchange (NYSE: RCI).\n\nAll amounts are in Canadian dollars unless otherwise stated. All percentage changes are calculated using the rounded numbers as they appear in the tables. Charts, graphs and diagrams are included for reference; however, they do not form part of this MD&A.\n\nIn this MD&A, this year refers to the year ended December 31, 2013, and last year refers to the year ended December 31, 2012.\n\n## ABOUT FORWARD-LOOKING INFORMATION\n\nThis MD&A includes 'forward-looking information' within the meaning of applicable securities laws, and assumptions about, among other things, our business, operations and financial performance and condition approved by management on the date of this MD&A. This forward-looking information and these assumptions include, but are not limited to, statements about our objectives and strategies to achieve those objectives, and about our beliefs, plans, expectations, anticipations, estimates or intentions.\n\nForward-looking information and statements:\n\n- GLYPH<129> typically include words like could , expect , may , anticipate , assume , believe , intend , estimate , plan , project , guidance, outlook and similar expressions, although not all forward-looking information and statements include them\n- GLYPH<129> include conclusions, forecasts and projections that are based on our current objectives and strategies and on estimates, expectations, assumptions and other factors, most of which are confidential and proprietary and that we believe to be reasonable at the time they were applied but may prove to be incorrect\n- GLYPH<129> were approved by our management on the date of this MD&A.\n\nOur forward-looking information and statements include forecasts and projections related to the following items, among others:\n\n- GLYPH<129> revenue\n- GLYPH<129> adjusted operating profit\n\n24\n\nROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n- GLYPH<129> property, plant and equipment expenditures\n- GLYPH<129> cash income tax payments\n- GLYPH<129> free cash flow before and after cash income taxes\n- GLYPH<129> dividend payments\n- GLYPH<129> expected growth in subscribers and the services they subscribe to\n- GLYPH<129> the cost of acquiring and retaining subscribers and deployment of new services\n- GLYPH<129> continued cost reductions and efficiency improvements\n- GLYPH<129> the growth of new products and services\n- GLYPH<129> all other statements that are not historical facts.\n\nSpecific forward-looking information included or incorporated in this document include, but is not limited to, our information and statements under 'Financial and Operating Guidance' relating to our 2014 consolidated guidance on adjusted operating profit, property plant and equipment expenditures and after-tax free cash flow. All other statements that are not historical facts are forward-looking statements.\n\nWe base our conclusions, forecasts and projections (including the aforementioned guidance) on the following factors, among others:\n\n- GLYPH<129> general economic and industry growth rates\n- GLYPH<129> currency exchange rates\n- GLYPH<129> product pricing levels and competitive intensity\n- GLYPH<129> subscriber growth\n- GLYPH<129> pricing, usage and churn rates\n- GLYPH<129> changes in government regulation\n- GLYPH<129> technology deployment\n- GLYPH<129> availability of devices\n- GLYPH<129> timing of new product launches\n- GLYPH<129> content and equipment costs\n- GLYPH<129> the integration of acquisitions\n- GLYPH<129> industry structure and stability.\n\nExcept as otherwise indicated, this MD&A and our forward-looking statements do not reflect the potential impact of any non-recurring or other special items or of any dispositions, monetizations, mergers, acquisitions, other business combinations or other transactions that may be considered or announced or may occur after the date the statement containing the forward-looking information is made.\n\n## RISKS AND UNCERTAINTIES\n\nActual events and results can be substantially different from what is expressed or implied by forward-looking information because of risks, uncertainties and other factors, many of which are beyond our control. These include but are not limited to:\n\n- GLYPH<129> new interpretations and new accounting standards from accounting standards bodies\n- GLYPH<129> economic conditions\n- GLYPH<129> technological change\n- GLYPH<129> the integration of acquisitions\n- GLYPH<129> unanticipated changes in content or equipment costs\n- GLYPH<129> changing conditions in the entertainment, information and communications industries\n- GLYPH<129> regulatory changes\n- GLYPH<129> litigation and tax matters\n- GLYPH<129> the level of competitive intensity\n- GLYPH<129> the emergence of new opportunities.", + "recall": 0.9891304347826086, + "true_md": "## Management’s Discussion and Analysis\n\nFOR THE YEAR ENDED DECEMBER 31, 2013\n\nThis Management’s Discussion and Analysis (MD&A) contains important information about our business and our performance for the year ended December 31, 2013. This MD&A is current as of February 12, 2014 and was approved by our Board of Directors.\n\nYou should read this MD&A together with our 2013 Audited Consolidated Financial Statements and Notes, which have been prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS).\n\nWe report our results of operations in four segments: Wireless, Cable, Business Solutions and Media. Wireless, Cable and Business Solutions are operated by Rogers Communications Partnership and our other wholly owned subsidiaries. Media is operated by our wholly owned subsidiary Rogers Media Inc. and its subsidiaries.\n\nWe , us , our , Rogers , Rogers Communications and the Company refer to Rogers Communications Inc. and our subsidiaries.\n\nRCI refers to the legal entity Rogers Communications Inc., not including our subsidiaries. RCI also holds interests in various investments and ventures.\n\nWe are publicly traded on the Toronto Stock Exchange (TSX: RCI.A and RCI.B) and on the New York Stock Exchange (NYSE: RCI).\n\nAll amounts are in Canadian dollars unless otherwise stated. All percentage changes are calculated using the rounded numbers as they appear in the tables. Charts, graphs and diagrams are included for reference; however, they do not form part of this MD&A.\n\nIn this MD&A, this year refers to the year ended December 31, 2013, and last year refers to the year ended December 31, 2012.\n\nThis MD&A includes “forward-looking information” within the meaning of applicable securities laws, and assumptions about, among other things, our business, operations and financial performance and condition approved by management on the date of this MD&A. This forward-looking information and these assumptions include, but are not limited to, statements about our objectives and strategies to achieve those objectives, and about our beliefs, plans, expectations, anticipations, estimates or intentions.\n\nForward-looking information and statements:\n\nActual events and results can be substantially different from what is expressed or implied by forward-looking information because of risks, uncertainties and other factors, many of which are beyond our control. These include but are not limited to:\n\nExcept as otherwise indicated, this MD&A and our forward-looking statements do not reflect the potential impact of any non-recurring or other special items or of any dispositions, monetizations, mergers, acquisitions, other business combinations or other transactions that may be considered or announced or may occur after the date the statement containing the forward-looking information is made.\n\nWe base our conclusions, forecasts and projections (including the aforementioned guidance) on the following factors, among others:\n\nSpecific forward-looking information included or incorporated in this document include, but is not limited to, our information and statements under “Financial and Operating Guidance” relating to our 2014 consolidated guidance on adjusted operating profit, property plant and equipment expenditures and after-tax free cash flow. All other statements that are not historical facts are forward-looking statements.\n\nOur forward-looking information and statements include forecasts and projections related to the following items, among others:\n\n24 ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n- GLYPH<129> typically include words like could , expect , may , anticipate , assume , believe , intend , estimate , plan , project , guidance, outlook and similar expressions, although not all forward-looking information and statements include them\n\n- GLYPH<129> include conclusions, forecasts and projections that are based on our current objectives and strategies and on estimates, expectations, assumptions and other factors, most of which are confidential and proprietary and that we believe to be reasonable at the time they were applied but may prove to be incorrect\n\n- GLYPH<129> were approved by our management on the date of this MD&A.\n\n- GLYPH<129> revenue\n\n- GLYPH<129> adjusted operating profit\n\n- GLYPH<129> the emergence of new opportunities.\n\n- GLYPH<129> the level of competitive intensity\n\n- GLYPH<129> litigation and tax matters\n\n- GLYPH<129> regulatory changes\n\n- GLYPH<129> changing conditions in the entertainment, information and communications industries\n\n- GLYPH<129> unanticipated changes in content or equipment costs\n\n- GLYPH<129> the integration of acquisitions\n\n- GLYPH<129> technological change\n\n- GLYPH<129> economic conditions\n\n- GLYPH<129> new interpretations and new accounting standards from accounting standards bodies\n\n- GLYPH<129> general economic and industry growth rates\n\n- GLYPH<129> currency exchange rates\n\n- GLYPH<129> product pricing levels and competitive intensity\n\n- GLYPH<129> subscriber growth\n\n- GLYPH<129> pricing, usage and churn rates\n\n- GLYPH<129> changes in government regulation\n\n- GLYPH<129> availability of devices\n\n- GLYPH<129> technology deployment\n\n- GLYPH<129> timing of new product launches\n\n- GLYPH<129> content and equipment costs\n\n- GLYPH<129> the integration of acquisitions\n\n- GLYPH<129> industry structure and stability.\n\n- GLYPH<129> property, plant and equipment expenditures\n\n- GLYPH<129> cash income tax payments\n\n- GLYPH<129> free cash flow before and after cash income taxes\n\n- GLYPH<129> dividend payments\n\n- GLYPH<129> expected growth in subscribers and the services they subscribe to\n\n- GLYPH<129> the cost of acquiring and retaining subscribers and deployment of new services\n\n- GLYPH<129> continued cost reductions and efficiency improvements\n\n- GLYPH<129> the growth of new products and services\n\n- GLYPH<129> all other statements that are not historical facts.\n\n## RISKS AND UNCERTAINTIES\n\n## ABOUT FORWARD-LOOKING INFORMATION" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9364715692146841, + "doc_id": "fd5d640f9861c4c63698591cb8ee9b85381d80edb080e0e27d816d6300d55512", + "edit_distance": 0.04434589800443459, + "f1_score": 0.978723404255319, + "meteor": 0.9579803264330912, + "precision": 0.9829059829059829, + "pred_md": "MSA EMERGING MARKETS: MEXICO\n\n## In Mexico, Confined Space Expertise Helps Protect Steel Workers\n\nWhile not o ffi cially on MSA's list of emerging markets, Mexico fits that bill in many ways for our North America business segment. With the tari ff eliminations of NAFTA and geographic continuity with the balance of North America, Mexico is experiencing dramatic growth in its manufacturing sector. In fact, MSA was just one of many American and Canadian companies to build new manufacturing facilities in the country in recent years, with our state-of-the-art 77,000 square foot plant (shown above) opening in Querétaro in late 2007.\n\nWith Mexico's expanding industrial base comes an increased need for safety equipment for workers. One of the many customers served by MSA Mexico in 2011 was steel producer ArcelorMittal, whose 4 million tons per annum facility in the port city of Lázaro Cárdenas makes it the largest manufacturer of steel in the country.\n\nMSA has long served ArcelorMittal facilities in the U.S. and Europe, but this was our first opportunity to do so in Mexico. The driver: the launch of the facility's confined space entry program.\n\nLarge industrial facilities often have a large number of confined space environments. Accordingly, there is a need to keep workers safe in any eventuality. This means a need for products representing four of MSA's five Core Product groups - Industrial Head Protection, Supplied-Air\n\nRespiratory Protection, Portable Gas Detection, and Fall Protection as workers, for example, descend steep ladders into below-ground confined spaces.\n\nAnd, perhaps just as importantly, it means training workers and sta ff not only in the proper use of each piece of equipment, but also in safe practices while performing work in any kind of confined space to ensure full compliance with all applicable standards.\n\nMSA provides expertise in all of these areas, and our ability to provide outstanding training and confined space audits, alongside state-of-the-art products, won us ArcelorMittal Lázaro Cárdenas' business in 2011. It is the kind of valueadded service that is helping MSA gain new business in Mexico, as well as in other markets throughout the world.\n\nMSA's value-added expertise continues to earn new business around the world. In 2011, MSA's confined space training program helped win business from ArcelorMittal. Shown at left is an on-site confined space training session conducted by MSA Mexico.\n\nMSA 2011 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n9", + "recall": 0.9745762711864406, + "true_md": "MSA EMERGING MARKETS: MEXICO\n\n## MEXICO h\n\n## In Mexico, Confined Space Expertise Helps Protect Steel Workers\n\nWhile not o ffi cially on MSA’s list of emerging markets, Mexico fits that bill in many ways for our North America business segment. With the tari ff eliminations of NAFTA and geographic continuity with the balance of North America, Mexico is experiencing dramatic growth in its manufacturing sector. In fact, MSA was just one of many American and Canadian companies to build new manufacturing facilities in the country in recent years, with our state-of-the-art 77,000 square foot plant (shown above) opening in Querétaro in late 2007. \n\nWith Mexico’s expanding industrial base comes an increased need for safety equipment for workers. One of the many customers served by MSA Mexico in 2011 was steel producer ArcelorMittal, whose 4 million tons per annum facility in the port city of Lázaro Cárdenas makes it the largest manufacturer of steel in the country. \n\nMSA has long served ArcelorMittal facilities in the U.S. and Europe, but this was our first opportunity to do so in Mexico. The driver: the launch of the facility’s confined space entry program. \n\nLarge industrial facilities often have a large number of confined space environments. Accordingly, there is a need to keep workers safe in any eventuality. This means a need for products representing four of MSA’s five Core Product groups – Industrial Head Protection, Supplied-Air \n\nRespiratory Protection, Portable Gas Detection, and Fall Protection as workers, for example, descend steep ladders into below-ground confined spaces. \n\nAnd, perhaps just as importantly, it means training workers and sta ff not only in the proper use of each piece of equipment, but also in safe practices while performing work in any kind of confined space to ensure full compliance with all applicable standards. \n\nMSA provides expertise in all of these areas, and our ability to provide outstanding training and confined space audits, alongside state-of-the-art products, won us ArcelorMittal Lázaro Cárdenas’ business in 2011. It is the kind of value- added service that is helping MSA gain new business in Mexico, as well as in other markets throughout the world.\n\nMSA’s value-added expertise continues to earn new business around the world. In 2011, MSA’s confined space training program helped win business from ArcelorMittal. Shown at left is an on-site confined space training session conducted by MSA Mexico.\n\nMSA 2011 ANNUAL REPORT 9" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8459016932910978, + "doc_id": "e4581cc65a41fc46d5e845a2d7677548da187d2360aa19d34b79f610e527c438", + "edit_distance": 0.11904761904761904, + "f1_score": 0.948207171314741, + "meteor": 0.906596433931204, + "precision": 0.952, + "pred_md": "## Sumitomo Mitsui Financial Group\n\n## ◆ Consolidated\n\nNotes: 1. 'Net unrealized gains (losses) on other securities' represent the difference between the market prices and acquisition costs (or amortized costs) of 'other\n\nsecurities.' In principle, the values of stocks are calculated using the average market prices during the final month. For details, please refer to page 24.\n\n- 2. 'Number of employees' has been reported on the basis of full-time workers. 'Number of employees' includes locally hired overseas staff members but excludes contract employees and temporary staff.\n- 3. The consolidated capital ratio is calculated according to the formula specified in the Financial Services Agency ('FSA') Notification No. 20 issued in fiscal 2006, which is based on Article 52-25 of the Banking Act of Japan. The consolidated capital ratio of SMFG is calculated under Basel II.\n- 4. SMFG implemented a 100-for-1 stock split of common stock on January 4, 2009. If the stock split had been implemented in the prior years, per share information would be as follows:\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n19", + "recall": 0.9444444444444444, + "true_md": "## Financial Highlights\n\n## Sumitomo Mitsui Financial Group\n\n## ◆ Consolidated\n\nNotes: 1. “Net unrealized gains (losses) on other securities” represent the difference between the market prices and acquisition costs (or amortized costs) of “other securities.” In principle, the values of stocks are calculated using the average market prices during the final month. For details, please refer to page 24.\n\n2. “Number of employees” has been reported on the basis of full-time workers. “Number of employees” includes locally hired overseas staff members but excludes contract employees and temporary staff.\n\n3. The consolidated capital ratio is calculated according to the formula specified in the Financial Services Agency (“FSA”) Notification No. 20 issued in fiscal 2006, which is based on Article 52-25 of the Banking Act of Japan. The consolidated capital ratio of SMFG is calculated under Basel II.\n\n4. SMFG implemented a 100-for-1 stock split of common stock on January 4, 2009. If the stock split had been implemented in the prior years, per share information would be as follows:\n\n19\n\nSMFG 2011" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8779269161459252, + "doc_id": "fd05e0ae00273807298b8c6ef024222b8d5499ba625c6004590efae32b3b5ec6", + "edit_distance": 0.11904761904761904, + "f1_score": 0.9636363636363636, + "meteor": 0.9909616866945252, + "precision": 0.9298245614035088, + "pred_md": "SMFG\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n## (d) Bond derivatives\n\nNotes: 1. The above transactions are valued at fair value and the valuation gains (losses) are accounted for in the consolidated statements of income.\n\n2. Fair value of transactions listed on exchange is calculated using the closing prices on the Tokyo Stock Exchange and others.\n\nFair value of OTC transactions is calculated using discounted present value and option pricing models.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n116", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "SMFG Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nSMFG 2011 116\n\nNotes: 1. The above transactions are valued at fair value and the valuation gains (losses) are accounted for in the consolidated statements of income.\n\n2. Fair value of transactions listed on exchange is calculated using the closing prices on the Tokyo Stock Exchange and others. Fair value of OTC transactions is calculated using discounted present value and option pricing models." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8722398214579191, + "doc_id": "6ebef3f7d9960b563ac0bafa55583b388feb2f14e3e089c5e390e2ad143beff3", + "edit_distance": 0.2606516290726817, + "f1_score": 0.9655172413793105, + "meteor": 0.9300576585610427, + "precision": 0.9625, + "pred_md": "Capital Ratio Information\n\nSMFG\n\n## ■ Capital Requirements\n\nNotes: 1. Capital requirements for credit risk are capital equivalents to 'credit risk-weighted assets ✕ 8%' under the standardized approach and 'credit risk-weighted assets ✕ 8% + expected loss amount' under the IRB approach. Regarding exposures to be deducted from capital, the deduction amount is added to the amount of required capital.\n\n2. Portfolio classification is after CRM.\n\n3. 'Securitization exposures' includes such exposures based on the standardized approach.\n\n4. 'Other exposures' includes estimated lease residual values, purchased receivables (including exposures to qualified corporate enterprises and others), long settlement transactions and other assets.\n\n## ■ Internal Ratings-Based (IRB) Approach\n\n## 1. Scope\n\nSMFG and the following consolidated subsidiaries have adopted the advanced IRB approach for exposures as of March 31, 2009.\n\n## (1) Domestic Operations\n\numitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation, Sumitomo Mitsui Card Company, Limited and SMBC Guarantee Co., Ltd. S\n\n## (2) Overseas Operations\n\numitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation Europe Limited, Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation (China) Limited, Sumitomo Mitsui S Banking Corporation of Canada, Banco Sumitomo Mitsui Brasileiro S.A., ZAO Sumitomo Mitsui Rus Bank, PT Bank Sumitomo Mitsui Indonesia, Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation Malaysia Berhad, SMBC Leasing and Finance, Inc., SMBC Capital Markets, Inc., SMBC Nikko Capital Markets Limited, SMBC Derivative Products Limited and SMBC Capital Markets (Asia) Limited\n\n## THE MINATO BANK, LTD. and SMBC Finance Service Co., Ltd. have adopted the foundation IRB approach.\n\nAmong consolidated subsidiaries that have adopted the standardized approach for exposures as of March 31, 2011, Sumitomo Mitsui Finance and Leasing Co., Ltd. is scheduled to adopt the foundation IRB approach from March 31, 2012, and Kansai Urban Banking Corporation from March 31, 2013.\n\nNote: Directly controlled SPCs and limited partnerships for investment of consolidated subsidiaries using the advanced IRB approach have also adopted the advanced IRB approach. Further, the advanced IRB approach is applied to equity exposures on a group basis, including equity exposures of consolidated subsidiaries applying the standardized approach.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n181", + "recall": 0.9685534591194969, + "true_md": "SMFG\n\nCapital Ratio Information\n\n## ■ Capital Requirements\n\n- Notes: 1. Capital requirements for credit risk are capital equivalents to “credit risk-weighted assets ✕ 8%” under the standardized approach and “credit risk-weighted assets ✕ 8% + expected loss amount” under the IRB approach. Regarding exposures to be deducted from capital, the deduction amount is added to the amount of required capital.\n\n- 2. Portfolio classification is after CRM.\n\n- 3. “Securitization exposures” includes such exposures based on the standardized approach.\n\n- 4. “Other exposures” includes estimated lease residual values, purchased receivables (including exposures to qualified corporate enterprises and others), long settlement transactions and other assets.\n\n- 1. Scope\n\n- (1) Domestic Operations\n\n- (2) Overseas Operations\n\n## ■ Internal Ratings-Based (IRB) Approach\n\n THE MINATO BANK, LTD. and SMBC Finance Service Co., Ltd. have adopted the foundation IRB approach.\n\n Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation Europe Limited, Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation (China) Limited, Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation of Canada, Banco Sumitomo Mitsui Brasileiro S.A., ZAO Sumitomo Mitsui Rus Bank, PT Bank Sumitomo Mitsui Indonesia, Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation Malaysia Berhad, SMBC Leasing and Finance, Inc., SMBC Capital Markets, Inc., SMBC Nikko Capital Markets Limited, SMBC Derivative Products Limited and SMBC Capital Markets (Asia) Limited\n\n Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation, Sumitomo Mitsui Card Company, Limited and SMBC Guarantee Co., Ltd.\n\nSMFG and the following consolidated subsidiaries have adopted the advanced IRB approach for exposures as of March 31, 2009.\n\nAmong consolidated subsidiaries that have adopted the standardized approach for exposures as of March 31, 2011, Sumitomo Mitsui Finance and Leasing Co., Ltd. is scheduled to adopt the foundation IRB approach from March 31, 2012, and Kansai Urban Banking Corporation from March 31, 2013.\n\nNote: Directly controlled SPCs and limited partnerships for investment of consolidated subsidiaries using the advanced IRB approach have also adopted the advanced IRB approach. Further, the advanced IRB approach is applied to equity exposures on a group basis, including equity exposures of consolidated subsidiaries applying the standardized approach. \n\nSMFG 2011 181" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7705375733780718, + "doc_id": "7f80994c68cbe06c58a2ec2844e83809caae457bfea24952ff1584002bdfec76", + "edit_distance": 0.23903818953323905, + "f1_score": 0.9897750511247443, + "meteor": 0.8216321425654174, + "precision": 0.9918032786885246, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 1 - STATEMENT OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES continued\n\nThe life of each item has regard to both its physical life limitations and present assessments of economically recoverable reserves of the field at which the asset is located. Economically recoverable reserves are defined as proved developed and probable developed reserves. These calculations require the use of estimates and assumptions, including the amount of recoverable reserves and estimates of future capital expenditure. The calculation of the units of production rate of depreciation or amortisation could be impacted to the extent that actual production in the future is different from current forecast production based on total economically recoverable reserves, or future capital expenditure estimates change. Changes to economically recoverable reserves could arise due to change in the factors or assumptions used in estimating reserves, including the effect on economically recoverable reserves of differences between actual commodity prices and commodity price assumptions and unforeseen operational issues. Changes in estimates are accounted for prospectively.\n\n## Stock Based Compensation\n\nThe Group's policy for stock based compensation is discussed in Note 1 (h). The application of this policy requires management to make certain estimates and assumptions as to future events and circumstances. Stock based compensation related to stock options use estimates for expected volatility of the Company's share price and expected term, including a forfeiture rate, if appropriate.\n\n## q) Change in Accounting Estimate\n\nEffective 1 July 2013, the Company had a change in accounting estimate related to the economically recoverable reserves in its Eagle Ford formation used in the units-of-production depletion calculation. Subsequent to the change, the Company began to include management's best estimate of economically recoverable reserves associated with developed properties, which include both proved developed and probable developed reserves. Prior to the change, the Company used economically recoverable reserves associated only with proved developed reserves as probable developed reserves were not significant.\n\n## r) Rounding of Amounts\n\nThe Company is of a kind referred to in Class Order 98/100 issued by the Australian Securities and Investment Commission, relating to rounding of amounts in the financial statements. Amounts have been rounded to the nearest thousand.\n\n## s) Parent Entity Financial Information\n\nThe financial information for the parent entity, SEAL ('Parent Company'), also the ultimate parent, discussed in Note 34, has been prepared on the same basis, using the same accounting policies as the consolidated financial statements, except for its investments in subsidiaries which are accounted for at cost in the individual financial statements of the parent entity less any impairment.\n\n## t) Earnings Per Share\n\nThe group presents basic and diluted earnings per share for its ordinary shares. Basic earnings per share is calculated by dividing the profit or loss attributable to ordinary shareholders of the Company by the weighted average number of ordinary shares outstanding during the year. Diluted earnings per share is determined by adjusting the profit or loss attributable to ordinary shareholders and the weighted average number of ordinary shares for the dilutive effect, if any, of outstanding share rights and share options which have been issued to employees.\n\n- 70 -", + "recall": 0.9877551020408163, + "true_md": "- 70 - \n\n## t) Earnings Per Share The group presents basic and diluted earnings per share for its ordinary shares. Basic earnings per share is calculated\n\n## s) Parent Entity Financial Information The financial information for the parent entity, SEAL (“Parent Company”), also the ultimate parent, discussed in Note\n\n## r) Rounding of Amounts The Company is of a kind referred to in Class Order 98/100 issued by the Australian Securities and Investment\n\n## q) Change in Accounting Estimate Effective 1 July 2013, the Company had a change in accounting estimate related to the economically recoverable\n\n## Stock Based Compensation The Group’s policy for stock based compensation is discussed in Note 1 (h). The application of this policy requires\n\n## NOTE 1 - STATEMENT OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES continued\n\n## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\nThe life of each item has regard to both its physical life limitations and present assessments of economically recoverable reserves of the field at which the asset is located. Economically recoverable reserves are defined as proved developed and probable developed reserves. These calculations require the use of estimates and assumptions, including the amount of recoverable reserves and estimates of future capital expenditure. The calculation of the units of production rate of depreciation or amortisation could be impacted to the extent that actual production in the future is different from current forecast production based on total economically recoverable reserves, or future capital expenditure estimates change. Changes to economically recoverable reserves could arise due to change in the factors or assumptions used in estimating reserves, including the effect on economically recoverable reserves of differences between actual commodity prices and commodity price assumptions and unforeseen operational issues. Changes in estimates are accounted for prospectively. \n\nStock Based Compensation The Group’s policy for stock based compensation is discussed in Note 1 (h). The application of this policy requires management to make certain estimates and assumptions as to future events and circumstances. Stock based compensation related to stock options use estimates for expected volatility of the Company’s share price and expected term, including a forfeiture rate, if appropriate. \n\nq) Change in Accounting Estimate Effective 1 July 2013, the Company had a change in accounting estimate related to the economically recoverable reserves in its Eagle Ford formation used in the units-of-production depletion calculation. Subsequent to the change, the Company began to include management's best estimate of economically recoverable reserves associated with developed properties, which include both proved developed and probable developed reserves. Prior to the change, the Company used economically recoverable reserves associated only with proved developed reserves as probable developed reserves were not significant.\n\nr) Rounding of Amounts The Company is of a kind referred to in Class Order 98/100 issued by the Australian Securities and Investment Commission, relating to rounding of amounts in the financial statements. Amounts have been rounded to the nearest thousand. \n\ns) Parent Entity Financial Information The financial information for the parent entity, SEAL (“Parent Company”), also the ultimate parent, discussed in Note 34, has been prepared on the same basis, using the same accounting policies as the consolidated financial statements, except for its investments in subsidiaries which are accounted for at cost in the individual financial statements of the parent entity less any impairment.\n\nt) Earnings Per Share The group presents basic and diluted earnings per share for its ordinary shares. Basic earnings per share is calculated by dividing the profit or loss attributable to ordinary shareholders of the Company by the weighted average number of ordinary shares outstanding during the year. Diluted earnings per share is determined by adjusting the profit or loss attributable to ordinary shareholders and the weighted average number of ordinary shares for the dilutive effect, if any, of outstanding share rights and share options which have been issued to employees." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8487950082015436, + "doc_id": "5400e9085c5374a281c57a71aa833cf74a7a948a6644235869b57d3cb6eacca3", + "edit_distance": 0.801994301994302, + "f1_score": 0.8978873239436619, + "meteor": 0.8038328026851068, + "precision": 0.8673469387755102, + "pred_md": "The companies of the Sumitomo Mitsui Financial Group (SMFG) offer a diverse range of financial services, centered on banking operations, and including credit card services, leasing, information services, and securities.\n\n## Our Mission\n\n- ¥ To provide optimum added value to our customers and together with them achieve growth\n- ¥ To create sustainable shareholder value through business growth\n- ¥ T o provide a challenging and professionally rewarding work environment for our dedicated employees\n\nSumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation (SMBC) was established in April 2001 through the merger of two leading banks: The Sakura Bank, Limited, and The Sumitomo Bank, Limited. Sumitomo Mitsui Financial Group, Inc., was established in December 2002 through a stock transfer as a bank holding company, and SMBC became a wholly owned subsidiary of SMFG. In March 2003, SMBC merged with The Wakashio Bank, Ltd.\n\nSMBC's competitive advantages include a strong customer base, the quick implementation of strategies, and an extensive lineup of financial products and services that leverage the expertise of strategic Group companies in specialized areas. SMBC, as a core member of SMFG, works together with other members of the Group to offer customers highly sophisticated, comprehensive financial services.\n\nSMFG Card & Credit, Inc. ('FGCC') was established in October 2008 as an intermediate holding company of SMFG to hold shares of Sumitomo Mitsui Card Co., Ltd., and Cedyna Financial Corporation. FGCC is the core company responsible for implementing SMFG's credit card strategy and establishing uniform business policies. FGCC also creates a framework for promoting a solid partnership between Sumitomo Mitsui Card and Cedyna Financial Corporation, seeks to realize economies of scale for the Group as a whole, and maximizes top-line synergy by leveraging each party's strengths.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\nwww.smfg.co.jp/english/\n\nCompany Name: Sumitomo Mitsui Financial Group, Inc.\n\nBusiness Description:\n\nManagement of banking subsidiaries (under the stipulations of Japan's Banking Act) and of non-bank subsidiaries, as well as the performance of ancillary functions Establishment: December 2, 2002\n\nHead Office:\n\n1-2, Marunouchi 1-chome, Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo, Japan\n\nChairman of the Board: Masayuki Oku\n\nPresident: Koichi Miyata\n\n(Concurrent Director at Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation)\n\n(Appointed on April 1, 2011)\n\nCapital: ·2,337.8 billion (as of March 31, 2011)\n\nStock Exchange Listings:\n\nTokyo Stock Exchange (First Section)\n\nOsaka Securities Exchange (First Section)\n\nNagoya Stock Exchange (First Section)\n\nNote: American Depositary Receipts (ADRs) are listed on the New York Stock Exchange.\n\nwww.smbc.co.jp/global/index.html\n\n## Credit Ratings (as of June 30, 2011)\n\nFinancial Information (Consolidated basis, years ended March 31)\n\n16\n\n## SUMITOMO MITSUI Banking Corporation\n\nCompany Name:\n\nSumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation\n\nBusiness Profile:\n\nBanking\n\nEstablishment: June 6, 1996\n\nHead Office:\n\n1-2, Marunouchi 1-chome, Chiyoda-ku,\n\nTokyo, Japan\n\nPresident and CEO:\n\nTakeshi Kunibe (Concurrent Director at Sumitomo Mitsui\n\nFinancial Group)\n\nNumber of Employees:\n\n22,524\n\nNumber of branches and other business locations:\n\nIn Japan:\n\n1,547*\n\nBranches:\n\n493\n\n(Including 38 specialized deposit account branches)\n\nSub-branches:\n\n164\n\nBanking agencies:\n\n2\n\nOffices handling non-banking business: 23\n\nAutomated service centers:\n\n865\n\nOverseas:\n\n33\n\nBranches:\n\n15\n\nSub-branches:\n\n7\n\nRepresentative offices:\n\n11\n\n* The number of domestic branches excludes ATMs located at the business sites of companies and at retail convenience stores.\n\n## SMFG CARD & CREDIT, INC.\n\nCompany Name: SMFG Card & Credit, Inc. Business Profile: Management of subsidiaries and affiliates Establishment: October 1, 2008 Head Office: -2, Marunouchi 1-chome, Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo, Japan 1 President & CEO: Ikuhiko Morikawa (Appointed on April 1, 2011) Number of Employees: 32\n\nPursuit of economies of scale", + "recall": 0.9306569343065694, + "true_md": "Group Companies (as of March 31, 2011)\n\nwww.smfg.co.jp/english/\n\nThe companies of the Sumitomo Mitsui Financial Group (SMFG) offer a diverse range of financial services, centered on banking operations, and including credit card services, leasing, information services, and securities.\n\n## Our Mission\n\n- • To provide optimum added value to our customers and together with them achieve growth\n\n- • To create sustainable shareholder value through business growth\n\n- • To provide a challenging and professionally reward- ing work environment for our dedicated employees\n\nCompany Name: Sumitomo Mitsui Financial Group, Inc.\n\nBusiness Description: Management of banking subsidiaries (under the stipulations of Japan’s Banking Act) and of non-bank subsidiaries, as well as the performance of ancillary functions\n\nEstablishment: December 2, 2002\n\nHead Office: 1-2, Marunouchi 1-chome, Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo, Japan\n\nChairman of the Board: Masayuki Oku \n\nPresident: Koichi Miyata (Concurrent Director at Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation) (Appointed on April 1, 2011)\n\nCapital: ¥2,337.8 billion (as of March 31, 2011)\n\nStock Exchange Listings: Tokyo Stock Exchange (First Section) Osaka Securities Exchange (First Section) Nagoya Stock Exchange (First Section) Note: American Depositary Receipts (ADRs) are listed on the New York Stock Exchange.\n\nwww.smbc.co.jp/global/index.html\n\n## SUMITOMO MITSUI Banking Corporation\n\nSumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation (SMBC) was established in April 2001 through the merger of two leading banks: The Sakura Bank, Limited, and The Sumitomo Bank, Limited. Sumitomo Mitsui Financial Group, Inc., was established in December 2002 through a stock transfer as a bank holding company, and SMBC became a wholly owned subsidiary of SMFG. In March 2003, SMBC merged with The Wakashio Bank, Ltd. \n\nSMBC’s competitive advantages include a strong customer base, the quick implementation of strategies, and an extensive lineup of financial products and services that leverage the exper- tise of strategic Group companies in specialized areas. SMBC, as a core member of SMFG, works together with other members of the Group to offer customers highly sophisticated, comprehensive financial services.\n\nCompany Name: Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation\n\nBusiness Profile: Banking\n\nEstablishment: June 6, 1996\n\nHead Office: 1-2, Marunouchi 1-chome, Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo, Japan\n\nPresident and CEO: Takeshi Kunibe (Concurrent Director at Sumitomo Mitsui Financial Group)\n\nNumber of Employees: 22,524\n\nNumber of branches and other business locations: \n\n* The number of domestic branches excludes ATMs located at the business sites of companies and at retail convenience stores.\n\nSMFG Card & Credit, Inc. (“FGCC”) was estab- lished in October 2008 as an intermediate holding company of SMFG to hold shares of Sumitomo Mitsui Card Co., Ltd., and Cedyna Financial Corporation. FGCC is the core company respon- sible for implementing SMFG’s credit card strat- egy and establishing uniform business policies. FGCC also creates a framework for promoting a solid partnership between Sumitomo Mitsui Card and Cedyna Financial Corporation, seeks to real- ize economies of scale for the Group as a whole, and maximizes top-line synergy by leveraging each party’s strengths.\n\nCompany Name: SMFG Card & Credit, Inc.\n\nBusiness Profile: Management of subsidiaries and affiliates\n\nEstablishment: October 1, 2008\n\nHead Office: 1-2, Marunouchi 1-chome, Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo, Japan\n\nPresident & CEO: Ikuhiko Morikawa (Appointed on April 1, 2011)\n\nNumber of Employees: 32\n\nSMFG 2011 16\n\n## SMFG CARD & CREDIT, INC.\n\n## Credit Ratings (as of June 30, 2011)\n\n## Financial Information (Consolidated basis, years ended March 31)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8208416142358127, + "doc_id": "fa40973b8cde060548833a43244b82164f02af76458e86164d10f7e9acfc58da", + "edit_distance": 0.2230769230769231, + "f1_score": 0.9202453987730062, + "meteor": 0.8985175651842319, + "precision": 0.9259259259259259, + "pred_md": "## 2013 HIGHLIGHTS\n\n## Key Financial Information\n\n## Key Performance Indicators\n\n1 As adjusted amounts, pre-tax free cash flow, after-tax cash flow and adjusted net debt are Non-GAAP measures and should not be considered as a substitute or alternative for GAAP measures. They are not defined terms under IFRS, and do not have standard meanings, so may not be a reliable way to compare us to other companies. See 'Non-GAAP Measures' for information about these measures, including how we calculate them.\n\n2 As defined. See 'Additional GAAP Measures'.\n\n3 As defined. See 'Key Performance Indicators '.\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC.\n\n27\n\nMANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS", + "recall": 0.9146341463414634, + "true_md": "## 2013 HIGHLIGHTS\n\nMANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AN D ANALYSIS\n\n1 As adjusted amounts, pre-tax free cash flow, after-tax cash flow and adjusted net debt are Non-GAAP measures and should not be considered as a substitute or alternative for GAAP measures. They are not defined terms under IFRS, and do not have standard meanings, so may not be a reliable way to compare us to other companies. See “Non-GAAP Measures” for information about these measures, including how we calculate them.\n\n2 As defined. See “Additional GAAP Measures”.\n\n3 As defined. See “Key Performance Indicators ”.\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 27\n\n## Key Performance Indicators\n\n## Key Financial Information" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9101800945467742, + "doc_id": "68d584609cdc0267884eda139fca123e619097c920820fb30cb532d7a7420e61", + "edit_distance": 0.06944444444444445, + "f1_score": 0.9553903345724907, + "meteor": 0.9390142708533235, + "precision": 0.9553903345724907, + "pred_md": "## management's Discussion and analysis\n\nD\n\nollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\n## 2013 Dispositions - Investment Properties\n\nOn November 30, 2013, Killam sold a portfolio of ten MHCs in New Brunswick. Killam had invested $44.2 million to acquire and enhance this portfolio over the last ten years. The sale price of $69.0 million resulted in net cash proceeds of $42.6 million. The sale allowed Killam to crystallize the increased value of its New Brunswick MHC portfolio at current attractive cap-rates and use the funds to continue to geographically diversify and accretively grow the apartment portfolio. In addition, the transaction will further enhance FFO accretion as apartments acquired are expected to qualify for CMHC insured debt, resulting in mortgage rates 120 - 180 bps lower than conventional mortgages on MHC properties. The properties that were sold of are as follows:\n\n## Investment Properties Under Construction\n\nFor the years ended December 31,\n\nDuring 2013, Killam completed four development projects in the first half of the year; adding a total of 282 units to the Company's apartment portfolio in key operating markets in Atlantic Canada. Total development costs were $69.6 million and the properties generated $0.9 million in NOI during the year. Brighton House, located in Charlottetown, was completed in February 2013 and was fully leased by the end of the first quarter. Bennett House, located in St. John's, was completed in May 2013 and was fully leased within three months of opening. S2 located in Halifax and The Plaza located in Fredericton were both completed in May 2013 and are currently 62% and 61% leased. Management has developed specific advertising and marketing strategies for these two buildings and expects the buildings to be substantially leased by mid-2014. Management is anticipating a year-one stabilized all-cash yield of approximately 5% on these developments, and minimal capital requirements for the next 10 to 15 years.\n\nManagement believes that building and buying new apartments has the opportunity to generate more stable cash flows and improved returns on investments over time compared to buying older buildings. Management acknowledges that there was a dilutive impact on FFO per share growth during the period of construction but believes the short-term impact is more than offset by the 10-15 years of nominal maintenance costs provided by a newly built project. Older buildings typically require a much higher capital spend per year, estimated at least $1,200 per unit per year, versus an estimated $300 per unit for new construction. Assuming similar NOI growth between an old and new building, the lower capital spend on the new build is expected to result in a higher return on the total investment in the property in the first 10 - 15 years of ownership. Management expects to provide disclosure regarding capital spend associated with its new development projects over the next few years to provide support for this theory and show the Company's ability to grow the return on investments of the new developments over time.\n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013\n\n49", + "recall": 0.9553903345724907, + "true_md": "Management’s Discussion and Analysis Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\nManagement’s Discussion and Analysis Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\n## 2013 Dispositions ‑ Investment Properties\n\nOn November 30, 2013, Killam sold a portfolio of ten MHCs in New Brunswick. Killam had invested $44.2 million to acquire and enhance this portfolio over the last ten years. The sale price of $69.0 million resulted in net cash proceeds of $42.6 million. The sale allowed Killam to crystallize the increased value of its New Brunswick MHC portfolio at current attractive cap‑rates and use the funds to continue to geographically diversify and accretively grow the apartment portfolio. In addition, the transaction will further enhance FFO accretion as apartments acquired are expected to qualify for CMHC insured debt, resulting in mortgage rates 120 ‑ 180 bps lower than conventional mortgages on MHC properties. The properties that were sold of are as follows:\n\n## Investment Properties Under Construction\n\nFor the years ended December 31,\n\nDuring 2013, Killam completed four development projects in the first half of the year; adding a total of 282 units to the Company’s apartment portfolio in key operating markets in Atlantic Canada. Total development costs were $69.6 million and the properties generated $0.9 million in NOI during the year. Brighton House, located in Charlottetown, was completed in February 2013 and was fully leased by the end of the first quarter. Bennett House, located in St. John’s, was completed in May 2013 and was fully leased within three months of opening. S2 located in Halifax and The Plaza located in Fredericton were both completed in May 2013 and are currently 62% and 61% leased. Management has developed specific advertising and marketing strategies for these two buildings and expects the buildings to be substantially leased by mid‑2014. Management is anticipating a year‑one stabilized all‑cash yield of approximately 5% on these developments, and minimal capital requirements for the next 10 to 15 years.\n\nManagement believes that building and buying new apartments has the opportunity to generate more stable cash flows and improved returns on investments over time compared to buying older buildings. Management acknowledges that there was a dilutive impact on FFO per share growth during the period of construction but believes the short‑term impact is more than offset by the 10‑15 years of nominal maintenance costs provided by a newly built project. Older buildings typically require a much higher capital spend per year, estimated at least $1,200 per unit per year, versus an estimated $300 per unit for new construction. Assuming similar NOI growth between an old and new building, the lower capital spend on the new build is expected to result in a higher return on the total investment in the property in the first 10 – 15 years of ownership. Management expects to provide disclosure regarding capital spend associated with its new development projects over the next few years to provide support for this theory and show the Company’s ability to grow the return on investments of the new developments over time.\n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013 49" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8347563508866299, + "doc_id": "6cd483bb41375bb5165ff99eb6830e927b390a0945cd4107e4df2e709da60c38", + "edit_distance": 0.48148148148148145, + "f1_score": 0.9565217391304348, + "meteor": 0.9170574712643679, + "precision": 0.9565217391304348, + "pred_md": "## (3) Nonconsolidated Statements of Changes in Net Assets\n\nSumitomo Mitsui Financial Group, Inc.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n137\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nSMFG", + "recall": 0.9565217391304348, + "true_md": "SMFG Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n- (3) Nonconsolidated Statements of Changes in Net Assets\n\nSumitomo Mitsui Financial Group, Inc.\n\nSMFG 2011 137" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8264347856286876, + "doc_id": "a67261d5d6c3dcc36baa61b8169b07024b5aa303444946b89191e35e9ea5b6b8", + "edit_distance": 0.16341463414634147, + "f1_score": 0.9963235294117647, + "meteor": 0.8022120713525766, + "precision": 0.9963235294117647, + "pred_md": "## LIQUIDITY AND CAPITAL RESOURCES\n\nWe strive to maintain a level of liquidity sufficient to allow us to cover our seasonal cash needs and to maintain appropriate levels of shortterm borrowings. We believe that our operating cash flows, available credit facilities and potential future borrowings are sufficient to finance our cash requirements for the next 12 months and beyond.\n\nOver the long term, we manage our cash and capital structure to maximize shareholder return, maintain our financial position, manage refinancing risk and allow flexibility for strategic initiatives. We regularly assess our debt and leverage levels, capital expenditure requirements, debt service payments, dividend payouts, potential share repurchases and other future investments. We believe that as of January 31, 2015, our existing cash and cash equivalents on-hand of $827, available credit facilities of $800 and potential future operating cash flows and borrowings will be sufficient to fund these scheduled future payments and potential long-term initiatives. Additionally, if an agreement is reached and a transaction is consummated in regards to our credit card receivables, it could result in additional cash flows to further support our capital requirements and strategic initiatives.\n\n## Operating Activities\n\nNet cash provided by operating activities was $1,220 in 2014, $1,320 in 2013 and $1,110 in 2012. The majority of our operating cash inflows are derived from sales. We also receive cash payments for property incentives from developers. Our operating cash outflows generally consist of payments to our merchandise vendors (net of vendor allowances), payments to our employees for wages, salaries and other employee benefits and payments to our landlords for rent. Operating cash outflows also include payments for income taxes and interest payments on our short-term and long-term borrowings.\n\nCash provided by operating activities decreased in 2014 compared with 2013, which was primarily due to higher state tax payments made in 2014 compared with 2013, as well as changes in working capital in 2014.\n\nCash provided by operating activities increased in 2013 compared with 2012, resulting from less state tax payments made in 2013 due to additional payments made in 2012 as a result of the 53rd week, along with increased property incentives received from developers and changes in working capital.\n\n## Investing Activities\n\nNet cash used in investing activities was $889 in 2014, $822 in 2013 and $369 in 2012. Our investing cash flows primarily consist of capital expenditures, changes in restricted cash accumulated for debt maturities and changes in credit card receivables associated with cardholder purchases outside of Nordstrom using our Nordstrom Visa credit cards.\n\n## Capital Expenditures\n\nOur capital expenditures over the last three years totaled $2,177, with $861 in 2014, $803 in 2013 and $513 in 2012. Capital expenditures increased in 2014 compared with 2013 primarily due to ongoing store expansion and increased technology investments.\n\nCapital expenditures increased in 2013 compared with 2012 as we continued to make progress executing our customer strategy through increased investments in technology, ecommerce, remodels and new stores, including Nordstrom Rack and our Manhattan full-line store.\n\nThe following table summarizes our store count and square footage activity:\n\n1 Other stores include Jeffrey boutiques, Trunk Club showrooms, our Nordstrom Canada full-line store and Last Chance.\n\nWe had no store relocations in 2014, compared with one Nordstrom full-line store and two Nordstrom Rack relocations in 2013 and three Nordstrom Rack relocations in 2012. Our 2014 new store openings increased our square footage by 5.5%.\n\nTo date in 2015, we have opened our second full-line store in Canada. We plan to open 27 Nordstrom Rack stores, three additional Nordstrom full-line stores in the U.S. and another full-line store in Canada during 2015. Planned net store openings are expected to increase our retail square footage by approximately 6.1%.\n\nNordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 27", + "recall": 0.9963235294117647, + "true_md": "## LIQUIDITY AND CAPITAL RESOURCES We strive to maintain a level of liquidity sufficient to allow us to cover our seasonal cash needs and to maintain appropriate levels of short-\n\n## Operating Activities Net cash provided by operating activities was $1,220 in 2014, $1,320 in 2013 and $1,110 in 2012. The majority of our operating cash inflows\n\nLIQUIDITY AND CAPITAL RESOURCES We strive to maintain a level of liquidity sufficient to allow us to cover our seasonal cash needs and to maintain appropriate levels of short- term borrowings. We believe that our operating cash flows, available credit facilities and potential future borrowings are sufficient to finance our cash requirements for the next 12 months and beyond.\n\nOver the long term, we manage our cash and capital structure to maximize shareholder return, maintain our financial position, manage refinancing risk and allow flexibility for strategic initiatives. We regularly assess our debt and leverage levels, capital expenditure requirements, debt service payments, dividend payouts, potential share repurchases and other future investments. We believe that as of January 31, 2015, our existing cash and cash equivalents on-hand of $827, available credit facilities of $800 and potential future operating cash flows and borrowings will be sufficient to fund these scheduled future payments and potential long-term initiatives. Additionally, if an agreement is reached and a transaction is consummated in regards to our credit card receivables, it could result in additional cash flows to further support our capital requirements and strategic initiatives. \n\nOperating Activities Net cash provided by operating activities was $1,220 in 2014, $1,320 in 2013 and $1,110 in 2012. The majority of our operating cash inflows are derived from sales. We also receive cash payments for property incentives from developers. Our operating cash outflows generally consist of payments to our merchandise vendors (net of vendor allowances), payments to our employees for wages, salaries and other employee benefits and payments to our landlords for rent. Operating cash outflows also include payments for income taxes and interest payments on our short-term and long-term borrowings.\n\nCash provided by operating activities decreased in 2014 compared with 2013, which was primarily due to higher state tax payments made in 2014 compared with 2013, as well as changes in working capital in 2014.\n\nCash provided by operating activities increased in 2013 compared with 2012, resulting from less state tax payments made in 2013 due to additional payments made in 2012 as a result of the 53rd week, along with increased property incentives received from developers and changes in working capital.\n\nInvesting Activities Net cash used in investing activities was $889 in 2014, $822 in 2013 and $369 in 2012. Our investing cash flows primarily consist of capital expenditures, changes in restricted cash accumulated for debt maturities and changes in credit card receivables associated with cardholder purchases outside of Nordstrom using our Nordstrom Visa credit cards.\n\nCapital Expenditures Our capital expenditures over the last three years totaled $2,177, with $861 in 2014, $803 in 2013 and $513 in 2012. Capital expenditures \n\nCapital Expenditures Our capital expenditures over the last three years totaled $2,177, with $861 in 2014, $803 in 2013 and $513 in 2012. Capital expenditures increased in 2014 compared with 2013 primarily due to ongoing store expansion and increased technology investments. \n\nCapital expenditures increased in 2013 compared with 2012 as we continued to make progress executing our customer strategy through increased investments in technology, ecommerce, remodels and new stores, including Nordstrom Rack and our Manhattan full-line store. \n\nThe following table summarizes our store count and square footage activity:\n\n## Investing Activities Net cash used in investing activities was $889 in 2014, $822 in 2013 and $369 in 2012. Our investing cash flows primarily consist of capital\n\n1 Other stores include Jeffrey boutiques, Trunk Club showrooms, our Nordstrom Canada full-line store and Last Chance.\n\nWe had no store relocations in 2014, compared with one Nordstrom full-line store and two Nordstrom Rack relocations in 2013 and three Nordstrom Rack relocations in 2012. Our 2014 new store openings increased our square footage by 5.5%.\n\nTo date in 2015, we have opened our second full-line store in Canada. We plan to open 27 Nordstrom Rack stores, three additional Nordstrom full-line stores in the U.S. and another full-line store in Canada during 2015. Planned net store openings are expected to increase our retail square footage by approximately 6.1%.\n\nNordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 27" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9209516051476746, + "doc_id": "b37575832376e2cc9847ff981500cb3207eb7caf09beb4ab3c4212498eeb122c", + "edit_distance": 0.1398176291793313, + "f1_score": 0.9673913043478262, + "meteor": 0.9519796814390741, + "precision": 0.9726775956284153, + "pred_md": "## Exploration\n\nWith the approvals of the Special Prospecting Licence ('SPL') applications in Thailand still awaiting the Minister of Industry's consent, exploration attention over the past 12 months has focused on new exploration opportunities and Mineral Resource enhancement targets within the Mining Leases. This exploration formed part of a strategic exploration program within the mining leases at Chatree that commenced in late 2012. The program has successfully defined several new areas of mineralisation within the Mining Lease, most notably at Q and A North Prospects, and has also upgraded several larger areas of Inferred Resources to the Measured and Indicated Mineral Resource category.\n\n5\n\nManaging Director and CEO's Report\n\n## Looking Ahead\n\nOver the current financial year and beyond, Kingsgate remains focused on optimising production within an uncertain metal price environment, continuing to build resources and reserves and advancing the development project pipeline of Nueva Esperanza and Bowdens. These initiatives are designed to grow earnings per share for the benefit of all shareholders.\n\nIn late September, Kingsgate's Thai subsidiary, Akara Resources Public Company Limited ('Akara') has submitted its listing application and draft Prospectus to the Thai Securities Exchange Commission (SEC) and the Stock Exchange of Thailand (SET) for an initial public offering of its shares on the SET.\n\nThe SEC and SET will review the draft Prospectus in the coming months in order to approve the listing of Akara. The decision to list Akara will depend on market conditions and other factors at the time of approval.\n\nGroup gold production for the full year to 30 June 2014 is expected to be in the range of 190,000 to 210,000 ounces. This includes 120,000 to 130,000 ounces from Chatree and 70,000 to 80,000 ounces from Challenger.\n\nMD and CEO's Report", + "recall": 0.9621621621621622, + "true_md": "5 Managing Director and CEO’s Report\n\nMD and CEO’ s Report\n\n## Exploration\n\n## Looking Ahead\n\nWith the approvals of the Special Prospecting Licence (“SPL”) applications in Thailand still awaiting the Minister of Industry’s consent, exploration attention over the past 12 months has focused on new exploration opportunities and Mineral Resource enhancement targets within the Mining Leases. This exploration formed part of a strategic exploration program within the mining leases at Chatree that commenced in late 2012. The program has successfully defined several new areas of miner- alisation within the Mining Lease, most notably at Q and A North Prospects, and has also upgraded several larger areas of Inferred Resources to the Measured and Indicated Mineral Resource category. \n\nOver the current financial year and beyond, Kingsgate remains focused on optimising production within an uncertain metal price environment, continuing to build resources and reserves and advancing the development project pipeline of Nueva Esperanza and Bowdens. These initiatives are designed to grow earnings per share for the benefit of all shareholders.\n\nIn late September, Kingsgate’s Thai subsidiary, Akara Resources Public Company Limited (“Akara”) has submitted its listing application and draft Prospectus to the Thai Securities Exchange Commission (SEC) and the Stock Exchange of Thailand (SET) for an initial public offering of its shares on the SET.\n\nThe SEC and SET will review the draft Prospectus in the coming months in order to approve the listing of Akara. The decision to list Akara will depend on market conditions and other factors at the time of approval.\n\nGroup gold production for the full year to 30 June 2014 is expected to be in the range of 190,000 to 210,000 ounces. This includes 120,000 to 130,000 ounces from Chatree and 70,000 to 80,000 ounces from Challenger." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "7ef35b0d4325776602f245c8049295ea7d1f6d7ed9591a12ffc36754c0ac382d", + "edit_distance": 0.9865470852017937, + "f1_score": 0.1, + "meteor": 0.06796690307328605, + "precision": 0.06382978723404255, + "pred_md": "| Operations Report 12 |\n|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|\n| Chatree Gold Mine, Thailand . . . . . . . . . . . 12 |\n| Challenger Gold Mine, South Australia . . . . . . . . 20 |\n| Projects Report 26 |\n| Bowdens Silver Project, New South Wales . . . . . . 26 |\n| Nueva Esperanza Project, Chile . . . . . . . . . . 28 |\n| Exploration Report 30 |\n| Ore Reserves and Mineral Resources . . . . . . . . . 32 |\n| Competent Persons Statement. . . . . . . . . . . 33 |\n| Corporate Governance Statement 34 Senior Management 39 |\n\nCompany Activities", + "recall": 0.23076923076923078, + "true_md": "11 Company Activities\n\nCompany Activi ties\n\nfor the year ended 30 June 2013\n\n## Company Activities" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8988649761906027, + "doc_id": "03432b6c8ddf7224f5cccb1fce9229894f0664ef89f866f03a6a1c445dbad7a6", + "edit_distance": 0.21772151898734177, + "f1_score": 0.9841269841269842, + "meteor": 0.9278581535347019, + "precision": 0.9908675799086758, + "pred_md": "## F. Company Performance and Shareholder Wealth\n\nThe following table sets out the Company's performance during the years ended 31 December 2014, 2013, the six month period ended 31 December 2012 and the preceding two years ended 30 June in respect of several key financial indicators (in US thousands, except where otherwise stated):\n\n* Six month period ended (all other periods shown are for full year periods)\n\n** Basic and diluted\n\n## G. Remuneration of Non-Executive Directors\n\nThe Non-executive directors receive a basic annual fee for board membership and annual fees for committee service and chairmanships. For the Australian non-executive directors this is inclusive of the superannuation guarantee contribution required by the Australian government, which changed to 9.50% at 1 July 2014 (previously 9.25%). In accordance with ASX corporate governance principles, they do not receive any other retirement benefits or any performance-related incentive payments by means of cash or equity. Some individuals, however, have chosen to contribute part of their salary to superannuation in order to access the available favourable tax advantage of doing so ('Salary sacrifice').\n\nTo align directors' interests with shareholder interests, the directors are required to hold our ordinary shares equal to three times their base board fees. Each Non-Executive Director has five years from their appointment to achieve this shareholding requirement. All remuneration paid to directors and executives is valued in accordance with applicable IFRS accounting rules.\n\nA review by Meridian was commissioned by the Remuneration and Nominations Committee in November 2014. The Remuneration and Nominations Committee found that the NED fee structure was within competitive range of its Australian peer companies, and that the remuneration per NED is near the median (46th percentile).\n\n## Summary of Non-Executive Director Pay Elements\n\nNon-executive Directors' fees are determined within an aggregate Directors' fee pool limit, which is periodically recommended for approval by shareholders. The maximum currently stands at $950,000 per annum which was approved by shareholders at the Annual General Meeting on 28 May 2013.\n\n- 39 -", + "recall": 0.9774774774774775, + "true_md": "## F. Company Performance and Shareholder Wealth\n\n## G. Remuneration of Non-Executive Directors\n\nThe following table sets out the Company’s performance during the years ended 31 December 2014, 2013, the six month period ended 31 December 2012 and the preceding two years ended 30 June in respect of several key financial indicators (in US thousands, except where otherwise stated): \n\nThe Non-executive directors receive a basic annual fee for board membership and annual fees for committee service and chairmanships. For the Australian non-executive directors this is inclusive of the superannuation guarantee contribution required by the Australian government, which changed to 9.50% at 1 July 2014 (previously 9.25%). In accordance with ASX corporate governance principles, they do not receive any other retirement benefits or any performance-related incentive payments by means of cash or equity. Some individuals, however, have chosen to contribute part of their salary to superannuation in order to access the available favourable tax advantage of doing so (“Salary sacrifice”).\n\nTo align directors' interests with shareholder interests, the directors are required to hold our ordinary shares equal to three times their base board fees. Each Non-Executive Director has five years from their appointment to achieve this shareholding requirement. All remuneration paid to directors and executives is valued in accordance with applicable IFRS accounting rules.\n\nA review by Meridian was commissioned by the Remuneration and Nominations Committee in November 2014. The Remuneration and Nominations Committee found that the NED fee structure was within competitive range of its Australian peer companies, and that the remuneration per NED is near the median (46th percentile). \n\nSummary of Non-Executive Director Pay Elements Non-executive Directors’ fees are determined within an aggregate Directors’ fee pool limit, which is periodically recommended for approval by shareholders. The maximum currently stands at $950,000 per annum which was approved by shareholders at the Annual General Meeting on 28 May 2013. \n\n- 39 - \n\n* Six month period ended (all other periods shown are for full year periods) ** Basic and diluted \n\n* Six month period ended (all other periods shown are for full year periods) ** Basic and diluted" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9300685459264291, + "doc_id": "f2103c17ed7b39ce17058f0ff1b9fbdcdd8cc6a1e5d60313bf58fbf62217292c", + "edit_distance": 0.6020408163265306, + "f1_score": 0.9582309582309584, + "meteor": 0.9166751412810729, + "precision": 0.9558823529411765, + "pred_md": "## FINANCIAL AND OPERATING GUIDANCE\n\nWe provide consolidated annual guidance ranges for selected financial metrics on a consolidated basis consistent with the annual plans approved by our Board of Directors.\n\n## 2013 ACHIEVEMENTS AGAINST GUIDANCE\n\nThe following table outlines guidance ranges, actual results and achievements for the selected full year 2013 financial metrics.\n\nAchieved\n\n✓\n\nExceeded\n\n+\n\n1 Adjusted operating profit and pre-tax free cash flow are Non-GAAP measures and should not be considered as a substitute or alternative for GAAP measures. They are not defined terms under IFRS, and do not have standard meanings, so may not be a reliable way to compare us to other companies. See 'Non-GAAP Measures' for information about these measures, including how we calculate them.\n\n2 Includes additions to property, plant and equipment expenditures for Wireless, Cable, Media, Business Solutions, and Corporate segments.\n\n3 In the third quarter of 2013, we reduced our guidance for cash income taxes to be approximately $500 million to reflect the results of a number of tax planning initiatives.\n\n## 2014 FULL YEAR CONSOLIDATED GUIDANCE\n\nThe following table outlines guidance ranges and assumptions for selected full year 2014 financial metrics, on a consolidated basis that we set forth on February 12, 2014, which takes into consideration our current outlook and our actual results for 2013 and are based on a number of assumptions. Information about our guidance including the assumptions underlying our guidance is forward-looking and should be read in conjunction with 'About Forward-Looking Information' and 'Risks and Uncertainties Affecting Our Business' and the related disclosure and information about various economic, competitive and regulatory assumptions, factors and risks that may cause our actual future financial and operating results to differ from what we currently expect.\n\n1 Adjusted operating profit and after-tax free cash flow are Non-GAAP measures and should not be considered as a substitute or alternative for GAAP measures. They are not defined terms under IFRS, and do not have standard meanings, so may not be a reliable way to compare us to other companies. See 'Non-GAAP Measures' for information about these measures, including how we calculate them.\n\n2 Includes additions to property, plant and equipment expenditures for Wireless, Cable, Media, Business Solutions, and Corporate segments and excludes purchases of spectrum licences, such as, but not limited to, the cost for 700MHz spectrum from a planned national auction in the first half of 2014.\n\nOur 2014 full year consolidated guidance are based on a number of key assumptions, certain of which we disclosed in our fourth quarter earnings release issued on February 12, 2014.\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC.\n\n33\n\nMANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS", + "recall": 0.9605911330049262, + "true_md": "We provide consolidated annual guidance ranges for selected financial metrics on a consolidated basis consistent with the annual plans approved by our Board of Directors.\n\nThe following table outlines guidance ranges, actual results and achievements for the selected full year 2013 financial metrics.\n\nThe following table outlines guidance ranges and assumptions for selected full year 2014 financial metrics, on a consolidated basis that we set forth on February 12, 2014, which takes into consideration our current outlook and our actual results for 2013 and are based on a number of assumptions. Information about our guidance including the assumptions underlying our guidance is forward-looking and should be read in conjunction with “About Forward-Looking Information” and “Risks and Uncertainties Affecting Our Business” and the related disclosure and information about various economic, competitive and regulatory assumptions, factors and risks that may cause our actual future financial and operating results to differ from what we currently expect.\n\n1 Adjusted operating profit and pre-tax free cash flow are Non-GAAP measures and should not be considered as a substitute or alternative for GAAP measures. They are not defined terms under IFRS, and do not have standard meanings, so may not be a reliable way to compare us to other companies. See “Non-GAAP Measures” for information about these measures, including how we calculate them.\n\n2 Includes additions to property, plant and equipment expenditures for Wireless, Cable, Media, Business Solutions, and Corporate segments.\n\n3 In the third quarter of 2013, we reduced our guidance for cash income taxes to be approximately $500 million to reflect the results of a number of tax planning initiatives.\n\n1 Adjusted operating profit and after-tax free cash flow are Non-GAAP measures and should not be considered as a substitute or alternative for GAAP measures. They are not defined terms under IFRS, and do not have standard meanings, so may not be a reliable way to compare us to other companies. See “Non-GAAP Measures” for information about these measures, including how we calculate them.\n\n2 Includes additions to property, plant and equipment expenditures for Wireless, Cable, Media, Business Solutions, and Corporate segments and excludes purchases of spectrum licences, such as, but not limited to, the cost for 700MHz spectrum from a planned national auction in the first half of 2014.\n\nOur 2014 full year consolidated guidance are based on a number of key assumptions, certain of which we disclosed in our fourth quarter earnings release issued on February 12, 2014.\n\nMANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AN D ANALYSIS\n\n## FINANCIAL AND OPERATING GUIDANCE\n\n## 2013 ACHIEVEMENTS AGAINST GUIDANCE\n\n## 2014 FULL YEAR CONSOLIDATED GUIDANCE\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 33" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8331909160597846, + "doc_id": "5d22698f03c990363977a2c534d86095e98548a8dc706d43e3cbf6b0fce31874", + "edit_distance": 0.15833333333333333, + "f1_score": 0.9930069930069932, + "meteor": 0.8612993216377042, + "precision": 0.9953271028037384, + "pred_md": "## Nordstrom, Inc.\n\n## Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nDollar and share amounts in millions except per share, per option and per unit amounts\n\nThe components of the purchase price consideration and the net assets acquired as of the acquisition date are as follows:\n\n## Purchase Price Consideration\n\nThe $357 purchase price, which is based on the closing stock price of $69 per share on August 22, 2014, includes $46 attributable to Trunk Club employee stock awards that are subject to ongoing vesting requirements. The $46 will be recorded as compensation expense as the related service is performed over the respective employee vesting periods of up to four years after the acquisition date. Of the purchase price consideration, $9 is attributable to an adjustment holdback settled primarily in Nordstrom stock in the fourth quarter of fiscal 2014 and $35 represents an indemnity holdback that will be settled primarily in Nordstrom stock over the next three years upon satisfaction of the representations, warranties and covenants subject to the indemnities.\n\nOf the $311 net purchase price, $280 was recorded to common stock for 3.6 Nordstrom common shares at acquisition, 0.1 fully vested Nordstrom stock options and 0.1 Nordstrom common shares for the release of an acquisition adjustment holdback. The remaining $31 of net purchase price was recorded as a liability for future issuances of shares and cash related to the indemnity holdback.\n\n## Net Assets Acquired\n\nWe allocated the net purchase price of $311 to the tangible and intangible assets acquired and liabilities assumed based on their estimated fair values on the acquisition date, with the remaining unallocated net purchase price recorded as goodwill. We estimated the fair values of the acquired intangible assets based on discounted cash flow models using estimates and assumptions regarding future operations and cash flows. We will amortize the acquired intangible assets over their estimated lives on a straight-line basis, which approximates the pattern of expected economic benefit. The expected amortization periods for intangible assets acquired are seven years for trade names, two years for technology and 2.5 years for customer relationships. We expect to record total amortization expense of $59 associated with these intangible assets over the next seven years, including $5 recognized in 2014.\n\nGoodwill of $261 is equal to the excess of the net purchase price over the identifiable assets acquired and liabilities assumed and represents the acquisition's benefits that are not attributable to individually identified and separately recognized assets. These benefits include our expected ability to increase innovation and speed in the way we serve customers across channels, Trunk Club's assembled workforce, including its key management, and the going-concern value of acquiring Trunk Club's business as a whole. We assigned this goodwill, which is not deductible for tax purposes, to our Retail segment.\n\nNordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 47", + "recall": 0.9906976744186047, + "true_md": "## Nordstrom, Inc. Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements Dollar and share amounts in millions except per share, per option and per unit amounts\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements Dollar and share amounts in millions except per share, per option and per unit amounts\n\nThe components of the purchase price consideration and the net assets acquired as of the acquisition date are as follows:\n\nPurchase Price Consideration The $357 purchase price, which is based on the closing stock price of $69 per share on August 22, 2014, includes $46 attributable to Trunk Club employee stock awards that are subject to ongoing vesting requirements. The $46 will be recorded as compensation expense as the related service is performed over the respective employee vesting periods of up to four years after the acquisition date. Of the purchase price consideration, $9 is attributable to an adjustment holdback settled primarily in Nordstrom stock in the fourth quarter of fiscal 2014 and $35 represents an indemnity holdback that will be settled primarily in Nordstrom stock over the next three years upon satisfaction of the representations, warranties and covenants subject to the indemnities.\n\n## Purchase Price Consideration The $357 purchase price, which is based on the closing stock price of $69 per share on August 22, 2014, includes $46 attributable to Trunk\n\n## Net Assets Acquired We allocated the net purchase price of $311 to the tangible and intangible assets acquired and liabilities assumed based on their estimated\n\nOf the $311 net purchase price, $280 was recorded to common stock for 3.6 Nordstrom common shares at acquisition, 0.1 fully vested Nordstrom stock options and 0.1 Nordstrom common shares for the release of an acquisition adjustment holdback. The remaining $31 of net purchase price was recorded as a liability for future issuances of shares and cash related to the indemnity holdback.\n\nNet Assets Acquired We allocated the net purchase price of $311 to the tangible and intangible assets acquired and liabilities assumed based on their estimated fair values on the acquisition date, with the remaining unallocated net purchase price recorded as goodwill. We estimated the fair values of the acquired intangible assets based on discounted cash flow models using estimates and assumptions regarding future operations and cash flows. We will amortize the acquired intangible assets over their estimated lives on a straight-line basis, which approximates the pattern of expected economic benefit. The expected amortization periods for intangible assets acquired are seven years for trade names, two years for technology and 2.5 years for customer relationships. We expect to record total amortization expense of $59 associated with these intangible assets over the next seven years, including $5 recognized in 2014.\n\nGoodwill of $261 is equal to the excess of the net purchase price over the identifiable assets acquired and liabilities assumed and represents the acquisition’s benefits that are not attributable to individually identified and separately recognized assets. These benefits include our expected ability to increase innovation and speed in the way we serve customers across channels, Trunk Club’s assembled workforce, including its key management, and the going-concern value of acquiring Trunk Club’s business as a whole. We assigned this goodwill, which is not deductible for tax purposes, to our Retail segment. \n\nNordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 47" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8818992050610563, + "doc_id": "cf2850dc0570f0022fd7d04f2859b87206a5adc6e9f1c589a31f8a149fbed49d", + "edit_distance": 0.323943661971831, + "f1_score": 0.9183673469387756, + "meteor": 0.9078415127442857, + "precision": 0.9183673469387755, + "pred_md": "## Securities\n\n## Year-End Balance\n\nNotes: 1. Domestic operations comprise the operations of SMFG, its domestic consolidated banking subsidiaries (excluding overseas branches) and other domestic consolidated subsidiaries. Overseas operations comprise the operations of the overseas branches of domestic consolidated banking subsidiaries and overseas consolidated subsidiaries.\n\n- 2. 'Others' include foreign bonds and foreign stocks.\n\n## Trading Assets and Liabilities\n\nNotes: 1. Domestic operations comprise the operations of SMFG, its domestic consolidated banking subsidiaries (excluding overseas branches) and other domestic consolidated subsidiaries. Overseas operations comprise the operations of the overseas branches of domestic consolidated banking subsidiaries and overseas consolidated subsidiaries.\n\n- 2. Intersegment transactions are reported in the 'Elimination' column.\n\nAssets and Liabilities (Consolidated)\n\nSMFG 2011\n\nSMFG\n\n151", + "recall": 0.9183673469387755, + "true_md": "Assets and Liabilities (Consolidated)\n\nSMFG\n\n## Securities\n\n## Year-End Balance\n\n## Trading Assets and Liabilities\n\nNotes: 1. Domestic operations comprise the operations of SMFG, its domestic consolidated banking subsidiaries (excluding overseas branches) and other domestic consolidated subsidiaries. Overseas operations comprise the operations of the overseas branches of domestic consolidated banking subsidiaries and overseas consolidated subsidiaries.\n\n2. Intersegment transactions are reported in the “Elimination” column.\n\nNotes: 1. Domestic operations comprise the operations of SMFG, its domestic consolidated banking subsidiaries (excluding overseas branches) and other domestic consolidated subsidiaries. Overseas operations comprise the operations of the overseas branches of domestic consolidated banking subsidiaries and overseas consolidated subsidiaries.\n\n2. “Others” include foreign bonds and foreign stocks.\n\nSMFG 2011 151" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9248804085626534, + "doc_id": "a6a468dd5ca52b8f3bc078e9f255659368e59993d288a71c249bb54e18c6ae7d", + "edit_distance": 0.12244897959183673, + "f1_score": 0.9558823529411766, + "meteor": 0.9609467358389782, + "precision": 0.9701492537313433, + "pred_md": "## (B) Portfolio\n\n## a. Domestic Corporate, Sovereign and Bank Exposures\n\nNote: 'Others' includes exposures guaranteed by credit guarantee corporations, exposures to public sector entities and voluntary organizations, and exposures to obligors not assigned obligor grades because they have yet to close their books (for example, newly established companies), as well as business loans and standardized SME loans of more than ¥100 million.\n\n## b. Overseas Corporate, Sovereign and Bank Exposures\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n183\n\nCapital Ratio Information\n\nSMFG", + "recall": 0.9420289855072463, + "true_md": "SMFG Capital Ratio Information\n\n## (B) Portfolio\n\n## a. Domestic Corporate, Sovereign and Bank Exposures\n\n- Note: “Others” includes exposures guaranteed by credit guarantee corporations, exposures to public sector entities and voluntary organizations, and exposures to obligors not assigned obligor grades because they have yet to close their books (for example, newly established companies), as well as business loans and standardized SME loans of more than ¥100 million.\n\n## b. Overseas Corporate, Sovereign and Bank Exposures\n\nSMFG 2011 183" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7550917494381882, + "doc_id": "2c7fa675a7f7d974753fee49c86ba52212d32f6073794e515dff3a7d40ba8ce4", + "edit_distance": 0.19444444444444445, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.8164492304600492, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Nordstrom, Inc.\n\n## Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows\n\nIn millions\n\nThe accompanying Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements are an integral part of these financial statements.\n\n40", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## Nordstrom, Inc. Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows In millions\n\nConsolidated Statements of Cash Flows In millions\n\nThe accompanying Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements are an integral part of these financial statements.\n\n40" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9007583973453228, + "doc_id": "07fea504b579efccc337dcc49b2c8277964ba5793bd4b3f631528eb9654e8d21", + "edit_distance": 0.8008510638297872, + "f1_score": 0.9464922711058265, + "meteor": 0.7213880242283779, + "precision": 0.9731051344743277, + "pred_md": "- rights may give control. The standard is applicable to the Group from 1 July 2013. Based on investments held by the Group as at 30 June 2013, the standard is not expected to have a significant impact.\n- 〉 AASB 12 Disclosure of Interests in Other Entities (effective for annual reporting periods commencing on or after 1 January 2013). AASB 12 includes all disclosures relating to an entity's interests in subsidiaries, joint arrangements, associates and structures entities. New disclosures have been introduced about the judgements made by management to determine whether control exists, and to require summarised information about joint arrangements, associates and structured entities and subsidiaries with non-controlling interests. The standard is applicable to the Group from 1 July 2013. Based on interests held by the Group as at 30 June 2013, the standard is not expected to have a significant impact.\n- 〉 AASB 13 Fair Value Measurement (effective for annual reporting periods commencing on or after 1 January 2013). AASB 13 establishes a single framework for measuring fair value of financial and non-financial items recognised at fair value in the statement of financial position or disclosed in the notes to the financial statements. The standard is not applicable until 1 January 2013 but is available for early adoption. The Group does not expect any material impact on adoption of the standard.\n- 〉 AASB 119 Employee Benefits (effective for annual reporting periods commencing on or after 1 January 2013). The revised standard changes the definition of short-term employee benefits. The distinction between short-term and other long-term employee benefits is now based on whether the benefits are expected to be settled wholly within 12 months after the reporting date.\n- 〉 IFRIC 20 Stripping Costs in the Production Phase of a Surface Mine (effective for annual reporting periods commencing on or after 1 January 2013). IFRIC 20 provides guidance on the accounting for the costs of stripping activity in the production phase of surface mining when two benefits accrue to the entity from the stripping activity: useable ore that can be used to produce inventory and improved access to further quantities of material that will be mined in future periods. The Company will adapt IFRIC 20 from 1 July 2013. Based on the current mine plans this IFRIC is not expected to have a significant impact.\n- 〉 AASB 2011-4 Amendments to Australian Accounting Standards to Remove Individual Key Management Personnel Disclosure Requirements (effective from 1 July 2013). AASB 2011-4 makes amendments to remove individual key management personnel disclosure requirements from AASB 124.\n- 〉 AASB 2012-2 Amendments to Australian Accounting Standards - Disclosures Offsetting Financial Assets and Financial Liabilities (effective from 1 July 2013). ASB 2012-2 principally amends AASB 7 Financial Instruments: Disclosures to require disclosure of information that will enable users of an entity's financial statements to evaluate the effect or potential effect of netting arrangements, including rights of set-off associated with an entity's recognised financial assets and recognised financial liabilities, on the entity's financial position.\n- 〉 AASB 2012-3 Amendments to Australian Accounting Standards - Offsetting Financial Assets and Financial Liabilities (effective from 1 July 2014). AASB 2012-3 adds application guidance to AASB 132 Financial Instruments: Presentation to address inconsistencies identified in applying some of the offsetting criteria of AASB 132, including clarifying the meaning of 'currently has a legally enforceable right of set-off' and that some gross settlement systems may be considered equivalent to net settlement.\n\n## dd . Parent entity financial information\n\nThe financial information for the parent entity Kingsgate Consolidated Limited, disclosed in Note 32 has been prepared on the same basis as the consolidated financial statements except as set out below:\n\n## Investments in subsidiaries\n\nInvestments in subsidiaries are accounted for at cost in the financial statements of Kingsgate.\n\n## Share-based payments\n\nThe issue by the Company of equity instruments to extinguish liabilities of a subsidiary undertaking in the Group is treated as a capital contribution to that subsidiary undertaking.\n\n## 3. Critical accounting estimates, assumptions and judgements\n\nEstimates and judgements are continually evaluated and are based on historical experience and other factors, including expectation of future events that may have a financial impact on the Group and that are believed to be\n\n75\n\nNotes to the Financial Statements\n\nreasonable under the circumstances. The Group makes estimates and assumptions concerning the future. Actual results may differ from these estimates under different assumptions and conditions. The estimates and assumptions that could materially affect the financial position and results are discussed below:\n\n## (i) Mineral resources and ore reserves estimates\n\nThe Group determines and reports ore reserves under the Australian Code for Reporting of Mineral Resources and Ore Reserves December 2004, known as the JORC Code. The information on mineral resources and ore reserves was prepared by or under the supervision of Competent Persons as defined in the JORC Code.\n\nThere are numerous uncertainties inherent in estimating mineral resources and reserves and assumptions that are valid at the time of estimation may change significantly when new information becomes available.\n\nChanges in reported ore reserves may affect the Group's financial position and results, including asset carrying value, depreciation and amortisation expenses using units-of-production method, provision for restoration and rehabilitation and stripping costs if the stripping ratios are revised.\n\n## (ii) Exploration and evaluation assets\n\nExploration and evaluation expenditure for each area of interest is carried forward as an asset provided certain conditions are met (Note 2o). Exploration and evaluation assets are assessed for impairment when facts and circumstances suggest that the carrying amount of an exploration and evaluation asset may exceed its recoverable amount. These calculations and reviews require the use of assumptions and judgement. The related carrying amounts are disclosed in Note 13.\n\n## (iii) Deferred mining expenditure\n\nThe Group defers mining costs incurred during the production stage of its operations. Changes in an individual mine's design will generally result in changes to the life of mine waste to contained gold ounce (life of mine) ratio. Changes in other technical or economic parameters that impact reserves will also have an impact on the life of mine ratio even if they do not affect the mine's design. Changes to the life of mine are accounted for prospectively.\n\ncontinued\n\nu\n\nNotes to the Financial Statements", + "recall": 0.9212962962962963, + "true_md": "rights may give control. The standard is applicable to the Group from 1 July 2013. Based on investments held by the Group as at 30 June 2013, the standard is not expected to have a significant impact. \n\nThe financial information for the parent entity Kingsgate Consolidated Limited, disclosed in Note 32 has been prepared on the same basis as the consolidated financial statements except as set out below:\n\nInvestments in subsidiaries are accounted for at cost in the financial statements of Kingsgate.\n\nThe issue by the Company of equity instruments to extinguish liabilities of a subsidiary under- taking in the Group is treated as a capital contri- bution to that subsidiary undertaking.\n\nEstimates and judgements are continually evaluated and are based on historical experience and other factors, including expectation of future events that may have a financial impact on the Group and that are believed to be \n\nreasonable under the circumstances. The Group makes estimates and assumptions concerning the future. Actual results may differ from these estimates under different assumptions and conditions. The estimates and assumptions that could materially affect the financial position and results are discussed below:\n\nThe Group determines and reports ore reserves under the Australian Code for Reporting of Mineral Resources and Ore Reserves December 2004, known as the JORC Code. The information on mineral resources and ore reserves was prepared by or under the supervision of Competent Persons as defined in the JORC Code. \n\nThere are numerous uncertainties inherent in estimating mineral resources and reserves and assumptions that are valid at the time of estima- tion may change significantly when new infor- mation becomes available.\n\nChanges in reported ore reserves may affect the Group’s financial position and results, including asset carrying value, depreciation and amortisa- tion expenses using units-of-production method, provision for restoration and rehabilita- tion and stripping costs if the stripping ratios are revised.\n\nExploration and evaluation expenditure for each area of interest is carried forward as an asset provided certain conditions are met (Note 2o). Exploration and evaluation assets are assessed for impairment when facts and circumstances suggest that the carrying amount of an explora- tion and evaluation asset may exceed its recov- erable amount. These calculations and reviews require the use of assumptions and judgement. The related carrying amounts are disclosed in Note 13.\n\nThe Group defers mining costs incurred during the production stage of its operations. Changes in an individual mine’s design will generally result in changes to the life of mine waste to contained gold ounce (life of mine) ratio. Changes in other technical or economic parameters that impact reserves will also have an impact on the life of mine ratio even if they do not affect the mine’s design. Changes to the life of mine are accounted for prospectively.\n\ncontinued u\n\n- 〉 AASB 12 Disclosure of Interests in Other Entities (effective for annual reporting periods commencing on or after 1 January 2013). AASB 12 includes all disclosures relating to an entity’s interests in subsidi- aries, joint arrangements, associates and structures entities. New disclosures have been introduced about the judgements made by management to determine whether control exists, and to require summarised information about joint arrangements, associates and structured entities and subsidiaries with non-controlling interests. The standard is applicable to the Group from 1 July 2013. Based on interests held by the Group as at 30 June 2013, the standard is not expected to have a significant impact.\n\n- 〉 AASB 13 Fair Value Measurement (effective for annual reporting periods commencing on or after 1 January 2013). AASB 13 establishes a single framework for measuring fair value of financial and non-financial items recog- nised at fair value in the statement of finan- cial position or disclosed in the notes to the financial statements. The standard is not applicable until 1 January 2013 but is avail- able for early adoption. The Group does not expect any material impact on adoption of the standard.\n\n- 〉 AASB 119 Employee Benefits (effective for annual reporting periods commencing on or after 1 January 2013). The revised standard changes the definition of short-term employee benefits. The distinction between short-term and other long-term employee benefits is now based on whether the bene- fits are expected to be settled wholly within 12 months after the reporting date.\n\n- 〉 IFRIC 20 Stripping Costs in the Production Phase of a Surface Mine (effective for annual reporting periods commencing on or after 1 January 2013). IFRIC 20 provides guidance on the accounting for the costs of stripping activity in the production phase of surface mining when two benefits accrue to the entity from the stripping activity: useable ore that can be used to produce inventory and improved access to further quantities of material that will be mined in future periods. The Company will adapt IFRIC 20 from 1 July 2013. Based on the current mine plans this IFRIC is not expected to have a significant impact.\n\n- 〉 AASB 2011-4 Amendments to Australian Accounting Standards to Remove Individual Key Management Personnel Disclosure Requirements (effective from 1 July 2013). AASB 2011-4 makes amendments to remove individual key management personnel disclo- sure requirements from AASB 124. \n\n- 〉 AASB 2012-2 Amendments to Australian Accounting Standards – Disclosures – Offsetting Financial Assets and Financial Liabilities (effective from 1 July 2013). ASB 2012-2 principally amends AASB 7 Financial Instruments: Disclosures to require disclo- sure of information that will enable users of an entity’s financial statements to evaluate the effect or potential effect of netting arrangements, including rights of set-off associated with an entity’s recognised financial assets and recognised financial liabilities, on the entity’s financial position.\n\n- 〉 AASB 2012-3 Amendments to Australian Accounting Standards - Offsetting Financial Assets and Financial Liabilities (effective from 1 July 2014). AASB 2012-3 adds application guidance to AASB 132 Financial Instruments: Presentation to address inconsistencies identified in applying some of the offsetting criteria of AASB 132, including clarifying the meaning of “currently has a legally enforce- able right of set-off” and that some gross settlement systems may be considered equivalent to net settlement.\n\n## dd . Parent entity financial information\n\n## Investments in subsidiaries\n\n## Share-based payments\n\n## 3. Critical accounting estimates, assumptions and judgements\n\n## (i) Mineral resources and ore reserves estimates\n\n## (ii) Exploration and evaluation assets\n\n## (iii) Deferred mining expenditure\n\nNotes to the Financial Statements 75\n\nNotes to the Financial Statements 75\n\nNotes t o the Financial Statements" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9602951464040925, + "doc_id": "c0e0f94c665d878fbbd487f6a579f9492603cb049bdd564ab65103a1d36ac9af", + "edit_distance": 0.4225352112676056, + "f1_score": 0.9798994974874372, + "meteor": 0.9587913397602559, + "precision": 0.9848484848484849, + "pred_md": "MANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS\n\n## COMMITMENTS AND OTHER CONTRACTUAL OBLIGATIONS\n\n## Contractual Obligations\n\nThe table below shows our material obligations under firm contractual arrangements as at December 31, 2013. See Notes 17, 19 and 26 to our 2013 audited consolidated financial statements for more information.\n\n- 1 Principal obligations of long-term debt (including current portion) due at maturity.\n- 2 Net (asset) disbursements due at maturity. US dollar amounts have been translated into Canadian dollars at the Bank of Canada year-end rate.\n- 3 Purchase obligations are the contractual obligations under service, product and handset contracts that we have committed to for at least the next five years.\n- 4 Expected contributions to our pension plans in 2014. Contributions for the year ended December 31, 2015 and beyond cannot be reasonably estimated because they depend on future economic conditions and plan performance and may be affected by future government legislation.\n\n## OFF-BALANCE SHEET ARRANGEMENTS\n\n## G uarantees\n\nAs a regular part of our business, we enter into agreements that provide for indemnification and guarantees to counterparties in transactions involving business sale and business combination agreements, sales of services and purchases and development of assets. Due to the nature of these indemnifications, we are unable to make a reasonable estimate of the maximum potential amount we could be required to pay counterparties. Historically, we have not made any significant payment under these indemnifications or guarantees. See Note 26 to our 2013 audited consolidated financial statements for more information.\n\n66\n\nROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n## Operating Leases\n\nWe have entered into operating leases for the rental of premises, distribution facilities, equipment and wireless towers and other contracts. Terminating any of these lease agreements would not have a material adverse effect on us as a whole. See 'Commitments and Other Contractual obligations' and Note 27 to our 2013 audited consolidated financial statements for quantification and more information.", + "recall": 0.975, + "true_md": "## COMMITMENTS AND OTHER CONTRACTUAL OBLIGATIONS\n\n## Contractual Obligations\n\nMANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS\n\nThe table below shows our material obligations under firm contractual arrangements as at December 31, 2013. See Notes 17, 19 and 26 to our 2013 audited consolidated financial statements for more information.\n\n- 1 Principal obligations of long-term debt (including current portion) due at maturity.\n\n- 2 Net (asset) disbursements due at maturity. US dollar amounts have been translated into Canadian dollars at the Bank of Canada year-end rate.\n\n- 3 Purchase obligations are the contractual obligations under service, product and handset contracts that we have committed to for at least the next five years.\n\n- 4 Expected contributions to our pension plans in 2014. Contributions for the year ended December 31, 2015 and beyond cannot be reasonably estimated because they depend on future economic conditions and plan performance and may be affected by future government legislation.\n\n## Operating Leases\n\n## OFF-BALANCE SHEET ARRANGEMENTS\n\n## G uarantees\n\nWe have entered into operating leases for the rental of premises, distribution facilities, equipment and wireless towers and other contracts. Terminating any of these lease agreements would not have a material adverse effect on us as a whole. See “Commitments and Other Contractual obligations” and Note 27 to our 2013 audited consolidated financial statements for quantification and more information.\n\nAs a regular part of our business, we enter into agreements that provide for indemnification and guarantees to counterparties in transactions involving business sale and business combination agreements, sales of services and purchases and development of assets. Due to the nature of these indemnifications, we are unable to make a reasonable estimate of the maximum potential amount we could be required to pay counterparties. Historically, we have not made any significant payment under these indemnifications or guarantees. See Note 26 to our 2013 audited consolidated financial statements for more information.\n\n66 ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8954334383069353, + "doc_id": "61241a6117d3c9d9db6f3760d45a97e9e5578fb87c95e34ff1a54d7d9296a470", + "edit_distance": 0.18568665377176016, + "f1_score": 0.9622641509433961, + "meteor": 0.9397081291704947, + "precision": 0.966824644549763, + "pred_md": "Capital Ratio Information\n\nSMFG\n\n## 3. Accounting Policy on Securitization Transactions\n\nAccounting treatment of securitization of financial assets is as follows. Extinguishment of financial assets is recognized when the contractual rights over the financial assets are exercised, forfeited or control over the rights is transferred to a third-party, and the difference between the book value of the financial assets and the amount received/paid is recorded as the term's gain/loss. When the control over the contractual rights is not deemed to have been transferred, the securitization transaction is treated as a financial transaction such as a mortgage loan.\n\nWhen a portion of financial assets satisfies the extinguishment condition, the extinguishment of the said portion is recognized and the difference between the book value of the extinguished portion and the amount received/paid is recorded as the term's gain/loss. The book value of the extinguished portion is calculated by allocating the book value of the financial assets based on the proportion of the financial assets' fair value that the extinguished portion represents.\n\nFurther, the remaining portion whose fair value is available is measured at fair value, and the related valuation differences are reported as a component of 'net assets.' The impairments are measured and recorded as necessary.\n\n## 4. Qualifying External Ratings Agencies\n\nWhen computing credit risk-weighted asset amounts for securitization exposures using the rating-based approach under the IRB approach or standardized approach, the risk weights are determined by mapping the ratings of qualifying rating agencies to the risk weights stipulated in the Notification. The qualifying rating agencies are Rating and Investment Information, Inc. (R&I), Japan Credit Rating Agency, Ltd. (JCR), Moody's Investors Service, Inc. (Moody's), Standard & Poor's Ratings Services (S&P), and Fitch Ratings Ltd. (Fitch). When more than one rating is available for an exposure, the second smallest risk weight is used, in accordance with the Notification.\n\n## 5. Portfolio\n\n## (1) Securitization Transactions as Originator\n\n## A. As Originator (excluding as Sponsor)\n\n(A) Underlying Assets\n\nNotes: 1. The above amounts include the amount of underlying assets securitized during the term without entailing 'securitization exposures.'\n\n2. 'Default amount' is the total of underlying assets which are past due three months or more and defaulted underlying assets.\n\n3. 'Other claims' includes claims on Private Finance Initiative (PFI) businesses and lease fees.\n\n4. Following Articles 230 and 248 of the Notification, there are no amounts that represent 'exposure to products subject to early amortization provisions' to investors.\n\n## (B) Securitization Exposures\n\n## a. Underlying Assets by Asset Type\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n193", + "recall": 0.9577464788732394, + "true_md": "## 3. Accounting Policy on Securitization Transactions\n\n## 4. Qualifying External Ratings Agencies\n\n## 5. Portfolio\n\nCapital Ratio Information\n\nSMFG\n\nAccounting treatment of securitization of financial assets is as follows. Extinguishment of financial assets is recognized when the contractual rights over the financial assets are exercised, forfeited or control over the rights is transferred to a third-party, and the difference between the book value of the financial assets and the amount received/paid is recorded as the term’s gain/loss. When the control over the contractual rights is not deemed to have been transferred, the securitization transaction is treated as a financial transaction such as a mortgage loan.\n\nWhen a portion of financial assets satisfies the extinguishment condition, the extinguishment of the said portion is recognized and the difference between the book value of the extinguished portion and the amount received/paid is recorded as the term’s gain/loss. The book value of the extinguished portion is calculated by allocating the book value of the financial assets based on the proportion of the financial assets’ fair value that the extinguished portion represents. \n\nFurther, the remaining portion whose fair value is available is measured at fair value, and the related valuation differences are reported as a component of “net assets.” The impairments are measured and recorded as necessary.\n\nWhen computing credit risk-weighted asset amounts for securitization exposures using the rating-based approach under the IRB approach or standardized approach, the risk weights are determined by mapping the ratings of qualifying rating agencies to the risk weights stipulated in the Notification. The qualifying rating agencies are Rating and Investment Information, Inc. (R&I), Japan Credit Rating Agency, Ltd. (JCR), Moody’s Investors Service, Inc. (Moody’s), Standard & Poor’s Ratings Services (S&P), and Fitch Ratings Ltd. (Fitch). When more than one rating is available for an exposure, the second smallest risk weight is used, in accordance with the Notification.\n\n## (1) Securitization Transactions as Originator\n\n## A. As Originator (excluding as Sponsor)\n\n## (B) Securitization Exposures\n\n## (A) Underlying Assets\n\n## a. Underlying Assets by Asset Type\n\nNotes: 1. The above amounts include the amount of underlying assets securitized during the term without entailing “securitization exposures.”\n\n2. “Default amount” is the total of underlying assets which are past due three months or more and defaulted underlying assets.\n\n3. “Other claims” includes claims on Private Finance Initiative (PFI) businesses and lease fees.\n\n4. Following Articles 230 and 248 of the Notification, there are no amounts that represent “exposure to products subject to early amortization provisions” to investors.\n\nSMFG 2011 193" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7746896567384443, + "doc_id": "59be1a1da871591f79d459324970429a085f98b61ef1e8696bd0a6b47e4e3d23", + "edit_distance": 0.19889502762430938, + "f1_score": 0.9493087557603687, + "meteor": 0.8360744612114671, + "precision": 0.9903846153846154, + "pred_md": "## Performance Scorecard\n\nThe Company's key financial performance metrics were chosen as outperformance on these capital efficiency focused metrics are highly correlated to long-term total shareholder returns. The bonus targets, performance and results along with the resulting payouts below were related to performance during the year ended 31 December 2013 and paid during 2014 The discretionary . payout earned was determined based on the level of achievement of multiple company goals, including, but not limited to, strategic objectives over reserve, acreage and asset growth, cost control, balance sheet liquidity and treasury management, financial reporting, acquisitions and divestitures, and process improvement.\n\n## Resulting Payouts for the year ended 31 December 2013:\n\n- (1) STI payout was calculated at actual performance score and then rounded to next thousand; reflects actual amounts paid.\n\n- 35 -", + "recall": 0.911504424778761, + "true_md": "## Performance Scorecard The Company’s key financial performance metrics were chosen as outperformance on these capital efficiency focused metrics\n\nPerformance Scorecard The Company’s key financial performance metrics were chosen as outperformance on these capital efficiency focused metrics are highly correlated to long-term total shareholder returns. The bonus targets, performance and results along with the resulting payouts below were related to performance during the year ended 31 December 2013 and paid during 2014 . The discretionary payout earned was determined based on the level of achievement of multiple company goals, including, but not limited to, strategic objectives over reserve, acreage and asset growth, cost control, balance sheet liquidity and treasury management, financial reporting, acquisitions and divestitures, and process improvement. \n\nResulting Payouts for the year ended 31 December 2013: \n\nG. Ford $230,000 75.0% 86.7% $150,000 (1) STI payout was calculated at actual performance score and then rounded to next thousand; reflects actual amounts paid. \n\n- 35 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8755163953864568, + "doc_id": "eda1ad9d05073e917da8e6df69635155ec91565b0b358aea88732af438c0ba20", + "edit_distance": 0.6682464454976303, + "f1_score": 0.9441624365482234, + "meteor": 0.8383374040484475, + "precision": 0.9587628865979382, + "pred_md": "## CHALLENGER EXPLORATION\n\nExploration expenditure totalled $8.8 million during the year comprising $1.8 million of resource development and exploration costs delineating targets outside of the reserve and $7.0 million on underground mining of lodes outside of the reserve. The majority of the mining exploration costs occurred in the first quarter and included portions of 240 and 205 Aminus 2 and 670 Challenger West before they were upgraded to the reserve.\n\n## South East Zone (SEZ)\n\nThe SEZ structure was evaluated from the 1100 level with three flat fans targeting 10801120 mRL, as well as the 940, 280, 240 and 175 levels. A number of significant intersections were returned but overall the strike length of continuous high grade zones appeared limited.\n\n## Resource Development\n\nUnderground diamond drilling was employed as the main medium for Resource Development of the various Challenger lodes. The Challenger West lode was a focus, as well as the ongoing evaluation of the M1 and M2 shoot systems beneath the 215 Shear.\n\n## M2 Shoot System below the 215 Shear\n\nWith the new mining fronts established below the 215 Shear, development drilling of the M1-M2 lodes on a level by level basis was facilitated. This revealed a number of significant intersections in both lodes as well as continuity of overall shoot geometry.\n\n## Challenger West\n\nThe Challenger West Shoot continued to be a focus of development and resource development drilling, and was targeted with programs from the 800 level (targeting 770 mRL), 670 level (targeting 690-540 mRL), 640 level (targeting 500-450 mRL), and 215 level (targeting 170-50 mRL). In addition, the\n\n23\n\nOperations Report\n\ndeepest intersection to date of 0.5 metres @ 59.7 g/t was returned from 119 mRL. Overall, delineation of the lode and extension has been successful to date, but targeting and representative challenges remain due to its narrow and poddy nature.\n\n## Aminus Corridor\n\nAn intersection of 1.4 metres @ 15.0 g/t with associated visible gold was returned in the Aminus corridor as part of Challenger West resource drilling. This lies to the south of Challenger West OD1 and therefore a large distance along strike of Aminus 2. Whilst isolated, it demonstrates the potential along multiple positions within the Challenger structural domains.\n\ncontinued\n\nu\n\nOperations Report", + "recall": 0.93, + "true_md": "23 Operations Report\n\nOperations Report\n\n## CHALLENGER EXPLORATION\n\n## M2 Shoot System below the 215 Shear\n\n## Aminus Corridor\n\n## Challenger West\n\n## South East Zone (SEZ)\n\n## Resource Development\n\ncontinued u\n\nExploration expenditure totalled $8.8 million during the year comprising $1.8 million of resource development and exploration costs delineating targets outside of the reserve and $7.0 million on underground mining of lodes outside of the reserve. The majority of the mining exploration costs occurred in the first quarter and included portions of 240 and 205 Aminus 2 and 670 Challenger West before they were upgraded to the reserve. \n\nWith the new mining fronts established below the 215 Shear, development drilling of the M1–M2 lodes on a level by level basis was facili- tated. This revealed a number of significant intersections in both lodes as well as continuity of overall shoot geometry. \n\ndeepest intersection to date of 0.5 metres @ 59.7 g/t was returned from 119 mRL. Overall, delineation of the lode and extension has been successful to date, but targeting and representa- tive challenges remain due to its narrow and poddy nature.\n\nThe SEZ structure was evaluated from the 1100 level with three flat fans targeting 1080– 1120 mRL, as well as the 940, 280, 240 and 175 levels. A number of significant intersections were returned but overall the strike length of continuous high grade zones appeared limited.\n\nThe Challenger West Shoot continued to be a focus of development and resource develop- ment drilling, and was targeted with programs from the 800 level (targeting 770 mRL), 670 level (targeting 690–540 mRL), 640 level (targeting 500–450 mRL), and 215 level (targeting 170–50 mRL). In addition, the \n\nAn intersection of 1.4 metres @ 15.0 g/t with associated visible gold was returned in the Aminus corridor as part of Challenger West resource drilling. This lies to the south of Challenger West OD1 and therefore a large distance along strike of Aminus 2. Whilst isolated, it demonstrates the potential along multiple positions within the Challenger struc- tural domains.\n\nUnderground diamond drilling was employed as the main medium for Resource Development of the various Challenger lodes. The Challenger West lode was a focus, as well as the ongoing evaluation of the M1 and M2 shoot systems beneath the 215 Shear." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8845968464798942, + "doc_id": "f852c7dd58692ef1e8c5b43a34179c1a8e0d28b3a7e05da6c9ba63c38ad57662", + "edit_distance": 0.7731958762886598, + "f1_score": 0.964467005076142, + "meteor": 0.8592362256097005, + "precision": 0.9693877551020408, + "pred_md": "Loans (Nonconsolidated)\n\nSMBC\n\n## Balance of Loans and Bills Discounted, Classified by Maturity\n\nNote: Loans with a maturity of one year or less are not classified by floating or fixed interest rates.\n\n## Balance of Loan Portfolio, Classified by Industry\n\nNotes: 1. Domestic operations comprise the operations of SMBC (excluding overseas branches). Overseas operations comprise the operations of SMBC's overseas branches.\n\n- 2. Japan offshore banking accounts are included in overseas operations' accounts.\n\n## Loans to Individuals/Small and Medium-Sized Enterprises\n\n- Notes: 1. The figures above exclude the outstanding balance of loans at overseas branches and of Japan offshore banking accounts.\n- 2. Small and medium-sized enterprises are individuals or companies with capital stock of ¥300 million or less, or an operating staff of 300 or fewer employees. (Exceptions to these capital stock and staff restrictions include wholesalers: ¥100 million, 100 employees; retailers: ¥50 million, 50 employees; and service industry companies: ¥50 million, 100 employees.)\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n167", + "recall": 0.9595959595959596, + "true_md": "SMBC Loans (Nonconsolidated)\n\n## Balance of Loans and Bills Discounted, Classified by Maturity\n\n## Balance of Loan Portfolio, Classified by Industry\n\nNotes: 1. The figures above exclude the outstanding balance of loans at overseas branches and of Japan offshore banking accounts.\n\n2. Small and medium-sized enterprises are individuals or companies with capital stock of ¥300 million or less, or an operating staff of 300 or fewer employ- ees. (Exceptions to these capital stock and staff restrictions include wholesalers: ¥100 million, 100 employees; retailers: ¥50 million, 50 employees; and service industry companies: ¥50 million, 100 employees.)\n\nNotes: 1. Domestic operations comprise the operations of SMBC (excluding overseas branches). Overseas operations comprise the operations of SMBC’s overseas branches.\n\n2. Japan offshore banking accounts are included in overseas operations’ accounts.\n\n## Loans to Individuals/Small and Medium-Sized Enterprises\n\nSMFG 2011 167\n\nNote: Loans with a maturity of one year or less are not classified by floating or fixed interest rates." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6229774413174638, + "doc_id": "4064b2606385e76ae69fbf4ab370214d0371173ca6636ce527c2ebaab3b74cc4", + "edit_distance": 0.5324675324675324, + "f1_score": 0.9494949494949494, + "meteor": 0.7470119521912351, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "SMFG\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n## (b) Currency derivatives\n\nNotes: 1. The above transactions are valued at fair value and the valuation gains (losses) are accounted for in the consolidated statements of income.\n\n2. Fair value is calculated using discounted present value and option pricing models.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n114", + "recall": 0.9038461538461539, + "true_md": "SMFG Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nSMFG 2011 114\n\n2. Fair value is calculated using discounted present value and option pricing models.\n\nNotes: 1. The above transactions are valued at fair value and the valuation gains (losses) are accounted for in the consolidated statements of income.\n\n## Millions of U.S. dollars 2011\n\n## Millions of yen 2010\n\n## Millions of yen 2011\n\n(b) Currency derivatives" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8998231452600637, + "doc_id": "61253fc219f35687e9d3ff96d17bf63338828cb5ae6b801b8f0f6ce357d114ae", + "edit_distance": 0.11834319526627218, + "f1_score": 0.9322033898305084, + "meteor": 0.9309902008782186, + "precision": 0.9322033898305084, + "pred_md": "SMFG\n\nIncome Analysis (Consolidated)\n\n## Fees and Commissions\n\nNotes: 1. Domestic operations comprise the operations of SMFG, its domestic consolidated banking subsidiaries (excluding overseas branches) and other domestic consolidated subsidiaries. Overseas operations comprise the operations of the overseas branches of domestic consolidated banking subsidiaries and overseas consolidated subsidiaries.\n\n2. Intersegment transactions are reported in the 'Elimination' column.\n\n3. 'Investment trusts' are reported as sub-account of 'Fees and commissions' from the fiscal year ended March 31, 2011, because their significance increased.\n\n## Trading Income\n\nNotes: 1. Domestic operations comprise the operations of SMFG, its domestic consolidated banking subsidiaries (excluding overseas branches) and other domestic consolidated subsidiaries. Overseas operations comprise the operations of the overseas branches of domestic consolidated banking subsidiaries and overseas consolidated subsidiaries.\n\n2. Intersegment transactions are reported in the 'Elimination' column.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n148", + "recall": 0.9322033898305084, + "true_md": "SMFG\n\nIncome Analysis (Consolidated)\n\n## Fees and Commissions\n\n## Trading Income\n\nNotes: 1. Domestic operations comprise the operations of SMFG, its domestic consolidated banking subsidiaries (excluding overseas branches) and other domestic consolidated subsidiaries. Overseas operations comprise the operations of the overseas branches of domestic consolidated banking subsidiaries and overseas consolidated subsidiaries.\n\n2. Intersegment transactions are reported in the “Elimination” column.\n\n3. “Investment trusts” are reported as sub-account of “Fees and commissions” from the fiscal year ended March 31, 2011, because their significance increased.\n\nNotes: 1. Domestic operations comprise the operations of SMFG, its domestic consolidated banking subsidiaries (excluding overseas branches) and other domestic consolidated subsidiaries. Overseas operations comprise the operations of the overseas branches of domestic consolidated banking subsidiaries and overseas consolidated subsidiaries.\n\n2. Intersegment transactions are reported in the “Elimination” column.\n\nSMFG 2011 148" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8836682973347867, + "doc_id": "045ca9d8352eafd810975ee542e325b00102a6eb6a767dbd7c7a0ac2cc1941c2", + "edit_distance": 0.1375, + "f1_score": 0.9498525073746312, + "meteor": 0.9321590774783777, + "precision": 0.9640718562874252, + "pred_md": "## Environmental Business Forum at Eco-Products 2010\n\nThe Eco-Products exhibition, held each December, is one of Japan's largest environmental exhibitions. Following last year's event, SMFG again held the SMFG Environmental Business Forum, comprising various environmental business events.\n\nSMFG conducted business matching, set up booths having catalogs available, and offered lectures, seminars, and other programs, targeting different types of stakeholders, such as those who are planning to newly enter the environmental business field, considering expanding their marketing channels, and reviewing the information collected. By offering such opportunities, SMFG provided forums for the representatives of companies in the environmental field to expand their network business contacts and exchange information.\n\nDuring the three-day exhibition, we held 17 seminars on various topics, as well as two panel discussions. 659 business matchings were arranged, and 28 companies had booths marketing their products and services.\n\nConsequently, the SMFG Environmental Business Forum hosted a substantial number of business negotiations for new environmental technologies, products, and services.\n\n## Issuance of 'Cedyna Card AXU' to preserve bio-diversity\n\nIn order to preserve bio-diversity, we issued the Cedyna Card AXU in May 2010, through which environmental contributions may be made. In addition to the basic functions of regular credit cards, this Card offers ecological options including participation in ecological nature tours under the 'Green Selection' program; shop LOHAS products and services with the concept of preserving the environment and bio-diversity, under the 'Green Shopping' program; and donates 0.1% of the payments made by the Card to environment preservation organizations under the 'Green Contribution' program; to make the usage of this Card more interesting and enjoyable.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n57", + "recall": 0.936046511627907, + "true_md": "## Issuance of “Cedyna Card AXU” to preserve bio-diversity\n\n## Environmental Business Forum at Eco-Products 2010\n\nThe Eco-Products exhibition, held each December, is one of Japan’s largest environmental exhibitions. Following last year’s event, SMFG again held the SMFG Environmental Business Forum, comprising various environmental business events.\n\nSMFG conducted business matching, set up booths having catalogs available, and offered lectures, seminars, and other programs, targeting different types of stakeholders, such as those who are planning to newly enter the environmental business field, considering expanding their marketing chan- nels, and reviewing the information collected. By offering such opportunities, SMFG provided forums for the representatives of companies in the environmental field to expand their network business contacts and exchange information.\n\nDuring the three-day exhibition, we held 17 seminars on various topics, as well as two panel discussions. 659 busi- ness matchings were arranged, and 28 companies had booths marketing their products and services. \n\nConsequently, the SMFG Environmental Business Forum hosted a substantial number of business negotiations for new environmental technologies, products, and services.\n\nIn order to preserve bio-diversity, we issued the Cedyna Card AXU in May 2010, through which environmental contributions may be made. In addition to the basic functions of regular credit cards, this Card offers ecological options including participation in ecological nature tours under the “Green Selection” program; shop LOHAS products and services with the concept of preserving the environment and bio-diversity, under the “Green Shopping” program; and donates 0.1% of the payments made by the Card to environment preserva- tion organizations under the “Green Contribution” program; to make the usage of this Card more interesting and enjoyable.\n\n57\n\nSMFG 2011" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9102469283978178, + "doc_id": "c3c3eb90c92cde40aea4d1cf02c776756b4797bd87c44f531badb22376665f1d", + "edit_distance": 0.9405737704918032, + "f1_score": 0.973305954825462, + "meteor": 0.7713498788177499, + "precision": 0.983402489626556, + "pred_md": "## (b) Credit Monitoring System\n\nAt SMBC, in addition to analyzing loans at the application stage, the Credit Monitoring System is utilized to reassess obligor grades and review self-assessment and credit policies so that problems can be detected at an early stage, and quick and effective action can be taken. The system includes periodic monitoring carried out each time an obligor enterprise discloses financial results, as well as continuous monitoring performed each time credit conditions change, as indicated in the diagram below.\n\n## (3) Framework for Credit Portfolio Management\n\nIn addition to managing individual loans, SMBC applies the following basic policies to the management of the entire credit portfolio to maintain and improve its soundness and profitability over the mid to long term.\n\n## (a) Risk-Taking within the Scope of Capital\n\nTo keep credit risk exposure to a permissible level relative to capital, SMBC sets credit risk capital limits for internal control purposes. Under these limits, separate guidelines are issued for each business unit and marketing unit, such as for real estate finance, fund investment, and investment in securitization products. Regular monitoring is conducted to make sure that these guidelines are being followed, thus ensuring appropriate overall management of credit risk.\n\n## (b) Controlling Concentration Risk\n\nBecause the concentration of credit risk in an industry or corporate group has the potential to substantially impair capital, SMBC implements measures to prevent the excessive concentration of loans in an industry and to control large exposure to individual companies or\n\n## ■ SMBC's Credit Monitoring System\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n37\n\ncorporate groups by setting guidelines for maximum loan amounts.\n\nTo manage country risk, SMBC also has credit limit guidelines based on each country's creditworthiness.\n\n## (c) Researching Borrowers More Rigorously and Balancing Risk and Returns\n\nAgainst a backdrop of drastic change in the business environment, SMBC rigorously researches borrower companies' actual conditions. It runs credit operations on the basic principle of earning returns that are commensurate with the credit risk involved, and makes every effort to reduce credit and capital costs as well as general and administrative expenses.\n\n## (d) Prevention and Reduction of Non-Performing Loans\n\nOn NPLs and potential NPLs, SMBC carries out regular loan reviews to clarify handling policies and action plans, enabling it to swiftly implement measures to prevent deterioration of borrowers' business situations, support business recoveries, collect on loans, and enhance loan security.\n\n## (e) Toward Active Portfolio Management\n\nSMBC makes active use of credit derivatives, loan asset sales, and other instruments to proactively and flexibly manage its portfolio to stabilize credit risk.", + "recall": 0.9634146341463414, + "true_md": "## (b) Credit Monitoring System\n\n## (3) Framework for Credit Portfolio Management\n\n## (a) Risk-Taking within the Scope of Capital\n\n## (b) Controlling Concentration Risk\n\n## (c) Researching Borrowers More Rigorously and Balancing Risk and Returns\n\n## (d) Prevention and Reduction of Non-Performing Loans\n\n## (e) Toward Active Portfolio Management\n\nSMBC makes active use of credit derivatives, loan asset sales, and other instruments to proactively and flexibly manage its portfolio to stabilize credit risk.\n\nOn NPLs and potential NPLs, SMBC carries out regular loan reviews to clarify handling policies and action plans, enabling it to swiftly implement measures to prevent deterioration of borrowers’ busi- ness situations, support business recoveries, collect on loans, and enhance loan security.\n\nAgainst a backdrop of drastic change in the business environ- ment, SMBC rigorously researches borrower companies’ actual conditions. It runs credit operations on the basic principle of earning returns that are commensurate with the credit risk involved, and makes every effort to reduce credit and capital costs as well as general and administrative expenses.\n\ncorporate groups by setting guidelines for maximum loan amounts.\n\nTo manage country risk, SMBC also has credit limit guidelines based on each country’s creditworthiness.\n\nAt SMBC, in addition to analyzing loans at the application stage, the Credit Monitoring System is utilized to reassess obligor grades and review self-assessment and credit policies so that problems can be detected at an early stage, and quick and effective action can be taken. The system includes periodic monitoring carried out each time an obligor enterprise discloses financial results, as well as continuous monitoring performed each time credit conditions change, as indicated in the diagram below.\n\nIn addition to managing individual loans, SMBC applies the following basic policies to the management of the entire credit portfolio to maintain and improve its soundness and profitability over the mid to long term.\n\nTo keep credit risk exposure to a permissible level relative to capital, SMBC sets credit risk capital limits for internal control purposes. Under these limits, separate guidelines are issued for each business unit and marketing unit, such as for real estate finance, fund invest- ment, and investment in securitization products. Regular monitoring is conducted to make sure that these guidelines are being followed, thus ensuring appropriate overall management of credit risk.\n\nBecause the concentration of credit risk in an industry or corporate group has the potential to substantially impair capital, SMBC imple- ments measures to prevent the excessive concentration of loans in an industry and to control large exposure to individual companies or \n\n■ SMBC’s Credit Monitoring System \n\nSMFG 2011 37" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9272897170161037, + "doc_id": "5c79ff84894073b22f92cf269d9c360edf9326761aa6255e2ca8f553608c2346", + "edit_distance": 0.1334214002642008, + "f1_score": 0.9650145772594753, + "meteor": 0.9608730145655996, + "precision": 0.9792899408284024, + "pred_md": "Obligor grades and facility grades are reviewed once a year, and, whenever necessary, such as when there are changes in the credit situation.\n\nThere are also grading systems for small and medium-sized enterprises (SME) loans, loans to individuals, and project finance and other structured finance tailored according to the risk characteristics of these types of assets.\n\nThe Credit & Investment Planning Department centrally manages the internal rating systems, and properly designs, operates, supervises, and validates the grading models. It validates the grading models (including statistical validation) of main assets following the procedures manual once a year, to ensure their effectiveness and suitability.\n\n## (b) Quantification of Credit Risk\n\nCredit risk quantification refers to the process of estimating the degree of credit risk of a portfolio or individual loan taking into account not just the obligor's probability of default (PD), but also the concentration of risk in a specific customer or industry and the loss impact of fluctuations in the value of collateral, such as real estate and securities.\n\nSpecifically, first, the PD by grade, loss given default (LGD), credit quality correlation among obligors, and other parameter values are estimated using historical data of obligors and facilities stored in a database to calculate the credit risk. Then, based on these parameters, we run a simulation of simultaneous default using\n\n## ■ SMBC's Obligor Grading System\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n36\n\nthe Monte Carlo method to calculate our maximum loss exposure to the estimated amount of the maximum losses that may be incurred. Based on these quantitative results, we allocate risk capital.\n\nRisk quantification is also executed for purposes such as to determine the portfolio's risk concentration, or to simulate economic movements (stress tests), and the results are used for making optimal decisions across the whole range of business operations, including formulating business plans and providing a standard against which individual credit applications are assessed.\n\n## (2) Framework for Managing Individual Loans\n\n## (a) Credit Assessment\n\nAt SMBC, credit assessment of corporate loans involves a variety of financial analyses, including cash flow, to predict an enterprise's capability of loan repayment and its growth prospects. These quantitative measures, when combined with qualitative analyses of industrial trends, the enterprise's R&D capabilities, the competitiveness of its products or services, and its management caliber, result in a comprehensive credit assessment. The loan application is analyzed in terms of the intended utilization of the funds and the repayment schedule. Thus, SMBC is able to arrive at an accurate and fair credit decision based on an objective examination of all relevant factors.\n\nIncreasing the understandability to customers of loan conditions and approval standards for specific borrowing purposes and loan categories is a part of SMBC's ongoing review of lending practices, which includes the revision of loan contract forms with the chief aim of clarifying lending conditions utilizing financial covenants.\n\nSMBC is also making steady progress in rationalizing its credit\n\nassessment process. To respond proactively and promptly to customers' funding needs-particularly those of SMEs-we employ a standardized credit risk assessment process for SMEs that uses a credit-scoring model. With this process, we are building a regime for efficiently marketing our Business Select Loan and other SME loans.\n\nIn the field of housing loans for individuals, we employ a credit assessment model based on credit data amassed and analyzed by SMBC over many years. This model enables our loan officers to efficiently make rational decisions on housing loan applications, and to reply to the customers without delay. It also facilitates the effective management of credit risk, as well as the flexible setting of interest rates.\n\nWe also provide loans to individuals who rent out properties such as apartments. The loan applications are subjected to a precise credit risk assessment process utilizing a risk assessment model that factors in the projected revenue from the rental business. The process is also used to provide advice to such customers on how to revise their business plans.", + "recall": 0.9511494252873564, + "true_md": "Obligor grades and facility grades are reviewed once a year, and, whenever necessary, such as when there are changes in the credit situation. \n\nThere are also grading systems for small and medium-sized enterprises (SME) loans, loans to individuals, and project finance and other structured finance tailored according to the risk charac- teristics of these types of assets. \n\nThe Credit & Investment Planning Department centrally man- ages the internal rating systems, and properly designs, operates, supervises, and validates the grading models. It validates the grad- ing models (including statistical validation) of main assets following the procedures manual once a year, to ensure their effectiveness and suitability. \n\nCredit risk quantification refers to the process of estimating the degree of credit risk of a portfolio or individual loan taking into account not just the obligor’s probability of default (PD), but also the concentration of risk in a specific customer or industry and the loss impact of fluctuations in the value of collateral, such as real estate and securities.\n\nSpecifically, first, the PD by grade, loss given default (LGD), credit quality correlation among obligors, and other parameter values are estimated using historical data of obligors and facilities stored in a database to calculate the credit risk. Then, based on these parameters, we run a simulation of simultaneous default using \n\nthe Monte Carlo method to calculate our maximum loss exposure to the estimated amount of the maximum losses that may be incurred. Based on these quantitative results, we allocate risk capital.\n\nRisk quantification is also executed for purposes such as to determine the portfolio’s risk concentration, or to simulate economic movements (stress tests), and the results are used for making optimal decisions across the whole range of business operations, including formulating business plans and providing a standard against which individual credit applications are assessed.\n\nAt SMBC, credit assessment of corporate loans involves a variety of financial analyses, including cash flow, to predict an enterprise’s capability of loan repayment and its growth prospects. These quan- titative measures, when combined with qualitative analyses of indus- trial trends, the enterprise’s R&D capabilities, the competitiveness of its products or services, and its management caliber, result in a comprehensive credit assessment. The loan application is analyzed in terms of the intended utilization of the funds and the repayment schedule. Thus, SMBC is able to arrive at an accurate and fair credit decision based on an objective examination of all relevant factors.\n\nIncreasing the understandability to customers of loan conditions and approval standards for specific borrowing purposes and loan categories is a part of SMBC’s ongoing review of lending practices, which includes the revision of loan contract forms with the chief aim of clarifying lending conditions utilizing financial covenants. \n\n## (a) Credit Assessment\n\n## (2) Framework for Managing Individual Loans\n\n## (b) Quantification of Credit Risk\n\n## ■ SMBC’s Obligor Grading System\n\nSMFG 2011 36\n\nSMBC is also making steady progress in rationalizing its credit \n\nassessment process. To respond proactively and promptly to customers’ funding needs—particu- larly those of SMEs—we employ a standardized credit risk assessment process for SMEs that uses a credit-scoring model. With this process, we are building a regime for efficiently marketing our Business Select Loan and other SME loans. \n\nIn the field of housing loans for individuals, we employ a credit assessment model based on credit data amassed and analyzed by SMBC over many years. This model enables our loan officers to efficiently make rational decisions on housing loan applications, and to reply to the custom- ers without delay. It also facilitates the effective management of credit risk, as well as the flexible setting of interest rates. \n\nWe also provide loans to individuals who rent out properties such as apartments. The loan applications are subjected to a precise credit risk assessment process utilizing a risk assessment model that factors in the projected revenue from the rental business. The process is also used to provide advice to such customers on how to revise their business plans." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4223218517223119, + "doc_id": "1a13c768bcc61eb9bd87c6335d08617db3ffbab57c6434f0392719c92a1b8a8d", + "edit_distance": 0.5118577075098815, + "f1_score": 0.984251968503937, + "meteor": 0.5161396982847696, + "precision": 0.984251968503937, + "pred_md": "## Additional Information compiled as at 12 March 2015\n\n## Shareholding\n\n## Substantial Shareholders\n\nThe names of the substantial shareholders in the Company, the number of equity securities to which each substantial shareholder and substantial holder's associates have a relevant interest, as disclosed in substantial holding notices given to the Company:\n\n## Distribution of Equity Securities\n\n## Size of Holding\n\n1\n\nThere are 525 shareholders with less than a marketable parcel of shares.\n\n## Voting Rights\n\n## Fully paid ordinary shares\n\nAt meetings of members or classes of members:\n\n- a) Each member entitled to vote may vote in person or by proxy, attorney or representative;\n- b) on a show of hands, every person present who is a member or proxy, attorney or representative of a member has one vote; and,\n- c) on a poll, every person present who is a member or a proxy, attorney or representative of a member has:\n- i) for each fully paid share held by him, or in respect of which he is appointed a proxy, attorney or representative, one vote for the share; and,\n- ii) for each partly paid share, only the fraction of one vote which the amount paid (not credited) on the share bears to the total amounts paid and payable on the share (excluding amounts credited) subject to any rights or restrictions attached to any shares or class or classes of shares.\n\nUnlisted options and unvested RSUs No voting rights.\n\n- 109 -", + "recall": 0.984251968503937, + "true_md": "Additional Information compiled as at 12 March 2015 \n\nSubstantial Shareholders The names of the substantial shareholders in the Company, the number of equity securities to which each substantial shareholder and substantial holder’s associates have a relevant interest, as disclosed in substantial holding notices given to the Company: \n\n## Shareholding\n\n## Substantial Shareholders The names of the substantial shareholders in the Company, the number of equity securities to which each substantial\n\n## Distribution of Equity Securities\n\n## Voting Rights\n\nFully paid ordinary shares At meetings of members or classes of members: \n\nFully paid ordinary shares At meetings of members or classes of members: a) Each member entitled to vote may vote in person or by proxy, attorney or representative; \n\n- At meetings of members or classes of members: a) Each member entitled to vote may vote in person or by proxy, attorney or representative; b) on a show of hands, every person present who is a member or proxy, attorney or representative of a member \n\n- a) Each member entitled to vote may vote in person or by proxy, attorney or representative; b) on a show of hands, every person present who is a member or proxy, attorney or representative of a member has one vote; and, c) on a poll, every person present who is a member or a proxy, attorney or representative of a member has: \n\n- has one vote; and, c) on a poll, every person present who is a member or a proxy, attorney or representative of a member has: i) for each fully paid share held by him, or in respect of which he is appointed a proxy, attorney or \n\n- on a poll, every person present who is a member or a proxy, attorney or representative of a member has: i) for each fully paid share held by him, or in respect of which he is appointed a proxy, attorney or representative, one vote for the share; and, ii) for each partly paid share, only the fraction of one vote which the amount paid (not credited) on \n\n- representative, one vote for the share; and, ii) for each partly paid share, only the fraction of one vote which the amount paid (not credited) on the share bears to the total amounts paid and payable on the share (excluding amounts credited) subject to any rights or restrictions attached to any shares or class or classes of shares. \n\nUnlisted options and unvested RSUs No voting rights. \n\nUnlisted options and unvested RSUs No voting rights. \n\nThere are 525 shareholders with less than a marketable parcel of shares. \n\n## Size of Holding\n\n- 109 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7909601595885504, + "doc_id": "b2a938472cd249feba76963c1b0d6d954ac7566033b097c660e51056187850a2", + "edit_distance": 0.15625, + "f1_score": 0.978723404255319, + "meteor": 0.892586233523197, + "precision": 0.9583333333333334, + "pred_md": "## CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEETS\n\nCONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEETS (In thousands)\n\n(In thousands)\n\nSee notes to consolidated financial statements.\n\n3\n\n16\n\nApplied Industrial Technologies, Inc. and Subsidiaries", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEETS CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEETS\n\nCONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEETS (In thousands)\n\nSee notes to consolidated financial statements. \n\n16 Applied Industrial Technologies, Inc. and Subsidiaries" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7941054938007994, + "doc_id": "28366ae2f8057436859a9eb4080aca8377d45e8d502fe448b9926927b07b7a3e", + "edit_distance": 0.21739130434782608, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9942130062450918, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Core Focus\n\nAnnual Report\n\nFall Protection\n\nPortable Gas Detection\n\nSupplied-Air Respirators\n\nFixed Gas & Flame Detection\n\nIndustrial Head Protection", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "# Core Focus\n\nFall Protection\n\nPortable Gas Detection\n\nSupplied-Air Respirators\n\nFixed Gas & Flame Detection\n\nIndustrial Head Protection\n\nAnnual Report" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9179591705338509, + "doc_id": "3e8e70b9a0558725ea9d447e695f5f2d17f2ed891f24dcb994a37b0fe2a653ca", + "edit_distance": 0.5221238938053098, + "f1_score": 0.9863013698630138, + "meteor": 0.9239491051786669, + "precision": 0.9863013698630136, + "pred_md": "## Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nDollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except share and per share amounts)\n\n## 23. Segmented Information\n\nThe Company operates in two rental segments of the multi-family residential industry: apartments and MHCs, all located in Canada. The accounting policies of these segments are the same as those described in the summary of significant accounting policies. The segments are analyzed based on net operating income before interest, amortization and administration costs. The operating results, assets and liabilities, and capital expenditures of the segments are as follows:\n\n90\n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013", + "recall": 0.9863013698630136, + "true_md": "The Company operates in two rental segments of the multi‑family residential industry: apartments and MHCs, all located in Canada. The accounting policies of these segments are the same as those described in the summary of significant accounting policies. The segments are analyzed based on net operating income before interest, amortization and administration costs. The operating results, assets and liabilities, and capital expenditures of the segments are as follows:\n\n## 23. Segmented Information\n\nNotes to the Consolidated Financial Statements Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except share and per share amounts)\n\n90 Killam ProPerties inc | 2013" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9305674528656995, + "doc_id": "0f54075324bf19cc859b47b01af57ac55372d51676988c795fdb6a1a7c88539f", + "edit_distance": 0.6535626535626535, + "f1_score": 0.967289719626168, + "meteor": 0.8317345629041193, + "precision": 0.9764150943396226, + "pred_md": "MSA EMERGING MARKETS: KUWAIT\n\nKUWAIT\n\n## In Kuwait, a 'Re-Bid' Highlights Synergy of General Monitors Acquisition\n\nWe have spoken a great deal over the past year about the synergies of MSA's acquisition and subsequent integration of General Monitors, with the complementary nature of our respective Fixed Gas and Flame Detection products giving us a far broader range of products than either company had before. Perhaps nowhere was this new capability better illustrated than it was in Kuwait in early 2011.\n\nA $1.2 million contract from the Kuwait Oil Company - for the support of a new oil and gas 'booster station' - marked the first joint sales success of the MSA and General Monitors acquisition.\n\nThe Kuwait Oil Company (KOC), in partnership with SK Engineering and Construction (SKEC) of South Korea, was in the process of building a new oil and gas 'booster station' in Northern Kuwait. As part of this project, there were specific needs for a wide range of gas and flame detection systems to protect its workers and contractors on-site. The original\n\n8\n\nMSA 2011 ANNUAL REPORT\n\nrequest for proposal, announced before the MSA/GM merger, led both organizations to place bids independently, competing against each other and against other providers.\n\nAlthough both bids were reasonable, each group conceded that neither was spectacular, with each relying substantially on third-party o ff erings to fill in gaps in their respective product lines. When MSA and General Monitors joined forces, a new bid was submitted by GM to KOC and SKEC. This one combined broader o ff erings to better meet the specifications of the contract, providing higher quality MSA and General Monitors products for nearly every need.\n\nThe expanded product portfolio made the di ff erence. A contract valued at $1.2 million was awarded to GM, giving MSA and General Monitors its first joint sales success. In fact, the customer was so satisfied with the new systems that an additional $700,000 order was placed shortly thereafter. The outstanding cooperation of two former competitors, now colleagues, quickly accelerated with many more sales successes throughout 2011, in a wide range of emerging, as well as more mature markets.", + "recall": 0.9583333333333334, + "true_md": "MSA EMERGING MARKETS: KUWAIT\n\nWe have spoken a great deal over the past year about the synergies of MSA’s acquisition and subsequent integration of General Monitors, with the complementary nature of our respective Fixed Gas and Flame Detection products giving us a far broader range of products than either company had before. Perhaps nowhere was this new capability better illustrated than it was in Kuwait in early 2011.\n\nrequest for proposal, announced before the MSA/GM merger, led both organizations to place bids independently, competing against each other and against other providers.\n\nAlthough both bids were reasonable, each group conceded that neither was spectacular, with each relying substantially on third-party o ff erings to fill in gaps in their respective product lines. When MSA and General Monitors joined forces, a new bid was submitted by GM to KOC and SKEC. This one combined broader o ff erings to better meet the specifications of the contract, providing higher quality MSA and General Monitors products for nearly every need. \n\nThe expanded product portfolio made the di ff erence. A contract valued at $1.2 million was awarded to GM, giving MSA and General Monitors its first joint sales success. In fact, the customer was so satisfied with the new systems that an additional $700,000 order was placed shortly thereafter. The outstanding cooperation of two former competitors, now colleagues, quickly accelerated with many more sales successes throughout 2011, in a wide range of emerging, as well as more mature markets.\n\nThe Kuwait Oil Company (KOC), in partnership with SK Engineering and Construction (SKEC) of South Korea, was in the process of building a new oil and gas “booster station”in Northern Kuwait. As part of this project, there were specific needs for a wide range of gas and flame detection systems to protect its workers and contractors on-site. The original \n\n## In Kuwait, a “Re-Bid” Highlights Synergy of General Monitors Acquisition\n\nA $1.2 million contract from the Kuwait Oil Company – for the support of a new oil and gas “booster station” – marked the first joint sales success of the MSA and General Monitors acquisition.\n\nKUWAIT h\n\nKUWAIT h\n\n8 MSA 2011 ANNUAL REPORT" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.936218240667616, + "doc_id": "16d92c1023a88ef2fb69c5678969e70a6232952f5e4684520240dfcd3d33bf7d", + "edit_distance": 0.7443609022556391, + "f1_score": 0.9702276707530648, + "meteor": 0.7892990693181617, + "precision": 0.9822695035460993, + "pred_md": "10\n\nFinance Report\n\n## Financing Arrangements\n\n## Corporate loan facility\n\nKingsgate has a three year secured loan facility with Investec which was amended during the year. The amended facility has a limit of $40 million (30 June 2012: $50 million), of which $20 million has been drawn down as at 30 June 2013 (30 June 2012: $40 million).\n\n## Convertible loan facility\n\nKingsgate has a five year A$35 million convertible loan facility with Investec entered into in a prior period to provide funding for the Bowdens acquisition. Kingsgate has the option to make a prepayment against the facility with an issue of Kingsgate shares.\n\n## Restructure of corporate loan and convertible loan facilities\n\nAs indicated previously in the Preliminary Final report, at balance date it was the Group's intention to restructure and amalgamate these facilities in the next financial year. This relates to the potential for completion of the Initial Public Offering ('IPO') of Akara on the Stock Exchange of Thailand and the updated mine plan for Challenger. Any restructure would optimise the Group's anticipated balance sheet liquidity and operational cash flows. Accordingly, the Group classified the total amount drawn down under these facilities of $55 million as a current liability at 30 June 2013.\n\nSubsequent to the end of the financial year, the Group received from its lenders a credit approved term sheet (subject to formal documentation) for the restructure of the corporate loan and convertible loan facilities. Following completion of the restructure the total amount outstanding will be reduced to $40 million. This loan will be provided through a single senior corporate facility which will consist of two tranches:\n\n- 〉 Tranche one will be a $25 million Akara Pre IPO Bond with a maturity date of 31 July 2015. The current intention is for this tranche to be repaid as part of the Akara IPO, although at Kingsgate's election repayment can be made by either cash or in Kingsgate's shares.\n- 〉 Tranche two is an amortising facility with $5 million to be repaid during the 2014 financial year and the balance of $10 million repaid during the 2015 financial year.\n\nwww.kingsgate.com.au\n\n## Convertible revolving credit facility\n\nThe Group also has a three year $25 million Convertible Revolving Credit Facility available. As at the date of this report the facility is undrawn. Under the terms of this facility, Kingsgate has the option of repaying any funds drawn down under the facility through either cash or by issuing ordinary shares. It is intended that this facility will be utilised during the 2014 financial year for corporate and working capital purposes. It is the current intention of the company to repay any cash drawdown under the facility by the issuance of fully paid ordinary shares which would rank parri pasu with all existing ordinary shares, although this position will be reviewed at the appropriate time. The number of shares has not yet been determined and they will be issued at a 2.5% discount to VWAP over a period by reference to the draw down date. Shareholder approval is not required.\n\n## Multi-currency and syndicated loan facilities\n\nKingsgate's Thai operating subsidiary, Akara, established a six year amortising multi-currency loan facility equivalent to US$125 million (fully drawn as at period end) and an additional Thai Baht denominated working capital facility equivalent to US$15 million (undrawn as at year end) during the period. The proceeds from these borrowings were used to fully repay the outstanding balance on the US$100 million Baht denominated syndicated loan facility in existence at the beginning of the period as well as to repay part of the corporate loan facility noted above.\n\n## Financial Position\n\nShareholders' equity at 30 June 2013 was $474 million (2012: $776 million). The decrease of $302 million reflects the year's loss together with dividends paid.\n\n## Dividends\n\nNo final dividend has been declared for the year ended 30 June 2013.\n\nAn interim dividend declared for the half-year ended 31 December 2012 of 5 cents per fully paid share was paid on 12 April 2013.\n\nA final dividend declared for the year ended 30 June 2012 of 10 cents per fully paid share was paid on 1 October 2012.", + "recall": 0.9584775086505191, + "true_md": "10 Finance Report\n\n## Financing Arrangements\n\n## Corporate loan facility\n\n## Convertible loan facility\n\n## Restructure of corporate loan and convertible loan facilities\n\n## Multi-currency and syndicated loan facilities\n\n## Financial Position\n\n## Dividends\n\n## Convertible revolving credit facility\n\nKingsgate has a three year secured loan facility with Investec which was amended during the year. The amended facility has a limit of $40 million (30 June 2012: $50 million), of which $20 million has been drawn down as at 30 June 2013 (30 June 2012: $40 million). \n\nThe Group also has a three year $25 million Convertible Revolving Credit Facility available. As at the date of this report the facility is undrawn. Under the terms of this facility, Kingsgate has the option of repaying any funds drawn down under the facility through either cash or by issuing ordinary shares. It is intended that this facility will be utilised during the 2014 financial year for corporate and working capital purposes. It is the current intention of the company to repay any cash drawdown under the facility by the issuance of fully paid ordinary shares which would rank parri pasu with all existing ordinary shares, although this position will be reviewed at the appropriate time. The number of shares has not yet been determined and they will be issued at a 2.5% discount to VWAP over a period by reference to the draw down date. Shareholder approval is not required.\n\nKingsgate has a five year A$35 million convert- ible loan facility with Investec entered into in a prior period to provide funding for the Bowdens acquisition. Kingsgate has the option to make a prepayment against the facility with an issue of Kingsgate shares.\n\nAs indicated previously in the Preliminary Final report, at balance date it was the Group’s inten- tion to restructure and amalgamate these facilities in the next financial year. This relates to the potential for completion of the Initial Public Offering (“IPO”) of Akara on the Stock Exchange of Thailand and the updated mine plan for Challenger. Any restructure would optimise the Group’s anticipated balance sheet liquidity and operational cash flows. Accordingly, the Group classified the total amount drawn down under these facilities of $55 million as a current liability at 30 June 2013.\n\nSubsequent to the end of the financial year, the Group received from its lenders a credit approved term sheet (subject to formal docu- mentation) for the restructure of the corporate loan and convertible loan facilities. Following completion of the restructure the total amount outstanding will be reduced to $40 million. This loan will be provided through a single senior corporate facility which will consist of two tranches:\n\nKingsgate’s Thai operating subsidiary, Akara, established a six year amortising multi-currency loan facility equivalent to US$125 million (fully drawn as at period end) and an additional Thai Baht denominated working capital facility equivalent to US$15 million (undrawn as at year end) during the period. The proceeds from these borrowings were used to fully repay the outstanding balance on the US$100 million Baht denominated syndicated loan facility in exist- ence at the beginning of the period as well as to repay part of the corporate loan facility noted above. \n\nShareholders’ equity at 30 June 2013 was $474 million (2012: $776 million). The decrease of $302 million reflects the year’s loss together with dividends paid.\n\nNo final dividend has been declared for the year ended 30 June 2013.\n\nAn interim dividend declared for the half-year ended 31 December 2012 of 5 cents per fully paid share was paid on 12 April 2013.\n\nA final dividend declared for the year ended 30 June 2012 of 10 cents per fully paid share was paid on 1 October 2012.\n\n- 〉 Tranche one will be a $25 million Akara Pre IPO Bond with a maturity date of 31 July 2015. The current intention is for this tranche to be repaid as part of the Akara IPO, although at Kingsgate’s election repayment can be made by either cash or in Kingsgate’s shares.\n\n- 〉 Tranche two is an amortising facility with $5 million to be repaid during the 2014 financial year and the balance of $10 million repaid during the 2015 financial year.\n\nwww.kingsgate.com.au" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5329180097812454, + "doc_id": "0fd24bb6cc7f52774baa5fc6f3f111c5058284bc54b28be35a9a21f586636ad5", + "edit_distance": 0.3843260188087774, + "f1_score": 0.9871043376318875, + "meteor": 0.5303257966220161, + "precision": 0.9882629107981221, + "pred_md": "## COMPETITIVE CONDITIONS\n\nWe operate in a highly competitive business environment. We compete with other national, regional, local and online retailers that may carry similar lines of merchandise, including department stores, specialty stores, off-price stores, boutiques and Internet businesses. Our specific competitors vary from market to market. We believe the keys to competing in our industry are providing great customer service and customer experiences in stores and online, which includes compelling price and value, fashion newness, quality of products, selection, convenience, technology, product fulfillment, personalization and appealing, relevant store environments in top locations.\n\n## INVENTORY\n\nWe plan our merchandise purchases and receipts to coincide with expected sales trends. For instance, our merchandise purchases and receipts increase prior to our Anniversary Sale, which has historically extended over the last two weeks of July. We also purchase and receive a larger amount of merchandise in the fall as we prepare for the holiday shopping season (from late November through December). Beginning in 2012, we increased our investment in pack and hold inventory at Nordstrom Rack, which involves the strategic purchase of merchandise from some of our full-line stores' top brands in advance of the upcoming selling seasons to take advantage of favorable buying opportunities. This inventory is typically held for six months on average and has contributed to the growth in our Nordstrom Rack business. We pay for our merchandise purchases under the terms established with our vendors.\n\nIn order to offer merchandise that our customers want, we purchase from a wide variety of high-quality suppliers, including domestic and foreign businesses. We also have arrangements with agents and contract manufacturers to produce our private label merchandise. We expect our suppliers to meet our 'Nordstrom Partnership Guidelines,' which address our corporate social responsibility standards for matters such as legal and regulatory compliance, labor, health and safety and the environment, and are available on our website at Nordstrom.com.\n\n## EMPLOYEES\n\nDuring 2014, we employed approximately 67,000 employees on a full- or part-time basis. Due to the seasonal nature of our business, employment increased to approximately 68,000 employees in July 2014 and 73,500 in December 2014. All of our employees are non-union. We believe our relationship with our employees is good.\n\n## CAUTIONARY STATEMENT\n\nCertain statements in this Annual Report on Form 10-K contain or may suggest 'forward-looking' information (as defined in the Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995) that involve risks and uncertainties, including, but not limited to, anticipated financial outlook for the fiscal year ending January 30, 2016, anticipated annual total and comparable sales rates, anticipated new store openings in existing, new and international markets, anticipated Return on Invested Capital and trends in our operations. Such statements are based upon the current beliefs and expectations of the company's management and are subject to significant risks and uncertainties. Actual future results may differ materially from historical results or current expectations depending upon factors including, but not limited to:\n\n- · successful execution of our customer strategy, including expansion into new markets, acquisitions, investments in our stores and online, our ability to realize the anticipated benefits from growth initiatives, our ability to provide a seamless experience across all channels, and the timely completion of construction associated with newly planned stores, relocations and remodels, all of which may be impacted by the financial health of third parties,\n- · our ability to manage the transformation of our business/financial model as we increase our investments in growth opportunities, including our online business and our ability to manage related organizational changes,\n- · our ability to maintain relationships with our employees and to effectively attract, develop and retain our future leaders,\n- · effective inventory management, disruptions in our supply chain and our ability to control costs,\n- · the impact of any systems failures, cybersecurity and/or security breaches, including any security breach of our systems or those of a third-party provider that results in the theft, transfer or unauthorized disclosure of customer, employee or company information or compliance with information security and privacy laws and regulations in the event of such an incident,\n- · successful execution of our information technology strategy,\n- · our ability to effectively utilize data in strategic planning and decision making,\n- · efficient and proper allocation of our capital resources,\n- · reviewing of options and structure for a financial partner in regards to a potential transaction related to our credit card receivables,\n- · our ability to safeguard our reputation and maintain our vendor relationships,\n- · the impact of economic and market conditions and the resultant impact on consumer spending patterns,\n- · our ability to respond to the business environment, fashion trends and consumer preferences, including changing expectations of service and experience in stores and online,\n- · the effectiveness of planned advertising, marketing and promotional campaigns in the highly competitive retail industry,\n- · weather conditions, natural disasters, health hazards, national security or other market disruptions, or the prospects of these events and the resulting impact on consumer spending patterns,\n- · our compliance with applicable banking-related laws and regulations impacting our ability to extend credit to our customers, employment laws and regulations, certain international laws and regulations, other laws and regulations applicable to us, including the outcome of claims and litigation and resolution of tax matters, and ethical standards,\n- · impact of the current regulatory environment and financial system and health care reforms,\n\nNordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 5", + "recall": 0.9859484777517564, + "true_md": "## COMPETITIVE CONDITIONS We operate in a highly competitive business environment. We compete with other national, regional, local and online retailers that may carry\n\n## INVENTORY We plan our merchandise purchases and receipts to coincide with expected sales trends. For instance, our merchandise purchases and\n\n## EMPLOYEES During 2014, we employed approximately 67,000 employees on a full- or part-time basis. Due to the seasonal nature of our business,\n\n## CAUTIONARY STATEMENT Certain statements in this Annual Report on Form 10-K contain or may suggest “forward-looking” information (as defined in the Private\n\nCOMPETITIVE CONDITIONS We operate in a highly competitive business environment. We compete with other national, regional, local and online retailers that may carry similar lines of merchandise, including department stores, specialty stores, off-price stores, boutiques and Internet businesses. Our specific competitors vary from market to market. We believe the keys to competing in our industry are providing great customer service and customer experiences in stores and online, which includes compelling price and value, fashion newness, quality of products, selection, convenience, technology, product fulfillment, personalization and appealing, relevant store environments in top locations.\n\nINVENTORY We plan our merchandise purchases and receipts to coincide with expected sales trends. For instance, our merchandise purchases and receipts increase prior to our Anniversary Sale, which has historically extended over the last two weeks of July. We also purchase and receive a larger amount of merchandise in the fall as we prepare for the holiday shopping season (from late November through December). Beginning in 2012, we increased our investment in pack and hold inventory at Nordstrom Rack, which involves the strategic purchase of merchandise from some of our full-line stores’ top brands in advance of the upcoming selling seasons to take advantage of favorable buying opportunities. This inventory is typically held for six months on average and has contributed to the growth in our Nordstrom Rack business. We pay for our merchandise purchases under the terms established with our vendors.\n\nIn order to offer merchandise that our customers want, we purchase from a wide variety of high-quality suppliers, including domestic and foreign businesses. We also have arrangements with agents and contract manufacturers to produce our private label merchandise. We expect our suppliers to meet our “Nordstrom Partnership Guidelines,” which address our corporate social responsibility standards for matters such as legal and regulatory compliance, labor, health and safety and the environment, and are available on our website at Nordstrom.com.\n\nEMPLOYEES During 2014, we employed approximately 67,000 employees on a full- or part-time basis. Due to the seasonal nature of our business, employment increased to approximately 68,000 employees in July 2014 and 73,500 in December 2014. All of our employees are non-union. We believe our relationship with our employees is good.\n\nCAUTIONARY STATEMENT Certain statements in this Annual Report on Form 10-K contain or may suggest “forward-looking” information (as defined in the Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995) that involve risks and uncertainties, including, but not limited to, anticipated financial outlook for the fiscal year ending January 30, 2016, anticipated annual total and comparable sales rates, anticipated new store openings in existing, new and international markets, anticipated Return on Invested Capital and trends in our operations. Such statements are based upon the current beliefs and expectations of the company’s management and are subject to significant risks and uncertainties. Actual future results may differ materially from historical results or current expectations depending upon factors including, but not limited to:\n\n- • successful execution of our customer strategy, including expansion into new markets, acquisitions, investments in our stores and online, our ability to realize the anticipated benefits from growth initiatives, our ability to provide a seamless experience across all channels, and the timely completion of construction associated with newly planned stores, relocations and remodels, all of which may be impacted by the financial health of third parties, • our ability to manage the transformation of our business/financial model as we increase our investments in growth opportunities, \n\n- be impacted by the financial health of third parties, • our ability to manage the transformation of our business/financial model as we increase our investments in growth opportunities, including our online business and our ability to manage related organizational changes, • our ability to maintain relationships with our employees and to effectively attract, develop and retain our future leaders,\n\n- including our online business and our ability to manage related organizational changes, • our ability to maintain relationships with our employees and to effectively attract, develop and retain our future leaders, • effective inventory management, disruptions in our supply chain and our ability to control costs,\n\n- • our ability to maintain relationships with our employees and to effectively attract, develop and retain our future leaders, • effective inventory management, disruptions in our supply chain and our ability to control costs, • the impact of any systems failures, cybersecurity and/or security breaches, including any security breach of our systems or those of a \n\n- • effective inventory management, disruptions in our supply chain and our ability to control costs, • the impact of any systems failures, cybersecurity and/or security breaches, including any security breach of our systems or those of a third-party provider that results in the theft, transfer or unauthorized disclosure of customer, employee or company information or compliance with information security and privacy laws and regulations in the event of such an incident, • successful execution of our information technology strategy,\n\n- compliance with information security and privacy laws and regulations in the event of such an incident, • successful execution of our information technology strategy, • our ability to effectively utilize data in strategic planning and decision making, \n\n- • successful execution of our information technology strategy, • our ability to effectively utilize data in strategic planning and decision making, • efficient and proper allocation of our capital resources,\n\n- • our ability to effectively utilize data in strategic planning and decision making, • efficient and proper allocation of our capital resources, • reviewing of options and structure for a financial partner in regards to a potential transaction related to our credit card receivables,\n\n- • efficient and proper allocation of our capital resources, • reviewing of options and structure for a financial partner in regards to a potential transaction related to our credit card receivables, • our ability to safeguard our reputation and maintain our vendor relationships,\n\n- • reviewing of options and structure for a financial partner in regards to a potential transaction related to our credit card receivables, • our ability to safeguard our reputation and maintain our vendor relationships, • the impact of economic and market conditions and the resultant impact on consumer spending patterns,\n\n- • our ability to safeguard our reputation and maintain our vendor relationships, • the impact of economic and market conditions and the resultant impact on consumer spending patterns, • our ability to respond to the business environment, fashion trends and consumer preferences, including changing expectations of \n\n- • the impact of economic and market conditions and the resultant impact on consumer spending patterns, • our ability to respond to the business environment, fashion trends and consumer preferences, including changing expectations of service and experience in stores and online, • the effectiveness of planned advertising, marketing and promotional campaigns in the highly competitive retail industry,\n\n- service and experience in stores and online, • the effectiveness of planned advertising, marketing and promotional campaigns in the highly competitive retail industry, • weather conditions, natural disasters, health hazards, national security or other market disruptions, or the prospects of these events \n\n- • the effectiveness of planned advertising, marketing and promotional campaigns in the highly competitive retail industry, • weather conditions, natural disasters, health hazards, national security or other market disruptions, or the prospects of these events and the resulting impact on consumer spending patterns, • our compliance with applicable banking-related laws and regulations impacting our ability to extend credit to our customers, \n\n- and the resulting impact on consumer spending patterns, • our compliance with applicable banking-related laws and regulations impacting our ability to extend credit to our customers, employment laws and regulations, certain international laws and regulations, other laws and regulations applicable to us, including the outcome of claims and litigation and resolution of tax matters, and ethical standards, • impact of the current regulatory environment and financial system and health care reforms,\n\n- the outcome of claims and litigation and resolution of tax matters, and ethical standards, • impact of the current regulatory environment and financial system and health care reforms,\n\nNordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 5" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8916380360731988, + "doc_id": "2dccfc2e2062f4977e06a8b99c15d934005b2bfb2eb9123026de1278ee6cc988", + "edit_distance": 0.6795698924731183, + "f1_score": 0.9715536105032823, + "meteor": 0.7937040502923145, + "precision": 0.9779735682819384, + "pred_md": "## Compliance Systems at SMFG\n\n## Basic Compliance Policies\n\nSMFG strives to further strengthen its compliance systems so that it may fulfill its public mission and corporate social responsibilities as a financial services group offering diversified products and services, and thereby become a truly outstanding global corporate group.\n\nFor compliance policies, SMFG sets forth its 'Business Ethics' (on page 48) as the common CSR principles for the Group, and considers the strengthening of such Business Ethics as one of the critical issues for the management.\n\n## Group Management from a Compliance Perspective\n\nAs a financial holding company, SMFG strives to maintain a compliance system which provides the appropriate directions, guidance and monitoring related to compliance for its Group companies.\n\nSpecifically, SMFG manages and monitors the self-sustaining compliance functions of individual Group companies through regular meetings attended by all Group companies and meetings with individual companies. The following compliance issues will be strengthened for the fiscal year 2011: (a) Responding appropriately to the regulatory environment, and strengthening the compliance structure of overseas offices; and (b) Strengthening the compliance structure of the Group.\n\n## Reporting System for Inappropriate Accounting and Auditing Activities\n\nSMFG has implemented the 'SMFG Accounting and Auditing Hotline' to provide the means for individuals in and out of the Group to report inappropriate accounting and auditing activities. This hotline quickly identifies and takes appropriate actions against any fraudulent activity or any misconduct associated with accounting and auditing at SMFG and its consolidated subsidiaries.\n\nReports may be submitted by regular mail or e-mail to the following respective addresses.\n\nMailing address:\n\nSMFG Accounting and Auditing Hotline Iwata Godo Attorneys and Counsellors at Law 10th floor, Marunouchi Building 2-4-1 Marunouchi, Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo 100-6310 E-mail address: smfghotline@iwatagodo.com\n\n- * The hotline accepts any alerts of inappropriate activities concerning accounting and auditing at SMFG and its consolidated subsidiaries.\n- * Anonymous reports are also accepted; however, if possible, providing personal information such as your name and contact information would be appreciated and helpful.\n- * Please provide as much detail as possible for such inappropriate activities. An investigation may not be feasible if information is not adequate.\n- * Personal information will not be disclosed to any third parties without your consent, unless such disclosure is required by law.\n\n* SMFG Card & Credit, Inc. is an intermediary holding company for Sumitomo Mitsui Card and Cedyna.\n\n* SMFG Card & Credit, Inc. is an intermediary holding company for Sumitomo Mitsui Card and Cedyna.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n52", + "recall": 0.9652173913043478, + "true_md": "## Compliance\n\n## Compliance Systems at SMFG\n\n## Basic Compliance Policies\n\n## Reporting System for Inappropriate Accounting and Auditing Activities\n\n## Group Management from a Compliance Perspective\n\nSMFG 2011 52\n\n* SMFG Card & Credit, Inc. is an intermediary holding company for Sumitomo Mitsui Card and Cedyna.\n\nSpecifically, SMFG manages and monitors the self-sustaining compliance functions of individual Group companies through regular meetings attended by all Group companies and meetings with individual companies. The following compliance issues will be strengthened for the fiscal year 2011: (a) Responding appro- priately to the regulatory environment, and strengthening the compliance structure of overseas offices; and (b) Strengthening the compliance structure of the Group.\n\nAs a financial holding company, SMFG strives to maintain a compliance system which provides the appropriate directions, guidance and monitoring related to compliance for its Group companies.\n\nReports may be submitted by regular mail or e-mail to the following respective addresses.\n\nMailing address: SMFG Accounting and Auditing Hotline Iwata Godo Attorneys and Counsellors at Law 10th floor, Marunouchi Building 2-4-1 Marunouchi, Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo 100-6310\n\nE-mail address: smfghotline@iwatagodo.com\n\n- * The hotline accepts any alerts of inappropriate activities concerning accounting and auditing at SMFG and its consolidated subsidiaries.\n\n- * Anonymous reports are also accepted; however, if possible, providing personal information such as your name and contact information would be appreciated and helpful.\n\n- * Please provide as much detail as possible for such inappropriate activi- ties. An investigation may not be feasible if information is not adequate.\n\n- * Personal information will not be disclosed to any third parties without your consent, unless such disclosure is required by law.\n\nSMFG has implemented the “SMFG Accounting and Auditing Hotline” to provide the means for individuals in and out of the Group to report inappropriate accounting and auditing activi- ties. This hotline quickly identifies and takes appropriate actions against any fraudulent activity or any misconduct associated with accounting and auditing at SMFG and its consolidated subsidiaries.\n\nSMFG strives to further strengthen its compliance systems so that it may fulfill its public mission and corporate social responsi- bilities as a financial services group offering diversified products and services, and thereby become a truly outstanding global corporate group.\n\nFor compliance policies, SMFG sets forth its “Business Ethics” (on page 48) as the common CSR principles for the Group, and considers the strengthening of such Business Ethics as one of the critical issues for the management." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6296328209391744, + "doc_id": "419ff58cd175b12aaea9afd4ba216e1cdd76bd57cfc9e1661c9545e7a67f5b3c", + "edit_distance": 0.3004484304932735, + "f1_score": 0.9626168224299065, + "meteor": 0.7790361498807078, + "precision": 0.9809523809523809, + "pred_md": "## Environmental businesses\n\nThe Group considers that environmental businesses are part of its core business operations, through which it contributes to the continued well-being and improvement of the global environment. In fiscal 2005, SMBC started its cross-organizational Eco-Biz Promotion Council, for periodical discussion of the development of sophisticated and efficient products and services for environmental maintenance and improvement. Other SMFG Group companies have become members of this Council, meeting on a regular basis.\n\n## Environmental Initiatives by Group Companies\n\n- * Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation * 2 The Japan Research Institute Limited * 3 SMBC Nikko Securities Inc. * 4 Sumitomo Mitsui Finance and Leasing Co., Ltd. 1\n- * Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation (China) Limited * 6 The Japan Research Institute (Shanghai) Consulting Co., Ltd. * 7 Sumitomo Mitsui Card Company, Limited 5\n- * SMBC Friend Securities Co., Ltd. * 9 8 THE MINATO BANK, LTD. * 10 Kansai Urban Banking Corporation\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n56", + "recall": 0.944954128440367, + "true_md": "## Environmental Initiatives by Group Companies\n\n## Environmental businesses\n\nThe Group considers that environmental businesses are part of its core business operations, through which it contributes to the con- tinued well-being and improvement of the global environment. In fiscal 2005, SMBC started its cross-organizational Eco-Biz Promotion Council, for periodical discussion of the development of sophisticated and efficient products and services for environmental maintenance and improvement. Other SMFG Group companies have become members of this Council, meeting on a regular basis.\n\n*$^{1}$ Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation *$^{2}$ The Japan Research Institute Limited *$^{3}$ SMBC Nikko Securities Inc. *$^{4}$ Sumitomo Mitsui Finance and Leasing Co., Ltd.\n\n*$^{5}$ Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation (China) Limited *$^{6}$ The Japan Research Institute (Shanghai) Consulting Co., Ltd. *$^{7}$ Sumitomo Mitsui Card Company, Limited\n\n*$^{8}$ SMBC Friend Securities Co., Ltd. *$^{9}$ THE MINATO BANK, LTD. *$^{10}$ Kansai Urban Banking Corporation\n\nSMFG 2011 56" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8232490471721702, + "doc_id": "4fcfbcde6c0ba39146637c104a9178edb9de466bde192dc54ad21d1201de6e34", + "edit_distance": 0.5454545454545454, + "f1_score": 0.9743589743589745, + "meteor": 0.9449876237623764, + "precision": 0.95, + "pred_md": "## CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF CASH FLOWS\n\nThe accompanying notes are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements\n\n- 58 -", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "The accompanying notes are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements \n\n- 58 - \n\nCONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF CASH FLOWS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8380548861118811, + "doc_id": "d0c0cec8b8396515aaaca50529754215a7cbe2019f3dd96c7e7163fe61f30a1e", + "edit_distance": 0.7309833024118738, + "f1_score": 0.990950226244344, + "meteor": 0.6713900788389608, + "precision": 0.9954545454545455, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 33 - FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT continued\n\n## b) Net Fair Value of Financial Assets and Liabilities\n\nThe net fair value of cash and cash equivalent and non-interest bearing monetary financial assets and financial liabilities of the consolidated entity approximate their carrying value.\n\nThe net fair value of other monetary financial assets and financial liabilities is based on discounting future cash flows by the current interest rates for assets and liabilities with similar risk profiles. Other than the Junior Credit Facility, the balances are not materially different from those disclosed in the consolidated statement of financial position of the Group.\n\n## c) Credit Risk\n\nCredit risk for the Group arises from investments in cash and cash equivalents, derivative financial instruments and deposits with banks and financial institutions, as well as credit exposures to customers including outstanding receivables and committed transactions, and represents the potential financial loss if counterparties fail to perform as contracted. The Group trades only with recognised, creditworthy third parties.\n\nThe maximum exposure to credit risk, excluding the value of any collateral or other security, at balance date to recognise the financial assets, is the carrying amount, net of any impairment of those assets, as disclosed in the balance sheet and notes to the financial statements. Receivable balances are monitored on an ongoing basis at the individual customer level.\n\nAt 31 December 2014, the Group had three customers that owed the Group more than $1.0 million each and accounted for approximately 75% of total accrued revenue receivables. There was one customer with balances greater than $5.0 million accounting for approximately 56% of total accrued revenue receivables. For joint interest billing receivables, if payment is not made, the Group can withhold future payments of revenue, as such, there is minimal to no credit risk associated with these receivables.\n\n## d) Liquidity Risk\n\nLiquidity risk is the risk that the Group will not be able to meet its financial obligations as they fall due. The Group's approach to managing liquidity is to ensure that it will have sufficient liquidity to meet its liabilities as they become due, without incurring unacceptable losses or risking damage to the Group's reputation. The Group manages liquidity risk by maintaining adequate reserves and banking facilities by continuously monitoring forecast and actual cash flows, and by matching the maturity profiles of financial assets and liabilities.\n\nAs at 31 December 2014, based on the current borrowing based, the Group had $15.0 million of undrawn borrowing facilities.\n\n- 99 -", + "recall": 0.9864864864864865, + "true_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 33 – FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT continued\n\n## b) Net Fair Value of Financial Assets and Liabilities The net fair value of cash and cash equivalent and non-interest bearing monetary financial assets and financial\n\n## c) Credit Risk Credit risk for the Group arises from investments in cash and cash equivalents, derivative financial instruments\n\n## d) Liquidity Risk Liquidity risk is the risk that the Group will not be able to meet its financial obligations as they fall due. The\n\nLiquidity Risk Liquidity risk is the risk that the Group will not be able to meet its financial obligations as they fall due. The Group’s approach to managing liquidity is to ensure that it will have sufficient liquidity to meet its liabilities as they become due, without incurring unacceptable losses or risking damage to the Group’s reputation. The Group manages liquidity risk by maintaining adequate reserves and banking facilities by continuously monitoring forecast and actual cash flows, and by matching the maturity profiles of financial assets and liabilities. \n\nAs at 31 December 2014, based on the current borrowing based, the Group had $15.0 million of undrawn borrowing facilities. \n\nAt 31 December 2014, the Group had three customers that owed the Group more than $1.0 million each and accounted for approximately 75% of total accrued revenue receivables. There was one customer with balances greater than $5.0 million accounting for approximately 56% of total accrued revenue receivables. For joint interest billing receivables, if payment is not made, the Group can withhold future payments of revenue, as such, there is minimal to no credit risk associated with these receivables. \n\nThe maximum exposure to credit risk, excluding the value of any collateral or other security, at balance date to recognise the financial assets, is the carrying amount, net of any impairment of those assets, as disclosed in the balance sheet and notes to the financial statements. Receivable balances are monitored on an ongoing basis at the individual customer level. \n\nCredit Risk Credit risk for the Group arises from investments in cash and cash equivalents, derivative financial instruments and deposits with banks and financial institutions, as well as credit exposures to customers including outstanding receivables and committed transactions, and represents the potential financial loss if counterparties fail to perform as contracted. The Group trades only with recognised, creditworthy third parties. \n\nThe net fair value of other monetary financial assets and financial liabilities is based on discounting future cash flows by the current interest rates for assets and liabilities with similar risk profiles. Other than the Junior Credit Facility, the balances are not materially different from those disclosed in the consolidated statement of financial position of the Group. \n\nNet Fair Value of Financial Assets and Liabilities The net fair value of cash and cash equivalent and non-interest bearing monetary financial assets and financial liabilities of the consolidated entity approximate their carrying value. \n\n- 99 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8575185687879361, + "doc_id": "0ce18feb0cd7ac9e82b454495900506fbbcaf58c49028dbe6615a83101cca08d", + "edit_distance": 0.3883495145631068, + "f1_score": 0.9554140127388535, + "meteor": 0.8831303118916318, + "precision": 0.9554140127388535, + "pred_md": "SMFG\n\nCapital Ratio Information\n\n## b. Risk Weights\n\n## (C) Amount of Credit Risk-Weighted Assets Calculated Using Supplementary Provision 15 of the Notification\n\n## B. As Sponsor\n\n## (A) Underlying Assets\n\nNotes: 1. The above amounts include the amount of underlying assets securitized during the term without entailing 'securitization exposures.'\n\n- 2. 'Default amount' is the total of underlying assets which are past due three months or more and defaulted underlying assets.\n- 3. 'Default amount' and 'Loss amount' when acting as a sponsor of securitization of customer claims are estimated using the following methods and alternative data, as in some cases it can be difficult to obtain relevant data in a timely manner because the underlying assets have been recovered by the customer.\n\n(1) 'Default amount' estimation method\n\n- GLYPH<129> For securitization transactions subject to the ratings-based approach, the amount is estimated based on information on underlying assets obtainable from customers, etc.\n- GLYPH<129> For securitization transactions subject to the supervisory formula, the amount is estimated based on obtainable information on, or default rate of, each obligor. Further, when it is difficult to estimate the amount using either method, it is conservatively estimated by assuming that the underlying asset is a default asset.\n\n(2) 'Loss amount' estimation method\n\n- GLYPH<129> For securitization transactions subject to the ratings-based approach, the amount is the same amount as the 'Default amount' estimated conservatively in (1) above.\n- GLYPH<129> For securitization transactions subject to the supervisory formula, when expected loss ratios of defaulted underlying assets can be determined, the amount is estimated using the ratios. When it is difficult to determine the ratios, the amount is the same amount as the 'Default amount' estimated conservatively in (1) above.\n\n4. 'Other claims' includes lease fees.\n\n- 5. Following Articles 230 and 248 of the Notification, there are no amounts that represent 'exposure to products subject to early amortization provisions' to investors.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n194", + "recall": 0.9554140127388535, + "true_md": "SMFG\n\nCapital Ratio Information\n\n## B. As Sponsor\n\n## (A) Underlying Assets\n\n## b. Risk Weights\n\n## (C) Amount of Credit Risk-Weighted Assets Calculated Using Supplementary Provision 15 of the Notification\n\nNotes: 1. The above amounts include the amount of underlying assets securitized during the term without entailing “securitization exposures.”\n\n2. “Default amount” is the total of underlying assets which are past due three months or more and defaulted underlying assets.\n\n(1) “Default amount” estimation method\n\n(2) “Loss amount” estimation method\n\n4. “Other claims” includes lease fees.\n\n5. Following Articles 230 and 248 of the Notification, there are no amounts that represent “exposure to products subject to early amortization provisions” to investors.\n\n3. “Default amount” and “Loss amount” when acting as a sponsor of securitization of customer claims are estimated using the following methods and alternative data, as in some cases it can be difficult to obtain relevant data in a timely manner because the underlying assets have been recovered by the customer.\n\n- GLYPH<129> For securitization transactions subject to the ratings-based approach, the amount is estimated based on information on underlying assets obtainable from customers, etc.\n\n- GLYPH<129> For securitization transactions subject to the supervisory formula, the amount is estimated based on obtainable information on, or default rate of, each obligor. Further, when it is difficult to estimate the amount using either method, it is conservatively estimated by assuming that the underlying asset is a default asset.\n\n- GLYPH<129> For securitization transactions subject to the ratings-based approach, the amount is the same amount as the “Default amount” estimated conservatively in (1) above.\n\n- GLYPH<129> For securitization transactions subject to the supervisory formula, when expected loss ratios of defaulted underlying assets can be determined, the amount is estimated using the ratios. When it is difficult to determine the ratios, the amount is the same amount as the “Default amount” estimated conservatively in (1) above.\n\n194\n\nSMFG 2011" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8763105507370262, + "doc_id": "e29782409cf4a6f39e4e34c1def04cec5dd6e7b31bc4cf65296af43c7e4cafc2", + "edit_distance": 0.625, + "f1_score": 0.9723756906077349, + "meteor": 0.9063160445725076, + "precision": 0.9777777777777777, + "pred_md": "## NOTE 10: EARNINGS PER SHARE\n\nThe table below shows the calculation of basic and diluted earnings per share for 2013 and 2012.\n\n## NOTE 11: OTHER CURRENT ASSETS\n\nCost of equipment sales and merchandise for resale includes $1,667 million (2012 - $1,707 million) of inventory costs.\n\n## NOTE 12: PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT\n\nThe table below shows property, plant and equipment and accumulated depreciation as at December 31, 2013 and 2012.\n\nThe tables below summarize the changes in the net carrying amounts of property, plant and equipment during 2013 and 2012.\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC.\n\n107\n\nA total of 577,584 options were out of the money for 2013 (2012 17,240). They were excluded from the calculation since they were antidilutive.\n\nNOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS", + "recall": 0.967032967032967, + "true_md": "NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 10: EARNINGS PER SHARE\n\n## NOTE 12: PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT\n\nCost of equipment sales and merchandise for resale includes $1,667 million (2012 – $1,707 million) of inventory costs.\n\nA total of 577,584 options were out of the money for 2013 (2012 – 17,240). They were excluded from the calculation since they were anti- dilutive.\n\nThe table below shows property, plant and equipment and accumulated depreciation as at December 31, 2013 and 2012.\n\nThe tables below summarize the changes in the net carrying amounts of property, plant and equipment during 2013 and 2012.\n\nThe table below shows the calculation of basic and diluted earnings per share for 2013 and 2012.\n\n## NOTE 11: OTHER CURRENT ASSETS\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 107" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9771372373937927, + "doc_id": "004ca5356273ad8266ab61d40a0d286c33de9613e9ac89701bc7dac9bcaf59e8", + "edit_distance": 0.742816091954023, + "f1_score": 0.9923664122137404, + "meteor": 0.6938952944194131, + "precision": 0.9948979591836735, + "pred_md": "SMFG\n\nCapital Ratio Information\n\n## B. Verification of Scenarios Using Three Data Elements\n\nAt SMFG and SMBC, the verifications of the assessments of scenarios using internal loss data, external loss data, and BEICFs (hereinafter, '3 data elements') are implemented periodically. Specifically, SMFG and SMBC use these data and information and use them to determine, periodically, whether there are any scenarios that have been omitted and whether the assessments of the scenarios are appropriate to ensure the completeness and appropriateness of the scenarios.\n\n## (A) Reassessment of Scenarios Using Internal Loss Data\n\nBoth SMFG and SMBC, in principle, compile internal loss data on all gross loss amounts of at least one yen. From the data, internal loss data which fulfill the established criteria are drawn, and the content of the related loss events is considered; then, a judgment is made regarding whether or not to review the scenario in question. Specifically, we pose a number of issues to consider, such as whether the scenario exists at SMBC, and, if so, whether the deviation between the actual loss and the assessed value of the scenario is within the tolerance range. In considering these issues, we follow a set pattern of logical reasoning in making a decision on whether the scenario should be revised.\n\nWhen we decide it is necessary to revise the scenario, we make a reassessment based on the internal loss data. In this process, we consider redeveloping and reassessing the scenario and other related matters to ensure that the internal loss data is properly reflected in the scenario.\n\n## (B) Reassessment of Scenarios Using External Loss Data\n\nAt SMFG and SMBC, we have a database containing more than 7,000 cases of external losses that have been taken from the mass media, including newspapers, and purchased from data vendors. A framework has been created to enable the sharing of this database across the Group.\n\nFrom this database, we draw external loss data which fulfill the established criteria, and the content of the related loss events is considered; then, a judgment is made regarding whether or not to revise the scenario in question. Specifically, we pose a number of issues to consider, such as whether the scenarios in question exist at SMBC, and, if so, whether the deviation between the actual loss and the assessed value of the scenario is within the tolerance range. In considering these issues, we follow a set pattern of logical reasoning in making a decision on whether the scenario should be reviewed.\n\nWhen we decide it is necessary for the scenario to be reviewed, we make a reassessment based on the external loss data. In this process, we consider deriving and reassessing the scenario and other related matters to ensure that the external loss data is properly reflected in the scenario.\n\n## (C) Reassessment of Scenarios Using BEICFs\n\nAt SMFG and SMBC, we compile data related to changes in laws and regulations, changes in internal rules, policies and procedures, and new business, products and process, all of which are business environment and internal control factors (BEICFs). We use this information to consider periodically whether our scenarios should be reconsidered, and, even for events other than those listed previously, when major changes occur in the business environment, our systems provide, as necessary, for the consideration of whether scenarios should be revised.\n\nWhen we decide it is necessary for the scenario to be reviewed, we make a reassessment based on the information related to changes and other factors in BEICFs. In this process, we consider redeveloping and reassessing the scenario and other related matters to ensure that the changes in BEICFs are properly reflected in our scenarios.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n204", + "recall": 0.9898477157360406, + "true_md": "SMFG Capital Ratio Information\n\n## B. Verification of Scenarios Using Three Data Elements\n\n## (A) Reassessment of Scenarios Using Internal Loss Data\n\n## (B) Reassessment of Scenarios Using External Loss Data\n\n## (C) Reassessment of Scenarios Using BEICFs\n\nAt SMFG and SMBC, we compile data related to changes in laws and regulations, changes in internal rules, policies and procedures, and new business, products and process, all of which are business environment and internal control factors (BEICFs). We use this information to consider periodically whether our scenarios should be reconsidered, and, even for events other than those listed previously, when major changes occur in the business environment, our systems provide, as necessary, for the consideration of whether scenarios should be revised.\n\nWhen we decide it is necessary for the scenario to be reviewed, we make a reassessment based on the information related to changes and other factors in BEICFs. In this process, we consider redeveloping and reassessing the scenario and other related matters to ensure that the changes in BEICFs are properly reflected in our scenarios.\n\nWhen we decide it is necessary for the scenario to be reviewed, we make a reassessment based on the external loss data. In this process, we consider deriving and reassessing the scenario and other related matters to ensure that the external loss data is properly reflected in the scenario.\n\nFrom this database, we draw external loss data which fulfill the established criteria, and the content of the related loss events is considered; then, a judgment is made regarding whether or not to revise the scenario in question. Specifically, we pose a number of issues to consider, such as whether the scenarios in question exist at SMBC, and, if so, whether the deviation between the actual loss and the assessed value of the scenario is within the tolerance range. In considering these issues, we follow a set pattern of logical reasoning in making a decision on whether the scenario should be reviewed.\n\nAt SMFG and SMBC, we have a database containing more than 7,000 cases of external losses that have been taken from the mass media, including newspapers, and purchased from data vendors. A framework has been created to enable the sharing of this database across the Group.\n\nWhen we decide it is necessary to revise the scenario, we make a reassessment based on the internal loss data. In this process, we consider redeveloping and reassessing the scenario and other related matters to ensure that the internal loss data is properly reflected in the scenario.\n\nBoth SMFG and SMBC, in principle, compile internal loss data on all gross loss amounts of at least one yen. From the data, internal loss data which fulfill the established criteria are drawn, and the content of the related loss events is considered; then, a judgment is made regarding whether or not to review the scenario in question. Specifically, we pose a number of issues to consider, such as whether the scenario exists at SMBC, and, if so, whether the deviation between the actual loss and the assessed value of the scenario is within the tolerance range. In considering these issues, we follow a set pattern of logical reasoning in making a decision on whether the scenario should be revised. \n\nAt SMFG and SMBC, the verifications of the assessments of scenarios using internal loss data, external loss data, and BEICFs (hereinafter, “3 data elements”) are implemented periodically. Specifically, SMFG and SMBC use these data and information and use them to determine, periodically, whether there are any scenarios that have been omitted and whether the assessments of the scenarios are appropriate to ensure the completeness and appropriateness of the scenarios. \n\nSMFG 2011 204" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9762925414739257, + "doc_id": "7e7cf2f5e0cec54948557e0e30ca7fdccdccd91d9ca95727d0e5026652f2c0f1", + "edit_distance": 0.9347826086956522, + "f1_score": 0.9910447761194029, + "meteor": 0.8301453512247132, + "precision": 0.9940119760479041, + "pred_md": "knows how businesses work, we also offer a choice of specifically designed plans and options that allow users to share buckets of voice and data, connect directly with team members, establish wireless backup for point-of-sale and other systems, and roam frequently with cost certainty.\n\nFor hundreds of thousands of smaller businesses located in and around Rogers cable footprint, Rogers offers a compelling set of wired telephony and Internet solutions that provide enterprise-grade dependability and value. With voice, data, hosting and online security solutions built specifically for business, Rogers provides a single reliable source for innovative, dependable communications solutions that are backed up by around-the-clock live agent support.\n\nLarger enterprises also increasingly rely on Rogers to deliver corporatecritical voice, Internet, networking and managed data centre solutions\n\nacross its fibre-optic network that connects thousands of commercial and municipal buildings. These next generation on-net services for enterprise customers are backed by dedicated, around-the-clock support and connectivity to Rogers high-speed national fibre-optic backbone that provides redundancy as well as seamless connectivity into the United States and Europe.\n\nRogers also provides the most extensive set of advanced wireless machine-to-machine connectivity solutions which help businesses to increase productivity, reduce costs and optimize operations. As well, Rogers remains at the forefront of mobile commerce and electronic payments solutions in the Canadian market.\n\nBusinesses across Canada also connect with customers through Rogers leading media brands as the one-stop solution for all their local and national radio, television, online and print advertising needs.\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 11", + "recall": 0.9880952380952381, + "true_md": "across its fibre-optic network that connects thousands of commercial and municipal buildings. These next generation on-net services for enterprise customers are backed by dedicated, around-the-clock support and connectivity to Rogers high-speed national fibre-optic backbone that provides redundancy as well as seamless connectivity into the United States and Europe.\n\nRogers also provides the most extensive set of advanced wireless machine-to-machine connectivity solutions which help businesses to increase productivity, reduce costs and optimize operations. As well, Rogers remains at the forefront of mobile commerce and electronic payments solutions in the Canadian market.\n\nBusinesses across Canada also connect with customers through Rogers leading media brands as the one-stop solution for all their local and national radio, television, online and print advertising needs.\n\nknows how businesses work, we also offer a choice of specifically designed plans and options that allow users to share buckets of voice and data, connect directly with team members, establish wireless backup for point-of-sale and other systems, and roam frequently with cost certainty.\n\nFor hundreds of thousands of smaller businesses located in and around Rogers cable footprint, Rogers offers a compelling set of wired telephony and Internet solutions that provide enterprise-grade dependability and value. With voice, data, hosting and online security solutions built specifically for business, Rogers provides a single reliable source for innovative, dependable communications solutions that are backed up by around-the-clock live agent support. \n\nLarger enterprises also increasingly rely on Rogers to deliver corporate- critical voice, Internet, networking and managed data centre solutions \n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 11" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9752200025650153, + "doc_id": "71a605406b69e2d1972bd33af2bb38646861376b6edf702fac67aafe3f850824", + "edit_distance": 0.060144927536231886, + "f1_score": 0.9869848156182213, + "meteor": 0.9894973603285618, + "precision": 0.9869848156182213, + "pred_md": "36\n\n| EMPLOYEES\n\nJason Stinson\n\nKen Stinson\n\nJoe Stockton\n\nWilliam Stokes\n\nMichael Storey\n\nMark Strack\n\nJason Strawser\n\nKevin Strawser\n\nOrdare Stribling\n\nJessica Stricklin\n\nRyan Stricklin\n\nSarah Struck\n\nTerry Stuck\n\nDamon Suderman\n\nJonathan Swarthout\n\nMichael Swonger\n\nAuna Tackett\n\nKiel Talbert\n\nJason Tannehill\n\nChristie Taylor\n\nKyle Taylor\n\nRobert B. Taylor\n\nRoberta Taylor\n\nTheressa Taylor\n\nTom D. Taylor III\n\nTom Taylor\n\nAnthony Thomas\n\nDennis Thomas\n\nLaDonna Thomas\n\nMark Thomas\n\nThaddius Thomas\n\nTrista Thomas\n\nKhristen Thomason\n\nCameron L. Thompson\n\nCharlie Thompson\n\nHarold Thompson\n\nMatt B. Thompson\n\nLaura Tiffany\n\nBrandon Tindle\n\nMichael Tingle\n\nRonny Tinker\n\nAdam Tinney\n\nDavid Tollan\n\nThomas Tollett\n\nMatt Toppins\n\nKatie Torres\n\nMary Anne Townson\n\nKeith Tran\n\nVan Tran\n\nGuy Trent\n\nTyler Trent\n\nWilliam Tuinstra\n\nOttie Turner\n\nLane Umsted\n\nChris Unwin\n\nRick Urash\n\nKristin Vafadar\n\nMiguel Valero-Esparza\n\nJohn Vankirk Jr.\n\nShawn Vasseur\n\nKristen Vickrey\n\nNathan Viggers\n\nTara Voth\n\nAlexa Wade\n\nJosh Walker\n\nKristen Walker\n\nJohnny Wall\n\nBrandon Wallace\n\nLaura Wallace\n\nCatalina Wallo\n\nMonica Walls\n\nChelsey Walstad\n\nMichael Walters\n\nDanny Ward\n\nRobert Warren III\n\nNick Watkins\n\nMatthew L. Watson\n\nJason Waybourn\n\nKelly Weaver\n\nJeremy Weeks\n\nLinda Weeks\n\nCody Weir\n\nJody Weir\n\nAlison Weis\n\nMelissa Wells\n\nGary Wencl\n\nBrandi Wessel\n\nYukino West\n\nBuck Wheat\n\nDavid Wheeler\n\nRebekah Wheeler\n\nLauren Whitaker\n\nGary White\n\nJennifer White\n\nLain White\n\nRobert White\n\nRoger White\n\nTodd White\n\nJim Whitefield\n\nWendy Whitfill-Embry\n\nJoni Whitney\n\nAllen Wiley\n\nWayne Wiley\n\nColton Wilkinson\n\nAllison Williams\n\nAmy M. Williams\n\nChristopher Williams\n\nDave Williams\n\nDerek Williams\n\nJason W. Williams\n\nJerry Williams\n\nShelli Williamson\n\nDavid Willis II\n\nPaul Willis\n\nBruce Willmott\n\nCraig Wilson\n\nLacie Wilson\n\nMatt Wilson\n\nRobert D. Wilson\n\nSabreena Wilson\n\nKyle Winkler\n\nRory Winter\n\nLane Witt\n\nDallas Wood\n\nDan Wood\n\nDavid Wood\n\nRick Wood\n\nTara Wood\n\nEric Woodard\n\nCameron Woods\n\nTyler Woods\n\nSean Woolverton\n\nTammy Worrell\n\nMagan Wright\n\nShalen Wyatt\n\nMark Wyckoff\n\nMike Yarbrough\n\nShaun Yates\n\nNathan Yeats\n\nDavid Yelle\n\nPreston Young\n\nJesse Yule\n\nErvin Zacharias\n\nJacob Zacharias\n\nTravis Zamora\n\nJenny Zhang\n\nLester Zitkus\n\nKathryn Zynda\n\n## 2008 (1,598)\n\nRicky Aaron\n\nJerad Abbott\n\nRichard Abel\n\nKacy Abney\n\nJose Adame\n\nJuan Adame\n\nDavid L. Adams\n\nJeremiah Adams\n\nJohn Adcock\n\nMatt Aderhold\n\nDoug Adkins\n\nDouglas Adkins\n\nJeffery Ainsworth\n\nAmber Alcorn\n\nDennis Alder\n\nJulie Alder\n\nChrista Alderman\n\nGreg Alexander\n\nKaren Alexander\n\nCarmen Allen\n\nSondra Allen\n\nJustin Allert\n\nBeth Allgood\n\nDavid Allien\n\nKevin Allison\n\nReno Alton\n\nJerame Aly\n\nManuel Amaya\n\nDerek Amyx\n\nJoan Anderson\n\nMatt S. Anderson\n\nMatt Anderson\n\nMilton Anderson Jr.\n\nShannon Anderson\n\nSteven Anderson\n\nShari Annuschat\n\nBrian Archer\n\nDann Armour\n\nDawn Arnhart\n\nChris Arnold\n\nMatt Arnold\n\nBryan Arrant\n\nAmber Arterberry\n\nLauren Ary\n\nJason Ashley\n\nJohnny Ashton\n\nErin Austin\n\nJesus Avila Torres\n\nTOWANDA, PENNSYLVANIA Working 24 hours a day, crews in the Marcellus Shale drill for natural gas in this enormous play spanning the Appalachians from West Virginia through Pennsylvania.\n\nCrystal Bacon\n\nRichard Baden\n\nJesse Bailey\n\nJoshua Bailey\n\nPatrick Bailey\n\nTommy Bailey\n\nBlake Baker\n\nCharles A. Baker Jr.\n\nDashawn Baker\n\nDonnie Baker\n\nKrista Baker\n\nLarry Baker\n\nDennis Balentine\n\nKristen Balla\n\nKristin Ballard\n\nLevi Ballard\n\nMelissa Bane\n\nRon Baranski Jr.\n\nGarry Barbee\n\nJoshua Barker\n\nAshley Barlow\n\nAdam Barnes\n\nRyan Barnes\n\nDan Barnett\n\nJoshua Barron\n\nJeff Barry\n\nJenni Bartel\n\nSteve Barwick\n\nChris Basler\n\nSusannah Batchelor\n\nSton Battisto\n\nBrooke Battle\n\nGil Bayer\n\nLuke Baze\n\nTimothy Beach\n\nJason Beagle\n\nDavid Bean\n\nRinda Beard\n\nBen Beaver\n\nZac Beavers\n\nCarla Beaves\n\nKate Beavin\n\nRobert Beckwith\n\nJohn Bedgood\n\nRyan Bellew\n\nAlifonso Beltran\n\nEdmund Beltran\n\nTroy Bending\n\nCynthia Benford\n\nLeticia Benitez\n\nBob Bennett\n\nBrandon Bennett\n\nDustin Bennett\n\nJohnny Bennett\n\nBrett Bentley\n\nJerry Bentley\n\nJim Benton\n\nKevin Bernis\n\nSteve Berry\n\nDave Bert\n\nTodd Bevins\n\nTony Biasatti\n\nEugene Bickel\n\nBob Bickham\n\nJoseph Billings\n\nDonnie Bishop\n\nTim Bishop\n\nGalyn Black\n\nJeremy T. Black\n\nBradford Blackcrow\n\nJoshua Blackwell\n\nJames Blankenship\n\nKevin Blankenship\n\nTimmy Blankenship\n\nDamon Blasingame\n\nKenny Blaylock\n\nBrandon M. Blevins\n\nShane Blevins\n\nChris Blockcolski\n\nDavid Blythe\n\nEmily Boecking\n\nDustin Boeckman\n\nKenton Boevers\n\nEmiko Bogard\n\nCasey Boland\n\nMisty Bolanos\n\nKelly Bond\n\nMichael Bone\n\nMitchell Boone\n\nErnesto Bordayo Jr.\n\nDan Borum\n\nJohn Bostwick\n\nBruce Boudman\n\nChristopher Boulet\n\nGinny Bourke\n\nSteve Bourke\n\nCooper Bourne\n\nVeronica Bowie\n\nJohnny Bowman\n\nKen Bowman\n\nBrandon Boyd\n\nDonald Boyd\n\nAmanda Boyle\n\nChris Brady\n\nJames Brakefield\n\nJason Bramlette\n\nRodger Bratton\n\nBrett Brayton\n\nAimee Breeze\n\nRobert Brevelle\n\nHeath Brewer\n\nGrady Briley\n\nKatie Brinlee\n\nRock Briscoe\n\nSammy Briscoe\n\nPam Brocato\n\nStacey Brodak\n\nCandace Brooks\n\nJohnny Brooks\n\nTom Brooks\n\nDallion Broomfield\n\nBrenda Brotherton\n\nHugh Brower\n\nBlaire Brown\n\nBrandon Brown\n\nDonald Brown III\n\nDonita Brown\n\nHunter Brown\n\nJanet Brown\n\nLaura Brown\n\nJustin Browning\n\nJerry Brumfield\n\nElaine Brummett\n\nCody Bruton\n\nSteve Bruton\n\nJeremy T. Bryan\n\nDavid Buffington\n\nCharli Bullard\n\nRussel Bumgardner II\n\nRose Bunkley\n\nGrant Bural\n\nAmy Burch\n\nCatherine Burdg\n\nEmily Burgess\n\nEddie Burk\n\nJason Burnett\n\nTyler Burris\n\nJosh Burroughs\n\nDaShawn Burse\n\nKelley Busby\n\nRyan Bushman\n\nAdam Butkus\n\nRicky Butler\n\nMichael Button\n\nTimothy Button\n\nWilliam Buzan\n\nSteven Byers Sr.\n\nAlan Byrnes\n\nHeather Cadenhead\n\nSharon Cahill\n\nJames Cain\n\nBrandon Calhoun\n\nCrystal Callahan\n\nAndrea Calvanese\n\nJoe Camacho Jr.\n\nRafael Cambron\n\nKody Cammack\n\nGrover Campbell\n\nBrandon Cantrell\n\nBillie Carender\n\nMike Carlson\n\nJeffrey Carpenter\n\nSandy Carpenter\n\nHarold Carr\n\nWilliam Carrell\n\nJose M. Carrizales\n\nJason Carroll\n\nTommy Carroll\n\nTrent Carroll\n\nEdward Carson\n\nKathy Carson\n\nTami Carson\n\nEric Carter\n\nKevin Carter\n\nRainey Carter\n\nWilliam Carter\n\nLaQuitta Carter-Pearson\n\nTerry Casbeer\n\nKeith Caslin\n\nBaige Casto\n\nBobby Caswell\n\nDavid Cates\n\nJarrod Causey\n\nDavid Cerezo\n\nElliot Chambers\n\nTory Chambliss\n\nJay Chancey Jr.\n\nJerri Chapin-Terrazas\n\nBrian Chapman Caleb Chapman\n\nJustin Chapman\n\nReaford Charlson\n\nAlfred Chavez\n\nMayra Chavez\n\nRaven Chavez\n\nBradley Chervenka\n\nCourtney Childress\n\nLisa Christmas-Pretlow\n\nCassie Clark\n\nReino Clark\n\nThadeus Clark\n\nSteven Clarke\n\nShelia Clayton\n\nAllen Clift\n\nKelsey Clinesmith\n\nTerry Clinton\n\nDiane Cloud\n\nWesley Coats\n\nEric Cobb\n\nWesley Cofer\n\nJohn Cogar\n\nRick Cogar\n\nBrandon Colbert\n\nAdam A. Cole\n\nMike Cole\n\nChris Coleman\n\nMatt Collingsworth\n\nTyler Collins\n\nMelinda Colquitt\n\nKeith Colwell\n\nAntonio Compean\n\nDaniel Conard\n\nMelissa Condley\n\nRichard Conley\n\nBennie Connolly\n\nLeslie Connor\n\nJason Conway\n\nToney Conway Jr.\n\nChristopher Cook\n\nDianna Cook\n\nLandon Cook\n\nNate Cook\n\nSean Cook\n\nSherri Cook\n\nJim Cooper\n\nLarry D. Cooper\n\nWill Cooper\n\nSteffany Copeland\n\nJessica Cornett\n\nDaryl Correll\n\nTerry Cortez\n\nJim Costin\n\nJeffery Cotherman\n\nCole Coulter\n\nRandy Counts\n\nMario Coutino-Silva\n\nZach Cowden\n\nAaron Cox\n\nBilly Cox\n\nChristopher Cox\n\nLacy Cox\n\nMicah Cox\n\nJimmie Craig\n\nKurt Craig\n\nKasi Crawford\n\nPaul Crawford\n\nThomas Creecy\n\nRosalinda Crespo\n\nDale Crites\n\nKathleen Crooks\n\nChristi Crotsley\n\nNick Crouch\n\nDavid Crouser\n\nEusebio Cruz\n\nRudy Cruz\n\nDaniel Cruz-Mora\n\nDodie Cullen\n\nKent Curran\n\nRaymond Dabney\n\nBruce Dake\n\nColleen Dame\n\nKiran Darapureddy\n\nRaymond Daugherty\n\nChet Davies\n\nCharles Davis III\n\nDavid L. Davis\n\nFrancis Davis\n\nGreg Davis\n\nJoshua Davis\n\nMark Davis\n\nFranklin Daws\n\nJason Day\n\nJill Day\n\nTim Deal\n\nAshley Dean\n\nRobert Dean\n\nPhillip Deaton\n\nBelinda Debter\n\nTim Dehan II\n\nNick Dell'Osso Jr.\n\nToney Dempsey\n\nBenjamin Deville\n\nMichael Dew\n\nCurt Dewbre\n\nSam DeFoor\n\nPam DeLong\n\nDrew DeLozier\n\nKenneth DeMoney\n\nKolby DeVille\n\nDavid DeWitt\n\nDonald Diamond\n\nRaquel Diaz Hicks\n\nMichael Dickinson\n\nRobert Dickson\n\nWade Dietzman\n\nChad Diffey\n\nTiffany Diggins\n\nKevin Digney\n\nScottie Dill\n\nR.B. Dillard Jr.\n\nTom Divine\n\nShane Dixon\n\nAllen Doan\n\nDwayne Dockens\n\nKen Dodson\n\nJimmy Doolittle Jr.\n\nJames Dorsey\n\nZach Dorsey\n\nJerry Dotson Jr.\n\nJosette Doughty\n\nEric Douglas\n\nBobby Downs\n\nBrett Dreyer\n\nOscar Duarte\n\nMichelle Dugan\n\nAmy Duke\n\nDana Duke\n\nRichard Dunagan\n\nVallie Dunklin\n\nJason Dunlap\n\nJean Ann Dunn\n\nLesley Dunnagan\n\nTadd Dunnahoe\n\nEricka Durham\n\nChris Dybvig\n\nAlicia Dye\n\nBenjamin Dyne\n\nRon Dysart\n\nCody D'Alessandro\n\nErick Eads\n\nJonathan Easter\n\nMonte Eastman\n\nTravis Edds\n\nJacob Edster\n\nJames Edwards II\n\nPaul Edwards\n\nTyler Eilers\n\nJanna Ellenburg\n\nBrad Ellett\n\nShane Elli\n\nJake Elliott\n\nStephen Elliott\n\nTroy Elliott\n\nErin Ellis\n\nShawn Ellis\n\nBo Embrey\n\nMyron Emmons Jr.\n\nMatthew Enkoff\n\nEmil Enoff Jr.\n\nTonya Enriquez\n\nLaura Ensminger\n\nWilliams Espino\n\nChristian Estep\n\nJeremy Estep\n\nCrystal Evans\n\nAlisha Fagala\n\nFred Farndon\n\nDonovan Farrow\n\nJonathan Faughtenberry\n\nGary Favor\n\nErin Fay\n\nRob Fell\n\nCarl Fenderson\n\nEdgar Fernandez\n\nGabe Ferrell\n\nPaul Fesler\n\nKeri Fieno\n\nMatt Finney\n\nNeil Fisher\n\nChad Fitzgerald\n\nDerek Flesner\n\nKevin Flores\n\nMara Flores\n\nPete Flores\n\nDavid Floyd\n\nChristopher Forcucci\n\nLeonard Foreman\n\nPatrick Foreman\n\nDebbie Forester\n\nDavid Foshee\n\nJonathan Fouse\n\nCassidy Fouts\n\nBill Fowler\n\nPhil Fox\n\nMike Franklin\n\nBelinda Franko\n\nGordon Frayne Jr.\n\nGregory Frazier\n\nAllen Frederick\n\nMelissa Freeman\n\nArmando Frias\n\nNorris Friend\n\nPhilip Friesen\n\nPaula Friess\n\nSteve Frost\n\nGilberto Fuentes-Perez\n\nBobby Furr\n\nBlaine Galbreath\n\nKasha Galla\n\nAngi Gallaway\n\nCole Gallaway\n\nNicole Ganaway\n\nKevin Gant\n\nFrancisco Gaona\n\nEliseo Garcia\n\nLeonel Garcia\n\nDan Gardner\n\nTim Garey\n\nMatt Garlington\n\nJennifer Garner\n\nJohnny Garrard Jr.\n\nBryant Garrett\n\nDonny Garrett\n\nAsael Garza\n\nHerman Garza\n\nAustin Gaspard\n\nSarah Gately\n\nCody Gates\n\nYelena Gatewood\n\nKatie Genovese\n\nMel George\n\nMike Gialousis\n\nMike Gibson\n\nMike Gile\n\nDavid Gilley\n\nTom Gilmore\n\nTrasey Gipson\n\nTyler Gizzi\n\nBlake Gladhill\n\nBrent Glasgow", + "recall": 0.9869848156182213, + "true_md": "36 | EMPLOYEES\n\nTOWANDA, PENNSYLVANIA Working 24 hours a day, crews in the Marcellus Shale drill for natural gas in this enormous play spanning the Appalachians from West Virginia through Pennsylvania. \n\nJason Stinson Ken Stinson Joe Stockton William Stokes Michael Storey Mark Strack Jason Strawser Kevin Strawser Ordare Stribling Jessica Stricklin Ryan Stricklin Sarah Struck Terry Stuck Damon Suderman Jonathan Swarthout Michael Swonger Auna Tackett Kiel Talbert Jason Tannehill Christie Taylor Kyle Taylor Robert B. Taylor Roberta Taylor Theressa Taylor Tom D. Taylor III Tom Taylor Anthony Thomas Dennis Thomas LaDonna Thomas Mark Thomas Thaddius Thomas Trista Thomas Khristen Thomason Cameron L. Thompson Charlie Thompson Harold Thompson Matt B. Thompson Laura Tiffany Brandon Tindle Michael Tingle Ronny Tinker Adam Tinney David Tollan Thomas Tollett Matt Toppins Katie Torres Mary Anne Townson Keith Tran Van Tran Guy Trent Tyler Trent William Tuinstra Ottie Turner Lane Umsted Chris Unwin Rick Urash Kristin Vafadar Miguel Valero-Esparza John Vankirk Jr. Shawn Vasseur Kristen Vickrey Nathan Viggers Tara Voth Alexa Wade Josh Walker Kristen Walker\n\nJohnny Wall Brandon Wallace Laura Wallace Catalina Wallo Monica Walls Chelsey Walstad Michael Walters Danny Ward Robert Warren III Nick Watkins Matthew L. Watson Jason Waybourn Kelly Weaver Jeremy Weeks Linda Weeks Cody Weir Jody Weir Alison Weis Melissa Wells Gary Wencl Brandi Wessel Yukino West Buck Wheat David Wheeler Rebekah Wheeler Lauren Whitaker Gary White Jennifer White Lain White Robert White Roger White Todd White Jim Whitefield Wendy Whitfill-Embry Joni Whitney Allen Wiley Wayne Wiley Colton Wilkinson Allison Williams Amy M. Williams Christopher Williams Dave Williams Derek Williams Jason W. Williams Jerry Williams Shelli Williamson David Willis II Paul Willis Bruce Willmott Craig Wilson Lacie Wilson Matt Wilson Robert D. Wilson Sabreena Wilson Kyle Winkler Rory Winter Lane Witt Dallas Wood Dan Wood David Wood Rick Wood Tara Wood Eric Woodard Cameron Woods Tyler Woods Sean Woolverton\n\nTammy Worrell Magan Wright Shalen Wyatt Mark Wyckoff Mike Yarbrough Shaun Yates Nathan Yeats David Yelle Preston Young Jesse Yule Ervin Zacharias Jacob Zacharias Travis Zamora Jenny Zhang Lester Zitkus Kathryn Zynda\n\n## 2008 (1,598)\n\nRicky Aaron Jerad Abbott Richard Abel Kacy Abney Jose Adame Juan Adame David L. Adams Jeremiah Adams John Adcock Matt Aderhold Doug Adkins Douglas Adkins Jeffery Ainsworth Amber Alcorn Dennis Alder Julie Alder Christa Alderman Greg Alexander Karen Alexander Carmen Allen Sondra Allen Justin Allert Beth Allgood David Allien Kevin Allison Reno Alton Jerame Aly Manuel Amaya Derek Amyx Joan Anderson Matt S. Anderson Matt Anderson Milton Anderson Jr. Shannon Anderson Steven Anderson Shari Annuschat Brian Archer Dann Armour Dawn Arnhart Chris Arnold Matt Arnold Bryan Arrant Amber Arterberry Lauren Ary Jason Ashley Johnny Ashton Erin Austin Jesus Avila Torres\n\nCrystal Bacon Richard Baden Jesse Bailey Joshua Bailey Patrick Bailey Tommy Bailey Blake Baker Charles A. Baker Jr. Dashawn Baker Donnie Baker Krista Baker Larry Baker Dennis Balentine Kristen Balla Kristin Ballard Levi Ballard Melissa Bane Ron Baranski Jr. Garry Barbee Joshua Barker Ashley Barlow Adam Barnes Ryan Barnes Dan Barnett Joshua Barron Jeff Barry Jenni Bartel Steve Barwick Chris Basler Susannah Batchelor Ston Battisto Brooke Battle Gil Bayer Luke Baze Timothy Beach Jason Beagle David Bean Rinda Beard Ben Beaver Zac Beavers Carla Beaves Kate Beavin Robert Beckwith John Bedgood RyanBellew Alifonso Beltran Edmund Beltran Troy Bending Cynthia Benford Leticia Benitez Bob Bennett Brandon Bennett Dustin Bennett Johnny Bennett Brett Bentley Jerry Bentley Jim Benton Kevin Bernis Steve Berry Dave Bert Todd Bevins Tony Biasatti Eugene Bickel Bob Bickham Joseph Billings Donnie Bishop Tim Bishop Galyn Black Jeremy T. Black Bradford Blackcrow Joshua Blackwell James Blankenship Kevin Blankenship Timmy Blankenship Damon Blasingame Kenny Blaylock Brandon M. Blevins Shane Blevins Chris Blockcolski David Blythe Emily Boecking Dustin Boeckman Kenton Boevers Emiko Bogard Casey Boland Misty Bolanos Kelly Bond Michael Bone MitchellBoone Ernesto Bordayo Jr.\n\nDan Borum John Bostwick Bruce Boudman Christopher Boulet Ginny Bourke Steve Bourke Cooper Bourne Veronica Bowie Johnny Bowman Ken Bowman Brandon Boyd Donald Boyd Amanda Boyle Chris Brady James Brakefield Jason Bramlette Rodger Bratton Brett Brayton Aimee Breeze Robert Brevelle Heath Brewer Grady Briley Katie Brinlee Rock Briscoe Sammy Briscoe Pam Brocato Stacey Brodak Candace Brooks Johnny Brooks Tom Brooks Dallion Broomfield Brenda Brotherton Hugh Brower Blaire Brown Brandon Brown Donald Brown III Donita Brown Hunter Brown Janet Brown Laura Brown Justin Browning Jerry Brumfield Elaine Brummett Cody Bruton Steve Bruton Jeremy T. Bryan David Buffington Charli Bullard Russel Bumgardner II Rose Bunkley Grant Bural Amy Burch Catherine Burdg Emily Burgess Eddie Burk Jason Burnett Tyler Burris Josh Burroughs DaShawn Burse Kelley Busby Ryan Bushman Adam Butkus Ricky Butler Michael Button Timothy Button William Buzan Steven Byers Sr. Alan Byrnes Heather Cadenhead Sharon Cahill James Cain Brandon Calhoun Crystal Callahan Andrea Calvanese Joe Camacho Jr. Rafael Cambron Kody Cammack Grover Campbell Brandon Cantrell Billie Carender Mike Carlson Jeffrey Carpenter Sandy Carpenter Harold Carr William Carrell Jose M. Carrizales Jason Carroll Tommy Carroll Trent Carroll Edward Carson\n\nKathy Carson Tami Carson Eric Carter Kevin Carter Rainey Carter William Carter LaQuitta Carter-Pearson Terry Casbeer Keith Caslin Baige Casto Bobby Caswell David Cates Jarrod Causey David Cerezo Elliot Chambers Tory Chambliss Jay Chancey Jr. Jerri Chapin-Terrazas Brian Chapman Caleb Chapman Justin Chapman Reaford Charlson Alfred Chavez Mayra Chavez Raven Chavez Bradley Chervenka Courtney Childress Lisa Christmas-Pretlow Cassie Clark Reino Clark Thadeus Clark Steven Clarke Shelia Clayton Allen Clift Kelsey Clinesmith Terry Clinton Diane Cloud Wesley Coats Eric Cobb Wesley Cofer John Cogar Rick Cogar Brandon Colbert Adam A. Cole Mike Cole Chris Coleman Matt Collingsworth Tyler Collins Melinda Colquitt Keith Colwell Antonio Compean Daniel Conard Melissa Condley Richard Conley Bennie Connolly Leslie Connor Jason Conway Toney Conway Jr. Christopher Cook Dianna Cook Landon Cook Nate Cook Sean Cook Sherri Cook Jim Cooper Larry D. Cooper Will Cooper Steffany Copeland Jessica Cornett Daryl Correll Terry Cortez Jim Costin Jeffery Cotherman Cole Coulter Randy Counts Mario Coutino-Silva Zach Cowden Aaron Cox Billy Cox Christopher Cox Lacy Cox Micah Cox Jimmie Craig Kurt Craig Kasi Crawford Paul Crawford Thomas Creecy Rosalinda Crespo Dale Crites Kathleen Crooks\n\nChristi Crotsley Nick Crouch David Crouser Eusebio Cruz Rudy Cruz Daniel Cruz-Mora Dodie Cullen Kent Curran Raymond Dabney Bruce Dake Colleen Dame Kiran Darapureddy Raymond Daugherty Chet Davies Charles Davis III David L. Davis Francis Davis Greg Davis Joshua Davis Mark Davis Franklin Daws Jason Day Jill Day TimDeal Ashley Dean Robert Dean Phillip Deaton Belinda Debter Tim Dehan II Nick Dell’Osso Jr. Toney Dempsey Benjamin Deville Michael Dew Curt Dewbre Sam DeFoor Pam DeLong Drew DeLozier KennethDeMoney Kolby DeVille David DeWitt Donald Diamond Raquel Diaz Hicks Michael Dickinson Robert Dickson Wade Dietzman Chad Diffey Tiffany Diggins Kevin Digney Scottie Dill R.B. Dillard Jr. Tom Divine Shane Dixon AllenDoan Dwayne Dockens Ken Dodson JimmyDoolittleJr. James Dorsey Zach Dorsey Jerry Dotson Jr. Josette Doughty Eric Douglas Bobby Downs Brett Dreyer Oscar Duarte Michelle Dugan Amy Duke Dana Duke Richard Dunagan Vallie Dunklin Jason Dunlap Jean Ann Dunn Lesley Dunnagan Tadd Dunnahoe Ericka Durham Chris Dybvig Alicia Dye Benjamin Dyne Ron Dysart Cody D’Alessandro Erick Eads Jonathan Easter Monte Eastman Travis Edds Jacob Edster James Edwards II Paul Edwards Tyler Eilers Janna Ellenburg Brad Ellett Shane Elli\n\nJake Elliott Stephen Elliott Troy Elliott Erin Ellis Shawn Ellis Bo Embrey Myron Emmons Jr. Matthew Enkoff Emil Enoff Jr. Tonya Enriquez Laura Ensminger Williams Espino Christian Estep Jeremy Estep Crystal Evans Alisha Fagala Fred Farndon Donovan Farrow Jonathan Faughtenberry Gary Favor Erin Fay Rob Fell Carl Fenderson Edgar Fernandez Gabe Ferrell Paul Fesler Keri Fieno Matt Finney Neil Fisher Chad Fitzgerald Derek Flesner Kevin Flores Mara Flores Pete Flores David Floyd Christopher Forcucci Leonard Foreman Patrick Foreman Debbie Forester DavidFoshee Jonathan Fouse Cassidy Fouts Bill Fowler Phil Fox Mike Franklin Belinda Franko Gordon Frayne Jr. Gregory Frazier Allen Frederick Melissa Freeman Armando Frias Norris Friend Philip Friesen Paula Friess Steve Frost Gilberto Fuentes-Perez Bobby Furr Blaine Galbreath Kasha Galla Angi Gallaway Cole Gallaway Nicole Ganaway Kevin Gant Francisco Gaona Eliseo Garcia Leonel Garcia Dan Gardner Tim Garey Matt Garlington Jennifer Garner Johnny Garrard Jr. Bryant Garrett Donny Garrett Asael Garza Herman Garza Austin Gaspard Sarah Gately Cody Gates Yelena Gatewood Katie Genovese Mel George Mike Gialousis Mike Gibson Mike Gile David Gilley Tom Gilmore Trasey Gipson Tyler Gizzi Blake Gladhill Brent Glasgow" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.39717794669390727, + "doc_id": "50b5e550105342fafd888e2e781a639c28fabcccd3e8175abab0f58900aca360", + "edit_distance": 0.46543778801843316, + "f1_score": 0.982456140350877, + "meteor": 0.508655792930588, + "precision": 0.9824561403508771, + "pred_md": "## Directors' Declaration\n\nThe Directors of the Group declare that:\n\n- 1 the Financial Statements and Notes as set out on pages 54 to 105 are in accordance with the Corporations Act 2001 and:\n- a) comply with Australian Accounting Standards and the Corporations Regulations 2001 and International Financial Reporting Standards as disclosed in Note 1; and\n- b) give a true and fair view of the consolidated entity's financial position as at 31 December 2014 and of the performance for the financial year ended on that date;\n- 2 the Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer have declared that:\n- a) the financial records of the Group for the year ended have been properly maintained in accordance with section 286 of the Corporations Act 2001 ;\n- b) the financial statements and notes for the financial period comply with the Accounting Standards; and\n- c) the financial statements and notes give a true and fair view;\n- 3 in the Directors' opinion there are reasonable grounds to believe that the Group will be able to pay its debts as and when they become due and payable.\n\nThis declaration is made in accordance with a resolution of the Board of Directors.\n\nMichael Hannell Chairman Adelaide Dated this 31 st day of March 2015\n\n- 106 -", + "recall": 0.9824561403508771, + "true_md": "## Directors’ Declaration\n\nThe Directors of the Group declare that: \n\n- 1 the Financial Statements and Notes as set out on pages 54 to 105 are in accordance with the Corporations Act 2001 and: a) comply with Australian Accounting Standards and the Corporations Regulations 2001 and International \n\n- and: a) comply with Australian Accounting Standards and the Corporations Regulations 2001 and International Financial Reporting Standards as disclosed in Note 1; and b) give a true and fair view of the consolidated entity’s financial position as at 31 December 2014 and of the \n\n- Financial Reporting Standards as disclosed in Note 1; and b) give a true and fair view of the consolidated entity’s financial position as at 31 December 2014 and of the performance for the financial year ended on that date; the Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer have declared that: \n\n- performance for the financial year ended on that date; 2 the Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer have declared that: a) the financial records of the Group for the year ended have been properly maintained in accordance with section \n\n- the Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer have declared that: a) the financial records of the Group for the year ended have been properly maintained in accordance with section 286 of the Corporations Act 2001 ; b) the financial statements and notes for the financial period comply with the Accounting Standards; and \n\n- 286 of the Corporations Act 2001 ; b) the financial statements and notes for the financial period comply with the Accounting Standards; and c) the financial statements and notes give a true and fair view; \n\n- b) the financial statements and notes for the financial period comply with the Accounting Standards; and c) the financial statements and notes give a true and fair view; in the Directors’ opinion there are reasonable grounds to believe that the Group will be able to pay its debts as and \n\n- c) the financial statements and notes give a true and fair view; 3 in the Directors’ opinion there are reasonable grounds to believe that the Group will be able to pay its debts as and when they become due and payable. \n\nThis declaration is made in accordance with a resolution of the Board of Directors. \n\nMichael Hannell Chairman Adelaide Dated this 31 st day of March 2015 \n\n- 106 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5990634072592594, + "doc_id": "ebb864ea03bffbb5bd679594b6dc7634c63e6dbf716e4bd2a8fa86fdc599fc69", + "edit_distance": 0.4186046511627907, + "f1_score": 0.9690721649484536, + "meteor": 0.6728373816473705, + "precision": 0.9791666666666666, + "pred_md": "## Auditor's Declaration\n\nThe auditor's independence declaration for the year ended 31 December 2014 has been received and can be found on page 45 of this report.\n\nSigned in accordance with a resolution of the Board of Directors.\n\nMichael Hannell\n\nChairman Adelaide Dated this 31 st day of March 2015\n\n- 44 -", + "recall": 0.9591836734693877, + "true_md": "## Auditor’s Declaration The auditor’s independence declaration for the year ended 31 December 2014 has been received and can be found on page\n\n- 44 - \n\nAuditor’s Declaration The auditor’s independence declaration for the year ended 31 December 2014 has been received and can be found on page 45 of this report. \n\nSigned in accordance with a resolution of the Board of Directors. \n\nMichael Hannell \n\nChairman Adelaide Dated this 31 st day of March 2015" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8439354657269648, + "doc_id": "013988cdd1dd8bf117e25b6df3c9a777a29449d6901c21a9ea982d3287e629d3", + "edit_distance": 0.16113744075829384, + "f1_score": 0.9617021276595745, + "meteor": 0.8680578655688705, + "precision": 0.9617021276595744, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 1 - STATEMENT OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES\n\nThe consolidated financial report of Sundance Energy Australia Limited ('SEAL') and its wholly owned subsidiaries, (collectively, the 'Company', 'Consolidated Group' or 'Group'), for the year ended 31 December 2014 was authorised for issuance in accordance with a resolution of the Board of Directors on 31 March 2015. The Group has the power to amend and reissue the financial report.\n\nThe Group is a for-profit entity for the purpose of preparing the financial report. The principal activities of the Group during the financial year are the exploration for, development and production of oil and natural gas in the United States of America, and the continued expansion of its mineral acreage portfolio in the United States of America.\n\n## Basis of Preparation\n\nThe consolidated financial report is a general purpose financial report that has been prepared in accordance with Australian Accounting Standards, Australian Accounting Interpretations, other authoritative pronouncements of the Australian Accounting Standards Board ('AASB') and the Corporations Act 2001.\n\nThese consolidated financial statements comply with International Financial Reporting Standards ('IFRS') as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board ('IASB'). Material accounting policies adopted in the preparation of this financial report are presented below. They have been consistently applied unless otherwise stated.\n\nThe consolidated financial statements are prepared on a historical basis, except for derivative financial instruments which are measured at fair value. The consolidated financial statements are presented in US dollars and all values are rounded to the nearest thousand (US$'000), except where stated otherwise.\n\n## Principles of Consolidation\n\nA controlled entity is any entity over which SEAL is exposed, or has rights to variable returns from its involvement with the entity and has the ability to affect those returns through its power over the entity. The consolidated financial statements incorporate the assets and liabilities of all entities controlled by SEAL as at 31 December 2014 and the results of all controlled entities for the year then ended.\n\nAll inter-group balances and transactions between entities in the Group, including any recognised profits or losses, are eliminated on consolidation.\n\n## a) Income Tax\n\nThe income tax expense for the period comprises current income tax expense/(income) and deferred income tax expense/(income).\n\nCurrent income tax expense charged to the statement of profit or loss is the tax payable on taxable income calculated using applicable income tax rates enacted, or substantially enacted, as at the reporting date. Current tax liabilities/(assets) are therefore measured at the amounts expected to be paid to/(recovered from) the relevant taxation authority.\n\nDeferred income tax expense reflects movements in deferred tax asset and deferred tax liability balances during the period. Current and deferred income tax expense/(income) is charged or credited directly to equity instead of the statement of profit or loss when the tax relates to items that are credited or charged directly to equity.\n\n- 59 -", + "recall": 0.9617021276595744, + "true_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 1 - STATEMENT OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES\n\n## Basis of Preparation The consolidated financial report is a general purpose financial report that has been prepared in accordance with\n\n## Principles of Consolidation A controlled entity is any entity over which SEAL is exposed, or has rights to variable returns from its involvement\n\n## a) Income Tax The income tax expense for the period comprises current income tax expense/(income) and deferred income tax\n\nThe consolidated financial report of Sundance Energy Australia Limited (“SEAL”) and its wholly owned subsidiaries, (collectively, the “Company”, “Consolidated Group” or “Group”), for the year ended 31 December 2014 was authorised for issuance in accordance with a resolution of the Board of Directors on 31 March 2015. The Group has the power to amend and reissue the financial report. \n\nThe Group is a for-profit entity for the purpose of preparing the financial report. The principal activities of the Group during the financial year are the exploration for, development and production of oil and natural gas in the United States of America, and the continued expansion of its mineral acreage portfolio in the United States of America. \n\nBasis of Preparation The consolidated financial report is a general purpose financial report that has been prepared in accordance with Australian Accounting Standards, Australian Accounting Interpretations, other authoritative pronouncements of the Australian Accounting Standards Board (“AASB”) and the Corporations Act 2001.\n\nThese consolidated financial statements comply with International Financial Reporting Standards (“IFRS”) as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board (“IASB”). Material accounting policies adopted in the preparation of this financial report are presented below. They have been consistently applied unless otherwise stated. \n\nThe consolidated financial statements are prepared on a historical basis, except for derivative financial instruments which are measured at fair value. The consolidated financial statements are presented in US dollars and all values are rounded to the nearest thousand (US$’000), except where stated otherwise. \n\nPrinciples of Consolidation A controlled entity is any entity over which SEAL is exposed, or has rights to variable returns from its involvement with the entity and has the ability to affect those returns through its power over the entity. The consolidated financial statements incorporate the assets and liabilities of all entities controlled by SEAL as at 31 December 2014 and the results of all controlled entities for the year then ended. \n\nAll inter-group balances and transactions between entities in the Group, including any recognised profits or losses, are eliminated on consolidation.\n\na) Income Tax The income tax expense for the period comprises current income tax expense/(income) and deferred income tax expense/(income). \n\nCurrent income tax expense charged to the statement of profit or loss is the tax payable on taxable income calculated using applicable income tax rates enacted, or substantially enacted, as at the reporting date. Current tax liabilities/(assets) are therefore measured at the amounts expected to be paid to/(recovered from) the relevant taxation authority. \n\nDeferred income tax expense reflects movements in deferred tax asset and deferred tax liability balances during the period. Current and deferred income tax expense/(income) is charged or credited directly to equity instead of the statement of profit or loss when the tax relates to items that are credited or charged directly to equity. \n\n- 59 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.752858404074389, + "doc_id": "946d2fd4d347ff0001719fe0be277ca8d4dff2b3e6842f50d097060d3499952b", + "edit_distance": 0.2125, + "f1_score": 0.8224299065420562, + "meteor": 0.8884030114195334, + "precision": 0.8301886792452831, + "pred_md": "## 3. Assets, Liabilities and Net Assets\n\n## Assets\n\nSMBC's assets as of March 31, 2011 increased by ·11,948.5 billion from the previous fiscal year-end to a total of ·115,484.9 billion. This increase was due chiefly to a ·11,317.2 billion increase in securities due to an increase in the balance of Japanese government bonds held.\n\n## Liabilities\n\nLiabilities as of March 31, 2011 amounted to ·109,925.6 billion, an increase of ·11,787.1 billion from the previous fiscal year-end. The main reason for the increase in liabilities was a ·3,579.2 billion increase in deposits due to the rising total value of deposits held by individuals and of corporate deposits in Japan, and increases in fund procurement in the borrowed money and other markets.\n\n## Net Assets\n\nNet assets at fiscal year-end amounted to ·5,559.2 billion. Of this total, stockholders' equity amounted to ·5,188.2 billion, consisting of ·1,770.9 billion in capital stock, ·2,481.2 billion in capital surplus (including ·710.2 billion in other capital surplus), and ·935.9 billion in retained earnings.\n\nValuation and translation adjustments were ·371.0 billion, comprising ·229.8 billion in net unrealized gains on other securities, ·121.1 billion in net deferred gains on hedges, and ·20.0 billion in land revaluation excess.\n\n## Assets, Liabilities and Net Assets\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n28", + "recall": 0.8148148148148148, + "true_md": "## Net Assets\n\n## 3. Assets, Liabilities and Net Assets\n\n## Assets\n\n## Liabilities\n\n## Assets, Liabilities and Net Assets\n\nSMBC’s assets as of March 31, 2011 increased by ¥11,948.5 billion from the previous fiscal year-end to a total of ¥115,484.9 billion. This increase was due chiefly to a ¥11,317.2 billion increase in securities due to an increase in the balance of Japanese government bonds held.\n\nLiabilities as of March 31, 2011 amounted to ¥109,925.6 billion, an increase of ¥11,787.1 billion from the previous fiscal year-end. The main reason for the increase in liabilities was a ¥3,579.2 billion increase in deposits due to the rising total value of deposits held by individuals and of corporate deposits in Japan, and increases in fund procurement in the borrowed money and other markets.\n\nNet assets at fiscal year-end amounted to ¥5,559.2 billion. Of this total, stockholders’ equity amounted to ¥5,188.2 bil- lion, consisting of ¥1,770.9 billion in capital stock, ¥2,481.2 billion in capital surplus (including ¥710.2 billion in other capital surplus), and ¥935.9 billion in retained earnings. \n\nValuation and translation adjustments were ¥371.0 billion, comprising ¥229.8 billion in net unrealized gains on other securities, ¥121.1 billion in net deferred gains on hedges, and ¥20.0 billion in land revaluation excess.\n\nSMFG 2011 28" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8219148880727437, + "doc_id": "e097b33b08c9f2c0f8eed5f2b982be0b469831f75b6e5fea217023e3948bf64e", + "edit_distance": 0.44964028776978415, + "f1_score": 0.9245647969052224, + "meteor": 0.8787902680934475, + "precision": 0.9372549019607843, + "pred_md": "4\n\n## ◎ Management Targets\n\nFor the first three years of the second decade of the SMBC and SMFG group, we set two management targets in order to accomplish our basic policy of becoming a globally competitive financial services group with the highest trust of our clients and stakeholders by maximizing our strengths of 'Spirit of Innovation,' 'Speed' and 'Solution & Execution.' The first target is to achieve top quality in strategic business areas, and the second target is to establish a solid financial base and corporate infrastructure to be able to address the new financial regulations and competitive business environment.\n\n## ◎ Financial Targets\n\nIn order to appropriately address the strengthening of financial regulations globally, we are required to focus further on enhancement of risk-return and cost-return profiles and steadily expand bottom-line profit. Therefore, we need to capture overseas business opportunities especially in rapidly growing Asian markets in addition to sustaining and further strengthening our solid business operations in Japan.\n\nHaving this in mind, we strive to achieve well-balanced and steady improvement of 'financial soundness,' 'profitability' and 'growth,' and we have set the following four objectives for the next three fiscal years:\n\n- · Achieve sufficient Core Tier I ratio as required for a global player\n- · Enhance risk-return profile by improving asset quality\n- · Aim for top-level cost efficiency among global players\n- · Expand overseas business by capturing growing business opportunities especially in Asia\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n## ◎ Strategic Initiatives\n\nIn order to achieve the aforementioned management and financial targets, we have designated the following five business areas as critical strategic businesses for management:\n\n- · Financial consulting for individuals\n- · Solution providing for corporations\n- · Commercial banking in emerging markets, especially in Asia\n- · Broker-dealer/Investment banking\n- · Non-asset business such as payment & settlement services and asset management\n\nThe growth of these business areas will be driven under two main initiatives of pursuing 'synergies between SMBC and SMBC Nikko Securities' and 'global expansion.' We will execute these initiatives on a group-wide basis, and also establish a solid financial base and corporate infrastructure that support these initiatives.\n\nAn 'unpredictable,' 'uncertain,' and 'unstable' business environment still remains, due mainly to the diverse implications of the Great East Japan Earthquake to the Japanese economy, as well as fiscal deficits in the developed countries and soaring commodity prices. Furthermore, the global strengthening of financial regulations requires banks, in the private sector, to achieve more efficient asset allocation, higher capital efficiency and more stringent liquidity management.\n\nOn the other hand, business opportunities are expanding rapidly in emerging countries especially in Asia, where financial needs are increasing as their economies substantially grow and Japanese companies are developing their businesses.\n\nAgainst this backdrop, we will move forward responding proactively and flexibly to the continuously evolving environment, making every effort to increase our shareholders' value and striving to become a top-tier global financial services group.", + "recall": 0.9122137404580153, + "true_md": "## ◎ Management Targets\n\n## ◎ Strategic Initiatives\n\n## ◎ Financial Targets\n\nFor the first three years of the second decade of the SMBC and SMFG group, we set two management targets in order to accom- plish our basic policy of becoming a globally competitive financial services group with the highest trust of our clients and stakeholders by maximizing our strengths of “Spirit of Innovation,” “Speed” and “Solution & Execution.” The first target is to achieve top quality in strategic business areas, and the second target is to establish a solid financial base and corporate infrastructure to be able to address the new financial regulations and competitive business environment.\n\nIn order to appropriately address the strengthening of financial regu- lations globally, we are required to focus further on enhancement of risk-return and cost-return profiles and steadily expand bottom-line profit. Therefore, we need to capture overseas business oppor- tunities especially in rapidly growing Asian markets in addition to sustaining and further strengthening our solid business operations in Japan.\n\nHaving this in mind, we strive to achieve well-balanced and steady improvement of “financial soundness,” “profitability” and “growth,” and we have set the following four objectives for the next three fiscal years:\n\nIn order to achieve the aforementioned management and financial targets, we have designated the following five business areas as critical strategic businesses for management:\n\nThe growth of these business areas will be driven under two main initiatives of pursuing “synergies between SMBC and SMBC Nikko Securities” and “global expansion.” We will execute these initiatives on a group-wide basis, and also establish a solid financial base and corporate infrastructure that support these initiatives.\n\nAn “unpredictable,” “uncertain,” and “unstable” business environ- ment still remains, due mainly to the diverse implications of the Great East Japan Earthquake to the Japanese economy, as well as fiscal deficits in the developed countries and soaring commodity prices. Furthermore, the global strengthening of financial regula- tions requires banks, in the private sector, to achieve more efficient asset allocation, higher capital efficiency and more stringent liquidity management.\n\nOn the other hand, business opportunities are expanding rapidly in emerging countries especially in Asia, where financial needs are increasing as their economies substantially grow and Japanese companies are developing their businesses.\n\nAgainst this backdrop, we will move forward responding proactively and flexibly to the continuously evolving environment, making every effort to increase our shareholders’ value and striving to become a top-tier global financial services group.\n\n- • Achieve sufficient Core Tier I ratio as required for a global player\n\n- • Enhance risk-return profile by improving asset quality\n\n- • Aim for top-level cost efficiency among global players\n\n- • Expand overseas business by capturing growing business oppor- tunities especially in Asia\n\n- • Financial consulting for individuals\n\n- • Solution providing for corporations\n\n- • Commercial banking in emerging markets, especially in Asia\n\n- • Broker-dealer/Investment banking\n\n- • Non-asset business such as payment & settlement services and asset management\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n4" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.1341286201802706, + "doc_id": "3116dc73e68cbe541901ca3211921ab716f54c012f8356a0d4a0838a0bdfdfa7", + "edit_distance": 0.8640616400660429, + "f1_score": 0.3909604519774011, + "meteor": 0.31864819457335497, + "precision": 0.4199029126213592, + "pred_md": "a\n\nn\n\nn\n\nu\n\na\n\nl\n\nr\n\ne\n\np\n\no\n\nr\n\nt\n\n2\n\n0\n\n1\n\n1\n\n(m assi vel y ml ti p l ayer o nl i ne ) g ams to p l ayers i n u e both Wstern m arkets and C hi na, resp ecti vel y. I n e 2012, w e have several g l o b al g amng i ni ti ati ves i based on H asb ro b rand s, i ncl ud i ng M O N O P O L Y , TRA N SFR M E R S and B A T L E S H I O T P .\n\nW e al so kno w the mrri ag e b etw een the d i g i tal a and the anal og g amng w orl d w o rks b o th w ays. i I n support of thi s, w e recentl y entered i nto an excl usi ve, w o rl d w i d e strateg i c al l i ance w i th Z yng a, the w orl d' s l ead i ng so ci al g am d evel o p er w i th e m o r e than 24 0 ml l i o n averag e mnthl y acti ve users i o i n o ver 1 75 co untri es. T hro ug h thi s ag reemnt, e Hasbro has ob tai ned the l i cense to d evel o p and di stri b ute w i d erangi ng p ro d uct l i nes b ased o n Zynga' s g am e b rand s, i ncl ud i ng FR M V I A LLE, C I TYV I LLE , and WR D S WT H FI E N D S, i n a O I R num b er o f to y and g am categ o ri es. T hi s d eal al so e creates opportuni ti es for cobranded m erchandi se f eaturi ng a co mi nati o n o f b o th H asb ro and Z yng a b brands. The fi rst p rod ucts und er thi s l o ng term agreem ent are p l anned f o r Fl l 20 1 2. a\n\nF i nal l y , to m ake al l thi s hap p en, w have a new e Hasbro gam i ng team w i th a l o t o f tal ent f ro m , outsi d e the trad i ti o nal b o ard g am arena. W have e e i n v ested i n th i s team estab l i shi ng the newG amng , i C enter o f E xcel l ence i n R ho d e I sl and, and they are re- i m ag i ni ng o ur b rand s, creati ng new techno l o g i es and i nventi ng new b rand s. W co nti nue to b el i eve e that, throug h a com b i nati o n o f f aceto- face, o ff -theboard and d i g i tal g amng , there i s an o p p o r tuni ty i to g ro w o u r g amng b usi ness i n 20 1 3 and b eyo nd . i W e have a so l i d f o u nd ati o n u p o n w i ch to b u i l d , h as Hasbro had ei g ht o f the to p ten g am b rand s i n the e U . S. l ast year.\n\n## Developing New Immersive Experiences\n\nThe devel op m ent o f d i g i tal g amng exp eri ences i s i one el em ent o f the ml ti u di m ensi o nal i mersi ve m experi ences w e are creati ng fo r H asb ro co nsumrs e and the b rand s they l o ve. T o d ay , i n ad d i ti o n to o u r di g i t al g amng exp eri ences, g l o b al co nsumrs can i e experi ence our b rand s i n mvi es, i n tel evi si o n and o through l i censi ng and p ub l i shi ng .\n\nI n f eature fi l m, w e currentl y w o rk w i th f o ur s m aj o r stud i o p ar tners: P aramunt, R el ati vi ty , o\n\nSony and U ni versal , w hi ch p ro vi d es us access to am azi ng tal ent and tremnd ous resources. I n 20 1 2, e tw o fi l m b ased o n H asb ro b rand s are sched ul ed s f o r g l o b al r el ease. F i rst, i n p ar tnershi p w i th Uni versal , Battleship i s sched ul ed to d eb ut i n A p ri l i nternati onal l y and i n M ay i n the U . S. ; and to g ether w i t h P ar amunt, o G.I. Joe: Retaliation , w i l l h i t t h eat r es i n June. P o tenti al f uture fi l m b ased o n o ther s Hasbro brands are under devel opm ent, i ncl ud i ng O U I JA , the f o ur th T R A N S FR M E R S fi O l m , STR E T C H A R M S T R O G , N C A N D LA N D R I Y , SK, M O N O P O L Y and C LU E .\n\nT urni ng to tel evi si o n, o ur g l o b al i n i ti ati ves are m aki ng real p ro g ress w i th H asb ro S tud i o s program m i ng no w ai ri ng g l o b al l y i n o v er 1 4 0 countri es thi s year. I nternati o nal p erfo rmnce so a f ar has b een very g o o d , w i th H asb ro S tud i o s sho w s consi stentl y d el i veri ng to p rati ng s amng o ur key o dem og rap hi cs. B y the end o f 20 1 2, w p l an to e have produced al m o st 6 0 0 hal fhours of ori g i nal program m i ng and , b ecause w e kno w that ki d s l o v e to w tch tel evi si o n i n al l f o rm and f o rmts, a s a w e' re d i stri b u ti ng these sho w ever yw here ki d s are s consum i ng co ntent tel evi si o n, o nl i ne, D V D , s tabl ets and m o b i l e ap p l i cati o n s.\n\nve\n\nI n the U . S. , d i stri b u ti o n i s p ri mri l y o n T H E a HU B , w here w e are o ne year i nto the l aunch o f the al l new H U B tel evi si o n net w rk and the rati ng s o trends conti nue to b e p o si ti ve. T he f o urth q uarter of 201 1 w as the fi rst q uarter w e had yearover- year com p ari so ns f o r T H E H U B , and d uri ng the q uar ter TH E H U B p o sted 31 % g ai n s i n to t al d a y ag ai n st K i d s 2 to 1 1 . T he netw o rk p o sted g ro w th thro ug ho u t 20 1 1 and H asb ro S tud i o s p ro g rami ng acco unted f o r fi m of the top ten seri es for the year.\n\nA s w e f ur ther d evel o p o ur l i censi ng and publ i shi ng team, i t i s i mo rtant to reco g ni ze that s p our e ff orts trad i ti o nal l y have b een f o cused i n the U . S. T o f u r th er d e v el o p o u r g l o b al cap ab i l i ti es, w e ad d ed new l i censi ng p erso nnel i n to mrkets a gl o b al l y , i ncl ud i ng C h i n a, R ussi a, P o l and and M xi co e to bri ng to b ear o ur f ul l l i censi ng p o ten ti al i n al l our geographi es. W are focused on si g ni fi e cant and grow i ng l i censed categ o ri es aro und the w o rl d , i ncl ud i ng ap p arel , hom e and p ub l i shi ng .", + "recall": 0.3657505285412262, + "true_md": "annual report 2011\n\n(massi vel y mul t i pl ayer onl i ne) games t o pl ayer s i n bot h W es t er n mar ket s and Chi na, r es pect i vel y. I n 201 2, we have sever al gl obal gami ng i ni t i at i ves bas ed on Has br o br ands , i ncl udi ng MONOPOLY, TRANSFORMERS and BATTLESHI P.\n\nW e al so know the m arri age between the di gi tal and t he anal og gami ng wor l d wor ks bot h ways. Insu p o rto fth is, w erecen tlyen teredin toan excl usi ve, wor l dwi de st r at egi c al l i ance wi t h Zynga, thew orl d’ s l eadi ngsoci al gam edevel oper w i th mo r e t h a n 2 4 0 m i l l i o n a v e r a g e mo n t h l y a c t i v e u s e r s inover175countries. Throughthisagreem ent, Ha s br o h a s obt a i n e d t h e l i c e n s e t o de v e l op a n d di s t r i but e wi de- r angi ng pr oduct l i nes bas ed on Zy nga ’ s ga me br a nds , i nc l udi ng FARMVI LLE, CI T YVI L L E , a n d WORDS WI T H FRI ENDS , i n a number of t oy and game cat egor i es . Thi s deal al so cr eat es oppor t uni t i es f or co- br anded mer chandi se featuringacom binationof bothHasbroandZynga br ands . The fi rst products under thi s l ong- term agr eement ar e pl anned f or Fal l 201 2.\n\nFi nal l y, to m ake al l thi s happen, we have a new Ha s br o ga mi n g t e a m , wi t h a l ot of t a l e nt f r om out s i de t he t r adi t i onal boar d game ar ena. W e have investedinthisteam , establishingthenewG am ing Ce n t e r o f E x c e l l e n c e i n Rh o d e I s l a n d , a n d t h e y a r e re- i m agi ni ngour brands, creati ngnewtechnol ogi es and i nvent i ng newbr ands. W e cont i nue t o bel i eve that, throughacom bi nati onof face- to- face, o ff - the- boar d and di gi t al gami ng, t her e i s an oppor t uni t y togrowour gam i ngbusi ness i n2013andbeyond. We h a v e a s o l i d f o u n d a t i o n u p o n w h i c h t o b u i l d , a s Ha s br o h a d e i ght of t h e t op t e n ga me br a n ds i n t h e U. S . l a s t y e a r .\n\nThe devel opment of di gi t al gami ng exper i ences i s one el ement of t he mul t i - di mens i onal i mmer s i ve exper i ences we ar e cr eat i ng f or Hasbr o consumer s and t he br ands t hey l ove. Today, i n addi t i on t o our di gi t al gami ng exper i ences , gl obal cons umer s can exper i ence our br ands i n movi es , i n t el evi si on and throughl i censi ngandpubl i shi ng.\n\nI n f eature fi l ms, we currentl y work wi th f our ma j o r s t u d i o p a r t n e r s : P a r a mo u n t , R e l a t i v i t y ,\n\nAs we f urther devel op our l i censi ng and publ i s hi ng t eams , i t i s i mpor t ant t o r ecogni ze t hat our e ff orts tradi ti onal l y have beenfocusedi nthe U. S . To f u r t h e r de v e l op ou r gl oba l c a pa bi l i t i e s , we a d d e d n e w l i c e n s i n g p e r s o n n e l i n t o ma r k e t s gl obal l y, i ncl udi ng Chi na, Rus s i a, Pol and and Mexi co tobri ngtobear our ful l l i censi ngpotenti al i nal l our geogr aphi es . W e ar e f ocus ed on s i gni fi cant and gr owi ng l i censed cat egor i es ar ound t he wor l d, includingapparel, hom eandpublishing. \n\nI n the U. S. , di stri buti on i s pri m ari l y on THE HUB, wh e r e we a r e on e ye a r i nt o t h e l a un c h of t h e al l - newHUBt el evi si on net wor k and t he r at i ngs trends conti nuetobeposi ti ve. Thefourthquarter of 201 1 was t he fi rst quar ter we hadyear- over- year compar i sons f or THE HUB, and dur i ng t he quar t er THE HUB pos t ed 31 % gai ns i n t ot al day agai ns t Ki ds 2 t o 1 1 . The net wor k post ed gr owt h t hr oughout 201 1 and Hasbr o St udi os pr ogr ammi ng account ed f or fi ve of t he t op t en s er i es f or t he year .\n\nTurni ng to tel evi si on, our gl obal i ni ti ati ves ar e maki ng r eal pr ogr ess wi t h Hasbr o St udi os pr ogr ammi ng nowai r i ng gl obal l y i n over 1 40 count r i es t hi s year. I nt er nat i onal per f or mance so far hasbeenverygood, w ithHasbroStudiosshow s consi st ent l y del i ver i ng t op r at i ngs among our key demogr aphi cs . By t he end of 201 2, we pl an t o have pr oduced al most 600 hal f - hour s of or i gi nal pr ogr ammi ng and, becaus e we knowt hat ki ds lovetow atchtelevisioninall form sandform ats, we ’ r e d i s t r i b u t i n g t h e s e s h o ws e v e r y wh e r e k i d s a r e consumi ng cont ent - t el evi si on, onl i ne, DVDs, t abl et s and mobi l e appl i cat i ons.\n\nSony and Uni ver s al , whi ch pr ovi des us acces s t o amazi ng t al ent and t r emendous r esour ces. I n 201 2, tw ofi l ms basedon Hasbro brands are schedul ed for global release. F irst, inpartnershipw ith Un i v e r s a l , Battleship i s schedul ed to debut i n Apr i l internationallyandinM ayintheU .S.; andtogether wi t h P a r a mo u n t , G.I. Joe: Retaliation , w ill h itth eatres inJune. Potential futurefi l ms basedon other Ha s br o br a n ds a r e u n de r de v e l opme nt , i n c l u di n g OU I J A , t h e f o u r t h T R ANS FORME RS fi l m, STRETCH ARMS T RONG , CANDY L AND , RI S K , MONOP OLY and CLUE.\n\n## Developing New Immersive Experiences" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.43819512537676897, + "doc_id": "e5d1a3892b73dd38ef353a1d14067972ad8bae6adf38ad1ff65dc7090e1016e2", + "edit_distance": 0.3181818181818182, + "f1_score": 0.8108108108108107, + "meteor": 0.7282110091743119, + "precision": 0.8333333333333334, + "pred_md": "## WHAT'S NEXT? IF YOU'RE WITH ROGERS, YOU'LL BE THE FIRST TO KNOW.", + "recall": 0.7894736842105263, + "true_md": "# WHAT’S NEXT? IF YOU’RE WITH ROGERS, YOU’LL BE THE FIRST TO KNOW." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9274872072367363, + "doc_id": "6f5d511cff3438e13032efa9b74a07969f4474863e9281870af3ddc120900aa3", + "edit_distance": 0.21963824289405684, + "f1_score": 0.9502762430939226, + "meteor": 0.9328314465641397, + "precision": 0.9772727272727273, + "pred_md": "## DIVIDENDS AND SHARE INFORMATION\n\n## Dividends\n\nIn February 2014, the Board approved an increase in the annualized dividend rate to $1.83 per Class A Voting and Class B Non-Voting share, a dividend increase to be paid in quarterly amounts of $0.4575 per share. In February 2013 the Board increased the annualized dividend rate from $1.58 to $1.74 per Class A Voting and Class B NonVoting share. Quarterly dividends are only paid as declared by our Board.\n\nThe table below shows when dividends have been declared and paid on both classes of shares over the past two years:\n\nWe expect that the record and payment dates for the 2014 declaration of dividends to be as follows, subject to the declaration by our Board each quarter at their sole discretion:\n\n## Outstanding Common S hares\n\nThe table below shows our outstanding common shares at December 31, 2013 and 2012.\n\nIn 2013, we purchased a total of 546,674 Class B Non-Voting shares for cancellation according to our normal course issuer bid for approximately $22 million. See Note 23 to our 2013 audited consolidated financial statements for more information.\n\n1 Holders of our Class B Non-Voting shares are entitled to receive notice of and to attend shareholder meetings; however, they are not entitled to vote at these meetings except as required by law or stipulated by stock exchanges. If an offer is made to purchase outstanding Class A Voting shares, there is no requirement under applicable law or our constating documents that an offer be made for the outstanding Class B Non-Voting shares, and there is no other protection available to shareholders under our constating documents. If an offer is made to purchase both classes of shares, the offer for the Class A Voting shares may be made on different terms than the offer to the holders of Class B Non-Voting shares.\n\nWe use the weighted average number of shares outstanding to calculate earnings per share. See 'Non-GAAP Measures' for more information.\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC.\n\n65\n\nMANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS", + "recall": 0.9247311827956989, + "true_md": "MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AN D ANALYSIS\n\n## DIVIDENDS AND SHARE INFORMATION\n\n## Dividends\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 65\n\nANNUALIZED DIVIDENDS PER SHARE AT YEAR END ($)\n\nIn February 2014, the Board approved an increase in the annualized dividend rate to $1.83 per Class A Voting and Class B Non-Voting share, a dividend increase to be paid in quarterly amounts of $0.4575 per share. In February 2013 the Board increased the annualized dividend rate from $1.58 to $1.74 per Class A Voting and Class B Non- Voting share. Quarterly dividends are only paid as declared by our Board.\n\nThe table below shows when dividends have been declared and paid on both classes of shares over the past two years:\n\nWe expect that the record and payment dates for the 2014 declaration of dividends to be as follows, subject to the declaration by our Board each quarter at their sole discretion:\n\nWe use the weighted average number of shares outstanding to calculate earnings per share. See “Non-GAAP Measures” for more information.\n\n## Outstanding Common S hares\n\nThe table below shows our outstanding common shares at December 31, 2013 and 2012.\n\nIn 2013, we purchased a total of 546,674 Class B Non-Voting shares for cancellation according to our normal course issuer bid for approximately $22 million. See Note 23 to our 2013 audited consolidated financial statements for more information.\n\n1 Holders of our Class B Non-Voting shares are entitled to receive notice of and to attend shareholder meetings; however, they are not entitled to vote at these meetings except as required by law or stipulated by stock exchanges. If an offer is made to purchase outstanding Class A Voting shares, there is no requirement under applicable law or our constating documents that an offer be made for the outstanding Class B Non-Voting shares, and there is no other protection available to shareholders under our constating documents. If an offer is made to purchase both classes of shares, the offer for the Class A Voting shares may be made on different terms than the offer to the holders of Class B Non-Voting shares." + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "f4fa722e1012af6987d7ac520c5fe8305cf5e324490e8e42ab24ff3ef221f304", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9993141289437586, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "SMFG\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n102", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "SMFG\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nSMFG 2011 102" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9486262704158541, + "doc_id": "660ba0736a01b0b5fbbaea403bf9432f44faacbb0038fcd342e32bd68be50733", + "edit_distance": 0.41818181818181815, + "f1_score": 0.9811320754716982, + "meteor": 0.9566460520386493, + "precision": 0.9965156794425087, + "pred_md": "## LIQUIDS-RICH AREAS\n\nAnadarko Basin The Anadarko Basin is home to four of Chesapeake's liquids-rich plays, which we anticipate will become significant contributors to our growth in the years ahead. Chesapeake was one of the first to utilize modern horizontal drilling methods and has assembled an unrivaled leasehold position in numerous horizontal liquids-rich plays in the basin. Chesapeake will continue drilling with a focus on the Granite Wash, where rates of return are the highest in our company, and with an increasing focus on the Cleveland, Tonkawa and Mississippian liquids-rich unconventional plays. We estimate we could drill up to 11,400 net wells on our Anadarko Basin acreage in the future and plan to utilize an average of 31 operated rigs in 2011 to further develop our current 1.7 million net leasehold acres. 5\n\n2010 ANNUAL REPORT |\n\n18\n\nEagle Ford Shale As part of a growing emphasis on increasing oil and natural gas liquids production, Chesapeake has built the industry's second-largest leasehold position in the Eagle Ford Shale play in South Texas. In 2010 Chesapeake increased its leasehold from 80,000 net acres at the beginning of the year to more than 600,000 net acres. In November 2010, Chesapeake completed a $2.2 billion Eagle Ford Shale joint venture agreement with Beijing-based CNOOC Limited (NYSE:CEO), whereby CNOOC acquired a 33.3% interest in 600,000 net leasehold acres in the Eagle Ford Shale. CNOOC paid Chesapeake approximately $1.12 billion in cash at closing and will pay 75% of Chesapeake's share of drilling and completion expenditures until the $1.08 billion carry obligation has been funded, which Chesapeake expects to occur by year-end 2012. Our focus has been in the wet gas and oil prone portions of the play. We estimate we could drill up to 5,500 net wells on our Eagle Ford acreage and plan to utilize an average of 23 operated rigs in 2011 to further develop our leasehold position in the Eagle Ford Shale. In addition, we believe that the Pearsall Shale should be prospective for natural gas underneath approximately 75% of our Eagle Ford leasehold. 6\n\nPermian Basin Chesapeake has built a strong position of approx imately 1.2 million net leasehold acres in the Permian Basin including 560,000 net leasehold acres in the Bone Spring, Avalon, Wolfcamp and Wolfberry unconventional liquids plays. This area has the potential to deliver significant upside as we move toward increasing our oil production substantially in the years ahead. We have developed multiple new horizontal oil projects in this area, where we plan to utilize an average of approximately eight operated rigs in 2011 to further develop our leasehold in the Permian and Delaware basins and estimate we could drill up to 4,400 net wells. 7\n\nRockies Chesapeake is the second-largest leasehold owner in the Niobrara Shale, Frontier and Codell plays in the Powder River and Denver Julesburg (DJ) basins of Wyoming and Colorado. In February 2011, Chesapeake completed a $1.3 billion joint venture agreement with CNOOC, whereby CNOOC acquired a 33.3% interest in Chesapeake's approximately 800,000 net leasehold acres in the Powder River and DJ basins. CNOOC paid Chesapeake approximately $570 million in cash at closing and will pay an additional $697 million in carries by funding 66.7% of Chesapeake's 8\n\nNote: Figures do not add to company totals.\n\n- * Compared to last year\n- ** % of company total\n- *** Bossier Shale acreage overlaps with Haynesville Shale acreage\n\nNM Not meaningful\n\nshare of drilling and completion expenditures, which Chesapeake expects to occur by year-end 2014. We plan to utilize an average of approximately 11 rigs in 2011 to develop our current 535,000 net leasehold acres with our partner and estimate that we could drill up to 7,600 net wells.\n\n## 2010 Total Production:\n\n145 bcfe, +4%, 14%\n\n12/31/10 Proved Reserves: 2,440 bcfe, +21%, 14% 12/31/10 Net Leasehold Acres:\n\n1,420,000, +15%, 11%\n\n## 2010 Total Production:\n\n2 bcfe, NM, NM\n\n12/31/10 Proved Reserves:\n\n110 bcfe, NM, 1%\n\n12/31/10 Net Leasehold Acres: 470,000, +488%, 4%\n\n## 2010 Total Production:\n\n60 bcfe, -20%, 6%\n\n12/31/10 Proved Reserves:\n\n770 bcfe, +4%, 5%\n\n12/31/10 Net Leasehold Acres: 1,200,000, -44%, 9%\n\n2010 Total Production:\n\n0 bcfe, NM, NM\n\n12/31/10 Proved Reserves:\n\n10 bcfe, NM, NM\n\n12/31/10 Net Leasehold Acres:\n\n800,000, +135%, 6%", + "recall": 0.9662162162162162, + "true_md": "2010 ANNUAL REPORT | 18\n\n## LIQUIDS-RICH AREAS\n\n12/31/10 Proved Reserves: 10 bcfe, NM, NM\n\n12/31/10 Net Leasehold Acres: 800,000, +135%, 6%\n\n2010 Total Production: 0 bcfe, NM, NM\n\n2010 Total Production: 60 bcfe, -20%, 6%\n\n12/31/10 Proved Reserves: 770 bcfe, +4%, 5%\n\n12/31/10 Net Leasehold Acres: 1,200,000, -44%, 9%\n\n2010 Total Production: 2 bcfe, NM, NM\n\n12/31/10 Proved Reserves: 110 bcfe, NM, 1%\n\n12/31/10 Net Leasehold Acres: 470,000, +488%, 4%\n\n2010 Total Production: 145 bcfe, +4%, 14%\n\n12/31/10 Proved Reserves: 2,440 bcfe, +21%, 14%\n\n12/31/10 Net Leasehold Acres: 1,420,000, +15%, 11%\n\nAnadarko Basin The Anadarko Basin is home to four of Chesapeake’s liquids-rich p lays, which we anticipate will become significant contributors to our growth in the years ahead. Chesapeake was one of the first to utilize modern horizontal drilling methods and has assembled an unrivaled leasehold position in numerous horizontal liquids-rich plays in the basin. Chesapeake will continue drilling with a focus on the Granite Wash, where rates of return are the highest in our company, and with an increasing focus on the Cleveland, Tonkawa and Mississippian liquids-rich unconventional plays. We estimate we could drill up to 11,400 net wells on our Anadarko Basin acreage in the future and plan to utilize an average of 31 operated rigs in 2011 to further develop our current 1.7 million net leasehold acres. 5\n\nEagle Ford Shale As part of a growing emphasis on increasing oil and natural gas liq uids production, Chesapeake has built the industry’s second-largest leasehold position in the Eagl e Ford Shale play in South Texas. In 2010 Chesapeake increased its leasehold from 80,000 net acres at the beginning of the year to more than 600,000 net acres. In November 2010, Chesapeake completed a $2.2 billion Eagle Ford Shale joint venture agreement with Beijing-based CNOOC Limited (NYSE:CEO), whereby CNOOC acquired a 33.3% interest in 600,000 net leasehold acres in the Eagle Ford Shale. CNOOC paid Chesapeake approximately $1.12 billion in cash at closing and will pay 75% of Chesapeake’s share of drilling and completion expenditures until the $1.08 billion carry obligation has been funded, which Chesapeake expects to occur by year-end 2012. Our focus has been in the wet gas and oil prone portions of the play. We estimate we could drill up to 5,500 net wells on our Eagle Ford acrea ge and plan to utilize an average of 23 operated rigs in 2011 to further develop our leasehold position in the Eagle Ford Shale. In addition, we believe that the Pearsall Shale should be prospective for natural gas underneath approximately 75% of our Eagle Ford leasehold. 6\n\nPermian Basin Chesapeake has built a strong position of approx - imately 1.2 million net leasehold acres in the Permian Basin including 560,000 net leasehold acres in the Bone Spring, Avalon, Wolfcamp and Wolfberry unconventional liquids plays. This area has the potential to deliver significant upside as we move toward increasing our oil production substantially in the years ahead. We have developed multiple new horizontal oil projects in this area, where we plan to utilize an average of approximately eight operated rigs in 2011 to further develop our leasehold in the Permian and Delaware basins and estimate we could drill up to 4,400 net wells. 7\n\nRockies Chesapeake is the second-largest leasehold owner in the Niobrara Shale, Frontier and Codell plays in the Powder River and Denver Julesburg (DJ) basins of Wyoming and Colorado. In February 2011, Chesapeake completed a $1.3 billion joint venture agreement with CNOOC, whereby CNOOC acquired a 33.3% interest in Chesapeake’s approximately 800,000 net leasehold acres in the Powder River and DJ basins. CNOOC paid Chesapeake approximately $570 million in cash at closing and will pay an additional $697 million in carries by funding 66.7% of Chesapeake’s share of drilling and completion expenditures, which 8\n\nChesapeake expects to occur by year-end 2014. We plan to utilize an average of approximately 11 rigs in 2011 to develop our current 535,000 net leasehold acres with our partner and estimate that we could drill up to 7,600 net wells.\n\nNote: Figures do not add to company totals.\n\n- * Compared to last year\n\n- ** % of company total\n\n- *** Bossier Shale acreage overlaps with Haynesville Shale acreage\n\nNM Not meaningful" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7552939866562575, + "doc_id": "4e18b7b70c6c68c7dbb137c54f1576c843dfe044e6080bbf3a58146bbf550e88", + "edit_distance": 0.7526652452025586, + "f1_score": 0.9940298507462688, + "meteor": 0.5796439302808711, + "precision": 0.9940298507462687, + "pred_md": "## Nordstrom, Inc.\n\n## Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nDollar and share amounts in millions except per share, per option and per unit amounts\n\n## NOTE 1: NATURE OF OPERATIONS AND SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES\n\n## The Company\n\nFounded in 1901 as a shoe store in Seattle, Washington, Nordstrom, Inc. is now a leading fashion specialty retailer that offers customers a well-edited selection of high-quality fashion brands focused on apparel, shoes, cosmetics and accessories for men, women and children. This breadth of merchandise allows us to serve a wide range of customers who appreciate quality fashion and a superior shopping experience. We offer an extensive selection of high-quality brand-name and private label merchandise through multiple retail channels, including 116 'Nordstrom' branded full-line stores in the U.S. and at Nordstrom.com (collectively, 'Nordstrom'), one Canada full-line store, 167 off-price Nordstrom Rack stores, Nordstromrack.com and HauteLook, five Trunk Club showrooms and TrunkClub.com, two Jeffrey boutiques and one Last Chance clearance store. Our stores are located in 38 states throughout the U.S and in one province in Canada.\n\nThrough our Credit segment, we provide our customers with a variety of payment products and services, including a Nordstrom private label card, two Nordstrom Visa credit cards and a debit card for Nordstrom purchases. These products also allow our customers to participate in our loyalty program designed to increase customer visits and spending. Although the primary purposes of our Credit segment are to foster greater customer loyalty and drive more sales, we also generate revenues from finance charges and other fees on these cards. In addition, we save on interchange fees that the Retail segment would incur if our customers used third-party cards.\n\n## Fiscal Year\n\nWe operate on a 52/53-week fiscal year ending on the Saturday closest to January 31 st . References to 2014 and all years within this document are based on a 52-week fiscal year, except 2012, which is based on a 53-week fiscal year.\n\n## Principles of Consolidation\n\nThe consolidated financial statements include the balances of Nordstrom, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All intercompany transactions and balances are eliminated in consolidation.\n\n## Use of Estimates\n\nThe preparation of financial statements in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the U.S. requires management to make estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets, liabilities, revenues and expenses, and disclosure of contingent assets and liabilities during the reporting period. Uncertainties regarding such estimates and assumptions are inherent in the preparation of financial statements and actual results may differ from these estimates and assumptions. Our most significant accounting judgments and estimates include the allowance for credit losses, revenue recognition, inventory, goodwill, stock-based compensation and income taxes.\n\n## Net Sales\n\nWe recognize revenue from sales at our retail stores at the point of sale, net of estimated returns and excluding sales taxes. Revenue from sales to customers shipped directly from our stores, website and catalog, which includes shipping revenue when applicable, is recognized upon estimated receipt by the customer. We estimate customer merchandise returns based on historical return patterns and reduce sales and cost of sales accordingly. Activity in the allowance for sales returns, net, for the past three fiscal years is as follows:\n\n1 Returns, net consist of actual returns offset by the value of the merchandise returned and any related sales commission.\n\n## Credit Card Revenues\n\nCredit card revenues include finance charges, late fees and other revenue generated by our combined Nordstrom private label card and Nordstrom Visa credit card programs, and interchange fees generated by the use of Nordstrom Visa credit cards at third-party merchants. Finance charges and late fees are assessed according to the terms of the related cardholder agreements and recognized as revenue when earned. Credit card revenues are recorded net of estimated uncollectible finance charges and fees.\n\n## Cost of Sales\n\nCost of sales includes the purchase cost of inventory sold (net of vendor allowances), in-bound freight and certain costs of loyalty program benefits related to our credit and debit cards.\n\nNordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 41", + "recall": 0.9940298507462687, + "true_md": "Nordstrom, Inc. Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements Dollar and share amounts in millions except per share, per option and per unit amounts\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements Dollar and share amounts in millions except per share, per option and per unit amounts\n\n## NOTE 1: NATURE OF OPERATIONS AND SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES\n\n## The Company Founded in 1901 as a shoe store in Seattle, Washington, Nordstrom, Inc. is now a leading fashion specialty retailer that offers customers a\n\n## Principles of Consolidation The consolidated financial statements include the balances of Nordstrom, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All intercompany transactions and\n\n## Use of Estimates The preparation of financial statements in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the U.S. requires management to make\n\n## Net Sales We recognize revenue from sales at our retail stores at the point of sale, net of estimated returns and excluding sales taxes. Revenue from\n\n## Credit Card Revenues Credit card revenues include finance charges, late fees and other revenue generated by our combined Nordstrom private label card and\n\n## Cost of Sales Cost of sales includes the purchase cost of inventory sold (net of vendor allowances), in-bound freight and certain costs of loyalty program\n\nCost of Sales Cost of sales includes the purchase cost of inventory sold (net of vendor allowances), in-bound freight and certain costs of loyalty program benefits related to our credit and debit cards.\n\nCredit Card Revenues Credit card revenues include finance charges, late fees and other revenue generated by our combined Nordstrom private label card and Nordstrom Visa credit card programs, and interchange fees generated by the use of Nordstrom Visa credit cards at third-party merchants. Finance charges and late fees are assessed according to the terms of the related cardholder agreements and recognized as revenue when earned. Credit card revenues are recorded net of estimated uncollectible finance charges and fees.\n\n1 Returns, net consist of actual returns offset by the value of the merchandise returned and any related sales commission. \n\nNet Sales We recognize revenue from sales at our retail stores at the point of sale, net of estimated returns and excluding sales taxes. Revenue from sales to customers shipped directly from our stores, website and catalog, which includes shipping revenue when applicable, is recognized upon estimated receipt by the customer. We estimate customer merchandise returns based on historical return patterns and reduce sales and cost of sales accordingly. Activity in the allowance for sales returns, net, for the past three fiscal years is as follows:\n\nUse of Estimates The preparation of financial statements in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the U.S. requires management to make estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets, liabilities, revenues and expenses, and disclosure of contingent assets and liabilities during the reporting period. Uncertainties regarding such estimates and assumptions are inherent in the preparation of financial statements and actual results may differ from these estimates and assumptions. Our most significant accounting judgments and estimates include the allowance for credit losses, revenue recognition, inventory, goodwill, stock-based compensation and income taxes.\n\nPrinciples of Consolidation The consolidated financial statements include the balances of Nordstrom, Inc. and its subsidiaries. All intercompany transactions and balances are eliminated in consolidation.\n\nFiscal Year We operate on a 52/53-week fiscal year ending on the Saturday closest to January 31 st . References to 2014 and all years within this document are based on a 52-week fiscal year, except 2012, which is based on a 53-week fiscal year.\n\n## Fiscal Year We operate on a 52/53-week fiscal year ending on the Saturday closest to January 31\n\nThrough our Credit segment, we provide our customers with a variety of payment products and services, including a Nordstrom private label card, two Nordstrom Visa credit cards and a debit card for Nordstrom purchases. These products also allow our customers to participate in our loyalty program designed to increase customer visits and spending. Although the primary purposes of our Credit segment are to foster greater customer loyalty and drive more sales, we also generate revenues from finance charges and other fees on these cards. In addition, we save on interchange fees that the Retail segment would incur if our customers used third-party cards.\n\nThe Company Founded in 1901 as a shoe store in Seattle, Washington, Nordstrom, Inc. is now a leading fashion specialty retailer that offers customers a well-edited selection of high-quality fashion brands focused on apparel, shoes, cosmetics and accessories for men, women and children. This breadth of merchandise allows us to serve a wide range of customers who appreciate quality fashion and a superior shopping experience. We offer an extensive selection of high-quality brand-name and private label merchandise through multiple retail channels, including 116 “Nordstrom” branded full-line stores in the U.S. and at Nordstrom.com (collectively, “Nordstrom”), one Canada full-line store, 167 off-price Nordstrom Rack stores, Nordstromrack.com and HauteLook, five Trunk Club showrooms and TrunkClub.com, two Jeffrey boutiques and one Last Chance clearance store. Our stores are located in 38 states throughout the U.S and in one province in Canada.\n\nNordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 41" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6849027594894159, + "doc_id": "a0a75ae8d9af42c5fb94bc226580cc9acc44359d15f3b42a9a162480e9728293", + "edit_distance": 0.3333333333333333, + "f1_score": 0.8699551569506727, + "meteor": 0.7224230970790814, + "precision": 0.9897959183673469, + "pred_md": "## WIRELESS EVERYWHERE\n\n06 ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\nROGERS KNOWS THAT NO MATTER WHERE ITS CUSTOMERS ARE, BEING IN TOUCH WITH FRIENDS, FAMILY AND COLLEAGUES MAKES THEIR LIVES MORE CONNECTED. AND BEING CONNECTED ANYTIME, ANYWHERE, TO THE INFORMATION AND ENTERTAINMENT THAT MATTERS MOST MAKES LIFE EASIER AND MORE ENJOYABLE.\n\nThat's why, in the city and around the world, millions of Canadians rely on Rogers to keep them connected, and to put the Internet in their pockets with the most advanced wireless services, blistering-fast speeds, and seamless coverage. And they do so with the flexibility and peace of mind that comes with Rogers Share Everything plans which allow families and businesses to share wireless data between their wireless devices and add additional devices to their plans.", + "recall": 0.776, + "true_md": "## WIRELESS EVERYWHERE\n\n## CANADA’S FASTEST WIRELESS NETWORK\n\n## ANYWHERE TV VIEWING\n\n## REMOTE HOME MONITORING & AUTOMATION\n\n## VIRTUAL OFFICE CONNECTIVITY\n\n## SOCIAL MEDIA & NETWORKING\n\n## SMARTPHONES & TABLETS\n\n## WIRELESS VOICE & DATA\n\n## MOBILE INTERNET\n\n## MOBILE PAYMENTS\n\nROGERS KNOWS THAT NO MATTER WHERE ITS CUSTOMERS ARE, BEING IN TOUCH WITH FRIENDS, FAMILY AND COLLEAGUES MAKES THEIR LIVES MORE CONNECTED. AND BEING CONNECTED ANYTIME, ANYWHERE, TO THE INFORMATION AND ENTERTAINMENT THAT MATTERS MOST MAKES LIFE EASIER AND MORE ENJOYABLE.\n\nThat’s why, in the city and around the world, millions of Canadians rely on Rogers to keep them connected, and to put the Internet in their pockets with the most advanced wireless services, blistering-fast speeds, and seamless coverage. And they do so with the flexibility and peace of mind that comes with Rogers Share Everything plans which allow families and businesses to share wireless data between their wireless devices and add additional devices to their plans. \n\n06 ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7470473418128467, + "doc_id": "b07a0a2aa5aa3478a86411471c6cd3e61c9b9b264a151b997669bb8f406c397d", + "edit_distance": 0.4168388429752066, + "f1_score": 0.987465940054496, + "meteor": 0.9612024806648147, + "precision": 0.9890829694323144, + "pred_md": "38\n\n| EMPLOYEES\n\n| Rebecca Roy Jeremy Rubio |\n|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|\n| Brad Ruhman |\n| Guadalupe Ruiz |\n| Mike Ruiz II Ben Russ |\n| Jamie Russell Randy Russell |\n| Tommy Russell Jr. |\n| Bryan Ryan John Rychtarik Daniel Ryerson |\n| James Safley Baldemar Salazar Baldemar Salazar Jr. |\n| Ricardo Salazar |\n| Federico Samora Michele Samuels Ema Sanchez Steven C. Sanders Woody Sandlin |\n| Pedro Santana Jr. Daniel Satterwhite Cathy Saunders Donnie Savage Jessica Savic |\n| Wayne Savory |\n| Brynn Scalf |\n| Kevin Scarem Susie Scasta |\n| Jason Schafer John Schafer Deborah Schaffner Heather Schevetto Boyd Schneider Jake Schoeffler |\n| David Scholl |\n| Regan Schrader Clint Schwarz |\n| Jay Scogin Jr. Dustin Sconyers |\n| Gerald Scott |\n| Steve Scott |\n| Clifford Scroggins Mike Scroggins Roby Scruggs Brooke Secor |\n| Brenna See |\n| Brad Seelback Steven Segrest Terry Sells |\n| Chellee Semon Hayet Serradji |\n| Charlie Sewell Jr. |\n| Susan Seymore Mitcheal Shackelford |\n| Brian Shadwick Charles Shadwick |\n| Bindu Shah |\n| Jerry Shamblin |\n| Michael Shanbour Aaron Shannon Jacob Sharp Kevin Shaw Lisa Shelden Jennifer Sheline Cheri Shepard Jesse Sheppard Keith Shields Jr. Brock Shindler Thomas Shock |\n| Jason Shook Ashis Shrestha |\n| J.R. Shull Amanda Siebert Vince Sifuentes |\n| Patrick Simmons J.J. Simonsen Jr. Alan Simpson Rick Simpson Jr. |\n| Steve Sistrunk Jon Sivertson |\n| Jerimy Sites Tyler Skelton Justin Sloan |\n| Cheryl Siler |\n| Gary Simer David Similly Eula Simms Brad Sinor |\n\nRyan Slosson\n\nDrew Smart\n\nJake Smedley\n\nHeather Smiley\n\nAaron Smith\n\nAdam Smith\n\nBeth Smith\n\nDale Smith III\n\nDawn Smith\n\nGreg Smith\n\nGwyn Smith\n\nJeffery R. Smith\n\nJimmee Smith\n\nJoseph Smith\n\nJulie Smith\n\nJustin T. Smith\n\nMilton Smith\n\nRandy Smith\n\nStephanie Smith\n\nSteve Smith\n\nThao Smith\n\nZac Smith\n\nJeffrey Snell\n\nDavid Snethen\n\nJason Snyder\n\nClarky Socia\n\nMatt Solomon\n\nJaclyn Sommavilla\n\nGary Sons\n\nJoshua Southerland\n\nPavlina Sovak\n\nBrian Spaeth\n\nJeremy Spalvieri\n\nLindsay Sparks\n\nShawn Spencer\n\nJason Sprayberry\n\nJefferson Springer\n\nAndrew Sprouse\n\nHeather Spurlock\n\nGentry Squires\n\nFrancis Staat\n\nRobin Stafford\n\nPaul Stager\n\nMichael Stair\n\nDavid Stamper\n\nTim Stansel\n\nLaura Steen\n\nBritnee Steffee\n\nNathan Steffee\n\nGay Stephens\n\nJamie Stephens\n\nLaura Stephens\n\nCody Stephenson\n\nGlenn Stetson\n\nJoseph Stevens Jr.\n\nPatrick Stevens\n\nRichard Stevens Jr.\n\nChad Stewart\n\nDarren Stewart\n\nHaleigh Stewart\n\nJames Stewart\n\nMike Stice\n\nCorey Still\n\nCorey Stockert\n\nHarvey Stockman\n\nMichael Stoll\n\nJaneen Stonebraker\n\nBrian Stoops\n\nBob Stowe\n\nAllie Street IV\n\nSam Stroder\n\nMonica Stroman\n\nHolli Strong\n\nRobert Stroud\n\nNick Strunk\n\nJason Stryker\n\nEdwin Stubbert\n\nDonna Stubbs\n\nDoug Sublette\n\nJordan Sudhoff\n\nBrandy Sullens\n\nStephanie Sullivan\n\nChristopher Summerfield\n\nJody Summers\n\nJohn Swanson\n\nJason Tackett\n\nJason Talkington\n\nJoshua Tanner\n\nKristin Tarbush\n\nJulie Tarp\n\n| Justin Tarver Aaron Tasier |\n|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|\n| Brian Tate |\n| Casey Taylor |\n| Tate Tatem Christy Taylor |\n| Monty Taylor |\n| Tim A. Taylor Josh Tedder |\n| Jason Tell |\n| Shawn Tenney |\n| Bridget Thedorff |\n| Matt Theriot |\n| Cody Thiessen Abbie Thomas |\n| Brad Thomas |\n| Denver Thomas Joseph Thomason Adam Thompson |\n| Frank Thompson Jon Thompson Matt R. Thompson Mitcheal Thompson Sharon Thompson |\n| William Thompson |\n| Ashley Thornton |\n| Scott Thornton Preston Thurman Isidro Tijerina Tanner Tipton |\n| Todd Tigert Cody Tipton |\n| Jim Todd |\n| W. E. Tinkler |\n| Richard Tollison Suzette Tomlin Greg Tompkins Sr. Rick Treeman |\n| Frankie Tovar III Steve Trammell Sarah Tribout Nick Tricinella Joseph Triplett Chuck Tripp |\n| Steve Trotter Wesley Troub |\n| Daniel Truman |\n| Mike Trussell Chance Turner Kevin Twyman Perry Ulicnik Berto Ulloa Jose Urbina |\n| Tanner Upchurch |\n| Justin Urena |\n| Ken Utton Bobby Vallery |\n| Donnette Vandersypen |\n| Deloris VanLandingham Steve Van Strien |\n| Crystal Vasquez Jeff Vasquez Silver Vasquez III James Vaughn Nick Vaughn Randy Vaughn Rusty Vaughn |\n| Miguel Vences Jose Vergara Javier Villa |\n| Juan Villarreal |\n| Donna Villers Link Vodron |\n| Terri Vogt Jennifer Voisin |\n| Terry Von Allman |\n| Ike Vorheis Haley Voyles |\n| Todd Waddle Justin Wade Donald Waggoner III Fred Wagner Steven Wagner Ken Waldroop Chase Waldrop |\n| Chris Walker |\n| Danny Walker |\n| Erin Lee Walker |\n| Matthew Walker |\n\nBrandi Wallis\n\n| Jimmie Walters Jr. |\n|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|\n| Michael Wanzer |\n| Kent Warfield |\n| Doug Warminski |\n| Brian Warren BJ Warren |\n| Christian Warren John Warren Ray Warren Britni Watson |\n| Cody Watson |\n| Mike Watson |\n| Kelli Waxman Jeff Weaver Michael Webb Nathan Weber Ryan Weber Cody Weiss |\n| Bill Welch |\n| George Weissman Brandon Welch Brent Welch Melanie Welch |\n| Kip Welch Geff Welsh Drew West |\n| Scott West |\n| Colt Westbrook |\n| Buck Wheaton Jeric Wheeler Shawn Whitaker Dennis White Lisa White Suzy White Todd C. White |\n| Danny Whitehead Darien Whitehurst |\n| Gary Whitley Kody Whitley Kyra Whitt Darrell Whittemore |\n| Bobby Whittington II Sam Whitworth |\n| Rachael Wickery |\n| LeeAnn Widner |\n| David Wiist Jr. Terrence Wilhoit Brent M. Williams Brian P. Williams |\n| Cody M. Williams |\n| Frankie Williams Jr. Lauren Williams |\n| Mike Williams Forest Willis |\n| Adam Wilson B.C. Wilson |\n| Darrel Wilson Erica Wilson |\n| Jonathan Wilson Kayla Wilson Kendal Wilson Kevin Wilson Lance Wilson Sugar Ray Wilson Todd Wilson Clayton Winkler Gary Winn |\n| Keith Winsauer |\n| Rhett Winter Crystal Witcher |\n| David Witte |\n| Ray Wolf |\n| Glen Wolford |\n| David Wools |\n| Becky Wooten |\n| Luke Wood Kim Woodall Travis Woodard Richard Woodbeck Mike Woodfin Kevin Woods Kyle Woods Monty Woods |\n| Billy Wooten |\n| Jamie Word |\n\nBrandon J. Wright\n\nDan Wright\n\nKandice Wright\n\nMike R. Wright\n\nRyan Wright\n\nTom Wright\n\nChad Wyatt\n\nCarolynn Wylder\n\nJennifer Yeahquo\n\nTonya York\n\nAndrew Yost\n\nKevin Yost\n\nScot Young\n\nTerri Young\n\nTammi Yount\n\nJuan Zapata Jr.\n\nRobert Zeiler\n\nDebra Zimmerman\n\nLinda Zimmerman\n\nMelvin Zinke\n\nGerry Ziriaxe\n\n## 2009 (1,323)\n\nTimothy O. Abshire\n\nTimothy Abshire Jr.\n\nDaman Ackerman\n\nJoshua Ackley\n\nJeremy Adam\n\nChristopher Adams\n\nDeAnn Adams\n\nHeath Adams\n\nKyle Adams\n\nPeter Adams\n\nMark Adkins\n\nMichael Adkinson\n\nDavid Adkison\n\nAaron Aguilar\n\nDavid Ainsworth\n\nEdward Ainsworth\n\nTasha Akers\n\nGavin Albright\n\nMarco Aleman\n\nCurtis Alexander\n\nAlbert Allen III\n\nCathy Allen\n\nJames M. Allen\n\nJared Allen\n\nKane Allen\n\nMike Allen\n\nPaul Allen\n\nTommy Allen\n\nSondra Allison\n\nJacob Alvarez\n\nJames Alvis\n\nJoe E. Aly\n\nBrandon Amato\n\nMatt Andersen\n\nAndrew Anderson\n\nJeremy Anderson\n\nRondal Anderson Jr.\n\nTyler Anderson\n\nVictor Anderson\n\nAustin Andrews\n\nDustin Andrews\n\nJames Andrews Jr.\n\nBradly Andrus\n\nTony Angelo\n\nChristopher Anglin\n\nGary Ansley\n\nRob Anthony\n\nTony Aranda\n\nSteven Armentrout\n\nGregory Armstead\n\nJoshua Armstead\n\nBrian Armstrong\n\nBubba Armstrong\n\nDavid Armstrong\n\nPriscella Arnett\n\nKyle Arnold\n\nDaniel Ary\n\nSamantha Ash\n\nMike Atchie\n\nMichael Atkinson\n\nKelly Babb\n\nJoey Bagnaro\n\nGordon Bailey\n\nJamie Bailey\n\nJustin Bailey\n\nKenneth Bailey\n\nT.J. Bailey\n\nBrett Baker\n\nBryan Baker\n\nHeath Baldwin\n\nMichael D. Ball\n\nJonathan Ballard\n\nLilli Ballinger\n\nDiana Bane\n\nKim Barbay\n\nLinda Barber\n\nSeth Barkocy\n\nDylan Barnes\n\nMarcus Barnes\n\nRyan Barnhart\n\nJoshua Bartholomew\n\nJohnny Barton\n\nWhitney Bash\n\nGeorge Bass\n\nMelissa Bassett\n\nBarry Bateman\n\nAllen Bates\n\nEverett Bates\n\nHope Baumgarner\n\nJames Baumgarner\n\nMatt Bayne\n\nCoby Beals\n\nJonathan Beam\n\nRussell Beavers III\n\nAdam Beck\n\nA.J. Beets\n\nJeremy Begeman\n\nKyle Behnke\n\nChristopher Bell\n\nDustin Bell\n\nDana Bennett\n\nRyan Bennett\n\nTodd Bennett\n\nAllison Bentley\n\nDaniel Bentley\n\nMerideth Bentley\n\nMatthew Bereuter\n\nJonas Bergman\n\nSherry Bernstein\n\nKevyn Berry\n\nSteven Berry\n\nChris Beuchaw\n\nJared Beutler\n\nCarl Beyor\n\nAmber Bezdek\n\nDannye Billie\n\nAndrew Bischoff\n\nCarmen Bishop\n\nJames Bishop\n\nRyan Bishop\n\nShyla Blackketter Dwyer\n\nJohnathan Blacksten\n\nDarrell Blagg\n\nJoshua Blewer\n\nScott Blomgren\n\nJason Blose\n\nMargaret Blount\n\nDan Blythe\n\nDennis Bode\n\nJonathan Bodine\n\nTravis Bohannon\n\nRyan Bohnet\n\nJeremy Boitnott\n\nJen Bookwalter\n\nChristopher Boomgarden\n\nCurtis Boone\n\nJustin Boop\n\nMike Bordes\n\nRichard Bostick\n\nNathan Botti\n\nKent Bowman Jr.\n\nSonny Bowman II\n\nChristopher Boyles\n\nShad Brackin\n\nArla Bradford\n\nBlair Bradley\n\nColt Bradley\n\nDennis Bradley\n\nRick Bray\n\nChristopher Breland\n\nRawlins Breland\n\nRandall Brewer\n\nDawn Brick\n\nScott Bridges\n\nLindsay Bridgwater\n\nKenny Briley\n\nBrian Bristol\n\nBryan Britt\n\nJames Britt\n\nClint Brooks\n\nGerald Brooks\n\nJoe Brooks\n\nLandon Brooks\n\nShannon Brooks\n\nLeslie Bross\n\nSarah Brothers\n\nCharles Brown II\n\nDavid B. Brown\n\nMatthew Brown\n\nRobert Brown\n\nTimothy Brown\n\nMary Bruce\n\nBenjamin Brulet\n\nHeather Brulet\n\nJennifer Brumage\n\nJeremy M. Bryan\n\nScottie Bryan\n\nJeffrey Bryant\n\nRon Bryant\n\nMegan Bryce\n\nJamie Buchanan\n\nJohn Bunner\n\nSteve Burnley\n\nJeffery Burns\n\nLonnie Burns\n\nAmy Burrous-Medina\n\nSylvia Bustamante\n\nJeff Butler\n\nByron Button Jr.\n\nSteve Byrd\n\nBradley Cagle\n\nChristopher Cain\n\nMike Caldwell\n\nStephen Callahan\n\nCraig Callas\n\nJames Callender\n\nJuan Camacho\n\nMartin Camacho\n\nJeremy Camburn\n\nDavid Camero\n\nKim Cameron\n\nStephen Cammann Jr.\n\nJimmy Camp\n\nDerek Campbell\n\nJC Campbell\n\nScott Campbell\n\nSteven Canada\n\nMichael Caneen\n\nSteve Canfield\n\nCasey Cardin\n\nCody Carlisle\n\nNathan Carlson\n\nLonnie Carpenter\n\nLuke Carpenter\n\nJeremy Carraway\n\nBobby Carter\n\nCharles Carter III\n\nJeremy Carter\n\nToby Cashion\n\nKen Cason\n\nJefferson Castie\n\nJimmie Casto\n\nThomas Caton Jr.\n\nKen Cavner\n\nScott Cazabat\n\nBrad Chambers\n\nErin Chancellor\n\nChris Chappell\n\nJerome Charleston\n\nEugene Childers\n\nLindsay Choate\n\nAmanda Clark\n\nChristopher Clark\n\nWilliam Clark\n\nTom Clarke\n\nJane Clements\n\nChristopher Clevenger\n\nMegan Clinkenbeard\n\nJason Coates\n\nLloyd Cockrell\n\nMerrick Coe\n\nMerle Coffman Jr.\n\nChristopher Cogswell\n\nJoe Coladipietro\n\nGlenn Colbert\n\nJohn Cole\n\nJustin Colegrove\n\nBob V. Coleman\n\nJuri Coleman\n\nJustin Collier\n\nNathan Collins\n\nRick Collins\n\nTom Comer\n\nRon Comes\n\nPaul Conti\n\nJud Cook\n\nRickey Cook\n\nChad Corcoran\n\nTammie Corkery\n\nJon Corley\n\nAdam Cornell\n\nJose Corralejo\n\nBenjamin Corso\n\nAgustin Cortes\n\nMarcus Corvino\n\nKeith Cowell\n\nStephen Cox\n\nJosh Craig\n\nJulie Craig\n\nBrandon Cramer\n\nCory Crawford\n\nJonathan Creagan\n\nRobbie Crosier\n\nDerik Cross\n\nMichael Cross\n\nJohnathon Crossen\n\nWillard Crossen\n\nPam Crum\n\nDavid Cunningham\n\nNatalie Cunningham\n\nBryan Curtis\n\nJimmy Cyrus\n\nTiffany Dailey\n\nJeffery Daniel\n\nBecky Danker\n\nJoe Darnell\n\nAdam Daugherty\n\nBrian Daugherty\n\nJoe Daugherty\n\nPat Davenport\n\nOrin David\n\nAndrew Davis\n\nDarryl Davis\n\nDustin A. Davis\n\nGary Davis\n\nJoel Davis\n\nLandon Davis\n\nSteven Davis\n\nWilliam Davis\n\nRyan V. Dean\n\nShane Dean\n\nEric Deeter\n\nDavid Dehn Jr.\n\nBradley Deines\n\nBillie Demott\n\nGregory Desper\n\nFnu Dezvita\n\nValente Diaz\n\nChase Dickens\n\nBentley Dill\n\nJerry Dilley II\n\nNicholas Dimauro\n\nDrew Dixon\n\nLee Dixon\n\nAmy Dobkin\n\nRenee Dollar\n\nCrystal Doty\n\nMarshall Dougherty\n\nKarl Doughty Jr.\n\nTerry Doughty\n\nIrene Dougrey\n\nAnna Dovedan\n\nCheryl Dowis\n\nJohn Dozer Jr.\n\nMichael Drake\n\nWilliam Draper\n\nGreg Duffy\n\nWill Duffy\n\nConnie Duke\n\nJustin Dulaney\n\nChad Duncan\n\nJIm Dunham\n\nChris Dunton\n\nCory Durig\n\nChris Duroy\n\nChase Dwiggins\n\nGreg Dykes Sr.\n\nJoe Eades", + "recall": 0.985854189336235, + "true_md": "38 | EMPLOYEES\n\n## 2009 (1,323)\n\nRebecca Roy Jeremy Rubio Brad Ruhman Guadalupe Ruiz Mike Ruiz II Ben Russ Jamie Russell Randy Russell Tommy Russell Jr. Bryan Ryan John Rychtarik Daniel Ryerson James Safley Baldemar Salazar Baldemar Salazar Jr. Ricardo Salazar Federico Samora Michele Samuels Ema Sanchez Steven C. Sanders Woody Sandlin Pedro Santana Jr. Daniel Satterwhite Cathy Saunders Donnie Savage Jessica Savic Wayne Savory Brynn Scalf Kevin Scarem Susie Scasta Jason Schafer John Schafer DeborahSchaffner Heather Schevetto Boyd Schneider Jake Schoeffler David Scholl Regan Schrader Clint Schwarz Jay Scogin Jr. Dustin Sconyers Gerald Scott Steve Scott Clifford Scroggins Mike Scroggins Roby Scruggs Brooke Secor Brenna See Brad Seelback Steven Segrest Terry Sells Chellee Semon Hayet Serradji Charlie Sewell Jr. Susan Seymore Mitcheal Shackelford Brian Shadwick Charles Shadwick Bindu Shah Jerry Shamblin Michael Shanbour Aaron Shannon Jacob Sharp Kevin Shaw Lisa Shelden Jennifer Sheline CheriShepard Jesse Sheppard Keith Shields Jr. Brock Shindler Thomas Shock Jason Shook Ashis Shrestha J.R. Shull Amanda Siebert Vince Sifuentes Cheryl Siler Gary Simer David Similly Patrick Simmons Eula Simms J.J. Simonsen Jr. Alan Simpson Rick Simpson Jr. Brad Sinor Steve Sistrunk Jerimy Sites Jon Sivertson Tyler Skelton Justin Sloan\n\nRyan Slosson Drew Smart Jake Smedley Heather Smiley Aaron Smith Adam Smith Beth Smith Dale Smith III Dawn Smith Greg Smith Gwyn Smith Jeffery R. Smith Jimmee Smith Joseph Smith Julie Smith Justin T. Smith Milton Smith Randy Smith Stephanie Smith Steve Smith Thao Smith Zac Smith JeffreySnell DavidSnethen Jason Snyder Clarky Socia Matt Solomon Jaclyn Sommavilla Gary Sons Joshua Southerland Pavlina Sovak Brian Spaeth Jeremy Spalvieri Lindsay Sparks Shawn Spencer Jason Sprayberry Jefferson Springer Andrew Sprouse Heather Spurlock Gentry Squires Francis Staat Robin Stafford Paul Stager Michael Stair David Stamper Tim Stansel Laura Steen Britnee Steffee Nathan Steffee Gay Stephens Jamie Stephens Laura Stephens Cody Stephenson Glenn Stetson Joseph Stevens Jr. Patrick Stevens Richard Stevens Jr. Chad Stewart Darren Stewart Haleigh Stewart James Stewart Mike Stice Corey Still Corey Stockert Harvey Stockman Michael Stoll Janeen Stonebraker Brian Stoops Bob Stowe Allie Street IV Sam Stroder Monica Stroman Holli Strong Robert Stroud Nick Strunk Jason Stryker Edwin Stubbert Donna Stubbs Doug Sublette Jordan Sudhoff Brandy Sullens Stephanie Sullivan Christopher Summerfield Jody Summers John Swanson Jason Tackett Jason Talkington Joshua Tanner Kristin Tarbush Julie Tarp\n\nJimmie Walters Jr. Michael Wanzer Tara Ward Kent Warfield Doug Warminski Brian Warren BJ Warren Christian Warren John Warren Ray Warren Britni Watson Cody Watson Mike Watson Kelli Waxman Jeff Weaver Michael Webb Nathan Weber Ryan Weber Cody Weiss George Weissman Bill Welch Brandon Welch Brent Welch Kip Welch Melanie Welch Geff Welsh Drew West Scott West Colt Westbrook Buck Wheaton Jeric Wheeler Shawn Whitaker Dennis White Lisa White Suzy White Todd C. White Danny Whitehead Darien Whitehurst Gary Whitley Kody Whitley Kyra Whitt Darrell Whittemore Bobby Whittington II Sam Whitworth Rachael Wickery LeeAnn Widner David Wiist Jr. Terrence Wilhoit Brent M. Williams Brian P. Williams Cody M. Williams Frankie Williams Jr. Lauren Williams Mike Williams Forest Willis Adam Wilson B.C. Wilson Darrel Wilson Erica Wilson Jonathan Wilson Kayla Wilson Kendal Wilson Kevin Wilson Lance Wilson Sugar Ray Wilson Todd Wilson Clayton Winkler Gary Winn Keith Winsauer Rhett Winter Crystal Witcher David Witte Ray Wolf Glen Wolford Luke Wood Kim Woodall Travis Woodard Richard Woodbeck Mike Woodfin Kevin Woods Kyle Woods MontyWoods David Wools Becky Wooten Billy Wooten Jamie Word Daniel Wortham Lindsey Wortham Emily Worthen Brandon J. Wright\n\nJustin Tarver Aaron Tasier Brian Tate Tate Tatem Casey Taylor Christy Taylor Monty Taylor Tim A. Taylor Josh Tedder Jason Tell Shawn Tenney Bridget Thedorff Matt Theriot Cody Thiessen Abbie Thomas Brad Thomas Denver Thomas Joseph Thomason Adam Thompson Frank Thompson Jon Thompson Matt R. Thompson Mitcheal Thompson Sharon Thompson William Thompson Ashley Thornton Scott Thornton Preston Thurman Todd Tigert Isidro Tijerina W. E. Tinkler Cody Tipton Tanner Tipton Jim Todd Richard Tollison Suzette Tomlin Greg Tompkins Sr. Frankie Tovar III Steve Trammell Rick Treeman Sarah Tribout Nick Tricinella Joseph Triplett Chuck Tripp Steve Trotter Wesley Troub Daniel Truman Mike Trussell Chance Turner Kevin Twyman Perry Ulicnik Berto Ulloa Tanner Upchurch Jose Urbina Justin Urena Ken Utton Bobby Vallery Donnette Vandersypen Deloris VanLandingham Steve Van Strien Crystal Vasquez Jeff Vasquez Silver Vasquez III James Vaughn Nick Vaughn Randy Vaughn Rusty Vaughn Miguel Vences Jose Vergara Javier Villa Juan Villarreal Donna Villers Link Vodron Terri Vogt Jennifer Voisin Terry Von Allman Ike Vorheis Haley Voyles Todd Waddle Justin Wade Donald Waggoner III Fred Wagner Steven Wagner Ken Waldroop Chase Waldrop Chris Walker Danny Walker Erin Lee Walker Matthew Walker Brandi Wallis\n\nDan Wright Kandice Wright Mike R. Wright Ryan Wright Tom Wright Chad Wyatt Carolynn Wylder Jennifer Yeahquo Tonya York Andrew Yost Kevin Yost Scot Young Terri Young Tammi Yount Juan Zapata Jr. Robert Zeiler Debra Zimmerman Linda Zimmerman Melvin Zinke Gerry Ziriaxe\n\nTimothy O. Abshire Timothy Abshire Jr. Daman Ackerman Joshua Ackley Jeremy Adam Christopher Adams DeAnn Adams Heath Adams Kyle Adams Peter Adams Mark Adkins Michael Adkinson David Adkison Aaron Aguilar David Ainsworth Edward Ainsworth Tasha Akers Gavin Albright Marco Aleman Curtis Alexander Albert Allen III Cathy Allen James M. Allen Jared Allen Kane Allen Mike Allen Paul Allen Tommy Allen Sondra Allison Jacob Alvarez James Alvis Joe E. Aly Brandon Amato Matt Andersen Andrew Anderson Jeremy Anderson Rondal Anderson Jr. Tyler Anderson Victor Anderson Austin Andrews Dustin Andrews James Andrews Jr. Bradly Andrus Tony Angelo Christopher Anglin Gary Ansley Rob Anthony Tony Aranda Steven Armentrout Gregory Armstead Joshua Armstead Brian Armstrong Bubba Armstrong David Armstrong Priscella Arnett Kyle Arnold Daniel Ary Samantha Ash Mike Atchie Michael Atkinson Kelly Babb Joey Bagnaro Gordon Bailey Jamie Bailey Justin Bailey Kenneth Bailey T.J. Bailey Brett Baker\n\nBryan Baker Heath Baldwin Michael D. Ball Jonathan Ballard Lilli Ballinger Diana Bane Kim Barbay Linda Barber Seth Barkocy Dylan Barnes Marcus Barnes Ryan Barnhart Joshua Bartholomew Johnny Barton Whitney Bash George Bass MelissaBassett Barry Bateman Allen Bates Everett Bates Hope Baumgarner James Baumgarner Matt Bayne Coby Beals Jonathan Beam Russell Beavers III Adam Beck A.J. Beets Jeremy Begeman Kyle Behnke Christopher Bell Dustin Bell Dana Bennett Ryan Bennett Todd Bennett Allison Bentley Daniel Bentley Merideth Bentley Matthew Bereuter Jonas Bergman Sherry Bernstein Kevyn Berry Steven Berry Chris Beuchaw Jared Beutler Carl Beyor Amber Bezdek Dannye Billie Andrew Bischoff Carmen Bishop James Bishop Ryan Bishop Shyla Blackketter Dwyer Johnathan Blacksten Darrell Blagg Joshua Blewer Scott Blomgren Jason Blose Margaret Blount Dan Blythe Dennis Bode Jonathan Bodine Travis Bohannon Ryan Bohnet Jeremy Boitnott Jen Bookwalter Christopher Boomgarden Curtis Boone Justin Boop Mike Bordes Richard Bostick Nathan Botti Kent Bowman Jr. Sonny Bowman II Christopher Boyles Shad Brackin Arla Bradford Blair Bradley Colt Bradley Dennis Bradley Rick Bray Christopher Breland Rawlins Breland Randall Brewer Dawn Brick Scott Bridges Lindsay Bridgwater Kenny Briley Brian Bristol Bryan Britt\n\nJames Britt Clint Brooks Gerald Brooks JoeBrooks Landon Brooks Shannon Brooks Leslie Bross Sarah Brothers Charles Brown II David B. Brown Matthew Brown Robert Brown Timothy Brown Mary Bruce Benjamin Brulet Heather Brulet Jennifer Brumage Jeremy M. Bryan Scottie Bryan Jeffrey Bryant Ron Bryant Megan Bryce Jamie Buchanan John Bunner Steve Burnley Jeffery Burns Lonnie Burns Amy Burrous-Medina Sylvia Bustamante Jeff Butler Byron Button Jr. Steve Byrd Bradley Cagle Christopher Cain Mike Caldwell Stephen Callahan Craig Callas James Callender Juan Camacho Martin Camacho Jeremy Camburn David Camero Kim Cameron Stephen Cammann Jr. Jimmy Camp Derek Campbell JC Campbell Scott Campbell Steven Canada Michael Caneen Steve Canfield Casey Cardin Cody Carlisle Nathan Carlson Lonnie Carpenter Luke Carpenter Jeremy Carraway Bobby Carter Charles Carter III Jeremy Carter Toby Cashion Ken Cason Jefferson Castie Jimmie Casto Thomas Caton Jr. Ken Cavner Scott Cazabat Brad Chambers Erin Chancellor Chris Chappell Jerome Charleston Eugene Childers Lindsay Choate Amanda Clark Christopher Clark William Clark Tom Clarke Jane Clements Christopher Clevenger Megan Clinkenbeard Jason Coates Lloyd Cockrell Merrick Coe Merle Coffman Jr. Christopher Cogswell Joe Coladipietro Glenn Colbert John Cole Justin Colegrove Bob V. Coleman\n\nJuri Coleman Justin Collier Nathan Collins Rick Collins Tom Comer Ron Comes Paul Conti Jud Cook Rickey Cook Chad Corcoran Tammie Corkery Jon Corley Adam Cornell Jose Corralejo Benjamin Corso Agustin Cortes Marcus Corvino Keith Cowell Stephen Cox Josh Craig Julie Craig Brandon Cramer Cory Crawford Jonathan Creagan Robbie Crosier Derik Cross Michael Cross Johnathon Crossen Willard Crossen Pam Crum David Cunningham Natalie Cunningham Bryan Curtis Jimmy Cyrus Tiffany Dailey Jeffery Daniel Becky Danker Joe Darnell Adam Daugherty Brian Daugherty Joe Daugherty Pat Davenport Orin David Andrew Davis Darryl Davis Dustin A. Davis Gary Davis Joel Davis Landon Davis Steven Davis William Davis Ryan V. Dean Shane Dean Eric Deeter David Dehn Jr. Bradley Deines Billie Demott Gregory Desper Fnu Dezvita Valente Diaz Chase Dickens Bentley Dill Jerry Dilley II Nicholas Dimauro Drew Dixon Lee Dixon Amy Dobkin Renee Dollar Crystal Doty Marshall Dougherty Karl Doughty Jr. Terry Doughty Irene Dougrey Anna Dovedan Cheryl Dowis John Dozer Jr. Michael Drake William Draper Greg Duffy Will Duffy Connie Duke Justin Dulaney Chad Duncan JIm Dunham Chris Dunton Cory Durig Chris Duroy Chase Dwiggins Greg Dykes Sr. Joe Eades" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4476105577265679, + "doc_id": "f91426a44337fee10350fc8e94cda3c15f625f7f992e4090a30facff925b6c01", + "edit_distance": 0.5192307692307693, + "f1_score": 0.6071428571428572, + "meteor": 0.892004370974867, + "precision": 0.4358974358974359, + "pred_md": "## Securities (Nonconsolidated)\n\nSumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation\n\n## Balance of Securities\n\n## Year-End Balance\n\n## Average Balance\n\nMillions of yen\n\nNote: The average balance of foreign-currency-denominated transactions by domestic branches in international operations is calculated by the monthly current method.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\nSMBC\n\n171", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "SMBC\n\n## Securities (Nonconsolidated)\n\nSumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation\n\n## Balance of Securities\n\n## Year-End Balance\n\n## Average Balance\n\nSMFG 2011 171" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9248589751260626, + "doc_id": "8810fdbab3a6bd72df0cb910cab90efb26a2095e4926e5f5ebcd7b8bc784c770", + "edit_distance": 0.07010309278350516, + "f1_score": 0.9525691699604745, + "meteor": 0.9605218738876979, + "precision": 0.9678714859437751, + "pred_md": "4\n\nManaging Director and CEO's Report\n\n## Development Projects\n\n## Bowdens\n\nThe Bowdens Project continued to advance during the year with field programs supporting the ongoing feasibility and environmental studies. Sterilisation drilling and additional metallurgical sampling were undertaken with the resource evaluation drilling completed in October 2012.\n\nDuring 2013, the process design and engineering work for the Definitive Feasibility Study ('DFS') progressed to a point where the draft study was close to completion as at 30 June 2013. The study encompassed detailed process design based on using the most recent metallurgical test results, capital and operating cost estimates, project water and power supply, infrastructure requirements and mine optimisation.\n\nThe preparation for lodgement of an Environmental Impact Statement ('EIS') to the NSW Department of Planning continues. It is envisaged that the EIS will be completed and lodged in 2014. Data for flora and fauna, surface water, groundwater, meteorology, ambient noise and dust levels are collected routinely. Further investigations of cultural heritage, social-economic impact, traffic impact, soil type and agricultural suitability have also been undertaken.\n\nWith the fall in metal prices in late 2013, work and expenditure on the DFS and EIS have been phased to coordinate and synchronise the timing of the two programs with completion and lodgement now not expected before mid-2014.\n\n## Nueva Esperanza\n\nThe Nueva Esperanza Project was advanced during the year with the completion of a draft feasibility study. This study included a decision to mine the Arqueros and Teterita portions of Nueva Esperanza. The study demonstrated that open pit mining at two million tonnes per year and processing by milling and agitation leaching in cyanide was technically feasible, although high capital and power costs negatively impacted project economic returns.\n\nAs a consequence, feasibility work has transitioned to assess a lower capital cost and lower power requirement options, namely the potential for heap leach processing. Metallurgical testwork recently completed demonstrated that processing of mineralisation from all three deposits by heap leaching has the potential to be technically and economically feasible and as a consequence may become the preferred alternative for development.\n\nEnvironmental approval for the original Arqueros Project was granted in July 2013.\n\n## Financials\n\nKingsgate made an after tax loss of $323.7 million for the full year to 30 June 2013 compared to an after tax profit of $75.0 million for the previous corresponding year. The result for the year reflected an impairment of $311.9 million pre-tax ($291.3 million post-tax) against the Challenger Mine and associated assets and an impairment of $20.4 million against greenfield exploration projects in Australia and Thailand.\n\nwww.kingsgate.com.au", + "recall": 0.9377431906614786, + "true_md": "4 Managing Director and CEO’s Report\n\n## Development Projects\n\n## Bowdens\n\n## Nueva Esperanza\n\n## Financials\n\nThe Bowdens Project continued to advance during the year with field programs supporting the ongoing feasibility and environmental studies. Sterilisation drilling and additional metallurgical sampling were undertaken with the resource evaluation drilling completed in October 2012.\n\nDuring 2013, the process design and engineering work for the Definitive Feasibility Study (“DFS”) progressed to a point where the draft study was close to completion as at 30 June 2013. The study encompassed detailed process design based on using the most recent metallurgical test results, capital and operating cost estimates, project water and power supply, infrastructure require- ments and mine optimisation.\n\nThe preparation for lodgement of an Environ- mental Impact Statement (“EIS”) to the NSW Department of Planning continues. It is envis- aged that the EIS will be completed and lodged in 2014. Data for flora and fauna, surface water, groundwater, meteorology, ambient noise and dust levels are collected routinely. Further inves- tigations of cultural heritage, social-economic impact, traffic impact, soil type and agricultural suitability have also been undertaken.\n\nWith the fall in metal prices in late 2013, work and expenditure on the DFS and EIS have been phased to coordinate and synchronise the timing of the two programs with completion and lodgement now not expected before mid-2014.\n\nThe Nueva Esperanza Project was advanced during the year with the completion of a draft feasibility study. This study included a decision to mine the Arqueros and Teterita portions of Nueva Esperanza. The study demonstrated that open pit mining at two million tonnes per year and processing by milling and agitation leaching in cyanide was technically feasible, although high capital and power costs negatively impacted project economic returns. \n\nAs a consequence, feasibility work has tran- sitioned to assess a lower capital cost and lower power requirement options, namely the poten- tial for heap leach processing. Metallurgical testwork recently completed demonstrated that processing of mineralisation from all three deposits by heap leaching has the potential to be technically and economically feasible and as a consequence may become the preferred alternative for development. \n\nEnvironmental approval for the original Arqueros Project was granted in July 2013.\n\nKingsgate made an after tax loss of $323.7 million for the full year to 30 June 2013 compared to an after tax profit of $75.0 million for the previous corresponding year. The result for the year reflected an impairment of $311.9 million pre-tax ($291.3 million post-tax) against the Challenger Mine and associated assets and an impairment of $20.4 million against greenfield exploration projects in Australia and Thailand.\n\nwww.kingsgate.com.au" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8712485068220435, + "doc_id": "92dd0ddf2cd2769edeb828c613af13c3a92df6a4eb32bf58bbf08e7b0aefc088", + "edit_distance": 0.8739076154806492, + "f1_score": 0.9915966386554622, + "meteor": 0.7896935987877874, + "precision": 0.9899328859060402, + "pred_md": "## DIRECTORS AND CORPORATE OFFICERS\n\n## Board of Directors\n\n## John T. Ryan III (3) (4)\n\nChairman of the Board; Retired (2008); formerly Chief Executive O ffi cer of the Company\n\n## Robert A. Bruggeworth (1) (2)\n\nPresident and Chief Executive O ffi cer, RF Micro Devices, Inc. (high-performance RF components and compound semiconductors manufacturer); Director, RF Micro Devices, Inc.\n\n## James A. Cederna (1) (4) (5)\n\nOwner and President, Cederna International, Inc. (executive coaching)\n\nThomas B. Hotopp (2) (5)\n\nRetired (2003); formerly President of the Company\n\n## William M. Lambert (3)\n\nPresident and Chief Executive O ffi cer of the Company\n\n## Diane M. Pearse (1) (4)\n\nSenior Vice President, Operations and Merchandising, Redbox Automated Retail, LLC (a fully automated DVD rental company)\n\n## L. Edward Shaw, Jr. (4) (5)\n\nRetired (2010); formerly Senior Managing Director, Breeden Capital Management LLC (investment management and multi-disciplinary professional services firm), Director and Chairman of the Compensation Committee of HealthSouth Corporation\n\n## John C. Unkovic (2) (5)\n\nPartner and General Counsel, Reed Smith LLP (full service law firm)\n\n## Thomas H. Witmer (1) (2) (3)\n\nRetired (1998); formerly President and Chief Executive O ffi cer, Medrad, Inc. (manufacturer of medical devices)\n\n- (1) Member of Audit Committee\n- (2) Member of Compensation Committee\n- (3) Member of Executive Committee\n- (4) Member of Finance Committee\n- (5) Member of Nominating and Corporate Governance Committee\n\n## Section 302 Certi fi cations and NYSE CEO Certi fi cation\n\nIn June 2011, the Company's Chief Executive O ffi cer submitted to the New York Stock Exchange the annual certification as to compliance with the Exchange's Corporate Governance Listing Standards required by Section 303A.12(a) of the Exchange's Listed Company Manual. The certification was unqualified.\n\nThe Company's reports filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission during the past year, including the Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 2011, have contained the certifications of the Company's Chief Executive O ffi cer and Chief Financial O ffi cer regarding the quality of the Company's public disclosure required by Section 302 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act.\n\n## O ffi cers\n\n## William M. Lambert\n\nPresident and Chief Executive O ffi cer\n\n## Dennis L. Zeitler\n\nSenior Vice President; Chief Financial O ffi cer and Treasurer\n\n## Joseph A. Bigler\n\nVice President; President, MSA North America\n\n## Kerry M. Bove\n\nVice President; President, MSA Asia, Australia, Africa, and Latin America\n\n## Ronald N. Herring, Jr.\n\nVice President; President, MSA Europe, Russia, Middle East, and India\n\n## Douglas K. McClaine\n\nVice President; Secretary and General Counsel\n\n## Dr. Thomas Muschter\n\nVice President, Global Product Leadership\n\n## Paul R. Uhler\n\nVice President, Global Human Resources\n\n## Markus H. Weber\n\nVice President; Chief Information O ffi cer\n\n## Organization\n\nContinuing to add depth to its executive\n\nmanagement team, in 2011 MSA named Dr. Thomas Muschter Vice President of Global Product Leadership. With almost 20 years of\n\nR&D experience with MSA, Dr. Muschter is responsible for further enhancing the Company's new product development results, improving global coordination of new product development activities and advancing the Company's global marketing initiatives. Dr. Muschter succeeds Ronald N. Herring, Jr., who, as of November 1, assumed the role of President of MSA Europe, Russia, Middle East, and India.\n\n## Shareholders' Inquiries\n\nAdditional copies of the company's 2011 Annual Report, including Form 10-K, as filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission, may be obtained by shareholders after April 2, 2012. Printed and electronic versions are available. Requests should be directed to the Chief Financial O ffi cer, who can be reached at one of the following:\n\nPhone:\n\n724-741-8221\n\nFax:\n\n866-538-7488\n\nInternet:\n\nwww.MSAsafety.com\n\nU.S. Mail:\n\nMSA\n\nChief Financial O ffi cer 1000 Cranberry Woods Drive Cranberry Township, PA 16066", + "recall": 0.9932659932659933, + "true_md": "## DIRECTORS AND CORPORATE OFFICERS\n\n## Board of Directors\n\n## Section 302 Certi fi cations and NYSE CEO Certi fi cation\n\n## Shareholders’ Inquiries\n\n## Organization\n\nAdditional copies of the company’s 2011 Annual Report, including Form 10-K, as filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission, may be obtained by shareholders after April 2, 2012. Printed and electronic versions are available. Requests should be directed to the Chief Financial O ffi cer, who can be reached at one of the following:\n\nIn June 2011, the Company’s Chief Executive O ffi cer submitted to the New York Stock Exchange the annual certification as to compliance with the Exchange’s Corporate Governance Listing Standards required by Section 303A.12(a) of the Exchange’s Listed Company Manual. The certification was unqualified. \n\n## O ffi cers\n\nContinuing to add depth to its executive management team, in 2011 MSA named Dr. Thomas Muschter Vice President of Global Product Leadership. With almost 20 years of\n\nR&D experience with MSA, Dr. Muschter is responsible for further enhancing the Company’s new product development results, improving global coordination of new product development activities and advancing the Company’s global marketing initiatives. Dr. Muschter succeeds Ronald N. Herring, Jr., who, as of November 1, assumed the role of President of MSA Europe, Russia, Middle East, and India.\n\nThe Company’s reports filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission during the past year, including the Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 2011, have contained the certifications of the Company’s Chief Executive O ffi cer and Chief Financial O ffi cer regarding the quality of the Company’s public disclosure required by Section 302 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act.\n\n(1) Member of Audit Committee\n\n(2) Member of Compensation Committee\n\n(3) Member of Executive Committee\n\n(4) Member of Finance Committee\n\n(5) Member of Nominating and Corporate Governance Committee\n\nJohn T. Ryan III (3) (4) Chairman of the Board; Retired (2008); formerly Chief Executive O ffi cer of the Company\n\nRobert A. Bruggeworth (1) (2) President and Chief Executive O ffi cer, RF Micro Devices, Inc. (high-performance RF components and compound semiconductors manufacturer); Director, RF Micro Devices, Inc.\n\nJames A. Cederna (1) (4) (5) Owner and President, Cederna International, Inc. (executive coaching)\n\nThomas B. Hotopp (2) (5) Retired (2003); formerly President of the Company\n\nWilliam M. Lambert (3) President and Chief Executive O ffi cer of the Company\n\nPaul R. Uhler Vice President, Global Human Resources\n\nDiane M. Pearse (1) (4) Senior Vice President, Operations and Merchandising, Redbox Automated Retail, LLC (a fully automated DVD rental company) \n\nL. Edward Shaw, Jr. (4) (5) Retired (2010); formerly Senior Managing Director, Breeden Capital Management LLC (investment management and multi-disciplinary professional services firm), Director and Chairman of the Compensation Committee of HealthSouth Corporation\n\nJohn C. Unkovic (2) (5) Partner and General Counsel, Reed Smith LLP (full service law firm)\n\nThomas H. Witmer (1) (2) (3) Retired (1998); formerly President and Chief Executive O ffi cer, Medrad, Inc. (manufacturer of medical devices) \n\nMarkus H. Weber Vice President; Chief Information O ffi cer\n\nWilliam M. Lambert President and Chief Executive O ffi cer\n\nDennis L. Zeitler Senior Vice President; Chief Financial O ffi cer and Treasurer\n\nJoseph A. Bigler Vice President; President, MSA North America \n\nKerry M. Bove Vice President; President, MSA Asia, Australia, Africa, and Latin America\n\nRonald N. Herring, Jr. Vice President; President, MSA Europe, Russia, Middle East, and India\n\nDouglas K. McClaine Vice President; Secretary and General Counsel\n\nDr. Thomas Muschter Vice President, Global Product Leadership \n\nPhone: 724-741-8221 Fax: 866-538-7488 Internet: www.MSAsafety.com U.S. Mail: MSA Chief Financial O ffi cer 1000 Cranberry Woods Drive Cranberry Township, PA 16066" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8791980254862877, + "doc_id": "9b6482daa00e6e72c7b48a4b563e5df03d6ecc698d657c69a73529469499afb9", + "edit_distance": 0.6921641791044776, + "f1_score": 0.944837340876945, + "meteor": 0.7402051088325816, + "precision": 0.943502824858757, + "pred_md": "- (2) Trading assets/liabilities and trading income/losses Transactions for trading purposes (seeking gains arising from short-term changes in interest rates, currency exchange rates, or market prices of securities and other market related indices or from variation among markets) are included in 'Trading assets' or 'Trading liabilities' on the consolidated balance sheet on a trade date basis. Income and losses on tradingpurpose transactions are recognized on a trade date basis and recorded as 'Trading income' and 'Trading losses.'\n\nSecurities and monetary claims purchased for trading purposes are stated at the fiscal year-end fair value, and financial derivatives such as swaps, futures and options are stated at amounts that would be settled if the transactions were terminated on the consolidated balance sheet date.\n\n'Trading income' and 'Trading losses' include related interest received or paid during the fiscal year. The year-onyear valuation differences of securities and monetary claims are also recorded in the above-mentioned accounts. As for the derivatives, assuming that the settlement will be made in cash, the year-on-year valuation differences are also recorded in the above-mentioned accounts.\n\n## (3) Securities\n\n(a) Other than securities classified for trading purposes, debt securities that consolidated subsidiaries have the positive intent and ability to hold to maturity are classified as heldto-maturity securities and are carried at amortized cost (straight-line method) using the moving-average method.\n\nInvestments in unconsolidated subsidiaries and affiliates that are not accounted for by the equity method are carried at cost using the moving-average method.\n\nSecurities other than trading purpose securities, heldto-maturity securities and investments in unconsolidated subsidiaries and affiliates are classified as 'other securities' (available-for-sale securities). Stocks (including foreign stocks) in other securities that have market prices are carried at their average market prices during the final month of the fiscal year, and bonds and others that have market prices are carried at their fiscal year-end market prices (cost of securities sold is calculated using primarily the movingaverage method). Other securities, for which it is extremely difficult to determine fair value with no available market prices, are carried at cost using the moving-average method. Net unrealized gains (losses) on other securities, net of income taxes, are included in 'Net assets,' after deducting the amount that is reflected in the fiscal year's earnings by applying fair value hedge accounting.\n\n- (b) Securities included in money held in trust are carried using the same method used for securities mentioned above.\n\n## (4) Derivative transactions\n\nDerivative transactions, other than those classified as trading derivatives, are carried at fair value, with revaluation gain or loss included in the income or loss, unless they are designated as effective hedging instruments.\n\n## (5) Depreciation\n\n## (a) Tangible fixed assets\n\nBuildings owned by SMFG and SMBC are depreciated using the straight-line method over the estimated useful\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nSMFG\n\nlives of the respective assets. Others are depreciated using the declining-balance method. The estimated useful lives of major items are as follows:\n\nBuildings: 7 to 50 years\n\nOthers: 2 to 20 years\n\nOther consolidated subsidiaries depreciate their tangible fixed assets primarily using the straight-line method over the estimated useful lives of the respective assets.\n\n- (b) Intangible fixed assets\n\nIntangible fixed assets are depreciated using the straightline method. Capitalized software for internal use owned by SMFG and its consolidated domestic subsidiaries is depreciated over its estimated useful life (basically 5 years).\n\n- (c) Lease assets Lease assets with respect to non-transfer ownership finance depreciated using the straight-line method, assuming that\n\nleases, which are recorded in 'Tangible fixed assets,' are lease term is its expected lifetime and salvage value is 0.\n\n## (6) Reserve for possible loan losses\n\nThe reserve for possible loan losses of major consolidated subsidiaries is provided for as described below in accordance with the internal standards for write-offs and provisions.\n\nFor claims on borrowers that have entered into bankruptcy, special liquidation proceedings or similar legal proceedings ('bankrupt borrowers') or borrowers that are not legally or formally insolvent but are regarded as substantially in the same situation ('effectively bankrupt borrowers'), a reserve is provided for based on the amount of claims, after the write-off stated below, net of the expected amount of recoveries from collateral and guarantees.\n\nFor claims on borrowers that are not currently bankrupt but are perceived to have a high risk of falling into bankruptcy ('potentially bankrupt borrowers'), a reserve is provided for in the amount deemed necessary based on an overall solvency assessment of the claims, net of the expected amount of recoveries from collateral and guarantees.\n\nThe discounted cash flows ('DCF') method is used for claims on borrowers whose cash flows from collection of principal and interest can be rationally estimated, and SMBC applies it to claims on large potentially bankrupt borrowers and claims on large borrowers requiring close monitoring that have been classified as 'Past due loans (3 months or more)' or 'Restructured loans,' whose total loans from SMBC exceed a certain amount. SMBC establishes a reserve for possible loan losses using the DCF method for such claims in the amount of the difference between the present value of the future collection from principal and interest (calculated using the rationally estimated cash flows discounted at the initial contractual interest rate) and the book value.\n\nFor other claims, a reserve is provided for based on the historical loan-loss ratio.\n\nFor claims originated in specific overseas countries, an additional reserve is provided for in the amount deemed necessary based on the assessment of political and economic conditions.\n\nBranches and credit supervision departments assess all claims in accordance with the internal rules for self-assessment of assets, and the Credit Review Department, independent\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n79", + "recall": 0.9461756373937678, + "true_md": "SMFG Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nTransactions for trading purposes (seeking gains arising from short-term changes in interest rates, currency exchange rates, or market prices of securities and other market related indices or from variation among markets) are included in “Trading assets” or “Trading liabilities” on the consolidated balance sheet on a trade date basis. Income and losses on trading- purpose transactions are recognized on a trade date basis and recorded as “Trading income” and “Trading losses.”\n\nSecurities and monetary claims purchased for trading purposes are stated at the fiscal year-end fair value, and financial derivatives such as swaps, futures and options are stated at amounts that would be settled if the transactions were terminated on the consolidated balance sheet date.\n\n“Trading income” and “Trading losses” include related interest received or paid during the fiscal year. The year-on- year valuation differences of securities and monetary claims are also recorded in the above-mentioned accounts. As for the derivatives, assuming that the settlement will be made in cash, the year-on-year valuation differences are also recorded in the above-mentioned accounts.\n\nDerivative transactions, other than those classified as trading derivatives, are carried at fair value, with revaluation gain or loss included in the income or loss, unless they are designated as effective hedging instruments.\n\nBuildings owned by SMFG and SMBC are depreciated using the straight-line method over the estimated useful \n\nBranches and credit supervision departments assess all claims in accordance with the internal rules for self-assessment of assets, and the Credit Review Department, independent \n\nFor claims originated in specific overseas countries, an addi- tional reserve is provided for in the amount deemed necessary based on the assessment of political and economic conditions.\n\nFor other claims, a reserve is provided for based on the historical loan-loss ratio.\n\nThe discounted cash flows (“DCF”) method is used for claims on borrowers whose cash flows from collection of principal and interest can be rationally estimated, and SMBC applies it to claims on large potentially bankrupt borrowers and claims on large borrowers requiring close monitoring that have been classified as “Past due loans (3 months or more)” or “Restructured loans,” whose total loans from SMBC exceed a certain amount. SMBC establishes a reserve for possible loan losses using the DCF method for such claims in the amount of the difference between the present value of the future collection from principal and interest (calculated using the rationally estimated cash flows discounted at the initial contractual interest rate) and the book value.\n\nFor claims on borrowers that are not currently bankrupt but are perceived to have a high risk of falling into bankruptcy (“potentially bankrupt borrowers”), a reserve is provided for in the amount deemed necessary based on an overall solvency assessment of the claims, net of the expected amount of recoveries from collateral and guarantees.\n\nFor claims on borrowers that have entered into bankruptcy, special liquidation proceedings or similar legal proceedings (“bankrupt borrowers”) or borrowers that are not legally or formally insolvent but are regarded as substantially in the same situation (“effectively bankrupt borrowers”), a reserve is provided for based on the amount of claims, after the write-off stated below, net of the expected amount of recoveries from collateral and guarantees.\n\nlives of the respective assets. Others are depreciated using the declining-balance method. The estimated useful lives of major items are as follows:\n\nBuildings: 7 to 50 years\n\nOthers: 2 to 20 years\n\nOther consolidated subsidiaries depreciate their tangible fixed assets primarily using the straight-line method over the estimated useful lives of the respective assets.\n\n(b) Intangible fixed assets\n\nIntangible fixed assets are depreciated using the straight- line method. Capitalized software for internal use owned by SMFG and its consolidated domestic subsidiaries is depreciated over its estimated useful life (basically 5 years).\n\n(c) Lease assets\n\nLease assets with respect to non-transfer ownership finance leases, which are recorded in “Tangible fixed assets,” are depreciated using the straight-line method, assuming that lease term is its expected lifetime and salvage value is 0.\n\n(6) Reserve for possible loan losses\n\nThe reserve for possible loan losses of major consolidated subsidiaries is provided for as described below in accordance with the internal standards for write-offs and provisions.\n\nSMFG 2011 79\n\n(a) Tangible fixed assets\n\n(5) Depreciation\n\n(4)Derivative transactions\n\n(b) Securities included in money held in trust are carried using the same method used for securities mentioned above.\n\nSecurities other than trading purpose securities, held- to-maturity securities and investments in unconsolidated subsidiaries and affiliates are classified as “other securities” (available-for-sale securities). Stocks (including foreign stocks) in other securities that have market prices are car- ried at their average market prices during the final month of the fiscal year, and bonds and others that have market prices are carried at their fiscal year-end market prices (cost of securities sold is calculated using primarily the moving- average method). Other securities, for which it is extremely difficult to determine fair value with no available market prices, are carried at cost using the moving-average method. Net unrealized gains (losses) on other securities, net of income taxes, are included in “Net assets,” after deducting the amount that is reflected in the fiscal year’s earnings by applying fair value hedge accounting.\n\nInvestments in unconsolidated subsidiaries and affiliates that are not accounted for by the equity method are carried at cost using the moving-average method.\n\n(a) Other than securities classified for trading purposes, debt securities that consolidated subsidiaries have the positive intent and ability to hold to maturity are classified as held- to-maturity securities and are carried at amortized cost (straight-line method) using the moving-average method.\n\n(3) Securities\n\n(2) Trading assets/liabilities and trading income/losses" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9678317907712601, + "doc_id": "2586d736a1ec4100dd97bba11999bfe6834b3a6590e52b9da64a3637e4b9d221", + "edit_distance": 0.0125, + "f1_score": 0.9917355371900827, + "meteor": 0.9874919884633873, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 36 - EVENTS AFTER THE BALANCE SHEET DATE\n\nSubsequent to 31 December 2014, an additional $13.9 million was drawn-down the credit facilities, bringing total outstanding debt to $143.9 million, with undrawn funds of $1.1 million.\n\nIn January 2015, the company acquired three leases totalling approximately 14,180 net acres in the Eagle Ford for approximately $13.4 million.\n\n- 105 -", + "recall": 0.9836065573770492, + "true_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 36 – EVENTS AFTER THE BALANCE SHEET DATE\n\nSubsequent to 31 December 2014, an additional $13.9 million was drawn-down the credit facilities, bringing total outstanding debt to $143.9 million, with undrawn funds of $1.1 million.\n\nIn January 2015, the company acquired three leases totalling approximately 14,180 net acres in the Eagle Ford for approximately $13.4 million. \n\n- 105 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.938566849132751, + "doc_id": "64be3b3c1c00698ca5dbdb70da352a0fd2fcfa4c01e6e786fc659c7d4fb1bf51", + "edit_distance": 0.7648546144121365, + "f1_score": 0.9922480620155039, + "meteor": 0.7710175953895412, + "precision": 0.9961089494163424, + "pred_md": "We amortize the costs of acquired program rights over the expected performances of the related programs, recording them in other external purchases in operating costs in the consolidated statements of income. This amounted to $52 million in 2013 (2012 - $64 million).\n\n## Impairment\n\n## Goodwill and Indefinite Life Intangible Assets\n\nWe test cash generating units or groups of cash generating units with allocated goodwill and/or indefinite life intangible assets for impairment as at October 1 of each calendar year. When assessing whether or not there is impairment, we determine the recoverable amount of a cash generating unit based on the greater of its value in use or its fair value less costs to sell.\n\nWe estimate an asset's value in use by:\n\n- GLYPH<129> Discounting estimated future cash flows to their present value. We estimate the discounted future cash flows for periods of up to five years, depending on the cash generating unit, and a terminal value.\n- GLYPH<129> The future cash flows are based on our estimates and expected future operating results of the cash generating unit after considering, economic conditions and a general outlook for the cash generating unit's industry.\n- GLYPH<129> Our discount rates consider market rates of return, debt to equity ratios and certain risk premiums, among other things.\n- GLYPH<129> The terminal value is the value attributed to the cash generating unit's operations beyond the projected time period of the cash flows\n\nusing a perpetuity rate based on expected economic conditions and a general outlook for the industry.\n\nWe determine its fair value less costs to sell in one of two ways:\n\n- GLYPH<129> Analyzing discounted cash flows - we estimate the discounted future cash flows for periods of five to ten years, depending on the cash generating unit and valuation method for determining the recoverable amount, and a terminal value. The future cash flows are based on our estimates and expected future operating results, economic conditions and a general outlook for the cash generating unit's industry. Our discount rates consider market rates of return, debt to equity ratios and certain risk premiums, among other things. The terminal value is the value attributed to the cash generating unit's operations beyond the projected time period of the cash flows using a perpetuity rate based on expected economic conditions and a general outlook for the industry.\n- GLYPH<129> Using a market approach - we estimate the recoverable amount of the cash generating unit using multiples of operating performance of comparable entities and precedent transactions in that industry.\n\nWe have made certain assumptions for the discount and terminal growth rates to reflect variations in expected future cash flows. These assumptions may differ or change quickly depending on economic conditions or other events. It is therefore possible that future changes in assumptions may negatively affect future valuations of cash generating units and goodwill, which could result in impairment losses.\n\nThe table below is an overview of the methods and assumptions we used to determine recoverable amounts for cash generating units with goodwill or indefinite life intangible assets that we consider significant.\n\n## Impairment Losses\n\nWe did not record an impairment charge in 2013 since the recoverable amounts of the cash generating units exceeded their carrying values.\n\nIn 2012, we recorded a total impairment charge of $80 million for various cash generating units in the Media segment:\n\n- GLYPH<129> $67 million in goodwill,\n- GLYPH<129> $8 million in broadcast licences, and\n- GLYPH<129> $5 million in program rights.\n\nThe recoverable amounts of these cash generating units were lower in 2012 than 2011 mainly due to the decline in advertising revenue in certain markets.\n\n## NOTE 14: INVESTMENTS\n\n## Publicly Traded Companies\n\nWe hold interests in a number of publicly traded companies. This year we recorded unrealized gains of $186 million (2012 - $225 million of unrealized losses) with a corresponding increase in other comprehensive income.\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC.\n\n109\n\nNOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS", + "recall": 0.9884169884169884, + "true_md": "NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 109\n\n## Publicly Traded Companies\n\n## Impairment Losses\n\n## Impairment\n\n## Goodwill and Indefinite Life Intangible Assets\n\n## NOTE 14: INVESTMENTS\n\nWe hold interests in a number of publicly traded companies. This year we recorded unrealized gains of $186 million (2012 – $225 million of unrealized losses) with a corresponding increase in other comprehensive income.\n\nThe recoverable amounts of these cash generating units were lower in 2012 than 2011 mainly due to the decline in advertising revenue in certain markets.\n\nWe did not record an impairment charge in 2013 since the recoverable amounts of the cash generating units exceeded their carrying values.\n\nIn 2012, we recorded a total impairment charge of $80 million for various cash generating units in the Media segment:\n\nThe table below is an overview of the methods and assumptions we used to determine recoverable amounts for cash generating units with goodwill or indefinite life intangible assets that we consider significant.\n\nWe have made certain assumptions for the discount and terminal growth rates to reflect variations in expected future cash flows. These assumptions may differ or change quickly depending on economic conditions or other events. It is therefore possible that future changes in assumptions may negatively affect future valuations of cash generating units and goodwill, which could result in impairment losses.\n\nWe estimate an asset’s value in use by:\n\nusing a perpetuity rate based on expected economic conditions and a general outlook for the industry.\n\nWe determine its fair value less costs to sell in one of two ways:\n\nWe amortize the costs of acquired program rights over the expected performances of the related programs, recording them in other external purchases in operating costs in the consolidated statements of income. This amounted to $52 million in 2013 (2012 – $64 million).\n\nWe test cash generating units or groups of cash generating units with allocated goodwill and/or indefinite life intangible assets for impairment as at October 1 of each calendar year. When assessing whether or not there is impairment, we determine the recoverable amount of a cash generating unit based on the greater of its value in use or its fair value less costs to sell.\n\n- GLYPH<129> Analyzing discounted cash flows – we estimate the discounted future cash flows for periods of five to ten years, depending on the cash generating unit and valuation method for determining the recoverable amount, and a terminal value. The future cash flows are based on our estimates and expected future operating results, economic conditions and a general outlook for the cash generating unit’s industry. Our discount rates consider market rates of return, debt to equity ratios and certain risk premiums, among other things. The terminal value is the value attributed to the cash generating unit’s operations beyond the projected time period of the cash flows using a perpetuity rate based on expected economic conditions and a general outlook for the industry.\n\n- GLYPH<129> Using a market approach – we estimate the recoverable amount of the cash generating unit using multiples of operating performance of comparable entities and precedent transactions in that industry.\n\n- GLYPH<129> Discounting estimated future cash flows to their present value. We estimate the discounted future cash flows for periods of up to five years, depending on the cash generating unit, and a terminal value.\n\n- GLYPH<129> The future cash flows are based on our estimates and expected future operating results of the cash generating unit after considering, economic conditions and a general outlook for the cash generating unit’s industry.\n\n- GLYPH<129> Our discount rates consider market rates of return, debt to equity ratios and certain risk premiums, among other things.\n\n- GLYPH<129> The terminal value is the value attributed to the cash generating unit’s operations beyond the projected time period of the cash flows\n\n- GLYPH<129> $67 million in goodwill,\n\n- GLYPH<129> $8 million in broadcast licences, and\n\n- GLYPH<129> $5 million in program rights." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.832470975144013, + "doc_id": "b417c5ca249678d4acc737b9487d48711c2dd91cdbb16f9c8bb1d23615a8838e", + "edit_distance": 0.8681177976952625, + "f1_score": 0.9461077844311379, + "meteor": 0.6535323483069598, + "precision": 0.9663608562691132, + "pred_md": "National Theatre and the National Engei Hall. The company also supports the development of talented performers by cosponsoring children kabuki performances. SMBC Friend Securities supports cultural and artistic activities by specially sponsoring art exhibitions such as those by Gyoshu Hayami (the traditional Japanese painter) shown at the Yamatane Museum of Art.\n\nSMBC and Cedyna support the promotion of music culture by sponsoring classical music concerts.\n\n## ¥ Financial and Economic Education\n\nSMBC and SMBC Nikko Securities organize vocational workshops for elementary school students to experience working in the financial industry. The bank supports diverse financial and economic education activities, including publishing a book called ' What Does a Bank Do? ,' providing financial educational on-line games on the SMBC website, co-sponsoring Kidzania (a vocational experience theme park for children), and supporting Shinagawa Financial Park (economic training programs for junior high school students).\n\nSumitomo Mitsui Card, SMFL, JRI and SMBC Nikko Securities send instructors for classes at universities. Additionally, in November 2010, SMBC Friend Securities began its free online education program and practical experience program, 'You · You Toshi' (self-composed Investment) for inexperienced investors.\n\n## ¥ Students Internship Program\n\nSMBC, JRI and SMBC Friend Securities offer internship programs for students. In fiscal 2010, SMBC invited 16 students allowing them to gain actual banking operational experience at various departments of the Head Office. JRI invited five students to help gain a thorough understanding of environmental and energy businesses for the next generation. SMBC Friend Securities invited 26 students to learn about financial instruments and the securities business.\n\n## Emergency Reconstruction Assistance and Support for the Regions Devastated by the Great East Japan Earthquake\n\n## ¥ Disaster-relief Donations\n\nSMFG and its Group companies have donated an aggregate of approximately ¥600 million for the reconstruction of regions devastated by the Great East Japan Earthquake, out of which SMBC and SMBC Nikko Securities donated ¥300 million and ¥100 million, respectively. The Group also took other initiatives including collecting donations from employees and donating the amount equivalent to the donations given by employees.\n\nFurthermore, SMBC opened an account solely for donations for disaster-relief efforts, and solicited donations from our clients and also from our employees of all Group companies, including the bank and SMBC Nikko Securities. Sumitomo Mitsui Card and Cedyna also accept donations charged to credit cards.\n\n## ¥ Charity Concerts\n\nSince 2006, SMBC has held charity concerts performed by employees to support unfortunate children worldwide. The donations are collected from the audiences of concerts and also from\n\nthe sales of employees' handcrafted products. In May 2011, the bank delivered musical instruments, as part of its support for disaster victims of the Great East Japan Earthquake, to the elementary and intermediate schools which were substantially damaged by the earthquake and tsunami. In addition, people taking refuge in Tokyo were also invited to the concerts.\n\n## ¥ Volunteer Activities\n\nIn April, SMBC implemented a special leave of absence for disaster relief volunteer activities, and in June, it began allowing employees to actually go to the disaster areas for regular volunteering. By early July, 65 employees had participated in such volunteer activities as the clean-up of homes and restoring photographs by taking advantage of this volunteer leave program.\n\nIn April, SMBC Nikko Securities also implemented the volunteer leave program, and in July, it sent approximately 360 newly hired employees to the disaster areas for volunteer activities.\n\nIn order to assist our clients affected by the Great East Japan Earthquake as much as possible, SMBC continued to open its Sendai branch on non-business days, and provided the over-the-counter payment services to our clients who had lost their deposit books, certificates or registered seals (provided that they had other types of identification). We also began offering housing loans with preferential interest rates for our clients whose homes were lost or damaged by the earthquake, and special funding facilities for our corporate clients.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n61", + "recall": 0.9266862170087976, + "true_md": "## • Charity Concerts\n\n## • Financial and Economic Education SMBC and SMBC Nikko Securities organize vocational work-\n\n## • Students Internship Program SMBC, JRI and SMBC Friend Securities offer internship pro-\n\n## • Volunteer Activities In April, SMBC implemented a special leave of absence for\n\n## Emergency Reconstruction Assistance and Support for the Regions Devastated by the Great East Japan Earthquake •\n\n## East Japan Earthquake • Disaster-relief Donations SMFG and its Group companies have donated an aggregate\n\nSMFG 2011 61\n\nIn order to assist our clients affected by the Great East Japan Earthquake as much as possible, SMBC continued to open its Sendai branch on non-business days, and provided the over-the-counter payment services to our clients who had lost their deposit books, certificates or registered seals (provided that they had other types of identification). We also began offer- ing housing loans with preferential interest rates for our clients whose homes were lost or damaged by the earthquake, and special funding facilities for our corporate clients.\n\nFurthermore, SMBC opened an account solely for donations for disaster-relief efforts, and solicited donations from our clients and also from our employees of all Group companies, including the bank and SMBC Nikko Securities. Sumitomo Mitsui Card and Cedyna also accept donations charged to credit cards.\n\n• SMFG and its Group companies have donated an aggregate of approximately ¥600 million for the reconstruction of regions devastated by the Great East Japan Earthquake, out of which SMBC and SMBC Nikko Securities donated ¥300 million and ¥100 million, respectively. The Group also took other initiatives including collecting donations from employees and donating the amount equivalent to the donations given by employees.\n\nIn April, SMBC Nikko Securities also implemented the volun- teer leave program, and in July, it sent approximately 360 newly hired employees to the disaster areas for volunteer activities.\n\n• In April, SMBC implemented a special leave of absence for disaster relief volunteer activities, and in June, it began allow- ing employees to actually go to the disaster areas for regular volunteering. By early July, 65 employees had participated in such volunteer activities as the clean-up of homes and restor- ing photographs by taking advantage of this volunteer leave program.\n\n• SMBC, JRI and SMBC Friend Securities offer internship pro- grams for students. In fiscal 2010, SMBC invited 16 students allowing them to gain actual banking operational experience at various departments of the Head Office. JRI invited five stu- dents to help gain a thorough understanding of environmental and energy businesses for the next generation. SMBC Friend Securities invited 26 students to learn about financial instru- ments and the securities business.\n\nSumitomo Mitsui Card, SMFL, JRI and SMBC Nikko Securities send instructors for classes at universities. Additionally, in November 2010, SMBC Friend Securities began its free online education program and practical experience program, “You • You Toshi” (self-composed Investment) for inex- perienced investors.\n\nSince 2006, SMBC has held charity concerts performed by employees to support unfortunate children world- wide. The donations are col- lected from the audiences of concerts and also from \n\nthe sales of employees’ handcrafted products. In May 2011, the bank delivered musical instruments, as part of its support for disaster victims of the Great East Japan Earthquake, to the elementary and intermediate schools which were substantially damaged by the earthquake and tsunami. In addition, people taking refuge in Tokyo were also invited to the concerts.\n\n• SMBC and SMBC Nikko Securities organize vocational work- shops for elementary school students to experience working in the financial industry. The bank supports diverse financial and economic education activities, including publishing a book called “ What Does a Bank Do? ,” providing financial educational on-line games on the SMBC website, co-sponsoring Kidzania (a vocational experience theme park for children), and supporting Shinagawa Financial Park (economic training programs for junior high school students).\n\nNational Theatre and the National Engei Hall. The company also supports the development of talented performers by co- sponsoring children kabuki performances. SMBC Friend Securities supports cultural and artistic activities by specially sponsoring art exhibitions such as those by Gyoshu Hayami (the traditional Japanese painter) shown at the Yamatane Museum of Art.\n\nSMBC and Cedyna support the promotion of music culture by sponsoring classical music concerts." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6474220229512677, + "doc_id": "9c256ae14f33ea65272784e584cfc0fe1e90a5495821a4e4b62bd184b5025e27", + "edit_distance": 0.35918367346938773, + "f1_score": 0.9535864978902954, + "meteor": 0.7102739399772079, + "precision": 0.9576271186440678, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 26 - RESERVES\n\n## a) Share Option Reserve\n\nThe share option reserve records items recognised as expenses on valuation of employee and supplier share options and restricted share units.\n\n## b) Foreign Currency Translation Reserve\n\nThe foreign currency translation reserve records exchange differences arising on translation of the Parent Company.\n\n## NOTE 27 - CAPITAL AND OTHER EXPENDITURE COMMITMENTS\n\n## Capital commitments relating to tenements\n\nAs at 31 December 2014, all of the Company's exploration and evaluation and development and production assets are located in the United States of America ('US').\n\nThe mineral leases in the exploration prospects in the US have primary terms ranging from 3 years to 5 years and generally have no specific capital expenditure requirements. However, mineral leases that are not successfully drilled and included within a spacing unit for a producing well within the primary term will expire at the end of the primary term unless re-leased.\n\n- 91 -", + "recall": 0.9495798319327731, + "true_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 26 – RESERVES\n\n## a) ShareOption Reserve The share option reserve records items recognised as expenses on valuation of employee and supplier share\n\n## b) Foreign Currency Translation Reserve The foreign currency translation reserve records exchange differences arising on translation of the Parent\n\n## NOTE 27 – CAPITAL AND OTHER EXPENDITURE COMMITMENTS\n\nShareOption Reserve The share option reserve records items recognised as expenses on valuation of employee and supplier share options and restricted share units. \n\nForeign Currency Translation Reserve The foreign currency translation reserve records exchange differences arising on translation of the Parent Company.\n\nCapital commitments relating to tenements As at 31 December 2014, all of the Company’s exploration and evaluation and development and production assets are located in the United States of America (“US”). \n\nThe mineral leases in the exploration prospects in the US have primary terms ranging from 3 years to 5 years and generally have no specific capital expenditure requirements. However, mineral leases that are not successfully drilled and included within a spacing unit for a producing well within the primary term will expire at the end of the primary term unless re-leased.\n\n## Capital commitments relating to tenements As at 31 December 2014, all of the Company’s exploration and evaluation and development and production assets\n\n- 91 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7870681858774449, + "doc_id": "6776885f2267f56bf0c40d301e932d9711e9edb3b39f020899fdb539d8aee579", + "edit_distance": 0.1263537906137184, + "f1_score": 0.8497409326424871, + "meteor": 0.8904297190487608, + "precision": 0.845360824742268, + "pred_md": "Millions of yen\n\nSMFG\n\nIncome Analysis (Consolidated)\n\n## Overseas Operations\n\nNotes: 1. Overseas operations comprise the operations of the overseas branches of domestic consolidated banking subsidiaries and overseas consolidated subsidiaries.\n\n2. In principle, average balances are calculated by using daily balances. However, some consolidated subsidiaries use weekly, monthly or quarterly balances instead.\n\n3. 'Interest-earning assets' are shown after deduction of the average balance of noninterest-earning deposits (2011, ·103,935 million; 2010, ·156,583 million).\n\n## Total of Domestic and Overseas Operations\n\nNotes: 1. The figures above comprise totals for domestic and overseas operations after intersegment eliminations.\n\n- 2. In principle, average balances are calculated by using daily balances. However, some consolidated subsidiaries use weekly, monthly or quarterly balances instead.\n- 3. 'Interest-earning assets' are shown after deduction of the average balance of noninterest-earning deposits (2011, ·1,288,655 million; 2010, ·1,123,299 million).\n- 4. Income and expenses resulting from money held in trust are included in 'Other income' and 'Other expenses.' Therefore, 'Interest-earning assets' are shown after deduction of the average balance of money held in trust (2011, ·21,928 million; 2010, ·12,392 million). 'Interest-bearing liabilities' are shown after deduction of amounts equivalent to the average balance of money held in trust (2011, ·21,928 million; 2010, ·12,392 million) and corresponding interest (2011, ·16 million; 2010, ·20 million).\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n147", + "recall": 0.8541666666666666, + "true_md": "SMFG Income Analysis (Consolidated)\n\n## Overseas Operations\n\nNotes: 1. Overseas operations comprise the operations of the overseas branches of domestic consolidated banking subsidiaries and overseas consolidated subsidiaries.\n\n2. In principle, average balances are calculated by using daily balances. However, some consolidated subsidiaries use weekly, monthly or quarterly balances instead.\n\n3. “Interest-earning assets” are shown after deduction of the average balance of noninterest-earning deposits (2011, ¥103,935 million; 2010, ¥156,583 million).\n\n## Total of Domestic and Overseas Operations\n\nNotes: 1. The figures above comprise totals for domestic and overseas operations after intersegment eliminations.\n\n2. In principle, average balances are calculated by using daily balances. However, some consolidated subsidiaries use weekly, monthly or quarterly balances instead.\n\n3. “Interest-earning assets” are shown after deduction of the average balance of noninterest-earning deposits (2011, ¥1,288,655 million; 2010, ¥1,123,299 million).\n\n4. Income and expenses resulting from money held in trust are included in “Other income” and “Other expenses.” Therefore, “Interest-earning assets” are shown after deduction of the average balance of money held in trust (2011, ¥21,928 million; 2010, ¥12,392 million). “Interest-bearing liabilities” are shown after deduction of amounts equivalent to the average balance of money held in trust (2011, ¥21,928 million; 2010, ¥12,392 million) and corresponding interest (2011, ¥16 million; 2010, ¥20 million).\n\nSMFG 2011 147" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8708362359948351, + "doc_id": "c5b5a944cc7ffda0c256ccf7e13a67c0a6dc6e6c64d5f71b2480ae74ecb96b6d", + "edit_distance": 0.07368421052631578, + "f1_score": 0.9787234042553192, + "meteor": 0.9843369262771159, + "precision": 0.971830985915493, + "pred_md": "58\n\nDirectors' Report\n\n## Details of remuneration continued\n\n- 1 Consulting fees of $100,000 were paid or payable to Norwest Mining Consultants Ltd, of which Peter McAleer is an officer and director.\n- 2 Commenced employment February 2012.\n- 3 Non-monetary benefits relate to car parking, travel, life insurance and relocation allowance provided by the Company. Relocation and accommodation allowance is applicable to interstate recruitment of relevant personnel.\n- 4 Paid in 2012 but refers to the results of the 2011 financial year.\n\nwww.kingsgate.com.au", + "recall": 0.9857142857142858, + "true_md": "Directors’ Report 58\n\n## Details of remuneration continued\n\n1 Consulting fees of $100,000 were paid or payable to Norwest Mining Consultants Ltd, of which Peter McAleer is an officer and director.\n\n2 Commenced employment February 2012. \n\n3 Non-monetary benefits relate to car parking, travel, life insurance and relocation allowance provided by the Company. Relocation and accommodation allowance is applicable to interstate recruitment of relevant personnel.\n\n4 Paid in 2012 but refers to the results of the 2011 financial year.\n\nwww.kingsgate.com.au" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9483084352528186, + "doc_id": "49c441498255f287bea1306207af5a336f008ec509e7cc7b9727b905b2a53387", + "edit_distance": 0.10761154855643044, + "f1_score": 0.9695431472081217, + "meteor": 0.972390093624071, + "precision": 0.9744897959183674, + "pred_md": "These factors can also affect our objectives, strategies and intentions. Many of these factors are beyond our control or our current expectations. Should one or more of these risks, uncertainties or other factors materialize, our objectives, strategies or intentions change, or any other factors or assumptions underlying the forward-looking information prove incorrect, our actual results and our plans could vary significantly from what we currently foresee.\n\nAccordingly, we warn investors to exercise caution when considering statements containing forward-looking information and that it would be unreasonable to rely on such statements as creating legal rights regarding our future results or plans. We are under no obligation (and we expressly disclaim any such obligation) to update or alter any statements containing forward-looking information or the factors or assumptions underlying them, whether as a result of new information, future events or otherwise, except as required by law. All of the forward-looking information in this MD&A is qualified by the cautionary statements herein.\n\n## BEFORE MAKING AN INVESTMENT DECISION\n\nBefore making any investment decisions and for a detailed discussion of the risks, uncertainties and environment associated with our business, fully review 'Regulation in Our Industry' and 'Governance and Risk Management', in this MD&A, as well as our various other filings with Canadian and US securities regulators which can be found at sedar.com and sec.gov.\n\n## FOR MORE INFORMATION\n\nYou can find more information about us, including our Information Circular and Annual Information Form, on our website (rogers.com/ investors), on SEDAR (sedar.com) and on EDGAR (sec.gov), or you can e-mail us at investor.relations@rci.rogers.com. Information on or connected to these and any other websites referenced in this document is not part of this MD&A.\n\nYou can also go to rogers.com/investors for information about our governance practices, corporate social responsibility reporting, a glossary of communications and media industry terms, and additional information about our business.\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC.\n\n25\n\nMANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS", + "recall": 0.9646464646464646, + "true_md": "These factors can also affect our objectives, strategies and intentions. Many of these factors are beyond our control or our current expectations. Should one or more of these risks, uncertainties or other factors materialize, our objectives, strategies or intentions change, or any other factors or assumptions underlying the forward-looking information prove incorrect, our actual results and our plans could vary significantly from what we currently foresee.\n\nAccordingly, we warn investors to exercise caution when considering statements containing forward-looking information and that it would be unreasonable to rely on such statements as creating legal rights regarding our future results or plans. We are under no obligation (and we expressly disclaim any such obligation) to update or alter any statements containing forward-looking information or the factors or assumptions underlying them, whether as a result of new information, future events or otherwise, except as required by law. All of the forward-looking information in this MD&A is qualified by the cautionary statements herein.\n\nBefore making any investment decisions and for a detailed discussion of the risks, uncertainties and environment associated with our business, fully review “Regulation in Our Industry” and “Governance and Risk Management”, in this MD&A, as well as our various other filings with Canadian and US securities regulators which can be found at sedar.com and sec.gov.\n\nYou can find more information about us, including our Information Circular and Annual Information Form, on our website (rogers.com/ investors), on SEDAR (sedar.com) and on EDGAR (sec.gov), or you can e-mail us at investor.relations@rci.rogers.com. Information on or connected to these and any other websites referenced in this document is not part of this MD&A.\n\nYou can also go to rogers.com/investors for information about our governance practices, corporate social responsibility reporting, a glossary of communications and media industry terms, and additional information about our business.\n\n## FOR MORE INFORMATION\n\n## BEFORE MAKING AN INVESTMENT DECISION\n\nMANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AN D ANALYSIS\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 25" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8860294816416339, + "doc_id": "2239ffa88e1bd767d12dce472c96d1b4299ae27c3b53a3ef2948e3553705583b", + "edit_distance": 0.8269525267993875, + "f1_score": 0.9798165137614677, + "meteor": 0.9000185469181877, + "precision": 0.9816176470588235, + "pred_md": "MANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS\n\nVoice-over-cable telephony services are provided over a dedicated DOCSIS network. Our offerings ensure a high quality of service by including network redundancy as well as network and customer premise backup powering. Our cable telephony service includes a rich set of features, such as TV Call Display, three-way calling and Home & Away™ voicemail that allows customers to be notified of and listen to their voicemail over MMS or the Web. In addition, we offer a wireless alternative to a fixed-line service.\n\n## COMPETITION\n\nCable television competes:\n\n- GLYPH<129> increasingly with alternative, Canadian multi-channel Broadcasting Distribution Undertakings (BDUs), including Bell TV, Shaw Direct, satellite TV services, and Internet Protocol television\n- GLYPH<129> with over-the-air local and regional broadcast television signals received directly through antennas, and the illegal reception of US direct broadcast satellite services\n- GLYPH<129> with television shows and movies streaming over the Internet through providers like Netflix and Apple TV.\n\nCable Internet competes with other ISPs that offer residential and commercial dial-up and high-speed Internet access services. Rogers Hi-Speed Internet services compete directly with:\n\n- GLYPH<129> Bell's DSL Internet service in Ontario\n- GLYPH<129> Bell Aliant's DSL/fibre and FTTH Internet services in New Brunswick and Newfoundland\n- GLYPH<129> various resellers using wholesale telco DSL and cable Third Party Internet Access (TPIA) services in local markets.\n\nCable telephony competes with:\n\n- GLYPH<129> Bell's wireline phone service in Ontario\n- GLYPH<129> Bell Aliant's wireline phone service in New Brunswick and Newfoundland and Labrador\n- GLYPH<129> ILEC local loop resellers (such as Primus) as well as VoIP service providers (such as Vonage and Skype) riding over the Internet access services of ISPs\n- GLYPH<129> Wireless home phone products.\n\n## ACQUISITION\n\nIn January 2013, we announced a multi-part strategic transaction with Shaw to acquire Mountain Cable (Shaw's cable system in Hamilton, Ontario), and to secure an option to purchase Shaw's Advanced Wireless Services spectrum holdings in 2014. As part of the agreement, we sold our one-third equity interest in the TVtropolis specialty TV channel to Shaw. Mountain Cable provides cable television, Internet and telephony services to an area covering approximately 59,000 homes in and around Hamilton, Ontario. On May 1, 2013, we closed on a portion of the multi-part agreement with Shaw to buy 100 % of Mountain Cable, and paid $398 million, according to the terms of the agreement.\n\n42\n\nROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n## CABLE FINANCIAL RESULTS\n\n- 1 Results of operations include Mountain Cable's operating results as of May 1, 2013 (the date of acquisition).\n\n## CABLE SUBSCRIBER RESULTS 1\n\n- 1 Subscriber count is a key performance indicator. See 'Key Performance Indicators'.\n- 2 On May 1, 2013, we acquired 40,000 television subscribers, 38,000 digital cable households, 34,000 cable high-speed Internet subscribers and 37,000 cable telephony lines from our acquisition of Mountain Cable. These subscribers are not included in net additions, but do appear in the ending total balance for December 31, 2013. The acquisition also increased homes passed by 59,000.\n- 3 Includes television, Internet and phone subscribers.", + "recall": 0.978021978021978, + "true_md": "MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS\n\nVoice-over-cable telephony services are provided over a dedicated DOCSIS network. Our offerings ensure a high quality of service by including network redundancy as well as network and customer premise backup powering. Our cable telephony service includes a rich set of features, such as TV Call Display, three-way calling and Home & Away™ voicemail that allows customers to be notified of and listen to their voicemail over MMS or the Web. In addition, we offer a wireless alternative to a fixed-line service.\n\nCable television competes:\n\nCable Internet competes with other ISPs that offer residential and commercial dial-up and high-speed Internet access services. Rogers Hi-Speed Internet services compete directly with:\n\nCable telephony competes with:\n\nIn January 2013, we announced a multi-part strategic transaction with Shaw to acquire Mountain Cable (Shaw’s cable system in Hamilton, Ontario), and to secure an option to purchase Shaw’s Advanced Wireless Services spectrum holdings in 2014. As part of the agreement, we sold our one-third equity interest in the TVtropolis specialty TV channel to Shaw. Mountain Cable provides cable television, Internet and telephony services to an area covering approximately 59,000 homes in and around Hamilton, Ontario. On May 1, 2013, we closed on a portion of the multi-part agreement with Shaw to buy 100 % of Mountain Cable, and paid $398 million, according to the terms of the agreement.\n\n1 Subscriber count is a key performance indicator. See “Key Performance Indicators”.\n\n2 On May 1, 2013, we acquired 40,000 television subscribers, 38,000 digital cable households, 34,000 cable high-speed Internet subscribers and 37,000 cable telephony lines from our acquisition of Mountain Cable. These subscribers are not included in net additions, but do appear in the ending total balance for December 31, 2013. The acquisition also increased homes passed by 59,000.\n\n3 Includes television, Internet and phone subscribers.\n\n## CABLE FINANCIAL RESULTS\n\n## COMPETITION\n\nGLYPH<129> increasingly with alternative, Canadian multi-channel Broadcasting Distribution Undertakings (BDUs), including Bell TV, Shaw Direct, satellite TV services, and Internet Protocol television\n\nGLYPH<129> with over-the-air local and regional broadcast television signals received directly through antennas, and the illegal reception of US direct broadcast satellite services\n\nGLYPH<129> with television shows and movies streaming over the Internet through providers like Netflix and Apple TV.\n\n1 Results of operations include Mountain Cable’s operating results as of May 1, 2013 (the date of acquisition).\n\n## CABLE SUBSCRIBER RESULTS\n\nGLYPH<129> Bell’s DSL Internet service in Ontario\n\nGLYPH<129> Bell Aliant’s DSL/fibre and FTTH Internet services in New Brunswick and Newfoundland\n\nGLYPH<129> various resellers using wholesale telco DSL and cable Third Party Internet Access (TPIA) services in local markets.\n\nGLYPH<129> Bell’s wireline phone service in Ontario\n\nGLYPH<129> Bell Aliant’s wireline phone service in New Brunswick and Newfoundland and Labrador\n\nGLYPH<129> ILEC local loop resellers (such as Primus) as well as VoIP service providers (such as Vonage and Skype) riding over the Internet access services of ISPs\n\nGLYPH<129> Wireless home phone products.\n\n## ACQUISITION\n\n42 ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9074783334988263, + "doc_id": "f23f3ab2bc4525c4f8d138ee64aabe7d10dbf1bfe57628116c610cfa29835ebd", + "edit_distance": 0.06552006552006552, + "f1_score": 0.9646464646464645, + "meteor": 0.9376110821573259, + "precision": 0.9646464646464646, + "pred_md": "## Management's Discussion and Analysis\n\nDollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\nMarketing and leasing initiatives have been a priority at Killam, including increasing the number of leasing agents, investment in marketing promotions (including a successful radio campaign) and expanding incentive offerings at specific properties. Management was pleased with the improvements realized during the second half of the year. The marketing and leasing focus will continue in 2014 and will also include programs targeting tenant retention. Killam's expanded leasing process and well-maintained, quality asset base has enabled Killam to outperform CMHC's reported averages in Killam's core markets in Atlantic Canada. Killam's increased investment in Ontario has also been beneficial in 2013, with improvement in occupancy during each quarter of the year.\n\nHalifax, representing 45% of Killam's apartment NOI, ended the year with 96.0% occupancy compared to 96.6% at year-end 2012. CMHC reported vacancy of 3.2% in Halifax in October for its Fall 2013 Rental Market Report, compared to Killam's vacancy of 2.7% for October. Competition has increased in Halifax due to new supply with rental construction levels above the ten-year annual average of 760 units per year, for the last three years, including apartment starts of 1,565, 1,437 and 1,258 in 2011, 2012 and 2013, respectively (as reported by CMHC). CMHC expects new starts to stay above the 10-year average into 2014 and throughout 2015 and 2016. Offsetting new supply is positive net-migration leading to population growth and increasing demand for rental units from an aging population that is transitioning away from home ownership and into the rental market. The population of Halifax grew by 4.7% (18,000 people) from 2006 to 2011, as reported by Statistics Canada. Despite increased rental supply in the city, Killam continues to achieve rental rate growth, with average rents for same store properties located in Halifax up 1.8% over the last year. Same store revenue was up 1.7% year-over-year. The improved top-line growth in Halifax reflects the marketing and leasing changes and the quality and central locations of Killam's apartment portfolio.\n\nLooking to 2014 and beyond, population growth, fuelled in part by the $25 billion, 25-year, Irving Shipbuilding Contract, is predicted to increase demand for rental product and absorb the new supply. In addition, Nova Scotia's offshore oil industry has potential for growth with BP and Shell both launching seismic surveys off the province's coast.\n\nNew Brunswick's rental market also experienced softness over the last year. As CMHC reported in its Fall 2013 Rental Market Report, the overall vacancy for the province's urban centres was 8.9% for october 2013, 200 bps higher than october 2012. cmHc reported Fredericton as the strongest of the larger centres in new Brunswick, with 6.2% vacancy (compared to 4.0% for october 2012), while the weakest market was saint John, with CMHC reporting 11.4% vacancy in Fall 2013 compared to 8.7% for 2012. CMHC reported Moncton with 9.1% vacancy for October 2013, compared to 6.7% a year earlier, with new supply to the market contributing to the vacancy rise.\n\nDespite the more challenging rental market in 2013, Killam achieved occupancy gains in all three new Brunswick markets and achieved higher occupancy rates than those reported by CMHC in all New Brunswick markets . Killam has successfully responded to the increased competition in New Brunswick by expanding marketing programs and rental incentives. These incentives include offering one-month free rent on some new leases, allowing for early move-ins or including electricity in the rental rates where this is becoming the norm (most notably in Moncton). Enhanced training of leasing representatives in each of the New Brunswick cities has improved the leasing process for prospective tenants and contributed to increased leasing activity in the summer months and even stronger occupancy in Q4. As noted above, Killam's New Brunswick occupancy levels were well above the market averages, with Fredericton ending the year with 96.3% occupancy, saint John ending the year at 94.4% and moncton at 97.1%.\n\nSt. John's, NL, remains a strong market within the Company's apartment portfolio with occupancy between 97.0% and 99.0% during the year. Demand for rental units are expected to remain high in St. John's as strong economic growth continues to attract population growth from other areas of the province and high home prices deter many from home ownership. The St. John's market leads Killam's portfolio for same store rental rate growth with a 3.5% increase in average rates in 2013.\n\nKillam experienced a rebound in occupancy levels in Charlottetown during 2013 after a sharp decline in the later part of 2012 due to new supply and a slowdown in the number of immigrants coming to the province as part of Pei's Provincial nominee Program. this has proven to be a shorter-term challenge as Killam improved occupancy in Charlottetown by 400 bps at December 31, 2013, compared to December 31, 2012, ending the year at 95.6% occupancy.\n\nOntario now represents approximately 12% of Killam's apartment NOI and equity earnings on a go-forward basis. Management was pleased to report strong improvement in occupancy levels in its Ontario portfolio in 2013. The most notable improvement was in Ottawa. Killam's repositioning of a portfolio of four buildings acquired in September 2012 is complete and the Company is now realizing positive return on the investment with the portfolio's occupancy at 97.5% at year-end, up 1,100 bps from 86.5% a year earlier. Killam's apartment occupancy in Ontario was 98.6% at December 31, 2013, compared to 93.1% at December 31, 2012. Average rent for the Ontario portfolio decreased 5.8% as at December 31, 2013, when compared to 2012 due to the addition of lower priced units in the past twelve months. Rents for same store properties were flat in the year as the focus was on occupancy improvement. Overall, Ontario's same store rental revenue was up 2.3%.\n\nLooking forward to 2014, Management expects to realize occupancy gains in the year compared to 2013 overall and to continue to outperform CMHC averages in its core markets. However, occupancy levels are expected to remain below the levels experienced in 2010 and 2011 due to the increased competitiveness in certain markets in Atlantic Canada, including Halifax.\n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013\n\n37", + "recall": 0.9646464646464646, + "true_md": "Management’s Discussion and Analysis Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\nManagement’s Discussion and Analysis Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\nMarketing and leasing initiatives have been a priority at Killam, including increasing the number of leasing agents, investment in marketing promotions (including a successful radio campaign) and expanding incentive offerings at specific properties. Management was pleased with the improvements realized during the second half of the year. The marketing and leasing focus will continue in 2014 and will also include programs targeting tenant retention. Killam’s expanded leasing process and well‑maintained, quality asset base has enabled Killam to outperform CMHC’s reported averages in Killam’s core markets in Atlantic Canada. Killam’s increased investment in Ontario has also been beneficial in 2013, with improvement in occupancy during each quarter of the year.\n\nHalifax, representing 45% of Killam’s apartment NOI, ended the year with 96.0% occupancy compared to 96.6% at year‑end 2012. CMHC reported vacancy of 3.2% in Halifax in October for its Fall 2013 Rental Market Report, compared to Killam’s vacancy of 2.7% for October. Competition has increased in Halifax due to new supply with rental construction levels above the ten‑year annual average of 760 units per year, for the last three years, including apartment starts of 1,565, 1,437 and 1,258 in 2011, 2012 and 2013, respectively (as reported by CMHC). CMHC expects new starts to stay above the 10‑year average into 2014 and throughout 2015 and 2016. Offsetting new supply is positive net‑migration leading to population growth and increasing demand for rental units from an aging population that is transitioning away from home ownership and into the rental market. The population of Halifax grew by 4.7% (18,000 people) from 2006 to 2011, as reported by Statistics Canada. Despite increased rental supply in the city, Killam continues to achieve rental rate growth, with average rents for same store properties located in Halifax up 1.8% over the last year. Same store revenue was up 1.7% year‑over‑year. The improved top‑line growth in Halifax reflects the marketing and leasing changes and the quality and central locations of Killam’s apartment portfolio.\n\nLooking to 2014 and beyond, population growth, fuelled in part by the $25 billion, 25‑year, Irving Shipbuilding Contract, is predicted to increase demand for rental product and absorb the new supply. In addition, Nova Scotia’s offshore oil industry has potential for growth with BP and Shell both launching seismic surveys off the province’s coast.\n\nNew Brunswick’s rental market also experienced softness over the last year. As CMHC reported in its Fall 2013 Rental Market Report, the overall vacancy for the province’s urban centres was 8.9% for october 2013, 200 bps higher than october 2012. cmHc reported Fredericton as the strongest of the larger centres in new Brunswick, with 6.2% vacancy (compared to 4.0% for october 2012), while the weakest market was saint John, with CMHC reporting 11.4% vacancy in Fall 2013 compared to 8.7% for 2012. CMHC reported Moncton with 9.1% vacancy for October 2013, compared to 6.7% a year earlier, with new supply to the market contributing to the vacancy rise.\n\nDespite the more challenging rental market in 2013, Killam achieved occupancy gains in all three new Brunswick markets and achieved higher occupancy rates than those reported by CMHC in all New Brunswick markets . Killam has successfully responded to the increased competition in New Brunswick by expanding marketing programs and rental incentives. These incentives include offering one‑month free rent on some new leases, allowing for early move‑ins or including electricity in the rental rates where this is becoming the norm (most notably in Moncton). Enhanced training of leasing representatives in each of the New Brunswick cities has improved the leasing process for prospective tenants and contributed to increased leasing activity in the summer months and even stronger occupancy in Q4. As noted above, Killam’s New Brunswick occupancy levels were well above the market averages, with Fredericton ending the year with 96.3% occupancy, saint John ending the year at 94.4% and moncton at 97.1%.\n\nSt. John’s, NL, remains a strong market within the Company’s apartment portfolio with occupancy between 97.0% and 99.0% during the year. Demand for rental units are expected to remain high in St. John’s as strong economic growth continues to attract population growth from other areas of the province and high home prices deter many from home ownership. The St. John’s market leads Killam’s portfolio for same store rental rate growth with a 3.5% increase in average rates in 2013.\n\nKillam experienced a rebound in occupancy levels in Charlottetown during 2013 after a sharp decline in the later part of 2012 due to new supply and a slowdown in the number of immigrants coming to the province as part of Pei’s Provincial nominee Program. this has proven to be a shorter‑term challenge as Killam improved occupancy in Charlottetown by 400 bps at December 31, 2013, compared to December 31, 2012, ending the year at 95.6% occupancy.\n\nOntario now represents approximately 12% of Killam’s apartment NOI and equity earnings on a go‑forward basis. Management was pleased to report strong improvement in occupancy levels in its Ontario portfolio in 2013. The most notable improvement was in Ottawa. Killam’s repositioning of a portfolio of four buildings acquired in September 2012 is complete and the Company is now realizing positive return on the investment with the portfolio’s occupancy at 97.5% at year‑end, up 1,100 bps from 86.5% a year earlier. Killam’s apartment occupancy in Ontario was 98.6% at December 31, 2013, compared to 93.1% at December 31, 2012. Average rent for the Ontario portfolio decreased 5.8% as at December 31, 2013, when compared to 2012 due to the addition of lower priced units in the past twelve months. Rents for same store properties were flat in the year as the focus was on occupancy improvement. Overall, Ontario’s same store rental revenue was up 2.3%.\n\nLooking forward to 2014, Management expects to realize occupancy gains in the year compared to 2013 overall and to continue to outperform CMHC averages in its core markets. However, occupancy levels are expected to remain below the levels experienced in 2010 and 2011 due to the increased competitiveness in certain markets in Atlantic Canada, including Halifax. \n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013 37" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7852950219273078, + "doc_id": "61a24f100e33da398a725ebedaec7dccea208ca9fc5b0fdeb2d605597125473c", + "edit_distance": 0.24427480916030533, + "f1_score": 0.9115646258503401, + "meteor": 0.8618169648458865, + "precision": 0.9054054054054054, + "pred_md": "Capital Ratio Information\n\n## 4. T erm-End Balances of General Reserve for Possible Loan Losses, Specific Reserve for Possible Loan Losses and Loan Loss\n\n## Reserve for Specific Overseas Countries\n\n(1) By Geographic Region\n\nNotes: 1. 'Specific reserve for possible loan losses' includes partial direct write-offs (direct reductions).\n\n2. 'Domestic operations' comprises the operations of SMFG, its domestic consolidated banking subsidiaries (excluding overseas branches) and other domestic consolidated subsidiaries. 'Overseas operations' comprises the operations of the overseas branches of domestic consolidated banking subsidiaries and overseas consolidated subsidiaries, and the term-end balances are calculated based on the obligor's domicile country.\n\n## (2) By Industry\n\nNotes: 1. 'Specific reserve for possible loan losses' includes partial direct write-offs (direct reductions).\n\n2. 'Domestic operations' comprises the operations of SMFG, its domestic consolidated banking subsidiaries (excluding overseas branches) and other domestic consolidated subsidiaries. 'Overseas operations' comprises the operations of the overseas branches of domestic consolidated banking subsidiaries and overseas consolidated subsidiaries.\n\n## 5. Loan Write-Offs by Industry\n\nNote: 'Domestic operations' comprises the operations of SMFG, its domestic consolidated banking subsidiaries (excluding overseas branches) and other domestic consolidated subsidiaries. 'Overseas operations' comprises the operations of the overseas branches of domestic consolidated banking subsidiaries and overseas consolidated subsidiaries.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\nSMFG\n\n199", + "recall": 0.9178082191780822, + "true_md": "Capital Ratio Information\n\nSMFG\n\n## 4. Term-End Balances of General Reserve for Possible Loan Losses, Specific Reserve for Possible Loan Losses and Loan Loss Reserve for Specific Overseas Countries\n\n## (1) By Geographic Region\n\n## (2) By Industry\n\n## 5. Loan Write-Offs by Industry\n\nNotes: 1. “Specific reserve for possible loan losses” includes partial direct write-offs (direct reductions).\n\n2. “Domestic operations” comprises the operations of SMFG, its domestic consolidated banking subsidiaries (excluding overseas branches) and other domestic consolidated subsidiaries. “Overseas operations” comprises the operations of the overseas branches of domestic consolidated banking subsidiaries and overseas consolidated subsidiaries, and the term-end balances are calculated based on the obligor’s domicile country.\n\nNotes: 1. “Specific reserve for possible loan losses” includes partial direct write-offs (direct reductions).\n\n2. “Domestic operations” comprises the operations of SMFG, its domestic consolidated banking subsidiaries (excluding overseas branches) and other domestic consolidated subsidiaries. “Overseas operations” comprises the operations of the overseas branches of domestic consolidated banking subsidiaries and overseas consolidated subsidiaries.\n\nNote: “Domestic operations” comprises the operations of SMFG, its domestic consolidated banking subsidiaries (excluding overseas branches) and other domestic consolidated subsidiaries. “Overseas operations” comprises the operations of the overseas branches of domestic consolidated banking subsidiaries and overseas consolidated subsidiaries.\n\nSMFG 2011 199" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8296066547537364, + "doc_id": "d0bf118449b6415e5030fe6ef73584d1334f710eb2a70a8f78716dd954a847da", + "edit_distance": 0.2857142857142857, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9985422740524781, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "SMBC\n\nRatios (Nonconsolidated)\n\n## Securities-Deposit Ratio\n\nNote: Deposits include negotiable certificates of deposit.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n174", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "SMBC\n\nRatios (Nonconsolidated)\n\n## Securities-Deposit Ratio\n\nSMFG 2011 174\n\nNote: Deposits include negotiable certificates of deposit." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.969691199271892, + "doc_id": "38ab7a1659bec80cf7b54b5ef036429e2225c81b35f874661a4db1a5709bd94f", + "edit_distance": 0.32963374028856823, + "f1_score": 0.9935275080906149, + "meteor": 0.9673800293922462, + "precision": 0.9967532467532467, + "pred_md": "We incur costs related to subscriber acquisition and retention.\n\n- GLYPH<129> We capitalize cable installation costs that relate to the cable network and depreciate them over the expected life of the cable customer.\n- GLYPH<129> We defer direct incremental installation costs related to reconnect Cable customers and amortize them as the related reconnect installation revenues are recorded.\n- GLYPH<129> We expense all other costs as incurred.\n\nWe calculate gains and losses on the disposal of property, plant and equipment by comparing the proceeds from the disposal with the item's carrying amount, and recognize the gain or loss in other income in the consolidated statements of income.\n\n## Depreciation\n\nWe depreciate property, plant and equipment over its estimated useful life by charging depreciation expense to the consolidated statements of income as follows:\n\nComponents of an item of property, plant and equipment may have different useful lives. We make significant estimates when determining depreciation methods, depreciation rates and asset useful lives, which requires taking into account industry trends and company-specific factors. We review these decisions at least once each year or when circumstances change. We will change our depreciation methods, depreciation rates or asset useful lives if they are different from our previous estimates. We recognize the effect of these changes in net income prospectively.\n\nWe capitalize development expenditures if they meet the criteria for recognition as an asset, and amortize them over their expected useful lives once they are available for use.\n\nWe expense research expenditures and maintenance and training costs as incurred.\n\nSee note 12 for more information about our property, plant and equipment.\n\n## Acquired Program Rights\n\nProgram rights are contractual rights we acquire from third parties to broadcast television programs. We record them at cost less accumulated amortization and accumulated impairment losses. We capitalize program rights and the related liabilities on the consolidated statements of financial position when the licence period begins and the program is available for use, and amortize them to other external purchases in operating costs in the consolidated statements of income over the expected exhibition period, which ranges from one to five years. If programs are not scheduled, we consider the related program rights to be impaired and write them off. Otherwise, we test them for\n\nimpairment as intangible assets with finite useful lives. Program rights for multi-year sports programming arrangements are expensed when the games are aired.\n\n## Goodwill\n\nWe record goodwill arising from business combinations when the fair value of the separately identifiable assets and liabilities we acquired is lower than the consideration we paid (including the recognized amount of the non-controlling interest, if any). If the fair value of the consideration transferred is lower than the separately identified assets and liabilities, we immediately record the difference as a gain in net income.\n\nSee note 7 and note 13 for more information about our goodwill.\n\n## Intangible Assets\n\nWe record intangible assets we acquire in business combinations at fair value, and test for impairment as required (see Impairment, below).\n\nWe do not amortize intangible assets with indefinite lives (spectrum and broadcast licences) because there is no foreseeable limit to the period that these assets are expected to generate net cash inflows for us. We use judgment to determine the indefinite life of these assets, analyzing all relevant factors, including the expected usage of the asset, the typical life cycle of the asset and anticipated changes in the market demand for the products and services that the asset helps generate. After review of the competitive, legal, regulatory and other factors, it is our view that these factors do not limit the useful lives of our spectrum and broadcast licences.\n\nWe amortize intangible assets with finite useful lives on a straight-line basis over their estimated useful lives as noted in the table below. We review their useful lives, residual values and the amortization methods at least once a year.\n\nSee note 7 and note 13 for more information about our intangible assets.\n\n## Impairment\n\n## Financial Assets\n\nWe consider a financial asset to be impaired if there is objective evidence that one or more events have had a negative effect on its estimated future cash flows, and the effect can be reliably estimated. Financial assets that are significant in value are tested for impairment individually. All other financial assets are assessed collectively based on the nature of each asset.\n\nWe measure impairment for financial assets as follows:\n\n- GLYPH<129> loans and receivables we measure the excess of the carrying amount of the asset over the present value of future cash flows we expect to derive from it, if any. The difference is allocated to an allowance for doubtful accounts, and recognized as a loss in net income.\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC.\n\n99\n\nNOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS", + "recall": 0.9903225806451613, + "true_md": "We incur costs related to subscriber acquisition and retention.\n\n- GLYPH<129> We capitalize cable installation costs that relate to the cable network and depreciate them over the expected life of the cable customer.\n\n- GLYPH<129> We defer direct incremental installation costs related to reconnect Cable customers and amortize them as the related reconnect installation revenues are recorded.\n\n- GLYPH<129> We expense all other costs as incurred.\n\nWe calculate gains and losses on the disposal of property, plant and equipment by comparing the proceeds from the disposal with the item’s carrying amount, and recognize the gain or loss in other income in the consolidated statements of income.\n\nWe depreciate property, plant and equipment over its estimated useful life by charging depreciation expense to the consolidated statements of income as follows:\n\nComponents of an item of property, plant and equipment may have different useful lives. We make significant estimates when determining depreciation methods, depreciation rates and asset useful lives, which requires taking into account industry trends and company-specific factors. We review these decisions at least once each year or when circumstances change. We will change our depreciation methods, depreciation rates or asset useful lives if they are different from our previous estimates. We recognize the effect of these changes in net income prospectively.\n\nWe capitalize development expenditures if they meet the criteria for recognition as an asset, and amortize them over their expected useful lives once they are available for use.\n\nWe expense research expenditures and maintenance and training costs as incurred.\n\nSee note 12 for more information about our property, plant and equipment.\n\nProgram rights are contractual rights we acquire from third parties to broadcast television programs. We record them at cost less accumulated amortization and accumulated impairment losses. We capitalize program rights and the related liabilities on the consolidated statements of financial position when the licence period begins and the program is available for use, and amortize them to other external purchases in operating costs in the consolidated statements of income over the expected exhibition period, which ranges from one to five years. If programs are not scheduled, we consider the related program rights to be impaired and write them off. Otherwise, we test them for\n\nWe consider a financial asset to be impaired if there is objective evidence that one or more events have had a negative effect on its estimated future cash flows, and the effect can be reliably estimated. Financial assets that are significant in value are tested for impairment individually. All other financial assets are assessed collectively based on the nature of each asset.\n\nSee note 7 and note 13 for more information about our intangible assets.\n\nWe amortize intangible assets with finite useful lives on a straight-line basis over their estimated useful lives as noted in the table below. We review their useful lives, residual values and the amortization methods at least once a year.\n\nWe do not amortize intangible assets with indefinite lives (spectrum and broadcast licences) because there is no foreseeable limit to the period that these assets are expected to generate net cash inflows for us. We use judgment to determine the indefinite life of these assets, analyzing all relevant factors, including the expected usage of the asset, the typical life cycle of the asset and anticipated changes in the market demand for the products and services that the asset helps generate. After review of the competitive, legal, regulatory and other factors, it is our view that these factors do not limit the useful lives of our spectrum and broadcast licences.\n\nWe record intangible assets we acquire in business combinations at fair value, and test for impairment as required (see Impairment, below).\n\nSee note 7 and note 13 for more information about our goodwill.\n\nWe record goodwill arising from business combinations when the fair value of the separately identifiable assets and liabilities we acquired is lower than the consideration we paid (including the recognized amount of the non-controlling interest, if any). If the fair value of the consideration transferred is lower than the separately identified assets and liabilities, we immediately record the difference as a gain in net income.\n\nimpairment as intangible assets with finite useful lives. Program rights for multi-year sports programming arrangements are expensed when the games are aired.\n\n## Depreciation\n\n## Acquired Program Rights\n\n## Financial Assets\n\n## Impairment\n\n## Intangible Assets\n\n## Goodwill\n\n- GLYPH<129> loans and receivables – we measure the excess of the carrying amount of the asset over the present value of future cash flows we expect to derive from it, if any. The difference is allocated to an allowance for doubtful accounts, and recognized as a loss in net income.\n\nWe measure impairment for financial assets as follows:\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 99\n\nNOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8613773179970748, + "doc_id": "0c854c8fafe1f8a34f74e007ea08a6b7e14de5a3455cf79b83df4936545faa8d", + "edit_distance": 0.11811023622047244, + "f1_score": 0.9821428571428572, + "meteor": 0.8913359951085985, + "precision": 0.990990990990991, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 6 - GAIN ON SALE OF NON-CURRENT ASSETS continued\n\n## Disposals in 2013\n\nIn the fourth quarter of 2013, the Company sold all of its interests in the Phoenix prospect, located in the Williston Basin, for gross proceeds of $39.8 million. It was determined that approximately $26.0 million of the Company's carrying costs related to its Phoenix development and production properties at the time of the disposal. The sale resulted in a pre-tax gain of $8.2 million, which is included in the gain on sale of non-current assets in the consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income for the year ended 31 December 2013. During 2014, the Company finalized adjustments to the purchase price for the Phoenix sale, which resulted in a net reduction of $0.9 million, which is included in the gain on sale of non-current assets in the consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income for the year ended 31 December 2014.\n\nThe Company deferred majority of the taxable gain on the sale of the Phoenix development by acquiring qualified replacement properties or utilizing IDCs from its development program.\n\n## NOTE 7 - INCOME TAX EXPENSE\n\n- 76 -", + "recall": 0.9734513274336283, + "true_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 6 – GAIN ON SALE OF NON-CURRENT ASSETS continued\n\n## Disposals in 2013 In the fourth quarter of 2013, the Company sold all of its interests in the Phoenix prospect, located in the Williston\n\nDisposals in 2013 In the fourth quarter of 2013, the Company sold all of its interests in the Phoenix prospect, located in the Williston Basin, for gross proceeds of $39.8 million. It was determined that approximately $26.0 million of the Company’s carrying costs related to its Phoenix development and production properties at the time of the disposal. The sale resulted in a pre-tax gain of $8.2 million, which is included in the gain on sale of non-current assets in the consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income for the year ended 31 December 2013. During 2014, the Company finalized adjustments to the purchase price for the Phoenix sale, which resulted in a net reduction of $0.9 million, which is included in the gain on sale of non-current assets in the consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income for the year ended 31 December 2014. \n\nThe Company deferred majority of the taxable gain on the sale of the Phoenix development by acquiring qualified replacement properties or utilizing IDCs from its development program.\n\n## NOTE 7 – INCOME TAX EXPENSE\n\n- 76 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8801117367933934, + "doc_id": "842f73a5774fe00810163fddad3713e7305e5be8a97612208faa2ed48b182b52", + "edit_distance": 0.1, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9883326549993218, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## 2010: A YEAR OF TRANSITION AND ACHIEVEMENT", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "# 2010: A YEAR OF TRANSITION AND ACHIEVEMENT" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9355528557372594, + "doc_id": "a65834205126627c8725c6b243d0c885878cda696dcb8097b9abd5833a8782b3", + "edit_distance": 0.13409961685823754, + "f1_score": 0.9606299212598426, + "meteor": 0.9777967404529062, + "precision": 0.9621451104100947, + "pred_md": "## Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nDollar amounts are in thousands of canadian dollars (except share and per share amounts)\n\n## 2. Significant Accounting Policies (continued)\n\n## (i) Completed investment property\n\nInvestment properties are measured initially at cost, including transaction costs. Transaction costs include deed transfer taxes and various professional fees. Subsequent to initial recognition, investment properties are recorded at fair value. Fair value is determined based on a combination of internal and external processes and valuation techniques. Gains and losses arising from changes in fair values are included in the income statement in the year in which they arise.\n\nInvestment property is derecognized when it has been disposed of or permanently withdrawn from use and no future economic benefit is expected. Any gains or losses on the retirement or disposal of investment property are recognized in the Statements of Income and Comprehensive Income in the year of retirement or disposal.\n\nTransfers are made to investment property when, and only when, there is a change in use, evidenced by the commencement of operating leases. transfers are made from investment property when, and only when, there is a change in use, evidenced by commencement of development.\n\n## (ii) Investment property under construction ('IPUC')\n\nThe cost of development properties includes direct development costs, realty taxes and borrowing costs directly attributable to the development. Under the requirements of International Accounting Standard 40 - Investment Property ('IAS 40'), IPUC is measured at fair value at each reporting date, with the recognition of gains or losses in the income statement. If the fair value of IPUC is not reliably determinable, but the Company expects the fair value of the property to be reliably determinable when construction is complete, it measures that investment property under construction at cost until either its fair value becomes reliably determinable or construction is completed (whichever is earlier).\n\n## (iii) Borrowing costs related to IPUC\n\nAlthough IPUC is measured at fair value, Killam's policy is to present its Statements of Income and Comprehensive Income as if borrowing costs related to the construction are capitalized. Borrowing costs directly attributable to the acquisition or construction of an asset that necessarily takes a substantial period of time to get ready for its intended use or sale are recorded as part of the cost of the respective assets. The interest is calculated using the Company's weighted average cost of borrowings after adjusting for borrowings associated with specific developments. Where borrowings are associated with specific developments, the amount is the gross interest incurred on those borrowings less any investment income arising on their temporary investment. interest is capitalized from the commencement of the development work until the date of substantial completion. The capitalization of borrowing costs is suspended if there are prolonged periods when development activity is interrupted. Interest is also capitalized on the purchase cost of a site or property acquired specifically for redevelopment but only where activities necessary to prepare the asset for redevelopment are in progress. The Company considers substantial completion to have occurred when the property is capable of operating in the manner intended by management.\n\n## (G) Property and Equipment\n\nProperty and equipment are stated at historical cost less accumulated depreciation and are mainly comprised of head office buildings, leasehold improvements and IT systems. The estimated useful lives, residual values and depreciation method are reviewed at each yearend, with the effect of any changes in estimate accounted for prospectively. These items are amortized on a straight-line basis over their estimated useful lives ranging as follows:\n\n## (H) Inventory\n\ninventory represents manufactured homes available for sale. the manufactured homes are valued at the lower of cost (purchase price plus delivery and setup costs) and net realizable value. Net realizable value is the estimated selling price in the ordinary course of business based on market prices at the reporting date less costs to complete and the estimated costs of sale.\n\n## (I) Cash\n\nCash is comprised of bank balances and interest-earning bank accounts.\n\n## (J) Share-Based Compensation\n\nThe Company issues share-based awards to certain employees and non-employee directors whereby employees render services as consideration for equity instruments (equity-settled transactions).\n\n72\n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013", + "recall": 0.9591194968553459, + "true_md": "Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except share and per share amounts)\n\n## 2. Significant Accounting Policies (continued)\n\n## (i) Completed investment property\n\n## (ii) Investment property under construction (“IPUC”)\n\nInvestment properties are measured initially at cost, including transaction costs. Transaction costs include deed transfer taxes and various professional fees. Subsequent to initial recognition, investment properties are recorded at fair value. Fair value is determined based on a combination of internal and external processes and valuation techniques. Gains and losses arising from changes in fair values are included in the income statement in the year in which they arise.\n\nInvestment property is derecognized when it has been disposed of or permanently withdrawn from use and no future economic benefit is expected. Any gains or losses on the retirement or disposal of investment property are recognized in the Statements of Income and Comprehensive Income in the year of retirement or disposal.\n\nTransfers are made to investment property when, and only when, there is a change in use, evidenced by the commencement of operating leases. transfers are made from investment property when, and only when, there is a change in use, evidenced by commencement of development.\n\nThe cost of development properties includes direct development costs, realty taxes and borrowing costs directly attributable to the development. Under the requirements of International Accounting Standard 40 ‑ Investment Property (“IAS 40”), IPUC is measured at fair value at each reporting date, with the recognition of gains or losses in the income statement. If the fair value of IPUC is not reliably determinable, but the Company expects the fair value of the property to be reliably determinable when construction is complete, it measures that investment property under construction at cost until either its fair value becomes reliably determinable or construction is completed (whichever is earlier).\n\nAlthough IPUC is measured at fair value, Killam’s policy is to present its Statements of Income and Comprehensive Income as if borrowing costs related to the construction are capitalized. Borrowing costs directly attributable to the acquisition or construction of an asset that necessarily takes a substantial period of time to get ready for its intended use or sale are recorded as part of the cost of the respective assets. The interest is calculated using the Company’s weighted average cost of borrowings after adjusting for borrowings associated with specific developments. Where borrowings are associated with specific developments, the amount is the gross interest incurred on those borrowings less any investment income arising on their temporary investment. interest is capitalized from the commencement of the development work until the date of substantial completion. The capitalization of borrowing costs is suspended if there are prolonged periods when development activity is interrupted. Interest is also capitalized on the purchase cost of a site or property acquired specifically for redevelopment but only where activities necessary to prepare the asset for redevelopment are in progress. The Company considers substantial completion to have occurred when the property is capable of operating in the manner intended by management.\n\nProperty and equipment are stated at historical cost less accumulated depreciation and are mainly comprised of head office buildings, leasehold improvements and IT systems. The estimated useful lives, residual values and depreciation method are reviewed at each yearend, with the effect of any changes in estimate accounted for prospectively. These items are amortized on a straight‑line basis over their estimated useful lives ranging as follows: \n\n## (G) Property and Equipment\n\n## (iii) Borrowing costs related to IPUC\n\n## (H) Inventory\n\n## (I) Cash\n\n## (J) Share‑Based Compensation\n\ninventory represents manufactured homes available for sale. the manufactured homes are valued at the lower of cost (purchase price plus delivery and setup costs) and net realizable value. Net realizable value is the estimated selling price in the ordinary course of business based on market prices at the reporting date less costs to complete and the estimated costs of sale.\n\nCash is comprised of bank balances and interest‑earning bank accounts.\n\nThe Company issues share‑based awards to certain employees and non‑employee directors whereby employees render services as consideration for equity instruments (equity‑settled transactions). \n\n72 Killam ProPerties inc | 2013" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8806688626700068, + "doc_id": "f906b25f11a778cc5e1d2dbb06e52e9c235d25ad38cb289512fa9596e4ffe291", + "edit_distance": 0.1702127659574468, + "f1_score": 0.9756097560975611, + "meteor": 0.9780394217393316, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "107\n\nNotes to the Financial Statements\n\n## Performance rights\n\nThe number of performance rights held during the financial year by each Director of Kingsgate and each of the specified executives of the Group, including their personally-related entities, are set out as follows:\n\n## Deferred rights\n\nThe number of deferred rights held during the financial year by each Director of Kingsgate and each of the specified executives of the Group, including their personally-related entities, are set out as follows:\n\ncontinued\n\nu\n\nNotes to the Financial Statements", + "recall": 0.9523809523809523, + "true_md": "Notes to the Financial Statements 107\n\n## Performance rights\n\n## Deferred rights\n\nThe number of performance rights held during the financial year by each Director of Kingsgate and each of the specified executives of the Group, including their personally-related entities, are set out as follows:\n\nThe number of deferred rights held during the financial year by each Director of Kingsgate and each of the specified executives of the Group, including their personally-related entities, are set out as follows:\n\nNotes t o the Financial Statements\n\ncontinued u" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8994768871831583, + "doc_id": "409bb862e7549af573377f9a0774bccf4f0e887d1e88e1baad233864cbcf0265", + "edit_distance": 0.6983372921615202, + "f1_score": 0.9592391304347826, + "meteor": 0.6709981731712721, + "precision": 0.9860335195530726, + "pred_md": "which the Group becomes a party to the contractual provisions of the instrument.\n\nThe Group derecognises a financial asset when the contractual rights to the cash flows from the asset expire, or it transfers the rights to receive the contractual cash flows on the financial asset in a transaction in which substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership of the financial assets are transferred.\n\nFinancial assets and liabilities are offset and the net amount presented in the statement of financial position when, and only when, the Group has a legal right to offset the amounts and intends either to settle on a net basis or to realise the asset and settle the liability simultaneously.\n\n## (i) Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss\n\nFinancial assets at fair value through profit or loss are financial assets held for trading if acquired principally for the purpose of selling in the short term. Derivatives are also categorised as held for trading unless they are designated as hedges.\n\nAttributable transaction costs are recognised in the profit or loss when incurred. Assets in this category are classified as current assets if they are expected to be settled within 12 months, otherwise they are classified as non-current.\n\n## (ii) Loans and receivables\n\nLoans and receivables are non-derivative financial assets with fixed or determinable payments that are not quoted in an active market. They are included in current assets, except for those with maturities greater than 12 months after the reporting date which are classified as noncurrent assets.\n\nLoans and receivables are measured at amortised cost using the effective interest method, less any impairment losses.\n\n## (iii) Available-for-sale financial assets\n\nAvailable-for-sale financial assets, comprising principally marketable equity securities, are non-derivative financial assets that are either designated in this category or not classified in any of the other categories. They are included in non-current assets unless management intends to dispose of the investment within 12 months of the reporting date. Investments are designated as available-for-sale if they do not have fixed maturities and fixed or determinable payments and management intends to hold them for the medium to long term.\n\nSubsequent to initial recognition, available-forsale financial assets are measured at fair value and changes therein, other than impairment\n\nlosses, are recognised as a separate component of equity net of attributable tax. When an asset is derecognised the cumulative gain or loss in equity is transferred to the statement of comprehensive income.\n\n## Impairment\n\nThe Group assesses at each reporting date whether there is objective evidence that a financial asset or group of financial assets is impaired. In the case of equity securities classified as available-for-sale, a significant or prolonged decline in the fair value of a security below its cost is considered as an indicator that the securities are impaired. If any such evidence exists for available-for-sale financial assets, the cumulative loss measured as the difference between the acquisition cost and the current fair value, less any impairment loss on that financial asset previously recognised in profit or loss, is removed from equity and recognised in the statement of comprehensive income. Impairment losses recognised in the profit or loss on equity instruments classified as available-for-sale are not reversed through the statement of comprehensive income.\n\nIf there is evidence of impairment for any of the Group's financial assets carried at amortised cost, the loss is measured as the difference between the asset's carrying amount and the present value of estimated future cash flows, excluding future credit losses that have not been incurred. The cash flows are discounted at the financial asset's original effective interest rate. The loss is recognised in the statement of comprehensive income.\n\n## k . Derivative financial instruments\n\nDerivative financial instruments are used by the Group to protect against the Group's Australian dollar gold price risk exposures. The Group does not apply hedge accounting and accordingly all fair value movements on derivative financial instruments are recognised in the profit or loss.\n\nDerivative financial instruments are stated at fair value on the date a derivative contract is entered into and are subsequently remeasured to their fair value at each reporting date. The resulting gain or loss is recognised in the statement of comprehensive income immediately.\n\n## l . Property, plant and equipment\n\nProperty, plant and equipment are stated at historical cost less depreciation. Historical cost includes expenditure that is directly attributable to the acquisition of the items.\n\nSubsequent costs are included in the asset's carrying amount or recognised as a separate\n\n71\n\nNotes to the Financial Statements\n\nasset, as appropriate, only when it is probable that future economic benefits associated with the item will flow to the Group and the cost of the item can be measured reliably. The carrying amount of any component accounted for as a separate asset is derecognised when replaced. All other repairs and maintenance are charged to the statement of comprehensive income during the reporting period in which they are incurred.\n\n## Depreciation\n\nDepreciation and amortisation of mine buildings, plant, machinery and equipment is provided over the assessed life of the relevant mine or asset, whichever is the shorter.\n\nDepreciation and amortisation is determined on a units-of-production basis over the estimated recoverable reserves from the related area. In some circumstances, where conversion of resources into reserves is expected, some elements of resources may be included. For mine plant, machinery and equipment, which have an expected economic life shorter than the life of the mine, a straight line basis is adopted.\n\nThe expected useful lives are as follows:\n\n- 〉 mine buildings - the shorter of applicable mine life and 25 years;\n- 〉 plant, machinery and equipment - the shorter of applicable mine life and 3-15 years depending on the nature of the asset.\n\nThe estimated recoverable reserves and life of each mine and the remaining useful life of each class of asset are reassessed at least annually. Where there is a change in the reserves during the period, depreciation and amortisation rates are adjusted prospectively from the beginning of the reporting period.\n\nMajor spares purchased specifically for a particular plant are capitalised and depreciated on the same basis as the plant to which they relate.\n\n## Impairment\n\nAn asset's carrying amount is written down immediately to its recoverable amount if the asset's carrying amount is greater than its estimated recoverable amount (Note 2f).\n\n## Derecognition\n\nAn item of property, plant and equipment is derecognised upon disposal or when no future economic benefits are expected to arise from the continued use of the asset.\n\nAny gain or loss arising on derecognition of the asset (calculated as the difference between the net disposal proceeds and the carrying amount of the item) is included in the profit or loss in the period the item is derecognised.\n\ncontinued\n\nu\n\nNotes to the Financial Statements", + "recall": 0.9338624338624338, + "true_md": "Notes t o the Financial Statements\n\ncontinued u\n\nNotes to the Financial Statements 71\n\nwhich the Group becomes a party to the contractual provisions of the instrument.\n\nlosses, are recognised as a separate component of equity net of attributable tax. When an asset is derecognised the cumulative gain or loss in equity is transferred to the statement of comprehensive income.\n\nThe Group derecognises a financial asset when the contractual rights to the cash flows from the asset expire, or it transfers the rights to receive the contractual cash flows on the financial asset in a transaction in which substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership of the financial assets are transferred.\n\nFinancial assets and liabilities are offset and the net amount presented in the statement of financial position when, and only when, the Group has a legal right to offset the amounts and intends either to settle on a net basis or to realise the asset and settle the liability simultaneously.\n\nThe Group assesses at each reporting date whether there is objective evidence that a financial asset or group of financial assets is impaired. In the case of equity securities classi- fied as available-for-sale, a significant or prolonged decline in the fair value of a security below its cost is considered as an indicator that the securities are impaired. If any such evidence exists for available-for-sale financial assets, the cumulative loss measured as the difference between the acquisition cost and the current fair value, less any impairment loss on that financial asset previously recognised in profit or loss, is removed from equity and recognised in the statement of comprehensive income. Impairment losses recognised in the profit or loss on equity instruments classified as avail- able-for-sale are not reversed through the state- ment of comprehensive income.\n\nAttributable transaction costs are recognised in the profit or loss when incurred. Assets in this category are classified as current assets if they are expected to be settled within 12 months, otherwise they are classified as non-current.\n\nFinancial assets at fair value through profit or loss are financial assets held for trading if acquired principally for the purpose of selling in the short term. Derivatives are also categorised as held for trading unless they are designated as hedges. \n\nLoans and receivables are non-derivative finan- cial assets with fixed or determinable payments that are not quoted in an active market. They are included in current assets, except for those with maturities greater than 12 months after the reporting date which are classified as non- current assets.\n\nLoans and receivables are measured at amor- tised cost using the effective interest method, less any impairment losses.\n\nAvailable-for-sale financial assets, comprising principally marketable equity securities, are non-derivative financial assets that are either designated in this category or not classified in any of the other categories. They are included in non-current assets unless management intends to dispose of the investment within 12 months of the reporting date. Investments are desig- nated as available-for-sale if they do not have fixed maturities and fixed or determinable payments and management intends to hold them for the medium to long term.\n\nSubsequent to initial recognition, available-for- sale financial assets are measured at fair value and changes therein, other than impairment \n\nProperty, plant and equipment are stated at historical cost less depreciation. Historical cost includes expenditure that is directly attributable to the acquisition of the items. \n\nSubsequent costs are included in the asset’s carrying amount or recognised as a separate \n\nAny gain or loss arising on derecognition of the asset (calculated as the difference between the net disposal proceeds and the carrying amount of the item) is included in the profit or loss in the period the item is derecognised. \n\nAn item of property, plant and equipment is derecognised upon disposal or when no future economic benefits are expected to arise from the continued use of the asset.\n\nDerivative financial instruments are stated at fair value on the date a derivative contract is entered into and are subsequently remeasured to their fair value at each reporting date. The resulting gain or loss is recognised in the state- ment of comprehensive income immediately.\n\nAn asset’s carrying amount is written down immediately to its recoverable amount if the asset’s carrying amount is greater than its estimated recoverable amount (Note 2f).\n\nMajor spares purchased specifically for a partic- ular plant are capitalised and depreciated on the same basis as the plant to which they relate. \n\nDerivative financial instruments are used by the Group to protect against the Group’s Australian dollar gold price risk exposures. The Group does not apply hedge accounting and accordingly all fair value movements on derivative financial instruments are recognised in the profit or loss.\n\nThe estimated recoverable reserves and life of each mine and the remaining useful life of each class of asset are reassessed at least annually. Where there is a change in the reserves during the period, depreciation and amortisation rates are adjusted prospectively from the beginning of the reporting period.\n\nIf there is evidence of impairment for any of the Group’s financial assets carried at amortised cost, the loss is measured as the difference between the asset’s carrying amount and the present value of estimated future cash flows, excluding future credit losses that have not been incurred. The cash flows are discounted at the financial asset’s original effective interest rate. The loss is recognised in the statement of comprehensive income.\n\nThe expected useful lives are as follows:\n\nDepreciation and amortisation is determined on a units-of-production basis over the estimated recoverable reserves from the related area. In some circumstances, where conversion of resources into reserves is expected, some elements of resources may be included. For mine plant, machinery and equipment, which have an expected economic life shorter than the life of the mine, a straight line basis is adopted.\n\nDepreciation and amortisation of mine build- ings, plant, machinery and equipment is \n\nDepreciation and amortisation of mine build- ings, plant, machinery and equipment is provided over the assessed life of the relevant mine or asset, whichever is the shorter.\n\nasset, as appropriate, only when it is probable that future economic benefits associated with the item will flow to the Group and the cost of the item can be measured reliably. The carrying amount of any component accounted for as a separate asset is derecognised when replaced. All other repairs and maintenance are charged to the statement of comprehensive income during the reporting period in which they are incurred.\n\n## Depreciation\n\n## Impairment\n\n## k . Derivative financial instruments\n\n## l . Property, plant and equipment\n\n## Derecognition\n\n## Impairment\n\n- 〉 plant, machinery and equipment – the shorter of applicable mine life and 3–15 years depending on the nature of the asset.\n\n- 〉 mine buildings – the shorter of applicable mine life and 25 years;\n\n- (ii) Loans and receivables\n\n- (iii) Available-for-sale financial assets\n\n- (i) Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "c253e12f8bbb38926613e3c50c79644492a42c510fefde6865deff36c77abea4", + "edit_distance": 0.6983372921615202, + "f1_score": 0.9592391304347826, + "meteor": 0.6709981731712721, + "precision": 0.9860335195530726, + "pred_md": "13\n\n13", + "recall": 0.9338624338624338, + "true_md": "" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8401630689798724, + "doc_id": "6f9b868874f47408ab2799d85c147c22506dd9e230b8ea2ee3f1eeec2d9707ba", + "edit_distance": 0.797180043383948, + "f1_score": 0.9816849816849818, + "meteor": 0.6170669842907174, + "precision": 0.9852941176470589, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 22 - CREDIT FACILITIES continued\n\nThe principal amount of the loans borrowed under our Junior Credit Facility is due in full on the maturity date. Interest on the Junior Credit Facility accrues at a rate equal to the greater of (i) 8.50% or (ii) a base rate (being, at our option, either (a) LIBOR for the applicable interest period (adjusted for Eurodollar Reserve Requirements) or (b) the greatest of (x) the prime rate announced by Wells Fargo Bank, N.A., (y) the federal funds rate plus 0.50% and (z) one-month adjusted LIBOR plus 1.00%), plus a margin of either 6.5% or 7.5%, based on the base rate selected.\n\nThe Company is also required under our Junior Credit Facility to maintain the following financial ratios:\n\n- · a current ratio, consisting of consolidated current assets including undrawn borrowing capacity to consolidated current liabilities, of not less than 1.0 to 1.0 as of the last day of any fiscal quarter;\n- · a maximum leverage ratio, consisting of consolidated debt to adjusted consolidated EBITDAX (as defined in the Junior Credit Facility), of not greater than 4.5 to 1.0 as of the last day of any fiscal quarter (beginning 30 September 2013); and\n- · an asset coverage ratio, consisting of PV10 to consolidated debt, of not less than 1.5 to 1.0, as of certain test dates.\n\nFor the years ended 31 December 2014 and 2013, the Company capitalised $0.7 million and $0.3 million, respectively, of financing costs related to the Junior Credit Facility, which offset the principal balance. As at 31 December 2014 there was $35.0 million outstanding under the Company's Junior Credit Facility. As at 31 December 2014, the Company was in compliance with all restrictive financial and other covenants under the Junior Credit Facility.\n\n## Senior Credit Facility\n\nOn 31 December 2012, Sundance Energy entered into a credit agreement with Wells Fargo Bank, N.A. (the 'Senior Credit Facility'), pursuant to which up to $300 million is available on a revolving basis. The borrowing base under the Senior Credit Facility is determined by reference to the value of the Company's proved reserves. The agreement specifies a semi-annual borrowing base redetermination and the Company can request two additional redeterminations each year. The borrowing capacity was increased from prior year to $110 million as at 31 December 2014 based on Company reserves as at 31 December 2014. As at 31 December 2014, the Company had $15 million undrawn on the Senior Credit Facility. In conjunction with the increase in the borrowing base, the Company has expanded the syndicate of banks under the Senior Credit Facility. With Wells Fargo as administrative agent, Bank of America Merrill Lynch and the Bank of Nova Scotia have now joined the banking group.\n\nInterest on borrowed funds accrue, at the Company's option, of i) LIBOR plus a margin that ranges from 175 to 275 basis points or ii) the Base Rate, defined as a rate equal to the highest of (a) the Federal Funds Rate plus ½ of 1%, (b) the Prime Rate, or (c) LIBOR plus a margin that ranges from 75 to 175 basis points. The applicable margin varies depending on the amount drawn. The Company also pays a commitment that ranges from 37.5 to 50 basis points on the undrawn balance of the borrowing base. The agreement has a five-year term and contains both negative and affirmative covenants, including minimum current ratio and maximum leverage ratio requirements consistent with the Junior Credit Facility's. Certain development and production assets are pledged as collateral and the facility is guaranteed by the Parent Company.\n\nFor the years ended 31 December 2014 and 2013, the Company capitalised nil and $0.2 million, respectively, of financing costs related to the Senior Credit Facility, which offset the principal balance. As at 31 December 2014 there was $95.0 million outstanding under the Company's Senior Credit Facility. As at 31 December 2014, the Company was in compliance with all restrictive financial and other covenants under the Senior Credit Facility.\n\nThe Company capitalised $3.4 million and $1.3 million of interest expense during the years ended 31 December 2014 and 2013, respectively.\n\n- 87 -", + "recall": 0.9781021897810219, + "true_md": "NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS \n\n## NOTE 22 – CREDIT FACILITIES continued\n\n## Senior Credit Facility\n\n- 87 - \n\nThe Company capitalised $3.4 million and $1.3 million of interest expense during the years ended 31 December 2014 and 2013, respectively.\n\nFor the years ended 31 December 2014 and 2013, the Company capitalised nil and $0.2 million, respectively, of financing costs related to the Senior Credit Facility, which offset the principal balance. As at 31 December 2014 there was $95.0 million outstanding under the Company’s Senior Credit Facility. As at 31 December 2014, the Company was in compliance with all restrictive financial and other covenants under the Senior Credit Facility. \n\nInterest on borrowed funds accrue, at the Company’s option, of i) LIBOR plus a margin that ranges from 175 to 275 basis points or ii) the Base Rate, defined as a rate equal to the highest of (a) the Federal Funds Rate plus ½ of 1%, (b) the Prime Rate, or (c) LIBOR plus a margin that ranges from 75 to 175 basis points. The applicable margin varies depending on the amount drawn. The Company also pays a commitment that ranges from 37.5 to 50 basis points on the undrawn balance of the borrowing base. The agreement has a five-year term and contains both negative and affirmative covenants, including minimum current ratio and maximum leverage ratio requirements consistent with the Junior Credit Facility’s. Certain development and production assets are pledged as collateral and the facility is guaranteed by the Parent Company.\n\nOn 31 December 2012, Sundance Energy entered into a credit agreement with Wells Fargo Bank, N.A. (the “Senior Credit Facility”), pursuant to which up to $300 million is available on a revolving basis. The borrowing base under the Senior Credit Facility is determined by reference to the value of the Company’s proved reserves. The agreement specifies a semi-annual borrowing base redetermination and the Company can request two additional redeterminations each year. The borrowing capacity was increased from prior year to $110 million as at 31 December 2014 based on Company reserves as at 31 December 2014. As at 31 December 2014, the Company had $15 million undrawn on the Senior Credit Facility. In conjunction with the increase in the borrowing base, the Company has expanded the syndicate of banks under the Senior Credit Facility. With Wells Fargo as administrative agent, Bank of America Merrill Lynch and the Bank of Nova Scotia have now joined the banking group. \n\nFor the years ended 31 December 2014 and 2013, the Company capitalised $0.7 million and $0.3 million, respectively, of financing costs related to the Junior Credit Facility, which offset the principal balance. As at 31 December 2014 there was $35.0 million outstanding under the Company’s Junior Credit Facility. As at 31 December 2014, the Company was in compliance with all restrictive financial and other covenants under the Junior Credit Facility. \n\nThe Company is also required under our Junior Credit Facility to maintain the following financial ratios: • a current ratio, consisting of consolidated current assets including undrawn borrowing capacity to \n\nThe principal amount of the loans borrowed under our Junior Credit Facility is due in full on the maturity date. Interest on the Junior Credit Facility accrues at a rate equal to the greater of (i) 8.50% or (ii) a base rate (being, at our option, either (a) LIBOR for the applicable interest period (adjusted for Eurodollar Reserve Requirements) or (b) the greatest of (x) the prime rate announced by Wells Fargo Bank, N.A., (y) the federal funds rate plus 0.50% and (z) one-month adjusted LIBOR plus 1.00%), plus a margin of either 6.5% or 7.5%, based on the base rate selected. \n\n- The Company is also required under our Junior Credit Facility to maintain the following financial ratios: • a current ratio, consisting of consolidated current assets including undrawn borrowing capacity to consolidated current liabilities, of not less than 1.0 to 1.0 as of the last day of any fiscal quarter; • a maximum leverage ratio, consisting of consolidated debt to adjusted consolidated EBITDAX (as defined \n\n- consolidated current liabilities, of not less than 1.0 to 1.0 as of the last day of any fiscal quarter; • a maximum leverage ratio, consisting of consolidated debt to adjusted consolidated EBITDAX (as defined in the Junior Credit Facility), of not greater than 4.5 to 1.0 as of the last day of any fiscal quarter (beginning 30 September 2013); and • an asset coverage ratio, consisting of PV10 to consolidated debt, of not less than 1.5 to 1.0, as of certain \n\n- (beginning 30 September 2013); and • an asset coverage ratio, consisting of PV10 to consolidated debt, of not less than 1.5 to 1.0, as of certain test dates." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8617035049393555, + "doc_id": "a071e36788052adf8105859bf06d998fe5188be1b512679e351c94fef0e01c72", + "edit_distance": 0.07263922518159806, + "f1_score": 0.955631399317406, + "meteor": 0.9431408159511009, + "precision": 0.9722222222222222, + "pred_md": "Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nNotes: 1. Consolidated net business profit = SMBC's nonconsolidated banking profit + SMFG's ordinary profit + Other subsidiaries' ordinary profit (excluding nonrecurring factors) + Equity method affiliates' ordinary profit ✕ Ownership ratio - Internal transactions (dividends, etc.)\n\n2. Other profit or loss = Nonoperating profit or loss of consolidated subsidiaries except SMBC + Equity method affiliates' ordinary profit ✕ Ownership ratio, etc.\n\n3. Consolidated net business profit of SMBC Friend Securities Co., Ltd., Nikko Cordial Securities Inc., Sumitomo Mitsui Finance and Leasing Company, Limited, Sumitomo Mitsui Card Company, Limited, and Cedyna Financial Corporation is operating profit of each company, and nonoperating profits or losses of the companies are classified into 'Others' in each segment. For the figures on Cedyna Financial Corporation which became a consolidated subsidiary in the 1st quarter of the fiscal year ended March 31, 2011, consolidated net business profit amount is sum of Operating profit in the 1st quarter ✕ Ownership ratio + Operating profit from the 2nd quarter through the 4th quarter of the fiscal year ended March 31, 2011. For the figures on Nikko Cordial Securities Inc. which became a consolidated subsidiary in the 3rd quarter of the fiscal year ended March 31, 2010, consolidated net business profit amount is Operating profit for the 2nd half term of the fiscal year ended March 31, 2010.\n\n4. 'Other business' includes profit or loss to be offset as internal transactions between segments.\n\n4. Difference between total amount of consolidated net business profit by reportable segment and ordinary profit on consolidated statements of income (adjustment of difference)\n\nNotes: 1. Credit cost = Provision for reserve for possible loan losses (excluding translation adjustment of general reserve for possible loan losses) + Write-off of loans + Losses on sales of delinquent loans\n\n2. Gains (losses) on stocks = Gains on sale of stocks - Losses on sale of stocks - Losses on devaluation of stocks\n\n3. Adjustment of profit or loss of equity method affiliates = Equity method affiliates' net income ✕ Ownership ratio - Equity method affiliates' ordinary profit ✕ Ownership ratio\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n127\n\nSMFG", + "recall": 0.9395973154362416, + "true_md": "Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nSMFG\n\nNotes: 1. Consolidated net business profit = SMBC’s nonconsolidated banking profit + SMFG’s ordinary profit + Other subsidiaries’ ordinary profit (excluding nonrecurring factors) \n\n+ Equity method affiliates’ ordinary profit ✕ Ownership ratio – Internal transactions (dividends, etc.)\n\n- 2. Other profit or loss = Nonoperating profit or loss of consolidated subsidiaries except SMBC + Equity method affiliates’ ordinary profit ✕ Ownership ratio, etc.\n\n- 3. Consolidated net business profit of SMBC Friend Securities Co., Ltd., Nikko Cordial Securities Inc., Sumitomo Mitsui Finance and Leasing Company , Limited, Sumitomo Mitsui Card Company, Limited, and Cedyna Financial Corporation is operating profit of each company, and nonoperating profits or losses of the companies are classified into “Others” in each segment. For the figures on Cedyna Financial Corporation which became a consolidated subsidiary in the 1s quarter of the fiscal year ended March 31, 2011, consolidated net business profit amount is sum of Operating profit in the 1st quarter ✕ Ownership ratio + Operating profit from the 2nd quarter through the 4th quarter of the fiscal year ended March 31, 2011. For the figures on Nikko Cordial Securities Inc. which became a consolidated subsidiary in the 3rd quarter of the fiscal year ended March 31, 2010, consolidated net business profit amount is Operating profit for the 2nd half term of the fiscal year ended March 31, 2010.\n\n- 4. “Other business” includes profit or loss to be offset as internal transactions between segments.\n\n- 4. Difference between total amount of consolidated net business profit by reportable segment and ordinary profit on consolidat ed statements of income (adjustment of difference)\n\nNotes: 1. Credit cost = Provision for reserve for possible loan losses (excluding translation adjustment of general reserve for possible loan losses) + Write-off of loans + Losses on sales of delinquent loans\n\n- 2. Gains (losses) on stocks = Gains on sale of stocks – Losses on sale of stocks – Losses on devaluation of stocks\n\n- 3. Adjustment of profit or loss of equity method affiliates = Equity method affiliates’ net income ✕ Ownership ratio – Equity method affiliates’ ordinary profit ✕ Ownership ratio\n\nSMFG 2011 127" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8666055866964678, + "doc_id": "6fc3bcb61e92730570200d51bccf7029b87aef1e43e6141f7fa70acc5450857a", + "edit_distance": 0.5010416666666667, + "f1_score": 0.9510022271714922, + "meteor": 0.780838923875904, + "precision": 0.9617117117117117, + "pred_md": "24\n\n| COMMUNITY RELATIONS\n\n## INVESTING IN OUR COMMUNITIES »\n\nChesapeake's sense of civic commitment provides a bountiful harvest of benefits to cities large and small. We partner with groups and organizations across all of our operating areas to improve the communities our employ ees, contractors, vendors, land and mineral owners call home. We believe the success of our business depends on the strength, goodwill and vitality of those communities. Most importantly, we believe it is the responsibility of every successful business to share success with its neighbors.\n\nIn 2010 we gave more than $25 million to charitable organizations and projects across our operating areas, primarily focusing on community development, education, health and medical and social services.\n\n## Economic Impact\n\nWhile much of the U.S. is still struggling to recover from the economic recession, the positive impact of natural gas and oil operations has provided a valuable economic recovery stimulus for states that are home to exploration and development activities. As the nation's second-largest producer of natural gas, a Top 15 producer of liquids and most active driller of new wells, Chesapeake's arrival in a new play stimulates economic activity, augments personal income through jobs and royalty payments, generates substantial tax revenue and sustains communities throughout its operating areas.\n\nIn addition to the general economic impact of our activities on local economies, the company's tax contributions are substantial. In 2010 Chesapeake paid approximately $675 million in taxes, including ad valorem, severance, sales, employer, and corporate income and franchise taxes. These taxes pay for ongoing government services and also build and maintain schools, recreational facilities, and parks and roads - at a time when state and local governments are still feeling the pinch of recession. We are proud to support America's economy with our growth while also helping to protect the environment through the greater use of clean-burning natural gas and reducing the country's dependence on expensive foreign oil.\n\nChesapeake also makes contributions that help improve lives and economies in cities where we operate: $25 million in 2010 alone. For example, this past year we donated $200,000 to establish the Chesapeake Environmental and Recycling Center at Goodwill Industries of Central Oklahoma. The center will provide an additional 80 jobs to disabled Oklahomans, as well as help Goodwill recycle 10 million pounds a year, which\n\n## Chesapeake's $25 million of charitable giving in 2010\n\n- Community Development\n\nEducation\n\n- Health and Medical\n- Social Services\n\nequates to one-third of the goods that otherwise would have been destined for Oklahoma City-area landfills. In West Virginia, we helped fund construction of the Morgantown Market\n\nEquipping the next generation - West Virginia students hold their new laptops from Chesapeake as part of the company's Discovering Tomorrow's Leaders program.\n\nEquipping the next generation - West Virginia students hold their new laptops from Chesapeake as part of the company's Discovering Tomorrow's Leaders program.\n\nPlace, a permanent site for the city's farmers' market, creating more business opportunities for local farmers.\n\nChesapeake also supports local chambers of commerce and city councils in all of its operating areas. In the Haynesville Shale last year, we awarded grants to the Shelby County, Sabine Parish and Coushatta-Red River chambers of commerce to help fund tourism, business communications and chamber events. In Texas, we assisted more than 250 civic, professional and community service organizations throughout Johnson, Tarrant and western Dallas counties, and sponsored memberships in 35 local Texas chambers of commerce. By helping local chambers and businesses grow and thrive, we are creating stronger economies.\n\nWe also hire locally whenever possible to help stimulate the local economy, and we provide training when the local work force isn't yet qualified for the jobs we have open. For example, when Chesapeake began operating in the Marcellus Shale of West Virginia and Pennsylvania, finding experienced rig workers was a challenge. To meet that need, Chesapeake's wholly owned subsidiary, Nomac Drilling, built the 40,000-square-foot Eastern Training Center and Housing Facility in Bradford County, near Sayre, Pennsylvania. The campus opened in 2010 and serves as a housing facility and training ground for 266 workers at a time. Nomac and Chesapeake host regular job fairs in the region and the lines of interested candidates often extend out the door.\n\n## Educational Impact\n\nWe are also proud to help prepare tomorrow's leaders today. In 2010 Chesapeake supported universities, schools, academic chairs, scholarships and other educational programs with contributions totaling $5.4 million.\n\nInvesting in programs that promote technology and innovation is a key to our country's success. That's why we gave $1.0 million to establish the Chesapeake Energy dormitory for students at the Oklahoma School for Science and Mathematics (OSSM), a public, tuition-free, residential high school located in Oklahoma City for juniors and seniors with exceptional abilities. The extremely competitive school is helping train the next generation of scientists and mathematicians.\n\nWe also established the Chesapeake Energy Presidential Scholars Program at the Oklahoma City University Meinders School of Business, making a $5.0 million commitment to be distributed over the next five years. The Chesapeake Scholars Program will provide up to $25,000 per year in tuition", + "recall": 0.9405286343612335, + "true_md": "24 | COMMUNITY RELATIONS\n\nINVESTING IN OUR COMMUNITIES »\n\nEquipping the next generation — West Virginia students hold their new laptops from Chesapeake as part of the company’s Discovering Tomorrow’s Leaders program. \n\nChesapeake’s sense of civic commitment provides a bountiful harvest of benefits to cities large and small. We partner with groups and organizations across all of our operating areas to improve the communities our employ- ees, contractors, vendors, land and mineral owners call home. We believe the success of our business depends on the strength, goodwill and vitality of those communities. Most importantly, we believe it is the responsibility of every successful business to share success with its neighbors.\n\nIn 2010 we gave more than $25 million to charitable organizations and projects across our operating areas, primarily focusing on community development, education, health and medical and social services.\n\nequates to one-third of the goods that other- wise would have been destined for Oklahoma City-area landfills. In West Virginia, we helped fund construction of the Morgantown Market \n\nPlace, a permanent site for the city’s farmers’ market, creating more busi- ness opportunities for local farmers.\n\nWhile much of the U.S. is still struggling to recover from the economic re- cession, the positive impact of natural gas and oil operations has provided a valuable economic recovery stimulus for states that are home to explora- tion and development activities. As the nation’s second-largest producer of natural gas, a Top 15 producer of liquids and most active driller of new wells, Chesapeake’s arrival in a new play stimulates economic activity, augments personal income through jobs and royalty payments, gen- erates substantial tax revenue and sustains communities throughout its operating areas.\n\nIn addition to the general economic impact of our activities on local economies, the company’s tax contributions are substantial. In 2010 Chesapeake paid approximately $675 million in taxes, including ad valorem, severance, sales, employer, and corporate income and franchise taxes. These taxes pay for ongoing government services and also build and maintain schools, recreational facilities, and parks and roads — at a time when state and local governments are still feeling the pinch of recession. We are proud to support America’s economy with our growth while also helping to protect the environment through the greater use of clean-burning natural gas and reducing the country’s dependence on expensive foreign oil.\n\nChesapeake also makes contributions that help improve lives and economies in cities where we operate: $25 million in 2010 alone. For ex- ample, this past year we donated $200,000 to establish the Chesapeake Environmental and Recycling Center at Goodwill Industries of Central Oklahoma. The center will provide an additional 80 jobs to disabled Okla- homans, as well as help Goodwill recycle 10 million pounds a year, which \n\nWe are also proud to help prepare tomorrow’s leaders today. In 2010 Chesapeake supported universities, schools, academic chairs, scholarships and other educational programs with contributions totaling $5.4 million. \n\nInvesting in programs that promote technology and innovation is a key to our country’s success. That’s why we gave $1.0 million to establish the Chesapeake Energy dormitory for students at the Oklahoma School for Science and Mathematics (OSSM), a public, tuition-free, residential high school located in Oklahoma City for juniors and seniors with exceptional abilities. The extremely competitive school is helping train the next gen- eration of scientists and mathematicians.\n\nWe also established the Chesapeake Energy Presidential Scholars Pro- gram at the Oklahoma City University Meinders School of Business, making a $5.0 million commitment to be distributed over the next five years. The Chesapeake Scholars Program will provide up to $25,000 per year in tuition \n\nWe also hire locally whenever possible to help stimulate the local economy, and we provide training when the local work force isn’t yet qualified for the jobs we have open. For example, when Chesapeake began operating in the Marcellus Shale of West Virginia and Pennsyl- vania, finding experienced rig workers was a challenge. To meet that need, Chesapeake’s wholly owned subsidiary, Nomac Drilling, built the 40,000-square-foot Eastern Training Center and Housing Facility in Bradford County, near Sayre, Pennsylvania. The campus opened in 2010 and serves as a housing facility and training ground for 266 workers at a time. Nomac and Chesapeake host regular job fairs in the region and the lines of interested candidates often extend out the door. \n\nChesapeake also supports local chambers of commerce and city councils in all of its operating areas. In the Haynesville Shale last year, we awarded grants to the Shelby County, Sabine Parish and Coushatta-Red River chambers of commerce to help fund tourism, business communi- cations and chamber events. In Texas, we assisted more than 250 civic, professional and community service organizations throughout Johnson, Tarrant and western Dallas counties, and sponsored memberships in 35 local Texas chambers of commerce. By helping local chambers and businesses grow and thrive, we are creating stronger economies.\n\n## Educational Impact\n\n## Economic Impact\n\nChesapeake’s $25 million of charitable giving in 2010" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8333480351612703, + "doc_id": "e58cc347bacc2b56f61763017b70430a6cce34da4d374a6b7f23b943b618e0f6", + "edit_distance": 0.7936670071501533, + "f1_score": 0.9955817378497789, + "meteor": 0.6290754935126107, + "precision": 0.9970501474926253, + "pred_md": "## Nordstrom, Inc.\n\n## Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nDollar and share amounts in millions except per share, per option and per unit amounts\n\n## Accounts Receivable\n\nAccounts receivable includes credit card receivables from our Nordstrom private label and Visa credit cards, as well as credit and debit card receivables due from third parties. We record credit card receivables on our Consolidated Balance Sheets at the outstanding balance, net of an allowance for credit losses. The allowance for credit losses reflects our best estimate of the losses inherent in our credit card receivables as of the balance sheet date, including uncollectible finance charges and fees. We estimate such credit losses based on several factors, including historical aging and delinquency trends, write-off experience, portfolio concentration and risk metrics and general economic conditions. For purposes of determining impairment and recording the associated allowance for credit losses, we evaluate our credit card receivables on a collective basis as they are composed of large groups of smaller-balance homogeneous loans and, therefore, are not individually evaluated for impairment. We record estimated uncollectible principal balances to bad debt expense while estimated uncollectible finance charges and fees result in a reduction of credit card revenue. Credit card receivables constitute unsecured consumer loans, for which the risk of cardholder default and associated credit losses tend to increase as general economic conditions deteriorate.\n\nWe consider a credit card account delinquent if the minimum payment is not received by the payment due date. Our aging method is based on the number of completed billing cycles during which the customer has failed to make a minimum payment. Delinquent accounts, including accrued finance charges and fees, are written off when they are determined to be uncollectible. During the third quarter of 2014, we modified our write-off policy from 150 days past due to 180 days past due to better align with industry practice. Accounts are written off sooner in the event of customer bankruptcy or other circumstances that make further collection unlikely.\n\nConcurrent with our write-off policy change discussed above, we now recognize finance charges and fees on delinquent accounts until they become 150 days past due, after which we place accounts on non-accrual status. Payments received for accounts on non-accrual status are applied to accrued finance charges, fees and principal balances consistent with other accounts, with subsequent finance charge income recognized only when actually received. Non-accrual accounts may return to accrual status when we receive three consecutive minimum payments or the equivalent lump sum.\n\nOur Nordstrom private label credit and debit cards can be used only at our Nordstrom full-line stores in the U.S., Nordstrom Rack stores and online at Nordstrom.com, Nordstromrack.com and HauteLook, while our Nordstrom Visa credit cards also may be used for purchases outside of Nordstrom. Cash flows from the use of both the private label and Nordstrom Visa credit cards for sales originating at our stores and our website are treated as an operating activity within the Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows, as they relate to sales at Nordstrom. Cash flows arising from the use of Nordstrom Visa credit cards outside of our stores are treated as an investing activity within the Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows, as they represent loans made to our customers for purchases at third parties.\n\n## Merchandise Inventories\n\nMerchandise inventories are generally stated at the lower of cost or market value using the retail inventory method (weighted-average cost). Under the retail method, the valuation of inventories and the resulting gross margins are determined by applying a calculated cost-to-retail ratio to the retail value of ending inventory. The value of our inventory on the balance sheet is then reduced by a charge to cost of sales for retail inventory markdowns taken on the selling floor. To determine if the retail value of our inventory should be marked down, we consider current and anticipated demand, customer preferences, age of the merchandise and fashion trends. We reserve for obsolescence based on historical trends and specific identification.\n\n## Land, Property and Equipment\n\nLand is recorded at historical cost, while property and equipment are recorded at cost less accumulated depreciation. Capitalized software includes the costs of developing or obtaining internal-use software, including external direct costs of materials and services and internal payroll costs related to the software project.\n\nWe capitalize interest on construction in progress and software projects during the period in which expenditures have been made, activities are in progress to prepare the asset for its intended use and actual interest costs are being incurred.\n\nDepreciation is computed using the straight-line method over the asset's estimated useful life, which is determined by asset category as follows:\n\n44", + "recall": 0.9941176470588236, + "true_md": "## Nordstrom, Inc. Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements Dollar and share amounts in millions except per share, per option and per unit amounts\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements Dollar and share amounts in millions except per share, per option and per unit amounts\n\n## Accounts Receivable Accounts receivable includes credit card receivables from our Nordstrom private label and Visa credit cards, as well as credit and debit card\n\n## Land, Property and Equipment Land is recorded at historical cost, while property and equipment are recorded at cost less accumulated depreciation. Capitalized software\n\n## Merchandise Inventories Merchandise inventories are generally stated at the lower of cost or market value using the retail inventory method (weighted-average cost).\n\n44\n\nDepreciation is computed using the straight-line method over the asset’s estimated useful life, which is determined by asset category as follows:\n\nWe capitalize interest on construction in progress and software projects during the period in which expenditures have been made, activities are in progress to prepare the asset for its intended use and actual interest costs are being incurred. \n\nLand, Property and Equipment Land is recorded at historical cost, while property and equipment are recorded at cost less accumulated depreciation. Capitalized software includes the costs of developing or obtaining internal-use software, including external direct costs of materials and services and internal payroll costs related to the software project.\n\nMerchandise Inventories Merchandise inventories are generally stated at the lower of cost or market value using the retail inventory method (weighted-average cost). Under the retail method, the valuation of inventories and the resulting gross margins are determined by applying a calculated cost-to-retail \n\nMerchandise inventories are generally stated at the lower of cost or market value using the retail inventory method (weighted-average cost). Under the retail method, the valuation of inventories and the resulting gross margins are determined by applying a calculated cost-to-retail ratio to the retail value of ending inventory. The value of our inventory on the balance sheet is then reduced by a charge to cost of sales for retail inventory markdowns taken on the selling floor. To determine if the retail value of our inventory should be marked down, we consider current and anticipated demand, customer preferences, age of the merchandise and fashion trends. We reserve for obsolescence based on historical trends and specific identification. \n\nOur Nordstrom private label credit and debit cards can be used only at our Nordstrom full-line stores in the U.S., Nordstrom Rack stores and online at Nordstrom.com, Nordstromrack.com and HauteLook, while our Nordstrom Visa credit cards also may be used for purchases outside of Nordstrom. Cash flows from the use of both the private label and Nordstrom Visa credit cards for sales originating at our stores and our website are treated as an operating activity within the Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows, as they relate to sales at Nordstrom. Cash flows arising from the use of Nordstrom Visa credit cards outside of our stores are treated as an investing activity within the Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows, as they represent loans made to our customers for purchases at third parties.\n\nConcurrent with our write-off policy change discussed above, we now recognize finance charges and fees on delinquent accounts until they become 150 days past due, after which we place accounts on non-accrual status. Payments received for accounts on non-accrual status are applied to accrued finance charges, fees and principal balances consistent with other accounts, with subsequent finance charge income recognized only when actually received. Non-accrual accounts may return to accrual status when we receive three consecutive minimum payments or the equivalent lump sum.\n\nWe consider a credit card account delinquent if the minimum payment is not received by the payment due date. Our aging method is based on the number of completed billing cycles during which the customer has failed to make a minimum payment. Delinquent accounts, including accrued finance charges and fees, are written off when they are determined to be uncollectible. During the third quarter of 2014, we modified our write-off policy from 150 days past due to 180 days past due to better align with industry practice. Accounts are written off sooner in the event of customer bankruptcy or other circumstances that make further collection unlikely.\n\nAccounts Receivable Accounts receivable includes credit card receivables from our Nordstrom private label and Visa credit cards, as well as credit and debit card receivables due from third parties. We record credit card receivables on our Consolidated Balance Sheets at the outstanding balance, net of an allowance for credit losses. The allowance for credit losses reflects our best estimate of the losses inherent in our credit card receivables as of the balance sheet date, including uncollectible finance charges and fees. We estimate such credit losses based on several factors, including historical aging and delinquency trends, write-off experience, portfolio concentration and risk metrics and general economic conditions. For purposes of determining impairment and recording the associated allowance for credit losses, we evaluate our credit card receivables on a collective basis as they are composed of large groups of smaller-balance homogeneous loans and, therefore, are not individually evaluated for impairment. We record estimated uncollectible principal balances to bad debt expense while estimated uncollectible finance charges and fees result in a reduction of credit card revenue. Credit card receivables constitute unsecured consumer loans, for which the risk of cardholder default and associated credit losses tend to increase as general economic conditions deteriorate." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8765251121394206, + "doc_id": "fd050c3bca7acc26bd1c62fdff61bafc541078197bfc5f72609cd90c6336b5fa", + "edit_distance": 0.15126050420168066, + "f1_score": 0.9318181818181818, + "meteor": 0.9173123213292923, + "precision": 0.9425287356321839, + "pred_md": "## FIVE-YEAR SUMMARY OF CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL RESULTS\n\n1 Adjusted operating profit, adjusted net income, adjusted diluted earnings per share, pre-tax free cash flow and adjusted net debt are Non-GAAP measures and should not be considered as a substitute or alternative for GAAP measures. These are not defined terms under IFRS, and do not have standard meanings, so may not be a reliable way to compare us to other companies. See 'Non-GAAP Measures' for information about these measures, including how we calculate them.\n\n2 As defined. See 'Key Performance Indicators'.\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC.\n\n87\n\nMANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS", + "recall": 0.9213483146067416, + "true_md": "## FIVE-YEAR SUMMARY OF CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL RESULTS\n\nMANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AN D ANALYSIS\n\n1 Adjusted operating profit, adjusted net income, adjusted diluted earnings per share, pre-tax free cash flow and adjusted net debt are Non-GAAP measures and should not be considered as a substitute or alternative for GAAP measures. These are not defined terms under IFRS, and do not have standard meanings, so may not be a reliable way to compare us to other companies. See “Non-GAAP Measures” for information about these measures, including how we calculate them.\n\n2 As defined. See “Key Performance Indicators”.\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 87" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8266787282106383, + "doc_id": "e583684d761265c1632c8597ab707edf96f143245f88f89e5add3d54c34b6c41", + "edit_distance": 0.5555555555555556, + "f1_score": 0.9371980676328503, + "meteor": 0.8209468261193256, + "precision": 0.9509803921568627, + "pred_md": "The Group recognizes environmental preservation to be one of its most important management issues. Based on our Group Environmental Policy, we are implementing our initiatives to preserve and achieve harmony with the natural environment in our corporate activities. SMFG officially signed the 'Statement by Financial Institutions on the Environment and Sustainable Development' of the United Nations Environment Programme ('UNEP') in July 2002.\n\n## The Group Environmental Policy\n\n## Basic concepts\n\nRecognizing the importance of realizing a sustainable society, SMFG is continuously making efforts to preserve and achieve harmony with the natural environment in its corporate activities in order to support the economy and contribute to the betterment of society as a whole.\n\n## Specific environmental policies\n\n- · We provide environment friendly financial products, information and solutions which support our clients in their efforts to preserve the eco-system.\n- · We devise means to reduce environmental risks posed by our own activities and the society.\n- · We are determined to fulfill our social responsibilities through the conservation of resources and energy and the reduction of waste.\n- · We strictly comply with the environment-related laws and regulations.\n- · We practice the highest level of information disclosure related to the Group's environmental activities and consistently improve our efforts to contribute to environmental preservation by communicating with our staff as well as the third parties.\n- · We place high priority on thoroughly educating our staff about our environmental principles to ensure that they conform to these principles in the performance of their work.\n- · We actively and effectively implement 'environmental management,' and make continuous efforts to improve our system to deal with environmental issues by setting goals and targets for every fiscal year and reviewing them as deemed necessary.\n- · These policies are disclosed on the Group's website, and the printed version is available upon request.\n\n## Three pillars of the Group's activities\n\n## Environmental Action Plan and PDCA Procedures\n\nThe three pillars of our environmental action plan are to 'reduce environmental implications,' 'manage environmental risks,' and 'promote environmental businesses.' We set forth environmental objectives for various activities and follow PDCA (plan, do, check, and act) procedures in such environmental activities.\n\nSMFG and principal Group companies have obtained ISO14001 certification, the international standard for Environmental Management Systems (EMS).\n\n## EMS Enhancement System\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n54", + "recall": 0.9238095238095239, + "true_md": "## Environmental Preservation Initiatives\n\nThe Group recognizes environmental preservation to be one of its most important management issues. Based on our Group Environmental Policy, we are implementing our initiatives to preserve and achieve harmony with the natural environment in our corporate activities. SMFG officially signed the “Statement by Financial Institutions on the Environment and Sustainable Development” of the United Nations Environment Programme (“UNEP”) in July 2002.\n\nRecognizing the importance of realizing a sustainable society, SMFG is continuously making efforts to preserve and achieve harmony with the natural environment in its corporate activities in order to support the economy and contribute to the betterment of society as a whole.\n\nThe three pillars of our environmental action plan are to “reduce environmental implications,” “manage environ- mental risks,” and “promote environmental businesses.” We set forth environmental objectives for various activities and follow PDCA (plan, do, check, and act) procedures in such environmental activities.\n\nSMFG and principal Group companies have obtained ISO14001 certification, the international standard for Environmental Management Systems (EMS).\n\nSMFG 2011 54\n\n## EMS Enhancement System\n\n## Three pillars of the Group’s activities\n\n## Environmental Action Plan and PDCA Procedures\n\n## Specific environmental policies\n\n## The Group Environmental Policy\n\n## Basic concepts\n\n- • We provide environment friendly financial products, information and solutions which support our clients in their efforts to preserve the eco-system.\n\n- • We devise means to reduce environmental risks posed by our own activities and the society.\n\n- • We are determined to fulfill our social responsibilities through the conservation of resources and energy and the reduction of waste.\n\n- • We strictly comply with the environment-related laws and regulations.\n\n- • We practice the highest level of information disclosure related to the Group’s environmental activities and consistently improve our efforts to contribute to environmental preservation by communicating with our staff as well as the third parties.\n\n- • We place high priority on thoroughly educating our staff about our environmental principles to ensure that they conform to these prin- ciples in the performance of their work.\n\n- • We actively and effectively implement “environmental management,” and make continuous efforts to improve our system to deal with environmental issues by setting goals and targets for every fiscal year and reviewing them as deemed necessary.\n\n- • These policies are disclosed on the Group’s website, and the printed version is available upon request." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9052383480516071, + "doc_id": "c21683ab29f217a43fb997c331a95d27c288e1fbee6994aab87a85ed8cd51f81", + "edit_distance": 0.21428571428571427, + "f1_score": 0.9827586206896551, + "meteor": 0.959504392238829, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## 26. Changes in Net Assets\n\n- (1) Type and number of shares issued and treasury shares are as follows:\n\n* Increase in number of treasury common shares issued:\n\n- GLYPH<129> 37,591 shares due to purchase of fractional shares\n- GLYPH<129> 15,479,400 shares due to acquisition of SMFG shares by SMFG Card & Credit, Inc., a wholly-owned subsidiary of SMFG, in connection with making Cedyna Financial Corporation a wholly-owned subsidiary of SMFG Card & Credit through the share exchange\n\nDecrease in number of treasury common shares issued:\n\n- GLYPH<129> 5,177 shares due to sale of fractional shares\n\n* 1 Increase in number of common shares issued:\n\n- GLYPH<129> 559,700,000 shares due to issuance of new shares by way of public offering on June 22, 2009 and January 27, 2010\n- GLYPH<129> 28,931,300 shares due to issuance of new shares by way of third-party allotment on July 27, 2009 and February 10, 2010\n- GLYPH<129> 36,343,848 shares due to exercising of rights to request acquisition of common shares with respect to preferred stock (1st through 4th and 9th through 12th series Type 4) on January 28, 2010\n- * 2 Increase in number of treasury preferred shares (Type 4):\n- GLYPH<129> 4,175 shares due to acquisition of own shares on January 28, 2010 as a result of exercising of rights to request acquisition of common shares\n\nDecrease in number of shares issued and treasury shares of preferred stock (1st through 4th and 9th through 12th series Type 4):\n\n- GLYPH<129> 4,175 shares due to retirement of treasury shares on February 8, 2010\n- * 3 Increase in number of treasury common shares:\n- GLYPH<129> 54,672 shares due to purchase of fractional shares\n\nDecrease in number of treasury common shares:\n\n- GLYPH<129> 12,990 shares due to sale of fractional shares\n- GLYPH<129> 48 shares due to sale by affiliates accounted for by the equity method\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nSMFG 2011\n\nSMFG\n\n93", + "recall": 0.9661016949152542, + "true_md": "SMFG Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n## 26. Changes in Net Assets\n\n- (1) Type and number of shares issued and treasury shares are as follows:\n\n- * Increase in number of treasury common shares issued:\n\n- GLYPH<129> 37,591 shares due to purchase of fractional shares\n\n- GLYPH<129> 15,479,400 shares due to acquisition of SMFG shares by SMFG Card & Credit, Inc., a wholly-owned subsidiary of SMFG, in connection with making Cedyna Financial Corporation a wholly-owned subsidiary of SMFG Card & Credit through the share exchange\n\n- GLYPH<129> 5,177 shares due to sale of fractional shares\n\nDecrease in number of treasury common shares issued:\n\n- * $^{1}$ Increase in number of common shares issued:\n\n- GLYPH<129> 559,700,000 shares due to issuance of new shares by way of public offering on June 22, 2009 and January 27, 2010\n\n- GLYPH<129> 28,931,300 shares due to issuance of new shares by way of third-party allotment on July 27, 2009 and February 10, 2010\n\n- GLYPH<129> 36,343,848 shares due to exercising of rights to request acquisition of common shares with respect to preferred stock (1st through 4th and 9th through 12th series Type 4) on January 28, 2010\n\n- * $^{2}$ Increase in number of treasury preferred shares (Type 4):\n\n- GLYPH<129> 4,175 shares due to acquisition of own shares on January 28, 2010 as a result of exercising of rights to request acquisition of common shares\n\n- GLYPH<129> 4,175 shares due to retirement of treasury shares on February 8, 2010\n\nDecrease in number of shares issued and treasury shares of preferred stock (1st through 4th and 9th through 12th series Type 4):\n\nDecrease in number of treasury common shares:\n\n- * $^{3}$ Increase in number of treasury common shares:\n\n- GLYPH<129> 54,672 shares due to purchase of fractional shares\n\n- GLYPH<129> 12,990 shares due to sale of fractional shares\n\n- GLYPH<129> 48 shares due to sale by affiliates accounted for by the equity method\n\nSMFG 2011 93" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9233465876088409, + "doc_id": "fd0a03f5ccd3237fd85fa014bdcfcd0ed77358f451f9d630bd8982d20631740b", + "edit_distance": 0.16042267050912584, + "f1_score": 0.9726205997392436, + "meteor": 0.9286897637380511, + "precision": 0.9713541666666666, + "pred_md": "## Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nDollar amounts are in thousands of canadian dollars (except share and per share amounts)\n\n## 3. Significant Accounting Judgments, Estimates and Assumptions (continued)\n\n## Taxes\n\nThe Company is subject to income and capital gains taxes in numerous jurisdictions. Significant judgment is required to determine the total provision for current and deferred taxes. There are many transactions and calculations for which the ultimate tax determination and timing of payment is uncertain. The Company recognizes liabilities for current taxes based on estimates of whether additional taxes will be due. Where the final tax outcome of these matters is different from the amounts that were initially recorded, such differences will impact the income and deferred tax provisions in the period in which the determination is made. Deferred tax assets and liabilities are recognized on a net basis to the extent they are relating to the same fiscal entity and fall due in approximately the same period.\n\n## Consolidation and joint arrangements\n\nThe Company has determined that it controls and consolidates the subsidiaries where it owns a majority of the shares. The Company is part owner of one property in which it has a 47% interest. the company has determined that it does control this property as it operates and manages the property, governs the financial and operating policies, and has the power to cast the majority of the votes at meetings of the board of directors given the widely held distribution of the remaining ownership percentage. This property is accounted for on a consolidated basis.\n\nthe company is part owner of an investment in which it has a 25% ownership interest. the company has determined that it does not have control as it holds less than a 50% ownership interest. This investment is a joint arrangement which is separately incorporated. It is deemed that the joint arrangement is separate from the Company, having no direct interest in the assets and obligation of the joint arrangement. The Company has (after considering the structure and form of the arrangement, the terms agreed by the parties in the contractual arrangement and the Company's rights and obligations arising from the arrangement) classified its interest as a joint venture under IFRS 11. As a consequence it accounts for its investment in the joint venture using the equity method.\n\n## Estimates\n\n## Valuation of Investment Properties\n\nThe fair value of investment property is partially determined by independent real estate valuation experts (the 'External Valuator') using recognized valuation techniques and partially by Management. The External Valuator uses the capitalization of net income method to determine the fair market value. In some cases, the fair values are corroborated by recent real estate transactions with similar characteristics and location to those of the Company's assets. Management's internal valuation model is also based on a capitalization of normalized net operating income ('NOI') by property, using property specific quarterly capitalization rates ('cap-rates'), provided by an independent qualified valuation professional.\n\nIPUC is also valued at fair value, except if such values cannot be reliably determined. In the case when a fair value cannot be reliably determined, such property is recorded at cost. The fair value of IPUC is determined using the capitalization of net income method.\n\nThe determination of the fair value of investment property requires the use of estimates such as future cash flows from assets and cap-rates applicable to those assets. In addition, development risks (such as construction and leasing risks) are also taken into consideration when determining the fair value of IPUC. These estimates are based on local market conditions existing at the reporting date. In arriving at their estimates of market values, the External Valuator uses their market knowledge and professional judgment and does not rely solely on historical transaction comparables. The critical estimates and assumptions underlying the valuation of investment properties and developments are set out in note 5.\n\n## Fair Value of Financial Instruments\n\nWhere the fair value of financial assets and financial liabilities recorded in the Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements cannot be derived from active markets, they are determined using valuation techniques, including the discounted cash flow model. Inputs to these models are taken from observable markets where possible, but where this is not feasible a degree of judgment is required in establishing fair values. The judgments include considerations of inputs such as liquidity risk, credit risk and volatility. Changes in assumptions about these factors could affect the reported fair value of financial instruments.\n\n## Changes in Accounting Policies\n\nThe accounting policies applied during the year ended December 31, 2013 are consistent with those used in the audited consolidated financial statements for the year ended December 31, 2012, except for the following new and amended IFRS and International Financial Reporting Interpretations Committee ('IFRIC') interpretations which were effective for periods beginning on or after July 1, 2012, and January 1, 2013:\n\n- IAS 1 - Financial Statement Presentation ('IAS 1') - Presentation of Items of Other Comprehensive Income ('OCI')\n\nThe amendments to IAS 1 change the grouping of items presented in OCI. Items that could be reclassified (or recycled) to profit or loss at a future point in time (for example, upon derecognition or settlement) would be presented separately from items that will never be reclassified. The adoption of this standard did not have an impact on the Company's financial position or performance.\n\n76\n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013", + "recall": 0.9738903394255874, + "true_md": "## Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except share and per share amounts)\n\nNotes to the Consolidated Financial Statements Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except share and per share amounts)\n\nThe Company is subject to income and capital gains taxes in numerous jurisdictions. Significant judgment is required to determine the total provision for current and deferred taxes. There are many transactions and calculations for which the ultimate tax determination and timing of payment is uncertain. The Company recognizes liabilities for current taxes based on estimates of whether additional taxes will be due. Where the final tax outcome of these matters is different from the amounts that were initially recorded, such differences will impact the income and deferred tax provisions in the period in which the determination is made. Deferred tax assets and liabilities are recognized on a net basis to the extent they are relating to the same fiscal entity and fall due in approximately the same period.\n\nThe Company has determined that it controls and consolidates the subsidiaries where it owns a majority of the shares. The Company is part owner of one property in which it has a 47% interest. the company has determined that it does control this property as it operates and manages the property, governs the financial and operating policies, and has the power to cast the majority of the votes at meetings of the board of directors given the widely held distribution of the remaining ownership percentage. This property is accounted for on a consolidated basis.\n\nthe company is part owner of an investment in which it has a 25% ownership interest. the company has determined that it does not have control as it holds less than a 50% ownership interest. This investment is a joint arrangement which is separately incorporated. It is deemed that the joint arrangement is separate from the Company, having no direct interest in the assets and obligation of the joint arrangement. The Company has (after considering the structure and form of the arrangement, the terms agreed by the parties in the contractual arrangement and the Company’s rights and obligations arising from the arrangement) classified its interest as a joint venture under IFRS 11. As a consequence it accounts for its investment in the joint venture using the equity method.\n\nThe fair value of investment property is partially determined by independent real estate valuation experts (the “External Valuator”) using recognized valuation techniques and partially by Management. The External Valuator uses the capitalization of net income method to determine the fair market value. In some cases, the fair values are corroborated by recent real estate transactions with similar characteristics and location to those of the Company’s assets. Management’s internal valuation model is also based on a capitalization of normalized net operating income (“NOI”) by property, using property specific quarterly capitalization rates (“cap‑rates”), provided by an independent qualified valuation professional.\n\nIPUC is also valued at fair value, except if such values cannot be reliably determined. In the case when a fair value cannot be reliably determined, such property is recorded at cost. The fair value of IPUC is determined using the capitalization of net income method.\n\nThe determination of the fair value of investment property requires the use of estimates such as future cash flows from assets and cap‑rates applicable to those assets. In addition, development risks (such as construction and leasing risks) are also taken into consideration when determining the fair value of IPUC. These estimates are based on local market conditions existing at the reporting date. In arriving at their estimates of market values, the External Valuator uses their market knowledge and professional judgment and does not rely solely on historical transaction comparables. The critical estimates and assumptions underlying the valuation of investment properties and developments are set out in note 5.\n\nWhere the fair value of financial assets and financial liabilities recorded in the Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements cannot be derived from active markets, they are determined using valuation techniques, including the discounted cash flow model. Inputs to these models are taken from observable markets where possible, but where this is not feasible a degree of judgment is required in establishing fair values. The judgments include considerations of inputs such as liquidity risk, credit risk and volatility. Changes in assumptions about these factors could affect the reported fair value of financial instruments.\n\nThe accounting policies applied during the year ended December 31, 2013 are consistent with those used in the audited consolidated financial statements for the year ended December 31, 2012, except for the following new and amended IFRS and International Financial Reporting Interpretations Committee (“IFRIC”) interpretations which were effective for periods beginning on or after July 1, 2012, and January 1, 2013:\n\nThe amendments to IAS 1 change the grouping of items presented in OCI. Items that could be reclassified (or recycled) to profit or loss at a future point in time (for example, upon derecognition or settlement) would be presented separately from items that will never be reclassified. The adoption of this standard did not have an impact on the Company’s financial position or performance.\n\n## IAS 1 ‑ Financial Statement Presentation (“IAS 1”) — Presentation of Items of Other Comprehensive Income (“OCI”)\n\n## Changes in Accounting Policies\n\n## Fair Value of Financial Instruments\n\n## Estimates\n\n## Valuation of Investment Properties\n\n## Consolidation and joint arrangements\n\n## 3. Significant Accounting Judgments, Estimates and Assumptions (continued)\n\n## Taxes\n\n76 Killam ProPerties inc | 2013" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.52591379588874, + "doc_id": "dfc9b17185ef37b6f8360a27a84cc0fb78fb2bddeaa590ce0f16c8f76b96c856", + "edit_distance": 0.7293729372937293, + "f1_score": 0.7817047817047816, + "meteor": 0.5520339105832432, + "precision": 0.9894736842105263, + "pred_md": "| EMPLOYEES\n\n42\n\nKenneth Gentry\n\nChris George\n\nJerry George II\n\nBrian Gibbs\n\nJohn Gibbs III\n\nLane Gibbs\n\nChris Gibson\n\nHayley Gibson\n\nJ.D. Giddens\n\nTricia Giffin\n\nMatt Gilbert\n\nLarry Gillespie Jr.\n\nMatthew Gilliam\n\nCharles Gillis\n\nTracy Givens\n\nDavid Gladwin\n\nJames Glass\n\nChristina Glaviano\n\nDavis Gleason\n\nRonnie Glenewinkel\n\nHenry Glenn\n\nJeff S. Glenn\n\nSally Glenn\n\nScott Glenn\n\nWilbert Glover III\n\nSpencer Goad\n\nAllison Gocke\n\nRyan Goddard\n\nJon Godsy\n\nDana Goe\n\nJosh Goforth\n\nKandy Golden\n\nDerrick Goldston\n\nDustin Goldston\n\nMario Gomez\n\nGeorge Gonzales\n\nSam Gonzales\n\nDavid Gonzalez\n\nFabian Gonzalez\n\nJose Gonzalez\n\nRay Good II\n\nPat Goodman\n\nDaniel Goodwin\n\nAndrew Gooshaw\n\nBryan Gordon\n\nDaniel Gordon\n\nDavid Gore\n\nRonnie Gore\n\nNick Goree\n\nThomas Goslin\n\nTravis Gosnell\n\nAdam Gospodarek\n\nSteven Gosvener\n\nBrandy Gottschall\n\nRichard Gowan Jr.\n\nJC Goza\n\nEvelyn Grace\n\nCarlos Gracian\n\nAlicia Graham\n\nDana Grant\n\nDusy Grant\n\nDavid Grapusa Jr.\n\nDusty Graves\n\nJon Graves\n\nJoseph Graves\n\nGavin Gray\n\nJim Gray\n\nJon Gray\n\nEric Greathouse\n\nJohn Greathouse\n\nGeoff Green\n\nJeff Green\n\nJohn Green\n\nJustin Green\n\nLucas Green\n\nMichael Green\n\nRandy Green\n\nRonald Green II\n\nSilas Green\n\nJane Greene\n\nMike Greenough\n\nJennifer\n\nGreen-Pongrattanaman\n\nJason Greer\n\nKyle Gregor\n\nRegina Gregory\n\nChris Grewell\n\nMark Gribbin\n\nRyan Griffin\n\nJanelle Griffis\n\nMike Griffith\n\nAnthony Grillett\n\nJeff Grim\n\nJeff Grindstaff\n\nChad Grinnell\n\nClay Grissom\n\nTara Gross\n\nVertis Grummert\n\nJohn Gryder\n\nJose Guajardo Jr.\n\nG G Guerra\n\nHomero Guerra Jr.\n\nMatt Guerrero\n\nMiguel Guerrero\n\nRoy Guerrero\n\nArnaud Guillemard\n\nAgustin Guillen\n\nDaniel Guinane\n\nMichael Gulikers\n\nBrenda Gumm\n\nBarbara Guskin\n\nCarly Gustafson\n\nGalen Gustavus\n\nJimmy Gustavus\n\nSteven Gustavus\n\nJoseph Guthrie\n\nThomas Guthrie\n\nJoe Gutierrez\n\nJose L. Gutierrez\n\nLeopoldo Gutierrez\n\nJamey Guzak\n\nJohn Haag\n\nMatthew Habuda\n\nTim Hackenberg\n\nJosh Hack\n\nRichard Hackney\n\nJohn Hadlock\n\nJessica Haer\n\nJoshua Haile\n\nRobert Hajdas\n\nKyle Hakes\n\nTodd Hakes\n\nAlicia Haley\n\nAlex Hall\n\nBilly Hall\n\nBrock Hall\n\nDerek Hall\n\nGabriel Hall\n\nGerad Hall\n\nRichard B. Hall\n\nRyan Hall\n\nCalwin Halpin\n\nRicky Hamilton\n\nRussell Hamilton\n\nWilliam Hamilton\n\nBrian Hamiter\n\nBilly Hamm\n\nStuart Hamman\n\nTodd Hammer\n\nAugusta Hammergren\n\nBrian Hammerschmidt\n\nMelissa Hammontree\n\nDavid Hancock\n\nJohn Haner Jr.\n\nJeremy Hanes\n\nRegan Hankins Jr.\n\nJoel Hanks\n\nAngie Hardey\n\nRichard Harding\n\nKeith Hardman\n\nGraigery Harer\n\nDayne Hargrove\n\nBradley Harkness\n\nRick Harless\n\nColby Harlow\n\nJessica Harmon\n\nLane Harmon\n\nLewis Harper\n\nMike Harper\n\nJames Harris III\n\nRobert R. Harris\n\nSara Harris\n\nTim Harris\n\nTimothy Harris Jr.\n\nRodney Harrist\n\nGary Harshey\n\nDenise C. Hart\n\nJames Hart\n\nMargaret Hart\n\nPat Hartley\n\n| Paul Hartman Brett Harvey |\n|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|\n| Keith Harvey |\n| Rick Harvey Christopher Harville |\n| Kenneth Haskey Jr. |\n| Nathan Hassinger Kelly Hastings |\n| Matt Hastings |\n| Cody Hasty |\n| Timothy Hatesaul Alan Hatter |\n| Franklin Hawes Jr. James Hay |\n| Jeff Hayden Daniel Hayes |\n| Kevin Hayes Ryan Hayes Drew Haymaker Rowdy Haynes |\n| Steve Heard |\n| Ben Hearnsberger Roxanne Heath Lee Hebert IV Trey Hebert |\n| Jeremy Heck Kyle Hedrick Lynn Heidebrecht Clay Heller |\n| Jonathan Hemsley |\n| Bob Hendricks Allison Hendrix Joseph Hendrix Edward Henke |\n| Tyler Henning Jed Henry |\n| Angela Henry Garrett Henry |\n| Patrick Henry David Hensley Laura Hensley Austin Henson Christian Hernandez Juan Hernandez |\n| Jake Herod Shelley Herod Tacha Heron |\n| Fernando Herrera |\n| Gerardo Herrera |\n| Brent Herring Matthew Herring Christi Herrington Kimberly Hesse Charles Hester Dennis Hester Erin Hettman |\n| David Hewitt Clark Hickman |\n| Alston Hicks Jaime Hicks Scott Hicks Tracy Hicks |\n| Jordan Hicks |\n| Amy Higgins |\n| Destery Hidlebaugh Ryan Hidlebaugh Tiffany Hight |\n| Jimmy Higginbotham Michael Higginbottom James Higgins Arrin Hill |\n| Elgie Hill Geno Hill Jr. Jaron Hill Jeanette Hill |\n| Mike Hill Stephen Hill Kristen Hillis |\n| Geoffrey Himmelreich Freddie Hines |\n| Kevin Hlatky |\n| Tommy Hinchman Jr. Scott Hinman Daniel Hinton |\n| Steve Hoaglund |\n| Sarah Hoffman Russell L. Hogue II Clarissa Hollander |\n| Damieon Hodges |\n\nAlayne Hollis\n\nBrett Holloway\n\nSteve Holloway\n\nWilliam Holloway\n\nAllison Holman\n\nJames Holman\n\nLincoln Holman\n\nCori Holmes\n\nEric Holmes\n\nNick Holmes\n\nChad Holst\n\nKerra Holsted\n\nEric Holsten\n\nKevin Holt\n\nConrad Holub\n\nRagen Homesley\n\nMatt Hood\n\nWilliam Hood Jr.\n\nHudson Hoosier\n\nJoe Hoover\n\nJon Hoover\n\nJoshua Hoover\n\nJaime Hopkins\n\nJason Hopkins\n\nKaren Hoppe\n\nTami Horn\n\nTanner Horn\n\nMichael Horner\n\nWilliam Horner\n\nChristopher Hornsby\n\nMike Hornsby\n\nAaron Horton\n\nChaz Horton\n\nAmanda Horvath\n\nRobert Horvath\n\nEric Hottenstein\n\nKevin Hough\n\nMike Houlihan\n\nJames Houser\n\nLiz Houser\n\nJared Howard\n\nShaun Howard\n\nCharles Howdershelt\n\nDustin Howell\n\nSandra Howerton\n\nDagoberto Huante\n\nDenny Hubbard\n\nShane Hubbard\n\nCourtney Hubert\n\nRita Huckle\n\nAndrew Hudacko IV\n\nJohn Huddleston\n\nJessica Hudgens\n\nJohn Hudson\n\nAlan Hudspeth\n\nHelene Huff\n\nAlexander Huggett\n\nEric Huggins\n\nChris Hughes\n\nCody Hughes\n\nJim Hughes\n\nJohn Hughes\n\nJon Hughes\n\nWalter M. Hughes\n\nLois Hugo\n\nDavid Hugus II\n\nForrest Humphrey\n\nKyle Humphreys\n\nJoseph Humphries\n\nHannah Huneryager\n\nBill Hunt\n\nBobby Hunt Jr.\n\nGreg Hunt\n\nStuart Hunt\n\nLloyd Hunter\n\nAmy Huntsman\n\nRobert Hurlocker\n\nJustun Huston\n\nChelsey Hutches\n\nJason Hutchinson\n\nRobert Hutchinson\n\nChris Hutchison\n\nLuke Hux\n\nBryan Huyck\n\nAshley Hyde\n\nSean Iago\n\nKristin Ikard\n\nJeff Iliff\n\nClinton Imig\n\nEarl Ince\n\nJames Iness Jr.\n\nChris Infante Jr.\n\nTodd Ingalls\n\nTai Ingerick\n\nJeff Ingerson\n\nPaul Ingram\n\nNicholas Inthirath\n\nBrian Irving\n\nBrian Irwin\n\nJennifer Isaac\n\nRichard Isbell\n\nRyan Iseman\n\nJason Ives\n\nTroy Ivey\n\nAl Jackson\n\nBenjamin Jackson\n\nBrandi Jackson\n\nDavid Jackson\n\nGreg Jackson\n\nJames Jackson\n\nJason Jackson\n\nJeff Jackson\n\nJeffrey Jackson\n\nJoe D. Jackson\n\nJosh Jackson\n\nMichelle Jackson\n\nNathan Jackson\n\nRandy L. Jackson\n\nThomas Jackson\n\nToby Jackson\n\nDavid Jacobi\n\nGeorge Jacobs\n\nJustin Jahansouz\n\nChris James\n\nLanie James\n\nMark James\n\nArtemio Jameson Jr.\n\nRance Jameson\n\nSteve Jameson II\n\nJackie Janicek\n\nTimothy Janis\n\nPaul Jankowsky\n\nBrad Janssen\n\nDavid Jarrell Jr.\n\nCaleb Jarvis\n\nRobert A. Jarvis\n\nRobert B. Jarvis\n\nCatlin Jefferson\n\nAmanda Jenkins\n\nCorey Jenkins\n\nRalph Jenkins\n\nMatt Jenlink\n\nRichard Jennen\n\nBlu Jernigan\n\nRobert Jessup\n\nHerbert Jewett\n\nCasey Jobe\n\nBobby Johnson\n\nChris Johnson\n\nDarryl Johnson\n\nDeanna Johnson\n\nDoug K. Johnson Jr.\n\nEric Johnson\n\nJared Johnson\n\nJennifer Johnson\n\nJimmy L. Johnson\n\nJohn Johnson\n\nKelly Johnson\n\nLauren Johnson\n\nMatthew Johnson\n\nMax Johnson\n\nMichael R. Johnson\n\nPeter Johnson\n\nRob Johnson\n\nTera Johnson\n\nTroy Johnson\n\nWayne Johnson\n\nWill Johnson III\n\nDamon Johnston\n\nGreg Johnston\n\nHolly Johnston\n\nRon Johnston\n\nKristen Jondahl\n\nCarie Jones\n\nCasey Jones\n\nDeana Jones\n\nEric Jones\n\nGarett Jones\n\nJeff A. Jones\n\nKevin Jones", + "recall": 0.6460481099656358, + "true_md": "42 | EMPLOYEES\n\nMike Griffith Anthony Grillett Jeff Grim Jeff Grindstaff Chad Grinnell Clay Grissom Tara Gross Vertis Grummert John Gryder Jose Guajardo Jr. G G Guerra Homero Guerra Jr. Matt Guerrero Miguel Guerrero Roy Guerrero Arnaud Guillemard Agustin Guillen Daniel Guinane Michael Gulikers Brenda Gumm Barbara Guskin Carly Gustafson Galen Gustavus Jimmy Gustavus Steven Gustavus Joseph Guthrie Thomas Guthrie Joe Gutierrez Jose L. Gutierrez Leopoldo Gutierrez Jamey Guzak John Haag Matthew Habuda Tim Hackenberg Josh Hack Richard Hackney John Hadlock Jessica Haer Joshua Haile Robert Hajdas Kyle Hakes Todd Hakes Alicia Haley Alex Hall Billy Hall Brock Hall Derek Hall Gabriel Hall Gerad Hall Richard B. Hall Ryan Hall Calwin Halpin Ricky Hamilton Russell Hamilton William Hamilton Brian Hamiter Billy Hamm Stuart Hamman Todd Hammer Augusta Hammergren Brian Hammerschmidt Melissa Hammontree David Hancock John Haner Jr. Jeremy Hanes Regan Hankins Jr. Joel Hanks Angie Hardey Richard Harding Keith Hardman Graigery Harer Dayne Hargrove Bradley Harkness Rick Harless Colby Harlow Jessica Harmon Lane Harmon Lewis Harper Mike Harper James Harris III Robert R. Harris Sara Harris Tim Harris Timothy Harris Jr. Rodney Harrist Gary Harshey Denise C. Hart James Hart Margaret Hart Pat Hartley\n\nPaul Hartman Brett Harvey Keith Harvey Rick Harvey Christopher Harville Kenneth Haskey Jr. Nathan Hassinger Kelly Hastings Matt Hastings Cody Hasty Timothy Hatesaul Alan Hatter Franklin Hawes Jr. James Hay Jeff Hayden Daniel Hayes Kevin Hayes Ryan Hayes Drew Haymaker Rowdy Haynes Steve Heard Ben Hearnsberger Roxanne Heath Lee Hebert IV Trey Hebert Jeremy Heck Kyle Hedrick Lynn Heidebrecht Clay Heller Jonathan Hemsley Bob Hendricks Allison Hendrix Joseph Hendrix Edward Henke Tyler Henning Angela Henry Garrett Henry Jed Henry Patrick Henry David Hensley Laura Hensley Austin Henson Christian Hernandez Juan Hernandez Jake Herod ShelleyHerod Tacha Heron Fernando Herrera Gerardo Herrera Brent Herring Matthew Herring Christi Herrington Kimberly Hesse Charles Hester Dennis Hester Erin Hettman David Hewitt Clark Hickman Alston Hicks Jaime Hicks Jordan Hicks ScottHicks Tracy Hicks Destery Hidlebaugh Ryan Hidlebaugh Jimmy Higginbotham Michael Higginbottom Amy Higgins James Higgins Tiffany Hight Arrin Hill Elgie Hill Geno Hill Jr. Jaron Hill Jeanette Hill Mike Hill Stephen Hill Kristen Hillis Geoffrey Himmelreich Tommy Hinchman Jr. Freddie Hines Scott Hinman Daniel Hinton Kevin Hlatky Steve Hoaglund Damieon Hodges Sarah Hoffman Russell L. Hogue II Clarissa Hollander Dustin Hollen\n\nAlayne Hollis Brett Holloway Steve Holloway William Holloway Allison Holman James Holman Lincoln Holman Cori Holmes Eric Holmes Nick Holmes Chad Holst Kerra Holsted Eric Holsten Kevin Holt Conrad Holub Ragen Homesley Matt Hood William Hood Jr. Hudson Hoosier Joe Hoover Jon Hoover Joshua Hoover Jaime Hopkins Jason Hopkins Karen Hoppe Tami Horn Tanner Horn Michael Horner William Horner Christopher Hornsby Mike Hornsby Aaron Horton Chaz Horton Amanda Horvath Robert Horvath Eric Hottenstein Kevin Hough Mike Houlihan James Houser Liz Houser Jared Howard Shaun Howard Charles Howdershelt Dustin Howell Sandra Howerton Dagoberto Huante Denny Hubbard Shane Hubbard Courtney Hubert Rita Huckle Andrew Hudacko IV John Huddleston Jessica Hudgens John Hudson Alan Hudspeth HeleneHuff Alexander Huggett Eric Huggins Chris Hughes Cody Hughes Jim Hughes John Hughes Jon Hughes Walter M. Hughes Lois Hugo David Hugus II Forrest Humphrey Kyle Humphreys Joseph Humphries Hannah Huneryager Bill Hunt Bobby Hunt Jr. Greg Hunt Stuart Hunt Lloyd Hunter Amy Huntsman Robert Hurlocker Justun Huston Chelsey Hutches Jason Hutchinson Robert Hutchinson Chris Hutchison Luke Hux Bryan Huyck Ashley Hyde Sean Iago Kristin Ikard JeffIliff Clinton Imig Earl Ince\n\nJames Iness Jr. Chris Infante Jr. Todd Ingalls Tai Ingerick Jeff Ingerson Paul Ingram Nicholas Inthirath Brian Irving Brian Irwin Jennifer Isaac Richard Isbell Ryan Iseman Jason Ives Troy Ivey Al Jackson Benjamin Jackson Brandi Jackson David Jackson Greg Jackson James Jackson Jason Jackson Jeff Jackson Jeffrey Jackson Joe D. Jackson Josh Jackson Michelle Jackson Nathan Jackson Randy L. Jackson Thomas Jackson Toby Jackson David Jacobi George Jacobs Justin Jahansouz Chris James Lanie James Mark James Artemio Jameson Jr. Rance Jameson Steve Jameson II Jackie Janicek Timothy Janis Paul Jankowsky Brad Janssen David Jarrell Jr. Caleb Jarvis Robert A. Jarvis Robert B. Jarvis Catlin Jefferson Amanda Jenkins Corey Jenkins Ralph Jenkins Matt Jenlink Richard Jennen Blu Jernigan Robert Jessup Herbert Jewett Casey Jobe Bobby Johnson Chris Johnson Darryl Johnson Deanna Johnson Doug K. Johnson Jr. Eric Johnson Jared Johnson Jennifer Johnson Jimmy L. Johnson John Johnson Kelly Johnson Lauren Johnson Matthew Johnson Max Johnson Michael R. Johnson Peter Johnson Rob Johnson Tera Johnson Troy Johnson Wayne Johnson Will Johnson III Damon Johnston Greg Johnston Holly Johnston Ron Johnston Kristen Jondahl Carie Jones Casey Jones Deana Jones Eric Jones Garett Jones Jeff A. Jones Kevin Jones\n\nMarty Jones Marvin Jones Jr. Mike Jones Missy Jones Rustin Jones Stefanie Jones Tim J. Jones Wreginald Jones Chalain Jordan Jonathon Jordan Kenneth Jordan Jr. Javier Joslin Trace Joyce III Alejandro Juarez Claudio Juarez John Jukes Matt Julias Kevin Justin Shipman Kahanu Jr. Tanner Kancilia Josh Kapchinske Christopher Kapelczak Jacob Kapson Mark Karickhoff Rachel Karker Kris Karnes Shawn Karr Stan Kaszupski Kyle Kauk Nick Kauk Dustin Keefer Dustin Keel Jake Keen Klint Keevert Greg Kegin Brad Kellam Amy Kelley Keri Kelley Todd Kelley Nicholas Kellogg Adam Kelly Billy Kelly Chrissy Kelly Keith Kennedy Jr. Lonnie Kennedy David Kennelly Jr. Shelby Keown Meghan Kershner Megan Kidd Sean Kidd Matthew Kidwell Meredith Kiesel Chari Kiger Theodore Kimball Lindsay Kimber Debbie Kimbrell Danielle Kimbro Greg Kindsfather Ashley King Bill King III David King Jr. Jason King Kevin King Luke King Pamela King Lori Kinney Darrell Kinsey Scott Kinter David Kio JeffKirk Jennifer Kirk Tia Kishketon Austin Klavan Tommy Klein Chris Klingman Seth Knapp Sandra Knarr Wade Knickerbocker Daniel Knight Kevin Knight Nicholas Knight Virgil Knotts Jr. Megan Knowles Candace Knox Jacob Knuckols Sarah Knudson Jeremy Knutson Keri Kobs Richard Koch Seyi Kolajo\n\nChristopher Kolb Josh Koon Tom Koontz Jon Kopec William Kosik Ken Kostecky Derek Kreischer Cody Kroll Brett Kronick James Kropp Nic Kruckeberg Scott Krueger Bryan Krusemark David Kuntz Ted Kuschel Andy Kuykendall Chelsea Kyger Tony Kyle Mac Laas Frank Labor Gibran Lacey Craig Lacher Seth Lady Brian Lageman Scott Lair Stephanie Lamb Harry Lammy Wessley Lamoreaux Evan Landers Jason Landis Larry Landreth Chelsea Landrum Beau Landry Trey Landry Kathleen Lane Richard S. Lane Karl Langer Ronnie Langford Johnny Langley Darrel Lankford Randall Lantz Louis Lara Eddie Large Jr. Neil Larsen III Edwin Larson Greg Larson Kurtis Lasater Ahmed Latoni Daniel Lavigne Dennis Lawrence Josh Lawrence Randy Lawson Whitney Lawson Jacob Lawyer Vickie Laydera-Collins James Layman Dearl Laymon Corey LaCombe Chad LaCross Michelle LaFluer Doug LaHaye Jennifer Le Mary Le LaGayle Leake Arnulfo Leal Rocky Leatherwood Laura Lechtenberg Brian Lee Chris B. Lee Daniel Lee Jason Lee Kevin Lee Marcus Lee Jr. Rickey Lee Jr. Roy Lee Scott Lee Larry Legg Amanda Leigh Jason Leigh Marty Leischer Brooke Lemley Bryan Lemmerman Thomas Lemmons Nick Lemon Jake Lempges Christopher Lentz Brett Leonard Stacey Leone Charles Lewis II Dennis Lewis\n\nJustin Lewis Kasey Lewis Lawrence Lewis Jr. Micheal Lewis Paul LeBlond Joshua LeGrande Gabriel Lichtenberger Mitch Lied Kasey Lilley Chad Limberg Travis Lindenfelser Jason Lindsey Jeremy Lindsey Kyle Lindsey Mike Linse Linwood Lirette Jr. Randy Little Jacob Littlefield Melinda Littlefield Whitney Lively Thomas Lloyd John Loesel VI Shana Lofaso Sara Loftin Keenan Lohrding Wesley Long Jr. James Loomis Alex Lopez Alfredo Lopez Jr. Gerardo Lopez Josh Lopez Rudy Lopez Jr. Margaret Lorden Joshua Losinger Nicholas Lott Steven Love Melissa Loveland Clinton Lovell Lance Lovell Timothy Lovell Doc Lovett David Lowther Gerardo Lozano Andres Lucas Kyle Lucas Michael D. Lucas Michael D. Lucas Hector Lucio Varela John Ludwig Nickolas Luedecke Steve Luera Greg Lukeman Jared Luman Michael Lumley Michelle Lunceford Michael Lunde Stewart Lundquist Rockey Lynch Jacob Lynn Reggie Lyons Kha Mach Jaime Machuca Jr. Greg Mack Jessica Mack Alison Mackie Kevin MacDonald Thomas Madden Trent Magers Jon Mahan Justin Mahan Jeffery Majors Stephanie Mak Jose Maldonado Jr. Lindsay Malinoski Mark Malone Stacey Maloney David Manchas Stephen Manning Timothy Manning John Mantooth Jr. Jon Mantooth Shannon Mantooth Mary Katherine Maraschick Randolph Brett Marchbanks Aaron Marcovy Michael Marek Nicole Marion Nathan Marks Sonny Marmet\n\nKenneth Gentry Chris George Jerry George II Brian Gibbs John Gibbs III Lane Gibbs Chris Gibson Hayley Gibson J.D. Giddens Tricia Giffin Matt Gilbert Larry Gillespie Jr. Matthew Gilliam Charles Gillis Tracy Givens David Gladwin James Glass Christina Glaviano Davis Gleason Ronnie Glenewinkel Henry Glenn Jeff S. Glenn Sally Glenn Scott Glenn Wilbert Glover III Spencer Goad Allison Gocke Ryan Goddard Jon Godsy Dana Goe Josh Goforth Kandy Golden Derrick Goldston Dustin Goldston Mario Gomez George Gonzales Sam Gonzales David Gonzalez Fabian Gonzalez Jose Gonzalez Ray Good II Pat Goodman Daniel Goodwin Andrew Gooshaw Bryan Gordon Daniel Gordon David Gore Ronnie Gore Nick Goree Thomas Goslin Travis Gosnell Adam Gospodarek Steven Gosvener Brandy Gottschall Richard Gowan Jr. JC Goza Evelyn Grace Carlos Gracian Alicia Graham Dana Grant Dusy Grant David Grapusa Jr. Dusty Graves Jon Graves Joseph Graves Gavin Gray Jim Gray Jon Gray Eric Greathouse John Greathouse Geoff Green Jeff Green John Green Justin Green Lucas Green Michael Green Randy Green Ronald Green II Silas Green Jane Greene Mike Greenough Jennifer Green-Pongrattanaman Jason Greer Kyle Gregor Regina Gregory Chris Grewell Mark Gribbin Ryan Griffin Janelle Griffis" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7668340367020261, + "doc_id": "a2aadac82a47ea30133809db5158f684c38c3287fbc924319d2c7b1232a107d5", + "edit_distance": 0.671875, + "f1_score": 0.9846153846153847, + "meteor": 0.7136382165884425, + "precision": 0.9846153846153847, + "pred_md": "## Executive Officers\n\n## Teri Bariquit, 49 Executive Vice President, Nordstrom Merchandising Group\n\n## Kirk Beardsley, 46\n\nPresident of Nordstrom Credit, Inc.\n\nExecutive Vice President,\n\nOnline Merchandising\n\n## Scott A. Meden, 52\n\nSupply Chain\n\n## Terence Boyle, 42\n\nExecutive Vice President,\n\nNordstromrack.com|HauteLook\n\n## Brian K. Dennehy, 49\n\nExecutive Vice President and\n\nChief Marketing Officer\n\nSouthern California\n\n## Geevy S. K. Thomas, 50\n\nJames A. Howell, 49 Executive Vice President, Finance and Treasurer\n\n## Michael G. Koppel, 58\n\nExecutive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer\n\n## Gemma Lionello, 49\n\nExecutive Vice President and General Merchandise Manager, Cosmetics Division\n\nErik B. Nordstrom, 51 Executive Vice President and President, Nordstrom.com\n\nDaniel F. Little, 53 Executive Vice President and\n\nChief Information Officer\n\nLisa Luther, 46 Executive Vice President of Finance and Operations,\n\nNordstrom.com\n\n80\n\n## James F. Nordstrom, Jr., 42\n\nExecutive Vice President and President, Stores\n\n## Peter E. Nordstrom, 53\n\nExecutive Vice President and President, Merchandising\n\nBrian Saltzman, 47 Executive Vice President, User Experience and Optimization\n\n## Margaret Myers, 68\n\nPresident, Nordstrom Rack\n\nExecutive Vice President and General Merchandise Manager, Accessories and Women's Specialized Divisions\n\n## Blake W. Nordstrom,\n\n54\n\nPresident\n\n## Mark J. Tritton, 51\n\nExecutive Vice President and President, Nordstrom Product Group\n\n## David M. Witman, 56\n\nExecutive Vice President and General Merchandise Manager, Men's Apparel\n\nKenneth J. Worzel, 50 Executive Vice President,\n\nStrategy and Development\n\nPaige L. Thomas, 43 Executive Vice President and General Merchandise Manager, Nordstrom Rack\n\nExecutive Vice President and\n\nExecutive Vice President and General Merchandise Manager, Shoe Division\n\n## Robert J. Middlemas, 58\n\nExecutive Vice President and Regional Manager,\n\nTricia D. Smith, 43 Executive Vice President and General Merchandise Manager, Designer, Women's and Kids' Apparel\n\n## Steven C. Mattics, 46\n\nExecutive Vice President;\n\nChairman and Chief Executive Officer of\n\nGeneral Counsel and Secretary\n\nNordstrom fsb,\n\nMichael Sato, 48 Executive Vice President,\n\nRobert B. Sari, 58 Executive Vice President,", + "recall": 0.9846153846153847, + "true_md": "## Executive Officers\n\nRobert B. Sari, 58 Executive Vice President, General Counsel and Secretary\n\nSteven C. Mattics, 46 Executive Vice President; Chairman and Chief Executive Officer of Nordstrom fsb, President of Nordstrom Credit, Inc.\n\nTeri Bariquit, 49 Executive Vice President, Nordstrom Merchandising Group\n\nKirk Beardsley, 46 Executive Vice President, Online Merchandising\n\nScott A. Meden, 52 Executive Vice President and General Merchandise Manager, Shoe Division\n\nMichael Sato, 48 Executive Vice President, Supply Chain\n\nTricia D. Smith, 43 Executive Vice President and General Merchandise Manager, Designer, Women’s and Kids’ Apparel\n\nRobert J. Middlemas, 58 Executive Vice President and Regional Manager, Southern California\n\nTerence Boyle, 42 Executive Vice President, Nordstromrack.com|HauteLook\n\nBrian K. Dennehy, 49 Executive Vice President and Chief Marketing Officer\n\nMargaret Myers, 68 Executive Vice President and General Merchandise Manager, Accessories and Women’s Specialized Divisions\n\nJames A. Howell, 49 Executive Vice President, Finance and Treasurer\n\nMichael G. Koppel, 58 Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer\n\nBlake W. Nordstrom, 54 President\n\nGeevy S. K. Thomas, 50 Executive Vice President and President, Nordstrom Rack\n\nPaige L. Thomas, 43 Executive Vice President and General Merchandise Manager, Nordstrom Rack\n\nMark J. Tritton, 51 Executive Vice President and President, Nordstrom Product Group\n\nDavid M. Witman, 56 Executive Vice President and General Merchandise Manager, Men’s Apparel\n\nErik B. Nordstrom, 51 Executive Vice President and President, Nordstrom.com\n\nGemma Lionello, 49 Executive Vice President and General Merchandise Manager, Cosmetics Division\n\nDaniel F. Little, 53 Executive Vice President and Chief Information Officer\n\nLisa Luther, 46 Executive Vice President of Finance and Operations, Nordstrom.com\n\nPeter E. Nordstrom, 53 Executive Vice President and President, Merchandising\n\nJames F. Nordstrom, Jr., 42 Executive Vice President and President, Stores\n\nBrian Saltzman, 47 Executive Vice President, User Experience and Optimization\n\nKenneth J. Worzel, 50 Executive Vice President, Strategy and Development\n\n80" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9273231307979841, + "doc_id": "57e3ff79e8c2a3dafd46bf0d464476253f306ef1240d5356ed4fb39fd31683bf", + "edit_distance": 0.13623188405797101, + "f1_score": 0.9565217391304348, + "meteor": 0.9598392406188053, + "precision": 0.9506172839506173, + "pred_md": "## management's Discussion and analysis\n\nD\n\nollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\nthe following table sets out the maturity dates and average interest rates of mortgage and vendor debt, and percentage of apartment mortgages that are CMHC insured by year of maturity:\n\n(1) Includes $2.1 million related to a demand loan classified as current.\n\nAs at December 31, 2013, approximately 72% of the Company's apartment mortgages were CMHC insured (67% of all mortgages as MHC properties are not eligible for CMHC insurance) (December 31, 2012 - 61% and 53%). The weighted average interest rate on the CMHC insured mortgages was 3.67% as at December 31, 2013 (December 31, 2012- 3.98%).\n\nAccess to mortgage debt is essential in financing future acquisitions and in refinancing maturing debt. Management has intentionally diversified Killam's mortgages to avoid dependence on any one lending institution and has staggered the maturity dates of its mortgages to manage interest rate risk. Management anticipates continued access to mortgage debt for both new acquisitions and refinancings. Access to CMHC insured financing gives apartment owners an advantage over other asset classes as lenders are provided a government guarantee on the debt and therefore are able to lend at more favourable rates.\n\nThe following table presents the NOI of properties that are available to Killam to refinance at debt maturity for 2014 and for 2015. With $139.3 million in mortgages maturing in 2014, Management is evaluating opportunities to fix interest rates before maturity to lock in savings on refinancings. Killam's 2014 mortgage maturities are skewed toward the first half of the year and the Company has already completed refinancings or locked in interest rates for maturing mortgages representing $34.2 million of the maturing debt at a weighted average interest rate of 2.64%.\n\n54\n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013", + "recall": 0.9625, + "true_md": "Management’s Discussion and Analysis Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\nthe following table sets out the maturity dates and average interest rates of mortgage and vendor debt, and percentage of apartment mortgages that are CMHC insured by year of maturity:\n\nAs at December 31, 2013, approximately 72% of the Company’s apartment mortgages were CMHC insured (67% of all mortgages as MHC properties are not eligible for CMHC insurance) (December 31, 2012 – 61% and 53%). The weighted average interest rate on the CMHC insured mortgages was 3.67% as at December 31, 2013 (December 31, 2012– 3.98%).\n\nAccess to mortgage debt is essential in financing future acquisitions and in refinancing maturing debt. Management has intentionally diversified Killam’s mortgages to avoid dependence on any one lending institution and has staggered the maturity dates of its mortgages to manage interest rate risk. Management anticipates continued access to mortgage debt for both new acquisitions and refinancings. Access to CMHC insured financing gives apartment owners an advantage over other asset classes as lenders are provided a government guarantee on the debt and therefore are able to lend at more favourable rates. \n\nThe following table presents the NOI of properties that are available to Killam to refinance at debt maturity for 2014 and for 2015. With $139.3 million in mortgages maturing in 2014, Management is evaluating opportunities to fix interest rates before maturity to lock in savings on refinancings. Killam’s 2014 mortgage maturities are skewed toward the first half of the year and the Company has already completed refinancings or locked in interest rates for maturing mortgages representing $34.2 million of the maturing debt at a weighted average interest rate of 2.64%.\n\n(1) Includes $2.1 million related to a demand loan classified as current.\n\n54 Killam ProPerties inc | 2013" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9165116721355558, + "doc_id": "d4429d3c00cd6e898a51ebf80086bdd03fae987b6b6d12e4d7a5a6abbfcdec9a", + "edit_distance": 0.07378335949764521, + "f1_score": 0.9896480331262941, + "meteor": 0.9158640690026971, + "precision": 0.991701244813278, + "pred_md": "## Incentive Remuneration\n\nWe have an incentive remuneration program, comprised of short and long-term at-risk components, to incentivize key executives and employees of Sundance and its subsidiaries. The goal of the incentive remuneration program is to motivate management and senior employees to achieve short and long-term goals to improve shareholder value. This plan represents the performancebased, at risk component of each executive's total remuneration. The incentive remuneration program is designed to: 1) align management and shareholder interests, and 2) attract and retain management and senior employees to execute strategic business plans to grow Sundance as approved by our board of directors. It is the practice of the Remuneration and Nominations Committee to carefully monitor the incentive remuneration program to ensure its ongoing effectiveness.\n\nThe incentive remuneration program has provisions for an annual cash and equity bonus in addition to the base salary levels. The annual cash bonus Short-Term Incentive (\"STI\") is established to reward short-term performance towards our goal of increasing shareholder value. The equity component Long-Term Incentive (\"LTI\") is intended to reward progress towards our long-term goals and to motivate and retain management to make decisions benefiting long-term value creation.\n\nOn an annual basis, targets are established and agreed by the Remuneration and Nominations Committee, subject to approval by our board of directors. The targets are used to determine the bonus pool, but both the STI and LTI bonuses for the Key Management Personnel require approval by the Remuneration and Nominations Committee and are fully discretionary. Bonuses earned under the STI will be paid in cash and those under the LTI by means of awarding Restricted Share Units (RSUs) under the RSU Plan. For 2013 performance year, bonus targets ranged from 75% to 100% of base salaries for STI and 175% to 250% of base salaries for LTI. For 2014 performance year, bonus targets ranged from 75% to 100% of base salaries for STI and 225% to 325% of base salaries for LTI. Due to the current low commodity pricing environment and to preserve the Company's liquidity, any STI earned on the 2014 financial performance metrics (to be paid in 2015) will be paid out in RSUs instead of cash.\n\nBased on an assessment of the overall management team and Company performance achievement relative to financial metrics, a bonus pool is formed, based on a percentage of each employee's annual base salary, for allocating awards relative to the individual performance category. The Managing Director recommends to the Remuneration and Nominations Committee the allocation of such awards for Key Management Personnel other than himself. The Remuneration and Nominations Committee determines the allocation of the Managing Director's individual performance bonus, along with any adjustments (either positive or negative) to the recommendations made by the Managing Director for other Key Management Personnel.\n\nThe Committee has put in place a ceiling on short-term incentive awards with specific metrics that are aligned with the interests of shareholders. Annual incentive payouts should not exceed 10% of Net Operating Cash Flow (defined as Net Income adjusted for changes in Working Capital and Non-Cash Operating Expenses).\n\n## Annual Incentives\n\nThe table below contains the payout leverage for performance achievement as a percent of target.\n\n- 34 -", + "recall": 0.987603305785124, + "true_md": "Incentive Remuneration We have an incentive remuneration program, comprised of short and long-term at-risk components, to incentivize key executives \n\nIncentive Remuneration We have an incentive remuneration program, comprised of short and long-term at-risk components, to incentivize key executives and employees of Sundance and its subsidiaries. The goal of the incentive remuneration program is to motivate management and senior employees to achieve short and long-term goals to improve shareholder value. This plan represents the performance- based, at risk component of each executive's total remuneration. The incentive remuneration program is designed to: 1) align management and shareholder interests, and 2) attract and retain management and senior employees to execute strategic business plans to grow Sundance as approved by our board of directors. It is the practice of the Remuneration and Nominations Committee to carefully monitor the incentive remuneration program to ensure its ongoing effectiveness.\n\nThe incentive remuneration program has provisions for an annual cash and equity bonus in addition to the base salary levels. The annual cash bonus Short-Term Incentive (\"STI\") is established to reward short-term performance towards our goal of increasing shareholder value. The equity component Long-Term Incentive (\"LTI\") is intended to reward progress towards our long-term goals and to motivate and retain management to make decisions benefiting long-term value creation.\n\nOn an annual basis, targets are established and agreed by the Remuneration and Nominations Committee, subject to approval by our board of directors. The targets are used to determine the bonus pool, but both the STI and LTI bonuses for the Key Management Personnel require approval by the Remuneration and Nominations Committee and are fully discretionary. Bonuses earned under the STI will be paid in cash and those under the LTI by means of awarding Restricted Share Units (RSUs) under the RSU Plan. For 2013 performance year, bonus targets ranged from 75% to 100% of base salaries for STI and 175% to 250% of base salaries for LTI. For 2014 performance year, bonus targets ranged from 75% to 100% of base salaries for STI and 225% to 325% of base salaries for LTI. Due to the current low commodity pricing environment and to preserve the Company’s liquidity, any STI earned on the 2014 financial performance metrics (to be paid in 2015) will be paid out in RSUs instead of cash. \n\nBased on an assessment of the overall management team and Company performance achievement relative to financial metrics, a bonus pool is formed, based on a percentage of each employee’s annual base salary, for allocating awards relative to the individual performance category. The Managing Director recommends to the Remuneration and Nominations Committee the allocation of such awards for Key Management Personnel other than himself. The Remuneration and Nominations Committee determines the allocation of the Managing Director’s individual performance bonus, along with any adjustments (either positive or negative) to the recommendations made by the Managing Director for other Key Management Personnel.\n\nThe Committee has put in place a ceiling on short-term incentive awards with specific metrics that are aligned with the interests of shareholders. Annual incentive payouts should not exceed 10% of Net Operating Cash Flow (defined as Net Income adjusted for changes in Working Capital and Non-Cash Operating Expenses).\n\nAnnual Incentives The table below contains the payout leverage for performance achievement as a percent of target. \n\nAnnual Incentives The table below contains the payout leverage for performance achievement as a percent of target. \n\n- 34 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.653079547870263, + "doc_id": "fcc6a6171c6c410641d7662a8c1477d1a701772c31f4443d00bb4f6c77b19160", + "edit_distance": 0.3015463917525773, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.7015294153282784, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Retail Business Net Sales\n\nIn our ongoing effort to enhance the customer experience, we are focused on providing customers with a seamless experience across our channels. While our customers may engage with us through multiple channels, we know they value the overall Nordstrom brand experience and view us simply as Nordstrom, which is ultimately how we view our business. To provide additional transparency into our net sales by channel, we present the following summary of our Retail Business:\n\n1 Other retail includes our Jeffrey boutiques, Trunk Club and our Nordstrom Canada full-line store.\n\n2 Comparable sales include sales from stores that have been open at least one full year at the beginning of the year. We also include sales from our online channels (Nordstrom.com, Nordstromrack.com and HauteLook) in comparable sales because of the integration with our stores. Fiscal year 2012 includes an extra week (the 53 rd week) as a result of our 4-5-4 retail reporting calendar. The 53 rd week is not included in comparable sales calculations.\n\n3 Sales per square foot is calculated as net sales divided by weighted-average square footage. Weighted-average square footage includes a percentage of year-end square footage for new stores equal to the percentage of the year during which they were open. 4-wall sales per square foot is calculated as sales for Nordstrom U.S. full-line stores, Nordstrom Rack stores, Jeffrey boutiques, our Canada full-line store, Last Chance and Trunk Club showrooms divided by their weighted-average square footage.\n\n18", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## Retail Business Net Sales In our ongoing effort to enhance the customer experience, we are focused on providing customers with a seamless experience across our\n\nRetail Business Net Sales In our ongoing effort to enhance the customer experience, we are focused on providing customers with a seamless experience across our channels. While our customers may engage with us through multiple channels, we know they value the overall Nordstrom brand experience and view us simply as Nordstrom, which is ultimately how we view our business. To provide additional transparency into our net sales by channel, we present the following summary of our Retail Business:\n\n1 Other retail includes our Jeffrey boutiques, Trunk Club and our Nordstrom Canada full-line store. Comparable sales include sales from stores that have been open at least one full year at the beginning of the year. We also include sales from our online channels \n\nOther retail includes our Jeffrey boutiques, Trunk Club and our Nordstrom Canada full-line store. 2 Comparable sales include sales from stores that have been open at least one full year at the beginning of the year. We also include sales from our online channels (Nordstrom.com, Nordstromrack.com and HauteLook) in comparable sales because of the integration with our stores. Fiscal year 2012 includes an extra week (the 53 rd week) as a result of our 4-5-4 retail reporting calendar. The 53 rd week is not included in comparable sales calculations. Sales per square foot is calculated as net sales divided by weighted-average square footage. Weighted-average square footage includes a percentage of year-end square \n\nas a result of our 4-5-4 retail reporting calendar. The 53 week is not included in comparable sales calculations. 3 Sales per square foot is calculated as net sales divided by weighted-average square footage. Weighted-average square footage includes a percentage of year-end square footage for new stores equal to the percentage of the year during which they were open. 4-wall sales per square foot is calculated as sales for Nordstrom U.S. full-line stores, Nordstrom Rack stores, Jeffrey boutiques, our Canada full-line store, Last Chance and Trunk Club showrooms divided by their weighted-average square footage.\n\n18" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9608295449683961, + "doc_id": "254d1bb58397a65cc7a04e1ef0ac880113a87ebce8997a89b7226c83a18a7768", + "edit_distance": 0.7339743589743589, + "f1_score": 0.9902912621359223, + "meteor": 0.955541728568383, + "precision": 0.9935064935064936, + "pred_md": "The fair values of our Equity Derivatives are based on the quoted market value of RCI's Class B Non-Voting shares.\n\nFair value estimates are made at a specific point in time based on relevant market information and information about the financial instruments. The estimates are subjective in nature and involve uncertainties and matters of judgment.\n\nOur disclosure of the three-level hierarchy reflects the significance of the inputs used in measuring fair value:\n\n- GLYPH<129> Financial assets and financial liabilities in Level 2 include valuations using inputs based on observable market data, either directly or indirectly, other than the quoted prices.\n- GLYPH<129> Level 3 valuations are based on inputs that are not based on observable market data.\n\nThere were no material financial instruments categorized in Level 3 as at December 31, 2013 and 2012.\n\n- GLYPH<129> We determine fair value of financial assets and financial liabilities in Level 1 by referring to quoted prices in active markets for identical assets and liabilities.\n\nThe table below shows the financial instruments carried at fair value by valuation method as at December 31, 2013 and 2012.\n\nWe measure our long-term debt initially at fair value, and then at amortized cost using the effective interest method, as follows.\n\n1 Long-term debt (including current portion) is measured at level 2 in the three-level fair value hierarchy, based on year-end trading values as discussed above.\n\nWe did not have any non-derivative held-to-maturity financial assets during the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012.\n\n## NOTE 21: OTHER LONG-TERM LIABILITIES\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC.\n\n117\n\nNOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS", + "recall": 0.9870967741935484, + "true_md": "The fair values of our Equity Derivatives are based on the quoted market value of RCI’s Class B Non-Voting shares.\n\nFair value estimates are made at a specific point in time based on relevant market information and information about the financial instruments. The estimates are subjective in nature and involve uncertainties and matters of judgment.\n\nOur disclosure of the three-level hierarchy reflects the significance of the inputs used in measuring fair value:\n\nThe table below shows the financial instruments carried at fair value by valuation method as at December 31, 2013 and 2012.\n\nThere were no material financial instruments categorized in Level 3 as at December 31, 2013 and 2012.\n\nWe measure our long-term debt initially at fair value, and then at amortized cost using the effective interest method, as follows.\n\n1 Long-term debt (including current portion) is measured at level 2 in the three-level fair value hierarchy, based on year-end trading values as discussed above.\n\nWe did not have any non-derivative held-to-maturity financial assets during the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012.\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 117\n\n## NOTE 21: OTHER LONG-TERM LIABILITIES\n\nNOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n- GLYPH<129> We determine fair value of financial assets and financial liabilities in Level 1 by referring to quoted prices in active markets for identical assets and liabilities.\n\n- GLYPH<129> Financial assets and financial liabilities in Level 2 include valuations using inputs based on observable market data, either directly or indirectly, other than the quoted prices.\n\n- GLYPH<129> Level 3 valuations are based on inputs that are not based on observable market data." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7918894806589551, + "doc_id": "5b863c17433da4e150de7289b6ca5707b228edf26dd3df6c97fe233267bc0a85", + "edit_distance": 0.3404710920770878, + "f1_score": 0.8727272727272726, + "meteor": 0.8526671939924906, + "precision": 0.7966804979253111, + "pred_md": "' Rogers has long benefited from strong, independent voices and Directors in the boardroom and sound governance structures, which ensure that their influence is real. The structure of our Board is very much intended to ensure that the Directors and management act in the interests of all Rogers shareholders - an approach that has helped ensure the continuance of strong, independent, family-founded Canadian companies.'\n\nPETER C. GODSOE, O.C., O. Ont.\n\nLEAD DIRECTOR\n\nROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC.\n\n' Over the years, the Canadian economy has benefited greatly from family-founded and controlled companies that are able to take a longer-term view of investment horizons and general business management. At Rogers, we have successfully overlaid disciplined corporate governance processes that strike a healthy balance of being supportive of the company's continued success, making business sense, and benefiting all shareholders.'\n\nALAN D. HORN, CPA, CA CHAIRMAN OF THE BOARD ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC.\n\nThe Nominating Committee identifies prospective Director nominees for election by the shareholders and for appointment by the Board and also recommends nominees for each committee of the Board, including each committee's Chair.\n\nThe Human Resources Committee assists the Board in monitoring, reviewing and approving compensation and benefit policies and practices. The Committee is responsible for recommending senior management compensation and for monitoring succession planning with respect to senior executives.\n\nThe Executive Committee assists the Board in discharging its responsibilities in the intervals between meetings of the Board, including to act in such areas as specifically designated and authorized at a preceding meeting of the Board and to consider matters concerning the Company that may arise from time to time.\n\nThe Finance Committee reviews and reports to the Board on matters relating to the Company's investment strategies and general debt and equity structure.\n\nThe Pension Committee supervises the administration of the Company's pension plans and reviews the provisions and investment performance of the Company's pension plans.\n\n## ROGERS GOOD GOVERNANCE PRACTICES\n\nSEPARATION OF CEO & CHAIRMAN ROLES\n\nINDEPENDENT LEAD DIRECTOR\n\nCODE OF BUSINESS CONDUCT & WHISTLEBLOWER HOTLINE\n\nANNUAL REVIEWS OF BOARD & DIRECTOR PERFORMANCE\n\nREGULAR BOARD EDUCATION SESSIONS\n\nDIRECTOR SHARE OWNERSHIP GUIDELINES\n\nBOARD & COMMITTEE IN CAMERA DISCUSSIONS\n\nAUDIT COMMITTEE MEETINGS WITH INTERNAL & EXTERNAL AUDITORS\n\nCOMMITTEE AUTHORITY TO RETAIN INDEPENDENT ADVISORS\n\nORIENTATION PROGRAM FOR NEW DIRECTORS\n\nDIRECTOR MATERIAL RELATIONSHIP STANDARDS\n\nFor a complete description of Rogers corporate governance structure and practices and biographical information of our Directors and copies of our annual information circular and proxy, go to rogers.com/investors\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 19\n\nFORMAL CORPORATE GOVERNANCE POLICY & CHARTERS", + "recall": 0.964824120603015, + "true_md": "“ Rogers has long benefited from strong, independent voices and Directors in the boardroom and sound governance structures, which ensure that their influence is real. The structure of our Board is very much intended to ensure that the Directors and management act in the interests of all Rogers shareholders – an approach that has helped ensure the continuance of strong, independent, family-founded Canadian companies.”\n\n“ Over the years, the Canadian economy has benefited greatly from family-founded and controlled companies that are able to take a longer-term view of investment horizons and general business management. At Rogers, we have successfully overlaid disciplined corporate governance processes that strike a healthy balance of being supportive of the company’s continued success, making business sense, and benefiting all shareholders.”\n\nThe Nominating Committee identifies prospective Director nominees for election by the shareholders and for appointment by the Board and also recommends nominees for each committee of the Board, including each committee’s Chair.\n\nThe Human Resources Committee assists the Board in monitoring, reviewing and approving compensation and benefit policies and practices. The Committee is responsible for recommending senior management compensation and for monitoring succession planning with respect to senior executives.\n\nThe Executive Committee assists the Board in discharging its responsibilities in the intervals between meetings of the Board, including to act in such areas as specifically designated and authorized at a preceding meeting of the Board and to consider matters concerning the Company that may arise from time to time.\n\nThe Finance Committee reviews and reports to the Board on matters relating to the Company’s investment strategies and general debt and equity structure.\n\nThe Pension Committee supervises the administration of the Company’s pension plans and reviews the provisions and investment performance of the Company’s pension plans.\n\nFor a complete description of Rogers corporate governance structure and practices and biographical information of our Directors and copies of our annual information circular and proxy, go to rogers.com/investors\n\n## ROGERS GOOD GOVERNANCE PRACTICES\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 19\n\nALAN D. HORN, CPA, CA CHAIRMAN OF THE BOARD ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. \n\nPETER C. GODSOE, O.C., O. Ont. LEAD DIRECTOR ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8993864546317366, + "doc_id": "f22e71f57d29a042a2b4878f500f1bfdde370037360a83c9d08f14a3b41ad0fa", + "edit_distance": 0.5450643776824035, + "f1_score": 0.9549549549549549, + "meteor": 0.8580813113319435, + "precision": 0.9566787003610109, + "pred_md": "departments (back office) and the administrative departments (middle office) conduct the checks. In addition, the Internal Audit Unit of SMBC periodically performs comprehensive internal audits to verify that the risk management framework is functioning properly.\n\n## 3. Market and Liquidity Risk Management Methods\n\n## (1) Market Risk Management\n\nSMBC manages market risk by setting maximum limits for VaR and maximum loss. These limits are set within the 'risk capital limit' which is determined taking into account the bank's shareholders' equity and other principal indicators of the bank's financial position and management resources.\n\nMarket risk can be divided into various factors: foreign exchange rates, interest rates, equity prices and option risks. SMBC manages each of these risk categories by employing the VaR method as well as supplemental indicators suitable for managing the risk of each risk factor, such as the BPV.\n\nPlease note that, in the case of interest rate fluctuation risk, the methods for recognizing the dates for maturity of demand deposits (current accounts and ordinary deposit accounts that can be withdrawn at any time) and the method for estimating the time of cancellation prior to maturity of time deposits and consumer loans differ substantially. At SMBC, the maturity of demand deposits that are expected to be left with the bank for a prolonged period is regarded to be five years (2.5 years on average). The cancellation prior to maturity of time deposits and consumer loans is estimated based on historical data.\n\n## (a) VaR Results\n\nThe results of VaR calculations for fiscal 2010 are shown in the table below. SMBC's internal VaR model makes use of historical data to prepare scenarios for market fluctuations and, by conducting simulations of gains and losses, the model estimates the maximum losses that may occur (this is known as the\n\n## ■ VaR Results\n\nJune 2010\n\nSept. 2010\n\nDec. 2010\n\nMar. 2011\n\nMaximum\n\nMinimum\n\nAverage\n\nhistorical simulation method). This internal SMBC model is evaluated periodically by an independent auditing firm to assess its appropriateness and accuracy.\n\n## (b) Back-Testing Results\n\nThe relationship between the VaR calculated with the model and the actual profit and loss data is back-tested daily. The backtesting results for SMBC's trading accounts for fiscal 2010 are shown at the top of the next page. A data point below the diagonal line indicates a loss in excess of the predicted VaR for that day; however, as in fiscal 2009, there were no such excess losses during fiscal 2010. This demonstrates that the SMBC VaR model, with a one-sided confidence interval of 99.0%, is sufficiently reliable.\n\n## Glossary\n\n## 1. VaR (Value at risk)\n\nThe largest predicted loss that is possible given a fixed confidence interval. For example, VaR indicates, for a holding period of one day and a confidence interval of 99.0%, the maximum loss that may occur as a result of market fluctuations in one day with a probability of 1%.\n\n## 2. BPV (Basis point value)\n\nThe amount of change in assessed value as a result of a one basis point (0.01%) movement in interest rates.\n\n## 3. Trading\n\nA market operation for generating profit by taking advantage of short-term fluctuations in market values and differences in value among markets.\n\n## 4. Banking\n\nA market operation for generating profit through management of interest rates, terms, and other aspects of assets (loans, bonds, etc.) and liabilities (deposits, etc.).\n\n(Billions of yen)\n\nNote: VaR for a one-day holding period with a one-sided confidence interval of 99.0% [computed daily using the historical simulation method (based on four years of historical observations)].\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n40", + "recall": 0.9532374100719424, + "true_md": "historical simulation method). This internal SMBC model is evaluated periodically by an independent auditing firm to assess its appropriateness and accuracy.\n\ndepartments (back office) and the administrative departments (middle office) conduct the checks. In addition, the Internal Audit Unit of SMBC periodically performs comprehensive internal audits to verify that the risk management framework is functioning properly.\n\nSMBC manages market risk by setting maximum limits for VaR and maximum loss. These limits are set within the “risk capital limit” which is determined taking into account the bank’s shareholders’ equity and other principal indicators of the bank’s financial position and management resources. \n\nMarket risk can be divided into various factors: foreign exchange rates, interest rates, equity prices and option risks. SMBC manages each of these risk categories by employing the VaR method as well as supplemental indicators suitable for managing the risk of each risk factor, such as the BPV.\n\nPlease note that, in the case of interest rate fluctuation risk, the methods for recognizing the dates for maturity of demand depos- its (current accounts and ordinary deposit accounts that can be withdrawn at any time) and the method for estimating the time of cancellation prior to maturity of time deposits and consumer loans differ substantially. At SMBC, the maturity of demand deposits that are expected to be left with the bank for a prolonged period is regarded to be five years (2.5 years on average). The cancellation prior to maturity of time deposits and consumer loans is estimated based on historical data.\n\nThe results of VaR calculations for fiscal 2010 are shown in the table below. SMBC’s internal VaR model makes use of historical data to prepare scenarios for market fluctuations and, by conducting simulations of gains and losses, the model esti- mates the maximum losses that may occur (this is known as the \n\nA market operation for generating profit through management of interest rates, terms, and other aspects of assets (loans, bonds, etc.) and liabilities (deposits, etc.).\n\nA market operation for generating profit by taking advantage of short-term fluctuations in market values and differences in value among markets.\n\nThe amount of change in assessed value as a result of a one basis point (0.01%) movement in interest rates.\n\nThe largest predicted loss that is possible given a fixed con- fidence interval. For example, VaR indicates, for a holding period of one day and a confidence interval of 99.0%, the maximum loss that may occur as a result of market fluctua- tions in one day with a probability of 1%.\n\nThe relationship between the VaR calculated with the model and the actual profit and loss data is back-tested daily. The back- testing results for SMBC’s trading accounts for fiscal 2010 are shown at the top of the next page. A data point below the diagonal line indicates a loss in excess of the predicted VaR for that day; however, as in fiscal 2009, there were no such excess losses during fiscal 2010. This demonstrates that the SMBC VaR model, with a one-sided confidence interval of 99.0%, is sufficiently reliable.\n\nNote: VaR for a one-day holding period with a one-sided confidence interval of 99.0% [computed daily using the historical simulation method (based on four years of historical observations)].\n\nSMFG 2011 40\n\n## 4. Banking\n\n## 3. Trading\n\n## 2. BPV (Basis point value)\n\n## (a) VaR Results\n\n## ■ VaR Results\n\n## Glossary\n\n## (b) Back-Testing Results\n\n## (1) Market Risk Management\n\n## 3. Market and Liquidity Risk Management Methods\n\n## 1. VaR (Value at risk)\n\n(Billions of yen)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.04736937930063994, + "doc_id": "082ae5f6f9df17189583c8082c21da37b2ae2ce43495e3706cb4d8508c75c8e8", + "edit_distance": 0.897887323943662, + "f1_score": 0.576923076923077, + "meteor": 0.7292814718885365, + "precision": 0.40540540540540543, + "pred_md": "SMFG\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n## (b) Stock options granted and changes\n\nNumber of stock options\n\nDate of resolution\n\nJune 29, 2006\n\nJune 28, 2007\n\nJune 28, 2007\n\nJune 27, 2008\n\nJune 26, 2009\n\nBefore vested\n\nPrevious fiscal year-end ................................................\n\n-\n\n-\n\n-\n\n289,000\n\n350,000\n\nGranted .......................................................................\n\n-\n\n-\n\n-\n\n-\n\n-\n\nForfeited ......................................................................\n\n-\n\n-\n\n-\n\n-\n\n-\n\nVested..........................................................................\n\n-\n\n-\n\n-\n\n289,000\n\n-\n\nOutstanding ................................................................\n\n-\n\n-\n\n-\n\n-\n\n350,000\n\nAfter vested\n\nPrevious fiscal year-end ................................................\n\n115,000\n\n174,000\n\n112,000\n\n-\n\n-\n\nVested..........................................................................\n\n-\n\n-\n\n-\n\n289,000\n\n-\n\nExercised .....................................................................\n\n-\n\n-\n\n-\n\n-\n\n-\n\nForfeited ......................................................................\n\n-\n\n-\n\n-\n\n-\n\n-\n\nExercisable ...................................................................\n\n115,000\n\n174,000\n\n112,000\n\n289,000\n\n-\n\n## Price information (Yen)\n\nDate of resolution\n\nJune 28, 2001\n\nJune 27, 2002\n\nJune 27, 2003\n\nJune 29, 2004\n\nJune 29, 2005\n\nJune 29, 2006\n\nExercise price ...................................................................\n\n¥155\n\n¥131\n\n¥179\n\n¥202\n\n¥313\n\n¥490\n\nAverage exercise price ......................................................\n\n-\n\n144\n\n-\n\n-\n\n-\n\n-\n\nFair value at the grant date ..............................................\n\n-\n\n-\n\n-\n\n-\n\n-\n\n138\n\nDate of resolution\n\nJune 29, 2006\n\nJune 28, 2007\n\nJune 28, 2007\n\nJune 27, 2008\n\nJune 26, 2009\n\nExercise price ...................................................................\n\n¥490\n\n¥461\n\n¥461\n\n¥302\n\n¥193\n\nAverage exercise price ......................................................\n\n-\n\n-\n\n-\n\n-\n\n-\n\nFair value at the grant date ..............................................\n\n138\n\n96\n\n96\n\n37\n\n51\n\n(c) Method of estimating number of stock options vested\n\nOnly the actual number of forfeited stock options is reflected because it is difficult to rationally estimate the actual number of stock options that will be forfeited in the future.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n124", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "SMFG Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nNumber of stock options\n\nPrice information (Yen) \n\nSMFG 2011 124\n\nOnly the actual number of forfeited stock options is reflected because it is difficult to rationally estimate the actual number of stock options that will be forfeited in the future. \n\n- (b) Stock options granted and changes\n\n- (c) Method of estimating number of stock options vested" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.846481724890614, + "doc_id": "28aceccd440db23bf2886ebdb7f2e8f9b5331e07c00ecc689f071fa4e82fdb9f", + "edit_distance": 0.14285714285714285, + "f1_score": 0.9230769230769229, + "meteor": 0.8675523349436391, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Killam properties inc 2013 annual report", + "recall": 0.8571428571428571, + "true_md": "# Killam properties inc 2013 annual report" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6977648993797203, + "doc_id": "509f61cfd560a793de32015eb1f8443c27fce4136699118d342affc62c176d33", + "edit_distance": 0.8301158301158301, + "f1_score": 0.9955555555555556, + "meteor": 0.8607123690071563, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Board of Directors\n\n## Alfred J. Verrecchia\n\nChairman of the Board Hasbro, Inc.\n\n## Brian D. Goldner\n\nPresident and Chief Executive O cer ffi Hasbro, Inc.\n\n## Basil L. Anderson\n\nRetired Vice Chairman\n\nStaples, Inc.\n\n## Alan R. Batkin\n\nVice Chairman Eton Park Capital Management, L.P.\n\n## Frank J. Biondi, Jr.\n\nSenior Managing Director\n\nWaterView Advisors LLC\n\n## Kenneth A. Bronfi n\n\nPresident\n\nHearst Interactive Media\n\nJohn M. Connors, Jr.\n\nChairman Emeritus Hill Holliday\n\n## Executive O cers ffi\n\n## Brian D. Goldner\n\nPresident and Chief Executive O cer ffi\n\n## David D. R. Hargreaves\n\nChief Operating O cer ffi\n\nDeborah M. Thomas\n\nSenior Vice President and Chief Financial O cer ffi\n\nDuncan J. Billing\n\nGlobal Chief Development O cer ffi\n\n## Michael W. O. Garrett\n\nRetired Executive Vice President\n\nNestlé S.A.\n\n## Lisa Gersh\n\nPresident and Chief Operating O cer ffi Martha Stewart Living Omnimedia, Inc.\n\n## Jack M. Greenberg\n\nChairman The Western Union Company InnerWorkings, Inc.\n\n## Alan G. Hassenfeld\n\nRetired Chairman and Chief Executive O cer ffi Hasbro, Inc.\n\n## Tracy A. Leinbach\n\nRetired Executive Vice President and Chief Financial O cer ffi Ryder System, Inc.\n\n## Edward M. Philip\n\nManaging General Partner Highland Consumer Fund\n\n## Barbara Finigan\n\nSenior Vice President, Chief Legal O cer and Secretary ffi\n\nJohn A. Frascotti\n\nGlobal Chief Marketing O cer ffi\n\nMartin R. Trueb\n\nSenior Vice President and Treasurer", + "recall": 0.9911504424778761, + "true_md": "## Board of Directors\n\nMichael W. O. Garrett Retired Executive Vice President Nestlé S.A.\n\nAlfred J. Verrecchia Chairman of the Board Hasbro, Inc.\n\nLisa Gersh President and Chief Operating O ffi cer Martha Stewart Living Omnimedia, Inc. \n\nBrian D. Goldner President and Chief Executive O ffi cer Hasbro, Inc.\n\nBasil L. Anderson Retired Vice Chairman Staples, Inc.\n\nJack M. Greenberg Chairman The Western Union Company InnerWorkings, Inc. \n\nAlan G. Hassenfeld Retired Chairman and Chief Executive O ffi cer Hasbro, Inc.\n\nAlan R. Batkin Vice Chairman Eton Park Capital Management, L.P.\n\nFrank J. Biondi, Jr. Senior Managing Director WaterView Advisors LLC\n\nTracy A. Leinbach Retired Executive Vice President and Chief Financial O ffi cer Ryder System, Inc.\n\nKenneth A. Bronfi n President Hearst Interactive Media\n\nEdward M. Philip Managing General Partner Highland Consumer Fund\n\nJohn M. Connors, Jr. Chairman Emeritus Hill Holliday \n\nBrian D. Goldner President and Chief Executive O ffi cer\n\nBarbara Finigan Senior Vice President, Chief Legal O ffi cer and Secretary\n\nJohn A. Frascotti Global Chief Marketing O ffi cer\n\nDavid D. R. Hargreaves Chief Operating O ffi cer\n\nDeborah M. Thomas Senior Vice President and Chief Financial O ffi cer\n\nMartin R. Trueb Senior Vice President and Treasurer\n\nDuncan J. Billing Global Chief Development O ffi cer\n\n## Executive O ffi cers" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8553502697344025, + "doc_id": "8ec1ba81c8fbe1c625de5b9a01f32e6f56b4d265ee59d7cd7fcc5708e178b058", + "edit_distance": 0.13214285714285715, + "f1_score": 0.948051948051948, + "meteor": 0.8890080316136955, + "precision": 0.948051948051948, + "pred_md": "## management's Discussion and analysis\n\nDollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\n## Adjusted Funds From Operations ('AFFO')\n\nAFFO is a supplemental measure used by real estate analysts and some investors to represent FFO after taking into consideration the capital spend related to maintaining the earning capacity of a portfolio versus NOI enhancing capital investments. AFFO is a non-IFRS measure and Management believes that significant judgment is required to determine the annual capital expenditures that relate to maintaining earning capacity of an asset compared to the capital expenditures that will lead to higher rents or more efficient operations.\n\nIn order to provide investors with information to assist in assessing the Company's payout ratio, Management has calculated AFFO using the industry standard of $450 per apartment unit. the mHc industry does not have a standard amount for 'maintenance' related capital expenditures. Management has assumed $100 per MHC site as a reasonable estimate of non-NOI enhancing capital expenditures per MHC site. The weighted average number of rental units owned during the year was used to determine the capital adjustment applied to FFO to calculate aFFo.\n\n## For the years ended December 31,\n\n(1) Based on Killam's annualized dividend of $0.58. The dividend increase to $0.60 was not effective until the January 2014 dividend and therefore did not impact the 2013 payout ratio.\n\n46\n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013", + "recall": 0.948051948051948, + "true_md": "## Management’s Discussion and Analysis Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\n## Adjusted Funds From Operations (“AFFO”)\n\nManagement’s Discussion and Analysis Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\nAFFO is a supplemental measure used by real estate analysts and some investors to represent FFO after taking into consideration the capital spend related to maintaining the earning capacity of a portfolio versus NOI enhancing capital investments. AFFO is a non‑IFRS measure and Management believes that significant judgment is required to determine the annual capital expenditures that relate to maintaining earning capacity of an asset compared to the capital expenditures that will lead to higher rents or more efficient operations. \n\nIn order to provide investors with information to assist in assessing the Company’s payout ratio, Management has calculated AFFO using the industry standard of $450 per apartment unit. the mHc industry does not have a standard amount for “maintenance” related capital expenditures. Management has assumed $100 per MHC site as a reasonable estimate of non‑NOI enhancing capital expenditures per MHC site. The weighted average number of rental units owned during the year was used to determine the capital adjustment applied to FFO to calculate aFFo.\n\nFor the years ended December 31,\n\n(1) Based on Killam’s annualized dividend of $0.58. The dividend increase to $0.60 was not effective until the January 2014 dividend and therefore did not impact the 2013 payout ratio.\n\n46 Killam ProPerties inc | 2013" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.02418779861141417, + "doc_id": "677c28dbf39ac6f50dd0a9af0fabe9521d5fcd4c1f14ff5f1bb1901451f2830e", + "edit_distance": 0.9650655021834061, + "f1_score": 0.13559322033898305, + "meteor": 0.2879499217527387, + "precision": 0.07407407407407407, + "pred_md": "77\n\nNotes to the Financial Statements\n\n## 2012\n\nExternal sales revenue\n\n217,307\n\n140,065\n\n-\n\n-\n\n-\n\n-\n\n357,372\n\nOther revenue\n\n281\n\n819\n\n-\n\n-\n\n1,150\n\n-\n\n2,250\n\nTotal segment revenue\n\n217,588\n\n140,884\n\n-\n\n-\n\n1,150\n\n-\n\n359,622\n\nSegment EBITDA\n\n120,751\n\n65,730\n\n-\n\n(1,020)\n\n(519)\n\n(18,210)\n\n166,732\n\nDepreciation and amortisation\n\n(18,601)\n\n(48,723)\n\n-\n\n-\n\n-\n\n(229)\n\n(67,553)\n\nProfit / (loss) before finance cost\n\nand income tax\n\n102,150\n\n17,007\n\n-\n\n(1,020)\n\n(519)\n\n(18,439)\n\n99,179\n\nFinance income\n\n335\n\n256\n\n9\n\n1\n\n11\n\n857\n\n1,469\n\nFinance costs\n\n(4,558)\n\n(141)\n\n(5)\n\n(3)\n\n-\n\n(4,664)\n\n(9,371)\n\nNet finance costs\n\n(4,223)\n\n115\n\n4\n\n(2)\n\n11\n\n(3,807)\n\n(7,902)\n\nProfit / (loss) before tax\n\n97,927\n\n17,122\n\n4\n\n(1,022)\n\n(508)\n\n(22,246)\n\n91,277\n\nOther segment information\n\nSegment assets\n\n493,647\n\n379,434\n\n87,974\n\n50,481\n\n28,555\n\n8,368\n\n1,048,459\n\nSegment liabilities\n\n(131,314)\n\n(91,915)\n\n(926)\n\n(7,312)\n\n(882)\n\n(40,297)\n\n(272,646)\n\nSegment intercompany assets / (liabilities)\n\n(57,295)\n\n(29,085)\n\n(7,601)\n\n(21,946)\n\n(11,806)\n\n127,733\n\n-\n\ncontinued\n\nNotes to the Financial Statements\n\nu", + "recall": 0.8, + "true_md": "Notes to the Financial Statements 77\n\nNotes t o the Financial Statements\n\ncontinued u" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8808930429783441, + "doc_id": "d6d3d10e7aac29adcc00818d72f3d104134bba31b41422a78e7708d50a87a802", + "edit_distance": 0.753968253968254, + "f1_score": 0.9464285714285714, + "meteor": 0.8712793384093158, + "precision": 0.9636363636363636, + "pred_md": "SMFG\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n## (2) Information on stock acquisition rights is as follows:\n\n- (3) Information on dividends is as follows:\n\n(a) Dividends paid in the fiscal year ended March 31, 2010\n\nDate of resolution: Ordinary general meeting of shareholders held on June 26, 2009\n\nDate of resolution: Meeting of the Board of Directors held on November 13, 2009\n\n## (b) Dividends paid in the fiscal year ended March 31, 2011\n\nDate of resolution: Ordinary general meeting of shareholders held on June 29, 2010\n\nDate of resolution: Meeting of the Board of Directors held on November 12, 2010\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n94", + "recall": 0.9298245614035088, + "true_md": "SMFG Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nSMFG 2011 94$^{(2)}$\n\nDate of resolution: Ordinary general meeting of shareholders held on June 29, 2010\n\nDate of resolution: Meeting of the Board of Directors held on November 12, 2010\n\nDate of resolution: Meeting of the Board of Directors held on November 13, 2009\n\nDate of resolution: Ordinary general meeting of shareholders held on June 26, 2009\n\n(3) Information on dividends is as follows:\n\n(a) Dividends paid in the fiscal year ended March 31, 2010\n\nInformation on stock acquisition rights is as follows:\n\n(b) Dividends paid in the fiscal year ended March 31, 2011" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6132797326848132, + "doc_id": "59783032392e4d9982585f024d4b22974b480a003d42d84bd56289bbd2a5718f", + "edit_distance": 0.42649434571890144, + "f1_score": 0.9840425531914893, + "meteor": 0.6030165034201693, + "precision": 0.9840425531914894, + "pred_md": "## Return on Invested Capital ('ROIC') (Non-GAAP financial measure)\n\nWe believe that ROIC is a useful financial measure for investors in evaluating the efficiency and effectiveness of our use of capital and believe ROIC is an important component of shareholders' return over the long term. In addition, we incorporate ROIC in our executive incentive compensation measures. For the 12 fiscal months ended January 31, 2015, our ROIC decreased to 12.6% compared with 13.6% for the 12 fiscal months ended February 1, 2014. Our ROIC decreased compared with the prior year primarily due to the acquisition of Trunk Club in addition to ongoing store expansion and increased technology investments.\n\nROIC is not a measure of financial performance under generally accepted accounting principles ('GAAP') and should be considered in addition to, and not as a substitute for, return on assets, net earnings, total assets or other financial measures prepared in accordance with GAAP. Our method of determining non-GAAP financial measures may differ from other companies' methods and therefore may not be comparable to those used by other companies. The financial measure calculated under GAAP which is most directly comparable to ROIC is return on assets. The following is a reconciliation of the components of ROIC and return on assets:\n\n1 Capitalized operating leases is our best estimate of the asset base we would record for our leases that are classified as operating if they had met the criteria for a capital lease or we had purchased the property. Asset base is calculated as described in footnote 5 below.\n\n2 Based upon our effective tax rate multiplied by the net operating profit for the 12 fiscal months ended January 31, 2015, February 1, 2014, February 2, 2013, January 28, 2012 and January 29, 2011.\n\n3 Based upon the trailing 12-month average.\n\n4 Based upon the trailing 12-month average for accounts payable, accrued salaries, wages and related benefits, and other current liabilities.\n\n5 Based upon the trailing 12-month average of the monthly asset base. The asset base for each month is calculated as the trailing 12 months of rent expense multiplied by eight.\n\nThe multiple of eight times rent expense is a commonly used method of estimating the asset base we would record for our capitalized operating leases described in footnote 1.\n\n26", + "recall": 0.9840425531914894, + "true_md": "## Return on Invested Capital (“ROIC”) (Non-GAAP financial measure) We believe that ROIC is a useful financial measure for investors in evaluating the efficiency and effectiveness of our use of capital and\n\nReturn on Invested Capital (“ROIC”) (Non-GAAP financial measure) We believe that ROIC is a useful financial measure for investors in evaluating the efficiency and effectiveness of our use of capital and believe ROIC is an important component of shareholders’ return over the long term. In addition, we incorporate ROIC in our executive incentive compensation measures. For the 12 fiscal months ended January 31, 2015, our ROIC decreased to 12.6% compared with 13.6% for the 12 fiscal months ended February 1, 2014. Our ROIC decreased compared with the prior year primarily due to the acquisition of Trunk Club in addition to ongoing store expansion and increased technology investments.\n\nROIC is not a measure of financial performance under generally accepted accounting principles (“GAAP”) and should be considered in addition to, and not as a substitute for, return on assets, net earnings, total assets or other financial measures prepared in accordance with GAAP. Our method of determining non-GAAP financial measures may differ from other companies’ methods and therefore may not be comparable to those used by other companies. The financial measure calculated under GAAP which is most directly comparable to ROIC is return on assets. The following is a reconciliation of the components of ROIC and return on assets:\n\nor we had purchased the property. Asset base is calculated as described in footnote 5 below. 2 Based upon our effective tax rate multiplied by the net operating profit for the 12 fiscal months ended January 31, 2015, February 1, 2014, February 2, 2013, January 28, 2012 and January 29, 2011. Based upon the trailing 12-month average.\n\nand January 29, 2011. 3 Based upon the trailing 12-month average. Based upon the trailing 12-month average for accounts payable, accrued salaries, wages and related benefits, and other current liabilities.\n\nBased upon the trailing 12-month average. 4 Based upon the trailing 12-month average for accounts payable, accrued salaries, wages and related benefits, and other current liabilities. Based upon the trailing 12-month average of the monthly asset base. The asset base for each month is calculated as the trailing 12 months of rent expense multiplied by eight. \n\nBased upon the trailing 12-month average for accounts payable, accrued salaries, wages and related benefits, and other current liabilities. 5 Based upon the trailing 12-month average of the monthly asset base. The asset base for each month is calculated as the trailing 12 months of rent expense multiplied by eight. The multiple of eight times rent expense is a commonly used method of estimating the asset base we would record for our capitalized operating leases described in footnote 1.\n\n26\n\n1 Capitalized operating leases is our best estimate of the asset base we would record for our leases that are classified as operating if they had met the criteria for a capital lease or we had purchased the property. Asset base is calculated as described in footnote 5 below. Based upon our effective tax rate multiplied by the net operating profit for the 12 fiscal months ended January 31, 2015, February 1, 2014, February 2, 2013, January 28, 2012" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.839587623092576, + "doc_id": "416754ca6adbac5174aabd5a006e2698220ee66bfdc507699c209a7458e47977", + "edit_distance": 0.08333333333333333, + "f1_score": 0.9767441860465117, + "meteor": 0.9906187178914452, + "precision": 0.9545454545454546, + "pred_md": "SMFG\n\nConsolidated Statements of Changes in Net Assets\n\n## (Continued)\n\nSee accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n74", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "SMFG Consolidated Statements of Changes in Net Assets\n\n(Continued)\n\nSee accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.\n\nSMFG 2011 74" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9461399020825726, + "doc_id": "63051a2f2633c5bb35974409165fca989e1cfaefc7accb2391b0eacdbcf14b62", + "edit_distance": 0.21575342465753425, + "f1_score": 0.9757914338919925, + "meteor": 0.9749524272926773, + "precision": 0.9886792452830189, + "pred_md": "## Directors' Report\n\nYour Directors present their report on the Group consisting of Kingsgate Consolidated Limited and the entities it controlled at the end of, or during, the year ended 30 June 2013.\n\n## Directors\n\nThe following persons were Directors of Kingsgate Consolidated Limited during the whole of the financial year and up to the date of this report.\n\n- 〉 Ross Smyth-Kirk Chairman\n- 〉 Peter Alexander\n\nNon-Executive Director\n\n- 〉 Craig Carracher\n\nNon-Executive Director\n\n- 〉 Peter McAleer\n\nNon-Executive Director\n\n- 〉 Gavin Thomas\n\nExecutive Director\n\n## Principal activities\n\nThe principal activities of Kingsgate Consolidated Limited are mining and mineral exploration in Australia, South East Asia and South America.\n\n## Dividends\n\n## Review of operations and results\n\n## Operational performance\n\nKingsgate is a gold mining, development and exploration company based in Sydney, Australia. Kingsgate owns and operates two gold mines, the world class Chatree Mine in Thailand and the underground Challenger Mine in South Australia. In addition, the Company has two advanced development projects, the Nueva Esperanza Silver / Gold Project, in the highly prospective Maricunga Gold / Silver Belt in Chile, and the Bowdens Silver Project in New South Wales, Australia. From this operating and development platform, Kingsgate aims to build value for all shareholders.\n\nGroup gold production was 199,897 ounces, a decrease of 4% on the previous corresponding year. The contribution from Chatree was 133,681 ounces with 66,216 ounces from Challenger.\n\nDividends paid to members during the financial year were as follows:\n\nwww.kingsgate.com.au\n\nChatree gold production was 10% higher than the previous corresponding period as a result of an increase in throughput from the expanded Chatree process plant and access to higher grade oxide ore from Q Prospect.\n\nChallenger gold production was 24% lower than the previous corresponding year given additional dilution and depletion at Challenger Deeps and a shortfall in planned development. This resulted in lower ore tonnes from the mine that was supplemented by low grade stockpiled ore. Following the fall in the gold price a strategic review of Challenger was implemented that has resulted in a new mine plan to focus primarily on the higher grade Challenger West orebody. The new mine plan will be implemented during the first three months of the 2014 financial year.\n\nA lower gold price and industry wide cost pressures had a negative impact on the underlying earnings of the Group which contributed to a major impairment to the carrying value of a number of Group assets, particularly assets relating to the Challenger Gold Operations. Impairments totalling $332,808,000 were the major contributor to the after tax loss of $323,726,000 for the year.\n\nThe development projects continued to advance during the year. At Nueva Esperanza, the feasibility work shifted to focus on identifying the lowest cost and lowest power consumption development alternatives. This included reviewing a heap leach process option with on-site power generation. Further work is expected to be completed in the December quarter 2013. At Bowdens, the feasibility work has confirmed the optimum process route. Completion of the technical feasibility study including mine planning, infrastructure and metallurgy, and lodging of the Environmental Impact Statement ('EIS') are scheduled for 2014.", + "recall": 0.9632352941176471, + "true_md": "Directors’ Report 42\n\n## Directors’ Report\n\n## Directors\n\n## Review of operations and results\n\n## Operational performance\n\n## Principal activities\n\n## Dividends\n\nYour Directors present their report on the Group consisting of Kingsgate Consolidated Limited and the entities it controlled at the end of, or during, the year ended 30 June 2013.\n\nThe following persons were Directors of Kingsgate Consolidated Limited during the whole of the financial year and up to the date of this report.\n\nThe principal activities of Kingsgate Consolidated Limited are mining and mineral exploration in Australia, South East Asia and South America. \n\nDividends paid to members during the financial year were as follows:\n\nKingsgate is a gold mining, development and exploration company based in Sydney, Australia. Kingsgate owns and operates two gold mines, the world class Chatree Mine in Thailand and the underground Challenger Mine in South Australia. In addition, the Company has two advanced development projects, the Nueva Esperanza Silver / Gold Project, in the highly prospective Maricunga Gold / Silver Belt in Chile, and the Bowdens Silver Project in New South Wales, Australia. From this operating and development platform, Kingsgate aims to build value for all shareholders.\n\nGroup gold production was 199,897 ounces, a decrease of 4% on the previous corresponding year. The contribution from Chatree was 133,681 ounces with 66,216 ounces from Challenger. \n\nChatree gold production was 10% higher than the previous corresponding period as a result of an increase in throughput from the expanded Chatree process plant and access to higher grade oxide ore from Q Prospect. \n\nChallenger gold production was 24% lower than the previous corresponding year given additional dilution and depletion at Challenger Deeps and a shortfall in planned development. This resulted in lower ore tonnes from the mine that was supplemented by low grade stockpiled ore. Following the fall in the gold price a strategic review of Challenger was implemented that has resulted in a new mine plan to focus primarily on the higher grade Challenger West orebody. The new mine plan will be implemented during the first three months of the 2014 financial year.\n\nA lower gold price and industry wide cost pres- sures had a negative impact on the underlying earnings of the Group which contributed to a major impairment to the carrying value of a number of Group assets, particularly assets relating to the Challenger Gold Operations. Impairments totalling $332,808,000 were the major contributor to the after tax loss of $323,726,000 for the year. \n\nThe development projects continued to advance during the year. At Nueva Esperanza, the feasi- bility work shifted to focus on identifying the lowest cost and lowest power consumption development alternatives. This included reviewing a heap leach process option with on-site power generation. Further work is expected to be completed in the December quarter 2013. At Bowdens, the feasibility work has confirmed the optimum process route. Completion of the technical feasibility study including mine planning, infrastructure and metallurgy, and lodging of the Environmental Impact Statement (“EIS”) are scheduled for 2014.\n\nwww.kingsgate.com.au\n\n- 〉 Ross Smyth-Kirk Chairman\n\n- 〉 Peter Alexander Non-Executive Director\n\n- 〉 Craig Carracher Non-Executive Director\n\n- 〉 Peter McAleer Non-Executive Director\n\n- 〉 Gavin Thomas Executive Director" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9395061838469573, + "doc_id": "872b6aa6fde89de2b8d90c0d09a10213b3e485c190965912019529fad2b728e4", + "edit_distance": 0.6115843270868825, + "f1_score": 0.9976580796252928, + "meteor": 0.9211761328321093, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "SMFG\n\nCapital Ratio Information\n\n## ■ Market Risk\n\n## 1. Scope\n\nThe following approaches are used to calculate market risk equivalent amounts.\n\n## (1) Internal Models Method\n\nGeneral market risk of SMBC, Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation Europe Limited, Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation (China) Limited, SMBC Capital Markets, Inc., SMBC Nikko Capital Markets Limited, SMBC Derivative Products Limited, and SMBC Capital Markets (Asia) Limited\n\n## (2) Standardized Measurement Method\n\n- GLYPH<129> Specific risk\n- GLYPH<129> General market risk of consolidated subsidiaries other than SMBC, Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation Europe Limited, Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation (China) Limited, SMBC Capital Markets, Inc., SMBC Nikko Capital Markets Limited, SMBC Derivative Products Limited, and SMBC Capital Markets (Asia) Limited\n- GLYPH<129> A portion of general market risk of SMBC\n\n## 2. Valuation Method Corresponding to Transaction Characteristics\n\nAll assets and liabilities held in the trading book - therefore, subject to calculation of the market risk equivalent amount - are transactions with high market liquidity. Securities and monetary claims are carried at the fiscal year-end market price, and derivatives such as swaps, futures and options are stated at amounts that would be settled if the transactions were terminated at the consolidated balance sheet date.\n\n## 3. VaR Results (Trading Book)\n\nNotes: 1. The VaR results for a one-day holding period with a one-sided confidence interval of 99.0%, computed daily using the historical simulation method based on four years of historical observations.\n\n2. Specific risks for the trading book are excluded.\n\n- 3. Principal consolidated subsidiaries are included.\n\n## ■ Interest Rate Risk in Banking Book\n\nInterest rate risk in the banking book fluctuates significantly depending on the method of recognizing maturity of demand deposits (such as current accounts and ordinary deposits from which funds can be withdrawn on demand) and the method of predicting early withdrawal from fixed-term deposits and prepayment of consumer loans. Key assumptions made by SMBC in measuring interest rate risk in the banking book are as follows.\n\n## 1. Method of Recognizing Maturity of Demand Deposits\n\nThe total amount of demand deposits expected to remain with the bank for the long term (with 50% of the lowest balance during the past 5 years as the upper limit) is recognized as a core deposit amount and interest rate risk is measured for each maturity with 5 years as the maximum term (the average is 2.5 years).\n\n## 2. Method of Estimating Early Withdrawal from Fixed-term Deposits and Prepayment of Consumer Loans\n\nThe rate of early withdrawal from fixed-term deposits and the rate of prepayment of consumer loans are estimated and the rates are used to calculate cash flows used for measuring interest rate risk.\n\n## 3. VaR Results (Banking Book)\n\nNotes: 1. The VaR results for a one-day holding period with a one-sided confidence interval of 99.0%, computed daily using the historical simulation method based on four years of historical observations.\n\n2. Principal consolidated subsidiaries are included.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n200", + "recall": 0.9953271028037384, + "true_md": "SMFG Capital Ratio Information\n\n## ■ Market Risk\n\n## 1. Scope\n\n## 2. Valuation Method Corresponding to Transaction Characteristics\n\n## (2) Standardized Measurement Method\n\n## 3. VaR Results (Trading Book)\n\n## ■ Interest Rate Risk in Banking Book\n\n## 1. Method of Recognizing Maturity of Demand Deposits\n\n## 2. Method of Estimating Early Withdrawal from Fixed-term Deposits and Prepayment of Consumer Loans\n\n## 3. VaR Results (Banking Book)\n\nThe following approaches are used to calculate market risk equivalent amounts.\n\n## (1) Internal Models Method\n\nGeneral market risk of SMBC, Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation Europe Limited, Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation (China) Limited, SMBC Capital Markets, Inc., SMBC Nikko Capital Markets Limited, SMBC Derivative Products Limited, and SMBC Capital Markets (Asia) Limited\n\nSumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation (China) Limited, SMBC Capital Markets, Inc., SMBC Nikko Capital Markets Limited, SMBC \n\nDerivative Products Limited, and SMBC Capital Markets (Asia) Limited\n\nAll assets and liabilities held in the trading book — therefore, subject to calculation of the market risk equivalent amount — are transactions with high market liquidity. Securities and monetary claims are carried at the fiscal year-end market price, and derivatives such as swaps, futures and options are stated at amounts that would be settled if the transactions were terminated at the consolidated balance sheet date.\n\nNotes: 1. The VaR results for a one-day holding period with a one-sided confidence interval of 99.0%, computed daily using the historical simulation method based on four years of historical observations.\n\n2. Specific risks for the trading book are excluded.\n\n3. Principal consolidated subsidiaries are included.\n\nThe total amount of demand deposits expected to remain with the bank for the long term (with 50% of the lowest balance during the past 5 years as the upper limit) is recognized as a core deposit amount and interest rate risk is measured for each maturity with 5 years as the maximum term (the average is 2.5 years).\n\nInterest rate risk in the banking book fluctuates significantly depending on the method of recognizing maturity of demand deposits (such as current accounts and ordinary deposits from which funds can be withdrawn on demand) and the method of predicting early withdrawal from fixed-term deposits and prepayment of consumer loans. Key assumptions made by SMBC in measuring interest rate risk in the banking book are as follows.\n\nThe rate of early withdrawal from fixed-term deposits and the rate of prepayment of consumer loans are estimated and the rates are used to calculate cash flows used for measuring interest rate risk.\n\nNotes: 1. The VaR results for a one-day holding period with a one-sided confidence interval of 99.0%, computed daily using the historical simulation method based on four years of historical observations.\n\n2. Principal consolidated subsidiaries are included.\n\n- GLYPH<129> Specific risk\n\n- GLYPH<129> General market risk of consolidated subsidiaries other than SMBC, Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation Europe Limited, \n\n- GLYPH<129> A portion of general market risk of SMBC\n\nSMFG 2011 200" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9400689706440565, + "doc_id": "cb8fb0da4138377cda5ed556ce29cd37178dcaea57d2d151f982740d62935416", + "edit_distance": 0.043478260869565216, + "f1_score": 0.9760348583877994, + "meteor": 0.9590074566895026, + "precision": 0.9824561403508771, + "pred_md": "## ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. AT A GLANCE\n\n## ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS\n\nRogers Communications (TSX: RCI; NYSE: RCI) is a diversified Canadian telecommunications and media company. As discussed in the following pages, Rogers Communications is engaged in the telecom and media businesses through its primary operating segments Rogers Wireless, Rogers Cable, Rogers Business Solutions and Rogers Media.\n\nROGERS COMMUNICATIONS\n\nBUSINESS SOLUTIONS\n\n## WIRELESS SEGMENT\n\nRogers Wireless provides wireless voice and data communications services across Canada to approximately 9.5 million customers under the Rogers Wireless, Fido and chatr brands. Rogers Wireless is Canada's largest wireless provider and the only national carrier operating on the combined global standard GSM/HSPA+/LTE technology platforms. Rogers Wireless is Canada's leader in innovative wireless services, and provides customers with the best and latest wireless devices and applications and the fastest network speeds. Rogers Wireless also provides seamless wireless roaming across the U.S. and more than 200 other countries, and is the Canadian leader in the deployment of mobile commerce and machineto-machine communications.\n\n## CABLE AND BUSINESS SOLUTIONS SEGMENTS\n\nRogers Cable is a leading Canadian cable services provider, whose service territory covers approximately 4.0 million homes in Ontario, New Brunswick and Newfoundland representing approximately 30% of the Canadian cable market. Our advanced digital hybrid fibre-coax network provides market leading highspeed broadband Internet access speeds, the most innovative selection of digital television and online viewing and telephony services to millions of residential and small business customers. Together with Rogers Business Solutions, it also provides scalable carrier-grade business telecom, networking, hosting and managed data services, and IP connectivity and solutions to medium and large enterprise, government and carrier customers.\n\n## MEDIA SEGMENT\n\nRogers Media is Canada's premier destination for category-leading television and radio broadcasting, sports entertainment, publishing, and digital media properties. Television assets include national City network which reaches more than 80% of Canadians, five OMNI Television multilingual channels, seven regional and national Sportsnet channels, as well as specialty channels FX Canada, OLN, The Biography Channel and G4. Rogers Media also owns The Shopping Channel, Canada's only nationally televised and online shopping service. It operates more than 50 Canadian radio stations, publishes 50+ well known consumer and business magazines, and owns a suite of digital media properties. Media owns the Toronto Blue Jays Baseball Club and Rogers Centre, Canada's largest sports and entertainment facility. Rogers also holds a 37.5% investment in Maple Leaf Sports & Entertainment, owner of NHL Toronto Maple Leafs, NBA Toronto Raptors and MLS Toronto FC.", + "recall": 0.9696969696969697, + "true_md": "## ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. AT A GLANCE\n\n## ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS\n\nRogers Communications (TSX: RCI; NYSE: RCI) is a diversified Canadian telecommunications and media company. As discussed in the following pages, Rogers Communications is engaged in the telecom and media businesses through its primary operating segments Rogers Wireless, Rogers Cable, Rogers Business Solutions and Rogers Media. \n\n## ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS\n\nWIRELESS\n\nCABLE\n\nBUSINESS SOLUTIONS\n\nMEDIA\n\n## WIRELESS SEGMENT\n\nRogers Wireless provides wireless voice and data communications services across Canada to approximately 9.5 million customers under the Rogers Wireless, Fido and chatr brands. Rogers Wireless is Canada’s largest wireless provider and the only national carrier operating on the combined global standard GSM/HSPA+/LTE technology platforms. Rogers Wireless is Canada’s leader in innovative wireless services, and provides customers with the best and latest wireless devices and applications and the fastest network speeds. Rogers Wireless also provides seamless wireless roaming across the U.S. and more than 200 other countries, and is the Canadian leader in the deployment of mobile commerce and machine- to-machine communications.\n\n## CABLE AND BUSINESS SOLUTIONS SEGMENTS\n\nRogers Cable is a leading Canadian cable services provider, whose service territory covers approximately 4.0 million homes in Ontario, New Brunswick and Newfoundland representing approximately 30% of the Canadian cable market. Our advanced digital hybrid fibre-coax network provides market leading high- speed broadband Internet access speeds, the most innovative selection of digital television and online viewing and telephony services to millions of residential and small business customers. Together with Rogers Business Solutions, it also provides scalable carrier-grade business telecom, networking, hosting and managed data services, and IP connectivity and solutions to medium and large enterprise, government and carrier customers.\n\n## MEDIA SEGMENT\n\nRogers Media is Canada’s premier destination for category-leading television and radio broadcasting, sports entertainment, publishing, and digital media properties. Television assets include national City network which reaches more than 80% of Canadians, five OMNI Television multilingual channels, seven regional and national Sportsnet channels, as well as specialty channels FX Canada, OLN, The Biography Channel and G4. Rogers Media also owns The Shopping Channel, Canada’s only nationally televised and online shopping service. It operates more than 50 Canadian radio stations, publishes 50 + well known consumer and business magazines, and owns a suite of digital media properties. Media owns the Toronto Blue Jays Baseball Club and Rogers Centre, Canada’s largest sports and entertainment facility. Rogers also holds a 37.5% investment in Maple Leaf Sports & Entertainment, owner of NHL Toronto Maple Leafs, NBA Toronto Raptors and MLS Toronto FC." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9408831275101952, + "doc_id": "afe94d0670d4aa8ebd48f8e119a3d68aa72c80881be29c6273dc65414bf3c85a", + "edit_distance": 0.525, + "f1_score": 0.9641185647425896, + "meteor": 0.9010254507153033, + "precision": 0.9537037037037037, + "pred_md": "a\n\nn\n\nn\n\nu\n\na\n\nl\n\nr\n\ne\n\np\n\no\n\nr\n\nt\n\n2\n\n0\n\n1\n\n1\n\nand last year, these users battled more than 26 million times.\n\nThrough our partnership with Nelvana, d-rights and TakaraTomy, we set out to manage BEYBLADE as a long-term battling brand with continuous innovation. Leveraging global television programming and innovative play patterns, we are excited to be entering the next phase of our strategy with new, innovative play patterns.\n\nThe NERF brand, which has grown fourfold over the past fi ve years, delivered $410 million in revenue in 2011, essentially fl at with 2010, driven by strong growth from international markets. The NERF team continues to deliver great innovation for the brand and we have several major new initiatives planned for 2012.\n\n2011 also marked the fi rst year under our longterm partnership with Sesame Workshop. Together, we are building a year-round global brand and we are creating play experiences around a number of SESAME STREET characters, including ELMO, COOKIE MONSTER, and others, which engage children and help them learn.\n\n## U.S. & Canada Execution\n\nWhile our recent investments in establishing our global presence enabled us to deliver very strong growth in our international business and overall solid revenue growth for Hasbro during the fourth quarter and full year 2011, we did not meet our expectations for growth in the U.S. and Canada segment, including in the Games and Puzzles category. When we look to our success internationally, we know - and you can see - that our innovation, marketing and brands are very successful. While our performance in the U.S. and Canada segment was in line with the industry's overall decline of 2%, we believe we can do better.\n\nWe have appointed new leadership in the U.S. and Canada business, naming Wiebe Tinga President. Wiebe is a proven Hasbro executive with 24 years of experience leading global sales and marketing teams. He and his team are implementing an approach that is similar to how we go to market internationally. By focusing\n\nmarketing spend more on the consumer, by pricing our product to refl ect our innovation and by strengthening our partnerships with our retailers, we believe we can deliver better performance in the U.S. & Canada business.\n\n## Hasbro Gaming\n\nOur Games and Puzzles category performance was also disappointing last year, contributing to the weakness in the U.S. During the year, under new leadership, we outlined a multi-year plan to drive innovation and excellence in gaming, with the goal of stabilizing this business in 2012 and delivering growth in 2013 and beyond. We are now focusing on a core set of gaming brands. We have demonstrated in recent years that when we drive innovation in our gaming brands, we have delivered growth. But similar to the change we made in our toy business a few years back, we must focus our development and marketing resources on select gaming brands that we view as having the greatest global potential.\n\nAn example of the successful execution of this approach is MAGIC: THE GATHERING. The team at Wizards of the Coast has done a tremendous job of taking this brand, which totaled less than $100 million in revenues in 2008 and was declining, to where it is today - the largest brand in our Games and Puzzles category, the largest game brand in the U.S. and more than double its size versus just three years ago. It demonstrates that with new leadership, strong consumer insights, innovative game play, and the integration of face-to-face and digital play, gaming brands can thrive.\n\nWe also are working to better leverage the nearly one billion gamers in the marketplace today - that is fi ve times the number of gamers from just a few years ago. However, we recognize that we can't grow our gaming business in the future the same way we had grown it historically. To better leverage today's technology and digital play, we are working with great partners, including Electronic Arts and Activision, to develop Hasbro brands into digital games. We are also teaming with Jagex and NetDragon to bring TRANSFORMERS MMO", + "recall": 0.9747634069400631, + "true_md": "and last year, these users battled more than 26 million times. \n\nThrough our partnership with Nelvana, d-rights and TakaraTomy, we set out to manage BEYBLADE as a long-term battling brand with continuous innovation. Leveraging global television programming and innovative play patterns, we are excited to be entering the next phase of our strategy with new, innovative play patterns. \n\nThe NERF brand, which has grown fourfold over the past five years, delivered $410 million in revenue in 2011, essentially flat with 2010, driven by strong growth from international markets. The NERF team continues to deliver great innovation for the brand and we have several major new initiatives planned for 2012. \n\n2011 also marked the fi rst year under our long- term partnership with Sesame Workshop. Together, we are building a year-round global brand and we are creating play experiences around a number of SESAME STREET characters, including ELMO, COOKIE MONSTER, and others, which engage children and help them learn. \n\nmarketing spend more on the consumer, by pricing our product to refl ect our innovation and by strengthening our partnerships with our retailers, we believe we can deliver better performance in the U.S. & Canada business.\n\nOur Games and Puzzles category performance was also disappointing last year, contributing to the weakness in the U.S. During the year, under new leadership, we outlined a multi-year plan to drive innovation and excellence in gaming, with the goal of stabilizing this business in 2012 and delivering growth in 2013 and beyond. We are now focusing on a core set of gaming brands. We have demonstrated in recent years that when we drive innovation in our gaming brands, we have delivered growth. But similar to the change we made in our toy business a few years back, we must focus our development and marketing resources on select gaming brands that we view as having the greatest global potential. \n\nAn example of the successful execution of this approach is MAGIC: THE GATHERING. The team at Wizards of the Coast has done a tremendous job of taking this brand, which totaled less than $100 million in revenues in 2008 and was declining, to where it is today - the largest brand in our Games and Puzzles category, the largest game brand in the U.S. and more than double its size versus just three years ago. It demonstrates that with new leadership, strong consumer insights, innovative game play, and the integration of face-to-face and digital play, gaming brands can thrive.\n\nWhile our recent investments in establishing our global presence enabled us to deliver very strong growth in our international business and overall solid revenue growth for Hasbro during the fourth quarter and full year 2011, we did not meet our expectations for growth in the U.S. and Canada segment, including in the Games and Puzzles category. When we look to our success internationally, we know - and you can see - that our innovation, marketing and brands are very successful. While our performance in the U.S. and Canada segment was in line with the industry’s overall decline of 2%, we believe we can do better. \n\nWe have appointed new leadership in the U.S. and Canada business, naming Wiebe Tinga President. Wiebe is a proven Hasbro executive with 24 years of experience leading global sales and marketing teams. He and his team are implementing an approach that is similar to how we go to market internationally. By focusing \n\nWe also are working to better leverage the nearly one billion gamers in the marketplace today - that is five times the number of gamers from just a few years ago. However, we recognize that we can’t grow our gaming business in the future the same way we had grown it historically. To better leverage today’s technology and digital play, we are working with great partners, including Electronic Arts and Activision, to develop Hasbro brands into digital games. We are also teaming with Jagex and NetDragon to bring TRANSFORMERS MMO \n\n## U.S. & Canada Execution\n\n## Hasbro Gaming\n\nannual report 2011" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.924308936854055, + "doc_id": "36d8b65c3964b19e43f3ba97d93091bc43d95ab3494e118597eeea57bcc66773", + "edit_distance": 0.797164667393675, + "f1_score": 0.9515072083879423, + "meteor": 0.7521023910808191, + "precision": 0.9654255319148937, + "pred_md": "Liquidity risk is managed within the context of cash-flow plans and funding gap. Other risk categories are managed with procedures closely attuned to the nature of the risk, as described in the following paragraphs.\n\n## (2) Stress Testing\n\nIn the current volatile business environment, stress testing to analyze and estimate the adverse effects of events such as an economic recession and market volatility on the business and financial conditions of financial institutions is increasingly essential. When establishing a management plan, SMFG also conducts stress tests using a number of stress events to analyze and estimate their impact on its financial condition.\n\n## Implementation of Basel II\n\nBasel II is an international agreement on the minimum capital requirements for internationally active banks, and it has been applied since March 31, 2007, to the internationally active banks in Japan.\n\nUnder the Basel II framework, there are multiple approaches to calculating the capital requirements. We have adopted the advanced internal ratings-based (IRB) approach for credit risk and the Advanced Measurement Approach (AMA) for operational risk since March 31, 2009 and March 31, 2008 respectively.\n\nDetails of our initiatives are provided below, and detailed information on the capital ratio is provided in the discussion on Capital Ratio Information appearing in the Financial Section and Corporate Data.\n\n## Credit Risk\n\n## 1. Basic Approach to Credit Risk Management\n\n## (1) Definition of Credit Risk\n\nCredit risk is the possibility of a loss arising from a credit event, such as deterioration in the financial condition of a borrower, that causes an asset (including off-balance sheet transactions) to lose value or become worthless.\n\nOverseas credits also include an element of country risk, which is closely related to credit risk. This is the risk of loss caused by changes in foreign exchange, or political or economic situations.\n\n## (2) Fundamental Principles for Credit Risk Management\n\nAll Group companies follow the fundamental principles established by SMFG to assess and manage credit risk on a Groupwide basis and further raise the level of accuracy and comprehensiveness of Groupwide credit risk management. Each Group company must comprehensively manage credit risk according to the nature of its business, and assess and manage credit risk of individual loans and credit portfolios quantitatively and using consistent standards.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n34\n\nCredit risk is the most significant risk to which SMFG is exposed. Without effective credit risk management, the impact of the corresponding losses on operations can be overwhelming.\n\nThe purpose of credit risk management is to keep credit risk exposure to a permissible level relative to capital, to maintain the soundness of Groupwide assets, and to ensure returns commensurate with risk. This leads to a loan portfolio that achieves high returns on capital and assets.\n\n## (3) Credit Policy\n\nSMBC's credit policy comprises clearly stated universal and basic operating concepts, policies, and standards for credit operations, in accordance with the business mission and rules of conduct.\n\nSMBC is promoting the understanding of and strict adherence to its credit policy among all its managers and employees. By conducting risk-sensitive credit management, SMBC aims to enhance shareholder value and play a key part in society by providing highvalue-added financial services.\n\n## 2. Credit Risk Management System\n\nAt SMBC, the Credit & Investment Planning Department within the Risk Management Unit is responsible for the comprehensive management of credit risk. This department drafts and administers credit policies, the internal rating system, credit authority guidelines, and credit application guidelines, and manages nonperforming loans (NPLs) and other aspects of credit portfolio management. The department also cooperates with the Corporate Risk Management Department in quantifying credit risk (risk capital and risk-weighted assets) and controls the bank's entire credit risk. Further, the Credit Portfolio Management Department within the Credit & Investment Planning Department has been strengthening its active portfolio management function whereby loan securitization and other market transactions are used to stabilize the portfolio's credit risk for a more sophisticated portfolio.\n\nThe Corporate Research Department within the Corporate Services Unit performs research on industries as well as investigates the business situations of borrower enterprises to detect early signs of problems or growth potential. The Credit Administration Department is responsible for handling NPLs of borrowers classified as potentially bankrupt or lower, and draws up plans for their workouts, including write-offs, and corporate rehabilitation. The department closely liaises with the Group company SMBC Servicer Co., Ltd., which engages in related services, and works to efficiently reduce the amount of NPLs by such means as the sell-off of claims.\n\nThe Credit Departments within each business unit conduct credit risk management along with branches, for loans handled by their units and manage their units' portfolios. The credit limits they use are based on the baseline amounts established for each grading category, with particular attention paid to evaluating and managing customers or loans perceived to have particularly high credit risk.", + "recall": 0.937984496124031, + "true_md": "Liquidity risk is managed within the context of cash-flow plans and funding gap. Other risk categories are managed with proce- dures closely attuned to the nature of the risk, as described in the following paragraphs.\n\nCredit risk is the most significant risk to which SMFG is exposed. Without effective credit risk management, the impact of the corresponding losses on operations can be overwhelming. \n\nThe purpose of credit risk management is to keep credit risk exposure to a permissible level relative to capital, to maintain the soundness of Groupwide assets, and to ensure returns commen- surate with risk. This leads to a loan portfolio that achieves high returns on capital and assets.\n\nIn the current volatile business environment, stress testing to analyze and estimate the adverse effects of events such as an economic recession and market volatility on the business and financial condi- tions of financial institutions is increasingly essential. When estab- lishing a management plan, SMFG also conducts stress tests using a number of stress events to analyze and estimate their impact on its financial condition.\n\nSMBC’s credit policy comprises clearly stated universal and basic operating concepts, policies, and standards for credit operations, in accordance with the business mission and rules of conduct.\n\nSMBC is promoting the understanding of and strict adherence to its credit policy among all its managers and employees. By con- ducting risk-sensitive credit management, SMBC aims to enhance shareholder value and play a key part in society by providing high- value-added financial services.\n\nBasel II is an international agreement on the minimum capital requirements for internationally active banks, and it has been applied since March 31, 2007, to the internationally active banks in Japan.\n\nUnder the Basel II framework, there are multiple approaches to calculating the capital requirements. We have adopted the advanced internal ratings-based (IRB) approach for credit risk and the Advanced Measurement Approach (AMA) for operational risk since March 31, 2009 and March 31, 2008 respectively.\n\nDetails of our initiatives are provided below, and detailed infor- mation on the capital ratio is provided in the discussion on Capital Ratio Information appearing in the Financial Section and Corporate Data.\n\nAt SMBC, the Credit & Investment Planning Department within the Risk Management Unit is responsible for the comprehensive management of credit risk. This department drafts and adminis- ters credit policies, the internal rating system, credit authority guidelines, and credit application guidelines, and manages non- performing loans (NPLs) and other aspects of credit portfolio management. The department also cooperates with the Corporate Risk Management Department in quantifying credit risk (risk capital and risk-weighted assets) and controls the bank’s entire credit risk. Further, the Credit Portfolio Management Department within the Credit & Investment Planning Department has been strengthening its active portfolio management function whereby loan securitization and other market transactions are used to stabilize the portfolio’s credit risk for a more sophisticated portfolio.\n\nThe Corporate Research Department within the Corporate Services Unit performs research on industries as well as investi- gates the business situations of borrower enterprises to detect early signs of problems or growth potential. The Credit Administration Department is responsible for handling NPLs of borrowers classi- fied as potentially bankrupt or lower, and draws up plans for their workouts, including write-offs, and corporate rehabilitation. The department closely liaises with the Group company SMBC Servicer Co., Ltd., which engages in related services, and works to efficiently reduce the amount of NPLs by such means as the sell-off of claims.\n\nThe Credit Departments within each business unit conduct credit risk management along with branches, for loans handled by their units and manage their units’ portfolios. The credit limits they use are based on the baseline amounts established for each grading category, with particular attention paid to evaluating and managing customers or loans perceived to have particularly high credit risk.\n\nAll Group companies follow the fundamental principles established by SMFG to assess and manage credit risk on a Groupwide basis and further raise the level of accuracy and comprehensiveness of Groupwide credit risk management. Each Group company must comprehensively manage credit risk according to the nature of its business, and assess and manage credit risk of individual loans and credit portfolios quantitatively and using consistent standards. \n\nOverseas credits also include an element of country risk, which is closely related to credit risk. This is the risk of loss caused by changes in foreign exchange, or political or economic situations.\n\nCredit risk is the possibility of a loss arising from a credit event, such as deterioration in the financial condition of a borrower, that causes an asset (including off-balance sheet transactions) to lose value or become worthless.\n\nSMFG 2011 34\n\n## (2) Stress Testing\n\n## Implementation of Basel II\n\n## (3) Credit Policy\n\n## 2. Credit Risk Management System\n\n## Credit Risk\n\n## 1. Basic Approach to Credit Risk Management\n\n## (1) Definition of Credit Risk\n\n## (2) Fundamental Principles for Credit Risk Management" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7638457321580228, + "doc_id": "9209367a2fed8f8a68ee1039191c4b03ec9b9160b74d2441fef0e0ab792ef5a3", + "edit_distance": 0.4807692307692308, + "f1_score": 0.9747899159663864, + "meteor": 0.9174109696315137, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## 20 largest shareholders\n\n20 largest shareholders of quoted ordinary shares\n\n## Unquoted equity securities\n\nThere were 2 option holders holding 4,833,334 options.\n\n## Unquoted equity security holdings greater than 20%\n\n## Voting rights\n\n## Ordinary shares\n\nOn a show of hands every member present at a meeting in person or by proxy shall have one vote and upon a poll each share shall have one vote.\n\n## Options\n\nNo voting rights.\n\nPerformance rights\n\nNo voting rights.\n\nDeferred rights\n\nNo voting rights.\n\nShareholder Information", + "recall": 0.9508196721311475, + "true_md": "115 Shareholder Information\n\nShareholder Inf ormation\n\n## 20 largest shareholders\n\n20 largest shareholders of quoted ordinary shares\n\n## Unquoted equity security holdings greater than 20%\n\n## Unquoted equity securities\n\n## Voting rights\n\nThere were 2 option holders holding 4,833,334 options.\n\nOn a show of hands every member present at a meeting in person or by proxy shall have one vote and upon a poll each share shall have one vote.\n\nNo voting rights.\n\nNo voting rights.\n\nNo voting rights.\n\n## Ordinary shares\n\n## Options\n\n## Performance rights\n\n## Deferred rights" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9026152568452469, + "doc_id": "b5df3ac32afbe001c64df7527ba187a540c83f27c1646319eefc154400dff6fe", + "edit_distance": 0.6871165644171779, + "f1_score": 0.9872773536895675, + "meteor": 0.9199344530770264, + "precision": 0.9897959183673469, + "pred_md": "MANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS\n\n## OUR STRENGTHS\n\n## LEADER IN CANADIAN COMMUNICATIONS INDUSTRY\n\nCanada's largest wireless carrier and a leading cable television provider, offering quad-play services (i.e. wireless, television, Internet and telephony) to consumers and businesses.\n\n## POWERFUL BRANDS\n\nStrong nationally recognized and highly respected premium brands that we believe evoke innovation, entrepreneurial spirit, choice and value.\n\n## LEADING NETWORKS AND INNOVATIVE PRODUCTS\n\nLeading Canadian wireless and cable internet network platforms that have been recognized as offering fastest speeds upon which to deliver the innovative communications, media, information and entertainment services.\n\n## MUST-HAVE PRODUCTS AND SERVICES\n\nA leading Canadian provider of communications and entertainment products and services that are becoming increasingly integrated and necessary in today's world.\n\n## CATEGORY-LEADING MEDIA ASSETS\n\nUnique and complementary collection of leading Canadian broadcast radio and television, specialty TV, sports media and entertainment, publishing and digital media assets.\n\n30\n\nROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n## SUPERIOR ASSET MIX\n\nMajority of revenue and cash flow is generated from wireless and Internet services.\n\n## PROVEN LEADERSHIP AND ENGAGED EMPLOYEE BASE\n\nExperienced performance-oriented management and operating teams, with highly developed industry expertise, supported by the spirit of innovation and an entrepreneurial culture.\n\n## FINANCIAL STRENGTH AND FLEXIBILITY\n\nFinancially strong with an investment grade balance sheet, conservative debt leverage and significant available liquidity.\n\n## HEALTHY TRADING VOLUMES AND HISTORY OF DIVIDEND GROWTH\n\nOur common stock actively trades on the TSX and NYSE with an average daily trading volume of approximately 1.6 million shares. Dividends have increased in each of the last 5 years and each share paid an annualized dividend of $1.74 in 2013. In February 2014, we further increased our annualized dividend by 5 % to $1.83.", + "recall": 0.9847715736040609, + "true_md": "MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS\n\n## OUR STRENGTHS\n\n## LEADER IN CANADIAN COMMUNICATIONS INDUSTRY\n\n## SUPERIOR ASSET MIX\n\n## PROVEN LEADERSHIP AND ENGAGED EMPLOYEE BASE\n\n## POWERFUL BRANDS\n\n## LEADING NETWORKS AND INNOVATIVE PRODUCTS\n\n## MUST-HAVE PRODUCTS AND SERVICES\n\n## CATEGORY-LEADING MEDIA ASSETS\n\n## HEALTHY TRADING VOLUMES AND HISTORY OF DIVIDEND GROWTH\n\n## FINANCIAL STRENGTH AND FLEXIBILITY\n\nMajority of revenue and cash flow is generated from wireless and Internet services.\n\nCanada’s largest wireless carrier and a leading cable television provider, offering quad-play services (i.e. wireless, television, Internet and telephony) to consumers and businesses.\n\nStrong nationally recognized and highly respected premium brands that we believe evoke innovation, entrepreneurial spirit, choice and value.\n\nLeading Canadian wireless and cable internet network platforms that have been recognized as offering fastest speeds upon which to deliver the innovative communications, media, information and entertainment services.\n\nA leading Canadian provider of communications and entertainment products and services that are becoming increasingly integrated and necessary in today’s world.\n\nUnique and complementary collection of leading Canadian broadcast radio and television, specialty TV, sports media and entertainment, publishing and digital media assets.\n\nOur common stock actively trades on the TSX and NYSE with an average daily trading volume of approximately 1.6 million shares. Dividends have increased in each of the last 5 years and each share paid an annualized dividend of $1.74 in 2013. In February 2014, we further increased our annualized dividend by 5 % to $1.83.\n\nFinancially strong with an investment grade balance sheet, conservative debt leverage and significant available liquidity.\n\nExperienced performance-oriented management and operating teams, with highly developed industry expertise, supported by the spirit of innovation and an entrepreneurial culture.\n\n30 ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6823012611240753, + "doc_id": "d7dbc97d04d435c40bc19cc93c025980057cad89c635853c9074ee4ffed96ec3", + "edit_distance": 0.19047619047619047, + "f1_score": 0.9333333333333333, + "meteor": 0.8947766040636721, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "83\n\nNotes to the Financial Statements\n\n## Movement in deferred tax balances\n\nNotes to the Financial Statements\n\ncontinued\n\nu", + "recall": 0.875, + "true_md": "Notes to the Financial Statements 83\n\n## Movement in deferred tax balances\n\nNotes t o the Financial Statements\n\ncontinued u" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8777822563311609, + "doc_id": "2f2a53fd34da7c8f7196f8561027eb7bdca25e2554b0d327706b09ec9a248295", + "edit_distance": 0.3923611111111111, + "f1_score": 0.9560810810810811, + "meteor": 0.8941728837613993, + "precision": 0.9593220338983051, + "pred_md": "SMFG\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n## (2) Geographic segment information\n\nNotes: 1. The geographic segmentation is classified based on the degrees of the following factors: geographic proximity, similarity of economic activities and relationship of business activities among regions. Ordinary income and ordinary profit are presented as counterparts of sales and operating profit of companies in other industries. 2. The Americas includes the United States, Brazil, Canada and others; Europe and Middle East includes the United Kingdom, Germany, France and others; Asia and Oceania includes China, Singapore, Australia and others except Japan.\n\n3. Assets in Elimination include unallocated corporate assets of ¥6,214,065 million at March 31, 2010, which mainly consist of investments in subsidiaries and affiliates.\n\n- 4. Ordinary income represents total income excluding gains on disposal of fixed assets, recoveries of written-off claims and other extraordinary gains. Ordinary expenses represent total expenses excluding losses on disposal of fixed assets, losses on impairment of fixed assets and other extraordinary expenses.\n\n5. As mentioned in Note 2. (22) (a), 'Accounting Standard for Financial Instruments' (ASBJ Statement No. 10, partially revised on March 10, 2008) and 'Implementation Guidance on Disclosures about Fair Value of Financial Instruments' (ASBJ Guidance No. 19, issued on March 10, 2008) became effective from the fiscal year ending on and after March 31, 2010, and SMFG has applied them from the fiscal year ended March 31, 2010. As a result of the accounting change, Ordinary expenses of 'Japan' for the year ended March 31, 2010 decreased by ¥19,251 million and Ordinary profit of 'Japan' increased by ¥19,251 million as compared with the former method. Assets of 'Japan,' 'Europe and Middle East' and 'Asia and Oceania' increased by ¥58,612 million, ¥341 million and ¥181 million, respectively. Assets of 'The Americas' decreased by ¥567 million.\n\n## (3) Ordinary income from overseas operations\n\nNotes: 1. Consolidated ordinary income from overseas operations is presented as a counterpart of overseas sales of companies in other industries.\n\n2. The table above shows ordinary income from transactions of overseas branches of SMBC and transactions of overseas consolidated subsidiaries, excluding internal income. These extensive transactions are not categorized by transaction party and the geographic segment information is not presented because such information is not available.\n\n## 35. Business Combinations\n\nFiscal year ended March 31, 2011\n\n- <Business combination through acquisition>\n- Cedyna Financial Corporation consolidated as a subsidiary through a third-party allotment of new shares\n\nSMFG Card & Credit, Inc. ('FGCC'), a wholly-owned subsidiary of SMFG, subscribed all the new shares issued by way of a third-party allotment by Cedyna Financial Corporation ('Cedyna'), an equity method affiliate of SMFG, on May 31, 2010. Cedyna became a consolidated subsidiary of SMFG. The outline of the business combination is as follows:\n\n- 1. Outline of the business combination\n- (1) Name of the acquired company and its business Cedyna (Credit Card Services)\n- (2) Main reasons for the business combination FGCC subscribed new shares issued by way of a third-party allotment by Cedyna and made Cedyna a consolidated subsidiary of SMFG in order to accelerate and ensure Cedyna's management restructuring including its investments in new businesses and systems developments to increase the corporate value as well as its cost restructuring, to further clarify the positioning of Cedyna as one of the core business entities, together with Sumitomo Mitsui Card Company, Limited of\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n130\n\n- SMFG Group's credit card services and to enhance Cedyna's capital base.\n- (3) Date of business combination May 31, 2010\n- (4) Legal form of the business combinations Consolidated as a subsidiary through a third-party allotment of new shares\n- (5) Name of the controlling entity after the business combination Sumitomo Mitsui Financial Group, Inc.\n\n(7) Main reason for deciding to acquire the company t is because SMFG acquired a majority of voting rights of I Cedyna and consolidated it as a subsidiary.\n\n- 2. Period of the acquired company's financial results included in the consolidated statements of income\n\nFrom April 1, 2010 to March 31, 2011\n\nNote that as the deemed acquisition date is June 30, 2010, gain or loss related to the acquired company for the period from April 1, 2010 to June 30, 2010 is presented as gain or loss from", + "recall": 0.9528619528619529, + "true_md": "SMFG\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n## Geographic segment information\n\n## (3) Ordinary income from overseas operations\n\n## 35. Business Combinations\n\nSMFG 2011 130$^{(2)}$\n\nNotes: 1. The geographic segmentation is classified based on the degrees of the following factors: geographic proximity, similarity of economic activities and relationship of business activities among regions. Ordinary income and ordinary profit are presented as counterparts of sales and operating profit of companies in other industries.\n\n2. The Americas includes the United States, Brazil, Canada and others; Europe and Middle East includes the United Kingdom, Germany, France and others; Asia and Oceania includes China, Singapore, Australia and others except Japan.\n\n3. Assets in Elimination include unallocated corporate assets of ¥6,214,065 million at March 31, 2010, which mainly consist of investments in subsidiaries and affiliates.\n\n4. Ordinary income represents total income excluding gains on disposal of fixed assets, recoveries of written-off claims and other extraordinary gains. Ordinary expenses represent total expenses excluding losses on disposal of fixed assets, losses on impairment of fixed assets and other extraordinary expenses.\n\n5. As mentioned in Note 2. (22) (a), “Accounting Standard for Financial Instruments” (ASBJ Statement No. 10, partially revised on March 10, 2008) and “Implementation Guidance on Disclosures about Fair Value of Financial Instruments” (ASBJ Guidance No. 19, issued on March 10, 2008) became effective from the fiscal year ending on and after March 31, 2010, and SMFG has applied them from the fiscal year ended March 31, 2010. As a result of the accounting change, Ordinary expenses of “Japan” for the year ended March 31, 2010 decreased by ¥19,251 million and Ordinary profit of “Japan” increased by ¥19,251 million as compared with the former method. Assets of “Japan,” “Europe and Middle East” and “Asia and Oceania” increased by ¥58,612 million, ¥341 million and ¥181 million, respectively. Assets of “The Americas” decreased by ¥567 million.\n\nNotes: 1. Consolidated ordinary income from overseas operations is presented as a counterpart of overseas sales of companies in other industries.\n\n2. The table above shows ordinary income from transactions of overseas branches of SMBC and transactions of overseas consolidated subsidiaries, excluding internal income. These extensive transactions are not categorized by transaction party and the geographic segment information is not presented because such information is not available.\n\nFiscal year ended March 31, 2011\n\nSMFG Group’s credit card services and to enhance Cedyna’s capital base.\n\nCedyna Financial Corporation consolidated as a subsidiary through a third-party allotment of new shares\n\n## <Business combination through acquisition>\n\nSMFG Card & Credit, Inc. (“FGCC”), a wholly-owned subsidiary of SMFG, subscribed all the new shares issued by way of a third-party allotment by Cedyna Financial Corporation (“Cedyna”), an equity method affiliate of SMFG, on May 31, 2010. Cedyna became a consolidated subsidiary of SMFG. The outline of the business combination is as follows:\n\n- 1. Outline of the business combination\n\n- (1) Name of the acquired company and its business Cedyna (Credit Card Services)\n\n- (2) Main reasons for the business combination\n\n- (3) Date of business combination\n\n- (4) Legal form of the business combinations\n\n- (5) Name of the controlling entity after the business combination\n\n- (6) Percentage share of voting rights SMFG has acquired\n\n- (7) Main reason for deciding to acquire the company\n\n- 2. Period of the acquired company’s financial results included in the consolidated statements of income\n\nFrom April 1, 2010 to March 31, 2011\n\nNote that as the deemed acquisition date is June 30, 2010, gain or loss related to the acquired company for the period from April 1, 2010 to June 30, 2010 is presented as gain or loss from \n\n FGCC subscribed new shares issued by way of a third-party allotment by Cedyna and made Cedyna a consolidated subsidiary of SMFG in order to accelerate and ensure Cedyna’s management restructuring including its investments in new businesses and systems developments to increase the corporate value as well as its cost restructuring, to further clarify the positioning of Cedyna as one of the core business entities, together with Sumitomo Mitsui Card Company, Limited of \n\n It is because SMFG acquired a majority of voting rights of Cedyna and consolidated it as a subsidiary.\n\nSumitomo Mitsui Financial Group, Inc.\n\n Consolidated as a subsidiary through a third-party allotment of new shares\n\nMay 31, 2010" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "53feb110325da41e89d77399687dd096ba2753fe79350f5ff71e40ea02a28c31", + "edit_distance": 0.6666666666666666, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.8518518518518519, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "226\n\nSMFG 2011", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "SMFG 2011 226" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9147125793086432, + "doc_id": "65f36f812f2fb44fc1a9978aa3f0dabb0e3e4f007404264a8ed983719eba3171", + "edit_distance": 0.15532286212914484, + "f1_score": 0.9849462365591397, + "meteor": 0.8462544260501781, + "precision": 0.9870689655172413, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 1 - STATEMENT OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES continued\n\nAn impairment loss is recognized in the income statement whenever the carrying amount of an asset or its cashgenerating unit exceeds its recoverable amount.\n\nThe recoverable amount of an asset is the greater of its fair value less costs to sell and its value-in-use. In assessing value-in-use, an asset's estimated future cash flows are discounted to their present value using a pre-tax discount rate that reflects current market assessments of the time value of money and the risks specific to the assets/CGUs. In addition, the Group considers market data related to recent transactions for similar assets.\n\nSubsequent costs are included in the asset's carrying amount or recognised as a separate asset, as appropriate, only when it is probable that future economic benefits associated with the item will flow to the group and the cost of the item can be measured reliably. All other repairs and maintenance are charged to the consolidated statement of profit or loss and comprehensive income during the financial period in which are they are incurred.\n\n## Depreciation and Amortisation Expense\n\nProperty and equipment are depreciated on a straight-line basis over their useful lives from the time the asset is held and ready for use. Leasehold improvements are depreciated over the shorter of either the unexpired period of the lease or the estimated useful life of the improvement.\n\nThe depreciation rates used for each class of depreciable assets are:\n\nThe Group uses the units-of-production method to amortise costs carried forward in relation to its development and production assets. For this approach, the calculation is based upon economically recoverable reserves, being proved developed reserves and probable developed reserves, over the life of an asset or group of assets.\n\nThe assets' residual values and useful lives are reviewed, and adjusted if appropriate, at the end of each reporting period. An asset's carrying amount is written down immediately to its recoverable amount if the asset's carrying amount is greater than its estimated recoverable amount, and recorded as impairment expense within the consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income.\n\nGains and losses on disposals are determined by comparing proceeds with the carrying amount. These gains and losses are included in the statement of profit or loss.\n\n## d) Leases\n\nThe determination of whether an arrangement is, or contains, a lease is based on the substance of the arrangement at date of inception. The arrangement is assessed to determine whether its fulfillment is dependent on the use of a specific asset or assets and whether the arrangement conveys a right to use the asset, even if that right is not explicitly specified in an arrangement.\n\nLeases are classified as finance leases when the terms of the lease transfer substantially all the risks and benefits incidental to the ownership of the asset, but not the legal ownership to the entities in the Group. All other leases are classified as operating leases.\n\n- 62 -", + "recall": 0.9828326180257511, + "true_md": "An impairment loss is recognized in the income statement whenever the carrying amount of an asset or its cash- generating unit exceeds its recoverable amount. \n\nThe recoverable amount of an asset is the greater of its fair value less costs to sell and its value-in-use. In assessing value-in-use, an asset’s estimated future cash flows are discounted to their present value using a pre-tax discount rate that reflects current market assessments of the time value of money and the risks specific to the assets/CGUs. In addition, the Group considers market data related to recent transactions for similar assets. \n\nSubsequent costs are included in the asset’s carrying amount or recognised as a separate asset, as appropriate, only when it is probable that future economic benefits associated with the item will flow to the group and the cost of the item can be measured reliably. All other repairs and maintenance are charged to the consolidated statement of profit or loss and comprehensive income during the financial period in which are they are incurred. \n\nProperty and equipment are depreciated on a straight-line basis over their useful lives from the time the asset is held and ready for use. Leasehold improvements are depreciated over the shorter of either the unexpired period of the lease or the estimated useful life of the improvement. \n\nThe depreciation rates used for each class of depreciable assets are: \n\nThe Group uses the units-of-production method to amortise costs carried forward in relation to its development and production assets. For this approach, the calculation is based upon economically recoverable reserves, being proved developed reserves and probable developed reserves, over the life of an asset or group of assets. \n\nThe assets’ residual values and useful lives are reviewed, and adjusted if appropriate, at the end of each reporting period. An asset’s carrying amount is written down immediately to its recoverable amount if the asset’s carrying amount is greater than its estimated recoverable amount, and recorded as impairment expense within the consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income. \n\nGains and losses on disposals are determined by comparing proceeds with the carrying amount. These gains and losses are included in the statement of profit or loss. \n\nd) Leases The determination of whether an arrangement is, or contains, a lease is based on the substance of the arrangement at date of inception. The arrangement is assessed to determine whether its fulfillment is dependent on the use of a specific asset or assets and whether the arrangement conveys a right to use the asset, even if that right is not explicitly specified in an arrangement. \n\nLeases are classified as finance leases when the terms of the lease transfer substantially all the risks and benefits incidental to the ownership of the asset, but not the legal ownership to the entities in the Group. All other leases are classified as operating leases. \n\n- 62 - \n\n## d) Leases The determination of whether an arrangement is, or contains, a lease is based on the substance of the arrangement\n\n## Depreciation and Amortisation Expense\n\n## NOTE 1 - STATEMENT OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES continued\n\n## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5104145013469975, + "doc_id": "a04f6653cda424c146ac89d421591121eed16d3dea1bc99295659549af4f3b4e", + "edit_distance": 0.6383561643835617, + "f1_score": 0.9655172413793105, + "meteor": 0.5473338076035394, + "precision": 0.9739130434782609, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 1 - STATEMENT OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES continued\n\n## AASB 15/IFRS 15 Revenue from Contracts with Customers\n\nIn May 2014, AASB 15/IFRS 15 was issued which establishes a single comprehensive model for entities to use in accounting for revenue arising from contracts with customers. Specifically, the standard introduces a 5-step approach to revenue recognition:\n\n- · Step 1: Identify the contract(s) with a customer\n- · Step 2: Identify the performance obligations in the contracts.\n- · Step 3: Determine the transaction price.\n- · Step 4: Allocate the transaction price to the performance obligations in the contract.\n- · Step 5: Recognise revenue when (or as) the entity satisfies a performance obligation.\n\nUnder AASB 15/IFRS 15, an entity recognizes revenue when (or as) a performance obligation is satisfied, i.e. when 'control' of the goods or services underlying the particular performance obligation is transferred to the customer. The effective date of this standard is for fiscal years beginning on or after 1 January 2017. Management is currently assessing the impact of the new standard and plans to adopt the new standard on the required effective date.\n\n.\n\n- 72 -", + "recall": 0.9572649572649573, + "true_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 1 - STATEMENT OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES continued\n\n## AASB 15/IFRS 15 – Revenue from Contracts with Customers In May 2014, AASB 15/IFRS 15 was issued which establishes a single comprehensive model for entities to use in\n\nAASB 15/IFRS 15 – Revenue from Contracts with Customers In May 2014, AASB 15/IFRS 15 was issued which establishes a single comprehensive model for entities to use in accounting for revenue arising from contracts with customers. Specifically, the standard introduces a 5-step approach to revenue recognition: \n\nUnder AASB 15/IFRS 15, an entity recognizes revenue when (or as) a performance obligation is satisfied, i.e. when ‘control’ of the goods or services underlying the particular performance obligation is transferred to the customer. The effective date of this standard is for fiscal years beginning on or after 1 January 2017. Management is currently assessing the impact of the new standard and plans to adopt the new standard on the required effective date. \n\n. \n\n- • Step 4: Allocate the transaction price to the performance obligations in the contract. • Step 5: Recognise revenue when (or as) the entity satisfies a performance obligation. \n\n- • Step 3: Determine the transaction price. • Step 4: Allocate the transaction price to the performance obligations in the contract. • Step 5: Recognise revenue when (or as) the entity satisfies a performance obligation. \n\n- • Step 2: Identify the performance obligations in the contracts. • Step 3: Determine the transaction price. • Step 4: Allocate the transaction price to the performance obligations in the contract. \n\n- • Step 1: Identify the contract(s) with a customer • Step 2: Identify the performance obligations in the contracts. • Step 3: Determine the transaction price. \n\n- • Step 1: Identify the contract(s) with a customer • Step 2: Identify the performance obligations in the contracts. \n\n- 72 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.855603901270364, + "doc_id": "43f8bcc1819ae747c929139385f7287bc55c61b4af947bb6945ff5c8550b5fdd", + "edit_distance": 0.16103896103896104, + "f1_score": 0.9908814589665654, + "meteor": 0.8824157216858528, + "precision": 0.9939024390243902, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 2 - BUSINESS COMBINATIONS\n\n## Acquisitions in 2014\n\nThere were no business acquisitions for the year ended 31 December 2014.\n\n## Acquisition in 2013\n\nOn 8 March 2013, the Company acquired 100% of the outstanding shares of Texon Petroleum Ltd (\"Texon\", whose name was changed to Armadillo Petroleum Ltd), an Australian corporation with oil and gas assets in the Eagle Ford formation in the United States. The Company acquired Texon to gain access to its existing production and drilling inventory in the Eagle Ford formation. As consideration for substantially all of the net assets of Texon, the Company issued 122.7 million ordinary shares (approximately 30.6% of the total outstanding shares immediately subsequent to the acquisition), which had a fair value of $132.1 million on the acquisition date and net cash consideration of $26.3 million for a total purchase price of $158.4 million. The net cash consideration includes a $141.0 million premerger purchase by the Company of certain Texon oil and gas properties, offset by $114.7 million of cash acquired at the time of the merger. The current income tax liability, included in accrued expenses, and deferred tax liability of $33.4 million and $16.9 million, respectively, are comprised of tax liabilities assumed as at the acquisition date and an increase in the tax liability related to the incremental acquisition date fair value of the acquired development and production and exploration and evaluation assets as compared to Texon's historical basis.\n\nThe following table reflects the final adjusted assets acquired and the liabilities assumed at their fair value or otherwise where specified by AASB 3/IFRS 3 Business Combinations (in thousands):\n\nThe net assets recognized in the 31 December 2013 financial statements were based on a provisional assessment of their fair value.\n\n- 73 -", + "recall": 0.9878787878787879, + "true_md": "## NOTE 2 – BUSINESS COMBINATIONS\n\n## Acquisitions in 2014 There were no business acquisitions for the year ended 31 December 2014.\n\n## Acquisition in 2013 On 8 March 2013, the Company acquired 100% of the outstanding shares of Texon Petroleum Ltd (\"Texon\", whose\n\nAcquisitions in 2014 There were no business acquisitions for the year ended 31 December 2014. \n\nAcquisition in 2013 On 8 March 2013, the Company acquired 100% of the outstanding shares of Texon Petroleum Ltd (\"Texon\", whose name was changed to Armadillo Petroleum Ltd), an Australian corporation with oil and gas assets in the Eagle Ford formation in the United States. The Company acquired Texon to gain access to its existing production and drilling inventory in the Eagle Ford formation. As consideration for substantially all of the net assets of Texon, the Company issued 122.7 million ordinary shares (approximately 30.6% of the total outstanding shares immediately subsequent to the acquisition), which had a fair value of $132.1 million on the acquisition date and net cash consideration of $26.3 million for a total purchase price of $158.4 million. The net cash consideration includes a $141.0 million pre- merger purchase by the Company of certain Texon oil and gas properties, offset by $114.7 million of cash acquired at the time of the merger. The current income tax liability, included in accrued expenses, and deferred tax liability of $33.4 million and $16.9 million, respectively, are comprised of tax liabilities assumed as at the acquisition date and an increase in the tax liability related to the incremental acquisition date fair value of the acquired development and production and exploration and evaluation assets as compared to Texon's historical basis.\n\nThe following table reflects the final adjusted assets acquired and the liabilities assumed at their fair value or otherwise where specified by AASB 3/IFRS 3 – Business Combinations (in thousands): \n\nThe net assets recognized in the 31 December 2013 financial statements were based on a provisional assessment of their fair value.\n\n- 73 - \n\n## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9404482750510543, + "doc_id": "bba51141a3e52f0d9bc68955a4d1b32db0cce9e21eae35bb03f7738358d27b58", + "edit_distance": 0.7757009345794392, + "f1_score": 0.9759036144578312, + "meteor": 0.7303538896871737, + "precision": 0.9788519637462235, + "pred_md": "' I've found that Nordstrom employees go to great lengths to please the customer. That's hard to find in most stores these days.\n\n'\n\nOUR CUSTOMER, SUSAN F.\n\n10\n\n## A NOTE FROM OUR\n\n## CHAIRMAN\n\nOur top priority at Nordstrom is to improve our customers' experience, continuously. This priority challenges us each day and is the basis for our long-term strategy to provide all Nordstrom customers with a best-in-class experience centered on service, product and capabilities, whenever and wherever they want. This commitment to Nordstrom customers is, in itself, the foundation of the deep and shared commitment of the Board of Directors and management to our shareholders-to enhance shareholder value over the long run through capital allocation discipline and to hold ourselves accountable for financial results.\n\nAbout a decade ago, we began investing strategically in the company's multi-channel capabilities across stores and online to meet the changing expectations of our customers. Investing early in technology, merchandising and stores, as well as integrating the in-store and online experience, helped position the company to achieve exceptional growth and superior returns. For the last several years, we further accelerated our level of investment to fuel growth across all our businesses-full-price, off-price, stores and online-to help Nordstrom deliver strong results this year and support profitable growth for years to come. We expect these investments to drive long-term shareholder value.\n\nAs the Board of Directors looks back on the many accomplishments of 2014 and ahead to the future, we support our executive management team led by Blake, Pete and Erik Nordstrom. We view 2014 to be a watershed moment in our history, with the successful entry into Canada, the expansion of the Rack business through store growth, the launch of Nordstromrack.com and the acquisition of Trunk Club. These milestones are the outcome of our strategy, which is squarely focused on serving customers on their terms and delivering the Nordstrom experience they expect from us. More importantly, our forward-thinking strategy puts us on track to achieve our goal of top-quartile shareholder return, driven by high single-digit sales growth and mid-teens return on invested capital. We believe this will lead us to be a $20 billion business by 2020, with superior returns, creating significant shareholder value.\n\nThe hard work and performance of the team have not gone unnoticed. Fortune magazine recently published their annual ranking of the World's Most Admired Companies, listing Nordstrom at #14. This is the seventh consecutive year we've appeared in the Top 50. Additionally, Nordstrom was ranked number one among all companies for quality of product/services. Within our peer group of general merchandisers, we ranked number one overall as well as for innovation, people management, use of corporate assets, quality of management, long-term investment value and quality of products/services. These accolades reflect the vision, high achievement and values we believe the company stands for, and the dedication and hard work of more than 67,000 Nordstrom employees.\n\nThis past February, we were fortunate to add Shellye Archambeau to the Board of Directors. As the chief executive officer of MetricStream, Inc., we believe Shellye enhances an already strong Board that is deeply committed to the highest standards of ethics, accountability and governance.\n\nAs we look to the future, we know that change will be a constant and that the Nordstrom strategy must evolve with customers' expectations, as must the means by which we enhance shareholder value. However, most importantly, the core principles upon which Nordstrom was built will not change. Your Board of Directors and your management team are committed to maintaining the company's unmatched competitive spirit and unyielding commitment to serve and value our customers, employees and shareholders. Be assured that Nordstrom and its wonderful employees are well positioned to deliver the best customer experience possible in ever-innovative ways, creating value for our shareholders in the years to come.\n\nOn behalf of the entire Board of Directors, thank you for your continued support of Nordstrom.\n\nEnrique Hernandez, Jr.\n\nChairman", + "recall": 0.972972972972973, + "true_md": "## A NOTE FROM OUR CHAIRMAN\n\nThe hard work and performance of the team have not gone unnoticed. Fortune magazine recently published their annual ranking of the World’s Most Admired Companies, listing Nordstrom at #14. This is the seventh consecutive year we’ve appeared in the Top 50. Additionally, Nordstrom was ranked number one among all companies for quality of product/services. Within our peer group of general merchandisers, we ranked number one overall as well as for innovation, people management, use of corporate assets, quality of management, long-term investment value and quality of products/services. These accolades reflect the vision, high achievement and values we believe the company stands for, and the dedication and hard work of more than 67,000 Nordstrom employees.\n\nOur top priority at Nordstrom is to improve our customers’ experience, continuously. This priority challenges us each day and is the basis for our long-term strategy to provide all Nordstrom customers with a best-in-class experience centered on service, product and capabilities, whenever and wherever they want. This commitment to Nordstrom customers is, in itself, the foundation of the deep and shared commitment of the Board of Directors and management to our shareholders—to enhance shareholder value over the long run through capital allocation discipline and to hold ourselves accountable for financial results.\n\nAbout a decade ago, we began investing strategically in the company’s multi-channel capabilities across stores and online to meet the changing expectations of our customers. Investing early in technology, merchandising and stores, as well as integrating the in-store and online experience, helped position the company to achieve exceptional growth and superior returns. For the last several years, we further accelerated our level of investment to fuel growth across all our businesses—full-price, off-price, stores and online—to help Nordstrom deliver strong results this year and support profitable growth for years to come. We expect these investments to drive long-term shareholder value.\n\nThis past February, we were fortunate to add Shellye Archambeau to the Board of Directors. As the chief executive officer of MetricStream, Inc., we believe Shellye enhances an already strong Board that is deeply committed to the highest standards of ethics, accountability and governance.\n\nAs we look to the future, we know that change will be a constant and that the Nordstrom strategy must evolve with customers’ expectations, as must the means by which we enhance shareholder value. However, most importantly, the core principles upon which Nordstrom was built will not change. Your Board of Directors and your management team are committed to maintaining the company’s unmatched competitive spirit and unyielding commitment to serve and value our customers, employees and shareholders. Be assured that Nordstrom and its wonderful employees are well positioned to deliver the best customer experience possible in ever-innovative ways, creating value for our shareholders in the years to come.\n\nAs the Board of Directors looks back on the many accomplishments of 2014 and ahead to the future, we support our executive management team led by Blake, Pete and Erik Nordstrom. We view 2014 to be a watershed moment in our history, with the successful entry into Canada, the expansion of the Rack business through store growth, the launch of Nordstromrack.com and the acquisition of Trunk Club. These milestones are the outcome of our strategy, which is squarely focused on serving customers on their terms and delivering the Nordstrom experience they expect from us. More importantly, our forward-thinking strategy puts us on track to achieve our goal of top-quartile shareholder return, driven by high single-digit sales growth and mid-teens return on invested capital. We believe this will lead us to be a $20 billion business by 2020, with superior returns, creating significant shareholder value. \n\nOn behalf of the entire Board of Directors, thank you for your continued support of Nordstrom.\n\nEnrique Hernandez, Jr. Chairman\n\n” OUR CUSTOMER, SUSAN F.\n\n“ I’ve found that Nordstrom employees go to great lengths to please the customer. That’s hard to find in most stores these days. ” OUR CUSTOMER, SUSAN F.\n\n10" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8385766789076257, + "doc_id": "b5b44372c80851d78ee9b3f97c53519be8cae29118128a4d26a5ff013b0b4e44", + "edit_distance": 0.15384615384615385, + "f1_score": 0.9565217391304348, + "meteor": 0.9817739079102716, + "precision": 0.9166666666666666, + "pred_md": "## POWERFUL LIKE NEVER BEFORE\n\n22 ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "POWERFUL LIKE NEVER BEFORE\n\n22 ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8989657616439684, + "doc_id": "002e8522aec8428acbdd29b0f498e83d7bbee99714743f50c1a110a728b3303b", + "edit_distance": 0.8647798742138365, + "f1_score": 0.969187675070028, + "meteor": 0.7895239700463336, + "precision": 0.9774011299435028, + "pred_md": "programming across the country's largest markets, as well as five OMNI Television stations which deliver multilingual news, information and entertainment to Canada's multiple language communities.\n\nThe Sportsnet specialty network provides sports programming across Canada through its four regional television channels and its nationallydistributed Sportsnet ONE, Sportsnet World, and Sportsnet 360 stations. Rogers also owns other Canadian specialty television channels, including FX Canada, OLN, The Biography Channel and G4.\n\nThe Shopping Channel - Canada's only nationally televised and Internet shopping service - is a leading interactive multi-channel retailer, offering a vast assortment of exclusive products and top brand names. As one of Canada's most innovative and diversified retailers, it provides customers with exceptional selections in health/beauty, jewelry, home/lifestyle, fashion/accessories, and electronics.\n\nRogers also publishes many well-known consumer magazines, such as Maclean's, Chatelaine, FLARE, L'actualité, and Canadian Business, and is the leading publisher of a number of industry, medical and financial publications. Rogers also controls a suite of fast-growing digital media assets, including 90+ owned and 300+ premium partnership online sites, as well as the recently launched Next Issue Canada digital magazine platform which provides 100+ of North America's most celebrated titles on an unlimited anytime, anywhere basis.\n\nIn sports entertainment, Rogers owns the Toronto Blue Jays baseball team and Rogers Centre stadium, Canada's largest sports and entertainment facility and home field of the Blue Jays. Rogers also holds a 37.5% investment in Maple Leaf Sports & Entertainment which owns the NHL Maple Leafs, NBA Raptors, MLS Toronto FC and a number of other sports related assets.\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 13", + "recall": 0.9611111111111111, + "true_md": "2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 13\n\nIn sports entertainment, Rogers owns the Toronto Blue Jays baseball team and Rogers Centre stadium, Canada’s largest sports and entertainment facility and home field of the Blue Jays. Rogers also holds a 37.5% investment in Maple Leaf Sports & Entertainment which owns the NHL Maple Leafs, NBA Raptors, MLS Toronto FC and a number of other sports related assets.\n\nRogers also publishes many well-known consumer magazines, such as Maclean’s, Chatelaine, FLARE, L’actualité, and Canadian Business, and is the leading publisher of a number of industry, medical and financial publications. Rogers also controls a suite of fast-growing digital media assets, including 90+ owned and 300+ premium partnership online sites, as well as the recently launched Next Issue Canada digital magazine platform which provides 100+ of North America’s most celebrated titles on an unlimited anytime, anywhere basis. \n\nprogramming across the country’s largest markets, as well as five OMNI Television stations which deliver multilingual news, information and entertainment to Canada’s multiple language communities.\n\nThe Sportsnet specialty network provides sports programming across Canada through its four regional television channels and its nationally- distributed Sportsnet ONE, Sportsnet World, and Sportsnet 360 stations. Rogers also owns other Canadian specialty television channels, including FX Canada, OLN, The Biography Channel and G4.\n\nThe Shopping Channel – Canada’s only nationally televised and Internet shopping service – is a leading interactive multi-channel retailer, offering a vast assortment of exclusive products and top brand names. As one of Canada’s most innovative and diversified retailers, it provides customers with exceptional selections in health/beauty, jewelry, home/lifestyle, fashion/accessories, and electronics." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9765518029028534, + "doc_id": "6d3b074a0d156d5db227f5cd3b4a32964ed80054a04e42dbbf6a467f5a5405e5", + "edit_distance": 0.8311036789297659, + "f1_score": 0.9888641425389755, + "meteor": 0.7303228127743792, + "precision": 0.9910714285714286, + "pred_md": "## Principal Operations\n\n## North America\n\nCorporate Headquarters - Cranberry Township, Pa.\n\nU.S. Manufacturing - Bowling Green, Ky.;\n\nCranberry Township, Pa.; Jacksonville, N.C.; Murrysville, Pa.; Newport, Vt.\n\nResearch - John T. Ryan Memorial Laboratory,\n\nCranberry Township, Pa.\n\nMSA Canada Inc., Toronto; Edmonton\n\nMSA de Mexico, S.A. de C.V., Querétaro\n\nSafety Works, LLC, Wexford, Pa.\n\n## Europe\n\nMSA Europe GmbH (Headquarters), Berlin, Germany\n\nMine Safety Romania S.R.L., Bucharest, Romania\n\nMine Safety Sp. z o.o., Raszyn, Poland\n\nMSA Auer GmbH, Berlin, Germany\n\nMSA Auer GmbH, Czech o.z., Praha, Czech (Service Center)\n\nMSA Auer GmbH Romania, o.z., Bucuresti, Romania (Branch)\n\nMSA Auer GmbH, Slovakia o.z., Pezinok, Slovakia (Service Center)\n\nMSA Auer Kiev, Kyiv, Ukraine (Representative O ffi ce)\n\nMSA Auer Miskolc, Tiszaujvaros, Hungary (Service Center)\n\nMSA Auer Petrosani, Petrosani, Romania (Service Center)\n\nMSA Auer Schweiz GmbH, Oberglatt, Switzerland\n\nMSA Auer Vertriebs GmbH, Absdorf, Austria\n\nMSA Almay, Almaty, Kazakhstan (Service Center/O ffi ce)\n\nMSA Azerbaijan, Baku (Registered O ffi ce)\n\nMSA Belgium, N.V., Lier\n\nMSA (Britain) Limited, Glasgow\n\nMSA Safety Czech, s.r.o., Ostrava\n\nMSA Española S.A.U., Barcelona\n\nMSA Gallet, Chatillon sur Chalaronne, France; Mohammedia, Morocco\n\nMSA Italiana S.p.A., Milan\n\nMSA Nederland B.V., Hoorn\n\nMSA Nordic AB, Malmo, Sweden\n\nMSA Poznan, Poznan, Poland (Service Center)\n\nMSA Safety, LLC, Moscow, Russia\n\nMSA Safety Hungary Ltd., Budapest\n\nMSA Serbia, Belgrade (Registered O ffi ce)\n\nMSA Sordin AB, Varnamo, Sweden\n\nMSA Szczecin, Szczecin, Poland (Service Center)\n\n## International\n\nCompañia MSA de Argentina S.A., Buenos Aires\n\nMSA (Aust.) Pty. Ltd.,\n\nSydney\n\nMSA (Australia), Auckland, New Zealand (Branch O ffi ce)\n\nMSA do Brasil Ltda., São Paulo\n\nMSA de Chile Ltda., Santiago\n\nMSA de Colombia S.A.S., Bogota\n\nMSA (China) Safety Equipment Co., Ltd., Suzhou\n\nMSA Egypt LLC, Cairo\n\nMSA Hong Kong Ltd., Hong Kong\n\nMSA (India) Limited, Calcutta\n\nMSA Japan Ltd., Tokyo\n\nMSA Safety Malaysia Sdn. Bhd., Kuala Lumpur\n\nMSA Middle East, Abu Dhabi, U.A.E. (O ffi ce)\n\nMSA Middle East FZE, Dubai, U.A.E.\n\nMSA del Peru S.A.C., Lima\n\nMSA S.E. Asia Pte. Ltd., Singapore\n\nMSA Select Ltd., Kitwe, Zambia\n\nMSA (Suzhou) Safety Equipment Research and\n\nDevelopment Co., Ltd., Suzhou, China\n\nMSA (Thailand) Limited, Bangkok\n\nPT MSA Indonesia Ltd., Jakarta\n\nSamsac Africa (Proprietary) Ltd., Johannesburg\n\nSelect Personal Protective Equipment (PTY) Ltd., Johannesburg\n\n## General Monitors\n\nElectrasem, LLC, Corona, Calif.\n\nGassonic A/S, Ballerup, Denmark\n\nGeneral Monitors Inc., Lake Forest, Calif.\n\nGeneral Monitors Ireland Ltd., Galway, Ireland\n\nGeneral Monitors Paci fi ca, Pte., Ltd., Singapore\n\nGeneral Monitors Systems, LLC, Lake Forest, Calif.\n\nGeneral Monitors Systems Asia, Pte., Ltd., Singapore\n\nGeneral Monitors Transnational, LLC, Las Vegas, Nev.", + "recall": 0.9866666666666667, + "true_md": "## International\n\n## North America\n\n## Principal Operations\n\n## Europe\n\n## General Monitors\n\nElectrasem, LLC, Corona, Calif. Gassonic A/S, Ballerup, Denmark General Monitors Inc., Lake Forest, Calif. General Monitors Ireland Ltd., Galway, Ireland General Monitors Paci fi ca, Pte., Ltd., Singapore General Monitors Systems, LLC, Lake Forest, Calif. General Monitors Systems Asia, Pte., Ltd., Singapore General Monitors Transnational, LLC, Las Vegas, Nev.\n\nCompañia MSA de Argentina S.A., Buenos Aires MSA (Aust.) Pty. Ltd., Sydney MSA (Australia), Auckland, New Zealand (Branch O ffi ce) MSA do Brasil Ltda., São Paulo MSA de Chile Ltda., Santiago MSA de Colombia S.A.S., Bogota MSA (China) Safety Equipment Co., Ltd., Suzhou MSA Egypt LLC, Cairo MSA Hong Kong Ltd., Hong Kong MSA (India) Limited, Calcutta MSA Japan Ltd., Tokyo MSA Safety Malaysia Sdn. Bhd., Kuala Lumpur MSA Middle East, Abu Dhabi, U.A.E. (O ffi ce) MSA Middle East FZE, Dubai, U.A.E. MSA del Peru S.A.C., Lima MSA S.E. Asia Pte. Ltd., Singapore MSA Select Ltd., Kitwe, Zambia MSA (Suzhou) Safety Equipment Research and Development Co., Ltd., Suzhou, China MSA (Thailand) Limited, Bangkok PT MSA Indonesia Ltd., Jakarta Samsac Africa (Proprietary) Ltd., Johannesburg Select Personal Protective Equipment (PTY) Ltd., Johannesburg\n\nMSA Europe GmbH (Headquarters), Berlin, Germany Mine Safety Romania S.R.L., Bucharest, Romania Mine Safety Sp. z o.o., Raszyn, Poland MSA Auer GmbH, Berlin, Germany MSA Auer GmbH, Czech o.z., Praha, Czech (Service Center) MSA Auer GmbH Romania, o.z., Bucuresti, Romania (Branch) MSA Auer GmbH, Slovakia o.z., Pezinok, Slovakia (Service Center) MSA Auer Kiev, Kyiv, Ukraine (Representative O ffi ce) MSA Auer Miskolc, Tiszaujvaros, Hungary (Service Center) MSA Auer Petrosani, Petrosani, Romania (Service Center) MSA Auer Schweiz GmbH, Oberglatt, Switzerland MSA Auer Vertriebs GmbH, Absdorf, Austria MSA Almay, Almaty, Kazakhstan (Service Center/O ffi ce) MSA Azerbaijan, Baku (Registered O ffi ce) MSA Belgium, N.V., Lier MSA (Britain) Limited, Glasgow MSA Safety Czech, s.r.o., Ostrava MSA Española S.A.U., Barcelona MSA Gallet, Chatillon sur Chalaronne, France; Mohammedia, Morocco MSA Italiana S.p.A., Milan MSA Nederland B.V., Hoorn MSA Nordic AB, Malmo, Sweden MSA Poznan, Poznan, Poland (Service Center) MSA Safety, LLC, Moscow, Russia MSA Safety Hungary Ltd., Budapest MSA Serbia, Belgrade (Registered O ffi ce) MSA Sordin AB, Varnamo, Sweden MSA Szczecin, Szczecin, Poland (Service Center)\n\nCorporate Headquarters – Cranberry Township, Pa. U.S. Manufacturing – Bowling Green, Ky.; Cranberry Township, Pa.; Jacksonville, N.C.; Murrysville, Pa.; Newport, Vt. Research – John T. Ryan Memorial Laboratory, Cranberry Township, Pa. MSA Canada Inc., Toronto; Edmonton MSA de Mexico, S.A. de C.V., Querétaro Safety Works, LLC, Wexford, Pa." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6327067557304972, + "doc_id": "7ffed8667970051b1414e77d295b0d2ccb5234a9d0bc07aaeca9db2df2fd9982", + "edit_distance": 0.9166666666666666, + "f1_score": 0.8936170212765957, + "meteor": 0.8670491811338751, + "precision": 0.8076923076923077, + "pred_md": "## STATEMENTS OF CONSOLIDATED CASH FLOWS\n\nSTATEMENTS OF CONSOLIDATED CASH FLOWS (In thousands)\n\n(In thousands)\n\nSee notes to consolidated financial statements.\n\n4\n\nApplied Industrial Technologies, Inc. and Subsidiaries\n\n17", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "See notes to consolidated financial statements. \n\n17 Applied Industrial Technologies, Inc. and Subsidiaries\n\n## STATEMENTS OF CONSOLIDATED CASH FLOWS STATEMENTS OF CONSOLIDATED CASH FLOWS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9631812501823303, + "doc_id": "dfe5c48046c9cf360f66c30f7b920c54490f57561f0448e47dba91ac293ed397", + "edit_distance": 0.6856287425149701, + "f1_score": 0.9886039886039886, + "meteor": 0.79343782236864, + "precision": 0.9886039886039886, + "pred_md": "MANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS\n\nretrospectively. We are assessing the impact of this amendment on our consolidated financial statements.\n\n- GLYPH<129> IFRIC 21, Levies (IFRIC 21) - In May 2013, the IASB issued a new accounting guidance IFRIC 21, which provides guidance on when to recognize a liability for a levy imposed by a government, both for levies that are accounted for in accordance with IAS 37 Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets and those where the timing and amount of the levy is certain. The Interpretation identifies the obligating event for the recognition of a liability as the activity that triggers the payment of the levy in accordance with the relevant legislation. It provides the following guidance on recognition of a liability to pay levies (i) the liability is recognized progressively if the obligating event occurs over a period of time, and (ii) if an obligation is triggered on reaching a minimum threshold, the liability is recognized when that minimum threshold is reached. The standard is effective for annual periods beginning on or after January 1, 2014, with early adoption permitted. We are assessing the impact of this new standard on our consolidated financial statements.\n- GLYPH<129> IFRS 9, Financial Instruments (IFRS 9) -In October 2010, the IASB issued IFRS 9, which replaces IAS 39, Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement, establishes principles for the financial reporting of financial assets and financial liabilities that will present relevant and useful information to users of financial statements for their assessment of the amounts, timing and uncertainty of an entity's future cash flows. This new standard also includes a new general hedge accounting standard which will align hedge accounting more closely with risk management. It does not fundamentally change the types of hedging relationships or the requirement to measure and recognize ineffectiveness, however it will provide more hedging strategies that are used for risk management to qualify for hedge accounting and introduce more judgment to assess the effectiveness of a hedging relationship. The mandatory effective date of IFRS 9 has not yet been communicated by the IASB. We are assessing the impact of this new standard on its consolidated financial statements.\n\n## KEY PERFORMANCE INDICATORS\n\nWe measure the success of our strategy using a number of key performance indicators, which are outlined below. We believe these key performance indicators allow us to appropriately measure our performance against our operating strategy as well as against the results of our peers and competitors. The following key performance indicators are not measurements in accordance with IFRS and should not be considered as an alternative to net income or any other measure of performance under IFRS.\n\n## S ubscriber Counts\n\nWe determine the number of subscribers to our services based on active subscribers. When subscribers are deactivated, either voluntarily or involuntarily for non-payment, they are considered to be deactivations in the period the services are discontinued.\n\n## Wireless\n\n- GLYPH<129> A wireless subscriber is represented by each identifiable telephone number.\n- GLYPH<129> We report wireless subscribers in two categories: postpaid and prepaid. Postpaid and prepaid include voice-only subscribers, dataonly subscribers, and subscribers with service plans integrating both voice and data.\n- GLYPH<129> Wireless prepaid subscribers are considered active for a period of 180 days from the date of their last revenue-generating usage.\n\n82\n\nROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n## Cable\n\n- GLYPH<129> Cable Television and Internet subscribers are represented by a dwelling unit, and cable Phone subscribers are represented by line counts.\n- GLYPH<129> When there is more than one unit in one dwelling, like an apartment building, each tenant with cable service is counted as an individual subscriber, whether the service is invoiced separately or included in the tenant's rent. Institutional units, like hospitals or hotels, are each considered to be one subscriber.\n- GLYPH<129> Cable Television, Internet, and Phone subscribers include only those subscribers who have service installed and operating, and who are being billed accordingly.\n\n## S ubscriber Churn\n\nSubscriber churn is a measure of the number of subscribers that deactivated as a percentage of the total subscriber base, usually calculated on a monthly basis. Subscriber churn tells us our success in retaining our subscribers. We calculate it by dividing the number of Wireless subscribers that deactivated (usually in a month) by the aggregate numbers of subscribers at the beginning of the period. When used or reported for a period greater than one month, subscriber churn represents the sum of the number of subscribers deactivating for each period incurred divided by the sum of the aggregate number of subscribers at the beginning of each period incurred.\n\n## Average Revenue per User\n\nAverage Revenue per User (ARPU) helps us identify trends and measure our success in attracting and retaining higher value subscribers. We calculate it by dividing revenue (usually monthly) by the average number of subscribers in the period. For Wireless, ARPU is calculated using network revenue. When used in connection with a particular type of subscriber, ARPU is monthly revenue generated from those subscribers, divided by the average number of those subscribers during the month.\n\n## Average Revenue per User Calculations - Wireless", + "recall": 0.9886039886039886, + "true_md": "MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS\n\nretrospectively. We are assessing the impact of this amendment on our consolidated financial statements.\n\nSubscriber churn is a measure of the number of subscribers that deactivated as a percentage of the total subscriber base, usually calculated on a monthly basis. Subscriber churn tells us our success in retaining our subscribers. We calculate it by dividing the number of Wireless subscribers that deactivated (usually in a month) by the aggregate numbers of subscribers at the beginning of the period. When used or reported for a period greater than one month, subscriber churn represents the sum of the number of subscribers deactivating for each period incurred divided by the sum of the aggregate number of subscribers at the beginning of each period incurred.\n\nWe measure the success of our strategy using a number of key performance indicators, which are outlined below. We believe these key performance indicators allow us to appropriately measure our performance against our operating strategy as well as against the results of our peers and competitors. The following key performance indicators are not measurements in accordance with IFRS and should not be considered as an alternative to net income or any other measure of performance under IFRS.\n\nS ubscriber Counts We determine the number of subscribers to our services based on active subscribers. When subscribers are deactivated, either voluntarily or involuntarily for non-payment, they are considered to be deactivations in the period the services are discontinued.\n\nAverage Revenue per User (ARPU) helps us identify trends and measure our success in attracting and retaining higher value subscribers. We calculate it by dividing revenue (usually monthly) by the average number of subscribers in the period. For Wireless, ARPU is calculated using network revenue. When used in connection with a particular type of subscriber, ARPU is monthly revenue generated from those subscribers, divided by the average number of those subscribers during the month.\n\n- GLYPH<129> IFRIC 21, Levies (IFRIC 21) – In May 2013, the IASB issued a new accounting guidance IFRIC 21, which provides guidance on when to recognize a liability for a levy imposed by a government, both for levies that are accounted for in accordance with IAS 37 Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets and those where the timing and amount of the levy is certain. The Interpretation identifies the obligating event for the recognition of a liability as the activity that triggers the payment of the levy in accordance with the relevant legislation. It provides the following guidance on recognition of a liability to pay levies (i) the liability is recognized progressively if the obligating event occurs over a period of time, and (ii) if an obligation is triggered on reaching a minimum threshold, the liability is recognized when that minimum threshold is reached. The standard is effective for annual periods beginning on or after January 1, 2014, with early adoption permitted. We are assessing the impact of this new standard on our consolidated financial statements.\n\n- GLYPH<129> IFRS 9, Financial Instruments (IFRS 9) – In October 2010, the IASB issued IFRS 9, which replaces IAS 39, Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement, establishes principles for the financial reporting of financial assets and financial liabilities that will present relevant and useful information to users of financial statements for their assessment of the amounts, timing and uncertainty of an entity’s future cash flows. This new standard also includes a new general hedge accounting standard which will align hedge accounting more closely with risk management. It does not fundamentally change the types of hedging relationships or the requirement to measure and recognize ineffectiveness, however it will provide more hedging strategies that are used for risk management to qualify for hedge accounting and introduce more judgment to assess the effectiveness of a hedging relationship. The mandatory effective date of IFRS 9 has not yet been communicated by the IASB. We are assessing the impact of this new standard on its consolidated financial statements.\n\n- GLYPH<129> A wireless subscriber is represented by each identifiable telephone number.\n\n- GLYPH<129> We report wireless subscribers in two categories: postpaid and prepaid. Postpaid and prepaid include voice-only subscribers, data- only subscribers, and subscribers with service plans integrating both voice and data.\n\n- GLYPH<129> Wireless prepaid subscribers are considered active for a period of 180 days from the date of their last revenue-generating usage.\n\n- GLYPH<129> Cable Television and Internet subscribers are represented by a dwelling unit, and cable Phone subscribers are represented by line counts.\n\n- GLYPH<129> When there is more than one unit in one dwelling, like an apartment building, each tenant with cable service is counted as an individual subscriber, whether the service is invoiced separately or included in the tenant’s rent. Institutional units, like hospitals or hotels, are each considered to be one subscriber.\n\n- GLYPH<129> Cable Television, Internet, and Phone subscribers include only those subscribers who have service installed and operating, and who are being billed accordingly.\n\n## KEY PERFORMANCE INDICATORS\n\n## Wireless\n\n## S ubscriber Churn\n\n## Cable\n\n## Average Revenue per User\n\n## Average Revenue per User Calculations – Wireless\n\n82 ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9752877080561214, + "doc_id": "cad4ecc8a294dad17a10291923d0935dd4095ef4d5266a20ccba2cba133b0bff", + "edit_distance": 0.29579472558802566, + "f1_score": 0.9886972040452113, + "meteor": 0.9810718307512316, + "precision": 0.9892857142857143, + "pred_md": "Terrydon Maroney\n\nMaria Marquez\n\nKen Marrow\n\nDuston Marsh\n\nMichael Marsh\n\nBillie Marshall Jr.\n\nJordan Marshall\n\nChas Martin\n\nGary Martin Jr.\n\nKory Martin\n\nMichael S. Martin\n\nRanee Martin\n\nReid Martin\n\nScottie Martin\n\nTim Martin\n\nYancy Martin\n\nAdam Martinez III\n\nAnneliese Martinez\n\nDavid Martinez Jr.\n\nJose A. Martinez\n\nJose A. Martinez\n\nMargarito Martinez\n\nPrajie Martinez\n\nRogelio L. Martinez\n\nCara Maschmeier\n\nJustin Mascolo\n\nBill Masino Jr.\n\nTonja Mason\n\nGary Massey\n\nThomas Massey Jr.\n\nShain Masterson\n\nChasity Mathis\n\nJason Mathis\n\nMike Matison\n\nEdward Matley\n\nBob Matousek\n\nBrian C. Matthews\n\nBrian P. Matthews\n\nJordan Mattson\n\nRobert Maurer\n\nRandy Maxey\n\nMax Maxim\n\nHeath Maxwell\n\nConnie May\n\nScott May\n\nCory Mayernik\n\nReggie Mayes\n\nSabrina Maynard\n\nRachel Maynor\n\nJody Mayo\n\nChad Mays\n\nDaniel McAdams\n\nNicole McAllister\n\nDale McAnear\n\nBert McBlair\n\nPatrick McBride\n\nJay McBroom\n\nLuke McCaig\n\nLeslie McCalla\n\nZachary McCandless\n\nTodd McCarthy\n\nJeff McCarty\n\nJay McClain\n\nMolly McCloud\n\nJames McClure\n\nJim McCollough\n\nJeremiah McCourt\n\nKristen McCoy\n\nErnie McCuistian\n\nPaul McCullough\n\nChris McCutcheon\n\nLindsay McDaniel\n\nDustin McDougal\n\nClinton McElfresh\n\nJordan McGee\n\nJeffrey McGehee\n\nLacie McGillicuddy\n\nChris McGlasson\n\nDillon McGuire\n\nLindsay McIntyre\n\nRegan McIntyre\n\nLauren McKee\n\nBrett McKelvey\n\nRobyn McKenzie\n\nMichele McKinney\n\nBrady McKissick\n\nChris McKone\n\nTracy McLain\n\nBobby McLaughlin\n\nMike McLaughlin\n\nSarah McLaughlin\n\nWendy McMichael\n\nBrian McMillan\n\nCatreana McMullen\n\nMellisa McMullen\n\nChad McNaughton\n\nJim McNorton\n\nBobby McPherson\n\nCoy McPherson Jr.\n\nMatt McPherson\n\nRichard McPherson\n\nRyan McQuillen\n\nJustin McSpedden\n\nEthan Meagley\n\nRandy Medders\n\nGreg Medellin\n\nRoy Meek\n\nBill Meeks\n\nDale Meharg II\n\nJames Meikrantz\n\nPaul Mellen\n\nRay Melrath III\n\nBret Melton\n\nLeslie Meltzner\n\nCrystal Mendez\n\nSteve Mengee\n\nDaniel Mercer\n\nKevin Mercer\n\nRene Mercon\n\nJeremy Merling\n\nJonathan Merrill\n\nBetty Merritt\n\nHerman Meshell\n\nBrandon Mesko\n\nCory Mesko\n\nDexter Messer\n\nKelly Metcalf\n\nKenneth Metheny\n\nDanny Meyers\n\nTimothy Michael\n\nJason Michaud\n\nAlyssa Miller\n\nBobby Miller\n\nBrock Miller\n\nCassidy Miller\n\nDerek Miller\n\nDewayne Miller\n\nEnnis Miller\n\nJake Miller\n\nJennifer Miller\n\nLarry Miller\n\nMark J. Miller\n\nMatt Miller\n\nMichelle Miller\n\nMike Miller\n\nRonald Miller\n\nJames Millett\n\nClint Mills Jr.\n\nDavid Mills\n\nJoshua Mills\n\nStephanie Mills\n\nMary Mingle\n\nMorgan Minton\n\nEdward Mire Jr.\n\nHoby Mitchell\n\nJohnny Mitchell\n\nJoshua Mitchell\n\nTerri Mitchell\n\nJason Mitter\n\nJoe Mixer\n\nBrennan Moates\n\nRyan Mobley\n\nMel Moliassa\n\nRyan Monaghan\n\nJason Monahan\n\nRene Montalvo\n\nDavid Montes\n\nKim Montgomery\n\nAdrian Montoya\n\nBradley Moore\n\nBrittany Moore\n\nFrank Moore\n\nJoshua Moore\n\nLance Moore Jr.\n\nMichael E. Moore\n\nNathaniel Moore\n\nRaymond Moore\n\nRobert Moore Jr.\n\nSteve Moore\n\nTiffany Moore\n\nZach Moore\n\nCraig Moorer\n\nJoaquin Morales\n\nJose Morales Jr.\n\nTiffany Morales\n\nJonathan Moreau\n\nAaron Morgan\n\nAmanda Morgan\n\nSigmond Morgan\n\nBetty Jo Morris\n\nCarrie Morris\n\nKendall Morris\n\nLarry Morris Jr.\n\nRaymond Morris II\n\nRichard Morris\n\nTheresa Morris\n\nTyke Morris II\n\nRobert Morrow\n\nGraham Morsch\n\nBrittany Mortimer\n\nKirby Morton\n\nJames Mosley\n\nKimberly Moss\n\nWilliam Moss\n\nWilliam Mowery\n\nJared Moyer\n\nTyler Moyers\n\nBrad Mueller\n\nMicah Mueller\n\nBrian Mullen\n\nJimmy Mullen\n\nLeon Mullhatten\n\nDirk Mullins\n\nDonald Mullins\n\nJosh Mullins\n\nRichard Mullins\n\nStephan Mullins II\n\nMalcolm Mulvaney\n\nRyan Mulvania\n\nHeather Munk\n\nJose Munoz\n\nOdulia Munoz\n\nLawrence R. Munsey Jr.\n\nJeffrey Murchison\n\nChristina Murphree\n\nDanielle Murray\n\nDennis Murray\n\nDylan Murray\n\nBrandon Murry\n\nLisa Mustain\n\nGreg Myers\n\nZane Myers\n\nKenneth Myrow Jr.\n\nDale Nace Jr.\n\nChristopher Naimo\n\nMartin Najera\n\nMike Namolek\n\nJared Nance\n\nLyman Nance\n\nJeff Nanna\n\nChris Nash\n\nJoe Nash Jr.\n\nDebbie Nauser\n\nRamiro Navarro\n\nBalde Navejar\n\nDeidre Neal\n\nDrew Neal\n\nStephanie Neal\n\nRobert Needham\n\nJimmy Neher\n\nRick Neidermeyer\n\nJanet Nelson\n\nRobert Nelson\n\nLiza Nestrick\n\nKurt Neufer\n\nThomas Nevill\n\nPreston Newton\n\nScott Newton\n\nJerry Nguyen\n\nKim Nguyen\n\nPeter Nguyen\n\nRobert Nichols II\n\nGabriel Nickeson\n\nGary Nicklow\n\nBrian Nielsen\n\nScott Niermeyer\n\nMarilyn Nimz\n\nDaryl Nix\n\nDoug Nix\n\nBrent Noller\n\nCasey Noonan\n\nBrett Norbotten\n\nAmanda Nordin\n\nCole Norman\n\nLindsay Norman\n\nMiranda Norman\n\nDee Norton\n\nTad Nowicki\n\nEd Nuckols\n\nKeith Nugent\n\nKenneth Null Jr.\n\nMatthew Nunez\n\nVictor Nunez\n\nColby Nunley\n\nPhilip Nunley\n\nBarrett Nuzum\n\nKacie Nyce\n\nDavid Oakley\n\nHeather Odell\n\nTony Odell\n\nAngela Odom\n\nKathy Jo Odom\n\nTroy Odom\n\nMark Oekerman\n\nAdrian Ogden\n\nChris Ogles\n\nTimothy Ogorman White\n\nDarren Olach\n\nIsmael Oldham\n\nMichael Olendorf\n\nMichael Olewnik\n\nRaul Olguin\n\nOwen Olshefskie\n\nAquiles Olvera\n\nUlises Olvera\n\nAdam Oman\n\nAnthonia Onuorah\n\nLisa Ooten\n\nSandra Opalka\n\nCarmen Orosco\n\nLynn Orrell\n\nJoseph Orsburn\n\nAlix Orza\n\nJeffrey Osborn\n\nScott Osborn\n\nKris Osecky\n\nChad Osko\n\nEdward Osmus\n\nBenjamin Ott\n\nRichard Otto\n\nNoelle Otwell\n\nJohn Ousley\n\nHorace Outland Jr.\n\nBayley Overland\n\nMeagan Owen\n\nRobby Owen\n\nErnie Owens\n\nJeremy Owens\n\nKaty Owens\n\nNathan Owens\n\nTimmy Owens\n\nDavid Ownbey\n\nEric O'Dell\n\nJohn O'Docharty\n\nTara O'Hara\n\nChris O'Mealey\n\nGideon O'Neil\n\nNicholas O'Neil\n\nRyan O'Neil\n\nJames Pack\n\nJessica Pack\n\nDustin Padrone\n\nLinda Painton\n\nNick Painton\n\nMatt J. Palmer\n\nMegan Palmer\n\nJose Palomo\n\nMarvin Pantojas\n\nSosaia Papaalii\n\nJose Paredes III\n\nDonald Parish\n\nJason Park\n\nJeremy Parker\n\nJeromy Parker\n\nMichael R. Parker\n\nTerry Parker Jr.\n\nJeff Parkhurst\n\nRandall Parman\n\nJason Parsell\n\nKerri Partaka\n\nEddie Pass\n\nBindu Patel\n\nChad Patin\n\nRyan Patrick\n\nAndrew Patterson\n\nBennie Patterson\n\nJoel Patterson\n\nRyan Patterson\n\nShannon Patterson\n\nWayne Patterson\n\nSheritha Patton\n\nSeth Paul\n\nTom Pavlinac\n\nJamie Pavluk\n\nJordan Payne\n\nJoseph Payne\n\nKevin Payne\n\nDerek Pearce\n\nJames Pearce\n\nTasha Pearson\n\nRyan Pecanty\n\nTy R. Peck\n\nJohn Pedigo\n\nChristy Peebles\n\nDennis Peek\n\nTamara Penney\n\nDavid Pennington\n\nCarlos Perez\n\nFelipe Perez\n\nJames Perez\n\nLaura Perez\n\nManuel Perez\n\nRodolfo Perez Jr.\n\nRosendo Perez\n\nChris Perry\n\nJoshua Perry Chris Pesesky\n\nKevin Peters\n\nBrittany Peterson\n\nDonna Peterson\n\nVanessa Peterson\n\nJames Pettiette\n\nLarry Pettyjohn\n\nStephen Pezalski\n\nJason Phelps\n\nDan Phillips\n\nDavid Phillips\n\nJames E. Phillips\n\nJason Phillips\n\nMike Phillips\n\nEmily Phipps\n\nLauren Phoenix\n\nChristian Piaquadio\n\nAdan Pichardo\n\nKyle Pickens\n\nDell Pierce\n\nEllen Pierce\n\nJulie Pierini\n\nRandy Piland\n\nJamie Pilkington\n\nJonathan Pilkington\n\nNelson Pinho\n\nStan Pinney\n\nSheena Pittman\n\nWaylon Pixley\n\nJason Plotkin\n\nEthan Plumlee\n\nEarl Plumley\n\nKaren Poch\n\nShane Poindexter\n\nJames Pointer\n\nBraden Pollard\n\nLorna Pollard\n\nDavid Poole\n\nJason Poole\n\nThomas Poore Jr.\n\nJason Pope\n\nDennis Porter\n\nJustin Porter\n\nKenneth Porterfield\n\nRobert Post\n\nMichael Poteet\n\nGary Potter\n\nDiane Pound\n\nAdina Powell\n\nFrank Powell\n\nJason Powell\n\nKatie Tisher\n\nRick Powell\n\nRonald Powers\n\nTom Powers\n\nLara Prasayasitl\n\nReggie Pratcher\n\nAllix Prather\n\nRhone Prather\n\nJames Pratt\n\nJustin Pratt\n\nKathi Pratt\n\nMonte Pratt\n\nJason Price\n\nTim Prince\n\n2010 ANNUAL REPORT |\n\n43\n\nJoseph Raynes Justin Raynor William Reather Jr. Bill Redding Jr. Andrew Redman James Redwine III Jesse Redwine Faron Reed James L. Reed James W. Reed Louis Reed\n\nMichael Robinson\n\nRebecca Robinson\n\nSusan Robinson\n\nTara Robinson\n\nDeWayne Robison\n\nRussell Robison\n\nTaylor Robison\n\nTjaden Roblin\n\nFrank Rocchio\n\nOlga Rocha\n\nRandy Rodeheaver\n\n## CHICAGO, ILLINOIS Chesapeake's Meteorology Division supplies valuable weather information for the company's field operating teams and hedging program.\n\nDan Prine Margaret Pringle Gregory Probst Joseph Probst Elizabeth Proctor Kirk Proctor Justin Proffitt Jack Prosser Gabe Provencher Gabe Pruett Jacob Pruitt Daniel Pruneau Jerry Puckett Christopher Pugh Michael Punchard Marcus Purcell Steven Purvis Emanuel Puscas Terry Putnam II Chad Pyles Charlie Pyles Rob Pyles John R. Qualls Maggi Quinlan Adrian Quintero Juan Quintero Jean Quitoriano Scott Rackley LaDonna Ragan Brandon Raines Cory Raines Logan Rainey Emily Rains Melissa Rajeski Travis Rall Eric Ralls Francisco Ramirez Jose Ramirez Jr. Romualdo Ramirez Gabriel Ramos Daniel Ramsey Wydedrick Randle Jonathan Raney Victorino Rangel Hugo Rangel-Silva Charley Rankin Mindy Rasco Ray Rascoe Sean Rasmussen Dennis Ratlief Nate Raupers Bradley Ray Chris Ray Nathan Ray\n\nTravis Ray\n\nPaul Reed\n\nMichael Reel\n\nWilliam Reese\n\nMike Reeves\n\nKenneth Reid\n\nRandy Reigh Jr.\n\nCreedence Reihs\n\nKaty Reimers\n\nHenry Reininger\n\nMichael Reitz Jr.\n\nPaul Renick\n\nTyler Renick\n\nErin Revill\n\nRandi Rex\n\nAlejandro Reyes\n\nGabriel Reyes\n\nJonathan Reynolds\n\nLloyd Reynolds Jr.\n\nAndrew Rhoads III\n\nMichael Rhoads\n\nJonathan Rhodes\n\nRonnie Rhodes Jr.\n\nPatrick Riban\n\nJon Rice\n\nKaty Rich\n\nMark Rich\n\nAllison Richardson\n\nCoe Richardson Anthony Rickles\n\nShawn Rickman\n\nBrad Riddle\n\nElizabeth Riddle\n\nGrayson Ridgway\n\nRichie Riggleman II\n\nLandon Riggs\n\nRamona Riley\n\nSamuel Riley\n\nBrian Ritchey\n\nLee Riter II\n\nJames Ritter\n\nAlexis Rivas\n\nJeffrey Rivenburgh\n\nKaren Rivera\n\nMichael Rivera\n\nRicardo Rivera\n\nDan Roberson\n\nDaniel Roberts\n\nKen Roberts\n\nChad Robertson\n\nChris Robertson\n\nJosh Robertson\n\nMaggie Robertson\n\nPerry Robertson Jr.\n\nBrucene Robinson\n\nJamie Robinson\n\nZachary Rodeheaver\n\nBecky Rodgers\n\nTerence Rodgers\n\nFernando Rodriguez\n\nKevin Rodriguez\n\nMaria G. Rodriguez\n\nMilton Rodriguez\n\nRodolfo Rodriguez\n\nKevin Roe\n\nRonald Roe\n\nLance Roetzel\n\nChad Rogers\n\nDerek Rogers\n\nGordon Rogers\n\nGregory Rogers Jr.\n\nJames E. Rogers\n\nJeff Rogers\n\nJimmy Rogers\n\nMichael Rogers\n\nRusty Rogers\n\nTommy Rogers\n\nKevin Rogier\n\nAmy Rolland\n\nJames Roller\n\nKim Romero\n\nJesse Root\n\nWilliam Rose\n\nAaron Ross\n\nChris Ross\n\nKelly Ross\n\nLance Ross\n\nAllen Rossi\n\nJohn Rossi\n\nTodd Roth\n\nJennifer Rothfuss\n\nStanley C. Routh\n\nStanley P. Routh\n\nMaleah Rowe\n\nJimmy Rowell\n\nBrian Rowland\n\nSteven Rowley\n\nJustin Roy\n\nKevin Rubin\n\nKenneth Rucker\n\nTyson Ruddick\n\nCory Ruffing\n\nCat Ruiz Jr.\n\nGarrison Rule\n\nKristen Rule\n\nDavid Rumbaugh\n\nBrandon Rusconi\n\nJustin Rush\n\nAlisha Rusher\n\nChuck Russell\n\nCory Russell", + "recall": 0.9881093935790726, + "true_md": "2010 ANNUAL REPORT | 43\n\nSarah McLaughlin Wendy McMichael Brian McMillan Catreana McMullen Mellisa McMullen Chad McNaughton Jim McNorton Bobby McPherson Coy McPherson Jr. Matt McPherson Richard McPherson Ryan McQuillen Justin McSpedden Ethan Meagley Randy Medders Greg Medellin Roy Meek Bill Meeks Dale Meharg II James Meikrantz Paul Mellen Ray Melrath III Bret Melton Leslie Meltzner Crystal Mendez Steve Mengee Daniel Mercer Kevin Mercer Rene Mercon Jeremy Merling Jonathan Merrill Betty Merritt Herman Meshell Brandon Mesko Cory Mesko Dexter Messer Kelly Metcalf KennethMetheny Danny Meyers Timothy Michael Jason Michaud Alyssa Miller Bobby Miller Brock Miller Cassidy Miller Derek Miller Dewayne Miller Ennis Miller Jake Miller Jennifer Miller Larry Miller Mark J. Miller Matt Miller Michelle Miller Mike Miller Ronald Miller James Millett Clint Mills Jr. David Mills Joshua Mills Stephanie Mills Mary Mingle Morgan Minton Edward Mire Jr. Hoby Mitchell Johnny Mitchell Joshua Mitchell Terri Mitchell Jason Mitter Joe Mixer Brennan Moates Ryan Mobley Mel Moliassa Ryan Monaghan Jason Monahan Rene Montalvo David Montes Kim Montgomery Adrian Montoya Bradley Moore Brittany Moore Frank Moore Joshua Moore Lance Moore Jr. Michael E. Moore Nathaniel Moore Raymond Moore Robert Moore Jr. Steve Moore Tiffany Moore\n\nTerrydon Maroney Maria Marquez Ken Marrow Duston Marsh Michael Marsh Billie Marshall Jr. Jordan Marshall Chas Martin Gary Martin Jr. Kory Martin Michael S. Martin Ranee Martin Reid Martin Scottie Martin Tim Martin Yancy Martin Adam Martinez III Anneliese Martinez David Martinez Jr. Jose A. Martinez Jose A. Martinez Margarito Martinez Prajie Martinez Rogelio L. Martinez Cara Maschmeier Justin Mascolo Bill Masino Jr. Tonja Mason Gary Massey Thomas Massey Jr. Shain Masterson Chasity Mathis Jason Mathis Mike Matison Edward Matley Bob Matousek Brian C. Matthews Brian P. Matthews Jordan Mattson Robert Maurer Randy Maxey Max Maxim Heath Maxwell Connie May Scott May Cory Mayernik Reggie Mayes Sabrina Maynard Rachel Maynor Jody Mayo Chad Mays Daniel McAdams Nicole McAllister Dale McAnear Bert McBlair Patrick McBride Jay McBroom Luke McCaig Leslie McCalla Zachary McCandless Todd McCarthy Jeff McCarty Jay McClain Molly McCloud James McClure Jim McCollough Jeremiah McCourt Kristen McCoy Ernie McCuistian Paul McCullough Chris McCutcheon Lindsay McDaniel Dustin McDougal Clinton McElfresh Jordan McGee JeffreyMcGehee Lacie McGillicuddy Chris McGlasson Dillon McGuire Lindsay McIntyre Regan McIntyre Lauren McKee Brett McKelvey Robyn McKenzie Michele McKinney Brady McKissick Chris McKone Tracy McLain Bobby McLaughlin Mike McLaughlin\n\nZach Moore Craig Moorer Joaquin Morales Jose Morales Jr. Tiffany Morales Jonathan Moreau Aaron Morgan Amanda Morgan Sigmond Morgan Betty Jo Morris Carrie Morris Kendall Morris Larry Morris Jr. Raymond Morris II Richard Morris Theresa Morris Tyke Morris II Robert Morrow Graham Morsch Brittany Mortimer Kirby Morton James Mosley Kimberly Moss William Moss William Mowery Jared Moyer Tyler Moyers Brad Mueller Micah Mueller Brian Mullen Jimmy Mullen Leon Mullhatten Dirk Mullins Donald Mullins Josh Mullins Richard Mullins Stephan Mullins II Malcolm Mulvaney Ryan Mulvania Heather Munk Jose Munoz Odulia Munoz Lawrence R. Munsey Jr. Jeffrey Murchison Christina Murphree Danielle Murray Dennis Murray Dylan Murray Brandon Murry Lisa Mustain Greg Myers Zane Myers Kenneth Myrow Jr. Dale Nace Jr. Christopher Naimo Martin Najera Mike Namolek Jared Nance Lyman Nance Jeff Nanna Chris Nash Joe Nash Jr. Debbie Nauser Ramiro Navarro Balde Navejar Deidre Neal Drew Neal Stephanie Neal Robert Needham Jimmy Neher Rick Neidermeyer Janet Nelson Robert Nelson Liza Nestrick Kurt Neufer Thomas Nevill Preston Newton Scott Newton Jerry Nguyen Kim Nguyen Peter Nguyen Robert Nichols II Gabriel Nickeson Gary Nicklow Brian Nielsen Scott Niermeyer Marilyn Nimz Daryl Nix Doug Nix Brent Noller\n\nCasey Noonan Brett Norbotten Amanda Nordin Cole Norman Lindsay Norman Miranda Norman Dee Norton Tad Nowicki Ed Nuckols Keith Nugent Kenneth Null Jr. Matthew Nunez Victor Nunez Colby Nunley Philip Nunley Barrett Nuzum Kacie Nyce David Oakley Heather Odell Tony Odell Angela Odom Kathy Jo Odom Troy Odom Mark Oekerman Adrian Ogden Chris Ogles Timothy Ogorman White Darren Olach Ismael Oldham Michael Olendorf Michael Olewnik Raul Olguin Owen Olshefskie Aquiles Olvera Ulises Olvera Adam Oman Anthonia Onuorah Lisa Ooten Sandra Opalka Carmen Orosco Lynn Orrell Joseph Orsburn Alix Orza Jeffrey Osborn Scott Osborn Kris Osecky Chad Osko Edward Osmus Benjamin Ott Richard Otto Noelle Otwell John Ousley Horace Outland Jr. Bayley Overland Meagan Owen Robby Owen Ernie Owens Jeremy Owens Katy Owens Nathan Owens Timmy Owens David Ownbey EricO’Dell John O’Docharty Tara O’Hara Chris O’Mealey Gideon O’Neil Nicholas O’Neil Ryan O’Neil James Pack Jessica Pack Dustin Padrone Linda Painton Nick Painton Matt J. Palmer Megan Palmer Jose Palomo Marvin Pantojas Sosaia Papaalii Jose Paredes III Donald Parish Jason Park Jeremy Parker Jeromy Parker Michael R. Parker Terry Parker Jr. Jeff Parkhurst Randall Parman Jason Parsell Kerri Partaka\n\nEddie Pass Bindu Patel Chad Patin Ryan Patrick Andrew Patterson Bennie Patterson Joel Patterson Ryan Patterson Shannon Patterson Wayne Patterson Sheritha Patton Seth Paul Tom Pavlinac Jamie Pavluk Jordan Payne Joseph Payne Kevin Payne Derek Pearce James Pearce Tasha Pearson Ryan Pecanty Ty R. Peck John Pedigo Christy Peebles Dennis Peek Tamara Penney David Pennington Carlos Perez Felipe Perez James Perez Laura Perez Manuel Perez Rodolfo Perez Jr. Rosendo Perez Chris Perry Joshua Perry Chris Pesesky Kevin Peters Brittany Peterson Donna Peterson Vanessa Peterson James Pettiette Larry Pettyjohn Stephen Pezalski Jason Phelps Dan Phillips David Phillips James E. Phillips Jason Phillips Mike Phillips Emily Phipps Lauren Phoenix Christian Piaquadio Adan Pichardo Kyle Pickens Dell Pierce Ellen Pierce Julie Pierini Randy Piland Jamie Pilkington Jonathan Pilkington Nelson Pinho Stan Pinney Sheena Pittman Waylon Pixley Jason Plotkin Ethan Plumlee Earl Plumley Karen Poch Shane Poindexter James Pointer Braden Pollard Lorna Pollard David Poole Jason Poole Thomas Poore Jr. Jason Pope Dennis Porter Justin Porter Kenneth Porterfield Robert Post Michael Poteet Gary Potter Diane Pound Adina Powell Frank Powell Jason Powell Katie Tisher Rick Powell Ronald Powers\n\nTom Powers Lara Prasayasitl Reggie Pratcher Allix Prather Rhone Prather James Pratt Justin Pratt Kathi Pratt Monte Pratt Jason Price Tim Prince\n\nJoseph Raynes Justin Raynor William Reather Jr. Bill Redding Jr. Andrew Redman James Redwine III Jesse Redwine Faron Reed James L. Reed James W. Reed Louis Reed\n\nMichael Robinson Rebecca Robinson Susan Robinson Tara Robinson DeWayne Robison Russell Robison Taylor Robison Tjaden Roblin Frank Rocchio Olga Rocha Randy Rodeheaver\n\nCHICAGO, ILLINOIS Chesapeake’s Meteorology Division supplies valuable weather information for the company’s field operating teams and hedging program. \n\nDan Prine Margaret Pringle Gregory Probst Joseph Probst Elizabeth Proctor Kirk Proctor Justin Proffitt Jack Prosser Gabe Provencher Gabe Pruett Jacob Pruitt Daniel Pruneau Jerry Puckett Christopher Pugh Michael Punchard Marcus Purcell Steven Purvis Emanuel Puscas Terry Putnam II Chad Pyles Charlie Pyles Rob Pyles John R. Qualls Maggi Quinlan Adrian Quintero Juan Quintero Jean Quitoriano Scott Rackley LaDonna Ragan Brandon Raines Cory Raines Logan Rainey Emily Rains Melissa Rajeski Travis Rall Eric Ralls Francisco Ramirez Jose Ramirez Jr. Romualdo Ramirez Gabriel Ramos Daniel Ramsey Wydedrick Randle Jonathan Raney Victorino Rangel Hugo Rangel-Silva Charley Rankin Mindy Rasco Ray Rascoe Sean Rasmussen Dennis Ratlief Nate Raupers Bradley Ray Chris Ray Nathan Ray Travis Ray\n\nPaul Reed Michael Reel William Reese Mike Reeves Kenneth Reid Randy Reigh Jr. Creedence Reihs Katy Reimers Henry Reininger Michael Reitz Jr. Paul Renick Tyler Renick Erin Revill Randi Rex Alejandro Reyes Gabriel Reyes Jonathan Reynolds Lloyd Reynolds Jr. Andrew Rhoads III Michael Rhoads Jonathan Rhodes Ronnie Rhodes Jr. Patrick Riban Jon Rice Katy Rich Mark Rich Allison Richardson Coe Richardson Anthony Rickles Shawn Rickman Brad Riddle Elizabeth Riddle Grayson Ridgway Richie Riggleman II Landon Riggs Ramona Riley Samuel Riley Brian Ritchey Lee Riter II James Ritter Alexis Rivas Jeffrey Rivenburgh Karen Rivera Michael Rivera Ricardo Rivera Dan Roberson Daniel Roberts Ken Roberts Chad Robertson Chris Robertson Josh Robertson Maggie Robertson Perry Robertson Jr. Brucene Robinson Jamie Robinson\n\nZachary Rodeheaver Becky Rodgers Terence Rodgers Fernando Rodriguez Kevin Rodriguez Maria G. Rodriguez Milton Rodriguez Rodolfo Rodriguez Kevin Roe Ronald Roe Lance Roetzel Chad Rogers Derek Rogers Gordon Rogers Gregory Rogers Jr. James E. Rogers Jeff Rogers Jimmy Rogers Michael Rogers Rusty Rogers Tommy Rogers Kevin Rogier Amy Rolland James Roller Kim Romero Jesse Root William Rose Aaron Ross Chris Ross Kelly Ross Lance Ross Allen Rossi John Rossi Todd Roth Jennifer Rothfuss Stanley C. Routh Stanley P. Routh Maleah Rowe Jimmy Rowell Brian Rowland Steven Rowley Justin Roy Kevin Rubin Kenneth Rucker Tyson Ruddick Cory Ruffing Cat Ruiz Jr. Garrison Rule Kristen Rule David Rumbaugh Brandon Rusconi Justin Rush Alisha Rusher Chuck Russell Cory Russell" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6952240614087184, + "doc_id": "31beb1f02d031ec7178feb49b1bf586a19bbc5a8b5f9cc0c5ca85d505ac3b2ec", + "edit_distance": 0.41445562671546204, + "f1_score": 0.97984496124031, + "meteor": 0.5972518981074624, + "precision": 0.9813664596273292, + "pred_md": "## Nordstrom, Inc.\n\n## Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nDollar and share amounts in millions except per share, per option and per unit amounts\n\n## Recent Accounting Pronouncements\n\nIn April 2014, the Financial Accounting Standards Board ('FASB') issued Accounting Standards Update ('ASU') No. 2014-08, Reporting Discontinued Operations and Disclosures of Disposals of Components of an Entity . This ASU raises the threshold for a disposal to qualify as discontinued operations and requires new disclosures for individually material disposal transactions that do not meet the definition of a discontinued operation. Under the new guidance, companies report discontinued operations when they have a disposal that represents a strategic shift that has or will have a major impact on operations or financial results. We do not expect the provisions of this ASU, which are effective for us beginning in the first quarter of 2015, to have a material impact on our consolidated financial statements.\n\nIn May 2014, the FASB issued ASU No. 2014-09, Revenue from Contracts with Customers . The core principle of this ASU is that companies should recognize revenue when the transfer of promised goods or services to customers occurs in an amount that reflects what the company expects to receive. It requires additional disclosures to describe the nature, amount, timing, and uncertainty of revenue and cash flows from contracts with customers. This ASU is effective for us beginning with the first quarter of 2017. We are currently evaluating the impact the provisions of this ASU would have on our consolidated financial statements.\n\nIn June 2014, the FASB issued ASU No. 2014-12, Compensation - Stock Compensation . This ASU provides guidance on how to account for share-based payments for performance targets that could be achieved after an employee completes the requisite service period. Under the new guidance, a performance target that affects vesting and could be achieved after the requisite service period is treated as a performance condition. As such, the performance target is not reflected in estimating the grant-date fair value of the award. This ASU is effective for us beginning with the first quarter of 2016. We do not expect the provisions of this ASU to have a material impact on our consolidated financial statements.\n\n## NOTE 2: TRUNK CLUB ACQUISITION\n\nOn August 22, 2014, we acquired 100% of the outstanding equity of Trunk Club, a personalized clothing service for men. We believe the acquisition enables us to provide a high-touch personalized shopping experience combined with the convenience of an online platform. This represents a natural extension of our core business, aligns with our strategic priorities around a relevant customer experience and accelerates our entry into this fast-growing market.\n\nThe following bullets summarize the accounting activity related to Trunk Club and provide reference to relevant disclosures throughout our 10-K:\n\n- · Consideration - The purchase price fair value of $357 reflects the value of our stock as of the acquisition date. Purchase price consideration is discussed in further detail below.\n- · Issuance of Nordstrom Common Stock - 3.7 shares of Nordstrom common stock were issued in 2014 as part of the acquisition purchase price. Additional shares will be issued, either to be earned as future compensation or associated with indemnity holdback releases. Stock issued is discussed in further detail below and also reflected in our Consolidated Statements of Shareholders' Equity.\n- · Net Assets Acquired - Of the $357 purchase price fair value, $46 is compensation expense and subject to future performance and vesting. The remaining net purchase price consideration of $311 is allocated to the tangible and intangible assets acquired and liabilities assumed. The net asset allocation is discussed in further detail below.\n- · Issuance of Nordstrom Stock Awards - Trunk Club employees received Nordstrom stock awards in exchange for previously held Trunk Club awards and stock. Stock awards are discussed in further detail within Note 13: Stock-Based Compensation.\n- · Long-term Incentive Plan - A long-term incentive plan (the 'Value Creation Plan') was created to incentivize certain Trunk Club employees to increase the value of the Trunk Club business. The accounting for this plan is discussed in further detail within Note 13: Stock-Based Compensation.\n\nTrunk Club's financial results have been included in our consolidated financial statements from the date of acquisition forward and were not material to our consolidated results for the fiscal year ended January 31, 2015. We have not presented pro forma results of operations for any periods prior to the acquisition, as Trunk Club's results of operations were not material to our consolidated results.\n\n46", + "recall": 0.978328173374613, + "true_md": "## Nordstrom, Inc. Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n## Nordstrom, Inc. Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements Dollar and share amounts in millions except per share, per option and per unit amounts\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements Dollar and share amounts in millions except per share, per option and per unit amounts\n\nRecent Accounting Pronouncements In April 2014, the Financial Accounting Standards Board (“FASB”) issued Accounting Standards Update (“ASU”) No. 2014-08, Reporting Discontinued Operations and Disclosures of Disposals of Components of an Entity . This ASU raises the threshold for a disposal to qualify as discontinued operations and requires new disclosures for individually material disposal transactions that do not meet the definition of a discontinued operation. Under the new guidance, companies report discontinued operations when they have a disposal that represents a strategic shift that has or will have a major impact on operations or financial results. We do not expect the provisions of this ASU, which are effective for us beginning in the first quarter of 2015, to have a material impact on our consolidated financial statements. \n\nIn May 2014, the FASB issued ASU No. 2014-09, Revenue from Contracts with Customers . The core principle of this ASU is that companies should recognize revenue when the transfer of promised goods or services to customers occurs in an amount that reflects what the company expects to receive. It requires additional disclosures to describe the nature, amount, timing, and uncertainty of revenue and cash flows from contracts with customers. This ASU is effective for us beginning with the first quarter of 2017. We are currently evaluating the impact the provisions of this ASU would have on our consolidated financial statements.\n\nIn June 2014, the FASB issued ASU No. 2014-12, Compensation - Stock Compensation . This ASU provides guidance on how to account for share-based payments for performance targets that could be achieved after an employee completes the requisite service period. Under the new guidance, a performance target that affects vesting and could be achieved after the requisite service period is treated as a performance condition. As such, the performance target is not reflected in estimating the grant-date fair value of the award. This ASU is effective for us beginning with the first quarter of 2016. We do not expect the provisions of this ASU to have a material impact on our consolidated financial statements.\n\nNOTE 2: TRUNK CLUB ACQUISITION On August 22, 2014, we acquired 100% of the outstanding equity of Trunk Club, a personalized clothing service for men. We believe the acquisition enables us to provide a high-touch personalized shopping experience combined with the convenience of an online platform. This represents a natural extension of our core business, aligns with our strategic priorities around a relevant customer experience and accelerates our entry into this fast-growing market.\n\nThe following bullets summarize the accounting activity related to Trunk Club and provide reference to relevant disclosures throughout our 10-K: • Consideration – The purchase price fair value of $357 reflects the value of our stock as of the acquisition date. Purchase price \n\nTrunk Club’s financial results have been included in our consolidated financial statements from the date of acquisition forward and were not material to our consolidated results for the fiscal year ended January 31, 2015. We have not presented pro forma results of operations for any periods prior to the acquisition, as Trunk Club’s results of operations were not material to our consolidated results. \n\n46\n\n- Trunk Club awards and stock. Stock awards are discussed in further detail within Note 13: Stock-Based Compensation. • Long-term Incentive Plan – A long-term incentive plan (the “Value Creation Plan”) was created to incentivize certain Trunk Club employees to increase the value of the Trunk Club business. The accounting for this plan is discussed in further detail within Note 13: Stock-Based Compensation.\n\n- liabilities assumed. The net asset allocation is discussed in further detail below. • Issuance of Nordstrom Stock Awards – Trunk Club employees received Nordstrom stock awards in exchange for previously held Trunk Club awards and stock. Stock awards are discussed in further detail within Note 13: Stock-Based Compensation. • Long-term Incentive Plan – A long-term incentive plan (the “Value Creation Plan”) was created to incentivize certain Trunk Club \n\n- Equity. • Net Assets Acquired – Of the $357 purchase price fair value, $46 is compensation expense and subject to future performance and vesting. The remaining net purchase price consideration of $311 is allocated to the tangible and intangible assets acquired and liabilities assumed. The net asset allocation is discussed in further detail below. • Issuance of Nordstrom Stock Awards – Trunk Club employees received Nordstrom stock awards in exchange for previously held \n\n- consideration is discussed in further detail below. • Issuance of Nordstrom Common Stock – 3.7 shares of Nordstrom common stock were issued in 2014 as part of the acquisition purchase price. Additional shares will be issued, either to be earned as future compensation or associated with indemnity holdback releases. Stock issued is discussed in further detail below and also reflected in our Consolidated Statements of Shareholders’ Equity. • Net Assets Acquired – Of the $357 purchase price fair value, $46 is compensation expense and subject to future performance and \n\n- 10-K: • Consideration – The purchase price fair value of $357 reflects the value of our stock as of the acquisition date. Purchase price consideration is discussed in further detail below. • Issuance of Nordstrom Common Stock – 3.7 shares of Nordstrom common stock were issued in 2014 as part of the acquisition \n\n## NOTE 2: TRUNK CLUB ACQUISITION On August 22, 2014, we acquired 100% of the outstanding equity of Trunk Club, a personalized clothing service for men. We believe the\n\n## Recent Accounting Pronouncements In April 2014, the Financial Accounting Standards Board (“FASB”) issued Accounting Standards Update (“ASU”) No. 2014-08," + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5754583413092088, + "doc_id": "436a7dde1cd3ce9e99a51463a75ae164b69a2856329ed6f67102555a1c351612", + "edit_distance": 0.7285714285714285, + "f1_score": 0.9672131147540984, + "meteor": 0.5644381237008477, + "precision": 0.979253112033195, + "pred_md": "Rig lights come on at twilight in the Permian Basin of Texas, where crews drill around the clock in the liquids-rich Bone Spring play. This is the newest in a series of energy booms that has enabled West Texas cities like Midland to prosper for almost 100 years.\n\nI am pleased to report that we have apparently finally convinced President Barack Obama and Congressional leadership to recognize that the energy path America is on today is completely unsustainable. There appears to be growing recognition that it is spectacularly dangerous for America to continue importing 9 million barrels of oil per day and exporting\n\nmore than $1 billion per day in national wealth to oil exporting countries.\n\nAmerica's undiminished appetite for foreign oil has created the largest wealth transfer in the history of the world. The political leadership in Washington, D.C., has not seemed overly concerned about this issue until recently. However, after President Obama's recent speech calling\n\n- (1) Reserve replacement is calculated by dividing net reserve additions from all sources by actual production for the corresponding period. We calculate drilling and net acquisition cost per mcfe by dividing total drilling and net proved property acquisition costs incurred during the year (excludes certain costs primarily related to net unproved property acquisitions, geological and geophysical costs and deferred taxes related to corporate acquisitions) by total proved reserve additions excluding price-related revisions.\n- (2) A non-GAAP financial measure, as defined below. Please refer to the Investors section of our website at www.chk.com for reconciliations of non-GAAP financial measures to comparable financial measures calculated in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles.\n- · Adjusted ebitda is net income (loss) before interest expense, income tax expense (benefit), and depreciation, depletion and amortization expense, as adjusted to remove the effects of certain items that manage ment believes affect the comparability of operating results.\n- · Operating cash flow is cash provided by operating activities before changes in assets and liabilities.\n- · Adjusted earnings per fully diluted share is net income (loss) per share available to Chesapeake common stockholders, assuming dilution, as adjusted to remove the effects of certain items that management believes affect the comparability of operating results.\n- (3) ORTUNE 100 Best Companies to Work For F ® listed in the magazine's February 7, 2011 issue.", + "recall": 0.9554655870445344, + "true_md": "14 | LETTER TO SHAREHOLDERS\n\nmore than $1 billion per day in national wealth to oil exporting countries. \n\nI am pleased to report that we have apparently finally convinced President Barack Obama and Congressional leadership to recognize that the energy path America is on today is completely unsustainable. There appears to be growing recognition that it is spectacularly dangerous for America to continue importing 9 million barrels of oil per day and exporting \n\nAmerica’s undiminished appetite for foreign oil has created the larg- est wealth transfer in the history of the world. The political leadership in Washington, D.C., has not seemed overly concerned about this issue until recently. However, after President Obama’s recent speech calling \n\nRig lights come on at twilight in the Permian Basin of Texas, where crews drill around the clock in the liquids-rich Bone Spring play. This is the newest in a series of energy booms that has enabled West Texas cities like Midland to prosper for almost 100 years.\n\nbelieves affect the comparability of operating results. (3) FORTUNE 100 Best Companies to Work For ® listed in the magazine’s February 7, 2011 issue. \n\n• Operating cash flow is cash provided by operating activities before changes in assets and liabilities. • Adjusted earnings per fully diluted share is net income (loss) per share available to Chesapeake common stockholders, assuming dilution, as adjusted to remove the effects of certain items that management believes affect the comparability of operating results. FORTUNE 100 Best Companies to Work For listed in the magazine’s February 7, 2011 issue. \n\nment believes affect the comparability of operating results. • Operating cash flow is cash provided by operating activities before changes in assets and liabilities. • Adjusted earnings per fully diluted share is net income (loss) per share available to Chesapeake common stockholders, assuming dilution, as adjusted to remove the effects of certain items that management \n\nin accordance with generally accepted accounting principles. • Adjusted ebitda is net income (loss) before interest expense, income tax expense (benefit), and depreciation, depletion and amortization expense, as adjusted to remove the effects of certain items that manage - ment believes affect the comparability of operating results. • Operating cash flow is cash provided by operating activities before changes in assets and liabilities. \n\ncorporate acquisitions) by total proved reserve additions excluding price-related revisions. (2) A non-GAAP financial measure, as defined below. Please refer to the Investors section of our website at www.chk.com for reconciliations of non-GAAP financial measures to comparable financial measures calculated in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles. • Adjusted ebitda is net income (loss) before interest expense, income tax expense (benefit), and depreciation, depletion and amortization expense, as adjusted to remove the effects of certain items that manage -\n\n(1) Reserve replacement is calculated by dividing net reserve additions from all sources by actual production for the corresponding period. We calculate drilling and net acquisition cost per mcfe by dividing total drilling and net proved property acquisition costs incurred during the year (excludes certain costs primarily related to net unproved property acquisitions, geological and geophysical costs and deferred taxes related to corporate acquisitions) by total proved reserve additions excluding price-related revisions. (2) A non-GAAP financial measure, as defined below. Please refer to the Investors section of our website at www.chk.com for reconciliations of non-GAAP financial measures to comparable financial measures calculated" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6129556210319297, + "doc_id": "f4fad698034545bca1633b7f07ea0fbd5854fc017bdedb9676da716ba00cfab5", + "edit_distance": 0.3429796355841372, + "f1_score": 0.9814126394052044, + "meteor": 0.6239182518736399, + "precision": 0.9887640449438202, + "pred_md": "## 2.2 Remuneration and Nominations Committee\n\nThe remuneration and nominations committee is structured so that it:\n\n- · Consists of a majority of independent Directors;\n- · Is chaired by an independent Director; and\n- · Has at least three members.\n\nThe responsibilities of the committee include recommendations to the Board about:\n\n- · Remuneration practices and levels of Executives and Non-executive Directors;\n- · The necessary and desirable competencies of Directors;\n- · Review of board succession plans;\n- · The development of a process for evaluation of the performance of the board, its committees and Directors; and,\n- · The appointment and re-election of Directors.\n\nThe combined Remuneration and Nominations Committee consists of three independent Non-Executive Directors and reports its recommendations to the Board for approval. Formal minutes are kept of each meeting and submitted to the Board for review. The members of the Remuneration and Nominations Committee is listed on page 26 of the Directors' Report. A Remuneration and Nominations Committee charter is published on the Company's website.\n\nThe Board reviews the composition and skill sets of the Committee on a regular basis, and considers that the current composition, size and skills of the Committee to be appropriate.\n\nCurrently no formal description of the procedure for the selection and appointment of new Directors or the re-election of incumbent Directors exists as it is considered that due to the size of the Company that this process is effectively managed by the Board. However, this activity is discussed by the Committee from time to time.\n\n## 2.3 Director Performance Review and Evaluation\n\nIn fiscal year 2014, Sundance's Board regularly met, both formally and informally, to discuss Board matters and to ensure that the Board acts in an effective way. The Board is provided with information that allows it to discharge its duties effectively, and Non-Executive Directors can and do request additional information as necessary to make informed decisions. The skills, experience and expertise relevant to the position of Director held by each director in office at the date of the annual report can be found in the Directors' Report on pages 23 to 25.\n\nNo formal process exists for Directors to access continuing education, as this is not considered practicable for the size of the Company and the financial resources available. However the four Non-Executive Directors have wide experience of directors' duties and are involved in a variety of outside business and professional activities that add to their knowledge and professionalism.\n\nThe Company Secretary is D Connor. He is accountable to the Board through the Chairman and accessible to all Directors. The appointment and removal of the Company Secretary is a matter for decision by the Board as a whole.\n\n## Principle 3: Promote Ethical and Responsible Decision-making\n\n## 3.1 Code of Conduct\n\nThe Company has a Code of Conduct and Ethics which establishes the practices that Directors, management and staff must follow in order to comply with the law, meet shareholder expectations, maintain public confidence in the Company's integrity, and provide a process for reporting and investigating unethical practices. The Code of Conduct is available in the corporate governance section of Sundance's website.\n\n## 3.2 Diversity\n\nSundance believes it is important to maintain a diverse, empowered and inclusive workforce to gain valuable perspectives from people of different gender, race, religion, marital status, disability or national origin. Sundance management recruits on the basis of skills, qualifications, abilities and achievements of the individual. Sundance has published a Diversity policy which is available in the corporate governance section of Sundance's website.\n\n- 50 -", + "recall": 0.974169741697417, + "true_md": "## 2.2 Remuneration and Nominations Committee The remuneration and nominations committee is structured so that it:\n\n2.2 Remuneration and Nominations Committee The remuneration and nominations committee is structured so that it: • Consists of a majority of independent Directors; \n\nThe responsibilities of the committee include recommendations to the Board about: • Remuneration practices and levels of Executives and Non-executive Directors; \n\n- The remuneration and nominations committee is structured so that it: • Consists of a majority of independent Directors; • Is chaired by an independent Director; and \n\n- • Consists of a majority of independent Directors; • Is chaired by an independent Director; and • Has at least three members. \n\n- • Is chaired by an independent Director; and • Has at least three members. \n\n- The responsibilities of the committee include recommendations to the Board about: • Remuneration practices and levels of Executives and Non-executive Directors; • The necessary and desirable competencies of Directors; \n\n- • Remuneration practices and levels of Executives and Non-executive Directors; • The necessary and desirable competencies of Directors; • Review of board succession plans;\n\n- • The necessary and desirable competencies of Directors; • Review of board succession plans; • The development of a process for evaluation of the performance of the board, its committees and Directors; and, \n\n- • Review of board succession plans; • The development of a process for evaluation of the performance of the board, its committees and Directors; and, • The appointment and re-election of Directors. \n\n- • The development of a process for evaluation of the performance of the board, its committees and Directors; and, • The appointment and re-election of Directors. \n\nThe combined Remuneration and Nominations Committee consists of three independent Non-Executive Directors and reports its recommendations to the Board for approval. Formal minutes are kept of each meeting and submitted to the Board for review. The members of the Remuneration and Nominations Committee is listed on page 26 of the Directors’ Report. A Remuneration and Nominations Committee charter is published on the Company’s website. \n\nThe Board reviews the composition and skill sets of the Committee on a regular basis, and considers that the current composition, size and skills of the Committee to be appropriate.\n\nCurrently no formal description of the procedure for the selection and appointment of new Directors or the re-election of incumbent Directors exists as it is considered that due to the size of the Company that this process is effectively managed by the Board. However, this activity is discussed by the Committee from time to time. \n\n2.3 Director Performance Review and Evaluation In fiscal year 2014, Sundance’s Board regularly met, both formally and informally, to discuss Board matters and to ensure that the Board acts in an effective way. The Board is provided with information that allows it to discharge its duties effectively, and Non-Executive Directors can and do request additional information as necessary to make informed decisions. The skills, experience and expertise relevant to the position of Director held by each director in office at the date of the annual report can be found in the Directors’ Report on pages 23 to 25. \n\n## 2.3 Director Performance Review and Evaluation In fiscal year 2014, Sundance’s Board regularly met, both formally and informally, to discuss Board matters and to ensure that\n\nNo formal process exists for Directors to access continuing education, as this is not considered practicable for the size of the Company and the financial resources available. However the four Non-Executive Directors have wide experience of directors’ duties and are involved in a variety of outside business and professional activities that add to their knowledge and professionalism. \n\nThe Company Secretary is D Connor. He is accountable to the Board through the Chairman and accessible to all Directors. The appointment and removal of the Company Secretary is a matter for decision by the Board as a whole. \n\n3.1 Code of Conduct The Company has a Code of Conduct and Ethics which establishes the practices that Directors, management and staff must follow in order to comply with the law, meet shareholder expectations, maintain public confidence in the Company’s integrity, and provide a process for reporting and investigating unethical practices. The Code of Conduct is available in the corporate governance section of Sundance’s website. \n\n## $^{ }$Principle 3: Promote Ethical and Responsible Decision-making\n\n## 3.1 Code of Conduct The Company has a Code of Conduct and Ethics which establishes the practices that Directors, management and staff must\n\n## 3.2 Diversity Sundance believes it is important to maintain a diverse, empowered and inclusive workforce to gain valuable perspectives from\n\n3.2 Diversity Sundance believes it is important to maintain a diverse, empowered and inclusive workforce to gain valuable perspectives from people of different gender, race, religion, marital status, disability or national origin. Sundance management recruits on the basis of skills, qualifications, abilities and achievements of the individual. Sundance has published a Diversity policy which is available in the corporate governance section of Sundance’s website. \n\n- 50 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8232490471721702, + "doc_id": "94001ce41cd4fb84fc83584f1945f3302e15c536c9d790631b10aa85ae88ba8b", + "edit_distance": 0.09090909090909091, + "f1_score": 0.9743589743589745, + "meteor": 0.9896039603960397, + "precision": 0.95, + "pred_md": "SMFG\n\nConsolidated Statements of Cash Flows\n\n## (Continued)\n\nSee accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n76", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "SMFG Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows\n\n(Continued)\n\nSee accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.\n\nSMFG 2011 76" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8437963828871863, + "doc_id": "eebbecf5fb5dd284f281d752ef339c1cc7888a4ff87eca466ff40f9a9105ee5d", + "edit_distance": 0.3709677419354839, + "f1_score": 0.9316770186335405, + "meteor": 0.9303358856390457, + "precision": 0.9493670886075949, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 10 - EARNINGS PER SHARE (EPS)\n\n## NOTE 11 - CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS\n\nAs at 31 December 2014 and 2013, the Company had approximately $51.0 million and $37.0 million, respectively, in Section 1031 escrow accounts which are not limited in use, except that the timing of tax payments will be accelerated if not used on qualified 'like-kind property.' As such, the balances have been included in the Company's cash and cash equivalents in the consolidated statement of financial position and consolidated statement of cash flows as at 31 December 2014 and 2013, respectively.\n\n- 79 -", + "recall": 0.9146341463414634, + "true_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\nAs at 31 December 2014 and 2013, the Company had approximately $51.0 million and $37.0 million, respectively, in Section 1031 escrow accounts which are not limited in use, except that the timing of tax payments will be accelerated if not used on qualified “like-kind property.” As such, the balances have been included in the Company’s cash and cash equivalents in the consolidated statement of financial position and consolidated statement of cash flows as at 31 December 2014 and 2013, respectively. \n\n## NOTE 11 – CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS\n\n- 79 - \n\n## NOTE 10 – EARNINGS PER SHARE (EPS)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5946035575013605, + "doc_id": "511625733a553e1409d1437bd75d9e8f5a6d8abd9f2157ba423cf794fa6dfa71", + "edit_distance": 0.2857142857142857, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9606413994169096, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "15\n\nOperations Report\n\nOperations Report\n\ncontinued\n\nu", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Operations Report 15\n\nOperations Report\n\ncontinued u" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7978734969175028, + "doc_id": "963317206d973def7717f4075ff45c9f5c5ab7962a32c0c5aa2c76e8a93c12d6", + "edit_distance": 0.3682795698924731, + "f1_score": 0.9157894736842106, + "meteor": 0.9440187795876228, + "precision": 0.8613861386138614, + "pred_md": "OUR NEW LOOK FROM WINDOWS THAT BRING THE OUTSIDE IN TO DEPARTMENTS THAT SEAMLESSLY FLOW TOGETHEROUR NEW STORE DESIGN CREATES AN EXCITING SPACE THAT CAN CHANGE WITH HOW OUR CUSTOMERS SHOP.\n\nOUR NEW LOOK FROM WINDOWS THAT BRING THE OUTSIDE IN TO DEPARTMENTS THAT SEAMLESSLY FLOW TOGETHEROUR NEW STORE DESIGN CREATES AN EXCITING SPACE THAT CAN CHANGE WITH HOW OUR CUSTOMERS SHOP.\n\nto be within two-day ground delivery of approximately half the population of the United States, which will help improve delivery times for customers and help us meet their rising expectations.\n\nFinally, in 2014, we acquired Trunk Club, a high-growth personalized men's clothing business based on a service model that is highly complementary to our own. We believe Trunk Club is a natural extension of our business, and together we will continue to evolve and bring together the online and offline worlds to deliver a great shopping experience.\n\n## OFF-PRICE: NORDSTROM RACK, NORDSTROMRACK.COM AND HAUTELOOK\n\nWe opened a record 27 new Nordstrom Rack stores, ending 2014 with 167 stores and on track to meet our long-term growth plans\n\nof 300 stores by 2020. Customers continue to respond favorably to the treasure-hunt experience that defines Nordstrom Rack stores. As we expand in many markets for the first time, we hope to continue delivering a great experience, as this business represents a terrific opportunity for us to attract new customers. Last year, Nordstrom Rack was our biggest source of new customers, attracting nearly 4 million. Also, a year ago, we began accepting returns of HauteLook and Nordstromrack.com merchandise at any Nordstrom Rack store. This drove nearly 1 million trips to Nordstrom Rack stores in 2014. The Nordstrom Rack customer also tends to be younger than our full-line customer, and there is a meaningful opportunity for these customers to begin shopping our full-price channels as well. We plan to open 27 more Nordstrom Racks in 2015 across the U.S.\n\n' I love how you used models with physical challenges in your Anniversary catalog. Nice work! '\n\nOUR CUSTOMER, DONNA A.\n\n7", + "recall": 0.9775280898876404, + "true_md": "to be within two-day ground delivery of approximately half the population of the United States, which will help improve delivery times for customers and help us meet their rising expectations.\n\nFinally, in 2014, we acquired Trunk Club, a high-growth personalized men’s clothing business based on a service model that is highly complementary to our own. We believe Trunk Club is a natural extension of our business, and together we will continue to evolve and bring together the online and offline worlds to deliver a great shopping experience.\n\nof 300 stores by 2020. Customers continue to respond favorably to the treasure-hunt experience that defines Nordstrom Rack stores. As we expand in many markets for the first time, we hope to continue delivering a great experience, as this business represents a terrific opportunity for us to attract new customers. Last year, Nordstrom Rack was our biggest source of new customers, attracting nearly 4 million. Also, a year ago, we began accepting returns of HauteLook and Nordstromrack.com merchandise at any Nordstrom Rack store. This drove nearly 1 million trips to Nordstrom Rack stores in 2014. The Nordstrom Rack customer also tends to be younger than our full-line customer, and there is a meaningful opportunity for these customers to begin shopping our full-price channels as well. We plan to open 27 more Nordstrom Racks in 2015 across the U.S. \n\nWe opened a record 27 new Nordstrom Rack stores, ending 2014 with 167 stores and on track to meet our long-term growth plans \n\n7\n\n“ I love how you used models with physical challenges in your Anniversary catalog. Nice work! ” OUR CUSTOMER, DONNA A.\n\n## OFF-PRICE: NORDSTROM RACK, NORDSTROMRACK.COM AND HAUTELOOK" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.819866011140035, + "doc_id": "bf6aca6311a90b076bb2161479c052657a030b0d89b70de27620ef871527054e", + "edit_distance": 0.17535545023696683, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.7876253421271449, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Information on Directors\n\n## Michael Damer Hannell\n\nChairman, BSc Eng (Hons), FIEAust\n\n## Experience\n\nMike has been a Director of Sundance since March 2006 and chairman of our board of directors since December 2008. Mr. Hannell has over 45 years of experience in the oil and gas industry, initially in the downstream sector and subsequently in the upstream sector. His extensive experience has been in a wide range of design and construction, engineering, operations, exploration and development, marketing and commercial, financial and corporate areas in the United States, United Kingdom, continental Europe and Australia at the senior executive level with Mobil Oil (now Exxon) and Santos Ltd. Mr. Hannell recently finished his term as the chairman of Rees Operations Pty Ltd (doing business as Milford Industries Pty Ltd), an Australian automotive components and transportation container manufacturer and supplier. He has also held a number of other board appointments including the chairman of Sydac Pty Ltd, a designer and producer of simulation training products for industry. Mr. Hannell has also served on a number of not-for-profit boards, with appointments as president of the Adelaide-based Chamber of Mines and Energy, president of Business SA (formerly the South Australian Chamber of Commerce and Industry), chairman of the Investigator Science and Technology Centre, chairman of the Adelaide Graduate School of Business, and a member of the South Australian Legal Practitioners Conduct Board. Mr. Hannell holds a Bachelor of Science degree in Engineering (with Honors) from the University of London and is a Fellow of the Institution of Engineers Australia.\n\n## Interest in Shares :\n\n1,059,000 ordinary shares in Sundance Energy Australia Limited\n\n## Special Responsibilities :\n\n- -Chairman of the Board of Directors\n- -Chairman of the Remuneration and Nominations Committee\n- -Member of the Audit and Risk Management Committee\n- -Member of the Reserves Committee\n\nOther Directorships :\n\nNil\n\n## Eric P. McCrady\n\nDirector, BS in Business Administration\n\n## Experience\n\nEric has been our Chief Executive Officer since April 2011 and Managing Director of our board of directors since November 2011. He also served as our Chief Financial Officer from June 2010 until becoming Chief Executive Officer in 2011. Mr. McCrady has served in numerous positions in the energy, private investment and retail industries. From 2004 to 2010, Mr. McCrady was employed by The Broe Group, a private investment firm, in various financial and executive management positions across a variety of industry investment platforms, including energy, transportation and real estate. From 1997 to 2003, Mr. McCrady was employed by American Coin Merchandising, Inc. in various corporate finance roles. Mr. McCrady holds a degree in Business Administration from the University of Colorado, Boulder.\n\nInterest in Shares, Restricted Share Units and Options:\n\n- 1,908,581 Ordinary Shares in Sundance Energy Australia Limited and 791,561 Restricted Share Units\n\n## Special Responsibilities :\n\nManaging Director and Chief Executive Officer of the Company\n\nOther Directorships :\n\nNil\n\n- 23 -", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## Information on Directors\n\n## Michael Damer Hannell Chairman, BSc Eng (Hons), FIEAust\n\n## Experience\n\nMike has been a Director of Sundance since March 2006 and chairman of our board of directors since December 2008. Mr. Hannell has over 45 years of experience in the oil and gas industry, initially in the downstream sector and subsequently in the upstream sector. His extensive experience has been in a wide range of design and construction, engineering, operations, exploration and development, marketing and commercial, financial and corporate areas in the United States, United Kingdom, continental Europe and Australia at the senior executive level with Mobil Oil (now Exxon) and Santos Ltd. Mr. Hannell recently finished his term as the chairman of Rees Operations Pty Ltd (doing business as Milford Industries Pty Ltd), an Australian automotive components and transportation container manufacturer and supplier. He has also held a number of other board appointments including the chairman of Sydac Pty Ltd, a designer and producer of simulation training products for industry. Mr. Hannell has also served on a number of not-for-profit boards, with appointments as president of the Adelaide-based Chamber of Mines and Energy, president of Business SA (formerly the South Australian Chamber of Commerce and Industry), chairman of the Investigator Science and Technology Centre, chairman of the Adelaide Graduate School of Business, and a member of the South Australian Legal Practitioners Conduct Board. Mr. Hannell holds a Bachelor of Science degree in Engineering (with Honors) from the University of London and is a Fellow of the Institution of Engineers Australia.\n\nInterest in Shares : 1,059,000 ordinary shares in Sundance Energy Australia Limited \n\nSpecial Responsibilities : -Chairman of the Board of Directors -Chairman of the Remuneration and Nominations Committee -Member of the Audit and Risk Management Committee -Member of the Reserves Committee\n\nOther Directorships Nil\n\n## Special Responsibilities : -Chairman of the Board of Directors\n\n## Interest in Shares : 1,059,000 ordinary shares in Sundance Energy Australia Limited\n\n## Other Directorships : Nil\n\n## Eric P. McCrady Director, BS in Business\n\n## Experience Eric has been our Chief Executive Officer since April 2011 and Managing Director of our board of directors since November\n\nEric P. McCrady Director, BS in Business Administration\n\nExperience Eric has been our Chief Executive Officer since April 2011 and Managing Director of our board of directors since November 2011. He also served as our Chief Financial Officer from June 2010 until becoming Chief Executive Officer in 2011. Mr. McCrady has served in numerous positions in the energy, private investment and retail industries. From 2004 to 2010, Mr. McCrady was employed by The Broe Group, a private investment firm, in various financial and executive management positions across a variety of industry investment platforms, including energy, transportation and real estate. From 1997 to 2003, Mr. McCrady was employed by American Coin Merchandising, Inc. in various corporate finance roles. Mr. McCrady holds a degree in Business Administration from the University of Colorado, Boulder. \n\nInterest in Shares, Restricted Share Units and Options: 1,908,581 Ordinary Shares in Sundance Energy Australia Limited and 791,561 Restricted Share Units \n\nSpecial Responsibilities : Managing Director and Chief Executive Officer of the Company \n\nOther Directorships Nil \n\n## Interest in Shares, Restricted Share Units and Options: 1,908,581 Ordinary Shares in Sundance Energy Australia Limited and 791,561 Restricted Share Units\n\n## Special Responsibilities : Managing Director and Chief Executive Officer of the Company\n\n## Other Directorships : Nil\n\n- 23 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8828113156254661, + "doc_id": "63ea8c32c3a5d529d0e1bc1ce1989732206ec7dd95566a566be4df1815791727", + "edit_distance": 0.09032258064516129, + "f1_score": 0.9600000000000002, + "meteor": 0.9436104941276423, + "precision": 0.9642857142857143, + "pred_md": "12\n\nOperations Report\n\n## Operations Report\n\nwww.kingsgate.com.au\n\nu\n\n## Chatree Gold Mine\n\nThailand\n\n## Summary\n\nChatree continued as Kingsgate's primary production asset throughout the year, producing 133,681 ounces of gold and over 1,000,569 ounces of silver. The strong production performance was achieved despite some operational difficulties with slower than anticipated Government approvals to allow full utilisation of the expanded plant.\n\nThe delay of 63 days in approval of our Metallurgical License negatively impacted on our production targets which were also compounded by the Mining Contractor's poor equipment availability. Near surface higher grades in Q Prospect mitigated these difficulties resulting in a strong final quarter for the year.\n\nChatree continues to demonstrate world's best practice for safety. The mine has now operated for 23.6 million man hours (10.5 years) without a lost time injury ('LTI').", + "recall": 0.9557522123893806, + "true_md": "12 Operations Report\n\n## Operations Report\n\n## Chatree Gold Mine\n\n## Summary\n\nThailand\n\nChatree continued as Kingsgate’s primary production asset throughout the year, producing 133,681 ounces of gold and over 1,000,569 ounces of silver. The strong production performance was achieved despite some operational difficulties with slower than anticipated Government approvals to allow full utilisation of the expanded plant.\n\nThe delay of 63 days in approval of our Metallurgical License negatively impacted on our production targets which were also compounded by the Mining Contractor’s poor equipment availability. Near surface higher grades in Q Prospect mitigated these difficulties resulting in a strong final quarter for the year.\n\nChatree continues to demonstrate world’s best practice for safety. The mine has now operated for 23.6 million man hours (10.5 years) without a lost time injury (“LTI”).\n\nwww.kingsgate.com.au" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8100992609397818, + "doc_id": "4c026b33cd50e5a8e260c8012a7e8aaedfdbdd5091889b956bd279fdd5b2a428", + "edit_distance": 0.4028892455858748, + "f1_score": 0.9200779727095517, + "meteor": 0.9056999044925639, + "precision": 0.9402390438247012, + "pred_md": "18\n\nThe Japan Research Institute, Limited (JRI), an intelligence engineering company, provides high value-added information system, consultation and think-tank services. In addition to providing financial consultation services on management reform, IT, the planning and development of strategic information systems and outsourcing, it also conducts diverse activities including domestic and international economic research and analysis, policy recommendations and business incubation.\n\nSMBC Friend Securities Co., Ltd. is a securities company with one of the best financial foundations and efficient operations in the industry, and provides a full range of securities services focusing mainly on retail clients. SMBC Friend Securities provides highly efficient nationwide network operations offering services closely tailored to the needs of its clients and the communities while operating a new business model of online financial consulting services.\n\nSMBC Friend Securities will continue to develop consistently toward its goal of becoming 'one of the leading Japanese securities companies in the retail securities market,' offering high-quality products and services accommodating the needs of its clients and building trust for its clients.\n\nSMBC Nikko Securities Inc. (formerly Nikko Cordial Securities Inc.), which was established in July 1918, has developed solid relationships of trust with its corporate clients over the last nine decades. It became a member of the SMFG Group in October 2009, bringing its accumulated knowledge and substantial client base to closely work with and leverage the extensive service network and business relations of SMBC. In April 2011, its corporate name was changed to SMBC Nikko Securities from Nikko Cordial Securities in order to define its status as the principal securities company of the Group. As such, SMBC Nikko Securities provides comprehensive and highly sophisticated financial services by consistently working closely with SMBC in order to pursue comprehensive securities and investment banking businesses.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\nCompany Name:\n\nThe Japan Research Institute, Limited\n\nBusiness Profile:\n\nSystems engineering, data processing, management\n\nconsulting, think-tank services\n\nEstablishment:\n\nNovember 1, 2002\n\nHead Office:\n\nTokyo Head Office:\n\n6, Ichibancho, 1\n\nChiyoda-ku, Tokyo\n\nOsaka Head Office:\n\n-2-4, Tosabori, 2\n\nNishi-ku, Osaka\n\nPresident & CEO:\n\nYasuyuki Kimoto\n\nNumber of Employees:\n\n2,101\n\nCompany Name:\n\nSMBC Friend Securities Co., Ltd.\n\nBusiness Profile:\n\nSecurities services\n\nEstablishment:\n\nMarch 2, 1948\n\nHead Office:\n\n-12, Kabuto-cho, Nihonbashi, 7\n\nChuo-ku, Tokyo\n\nPresident & CEO:\n\nOsamu Endo\n\nNumber of Employees:\n\n2,034\n\n## www.jri.co.jp/english/\n\nFinancial Information (Years ended March 31)\n\n## www.smbc-friend.co.jp\n\n(Japanese only)\n\nFinancial Information (Years ended March 31)\n\nwww.smbcnikko.co.jp/en\n\nSMBC Nikko Securities strives to become the leading securities and investment banking company in Japan.\n\nCompany Name:\n\nSMBC Nikko Securities Inc.\n\n(name changed on April 1, 2011)\n\nBusiness Profile:\n\nSecurities services\n\nEstablishment:\n\nJune 15, 2009\n\nHead Office:\n\n-1, Marunouchi 3-chome, 3\n\nChiyoda-ku, Tokyo\n\nPresident & CEO:\n\nEiji Watanabe\n\nNumber of Employees: 6,975\n\nCredit Ratings (as of June 30, 2011)\n\nFinancial Information (Years ended March 31)\n\nBillions of yen\n\n- *1 Formerly Nikko Cordial Securities (1H)\n- *2 Nikko Cordial Securities, June 2009 (expenses related to preparatory costs prior to the start of operations were posted during the period from June to September)\n- *3 Formerly Nikko Cordial Securities", + "recall": 0.9007633587786259, + "true_md": "The Japan Research Institute, Limited (JRI), an intelligence engineering company, provides high value-added information system, con- sultation and think-tank services. In addition to providing financial consultation services on management reform, IT, the planning and development of strategic information systems and outsourcing, it also conducts diverse activities including domestic and international economic research and analysis, policy rec- ommendations and business incubation.\n\nSMBC Friend Securities Co., Ltd. is a secu- rities company with one of the best financial foundations and efficient operations in the industry, and provides a full range of securi- ties services focusing mainly on retail clients. SMBC Friend Securities provides highly effi- cient nationwide network operations offering services closely tailored to the needs of its clients and the communities while operating a new business model of online financial con- sulting services.\n\nSMBC Friend Securities will continue to develop consistently toward its goal of becom- ing “one of the leading Japanese securities companies in the retail securities market,” offering high-quality products and services accommodating the needs of its clients and building trust for its clients.\n\nSMBC Nikko Securities Inc. (formerly Nikko Cordial Securities Inc.), which was established in July 1918, has developed solid relation- ships of trust with its corporate clients over the last nine decades. It became a member of the SMFG Group in October 2009, bring- ing its accumulated knowledge and sub- stantial client base to closely work with and leverage the extensive service network and business relations of SMBC. In April 2011, its corporate name was changed to SMBC Nikko Securities from Nikko Cordial Securities in order to define its status as the principal securities company of the Group. As such, SMBC Nikko Securities provides comprehen- sive and highly sophisticated financial services by consistently working closely with SMBC in order to pursue comprehensive securities and investment banking businesses.\n\nSMFG 2011 18\n\nwww.jri.co.jp/english/\n\nFinancial Information (Years ended March 31)\n\nwww.smbc-friend.co.jp\n\n(Japanese only)\n\nFinancial Information (Years ended March 31)\n\nwww.smbcnikko.co.jp/en\n\nCredit Ratings (as of June 30, 2011)\n\nFinancial Information (Years ended March 31)\n\n- *1 Formerly Nikko Cordial Securities (1H)\n\n- *2 Nikko Cordial Securities, June 2009 (expenses related to preparatory costs prior to the start of operations were posted during the period from June to September)\n\n- *3 Formerly Nikko Cordial Securities\n\n- Company Name: The Japan Research Institute, Limited\n\n- Business Profile: Systems engineering, data processing, management consulting, think-tank services\n\n- Establishment: November 1, 2002\n\n- Head Office:\n\n- Tokyo Head Office: 16, Ichibancho, Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo\n\n- Osaka Head Office: 2-2-4, Tosabori, Nishi-ku, Osaka\n\n- President & CEO: Yasuyuki Kimoto\n\n- Number of Employees: 2,101\n\n- Company Name: SMBC Friend Securities Co., Ltd.\n\n- Business Profile: Securities services\n\n- Establishment: March 2, 1948\n\n- Head Office: 7-12, Kabuto-cho, Nihonbashi, Chuo-ku, Tokyo\n\n- President & CEO: Osamu Endo\n\n- Number of Employees: 2,034\n\n- Company Name: SMBC Nikko Securities Inc. (name changed on April 1, 2011)\n\n- Business Profile: Securities services\n\n- Establishment: June 15, 2009\n\n- Head Office: 3-1, Marunouchi 3-chome, Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo\n\n- President & CEO: Eiji Watanabe\n\n- Number of Employees: 6,975\n\nSMBC Nikko Securities strives to become the leading securities and investment banking company in Japan." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8872787472780789, + "doc_id": "6d7753b9591306f7a3b1c9e73332024200cd0882a893101846c436cba0e6cac4", + "edit_distance": 0.09438775510204081, + "f1_score": 0.9774011299435028, + "meteor": 0.9730498083003567, + "precision": 0.9719101123595506, + "pred_md": "FINANCIAL OVERVIEW\n\nFINANCIAL OVERVIEW\n\nThrough our emphasis on operating and G&A cost control initiatives, the Company's record oil and natural gas sales translated to best-in-class Adjusted EBITDAX Margin (79 percent) among peers our size and a full 10 absolute percentage points higher than the average of our entire peer group.\n\nAs a result of its significant production increase, the Company's 2014 oil, NGL and natural gas sales revenue increased by $74.4 million to $159.8 million; an 87 percent increase compared to $85.3 million in 2013.\n\nREVENUE (US$000s) AND PRODUCTION (Boe/d)\n\nREVENUE (US$000s) AND PRODUCTION (Boe/d)\n\nThis topline growth resulted in Adjusted EBIDTAX increase of $73.8 million to $126.4 million (79 percent of revenue); a 140 percent increase compared to $52.6 million (62 percent of revenue) in 2013. In other words, for every $1.00 of revenue growth compared to 2013, the Company added $0.99 of 2014 Adjusted EBITDAX growth.\n\n## ADJUSTED EBITDAX AND MARGIN\n\n-\n\n6\n\nADJUSTED EBITDAX MARGIN (%)\n\nThis Adjusted EBITDAX (generally a good proxy for our operating cash flow) increase was primarily the result of increased revenue and the following cost controlled operating expenses:\n\n- · Lease operating expenses increased only slightly (12 percent), despite significant production increases (108 percent). As a result of several changes in its field operations and economies of scale, the Company has realized improvement in its lease operating costs per barrel.\n- · Production taxes also only increased slightly (11 percent), despite significant revenue increase (87 percent). Through a series of strategic dispositions, the Company has shifted its state production mix from primarily high severance tax rate\n\njurisdictions (states of Colorado and North Dakota) to lower severance tax rate jurisdictions (states of Texas and Oklahoma).\n\n- · General and administrative expenses remained relatively flat compared to prior year. This is primarily due to the fact that the Company began ramping up staffing in 2013 as it expected development growth in late 2013 and 2014.", + "recall": 0.9829545454545454, + "true_md": "FINANCIAL OVERVIEW\n\nThrough our emphasis on operating and G&A cost control initiatives, the Company’s record oil and natural gas sales translated to best-in-class Adjusted EBITDAX Margin (79 percent) among peers our size and a full 10 absolute percentage points higher than the average of our entire peer group. \n\nAs a result of its significant production increase, the Company’s 2014 oil, NGL and natural gas sales revenue increased by $74.4 million to $159.8 million; an 87 percent increase compared to $85.3 million in 2013.\n\nREVENUE (US$000s) AND PRODUCTION (Boe/d)\n\nADJUSTED EBITDAX AND MARGIN\n\nThis topline growth resulted in Adjusted EBIDTAX increase of $73.8 million to $126.4 million (79 percent of revenue); a 140 percent increase compared to $52.6 million (62 percent of revenue) in 2013. In other words, for every $1.00 of revenue growth compared to 2013, the Company added $0.99 of 2014 Adjusted EBITDAX growth.\n\nThis Adjusted EBITDAX (generally a good proxy for our operating cash flow) increase was primarily the result of increased revenue and the following cost controlled operating expenses:\n\n• Lease operating expenses increased only slightly (12 percent), despite significant production increases (108 percent). As a result of several changes in its field operations and economies of scale, the Company has realized improvement in its lease operating costs per barrel. \n\n• Production taxes also only increased slightly (11 percent), despite significant revenue increase (87 percent). Through a series of strategic dispositions, the Company has shifted its state production mix from primarily high severance tax rate\n\njurisdictions (states of Colorado and North Dakota) to lower severance tax rate jurisdictions (states of Texas and Oklahoma).\n\n• General and administrative expenses remained relatively flat compared to prior year. This is primarily due to the fact that the Company began ramping up staffing in 2013 as it expected development growth in late 2013 and 2014.\n\n6" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.883628260558571, + "doc_id": "c78b1b7aa4b76e4c949cc7c1b9abaf4e007d012b42cc64b70b21e4680d9c0968", + "edit_distance": 0.11428571428571428, + "f1_score": 0.9714285714285715, + "meteor": 0.9088636790828779, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## (d) Equity instrument disclosures relating to key management personnel\n\n## Share holdings\n\nThe number of shares in the Company held during the financial year by each Director of Kingsgate and each of the other Key Management Personnel of the Group, including their personally-related entities are set out as follows:\n\nNotes to the Financial Statements\n\ncontinued\n\nu", + "recall": 0.9444444444444444, + "true_md": "Notes to the Financial Statements 105\n\n## (d) Equity instrument disclosures relating to key management personnel\n\n## Share holdings\n\nThe number of shares in the Company held during the financial year by each Director of Kingsgate and each of the other Key Management Personnel of the Group, including their personally-related entities are set out as follows:\n\nNotes t o the Financial Statements\n\ncontinued u" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.930335092324292, + "doc_id": "56a4e2abe812228e3db784b3e8ff76e3c5f2e1e2270fb85b1d7cfc56441b0ef4", + "edit_distance": 0.12376237623762376, + "f1_score": 0.9841269841269842, + "meteor": 0.9793959115764886, + "precision": 0.992, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 23 - RESTORATION PROVISION\n\nThe restoration provision represents the best estimate of the present value of restoration costs relating to the Company's oil and natural gas interests, which are expected to be incurred up to 2043. Assumptions, based on the current economic environment, have been made which management believes are a reasonable basis upon which to estimate the future liability. The estimate of future removal costs requires management to make significant judgments regarding removal date or well lives, the extent of restoration activities required, discount and inflation rates. These estimates are reviewed regularly to take into account any material changes to the assumptions. However, actual restoration costs will reflect market conditions at the relevant time. Furthermore, the timing of restoration is likely to depend on when the fields cease to produce at economically viable rates. This in turn will depend on future oil and natural gas prices, which are inherently uncertain.\n\n## NOTE 24 - DEFERRED TAX ASSETS AND LIABILITIES\n\nDeferred tax assets and liabilities are attributable to the following:\n\n- 88 -", + "recall": 0.9763779527559056, + "true_md": "NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS \n\n## NOTE 23 – RESTORATION PROVISION\n\n## NOTE 24 – DEFERRED TAX ASSETS AND LIABILITIES\n\nThe restoration provision represents the best estimate of the present value of restoration costs relating to the Company’s oil and natural gas interests, which are expected to be incurred up to 2043. Assumptions, based on the current economic environment, have been made which management believes are a reasonable basis upon which to estimate the future liability. The estimate of future removal costs requires management to make significant judgments regarding removal date or well lives, the extent of restoration activities required, discount and inflation rates. These estimates are reviewed regularly to take into account any material changes to the assumptions. However, actual restoration costs will reflect market conditions at the relevant time. Furthermore, the timing of restoration is likely to depend on when the fields cease to produce at economically viable rates. This in turn will depend on future oil and natural gas prices, which are inherently uncertain. \n\nDeferred tax assets and liabilities are attributable to the following:\n\n- 88 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6997522298221912, + "doc_id": "655baf289d2a027bdceff92e6d8b16132646b8b314c9260ea5c4e806282eb309", + "edit_distance": 0.14285714285714285, + "f1_score": 0.9565217391304348, + "meteor": 0.981329690346084, + "precision": 0.9166666666666666, + "pred_md": "SMFG\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n## (Continued)\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n138", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "SMFG Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n(Continued)\n\nSMFG 2011 138" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8524973956256305, + "doc_id": "9e9ac9cf2b35c4c40127e805a05df2cd7434a18614b75a45e9a5a251ff570cc2", + "edit_distance": 0.9211165048543689, + "f1_score": 0.9170305676855894, + "meteor": 0.6206243435964097, + "precision": 0.9431137724550899, + "pred_md": "10\n\n## ■ Corporate Banking\n\n## Improving Products and Services for Mid-sized Companies and SMEs\n\n## ¥ Initiatives to facilitate financing\n\nSMBC believes that facilitating the efficient supply of funds to its clients is one of its main social responsibilities as a financial institution. We are making our best efforts, under increasingly difficult global financial conditions, to proactively facilitate financing appropriate to the needs of our mid-sized and SME corporate clients. SMBC established its Middle Market Facilitating Financing Department in December 2009 under the Planning Department of the Corporate Banking Unit.\n\nWe will continue to implement initiatives to identify the constantly changing needs and issues of our corporate clients, and offer customized products and services in order to support their business development.\n\n## ¥ Environmentally friendly products and services\n\nIn order to respond to society's greater demand for the environmental commitments of our clients including not only major companies but also mid-sized companies and SMEs, SMBC has been augmenting its loan products with environmental incentives, creating an environmental business information section under the bank's homepage, and offering seminars. The cumulative total of such loans provided was approximately ¥350 billion as of March 31, 2011.\n\nFurthermore, our environmental initiatives have been publicly recognized. We received the '2009 Nikkei Superior Products and Services Award' in January 2010, and the 'Grand Prize by the Ministry of Environment' at 'the 7th Eco-Products Awards' in November 2010, for our 'SMBC Environmental Assessment Loan/Private Placement Bonds.'\n\n## ¥ Information services\n\nSMBC has been strengthening its internal systems for businessmatching, resulting in a dramatic increase in the number of business meetings we have arranged between possible partners. In particular, in our 'all-in-one matching' program, which simultaneously matches a substantial number of our corporate clients with the purchasing departments of major corporations, we have enhanced our corporate client information database. This enables us to supply our corporate clients with more information on the purchasing needs of major corporations.\n\nWe also held the SMFG Environmental Business Forum in December 2010 which formed a part of 'Eco-Products 2010' in Tokyo Big Sight, for the promotion of environmental businesses. At this annual event, we arranged approximately 670 business meetings to match the increasing environmental procurement\n\nSMFG 2011\n\nneeds of major corporations with the growing needs of SMEs for new distribution channels.\n\nAt this event, our Group companies exhibited diverse environmental solutions, and also held panel discussions and provided environmental information.\n\nFurthermore, the bank and SMBC Nikko Securities installed the 'IPO Navigator' in July 2010, an online information service offered for free of charge to registered clients considering an IPO. Information necessary for an IPO is provided by the platform, of which the contents are supplied by nine advisory companies and two sponsor companies. During its six months of operation, more than 260 companies have registered with this program. SMBC and SMBC Nikko Securities continue to support our clients planning for an IPO.\n\n## Enhancing Services for Globalizing Corporations\n\nAn increasing number of our corporate clients are expanding their businesses overseas, and are faced with the growing need to address such issues as differences in business practices; cultures; legal, accounting, and taxation systems, the interpretation of these systems; as well as funding.\n\nSMBC established its Global Advisory Department (GAD) to specifically assist the development of solutions for the crossborder issues of globally expanding clients. GAD works to further strengthen our domestic and overseas support for the overseas business operations of such companies.\n\nWe provide overseas business-related seminars on Brazil and global issues, not limited to China or other Asian markets, and also provide the latest overseas economic or market information, including local conditions, details of regulations, industry trends, and other relevant issues, for our clients considering to newly develop their businesses overseas; and we also provide high quality support and solutions for the needs of our clients who have already established their business operations overseas, including business development and reorganization. We are constantly enhancing our system to support the globalization of our clients' businesses.\n\n## Strengthening Measures for Greater China\n\nAs the economic integration continues in Greater China (PRC, Hong Kong and Taiwan), inter-company trading and funding have been actively increasing. A substantial number of Japanese companies have expanded business into China, and it is anticipated that this entry and expansion by such companies into the", + "recall": 0.8923512747875354, + "true_md": "## ■ Corporate Banking\n\n## Improving Products and Services for Mid-sized Companies and SMEs\n\n## • Initiatives to facilitate financing\n\n## • Environmentally friendly products and services\n\n## Enhancing Services for Globalizing Corporations\n\n## • Information services\n\nWe also held the SMFG Environmental Business Forum in December 2010 which formed a part of “Eco-Products 2010” in Tokyo Big Sight, for the promotion of environmental businesses. At this annual event, we arranged approximately 670 business meetings to match the increasing environmental procurement \n\n## Strengthening Measures for Greater China\n\nAs the economic integration continues in Greater China (PRC, Hong Kong and Taiwan), inter-company trading and funding have been actively increasing. A substantial number of Japanese companies have expanded business into China, and it is antici- pated that this entry and expansion by such companies into the \n\nSMBC has been strengthening its internal systems for business- matching, resulting in a dramatic increase in the number of busi- ness meetings we have arranged between possible partners. In particular, in our “all-in-one matching” program, which simulta- neously matches a substantial number of our corporate clients with the purchasing departments of major corporations, we have enhanced our corporate client information database. This enables us to supply our corporate clients with more information on the purchasing needs of major corporations.\n\nWe provide overseas business-related seminars on Brazil and global issues, not limited to China or other Asian markets, and also provide the latest overseas economic or market infor- mation, including local conditions, details of regulations, industry trends, and other relevant issues, for our clients considering to newly develop their businesses overseas; and we also provide high quality support and solutions for the needs of our clients who have already established their business operations over- seas, including business development and reorganization. We are constantly enhancing our system to support the globalization of our clients’ businesses.\n\nSMBC established its Global Advisory Department (GAD) to specifically assist the development of solutions for the cross- border issues of globally expanding clients. GAD works to further strengthen our domestic and overseas support for the overseas business operations of such companies.\n\nAn increasing number of our corporate clients are expanding their businesses overseas, and are faced with the growing need to address such issues as differences in business practices; cultures; legal, accounting, and taxation systems, the interpreta- tion of these systems; as well as funding.\n\nFurthermore, our environmental initiatives have been publicly recognized. We received the “2009 Nikkei Superior Products and Services Award” in January 2010, and the “Grand Prize by the Ministry of Environment” at “the 7th Eco-Products Awards” in November 2010, for our “SMBC Environmental Assessment Loan/Private Placement Bonds.”\n\nIn order to respond to society’s greater demand for the envi- ronmental commitments of our clients including not only major companies but also mid-sized companies and SMEs, SMBC has been augmenting its loan products with environmental incentives, creating an environmental business information sec- tion under the bank’s homepage, and offering seminars. The cumulative total of such loans provided was approximately ¥350 billion as of March 31, 2011.\n\nWe will continue to implement initiatives to identify the con- stantly changing needs and issues of our corporate clients, and offer customized products and services in order to support their business development.\n\nSMBC believes that facilitating the efficient supply of funds to its clients is one of its main social responsibilities as a financial institution. We are making our best efforts, under increasingly difficult global financial conditions, to proactively facilitate financ- ing appropriate to the needs of our mid-sized and SME cor- porate clients. SMBC established its Middle Market Facilitating Financing Department in December 2009 under the Planning Department of the Corporate Banking Unit.\n\nneeds of major corporations with the growing needs of SMEs for new distribution channels.\n\nAt this event, our Group compa- nies exhibited diverse environmental solutions, and also held panel dis- cussions and provided environmental information.\n\nFurthermore, the bank and SMBC Nikko Securities installed the “IPO Navigator” in July 2010, an online information service offered for free of charge to registered clients considering an IPO. Information nec- essary for an IPO is provided by the platform, of which the contents are supplied by nine advisory companies and two sponsor companies. During its six months of operation, more than 260 companies have registered with this program. SMBC and SMBC Nikko Securities continue to support our clients planning for an IPO.\n\nSMFG 2011 10" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7585580241704932, + "doc_id": "b5243c57c5f90dc2203315a84299f20f4151ae80cec9f1d28b7c2236de231d9c", + "edit_distance": 0.2421602787456446, + "f1_score": 0.9924812030075189, + "meteor": 0.8075188821789047, + "precision": 0.9949748743718593, + "pred_md": "## Damien Ashley Hannes\n\nDirector, CA, BBs\n\n## Experience\n\nDamien has been a Director since August 2009. Mr. Hannes has over 25 years of finance experience. He has served over 15 years as a managing director and a member of the operating committee, among other senior management positions, for Credit Suisse's listed derivatives business in equities, commodities and fixed income in its Asia and Pacific region. From 1986 to 1993, Mr. Hannes was a director for Fay Richwhite Australia, a New Zealand merchant bank. Prior to his tenure with Fay Richwhite, Mr. Hannes was the director of operations and chief financial officer of Donaldson, Lufkin and Jenrette Futures Ltd, a U.S. investment bank. He has successfully raised capital and developed and managed mining, commodities trading and manufacturing businesses in the global market. Mr. Hannes also serves as the chairman of the board of directors of Goldsmith Resources SAC, a gold mining company with operations in Peru, and as a director of Quill Stationery Manufacturers Limited, a paper products business with operations in China. He holds a Bachelor of Business degree from the NSW University of Technology in Australia. Mr. Hannes is a qualified chartered accountant.\n\n## Interest in Shares :\n\n5,801,561 Ordinary Shares in Sundance Energy Australia Limited\n\nSpecial Responsibilities :\n\n-Chairman of the Audit and Risk Management Committee -Member of the Remuneration and Nominations Committee\n\n## Other Directorships :\n\n-Chairman of the Board of Directors of Goldsmith Resources SAC -Director of Quill Stationery Manufacturers Limited\n\n## Neville Wayne Martin\n\nDirector, LLB\n\n## Experience\n\nNeville has been a Director since January 2012. Prior to his election, he was an alternate director on our board of directors. Mr. Martin has over 40 years of experience as a lawyer specializing in corporate law and mining, oil and gas law. He is currently a consultant to the Australian law firm, Minter Ellison. Mr. Martin has served as a director on the boards of several Australian companies listed on the Australian Securities Exchange, including Stuart Petroleum Ltd from 1999 to 2002, Austin Exploration Ltd. from 2005 to 2008 and Adelaide Energy Ltd from 2005 to 2011. Mr. Martin is the former state president of the Australian Resource and Energy Law Association. Mr. Martin holds a Bachelor of Laws degree from Adelaide University.\n\n## Interest in Shares :\n\n422,800 Ordinary Shares in Sundance Energy Australia Limited\n\nSpecial Responsibilities :\n\n-Member of the Audit and Risk Management Committee\n\n-Member of the Reserves Committee\n\nOther Directorships :\n\nNil\n\n- 24 -", + "recall": 0.99, + "true_md": "Damien Ashley Hannes Director, CA, BBs \n\n## Experience Damien has been a Director since August 2009. Mr. Hannes has over 25 years of finance experience. He has served over 15\n\n## Experience Neville has been a Director since January 2012. Prior to his election, he was an alternate director on our board of directors.\n\nExperience Damien has been a Director since August 2009. Mr. Hannes has over 25 years of finance experience. He has served over 15 years as a managing director and a member of the operating committee, among other senior management positions, for Credit Suisse’s listed derivatives business in equities, commodities and fixed income in its Asia and Pacific region. From 1986 to 1993, Mr. Hannes was a director for Fay Richwhite Australia, a New Zealand merchant bank. Prior to his tenure with Fay Richwhite, Mr. Hannes was the director of operations and chief financial officer of Donaldson, Lufkin and Jenrette Futures Ltd, a U.S. investment bank. He has successfully raised capital and developed and managed mining, commodities trading and manufacturing businesses in the global market. Mr. Hannes also serves as the chairman of the board of directors of Goldsmith Resources SAC, a gold mining company with operations in Peru, and as a director of Quill Stationery Manufacturers Limited, a paper products business with operations in China. He holds a Bachelor of Business degree from the NSW University of Technology in Australia. Mr. Hannes is a qualified chartered accountant. \n\nInterest in Shares : 5,801,561 Ordinary Shares in Sundance Energy Australia Limited \n\n## Special Responsibilities : -Chairman of the Audit and Risk Management Committee\n\n## Interest in Shares : 5,801,561 Ordinary Shares in Sundance Energy Australia Limited\n\n## Other Directorships : -Chairman of the Board of Directors of Goldsmith Resources SAC\n\n## Interest in Shares : 422,800 Ordinary Shares in Sundance Energy Australia Limited\n\n## Special Responsibilities : -Member of the Audit and Risk Management Committee\n\n## Other Directorships : Nil\n\nSpecial Responsibilities : -Chairman of the Audit and Risk Management Committee -Member of the Remuneration and Nominations Committee \n\nOther Directorships : -Chairman of the Board of Directors of Goldsmith Resources SAC -Director of Quill Stationery Manufacturers Limited \n\nNeville Wayne Martin Director, LLB \n\nExperience Neville has been a Director since January 2012. Prior to his election, he was an alternate director on our board of directors. Mr. Martin has over 40 years of experience as a lawyer specializing in corporate law and mining, oil and gas law. He is currently a consultant to the Australian law firm, Minter Ellison. Mr. Martin has served as a director on the boards of several Australian companies listed on the Australian Securities Exchange, including Stuart Petroleum Ltd from 1999 to 2002, Austin Exploration Ltd. from 2005 to 2008 and Adelaide Energy Ltd from 2005 to 2011. Mr. Martin is the former state president of the Australian Resource and Energy Law Association. Mr. Martin holds a Bachelor of Laws degree from Adelaide University. \n\nInterest in Shares : 422,800 Ordinary Shares in Sundance Energy Australia Limited \n\nSpecial Responsibilities : -Member of the Audit and Risk Management Committee -Member of the Reserves Committee \n\nOther Directorships Nil\n\n- 24 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7919509213707936, + "doc_id": "3eff98c208780b53821fc36e1707daa8b7e4a6c71cc8a5cd6f9e81bfbe0fe09b", + "edit_distance": 0.5150943396226415, + "f1_score": 0.9915492957746479, + "meteor": 0.6387239215193112, + "precision": 0.9943502824858758, + "pred_md": "## Income Tax Expense\n\nIncome tax expense is summarized in the following table:\n\nThe following table illustrates the components of our effective tax rate:\n\n## Income Tax Expense (2014 vs. 2013)\n\nThe increase in the effective tax rate for 2014 compared with 2013 was primarily due to tax adjustments associated with a reassessment of our deferred tax assets related to acquisitions.\n\n## Income Tax Expense (2013 vs. 2012)\n\nThe increase in the effective tax rate for 2013 compared with 2012 was primarily due to changes in our estimated state tax reserves.\n\n## Fourth Quarter Results\n\nThe following are our results for the fourth quarters of 2014 and 2013:\n\n1 Gross profit is calculated as net sales less cost of sales and related buying and occupancy costs (for all segments).\n\nOur fourth quarter sales trends were consistent with trends the company experienced throughout 2014. We continued to make progress executing our customer strategy through investments to drive growth across channels. Net earnings for the fourth quarter of 2014 were $255, or $1.32 per diluted share, compared with $268, or $1.37 per diluted share, in 2013. The Trunk Club acquisition reduced earnings before interest and taxes in the fourth quarter by $11.\n\n## Net Sales\n\nTotal net sales increased in the fourth quarter by 9.0%, driven by a comparable sales increase of 4.7% and 35 new stores in 2014.\n\nNordstrom net sales, which consist of the full-line stores in the U.S. and Nordstrom.com businesses, increased $141, or 5.0%, compared with the same period in 2013, while comparable sales increased 4.5%. Both the number of items sold and the average selling price of our merchandise increased on a comparable basis. Category highlights for the quarter were Cosmetics, Accessories and Men's Apparel.\n\nU.S. full-line net sales for the quarter increased $26, or 1.2%, compared with the same period in 2013, with an increase in comparable sales of 0.5%. The Southwest and Southeast were the top-performing geographic regions.\n\nNordstrom.com net sales increased $115, or 19%, on top of last year's 30% increase for the same period. Nordstromrack.com and HauteLook net sales increased $24, or 28%, compared with the same period in 2013. Both were primarily driven by expanded merchandise selection and ongoing technology investments to enhance the customer experience.\n\n24", + "recall": 0.9887640449438202, + "true_md": "24\n\nThe following table illustrates the components of our effective tax rate:\n\nIncome Tax Expense (2013 vs. 2012) The increase in the effective tax rate for 2013 compared with 2012 was primarily due to changes in our estimated state tax reserves.\n\nFourth Quarter Results The following are our results for the fourth quarters of 2014 and 2013:\n\nIncome Tax Expense Income tax expense is summarized in the following table:\n\n1 Gross profit is calculated as net sales less cost of sales and related buying and occupancy costs (for all segments).\n\nOur fourth quarter sales trends were consistent with trends the company experienced throughout 2014. We continued to make progress executing our customer strategy through investments to drive growth across channels. Net earnings for the fourth quarter of 2014 were $255, or $1.32 per diluted share, compared with $268, or $1.37 per diluted share, in 2013. The Trunk Club acquisition reduced earnings before interest and taxes in the fourth quarter by $11.\n\nNordstrom net sales, which consist of the full-line stores in the U.S. and Nordstrom.com businesses, increased $141, or 5.0%, compared with the same period in 2013, while comparable sales increased 4.5%. Both the number of items sold and the average selling price of our merchandise increased on a comparable basis. Category highlights for the quarter were Cosmetics, Accessories and Men’s Apparel. \n\nU.S. full-line net sales for the quarter increased $26, or 1.2%, compared with the same period in 2013, with an increase in comparable sales of 0.5%. The Southwest and Southeast were the top-performing geographic regions. \n\nNordstrom.com net sales increased $115, or 19%, on top of last year’s 30% increase for the same period. Nordstromrack.com and HauteLook net sales increased $24, or 28%, compared with the same period in 2013. Both were primarily driven by expanded merchandise selection and ongoing technology investments to enhance the customer experience.\n\n## Income Tax Expense Income tax expense is summarized in the following table:\n\n## Fourth Quarter Results The following are our results for the fourth quarters of 2014 and 2013:\n\nNet Sales Total net sales increased in the fourth quarter by 9.0%, driven by a comparable sales increase of 4.7% and 35 new stores in 2014.\n\nNet Sales Total net sales increased in the fourth quarter by 9.0%, driven by a comparable sales increase of 4.7% and 35 new stores in 2014.\n\nIncome Tax Expense (2014 vs. 2013) The increase in the effective tax rate for 2014 compared with 2013 was primarily due to tax adjustments associated with a reassessment of our deferred tax assets related to acquisitions.\n\nIncome Tax Expense (2014 vs. 2013) The increase in the effective tax rate for 2014 compared with 2013 was primarily due to tax adjustments associated with a reassessment of" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7848271479874923, + "doc_id": "502f5fe9b023af507bbd6a7f884d4e3db71db7a41f7df00f2116423069a80f47", + "edit_distance": 0.30666666666666664, + "f1_score": 0.9369369369369368, + "meteor": 0.92491542071374, + "precision": 0.9629629629629629, + "pred_md": "85\n\nNotes to the Financial Statements\n\n## Prepayments\n\nNon-current prepayments include prepaid royalties in respect of the Nueva Esperanza Silver / Gold Project in Chile and electricity and fuel supplies for Chatree Mine in Thailand.\n\n## Other deposits\n\nOther deposits - non-current includes $1,838,000 restricted cash deposits against bank guarantees supporting the rehabilitation bond requirements against the Group's mining operations.\n\ncontinued\n\nNotes to the Financial Statements\n\nu", + "recall": 0.9122807017543859, + "true_md": "Notes to the Financial Statements 85\n\nNotes t o the Financial Statements\n\n## Prepayments\n\n## Other deposits\n\nNon-current prepayments include prepaid royalties in respect of the Nueva Esperanza Silver / Gold Project in Chile and electricity and fuel supplies for Chatree Mine in Thailand.\n\nOther deposits – non-current includes $1,838,000 restricted cash deposits against bank guarantees supporting the rehabilitation bond requirements against the Group’s mining operations.\n\ncontinued u" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9489624137304702, + "doc_id": "1015b5e9d01fae4ebdfd61b77eba8185ae995606f1c19b56d3fed71a06f6f2eb", + "edit_distance": 0.9102384291725105, + "f1_score": 0.9932432432432432, + "meteor": 0.7486755402666062, + "precision": 0.9932432432432432, + "pred_md": "NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 7: BUSINESS COMBINATIONS\n\nWe made several acquisitions in 2013, which we describe below. We accounted for these using the acquisition method of accounting in accordance with IFRS 3, Business Combinations, and included the results of operations of the acquired entities from the dates of acquisition in our consolidated statements of income. Goodwill recognized on these acquisitions is not tax deductible. It represents the expected operational synergies with the business acquired and/or intangible assets that do not qualify to be recognized separately.\n\n## Transactions with S haw Communications Inc. ( S haw)\n\nIn January 2013, we entered into an agreement with Shaw to secure an option to purchase Shaw's Advanced Wireless Services (AWS) spectrum holdings in 2014, and to acquire Mountain Cable, Shaw's cable system in Hamilton, Ontario. As part of the agreement, Shaw acquired our one-third equity interest in TVtropolis.\n\n## Spectrum Licence Option Deposit\n\nIn 2013, we paid total deposits of $250 million for the option to purchase Shaw's AWS spectrum holdings pending regulatory approval, and included the deposits in other long-term assets in the consolidated statements of financial position. Under the agreement, $200 million of this balance is refundable if the transaction does not close. We do not expect to exercise the spectrum licence option until late 2014, and it is subject to approval by Industry Canada.\n\n## Acquisition of Mountain Cable\n\nOn May 1, 2013, we closed the agreement with Shaw to purchase 100% of the common shares of Mountain Cable for cash consideration of $398 million. Mountain Cable delivers a full bundle of advanced cable television, Internet and telephony services over its recently upgraded hybrid fibre and coaxial cable network. The acquisition expands our cable business in the Southern Ontario area and will allow us to drive synergies through a larger service area and cost efficiencies.\n\n## Sale of TVtropolis\n\nIn 2013, we closed the transaction to sell our one-third interest in TVtropolis after obtaining regulatory approval from the CRTC. We received proceeds of $59 million and recorded a gain of $47 million in other income.\n\n104\n\nROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n## Blackiron Data (Blackiron)\n\nOn April 17, 2013, we closed an agreement to acquire 100% of the common shares of Blackiron for cash consideration of $198 million. Blackiron provides Business Solutions the ability to enhance its suite of enterprise-level data centre and cloud computing services along with fibre-based network connectivity services.\n\n## S core Media Inc. (the S core)\n\nOn April 30, 2013, we received final regulatory approval to acquire theScore. We had already paid $167 million on October 19, 2012 to obtain 100% of the common shares of theScore. These shares were held in trust until we received regulatory approval and obtained control of the business. The acquisition builds on our sports broadcasting capabilities and reinforces our delivery of premium sports content to its audiences on their platform of choice.\n\n## Pivot Data Centres (Pivot)\n\nOn October 1, 2013, we purchased 100% of the common shares of Pivot for cash consideration of $158 million. Pivot further positions Business Solutions as a leader in Canadian data centre and hosting services and will enhance Business Solutions' ability to serve key markets with enhanced managed and cloud service offering.\n\n## Other\n\nIn 2013, we completed other individually immaterial acquisitions for total cash consideration of $40 million.\n\nWe also paid deposits totalling $45 million in late 2013 related to the acquisition of certain dealer stores, which closed on January 2, 2014. This deposit is included in other long-term assets (note 15). The fair values of the assets acquired and liabilities assumed in this acquisition is under review and expected to be finalized in the first quarter of 2014.", + "recall": 0.9932432432432432, + "true_md": "NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## Blackiron Data (Blackiron)\n\n## S core Media Inc. (the S core)\n\n## NOTE 7: BUSINESS COMBINATIONS\n\n## Transactions with S haw Communications Inc. ( S haw)\n\n## Pivot Data Centres (Pivot)\n\n## Other\n\n## Spectrum Licence Option Deposit\n\n## Acquisition of Mountain Cable\n\n## Sale of TVtropolis\n\nOn April 17, 2013, we closed an agreement to acquire 100% of the common shares of Blackiron for cash consideration of $198 million. Blackiron provides Business Solutions the ability to enhance its suite of enterprise-level data centre and cloud computing services along with fibre-based network connectivity services.\n\nWe made several acquisitions in 2013, which we describe below. We accounted for these using the acquisition method of accounting in accordance with IFRS 3, Business Combinations, and included the results of operations of the acquired entities from the dates of acquisition in our consolidated statements of income. Goodwill recognized on these acquisitions is not tax deductible. It represents the expected operational synergies with the business acquired and/or intangible assets that do not qualify to be recognized separately.\n\nOn April 30, 2013, we received final regulatory approval to acquire theScore. We had already paid $167 million on October 19, 2012 to obtain 100% of the common shares of theScore. These shares were held in trust until we received regulatory approval and obtained control of the business. The acquisition builds on our sports broadcasting capabilities and reinforces our delivery of premium sports content to its audiences on their platform of choice.\n\nIn January 2013, we entered into an agreement with Shaw to secure an option to purchase Shaw’s Advanced Wireless Services (AWS) spectrum holdings in 2014, and to acquire Mountain Cable, Shaw’s cable system in Hamilton, Ontario. As part of the agreement, Shaw acquired our one-third equity interest in TVtropolis.\n\nOn October 1, 2013, we purchased 100% of the common shares of Pivot for cash consideration of $158 million. Pivot further positions Business Solutions as a leader in Canadian data centre and hosting services and will enhance Business Solutions’ ability to serve key markets with enhanced managed and cloud service offering.\n\nIn 2013, we completed other individually immaterial acquisitions for total cash consideration of $40 million.\n\nWe also paid deposits totalling $45 million in late 2013 related to the acquisition of certain dealer stores, which closed on January 2, 2014. This deposit is included in other long-term assets (note 15). The fair values of the assets acquired and liabilities assumed in this acquisition is under review and expected to be finalized in the first quarter of 2014.\n\nOn May 1, 2013, we closed the agreement with Shaw to purchase 100% of the common shares of Mountain Cable for cash consideration of $398 million. Mountain Cable delivers a full bundle of advanced cable television, Internet and telephony services over its recently upgraded hybrid fibre and coaxial cable network. The acquisition expands our cable business in the Southern Ontario area and will allow us to drive synergies through a larger service area and cost efficiencies.\n\nIn 2013, we paid total deposits of $250 million for the option to purchase Shaw’s AWS spectrum holdings pending regulatory approval, and included the deposits in other long-term assets in the consolidated statements of financial position. Under the agreement, $200 million of this balance is refundable if the transaction does not close. We do not expect to exercise the spectrum licence option until late 2014, and it is subject to approval by Industry Canada.\n\nIn 2013, we closed the transaction to sell our one-third interest in TVtropolis after obtaining regulatory approval from the CRTC. We received proceeds of $59 million and recorded a gain of $47 million in other income.\n\n104 ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.023151528592525363, + "doc_id": "2f1bacde1d647286e55feece6f77e40112f1cf23e316bd8c26cc1e4e275cc084", + "edit_distance": 0.971677559912854, + "f1_score": 0.20833333333333334, + "meteor": 0.21873782790563773, + "precision": 0.1171875, + "pred_md": "TABLE OF CONTENTS\n\nTABLE OF CONTENTS\n\n| | | Page |\n|----------------------------------------------------------|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|--------|\n| PART I | | |\n| Item 1. | Business. | 4 |\n| Item 1A. | Risk Factors. | 6 |\n| Item 1B. | Unresolved Staff Comments. | 10 |\n| Item 2. | Properties. | 10 |\n| Item 3. | Legal Proceedings. | 12 |\n| Item 4. | Mine Safety Disclosures. | 12 |\n| PART II | | |\n| Item 5. | Market for Registrant's Common Equity, Related Shareholder Matters and Issuer Purchases of Equity Securities. | 13 |\n| Item 6. | Selected Financial Data. | 15 |\n| Item 7. | Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations. | 16 |\n| Item 7A. | Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures About Market Risk. | 35 |\n| Item 8. | Financial Statements and Supplementary Data. | 36 |\n| Item 9. | Changes in and Disagreements With Accountants on Accounting and Financial Disclosure. | 66 |\n| Item 9A. | Controls and Procedures. | 66 |\n| Item 9B. | Other Information. | 68 |\n| PART III | | |\n| Item 10. | Directors, Executive Officers and Corporate Governance. | 68 |\n| Item 11. | Executive Compensation. | 68 |\n| Item 12. | Security Ownership of Certain Beneficial Owners and Management and Related Shareholder Matters. | 68 |\n| Item 13. | Certain Relationships and Related Transactions, and Director Independence. | 68 |\n| Item 14. | Principal Accounting Fees and Services. | 68 |\n| PART IV | | |\n| Item 15. | Exhibits and Financial Statement Schedules. | 69 |\n| Signatures | Signatures | 70 |\n| Consent of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm | Consent of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm | 71 |\n| Exhibit Index | Exhibit Index | 72 |\n\nNordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 3", + "recall": 0.9375, + "true_md": "## Page\n\n## TABLE OF CONTENTS\n\n## PART I\n\n## PART II\n\n## PART IV\n\n## PART III\n\nNordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 3" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7364638981194999, + "doc_id": "258f82075b003a5e1643603f5376f54525f0f0238a4668752e1ecea3a3d025e9", + "edit_distance": 0.25757575757575757, + "f1_score": 0.9918699186991868, + "meteor": 0.7856693482409003, + "precision": 0.991869918699187, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 1 - STATEMENT OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES continued\n\n## j) Cash and Cash Equivalents\n\nCash and cash equivalents include cash on hand, deposits held at call with banks, other short-term highly liquid investments with original maturities of three months or less, unrestricted escrow accounts that management expects to be used to settle current liabilities, capital or operating expenditures, or complete acquisitions and bank overdrafts.\n\n## k) Revenue\n\nRevenue from the sale of goods is recognised upon the delivery of goods to the customer. Revenue from the rendering of a service is recognised upon the delivery of the service to the customers. All revenue is stated net of the amount of goods and services tax ('GST').\n\n## l) Borrowing Costs\n\nBorrowing costs, including interest, directly attributable to the acquisition, construction or production of assets that necessarily take a substantial period of time to prepare for their intended use or sale are added to the cost of those assets until such time as the assets are substantially ready for their intended use or sale. Borrowings are recognised initially at fair value, net of transaction costs incurred. Subsequent to initial recognition, borrowings are stated as amortised cost with any difference between cost and redemption being recognised in the consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income over the period of the borrowings on an effective interest basis. The Company capitalised eligible borrowing costs at 100 percent equal to $3.4 million and $1.3 million for the years ended 31 December 2014 and 2013, respectively. All other borrowing costs are recognised in income in the period in which they are incurred.\n\n## m) Goods and Services Tax\n\nRevenues, expenses and assets are recognised net of the amount of GST, except where the amount of GST incurred is not recoverable from the Australian Tax Office. In these circumstances the GST is recognised as part of the cost of acquisition of the asset or as part of an item of the expense. Receivables and payables in the statement of financial position are shown inclusive of GST.\n\nCash flows are presented in the consolidated statement of cash flows on a gross basis except for the GST component of investing and financing activities, which are disclosed as operating cash flows.\n\n## n) Business Combinations\n\nA business combination is a transaction in which an acquirer obtains control of one or more businesses. The acquisition method of accounting is used to account for all business combinations regardless of whether equity instruments or other assets are acquired. The acquisition method is only applied to a business combination when control over the business is obtained. Subsequent changes in interests in a business where control already exists are accounted for as transactions between owners. The cost of the business combination is measured at fair value of the assets given, shares issued and liabilities incurred or assumed at the date of acquisition. Costs directly attributable to the business combination are expensed as incurred, except those directly and incrementally attributable to equity issuance.\n\n- 67 -", + "recall": 0.991869918699187, + "true_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 1 - STATEMENT OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES continued\n\n## j) Cash and Cash Equivalents Cash and cash equivalents include cash on hand, deposits held at call with banks, other short-term highly liquid\n\n## k) Revenue Revenue from the sale of goods is recognised upon the delivery of goods to the customer. Revenue from the\n\n## l) Borrowing Costs Borrowing costs, including interest, directly attributable to the acquisition, construction or production of assets that\n\n## m) Goods and Services Tax Revenues, expenses and assets are recognised net of the amount of GST, except where the amount of GST incurred\n\n## n) Business Combinations A business combination is a transaction in which an acquirer obtains control of one or more businesses. The\n\n- 67 - \n\nj) Cash and Cash Equivalents Cash and cash equivalents include cash on hand, deposits held at call with banks, other short-term highly liquid investments with original maturities of three months or less, unrestricted escrow accounts that management expects to be used to settle current liabilities, capital or operating expenditures, or complete acquisitions and bank overdrafts.\n\nk) Revenue Revenue from the sale of goods is recognised upon the delivery of goods to the customer. Revenue from the rendering of a service is recognised upon the delivery of the service to the customers. All revenue is stated net of the amount of goods and services tax (“GST”).\n\nl) Borrowing Costs Borrowing costs, including interest, directly attributable to the acquisition, construction or production of assets that necessarily take a substantial period of time to prepare for their intended use or sale are added to the cost of those assets until such time as the assets are substantially ready for their intended use or sale. Borrowings are recognised initially at fair value, net of transaction costs incurred. Subsequent to initial recognition, borrowings are stated as amortised cost with any difference between cost and redemption being recognised in the consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income over the period of the borrowings on an effective interest basis. The Company capitalised eligible borrowing costs at 100 percent equal to $3.4 million and $1.3 million for the years \n\nof profit or loss and other comprehensive income over the period of the borrowings on an effective interest basis. The Company capitalised eligible borrowing costs at 100 percent equal to $3.4 million and $1.3 million for the years ended 31 December 2014 and 2013, respectively. All other borrowing costs are recognised in income in the period in which they are incurred. \n\nm) Goods and Services Tax Revenues, expenses and assets are recognised net of the amount of GST, except where the amount of GST incurred is not recoverable from the Australian Tax Office. In these circumstances the GST is recognised as part of the cost of acquisition of the asset or as part of an item of the expense. Receivables and payables in the statement of financial position are shown inclusive of GST. \n\nCash flows are presented in the consolidated statement of cash flows on a gross basis except for the GST component of investing and financing activities, which are disclosed as operating cash flows. \n\nn) Business Combinations A business combination is a transaction in which an acquirer obtains control of one or more businesses. The acquisition method of accounting is used to account for all business combinations regardless of whether equity instruments or other assets are acquired. The acquisition method is only applied to a business combination when control over the business is obtained. Subsequent changes in interests in a business where control already exists are accounted for as transactions between owners. The cost of the business combination is measured at fair value of the assets given, shares issued and liabilities incurred or assumed at the date of acquisition. Costs directly attributable to the business combination are expensed as incurred, except those directly and incrementally attributable to equity issuance." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8007374029168082, + "doc_id": "e030673103c8ec2a6913a39caf27b8c4082fd8591c9b2abdd29cbf953d4dd4da", + "edit_distance": 0.2, + "f1_score": 0.9411764705882353, + "meteor": 0.8155293367346939, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Nordstrom, Inc. and Subsidiaries Exhibit Index\n\n76", + "recall": 0.8888888888888888, + "true_md": "## Nordstrom, Inc. and Subsidiaries Exhibit Index\n\n76" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7470837523466214, + "doc_id": "ea53d29e42224a846338c95a5ce363f502c0c73e8c4ad7ce07163fd92f8b8115", + "edit_distance": 0.7719298245614035, + "f1_score": 0.9783132530120482, + "meteor": 0.6021318708550341, + "precision": 0.9806763285024155, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 1 - STATEMENT OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES continued\n\n## u) Adoption of New and Revised Accounting Standards\n\nDuring the current reporting period the Group adopted all of the new and revised Australian Accounting Standards and Interpretations applicable to its operations which became mandatory. The nature and effect of selected new standards and amendments on the Group's consolidated financial report are described below. Adoption of the other new mandatorily applicable standards did not have a material impact on the financial statement, financial position or performance of the Group.\n\n## AASB 2011-4 Amendments to Australian Accounting Standards to Remove Individual Key Management Personnel\n\n## Disclosure\n\nThis standard removes the requirements to include individual key management personnel disclosures in the notes to and forming part of the Financial Report. This standard also removes the individual KMP disclosure requirements for all disclosing entities in relation to equity holdings, loans and other related party transactions.\n\n## Amendments to IAS 32 Offsetting Financial Assets and Financial Liabilities\n\nThe amendments to IAS 32 clarify the requirements relating to the offset of financial assets and financial liabilities. Specifically, the amendments clarify the meaning of 'currently has a legally enforceable right of set-off' and 'simultaneous realization and settlement'. As the Group does not have any financial assets and financial liabilities that qualify for offset, the application of the amendments has had no impact on the disclosure or the Group's consolidated financial statements.\n\n## Recently issued accounting standards to be applied in future reporting periods:\n\nThe following Standards and Interpretations have been issued but are not yet effective. These are the standards that the Group reasonably expects will have an impact on its disclosures, financial position or performance with applied at a future date. The Group's assessment of the impact of these new standards, amendments to standards, and interpretations is set out below.\n\n## AASB 9/IFRS 9 Financial Instruments\n\nAASB 9/IFRS 9 introduces new requirements for the classification, measurement, and derecognition of financial assets and financial liabilities. The final version of IFRS 9 supersedes all previous versions of the standard. However, for annual periods beginning before 1 January 2018, an entity may elect to apply those earlier versions of IFRS 9 if the entity's relevant date of initial application is before 1 February 2015. The effective date of this standard is for fiscal years beginning on or after 1 January 2018. Management is currently assessing the impact of the new standard but it is not expected to have a material impact on the Group's consolidated financial statements.\n\n- 71 -", + "recall": 0.9759615384615384, + "true_md": "NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS \n\n## NOTE 1 - STATEMENT OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES continued\n\n## u) Adoption of New and Revised Accounting Standards\n\n## AASB 2011-4 - Amendments to Australian Accounting Standards to Remove Individual Key Management Personnel Disclosure\n\n## Amendments to IAS 32 - Offsetting Financial Assets and Financial Liabilities\n\n## Recently issued accounting standards to be applied in future reporting periods: The following Standards and Interpretations have been issued but are not yet effective. These are the standards that\n\n## AASB 9/IFRS 9 – Financial Instruments AASB 9/IFRS 9 introduces new requirements for the classification, measurement, and derecognition of financial\n\n- 71 - \n\nAASB 9/IFRS 9 – Financial Instruments AASB 9/IFRS 9 introduces new requirements for the classification, measurement, and derecognition of financial assets and financial liabilities. The final version of IFRS 9 supersedes all previous versions of the standard. However, for annual periods beginning before 1 January 2018, an entity may elect to apply those earlier versions of IFRS 9 if the entity’s relevant date of initial application is before 1 February 2015. The effective date of this standard is for fiscal years beginning on or after 1 January 2018. Management is currently assessing the impact of the new standard but it is not expected to have a material impact on the Group’s consolidated financial statements. \n\nRecently issued accounting standards to be applied in future reporting periods: The following Standards and Interpretations have been issued but are not yet effective. These are the standards that the Group reasonably expects will have an impact on its disclosures, financial position or performance with applied at a future date. The Group’s assessment of the impact of these new standards, amendments to standards, and interpretations is set out below. \n\nThe amendments to IAS 32 clarify the requirements relating to the offset of financial assets and financial liabilities. Specifically, the amendments clarify the meaning of ‘currently has a legally enforceable right of set-off’ and \n\nThe amendments to IAS 32 clarify the requirements relating to the offset of financial assets and financial liabilities. Specifically, the amendments clarify the meaning of ‘currently has a legally enforceable right of set-off’ and ‘simultaneous realization and settlement’. As the Group does not have any financial assets and financial liabilities that qualify for offset, the application of the amendments has had no impact on the disclosure or the Group’s consolidated financial statements.\n\nThis standard removes the requirements to include individual key management personnel disclosures in the notes to and forming part of the Financial Report. This standard also removes the individual KMP disclosure requirements for all disclosing entities in relation to equity holdings, loans and other related party transactions.\n\nDuring the current reporting period the Group adopted all of the new and revised Australian Accounting Standards and Interpretations applicable to its operations which became mandatory. The nature and effect of selected new standards and amendments on the Group’s consolidated financial report are described below. Adoption of the other new mandatorily applicable standards did not have a material impact on the financial statement, financial position or performance of the Group." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9078204641441486, + "doc_id": "434bead65419a0b2b0f4accacc2a3e1aee25a76ca82d5998d07bfeff4d7d9b44", + "edit_distance": 0.7617021276595745, + "f1_score": 0.9391575663026521, + "meteor": 0.6569875257196854, + "precision": 0.9678456591639871, + "pred_md": "17\n\n| OPERATING AREAS\n\n## NATURAL GAS SHALE AREAS\n\n1 Barnett Shale Chesapeake is the second-largest producer of natural gas, the most active driller and the largest leasehold owner in the Core and Tier 1 sweet spots of Tarrant and Johnson counties. In January 2010, Chesapeake completed a joint venture and sold 25% of its assets in the Barnett to Total E&P USA, Inc., a wholly owned subsidiary of Paris-based Total S.A. (NYSE:TOT, FP:FP) (Total) for $2.25 billion in cash and drilling carries. During 2010 approx imately $480 million of Chesapeake's drilling and completion costs in the Barnett were paid by Total. Total will fund 60% of our share of future drilling and completion costs until an additional $970 million of our costs have been funded, which we expect to occur by year-end 2013. We anticipate using an average of approximately 18 operated rigs in 2011 to further develop our 220,000 net acres of Barnett Shale leasehold, of which 205,000 net leasehold acres are located in the prime Core and Tier 1 areas. On this acreage, we estimate we could drill up to 2,300 net wells in the years to come.\n\n2 Bossier Shale The Bossier Shale overlies about one-third of our Haynesville Shale acreage. We estimate we could drill up to 2,600 net wells on our Bossier Shale acreage in the future to develop our 205,000 net acres of Bossier Shale leasehold. Because the Bossier lies above the Haynesville, horizontal wells drilled just to the Bossier may not always hold Haynesville rights. As a result, Chesapeake and other producers are drilling aggressively to hold all rights through the Haynesville before the initial three-year term of a typical lease expires, therefore not much Bossier drilling is yet underway. However, once our leases are HBP (held by production) by Haynesville drilling, we plan to focus on developing the Bossier Shale more aggressively beginning most likely in 2013.\n\n3 Haynesville Shale In early 2008, Chesapeake announced its discovery of the Haynesville Shale, which is located in northwestern Louisiana and East Texas, a reservoir that likely will become one of the two largest natural gas fields in the U.S. (along with the Marcellus) and one of the five largest in the world. The Haynesville Shale is now the nation's largest producing shale play. We are the largest leasehold owner, largest producer and most active driller of new wells in the Haynesville Shale play. We estimate that we could drill up to 6,300 net wells on our Haynesville Shale acreage in the future and plan to utilize an average of approximately 29 operated rigs in 2011 to further develop our 530,000 net acres of Haynesville Shale leasehold. During 2011 we anticipate spending approximately $1.65 billion, or 32% of our total budget, for exploration and development activities in the Haynesville Shale. In 2011 we anticipate reducing our rig count beginning mid year as we complete drilling objectives to hold our leasehold through establishing initial production.\n\n## Marcellus Shale\n\nChesapeake is the industry's leading leasehold owner, largest producer and\n\nmost active developer in the Marcellus Shale play that spans from northern West Virginia across\n\nmuch of Pennsylvania into southern New York. The Marcellus is located in the highest gasconsuming region of the U.S. and therefore receives the best natural gas prices in the nation. We estimate we could drill up to 21,000 net wells on our Marcellus acreage in the future and plan to utilize an average of approximately 32 operated rigs in 2011 to further develop our 1.7 million net acres of Marcellus Shale leasehold. During 2010 approximately $600 million of Chesapeake's drilling costs in the Marcellus were paid by its joint ven ture partner, Oslo-based Statoil (NYSE:STO, OSE:STL). During 2011 and 2012, 75% of Chesapeake's drilling and completion costs in the Marcellus, up to $1.4 billion, will be paid by STO. We expect that over time, the Marcellus Shale will become the largest natural gas field in the U.S. and the second-largest in the world.\n\n## 2010 Total Production:\n\n175 bcfe, -27%*, 17%**\n\n## 12/31/10 Proved Reserves:\n\n3,060 bcfe, -11%*, 18%**\n\n## 12/31/10 Net Leasehold Acres:\n\n220,000, -24%*, 2%**\n\nReduction in production and proved reserves were caused by our joint venture sale to Total.\n\n2010 Total Production: 0 bcfe, NM, NM 12/31/10 Proved Reserves: 10 bcfe, NM, NM ***\n\n12/31/10 Net Leasehold Acres: 205,000, +14%, 2%\n\n## 2010 Total Production:\n\n240 bcfe, +182%, 23%\n\n## 12/31/10 Proved Reserves:\n\n3,570 bcfe, +95%, 21%\n\n12/31/10 Net Leasehold Acres: 530,000, +2%, 4%\n\n***\n\n## 2010 Total Production:\n\n55 bcfe, +175%, 5%\n\n12/31/10 Proved Reserves:\n\n860 bcfe, +231%, 5%\n\n12/31/10 Net Leasehold Acres: 1,670,000, +3%, 13%", + "recall": 0.9121212121212121, + "true_md": "## NATURAL GAS SHALE AREAS\n\n17 | OPERATING AREAS\n\n2010 Total Production: 0 bcfe, NM, NM\n\n12/31/10 Proved Reserves: 10 bcfe, NM, NM\n\n12/31/10 Net Leasehold Acres: *** 205,000, +14%, 2%\n\n2010 Total Production: 240 bcfe, +182%, 23%\n\n12/31/10 Proved Reserves: 3,570 bcfe, +95%, 21%\n\n12/31/10 Net Leasehold Acres: *** 530,000, +2%, 4%\n\n2010 Total Production: 55 bcfe, +175%, 5%\n\n12/31/10 Proved Reserves: 860 bcfe, +231%, 5%\n\n12/31/10 Net Leasehold Acres: 1,670,000, +3%, 13%\n\n4 Marcellus Shale Chesapeake is the industry’s leading leasehold o wner, largest producer and most active developer in the Marcellus Shale play that spans from northern West Virginia across much of Pennsylvania into southern New York. The Marcellus is located in the highes t gas- consuming region of the U.S. and therefore receives the best natural gas prices in the nation. We estimate we could drill up to 21,000 net wells on our Marcellus acreage in the futu re and plan to utilize an average of approximately 32 operated rigs in 2011 to further develop our 1.7 million net acres of Marcellus Shale leasehold. During 2010 approximately $600 million of Chesapeake’s drilling costs in the Marcellus were paid by its joint ven - ture partner, Oslo-based Statoil (NYSE:STO, OSE:STL). During 2011 and 2012, 75% of Chesapeake’s drilling and completion costs in the Marcellus, up to $1.4 billion, will be paid by STO. We expect that over time, the Marcellus Shale will become the largest natural gas field in the U.S. and the second-largest in the world.\n\n3 Haynesville Shale In early 2008, Chesapeake announced its disco very of the Haynesville Shale, which is located in northwestern Louisiana and East T exas, a reservoir that likely will become one of the two largest natural gas fields in the U.S. ( along with the Marcellus) and one of the five largest in the world. The Haynesville Shale is no w the nation’s largest producing shale play. We are the largest leasehold owner, largest producer and most active driller of new wells in the Haynesville Shale play. We estimate that we could drill up to 6,300 net wells on our Haynesville Shale acreage in the future and plan to utilize an average of approximately 29 operated rigs in 2011 to further develop our 530,000 net acres of Haynesville Shale leasehold. During 2011 we anticipate spending approximately $1.65 billion, or 32% of our total budget, for explor ation and development activities in the Haynesville Shale. In 2011 we anticipate reducing our ri g count beginning mid year as we complete drilling objectives to hold our leasehold through establishing initial production.\n\n2 Bossier Shale The Bossier Shale overlies about one-third of our Haynesville Shale acreage. We estimate we could drill up to 2,600 net wel ls on our Bossier Shale acreage in the future to develop our 205,000 net acres of Boss ier Shale leasehold. Because the Bossier lies above the Haynesville, horizontal wells drilled just to the Bossier may not always hold Haynesville rights. As a result, Chesapeake and other producers are drilling aggressively to hold all rights through the Haynesville before the initial three-year term of a typical lease expires, therefore not much Bossier drilling is yet underway. However, once our leases are HBP (held by production) by Haynesville drilling, we plan to focus on developing the Bossier Shale more aggressively beginning most likely in 2013.\n\n1 Barnett Shale Chesapeake is the second-largest producer of natural gas, the m ost active driller and the largest leasehold owner in the Core and Tier 1 sweet spots of Tarr ant and Johnson counties. In January 2010, Chesapeake completed a joint venture and sold 25% of its assets in the Barnett to Total E&P USA, Inc., a wholly owned subsidiary of Paris-based Total S.A. (NYSE:TOT, FP:FP) (Total) for $2.25 billion in cash and drilling carries. During 2010 approx - imately $480 million of Chesapeake’s drilling and completion costs in the Barnett were paid by Total. Total will fund 60% of our share of future drilling and completion costs until an additional $970 million of our costs have been funded, which we expect to occur by year-end 2013. We anticipate using an average of approximately 18 operated rigs in 2011 to further develop our 220,000 net acres of Barnett Shale leasehold, of which 205,000 net leasehold acres are located in the prime Core and Tier 1 areas. On this acreage, we estimate we could drill up to 2,300 net wells in the year s to come.\n\nReduction in production and proved reserves were caused by our joint venture sale to Total.\n\n12/31/10 Net Leasehold Acres: 220,000, -24%*, 2%**\n\n12/31/10 Proved Reserves: 3,060 bcfe, -11%*, 18%**\n\n2010 Total Production: 175 bcfe, -27%*, 17%**" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9145441624029611, + "doc_id": "9ffda62edbf7c20440eeaf582fca9bbf7167112161faf4dc3a7bb0dd8e91de88", + "edit_distance": 0.7553324968632371, + "f1_score": 0.9542097488921713, + "meteor": 0.7559948946748584, + "precision": 0.96996996996997, + "pred_md": "SMFG and its Group companies strive to create the kind of work environment which every employee feels proud of and is able to develop his or her full potential and capabilities in. In the following pages, we introduce some of the activities initiated by the human resources department of SMBC and other Group companies, including Sumitomo Mitsui Card, Cedyna, Sumitomo Mitsui Finance and Leasing (SMFL), the Japan Research Institute (JRI), SMBC Friend Securities, SMBC Nikko Securities, The Minato Bank and Kansai Urban Banking.\n\n## Five Goals of SMBC's Human Resources Development\n\n- 1. To develop professional and specialized employees who can provide our clients with highly valued products and services.\n- 2. To maintain and strengthen our sound business management enabling SMBC to globally compete in the market.\n- 3. To cultivate the kind of corporate culture which encourages values of forward-looking, creative attitude and mutual cooperation.\n- 4. To be conscious of the social responsibilities of the Group, and cultivate the kind of corporate culture that contributes to the sound development of society.\n- 5. To encourage employees to respect their individuality based on an understanding of diversity and personal fulfillment.\n\n## Training Employees with Specialized Professional Skills\n\nIn order to motivate and encourage younger employees and to promote their personal development, the bank provides basic practical training programs in three areas: the Retail Banking College; the Corporate Banking College and the Banking Operations College. Our employees are able to acquire the required business knowledge and skills through on-the-job training and seminars. The bank enhances its training programs by assigning mentors to newly hired employees and the Training Institute's instructors to regional head office departments.\n\nFollowing the amendments to the Money Lending Business Law, Sumitomo Mitsui Card has increased its efforts toward the development of professional expert employees in the credit business. We have taken measures to proactively support our employees to become licensed money lending officers by regularly holding in-house seminars, educating them with knowledge on products and other related subjects. Cedyna strives to promote high professional standards and encourage the setting of challenging goals. Younger employees are encouraged to work in various departments to learn and gain business skills and diverse work experience. They strengthen their professional skills by taking programs at different levels for each type of business and with specific objectives. SMFL has established 'SMFL Standards,' which annually sets forth the human resources development plan for sogoshoku (management-track) employees of not more than five years with the company. SMFL has\n\n62\n\nSMFG 2011\n\ncreated the 'Young Employees' Growth Plan & Guide,' based on the SMFL Standards, and it has also established an in-house business school which supplements on-the-job training. JRI believes that its human resources provide added value, which is translated into its solutions and proposals. With that in mind, JRI has established the Staff Development Department in the Computer System Division, and the Human Resources Incubation Center in the Comprehensive Research Division for the well-planned development of human resources. SMBC Friend Securities has started to offer its accredited in-house classes for our young employees to acquire business skills to enhance their knowledge and improve their skills, in order for the company to respond appropriately to the continuously advancing sophistication and diversification of the securities business. It has also introduced a tutoring program for effective on-the-job training of new employees. SMBC Nikko Securities, as a comprehensive securities and investment banking firm, is further strengthening its educational programs to develop employees with expert knowledge and improve their professional skills by providing its newly hired employees with OJT personally assisted by instructors, follow-up seminars and other programs such as the 'new employee instructor program.' The Minato Bank has consistently implemented the system of the Minato Retail-business College ('MRC') which improves the quality of consultation services offered to its individual clients. Kansai Urban Banking has a basic training program designed for the first five years of employment with the bank in order to develop an energetic group of employees. It has also created a system to develop potential mid-management employees and promote the careers of younger and female employees. As described above, each Group company is further strengthening its educational system.\n\nEmployees' Training Seminar at SMBC Nikko Securities\n\nEmployees' Training Seminar at SMBC Nikko Securities\n\nTraining Seminar at Kansai Urban Banking\n\nTraining Seminar at Kansai Urban Banking", + "recall": 0.938953488372093, + "true_md": "Human Resources\n\nSMFG and its Group companies strive to create the kind of work environment which every employee feels proud of and is able to develop his or her full potential and capabilities in. In the following pages, we introduce some of the activities initi- ated by the human resources department of SMBC and other Group companies, including Sumitomo Mitsui Card, Cedyna, Sumitomo Mitsui Finance and Leasing (SMFL), the Japan Research Institute (JRI), SMBC Friend Securities, SMBC Nikko Securities, The Minato Bank and Kansai Urban Banking.\n\ncreated the “Young Employees’ Growth Plan & Guide,” based on the SMFL Standards, and it has also established an in-house business school which supplements on-the-job training. JRI believes that its human resources provide added value, which is translated into its solutions and proposals. With that in mind, JRI has established the Staff Development Department in the Computer System Division, and the Human Resources Incubation Center in the Comprehensive Research Division for the well-planned development of human resources. SMBC Friend Securities has started to offer its accredited in-house classes for our young employees to acquire business skills to enhance their knowledge and improve their skills, in order for the company to respond appropriately to the continuously advancing sophistication and diversification of the securities business. It has also introduced a tutoring program for effective on-the-job training of new employees. SMBC Nikko Securities, as a comprehensive securities and investment banking firm, is further strengthening its educational programs to develop employees with expert knowledge and improve their profes- sional skills by providing its newly hired employees with OJT personally assisted by instructors, follow-up seminars and other programs such as the “new employee instructor program.” The Minato Bank has consistently implemented the system of the Minato Retail-business College (“MRC”) which improves the quality of consultation services offered to its individual clients. Kansai Urban Banking has a basic training program designed for the first five years of employment with the bank in order to develop an energetic group of employees. It has also created a system to develop potential mid-management employees and promote the careers of younger and female employees. As described above, each Group company is further strengthening its educational system.\n\nIn order to motivate and encourage younger employees and to promote their personal development, the bank provides basic practical training programs in three areas: the Retail Banking College; the Corporate Banking College and the Banking Operations College. Our employees are able to acquire the required business knowledge and skills through on-the-job training and seminars. The bank enhances its training programs by assigning mentors to newly hired employees and the Training Institute’s instructors to regional head office departments.\n\nFollowing the amendments to the Money Lending Business Law, Sumitomo Mitsui Card has increased its efforts toward the development of professional expert employees in the credit business. We have taken measures to proactively support our employees to become licensed money lending officers by regu- larly holding in-house seminars, educating them with knowledge on products and other related subjects. Cedyna strives to promote high professional standards and encourage the setting of challenging goals. Younger employees are encouraged to work in various departments to learn and gain business skills and diverse work experience. They strengthen their professional skills by taking programs at different levels for each type of busi- ness and with specific objectives. SMFL has established “SMFL Standards,” which annually sets forth the human resources development plan for sogoshoku (management-track) employ- ees of not more than five years with the company. SMFL has \n\nSMFG 2011 62\n\nEmployees’ Training Seminar at SMBC Nikko Securities\n\nTraining Seminar at Kansai Urban Banking\n\n## Training Employees with Specialized Professional Skills\n\n- 5. To encourage employees to respect their individuality based on an understanding of diversity and personal fulfillment.\n\n- 4. To be conscious of the social responsibilities of the Group, and cultivate the kind of corporate culture that contributes to the sound development of society.\n\n- 3. To cultivate the kind of corporate culture which encour- ages values of forward-looking, creative attitude and mutual cooperation.\n\n- 2. To maintain and strengthen our sound business manage- ment enabling SMBC to globally compete in the market.\n\n- 1. To develop professional and specialized employees who can provide our clients with highly valued products and services.\n\n## Five Goals of SMBC’s Human Resources Development" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9520324986352052, + "doc_id": "a700145c4982f1e7cf80bb473090cb205ef107a233bf160f5cd8fab3194fc2ae", + "edit_distance": 0.052364864864864864, + "f1_score": 0.9723320158102768, + "meteor": 0.9714670976532194, + "precision": 0.9761904761904762, + "pred_md": "## Management's Discussion and Analysis\n\nDollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\n## MHCs - Capital Spend\n\nA summary of the capital spend on the MHC segment is included below:\n\nFor the years ended December 31,\n\nManagement expects to spend between $300 and $400 in capital per MHC site on an annual basis. As with the apartment portfolio, a portion of the MHC capital is considered maintenance capital and a portion is value enhancing. Management estimates that $100 per unit is maintenance capital, including costs to support the existing infrastructure, and the remaining amount increases the value of the properties, with improved roadways, ability to accommodate future expansion, and community enhancements, such as the addition of playgrounds. The cost of most capital projects will be recovered through above guideline increases in the provinces with rent control, leading to increased NOI for the investment.\n\nFor the year ended December 31, 2013, Killam spent $2.2 million on water and sewer upgrades, an increase of 22.1% over 2012 due to the installation of several new water systems and upgrades to existing water and sewer infrastructure. This capital work fluctuates from year-to-year with only $1.8 million invested in 2012 but $3.1 million in 2011. the high water upgrade costs in 2013 resulted in the per unit mHc spend being above Killam's expectation of $300 - $400 per year.\n\nAs with the apartment portfolio, the timing of capital spending changes based on requirements at each community. Killam expects to invest $1 million to $2 million during 2014 on capital improvements across the MHC portfolio.\n\n## Liquidity and Capital Resources\n\nThe Company's sources of capital are cash generated from operating activities, credit facilities, mortgage financing and refinancing, and equity and debt issuances. The Company's primary use of capital includes property acquisitions and developments, major property improvements, recurring property maintenance, debt principal and interest payments, and payment of dividends. The Company anticipates meeting all current and future obligations with current cash and cash equivalents, cash flow generated from operations and conventional mortgage refinancing and that the Company will be able to obtain financing on reasonable terms.\n\nKillam's ability to grow through acquisitions and development will be dependent on the ability to access mortgage debt, construction financing and to raise equity in the capital markets. Killam had cash on hand of $27.7 million at December 31, 2013, primarily as a result of the net proceeds of $42.6 million related to the sale of the ten MHC properties in the fourth quarter of 2013. Killam utilized part of the sale proceeds to retire a $10 million vendor take-back ('VTB') loan and acquire additional properties, and expects to redeploy the remaining funds during the first quarter of 2014. Based on 60% debt on acquisitions, the Company expects to complete an additional $60 million in accretive apartment acquisitions. The Company also has $139.3 million in debt maturing during 2014 and expects to generate approximately $50 million in surplus cash to be used for its 2014 capital program and to fund additional acquisitions throughout the year.\n\n52\n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013", + "recall": 0.968503937007874, + "true_md": "Management’s Discussion and Analysis Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\n## MHCs ‑ Capital Spend\n\nA summary of the capital spend on the MHC segment is included below:\n\nFor the years ended December 31,\n\nManagement expects to spend between $300 and $400 in capital per MHC site on an annual basis. As with the apartment portfolio, a portion of the MHC capital is considered maintenance capital and a portion is value enhancing. Management estimates that $100 per unit is maintenance capital, including costs to support the existing infrastructure, and the remaining amount increases the value of the properties, with improved roadways, ability to accommodate future expansion, and community enhancements, such as the addition of playgrounds. The cost of most capital projects will be recovered through above guideline increases in the provinces with rent control, leading to increased NOI for the investment. \n\nFor the year ended December 31, 2013, Killam spent $2.2 million on water and sewer upgrades, an increase of 22.1% over 2012 due to the installation of several new water systems and upgrades to existing water and sewer infrastructure. This capital work fluctuates from year‑to‑year with only $1.8 million invested in 2012 but $3.1 million in 2011. the high water upgrade costs in 2013 resulted in the per unit mHc spend being above Killam’s expectation of $300 ‑ $400 per year.\n\nAs with the apartment portfolio, the timing of capital spending changes based on requirements at each community. Killam expects to invest $1 million to $2 million during 2014 on capital improvements across the MHC portfolio.\n\nThe Company’s sources of capital are cash generated from operating activities, credit facilities, mortgage financing and refinancing, and equity and debt issuances. The Company’s primary use of capital includes property acquisitions and developments, major property improvements, recurring property maintenance, debt principal and interest payments, and payment of dividends. The Company anticipates meeting all current and future obligations with current cash and cash equivalents, cash flow generated from operations and conventional mortgage refinancing and that the Company will be able to obtain financing on reasonable terms.\n\nKillam’s ability to grow through acquisitions and development will be dependent on the ability to access mortgage debt, construction financing and to raise equity in the capital markets. Killam had cash on hand of $27.7 million at December 31, 2013, primarily as a result of the net proceeds of $42.6 million related to the sale of the ten MHC properties in the fourth quarter of 2013. Killam utilized part of the sale proceeds to retire a $10 million vendor take‑back (“VTB”) loan and acquire additional properties, and expects to redeploy the remaining funds during the first quarter of 2014. Based on 60% debt on acquisitions, the Company expects to complete an additional $60 million in accretive apartment acquisitions. The Company also has $139.3 million in debt maturing during 2014 and expects to generate approximately $50 million in surplus cash to be used for its 2014 capital program and to fund additional acquisitions throughout the year.\n\n## Liquidity and Capital Resources\n\n52 Killam ProPerties inc | 2013" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "927f9d8648c817aee1701bcee9ea90afab3b2caa77d0b627c703959d0bfd09f2", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999715521165226, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "64\n\nFinancial Statements\n\n## Statement of Comprehensive Income\n\nThe above Statement of Comprehensive Income should be read in conjunction with the accompanying notes.\n\nwww.kingsgate.com.au", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "64 Financial Statements\n\n## Statement of Comprehensive Income\n\nThe above Statement of Comprehensive Income should be read in conjunction with the accompanying notes.\n\nwww.kingsgate.com.au" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.29457482831010734, + "doc_id": "8104b94b03c15da2f3518cd7e06324e70d85937d12a3621fd6b06b29e465cd50", + "edit_distance": 0.55, + "f1_score": 0.6153846153846154, + "meteor": 0.4758638709255993, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "SMFG\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n126", + "recall": 0.4444444444444444, + "true_md": "SMFG\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nSMFG 2011 126$^{Year ended March 31, 2010}$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9159383933537119, + "doc_id": "9d21767ce9aa0eed966b6d87e607ebb49b3de2efe8a6ea43d3cff8d1342c3f0c", + "edit_distance": 0.4074702886247878, + "f1_score": 0.9471458773784356, + "meteor": 0.9217652403185006, + "precision": 0.9613733905579399, + "pred_md": "The principal features of this risk control assessment method are (1) 'objectivity,' which is realized by estimating the frequency of losses based on historical internal loss experience and by estimating the severity of losses based on the transaction amounts pertinent to the scenarios, and (2) an appropriate level of 'sensitivity,' because changes in the business environment and the implementation of risk mitigation measures can be reflected in the frequency and severity of losses by changing the assessment of risk and control as well as transactions amounts.\n\n## (5) Measurement Using the Quantification Model\n\nSMFG, SMBC, and other Group companies using the AMA measure the maximum operational loss with a 99.9 percentile confidence interval and a holding period of one year (hereinafter referred to as 99.9% VaR) by using the four elements. In addition, 99.9% VaR is measured on an SMFG consolidated basis, SMBC consolidated basis, and SMBC nonconsolidated basis. The operational risk is measured for each of seven event types defined under Basel II, and then, by calculating the simple sum for all event types, 99.9% VaR is measured for each company applying the AMA. Meanwhile, the Basic Indicator Approach (BIA) is applied to estimate maximum operational risk losses for Group companies other than those applying the AMA. Then, the required capital and risk-weighted assets for SMFG and SMBC Group are measured by aggregating these figures.\n\nThe outline of the quantification model for SMBC is as follows. First, we generate a loss frequency distribution (number of loss incidents over a one-year period) based on the number of historical internal losses. Then, we generate a loss severity distribution\n\n(amount of loss per loss incident) based on internal losses and frequency of 'low-frequency and high-severity' events obtained through the risk control assessment.\n\nBy using the loss frequency and loss severity distributions, the aggregated loss severity distribution is generated by conducting Monte Carlo simulations and by generating various combinations of loss occurrence and loss amount which are simulated by changing these two factors. 99.0% VaR is calculated from the resulting aggregated loss severity distribution.\n\nFinally, we multiply 99.0% VaR by a conversion factor mentioned later in the section of 'Capital Ratio Information' to compute 99.9% VaR.\n\nThis quantification model takes into account not only empirical internal loss data but also potential risk (scenarios) identified in the risk control assessment. An important feature of this model is that it enables us to measure and reflect the 'low-frequency and high severity' events of operational risk. Moreover, by introducing a conversion factor, it is unnecessary to directly estimate 99.9% VaR, which tends to have a lower accuracy, and stable estimation results can be obtained by estimating 99.0% VaR which can be estimated with higher accuracy.\n\nPlease note that the accuracy of quantification model outputs described above is secured through the regular ex ante and ex post facto verification processes.\n\nThe breakdown of risk-weighted assets by event type for the Group on a consolidated basis, computed with the previously described quantification method, is as follows.\n\n## ■ Measurement Using the Quantification Model\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n45", + "recall": 0.9333333333333333, + "true_md": "The principal features of this risk control assessment method are (1) “objectivity,” which is realized by estimating the frequency of losses based on historical internal loss experience and by estimating the severity of losses based on the transaction amounts pertinent to the scenarios, and (2) an appropriate level of “sensitivity,” because changes in the business environment and the implementation of risk mitigation measures can be reflected in the frequency and severity of losses by changing the assessment of risk and control as well as transactions amounts.\n\nSMFG, SMBC, and other Group companies using the AMA measure the maximum operational loss with a 99.9 percentile confidence interval and a holding period of one year (hereinafter referred to as 99.9% VaR) by using the four elements. In addition, 99.9% VaR is measured on an SMFG consolidated basis, SMBC consolidated basis, and SMBC nonconsolidated basis. The operational risk is measured for each of seven event types defined under Basel II, and then, by calculating the simple sum for all event types, 99.9% VaR is measured for each company applying the AMA. Meanwhile, the Basic Indicator Approach (BIA) is applied to estimate maximum operational risk losses for Group companies other than those applying the AMA. Then, the required capital and risk-weighted assets for SMFG and SMBC Group are measured by aggregating these figures.\n\nThe outline of the quantification model for SMBC is as follows. First, we generate a loss frequency distribution (number of loss incidents over a one-year period) based on the number of his- torical internal losses. Then, we generate a loss severity distribution \n\nThe breakdown of risk-weighted assets by event type for the Group on a consolidated basis, computed with the previously described quantification method, is as follows.\n\nPlease note that the accuracy of quantification model outputs described above is secured through the regular ex ante and ex post facto verification processes.\n\nThis quantification model takes into account not only empiri- cal internal loss data but also potential risk (scenarios) identified in the risk control assessment. An important feature of this model is that it enables us to measure and reflect the “low-frequency and high severity” events of operational risk. Moreover, by introducing a conversion factor, it is unnecessary to directly estimate 99.9% VaR, which tends to have a lower accuracy, and stable estimation results can be obtained by estimating 99.0% VaR which can be estimated with higher accuracy.\n\nFinally, we multiply 99.0% VaR by a conversion factor mentioned later in the section of “Capital Ratio Information” to com- pute 99.9% VaR.\n\nBy using the loss frequency and loss severity distribu- tions, the aggregated loss severity distribution is generated by conducting Monte Carlo simulations and by generating various combinations of loss occurrence and loss amount which are simu- lated by changing these two factors. 99.0% VaR is calculated from the resulting aggregated loss severity distribution. \n\n(amount of loss per loss incident) based on internal losses and frequency of “low-frequency and high-severity” events obtained through the risk control assessment.\n\n## (5) Measurement Using the Quantification Model\n\n## ■ Measurement Using the Quantification Model\n\nSMFG 2011 45" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.926663691733121, + "doc_id": "2d5338e19d1e365a5730b283ce9769b84709d55eb15efcec0f9c5f7914dd9fc8", + "edit_distance": 0.47527472527472525, + "f1_score": 0.9658886894075405, + "meteor": 0.9195859076069511, + "precision": 0.9817518248175182, + "pred_md": "SMFG\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nbankrupt borrowers and potentially bankrupt borrowers, expected losses on such claims are calculated based on either the present value of expected future cash flows or the expected recoverable amount from collateral or guarantees. Since the claims' balance sheet amounts at the closing date minus the current expected amount of loan losses approximate their fair values, such amounts are regarded as their fair values.\n\n## 5) Monetary claims bought:\n\nThe fair values of monetary claims bought with market prices, such as beneficial interests in commodities investment trusts, are based on their market prices as of the end of the fiscal year. The fair values of subordinated trust beneficiary interests related to securitized housing loans are based on the assessed value of underlying assets minus the assessed value of senior beneficial interests, etc. The fair values of other transactions are, in principle, based on prices calculated using methods similar to the methods applied to 9) Loans and bills discounted. 6) Trading assets:\n\nThe fair values of bonds and other securities held for trading purposes are, in principle, based on their market price at the final date of the fiscal year.\n\n7) Money held in trust:\n\nThe fair values of money held in trust are, in principle, based on the market prices of securities held in trust calculated using methods similar to the methods applied to 8) Securities.\n\n8) Securities:\n\nIn principle, the fair values of stocks (including foreign stocks) are based on the average market price during 1 month before the end of the fiscal year. The fair values of bonds and securities with market prices other than stocks are prices calculated based on their market prices on the final date of the fiscal year.\n\nIn light of the 'Practical Solution on Measurement of Fair Value for Financial Assets' (ASBJ Practical Issues Task Force No. 25), the fair values of floating-rate Japanese government bonds are based on the present value of future cash flows (the government bond yield is used to discount and estimate future cash flows). Bond yield and yield volatility are the main price parameters. The fair values of those without market prices, such as private placement bonds, are based on the present value of future cash flows calculated by discounting estimated future cash flows taking into account the borrower's internal rating and pledged collateral by a rate comprising a risk-free interest rate and an overhead ratio. However, the fair values of bonds issued by bankrupt borrowers, effectively bankrupt borrowers and potentially bankrupt borrowers are based on the bond's face value after the deduction of the expected amount of a loss on the bond computed using the same method applied to the estimation of a loan loss. The fair values of publicly offered investment trusts are calculated based on the published net asset value (NAV) per share, while those of private placement investment trusts are calculated based on the NAV published by securities firms and other financial institutions.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n104\n\n## Liabilities\n\n1) Deposits, 2) Negotiable certificates of deposit and 12) Due to trust account:\n\nThe fair values of demand deposits and deposits without maturity are based on their book values as at the end of the fiscal year. The fair values of short-term transactions with remaining life as of the end of the fiscal year not exceeding 6 months are also based on their book values, as their book values are regarded to approximate their fair values. The fair values of transactions with a remaining life of more than 6 months are, in principle, based on the present value of future cash flows calculated using the rate applied to the same type of deposits that are newly accepted until the end of the remaining life.\n\n3) Call money and bills sold, 4) Payables under repurchase agreements, 5) Payables under securities lending transactions, 6) Commercial paper, 8) Borrowed money, 10) Short-term bonds and 11) Bonds:\n\nThe fair values of short-term transactions with remaining life as of the end of the fiscal year not exceeding 6 months are based on their book values, as their book values are regarded to approximate their fair values. For transactions with a remaining life of more than 6 months, their fair values are, in principle, based on the present value of future cash flows calculated using the refinancing rate applied to the same type of instruments for the remaining life. The fair values of bonds are based on the present value of future cash flows calculated using the rate derived from the data on the yields of benchmark bonds and publicly offered subordinated bonds published by securities firms. 7) Trading liabilities:\n\nThe fair values of bonds sold for short sales and other securities for trading purposes are, in principle, based on their market prices on the final date of the fiscal year. 9) Foreign exchanges:\n\nThe fair values of foreign currency-denominated deposits without maturity received from other banks are based on their book values as at the end of the fiscal year.\n\nThe fair values of foreign exchange related short-term borrowings are based on their book values, as their book values are regarded to approximate their fair values.\n\n## Derivatives transactions\n\nThe fair values of exchange-traded derivatives are based on their closing prices. With regard to OTC transactions, the fair values of interest rate, currency, stock, bond and credit derivatives are based on their settlement prices as at the end of the fiscal year calculated based on the present value of the expected future cash flows or using valuation techniques such as the option pricing model. The fair values of commodity derivatives transactions are based on their settlement prices as at the end of the fiscal year, calculated based on the derivative instrument's components, including price and contract term.", + "recall": 0.950530035335689, + "true_md": "SMFG\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n## Liabilities\n\n## 5) Monetary claims bought:\n\n## 6) Trading assets:\n\n## 7) Money held in trust:\n\n## 8) Securities. 8) Securities:\n\n## 9) Foreign exchanges:\n\n## 7) Trading liabilities:\n\nSMFG 2011 104\n\nbankrupt borrowers and potentially bankrupt borrowers, expected losses on such claims are calculated based on either the present value of expected future cash flows or the expected recoverable amount from collateral or guarantees. Since the claims’ balance sheet amounts at the closing date minus the current expected amount of loan losses approximate their fair values, such amounts are regarded as their fair values.\n\nThe fair values of monetary claims bought with market prices, such as beneficial interests in commodities invest- ment trusts, are based on their market prices as of the end of the fiscal year. The fair values of subordinated trust beneficiary interests related to securitized housing loans are based on the assessed value of underlying assets minus the assessed value of senior beneficial interests, etc. The fair values of other transactions are, in principle, based on prices calculated using methods similar to the methods applied to 9) Loans and bills discounted.\n\nThe fair values of bonds and other securities held for trad- ing purposes are, in principle, based on their market price at the final date of the fiscal year.\n\nThe fair values of money held in trust are, in principle, based on the market prices of securities held in trust calculated using methods similar to the methods applied to \n\nIn principle, the fair values of stocks (including foreign stocks) are based on the average market price during 1 month before the end of the fiscal year. The fair values of bonds and securities with market prices other than stocks are prices calculated based on their market prices on the final date of the fiscal year.\n\nIn light of the “Practical Solution on Measurement of Fair Value for Financial Assets” (ASBJ Practical Issues Task Force No. 25), the fair values of floating-rate Japanese government bonds are based on the present value of future cash flows (the government bond yield is used to discount and estimate future cash flows). Bond yield and yield volatility are the main price parameters. The fair values of those without market prices, such as private placement bonds, are based on the present value of future cash flows calculated by discounting estimated future cash flows tak- ing into account the borrower’s internal rating and pledged collateral by a rate comprising a risk-free interest rate and an overhead ratio. However, the fair values of bonds issued by bankrupt borrowers, effectively bankrupt borrowers and potentially bankrupt borrowers are based on the bond’s face value after the deduction of the expected amount of a loss on the bond computed using the same method applied to the estimation of a loan loss. The fair values of publicly offered investment trusts are calculated based on the published net asset value (NAV) per share, while those of private placement investment trusts are calculated based on the NAV published by securities firms and other financial institutions.\n\nThe fair values of exchange-traded derivatives are based on their closing prices. With regard to OTC transactions, the fair values of interest rate, currency, stock, bond and credit derivatives are based on their settlement prices as at the end of the fiscal year calculated based on the present value of the expected future cash flows or using valuation tech- niques such as the option pricing model. The fair values of commodity derivatives transactions are based on their settlement prices as at the end of the fiscal year, calculated based on the derivative instrument’s components, includ- ing price and contract term.\n\nThe fair values of foreign exchange related short-term borrowings are based on their book values, as their book values are regarded to approximate their fair values. Derivatives transactions\n\nThe fair values of foreign currency-denominated deposits without maturity received from other banks are based on their book values as at the end of the fiscal year.\n\nThe fair values of bonds sold for short sales and other securities for trading purposes are, in principle, based on their market prices on the final date of the fiscal year.\n\nThe fair values of demand deposits and deposits without maturity are based on their book values as at the end of the fiscal year. The fair values of short-term transactions with remaining life as of the end of the fiscal year not exceeding 6 months are also based on their book values, as their book values are regarded to approximate their fair values. The fair values of transactions with a remaining life of more than 6 months are, in principle, based on the present value of future cash flows calculated using the rate applied to the same type of deposits that are newly accepted until the end of the remaining life.\n\nThe fair values of short-term transactions with remaining life as of the end of the fiscal year not exceeding 6 months are based on their book values, as their book values are regarded to approximate their fair values. For transactions with a remaining life of more than 6 months, their fair values are, in principle, based on the present value of future cash flows calculated using the refinancing rate applied to the same type of instruments for the remaining life. The fair values of bonds are based on the present value of future cash flows calculated using the rate derived from the data on the yields of benchmark bonds and publicly offered subordinated bonds published by securities firms.\n\n## 1) Deposits, 2) Negotiable certificates of deposit and 12) Due to trust account:\n\n## 3) Call money and bills sold, 4) Payables under repurchase agreements, 5) Payables under securities lending transac- tions, 6) Commercial paper, 8) Borrowed money, 10) Short-term bonds and 11) Bonds:" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8752127709369519, + "doc_id": "2c8a4bfcd6bf33ce4ce65003bf2a144d22993bb763f23b28e206dd8b95125d7d", + "edit_distance": 0.16331658291457288, + "f1_score": 0.9415041782729805, + "meteor": 0.9107139575538639, + "precision": 0.9388888888888889, + "pred_md": "Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nSMFG\n\n* 1 Loans and bills discounted do not include general reserve for possible loan losses and specific reserve for possible loan losses. The reserves for possible losses on 'Cash and due from banks and Deposits with banks,' 'Call loans and bills bought,' 'Monetary claims bought,' 'Foreign exchanges,' and 'Lease receivables and investment assets' are deducted directly from 'Consolidated balance sheet amount' since they are immaterial.\n\n* 2 The amounts collectively represent the derivative transactions which are recorded on 'Trading assets,' 'Trading liabilities,' 'Other assets' and 'Other liabilities.' Debts and credits arising from derivative transactions are presented on a net basis.\n\n## (b) Fair value calculation methodology for financial instruments\n\n## Assets\n\n1) Cash and due from banks and Deposits with banks, 2) Call loans and bills bought, 3) Receivables under resale agreements, 4) Receivables under securities borrowing transactions, 9) Loans and bills discounted, 10) Foreign exchanges, and 11) Lease receivables and investment assets: Of these transactions, the book values of dues from banks without maturity and overdrafts with no specified repayment dates are regarded to approximate their fair values; thus, their fair values are their book values.\n\nFor short-term transactions with remaining life as of the end of the fiscal year not exceeding 6 months, their fair\n\nvalues are, in principle, their book value as book values are regarded to approximate fair values.\n\nThe fair value of those with a remaining life of more than 6 months is, in principle, the present value of future cash flows (calculated by discounting estimated future cash flows, taking into account factors such as the borrower's internal rating and pledged collateral, using a rate comprising a risk-free interest rate and an overhead ratio). Certain consolidated subsidiaries of SMFG calculate the present value by discounting the estimated future cash flows computed based on the contractual interest rate, using a rate comprising a risk-free interest rate and a credit risk premium.\n\nRegarding claims on bankrupt borrowers, effectively\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n103", + "recall": 0.9441340782122905, + "true_md": "Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nSMFG\n\n* 1 Loans and bills discounted do not include general reserve for possible loan losses and specific reserve for possible loan losses. The reserves for possible losses on “Cash and due from banks and Deposits with banks,” “Call loans and bills bought,” “Monetary claims bought,” “Foreign exchanges,” and “Lease receivables and investment assets” are deducted directly from “Consolidated balance sheet amount” since they are immaterial.\n\n* 2 The amounts collectively represent the derivative transactions which are recorded on “Trading assets,” “Trading liabilities,” “Other assets” and “Other liabilities.” Debts and credits arising from derivative transactions are presented on a net basis.\n\n1) Cash and due from banks and Deposits with banks, \n\n2) Call loans and bills bought, 3) Receivables under resale agreements, 4) Receivables under securities borrowing transactions, 9) Loans and bills discounted, 10) Foreign exchanges, and 11) Lease receivables and investment assets: Of these transactions, the book values of dues from banks without maturity and overdrafts with no specified repay- ment dates are regarded to approximate their fair values; thus, their fair values are their book values.\n\nFor short-term transactions with remaining life as of the end of the fiscal year not exceeding 6 months, their fair \n\nvalues are, in principle, their book value as book values are regarded to approximate fair values.\n\nThe fair value of those with a remaining life of more than 6 months is, in principle, the present value of future cash flows (calculated by discounting estimated future cash flows, taking into account factors such as the borrower’s internal rating and pledged collateral, using a rate comprising a risk-free interest rate and an overhead ratio). Certain consolidated subsidiaries of SMFG calculate the present value by discounting the estimated future cash flows computed based on the contractual interest rate, using a rate comprising a risk-free interest rate and a credit risk premium.\n\nRegarding claims on bankrupt borrowers, effectively \n\nSMFG 2011 103\n\n## (b) Fair value calculation methodology for financial instruments\n\n## Assets" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.863275440303438, + "doc_id": "bebd4a16c35aa3c1fae59c8fd41a92da53ec117ef53e30648b20eb317ecbde22", + "edit_distance": 0.13646532438478748, + "f1_score": 0.9936102236421726, + "meteor": 0.7817767086354762, + "precision": 0.9936102236421726, + "pred_md": "## Nordstrom, Inc.\n\n## Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nDollar and share amounts in millions except per share, per option and per unit amounts\n\nLeasehold improvements and leased property and equipment that are purchased at the inception of the lease, or during the lease term, are depreciated over the shorter of the lease term or the asset life. Lease terms include the fixed, non-cancelable term of a lease, plus any renewal periods determined to be reasonably assured.\n\n## Goodwill, Intangible Assets and Long-Lived Assets\n\nGoodwill represents the excess of acquisition cost over the fair value of the related net assets acquired and is not subject to amortization. As of January 31, 2015, we had Trunk Club goodwill of $261, HauteLook goodwill of $121 and Nordstrom.com and Jeffrey goodwill of $53. We review our goodwill annually for impairment or when circumstances indicate its carrying value may not be recoverable. We perform this evaluation at the reporting unit level, comprised of the principal business units within our Retail segment, through the application of a two-step fair value test. The first step compares the carrying value of the reporting unit to its estimated fair value, which is based on the expected present value of future cash flows (income approach), comparable public companies and acquisitions (market approach) or a combination of both. If fair value is lower than the carrying value, then a second step is performed to quantify the amount of the impairment. The fair value of Trunk Club's reporting unit will be tested in 2015.\n\nWhen facts and circumstances indicate that the carrying values of long-lived assets, including buildings, equipment and amortizable intangible assets, may be impaired, we perform an evaluation of recoverability by comparing the carrying values of the net assets to their related projected undiscounted future cash flows, in addition to other quantitative and qualitative analyses. Upon indication that the carrying values of long-lived assets will not be recoverable, we recognize an impairment loss. We estimate the fair value of the assets using the expected present value of future cash flows of the assets. Land, property and equipment are grouped at the lowest level at which there are identifiable cash flows when assessing impairment. Cash flows for our retail store assets are identified at the individual store level, while our intangible assets associated with HauteLook and Trunk Club are identified at their respective reporting unit levels. We did not record any material impairment losses for long-lived tangible or amortizable intangible assets in 2014, 2013 or 2012. Amortization expense for acquired intangibles was $10, $10 and $19 in 2014, 2013 and 2012. As of January 31, 2015, we expect future amortization expense of acquired intangible assets of $16 in 2015, $15 in 2016, $11 in 2017, $7 in 2018 and $7 in 2019.\n\n## Self-Insurance\n\nWe retain a portion of the risk for certain losses related to employee health and welfare, workers' compensation and general liability claims. Liabilities associated with these losses include undiscounted estimates of both losses reported and losses incurred but not yet reported. We estimate our ultimate cost using an actuarially-based analysis of claims experience, regulatory changes and other relevant factors.\n\n## Foreign Currency\n\nAs of January 31, 2015, we have opened one full-line store in Canada and have announced plans to open five additional full-line stores in Canada over the next few years. The functional currency of our Canadian operations is the Canadian Dollar. We translate assets and liabilities into U.S. Dollars using the exchange rate in effect at the balance sheet date, while we translate revenues and expenses using a weighted-average exchange rate for the period. We record these translation adjustments as a component of accumulated other comprehensive loss on the Consolidated Balance Sheets. In addition, our U.S. operations incurred certain expenditures denominated in Canadian Dollars and our Canadian operations incurred certain expenditures denominated in U.S. Dollars. This activity results in transaction gains and losses that arise from exchange rate fluctuations and are recorded as gains or losses in the Consolidated Statements of Earnings. As of January 31, 2015, activities associated with the foreign currency exchange risk have not had a material impact on our consolidated financial statements.\n\nNordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 45", + "recall": 0.9936102236421726, + "true_md": "## Nordstrom, Inc. Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements Dollar and share amounts in millions except per share, per option and per unit amounts\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements Dollar and share amounts in millions except per share, per option and per unit amounts\n\nLeasehold improvements and leased property and equipment that are purchased at the inception of the lease, or during the lease term, are depreciated over the shorter of the lease term or the asset life. Lease terms include the fixed, non-cancelable term of a lease, plus any renewal periods determined to be reasonably assured. \n\nGoodwill, Intangible Assets and Long-Lived Assets Goodwill represents the excess of acquisition cost over the fair value of the related net assets acquired and is not subject to amortization. As of January 31, 2015, we had Trunk Club goodwill of $261, HauteLook goodwill of $121 and Nordstrom.com and Jeffrey goodwill of $53. We review our goodwill annually for impairment or when circumstances indicate its carrying value may not be recoverable. We perform this evaluation at the reporting unit level, comprised of the principal business units within our Retail segment, through the application of a two-step fair value test. The first step compares the carrying value of the reporting unit to its estimated fair value, which is based on the expected present value of future cash flows (income approach), comparable public companies and acquisitions (market approach) or a combination of both. If fair value is lower than the carrying value, then a second step is performed to quantify the amount of the impairment. The fair value of Trunk Club’s reporting unit will be tested in 2015.\n\n## Goodwill, Intangible Assets and Long-Lived Assets Goodwill represents the excess of acquisition cost over the fair value of the related net assets acquired and is not subject to amortization. As\n\nWhen facts and circumstances indicate that the carrying values of long-lived assets, including buildings, equipment and amortizable intangible assets, may be impaired, we perform an evaluation of recoverability by comparing the carrying values of the net assets to their related projected undiscounted future cash flows, in addition to other quantitative and qualitative analyses. Upon indication that the carrying values of long-lived assets will not be recoverable, we recognize an impairment loss. We estimate the fair value of the assets using the expected present value of future cash flows of the assets. Land, property and equipment are grouped at the lowest level at which there are identifiable cash flows when assessing impairment. Cash flows for our retail store assets are identified at the individual store level, while our intangible assets associated with HauteLook and Trunk Club are identified at their respective reporting unit levels. We did not record any material impairment losses for long-lived tangible or amortizable intangible assets in 2014, 2013 or 2012. Amortization expense for acquired intangibles was $10, $10 and $19 in 2014, 2013 and 2012. As of January 31, 2015, we expect future amortization expense of acquired intangible assets of $16 in 2015, $15 in 2016, $11 in 2017, $7 in 2018 and $7 in 2019.\n\nSelf-Insurance We retain a portion of the risk for certain losses related to employee health and welfare, workers’ compensation and general liability claims. Liabilities associated with these losses include undiscounted estimates of both losses reported and losses incurred but not yet reported. We estimate our ultimate cost using an actuarially-based analysis of claims experience, regulatory changes and other relevant factors.\n\nForeign Currency As of January 31, 2015, we have opened one full-line store in Canada and have announced plans to open five additional full-line stores in Canada over the next few years. The functional currency of our Canadian operations is the Canadian Dollar. We translate assets and liabilities into U.S. Dollars using the exchange rate in effect at the balance sheet date, while we translate revenues and expenses using a weighted-average exchange rate for the period. We record these translation adjustments as a component of accumulated other comprehensive loss on the Consolidated Balance Sheets. In addition, our U.S. operations incurred certain expenditures denominated in Canadian Dollars and our Canadian operations incurred certain expenditures denominated in U.S. Dollars. This activity results in transaction gains and losses that arise from exchange rate fluctuations and are recorded as gains or losses in the Consolidated Statements of Earnings. As of January 31, 2015, activities associated with the foreign currency exchange risk have not had a material impact on our consolidated financial statements.\n\nNordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 45\n\n## Self-Insurance We retain a portion of the risk for certain losses related to employee health and welfare, workers’ compensation and general liability claims.\n\n## Foreign Currency As of January 31, 2015, we have opened one full-line store in Canada and have announced plans to open five additional full-line stores in" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8695986818938457, + "doc_id": "7ba43839089df334419aa4ae53d947cdbf4f4b4425dbea1ede97e7a0718be829", + "edit_distance": 0.08620689655172414, + "f1_score": 0.9382716049382716, + "meteor": 0.9178860854001027, + "precision": 0.9743589743589743, + "pred_md": "Sundance maintains a bright line division of responsibility between the Chairman and the MD as clearly specified in the Board Charter and Role of Management document maintained in the corporate governance section of Sundance's website.\n\nComposition of skills and experience of the Board (out of 5 Directors)\n\n- 49 -", + "recall": 0.9047619047619048, + "true_md": "Sundance maintains a bright line division of responsibility between the Chairman and the MD as clearly specified in the Board Charter and Role of Management document maintained in the corporate governance section of Sundance’s website. \n\nComposition of skills and experience of the Board (out of 5 Directors) Skills and Experience \n\n- 49 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9306048591020996, + "doc_id": "75eed824ee345a1e1afc9f5b6e8e02f0a5e645f8c56e7d13126e28328ba0054e", + "edit_distance": 0.15384615384615385, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.998179335457442, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "002CSN0893\n\nFor FSC logo to be inserted in this area by the printer", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "For FSC logo to be inserted in this area by the printer\n\n002CSN0893" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9599567793081795, + "doc_id": "8bde5f82f0be403249a5d85119be711481b5cd9134b2ca74debe975d8b650a21", + "edit_distance": 0.851963746223565, + "f1_score": 0.9920212765957447, + "meteor": 0.8809298281663915, + "precision": 0.9973262032085561, + "pred_md": "## CABLE\n\n## ONE OF CANADA'S LARGEST PROVIDERS OF CABLE TELEVISION, HIGH-SPEED INTERNET AND PHONE SERVICES\n\n- GLYPH<129> 2.1 million television subscribers - approximately 31.4 % of Canadian cable television subscribers\n- GLYPH<129> 2.0 million high-speed Internet subscribers\n- GLYPH<129> 1.2 million telephony subscribers\n- GLYPH<129> a network that passes approximately 4 million homes in Ontario, New Brunswick and Newfoundland.\n\n## PRODUCTS AND SERVICES\n\nOur advanced digital two-way hybrid fibre-coaxial network provides a leading and innovative selection of digital television and online viewing, high-speed broadband Internet access, and cable telephony services:\n\n- GLYPH<129> programming includes high-definition television (HDTV)\n- GLYPH<129> on-demand, including movies, television series and events\n- GLYPH<129> personal video recorders (PVRs) and Whole Home PVR\n- GLYPH<129> time-shifted programming\n- GLYPH<129> digital specialty, multicultural and sports programming\n- GLYPH<129> Rogers Anyplace TV and Anyplace TV Home Edition for viewing on smartphones, tablets and personal computers.\n\nCable Television generates service revenue from three areas:\n\n- GLYPH<129> digital cable - includes digital channel service fees, including premium and specialty service subscription fees, pay per view service fees and video on demand service fees\n- GLYPH<129> analog cable - includes basic cable service fees plus extended basic (or tier) service fees and access fees for use of channel capacity by third parties\n- GLYPH<129> rental of digital cable set-top terminals.\n\nInternet revenue includes monthly subscription and additional use service revenues from residential, small business and wholesale Internet access subscribers and modem rental fees.\n\nCable Telephony revenue includes revenues from residential and small business local telephony service, calling features such as voicemail and call waiting, and long-distance.\n\n## DISTRIBUTION\n\nWe distribute our cable products using various channels including:\n\n- GLYPH<129> company-owned Rogers retail stores\n- GLYPH<129> customer self-serve rogers.com, ecommerce sites\n- GLYPH<129> Rogers call centres, outbound telemarketing, door-to-door agents\n- GLYPH<129> major retail chains\n- GLYPH<129> an extensive network of third party retail locations.\n\n## EXTENSIVE NETWORK\n\nRogers has an expansive fibre and hybrid fibre coaxial network infrastructure that provides consumers, businesses and governments in Ontario, New Brunswick and Newfoundland with a range of communications services, including video, broadband Internet, voice and data networking.\n\nThe network is structured to optimize performance and reliability and to allow for the simultaneous delivery of video, voice and Internet over a single platform. It is generally constructed in rings that interconnect with distribution hubs, minimizing disruptions that can result from fibre cuts and other events.\n\nThe network is sub-divided into smaller clusters of homes interconnected at a central node. The node is reached by fibre optic cable and in turn from the node to the home, video, voice and broadband services are delivered using 860 MHz of spectrum over coaxial cable.\n\nWe continually upgrade the network to improve capacity, enhance performance and introduce new features and functionality. For example, we invest in:\n\n- GLYPH<129> further segmenting our network nodes to reduce the number of homes in each node\n- GLYPH<129> improving video signal compression by moving to more advanced video protocols\n- GLYPH<129> improving channel and on-demand capacity by introducing new technology like switched digital video\n- GLYPH<129> increasing Internet speed with data over cable service interface specifications (DOCSIS 3.0), which now offers speeds of up to 250 Mbps, setting the foundation for even higher speeds\n- GLYPH<129> increasing the fibre to the home (FTTH) footprint by connecting to more homes directly to fibre.\n\nIn 2012, we began transitioning customers still receiving television signals over our analog broadcast channels to all-digital services, freeing up significant cable network capacity for additional features and services. The analog to digital subscriber migration will continue to strengthen the customer experience and, once complete (expected in 2015), will allow us to reclaim significant amounts of network capacity and reduce network operating and maintenance costs. The migration from analog to digital requires additional spending because it involves fitting analog homes with digital converters and removing existing analog filtering equipment.\n\nBroadband Internet service is provided using the DOCSIS 3.0 standard which combines multiple RF channels onto one access into the customer premise, delivering exceptional performance. The bandwidth of our internet service offerings has increased 50 fold in the last 10 years as we bring new technology to market when it becomes available. This track record of investing in our networks and demonstrating the capability to deploy best in class service is one of our key strategies to ensure we stay competitive with other service providers that provide internet service into homes and business over copper facilities.\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC.\n\n41\n\nMANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS", + "recall": 0.9867724867724867, + "true_md": "## CABLE\n\n## PRODUCTS AND SERVICES\n\n## DISTRIBUTION\n\n## EXTENSIVE NETWORK\n\nOur advanced digital two-way hybrid fibre-coaxial network provides a leading and innovative selection of digital television and online viewing, high-speed broadband Internet access, and cable telephony services:\n\nCable Television generates service revenue from three areas:\n\nInternet revenue includes monthly subscription and additional use service revenues from residential, small business and wholesale Internet access subscribers and modem rental fees.\n\nCable Telephony revenue includes revenues from residential and small business local telephony service, calling features such as voicemail and call waiting, and long-distance.\n\nWe distribute our cable products using various channels including:\n\nRogers has an expansive fibre and hybrid fibre coaxial network infrastructure that provides consumers, businesses and governments in Ontario, New Brunswick and Newfoundland with a range of communications services, including video, broadband Internet, voice and data networking.\n\nThe network is structured to optimize performance and reliability and to allow for the simultaneous delivery of video, voice and Internet over a single platform. It is generally constructed in rings that interconnect with distribution hubs, minimizing disruptions that can result from fibre cuts and other events.\n\nThe network is sub-divided into smaller clusters of homes interconnected at a central node. The node is reached by fibre optic cable and in turn from the node to the home, video, voice and broadband services are delivered using 860 MHz of spectrum over coaxial cable.\n\nWe continually upgrade the network to improve capacity, enhance performance and introduce new features and functionality. For example, we invest in:\n\nIn 2012, we began transitioning customers still receiving television signals over our analog broadcast channels to all-digital services, freeing up significant cable network capacity for additional features and services. The analog to digital subscriber migration will continue to strengthen the customer experience and, once complete (expected in 2015), will allow us to reclaim significant amounts of network capacity and reduce network operating and maintenance costs. The migration from analog to digital requires additional spending because it involves fitting analog homes with digital converters and removing existing analog filtering equipment.\n\nBroadband Internet service is provided using the DOCSIS 3.0 standard which combines multiple RF channels onto one access into the customer premise, delivering exceptional performance. The bandwidth of our internet service offerings has increased 50 fold in the last 10 years as we bring new technology to market when it becomes available. This track record of investing in our networks and demonstrating the capability to deploy best in class service is one of our key strategies to ensure we stay competitive with other service providers that provide internet service into homes and business over copper facilities.\n\n- GLYPH<129> programming includes high-definition television (HDTV)\n\n- GLYPH<129> on-demand, including movies, television series and events\n\n- GLYPH<129> personal video recorders (PVRs) and Whole Home PVR\n\n- GLYPH<129> time-shifted programming\n\n- GLYPH<129> digital specialty, multicultural and sports programming\n\n- GLYPH<129> Rogers Anyplace TV and Anyplace TV Home Edition for viewing on smartphones, tablets and personal computers.\n\n- GLYPH<129> digital cable – includes digital channel service fees, including premium and specialty service subscription fees, pay per view service fees and video on demand service fees\n\n- GLYPH<129> analog cable – includes basic cable service fees plus extended basic (or tier) service fees and access fees for use of channel capacity by third parties\n\n- GLYPH<129> rental of digital cable set-top terminals.\n\n- GLYPH<129> further segmenting our network nodes to reduce the number of homes in each node\n\n- GLYPH<129> improving video signal compression by moving to more advanced video protocols\n\n- GLYPH<129> improving channel and on-demand capacity by introducing new technology like switched digital video\n\n- GLYPH<129> increasing Internet speed with data over cable service interface specifications (DOCSIS 3.0), which now offers speeds of up to 250 Mbps, setting the foundation for even higher speeds\n\n- GLYPH<129> increasing the fibre to the home (FTTH) footprint by connecting to more homes directly to fibre.\n\n- GLYPH<129> company-owned Rogers retail stores\n\n- GLYPH<129> customer self-serve rogers.com, ecommerce sites\n\n- GLYPH<129> Rogers call centres, outbound telemarketing, door-to-door agents\n\n- GLYPH<129> major retail chains\n\n- GLYPH<129> an extensive network of third party retail locations.\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 41\n\nMANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AN D ANALYSIS\n\nONE OF CANADA’S LARGEST PROVIDERS OF CABLE TELEVISION, HIGH-SPEED INTERNET AND PHONE SERVICES\n\n- GLYPH<129> 2.1 million television subscribers – approximately 31.4 % of Canadian cable television subscribers\n\n- GLYPH<129> 2.0 million high-speed Internet subscribers\n\n- GLYPH<129> 1.2 million telephony subscribers\n\n- GLYPH<129> a network that passes approximately 4 million homes in Ontario, New Brunswick and Newfoundland." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7263640379844866, + "doc_id": "bd7de39204fda326567c66c641ca97a5c3ff81b3866f91e5ae2f849ceb154dbd", + "edit_distance": 0.8469101123595506, + "f1_score": 0.9845360824742267, + "meteor": 0.6918175295124526, + "precision": 0.9947916666666666, + "pred_md": "## Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation\n\n## ■\n\n## Board of Directors, Corporate Auditors, and Executive Officers\n\n## BOARD OF DIRECTORS\n\nChairman of the Board\n\n## Teisuke Kitayama\n\nPresident and CEO\n\nTakeshi Kunibe* 1\n\nDirector\n\n## Koichi Miyata\n\nDeputy Presidents\n\n## Keiichi Ando* 1\n\nLocated at Osaka (in charge of West Japan)\n\n## Tetsuya Kubo* 1 * 2\n\nPublic Relations Dept., Corporate Planning Dept., Financial Accounting Dept., Subsidiaries & Affiliates Dept.\n\n## Satoru Nakanishi* 1 * 2\n\nHead of Consumer Banking Unit\n\nSenior Managing Directors\n\n## Kazuya Jono* 1 * 2\n\nRisk Management Unit (Corporate Risk Management Dept., Credit & Investment Planning Dept.)\n\n## Yoshihiko Shimizu* 1 * 2\n\nHead of Middle Market Banking Unit Global Advisory Dept.\n\n## Hiroshi Minoura* 1 * 2\n\nHead of International Banking Unit\n\n## Koichi Minami* 1 * 2\n\nCorporate Research Dept., Credit Administration Dept. Deputy Head of Corporate Banking Unit (Credit Dept.) and Investment Banking Unit (Structured Finance Credit Dept., Trust Services Dept.)\n\n## Koichi Danno* 1 * 2\n\nInternal Audit Dept., Credit Review Dept.,\n\nHuman Resources Dept., Human Resources Development Dept.\n\n## Mitsunori Watanabe* 1 * 2\n\nHead of Corporate Banking Unit, Global Advisory Dept.\n\nManaging Director\n\n## Yujiro Ito* 1 * 2\n\nHuman Resources Dept., Human Resources Development Dept., Quality Management Dept., General Affairs Dept., Legal Dept., Administrative Services Dept.\n\n## Directors (outside)\n\n## Shigeru Iwamoto\n\n## Yoshinori Yokoyama\n\nKuniaki Nomura\n\n## CORPORATE AUDITORS\n\n## Hiroki Yaze\n\nCorporate Auditor\n\n## Yasuyuki Hayase\n\nCorporate Auditor\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n- * 1 Executive Officers\n\n* 2 Authorized Management Committee Members\n\n(as of June 30, 2011)\n\n## Hiroshi Araki\n\nCorporate Auditor (outside)\n\n## Ikuo Uno\n\nCorporate Auditor (outside)\n\n## Satoshi Ito\n\nCorporate Auditor (outside)\n\n## Jun Mizoguchi\n\nCorporate Auditor\n\n## EXECUTIVE OFFICERS\n\nManaging Directors\n\n## Shuichi Kageyama\n\nHead of Corporate Advisory Division\n\n## Seiichiro Takahashi* 2\n\nHead of Treasury Unit\n\n## Hidetoshi Furukawa* 2\n\nHead of Investment Banking Unit\n\n## Ikuhiko Morikawa\n\nHead of Private Advisory Dept., President of SMFG Card & Credit, Inc.\n\n## Nobuaki Kurumatani\n\nPublic Relations Dept., Corporate Planning Dept.\n\n## Katsunori Okubo\n\nDeputy Head of International Banking Unit, Middle Market Banking Unit, Corporate Banking Unit, Global Advisory Dept.,\n\nChairman of Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation (China) Limited\n\n## Hiroyuki Iwami\n\nHead of Europe Division\n\nPresident of Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation Europe Limited\n\n## Yuichiro Ueda\n\nDeputy Head of Middle Market Banking Unit (Credit Dept. I)\n\n## Masaki Tachibana\n\nHead of The Americas Division\n\n## Kohei Hirota\n\nDeputy Head of Middle Market Banking Unit (in charge of West Japan)\n\n## Yoshimi Miura\n\nTokyo Corporate Banking Division (Tokyo Corporate Banking Depts. I, II, and V)\n\n## Masahiro Fuchizaki* 2\n\nIT Planning Dept., IT Business Strategy Planning Dept., Operations Planning Dept., Operations Support Dept., Director of The Japan Research Institute, Limited\n\n## Shinichi Hayashida\n\nDeputy Head of International Banking Unit (Credit Depts., Americas Division and Europe Division, Asia Credit Dept., Credit Management Dept.)\n\n## Toshimi Tagata\n\nDeputy Head of Investment Banking Unit (Real Estate Finance Dept.)\n\n## Atsuhiko Inoue\n\nOsaka Corporate Banking Division (Osaka Corporate Banking Depts. I, II, and III)", + "recall": 0.9744897959183674, + "true_md": "## Shuichi Kageyama\n\n## Managing Directors\n\n## Ikuhiko Morikawa\n\n## Hidetoshi Furukawa* 2\n\n## Nobuaki Kurumatani\n\n## Katsunori Okubo\n\n## Hiroyuki Iwami\n\n## Yuichiro Ueda\n\n## Masaki Tachibana\n\n## Kohei Hirota\n\n## Yoshimi Miura\n\n## Masahiro Fuchizaki* 2\n\n## Shinichi Hayashida\n\n## Toshimi Tagata\n\n## Atsuhiko Inoue\n\nHead of Corporate Advisory Division\n\nHead of Treasury Unit\n\nHead of Investment Banking Unit\n\nHead of Private Advisory Dept., President of SMFG Card & Credit, Inc.\n\n## Seiichiro Takahashi* 2\n\nPublic Relations Dept., Corporate Planning Dept.\n\nDeputy Head of International Banking Unit, Middle Market Banking Unit, Corporate Banking Unit, Global Advisory Dept., Chairman of Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation (China) Limited\n\nHead of Europe Division President of Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation Europe Limited\n\nDeputy Head of Middle Market Banking Unit (Credit Dept. I)\n\nHead of The Americas Division\n\nDeputy Head of Middle Market Banking Unit (in charge of West Japan)\n\nTokyo Corporate Banking Division (Tokyo Corporate Banking Depts. I, II, and V)\n\nIT Planning Dept., IT Business Strategy Planning Dept., Operations Planning Dept., Operations Support Dept., Director of The Japan Research Institute, Limited\n\nDeputy Head of International Banking Unit (Credit Depts., Americas Division and Europe Division, Asia Credit Dept., Credit Management Dept.)\n\nDeputy Head of Investment Banking Unit (Real Estate Finance Dept.)\n\nOsaka Corporate Banking Division (Osaka Corporate Banking Depts. I, II, and III)\n\nCorporate Auditor (outside)\n\nCorporate Auditor (outside)\n\nCorporate Auditor (outside)\n\nCorporate Auditor\n\nLocated at Osaka (in charge of West Japan)\n\n## EXECUTIVE OFFICERS\n\n## Jun Mizoguchi\n\n## Satoshi Ito\n\n## Ikuo Uno\n\n## Hiroshi Araki\n\n*$^{1 }$Executive Officers *$^{2 }$Authorized Management Committee Members\n\nSumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation \n\n## ■ Board of Directors, Corporate Auditors, and Executive Officers (as of June 30, 2011)\n\n## BOARD OF DIRECTORS\n\n## Chairman of the Board Teisuke Kitayama\n\n## Director Koichi Miyata\n\n## Deputy Presidents Keiichi Ando* 1\n\n## President and CEO Takeshi Kunibe* 1\n\n## Tetsuya Kubo*$^{1 }$* 2\n\n## Satoru Nakanishi*$^{1 }$* 2\n\n## Kazuya Jono*$^{1 }$* 2\n\nPublic Relations Dept., Corporate Planning Dept., Financial Accounting Dept., Subsidiaries & Affiliates Dept.\n\nHead of Consumer Banking Unit\n\n## Senior Managing Directors\n\n## Yoshihiko Shimizu*$^{1 }$* 2\n\nRisk Management Unit (Corporate Risk Management Dept., Credit & Investment Planning Dept.)\n\nHead of Middle Market Banking Unit Global Advisory Dept.\n\nHead of International Banking Unit\n\nCorporate Research Dept., Credit Administration Dept. Deputy Head of Corporate Banking Unit (Credit Dept.) and Investment Banking Unit (Structured Finance Credit Dept., Trust Services Dept.)\n\n## Hiroshi Minoura*$^{1 }$* 2\n\n## Koichi Minami*$^{1 }$* 2\n\nInternal Audit Dept., Credit Review Dept., Human Resources Dept., Human Resources Development Dept.\n\nHead of Corporate Banking Unit, Global Advisory Dept.\n\n## Koichi Danno*$^{1 }$* 2\n\n## Mitsunori Watanabe*$^{1 }$* 2\n\n## Managing Director\n\n## Yujiro Ito*$^{1 }$* 2\n\n## Directors (outside)\n\n## Shigeru Iwamoto\n\n## Yoshinori Yokoyama\n\n## Kuniaki Nomura\n\nHuman Resources Dept., Human Resources Development Dept., Quality Management Dept., General Affairs Dept., Legal Dept., Administrative Services Dept.\n\nCorporate Auditor\n\nCorporate Auditor\n\nSMFG 2011 212\n\n## CORPORATE AUDITORS\n\n## Hiroki Yaze\n\n## Yasuyuki Hayase" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8010629788359697, + "doc_id": "1304992f47b92d4f7e6ac688d8311a73889fd60b4a70e21ad57426e59cf225f8", + "edit_distance": 0.18705035971223022, + "f1_score": 0.9848484848484849, + "meteor": 0.8468855423857359, + "precision": 0.9923664122137404, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 25 - ISSUED CAPITAL continued\n\n## d) Restricted Share Units on Issue\n\nDetails of the restricted share units outstanding as at 31 December:\n\n## e) Capital Management\n\nManagement controls the capital of the Group in order to maintain an appropriate debt to equity ratio, provide the shareholders with adequate returns and ensure that the Group can fund its operations and continue as a going concern.\n\nThe Group's debt and capital includes ordinary share capital and financial liabilities, supported by financial assets. Other than the covenants described in Note 21, the Group has no externally imposed capital requirements.\n\nManagement effectively manages the Group's capital by assessing the Group's financial risks and adjusting its capital structure in response to changes in these risks and in the market. These responses include the management of debt levels, distributions to shareholders and shareholder issues.\n\nThere have been no changes in the strategy adopted by management to control the capital of the Group since the prior period. The strategy is to ensure that the Group's gearing ratio remains minimal. As at 31 December 2014 and 2013, the Company had $128.8 million and $29.1 million of outstanding debt, net of deferred financing fees, respectively.\n\n- 90 -", + "recall": 0.9774436090225563, + "true_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 25 – ISSUED CAPITAL continued\n\n## d) Restricted Share Units on Issue Details of the restricted share units outstanding as at 31 December:\n\nRestricted Share Units on Issue Details of the restricted share units outstanding as at 31 December: \n\n## e) Capital Management Management controls the capital of the Group in order to maintain an appropriate debt to equity ratio,\n\n- 90 - \n\nCapital Management Management controls the capital of the Group in order to maintain an appropriate debt to equity ratio, provide the shareholders with adequate returns and ensure that the Group can fund its operations and continue as a going concern. \n\nThe Group’s debt and capital includes ordinary share capital and financial liabilities, supported by financial assets. Other than the covenants described in Note 21, the Group has no externally imposed capital requirements. \n\nManagement effectively manages the Group’s capital by assessing the Group’s financial risks and adjusting its capital structure in response to changes in these risks and in the market. These responses include the management of debt levels, distributions to shareholders and shareholder issues. \n\nThere have been no changes in the strategy adopted by management to control the capital of the Group since the prior period. The strategy is to ensure that the Group’s gearing ratio remains minimal. As at 31 December 2014 and 2013, the Company had $128.8 million and $29.1 million of outstanding debt, net of deferred financing fees, respectively." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9681757643892106, + "doc_id": "493a9f75b3935cf6c6752669074dd2509c6c07106092d8080da1e6148bff48fb", + "edit_distance": 0.8995633187772926, + "f1_score": 0.9892229154849688, + "meteor": 0.873049413542257, + "precision": 0.9886621315192744, + "pred_md": "Danny Games\n\nFelipe Garcia\n\nMelissa Gardner\n\nBilly Gary\n\nDon Gatewood\n\nTodd Gatewood\n\nBill Gee\n\nMatthew Gelnar\n\nJoseph Genovese Jr.\n\nMarissa Gibbs\n\nChristi Gibson\n\nJonathan Gill\n\nEric Gillespie\n\nBrian Gilliam\n\nDaniel Gilmore\n\nDavid Gilmore\n\nShane Glassey\n\nBarry Gober\n\nNeva Godwin\n\nAmy Gonzales\n\nAlfonso Gonzalez Jr.\n\nFrancisco Gonzalez\n\nHector Gonzalez Jr.\n\nBill Goode\n\nCarl Goodnight\n\nDavid Gordon\n\nAshlynn Gosnell\n\nCody Goss\n\nJacob Grafa\n\nZach Gragg\n\nDavid Graham\n\nJane Graham\n\nTim Graham\n\nLee Grampp\n\nKenneth C. Graves\n\nKevin Graves\n\nD'Angelo Gray\n\nKevin Gray\n\nTyler Gray\n\nMarcus A. Green\n\nRandy W. Green\n\nRichard Green\n\nCara Greenhaw\n\nBruce Griffin\n\nDevyn Griffin\n\nBrooke Grossman\n\nDave Grumieaux\n\nRoy Guerra\n\nBrianne Gungoll\n\nDonald Gunnoe II\n\nGilbert Gutierrez Jr.\n\nJose R. Gutierrez\n\nSummer Gwinn\n\nCharles Gerlich\n\nTimothy Haack\n\nGreg Haddock\n\nClarence Hadley\n\nJosh Halbert\n\nLindsay Hale\n\nTrey Hale\n\nRob Hall\n\nRobert Ham\n\nZaid Hamdokh\n\nJeremy Hamill\n\nErin Hamilton\n\nHeather Hamilton\n\nWeston Hamilton\n\nCarolyn Hancock\n\nMelanie Harless\n\nMichael Harman\n\nCharlie Harrington\n\nAaron Harris\n\nAmy Harris\n\nJeff A. Harris\n\nJohn Harris\n\nMichael Harris\n\nMark E. Harrison\n\nDaniel Hart\n\nDavid Hart\n\nDavid Hatton\n\nJerry Hausman\n\nShane Hayden\n\nCharles Hayes\n\nKelly Hayes\n\nPatrick Hayes\n\nStephanie Hayes\n\nDoug Haymaker\n\nMike Haynes\n\nDustin Hays\n\nSara Hays\n\nThomas Hays\n\nTyler Hays\n\nJames Head\n\nGary Heinen\n\nLindsey Heintz\n\nChristopher Heiskill\n\nKelly Helm\n\nKim Helvey\n\nRob Hembree\n\nKim Henderson Kristi Henderson\n\nTJ Henderson II\n\nDave Henson\n\nAlvaro Hernandez\n\nFrancisco L. Hernandez\n\nMario Hernandez\n\nMarisol Hernandez\n\nRomualdo Hernandez Jr.\n\nJude Herring\n\nRichard Hess\n\nJosh Hicks\n\nWilliam Higginbotham\n\nHillary Higgins\n\nShane Hilliard\n\nAngelo Hilton\n\nWeston Hinton\n\nKeasha Hobbs\n\nCharles Hodges\n\nJoe Hofer\n\nDuston Hoffman\n\nEric Holcomb\n\nDan Holden\n\nAdam Holland\n\nJanice Holloway\n\nAdrianne Holmes\n\nDennis Holmes\n\nDon Holt\n\nKyle Holt\n\nTiffany Hopkins\n\nGreg Hopper\n\nRyan Horn\n\nTim Horne\n\nMatthew Horton\n\nBud Hoselton\n\nNicole Howard\n\nJoe Howell\n\nJohn Howell\n\nRonnie Hubbard\n\nMelissa Huddleston\n\nTara Hudson\n\nBarry Huggins\n\nKeystone Hughes\n\nOmar Huizar\n\nTracy Hulsey\n\nMatthew Humphrey\n\nJoe Hunley\n\nDanny Hunt\n\nSteven Hutchens Jr.\n\nDaniel Hyatt\n\nSteven Hyatt\n\nAngela Ibara\n\nKaty Igarta\n\nGerald Irwin III\n\nErnie Isenhart\n\nKate Ivey\n\nMonsuru Iyanda\n\nAlan Jackson\n\nAngela Jackson\n\nBeverly Jackson\n\nKristine Jackson\n\nLarry Jacobs\n\nCody Jacoway\n\nJeremy James\n\nKen James\n\nTommy Jamison\n\nVictor Jaramillo\n\nStephanie Jaronek\n\nBilly Jeffers\n\nClint Jennings\n\nLi Jett\n\nPablo Jimenez\n\nBilly Johnson\n\nBrenda Johnson\n\nDannie Johnson\n\nJason Johnson\n\nKyle Johnson\n\nKyle R. Johnson\n\nRandell Johnson\n\nStephen Johnson\n\nTyler Johnson\n\nPerry Johnston\n\nAaron Jones\n\nAnne Jones\n\nJeff L. Jones\n\nScott Jones\n\nChad Jongeling\n\nChris Jordan\n\nRigo Juarez\n\nAndy Kapchinske\n\nAndrew Karber\n\nTiffanie Karber\n\nDoug Kathol\n\nRita Keary\n\nBradley Keech\n\nClayton Keenan\n\nBill Keller\n\nKim Keller\n\nAmber Kelley\n\nJason Kelley\n\nPamela Kerr\n\nFreddie King Jr.\n\nLanney King\n\nNelson King\n\nRyan Kintner\n\nDayna Kirk\n\nDale Kisner\n\nRobert Kitchens\n\nKasey Kliewer\n\nRobert Kline\n\nMark Knight\n\nTiffany Kordic\n\nMichael Koss\n\nAllison Krittenbrink\n\nRyan Krittenbrink\n\nDan Kucab\n\nMiranda Lacey\n\nSteve Ladner\n\nMiranda Lair\n\nTodd Lamb\n\nKelly Lamoreaux\n\nMindy Lamprich\n\nClay Lancon\n\nNikki Landsberger\n\nLaura Lanford\n\nDustin Langley\n\nAbel Lara\n\nLindel Larison Jr.\n\nToby Lattea\n\nEugene Lauricella\n\nAndy Lawrence\n\nWallace Lawrence\n\nCheryl Lawson\n\nToni Lawson\n\nLuke Lawver\n\nReagan Lea\n\nGreg Ledbetter\n\nMelissa Lee\n\nTony Lee\n\nWarren Lee\n\nJeremy Leger\n\nBranden Lehoski\n\nTim Leierer\n\nDan Leiphart\n\nLogan Lemley\n\nLuis Lerma\n\nChrista Levescy\n\nChelsea Lewis\n\nGreg Lewis\n\nStacey Lewis\n\nJohn Libhart\n\nChuck Lilly\n\nLaura Linn\n\nCory Listen\n\nJeremy Litton\n\nBrian Lockart\n\nNicole Logsdon\n\nAngie Lohner\n\nEthel Long\n\nJames Long\n\nAlfred Loper\n\nJavier Lopez\n\nEric Loudenslager\n\nT.D. Louis\n\nShirley Lovelady\n\nBrandon Lovell\n\nMichael Lovell\n\nLu Lovett-Voss\n\nBenjamin Lucas Jr.\n\nDustin Lucas\n\nShane Luckett\n\nGerardo Lugo\n\nMatthew Luna\n\nRichard Luss\n\nDavid Lynch\n\nPenny Macias\n\nColeen Magness\n\nRhonda Maguire\n\nCharlie Malcolm\n\nJohn Manes\n\nKarissa Mann\n\nTerry Mann\n\nMark Manos\n\nChris Marble\n\nShawn Maricelli\n\nKeith Marin\n\nTravis Marker\n\nLeeAnn Marley\n\nSteve Marple\n\nJamie Marriott\n\nRebecca Marshall\n\nPaul Marti Jr.\n\nAbel Martinez IV\n\nJoe M. Martinez\n\nArmando\n\nMartinez-Barrera\n\nOscar Martinez-Barrera\n\nLaura Martini\n\nDavid Masiker\n\nJames Mason\n\nRyan Mason\n\nSteve Mason\n\nJohn Masterson\n\nDarrick Matthews\n\nBobby Mattice\n\nPeggy Maxell\n\nJoseph May\n\nBenjamin Mayer\n\nAnthony Maze\n\nChristopher McAlvain\n\nHarold McArthur\n\nMichael McCann\n\nMichael McClanahan\n\nJosh McClary\n\nJosh McCollom\n\nRandy McCollum\n\nElizabeth McCormick\n\nJay McCormick\n\nWayne McCormick\n\nLarry McCoy\n\nFadoua McCray\n\nJoshua McCray\n\nRobert McCue\n\nJohn McCullough\n\nMichael McDaniel\n\nMiles McDaniel\n\nRobert McDaniel\n\nDustin McDaugale\n\nDebby McElreath\n\nJon McEntire\n\nCharles McFarland\n\nJulie McGill\n\nJP McGinley\n\nBilly McKamie\n\nJake McKeever\n\nMark McKelvey\n\nChristopher McKown\n\nStuart McLain\n\nJim McLaughlin\n\nRandy McLaughlin Jr.\n\nJonathan McLendon\n\nJohn McLeod\n\nDon McMahon\n\nTerry McMinn\n\nTyrel McNatt\n\nNathan McRae\n\nJosh McWhirter\n\nRobert Mecom\n\nMichael Medcalf\n\nSalvador Medina\n\nJessica Meek\n\nLindsey Melott\n\nJoe Melton\n\nChasta Mercer\n\nRenea Merchant\n\nJames Merrell\n\nDavid Messer\n\nJennifer Messer\n\nRenee Metcalf\n\nMegan Meyer\n\nJonice Meziere\n\nJody Mikles\n\nLynn Miler\n\nAnna Milledge\n\nJohn Miller\n\nJulie Miller\n\nMarc Miller\n\nMaurey Miller\n\nRodney Miller\n\nJames Mills Jr.\n\nBrad Minick\n\nGregg Miranda\n\nMike Miranda\n\nDexter Mitchell\n\nKenneth Mooney\n\nAdam Moore\n\nAndrew Moore\n\nRon Moore\n\nScotty Moore\n\nCarl Mootz\n\nBilly Moran\n\nCoby Moran\n\nRoger Moreau\n\nMichael Morey\n\nGrant Morgan\n\nHeather Morgan\n\nJohn Morozuk\n\nChad Morris\n\nJared Morris\n\nMelinda Morris\n\nSteve Morris\n\nJean Mort\n\nDon Mosher\n\nSteve Mossor\n\nRichard Mullican\n\nDaniel Muncy\n\nRon Munyon\n\nMatt Murphy\n\nAngie Murray\n\nChris Murray\n\nJason Murray\n\nLaura Murray\n\nRyan Murray\n\nLee Mustard\n\nDanny Myers\n\nPatrick Myers\n\nChris Nartey\n\nAlvaro Natividad\n\nDavid Nelson\n\nCathy Nester\n\nBob Newport\n\nCary Newton\n\nSean Nguyen\n\nThomas Nicholson\n\nTodd Nickels\n\nJason Nielsen\n\nTimothy Noland\n\nDerec Norman\n\nTommy Norman\n\nScott Norris\n\nAlvonne Nuall\n\nJennifer Nunn\n\nDenny Nurkiewicz Jr.\n\nChima Nzewunwah\n\nSteven Oakes\n\nJames Ocholik\n\nAndrew Odell\n\nPaige Odell\n\nJames D. Olson\n\nMike Olson\n\nClint Oltmann\n\nChristina Ontiveros\n\nDavid Ortega\n\nDavid Orth\n\nVicki Otey\n\nCraig Overcash\n\nAaron Overturf\n\nJeff Owens\n\nChad O'Brien\n\nJessica O'Daniel\n\nMichael Painter\n\nVictor Palacios\n\nPatrick Parish\n\nGrant Parker\n\nShaphan Parker\n\nRobert Parrie\n\nBenjie Parsons\n\nJeffrey Parsons\n\nJonn Parsons\n\nMatthew Parsons\n\nChip Patton\n\nLaura Patton\n\nMark Patton\n\nCarissa Patzkowsky\n\nAlly Payne\n\nJames Peace\n\nDanny Peach\n\nSeth Pearrow\n\nTom Pearson\n\nTy A. Peck\n\nBrandon Peffer\n\nScott Pegg\n\nMichael Penner\n\nNick Penner\n\nKellie Pennington\n\nFernando Perez\n\nHugo Perez Najera\n\nRichard Perkins\n\nGene Perry\n\nSharla Petty\n\nPhilip Pfister\n\nLisa Phelps\n\nJames Phillips\n\n2010 ANNUAL REPORT |\n\n35\n\nAlyse Reynolds\n\nJoy Reynolds\n\nCraig Rhodes\n\nJames Richards\n\nStan Richards\n\nDrew Richardson\n\nZachary Richardson\n\nVernon Ricketts\n\nChristopher Ricks\n\nBrent Riggs\n\nRandy Riley\n\nKaty Robbins\n\nJustin Roberts\n\nDean Robertson Jr.\n\nAmber Robinson\n\nHeath Robinson\n\nArmando Rocha\n\nDavid Rodgers\n\nAmanda Rodriguez\n\nArt Rodriguez\n\nJuan Rodriguez\n\nJohnny Rodriquez\n\nKeith Senti\n\nRodger Settle\n\nDavid Seyler\n\nHoward Shamblin\n\nCharles Shannon\n\nJohn F. Sharp\n\nLacey Sharp\n\nSharon Sharp\n\nJim Shaw\n\nBrian Shelton\n\nKerri Shelton\n\nPaul Shelton\n\nMatt Sheppard\n\nDavid Shinn Jr.\n\nTaylor Shinn\n\nDavid Shirley Jr.\n\nJosh Shirley\n\nAmber Shockley\n\nRachel Shortt\n\nLarone Siemsen\n\nCorey Simmons\n\nCynthia Simms\n\n## OKLAHOMA CITY, OKLAHOMA Thinking green,\n\n## almost 400 Oklahoma City headquarters employees participate in an employee garden, providing fresh vegetables for themselves and local food banks.\n\nJoseph Pilcher\n\nJonathan Piper\n\nBrad Pipins\n\nClay Pitts\n\nBrian Plum\n\nCarl Poe Jr.\n\nNeal Poindexter\n\nRandy Pons\n\nDennis Pool\n\nEddie Posey\n\nJ.P. Potter\n\nFred Powell\n\nJerry Powell Jr.\n\nTroy Powell\n\nKenneth Prangler Jr.\n\nJudy Pratt\n\nDavid Prenatt\n\nElizabeth Price\n\nAmanda Proctor\n\nAdrian Proudfoot\n\nClint Province\n\nGary Pruett\n\nBarkley Pruitt\n\nElizabeth Prykryl\n\nJohn Pugh III\n\nBrett Purvine\n\nSylvia Quintana\n\nJames Rachal\n\nAdam Rackis\n\nJon Radka\n\nMark Raines\n\nRobert Randolph\n\nGlenda Ratcliffe\n\nClint Ratke\n\nEric Ray\n\nIsmael Real\n\nKen Reardon\n\nRobert Redhat\n\nBrittany Redmond\n\nJerriann Reeder\n\nRobin Reese\n\nJaime Resendiz\n\nGregorio Reyes\n\nMelanie Roe\n\nRichard Rogers\n\nAlan Rogstad\n\nGrant Rohlmeier\n\nClint Roland\n\nCarlos Romo\n\nJeffrey Ronck\n\nJustin Roper\n\nJames Roshto\n\nAchley Ross\n\nDan Ross III\n\nMichael Ross\n\nMichelle Ross\n\nYury Rouba\n\nGreg Rowland\n\nJimmie Rowland\n\nMatt Rucker\n\nRaul Ruiz\n\nClarence Russell II\n\nTim Rutherford\n\nBrian Ryel\n\nJesse Roberts\n\nSteve Salter II\n\nRyan Sanders\n\nWilliam Sanders\n\nKevin Sanderson\n\nRamon Sandoval\n\nChad Satterfield\n\nScott Sayre\n\nBryce Scalf\n\nCody Schaedig\n\nJohn Schieber\n\nChris Schmitz\n\nJohn Schneider\n\nCharles Scholz Jr.\n\nJeff Scoggins\n\nJon Scolamiero\n\nAmanda Scott\n\nGina Scott\n\nJon Scott\n\nJustin Scott\n\nMason Scott\n\nHilary Seagraves\n\nChris Singleton\n\nClay Skoch\n\nKamberly Skoch\n\nJames Slaten\n\nFred Slaughter\n\nLarry Smallwood\n\nPat Smelley\n\nAmy Smith\n\nBryan Smith\n\nClovis Smith\n\nDarrell Smith\n\nJonathan L. Smith\n\nKirk Smith\n\nMichael W. Smith\n\nMonte W. Smith\n\nShane Smith\n\nBoyce Smithson\n\nAnna Snedeker\n\nJason Solley\n\nJane Southard\n\nDouglas Sparks\n\nVictor Spikes\n\nPaul Spoon\n\nChristopher Spratt\n\nChris Sprute\n\nColby Staats\n\nGary Stacy\n\nJoshua Standifer\n\nCarl Standley\n\nJohnny Stanford\n\nTravis Stankorb\n\nTodd Starkey\n\nCharles Steaveson\n\nGreg Steele\n\nBerk Stephens\n\nDarrell Stephens\n\nRodney Stephenson\n\nCarly Stevens\n\nSara Stevens\n\nScott Stevenson\n\nBrian Stewart\n\nRyan Stewart\n\nSteve Still", + "recall": 0.9897843359818388, + "true_md": "2010 ANNUAL REPORT | 35\n\nOKLAHOMA CITY, OKLAHOMA Thinking green, almost 400 Oklahoma City headquarters employees participate in an employee garden, providing fresh vegetables for themselves and local food banks. \n\nChris Singleton Clay Skoch Kamberly Skoch James Slaten Fred Slaughter Larry Smallwood Pat Smelley Amy Smith Bryan Smith Clovis Smith Darrell Smith Jonathan L. Smith Kirk Smith Michael W. Smith Monte W. Smith Shane Smith Boyce Smithson Anna Snedeker Jason Solley Jane Southard Douglas Sparks Victor Spikes Paul Spoon Christopher Spratt Chris Sprute Colby Staats Gary Stacy Joshua Standifer Carl Standley Johnny Stanford Travis Stankorb Todd Starkey Charles Steaveson Greg Steele Berk Stephens Darrell Stephens Rodney Stephenson Carly Stevens Sara Stevens Scott Stevenson Brian Stewart Ryan Stewart Steve Still\n\nMelanie Roe Richard Rogers Alan Rogstad Grant Rohlmeier Clint Roland Carlos Romo Jeffrey Ronck Justin Roper James Roshto Achley Ross Dan Ross III Michael Ross Michelle Ross Yury Rouba Greg Rowland Jimmie Rowland Matt Rucker Raul Ruiz Clarence Russell II Tim Rutherford Brian Ryel Jesse Roberts Steve Salter II Ryan Sanders William Sanders Kevin Sanderson Ramon Sandoval Chad Satterfield Scott Sayre Bryce Scalf Cody Schaedig John Schieber Chris Schmitz John Schneider Charles Scholz Jr. Jeff Scoggins Jon Scolamiero Amanda Scott Gina Scott Jon Scott Justin Scott Mason Scott Hilary Seagraves\n\nJoseph Pilcher Jonathan Piper Brad Pipins Clay Pitts Brian Plum Carl Poe Jr. Neal Poindexter Randy Pons DennisPool Eddie Posey J.P. Potter Fred Powell Jerry Powell Jr. Troy Powell Kenneth Prangler Jr. Judy Pratt David Prenatt Elizabeth Price Amanda Proctor Adrian Proudfoot Clint Province Gary Pruett Barkley Pruitt Elizabeth Prykryl John Pugh III Brett Purvine Sylvia Quintana James Rachal Adam Rackis Jon Radka Mark Raines Robert Randolph Glenda Ratcliffe Clint Ratke Eric Ray Ismael Real Ken Reardon Robert Redhat Brittany Redmond Jerriann Reeder Robin Reese Jaime Resendiz Gregorio Reyes\n\nJody Mikles Lynn Miler Anna Milledge John Miller Julie Miller Marc Miller Maurey Miller Rodney Miller James Mills Jr. Brad Minick Gregg Miranda Mike Miranda Dexter Mitchell KennethMooney Adam Moore Andrew Moore Ron Moore Scotty Moore Carl Mootz Billy Moran Coby Moran Roger Moreau Michael Morey Grant Morgan Heather Morgan John Morozuk Chad Morris Jared Morris Melinda Morris Steve Morris Jean Mort Don Mosher Steve Mossor Richard Mullican Daniel Muncy Ron Munyon Matt Murphy Angie Murray Chris Murray Jason Murray Laura Murray Ryan Murray Lee Mustard Danny Myers Patrick Myers Chris Nartey Alvaro Natividad David Nelson Cathy Nester Bob Newport Cary Newton Sean Nguyen Thomas Nicholson Todd Nickels Jason Nielsen Timothy Noland Derec Norman Tommy Norman Scott Norris Alvonne Nuall Jennifer Nunn Denny Nurkiewicz Jr. Chima Nzewunwah Steven Oakes James Ocholik Andrew Odell Paige Odell James D. Olson Mike Olson Clint Oltmann Christina Ontiveros David Ortega David Orth Vicki Otey Craig Overcash Aaron Overturf Jeff Owens Chad O’Brien Jessica O’Daniel Michael Painter Victor Palacios Patrick Parish Grant Parker Shaphan Parker Robert Parrie Benjie Parsons Jeffrey Parsons Jonn Parsons Matthew Parsons Chip Patton\n\nLaura Patton Mark Patton CarissaPatzkowsky Ally Payne James Peace Danny Peach Seth Pearrow Tom Pearson Ty A. Peck Brandon Peffer Scott Pegg Michael Penner Nick Penner Kellie Pennington Fernando Perez Hugo Perez Najera Richard Perkins Gene Perry Sharla Petty Philip Pfister Lisa Phelps James Phillips\n\nAlyse Reynolds Joy Reynolds Craig Rhodes James Richards Stan Richards Drew Richardson Zachary Richardson Vernon Ricketts Christopher Ricks Brent Riggs Randy Riley Katy Robbins Justin Roberts Dean Robertson Jr. Amber Robinson Heath Robinson Armando Rocha David Rodgers Amanda Rodriguez Art Rodriguez Juan Rodriguez Johnny Rodriquez\n\nKeith Senti Rodger Settle David Seyler Howard Shamblin Charles Shannon John F. Sharp Lacey Sharp Sharon Sharp Jim Shaw Brian Shelton Kerri Shelton Paul Shelton Matt Sheppard David Shinn Jr. Taylor Shinn David Shirley Jr. Josh Shirley Amber Shockley Rachel Shortt Larone Siemsen Corey Simmons Cynthia Simms\n\nGerardo Lugo Matthew Luna Richard Luss David Lynch Penny Macias Coleen Magness Rhonda Maguire Charlie Malcolm John Manes Karissa Mann Terry Mann Mark Manos Chris Marble Shawn Maricelli Keith Marin Travis Marker LeeAnn Marley Steve Marple Jamie Marriott Rebecca Marshall Paul Marti Jr. Abel Martinez IV Joe M. Martinez Armando Martinez-Barrera Oscar Martinez-Barrera Laura Martini David Masiker James Mason Ryan Mason Steve Mason John Masterson Darrick Matthews Bobby Mattice Peggy Maxell Joseph May Benjamin Mayer Anthony Maze Christopher McAlvain Harold McArthur Michael McCann Michael McClanahan Josh McClary Josh McCollom Randy McCollum Elizabeth McCormick Jay McCormick Wayne McCormick Larry McCoy Fadoua McCray Joshua McCray Robert McCue John McCullough Michael McDaniel Miles McDaniel Robert McDaniel Dustin McDaugale Debby McElreath Jon McEntire Charles McFarland Julie McGill JP McGinley Billy McKamie Jake McKeever Mark McKelvey Christopher McKown Stuart McLain Jim McLaughlin Randy McLaughlin Jr. Jonathan McLendon John McLeod Don McMahon Terry McMinn Tyrel McNatt Nathan McRae Josh McWhirter Robert Mecom Michael Medcalf Salvador Medina Jessica Meek Lindsey Melott Joe Melton Chasta Mercer Renea Merchant James Merrell David Messer Jennifer Messer ReneeMetcalf Megan Meyer Jonice Meziere\n\nPerry Johnston Aaron Jones Anne Jones Jeff L. Jones Scott Jones Chad Jongeling Chris Jordan Rigo Juarez Andy Kapchinske Andrew Karber Tiffanie Karber Doug Kathol Rita Keary Bradley Keech Clayton Keenan Bill Keller Kim Keller Amber Kelley Jason Kelley Pamela Kerr Freddie King Jr. Lanney King Nelson King Ryan Kintner Dayna Kirk Dale Kisner Robert Kitchens Kasey Kliewer Robert Kline Mark Knight Tiffany Kordic Michael Koss Allison Krittenbrink Ryan Krittenbrink Dan Kucab Miranda Lacey Steve Ladner Miranda Lair Todd Lamb Kelly Lamoreaux Mindy Lamprich Clay Lancon Nikki Landsberger Laura Lanford Dustin Langley Abel Lara Lindel Larison Jr. Toby Lattea Eugene Lauricella Andy Lawrence Wallace Lawrence Cheryl Lawson Toni Lawson Luke Lawver Reagan Lea Greg Ledbetter Melissa Lee Tony Lee Warren Lee Jeremy Leger Branden Lehoski Tim Leierer Dan Leiphart Logan Lemley Luis Lerma Christa Levescy Chelsea Lewis Greg Lewis Stacey Lewis John Libhart Chuck Lilly Laura Linn Cory Listen Jeremy Litton Brian Lockart Nicole Logsdon Angie Lohner Ethel Long James Long Alfred Loper Javier Lopez Eric Loudenslager T.D. Louis Shirley Lovelady Brandon Lovell Michael Lovell Lu Lovett-Voss Benjamin Lucas Jr. Dustin Lucas Shane Luckett\n\nThomas Hays Tyler Hays James Head Gary Heinen Lindsey Heintz Christopher Heiskill Kelly Helm Kim Helvey Rob Hembree Kim Henderson Kristi Henderson TJ Henderson II Dave Henson Alvaro Hernandez Francisco L. Hernandez Mario Hernandez Marisol Hernandez Romualdo Hernandez Jr. Jude Herring Richard Hess Josh Hicks William Higginbotham Hillary Higgins Shane Hilliard Angelo Hilton Weston Hinton Keasha Hobbs Charles Hodges Joe Hofer Duston Hoffman Eric Holcomb Dan Holden Adam Holland Janice Holloway Adrianne Holmes Dennis Holmes Don Holt Kyle Holt Tiffany Hopkins Greg Hopper Ryan Horn Tim Horne Matthew Horton Bud Hoselton Nicole Howard Joe Howell John Howell Ronnie Hubbard Melissa Huddleston Tara Hudson Barry Huggins Keystone Hughes Omar Huizar Tracy Hulsey Matthew Humphrey Joe Hunley Danny Hunt Steven Hutchens Jr. Daniel Hyatt Steven Hyatt Angela Ibara Katy Igarta Gerald Irwin III Ernie Isenhart Kate Ivey Monsuru Iyanda Alan Jackson Angela Jackson Beverly Jackson Kristine Jackson Larry Jacobs Cody Jacoway Jeremy James Ken James Tommy Jamison Victor Jaramillo Stephanie Jaronek Billy Jeffers Clint Jennings Li Jett Pablo Jimenez Billy Johnson Brenda Johnson Dannie Johnson Jason Johnson Kyle Johnson Kyle R. Johnson Randell Johnson Stephen Johnson Tyler Johnson\n\nDanny Games Felipe Garcia Melissa Gardner Billy Gary DonGatewood Todd Gatewood Bill Gee Matthew Gelnar Joseph Genovese Jr. Marissa Gibbs Christi Gibson Jonathan Gill Eric Gillespie Brian Gilliam Daniel Gilmore David Gilmore Shane Glassey Barry Gober Neva Godwin Amy Gonzales Alfonso Gonzalez Jr. Francisco Gonzalez Hector Gonzalez Jr. Bill Goode Carl Goodnight David Gordon Ashlynn Gosnell Cody Goss Jacob Grafa Zach Gragg David Graham Jane Graham Tim Graham Lee Grampp Kenneth C. Graves Kevin Graves D’Angelo Gray Kevin Gray Tyler Gray Marcus A. Green Randy W. Green Richard Green Cara Greenhaw Bruce Griffin Devyn Griffin Brooke Grossman Dave Grumieaux Roy Guerra Brianne Gungoll Donald Gunnoe II Gilbert Gutierrez Jr. Jose R. Gutierrez Summer Gwinn Charles Gerlich Timothy Haack Greg Haddock Clarence Hadley Josh Halbert Lindsay Hale Trey Hale Rob Hall Robert Ham Zaid Hamdokh Jeremy Hamill Erin Hamilton Heather Hamilton Weston Hamilton Carolyn Hancock Melanie Harless Michael Harman Charlie Harrington Aaron Harris Amy Harris Jeff A. Harris John Harris Michael Harris Mark E. Harrison Daniel Hart David Hart David Hatton Jerry Hausman Shane Hayden Charles Hayes Kelly Hayes Patrick Hayes Stephanie Hayes Doug Haymaker Mike Haynes Dustin Hays Sara Hays" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8179383809618406, + "doc_id": "bcc69cd3eac120c1b63acd5dae6b413d23b49442a387a5184da07078bdb343e0", + "edit_distance": 0.7734806629834254, + "f1_score": 0.9879518072289156, + "meteor": 0.8165806904238717, + "precision": 0.9919354838709677, + "pred_md": "## Board of Directors and Committees\n\n## Shellye L. Archambeau, 52\n\nChief Executive Officer MetricStream, Inc. Palo Alto, California\n\n## Phyllis J. Campbell, 63\n\nChairman of the Pacific Northwest Region JPMorgan Chase Seattle, Washington\n\n## Michelle M. Ebanks, 53\n\nPresident & Group Publisher\n\nEssence Communications\n\nNew York, New York\n\n## Enrique Hernandez, Jr., 59\n\n## Nominating Committee\n\nNordstrom, Inc. Chairman of the Board\n\nPresident and Chief Executive Officer Inter-Con Security Systems, Inc. Pasadena, California\n\n## Robert G. Miller, 70\n\nChief Executive Officer\n\nAlbertsons LLC\n\nBoise, Idaho\n\n## Blake W. Nordstrom, 54\n\nPresident Nordstrom, Inc.\n\nSeattle, Washington\n\n## Erik B. Nordstrom, 51\n\nExecutive Vice President, President, Nordstrom.com Nordstrom, Inc.\n\nSeattle, Washington\n\nPhilip G. Satre, Chair\n\nEnrique Hernandez, Jr.\n\nRobert D. Walter\n\nAlison A. Winter\n\n## Finance Committee\n\nRobert G. Miller, Chair\n\nPhyllis J. Campbell\n\nMichelle M. Ebanks\n\n## Technology Committee\n\nB. Kevin Turner, Chair Shellye L. Archambeau Michelle M. Ebanks\n\nBrad D. Smith\n\nNordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 81\n\n## Peter E. Nordstrom, 53\n\nExecutive Vice President,\n\nPresident, Merchandising\n\nNordstrom, Inc.\n\nSeattle, Washington\n\n## Philip G. Satre, 65\n\nPrivate Investor\n\nRetired Chief Executive Officer\n\nHarrah's Entertainment, Inc.\n\nReno, Nevada\n\n## Brad D. Smith , 50\n\nPresident and\n\nChief Executive Officer\n\nIntuit Inc.\n\nMountain View, California\n\n## B. Kevin Turner, 49\n\nChief Operating Officer\n\nMicrosoft Corporation\n\nRedmond, Washington\n\n## Robert D. Walter, 69\n\nPrivate Investor Founder and Retired Chairman and Chief Executive Officer Cardinal Health, Inc.\n\nColumbus, Ohio\n\n## Alison A. Winter, 68\n\nChief Executive Officer and Founder Braintree Holdings, LLC Pasadena, California\n\n## Audit Committee\n\nAlison A. Winter, Chair\n\nShellye L. Archambeau\n\nPhyllis J. Campbell\n\nRobert G. Miller\n\nBrad D. Smith\n\n## Compensation Committee\n\nRobert D. Walter, Chair\n\nEnrique Hernandez, Jr.\n\nPhilip G. Satre\n\nB. Kevin Turner\n\n## Corporate Governance and", + "recall": 0.984, + "true_md": "## Board of Directors and Committees\n\nAudit Committee Alison A. Winter, Chair Shellye L. Archambeau Phyllis J. Campbell Robert G. Miller Brad D. Smith\n\nPeter E. Nordstrom, 53 Executive Vice President, President, Merchandising Nordstrom, Inc. Seattle, Washington\n\nShellye L. Archambeau, 52 Chief Executive Officer MetricStream, Inc. Palo Alto, California\n\nPhyllis J. Campbell, 63 Chairman of the Pacific Northwest Region JPMorgan Chase Seattle, Washington\n\nPhilip G. Satre, 65 Private Investor Retired Chief Executive Officer Harrah’s Entertainment, Inc. Reno, Nevada\n\nCompensation Committee Robert D. Walter, Chair Enrique Hernandez, Jr. Philip G. Satre B. Kevin Turner\n\nCorporate Governance and Nominating Committee Philip G. Satre, Chair Enrique Hernandez, Jr. Robert D. Walter Alison A. Winter\n\nBrad D. Smith , 50 President and Chief Executive Officer Intuit Inc. Mountain View, California\n\nMichelle M. Ebanks, 53 President & Group Publisher Essence Communications New York, New York\n\nEnrique Hernandez, Jr., 59 Nordstrom, Inc. Chairman of the Board President and Chief Executive Officer Inter-Con Security Systems, Inc. Pasadena, California\n\nB. Kevin Turner, 49 Chief Operating Officer Microsoft Corporation Redmond, Washington\n\nFinance Committee Robert G. Miller, Chair Phyllis J. Campbell Michelle M. Ebanks\n\nTechnology Committee B. Kevin Turner, Chair Shellye L. Archambeau Michelle M. Ebanks Brad D. Smith\n\nRobert D. Walter, 69 Private Investor Founder and Retired Chairman and Chief Executive Officer Cardinal Health, Inc. Columbus, Ohio\n\nRobert G. Miller, 70 Chief Executive Officer Albertsons LLC Boise, Idaho\n\nBlake W. Nordstrom, 54 President Nordstrom, Inc. Seattle, Washington\n\nErik B. Nordstrom, 51 Executive Vice President, President, Nordstrom.com Nordstrom, Inc. Seattle, Washington\n\nAlison A. Winter, 68 Chief Executive Officer and Founder Braintree Holdings, LLC Pasadena, California\n\nNordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 81" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9290874832423885, + "doc_id": "2f9b54f3ea45110638dadb3d2848e4ebee9b6ee8ecdfd5ac6ebe4ca3c6549678", + "edit_distance": 0.5151515151515151, + "f1_score": 0.9870129870129871, + "meteor": 0.8163315309226091, + "precision": 0.987012987012987, + "pred_md": "## Nordstrom, Inc.\n\n## Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nDollar and share amounts in millions except per share, per option and per unit amounts\n\n## NOTE 3: ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE\n\nThe components of accounts receivable are as follows:\n\n1 Other accounts receivable consist primarily of debit card receivables and third-party credit receivables.\n\nOur credit card receivables are restricted under our securitization program. Our Series 2011-1 Class A Notes are secured by 100% of the Nordstrom private label credit card receivables and 90% of the Nordstrom Visa credit card receivables. As of January 31, 2015 and February 1, 2014, our restricted credit card receivables included more receivables than necessary to collateralize our outstanding secured debt and variable funding facilities. As such, they can be utilized to increase the current usage of our securitization program. Our credit card securitization agreements set a maximum percentage of receivables that can be associated with various receivable categories, such as employee or foreign receivables, and as of January 31, 2015 and February 1, 2014, these maximums were not exceeded.\n\nActivity in the allowance for credit losses is as follows:\n\nUnder certain circumstances, we may make modifications to payment terms for a customer experiencing financial difficulties in an effort to help the customer avoid a charge-off or bankruptcy and to maximize our recovery of the outstanding balance. These modifications, which meet the accounting definition of troubled debt restructurings ('TDRs'), include reduced or waived fees and finance charges, and/or reduced minimum payments. Receivables classified as TDRs are as follows:\n\n48", + "recall": 0.987012987012987, + "true_md": "Nordstrom, Inc. Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements Dollar and share amounts in millions except per share, per option and per unit amounts\n\n## NOTE 3: ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE The components of accounts receivable are as follows:\n\n48\n\nUnder certain circumstances, we may make modifications to payment terms for a customer experiencing financial difficulties in an effort to help the customer avoid a charge-off or bankruptcy and to maximize our recovery of the outstanding balance. These modifications, which meet the accounting definition of troubled debt restructurings (“TDRs”), include reduced or waived fees and finance charges, and/or reduced minimum payments. Receivables classified as TDRs are as follows:\n\nOur credit card receivables are restricted under our securitization program. Our Series 2011-1 Class A Notes are secured by 100% of the Nordstrom private label credit card receivables and 90% of the Nordstrom Visa credit card receivables. As of January 31, 2015 and February 1, 2014, our restricted credit card receivables included more receivables than necessary to collateralize our outstanding secured debt and variable funding facilities. As such, they can be utilized to increase the current usage of our securitization program. Our credit card securitization agreements set a maximum percentage of receivables that can be associated with various receivable categories, such as employee or foreign receivables, and as of January 31, 2015 and February 1, 2014, these maximums were not exceeded.\n\nActivity in the allowance for credit losses is as follows:\n\n1 Other accounts receivable consist primarily of debit card receivables and third-party credit receivables.\n\nNOTE 3: ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE The components of accounts receivable are as follows:" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9735225966857362, + "doc_id": "f4d81deda24e389a533d378b67d8a484dee5be41c4191ed68cd80b3afc97ef68", + "edit_distance": 0.41904761904761906, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.8995320699708454, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n1 The terms of our accounts receivable securitization program are committed until it expires on December 31, 2015.\n\n2 Represents Canadian dollar equivalent amount of US dollar inflows matched to an equal amount of US dollar maturities in long-term debt for Debt Derivatives.\n\nThe tables below shows net interest payments over the life of the long-term debt, including the impact of the associated Debt Derivatives as at December 31, 2013 and 2012:\n\n## Market Risk\n\nMarket risk is the risk that changes in market prices, such as fluctuations in the market prices of our publicly traded investments, our share price, foreign exchange rates and interest rates, will affect our income, cash flows or the value of our financial instruments. The derivative instruments we use to manage this risk are described in note 2.\n\n## Publicly Traded Investments\n\nWe manage risk related to fluctuations in the market prices of our investments in publicly traded companies by regularly reviewing publicly available information related to these investments to ensure that any risks are within our established levels of risk tolerance. We do not routinely engage in risk management practices such as hedging, derivatives or short selling with respect to our publicly traded investments.\n\nAt December 31, 2013, a $1 change in the market price per share of our publicly traded investments would have resulted in a $14 million change in our other comprehensive income, net of income taxes of $2 million.\n\n## Stock-Based Compensation\n\nOur liability related to stock-based compensation is marked-to-market each period. Stock-based compensation expense is affected by the change in the price of our Class B Non-Voting shares during the life of an award, including SARs, RSUs and DSUs. We use Equity Derivatives from time to time to manage our exposure in our stock-based compensation expense.\n\n114\n\nROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\nAt December 31, 2013, a $1 change in the market price of our Class B Non-Voting shares would not have any impact on net income or other comprehensive income, including the impact related to our Equity Derivatives.\n\n## Foreign Exchange and Interest Rates\n\nWe use Debt Derivatives to manage risks from fluctuations in foreign exchange and interest rates associated with our US dollar denominated debt instruments, designating the derivatives as hedges of specific debt instruments for economic and accounting purposes. We use Expenditure Derivatives to manage the foreign exchange risk in our operations, designating them as hedges for certain of our operational and capital expenditures.\n\nAt December 31, 2013, all of our outstanding long-term debt was at fixed interest rates and all of our US dollar-denominated long-term debt was hedged against fluctuations in foreign exchange rates using Debt Derivatives. As a result, with respect to the long-term debt and Debt Derivatives, a one cent change in the Canadian dollar relative to the US dollar would have no effect on net income.\n\nA one cent change in the Canadian dollar relative to the US dollar would have resulted in no impact to net income and a $7 million change, net of income taxes of $2 million, in other comprehensive income for the year ended December 31, 2013 related to our Expenditure Derivatives.\n\nA portion of our accounts receivable and accounts payable and accrued liabilities is denominated in US dollars. Due to the short-term nature of these receivables and payables, there is no significant market risk from fluctuations in foreign exchange rates as at December 31, 2013.", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n1 The terms of our accounts receivable securitization program are committed until it expires on December 31, 2015.\n\n2 Represents Canadian dollar equivalent amount of US dollar inflows matched to an equal amount of US dollar maturities in long-term debt for Debt Derivatives.\n\nThe tables below shows net interest payments over the life of the long-term debt, including the impact of the associated Debt Derivatives as at December 31, 2013 and 2012:\n\nMarket risk is the risk that changes in market prices, such as fluctuations in the market prices of our publicly traded investments, our share price, foreign exchange rates and interest rates, will affect our income, cash flows or the value of our financial instruments. The derivative instruments we use to manage this risk are described in note 2.\n\nAt December 31, 2013, a $1 change in the market price of our Class B Non-Voting shares would not have any impact on net income or other comprehensive income, including the impact related to our Equity Derivatives.\n\nWe manage risk related to fluctuations in the market prices of our investments in publicly traded companies by regularly reviewing publicly available information related to these investments to ensure that any risks are within our established levels of risk tolerance. We do not routinely engage in risk management practices such as hedging, derivatives or short selling with respect to our publicly traded investments.\n\nAt December 31, 2013, a $1 change in the market price per share of our publicly traded investments would have resulted in a $14 million change in our other comprehensive income, net of income taxes of $2 million.\n\nOur liability related to stock-based compensation is marked-to-market each period. Stock-based compensation expense is affected by the change in the price of our Class B Non-Voting shares during the life of an award, including SARs, RSUs and DSUs. We use Equity Derivatives from time to time to manage our exposure in our stock-based compensation expense.\n\nA portion of our accounts receivable and accounts payable and accrued liabilities is denominated in US dollars. Due to the short-term nature of these receivables and payables, there is no significant market risk from fluctuations in foreign exchange rates as at December 31, 2013.\n\nA one cent change in the Canadian dollar relative to the US dollar would have resulted in no impact to net income and a $7 million change, net of income taxes of $2 million, in other comprehensive income for the year ended December 31, 2013 related to our Expenditure Derivatives.\n\nAt December 31, 2013, all of our outstanding long-term debt was at fixed interest rates and all of our US dollar-denominated long-term debt was hedged against fluctuations in foreign exchange rates using Debt Derivatives. As a result, with respect to the long-term debt and Debt Derivatives, a one cent change in the Canadian dollar relative to the US dollar would have no effect on net income.\n\nWe use Debt Derivatives to manage risks from fluctuations in foreign exchange and interest rates associated with our US dollar denominated debt instruments, designating the derivatives as hedges of specific debt instruments for economic and accounting purposes. We use Expenditure Derivatives to manage the foreign exchange risk in our operations, designating them as hedges for certain of our operational and capital expenditures.\n\n114 ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n## Stock-Based Compensation\n\n## Publicly Traded Investments\n\n## Foreign Exchange and Interest Rates\n\n## Market Risk" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9598051624342109, + "doc_id": "be19d7526e77c6eba0de45c5abf0d42f3be4a07d3e6cc9a908139fae27919b58", + "edit_distance": 0.11670020120724346, + "f1_score": 0.9868995633187772, + "meteor": 0.9877382853683171, + "precision": 0.9868995633187773, + "pred_md": "Capital Ratio Information\n\nSMFG\n\n## C. Netting of Loans against Deposits\n\nSMBC verifies the legal effectiveness of netting arrangements for loans and deposits for each transaction. Specifically, lending transactions subject to the netting of loans against deposits are stipulated in the 'Agreement on Bank Transactions,' and fixed-term deposits that have fixed maturity dates and cannot be transferred to third-party entities are subject to netting. Regarding deposits with us submitted as collateral, their effect as credit risk mitigation is taken into account under the eligible financial collateral framework described in A. above.\n\nFurther, maturity dates and balances (including the post-netting situation) are monitored for subject loans and deposits in accordance with the Notification. When there is a maturity/currency mismatch, netting is executed after making adjustments as stipulated in the Notification, and the credit risk-weighted asset amount is calculated after netting.\n\n## (2) Concentration of Credit Risk and Market Risk Accompanying Application of Credit Risk Mitigation Techniques\n\nAt SMBC, there is a framework in place for controlling concentration of risk in obligors with large exposures which includes credit limit\n\nguidelines, risk concentration monitoring, and reporting to the Credit Risk Committee (please refer to page 34). Further, exposures to these obligors are monitored on a group basis, taking into account risk concentration in their parent companies in cases of guaranteed exposures.\n\nWhen marketable financial products (for example, credit derivatives) are used as credit risk mitigants, market risk generated by these products is controlled by setting upper limits.\n\n## 2. Exposure Balance after CRM\n\n## ■ Derivative Transactions and Long Settlement Transactions\n\n## 1. Risk Management Policy and Procedures\n\n## (1) Policy on Collateral Security and Impact of Deterioration of Our Credit Quality\n\nCollateralized derivative is a CRM technique in which collateral is delivered or received regularly in accordance with replacement cost. The Group conducts collateralized derivative transactions as necessary, thereby reducing credit risk. In the event our credit quality deteriorates, however, the counterparty may demand additional collateral, but its impact is deemed to be insignificant.\n\n## (2) Netting\n\nNetting is another CRM technique, and 'close-out netting' is the main type of netting. In close-out netting, when a default event, such as bankruptcy, occurs to the counterparty, all claims against, and obligations to, the counterparty, regardless of maturity and currency, are netted out to create a single claim or obligation.\n\nClose-out netting is applied to foreign exchange and swap transactions covered under a master agreement with a net-out clause or other means of securing legal effectiveness, and the effect of CRM is taken into account only for such claims and obligations.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n191", + "recall": 0.9868995633187773, + "true_md": "SMFG Capital Ratio Information\n\n## C. Netting of Loans against Deposits\n\n## (2) Concentration of Credit Risk and Market Risk Accompanying Application of Credit Risk Mitigation Techniques\n\nSMBC verifies the legal effectiveness of netting arrangements for loans and deposits for each transaction. Specifically, lending transactions subject to the netting of loans against deposits are stipulated in the “Agreement on Bank Transactions,” and fixed-term deposits that have fixed maturity dates and cannot be transferred to third-party entities are subject to netting. Regarding deposits with us submitted as collateral, their effect as credit risk mitigation is taken into account under the eligible financial collateral framework described in A. above.\n\nFurther, maturity dates and balances (including the post-netting situation) are monitored for subject loans and deposits in accordance with the Notification. When there is a maturity/currency mismatch, netting is executed after making adjustments as stipulated in the Notification, and the credit risk-weighted asset amount is calculated after netting. \n\nAt SMBC, there is a framework in place for controlling concentration of risk in obligors with large exposures which includes credit limit guidelines, risk concentration monitoring, and reporting to the Credit Risk Committee (please refer to page 34). Further, exposures to these obligors are monitored on a group basis, taking into account risk concentration in their parent companies in cases of guaranteed exposures.\n\nWhen marketable financial products (for example, credit derivatives) are used as credit risk mitigants, market risk generated by these products is controlled by setting upper limits.\n\n## 2. Exposure Balance after CRM\n\n## ■ Derivative Transactions and Long Settlement Transactions\n\n## 1. Risk Management Policy and Procedures\n\n## (1) Policy on Collateral Security and Impact of Deterioration of Our Credit Quality\n\n## (2) Netting\n\nCollateralized derivative is a CRM technique in which collateral is delivered or received regularly in accordance with replacement cost. The Group conducts collateralized derivative transactions as necessary, thereby reducing credit risk. In the event our credit quality deteriorates, however, the counterparty may demand additional collateral, but its impact is deemed to be insignificant.\n\nNetting is another CRM technique, and “close-out netting” is the main type of netting. In close-out netting, when a default event, such as bankruptcy, occurs to the counterparty, all claims against, and obligations to, the counterparty, regardless of maturity and currency, are netted out to create a single claim or obligation. \n\nClose-out netting is applied to foreign exchange and swap transactions covered under a master agreement with a net-out clause or other means of securing legal effectiveness, and the effect of CRM is taken into account only for such claims and obligations.\n\nSMFG 2011 191" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9104694180870485, + "doc_id": "30c0c1ca968ae647403779967a86f4f9d4fe8933ca32e9b9e98671c6c6367f79", + "edit_distance": 0.25736434108527134, + "f1_score": 0.9508196721311474, + "meteor": 0.9470497322741653, + "precision": 0.9666666666666667, + "pred_md": "## Strong Partners\n\nOver the past few years, in addition to gathering the industry's best assets, Chesapeake has also built the industry's finest collection of global energy partners and energy stock investors. We have now entered into transactions with PXP , BP , Statoil, Total, CNOOC and BHP Billiton. Collec tively, we have sold these companies certain assets for total consideration of $20.5 billion in the form of cash and drilling and completion carries for which our net cost was only $6.1 billion resulting in overall value creation of $14.4 billion. While these transactions have been very\n\nrewarding to our buyers, they have been truly outstanding for Chesapeake, providing us an attractive source of capital, a reduction of risk, a quick recovery of our leasehold investment in new plays and a much greater ability to capture a large resource base with decades of highly profitable drilling opportunities.\n\nIn addition, we are the only U.S. E&P company that has attracted to its stock ownership roster some of the world's leading governmentsponsored investors: Temasek Holdings (Singapore), China Investment Corporation, Korea Investment Corporation and Abu Dhabi Investment Authority. Along with our largest shareholder, Memphis, Tennesseebased Southeastern Asset Management (12%), these shareholders are some of the world's largest and most astute investors, and who also\n\n2010 ANNUAL REPORT |\n\n5\n\nhappen to manage some of the world's largest pools of capital and have a very long-term investment horizon. Their support is an important validation of our strategy.\n\n## Short-Term Pain for Long-Term Gain\n\nDespite this all-star lineup of global partners and investors, some other investors have not yet fully recognized the benefits of our industry leadership in acquiring unconventional natural gas and liquids assets. Whether it was our leveraged balance sheet during recent tough recessionary times, our heavy focus on natural gas during a time of persistent market pessimism about natural gas prices or our large capital investments in undeveloped liquids-rich leasehold undertaken to enable Chesapeake to remain an industry leader in the years ahead, it is clear\n\nThrough a wide variety of transactions, including several led by Chesapeake, the global energy industry made it clear that the assets owned by Chesapeake and some of its peers are the most attractive in the world.\n\n<< Aubrey K. McClendon, Co-Founder, Chairman and Chief Executive Officer\n\nthat we were less popular in the stock market in 2010 than we were in 2009, when our stock price increased by 60%.\n\nWe anticipated that some market unpopularity in 2010 would likely be the price we would pay as we positioned Chesapeake to be the leader not only in unconventional U.S. natural gas, but also in unconventional U.S. liquids. However, now that we have largely completed the investments needed to accomplish this transition to a portfolio balanced with liquids, the rebound in our stock price could be sharp as investors begin to focus more clearly on Chesapeake's three-way transition from an asset gatherer to an asset harvester, from less natural gas exposure to more liquids exposure and from a leveraged balance sheet to one worthy of an investment grade rating.\n\nAccordingly, in early January 2011, we announced our '25/25 Plan,' a two-year plan designed to reduce our long-term debt by 25% while still growing the company's production by 25%. We designed this plan to articulate very clearly the benefits of becoming an asset harvester", + "recall": 0.9354838709677419, + "true_md": "Over the past few years, in addition to gathering the industry’s best assets, Chesapeake has also built the industry’s finest collection of global energy partners and energy stock investors. We have now entered into transactions with PXP, BP, Statoil, Total, CNOOC and BHP Billiton. Collec- tively, we have sold these companies certain assets for total consider- ation of $20.5 billion in the form of cash and drilling and completion carries for which our net cost was only $6.1 billion resulting in overall value creation of $14.4 billion. While these transactions have been very\n\nrewarding to our buyers, they have been truly outstanding for Chesapeake, providing us an attractive source of capital, a reduction of risk, a quick recovery of our leasehold investment in new plays and a much greater ability to capture a large resource base with decades of highly profitable drilling opportunities.\n\nIn addition, we are the only U.S. E&P company that has attracted to its stock ownership roster some of the world’s leading government- sponsored investors: Temasek Holdings (Singapore), China Investment Corporation, Korea Investment Corporation and Abu Dhabi Investment Authority. Along with our largest shareholder, Memphis, Tennessee- based Southeastern Asset Management (12%), these shareholders are some of the world’s largest and most astute investors, and who also \n\n2010 ANNUAL REPORT | 5\n\nhappen to manage some of the world’s largest pools of capital and have a very long-term investment horizon. Their support is an important validation of our strategy. \n\nDespite this all-star lineup of global partners and investors, some other investors have not yet fully recognized the benefits of our industry leadership in acquiring unconventional natural gas and liquids assets. Whether it was our leveraged balance sheet during recent tough reces- sionary times, our heavy focus on natural gas during a time of persistent market pessimism about natural gas prices or our large capital invest- ments in undeveloped liquids-rich leasehold undertaken to enable Chesapeake to remain an industry leader in the years ahead, it is clear \n\nthat we were less popular in the stock market in 2010 than we were in 2009, when our stock price increased by 60%. \n\nWe anticipated that some market unpopularity in 2010 would likely be the price we would pay as we positioned Chesapeake to be the leader not only in unconventional U.S. natural gas, but also in unconventional U.S. liquids. However, now that we have largely com- pleted the investments needed to accomplish this transition to a port- folio balanced with liquids, the rebound in our stock price could be sharp as investors begin to focus more clearly on Chesapeake’s three-way transition from an asset gatherer to an asset harvester, from less natural gas exposure to more liquids exposure and from a leveraged balance sheet to one worthy of an investment grade rating. \n\nAccordingly, in early January 2011, we announced our “25/25 Plan,” a two-year plan designed to reduce our long-term debt by 25% while still growing the company’s production by 25%. We designed this plan to articulate very clearly the benefits of becoming an asset harvester \n\nThrough a wide variety of transactions, including several led by Chesapeake, the global energy industry made it clear that the assets owned by Chesapeake and some of its peers are the most attractive in the world.\n\n<< Aubrey K. McClendon, Co-Founder, Chairman and Chief Executive Officer\n\n## Strong Partners\n\n## Short-Term Pain for Long-Term Gain" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8743799105724429, + "doc_id": "f5b3bc3aa8a084ef0c290d60d3d52fff6ce6939f7731706e8e200c924f5f1d69", + "edit_distance": 0.6211699164345403, + "f1_score": 0.9551282051282053, + "meteor": 0.7922615759541164, + "precision": 0.9612903225806452, + "pred_md": "Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nSMFG\n\n(f) Change of classification of securities There are no corresponding transactions.\n\n(g) Write-down of securities\n\nSecurities (excluding stocks of subsidiaries and affiliates) with fair value are considered as impaired if the fair value declines materially below the acquisition cost and such decline is not considered as recoverable. In such a case, the fair value is recognized as the balance sheet amount and the amount of write-down is accounted for as valuation loss for the fiscal year. Valuation losses for the fiscal years ended March 31, 2011 and 2010 were ¥109,921 million ($1,322 million) and ¥19,519 million, respectively. The rule for determining 'material decline' is as follows and is based on the classification of issuers under self-assessment of assets.\n\nBankrupt/Effectively bankrupt/Potentially bankrupt issuers:\n\nFair value is lower than acquisition cost.\n\nIssuers requiring caution:\n\nFair value is 30% or more lower than acquisition cost.\n\nNormal issuers:\n\nFair value is 50% or more lower than acquisition cost.\n\nBankrupt issuers: Issuers that are legally bankrupt or formally declared bankrupt.\n\nEffectively bankrupt issuers: Issuers that are not legally bankrupt but regarded as substantially bankrupt.\n\nPotentially bankrupt issuers: Issuers that are not bankrupt now, but are perceived to have a high risk of falling into bankruptcy. Issuers requiring caution: Issuers that are identified for close monitoring.\n\nNormal issuers: Issuers other than the above 4 categories of issuers.\n\n## (2) Money held in trust\n\n(a) Money held in trust classified as trading purposes\n\n## (b) Money held in trust classified as held-to-maturity\n\nThere are no corresponding transactions.\n\n(c) Other money held in trust\n\nNotes: 1. Consolidated balance sheet amount is calculated using market prices at the fiscal year-end.\n\n2. 'Unrealized gains' and 'Unrealized losses' are breakdowns of 'Net unrealized gains (losses)' respectively.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n111", + "recall": 0.9490445859872612, + "true_md": "Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nSMFG\n\n- (f) Change of classification of securities\n\n- (g) Write-down of securities\n\n- (2) Money held in trust\n\n- (a) Money held in trust classified as trading purposes\n\n- (b) Money held in trust classified as held-to-maturity There are no corresponding transactions.\n\n- (c) Other money held in trust\n\nNotes: 1. Consolidated balance sheet amount is calculated using market prices at the fiscal year-end.\n\n2. “Unrealized gains” and “Unrealized losses” are breakdowns of “Net unrealized gains (losses)” respectively.\n\nThere are no corresponding transactions.\n\nSecurities (excluding stocks of subsidiaries and affiliates) with fair value are considered as impaired if the fair value declines materi- ally below the acquisition cost and such decline is not considered as recoverable. In such a case, the fair value is recognized as the balance sheet amount and the amount of write-down is accounted for as valuation loss for the fiscal year. Valuation losses for the fiscal years ended March 31, 2011 and 2010 were ¥109,921 million ($1,322 million) and ¥19,519 million, respectively. The rule for determining “material decline” is as follows and is based on the classification of issuers under self-assessment of assets.\n\nBankrupt issuers: Issuers that are legally bankrupt or formally declared bankrupt.\n\nEffectively bankrupt issuers: Issuers that are not legally bankrupt but regarded as substantially bankrupt.\n\nPotentially bankrupt issuers: Issuers that are not bankrupt now, but are perceived to have a high risk of falling into bankruptcy.\n\nIssuers requiring caution: Issuers that are identified for close monitoring.\n\nNormal issuers: Issuers other than the above 4 categories of issuers.\n\nBankrupt/Effectively bankrupt/Potentially bankrupt issuers: \n\nIssuers requiring caution: \n\nNormal issuers: \n\nFair value is lower than acquisition cost.\n\nFair value is 30% or more lower than acquisition cost.\n\nFair value is 50% or more lower than acquisition cost.\n\nSMFG 2011 111" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8117008959444555, + "doc_id": "acb4ae65f144216506b9632012dfd6ea7153bcbac3c3239831371df9efd3436c", + "edit_distance": 0.31955922865013775, + "f1_score": 0.9867841409691629, + "meteor": 0.7819068919282184, + "precision": 0.9911504424778761, + "pred_md": "## Nordstrom, Inc.\n\n## Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nDollar and share amounts in millions except per share, per option and per unit amounts\n\nA summary of restricted stock unit activity (excluding Trunk Club) for 2014 is presented below:\n\nThe total fair value of restricted stock units vested during 2014 was $1. As of January 31, 2015, the total unrecognized stock-based compensation expense related to nonvested restricted stock units was $25, which is expected to be recognized over a weighted-average period of 38 months.\n\n## Trunk Club\n\nAs discussed in Note 2: Trunk Club Acquisition, some of the Nordstrom stock issued as consideration for our acquisition includes ongoing vesting requirements for Trunk Club's employees. These amounts are recorded as compensation expense as the related service is performed over the respective employee vesting periods of up to four years after the acquisition date.\n\nThe weighted-average grant date fair value of stock options granted was $59 per share. As of January 31, 2015, the total unrecognized stock-based compensation expense related to Trunk Club options was $13, which is expected to be recognized over a weighted-average period of 32 months. The total intrinsic value of Trunk Club options exercised during 2014 was $8, while the total fair value of Trunk Club stock options vested during 2014 was $2. A summary of the stock option activity related to Trunk Club is as follows:\n\nThe total unrecognized stock-based compensation expense related to Trunk Club restricted stock was $21, which is expected to be recognized over a weighted-average period of 30 months. A summary of the restricted stock award activity related to Trunk Club is as follows:\n\n58", + "recall": 0.9824561403508771, + "true_md": "A summary of restricted stock unit activity (excluding Trunk Club) for 2014 is presented below:\n\nThe total fair value of restricted stock units vested during 2014 was $1. As of January 31, 2015, the total unrecognized stock-based compensation expense related to nonvested restricted stock units was $25, which is expected to be recognized over a weighted-average period of 38 months.\n\nTrunk Club As discussed in Note 2: Trunk Club Acquisition, some of the Nordstrom stock issued as consideration for our acquisition includes ongoing vesting requirements for Trunk Club’s employees. These amounts are recorded as compensation expense as the related service is performed over the respective employee vesting periods of up to four years after the acquisition date. \n\nThe weighted-average grant date fair value of stock options granted was $59 per share. As of January 31, 2015, the total unrecognized stock-based compensation expense related to Trunk Club options was $13, which is expected to be recognized over a weighted-average period of 32 months. The total intrinsic value of Trunk Club options exercised during 2014 was $8, while the total fair value of Trunk Club stock options vested during 2014 was $2. A summary of the stock option activity related to Trunk Club is as follows:\n\nThe total unrecognized stock-based compensation expense related to Trunk Club restricted stock was $21, which is expected to be recognized over a weighted-average period of 30 months. A summary of the restricted stock award activity related to Trunk Club is as follows:\n\n## Trunk Club As discussed in Note 2: Trunk Club Acquisition, some of the Nordstrom stock issued as consideration for our acquisition includes ongoing\n\n58\n\n## Nordstrom, Inc. Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n## Nordstrom, Inc. Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements Dollar and share amounts in millions except per share, per option and per unit amounts\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements Dollar and share amounts in millions except per share, per option and per unit amounts" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5672858631336614, + "doc_id": "761c265ebb31b2a7fc942c6fcb62e7b36fa90c0194b121eda76ecb84627bba3f", + "edit_distance": 0.5773624091381101, + "f1_score": 0.9809885931558935, + "meteor": 0.5766983066324772, + "precision": 0.9923076923076923, + "pred_md": "Responsibilities of management include -\n\n- · Implement the corporate strategy set by the Board;\n- · Achieve the performance targets set by the Board;\n- · Develop, implement and manage risk management and internal control frameworks;\n- · Develop, implement and update policies and procedures;\n- · Provide sufficient, relevant and timely information to the Board to enable the Board to effectively discharge its responsibilities; and\n- · Manage human, physical and financial resources to achieve the Company's objectives - in other words to run the day to day business in an effective way.\n\n## 1.2 Management Performance\n\nSundance's Chairman, with Non-Executive Director input, is responsible for providing feedback to the MD on his performance assessed against the responsibilities mentioned above. The MD, with Chairman and Non-Executive Directors input, is responsible for providing feedback to senior executives and assessing their performance against the responsibilities mentioned above.\n\nDuring fiscal year 2014, an annual performance evaluation of senior executives was completed in line with the Company's incentive compensation policy as well as periodic one on one discussions carried out by the MD. Appropriate induction procedures are in place to allow new senior executives to participate fully and actively in management decision making at the earliest opportunity.\n\n## Principle 2: Structure the Board to Add Value\n\n## 2.1 Board Composition and Independence\n\nThe composition and operation of the Board is determined in accordance with the following requirements:\n\n- · The constitution of Sundance specifies that there must be a minimum of three directors and a maximum of ten. The Board may determine the size of the Board within those limits;\n- · It is the intention of the Board that its membership consists of a majority of independent directors who satisfy the criteria recommended by the ASX best practice corporate governance requirements, though it is recognized that this intention may be impractical to implement given the size and scope of the Company's business;\n- · The Chairman of the Board should be an independent director who satisfies the criteria for independence recommended by the ASX best practice corporate governance requirements; and\n- · The Board should, collectively, have the appropriate level of personal qualities, skills, experience, and time commitment to properly fulfil its responsibilities or have ready access to such skills where they are not available.\n\nSundance's Board of Directors currently consists of one Managing Director based in the US, three Non-Executive Directors based in Australia, and one Non-Executive Director based in the US. All of the Directors are shareholders of the Company. At all times during the fiscal year 2014, all four of the Non-Executive Directors were independent. Sundance considers an independent director to be a non-executive director who is not a member of management and who is free of any business or other relationship that could materially interfere with, or could reasonably be perceived to materially interfere with, the independent exercise of their judgement. Sundance believes that its current Board composition is appropriate at this time in the Company's evolution. Sundance will continue to address the appropriate structure and composition of the Board over time.\n\nThe composition of the Board at the date of this report is:\n\nM D Hannell\n\nChairman, Independent Non-Executive Director\n\nE McCrady\n\nManaging Director and Chief Executive Officer\n\nN Martin\n\nIndependent Non-Executive Director\n\nD Hannes\n\nIndependent Non-Executive Director\n\nW Holcombe\n\nIndependent Non-Executive Director\n\nDirectors can have access, in appropriate circumstances, to independent professional advice at the Company's expense. It is the continuing practice for the four Non-Executive Directors to confer from time to time without the Executive Director being present.\n\n- 48 -", + "recall": 0.9699248120300752, + "true_md": "Responsibilities of management include – • Implement the corporate strategy set by the Board; \n\n- Responsibilities of management include – • Implement the corporate strategy set by the Board; • Achieve the performance targets set by the Board; \n\n- • Implement the corporate strategy set by the Board; • Achieve the performance targets set by the Board; • Develop, implement and manage risk management and internal control frameworks; \n\n- • Achieve the performance targets set by the Board; • Develop, implement and manage risk management and internal control frameworks; • Develop, implement and update policies and procedures; \n\n- • Develop, implement and manage risk management and internal control frameworks; • Develop, implement and update policies and procedures; • Provide sufficient, relevant and timely information to the Board to enable the Board to effectively discharge its \n\n- • Develop, implement and update policies and procedures; • Provide sufficient, relevant and timely information to the Board to enable the Board to effectively discharge its responsibilities; and • Manage human, physical and financial resources to achieve the Company’s objectives – in other words to run the day \n\n- responsibilities; and • Manage human, physical and financial resources to achieve the Company’s objectives – in other words to run the day to day business in an effective way. \n\n- The composition and operation of the Board is determined in accordance with the following requirements: • The constitution of Sundance specifies that there must be a minimum of three directors and a maximum of ten. The Board may determine the size of the Board within those limits; • It is the intention of the Board that its membership consists of a majority of independent directors who satisfy the \n\n- Board may determine the size of the Board within those limits; • It is the intention of the Board that its membership consists of a majority of independent directors who satisfy the criteria recommended by the ASX best practice corporate governance requirements, though it is recognized that this intention may be impractical to implement given the size and scope of the Company’s business; • The Chairman of the Board should be an independent director who satisfies the criteria for independence \n\n- intention may be impractical to implement given the size and scope of the Company’s business; • The Chairman of the Board should be an independent director who satisfies the criteria for independence recommended by the ASX best practice corporate governance requirements; and • The Board should, collectively, have the appropriate level of personal qualities, skills, experience, and time \n\n- recommended by the ASX best practice corporate governance requirements; and • The Board should, collectively, have the appropriate level of personal qualities, skills, experience, and time commitment to properly fulfil its responsibilities or have ready access to such skills where they are not available. \n\nSundance’s Chairman, with Non-Executive Director input, is responsible for providing feedback to the MD on his performance assessed against the responsibilities mentioned above. The MD, with Chairman and Non-Executive Directors input, is responsible for providing feedback to senior executives and assessing their performance against the responsibilities mentioned above.\n\nDuring fiscal year 2014, an annual performance evaluation of senior executives was completed in line with the Company’s incentive compensation policy as well as periodic one on one discussions carried out by the MD. Appropriate induction procedures are in place to allow new senior executives to participate fully and actively in management decision making at the earliest opportunity.\n\n2.1 Board Composition and Independence The composition and operation of the Board is determined in accordance with the following requirements: • The constitution of Sundance specifies that there must be a minimum of three directors and a maximum of ten. The \n\nSundance’s Board of Directors currently consists of one Managing Director based in the US, three Non-Executive Directors based in Australia, and one Non-Executive Director based in the US. All of the Directors are shareholders of the Company. At all times during the fiscal year 2014, all four of the Non-Executive Directors were independent. Sundance considers an independent director to be a non-executive director who is not a member of management and who is free of any business or other relationship that could materially interfere with, or could reasonably be perceived to materially interfere with, the independent exercise of their judgement. Sundance believes that its current Board composition is appropriate at this time in the Company’s evolution. Sundance will continue to address the appropriate structure and composition of the Board over time.\n\nThe composition of the Board at the date of this report is: \n\nM D Hannell E McCrady N Martin D Hannes W Holcombe \n\nChairman, Independent Non-Executive Director Managing Director and Chief Executive Officer Independent Non-Executive Director Independent Non-Executive Director Independent Non-Executive Director \n\nDirectors can have access, in appropriate circumstances, to independent professional advice at the Company’s expense. It is the continuing practice for the four Non-Executive Directors to confer from time to time without the Executive Director being present. \n\n- 48 - \n\n## 2.1 Board Composition and Independence The composition and operation of the Board is determined in accordance with the following requirements:\n\n## $^{ }$Principle 2: Structure the Board to Add Value\n\n## 1.2 Management Performance" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9300057840383462, + "doc_id": "b675f521d66a6c9067738c504570e1c315d377cdfb394c684fe11f99780fe98e", + "edit_distance": 0.8096885813148789, + "f1_score": 0.9896907216494847, + "meteor": 0.768118393596461, + "precision": 0.9940828402366864, + "pred_md": "NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n- GLYPH<129> available-for-sale financial assets we measure the excess of the cost to acquire the asset (less any impairment loss we have previously recognized), over its current fair value, if any. The difference is reclassified from the available-for-sale reserve in equity to net income.\n\n## Investments in Associates and Joint Arrangements\n\nAt the end of each reporting period, we assess whether there is objective evidence that impairment exists in our investments in associates and joint arrangements. If objective evidence exists, we compare the carrying amount of the investment to its recoverable amount and recognize the excess over the recoverable amount, if any, as a loss in net income (see Recognition of Impairment Charge , below).\n\n## Goodwill and Indefinite-Life Intangible Assets\n\nWe test goodwill and indefinite-life intangible assets for impairment once a year, or more frequently if we identify indicators of impairment. Goodwill is allocated to cash generating units (or groups of cash generating units) based on the level at which management monitors goodwill, which cannot be higher than an operating segment. The allocation involves considerable management judgement, and is made to cash generating units (or groups of cash generating units) that are expected to benefit from the synergies of the business combination from which the goodwill arose.\n\nA cash generating unit is the smallest identifiable group of assets that generates cash inflows largely independent of the cash inflows from other assets or groups of assets.\n\n## Non-Financial Assets with Finite Useful Lives\n\nOur non-financial assets with finite useful lives include property, plant and equipment, and intangible assets. We test these assets for impairment whenever an event or change in circumstances indicates that their carrying amounts may not be recoverable. The asset is impaired if the recoverable amount is less than the carrying amount. If we cannot estimate the recoverable amount of an individual asset because it does not generate independent cash inflows, we test the entire cash generating unit for impairment.\n\n## Recognition of Impairment Charge\n\nThe recoverable amount of a cash generating unit or asset is the higher of:\n\n- GLYPH<129> its fair value less costs to sell, or\n- GLYPH<129> its value in use.\n\nWe estimate an asset's (or cash generating unit's) fair value less costs to sell using the best information available to estimate the amount we could obtain from disposing the asset in an arm's length transaction, less the estimated cost of disposal.\n\nWe estimate value in use by discounting estimated future cash flows from a cash generating unit or asset to their present value using a pretax rate that reflects current market assessments of the time value of money and the risks specific to the asset. Estimated cash flows are based on management's assumptions and are supported by external information.\n\nThe above concepts used to determine the recoverable amount require significant estimates such as:\n\n- GLYPH<129> future cash flows\n- GLYPH<129> terminal growth rate, and\n- GLYPH<129> the discount rate applied.\n\n100\n\nROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\nIf our estimate of the asset's or cash generating unit's recoverable amount is less than its carrying amount, we reduce its carrying amount to the recoverable amount, and recognize the loss in net income.\n\nWe reverse a previously recorded impairment loss if our estimate of a previously impaired asset's or cash generating unit's recoverable amount has increased such that the impairment recorded in the previous year has reversed. The reversal is recognized by increasing the asset's or cash generating unit's carrying amount to our new estimate of its recoverable amount. The new carrying amount cannot be higher than the carrying amount we would have recorded if we had not recognized an impairment loss in previous years. We do not reverse impairment losses recognized for goodwill.\n\n## Investments\n\nInvestments in Associates and Joint Arrangements\n\nAn entity is an associate when we have a significant influence on the entity's financial and operating policies but do not control it. We are generally presumed to have significant influence over an entity when we hold more than 20% of the voting power.\n\nA joint arrangement exists when there is a contractual agreement that establishes joint control over its activities and requires unanimous consent for strategic financial and operating decisions. We classify our interests in joint arrangements into one of two categories:\n\n- GLYPH<129> Joint operations, when we have the rights to the assets and obligations for the liabilities related to the arrangement\n- GLYPH<129> Joint ventures, when we have the rights to the net assets of the arrangement.\n\nWe use the equity method to account for our investments in associates and joint ventures, and we use the proportionate consolidation method to account for our investments in joint operations.\n\nWe recognize our investments in associates and joint ventures initially at cost, and then increase or decrease the carrying amounts based on our share of each entity's income or loss after initial recognition. Distributions we receive from these entities reduce the carrying amount of our investments.\n\nWe eliminate unrealized gains and losses from our investments in associates or joint ventures against our investment, up to the amount of our interest in the entity.\n\n## Investments in Publicly Traded and Private Companies\n\nWe classify our investments in publicly traded and private companies where we have no control or significant influence as available-for-sale investments, and account for them as follows:\n\n- GLYPH<129> publicly traded companies: we record them at fair value based on publicly quoted prices\n- GLYPH<129> private companies: we record them at fair value using well established market or asset based techniques, or projected income valuation techniques, applying them to each investment's future operating and profitability prospects.\n\nWe record changes in the fair value of these investments in other comprehensive income until we dispose of the investments or they become impaired.\n\nSee note 14 for more information about our investments.", + "recall": 0.9853372434017595, + "true_md": "NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n- GLYPH<129> available-for-sale financial assets – we measure the excess of the cost to acquire the asset (less any impairment loss we have previously recognized), over its current fair value, if any. The difference is reclassified from the available-for-sale reserve in equity to net income.\n\n- GLYPH<129> its fair value less costs to sell, or\n\n- GLYPH<129> its value in use.\n\n- GLYPH<129> publicly traded companies: we record them at fair value based on publicly quoted prices\n\n- GLYPH<129> private companies: we record them at fair value using well established market or asset based techniques, or projected income valuation techniques, applying them to each investment’s future operating and profitability prospects.\n\n- GLYPH<129> future cash flows\n\n- GLYPH<129> terminal growth rate, and\n\n- GLYPH<129> the discount rate applied.\n\n- GLYPH<129> Joint operations, when we have the rights to the assets and obligations for the liabilities related to the arrangement\n\n- GLYPH<129> Joint ventures, when we have the rights to the net assets of the arrangement.\n\n## Investments\n\n100 ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\nSee note 14 for more information about our investments.\n\nWe record changes in the fair value of these investments in other comprehensive income until we dispose of the investments or they become impaired.\n\nThe above concepts used to determine the recoverable amount require significant estimates such as:\n\nWe estimate value in use by discounting estimated future cash flows from a cash generating unit or asset to their present value using a pre- tax rate that reflects current market assessments of the time value of money and the risks specific to the asset. Estimated cash flows are based on management’s assumptions and are supported by external information.\n\nWe estimate an asset’s (or cash generating unit’s) fair value less costs to sell using the best information available to estimate the amount we could obtain from disposing the asset in an arm’s length transaction, less the estimated cost of disposal.\n\nWe classify our investments in publicly traded and private companies where we have no control or significant influence as available-for-sale investments, and account for them as follows:\n\nIf our estimate of the asset’s or cash generating unit’s recoverable amount is less than its carrying amount, we reduce its carrying amount to the recoverable amount, and recognize the loss in net income.\n\nWe reverse a previously recorded impairment loss if our estimate of a previously impaired asset’s or cash generating unit’s recoverable amount has increased such that the impairment recorded in the previous year has reversed. The reversal is recognized by increasing the asset’s or cash generating unit’s carrying amount to our new estimate of its recoverable amount. The new carrying amount cannot be higher than the carrying amount we would have recorded if we had not recognized an impairment loss in previous years. We do not reverse impairment losses recognized for goodwill.\n\nAt the end of each reporting period, we assess whether there is objective evidence that impairment exists in our investments in associates and joint arrangements. If objective evidence exists, we compare the carrying amount of the investment to its recoverable amount and recognize the excess over the recoverable amount, if any, as a loss in net income (see Recognition of Impairment Charge , below).\n\nWe test goodwill and indefinite-life intangible assets for impairment once a year, or more frequently if we identify indicators of impairment. Goodwill is allocated to cash generating units (or groups of cash generating units) based on the level at which management monitors goodwill, which cannot be higher than an operating segment. The allocation involves considerable management judgement, and is made to cash generating units (or groups of cash generating units) that are expected to benefit from the synergies of the business combination from which the goodwill arose.\n\nA cash generating unit is the smallest identifiable group of assets that generates cash inflows largely independent of the cash inflows from other assets or groups of assets.\n\nOur non-financial assets with finite useful lives include property, plant and equipment, and intangible assets. We test these assets for impairment whenever an event or change in circumstances indicates that their carrying amounts may not be recoverable. The asset is impaired if the recoverable amount is less than the carrying amount. If we cannot estimate the recoverable amount of an individual asset because it does not generate independent cash inflows, we test the entire cash generating unit for impairment.\n\nThe recoverable amount of a cash generating unit or asset is the higher of:\n\nWe eliminate unrealized gains and losses from our investments in associates or joint ventures against our investment, up to the amount of our interest in the entity.\n\nWe recognize our investments in associates and joint ventures initially at cost, and then increase or decrease the carrying amounts based on our share of each entity’s income or loss after initial recognition. Distributions we receive from these entities reduce the carrying amount of our investments.\n\nWe use the equity method to account for our investments in associates and joint ventures, and we use the proportionate consolidation method to account for our investments in joint operations.\n\nA joint arrangement exists when there is a contractual agreement that establishes joint control over its activities and requires unanimous consent for strategic financial and operating decisions. We classify our interests in joint arrangements into one of two categories:\n\nAn entity is an associate when we have a significant influence on the entity’s financial and operating policies but do not control it. We are generally presumed to have significant influence over an entity when we hold more than 20% of the voting power.\n\n## Investments in Associates and Joint Arrangements\n\n## Goodwill and Indefinite-Life Intangible Assets\n\n## Investments in Associates and Joint Arrangements\n\n## Non-Financial Assets with Finite Useful Lives\n\n## Recognition of Impairment Charge\n\n## Investments in Publicly Traded and Private Companies" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9361956279156026, + "doc_id": "e829361c9962b692a8ffbc8f58ea3ce62d764f11655d71405c9bd8adacccdc0d", + "edit_distance": 0.7142857142857143, + "f1_score": 0.9934640522875817, + "meteor": 0.8796371495893948, + "precision": 0.9934640522875817, + "pred_md": "NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\nProperty, plant and equipment not yet in service and therefore not depreciated at December 31, 2013 was $882 million (December 31, 2012 -$917 million). Capitalized interest on property, plant and equipment was recorded at a weighted average rate of approximately 5.1% (2012 - 5.8%).\n\n## NOTE 13: GOODWILL AND INTANGIBLE ASSETS\n\n## Goodwill and Intangible Assets\n\nThe tables below summarize the changes in the net carrying amounts of goodwill and intangible assets in 2013 and 2012.\n\nIn 2012, we acquired certain 2500 MHz spectrum from Inukshuk Limited Partnership (Inukshuk), a 50% owned joint venture. This resulted in a non-cash increase of spectrum licences of $360 million (see note 14).\n\n108\n\nROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\nBrand names, customer relationships, roaming agreements and marketing agreements are all intangible assets with finite lives and we amortize them in depreciation and amortization expense in the consolidated statements of income. This amounted to $150 million in 2013 (2012 - $141 million).\n\n## Depreciation Rates Review\n\nWe reviewed depreciation rates for all of our property, plant and equipment in 2013 and made no changes. In 2012, we changed the estimates of useful lives of certain network, customer premise equipment, computer equipment and software assets. We accounted for the impact of these changes prospectively, resulting in depreciation expense to be lower by approximately $90 million in 2012 compared to the amount we would have recorded using the previous useful lives.", + "recall": 0.9934640522875817, + "true_md": "NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## Depreciation Rates Review\n\n## NOTE 13: GOODWILL AND INTANGIBLE ASSETS\n\n## Goodwill and Intangible Assets\n\n108 ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\nProperty, plant and equipment not yet in service and therefore not depreciated at December 31, 2013 was $882 million (December 31, 2012 – $917 million). Capitalized interest on property, plant and equipment was recorded at a weighted average rate of approximately 5.1% (2012 – 5.8%).\n\nWe reviewed depreciation rates for all of our property, plant and equipment in 2013 and made no changes. In 2012, we changed the estimates of useful lives of certain network, customer premise equipment, computer equipment and software assets. We accounted for the impact of these changes prospectively, resulting in depreciation expense to be lower by approximately $90 million in 2012 compared to the amount we would have recorded using the previous useful lives.\n\nThe tables below summarize the changes in the net carrying amounts of goodwill and intangible assets in 2013 and 2012.\n\nIn 2012, we acquired certain 2500 MHz spectrum from Inukshuk Limited Partnership (Inukshuk), a 50% owned joint venture. This resulted in a non-cash increase of spectrum licences of $360 million (see note 14).\n\nBrand names, customer relationships, roaming agreements and marketing agreements are all intangible assets with finite lives and we amortize them in depreciation and amortization expense in the consolidated statements of income. This amounted to $150 million in 2013 (2012 – $141 million)." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0030875663220162777, + "doc_id": "b553c35a553d7bafe48a5f017365384b97a794c18db2b6e50bc4cc5efd68d53a", + "edit_distance": 0.9971139971139971, + "f1_score": 0.07317073170731708, + "meteor": 0.03549382716049384, + "precision": 0.0379746835443038, + "pred_md": "1\n\nContents\n\n## Contents\n\n| Chairman's Review . . . . . . . . . | | | | | | | 2 | |\n|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|\n| Managing Director and CEO's Report . . 3 | Managing Director and CEO's Report . . 3 | Managing Director and CEO's Report . . 3 | Managing Director and CEO's Report . . 3 | Managing Director and CEO's Report . . 3 | Managing Director and CEO's Report . . 3 | Managing Director and CEO's Report . . 3 | Managing Director and CEO's Report . . 3 | Managing Director and CEO's Report . . 3 |\n| Ten Year Summary . . . . . . . . . | | | | | | | 6 | |\n| Finance Report . . . . . . . . . . | | | | | | | 8 | |\n| Company Activities . . . . . . . . . | | | | | | | 11 | |\n| Operations Report . | . | . . | . . | . | . | . | 12 | |\n| Projects Report . | . | . . | . . . | . | . | . | 26 | |\n| Exploration Report . | . | . . | . . | . | . | . | 30 | |\n| Ore Reserves and Mineral Resources | Ore Reserves and Mineral Resources | Ore Reserves and Mineral Resources | Ore Reserves and Mineral Resources | Ore Reserves and Mineral Resources | Ore Reserves and Mineral Resources | Ore Reserves and Mineral Resources | 32 | Ore Reserves and Mineral Resources |\n| Corporate Governance Statement . . . | Corporate Governance Statement . . . | Corporate Governance Statement . . . | Corporate Governance Statement . . . | Corporate Governance Statement . . . | Corporate Governance Statement . . . | Corporate Governance Statement . . . | 34 | |\n| Senior Management | | . . | . . . | . | . | . | 39 | |\n| Directors' Report | . | . . | . . . | . | . | . | 42 | |\n| Remuneration Report . . . . . . . . . . Auditor's Independence Declaration . . | Remuneration Report . . . . . . . . . . Auditor's Independence Declaration . . | Remuneration Report . . . . . . . . . . Auditor's Independence Declaration . . | Remuneration Report . . . . . . . . . . Auditor's Independence Declaration . . | Remuneration Report . . . . . . . . . . Auditor's Independence Declaration . . | Remuneration Report . . . . . . . . . . Auditor's Independence Declaration . . | Remuneration Report . . . . . . . . . . Auditor's Independence Declaration . . | Remuneration Report . . . . . . . . . . Auditor's Independence Declaration . . | Remuneration Report . . . . . . . . . . Auditor's Independence Declaration . . |\n| Financial Statements . . . . . . . . | | | | | | | 62 63 | |\n| Statement of Comprehensive Income . . . . . | | | | | | | 64 | |\n| Statement of Financial Position . . . . . . . | Statement of Changes in Equity | | . . . . . . . | | | | 65 66 | |\n| Statement of Cash Flows . . . . . . . . . . | | | | | | | 67 | |\n| Notes to the Financial Statements . . . | Notes to the Financial Statements . . . | Notes to the Financial Statements . . . | Notes to the Financial Statements . . . | Notes to the Financial Statements . . . | Notes to the Financial Statements . . . | Notes to the Financial Statements . . . | 68 | |\n| Directors' Declaration . . . . . | Directors' Declaration . . . . . | Directors' Declaration . . . . . | Directors' Declaration . . . . . | . | . | . | 111 | |\n| Independent Auditor's Report . | Independent Auditor's Report . | Independent Auditor's Report . | Independent Auditor's Report . | . | . | . | 112 | |\n| | Shareholder Information | . | . . | . | . | . | 114 | |\n| Corporate Information . . . . . . . | | | | | | | 116 | |\n\nContents", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "1 Contents\n\nContents\n\n## Contents" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9490206829118072, + "doc_id": "0570d0ef92d5eb57c4193b3931d46dd3d0209abe9fa230b89a93b5a37ab88423", + "edit_distance": 0.06638115631691649, + "f1_score": 0.9848156182212581, + "meteor": 0.9733219635817989, + "precision": 0.9869565217391304, + "pred_md": "## our Goals for 2014\n\ncomplete a minimum of $75 million in acquisitions.\n\nacquire over 50% of 2014 acquisitions outside atlantic canada, with a focus in ontario.\n\nGrow same store noi by up to 2%.\n\ncontinue to invest in development with two projects underway, managing projects on schedule and on budget.\n\ndevelopment program to a maximum of 5% of our balance sheet per year. We have three other developments projects in various planning stages, but don't expect to begin construction on any additional new projects until late 2014 or into 2015.\n\n## Geographic Diversification is a Priority\n\nGeographic diversification is a priority for Killam. Our asset base in Atlantic Canada is the foundation of the Company; however, with Atlantic Canada representing only 5% of the Canadian rental market, our growth opportunities increase significantly by expanding our target markets outside of this region. With its strong operating platform, Killam can support a larger and more geographically diverse portfolio. We are actively growing a portfolio of apartments in Ontario in three target markets: Ottawa, the Greater Toronto Area, and Southwestern Ontario. An increased investment outside Atlantic Canada will increase not only Killam's growth potential, it will also expand the Company's diversification and exposure to higher growth markets.\n\nAcquisitions in Ontario represented 45% of acquisitions in 2013. In addition to 1,359 apartment units in the province, we also have 2,144 manufactured home community sites, representing 29% of the MHC NOI last year. Based on our current portfolio, 15% of Killam's 2014 NOI will be generated in Ontario, compared to our longer-term goal of generating 50% of NOI outside Atlantic Canada. We expect to reach this goal by focusing acquisition activity in Ontario, with the majority of future investment anticipated in the province over the next few years. We will look for additional development opportunities in Ontario and we are exploring opportunities in Western Canada, attracted by the strong population growth trends in Alberta's urban markets.\n\nI would like to thank all Killam employees for their contributions and commitment over the last year and our board of directors for their governance. Also, I would like to thank you, our shareholders, for your continued investment in Killam. I invite you to attend the Company's annual meeting on May 7, 2014 at 2:00 pm Atlantic Time at the Halifax Marriott Harbourfront Hotel, either in person or via webcast.\n\nYours truly,\n\nPhilip Fraser\n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013\n\n11", + "recall": 0.9826839826839827, + "true_md": "## our Goals for 2014\n\nPhilip Fraser\n\ncomplete a minimum of $75 million in acquisitions.\n\nacquire over 50% of 2014 acquisitions outside atlantic canada, with a focus in ontario.\n\nGrow same store noi by up to 2%.\n\ncontinue to invest in development with two projects underway, managing projects on schedule and on budget.\n\ndevelopment program to a maximum of 5% of our balance sheet per year. We have three other developments projects in various planning stages, but don’t expect to begin construction on any additional new projects until late 2014 or into 2015.\n\nGeographic diversification is a priority for Killam. Our asset base in Atlantic Canada is the foundation of the Company; however, with Atlantic Canada representing only 5% of the Canadian rental market, our growth opportunities increase significantly by expanding our target markets outside of this region. With its strong operating platform, Killam can support a larger and more geographically diverse portfolio. We are actively growing a portfolio of apartments in Ontario in three target markets: Ottawa, the Greater Toronto Area, and Southwestern Ontario. An increased investment outside Atlantic Canada will increase not only Killam’s growth potential, it will also expand the Company’s diversification and exposure to higher growth markets.\n\nAcquisitions in Ontario represented 45% of acquisitions in 2013. In addition to 1,359 apartment units in the province, we also have 2,144 manufactured home community sites, representing 29% of the MHC NOI last year. Based on our current portfolio, 15% of Killam’s 2014 NOI will be generated in Ontario, compared to our longer-term goal of generating 50% of NOI outside Atlantic Canada. We expect to reach this goal by focusing acquisition activity in Ontario, with the majority of future investment anticipated in the province over the next few years. We will look for additional development opportunities in Ontario and we are exploring opportunities in Western Canada, attracted by the strong population growth trends in Alberta’s urban markets.\n\nI would like to thank all Killam employees for their contributions and commitment over the last year and our board of directors for their governance. Also, I would like to thank you, our shareholders, for your continued investment in Killam. I invite you to attend the Company’s annual meeting on May 7, 2014 at 2:00 pm Atlantic Time at the Halifax Marriott Harbourfront Hotel, either in person or via webcast.\n\n## Geographic Diversification is a Priority\n\nYours truly,\n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013 11" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9219569037796082, + "doc_id": "d875f8f9efde74972bd5911e30afb8b651fa0f009b0066b702e80db4b587d770", + "edit_distance": 0.865814696485623, + "f1_score": 0.9684542586750788, + "meteor": 0.7766891082935379, + "precision": 0.9715189873417721, + "pred_md": "- t Another key element of our Corporate Strategy drives us to Achieve Operational Excellence, and that means optimizing operations and lowering costs at every possibility. In 2011, our success in this area was significant. We eliminated some 18,000 part numbers and reduced our inventories by more than $3 million. We likewise made meaningful strides in delivery performance in product lines and geographies around the world. And our e ff orts to optimize our global sourcing are on track to provide additional ongoing benefits, including greater security of supply.\n\nAs an expansion of MSA's flagship V-Gard® hard hat, MSA debuted a selection of V-Gard accessories in 2011, including face shields and visors, developed in response to customer needs.\n\n- t MSA's product innovation, the lifeblood of our company, was especially successful in 2011, with patent applications increasing 230 percent compared to our base year of 2009. Chief among these successes was the Altair® 5X series of portable multi-gas detectors with XCell® Sensors - our 2011 Product of the Year. Building even further on last year's breakthrough launch of the Altair 4X unit, the new Altair 5X Detector has increased sales by 48 percent over the previous generation Altair 5, while delivering greatly improved gross margins.\n- t Other product launches in a very busy year include:\n- -The SUPREMA® Touch controller for fixed gas detection systems, built on a priority basis to successfully meet changing standards in China;\n- -The PrimaX IR, a lower price point infrared fixed gas detection system designed especially for cost-conscious, but performance-demanding emerging markets;\n\n4\n\nMSA 2011 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n- -Our Workman Twin Leg Personal Fall Limiter, an innovation that provides continuous fall protection as workers at heights move from place to place; and\n- -An expansion of our flagship V-Gard® head protection line to include a selection of accessories such as winter liners, face shields and visors, and the industry's first 'Debris Control' feature, developed in response to customer needs.\n- t We successfully divested our ballistic vest business, giving us greater resources and ability to further focus upon our Core Product areas.\n- t We raised our dividend to more than $1 per share annually, the highest level in our history, providing our shareholders with a return of more than 3.1 percent as of the end of the year.\n- t We successfully upgraded our SAP system to the state-ofthe-art ECC 6.0 platform. ECC 6.0 positions IT to support our increasing globalization and even further integration of our supply chains.\n- t Our largest North America distribution partner, Airgas, recognized MSA as their top-performing 'Supplier of the Year' for excellence in customer support.\n- t The Pittsburgh Post-Gazette named MSA a 'Top Workplace' in 2011, and our own internal metrics, measured around the world, identified a similar culture of improving employee engagement and satisfaction. For example, a survey sent to all MSA associates in 14 languages showed a 10 percent increase in favorable employee engagement levels since the last time we conducted the survey, a level higher than global manufacturing industry norms.\n\nMSA launched several new products in 2011, including, from left to right, the Workman Twin Leg Personal Fall Limiter, the Altair® 5X series of portable multi-gas detectors with XCell® Sensor technology, and the SUPREMA® Touch controller for fixed gas detection systems.", + "recall": 0.9654088050314465, + "true_md": "4 MSA 2011 ANNUAL REPORT\n\nMSA launched several new products in 2011, including, from left to right, the Workman Twin Leg Personal Fall Limiter, the Altair® 5X series of portable multi-gas detectors with XCell® Sensor technology, and the SUPREMA® Touch controller for fixed gas detection systems.\n\nAs an expansion of MSA’s flagship V-Gard® hard hat, MSA debuted a selection of V-Gard accessories in 2011, including face shields and visors, developed in response to customer needs.\n\n- – The PrimaX IR, a lower price point infrared fixed gas detection system designed especially for cost-conscious, but performance-demanding emerging markets; \n\n- – The SUPREMA® Touch controller for fixed gas detection systems, built on a priority basis to successfully meet changing standards in China;\n\n- t Other product launches in a very busy year include:\n\n- t The Pittsburgh Post-Gazette named MSA a “Top Workplace” in 2011, and our own internal metrics, measured around the world, identified a similar culture of improving employee engagement and satisfaction. For example, a survey sent to all MSA associates in 14 languages showed a 10 percent increase in favorable employee engagement levels since the last time we conducted the survey, a level higher than global manufacturing industry norms.\n\n- t MSA’s product innovation, the lifeblood of our company, was especially successful in 2011, with patent applications increasing 230 percent compared to our base year of 2009. Chief among these successes was the Altair® 5X series of portable multi-gas detectors with XCell® Sensors – our 2011 Product of the Year. Building even further on last year’s breakthrough launch of the Altair 4X unit, the new Altair 5X Detector has increased sales by 48 percent over the previous generation Altair 5, while delivering greatly improved gross margins.\n\n- t Our largest North America distribution partner, Airgas, recognized MSA as their top-performing “Supplier of the Year” for excellence in customer support. \n\n- t We successfully upgraded our SAP system to the state-of- the-art ECC 6.0 platform. ECC 6.0 positions IT to support our increasing globalization and even further integration of our supply chains.\n\n- t We raised our dividend to more than $1 per share annually, the highest level in our history, providing our shareholders with a return of more than 3.1 percent as of the end of the year.\n\n- t We successfully divested our ballistic vest business, giving us greater resources and ability to further focus upon our Core Product areas.\n\n- – An expansion of our flagship V-Gard® head protection line to include a selection of accessories such as winter liners, face shields and visors, and the industry’s first “Debris Control” feature, developed in response to customer needs.\n\n- – Our Workman Twin Leg Personal Fall Limiter, an innovation that provides continuous fall protection as workers at heights move from place to place; and\n\n- t Another key element of our Corporate Strategy drives us to Achieve Operational Excellence, and that means optimizing operations and lowering costs at every possibility. In 2011, our success in this area was significant. We eliminated some 18,000 part numbers and reduced our inventories by more than $3 million. We likewise made meaningful strides in delivery performance in product lines and geographies around the world. And our e ff orts to optimize our global sourcing are on track to provide additional ongoing benefits, including greater security of supply." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9209925974547924, + "doc_id": "7d09617c63d84b98f8de56fc46022000651215a8497ae3a4e0f756110940f7b8", + "edit_distance": 0.14906832298136646, + "f1_score": 0.9955555555555556, + "meteor": 0.9879213697702215, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 18 - EXPLORATION AND EVALUATION EXPENDITURE\n\n(1) The Company drilled three exploratory wells in the Anadarko Basin that did not have economically recoverable reserves (i.e. dry wells) and as such, all associated costs were written off.\n\nIn July 2014, the Company acquired the working interest in approximately 9,200 gross (5,700 net) in Dimmit County, Texas. The purchase price included an initial cash payment of $35.5 million and a commitment to drill four Eagle Ford wells. The purchase price was allocated between exploration and evaluation and development and production assets based on discounted cash flows of developed producing wells.\n\nThe ultimate recoupment of costs carried forward for exploration phase is dependent on the successful development and commercial exploitation or sale of respective areas.\n\n## NOTE 19 - PROPERTY AND EQUIPMENT\n\n- 85 -", + "recall": 0.9911504424778761, + "true_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n- (1) The Company drilled three exploratory wells in the Anadarko Basin that did not have economically recoverable reserves (i.e. dry wells) and as such, all associated costs were written off. \n\n## NOTE 18 – EXPLORATION AND EVALUATION EXPENDITURE\n\nIn July 2014, the Company acquired the working interest in approximately 9,200 gross (5,700 net) in Dimmit County, Texas. The purchase price included an initial cash payment of $35.5 million and a commitment to drill four Eagle Ford wells. The purchase price was allocated between exploration and evaluation and development and production assets based on discounted cash flows of developed producing wells. \n\nThe ultimate recoupment of costs carried forward for exploration phase is dependent on the successful development and commercial exploitation or sale of respective areas.\n\n- 85 - \n\n## NOTE 19 – PROPERTY AND EQUIPMENT" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8344522897223012, + "doc_id": "8781a3d03d2daf269994930cc249e90a40ae26a2fa795d7f8e3a8d35c9572d21", + "edit_distance": 1.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.5, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "www.sundanceenergy.net\n\nwww.sundanceenergy.com.au", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "www.sundanceenergy.com.au\n\nwww.sundanceenergy.net" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9294581085275351, + "doc_id": "027d1a54c64e56f3757aff3e4bb63856af7a10aeb4496d0e098ece2a5b29d6f1", + "edit_distance": 0.0821529745042493, + "f1_score": 0.9829351535836177, + "meteor": 0.933140814034862, + "precision": 0.9795918367346939, + "pred_md": "## Management's Discussion and Analysis\n\nDollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\n## MHC Results\n\nFor the years ended December 31,\n\nKillam's MHC business accounted for 14% of NOI from property operations during the year ended December 31, 2013, compared to 18% in 2012. Property revenue from the mHcs decreased 15.0% in 2013 compared to 2012, primarily due to the sale of twelve Western canadian and ontario MHC properties in May 2012 and ten New Brunswick MHC properties in November 2013. The impact of these sales was partially offset by increased revenue at same store properties. Killam's MHC properties were 98.1% occupied at December 31, 2013, consistent with the occupancy at December 31, 2012.\n\nsame store mHc property revenue increased 3.2% for the year ended December 31, 2013, compared to 2012. this was a result of a 3.7% increase in weighted average rent per unit of $222 up from $214 in 2012. Total same store property expenses increased only by 0.8% in 2013, due primarily to lower water testing and water repair costs following recent capital upgrades, and negotiated garbage removal savings. The operating cost savings initiatives were offset by water cost increases of 5.6% and property tax increases of 6.5%.\n\nSame store revenue growth, combined with efforts to minimize operating expenses, increased MHC same store NOI by 4.7% for the year ended December 31, 2013. Operating margins have also increased by 90 bps from 2012 .\n\nNon same store revenues and expenses were primarily generated by the twelve Western Canadian and Ontario MHC properties sold in May 2012 and the ten New Brunswick MHC properties sold in November 2013. These properties generated $3.8 million in NOI in 2013 and $6.5 million in 2012.\n\n40\n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013", + "recall": 0.9863013698630136, + "true_md": "## Management’s Discussion and Analysis Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\nManagement’s Discussion and Analysis Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\n## MHC Results\n\nKillam’s MHC business accounted for 14% of NOI from property operations during the year ended December 31, 2013, compared to 18% in 2012. Property revenue from the mHcs decreased 15.0% in 2013 compared to 2012, primarily due to the sale of twelve Western canadian and ontario MHC properties in May 2012 and ten New Brunswick MHC properties in November 2013. The impact of these sales was partially offset by increased revenue at same store properties. Killam’s MHC properties were 98.1% occupied at December 31, 2013, consistent with the occupancy at December 31, 2012.\n\nsame store mHc property revenue increased 3.2% for the year ended December 31, 2013, compared to 2012. this was a result of a 3.7% increase in weighted average rent per unit of $222 up from $214 in 2012. Total same store property expenses increased only by 0.8% in 2013, due primarily to lower water testing and water repair costs following recent capital upgrades, and negotiated garbage removal savings. The operating cost savings initiatives were offset by water cost increases of 5.6% and property tax increases of 6.5%.\n\nSame store revenue growth, combined with efforts to minimize operating expenses, increased MHC same store NOI by 4.7% for the year ended December 31, 2013. Operating margins have also increased by 90 bps from 2012.\n\nNon same store revenues and expenses were primarily generated by the twelve Western Canadian and Ontario MHC properties sold in May 2012 and the ten New Brunswick MHC properties sold in November 2013. These properties generated $3.8 million in NOI in 2013 and $6.5 million in 2012.\n\n40 Killam ProPerties inc | 2013" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9034690740016267, + "doc_id": "2204c1b9664f15f5617ad4edeb88f9aed020c0d5f5c3815833555bb7626aa289", + "edit_distance": 0.7116883116883117, + "f1_score": 0.9938650306748466, + "meteor": 0.7805029479578331, + "precision": 0.9959016393442623, + "pred_md": "## Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation (China) Limited Beijing Branch\n\nUnit1601,16F, North Tower, Beijing Kerry Centre, No.1, Guang Hua Road, Chao Yang District, Beijing 100020, The People's Republic of China\n\nTel:\n\n86 (10) 5920-4500\n\nFax: 86 (10) 5915-1080\n\n## Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation (China) Limited Tianjin Branch\n\n12F, The Exchange Tower 2, 189 Nanjing Road, Heping District, Tianjin 300051, The People's Republic of China\n\nTel:\n\n86 (22) 2330-6677\n\nFax: 86 (22) 2319-2111\n\n## Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation (China) Limited Tianjin Binhai Sub-Branch\n\n8F, E2B, Binhai Financial Street, No.20, Guangchang East Road, TEDA, Tianjin 300457, The People's Republic of China\n\nTel:\n\n86 (22) 6622-6677\n\nFax: 86 (22) 6628-1333\n\n## Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation (China) Limited Guangzhou Branch\n\n12F, International Finance Place, No.8 Huaxia Road, Tianhe District, Guangzhou 510623, The People's Republic of China\n\nTel: 86 (20) 3819-1888\n\nFax: 86 (20) 3810-2028/2038\n\n## Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation (China) Limited Suzhou Branch\n\n23F, Metropolitan Towers, No.199 Shi Shan Road, Suzhou New District, Suzhou, Jiangsu 215011, The People's Republic of China\n\nTel: 86 (512) 6825-8205\n\nFax: 86 (512) 6825-6121\n\n220\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n## Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation (China) Limited Suzhou Industrial Park Sub-Branch\n\n16F, International Building, No.2, Suhua Road, Suzhou Industrial Park, Jiangsu Province 215021, The People's Republic of China\n\nTel:\n\n86 (512) 6288-5018\n\nFax: 86 (512) 6288-5028\n\n## Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation (China) Limited Changshu Sub-Branch\n\n8F, Science Innovation Building (Kechuang Building), No.333 Dongnan Road, Changshu Southeast Economic Development Zone of Jiangsu, Changshu, Jiangsu, The People's Republic of China\n\nTel: 86 (512) 5235-5553\n\nFax: 86 (512) 5235-5552\n\n## Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation (China) Limited Hangzhou Branch\n\n23F, Golden Plaza, No.118, Qing Chun Road, Xia Cheng District, Hangzhou, Zhejiang 310003, The People's Republic of China\n\nTel:\n\n86 (571) 2889-1111\n\nFax: 86 (571) 2889-6699\n\n## Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation (China) Limited Shenyang Branch\n\n1501, E Building, Shenyang Fortune Plaza, 59 Beizhan Road, Shenhe District, Shenyang,\n\nThe People's Republic of China\n\nTel:\n\n86 (24) 3128-7000\n\nFax: 86 (24) 3128-7005\n\n## Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation (China) Limited Shenzhen Branch\n\n23/F, Tower Two, Kerry Plaza, 1 Zhongxinsi Road, Futian District, Shenzhen 518048, The People's Republic of China\n\nTel:\n\n86 (755) 2383-0980\n\nFax: 86 (755) 2383-0707\n\n## PT Bank Sumitomo Mitsui Indonesia\n\nSummitmas II, 10th Floor, JI. Jendral Sudirman Kav. 61-62, Jakarta 12190, Indonesia\n\nTel: 62 (21) 522-7011\n\nFax: 62 (21) 522-7022\n\n## Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation Malaysia Berhad\n\nLevel 50 & 51, Vista Tower, The Intermark, 182, Jalan Tun Razak, 50400 Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia\n\nTel: 60 (3) 2168-1500\n\nFax: 60 (3) 2168-1770\n\n## Sumitomo Mitsui Finance Australia Limited\n\nLevel 35, The Chifley Tower, 2 Chifley Square, Sydney, NSW\n\n2000, Australia\n\nTel: 61 (2) 9376-1800\n\nFax: 61 (2) 9376-1863\n\n## SMBC Capital Markets (Asia) Limited\n\n7th Floor, One International Finance Centre, 1 Harbour View Street, Central, Hong Kong Special Administrative Region, The People's Republic of China Tel: 852-2532-8500 Fax: 852-2532-8505\n\n## SMBC Metro Investment Corporation\n\n20th Floor, Rufino Pacific Tower, 6784 Ayala Avenue, Makati City, Metro Manila, The Philippines Tel: 63-2-8110845 Fax: 63-2-8110876\n\n## Vietnam Export Import Commercial Joint Stock Bank\n\n7 Le Thi Hong Gam Street, 1, Ho Chi Minh City, Vietnam\n\nNguyen Thai Binh Ward, District Tel: 84 (8) 3821-0055 Fax: 84 (8) 3829-6063", + "recall": 0.9918367346938776, + "true_md": "SMFG 2011 220\n\n## Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation (China) Limited Beijing Branch\n\n## Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation (China) Limited Suzhou Industrial Park Sub-Branch\n\n## PT Bank Sumitomo Mitsui Indonesia\n\n## Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation (China) Limited Tianjin Branch\n\n## Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation (China) Limited Changshu Sub-Branch\n\n## Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation Malaysia Berhad\n\n## Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation (China) Limited Tianjin Binhai Sub-Branch\n\n## Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation (China) Limited Hangzhou Branch\n\n## SMBC Capital Markets (Asia) Limited\n\n## Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation (China) Limited Guangzhou Branch\n\n## Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation (China) Limited Shenyang Branch\n\n## SMBC Metro Investment Corporation\n\n## Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation (China) Limited Suzhou Branch\n\n## Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation (China) Limited Shenzhen Branch\n\n## Vietnam Export Import Commercial Joint Stock Bank\n\n23F, Metropolitan Towers, No.199 Shi Shan Road, Suzhou New District, Suzhou, Jiangsu 215011, The People’s Republic of China Tel: 86 (512) 6825-8205 Fax: 86 (512) 6825-6121\n\n23/F, Tower Two, Kerry Plaza, 1 Zhongxinsi Road, Futian District, Shenzhen 518048, The People’s Republic of China Tel: 86 (755) 2383-0980 Fax: 86 (755) 2383-0707\n\n7 Le Thi Hong Gam Street, Nguyen Thai Binh Ward, District 1, Ho Chi Minh City, Vietnam Tel: 84 (8) 3821-0055 Fax: 84 (8) 3829-6063\n\n1501, E Building, Shenyang Fortune Plaza, 59 Beizhan Road, Shenhe District, Shenyang, The People’s Republic of China Tel: 86 (24) 3128-7000 Fax: 86 (24) 3128-7005\n\n20th Floor, Rufino Pacific Tower, 6784 Ayala Avenue, Makati City, Metro Manila, The Philippines Tel: 63-2-8110845 Fax: 63-2-8110876\n\n12F, International Finance Place, No.8 Huaxia Road, Tianhe District, Guangzhou 510623, The People’s Republic of China Tel: 86 (20) 3819-1888 Fax: 86 (20) 3810-2028/2038\n\n7th Floor, One International Finance Centre, 1 Harbour View Street, Central, Hong Kong Special Administrative Region, The People’s Republic of China Tel: 852-2532-8500 Fax: 852-2532-8505\n\n23F, Golden Plaza, No.118, Qing Chun Road, Xia Cheng District, Hangzhou, Zhejiang 310003, The People’s Republic of China Tel: 86 (571) 2889-1111 Fax: 86 (571) 2889-6699\n\n8F, E2B, Binhai Financial Street, No.20, Guangchang East Road, TEDA, Tianjin 300457, The People’s Republic of China Tel: 86 (22) 6622-6677 Fax: 86 (22) 6628-1333\n\nLevel 35, The Chifley Tower, 2 Chifley Square, Sydney, NSW 2000, Australia Tel: 61 (2) 9376-1800 Fax: 61 (2) 9376-1863\n\n8F, Science Innovation Building (Kechuang Building), No.333 Dongnan Road, Changshu Southeast Economic Development Zone of Jiangsu, Changshu, Jiangsu, The People’s Republic of China Tel: 86 (512) 5235-5553 Fax: 86 (512) 5235-5552\n\n12F, The Exchange Tower 2, 189 Nanjing Road, Heping District, Tianjin 300051, The People’s Republic of China Tel: 86 (22) 2330-6677 Fax: 86 (22) 2319-2111\n\nLevel 50 & 51, Vista Tower, The Intermark, 182, Jalan Tun Razak, 50400 Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia Tel: 60 (3) 2168-1500 Fax: 60 (3) 2168-1770\n\n## Sumitomo Mitsui Finance Australia Limited\n\nSummitmas II, 10th Floor, JI. Jendral Sudirman Kav. 61-62, Jakarta 12190, Indonesia Tel: 62 (21) 522-7011 Fax: 62 (21) 522-7022\n\n16F, International Building, No.2, Suhua Road, Suzhou Industrial Park, Jiangsu Province 215021, The People’s Republic of China Tel: 86 (512) 6288-5018 Fax: 86 (512) 6288-5028\n\nUnit1601,16F, North Tower, Beijing Kerry Centre, No.1, Guang Hua Road, Chao Yang District, Beijing 100020, The People’s Republic of China Tel: 86 (10) 5920-4500 Fax: 86 (10) 5915-1080" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9508236485832002, + "doc_id": "564ae1f5b4a09f195649783d99833c0ba656b1e378da95a9295152fd9776beb7", + "edit_distance": 0.6136136136136137, + "f1_score": 0.9857369255150555, + "meteor": 0.8530371402448833, + "precision": 0.9873015873015873, + "pred_md": "## MANAGEMENT'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR FINANCIAL REPORTING December 31, 2013\n\nThe accompanying consolidated financial statements of Rogers Communications Inc. and its subsidiaries and all the information in Management's Discussion and Analysis (MD&A) are the responsibility of management and have been approved by the Board of Directors.\n\nManagement has prepared the consolidated financial statements in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board. The consolidated financial statements include certain amounts that are based on management's best estimates and judgments and, in their opinion, present fairly, in all material respects, Rogers Communications lnc.'s financial position, results of operations and cash flows. Management has prepared the financial information presented elsewhere in MD&A and has ensured that it is consistent with the consolidated financial statements.\n\nManagement has developed and maintains a system of internal controls that further enhances the integrity of the consolidated financial statements. The system of internal controls is supported by the internal audit function and includes management communication to employees about its policies on ethical business conduct.\n\nManagement believes these internal controls provide reasonable assurance that:\n\n- GLYPH<129> transactions are properly authorized and recorded\n- GLYPH<129> financial records are reliable and form a proper basis for the preparation of consolidated financial statements, and\n- GLYPH<129> properly account for and safeguard the assets of Rogers Communications Inc. and its subsidiaries.\n\nThe Board of Directors is responsible for overseeing management's responsibility for financial reporting and is ultimately responsible for reviewing and approving the consolidated financial statements. The Board carries out this responsibility through its Audit Committee.\n\nThe Audit Committee meets regularly with management, as well as the internal and external auditors, to discuss internal controls over the financial reporting process, auditing matters and financial reporting issues; to satisfy itself that each party is properly discharging its responsibilities; and to review MD&A, the consolidated financial statements and the external auditors' report. The Audit Committee reports its findings to the Board of Directors for its consideration when approving the consolidated financial statements for issuance to the shareholders. The Audit Committee also considers the engagement or re-appointment of the external auditors before submitting it to the board for review and for shareholder approval.\n\nThe consolidated financial statements have been audited by KPMG LLP, the external auditors, in accordance with Canadian generally accepted auditing standards and the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States) on behalf of the shareholders. KPMG LLP has full and free access to the Audit Committee.\n\nFebruary 11, 2014\n\nGuy Laurence President and Chief Executive Officer\n\nAnthony Staffieri, FCPA, FCA Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer\n\n## INDEPENDENT AUDITORS' REPORT OF REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM\n\nTo the Shareholders of Rogers Communications Inc.:\n\nWe have audited the accompanying consolidated financial statements of Rogers Communications Inc., which comprise the consolidated statements of financial position as at December 31, 2013 and 2012, the consolidated statements of income, comprehensive income, changes in shareholders' equity and cash flows for the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012, and notes, comprising a summary of significant accounting policies and other explanatory information.\n\n## Management's Responsibility for the Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nManagement is responsible for the preparation and fair presentation of these consolidated financial statements in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board, and for such internal control as management determines is necessary to enable the preparation of consolidated financial statements that are free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error.\n\n## Auditors' Responsibility\n\nOur responsibility is to express an opinion on these consolidated financial statements based on our audits. We conducted our audits in accordance with Canadian generally accepted auditing standards and the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we comply with ethical requirements and plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the consolidated financial statements are free from material misstatement.\n\n88\n\nROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC.\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\nAn audit involves performing procedures to obtain audit evidence about the amounts and disclosures in the consolidated financial statements. The procedures selected depend on our judgment, including the assessment of the risks of material misstatement of the consolidated financial statements, whether due to fraud or error. In making those risk assessments, we consider internal control relevant to the entity's preparation and fair presentation of the consolidated financial statements in order to design audit procedures that are appropriate in the circumstances. An audit also includes evaluating the appropriateness of accounting policies used and the reasonableness of accounting estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall presentation of the consolidated financial statements.\n\nWe believe that the audit evidence we have obtained in our audits is sufficient and appropriate to provide a basis for our audit opinion.\n\n## Opinion\n\nIn our opinion, the consolidated financial statements present fairly, in all material respects, the consolidated financial position of Rogers Communications Inc. as at December 31, 2013 and 2012, and its consolidated financial performance and its consolidated cash flows for the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012 in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board.\n\nChartered Professional Accountants, Licensed Public Accountants February 11, 2014 Toronto, Canada", + "recall": 0.9841772151898734, + "true_md": "## MANAGEMENT’S RESPONSIBILITY FOR FINANCIAL REPORTING\n\nDecember 31, 2013\n\nThe accompanying consolidated financial statements of Rogers Communications Inc. and its subsidiaries and all the information in Management’s Discussion and Analysis (MD&A) are the responsibility of management and have been approved by the Board of Directors.\n\nManagement has prepared the consolidated financial statements in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board. The consolidated financial statements include certain amounts that are based on management’s best estimates and judgments and, in their opinion, present fairly, in all material respects, Rogers Communications lnc.‘s financial position, results of operations and cash flows. Management has prepared the financial information presented elsewhere in MD&A and has ensured that it is consistent with the consolidated financial statements.\n\nManagement has developed and maintains a system of internal controls that further enhances the integrity of the consolidated financial statements. The system of internal controls is supported by the internal audit function and includes management communication to employees about its policies on ethical business conduct.\n\nManagement believes these internal controls provide reasonable assurance that:\n\nThe Board of Directors is responsible for overseeing management’s responsibility for financial reporting and is ultimately responsible for reviewing and approving the consolidated financial statements. The Board carries out this responsibility through its Audit Committee.\n\nTo the Shareholders of Rogers Communications Inc.:\n\nWe have audited the accompanying consolidated financial statements of Rogers Communications Inc., which comprise the consolidated statements of financial position as at December 31, 2013 and 2012, the consolidated statements of income, comprehensive income, changes in shareholders’ equity and cash flows for the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012, and notes, comprising a summary of significant accounting policies and other explanatory information.\n\nManagement is responsible for the preparation and fair presentation of these consolidated financial statements in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board, and for such internal control as management determines is necessary to enable the preparation of consolidated financial statements that are free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error.\n\nOur responsibility is to express an opinion on these consolidated financial statements based on our audits. We conducted our audits in accordance with Canadian generally accepted auditing standards and the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we comply with ethical requirements and plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the consolidated financial statements are free from material misstatement.\n\nAn audit involves performing procedures to obtain audit evidence about the amounts and disclosures in the consolidated financial statements. The procedures selected depend on our judgment, including the assessment of the risks of material misstatement of the consolidated financial statements, whether due to fraud or error. In making those risk assessments, we consider internal control relevant to the entity’s preparation and fair presentation of the consolidated financial statements in order to design audit procedures that are appropriate in the circumstances. An audit also includes evaluating the appropriateness of accounting policies used and the reasonableness of accounting estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall presentation of the consolidated financial statements.\n\nWe believe that the audit evidence we have obtained in our audits is sufficient and appropriate to provide a basis for our audit opinion.\n\nIn our opinion, the consolidated financial statements present fairly, in all material respects, the consolidated financial position of Rogers Communications Inc. as at December 31, 2013 and 2012, and its consolidated financial performance and its consolidated cash flows for the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012 in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board.\n\n88 ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\nThe Audit Committee meets regularly with management, as well as the internal and external auditors, to discuss internal controls over the financial reporting process, auditing matters and financial reporting issues; to satisfy itself that each party is properly discharging its responsibilities; and to review MD&A, the consolidated financial statements and the external auditors’ report. The Audit Committee reports its findings to the Board of Directors for its consideration when approving the consolidated financial statements for issuance to the shareholders. The Audit Committee also considers the engagement or re-appointment of the external auditors before submitting it to the board for review and for shareholder approval.\n\nThe consolidated financial statements have been audited by KPMG LLP, the external auditors, in accordance with Canadian generally accepted auditing standards and the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States) on behalf of the shareholders. KPMG LLP has full and free access to the Audit Committee.\n\nFebruary 11, 2014\n\n## INDEPENDENT AUDITORS’ REPORT OF REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM\n\n- GLYPH<129> transactions are properly authorized and recorded\n\n- GLYPH<129> financial records are reliable and form a proper basis for the preparation of consolidated financial statements, and\n\n- GLYPH<129> properly account for and safeguard the assets of Rogers Communications Inc. and its subsidiaries.\n\n## Management’s Responsibility for the Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n## Auditors’ Responsibility\n\n## Opinion\n\nGuy Laurence President and Chief Executive Officer\n\nAnthony Staffieri, FCPA, FCA Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer\n\nChartered Professional Accountants, Licensed Public Accountants\n\nFebruary 11, 2014 Toronto, Canada" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9108862677120694, + "doc_id": "85acc49004766fd083a9bd73d7a472b1f3b3e2234c2e28144a488f86b40ee1f1", + "edit_distance": 0.10404624277456648, + "f1_score": 0.9813084112149534, + "meteor": 0.9703303348176006, + "precision": 0.9905660377358491, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 2 - BUSINESS COMBINATIONS continued\n\nSince the acquisition date of 8 March 2013 through 31 December 2013, the Company has earned revenue of $42.3 million and generated net income of $12.6 million. The following reflects the acquisition's contribution to the Group as if the merger had occurred on 1 January 2013 instead of the closing date of 8 March 2013 (in thousands, except per share information):\n\nThe Company incurred $0.2 and $0.5 million for the years ended 31 December 2014 and 2013, respectively, for professional fees and services related to the Texon acquisition. These amounts are included in general and administrative expense in the consolidated statements of profit or loss, and other comprehensive income and financing activities in the consolidated statement of cash flows, respectively.\n\n## NOTE 3 - REVENUE\n\n## NOTE 4 - LEASE OPERATING AND PRODUCTION TAX EXPENSE\n\n- 74 -", + "recall": 0.9722222222222222, + "true_md": "## NOTE 2 – BUSINESS COMBINATIONS continued\n\nNOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS \n\nSince the acquisition date of 8 March 2013 through 31 December 2013, the Company has earned revenue of $42.3 million and generated net income of $12.6 million. The following reflects the acquisition’s contribution to the Group as if the merger had occurred on 1 January 2013 instead of the closing date of 8 March 2013 (in thousands, except per share information): \n\nThe Company incurred $0.2 and $0.5 million for the years ended 31 December 2014 and 2013, respectively, for professional fees and services related to the Texon acquisition. These amounts are included in general and administrative expense in the consolidated statements of profit or loss, and other comprehensive income and financing activities in the consolidated statement of cash flows, respectively. \n\n## NOTE 3 – REVENUE\n\n## NOTE 4 – LEASE OPERATING AND PRODUCTION TAX EXPENSE\n\n- 74 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7987706666542742, + "doc_id": "75d9153b84047128b2dc0db6c34895a4f78532a2e77cb90a3c7bfe0f1947c6ca", + "edit_distance": 0.4666666666666667, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9976851851851852, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Capital Ratio Information\n\nSumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation and Subsidiaries\n\n## ■ Capital Structure Information (Consolidated Capital Ratio (International Standard))\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n209\n\nSMBC", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "SMBC\n\n## Capital Ratio Information\n\n## ■ Capital Structure Information (Consolidated Capital Ratio (International Standard))\n\nSumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation and Subsidiaries\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n209" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8944310740717604, + "doc_id": "c4375f4bae0671a364485ffa73ddbb0e789eb8dcc233f0f181c4a1019550b61c", + "edit_distance": 0.16292134831460675, + "f1_score": 0.9440000000000002, + "meteor": 0.9229111123716602, + "precision": 0.9833333333333333, + "pred_md": "## COMPETITION\n\nWe compete on quality of service, scope of services, network coverage, sophistication of wireless technology, breadth of distribution, selection of devices, branding and positioning, and price.\n\n- GLYPH<129> Wireless technology: we were the first carrier in Canada to launch an LTE network catering to customers seeking the increased capacity and speed it provides. We compete with Bell, Telus MTS and Eastlink, all of whom operate LTE networks and we expect competition to grow over time as LTE becomes the prevailing technology in Canada. We also compete with these providers and other regional providers such as Wind Mobile, on HSPA and GSM networks and with providers that use alternative wireless technologies, like Wi-Fi 'hotspots'.\n- GLYPH<129> Product, branding and pricing: we compete nationally with Bell and Telus. We also complete with newer entrants, various regional players and resellers.\n- GLYPH<129> Distribution: we compete with other service providers for both dealers and prime locations for our own stores as well as third party retail distribution shelf space outlets.\n- GLYPH<129> Wireless networks and handset devices: the parity of wireless devices across networks has dramatically transformed the competitive landscape, and we expect this to continue and even intensify. Consolidation among new entrants or with incumbent carriers could alter the competitive landscape for Wireless regionally or nationally.\n- GLYPH<129> Spectrum: we are currently participating in an auction for 700 MHz spectrum. Industry Canada has also announced an auction for additional 2500 MHz spectrum in 2015 in which we may be restricted from participating in the geographic areas where we already hold more than 40 MHz of 2500 MHz spectrum. The outcomes of both of these auctions may increase competition.\n\n## WIRELESS FINANCIAL RESULTS\n\n- 1 Includes the cost of equipment sales and direct channel subsidies.\n\n## WIRELESS SUBSCRIBER RESULTS 1,2\n\n- 1 Does not include subscribers from our wireless home phone product.\n- 2 ARPU, subscriber counts and subscriber churn are key performance indicators. See 'Key Performance Indicators . '\n\n## Operating Revenue\n\nOur operating revenue depends on the size of our subscriber base, the average revenue per user and revenue from equipment sales.\n\n## Higher Network Revenue\n\nNetwork revenue includes revenue derived from voice and data services from postpaid monthly fees, airtime, data usage, long distance charges, optional service charges, inbound and outbound roaming charges and certain fees, as well as prepaid usage for airtime, data and other ancillary charges such as long distance.\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC.\n\n39\n\nMANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS", + "recall": 0.9076923076923077, + "true_md": "## COMPETITION\n\nWe compete on quality of service, scope of services, network coverage, sophistication of wireless technology, breadth of distribution, selection of devices, branding and positioning, and price.\n\n- GLYPH<129> Wireless technology: we were the first carrier in Canada to launch an LTE network catering to customers seeking the increased capacity and speed it provides. We compete with Bell, Telus MTS and Eastlink, all of whom operate LTE networks and we expect competition to grow over time as LTE becomes the prevailing technology in Canada. We also compete with these providers and other regional providers such as Wind Mobile, on HSPA and GSM networks and with providers that use alternative wireless technologies, like Wi-Fi “hotspots”.\n\n- GLYPH<129> Product, branding and pricing: we compete nationally with Bell and Telus. We also complete with newer entrants, various regional players and resellers.\n\n- GLYPH<129> Distribution: we compete with other service providers for both dealers and prime locations for our own stores as well as third party retail distribution shelf space outlets.\n\n- GLYPH<129> Wireless networks and handset devices: the parity of wireless devices across networks has dramatically transformed the competitive landscape, and we expect this to continue and even intensify. Consolidation among new entrants or with incumbent carriers could alter the competitive landscape for Wireless regionally or nationally.\n\n- GLYPH<129> Spectrum: we are currently participating in an auction for 700 MHz spectrum. Industry Canada has also announced an auction for additional 2500 MHz spectrum in 2015 in which we may be restricted from participating in the geographic areas where we already hold more than 40 MHz of 2500 MHz spectrum. The outcomes of both of these auctions may increase competition.\n\n## WIRELESS FINANCIAL RESULTS\n\n## WIRELESS SUBSCRIBER RESULTS 1,2\n\n1 Does not include subscribers from our wireless home phone product.\n\n2 ARPU, subscriber counts and subscriber churn are key performance indicators. See “Key Performance Indicators ” .\n\nMANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AN D ANALYSIS\n\n(IN THOUSANDS) WIRELESS POSTPAID AND PREPAID SUBSCRIBERS\n\n(IN MILLIONS OF DOLLARS) WIRELESS NETWORK REVENUE\n\n($) WIRELESS POSTPAID MONTHLY ARPU\n\n(%) WIRELESS POSTPAID MONTHLY CHURN\n\n1 Includes the cost of equipment sales and direct channel subsidies.\n\n## Operating Revenue\n\nOur operating revenue depends on the size of our subscriber base, the average revenue per user and revenue from equipment sales.\n\nNetwork revenue includes revenue derived from voice and data services from postpaid monthly fees, airtime, data usage, long distance charges, optional service charges, inbound and outbound roaming charges and certain fees, as well as prepaid usage for airtime, data and other ancillary charges such as long distance.\n\n## Higher Network Revenue\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 39" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7590994812356263, + "doc_id": "daeb510a471f22f6847c35bb84c523448a3e21e33302f16f840ac4ec7258b98b", + "edit_distance": 0.2, + "f1_score": 0.9714285714285715, + "meteor": 0.9867216117216118, + "precision": 0.9444444444444444, + "pred_md": "Consolidated Balance Sheets\n\nSMFG\n\n## (Continued)\n\nSee accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n71", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "SMFG Consolidated Balance Sheets\n\n(Continued)\n\nSee accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.\n\nSMFG 2011 71" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9306755816462384, + "doc_id": "f5c667401b7dc9328ad7e1975c598b092eaf4c23cb8f2f3c7c84e61f047550bc", + "edit_distance": 0.1710794297352342, + "f1_score": 0.994818652849741, + "meteor": 0.8248845193633868, + "precision": 0.9948186528497409, + "pred_md": "## Nordstrom, Inc.\n\n## Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nDollar and share amounts in millions except per share, per option and per unit amounts\n\nAs of January 31, 2015, our state and foreign net operating loss carryforwards for income tax purposes were approximately $3 and $11, respectively. As of February 1, 2014, our federal, state and foreign net operating loss carryforwards for income tax purposes were approximately $4, $24 and $0, respectively. The state net operating loss carryforwards are subject to certain statutory limitations of the Internal Revenue Code and applicable state law. If not utilized, a portion of our state and foreign net operating loss carryforwards will begin to expire in 2031 and 2033, respectively.\n\nA reconciliation of the beginning and ending amount of unrecognized tax benefits is as follows:\n\nAt the end of 2014, 2013 and 2012, $13, $7 and $7 of the ending gross unrecognized tax benefit related to items which, if recognized, would affect the effective tax rate.\n\nOur income tax expense included a decrease to expense of $1 in both 2014 and 2012, and an increase to expense of $1 in 2013, for taxrelated interest and penalties. At the end of 2014, 2013 and 2012, our liability for interest and penalties was $2, $7 and $7.\n\nWe file income tax returns in the U.S. and a limited number of foreign jurisdictions. With few exceptions, we are no longer subject to federal, state and local, or non-U.S. income tax examinations for years before 2010. Unrecognized tax benefits related to federal, state and local tax positions may decrease by $4 by January 30, 2016, due to the completion of examinations and the expiration of various statutes of limitations.\n\n## NOTE 15: EARNINGS PER SHARE\n\nEarnings per basic share is computed using the weighted-average number of common shares outstanding during the year. Earnings per diluted share uses the weighted-average number of common shares outstanding during the year plus dilutive common stock equivalents, primarily stock options. Dilutive common stock reflects the issuance of stock for all outstanding options that could be exercised, and would also reduce the amount of earnings that each share is entitled to. Anti-dilutive shares (including stock options and other shares) are excluded from the calculation of diluted shares and earnings per diluted share because their impact could increase earnings per diluted share.\n\nThe computation of earnings per share is as follows:\n\nNordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 61", + "recall": 0.9948186528497409, + "true_md": "As of January 31, 2015, our state and foreign net operating loss carryforwards for income tax purposes were approximately $3 and $11, respectively. As of February 1, 2014, our federal, state and foreign net operating loss carryforwards for income tax purposes were approximately $4, $24 and $0, respectively. The state net operating loss carryforwards are subject to certain statutory limitations of the Internal Revenue Code and applicable state law. If not utilized, a portion of our state and foreign net operating loss carryforwards will begin to expire in 2031 and 2033, respectively.\n\nA reconciliation of the beginning and ending amount of unrecognized tax benefits is as follows:\n\nAt the end of 2014, 2013 and 2012, $13, $7 and $7 of the ending gross unrecognized tax benefit related to items which, if recognized, would affect the effective tax rate.\n\nOur income tax expense included a decrease to expense of $1 in both 2014 and 2012, and an increase to expense of $1 in 2013, for tax- related interest and penalties. At the end of 2014, 2013 and 2012, our liability for interest and penalties was $2, $7 and $7.\n\nWe file income tax returns in the U.S. and a limited number of foreign jurisdictions. With few exceptions, we are no longer subject to federal, state and local, or non-U.S. income tax examinations for years before 2010. Unrecognized tax benefits related to federal, state and local tax positions may decrease by $4 by January 30, 2016, due to the completion of examinations and the expiration of various statutes of limitations.\n\nNOTE 15: EARNINGS PER SHARE Earnings per basic share is computed using the weighted-average number of common shares outstanding during the year. Earnings per diluted share uses the weighted-average number of common shares outstanding during the year plus dilutive common stock equivalents, primarily stock options. Dilutive common stock reflects the issuance of stock for all outstanding options that could be exercised, and would also reduce the amount of earnings that each share is entitled to. Anti-dilutive shares (including stock options and other shares) are excluded from the calculation of diluted shares and earnings per diluted share because their impact could increase earnings per diluted share.\n\nThe computation of earnings per share is as follows:\n\nNordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 61\n\n## NOTE 15: EARNINGS PER SHARE Earnings per basic share is computed using the weighted-average number of common shares outstanding during the year. Earnings per\n\nNordstrom, Inc. Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements Dollar and share amounts in millions except per share, per option and per unit amounts" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9159894219190506, + "doc_id": "472f0176aa82bda568e93b68465a6c0f2534fc5d920800aa7119dd3bcc4346b0", + "edit_distance": 0.6557377049180327, + "f1_score": 0.973305954825462, + "meteor": 0.8042453451432197, + "precision": 0.983402489626556, + "pred_md": "SMFG\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n- (i) Unconsolidated subsidiaries accounted for by the equity method\n\nThe number of unconsolidated subsidiaries accounted for by the equity method is as follows:\n\nPrincipal companies:\n\nSumitomo Mitsui Auto Service Company, Limited\n\nPromise Co., Ltd.\n\nDaiwa SB Investments Ltd.\n\nChanges in the equity method affiliates in the fiscal year ended March 31, 2011 are as follows:\n\n4 companies including Famima Credit Corporation became equity method affiliates due mainly to acquisitions of stocks.\n\n6 companies including Cedyna Financial Corporation were excluded from the scope of equity method affiliates because they became consolidated subsidiaries through a third-party allotment of new shares issued by the company. 9 companies including Daiwa SMBC Capital Co., Ltd. were also excluded due mainly to sales of stocks. (iii) Unconsolidated subsidiaries that are not accounted for\n\nby the equity method\n\n206 subsidiaries including SMLC MAHOGANY CO., LTD. are operators of silent partnerships for lease transactions and their assets and profits/losses do not belong to them substantially. Therefore, they have not been accounted for by the equity method pursuant to Article 10, Paragraph 1, Item 2 of the Consolidated Financial Statements Regulations.\n\n(iv) Affiliates that are not accounted for by the equity method\n\nPrincipal company:\n\nDaiwa SB Investments (USA) Ltd.\n\nAffiliates that are not accounted for by the equity method are excluded from the scope of equity method because the attributable portions to SMFG from their total amounts in terms of net income and retained earnings are immaterial, and as such, they do not hinder a rational judgment of SMFG's financial position and results of operations when excluded from the scope of equity method.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n78\n\n- (c) The balance sheet dates of consolidated subsidiaries (i) The balance sheet dates of the consolidated subsidiaries\n\nare as follows:\n\n(ii) The subsidiaries with balance sheets dated June 30, July 31, September 30, November 30 and January 31 are consolidated using the financial statements as of March 31 for the purpose of consolidation. The subsidiary with balance sheets dated October 31 is consolidated using the financial statements as of January 31. Certain subsidiaries with balance sheets dated December 31 are consolidated using the financial statements as of March 31. Other subsidiaries are consolidated using the financial statements on their respective balance sheet dates.\n\nAppropriate adjustments are made for material transactions during the periods between their respective balance sheet dates and the consolidated closing date, if the financial statements of the consolidated subsidiaries were based on dates other than March 31.\n\n## (d) Special purpose entities\n\n(i) Outline of special purpose entities and transactions SMBC provides loans, credit lines and liquidity lines to 12 special purpose entities ('SPEs') for their funding needs and issuing of commercial paper. The SPEs are engaged in purchases of monetary claims such as receivables from SMBC customers and incorporated under the laws of the Cayman Islands or as intermediate corporations with limited liabilities. SMBC has no voting rights in the SPEs and sends no directors or employees. Accordingly, SMFG does not consolidate these SPEs.\n\nThe combined assets and liabilities of the 12 SPEs as of their most recent closing dates of 2011 were ¥2,274,626 million ($27,356 million) and ¥2,274,424 million ($27,353 million), respectively. The respective amounts of 2010 were ¥2,261,647 million and ¥2,261,476 million. (ii) The amount of principal transactions with the SPEs as of and for the fiscal years ended March 31, 2011 and 2010 were as follows:", + "recall": 0.9634146341463414, + "true_md": "SMFG Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n- (c) The balance sheet dates of consolidated subsidiaries\n\n- (i) The balance sheet dates of the consolidated subsidiaries are as follows:\n\n- (i) Unconsolidated subsidiaries accounted for by the equity method\n\nThe number of unconsolidated subsidiaries accounted for by the equity method is as follows:\n\n- (ii) Equity method affiliates\n\nThe number of the equity method affiliates is as follows:\n\nPrincipal company:\n\nSBCS Co., Ltd.\n\nPrincipal companies:\n\nSumitomo Mitsui Auto Service Company, Limited\n\nPromise Co., Ltd.\n\nDaiwa SB Investments Ltd.\n\nChanges in the equity method affiliates in the fiscal year ended March 31, 2011 are as follows:\n\n4 companies including Famima Credit Corporation became equity method affiliates due mainly to acquisitions of stocks.\n\n6 companies including Cedyna Financial Corporation were excluded from the scope of equity method affiliates because they became consolidated subsidiaries through a third-party allotment of new shares issued by the company. 9 companies including Daiwa SMBC Capital Co., Ltd. were also excluded due mainly to sales of stocks.\n\n- (iii) Unconsolidated subsidiaries that are not accounted for by the equity method\n\nAppropriate adjustments are made for material transactions during the periods between their respective balance sheet dates and the consolidated closing date, if the financial statements of the consolidated subsidiaries were based on dates other than March 31.\n\n(ii) The subsidiaries with balance sheets dated June 30, July 31, September 30, November 30 and January 31 are consolidated using the financial statements as of March 31 for the purpose of consolidation. The subsidiary with balance sheets dated October 31 is consolidated using the financial statements as of January 31. Certain subsidiaries with balance sheets dated December 31 are consolidated using the financial statements as of March 31. Other subsidiaries are consolidated using the financial statements on their respective balance sheet dates.\n\n- (d) Special purpose entities\n\nThe combined assets and liabilities of the 12 SPEs as of their most recent closing dates of 2011 were ¥2,274,626 million ($27,356 million) and ¥2,274,424 million ($27,353 million), respectively. The respective amounts of 2010 were ¥2,261,647 million and ¥2,261,476 million. (ii) The amount of principal transactions with the SPEs as of and for the fiscal years ended March 31, 2011 and 2010 were as follows:\n\n(i) Outline of special purpose entities and transactions SMBC provides loans, credit lines and liquidity lines to 12 special purpose entities (“SPEs”) for their funding needs and issuing of commercial paper. The SPEs are engaged in purchases of monetary claims such as receivables from SMBC customers and incorporated under the laws of the Cayman Islands or as intermediate corporations with limited liabilities. SMBC has no voting rights in the SPEs and sends no directors or employees. Accordingly, SMFG does not consolidate these SPEs.\n\nPrincipal company:\n\nDaiwa SB Investments (USA) Ltd.\n\nAffiliates that are not accounted for by the equity method are excluded from the scope of equity method because the attributable portions to SMFG from their total amounts in terms of net income and retained earnings are immaterial, and as such, they do not hinder a rational judgment of SMFG’s financial position and results of operations when excluded from the scope of equity method.\n\nSMFG 2011 78\n\n206 subsidiaries including SMLC MAHOGANY CO., LTD. are operators of silent partnerships for lease transac- tions and their assets and profits/losses do not belong to them substantially. Therefore, they have not been accounted for by the equity method pursuant to Article 10, Paragraph 1, Item 2 of the Consolidated Financial Statements Regulations.\n\n- (iv) Affiliates that are not accounted for by the equity method" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6887352153112035, + "doc_id": "d1de5c6a8d0dd9d34d8a464a03de3cc5548b10f7e597c1bebe79b82126610969", + "edit_distance": 0.35697115384615385, + "f1_score": 0.9825918762088975, + "meteor": 0.6547651810259749, + "precision": 0.9806949806949807, + "pred_md": "## UNITED STATES SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION Washington, D.C. 20549\n\nFORM 10-K\n\n(Mark One)\n\nANNUAL REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934\n\nFor the fiscal year ended January 31, 2015\n\nor\n\nTRANSITION REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934 For the transition period from \\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_ to\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\n\nCommission file number 001-15059\n\n## NORDSTROM, INC.\n\n(Exact name of registrant as specified in its charter)\n\n## Washington\n\n91-0515058\n\n(State or other jurisdiction of incorporation or organization)\n\n(I.R.S. Employer Identification No.)\n\n## 1617 Sixth Avenue, Seattle, Washington\n\n98101\n\n(Address of principal executive offices)\n\n(Zip Code)\n\nRegistrant's telephone number, including area code 206-628-2111\n\nSecurities registered pursuant to Section 12(b) of the Act:\n\n## Title of each class\n\nName of each exchange on which registered\n\nCommon stock, without par value\n\nNew York Stock Exchange\n\nSecurities registered pursuant to Section 12(g) of the Act: None\n\nIndicate by check mark if the registrant is a well-known seasoned issuer, as defined in Rule 405 of the Securities Act. YES NO Indicate by check mark if the registrant is not required to file reports pursuant to Section 13 or Section 15(d) of the Act. YES NO\n\nIndicate by check mark whether the registrant (1) has filed all reports required to be filed by Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to file such reports), and (2) has been subject to such filing requirements for the past 90 days. YES NO\n\nIndicate by check mark whether the registrant has submitted electronically and posted on its corporate Website, if any, every Interactive Data File required to be submitted and posted pursuant to Rule 405 of Regulation S-T during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to submit and post such files). YES NO\n\nIndicate by check mark if disclosure of delinquent filers pursuant to Item 405 of Regulation S-K is not contained herein, and will not be contained, to the best of registrant's knowledge, in definitive proxy or information statements incorporated by reference in Part III of this Form 10-K or any amendment to this Form 10-K.\n\nIndicate by check mark whether the registrant is a large accelerated filer, an accelerated filer, a non-accelerated filer, or a smaller reporting company. See the definitions of 'large accelerated filer,' 'accelerated filer' and 'smaller reporting company' in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act.\n\nLarge accelerated filer\n\nAccelerated filer\n\nNon-accelerated filer (Do not check if a smaller reporting company)\n\nSmaller reporting company\n\nIndicate by check mark whether the registrant is a shell company (as defined in Rule 12b-2 of the Act). YES NO\n\nAs of August 1, 2014 the aggregate market value of the Registrant's voting and non-voting stock held by non-affiliates of the Registrant was approximately $10.6 billion using the closing sales price on that day of $68.95. On March 2, 2015, 190,405,729 shares of common stock were outstanding.\n\n## DOCUMENTS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE\n\nPortions of the Proxy Statement for the 2015 Annual Meeting of Shareholders scheduled to be held on May 5, 2015 are incorporated into Part III.\n\nNordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 1", + "recall": 0.9844961240310077, + "true_md": "# UNITED STATES SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION Washington, D.C. 20549\n\n# FORM 10-K\n\n## (Mark One)\n\nTRANSITION REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934 For the transition period from \\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_ to\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\n\nCommission file number 001-15059\n\nor\n\n# NORDSTROM, INC. (Exact name of registrant as specified in its charter)\n\nNORDSTROM, INC. (Exact name of registrant as specified in its charter)\n\nWashington (State or other jurisdiction of\n\nWashington (State or other jurisdiction of incorporation or organization)\n\n1617 Sixth Avenue, Seattle, Washington (Address of principal executive offices)\n\n1617 Sixth Avenue, Seattle, Washington (Address of principal executive offices)\n\n(Address of principal executive offices) (Zip Code) Registrant’s telephone number, including area code 206-628-2111\n\nSecurities registered pursuant to Section 12(b) of the Act:\n\n91-0515058 (I.R.S. Employer\n\n91-0515058 (I.R.S. Employer Identification No.)\n\n98101 (Zip Code)\n\n98101 (Zip Code) 206-628-2111\n\nCommon stock, without par value New York Stock Exchange Securities registered pursuant to Section 12(g) of the Act: None\n\nTitle of each class Common stock, without par value\n\nTitle of each class Common stock, without par value\n\nName of each exchange on which registered New York Stock Exchange\n\nName of each exchange on which registered New York Stock Exchange None\n\nIndicate by check mark if the registrant is a well-known seasoned issuer, as defined in Rule 405 of the Securities Act. YES NO \n\nIndicate by check mark if the registrant is not required to file reports pursuant to Section 13 or Section 15(d) of the Act. YES NO \n\nIndicate by check mark whether the registrant (1) has filed all reports required to be filed by Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to file such reports), and (2) has been subject to such filing requirements for the past 90 days. YES NO \n\nAct of 1934 during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to file such reports), and (2) has been subject to such filing requirements for the past 90 days. YES NO \n\nIndicate by check mark whether the registrant has submitted electronically and posted on its corporate Website, if any, every Interactive Data File required to be submitted and posted pursuant to Rule 405 of Regulation S-T during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to submit and post such files). YES NO \n\nIndicate by check mark if disclosure of delinquent filers pursuant to Item 405 of Regulation S-K is not contained herein, and will not be contained, to the best of registrant’s knowledge, in definitive proxy or information statements incorporated by reference in Part III of this Form 10-K or any amendment to this Form 10-K. \n\nIndicate by check mark whether the registrant is a large accelerated filer, an accelerated filer, a non-accelerated filer, or a smaller reporting company. See the definitions of “large accelerated filer,” “accelerated filer” and “smaller reporting company” in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act.\n\nLarge accelerated filer Non-accelerated filer \n\n## DOCUMENTS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE Portions of the Proxy Statement for the 2015 Annual Meeting of Shareholders scheduled to be held on May 5, 2015 are incorporated into\n\nLarge accelerated filer Non-accelerated filer (Do not check if a smaller reporting company)\n\nAccelerated filer Smaller reporting company \n\nAccelerated filer Smaller reporting company \n\nIndicate by check mark whether the registrant is a shell company (as defined in Rule 12b-2 of the Act). YES NO \n\nAs of August 1, 2014 the aggregate market value of the Registrant’s voting and non-voting stock held by non-affiliates of the Registrant was approximately $10.6 billion using the closing sales price on that day of $68.95. On March 2, 2015, 190,405,729 shares of common stock were outstanding.\n\nDOCUMENTS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE Portions of the Proxy Statement for the 2015 Annual Meeting of Shareholders scheduled to be held on May 5, 2015 are incorporated into Part III.\n\nNordstrom, Inc. and subsidiaries 1\n\nANNUAL REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934 For the fiscal year ended January 31, 2015 \n\n# ANNUAL REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934 For the fiscal year ended January 31, 2015" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7757464104941578, + "doc_id": "1783de5a170022b06dbb946d8d644ee824f02fe2e5c3d26a1bb8133232436ad5", + "edit_distance": 0.7558823529411764, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9644982715820032, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Shogo Sekimoto\n\nTokyo Corporate Banking Division (Tokyo Corporate Banking Depts. III, IV , and VI)\n\n## Toshiyuki Teramoto\n\nDeputy Head of Middle Market Banking Unit (in charge of East Japan)\n\n## Manabu Narita\n\nGeneral Manager, Planning Dept., Corporate Banking Unit & Middle Market Banking Unit\n\n## Kunio Yokoyama\n\nDeputy Head of Middle Market Banking Unit (in charge of East Japan)\n\n## Kozo Ogino\n\nNagoya Corporate Banking Division (Nagoya Corporate Banking\n\nDept.) Head of Nagoya Middle Market Banking Division\n\n## William M. Ginn\n\nDeputy Head of The Americas Division General Manager, Corporate Banking Dept.-II, Americas Division Chairman of SMBC Leasing and Finance, Inc.\n\n## Chan Chi Keung, Chris\n\nGeneral Manager, Corporate Banking Dept., Greater China\n\n## Directors\n\n## Kazunori Okuyama\n\nVice Chairman and President of Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation (China) Limited\n\n## Etsutaka Inoue\n\nHead of Osaka Minami Middle Market Banking Division\n\n## Katsuhiko Kanabe\n\nIT Planning Dept.\n\nIT Business Strategy Planning Dept., Operations Planning Dept., Operations Support Dept.\n\n## Yasushi Sakai\n\nFinancial Accounting Dept.\n\n## Hiroshi Mishima\n\nGeneral Manager, Planning Dept., Treasury Unit\n\n## Jun Ota\n\nGeneral Manager, Planning Dept., Investment Banking Unit\n\n## Yasuyuki Kawasaki\n\nGeneral Manager, Planning Dept., International Banking Unit\n\n## Fumiaki Kurahara\n\nGeneral Manager, Structured Finance Dept.\n\n## Makoto Takashima\n\nGeneral Manager, Corporate Planning Dept.\n\n## Ryoji Yukino\n\nDeputy Head of Consumer Banking Unit (in charge of East Japan)\n\n## Hiroaki Hattori\n\nHead of Kobe Middle Market Banking Division\n\n## Kiyoshi Miura\n\nHead of Osaka Kita Middle Market Banking Division\n\n## Masaki Ashibe\n\nDeputy Head of Middle Market Banking Unit (Credit Dept. II)\n\n## Seiichi Ueno\n\nGeneral Manager, Credit Dept., Corporate Banking Unit\n\n## Hiromitsu Kawagoe\n\nDeputy Head of Corporate Advisory Division\n\n## Masahiro Nakagawa\n\nGeneral Manager, Real Estate Corporate Business Office\n\n## Hiroichi Fukuda\n\nGeneral Manager, Electronic Commerce Banking Dept.\n\n## Hitoshi Ishii\n\nHead of Tokyo Higashi Middle Market Banking Division\n\n## Koji Kimura\n\nGeneral Manager, Corporate Risk Management Dept.\n\n## Atsushi Kuroda\n\nGeneral Manager, Tokyo Corporate Banking Dept. V\n\n## Seiji Sato\n\nGeneral Manager, Tokyo Corporate Banking Dept. III\n\n## Masayuki Shimura\n\nHead of The Asia Pacific Division\n\n## Katsunori Tanizaki\n\nGeneral Manager, IT Planning Dept.\n\n## Tomohiro Nishikawa\n\nHead of Kyoto Hokuriku Middle Market Banking Division and General Manager, Kyoto Corporate Business Office-I\n\n## Takafumi Yamahiro\n\nHead of Shinjuku Middle Market Banking Division\n\n## Minami Aida\n\nGeneral Manager, Seoul Branch, Global Korea Corporate Banking Department\n\n## Shigeki Azumai\n\nDeputy Head of Consumer Banking Unit (in charge of West Japan)\n\n## Tatsufumi Ishibashi\n\nDeputy Head of Corporate Advisory Division\n\n## Mitsuru Ono\n\nGeneral Manager, Credit Management Dept., International Banking Unit\n\n## Hirobumi Koga\n\nHead of Tokyo Toshin Middle Market Banking Division and Saitama Ikebukuro Middle Market Banking Division\n\n## Toshiki Ito\n\nHead of Shibuya Middle Market Banking Division and Yokohama Middle Market Banking Division\n\n## Takashi Matsushita\n\nGeneral Manager, Credit & Investment Planning Dept.\n\n## Noboru Rachi\n\nGeneral Manager, Shinjuku Nishiguchi Corporate Business Office-I\n\n## Takehisa Ikeda\n\nGeneral Manager, Tokyo Corporate Banking Dept. VI\n\n## Yukihiko Onishi\n\nGeneral Manager, Human Resources Dept.\n\n## Hiroyuki Okutani\n\nGeneral Manager, Planning Dept., Consumer Banking Unit\n\n## Hajime Kunisaki\n\nGeneral Manager, Operations Planning Dept.\n\n## Hisanori Kokuga\n\nGeneral Manager, Osaka Corporate Banking Dept. I\n\n## Koichi Noda\n\nGeneral Manager, Tokyo Corporate Banking Dept. II\n\n## Shosuke Mori\n\nGeneral Manager, Tokyo Corporate Banking Dept. I\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n213", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## Shogo Sekimoto\n\n## Toshiyuki Teramoto\n\n## Hiroichi Fukuda\n\n## Hitoshi Ishii\n\n## Koji Kimura\n\n## Atsushi Kuroda\n\n## Seiji Sato\n\n## Masayuki Shimura\n\n## Katsunori Tanizaki\n\n## Tomohiro Nishikawa\n\n## Takafumi Yamahiro\n\n## Minami Aida\n\n## Shigeki Azumai\n\n## Tatsufumi Ishibashi\n\n## Mitsuru Ono\n\n## Hirobumi Koga\n\n## Toshiki Ito\n\n## Takashi Matsushita\n\n## Noboru Rachi\n\n## Takehisa Ikeda\n\n## Yukihiko Onishi\n\n## Hiroyuki Okutani\n\n## Hajime Kunisaki\n\n## Hisanori Kokuga\n\n## Koichi Noda\n\n## Shosuke Mori\n\n## Masahiro Nakagawa\n\n## Hiromitsu Kawagoe\n\n## Seiichi Ueno\n\n## Masaki Ashibe\n\n## Kiyoshi Miura\n\n## Hiroaki Hattori\n\n## Ryoji Yukino\n\n## Makoto Takashima\n\n## Fumiaki Kurahara\n\n## Yasuyuki Kawasaki\n\n## Jun Ota\n\n## Hiroshi Mishima\n\n## Yasushi Sakai\n\n## Katsuhiko Kanabe\n\n## Etsutaka Inoue\n\n## Kazunori Okuyama\n\n## Chan Chi Keung, Chris\n\n## William M. Ginn\n\n## Kozo Ogino\n\n## Kunio Yokoyama\n\n## Manabu Narita\n\nSMFG 2011 213\n\nTokyo Corporate Banking Division (Tokyo Corporate Banking Depts. III, IV, and VI)\n\nDeputy Head of Middle Market Banking Unit (in charge of East Japan)\n\nGeneral Manager, Planning Dept., Corporate Banking Unit & Middle Market Banking Unit\n\nDeputy Head of Middle Market Banking Unit (in charge of East Japan)\n\nNagoya Corporate Banking Division (Nagoya Corporate Banking Dept.) Head of Nagoya Middle Market Banking Division\n\nDeputy Head of The Americas Division General Manager, Corporate Banking Dept.-II, Americas Division Chairman of SMBC Leasing and Finance, Inc.\n\nGeneral Manager, Corporate Banking Dept., Greater China Directors\n\nVice Chairman and President of Sumitomo Mitsui Banking Corporation (China) Limited\n\nHead of Osaka Minami Middle Market Banking Division\n\nIT Planning Dept. IT Business Strategy Planning Dept., Operations Planning Dept., Operations Support Dept.\n\nFinancial Accounting Dept.\n\nGeneral Manager, Planning Dept., Treasury Unit\n\nGeneral Manager, Planning Dept., Investment Banking Unit\n\nGeneral Manager, Planning Dept., International Banking Unit\n\nGeneral Manager, Structured Finance Dept.\n\nGeneral Manager, Corporate Planning Dept.\n\nDeputy Head of Consumer Banking Unit (in charge of East Japan)\n\nHead of Kobe Middle Market Banking Division\n\nHead of Osaka Kita Middle Market Banking Division\n\nDeputy Head of Middle Market Banking Unit (Credit Dept. II)\n\nGeneral Manager, Credit Dept., Corporate Banking Unit\n\nDeputy Head of Corporate Advisory Division\n\nGeneral Manager, Real Estate Corporate Business Office\n\nGeneral Manager, Tokyo Corporate Banking Dept. I\n\nGeneral Manager, Tokyo Corporate Banking Dept. II\n\nGeneral Manager, Osaka Corporate Banking Dept. I\n\nGeneral Manager, Operations Planning Dept.\n\nGeneral Manager, Planning Dept., Consumer Banking Unit\n\nGeneral Manager, Human Resources Dept.\n\nGeneral Manager, Tokyo Corporate Banking Dept. VI\n\nGeneral Manager, Shinjuku Nishiguchi Corporate Business Office-I\n\nGeneral Manager, Credit & Investment Planning Dept.\n\nHead of Shibuya Middle Market Banking Division and Yokohama Middle Market Banking Division\n\nHead of Tokyo Toshin Middle Market Banking Division and Saitama Ikebukuro Middle Market Banking Division\n\nGeneral Manager, Credit Management Dept., International Banking Unit\n\nDeputy Head of Corporate Advisory Division\n\nDeputy Head of Consumer Banking Unit (in charge of West Japan)\n\nGeneral Manager, Seoul Branch, Global Korea Corporate Banking Department\n\nHead of Shinjuku Middle Market Banking Division\n\nHead of Kyoto Hokuriku Middle Market Banking Division and General Manager, Kyoto Corporate Business Office-I\n\nGeneral Manager, IT Planning Dept.\n\nHead of The Asia Pacific Division\n\nGeneral Manager, Tokyo Corporate Banking Dept. III\n\nGeneral Manager, Tokyo Corporate Banking Dept. V\n\nGeneral Manager, Corporate Risk Management Dept.\n\nHead of Tokyo Higashi Middle Market Banking Division\n\nGeneral Manager, Electronic Commerce Banking Dept." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.826648112033139, + "doc_id": "dcabb36a10b34b3eb0e8e9b996aab2276da2b0120867c829613cb1c337653816", + "edit_distance": 0.43478260869565216, + "f1_score": 0.97196261682243, + "meteor": 0.9669677951683862, + "precision": 0.9811320754716981, + "pred_md": "Deposits (Nonconsolidated)\n\nSMBC\n\n## Balance of Investment Trusts, Classified by Type of Customer\n\nNote: Balance of investment trusts is recognized on a contract basis and measured according to each fund's net asset balance at the fiscal year-end.\n\n## Balance of Time Deposits, Classified by Maturity\n\nNote: The figures above do not include installment savings.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n165", + "recall": 0.9629629629629629, + "true_md": "SMBC Deposits (Nonconsolidated)\n\n## Balance of Investment Trusts, Classified by Type of Customer\n\n## Balance of Time Deposits, Classified by Maturity\n\nSMFG 2011 165\n\nNote: Balance of investment trusts is recognized on a contract basis and measured according to each fund’s net asset balance at the fiscal year-end.\n\nNote: The figures above do not include installment savings." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8885332521568946, + "doc_id": "7762d5ed8d45219bd9fad1ee74753208738f59049437b69db97ac07afeb32881", + "edit_distance": 0.5335820895522388, + "f1_score": 0.937984496124031, + "meteor": 0.8707879539448858, + "precision": 0.9552631578947368, + "pred_md": "8\n\n| LETTER TO SHAREHOLDERS\n\n## Growing Demand for U.S. Natural Gas Will Drive Improved Prices in the Years Ahead\n\nSeveral factors are emerging in the U.S. that will drive increased demand for natural gas, which in turn could improve out year natural gas prices:\n\n## Growing momentum for CNG passenger and LNG long-haul truck vehicles\n\nEnormous cost savings are available to consumers and businesses that chose to use natural gas as an alternative transportation fuel ($1.39 per gallon for CNG in Oklahoma, for example, compared to $3.75-$4.00 per gallon for gasoline and diesel).\n\n## Growing industrial demand\n\nWith recent low prices for domestic natural gas, U.S. industries that utilize natural gas as a feedstock in their manufacturing processes have a significant cost advantage compared with international peers whose feedstock is indexed either to oil or global natural gas prices.\n\n## Continuing and accelerating shift from coal to natural gas for U.S. electrical power generation\n\nTo clean our environment, dozens of aging coal-powered electricity plants will be retired in the next decade and replaced with the cleaner alternative of natural gas. A combination of shifting power sources and higher utilization within existing gas-fired power plants will likely increase natural gas demand by 10-15 bcf per day over the next decade.\n\n## Conversion of U.S. LNG import facilities to LNG export facilities\n\nWith increasing demand for natural gas around the world and the abundance of U.S. natural gas reserves, producers will be able to tap into higher-margin markets in Europe, South America and Asia once export capabilities are available potentially beginning in 2015.\n\n## Construction of U.S. gas-to-liquids (GTL) plants\n\nConverting natural gas to a room temperature liquid would allow U.S. natural gas producers to sell products based on world oil prices instead of domestic natural gas prices. Technological advancements continue to gain traction and may make GTL a realistic possibility by 2016.\n\n## U.S. natural gas producers are rapidly moving to a more liquids-rich production base\n\nDue to the premium margins realized in the U.S. when producing liquids as compared to natural gas, there is a meaningful shift of producers targeting liquids-rich drilling prospects. This shift will ultimately help bring\n\n$2.25 billion in cash and drilling carries for its 25% stake in the Barnett, and we are extremely proud to have Total as one of our premier joint venture partners.\n\nHaynesville Shale - The Haynesville Shale in Northwest Louisiana and East Texas is the shale play of which we are most proud (to date) because it was discovered by Chesapeake's own geoscientists and engineers. We conducted our geoscientific investigation of the Haynesville in 2005-06 and tested our theories through drilling in 2007. In 2008 we formed an innovative joint venture agreement with our well-respected industry partner, Houston-based Plains Exploration & Production Company, to which we sold 20% of our Haynesville (and Bossier) assets for approximately $3.2 billion in cash and drilling carries.\n\nThe Haynesville Shale is now the nation's largest producing natural gas shale play, having just recently passed the Barnett Shale in production (in last year's letter, I incorrectly estimated it would take until 2014 for the Haynesville to reach this achievement, a testament to the play's enormous productive potential). Ultimate recoveries from the Haynesville could exceed 250 tcfe, likely making it one of the five largest natural gas fields in the world. Today, we are producing from more than 260 net wells in the Haynesville on our 530,000 net leasehold acres, are currently drilling with 35 rigs and estimate we could drill up to 6,300 additional net wells in the years ahead. Our gross operated production in the Haynesville recently set a record of\n\nnearly 1.6 bcfe per day.\n\nU.S. natural gas markets back into balance by reducing the rigs and capital available for natural gas drilling.\n\nBossier Shale - This shale overlies about one-third of our Haynesville acreage and is the first of our two 'sleeper' natural gas shale plays. The reason is that in Louisiana, leases often restrict the lessee (i.e., the producer) to only holding future drilling rights down through the deepest formation drilled. Because the Bossier lies above the Haynesville,\n\nOne producing and one on the way: the Texas Panhandle Granite Wash offers high volumes of natural gas accompanied by highly valued liquids production as well.", + "recall": 0.9213197969543148, + "true_md": "8 | LETTER TO SHAREHOLDERS\n\n## Growing Demand for U.S. Natural Gas Will Drive Improved Prices in the Years Ahead\n\n## Growing momentum for CNG passenger and LNG long-haul truck vehicles\n\n## Growing industrial demand\n\n## Continuing and accelerating shift from coal to natural gas for U.S. electrical power generation\n\n## Conversion of U.S. LNG import facilities to LNG export facilities\n\n## Construction of U.S. gas-to-liquids (GTL) plants\n\n## U.S. natural gas producers are rapidly moving to a more liquids-rich production base\n\nSeveral factors are emerging in the U.S. that will drive increased demand for natural gas, which in turn could improve out year natural gas prices:\n\nEnormous cost savings are available to consumers and business- es that chose to use natural gas as an alternative transportation fuel ($1.39 per gallon for CNG in Oklahoma, for example, compared to $3.75–$4.00 per gallon for gasoline and diesel). \n\nWith recent low prices for domestic natural gas, U.S. industries that utilize natural gas as a feedstock in their manufacturing pro- cesses have a significant cost advantage compared with inter- national peers whose feedstock is indexed either to oil or global natural gas prices.\n\nTo clean our environment, dozens of aging coal-powered elec- tricity plants will be retired in the next decade and replaced with the cleaner alternative of natural gas. A combination of shifting power sources and higher utilization within existing gas-fired power plants will likely increase natural gas demand by 10–15 bcf per day over the next decade.\n\nWith increasing demand for natural gas around the world and the abundance of U.S. natural gas reserves, producers will be able to tap into higher-margin markets in Europe, South America and Asia once export capa- bilities are available potentially beginning in 2015. \n\nConverting natural gas to a room temperature liquid would allow U.S. natural gas producers to sell products based on world oil prices instead of domestic natural gas prices. Technological advancements continue to gain traction and may make GTL a realistic possibility by 2016. \n\nDue to the premium margins realized in the U.S. when producing liquids as compared to natural gas, there is a meaningful shift of producers targeting liquids-rich drilling prospects. This shift will ultimately help bring \n\nU.S. natural gas markets back into balance by reducing the rigs and capital available for natural gas drilling.\n\nOne producing and one on the way: the Texas Panhandle Granite Wash offers high volumes of natural gas accompanied by highly valued liquids production as well.\n\nBossier Shale — This shale overlies about one-third of our Haynesville acre- age and is the first of our two “sleeper” natural gas shale plays. The reason is that in Louisiana, leases often restrict the lessee (i.e., the producer) to only holding future drilling rights down through the deepest formation drilled. Because the Bossier lies above the Haynesville, \n\nnearly 1.6 bcfe per day. \n\nThe Haynesville Shale is now the nation’s largest producing natural gas shale play, having just recently passed the Barnett Shale in production (in last year’s letter, I incorrectly estimated it would take until 2014 for the Haynesville to reach this achieve- ment, a testament to the play’s enormous productive poten- tial). Ultimate recoveries from the Haynesville could exceed 250 tcfe, likely making it one of the five largest natural gas fields in the world. Today, we are producing from more than 260 net wells in the Haynesville on our 530,000 net leasehold acres, are currently drilling with 35 rigs and estimate we could drill up to 6,300 additional net wells in the years ahead. Our gross operated production in the Haynesville recently set a record of \n\nHaynesville Shale — The Haynesville Shale in Northwest Louisi- ana and East Texas is the shale play of which we are most proud (to date) because it was discovered by Chesapeake’s own geo- scientists and engineers. We conducted our geoscientific inves- tigation of the Haynesville in 2005–06 and tested our theories through drilling in 2007. In 2008 we formed an innovative joint venture agreement with our well-respected industry partner, Houston-based Plains Exploration & Production Company, to which we sold 20% of our Haynesville (and Bossier) assets for approximately $3.2 billion in cash and drilling carries. \n\n$2.25 billion in cash and drilling carries for its 25% stake in the Barnett, and we are extremely proud to have Total as one of our premier joint venture partners." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8148624240601356, + "doc_id": "53c7aafe64e73114f5429d4a40963cd8be4a20217f4abed0bdeb106eaeff22d9", + "edit_distance": 0.328125, + "f1_score": 0.9615384615384615, + "meteor": 0.9582245998083233, + "precision": 0.9259259259259259, + "pred_md": "## Consolidated Statements of Financial Position\n\n(In millions of Canadian dollars)\n\nSubsequent events\n\n7, 28\n\nThe accompanying notes are an integral part of the consolidated financial statements.\n\nOn behalf of the Board:\n\nAlan D. Horn, CPA, CA\n\nDirector\n\nJohn H. Clappison, FCPA, FCA Director\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC.\n\n91\n\nCONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## Consolidated Statements of Financial Position\n\n(In millions of Canadian dollars)\n\nThe accompanying notes are an integral part of the consolidated financial statements.\n\nOn behalf of the Board:\n\nJohn H. Clappison, FCPA, FCA Director\n\nAlan D. Horn, CPA, CA Director\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 91" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "570e5b4073b611e71c09f55ec00d8e1ed289283f00bc9410880ddef63a6601fc", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999883381924198, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "66\n\nFinancial Statements\n\n## Statement of Changes in Equity\n\nfor the year ended 30 June 2013\n\nThe above Statement of Changes in Equity should be read in conjunction with the accompanying notes.\n\nwww.kingsgate.com.au", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "66 Financial Statements\n\n## Statement of Changes in Equity\n\nfor the year ended 30 June 2013\n\nThe above Statement of Changes in Equity should be read in conjunction with the accompanying notes.\n\nwww.kingsgate.com.au" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "63f5bcdfb0fe6e9ee4897149dfe3ac9e2074c65d68964cc5a1850c4988b8da0d", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999883381924198, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "11", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9432207047860441, + "doc_id": "1a9b3d327c24fb910f3f807e7f4b493ae95b54ce218033b75fc6568e1b4016dd", + "edit_distance": 0.10954063604240283, + "f1_score": 0.9763779527559056, + "meteor": 0.9725320338701046, + "precision": 0.9763779527559056, + "pred_md": "## 21. Other Income\n\nOther income for the fiscal years ended March 31, 2011 and 2010 consisted of the following:\n\n## 22. Other Expenses\n\nOther expenses for the fiscal years ended March 31, 2011 and 2010 consisted of the following:\n\n*Losses on impairment of fixed assets consisted of the following:\n\nAt SMBC, a branch, which continuously manages and determines its income and expenses, is the smallest unit of asset group for recognition and measurement of impairment loss of fixed assets. Assets such as corporate headquarters facilities, training facilities, data and system centers, and health and recreational facilities which do not produce cash flows that can be attributed to individual assets are treated as corporate assets. As for idle assets, impairment loss is measured individually. At other consolidated subsidiaries, a branch or other group is the smallest asset grouping unit as well.\n\nSMBC and other subsidiaries reduced the carrying amounts of long-lived assets of which investments are not expected to be fully recovered to their recoverable amounts, and recognized the losses as 'losses on impairment of fixed assets,' which is included in 'Other expenses.' SMBC reduced the carrying amounts of corporate assets and idle assets, and other consolidated subsidiaries reduced the carrying amounts of their branches, corporate assets, idle assets and others. The recoverable amount is calculated using net realizable value which is basically determined by subtracting the expected disposal cost from the appraisal value based on the Real Estate Appraisal Standard.\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n91\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nSMFG", + "recall": 0.9763779527559056, + "true_md": "SMFG Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n## 21. Other Income\n\n## 22. Other Expenses\n\nOther income for the fiscal years ended March 31, 2011 and 2010 consisted of the following:\n\nOther expenses for the fiscal years ended March 31, 2011 and 2010 consisted of the following:\n\n*Losses on impairment of fixed assets consisted of the following:\n\nAt SMBC, a branch, which continuously manages and determines its income and expenses, is the smallest unit of asset group for recognition and measurement of impairment loss of fixed assets. Assets such as corporate headquarters facilities, training facilities, data and system centers, and health and recreational facilities which do not produce cash flows that can be attributed to individual assets are treated as corporate assets. As for idle assets, impairment loss is measured individually. At other consolidated subsidiaries, a branch or other group is the smallest asset grouping unit as well. \n\nSMBC and other subsidiaries reduced the carrying amounts of long-lived assets of which investments are not expected to be fully recovered to their recoverable amounts, and recognized the losses as “losses on impairment of fixed assets,” which is included in “Other expenses.” SMBC reduced the carrying amounts of corporate assets and idle assets, and other consolidated subsidiaries reduced the carrying amounts of their branches, corporate assets, idle assets and others. The recoverable amount is calculated using net realizable value which is basically determined by subtracting the expected disposal cost from the appraisal value based on the Real Estate Appraisal Standard.\n\nSMFG 2011 91" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7876828276917754, + "doc_id": "c676e9230fe423e205da6a276fc4d0b6c98833d8a7d7a967b9931f33ef4bbf92", + "edit_distance": 0.38461538461538464, + "f1_score": 0.9424460431654675, + "meteor": 0.936521347751725, + "precision": 0.903448275862069, + "pred_md": "4\n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013\n\n## Killam Fundamentals\n\n## atlantic Canada's Market leader\n\nWe are Atlantic Canada's largest residential landlord with a 14% market share of apartments in the region's six largest cities. With a portfolio of over 11,000 apartment units in Atlantic Canada, including 5,000 in Halifax, we have strong market recognition and are able to meet the rental needs of a diversified and growing customer base. Our established operating platform allows us to maximize efficiencies and support additional growth in the region and beyond.\n\n## apartment net operating Income by Core Market\n\nfor the year ended December 31, 2013\n\nHalifax | 47% Ontario | 10% Fredericton | 10% Moncton | 10% St. John's | 7% Charlottetown | 7% Saint John | 6% Other | 3%\n\n## expanding annually through acquisitions and Development\n\nWe have grown our real estate portfolio on an annual basis through the acquisition of apartments and MHCs. Since 2010, we have been complementing our growth with developments. 2013 marked the Company's biggest year for acquisitions and developments in eight years, adding $191 million in properties to the portfolio. Growth is funded through a combination of equity, mortgage debt and the recycling of assets, further increasing the quality of the portfolio. In 2013 we sold a portfolio of MHCs in New Brunswick, the proceeds of which will be used primarily for apartment acquisitions.\n\n## annual Investment in acquisitions and Development\n\n$ millions", + "recall": 0.9849624060150376, + "true_md": "## expanding annually through acquisitions and Development\n\n## atlantic Canada’s Market leader\n\nWe are Atlantic Canada’s largest residential landlord with a 14% market share of apartments in the region’s six largest cities. With a portfolio of over 11,000 apartment units in Atlantic Canada, including 5,000 in Halifax, we have strong market recognition and are able to meet the rental needs of a diversified and growing customer base. Our established operating platform allows us to maximize efficiencies and support additional growth in the region and beyond.\n\nWe have grown our real estate portfolio on an annual basis through the acquisition of apartments and MHCs. Since 2010, we have been complementing our growth with developments. 2013 marked the Company’s biggest year for acquisitions and developments in eight years, adding $191 million in properties to the portfolio. Growth is funded through a combination of equity, mortgage debt and the recycling of assets, further increasing the quality of the portfolio. In 2013 we sold a portfolio of MHCs in New Brunswick, the proceeds of which will be used primarily for apartment acquisitions.\n\nannual Investment in acquisitions and Development $ millions\n\napartment net operating Income by Core Market for the year ended December 31, 2013\n\n4 Killam ProPerties inc | 2013\n\n## Killam Fundamentals" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8049948140100239, + "doc_id": "b326cc55ab0e2c371d1ad4604c1abe6afa05cf15ede63147d7bf4c63ebf396e4", + "edit_distance": 0.8287179487179487, + "f1_score": 0.9485861182519282, + "meteor": 0.6891946082996999, + "precision": 0.9534883720930233, + "pred_md": "## Reducing Environmental Impact\n\n## ¥ Initiatives for Carbon Neutrality\n\nSMFG sets forth objectives each fiscal year for reducing its use of electric power and other energy resources, and it is actively engaged in achieving these energy conservation goals.\n\nSMBC ensures that its head offices are carbon neutral by using Green Energy and trading carbon credits*. Sumitomo Mitsui Finance and Leasing's Tokyo Head Office is also carbon neutral.\n\nIn addition, SMBC Friend Securities and Sumitomo Mitsui Auto Service Company, Limited are converting their automobiles to more environment-friendly ones for their transport needs and making their transportation carbon neutral by offsetting emission volumes.\n\n- * 'Carbon credits' are also referred to as 'emission allowances.' In this annual report, we use 'carbon credits.'\n\n## ¥ Responding to the Amendments to the Rational Use of Energy Act\n\nUnder the Amendments to the Rational Use of Energy Act of April 2010, companies using 1,500kl or more energy (crude oil equivalent) per annum are now required to establish an energy consumption management system and develop a mediumto long-term energy efficiency improvement plan for reducing energy consumption by at least 1% per year.\n\nThe Group is taking measures to reduce its energy usage in its business operations at all locations, in accordance with this law, and developing consultation business to meet the needs of our clients for energy conservation and the reduction of CO2 emissions.\n\n## ¥ Greening IT Operations\n\nSMBC has been promoting greening IT operations at its branch terminals and ATMs. The new CUTE* terminals for over-thecounter transactions, which are jointly developed with NEC Corporation and Oki Electric Industry Co., Ltd., have made it possible to convert paper-based documents, such as images of driver's license and other forms of IDs into electronic images and to store them quickly. The CUTE terminals have reduced approximately 3 million A4-size sheets of paper annually. SMBC donated part of the cost saved from paper reduction by the CUTE to the Tokyo Metropolitan Government's Green Tokyo Fund, specifically for the 'Creating Umi-no-Mori (Sea Forest)' project, one of the four projects' funds. We also donated to the University of Tokyo's 'Life in Green Project' for the construction of research facilities for botanical studies.\n\nWe are further promoting efforts to make our offices more paperless and efficient through various measures, such as converting the records of ATM's transactional data (called 'ATM Journal') and reports submitted to the Head Office in electronic format. These efforts will make a great contribution in the saving of the equivalent of 28 million A4-size sheets of paper annually. * CUTE: Common User Terminal Engine\n\n## ¥ Environmental measures taken in the Head Office building\n\nSMFG and SMBC moved to a new Head Office building in October 2010. The new building is designed to achieve a 30% reduction in annual CO2 emissions, compared with the average office building in Tokyo, by implementing environmental measures, such as rainwater storage facilities, photovoltaic\n\npower-generation, rooftop-greening, motion sensors and recycled material usage. We have taken various other measures to achieve efficient administrative operations by co-sharing\n\noffice spaces and promoting paperless meetings.\n\n## ¥ Eco-Friendly Branches\n\nIn order to generate new and creative ideas on energysaving at branches, the bank publicly began soliciting ideas by newly creating the 'SMBC eco-banking office prize' for\n\nEnvironment-friendly model branch\n\nEnvironment-friendly model branch\n\nthe 'eco japan cup 2010,' a competition open to the public for new environmental businesses held annually for which SMBC is one of the sponsors. Prize-winning ideas will be incorporated into the planning and designing of environment-friendly model branches of the bank.\n\nSMBC Friend Securities is converting its branches to more environment-friendly ones at the time of branch relocation or renovation by installing carpet tiles made of materials with carbon-offset initiatives.\n\n## Managing Environmental Risks\n\n## ¥ Dealing with Soil Contamination and Asbestos Risks\n\nIn order to deal with the risk of contamination of the borrower's collateral land, SMBC requires contamination risk assessment to be conducted for the land to meet certain criteria. When it is considered that the contamination risk is high, the assessed value of such potential risks is deducted from the assessment value of the collateral.\n\nSimilarly with the risk of asbestos exposure, the assessed value of this risk is deducted from the assessment value of the collateral. SMBC also recommends to its clients that they conduct such contamination assessments. SMBC conducts such contamination assessments and properly removes asbestos from its buildings.\n\n## ¥ Adoption of the 'Equator Principles'\n\nSMBC has adopted the Equator Principles, a set of principles for determining, assessing and managing the social and environmental risk of project financing. Its Environment Analysis Department assesses the social and environmental risk of large projects in accordance with such Principles.\n\n## ■ Flow chart of the Social and Environmental Risk Assessment of SMBC\n\nSMFG 2011\n\n55", + "recall": 0.9437340153452686, + "true_md": "## Reducing Environmental Impact\n\n## • Initiatives for Carbon Neutrality SMFG sets forth objectives each fiscal year for reducing its use\n\n## • Responding to the Amendments to the Rational Use of Energy Act\n\n## • Eco-Friendly Branches In order to generate new and\n\n## Managing Environmental Risks\n\n## • Dealing with Soil Contamination and Asbestos Risks In order to deal with the risk of contamination of the borrower’s\n\n## • Greening IT Operations SMBC has been promoting greening IT operations at its branch\n\n## • Adoption of the “Equator Principles” SMBC has adopted the Equator Principles, a set of principles\n\n## • Environmental measures taken in the Head Office building SMFG and SMBC moved to a new Head Office building in\n\n## ■ Flow chart of the Social and Environmental Risk Assessment of SMBC\n\npower-generation, rooftop-greening, motion sensors and recycled material usage. We have taken various other measures to achieve efficient administrative operations by co-sharing \n\noffice spaces and promoting paperless meetings.\n\n• SMFG sets forth objectives each fiscal year for reducing its use of electric power and other energy resources, and it is actively engaged in achieving these energy conservation goals.\n\nSMBC ensures that its head offices are carbon neutral by using Green Energy and trading carbon credits*. Sumitomo Mitsui Finance and Leasing’s Tokyo Head Office is also carbon neutral.\n\nIn addition, SMBC Friend Securities and Sumitomo Mitsui Auto Service Company, Limited are converting their automobiles to more environment-friendly ones for their transport needs and making their transportation carbon neutral by offsetting emission volumes.\n\n- * “Carbon credits” are also referred to as “emission allowances.” In this annual report, we use “carbon credits.”\n\n• In order to generate new and creative ideas on energy- saving at branches, the bank publicly began soliciting ideas by newly creating the “SMBC eco-banking office prize” for \n\nthe “eco japan cup 2010,” a competition open to the public for new environmental businesses held annually for which SMBC is one of the sponsors. Prize-winning ideas will be incorporated into the planning and designing of environment-friendly model branches of the bank.\n\nSMBC Friend Securities is converting its branches to more environment-friendly ones at the time of branch relocation or renovation by installing carpet tiles made of materials with carbon-offset initiatives.\n\nUnder the Amendments to the Rational Use of Energy Act of April 2010, companies using 1,500kl or more energy (crude oil equivalent) per annum are now required to establish an energy consumption management system and develop a medium- to long-term energy efficiency improvement plan for reducing energy consumption by at least 1% per year.\n\nThe Group is taking measures to reduce its energy usage in its business operations at all locations, in accordance with this law, and developing consultation business to meet the needs of our clients for energy conservation and the reduction of CO 2 emissions.\n\n• In order to deal with the risk of contamination of the borrower’s collateral land, SMBC requires contamination risk assessment to be conducted for the land to meet certain criteria. When it is considered that the contamination risk is high, the assessed value of such potential risks is deducted from the assessment value of the collateral. \n\n• SMBC has been promoting greening IT operations at its branch terminals and ATMs. The new CUTE* terminals for over-the- counter transactions, which are jointly developed with NEC Corporation and Oki Electric Industry Co., Ltd., have made it possible to convert paper-based documents, such as images of driver’s license and other forms of IDs into electronic images and to store them quickly. The CUTE terminals have reduced approximately 3 million A4-size sheets of paper annually. SMBC donated part of the cost saved from paper reduction by the CUTE to the Tokyo Metropolitan Government’s Green Tokyo Fund, specifically for the “Creating Umi-no-Mori (Sea Forest)” project, one of the four projects’ funds. We also donated to the University of Tokyo’s “Life in Green Project” for the construction of research facilities for botanical studies.\n\nSimilarly with the risk of asbestos exposure, the assessed value of this risk is deducted from the assessment value of the collateral. SMBC also recommends to its clients that they con- duct such contamination assessments. SMBC conducts such contamination assessments and properly removes asbestos from its buildings.\n\n• SMBC has adopted the Equator Principles, a set of principles for determining, assessing and managing the social and envi- ronmental risk of project financing. Its Environment Analysis Department assesses the social and environmental risk of large projects in accordance with such Principles.\n\nWe are further promoting efforts to make our offices more paperless and efficient through various measures, such as converting the records of ATM’s transactional data (called “ATM Journal”) and reports submitted to the Head Office in electronic format. These efforts will make a great contribution in the saving of the equivalent of 28 million A4-size sheets of paper annually.\n\n• SMFG and SMBC moved to a new Head Office building in October 2010. The new building is designed to achieve a 30% reduction in annual CO2 emissions, compared with the aver- age office building in Tokyo, by implementing environmental measures, such as rainwater storage facilities, photovoltaic \n\n- * CUTE: Common User Terminal Engine\n\nEnvironment-friendly model branch\n\nSMFG 2011 55" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9005412484013399, + "doc_id": "30364070834aec7b0835d62077fe1b5bdc37de9c0c7d85e4733f258d8290cd28", + "edit_distance": 0.6462140992167101, + "f1_score": 0.960725075528701, + "meteor": 0.8360140936058501, + "precision": 0.9492537313432836, + "pred_md": "a\n\nn\n\nn\n\nu\n\na\n\nl\n\nr\n\ne\n\np\n\no\n\nr\n\nt\n\n2\n\n0\n\n1\n\n1\n\n## To Our Fellow Shareholders:\n\nOver the past several years, you joined us as we have been transforming Hasbro into a global branded play company. We are creating a company that reaches farther than before, both geographically and categorically. We have taken steps to further develop our global teams, to establish a greater presence in more global markets, and through our e orts and ff those of our partners, we have expanded our business beyond the traditional toy and game category.\n\nThrough the execution of our strategy, we are:\n\n- · Creating new teams to deploy our brands around the world and the infrastructure to move from global aspirations to global execution .\n- · Expanding our capabilities to deliver innovation globally across our brands and our business.\n- · Developing new immersive experiences through entertainment in television and feature fi lms, in digital media and in licensing.\n\nDuring 2011, we made signifi cant progress in many aspects of our business. However, we did not meet our expectations for growth in the U.S. and Canada segment, including in the Games and Puzzles category. We have acted swiftly and decisively in both of these areas, putting in place new leadership and plans to improve performance as we go forward. We will address these e orts in more detail shortly, ff but fi rst, let's address the progress we have made toward our strategy.\n\nIn 2011, we reported a record $4.29 billion in revenue. This represented 7% revenue growth over 2010, which is ahead of our 5% compound annual growth rate target for revenue growth. We grew earnings per diluted share for the eleventh consecutive year, while returning $577 million to shareholders through our stock buyback and quarterly dividend programs. In early 2012, our Board of Directors voted to increase our quarterly dividend 20% to $0.36 per share, marking the third consecutive year we have raised our quarterly dividend by 20% or more.\n\n## Moving from Global Aspirations to Global Execution\n\nHasbro's 2011 top-line growth was fueled by 19% revenue gains in our International business, or 16% growth without the benefi t of the positive foreign exchange impact. Revenue grew in every major region internationally, in both mature and emerging markets, and we gained market share in nine of the 10 international countries for which we have third-party market data. In 2011, European revenues increased 19%; Latin America & Mexico revenues grew 19%; and in Asia Pacifi c, revenues increased 24%.\n\nOver the past several years, we have invested in the infrastructure to capitalize on our innovation all around the world. Through new o ces in emerging ffi markets, strong execution in mature markets and the build-out of our brand blueprint globally including digital gaming, entertainment and licensing capabilities - Hasbro is rapidly establishing a brandedplay leadership position in markets around the world.\n\n## Delivering Innovation Globally\n\nThrough the successful implementation of our branded play strategy which, at the core, focuses on the innovation and invention of both existing and new Hasbro brands worldwide, we are building bigger and more global brands. In 2011, three brands exceeded $400 million in annual revenues.\n\nThe TRANSFORMERS brand delivered $483\n\nmillion in revenues during 2011, leveraging the global box o ce success of ffi Transformers: Dark of the Moon . The third fi lm in the TRANSFORMERS movie franchise grossed more than $1.1 billion at the box o ce ffi globally. TRANSFORMERS brand revenue for Hasbro grew in the U.S. and international markets and we successfully leveraged the TRANSFORMERS brand into new categories, including KRE-O, our entirely new construction brand, as well as TRANSFORMERS RESCUE BOTS, part of Hasbro's all new PLAYSKOOL HEROES line designed specifi cally for younger kids.\n\nThe BEYBLADE brand was an incredible success globally, delivering $477 million in revenues during 2011. We sold over 60 million tops in 40 countries and online, we had deep digital engagements with our consumers at beybladebattles.com. We now have ten million registered users on beybladebattles.com", + "recall": 0.9724770642201835, + "true_md": "annual report 2011\n\nOver the past several years, you joined us as we have been transforming Hasbro into a global branded play company. We are creating a company that reaches farther than before, both geographically and categorically. We have taken steps to further develop our global teams, to establish a greater presence in more global markets, and through our e ff orts and those of our partners, we have expanded our business beyond the traditional toy and game category. \n\nThrough the execution of our strategy, we are: \n\nDuring 2011, we made significant progress in many aspects of our business. However, we did not meet our expectations for growth in the U.S. and Canada segment, including in the Games and Puzzles category. We have acted swiftly and decisively in both of these areas, putting in place new leadership and plans to improve performance as we go forward. We will address these e ff orts in more detail shortly, but first, let’s address the progress we have made toward our strategy. \n\nIn 2011, we reported a record $4.29 billion in revenue. This represented 7% revenue growth over 2010, which is ahead of our 5% compound annual growth rate target for revenue growth. We grew earnings per diluted share for the eleventh consecutive year, while returning $577 million to shareholders through our stock buyback and quarterly dividend programs. In early 2012, our Board of Directors voted to increase our quarterly dividend 20% to $0.36 per share, marking the third consecutive year we have raised our quarterly dividend by 20% or more. \n\nThe BEYBLADE brand was an incredible success globally, delivering $477 million in revenues during 2011. We sold over 60 million tops in 40 countries and online, we had deep digital engagements with our consumers at beybladebattles.com. We now have ten million registered users on beybladebattles.com \n\nThe TRANSFORMERS brand delivered $483 million in revenues during 2011, leveraging the global box o ffi ce success of Transformers: Dark of the Moon . The third fi lm in the TRANSFORMERS movie franchise grossed more than $1.1 billion at the box o ffi ce globally. TRANSFORMERS brand revenue for Hasbro grew in the U.S. and international markets and we successfully leveraged the TRANSFORMERS brand into new categories, including KRE-O, our entirely new construction brand, as well as TRANSFORMERS RESCUE BOTS, part of Hasbro’s all new PLAYSKOOL HEROES line designed specifi cally for younger kids. \n\nThrough the successful implementation of our branded play strategy which, at the core, focuses on the innovation and invention of both existing and new Hasbro brands worldwide, we are building bigger and more global brands. In 2011, three brands exceeded $400 million in annual revenues. \n\nOver the past several years, we have invested in the infrastructure to capitalize on our innovation all around the world. Through new o ffi ces in emerging markets, strong execution in mature markets and the build-out of our brand blueprint globally - including digital gaming, entertainment and licensing capabilities - Hasbro is rapidly establishing a branded- play leadership position in markets around the world. \n\nHasbro’s 2011 top-line growth was fueled by 19% revenue gains in our International business, or 16% growth without the benefi t of the positive foreign exchange impact. Revenue grew in every major region internationally, in both mature and emerging markets, and we gained market share in nine of the 10 international countries for which we have third-party market data. In 2011, European revenues increased 19%; Latin America & Mexico revenues grew 19%; and in Asia Pacific, revenues increased 24%.\n\n## Moving from Global Aspirations to Global Execution\n\n## To Our Fellow Shareholders:\n\n## Delivering Innovation Globally\n\n- • Creating new teams to deploy our brands around the world and the infrastructure to move from global aspirations to global execution . \n\n- • Expanding our capabilities to deliver innovation globally across our brands and our business. \n\n- • Developing new immersive experiences through entertainment in television and feature films, in digital media and in licensing." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9680021054153662, + "doc_id": "77639b8f7ab7737969a8c52e4db8a7408de944718b32f2783748c1974e398d43", + "edit_distance": 0.8351254480286738, + "f1_score": 0.9887133182844244, + "meteor": 0.8502014690214487, + "precision": 0.9909502262443439, + "pred_md": "MANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS\n\n## RISK MANAGEMENT\n\nWe are committed to continually strengthening our risk management capabilities to protect and enhance shareholder value. The purpose of risk management is not to eliminate risk but to optimize trade-offs between risk and return to maximize value to the organization.\n\n## Risk G overnance\n\nThe Board has overall responsibility for risk governance and oversees management in identifying the principal risks we face in our business and implementing appropriate risk assessment processes to manage these risks. It delegates certain duties to the Audit Committee.\n\nThe Audit Committee discusses risk policies with management and the Board, and assists the Board in overseeing our compliance with legal and regulatory requirements.\n\nThe Audit Committee also reviews:\n\n- GLYPH<129> the adequacy of the internal controls that have been adopted to safeguard assets from loss and unauthorized use, to prevent, deter and detect fraud and to verify the accuracy of the financial records\n- GLYPH<129> the processes for identifying, assessing and managing risks\n- GLYPH<129> our exposure to major risks and trends and management's implementation of risk policies and procedures to monitor and control these exposures\n- GLYPH<129> our business continuity and disaster recovery plans\n- GLYPH<129> any special audit steps adopted due to material weaknesses or significant deficiencies that may be identified\n- GLYPH<129> other risk management matters from time to time as determined by the Committee or directed by the Board.\n\n72\n\nROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n## Enterprise Risk Management\n\nOur Enterprise Risk Management program seeks to ensure we identify, assess, manage, monitor and communicate risk consistently throughout the company and that we manage risk in a way that supports our strategic and business goals. This program supports the Audit Committee and the Board's responsibility for risk by facilitating a formal strategic risk assessment process.\n\nWe carry out an annual strategic risk assessment to identify our principal risks and their potential impact on our ability to achieve our strategic plans. This assessment includes reviewing risk reports, audit reports and industry benchmarks, and interviewing key risk owners. We also conduct a formal survey every two years to get management feedback on the key risks facing the organization and identify emerging risks. Then we prioritize the risks using standard risk assessment criteria. Enterprise Risk Management reports the results of the strategic risk assessment to the Executive Leadership Team and the Audit Committee.\n\nThe Executive Leadership Team is responsible for approving our enterprise risk policies and for identifying and assessing the key risks that affect our ability to meet our corporate objectives. It is also responsible for monitoring these key risks and our action plans to mitigate these risks.\n\nManagement develops risk management plans. They are responsible for identifying, assessing, managing and monitoring risks in the business units impacting our strategic and business plans, and reporting to the Executive Leadership Team and Enterprise Risk Management.", + "recall": 0.9864864864864865, + "true_md": "MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS\n\n## Enterprise Risk Management\n\n## RISK MANAGEMENT\n\n## Risk G overnance\n\nWe are committed to continually strengthening our risk management capabilities to protect and enhance shareholder value. The purpose of risk management is not to eliminate risk but to optimize trade-offs between risk and return to maximize value to the organization.\n\nOur Enterprise Risk Management program seeks to ensure we identify, assess, manage, monitor and communicate risk consistently throughout the company and that we manage risk in a way that supports our strategic and business goals. This program supports the Audit Committee and the Board’s responsibility for risk by facilitating a formal strategic risk assessment process.\n\nThe Board has overall responsibility for risk governance and oversees management in identifying the principal risks we face in our business and implementing appropriate risk assessment processes to manage these risks. It delegates certain duties to the Audit Committee.\n\nThe Audit Committee discusses risk policies with management and the Board, and assists the Board in overseeing our compliance with legal and regulatory requirements.\n\nThe Audit Committee also reviews:\n\nWe carry out an annual strategic risk assessment to identify our principal risks and their potential impact on our ability to achieve our strategic plans. This assessment includes reviewing risk reports, audit reports and industry benchmarks, and interviewing key risk owners. We also conduct a formal survey every two years to get management feedback on the key risks facing the organization and identify emerging risks. Then we prioritize the risks using standard risk assessment criteria. Enterprise Risk Management reports the results of the strategic risk assessment to the Executive Leadership Team and the Audit Committee.\n\nThe Executive Leadership Team is responsible for approving our enterprise risk policies and for identifying and assessing the key risks that affect our ability to meet our corporate objectives. It is also responsible for monitoring these key risks and our action plans to mitigate these risks.\n\nManagement develops risk management plans. They are responsible for identifying, assessing, managing and monitoring risks in the business units impacting our strategic and business plans, and reporting to the Executive Leadership Team and Enterprise Risk Management.\n\n- GLYPH<129> the adequacy of the internal controls that have been adopted to safeguard assets from loss and unauthorized use, to prevent, deter and detect fraud and to verify the accuracy of the financial records\n\n- GLYPH<129> the processes for identifying, assessing and managing risks\n\n- GLYPH<129> our exposure to major risks and trends and management’s implementation of risk policies and procedures to monitor and control these exposures\n\n- GLYPH<129> our business continuity and disaster recovery plans\n\n- GLYPH<129> any special audit steps adopted due to material weaknesses or significant deficiencies that may be identified\n\n- GLYPH<129> other risk management matters from time to time as determined by the Committee or directed by the Board.\n\n72\n\nROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 2013 ANNUAL REPORT" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9199091012268105, + "doc_id": "da623779086f1f535f4cd284d76198a294d466c3f889cdf40f3870ef88d6d518", + "edit_distance": 0.2137809187279152, + "f1_score": 0.9713024282560706, + "meteor": 0.8112157894113752, + "precision": 0.9691629955947136, + "pred_md": "M\n\n## anagement's Discussion and Analysis\n\nD\n\nollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\n## Apartment Property Expenses\n\nSame store apartment property expenses increased5.5% for the year ended December 31, 2013, due primarily to increased utility and fuel expenses as a result of high natural gas prices in Atlantic Canada, and higher electricity costs.\n\n## Utility and Fuel Expense - Same Store\n\nFor the years ended December 31,\n\nKillam's apartment properties are heated with a combination of natural gas (55%), electricity (36%), oil (8%) and other sources (1%).\n\nElectricity costs at the unit level are usually paid directly by tenants, reducing Killam's exposure to the majority of the 4,500 units heated with electricity. Fuel costs associated with natural gas or oil fired heating plants are paid by Killam. As such, the Company is exposed to fluctuations in natural gas and oil costs, which represent 40.9% of total same store utility and fuel costs in 2013. Killam invests in green initiatives at its properties to maximize efficiencies, including converting many of its Halifax properties to natural gas from oil over the last three years as natural gas infrastructure has been expanded in the city. The decision to convert was supported by the substantial price difference between the cost of natural gas and oil in recent years.\n\nAs noted in the table above, Killam's utility and fuel expenses increased 14.6% in 2013 compared to 2012. The increase was primarily attributable to higher natural gas, electricity costs and water costs.\n\nKillam's natural gas expenses increased by 67.3% in 2013 due to higher gas prices in Atlantic Canada and an increase in properties burning natural gas following conversions of certain Halifax heating plants from oil to gas in 2012 and 2013. The reduction in oil expense in the quarter and year-to-date reflects this reduction in oil exposure.\n\nAs the following chart highlights, the per gigajoule (Gj) commodity cost for natural gas in New Brunswick and Nova Scotia was much higher than NYMEX in 2013 and less correlated to NYMEX than in previous years. (NYMEX is the New York Mercantile Exchange, a commodity futures exchange. Henry Hub, a gas distribution hub in Louisiana is the pricing point for natural gas futures contracts traded on NYMEX). The cost of natural gas in Atlantic Canada and New England experienced a spike from December 2012 until late spring 2013 and a second spike in December 2013, compared to other areas of Canada. Those spikes were both due to increased demand from utilities in Northeast New England and a shortage of gas pipeline capacity in Northeastern New England and Atlantic Canada. A temporary decline in gas supply off the coast of Nova Scotia further contributed to the high pricing in the first part of the year.\n\n## Historic Natural Gas Pricing ($ per Gj) Henry Hub Vs. Heritage Gas\n\n38\n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013", + "recall": 0.9734513274336283, + "true_md": "## Management’s Discussion and Analysis Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\nManagement’s Discussion and Analysis Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\n## Apartment Property Expenses\n\n## Utility and Fuel Expense ‑ Same Store\n\nKillam’s apartment properties are heated with a combination of natural gas (55%), electricity (36%), oil (8%) and other sources (1%).\n\nElectricity costs at the unit level are usually paid directly by tenants, reducing Killam’s exposure to the majority of the 4,500 units heated with electricity. Fuel costs associated with natural gas or oil fired heating plants are paid by Killam. As such, the Company is exposed to fluctuations in natural gas and oil costs, which represent 40.9% of total same store utility and fuel costs in 2013. Killam invests in green initiatives at its properties to maximize efficiencies, including converting many of its Halifax properties to natural gas from oil over the last three years as natural gas infrastructure has been expanded in the city. The decision to convert was supported by the substantial price difference between the cost of natural gas and oil in recent years.\n\nAs noted in the table above, Killam’s utility and fuel expenses increased 14.6% in 2013 compared to 2012. The increase was primarily attributable to higher natural gas, electricity costs and water costs. \n\nKillam’s natural gas expenses increased by 67.3% in 2013 due to higher gas prices in Atlantic Canada and an increase in properties burning natural gas following conversions of certain Halifax heating plants from oil to gas in 2012 and 2013. The reduction in oil expense in the quarter and year‑to‑date reflects this reduction in oil exposure.\n\nAs the following chart highlights, the per gigajoule (Gj) commodity cost for natural gas in New Brunswick and Nova Scotia was much higher than NYMEX in 2013 and less correlated to NYMEX than in previous years. (NYMEX is the New York Mercantile Exchange, a commodity futures exchange. Henry Hub, a gas distribution hub in Louisiana is the pricing point for natural gas futures contracts traded on NYMEX). The cost of natural gas in Atlantic Canada and New England experienced a spike from December 2012 until late spring 2013 and a second spike in December 2013, compared to other areas of Canada. Those spikes were both due to increased demand from utilities in Northeast New England and a shortage of gas pipeline capacity in Northeastern New England and Atlantic Canada. A temporary decline in gas supply off the coast of Nova Scotia further contributed to the high pricing in the first part of the year.\n\n38 Killam ProPerties inc | 2013\n\nHistoric Natural Gas Pricing ($ per Gj) Henry Hub Vs. Heritage Gas\n\nFor the years ended December 31, \n\nSame store apartment property expenses increased5.5% for the year ended December 31, 2013, due primarily to increased utility and fuel expenses as a result of high natural gas prices in Atlantic Canada, and higher electricity costs." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.2622849765385271, + "doc_id": "5793282eaaa089d0dc71e67c951c68b4157a212cc43edbc3106323e96b385190", + "edit_distance": 0.8031496062992126, + "f1_score": 0.5598243688254665, + "meteor": 0.41418089842296657, + "precision": 0.7434402332361516, + "pred_md": "## OUR BUSINESS\n\nRogers Communications Inc. is a diversified Canadian telecommunications and media company. Rogers Wireless is Canada's largest wireless voice and data telecommunications services provider and the country's only national carrier operating on the combined world standard GSM/HSPA+/LTE technology platforms. Rogers Cable is a leading Canadian cable services provider, offering high-speed Internet access, cable television, and telephony products, and together with Rogers Business Solutions , provides business telecom, networking, hosting, managed services and IP solutions to small, medium and large enterprise, government and carrier customers. Rogers Media is Canada's premier group of category-leading broadcast, specialty, print and online media assets, with businesses in radio and television broadcasting, televised shopping, sports entertainment, magazine and trade journal publishing and digital media. We are publicly traded on both the TSX and NYSE stock exchanges and are included in the S&P/TSX 60 Index of the largest publicly traded companies in Canada.\n\n## DELIVERING ON OUR COMMITMENTS IN 2013\n\n## FREE CASH FLOW GENERATION\n\nWHAT WE SAID: Deliver another year of significant consolidated pre-tax free cash flow.\n\nWHAT WE DID: Generated $2.0 billion of pre-tax free cash flow in 2013, supporting the significant investments and cash we returned to shareholders during the year.\n\n## DATA REVENUE GROWTH\n\nWHAT WE SAID: Generate double-digit wireless and broadband data growth consistent with our data usage monetization strategy.\n\nWHAT WE DID: Grew wireless and broadband data revenues by 17% and 16%, respectively over 2012 levels.\n\n## CONTENTS\n\n- 2 Letters to Shareholders\n- 4 Strategic Objectives and Value Drivers\n- 5 Why Invest in Rogers\n- 6 Connect Like Never Before\n- 16 Corporate Social Responsibility\n- 18 Corporate Governance\n- 20 Directors and Senior Executive Officers\n\n## DIVIDEND GROWTH\n\nWHAT WE SAID: Increase cash returns to shareholders consistently over time.\n\nWHAT WE DID: Increased the annualized dividend per share 10% from $1.58 to $1.74 in 2013. Further increased the dividend by 5% to $1.83 in February 2014.\n\n## HIGHER VALUE WIRELESS SUBSCRIBERS\n\nWHAT WE SAID: Continue the growth in our smartphone subscriber base to drive wireless data revenue and ARPU.\n\nWHAT WE DID: Activated nearly 2.7 million smartphones, helping bring smartphone penetration to 75% of postpaid subscriber base.\n\n## OPERATING EFFICIENCIES\n\nWHAT WE SAID: Implement productivity improvement initiatives to capture sustainable operating efficiencies.\n\nWHAT WE DID: Reduced operating expenses for the combined Wireless and Cable segments, excluding the cost of wireless equipment sales, by approximately 1% from 2012 levels.\n\n## EVOLVE AND ENHANCE TELEVISION PLATFORM\n\nWHAT WE SAID: Invest in the evolution of our current TV platform and extend our video offerings to new platforms.\n\nWHAT WE DID: Launched NextBox 3.0 delivering a superior TV experience and leveraged the success of Rogers AnyPlace TV, our Internet and mobile on-demand TV service.\n\n- 24 Management's Discussion and Analysis\n- 88 Management's Responsibility for Financial Reporting\n- 88 Independent Auditors' Report of Registered Public Accounting Firm\n- 89 Consolidated Statements of Income\n- 90 Consolidated Statements of Comprehensive Income\n\n## FAST AND RELIABLE NETWORKS\n\nWHAT WE SAID: Maintain Rogers leadership in network technology and innovation.\n\nWHAT WE DID: Rogers was named both the fastest wireless network and the fastest broadband ISP in Canada by PCMag.com.\n\n## ENHANCE AND STRENGTHEN THE CORE BUSINESS\n\nWHAT WE SAID: We will make strategic investments to expand and strengthen the core business.\n\nWHAT WE DID: Executed strategic acquisitions including Mountain Cable, data centre and hosting assets, theScore and valuable, high profile sports content.\n\n- 91 Consolidated Statements of Financial Position\n- 92 Consolidated Statements of Changes in Shareholders' Equity\n- 93 Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows\n- 94 Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n- 126 Corporate and Shareholder Information\n\nAT A GLANCE", + "recall": 0.448943661971831, + "true_md": "## O U R B U S I N E S\n\nA T A G L A N C E\n\nRo ge gers rs C om mu ni nica ca ti on s In c. . i s a a di ve rs ified Canadi an tel ec ommu nica tion s an and d me m di a co mp an a y. Ro ge rs Wi re e le ss i is s Ca C na da a ’s s l la ar ge g st wir eles s vo ice and da ta telecom munica ti on s se e rv ic es e p rovi de r r an and d th t e co un n tr y’ s s on ly y n at atio io i nal carr ier operat ing on the combined wo rld stan dard GSM M /H SP S A+ A /L L TE te ch c no o lo o gy p la latf or ms . R Ro Roge rs Ca bl e i s a le ading Ca nadian cable ser vices prov ider, of feri ng g h ig h- sp ee e d In I te rn n et t a acc cc es s, c ab le l tel evis io n, a nd t elep hony products, and together wi th Rog ers Bu sine ss S Sol ol ut ions , pr ov id d es e es b b us in n es s te t le co m, n etwo rk ing, hosting, managed services and IP solu ti on s to s ma ll , me di um an d la l rg r e en n te r rp ri se , go ve rnme nt and carrier customers. Rogers Media is Canada ’s pre mi er g ro up of f c at eg or ry- y- y-le l le ad in g br oa dc as t, specialty, print and online media ass ets, with businesses i n ra di o an d te tele levi si on n b road ca st in g, t el evised shopping, sports entertainment, magaz ine and trade jo ur na l pu bl is hi ng g an a d di gi ta l l me di a. We ar e publicly traded on both the TSX and NYSE stock exchanges and a re inc lu de d in i t he e S &P & /T SX 6 0 In de x of the largest publicly traded companies in Canada.\n\n## D E L I V E R I ING ON OUR COMMITMENTS IN 2 013\n\n## FREE CASH FLOW GENERATION\n\n## DIVIDEND GROWTH\n\n## OPERATING EFFICIENCIES\n\n## FAST AND RELIABLE NETWORKS\n\n$_{WHAT WE SAID:}$ Deliver another year of significant consolidated pre-tax free cash flow.\n\n$_{WHAT WE DID:}$ Generated $2.0 billion of pre-tax free cash flow in 2013, supporting the significant investments and cash we returned to shareholders during the year.\n\n$_{WHAT WE SAID:}$ Increase cash returns to shareholders consistently over time.\n\n$_{WHAT WE DID:}$ Increased the annualized dividend per share 10% from $1.58 to $1.74 in 2013. Further increased the dividend by 5% to $1.83 in February 2014.\n\n$_{WHAT WE SAID:}$ Implement productivity improvement initiatives to capture sustainable operating efficiencies.\n\n$_{WHAT WE DID:}$ Reduced operating expenses for the combined Wireless and Cable segments, excluding the cost of wireless equipment sales, by approximately 1% from 2012 levels.\n\n$_{WHAT WE SAID:}$ Maintain Rogers leadership in network technology and innovation.\n\n$_{WHAT WE DID:}$ Rogers was named both the fastest wireless network and the fastest broadband ISP in Canada by PCMag.com.\n\n$_{WHAT WE SAID: }$Generate double-digit wireless and broadband data growth consistent with our data usage monetization strategy.\n\n$_{WHAT WE DID:}$ Grew wireless and broadband data revenues by 17% and 16%, respectively over 2012 levels.\n\n$_{WHAT WE SAID:}$ Continue the growth in our smartphone subscriber base to drive wireless data revenue and ARPU.\n\n$_{WHAT WE DID:}$ Activated nearly 2.7 million smartphones, helping bring smartphone penetration to 75% of postpaid subscriber base.\n\n$_{WHAT WE SAID:}$ Invest in the evolution of our current TV platform and extend our video offerings to new platforms.\n\n$_{WHAT WE DID:}$ Launched NextBox 3.0 delivering a superior TV experience and leveraged the success of Rogers AnyPlace TV, our Internet and mobile on-demand TV service.\n\n$_{WHAT WE SAID:}$ We will make strategic investments to expand and strengthen the core business.\n\n$_{WHAT WE DID:}$ Executed strategic acquisitions including Mountain Cable, data centre and hosting assets, theScore and valuable, high profile sports content.\n\n## DATA REVENUE GROWTH\n\n## HIGHER VALUE WIRELESS SUBSCRIBERS\n\n## EVOLVE AND ENHANCE TELEVISION PLATFORM\n\n## ENHANCE AND STRENGTHEN THE CORE BUSINESS\n\n## CO O NT EN TS\n\n- 4 Str ate te gic c Ob jec je tiv es and nd Va V lue l Dr ive rs\n\n- 2 Let et ter er s t s o o S har eh old olders ers e\n\n- 5 Why W In ves t i ti n R oge og rs\n\n- 6 Con nec n t L ike ke Ne e ver ve Be fore\n\n- 16 Cor Corpor por a ate So cia i l R esp ons on ibi ib lit y\n\n- 18 Cor Corpor por ate Go G vernan ce\n\n- 20 0 Dir Di ect ors an d S eni en or Exe cut ive e Of Of fice fic rs\n\n- 24 Management’s Discussion and Analysis\n\n- 88 Man agement’s Responsibility for Financial Re porting\n\n- 88 Ind ependent Aud itors’ Report o f Reg ist ere d P ubl ic Accountin g F irm\n\n- 89 Con sol ida ted State ments of Inc ome\n\n- 90 Con sol so s ida da ted State men ts of Com pre hen siv e I e nco o me\n\n- 91 Con solidated St ate men n ts of of Financ ial Po sit ion\n\n- 92 Con sol ida ted St ate men me m ts of Cha nge s i n S S har eho eh lde rs’ Eq uit it y\n\n- 93 Con sol ol ida da ted St S ate men en ts ts of of Cas C h F h low s\n\n- 94 4 Not es es to to Consol ida da ted d Fi nan cia c l St Sta tem t ent s\n\n- 126 Cor por r ate ate an an d S har h eho eh lde r I nfo fo rma tio tion n" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8999688099976916, + "doc_id": "28ed218ca47fbef58b58bff49ae6e197a18414ab17a764245644a4fd159f6957", + "edit_distance": 0.7657142857142857, + "f1_score": 0.9910979228486648, + "meteor": 0.8018748269650129, + "precision": 0.9940476190476191, + "pred_md": "## 100\n\nNotes to the Financial Statements\n\n## 28. Financial risk management and instruments continued\n\nThe Company's functional currency is Australian dollars.\n\nThe Group's exposure to US dollar foreign currency risk at the reporting date was as follows:\n\nThe Group's sale of gold produced from Chatree Gold Mine is in US dollars, however the functional currency of the subsidiary company that owns the Chatree Gold Mine is Thai Baht and therefore, the Group's profit is sensitive to movement in those currencies.\n\nIf the spot Australian dollar weakened / strengthened by one cent against the US dollar with all other variables held constant, the Group's revenue for the year would have been $2,510,000 higher / $2,456,000 lower (2012: $3,552,000 higher / $3,483,000 lower).\n\nThe Group's current exposure to other foreign exchange movements is not material.\n\n## Commodity price risk\n\nAt 30 June 2013 the Group's subsidiary, Challenger Gold Operations Pty Ltd, has forward sold 6,500 ounces of gold at an average price of $1,159 per ounce. Subsequent to year-end the Group forward sold a further 50,000 ounces of gold over a 12 month period at an average price of $1,435 per ounce to manage Australian gold price risk associated with forecast production from the Challenger Mine.\n\nThe following table sets out an aging of forward gold sale contracts in place at year end.\n\nThe following table displays fluctuations in the fair value of the Group's gold forward contracts due to movements in the spot price of gold with all other variables held constant. The 10% sensitivity is based on reasonable possible changes, over a financial year, using the observed range of actual historical prices.\n\n## Equity price risk\n\nThe Group is exposed to equity securities price risk, which arises from investments classified on the statement of financial position as available-for-sale financial assets.\n\nwww.kingsgate.com.au", + "recall": 0.9881656804733728, + "true_md": "Notes to the Financial Statements 100\n\n## 28. Financial risk management and instruments continued\n\n## Commodity price risk\n\nwww.kingsgate.com.au\n\n## Equity price risk\n\nThe Group is exposed to equity securities price risk, which arises from investments classified on the statement of financial position as available-for-sale financial assets.\n\nThe following table displays fluctuations in the fair value of the Group’s gold forward contracts due to movements in the spot price of gold with all other variables held constant. The 10% sensitivity is based on reasonable possible changes, over a financial year, using the observed range of actual historical prices.\n\nThe following table sets out an aging of forward gold sale contracts in place at year end.\n\nAt 30 June 2013 the Group’s subsidiary, Challenger Gold Operations Pty Ltd, has forward sold 6,500 ounces of gold at an average price of $1,159 per ounce. Subsequent to year-end the Group forward sold a further 50,000 ounces of gold over a 12 month period at an average price of $1,435 per ounce to manage Australian gold price risk associated with forecast production from the Challenger Mine.\n\nThe Group’s current exposure to other foreign exchange movements is not material.\n\nIf the spot Australian dollar weakened / strengthened by one cent against the US dollar with all other variables held constant, the Group’s revenue for the year would have been $2,510,000 higher / $2,456,000 lower (2012: $3,552,000 higher / $3,483,000 lower).\n\nThe Group’s sale of gold produced from Chatree Gold Mine is in US dollars, however the functional currency of the subsidiary company that owns the Chatree Gold Mine is Thai Baht and therefore, the Group’s profit is sensitive to movement in those currencies.\n\nThe Company’s functional currency is Australian dollars.\n\nThe Group’s exposure to US dollar foreign currency risk at the reporting date was as follows:" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7108332982740264, + "doc_id": "ca8f94b66e1072e9cf4047bd0d6f557f416f83398981ccba0e74f33c0d852cb2", + "edit_distance": 0.8333333333333334, + "f1_score": 0.8421052631578947, + "meteor": 0.8337710084033615, + "precision": 0.8888888888888888, + "pred_md": "## BALANCE SHEET OVERVIEW\n\n## CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEETS\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC.\n\n57\n\nMANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS", + "recall": 0.8, + "true_md": "MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AN D ANALYSIS\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 57\n\n## BALANCE SHEET OVERVIEW\n\n## CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEETS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9245834130366383, + "doc_id": "f6234f8af9fabf77d81c01e82b55de71163badb61d15ab8cccd52a8328ffde10", + "edit_distance": 0.22857142857142856, + "f1_score": 0.9702127659574469, + "meteor": 0.9507004830661303, + "precision": 0.9743589743589743, + "pred_md": "Annually, Internal Audit facilitates and monitors Management's completion of the financial fraud risk assessment to identify areas of potential fraud in our financial statements and to make sure we have documented and verified controls to mitigate that risk.\n\nOur Enterprise Risk Management methodology and policies rely on the expertise of our management and employees to identify risks and opportunities, and implement risk mitigation strategies as required.\n\n## Corporate S ocial Responsibility\n\nBeing a responsible corporate citizen and sustainable business are part of good governance. We believe corporate social responsibility is increasingly important to our growth, competitive advantage and engagement with key stakeholders, and we strive to be a sustainable business and contribute to a better world.\n\nWe focus on five general areas:\n\nSee our annual Corporate Social Responsibility report (available on our website rogers.com/csr) for more about our social, environmental and community contributions and performance.\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC.\n\n73\n\nMANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS", + "recall": 0.9661016949152542, + "true_md": "MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AN D ANALYSIS\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 73\n\nAnnually, Internal Audit facilitates and monitors Management’s completion of the financial fraud risk assessment to identify areas of potential fraud in our financial statements and to make sure we have documented and verified controls to mitigate that risk.\n\nOur Enterprise Risk Management methodology and policies rely on the expertise of our management and employees to identify risks and opportunities, and implement risk mitigation strategies as required.\n\nBeing a responsible corporate citizen and sustainable business are part of good governance. We believe corporate social responsibility is increasingly important to our growth, competitive advantage and engagement with key stakeholders, and we strive to be a sustainable business and contribute to a better world.\n\nWe focus on five general areas:\n\n## Corporate S ocial Responsibility\n\nSee our annual Corporate Social Responsibility report (available on our website rogers.com/csr) for more about our social, environmental and community contributions and performance." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8405438345430798, + "doc_id": "cd8e715096e8543cb830ddc122c1c2f69c7394a58473cafd6ff04952e281f124", + "edit_distance": 0.22727272727272727, + "f1_score": 0.9896907216494847, + "meteor": 0.9926117776114015, + "precision": 0.9795918367346939, + "pred_md": "## MHC Portfolio\n\nNotes:\n\n- (1) Killam has a 47% ownership interest in the 246-unit Garden Park Apartments.\n- (2) Killam has a 25% interest in 180 Mill Street, 1175 Maritime Way and 1355 Silver Spear Road through a joint venture.\n- (3) Seasonal resort community.\n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013\n\n19", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Killam ProPerties inc | 2013 19\n\nNotes:\n\n(1) Killam has a 47% ownership interest in the 246-unit Garden Park Apartments.\n\n(2) Killam has a 25% interest in 180 Mill Street, 1175 Maritime Way and 1355 Silver Spear Road through a joint venture. \n\n(3) Seasonal resort community.\n\n## MHC Portfolio" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9715852100350417, + "doc_id": "33b074336129aed9d70c1a81d2960c19164074032cf0de2892bb76ad84577ff0", + "edit_distance": 0.4027504911591356, + "f1_score": 0.986046511627907, + "meteor": 0.8839044904827638, + "precision": 0.9906542056074766, + "pred_md": "## QUANTITATIVE AND QUALITATIVE DISCLOSURES ABOUT MARKET RISK\n\nOur market risk is impacted by changes in foreign currency exchange rates and to a lesser extent by changes in interest rates. We occasionally utilize derivative instruments as part of our overall financial risk management policy, but do not use derivative instruments for speculative or trading purposes. We do not currently have any outstanding derivative instruments.\n\n## Foreign Currency Exchange Rate Risk\n\nSince we operate throughout North America and approximately 15% of our fiscal year 2012 net sales were generated outside the United States, foreign currency exchange rates can impact our financial position, results of operations and competitive position. The financial statements of foreign subsidiaries are translated into their U.S. dollar equivalents at end-of-period exchange rates for assets and liabilities, while income and expenses are translated at average monthly exchange rates. Translation gains and losses are components of accumulated other comprehensive income (loss) as reported in the statements of consolidated comprehensive income. Transaction gains and losses arising from fluctuations in currency exchange rates on transactions denominated in currencies other than the functional currency are recognized in the statements of consolidated income as a component of other expense (income), net. Applied does not currently hedge the net investments in our foreign operations.\n\nDuring the course of the fiscal year, the Canadian and Mexican foreign exchange rates to the U.S. dollar decreased by 6% and 17%, respectively. In the twelve months ended June 30, 2012, we experienced foreign currency translation losses totaling $14.5 million, which were included in accumulated other comprehensive income (loss). We utilize a sensitivity analysis to measure the potential impact on earnings based on a hypothetical 10% change in foreign currency rates. A 10% strengthening from the levels experienced during the year-ended June 30, 2012 of the U.S. dollar relative to foreign currencies that affect the Company would have resulted in a $2.2 million decrease in net income for the year ended June 30, 2012. A 10% weakening from the levels experienced during the year ended June 30, 2012 of the U.S. dollar relative to foreign currencies that affect the Company would have resulted in a $2.2 million increase in net income for the year ended June 30, 2012.\n\n9\n\n## Interest Rate Risk\n\nWe repaid the debt that was outstanding at June 30, 2010 during fiscal 2011, thus, at June 30, 2012, we were not exposed to interest rate fluctuations on outstanding debt. We monitor depository institutions that hold our cash and cash equivalents, primarily for safety of principal and secondarily for maximizing yield on those funds. We diversify our cash and cash equivalents among counterparties to minimize exposure to any of these entities.\n\nApplied Industrial Technologies, Inc. and Subsidiaries\n\n13", + "recall": 0.9814814814814815, + "true_md": "## Interest Rate Risk\n\n## QUANTITATIVE AND QUALITATIVE DISCLOSURES ABOUT MARKET RISK\n\n## Foreign Currency Exchange Rate Risk\n\n13 Applied Industrial Technologies, Inc. and Subsidiaries\n\nWe repaid the debt that was outstanding at June 30, 2010 during fiscal 2011, thus, at June 30, 2012, we were not exposed to interest rate fluctuations on outstanding debt. We monitor depository institutions that hold our cash and cash equivalents, primarily for safety of principal and secondarily for maximizing yield on those funds. We diversify our cash and cash equivalents among counterparties to minimize exposure to any of these entities.$_{ }$\n\nOur market risk is impacted by changes in foreign currency exchange rates and to a lesser extent by changes in interest rates. We occasionally utilize derivative instruments as part of our overall financial risk management policy, but do not use derivative instruments for speculative or trading purposes. We do not currently have any outstanding derivative instruments. \n\nSince we operate throughout North America and approximately 15% of our fiscal year 2012 net sales were generated outside the United States, foreign currency exchange rates can impact our financial position, results of operations and competitive position. The financial statements of foreign subsidiaries are translated into their U.S. dollar equivalents at end-of-period exchange rates for assets and liabilities, while income and expenses are translated at average monthly exchange rates. Translation gains and losses are components of accumulated other comprehensive income (loss) as reported in the statements of consolidated comprehensive income. Transaction gains and losses arising from fluctuations in currency exchange rates on transactions denominated in currencies other than the functional currency are recognized in the statements of consolidated income as a component of other expense (income), net. Applied does not currently hedge the net investments in our foreign operations. \n\nDuring the course of the fiscal year, the Canadian and Mexican foreign exchange rates to the U.S. dollar decreased by 6% and 17%, respectively. In the twelve months ended June 30, 2012, we experienced foreign currency translation losses totaling $14.5 million, which were included in accumulated other comprehensive income (loss). We utilize a sensitivity analysis to measure the potential impact on earnings based on a hypothetical 10% change in foreign currency rates. A 10% strengthening from the levels experienced during the year-ended June 30, 2012 of the U.S. dollar relative to foreign currencies that affect the Company would have resulted in a $2.2 million decrease in net income for the year ended June 30, 2012. A 10% weakening from the levels experienced during the year ended June 30, 2012 of the U.S. dollar relative to foreign currencies that affect the Company would have resulted in a $2.2 million increase in net income for the year ended June 30, 2012." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.654827610343285, + "doc_id": "c88ef6c872f5d18e305324ac3a9006df2db3968eeb499527c5b822fa2ad4b124", + "edit_distance": 0.325, + "f1_score": 0.9665071770334928, + "meteor": 0.7286101337909872, + "precision": 0.9711538461538461, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 8 - KEY MANAGEMENT PERSONNEL COMPENSATION continued\n\n## b) Key Management Personnel Compensation\n\nThe total cash remuneration paid to Key Management Personnel ('KMP') of the Group during the year is as follows:\n\nUS$\n\n## c) Options Granted as Compensation\n\nNo options were granted as compensation during each of the years ended 31 December 2014 and 2013 to KMP from the Sundance Energy Employee Stock Option Plan. Options generally vest in five equal tranches of 20% on the grant date and each of the four subsequent anniversaries of the grant date.\n\n## d) Restricted Share Units Granted as Compensation\n\nRSUs awarded as compensation were 1,451,917 ($1.4 million fair value) and 623,251 ($0.6 million fair value) during the years ended 31 December 2014 and 2013, respectively, to KMP from the Sundance Energy Long Term Incentive Plan. RSUs generally vest in four equal tranches of 25% on the grant date and each of the three subsequent anniversaries of the grant date.\n\n## NOTE 9 - AUDITORS' REMUNERATION\n\n- 78 -", + "recall": 0.9619047619047619, + "true_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 8 – KEY MANAGEMENT PERSONNEL COMPENSATION continued\n\n## b) Key Management Personnel Compensation The total cash remuneration paid to Key Management Personnel (“KMP”) of the Group during the year is as\n\nKey Management Personnel Compensation The total cash remuneration paid to Key Management Personnel (“KMP”) of the Group during the year is as follows:\n\n## c) Options Granted as Compensation No options were granted as compensation during each of the years ended 31 December 2014 and 2013 to\n\n## d) Restricted Share Units Granted as Compensation RSUs awarded as compensation were 1,451,917 ($1.4 million fair value) and 623,251 ($0.6 million fair value)\n\nOptions Granted as Compensation No options were granted as compensation during each of the years ended 31 December 2014 and 2013 to KMP from the Sundance Energy Employee Stock Option Plan. Options generally vest in five equal tranches of 20% on the grant date and each of the four subsequent anniversaries of the grant date. \n\nRestricted Share Units Granted as Compensation RSUs awarded as compensation were 1,451,917 ($1.4 million fair value) and 623,251 ($0.6 million fair value) during the years ended 31 December 2014 and 2013, respectively, to KMP from the Sundance Energy Long Term Incentive Plan. RSUs generally vest in four equal tranches of 25% on the grant date and each of the three subsequent anniversaries of the grant date. \n\n## NOTE 9 – AUDITORS’ REMUNERATION\n\n- 78 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8495666225367201, + "doc_id": "8584be37cae26acae5324b16598e32586804849c42127eceea26295ebc5249fd", + "edit_distance": 0.1482843137254902, + "f1_score": 0.9902597402597404, + "meteor": 0.7575407995697105, + "precision": 0.993485342019544, + "pred_md": "## Contractual Obligations\n\nThe following table summarizes our contractual obligations and the expected effect on our liquidity and cash flows as of January 31, 2015. We expect to fund these commitments primarily with operating cash flows generated in the normal course of business and credit available to us under existing and potential future facilities.\n\nIncluded in the required debt repayments disclosed above are estimated total interest payments of $1,881 as of January 31, 2015, payable over the remaining life of the debt.\n\nThe capital and operating lease obligations in the table above do not include payments for operating expenses that are required by most of our lease agreements. Such expenses, which include common area charges, real estate taxes and other executory costs, totaled $88 in 2014, $81 in 2013 and $74 in 2012. In addition, some of our leases require additional rental payments based on a percentage of our sales, referred to as 'percentage rent.' Percentage rent, which is also excluded from the obligations in the table above, was $14 in 2014, 2013 and 2012.\n\nPurchase obligations primarily consist of purchase orders for unreceived goods or services and capital expenditure commitments, including our Manhattan store.\n\nOther long-term liabilities consist of workers' compensation and general liability insurance reserves and postretirement benefits. The payment amounts presented above were estimated based on historical payment trends. Other long-term liabilities not requiring cash payments, such as deferred property incentives and deferred revenue, were excluded from the table above. Also excluded from the table above are unrecognized tax benefits of $9, as we are unable to reasonably estimate the timing of future cash payments, if any, for these liabilities.\n\n## Off-Balance Sheet Arrangements\n\nWe enter into commitments to extend credit to customers through our Nordstrom credit cards. The unused credit card capacity available to our customers represents an off-balance sheet commitment. As of January 31, 2015, this unfunded commitment was $17,322.\n\nOther than operating leases entered into in the normal course of business and the development of our Manhattan full-line store, we had no material off-balance sheet arrangements during 2014.\n\n## CRITICAL ACCOUNTING ESTIMATES\n\nThe preparation of our financial statements requires that we make estimates and judgments that affect the reported amounts of assets, liabilities, revenues and expenses, and disclosure of contingent assets and liabilities. We base our estimates on historical experience and other assumptions that we believe to be reasonable under the circumstances. Actual results may differ from these estimates. The following discussion highlights the estimates we believe are critical and should be read in conjunction with the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements in Item 8: Financial Statements and Supplementary Data. Our management has discussed the development and selection of these critical accounting estimates with the Audit Committee of our Board of Directors and the Audit Committee has reviewed our disclosures that follow.\n\n## Allowance for Credit Losses\n\nThe allowance for credit losses reflects our best estimate of the losses inherent in our credit card receivables as of the balance sheet date, including uncollectible finance charges and fees. We estimate such credit losses based on several factors, including historical aging and delinquency trends, write-off experience, portfolio concentration and risk metrics and general economic conditions.\n\nWe believe the allowance for credit losses is adequate to cover anticipated losses in our credit card receivables under current conditions; however, significant deterioration in any of the factors mentioned above could materially change these expectations. During 2014, our net write-off results continued to improve. As a result, we reduced our allowance for credit losses by $5 during 2014, from $80 to $75, and by $5 in 2013, from $85 to $80. A 10% change in our allowance for credit losses would have affected net earnings by approximately $5 for the fiscal year ended January 31, 2015.\n\n32", + "recall": 0.9870550161812298, + "true_md": "## Contractual Obligations The following table summarizes our contractual obligations and the expected effect on our liquidity and cash flows as of January 31, 2015.\n\nContractual Obligations The following table summarizes our contractual obligations and the expected effect on our liquidity and cash flows as of January 31, 2015. We expect to fund these commitments primarily with operating cash flows generated in the normal course of business and credit available to us under existing and potential future facilities.\n\nIncluded in the required debt repayments disclosed above are estimated total interest payments of $1,881 as of January 31, 2015, payable over the remaining life of the debt.\n\nThe capital and operating lease obligations in the table above do not include payments for operating expenses that are required by most of our lease agreements. Such expenses, which include common area charges, real estate taxes and other executory costs, totaled $88 in 2014, $81 in 2013 and $74 in 2012. In addition, some of our leases require additional rental payments based on a percentage of our sales, referred to as “percentage rent.” Percentage rent, which is also excluded from the obligations in the table above, was $14 in 2014, 2013 and 2012.\n\nPurchase obligations primarily consist of purchase orders for unreceived goods or services and capital expenditure commitments, including our Manhattan store.\n\nOther long-term liabilities consist of workers’ compensation and general liability insurance reserves and postretirement benefits. The payment amounts presented above were estimated based on historical payment trends. Other long-term liabilities not requiring cash payments, such as deferred property incentives and deferred revenue, were excluded from the table above. Also excluded from the table above are unrecognized tax benefits of $9, as we are unable to reasonably estimate the timing of future cash payments, if any, for these liabilities.\n\nOff-Balance Sheet Arrangements We enter into commitments to extend credit to customers through our Nordstrom credit cards. The unused credit card capacity available to our customers represents an off-balance sheet commitment. As of January 31, 2015, this unfunded commitment was $17,322.\n\nOther than operating leases entered into in the normal course of business and the development of our Manhattan full-line store, we had no material off-balance sheet arrangements during 2014.\n\nCRITICAL ACCOUNTING ESTIMATES The preparation of our financial statements requires that we make estimates and judgments that affect the reported amounts of assets, liabilities, revenues and expenses, and disclosure of contingent assets and liabilities. We base our estimates on historical experience and other assumptions that we believe to be reasonable under the circumstances. Actual results may differ from these estimates. The following discussion highlights the estimates we believe are critical and should be read in conjunction with the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements in Item 8: Financial Statements and Supplementary Data. Our management has discussed the development and selection of these critical accounting estimates with the Audit Committee of our Board of Directors and the Audit Committee has reviewed our disclosures that follow.\n\nAllowance for Credit Losses The allowance for credit losses reflects our best estimate of the losses inherent in our credit card receivables as of the balance sheet date, including uncollectible finance charges and fees. We estimate such credit losses based on several factors, including historical aging and delinquency trends, write-off experience, portfolio concentration and risk metrics and general economic conditions.\n\nWe believe the allowance for credit losses is adequate to cover anticipated losses in our credit card receivables under current conditions; however, significant deterioration in any of the factors mentioned above could materially change these expectations. During 2014, our net write-off results continued to improve. As a result, we reduced our allowance for credit losses by $5 during 2014, from $80 to $75, and by $5 in 2013, from $85 to $80. A 10% change in our allowance for credit losses would have affected net earnings by approximately $5 for the fiscal year ended January 31, 2015.\n\n## Allowance for Credit Losses The allowance for credit losses reflects our best estimate of the losses inherent in our credit card receivables as of the balance sheet date,\n\n## CRITICAL ACCOUNTING ESTIMATES The preparation of our financial statements requires that we make estimates and judgments that affect the reported amounts of assets,\n\n## Off-Balance Sheet Arrangements We enter into commitments to extend credit to customers through our Nordstrom credit cards. The unused credit card capacity available to\n\n32" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5377095241937093, + "doc_id": "e4240c5f9ffeaf49e8187134839acb3fe81a517c8c5b27ac5a30c900e6299ce3", + "edit_distance": 0.41830065359477125, + "f1_score": 0.9384615384615383, + "meteor": 0.6285338072447447, + "precision": 0.9104477611940298, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 30 - CASH FLOW INFORMATION\n\n## b) Non Cash Financing and Investing Activities\n\n- During the year ended 31 December 2014 the net gain on sale of properties for the disposition of the Company's remaining Williston assets included the relief of a net payable due to the buyer of $4.0 million ($17.1 million payable and $13.1 million receivable).\n\n- During the year ended 31 December 2013 $132.1 million in shares were issued in connection with the Texon acquisition.\n\n- 94 -", + "recall": 0.9682539682539683, + "true_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n- 94 - \n\n## b) Non Cash Financing and Investing Activities - During the year ended 31 December 2014 the net gain on sale of properties for the disposition of the\n\nNon Cash Financing and Investing Activities - During the year ended 31 December 2014 the net gain on sale of properties for the disposition of the Company’s remaining Williston assets included the relief of a net payable due to the buyer of $4.0 million ($17.1 million payable and $13.1 million receivable). - During the year ended 31 December 2013 $132.1 million in shares were issued in connection with the \n\n($17.1 million payable and $13.1 million receivable). - During the year ended 31 December 2013 $132.1 million in shares were issued in connection with the Texon acquisition." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9283675834440885, + "doc_id": "0b49b1c3d5217411a7c9b92d960d5f6190b661f743cc6398a0f4be8bc1bc0056", + "edit_distance": 0.14210061782877317, + "f1_score": 0.9654255319148936, + "meteor": 0.9365424022014794, + "precision": 0.983739837398374, + "pred_md": "## Production and cost estimates\n\nThe Group prepares estimates of future production, cash costs and capital costs of production for each operation though there is a risk that such estimates will not be achieved. Failure to achieve production or cost estimates or material increases in costs could have an adverse impact on future cash flows, profitability, results of operations and financial position.\n\n## Environmental, health and safety regulations\n\nThe Group's mining and processing operations and exploration activities are subject to extensive laws and regulations. Delays in obtaining or failure to obtain government permits and approvals may adversely affect operations, including the ability to continue operations.\n\n## Community relations\n\nThe Group has established community relations functions that have developed a community engagement framework, including a set of principles, policies and procedures designed to provide a structured and consistent approach to community activities.\n\nA failure to appropriately manage local community stakeholder expectations may lead to disruptions in production and exploration activities.\n\n## Risk management\n\nThe Group manage the risks listed above, and other day-to-day risks, through an established management framework. The Group has policies in place to manage risk in the areas of health and safety, environment and equal employment opportunity.\n\nManagement and the Board regularly review the risk portfolio of the business and the effectiveness of the Group's management of those risks.\n\n## Finance\n\n## Corporate loan and convertible loan facilities\n\nThe Group has a three year secured loan facility with a limit of A$40,000,000 (30 June 2012: A$50,000,000), of which A$20,000,000 has been drawn down as at 30 June 2013 (30 June 2012: A$40,000,000).\n\nwww.kingsgate.com.au\n\nThe Group also has a five year A$35,000,000 convertible loan facility entered into in a prior period to provide funding for the Bowdens acquisition. Kingsgate has the option to make a prepayment against the facility with an issue of Kingsgate shares.\n\nAs indicated previously in the Preliminary Final report, at balance date it was the Group's intention to restructure and amalgamate these facilities in the next financial year. This relates to the potential for completion of the Initial Public Offering ('IPO') of Akara on the Stock Exchange of Thailand and the updated mine plan for Challenger. Any restructure would optimise the Group's anticipated balance sheet liquidity and operational cash flows. Accordingly, the Group classified the total amount drawn down under these facilities of $55,000,000 as a current liability at 30 June 2013. In addition as a result of the intended restructure, $3,900,000 of previously capitalised borrowing costs relating to the convertible loan and corporate loan facilities has been expensed at year end.\n\nSubsequent to the end of the financial year, the Group has received from its lenders a credit approved term sheet (subject to formal documentation) for the restructure of the corporate loan and convertible loan facilities. Following completion of the restructure the total amount outstanding will be reduced to $40,000,000. This loan will be provided through a single senior corporate facility which will consist of two tranches:\n\n- 〉 Tranche one will be a $25,000,000 Akara Pre IPO Bond with a maturity date of 31 July 2015. The current intention is for this tranche to be repaid as part of the Akara IPO although at Kingsgate's election repayment can be made by either cash or in Kingsgate's shares.\n- 〉 Tranche two is an amortising facility with $5,000,000 to be repaid during the 2014 financial year and the balance of $10,000,000 repaid during the 2015 financial year.\n\n## Convertible revolving credit facility\n\nThe Group also has a three year $25,000,000 Convertible Revolving Credit Facility available. At the date of this report the facility is undrawn. Under the terms of this facility, Kingsgate has the option of repaying any funds drawn down under the facility through either cash or by issuing ordinary shares. It is intended that this facility will be utilised during the 2014 financial year for corporate and working capital purposes. It is the current intention of the Company to repay any cash drawdown under the facility by the issuance of fully paid ordinary shares which\n\nwould rank parri pasu with all existing ordinary shares, although this position will be reviewed at the appropriate time. The number of shares has not yet been determined and they will be issued at a 2.5% discount to VWAP over a period by reference to the draw down date. Shareholder approval is not required.\n\n## Multi-currency and syndicated loan facilities\n\nKingsgate's Thai operating subsidiary, Akara, established a six year amortising multi-currency loan facility equivalent to US$125,000,000 (fully drawn as at year end) and an additional Thai Baht denominated working capital facility equivalent to US$15,000,000 (undrawn as at year end) during the period. The proceeds from these borrowings were used to fully repay the outstanding balance on the US$100,000,000 Baht denominated syndicated loan facility in existence at the beginning of the year as well as to repay part of the corporate loan facility noted above. Finance costs include the write off of the balance of capitalised borrowing fees of $1,800,000 following the Akara refinancing.\n\n## Significant change in the state of affairs\n\nThere were no significant changes in the state of affairs of the Group that occurred during the financial year not otherwise disclosed in this report or the consolidated financial statements.\n\n## Matters subsequent to the end of the financial year\n\nKingsgate has received from its lender a credit approved term sheet (subject to formal documentation) for the restructure of the existing corporate loan facility which is drawn to $20,000,000 and the existing convertible loan facility which is drawn to $35,000,000.\n\nSubsequent to the end of the financial year, the Group has received from its lenders a credit approved term sheet (subject to formal documentation) for the restructure of the corporate loan and convertible loan facilities. Following completion of the restructure the total amount outstanding will be reduced to $40,000,000. This loan will be provided through a single senior corporate facility which will consist of two tranches:", + "recall": 0.9477806788511749, + "true_md": "Directors’ Report 46\n\nwww.kingsgate.com.au\n\n## Production and cost estimates\n\n## Environmental, health and safety regulations\n\n## Community relations\n\n## Risk management\n\n## Finance\n\n## Corporate loan and convertible loan facilities\n\n## Matters subsequent to the end of the financial year\n\n## Significant change in the state of affairs\n\n## Multi-currency and syndicated loan facilities\n\nThe Group prepares estimates of future produc- tion, cash costs and capital costs of production for each operation though there is a risk that such estimates will not be achieved. Failure to achieve production or cost estimates or material increases in costs could have an adverse impact on future cash flows, profitability, results of operations and financial position.\n\nThe Group’s mining and processing operations and exploration activities are subject to exten- sive laws and regulations. Delays in obtaining or failure to obtain government permits and approvals may adversely affect operations, including the ability to continue operations. \n\nThe Group has established community relations functions that have developed a community engagement framework, including a set of principles, policies and procedures designed to provide a structured and consistent approach to community activities. \n\nA failure to appropriately manage local commu- nity stakeholder expectations may lead to disruptions in production and exploration activities.\n\nThe Group manage the risks listed above, and other day-to-day risks, through an established management framework. The Group has policies in place to manage risk in the areas of health and safety, environment and equal employment opportunity.\n\nManagement and the Board regularly review the risk portfolio of the business and the effective- ness of the Group’s management of those risks.\n\nThe Group has a three year secured loan facility with a limit of A$40,000,000 (30 June 2012: A$50,000,000), of which A$20,000,000 has been drawn down as at 30 June 2013 (30 June 2012: A$40,000,000). \n\nThe Group also has a five year A$35,000,000 convertible loan facility entered into in a prior period to provide funding for the Bowdens acquisition. Kingsgate has the option to make a prepayment against the facility with an issue of Kingsgate shares.\n\nAs indicated previously in the Preliminary Final report, at balance date it was the Group’s inten- tion to restructure and amalgamate these facilities in the next financial year. This relates to the potential for completion of the Initial Public Offering (“IPO”) of Akara on the Stock Exchange of Thailand and the updated mine plan for Challenger. Any restructure would optimise the Group’s anticipated balance sheet liquidity and operational cash flows. Accordingly, the Group classified the total amount drawn down under these facilities of $55,000,000 as a current liability at 30 June 2013. In addition as a result of the intended restructure, $3,900,000 of previ- ously capitalised borrowing costs relating to the convertible loan and corporate loan facilities has been expensed at year end.\n\nSubsequent to the end of the financial year, the Group has received from its lenders a credit approved term sheet (subject to formal docu- mentation) for the restructure of the corporate loan and convertible loan facilities. Following completion of the restructure the total amount outstanding will be reduced to $40,000,000. This loan will be provided through a single senior corporate facility which will consist of two tranches:\n\n- 〉 Tranche one will be a $25,000,000 Akara Pre IPO Bond with a maturity date of 31 July 2015. The current intention is for this tranche to be repaid as part of the Akara IPO although at Kingsgate’s election repayment can be made by either cash or in Kingsgate’s shares.\n\n- 〉 Tranche two is an amortising facility with $5,000,000 to be repaid during the 2014 financial year and the balance of $10,000,000 repaid during the 2015 financial year.\n\nThe Group also has a three year $25,000,000 Convertible Revolving Credit Facility available. At the date of this report the facility is undrawn. Under the terms of this facility, Kingsgate has the option of repaying any funds drawn down under the facility through either cash or by issuing ordinary shares. It is intended that this facility will be utilised during the 2014 financial year for corporate and working capital purposes. It is the current intention of the Company to repay any cash drawdown under the facility by the issuance of fully paid ordinary shares which \n\n## Convertible revolving credit facility\n\nwould rank parri pasu with all existing ordinary shares, although this position will be reviewed at the appropriate time. The number of shares has not yet been determined and they will be issued at a 2.5% discount to VWAP over a period by reference to the draw down date. Shareholder approval is not required.\n\nKingsgate’s Thai operating subsidiary, Akara, established a six year amortising multi-currency loan facility equivalent to US$125,000,000 (fully drawn as at year end) and an additional Thai Baht denominated working capital facility equivalent to US$15,000,000 (undrawn as at year end) during the period. The proceeds from these borrowings were used to fully repay the outstanding balance on the US$100,000,000 Baht denominated syndicated loan facility in existence at the beginning of the year as well as to repay part of the corporate loan facility noted above. Finance costs include the write off of the balance of capitalised borrowing fees of $1,800,000 following the Akara refinancing.\n\nThere were no significant changes in the state of affairs of the Group that occurred during the financial year not otherwise disclosed in this report or the consolidated financial statements.\n\nKingsgate has received from its lender a credit approved term sheet (subject to formal docu- mentation) for the restructure of the existing corporate loan facility which is drawn to $20,000,000 and the existing convertible loan facility which is drawn to $35,000,000.\n\nSubsequent to the end of the financial year, the Group has received from its lenders a credit approved term sheet (subject to formal docu- mentation) for the restructure of the corporate loan and convertible loan facilities. Following completion of the restructure the total amount outstanding will be reduced to $40,000,000. This loan will be provided through a single senior corporate facility which will consist of two tranches:" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8130485349471083, + "doc_id": "2c4e7a702a0da1046d3c960aa1a2672d72d2da234309d169ffb9b517e66a8e66", + "edit_distance": 0.21052631578947367, + "f1_score": 0.96875, + "meteor": 0.9696848690559382, + "precision": 0.96875, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 35 - DEED OF CROSS GUARANTEE continued\n\nSet out below is a condensed consolidated statement of financial position of the Closed Group:\n\n4\n\n- 104 -", + "recall": 0.96875, + "true_md": "## NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## NOTE 35 – DEED OF CROSS GUARANTEE continued\n\n- 104 - \n\nSet out below is a condensed consolidated statement of financial position of the Closed Group:" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.22947191374486844, + "doc_id": "2fc7b428ec884cff5fd17008d1762f985d24611706c49783f128d239f0c78665", + "edit_distance": 0.7333333333333333, + "f1_score": 0.92, + "meteor": 0.4070149834598171, + "precision": 0.9583333333333334, + "pred_md": "portfolio Facts 12,647 Apartment Units\n\n164 Apartment Properties\n\n35 Manufactured Home Communities\n\n35 % Value of Apartment Portfolio Built Since 2000\n\n$ 915 Average Apartment Rent\n\n$ 222 Average MHC Rent", + "recall": 0.8846153846153846, + "true_md": "## portfolio Facts\n\n## 12,647 Apartment\n\n## 16 4 Apartment\n\n## 35 Manufactured\n\n## 35 % Value of\n\n## $ 915 Average\n\n## $ 222 Average\n\n222 Average MHC Rent\n\n915 Average Apartment Rent\n\n35 Value of Apartment Portfolio Built Since 2000\n\n35 Manufactured Home Communities\n\n16 4 Apartment Properties\n\n12,647 Apartment Units" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.35898222865457863, + "doc_id": "0e39fe507aafcda5487004c381e19a4b540706b996666204accebb3a817b6b44", + "edit_distance": 0.5, + "f1_score": 0.9056603773584905, + "meteor": 0.5241344537815126, + "precision": 0.96, + "pred_md": "## Management's Discussion and Analysis\n\nDollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013\n\n27", + "recall": 0.8571428571428571, + "true_md": "## Management’s Discussion and Analysis Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\nManagement’s Discussion and Analysis Dollar amounts are in thousands of Canadian dollars (except as noted)\n\n## 2014 Targets\n\nKillam ProPerties inc | 2013 27" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9354073861329523, + "doc_id": "1575f44ff77f5a8e985a8b579039b1d5fe100de0c6c4c30be85a202cee8197d2", + "edit_distance": 0.36860670194003525, + "f1_score": 0.9696969696969697, + "meteor": 0.977055544758272, + "precision": 0.9795918367346939, + "pred_md": "## MEDIA\n\n## DIVERSIFIED CANADIAN MEDIA COMPANY\n\nWe have a broad portfolio of media properties, which most significantly includes:\n\n- GLYPH<129> category-leading television and radio broadcasting properties\n- GLYPH<129> multi-platform shopping\n- GLYPH<129> publishing including Next Issue Canada\n- GLYPH<129> digital media\n- GLYPH<129> sports media and entertainment\n- GLYPH<129> exclusive 12-year licensing agreement with the NHL to broadcast all national live hockey games within Canada in multiple languages on all platforms beginning with the 20142015 season.\n\n## A NETWORK OF MEDIA ASSETS THAT REACHES CANADIANS COAST-TO-COAST\n\n## COMPETITION\n\nOur radio stations compete mainly with individual stations in local markets, but they also compete:\n\n- GLYPH<129> nationally with other large radio operators, including satellite radio operator Sirius/XM, the CBC, Bell Media and Corus Entertainment\n- GLYPH<129> with other media, including newspapers, magazines, television and outdoor advertising\n- GLYPH<129> with new technologies such as online web information services, music downloading, portable media players and online music streaming services.\n\nThe Shopping Channel competes with:\n\n- GLYPH<129> retail stores, catalogue, Internet and direct mail retailers\n- GLYPH<129> infomercials that sell products on television\n- GLYPH<129> other television channels, for channel placement, viewer attention and loyalty.\n\nOur magazines and other publications compete for readership and advertisers with:\n\n- GLYPH<129> other Canadian magazines\n- GLYPH<129> foreign, mostly US, titles that sell in significant quantities in Canada\n- GLYPH<129> online information and entertainment websites.\n\nTelevision and specialty services compete for viewers and advertisers with:\n\n- GLYPH<129> other Canadian television stations that broadcast in their local markets, including those owned and operated by the CBC, Bell Media and Shaw Media, some of which have greater national coverage\n- GLYPH<129> other specialty channels\n- GLYPH<129> other distant Canadian signals and US border stations given the timeshifting capacity available to digital subscribers\n- GLYPH<129> other media, including newspapers, magazines, radio and outdoor advertising\n- GLYPH<129> content available on the Internet.\n\nCompetition in Sports Entertainment includes:\n\n- GLYPH<129> other Toronto professional teams, for attendance at Blue Jays games\n- GLYPH<129> other Major League Baseball teams, for Blue Jays players and fans\n- GLYPH<129> other local sporting and special event venues.\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC.\n\n47\n\nMANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS", + "recall": 0.96, + "true_md": "MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AN D ANALYSIS\n\n## COMPETITION\n\n## MEDIA\n\n## DIVERSIFIED CANADIAN MEDIA COMPANY\n\nWe have a broad portfolio of media properties, which most significantly includes:\n\n- GLYPH<129> category-leading television and radio broadcasting properties\n\n- GLYPH<129> multi-platform shopping\n\n- GLYPH<129> publishing including Next Issue Canada\n\n- GLYPH<129> digital media\n\n- GLYPH<129> sports media and entertainment\n\n- GLYPH<129> exclusive 12-year licensing agreement with the NHL to broadcast all national live hockey games within Canada in multiple languages on all platforms beginning with the 2014- 2015 season.\n\n## A NETWORK OF MEDIA ASSETS THAT REACHES CANADIANS COAST-TO-COAST\n\nOur radio stations compete mainly with individual stations in local markets, but they also compete:\n\nTelevision and specialty services compete for viewers and advertisers with:\n\nThe Shopping Channel competes with:\n\nCompetition in Sports Entertainment includes:\n\nOur magazines and other publications compete for readership and advertisers with:\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 47\n\n- GLYPH<129> nationally with other large radio operators, including satellite radio operator Sirius/XM, the CBC, Bell Media and Corus Entertainment\n\n- GLYPH<129> with other media, including newspapers, magazines, television and outdoor advertising\n\n- GLYPH<129> with new technologies such as online web information services, music downloading, portable media players and online music streaming services.\n\n- GLYPH<129> retail stores, catalogue, Internet and direct mail retailers\n\n- GLYPH<129> infomercials that sell products on television\n\n- GLYPH<129> other television channels, for channel placement, viewer attention and loyalty.\n\n- GLYPH<129> other Canadian magazines\n\n- GLYPH<129> foreign, mostly US, titles that sell in significant quantities in Canada\n\n- GLYPH<129> online information and entertainment websites.\n\n- GLYPH<129> other Toronto professional teams, for attendance at Blue Jays games\n\n- GLYPH<129> other Major League Baseball teams, for Blue Jays players and fans\n\n- GLYPH<129> other local sporting and special event venues.\n\n- GLYPH<129> other Canadian television stations that broadcast in their local markets, including those owned and operated by the CBC, Bell Media and Shaw Media, some of which have greater national coverage\n\n- GLYPH<129> other specialty channels\n\n- GLYPH<129> other distant Canadian signals and US border stations given the time- shifting capacity available to digital subscribers\n\n- GLYPH<129> other media, including newspapers, magazines, radio and outdoor advertising\n\n- GLYPH<129> content available on the Internet." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.609718464012684, + "doc_id": "eae40317d83ba98d3e70427e6d7baff6dec2bc448538644e0ed6e29ad61d1f59", + "edit_distance": 0.3181818181818182, + "f1_score": 0.8125, + "meteor": 0.6997658079625293, + "precision": 0.9629629629629629, + "pred_md": "## FINANCIAL HIGHLIGHTS\n\nMSA's ongoing commitment to investing in core products and focus on managing costs helped generate a strong finish in 2011.\n\nMSA 2011 ANNUAL REPORT 1", + "recall": 0.7027027027027027, + "true_md": "## FINANCIAL HIGHLIGHTS\n\nMSA’s ongoing commitment to investing in core products and focus on managing costs helped generate a strong finish in 2011. \n\nMSA 2011 ANNUAL REPORT 1\n\nANNUAL SALES BY CORE PRODUCT GROUP\n\nANNU AL SALES BY RE GION" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9108020706553402, + "doc_id": "f0b50217c67ea8f24a2bb306725d916d1c90daeadc4281e07ea1f71e131bc02e", + "edit_distance": 0.7576142131979695, + "f1_score": 0.9531013615733737, + "meteor": 0.8121272492376082, + "precision": 0.9722222222222222, + "pred_md": "14\n\n## ■ International Banking\n\nSMFG offers value-added services to its clients (corporations, financial institutions, governmental organizations and public entities) operating globally by creating tailor-made solutions which meet diverse local needs, mainly through SMBC's International Banking Unit.\n\nSMBC has three regional headquarters: in Europe, the United States and the Asia-Pacific region; and subsidiaries in such emerging markets as China, Russia, Brazil and Malaysia.\n\nThrough this network, it has established a system which quickly and flexibly responds to the diverse needs of each region. It strives to become a global commercial bank which can extensively demonstrate its strengths for the diverse business opportunities in the international market.\n\n## Expansion of Overseas Network\n\nSMBC is working to expand its overseas network of branches to improve their services for the Japanese companies and to enhance their presence in emerging markets.\n\nSMBC (China) opened two new branches and two new sub-branches in the fiscal year 2010: Shenyang branch and Shanghai (Pixi) Sub-branch in June and July 2010, respectively, and Changshu Sub-branch and Shenzhen branch in January and May 2011, respectively. The SMBC Group will use its network in China, which consists of branches and offices in 15 locations, to enhance the quality of its financial services.\n\n## Capital Strategies and Business Alliances with Major Asian Financial Institutions\n\nThe alliance strategies in Asian countries are specifically planned to take the advantage of the special attributes of each country and region. We plan to enhance our solutions such as expanding our Asian currencies services for each region.\n\nIn December 2010, the bank executed a Memorandum of Understanding on Mutual Business Cooperation with RHB Bank Berhad, Malaysia's fourth-largest bank by market capitalization (as of the end of March 2011), a strategic partner for around the last 30 years. The bank aims to further strengthen this alliance relationship.\n\nAdditionally, in March 2011, the bank executed the Cooperative Agreement with Kotak Mahindra (UK) Ltd., an asset\n\nSMFG 2011\n\nmanagement subsidiary of Kotak Mahindra Bank* in India, for the establishment of infrastructure funds in India.\n\nSMBC continues to develop its banking networks and expand Asian businesses in diversified ways by establishing alliances with major local financial institutions in Asia.\n\n* Kotak Mahindra Bank, with which we have established a capital and operating alliance, is the core bank of the Kotak Mahindra Group.\n\n## Core IT System Upgrades\n\nSMBC is pursuing its overseas business development and the advancement of information processing and management systems in order to further support the global development of our clients' businesses. SMBC has upgraded the Asian accounting system as part of its plan to promote the strengthening of its overseas administrative system. Furthermore, it also works to further advance client information and business management systems.\n\n## Strengthening of Risk Management\n\nSMBC is continuously enhancing its credit monitoring system as part of its plan to reinforce its credit cost control system, and it has also established specialized credit management departments in Europe and the United States, in addition to the International Credit Management and regional Credit Departments.\n\nHaving established the Risk Management Department Groups in Europe and the United States, it is building a comprehensive risk management system especially made for the local markets.\n\n## Strengthening of Compliance System\n\nAs the global trend towards strengthening financial regulations continue, and based on the understanding that it is essential to further strengthen the compliance system as our business grows, we are further focusing on enhancing the management system by improving the collection and analysis of information related to regulatory changes, and providing such management resources as human resources.\n\nIn responding to the strengthening of regulations related to economic sanctions in each country, we continue to pursue more sophisticated and efficient means to prevent moneylaundering and financing for terrorist activities.\n\n## Development of Professional Human Resources Required for Overseas Business Growth\n\nWe are further improving our training and educational programs in order to respond appropriately and promptly to the increasingly diverse and highly sophisticated needs of our clients. To gain international financial experience, we place our promising employees in our overseas offices or at the overseas specialized financial institutions outside of the Group. As SMBC's first attempt, it invited employees, including overseas national staff,", + "recall": 0.9347181008902077, + "true_md": "## ■ International Banking\n\n## Expansion of Overseas Network\n\n## Strengthening of Risk Management\n\n## Core IT System Upgrades\n\n## Strengthening of Compliance System\n\n## Capital Strategies and Business Alliances with Major Asian Financial Institutions\n\n## Development of Professional Human Resources Required for Overseas Business Growth\n\nSMFG 2011 14\n\nSMFG offers value-added services to its clients (corporations, financial institutions, governmental organizations and public enti- ties) operating globally by creating tailor-made solutions which meet diverse local needs, mainly through SMBC’s International Banking Unit.\n\nmanagement subsidiary of Kotak Mahindra Bank* in India, for the establishment of infrastructure funds in India. \n\nSMBC continues to develop its banking networks and expand Asian businesses in diversified ways by establishing alliances with major local financial institutions in Asia.\n\n* Kotak Mahindra Bank, with which we have established a capital and operating alliance, is the core bank of the Kotak Mahindra Group.\n\nSMBC has three regional headquarters: in Europe, the United States and the Asia-Pacific region; and subsidiaries in such emerging markets as China, Russia, Brazil and Malaysia. Through this network, it has established a system which quickly and flexibly responds to the diverse needs of each region. It strives to become a global commercial bank which can exten- sively demonstrate its strengths for the diverse business oppor- tunities in the international market.\n\nSMBC is pursuing its overseas business development and the advancement of information processing and management sys- tems in order to further support the global development of our clients’ businesses. SMBC has upgraded the Asian accounting system as part of its plan to promote the strengthening of its overseas administrative system. Furthermore, it also works to further advance client information and business management systems.\n\nSMBC is working to expand its overseas network of branches to improve their services for the Japanese companies and to enhance their presence in emerging markets.\n\nSMBC (China) opened two new branches and two new sub-branches in the fiscal year 2010: Shenyang branch and Shanghai (Pixi) Sub-branch in June and July 2010, respectively, and Changshu Sub-branch and Shenzhen branch in January and May 2011, respectively. The SMBC Group will use its net- work in China, which consists of branches and offices in 15 locations, to enhance the quality of its financial services.\n\nSMBC is continuously enhancing its credit monitoring system as part of its plan to reinforce its credit cost control system, and it has also established specialized credit management departments in Europe and the United States, in addition to the International Credit Management and regional Credit Departments.\n\nHaving established the Risk Management Department Groups in Europe and the United States, it is building a com- prehensive risk management system especially made for the local markets.\n\nAs the global trend towards strengthening financial regulations continue, and based on the understanding that it is essential to further strengthen the compliance system as our business grows, we are further focusing on enhancing the management system by improving the collection and analysis of information related to regulatory changes, and providing such management resources as human resources.\n\nIn responding to the strengthening of regulations related to economic sanctions in each country, we continue to pursue more sophisticated and efficient means to prevent money- laundering and financing for terrorist activities.\n\nThe alliance strategies in Asian countries are specifically planned to take the advantage of the special attributes of each country and region. We plan to enhance our solutions such as expand- ing our Asian currencies services for each region.\n\nIn December 2010, the bank executed a Memorandum of Understanding on Mutual Business Cooperation with RHB Bank Berhad, Malaysia’s fourth-largest bank by market capitalization (as of the end of March 2011), a strategic partner for around the last 30 years. The bank aims to further strengthen this alliance relationship.\n\nAdditionally, in March 2011, the bank executed the Cooperative Agreement with Kotak Mahindra (UK) Ltd., an asset \n\nWe are further improving our training and educational programs in order to respond appropriately and promptly to the increas- ingly diverse and highly sophisticated needs of our clients. To gain international financial experience, we place our promising employees in our overseas offices or at the overseas special- ized financial institutions outside of the Group. As SMBC’s first attempt, it invited employees, including overseas national staff," + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9525633827360256, + "doc_id": "234d4f5aac737397856fd9720031748bc65f47231d1b87e97cede44e0dba1b14", + "edit_distance": 0.15658362989323843, + "f1_score": 0.9896907216494847, + "meteor": 0.9845904722954092, + "precision": 0.993103448275862, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (Continued)\n\n(In thousands, except per share amounts)\n\n## Consolidated Balance Sheets\n\nSignificant components of the Company's net deferred tax assets are as follows:\n\nValuation allowances are provided against deferred tax assets where it is considered more-likely-than-not that the Company will not realize the benefit of such assets. The remaining net deferred tax asset is the amount management believes is more-likely-than-not of being realized. The realization of these deferred tax assets can be impacted by changes to tax laws, statutory rates and future income levels.\n\nU.S. federal income taxes are provided on the portion of non-U.S. subsidiaries income that is not considered to be permanently reinvested outside the U.S. and may be remitted to the U.S. At June 30, 2012, undistributed earnings of non-U.S. subsidiaries considered to be permanently reinvested and for which no U.S. tax has been provided totaled approximately $79,800. Determination of the net amount of the unrecognized tax liability with respect to these earnings is not practicable; however, foreign tax credits would be available to partially reduce U.S. income taxes in the event of a distribution. Undistributed earnings of non-U.S. subsidiaries not considered permanently reinvested totaled approximately $13,600. U.S. taxes totaling $2,804 have been accrued on these earnings.\n\n## Unrecognized Income Tax Benefits\n\nThe Company and its subsidiaries file income tax returns in U.S. federal, various state, local and foreign jurisdictions. The following is a reconciliation of the Company's total gross unrecognized income tax benefits:\n\n26 Applied Industrial Technologies, Inc. and Subsidiaries", + "recall": 0.9863013698630136, + "true_md": "(In thousands, except per share amounts)\n\nSignificant components of the Company’s net deferred tax assets are as follows:\n\nValuation allowances are provided against deferred tax assets where it is considered more-likely-than-not that the Company will not realize the benefit of such assets. The remaining net deferred tax asset is the amount management believes is more-likely-than-not of being realized. The realization of these deferred tax assets can be impacted by changes to tax laws, statutory rates and future income levels. \n\nU.S. federal income taxes are provided on the portion of non-U.S. subsidiaries income that is not considered to be permanently reinvested outside the U.S. and may be remitted to the U.S. At June 30, 2012, undistributed earnings of non-U.S. subsidiaries considered to be permanently reinvested and for which no U.S. tax has been provided totaled approximately $79,800. Determination of the net amount of the unrecognized tax liability with respect to these earnings is not practicable; however, foreign tax credits would be available to partially reduce U.S. income taxes in the event of a distribution. Undistributed earnings of non-U.S. subsidiaries not considered permanently reinvested totaled approximately $13,600. U.S. taxes totaling $2,804 have been accrued on these earnings. \n\nThe Company and its subsidiaries file income tax returns in U.S. federal, various state, local and foreign jurisdictions. The following is a reconciliation of the Company’s total gross unrecognized income tax benefits:\n\n26 Applied Industrial Technologies, Inc. and Subsidiaries\n\n## Unrecognized Income Tax Benefits\n\n## Consolidated Balance Sheets\n\nNOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (Continued)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9249218579795618, + "doc_id": "f1ca9332f186d19a5714c20848b019b812f8d2ad23535bc84d9f7f838609504c", + "edit_distance": 0.511787072243346, + "f1_score": 0.9500554938956716, + "meteor": 0.8353485363632569, + "precision": 0.9749430523917996, + "pred_md": "70\n\nNotes to the Financial Statements\n\nThe head entity recognises the assumed current tax amounts as current tax liabilities or assets, adding to its own current tax amounts, since they are also due to or from the same taxation authority. The current tax liabilities or assets are equivalent to the tax balances generated by external transactions entered into by the taxconsolidation group.\n\nThe amounts receivable or payable under the tax funding agreement are due upon receipt of the funding advice from the head entity, which is issued as soon as practicable after the end of each financial year. The head entity may also require payment of interim funding amounts to assist with its obligations to pay tax instalments.\n\nThe members of the tax-consolidation group have also entered into a tax sharing agreement. The tax sharing agreement provides for the determination of the allocation of income tax liabilities between the entities should the head entity default on its tax payment obligations. No amounts have been recognised in the consolidated financial statements in respect of this agreement as payment of any amounts under the tax sharing agreement is considered remote.\n\n## e . Leases\n\nLeases of property, plant and equipment where the Group, as lessee, has substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership are classified as finance leases. Finance leases are capitalised at the lease's inception at the fair value of the leased property or, if lower, the present value of the minimum lease payments. The corresponding rental obligations, net of finance charges, are included in other short-term and long-term payables. Each lease payment is allocated between the liability and finance cost. The finance cost is charged to the profit or loss over the lease period so as to produce a constant periodic rate of interest on the remaining balance of the liability for each period.\n\nThe property, plant and equipment acquired under finance leases is depreciated over the asset's useful life or over the shorter of the asset's useful life and the lease term if there is no reasonable certainty that the Group will obtain ownership at the end of the lease term.\n\nLeases in which a significant portion of the risks and rewards of ownership are not transferred to the Group as lessee are classified as operating leases. Payments made under operating leases (net of any incentives received from the lessor) are charged to the profit or loss on a straightline basis over the period of the lease.\n\nwww.kingsgate.com.au\n\n## f . Impairment of assets\n\nAssets are tested for impairment whenever events or changes in circumstances indicate that the carrying amount may not be recoverable. An impairment loss is recognised for the amount by which the asset's carrying amount exceeds its recoverable amount. The recoverable amount is the higher of an asset's fair value less costs to sell and value in use. For the purposes of assessing impairment, assets are grouped at the lowest levels for which there are separately identifiable cash inflows which are largely independent of the cash inflows from other assets or groups of assets (cash-generating units). Non-financial assets other than goodwill that suffered impairment are reviewed for possible reversal of the impairment at each reporting date.\n\n## g . Cash and cash equivalents\n\nCash and cash equivalents includes cash on hand, deposits held at call with financial institutions, other short-term, highly liquid investments with original maturities of three months or less that are readily convertible to known amounts of cash and which are subject to an insignificant risk of changes in value, and bank overdrafts. Bank overdrafts are shown within borrowings in current liabilities in the statement of financial position.\n\n## h . Trade and other receivables\n\nTrade and other receivables are recognised initially at fair value and subsequently measured at amortised cost using the effective interest method, less provision for impairment. Receivables are due for settlement no more than 90 days from the date of recognition.\n\nCollectability of trade and other receivables is reviewed on an ongoing basis. Debts which are known to be uncollectible are written off by reducing the carrying amount directly. An allowance account is used when there is objective evidence that the Group will not be able to collect all amounts due according to the original terms of the receivables. Significant financial difficulties of the debtor, probability that the debtor will enter bankruptcy or financial reorganisation, and default or delinquency in payments more than 60 days overdue are considered indicators that the trade and other receivable is impaired. The amount of the impairment allowance is the difference between the asset's carrying amount and the present value of estimated future cash flows, discounted at the original effective interest rate. Cash flows relating to short-term receivables are not discounted if the effect of discounting is immaterial.\n\nThe amount of the impairment loss is recognised in the statement of comprehensive income\n\nwithin other expenses. When a trade and other receivable for which an impairment allowance had been recognised becomes uncollectible in a subsequent period, it is written off against the allowance account. Subsequent recoveries of amounts previously written off are credited against other expenses in the statement of comprehensive income.\n\n## i . Inventories\n\nRaw materials and stores, work in progress and finished goods, including gold bullion, are stated at the lower of cost and net realisable value. Cost comprises direct materials, direct labour and an appropriate proportion of variable and fixed overhead expenditure the latter being allocated on the basis of normal operating capacity. Costs are assigned to individual items of inventory on the basis of weighted average costs. Costs of purchased inventory are determined after deducting rebates and discounts. Net realisable value is the estimated selling price in the ordinary course of business less the estimated costs of completion and the estimated costs necessary to make the sale.\n\nStockpiles represent ore that has been extracted and is available for further processing. If there is significant uncertainty as to whether the stockpiled ore will be processed it is expensed as incurred. Where the future processing of this ore can be predicted with confidence, e.g. because it exceeds the mine's cut-off grade, it is valued at the lower of cost and net realisable value. If the ore will not be processed within the 12 months after the reporting date it is included within non-current assets. Work in progress inventory includes ore stockpiles and other partly processed material. Quantities are assessed primarily through surveys and assays, and truck counts.\n\n## j . Non-derivative financial assets\n\n## Classification and recognition\n\nThe Group classifies its investments and other financial assets in the following categories: financial assets at fair value through profit or loss, loans and receivables and available-for-sale financial assets. The classification depends on the purpose for which the investments were acquired. The Group determines the classification of its investments at initial recognition and, in the case of assets classified as held-to-maturity, re-evaluates this designation at each reporting date.\n\nThe Group initially recognises loans and receivables and deposits on the date that they are originated. All other financial assets (including assets designated at fair value through profit or loss) are recognised initially on the trade date at", + "recall": 0.9264069264069265, + "true_md": "Notes to the Financial Statements 70\n\nThe head entity recognises the assumed current tax amounts as current tax liabilities or assets, adding to its own current tax amounts, since they are also due to or from the same taxation authority. The current tax liabilities or assets are equivalent to the tax balances generated by external transactions entered into by the tax- consolidation group.\n\nThe amounts receivable or payable under the tax funding agreement are due upon receipt of the funding advice from the head entity, which is issued as soon as practicable after the end of each financial year. The head entity may also require payment of interim funding amounts to assist with its obligations to pay tax instalments.\n\nThe members of the tax-consolidation group have also entered into a tax sharing agreement. The tax sharing agreement provides for the determination of the allocation of income tax liabilities between the entities should the head entity default on its tax payment obligations. No amounts have been recognised in the consol- idated financial statements in respect of this agreement as payment of any amounts under the tax sharing agreement is considered remote.\n\nAssets are tested for impairment whenever events or changes in circumstances indicate that the carrying amount may not be recoverable. An impairment loss is recognised for the amount by which the asset’s carrying amount exceeds its recoverable amount. The recoverable amount is the higher of an asset’s fair value less costs to sell and value in use. For the purposes of assessing impairment, assets are grouped at the lowest levels for which there are separately identifiable cash inflows which are largely independent of the cash inflows from other assets or groups of assets (cash-generating units). Non-financial assets other than goodwill that suffered impair- ment are reviewed for possible reversal of the impairment at each reporting date.\n\nLeases of property, plant and equipment where the Group, as lessee, has substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership are classified as finance leases. Finance leases are capitalised at the lease’s inception at the fair value of the leased property or, if lower, the present value of the minimum lease payments. The corre- sponding rental obligations, net of finance charges, are included in other short-term and long-term payables. Each lease payment is allocated between the liability and finance cost. The finance cost is charged to the profit or loss over the lease period so as to produce a con- stant periodic rate of interest on the remaining balance of the liability for each period.\n\nThe property, plant and equipment acquired under finance leases is depreciated over the asset’s useful life or over the shorter of the asset’s useful life and the lease term if there is no reasonable certainty that the Group will obtain ownership at the end of the lease term.\n\nLeases in which a significant portion of the risks and rewards of ownership are not transferred to the Group as lessee are classified as operating leases. Payments made under operating leases (net of any incentives received from the lessor) are charged to the profit or loss on a straight- line basis over the period of the lease. \n\nThe amount of the impairment loss is recognised in the statement of comprehensive income \n\nCollectability of trade and other receivables is reviewed on an ongoing basis. Debts which are known to be uncollectible are written off by reducing the carrying amount directly. An allow- ance account is used when there is objective evidence that the Group will not be able to collect all amounts due according to the original terms of the receivables. Significant financial difficulties of the debtor, probability that the debtor will enter bankruptcy or financial reorganisation, and default or delinquency in payments more than 60 days overdue are considered indicators that the trade and other receivable is impaired. The amount of the impairment allowance is the difference between the asset’s carrying amount and the present value of estimated future cash flows, discounted at the original effective interest rate. Cash flows relating to short-term receivables are not discounted if the effect of discounting is immaterial.\n\nThe Group initially recognises loans and receiva- bles and deposits on the date that they are originated. All other financial assets (including assets designated at fair value through profit or loss) are recognised initially on the trade date at \n\nThe Group classifies its investments and other financial assets in the following categories: financial assets at fair value through profit or loss, loans and receivables and available-for-sale financial assets. The classification depends on the purpose for which the investments were acquired. The Group determines the classifica- tion of its investments at initial recognition and, in the case of assets classified as held-to-matu- rity, re-evaluates this designation at each reporting date.\n\nTrade and other receivables are recognised initially at fair value and subsequently measured at amor- tised cost using the effective interest method, less provision for impairment. Receivables are due for settlement no more than 90 days from the date of recognition. \n\nCash and cash equivalents includes cash on hand, deposits held at call with financial institu- tions, other short-term, highly liquid invest- ments with original maturities of three months or less that are readily convertible to known amounts of cash and which are subject to an insignificant risk of changes in value, and bank overdrafts. Bank overdrafts are shown within borrowings in current liabilities in the statement of financial position.\n\nwithin other expenses. When a trade and other receivable for which an impairment allowance had been recognised becomes uncollectible in a subsequent period, it is written off against the allowance account. Subsequent recoveries of amounts previously written off are credited against other expenses in the statement of comprehensive income.\n\nRaw materials and stores, work in progress and finished goods, including gold bullion, are stated at the lower of cost and net realisable value. Cost comprises direct materials, direct labour and an appropriate proportion of variable and fixed overhead expenditure the latter being allocated on the basis of normal operating capacity. Costs are assigned to individual items of inventory on the basis of weighted average costs. Costs of purchased inventory are deter- mined after deducting rebates and discounts. Net realisable value is the estimated selling price in the ordinary course of business less the estimated costs of completion and the esti- mated costs necessary to make the sale.\n\nStockpiles represent ore that has been extracted and is available for further processing. If there is significant uncertainty as to whether the stock- piled ore will be processed it is expensed as incurred. Where the future processing of this ore can be predicted with confidence, e.g. because it exceeds the mine’s cut-off grade, it is valued at the lower of cost and net realisable value. If the ore will not be processed within the 12 months after the reporting date it is included within non-current assets. Work in progress inventory includes ore stockpiles and other partly processed material. Quantities are assessed primarily through surveys and assays, and truck counts.\n\nwww.kingsgate.com.au\n\n## e . Leases\n\n## h . Trade and other receivables\n\n## g . Cash and cash equivalents\n\n## f . Impairment of assets\n\n## i . Inventories\n\n## j . Non-derivative financial assets\n\n## Classification and recognition" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.843326856547423, + "doc_id": "00d3acfdcb3640b85daff96c604113471fefe92a31fb320522ed70e662b21652", + "edit_distance": 0.5636363636363636, + "f1_score": 0.927536231884058, + "meteor": 0.9162885134016394, + "precision": 0.9411764705882353, + "pred_md": "## Reconciliation of Adjusted Operating Profit\n\n## Reconciliation of Adjusted Net Income\n\n## Reconciliation of Pre-tax and After-tax Free Cash Flow\n\n## Reconciliation of Adjusted Net Debt\n\n## How We Calculate Adjusted Earnings Per S hare\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC.\n\n85\n\nMANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS", + "recall": 0.9142857142857143, + "true_md": "MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AN D ANALYSIS\n\n## Reconciliation of Adjusted Operating Profit\n\n## Reconciliation of Adjusted Net Debt\n\n## Reconciliation of Adjusted Net Income\n\n## How We Calculate Adjusted Earnings Per S hare\n\n## Reconciliation of Pre-tax and After-tax Free Cash Flow\n\n2013 ANNUAL REPORT ROGERS COMMUNICATIONS INC. 85" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4987978451897949, + "doc_id": "a25c20977ef536fce9761ad22227b701b4f3d8a43eec584fa89a8cabb3717299", + "edit_distance": 0.4722222222222222, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9214884446744787, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "22\n\nFig. 2. Comparison of all proposed schemes for L =4 cells, (a) Scenario A (b) Scenario B: Users are placed at 0.9 km from BS\n\nFig. 2. Comparison of all proposed schemes for L =4 cells, (a) Scenario A (b) Scenario B: Users are placed at 0.9 km from BS\n\nMarch 19, 2018\n\nDRAFT", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "22\n\nFig. 2. Comparison of all proposed schemes for L =4 cells, (a) Scenario A (b) Scenario B: Users are placed at 0.9 km from BS\n\nDRAFT\n\nMarch 19, 2018" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.03539604837313965, + "doc_id": "dd875b802f2851871346c2a101b6e1b81074792e3fcfc272bb0e172b083ed134", + "edit_distance": 0.8088978766430738, + "f1_score": 0.9175257731958762, + "meteor": 0.20097181088310873, + "precision": 0.9270833333333334, + "pred_md": "It is obvious that ˜ a k +1 ≤ ˜ a k +2 for every integer k. A ˜ D l is given as\n\n\n\nThe second equality in (A.11) follows from ˜ a l +1 = a l + δ = ˜ a l + , and the third equality holds because δ\n\n\n\nThis implies that\n\n\n\nTherefore,\n\n\n\nThis means that for any sequence of sets { A k } ∞ k = -∞ with a k +1 > a k + δ for some integer k , one can always construct a seqeunce of sets { ˜ A k } ∞ k = -∞ with ˜ a k +1 ≤ ˜ a k + δ for every integer k satisfying\n\n\n\nThis can be intuitively understood by comparing Figure A.3(a) to Figure A.3(b), where the sum of the lower bound on each triangle is equal to ∞ ∑ k = -∞ max { µ 0 ( A k ) -µ 1 ( A D k ) , 0 } and ∞ ∑ k = -∞ max { µ 0 ( ˜ A k ) -µ 1 ( ˜ A D k ) , 0 } , respectively. Therefore, it is innocuous to assume a k +1 ≤ a k + δ at the optimum.\n\n65", + "recall": 0.9081632653061225, + "true_md": "It is obvious that ˜ a$_{k}$$\\_{+1}$ ≤ ˜ a$\\_{k}$$_{+2}$ for every integer k. ˜ A D l is given as\n\nThe second equality in (A.11) follows from ˜ a$_{l}$$\\_{+1}$ = a$\\_{l}$ + δ = ˜ a$\\_{l}$ + δ , and the third equality holds because\n\nThis implies that\n\nTherefore,\n\nThis means that for any sequence of sets { A$_{k}$ } ∞ k = −∞ with a$_{k}$$\\_{+1}$ > a$\\_{k}$ + δ for some integer k , one can always construct a seqeunce of sets { ˜ A$\\_{k}$ } ∞ k = −∞ with ˜ a$\\_{k}$$_{+1}$ ≤ ˜ a$_{k}$ + δ for every integer k satisfying\n\nThis can be intuitively understood by comparing Figure A.3(a) to Figure A.3(b), where the sum of the lower bound on each triangle is equal to ∞ ∑ k = −∞ max $^{{}$µ$_{0}$ ( A$_{k}$ ) − µ$_{1}$ $^{(}$A D k $^{)}$, 0 $^{}}$and ∞ ∑ k = −∞ max $^{{}$µ$_{0}$ ( ˜ A$_{k}$ $^{)}$− µ$_{1}$ ( ˜ A D k $^{)}$, 0 $^{}}$, respectively. Therefore, it is innocuous to assume a$_{k}$$\\_{+1}$ ≤ a$\\_{k}$ + δ at the optimum.\n\n65\n\n$$∞ ∑ k = −∞ max $^{{}$µ$_{0}$ ( ˜ A$_{k}$ $^{)}$− µ$_{1}$ ( ˜ A D k $^{)}$, 0 } ≥ ∞ ∑ k = −∞ max $^{{}$µ$_{0}$ ( A$_{k}$ ) − µ$_{1}$ $^{(}$A D k $^{)}$, 0 $^{}}$.$$\n\n$$∞ ∑ k = −∞ max $^{{}$µ$_{0}$ ( A$_{k}$ ) − µ$_{1}$ $^{(}$A D k $^{)}$, 0 } ≤ ∞ ∑ k = −∞ max $^{{}$µ$_{0}$ ( ˜ A$_{k}$ $^{)}$− µ$_{1}$ ( ˜ A D k $^{)}$, 0 }$$\n\n$$max $^{{}$µ$_{0}$ ( ˜ A$_{k}$ $^{)}$− µ$_{1}$ ( ˜ A D k $^{)}$, 0 } = max $^{{}$µ$_{0}$ ( A$_{k}$ ) − µ$_{1}$ $^{(}$A D k $^{)}$, 0 } for k ≤ l, max $^{{}$µ$_{0}$ ( ˜ A$_{k}$$_{+1}$ $^{)}$− µ$_{1}$ ( ˜ A D k +1 $^{)}$, 0 } = max $^{{}$µ$_{0}$ ( A$_{k}$ ) − µ$_{1}$ $^{(}$A D k $^{)}$, 0 } for k ≥ l + 1 ,$$\n\n$$A D l = (min { a$_{l}$ + δ, a$_{l}$$_{+1}$ } , ∞ ) = ( a$_{l}$ + δ, ∞ ) .$$\n\n$$˜ A D l = (min {$_{˜}$ a$_{l}$ + δ,$_{˜}$ a$_{l}$$_{+1}$ } , ∞ ) (A.11) = ( a$_{l}$ + δ, ∞ )$$\n\n$$= A D l (A.12)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.2502027897275065, + "doc_id": "b750bbcdb32c4bc21bfff3dd2030870f0f45c683a2295e08f6cfec2467bff410", + "edit_distance": 0.5592356687898089, + "f1_score": 0.9425287356321839, + "meteor": 0.4464723495897161, + "precision": 0.9389312977099237, + "pred_md": "Figure 2: Concave treatment response and convex treatment response\n\nFigure 2: Concave treatment response and convex treatment response\n\nConcavity and convexity of the treatment response function imply Pr ( Y 0 -W t 0 -t W ≥ Y 1 -Y 0 t 1 -t 0 , Y 1 ≥ Y 0 ≥ W ) = 1 and Pr ( Y 0 -W t 0 -t W ≥ Y 1 -Y 0 t 1 -t 0 , Y 1 ≥ Y 0 ≥ W ) = 1 , respectively, where t d is a level of input for each treatment status d ∈ { 0 1 , } while t W is a level of input without the treatment and t W < t 0 < t 1 . Given W = w, concavity and convexity of the treatment response function restrict the support of ( Y , Y 0 1 ) to the region below the straight line Y 1 = t 1 -t W t 0 -t W Y 0 -t 1 -t 0 t 0 -t W w and above the straight line Y 1 = Y 0 , and to the region above two straight lines Y 1 = t 1 -t W t 0 -t W Y 0 -t 1 -t 0 t 0 -t W w and Y 1 = Y , 0 respectively, as shown in Figures 1(b) and (c).\n\nExample 3 (Roy Model) In the Roy model, individuals self-select into treatment when their benefits from the treatment are greater than nonpecuniary costs for treatment participation. The extended Roy model assumes that the nonpecuniary cost is deterministic with the following selection equation:\n\n\n\nwhere µ C ( Z ) represents nonpecuniary costs with a vector of observables Z . Then treated ( D = 1) and untreated people ( D = 0) are the observed groups satisfying support restrictions { Y 1 -Y 0 ≥ µ C ( Z ) } and { Y 1 -Y 0 < µ C ( Z ) } , respectively.\n\nExample 4 (DTE conditional on Potential Outcomes) The conditional DTE for the unobservable subgroup whose potential outcomes belong to a certain set C is written as\n\n\n\n8", + "recall": 0.9461538461538461, + "true_md": "Figure 2: Concave treatment response and convex treatment response\n\nConcavity and convexity of the treatment response function imply Pr ( Y$_{0}$ − W t$_{0}$ − t$_{W}$ ≥ Y$_{1}$ − Y$_{0}$ t$_{1}$ − t$_{0}$ , Y$_{1}$ ≥ Y$_{0}$ ≥ W ) = 1 and Pr ( Y$_{0}$ − W t$_{0}$ − t$_{W}$ ≥ Y$_{1}$ − Y$_{0}$ t$_{1}$ − t$_{0}$ , Y$_{1}$ ≥ Y$_{0}$ ≥ W ) = 1 , respectively, where t$_{d}$ is a level of input for each treatment status d ∈ { 0 , 1 } while t$_{W}$ is a level of input without the treatment and t$_{W}$ < t$_{0}$ < t$_{1}$ . Given W = w, concavity and convexity of the treatment response function restrict the support of ( Y$_{0}$, Y$_{1}$ ) to the region below the straight line Y$_{1}$ = t$_{1}$ − t$_{W}$ t$_{0}$ − $_{t$\\_{W}$}$Y$_{0}$ − t$_{1}$ − t$_{0}$ t$_{0}$ − $_{t$\\_{W}$}$w and above the straight line Y$_{1}$ = Y$_{0}$ , and to the region above two straight lines Y$_{1}$ = t$_{1}$ − t$_{W}$ t$_{0}$ − $_{t$\\_{W}$}$Y$_{0}$ − t$_{1}$ − t$_{0}$ t$_{0}$ − $_{t$\\_{W}$}$w and Y$_{1}$ = Y$_{0}$, respectively, as shown in Figures 1(b) and (c).\n\nExample 3 (Roy Model) In the Roy model, individuals self-select into treatment when their benefits from the treatment are greater than nonpecuniary costs for treatment participation. The extended Roy model assumes that the nonpecuniary cost is deterministic with the following selection equation:\n\nwhere µ$_{C}$ ( Z ) represents nonpecuniary costs with a vector of observables Z . Then treated ( D = 1) and untreated people ( D = 0) are the observed groups satisfying support restrictions { Y$_{1}$ − Y$_{0}$ ≥ µ$_{C}$ ( Z ) } and { Y$_{1}$ − Y$_{0}$ < µ$_{C}$ ( Z ) } , respectively.\n\nExample 4 (DTE conditional on Potential Outcomes) The conditional DTE for the unobservable subgroup whose potential outcomes belong to a certain set C is written as\n\n8\n\n$$D = 1 { Y$_{1}$ − Y$_{0}$ ≥ µ$_{C}$ ( Z ) } ,$$\n\n$$Pr { Y$_{1}$ − Y$_{0}$ ≤ δ | ( Y$_{0}$, Y$_{1}$ ) ∈ C }$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9246981104997472, + "doc_id": "bbf2508d3939abbde8829b515bad2059ffe58d40967f3241df4f606587db49be", + "edit_distance": 0.08201892744479496, + "f1_score": 0.9602272727272727, + "meteor": 0.9640089067330936, + "precision": 0.976878612716763, + "pred_md": "shorter timescales (Bassett et al., 2011, 2013).\n\nIn this report, we show that the strength of static functional connectivity imposes constraints and implies statistical expectations on the range of fluctuations expressed in dynamic functional connectivity. We propose a non-parametric, model-free statistical test for identifying unexpected fluctuations in functional connectivity over time. We then apply this technique to fMRI data acquired from N = 80 individuals and identify intermittent episodes in resting brain activity when functional brain network exhibit varying levels of fluctuating dynamics. Episodes of high modularity characterized by an over-expression of stronger/weaker than expected functional connections, are interspersed among periods of low modularity during which connection weights are within the statistical limits predicted by their static connectivity levels. Finally, we find that the stronger/weaker-than-expected connections show specific spatial distributions, and include disproportionately many connections within and between visual and somotomotor systems.\n\n## Methods\n\nImage acquisition and processing\n\nAll data analyzed in this report come from the NKI-Rockland Lifespan Sample (Nooner et al., 2012). This study was approved by the NKI review board and all participants provided informed consent prior to data collection. As part of the data collection process, each participant completed one anatomical scan, one diffusion structural scan and three resting-state functional MRI (rfMRI) scans that varied in terms of TR time, voxel size, and scan duration: 1) TR = 2,500 ms, voxel size = 3 mm, scan duration = 5 min; 2) TR = 1,400 ms, voxel size = 2 mm, scan duration = 10 min; and 3) TR = 645 ms, voxel size = 3 mm and duration = 10 min. We analyzed the fastest multi-\n\n4", + "recall": 0.9441340782122905, + "true_md": "shorter timescales (Bassett et al., 2011, 2013).\n\nIn this report, we show that the strength of static functional connectivity im- poses constraints and implies statistical expectations on the range of fluctuations expressed in dynamic functional connectivity. We propose a non-parametric, model-free statistical test for identifying unexpected fluctuations in functional connectivity over time. We then apply this technique to fMRI data acquired from N = 80 individuals and identify intermittent episodes in resting brain activity when functional brain network exhibit varying levels of fluctuating dy- namics. Episodes of high modularity characterized by an over-expression of stronger/weaker than expected functional connections, are interspersed among periods of low modularity during which connection weights are within the statis- tical limits predicted by their static connectivity levels. Finally, we find that the stronger/weaker-than-expected connections show specific spatial distributions, and include disproportionately many connections within and between visual and somotomotor systems.\n\nAll data analyzed in this report come from the NKI-Rockland Lifespan Sam- ple (Nooner et al., 2012). This study was approved by the NKI review board and all participants provided informed consent prior to data collection. As part of the data collection process, each participant completed one anatomi- cal scan, one diffusion structural scan and three resting-state functional MRI (rfMRI) scans that varied in terms of TR time, voxel size, and scan duration: 1) TR = 2,500 ms, voxel size = 3 mm, scan duration = 5 min; 2) TR = 1,400 ms, voxel size = 2 mm, scan duration = 10 min; and 3) TR = 645 ms, voxel size = 3 mm and duration = 10 min. We analyzed the fastest multi-\n\n4\n\n## Image acquisition and processing\n\n## Methods" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7311864144501692, + "doc_id": "820ed125f437636ba1bd964bdc381080e1eed3fb603afd672df9cd96f96109e3", + "edit_distance": 0.270516717325228, + "f1_score": 0.9460154241645246, + "meteor": 0.7249407666930281, + "precision": 0.9533678756476683, + "pred_md": "solution φ t, φ t ( ( 1 , x 0 )) = φ t ( + t 1 , x 0 ) has its initial value in S , j consequently, satisfies (4.48). In the light of the B -equivalence, the corresponding solution x t , x ( ) (0) = φ (0) -Ψ(0) , of (4.35) satisfies the property that for all /epsilon1 > 0 , there exists T /epsilon1 ( ) such that x t ( ) is in an /epsilon1 -neighborhood of Ψ( ) t for t ∈ [ T /epsilon1 ( ) , ∞ ) . That is, the solution Ψ( ) t is orbitally asymptotically stable and there exists an asymptotical phase. /square\n\nDefinitions of the orbital stability and an asymptotic phase as well as theorem of orbital stability for non-grazing periodic solutions are also presented in [44]. In our paper, we suggest the orbital stability theorem for grazing periodic solutions, its proof and formulate the definitions for the stability. They are different in many aspects from those provided in [44]. It is valuable that they also valid, if the solution is non-grazing.\n\nTo shed light on our theoretical results, we will present the following examples.\n\nExample 4.1 We continue with the system presented in Examples 3.1 and 3.2. In Example 3.1, we verified that system (3.16)defines a K -smooth discontinuous flow in the plane and the variational system (3.29)+(3.30) around the grazing periodic solution, Ψ( ) t is approved.\n\nUsing systems (3.29) and (3.30), one can evaluate the Floquet multipliers as ρ (1) 1 = 1 , ρ (1) 2 = 0 8551 . , ρ (2) 1 = 1 and ρ (2) 2 = 0 . This verifies condition ( A 5) .\n\nThe conditions ( C 1) -( C 7) and ( C 10) are validated and the assumptions (A4) and (A5) verified. By using Theorem 4.1, we can assert that the solution, Ψ( ) t is orbitally asymptotically stable. The stability is illustrated in Fig. 4. The red one is for a trajectory of the discontinuous periodic solution (3.15) of (3.14) and the blue one is for the near solution of (3.14) with initial value y 0 = (0 8 1 2) . , . . It can be observed from Fig. 4 that the blue trajectory approaches the red one as time increases.\n\nFigure 4: The red discontinuous cycle of (3.14) axially grazes Γ at (0 00025 . π , ) 0) and (0 , -exp( -0 0005 . π )) is an ( α ) -type point. The blue arcs are of the trajectory with initial value (0 8 . , 1 2) . . It can be observed that it approaches the grazing one as time increases.\n\nFigure 4: The red discontinuous cycle of (3.14) axially grazes Γ at (0 00025 . π , ) 0) and (0 , -exp( -0 0005 . π )) is an ( α ) -type point. The blue arcs are of the trajectory with initial value (0 8 . , 1 2) . . It can be observed that it approaches the grazing one as time increases.\n\nExample 4.2 (A periodic solution with a non-axial grazing). We will take into account the following\n\n27", + "recall": 0.9387755102040817, + "true_md": "solution φ ( t, φ ( t$_{1}$, x $^{0}$)) = φ ( t + t$_{1}$, x $^{0}$) has its initial value in S $^{j}$, consequently, satisfies (4.48). In the light of the B − equivalence, the corresponding solution x ( t ) , x (0) = φ (0) − Ψ(0) , of (4.35) satisfies the property that for all ϵ > 0 , there exists T ( ϵ ) such that x ( t ) is in an ϵ − neighborhood of Ψ( t ) for t ∈ [ T ( ϵ ) , ∞ ) . That is, the solution Ψ( t ) is orbitally asymptotically stable and there exists an asymptotical phase. □\n\nDefinitions of the orbital stability and an asymptotic phase as well as theorem of orbital stability for non-grazing periodic solutions are also presented in [44]. In our paper, we suggest the orbital stability theorem for grazing periodic solutions, its proof and formulate the definitions for the stability. They are different in many aspects from those provided in [44]. It is valuable that they also valid, if the solution is non-grazing.\n\nTo shed light on our theoretical results, we will present the following examples.\n\nExample 4.1 We continue with the system presented in Examples 3.1 and 3.2. In Example 3.1, we verified that system (3.16)defines a K − smooth discontinuous flow in the plane and the variational system (3.29)+(3.30) around the grazing periodic solution, Ψ( t ) is approved.\n\nUsing systems (3.29) and (3.30), one can evaluate the Floquet multipliers as ρ (1) 1 = 1 , ρ (1) 2 = 0 . 8551 , ρ (2) 1 = 1 and ρ (2) 2 = 0 . This verifies condition ( A 5) .\n\nThe conditions ( C 1) − ( C 7) and ( C 10) are validated and the assumptions (A4) and (A5) verified. By using Theorem 4.1, we can assert that the solution, Ψ( t ) is orbitally asymptotically stable. The stability is illustrated in Fig. 4. The red one is for a trajectory of the discontinuous periodic solution (3.15) of (3.14) and the blue one is for the near solution of (3.14) with initial value y$_{0}$ = (0 . 8 , 1 . 2) . It can be observed from Fig. 4 that the blue trajectory approaches the red one as time increases.\n\nExample 4.2 (A periodic solution with a non-axial grazing). We will take into account the following\n\nFigure 4: The red discontinuous cycle of (3.14) axially grazes Γ at (0 . 00025 π ) , 0) and (0 , − exp( − 0 . 0005 π )) is an ( α ) -type point. The blue arcs are of the trajectory with initial value (0 . 8 , 1 . 2) . It can be observed that it approaches the grazing one as time increases.\n\n27" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0003549095792250587, + "doc_id": "3f46a70fc1b565024ac286d14b901ac2c08941e13baf5b84c92e7e6f763fdbe9", + "edit_distance": 0.9323383084577115, + "f1_score": 0.6097560975609756, + "meteor": 0.04737267981791974, + "precision": 0.8064516129032258, + "pred_md": "and if y 1 ∈ A -ρ,D ( ϕ, s ) for some ρ ≥ 0 ,\n\n\n\n\n\nHence, if y 1 ∈ A + ρ,D ( ϕ, s ) -A + ρ +1 ,D ( ϕ, s ) , then\n\n\n\nand if y 1 ∈ A -ρ,D ( ϕ, s ) -A -ρ +1 ,D ( ϕ, s ) , then\n\n\n\n\n\nHence,\n\n\n\nNow define\n\n\n\n60", + "recall": 0.49019607843137253, + "true_md": "and if y$_{1}$ ∈ A − ρ,D ( ϕ, s ) for some ρ ≥ 0 ,\n\nHence, if y$_{1}$ ∈ A + ρ,D ( ϕ, s ) − A + ρ +1 ,D ( ϕ, s ) , then\n\nand if y$_{1}$ ∈ A − ρ,D ( ϕ, s ) − A − ρ +1 ,D ( ϕ, s ) , then\n\nHence,\n\nNow define\n\n60\n\n$$A$_{k}$ ( ϕ, s ) =      A + k ( ϕ, s ) , if k ≥ 0 , $^{(}$A − − k − $_{1}$( ϕ, s ) c , if k < 0 , A D k ( ϕ, s ) =      A + k,D ( ϕ, s ) , if k ≥ 0 , $^{(}$A − − k − 1 ,D ( ϕ, s ) ) c , if k < 0 .$$\n\n$$∞ ∑ k =0 $^{(}$1$_{A}$ + $_{k,D}$( ϕ,s $_{)}$( y$_{1}$ ) − 1$_{A}$ − $_{k,D}$( ϕ,s $_{)}$( y$_{1}$ ) = sup y$_{0}$ ∈$_{R}$ [ ∞ ∑ k =0 $^{(}$1$_{A}$ + $_{k}$( ϕ,s $_{)}$( y$_{0}$ ) − 1$_{A}$ − k ( ϕ,s $_{)}$( y$_{0}$ ) ) − 1 { y$_{1}$ − y$_{0}$ < δ } − λ (1 − 1$_{C}$ ( y$_{0}$, y$_{1}$ ))$^{]}$ ≤ − ∞ ∑ k =0 $^{(}$1$_{A}$ + $_{k}$( ψ,s $_{)}$( y$_{1}$ ) − 1$_{A}$ − k ( ψ,s $_{)}$( y$_{1}$ ) $^{)}$.$$\n\n$$sup y$_{0}$ ∈$_{R}$ [ ∞ ∑ k =0 $^{(}$1$_{A}$ + $_{k}$( ϕ,s $_{)}$( y$_{0}$ ) − 1$_{A}$ − k ( ϕ,s $_{)}$( y$_{0}$ ) − 1 { y$_{1}$ − y$_{0}$ < δ } − λ (1 − 1$_{C}$ ( y$_{0}$, y$_{1}$ ))$^{]}$ = − ( ρ + 1) .$$\n\n$$sup y$_{0}$ ∈$_{R}$ [ ∞ ∑ k =0 $^{(}$1$_{A}$ + $_{k}$( ϕ,s $_{)}$( y$_{0}$ ) − 1$_{A}$ − k ( ϕ,s $_{)}$( y$_{0}$ ) ) − 1 { y$_{1}$ − y$_{0}$ < δ } − λ (1 − 1$_{C}$ ( y$_{0}$, y$_{1}$ ))$^{]}$ = ρ + 1 ,$$\n\n$$sup y$_{0}$ ∈$_{R}$ [ ∞ ∑ k =0 $^{(}$1$_{A}$ + $_{k}$( ϕ,s $_{)}$( y$_{0}$ ) − 1$_{A}$ − k ( ϕ,s $_{)}$( y$_{0}$ ) ) − 1 { y$_{1}$ − y$_{0}$ < δ } − λ (1 − 1$_{C}$ ( y$_{0}$, y$_{1}$ ))$^{]}$ ≤ − ( ρ + 1) .$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8057450260431491, + "doc_id": "5467067666af226655f1acc1b6c4e545495017987c2872b8ce0bda8de5758f51", + "edit_distance": 0.10586552217453506, + "f1_score": 0.8609022556390978, + "meteor": 0.8987642620991503, + "precision": 0.870722433460076, + "pred_md": "web text sources for conversational speech language modeling using class-dependent mixtures,' in Proc. HLT/NAACL , 2003, pp. 7-9.\n\n- [5] S. Schwarm, I. Bulyko, and M. Ostendorf, 'Adaptive language modeling with varied sources to cover new vocabulary items,' IEEE Trans. Speech and Audio , vol. 12, no. 3, pp. 334-342, 2004.\n- [6] I. Bulyko, M. Ostendorf, M. Siu, T. Ng, A. Stocke, and C. Ozgur, 'Web resources for language modeling in conversational speech recognition,' ACM Transactions on Speech and Language Processing , vol. 5, no. 1, pp. 1-xx, 2007.\n- [7] A. Sethy, P. Georgiou, and S. Narayanan, 'Building topic-specific language models from webdata using competitive models,' in Proc. Interspeech , 2005, pp. 1293-1296.\n- [8] R. Sarikaya, A. Gravano, and Y. Gao, 'Rapid language model development using external resources for new spoken dialog domains,' in Proc. ICASSP , vol. I, 2005, pp. 573-576.\n- [9] K. Yoshino, S. Mori, and T. Kawahara, 'Incorporating semantic information to selection of web texts for language model of spoken dialogue system,' in Acoustics, Speech and Signal Processing (ICASSP), 2013 IEEE International Conference on , May 2013, pp. 8252-8256.\n- [10] R. Moore and W. Lewis, 'Intelligent selection of language model training,' in Proc. ACL , 2010.\n- [11] A. Axelrod, X. He, and J. Gao, 'Domain adaptation via pseudo indomain data selection,' in Proc. EMNLP , 2011.\n- [12] G. Lecorve, J. Dines, T. Hain, and P. Motlicek, 'Supervised and unsupervised web-based language model domain adaptation,' in Proc. Interspeech , 2012.\n- [13] T. Schlippe, L. Gren, N. T. Vu, and T. Schultz, 'Unsupervised language model adaptation for automatic speech recognition of broadcast news using web 2.0,' in Proc. Interspeech , 2013.\n- [14] P. F. Brown, V. J. D. Pietra, P. V. deSouza, J. C. Lai, and R. L. Mercer, 'Class-based n-gram models of natural language,' Computational Linguistics , vol. 18, no. 4, pp. 467-479, 1992.\n- [15] R. Iyer and M. Ostendorf, 'Transforming out-of-domain estimates to improve in-domain language models,' in Proc. Eurospeech , vol. 4, 1997, pp. 1975-1978.\n- [16] A. Stolcke, 'SRILM - an extensible language modeling toolkit,' in Proc. ICSLP , 2002, pp. 901-904.\n- [17] P. Liang, 'Semi-supervised learning for natural language,' Ph.D. dissertation, Massachusetts Institute of Technology, 2005.\n- [18] I. H. Witten and T. Bell, 'The zero-frequency problem: Estimating the probabilities of novel events in adaptive text compression,' Information Theory, IEEE Transactions on , vol. 37, no. 4, pp. 1085-1094, 1991.\n- [19] J. Cho, H. Garcia-Molina, and L. Page, 'Efficient crawling through url ordering,' Comput. Netw. ISDN Syst. , vol. 30, no. 1-7, pp. 161-172, 1998. [Online]. Available: http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/S0169-7552(98) 00108-1\n\n10\n\n- [20] A. Liaw and M. Wiener, 'Classification and regression by randomforest,' R News , vol. 2, no. 3, pp. 18-22, 2002. [Online]. Available: http://CRAN.R-project.org/doc/Rnews/", + "recall": 0.8513011152416357, + "true_md": "web text sources for conversational speech language modeling using class-dependent mixtures,” in Proc. HLT/NAACL , 2003, pp. 7–9.\n\n- [5] S. Schwarm, I. Bulyko, and M. Ostendorf, “Adaptive language modeling with varied sources to cover new vocabulary items,” IEEE Trans. Speech and Audio , vol. 12, no. 3, pp. 334–342, 2004.\n\n- [6] I. Bulyko, M. Ostendorf, M. Siu, T. Ng, A. Stocke, and C. Ozgur, “Web resources for language modeling in conversational speech recognition,” ACM Transactions on Speech and Language Processing , vol. 5, no. 1, pp. 1–xx, 2007.\n\n- [7] A. Sethy, P. Georgiou, and S. Narayanan, “Building topic-specific language models from webdata using competitive models,” in Proc. Interspeech , 2005, pp. 1293–1296.\n\n- [8] R. Sarikaya, A. Gravano, and Y. Gao, “Rapid language model develop- ment using external resources for new spoken dialog domains,” in Proc. ICASSP , vol. I, 2005, pp. 573–576.\n\n- [9] K. Yoshino, S. Mori, and T. Kawahara, “Incorporating semantic infor- mation to selection of web texts for language model of spoken dialogue system,” in Acoustics, Speech and Signal Processing (ICASSP), 2013 IEEE International Conference on , May 2013, pp. 8252–8256.\n\n- [10] R. Moore and W. Lewis, “Intelligent selection of language model training,” in Proc. ACL , 2010.\n\n- [11] A. Axelrod, X. He, and J. Gao, “Domain adaptation via pseudo in- domain data selection,” in Proc. EMNLP , 2011.\n\n- [12] G. Lecorve, J. Dines, T. Hain, and P. Motlicek, “Supervised and unsupervised web-based language model domain adaptation,” in Proc. Interspeech , 2012.\n\n- [13] T. Schlippe, L. Gren, N. T. Vu, and T. Schultz, “Unsupervised language model adaptation for automatic speech recognition of broadcast news using web 2.0,” in Proc. Interspeech , 2013.\n\n- [14] P. F. Brown, V. J. D. Pietra, P. V. deSouza, J. C. Lai, and R. L. Mer- cer, “Class-based n-gram models of natural language,” Computational Linguistics , vol. 18, no. 4, pp. 467–479, 1992.\n\n- [15] R. Iyer and M. Ostendorf, “Transforming out-of-domain estimates to improve in-domain language models,” in Proc. Eurospeech , vol. 4, 1997, pp. 1975–1978.\n\n- [16] A. Stolcke, “SRILM – an extensible language modeling toolkit,” in Proc. ICSLP , 2002, pp. 901–904.\n\n- [17] P. Liang, “Semi-supervised learning for natural language,” Ph.D. disser- tation, Massachusetts Institute of Technology, 2005.\n\n- [18] I. H. Witten and T. Bell, “The zero-frequency problem: Estimating the probabilities of novel events in adaptive text compression,” Information Theory, IEEE Transactions on , vol. 37, no. 4, pp. 1085–1094, 1991.\n\n- [19] J. Cho, H. Garcia-Molina, and L. Page, “Efficient crawling through url ordering,” Comput. Netw. ISDN Syst. , vol. 30, no. 1-7, pp. 161–172, 1998. [Online]. Available: http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/S0169-7552(98) 00108-1\n\n- [20] A. Liaw and M. Wiener, “Classification and regression by randomforest,” R News , vol. 2, no. 3, pp. 18–22, 2002. [Online]. Available: http://CRAN.R-project.org/doc/Rnews/\n\n10" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9526841046703347, + "doc_id": "efb0be8851040efcda1ebe1428d7fb6e70766e72467085ce0ca19cea831578cb", + "edit_distance": 0.08828522920203735, + "f1_score": 0.9748283752860412, + "meteor": 0.9800893180573742, + "precision": 0.9815668202764977, + "pred_md": "Fig. 2. IV Tokens Gathered by Crawling Strategy\n\nFig. 2. IV Tokens Gathered by Crawling Strategy\n\n## B. Queue Prioritization Experiment\n\nWe tested our method for prioritizing the crawling queue using Bengali language Twitter users. In order to properly compare the various methods we first collected a data set of 10,785 Twitter users. (5,684 users came from our search queries and an additional 5,103 came from those users' social connections.) The way the queue ranking works is to first download a small set of users and use that as training data to learn a ranking for the rest of the download queue. We randomly selected 300 users for our training set. The ranking methods were used to order the remaining 10,000+ users in the simulated download queue.\n\nIn Figure 2, we show the cumulative in-vocabulary tokens obtained as an additional 500 users are processed from the download queue for each of the three prioritization strategies. The predictive ranking provides three times as many invocabulary tokens as either the edge count ranking or the random baseline. Figure 3 is similar but shows the cumulative vocabulary coverage (types) where the vocabulary is taken from a held-out dev set different from the text used to produce the Twitter queries. The horizontal line represents the type coverage of the in-domain training data. The predictive\n\n8\n\nranking covers an additional 10% of the dev-set vocabulary compared to either of the other strategies. More than 53% of the vocabulary types and about 9% of the tokens in the devset are not found in the in-domain training data. The Twitter data downloaded using the predictive ranking covers 56% of these previously unseen vocabulary types, substantially outperforming the edge count ranking and the random baseline. The match between the vocabulary of the data obtained with the predictive ranking with the in-domain data is an indication of the value of the predictive ranking strategy.\n\nThe most important features for the predictive ranking (as measured by the average decrease in node impurity in the random forest regression model) are average number of reverse followers in the training set, average sentence count after filtering among followers in the training set and average sentence count after filtering among mentioners in the training set. Even though edge features highly influence the predictive ranking model, the edge count ranking is worse than the predictive ranking on both of the type coverage and the cumulative IV token metrics. This is because there are high edge count connections from Bengali speaking Twitter users to international celebrities, which fools the edge count ranking strategy but not the random forest regression. (The top followed Twitter user by Bengali speakers is @BarackObama followed by @BillGates.)\n\nWe created language models from the downloaded data to compare the effectiveness of the ranking strategies. The language models used the data from the 300 users in the training set as well as the additional users selected by each of the respective ranking strategies. Table VI lists the resulting perplexities on the held-out in-domain data. The predictive ranking LM achieved a 17% reduction in perplexity over the random baseline after downloading 500 users from the queue. When less than 500 additional users are downloaded, the predictive ranking has a better perplexity than the edge", + "recall": 0.9681818181818181, + "true_md": "8\n\nWe tested our method for prioritizing the crawling queue using Bengali language Twitter users. In order to properly compare the various methods we first collected a data set of 10,785 Twitter users. (5,684 users came from our search queries and an additional 5,103 came from those users’ social connections.) The way the queue ranking works is to first download a small set of users and use that as training data to learn a ranking for the rest of the download queue. We randomly selected 300 users for our training set. The ranking methods were used to order the remaining 10,000+ users in the simulated download queue.\n\nIn Figure 2, we show the cumulative in-vocabulary tokens obtained as an additional 500 users are processed from the download queue for each of the three prioritization strategies. The predictive ranking provides three times as many in- vocabulary tokens as either the edge count ranking or the random baseline. Figure 3 is similar but shows the cumulative vocabulary coverage (types) where the vocabulary is taken from a held-out dev set different from the text used to produce the Twitter queries. The horizontal line represents the type coverage of the in-domain training data. The predictive\n\nranking covers an additional 10% of the dev-set vocabulary compared to either of the other strategies. More than 53% of the vocabulary types and about 9% of the tokens in the dev- set are not found in the in-domain training data. The Twitter data downloaded using the predictive ranking covers 56% of these previously unseen vocabulary types, substantially out- performing the edge count ranking and the random baseline. The match between the vocabulary of the data obtained with the predictive ranking with the in-domain data is an indication of the value of the predictive ranking strategy.\n\nThe most important features for the predictive ranking (as measured by the average decrease in node impurity in the random forest regression model) are average number of reverse followers in the training set, average sentence count after filtering among followers in the training set and aver- age sentence count after filtering among mentioners in the training set. Even though edge features highly influence the predictive ranking model, the edge count ranking is worse than the predictive ranking on both of the type coverage and the cumulative IV token metrics. This is because there are high edge count connections from Bengali speaking Twitter users to international celebrities, which fools the edge count ranking strategy but not the random forest regression. (The top followed Twitter user by Bengali speakers is @BarackObama followed by @BillGates.)\n\nWe created language models from the downloaded data to compare the effectiveness of the ranking strategies. The language models used the data from the 300 users in the training set as well as the additional users selected by each of the respective ranking strategies. Table VI lists the resulting perplexities on the held-out in-domain data. The predictive ranking LM achieved a 17% reduction in perplexity over the random baseline after downloading 500 users from the queue. When less than 500 additional users are downloaded, the predictive ranking has a better perplexity than the edge\n\n## B. Queue Prioritization Experiment\n\nFig. 2. IV Tokens Gathered by Crawling Strategy" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8786241570348, + "doc_id": "7476b09f803106fdee158e97e5efde950564a6125d6684eec06dc80186f7eae8", + "edit_distance": 0.7507163323782235, + "f1_score": 0.9137380191693291, + "meteor": 0.5936151456967088, + "precision": 0.9285714285714286, + "pred_md": "Betzel, R. F., Griffa, A., Avena-Koenigsberger, A., Go˜i, J., THIRAN, J.-P., n Hagmann, P., Sporns, O., 2013. Multi-scale community organization of the human structural connectome and its relationship with resting-state functional connectivity. Network Science 1 (03), 353-373.\n\nBlondel, V. D., Guillaume, J.-L., Lambiotte, R., Lefebvre, E., 2008. Fast unfolding of communities in large networks. Journal of Statistical Mechanics: Theory and Experiment 2008 (10), P10008.\n\nBullmore, E., Sporns, O., 2009. Complex brain networks: graph theoretical analysis of structural and functional systems. Nature Reviews Neuroscience 10 (3), 186-198.\n\n- Calhoun, V. D., Adali, T., 2012. Multisubject independent component analysis of fMRI: a decade of intrinsic networks, default mode, and neurodiagnostic discovery. Biomedical Engineering, IEEE Reviews in 5, 60-73.\n- Calhoun, V. D., Miller, R., Pearlson, G., Adalı, T., 2014. The chronnectome: time-varying connectivity networks as the next frontier in fMRI data discovery. Neuron 84 (2), 262-274.\n- Chang, C., Glover, G. H., 2010. Time-frequency dynamics of resting-state brain connectivity measured with fmri. Neuroimage 50 (1), 81-98.\n- Chang, C., Liu, Z., Chen, M. C., Liu, X., Duyn, J. H., 2013. EEG correlates of time-varying bold functional connectivity. Neuroimage 72, 227-236.\n\nChu, C. J., Kramer, M. A., Pathmanathan, J., Bianchi, M. T., Westover, M. B., Wizon, L., Cash, S. S., 2012. Emergence of stable functional networks in long-term human electroencephalography. The Journal of Neuroscience 32 (8), 2703-2713.\n\n30", + "recall": 0.89937106918239, + "true_md": "30\n\n- Chu, C. J., Kramer, M. A., Pathmanathan, J., Bianchi, M. T., Westover, M. B., Wizon, L., Cash, S. S., 2012. Emergence of stable functional networks in long-term human electroencephalography. The Journal of Neuroscience 32 (8), 2703–2713.\n\n- Chang, C., Liu, Z., Chen, M. C., Liu, X., Duyn, J. H., 2013. EEG correlates of time-varying bold functional connectivity. Neuroimage 72, 227–236.\n\n- Chang, C., Glover, G. H., 2010. Time–frequency dynamics of resting-state brain connectivity measured with fmri. Neuroimage 50 (1), 81–98.\n\n- Calhoun, V. D., Miller, R., Pearlson, G., Adalı, T., 2014. The chronnectome: time-varying connectivity networks as the next frontier in fMRI data discov- ery. Neuron 84 (2), 262–274.\n\n- Calhoun, V. D., Adali, T., 2012. Multisubject independent component analysis of fMRI: a decade of intrinsic networks, default mode, and neurodiagnostic discovery. Biomedical Engineering, IEEE Reviews in 5, 60–73.\n\n- Bullmore, E., Sporns, O., 2009. Complex brain networks: graph theoretical analysis of structural and functional systems. Nature Reviews Neuroscience 10 (3), 186–198.\n\n- Blondel, V. D., Guillaume, J.-L., Lambiotte, R., Lefebvre, E., 2008. Fast un- folding of communities in large networks. Journal of Statistical Mechanics: Theory and Experiment 2008 (10), P10008.\n\n- Betzel, R. F., Griffa, A., Avena-Koenigsberger, A., Go˜ ni, J., THIRAN, J.-P., Hagmann, P., Sporns, O., 2013. Multi-scale community organization of the human structural connectome and its relationship with resting-state func- tional connectivity. Network Science 1 (03), 353–373." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9237942515205778, + "doc_id": "fa984739f79d6c8ad74b43c955c750c016f95206eeb701b4219ad2527b172e23", + "edit_distance": 0.17573221757322174, + "f1_score": 0.9855072463768116, + "meteor": 0.9423875338578389, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Figure 12: New bounds v.s. Makarov bounds\n\nFigure 12: New bounds v.s. Makarov bounds\n\nF 0 and F 1 over the support causes more triangles having positive probability lower bounds, which leads the improvement of my new lower bound. On the other hand, the Makarov lower bound gets no such informational gain because it uses only one triangle while my new lower bound takes advantage of multiple triangles.\n\n## 5 Application to the Distribution of Effects of Smoking on Birth Weight\n\nIn this section, I apply the results presented in Section 3 to an empirical analysis of the distribution of smoking effects on infant birth weight. Smoking not only has a direct impact on infant birth weight, but is also associated with unobservable factors that affect infant birth weight. I identify marginal distributions of potential infant birth weight with and without smoking by making use of a state cigarette tax hike in Massachusetts (MA) in January 1993 as a source of exogenous variation. I focus on pregnant women who change their smoking behavior from smoking to nonsmoking in response to the tax increase. To identify the distribution of smoking effects, I impose a MTR restriction that smoking has nonpositive effects on infant birth weight with probability one. I propose an estimation procedure and report estimates of the DTE\n\n30", + "recall": 0.9714285714285714, + "true_md": "Figure 12: New bounds v.s. Makarov bounds\n\nF$_{0}$ and F$_{1}$ over the support causes more triangles having positive probability lower bounds, which leads the improvement of my new lower bound. On the other hand, the Makarov lower bound gets no such informational gain because it uses only one triangle while my new lower bound takes advantage of multiple triangles.\n\nIn this section, I apply the results presented in Section 3 to an empirical analysis of the distribution of smoking effects on infant birth weight. Smoking not only has a direct impact on infant birth weight, but is also associated with unobservable factors that affect infant birth weight. I identify marginal distributions of potential infant birth weight with and without smoking by making use of a state cigarette tax hike in Massachusetts (MA) in January 1993 as a source of exogenous variation. I focus on pregnant women who change their smoking behavior from smoking to nonsmoking in response to the tax increase. To identify the distribution of smoking effects, I impose a MTR restriction that smoking has nonpositive effects on infant birth weight with probability one. I propose an estimation procedure and report estimates of the DTE\n\n30\n\n## 5 Application to the Distribution of Effects of Smoking on Birth Weight" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7246154350590172, + "doc_id": "188bf16d45534de260a320e807d59be2ae59cf3580ccdea74de859b5e4f5290e", + "edit_distance": 0.24354243542435425, + "f1_score": 0.9565217391304348, + "meteor": 0.8925966647383059, + "precision": 0.9753694581280788, + "pred_md": "## Algorithm 3 Centralized Scheme B\n\n- 1) Repeat Steps 1 to 5 of Algorithm 2, i.e., initial allocation phase.\n- n = 1 , do while n ≤ N,n = n +1\n- 2) Compute the GP based powers p n,k,l of the allocated users at any subcarrier n considering a high SINR regime using (14).\n- 3) For each user allocated in a cell l at any subcarrier n , divide the left-over power equally among the remaining allocated subcarriers of the user.\n- 4) Remove the subcarrier n from the set of unallocated subcarriers. end\n\nG 12 = [0 06 . 0 05; . 0 16 . 0 06] . × 10 -11 and G 21 = [0 14 . 0 69; . 0 76 . 0 1935] . × 10 -11 . The equal power allocations dictate P 1 = [0 0 5; . 0 0 5] . and P 2 = [0 5 . 0; 0 5 . 0] which leads to an average network throughput of 11.8392 bps/Hz/cell. However, computing the GP based powers results in P 1 = [0 0 53; . 0 0 47] . and P 2 = [0 38 . 0; 0 62 . 0] which lead to a maximum average network throughput of 17.2734 bps/Hz/cell.\n\n## D. Centralized Scheme B: Complexity Analysis\n\nThe initial allocation phase has a complexity of O KN ( 2 ) which is the same as Algorithm 1. Since (14) has L constraints and variables, the complexity of the power control phase is significantly reduced. Although this procedure restricts the degree of freedom offered by GP, numerical results show that the network throughput remains comparable with reduced complexity.\n\n## V. DISTRIBUTED RESOURCE ALLOCATION SCHEME\n\nIn the centralized strategy, we assume that χ n,k,l is known, i.e., every BS knows the interfering gains offered by its users to the neighboring BSs. The interfering gains are based on path loss, shadowing and fading. Assuming the knowledge of local user positions at each BS, the path loss of local users toward the first tier of interfering cells can be determined, however, the knowledge of shadowing and fading gains is difficult to assume in practical scenarios. Thus, in the distributed approach, we compute our results without using the knowledge of shadowing and fading interfering gains.\n\nEach BS performs the subcarrier allocations without taking ICI into account. In other words we compute single cell near optimal allocations using Algorithm 1. The allocation decisions are\n\nMarch 19, 2018\n\nDRAFT\n\n13", + "recall": 0.9383886255924171, + "true_md": "## Algorithm 3 Centralized Scheme B\n\n- 1) Repeat Steps 1 to 5 of Algorithm 2, i.e., initial allocation phase. n = 1 , do while n ≤ N, n = n + 1\n\n- 2) Compute the GP based powers p$_{n,k,l}$ of the allocated users at any subcarrier n considering a high SINR regime using (14).\n\n- 3) For each user allocated in a cell l at any subcarrier n , divide the left-over power equally among the remaining allocated subcarriers of the user.\n\n- 4) Remove the subcarrier n from the set of unallocated subcarriers. end\n\n13\n\nG$_{12}$ = [0 . 06 0 . 05; 0 . 16 0 . 06] × 10 − 11 and G$_{21}$ = [0 . 14 0 . 69; 0 . 76 0 . 1935] × 10 − $^{11}$. The equal power allocations dictate P$_{1}$ = [0 0 . 5; 0 0 . 5] and P$_{2}$ = [0 . 5 0; 0 . 5 0] which leads to an average network throughput of 11.8392 bps/Hz/cell. However, computing the GP based powers results in P$_{1}$ = [0 0 . 53; 0 0 . 47] and P$_{2}$ = [0 . 38 0; 0 . 62 0] which lead to a maximum average network throughput of 17.2734 bps/Hz/cell.\n\nThe initial allocation phase has a complexity of O ( KN $^{2}$) which is the same as Algorithm 1. Since (14) has L constraints and variables, the complexity of the power control phase is signifi- cantly reduced. Although this procedure restricts the degree of freedom offered by GP, numerical results show that the network throughput remains comparable with reduced complexity.\n\nIn the centralized strategy, we assume that χ$_{n,k,l}$ is known, i.e., every BS knows the interfering gains offered by its users to the neighboring BSs. The interfering gains are based on path loss, shadowing and fading. Assuming the knowledge of local user positions at each BS, the path loss of local users toward the first tier of interfering cellscan be determined, however, the knowledge of shadowing and fading gains is difficult to assum e in practical scenarios. Thus, in the distributed approach, we compute our results without using the knowledge of shadowing and fading interfering gains.\n\n## D. Centralized Scheme B: Complexity Analysis\n\n## V. DISTRIBUTED RESOURCE ALLOCATION SCHEME\n\nEach BS performs the subcarrier allocations without taking ICI into account. In other words we compute single cell near optimal allocations using Algorithm 1. The allocation decisions are\n\nDRAFT\n\nMarch 19, 2018" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9504494246136072, + "doc_id": "150d8b573ea8449b6af15dd1605e061d0eaf3c1ec565592a09e6aa28d10756b1", + "edit_distance": 0.03003003003003003, + "f1_score": 0.9629629629629629, + "meteor": 0.9714211916510214, + "precision": 0.9825581395348837, + "pred_md": "might represent periods of specialized information processing when information is less readily exchanged between modules. During time periods when few excursions take place, functional networks are less modular and feature communities that are not as well-defined; these periods might represent times during which information is more freely exchanged across community boundaries. This interpretation agrees with earlier results from Liegeois et al. (2015) in which the authors reported oscillatory behavior between periods of high and low modularity, associated with a transient de-coupling of functional connections from the underlying anatomical network. It is also somewhat in line with earlier results (Zalesky et al., 2014) reporting that functional networks flipped between periods of high and low global efficiency. We expect that further analysis will reveal that the high efficiency states reported by Zalesky et al. (2014) would correspond to the low modularity states observed here while the low efficiency states would be more closely related to high-modularity networks. This follows from the observation that greater global efficiency scores are associated with disordered (i.e. more random) networks, whereas higher modularity scores are associated with highly ordered (i.e. clustered) networks (Watts and Strogatz, 1998). Future work can be directed to better understand the relationships of these states to one another.\n\nInterestingly, our findings suggest that mass-excursion periods are typified by the dissociation of default mode regions dissociating from other systems and forming more distinct modules. One possible explanation for this observation is that instants during which default mode regions dissociate from other regions correspond to periods of introspective thought or mind-wandering, which may not require that system is integrated across multiple systems. This hypothesis is at least partly supported by previous studies that suggest that the default mode network's dynamic connectivity tracks daydreaming (Kucyi and Davis,\n\n23", + "recall": 0.9441340782122905, + "true_md": "might represent periods of specialized information processing when information is less readily exchanged between modules. During time periods when few excur- sions take place, functional networks are less modular and feature communities that are not as well-defined; these periods might represent times during which information is more freely exchanged across community boundaries. This in- terpretation agrees with earlier results from Liegeois et al. (2015) in which the authors reported oscillatory behavior between periods of high and low modu- larity, associated with a transient de-coupling of functional connections from the underlying anatomical network. It is also somewhat in line with earlier re- sults (Zalesky et al., 2014) reporting that functional networks flipped between periods of high and low global efficiency. We expect that further analysis will reveal that the high efficiency states reported by Zalesky et al. (2014) would correspond to the low modularity states observed here while the low efficiency states would be more closely related to high-modularity networks. This follows from the observation that greater global efficiency scores are associated with disordered (i.e. more random) networks, whereas higher modularity scores are associated with highly ordered (i.e. clustered) networks (Watts and Strogatz, 1998). Future work can be directed to better understand the relationships of these states to one another.\n\nInterestingly, our findings suggest that mass-excursion periods are typified by the dissociation of default mode regions dissociating from other systems and forming more distinct modules. One possible explanation for this observation is that instants during which default mode regions dissociate from other regions correspond to periods of introspective thought or mind-wandering, which may not require that system is integrated across multiple systems. This hypothesis is at least partly supported by previous studies that suggest that the default mode network’s dynamic connectivity tracks daydreaming (Kucyi and Davis,\n\n23" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.47227178718982515, + "doc_id": "ab10ec5a656901330c8b72e7977a4803dddb9a237ccdf89f4da26faa5a72859c", + "edit_distance": 0.5141388174807198, + "f1_score": 0.9696969696969697, + "meteor": 0.8843226007920058, + "precision": 0.9911504424778761, + "pred_md": "Figure 4: Identification and characterization of mass excursions. (A) Raw excursion count (shown in black), E t ( ), along with null percentiles ranging from 50% to 99%. (B) The modularity during mass excursions was, on average, greater than the modularity during non-excursions, an effect that was likely driven by the increased number of strong functional connections. (C) We show functional network topologies for a non-excursion and an excursion. The module labels come from the Yeo2011 intrinsic connectivity network partition, which divides the brain into seven functional systems (and seventeen sub-systems not shown here). The systems correspond to control (CONT), default mode (DMN), dorsal attention (DAN), limbic (LIM), ventral attention/saliency (VAN), somatomotor (SMN), and visual (VIS) networks. (D) We compare the edge connection weight distribution for non-excursions with the distribution during excursions. During excursions the distribution is broader and includes values closer to ± 1.\n\nFigure 4: Identification and characterization of mass excursions. (A) Raw excursion count (shown in black), E t ( ), along with null percentiles ranging from 50% to 99%. (B) The modularity during mass excursions was, on average, greater than the modularity during non-excursions, an effect that was likely driven by the increased number of strong functional connections. (C) We show functional network topologies for a non-excursion and an excursion. The module labels come from the Yeo2011 intrinsic connectivity network partition, which divides the brain into seven functional systems (and seventeen sub-systems not shown here). The systems correspond to control (CONT), default mode (DMN), dorsal attention (DAN), limbic (LIM), ventral attention/saliency (VAN), somatomotor (SMN), and visual (VIS) networks. (D) We compare the edge connection weight distribution for non-excursions with the distribution during excursions. During excursions the distribution is broader and includes values closer to ± 1.\n\n42", + "recall": 0.9491525423728814, + "true_md": "Figure 4: Identification and characterization of mass excursions. (A) Raw excursion count (shown in black), E ( t ), along with null percentiles ranging from 50% to 99%. (B) The modular- ity during mass excursions was, on average, greater than the modularity during non-excursions, an effect that was likely driven by the increased number of strong functional connections. (C) We show functional network topologies for a non-excursion and an excursion. The module labels come from the Yeo2011 intrinsic connectivity network partition, which divides the brain into seven functional systems (and seventeen sub-systems not shown here). The systems cor- respond to control (CONT), default mode (DMN), dorsal attention (DAN), limbic (LIM), ventral attention/saliency (VAN), somatomotor (SMN), and visual (VIS) networks. (D) We compare the edge connection weight distribution for non-excursions with the distribution dur- ing excursions. During excursions the distribution is broader and includes values closer to ± 1.\n\n42" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "79cfdc38a26b195114a7a4adfb4675cdfcf8397c4d3e84a373f3061fe1e8fc4f", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9998518518518519, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "gains and medical risk factors. Robust standard errors are reported in parentheses.\n\n78", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "gains and medical risk factors. Robust standard errors are reported in parentheses.\n\n78" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4060384805831293, + "doc_id": "b89ec7ef3ffb663d24ddd0596ee7ffa2652b960aad891b314b6b6bab2d94e38b", + "edit_distance": 0.5193965517241379, + "f1_score": 0.8705234159779615, + "meteor": 0.4133136125668554, + "precision": 0.9239766081871345, + "pred_md": "The continuity of the derivatives in a neighborhood of y ∗ implies that the function W is differentiable at the grazing point y = y , ∗ and the condition ( A 2) is valid.\n\nNow, on the basis of the discussion made above, one can obtain the bivalued matrix of coefficients for the grazing point as\n\n\n\nThe matrix D (1) 1 = O 2 is for near solutions of (3.15) which are in the region where Z in, see Fig. 1, and do not intersect the curve of discontinuity Γ 1 . The matrix\n\n\n\nis for near solutions of (3.15), which intersects the curve of discontinuity Γ 1 . They start in the subregion, where the point Y is placed. Thus, the linearization for Ψ( ) t at the grazing point exists. Moreover, since another point of discontinuity (0 , exp(0 0005 . π )) is not grazing, the linearization at the point exist as well as linearization at points of continuity [1, 40]. Consequently, there exist linearization around Ψ( ) t .\n\nTo verify condition ( A 3) , consider a near solution y t ( ) = y t, ( 0 , y ¯) to Ψ( ) t , where ¯ = (0 y , y ¯ ) 2 , ¯ y 2 > Ψ (0) = 1 2 , which satisfy the condition ( N 1) . It is true that θ i +1 -θ i = π 2 = ω 2 . The first coordinate of the near solution is y 1 ( ) = ¯exp(0 0005 ) sin( ) t y . t t and y 1 ( ω 2 ) = y 1 ( π 2 ) = ¯exp(0 00025 y . π ) > exp(0 00025 . π ) = Ψ ( 1 ω 2 ) . Thus, the meeting moment of near solution y t ( ) with the surface of discontinuity is less than ω 2 . So, it implies that 0 < τ y ( ) < π 2 -/epsilon1 for a small number /epsilon1 if the first coordinate of ¯ y is close to exp(0 00025 . π . ) This validates condition ( A 3) . Now, Lemma 3.1 proves the condition ( C . )\n\nNow, let us consider the point (0 , 0) . We have that 〈∇ Φ((0 0)) , , f ((0 , 0)) 〉 = (1 0) (0 0) 〈 , , , 〉 = 0 . That is the origin is a grazing point. In the same time it is a fixed point of the system. For this particular grazing point, we can find the linearization directly. Indeed, all the near solutions satisfy the linear impulsive system,\n\n\n\nConsider a solution x t ( ) = x t, ( 0 , x 0 ) , where x 0 = ( x , x 0 1 0 2 ) = (0 0) , with moments of discontinuity\n\n/negationslash\n\n18", + "recall": 0.8229166666666666, + "true_md": "$$B$_{1}$ =     $^{O$_{2}$}$$^{,}$ if (N1) is valid ,    − 1 0 0 . 001 − 1 . 8 exp(0 . 00025 π ) 0    , if (N2) is valid . (1) = O$_{2}$ is for near solutions of (3.15) which are in the region where$$\n\n$^{O$\\_{2}$}$$^{,}$ The matrix D (1) 1 = O$\\_{2}$ is for near solutions of (3.15) which are in the region where Z in, see Fig. 1, and do not intersect the curve of discontinuity Γ$\\_{1}$ . The matrix\n\nis for near solutions of (3.15), which intersects the curve of discontinuity Γ$_{1}$ . They start in the subregion, where the point Y is placed. Thus, the linearization for Ψ( t ) at the grazing point exists. Moreover, since another point of discontinuity (0 , exp(0 . 0005 π )) is not grazing, the linearization at the point exist as well as linearization at points of continuity [1, 40]. Consequently, there exist linearization around Ψ( t ) .\n\nTo verify condition ( A 3) , consider a near solution y ( t ) = y ( t, 0 , ¯ y ) to Ψ( t ) , where ¯ y = (0 , ¯ y$_{2}$ ) , ¯ y$_{2}$ > Ψ$_{2}$(0) = 1 , which satisfy the condition ( N 1) . It is true that θ$_{i}$$\\_{+1}$ − θ$\\_{i}$ = π 2 = ω 2 . The first coordinate of the near solution is y$\\_{1}$ ( t ) = ¯ y exp(0 . 0005 t ) sin( t ) and\n\ny$_{1}$ ( ω $_{2}$) = y$_{1}$ ( π 2 ) = ¯ y exp(0 . 00025 π ) > exp(0 . 00025 π ) = Ψ$_{1}$( ω 2 ) . Thus, the meeting moment of near solution y ( t ) with the surface of discontinuity is less than ω $_{2}$. So, it implies that 0 < τ ( y ) < π 2 − ϵ for a small number ϵ if the first coordinate of ¯ y is close to exp(0 . 00025 π ) . This validates condition ( A 3) . Now, Lemma 3.1 proves the condition ( C ) .\n\nNow, let us consider the point (0 , 0) . We have that 〈∇ Φ((0 , 0)) , f ((0 , 0)) 〉 = 〈 (1 , 0) , (0 , 0) 〉 = 0 . That is the origin is a grazing point. In the same time it is a fixed point of the system. For this particular grazing point, we can find the linearization directly. Indeed, all the near solutions satisfy the linear impulsive system,\n\nConsider a solution x ( t ) = x ( t, 0 , x$_{0}$ ) , where x$_{0}$ = ( x 0 $_{1}$, x 0 $_{2}$) ̸ = (0 , 0) with moments of discontinuity\n\nNow, on the basis of the discussion made above, one can obtain the bivalued matrix of coefficients for the grazing point as\n\nThe continuity of the derivatives in a neighborhood of y ∗ implies that the function W is differentiable at the grazing point y = y ∗ , and the condition ( A 2) is valid.\n\n$$D (2) 1 =    − 1 0 0 . 001 − 1 . 8 exp(0 . 00025 π ) $_{0}$  $$\n\n$$$_{x}$′ 1 = x$_{2}$, $_{x}$′ 2 = − x$_{1}$ + 0 . 001 x$_{2}$, Δ x$_{2}$ | x$_{1}$ =0 = − (1 + R$_{2}$ ) x$_{2}$. (3.27)$$\n\n18" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.97020128032501, + "doc_id": "69092570c8e769bb755caa43ebf275de40913f85a1348cb6689ac6f050af6ac9", + "edit_distance": 0.0425531914893617, + "f1_score": 0.9886104783599088, + "meteor": 0.9923750355145999, + "precision": 0.9908675799086758, + "pred_md": "scheme in various scenarios. Moreover, comparisons with the upper and lower bounds provide insight on the performance gap between the proposed schemes and the optimal solution.\n\n## I. INTRODUCTION\n\nDynamic resource allocation plays a central role in the air interface design of state-of-theart OFDMA-based cellular technologies. In this paper, we focus our attention on maximizing the overall network throughput by optimizing the allocation of resources (i.e., subcarriers and powers) jointly in a multi-cell uplink OFDMA network. The goal is to develop efficient resource allocation schemes that takes into account the inter-cell interference (ICI) while considering universal frequency reuse. The solution of such problem is difficult to achieve optimally due to its NP hard combinatorial nature and high dimensionality.\n\nThe sum rate maximization problem is extensively studied for the downlink in OFDMA networks. The optimal strategy in the downlink is to separately optimize subcarrier and power allocation, i.e., allocate a subcarrier to the user with best channel and then perform water-filling over the allocated subcarriers [1]. However, the problem becomes more challenging in the uplink scenario due to the individual power constraint at each user. Simply allocating a subcarrier to the user with best channel quality may affect the network performance considerably, as some active users may have better channel gains but low transmission powers on a specific subcarrier.\n\nMost of the recent work in the context of multi-cell OFDMA networks [7], [8], aims at minimizing the overall transmitted power, i.e., linear objective with pre-defined rate constraints. In [9], the authors investigated scaling laws for upper and lower bounds of the downlink capacity in the asymptotic regime. Furthermore, in some recent literature, low complexity distributed game theoretic solutions are also studied. However, the schemes are iterative and optimality is not guaranteed [10]. An auction based approach is discussed in [11], where the authors proposed a joint auction and dual decomposition based technique for the resource allocation problem. The technique is asymptotically optimal as the number of subcarriers in every cell goes to infinity. However, this may not be true for finite number of carriers. In summary, all these approaches are sub-optimal and no criteria are used to calibrate their performance gap with respect to the\n\nMarch 19, 2018\n\nDRAFT\n\n2", + "recall": 0.9863636363636363, + "true_md": "2\n\nscheme in various scenarios. Moreover, comparisons with the upper and lower bounds provide insight on the performance gap between the proposed schemes and the optimal solution.\n\nDynamic resource allocation plays a central role in the air interface design of state-of-the- art OFDMA-based cellular technologies. In this paper, we focus our attention on maximizing the overall network throughput by optimizing the allocation of resources (i.e., subcarriers and powers) jointly in a multi-cell uplink OFDMA network. The goal is to develop efficient resource allocation schemes that takes into account the inter-cell interference (ICI) while considering universal frequency reuse. The solution of such problem is difficult to achieve optimally due to its NP hard combinatorial nature and high dimensionality.\n\n## I. INTRODUCTION\n\nThe sum rate maximization problem is extensively studied for the downlink in OFDMA networks. The optimal strategy in the downlink is to separately optimize subcarrier and power allocation, i.e., allocate a subcarrier to the user with best channel and then perform water-filling over the allocated subcarriers [1]. However, the problem becomes more challenging in the uplink scenario due to the individual power constraint at each user. Simply allocating a subcarrier to the user with best channel quality may affect the network performance considerably, as some active users may have better channel gains but low transmission powers on a specific subcarrier.\n\nMost of the recent work in the context of multi-cell OFDMA networks [7], [8], aims at minimizing the overall transmitted power, i.e., linear objective with pre-defined rate constraints. In [9], the authors investigated scaling laws for upper and lower bounds of the downlink capacity in the asymptotic regime. Furthermore, in some recent literature, low complexity distributed game theoretic solutions are also studied. However, the schemes are iterative and optimality is not guaranteed [10]. An auction based approach is discussed in [11], where the authors proposed a joint auction and dual decomposition based technique for the resource allocation problem. The technique is asymptotically optimal as the number of subcarriers in every cell goes to infinity. However, this may not be true for finite number of carriers. Insummary, all these approaches are sub-optimal and no criteria are used to calibrate their performance gap with respect to the\n\nDRAFT\n\nMarch 19, 2018" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9645795939804679, + "doc_id": "4b53e6e4c165f5878983885aa28040749dedc280a389bc09471033de33767cd5", + "edit_distance": 0.021052631578947368, + "f1_score": 0.9732620320855616, + "meteor": 0.9799468010304949, + "precision": 0.9891304347826086, + "pred_md": "Computational models have suggested that functional connectivity and its associated network characteristics are time-dependent and vary over multiple time scales (Honey et al., 2007; Hansen et al., 2015). Empirical functional connectivity analyses are beginning to move beyond static or time-invariant studies, focusing increasingly on the ongoing temporal dynamics of brain connectivity (Hutchison et al., 2013a; Calhoun et al., 2014; Kopell et al., 2014). Biomarkers based on dynamic functional connectivity appear to track behaviorally relevant variables (Elton and Gao, 2015), including daydreaming (Kucyi and Davis, 2014) and state of arousal (Allen et al., 2012), cognitive state (Betzel et al., 2012; Hutchison et al., 2013b; Tagliazucchi et al., 2014), consciousness (Barttfeld et al., 2015), and developmental level (Hutchison and Morton, 2015). They may also prove useful in differentiating between diseased and healthy populations (Damaraju et al., 2014; Rashid et al., 2014; Miller et al., 2014). Despite these initial successes, there are a number of methodological and interpretational issues related to estimating and interpreting dynamic functional connectivity. For example, while the sliding window approach used here is most common, other methods for estimating dynamic functional connectivity exist, such as component (Calhoun and Adali, 2012) and model-based analyses Lindquist et al. (2014). The advantage of one method over the other is not immediately clear. In terms of how we interpret dynamic functional connectivity, it remains unclear whether fluctuations in fMRI connectivity strength over time have a distinct neurobiological basis, i.e. are the expression of fluctuations in the underlying pattern of neural activity, though a number of studies using combined EEG-fMRI acquisition have reported electrophysiological correlates of fMRI fluctuations (Scheeringa et al., 2012; Tagliazucchi et al., 2012b; Chang et al., 2013) . An alternative interpretation is that these fluctuations merely reflect correlated white noise (Hlinka and Hadrava, 2015), or can be accounted\n\n21", + "recall": 0.9578947368421052, + "true_md": "Computational models have suggested that functional connectivity and its associated network characteristics are time-dependent and vary over multiple time scales (Honey et al., 2007; Hansen et al., 2015). Empirical functional connectivity analyses are beginning to move beyond static or time-invariant studies, focusing increasingly on the ongoing temporal dynamics of brain con- nectivity (Hutchison et al., 2013a; Calhoun et al., 2014; Kopell et al., 2014).\n\nBiomarkers based on dynamic functional connectivity appear to track behav- iorally relevant variables (Elton and Gao, 2015), including daydreaming (Kucyi and Davis, 2014) and state of arousal (Allen et al., 2012), cognitive state (Betzel et al., 2012; Hutchison et al., 2013b; Tagliazucchi et al., 2014), consciousness (Barttfeld et al., 2015), and developmental level (Hutchison and Morton, 2015).\n\nThey may also prove useful in differentiating between diseased and healthy populations (Damaraju et al., 2014; Rashid et al., 2014; Miller et al., 2014).\n\nDespite these initial successes, there are a number of methodological and in- terpretational issues related to estimating and interpreting dynamic functional connectivity. For example, while the sliding window approach used here is most common, other methods for estimating dynamic functional connectivity exist, such as component (Calhoun and Adali, 2012) and model-based analyses Lindquist et al. (2014). The advantage of one method over the other is not immediately clear. In terms of how we interpret dynamic functional connectiv- ity, it remains unclear whether fluctuations in fMRI connectivity strength over time have a distinct neurobiological basis, i.e. are the expression of fluctuations in the underlying pattern of neural activity, though a number of studies using combined EEG-fMRI acquisition have reported electrophysiological correlates of fMRI fluctuations (Scheeringa et al., 2012; Tagliazucchi et al., 2012b; Chang et al., 2013) . An alternative interpretation is that these fluctuations merely reflect correlated white noise (Hlinka and Hadrava, 2015), or can be accounted\n\n21" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.967799274082029, + "doc_id": "206f8b9c607f937573208422705d55312d688796c6fd1ef8ace3858e0e1a1741", + "edit_distance": 0.01217391304347826, + "f1_score": 0.9812108559498955, + "meteor": 0.9914754080105252, + "precision": 0.9832635983263598, + "pred_md": "dynamics behavior such as chaos and bifurcation [7]-[10], [13], [15], [18], [36]-[39]. However, there is still no sufficient conditions for the discontinuous motion to admit main features of dynamical systems : the group property, continuous and differentiable dependence on initial data and continuation of motions, which are useful for both local and global analysis. Variational systems for grazing solutions have not been considered in general as well as orbital stability theorem and regular perturbation theory around cycles, despite, particular cases can be found in specialized papers. See, for example, [12]. To investigate these problems in the present paper, we have applied the method of B -equivalence and results on discontinuous dynamics developed and summarized in [1]. In our analysis the grazing singularity is observed through the gradient of the time function τ ( x , ) since some of its coordinates are infinite. We have found the components of the discontinuous dynamical system that is the vector field, surfaces of discontinuity and the equations of jump such that interacting they neutralize the effect of singularity. Then, we linearize the system at the grazing moments and this brings the dynamics to regular analysis and make suitable for the application. By means of the linearization, the theory can be understood as a part of the general theory of discontinuous dynamical system. Thus, we have considered grazing phenomena as a subject of the general theory of discontinuous dynamical systems [1], discovered a partition of set of solutions near grazing solution such that we determine linearization around a grazing solution is a collection of several linear impulsive systems with fixed moments of impulses. This constitutes the main novelty of the present paper. To linearize a solution around the grazing one, a system from the collection is to be utilized. This result has been applied to prove the orbital stability theorem. The way of analysis in [1]-[3] continues in the present paper and it admits all attributes which are proper for continuous dynamics [23]. That is why, we believe that the method can be extended for introduction and research of graziness in other types of dynamics such as partial and functional differential equations and others. Next, we plan to apply the present results and the method of investigation for problems initiated in [7]-[10], [37]-[39], [41].\n\n## References\n\n- [1] M. Akhmet. Principles of Discontinuous Dynamical Systems . Springer-Verlag, New York, 2010.\n- [2] M.U. Akhmet. Perturbations and Hopf bifurcation of the planar discontinuous dynamical system. Nonlinear Analysis , 60:163-178, 2005.\n- [3] M.U. Akhmet. On the smoothness of solutions of impulsive autonomous systems, Nonlinear Anal.: TMA, 60:311-324, 2005.\n- [4] M. U. Akhmet and A. Kıvılcım. The Models with Impact Deformations, Discontinuity, Nonlinearity, and Complexity, 4(1):49-78, 2015.\n\n41", + "recall": 0.9791666666666666, + "true_md": "dynamics behavior such as chaos and bifurcation [7]-[10], [13], [15], [18], [36]-[39]. However, there is still no sufficient conditions for the discontinuous motion to admit main features of dynamical systems : the group property, continuous and differentiable dependence on initial data and continuation of motions, which are useful for both local and global analysis. Variational systems for grazing solutions have not been considered in general as well as orbital stability theorem and regular perturbation theory around cycles, despite, particular cases can be found in specialized papers. See, for example, [12]. To investigate these problems in the present paper, we have applied the method of B − equivalence and results on discontinuous dynamics developed and summarized in [1]. In our analysis the grazing singularity is observed through the gradient of the time function τ ( x ) , since some of its coordinates are infinite. We have found the components of the discontinuous dynamical system that is the vector field, surfaces of discontinuity and the equations of jump such that interacting they neutralize the effect of singularity. Then, we linearize the system at the grazing moments and this brings the dynamics to regular analysis and make suitable for the application. By means of the linearization, the theory can be understood as a part of the general theory of discontinuous dynamical system. Thus, we have considered grazing phenomena as a subject of the general theory of discontinuous dynamical systems [1], discovered a partition of set of solutions near grazing solution such that we determine linearization around a grazing solution is a collection of several linear impulsive systems with fixed moments of impulses. This constitutes the main novelty of the present paper. To linearize a solution around the grazing one, a system from the collection is to be utilized. This result has been applied to prove the orbital stability theorem. The way of analysis in [1]-[3] continues in the present paper and it admits all attributes which are proper for continuous dynamics [23]. That is why, we believe that the method can be extended for introduction and research of graziness in other types of dynamics such as partial and functional differential equations and others. Next, we plan to apply the present results and the method of investigation for problems initiated in [7]-[10], [37]-[39], [41].\n\n## References\n\n- [1] M. Akhmet. Principles of Discontinuous Dynamical Systems . Springer-Verlag, New York, 2010.\n\n- [2] M.U. Akhmet. Perturbations and Hopf bifurcation of the planar discontinuous dynamical system. Nonlinear Analysis , 60:163–178, 2005.\n\n- [3] M.U. Akhmet. On the smoothness of solutions of impulsive autonomous systems, Nonlinear Anal.: TMA, 60:311–324, 2005.\n\n- [4] M. U. Akhmet and A. Kıvılcım. The Models with Impact Deformations, Discontinuity, Nonlinearity, and Complexity, 4(1):49–78, 2015.\n\n41" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9718626409927275, + "doc_id": "b6b46ec501225245ef7414ccbcf8ca5f6f1979e914f980ad81d6c6627f6b61b1", + "edit_distance": 0.017543859649122806, + "f1_score": 0.9842105263157894, + "meteor": 0.9894345189782229, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "17\n\nIn Fig. 1, Fig. 2 and Fig. 3, we present the performance of the centralized scheme A, centralized scheme B and the distributed scheme for two cells, four cells and seven cells, respectively. The results have been taken after averaging over 10,000 channel realizations and are shown for both simulation scenarios. The performance of all schemes is calibrated using the established upper and lower bounds. Since the centralized scheme A has computationally exhaustive power allocation phase, the results are presented for the subcarrier allocation phase of Algorithm 2 only. However, it can be observed that the scheme still has the capability to serve as a suitable benchmark for the developed low complexity schemes. In order to highlight the significance of the less complex GP problem defined in (14), we also present the performance of the centralized scheme B without power control.\n\nFor the two cell scenario, the performance gap between the centralized schemes is negligible and they give nearly similar results. However, as the number of cells increases the performance gain of the centralized scheme A is evident over all schemes even without power control. Moreover, it is also important to note the significant degradation in the performance of centralized scheme B without power control phase. This degradation is found to be increasing with the increase in number of cells. It is also worth to mention here that the proposed less complex GP problem (14) can be implemented in a distributed way using the techniques explained in [14] and can be used with any set of subcarrier allocations. Thus, in the distributed approach we use the near optimal single cell allocations in conjunction with the less complex GP problem (14). The significance of the power control phase can be observed easily from the results which becomes more evident for high number of cells .\n\nMoreover, the presented results depict the reduction in the average network throughput as the number of interfering cells increases. The performance gap of the proposed schemes increases with respect to the evaluated UB. Even though the UB is not tight and reflects an over optimistic average network throughput, it provides an idea on the performance gap between the proposed schemes and the optimal solution.\n\nIn Fig. 4, we assume that the users in each cell are placed at equally spaced angles from 0 to 2 π . The performance evaluation of all schemes has been done by changing the user positions\n\nMarch 19, 2018\n\nDRAFT", + "recall": 0.9689119170984456, + "true_md": "17\n\nIn Fig. 1, Fig. 2 and Fig. 3, we present the performance of the centralized scheme A, centralized scheme B and the distributed scheme for two cells, four cells and seven cells, respectively. The results have been taken after averaging over 10,000 channel realizations and are shown for both simulation scenarios. The performance of all schemes is calibrated using the established upper and lower bounds. Since the centralized scheme A has computationally exhaustive power allocation phase, the results are presented for the subcarrier allocation phase of Algorithm 2 only. However, it can be observed that the scheme still has the capability to serve as a suitable benchmark for the developed low complexity schemes. In order to highlight the significance of the less complex GP problem defined in (14), we also present th e performance of the centralized scheme B without power control.\n\nFor the two cell scenario, the performance gap between the centralized schemes is negligible and they give nearly similar results. However, as the number of cells increases the performance gain of the centralized scheme A is evident over all schemes even without power control. Moreover, it is also important to note the significant degrad ation in the performance of centralized scheme B without power control phase. This degradation is found to be increasing with the increase in number of cells. It is also worth to mention here that the proposed less complex GP problem (14) can be implemented in a distributed way using the techniques explained in [14] and can be used with any set of subcarrier allocations. Thus, in the distributed approach we use the near optimal single cell allocations in conjunction with the less complex GP problem (14). The significance of the power control phase can be obser ved easily from the results which becomes more evident for high number of cells .\n\nMoreover, the presented results depict the reduction in the average network throughput as the number of interfering cells increases. The performance gap of the proposed schemes increases with respect to the evaluated UB. Even though the UB is not tight and reflects an over optimistic average network throughput, it provides an idea on the performance gap between the proposed schemes and the optimal solution.\n\nIn Fig. 4, we assume that the users in each cell are placed at equally spaced angles from 0 to 2 π . The performance evaluation of all schemes has been done by changing the user positions\n\nDRAFT\n\nMarch 19, 2018" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7128568756390139, + "doc_id": "2c4320c8ef841e95a69ac11f2cec2f0347b6317ade9931f2c5f5bcad193919db", + "edit_distance": 0.33612040133779264, + "f1_score": 0.9533169533169534, + "meteor": 0.7871628590941079, + "precision": 0.9556650246305419, + "pred_md": "form to compute their Jacobian and Hessian. To overcome this problem, I approximate the nondifferentiable function max { x, 0 } with a smooth function x 1+exp( -x/h ) for small h > 0 and marginal distribution functions with finite normal mixtures ∑ i a i Φ ( x -µ i σ i ) , which makes it substantially simple to evaluate the Jacobian and Hessian of the objective function at any point. 26\n\nFigure B.2: Approximation of max { x, 0 } and x 1+exp( -x/h )\n\nFigure B.2: Approximation of max { x, 0 } and x 1+exp( -x/h )\n\n(a) h = 0 05 .\n\n(a) h = 0 05 .\n\n(b) h = 0 01 .\n\nI used Knitro to solve the optimization problem using the smoothed functions. Knitro is a constrained nonlinear optimization software. 27 In optimization, I considered the constraints that 0 ≤ a k +1 -a k ≤ δ and δ < a k +2 -a k for each integer k, and I fed the Jacobian and the Hessian of the Lagrangian into Knitro. Since the objective function in the optimization is not convex, it is likely to have multiple local maxima. I randomly generated initial values 90-200 times using the 'multistart' feature in Knitro.\n\nThe numerical optimization results substantially depend on the initial values, which is the evidence of multiple local maxima and surprisingly, the values of the objective function at all these local maxima were lower than V K ( δ ) in both Section 4 and Section 5. Based on the numerical evidence, it appears that the global maximum for both Section 4 and Section 5 is achieved or well approximated when a k +1 -a k = δ for each integer k . It remains to show under which conditions on the joint distribution or marginal distributions the sharp lower bound is indeed achieved when a k +1 -a k = δ for each integer k .\n\n26 I used the Kolmogorov-Smirnov test to determine the number of components in the mixture model. I increased the order of the mixture model from one until the test does not reject the null that the two distribution functions are identical. In the numerical example, I used one to three components for 9 different pairs of ( k , k 1 2 ) considered in Section 4 and I used three for the empirical application. For each mixture model that I used to approximate the marginal distributions, the null hypothesis that two distribution functions are identical was not rejected with pvalue > 0 99. .\n\n27 Recently Knitro has been often used to solve large-dimensional constrained optimization problems in the literature including Conlon (2012), Dub´ e et al. (2012) and Galichon and Salani´ (2012). See Byrd et al. (2006) for details. e\n\n75", + "recall": 0.9509803921568627, + "true_md": "form to compute their Jacobian and Hessian. To overcome this problem, I approximate the nondifferentiable function max { x, 0 } with a smooth function x 1+exp( − x/h ) for small h > 0 and marginal distribution functions with finite normal mixtures ∑ i a$_{i}$ Φ ( x − µ$_{i}$ σ$_{i}$ $^{)}$, which makes it substantially simple to evaluate the Jacobian and Hessian of the objective function at any point. 26\n\nI used Knitro to solve the optimization problem using the smoothed functions. Knitro is a constrained nonlinear optimization software. 27 In optimization, I considered the constraints that 0 ≤ a$_{k}$$\\_{+1}$ − a$\\_{k}$ ≤ δ and δ < a$\\_{k}$$_{+2}$ − a$_{k}$ for each integer k, and I fed the Jacobian and the Hessian of the Lagrangian into Knitro. Since the objective function in the optimization is not convex, it is likely to have multiple local maxima. I randomly generated initial values 90-200 times using the ”multistart” feature in Knitro.\n\nThe numerical optimization results substantially depend on the initial values, which is the evidence of multiple local maxima and surprisingly, the values of the objective function at all these local maxima were lower than V$_{K}$ ( δ ) in both Section 4 and Section 5. Based on the numerical evidence, it appears that the global maximum for both Section 4 and Section 5 is achieved or well approximated when a$_{k}$$\\_{+1}$ − a$\\_{k}$ = δ for each integer k . It remains to show under which conditions on the joint distribution or marginal distributions the sharp lower bound is indeed achieved when a$\\_{k}$$_{+1}$ − a$_{k}$ = δ for each integer k .\n\n$^{26}$I used the Kolmogorov-Smirnov test to determine the number of components in the mixture model. I increased the order of the mixture model from one until the test does not reject the null that the two distribution functions are identical. In the numerical example, I used one to three components for 9 different pairs of ( k$_{1}$, k$_{2}$ ) considered in Section 4 and I used three for the empirical application. For each mixture model that I used to approximate the marginal distributions, the null hypothesis that two distribution functions are identical was not rejected with pvalue > 0 . 99.\n\n$^{27}$Recently Knitro has been often used to solve large-dimensional constrained optimization problems in the literature including Conlon (2012), Dub´ e et al. (2012) and Galichon and Salani´ e (2012). See Byrd et al. (2006) for details.\n\n75\n\nFigure B.2: Approximation of max { x, 0 } and x 1+exp( − x/h )" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9430581862661332, + "doc_id": "b85baf82d335f00461d1daa4a8f4c89cc4c884244541ad9f48107e28cc827a45", + "edit_distance": 0.03234501347708895, + "f1_score": 0.9686411149825785, + "meteor": 0.9699941538013465, + "precision": 0.9788732394366197, + "pred_md": "## References\n\n## References\n\nAllan, T. W., Francis, S. T., Caballero-Gaudes, C., Morris, P. G., Liddle, E. B., Liddle, P. F., Brookes, M. J., Gowland, P. A., 2015. Functional connectivity in MRI is driven by spontaneous bold events. PLOS ONE.\n\nAllen, E. A., Damaraju, E., Plis, S. M., Erhardt, E. B., Eichele, T., Calhoun, V. D., 2012. Tracking whole-brain connectivity dynamics in the resting state. Cerebral Cortex, bhs352.\n\nBarttfeld, P., Uhrig, L., Sitt, J. D., Sigman, M., Jarraya, B., Dehaene, S., 2015. Signature of consciousness in the dynamics of resting-state brain activity. Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences 112 (3), 887-892.\n\nBassett, D. S., Wymbs, N. F., Porter, M. A., Mucha, P. J., Carlson, J. M., Grafton, S. T., 2011. Dynamic reconfiguration of human brain networks during learning. Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences 108 (18), 76417646.\n\nBassett, D. S., Wymbs, N. F., Rombach, M. P., Porter, M. A., Mucha, P. J., Grafton, S. T., 2013. Task-based core-periphery organization of human brain dynamics. PLoS Computational Biology 9 (9), e1003171.\n\nBazzi, M., Porter, M. A., Williams, S., McDonald, M., Fenn, D. J., Howison, S. D., 2014. Community detection in temporal multilayer networks, and its application to correlation networks. arXiv preprint arXiv:1501.00040.\n\nBetzel, R. F., Erickson, M. A., Abell, M., ODonnell, B. F., Hetrick, W. P., Sporns, O., 2012. Synchronization dynamics and evidence for a repertoire of network states in resting EEG. Frontiers in Computational Neuroscience 6, 74.\n\n29", + "recall": 0.9586206896551724, + "true_md": "## References\n\n## References\n\n- Allan, T. W., Francis, S. T., Caballero-Gaudes, C., Morris, P. G., Liddle, E. B., Liddle, P. F., Brookes, M. J., Gowland, P. A., 2015. Functional connectivity in MRI is driven by spontaneous bold events. PLOS ONE.\n\n- Allen, E. A., Damaraju, E., Plis, S. M., Erhardt, E. B., Eichele, T., Calhoun, V. D., 2012. Tracking whole-brain connectivity dynamics in the resting state. Cerebral Cortex, bhs352.\n\n- Barttfeld, P., Uhrig, L., Sitt, J. D., Sigman, M., Jarraya, B., Dehaene, S., 2015. Signature of consciousness in the dynamics of resting-state brain activity. Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences 112 (3), 887–892.\n\n- Bassett, D. S., Wymbs, N. F., Porter, M. A., Mucha, P. J., Carlson, J. M., Grafton, S. T., 2011. Dynamic reconfiguration of human brain networks dur- ing learning. Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences 108 (18), 7641– 7646.\n\n- Bassett, D. S., Wymbs, N. F., Rombach, M. P., Porter, M. A., Mucha, P. J., Grafton, S. T., 2013. Task-based core-periphery organization of human brain dynamics. PLoS Computational Biology 9 (9), e1003171.\n\n- Bazzi, M., Porter, M. A., Williams, S., McDonald, M., Fenn, D. J., Howison, S. D., 2014. Community detection in temporal multilayer networks, and its application to correlation networks. arXiv preprint arXiv:1501.00040.\n\n- Betzel, R. F., Erickson, M. A., Abell, M., ODonnell, B. F., Hetrick, W. P., Sporns, O., 2012. Synchronization dynamics and evidence for a repertoire of network states in resting EEG. Frontiers in Computational Neuroscience 6, 74.\n\n29" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9447007318948301, + "doc_id": "ad398402453f74da1d1dbfb114aee8b31954cd7e8983c6acf22d021a9b740627", + "edit_distance": 0.03206997084548105, + "f1_score": 0.9560117302052786, + "meteor": 0.9696165102152219, + "precision": 0.9760479041916168, + "pred_md": "time-varying functional connectivity.\n\nKeywords:\n\nNetworks, Dynamic functional connectivity, Modularity\n\n## Introduction\n\nThe human brain can be described in terms of a network of neural elements and their connections (Bullmore and Sporns, 2009). In cases where the network refers to structural connectivity, the connections indicate the presence of an anatomical link, such as a synapse between two neurons or a white matter fascicle between brain regions, the complete set of which defines the human connectome (Sporns et al., 2005; Sporns, 2011). In cases where the network refers to functional connectivity, a connection indicates that a pair of neural elements is functionally related to one another, most commonly expressed through estimating statistical dependencies among neuronal time courses (Friston, 2011). The complete set of functional connections between all pairs of neural elements specifies a functional brain network . In most current applications, functional brain networks are constructed by calculating Pearson's correlation coefficient of blood-oxygen-level-dependent (BOLD) time series for all pairs of ROIs, recorded over an extended period of time during rest or task conditions. The result is a full matrix, whose coefficients represent estimates of the magnitude of the functional connection between each pair of ROIs.\n\nIn calculating the magnitude of a functional connection, one typically takes into account BOLD fluctuations over an extended scan session lasting on the order of 5-10 minutes or longer. The matrix of correlations generated for the entire scan session is here referred to as the static functional connectivity matrix. Recently, it has been proposed that such an approach overlooks potentially meaningful fluctuations in the magnitude of functional connections that take place on shorter time scales (Chang and Glover, 2010; Hutchison et al., 2013a; Calhoun et al., 2014; Kopell et al., 2014). A common approach to obtain an\n\n2", + "recall": 0.9367816091954023, + "true_md": "time-varying functional connectivity.\n\n- Keywords: Networks, Dynamic functional connectivity, Modularity\n\n## Introduction\n\nThe human brain can be described in terms of a network of neural elements and their connections (Bullmore and Sporns, 2009). In cases where the net- work refers to structural connectivity, the connections indicate the presence of an anatomical link, such as a synapse between two neurons or a white matter fascicle between brain regions, the complete set of which defines the human con- nectome (Sporns et al., 2005; Sporns, 2011). In cases where the network refers to functional connectivity, a connection indicates that a pair of neural elements is functionally related to one another, most commonly expressed through esti- mating statistical dependencies among neuronal time courses (Friston, 2011).\n\nThe complete set of functional connections between all pairs of neural elements specifies a functional brain network . In most current applications, functional brain networks are constructed by calculating Pearson’s correlation coefficient of blood-oxygen-level-dependent (BOLD) time series for all pairs of ROIs, recorded over an extended period of time during rest or task conditions. The result is a full matrix, whose coefficients represent estimates of the magnitude of the functional connection between each pair of ROIs.\n\nIn calculating the magnitude of a functional connection, one typically takes into account BOLD fluctuations over an extended scan session lasting on the order of 5-10 minutes or longer. The matrix of correlations generated for the en- tire scan session is here referred to as the static functional connectivity matrix. Recently, it has been proposed that such an approach overlooks potentially meaningful fluctuations in the magnitude of functional connections that take place on shorter time scales (Chang and Glover, 2010; Hutchison et al., 2013a; Calhoun et al., 2014; Kopell et al., 2014). A common approach to obtain an\n\n2" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4264902388930561, + "doc_id": "74cb961763541a9efd5cc1a7a2d195329c23b33c1e6cf8c4d2dd7d1794dbff3d", + "edit_distance": 0.46112600536193027, + "f1_score": 0.9203084832904885, + "meteor": 0.5842828992720188, + "precision": 0.9470899470899471, + "pred_md": "of view, the benefits of using our procedure can outweigh the costs in many relevant situations.\n\n## 3.2.2 Power against local alternatives\n\nNext, we study the performance of our projection-based tests under a sequence of local alternative hypotheses converging to the null at the parametric rate n -1 2 / given by\n\n\n\nfor some θ 0 ∈ Θ, where r ( q X,θ ( 0 )) represents directions of departure from H 0 , and n -1 2 / indicates the rate of convergence of H 1 n to H 0 . The function r : [0 , 1] → R is required to satisfy the following assumption.\n\nAssumption 3.4 The function r q ( ) is continuous in q and satisfies E | r q X, θ ( ( 0 )) | < ∞ .\n\nTheorem 3 Suppose Assumptions 3.1 -3.4 hold. Then, under the local alternatives H 1 n given by (3.4), we have\n\n\n\nwhere R p ∞ is the same Gaussian process as defined in Theorem 1, and ∆ r is a deterministic shift function given by\n\n\n\n/negationslash\n\nNote that, in general, the deterministic shift function ∆ r ( u ) = 0 for at least some u ∈ Π, implying that tests based on continuous even functionals of ˆ R p n ( ) · will have non-trivial power against local alternatives of the form in (3.4). A situation in which our tests will have trivial local power against such alternatives is when directions r q ( ( x, θ 0 )) are a linear combination of score function g x, θ ( 0 ), i.e. r q x, θ ( ( 0 )) = βg x, θ ( 0 ) for some β . In such a case, the limiting distribution of ˆ R p n ( u ) under H 0 and H 1 n is the same so that H 1 n cannot be detected. On the other hand, note that tests based on the local smoothing approach such as Shaikh et al. (2009) are not able to detect alternatives of the form (3.4).\n\n## 3.3 Computation of critical values\n\nFrom the above theorems, we see that the asymptotic distribution of continuous functionals Γ ( ˆ R p n ) depend on the underlying data generating process and of course on Γ ( ) itself. · Furthermore, the complicated covariance structure of K p ( · , · ) given in (3.1) does not allow for a\n\n16", + "recall": 0.895, + "true_md": "of view, the benefits of using our procedure can outweigh the costs in many relevant situations.\n\nNext, we study the performance of our projection-based tests under a sequence of local alter- native hypotheses converging to the null at the parametric rate n − 1 / 2 given by\n\n## 3.2.2 Power against local alternatives\n\nfor some θ$_{0}$ ∈ Θ, where r ( q ( X, θ$_{0}$ )) represents directions of departure from H$_{0}$ , and n − 1 / 2 indicates the rate of convergence of H$_{1}$$\\_{n}$ to H$\\_{0}$ . The function r : [0 , 1] → R is required to satisfy the following assumption.\n\nAssumption 3.4 The function r ( q ) is continuous in q and satisfies $^{E}$| r ( q ( X, θ$_{0}$ )) | < ∞ .\n\nTheorem 3 Suppose Assumptions 3.1 -3.4 hold. Then, under the local alternatives H$_{1}$$\\_{n}$ given by (3.4), we have\n\nwhere R p ∞ is the same Gaussian process as defined in Theorem 1, and Δ$_{r}$ is a deterministic shift function given by\n\nNote that, in general, the deterministic shift function Δ$_{r}$ ( u ) ̸ = 0 for at least some u ∈ Π, implying that tests based on continuous even functionals of ˆ R p $_{n}$( · ) will have non-trivial power against local alternatives of the form in (3.4). A situation in which our tests will have trivial local power against such alternatives is when directions r ( q ( x, θ$_{0}$ )) are a linear combination of score function g ( x, θ$_{0}$ ), i.e. r ( q ( x, θ$_{0}$ )) = βg ( x, θ$_{0}$ ) for some β . In such a case, the limiting distribution of ˆ R p $_{n}$( u ) under H$_{0}$ and H$_{1}$$\\_{n}$ is the same so that H$\\_{1}$$_{n}$ cannot be detected. On the other hand, note that tests based on the local smoothing approach such as Shaikh et al. (2009) are not able to detect alternatives of the form (3.4).\n\nFrom the above theorems, we see that the asymptotic distribution of continuous functionals Γ ( ˆ R p n ) depend on the underlying data generating process and of course on Γ ( · ) itself. Fur- thermore, the complicated covariance structure of K $^{p}$( · , · ) given in (3.1) does not allow for a\n\n## 3.3 Computation of critical values\n\n16\n\n$$Δ$_{r}$( u ) ≡ E [ r ( q ( X, θ$_{0}$ )) P 1 { q ( X, θ$_{0}$ ) ≤ u } ] .$$\n\n$$ˆ R p $_{n}$( u ) ⇒ R p ∞ + Δ$_{r}$ ,$$\n\n$$H$_{1}$$_{n}$ : E [ D − q ( X, θ$_{0}$ ) | q ( X, θ$_{0}$ )] = r ( q ( X, θ$_{0}$ )) √$_{n}$ a.s. (3.4)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5019717686457531, + "doc_id": "8cd810ceca8a4a2776951582b93c65f1a17fc0d0b52e6194fc71fcc1e42ba711", + "edit_distance": 0.3560732113144759, + "f1_score": 0.9301075268817204, + "meteor": 0.6532699427208515, + "precision": 0.9558011049723757, + "pred_md": "Ψ block may be written as\n\n\n\n## Timing Comparison\n\nWe have seen that C (Ψ block ) is at least quadratic in d , and technically cubic but with a small leading coefficient. Depending on the distributional structure of Θ, the density evaluations comprising C (Ψ scalar ) may be unwieldy. The relative magnitude of these competing terms is difficult to intuitively gauge, so to gain practical insight, we perform a timing study of the Ψ scalar (All Scalar) and Ψ block (All Blocked) algorithms. Three models involving no likelihood components are considered, with prior structures on Θ given as:\n\n- · θ i ∼ N( µ, σ ) for each θ i ∈ Θ\n- · θ i ∼ Gamma( α, β ) for each θ i ∈ Θ\n- · Θ ∼ N ( d µ, Σ)\n\nFigure 2 presents timing results measured in seconds per 10,000 iterations, plotted against dimension d , without consideration of algorithmic efficiency (section 2.2). There are a number of interesting features, which we briefly summarize. C (Ψ scalar ) is O d ( ) when each θ i independently follows a univariate distribution, and therefore ∑ d i =1 dens( θ i ) = dens(Θ) ≤ d K · , where K = max θ ∈ Θ dens( θ ). For all practical purposes, it appears that C (Ψ block ) is O d ( 2 ), as the cubic coefficient 1 / AI = 1 / 200 is relatively small. C (Ψ block ) is largely resilient to changes in the underlying distribution of Θ; univariate gamma densities are more costly than normal densities, as we would expect, and as for C (Ψ scalar ); and the multivariate normal structure even slightly more so. Perhaps most striking, C (Ψ scalar ) is O d ( 3 ) when the underlying distribution of Θ is multivariate, since each multivariate normal density evaluation is O d ( 2 ), which occurs d times for each iteration of Ψ scalar . Although both are cubic in d , C (Ψ scalar ) dwarfs C (Ψ block ) due to the difference in the leading cubic coefficients.\n\n12", + "recall": 0.9057591623036649, + "true_md": "Ψ$_{block}$ may be written as\n\nWe have seen that C (Ψ$_{block}$) is at least quadratic in d , and technically cubic but with a small lead- ing coefficient. Depending on the distributional structure of Θ, the density evaluations comprising C (Ψ$_{scalar}$) may be unwieldy. The relative magnitude of these competing terms is difficult to intu- itively gauge, so to gain practical insight, we perform a timing study of the Ψ$_{scalar}$ (All Scalar) and Ψ$_{block}$ (All Blocked) algorithms. Three models involving no likelihood components are considered, with prior structures on Θ given as:\n\n- • θ$_{i}$ ∼ N( µ, σ ) for each θ$_{i}$ ∈ Θ\n\n- • θ$_{i}$ ∼ Gamma( α, β ) for each θ$_{i}$ ∈ Θ\n\n- • Θ ∼ N$_{d}$( µ, Σ)\n\nFigure 2 presents timing results measured in seconds per 10,000 iterations, plotted against di- mension d , without consideration of algorithmic efficiency (section 2.2). There are a number of inter- esting features, which we briefly summarize. C (Ψ$_{scalar}$) is O ( d ) when each θ$_{i}$ independently follows a univariate distribution, and therefore ∑ d i $_{=1}$dens( θ$_{i}$ ) = dens(Θ) ≤ d · K , where K = max$_{θ}$$\\_{∈}$$_{Θ}$ dens( θ ). For all practical purposes, it appears that C (Ψ$_{block}$) is O ( d $^{2}$), as the cubic coefficient 1 / AI = 1 / 200 is relatively small. C (Ψ$_{block}$) is largely resilient to changes in the underlying distribution of Θ; univariate gamma densities are more costly than normal densities, as we would expect, and as for C (Ψ$_{scalar}$); and the multivariate normal structure even slightly more so. Perhaps most striking, C (Ψ$_{scalar}$) is O ( d $^{3}$) when the underlying distribution of Θ is multivariate, since each multivariate normal density evaluation is O ( d $^{2}$), which occurs d times for each iteration of Ψ$_{scalar}$. Although both are cubic in d , C (Ψ$_{scalar}$) dwarfs C (Ψ$_{block}$) due to the difference in the leading cubic coefficients.\n\n12\n\n$$C (Ψ$_{block}$) = dens(Θ ∪ Y ) + O ( d $^{3}$/ AI) + O ( d $^{2}$) .$$\n\n## Timing Comparison" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.3556634653432131, + "doc_id": "5d7de8ff938bd65de986ba2f127e7686b0115e0d5a53f42f6b5e9fe8cc3e7cd2", + "edit_distance": 0.5225334957369062, + "f1_score": 0.9061662198391421, + "meteor": 0.4790276106548002, + "precision": 0.949438202247191, + "pred_md": "simple representation of R p ∞ in terms of a well-known distribution-free Gaussian process for which critical values are readily available. To overcome this problem, we propose to compute critical values with the assistance of a multiplier bootstrap. The proposed procedure has good theoretical and empirical properties, is computationally easy to implement, and does not require computing new parameter estimates at each bootstrap replication.\n\nMore precisely, in order to estimate the critical values, we propose to approximate the asymptotic behavior of ˆ R p n ( u ) by that of\n\n\n\nwhere { V i } n i =1 is a sequence of i.i.d. random variables with zero mean, unit variance and bounded support, independent of the original sample { ( D , X i ' i ) ' } n i =1 . A popular example involves i.i.d. Bernoulli variates { V i } with P ( V = 1 -κ ) = κ/ √ 5 and P ( V = κ ) = 1 -κ/ √ 5, where κ = √ 5 + 1 / , 2 as suggested by Mammen (1993).\n\n( ) With ˆ R p ∗ n ( u ) at hands, the bootstrapped version of our test statistics Γ ( ˆ R p n ) is simply given by Γ ( ˆ R p, ∗ n ) . For instance, the bootstrapped versions of CvM n and KS n in (2.8) and (2.9), respectively, are given by\n\n\n\nThe asymptotic critical values are then estimated by\n\n\n\nwhere P ∗ n means bootstrap probability, i.e. conditional on the original sample { ( D , X i ' i ) ' } n i =1 . In practice, c Γ ∗ n,α is approximated as accurately as desired by ( Γ ( ˆ R p, ∗ n )) B (1 -α ) , the B (1 -α ) -th order statistic from B replicates {( Γ ( ˆ R p, ∗ n )) } l B l =1 of Γ ( ˆ R p, ∗ n ) .\n\nThe next theorem establishes the asymptotic validity of the multiplier bootstrap procedure proposed above.\n\nTheorem 4 Assume Assumptions 3.1-3.3. Then,\n\n\n\nwhere R p ∞ is the Gaussian process defined in Theorem 1, and ⇒ ∗ denotes the weak convergence\n\n17", + "recall": 0.8666666666666667, + "true_md": "simple representation of R p ∞ in terms of a well-known distribution-free Gaussian process for which critical values are readily available. To overcome this problem, we propose to compute critical values with the assistance of a multiplier bootstrap. The proposed procedure has good theoretical and empirical properties, is computationally easy to implement, and does not require computing new parameter estimates at each bootstrap replication.\n\nMore precisely, in order to estimate the critical values, we propose to approximate the asymptotic behavior of ˆ R p $_{n}$( u ) by that of\n\nwhere { V$_{i}$ } n i =1 is a sequence of i.i.d. random variables with zero mean, unit variance and bounded support, independent of the original sample { ( D$_{i}$, X ′ $_{i}$) $^{′}$} n i $_{=1}$. A popular example involves i.i.d. Bernoulli variates { V$_{i}$ } with P ( V = 1 − κ ) = $_{κ/}$√$_{5 and}$ P ( V = κ ) = 1 − $_{κ/}$√$_{5, where}$ κ = ( $^{√$\\_{5 + 1}$}$) / 2 , as suggested by Mammen (1993). With ˆ R p ∗ n ( u ) at hands, the bootstrapped version of our test statistics Γ ( ˆ R p n ) is simply\n\n( $^{√$\\_{5 + 1}$}$) With ˆ R p ∗ n ( u ) at hands, the bootstrapped version of our test statistics Γ ( ˆ R p n ) is simply given by Γ ( ˆ R p, ∗ n ) . For instance, the bootstrapped versions of CvM$_{n}$ and KS$_{n}$ in (2.8) and (2.9), respectively, are given by\n\n$$ˆ R p ∗ n ( u ) ≡ 1 √$_{n}$ n ∑ i =1 ε$_{i}$ ( ˆ θ$_{n}$ ) P $_{n}$1 { q ( X$_{i}$, ˆ θ$_{n}$ ) ≤ u } V$_{i}$, (3.5)$$\n\n$$CvM ∗ n = 1 n n ∑ i =1 [ ˆ R p ∗ n ( q ( X$_{i}$, ˆ θ$_{n}$ ))] $^{2}$, KS ∗ n = sup u ∈ Π ∣ ˆ R p ∗ n ( u ) ∣ .$$\n\n$$c Γ ∗ n,α ≡ inf { c$_{α}$ ∈ [0 , ∞ ) : lim n $_{→∞}$P ∗ n { Γ ( ˆ R p, ∗ n ) > c$_{α}$ } = α } ,$$\n\n$$ˆ R p ∗ n ⇒ ∗ R p ∞ a.s. ,$$\n\nThe asymptotic critical values are then estimated by\n\nwhere P ∗ n means bootstrap probability, i.e. conditional on the original sample { ( D$_{i}$, X ′ $_{i}$) $^{′}$} n i $_{=1}$. In practice, c Γ ∗ n,α is approximated as accurately as desired by ( Γ ( ˆ R p, ∗ n )) B (1 − α $_{)}$, the B (1 − α ) − th order statistic from B replicates {( Γ ( ˆ R p, ∗ n )) l } B l =1 of Γ ( ˆ R p, ∗ n ) . The next theorem establishes the asymptotic validity of the multiplier bootstrap procedure\n\n{( ( )) } ( ) The next theorem establishes the asymptotic validity of the multiplier bootstrap procedure proposed above.\n\nTheorem 4 Assume Assumptions 3.1-3.3. Then,\n\nwhere R p ∞ is the Gaussian process defined in Theorem 1, and ⇒ ∗ denotes the weak convergence\n\n17" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8168629210136031, + "doc_id": "a22bde52e0b30a6dd321ed7db678840c3e237c15fa76c916b238ce7b826f02df", + "edit_distance": 0.14262023217247097, + "f1_score": 0.9533898305084745, + "meteor": 0.8944813697390079, + "precision": 0.9698275862068966, + "pred_md": "with our asymptotic results. Finally, our empirical application concerning the effect of trade on the environment shows the feasibility and appeal of our tests in relevant scenarios. Given that the validity of many policy evaluation procedures relies on the correct specification of the propensity score, we argue that the tests proposed in this article are important additions to the applied researchers' toolkit.\n\nWe would like to mention that, in general, our tests should be seen as a 'model validation' and not a 'model selection' procedure. Once a propensity score model is selected, our specification tests can provide evidence of its reliability or lack thereof. In case the putative propensity score model is rejected, one can consider more flexible specifications. For instance, one can add additional interaction terms into the original model, consider semiparametric single-index or partially linear models, among other possible strategies. Having said so, we emphasize that if one uses our testing procedure as a 'model selection' device, one must bear in mind that standard inference procedures for treatment effects may be invalid if one treats the resulting selected propensity score as the 'true' one, see e.g. Leeb and Potscher (2005). Thus, in case one uses our proposal for model selection, one must account for the model selection step in order to make valid inference about the treatment effect, see e.g. Belloni et al. (2014), Chernozhukov et al. (2016), and Belloni et al. (2017). A full discussion of this procedure is beyond the scope of this article and we leave it for future research.\n\nFinally, we note that results in Lemma 1 can also be used for estimating the propensity score such that, for a given specification q ( X,θ 0 ), condition E [ D -q ( X,θ 0 ) | q ( X,θ 0 )] = 0 a.s. is directly imposed. One could use the minimum distance method described in Dominguez and Lobato (2004) to estimate θ 0 , for example. A detailed discussion of this estimator is beyond the scope of this article and is deferred to future work.\n\n## Appendix A: Mathematical Proofs\n\nWe provide the proofs of our main theoretical results in this appendix. We first prove Lemma 1.\n\nProof of Lemma 1: To begin, let F ( u ) = P ( p ( X ) ≤ u ), and for d = { 0 1 , } , F d ( u ) = P ( p ( X ) ≤ u D | = d ) . Denote the density of F ( u ), F 1 ( u ) and F 0 ( u ) by f ( u ), f 1 ( u ), and f 0 ( u ). The proof of (2.1) follows from Lemma 3.1 in Shaikh et al. (2009), as they proved that, for all\n\n30", + "recall": 0.9375, + "true_md": "with our asymptotic results. Finally, our empirical application concerning the effect of trade on the environment shows the feasibility and appeal of our tests in relevant scenarios. Given that the validity of many policy evaluation procedures relies on the correct specification of the propensity score, we argue that the tests proposed in this article are important additions to the applied researchers’ toolkit.\n\nWe would like to mention that, in general, our tests should be seen as a “model validation” and not a “model selection” procedure. Once a propensity score model is selected, our specifica- tion tests can provide evidence of its reliability or lack thereof. In case the putative propensity score model is rejected, one can consider more flexible specifications. For instance, one can add additional interaction terms into the original model, consider semiparametric single-index or partially linear models, among other possible strategies. Having said so, we emphasize that if one uses our testing procedure as a “model selection” device, one must bear in mind that stan- dard inference procedures for treatment effects may be invalid if one treats the resulting selected propensity score as the “true” one, see e.g. Leeb and P¨ otscher (2005). Thus, in case one uses our proposal for model selection, one must account for the model selection step in order to make valid inference about the treatment effect, see e.g. Belloni et al. (2014), Chernozhukov et al. (2016), and Belloni et al. (2017). A full discussion of this procedure is beyond the scope of this article and we leave it for future research.\n\nFinally, we note that results in Lemma 1 can also be used for estimating the propensity score such that, for a given specification q ( X, θ$_{0}$ ), condition E [ D − q ( X, θ$_{0}$ ) | q ( X, θ$_{0}$ )] = 0 a.s. is di- rectly imposed. One could use the minimum distance method described in Dominguez and Lobato (2004) to estimate θ$_{0}$ , for example. A detailed discussion of this estimator is beyond the scope of this article and is deferred to future work.\n\nWe provide the proofs of our main theoretical results in this appendix. We first prove Lemma 1.\n\nProof of Lemma 1: To begin, let F ( u ) = P ( p ( X ) ≤ u ), and for d = { 0 , 1 } , F$_{d}$ ( u ) = P ( p ( X ) ≤ u | D = d ) . Denote the density of F ( u ), F$_{1}$ ( u ) and F$_{0}$ ( u ) by f ( u ), f$_{1}$ ( u ), and f$_{0}$ ( u ). The proof of (2.1) follows from Lemma 3.1 in Shaikh et al. (2009), as they proved that, for all\n\n30\n\n## Appendix A: Mathematical Proofs" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9204590558416872, + "doc_id": "e13cac23ce876dde4e47045413f06454bfa3c34ffb32dbd9c26c8ac0740e3ca9", + "edit_distance": 0.04736842105263158, + "f1_score": 0.9565217391304348, + "meteor": 0.9578799436198341, + "precision": 0.9705882352941176, + "pred_md": "Jutla, I. S., Jeub, L. G., Mucha, P. J., 2011. A generalized louvain method for community detection implemented in matlab. URL http://netwiki. amath. unc. edu/GenLouvain.\n\nKarahano˘ glu, F. I., Van De Ville, D., 2015. Transient brain activity disentangles fmri resting-state dynamics in terms of spatially and temporally overlapping networks. Nature communications 6.\n\nKopell, N. J., Gritton, H. J., Whittington, M. A., Kramer, M. A., 2014. Beyond the connectome: the dynome. Neuron 83 (6), 1319-1328.\n\nKramer, M. A., Eden, U. T., Lepage, K. Q., Kolaczyk, E. D., Bianchi, M. T., Cash, S. S., 2011. Emergence of persistent networks in long-term intracranial EEG recordings. The Journal of Neuroscience 31 (44), 15757-15767.\n\nKucyi, A., Davis, K. D., 2014. Dynamic functional connectivity of the default mode network tracks daydreaming. Neuroimage 100, 471-480.\n\nLancichinetti, A., Fortunato, S., 2012. Consensus clustering in complex networks. Scientific reports 2.\n\nLaumann, T. O., Gordon, E. M., Adeyemo, B., Snyder, A. Z., Joo, S. J., Chen, M.-Y., Gilmore, A. W., McDermott, K. B., Nelson, S. M., Dosenbach, N. U., et al., 2015. Functional system and areal organization of a highly sampled individual human brain. Neuron, doi:10.1016/j.neuron.2015.06.037.\n\nLeonardi, N., Richiardi, J., Gschwind, M., Simioni, S., Annoni, J.-M., Schluep, M., Vuilleumier, P., Van De Ville, D., 2013. Principal components of functional connectivity: a new approach to study dynamic brain connectivity during rest. NeuroImage 83, 937-950.\n\nLeonardi, N., Van De Ville, D., 2015. On spurious and real fluctuations of dynamic functional connectivity during rest. Neuroimage 104, 430-436.\n\n33", + "recall": 0.9428571428571428, + "true_md": "- Jutla, I. S., Jeub, L. G., Mucha, P. J., 2011. A generalized louvain method for community detection implemented in matlab. URL http://netwiki. amath. unc. edu/GenLouvain.\n\n- Karahano˘ glu, F. I., Van De Ville, D., 2015. Transient brain activity disentangles fmri resting-state dynamics in terms of spatially and temporally overlapping networks. Nature communications 6.\n\n- Kopell, N. J., Gritton, H. J., Whittington, M. A., Kramer, M. A., 2014. Beyond the connectome: the dynome. Neuron 83 (6), 1319–1328.\n\n- Kramer, M. A., Eden, U. T., Lepage, K. Q., Kolaczyk, E. D., Bianchi, M. T., Cash, S. S., 2011. Emergence of persistent networks in long-term intracranial EEG recordings. The Journal of Neuroscience 31 (44), 15757–15767.\n\n- Kucyi, A., Davis, K. D., 2014. Dynamic functional connectivity of the default mode network tracks daydreaming. Neuroimage 100, 471–480.\n\n- Lancichinetti, A., Fortunato, S., 2012. Consensus clustering in complex net- works. Scientific reports 2.\n\n- Laumann, T. O., Gordon, E. M., Adeyemo, B., Snyder, A. Z., Joo, S. J., Chen, M.-Y., Gilmore, A. W., McDermott, K. B., Nelson, S. M., Dosenbach, N. U., et al., 2015. Functional system and areal organization of a highly sampled individual human brain. Neuron, doi:10.1016/j.neuron.2015.06.037.\n\n- Leonardi, N., Richiardi, J., Gschwind, M., Simioni, S., Annoni, J.-M., Schluep, M., Vuilleumier, P., Van De Ville, D., 2013. Principal components of func- tional connectivity: a new approach to study dynamic brain connectivity during rest. NeuroImage 83, 937–950.\n\n- Leonardi, N., Van De Ville, D., 2015. On spurious and real fluctuations of dynamic functional connectivity during rest. Neuroimage 104, 430–436.\n\n33" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7073033871525581, + "doc_id": "58ad3955ab74a6480bd4b9115a9742ed68ec5e72b81ee7c3a062dd14361d75be", + "edit_distance": 0.3202511773940345, + "f1_score": 0.9539295392953929, + "meteor": 0.8001577237045483, + "precision": 0.9565217391304348, + "pred_md": "Figure 6: The red orbit of system (4.50) non-axially grazes the surface Γ . The magenta trajectory with initial point (0 , 1 32) . approaches the cycle as time increases. The green cycle with initial point (0 , 0 96) . demonstrates the inside stability of the grazing orbit.\n\nFigure 6: The red orbit of system (4.50) non-axially grazes the surface Γ . The magenta trajectory with initial point (0 , 1 32) . approaches the cycle as time increases. The green cycle with initial point (0 , 0 96) . demonstrates the inside stability of the grazing orbit.\n\n## 5 Small parameter analysis and grazing bifurcation\n\nIn this part, we will discuss existence and bifurcation of cycles for perturbed systems, if the generating one admits a grazing periodic solution. In continuous dynamical systems, a small parameter may cause a change in the number of periodic solutions in critical cases. In the present analysis, we will demonstrate that the change may happen in non-critical cases, since of the non-transversality. That is why, one can say that grazing bifurcation is under discussion. Let us deal with the following system\n\n\n\nwhere x ∈ R n , t ∈ R , Γ( µ ) = { x | Φ( x )+ µφ x, µ ( ) = 0 } , µ ∈ -( µ , µ 0 0 ) , and µ 0 is a sufficiently small positive number. Functions f ( x , I ) ( x ) and Φ( x ) are continuously differentiable up to second order, g x, µ , K ( ) ( x, µ ) are continuously differentiable in x and µ. The function φ x, µ ( ) is continuously differentiable in x up to second order and to first order in µ. We assume that the generating system for (5.57) is the system (2.1) with all conditions assumed for the system, earlier. The main assumption of this section is that (2.1) admits a ω -periodic solution, Ψ( ) t . Let Ψ(0) = ( ζ 0 1 , ζ 0 2 , . . . , ζ 0 n ) be the initial value of the solution.\n\nOur aim is to find conditions that verify the existence of periodic solutions of (5.57) with a period T such that for µ = 0 , the periodic solutions of (5.57) are turned down to Ψ( ) t . It is common for the autonomous systems that the period T does not coincide with ω. Thus, in the remaining part of the paper, we will consider the period T as an unknown variable.\n\n/negationslash\n\nSince Ψ(0) is not an equilibrium, there is a number j = 1 2 , , . . . , n, such that f j ( ζ 0 1 , ζ 0 1 , . . . , ζ 0 n ) = 0 . In other words, the vector field is transversal to line x j = ζ 0 j near the point. Hence, to try points near to\n\n31", + "recall": 0.9513513513513514, + "true_md": "Figure 6: The red orbit of system (4.50) non-axially grazes the surface Γ . The magenta trajectory with initial point (0 , 1 . 32) approaches the cycle as time increases. The green cycle with initial point (0 , 0 . 96) demonstrates the inside stability of the grazing orbit.\n\n## 5 Small parameter analysis and grazing bifurcation\n\nIn this part, we will discuss existence and bifurcation of cycles for perturbed systems, if the generating one admits a grazing periodic solution. In continuous dynamical systems, a small parameter may cause a change in the number of periodic solutions in critical cases. In the present analysis, we will demonstrate that the change may happen in non-critical cases, since of the non-transversality. That is why, one can say that grazing bifurcation is under discussion. Let us deal with the following system\n\nwhere x ∈ R $^{n}$, t ∈ $^{R}$, Γ( µ ) = { x | Φ( x )+ µφ ( x, µ ) = 0 } , µ ∈ ( − µ$_{0}$, µ$_{0}$ ) , and µ$_{0}$ is a sufficiently small positive number. Functions f ( x ) , I ( x ) and Φ( x ) are continuously differentiable up to second order, g ( x, µ ) , K ( x, µ ) are continuously differentiable in x and µ. The function φ ( x, µ ) is continuously differentiable in x up to second order and to first order in µ. We assume that the generating system for (5.57) is the system (2.1) with all conditions assumed for the system, earlier. The main assumption of this section is that (2.1) admits a ω − periodic solution, Ψ( t ) . Let Ψ(0) = ( ζ 0 $_{1}$, ζ 0 $_{2}$, . . . , ζ 0 $_{n}$) be the initial value of the solution.\n\nOur aim is to find conditions that verify the existence of periodic solutions of (5.57) with a period T such that for µ = 0 , the periodic solutions of (5.57) are turned down to Ψ( t ) . It is common for the autonomous systems that the period T does not coincide with ω. Thus, in the remaining part of the paper, we will consider the period T as an unknown variable.\n\nSince Ψ(0) is not an equilibrium, there is a number j = 1 , 2 , . . . , n, such that f$_{j}$ ( ζ 0 $_{1}$, ζ 0 $_{1}$, . . . , ζ 0 $_{n}$) ̸ = 0 . In other words, the vector field is transversal to line x$_{j}$ = ζ 0 j near the point. Hence, to try points near to\n\n$$x ′ = f ( x ) + µg ( x, µ ) , Δ x | $^{x}$∈ Γ( µ ) = I ( x ) + µK ( x, µ ) , (5.57)$$\n\n31" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9211240704359626, + "doc_id": "52d4f6a2f2d3028ec4a3cec9183d14b1c832e8da7e8ec21ec20b23b40cbce2f1", + "edit_distance": 0.06487695749440715, + "f1_score": 0.9521640091116172, + "meteor": 0.9556912157592412, + "precision": 0.9812206572769953, + "pred_md": "depletion represents nearly 15% of the mean energy depletion among countries in the sample. Interestingly, the ATT on energy depletion is statistically significant at 10% level under Spec1 , but not under Spec2 , highlighting that propensity score misspecifications can also lead to invalid inference. Finally, we note that although our tests do not detect propensity score misspecification for the rural and urban water access, the results suggest that GATT/WTO membership is not statistically significant using either propensity score specification, perhaps because of the relatively high standard errors due to the limited sample size.\n\nOverall, we find that propensity score misspecifications can affect both the economic and statistical conclusions about the effect of GATT/WTO membership on environmental quality. When the propensity score is correctly specified, our results suggest that GATT/WTO membership is associated with improved environmental performance in terms of CO 2 and energy depletion but not in terms of rural and urban water access. We also find that GATT/WTO membership is associated with higher deforestation, though the statistical evidence is relatively weaker. Furthermore, our results uncover interesting heterogeneity, as the aforementioned results are statistically significant for the overall population ( ATE ) but not for the treated-subpopulation ( ATT ).\n\n## 6 Conclusion\n\nIn this article, we have shown that, when propensity scores are correctly specified, a particular restriction between the propensity score CDFs of treated and control groups must hold. Based on such restriction, we propose new nonparametric projection-based tests for the correct specification of the propensity score. In contrast to other proposals, our tests are not severely affected by the 'curse of dimensionality'', are not sensitive to the different estimation methods used to estimate the propensity score under the null, do not rely on the potentially ad hoc choice of bandwidths, and enjoy some optimal power properties against particular classes of alternative hypotheses. We have derived the asymptotic properties of the proposed tests, and have proved that they are able to detect local alternatives converging to the null at the parametric rate, and that critical values can be easily computed via a simple multiplier bootstrap procedure. Our Monte Carlo simulation study illustrates that, for a large class of alternatives, our projectionbased tests perform better in finite samples than existing tests, though there are some classes of alternatives in which our tests have trivial power. All these finite sample findings are in line\n\n29", + "recall": 0.9247787610619469, + "true_md": "depletion represents nearly 15% of the mean energy depletion among countries in the sample. Interestingly, the ATT on energy depletion is statistically significant at 10% level under Spec1 , but not under Spec2 , highlighting that propensity score misspecifications can also lead to invalid inference. Finally, we note that although our tests do not detect propensity score misspecifica- tion for the rural and urban water access, the results suggest that GATT/WTO membership is not statistically significant using either propensity score specification, perhaps because of the relatively high standard errors due to the limited sample size.\n\nOverall, we find that propensity score misspecifications can affect both the economic and statistical conclusions about the effect of GATT/WTO membership on environmental quality. When the propensity score is correctly specified, our results suggest that GATT/WTO member- ship is associated with improved environmental performance in terms of CO$_{2}$ and energy deple- tion but not in terms of rural and urban water access. We also find that GATT/WTO member- ship is associated with higher deforestation, though the statistical evidence is relatively weaker. Furthermore, our results uncover interesting heterogeneity, as the aforementioned results are statistically significant for the overall population ( ATE ) but not for the treated-subpopulation ( ATT ).\n\nIn this article, we have shown that, when propensity scores are correctly specified, a particular restriction between the propensity score CDFs of treated and control groups must hold. Based on such restriction, we propose new nonparametric projection-based tests for the correct specifi- cation of the propensity score. In contrast to other proposals, our tests are not severely affected by the “curse of dimensionality”’, are not sensitive to the different estimation methods used to estimate the propensity score under the null, do not rely on the potentially ad hoc choice of bandwidths, and enjoy some optimal power properties against particular classes of alternative hypotheses. We have derived the asymptotic properties of the proposed tests, and have proved that they are able to detect local alternatives converging to the null at the parametric rate, and that critical values can be easily computed via a simple multiplier bootstrap procedure. Our Monte Carlo simulation study illustrates that, for a large class of alternatives, our projection- based tests perform better in finite samples than existing tests, though there are some classes of alternatives in which our tests have trivial power. All these finite sample findings are in line\n\n29\n\n## 6 Conclusion" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5126849652100196, + "doc_id": "8e1ce1be42bd88a5caff8ba57bab5522c1e3ad6dc6c2cbd4516129244562e892", + "edit_distance": 0.3990963855421687, + "f1_score": 0.952662721893491, + "meteor": 0.6368109331860416, + "precision": 0.9583333333333334, + "pred_md": "## 3.2 Economic Examples\n\nIn this subsection, I derive sharp bounds on the DTE for concrete economic examples from the general characterization in Theorem 1. As economic examples, MTR, concave treatment response, convex treatment response, and the Roy model of self-selection are discussed.\n\n## 3.2.1 Monotone Treatment Response\n\nSince the seminal work of Manski (1997), it has been widely recognized that MTR has an interesting identifying power for treatment effects parameters. MTR only requires that the potential outcomes be weakly monotone in treatment with probability one:\n\n\n\nHis bounds on the DTE under MTR are obtained as follows: for δ < 0 , F ∆ ( δ ) = 0 , and for δ ≥ 0 ,\n\n\n\nwhere p = Pr( D = 1) , and y L 0 is the support infimum of Y 0 while y U 1 is the support supremum of Y . 1 He did not impose any other condition such as given marginal distributions of Y 0 and Y 1 . Note that MTR has no identifying power on the DTE in the binary treatment setting without additional information. Since MTR restricts only the lowest possible value of Y 1 -Y 0 as zero, the upper bound is trivially obtained as one for any δ ≥ 0. Similarly, MTR is uninformative for the lower bound, since MTR does not restrict the highest possible value of Y 1 -Y 0 . 10 Furthermore, when the support of each potential outcome is given as R , they yield completely uninformative upper and lower bounds [0 1] , .\n\nHowever, I show that given marginal distribution functions F 0 and F 1 , MTR has substantial identifying power for the lower bound on the DTE.\n\nCorollary 1 Suppose that Pr( Y 1 = Y 0 ) = 0 . Under MTR, sharp bounds on the DTE are given as follows: for any δ ∈ R ,\n\n\n\n10 Note that Y 1 is observed for the treated and Y 0 is observed for the untreated groups. For the treated, the highest possible value is Y -Y L 0 , while it is Y U 1 -Y for the untreated. The lower bound is achieved when Pr( Y 0 = y L 0 | D = 1) = 1 and ( Y 1 = y U 1 | D = 0) = 1 .\n\n19", + "recall": 0.9470588235294117, + "true_md": "## 3.2 Economic Examples\n\n## 3.2.1 Monotone Treatment Response\n\nIn this subsection, I derive sharp bounds on the DTE for concrete economic examples from the general characterization in Theorem 1. As economic examples, MTR, concave treatment response, convex treatment response, and the Roy model of self-selection are discussed.\n\nSince the seminal work of Manski (1997), it has been widely recognized that MTR has an interesting identifying power for treatment effects parameters. MTR only requires that the potential outcomes be weakly monotone in treatment with probability one:\n\nHis bounds on the DTE under MTR are obtained as follows: for δ < 0 , F$_{Δ}$ ( δ ) = 0 , and for δ ≥ 0 ,\n\nwhere p = Pr ( D = 1) , and y L 0 is the support infimum of Y$_{0}$ while y U 1 is the support supremum of Y$_{1}$. He did not impose any other condition such as given marginal distributions of Y$_{0}$ and Y$_{1}$ . Note that MTR has no identifying power on the DTE in the binary treatment setting without additional information. Since MTR restricts only the lowest possible value of Y$_{1}$ − Y$_{0}$ as zero, the upper bound is trivially obtained as one for any δ ≥ 0. Similarly, MTR is uninformative for the lower bound, since MTR does not restrict the highest possible value of Y$_{1}$ − Y$_{0}$ . 10 Furthermore, when the support of each potential outcome is given as $_{R}$, they yield completely uninformative upper and lower bounds [0 , 1] .\n\nHowever, I show that given marginal distribution functions F$_{0}$ and F$_{1}$ , MTR has substantial identifying power for the lower bound on the DTE.\n\nCorollary 1 Suppose that Pr ( Y$_{1}$ = Y$_{0}$ ) = 0 . Under MTR, sharp bounds on the DTE are given as follows: for any δ ∈$_{R}$ ,\n\n$^{10}$Note that Y$_{1}$ is observed for the treated and Y$_{0}$ is observed for the untreated groups. For the treated, the highest possible value is Y − Y L 0 , while it is Y U 1 − Y for the untreated. The lower bound is achieved when Pr( Y$_{0}$ = y L 0 | D = 1) = 1 and ( Y$_{1}$ = y U 1 | D = 0) = 1 .\n\n19\n\n$$F L Δ ( δ ) ≤ F$_{Δ}$ ( δ ) ≤ F U Δ ( δ ) ,$$\n\n$$Pr $^{(}$Y − y L 0 ≤ δ | D = 1 $^{)}$p + Pr $^{(}$y U 1 − Y ≤ δ | D = 0 $^{)}$(1 − p ) ≤ F$_{Δ}$ ( δ ) ≤ 1 ,$$\n\n$$Pr ( Y$_{1}$ ≥ Y$_{0}$ ) = 1 .$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.013052947951580093, + "doc_id": "1b6a73e9357caf440023d0c0b20f5e45626b42119bfd3feebc08a0bcb40eb279", + "edit_distance": 0.8695271453590193, + "f1_score": 0.8059701492537313, + "meteor": 0.15522721772928985, + "precision": 0.9101123595505618, + "pred_md": "\n\nfollowing similar arguments in proving the negligibility of C 2 n . Hence C 3 n = O p ( n -1 2 / ) = o p (1).\n\nThis ends the proof of Lemma A.5. /square\n\nThe next two lemmas establish the (uniform) convergence of G n ( u, θ ˆ n ) and ∆ -1 n ( ˆ θ n ) to G u,θ ( 0 ) and ∆ -1 ( θ 0 ), respectively.\n\nLemma A.6 Under Assumptions 3.1-3.3, we have\n\n\n\nProof of Lemma A.6: The proof follows directly from the ULLN of Newey and McFadden (1994). /square\n\nLemma A.7 Under Assumptions 3.1-3.2, we have\n\n\n\nProof of Lemma A.7: The proof follows from the ULLN of Newey and McFadden (1994) and the continuous mapping theorem. /square\n\nNow, we are ready to proceed with the proofs of our main theorems.\n\nProof of Theorem 1: By a straightforward decomposition, we have\n\n\n\nBy Lemmas A.4-A.7, we have that\n\n\n\n38", + "recall": 0.7232142857142857, + "true_md": "following similar arguments in proving the negligibility of C$_{2}$$\\_{n}$ . Hence C$\\_{3}$$_{n}$ = O$_{p}$ ( n − 1 / $^{2}$) = o$_{p}$ (1). This ends the proof of Lemma A.5. □\n\nThe next two lemmas establish the (uniform) convergence of G$_{n}$ ( u, ˆ θ$_{n}$ ) and Δ − 1 n ( ˆ θ$_{n}$ ) to G ( u, θ$_{0}$ ) and Δ − $^{1}$( θ$_{0}$ ), respectively.\n\nLemma A.6 Under Assumptions 3.1-3.3, we have\n\nProof of Lemma A.6: The proof follows directly from the ULLN of Newey and McFadden (1994). □\n\nLemma A.7 Under Assumptions 3.1-3.2, we have\n\nProof of Lemma A.7: The proof follows from the ULLN of Newey and McFadden (1994) and the continuous mapping theorem. □\n\nNow, we are ready to proceed with the proofs of our main theorems.\n\nProof of Theorem 1: By a straightforward decomposition, we have\n\nBy Lemmas A.4-A.7, we have that\n\n38\n\n$$= − √$_{n}$$_{(}$ ˆ θ$_{n}$ − θ$_{0}$ ) $^{′}$E [ g ( X, θ$_{0}$ ) ∂g ( X, θ$_{0}$ ) ∂θ ′ ] √$_{n}$$_{(}$ ˆ θ$_{n}$ − θ$_{0}$ ) + o$_{p}$ (1) = O$_{p}$ (1) ,$$\n\n$$sup u ∈ Π ∣ G$_{n}$ ( u, ˆ θ$_{n}$ ) − G ( u, θ$_{0}$ ) ∣ = o$_{p}$ (1) .$$\n\n$$Δ − 1 n ( ˆ θ$_{n}$ ) = Δ − $^{1}$( θ$_{0}$ ) + o$_{p}$ (1) .$$\n\n$$ˆ R p $_{n}$( u ) = 1 √$_{n}$ n ∑ i =1 ε$_{i}$ ( ˆ θ$_{n}$ ) ( 1 { q ( X$_{i}$, ˆ θ$_{n}$ ) ≤ u } − g $^{′}$( X$_{i}$, ˆ θ$_{n}$ )Δ − 1 n ( ˆ θ$_{n}$ ) G$_{n}$ ( u, ˆ θ$_{n}$ ) = ˆ R$_{n}$ ( u ) − G ′ $_{n}$( u, ˆ θ$_{n}$ )Δ − 1 n ( ˆ θ$_{n}$ ) 1 √$_{n}$ n ∑ i =1 ε$_{i}$ ( ˆ θ$_{n}$ ) g ( X$_{i}$, ˆ θ$_{n}$ ) := ˆ R$_{n}$ ( u ) − G ′ $_{n}$( u, ˆ θ$_{n}$ )Δ − 1 n ( ˆ θ$_{n}$ ) ˆ S$_{n}$.$$\n\n$$ˆ R p $_{n}$( u ) = 1 √$_{n}$ n ∑ i =1 ε$_{i}$ ( θ$_{0}$ )1 { q ( X$_{i}$, θ$_{0}$ ) ≤ u } − G $^{′}$( u, θ$_{0}$ $_{)}$√$_{n}$$_{(}$ ˆ θ$_{n}$ − θ$_{0}$ ) − G $^{′}$( u, θ$_{0}$ )Δ − $^{1}$( θ$_{0}$ ) [ 1 √$_{n}$ n ∑ i =1 ε$_{i}$ ( θ$_{0}$ ) g ( X$_{i}$, θ$_{0}$ ) − Δ( θ$_{0}$ $_{)}$√$_{n}$$_{(}$ ˆ θ$_{n}$ − θ$_{0}$ ) ] + o$_{p}$ (1) = 1 √$_{n}$ n ∑ i =1 ε$_{i}$ ( θ$_{0}$ ) ( 1 { q ( X$_{i}$, θ$_{0}$ ) ≤ u } − G $^{′}$( u, θ$_{0}$ )Δ − $^{1}$( θ$_{0}$ ) g ( X$_{i}$, θ$_{0}$ ) + o$_{p}$ (1)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6341634275014096, + "doc_id": "78b7be8df61d6f73b4862407401f7684cf74b51f1c88ec057754ff3c8f8da26f", + "edit_distance": 0.654320987654321, + "f1_score": 0.9204545454545455, + "meteor": 0.6322934395401546, + "precision": 0.9364161849710982, + "pred_md": "The solution ¯( ) x t has a linerization with respect to solution x 0 ( ) t if the condition ( A ) is valid and, moreover, if the point x 0 ( θ i ) is of ( α ) -or ( β ) -type, then the condition ( B ) is fulfilled. For the case x 0 ( θ i ) is of ( γ ) -type the condition ( C ) is true.\n\nThe solution x 0 ( ) t is K -differentiable with respect to the initial value x 0 on [0 , b ] if for each solution ¯( ) x t with sufficiently small ∆ x the linearization exists. The functions u i ( ) t and ν ij depend on ∆ x and uniformly bounded on a neighborhood of x . 0\n\nIt is easy to see that the differentiability implies B -continuous dependence on solutions to initial data.\n\nDefine the map ζ ( t, x ) as ζ ( t, x ) = x t, ( 0 , x ) , for x ∈ D.\n\nA K -smooth discontinuous flow is a map ζ ( t, x ) : R × D → D, which satisfies the following properties:\n\n- (I) The group property:\n- (i) ζ (0 , x ) : D → D is the identity;\n- (ii) ζ ( t, ζ ( s, x )) = ζ ( t + s, x ) is valid for all t, s ∈ R and x ∈ D.\n- (II) ζ ( t, x ) ∈ PC 1 ( R ) for each fixed x ∈ D.\n- (III) ζ ( t, x ) is K -differentiable in x ∈ D on [ a, b ] ⊂ R for each a, b such that the discontinuity points of ζ ( t, x ) are interior points of [ a, b . ]\n\nIn [1], it was proved that if the conditions of Theorem 2.1 and (C1)-(C10) are fulfilled, then system (2.1) defines a B -smooth discontinuous flow [1] if there is no grazing points for the dynamics. It is easy to observe that the B -smooth discontinuous flow is a subcase of the K -smooth discontinuous flow. In the next section, we will construct a variational system for (2.1) in the neighborhood of grazing orbits. That is, we will assume that some of the discontinuity points are ( γ ) -type points. Linearization around a solution and its stability will be taken into account. Thus, analysis of the discontinuous dynamical systems with grazing points will be completed.\n\n## 3 Linearization around grazing orbits and discontinuous dynamics\n\nThe object of this section is to verify K -differentiability of the grazing solution. Consider a grazing solution x 0 ( ) t = x t, ( 0 , x 0 ) , x 0 ∈ D, of (2.1). We will demonstrate that one can write the variational system for the solution x 0 ( ) t as follows:\n\n\n\n9", + "recall": 0.9050279329608939, + "true_md": "The solution ¯ x ( t ) has a linerization with respect to solution x$_{0}$ ( t ) if the condition ( A ) is valid and, moreover, if the point x$_{0}$ ( θ$_{i}$ ) is of ( α ) − or ( β ) − type, then the condition ( B ) is fulfilled. For the case x$_{0}$ ( θ$_{i}$ ) is of ( γ ) − type the condition ( C ) is true.\n\nThe solution x$_{0}$ ( t ) is K − differentiable with respect to the initial value x$_{0}$ on [0 , b ] if for each solution ¯ x ( t ) with sufficiently small Δ x the linearization exists. The functions u$_{i}$ ( t ) and ν$_{ij}$ depend on Δ x and uniformly bounded on a neighborhood of x$_{0}$.\n\nIt is easy to see that the differentiability implies B − continuous dependence on solutions to initial data.\n\nDefine the map ζ ( t, x ) as ζ ( t, x ) = x ( t, 0 , x ) , for x ∈ D.\n\nA K -smooth discontinuous flow is a map ζ ( t, x ) : $^{R}$× D → D, which satisfies the following properties:\n\nIn [1], it was proved that if the conditions of Theorem 2.1 and (C1)-(C10) are fulfilled, then system (2.1) defines a B -smooth discontinuous flow [1] if there is no grazing points for the dynamics. It is easy to observe that the B -smooth discontinuous flow is a subcase of the K -smooth discontinuous flow. In the next section, we will construct a variational system for (2.1) in the neighborhood of grazing orbits. That is, we will assume that some of the discontinuity points are ( γ ) − type points. Linearization around a solution and its stability will be taken into account. Thus, analysis of the discontinuous dynamical systems with grazing points will be completed.\n\nThe object of this section is to verify K − differentiability of the grazing solution. Consider a grazing solution x$_{0}$ ( t ) = x ( t, 0 , x$_{0}$ ) , x$_{0}$ ∈ D, of (2.1). We will demonstrate that one can write the variational system for the solution x$_{0}$ ( t ) as follows:\n\n## 3 Linearization around grazing orbits and discontinuous dynam- ics\n\n$$u ′ = A ( t ) u, Δ u | t = θ$_{i}$ = B$_{i}$u ( θ$_{i}$ ) , (3.9)$$\n\n- (I) The group property:\n\n- (i) ζ (0 , x ) : D → D is the identity;\n\n- (ii) ζ ( t, ζ ( s, x )) = ζ ( t + s, x ) is valid for all t, s ∈ $^{R}$and x ∈ D.\n\n- (II) ζ ( t, x ) ∈ P C $^{1}$( $^{R}$) for each fixed x ∈ D.\n\n- (III) ζ ( t, x ) is K -differentiable in x ∈ D on [ a, b ] ⊂ $^{R}$for each a, b such that the discontinuity points of ζ ( t, x ) are interior points of [ a, b ] .\n\n9" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5441323080763116, + "doc_id": "d02749b7b678e7f902866a78a61e80d1410b7cfb49a6733b509ba71bf598eef8", + "edit_distance": 0.353099730458221, + "f1_score": 0.9338235294117648, + "meteor": 0.5944400618309913, + "precision": 0.9407407407407408, + "pred_md": "Theorem 3.2 Assume G is a semigroup, I ( X,ρ,R ) is a generalized incidence ring, and Φ : ρ → G is a homomorphism. Let S a be given by equation 5 for each a ∈ G . Then I ( X,ρ,R ) = ⊕ a ∈ G S a is a G -graded ring if and only if ImΦ is finite.\n\nglyph[negationslash]\n\n\n\nglyph[negationslash]\n\nProof. It is easy to see S a is an R -submodule for all a ∈ G and S a ∩ S b = { } 0 if b ∈ G and b = a . We show S S a b ⊆ S ab for all a, b ∈ G . Suppose f ∈ S a , g ∈ S b and ( fg ) ( x, y ) = 0 for some x, y ∈ X with xρy . By equation 1 there exists z ∈ [ x, y ] such that xρz , zρy , and f ( x, z ) g ( z, y ) = 0. Thus f ( x, z ) = 0 and g ( z, y ) = 0 which implies Φ ( x, z ) = a and Φ( z, y ) = b . Moreover, ab = Φ( x, y ) since ( x, z, y ) is a transitive triple and Φ is a homomorphism. This proves fg ∈ S ab as desired.\n\nglyph[negationslash]\n\nglyph[negationslash]\n\nglyph[negationslash]\n\nTo complete the proof we show Im Φ is finite if and only if I ( X,ρ,R ) = ⊕ a ∈ G S a . First assume Im Φ is a finite subset of G . Then there is a positive integer m and a , . . . , a 1 m ∈ G such that Im Φ = { a , . . . , a 1 m } . We must prove an arbitrarily chosen f ∈ S is a sum of finitely many homogeneous elements.\n\nFor each i = 1 , . . . , m let f i ∈ I ( X,ρ,R ) be the the function satisfying equation 6 for all ( x, y ) ∈ X .\n\n\n\nBy construction f i ∈ S a i for all i ≤ m . It is easy to prove f is the sum of finitely many homogeneous elements, f , . . . , f 1 m , as desired.\n\nTo prove the other direction assume S = ⊕ a ∈ G S a . We choose h ∈ I ( X,ρ,R ) so that for all x, y ∈ X we have h x, y ( ) = 1 if xρy and otherwise h x, y ( ) = 0. If\n\n7\n\nglyph[negationslash]", + "recall": 0.927007299270073, + "true_md": "Theorem 3.2 Assume G is a semigroup, I ( X, ρ, R ) is a generalized incidence ring, and Φ : ρ → G is a homomorphism. Let S$_{a}$ be given by equation 5 for each a ∈ G . Then I ( X, ρ, R ) = ⊕ a ∈ $_{G}$S$_{a}$ is a G -graded ring if and only if Im Φ is finite.\n\n$$S$_{a}$ = { f ∈ I ( X, ρ, R ) : f ( r ) ̸ = 0 implies Φ ( r ) = a for all r ∈ ρ } (5)$$\n\nProof. It is easy to see S$_{a}$ is an R -submodule for all a ∈ G and S$_{a}$ ∩ S$_{b}$ = { 0 } if b ∈ G and b ̸ = a . We show S$_{a}$S$_{b}$ ⊆ S$_{ab}$ for all a, b ∈ G . Suppose f ∈ S$_{a}$ , g ∈ S$_{b}$ and ( fg ) ( x, y ) ̸ = 0 for some x, y ∈ X with xρy . By equation 1 there exists z ∈ [ x, y ] such that xρz , zρy , and f ( x, z ) g ( z, y ) ̸ = 0. Thus f ( x, z ) ̸ = 0 and g ( z, y ) ̸ = 0 which implies Φ ( x, z ) = a and Φ ( z, y ) = b . Moreover, ab = Φ ( x, y ) since ( x, z, y ) is a transitive triple and Φ is a homomorphism. This proves fg ∈ S$_{ab}$ as desired.\n\nTo complete the proof we show Im Φ is finite if and only if I ( X, ρ, R ) = ⊕ a ∈ $_{G}$S$_{a}$ . First assume Im Φ is a finite subset of G . Then there is a positive integer m and a$_{1}$, . . . , a$_{m}$ ∈ G such that Im Φ = { a$_{1}$, . . . , a$_{m}$ } . We must prove an arbitrarily chosen f ∈ S is a sum of finitely many homogeneous elements.\n\nFor each i = 1 , . . . , m let f$_{i}$ ∈ I ( X, ρ, R ) be the the function satisfying equation 6 for all ( x, y ) ∈ X .\n\nBy construction f$_{i}$ ∈ S$_{a}$$\\_{i}$ for all i ≤ m . It is easy to prove f is the sum of finitely many homogeneous elements, f$\\_{1}$, . . . , f$\\_{m}$ , as desired.\n\nTo prove the other direction assume S = ⊕ a ∈ $_{G}$S$_{a}$ . We choose h ∈ I ( X, ρ, R ) so that for all x, y ∈ X we have h ( x, y ) = 1 if xρy and otherwise h ( x, y ) = 0. If\n\n7\n\n$$f$_{i}$ ( x, y ) =      f ( x, y ) if xρy in X and Φ ( x, y ) = a$_{i}$ 0 otherwise (6)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7495190506521253, + "doc_id": "d6048c35075bfab77083bae6b985dfda1dfe9489424eb872acb31441ddbdc6aa", + "edit_distance": 0.1406926406926407, + "f1_score": 0.8798076923076924, + "meteor": 0.8644364626016035, + "precision": 0.8926829268292683, + "pred_md": "Hastings, W. K. (Apr. 1, 1970). 'Monte Carlo sampling methods using Markov chains and their applications'. Biometrika 57.1, pp. 97-109.\n\nHjort, Nils Lid, Fredrik A Dahl, and Gunnhildur Hgnadttir Steinbakk (Sept. 1, 2006). 'PostProcessing Posterior Predictive p Values'. Journal of the American Statistical Association 101.475, pp. 1157-1174.\n\nLele, Subhash R., Brian Dennis, and Frithjof Lutscher (2007). 'Data cloning: easy maximum likelihood estimation for complex ecological models using Bayesian Markov chain Monte Carlo methods'. Ecology Letters 10.7, pp. 551-563.\n\nLiu, Jun S., Wing Hung Wong, and Augustine Kong (Mar. 1, 1994). 'Covariance structure of the Gibbs sampler with applications to the comparisons of estimators and augmentation schemes'. Biometrika 81.1, pp. 27-40.\n\nLunn, David et al. (Oct. 2, 2012). The BUGS Book: A Practical Introduction to Bayesian Analysis . CRC Press. 402 pp.\n\nLunn, David J. et al. (Oct. 1, 2000). 'WinBUGS - A Bayesian modelling framework: Concepts, structure, and extensibility'. Statistics and Computing 10.4, pp. 325-337.\n\nMarshall, Tristan and Gareth Roberts (Sept. 1, 2012). 'An adaptive approach to Langevin MCMC'. Statistics and Computing 22.5, pp. 1041-1057.\n\nMengersen, K. L. and R. L. Tweedie (Feb. 1996). 'Rates of convergence of the Hastings and Metropolis algorithms'. The Annals of Statistics 24.1. MR: MR1389882 Zbl: 0854.60065, pp. 101-121.\n\nMetropolis, Nicholas et al. (June 1, 1953). 'Equation of State Calculations by Fast Computing Machines'. The Journal of Chemical Physics 21.6, pp. 1087-1092.\n\nNeal, Radford (2011). 'MCMC using Hamiltonian dynamics'. Handbook of Markov Chain Monte Carlo 2.\n\nNeal, Radford M. (June 1, 2003). 'Slice Sampling'. The Annals of Statistics 31.3, pp. 705-741.\n\nNIMBLE Development Team, . (2014). NIMBLE: An R Package for Programming with BUGS models, Version 0.1 . url : http://r-nimble.org .\n\nPlummer, Martyn (2011). 'JAGS Version 3.1. 0 user manual'. International Agency for Research on Cancer .\n\n31", + "recall": 0.8672985781990521, + "true_md": "- Hastings, W. K. (Apr. 1, 1970). “Monte Carlo sampling methods using Markov chains and their applications”. Biometrika 57.1, pp. 97–109.\n\n- Hjort, Nils Lid, Fredrik A Dahl, and Gunnhildur Hgnadttir Steinbakk (Sept. 1, 2006). “Post- Processing Posterior Predictive p Values”. Journal of the American Statistical Association 101.475, pp. 1157–1174.\n\n- Lele, Subhash R., Brian Dennis, and Frithjof Lutscher (2007). “Data cloning: easy maximum like- lihood estimation for complex ecological models using Bayesian Markov chain Monte Carlo methods”. Ecology Letters 10.7, pp. 551–563.\n\n- Liu, Jun S., Wing Hung Wong, and Augustine Kong (Mar. 1, 1994). “Covariance structure of the Gibbs sampler with applications to the comparisons of estimators and augmentation schemes”. Biometrika 81.1, pp. 27–40.\n\n- Lunn, David et al. (Oct. 2, 2012). The BUGS Book: A Practical Introduction to Bayesian Analysis . CRC Press. 402 pp.\n\n- Lunn, David J. et al. (Oct. 1, 2000). “WinBUGS - A Bayesian modelling framework: Concepts, structure, and extensibility”. Statistics and Computing 10.4, pp. 325–337.\n\n- Marshall, Tristan and Gareth Roberts (Sept. 1, 2012). “An adaptive approach to Langevin MCMC”. Statistics and Computing 22.5, pp. 1041–1057.\n\n- Mengersen, K. L. and R. L. Tweedie (Feb. 1996). “Rates of convergence of the Hastings and Metropo- lis algorithms”. The Annals of Statistics 24.1. MR: MR1389882 Zbl: 0854.60065, pp. 101–121.\n\n- Metropolis, Nicholas et al. (June 1, 1953). “Equation of State Calculations by Fast Computing Machines”. The Journal of Chemical Physics 21.6, pp. 1087–1092.\n\n- Neal, Radford (2011). “MCMC using Hamiltonian dynamics”. Handbook of Markov Chain Monte Carlo 2.\n\n- Neal, Radford M. (June 1, 2003). “Slice Sampling”. The Annals of Statistics 31.3, pp. 705–741.\n\n- NIMBLE Development Team, . (2014). NIMBLE: An R Package for Programming with BUGS models, Version 0.1 . $_{url}$: http://r-nimble.org .\n\n- Plummer, Martyn (2011). “JAGS Version 3.1. 0 user manual”. International Agency for Research on Cancer .\n\n31" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.3777544009420307, + "doc_id": "779af82add9baca72cbd8f094bdde818374fe844d2b72e4965d022365d01057e", + "edit_distance": 0.43012211668928085, + "f1_score": 0.9765625, + "meteor": 0.639295274954793, + "precision": 0.9920634920634921, + "pred_md": "Suppose Φ 1 , Φ 2 are homomorphism and Φ 1 | σ = Φ 2 | σ . Give x, y ∈ X such that xρy there is a unique chain { x , . . . , x 1 m } in σ such that x = x 1 ≤ x 2 ≤ . . . ≤ x m = y . The homomorphism property gives Φ ( i x, y ) = φ x , x ( 1 2 ) · · · φ x ( m -1 , x m ) for i = 1 or i = 2. Thus Φ 1 = Φ 2 which proves σ is a G -essential set for ρ . Therefore σ is a G -grading set for ρ .\n\n## 4 Compression Maps and Stable Relations\n\nWe fix the notation δ ( ρ ) = { ( x, x ) : x ∈ X } for the diagonal subset of a relation ρ on a set X . The off-diagonal set ρ ∗ = ρ δ \\ ( ρ ) is an anti-reflexive relation on X .\n\nDefinition 4.1 Suppose ρ 1 and ρ 2 are relations on X 1 and X 2 , respectively. A function θ : X 2 → X 1 is called a compression map if 1, 2, and 3 are satisfied. In this case we say ρ 1 is a compression of ρ 2 .\n\n- 1. θ is surjective and order-preserving.\n- 2. For all a , a 1 2 , a 3 ∈ X 1 if ( a , a 1 2 , a 3 ) ∈ Trans ( X 1 ) then there exist x , x 1 2 , x 3 ∈ X 2 such that ( x , x 1 2 , x 3 ) ∈ Trans ( X 2 ) and θ ( x i ) = a i for i = 1 2 3 , , .\n- 3. There is a bijection θ ∗ : ρ ∗ 2 → ρ ∗ 1 given by θ ∗ ( x, y ) = ( θ ( x , θ ) ( y )) for all x, y ∈ X 2 with xρ y ∗ 2 .\n\nCompression maps were introduced in [8]. Example 5.3 uses a compression map to construct a G -grading set for a non-transitive relation.\n\nLemma 4.2 Suppose I ( X , ρ , R 1 1 ) and I ( X , ρ , R 2 2 ) are generalized incidence rings and θ : X 2 → X 1 is a compression map.\n\n11", + "recall": 0.9615384615384616, + "true_md": "## 4 Compression Maps and Stable Relations\n\nSuppose Φ$_{1}$ , Φ$_{2}$ are homomorphism and Φ$_{1}$ |$_{σ}$ = Φ$_{2}$ |$_{σ}$ . Give x, y ∈ X such that xρy there is a unique chain { x$_{1}$, . . . , x$_{m}$ } in σ such that x = x$_{1}$ ≤ x$_{2}$ ≤ . . . ≤ x$_{m}$ = y . The homomorphism property gives Φ$_{i}$ ( x, y ) = φ ( x$_{1}$, x$_{2}$ ) · · · φ ( x$_{m}$$\\_{−}$$_{1}$, x$_{m}$ ) for i = 1 or i = 2. Thus Φ$_{1}$ = Φ$_{2}$ which proves σ is a G -essential set for ρ . Therefore σ is a G -grading set for ρ .\n\nWe fix the notation δ ( ρ ) = { ( x, x ) : x ∈ X } for the diagonal subset of a relation ρ on a set X . The off-diagonal set ρ ∗ = ρ \\ δ ( ρ ) is an anti-reflexive relation on X .\n\nDefinition 4.1 Suppose ρ$_{1}$ and ρ$_{2}$ are relations on X$_{1}$ and X$_{2}$ , respectively. A function θ : X$_{2}$ → X$_{1}$ is called a compression map if 1, 2, and 3 are satisfied. In this case we say ρ$_{1}$ is a compression of ρ$_{2}$ .\n\n- 1. θ is surjective and order-preserving.\n\n- 2. For all a$_{1}$, a$_{2}$, a$_{3}$ ∈ X$_{1}$ if ( a$_{1}$, a$_{2}$, a$_{3}$ ) ∈ Trans ( X$_{1}$ ) then there exist x$_{1}$, x$_{2}$, x$_{3}$ ∈ X$_{2}$ such that ( x$_{1}$, x$_{2}$, x$_{3}$ ) ∈ Trans ( X$_{2}$ ) and θ ( x$_{i}$ ) = a$_{i}$ for i = 1 , 2 , 3 .\n\n- 3. There is a bijection θ ∗ : ρ ∗ 2 → ρ ∗ 1 given by θ $^{∗}$( x, y ) = ( θ ( x ) , θ ( y )) for all x, y ∈ X$_{2}$ with xρ ∗ $_{2}$y .\n\nCompression maps were introduced in [8]. Example 5.3 uses a compression map to construct a G -grading set for a non-transitive relation.\n\nLemma 4.2 Suppose I ( X$_{1}$, ρ$_{1}$, R ) and I ( X$_{2}$, ρ$_{2}$, R ) are generalized incidence rings and θ : X$_{2}$ → X$_{1}$ is a compression map.\n\n11" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8724232327398276, + "doc_id": "f04b4c2ccd633b04effc522d8777205f37f9c9bad2f183d548cc9087cc08a955", + "edit_distance": 0.09894736842105263, + "f1_score": 0.9476309226932668, + "meteor": 0.9271783568962402, + "precision": 0.9743589743589743, + "pred_md": "(1997) and follow the analysis of Zipunnikov and Booth (2006). The dataset contains 968 counts of senior-citizen clinical visits, which are modeled as Poisson counts. The linear predictor contains fixed and random effects, using a variety of covariates and including several interaction terms.\n\n## 4.3 Performance Results\n\nWe present three quantities to gauge the performance of MCMC algorithm Ψ. Rather than algorithmic efficiency A (Ψ), for convenience of interpretation we present the proportional quantity ESS = 10,000 A (Ψ), where ESS denotes effective sample size. This scaling of A (Ψ) has a natural interpretation as the number of effective samples (for the slowest mixing parameter) which result from a chain of 10,000 MCMC samples. Similarly, to represent the computational requirement C (Ψ), we present the proportional quantity Runtime = 10,000 C (Ψ), interpretable as the time (in seconds) required to generate 10,000 MCMC samples. We directly present the overall MCMC efficiency as Efficiency = ESS / Runtime = A (Ψ) /C (Ψ) = E (Ψ), which is independent of any scaling, and maintains the intuitive interpretation as the number of effective samples generated per second of algorithm runtime (again, for the slowest mixing parameter). MCMC sampling is performed using a fixed random number seed and identical initial values for each model, so identical MCMC algorithms will produce identical sample chains, and hence ESS, but not necessarily Runtime or Efficiency on account of discrepancies in algorithm runtime. We observe the automated procedure producing the same MCMC algorithm across repeated experiments, with numerical results for Runtime and Efficiency varying less than 5% from those presented herein.\n\nFor each example model M , we present results for MCMC algorithm Ψ block denoted as 'All Blocked,' and those of Ψ scalar as 'All Scalar,' noting that Ψ scalar also represents the initial state (0 th iteration) of the automated blocking procedure. The maximally efficient algorithm generated via automated blocking is presented as 'Auto Blocking,' which will generally represent a dynamically determined blocking scheme. We also present a third static MCMC algorithm, which is not necessarily a member of Ψ M on account of the possible use of conjugate sampling. This algorithm assigns block samplers to groups of parameters arising from multivariate distributions, scalar samplers to parameters arising from univariate distributions, and assigns conjugate samplers whenever\n\n21", + "recall": 0.9223300970873787, + "true_md": "(1997) and follow the analysis of Zipunnikov and Booth (2006). The dataset contains 968 counts of senior-citizen clinical visits, which are modeled as Poisson counts. The linear predictor contains fixed and random effects, using a variety of covariates and including several interaction terms.\n\nWe present three quantities to gauge the performance of MCMC algorithm Ψ. Rather than algo- rithmic efficiency A (Ψ), for convenience of interpretation we present the proportional quantity ESS = 10,000 A (Ψ), where ESS denotes effective sample size. This scaling of A (Ψ) has a natural inter- pretation as the number of effective samples (for the slowest mixing parameter) which result from a chain of 10,000 MCMC samples. Similarly, to represent the computational requirement C (Ψ), we present the proportional quantity Runtime = 10,000 C (Ψ), interpretable as the time (in seconds) required to generate 10,000 MCMC samples. We directly present the overall MCMC efficiency as Efficiency = ESS / Runtime = A (Ψ) /C (Ψ) = E (Ψ), which is independent of any scaling, and maintains the intuitive interpretation as the number of effective samples generated per second of algorithm runtime (again, for the slowest mixing parameter). MCMC sampling is performed using a fixed random number seed and identical initial values for each model, so identical MCMC algorithms will produce identical sample chains, and hence ESS, but not necessarily Runtime or Efficiency on account of discrepancies in algorithm runtime. We observe the automated procedure producing the same MCMC algorithm across repeated experiments, with numerical results for Runtime and Efficiency varying less than 5% from those presented herein.\n\nFor each example model M , we present results for MCMC algorithm Ψ$_{block}$ denoted as “All Blocked,” and those of Ψ$_{scalar}$ as “All Scalar,” noting that Ψ$_{scalar}$ also represents the initial state (0 th iteration) of the automated blocking procedure. The maximally efficient algorithm generated via automated blocking is presented as “Auto Blocking,” which will generally represent a dynam- ically determined blocking scheme. We also present a third static MCMC algorithm, which is not necessarily a member of Ψ$_{M}$ on account of the possible use of conjugate sampling. This algorithm assigns block samplers to groups of parameters arising from multivariate distributions, scalar sam- plers to parameters arising from univariate distributions, and assigns conjugate samplers whenever\n\n21\n\n## 4.3 Performance Results" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5510155131114979, + "doc_id": "e797038fca44283fe4dd4b2e532bfb75005ac53916a3b385b310a59e6c857fab", + "edit_distance": 0.30978260869565216, + "f1_score": 0.8945454545454545, + "meteor": 0.7438773715228446, + "precision": 0.9111111111111111, + "pred_md": "43\n\nTable B.2: Monte Carlo results under designs DGP 6DGP 10 with trimming\n\nNote: Simulations based on 1,000 Monte Carlo experiments. ' CvM n ' and ' KS n ' stand for our proposed Cram' er-von Mises and Kolmogorov-Smirnov tests. ' T n ( c )' stands for Shaikh et al. (2009)'s test, with bandwidth h n = cn -1 / 8 . 'Max- ' and ' t Wald ' stand for, respectively, the Bonferroni-corrected Max- -test, and Wald balancing tests based on t ̂ ATE n ( X j ) defined in (4.2) but with observations with estimated propensity score outside [0 05 . , 0 95] trimmed. ' . CvM unp n ' and ' KS unp n ' are the Cram'r-von Mises and Kolmogorove Smirnov tests based on the unprojected empirical process ˆ R n ( u ) defined in (2.10), whereas ' CvM trad n ' and ' KS trad n ' are defined analogously, but based on ˆ R trad n ( x ) as defined in (4.1). Finally, 'Bias', 'CI length', and 'Coverage' stands for the average simulated bias, estimated 95% confidence interval length, and 95% coverage probability for the ATE estimator ̂ ATE n as defined in (4.3), but with observations with estimated propensity score outside [0 05 . , 0 95] trimmed. . All entries are proportions of rejections at 5% level, in percentage points, except 'Bias' ,'CI length', and 'Coverage' (measure in percentage points), which are as described above. See the main text for further details.", + "recall": 0.8785714285714286, + "true_md": "Table B.2: Monte Carlo results under designs DGP 6- DGP 10 with trimming\n\n43\n\nNote: Simulations based on 1,000 Monte Carlo experiments. “ CvM$_{n}$ ” and “ KS$_{n}$ ” stand for our proposed Cram´er-von Mises and Kolmogorov-Smirnov tests. “ T$_{n}$ ( c )” stands for Shaikh et al. (2009)’s test, with bandwidth h$_{n}$ = cn $_{−}$1 / $^{8}$. “Max- t ” and “ Wald ” stand for, respectively, the Bonferroni-corrected Max- t -test, and Wald balancing tests based on ̂ ATE$_{n}$ ( X $^{j}$) defined in (4.2) but with observations with estimated propensity score outside [0 . 05 , 0 . 95] trimmed. “ CvM unp n ” and “ KS unp n ” are the Cram´er-von Mises and Kolmogorov- Smirnov tests based on the unprojected empirical process ˆ R$_{n}$ ( u ) defined in (2.10), whereas “ CvM trad n ” and “ KS trad n ” are defined analogously, but based on ˆ R trad n ( x ) as defined in (4.1). Finally, “Bias”, “CI length’, and “Coverage” stands for the average simulated bias, estimated 95% confidence interval length, and 95% coverage probability for the ATE estimator ̂ ATE$_{n}$ as defined in (4.3), but with observations with estimated propensity score outside [0 . 05 , 0 . 95] trimmed. All entries are proportions of rejections at 5% level, in percentage points, except “Bias” ,“CI length”, and “Coverage” (measure in percentage points), which are as described above. See the main text for further details." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.08566361013039378, + "doc_id": "206410c399903f20b615764d0f8e6027100bbc97778e4e3ef40ac98597de5912", + "edit_distance": 0.7641752577319587, + "f1_score": 0.8378378378378379, + "meteor": 0.2931661359182694, + "precision": 0.9587628865979382, + "pred_md": "equilibria can be formulated as an optimal transportation problem using the { 0 1 , } -valued cost function.\n\nEstablishing sharp bounds on the DTE is also an optimal transportation problem with an indicator function as the cost function. The DTE can be written as the integration of an indicator function with respect to the joint distribution π as follows:\n\n\n\nSince marginal distributions of potential outcomes are given as µ 0 and µ , 1 establishing sharp bounds reduces to picking a particular joint distribution maximizing or minimizing the DTE from all possible joint distributions having µ 0 and µ 1 as their marginal distributions. Then the DTE is bounded as follows:\n\n\n\nwhere Π( µ , µ 0 1 ) is the set of joint distributions that have µ 0 and µ 1 as marginal distributions. For the indicator function, the Kantorovich duality lemma for { 0 1 , }-valued costs in Villani (2003) can be applied as follows:\n\nLemma 3 (Kantorovich duality for { 0 1 , } -valued costs) The sharp lower bound on the DTE has the following dual representation:\n\n\n\nwhere\n\n\n\nSimilarly, the sharp upper bound on the DTE can be written as follows:\n\n\n\nwhere\n\n\n\n14", + "recall": 0.744, + "true_md": "equilibria can be formulated as an optimal transportation problem using the { 0 , 1 } -valued cost function.\n\nEstablishing sharp bounds on the DTE is also an optimal transportation problem with an indicator function as the cost function. The DTE can be written as the integration of an indicator function with respect to the joint distribution π as follows:\n\nSince marginal distributions of potential outcomes are given as µ$_{0}$ and µ$_{1}$, establishing sharp bounds re- duces to picking a particular joint distribution maximizing or minimizing the DTE from all possible joint distributions having µ$_{0}$ and µ$_{1}$ as their marginal distributions. Then the DTE is bounded as follows:\n\nwhere Π ( µ$_{0}$, µ$_{1}$ ) is the set of joint distributions that have µ$_{0}$ and µ$_{1}$ as marginal distributions. For the indicator function, the Kantorovich duality lemma for { 0 , 1 }− valued costs in Villani (2003) can be applied as follows:\n\nLemma 3 (Kantorovich duality for { 0 , 1 } -valued costs) The sharp lower bound on the DTE has the following dual representation:\n\nSimilarly, the sharp upper bound on the DTE can be written as follows:\n\nwhere\n\nwhere\n\n14\n\n$$A E = { y$_{1}$ ∈$_{R}$|∃ y$_{0}$ ∈ A s.t. y$_{1}$ − y$_{0}$ ≤ δ } .$$\n\n$$sup π ∈ Π( µ$_{0}$,µ$_{1}$ ) ∫ 1 { y$_{1}$ − y$_{0}$ ≤ δ } dπ = 1 − inf F ∈ Π( F$_{0}$,F$_{1}$ ) ∫ 1 { y$_{1}$ − y$_{0}$ > δ } dπ = 1 − sup A ⊂$_{R}$ $^{{}$µ$_{0}$ ( A ) − µ$_{1}$ $^{(}$A E $^{)}$; A is closed }$$\n\n$$A D = { y$_{1}$ ∈$_{R}$|∃ y$_{0}$ ∈ A s.t. y$_{1}$ − y$_{0}$ ≥ δ } .$$\n\n$$inf π ∈ Π( µ$_{0}$,µ$_{1}$ ) ∫ 1 { y$_{1}$ − y$_{0}$ < δ } dπ (6) = sup A ⊂$_{R}$ $^{{}$µ$_{0}$ ( A ) − µ$_{1}$ $^{(}$A D $^{)}$; A is closed }$$\n\n$$inf π ∈ Π( µ$_{0}$,µ$_{1}$ ) ∫ 1 { y$_{1}$ − y$_{0}$ < δ } dπ ≤ F$_{Δ}$ ( δ ) ≤ sup π ∈ Π( µ$_{0}$,µ$_{1}$ ) ∫ 1 { y$_{1}$ − y$_{0}$ ≤ δ } dπ,$$\n\n$$F$_{Δ}$ ( δ ) = Pr ( Y$_{1}$ − Y$_{0}$ < δ ) = ∫ 1 { y$_{1}$ − y$_{0}$ < δ } dπ.$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.3786783270414707, + "doc_id": "30623bee6cccb63e7a5891b08b727536fe3bb810c200ae4131c9ab3cf802d9a9", + "edit_distance": 0.494579945799458, + "f1_score": 0.8840579710144927, + "meteor": 0.5372550024320684, + "precision": 0.9336734693877551, + "pred_md": "and\n\nThus, by Lemmas A.6 and A.7, uniformly in u ,\n\n\n\n\n\nleading to the multiplier bootstrapped version of R p n 0 ( u ) in (2.14). The rest of the proof then follows from the multiplier central limit theorem applied to process R p ∗ n 0 ( u ); see van der Vaart and Wellner (1996, Theorem 2.9.2, p.179), and the continuous mapping theorem. /square\n\n## Appendix B: Simulation results with trimming\n\nIn Section 4 we found that the inverse probability weighting type ATE estimators and traditional balancing tests can perform poorly when estimated propensity scores are relatively close to zero or one. In this section, we conduct the same Monte Carlo study as in Section 4 but we trim observations with estimated propensity score outside [0 05 . , 0 95] when considering . ̂ ATE n in (4.3) and the classical balancing tests; for the other test statistics, we do not use any trimming. Table B.1 and Table B.2 present the results under designs DGP 1DGP 5, and DGP 6DGP 10, respectively.\n\nAs discussed in the main text, when the propensity score is correctly specified ( DGP 1 and DGP 6), the IPW estimator ̂ ATE n has very attractive finite sample properties, with little to no bias, coverage probability close to its nominal level, and 95% confidence interval length shrinking with sample size n . Here it is important to emphasize that in DGP 1, in contrast with the 'untrimmed' ATE estimator in Table 1, the coverage probability of the 'trimmed' ATE estimator under is close to the nominal level. However, when the propensity score is misspecified, bias does not vanish as sample size increases, and coverage probability can be substantially lower than its nominal level.\n\nIn terms of size, we note that under DGP 1 balancing tests seem to perform relatively well once we trim observations with 'extreme' propensity score estimates, though with n = 1 000, , the Wald test seems to be over-rejecting. On the other hand, when the dimension of the\n\n41", + "recall": 0.8394495412844036, + "true_md": "and\n\n$$ˆ S ∗ n = 1 √$_{n}$ n ∑ i =1 ε$_{i}$ ( θ$_{0}$ ) g ( X$_{i}$, θ$_{0}$ ) V$_{i}$ + o$_{p}$ (1) . Thus, by Lemmas A.6 and A.7, uniformly in u ,$$\n\n∑ Thus, by Lemmas A.6 and A.7, uniformly in u ,\n\nleading to the multiplier bootstrapped version of R p n $_{0}$( u ) in (2.14). The rest of the proof then follows from the multiplier central limit theorem applied to process R p ∗ n $_{0}$( u ); see van der Vaart and Wellner (1996, Theorem 2.9.2, p.179), and the continuous mapping theorem. □\n\n$$ˆ R p ∗ n ( u ) = 1 √$_{n}$ n ∑ i =1 ε$_{i}$ ( θ$_{0}$ )(1 { q ( X$_{i}$, θ$_{0}$ ) ≤ u } − G $^{′}$( u, θ$_{0}$ )Δ − $^{1}$( θ$_{0}$ ) g ( X$_{i}$, θ$_{0}$ )) V$_{i}$ + o$_{p}$ (1) = 1 √$_{n}$ n ∑ i =1 ε$_{i}$ ( θ$_{0}$ ) P 1 { q ( X$_{i}$, θ$_{0}$ ) ≤ u } V$_{i}$ + o$_{p}$ (1) := R p ∗ n $_{0}$( u ) + o$_{p}$ (1) ,$$\n\n## Appendix B: Simulation results with trimming\n\nIn Section 4 we found that the inverse probability weighting type ATE estimators and tradi- tional balancing tests can perform poorly when estimated propensity scores are relatively close to zero or one. In this section, we conduct the same Monte Carlo study as in Section 4 but we trim observations with estimated propensity score outside [0 . 05 , 0 . 95] when considering ̂ ATE$_{n}$ in (4.3) and the classical balancing tests; for the other test statistics, we do not use any trimming. Table B.1 and Table B.2 present the results under designs DGP 1- DGP 5, and DGP 6- DGP 10, respectively.\n\nAs discussed in the main text, when the propensity score is correctly specified ( DGP 1 and DGP 6), the IPW estimator ̂ ATE$_{n}$ has very attractive finite sample properties, with little to no bias, coverage probability close to its nominal level, and 95% confidence interval length shrinking with sample size n . Here it is important to emphasize that in DGP 1, in contrast with the “untrimmed” ATE estimator in Table 1, the coverage probability of the “trimmed” ATE estimator under is close to the nominal level. However, when the propensity score is misspecified, bias does not vanish as sample size increases, and coverage probability can be substantially lower than its nominal level.\n\nIn terms of size, we note that under DGP 1 balancing tests seem to perform relatively well once we trim observations with “extreme” propensity score estimates, though with n = 1 , 000, the Wald test seems to be over-rejecting. On the other hand, when the dimension of the\n\n41" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9537522166388778, + "doc_id": "ed8ca039dc5c179fd670cf54fbb952df07583563220638672c154ece0e2d984e", + "edit_distance": 0.038338658146964855, + "f1_score": 0.9808917197452229, + "meteor": 0.967166012813817, + "precision": 0.9871794871794872, + "pred_md": "of length one. We describe a partial order with a minimal element which does not have the free-extension property.\n\nExample 5.4 Suppose F is a field, G is a group, and X is the set of natural numbers with ρ the usual ordering. The set σ = { ( m,m +1) : m ∈ X } is the arrow set of the Hasse diagram of X hence σ is a G -grading set for X by Theorem 3.8. Suppose there is an element g ∈ G of infinite order. We let φ : σ → G be the function given by φ m,m ( +1) = g m for all m ∈ X . Then there is a unique homomorphism Φ : ρ → G such that Φ | σ = φ , but this does not determine a grading for I ( X,ρ,F ) since ImΦ is infinite. Therefore I ( X,ρ,F ) does not have the free-extension property even though it satisfies the requirements of [4, Theorem 4].\n\nAcknowledgements A sabbatical appointment supported a visit to the Atlantic Algebra Center of Memorial University in Newfoundland Canada. It is a pleasure to thank the faculty for their hospitality. This paper answers only some of the many fine questions they posed to the author. The author also thanks Martin Erickson of Truman State University and Gene Abrams of the University of Colorado, at Colorado Springs for suggesting improvements to the writing in earlier drafts.\n\n## References\n\n- [1] G. Abrams, Groups Gradings and Recovery Results for Generalized Incidence Rings, J. Alg. 164 (1994) 859-875.\n\n19", + "recall": 0.9746835443037974, + "true_md": "of length one. We describe a partial order with a minimal element which does not have the free-extension property.\n\nExample 5.4 Suppose F is a field, G is a group, and X is the set of natural numbers with ρ the usual ordering. The set σ = { ( m, m + 1) : m ∈ X } is the arrow set of the Hasse diagram of X hence σ is a G -grading set for X by Theorem 3.8. Suppose there is an element g ∈ G of infinite order. We let φ : σ → G be the function given by φ ( m, m + 1) = g m for all m ∈ X . Then there is a unique homomorphism Φ : ρ → G such that Φ |$_{σ}$ = φ , but this does not determine a grading for I ( X, ρ, F ) since Im Φ is infinite. Therefore I ( X, ρ, F ) does not have the free-extension property even though it satisfies the requirements of [4, Theorem 4].\n\nAcknowledgements A sabbatical appointment supported a visit to the Atlantic Algebra Center of Memorial University in Newfoundland Canada. It is a pleasure to thank the faculty for their hospitality. This paper answers only some of the many fine questions they posed to the author. The author also thanks Martin Erickson of Truman State University and Gene Abrams of the University of Colorado, at Colorado Springs for suggesting improvements to the writing in earlier drafts.\n\n## References\n\n- [1] G. Abrams, Groups Gradings and Recovery Results for Generalized Incidence Rings, J. Alg. 164 (1994) 859-875.\n\n19" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.19259110472351, + "doc_id": "2d98eef8aaf49641ec43a5cfb16f7598d1b92a0b7c3036394c30027787494302", + "edit_distance": 0.6721991701244814, + "f1_score": 0.8811188811188811, + "meteor": 0.36270023848655686, + "precision": 0.9473684210526315, + "pred_md": "Denote the eigenvalues of the matrix H j by λ ( j ) 2 , . . . , λ ( j ) n . By means of the Lemma 4.1 and 4.2, there exits a number α > 0 , such that Re λ ( ( j ) k ) < -α, k = 2 3 , , . . . , n, where Re z ( ) means the real part of the number, z. Taking into account that the matrices P j and P -1 j are regular and periodic, the following estimates can be calculated\n\n\n\n\n\nwhere K ( j ) is a positive real constant.\n\nDenote the first column of the fundamental matrix Y by χ . 1 By the equation (4.34), χ 1 is equal to the first column of P , j this means that it is a ω -periodic solution of (3.13).\n\nBy assumptions of the theorem the variational system (4.35) satisfies the conditions of Lemma 4.2, and one can verify that the following estimate is true [17]\n\n\n\nwhere K ( j ) 1 is a positive constant. Let us setup the following integral equation\n\n\n\nwhere a = [0 , a 2 , . . . , a n ] , a i ∈ R , i = 2 3 , , . . . , n, are orthogonal to Ψ (0) ' , i.e. with the zero first coordinate.\n\nLet z ( j ) 0 ( t, a ) ≡ 0 , and consider the following successive approximations\n\n\n\nfor k = 1 2 , , . . . . By using the approximation (4.42) and estimation (4.40), one can verify that\n\n\n\nWe will show that the bounded solution of (4.41) exists and satisfies (4.35). For arbitrary positive small number L , there exists a number δ = ( δ L ) such that for | z 1 | < δ, | z 2 | < δ\n\n\n\n24", + "recall": 0.8235294117647058, + "true_md": "Denote the eigenvalues of the matrix H$_{j}$ by λ ( j ) 2 , . . . , λ ( j ) n . By means of the Lemma 4.1 and 4.2, there exits a number α > 0 , such that Re ( λ ( j ) k ) < − α, k = 2 , 3 , . . . , n, where Re ( z ) means the real part of the number, z. Taking into account that the matrices P$_{j}$ and $_{P}$− 1 j are regular and periodic, the following estimates can be calculated\n\nwhere K ( j ) is a positive real constant.\n\nDenote the first column of the fundamental matrix Y by χ $^{1}$. By the equation (4.34), χ 1 is equal to the first column of P$_{j}$, this means that it is a ω -periodic solution of (3.13).\n\nBy assumptions of the theorem the variational system (4.35) satisfies the conditions of Lemma 4.2, and one can verify that the following estimate is true [17]\n\nwhere K ( j ) 1 is a positive constant. Let us setup the following integral equation\n\nwhere a = [0 , a$_{2}$, . . . , a$_{n}$ ] , a$_{i}$ ∈ $^{R}$, i = 2 , 3 , . . . , n, are orthogonal to Ψ ′ (0) , i.e. with the zero first coordinate.\n\nLet z ( j ) 0 ( t, a ) ≡ 0 , and consider the following successive approximations\n\nfor k = 1 , 2 , . . . . By using the approximation (4.42) and estimation (4.40), one can verify that\n\nWe will show that the bounded solution of (4.41) exists and satisfies (4.35). For arbitrary positive small number L , there exists a number δ = δ ( L ) such that for | z$_{1}$ | < δ, | z$_{2}$ | < δ\n\n24\n\n$$| G ( j ) 1 ( t, s ) | ≤ K ( j $^{)}$exp( − α ( t − s )) , (4.38)$$\n\n$$| G ( j ) 2 ( t, s ) | ≤ K ( j $^{)}$, (4.39)$$\n\n$$| Y$_{j}$ ( t ) | ≤ K ( j ) 1 exp( − αt ) for t ≥ 0 , (4.40)$$\n\n$$z ( j $^{)}$( t, a ) = Y$_{j}$ ( t ) a + t ∫ 0 G ( j ) 1 ( t, s ) r ( s, z ( s )) ds − ∞ ∫ t G ( j ) 2 ( t, s ) r ( s, z ( s )) ds + ∑ 0 <θ$_{k}$\n\nwhere τ = 1 , . . . , L , w 0 = (1 -e -1 /θ ) / (1 -e -L/θ ), and θ = L/ 3.\n\nBased on this weighting, we calculated for each window:\n\n\n\n6", + "recall": 0.9074074074074074, + "true_md": "structed for each participant a sFC matrix, W , whose elements were equal to W$_{ij}$ = 1 T − 1 ∑ T t =1 z$_{i}$ ( t ) · z$_{j}$ ( t ), where z$_{i}$ = { z$_{i}$ (1) , . . . , z$_{i}$ ( T ) } is the zero-mean, unit-variance fMRI BOLD time series for region i .\n\nWe also constructed each participant’s dynamic functional connectivity (dFC) matrix, W = { W (1) , . . . , W ( T − L + 1) } , where W ( t ) = [ W$_{ij}$ ( t )] is the esti- mated connectivity matrix for the time interval beginning at t . This entailed first dividing the regional BOLD time series into overlapping windows of approx- imately 100 seconds in length. With a sampling frequency of f = 1 0 . 645 Hz, this translated to a window of L = 156 time points. The decision to select a window of 100 s was made so that the window was long enough to capture a full cycle of the slowest frequency component. As the high-pass cutoff for the BOLD time series was 0.01 Hz, the shortest possible window was 100 s long (Zalesky and Breakspear, 2015; Leonardi and Van De Ville, 2015). For each window, we then calculated the cross-correlation matrix using only the observations within that window. The cross-correlation was calculated after exponentially discounting the fluctuations of more distant time points so that the correlation coefficients weighed recent events more heavily.\n\nIn slightly more detail, we define a discounting function for each window:\n\nwhere τ = 1 , . . . , L , w$_{0}$ = (1 − e − 1 $^{/θ}$) / (1 − e − $^{L/θ}$), and θ = L/ 3. Based on this weighting, we calculated for each window:\n\n6\n\n$$¯ z$_{i}$ ( t ) = L ∑ τ =1 w ( τ ) z$_{i}$ ( t − L + τ ) (2)$$\n\n$$w ( τ ) = w$_{0}$e ( τ − L ) /θ (1)$$\n\n## Dynamic functional connectivity" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7936375914348478, + "doc_id": "452e2ec3894337d286cd1e39350cd533eeb47f175641bd9747fb4727a184126c", + "edit_distance": 0.11304347826086956, + "f1_score": 0.900726392251816, + "meteor": 0.89287621244305, + "precision": 0.9073170731707317, + "pred_md": "Plummer, Martyn et al. (Mar. 2006). 'CODA: convergence diagnosis and output analysis for MCMC'. R News 6.1, pp. 7-11.\n\nR Core Team, ., ed. (2014). R: A Language and Environment for Statistical Computing . Vienna, Austria: R Foundation for Statistical Computing.\n\nRobert, Christian P and George Casella (2004). Monte Carlo statistical methods . Vol. 319. Citeseer. Roberts, G. O., A. Gelman, and W. R. Gilks (Feb. 1997). 'Weak convergence and optimal scaling of random walk Metropolis algorithms'. The Annals of Applied Probability 7.1. MR: MR1428751 Zbl: 0876.60015, pp. 110-120.\n\nRoberts, G. O. and S. K. Sahu (Jan. 1, 1997). 'Updating Schemes, Correlation Structure, Blocking and Parameterization for the Gibbs Sampler'. Journal of the Royal Statistical Society: Series B (Statistical Methodology) 59.2, pp. 291-317.\n\nRoberts, G. O. and R. L. Tweedie (Mar. 1, 1996). 'Geometric convergence and central limit theorems for multidimensional Hastings and Metropolis algorithms'. Biometrika 83.1, pp. 95-110.\n\nRoberts, Gareth O. and Jeffrey S. Rosenthal (Nov. 2001). 'Optimal scaling for various MetropolisHastings algorithms'. Statistical Science 16.4. MR: MR1888450 Zbl: 02068937, pp. 351-367.\n\n- - (Jan. 1, 2009). 'Examples of Adaptive MCMC'. Journal of Computational and Graphical Statistics 18.2, pp. 349-367.\n\nRue, Havard and Leonhard Held (Feb. 18, 2005). Gaussian Markov Random Fields: Theory and Applications . CRC Press. 281 pp.\n\nSargent, Daniel J., James S. Hodges, and Bradley P. Carlin (June 1, 2000). 'Structured Markov Chain Monte Carlo'. Journal of Computational and Graphical Statistics 9.2, pp. 217-234.\n\nShaby, B. and M. Wells (2011). Exploring an adaptive Metropolis algorithm . 2011-14. Department of Statistics, Duke University.\n\nSkaug, Hans J. and David A. Fournier (Nov. 15, 2006). 'Automatic approximation of the marginal likelihood in non-Gaussian hierarchical models'. Computational Statistics & Data Analysis 51.2, pp. 699-709.\n\nStan Development Team, . (2014). 'Stan: A C++ Library for Probability and Sampling, Version 2.5.0'.\n\n32", + "recall": 0.8942307692307693, + "true_md": "- Plummer, Martyn et al. (Mar. 2006). “CODA: convergence diagnosis and output analysis for MCMC”. R News 6.1, pp. 7–11.\n\n- R Core Team, ., ed. (2014). R: A Language and Environment for Statistical Computing . Vienna, Austria: R Foundation for Statistical Computing.\n\n- Robert, Christian P and George Casella (2004). Monte Carlo statistical methods . Vol. 319. Citeseer.\n\n- Roberts, G. O., A. Gelman, and W. R. Gilks (Feb. 1997). “Weak convergence and optimal scaling of random walk Metropolis algorithms”. The Annals of Applied Probability 7.1. MR: MR1428751 Zbl: 0876.60015, pp. 110–120.\n\n- Roberts, G. O. and S. K. Sahu (Jan. 1, 1997). “Updating Schemes, Correlation Structure, Blocking and Parameterization for the Gibbs Sampler”. Journal of the Royal Statistical Society: Series B (Statistical Methodology) 59.2, pp. 291–317.\n\n- Roberts, G. O. and R. L. Tweedie (Mar. 1, 1996). “Geometric convergence and central limit theorems for multidimensional Hastings and Metropolis algorithms”. Biometrika 83.1, pp. 95–110.\n\n- Roberts, Gareth O. and Jeffrey S. Rosenthal (Nov. 2001). “Optimal scaling for various Metropolis- Hastings algorithms”. Statistical Science 16.4. MR: MR1888450 Zbl: 02068937, pp. 351–367.\n\n- — (Jan. 1, 2009). “Examples of Adaptive MCMC”. Journal of Computational and Graphical Statis- tics 18.2, pp. 349–367.\n\n- Rue, Havard and Leonhard Held (Feb. 18, 2005). Gaussian Markov Random Fields: Theory and Applications . CRC Press. 281 pp.\n\n- Sargent, Daniel J., James S. Hodges, and Bradley P. Carlin (June 1, 2000). “Structured Markov Chain Monte Carlo”. Journal of Computational and Graphical Statistics 9.2, pp. 217–234.\n\n- Shaby, B. and M. Wells (2011). Exploring an adaptive Metropolis algorithm . 2011-14. Department of Statistics, Duke University.\n\n- Skaug, Hans J. and David A. Fournier (Nov. 15, 2006). “Automatic approximation of the marginal likelihood in non-Gaussian hierarchical models”. Computational Statistics & Data Analysis 51.2, pp. 699–709.\n\n- Stan Development Team, . (2014). “Stan: A C++ Library for Probability and Sampling, Version 2.5.0”.\n\n32" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8831561746790565, + "doc_id": "51701add8a333647b9d686f9b65682c3d16484527a0c7a6c6a437887b652db46", + "edit_distance": 0.059431524547803614, + "f1_score": 0.9075144508670521, + "meteor": 0.9488152175763785, + "precision": 0.9181286549707602, + "pred_md": "Crossley, N. A., Mechelli, A., V'rtes, P. E., Winton-Brown, T. T., Patel, A. X., e Ginestet, C. E., McGuire, P., Bullmore, E. T., 2013. Cognitive relevance of the community structure of the human brain functional coactivation network. Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences USA 110 (28), 11583-11588.\n\n- Damaraju, E., Allen, E., Belger, A., Ford, J., McEwen, S., Mathalon, D., Mueller, B., Pearlson, G., Potkin, S., Preda, A., et al., 2014. Dynamic functional connectivity analysis reveals transient states of dysconnectivity in schizophrenia. NeuroImage: Clinical 5, 298-308.\n- de Pasquale, F., Della Penna, S., Snyder, A. Z., Marzetti, L., Pizzella, V., Romani, G. L., Corbetta, M., 2012. A cortical core for dynamic integration of functional networks in the resting human brain. Neuron 74 (4), 753-764.\n- Doron, K. W., Bassett, D. S., Gazzaniga, M. S., 2012. Dynamic network structure of interhemispheric coordination. Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences USA 109 (46), 18661-18668.\n- Elton, A., Gao, W., 2015. Task-related modulation of functional connectivity variability and its behavioral correlations. Human brain mapping.\n- Fisher, R. A., 1915. Frequency distribution of the values of the correlation coefficient in samples from an indefinitely large population. Biometrika, 507-521.\n- Fortunato, S., Barth'lemy, M., 2007. Resolution limit in community detection. e Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences 104 (1), 36-41.\n\nFriston, K. J., 2011. Functional and effective connectivity: a review. Brain Connectivity 1 (1), 13-36.\n\n- G' omez, S., Jensen, P., Arenas, A., 2009. Analysis of community structure in networks of correlated data. Physical Review E 80 (1), 016114.\n\n31", + "recall": 0.8971428571428571, + "true_md": "- Crossley, N. A., Mechelli, A., V´ ertes, P. E., Winton-Brown, T. T., Patel, A. X., Ginestet, C. E., McGuire, P., Bullmore, E. T., 2013. Cognitive relevance of the community structure of the human brain functional coactivation network. Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences USA 110 (28), 11583–11588.\n\n- Damaraju, E., Allen, E., Belger, A., Ford, J., McEwen, S., Mathalon, D., Mueller, B., Pearlson, G., Potkin, S., Preda, A., et al., 2014. Dynamic functional connectivity analysis reveals transient states of dysconnectivity in schizophrenia. NeuroImage: Clinical 5, 298–308.\n\n- de Pasquale, F., Della Penna, S., Snyder, A. Z., Marzetti, L., Pizzella, V., Romani, G. L., Corbetta, M., 2012. A cortical core for dynamic integration of functional networks in the resting human brain. Neuron 74 (4), 753–764.\n\n- Doron, K. W., Bassett, D. S., Gazzaniga, M. S., 2012. Dynamic network struc- ture of interhemispheric coordination. Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences USA 109 (46), 18661–18668.\n\n- Elton, A., Gao, W., 2015. Task-related modulation of functional connectivity variability and its behavioral correlations. Human brain mapping.\n\n- Fisher, R. A., 1915. Frequency distribution of the values of the correlation coef- ficient in samples from an indefinitely large population. Biometrika, 507–521.\n\n- Fortunato, S., Barth´ elemy, M., 2007. Resolution limit in community detection. Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences 104 (1), 36–41.\n\n- Friston, K. J., 2011. Functional and effective connectivity: a review. Brain Con- nectivity 1 (1), 13–36.\n\n- G´ omez, S., Jensen, P., Arenas, A., 2009. Analysis of community structure in networks of correlated data. Physical Review E 80 (1), 016114.\n\n31" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8216555924849852, + "doc_id": "d63225966acca44d41dea726fe1d06cdb168a0b1280acc2932021e434e4ed97a", + "edit_distance": 0.45185185185185184, + "f1_score": 0.9682539682539683, + "meteor": 0.8668720413339986, + "precision": 0.9878542510121457, + "pred_md": "information between adjacent tokens in the data. This corresponds to maximizing the likelihood of the data assuming a bigram model.\n\nThe benefit of using word classes is that the resulting language model can have fewer parameters than a word-based n-gram model. In our case, the in-domain training text is so small that it can be a real advantage to have fewer parameters to learn in the language model. The problem is that if the data is too small to reliably estimate word transition probabilities ( p w ( i | w i -1 ) ), then it will also be difficult to learn a good partitioning of the words into classes.\n\nOur hypothesis is that the advantage in learning the word class assignments on the Twitter data, which solves the data sparsity problem, outweighs any performance penalty that is incurred due to domain mis-match. This differs from the traditional approach where the class assignments ( w i ∈ c j ) are learned from the same training text which is used to estimate the class transition probabilities ( p c ( i | c i -1 ) ) and the word probabilities ( p w ( i | c j ) ). Twitter data, in these experiments, refers to the concatenation of the text downloaded from Twitter with our in-domain data for the reasons described above. The experiments in Section IV-C will compare learning the class assignments on out-of-domain data (hybrid method) to the traditional approach (baseline).\n\n## IV. EXPERIMENTS\n\n## A. Experimental Data\n\nThe in-domain data used in the experiments in this paper comes from the IARPA Babel program. 1 This program focuses on keyword search for low-resource languages. The languages are low resource in the sense that they have fewer native speakers than the languages receiving the most attention from researchers and also in the sense that the provided training data is small in comparison to what is typically used. We\n\n1 http://www.iarpa.gov/index.php/research-programs/babel\n\n5\n\nexclusively focused on the so-called limited language pack, which consists of only ten hours of recorded telephone conversations. Our experiments were conducted using the Bengali, Tamil, Turkish and Zulu languages. The languages that we selected for our experiments have the largest vocabulary sizes (See Table I) of the languages in the Babel program and thus suffer the most from the data sparsity problem. As a point of comparison, Tagalog, which was not used in our experiments, has one third as many vocabulary items as Tamil.\n\nTABLE I LANGUAGE VOCABULARY SIZE\n\n## B. N-gram Language Models\n\nWe performed data collection and language model training experiments on the Bengali, Tamil, Turkish and Zulu languages. We were able to collect useful data for each of the four languages as seen in Table II. The data collection experiment was especially successful for Turkish and Bengali. For both of those languages the interpolation weight given to the Twitter LM was over 20% and the corresponding reduction in perplexity was more than 12%.\n\nTABLE II TWITTER DATA COLLECTION EXPERIMENT RESULTS\n\nA large amount of data was also collected for Zulu and Tamil although the perplexity reduction was not as large as it was for Bengali and Turkish. There are a few possible explanations for this outcome. Both Zulu and Tamil have larger vocabularies (See Table I) than the other languages, which", + "recall": 0.9494163424124513, + "true_md": "5\n\ninformation between adjacent tokens in the data. This corre- sponds to maximizing the likelihood of the data assuming a bigram model.\n\nThe benefit of using word classes is that the resulting language model can have fewer parameters than a word-based n-gram model. In our case, the in-domain training text is so small that it can be a real advantage to have fewer parameters to learn in the language model. The problem is that if the data is too small to reliably estimate word transition probabilities ( p ( w$_{i}$ | w$_{i}$$\\_{−}$$_{1}$ ) ), then it will also be difficult to learn a good partitioning of the words into classes.\n\nOur hypothesis is that the advantage in learning the word class assignments on the Twitter data, which solves the data sparsity problem, outweighs any performance penalty that is incurred due to domain mis-match. This differs from the traditional approach where the class assignments ( w$_{i}$ ∈ c$_{j}$ ) are learned from the same training text which is used to estimate the class transition probabilities ( p ( c$_{i}$ | c$_{i}$$\\_{−}$$_{1}$ ) ) and the word probabilities ( p ( w$_{i}$ | c$_{j}$ ) ). Twitter data, in these experiments, refers to the concatenation of the text downloaded from Twitter with our in-domain data for the reasons described above. The experiments in Section IV-C will compare learning the class assignments on out-of-domain data (hybrid method) to the traditional approach (baseline).\n\nThe in-domain data used in the experiments in this paper comes from the IARPA Babel program. 1 This program focuses on keyword search for low-resource languages. The languages are low resource in the sense that they have fewer native speakers than the languages receiving the most attention from researchers and also in the sense that the provided training data is small in comparison to what is typically used. We\n\nA large amount of data was also collected for Zulu and Tamil although the perplexity reduction was not as large as it was for Bengali and Turkish. There are a few possible explanations for this outcome. Both Zulu and Tamil have larger vocabularies (See Table I) than the other languages, which\n\n$^{1}$http://www.iarpa.gov/index.php/research-programs/babel\n\nWe performed data collection and language model train- ing experiments on the Bengali, Tamil, Turkish and Zulu languages. We were able to collect useful data for each of the four languages as seen in Table II. The data collection experiment was especially successful for Turkish and Bengali. For both of those languages the interpolation weight given to the Twitter LM was over 20% and the corresponding reduction in perplexity was more than 12%.\n\nexclusively focused on the so-called limited language pack, which consists of only ten hours of recorded telephone conver- sations. Our experiments were conducted using the Bengali, Tamil, Turkish and Zulu languages. The languages that we selected for our experiments have the largest vocabulary sizes (See Table I) of the languages in the Babel program and thus suffer the most from the data sparsity problem. As a point of comparison, Tagalog, which was not used in our experiments, has one third as many vocabulary items as Tamil.\n\n## B. N-gram Language Models\n\n## A. Experimental Data\n\n## IV. EXPERIMENTS\n\nTABLE II TWITTER DATA COLLECTION EXPERIMENT RESULTS\n\nTABLE I LANGUAGE VOCABULARY SIZE" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.016205892199786086, + "doc_id": "6775282a343b63d63135654a572a0e17b7121d5ff93b3bf8e1c9ed3fb4f5c7b1", + "edit_distance": 0.847444089456869, + "f1_score": 0.8547008547008548, + "meteor": 0.15831295284738112, + "precision": 0.8695652173913043, + "pred_md": "in (a) and (b), respectively. Therefore, from consideration of Case a, b and c,\n\n\n\nwhere t 0 -t W t 1 -t 0 δ + w ≤ b k +1 ≤ b k . Consequently, the sharp upper bound is written as follows: letting F U ∆ ,W ( δ w | ) be the sharp upper bound on Pr ( Y 1 -Y 0 ≤ | δ W = w , )\n\n\n\nwhere t 0 -t W t 1 -t 0 δ + w ≤ b k +1 ≤ b k . glyph[squaresolid]\n\n## Appendix B\n\nAppendix B presents the procedure used to compute the sharp lower bound under MTR in Section 4 and Section 5. The following lemma is useful for reducing computational costs:\n\n## Lemma B.1 Let\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nIt is innocuous to assume that { a k } ∞ k = -∞ satisfies a k +2 -a k > δ for each integer k .\n\nProof. I will show that for any sequence { a k } ∞ k = -∞ ∈ A δ satisfying a k +2 -a k ≤ δ for some integer k, one can construct { ˜ a k } ∞ k = -∞ ∈ A δ with ˜ a k +2 -˜ a k > δ for each integer k and\n\n\n\n72", + "recall": 0.8403361344537815, + "true_md": "in (a) and (b), respectively. Therefore, from consideration of Case a, b and c,\n\nwhere t$_{0}$ − t$_{W}$ t$_{1}$ − t$_{0}$ δ + w ≤ b$_{k}$$\\_{+1}$ ≤ b$\\_{k}$. Consequently, the sharp upper bound is written as follows: letting F U Δ ,W ( δ | w ) be the sharp upper bound on Pr ( Y$\\_{1}$ − Y$\\_{0}$ ≤ δ | W = w ) ,\n\nwhere t$_{0}$ − t$_{W}$ t$_{1}$ − t$_{0}$ δ + w ≤ b$_{k}$$\\_{+1}$ ≤ b$\\_{k}$. ■\n\nAppendix B presents the procedure used to compute the sharp lower bound under MTR in Section 4 and Section 5. The following lemma is useful for reducing computational costs:\n\nLemma B.1 Let\n\nIt is innocuous to assume that { a$_{k}$ } ∞ k = −∞ satisfies a$_{k}$$\\_{+2}$ − a$\\_{k}$ > δ for each integer k .\n\nProof. I will show that for any sequence { a$_{k}$ } ∞ k = −∞ ∈ A$_{δ}$ satisfying a$_{k}$$\\_{+2}$ − a$\\_{k}$ ≤ δ for some integer k, one can construct {$\\_{˜}$ a$\\_{k}$ } ∞ k = −∞ ∈ A$\\_{δ}$ with ˜ a$\\_{k}$$_{+2}$ −$_{˜}$ a$_{k}$ > δ for each integer k and\n\n72\n\n$$∞ ∑ k = −∞ max { F$_{1}$ ( a$_{k}$$_{+1}$ ) − F$_{0}$ ( a$_{k}$ ) , 0 } ≤ ∞ ∑ k = −∞ max { F$_{1}$ ($_{˜}$ a$_{k}$$_{+1}$ ) − F$_{1}$ ($_{˜}$ a$_{k}$ ) , 0 } .$$\n\n$${ a$_{k}$ } ∞ k = −∞ ∈ arg max { a$_{k}$ } ∞ k = $_{−∞}$∈A$_{δ}$ ∞ ∑ k = −∞ max { F$_{1}$ ( a$_{k}$$_{+1}$ ) − F$_{0}$ ( a$_{k}$ ) , 0 } , where A$_{δ}$ = $^{{}${ a$_{k}$ } ∞ k = $_{−∞}$; 0 ≤ a$_{k}$$_{+1}$ − a$_{k}$ ≤ δ for each integer k $^{}}$.$$\n\n$$F U Δ ( δ ) = ∫ F U Δ ,W ( δ | w ) dF$_{W}$ ( w ) = ∫ { 1 − sup { B$_{k}$ } ∞ k = −∞ ∞ ∑ k = −∞ max $^{{}$µ$_{0}$$_{,W}$ ( B$_{k}$ | w ) − µ$_{1}$$_{,W}$ $^{(}$B D k | w $^{)}$, 0 } } dF$_{W}$ = 1 +$^{∫}$ inf { b$_{k}$ } ∞ k = −∞ ∞ ∑ k = −∞ min$^{{}$ F$_{1}$$_{,W}$ $^{(}$t$_{1}$ − t$_{W}$ t$_{0}$ − t$_{W}$ b$_{k}$$_{+1}$ − t$_{1}$ − t$_{0}$ t$_{0}$ − t$_{W}$ w | w$^{)}$ − F$_{0}$$_{,W}$ ( b$_{k}$ | w ) , 0$^{}}$ dF$_{W}$$$\n\n$$sup { B$_{k}$ } ∞ k = −∞ ∞ ∑ k = −∞ max $^{{}$µ$_{0}$$_{,W}$ ( B$_{k}$ | w ) − µ$_{1}$$_{,W}$ $^{(}$B D k | w $^{)}$, 0 } = sup { b$_{k}$ } ∞ k = −∞ ∞ ∑ k = −∞ max$^{{}$ F$_{0}$$_{,W}$ ( b$_{k}$ | w ) − F$_{1}$$_{,W}$ $^{(}$t$_{1}$ − t$_{W}$ t$_{0}$ − t$_{W}$ b$_{k}$$_{+1}$ − t$_{1}$ − t$_{0}$ t$_{0}$ − t$_{W}$ w | w$^{)}$ , 0$^{}}$$$\n\n## Appendix B" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6406458373323487, + "doc_id": "2361e2b864be6e9757bb71061594329e11d019c9841defed24dea91a0bd0ee59", + "edit_distance": 0.2980561555075594, + "f1_score": 0.9349112426035504, + "meteor": 0.7726286379489963, + "precision": 0.9404761904761905, + "pred_md": "dependent of one another due to overlapping time windows. For example, the observations used to construct the dynamic networks at time t and t +1 have L -1 points in common, where L is the window length. Random reorderings of the excursion count time series would likely violate this interdependency. This procedure can also be viewed from a statistical point of view. In short, we want to test the null hypothesis that a dynamic functional connection is either significantly stronger or weaker than its corresponding static connection.\n\nWe also calculated the global excursion matrix, X , whose element x ij was equal to the number of times, across all subjects, that the connection x ij participated in an excursion. As before, we were able to divide X into X + and X -, which count the number of times a connection was stronger or weaker than expected, respectively.\n\n## Community detection\n\nWe used the dynamic functional connectivity matrices (in their raw form) in conjunction with modularity maximization (Newman and Girvan, 2004) to identify functional communities (Sporns and Betzel, 2016) and to assess their quality. This process entailed maximizing the modularity quality function for the dynamic functional connectivity matrix at time t :\n\n\n\nHere, B ( ) t = [ B ij ( )] t is the so-called modularity matrix, and is equal to B ( ) t = W ( ) t -P ( ), t where P ( ) t = [ P ij ( )] t is the expected weight of the functional connection between brain regions i and j at time t . The function δ g ( i ( ) t , g j ( )) is the Kronecker delta and is equal to unity when the community t assignments of regions i and j at time t , g i ( ) t and g j ( ) t respectively, are the same. Otherwise the delta function is equal to zero. Traditionally, the defini-\n\n11", + "recall": 0.9294117647058824, + "true_md": "dependent of one another due to overlapping time windows. For example, the observations used to construct the dynamic networks at time t and t + 1 have L − 1 points in common, where L is the window length. Random reorderings of the excursion count time series would likely violate this interdependency. This procedure can also be viewed from a statistical point of view. In short, we want to test the null hypothesis that a dynamic functional connection is either significantly stronger or weaker than its corresponding static connection.\n\nWe also calculated the global excursion matrix, X , whose element x$_{ij}$ was equal to the number of times, across all subjects, that the connection x$_{ij}$ par- ticipated in an excursion. As before, we were able to divide X into X + and X $^{−}$, which count the number of times a connection was stronger or weaker than expected, respectively.\n\nWe used the dynamic functional connectivity matrices (in their raw form) in conjunction with modularity maximization (Newman and Girvan, 2004) to identify functional communities (Sporns and Betzel, 2016) and to assess their quality. This process entailed maximizing the modularity quality function for the dynamic functional connectivity matrix at time t :\n\nHere, B ( t ) = [ B$_{ij}$ ( t )] is the so-called modularity matrix, and is equal to B ( t ) = W ( t ) − P ( t ), where P ( t ) = [ P$_{ij}$ ( t )] is the expected weight of the functional connection between brain regions i and j at time t . The function δ ( g$_{i}$ ( t ) , g$_{j}$ ( t )) is the Kronecker delta and is equal to unity when the community assignments of regions i and j at time t , g$_{i}$ ( t ) and g$_{j}$ ( t ) respectively, are the same. Otherwise the delta function is equal to zero. Traditionally, the defini-\n\n11\n\n$$Q ( t ) = ∑ ij B$_{ij}$ ( t ) δ ( g$_{i}$ ( t ) , g$_{j}$ ( t )) (6)$$\n\n## Community detection" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.844172514622556, + "doc_id": "d7e5e634de88947aad0748d6e1f51f3d7847707cf539c67a93a6cd3d849954a4", + "edit_distance": 0.15299334811529933, + "f1_score": 0.9568965517241379, + "meteor": 0.9228212743550224, + "precision": 0.9823008849557522, + "pred_md": "arXiv:1511.06352v1 [q-bio.NC] 19 Nov 2015\n\n## Dynamic fluctuations coincide with periods of high and low modularity in resting-state functional brain networks\n\nRichard F. Betzel 1 2 , , ∗ , Makoto Fukushima , Ye He , Xi-Nian Zuo , Olaf 2 4 4 Sporns 2 3 ,\n\n- 1 University of Pennsylvania, School of Engineering and Applied Science, Department of Bioengineering, Philadelphia PA, 19104, USA\n- 2 Indiana University, Psychological and Brain Sciences, Bloomington IN, 47405, USA\n- 3\n- Indiana University, Network Science Institute, Bloomington IN, 47405, USA\n- 4 Key Laboratory of Behavioral Science and Magnetic Resonance Imaging Research Center, Institute of Psychology, Chinese Academy of Sciences, Beijing, China\n\n## Abstract\n\nWe investigate the relationship of resting-state fMRI functional connectivity estimated over long periods of time with time-varying functional connectivity estimated over shorter time intervals. We show that using Pearson's correlation to estimate functional connectivity implies that the range of fluctuations of functional connections over short time scales is subject to statistical constraints imposed by their connectivity strength over longer scales. We present a method for estimating time-varying functional connectivity that is designed to mitigate this issue and allows us to identify episodes where functional connections are unexpectedly strong or weak. We apply this method to data recorded from N = 80 participants, and show that the number of unexpectedly strong/weak connections fluctuates over time, and that these variations coincide with intermittent periods of high and low modularity in time-varying functional connectivity. We also find that during periods of relative quiescence regions associated with default mode network tend to join communities with attentional, control, and primary sensory systems. In contrast, during periods where many connections are unexpectedly strong/weak, default mode regions dissociate and form distinct modules. Finally, we go on to show that, while all functional connections can at times manifest stronger (more positively correlated) or weaker (more negatively correlated) than expected, a small number of connections, mostly within the visual and somatomotor networks, do so a disproportional number of times. Our statistical approach allows the detection of functional connections that fluctuate more or less than expected based on their long-time averages and may be of use in future studies characterizing the spatio-temporal patterns of\n\n∗ corresponding author: rbetzel@seas.upenn.edu\n\nPreprint submitted to Elsevier\n\nJune 14, 2018", + "recall": 0.9327731092436975, + "true_md": "# Dynamic fluctuations coincide with periods of high and low modularity in resting-state functional brain networks\n\nRichard F. Betzel 1 , 2 , $^{∗}$, Makoto Fukushima $^{2}$, Ye He$^{4}$, Xi-Nian Zuo$^{4}$, Olaf Sporns 2 , 3\n\n1 University of Pennsylvania, School of Engineering and Applied Science, Department of Bioengineering, Philadelphia PA, 19104, USA\n\n2 Indiana University, Psychological and Brain Sciences, Bloomington IN, 47405, USA\n\n3 Indiana University, Network Science Institute, Bloomington IN, 47405, USA\n\n4 Key Laboratory of Behavioral Science and Magnetic Resonance Imaging Research Center, Institute of Psychology, Chinese Academy of Sciences, Beijing, China\n\nWe investigate the relationship of resting-state fMRI functional connectivity estimated over long periods of time with time-varying functional connectivity estimated over shorter time intervals. We show that using Pearson’s correla- tion to estimate functional connectivity implies that the range of fluctuations of functional connections over short time scales is subject to statistical constraints imposed by their connectivity strength over longer scales. We present a method for estimating time-varying functional connectivity that is designed to mitigate this issue and allows us to identify episodes where functional connections are un- expectedly strong or weak. We apply this method to data recorded from N = 80 participants, and show that the number of unexpectedly strong/weak connec- tions fluctuates over time, and that these variations coincide with intermittent periods of high and low modularity in time-varying functional connectivity. We also find that during periods of relative quiescence regions associated with de- fault mode network tend to join communities with attentional, control, and primary sensory systems. In contrast, during periods where many connections are unexpectedly strong/weak, default mode regions dissociate and form dis- tinct modules. Finally, we go on to show that, while all functional connections can at times manifest stronger (more positively correlated) or weaker (more negatively correlated) than expected, a small number of connections, mostly within the visual and somatomotor networks, do so a disproportional number of times. Our statistical approach allows the detection of functional connections that fluctuate more or less than expected based on their long-time averages and may be of use in future studies characterizing the spatio-temporal patterns of\n\narXiv:1511.06352v1 [q-bio.NC] 19 Nov 2015\n\n$^{∗}$corresponding author: rbetzel@seas.upenn.edu\n\nPreprint submitted to Elsevier\n\nJune 14, 2018\n\n## Abstract" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6462231972047198, + "doc_id": "c1fa1a82572e409d43136a927c092ead90517a94e2005e81a004088289501c74", + "edit_distance": 0.3467153284671533, + "f1_score": 0.9238578680203045, + "meteor": 0.742961911096777, + "precision": 0.9629629629629629, + "pred_md": "March 19, 2018\n\nDRAFT\n\n8\n\n## D. A Motivating Example\n\nConsider an example with two cells, two users and two subcarriers. Each user can transmit with a maximum power of 1 W. Assume H 1 = [1 0.9; 0.8 0.7] and H 2 = [1 0.9; 0.8 0.7]. Single cell allocation strategies that aim to maximize the local throughput of each cell suggest A P 1 , 1 and A P 2 , 2 = [1 0; 0 1]. Computing the UB using (10) results in 1.7655 bps/Hz/cell where σ 2 = 1 . Now, assume the knowledge of interfering link gains at each BS, i.e., G 12 = [0.9 0.2; 0.2 0.9] and G 21 = [0.7 0.1; 0.1 0.7]. Computing the throughput again while keeping the single cell allocations and taking into account the interfering gains leads to an average network throughput of 1.1137 bps/Hz/cell. However, better allocations are possible if we consider A P 1 , 1 and A P 2 , 2 = [0 1; 1 0] as per the criterion discussed in Section IV which enhances the resulting average network throughput to 1.5977 bps/Hz/cell.\n\n## IV. SUB-OPTIMAL CENTRALIZED RESOURCE ALLOCATION SCHEMES\n\nConsidering the high intricacy of implementing the optimal solution, we develop a two-stage centralized scheme. In comparison to the centralized scheme presented in [12], the subcarrier allocation phase of the developed scheme is iterative and computationally intensive. However, the performance is better even without the power allocation phase and, thus, it can provide an effective benchmark for low complexity schemes. Compared to [12], we also discuss the power allocation phase for the general SINR regime.\n\n## A. Centralized Scheme A\n\nIn the proposed scheme, we split the resource allocation procedure into two phases: subcarrier allocation phase and power allocation phase. It is important to note that the subcarrier allocation phase involves a power equalization step, thus, it is not totally independent of power allocation.\n\n## Phase I: Subcarrier Allocation\n\n- · Initial Allocation : Firstly, we define the term for the allocation of resources to the users as follows:\n\n/negationslash\n\n", + "recall": 0.8878048780487805, + "true_md": "8\n\n## D. A Motivating Example\n\nConsider an example with two cells, two users and two subcarriers. Each user can transmit with a maximum power of 1 W. Assume H$_{1}$ = [1 0.9; 0.8 0.7] and H$_{2}$ = [1 0.9; 0.8 0.7]. Single cell allocation strategies that aim to maximize the local throughput of each cell suggest A$_{1}$ , P$_{1}$ and A$_{2}$ , P$_{2}$ = [1 0; 0 1]. Computing the UB using (10) results in 1.7655 bps/Hz/cell where σ $^{2}$= 1 . Now, assume the knowledge of interfering link gains at each BS, i.e., G$_{12}$ = [0.9 0.2; 0.2 0.9] and G$_{21}$ = [0.7 0.1; 0.1 0.7]. Computing the throughput again while keeping the single cell allocations and taking into account the interfering gains leads to an average network throughput of 1.1137 bps/Hz/cell. However, better allocations are possible if we consider A$_{1}$ , P$_{1}$ and A$_{2}$ , P$_{2}$ = [0 1; 1 0] as per the criterion discussed in Section IV which enhances the resulting average network throughput to 1.5977 bps/Hz/cell.\n\nConsidering the high intricacy of implementing the optimal solution, we develop a two-stage centralized scheme. In comparison to the centralized scheme presented in [12], the subcarrier allocation phase of the developed scheme is iterative and computationally intensive. However, the performance is better even without the power allocation phase and, thus, it can provide an effective benchmark for low complexity schemes. Compared to [12], we also discuss the power allocation phase for the general SINR regime.\n\n## IV. SUB-OPTIMAL CENTRALIZED RESOURCE ALLOCATION SCHEMES\n\n## A. Centralized Scheme A\n\nIn the proposed scheme, we split the resource allocation procedure into two phases: subcarrier allocation phase and power allocation phase. It is important to note that the subcarrier allocation phase involves a power equalization step, thus, it is not totally independent of power allocation.\n\n- • Initial Allocation : Firstly, we define the term for the allocation of resources t o the users as follows:\n\n## Phase I: Subcarrier Allocation\n\n$$χ$_{n,k,l}$ = p$_{n,k,l}$h$_{n,k,l}$ ∑ L j =1 ,j ̸ = l P$_{k,}$$_{max}$g$_{n,k,lj}$ (11) DRAFT$$\n\nDRAFT\n\nMarch 19, 2018" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9775394923668769, + "doc_id": "5b1b053a6d40c14d33a994ba4622f3496c5ba199af157facc9c236116cc55c3c", + "edit_distance": 0.013245033112582781, + "f1_score": 0.9865125240847784, + "meteor": 0.9905574298811243, + "precision": 0.9922480620155039, + "pred_md": "for hybrid systems. Applying this, the normal-form coefficients are evaluated, which in this case imply the occurrences a jump to chaos and period-adding cascade. The necessary and sufficient conditions of the general discontinuous boundary are expounded in [28]. In [27], by means of non-stick mapping, the necessary and sufficient conditions for the grazing in periodically forced linear oscillator with dry friction are obtained. By constructing special maps such as zero time discontinuity mapping [10]-[12] and Nordmark map [36]-[39], the existence of periodic solution and their stability were investigated in mechanical systems.\n\nIn this paper, we model the dynamics with grazing impacts by utilizing differential equations with impulses at variable moments and applying the methods of [1]-[3]. As a consequence of such methods, the role of the mappings [36]-[39] is diminished. One can observe that a trajectory at a grazing point may have tangency to the surface of discontinuity, which is parallel to one or several coordinate axises. Particularly it means the velocity approaches to zero [36]-[39]. Then, we will say about the axial grazing. Otherwise, grazing is non-axial. This research contains the analysis of both axial and non-axial grazing.\n\nIn [33], it is observed through simulations and experiments that the coefficient of restitution depends on the impact velocity of the particle by considering both the viscoelastic and the plastic deformations of particles occurring at low and high velocities, respectively. It has been proposed in [32] that at low impact velocities and for most materials with linear elastic range, the coefficient of restitution is of the form R v ( ) = 1 -av, where v is the velocity before collision and a is a constant. Also, for low impact velocities the restitution law can be considered quadratic [16]. This is why, we will use non-constant restitution coefficients in models with impacts in this study.\n\nFor investigation of autonomous differential equations, it is convenient to utilize properties of dynamical systems. They are the group property, continuation of solutions in both time directions, continuity and differentiability in parameters. The studies of discontinuous dynamical systems with transversal intersections of orbits and surfaces, B -smooth discontinuous flows, can be found in [1, 2]. In this research, the dynamics is approved for systems with grazing orbits. Moreover, the definitions of orbital stability and asymptotic phase are adapted to grazing cycles. The orbital stability theorem is proved, which can not be underestimated for theory of impact mechanisms.\n\nThe remaining part of the paper is organized as follows. In the next section, we will introduce necessary notations, definitions and theorems to specify discontinuous dynamical systems. In Section 3, it is shown how the dynamics can be linearized around grazing orbits. In Section 4, the theorem of orbital stability is adapted for grazing cycles. In Section 5, the small parameter analysis is applied near grazing orbits and bifurcation of cycles is observed. In last three sections, examples are presented to actualize the theoretical results numerically and analytically. Finally, Conclusion covers a summary of our study.\n\n2", + "recall": 0.9808429118773946, + "true_md": "for hybrid systems. Applying this, the normal-form coefficients are evaluated, which in this case imply the occurrences a jump to chaos and period-adding cascade. The necessary and sufficient conditions of the general discontinuous boundary are expounded in [28]. In [27], by means of non-stick mapping, the necessary and sufficient conditions for the grazing in periodically forced linear oscillator with dry friction are obtained. By constructing special maps such as zero time discontinuity mapping [10]-[12] and Nordmark map [36]-[39], the existence of periodic solution and their stability were investigated in mechanical systems.\n\nIn this paper, we model the dynamics with grazing impacts by utilizing differential equations with impulses at variable moments and applying the methods of [1]-[3]. As a consequence of such methods, the role of the mappings [36]-[39] is diminished. One can observe that a trajectory at a grazing point may have tangency to the surface of discontinuity, which is parallel to one or several coordinate axises. Particularly it means the velocity approaches to zero [36]-[39]. Then, we will say about the axial grazing. Otherwise, grazing is non-axial. This research contains the analysis of both axial and non-axial grazing.\n\nIn [33], it is observed through simulations and experiments that the coefficient of restitution depends on the impact velocity of the particle by considering both the viscoelastic and the plastic deformations of particles occurring at low and high velocities, respectively. It has been proposed in [32] that at low impact velocities and for most materials with linear elastic range, the coefficient of restitution is of the form R ( v ) = 1 − av, where v is the velocity before collision and a is a constant. Also, for low impact velocities the restitution law can be considered quadratic [16]. This is why, we will use non-constant restitution coefficients in models with impacts in this study.\n\nFor investigation of autonomous differential equations, it is convenient to utilize properties of dynam- ical systems. They are the group property, continuation of solutions in both time directions, continuity and differentiability in parameters. The studies of discontinuous dynamical systems with transversal intersections of orbits and surfaces, B − smooth discontinuous flows, can be found in [1, 2]. In this research, the dynamics is approved for systems with grazing orbits. Moreover, the definitions of orbital stability and asymptotic phase are adapted to grazing cycles. The orbital stability theorem is proved, which can not be underestimated for theory of impact mechanisms.\n\nThe remaining part of the paper is organized as follows. In the next section, we will introduce necessary notations, definitions and theorems to specify discontinuous dynamical systems. In Section 3, it is shown how the dynamics can be linearized around grazing orbits. In Section 4, the theorem of orbital stability is adapted for grazing cycles. In Section 5, the small parameter analysis is applied near grazing orbits and bifurcation of cycles is observed. In last three sections, examples are presented to actualize the theoretical results numerically and analytically. Finally, Conclusion covers a summary of our study.\n\n2" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7615346685057819, + "doc_id": "7c53a4bdc851ded502f0ff07a42b4cdda92a6f3aa5690667a82b16e0a8bcb8a0", + "edit_distance": 0.16165951359084407, + "f1_score": 0.962686567164179, + "meteor": 0.850251137815392, + "precision": 0.9699248120300752, + "pred_md": "with the treatment effect ∆ = Y 1 -Y 0 where Y 0 and Y 1 denote the potential outcomes without and with some treatment, respectively. The question that I am interested in is how treatment effects or program benefits are distributed across the population.\n\nIn the context of welfare policy evaluation, distributional aspects of the effects are often of interest, e.g. 'which individuals are severely affected by the program?' or 'how are those benefits distributed across the population?'. As Heckman et al. (1997) pointed out, the DTE is particularly important when treatments produce nontransferable and nonredistributable benefits such as outcomes in health interventions, academic achievement in educational programs, and occupational skills in job training programs or when some individuals experience severe welfare changes at the tails of the impact distribution.\n\nAlthough most empirical research on program evaluation has focused on average treatment effects (ATE) or marginal distributions of potential outcomes, these parameters are limited in their ability to capture heterogeneity of the treatment effects at the individual level. For example, consider two projects with the same average benefits, one of which concentrates benefits among a small group of people, while the other distributes benefits evenly across the population. ATE cannot differentiate between the two projects because it shows only the central tendency of treatment effects as a location parameter, whereas the DTE captures information about the entire distribution. Marginal distributions of Y 0 and Y 1 are also uninformative about parameters on the individual specific heterogeneity in treatment effects including the fraction of the population that benefits from a program Pr ( Y 1 ≥ Y 0 ) , the fraction of the population that has gains or losses in a specific range Pr ( δ L ≤ Y 1 -Y 0 ≤ δ U ) , the q -quantile of the impact distribution inf { δ : F ∆ ( δ ) > q } , etc. See, e.g. Heckman et al. (1997), Abbring and Heckman (2007), and Firpo and Ridder (2008), among others for more details.\n\nDespite the importance of these parameters in economics, related empirical research has been hampered by difficulties associated with identifying the entire distribution of effects. The central challenge arises from a missing data problem: under mutually exclusive treatment participation, econometricians can observe either a treated outcome or an untreated outcome, but both potential outcomes Y 0 and Y 1 are never simultaneously observed for each agent. Therefore, the joint distribution of Y 0 and Y 1 is not typically exactly identified, which complicates identification of the DTE, which is point-identified only under strong assumptions about each individual's rank across the treatment status or specifications on the joint distribution of Y 0 and Y 1 , which are often not justified by economic theory or plausible priors.\n\nThis paper relies on partial identification to avoid strong assumptions and remain cautious of assumptiondriven conclusions. In the related literature, Manski (1997) established bounds on the DTE under monotone treatment response (MTR), which assumes that the treatment effects are nonnegative. Fan and Park (2009, 2010) and Fan and Wu (2010) adopted results from copula theory to establish bounds on the DTE, given\n\n2", + "recall": 0.9555555555555556, + "true_md": "with the treatment effect Δ = Y$_{1}$ − Y$_{0}$ where Y$_{0}$ and Y$_{1}$ denote the potential outcomes without and with some treatment, respectively. The question that I am interested in is how treatment effects or program benefits are distributed across the population.\n\nIn the context of welfare policy evaluation, distributional aspects of the effects are often of interest, e.g. ”which individuals are severely affected by the program?” or ”how are those benefits distributed across the population?”. As Heckman et al. (1997) pointed out, the DTE is particularly important when treat- ments produce nontransferable and nonredistributable benefits such as outcomes in health interventions, academic achievement in educational programs, and occupational skills in job training programs or when some individuals experience severe welfare changes at the tails of the impact distribution.\n\nAlthough most empirical research on program evaluation has focused on average treatment effects (ATE) or marginal distributions of potential outcomes, these parameters are limited in their ability to capture heterogeneity of the treatment effects at the individual level. For example, consider two projects with the same average benefits, one of which concentrates benefits among a small group of people, while the other distributes benefits evenly across the population. ATE cannot differentiate between the two projects because it shows only the central tendency of treatment effects as a location parameter, whereas the DTE captures information about the entire distribution. Marginal distributions of Y$_{0}$ and Y$_{1}$ are also uninformative about parameters on the individual specific heterogeneity in treatment effects including the fraction of the population that benefits from a program Pr ( Y$_{1}$ ≥ Y$_{0}$ ) , the fraction of the population that has gains or losses in a specific range Pr $^{(}$δ L ≤ Y$_{1}$ − Y$_{0}$ ≤ δ U $^{)}$, the q -quantile of the impact distribution inf { δ : F$_{Δ}$ ( δ ) > q } , etc. See, e.g. Heckman et al. (1997), Abbring and Heckman (2007), and Firpo and Ridder (2008), among others for more details.\n\nDespite the importance of these parameters in economics, related empirical research has been hampered by difficulties associated with identifying the entire distribution of effects. The central challenge arises from a missing data problem: under mutually exclusive treatment participation, econometricians can observe either a treated outcome or an untreated outcome, but both potential outcomes Y$_{0}$ and Y$_{1}$ are never simultaneously observed for each agent. Therefore, the joint distribution of Y$_{0}$ and Y$_{1}$ is not typically exactly identified, which complicates identification of the DTE, which is point-identified only under strong assumptions about each individual’s rank across the treatment status or specifications on the joint distribution of Y$_{0}$ and Y$_{1}$ , which are often not justified by economic theory or plausible priors.\n\nThis paper relies on partial identification to avoid strong assumptions and remain cautious of assumption- driven conclusions. In the related literature, Manski (1997) established bounds on the DTE under monotone treatment response (MTR), which assumes that the treatment effects are nonnegative. Fan and Park (2009, 2010) and Fan and Wu (2010) adopted results from copula theory to establish bounds on the DTE, given\n\n2" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6920248572243057, + "doc_id": "5c71aa2affcec690136a6466e9c70d18f292e3bcce4be29f6b64342ef330f769", + "edit_distance": 0.2059748427672956, + "f1_score": 0.9664429530201342, + "meteor": 0.8134318896842924, + "precision": 0.9863013698630136, + "pred_md": "blocks - the exact effect of cutting T at any particular height.\n\nWe define the MCMC algorithm Ψ( T cut= h ) ∈ Ψ M as the unique MCMC algorithm defined by scalar and/or block sampling applied to the parameter blocks that result from cutting T at height h . We note that for all T , Ψ( T cut=0 ) = Ψ scalar , and Ψ( T cut=1 ) = Ψ block .\n\nThere is no universally optimal value of the cut height h , as our findings in section 2 imply that any h ∈ [0 , 1] may maximize the efficiency E (Ψ( T cut= h )) for a particular model M . We recognize that a combination of distinct cut heights applied to different branches of T may produce the maximal efficiency, but we do not consider such strategies herein.\n\nRather than attempting to infer what might be an appropriate cut height for model M , we consider a range of potential cut heights, and the resulting MCMC algorithms. These comprise Ψ cand , the candidate set of MCMC algorithms for a particular iteration. This approach allows the blocking procedure to adjust according to the model, the posterior correlation structure, and the underlying computational architecture. The MCMC algorithm for each iteration ( i ≥ 1) is selected from among Ψ cand as that which produces the maximal overall efficiency.\n\nTo estimate the integrated autocorrelation time, and hence the algorithmic efficiency, of a chain of MCMC samples, we use the effectiveSize function in the R coda package (Plummer et al., 2006). The approach underlying this function - using a fitted autoregressive model to estimate the spectral density at frequency zero - has been seen to converge fastest among several methods to the true integrated autocorrelation time (Thompson, 2010).\n\nAs E (Ψ ) increases through the course of iterations, improved estimates of the posterior correlai tion are produced, giving the potential for more refined parameter blockings, and thus progressive increases in E (Ψ ) i in subsequent iterations. This iterative procedure continues until either (1) Ψ = Ψ i i -1 (identical algorithms are selected on consecutive iterations), or (2) E (Ψ ) i < E (Ψ i -1 ) (efficiency decreases between iterations). In practice, our procedure typically halts with terminating condition (1). This may be concurrent with terminating condition (2), on account of stochastic variation in sampling and/or runtime.\n\nWe select the output from our automated blocking procedure as Ψ AutoBlock , the MCMC algorithm selected in the final iteration. In our experience, Ψ AutoBlock is typically identical to the MCMC algorithm of the second-to-last iteration; that is, the procedure has converged to a stationary state. If a\n\n16", + "recall": 0.9473684210526315, + "true_md": "blocks – the exact effect of cutting T at any particular height.\n\nWe define the MCMC algorithm Ψ( T$_{cut=}$$\\_{h}$ ) ∈ Ψ$\\_{M}$ as the unique MCMC algorithm defined by scalar and/or block sampling applied to the parameter blocks that result from cutting T at height h . We note that for all T , Ψ( T$\\_{cut=0}$ ) = Ψ$\\_{scalar}$, and Ψ( T$\\_{cut=1}$ ) = Ψ$\\_{block}$.\n\nThere is no universally optimal value of the cut height h , as our findings in section 2 imply that any h ∈ [0 , 1] may maximize the efficiency E (Ψ( T$_{cut=}$$\\_{h}$ )) for a particular model M . We recognize that a combination of distinct cut heights applied to different branches of T may produce the maximal efficiency, but we do not consider such strategies herein.\n\nRather than attempting to infer what might be an appropriate cut height for model M , we consider a range of potential cut heights, and the resulting MCMC algorithms. These comprise Ψ$_{cand}$ , the candidate set of MCMC algorithms for a particular iteration. This approach allows the blocking procedure to adjust according to the model, the posterior correlation structure, and the underlying computational architecture. The MCMC algorithm for each iteration ( i ≥ 1) is selected from among Ψ$_{cand}$ as that which produces the maximal overall efficiency.\n\nTo estimate the integrated autocorrelation time, and hence the algorithmic efficiency, of a chain of MCMC samples, we use the effectiveSize function in the R coda package (Plummer et al., 2006). The approach underlying this function – using a fitted autoregressive model to estimate the spectral density at frequency zero – has been seen to converge fastest among several methods to the true integrated autocorrelation time (Thompson, 2010).\n\nAs E (Ψ$_{i}$) increases through the course of iterations, improved estimates of the posterior correla- tion are produced, giving the potential for more refined parameter blockings, and thus progressive increases in E (Ψ$_{i}$) in subsequent iterations. This iterative procedure continues until either (1) Ψ$_{i}$ = Ψ$_{i}$$\\_{−}$$_{1}$ (identical algorithms are selected on consecutive iterations), or (2) E (Ψ$_{i}$) < E (Ψ$_{i}$$\\_{−}$$_{1}$) (efficiency decreases between iterations). In practice, our procedure typically halts with terminat- ing condition (1). This may be concurrent with terminating condition (2), on account of stochastic variation in sampling and/or runtime.\n\nWe select the output from our automated blocking procedure as Ψ$_{AutoBlock}$, the MCMC algorithm selected in the final iteration. In our experience, Ψ$_{AutoBlock}$ is typically identical to the MCMC algo- rithm of the second-to-last iteration; that is, the procedure has converged to a stationary state. If a\n\n16" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.3658686951873083, + "doc_id": "3cb5c58a0c5439f49f10f26f4f975db6c6aea31bc408ad7ede7e6a0daa30cbdb", + "edit_distance": 0.6532438478747203, + "f1_score": 0.9037037037037037, + "meteor": 0.40429687210953374, + "precision": 0.953125, + "pred_md": "the corresponding linearization of Ψ ( ) 0 t is the system (5.78) .\n\nThe monodromy matrix of (5.78) can be evaluated as\n\n\n\nIt can be easily observed that the discontinuous solution intersects the line x 1 = 0 . For this reason, one can specify the first coordinate of the initial value as ζ 1 = ζ 0 1 ≡ 0 . In the light of these discussions and the formula (5.58) , the following equations are obtained:\n\n\n\nThen, taking the derivative of the system (5.85) with respect to T and ζ 2 , and calculating it at T = ω, ζ 2 = ζ 0 2 = 0 , and for µ = 0 , the following determinant is obtained\n\n/negationslash\n\nThus, condition ( A 6) holds. Then, utilizing Theorem 5.1, it is easy to conclude that for sufficiently small µ there exists a unique periodic solution of the system (5.69) with a period ≈ 2 π. It is true that for positive as well as negative µ. Moreover, these solutions are orbitally asymptotically stable because of the continuous dependence of solutions on parameter and initial values and they meet the discontinuity line transversally.\n\n\n\n/negationslash\n\nFor each fixed µ = 0 , solutions near to the periodic ones intersect the line of discontinuity Γ transversally once during the time approximately equal to the period. That is, the smoothness which is requested for the application of the Poincar ' e condition is valid, since the smoothness for the grazing point has already been verified. It is clear that there can not be another solutions with period close to 2 π. Thus, one can make the following conclusion. The original system (5.69) admits two orbitally stable periodic solutions, continuous and discontinuous, if µ < 0 . There is a single orbitally stable continuous solution (grazing) if µ = 0 . Additionally, there is a unique discontinuous orbitally stable periodic solution for positive values of the parameter. Consequently, grazing bifurcation of cycles appears for the system with small parameter.\n\nWe have obtained regular behavior in dynamics near grazing orbits by the Poincar ' e small parameter analysis. Nevertheless, outside the attractors irregular phenomena may be observed.\n\nIn Figure 9, the solutions of the system (5.69) with parameter µ = -0 2 . are depicted through simulations. The red arcs are the trajectory of the system (5.69) with initial value (0 7 . , 0 05) . and the blue arcs\n\n39", + "recall": 0.8591549295774648, + "true_md": "the corresponding linearization of Ψ$_{0}$( t ) is the system (5.78) .\n\nThe monodromy matrix of (5.78) can be evaluated as\n\nIt can be easily observed that the discontinuous solution intersects the line x$_{1}$ = 0 . For this reason, one can specify the first coordinate of the initial value as ζ$_{1}$ = ζ 0 1 ≡ 0 . In the light of these discussions and the formula (5.58) , the following equations are obtained:\n\n$$∣ ∣$^{∂}$$^{S}$$^{$_{1}$(}$$^{ω,}$$^{0}$$^{, ζ}$$^{0}$ $_{2}$, 0) ∂ T ∂ S $_{1}$( ω, 0 , ζ 0 $_{2}$, 0) ∂ζ$_{2}$ ∂ S $_{2}$( ω, 0 , ζ 0 $_{2}$, 0) ∂ T ∂ S $_{2}$( ω, 0 , ζ 0 $_{2}$, 0) ∂ζ$_{2}$ ∣ ∣ = ∣ ∣$^{0}$ − 0 . 0006 1 0 . 0009 ∣ = − 0 . 0006 ̸ = 0 . (5.86) ( A 6) holds. Then, utilizing Theorem 5.1, it is easy to conclude that for sufficiently small$$\n\n$$   0 . 939 − 0 . 00052 − 0 . 000427 1    . (5.84)$$\n\n$$S $_{1}$( T , 0 , ζ$_{2}$, µ ) = x$_{1}$ ( T , 0 , ζ$_{2}$, µ ) = 0 , S $_{2}$( T , 0 , ζ$_{2}$, µ ) = x$_{2}$ ( T , 0 , ζ$_{2}$, µ ) − ζ$_{2}$ = 0 . (5.85)$$\n\nWe have obtained regular behavior in dynamics near grazing orbits by the Poincar ` e small parameter analysis. Nevertheless, outside the attractors irregular phenomena may be observed.\n\nIn Figure 9, the solutions of the system (5.69) with parameter µ = − 0 . 2 are depicted through simula- tions. The red arcs are the trajectory of the system (5.69) with initial value (0 . 7 , 0 . 05) and the blue arcs\n\nFor each fixed µ ̸ = 0 , solutions near to the periodic ones intersect the line of discontinuity Γ transver- sally once during the time approximately equal to the period. That is, the smoothness which is requested for the application of the Poincar ` e condition is valid, since the smoothness for the grazing point has already been verified. It is clear that there can not be another solutions with period close to 2 π. Thus, one can make the following conclusion. The original system (5.69) admits two orbitally stable periodic solutions, continuous and discontinuous, if µ < 0 . There is a single orbitally stable continuous solution (grazing) if µ = 0 . Additionally, there is a unique discontinuous orbitally stable periodic solution for positive values of the parameter. Consequently, grazing bifurcation of cycles appears for the system with small parameter.\n\n∣$^{∂}$$^{S}$$^{$\\_{1}$(}$$^{ω,}$$^{0}$$^{, ζ}$$^{0}$ ∣ ∣$^{0}$ Thus, condition ( A 6) holds. Then, utilizing Theorem 5.1, it is easy to conclude that for sufficiently small µ there exists a unique periodic solution of the system (5.69) with a period ≈ 2 π. It is true that for positive as well as negative µ. Moreover, these solutions are orbitally asymptotically stable because of the continuous dependence of solutions on parameter and initial values and they meet the discontinuity line transversally.\n\nThen, taking the derivative of the system (5.85) with respect to T and ζ$_{2}$, and calculating it at T = ω, ζ$_{2}$ = ζ 0 2 = 0 , and for µ = 0 , the following determinant is obtained\n\n39" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.537470132030497, + "doc_id": "5ebb9679348c9bb8ff18a645b63c6f10686b8db65015bc8c4b6f086a52c480f2", + "edit_distance": 0.3201219512195122, + "f1_score": 0.8960000000000001, + "meteor": 0.7171309694596061, + "precision": 0.9180327868852459, + "pred_md": "25\n\nTable 2: Monte Carlo results under designs DGP 6DGP 10\n\nNote: Simulations based on 1,000 Monte Carlo experiments. ' CvM n ' and ' KS n ' stand for our proposed Cram' er-von Mises and Kolmogorov-Smirnov tests. ' T n ( c )' stands for Shaikh et al. (2009)'s test, with bandwidth h n = cn -1 / 8 . 'Max- ' and ' t Wald ' stand for, respectively, the Bonferroni-corrected Max- -test, and Wald balancing tests based on t ̂ ATE n ( X j ) defined in (4.2). ' CvM unp n ' and ' KS unp n ' are the Cram' er-von Mises and Kolmogorov-Smirnov tests based on the unprojected empirical process ˆ R n ( u ) defined in (2.10), whereas ' CvM trad n ' and ' KS trad n ' are defined analogously, but based on ˆ R trad n ( x ) as defined in (4.1). Finally, 'Bias', 'CI length', and 'Coverage' stands for the average simulated bias, estimated 95% confidence interval length, and 95% coverage probability for the ATE estimator ̂ ATE n as defined in (4.3). All entries are proportions of rejections at 5% level, in percentage points, except 'Bias' ,'CI length', and 'Coverage' (measure in percentage points), which are as described above. See the main text for further details.", + "recall": 0.875, + "true_md": "Table 2: Monte Carlo results under designs DGP 6- DGP 10\n\n25\n\nNote: Simulations based on 1,000 Monte Carlo experiments. “ CvM$_{n}$ ” and “ KS$_{n}$ ” stand for our proposed Cram´er-von Mises and Kolmogorov-Smirnov tests. “ T$_{n}$ ( c )” stands for Shaikh et al. (2009)’s test, with bandwidth h$_{n}$ = cn $_{−}$1 / $^{8}$. “Max- t ” and “ Wald ” stand for, respectively, the Bonferroni-corrected Max- t -test, and Wald balancing tests based on ̂ ATE$_{n}$ ( X $^{j}$) defined in (4.2). “ CvM unp n ” and “ KS unp n ” are the Cram´er-von Mises and Kolmogorov-Smirnov tests based on the unprojected empirical process ˆ R$_{n}$ ( u ) defined in (2.10), whereas “ CvM trad n ” and “ KS trad n ” are defined analogously, but based on ˆ R trad n ( x ) as defined in (4.1). Finally, “Bias”, “CI length’, and “Coverage” stands for the average simulated bias, estimated 95% confidence interval length, and 95% coverage probability for the ATE estimator ̂ ATE$_{n}$ as defined in (4.3). All entries are proportions of rejections at 5% level, in percentage points, except “Bias” ,“CI length”, and “Coverage” (measure in percentage points), which are as described above. See the main text for further details." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9421433468056022, + "doc_id": "2b4100f7b0587450e9765e8e21f29b81cebc88963f34f70f9cffc486ae4faae4", + "edit_distance": 0.07223476297968397, + "f1_score": 0.990950226244344, + "meteor": 0.9693565941705927, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "3\n\noptimal solution.\n\nMotivated by the above discussed facts, we consider the problem of optimized resource allocation in the uplink of multi-cell OFDMA networks. Firstly, we compute an upper bound (UB) and lower bound (LB) to the optimal average network throughput. Also, we study the effect of ICI on the performance of the near-optimal single cell resource allocation scheme proposed in [2] which leads to another simple lower bound. Simulation results show that this lower bound is slightly loose but can be computed easily. Since the computation of the optimal solution is exhaustive, we then propose a centralized sub-optimal resource allocation scheme which uses a geometric programming (GP) based power control phase in conjunction with a heuristic subcarrier allocation phase. The proposed scheme possesses an iterative and computationally intensive subcarrier allocation phase. However, it can serve as an effective benchmark for the less complex schemes even without the power control phase. Furthermore, the power control phase is discussed in this paper for both high and general signal to interference plus noise ratio (SINR) regimes. Finally, we propose and evaluate less complex centralized and distributed schemes that are suitable for practical implementation.\n\nThe rest of the paper is organized as follows: In Section II, the system model is defined and problem is formulated. In Section III, the bounds are derived and their complexity is analyzed. In Section IV and Section V, the proposed centralized and distributed schemes are explained. Section VI presents numerical results followed by concluding remarks in Section VII.\n\nNotation : Throughout the paper, we denote the sets of real and complex vectors of N elements by R N and C N , respectively. Matrices are represented using boldface upper case letters while bold face lower case letters are used for vectors. N (0 , σ 2 ) represents a zero mean Gaussian random variable with variance σ 2 .\n\n## II. SYSTEM MODEL AND PROBLEM FORMULATION\n\nA network of L cells with a set of K users in each cell l is considered. Full reuse of the spectrum is assumed in all the cells (i.e., frequency reuse =1). Each base station (BS) is assumed to have N orthogonal subcarriers, and each subcarrier can be allocated to a single user per cell.\n\nMarch 19, 2018\n\nDRAFT", + "recall": 0.9820627802690582, + "true_md": "3\n\noptimal solution.\n\nMotivated by the above discussed facts, we consider the problem of optimized resource allocation in the uplink of multi-cell OFDMA networks. Firstly, we compute an upper bound (UB) and lower bound (LB) to the optimal average network throughput. Also, we study the effect of ICI on the performance of the near-optimal single cell resource allocation scheme proposed in [2] which leads to another simple lower bound. Simulation results show that this lower bound is slightly loose but can be computed easily. Since the computation of the optimal solution is exhaustive, we then propose a centralized sub-optimal resource allocation scheme which uses a geometric programming (GP) based power control phase in conjunction with a heuristic subcarrier allocation phase. The proposed scheme possesses an iterative and computationally intensive subcarrier allocation phase. However, it can serve as an effective benchmark for the less complex schemes even without the power control phase. Furthermore, the power control phase is discussed in this paper for both high and general signal to interference plus noise ratio (SINR) regimes. Finally, we propose and evaluate less complex centralized and distributed schemes that are suitable for practical implementation.\n\nThe rest of the paper is organized as follows: In Section II, the system model is defined and problem is formulated. In Section III, the bounds are derived and their complexity is analyzed. In Section IV and Section V, the proposed centralized and distributed schemes are explained. Section VI presents numerical results followed by concluding remarks in Section VII.\n\nNotation : Throughout the paper, we denote the sets of real and complex vectors of N elements by R N and C $^{N}$, respectively. Matrices are represented using boldface upper case letters while bold face lower case letters are used for vectors. N (0 , σ $^{2}$) represents a zero mean Gaussian random variable with variance σ $^{2}$.\n\nA network of L cells with a set of K users in each cell l is considered. Full reuse of the spectrum is assumed in all the cells (i.e., frequency reuse =1). Each base station (BS) is assumed to have N orthogonal subcarriers, and each subcarrier can be allocated to a single user per cell.\n\n## II. SYSTEM MODEL AND PROBLEM FORMULATION\n\nDRAFT\n\nMarch 19, 2018" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.43658677258690826, + "doc_id": "28b8618e8f000631437f9a748623e124651ffa8e8d3245a3b6d5ab70adc6ffd0", + "edit_distance": 0.4616519174041298, + "f1_score": 0.9333333333333331, + "meteor": 0.5977384974249624, + "precision": 0.9722222222222222, + "pred_md": "10\n\nbe formulated for the general SINR regime as follows:\n\n\n\nNote that the numerator and denominator in (12) are posynomials and minimizing a ratio between two posynomials is referred to be a truly non-convex NP hard intractable problem known as complimentary GP. However, this problem can be transformed into GP by letting the denominator f ( p ) = p n,k,l h n,k,l + σ 2 + I n,l = ∑ L l =1 ∑ K k =1 u n,k,l ( p ) and approximating the denominator f ( p ) with a monomial using the arithmetic/geometric mean inequality as follows:\n\n\n\nwhere s n,k,l = u n,k,l ( p 0 ) f ( p 0 ) . Thus, the problem can be solved by extending the single condensation method presented in [14] for multi-cell scenario. The details of centralized scheme A are presented in Algorithm 2.\n\n## B. Centralized Scheme A: Complexity Analysis\n\nThe initial allocation phase has a complexity of O KN ( 2 ) which is the same as Algorithm 1. Next, we perform a one dimensional search for the user in cell l with maximum incremental throughput at subcarrier n . The process is repeated for each subcarrier and cell. Thus, the computational complexity of this step is O KNL ( ) . Since, the process continues until convergence, (i.e., M iterations), the complexity of this step can be written as O KNLM ( ) . Finally, the total complexity of subcarrier allocation phase is O KN ( 2 + NKLM ) .\n\nThe complexity of Phase II is difficult to determine, however, it can be measured in terms of the degree of difficulty (DoD) that in turn relies on the number of constraints and variables associated with the GP [15]. Since we are dealing with LK power constraints and LKN power variables, the total computational complexity of centralized scheme A is O KN ( 2 + NKLM ) + DoD LKN ( ) . Apparently it seems that implementing centralized GP/successive GP based schemes may not\n\nMarch 19, 2018\n\nDRAFT", + "recall": 0.8974358974358975, + "true_md": "10\n\nbe formulated for the general SINR regime as follows:\n\n$$minimize p$_{n,k,l}$ log$_{2}$ L ∏ l =1 K ∏ k =1 N ∏ n =1 ( σ 2 + I$_{n,l}$ p$_{n,k,l}$h$_{n,k,l}$ + σ 2 + I$_{n,l}$ ) α$_{n,k,l}$ subject to N ∑ n =1 α$_{n,k,l}$p$_{n,k,l}$ ≤ P$_{k,}$$_{max}$ , ∀ k, ∀ l (12)$$\n\nNote that the numerator and denominator in (12) are posynomials and minimizing a ratio between two posynomials is referred to be a truly non-convex NP hard intractable problem known as complimentary GP. However, this problem can be transformed into GP by letting the denominator f ( p ) = p$_{n,k,l}$h$_{n,k,l}$ + σ 2 + I$_{n,l}$ = ∑ L l =1 ∑ K k $_{=1}$u$_{n,k,l}$ ( p ) and approximating the denominator f ( p ) with a monomial using the arithmetic/geometric mean inequality as follows:\n\n$$L ∑ l =1 K ∑ k =1 u$_{n,k,l}$ ( p ) ≥ L ∏ l =1 K ∏ k =1 ( u$_{n,k,l}$ ( p ) s$_{n,k,l}$ ) s$_{n,k,l}$ (13)$$\n\nwhere s$_{n,k,l}$ = u$_{n,k,l}$ ( p$_{0}$ ) f ( p$_{0}$ ) . Thus, the problem can be solved by extending the single condensation method presented in [14] for multi-cell scenario. The details of centralized scheme A are presented in Algorithm 2.\n\nThe initial allocation phase has a complexity of O ( KN $^{2}$) which is the same as Algorithm 1. Next, we perform a one dimensional search for the user in cell l with maximum incremental throughput at subcarrier n . The process is repeated for each subcarrier and cell. Thus, the com- putational complexity of this step is O ( KNL ) . Since, the process continues until convergence, (i.e., M iterations), the complexity of this step can be written as O ( KNLM ) . Finally, the total complexity of subcarrier allocation phase is O ( KN 2 + NKLM ) .\n\nThe complexity of Phase II is difficult to determine, however , it can be measured in terms of the degree of difficulty (DoD) that in turn relies on the number ofconstraints and variables associated with the GP [15]. Since we are dealing with LK power constraints and LKN power variables, the total computational complexity of centralized scheme A is O ( KN $^{2}$+ NKLM ) + DoD ( LKN ) . Apparently it seems that implementing centralized GP/successive GP based schemes may not\n\nDRAFT\n\nMarch 19, 2018\n\n## B. Centralized Scheme A: Complexity Analysis" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.28593422059021095, + "doc_id": "8ed907ab715d4a08e87610872c805d3f7b891dad16f07bbace3bb9b421b7a05f", + "edit_distance": 0.523625843780135, + "f1_score": 0.9195402298850576, + "meteor": 0.4765871591343236, + "precision": 0.9248554913294798, + "pred_md": "2\n\nKABALAN GASPARD\n\nThe definition of primary elements has historically been ambiguous in Number Theory. In [2], Dalawat shows that definitions of primary elements in O K even differ by country (' p -primary', ' primaire ' and ' primar ') and, even though these definitions do form a chain of implications, they are not equivalent.\n\nWe also note that it is not true that if p an arbitrary odd prime and µ prime in O K , only one associate of µ is primary (for example, according to the above definition, both ± (4+3 ω ) are primary in the ring of integers of Q ( ω ) where ω = e 2 π √ -1 3 ).\n\nProposition 1. Let α ∈ O K (not necessarily prime) and suppose α prime to p in O K . Then there exists a k ∈ Z , unique (modulo p ), such that ζ k p α is primary.\n\nProof. Consider the ideal P = (1 -ζ p ) in O K . Then the norm of the ideal N P ( ) = p -1 ∏ i =1 (1 -ζ i p ) = p by the fact that Gal K ( : Q ) /similarequal U ( Z /p Z ). So P is a prime ideal and is thus of degree 1. So by Dedekind's Theorem in Algebraic Number Theory, any element of O K is the root of a monic polynomial of degree 1 in O K /P . So in the particular case of α , α -a 0 = 0 in O K /P for some a 0 ∈ Z . In other words, α ≡ a 0 (1 -ζ p ). So α -a 0 (1 -ζ p ) ∈ O K and so, by the same argument, α -a 0 (1 -ζ p ) ≡ a 1 (1 -ζ p ) for some a 1 ∈ Z . We stop repeating this here because multiplying the congruence by (1 -ζ p ), we now have a congruence modulo (1 -ζ p ) 2 , which is what we want to consider. More precisely, we now have α -a 0 ≡ a 1 (1 -ζ p ) (1 -ζ p ) 2 , so α ≡ a 0 + a 1 (1 -ζ p ) (1 -ζ p ) 2 .\n\nWe want to eliminate the (1 -ζ p ) term by multiplying both sides by ζ n p for some n ∈ Z . Notice that ζ p = (1 -(1 -ζ p )). So modulo (1 -ζ p ) 2 ,\n\n\n\nsince considering (1 -(1 -ζ p )) n as a polynomial in (1 -ζ p ), (1 -ζ p ) 2 divides (1 -ζ p ) i for i ≥ 2. So\n\n", + "recall": 0.9142857142857143, + "true_md": "2\n\n## KABALAN GASPARD\n\nThe definition of primary elements has historically been ambiguous in Number Theory. In [2], Dalawat shows that definitions of primary elements in O K even differ by country (” p -primary”, ” primaire ” and ” prim¨ ar ”) and, even though these definitions do form a chain of implications, they are not equivalent.\n\nWe also note that it is not true that if p an arbitrary odd prime and µ prime in O $_{K}$, only one associate of µ is primary (for example, according to the above definition, both ± (4+3 ω ) are primary in the ring of integers of Q ( ω ) where ω = e 2 $_{π}$√ − 1 3 ).\n\nProposition 1. Let α ∈ O K (not necessarily prime) and suppose α prime to p in O $_{K}$. Then there exists a k ∈ Z , unique (modulo p ), such that ζ k $_{p}$α is primary.\n\nProof. Consider the ideal P = (1 − ζ$_{p}$ ) in O $_{K}$. Then the norm of the ideal N ( P ) = $^{p}$− 1 ∏ i =1 (1 − ζ i $_{p}$) = p by the fact that Gal ( K : Q ) ≃ U ( Z /p Z ). So P is a prime ideal and is thus of degree 1. So by Dedekind’s Theorem in Algebraic Number Theory, any element of O K is the root of a monic polynomial of degree 1 in O $_{K}$/P . So in the particular case of α , α − a$_{0}$ = 0 in O $_{K}$/P for some a$_{0}$ ∈ Z . In other words, α ≡ a$_{0}$ (1 − ζ$_{p}$ ). So $^{α}$−a$_{0}$ $^{(1}$− ζ$_{p}$ ) ∈ O K and so, by the same argument, $^{α}$−a$_{0}$ $^{(1}$− ζ$_{p}$ ) ≡ a$_{1}$ (1 − ζ$_{p}$ ) for some a$_{1}$ ∈ Z . We stop repeating this here because multiplying the congruence by (1 − ζ$_{p}$ ), we now have a congruence modulo (1 − ζ$_{p}$ ) $^{2}$, which is what we want to consider. More precisely, we now have α − a$_{0}$ ≡ a$_{1}$ (1 − ζ$_{p}$ ) (1 − ζ$_{p}$ ) $^{2}$, so α ≡ a$_{0}$ + a$_{1}$ (1 − ζ$_{p}$ ) (1 − ζ$_{p}$ ) $^{2}$. n\n\n≡ − − We want to eliminate the (1 − ζ$_{p}$ ) term by multiplying both sides by ζ n p for some n ∈ Z . Notice that ζ$_{p}$ = (1 − (1 − ζ$_{p}$ )). So modulo (1 − ζ$_{p}$ ) $^{2}$,\n\n$$ζ n $_{p}$α ≡ ζ n $_{p}$a$_{0}$ + a$_{1}$ζ n $_{p}$(1 − ζ$_{p}$ ) ≡ a$_{0}$ (1 − (1 − ζ$_{p}$ )) n + a$_{1}$ (1 − ζ$_{p}$ )(1 − (1 − ζ$_{p}$ )) n ≡ a$_{0}$ (1 − n (1 − ζ$_{p}$ )) + a$_{1}$ (1 − ζ$_{p}$ )(1 − n (1 − ζ$_{p}$ ))$$\n\nsince considering (1 − (1 − ζ$_{p}$ )) n as a polynomial in (1 − ζ$_{p}$ ), (1 − ζ$_{p}$ ) 2 divides (1 − ζ$_{p}$ ) i for i ≥ 2. So n\n\n$$ζ n $_{p}$α ≡ a$_{0}$ + ( a$_{1}$ − na$_{0}$ )(1 − ζ$_{p}$ ) (1 − ζ$_{p}$ ) 2$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "bd42b6fac3891e83251cb74375e24d1799c462487c3183eea14ebd6112f25ab6", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999999838496827, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "(see [8]). If G is a cancellative monoid then Theorem 4.3 shows compression maps provide a correspondence between good G -gradings. Stable relations are used to describe a class of generalized incidence rings which are isomorphic to subrings of incidence rings over preorders by Theorem 4.5. The isomorphism, which is described in Lemma 4.2, is an isomorphism of G -graded rings.\n\nGood group gradings are considered in section 5. The main result of this section is Theorem 5.1, which extends [4, Theorem 4] to good group gradings for incidence algebras over preorders with crosscuts of length one or two. The conclusion of our theorem is modified to account for finite gradings. We show our result for preorders is related to generalized incidence rings in Corollary 5.2 and Example 5.3. We finish with example 5.4, which describes a partial order with a minimal element whose incidence algebra does not have the free-extension property. Unfortunately this is a counterexample to [4, Theorem 4].\n\n## 2 Generalized Incidence Rings\n\nBy definition a relation ρ on a set X is a subset of X × X . We adopt the usual convention of writing xρy if x, y ∈ X satisfy ( x, y ) ∈ ρ . The notation xρy is often shorter and more convenient, but the notation ( x, y ) ∈ ρ will be used when it is helpful to describe the relation as a set of ordered pairs. The directed graphs shown in Figure 1 represent reflexive relations. We omit loops in all diagrams so that the arrows match up with elements of the off-diagonal subset of relations.\n\nThe construction of generalized incidence rings does not require the relation to\n\n3", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "(see [8]). If G is a cancellative monoid then Theorem 4.3 shows compression maps provide a correspondence between good G -gradings. Stable relations are used to describe a class of generalized incidence rings which are isomorphic to subrings of incidence rings over preorders by Theorem 4.5. The isomorphism, which is described in Lemma 4.2, is an isomorphism of G -graded rings.\n\nGood group gradings are considered in section 5. The main result of this section is Theorem 5.1, which extends [4, Theorem 4] to good group gradings for incidence algebras over preorders with crosscuts of length one or two. The conclusion of our theorem is modified to account for finite gradings. We show our result for preorders is related to generalized incidence rings in Corollary 5.2 and Example 5.3. We finish with example 5.4, which describes a partial order with a minimal element whose incidence algebra does not have the free-extension property. Unfortunately this is a counterexample to [4, Theorem 4].\n\n## 2 Generalized Incidence Rings\n\nBy definition a relation ρ on a set X is a subset of X × X . We adopt the usual convention of writing xρy if x, y ∈ X satisfy ( x, y ) ∈ ρ . The notation xρy is often shorter and more convenient, but the notation ( x, y ) ∈ ρ will be used when it is helpful to describe the relation as a set of ordered pairs. The directed graphs shown in Figure 1 represent reflexive relations. We omit loops in all diagrams so that the arrows match up with elements of the off-diagonal subset of relations.\n\nThe construction of generalized incidence rings does not require the relation to\n\n3" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6052263049682511, + "doc_id": "9cca2c568ab2d5ca9e1cf11827b54351a8ef22b1705720752390a44a947ced62", + "edit_distance": 0.6912, + "f1_score": 0.9215189873417721, + "meteor": 0.6298036046265165, + "precision": 0.9578947368421052, + "pred_md": "variable is nonsmoking here, the estimated effect is the benefit of smoking cessation, which is in turn equal to the absolute value of the adverse effect of smoking. To identify marginal distributions, I impose the standard LATE assumptions following Abadie et al. (2002):\n\nAssumption 2 For almost all values of X :\n\n- (i) Independence: ( Y , Y 1 0 , D 1 , D 0 ) is jointly independent of Z given X .\n- (ii) Nontrivial Assignment: Pr( Z = 1 | X ) ∈ (0 1) , .\n\nglyph[negationslash]\n\n- (iii) First-stage: E D [ 1 | X ] = E D [ 0 | X . ]\n- (iv) Monotonicity: Pr( D 1 ≥ D X 0 | ) = 1 .\n\nAssumption 2(i) implies that the tax increase exogenously affects the smoking status conditional on observables and that any effect of the tax increase on infant birth weight must be via the change in smoking behavior. This is plausible in my application since the tax increase acts as an exogenous shock. 17 Assumption 2(ii) and (iii) obviously hold in this sample. Assumption 2(iv) is plausible since an increase in cigarette tax rates would never encourage smoking for each individual.\n\n## 5.4.1 The Marginal Treatment Effect and Local Average Treatment Effect\n\nFirst, I estimate marginal effects of smoking cessation to see how the mean effect varies with the individual's tendency to smoke. The marginal treatment effect (MTE) is defined as follows:\n\n\n\nwhere P ( Z, X ) = P D ( = 1 | Z, X , ) which is the probability of not smoking conditional on Z and X. In Heckman and Vytlacil (2005), the MTE is recovered as follows:\n\n\n\nSince the propensity score p ( Z, X ) = Pr ( D = 1 | Z, X ) is unobserved for each agent, I estimate it using the probit specification:\n\n\n\nThen with the estimated propensity score ̂ p ( Z, X ) in (15), I estimate the following outcome equation:\n\n\n\n17 The state cigarette tax rate and tax increases have been widely recognized as a valid instrument in the literature such as Evans and Ringel (1999), Lien and Evans (2005) and Hoderlein and Sasaki (2011), among others.\n\n37", + "recall": 0.8878048780487805, + "true_md": "variable is nonsmoking here, the estimated effect is the benefit of smoking cessation, which is in turn equal to the absolute value of the adverse effect of smoking. To identify marginal distributions, I impose the standard LATE assumptions following Abadie et al. (2002):\n\nAssumption 2(i) implies that the tax increase exogenously affects the smoking status conditional on observables and that any effect of the tax increase on infant birth weight must be via the change in smoking behavior. This is plausible in my application since the tax increase acts as an exogenous shock. 17 Assumption 2(ii) and (iii) obviously hold in this sample. Assumption 2(iv) is plausible since an increase in cigarette tax rates would never encourage smoking for each individual.\n\nFirst, I estimate marginal effects of smoking cessation to see how the mean effect varies with the indi- vidual’s tendency to smoke. The marginal treatment effect (MTE) is defined as follows:\n\nwhere P ( Z, X ) = P ( D = 1 | Z, X ) , which is the probability of not smoking conditional on Z and X. In Heckman and Vytlacil (2005), the MTE is recovered as follows:\n\nSince the propensity score p ( Z, X ) = Pr ( D = 1 | Z, X ) is unobserved for each agent, I estimate it using the probit specification:\n\nThen with the estimated propensity score ̂ p ( Z, X ) in (15), I estimate the following outcome equation:\n\n$^{17}$The state cigarette tax rate and tax increases have been widely recognized as a valid instrument in the literature such as Evans and Ringel (1999), Lien and Evans (2005) and Hoderlein and Sasaki (2011), among others.\n\n37\n\n## 5.4.1 The Marginal Treatment Effect and Local Average Treatment Effect\n\n- (i) Independence: ( Y$_{1}$, Y$_{0}$, D$_{1}$, D$_{0}$ ) is jointly independent of Z given X .\n\n- (ii) Nontrivial Assignment: Pr ( Z = 1 | X ) ∈ (0 , 1) .\n\n- (iii) First-stage: E [ D$_{1}$ | X ] ̸ = E [ D$_{0}$ | X ] .\n\n- (iv) Monotonicity: Pr ( D$_{1}$ ≥ D$_{0}$ | X ) = 1 .\n\nAssumption 2 For almost all values of X :\n\n$$MTE ( x, p ) = E [ Y$_{1}$ − Y$_{0}$ | X = x, P ( Z, X ) = p ] .$$\n\n$$MTE ( x, p ) = ∂ ∂p E [ Y | X = x, P ( Z, X ) = p ] .$$\n\n$$p ( Z, X ) = Φ ( α + βZ + X $^{′}$γ ) . (15)$$\n\n$$Y = µ ($_{̂}$ p ( Z, X ) , X ) + u (16)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5916811417807449, + "doc_id": "3926973bfd46c518eba2d7418cf91b200e441f5e211a9edfbbc44d5938b9e533", + "edit_distance": 0.3688394276629571, + "f1_score": 0.9379310344827584, + "meteor": 0.6976352945050801, + "precision": 0.9622641509433962, + "pred_md": "Table 3: Summary statistics and variable descriptions\n\nNote: Same data used by Millimet and Tchernis (2009). We thank Prof. Millimet for sharing the data with us. Original source is Environmental indicators and country-level controls are from Frankel and Rose (2005), whereas GATT/WTO membership data are from Rose (2004). N = number of observations. For further details, see the aforementioned papers.\n\nfor each outcome subsample. More specifically, for each outcome, we model the probability of a country being a GATT/WTO member ( D = 1 if member, D = 0 otherwise) by a standard Probit model and consider two different specifications:\n\nSpec1: X includes real per capita GDP, land area per capita, and polity.\n\nSpec2: X is defined as in Spec1 but adds pairwise interaction terms between each covariate.\n\nFor each of these specifications, we test the null hypothesis\n\n\n\nagainst H 1 , which is simply the negation of H 0 . Table 4 reports the testing results for each specification, together with normalized IPW estimator for the ATE based on (4.3). We also consider the normalized IPW estimator for the ATT ,\n\n\n\nwhere w treat 1 ,i = D i , w treat 0 ,i = (1 -D i ) q ( X , θ i ˆ n ) / ( 1 -q ( X , θ i ˆ n )) , and ¯ w treat d,n is the sample mean of w treat d,i , d = { 0 1 , } . The associated standard errors and p -values are in parenthesis and brackets, respectively. Following Millimet and Tchernis (2009), we trim observations with estimated propensity score outside the interval [0 05 . , 0 95] . to avoid denominators arbitrarily close to zero. Bootstrapped p -values for our proposed specification tests are based on 100,000 bootstrap draws . 7\n\nAt the 5% level we find that, based on the CvM n test statistic (2.8), Spec1 is rejected for per capita CO , 2 deforestation and energy depletion, but is not rejected for rural and urban\n\n7 Note that the variables in Spec1 and Spec2 are all functions of the same three covariates: real per capita GDP, land area per capita, and polity. As so, Spec1 and Spec2 have the same information content with respect to the reliability of Assumption 2.1.\n\n27", + "recall": 0.9147982062780269, + "true_md": "Table 3: Summary statistics and variable descriptions\n\nNote: Same data used by Millimet and Tchernis (2009). We thank Prof. Millimet for sharing the data with us. Original source is Environmental in- dicators and country-level controls are from Frankel and Rose (2005), whereas GATT/WTO membership data are from Rose (2004). N = number of observations. For further details, see the aforementioned papers.\n\nfor each outcome subsample. More specifically, for each outcome, we model the probability of a country being a GATT/WTO member ( D = 1 if member, D = 0 otherwise) by a standard Probit model and consider two different specifications:\n\nFor each of these specifications, we test the null hypothesis\n\nSpec1: X includes real per capita GDP, land area per capita, and polity.\n\nSpec2: X is defined as in Spec1 but adds pairwise interaction terms between each covariate.\n\nagainst H$_{1}$ , which is simply the negation of H$_{0}$ . Table 4 reports the testing results for each specification, together with normalized IPW estimator for the ATE based on (4.3). We also consider the normalized IPW estimator for the ATT ,\n\nwhere w treat 1 ,i = D$_{i}$ , w treat 0 ,i = (1 − D$_{i}$ ) q ( X$_{i}$, ˆ θ$_{n}$ ) / ( 1 − q ( X$_{i}$, ˆ θ$_{n}$ )) , and ¯ w treat d,n is the sample mean of w treat d,i , d = { 0 , 1 } . The associated standard errors and p -values are in parenthesis and brackets, respectively. Following Millimet and Tchernis (2009), we trim observations with estimated propensity score outside the interval [0 . 05 , 0 . 95] to avoid denominators arbitrarily close to zero. Bootstrapped p -values for our proposed specification tests are based on 100,000 bootstrap draws $^{7}$.\n\nAt the 5% level we find that, based on the CvM$_{n}$ test statistic (2.8), Spec1 is rejected for per capita CO$_{2}$, deforestation and energy depletion, but is not rejected for rural and urban\n\n7 Note that the variables in Spec1 and Spec2 are all functions of the same three covariates: real per capita GDP, land area per capita, and polity. As so, Spec1 and Spec2 have the same information content with respect to the reliability of Assumption 2.1.\n\n27\n\n$$̂ ATT$_{n}$ = 1 n n ∑ i $_{=1}$( w treat 1 ,i ¯ w treat 1 ,n − w treat 0 ,i ¯ w treat 0 ,n ) Y$_{i}$, (5.1)$$\n\n$$H$_{0}$ : ∃ θ$_{0}$ ∈ Θ : E [ D − Φ ( X $^{′}$θ$_{0}$ ) | Φ ( X $^{′}$θ$_{0}$ )] = 0 a.s.,$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5576089291943208, + "doc_id": "faab7fd50278ca3a74162d0d596f66f1bff6647e1bacbfed5fc99bdf903f695b", + "edit_distance": 0.3409638554216867, + "f1_score": 0.9131403118040088, + "meteor": 0.6587411669427956, + "precision": 0.9360730593607306, + "pred_md": "than unity. Hence, there exists real nonsingular matrix M, which satisfies\n\n\n\nThe remaining part of the proof is same as proof of Lemma 5.1.1 in [17]. /square\n\nThroughout this section, we will assume that ( A 4) is valid. That is, the variational system (3.13) consists of m periodic subsystems. For each of these systems, we find the matrix of monodromy, U j ( ω ) and denote corresponding Floquet multipliers by ρ ( j ) i , i = 1 , . . . , n, j = 1 , . . . , m. In the next part of the paper, the following assumption is needed.\n\n\n\nLemma 4.2 Assume that the assumptions (A4) and (A5) are valid. Then, for each j = 1 , . . . , m, the system (3.13) admits a fundamental matrix of the form\n\n\n\nwhere P j ∈ PC 1 ( R , ζ ) is a regular, ω -periodic matrix and H j is an ( n -1) × ( n -1) -matrix with all eigenvalues have negative real parts.\n\nThe proof of Lemma 4.2, can be done similar to that of Lemma 4.1.\n\nTheorem 4.1 Assume that conditions ( C 1) -( C 7) , ( C 10) , and the assumptions ( A 1) -( A 5) hold. Then ω - periodic solution Ψ( ) t of (2 1) . is orbitally asymptotically stable and has the asymptotic phase property.\n\nProof. Since of the group property, we may assume Ψ(0) is not a discontinuity point. Then, one can displace the origin to the point Ψ(0) , and the coordinate system can be rotated in such a way that the tangent vector Ψ ' 0 = Ψ (0) ' points in the direction of the positive x 1 axis i.e. the coordinates of this vector are Ψ = (Ψ ' 0 ' 01 , 0 , . . . , 0) , Ψ ' 01 > 0 .\n\nLet θ , i i ∈ Z , be the discontinuity moments of Ψ( ) t . Denote the path of the solution by η = { x ∈ X : x = Ψ( ) t , t ∈ R } . There exists a natural number p, such that θ i + p = θ i + ω for all i. Because of conditions ( C 1) -( C 7) and K -differentiability of Ψ( ) t there exists continuous dependence on initial data and consequently there exists a neighborhood of η such that any solutions which starts in the set will have moments of discontinuity which constitute a B -sequence with difference between neighbors approximately equal to the distance between corresponding neighbor moments of discontinuity of the periodic solution Ψ( ) t . Consequently we can determine variational system for Ψ( ) t , with points of discontinuity θ , i i ∈ Z .\n\nOn the basis of discussion in Section 2 1 . , one can define in the neighborhood of η a B -equivalent system of type (2.4). The variational system of it takes the form\n\n22", + "recall": 0.8913043478260869, + "true_md": "than unity. Hence, there exists real nonsingular matrix M, which satisfies\n\nThe remaining part of the proof is same as proof of Lemma 5.1.1 in [17]. □\n\nThroughout this section, we will assume that ( A 4) is valid. That is, the variational system (3.13) consists of m periodic subsystems. For each of these systems, we find the matrix of monodromy, U$_{j}$ ( ω ) and denote corresponding Floquet multipliers by ρ ( j ) i , i = 1 , . . . , n, j = 1 , . . . , m. In the next part of the paper, the following assumption is needed.\n\n(A5) ρ ( j ) 1 = 1 and | ρ ( j ) i | < 1 , i = 2 , . . . , n for each j = 1 , . . . , m.\n\nLemma 4.2 Assume that the assumptions (A4) and (A5) are valid. Then, for each j = 1 , . . . , m, the system (3.13) admits a fundamental matrix of the form\n\nwhere P$_{j}$ ∈ P C $^{1}$( $^{R}$, ζ ) is a regular, ω -periodic matrix and H$_{j}$ is an ( n − 1) × ( n − 1) − matrix with all eigenvalues have negative real parts.\n\nThe proof of Lemma 4.2, can be done similar to that of Lemma 4.1.\n\nTheorem 4.1 Assume that conditions ( C 1) − ( C 7) , ( C 10) , and the assumptions ( A 1) − ( A 5) hold. Then ω - periodic solution Ψ( t ) of (2 . 1) is orbitally asymptotically stable and has the asymptotic phase property.\n\nProof. Since of the group property, we may assume Ψ(0) is not a discontinuity point. Then, one can displace the origin to the point Ψ(0) , and the coordinate system can be rotated in such a way that the tangent vector Ψ ′ 0 = Ψ ′ (0) points in the direction of the positive x$_{1}$ axis i.e. the coordinates of this vector are Ψ ′ 0 = (Ψ ′ $_{01}$, 0 , . . . , 0) , Ψ ′ 01 > 0 .\n\nLet θ$_{i}$, i ∈ $^{Z}$, be the discontinuity moments of Ψ( t ) . Denote the path of the solution by η = { x ∈ X : x = Ψ( t ) , t ∈ $^{R}$} . There exists a natural number p, such that θ$_{i}$$\\_{+}$$_{p}$ = θ$_{i}$ + ω for all i. Because of condi- tions ( C 1) − ( C 7) and K − differentiability of Ψ( t ) there exists continuous dependence on initial data and consequently there exists a neighborhood of η such that any solutions which starts in the set will have moments of discontinuity which constitute a B − sequence with difference between neighbors approxi- mately equal to the distance between corresponding neighbor moments of discontinuity of the periodic solution Ψ( t ) . Consequently we can determine variational system for Ψ( t ) , with points of discontinuity θ$_{i}$, i ∈ $^{Z}$.\n\nOn the basis of discussion in Section 2 . 1 , one can define in the neighborhood of η a B − equivalent system of type (2.4). The variational system of it takes the form\n\n$$$_{M}$− $^{1}$exp(Λ ω ) M =   $^{1}$ 0 0 $_{C$_{1}$}$   .$$\n\n$$U$_{j}$ ( t ) = P$_{j}$ ( t )[1 , exp( H$_{j}$ω )] , t ∈ $^{R}$, (4.34)$$\n\n22" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.36575365893324463, + "doc_id": "c914cf89f64241582f3c6a53f52a428aa588a3ce521b73b7dbca3e4e0a2c0b13", + "edit_distance": 0.4842639593908629, + "f1_score": 0.9501187648456058, + "meteor": 0.5215347677430733, + "precision": 0.9615384615384616, + "pred_md": "Lemma 2 (Kantorovich duality) Let c : R × R → [0 , ∞ ] be a lower semicontinuous function and Φ c the set of all functions ( ϕ, ψ ) ∈ L 1 ( dµ 0 ) × L 1 ( dµ 1 ) with\n\n\n\nThen,\n\n\n\nAlso, the infimum in the left-hand side of (4) and the supremum in the right-hand side of (4) are both attainable, and the value of the supremum in the right-hand side does not change if one restricts ( ϕ, ψ ) to be bounded and continuous.\n\nRemark 1 Note that the cost function c ( y , y 0 1 ) may be infinite for some ( y , y 0 1 ) ∈ R 2 . Since c is a nonnegative function, the integral ∫ c ( y , y 0 1 ) dπ ∈ [0 , ∞ ] is well-defined.\n\nThis dual formulation provides a key to solve the optimization problem (2); I can overcome the difficulty associated with picking the maximizer joint distribution in the set Π ( µ , µ 0 1 ) by solving optimization with respect to given marginal distributions. The dual functions ϕ y ( 0 ) and ψ y ( 1 ) are Lagrange multipliers corresponding to the constraints π ( y 0 × R ) = µ 0 ( y 0 ) and π ( R × y 1 ) = µ 1 ( y 1 ) , respectively, for each y 0 and y 1 in Y 0 and Y 1 . Henceforth they are both assumed to be bounded and continuous without loss of generality. By the condition (3), each pair ( ϕ, ψ ) in Φ c satisfies\n\n\n\nAt the optimum for ( y , y 0 1 ) in the support of the optimal joint distribution, the inequality in (3) holds with equality and there exists a pair of dual functions ( ϕ, ψ ) that satisfies both inequalities in (5) with equalities.\n\nIn recent years, this dual formulation has turned out to be powerful and useful for various problems related to the equilibrium and decentralization in economics. See Ekeland (2005, 2010), Carlier (2010), Chiappori et al. (2010), Chernozhukov et al. (2010), and Galichon and Salani' (2012). e In econometrics, Galichon and Henry (2009) and Ekeland et al. (2010) showed that the dual formulation yields a test statistic for a set of theoretical restrictions in partially identified economic models. They set the cost function as an indicator for incompatibility of the structure with the data and derived a Kolmogorov Smirnov type test statistic from a well known dual representation theorem; see Lemma 3 below. Similarly, Galichon and Henry (2011) showed that the identified set of structural parameters in game theoretic models with pure strategy\n\n13", + "recall": 0.9389671361502347, + "true_md": "Lemma 2 (Kantorovich duality) Let c :$_{R}$ ×$_{R}$ → [0 , ∞ ] be a lower semicontinuous function and Φ$_{c}$ the set of all functions ( ϕ, ψ ) ∈ L $^{1}$( dµ$_{0}$ ) × L $^{1}$( dµ$_{1}$ ) with\n\nThen,\n\nAlso, the infimum in the left-hand side of (4) and the supremum in the right-hand side of (4) are both attainable, and the value of the supremum in the right-hand side does not change if one restricts ( ϕ, ψ ) to be bounded and continuous.\n\nRemark 1 Note that the cost function c ( y$_{0}$, y$_{1}$ ) may be infinite for some ( y$_{0}$, y$_{1}$ ) ∈$_{R}$ $^{2}$. Since c is a nonneg- ative function, the integral ∫ c ( y$_{0}$, y$_{1}$ ) dπ ∈ [0 , ∞ ] is well-defined.\n\nThis dual formulation provides a key to solve the optimization problem (2); I can overcome the difficulty associated with picking the maximizer joint distribution in the set Π ( µ$_{0}$, µ$_{1}$ ) by solving optimization with respect to given marginal distributions. The dual functions ϕ ( y$_{0}$ ) and ψ ( y$_{1}$ ) are Lagrange multipliers corresponding to the constraints π ( y$_{0}$ ×$_{R}$ ) = µ$_{0}$ ( y$_{0}$ ) and π ($_{R}$ × y$_{1}$ ) = µ$_{1}$ ( y$_{1}$ ) , respectively, for each y$_{0}$ and y$_{1}$ in Y$_{0}$ and Y$_{1}$ . Henceforth they are both assumed to be bounded and continuous without loss of generality. By the condition (3), each pair ( ϕ, ψ ) in Φ$_{c}$ satisfies\n\nAt the optimum for ( y$_{0}$, y$_{1}$ ) in the support of the optimal joint distribution, the inequality in (3) holds with equality and there exists a pair of dual functions ( ϕ, ψ ) that satisfies both inequalities in (5) with equalities.\n\nIn recent years, this dual formulation has turned out to be powerful and useful for various problems related to the equilibrium and decentralization in economics. See Ekeland (2005, 2010), Carlier (2010), Chiappori et al. (2010), Chernozhukov et al. (2010), and Galichon and Salani´ e (2012). In econometrics, Galichon and Henry (2009) and Ekeland et al. (2010) showed that the dual formulation yields a test statistic for a set of theoretical restrictions in partially identified economic models. They set the cost function as an indicator for incompatibility of the structure with the data and derived a Kolmogorov Smirnov type test statistic from a well known dual representation theorem; see Lemma 3 below. Similarly, Galichon and Henry (2011) showed that the identified set of structural parameters in game theoretic models with pure strategy\n\n13\n\n$$ϕ ( y$_{0}$ ) ≤ inf y$_{1}$ ∈$_{R}$ { c ( y$_{0}$, y$_{1}$ ) − ψ ( y$_{1}$ ) } , (5) ψ ( y$_{1}$ ) ≤ inf y$_{0}$ ∈$_{R}$ { c ( y$_{0}$, y$_{1}$ ) − ϕ ( y$_{0}$ ) } .$$\n\n$$ϕ ( y$_{0}$ ) + ψ ( y$_{1}$ ) ≤ c ( y$_{0}$, y$_{1}$ ) (3)$$\n\n$$inf π ∈ Π( µ$_{0}$,µ$_{1}$ ) ∫ c ( y$_{0}$, y$_{1}$ ) dπ = sup ( ϕ,ψ ) ∈ Φ$_{c}$ ( ∫ ϕ ( y$_{0}$ ) dµ$_{0}$ +$^{∫}$ ψ ( y$_{1}$ ) dµ$_{1}$$^{)}$ . (4)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.677720083976935, + "doc_id": "c177ef535ab626e292c1bbbeb72c143be6966c2fd7a9f1c4935ad5e7986b5afe", + "edit_distance": 0.5746606334841629, + "f1_score": 0.9230769230769231, + "meteor": 0.8006941074588518, + "precision": 0.972972972972973, + "pred_md": "are the trajectory of the system (5.69) with initial value (0 4 . , 0 05) . . It is seen that both red and blue trajectories approach the discontinuous periodic solution of (5.69), as time increases. So, the discontinuous cycle is orbitally stable trajectory. Moreover, the green one is a continuous periodic trajectory of (5.69) with initial value (0 , 0 05) . and it is orbitally asymptotically stable. To sum up, there exists two periodic solutions of (5.69) for the parameter µ = -0 2 . , one is continuous, the other one is discontinuous and both solutions are orbitally asymptotically stable.\n\nFigure 9: The blue, red and green arcs constitute the trajectories of system (5.69) with µ = -0 2 . . The first two approach as time increases to the discontinuous limit cycle and the third one is the continuous limit cycle itself.\n\nFigure 9: The blue, red and green arcs constitute the trajectories of system (5.69) with µ = -0 2 . . The first two approach as time increases to the discontinuous limit cycle and the third one is the continuous limit cycle itself.\n\n1\n\nIn Fig. 10, the red arcs are the orbit of the system with initial value (0 , 0 1) . and the blue arcs are the trajectory of it with initial value (0 , 0 4) . . Both trajectories approach to the discontinuous cycle of system (5.69), as time increases. Thus, Fig. 10 illustrates the existence of the orbitally stable discontinuous periodic solution if µ = 0 2 . .\n\nFigure 10: The red and blue arcs constitute the trajectories of the system (5.69) with µ = 0 2 . . Both orbits approach to the discontinuous limit cycle, as time increases.\n\nFigure 10: The red and blue arcs constitute the trajectories of the system (5.69) with µ = 0 2 . . Both orbits approach to the discontinuous limit cycle, as time increases.\n\n## 6 Conclusion\n\nIn literature, the dynamics in the neighborhood of the grazing points [7]-[10], [13], [18], [19], [36]-[39] is generally analyzed through maps of the Poincar ' e type. The main analysis is conducted on complex\n\n40", + "recall": 0.8780487804878049, + "true_md": "are the trajectory of the system (5.69) with initial value (0 . 4 , 0 . 05) . It is seen that both red and blue tra- jectories approach the discontinuous periodic solution of (5.69), as time increases. So, the discontinuous cycle is orbitally stable trajectory. Moreover, the green one is a continuous periodic trajectory of (5.69) with initial value (0 , 0 . 05) and it is orbitally asymptotically stable. To sum up, there exists two periodic solutions of (5.69) for the parameter µ = − 0 . 2 , one is continuous, the other one is discontinuous and both solutions are orbitally asymptotically stable.\n\nIn Fig. 10, the red arcs are the orbit of the system w ith initial value (0 , 0 . 1) and the blue arcs are the trajectory of it with initial value (0 , 0 . 4) . Both trajecto ries approach to the discontinuous cycle of system (5.69), as time increases. Thus, Fig. 10 illustrates the existence of the orbitally stable discontinuous periodic solution if µ = 0 . 2 .\n\nIn literature, the dynamics in the neighborhood of the grazing points [7]-[10], [13], [18], [19], [36]-[39] is generally analyzed through maps of the Poincar ´ e type. The main analysis is conducted on complex\n\n## 6 Conclusion\n\nFigure 9: The blue, red and green arcs constitute the t rajectories of system (5.69) with µ = − 0 . 2 . The first two approach as time increases to the discontinuou s limit cycle and the third one is the continuous limit cycle itself.\n\nFigure 10: The red and blue arcs constitute the traje ctories of the system (5.69) with µ = 0 . 2 . Both orbits approach to the discontinuous limit cycle, as tim e increases.\n\n40" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.537195013140048, + "doc_id": "94e8407a5ec97c575f1eedb436678a53feccab8608ac5096acd9125805e9a8e0", + "edit_distance": 0.3170731707317073, + "f1_score": 0.8823529411764706, + "meteor": 0.7357397738740536, + "precision": 0.9090909090909091, + "pred_md": "42\n\nTable B.1: Monte Carlo results under designs DGP 1DGP 5 with trimming\n\nNote: Simulations based on 1,000 Monte Carlo experiments. ' CvM n ' and ' KS n ' stand for our proposed Cram' er-von Mises and Kolmogorov-Smirnov tests. ' T n ( c )' stands for Shaikh et al. (2009)'s test, with bandwidth h n = cn -1 / 8 . 'Max- ' and ' t Wald ' stand for, respectively, the Bonferroni-corrected Max- -test, and Wald balancing tests based on t ̂ ATE n ( X j ) defined in (4.2) but with observations with estimated propensity score outside [0 05 . , 0 95] trimmed. ' . CvM unp n ' and ' KS unp n ' are the Cram' er-von Mises and KolmogorovSmirnov tests based on the unprojected empirical process ˆ R n ( u ) defined in (2.10), whereas ' CvM trad n ' and ' KS trad n ' are defined analogously, but based on ˆ R trad n ( x ) as defined in (4.1). Finally, 'Bias', 'CI length', and 'Coverage' stand for the average simulated bias, estimated 95% confidence interval length, and 95% coverage probability for the ATE estimator ̂ ATE n as defined in (4.3), but with observations with estimated propensity score outside [0 05 . , 0 95] trimmed. All entries are proportions of rejections at 5% level, in percentage . points, except 'Bias' ,'CI length', and 'Coverage' (measure in percentage points), which are as described above. See the main text for further details.", + "recall": 0.8571428571428571, + "true_md": "Table B.1: Monte Carlo results under designs DGP 1- DGP 5 with trimming\n\n42\n\nNote: Simulations based on 1,000 Monte Carlo experiments. “ CvM$_{n}$ ” and “ KS$_{n}$ ” stand for our proposed Cram´er-von Mises and Kolmogorov-Smirnov tests. “ T$_{n}$ ( c )” stands for Shaikh et al. (2009)’s test, with bandwidth h$_{n}$ = cn $_{−}$1 / $^{8}$. “Max- t ” and “ Wald ” stand for, respectively, the Bonferroni-corrected Max- t -test, and Wald balancing tests based on ̂ ATE$_{n}$ ( X $^{j}$) defined in (4.2) but with observations with estimated propensity score outside [0 . 05 , 0 . 95] trimmed. “ CvM unp n ” and “ KS unp n ” are the Cram´er-von Mises and Kolmogorov- Smirnov tests based on the unprojected empirical process ˆ R$_{n}$ ( u ) defined in (2.10), whereas “ CvM trad n ” and “ KS trad n ” are defined analogously, but based on ˆ R trad n ( x ) as defined in (4.1). Finally, “Bias”, “CI length’, and “Coverage” stand for the average simulated bias, estimated 95% confidence interval length, and 95% coverage probability for the ATE estima- tor ̂ ATE$_{n}$ as defined in (4.3), but with observations with estimated propensity score outside [0 . 05 , 0 . 95] trimmed. All entries are proportions of rejections at 5% level, in percentage points, except “Bias” ,“CI length”, and “Coverage” (measure in percentage points), which are as described above. See the main text for further details." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8423925854251465, + "doc_id": "99b12df56bd30c013bed17cd9026660004f5745344accb2020c7b263b868e580", + "edit_distance": 0.15476190476190477, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9796487612092598, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Table 3: Means and Standard Deviations\n\nNote: The table reports means and standard deviations (in brackets) for the sample used in this study. The columns showing differences in means (by assignment or treatment status) report the t-statistic (in parentheses) for the null hypothesis of equality in means.\n\nFigure 14: Distribution functions of infant birth weight of smokers and nonsmokers\n\nFigure 14: Distribution functions of infant birth weight of smokers and nonsmokers\n\n36", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Table 3: Means and Standard Deviations\n\nNote: The table reports means and standard deviations (in brackets) for the sample used in this study. The columns showing differences in means (by assignment or treatment status) report the t-statistic (in parentheses) for the null hypothesis of equality in means.\n\nFigure 14: Distribution functions of infant birth weight of smokers and nonsmokers\n\n36" + }, + { + "bleu": 3.564946641591868e-05, + "doc_id": "7fbeaaed014a5c22f937c87b06dcf36a5bb12e885ab66930310d97c0c46ffca8", + "edit_distance": 0.9870759289176091, + "f1_score": 0.44999999999999996, + "meteor": 0.029431616341030194, + "precision": 0.782608695652174, + "pred_md": "where\n\nwith\n\n\n\n(ii) Under convex treatment response,\n\n\n\n\n\n25\n\nFigure 11: The DTE under concave/convex treatment response\n\nFigure 11: The DTE under concave/convex treatment response\n\n\n\n", + "recall": 0.3157894736842105, + "true_md": "Figure 11: The DTE under concave/convex treatment response\n\nwhere\n\nwith\n\n(ii) Under convex treatment response,\n\n25\n\n$$F L $_{Δ}$( δ ) = ∫ sup { a$_{k}$ } ∞ k = −∞ ∞ ∑ k = −∞ max { F$_{1}$$_{,W}$ ( S$_{1}$a$_{k}$$_{+1}$ + (1 − S$_{1}$ ) w | w ) − F$_{0}$$_{,W}$ ( a$_{k}$ | w ) , 0 } dF$_{W}$ , F U Δ ( δ ) = 1 +$^{∫}$ inf y ∈$_{R}$ { min ( F$_{1}$$_{,W}$ ( y | w ) − F$_{0}$$_{,W}$ ( y − δ | w )) , 0 } dF$_{W}$ .$$\n\n$$0 ≤ a$_{k}$$_{+1}$ − a$_{k}$ ≤ δ, T$_{0}$ ( b$_{k}$ + δ ) + T$_{1}$ ≤ b$_{k}$$_{+1}$ ≤ b$_{k}$, where T$_{1}$ = t$_{1}$ − t$_{0}$ t$_{1}$ − t$_{W}$ , T$_{0}$ = 1 − T$_{1}$.$$\n\n$$F L $_{Δ}$( δ ) = sup { a$_{k}$ } ∞ k = −∞ ∞ ∑ k = −∞ ∫ max { F$_{1}$$_{,W}$ ( a$_{k}$$_{+1}$ | w ) − F$_{0}$$_{,W}$ ( a$_{k}$ | w ) , 0 } dF$_{W}$ , F U Δ ( δ ) = 1 +$^{∫}$ inf { b$_{k}$ } ∞ k = −∞ ∞ ∑ k = −∞ { min$^{(}$ F$_{1}$$_{,W}$ ( 1 T$_{0}$ b$_{k}$$_{+1}$ − T$_{1}$ T$_{0}$ w | w$^{)}$ − F$_{0}$$_{,W}$ ( b$_{k}$ | w )$^{)}$ , 0$^{}}$ dF$_{W}$ ,$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.858489136988452, + "doc_id": "d52236cb33e872ff013810d7b04decb821422bf87aec80222dd376ce000c0528", + "edit_distance": 0.18048780487804877, + "f1_score": 0.9336384439359267, + "meteor": 0.9076843572571797, + "precision": 0.9532710280373832, + "pred_md": "arXiv:1410.5885v1 [stat.ME] 21 Oct 2014\n\n## Identifying the Distribution of Treatment Effects under Support Restrictions\n\nJu Hyun Kim ∗\n\nAugust 27, 2018\n\n## Abstract\n\nThe distribution of treatment effects (DTE) is often of interest in the context of welfare policy evaluation. In this paper, I consider partial identification of the DTE under known marginal distributions and support restrictions on the potential outcomes. Examples of such support restrictions include monotone treatment response, concave treatment response, convex treatment response, and the Roy model of self-selection. To establish informative bounds on the DTE, I formulate the problem as an optimal transportation linear program and develop a new dual representation to characterize the identification region with respect to the known marginal distributions. I use this result to derive informative bounds for concrete economic examples. I also propose an estimation procedure and illustrate the usefulness of my approach in the context of an empirical analysis of the effects of smoking on infant birth weight. The empirical results show that monotone treatment response has a substantial identifying power for the DTE when the marginal distributions of the potential outcomes are given.\n\n## 1 Introduction\n\nIn this paper, I study partial identification of the distribution of treatment effects (DTE) under a broad class of restrictions on potential outcomes. The DTE is defined as follows: for any fixed δ ∈ R ,\n\n\n\n∗ University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill, juhkim@email.unc.edu. I am greatly indebted to my advisor Bernard Salani´ e for numerous discussions and his support throughout this project. I am also grateful to Jushan Bai, Pierre-Andr´ Chiappori, e Serena Ng, and Christoph Rothe for their encouragement and helpful comments. This paper has benefited from discussions with Andrew Chesher, Xavier D'Haultfoeuille, Alfred Galichon, Kyle Jurado, Shakeeb Khan, Toru Kitagawa, Dennis Kristensen, Seunghoon Na, Salvador Navarro, Byoung Park, and Charles Zheng. While writing this paper, I was generously supported by a Wueller pre-dissertation award fellowship from the Economics Department at Columbia University. All errors are mine.\n\n1", + "recall": 0.9147982062780269, + "true_md": "# Identifying the Distribution of Treatment Effects under Support Restrictions\n\nJu Hyun Kim ∗\n\nAugust 27, 2018\n\nThe distribution of treatment effects (DTE) is often of interest in the context of welfare policy eval- uation. In this paper, I consider partial identification of the DTE under known marginal distributions and support restrictions on the potential outcomes. Examples of such support restrictions include mono- tone treatment response, concave treatment response, convex treatment response, and the Roy model of self-selection. To establish informative bounds on the DTE, I formulate the problem as an optimal transportation linear program and develop a new dual representation to characterize the identification region with respect to the known marginal distributions. I use this result to derive informative bounds for concrete economic examples. I also propose an estimation procedure and illustrate the usefulness of my approach in the context of an empirical analysis of the effects of smoking on infant birth weight. The empirical results show that monotone treatment response has a substantial identifying power for the DTE when the marginal distributions of the potential outcomes are given.\n\nIn this paper, I study partial identification of the distribution of treatment effects (DTE) under a broad class of restrictions on potential outcomes. The DTE is defined as follows: for any fixed δ ∈$_{R}$ ,\n\n$^{∗}$University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill, juhkim@email.unc.edu. I am greatly indebted to my advisor Bernard Salani´e for numerous discussions and his support throughout this project. I am also grateful to Jushan Bai, Pierre-Andr´e Chiappori, Serena Ng, and Christoph Rothe for their encouragement and helpful comments. This paper has benefited from discussions with Andrew Chesher, Xavier D’Haultfoeuille, Alfred Galichon, Kyle Jurado, Shakeeb Khan, Toru Kitagawa, Dennis Kristensen, Seunghoon Na, Salvador Navarro, Byoung Park, and Charles Zheng. While writing this paper, I was generously supported by a Wueller pre-dissertation award fellowship from the Economics Department at Columbia University. All errors are mine.\n\n1\n\n$$F$_{Δ}$ ( δ ) = Pr (Δ ≤ δ ) ,$$\n\narXiv:1410.5885v1 [stat.ME] 21 Oct 2014\n\n## 1 Introduction\n\n## Abstract" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6752458080445665, + "doc_id": "c779f83a6819d82619c133b0d89cb29df9a6ff44c4a983f9bda9395ae709ba86", + "edit_distance": 0.3154639175257732, + "f1_score": 0.9398907103825136, + "meteor": 0.7514666939846193, + "precision": 0.9662921348314607, + "pred_md": "Table 6: The proportion of potential low birth weight infants\n\nTable 7: The proportion of potential low birth weight infants\n\nwhile 4% babies to nonsmokers would have low birth weight. Similar results are obtained for white women and women aged 26-35. A surprising result is obtained for SCCG women. Only 3.5% of babies to SCCG women who smoke would have low birth weight. This implies that SCCG women who smoke are less likely to have low birth weight infants than women with less education who smoke. One possible explanation for this is that women with higher education are more likely to have healthier lifestyles and this substantially lowers the risk of having low infant birth weight for smoking.\n\n## 5.4.3 Bounds on the Distribution and Quantiles of Treatment Effects for Compliers\n\nRecall the sharp lower bound under MTR: for δ ≥ 0 ,\n\n\n\nwhere 0 ≤ a k +1 -a k ≤ δ for each integer k . To compute the new sharp lower bound from the estimated marginal distribution functions, I plug in the estimates of marginal distribution functions ̂ F 0 and ̂ F 1 proposed in the previous subsection. I follow the same computation procedure as in the numerical example of Section 4. I discuss the procedure in Appendix B in detail.\n\nI propose the following plug-in estimators of my new lower bound and Makarov bounds based on the estimators of marginal distributions ̂ F 0 and ̂ F 1 proposed in the previous subsection. 20 Note that the infinite sum in the lower bound under MTR in Corollary 1 reduces to the finite sum for the bounded support. For any fixed δ > 0 , the consistency of my estimators is immediate.\n\nIn Figure 17, I plot my new lower bound and Makarov bounds for the entire sample. One can see\n\n20 Fan and Park (2010a, 2010b) proposed the same type plug-in estimators for Makarov bounds and studied their asymptotic properties. They used empirical distributions to estimate marginal distributions point-identified in randomized experiments.\n\n42", + "recall": 0.9148936170212766, + "true_md": "Table 6: The proportion of potential low birth weight infants\n\nTable 7: The proportion of potential low birth weight infants\n\nwhile 4% babies to nonsmokers would have low birth weight. Similar results are obtained for white women and women aged 26-35. A surprising result is obtained for SCCG women. Only 3.5% of babies to SCCG women who smoke would have low birth weight. This implies that SCCG women who smoke are less likely to have low birth weight infants than women with less education who smoke. One possible explanation for this is that women with higher education are more likely to have healthier lifestyles and this substantially lowers the risk of having low infant birth weight for smoking.\n\nRecall the sharp lower bound under MTR: for δ ≥ 0 ,\n\nwhere 0 ≤ a$_{k}$$\\_{+1}$ − a$\\_{k}$ ≤ δ for each integer k . To compute the new sharp lower bound from the estimated marginal distribution functions, I plug in the estimates of marginal distribution functions ̂ F$\\_{0}$ and ̂ F$\\_{1}$ proposed in the previous subsection. I follow the same computation procedure as in the numerical example of Section 4. I discuss the procedure in Appendix B in detail.\n\nI propose the following plug-in estimators of my new lower bound and Makarov bounds based on the estimators of marginal distributions ̂ F$_{0}$ and ̂ F$_{1}$ proposed in the previous subsection. 20 Note that the infinite sum in the lower bound under MTR in Corollary 1 reduces to the finite sum for the bounded support. For any fixed δ > 0 , the consistency of my estimators is immediate.\n\nIn Figure 17, I plot my new lower bound and Makarov bounds for the entire sample. One can see\n\n$^{20}$Fan and Park (2010a, 2010b) proposed the same type plug-in estimators for Makarov bounds and studied their asymptotic properties. They used empirical distributions to estimate marginal distributions point-identified in randomized experiments.\n\n42\n\n## 5.4.3 Bounds on the Distribution and Quantiles of Treatment Effects for Compliers\n\n$$F L Δ ( δ ) = sup { a$_{k}$ } ∞ k = −∞ ∞ ∑ k = −∞ max { F$_{1}$ ( a$_{k}$$_{+1}$ ) − F$_{0}$ ( a$_{k}$ ) , 0 } , (18)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8189440000328906, + "doc_id": "669d42c0001f9418de666047b25dc194f965b4118a96a439f87aaecefc1e6aef", + "edit_distance": 0.13345521023765997, + "f1_score": 0.9754901960784313, + "meteor": 0.8858313400258299, + "precision": 0.995, + "pred_md": "## 2.2 Algorithmic Efficiency\n\nWe first consider MCMC algorithmic efficiency, independent of any computational requirements. This measure of efficiency solely represents the best mixing, or equivalently the least autocorrelation, or the highest effective sample size, without consideration for the computational (time) requirements of generating a set of samples. After reviewing the definition of MCMC algorithmic efficiency which is based upon integrated autocorrelation time, we study the use of Ψ scalar or Ψ block for particular choices of M , and quantify the effects on this measure of efficiency.\n\nAs in Roberts and Rosenthal (2001), we define MCMC algorithmic efficiency as the effective sample size divided by the chain length. This represents the rate of production of effectively independent samples per MCMC sample. The effective sample size (ESS) of an MCMC chain is defined as ESS = N/τ , where N is the chain length and τ is the integrated autocorrelation time. For a scalar chain of samples X , X , . . . 0 1 , which is assumed to have converged to its stationary distribution, Straatsma, Berendsen, and Stam (1986) define the integrated autocorrelation time as τ = 1 + 2 ∑ ∞ i =1 cor( X , X 0 i ). τ may be interpreted as the number of MCMC samples required, on average, for an independent sample to be drawn. Our measure of algorithmic efficiency is thus τ -1 , the number of effective samples per actual sample (Thompson, 2010). τ -1 also characterizes the speed at which expectations of arbitrary functions of the sample values approach their stationary values (Roberts and Sahu, 1997), and no less satisfies the natural intuition that larger values indicate better performance.\n\nFor MCMC algorithm Ψ acting on model M with parameters Θ, we define the algorithmic efficiency of each θ ∈ Θ as A (Ψ , θ ) = τ -1 , where τ is the integrated autocorrelation time of the samples of θ generated from repeated application of Ψ. Overloading notation, we define the algorithmic efficiency of MCMC algorithm Ψ as A (Ψ) = min θ ∈ Θ A (Ψ , θ ). This definition is motivated by noting that often an MCMC produces seemingly good mixing of many model dimensions but poor mixing of just a few dimensions. In this case, the poorly mixing dimensions will limit the validity of the entire posterior sample (although this is not universally true of all model structures). Therefore, we take the conservative approach, and our general aim is to maximize the algorithmic efficiency for the parameter exhibiting the slowest mixing.\n\n7", + "recall": 0.9567307692307693, + "true_md": "## 2.2 Algorithmic Efficiency\n\nWe first consider MCMC algorithmic efficiency, independent of any computational requirements. This measure of efficiency solely represents the best mixing, or equivalently the least autocorrelation, or the highest effective sample size, without consideration for the computational (time) requirements of generating a set of samples. After reviewing the definition of MCMC algorithmic efficiency which is based upon integrated autocorrelation time, we study the use of Ψ$_{scalar}$ or Ψ$_{block}$ for particular choices of M , and quantify the effects on this measure of efficiency.\n\nAs in Roberts and Rosenthal (2001), we define MCMC algorithmic efficiency as the effective sample size divided by the chain length. This represents the rate of production of effectively independent samples per MCMC sample. The effective sample size (ESS) of an MCMC chain is defined as ESS = N/τ , where N is the chain length and τ is the integrated autocorrelation time. For a scalar chain of samples X$_{0}$, X$_{1}$, . . . , which is assumed to have converged to its stationary distribution, Straatsma, Berendsen, and Stam (1986) define the integrated autocorrelation time as τ = 1 + 2 ∑ ∞ i $_{=1}$cor( X$_{0}$, X$_{i}$ ). τ may be interpreted as the number of MCMC samples required, on average, for an independent sample to be drawn. Our measure of algorithmic efficiency is thus τ − $^{1}$, the number of effective samples per actual sample (Thompson, 2010). τ − 1 also characterizes the speed at which expectations of arbitrary functions of the sample values approach their stationary values (Roberts and Sahu, 1997), and no less satisfies the natural intuition that larger values indicate better performance.\n\nFor MCMC algorithm Ψ acting on model M with parameters Θ, we define the algorithmic efficiency of each θ ∈ Θ as A (Ψ , θ ) = τ − $^{1}$, where τ is the integrated autocorrelation time of the samples of θ generated from repeated application of Ψ. Overloading notation, we define the algo- rithmic efficiency of MCMC algorithm Ψ as A (Ψ) = min$_{θ}$$\\_{∈}$$_{Θ}$ A (Ψ , θ ). This definition is motivated by noting that often an MCMC produces seemingly good mixing of many model dimensions but poor mixing of just a few dimensions. In this case, the poorly mixing dimensions will limit the validity of the entire posterior sample (although this is not universally true of all model structures). Therefore, we take the conservative approach, and our general aim is to maximize the algorithmic efficiency for the parameter exhibiting the slowest mixing.\n\n7" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4987978451897949, + "doc_id": "5df6a5e991be81450054ccd6b7b2fd621cc8d1e8357d8e3d3718af5b53dafc35", + "edit_distance": 0.4722222222222222, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9214884446744787, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "21\n\nFig. 1. Comparison of all proposed schemes for L =2 cells, (a) Scenario A (b) Scenario B: Users are placed at 0.9 km from BS\n\nFig. 1. Comparison of all proposed schemes for L =2 cells, (a) Scenario A (b) Scenario B: Users are placed at 0.9 km from BS\n\nMarch 19, 2018\n\nDRAFT", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "21\n\nFig. 1. Comparison of all proposed schemes for L =2 cells, (a) Scenario A (b) Scenario B: Users are placed at 0.9 km from BS\n\nDRAFT\n\nMarch 19, 2018" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7489036502052642, + "doc_id": "b5e2388fe7c51b1af529cb82a0ee726b2959883909c72bd2517e0bb9c2c887da", + "edit_distance": 0.26040554962646745, + "f1_score": 0.8530259365994236, + "meteor": 0.8504084316046125, + "precision": 0.8604651162790697, + "pred_md": "Hirano, K., Imbens, G. W., and Ridder, G. (2003), 'Efficient estimation of average treatment effects using the estimated propensity score,' Econometrica , 71(4), 1161-1189.\n\n- Huber, M., Lechner, M., and Wunsch, C. (2013), 'The performance of estimators based on the propensity score,' Journal of Econometrics , 175(1), 1-21.\n- Imbens, G. W., and Wooldridge, J. M. (2009), 'Recent developments in the econometrics of program evaluation,' Journal of Economic Literature , 47(1), 5-86.\n\nJanssen, A. (2000), 'Global power functions of goodness of fit tests,' Annals of Statistics , 28(1), 239-253. Khan, S., and Tamer, E. (2010), 'Irregular Identification, Support Conditions, and Inverse Weight Estimation,' Econometrica , 78(6), 2021-2042.\n\nLee, S., Seo, M. H., and Shin, Y. (2011), 'Testing for threshold effects in regression models,' Journal of the American Statistical Association , 106(493), 220-231.\n\nLee, W.-S. (2013), 'Propensity score matching and variations on the balancing test,' Empirical Economics , 44(1), 47-80.\n\nLeeb, H., and Ptscher, B. M. (2005), 'Model selection and inference: o Facts and fiction,' Econometric Theory , 21(1), 21-59.\n\n- Li, Q., and Wang, S. (1998), 'A simple consistent bootstrap test for a parametric regression function,' Journal of Econometrics , 87(1), 145-165.\n- Mammen, E. (1993), 'Bootstrap and wild bootstrap for high dimensional linear models,' The Annals of Statistics , 21(1), 255-285.\n\nMillimet, D. L., and Tchernis, R. (2009), 'On the Specification of Propensity Scores, With Applications to the Analysis of Trade Policies,' Journal of Business & Economic Statistics , 27(3), 397-415.\n\n- Newey, W. K., and McFadden, D. (1994), 'Large sample estimation and hypothesis testing,' in Handbook of Econometrics , Vol. 4, Amsterdam: North-Holland:, chapter 36, pp. 2111-2245.\n- Neyman, J. (1959), 'Optimal Asymptotic Tests of Composite Statistical Hypotheses,' in Probability and Statistics: The Harald Cramer Vaolume , ed. U. Grenander, Stockholm:, pp. 213-234.\n\nRao, C. R. (1965), Linear Statistical Inference and its Applications , New York: Wiley.\n\nRose, A. K. (2004), 'Do WTO members have more liberal trade policy?,' Journal of International Economics , 63(2), 209-235.\n\nRosenbaum, P. R. (1987), 'Model-Based Direct Adjustment,' Journal of the American Statistical Association , 82(398), 387-394.\n\nRosenbaum, P. R., and Rubin, D. B. (1983), 'The central role of the propensity score in observational studies for causal effects,' Biometrika , 70(1), 41-55.\n\nRosenbaum, P. R., and Rubin, D. B. (1985), 'Constructing a control group using multivariate matched sampling methods that incorporate the propensity score,' The American Statistician , 39(1), 33-38.\n\nSasaki, Y., and Ura, T. (2018), 'Inference for moments of ratios with robustness against large trimming bias and unknown convergence rate,' arXiv preprint arXiv:1709.00981v4 , pp. 1-60.\n\nSerfling, R. J. (1980), Approximation Theorems of Mathematical Statistics , New York: Wiley.\n\nShaikh, A. M., Simonsen, M., Vytlacil, E. J., and Yildiz, N. (2009), 'A specification test for the propensity score using its distribution conditional on participation,' Journal of Econometrics , 151(1), 33-46.\n\nShorack, G. R. (2000), Probability for Statisticians , Vol. 97 of Springer Texts in Statistics , 1st edn, Cham: Springer.\n\nS/suppressoczy'ski, l n T., and Wooldridge, J. M. (2018), 'A General Double Robustness Result for Estimating Average Treatment Effects,' Econometric Theory , 34(1), 112-133.\n\nSmith, J. A., and Todd, P. E. (2005), 'Does matching overcome LaLonde's critique of nonexperimental estimators?,' Journal of Econometrics , 125, 305-353.\n\nStrasser, H. (1990), 'Global extrapolation of local efficiency,' Statistics and Decisions , 8, 11-26.\n\nStute, W. (1997), 'Nonparametric model checks for regression,' The Annals of Statistics , 25(2), 613-641.\n\n46", + "recall": 0.8457142857142858, + "true_md": "- Hirano, K., Imbens, G. W., and Ridder, G. (2003), “Efficient estimation of average treatment effects using the estimated propensity score,” Econometrica , 71(4), 1161–1189.\n\n- Huber, M., Lechner, M., and Wunsch, C. (2013), “The performance of estimators based on the propensity score,” Journal of Econometrics , 175(1), 1–21.\n\n- Imbens, G. W., and Wooldridge, J. M. (2009), “Recent developments in the econometrics of program evaluation,” Journal of Economic Literature , 47(1), 5–86.\n\n- Khan, S., and Tamer, E. (2010), “Irregular Identification, Support Conditions, and Inverse Weight Estimation,” Econometrica , 78(6), 2021–2042.\n\nJanssen, A. (2000), “Global power functions of goodness of fit tests,” Annals of Statistics , 28(1), 239–253.\n\n- Lee, S., Seo, M. H., and Shin, Y. (2011), “Testing for threshold effects in regression models,” Journal of the American Statistical Association , 106(493), 220–231.\n\n- Lee, W.-S. (2013), “Propensity score matching and variations on the balancing test,” Empirical Eco- nomics , 44(1), 47–80.\n\n- Leeb, H., and P¨ otscher, B. M. (2005), “Model selection and inference: Facts and fiction,” Econometric Theory , 21(1), 21–59.\n\n- Li, Q., and Wang, S. (1998), “A simple consistent bootstrap test for a parametric regression function,” Journal of Econometrics , 87(1), 145–165.\n\n- Mammen, E. (1993), “Bootstrap and wild bootstrap for high dimensional linear models,” The Annals of Statistics , 21(1), 255–285.\n\n- Millimet, D. L., and Tchernis, R. (2009), “On the Specification of Propensity Scores, With Applications to the Analysis of Trade Policies,” Journal of Business & Economic Statistics , 27(3), 397–415.\n\n- Newey, W. K., and McFadden, D. (1994), “Large sample estimation and hypothesis testing,” in Handbook of Econometrics , Vol. 4, Amsterdam: North-Holland:, chapter 36, pp. 2111–2245.\n\n- Neyman, J. (1959), “Optimal Asymptotic Tests of Composite Statistical Hypotheses,” in Probability and Statistics: The Harald Cramer Vaolume , ed. U. Grenander, Stockholm:, pp. 213–234.\n\n- Rose, A. K. (2004), “Do WTO members have more liberal trade policy?,” Journal of International Economics , 63(2), 209–235.\n\n- Rosenbaum, P. R. (1987), “Model-Based Direct Adjustment,” Journal of the American Statistical Asso- ciation , 82(398), 387–394.\n\nRao, C. R. (1965), Linear Statistical Inference and its Applications , New York: Wiley.\n\n- Rosenbaum, P. R., and Rubin, D. B. (1983), “The central role of the propensity score in observational studies for causal effects,” Biometrika , 70(1), 41–55.\n\n- Rosenbaum, P. R., and Rubin, D. B. (1985), “Constructing a control group using multivariate matched sampling methods that incorporate the propensity score,” The American Statistician , 39(1), 33–38.\n\n- Sasaki, Y., and Ura, T. (2018), “Inference for moments of ratios with robustness against large trimming bias and unknown convergence rate,” arXiv preprint arXiv:1709.00981v4 , pp. 1–60.\n\n- Shaikh, A. M., Simonsen, M., Vytlacil, E. J., and Yildiz, N. (2009), “A specification test for the propensity score using its distribution conditional on participation,” Journal of Econometrics , 151(1), 33–46.\n\n- Shorack, G. R. (2000), Probability for Statisticians , Vol. 97 of Springer Texts in Statistics , 1st edn, Cham: Springer.\n\n- SGLYPH<suppress>loczy´ nski, T., and Wooldridge, J. M. (2018), “A General Double Robustness Result for Estimating Average Treatment Effects,” Econometric Theory , 34(1), 112–133.\n\n- Smith, J. A., and Todd, P. E. (2005), “Does matching overcome LaLonde’s critique of nonexperimental estimators?,” Journal of Econometrics , 125, 305–353.\n\nSerfling, R. J. (1980), Approximation Theorems of Mathematical Statistics , New York: Wiley.\n\nStrasser, H. (1990), “Global extrapolation of local efficiency,” Statistics and Decisions , 8, 11–26.\n\nStute, W. (1997), “Nonparametric model checks for regression,” The Annals of Statistics , 25(2), 613–641.\n\n46" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.042955473938280746, + "doc_id": "e1281a5a2f0735bf766ab2ed4aa885d37492fedc6f83290300d35b482afdfa99", + "edit_distance": 0.7879818594104309, + "f1_score": 0.8904109589041096, + "meteor": 0.18841028942141702, + "precision": 0.9027777777777778, + "pred_md": "Furthermore, I show that it is innocuous to assume that b k + δ ≤ t 1 -t W t 0 -t W b k +1 -t 1 -t 0 t 0 -t W w at the optimum. If there exists an integer k s.t.\n\n\n\none can always construct { ˜ B k } ∞ k = -∞ satisfying\n\n\n\nby defining ˜ B k = ( -∞ , b ˜ k ) as follows:\n\n\n\nFigure. A.7: ∞ ∑ k = -∞ max { µ 0 ,W ( B k | w ) -µ 1 ,W ( B D k | w , ) 0 } ≤ ∞ ∑ k = -∞ max { µ 0 ,W ( ˜ B k | w ) -µ 1 ,W ( ˜ B D k | w ) , 0 }\n\nFigure. A.7: ∞ ∑ k = -∞ max { µ 0 ,W ( B k | w ) -µ 1 ,W ( B D k | w , ) 0 } ≤ ∞ ∑ k = -∞ max { µ 0 ,W ( ˜ B k | w ) -µ 1 ,W ( ˜ B D k | w ) , 0 }\n\nThe inequality in (A.14) is illustrated in Figure A.7, which describes\n\n\n\n\n\n71", + "recall": 0.8783783783783784, + "true_md": "Furthermore, I show that it is innocuous to assume that b$_{k}$ + δ ≤ t$_{1}$ − t$_{W}$ t$_{0}$ − t$_{W}$ b$_{k}$$\\_{+1}$ − t$\\_{1}$ − t$\\_{0}$ t$\\_{0}$ − t$\\_{W}$ w at the optimum. If there exists an integer k s.t.\n\none can always construct { ˜ B$_{k}$ } ∞ k = −∞ satisfying\n\nby defining ˜ B$_{k}$ = $^{(}$−∞ ,$_{˜}$ b$_{k}$ ) as follows:\n\nThe inequality in (A.14) is illustrated in Figure A.7, which describes\n\nFigure. A.7: ∞ ∑ k = −∞ max $^{{}$µ$_{0}$$\\_{,W}$ ( B$\\_{k}$ | w ) − µ$\\_{1}$$_{,W}$ $^{(}$B D k | w $^{)}$, 0 $^{}}$≤ ∞ ∑ k = −∞ max $^{{}$µ$_{0}$$\\_{,W}$ ( ˜ B$\\_{k}$ | w $^{)}$− µ$\\_{1}$$_{,W}$ ( ˜ B D k | w $^{)}$, 0 }\n\n71\n\n$$∞ ∑ k = −∞ max $^{{}$µ$_{0}$$_{,W}$ ( B$_{k}$ | w ) − µ$_{1}$$_{,W}$ $^{(}$B D k | w $^{)}$, 0 $^{}}$, ∞ ∑ k = −∞ max $^{{}$µ$_{0}$$_{,W}$ ( ˜ B$_{k}$ | w $^{)}$− µ$_{1}$$_{,W}$ ( ˜ B D k | w $^{)}$, 0 }$$\n\n$$˜ b$_{j}$ = b$_{j}$ for j ≤ k, ˜ b$_{k}$$_{+1}$ = t$_{0}$ − t$_{W}$ t$_{1}$ − t$_{W}$ ( b$_{k}$ + δ ) + t$_{1}$ − t$_{0}$ t$_{1}$ − t$_{W}$ w, ˜ b$_{j}$$_{+1}$ = b$_{j}$ for j ≥ k + 1 .$$\n\n$$∞ ∑ k = −∞ max $^{{}$µ$_{0}$$_{,W}$ ( B$_{k}$ | w ) − µ$_{1}$$_{,W}$ $^{(}$B D k | w $^{)}$, 0 } ≤ ∞ ∑ k = −∞ max $^{{}$µ$_{0}$$_{,W}$ ( ˜ B$_{k}$ | w $^{)}$− µ$_{1}$$_{,W}$ ( ˜ B D k | w $^{)}$, 0 $^{}}$, (A.14)$$\n\n$$b$_{k}$ + δ > t$_{1}$ − t$_{W}$ t$_{0}$ − t$_{W}$ b$_{k}$$_{+1}$ − t$_{1}$ − t$_{0}$ t$_{0}$ − t$_{W}$ w$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.15588925650085722, + "doc_id": "aee08004de31a2c9d207670da97883cdc8c6bf561dc5296257f74d9032ea1795", + "edit_distance": 0.6837481698389458, + "f1_score": 0.8888888888888888, + "meteor": 0.3561036434632059, + "precision": 0.9142857142857143, + "pred_md": "Figure 8: A D k for A k = ( a , k ∞ ) and A k +1 = ( a k +1 , ∞ ) .\n\nFigure 8: A D k for A k = ( a , k ∞ ) and A k +1 = ( a k +1 , ∞ ) .\n\nFor any ( y , y ' 0 ' 1 ) and ( y '' 0 , y '' 1 ) with y '' 0 > y ' 0 in the support of the optimal joint distribution,\n\n\n\nThe first inequality in the second line follows from y '' 1 ≥ y '' 0 > y ' 0 The second inequality in the third line is satisfied because 1 { y 1 -y 0 < δ } is nondecreasing in y . 0 Consequently, ϕ is nondecreasing and thus A k = ( a , k ∞ ) for a k ∈ -∞ ∞ [ , ] at the optimum.\n\nA D k is obtained from A k as follows: for δ > 0 and A k = ( a , k ∞ ) and A k +1 = ( a k +1 , ∞ ) ,\n\n\n\nAt the optimum, { a k } ∞ k = -∞ should satisfy a k +1 ≤ a k + δ for each integer k . The rigorous proof is provided in Appendix A. I demonstrate this graphically here. As shown in Figure 7(c), my improved lower bound represents the sum of Fr'chet lower bounds on the probability of a sequence of disjoint triangles. e Suppose\n\n22", + "recall": 0.8648648648648649, + "true_md": "Figure 8: A D k for A$_{k}$ = ( a$_{k}$, ∞ ) and A$_{k}$$\\_{+1}$ = ( a$\\_{k}$$_{+1}$, ∞ ) .\n\nFor any ( y ′ $_{0}$, y ′ $_{1}$) and ( y ′′ $_{0}$, y ′′ $_{1}$) with y ′′ 0 > y ′ 0 in the support of the optimal joint distribution,\n\nThe first inequality in the second line follows from y ′′ 1 ≥ y ′′ 0 > y ′ 0 The second inequality in the third line is satisfied because 1 { y$_{1}$ − y$_{0}$ < δ } is nondecreasing in y$_{0}$. Consequently, ϕ is nondecreasing and thus A$_{k}$ = ( a$_{k}$, ∞ ) for a$_{k}$ ∈ [ −∞ , ∞ ] at the optimum.\n\nA D k is obtained from A$_{k}$ as follows: for δ > 0 and A$_{k}$ = ( a$_{k}$, ∞ ) and A$_{k}$$\\_{+1}$ = ( a$\\_{k}$$_{+1}$, ∞ ) ,\n\nAt the optimum, { a$_{k}$ } ∞ k = −∞ should satisfy a$_{k}$$\\_{+1}$ ≤ a$\\_{k}$ + δ for each integer k . The rigorous proof is provided in Appendix A. I demonstrate this graphically here. As shown in Figure 7(c), my improved lower bound represents the sum of Fr´ echet lower bounds on the probability of a sequence of disjoint triangles. Suppose\n\n22\n\n$$A D k = { y$_{1}$ ∈$_{R}$|∃ y$_{0}$ > a$_{k}$ s.t. δ ≤ y$_{1}$ − y$_{0}$ } ∪ { y$_{1}$ ∈$_{R}$|∃ y$_{0}$ > a$_{k}$$_{+1}$ s.t. 0 ≤ y$_{1}$ − y$_{0}$ < δ } = ( a$_{k}$ + δ, ∞ ) ∪ ( a$_{k}$$_{+1}$, ∞ ) = (min { a$_{k}$ + δ, a$_{k}$$_{+1}$ } , ∞ ) .$$\n\n$$ϕ ( y ′ $_{0}$) = 1 { y ′ 1 − y ′ 0 < δ } − ψ ( y ′ $_{1}$) ≤ 1 { y ′′ 1 − y ′ 0 < δ } − ψ ( y ′′ $_{1}$) ≤ 1 { y ′′ 1 − y ′′ 0 < δ } − ψ ( y ′′ $_{1}$) = ϕ ( y ′′ $_{0}$) .$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9088503969295474, + "doc_id": "360c829bf3b316045bebe541f21ff67f3d84790ec7f3f0f1c6638814700e2986", + "edit_distance": 0.06575342465753424, + "f1_score": 0.9344262295081965, + "meteor": 0.9424245427403045, + "precision": 0.9606741573033708, + "pred_md": "interpret as dynamic fluctuations in brain connectivity can be predicted on the basis of observed functional connectivity estimated over longer time scales. This predictability arises as a consequence of constraints imposed by the use of Pearson's correlation to estimate dynamic functional connectivity. For two variables (e.g. regional BOLD signals) to be strongly correlated over long intervals, it must be the case that, on average, they are also strongly correlated over shorter intervals. This relationship becomes stronger as the strength of correlation increases, which may explain why the least variable functional connections tend to be the strongest (Gonzalez-Castillo et al., 2014). One possible strategy to help mitigate such issues is to Fisher transform the Pearson correlation coefficients (Fisher, 1915). The Fisher transformation effectively improves the normality of correlation coefficients so that they are no longer bound within the interval [ -1 1]. , Thus, as the strength of correlation between two variables increases, their variability stays approximately the same (See Figure S1). However, because the Fisher transform is monotonic the conditional dynamic functional connections estimated from Fisher-transformed data are basically unchanged from those estimated using Pearson's correlation coefficients (Figure S2).\n\nThere are other strategies for generating dynamic functional connectivity, including using non-overlapping windows. In this approach, the full fMRI BOLD time series are segmented into non-overlapping intervals and a connectivity matrix created for each window as before. This approach has the obvious advantage that the window at time t is independent of the window at time t +1. In the supplementary section, we show, qualitatively, that the use of non-overlapping windows to estimate dynamic functional connectivity does not help reduce the dependence of dynamic functional connectivity magnitude on the static correlation magnitude. For a single subject we window the 885 TRs into nonoverlapping windows of 5, 10, 25, 50, 100, and 200 TRs. We show that in all\n\n25", + "recall": 0.9095744680851063, + "true_md": "interpret as dynamic fluctuations in brain connectivity can be predicted on the basis of observed functional connectivity estimated over longer time scales. This predictability arises as a consequence of constraints imposed by the use of Pear- son’s correlation to estimate dynamic functional connectivity. For two variables (e.g. regional BOLD signals) to be strongly correlated over long intervals, it must be the case that, on average, they are also strongly correlated over shorter intervals. This relationship becomes stronger as the strength of correlation in- creases, which may explain why the least variable functional connections tend to be the strongest (Gonzalez-Castillo et al., 2014). One possible strategy to help mitigate such issues is to Fisher transform the Pearson correlation coefficients (Fisher, 1915). The Fisher transformation effectively improves the normality of correlation coefficients so that they are no longer bound within the interval [ − 1 , 1]. Thus, as the strength of correlation between two variables increases, their variability stays approximately the same (See Figure S1). However, be- cause the Fisher transform is monotonic the conditional dynamic functional connections estimated from Fisher-transformed data are basically unchanged from those estimated using Pearson’s correlation coefficients (Figure S2).\n\nThere are other strategies for generating dynamic functional connectivity, in- cluding using non-overlapping windows. In this approach, the full fMRI BOLD time series are segmented into non-overlapping intervals and a connectivity ma- trix created for each window as before. This approach has the obvious advantage that the window at time t is independent of the window at time t + 1. In the supplementary section, we show, qualitatively, that the use of non-overlapping windows to estimate dynamic functional connectivity does not help reduce the dependence of dynamic functional connectivity magnitude on the static cor- relation magnitude. For a single subject we window the 885 TRs into non- overlapping windows of 5, 10, 25, 50, 100, and 200 TRs. We show that in all\n\n25" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9514544964411913, + "doc_id": "c255d500e18d4c58704ac6abf0e02b0d57b81748ef3937b73c8b48931ce0906d", + "edit_distance": 0.039603960396039604, + "f1_score": 0.9888475836431225, + "meteor": 0.9943965653163985, + "precision": 0.9851851851851852, + "pred_md": "Figure 1: Directed graphs determining reflexive relations.\n\nFigure 1: Directed graphs determining reflexive relations.\n\nbe a preorder. To define multiplication we will assume X is locally finite, that is, every interval of X is a finite set. (Recall an interval is a subset of the form [ x, y ] = { z ∈ X : xρz and zρy } for some x, y ∈ X .)\n\nglyph[negationslash]\n\nThroughout the rest of this section ρ is a locally finite relation on a set X and R is an associative ring with unity. Let I ( X,ρ,R ) denote the set of all functions f : X × X → R such that f ( x, y ) = 0 implies xρy . Componentwise operations determine an R -module such that given r ∈ R and f, g ∈ I ( X,ρ,R ) the functions rf, f + g ∈ I ( X,ρ,R ) satisfy ( rf ) ( x, y ) = r ( f ( x, y )) and ( f + )( g x, y ) = f ( x, y ) + g ( x, y ) for all x, y ∈ X .\n\nThe balance property is satisfied by w, x, y, z ∈ X if any of the relations wρx , xρy , yρz , and wρz do not hold, or all four relations hold and wρy if and only if xρz . The relation is balanced if it is reflexive and the balance property is satisfied by all w, x, y, z ∈ X . The relations determined by directed graphs (a), (b), and (c) in Figure 1 are not balanced because they are all missing arrows. Note that a reflexive and transitive relation is balanced but there are balanced relations, such as the one determined by (d) in Figure 1, which are not transitive.\n\nIn case ρ is balanced we can combine the proof of [1, Proposition 1.2] with the assumption that X is locally finite to construct a ring multiplication with identity\n\n4", + "recall": 0.9925373134328358, + "true_md": "Figure 1: Directed graphs determining reflexive relations.\n\nbe a preorder. To define multiplication we will assume X is locally finite, that is, every interval of X is a finite set. (Recall an interval is a subset of the form [ x, y ] = { z ∈ X : xρz and zρy } for some x, y ∈ X .)\n\nThroughout the rest of this section ρ is a locally finite relation on a set X and R is an associative ring with unity. Let I ( X, ρ, R ) denote the set of all functions f : X × X → R such that f ( x, y ) ̸ = 0 implies xρy . Componentwise operations determine an R -module such that given r ∈ R and f, g ∈ I ( X, ρ, R ) the functions rf, f + g ∈ I ( X, ρ, R ) satisfy ( rf ) ( x, y ) = r ( f ( x, y )) and ( f + g ) ( x, y ) = f ( x, y ) + g ( x, y ) for all x, y ∈ X .\n\nThe balance property is satisfied by w, x, y, z ∈ X if any of the relations wρx , xρy , yρz , and wρz do not hold, or all four relations hold and wρy if and only if xρz . The relation is balanced if it is reflexive and the balance property is satisfied by all w, x, y, z ∈ X . The relations determined by directed graphs (a), (b), and (c) in Figure 1 are not balanced because they are all missing arrows. Note that a reflexive and transitive relation is balanced but there are balanced relations, such as the one determined by (d) in Figure 1, which are not transitive.\n\nIn case ρ is balanced we can combine the proof of [1, Proposition 1.2] with the assumption that X is locally finite to construct a ring multiplication with identity\n\n4" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.3329627986675595, + "doc_id": "891bee171208b62d3fa9a3313d5581970c90d54d4296a6cff3015f7ded9ebdea", + "edit_distance": 0.6464891041162227, + "f1_score": 0.8968253968253969, + "meteor": 0.38535387213713795, + "precision": 0.9416666666666667, + "pred_md": "Figure A.3: a k +1 -a k ≤ δ at the optimum\n\nFigure A.3: a k +1 -a k ≤ δ at the optimum\n\nPart 2. The upper bound\n\nFirst, I introduce the following lemma, which is useful for deriving the upper bound under MTR.\n\nLemma A.2 (i) Let f : R → R be a continuous function. Suppose that for any x ∈ R , there exists ε x > 0 s.t. f ( t 0 ) ≤ f ( t 1 ) whenever x ≤ t 0 < t 1 < x + ε x . Then f is a nondecreasing function in R . (ii) If there exists ε x > 0 for any x ∈ R s.t. f ( t 0 ) ≥ f ( t 1 ) whenever x -ε x ≤ t 0 < t 1 < x, then f is a nonincreasing function in R .\n\nProof of Lemma A.2 Since the proof of (ii) is very similar to the proof of (i), I provide only the proof for (i). Suppose not. There exist a and b in R with a < b s.t. f ( a ) > f b ( ). Define V = { x ∈ [ a, b ] ; f ( a ) > f x ( ) } . Since V is a nonempty set with b ∈ V and bounded below by a , V has an infimum x 0 ∈ [ a, b ] . Since f is continuous, f ( x 0 ) = f ( a . ) Note that a ≤ x 0 < b. Pick ε x 0 > 0 satisfying f ( t 0 ) ≤ f ( t 1 ) whenever x 0 ≤ t 0 < t 1 < x 0 + ε x 0 . Since x 0 is an infimum of the set V , there exists t ∈ ( x 0 , x 0 + ε x 0 ) s.t. f ( x 0 ) > f t . ( ) This is a contradiction. Thus, for any a < b, f ( a ) ≤ f ( b . ) glyph[squaresolid]\n\nI prove that in the dual representation\n\n\n\nthe function ϕ is nonincreasing. Note that under Pr ( Y 1 = Y 0 ) = 0, Pr ( Y 1 ≥ Y 0 ) = Pr ( Y 1 > Y 0 ) = 1, and\n\n66", + "recall": 0.8560606060606061, + "true_md": "Figure A.3: a$_{k}$$\\_{+1}$ − a$\\_{k}$ ≤ δ at the optimum\n\n## Part 2. The upper bound\n\n$$inf F ∈ Π( F$_{0}$,F$_{1}$ ) ∫ { 1 { y$_{1}$ − y$_{0}$ > δ } + λ ( 1 ( y$_{1}$ < y$_{0}$ )) } dπ = sup ( ϕ,ψ ) ∈ Φ$_{c}$ ∫ ϕ ( y$_{0}$ ) dµ$_{0}$ +$^{∫}$ ψ ( y$_{1}$ ) dµ$_{1}$,$$\n\n66\n\nthe function ϕ is nonincreasing. Note that under Pr ( Y$_{1}$ = Y$_{0}$ ) = 0, Pr ( Y$_{1}$ ≥ Y$_{0}$ ) = Pr ( Y$_{1}$ > Y$_{0}$ ) = 1, and\n\nI prove that in the dual representation\n\nProof of Lemma A.2 Since the proof of (ii) is very similar to the proof of (i), I provide only the proof for (i). Suppose not. There exist a and b in R with a < b s.t. f ( a ) > f ( b ). Define V = { x ∈ [ a, b ] ; f ( a ) > f ( x ) } . Since V is a nonempty set with b ∈ V and bounded below by a , V has an infimum x$_{0}$ ∈ [ a, b ] . Since f is continuous, f ( x$_{0}$ ) = f ( a ) . Note that a ≤ x$_{0}$ < b. Pick ε$_{x}$$\\_{0}$ > 0 satisfying f ( t$\\_{0}$ ) ≤ f ( t$\\_{1}$ ) whenever x$\\_{0}$ ≤ t$\\_{0}$ < t$\\_{1}$ < x$\\_{0}$ + ε$\\_{x}$$_{0}$. Since x$_{0}$ is an infimum of the set V , there exists t ∈ ( x$_{0}$$\\_{,}$x$\\_{0}$ + ε$\\_{x}$$_{0}$ ) s.t. f ( x$_{0}$ ) > f ( t ) . This is a contradiction. Thus, for any a < b, f ( a ) ≤ f ( b ) . ■\n\nLemma A.2 (i) Let f : R → R be a continuous function. Suppose that for any x ∈ $_{R}$, there exists ε$_{x}$ > 0 s.t. f ( t$_{0}$ ) ≤ f ( t$_{1}$ ) whenever x ≤ t$_{0}$ < t$_{1}$ < x + ε$_{x}$. Then f is a nondecreasing function in $_{R}$. (ii) If there exists ε$_{x}$ > 0 for any x ∈$_{R}$ s.t. f ( t$_{0}$ ) ≥ f ( t$_{1}$ ) whenever x − ε$_{x}$ ≤ t$_{0}$ < t$_{1}$ < x, then f is a nonincreasing function in$_{R}$.\n\nFirst, I introduce the following lemma, which is useful for deriving the upper bound under MTR." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.2197045636646552, + "doc_id": "feb6429c9ddfd3be3cc5fef4109b25f4daa4cc703f8a380083440d33b5d040c1", + "edit_distance": 0.616, + "f1_score": 0.903654485049834, + "meteor": 0.34178448199373657, + "precision": 0.9444444444444444, + "pred_md": "where the matrix A t ( ) ∈ R n × n of the form A t ( ) = ∂f x ( 0 ( )) t ∂x . The matrices B , i i = 1 , . . . , n, will be defined in the remaining part of the paper. The matrix B i is bivalued if θ i is a grazing moment or of ( β ) -type.\n\nThe right hand side of the second equation in (3.9) will be described in the remaining part of the paper for each type of the points. As the linearization at a point of discontinuity , we comprehend the second equation in (3.9).\n\n## 3.1 Linearization at ( α ) -type points\n\nDiscontinuity points of ( α ) and ( α ' ) types are discussed in [1]. In this subsection, we will outline the results of the book.\n\nAssume that x θ ( i ) is an ( α ) -type point. It is clear that the B -equivalent system (2.4) can be applied in the analysis. The functions τ i ( x ) and W x , i ( ) are described in Subsection 2.1. Differentiating Φ( x τ ( i ( x ))) = 0 , we have\n\n\n\nThen, considering (2.3), we get the following equation,\n\n\n\nwhere e j = (0 , . . . , 1 j , . . . , 0) .\n\n︸ ︷︷ ︸ The matrix B i ∈ R n × n in equation (3.9) is defined as B i = W , ix where W ix is the n × n matrix of the form W ix = [ ∂W i ( x 0 ( θ i )) ∂x 1 , ∂W i ( x 0 ( θ i )) ∂x 2 , . . . , ∂W i ( x 0 ( θ i )) ∂x n ] . Its vector-components ∂W i ( x 0 ( θ i )) ∂x 0 j , j = 1 , . . . , n, evaluated by (3.11). Moreover, the components of the gradient ∇ τ i have to be evaluated by formula (3.10).\n\n## 3.2 Linearization at ( β ) -type points\n\nIn what follows, denote n × n zero matrix by O . n In the light of the possibilities ( N 1) and ( N 2) , the matrix B i in (2.1) can be expressed as follows:\n\n\n\nwhere W ix is evaluated by formula (3.11) and ∇ τ ( x ) evaluated by formula (3.10).\n\nThe differentiability properties for the cases ( α ' ) and ( β ' ) can be investigated similarly.\n\n10", + "recall": 0.8662420382165605, + "true_md": "where the matrix A ( t ) ∈ R $^{n}$×n of the form A ( t ) = ∂f ( x$_{0}$ ( t )) ∂x . The matrices B$_{i}$, i = 1 , . . . , n, will be defined in the remaining part of the paper. The matrix B$_{i}$ is bivalued if θ$_{i}$ is a grazing moment or of ( β ) − type.\n\nThe right hand side of the second equation in (3.9) will be described in the remaining part of the paper for each type of the points. As the linearization at a point of discontinuity , we comprehend the second equation in (3.9).\n\nDiscontinuity points of ( α ) and ( α ′ ) types are discussed in [1]. In this subsection, we will outline the results of the book.\n\nAssume that x ( θ$_{i}$ ) is an ( α ) − type point. It is clear that the B − equivalent system (2.4) can be applied in the analysis. The functions τ$_{i}$ ( x ) and W$_{i}$ ( x ) , are described in Subsection 2.1. Differentiating Φ( x ( τ$_{i}$ ( x ))) = 0 , we have\n\nThen, considering (2.3), we get the following equation,\n\nwhere e$_{j}$ = (0 , . . . , 1 ︸ ︷︷ ︸ j , . . . , 0) . The matrix B$_{i}$ ∈ R $^{n}$×n in equation (3.9) is defined as\n\n︸ ︷︷ ︸ The matrix B$_{i}$ ∈ R $^{n}$×n in equation (3.9) is defined as B$_{i}$ = W$_{ix}$, where W$_{ix}$ is the n × n matrix of the form W$_{ix}$ = [ ∂W$_{i}$ ( x$_{0}$ ( θ$_{i}$ )) ∂x$_{1}$ , ∂W$_{i}$ ( x$_{0}$ ( θ$_{i}$ )) ∂x$_{2}$ , . . . , ∂W$_{i}$ ( x$_{0}$ ( θ$_{i}$ )) ∂x$_{n}$ ] . Its vector-components ∂W$_{i}$ ( x$_{0}$ ( θ$_{i}$ )) ∂x$_{0}$$\\_{j}$ , j = 1 , . . . , n, evaluated by (3.11). Moreover, the components of the gradient ∇ τ$\\_{i}$ have to be evaluated by formula (3.10).\n\nIn what follows, denote n × n zero matrix by O$_{n}$. In the light of the possibilities ( N 1) and ( N 2) , the matrix B$_{i}$ in (2.1) can be expressed as follows:\n\n## 3.2 Linearization at ( β ) − type points\n\n$^{O$\\_{n}$}$$^{,}$ where W$\\_{ix}$ is evaluated by formula (3.11) and ∇ τ ( x ) evaluated by formula (3.10).\n\nThe differentiability properties for the cases ( α ′ ) and ( β ′ ) can be investigated similarly.\n\n$$B$_{i}$ =    $^{O$_{n}$}$$^{,}$ if ( N 1) is valid, W$_{ix}$, if ( N 2) is valid, (3.12) is evaluated by formula (3.11) and ∇ τ ( x ) evaluated by formula (3.10).$$\n\n10\n\n## 3.1 Linearization at ( α ) − type points\n\n$$∂τ$_{i}$ ( x$_{0}$ ( θ$_{i}$ )) ∂x$_{j}$ = − Φ$_{x}$( x$_{0}$ ( θ$_{i}$ )) ∂x$_{0}$ ( θ$_{i}$ ) ∂x$_{0}$$_{j}$ Φ$_{x}$( x$_{0}$ ( θ$_{i}$ )) f ( x$_{0}$ ( θ$_{i}$ )) . (3.10)$$\n\n$$∂W$_{i}$ ( x$_{0}$ ( θ$_{i}$ )) ∂x$_{0}$$_{j}$ = ( f ( x$_{0}$ ( θ$_{i}$ )) − f ( x$_{0}$ ( θ$_{i}$ ) + J ( x$_{0}$ ( θ$_{i}$ )))) ∂τ$_{i}$ ∂x$_{0}$$_{j}$ + ∂I ∂x ( e$_{j}$ + f ∂τ$_{i}$ ∂x$_{0}$$_{j}$ ) , (3.11)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8418685101985285, + "doc_id": "1235bb65aef4212fd02a4e433eb6617c319c8bef2bad99a41e7e0712d70fa9c1", + "edit_distance": 0.17325227963525835, + "f1_score": 0.9292929292929292, + "meteor": 0.8976999281039557, + "precision": 0.9583333333333334, + "pred_md": "arXiv:1611.06217v2 [stat.ME] 7 Feb 2019\n\n## Specification Tests for the Propensity Score\n\nPedro H. C. Sant'Anna ∗ Xiaojun Song †\n\nFebruary 11, 2019\n\n## Abstract\n\nThis paper proposes new nonparametric diagnostic tools to assess the asymptotic validity of different treatment effects estimators that rely on the correct specification of the propensity score. We derive a particular restriction relating the propensity score distribution of treated and control groups, and develop specification tests based upon it. The resulting tests do not suffer from the 'curse of dimensionality' when the vector of covariates is high-dimensional, are fully data-driven, do not require tuning parameters such as bandwidths, and are able to detect a broad class of local alternatives converging to the null at the parametric rate n -1 / 2 , with n the sample size. We show that the use of an orthogonal projection on the tangent space of nuisance parameters facilitates the simulation of critical values by means of a multiplier bootstrap procedure, and can lead to power gains. The finite sample performance of the tests is examined by means of a Monte Carlo experiment and an empirical application. Open-source software is available for implementing the proposed tests.\n\nJEL: C12, C31, C35, C52.\n\nKeywords: Empirical Processes; Integrated Moments; Multiplier Bootstrap; Projection; Treatment Effects.\n\n∗ Department of Economics, Vanderbilt University, VU Station B #351819, 2301 Vanderbilt Place, Nashville, TN 37235-1819, USA. Email: pedro.h.santanna@vanderbilt.edu\n\n† Department of Business Statistics and Econometrics, Guanghua School of Management and Center for Statistical Science, Peking University, Beijing, 100871, China. Email: sxj@gsm.pku.edu.cn\n\n1", + "recall": 0.9019607843137255, + "true_md": "# Specification Tests for the Propensity Score\n\nPedro H. C. Sant’Anna ∗ Xiaojun Song †\n\nFebruary 11, 2019\n\nThis paper proposes new nonparametric diagnostic tools to assess the asymptotic va- lidity of different treatment effects estimators that rely on the correct specification of the propensity score. We derive a particular restriction relating the propensity score distri- bution of treated and control groups, and develop specification tests based upon it. The resulting tests do not suffer from the “curse of dimensionality” when the vector of covariates is high-dimensional, are fully data-driven, do not require tuning parameters such as band- widths, and are able to detect a broad class of local alternatives converging to the null at the parametric rate n $_{−}$1 / $^{2}$, with n the sample size. We show that the use of an orthogonal projection on the tangent space of nuisance parameters facilitates the simulation of critical values by means of a multiplier bootstrap procedure, and can lead to power gains. The finite sample performance of the tests is examined by means of a Monte Carlo experiment and an empirical application. Open-source software is available for implementing the proposed tests.\n\nJEL: C12, C31, C35, C52.\n\nKeywords: Empirical Processes; Integrated Moments; Multiplier Bootstrap; Projection; Treatment Effects.\n\n$^{∗}$Department of Economics, Vanderbilt University, VU Station B #351819, 2301 Vanderbilt Place, Nashville, TN 37235-1819, USA. Email: pedro.h.santanna@vanderbilt.edu\n\n$^{†}$Department of Business Statistics and Econometrics, Guanghua School of Management and Center for Sta- tistical Science, Peking University, Beijing, 100871, China. Email: sxj@gsm.pku.edu.cn\n\n1\n\narXiv:1611.06217v2 [stat.ME] 7 Feb 2019\n\n## Abstract" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8373882396283194, + "doc_id": "7b2fd67fc5e1a29997bf067c0124747bcaf8e23e05be352819d669da956d19c0", + "edit_distance": 0.10492505353319058, + "f1_score": 0.9048723897911832, + "meteor": 0.9237064283047904, + "precision": 0.9285714285714286, + "pred_md": "18\n\nfrom cell center to the edge of the cell. It is observed that the performance gap increases between the centralized and distributed schemes as users approach the boundaries of the cell.\n\n## VII. CONCLUSION\n\nIn this paper, we developed an upper bound and a lower bound to the optimal average network throughput in multi-cell uplink OFDMA networks. We also investigated the severe effects of ICI on the performance of a single cell near optimal resource allocation scheme. Moreover, we proposed a benchmark centralized scheme which is useful to study the performance gap of the low complexity centralized and distributed resource allocation schemes developed later with respect to the optimal solution. All schemes are compared to the exhaustive search based optimal solution and derived upper and lower bounds for various scenarios. The schemes are evaluated and compared in terms of network throughput and computational complexity.\n\n## VIII. ACKNOWLEDGEMENT\n\nThe authors would like to express their sincere gratitude to Dr. Elias Yaccoub for useful discussions toward the success of this work.\n\n## REFERENCES\n\n- [1] G. Li and H. Liu, 'Downlink radio resource allocation for multi-cell OFDMA system,' IEEE Transactions on Wireless Communications , vol. 5, no. 12, pp. 3451-3459, 2006.\n- [2] K. Kim, Y. Han and S-L Kim, 'Joint subcarrier and power allocation in uplink OFDMA systems,' IEEE Communications Letters , vol. 9, no. 6, pp. 526-528, June 2005.\n- [3] C. Ng and C. Sung, 'Low complexity subcarrier and power allocation for utility maximization in uplink OFDMA systems,' IEEE Transactions on Wireless Communications , vol. 7, no. 5 Part 1, pp. 1667-1675, 2008.\n- [4] Y. Ma, 'Constrained rate-maximization scheduling for uplink OFDMA,' Proceedings of IEEE Military Communications Conference, (MILCOM'07) , pp. 1-7, Orlando, Florida, October 2007.\n- [5] E. Yaacoub, A. M. El-Hajj, and Z. Dawy, 'Weighted ergodic sum-rate maximization in uplink OFDMA and its achievable rate region,' IET Communications Journal , vol. 4, no. 18, pp. 2217-2229, 2010.\n- [6] J. Huang, V. Subramanian, R. Agarwal, and R. Berry, 'Joint scheduling and resource allocation in uplink OFDM Systems for broadband wireless access networks,' IEEE Journal Selected Areas of Communications , vol. 27, pp. 226-234, February 2009.\n\nMarch 19, 2018\n\nDRAFT", + "recall": 0.8823529411764706, + "true_md": "18\n\nfrom cell center to the edge of the cell. It is observed that the performance gap increases between the centralized and distributed schemes as users approach the boundaries of the cell.\n\nIn this paper, we developed an upper bound and a lower bound to the optimal average network throughput in multi-cell uplink OFDMA networks. We also investigated the severe effects of ICI on the performance of a single cell near optimal resource allocation scheme. Moreover, we proposed a benchmark centralized scheme which is useful to study the performance gap of the low complexity centralized and distributed resource allocation schemes developed later with respect to the optimal solution. All schemes are compared to the exhaustive search based optimal solution and derived upper and lower bounds for various scenarios. The schemes are evaluated and compared in terms of network throughput and computational complexity.\n\n## VII. CONCLUSION\n\n## VIII. ACKNOWLEDGEMENT\n\nThe authors would like to express their sincere gratitude to Dr. Elias Yaccoub for useful discussions toward the success of this work.\n\n## REFERENCES\n\n- [1] G. Li and H. Liu, “Downlink radio resource allocation formulti-cell OFDMA system,” IEEE Transactions on Wireless Communications , vol. 5, no. 12, pp. 3451–3459, 2006.\n\n- [2] K. Kim, Y. Han and S-L Kim, “Joint subcarrier and power all ocation in uplink OFDMA systems,” IEEE Communications Letters , vol. 9, no. 6, pp. 526–528, June 2005.\n\n- [3] C. Ng and C. Sung, “Low complexity subcarrier and power al location for utility maximization in uplink OFDMA systems,” IEEE Transactions on Wireless Communications , vol. 7, no. 5 Part 1, pp. 1667–1675, 2008.\n\n- [4] Y. Ma, “Constrained rate-maximization scheduling for u plink OFDMA,” Proceedings of IEEE Military Communications Conference, (MILCOM’07) , pp. 1–7, Orlando, Florida, October 2007.\n\n- [5] E. Yaacoub, A. M. El-Hajj, and Z. Dawy, “Weighted ergodicsum-rate maximization in uplink OFDMA and its achievable rate region,” IET Communications Journal , vol. 4, no. 18, pp. 2217–2229, 2010.\n\n- [6] J. Huang, V. Subramanian, R. Agarwal, and R. Berry, “Join t scheduling and resource allocation in uplink OFDM Systems for broadband wireless access networks,” IEEE Journal Selected Areas of Communications , vol. 27, pp. 226–234, February 2009.\n\nDRAFT\n\nMarch 19, 2018" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4857456773659764, + "doc_id": "67468002c8e8c4a002179f1bf9fd5b0628ee76dbef7f79aa7c2333c24e53fe18", + "edit_distance": 0.5154929577464789, + "f1_score": 0.9700000000000001, + "meteor": 0.8646750297124784, + "precision": 0.9897959183673469, + "pred_md": "Figure 7: Connection-wise excursion count matrices. (A) The number of times across all participants that a functional connection achieved a greater-than-expected level of functional connectivity, X + . (B) A matrix similar to that shown in panel (A), but shows connections that achieved weaker-than-expected (more anti-correlated than expected) levels of functional connectivity, X -. The colored bars along the x and y axes indicate the intrinsic connectivity network to which each region was assigned. The network labels are taken from Yeo et al. (2011), with labels corresponding to networks for control (CONT), default mode (DMN), dorsal attention (DAN), limbic (LIM), ventral attention (VAN), somatomotor network (SMN), and visual (VIS). (C) and (D) Enlargement of panels (A) and (B) highlighting the connections within and between visual and somatomotor networks.\n\nFigure 7: Connection-wise excursion count matrices. (A) The number of times across all participants that a functional connection achieved a greater-than-expected level of functional connectivity, X + . (B) A matrix similar to that shown in panel (A), but shows connections that achieved weaker-than-expected (more anti-correlated than expected) levels of functional connectivity, X -. The colored bars along the x and y axes indicate the intrinsic connectivity network to which each region was assigned. The network labels are taken from Yeo et al. (2011), with labels corresponding to networks for control (CONT), default mode (DMN), dorsal attention (DAN), limbic (LIM), ventral attention (VAN), somatomotor network (SMN), and visual (VIS). (C) and (D) Enlargement of panels (A) and (B) highlighting the connections within and between visual and somatomotor networks.\n\n44", + "recall": 0.9509803921568627, + "true_md": "Figure 7: Connection-wise excursion count matrices. (A) The number of times across all participants that a functional connection achieved a greater-than-expected level of functional connectivity, X $^{+}$. (B) A matrix similar to that shown in panel (A), but shows connections that achieved weaker-than-expected (more anti-correlated than expected) levels of functional connectivity, X $^{−}$. The colored bars along the x and y axes indicate the intrinsic connectivity network to which each region was assigned. The network labels are taken from Yeo et al. (2011), with labels corresponding to networks for control (CONT), default mode (DMN), dorsal attention (DAN), limbic (LIM), ventral attention (VAN), somatomotor network (SMN), and visual (VIS). (C) and (D) Enlargement of panels (A) and (B) highlighting the connections within and between visual and somatomotor networks.\n\n44" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9283502328465996, + "doc_id": "d301ea54c2d1f5fc56496652f5d08a874c3e7f0cac55c6663e507c5639d7f536", + "edit_distance": 0.041884816753926704, + "f1_score": 0.948051948051948, + "meteor": 0.9603509783020979, + "precision": 0.9605263157894737, + "pred_md": "Power, J. D., Barnes, K. A., Snyder, A. Z., Schlaggar, B. L., Petersen, S. E., 2012. Spurious but systematic correlations in functional connectivity mri networks arise from subject motion. Neuroimage 59 (3), 2142-2154.\n\nPower, J. D., Cohen, A. L., Nelson, S. M., Wig, G. S., Barnes, K. A., Church, J. A., Vogel, A. C., Laumann, T. O., Miezin, F. M., Schlaggar, B. L., et al., 2011. Functional network organization of the human brain. Neuron 72 (4), 665-678.\n\nPower, J. D., Mitra, A., Laumann, T. O., Snyder, A. Z., Schlaggar, B. L., Petersen, S. E., 2014. Methods to detect, characterize, and remove motion artifact in resting state fmri. Neuroimage 84, 320-341.\n\nRashid, B., Damaraju, E., Pearlson, G. D., Calhoun, V. D., 2014. Dynamic connectivity states estimated from resting fMRI identify differences among schizophrenia, bipolar disorder, and healthy control subjects. Frontiers in Human Neuroscience 8, 897.\n\nReichardt, J., Bornholdt, S., 2006. Statistical mechanics of community detection. Physical Review E 74 (1), 016110.\n\nRubinov, M., Sporns, O., 2011. Weight-conserving characterization of complex functional brain networks. Neuroimage 56 (4), 2068-2079.\n\nSatterthwaite, T. D., Elliott, M. A., Gerraty, R. T., Ruparel, K., Loughead, J., Calkins, M. E., Eickhoff, S. B., Hakonarson, H., Gur, R. C., Gur, R. E., et al., 2013. An improved framework for confound regression and filtering for control of motion artifact in the preprocessing of resting-state functional connectivity data. Neuroimage 64, 240-256.\n\nScheeringa, R., Petersson, K. M., Kleinschmidt, A., Jensen, O., Bastiaansen,\n\n35", + "recall": 0.9358974358974359, + "true_md": "- Power, J. D., Barnes, K. A., Snyder, A. Z., Schlaggar, B. L., Petersen, S. E., 2012. Spurious but systematic correlations in functional connectivity mri net- works arise from subject motion. Neuroimage 59 (3), 2142–2154.\n\n- Power, J. D., Cohen, A. L., Nelson, S. M., Wig, G. S., Barnes, K. A., Church, J. A., Vogel, A. C., Laumann, T. O., Miezin, F. M., Schlaggar, B. L., et al., 2011. Functional network organization of the human brain. Neuron 72 (4), 665–678.\n\n- Power, J. D., Mitra, A., Laumann, T. O., Snyder, A. Z., Schlaggar, B. L., Petersen, S. E., 2014. Methods to detect, characterize, and remove motion artifact in resting state fmri. Neuroimage 84, 320–341.\n\n- Rashid, B., Damaraju, E., Pearlson, G. D., Calhoun, V. D., 2014. Dynamic connectivity states estimated from resting fMRI identify differences among schizophrenia, bipolar disorder, and healthy control subjects. Frontiers in Human Neuroscience 8, 897.\n\n- Reichardt, J., Bornholdt, S., 2006. Statistical mechanics of community detec- tion. Physical Review E 74 (1), 016110.\n\n- Rubinov, M., Sporns, O., 2011. Weight-conserving characterization of complex functional brain networks. Neuroimage 56 (4), 2068–2079.\n\n- Satterthwaite, T. D., Elliott, M. A., Gerraty, R. T., Ruparel, K., Loughead, J., Calkins, M. E., Eickhoff, S. B., Hakonarson, H., Gur, R. C., Gur, R. E., et al., 2013. An improved framework for confound regression and filtering for control of motion artifact in the preprocessing of resting-state functional connectivity data. Neuroimage 64, 240–256.\n\nScheeringa, R., Petersson, K. M., Kleinschmidt, A., Jensen, O., Bastiaansen,\n\n35" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7973741908427036, + "doc_id": "b7ec918b3cd5d1b9b5364a8383a5a97720cd688812c7cdbba5fb468b5ec90d4e", + "edit_distance": 0.13043478260869565, + "f1_score": 0.8735083532219572, + "meteor": 0.8775442237987547, + "precision": 0.8840579710144928, + "pred_md": "Chernozhukov, V., I. Fern'ndez-Val and A. Galichon (2010). 'Quantile and Probability Curves without a Crossing,' Econometrica , 78, 1093-1125.\n\nChernozhukov, V., S. Lee and A. M. Rosen (2013). 'Intersection Bounds: Estimation and Inference,' Econometrica , 81, 667-737.\n\nChiappori, P.-A., R. J. McCann and L. P. Nesheim (2010). 'Hedonic Price Equilibria, Stable Matching, and Optimal Transport: Equivalence, Topology, and Uniqueness,' Economic Theory , 42, 317-354.\n\nCurrie, J. and R. Hyson (1999). 'Is the Impact of Shocks Cusioned by Socioeconomic Status? The Case of Low Birth Weight,' American Economic Review , 89 (2), 245-250.\n\nCurrie, J. and E. Moretti (2007). 'Biology as Destiny? Short- and Long-run Determinants of Intergenerational Transmission of Birth Weight,' Journal of Labor Economics, 25 (2), 231-264.\n\nDeaton, A. (2003). 'Health, Inequality, and Economic Development,' Journal of Economic Literature , 41, 113-158.\n\nDing, W. and S. Lehrer (2008). 'Class Size and Student Achievement: Experimental Estimates of Who Benefits and Who Loses from Reductions.' Queen's Economic Department Working Paper No. 1046, Queen's University.\n\nDub' e, J.-P., J. Fox and C.-L. Su (2012). 'Improving the Numerical Performance of Static and Dynamic Aggregate Discrete Choice Random Coefficients Demand Estimation,' Econometrica , 80, 2231-2367.\n\nDuflo, E., P. Dupas, and M. Kremer (2011). 'Peer Effects, Teacher Incentives, and the Impact of Tracking: Evidence from a Randomized Evaluation in Kenya,' American Economic Review , 101, 1739-74.\n\nEkeland, I. (2005). 'An Optimal Matching Problem,' ESAIM Controle Optimal et Calcul des Variations, 11, 57-51.\n\nEkeland, I. (2010). 'Existence, Uniqueness, and Efficiency of Equilibrium in Hedonic Markets with Multidimensional Types,' Economic Theory , 42, 275-315.\n\nEkeland, I., A. Galichon and M. Henry (2010). 'Optimal Transportation and the Falsifiability of Incompletely Specified Economic Models,' Economic Theory , 42, 355-374.\n\nEvans, W. and J. S. Ringel (1999). 'Can Higher Cigarette Taxes Improve Birth Outcomes?,' Jounal of Public Economics , 72, 135-154.\n\n50", + "recall": 0.8632075471698113, + "true_md": "Chernozhukov, V., I. Fern´ andez-Val and A. Galichon (2010). “Quantile and Probability Curves without Crossing,” Econometrica , 78, 1093-1125.\n\nChernozhukov, V., S. Lee and A. M. Rosen (2013). “Intersection Bounds: Estimation and Inference,” Econo- metrica , 81, 667-737.\n\nChiappori, P.-A., R. J. McCann and L. P. Nesheim (2010). “Hedonic Price Equilibria, Stable Matching, and Optimal Transport: Equivalence, Topology, and Uniqueness,” Economic Theory , 42, 317–354.\n\nCurrie, J. and R. Hyson (1999). “Is the Impact of Shocks Cusioned by Socioeconomic Status? The Case of Low Birth Weight,” American Economic Review , 89 (2), 245–250.\n\nCurrie, J. and E. Moretti (2007). “Biology as Destiny? Short- and Long-run Determinants of Intergenera- tional Transmission of Birth Weight,” Journal of Labor Economics, 25 (2), 231–264.\n\nDeaton, A. (2003). “Health, Inequality, and Economic Development,” Journal of Economic Literature , 41, 113-158.\n\nDing, W. and S. Lehrer (2008). “Class Size and Student Achievement: Experimental Estimates of Who Benefits and Who Loses from Reductions.” Queen’s Economic Department Working Paper No. 1046, Queen’s University.\n\nDub´ e, J.-P., J. Fox and C.-L. Su (2012). “Improving the Numerical Performance of Static and Dynamic Aggregate Discrete Choice Random Coefficients Demand Estimation,” Econometrica , 80, 2231-2367.\n\nDuflo, E., P. Dupas, and M. Kremer (2011). “Peer Effects, Teacher Incentives, and the Impact of Tracking: Evidence from a Randomized Evaluation in Kenya,” American Economic Review , 101, 1739-74.\n\nEkeland, I. (2005). “An Optimal Matching Problem,” ESAIM Controle Optimal et Calcul des Variations, 11, 57-51.\n\nEkeland, I. (2010). “Existence, Uniqueness, and Efficiency of Equilibrium in Hedonic Markets with Multidi- mensional Types,” Economic Theory , 42, 275-315.\n\nEkeland, I., A. Galichon and M. Henry (2010). “Optimal Transportation and the Falsifiability of Incompletely Specified Economic Models,” Economic Theory , 42, 355-374.\n\nEvans, W. and J. S. Ringel (1999). “Can Higher Cigarette Taxes Improve Birth Outcomes?,” Jounal of Public Economics , 72, 135–154.\n\n50" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.562505486083615, + "doc_id": "524f96a124a072125f43438b2ab2ce96204e371d64346152bb37f8e345d7aa11", + "edit_distance": 0.5254237288135594, + "f1_score": 0.9476190476190477, + "meteor": 0.6871285580996846, + "precision": 0.9521531100478469, + "pred_md": "## 2 Discontinuous dynamical systems\n\nLet R N , and Z be the sets of all real numbers, natural numbers and integers, respectively. Consider the set D ∈ R n such that D = ∪ D , i where D , i i = 1 2 , , . . . , k, components of D, are disjoint open connected subsets of R n . To describe the surface of discontinuity, we present a two times continuously differentiable function Φ : D r → R n . The set can be defined as Γ = Φ -1 (0) and is a closed subset of ¯ D, where ¯ D is the closure of D. Denote ∂ Γ as the boundary of Γ . One can easily see that Γ = ∪ k i =1 Γ i , where Γ i are parts of the surface of discontinuity in the components of D. Denote ˜ = Γ J (Γ) , ˜ ( Φ x ) = Φ( J -1 ( x )) . Denote an r -neighborhood of D in R n for a fixed r > 0 as D . r Let Γ r be the r -neighborhood of Γ in R n , for a fixed r > 0 and define functions J : Γ r → D r and ˜ : Γ J ˜ r → D , r such that, J (Γ) , J ˜ ( ˜ ) Γ ⊂ D. Assume that a function f ( x ) : D r → R n is continuously differentiable in D . r Set the gradient vector of Φ as ∇ Φ( x . )\n\nThe following definitions will be utilized in the remaining part of the paper. Let x t ( -) be the left limit position of the trajectory and x t ( +) be the right limit of the position of the trajectory at the moment t. Define ∆ ( ) := x t x t ( +) -x t ( -) as the jump operator for a function x t ( ) such that x t ( ) ∈ Γ and t is a moment of discontinuity (discontinuity moment). In other words, the discontinuity moment t is the moment when the trajectory meets the surface of discontinuity Γ . The function I ( x ) will be used in the following part of the paper which is defined as I ( x ) := J x ( ) -x, for x ∈ Γ .\n\nThe following assumptions are needed throughout this paper.\n\n- (C1) ∇ Φ( x ) = 0 for all x ∈ Γ ,\n\n/negationslash\n\n- (C2) J ∈ C 1 (Γ ) r and det [ ∂J x ( ) ∂x ] = 0 , for all x ∈ Γ r \\ ∂ Γ ,\n\n/negationslash\n\n- (C4) 〈∇ Φ( x , f ) ( x ) 〉 /negationslash = 0 if x ∈ Γ \\ ∂ Γ ,\n- (C3) Γ ⋂ ˜ Γ ⊆ ∂ Γ ∩ ˜ Γ ∂ ,\n- (C5) 〈∇ ˜ ( Φ x , f ) ( x ) 〉 /negationslash = 0 if x ∈ ˜ Γ \\ ∂ ˜ Γ ,\n- (C6) J x ( ) = x for all x ∈ ∂ Γ ,\n- (C7) ˜ ( J x ) = x for all x ∈ ∂ ˜ Γ .\n\n/negationslash\n\nOne can verify that ˜ = Γ { x ∈ D | ˜ ( Φ x ) = 0 } and ˜ ( J x ) = x on ˜ Γ since of ( C 2) . Condition ( C 1) implies that for every x 0 ∈ Γ , there exist a number j and a function φ x 0 ( x , . . . , x 1 j -1 , x j +1 , . . . , x n ) such that Γ is the graph of the function x j = φ x 0 ( x , . . . , x 1 j -1 , x j +1 , . . . , x n ) in a neighborhood of x . 0 Same is true for every x 0 ∈ ˜ Γ . Moreover, ∇ ˜ ( Φ x ) = 0 , for all x ∈ ˜ Γ , can be verified by using the condition ( C 2) . The conditions ( C 2) ( , C 6) ( , C 7) , imply that the equality ˜ ( J x ) = x, is true for all x ∈ ∂ ˜ Γ .\n\n/negationslash\n\nLet A be an interval in Z . We say that the strictly ordered set θ = { θ i } , i ∈ A , is a B -sequence [1] if one of the following alternatives holds: ( ) i θ = ∅ , ( ii ) θ is a nonempty and finite set, ( iii ) θ is an infinite set such that | θ i | →∞ as i →∞ . In what follows, θ is assumed to be a B -sequence .\n\n3", + "recall": 0.943127962085308, + "true_md": "## 2 Discontinuous dynamical systems\n\nLet $^{R}$, $^{N}$and $^{Z}$be the sets of all real numbers, natural numbers and integers, respectively. Consider the set D ∈ R n such that D = ∪ D$_{i}$, where D$_{i}$, i = 1 , 2 , . . . , k, components of D, are disjoint open connected subsets of R $^{n}$. To describe the surface of discontinuity, we present a two times continuously differentiable function Φ : D r → R $^{n}$. The set can be defined as Γ = Φ − $^{1}$(0) and is a closed subset of ¯ D, where ¯ D is the closure of D. Denote ∂ Γ as the boundary of Γ . One can easily see that Γ = ∪ k i $_{=1}$Γ$_{i}$ , where Γ$_{i}$ are parts of the surface of discontinuity in the components of D. Denote ˜ Γ = J (Γ) , ˜ Φ( x ) = Φ( J − $^{1}$( x )) . Denote an r − neighborhood of D in R n for a fixed r > 0 as D $^{r}$. Let Γ r be the r − neighborhood of Γ in R $^{n}$, for a fixed r > 0 and define functions J : Γ r → D r and ˜ J : ˜ Γ r → D $^{r}$, such that, J (Γ) , ˜ J ( ˜ Γ) ⊂ D. Assume that a function f ( x ) : D r → R n is continuously differentiable in D $^{r}$. Set the gradient vector of Φ as ∇ Φ( x ) .\n\nThe following definitions will be utilized in the remaining part of the paper. Let x ( t − ) be the left limit position of the trajectory and x ( t +) be the right limit of the position of the trajectory at the moment t. Define Δ x ( t ) := x ( t +) − x ( t − ) as the jump operator for a function x ( t ) such that x ( t ) ∈ Γ and t is a moment of discontinuity (discontinuity moment). In other words, the discontinuity moment t is the moment when the trajectory meets the surface of discontinuity Γ . The function I ( x ) will be used in the following part of the paper which is defined as I ( x ) := J ( x ) − x, for x ∈ Γ .\n\nThe following assumptions are needed throughout this paper.\n\nOne can verify that ˜ Γ = { x ∈ D | ˜ Φ( x ) = 0 } and ˜ J ( x ) ̸ = x on ˜ Γ since of ( C 2) . Condition ( C 1) implies that for every x$_{0}$ ∈ Γ , there exist a number j and a function φ$_{x}$$\\_{0}$ ( x$\\_{1}$$^{, . . . , x$\\_{j}$}$− $_{1}$, x$_{j}$$\\_{+1}$ , . . . , x$\\_{n}$ ) such that Γ is the graph of the function x$\\_{j}$ = φ$\\_{x}$$_{0}$ ( x$_{1}$$^{, . . . , x$_{j}$}$− $\\_{1}$, x$\\_{j}$$_{+1}$ , . . . , x$_{n}$ ) in a neighborhood of x$_{0}$. Same is true for every x$_{0}$ ∈ ˜ Γ . Moreover, ∇ ˜ Φ( x ) ̸ = 0 , for all x ∈ ˜ Γ , can be verified by using the condition ( C 2) . The conditions ( C 2) , ( C 6) , ( C 7) , imply that the equality ˜ J ( x ) = x, is true for all x ∈ ∂ ˜ Γ .\n\nLet A be an interval in $^{Z}$. We say that the strictly ordered set θ = { θ$_{i}$ } , i ∈ A , is a B − sequence [1] if one of the following alternatives holds: ( i ) θ =  , ( ii ) θ is a nonempty and finite set, ( iii ) θ is an infinite set such that | θ$_{i}$ | → ∞ as i → ∞ . In what follows, θ is assumed to be a B − sequence .\n\n- (C1) ∇ Φ( x ) ̸ = 0 for all x ∈ Γ , [\n\n- ∇ ̸ ∈ (C2) J ∈ C $^{1}$(Γ $^{r}$) and det [ ∂J ( x ) ∂x ] ̸ = 0 , for all x ∈ Γ r \\ ∂ Γ , ⋂ ˜ ˜\n\n- (C3) Γ ⋂ ˜ Γ ⊆ ∂ Γ ∩ ˜ ∂ Γ , (C4) 〈∇ Φ( x ) , f ( x ) 〉 ̸ = 0\n\n- ⋂ (C4) 〈∇ Φ( x ) , f ( x ) 〉 ̸ = 0 if x ∈ Γ \\ ∂ Γ ,\n\n- (C5) 〈∇ ˜ Φ( x ) , f ( x ) 〉 ̸ = 0 if x ∈ ˜ Γ \\ ∂ ˜ Γ ,\n\n- (C6) J ( x ) = x for all x ∈ ∂ Γ ,\n\n- (C7) ˜ J ( x ) = x for all x ∈ ∂ ˜ Γ .\n\n3" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6671815471555613, + "doc_id": "bdaa389fe9eeb9b3c240826e1a5bb2ce6fd245bfbca60a59a7b36a6db53e06ca", + "edit_distance": 0.25757575757575757, + "f1_score": 0.900709219858156, + "meteor": 0.792024916838469, + "precision": 0.927007299270073, + "pred_md": "14\n\nKABALAN GASPARD\n\n- d (including d = 2), and that every solution has the form ± ( x , y n n ) where x n + √ dy n = ( x 1 + √ dy 1 ) n for some solution ( x , y 1 1 ) and n ∈ Z .\n\nAcknowledgment Many thanks to Professor Dan Segal, All-Souls College, Oxford, for his advice.\n\n## References\n\n- [1] Borevich, Z. I., and Shafarevich I. R., Number Theory, Academic Press, New York, 1973.\n- [2] C. S. Dalawat, Primary units in cyclotomic fields, Annales des sciences math'matiques du Qu'bec e e to appear, 2011.\n- [3] G. L. Dirichlet, Sur la mani're de r'soudre l''quation e e e t 2 -pu 2 = 1 au moyen des fonctions circulaires, Journal fr die reine und angewandte Mathematik u 17, pp. 286-290, 1837.\n- [4] V. Flynn, Algebraic Number Theory Lecture Notes . University of Oxford. Oxford Mathematical Institute, Oxford, UK. 2011. Lecture Notes.\n- [5] K. Ireland and M. Rosen, A Classical Introduction to Modern Number Theory, Springer-Verlag, New York, 1982.\n- [6] S. Lang, Algebraic Number Theory, Springer-Verlag, New York, 1986.\n- [7] L. C. Washington, Introduction to Cyclotomic Fields, Springer-Verlag, New York, 1982.", + "recall": 0.8758620689655172, + "true_md": "14\n\nd (including d = 2), and that every solution has the form ± ( x$_{n}$, y$_{n}$ ) where x$_{n}$ + √$_{dy}$$\\_{n}$ = ( x$\\_{1}$ $\\_{+}$√$\\_{dy}$$_{1}$$\\_{)}$ n for some solution ( x$\\_{1}$, y$\\_{1}$ ) and n ∈ Z .\n\nAcknowledgment Many thanks to Professor Dan Segal, All-Souls College, Oxford, for his advice.\n\n## References\n\n- [1] Borevich, Z. I., and Shafarevich I. R., Number Theory, Academic Press, New York, 1973.\n\n- [2] C. S. Dalawat, Primary units in cyclotomic fields, Annales des sciences math´ ematiques du Qu´ ebec to appear, 2011.\n\n- [3] G. L. Dirichlet, Sur la mani`ere de r´esoudre l’´equation t 2 − pu 2 = 1 au moyen des fonctions circulaires, Journal f¨ ur die reine und angewandte Mathematik 17, pp. 286-290, 1837.\n\n- [4] V. Flynn, Algebraic Number Theory Lecture Notes . University of Oxford. Oxford Mathematical Institute, Oxford, UK. 2011. Lecture Notes.\n\n- [5] K. Ireland and M. Rosen, A Classical Introduction to Modern Number Theory, Springer-Verlag, New York, 1982.\n\n- [6] S. Lang, Algebraic Number Theory, Springer-Verlag, New York, 1986.\n\n- [7] L. C. Washington, Introduction to Cyclotomic Fields, Springer-Verlag, New York, 1982.\n\nKABALAN GASPARD" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8791875623442401, + "doc_id": "3261fdea0d6f331fbfb44345be038a73a451f494ae0982fd37e8484733e5e3e8", + "edit_distance": 0.13679245283018868, + "f1_score": 0.9530864197530865, + "meteor": 0.9486265201991653, + "precision": 0.9796954314720813, + "pred_md": "the structure of M permits; this static algorithm may be more representative of default MCMC algorithms provided by software packages, and is denoted as 'Default.' Finally, for several example models we include an informed blocking of the model parameters, based upon expert or prior knowledge, which is referred to as 'Informed Blocking.' Results for the random effects model also include the 'Informed Cross-Level' MCMC algorithm which makes use of cross-level sampling, which is not in Ψ M .\n\n## Varying Size Blocks of Fixed Correlation\n\nThe left pane of Figure 3 displays the Efficiency performance for the model structures containing varying sized blocks of fixed correlation. For ρ = 0 2, the Auto Blocking algorithm selects cut height . h = 0, which corresponds to re-selecting the algorithm All Scalar. Since this MCMC algorithm is identical to the initial state, the automated procedure terminates there. The All Blocked scheme actually runs faster, but the algorithmic efficiency loss inherent to large block sampling dominates, resulting in Efficiency approximately four times lower. For larger values of ρ , the All Scalar algorithm suffers progressively more since it fails to institute any blocking in the presence of increasing correlations. For ρ = 0 5 and 0.8, Auto Blocking algorithm selects cut heights . h = 0 6 and . h = 0 3, . respectively, which each exactly place all correlated terms into sampling blocks. In every case, the slowest mixing parameter is from among the largest correlated group of 32 parameters.\n\n## Fixed Size Blocks of Varying Correlation\n\nThe right pane of Figure 3 presents results for the model structure containing fixed size parameter groupings with correlations between 0 and 0.9. For each size model, the automated blocking procedure selects a particular cut height (and hence, MCMC algorithm) twice consecutively, thus terminating on the third iteration. The cut heights selected for models N = 20, 50, and 100 are h = 0.5, 0.8, and 0.9, respectively (not shown), progressively pushing more of the correlated parameter groupings into sampling blocks. The Auto Blocking algorithm produces increases in Efficiency by factors of 4.5, 7, and 21 in the three models, over the static All Scalar and All Blocked algorithms.\n\n22", + "recall": 0.9278846153846154, + "true_md": "the structure of M permits; this static algorithm may be more representative of default MCMC algorithms provided by software packages, and is denoted as “Default.” Finally, for several example models we include an informed blocking of the model parameters, based upon expert or prior knowl- edge, which is referred to as “Informed Blocking.” Results for the random effects model also include the “Informed Cross-Level” MCMC algorithm which makes use of cross-level sampling, which is not in Ψ$_{M}$ .\n\nThe left pane of Figure 3 displays the Efficiency performance for the model structures containing varying sized blocks of fixed correlation. For ρ = 0 . 2, the Auto Blocking algorithm selects cut height h = 0, which corresponds to re-selecting the algorithm All Scalar. Since this MCMC algorithm is identical to the initial state, the automated procedure terminates there. The All Blocked scheme actually runs faster, but the algorithmic efficiency loss inherent to large block sampling dominates, resulting in Efficiency approximately four times lower. For larger values of ρ , the All Scalar algo- rithm suffers progressively more since it fails to institute any blocking in the presence of increasing correlations. For ρ = 0 . 5 and 0.8, Auto Blocking algorithm selects cut heights h = 0 . 6 and h = 0 . 3, respectively, which each exactly place all correlated terms into sampling blocks. In every case, the slowest mixing parameter is from among the largest correlated group of 32 parameters.\n\nThe right pane of Figure 3 presents results for the model structure containing fixed size parame- ter groupings with correlations between 0 and 0.9. For each size model, the automated blocking procedure selects a particular cut height (and hence, MCMC algorithm) twice consecutively, thus terminating on the third iteration. The cut heights selected for models N = 20, 50, and 100 are h = 0.5, 0.8, and 0.9, respectively (not shown), progressively pushing more of the correlated parameter groupings into sampling blocks. The Auto Blocking algorithm produces increases in Efficiency by factors of 4.5, 7, and 21 in the three models, over the static All Scalar and All Blocked algorithms.\n\n## Varying Size Blocks of Fixed Correlation\n\n## Fixed Size Blocks of Varying Correlation\n\n22" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6073028058238363, + "doc_id": "1c68b495ebdbad3a3e63a1f5353ea7a0f310ec2bdffff4a67f4455501677a02b", + "edit_distance": 0.4680365296803653, + "f1_score": 0.9450549450549449, + "meteor": 0.6775578157930242, + "precision": 0.9626865671641791, + "pred_md": "Figure 1: (a) MTR, (b) concave treatment response, (c) convex treatment response\n\nFigure 1: (a) MTR, (b) concave treatment response, (c) convex treatment response\n\nfor some closed set C in R 2 . This class of restrictions encompasses any restriction that can be written as\n\n\n\nfor any continuous function g : R × R → R . For example, shape restrictions on the treatment response function such as MTR, concave response, and convex response can be written in the form (1). Furthermore, identifying the DTE under support restrictions opens the way to identify other parameters such as the DTE conditional on the treated and the untreated in the Roy model, and the DTE conditional on potential outcomes.\n\nExample 1 (Monotone Treatment Response) MTR only requires that the potential outcomes be weakly monotone in treatment with probability one:\n\n\n\nMTR restricts the support of ( Y , Y 0 1 ) to the region above the straight line Y 1 = Y , 0 as shown in Figure 1(a).\n\nExample 2 (Concave/Convex Treatment Response) Consider panel data where the outcome without treatment and an outcome either with the low-intensity treatment or with the high-intensity treatment is observed for each individual. 5 Let W denote the observed outcome without treatment, while Y 0 and Y 1 denote potential outcomes under low-intensity treatment and high-intensity treatment, respectively. Suppose that the treatment response function is nondecreasing and that either ( W,Y 0 ) or ( W,Y 1 ) is observed for each individual.\n\n5 Various empirical studies are based on this structure, e.g. Newhouse et al. (2007), Bandiera et al. (2008), and Suri (2011), among others.\n\n7", + "recall": 0.9280575539568345, + "true_md": "for some closed set C in$_{R}$ $^{2}$. This class of restrictions encompasses any restriction that can be written as\n\nfor any continuous function g : $_{R}$×$_{R}$ → $_{R}$. For example, shape restrictions on the treatment response function such as MTR, concave response, and convex response can be written in the form (1). Furthermore, identifying the DTE under support restrictions opens the way to identify other parameters such as the DTE conditional on the treated and the untreated in the Roy model, and the DTE conditional on potential outcomes.\n\nExample 1 (Monotone Treatment Response) MTR only requires that the potential outcomes be weakly monotone in treatment with probability one:\n\nMTR restricts the support of ( Y$_{0}$, Y$_{1}$ ) to the region above the straight line Y$_{1}$ = Y$_{0}$, as shown in Figure 1(a).\n\nExample 2 (Concave/Convex Treatment Response) Consider panel data where the outcome without treat- ment and an outcome either with the low-intensity treatment or with the high-intensity treatment is observed for each individual. 5 Let W denote the observed outcome without treatment, while Y$_{0}$ and Y$_{1}$ denote potential outcomes under low-intensity treatment and high-intensity treatment, respectively. Suppose that the treat- ment response function is nondecreasing and that either ( W, Y$_{0}$ ) or ( W, Y$_{1}$ ) is observed for each individual.\n\n$^{5}$Various empirical studies are based on this structure, e.g. Newhouse et al. (2007), Bandiera et al. (2008), and Suri (2011), among others.\n\n7\n\n$$Pr ( Y$_{1}$ ≥ Y$_{0}$ ) = 1 .$$\n\n$$g ( Y$_{0}$, Y$_{1}$ ) ≤ 0 with probability one , (1)$$\n\nFigure 1: (a) MTR, (b) concave treatment response, (c) convex treatment response" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5955023097990974, + "doc_id": "309ee0bee786775e76941ef772b2e46fa5340b874d705c484cc07b01bfc26c96", + "edit_distance": 0.3469387755102041, + "f1_score": 0.9048843187660669, + "meteor": 0.7173542244996762, + "precision": 0.946236559139785, + "pred_md": "12\n\nbe a good choice for practical implementations. However, in order to reduce the complexity and DoD of the power control phase, we have developed the following less complex centralized scheme.\n\n## C. Centralized Scheme B\n\nIn this scheme, firstly the subcarriers are allocated in each cell l using the heuristic criterion defined in (11). The allocation of each subcarrier is followed by the power allocation phase (based on equalization) as mentioned in the initial allocation phase of Algorithm 2 (i.e., Steps 1 to 5). Once the subcarrier allocations are finalized, we then compute GP based powers for the allocated users at any arbitrarily selected subcarrier n in all cells. Setting the equalization based powers p n,k,l eq as the upper bound on p n,k,l and considering a high SINR regime, we now define the following less complex GP problem with the objective to maximize the throughput at the n th subcarrier:\n\n\n\nClearly, the resulting GP based power of each competing user at subcarrier n in the different cells may not succeed in achieving the upper bound, due to the ICI effect. We call this power as left-over power. The left-over power can then be distributed equally among the remaining allocated subcarriers of the user. The procedure is detailed in Algorithm 3.\n\nSince at the end of the initial allocation phase, the subcarrier allocations become fixed and the total power is distributed equally among the allocated subcarriers of a user, we cannot set an upper bound which depicts higher power than the previously allocated power. If we do so, this may cause power reduction or even no power at some other allocated subcarrier of that user in order to maintain the total power constraint. Thus, this may results in an invalid subcarrier allocation.\n\nNext follows an example which demonstrates the significance of GP as well as centralized scheme B over equal power allocation. Consider H H 1 , 2 = [0 30 . 0 25; . 0 04 . 0 15] . × 10 -9 ,\n\nMarch 19, 2018\n\nDRAFT", + "recall": 0.8669950738916257, + "true_md": "12\n\nbe a good choice for practical implementations. However, in order to reduce the complexity and DoD of the power control phase, we have developed the following less complex centralized scheme.\n\nIn this scheme, firstly the subcarriers are allocated in eachcell l using the heuristic criterion defined in (11). The allocation of each subcarrier is followe d by the power allocation phase (based on equalization) as mentioned in the initial allocation phase of Algorithm 2 (i.e., Steps 1 to 5). Once the subcarrier allocations are finalized, we thencompute GP based powers for the allocated users at any arbitrarily selected subcarrier n in all cells. Setting the equalization based powers p$_{n,k,l}$$\\_{eq}$ as the upper bound on p$\\_{n,k,l}$ and considering a high SINR regime, we now define the following less complex GP problem with the objective to maximize the throughput at the n th subcarrier: L 2 α$\\_{n,k,l}$\n\n## C. Centralized Scheme B\n\n$$minimize p$_{n,k,l}$ log$_{2}$ L ∏ l =1 ( σ 2 + I$_{n,l}$ p$_{n,k,l}$h$_{n,k,l}$ ) α$_{n,k,l}$ subject to p$_{n,k,l}$ ≤ p$_{n,k,l}$$_{eq}$, ∀ l (14)$$\n\nClearly, the resulting GP based power of each competing user at subcarrier n in the different cells may not succeed in achieving the upper bound, due to the ICI effect. We call this power as left-over power. The left-over power can then be distributed equally among the remaining allocated subcarriers of the user. The procedure is detailed in Algorithm 3.\n\nSince at the end of the initial allocation phase, the subcarrier allocations become fixed and the total power is distributed equally among the allocated subcarriers of a user, we cannot set an upper bound which depicts higher power than the previously allocated power. If we do so, this may cause power reduction or even no power at some other allocated subcarrier of that user in order to maintain the total power constraint. Thus, this may results in an invalid subcarrier allocation.\n\nNext follows an example which demonstrates the significanceof GP as well as centralized scheme B over equal power allocation. Consider H$_{1}$ , H$_{2}$ = [0 . 30 0 . 25; 0 . 04 0 . 15] × 10 − $^{9}$,\n\nDRAFT\n\nMarch 19, 2018" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.780950418110822, + "doc_id": "a2cc1ff6ef95085b7bae360f20f021ec320c03d58dda77ced07db7ad1d6b157c", + "edit_distance": 0.09956709956709957, + "f1_score": 0.8962264150943396, + "meteor": 0.9052450915955904, + "precision": 0.8878504672897196, + "pred_md": "- Stute, W., Gonz'lez-Manteiga, W., and Quindimil, M. P. (1998), 'Bootstrap Approximations in Model a Checks for Regression,' Journal of the American Statistical Association , 93(441), 141-149.\n- Stute, W., and Wang, J.-L. (1993), 'The strong law under random censorship,' The Annals of Statistics , 21(3), 1591-1607.\n- Stute, W., and Zhu, L.-X. (2002), 'Model Checks for Generalized Linear Models,' Scandinavian Journal of Statistics , 29(3), 535-545.\n- van der Vaart, A. W., and Wellner, J. A. (1996), Weak Convergence and Empirical Processes , New York: Springer.\n\nvan der Vaart, A. W., and Wellner, J. A. (2007), 'Empirical processes indexed by estimated functions,' in Asymptotics: Particles, Processes and Inverse Problems , Vol. 55, Beachwood, Ohio, USA: Institute of Mathematical Statistics, pp. 234-252.\n\n- Zheng, J. X. (1996), 'A consistent test of functional form via nonparametric estimation techniques,' Journal of Econometrics , 75, 263-289.\n\n47", + "recall": 0.9047619047619048, + "true_md": "- Stute, W., Gonz´ alez-Manteiga, W., and Quindimil, M. P. (1998), “Bootstrap Approximations in Model Checks for Regression,” Journal of the American Statistical Association , 93(441), 141–149.\n\n- Stute, W., and Wang, J.-L. (1993), “The strong law under random censorship,” The Annals of Statistics , 21(3), 1591–1607.\n\n- Stute, W., and Zhu, L.-X. (2002), “Model Checks for Generalized Linear Models,” Scandinavian Journal of Statistics , 29(3), 535–545.\n\n- van der Vaart, A. W., and Wellner, J. A. (1996), Weak Convergence and Empirical Processes , New York: Springer.\n\n- van der Vaart, A. W., and Wellner, J. A. (2007), “Empirical processes indexed by estimated functions,” in Asymptotics: Particles, Processes and Inverse Problems , Vol. 55, Beachwood, Ohio, USA: Institute of Mathematical Statistics, pp. 234–252.\n\n- Zheng, J. X. (1996), “A consistent test of functional form via nonparametric estimation techniques,” Journal of Econometrics , 75, 263–289.\n\n47" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.45003156806845684, + "doc_id": "c59c067b67a9f08b25f9aa8e6ca93251e1349dcb42de1a23737040bbd4d9d519", + "edit_distance": 0.7413533834586467, + "f1_score": 0.8888888888888888, + "meteor": 0.4518567496622882, + "precision": 0.9022556390977443, + "pred_md": "Figure 7: The red arcs are the trajectory of the system (5.60) with initial value (0 , 1 2) . and the blue arcs are the orbit with initial value (0 , 1 5) . . Through simulation, we observe that the trajectories approach to the periodic solution of (5.60) as time increases.\n\nFigure 7: The red arcs are the trajectory of the system (5.60) with initial value (0 , 1 2) . and the blue arcs are the orbit with initial value (0 , 1 5) . . Through simulation, we observe that the trajectories approach to the periodic solution of (5.60) as time increases.\n\nwhere R = 0 9 . and Γ = { x x | 1 = 0 , x 2 ≤ 0 } . It is easy to see that system (5.69) is of the form (5.57) and Φ( x , x 1 2 ) = x 1 = 0 . The system has a periodic solution\n\n\n\nwhere t ∈ R for µ ∈ ( -2 0] , .\n\nThe generating system of (5.69) has the following form\n\n\n\n\n\nand admits the periodic solution Ψ ( ) = (1+cos( ) 0 t t , -sin( )) t . By means of the equality 〈∇ Φ( x ∗ ) , f ( x ∗ ) 〉 = 〈 (1 , 0) (0 , , 1) 〉 = 0 with x ∗ = (0 0) , ∈ ∂ Γ , it is easy to say that x ∗ is a grazing point of Ψ ( ) 0 t .\n\nLet us start with the linearization of system (5.71) around the periodic solution Ψ ( ) 0 t . Consider a near solution y t ( ) = y t, ( 0 , y ∗ +∆ ) y , where ∆ = (∆ y y , 1 ∆ y 2 ) , to the periodic solution Ψ ( ) 0 t . Assume that y t ( ) satisfies condition ( N 1) , and it meets the surface of discontinuity Γ at the moment t = ξ and at the point ¯ = y y ξ, ( 0 , y ∗ +∆ ) y . Considering the formula (3.10) for the transversal point ¯ = (¯ y y , y 1 ¯ ) 2 , the first component ∂τ y (¯) ∂y 0 1 can be evaluated as ∂τ y (¯) ∂y 0 1 = -1 ¯ y 2 . From the last equality, the singularity is seen at the grazing point. By taking into account (3.17) with (5.71) and ∂τ y (¯) 0 , we obtain that\n\n∂y 1\n\n35", + "recall": 0.8759124087591241, + "true_md": "where R = 0 . 9 and Γ = { x | x$_{1}$ = 0 , x$_{2}$ ≤ 0 } . It is easy to see that system (5.69) is of the form (5.57) and Φ( x$_{1}$, x$_{2}$ ) = x$_{1}$ = 0 . The system has a periodic solution\n\nwhere t ∈ $^{R}$for µ ∈ ( − 2 , 0] .\n\nThe generating system of (5.69) has the following form\n\nand admits the periodic solution Ψ$_{0}$( t ) = (1+cos( t ) , − sin( t )) . By means of the equality 〈∇ Φ( x ∗ ) , f ( x ∗ ) 〉 = 〈 (1 , 0) , (0 , 1) 〉 = 0 with x ∗ = (0 , 0) ∈ ∂ Γ , it is easy to say that x ∗ is a grazing point of Ψ$_{0}$( t ) .\n\nLet us start with the linearization of system (5.71) around the periodic solution Ψ$_{0}$( t ) . Consider a near solution y ( t ) = y ( t, 0 , y ∗ +Δ y ) , where Δ y = (Δ y$_{1}$, Δ y$_{2}$ ) , to the periodic solution Ψ$_{0}$( t ) . Assume that y ( t ) satisfies condition ( N 1) , and it meets the surface of discontinuity Γ at the moment t = ξ and at the point ¯ y = y ( ξ, 0 , y ∗ + Δ y ) . Considering the formula (3.10) for the transversal point ¯ y = (¯ y$_{1}$, ¯ y$_{2}$ ) , the first component ∂τ (¯ y ) ∂y 0 1 can be evaluated as ∂τ (¯ y ) ∂y 0 1 = − 1 ¯ y$_{2}$ . From the last equality, the singularity is seen at the grazing point. By taking into account (3.17) with (5.71) and ∂τ (¯ y ) ∂y 0 1 , we obtain that\n\n35\n\nFigure 7: The red arcs are the trajectory of the system (5.60) with initial value (0 , 1 . 2) and the blue arcs are the orbit with initial value (0 , 1 . 5) . Through simulation, we observe that the trajectories approach to the periodic solution of (5.60) as time increases.\n\n$$Ψ$_{µ}$( t ) = (1 + (1 + µ ) cos( t ) , − (1 + µ ) sin( t )) , (5.70)$$\n\n$$x ′ 1 = x$_{2}$, x ′ 2 = − 0 . 0001[ x 2 + ( x$_{1}$ − 1) 2 − 1] x$_{2}$ − x$_{1}$ + 1 , Δ x$_{2}$ | $^{x}$∈ Γ = − (1 + Rx$_{2}$ ) x$_{2}$, (5.71)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7496385599708072, + "doc_id": "c9acc03d67383c6014fd67fc70ee040f79a592c123a476e16e940a4d4af21685", + "edit_distance": 0.18468468468468469, + "f1_score": 0.9700000000000001, + "meteor": 0.8685347424157566, + "precision": 0.9897959183673469, + "pred_md": "Table 5: Quantiles of potential outcomes and quantile treatment effects (grams)\n\nFigure 16: Estimated quantile curves\n\nFigure 16: Estimated quantile curves\n\nthe monotonized quantile curves for Y 0 and Y 1 , respectively. The marginal distribution functions of Y 0 and Y 1 are obtained by inverting the monotonized quantile curves.\n\nTable 5 presents estimates of quantiles for potential outcomes and QTE. One noticeable observation is that for SCCG women, low quantiles ( q < 0 5) of birth weight from smokers are remarkably higher compared . to those for the entire sample or other subgroups, while their nonsmokers' birth weight quantiles are similar to those in other groups. This leads to the lower quantile smoking effects for this college education group compared to other groups at low quantiles.\n\nI also obtain the proportion of potential low birth weight infants to smokers and nonsmokers, F 0 (2 , 500) and F 1 (2 500), respectively. , As shown in Table 6, 6.5% of babies to smokers would have low birth weight,\n\n41", + "recall": 0.9509803921568627, + "true_md": "Table 5: Quantiles of potential outcomes and quantile treatment effects (grams)\n\nFigure 16: Estimated quantile curves\n\nthe monotonized quantile curves for Y$_{0}$ and Y$_{1}$ , respectively. The marginal distribution functions of Y$_{0}$ and Y$_{1}$ are obtained by inverting the monotonized quantile curves.\n\nTable 5 presents estimates of quantiles for potential outcomes and QTE. One noticeable observation is that for SCCG women, low quantiles ( q < 0 . 5) of birth weight from smokers are remarkably higher compared to those for the entire sample or other subgroups, while their nonsmokers’ birth weight quantiles are similar to those in other groups. This leads to the lower quantile smoking effects for this college education group compared to other groups at low quantiles.\n\nI also obtain the proportion of potential low birth weight infants to smokers and nonsmokers, F$_{0}$ (2 , 500) and F$_{1}$ (2 , 500), respectively. As shown in Table 6, 6.5% of babies to smokers would have low birth weight,\n\n41" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.16143821483800144, + "doc_id": "9de94a8133ff642561b00c2c91d7e6ac930814c6b3cda8239996daa59cf08599", + "edit_distance": 0.6768149882903981, + "f1_score": 0.8354430379746837, + "meteor": 0.29859616300867137, + "precision": 0.8839285714285714, + "pred_md": "\n\n\n\nwhere r t, z ( ) = [ f (Ψ( )+ t z ) -f (Ψ( ))] t -A t z ( ) and q i ( z ) = W i (Ψ( θ i )+ ) z -W i (Ψ( θ i )) -D ( j ) i z, are continuous functions, and matrices D ( j ) i satisfy condition ( A 4) . The functions are continuously differentiable with respect to z. One can verify that r t, ( 0) ≡ q i (0) ≡ 0 and r t ( + ω, z ) = r t, z ( ) for t ∈ R . Moreover, the derivatives satisfy r ' ( t, 0) ≡ q ' iz (0) ≡ 0 and the functions r t, z ( ) → 0 , q i ( z ) → 0 , r ' z ( t, z ) → 0 and q ' iz ( z ) → 0 , as z → 0 uniformly in t ∈ [0 , ∞ ) , i ≥ 0 . Each system (4.35) for j = 1 2 , , . . . , m, corresponds to a region adjoint to initial value, x 0 such that these regions cover a neighborhood of x . 0\n\nFix a number j and denote Y j ( ) t the fundamental matrix of adjoint to (4.35) linear homogeneous system\n\n\n\nof the form (4.34). One can verify that\n\n\n\nfor -∞ < t, s < ∞ .\n\nWe can write\n\n\n\nwhere O n -1 is the ( n -1) × ( n -1) zero matrix. Then it can be driven\n\n\n\nwhere\n\n\n\n\n\n23", + "recall": 0.792, + "true_md": "$$$_{z}$′ = A ( t ) z + r ( t, z ) , Δ z | t = θ$_{i}$ = D ( j ) i z + q$_{i}$ ( z ) , j = 1 , 2 , . . . , m, (4.35)$$\n\nwhere r ( t, z ) = [ f (Ψ( t )+ z ) − f (Ψ( t ))] − A ( t ) z and q$_{i}$ ( z ) = W$_{i}$ (Ψ( θ$_{i}$ )+ z ) − W$_{i}$ (Ψ( θ$_{i}$ )) − D ( j ) i z, are contin- uous functions, and matrices D ( j ) i satisfy condition ( A 4) . The functions are continuously differentiable with respect to z. One can verify that r ( t, 0) ≡ q$_{i}$ (0) ≡ 0 and r ( t + ω, z ) = r ( t, z ) for t ∈ $^{R}$. Moreover, the derivatives satisfy r ′ ( t, 0) ≡ q ′ $_{iz}$(0) ≡ 0 and the functions r ( t, z ) → 0 , q$_{i}$ ( z ) → 0 , r ′ $_{z}$( t, z ) → 0 and q ′ $_{iz}$( z ) → 0 , as z → 0 uniformly in t ∈ [0 , ∞ ) , i ≥ 0 . Each system (4.35) for j = 1 , 2 , . . . , m, corresponds to a region adjoint to initial value, x$_{0}$ such that these regions cover a neighborhood of x$_{0}$.\n\nFix a number j and denote Y$_{j}$ ( t ) the fundamental matrix of adjoint to (4.35) linear homogeneous system\n\nof the form (4.34). One can verify that\n\nfor −∞ < t, s < ∞ .\n\nWe can write\n\nwhere $^{O$\\_{n}$}$− 1 is the ( n − 1) × ( n − 1) zero matrix. Then it can be driven\n\nwhere\n\n$$$_{y}$′ = A ( t ) y, Δ y | t = θ$_{i}$ = D ( j ) i y, (4.36)$$\n\n$$Y$_{j}$ ( t ) Y − 1 j ( s ) = P$_{j}$ ( t )    1 0 0 exp( H$_{j}$ ( t − s ))    $_{P}$− 1 j ( s ) , (4.37)$$\n\n$$   1 0 0 exp( H$_{j}$ ( t − s ))    =    0 0 0 exp( H$_{j}$ ( t − s ))    +    1 0 0 $^{O$_{n}$}$− 1    ,$$\n\n$$Y$_{j}$ ( t ) Y − 1 j ( s ) = G ( j ) 1 ( t, s ) + G ( j ) 2 ( t, s ) = G ( j $^{)}$( t, s ) ,$$\n\n$$G ( j ) 1 ( t, s ) = P$_{j}$ ( t )    0 0 0 exp( H$_{j}$ ( t − s ))    $_{P}$− 1 j ( s ) , G ( j ) 2 ( t, s ) = P$_{j}$ ( t )    1 0 0 $^{O$_{n}$}$− 1    $_{P}$− 1 j ( s ) .$$\n\n23" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4489004532492459, + "doc_id": "a21d19c2eca18913dc4295b0fbadd32f9948b2f4d40109719b5ec5a1393aad78", + "edit_distance": 0.42923076923076925, + "f1_score": 0.9142857142857143, + "meteor": 0.5799642579946649, + "precision": 0.9473684210526315, + "pred_md": "Figure 4: Makarov bounds\n\nFigure 4: Makarov bounds\n\nand when F ( y , y 0 1 ) = C U t ( F 0 ( y 0 ) , F 1 ( y 1 )) respectively, where\n\n\n\nNote that both C U s ( u, v ) and C L t ( u, v ) depend on δ , through s and t , respectively. 9 Since the joint distribution achieving Makarov bounds varies with δ, Makarov bounds are only pointwise sharp, not uniformly . To address this issue, Firpo and Ridder (2008) proposed joint bounds on the DTE for multiple values of δ , which are tighter than Makarov bounds. However, their improved bounds are not sharp and sharp bounds on the functional F ∆ are an open question. For details, see Frank et al. (1997), Nelsen (2006) and Firpo and Ridder (2008).\n\nAlthough Makarov bounds are sharp when no other restrictions are imposed, they are often too wide to be informative in practice and not sharp in the presence of additional restrictions on the set of possible pairs of potential outcomes. Figure 5 illustrates that if the support is restricted to the region above the straight line Y 1 = Y 0 by MTR, the Makarov lower bound is not the best possible anymore. The lower bound can be\n\n9 To be precise, when the distribution of Y 1 -Y 0 is discontinuous, the Makarov lower bound is attained only for the left limit of the DTE. That is, F ∆ ( δ -) = F L ∆ ( δ -) = t under C L t , while under C U s , F ∆ ( δ ) = F U ∆ ( δ ) = s for the right-continuous distribution function F ∆ . Note that even if both marginal distributions of Y 1 and Y 0 are continuous, the distribution of Y 1 -Y 0 may not be continuous. Hence, typically the lower bound on the DTE is established only for the left limit of the DTE Pr[ Y 1 -Y 0 < δ . ] See Nelsen (2006) for details.\n\n11", + "recall": 0.8834355828220859, + "true_md": "Figure 4: Makarov bounds\n\nand when F ( y$_{0}$, y$_{1}$ ) = C U t ( F$_{0}$ ( y$_{0}$ ) , F$_{1}$ ( y$_{1}$ )) respectively, where\n\nNote that both C U s ( u, v ) and C L t ( u, v ) depend on δ , through s and t , respectively. 9 Since the joint distri- bution achieving Makarov bounds varies with δ, Makarov bounds are only pointwise sharp, not uniformly . To address this issue, Firpo and Ridder (2008) proposed joint bounds on the DTE for multiple values of δ , which are tighter than Makarov bounds. However, their improved bounds are not sharp and sharp bounds on the functional F$_{Δ}$ are an open question. For details, see Frank et al. (1997), Nelsen (2006) and Firpo and Ridder (2008).\n\nAlthough Makarov bounds are sharp when no other restrictions are imposed, they are often too wide to be informative in practice and not sharp in the presence of additional restrictions on the set of possible pairs of potential outcomes. Figure 5 illustrates that if the support is restricted to the region above the straight line Y$_{1}$ = Y$_{0}$ by MTR, the Makarov lower bound is not the best possible anymore. The lower bound can be\n\n$^{9}$To be precise, when the distribution of Y$_{1}$ − Y$_{0}$ is discontinuous, the Makarov lower bound is attained only for the left limit of the DTE. That is, F$_{Δ}$ $^{(}$δ − ) = F L Δ $^{(}$δ − ) = t under C L t , while under C U s , F$_{Δ}$ ( δ ) = F U Δ ( δ ) = s for the right-continuous distribution function F$_{Δ}$ . Note that even if both marginal distributions of Y$_{1}$ and Y$_{0}$ are continuous, the distribution of Y$_{1}$ − Y$_{0}$ may not be continuous. Hence, typically the lower bound on the DTE is established only for the left limit of the DTE Pr [ Y$_{1}$ − Y$_{0}$ < δ ] . See Nelsen (2006) for details.\n\n11\n\n$$s = F U Δ ( δ ) and t = F L Δ $^{(}$δ − $^{)}$, C U s ( u, v ) =      min ( u + s − 1 , v ) , 1 − s ≤ u ≤ 1 , 0 ≤ v ≤ s, max ( u + v − 1 , 0) , elsewhere, C L t ( u, v ) =      min ( u, v − t ) , 0 ≤ u ≤ 1 − t, t ≤ v ≤ 1 , max ( u + v − 1 , 0) , elsewhere.$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.1768166468519488, + "doc_id": "c12dd9d6fce8781418627db23c2fdf7c326d580f5e4a21020548b5d4bdae29b9", + "edit_distance": 0.6031613976705491, + "f1_score": 0.8832116788321168, + "meteor": 0.3810395401580288, + "precision": 0.8581560283687943, + "pred_md": "4\n\nKABALAN GASPARD\n\na k is defined to be a ( k mod p ) for all k / ∈ { 0 , ..., p -1 } ( a p -1 = 0, trivially). And so p -2 ∑ k =0 ( a p -k -a 1 ) ζ k = u = ζ -t u = p -2 ∑ k =0 ( a k + t -a ( p -1)+ t ) ζ k by 1 and therefore, since this representation is unique, we get\n\n\n\nLetting k 0 be the mod p solution to k + t ≡ p -k ( p ), we get a k 0 + t = a p -k 0 and so (1.1) yields a ( p -1)+ t = a 1 . (1.1) then becomes\n\n\n\nSince replacing k by -( k + ) in (1.2) leaves the equation invariant, we get t p -1 2 pairs of equal terms with distinct indices amongst a , ..., a 0 p -1 (the 'remaining' term being a k 0 + t ). Let b , ..., b 1 p -1 2 be representatives of these distinct pairs, and let b k 0 + t = a k 0 + t (we have simply selected and reordered the a i 's).\n\nNow by the proof of 1, there is a unique c modulo p such that ζ u c is primary, and this c is the solution to ax ≡ b ( p ) where u ≡ a + bλ ( λ 2 ) where λ = (1 -ζ ). Now u = p -2 ∑ k =0 a ζ k k .\n\nWriting, as a polynomial, f ( x ) = p -2 ∑ k =0 a x k k , we can find a and b by finding the coefficients of 1 and x respectively of f (1 -x ) since ζ = 1 -λ . Making elementary use of the Binomial Theorem, we see that f (1 -x ) = p -2 ∑ k =0 a k (1 -x ) k = p -2 ∑ k =0 a k -p -2 ∑ k =0 ka x k + ... (we only need the first two terms). So c is the solution to\n\n\n\nWhich, since a p -1 = 0, is equivalent to\n\n\n\nNow k 0 + t ≡ p -k 0 ( p ) ⇒ k 0 + t ≡ -( k 0 + ) + t t ( p ) ⇒ ( k 0 + ) t ≡ 2 -1 t ⇒ b k 0 + t = a k 0 + t = a 2 -1 t . Finally, note that for a i = a t -i = b l for 1 ≤ l ≤ p -1 2 by (1.2), ia i +( t -i ) a t -i = tb l .", + "recall": 0.9097744360902256, + "true_md": "a$_{k}$ is defined to be a$_{(}$$\\_{k}$ mod p ) for all k / ∈ { 0 , ..., p − 1 } ( a$\\_{p}$ − 1 = 0, trivially). And so $^{p}$− 2 ∑ k =0 ( a$\\_{p}$ − k − a$\\_{1}$ ) ζ k = u = ζ − $^{t}$u = $^{p}$− 2 ∑ k =0 ( a$\\_{k}$$_{+}$$\\_{t}$ − a$\\_{(}$$_{p}$ − 1)+ $_{t}$) ζ k by 1 and therefore, since this rep- resentation is unique, we get\n\n$$(1.1) a$_{k}$$_{+}$$_{t}$ − a$_{(}$$_{p}$ − 1)+ t = a$_{p}$ − k − a$_{1}$ for all 0 ≤ k ≤ p − 1$$\n\nLetting k$_{0}$ be the mod p solution to k + t ≡ p − k ( p ), we get a$_{k}$$\\_{0}$$_{+}$$\\_{t}$ = a$\\_{p}$ − k$\\_{0}$ and so (1.1) yields a$\\_{(}$$_{p}$ − 1)+ t = a$_{1}$ . (1.1) then becomes\n\n$$(1.2) a$_{k}$$_{+}$$_{t}$ = a$_{p}$ − k = a − k for all 0 ≤ k ≤ p − 1$$\n\nSince replacing k by − ( k + t ) in (1.2) leaves the equation invariant, we get $^{p}$− 1 2 pairs of equal terms with distinct indices amongst a$_{0}$, ..., a$_{p}$ − 1 (the ’remaining’ term being a$_{k}$$\\_{0}$$_{+}$$\\_{t}$ ). Let b$\\_{1}$, ..., b $^{p}$− 1 2 be representatives of these distinct pairs, and let b$\\_{k}$$_{0}$$\\_{+}$$_{t}$ = a$_{k}$$\\_{0}$$_{+}$$\\_{t}$ (we have simply selected and reordered the a$\\_{i}$ ’s).\n\nNow by the proof of 1, there is a unique c modulo p such that ζ $^{c}$u is primary, and this c is the solution to ax ≡ b ( p ) where u ≡ a + bλ ( λ $^{2}$) where λ = (1 − ζ ). Now u = $^{p}$− 2 ∑ k =0 a$_{k}$ζ $^{k}$. Writing, as a polynomial, f ( x ) = $^{p}$− 2 ∑ k =0 a$_{k}$x $^{k}$, we can find a and b by finding the coefficients of 1 and x respectively of f (1 − x ) since ζ = 1 − λ . Making elementary use of the Binomial Theorem, we see that f (1 − x ) = $^{p}$− 2 ∑ k =0 a$_{k}$ (1 − x ) k = $^{p}$− 2 ∑ k =0 a$_{k}$ − $^{p}$− 2 ∑ k =0 ka$_{k}$x + ... (we only need the first two terms). So c is the solution to\n\n$$(1.3) ( $^{p}$− 2 ∑ k =0 a$_{k}$ ) x ≡ − $^{p}$− 2 ∑ k =0 ka$_{k}$ ( p )$$\n\nWhich, since a$_{p}$ − 1 = 0, is equivalent to\n\n$$(1.4) ( $^{p}$− 1 ∑ k =0 a$_{k}$ ) x ≡ − $^{p}$− 1 ∑ k =0 ka$_{k}$ ( p )$$\n\nNow k$_{0}$ + t ≡ p − k$_{0}$ ( p ) ⇒ k$_{0}$ + t ≡ − ( k$_{0}$ + t ) + t ( p ) ⇒ ( k$_{0}$ + t ) ≡ 2 − $^{1}$t ⇒ b$_{k}$$\\_{0}$$_{+}$$\\_{t}$ = a$\\_{k}$$_{0}$$\\_{+}$$_{t}$ = a$_{2}$$\\_{−}$ 1 $\\_{t}$. Finally, note that for a$\\_{i}$ = a$\\_{t}$ − i = b$\\_{l}$ for 1 ≤ l ≤ $^{p}$− 1 2 by (1.2), ia$\\_{i}$ + ( t − i ) a$\\_{t}$ − i = tb$\\_{l}$ .\n\n4\n\nKABALAN GASPARD" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7458011080865818, + "doc_id": "4d94457611aa5bd57a9ba36d44527998cd5e9a5762ed92198686d94488c6eb36", + "edit_distance": 0.21956087824351297, + "f1_score": 0.9312977099236641, + "meteor": 0.7417714256995087, + "precision": 0.9457364341085271, + "pred_md": "glyph[negationslash]\n\ne : X × X → R such that e ( x, x ) = 1 and e ( x, y ) = 0 for all x, y ∈ X such that x = y . In this case we call I ( X,ρ,R ) the generalized incidence ring of X with coefficients in R . If ρ is a partial order then I ( X,ρ,R ) is the incidence ring over R .\n\nThe multiplication is defined so that the product of f, g ∈ I ( X,ρ,R ) is the function given by equation 1 for all x, y ∈ X . This is called convolution .\n\n\n\nObviously if the sum in equation 1 is nonzero then xρy in X . In this case [ x, y ] is finite so convolution uniquely determines an element of R . Consider f, g, h ∈ I ( X,ρ,R ) and w, z ∈ X with wρz . A nonzero term of (( fg ) h ) ( w, z ) is determined by y ∈ [ w, z ] and x ∈ [ w, y ]. Thus there are relations wρx , xρy , yρz , wρz , and wρy . Since the relation is balanced these are equivalent to wρx xρy , , yρz , wρz , and xρz , or x ∈ [ w, z ] and y ∈ [ x, z ]. This gives an identical term of ( f ( gh )) ( w, z ). Since the nonzero terms match up over the relations we have ( fg ) h = f ( gh ).\n\nFor each x, y ∈ X such that xρy there exists e xy ∈ I ( X,ρ,R ) such that e xy ( i, j ) is given by equation 2 for all i, j ∈ X .\n\n\n\nIf w ∈ X then wρw since a balanced relation is reflexive. It is easy to show ( e ww ) 2 = e ww for all w ∈ X directly from the definition in 1. Equations 3 and 4 also\n\n5", + "recall": 0.9172932330827067, + "true_md": "e : X × X → R such that e ( x, x ) = 1 and e ( x, y ) = 0 for all x, y ∈ X such that x ̸ = y . In this case we call I ( X, ρ, R ) the generalized incidence ring of X with coefficients in R . If ρ is a partial order then I ( X, ρ, R ) is the incidence ring over R .\n\nThe multiplication is defined so that the product of f, g ∈ I ( X, ρ, R ) is the function given by equation 1 for all x, y ∈ X . This is called convolution .\n\n$$( fg ) ( x, y ) =      ∑ z ∈ [ x,y ] f ( x, z ) g ( z, y ) if xρy in X 0 otherwise (1)$$\n\nObviously if the sum in equation 1 is nonzero then xρy in X . In this case [ x, y ] is finite so convolution uniquely determines an element of R . Consider f, g, h ∈ I ( X, ρ, R ) and w, z ∈ X with wρz . A nonzero term of (( fg ) h ) ( w, z ) is determined by y ∈ [ w, z ] and x ∈ [ w, y ]. Thus there are relations wρx , xρy , yρz , wρz , and wρy . Since the relation is balanced these are equivalent to wρx , xρy , yρz , wρz , and xρz , or x ∈ [ w, z ] and y ∈ [ x, z ]. This gives an identical term of ( f ( gh )) ( w, z ). Since the nonzero terms match up over the relations we have ( fg ) h = f ( gh ).\n\nFor each x, y ∈ X such that xρy there exists e$_{xy}$ ∈ I ( X, ρ, R ) such that e$_{xy}$ ( i, j ) is given by equation 2 for all i, j ∈ X .\n\n$$e$_{xy}$ ( i, j ) =      1 if x = i and y = j 0 otherwise (2)$$\n\nIf w ∈ X then wρw since a balanced relation is reflexive. It is easy to show ( e$_{ww}$ ) 2 = e$_{ww}$ for all w ∈ X directly from the definition in 1. Equations 3 and 4 also\n\n5" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6546833142365714, + "doc_id": "dd2a143f2b733e87101d4b600a061e39075d5da61f7958b66f89115269c5291c", + "edit_distance": 0.5390946502057613, + "f1_score": 0.9611111111111111, + "meteor": 0.6902948036197406, + "precision": 0.9664804469273743, + "pred_md": "arXiv:1110.4445v3 [math.NT] 29 May 2012\n\n## ON THE APPLICATIONS OF CYCLOTOMIC FIELDS IN INTRODUCTORY NUMBER THEORY\n\n## KABALAN GASPARD\n\nAbstract. In this essay, we see how prime cyclotomic fields (cyclotomic fields obtained by adjoining a primitive p -th root of unity to Q , where p is an odd prime) can lead to elegant proofs of number theoretical concepts. We namely develop the notion of primary units in a cyclotomic field, demonstrate their equivalence to real units in this case, and show how this leads to a proof of a special case of Fermat's Last Theorem. We finally modernize Dirichlet's solution to Pell's Equation.\n\nThroughout this paper, unless specified otherwise, ζ ≡ ζ p ≡ e 2 π √ -1 p where p is an odd prime. K ≡ Q ( ζ ) and O K is the ring of integers of K . We assume knowledge of the basic properties of prime cyclotomic fields that can be found in any introductory algebraic number theory textbook, namely that:\n\n- · Gal K ( : Q ) /similarequal U ( Z /p Z ) (the group of units of Z /p Z ), which is cyclic and of order p -1.\n- · O K = Z [ ζ p ] = 1 〈 , ζ p , ..., ζ p -2 p 〉 Z , where { 1 , ζ p , ..., ζ p -2 p } is a Z -basis for O K .\n- · The only roots of unity in O K (i.e. solutions in C to x n = 1 for some n ∈ N ) are of the form ± ζ i p , i ∈ Z .\n\nWe also assume elementary knowledge of quadratic characters, quadratic reciprocity, and the Legendre symbol ( k p ) .\n\n## 1. Primary elements in O K\n\nDefinition 1. Let α ∈ O K with α prime to p . Then α is primary iff α is congruent to a rational integer modulo (1 -ζ p ) 2 .\n\nDate : June 22, 2011, re-edited February 11, 2012.\n\n1", + "recall": 0.9558011049723757, + "true_md": "# ON THE APPLICATIONS OF CYCLOTOMIC FIELDS IN INTRODUCTORY NUMBER THEORY\n\nKABALAN GASPARD\n\nAbstract. In this essay, we see how prime cyclotomic fields (cyclotomic fields obtained by adjoining a primitive p -th root of unity to Q , where p is an odd prime) can lead to elegant proofs of number theoretical concepts. We namely develop the notion of primary units in a cyclotomic field, demonstrate their equivalence to real units in this case, and show how this leads to a proof of a special case of Fermat’s Last Theorem. We finally modernize Dirichlet’s solution to Pell’s Equation.\n\nThroughout this paper, unless specified otherwise, ζ ≡ ζ$_{p}$ ≡ e 2 $_{π}$√ − 1 p where p is an odd prime. K ≡ Q ( ζ ) and O K is the ring of integers of K . We assume knowledge of the basic properties of prime cyclotomic fields that can be found in any introductory algebraic number theory textbook, namely that:\n\nWe also assume elementary knowledge of quadratic characters, quadratic reciprocity, and the Legendre symbol ( k p ) .\n\nDefinition 1. Let α ∈ O K with α prime to p . Then α is primary iff α is congruent to a rational integer modulo (1 − ζ$_{p}$ ) $^{2}$.\n\nDate : June 22, 2011, re-edited February 11, 2012.\n\n1\n\n## 1. Primary elements in O K\n\narXiv:1110.4445v3 [math.NT] 29 May 2012\n\n- • Gal ( K : Q ) ≃ U ( Z /p Z ) (the group of units of Z /p Z ), which is cyclic and of order p − 1. 2 2\n\n- − • O K = Z [ ζ$_{p}$ ] = 〈 1 , ζ$_{p}$, ..., ζ $^{p}$− 2 p 〉 $_{Z}$, where { 1 , ζ$_{p}$, ..., ζ $^{p}$− 2 p } is a Z -basis for O $_{K}$. • The only roots of unity in O K (i.e. solutions in C to x n = 1 for some n ∈\n\n- 〈 〉 { } • The only roots of unity in O K (i.e. solutions in C to x n = 1 for some n ∈ N ) are of the form ± ζ i $_{p}$, i ∈ Z ." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.08391048504697986, + "doc_id": "de168c12fa58c9aed8f829b5b9427457525b93f92190ff07540ac875632f9a35", + "edit_distance": 0.7902912621359224, + "f1_score": 0.8205128205128205, + "meteor": 0.26324876790107327, + "precision": 0.9014084507042254, + "pred_md": "## Proof of Corollary 1\n\nThe proof consists of two parts: (i) deriving the lower bound and (ii) deriving the upper bound.\n\n## Part 1. The sharp lower bound\n\nFirst, I prove that in the dual representation\n\n\n\nthe function ϕ is nondecreasing.\n\nRecall that\n\n\n\nPick ( y , y ' 0 ' 1 ) and ( y '' 0 , y '' 1 ) with y '' 0 > y ' 0 in the support of the optimal joint distribution. Then,\n\n\n\nThe inequality in the second line of (A.10) is satisfied because y '' 1 ≥ y '' 0 > y . ' 0 The inequality in the third line of (A.10) holds because 1 { y 1 -y 0 < δ } is nondecreasing in y 0 .\n\n63", + "recall": 0.7529411764705882, + "true_md": "## Proof of Corollary 1\n\nFirst, I prove that in the dual representation\n\nThe proof consists of two parts: (i) deriving the lower bound and (ii) deriving the upper bound.\n\n## Part 1. The sharp lower bound\n\nthe function ϕ is nondecreasing.\n\nRecall that\n\nPick ( y ′ $_{0}$, y ′ $_{1}$) and ( y ′′ $_{0}$, y ′′ $_{1}$) with y ′′ 0 > y ′ 0 in the support of the optimal joint distribution. Then,\n\nThe inequality in the second line of (A.10) is satisfied because y ′′ 1 ≥ y ′′ 0 > y ′ $_{0}$. The inequality in the third line of (A.10) holds because 1 { y$_{1}$ − y$_{0}$ < δ } is nondecreasing in y$_{0}$ .\n\n63\n\n$$ϕ ( y ′ $_{0}$) = inf y$_{1}$ ≥ y$_{0}$ { 1 { y$_{1}$ − y ′ 0 < δ } − ψ ( y$_{1}$ ) } (A.10) ≤ 1 { y ′′ 1 − y ′ 0 < δ } − ψ ( y ′′ $_{1}$) ≤ 1 { y ′′ 1 − y ′′ 0 < δ } − ψ ( y ′′ $_{1}$) = ϕ ( y ′′ $_{0}$) .$$\n\n$$ϕ ( y$_{0}$ ) = inf y$_{1}$ ≥ y$_{0}$ { 1 { y$_{1}$ − y$_{0}$ < δ } − ψ ( y$_{1}$ ) } .$$\n\n$$inf F ∈ Π( F$_{0}$,F$_{1}$ ) ∫ { 1 { y$_{1}$ − y$_{0}$ < δ } + λ ( 1 ( y$_{1}$ < y$_{0}$ )) } dF = sup ( ϕ,ψ ) ∈ Φ$_{c}$ ∫ ϕ ( y$_{0}$ ) dµ$_{0}$ +$^{∫}$ ψ ( y$_{1}$ ) dµ$_{1}$,$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6104682919939565, + "doc_id": "a8ad8a08aa57e30cd1a72c6099190ab2dfc1ca0bdbc14774b5483edf2d406958", + "edit_distance": 0.3008356545961003, + "f1_score": 0.9682151589242053, + "meteor": 0.7571957767825284, + "precision": 0.9753694581280788, + "pred_md": "throughout this paper and present concrete examples of support restrictions. I review the existing method of identifying the DTE given marginal distributions without support restrictions to demonstrate its limits in the presence of support restrictions. I also briefly discuss the optimal transportation approach to describe the key idea of my identification strategy. Section 3 formally characterizes the identification region of the DTE under general support restrictions and derives informative bounds for economic examples from the characterization. Section 4 provides numerical examples to assess the informativeness of my new bounds and analyzes sources of identification gains. Section 5 illustrates the usefulness of these bounds by applying DTE bounds derived in Section 3 to an empirical analysis of the impact distribution of smoking on infant birth weight. Section 6 concludes and discusses interesting extensions.\n\n## 2 Basic Setup, DTE Bounds and Optimal Transportation Approach\n\nIn this section, I present the potential outcomes setup that this study is based on, the notation, and the assumptions used throughout this study. I demonstrate that the bounds on the DTE established without support restrictions are not the best possible bounds in the presence of support restrictions. Then I propose a new method to derive sharp bounds on the DTE based on the optimal transportation framework.\n\n## 2.1 Basic Setup\n\nThe setup that I consider is as follows: the econometrician observes a realized outcome variable Y and a treatment participation indicator D for each individual , where D = 1 indicates treatment participation while D = 0 nonparticipation. An observed outcome Y can be written as Y = DY 1 +(1 -D Y ) 0 . Only Y 1 is observed for the individual who takes the treatment while only Y 0 is observed for the individual who does not take the treatment, where Y 0 and Y 1 are the potential outcome without and with treatment, respectively. Treatment effects ∆ are defined as ∆ = Y 1 -Y 0 the difference of potential outcomes. The objective of this study is to identify the distribution function of treatment effects F ∆ ( δ ) = Pr ( Y 1 -Y 0 ≤ δ ) from observed pairs ( Y, D ) for fixed δ ∈ R .\n\nTo avoid notational confusion, I differentiate between the distribution and the distribution function . Let µ 0 , µ 1 and π denote marginal distributions of Y 0 and Y 1 , and their joint distribution, respectively. That is, for any measurable set A d in R , µ d ( A d ) = Pr { Y d ∈ A d } for d ∈ { 0 1 , } and π ( A ) = Pr { ( Y , Y 0 1 ) ∈ A } for any measurable set A in R 2 . In addition, let F , 0 F 1 and F denote marginal distribution functions of Y 0 and Y , 1 and their joint distribution function, respectively. That is, F d ( y d ) = µ d (( -∞ , y d ]) and\n\n5", + "recall": 0.9611650485436893, + "true_md": "throughout this paper and present concrete examples of support restrictions. I review the existing method of identifying the DTE given marginal distributions without support restrictions to demonstrate its limits in the presence of support restrictions. I also briefly discuss the optimal transportation approach to describe the key idea of my identification strategy. Section 3 formally characterizes the identification region of the DTE under general support restrictions and derives informative bounds for economic examples from the characterization. Section 4 provides numerical examples to assess the informativeness of my new bounds and analyzes sources of identification gains. Section 5 illustrates the usefulness of these bounds by applying DTE bounds derived in Section 3 to an empirical analysis of the impact distribution of smoking on infant birth weight. Section 6 concludes and discusses interesting extensions.\n\nIn this section, I present the potential outcomes setup that this study is based on, the notation, and the assumptions used throughout this study. I demonstrate that the bounds on the DTE established without support restrictions are not the best possible bounds in the presence of support restrictions. Then I propose a new method to derive sharp bounds on the DTE based on the optimal transportation framework.\n\nThe setup that I consider is as follows: the econometrician observes a realized outcome variable Y and a treatment participation indicator D for each individual , where D = 1 indicates treatment participation while D = 0 nonparticipation. An observed outcome Y can be written as Y = DY$_{1}$ + (1 − D ) Y$_{0}$ . Only Y$_{1}$ is observed for the individual who takes the treatment while only Y$_{0}$ is observed for the individual who does not take the treatment, where Y$_{0}$ and Y$_{1}$ are the potential outcome without and with treatment, respectively. Treatment effects Δ are defined as Δ = Y$_{1}$ − Y$_{0}$ the difference of potential outcomes. The objective of this study is to identify the distribution function of treatment effects F$_{Δ}$ ( δ ) = Pr ( Y$_{1}$ − Y$_{0}$ ≤ δ ) from observed pairs ( Y, D ) for fixed δ ∈$_{R}$ .\n\nTo avoid notational confusion, I differentiate between the distribution and the distribution function . Let µ$_{0}$ , µ$_{1}$ and π denote marginal distributions of Y$_{0}$ and Y$_{1}$ , and their joint distribution, respectively. That is, for any measurable set A$_{d}$ in $_{R}$, µ$_{d}$ ( A$_{d}$ ) = Pr { Y$_{d}$ ∈ A$_{d}$ } for d ∈ { 0 , 1 } and π ( A ) = Pr { ( Y$_{0}$, Y$_{1}$ ) ∈ A } for any measurable set A in R $^{2}$. In addition, let F$_{0}$, F$_{1}$ and F denote marginal distribution functions of Y$_{0}$ and Y$_{1}$, and their joint distribution function, respectively. That is, F$_{d}$ ( y$_{d}$ ) = µ$_{d}$ (( −∞ , y$_{d}$ ]) and\n\n5\n\n## 2.1 Basic Setup\n\n## 2 Basic Setup, DTE Bounds and Optimal Transportation Ap- proach" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7816956800168057, + "doc_id": "9aae073663cc32026eb45edd1a97594c0424a26bf4b0165ec5ddd0d80ea350af", + "edit_distance": 0.2202970297029703, + "f1_score": 0.945337620578778, + "meteor": 0.8196081538933214, + "precision": 0.9671052631578947, + "pred_md": "Figure 15: Marginal smoking effects\n\nFigure 15: Marginal smoking effects\n\nI estimate the equation (16) using a series approximation. This method is especially convenient to estimate MTE ∂µ ∂p . The estimation results for the regressions (15) and (16) are reported in Table C.1 and Table C.2, respectively, in Appendix C. Figure 15 shows estimated marginal treatment effects for each propensity to not smoke. It is observed that the positive effect of smoking cessation on infant birth weight increases as the tendency to smoke increases. That is, the benefit of quitting smoking on child health is larger for women who will still smoke despite facing higher tax rates. In turn, the adverse effect of smoking on infant birth weight is more severe for women with the higher tendency to smoke during pregnancy.\n\nNext, I estimate LATE from the MTE. The LATE is interpreted as the benefit of smoking cessation for compliers, women who change their smoking status from smoker to nonsmoker in response to the tax increase. It is obtained from marginal treatment effects as follows: for p ( x ) = Pr ( D = 1 | Z = 1 , X = x ) and p = Pr( D = 1 | Z = 0 , X = x , )\n\n\n\nTable 4 presents estimated LATE for the entire sample and three subgroups of white women, women aged 2635, and women with some college or college graduates (SCCG). The estimated benefit of smoking cessation is noticeably small for SCCG women, compared to the entire sample and women whose age is between 26 and 35. These MTE and LATE estimates show that births to less educated women or women with a higher tendency to smoke are on average more vulnerable to smoking. The literature, such as Deaton (2003) and\n\n38", + "recall": 0.9245283018867925, + "true_md": "Figure 15: Marginal smoking effects\n\nI estimate the equation (16) using a series approximation. This method is especially convenient to estimate MTE ∂µ $_{∂p}$. The estimation results for the regressions (15) and (16) are reported in Table C.1 and Table C.2, respectively, in Appendix C. Figure 15 shows estimated marginal treatment effects for each propensity to not smoke. It is observed that the positive effect of smoking cessation on infant birth weight increases as the tendency to smoke increases. That is, the benefit of quitting smoking on child health is larger for women who will still smoke despite facing higher tax rates. In turn, the adverse effect of smoking on infant birth weight is more severe for women with the higher tendency to smoke during pregnancy.\n\nNext, I estimate LATE from the MTE. The LATE is interpreted as the benefit of smoking cessation for compliers, women who change their smoking status from smoker to nonsmoker in response to the tax increase. It is obtained from marginal treatment effects as follows: for p ( x ) = Pr ( D = 1 | Z = 1 ,X = x ) and p = Pr ( D = 1 | Z = 0 ,X = x ) ,\n\nTable 4 presents estimated LATE for the entire sample and three subgroups of white women, women aged 26- 35, and women with some college or college graduates (SCCG). The estimated benefit of smoking cessation is noticeably small for SCCG women, compared to the entire sample and women whose age is between 26 and 35. These MTE and LATE estimates show that births to less educated women or women with a higher tendency to smoke are on average more vulnerable to smoking. The literature, such as Deaton (2003) and\n\n$$E [ Y$_{1}$ − Y$_{0}$ | X = x,D$_{1}$ > D$_{0}$ ] = 1 p ( x ) − p ( x ) ∫ p ( x ) p ( x ) MTE ( x,p ) dp.$$\n\n38" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "cef762bb4411f20a13a397991f82d184c440a22274d22d8eb7c7bcdf2cbf6637", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999999247517409, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "second-order AR process) relative to All Blocked sampling. In addition to the improved Runtime, the All Blocked sampling of the correlated AR process values increases their individual algorithmic efficiencies, and the slowest mixing parameter is among the fixed effects. The Efficiency under All Blocked sampling is over double that of All Scalar sampling. The automated blocking procedure identifies a blocking scheme which blocks together all AR process values and fixed effects (23 total; cut height h = 0.4), and performs univariate sampling of the single hyper-parameter. This has a similar Runtime to All Blocked sampling, but increases algorithmic efficiency for all parameters. The resulting overall Efficiency under the Auto Blocking MCMC algorithm is over three times that of All Scalar sampling.\n\nTable 1: MCMC performance results for the suite of example models. Effective sample size (ESS) is measured in effective samples per 10,000 iterations, Runtime is presented as seconds per 10,000 iterations, and Efficiency is in units of effective samples produced per second of algorithm runtime.\n\n24", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "second-order AR process) relative to All Blocked sampling. In addition to the improved Runtime, the All Blocked sampling of the correlated AR process values increases their individual algorithmic efficiencies, and the slowest mixing parameter is among the fixed effects. The Efficiency under All Blocked sampling is over double that of All Scalar sampling. The automated blocking procedure identifies a blocking scheme which blocks together all AR process values and fixed effects (23 total; cut height h = 0.4), and performs univariate sampling of the single hyper-parameter. This has a similar Runtime to All Blocked sampling, but increases algorithmic efficiency for all parameters. The resulting overall Efficiency under the Auto Blocking MCMC algorithm is over three times that of All Scalar sampling.\n\nTable 1: MCMC performance results for the suite of example models. Effective sample size (ESS) is measured in effective samples per 10,000 iterations, Runtime is presented as seconds per 10,000 iterations, and Efficiency is in units of effective samples produced per second of algorithm runtime.\n\n24" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8869762954424661, + "doc_id": "3d8bb0f31b14b917f267de06e9eb964160adf2a6af9c50aa8303128b4222df2b", + "edit_distance": 0.07492795389048991, + "f1_score": 0.9273743016759776, + "meteor": 0.9320594554292142, + "precision": 0.9540229885057471, + "pred_md": "communities.\n\nThe approach we use here does not explicitly distinguish between positive and negative connections. However, because we essentially treat W ij = B ij , it means that only positive functional connections can contribute to Q and negative connections, when they fall within communities, serve to decrease the total modularity.\n\nWe adopt this approach here, and use a Louvain-like algorithm (Blondel et al., 2008; Jutla et al., 2011) to maximize modularity 100 times for each dynamic functional connectivity matrix. The output of the Louvain algorithm is a set of community assignments, which specifies a partition of the brain, along with a score ranking the quality of this partition. The number and size of communities, in general, partially determined by the total density of the connections (Fortunato and Barth'lemy, 2007), but can be varied by including e a resolution parameter in the modularity expression that tunes the size and number of detected communities (Reichardt and Bornholdt, 2006). While this type of multi-resolution modularity maximization has been used to show that brain networks exhibit interesting modular structure at multiple organizational scales (Betzel et al., 2013), here we focus on a single-scale estimate of community structure.\n\nAt the particular scale we investigate, the Louvain algorithm's output typically varies from run to run. Most analyses regard such variability as problematic and attempt to resolve it by constructing, from the varied outputs, a consensus partition that represents the average community structure (Lancichinetti and Fortunato, 2012). Here, we embrace this variability and use it to characterize the 'modularity landscape' for a given dynamic functional connectivity matrix. The modularity landscape refers to the space of all possible community divisions (which is far too large to enumerate in its entirety). Each\n\n13", + "recall": 0.9021739130434783, + "true_md": "communities.\n\nThe approach we use here does not explicitly distinguish between positive and negative connections. However, because we essentially treat W$_{ij}$ = B$_{ij}$ , it means that only positive functional connections can contribute to Q and negative connections, when they fall within communities, serve to decrease the total modularity.\n\nWe adopt this approach here, and use a Louvain-like algorithm (Blondel et al., 2008; Jutla et al., 2011) to maximize modularity 100 times for each dynamic functional connectivity matrix. The output of the Louvain algorithm is a set of community assignments, which specifies a partition of the brain, along with a score ranking the quality of this partition. The number and size of communities, in general, partially determined by the total density of the connections (Fortunato and Barth´ elemy, 2007), but can be varied by including a resolution parameter in the modularity expression that tunes the size and number of detected communities (Reichardt and Bornholdt, 2006). While this type of multi-resolution modularity maximization has been used to show that brain networks exhibit interesting modular structure at multiple organizational scales (Betzel et al., 2013), here we focus on a single-scale estimate of community structure.\n\nAt the particular scale we investigate, the Louvain algorithm’s output typ- ically varies from run to run. Most analyses regard such variability as prob- lematic and attempt to resolve it by constructing, from the varied outputs, a consensus partition that represents the average community structure (Lanci- chinetti and Fortunato, 2012). Here, we embrace this variability and use it to characterize the “modularity landscape” for a given dynamic functional con- nectivity matrix. The modularity landscape refers to the space of all possible community divisions (which is far too large to enumerate in its entirety). Each\n\n13" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8043891004787236, + "doc_id": "283af95c27c214d1081aa38e3da440604aee4e40bbe068ccc19fcfea3b1d4172", + "edit_distance": 0.1222707423580786, + "f1_score": 0.8833333333333333, + "meteor": 0.8858822278347293, + "precision": 0.888268156424581, + "pred_md": "Fan, Y. and S. S. Park (2009). 'Partial Identification of the Distribution of Treatment Effects and its Confidence Sets,' in Thomas B. Fomby and R. Carter Hill (ed.) Nonparametric Econometric Methods (Advances in Econometrics, Volume 25), Emerald Group Publishing Limited, pp.3-70.\n\n--- (2010). 'Sharp Bounds on the Distribution of Treatment Effects and Their Statistical Inference,' Econometric Theory , 26, 931-951.\n\nFrench, E. and C. Taber (2011). 'Identification of Models of the Labor Market,' Handbook of Labor Economics , 4, 537-617.\n\nFan, Y. and J. Wu (2010). 'Partial Identification of the Distribution of Treatment Effects in Switching Regime Models and Its Confidence Sets,' Review of Economic Studies , 77, 1002-1041.\n\nFingerhut, L. A., J. C. Kleinman and J. S. Kendrick (1990). 'Smoking before, during, and after Pregnancy,' American Journal of Public Health , 80, 541-544.\n\nFirpo, S. (2007). 'Efficient Semiparametric Estimation of Quantile Treatment Effects', Econometrica , 75, 259-276.\n\nFirpo, S., and G. Ridder (2008). 'Bounds on Functionals of the Distribution of Treatment Effects,' Working paper, FGV Brazil.\n\nFrank, M. J., R. B. Nelson and B. Schweizer (1987). 'Best-possible Bounds for the Distribution of a Sum-a Problem of Kolmogorov,' Probability Theory Related Fields , 74, 199-211.\n\nGalichon, A. and M. Henry. (2008). 'Inference in Incomplete Models,' Working Paper.\n\nGalichon, A. and M. Henry. (2011). 'Set Identification in Models with Multiple Equilibria,' Review of Economic Studies , 78, 1264-1298.\n\nGalichon, A. and B. Salani' (2012). 'Cupid's Invisible Hand: Social Surplus and Identification in Matching e Models,' Working Paper.\n\nGundersen, C., B. Kreider and J. Pepper. (2011). 'The Impact of the National School Lunch Program on Child Health: A Nonparametric Bounds Analysis,' Journal of Econometrics , 166, 79-91.\n\nHaan, M. (2012). 'The Effect of Additional Funds for Low-Ability Pupils - A Nonparametric Bounds Analysis,' CESifo Working Paper.\n\nHeckman, J. J. (1990). 'Varieties of Selection Bias,' American Economic Review , Papers and Proceedings, 80, 313-318.\n\n51", + "recall": 0.8784530386740331, + "true_md": "Fan, Y. and S. S. Park (2009). “Partial Identification of the Distribution of Treatment Effects and its Confidence Sets,” in Thomas B. Fomby and R. Carter Hill (ed.) Nonparametric Econometric Methods (Advances in Econometrics, Volume 25), Emerald Group Publishing Limited, pp.3-70.\n\n——— (2010). “Sharp Bounds on the Distribution of Treatment Effects and Their Statistical Inference,” Econometric Theory , 26, 931-951.\n\nFrench, E. and C. Taber (2011). “Identification of Models of the Labor Market,” Handbook of Labor Eco- nomics , 4, 537-617.\n\nFan, Y. and J. Wu (2010). “Partial Identification of the Distribution of Treatment Effects in Switching Regime Models and Its Confidence Sets,” Review of Economic Studies , 77, 1002-1041.\n\nFingerhut, L. A., J. C. Kleinman and J. S. Kendrick (1990). “Smoking before, during, and after Pregnancy,” American Journal of Public Health , 80, 541–544.\n\nFirpo, S. (2007). “Efficient Semiparametric Estimation of Quantile Treatment Effects”, Econometrica , 75, 259–276.\n\nFirpo, S., and G. Ridder (2008). “Bounds on Functionals of the Distribution of Treatment Effects,” Working paper, FGV Brazil.\n\nFrank, M. J., R. B. Nelson and B. Schweizer (1987). “Best-possible Bounds for the Distribution of a Sum-a Problem of Kolmogorov,” Probability Theory Related Fields , 74, 199-211.\n\nGalichon, A. and M. Henry. (2008). “Inference in Incomplete Models,” Working Paper.\n\nGalichon, A. and M. Henry. (2011). “Set Identification in Models with Multiple Equilibria,” Review of Economic Studies , 78, 1264-1298.\n\nGalichon, A. and B. Salani´ e (2012). “Cupid’s Invisible Hand: Social Surplus and Identification in Matching Models,” Working Paper.\n\nGundersen, C., B. Kreider and J. Pepper. (2011). “The Impact of the National School Lunch Program on Child Health: A Nonparametric Bounds Analysis,” Journal of Econometrics , 166, 79-91.\n\nHaan, M. (2012). “The Effect of Additional Funds for Low-Ability Pupils - A Nonparametric Bounds Anal- ysis,” CESifo Working Paper.\n\nHeckman, J. J. (1990). “Varieties of Selection Bias,” American Economic Review , Papers and Proceedings, 80, 313–318.\n\n51" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.31676724975766213, + "doc_id": "7fc10e155dcd405d0d5bd25a96d8f53af7fe53e90215450461da27f37fdfa01d", + "edit_distance": 0.5970695970695971, + "f1_score": 0.9115646258503401, + "meteor": 0.526882907101041, + "precision": 0.9054054054054054, + "pred_md": "Figure 3: { Y 0 ∈ A , Y 0 1 ∈ A 1 }\n\nFigure 3: { Y 0 ∈ A , Y 0 1 ∈ A 1 }\n\nGraphically, the DTE corresponds to the region below the straight line Y 1 = Y 0 + δ in the support space as shown in Figure 4. Since the given marginal distributions are informative on the joint distribution for rectangular regions in the support space, one can bound the DTE by considering two rectangles { Y 0 ≥ y -δ, Y 1 ≤ y } and { Y 0 < y ' -δ, Y 1 > y ' } for any ( y, y ' ) ∈ R 2 . Although the probability of each rectangle is not point-identified, it can be bounded by Fr'chet inequalities. e 7 Since the DTE is bounded from below by the Fr'chet lower bound on Pr e { Y 0 ≥ y -δ, Y 1 ≤ y } for any y ∈ R , the lower bound on the DTE is obtained as follows:\n\n\n\nSimilarly, the DTE is bounded from above by 1 -Pr { Y 0 < y ' -δ, Y 1 > y ' } for any y ' ∈ R . Therefore, the upper bound on the DTE is obtained by the Fr'chet lower bound on Pr e { Y 0 < y ' -δ, Y 1 > y ' } as follows:\n\n\n\nMakarov (1981) proved that those lower and upper bounds are sharp. 8\n\nIf the marginal distributions of Y 0 and Y 1 are both absolutely continuous with respect to the Lebesgue measure on R , then the Makarov upper bound and lower bound are achieved when F ( y , y 0 1 ) = C L s ( F 0 ( y 0 ) , F 1 ( y 1 ))\n\n7 Note that Fr´ echet lower bounds on Pr { Y 0 ≥ y ′ -δ, Y 1 ≤ y ′ } and Pr { Y 0 < y ′ -δ, Y 1 > y ′ } are sharp. They are both achieved when Y 0 and Y 1 are perfectly positively dependent.\n\n8 One may wonder if multiple rectangles below Y 1 = Y 0 + δ that overlap one another could yield the more improved lower bound. However, if the Fr´chet lower bound on another rectangle e { Y 0 ≥ y ′′ -δ, Y 1 ≤ y ′′ } is added and the Fr´chet upper bound e on the intersection of the two rectangles is subtracted, it is smaller than or equal to the lower bound obtained from the only one rectangle.\n\n10", + "recall": 0.9178082191780822, + "true_md": "Figure 3: { Y$_{0}$ ∈ A$_{0}$, Y$_{1}$ ∈ A$_{1}$ }\n\nGraphically, the DTE corresponds to the region below the straight line Y$_{1}$ = Y$_{0}$ + δ in the support space as shown in Figure 4. Since the given marginal distributions are informative on the joint distribu- tion for rectangular regions in the support space, one can bound the DTE by considering two rectangles { Y$_{0}$ ≥ y − δ, Y$_{1}$ ≤ y } and { Y$_{0}$ < y ′ − δ, Y$_{1}$ > y $^{′}$} for any ( y, y $^{′}$) ∈$_{R}$ $^{2}$. Although the probability of each rect- angle is not point-identified, it can be bounded by Fr´echet inequalities. 7 Since the DTE is bounded from below by the Fr´echet lower bound on Pr { Y$_{0}$ ≥ y − δ, Y$_{1}$ ≤ y } for any y ∈$_{R}$ , the lower bound on the DTE is obtained as follows:\n\nSimilarly, the DTE is bounded from above by 1 − Pr { Y$_{0}$ < y ′ − δ, Y$_{1}$ > y $^{′}$} for any y ′ ∈$_{R}$ . Therefore, the upper bound on the DTE is obtained by the Fr´echet lower bound on Pr { Y$_{0}$ < y ′ − δ, Y$_{1}$ > y $^{′}$} as follows:\n\nMakarov (1981) proved that those lower and upper bounds are sharp. 8\n\nIf the marginal distributions of Y$_{0}$ and Y$_{1}$ are both absolutely continuous with respect to the Lebesgue measure on$_{R}$, then the Makarov upper bound and lower bound are achieved when F ( y$_{0}$, y$_{1}$ ) = C L s ( F$_{0}$ ( y$_{0}$ ) , F$_{1}$ ( y$_{1}$ ))\n\n$^{8}$One may wonder if multiple rectangles below Y$_{1}$ = Y$_{0}$ + δ that overlap one another could yield the more improved lower bound. However, if the Fr´echet lower bound on another rectangle { Y$_{0}$ ≥ y ′′ − δ, Y$_{1}$ ≤ y $^{′′}$} is added and the Fr´echet upper bound on the intersection of the two rectangles is subtracted, it is smaller than or equal to the lower bound obtained from the only one rectangle.\n\n10\n\n$$sup y max ( F$_{1}$ ( y ) − F$_{0}$ ( y − δ ) , 0) ≤ F$_{Δ}$ ( δ ) .$$\n\n$$F$_{Δ}$ ( δ ) ≤ 1 − sup y max ( F$_{0}$ ( y − δ ) − F$_{1}$ ( y ) , 0) .$$\n\n$^{7}$Note that Fr´echet lower bounds on Pr { Y$_{0}$ ≥ y ′ − δ, Y$_{1}$ ≤ y $^{′}$} and Pr { Y$_{0}$ < y ′ − δ, Y$_{1}$ > y $^{′}$} are sharp. They are both achieved when Y$_{0}$ and Y$_{1}$ are perfectly positively dependent." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8215590181782694, + "doc_id": "7a52f3c6dd550aa00d8c858b4a373706519a7418d875b31da9b198414964f532", + "edit_distance": 0.16076294277929154, + "f1_score": 0.9437652811735942, + "meteor": 0.9254272134694639, + "precision": 0.9747474747474747, + "pred_md": "pants, however, we found cases where event count was significantly correlated with the frame-wise displacement time series, though this correlation was neither consistently positive nor was it consistently negative (21/80 positively and 23/80 negatively correlated at a significance level of p = 0 01, Bonferroni-corrected; . mean ± standard deviation Pearson's correlations of r = -0 016 . ± 0 223 . and r = -0 025 . ± 0 223 . for L1 and L2 norm). Thus, while the group-level and participant-level analyses suggest that motion is not systematically related to excursion counts, we do observe that some participants show significant correlations (both positive and negative), and hence motion may act as a potential confound in a subset of participants. Interestingly, the number of detected communities is also significantly and negatively correlated with excursion in most individual participants (median correlation r = -0 20, . interquartile range of [ -0 32 . , 0 06]). .\n\n## Default mode network dissociates during mass excursions\n\nIIn addition to quantifying the degeneracy of modular architectures, we also examined whether community structure was consistently different during mass excursions compared to non-mass excursions. To detect such differences, we first divided each participant's dynamic functional connectivity networks into two classes: one class corresponding to mass-excursion events and another class corresponding to all other instants. The previous community detection procedure yielded 100 estimates of the community structure for each dynamic functional connectivity network, which we aggregated according to class. From these data and for each class we generated an association matrix, T , which was a square, n × n matrix whose elements T ij represented the probability, across all community estimates assigned to that class, that nodes i and j were assigned to the same community. Association matrices, unlike 'hard' partitions that assign nodes to one class or another, give a quasi-continuous estimate of whether two\n\n17", + "recall": 0.9146919431279621, + "true_md": "pants, however, we found cases where event count was significantly correlated with the frame-wise displacement time series, though this correlation was neither consistently positive nor was it consistently negative (21/80 positively and 23/80 negatively correlated at a significance level of p = 0 . 01, Bonferroni-corrected; mean ± standard deviation Pearson’s correlations of r = − 0 . 016 ± 0 . 223 and r = − 0 . 025 ± 0 . 223 for L1 and L2 norm). Thus, while the group-level and participant-level analyses suggest that motion is not systematically related to excursion counts, we do observe that some participants show significant corre- lations (both positive and negative), and hence motion may act as a potential confound in a subset of participants. Interestingly, the number of detected com- munities is also significantly and negatively correlated with excursion in most individual participants (median correlation r = − 0 . 20, interquartile range of [ − 0 . 32 , 0 . 06]).\n\nIIn addition to quantifying the degeneracy of modular architectures, we also examined whether community structure was consistently different during mass excursions compared to non-mass excursions. To detect such differences, we first divided each participant’s dynamic functional connectivity networks into two classes: one class corresponding to mass-excursion events and another class cor- responding to all other instants. The previous community detection procedure yielded 100 estimates of the community structure for each dynamic functional connectivity network, which we aggregated according to class. From these data and for each class we generated an association matrix, T , which was a square, n × n matrix whose elements T$_{ij}$ represented the probability, across all commu- nity estimates assigned to that class, that nodes i and j were assigned to the same community. Association matrices, unlike “hard” partitions that assign nodes to one class or another, give a quasi-continuous estimate of whether two\n\n17\n\n## Default mode network dissociates during mass excursions" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5856596752224149, + "doc_id": "bfa1e67c2c1316fe6202c252a2bfc72d3d3c6e5649c44b07a557f4cbf29fb492", + "edit_distance": 0.3110846245530393, + "f1_score": 0.9234234234234233, + "meteor": 0.7022316445473942, + "precision": 0.9447004608294931, + "pred_md": "## 5.5.2 Inference and Bias Correction\n\nAsymptotic properties of my estimators other than consistency have not been covered in this paper. The complete asymptotic theory for the estimators can be investigated by adopting arguments from Abadie et al. (2002), Koenker and Xiao (2002), Angrist et al. (2005), and Fan and Park (2010). Abadie et al. (2002) provided asymptotic properties for their weighted quantile regression coefficients for the fixed quantile level q, while Koenker and Xiao (2002) and Angrist et al. (2005) focused on the standard quantile regression process . Fan and Park (2010) derived asymptotic properties for the plug-in estimators of Makarov bounds. Since they estimated marginal distribution functions using empirical distributions in the context of randomized experiments, their arguments follow standard empirical process theory. To investigate asymptotic properties of the bounds estimators and the estimated maximizer or minimizer for the bounds, I am currently extending the asymptotic analysis on the quantile regression process presented by Koenker and Xiao (2002) and Angrist et al. (2005) to the quantile curves which are obtained from the weighted quantile regression of Abadie et al. (2002).\n\nCanonical bootstrap procedures may be invalid for inference in this setting. Fan and Park (2010) found that asymptotic distributions of their plug-in estimators for Makarov bounds discontinuously change around the boundary where the true lower and upper Makarov bounds reach zero and one, respectively. Specifically, they estimated the Makarov lower bound sup max y { F 1 ( y ) -F 0 ( y -δ ) , 0 } using empirical distribution functions ̂ F 0 and ̂ F 1 . They found that the asymptotic distribution of their estimator of the Makarov lower bound is discontinuous on the boundary where sup y { F 1 ( y ) -F 0 ( y -δ ) } = 0 . Since my improved lower bound under MTR is written as the supremum of the sum of max { F 1 ( a k ) -F 0 ( a k -1 ) , 0 } over integers k , the asymptotic distribution of my plug-in estimator is likely to suffer discontinuities near multiple boundaries where F 1 ( a k ) -F 0 ( a k -1 ) = 0 for each integer k . To avoid the failure of the standard bootstrap, I recommend subsampling or the fewer than n bootstrap procedure following Politis et al. (1999), Andrews (2000), Andrews and Han (2009).\n\nAlthough the estimator ̂ F NL ∆ is consistent, it may have a nonnegligible bias in small samples. 23 I suggest that one use a bias-adjusted estimator based on subsampling when the sample size is small in practice. Let\n\n\n\nwhere for d = 0 1 , , ̂ F n,b,j d is an estimator of F d from the j th subsample { ( Y j 1 , D j 1 ) , ..., ( Y j b , D j b ) } with the\n\n23 Since max ( x, 0) is a convex function, by Jensen's inequality my plug-in estimator is upward biased. This has been also pointed out in Fan and Park (2009) for their estimator of Makarov bounds.\n\n46", + "recall": 0.9030837004405287, + "true_md": "## 5.5.2 Inference and Bias Correction\n\nAsymptotic properties of my estimators other than consistency have not been covered in this paper. The complete asymptotic theory for the estimators can be investigated by adopting arguments from Abadie et al. (2002), Koenker and Xiao (2002), Angrist et al. (2005), and Fan and Park (2010). Abadie et al. (2002) provided asymptotic properties for their weighted quantile regression coefficients for the fixed quantile level q, while Koenker and Xiao (2002) and Angrist et al. (2005) focused on the standard quantile regression process . Fan and Park (2010) derived asymptotic properties for the plug-in estimators of Makarov bounds. Since they estimated marginal distribution functions using empirical distributions in the context of randomized experiments, their arguments follow standard empirical process theory. To investigate asymptotic properties of the bounds estimators and the estimated maximizer or minimizer for the bounds, I am currently extending the asymptotic analysis on the quantile regression process presented by Koenker and Xiao (2002) and Angrist et al. (2005) to the quantile curves which are obtained from the weighted quantile regression of Abadie et al. (2002).\n\nCanonical bootstrap procedures may be invalid for inference in this setting. Fan and Park (2010) found that asymptotic distributions of their plug-in estimators for Makarov bounds discontinuously change around the boundary where the true lower and upper Makarov bounds reach zero and one, respectively. Specifi- cally, they estimated the Makarov lower bound sup y max { F$_{1}$ ( y ) − F$_{0}$ ( y − δ ) , 0 } using empirical distribution functions ̂ F$_{0}$ and ̂ F$_{1}$ . They found that the asymptotic distribution of their estimator of the Makarov lower bound is discontinuous on the boundary where sup$_{y}$ { F$_{1}$ ( y ) − F$_{0}$ ( y − δ ) } = 0 . Since my improved lower bound under MTR is written as the supremum of the sum of max { F$_{1}$ ( a$_{k}$ ) − F$_{0}$ ( a$_{k}$$\\_{−}$$_{1}$ ) , 0 } over integers k , the asymptotic distribution of my plug-in estimator is likely to suffer discontinuities near multiple bound- aries where F$_{1}$ ( a$_{k}$ ) − F$_{0}$ ( a$_{k}$$\\_{−}$$_{1}$ ) = 0 for each integer k . To avoid the failure of the standard bootstrap, I recommend subsampling or the fewer than n bootstrap procedure following Politis et al. (1999), Andrews (2000), Andrews and Han (2009).\n\nAlthough the estimator ̂ F NL Δ is consistent, it may have a nonnegligible bias in small samples. 23 I suggest that one use a bias-adjusted estimator based on subsampling when the sample size is small in practice. Let\n\nwhere for d = 0 , 1 , ̂ F n,b,j d is an estimator of F$_{d}$ from the j th subsample { ( Y$_{j}$$\\_{1}$, D$\\_{j}$$_{1}$ ) , ..., ( Y$_{j}$$\\_{b}$, D$\\_{j}$$_{b}$ ) } with the\n\n$^{23}$Since max ( x, 0) is a convex function, by Jensen’s inequality my plug-in estimator is upward biased. This has been also pointed out in Fan and Park (2009) for their estimator of Makarov bounds.\n\n46\n\n$$̂ F NL Δ ,n,b,j ( δ ) = sup 0 ≤ y ≤ δ ⌊ 5500 − y δ ⌋ +1 ∑ k = ⌊ 500 − y δ ⌋ max ( ̂ F n,b,j 1 ( y + kδ ) − ̂ F n,b,j 0 ( y + ( k − 1) δ ) , 0 $^{)}$,$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.47888488642905797, + "doc_id": "d09b35188de2d53047b2bb45046613bc185a340fcc2a697c48f5d25c0250ece0", + "edit_distance": 0.6420047732696897, + "f1_score": 0.9700000000000001, + "meteor": 0.6534786201273218, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Figure S1: We show the effects of Fisher transforming correlation coefficients on the range of dynamic fluctuations in Fisher-transformed coefficients. (A) Given four levels of static functional connectivity, we show the expected range of distribution Fisher-transformed dynamic functional connections. Note that despite the wide range of static connectivity magnitudes, the variances of distributions are similar. Contrast this with Figure 2 in the main text, where static connectivity magnitude played a massive role in shaping the range of dynamic fluctuations. (B) The relationship of the temporal mean and standard deviation for the Fisher-transformed functional connectivity matrix. Note that there is no systematic relationship. Contrast this panel with panel C in Figure 1 from the main text.\n\nFigure S1: We show the effects of Fisher transforming correlation coefficients on the range of dynamic fluctuations in Fisher-transformed coefficients. (A) Given four levels of static functional connectivity, we show the expected range of distribution Fisher-transformed dynamic functional connections. Note that despite the wide range of static connectivity magnitudes, the variances of distributions are similar. Contrast this with Figure 2 in the main text, where static connectivity magnitude played a massive role in shaping the range of dynamic fluctuations. (B) The relationship of the temporal mean and standard deviation for the Fisher-transformed functional connectivity matrix. Note that there is no systematic relationship. Contrast this panel with panel C in Figure 1 from the main text.\n\nFigure S2: Comparison of raw Pearson correlation coefficients with Fisher-transformed coefficients. (A) Because the Fisher transformation is monotonic (preserves rank) it does not change percentiles in any appreciable way. The correlation of the Fisher-transformed percentile matrix with the percentile matrix obtained from raw Pearson correlation coefficients is r ≈ 1. (B) We also calculated the correlation of Fisher-transformed static functional connectivity with the mean Fisher-transformed dynamic functional connectivity.\n\nFigure S2: Comparison of raw Pearson correlation coefficients with Fisher-transformed coefficients. (A) Because the Fisher transformation is monotonic (preserves rank) it does not change percentiles in any appreciable way. The correlation of the Fisher-transformed percentile matrix with the percentile matrix obtained from raw Pearson correlation coefficients is r ≈ 1. (B) We also calculated the correlation of Fisher-transformed static functional connectivity with the mean Fisher-transformed dynamic functional connectivity.\n\n46", + "recall": 0.941747572815534, + "true_md": "46\n\nFigure S2: Comparison of raw Pearson correlation coefficients with Fisher-transformed coeffi- cients. (A) Because the Fisher transformation is monotonic (preserves rank) it does not change percentiles in any appreciable way. The correlation of the Fisher-transformed percentile ma- trix with the percentile matrix obtained from raw Pearson correlation coefficients is r ≈ 1. (B) We also calculated the correlation of Fisher-transformed static functional connectivity with the mean Fisher-transformed dynamic functional connectivity.\n\nFigure S1: We show the effects of Fisher transforming correlation coefficients on the range of dynamic fluctuations in Fisher-transformed coefficients. (A) Given four levels of static func- tional connectivity, we show the expected range of distribution Fisher-transformed dynamic functional connections. Note that despite the wide range of static connectivity magnitudes, the variances of distributions are similar. Contrast this with Figure 2 in the main text, where static connectivity magnitude played a massive role in shaping the range of dynamic fluctuations. (B) The relationship of the temporal mean and standard deviation for the Fisher-transformed functional connectivity matrix. Note that there is no systematic relationship. Contrast this panel with panel C in Figure 1 from the main text." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.24267567019892258, + "doc_id": "d1c785dddbafecc0c88df4050640dcdab0c8c9e945b1c5ca6e8bbe329c2b84d2", + "edit_distance": 0.5169300225733634, + "f1_score": 0.9504132231404959, + "meteor": 0.5397362514798993, + "precision": 0.9504132231404959, + "pred_md": "glyph[negationslash]\n\nLet c ∈ Supp G S and g ∈ S c \\ { 0 } be arbitrarily chosen. Since h g ( ) ∈ T \\ { 0 } there exist x , y 2 2 ∈ X 2 such that x ρ y 2 2 2 and ( h g ( )) ( x , y 2 2 ) = 0. If we set a 2 = θ ( x 2 ) and b 2 = θ ( y 2 ) then a ρ b 2 1 2 since θ preserves order. Moreover ( h g ( )) ( x , y 2 2 ) = g ( a , b 2 2 ) and Φ 1 ( a , b 2 2 ) = c since the grading on S is induced by Φ . 1 We have Φ ( 2 x , y 2 2 ) = Φ 1 ( θ ( x 2 ) , θ ( y 2 )) so Φ 2 ( x , y 2 2 ) = c hence h g ( ) ∈ T c as desired. This proves h preserves the grading.\n\nTheorem 4.3 Suppose ρ 1 and ρ 2 are reflexive relations on X 1 and X 2 , respectively, θ is a compression map of X 2 onto X 1 , and G is a cancellative monoid. There is a G -grading set of ρ 1 if and only if there is a G -grading set of ρ 2 .\n\nProof. We assume there is a G -grading set of ρ 2 and prove there is a G -grading set of ρ 1 . The reverse implication can be proved using a similar argument. Suppose σ 2 is a G -grading set of ρ 2 over G . Then σ 2 ⊆ ρ ∗ 2 since G is cancellative. We set σ 1 = { θ ∗ ( a, b ) : a, b ∈ X 1 and ( a, b ) ∈ σ 2 } .\n\nglyph[negationslash]\n\nFirst we prove σ 1 is a G -essential set for ρ 1 . Suppose Φ 1 , Φ ' 1 : ρ 1 → G are homomorphisms such that Φ 1 = Φ . ' 1 Then there exist a , a 1 2 ∈ X 1 such that a ρ a 1 ∗ 1 2 and Φ 1 ( a , a 1 2 ) = Φ ( ' 1 a , a 1 2 ). We have ( a , a 1 2 ) = θ ∗ ( x , x 1 2 ) for some x , x 1 2 ∈ X 2 since θ ∗ is bijective. Let Φ 2 : ρ 2 → G be the homomorphism defined as in part 1 of Lemma 4.2. Let Φ ' 2 : ρ 2 → G be defined similarly, using Φ ' 1 in place of Φ . 1 We have Φ ( 2 x , x 1 2 ) = Φ ( 1 a , a 1 2 ) and Φ ' 2 ( x , x 1 2 ) = Φ ( ' 1 a , a 1 2 ) so Φ ( 2 x , x 1 2 ) = Φ ( ' 2 x , x 1 2 ). Thus there exist y, z ∈ X 1 such that ( y, z ) ∈ σ 2 and Φ 2 ( y, z ) = Φ ( ' 2 y, z ) since σ 1 is a G -grading set for glyph[rho1] 1 . We have θ ∗ ( y, z ) ∈ σ 1 , Φ ( 1 θ ∗ ( y, z )) = Φ ( 2 y, z ), and Φ ( ' 1 θ ∗ ( y, z )) = Φ ' 2 ( y, z ) by construction. Therefore Φ 1 ( θ ∗ ( y, z )) = Φ ' 1 ( θ ∗ ( y, z )) and this shows σ 1 is a G -essential set for ρ 1 .\n\nglyph[negationslash]\n\n13\n\nglyph[negationslash]\n\nglyph[negationslash]\n\nglyph[negationslash]", + "recall": 0.9504132231404959, + "true_md": "Let c ∈ Supp$_{G}$ S and g ∈ S$_{c}$ \\ { 0 } be arbitrarily chosen. Since h ( g ) ∈ T \\ { 0 } there exist x$_{2}$, y$_{2}$ ∈ X$_{2}$ such that x$_{2}$ρ$_{2}$y$_{2}$ and ( h ( g )) ( x$_{2}$, y$_{2}$ ) ̸ = 0. If we set a$_{2}$ = θ ( x$_{2}$ ) and b$_{2}$ = θ ( y$_{2}$ ) then a$_{2}$ρ$_{1}$b$_{2}$ since θ preserves order. Moreover ( h ( g )) ( x$_{2}$, y$_{2}$ ) = g ( a$_{2}$, b$_{2}$ ) and Φ$_{1}$ ( a$_{2}$, b$_{2}$ ) = c since the grading on S is induced by Φ$_{1}$. We have Φ$_{2}$ ( x$_{2}$, y$_{2}$ ) = Φ$_{1}$ ( θ ( x$_{2}$ ) , θ ( y$_{2}$ )) so Φ$_{2}$ ( x$_{2}$, y$_{2}$ ) = c hence h ( g ) ∈ T$_{c}$ as desired. This proves h preserves the grading.\n\nTheorem 4.3 Suppose ρ$_{1}$ and ρ$_{2}$ are reflexive relations on X$_{1}$ and X$_{2}$ , respectively, θ is a compression map of X$_{2}$ onto X$_{1}$ , and G is a cancellative monoid. There is a G -grading set of ρ$_{1}$ if and only if there is a G -grading set of ρ$_{2}$ .\n\nProof. We assume there is a G -grading set of ρ$_{2}$ and prove there is a G -grading set of ρ$_{1}$ . The reverse implication can be proved using a similar argument. Suppose σ$_{2}$ is a G -grading set of ρ$_{2}$ over G . Then σ$_{2}$ ⊆ ρ ∗ 2 since G is cancellative. We set σ$_{1}$ = { θ $^{∗}$( a, b ) : a, b ∈ X$_{1}$ and ( a, b ) ∈ σ$_{2}$ } .\n\nFirst we prove σ$_{1}$ is a G -essential set for ρ$_{1}$ . Suppose Φ$_{1}$ , Φ ′ 1 : ρ$_{1}$ → G are homomorphisms such that Φ$_{1}$ ̸ = Φ ′ $_{1}$. Then there exist a$_{1}$, a$_{2}$ ∈ X$_{1}$ such that a$_{1}$ρ ∗ $_{1}$a$_{2}$ and Φ$_{1}$ ( a$_{1}$, a$_{2}$ ) ̸ = Φ ′ $_{1}$( a$_{1}$, a$_{2}$ ). We have ( a$_{1}$, a$_{2}$ ) = θ $^{∗}$( x$_{1}$, x$_{2}$ ) for some x$_{1}$, x$_{2}$ ∈ X$_{2}$ since θ ∗ is bijective. Let Φ$_{2}$ : ρ$_{2}$ → G be the homomorphism defined as in part 1 of Lemma 4.2. Let Φ ′ 2 : ρ$_{2}$ → G be defined similarly, using Φ ′ 1 in place of Φ$_{1}$. We have Φ$_{2}$ ( x$_{1}$, x$_{2}$ ) = Φ$_{1}$ ( a$_{1}$, a$_{2}$ ) and Φ ′ $_{2}$( x$_{1}$, x$_{2}$ ) = Φ ′ $_{1}$( a$_{1}$, a$_{2}$ ) so Φ$_{2}$ ( x$_{1}$, x$_{2}$ ) ̸ = Φ ′ $_{2}$( x$_{1}$, x$_{2}$ ). Thus there exist y, z ∈ X$_{1}$ such that ( y, z ) ∈ σ$_{2}$ and Φ$_{2}$ ( y, z ) ̸ = Φ ′ $_{2}$( y, z ) since σ$_{1}$ is a G -grading set for ϱ$_{1}$ . We have θ $^{∗}$( y, z ) ∈ σ$_{1}$ , Φ$_{1}$ ( θ $^{∗}$( y, z )) = Φ$_{2}$ ( y, z ), and Φ ′ $_{1}$( θ $^{∗}$( y, z )) = Φ ′ $_{2}$( y, z ) by construction. Therefore Φ$_{1}$ ( θ $^{∗}$( y, z )) ̸ = Φ ′ $_{1}$( θ $^{∗}$( y, z )) and this shows σ$_{1}$ is a G -essential set for ρ$_{1}$ .\n\n13" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.3389223631343944, + "doc_id": "75a6f89a31e9195d6df76f4b251d0dd7396c492b46c128cd58fd923326fc66e3", + "edit_distance": 0.4895027624309392, + "f1_score": 0.9183098591549297, + "meteor": 0.5421961567817168, + "precision": 0.9476744186046512, + "pred_md": "for d ∈ { 0 1 , } ,\n\n\n\nwhere β ∼ χ 2 ( k 1 ) , ε ∼ N (0 , k 2 ), and β ⊥ ⊥ ε. Obviously, treatment effects ∆ = β ∼ χ 2 ( k 1 ) satisfy MTR and marginal distribution functions F 0 and F 1 are given as\n\n\n\nwhere G ( ; · k 1 ) is the distribution function of a χ 2 ( k 1 ) and Φ ( ) are the standard normal probability density · function and its distribution function, respectively.\n\nRecall that the sharp upper bound under MTR is identical to the Makarov upper boun, and the sharp lower bound on the DTE under MTR is given as follows: for δ ≥ 0,\n\n\n\nwhere A δ = { { a k } ∞ k = -∞ ; 0 ≤ a k +1 -a k ≤ δ for each integer k } . The lower bound requires computing the optimal sequence of a k . The specific computation procedure is described in Appendix B.\n\nFigure 12 shows the true DTE as well as Makarov bounds and the improved lower bound under MTR for k 1 = 1 5 10 and , , k 2 = 1 10 40 , , . To see the effect of marginal distributions for the fixed true DTE ∆ ∼ χ 2 ( k 1 ) , I focus on how the DTE bounds change for different values of k 2 and fixed k 1 .\n\nFigure 12 shows that Makarov bounds and my new lower bound become less informative as k 2 increases. My data generating process assumes Y 1 -Y 0 ∼ χ 2 ( k 1 ), Y 0 ∼ N (0 , k 2 ) and Y 1 -Y 0 ⊥ ⊥ Y . 0 When the true DTE is fixed with a given value of k , 1 both Makarov bounds and my new bounds move further away from the true DTE as the randomness in the potential outcomes Y 0 and Y 1 increases with higher k 2 . If k 2 = 0 as an extreme case, in which Y 0 has a degenerate distribution, obviously Makarov bounds as well as my new bounds point-identify the DTE.\n\nInterestingly, as k 2 increases, my new lower bound moves further away from the true DTE much more slowly than the Makarov lower bound. Therefore, the information gain from MTR, which is represented by the distance between my new lower bound and the Makarov lower bound, increases as k 2 increases. This shows that under MTR, my new lower bound gets additional information from the larger variation of marginal distributions.\n\nTo develop intuition, recall Figure 7(c). Under MTR, the larger variation in marginal distributions\n\n29", + "recall": 0.8907103825136612, + "true_md": "for d ∈ { 0 , 1 } ,\n\nwhere β ∼ χ $^{2}$( k$_{1}$ ) , ε ∼ N (0 , k$_{2}$ ), and β ⊥ ε. Obviously, treatment effects Δ = β ∼ χ $^{2}$( k$_{1}$ ) satisfy MTR and marginal distribution functions F$_{0}$ and F$_{1}$ are given as\n\nwhere G ( · ; k$_{1}$ ) is the distribution function of a χ $^{2}$( k$_{1}$ ) and Φ ( · ) are the standard normal probability density function and its distribution function, respectively.\n\nRecall that the sharp upper bound under MTR is identical to the Makarov upper boun, and the sharp lower bound on the DTE under MTR is given as follows: for δ ≥ 0,\n\nwhere A$_{δ}$ = $^{{}${ a$_{k}$ } ∞ k = $_{−∞}$; 0 ≤ a$_{k}$$\\_{+1}$ − a$\\_{k}$ ≤ δ for each integer k $^{}}$. The lower bound requires computing the optimal sequence of a$\\_{k}$ . The specific computation procedure is described in Appendix B.\n\nFigure 12 shows the true DTE as well as Makarov bounds and the improved lower bound under MTR for k$_{1}$ = 1 , 5 , 10 and k$_{2}$ = 1 , 10 , 40 . To see the effect of marginal distributions for the fixed true DTE Δ ∼ χ $^{2}$( k$_{1}$ ) , I focus on how the DTE bounds change for different values of k$_{2}$ and fixed k$_{1}$ .\n\nFigure 12 shows that Makarov bounds and my new lower bound become less informative as k$_{2}$ increases. My data generating process assumes Y$_{1}$ − Y$_{0}$ ∼ χ $^{2}$( k$_{1}$ ), Y$_{0}$ ∼ N (0 , k$_{2}$ ) and Y$_{1}$ − Y$_{0}$ ⊥ Y$_{0}$. When the true DTE is fixed with a given value of k$_{1}$, both Makarov bounds and my new bounds move further away from the true DTE as the randomness in the potential outcomes Y$_{0}$ and Y$_{1}$ increases with higher k$_{2}$ . If k$_{2}$ = 0 as an extreme case, in which Y$_{0}$ has a degenerate distribution, obviously Makarov bounds as well as my new bounds point-identify the DTE.\n\nInterestingly, as k$_{2}$ increases, my new lower bound moves further away from the true DTE much more slowly than the Makarov lower bound. Therefore, the information gain from MTR, which is represented by the distance between my new lower bound and the Makarov lower bound, increases as k$_{2}$ increases. This shows that under MTR, my new lower bound gets additional information from the larger variation of marginal distributions.\n\nTo develop intuition, recall Figure 7(c). Under MTR, the larger variation in marginal distributions\n\n29\n\n$$sup { a$_{k}$ } ∞ k = $_{−∞}$∈A$_{δ}$ ∞ ∑ k = −∞ max { F$_{1}$ ( a$_{k}$$_{+1}$ ) − F$_{0}$ ( a$_{k}$ ) , 0 } , (13)$$\n\n$$F$_{1}$ ( y ) = ∞ ∫ −∞ G ( y − x ; k$_{1}$ ) φ$^{(}$ x √ k$_{2}$$^{)}$ dx, F$_{0}$ ( y ) = Φ$^{(}$ y √ k$_{2}$$^{)}$ ,$$\n\n$$Y$_{d}$ = βd + ε,$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9402575065124786, + "doc_id": "c0e12c21da86b3293ae6eaa7d6116726d74021de45093092649972a707b926e1", + "edit_distance": 0.08976660682226212, + "f1_score": 0.9743589743589745, + "meteor": 0.9727781780867752, + "precision": 0.987012987012987, + "pred_md": "Despite the large improvement of my bounds over Makarov bounds, the difference in the quantiles of the smoking effects between SCCG women and others is still inconclusive from my bounds. The sharp upper bound on the quantile of the effect for the SCCG group is quite lower than that for the entire sample while the sharp lower bound is 0 for both groups; the identification region for the SCCG group is contained in that for the entire sample. Since the two identification regions overlap, one cannot conclude that the effect at each quantile level q is smaller for the SCCG group. This can be further investigated by developing formal test procedures for the partially identified quantile of treatment effects or by establishing tighter bounds under additional plausible restrictions. I leave these issues for future research.\n\nMy empirical analysis shows that smoking is on average more dangerous for infants to women with a higher tendency to smoke. Also, women with SCCG are less likely to have low birth weight babies when they smoke. The estimated bounds on the median of the effect of smoking on infant birth weight are [ -457,0] grams and [ -299 0] grams for the entire sample and for women with SCCG, respectively. ,\n\nBased on my observations, I suggest that policy makers pay particular attention to smoking women with low education in their antismoking policy design, since these women's infants are more likely to have low weight. Considering the association between higher education and better personal health care as shown in Park and Kang (2008), it appears that smoking on average does less harm to infants to mothers with a healthier lifestyle. Based on this interpretation, healthy lifestyle campaigns need to be combined with antismoking campaigns to reduce the negative effect of smoking on infant birth weight.\n\n## 5.5 Testability and Inference on the Bounds\n\n## 5.5.1 Testability of MTR\n\nMy empirical analysis relies on the assumption that smoking of pregnant women has nonpositive effects on infant birth weight with probability one. This MTR assumption is not only plausible but also testable in my setup. While a formal econometric test procedure is beyond the scope of this paper, I briefly discuss testable implications. First, MTR implies stochastic dominance of Y 1 over Y 0 . Since I point-identify their marginal distributions for compliers, stochastic dominance can be checked from the estimated marginal distribution functions. Except for very low q -quantiles with q < 0 006 where the quantile curves estimates are imprecise . as noted in subsection 5.4, my estimated marginal distribution functions satisfy the stochastic dominance for the entire sample and all subgroups. Second, under MTR my new lower bound should be lower than the Makarov upper bound. If MTR is not satisfied, then my new lower bound is not necessarily lower than the Makarov upper bound. In my estimation result, my new lower bound is lower than the Makarov upper bound for all δ > 0 and in all subgroups.\n\n45", + "recall": 0.9620253164556962, + "true_md": "Despite the large improvement of my bounds over Makarov bounds, the difference in the quantiles of the smoking effects between SCCG women and others is still inconclusive from my bounds. The sharp upper bound on the quantile of the effect for the SCCG group is quite lower than that for the entire sample while the sharp lower bound is 0 for both groups; the identification region for the SCCG group is contained in that for the entire sample. Since the two identification regions overlap, one cannot conclude that the effect at each quantile level q is smaller for the SCCG group. This can be further investigated by developing formal test procedures for the partially identified quantile of treatment effects or by establishing tighter bounds under additional plausible restrictions. I leave these issues for future research.\n\nMy empirical analysis shows that smoking is on average more dangerous for infants to women with a higher tendency to smoke. Also, women with SCCG are less likely to have low birth weight babies when they smoke. The estimated bounds on the median of the effect of smoking on infant birth weight are [ − 457,0] grams and [ − 299 , 0] grams for the entire sample and for women with SCCG, respectively.\n\nBased on my observations, I suggest that policy makers pay particular attention to smoking women with low education in their antismoking policy design, since these women’s infants are more likely to have low weight. Considering the association between higher education and better personal health care as shown in Park and Kang (2008), it appears that smoking on average does less harm to infants to mothers with a healthier lifestyle. Based on this interpretation, healthy lifestyle campaigns need to be combined with antismoking campaigns to reduce the negative effect of smoking on infant birth weight.\n\nMy empirical analysis relies on the assumption that smoking of pregnant women has nonpositive effects on infant birth weight with probability one. This MTR assumption is not only plausible but also testable in my setup. While a formal econometric test procedure is beyond the scope of this paper, I briefly discuss testable implications. First, MTR implies stochastic dominance of Y$_{1}$ over Y$_{0}$ . Since I point-identify their marginal distributions for compliers, stochastic dominance can be checked from the estimated marginal distribution functions. Except for very low q -quantiles with q < 0 . 006 where the quantile curves estimates are imprecise as noted in subsection 5.4, my estimated marginal distribution functions satisfy the stochastic dominance for the entire sample and all subgroups. Second, under MTR my new lower bound should be lower than the Makarov upper bound. If MTR is not satisfied, then my new lower bound is not necessarily lower than the Makarov upper bound. In my estimation result, my new lower bound is lower than the Makarov upper bound for all δ > 0 and in all subgroups.\n\n## 5.5 Testability and Inference on the Bounds\n\n## 5.5.1 Testability of MTR\n\n45" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8354490903600311, + "doc_id": "37b06599cc264c207fcb02ecc56f8b19659b83dc1ef19dff1e320a6e8f516724", + "edit_distance": 0.16620498614958448, + "f1_score": 0.943620178041543, + "meteor": 0.9053468922521878, + "precision": 0.9754601226993865, + "pred_md": "nodes appeared in a community together. Next we calculated the element-wise difference in association matrices, subtracting the mass excursion association matrix from the non-mass excursion matrix. The elements of the resulting matrix, ∆ ij , quantified how much more likely it was for two nodes to be assigned to the same community during non-mass excursions compared to mass excursions (Figure 6A). We performed this analysis for all participants and asked, for each node pair { i, j } whether ∆ ij was consistently greater or less than zero across all subjects (mass-univariate t-test with statistical threshold of p < 0 05, . FDR-corrected) (Figure 6B).\n\nInterestingly, the regions that consistently changed their community coassignments were, disproportionately so, regions associated with default mode network (DMN). In particular, during non-mass excursions DMN regions are grouped with regions that form parts of the dorsal attention, ventral attention, somatomotor, visual, and control systems, whereas during mass excursions these same DMN regions dissociate from these systems. The regions that changed their community co-assignments most frequently were the bilateral posterior cingulate, dorsal and medial prefrontal cortex along with the inferior parietal lobule, all subcomponents of the DMN (Figure 6C).\n\nExcursions occur most frequently for connections within visual and somatomotor networks\n\nIn order to identify whether excursions were driven by any particular functional connections or whether certain connections participated disproportionately in a greater number of excursions, we counted the number of times that a connection, { i, j } was stronger than expected, x + ij . We did the same for weaker-than-expected connections, x -ij . We found that, across all participants, all connections participated in at least one excursion. Interestingly, however, a small number of connections participated in disproportionately many (Fig-\n\n18", + "recall": 0.9137931034482759, + "true_md": "nodes appeared in a community together. Next we calculated the element-wise difference in association matrices, subtracting the mass excursion association matrix from the non-mass excursion matrix. The elements of the resulting ma- trix, Δ$_{ij}$, quantified how much more likely it was for two nodes to be assigned to the same community during non-mass excursions compared to mass excur- sions (Figure 6A). We performed this analysis for all participants and asked, for each node pair { i, j } whether Δ$_{ij}$ was consistently greater or less than zero across all subjects (mass-univariate t-test with statistical threshold of p < 0 . 05, FDR-corrected) (Figure 6B).\n\nInterestingly, the regions that consistently changed their community co- assignments were, disproportionately so, regions associated with default mode network (DMN). In particular, during non-mass excursions DMN regions are grouped with regions that form parts of the dorsal attention, ventral attention, somatomotor, visual, and control systems, whereas during mass excursions these same DMN regions dissociate from these systems. The regions that changed their community co-assignments most frequently were the bilateral posterior cingulate, dorsal and medial prefrontal cortex along with the inferior parietal lobule, all subcomponents of the DMN (Figure 6C).\n\nIn order to identify whether excursions were driven by any particular func- tional connections or whether certain connections participated disproportion- ately in a greater number of excursions, we counted the number of times that a connection, { i, j } was stronger than expected, x + $_{ij}$. We did the same for weaker-than-expected connections, x − $_{ij}$. We found that, across all participants, all connections participated in at least one excursion. Interestingly, however, a small number of connections participated in disproportionately many (Fig-\n\n18\n\n## Excursions occur most frequently for connections within visual and somatomotor networks" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4259726023763478, + "doc_id": "d38edd039526389b0b375cc179e2389cf1bb88c76de9e64db555c569f22a673b", + "edit_distance": 0.45798816568047335, + "f1_score": 0.9221183800623053, + "meteor": 0.6027454634926771, + "precision": 0.9024390243902439, + "pred_md": "ON THE APPLICATIONS OF CYCLOTOMIC FIELDS IN INTRODUCTORY NUMBER THEORY\n\n7\n\nSubtracting the latter congruence from the former yields\n\n\n\nNow an element of O K = Z [ ζ ] is divisible by p if and only if all of the coefficients as a polynomial in ζ are divisible by p . p /notbar x , y 0 0 since p /notbar x y z 0 0 0 , so we must check the cases where one of { c, -c, 1 -c, c - } 1 is congruent to -1 modulo p or where two of { c, -c, 1 -c, c - } 1 are equal modulo p . These cases can be split as follows:\n\n- · c ≡ 0 ( p ) (so that c ≡ -c ( p )). Then p | y 0 ( ζ -ζ -1 ) = y 0 ( p -2 ∑ i =2 ζ i +1) ⇒ p | y 0 (even if p = 3) ⇒ contradiction.\n- · c ≡ 1 ( p ) (so that 1 -c ≡ c -1 ( p )). Then p | x 0 ( ζ -1 -ζ ) ⇒ p | x 0 as in the previous case ⇒ contradiction.\n- · c ≡ 2 -1 ( p ) (so that c ≡ 1 -c ( p )). Then p | ( y 0 -x 0 ) ζ c + ζ -c ( x 0 -y 0 ). So p | ( x 0 -y 0 ). We then rewrite 2.1 as x p 0 + ( -z 0 ) p = ( -y 0 ) p (since p is odd). Then with the same argument we will get p | ( x 0 + z 0 ). But 2.1 yields x p 0 + y p 0 -z p 0 ≡ 0 ( p ) and so x 0 + y 0 -z 0 ≡ 0 ( p ). This yields 3 x 0 ≡ 0 ( p ). We suppose for now that p > 3. Then this yields p | x 0 ⇒ contradiction.\n- · Letting one of { c, -c, 1 -c, c - } 1 be congruent to -1 modulo p will yield one of the coefficients of the terms of (2.2) as ± ( x 0 -y 0 ), giving the same contradiction as in the previous case.\n\nWe therefore obtain a contradiction in all cases. We have, however, supposed that p > 3 . A general study of the case where p = 3 is done elegantly in [4].\n\n## 3. An Approach to Pell's Equation using cyclotomy\n\nPell's Equation is\n\n\n\nin x and y , where d ∈ Z + . d ≤ 0 trivially yields the single solution (1 , 0), and we can consider d to be square-free, since any square factor of d can be incorporated into y .", + "recall": 0.9426751592356688, + "true_md": "ON THE APPLICATIONS OF CYCLOTOMIC FIELDS IN INTRODUCTORY NUMBER THEORY 7\n\nSubtracting the latter congruence from the former yields\n\n$$(2.2) ζ − $^{c}$x$_{0}$ + ζ $^{1}$− $^{c}$y$_{0}$ − ζ $^{c}$x$_{0}$ − ζ $^{c}$− $^{1}$y$_{0}$ ≡ 0 ( p )$$\n\nNow an element of O K = Z [ ζ ] is divisible by p if and only if all of the coefficients as a polynomial in ζ are divisible by p . p ∤ x$_{0}$, y$_{0}$ since p ∤ x$_{0}$y$_{0}$z$_{0}$ , so we must check the cases where one of { c, − c, 1 − c, c − 1 } is congruent to − 1 modulo p or where two of { c, − c, 1 − c, c − 1 } are equal modulo p . These cases can be split as follows:\n\n- ⇒ • c ≡ 1 ( p ) (so that 1 − c ≡ c − 1 ( p )). Then p | x$_{0}$ ( ζ − 1 − ζ ) ⇒ p | x$_{0}$ as in the previous case ⇒ contradiction.\n\n- • c ≡ 0 ( p ) (so that c ≡ − c ( p )). Then p | y$_{0}$ ( ζ − ζ − $^{1}$) = y$_{0}$ ($^{p}$ − 2 ∑ i =2 ζ $^{i}$+ 1) ⇒ p | y$_{0}$ (even if p = 3) ⇒ contradiction. 1\n\n- • c ≡ 2 − 1 ( p ) (so that c ≡ 1 − c ( p )). Then p | ( y$_{0}$ − x$_{0}$ ) ζ $^{c}$+ ζ − $^{c}$( x$_{0}$ − y$_{0}$ ). So p | ( x$_{0}$ − y$_{0}$ ). We then rewrite 2.1 as x p 0 + ( − z$_{0}$ ) p = ( − y$_{0}$ ) p (since p is odd). Then with the same argument we will get p | ( x$_{0}$ + z$_{0}$ ). But 2.1 yields x p 0 + y p 0 − z p 0 ≡ 0 ( p ) and so x$_{0}$ + y$_{0}$ − z$_{0}$ ≡ 0 ( p ). This yields 3 x$_{0}$ ≡ 0 ( p ). We suppose for now that p > 3. Then this yields p | x$_{0}$ ⇒ contradiction.\n\n- • Letting one of { c, − c, 1 − c, c − 1 } be congruent to − 1 modulo p will yield one of the coefficients of the terms of (2.2) as ± ( x$_{0}$ − y$_{0}$ ), giving the same contradiction as in the previous case.\n\nWe therefore obtain a contradiction in all cases. We have, however, supposed that p > 3 . A general study of the case where p = 3 is done elegantly in [4].\n\n## 3. An Approach to Pell’s Equation using cyclotomy\n\nPell’s Equation is\n\n$$x 2 − dy 2 = 1, x, y ∈ Z$$\n\nin x and y , where d ∈ Z $^{+}$. d ≤ 0 trivially yields the single solution (1 , 0), and we can consider d to be square-free, since any square factor of d can be incorporated into y ." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.23869481431181994, + "doc_id": "69fcc8a7ee59eb992e76b55b30a186099548f679fe75e489b5cd00c5bf9510a2", + "edit_distance": 0.675, + "f1_score": 0.9173553719008265, + "meteor": 0.4316025303110174, + "precision": 0.9327731092436975, + "pred_md": "and\n\n\n\n\n\nwhere θ 2 i -1 = (2 i -1) π 2 and θ 2 i = iπ\n\nThe sequences { D ( j ) i } , j = 1 2 , , are 2 -periodic. It is appearant that system (3.29)+(3.30) is a ( ω, 2) -periodic. Thus, the variational system for the grazing solution is constructed.\n\n## 4 Orbital stability\n\nIn this section, we proceed investigation of the grazing periodic solution Ψ( ) t . Analysis of orbital stability will be taken into account. Denote by B z, δ , ( ) an open ball with center at z and the radius δ > 0 for a fixed point z ∈ Γ \\ ∂ Γ . By condition (C3), the ball is divided by surface Γ into two connected open regions. Denote c + ( z, δ ) , for the region, where solution x t ( ) = x t, ( 0 , z ) of (2.2) enters as time increases. The region is depicted in Figure 3.\n\nSet the path of the periodic solution Ψ( ) t as\n\n\n\nFigure 3: The region c + ( z, δ ) .\n\nFigure 3: The region c + ( z, δ ) .\n\nDefine dist A, a ( ) = inf α ∈ A ‖ α - ‖ a , where A is a set, and a is a point.\n\n20", + "recall": 0.9024390243902439, + "true_md": "$$$_{u}$′ 1 = u$_{2}$, $_{u}$′ 2 = − u$_{1}$ + 0 . 001 u$_{2}$, Δ u | t = θ$_{2}$$_{i}$$_{−}$$_{1}$ = D (1) 2 $^{i}$− $_{1}$u, Δ u | t = θ$_{2}$$_{i}$ = D (1) 2 i u, (3.29)$$\n\nand\n\n$$$_{u}$′ 1 = u$_{2}$, u ′ 2 = − u$_{1}$ + 0 . 001 u$_{2}$, Δ u | t = θ$_{2}$$_{i}$$_{−}$$_{1}$ = D (2) 2 $^{i}$− $_{1}$u, Δ u | t = θ$_{2}$$_{i}$ = D (2) 2 i u, (3.30)$$\n\nwhere $^{θ$\\_{2}$$_{i}$}$− 1 = (2 $^{i}$− 1) π 2 and θ$\\_{2}$$_{i}$ = iπ\n\nThe sequences { D ( j ) i } , j = 1 , 2 , are 2 − periodic. It is appearant that system (3.29)+(3.30) is a ( ω, 2) − periodic. Thus, the variational system for the grazing solution is constructed.\n\nIn this section, we proceed investigation of the grazing periodic solution Ψ( t ) . Analysis of orbital stability will be taken into account. Denote by B ( z, δ ) , an open ball with center at z and the radius δ > 0 for a fixed point z ∈ Γ \\ ∂ Γ . By condition (C3), the ball is divided by surface Γ into two connected open regions. Denote c $^{+}$( z, δ ) , for the region, where solution x ( t ) = x ( t, 0 , z ) of (2.2) enters as time increases. The region is depicted in Figure 3.\n\nSet the path of the periodic solution Ψ( t ) as\n\nDefine dist ( A, a $^{) = inf$\\_{α}$}$∈ A ‖ α − a ‖ , where A is a set, and a is a point.\n\n## 4 Orbital stability\n\n$$η := { x ∈ D : x = Ψ( t ) , t ∈ $^{R}$} .$$\n\nFigure 3: The region c $^{+}$( z, δ ) .\n\n20" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.2500609498967989, + "doc_id": "bbc2e88baf7a327a1fb75366d58c0a37ac87252f4b9fc4cd8be55421f4d13f3f", + "edit_distance": 0.5404564315352697, + "f1_score": 0.9358490566037735, + "meteor": 0.4681863202390025, + "precision": 0.9323308270676691, + "pred_md": "Figure 10: a k +1 ≤ a k + δ v.s. a k +1 = a k + δ\n\nFigure 10: a k +1 ≤ a k + δ v.s. a k +1 = a k + δ\n\n## 3.2.2 Concave/Convex Treatment Response\n\nRecall the setting of Example 2 in Subsection 2.1. Let W denote the outcome without treatment and let Y 0 and Y 1 denote the potential outcomes with treatment at low-intensity, and with treatment at high-intensity, respectively. Let t d denote the level of input for each treatment status for d = 0 1 , , while t W is a level of input without the treatment with t W < t 0 < t 1 . Either ( W,Y 0 ) or ( X,Y 1 ) is observed for each individual, but not ( W,Y ,Y 0 1 ). Given W = w, the distribution of Y 1 -Y 0 under concave treatment response corresponds to the probability of the intersection of { Y 1 -Y 0 ≤ } δ , { Y 0 -w t 0 -t W ≥ Y 1 -Y 0 t 1 -t 0 } , and { Y 1 ≥ Y 0 ≥ w } in the support space of ( Y , Y 0 1 ). Similarly, given W = w, the distribution of Y 1 -Y 0 under convex treatment response corresponds to the probability of the intersection of { Y 1 -Y 0 ≤ } δ , { Y 1 -Y 0 t 1 -t 0 ≥ Y 0 -w t 0 -t W } , and { Y 1 ≥ Y 0 ≥ w } in the support space of ( Y , Y 0 1 ). Note that { Y 0 -w t 0 -t W ≥ Y 1 -Y 0 t 1 -t 0 } and { Y 1 -Y 0 t 1 -t 0 ≥ Y 0 -w t 0 -t W } correspond to the regions below and above the straight line Y 1 = t 1 -t W t 0 -t W Y 0 -t 1 -t 0 t 0 -t W w , respectively.\n\nCorollary 2 derives sharp bounds under concave treatment response and convex treatment response from Theorem 1.\n\nCorollary 2 Take any w in the support of W such that the conditional marginal distributions of Y 1 and Y 0 given W = w are both absolutely continuous with respect to the Lebesgue measure on R . Let F 0 ,W ( ·| w ) and F 1 ,W ( ·| w ) be conditional distribution functions of Y 0 and Y 1 given W = w , respectively.\n\n- (i) Under concave treatment response, sharp bounds on the DTE are given as follows: for any δ ∈ R ,\n\n\n\n24", + "recall": 0.9393939393939394, + "true_md": "Figure 10: a$_{k}$$\\_{+1}$ ≤ a$\\_{k}$ + δ v.s. a$\\_{k}$$_{+1}$ = a$_{k}$ + δ\n\n## 3.2.2 Concave/Convex Treatment Response\n\nRecall the setting of Example 2 in Subsection 2.1. Let W denote the outcome without treatment and let Y$_{0}$ and Y$_{1}$ denote the potential outcomes with treatment at low-intensity, and with treatment at high-intensity, respectively. Let t$_{d}$ denote the level of input for each treatment status for d = 0 , 1 , while t$_{W}$ is a level of input without the treatment with t$_{W}$ < t$_{0}$ < t$_{1}$ . Either ( W, Y$_{0}$ ) or ( X, Y$_{1}$ ) is observed for each individual, but not ( W, Y$_{0}$, Y$_{1}$ ). Given W = w, the distribution of Y$_{1}$ − Y$_{0}$ under concave treatment response corresponds to the probability of the intersection of { Y$_{1}$ − Y$_{0}$ ≤ δ } , { Y$_{0}$ − w t$_{0}$ − t$_{W}$ ≥ Y$_{1}$ − Y$_{0}$ t$_{1}$ − t$_{0}$ $^{}}$, and { Y$_{1}$ ≥ Y$_{0}$ ≥ w } in the support space of ( Y$_{0}$, Y$_{1}$ ). Similarly, given W = w, the distribution of Y$_{1}$ − Y$_{0}$ under convex treatment response corresponds to the probability of the intersection of { Y$_{1}$ − Y$_{0}$ ≤ δ } , { Y$_{1}$ − Y$_{0}$ t$_{1}$ − t$_{0}$ ≥ Y$_{0}$ − w t$_{0}$ − t$_{W}$ $^{}}$, and { Y$_{1}$ ≥ Y$_{0}$ ≥ w } in the support space of ( Y$_{0}$, Y$_{1}$ ). Note that { Y$_{0}$ − w t$_{0}$ − t$_{W}$ ≥ Y$_{1}$ − Y$_{0}$ t$_{1}$ − t$_{0}$ } and { Y$_{1}$ − Y$_{0}$ t$_{1}$ − t$_{0}$ ≥ Y$_{0}$ − w t$_{0}$ − t$_{W}$ } correspond to the regions below and above the straight line Y$_{1}$ = t$_{1}$ − t$_{W}$ t$_{0}$ − $_{t$\\_{W}$}$Y$_{0}$ − t$_{1}$ − t$_{0}$ t$_{0}$ − $_{t$\\_{W}$}$w , respectively.\n\nCorollary 2 derives sharp bounds under concave treatment response and convex treatment response from Theorem 1.\n\nCorollary 2 Take any w in the support of W such that the conditional marginal distributions of Y$_{1}$ and Y$_{0}$ given W = w are both absolutely continuous with respect to the Lebesgue measure on $_{R}$. Let F$_{0}$$\\_{,W}$ ( ·| w ) and F$\\_{1}$$_{,W}$ ( ·| w ) be conditional distribution functions of Y$_{0}$ and Y$_{1}$ given W = w , respectively.\n\n(i) Under concave treatment response, sharp bounds on the DTE are given as follows: for any δ ∈$_{R}$ ,\n\n$$F L Δ ( δ ) ≤ F$_{Δ}$ ( δ ) ≤ F U Δ ( δ )$$\n\n24" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.06007489496563749, + "doc_id": "53de02adaf667da84735d2e6851e808d7e891523ed576a756c01df62bf80e38e", + "edit_distance": 0.8179012345679012, + "f1_score": 0.8653846153846154, + "meteor": 0.214261113726284, + "precision": 0.9090909090909091, + "pred_md": "some nonnegative integer t and s ∈ [0 , 1]. Then the LHS in (A.4) is 2 . Moreover, since ϕ y ( 0 ) + ψ y ( 1 ) > 1, for ( y , y 0 1 ) ∈ R × R s.t. s + t ≤ ϕ y ( 0 ) < s + t +1 and -( s + t -1) < ψ ( y 1 ) , by (A.1)\n\n\n\nand thus (A.4) is also satisfied from the following:\n\n\n\nSimilarly, it can be proven that (A.4) is also satisfied for other nontrivial cases. Therefore it concludes that each ( ϕ, ψ ) ∈ Φ can be written as a continuous convex combination of a continuum of pairs of the form c\n\n\n\nglyph[squaresolid]\n\nProof of Theorem 1 By Lemma A.1, ( ϕ, ψ ) ∈ Φ c can be represented as a continuous convex combination of a continuum of pairs of the form\n\n\n\nwith\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nSince Φ c is a convex set and J ( ϕ, ψ ) = ∫ ϕdF 0 + ∫ ψdF 1 is a linear functional, for all ( ϕ, ψ ) ∈ Φ , there c exists s ∈ (0 1] such that ,\n\n\n\n58", + "recall": 0.8256880733944955, + "true_md": "some nonnegative integer t and s ∈ [0 , 1]. Then the LHS in (A.4) is 2 . Moreover, since ϕ ( y$_{0}$ ) + ψ ( y$_{1}$ ) > 1, for ( y$_{0}$, y$_{1}$ ) ∈$_{R}$×$_{R}$ s.t. s + t ≤ ϕ ( y$_{0}$ ) < s + t + 1 and − ( s + t − 1) < ψ ( y$_{1}$ ) , by (A.1)\n\nand thus (A.4) is also satisfied from the following:\n\nSimilarly, it can be proven that (A.4) is also satisfied for other nontrivial cases. Therefore it concludes that each ( ϕ, ψ ) ∈ Φ$_{c}$ can be written as a continuous convex combination of a continuum of pairs of the form\n\nProof of Theorem 1 By Lemma A.1, ( ϕ, ψ ) ∈ Φ$_{c}$ can be represented as a continuous convex combi- nation of a continuum of pairs of the form\n\nSince Φ$_{c}$ is a convex set and J ( ϕ, ψ ) = ∫ ϕdF$_{0}$ + ∫ ψdF$_{1}$ is a linear functional, for all ( ϕ, ψ ) ∈ Φ$_{c}$, there exists s ∈ (0 , 1] such that\n\n58\n\n$$J ( ∞ ∑ k =0 $^{(}$1$_{A}$ + $_{k}$( ϕ,s ) − 1$_{A}$ − k ( ϕ,s ) $^{)}$, ∞ ∑ k =0 $^{(}$1$_{A}$ + $_{k}$( ψ,s ) − 1$_{A}$ − k ( ψ,s ) ) ) ≥ J ( ϕ, ψ ) . (A.5)$$\n\n$$∞ ∑ k =0 $^{(}$1$_{A}$ + $_{k}$( ϕ,s $_{)}$( y$_{0}$ ) − 1$_{A}$ − k ( ϕ,s $_{)}$( y$_{0}$ ) $^{)}$+ ∞ ∑ k =0 $^{(}$1$_{A}$ + $_{k}$( ψ,s $_{)}$( y$_{1}$ ) − 1$_{A}$ − k ( ψ,s $_{)}$( y$_{1}$ ) ≤ 1 { y$_{1}$ − y$_{0}$ < δ } + λ (1 − 1$_{C}$ ( y$_{0}$, y$_{1}$ )) .$$\n\n$$( ∞ ∑ k =0 $^{(}$1$_{A}$ + $_{k}$( ϕ,s ) − 1$_{A}$ − k ( ϕ,s ) $^{)}$, ∞ ∑ k =0 $^{(}$1$_{A}$ + $_{k}$( ψ,s ) − 1$_{A}$ − k ( ψ,s ) ) ) ,$$\n\n$$( ∞ ∑ k =0 $^{(}$1$_{A}$ + $_{k}$( ϕ,s ) − 1$_{A}$ − k ( ϕ,s ) $^{)}$, ∞ ∑ k =0 $^{(}$1$_{A}$ + $_{k}$( ψ,s ) − 1$_{A}$ − k ( ψ,s ) ) ) .$$\n\n$$1 { y$_{1}$ − y$_{0}$ < δ } + λ (1 − 1$_{C}$ ( y$_{0}$, y$_{1}$ )) = ∞ .$$\n\n$$1 < ϕ ( y$_{0}$ ) + ψ ( y$_{1}$ ) ≤ 1 { y$_{1}$ − y$_{0}$ < δ } + λ (1 − 1$_{C}$ ( y$_{0}$, y$_{1}$ )) ,$$\n\n■\n\nwith" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.3419946528136418, + "doc_id": "aac5ef5bff43414ef63b9ed5a11f503dfda31ae12db8872a4963864f33b95840", + "edit_distance": 0.5414012738853503, + "f1_score": 0.9011627906976742, + "meteor": 0.5098402620432039, + "precision": 0.96875, + "pred_md": "5\n\n## A. Optimal Problem Formulation in High SINR Regime\n\nAssuming perfect knowledge of channel gains at a centralized controller, the optimal solution for (1) can be computed in the high SINR regime by an exhaustive search over all possible combinations of the allocations. For each possible allocation, optimum powers can be computed by transforming (1) into a GP. Note that the power allocation problem is in itself a known non-convex problem for the general SINR regime [14]. However, in the high SINR regime the problem becomes a convex GP problem. For a given set of allocation variables and considering a high SINR regime, the objective function in (1) can be rewritten as follows:\n\n\n\nMaximizing the SINRs is equivalent to minimizing the interference to signal ratio:\n\n\n\nEquivalently, (1) can be reformulated for high SINR regime and given allocation variables as follows:\n\n\n\nNote that the numerator in (7) is a posynomial and the denominator is a monomial, hence (7) is a GP problem in standard form that can be solved optimally through efficient interior point methods [13] after performing the logarithmic transformation of variables [14]. However, even for small dimensions, it is not recommendable to compute the optimal solution, due to the huge computational complexity O K ( LN ) associated with the exhaustive search based subcarrier allocation phase. In addition, the GP based power allocation method discussed above has two restrictions: high-SINR assumption and centralized time-consuming computations. Due to the mentioned facts, there is a need to develop bounds and sub-optimal resource allocation schemes for multi-cell OFDMA networks.\n\nMarch 19, 2018\n\nDRAFT", + "recall": 0.842391304347826, + "true_md": "## A. Optimal Problem Formulation in High SINR Regime\n\n5\n\nAssuming perfect knowledge of channel gains at a centralized controller, the optimal solution for (1) can be computed in the high SINR regime by an exhaustive search over all possible combinations of the allocations. For each possible allocation, optimum powers can be computed by transforming (1) into a GP. Note that the power allocation problem is in itself a known non-convex problem for the general SINR regime [14]. However, in the high SINR regime the problem becomes a convex GP problem. For a given set of allocation variables and considering a high SINR regime, the objective function in (1) can be rewritten as follows:\n\nMaximizing the SINRs is equivalent to minimizing the interference to signal ratio:\n\nEquivalently, (1) can be reformulated for high SINR regime and given allocation variables as follows: L K N α$_{n,k,l}$\n\n$$maximize p$_{n,k,l}$ L ∑ l =1 K ∑ k =1 N ∑ n =1 α$_{n,k,l}$ log$_{2}$ ( p$_{n,k,l}$h$_{n,k,l}$ σ 2 + I$_{n,l}$ ) (5)$$\n\n$$minimize p$_{n,k,l}$ L ∑ l =1 K ∑ k =1 N ∑ n =1 α$_{n,k,l}$ log$_{2}$ ( σ 2 + I$_{n,l}$ p$_{n,k,l}$h$_{n,k,l}$ ) (6)$$\n\n$$minimize p$_{n,k,l}$ log$_{2}$ L ∏ l =1 K ∏ k =1 N ∏ n =1 ( σ 2 + I$_{n,l}$ p$_{n,k,l}$h$_{n,k,l}$ ) α$_{n,k,l}$ subject to N ∑ n =1 α$_{n,k,l}$p$_{n,k,l}$ ≤ P$_{k,}$$_{max}$ , ∀ k, ∀ l (7)$$\n\nNote that the numerator in (7) is a posynomial and the denominator is a monomial, hence (7) is a GP problem in standard form that can be solved optimally through efficient interior point methods [13] after performing the logarithmic transformation of variables [14]. However, even for small dimensions, it is not recommendable to compute the optimal solution, due to the huge computational complexity O ( K $^{LN}$) associated with the exhaustive search based subcarrier allocation phase. In addition, the GP based power allocation method discussed above has two restrictions: high-SINR assumption and centralized time-consuming computations. Due to the mentioned facts, there is a need to develop bounds and sub-optimal resource allocation schemes for multi-cell OFDMA networks.\n\nDRAFT\n\nMarch 19, 2018" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.09990906778265184, + "doc_id": "38cd14a2e439e0320d414fda477522732fe7d9ce6c1b5ac2dba2a77a838b13e1", + "edit_distance": 0.7772373540856031, + "f1_score": 0.8444444444444446, + "meteor": 0.27976485745761814, + "precision": 0.95, + "pred_md": "\n\nTaking the derivative of the expressions (5.65) with respect to variables T and ζ 2 , one can obtain the following\n\n\n\nTo determine the above determinant, the monodromy matrix of (3.13) with the jump matrix D (2) i can be evaluated as\n\n\n\n/negationslash\n\nThis verifies condition ( A 6) . So, By Theorem 5.1, we can conclude that the perturbed system (5.60) admits a non-trivial T ( µ ) -periodic solution which converges in the B -topology to the non-trivial ω -periodic solution of (3.14) as µ tends to zero such that T (0) = ω.\n\nFor µ = 0 , with the values ω and ζ 0 2 the determinant (5.66) can be determined as\n\n\n\n/negationslash\n\nIn Fig. 7, some numerical results are provided to show the solutions of system (5.60) with µ = 0 05 . . The periodic solutions for µ = 0 are not grazing. For µ = 0 , we have one periodic solution which is orbitally stable, and for µ < 0 , there exist two periodic solutions. One of them has one discontinuity moment in each period, in other words, the cycle does not intersect the surface of discontinuity around grazing point and it is orbitally stable and the other one has two discontinuity moments in each period. This means, the number of periodic solutions increases by variation of µ, around µ = 0 . So, we will call that bifurcation of periodic solution from a grazing cycle.\n\nExample 5.2 Let us consider the following system with variable moments of impulses and a small parameter\n\n\n\n34", + "recall": 0.76, + "true_md": "Taking the derivative of the expressions (5.65) with respect to variables T and ζ$_{2}$, one can obtain the following\n\nTo determine the above determinant, the monodromy matrix of (3.13) with the jump matrix D (2) i can be evaluated as\n\n  For µ = 0 , with the values ω and ζ 0 2 the determinant (5.66) can be determined as\n\nThis verifies condition ( A 6) . So, By Theorem 5.1, we can conclude that the perturbed system (5.60) admits a non-trivial T ( µ ) − periodic solution which converges in the B − topology to the non-trivial ω -periodic solution of (3.14) as µ tends to zero such that T (0) = ω.\n\nIn Fig. 7, some numerical results are provided to show the solutions of system (5.60) with µ = 0 . 05 .\n\nThe periodic solutions for µ ̸ = 0 are not grazing. For µ = 0 , we have one periodic solution which is orbitally stable, and for µ < 0 , there exist two periodic solutions. One of them has one discontinuity moment in each period, in other words, the cycle does not intersect the surface of discontinuity around grazing point and it is orbitally stable and the other one has two discontinuity moments in each period. This means, the number of periodic solutions increases by variation of µ, around µ = 0 . So, we will call that bifurcation of periodic solution from a grazing cycle.\n\nExample 5.2 Let us consider the following system with variable moments of impulses and a small parameter\n\n$$x ′ 1 = x$_{2}$, x ′ 2 = − 0 . 0001[ x 2 $_{2}$+ ( x$_{1}$ − 1) 2 − (1 + µ ) $^{2}$] x$_{2}$ − x$_{1}$ + 1 , Δ x$_{2}$ | $^{x}$∈ Γ = − (1 + Rx$_{2}$ + µx 3 $_{2}$) x$_{2}$ + µ $^{2}$, (5.69)$$\n\n34\n\n$$S $_{1}$( T , 0 , ζ$_{2}$, µ ) = x$_{1}$ ( T , 0 , ζ$_{2}$, µ ) = 0 , S $_{2}$( T , 0 , ζ$_{2}$, µ ) = x$_{2}$ ( T , 0 , ζ$_{2}$, µ ) − ζ$_{2}$ = 0 . (5.65)$$\n\n$$∣ ∂ ( S$_{2}$ ( $^{T}$, 0 ,ζ$_{2}$,µ )) ∂ T ∂ ( S$_{1}$ ( $^{T}$, 0 ,ζ$_{2}$,µ )) ∂ζ$_{2}$ ∂ ( S$_{2}$ ( $^{T}$, 0 ,ζ$_{2}$,µ )) ∂ T ∂ ( S$_{2}$ ( $^{T}$, 0 ,ζ$_{2}$,µ )) ∂ζ$_{2}$ ∣ = ∣ ∂x$_{1}$ ( ω, 0 ,ζ 0 $_{2}$, 0) ∂ T ∂x$_{1}$ ( ω, 0 ,ζ 0 $_{2}$, 0) ∂ζ$_{2}$ ∂x$_{2}$ ( ω, 0 ,ζ 0 $_{2}$, 0) ∂ T ∂x$_{2}$ ( ω, 0 ,ζ 0 $_{2}$, 0) ∂ζ$_{2}$ − $_{1}$∣ ∣ . (5.66)$$\n\n$$   1 0 . 01 0 0 . $_{704}$   . (5.67) the determinant (5.66) can be determined as$$\n\n$$∣ ∂ ( S$_{1}$ ( ω, 0 ,ζ 0 $_{2}$, 0)) ∂ T ∂ ( S$_{1}$ ( ω, 0 ,ζ 0 $_{2}$, 0)) ∂ζ$_{2}$ ∂ ( S$_{2}$ ( ω, 0 ,ζ 0 $_{2}$, 0)) ∂ T ∂ ( S$_{2}$ ( ω, 0 ,ζ 0 $_{2}$, 0)) ∂ζ$_{2}$ ∣ = ∣ 0 0 . 01 − exp(0 . 00025 π ) − 0 . $_{296}$∣ ∣ = 0 . 01 exp(0 . 00025 π ) ̸ = 0 . (5.68)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7759456276546317, + "doc_id": "21f24ded4f51edaf4c9d5b2068b6215c21756e394066000da33d5e97e884d3da", + "edit_distance": 0.5239852398523985, + "f1_score": 0.9453125, + "meteor": 0.8480384112781816, + "precision": 0.9758064516129032, + "pred_md": "Figure 3: Efficiency results for two contrived model structures: varying sized blocks of fixed correlation (left), and fixed sized blocks of varying correlation (right).\n\nFigure 3: Efficiency results for two contrived model structures: varying sized blocks of fixed correlation (left), and fixed sized blocks of varying correlation (right).\n\n## Random Effects Model\n\nIn the random effects model (Table 1), automated blocking generates an MCMC algorithm identical to the Informed Blocking algorithm (blocking each α i , β i pair), which produces a tenfold improvement in Efficiency over the most efficient static algorithm - for this model, All Scalar sampling. The cut height h = 0 1 indicates that only the . α i , β i pairs exhibit posterior correlations above 0.9. The Informed Cross-Level algorithm requires a substantially longer Runtime and produces a high ESS, which results in nearly identical Efficiency as the efficiently blocked Auto Blocking algorithm.\n\n## Auto-Regressive Model\n\nIn the auto-regressive model (Table 1), an AR process value exhibited the slowest mixing under All Scalar sampling. When all 24 model parameters (AR process values, fixed effects, and one hyper-parameter) are blocked, the algorithm Runtime is nearly halved. This decrease in Runtime is largely due to the dependency structure inherent to the AR process. Scalar sampling of AR process values requires nearly a three-fold increase in density evaluations of the process values (since it's a\n\n23", + "recall": 0.9166666666666666, + "true_md": "In the random effects model (Table 1), automated blocking generates an MCMC algorithm identical to the Informed Blocking algorithm (blocking each α$_{i}$ , β$_{i}$ pair), which produces a tenfold improve- ment in Efficiency over the most efficient static algorithm – for this model, All Scalar sampling. The cut height h = 0 . 1 indicates that only the α$_{i}$ , β$_{i}$ pairs exhibit posterior correlations above 0.9. The Informed Cross-Level algorithm requires a substantially longer Runtime and produces a high ESS, which results in nearly identical Efficiency as the efficiently blocked Auto Blocking algorithm.\n\nIn the auto-regressive model (Table 1), an AR process value exhibited the slowest mixing under All Scalar sampling. When all 24 model parameters (AR process values, fixed effects, and one hyper-parameter) are blocked, the algorithm Runtime is nearly halved. This decrease in Runtime is largely due to the dependency structure inherent to the AR process. Scalar sampling of AR process values requires nearly a three-fold increase in density evaluations of the process values (since it’s a\n\nFigure 3: Efficiency results for two contrived model structures: varying sized blocks of fixed corre- lation (left), and fixed sized blocks of varying correlation (right).\n\n23\n\n## Random Effects Model\n\n## Auto-Regressive Model" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9764088764601824, + "doc_id": "7d6f2a8abdf3520d1e0a002489d867a510e60a71efc673d51b15be601dd46a63", + "edit_distance": 0.014778325123152709, + "f1_score": 0.9923664122137404, + "meteor": 0.9950700283899532, + "precision": 0.9923664122137404, + "pred_md": "Theorem 4.5 Assume ρ is a stable relation on a finite set X and every clasp in X is unlocked.\n\n- 1. There is a preorder ≤ on a finite set Y and a compression map θ : Y → X .\n- 2. There is an injective ring homomorphism h : I ( X,ρ,R ) → I ( Y, ≤ , R ) .\n- 3. If G is a semigroup and I ( X,ρ,R ) has a grading induced by Φ : ρ → G then there is a good G -grading of I ( Y, ≤ , R ) such that h : I ( X,ρ,R ) → I ( Y, ≤ , R ) is an injective homomorphism of G -graded rings.\n\nProof. Part 1 is [8, Theorem 3.5]. Part 2 is a special case of part 3 when G = 1 . { }\n\nPart 3 follows from part 1 and Lemma 4.2.\n\n## 5 Group Gradings\n\nIf ( X,ρ ) is a preorder then a subset A of X is a cross-cut if A is an antichain in X , for all x ∈ X there exists a ∈ A such that xρa or aρx , and if C is a chain in X then C can be extended to a chain C ' such that A ∩ C ' is nonempty. The length of a cross-cut A of X is | A | . For example, the minimal elements of X form a cross-cut.\n\nFor a partially ordered with a cross-cut of length one or two there is a subset σ of ρ such that σ is a G -grading set for any group G (see [4, Theorem 4]). However if the shortest cross-cut of a partially ordered set has length three or more then there may not be a G -grading set for a group G (see [4, Example 6]).\n\nTheorem 5.1 Assume ( X,ρ ) is a preorder and X has a cross-cut of length one or two. Then there is a subset σ of ρ such that σ is a G -grading set for any group G .\n\n15", + "recall": 0.9923664122137404, + "true_md": "Theorem 4.5 Assume ρ is a stable relation on a finite set X and every clasp in X is unlocked.\n\n- 1. There is a preorder ≤ on a finite set Y and a compression map θ : Y → X .\n\n- 2. There is an injective ring homomorphism h : I ( X, ρ, R ) → I ( Y, ≤ , R ) .\n\n- 3. If G is a semigroup and I ( X, ρ, R ) has a grading induced by Φ : ρ → G then there is a good G -grading of I ( Y, ≤ , R ) such that h : I ( X, ρ, R ) → I ( Y, ≤ , R ) is an injective homomorphism of G -graded rings.\n\nProof. Part 1 is [8, Theorem 3.5]. Part 2 is a special case of part 3 when G = { 1 } . Part 3 follows from part 1 and Lemma 4.2.\n\n## 5 Group Gradings\n\nIf ( X, ρ ) is a preorder then a subset A of X is a cross-cut if A is an antichain in X , for all x ∈ X there exists a ∈ A such that xρa or aρx , and if C is a chain in X then C can be extended to a chain C ′ such that A ∩ C ′ is nonempty. The length of a cross-cut A of X is | A | . For example, the minimal elements of X form a cross-cut.\n\nFor a partially ordered with a cross-cut of length one or two there is a subset σ of ρ such that σ is a G -grading set for any group G (see [4, Theorem 4]). However if the shortest cross-cut of a partially ordered set has length three or more then there may not be a G -grading set for a group G (see [4, Example 6]).\n\nTheorem 5.1 Assume ( X, ρ ) is a preorder and X has a cross-cut of length one or two. Then there is a subset σ of ρ such that σ is a G -grading set for any group G .\n\n15" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7519048532436773, + "doc_id": "2928a947c89103af95c43c52ce5e40a6dca83b534ce46a847eab42b28b540fa1", + "edit_distance": 0.2434325744308231, + "f1_score": 0.9774011299435028, + "meteor": 0.8333636702427745, + "precision": 0.9774011299435028, + "pred_md": "substantial identification gains from the distance between my new lower bound and the Makarov lower bound. The most remarkable improvement arises around q = 0 5 and the refinement gets smaller as . q approaches 0 and 1 , in turn as δ approaches 0 and 2000. This can be intuitively understood through Figure 7(c). As δ gets closer to 2000 , the number of triangles, which is one source of identification gains, decreases to one in the bounded support of each potential outcome. This causes the new lower bound to converge to the Makarov lower bound as δ approaches 2000. Also, as δ converges to 0 , the identification gain generated by each triangle, which is written as max { F 1 ( y ) -F 0 ( y -δ , ) 0 } , converges to 0 under MTR, which implies F 1 ( y ) ≤ F 0 ( y ) for each y ∈ R .\n\nFigure 17: Bounds on the effect of smoking on birth weight for the entire sample\n\nFigure 17: Bounds on the effect of smoking on birth weight for the entire sample\n\nThe quantiles of smoking effects can be obtained by inverting these DTE bounds. Specifically, the upper and lower bounds on the quantile of treatment effects are obtained by inverting the lower bound and upper bound on the DTE, respectively. Note that quantiles of smoking effects show q -quantiles of the difference ( Y 1 -Y 0 ), while QTE gives the difference between the q -quantiles of Y 1 and those of Y 0 . These two parameters typically have different values. Fan and Park (2009) pointed out that QTE is identical to the quantile of treatment effects under strong conditions. 21 The bounds on the quantile of treatment effects are reported in Table 7 with comparison to QTE, already reported in Table 5. In the entire sample, my new bounds on the quantiles of the treatment effect show 33% - 45% refinement for q = 0 15, 0 25, 0 5, 0 75 compared to Makarov . . . . bounds. For the entire sample, my new bounds yield [0 457] grams for the median of the benefit of smoking , cessation on infant birth weight, while Makarov bounds yield [0 , 843] grams. Compared to Makarov bounds, my new bounds are more informative and show that (457 843] should be excluded from the identification , region for the median of the effect.\n\n21 Specifically, QTE = the quantile of treatment effects when (i) two potential outcomes are perfectly positively dependent Y 1 = F -1 1 ( F 0 ( Y 0 )) AND (ii) F -1 1 ( q ) -F -1 0 ( q ) is nondecreasing in q .\n\n43", + "recall": 0.9774011299435028, + "true_md": "substantial identification gains from the distance between my new lower bound and the Makarov lower bound. The most remarkable improvement arises around q = 0 . 5 and the refinement gets smaller as q approaches 0 and 1 , in turn as δ approaches 0 and 2000. This can be intuitively understood through Figure 7(c). As δ gets closer to 2000 , the number of triangles, which is one source of identification gains, decreases to one in the bounded support of each potential outcome. This causes the new lower bound to converge to the Makarov lower bound as δ approaches 2000. Also, as δ converges to 0 , the identification gain generated by each triangle, which is written as max { F$_{1}$ ( y ) − F$_{0}$ ( y − δ ) , 0 } , converges to 0 under MTR, which implies F$_{1}$ ( y ) ≤ F$_{0}$ ( y ) for each y ∈$_{R}$ .\n\nThe quantiles of smoking effects can be obtained by inverting these DTE bounds. Specifically, the upper and lower bounds on the quantile of treatment effects are obtained by inverting the lower bound and upper bound on the DTE, respectively. Note that quantiles of smoking effects show q -quantiles of the difference ( Y$_{1}$ − Y$_{0}$ ), while QTE gives the difference between the q -quantiles of Y$_{1}$ and those of Y$_{0}$ . These two parameters typically have different values. Fan and Park (2009) pointed out that QTE is identical to the quantile of treatment effects under strong conditions. 21 The bounds on the quantile of treatment effects are reported in Table 7 with comparison to QTE, already reported in Table 5. In the entire sample, my new bounds on the quantiles of the treatment effect show 33% - 45% refinement for q = 0 . 15, 0 . 25, 0 . 5, 0 . 75 compared to Makarov bounds. For the entire sample, my new bounds yield [0 , 457] grams for the median of the benefit of smoking cessation on infant birth weight, while Makarov bounds yield [0 , 843] grams. Compared to Makarov bounds, my new bounds are more informative and show that (457 , 843] should be excluded from the identification region for the median of the effect.\n\n$^{21}$Specifically, QTE = the quantile of treatment effects when (i) two potential outcomes are perfectly positively dependent Y$_{1}$ = F − 1 1 ( F$_{0}$ ( Y$_{0}$ )) AND (ii) F − 1 1 ( q ) − F − 1 0 ( q ) is nondecreasing in q .\n\nFigure 17: Bounds on the effect of smoking on birth weight for the entire sample\n\n43" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.2812555504879699, + "doc_id": "dc268113827333dbe2c48db8c2f77038d42846e30979c6665670cfda1158c803", + "edit_distance": 0.5520361990950227, + "f1_score": 0.9260273972602739, + "meteor": 0.4493077686432838, + "precision": 0.949438202247191, + "pred_md": "where\n\n\n\nNote that at the optimum ϕ y ( 0 ) + ψ y ( 1 ) = 1 { y 1 -y 0 < δ } for any ( y , y 0 1 ) in the support of the optimal joint distribution. Therefore, dual functions ϕ and ψ can be written as follows: for any ( y , y 0 1 ) in the support of the optimal joint distribution,\n\n\n\nIn my proof of Theorem 1, A k is defined as A k = { x ∈ R : ϕ x ( ) > s + k } for the function ϕ , some s ∈ [0 , 1] , and each integer k. Since the dual function ϕ is continuous, if ϕ is nondecreasing then A k = ( a , k ∞ ) for some a k ∈ -∞ ∞ [ , ] . Note that A k = φ for a k = ∞ . Also, since { A k } ∞ k = -∞ is a monotonically decreasing sequence of open sets, a k ≤ a k +1 for every integer k. In contrast, if ϕ is nonincreasing at the optimum then A k = ( -∞ , a k ) for a k ∈ -∞ ∞ [ , ] and a k +1 ≤ a k for each integer k . Note that A k = φ for a k = -∞ . In the next subsection, I will show that the function ϕ is monotone for economic examples considered in this paper and that sharp DTE bounds in each example are readily derived from monotonicity of ϕ .\n\nRemark 3 (Robustness of the sharp bounds) My sharp DTE bounds are robust for support restrictions in the sense that they do not rely too heavily on the small deviation of the restriction. I can verify this by showing that sharp bounds under Pr(( Y , Y 0 1 ) ∈ C ) ≥ p converge to those under Pr(( Y , Y 0 1 ) ∈ C ) = 1 , as p goes to one. The sharp lower bound under Pr(( Y , Y 0 1 ) ∈ C ) ≥ p can be obtained with a multiplier ˜ λ p ≥ 0 as follows:\n\n\n\nObviously, ˜ λ 0 = 0 . Furthermore, ˜ λ p ≤ ˜ λ q for 0 ≤ p < q ≤ 1 since F L ∆ ( δ ) is nondecreasing in p. The proof of Theorem 1 can be easily adapted to the more general case in which the multiplier is given as a positive integer. If ˜ λ p = 2 K in (12) for some positive integer K , then the dual representation reduces to\n\n\n\nwhere { A k } K k = -( K -1) is monotonically decreasing. As K goes to infinity, this obviously converges to the dual representation for the infinite Lagrange multiplier, which is given in (11).\n\n18", + "recall": 0.9037433155080213, + "true_md": "where\n\nNote that at the optimum ϕ ( y$_{0}$ ) + ψ ( y$_{1}$ ) = 1 { y$_{1}$ − y$_{0}$ < δ } for any ( y$_{0}$, y$_{1}$ ) in the support of the optimal joint distribution. Therefore, dual functions ϕ and ψ can be written as follows: for any ( y$_{0}$, y$_{1}$ ) in the support of the optimal joint distribution,\n\nIn my proof of Theorem 1, A$_{k}$ is defined as A$_{k}$ = { x ∈$_{R}$ : ϕ ( x ) > s + k } for the function ϕ , some s ∈ [0 , 1] , and each integer k. Since the dual function ϕ is continuous, if ϕ is nondecreasing then A$_{k}$ = ( a$_{k}$, ∞ ) for some a$_{k}$ ∈ [ −∞ , ∞ ] . Note that A$_{k}$ = φ for a$_{k}$ = ∞ . Also, since { A$_{k}$ } ∞ k = −∞ is a monotonically decreasing sequence of open sets, a$_{k}$ ≤ a$_{k}$$\\_{+1}$ for every integer k. In contrast, if ϕ is nonincreasing at the optimum then A$\\_{k}$ = ( −∞ , a$\\_{k}$ ) for a$\\_{k}$ ∈ [ −∞ , ∞ ] and a$\\_{k}$$_{+1}$ ≤ a$_{k}$ for each integer k . Note that A$_{k}$ = φ for a$_{k}$ = −∞ . In the next subsection, I will show that the function ϕ is monotone for economic examples considered in this paper and that sharp DTE bounds in each example are readily derived from monotonicity of ϕ .\n\nRemark 3 (Robustness of the sharp bounds) My sharp DTE bounds are robust for support restrictions in the sense that they do not rely too heavily on the small deviation of the restriction. I can verify this by showing that sharp bounds under Pr (( Y$_{0}$, Y$_{1}$ ) ∈ C ) ≥ p converge to those under Pr (( Y$_{0}$, Y$_{1}$ ) ∈ C ) = 1 , as p goes to one. The sharp lower bound under Pr (( Y$_{0}$, Y$_{1}$ ) ∈ C ) ≥ p can be obtained with a multiplier ˜ λ$_{p}$ ≥ 0 as follows:\n\nObviously, ˜ λ$_{0}$ = 0 . Furthermore, ˜ λ$_{p}$ ≤ ˜ λ$_{q}$ for 0 ≤ p < q ≤ 1 since F L Δ ( δ ) is nondecreasing in p. The proof of Theorem 1 can be easily adapted to the more general case in which the multiplier is given as a positive integer. If ˜ λ$_{p}$ = 2 K in (12) for some positive integer K , then the dual representation reduces to\n\nwhere { A$_{k}$ } K k = − ( K − 1) is monotonically decreasing. As K goes to infinity, this obviously converges to the dual representation for the infinite Lagrange multiplier, which is given in (11).\n\n18\n\n$$Φ$_{c}$ = { ( ϕ, ψ ) ; ϕ ( y$_{0}$ ) + ψ ( y$_{1}$ ) ≤ 1 { y$_{1}$ − y$_{0}$ < δ } + λ (1 − 1$_{C}$ ( y$_{0}$, y$_{1}$ )) with λ = ∞} .$$\n\n$$ϕ ( y$_{0}$ ) = inf y$_{1}$ :( y$_{0}$,y$_{1}$ ) ∈ C { 1 { y$_{1}$ − y$_{0}$ < δ } − ψ ( y$_{1}$ ) } .$$\n\n$$F L Δ ( δ ) = inf π ∈ Π( µ$_{0}$,µ$_{1}$ ) ∫ $^{{}$1 { y$_{1}$ − y$_{0}$ < δ } + ˜ λ$_{p}$ (1 − 1$_{C}$ ( y$_{0}$, y$_{1}$ )) $^{}}$dπ. (12)$$\n\n$$sup { A$_{k}$ } ∞ k = −∞ K ∑ − ( K − 1) max $^{{}$µ$_{0}$ ( A$_{k}$ ) − µ$_{1}$ $^{(}$A C k $^{)}$, 0 $^{}}$,$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.972170798686721, + "doc_id": "44c7a33bbdf96a967204f9859aaa77f4e193b413e96169b42f0d2d32df1c1ed0", + "edit_distance": 0.1834862385321101, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9895755230191756, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Appendix C\n\nAppendix C reports the empirical results which are not documented in Section 5. I report the regression tables for the estimation results for the equations (15), (16) and (17).\n\nTable C.1: Probit estimation of the first stage regression\n\nNote: The table reports the change in the probit response function due to a change in the indicator variable, with the rest of the covariates evaluated at the mean. The specification also includes indicators for birth orders, weight gains and medical risk factors. Robust standard errors are reported in parentheses.\n\n76", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## Appendix C\n\nAppendix C reports the empirical results which are not documented in Section 5. I report the regression tables for the estimation results for the equations (15), (16) and (17).\n\nNote: The table reports the change in the probit response function due to a change in the indicator variable, with the rest of the covariates evaluated at the mean. The specification also includes indicators for birth orders, weight gains and medical risk factors. Robust standard errors are reported in parentheses.\n\n76\n\nTable C.1: Probit estimation of the first stage regression" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.33607174365381914, + "doc_id": "7ff5adf8ee87817671f7dcf2775617bdfda366f2be35840624bfe09cb23743c2", + "edit_distance": 0.5111111111111111, + "f1_score": 0.9183098591549297, + "meteor": 0.45548594415731203, + "precision": 0.9209039548022598, + "pred_md": "ON THE APPLICATIONS OF CYCLOTOMIC FIELDS IN INTRODUCTORY NUMBER THEORY 13\n\nNow l ≡ 3 (4), so q 1 ( ) i q -1 ( ) = 4 i m i p ( ) = 4(1 + i + ... + i l ) = 4 · ((1 + i -1 -i ) + (1 + i -1 -i ) + ... +(1 + i -1)) = 4 i\n\nSo f ( ) i 2 -p g i ∗ ( ) 2 = f ( ) i 2 + pg i ( ) 2 = 4 , and so i y 2 2 (1+ i ∗ ) 2 + pξ 2 (1 -i ∗ ) 2 = 2 y i 2 2 ∗ -2 pξ i 2 2 ∗ = 4 i or, dividing by 2 i ∗ = ± 2 , i\n\n\n\n/negationslash\n\nNow y , ξ 2 2 are odd, else y 2 2 -pξ 2 2 ≡ y 2 2 + ξ 2 2 ≡ 0 ≡ ± 2 (4). So the coefficients of ( y 2 + √ pξ 2 ) 2 = ( y 2 2 + pξ 2 2 ) + 2 y ξ 2 2 √ p are even. We can thus write a = ( y 2 2 + pξ 2 2 ) 2 , b = y ξ 2 2 ∈ Z and get\n\n\n\nThis solves the equation, where\n\n\n\nTo apply this method to the general case of Pell's Equation (where d is square-free but not necessarily prime), since d is square-free, it can be written as d = r ∏ k =1 p k where the p k 's are rational primes. So it suffices to study the case where d = pq for primes p and q and deduce the general case by induction. We will not describe said case in depth here since this paper mainly focuses on prime cyclotomic fields, but we remark that taking Q ( ζ pq ), m pq ( x ) = m x m p ( ) q ( x ) ( x pq -1) / x ( -1) (( x p -1) / x ( -1)) (( · x q -1) / x ( -q )) = ( x pq -1)( x -1) ( x p -1)( x q -1) which can be shown to be irreducible by a similar method as the simple proof for showing that p -1 ∑ k =0 x k is the minimal polynomial of ζ p in Z [ x ]. Following the same reasoning as in the case where d = p , we can write 4 m pq ( x ) = f ( x ) 2 ± pqg x ( ) 2 where f ( x , g ) ( x ) ∈ Z . The rest of the problem is solved in a similar fashion as well.\n\nUsing some interesting approximation methods and quadratic number fields, Ireland & Rosen [5] show that x 2 -dy 2 = 1 has infinitely many solutions for any square-free integer", + "recall": 0.9157303370786517, + "true_md": "Now l ≡ 3 (4), so q$_{1}$ ( i ) q − $_{1}$( i ) = 4 m$_{p}$ ( i ) = 4(1 + i + ... + i $^{l}$) = 4 · ((1 + i − 1 − i ) + (1 + i − 1 − i ) + ... + (1 + i − 1)) = 4 i 2\n\n− − So f ( i ) $^{2}$− p ∗ g ( i ) 2 = f ( i ) $^{2}$+ pg ( i ) 2 = 4 i , and so y 2 $_{2}$(1+ i ∗ ) $^{2}$+ pξ$_{2}$ (1 − i ∗ ) 2 = 2 y 2 $_{2}$i $^{∗}$− 2 pξ 2 $_{2}$i ∗ = 4 i or, dividing by 2 i ∗ = ± 2 i ,\n\n$$y 2 − pξ 2 2 = ± 2 ⇒ ( y$_{2}$ + √ pξ$_{2}$ ) $^{2}$( y$_{2}$ − √ pξ$_{2}$ ) 2 = 4$$\n\nNow y$_{2}$, ξ$_{2}$ are odd, else y 2 − pξ 2 2 ≡ y 2 $_{2}$+ ξ 2 2 ≡ 0 ̸≡ ± 2 (4). So the coefficients of ( y$_{2}$ + √ pξ$_{2}$ ) 2 = ( y 2 + pξ 2 $_{2}$) + 2 y$_{2}$ξ$_{2}$ √ p are even. We can thus write a = ( y 2 $_{2}$+ pξ 2 $_{2}$) 2 , b = y$_{2}$ξ$_{2}$ ∈ Z and get √ √\n\n$$a 2 − pb 2 = ( y$_{2}$ + √ pξ$_{2}$ ) $^{2}$( y$_{2}$ − √ pξ$_{2}$ ) 2 2 · 2 = 4 4 = 1$$\n\nThis solves the equation, where\n\nwhere we can directly compute f ( i ) and g ( i )\n\nTo apply this method to the general case of Pell’s Equation (where d is square-free but not necessarily prime), since d is square-free, it can be written as d = r ∏ k =1 p$_{k}$ where the p$_{k}$ ’s are rational primes. So it suffices to study the case where d = pq for primes p and q and deduce the general case by induction. We will not describe said case in depth here since this paper mainly focuses on prime cyclotomic fields, but we remark that taking Q ( ζ$_{pq}$ ), m$_{pq}$ ( x ) = m$_{p}$ ( x ) m$_{q}$ ( x ) ( x $^{pq}$− 1) / ( $^{x}$− 1) (( x $^{p}$− 1) / ( $^{x}$− $^{1))}$·(( x $^{q}$− 1) / ( $^{x}$−q )) = ( x $^{pq}$− 1)( $^{x}$− 1) ( x $^{p}$− 1)( x $^{q}$− 1) which can be shown to be irreducible by a similar method as the simple proof for showing that $^{p}$− 1 ∑ k =0 x k is the minimal polynomial of ζ$_{p}$ in Z [ x ]. Following the same reasoning as in the case where d = p , we can write 4 m$_{pq}$ ( x ) = f ( x ) 2 ± pqg ( x ) 2 where f ( x ) , g ( x ) ∈ Z . The rest of the problem is solved in a similar fashion as well.\n\nUsing some interesting approximation methods and quadratic number fields, Ireland & Rosen [5] show that x 2 − dy 2 = 1 has infinitely many solutions for any square-free integer\n\nON THE APPLICATIONS OF CYCLOTOMIC FIELDS IN INTRODUCTORY NUMBER THEORY 13\n\n$$( a, b ) = ( i ∗ 4 ( pg ( i ) 2 − f ( i ) $^{2}$) , 1 2 g ( i ) f ( i ) )$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5985054584885959, + "doc_id": "b3685829aa6bf323879fa8910ba1e721aa4818835c523ef178e177d485616f50", + "edit_distance": 0.4230769230769231, + "f1_score": 0.9448818897637795, + "meteor": 0.6576141149567621, + "precision": 0.9473684210526315, + "pred_md": "\n\n## 6 Conclusion\n\nIn this paper, I have proposed a novel approach to identifying the DTE under general support restrictions on the potential outcomes. My approach involves formulating the problem as an optimal transportation linear program and embedding support restrictions into the cost function with an infinite Lagrange multiplier by taking advantage of their linearity in the entire joint distribution. I have developed the dual formulation for { 0 1 , , ∞} -valued costs to overcome the technical challenges associated with optimization over the space of joint distributions. This contrasts sharply with the existing copula approach, which requires one to find out the joint distributions achieving sharp bounds given restrictions.\n\nI have characterized the identification region under general support restrictions and derived sharp bounds on the DTE for economic examples. My identification result has been applied to the empirical analysis of the distribution of smoking effects on infant birth weight. I have proposed an estimation procedure for the bounds. The empirical results have shown that MTR has a substantial power to identify the distribution of smoking effects when the marginal distributions of the potential outcomes are given.\n\nIn some cases, information concerning the relationship between potential outcomes cannot be represented by support restrictions. Moreover, it is also sometimes the case that the joint distribution function itself is of interest. In a companion paper, I propose a method to identify the DTE and the joint distribution when weak stochastic dependence restrictions among unobservables are imposed in triangular systems, which consist of an outcome equation and a selection equation.\n\n47\n\nglyph[negationslash]\n\nglyph[negationslash]\n\nglyph[negationslash]\n\nsubsample size b out of n observations s.t. j 1 = j 2 = . . . = j , b b < n and j = 1 , ...,    n b    . Then the subsampling bias-adjusted estimator ˜ F NL ∆ ( δ ) is\n\n", + "recall": 0.9424083769633508, + "true_md": "subsample size b out of n observations s.t. j$_{1}$ ̸ = j$_{2}$ ̸ = . . . ̸ = j$_{b}$, b < n and j = 1 , ...,$^{}$   n b   $_{}$. Then the subsampling bias-adjusted estimator ˜ F NL Δ ( δ ) is\n\nIn this paper, I have proposed a novel approach to identifying the DTE under general support restrictions on the potential outcomes. My approach involves formulating the problem as an optimal transportation linear program and embedding support restrictions into the cost function with an infinite Lagrange multiplier by taking advantage of their linearity in the entire joint distribution. I have developed the dual formulation for { 0 , 1 , ∞} -valued costs to overcome the technical challenges associated with optimization over the space of joint distributions. This contrasts sharply with the existing copula approach, which requires one to find out the joint distributions achieving sharp bounds given restrictions.\n\nI have characterized the identification region under general support restrictions and derived sharp bounds on the DTE for economic examples. My identification result has been applied to the empirical analysis of the distribution of smoking effects on infant birth weight. I have proposed an estimation procedure for the bounds. The empirical results have shown that MTR has a substantial power to identify the distribution of smoking effects when the marginal distributions of the potential outcomes are given.\n\nIn some cases, information concerning the relationship between potential outcomes cannot be represented by support restrictions. Moreover, it is also sometimes the case that the joint distribution function itself is of interest. In a companion paper, I propose a method to identify the DTE and the joint distribution when weak stochastic dependence restrictions among unobservables are imposed in triangular systems, which consist of an outcome equation and a selection equation.\n\n47\n\n## 6 Conclusion\n\nwhere q$_{n}$ =    n b   $_{}$.\n\n$$˜ F NL Δ ( δ ) = ̂ F NL Δ ( δ ) − 1 q$_{n}$ q$_{n}$ ∑ j =1 { ̂ F NL Δ ,n,b,j ( δ ) − ̂ F NL Δ ( δ ) } = 2$_{̂}$ F NL Δ ( δ ) − 1 q$_{n}$ q$_{n}$ ∑ j =1 ̂ F NL Δ ,n,b,j ( δ ) ,$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.3781323156498948, + "doc_id": "f20ddf1554743121d26704efa8960e5859ddf5423730e20e221e79cd2130a59d", + "edit_distance": 0.42818243703199454, + "f1_score": 0.92090395480226, + "meteor": 0.5727472423260241, + "precision": 0.9106145251396648, + "pred_md": "ON THE APPLICATIONS OF CYCLOTOMIC FIELDS IN INTRODUCTORY NUMBER THEORY\n\n3\n\n/negationslash\n\nNow α prime to p , so if a 0 ≡ 0 ( p ), then a 0 ≡ 0 (1 -ζ p ), and so α ≡ 0 (1 -ζ p ), which is a contradiction. So a 0 ≡ 0 ( p ), and so a 1 -na 0 ≡ 0 has a unique solution k modulo p . Now (1 -ζ p ) | (1 -ζ 2 p ), and N ( 1 -ζ 2 p 1 -ζ p ) = N (1 -ζ 2 p ) N (1 -ζ p ) = 1, so (1 -ζ 2 p ) is associate to (1 -ζ p ). It follows that (1 -ζ p ) 2 | p , and so k is (still, since a 1 -na 0 ∈ Z ) the unique integral solution modulo p to a 1 -na 0 ≡ 0 (1 -ζ p ) 2 . Then ζ k p α ≡ a 0 (1 -ζ p ) 2 , and therefore ζ k p α is primary. /square\n\nLemma 1. Let u be a unit in O K . Then u u = ζ t for some t ∈ Z\n\nProof. Write υ = u u . Conjugation is a Galois automorphism on O K since ζ = ζ -1 = ζ p -1 . So u is also a unit, and so υ ∈ O K . Now let σ k be the ( p -1) Galois automorphisms on O K such that σ k ( ζ ) = ζ k , k ∈ Z . Then for all 1 ≤ k ≤ ( p -1), σ υ k = σ k u σ k u = σ k u σ k u by the above remark. So | σ υ k | = σ υσ υ k k = 1. So | σ υ k | n = 1 for any n ∈ N .\n\nNow consider the polynomial f ( x ) = p -1 ∏ k =1 ( x -σ υ k ). The coefficients of this polynomial are elementary symmetric polynomials in { σ υ k : 1 ≤ k ≤ p - } 1 , and so are invariant by action by Gal K ( : Q ) = { σ υ k : 1 ≤ k ≤ p - } 1 . So f ( x ) ∈ Z [ x ]. But then the coefficient of x k is s ( p -1) -k where s j is the j th elementary symmetric polynomial. But by the previous paragraph, ∣ ∣ s ( p -1) -k ∣ ∣ ≤ p - -1 k ∑ j =1 | σ υ k | k ≤ p -1 -k . So there are finitely many possible such f ( x ) ∈ Z [ x ] since the coefficients are bounded. So there are finitely many possible roots since a polynomial of finite degree has a finite number of roots. But | σ υ k n | = 1 for any n ∈ N , so { υ n : n ∈ N } satisfy the same argument. So we must have υ n = υ n ' for some n, n ' ∈ Z . So υ n -n ' = 1, and it follows that υ is a root of unity in O K .\n\nSo by the basic properties of prime cyclotomic fields, we must have υ = ± ζ t for some t ∈ Z . Now consider congruence modulo λ = 1 -ζ . Then since 1 -ζ k 1 -ζ = k -1 ∑ i =1 ζ i ∈ 〈 1 , ζ p , ..., ζ p -2 p 〉 Z = O K , ζ k ≡ 1 ( λ ) for all k ∈ Z . So since ζ k = ζ -k ≡ 1 ≡ ζ k ( λ ), α ≡ α ( λ ) for all α ∈ O K . Namely, u ≡ u = ± ζ -t u ≡ ± u ( λ ). So if υ = -ζ t , u ≡ -u ( λ ) ⇒ 2 u ≡ 0 ( λ ) which is impossible since N λ ( ) = p /notbar N (2 u ) = 2 p -1 since p is odd. So υ = + ζ t . /square\n\nTheorem 1. Let u be a unit in O K . Then u is real ⇔ u is primary in O K .\n\nProof. Since O K = Z [ ζ p ] = 1 〈 , ζ p , ..., ζ p -2 p 〉 Z , we can write u as p -2 ∑ k =0 a ζ k k for unique a , ..., a 0 p -2 ∈ Z . And so, noting that ζ p -1 = -p -2 ∑ i =0 ζ i , ζ -t u = p -2 ∑ k =0 a ζ k k -t = p -2 ∑ k =0 ( a k + t -a ( p -1)+ t ) ζ k where", + "recall": 0.9314285714285714, + "true_md": "ON THE APPLICATIONS OF CYCLOTOMIC FIELDS IN INTRODUCTORY NUMBER THEORY 3\n\nNow α prime to p , so if a$_{0}$ ≡ 0 ( p ), then a$_{0}$ ≡ 0 (1 − ζ$_{p}$ ), and so α ≡ 0 (1 − ζ$_{p}$ ), which is a contradiction. So a$_{0}$ ̸≡ 0 ( p ), and so a$_{1}$ − na$_{0}$ ≡ 0 has a unique solution k modulo p . Now (1 − ζ$_{p}$ ) | (1 − ζ 2 $_{p}$), and N ( $^{1}$− ζ 2 p $_{ζ$\\_{p}$}$) = N $^{(1}$− ζ 2 $_{p}$) N ζ$_{p}$ ) = 1, so (1 − ζ 2 $_{p}$) is associate to (1 − ζ$_{p}$ ). It follows that (1 − ζ$_{p}$ ) 2 | p , and so k is (still, since a$_{1}$ − na$_{0}$ ∈ Z ) the unique integral solution modulo p to a$_{1}$ − na$_{0}$ ≡ 0 (1 − ζ$_{p}$ ) $^{2}$. Then ζ k $_{p}$α ≡ a$_{0}$ (1 − ζ$_{p}$ ) $^{2}$, and therefore ζ k $_{p}$α is primary. □\n\nLemma 1. Let u be a unit in O $_{K}$. Then u u = ζ t for some t ∈ Z\n\nProof. Write υ = u $_{u}$. Conjugation is a Galois automorphism on O K since ζ = ζ − 1 = ζ $^{p}$− $^{1}$. So u is also a unit, and so υ ∈ O $_{K}$. Now let σ$_{k}$ be the ( p − 1) Galois automorphisms on O K such that σ$_{k}$ ( ζ ) = ζ $^{k}$, k ∈ Z . Then for all 1 ≤ k ≤ ( p − 1), σ$_{k}$υ = σ$_{k}$u σ$_{k}$u = σ$_{k}$u σ$_{k}$u by the above remark. So | σ$_{k}$υ | = σ$_{k}$υσ$_{k}$υ = 1. So | σ$_{k}$υ | n = 1 for any n ∈ N . $^{p}$− 1\n\nNow consider the polynomial f ( x ) = $^{p}$− 1 ∏ k =1 ( x − σ$_{k}$υ ). The coefficients of this polynomial are elementary symmetric polynomials in { σ$_{k}$υ : 1 ≤ k ≤ p − 1 } , and so are invariant by action by Gal ( K : Q ) = { σ$_{k}$υ : 1 ≤ k ≤ p − 1 } . So f ( x ) ∈ Z [ x ]. But then the coefficient of x k is s$_{(}$$\\_{p}$ − $^{1)}$− k where s$\\_{j}$ is the j th elementary symmetric polynomial. But by the previous paragraph, ∣ s$\\_{(}$$_{p}$ − $^{1)}$− k ∣ ≤ $^{p}$− $^{1}$− k ∑ j =1 | σ$_{k}$υ | k ≤ p − 1 − k . So there are finitely many possible such f ( x ) ∈ Z [ x ] since the coefficients are bounded. So there are finitely many possible roots since a polynomial of finite degree has a finite number of roots. But | σ$_{k}$υ $^{n}$| = 1 for any n ∈ N , so { υ n : n ∈ N } satisfy the same argument. So we must have υ n = υ n ′ for some n, n ′ ∈ Z . So υ $^{n}$−n ′ = 1, and it follows that υ is a root of unity in O $_{K}$. t\n\nO So by the basic properties of prime cyclotomic fields, we must have υ = ± ζ t for some t ∈ Z . Now consider congruence modulo λ = 1 − ζ . Then since 1 − ζ k 1 ζ = $^{k}$− 1 ∑ i =1 ζ i ∈ 〈 1 , ζ$_{p}$, ..., ζ $^{p}$− 2 p 〉 Z = O $_{K}$, ζ k ≡ 1 ( λ ) for all k ∈ Z . So since ζ k = ζ − k ≡ 1 ≡ ζ k ( λ ), α ≡ α ( λ ) for all α ∈ O $_{K}$. Namely, u ≡ u = ± ζ − $^{t}$u ≡ ± u ( λ ). So if υ = − ζ $^{t}$, u ≡ − u ( λ ) ⇒ 2 u ≡ 0 ( λ ) which is impossible since N ( λ ) = p ∤ N (2 u ) = 2 $^{p}$− 1 since p is odd. So υ = + ζ $^{t}$. □\n\nTheorem 1. Let u be a unit in O $_{K}$. Then u is real ⇔ u is primary in O $_{K}$.\n\nProof. Since O K = Z [ ζ$_{p}$ ] = 〈 1 , ζ$_{p}$, ..., ζ $^{p}$− 2 p 〉 $_{Z}$, we can write u as $^{p}$− 2 ∑ k =0 a$_{k}$ζ k for unique a$_{0}$, ..., a$_{p}$ − 2 ∈ Z . And so, noting that ζ $^{p}$− 1 = −$^{p}$ − 2 ∑ i =0 ζ $^{i}$, ζ − $^{t}$u = $^{p}$− 2 ∑ k =0 a$_{k}$ζ $^{k}$−t = $^{p}$− 2 k =0 ( a$_{k}$$\\_{+}$$_{t}$ − a$_{(}$$\\_{p}$ − 1)+ $\\_{t}$) ζ k where" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9373453186121353, + "doc_id": "2b471cacff6da40878ce067c3cdda66c830e687949d771619c0e4d8f2acf89f0", + "edit_distance": 0.058823529411764705, + "f1_score": 0.9558011049723757, + "meteor": 0.9662655070343191, + "precision": 0.9774011299435028, + "pred_md": "in part by the static connectivity magnitude (as well as other factors, such as window length, whether windows overlap or not, the power spectrum of the time series, etc.). It is also worth noting that our approach aims to estimate this distribution as closely as possible by generating many surrogate time series samples that have many properties in common with the empirical fMRI BOLD time series.\n\nOur results are limited, in part, by the length of fMRI scan sessions. For example, we estimated the static functional connectivity for each participant based on 885 observations (time points or TRs, corresponding to approximately 9.37 minutes), and as a result of the finite sample size, consequently may not know the true (i.e. very long term) values of static connectivity between pairs of regions (Laumann et al., 2015).\n\nIn this paper we focus on functional connectivity as calculated by Pearson's correlation coefficient, as it is the most frequently-used measure in the extant literature. It should be noted that there are many alternative functional connectivity metrics (Smith et al., 2011), some of which can be applied to timevarying networks as well. Determining whether static estimates of functional connectivity made from these alternative measures can be used to predict dynamic connectivity is beyond the scope of this report, though we suspect that a similar rationale applies to these alternative measures.\n\n## Concluding remarks\n\nWe show that the use of correlation as a measure of dynamic functional connectivity implies a number statistical sequelae, for example that connectivity over longer time-scales constrains the expected dynamic fluctuations expected at shorter time scales. We propose a method for identifying functional connections that are unexpectedly strong or weak, applying this technique to fMRI BOLD data. From these data, we show that dynamic functional connectivity\n\n27", + "recall": 0.9351351351351351, + "true_md": "in part by the static connectivity magnitude (as well as other factors, such as window length, whether windows overlap or not, the power spectrum of the time series, etc.). It is also worth noting that our approach aims to estimate this distribution as closely as possible by generating many surrogate time series samples that have many properties in common with the empirical fMRI BOLD time series.\n\nOur results are limited, in part, by the length of fMRI scan sessions. For example, we estimated the static functional connectivity for each participant based on 885 observations (time points or TRs, corresponding to approximately 9.37 minutes), and as a result of the finite sample size, consequently may not know the true (i.e. very long term) values of static connectivity between pairs of regions (Laumann et al., 2015).\n\nIn this paper we focus on functional connectivity as calculated by Pear- son’s correlation coefficient, as it is the most frequently-used measure in the extant literature. It should be noted that there are many alternative functional connectivity metrics (Smith et al., 2011), some of which can be applied to time- varying networks as well. Determining whether static estimates of functional connectivity made from these alternative measures can be used to predict dy- namic connectivity is beyond the scope of this report, though we suspect that a similar rationale applies to these alternative measures.\n\nWe show that the use of correlation as a measure of dynamic functional con- nectivity implies a number statistical sequelae, for example that connectivity over longer time-scales constrains the expected dynamic fluctuations expected at shorter time scales. We propose a method for identifying functional connec- tions that are unexpectedly strong or weak, applying this technique to fMRI BOLD data. From these data, we show that dynamic functional connectivity\n\n## Concluding remarks\n\n27" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5576550720225086, + "doc_id": "5b1c4820ca137610668810f13f77d4411301d6e17e9787ebe31292acb7c08ed0", + "edit_distance": 0.3398496240601504, + "f1_score": 0.935135135135135, + "meteor": 0.6984391380016803, + "precision": 0.9719101123595506, + "pred_md": "## Algorithm 1 Computing LB and UB Allocations in Cell l\n\n- 1) Input: [ H l ] , [ A l ] , [ P l ] , [ G jl ] where α n,k,l = 0 , p n,k,l = P k, max /N ∀ k, ∀ n\n- 2) For each user k in cell l , power is divided equally over all of its allocated subcarriers and the remaining unallocated subcarriers of the system.\n- 3) Using [ P l ] from step 2, [ H l ] and [ G jl ] , compute the matrix Q l for each cell l .\n- 4) Find the ( n, k ) pair that has the maximum value of Q n,k,l . Allocate subcarrier n to user k .\n- maximum power equally at each user over all of its\n- 5) Delete the n th subcarrier from the set of unallocated subcarriers. If there are still unallocated subcarriers in the system go to step 2. else terminate after distributing the assigned subcarriers.\n\nby ignoring the effect of ICI in all the cells. This can be achieved by substituting ξ n,l = 0 in Algorithm 1, i.e., Q n,k,l = p n,k,l h n,k,l σ 2 :\n\n\n\nThe allocations computed by Algorithm 1 are near optimal since they are based on a criterion which is shown to be near optimal in the context of single cell scenarios [2]-[4]. The average network throughput revealed by these allocations could be highly optimistic for multi-cell scenarios. Thus, we can investigate the impact of ICI by simply computing the throughput using (1) instead of (10) with these allocations. Computing throughput in this way helps to analyze the degradation in the performance when the single cell near-optimal allocations are used in multi-cell network scenarios with ICI.\n\n## C. Complexity Analysis\n\nThe ( n, k ) pair at which the term Q n,k,l becomes maximum is allocated (Step 4), which has a complexity of a two dimensional search, i.e., O KN ( ) . However, as soon as a subcarrier is assigned, each user updates its power as defined in Algorithm 1. This process iterates until all the subcarriers in all the cells are allocated and, thus, the time complexity of Algorithm 1 is O KN ( 2 ) .\n\nMarch 19, 2018\n\nDRAFT\n\n7", + "recall": 0.9010416666666666, + "true_md": "7\n\n## Algorithm 1 Computing LB and UB Allocations in Cell l\n\n- 1) Input: [ H$_{l}$ ] , [ A$_{l}$ ] , [ P$_{l}$ ] , [ G$_{jl}$ ] where α$_{n,k,l}$ = 0 , p$_{n,k,l}$ = P$_{k,}$$\\_{max}$/N ∀ k, ∀ n\n\n- 2) For each user k in cell l , power is divided equally over all of its allocated subcarriers and the remaining unallocated subcarriers of the system.\n\n- 3) Using [ P$_{l}$ ] from step 2, [ H$_{l}$ ] and [ G$_{jl}$ ] , compute the matrix Q$_{l}$ for each cell l .\n\n- 4) Find the ( n, k ) pair that has the maximum value of Q$_{n,k,l}$ . Allocate subcarrier n to user k . th\n\n- ( n, k ) Q$_{n,k,l}$ 5) Delete the n th subcarrier from the set of unallocated subcarriers.\n\nIf there are still unallocated subcarriers in the system go to step 2.\n\nelse terminate after distributing the maximum power equally at each user over all of its assigned subcarriers.\n\nby ignoring the effect of ICI in all the cells. This can be achieved by substituting ξ$_{n,l}$ = 0 in Algorithm 1, i.e., Q$_{n,k,l}$ = p$_{n,k,l}$h$_{n,k,l}$ σ 2 :\n\nThe allocations computed by Algorithm 1 are near optimal since they are based on a criterion which is shown to be near optimal in the context of single cell scenarios [2]–[4]. The average network throughput revealed by these allocations could be highly optimistic for multi-cell sce- narios. Thus, we can investigate the impact of ICI by simply computing the throughput using (1) instead of (10) with these allocations. Computing throughput in this way helps to analyze the degradation in the performance when the single cell near-optimal allocations are used in multi-cell network scenarios with ICI.\n\n$$C ( A$_{l}$ , P$_{l}$ ) ≤ 1 L L ∑ l =1 K ∑ k =1 N ∑ n =1 α$_{n,k,l}$ log$_{2}$ ( 1 + p$_{n,k,l}$h$_{n,k,l}$ σ 2 ) (10)$$\n\n## C. Complexity Analysis\n\nThe ( n, k ) pair at which the term Q$_{n,k,l}$ becomes maximum is allocated (Step 4), which has a complexity of a two dimensional search, i.e., O ( KN ) . However, as soon as a subcarrier is assigned, each user updates its power as defined in Algorithm1. This process iterates until all the subcarriers in all the cells are allocated and, thus, the time complexity of Algorithm 1 is O ( KN $^{2}$) .\n\nDRAFT\n\nMarch 19, 2018" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.111530118453008, + "doc_id": "64710baf40318e018974cb12ca06af82ae493ad47acaec0c21c0c0ac9a422a88", + "edit_distance": 0.7948402948402948, + "f1_score": 0.8817204301075268, + "meteor": 0.2679936326685471, + "precision": 0.9318181818181818, + "pred_md": "recall that\n\n\n\nPick any ( y , y ' 0 ' 1 ) with y ' 1 > y ' 0 in the optimal support of the joint distribution. For any h s.t. 0 < h < y ' 1 -y , ' 0\n\n\n\nThe inequality in the second line of (A.13) is satisfied because y ' 1 > y ( ' 0 + h , ) and the inequality in the third line of (A.13) holds since 1 { y 1 -y 0 > δ } is nonincreasing in y . 0 By Lemma A.2, ϕ is nonincreasing on R .\n\nFigure A.4: B D k for B k = ( -∞ , b k ) and B k +1 = ( -∞ , b k +1 )\n\nFigure A.4: B D k for B k = ( -∞ , b k ) and B k +1 = ( -∞ , b k +1 )\n\nNow, B k = { y ∈ R ; ϕ > s + k } = ( -∞ , b k ) for each integer k , some s ∈ (0 1] and , b k ∈ [ -∞ ∞ , ] , in which B k = φ for b k = -∞ . By Theorem 1, for each integer k, b k +1 ≤ b k and for δ > 0 ,\n\n\n\nIf b k = -∞ , then b k +1 = -∞ and so B D k = φ. For b k > -∞ , B D k depends on the value of b k +1 as follows:\n\n\n\n67", + "recall": 0.8367346938775511, + "true_md": "recall that\n\nPick any ( y ′ $_{0}$, y ′ $_{1}$) with y ′ 1 > y ′ 0 in the optimal support of the joint distribution. For any h s.t. 0 < h < y ′ $_{1}$− y ′ $_{0}$,\n\nThe inequality in the second line of (A.13) is satisfied because y ′ 1 > ( y ′ 0 + h ) , and the inequality in the third line of (A.13) holds since 1 { y$_{1}$ − y$_{0}$ > δ } is nonincreasing in y$_{0}$. By Lemma A.2, ϕ is nonincreasing on$_{R}$.\n\nNow, B$_{k}$ = { y ∈$_{R}$ ; ϕ > s + k } = ( −∞ , b$_{k}$ ) for each integer k , some s ∈ (0 , 1] and b$_{k}$ ∈ [ −∞ , ∞ ] , in which B$_{k}$ = φ for b$_{k}$ = −∞ . By Theorem 1, for each integer k, b$_{k}$$\\_{+1}$ ≤ b$\\_{k}$ and for δ > 0 ,\n\nIf b$_{k}$ = −∞ , then b$_{k}$$\\_{+1}$ = −∞ and so B D k = φ. For b$\\_{k}$ > −∞ , B D k depends on the value of b$\\_{k}$$_{+1}$ as follows:\n\n$$ϕ ( y$_{0}$ ) = inf y$_{1}$ ≥ $_{y$_{0}$}${{ y$_{1}$ − y$_{0}$ > δ } − ψ ( y$_{1}$ ) } .$$\n\n$$ϕ ( y ′ 0 + h ) = inf y$_{1}$>y ′ $_{0}$+ h { 1 { y$_{1}$ − ( y ′ 0 + h ) > δ } − ψ ( y$_{1}$ ) } (A.13) ≤ 1 { y ′ 1 − ( y ′ 0 + h ) > δ } − ψ ( y ′ $_{1}$) ≤ 1 { y ′ 1 − y ′ 0 > δ } − ψ ( y ′ $_{1}$) = ϕ ( y ′ $_{0}$) ,$$\n\n$$B D k = { y$_{1}$ ∈$_{R}$ ; ∃ y$_{0}$ < b$_{k}$ s.t. 0 ≤ y$_{1}$ − y$_{0}$ < δ } ∪ { y$_{1}$ ∈$_{R}$ ; ∃ y$_{0}$ < b$_{k}$$_{+1}$ s.t. y$_{1}$ − y$_{0}$ ≥ δ } .$$\n\n$$B D k =      $_{R}$, if b$_{k}$$_{+1}$ > −∞ , ( −∞ , b$_{k}$ + δ ), if b$_{k}$$_{+1}$ = −∞ .$$\n\n67\n\nFigure A.4: B D k for B$_{k}$ = ( −∞ , b$_{k}$ ) and B$_{k}$$\\_{+1}$ = ( −∞ , b$\\_{k}$$_{+1}$ )" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.42391975742018506, + "doc_id": "f086b77e8d1791e018666237865b40a2a3780f086a5ff7962d2b26379290f963", + "edit_distance": 0.4909090909090909, + "f1_score": 0.9173333333333333, + "meteor": 0.5961952213470535, + "precision": 0.945054945054945, + "pred_md": "## III. BOUNDS ON THE NETWORK THROUGHPUT\n\n## A. Lower Bound on the Optimal Network Throughput\n\nA LB for the optimum multi-cell network throughput can be computed by considering worst case ICI. Observing the dependency of ICI on the subcarrier allocation and power allocation variables, we assume that each user in each cell is transmitting on each subcarrier with its maximum power. A simple LB for the average network throughput C taking the worst case ICI into account can be written as follows:\n\n\n\n/negationslash\n\nA tighter LB can be derived by using Algorithm 1 where each subcarrier is allocated to the user that maximizes Q n,k,l where:\n\nwhere ξ n,l = ∑ L j =1 ,j = l ∑ K k =1 P k, max g n,k,jl .\n\n\n\nThus, Q n,k,l is an SINR term for each user k at each subcarrier n in each cell l assuming worst case interference. We collect these SINR terms into a vector q n,l = [ q n, 1 ,l , q n, 2 ,l ...., q n,K,l ] and then stack all the vectors in a matrix Q l ∈ R N × K . The resulting allocations based on this criteria are then used to compute the LB network throughput using (1).\n\nNote that if ξ n,l = 0 , than Q n,k,l becomes the marginal rate which is shown to be a near-optimal criterion in single cell network scenarios without ICI [2]. Moreover, equal power allocation has insignificant performance loss in high SINR regime compared to the optimal water-filling solution [2], [4], thus power equalization is implemented in Algorithm 1. For the low SINR regime, we can incorporate water-filling rather than equalization in a straightforward manner.\n\n## B. Upper Bound on the Optimal Network Throughput\n\nEstablishing an UB is significantly important in order to calibrate the performance of suboptimal resource allocation schemes with respect to the optimal solution. The UB can be derived\n\nMarch 19, 2018\n\nDRAFT\n\n6", + "recall": 0.8911917098445595, + "true_md": "6\n\n## III. BOUNDS ON THE NETWORK THROUGHPUT\n\n## A. Lower Bound on the Optimal Network Throughput\n\nA LB for the optimum multi-cell network throughput can be computed by considering worst case ICI. Observing the dependency of ICI on the subcarrier allocation and power allocation variables, we assume that each user in each cell is transmitting on each subcarrier with its maximum power. A simple LB for the average network throughput C taking the worst case ICI into account can be written as follows:\n\n$$C ( A$_{l}$ , P$_{l}$ ) ≥ 1 L L ∑ l =1 K ∑ k =1 N ∑ n =1 α$_{n,k,l}$ log$_{2}$ ( 1 + p$_{n,k,l}$h$_{n,k,l}$ σ $^{2}$+ ξ$_{n,l}$ ) (8)$$\n\n$$Q$_{n,k,l}$ = p$_{n,k,l}$h$_{n,k,l}$ ξ$_{n,l}$ + σ 2 (9)$$\n\nwhere ξ$_{n,l}$ = ∑ L j =1 ,j ̸ = l ∑ K k $_{=1}$P$_{k,}$$\\_{max}$ g$\\_{n,k,jl}$ . A tighter LB can be derived by using Algorithm 1 where each subcarrier is allocated to the\n\n∑ ∑ A tighter LB can be derived by using Algorithm 1 where each subcarrier is allocated to the\n\nuser that maximizes Q$_{n,k,l}$ where:\n\nThus, Q$_{n,k,l}$ is an SINR term for each user k at each subcarrier n in each cell l assuming worst case interference. We collect these SINR terms into a vector q$_{n,l}$ = [ q$_{n,}$$\\_{1}$$_{,l}$, q$_{n,}$$\\_{2}$$_{,l}$...., q$_{n,K,l}$ ] and then stack all the vectors in a matrix Q$_{l}$ ∈ R N × $^{K}$. The resulting allocations based on this criteria are then used to compute the LB network throughput using (1).\n\nNote that if ξ$_{n,l}$ = 0 , than Q$_{n,k,l}$ becomes the marginal rate which is shown to be a near-optimal criterion in single cell network scenarios without ICI [2]. Moreover, equal power allocation has insignificant performance loss in high SINR regime comparedto the optimal water-filling solution [2], [4], thus power equalization is implemented in Algorithm 1. For the low SINR regime, we can incorporate water-filling rather than equalization in astraightforward manner.\n\nEstablishing an UB is significantly important in order to cal ibrate the performance of sub- optimal resource allocation schemes with respect to the optimal solution. The UB can be derived\n\n## B. Upper Bound on the Optimal Network Throughput\n\nDRAFT\n\nMarch 19, 2018" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.06980796331749212, + "doc_id": "5b5658d751d2135fd70fa6cea44c933e764ac0a4153b8338f5e04ff756b49d8e", + "edit_distance": 0.8141470180305131, + "f1_score": 0.7875647668393781, + "meteor": 0.22625546989189138, + "precision": 0.926829268292683, + "pred_md": "Indeed, one can easily show that the derivative at the grazing point y ∗ is\n\n\n\nSimilarly, all other points of the grazing orbit can be discussed.\n\nNext, differentiating (2.3) with y t ( ) again we obtain that\n\n\n\n\n\nwhere e 2 = (0 1) , T . Calculate the right hand side of (3.22) at the point ¯ = (¯ y y , y 1 ¯ ) 2 to obtain\n\n\n\nTo calculate the fraction ∂τ y ξ, ( ( 0 , y ∗ +∆ )) y ∂y 0 2 in (3.23) , we apply formula (3.10) for the transversal point ¯ = (¯ y y , y 1 ¯ ) 2 . The second component ∂τ y (¯) ∂y 0 2 takes the form ∂τ y (¯) ∂y 0 2 = 0 . This and formula (3.23) imply\n\n\n\nSimilar to (3.21) , one can obtain that\n\n\n\nJoining (3.21) and (3.25) , it can be obtained that\n\n\n\n17", + "recall": 0.6846846846846847, + "true_md": "Indeed, one can easily show that the derivative at the grazing point y ∗ is\n\nSimilarly, all other points of the grazing orbit can be discussed. Next, differentiating (2.3) with y ( t ) again we obtain that\n\nwhere e$_{2}$ = (0 , 1) $^{T}$. Calculate the right hand side of (3.22) at the point ¯ y = (¯ y$_{1}$, ¯ y$_{2}$ ) to obtain\n\nTo calculate the fraction ∂τ ( y ( ξ, 0 , y ∗ + Δ y )) ∂y 0 2 in (3.23) , we apply formula (3.10) for the transversal point ¯ y = (¯ y$_{1}$, ¯ y$_{2}$ ) . The second component ∂τ (¯ y ) ∂y 0 2 takes the form ∂τ (¯ y ) ∂y 0 2 = 0 . This and formula (3.23) imply\n\nSimilar to (3.21) , one can obtain that\n\nJoining (3.21) and (3.25) , it can be obtained that\n\n$$   − 1 0 . 001 − 1 . 8 exp(0 . 00025 π $_{)}$   . (3.21)$$\n\n$$∂W$_{i}$ ( y ) ∂y 0 2 = τ ( y ) ∫ θ$_{i}$ ∂f ( y ) ∂y ∂y ( s ) ∂y 0 2 ds + f ( y ( s )) ∂τ ( y ) ∂y 0 2 + J$_{y}$ ( y )( e$_{2}$ + f ( y ( s )) ∂τ ( y ) ∂y 0 2 ) + f ( y + J ( y )) ∂τ ( y ) ∂y 0 2 + θ$_{i}$ ∫ τ ( y ) ∂f ( y ( s ) + J ( y ( s ))) ∂x ∂y ( s ) ∂y 0 2 ds, (3.22)$$\n\n$$∂W$_{i}$ ( y ( ξ, 0 , y ∗ + Δ y )) ∂y 0 2 = f ( y ( ξ, 0 , y ∗ + Δ y )) ∂τ ( y ( ξ, 0 , y ∗ + Δ y )) ∂y 0 2 + J$_{y}$ ( y ( ξ, 0 $_{, y}$∗ + Δ y )) ( e$_{2}$ + f ( y ( ξ, 0 $_{, y}$∗ + Δ y ))) ∂τ ( y ( ξ, 0 , y ∗ + Δ y )) ∂y 0 2 ) + f ( y ( ξ, 0 , y ∗ + Δ y )) ∂τ ( y ( ξ, 0 , y ∗ + Δ y )) ∂y 0 2 . (3.23)$$\n\n$$∂W$_{i}$ (¯ y ) ∂y 0 2 =    0 − 2 R ¯ $_{y$_{2}$}$   . (3.24)$$\n\n$$∂W$_{i}$ ( y ∗ ) ∂y 0 2 =    0 $_{0}$   . (3.25)$$\n\n$$W$_{iy}$ ( $_{y}$∗$_{) =}$    − 1 0 0 . 001 − 1 . 8 exp(0 . 00025 π ) $_{0}$   . (3.26)$$\n\n17" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4880468236614438, + "doc_id": "cabe11aa1ac87581e76e71dc0572f63a1b73591d2efe7c873622b57a2958704a", + "edit_distance": 0.4861111111111111, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9214884446744787, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "23\n\nFig. 3. Comparison of all proposed schemes for L =7 cells, (a) Scenario A (b) Scenario B: Users are placed at 0.9 km from BS\n\nFig. 3. Comparison of all proposed schemes for L =7 cells, (a) Scenario A (b) Scenario B: Users are placed at 0.9 km from BS\n\nMarch 19, 2018\n\nDRAFT", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Fig. 3. Comparison of all proposed schemes for L =7 cells, (a) Scenario A (b) Scenario B: Users are placed at 0.9 km from BS\n\nDRAFT\n\nMarch 19, 2018\n\n23" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.29635718312199255, + "doc_id": "feadf74267dce728b09d543f11201291a0398fd4f1332aa1b921199756dda209", + "edit_distance": 0.5427461139896373, + "f1_score": 0.9090909090909091, + "meteor": 0.4687158701952979, + "precision": 0.9602649006622517, + "pred_md": "March 19, 2018\n\nDRAFT\n\n14\n\nlocally made at each BS and do not need collaboration. Once the allocations are decided, each cell shares them with all other interfering cells. The GP based optimal powers in (7) can then be evaluated in a distributed way using dual decomposition methods by first performing the log transformation of the variables, i.e., ln p n,k,l = ˜ p n,k,l and ln p n,k,j = ˜ p n,k,j , then adding auxiliary variable ln z n,lj = ˜ z n,lj where z n,lj = p n,k,j in order to transfer the coupling in the objective to coupling in the constraints [14]. For given allocations, the problem in (7) can thus be written in a distributed way as follows:\n\n/negationslash\n\n\n\nz\n\nn,lj\n\n=\n\np\n\nn,k,j\n\n,\n\n∀\n\nn,\n\n∀\n\nl\n\nSince the computational complexity of (15) is high as it has LK power constraints and LKN variables, we present the dual decomposition of (14) which is more suitable for practical scenarios and has a lower computational complexity. Moreover, the objective function in (15) not only depends on the powers of local users p n,k,l but also on the power of users sharing the same subcarrier in neighboring cells p n,k,j . Thus, in order to minimize the objective in (15), each BS requires the knowledge of interfering gains and interfering transmit powers, that may lead to significant overhead to exchange control information. Thus, in order to obtain a practical distributed solution, we keep a local copy of each of the effective received powers i.e., z n,lj = g n,k,jl p n,k,j [14]. (14) can then be formulated in a distributed way as follows:\n\n/negationslash\n\n", + "recall": 0.8630952380952381, + "true_md": "locally made at each BS and do not need collaboration. Once the allocations are decided, each cell shares them with all other interfering cells. The GP based optimal powers in (7) can then be evaluated in a distributed way using dual decomposition methods by first performing the log transformation of the variables, i.e., ln p$_{n,k,l}$ = ˜ p$_{n,k,l}$ and ln p$_{n,k,j}$ = ˜ p$_{n,k,j}$ , then adding auxiliary variable ln z$_{n,lj}$ = ˜ z$_{n,lj}$ where z$_{n,lj}$ = p$_{n,k,j}$ in order to transfer the coupling in the objective to coupling in the constraints [14]. For given allocations, the problem in (7) can thus be written in a distributed way as follows:\n\n14\n\n$$minimize ˜ z$_{n,lj}$, ˜ p$_{n,k,l}$ L ∑ l =1 N ∑ n =1 log$_{2}$ ( σ 2 + ∑ L j =1 ,j ̸ = $_{l}$g$_{n,k,jl}$ e ˜ z$_{n,lj}$ e ˜ $^{p$_{n,k,l}$}$h$_{n,k,l}$ ) subject to N ∑ n =1 e ˜ p$_{n,k,l}$ ≤ P$_{k,}$$_{max}$ , ∀ k, ∀ l z$_{n,lj}$ = p$_{n,k,j}$, ∀ n, ∀ l (15)$$\n\nSince the computational complexity of (15) is high as it has LK power constraints and LKN variables, we present the dual decomposition of (14) which is more suitable for practical scenarios and has a lower computational complexity. Moreover, the objective function in (15) not only depends on the powers of local users p$_{n,k,l}$ but also on the power of users sharing the same subcarrier in neighboring cells p$_{n,k,j}$ . Thus, in order to minimize the objective in (15), each BS requires the knowledge of interfering gains and interfering transmit powers, that may lead to significant overhead to exchange control information. Th us, in order to obtain a practical distributed solution, we keep a local copy of each of the effective received powers i.e., z$_{n,lj}$ = g$_{n,k,jl}$p$_{n,k,j}$ [14]. (14) can then be formulated in a distributed way as follows:\n\n$$minimize ˜ z$_{n,lj}$, ˜ p$_{n,k,l}$ L ∑ l =1 log$_{2}$ ( σ 2 + ∑ L j =1 ,j ̸ = $_{l}$e ˜ z$_{n,lj}$ e ˜ $^{p$_{n,k,l}$}$h$_{n,k,l}$ ) subject to e ˜ p$_{n,k,l}$ ≤ P$_{n,k,l,}$$_{eq}$ , ∀ l ˜ z$_{n,lj}$ = ˜ g$_{n,k,jl}$ + ˜ p$_{n,k,j}$ (16)$$\n\nDRAFT\n\nMarch 19, 2018" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.696228733596582, + "doc_id": "aff6534efc52d8db8f4c02d847f8156f5b0cba75e619b365131700c9b995daae", + "edit_distance": 0.21320754716981133, + "f1_score": 0.9803921568627451, + "meteor": 0.8151428307739059, + "precision": 0.9868421052631579, + "pred_md": "glyph[negationslash]\n\nS = ⊕ a ∈ G S a , as a group under the addition of S , such that S S b c ⊆ S bc for all b, c ∈ G . The subgroups S a , a ∈ G , are called the homogeneous components, the elements of ∪ a ∈ G S a are called the homogeneous elements, and every element is a sum of finitely many homogeneous elements. We let ∂s be the unique element of G such that s ∈ S ∂s for any nonzero homogeneous s ∈ S . The support of S is the set Supp G S = { a ∈ G : S a = 0 . The grading is called finite if Supp } G S is a finite set.\n\nAn important type of matrix algebra grading is a good grading (for example, see references [2], [3], and [4]). This definition extends easily to incidence algebras (see [4], [6], and [7]). In section 2 we state the definition of balanced relation introduced by Abrams (see [1]) and go over the construction of generalized incidence rings. Good semigroup gradings of generalized incidence rings are defined in section 3. Theorems 3.2 and 3.4 are fundamental for our constructions since they categorize good gradings of generalized incidence rings in terms of homomorphisms from the relations to the semigroup. Theorem 3.8 shows how to construct good semigroup gradings of incidence algebras over minimally connected partial orders.\n\nSuppose S = ⊕ a ∈ G S a and T = ⊕ a ∈ G T a are G -graded rings. A homomorphism of G -graded rings is a ring homomorphism h : S → T such that h S ( a ) ⊆ T a for all a ∈ Supp G S . An isomorphism which is a homomorphism of G -graded rings is called an isomorphism of G -graded rings. In the case of matrix algebras there are gradings which are not good gradings but are isomorphic to good gradings (see [3, Example 1.3]). Isomorphic gradings for good group gradings of incidence algebras over partial orders have been studied by Miller and Spiegel (see [6]).\n\nIn section 4 we state the definitions of compression maps and stable relations\n\n2", + "recall": 0.974025974025974, + "true_md": "S = ⊕ a ∈ $_{G}$S$_{a}$ , as a group under the addition of S , such that S$_{b}$S$_{c}$ ⊆ S$_{bc}$ for all b,c ∈ G . The subgroups S$_{a}$ , a ∈ G , are called the homogeneous components, the elements of ∪$_{a}$$\\_{∈}$$_{G}$ S$_{a}$ are called the homogeneous elements, and every element is a sum of finitely many homogeneous elements. We let ∂s be the unique element of G such that s ∈ S$_{∂s}$ for any nonzero homogeneous s ∈ S . The support of S is the set Supp$_{G}$ S = { a ∈ G : S$_{a}$ ̸ = 0 } . The grading is called finite if Supp$_{G}$ S is a finite set.\n\nAn important type of matrix algebra grading is a good grading (for example, see references [2], [3], and [4]). This definition extends easily to incidence algebras (see [4], [6], and [7]). In section 2 we state the definition of balanced relation introduced by Abrams (see [1]) and go over the construction of generalized incidence rings. Good semigroup gradings of generalized incidence rings are defined in section 3. Theorems 3.2 and 3.4 are fundamental for our constructions since they categorize good gradings of generalized incidence rings in terms of homomorphisms from the relations to the semigroup. Theorem 3.8 shows how to construct good semigroup gradings of incidence algebras over minimally connected partial orders.\n\nSuppose S = ⊕ a ∈ $_{G}$S$_{a}$ and T = ⊕ a ∈ $_{G}$T$_{a}$ are G -graded rings. A homomorphism of G -graded rings is a ring homomorphism h : S → T such that h ( S$_{a}$ ) ⊆ T$_{a}$ for all a ∈ Supp$_{G}$ S . An isomorphism which is a homomorphism of G -graded rings is called an isomorphism of G -graded rings. In the case of matrix algebras there are gradings which are not good gradings but are isomorphic to good gradings (see [3, Example 1.3]). Isomorphic gradings for good group gradings of incidence algebras over partial orders have been studied by Miller and Spiegel (see [6]).\n\nIn section 4 we state the definitions of compression maps and stable relations\n\n2" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.41554738929629825, + "doc_id": "d33d2def0c5f30170f9e11c00ed791206eacdcba49019dd3be4a45961f584f39", + "edit_distance": 0.4146341463414634, + "f1_score": 0.9130434782608695, + "meteor": 0.5521185166409098, + "precision": 0.9090909090909091, + "pred_md": "the linear system (3.14a), one can easily conclude that the complement is a continuous dynamical system [23]. Thus, to verify the dynamics for the whole system, one need to analyze it in the region G. This set is bounded, consequently for solutions in it conditions ( C 8) and ( C 9) are fulfilled and by Theorem 2.1, they admit B -sequences and continuation property.\n\nConsider a function ζ ( y 2 ) : [ y 2 ( θ , 2 0 , Q 2 ) , y 2 ( θ , 1 0 , P )] → [ y 2 ( θ , 2 0 , Q 2 ) , y 2 ( θ , 1 0 , P )] such that it is continuously differentiable, satisfies ζ ( y 2 ) = -R y 2 2 in a neighborhood of y 2 = 0 and is the identity at the boundary points, i.e. ζ ( y 2 ( θ , 1 0 , P )) = y 2 ( θ , 1 0 , P ) and ζ ( y 2 ( θ , 1 0 , P )) = y 2 ( θ , 1 0 , P ) . It is easily seen that such function exists. On the basis of this discussion, let us introduce the following system,\n\n\n\nIt is apparent that system (3.16) is equivalent to (3.14) near the orbit of periodic solution Ψ( ) t . That is, they have the same trajectories there.\n\nSpecifying (2.1) for (3.16), it is easy to obtain that Φ( y , y 1 2 ) = ˜ ( Φ y , y 1 2 ) = ( y 1 -exp(0 00025 . π )) y , 1 f ( y , y 1 2 ) = ( y , 2 -y 1 +0 001 . y 2 ) and J y ( ) = ( y , ζ 1 ( y 2 )) .\n\n/negationslash\n\nNow, we will verify that system (3.16) defines a K -smooth discontinuous flow. First, condition ( C 1) is verified since ∇ Φ ( 1 y ) = ∇ Φ ( 2 y ) = (1 , 0) = 0 , for all y ∈ D. The jump function J y ( ) = ( y , ζ 1 ( y 2 )) is continuously differentiable function. So, condition ( C 2) is valid. It is true that Γ ∩ ˜ Γ ⊆ ∂ Γ ∩ ˜ Γ ∂ . Inequalities 〈∇ Φ ( 1 y , f ) ( y ) 〉 = (1 0) ( 〈 , , y , 2 -y 1 +0 001 . y 2 ) 〉 = y 2 = 0 and 〈∇ Φ ( 2 y , f ) ( y ) 〉 = (1 0) ( 〈 , , y , 2 -y 1 + 0 001 . y 2 ) 〉 = y 2 = 0 , if y ∈ Γ \\ ∂ Γ , validate the condition ( C 4) . Moreover, 〈∇ ˜ Φ ( 1 y , f ) ( y ) 〉 = (1 0) ( 〈 , , y , 2 -y 1 + 0 001 . y 2 ) 〉 = y 2 = 0 and 〈∇ ˜ Φ ( 2 y , f ) ( y ) 〉 = (1 0) ( 〈 , , y , 2 -y 1 +0 001 . y 2 ) 〉 = y 2 = 0 , if y ∈ ˜ Γ \\ ∂ ˜ Γ . Conditions ( C 6) and ( C 7) hold as the function ζ is such defined. Thus, conditions ( C 1) -( C 10) have been verified. Consequently, the system (3.14) defines the K -smooth discontinuous flow for all motions except the grazing ones. To complete the discussion, one need to linearize the system near the grazing solutions. First, we proceed with the linearization around the grazing periodic orbit (3.15).\n\n/negationslash\n\n/negationslash\n\nThe solution, Ψ( ) t has two discontinuity moments θ 1 = π 2 and θ 2 = ω in the interval [0 , ω . ] The corresponding discontinuity points are of ( γ ) -and ( α ) -types, respectively. Next, we will linearize the system at these points. The linearization at the second point exists [1] and the details of this will be analyzed in the next example. This time, we will focus on the grazing point y ∗ .\n\nFirst, we assume that y t ( ) = y t, ( 0 , y ∗ +∆ ) ∆ y , y = (∆ y , 1 ∆ y 2 ) is not a grazing solution. Moreover, the solution intersects the line Γ 1 at time t = ξ near t = θ 1 as time increases. The meeting point ¯ = (¯ y y , y 1 ¯ ) = ( 2 y 1 ( ξ, 0 ( , y ∗ +∆ )) y , y 2 ( ξ, 0 ( , y ∗ +∆ )) y , is transversal one. It is clear ¯ y 1 = exp(0 00025 . π ) and ¯ y 2 > . 0 In order to find a linearization at the moment t = θ , i we use formula (2.3) for y t , ( ) and find\n\n15\n\n/negationslash\n\n/negationslash", + "recall": 0.9170305676855895, + "true_md": "the linear system (3.14a), one can easily conclude that the complement is a continuous dynamical system [23]. Thus, to verify the dynamics for the whole system, one need to analyze it in the region G. This set is bounded, consequently for solutions in it conditions ( C 8) and ( C 9) are fulfilled and by Theorem 2.1, they admit B − sequences and continuation property.\n\nConsider a function ζ ( y$_{2}$ ) : [ y$_{2}$ ( θ$_{2}$, 0 , Q$_{2}$ ) , y$_{2}$ ( θ$_{1}$, 0 , P )] → [ y$_{2}$ ( θ$_{2}$, 0 , Q$_{2}$ ) , y$_{2}$ ( θ$_{1}$, 0 , P )] such that it is continuously differentiable, satisfies ζ ( y$_{2}$ ) = − R$_{2}$y$_{2}$ in a neighborhood of y$_{2}$ = 0 and is the identity at the boundary points, i.e. ζ ( y$_{2}$ ( θ$_{1}$, 0 , P )) = y$_{2}$ ( θ$_{1}$, 0 , P ) and ζ ( y$_{2}$ ( θ$_{1}$, 0 , P )) = y$_{2}$ ( θ$_{1}$, 0 , P ) . It is easily seen that such function exists. On the basis of this discussion, let us introduce the following system,\n\nIt is apparent that system (3.16) is equivalent to (3.14) near the orbit of periodic solution Ψ( t ) . That is, they have the same trajectories there.\n\nSpecifying (2.1) for (3.16), it is easy to obtain that Φ( y$_{1}$, y$_{2}$ ) = ˜ Φ( y$_{1}$, y$_{2}$ ) = ( y$_{1}$ − exp(0 . 00025 π )) y$_{1}$, f ( y$_{1}$, y$_{2}$ ) = ( y$_{2}$, − y$_{1}$ + 0 . 001 y$_{2}$ ) and J ( y ) = ( y$_{1}$, ζ ( y$_{2}$ )) .\n\nNow, we will verify that system (3.16) defines a K − smooth discontinuous flow. First, condition ( C 1) is verified since ∇ Φ$_{1}$( y ) = ∇ Φ$_{2}$( y ) = (1 , 0) ̸ = 0 , for all y ∈ D. The jump function J ( y ) = ( y$_{1}$, ζ ( y$_{2}$ )) is continuously differentiable function. So, condition ( C 2) is valid. It is true that Γ ∩ ˜ Γ ⊆ ∂ Γ ∩ ˜ ∂ Γ . In- equalities 〈∇ Φ$_{1}$( y ) , f ( y ) 〉 = 〈 (1 , 0) , ( y$_{2}$, − y$_{1}$ + 0 . 001 y$_{2}$ ) 〉 = y$_{2}$ ̸ = 0 and 〈∇ Φ$_{2}$( y ) , f ( y ) 〉 = 〈 (1 , 0) , ( y$_{2}$, − y$_{1}$ + 0 . 001 y$_{2}$ ) 〉 = y$_{2}$ ̸ = 0 , if y ∈ Γ \\ ∂ Γ , validate the condition ( C 4) . Moreover, 〈∇ ˜ Φ$_{1}$( y ) , f ( y ) 〉 = 〈 (1 , 0) , ( y$_{2}$, − y$_{1}$ + 0 . 001 y$_{2}$ ) 〉 = y$_{2}$ ̸ = 0 and 〈∇ ˜ Φ$_{2}$( y ) , f ( y ) 〉 = 〈 (1 , 0) , ( y$_{2}$, − y$_{1}$ + 0 . 001 y$_{2}$ ) 〉 = y$_{2}$ ̸ = 0 , if y ∈ ˜ Γ \\ ∂ ˜ Γ . Conditions ( C 6) and ( C 7) hold as the function ζ is such defined. Thus, conditions ( C 1) − ( C 10) have been verified. Consequently, the system (3.14) defines the K − smooth discontinuous flow for all motions except the grazing ones. To complete the discussion, one need to linearize the system near the grazing solutions. First, we proceed with the linearization around the grazing periodic orbit (3.15).\n\nThe solution, Ψ( t ) has two discontinuity moments θ$_{1}$ = π 2 and θ$_{2}$ = ω in the interval [0 , ω ] . The corresponding discontinuity points are of ( γ ) − and ( α ) − types, respectively. Next, we will linearize the system at these points. The linearization at the second point exists [1] and the details of this will be analyzed in the next example. This time, we will focus on the grazing point y ∗ .\n\nFirst, we assume that y ( t ) = y ( t, 0 , y ∗ + Δ y ) , Δ y = (Δ y$_{1}$, Δ y$_{2}$ ) is not a grazing solution. Moreover, the solution intersects the line Γ$_{1}$ at time t = ξ near t = θ$_{1}$ as time increases. The meeting point ¯ y = (¯ y$_{1}$, ¯ y$_{2}$ ) = ( y$_{1}$ ( ξ, 0 , ( y ∗ + Δ y )) , y$_{2}$ ( ξ, 0 , ( y ∗ + Δ y )) , is transversal one. It is clear ¯ y$_{1}$ = exp(0 . 00025 π ) and ¯ y$_{2}$ > 0 . In order to find a linearization at the moment t = θ$_{i}$, we use formula (2.3) for y ( t ) , and find\n\n15\n\n$$y ′ 1 = y$_{2}$, y ′ 2 = − y$_{1}$ + 0 . 001 y$_{2}$, Δ y$_{2}$ | $^{y}$∈ Γ = ζ ( y$_{2}$ ) − y$_{2}$. (3.16)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.47711313522003784, + "doc_id": "90ff91d8619dcee052858c201074f8a3a7eccbfef6af9f189004e38d07e7a600", + "edit_distance": 0.8613861386138614, + "f1_score": 0.9411764705882353, + "meteor": 0.6719896920071491, + "precision": 0.9795918367346939, + "pred_md": "arXiv:1503.05621v1 [stat.CO] 19 Mar 2015\n\n## Automated Parameter Blocking for Efficient Markov-Chain Monte Carlo Sampling\n\nDaniel Turek ∗ 1 2 , , Perry de Valpine , 2\n\nChristopher J. Paciorek , Clifford Anderson-Bergman 1 1 2 ,\n\n20 March 2015\n\n∗ Corresponding Author\n\ndturek@berkeley.edu\n\n1 Department of Statistics\n\nUniversity of California, Berkeley\n\n2 Department of Environmental Science, Policy, and Management\n\nUniversity of California, Berkeley", + "recall": 0.9056603773584906, + "true_md": "# Automated Parameter Blocking for Efficient Markov-Chain Monte Carlo Sampling\n\n20 March 2015\n\n$^{∗}$Corresponding Author dturek@berkeley.edu\n\n$^{1}$Department of Statistics University of California, Berkeley\n\n$^{2}$Department of Environmental Science, Policy, and Management University of California, Berkeley\n\narXiv:1503.05621v1 [stat.CO] 19 Mar 2015\n\nDaniel Turek ∗ 1 , $^{2}$, Perry de Valpine$^{2}$, Christopher J. Paciorek $^{1}$, Clifford Anderson-Bergman1 , 2" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4021064023062226, + "doc_id": "6348c17e44c15ba527ff23dd0d4a2e7e23f4f32a0a790fc92950504da12db925", + "edit_distance": 0.44362486828240255, + "f1_score": 0.9249249249249248, + "meteor": 0.5759993980758443, + "precision": 0.9058823529411765, + "pred_md": "ON THE APPLICATIONS OF CYCLOTOMIC FIELDS IN INTRODUCTORY NUMBER THEORY\n\n9\n\nBy Lemma 3,\n\n\n\nAnd so, replacing x by 1, we get\n\n\n\nSince f ( x , g ) ( x ) ∈ Z [ x ], x , y 1 1 ∈ Z , and we can see that Lemma 3 relates to Pell's Equation insofar as it gives us a pair ( x , y 1 1 ) that verifies an equation very similar to (3.1).\n\n4 p = x 2 1 -p y ∗ 2 1 ⇒ x 2 1 = 4 p + p y ∗ 2 1 ⇒ p | x 2 1 ⇒ p | x 1 since p is prime. So letting pξ 1 = x 1 , we can rewrite equation (3.2) as 4 p = p ξ 2 2 1 -p y ∗ 2 1 , and so, dividing by p ,\n\n\n\nWe now analyze q 1 ( x ) and q -1 ( x ) to obtain some insight as to the values x 1 and y 1 . x 2 ≡ ( p -x ) 2 ( p ), so all quadratic residues are in { x 2 ( p ) : 1 ≤ x ≤ p -1 2 } . We can therefore reorder the terms in q 1 ( x ) and write it as 2 p -1 2 ∏ k =1 ( x -ζ k 2 ), and so q 1 (1) = 2 p -1 2 ∏ k =1 (1 -ζ k 2 ).\n\nThe value of p ∗ depends on the value of p modulo 4 so we will consider the two cases separately for simplicity.\n\n## Case 1: p ≡ 1 (4).\n\nThen (3.3) becomes pξ 2 1 -y 2 1 = 4 (or, to emphasize the similarity to Pell's Equation, y 2 1 -pξ 2 1 = -4).\n\nWe then have two subcases.\n\nIf p ≡ 1 (8), then y 2 1 -ξ 2 1 ≡ 4 (8). Trivially y 1 and ξ 1 must either be both odd or both even. But 1 2 ≡ 3 2 ≡ 5 2 ≡ 7 2 ≡ 1 (8), so if y 1 and ξ 1 were both odd we would have y 2 1 -ξ 2 1 ≡ 0 (8) ⇒ contradiction. It follows that y 1 and ξ 1 are both even, and we can thus write y 2 = y 1 2 , ξ 2 = ξ 1 2 ∈ Z . Then y 2 -pξ 2 2 = -1. We can use the fact that ( √ p ) 2 ∈ Z to get rid of the minus sign in front of 1. y 2 2 -pξ 2 2 = -1 yields ( y 2 - √ pξ 2 )( y 2 + √ pξ 2 ) = -1, and so ( y 2 - √ pξ 2 ) 2 ( y 2 + √ pξ 2 ) 2 = 1. But ( y 2 ± √ pξ 2 ) 2 = a ± b √ p , a, b ∈ Z . Taking ( x, y ) = ( a, b ),", + "recall": 0.9447852760736196, + "true_md": "By Lemma 3,\n\n$$4 m$_{p}$ ( x ) = q$_{1}$ ( x ) q − $_{1}$( x ) = f ( x ) 2 − ( p ∗ ) g ( x ) 2$$\n\nAnd so, replacing x by 1, we get\n\n$$(3.2) 4 p = x 2 1 − p ∗ y 2 1 where x$_{1}$ = f (1), y$_{1}$ = g (1)$$\n\nSince f ( x ) , g ( x ) ∈ Z [ x ], x$_{1}$, y$_{1}$ ∈ Z , and we can see that Lemma 3 relates to Pell’s Equation insofar as it gives us a pair ( x$_{1}$, y$_{1}$ ) that verifies an equation very similar to (3.1). 4 p = x 2 1 − p ∗ y 2 1 ⇒ x 2 1 = 4 p + p ∗ y 2 1 ⇒ p | x 2 1 ⇒ p | x$_{1}$ since p is prime. So letting pξ$_{1}$ = x$_{1}$ , we can rewrite equation (3.2) as 4 p = p $^{2}$ξ 2 1 − p ∗ y 2 $_{1}$, and so, dividing by p ,\n\n$$(3.3) pξ 2 1 − ( − 1) $^{p}$− 1 2 y 2 1 = 4$$\n\nWe now analyze q$_{1}$ ( x ) and q − $_{1}$( x ) to obtain some insight as to the values x$_{1}$ and y$_{1}$ . x 2 ≡ ( p − x ) 2 ( p ), so all quadratic residues are in { x 2 ( p ) : 1 ≤ x ≤ $^{p}$− 1 2 } . We can therefore reorder the terms in q$_{1}$ ( x ) and write it as 2 $^{p}$− 1 2 ∏ k =1 ( x − ζ k $^{2}$), and so q$_{1}$ (1) = 2 $^{p}$− 1 2 ∏ k =1 (1 − ζ k $^{2}$). The value of p ∗ depends on the value of p modulo 4 so we will consider the two cases separately for simplicity.\n\nON THE APPLICATIONS OF CYCLOTOMIC FIELDS IN INTRODUCTORY NUMBER THEORY 9\n\n≡ Then (3.3) becomes pξ 2 1 − y 2 1 = 4 (or, to emphasize the similarity to Pell’s Equation, 2\n\n$$y 2 1 − pξ 2 1 = − 4).$$\n\nCase 1: p ≡ 1 (4).\n\nWe then have two subcases.\n\nIf p ≡ 1 (8), then y 2 1 − ξ 2 1 ≡ 4 (8). Trivially y$_{1}$ and ξ$_{1}$ must either be both odd or both even. But 1 2 ≡ 3 2 ≡ 5 2 ≡ 7 2 ≡ 1 (8), so if y$_{1}$ and ξ$_{1}$ were both odd we would have y 2 1 − ξ 2 1 ≡ 0 (8) ⇒ contradiction. It follows that y$_{1}$ and ξ$_{1}$ are both even, and we can thus write y$_{2}$ = y$_{1}$ 2 , ξ$_{2}$ = ξ$_{1}$ 2 ∈ Z . Then y$_{2}$ − pξ 2 2 = − 1. We can use the fact that ( √ p ) 2 ∈ Z to get rid of the minus sign in front of 1. y 2 − pξ 2 2 = − 1 yields ( y$_{2}$ − √ pξ$_{2}$ )( y$_{2}$ + √ pξ$_{2}$ ) = − 1, and so ( y$_{2}$ − √ pξ$_{2}$ ) $^{2}$( y$_{2}$ + √ pξ$_{2}$ ) 2 = 1. But ( y$_{2}$ ± √ pξ$_{2}$ ) 2 = a ± b √ p , a, b ∈ Z . Taking ( x, y ) = ( a, b )," + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9695399724711528, + "doc_id": "50ba1cc97bc9a9eb145456326e3e47e5faa9886cbd6e4ea806187369ca99eafb", + "edit_distance": 0.033738191632928474, + "f1_score": 0.9787878787878788, + "meteor": 0.985498669076267, + "precision": 0.9817629179331308, + "pred_md": "propose to use only Twitter for collecting out-of-domain data for ASR language models for conversational speech.\n\nWe have several reasons to prefer searching Twitter for data instead of the whole Internet. First, Twitter has a semistructured format that makes it easy to select the user generated content and ignore ads, boilerplate text and other unwanted text. Second, the writing style is somewhat conversational which is a better match for the conversational speech domain than other types of writing often found on the Internet. Third, since Twitter is used all over the world, we will likely be able to find good data for most of the languages that we care about. Lastly, Twitter provides a friendly API that makes it easy to access a lot of data quickly. When working under a time constraint, we were able to collect as much as 6 million sentences from low resource languages in under 24 hours.\n\nOf course, Twitter text is notoriously noisy in that tweets often contain abbreviated or misspelled forms of words, as well as URLs, hashtags, usernames, etc. In this work, we describe simple language-independent methods for handling these that require filtering out a large amount of data but lead to surprisingly useful text. In fact, we find that Twitter text is more useful for learning word classes than the original indomain text. The word classes can be used to achieve large reductions in perplexity for low-resource language models. Further, we introduce a prioritizing scheme for downloading text from 'useful' users that results in a significant improvement in vocabulary coverage over random selection.\n\nIn the remainder of the paper, we begin by summarizing prior work on leveraging text harvested from the web in language modeling in Section II, to provide the context for our work. Next, in Section III, we describe our initial process for collecting data from Twitter and two methods for using the data in language modeling. Section IV contains details of experiments demonstrating the effectiveness of the collection and modeling methods. Finally, in Section V we describe a\n\n2\n\nmethod for prioritizing the crawling queue and how it can be applied to improve the utility of additional collected data.\n\n## II. RELATED WORK\n\nThis work brings together two strategies for improving language models for conversational speech in limited training data scenarios - web text collection and class language models - but changes key elements in the particular approach for both.\n\nAs mentioned previously, there have been several efforts aimed at using text gathered from the web. Early work used the number of search results returned by the search engine as a proxy for the n-gram probability [2], but this method does not capture the domain characteristics of the target task. The penalty for domain-mismatch is quite severe. When working with conversational speech, a small set of conversation transcripts makes for better training data than 100 times as much newswire text [3]. Other studies find that even speech transcripts can be of little utility if there is a formality mismatch, e.g. using broadcast news as out-of-domain data for a conversational task.\n\nA series of papers used frequent in-domain n-grams as queries to Google for collecting text [4], [5], [6] and perplexity filtering for improving the match to the target domain. Good results were obtained on a variety of conversational speech recognition tasks by several sites. Variations on this approach changing the query generation and filtering stages have also been explored [7], [8], [9] or by using cross-entropy rather than perplexity as a data selection criterion [10], [11]. Recent work has shown reduced perplexity and word error rate for a task of transcribing university YouTube videos [12]. Unfortunately, this method was not effective for the low-resource languages we are working with, perhaps because of the specific choice of languages. Other recent alternatives have used targeted text collections, e.g. broadcast news transcripts [1] and RSS feeds [13].", + "recall": 0.9758308157099698, + "true_md": "2\n\npropose to use only Twitter for collecting out-of-domain data for ASR language models for conversational speech.\n\nWe have several reasons to prefer searching Twitter for data instead of the whole Internet. First, Twitter has a semi- structured format that makes it easy to select the user generated content and ignore ads, boilerplate text and other unwanted text. Second, the writing style is somewhat conversational which is a better match for the conversational speech domain than other types of writing often found on the Internet. Third, since Twitter is used all over the world, we will likely be able to find good data for most of the languages that we care about. Lastly, Twitter provides a friendly API that makes it easy to access a lot of data quickly. When working under a time constraint, we were able to collect as much as 6 million sentences from low resource languages in under 24 hours.\n\nOf course, Twitter text is notoriously noisy in that tweets often contain abbreviated or misspelled forms of words, as well as URLs, hashtags, usernames, etc. In this work, we describe simple language-independent methods for handling these that require filtering out a large amount of data but lead to surprisingly useful text. In fact, we find that Twitter text is more useful for learning word classes than the original in- domain text. The word classes can be used to achieve large reductions in perplexity for low-resource language models. Further, we introduce a prioritizing scheme for downloading text from “useful” users that results in a significant improve- ment in vocabulary coverage over random selection.\n\nIn the remainder of the paper, we begin by summarizing prior work on leveraging text harvested from the web in language modeling in Section II, to provide the context for our work. Next, in Section III, we describe our initial process for collecting data from Twitter and two methods for using the data in language modeling. Section IV contains details of experiments demonstrating the effectiveness of the collection and modeling methods. Finally, in Section V we describe a\n\nmethod for prioritizing the crawling queue and how it can be applied to improve the utility of additional collected data.\n\nThis work brings together two strategies for improving language models for conversational speech in limited training data scenarios – web text collection and class language models – but changes key elements in the particular approach for both.\n\nAs mentioned previously, there have been several efforts aimed at using text gathered from the web. Early work used the number of search results returned by the search engine as a proxy for the n-gram probability [2], but this method does not capture the domain characteristics of the target task. The penalty for domain-mismatch is quite severe. When working with conversational speech, a small set of conversation transcripts makes for better training data than 100 times as much newswire text [3]. Other studies find that even speech transcripts can be of little utility if there is a formality mismatch, e.g. using broadcast news as out-of-domain data for a conversational task.\n\nA series of papers used frequent in-domain n-grams as queries to Google for collecting text [4], [5], [6] and perplexity filtering for improving the match to the target domain. Good results were obtained on a variety of conversational speech recognition tasks by several sites. Variations on this approach changing the query generation and filtering stages have also been explored [7], [8], [9] or by using cross-entropy rather than perplexity as a data selection criterion [10], [11]. Recent work has shown reduced perplexity and word error rate for a task of transcribing university YouTube videos [12]. Unfortunately, this method was not effective for the low-resource languages we are working with, perhaps because of the specific choice of languages. Other recent alternatives have used targeted text collections, e.g. broadcast news transcripts [1] and RSS feeds [13].\n\n## II. RELATED WORK" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.04093711183772241, + "doc_id": "21b77809cef49b3a2ec44e6aa8fd9327a8cca187667d2437c70ae2e225446a24", + "edit_distance": 0.8237986270022883, + "f1_score": 0.8503937007874015, + "meteor": 0.22403985767760592, + "precision": 0.9642857142857143, + "pred_md": "economic examples. Also, I provide intuition regarding improvement of the identification region via graphical illustrations.\n\n## 3.1 Characterization\n\nThe following theorem is the main result of the paper.\n\nTheorem 1 The sharp lower and upper bounds on the DTE under Pr(( Y , Y 0 1 ) ∈ C ) = 1 are characterized as follows: for any δ ∈ R ,\n\n\n\nwhere\n\nwhere\n\n\n\n\n\n{ A k } ∞ k = -∞ and { B k } ∞ k = -∞ are both monotonically decreasing sequences of open sets,\n\n\n\n\n\n## Proof. See Appendix A.\n\nTheorem 1 is obtained by applying Kantorovich duality in Lemma 2 to the optimal transportation problems (9) and (10). Note that the sharpness of the bounds is also confirmed by Lemma 2. Since characterization of the upper bound is similar to that of the lower bound, I maintain the focus of the discussion on the lower bound. The minimization problem (9) can be written in the dual formulation as follows: for λ = ∞ ,\n\n\n\n17", + "recall": 0.7605633802816901, + "true_md": "economic examples. Also, I provide intuition regarding improvement of the identification region via graphical illustrations.\n\nThe following theorem is the main result of the paper.\n\nTheorem 1 The sharp lower and upper bounds on the DTE under Pr (( Y$_{0}$, Y$_{1}$ ) ∈ C ) = 1 are characterized as follows: for any δ ∈$_{R}$ ,\n\nwhere\n\nwhere\n\n{ A$_{k}$ } ∞ k = −∞ and { B$_{k}$ } ∞ k = −∞ are both monotonically decreasing sequences of open sets,\n\nProof. See Appendix A.\n\nTheorem 1 is obtained by applying Kantorovich duality in Lemma 2 to the optimal transportation problems (9) and (10). Note that the sharpness of the bounds is also confirmed by Lemma 2. Since characterization of the upper bound is similar to that of the lower bound, I maintain the focus of the discussion on the lower bound. The minimization problem (9) can be written in the dual formulation as follows: for λ = ∞ ,\n\n$$inf π ∈ Π( µ$_{0}$,µ$_{1}$ ) ∫ { 1 { y$_{1}$ − y$_{0}$ < δ } + λ (1 − 1$_{C}$ ( y$_{0}$, y$_{1}$ )) } dπ = sup ( ϕ,ψ ) ∈ Φ$_{c}$ ( ∫ ϕ ( y$_{0}$ ) dµ$_{0}$ +$^{∫}$ ψ ( y$_{1}$ ) dµ$_{1}$$^{)}$ ,$$\n\n$$A C k = { y$_{1}$ ∈$_{R}$|∃ y$_{0}$ ∈ A$_{k}$ s.t. y$_{1}$ − y$_{0}$ ≥ δ and ( y$_{0}$, y$_{1}$ ) ∈ C } ∪ { y$_{1}$ ∈$_{R}$|∃ y$_{0}$ ∈ A$_{k}$$_{+1}$ s.t. y$_{1}$ − y$_{0}$ < δ and ( y$_{0}$, y$_{1}$ ) ∈ C } , B C k = { y$_{1}$ ∈$_{R}$|∃ y$_{0}$ ∈ B$_{k}$ s.t. y$_{1}$ − y$_{0}$ ≤ δ and ( y$_{0}$, y$_{1}$ ) ∈ C } ∪ { y$_{1}$ ∈$_{R}$|∃ y$_{0}$ ∈ B$_{k}$$_{+1}$ s.t. y$_{1}$ − y$_{0}$ > δ and ( y$_{0}$, y$_{1}$ ) ∈ C } for any integer k.$$\n\n$$F L Δ ( δ ) = sup { A$_{k}$ } ∞ k = −∞ ∞ ∑ k = −∞ max $^{{}$µ$_{0}$ ( A$_{k}$ ) − µ$_{1}$ $^{(}$A C k $^{)}$, 0 $^{}}$, (11) F U Δ ( δ ) = 1 − sup { B$_{k}$ } ∞ k = −∞ ∞ ∑ k = −∞ max $^{{}$µ$_{0}$ ( B$_{k}$ ) − µ$_{1}$ $^{(}$B C k $^{)}$, 0 $^{}}$,$$\n\n$$F L Δ ( δ ) ≤ F$_{Δ}$ ( δ ) ≤ F U Δ ( δ ) ,$$\n\n## 3.1 Characterization\n\n17" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8049506989930819, + "doc_id": "c198be37db690c856f36053dfe0e58de2625a55f6b4142edbc64bb7b91091a06", + "edit_distance": 0.1076555023923445, + "f1_score": 0.9111111111111112, + "meteor": 0.8944476290109774, + "precision": 0.9162011173184358, + "pred_md": "## References\n\nAakvik, A., J. Heckman and E. Vytlacil (2005). 'Estimating Treatment Effects for Discrete Outcomes When Responses to Treatment Vary among Observationally Identical Persons: An Application to Norwegian Vocational Rehabilitation Programs,' Journal of Econometrics , 125, 15-51.\n\nAbadie, A. (2002). 'Bootstrap Tests for Distributional Treatment Effects in Intrumental Variable Models,' Journal of the American Statistical Association , 97, 284-292.\n\nAbadie, A. (2003). 'Semiparametric Instrumental Variable Estimation of Treatment Response Models,' Journal of Econometrics , 113, 231-263.\n\nAbadie, A., J. Angrist and G. Imbens (2002). 'Instrumental Variables Estimates of the Effect of Subsidized Training on the Quantiles of Trainee Earnings,' Econometrica , 70, 91-117.\n\nAbbring, J. H. and J. Heckman (2007). 'Econometric evaluation of social programs, Part III: Distributional treatment effects, dynamic treatment effects, dynamic discrete choice, and general equilibrium policy evaluation,' Handbook of Econometrics , 6B, 5145-5301.\n\nAbrevaya, J. (2006). 'Estimating the Effect of Smoking on Birth Outcomes Using a Matched Panel Data Approach,' Journal of Applied Econometrics , 21, 489-519.\n\nAbrevaya, J. and C. Dahl (2008). 'The Effects of Birth Inputs on Birthweight,' Journal of Business and Economic Statistics , 26, 379-397.\n\nAbrevaya, J. and L. Puzzello (2012). 'Taxes, Cigarette Consumption, and Smoking Intensity: Comment,' American Economic Review , 102, 1751-1763.\n\nAdda, J. and F. Cornaglia (2006). 'Taxes, Cigarette Consumption, and Smoking Intensity,' American Economic Review , 96, 1013-1028.\n\nAlmond, D. and J. Currie (2011). 'Human Capital Development Before Age Five,' The Handbook of Labor Economics , 4, 2011, 1316-1486.\n\nAlmond, D., K. Chay and D. Lee (2005). 'The Costs of Low Birth Weight,' The Quarterly Journal of Economics ,120 (3), 1031-1083.\n\nAndrews, D. W. K. (2000). 'Inconsistency of the Bootstrap when a Parameter is on the Boundary of the Parameter Space,' 68, 399-405.\n\n48", + "recall": 0.9060773480662984, + "true_md": "## References\n\nAakvik, A., J. Heckman and E. Vytlacil (2005). “Estimating Treatment Effects for Discrete Outcomes When Responses to Treatment Vary among Observationally Identical Persons: An Application to Norwegian Vocational Rehabilitation Programs,” Journal of Econometrics , 125, 15–51.\n\nAbadie, A. (2002). “Bootstrap Tests for Distributional Treatment Effects in Intrumental Variable Models,” Journal of the American Statistical Association , 97, 284-292.\n\nAbadie, A. (2003). “Semiparametric Instrumental Variable Estimation of Treatment Response Models,” Journal of Econometrics , 113, 231–263.\n\nAbadie, A., J. Angrist and G. Imbens (2002). “Instrumental Variables Estimates of the Effect of Subsidized Training on the Quantiles of Trainee Earnings,” Econometrica , 70, 91-117.\n\nAbbring, J. H. and J. Heckman (2007). “Econometric evaluation of social programs, Part III: Distribu- tional treatment effects, dynamic treatment effects, dynamic discrete choice, and general equilibrium policy evaluation,” Handbook of Econometrics , 6B, 5145–5301.\n\nAbrevaya, J. (2006). “Estimating the Effect of Smoking on Birth Outcomes Using a Matched Panel Data Approach,” Journal of Applied Econometrics , 21, 489-519.\n\nAbrevaya, J. and C. Dahl (2008). “The Effects of Birth Inputs on Birthweight,” Journal of Business and Economic Statistics , 26, 379-397.\n\nAbrevaya, J. and L. Puzzello (2012). ”Taxes, Cigarette Consumption, and Smoking Intensity: Comment,” American Economic Review , 102, 1751-1763.\n\nAdda, J. and F. Cornaglia (2006). “Taxes, Cigarette Consumption, and Smoking Intensity,” American Eco- nomic Review , 96, 1013-1028.\n\nAlmond, D. and J. Currie (2011). “Human Capital Development Before Age Five,” The Handbook of Labor Economics , 4, 2011, 1316-1486.\n\nAlmond, D., K. Chay and D. Lee (2005). “The Costs of Low Birth Weight,” The Quarterly Journal of Economics ,120 (3), 1031–1083.\n\nAndrews, D. W. K. (2000). “Inconsistency of the Bootstrap when a Parameter is on the Boundary of the Parameter Space,” 68, 399–405.\n\n48" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5148899115839671, + "doc_id": "7c1f61d58b95498ceb0b09384aaeb15893a3c35140a4f162a918d953e924664b", + "edit_distance": 0.35351089588377727, + "f1_score": 0.9627118644067798, + "meteor": 0.7080685908288599, + "precision": 0.9659863945578231, + "pred_md": "glyph[negationslash]\n\nglyph[negationslash]\n\nglyph[negationslash]\n\nglyph[negationslash]\n\nglyph[negationslash]\n\nglyph[negationslash]\n\nf = f 1 + · · · + f m and ∂f i = ∂f j if i = j . Fix i ≤ m . Since f i is nonzero there exist x, y ∈ X such that xρy and f i ( x, y ) = 0. By equation 3 we have f j ( x, y ) e xy = e xx f e j yy for j = 1 , . . . , m . If f j ( x, y ) = 0 then ∂e xy = ∂f j since ∂e xx = ∂e yy = 1. When j = i we conclude Φ ( x, y ) = ∂f i since Φ ( x, y ) = ∂e xy by construction and f i ( x, y ) = 0 by our choice of x, y ∈ X . But if j = i and f j ( x, y ) = 0 then ∂e xy = ∂f j so ∂f i = ∂f j , which is a contradiction. We are left with f j ( x, y ) = 0 for all j = . i Therefore f ( x, y ) = f i ( x, y ) = 0 and Φ( x, y ) = a by the assumption on f . We already proved Φ ( x, y ) = ∂f i so ∂f i = a . Since i was arbitrarily chosen we have ∂f i = a for all i = 1 , . . . , m . Since ∂f , . . . , ∂f 1 m are distinct, we must have m = 1. Thus f = f 1 ∈ S a , as desired.\n\nglyph[negationslash]\n\nNow suppose g ∈ S a and g ( w, z ) = 0 for some w, z ∈ X such that wρz . Equation 3 becomes g ( w, z ) e wz = e ww ge zz and we have ∂e wz = ∂g since ∂e ww = ∂e zz = 1 by assumption. Moreover a = ∂g and ∂e wz = Φ( w, z ) so Φ ( w, z ) = a .\n\nRemark 3.5 Equation 4 gives ( e xx ) 2 = e xx and so Φ( x, x ) 2 = Φ( x, x ) for all x ∈ X . The condition e xx ∈ S 1 for all x ∈ X stated in part 2 of Theorem 3.4 may not hold for all monoids. But if G is a cancellative monoid then ( e xx ) 2 = e xx implies Φ( x, x ) = 1 for all x ∈ X and the condition in part 2 is satisfied automatically.\n\nDefinition 3.6 Let G be a semigroup and let ρ be a relation on X .\n\n- 1. A subset β of ρ is a G -extendible set for ρ if for every function φ : β → G there exists a homomorphism Φ : ρ → G such that Φ | β = φ . If we may choose Φ so that ImΦ is finite then we say φ is grading admissible .\n\n9\n\nglyph[negationslash]\n\nglyph[negationslash]\n\nglyph[negationslash]", + "recall": 0.9594594594594594, + "true_md": "f = f$_{1}$ + · · · + f$_{m}$ and ∂f$_{i}$ ̸ = ∂f$_{j}$ if i ̸ = j . Fix i ≤ m . Since f$_{i}$ is nonzero there exist x, y ∈ X such that xρy and f$_{i}$ ( x, y ) ̸ = 0. By equation 3 we have f$_{j}$ ( x, y ) e$_{xy}$ = e$_{xx}$f$_{j}$e$_{yy}$ for j = 1 , . . . , m . If f$_{j}$ ( x, y ) ̸ = 0 then ∂e$_{xy}$ = ∂f$_{j}$ since ∂e$_{xx}$ = ∂e$_{yy}$ = 1. When j = i we conclude Φ ( x, y ) = ∂f$_{i}$ since Φ ( x, y ) = ∂e$_{xy}$ by construction and f$_{i}$ ( x, y ) ̸ = 0 by our choice of x, y ∈ X . But if j ̸ = i and f$_{j}$ ( x, y ) ̸ = 0 then ∂e$_{xy}$ = ∂f$_{j}$ so ∂f$_{i}$ = ∂f$_{j}$ , which is a contradiction. We are left with f$_{j}$ ( x, y ) = 0 for all j ̸ = i . Therefore f ( x, y ) = f$_{i}$ ( x, y ) ̸ = 0 and Φ ( x, y ) = a by the assumption on f . We already proved Φ ( x, y ) = ∂f$_{i}$ so ∂f$_{i}$ = a . Since i was arbitrarily chosen we have ∂f$_{i}$ = a for all i = 1 , . . . , m . Since ∂f$_{1}$, . . . , ∂f$_{m}$ are distinct, we must have m = 1. Thus f = f$_{1}$ ∈ S$_{a}$ , as desired.\n\nNow suppose g ∈ S$_{a}$ and g ( w, z ) ̸ = 0 for some w, z ∈ X such that wρz . Equation 3 becomes g ( w, z ) e$_{wz}$ = e$_{ww}$ge$_{zz}$ and we have ∂e$_{wz}$ = ∂g since ∂e$_{ww}$ = ∂e$_{zz}$ = 1 by assumption. Moreover a = ∂g and ∂e$_{wz}$ = Φ ( w, z ) so Φ ( w, z ) = a .\n\nRemark 3.5 Equation 4 gives ( e$_{xx}$ ) 2 = e$_{xx}$ and so Φ ( x, x ) 2 = Φ ( x, x ) for all x ∈ X . The condition e$_{xx}$ ∈ S$_{1}$ for all x ∈ X stated in part 2 of Theorem 3.4 may not hold for all monoids. But if G is a cancellative monoid then ( e$_{xx}$ ) 2 = e$_{xx}$ implies Φ ( x, x ) = 1 for all x ∈ X and the condition in part 2 is satisfied automatically.\n\nDefinition 3.6 Let G be a semigroup and let ρ be a relation on X .\n\n- 1. A subset β of ρ is a G -extendible set for ρ if for every function φ : β → G there exists a homomorphism Φ : ρ → G such that Φ |$_{β}$ = φ . If we may choose Φ so that Im Φ is finite then we say φ is grading admissible .\n\n9" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.3988078183794844, + "doc_id": "af7d6cc5e3becdd3fff4ede310bf1dd697017133fe6cd00f7977eb86725747c5", + "edit_distance": 0.49658314350797267, + "f1_score": 0.9433962264150942, + "meteor": 0.5418187278682692, + "precision": 0.9615384615384616, + "pred_md": "As shown in Figure 6, A D = φ for A = φ, and A D = [ a + δ, ∞ ) for A = [ a, ∞ ) with a ∈ -∞ ∞ ( , ). Then, µ 0 ( A ) -µ 1 ( A D ) = 0 for A = φ , while µ 0 ( A ) -µ 1 ( A D ) = F 1 ( a + ) δ -F 0 ( a ) for A = [ a, ∞ ) . Therefore, the RHS in (6) reduces to\n\n\n\nwhich is equal to the Makarov lower bound. One can derive the Makarov upper bound in the same way.\n\nNow consider the support restriction Pr (( Y , Y 0 1 ) ∈ C ) = 1. Note that this restriction is linear in the entire joint distribution π, since it can be rewritten as ∫ 1 C ( y , y 0 1 ) dπ = 1. The linearity makes it possible to handle this restriction with penalty. In particular, since support restrictions hold with probability one, the corresponding penalty is infinite. Therefore, one can embed 1 -1 C ( y , y 0 1 ) into the cost function with an infinite multiplier λ = ∞ as follows:\n\n\n\nThe minimization problem (9) is well defined with λ = ∞ as noted in Remark 1. Note that for λ = ∞ , any joint distribution which violates the restriction Pr (( Y , Y 0 1 ) ∈ C ) = 1 would cause infinite total costs in (9) and it is obviously excluded from the potential optimal joint distribution candidates. The optimal joint distribution should thus satisfy the restriction Pr (( Y , Y 0 1 ) ∈ C ) = 1 to avoid infinite costs by not permitting any positive probability density for the region outside of the set C . Similarly, the upper bound on the DTE is written as\n\n\n\nTo the best of my knowledge, this is the first paper that allows for { 0 1 , , ∞} -valued costs. Although the econometrics literature based on the optimal transportation approach has used Lemma 3 for { 0 1 , }-valued costs, the problem (9) cannot be solved using Lemma 3. In the next section, I develop a dual representation for (9) in order to characterize sharp bounds on the DTE.\n\n## 3 Main Results\n\nThis section characterizes sharp DTE bounds under general support restrictions by developing a dual representation for problems (9) and (10). I use this characterization to derive sharp DTE bounds for various\n\n16", + "recall": 0.9259259259259259, + "true_md": "As shown in Figure 6, A D = φ for A = φ, and A D = [ a + δ, ∞ ) for A = [ a, ∞ ) with a ∈ ( −∞ , ∞ ). Then, µ$_{0}$ ( A ) − µ$_{1}$ $^{(}$A D ) = 0 for A = φ , while µ$_{0}$ ( A ) − µ$_{1}$ $^{(}$A D ) = F$_{1}$ ( a + δ ) − F$_{0}$ ( a ) for A = [ a, ∞ ) . Therefore, the RHS in (6) reduces to\n\nwhich is equal to the Makarov lower bound. One can derive the Makarov upper bound in the same way.\n\nNow consider the support restriction Pr (( Y$_{0}$, Y$_{1}$ ) ∈ C ) = 1. Note that this restriction is linear in the entire joint distribution π, since it can be rewritten as ∫ 1$_{C}$ ( y$_{0}$, y$_{1}$ ) dπ = 1. The linearity makes it possible to handle this restriction with penalty. In particular, since support restrictions hold with probability one, the corresponding penalty is infinite. Therefore, one can embed 1 − 1$_{C}$ ( y$_{0}$, y$_{1}$ ) into the cost function with an infinite multiplier λ = ∞ as follows:\n\nThe minimization problem (9) is well defined with λ = ∞ as noted in Remark 1. Note that for λ = ∞ , any joint distribution which violates the restriction Pr (( Y$_{0}$, Y$_{1}$ ) ∈ C ) = 1 would cause infinite total costs in (9) and it is obviously excluded from the potential optimal joint distribution candidates. The optimal joint distribution should thus satisfy the restriction Pr (( Y$_{0}$, Y$_{1}$ ) ∈ C ) = 1 to avoid infinite costs by not permitting any positive probability density for the region outside of the set C . Similarly, the upper bound on the DTE is written as\n\nTo the best of my knowledge, this is the first paper that allows for { 0 , 1 , ∞} -valued costs. Although the econometrics literature based on the optimal transportation approach has used Lemma 3 for { 0 , 1 }− valued costs, the problem (9) cannot be solved using Lemma 3. In the next section, I develop a dual representation for (9) in order to characterize sharp bounds on the DTE.\n\nThis section characterizes sharp DTE bounds under general support restrictions by developing a dual representation for problems (9) and (10). I use this characterization to derive sharp DTE bounds for various\n\n16\n\n$$sup π ∈ Π( µ$_{0}$,µ$_{1}$ ) ∫ { 1 { y$_{1}$ − y$_{0}$ ≤ δ } − λ (1 − 1$_{C}$ ( y$_{0}$, y$_{1}$ )) } dπ (10) = 1 − inf π ∈ Π( µ$_{0}$,µ$_{1}$ ) ∫ { 1 { y$_{1}$ − y$_{0}$ > δ } + λ (1 − 1$_{C}$ ( y$_{0}$, y$_{1}$ )) } dπ.$$\n\n$$inf π ∈ Π( µ$_{0}$,µ$_{1}$ ) ∫ { 1 { y$_{1}$ − y$_{0}$ < δ } + λ (1 − 1$_{C}$ ( y$_{0}$, y$_{1}$ )) } dπ (9)$$\n\n$$sup a ∈$_{R}$ max [ F$_{1}$ ( a + δ ) − F$_{0}$ ( a ) , 0] ,$$\n\n## 3 Main Results" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7726318251432831, + "doc_id": "548baf22e9f8dae1cdd9039a60ad1c51178e7444fb597486692facbfd809006a", + "edit_distance": 0.16425992779783394, + "f1_score": 0.9845474613686535, + "meteor": 0.8683194028019267, + "precision": 0.9955357142857143, + "pred_md": "(right), where it displays similar attenuation as in the prior example. Most notably, we now observe the incremental effect of d diminishing as d increases, consistent with the covariance structure.\n\nThrough a combination of theory and simulated examples, we observe that the algorithmic efficiency achieved under Ψ scalar or Ψ block will depend non-trivially upon the model dimension, and the extent and structure of the posterior correlation. We have only considered two simple, highly modular and systematic posterior correlation structures. In practice, any model of interest will demonstrate a substantially more complex correlation structure (which is unknown, anyway), making a full analytical study of MCMC algorithmic efficiency difficult. No less, we have only considered the two boundary-case algorithms Ψ scalar and Ψ block in Ψ M . Our desire to derive general results for algorithmic efficiency will be complicated substantially further when we consider the complete set Ψ M .\n\n## 2.3 Computational Efficiency\n\nWhile section 2.2 considered the efficiency of MCMC algorithm Ψ at producing independent samples without regard for computation time, we now consider the computational requirements of Ψ, measured in units of algorithm runtime per MCMC iteration. We focus on computations for model density evaluations. There are also book-keeping and loop-iteration costs, which we label as algorithm overhead. These overhead terms comprise a small fraction of total computation, and we safely disregard them. Denote the computational requirement of Ψ as C (Ψ), and again overload notation to define C ψ ( ) as the computational requirement of a single sampler ψ . For Ψ = { ψ , . . . , ψ 1 k } , C (Ψ) = ∑ k i =1 C ψ ( i ). As far as we are aware, an analysis of MCMC efficiency which incorporates C (Ψ) has not been carried out to date. Literature which does address MCMC efficiency typically recognizes that a computational aspect exists, but then focuses solely on A (Ψ), e.g. , Roberts and Sahu (1997).\n\nWe now present an accounting of the main contributions to C (Ψ scalar ) and C (Ψ block ), general for any M . To support our accounting, we denote the set of all fixed and known components of M ( e.g., observations, other data) as Y , which is disjoint from the unknown set of parameters Θ = { θ , . . . , θ 1 d } . For each θ i ∈ Θ, let x i ⊂ Θ ∪ Y be the set of model components which immediately\n\n10", + "recall": 0.9737991266375546, + "true_md": "(right), where it displays similar attenuation as in the prior example. Most notably, we now observe the incremental effect of d diminishing as d increases, consistent with the covariance structure.\n\nThrough a combination of theory and simulated examples, we observe that the algorithmic efficiency achieved under Ψ$_{scalar}$ or Ψ$_{block}$ will depend non-trivially upon the model dimension, and the extent and structure of the posterior correlation. We have only considered two simple, highly modular and systematic posterior correlation structures. In practice, any model of interest will demonstrate a substantially more complex correlation structure (which is unknown, anyway), making a full analytical study of MCMC algorithmic efficiency difficult. No less, we have only considered the two boundary-case algorithms Ψ$_{scalar}$ and Ψ$_{block}$ in Ψ$_{M}$ . Our desire to derive general results for algorithmic efficiency will be complicated substantially further when we consider the complete set Ψ$_{M}$ .\n\nWhile section 2.2 considered the efficiency of MCMC algorithm Ψ at producing independent sam- ples without regard for computation time, we now consider the computational requirements of Ψ, measured in units of algorithm runtime per MCMC iteration. We focus on computations for model density evaluations. There are also book-keeping and loop-iteration costs, which we label as algo- rithm overhead. These overhead terms comprise a small fraction of total computation, and we safely disregard them. Denote the computational requirement of Ψ as C (Ψ), and again overload notation to define C ( ψ ) as the computational requirement of a single sampler ψ . For Ψ = { ψ$_{1}$, . . . , ψ$_{k}$ } , C (Ψ) = ∑ k i =1 C ( ψ$_{i}$ ). As far as we are aware, an analysis of MCMC efficiency which incorporates C (Ψ) has not been carried out to date. Literature which does address MCMC efficiency typically recognizes that a computational aspect exists, but then focuses solely on A (Ψ), e.g. , Roberts and Sahu (1997).\n\nWe now present an accounting of the main contributions to C (Ψ$_{scalar}$) and C (Ψ$_{block}$), general for any M . To support our accounting, we denote the set of all fixed and known components of M ( e.g., observations, other data) as Y , which is disjoint from the unknown set of parameters Θ = { θ$_{1}$, . . . , θ$_{d}$ } . For each θ$_{i}$ ∈ Θ, let x$_{i}$ ⊂ Θ ∪ Y be the set of model components which immediately\n\n10\n\n## 2.3 Computational Efficiency" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.1477780875104233, + "doc_id": "8158df1b1cfed5beba52c84728b177e3ee94fa44a372168e70fe46c6fa1ccc78", + "edit_distance": 0.6906906906906907, + "f1_score": 0.8663967611336033, + "meteor": 0.34571480582540637, + "precision": 0.8916666666666667, + "pred_md": "Pick any integer k . If b k = -∞ , then\n\n\n\nIf b k > b k +1 > -∞ , then also\n\nIf b k > b k +1 = -∞ , then\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nConsequently, by Theorem 1, the sharp upper bound under MTR can be written as\n\n\n\nglyph[squaresolid]\n\n## Proof of Corollary 2\n\nSince monotonicity of ϕ can be shown very similarly as in the proof of Corollary 1, I do not provide the proof. As given in Corollary 2, the sharp lower bound under concave treatment response is identical to the sharp lower bound under MTR and the proof is also the same. The sharp upper bound under convex treatment response is equal to the Makarov upper bound by the same token as the upper bound under MTR. Thus, I do not provide their proofs. Also, since the sharp lower bound under convex treatment response is derived very similarly to the sharp upper bound under concave treatment response, I provide a proof only for the sharp upper bound under concave treatment response.\n\nConsider a concave treatment response restriction Pr { Y 0 -w t 0 -t W ≥ Y 1 -Y 0 t 1 -t 0 , Y 1 ≥ Y 0 ≥ w } = 1 for any w in the support of W and ( t 1 , t 0 , t W ) ∈ R 3 s.t. t W < t 0 < t . 1 The support satisfying { Y 0 -w t 0 -t W ≥ Y 1 -Y 0 t 1 -t 0 , Y 1 ≥ Y 0 ≥ w } corresponds to the intersection of the regions below the straight line Y 1 = t 1 -t W t 0 -t W Y 0 -t 1 -t 0 t 0 -t W w and above the straight line Y 1 = Y 0 as shown in Figure A.5. Note that t 1 -t W t 0 -t W > 1 and the two straight lines intersect at ( w,w ).\n\n68", + "recall": 0.84251968503937, + "true_md": "Pick any integer k . If b$_{k}$ = −∞ , then\n\nIf b$_{k}$ > b$_{k}$$\\_{+1}$ > −∞ , then also\n\nIf b$_{k}$ > b$_{k}$$\\_{+1}$ = −∞ , then\n\nConsequently, by Theorem 1, the sharp upper bound under MTR can be written as\n\nSince monotonicity of ϕ can be shown very similarly as in the proof of Corollary 1, I do not provide the proof. As given in Corollary 2, the sharp lower bound under concave treatment response is identical to the sharp lower bound under MTR and the proof is also the same. The sharp upper bound under convex treatment response is equal to the Makarov upper bound by the same token as the upper bound under MTR. Thus, I do not provide their proofs. Also, since the sharp lower bound under convex treatment response is derived very similarly to the sharp upper bound under concave treatment response, I provide a proof only for the sharp upper bound under concave treatment response.\n\nConsider a concave treatment response restriction Pr { Y$_{0}$ − w t$_{0}$ − t$_{W}$ ≥ Y$_{1}$ − Y$_{0}$ t$_{1}$ − t$_{0}$ , Y$_{1}$ ≥ Y$_{0}$ ≥ w } = 1 for any w in the support of W and ( t$_{1}$, t$_{0}$, t$_{W}$ ) ∈$_{R}$ 3 s.t. t$_{W}$ < t$_{0}$ < t$_{1}$. The support satisfying { Y$_{0}$ − w t$_{0}$ − t$_{W}$ ≥ Y$_{1}$ − Y$_{0}$ t$_{1}$ − t$_{0}$ , Y$_{1}$ ≥ Y$_{0}$ ≥ w } corresponds to the intersection of the regions below the straight line Y$_{1}$ = t$_{1}$ − t$_{W}$ t$_{0}$ − t$_{W}$ Y$_{0}$ − t$_{1}$ − t$_{0}$ t$_{0}$ − t$_{W}$ w and above the straight line Y$_{1}$ = Y$_{0}$ as shown in Figure A.5. Note that t$_{1}$ − t$_{W}$ t$_{0}$ − t$_{W}$ > 1 and the two straight lines intersect at ( w, w ).\n\n68\n\n## Proof of Corollary 2\n\n$$max $^{{}$µ$_{0}$ ( B$_{k}$ ) − µ$_{1}$ $^{(}$B D k $^{)}$, 0 } = 0 .$$\n\n$$max $^{{}$µ$_{0}$ ( B$_{k}$ ) − µ$_{1}$ $^{(}$B D k $^{)}$, 0 } = 0 .$$\n\n$$max $^{{}$µ$_{0}$ ( B$_{k}$ ) − µ$_{1}$ $^{(}$B D k $^{)}$, 0 } = max { F$_{0}$ ( b$_{k}$ ) − F$_{1}$ ( b$_{k}$ + δ ) , 0 } .$$\n\n$$F U Δ ( δ ) = 1 − sup { B$_{k}$ } ∞ k = −∞ ∞ ∑ k = −∞ max $^{{}$µ$_{0}$ ( B$_{k}$ ) − µ$_{1}$ $^{(}$B D k $^{)}$, 0 } = 1 − sup b$_{k}$ max { F$_{0}$ ( b$_{k}$ ) − F$_{1}$ ( b$_{k}$ + δ ) , 0 } = 1 + inf y max { F$_{1}$ ( y ) − F$_{0}$ ( y − δ ) , 0 } .$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8310481583013993, + "doc_id": "2645e07c7d8a1ef8660868235fa024fa5467f97549f90e96803a4f288140ec64", + "edit_distance": 0.15217391304347827, + "f1_score": 0.9754901960784313, + "meteor": 0.9023981988609547, + "precision": 0.9900497512437811, + "pred_md": "## Linear Gaussian State Space Models\n\nWe construct two linear Gaussian state space models (Durbin and Koopman, 2012) each consisting of 100 latent states and observations. State transitions are governed by a first order AR process, and we seek inferences about the transition process, and the system and observation noise. We consider two equivalent parameterizations of the state transition process. First, in terms of the intercept and mean of the AR process, which have largely uncorrelated posteriors (independent parameterization), and second, in terms of the intercept and autocorrelation, which are known to be highly correlated (correlated parameterization). For the correlated parameterization, we consider an informed MCMC algorithm, which blocks the intercept and autocorrelation parameters. We deliberately include this inferior parameterization, to assess MCMC performance in the case of known strong posterior correlation. In practice, an analyst may not know which model parameterization(s) will produce uncorrelated posterior dimensions.\n\n## Spatial Model\n\nWe consider a spatially dependent hierarchical model. The data consist of 148 measurements of scallop abundance at various locations off the New York and New Jersey coastline, and was collected by the Northeast Fisheries Science Center of the National Marine Fisheries Service in 1993. The data set is publicly available at http://www.biostat.umn.edu/~brad/data/myscallops.txt , and is analyzed in Banerjee, Carlin, and Gelfand (2003), pages 44-65. Following Banerjee, Carlin, and Gelfand (2003), we model the mean log-abundance as multivariate normal with covariance that decays exponentially as a function of distance. The covariance is given by cov( g , g i j ) = σ 2 exp( -d i,j /ρ ), where the observations are modeled as Poisson counts y i ∼ Poisson(exp( g i )), and d i,j is the distance between observations y i and y j . Since this covariance structure induces a trade-off between σ and ρ , we expect these parameters to be correlated in the posterior distribution.\n\n## Generalized Linear Mixed Model\n\nWe include a reasonably sized generalized linear mixed model (GLMM; Gelman and Hill, 2006, chapter 6). We make use of the Minnesota Health Plan dataset available in Waller and Zelterman\n\n20", + "recall": 0.961352657004831, + "true_md": "## Linear Gaussian State Space Models\n\nWe construct two linear Gaussian state space models (Durbin and Koopman, 2012) each consisting of 100 latent states and observations. State transitions are governed by a first order AR process, and we seek inferences about the transition process, and the system and observation noise. We consider two equivalent parameterizations of the state transition process. First, in terms of the intercept and mean of the AR process, which have largely uncorrelated posteriors (independent parameterization), and second, in terms of the intercept and autocorrelation, which are known to be highly correlated (correlated parameterization). For the correlated parameterization, we consider an informed MCMC algorithm, which blocks the intercept and autocorrelation parameters. We deliberately include this inferior parameterization, to assess MCMC performance in the case of known strong posterior correlation. In practice, an analyst may not know which model parameterization(s) will produce uncorrelated posterior dimensions.\n\nWe consider a spatially dependent hierarchical model. The data consist of 148 measurements of scallop abundance at various locations off the New York and New Jersey coastline, and was collected by the Northeast Fisheries Science Center of the National Marine Fisheries Service in 1993. The data set is publicly available at http://www.biostat.umn.edu/~brad/data/myscallops.txt , and is analyzed in Banerjee, Carlin, and Gelfand (2003), pages 44-65. Following Banerjee, Carlin, and Gelfand (2003), we model the mean log-abundance as multivariate normal with covariance that de- cays exponentially as a function of distance. The covariance is given by cov( g$_{i}$, g$_{j}$ ) = σ $^{2}$exp( − d$_{i,j}$/ρ ), where the observations are modeled as Poisson counts y$_{i}$ ∼ Poisson(exp( g$_{i}$ )), and d$_{i,j}$ is the distance between observations y$_{i}$ and y$_{j}$ . Since this covariance structure induces a trade-off between σ and ρ , we expect these parameters to be correlated in the posterior distribution.\n\nWe include a reasonably sized generalized linear mixed model (GLMM; Gelman and Hill, 2006, chapter 6). We make use of the Minnesota Health Plan dataset available in Waller and Zelterman\n\n## Generalized Linear Mixed Model\n\n## Spatial Model\n\n20" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.2493346763329378, + "doc_id": "ed015a9bf519f97f80286665fa44fef1da5e19ef00684fb9c92bf5935d5b1574", + "edit_distance": 0.6872607982504101, + "f1_score": 0.9315068493150686, + "meteor": 0.43435410512226574, + "precision": 0.918918918918919, + "pred_md": "6\n\nKABALAN GASPARD\n\nequivalence of primary and real units in O K when K is a prime cyclotomic field, we can prove the result more rapidly.\n\n/negationslash\n\nLemma 2. Let i ≡ j ( p ) . Then the ideals I = ( x 0 + ζ y i 0 ) and J = ( x 0 + ζ j y 0 ) are relatively prime.\n\nProof. Consider the ideal I + . J J contains the element -( x 0 + ζ j y 0 ), so x 0 + ζ y i 0 -( x 0 + ζ j y 0 ) = ( ζ i -ζ j ) y 0 ∈ I + J . Likewise, since O K = Z [ ζ ], -ζ j ( x 0 + ζ y i 0 ) = ζ j x 0 + ζ i + j y 0 ∈ I and ζ i ( x 0 + ζ j y 0 ) = ζ x i 0 + ζ i + j y 0 ∈ J . So ζ x i 0 + ζ i + j y 0 -ζ j ( x 0 + ζ y i 0 ) = ( ζ i -ζ j ) x 0 ∈ I + J . Now ( x , y 0 0 ) = 1 ⇒ there exist a, b ∈ Z such that ax 0 + by 0 = 1. So a ζ ( i -ζ j ) x 0 + ( b ζ i -ζ j ) y 0 = ( ζ i -ζ j ) ∈ I + J .\n\nNow N ζ ( i -ζ j ) = p since ( N ζ ( i -ζ j )) 2 = p -1 ∏ k =1 ( ζ ik -ζ jk ) 2 = p -1 ∏ k =1 ( -ζ -k j ( -i ) )(1 -ζ k j ( -i ) ) 2 = p -1 ∏ k =1 ( -ζ -k )(1 -ζ k ) 2 = + ζ -p p -1 2 p -1 ∏ k =1 (1 -ζ k ) 2 = 1 · ( ∑ p -1 k =1 1 ) 2 = p 2 . So N I ( + J ) | p . If N I ( + J ) = p , then since I ⊆ I + J , p = N I ( + J ) | N I ( ) = p -1 ∏ i =0 ( x 0 + ζ y i 0 ) = x p 0 + y p 0 = z p 0 . So since p is prime, p | z 0 ⇒ contradiction. So N I ( + J ) = 1, and therefore I + J = O K . So I and J are coprime since P | I and P | J ⇒ P | I + J ⇒ P = O K . /square\n\nNow x p 0 + y p 0 = z p 0 ⇒ p -1 ∏ i =0 ( x 0 + ζ y i 0 ) = ( z 0 ) p as ideals. But { ( x 0 + ζ y i 0 ) : 0 ≤ i ≤ p - } 1 are pairwise coprime. So by unique factorization of ideals, each of these ideals must be a p -th power. So in particular, taking i = 1, ( x 0 + ζy 0 ) = I p for some ideal I . So since ( x 0 + ζy 0 ) is principal, [ I ] has order dividing p in the ideal class group, but since p /notbar h , we must have that the order of [ I ] is 1. So I is principal. Let I = ( α ). Then ( x 0 + ζy 0 ) = ( α p ), and so x 0 + ζy 0 is associate to α p . We write x 0 + ζy 0 = uα p where u is a unit in O K .\n\nThen by 1 there exists a unique c modulo p such that ζ -c u is primary. Let ζ -c u = u 0 so that u = ζ u c 0 where u 0 is primary. But u 0 is trivially a unit, and is therefore real by 1.\n\np\n\n-\n\n2\n\ni\n\np\n\n-\n\n2\n\np\n\ni\n\nip\n\nSo x 0 + ζy 0 = ζ u α c 0 p where u 0 is real. Note that modulo ( ∑ i =0 ) ∑ i =0 p -2 ∑ i =0 a p i ∈ Z ( p ). So α p ≡ α p ( p ). It follows that x 0 + ζy 0 = ζ u α c 0 p ⇒ x 0 + ζy 0 ≡ ζ u α c 0 p ( p ) ⇒ x 0 + ζy 0 ≡ ζ u α c 0 p ( p ) ⇒ x 0 + ζ -1 y 0 ≡ ζ -c u α 0 p ( p ). So we now have x 0 + ζy 0 ≡ ζ u α c 0 p ( p ) ⇒ ζ -c x 0 + ζ 1 -c y 0 ≡ u α 0 p ( p ) and x 0 + ζ -1 y 0 ≡ ζ -c u α 0 p ( p ) ⇒ ζ x c 0 + ζ c -1 y 0 ≡ u α 0 p ( p ).\n\np\n\np\n\n,\n\nα\n\np\n\n≡\n\na ζ\n\ni\n\n≡\n\na ζ\n\n≡", + "recall": 0.9444444444444444, + "true_md": "6\n\nKABALAN GASPARD\n\nequivalence of primary and real units in O K when K is a prime cyclotomic field, we can prove the result more rapidly.\n\nLemma 2. Let i ̸≡ j ( p ) . Then the ideals I = ( x$_{0}$ + ζ $^{i}$y$_{0}$ ) and J = ( x$_{0}$ + ζ $^{j}$y$_{0}$ ) are relatively prime.\n\n− ∈ Now N ( ζ i − ζ $^{j}$) = p since ( N ( ζ i − ζ $^{j}$)) 2 = $^{p}$− 1 ∏ k =1 ( ζ ik − ζ $^{jk}$) 2 = $^{p}$− 1 ∏ k =1 ( − ζ − k ( $^{j}$−i $^{)}$)(1 − ζ k ( $^{j}$−i $^{)}$) 2 = $^{p}$− 1 ∏ k =1 ( − ζ − $^{k}$)(1 − ζ $^{k}$) 2 = + ζ − p $^{p}$− 1 2 $^{p}$− 1 ∏ k =1 (1 − ζ $^{k}$) 2 = 1 · ( $^{p}$− 1 ∑ k =1 1 ) 2 = p $^{2}$. So N ( I + J ) | p . If N ( I + J ) = p , then since I ⊆ I + J , p = N ( I + J ) | N ( I ) = $^{p}$− 1 ∏ i =0 ( x$_{0}$ + ζ $^{i}$y$_{0}$ ) = x p 0 + y p 0 = z p $_{0}$. So since p is prime, p | z$_{0}$ ⇒ contradiction. So N ( I + J ) = 1, and therefore I + J = O $_{K}$. So I and J are coprime since P | I and P | J ⇒ P | I + J ⇒ P = O $_{K}$. □\n\nProof. Consider the ideal I + J . J contains the element − ( x$_{0}$ + ζ $^{j}$y$_{0}$ ), so x$_{0}$ + ζ $^{i}$y$_{0}$ − ( x$_{0}$ + ζ $^{j}$y$_{0}$ ) = ( ζ i − ζ $^{j}$) y$_{0}$ ∈ I + J . Likewise, since O K = Z [ ζ ], − ζ $^{j}$( x$_{0}$ + ζ $^{i}$y$_{0}$ ) = ζ $^{j}$x$_{0}$ + ζ i + $^{j}$y$_{0}$ ∈ I and ζ $^{i}$( x$_{0}$ + ζ $^{j}$y$_{0}$ ) = ζ $^{i}$x$_{0}$ + ζ i + $^{j}$y$_{0}$ ∈ J . So ζ $^{i}$x$_{0}$ + ζ i + $^{j}$y$_{0}$ − ζ $^{j}$( x$_{0}$ + ζ $^{i}$y$_{0}$ ) = ( ζ i − ζ $^{j}$) x$_{0}$ ∈ I + J . Now ( x$_{0}$, y$_{0}$ ) = 1 ⇒ there exist a, b ∈ Z such that ax$_{0}$ + by$_{0}$ = 1. So a ( ζ i − ζ $^{j}$) x$_{0}$ + b ( ζ i − ζ $^{j}$) y$_{0}$ = ( ζ i − ζ $^{j}$) ∈ I + J . i i $^{p}$− 1 ik $^{p}$− 1 k ( k (\n\nNow x p $_{0}$+ y p 0 = z p 0 ⇒ $^{p}$− 1 ∏ i =0 ( x$_{0}$ + ζ $^{i}$y$_{0}$ ) = ( z$_{0}$ ) p as ideals. But { ( x$_{0}$ + ζ $^{i}$y$_{0}$ ) : 0 ≤ i ≤ p − 1 } are pairwise coprime. So by unique factorization of ideals, each of these ideals must be a p -th power. So in particular, taking i = 1, ( x$_{0}$ + ζy$_{0}$ ) = I p for some ideal I . So since ( x$_{0}$ + ζy$_{0}$ ) is principal, [ I ] has order dividing p in the ideal class group, but since p ∤ h , we must have that the order of [ I ] is 1. So I is principal. Let I = ( α ). Then ( x$_{0}$ + ζy$_{0}$ ) = ( α $^{p}$), and so x$_{0}$ + ζy$_{0}$ is associate to α $^{p}$. We write x$_{0}$ + ζy$_{0}$ = uα p where u is a unit in O $_{K}$.\n\nThen by 1 there exists a unique c modulo p such that ζ − $^{c}$u is primary. Let ζ − $^{c}$u = u$_{0}$ so that u = ζ $^{c}$u$_{0}$ where u$_{0}$ is primary. But u$_{0}$ is trivially a unit, and is therefore real by 1. So x$_{0}$ + ζy$_{0}$ = ζ $^{c}$u$_{0}$ α p where u$_{0}$ is real. Note that modulo p , α p ≡ ( $^{p}$− 2 ∑ i =0 a$_{i}$ζ i ) p ≡ $^{p}$− 2 ∑ i =0 a p $_{i}$ζ ip ≡ $^{p}$− 2 ∑ i =0 a p i ∈ Z ( p ). So α p ≡ α p ( p ). It follows that x$_{0}$ + ζy$_{0}$ = ζ $^{c}$u$_{0}$ α p ⇒ x$_{0}$ + ζy$_{0}$ ≡ ζ $^{c}$u$_{0}$ α p ( p ) ⇒ x$_{0}$ + ζy$_{0}$ ≡ ζ $^{c}$u$_{0}$ α p ( p ) ⇒ x$_{0}$ + ζ − $^{1}$y$_{0}$ ≡ ζ − $^{c}$u$_{0}$ α p ( p ). So we now have x$_{0}$ + ζy$_{0}$ ≡ ζ $^{c}$u$_{0}$ α p ( p ) ⇒ ζ − $^{c}$x$_{0}$ + ζ $^{1}$− $^{c}$y$_{0}$ ≡ u$_{0}$α p ( p ) and x$_{0}$ + ζ − $^{1}$y$_{0}$ ≡ ζ − $^{c}$u$_{0}$ α p ( p ) ⇒ ζ $^{c}$x$_{0}$ + ζ $^{c}$− $^{1}$y$_{0}$ ≡ u$_{0}$α p ( p )." + }, + { + "bleu": 3.458955472030258e-05, + "doc_id": "f04336baecfe7fd04ffbb2036467640db5f3abca35845d9e8d3cbc57069eda7f", + "edit_distance": 0.9508426966292135, + "f1_score": 0.7285714285714285, + "meteor": 0.0511745290302656, + "precision": 0.9444444444444444, + "pred_md": "Thus, the value of sup ( ϕ,ψ ) ∈ Φ c J ( ϕ, ψ ) is unchanged even if one restricts the supremum to pairs of the form\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nwhich implies that for each y 1 ∈ R ,\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nAlso, according to the definitions above and Figure A.1, if y 1 ∈ A + ρ,D ( ϕ, s ) for some ρ ≥ 0 , then\n\n\n\n\n\n59", + "recall": 0.5930232558139535, + "true_md": "Thus, the value of sup ( ϕ,ψ ) ∈ Φ$_{c}$ J ( ϕ, ψ ) is unchanged even if one restricts the supremum to pairs of the form\n\nwhich implies that for each y$_{1}$ ∈$_{R}$ ,\n\nDefine $^{{}$A + k,D ( ϕ, s ) } ∞ k =0 , $^{{}$A − k,D ( ϕ, s ) } ∞ k =0 as follows:\n\nAlso, according to the definitions above and Figure A.1, if y$_{1}$ ∈ A + ρ,D ( ϕ, s ) for some ρ ≥ 0 , then\n\n$$A + k,D ( ϕ, s ) = $^{{}$y$_{1}$ ∈$_{R}$|∃ y$_{0}$ ∈ A + k ( ϕ, s ) s.t. y$_{1}$ − y$_{0}$ ≥ δ and ( y$_{0}$, y$_{1}$ ) ∈ C } ∪ $^{{}$y$_{1}$ ∈$_{R}$|∃ y$_{0}$ ∈ A + k $_{+1}$( ϕ, s ) s.t. y$_{1}$ − y$_{0}$ < δ and ( y$_{0}$, y$_{1}$ ) ∈ C } for any integer k ≥ 0 , (A.6) A − 0 ,D ( ϕ, s ) = $^{{}$y$_{1}$ ∈$_{R}$|∀ y$_{0}$ ≤ y$_{1}$ − δ s.t. ( y$_{0}$, y$_{1}$ ) ∈ C, y$_{0}$ ∈ A − 0 ( ϕ, s ) } ∩ $^{{}$y$_{1}$ ∈$_{R}$|∀ y$_{0}$ > y$_{1}$ − δ s.t. ( y$_{0}$, y$_{1}$ ) ∈ C, y$_{0}$ ∈ $^{(}$A + 0 ( ϕ, s ) c $^{}}$, A − k,D ( ϕ, s ) = $^{{}$y$_{1}$ ∈$_{R}$|∀ y$_{0}$ ≤ y$_{1}$ − δ s.t. ( y$_{0}$, y$_{1}$ ) ∈ C, y$_{0}$ ∈ A − k ( ϕ, s ) } ∩ $^{{}$y$_{1}$ ∈$_{R}$|∀ y$_{0}$ > y$_{1}$ − δ s.t. ( y$_{0}$, y$_{1}$ ) ∈ C, y$_{0}$ ∈ A − k − $_{1}$( ϕ, s ) } for any integer k > 0 .$$\n\n$$sup y$_{0}$ ∈$_{R}$ [ ∞ ∑ k =0 $^{(}$1$_{A}$ + $_{k}$( ϕ,s $_{)}$( y$_{0}$ ) − 1$_{A}$ − k ( ϕ,s $_{)}$( y$_{0}$ ) $^{)}$− 1 { y$_{1}$ − y$_{0}$ < δ } − λ (1 − 1$_{C}$ ( y$_{0}$, y$_{1}$ ))$^{]}$ ≥ ρ + 1 ,$$\n\n$$−∞ < sup y$_{0}$ ∈$_{R}$ [ ∞ ∑ k =0 $^{(}$1$_{A}$ + $_{k}$( ϕ,s $_{)}$( y$_{0}$ ) − 1$_{A}$ − k ( ϕ,s $_{)}$( y$_{0}$ ) $^{)}$− 1 ( y$_{1}$ − y$_{0}$ < δ ) − λ (1 − 1$_{C}$ ( y$_{0}$, y$_{1}$ ))$^{]}$ ≤ − ∞ ∑ k =0 $^{(}$1$_{A}$ + $_{k}$( ψ,s $_{)}$( y$_{1}$ ) − 1$_{A}$ − k ( ψ,s $_{)}$( y$_{1}$ ) $^{)}$.$$\n\n$$( ∞ ∑ k =0 $^{(}$1$_{A}$ + $_{k}$( ϕ,s ) − 1$_{A}$ − k ( ϕ,s ) $^{)}$, ∞ ∑ k =0 $^{(}$1$_{A}$ + $_{k}$( ψ,s ) − 1$_{A}$ − k ( ψ,s ) ) ) . Hence for all ( y$_{0}$, y$_{1}$ ) ∈$_{R}$ $^{2}$, ∞ ∑ k =0 $^{(}$1$_{A}$ + $_{k}$( ϕ,s $_{)}$( y$_{0}$ ) − 1$_{A}$ − k ( ϕ,s $_{)}$( y$_{0}$ ) $^{)}$+ ∞ ∑ k =0 $^{(}$1$_{A}$ + $_{k}$( ψ,s $_{)}$( y$_{1}$ ) − 1$_{A}$ − k ( ψ,s $_{)}$( y$_{1}$ ) ≤ 1 { y$_{1}$ − y$_{0}$ < δ } + λ (1 − 1$_{C}$ ( y$_{0}$, y$_{1}$ )) ,$$\n\n59" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.15219260384627878, + "doc_id": "deda9c3ac5db7587dd037ffa5aa0e1de418d56aca9b4620bfa4bf5c2fcf35137", + "edit_distance": 0.7213483146067415, + "f1_score": 0.8027210884353742, + "meteor": 0.24539630438137078, + "precision": 0.921875, + "pred_md": "## Proof of Lemma A.1 By Lemma 2,\n\n\n\nwhere Φ c is the set of all pairs ( ϕ, ψ ) in L 1 ( dF 0 ) × L 1 ( dF 1 ) such that\n\n\n\nNote that Φ c is a convex set. From the definition of A + k ( f, s ) and A -k ( f, s ) , for any function f : R → R and s ∈ (0 , 1] ,\n\n\n\nas illustrated in Figure A.1.\n\nFigure A.1: Monotonicity of { A + k ( f, s ) } ∞ k =0 and { A -k ( f, s ) } ∞ k =0\n\nFigure A.1: Monotonicity of { A + k ( f, s ) } ∞ k =0 and { A -k ( f, s ) } ∞ k =0\n\n\n\n\n\n55\n\nLet", + "recall": 0.7108433734939759, + "true_md": "## Proof of Lemma A.1 By Lemma 2,\n\nwhere Φ$_{c}$ is the set of all pairs ( ϕ, ψ ) in L $^{1}$( dF$_{0}$ ) × L $^{1}$( dF$_{1}$ ) such that\n\nNote that Φ$_{c}$ is a convex set. From the definition of A + k ( f, s ) and A − k ( f, s ) , for any function f :$_{R}$ →$_{R}$ and s ∈ (0 , 1] ,\n\nas illustrated in Figure A.1.\n\nLet\n\n$$ϕ$_{+}$ ( x ) = max { ϕ ( x ) , 0 } ≥ 0 , ϕ$_{−}$ ( x ) = min { ϕ ( x ) , 0 } ≤ 0 .$$\n\n55\n\nFigure A.1: Monotonicity of $^{{}$A + k ( f, s ) } ∞ k =0 and $^{{}$A − k ( f, s ) } ∞ k =0\n\n$$inf π ∈ Π( µ$_{0}$,µ$_{1}$ ) I [ π ] = sup ( ϕ,ψ ) ∈ Φ$_{c}$ J ( ϕ, ψ ) ,$$\n\n$$ϕ ( y$_{0}$ ) + ψ ( y$_{1}$ ) ≤ 1 { y$_{1}$ − y$_{0}$ < δ } + λ (1 − 1$_{C}$ ( y$_{0}$, y$_{1}$ )) for all ( y$_{0}$, y$_{1}$ ) . (A.1)$$\n\n$$. . . ⊆ A + 1 ( f, s ) ⊆ A + 0 ( f, s ) ⊆ $^{(}$A − 0 ( f, s ) c ⊆ $^{(}$A − 1 ( f, s ) ) c ⊆ . . . ., (A.2)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8744972885911435, + "doc_id": "addc32c80c2393bcb20c6dd7aa8269366e96a13e3b97bd314d5499091be535f1", + "edit_distance": 0.11363636363636363, + "f1_score": 0.9772727272727272, + "meteor": 0.930950995501443, + "precision": 0.9942196531791907, + "pred_md": "arXiv:1010.2692v5 [math.OC] 21 Sep 2011\n\n## Resource Allocation via Sum-Rate Maximization in the Uplink of Multi-Cell OFDMA Networks\n\nHina Tabassum , Zaher Dawy ∗ ∗∗ , and Mohamed Slim Alouini ∗ ∗ Physical Sciences and Engineering Division, King Abdullah University of Science and Technology (KAUST), Thuwal, Mekkah Province, Saudi Arabia ∗∗ Department of Electrical and Computer Engineering, American University of Beirut (AUB), Beirut, Lebanon\n\nEmail: hina.tabassum@kaust.edu.sa, zd03@aub.edu.lb, slim.alouini@kaust.edu.sa\n\n## Abstract\n\nIn this paper, we consider maximizing the sum-rate in the uplink of a multi-cell OFDMA network. The problem has a non-convex combinatorial structure and is known to be NP hard. Due to the inherent complexity of implementing the optimal solution, firstly, we derive an upper and lower bound to the optimal average network throughput. Moreover, we investigate the performance of a near optimal single cell resource allocation scheme in the presence of ICI which leads to another easily computable lower bound. We then develop a centralized sub-optimal scheme that is composed of a geometric programming based power control phase in conjunction with an iterative subcarrier allocation phase. Although, the scheme is computationally complex, it provides an effective benchmark for low complexity schemes even without the power control phase. Finally, we propose less complex centralized and distributed schemes that are well-suited for practical scenarios. The computational complexity of all schemes is analyzed and performance is compared through simulations. Simulation results demonstrate that the proposed low complexity schemes can achieve comparable performance to the centralized sub-optimal\n\nMarch 19, 2018\n\nDRAFT\n\n1", + "recall": 0.9608938547486033, + "true_md": "arXiv:1010.2692v5 [math.OC] 21 Sep 2011\n\n# Resource Allocation via Sum-Rate Maximization in the Uplink of Multi-Cell OFDMA Networks\n\nHina Tabassum $^{∗}$, Zaher Dawy$^{∗∗}$, and Mohamed Slim Alouini∗\n\n$^{∗}$Physical Sciences and Engineering Division, King Abdullah University of Science and Technology (KAUST), Thuwal, Mekkah Province, Saudi Arabia\n\n$^{∗∗}$Department of Electrical and Computer Engineering, American University of Beirut (AUB), Beirut, Lebanon\n\nEmail: hina.tabassum@kaust.edu.sa, zd03@aub.edu.lb, slim.alouini@kaust.edu.sa\n\nIn this paper, we consider maximizing the sum-rate in the uplink of a multi-cell OFDMA network. The problem has a non-convex combinatorial structure and is known to be NP hard. Due to the inherent complexity of implementing the optimal solution, firstly, w e derive an upper and lower bound to the optimal average network throughput. Moreover, we investigate the performance of a near optimal single cell resource allocation scheme in the presence of ICI which leads to another easily computable lower bound. We then develop a centralized sub-optimal scheme that is composed of a geometric programming based power control phase in conjunction with an iterative subcarrier allocation phase. Although, the scheme is computationally complex, it provides an effective benchmark for low complexity schemes even without the power control phase. Finally, we propose less complex centralized and distributed schemes that are well-suited for practical scenarios. The computational complexity of all schemes is analyzed and performance is compared through simulations. Simulation results demonstrate that the proposed low complexity schemes can achieve comparable performance to the centralized sub-optimal\n\n## Abstract\n\n1\n\nDRAFT\n\nMarch 19, 2018" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5695895468613588, + "doc_id": "f2129737f9b58b1fd5ab8b61a62b9cb012403650eb794a1fe4d7ebb56a58c5ac", + "edit_distance": 0.7220956719817767, + "f1_score": 0.9419354838709677, + "meteor": 0.5442252444020031, + "precision": 0.954248366013072, + "pred_md": "Figure 5: Makarov bounds are not best possible under MTR\n\nFigure 5: Makarov bounds are not best possible under MTR\n\nimproved under MTR because MTR allows multiple mutually exclusive rectangles to be placed below the straight line Y 1 = Y 0 + . δ\n\nMethods of establishing sharp bounds under this class of restrictions and fixed marginal distributions have remained unanswered in the literature. The central difficulty lies in finding out the particular joint distributions achieving sharp bounds among all joint distributions that have the given marginal distributions and satisfy support restrictions. The next subsection shows that an optimal transportation approach circumvents this difficulty through its dual formulation.\n\n## 2.3 Optimal Transportation Approach\n\nAn optimal transportation problem was first formulated by Monge (1781) who studied the most efficient way to move a given distribution of mass to another distribution in a different location. Much later Monge's problem was rediscovered and developed by Kantorovich. The optimal transportation problem of MongeKantorovich type is posed as follows. Let c ( y , y 0 1 ) be a nonnegative lower semicontinuous function on R 2 and define Π ( µ , µ 0 1 ) to be the set of joint distributions on R 2 that have µ 0 and µ 1 as marginal distributions. The optimal transportation problem solves\n\n\n\nThe objective function in the minimization problem is linear in the joint distribution π and the constraint is that the joint distribution π should have fixed marginal distributions µ 0 and µ 1 . c ( y , y 0 1 ) and ∫ c ( y , y 0 1 ) dπ are called the cost function and the total cost , respectively. Kantorovich (1942) developed a dual formulation for the problem (2), which is a key feature of the optimal transportation approach.\n\n12", + "recall": 0.9299363057324841, + "true_md": "$$inf π ∈ Π( µ$_{0}$,µ$_{1}$ ) ∫ c ( y$_{0}$, y$_{1}$ ) dπ. (2)$$\n\n12\n\nThe objective function in the minimization problem is linear in the joint distribution π and the constraint is that the joint distribution π should have fixed marginal distributions µ$_{0}$ and µ$_{1}$ . c ( y$_{0}$, y$_{1}$ ) and ∫ c ( y$_{0}$, y$_{1}$ ) dπ are called the cost function and the total cost , respectively. Kantorovich (1942) developed a dual formulation for the problem (2), which is a key feature of the optimal transportation approach.\n\nAn optimal transportation problem was first formulated by Monge (1781) who studied the most efficient way to move a given distribution of mass to another distribution in a different location. Much later Monge’s problem was rediscovered and developed by Kantorovich. The optimal transportation problem of Monge- Kantorovich type is posed as follows. Let c ( y$_{0}$, y$_{1}$ ) be a nonnegative lower semicontinuous function on R 2 and define Π ( µ$_{0}$, µ$_{1}$ ) to be the set of joint distributions on$_{R}$ 2 that have µ$_{0}$ and µ$_{1}$ as marginal distributions. The optimal transportation problem solves\n\nMethods of establishing sharp bounds under this class of restrictions and fixed marginal distributions have remained unanswered in the literature. The central difficulty lies in finding out the particular joint distributions achieving sharp bounds among all joint distributions that have the given marginal distribu- tions and satisfy support restrictions. The next subsection shows that an optimal transportation approach circumvents this difficulty through its dual formulation.\n\nimproved under MTR because MTR allows multiple mutually exclusive rectangles to be placed below the straight line Y$_{1}$ = Y$_{0}$ + δ .\n\nFigure 5: Makarov bounds are not best possible under MTR\n\n## 2.3 Optimal Transportation Approach" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.018471630182628596, + "doc_id": "e8963891ba5c46535a6a6778f4472e69d5050c3273c9f4ccf4f61c9f805357a8", + "edit_distance": 0.8349970640046976, + "f1_score": 0.8705882352941177, + "meteor": 0.14383841146626125, + "precision": 0.8809523809523809, + "pred_md": "no y 1 ∈ R s.t. y 1 -y 0 ≥ δ and ( t 0 -t W ) y 1 -( t 1 -t W ) y 0 ≤ -( t 1 -t 0 ) w. Thus, for each integer k,\n\n\n\nLet µ 0 ,W ( ·| w ) and µ 1 ,W ( ·| w ) denote conditional distributions of Y 0 and Y 1 given W = w , while F 0 ,W ( ·| w ) and F 1 ,W ( ·| w ) denote conditional distribution functions of Y 0 and Y 1 given W = w. Since Pr { Y 0 -w t 0 -t W ≥ Y 1 -Y 0 t 1 -t 0 } = 1 , which is equivalent to Pr { Y 0 ≥ t 0 -t W t 1 -t W Y 1 + t 1 -t 0 t 1 -t W w } = 1 , implies\n\n\n\nfor each integer k ,\n\n\n\n## Case b) b k +1 ≤ t 0 -t W t 1 -t 0 δ + w ≤ b k\n\nIf b k +1 ≤ t 0 -t W t 1 -t 0 δ + w ≤ b k , similar to Case a, there exists no y 1 ∈ R s.t. y 1 -y 0 ≥ δ and ( t 0 -t W ) y 1 -( t 1 -t W ) y 0 ≤ -( t 1 -t 0 ) w. Thus, for the same reason as in Case a,\n\n\n\nand for every integer k,\n\n\n\nCase c) t 0 -t W t 1 -t 0 δ + w ≤ b k +1 ≤ b k\n\nIf t 0 -t W t 1 -t 0 δ + w ≤ b k +1 ≤ b k , then as illustrated in Figure A.6(c),\n\n\n\nFrom Case a, b and c, it is innocuous to assume t 0 -t W t 1 -t 0 δ + w ≤ b k +1 ≤ b k for each integer k.\n\n70", + "recall": 0.8604651162790697, + "true_md": "no y$_{1}$ ∈$_{R}$ s.t. y$_{1}$ − y$_{0}$ ≥ δ and ( t$_{0}$ − t$_{W}$ ) y$_{1}$ − ( t$_{1}$ − t$_{W}$ ) y$_{0}$ ≤ − ( t$_{1}$ − t$_{0}$ ) w. Thus, for each integer k,\n\nLet µ$_{0}$$\\_{,W}$ ( ·| w ) and µ$\\_{1}$$_{,W}$ ( ·| w ) denote conditional distributions of Y$_{0}$ and Y$_{1}$ given W = w , while F$_{0}$$\\_{,W}$ ( ·| w ) and F$\\_{1}$$_{,W}$ ( ·| w ) denote conditional distribution functions of Y$_{0}$ and Y$_{1}$ given W = w. Since Pr { Y$_{0}$ − w t$_{0}$ − t$_{W}$ ≥ Y$_{1}$ − Y$_{0}$ t$_{1}$ − t$_{0}$ $^{}}$= 1 , which is equivalent to Pr $^{{}$Y$_{0}$ ≥ t$_{0}$ − t$_{W}$ t$_{1}$ − t$_{W}$ Y$_{1}$ + t$_{1}$ − t$_{0}$ t$_{1}$ − t$_{W}$ w $^{}}$= 1 , implies\n\nfor each integer k ,\n\nIf b$_{k}$$\\_{+1}$ ≤ t$\\_{0}$ − t$\\_{W}$ t$\\_{1}$ − t$\\_{0}$ δ + w ≤ b$\\_{k}$, similar to Case a, there exists no y$\\_{1}$ ∈$\\_{R}$ s.t. y$\\_{1}$ − y$\\_{0}$ ≥ δ and ( t$\\_{0}$ − t$\\_{W}$ ) y$\\_{1}$ − ( t$\\_{1}$ − t$\\_{W}$ ) y$\\_{0}$ ≤ − ( t$\\_{1}$ − t$\\_{0}$ ) w. Thus, for the same reason as in Case a,\n\n## Case b) b$_{k}$$\\_{+1}$ ≤ t$\\_{0}$ − t$\\_{W}$ t$\\_{1}$ − t$\\_{0}$ δ + w ≤ b$\\_{k}$\n\nand for every integer k,\n\nIf t$_{0}$ − t$_{W}$ t$_{1}$ − t$_{0}$ δ + w ≤ b$_{k}$$\\_{+1}$ ≤ b$\\_{k}$, then as illustrated in Figure A.6(c),\n\nFrom Case a, b and c, it is innocuous to assume t$_{0}$ − t$_{W}$ t$_{1}$ − t$_{0}$ δ + w ≤ b$_{k}$$\\_{+1}$ ≤ b$\\_{k}$ for each integer k.\n\n## Case c) t$_{0}$ − t$_{W}$ t$_{1}$ − t$_{0}$ δ + w ≤ b$_{k}$$\\_{+1}$ ≤ b$\\_{k}$\n\n70\n\n$$B D k = ( −∞ , b$_{k}$ + δ ) ∪$^{(}$−∞ , t$_{1}$ − t$_{W}$ t$_{0}$ − t$_{W}$ b$_{k}$$_{+1}$ − t$_{1}$ − t$_{0}$ t$_{0}$ − t$_{W}$ w$^{)}$ =$^{(}$ −∞ , max$^{{}$ b$_{k}$ + δ, t$_{1}$ − t$_{W}$ t$_{0}$ − t$_{W}$ b$_{k}$$_{+1}$ − t$_{1}$ − t$_{0}$ t$_{0}$ − t$_{W}$ w$^{})}$ .$$\n\n$$µ$_{0}$$_{,W}$ ( B$_{k}$ | w ) − µ$_{1}$$_{,W}$ $^{(}$B D k | w $^{)}$≤ 0 .$$\n\n$$B D k =$^{(}$ −∞ , t$_{1}$ − t$_{W}$ t$_{0}$ − t$_{W}$ b$_{k}$ − t$_{1}$ − t$_{0}$ t$_{0}$ − t$_{W}$ w$^{)}$ ,$$\n\n$$µ$_{0}$$_{,W}$ ( B$_{k}$ | w ) − µ$_{1}$$_{,W}$ $^{(}$B D k | w ) = F$_{0}$$_{,W}$ ( b$_{k}$ | w ) − F$_{1}$$_{,W}$$^{(}$ t$_{1}$ − t$_{W}$ t$_{0}$ − t$_{W}$ b$_{k}$ − t$_{1}$ − t$_{0}$ t$_{0}$ − t$_{W}$ w | w$^{)}$ ≤ 0 .$$\n\n$$F$_{0}$$_{,W}$ ( y | w ) ≤ F$_{1}$$_{,W}$$^{(}$ t$_{1}$ − t$_{w}$ t$_{0}$ − t$_{w}$ y − t$_{1}$ − t$_{0}$ t$_{0}$ − t$_{W}$ w | w$^{)}$ ,$$\n\n$$B D k =$^{(}$ −∞ , t$_{1}$ − t$_{W}$ t$_{0}$ − t$_{W}$ b$_{k}$ − t$_{1}$ − t$_{0}$ t$_{0}$ − t$_{W}$ w$^{)}$ ∪ φ =$^{(}$ −∞ , t$_{1}$ − t$_{W}$ t$_{0}$ − t$_{W}$ b$_{k}$ − t$_{1}$ − t$_{0}$ t$_{0}$ − t$_{W}$ w$^{)}$ .$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8823021560783434, + "doc_id": "30572f55e7d03bb6ef1ee25dbc60b4dbf6567e5e37ace0480e27e73e560e302c", + "edit_distance": 0.08019639934533551, + "f1_score": 0.9836065573770493, + "meteor": 0.9343260335144592, + "precision": 0.995850622406639, + "pred_md": "marginal distributions. Unfortunately, both approaches deliver bounds that are often too wide to be informative in practice. Since these two conditions are often plausible in practice, a natural way to tighten the bounds is considering both MTR and given marginal distributions of potential outcomes. However, methods of establishing informative bounds on the DTE under these two restrictions have remained unanswered. Specifically, in the existing copula approach it is technically challenging to find out the particular joint distributions that achieve the best possible bounds on the DTE under the two restrictions.\n\nIn this paper, I propose a novel approach to circumvent these difficulties associated with identifying the DTE under these two restrictions. Methodologically, my approach involves formulating the problem as an optimal transportation linear program and embedding support restrictions on the potential outcomes including MTR into the cost function. A key feature of the optimal transportation approach is that it admits a dual formulation. This makes it possible to derive the best possible bounds from the optimization problem with respect to given marginal distributions but not the joint distribution, which is an advantage over the copula approach. Specifically, the linearity of support restrictions in the entire joint distribution allows for the penalty formulation. Since support restrictions hold with probability one, the corresponding multiplier on those constraints should be infinite. To the best of my knowledge, the dual representation of such an optimization problem with an infinite Lagrange multiplier has not been derived in the literature. In this paper, I develop a dual representation for { 0 1 , , ∞} -valued costs by extending the existing result on duality for { 0 1 , } -valued costs.\n\nMy approach applies to general support restrictions on the potential outcomes as well as MTR. Such support restrictions encompass shape restrictions on the treatment response function that can be written as g ( Y , Y 0 1 ) ≤ 0 with probability one for any continuous function g : R → R , including MTR, concave treatment response, and convex treatment response. 1 Moreover, considering support restrictions opens the way to identify the DTE in the Roy model of self-selection and the DTE conditional on some sets of potential outcomes.\n\nNumerous examples in applied economics fit into this setting because marginal distributions are point or partially identified under weak conditions and support restrictions are often implied by economic theory and plausible priors. The marginal distributions of the potential outcomes are point-identified in randomized experiments or under unconfoundedness. Even if selection depends on unobservables, they are point-identified for compliers under the local average treatment effects assumptions (Imbens and Rubin (1997), Abadie (2002)) and are partially identified in the presence of instrumental variables (Kitagawa (2009)). Also, MTR has been defended as a plausible restriction in empirical studies of returns to education (Manski and Pepper\n\n1 Let Y d = f ( t d ) where Y d is a potential outcome and t d is a level of inputs for multi-valued treatment status d. Concave treatment response and convex treatment response assume that the treatment response function f is concave and convex, respectively.\n\n3", + "recall": 0.97165991902834, + "true_md": "marginal distributions. Unfortunately, both approaches deliver bounds that are often too wide to be infor- mative in practice. Since these two conditions are often plausible in practice, a natural way to tighten the bounds is considering both MTR and given marginal distributions of potential outcomes. However, methods of establishing informative bounds on the DTE under these two restrictions have remained unanswered. Specifically, in the existing copula approach it is technically challenging to find out the particular joint distributions that achieve the best possible bounds on the DTE under the two restrictions.\n\nIn this paper, I propose a novel approach to circumvent these difficulties associated with identifying the DTE under these two restrictions. Methodologically, my approach involves formulating the problem as an optimal transportation linear program and embedding support restrictions on the potential outcomes including MTR into the cost function. A key feature of the optimal transportation approach is that it admits a dual formulation. This makes it possible to derive the best possible bounds from the optimization problem with respect to given marginal distributions but not the joint distribution, which is an advantage over the copula approach. Specifically, the linearity of support restrictions in the entire joint distribution allows for the penalty formulation. Since support restrictions hold with probability one, the corresponding multiplier on those constraints should be infinite. To the best of my knowledge, the dual representation of such an optimization problem with an infinite Lagrange multiplier has not been derived in the literature. In this paper, I develop a dual representation for { 0 , 1 , ∞} -valued costs by extending the existing result on duality for { 0 , 1 } -valued costs.\n\nMy approach applies to general support restrictions on the potential outcomes as well as MTR. Such support restrictions encompass shape restrictions on the treatment response function that can be written as g ( Y$_{0}$, Y$_{1}$ ) ≤ 0 with probability one for any continuous function g : R → $_{R}$, including MTR, concave treatment response, and convex treatment response. 1 Moreover, considering support restrictions opens the way to identify the DTE in the Roy model of self-selection and the DTE conditional on some sets of potential outcomes.\n\nNumerous examples in applied economics fit into this setting because marginal distributions are point or partially identified under weak conditions and support restrictions are often implied by economic theory and plausible priors. The marginal distributions of the potential outcomes are point-identified in randomized ex- periments or under unconfoundedness. Even if selection depends on unobservables, they are point-identified for compliers under the local average treatment effects assumptions (Imbens and Rubin (1997), Abadie (2002)) and are partially identified in the presence of instrumental variables (Kitagawa (2009)). Also, MTR has been defended as a plausible restriction in empirical studies of returns to education (Manski and Pepper\n\n$^{1}$Let Y$_{d}$ = f ( t$_{d}$ ) where Y$_{d}$ is a potential outcome and t$_{d}$ is a level of inputs for multi-valued treatment status d. Concave treatment response and convex treatment response assume that the treatment response function f is concave and convex, respectively.\n\n3" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5125044323603691, + "doc_id": "489c29bc8eb5707dbe32cfa456d2c2ceb6c3c5a39529368a5d18e65cc1a242e6", + "edit_distance": 0.4942857142857143, + "f1_score": 0.9329896907216494, + "meteor": 0.644121726310874, + "precision": 0.9427083333333334, + "pred_md": "Remark 2.1 For the application of the results, it is possible to take the initial moment as t 0 = 0 , without being the discontinuity moment since of the group property. Then x 0 / ∈ Γ ∪ ˜ Γ .\n\nDenote by ̂ [ a, b , ] a, b ∈ R , the interval [ a, b , ] whenever a ≤ b and [ b, a , ] otherwise. Let x 1 ( ) t ∈ PC ( R + , θ 1 ) , θ 1 = { θ 1 i } , and x 2 ( ) t ∈ PC ( R + , θ 2 ) , θ 2 = { θ 2 i } , be two different solutions of (2.1).\n\nDefinition 2.3 The solution x 2 ( ) t is in the /epsilon1 -neighborhood of x 1 ( ) t on the interval I if\n\n- · the sets θ 1 and θ 2 have same number of elements in I ;\n- · | θ 1 i -θ 2 i | < /epsilon1 for all θ 1 i ∈ I ;\n- · the inequality || x 1 ( ) t -x 2 ( ) t || < /epsilon1 is valid for all t, which satisfy t ∈ I \\ ∪ θ 1 i ∈ I ( θ 1 i -/epsilon1, θ 1 i + ) /epsilon1 .\n\nThe topology defined with the help of /epsilon1 -neighborhoods is called the B-topology. It can be apparently seen that it is Hausdorff and it can be considered also if two solutions x 1 ( ) t and x 2 ( ) t are defined on a semi-axis or on the entire real axis.\n\nDefinition 2.4 The solution x 0 ( ) = t x t, ( 0 , x 0 ) , t ∈ R , x 0 ∈ D, of (2.1) B-continuously depends on x 0 for increasing t if there corresponds a positive number δ to any positive /epsilon1 and a finite interval [0 , b , ] b > 0 such that any other solution x t ( ) = x t, ( 0 , x ˜) of (2.1) lies in /epsilon1 -neighborhood of x 0 ( ) t on [0 , b ] whenever ˜ x ∈ B x , δ . ( 0 ) Similarly, the solution x 0 ( ) t of (2.1) B-continuously depends on x 0 for decreasing t if there corresponds a positive number δ to any positive /epsilon1 and a finite interval [ a, 0] , a < 0 such that any other solution x t ( ) = x t, ( 0 , x ˜) of (2.1) lies in /epsilon1 -neighborhood of x 0 ( ) t on [ a, 0] whenever ˜ x ∈ B x , δ . ( 0 ) The solution x 0 ( ) t of (2.1) B-continuously depends on x 0 if it continuously depends on the initial value, x , 0 for both increasing and decreasing t.\n\nIf conditions (C1)-(C7) hold, then each solution x 0 ( ) : t R → R n , x 0 ( ) = t x t, ( 0 , x 0 ) , of (2.1) continuously depends on x 0 [1].\n\n## 2.1 B-equivalence to a system with fixed moments of impulses\n\nIn order to facilitate the analysis of the system with variable moments of impulses (2.1), a B-equivalent system [1] to the system with variable moments of impulses will be utilized in our study. Below, we will construct the B-equivalent system.\n\nLet x t ( ) = x t, ( 0 , x 0 + ∆ ) x be a solution of system (2.1) neighbor to x 0 ( ) t with small ‖ ∆ x . ‖ If the point x 0 ( θ i ) is a ( β ) -or ( γ ) -type point, then it is a boundary point. For this reason, there exist two different possibilities for the near solution x t ( ) with respect to the surface of discontinuity. They are:\n\n- ( N 1) The solution x t ( ) intersects the surface of discontinuity, Γ , at a moment near to θ , i\n- ( N 2) The solution x t ( ) does not intersect Γ , in a small time interval centered at θ . i\n\n6", + "recall": 0.923469387755102, + "true_md": "Remark 2.1 For the application of the results, it is possible to take the initial moment as t$_{0}$ = 0 , without being the discontinuity moment since of the group property. Then x$_{0}$ / ∈ Γ ∪ ˜ Γ .\n\nDenote by ̂ [ a, b ] , a, b ∈ $^{R}$, the interval [ a, b ] , whenever a ≤ b and [ b, a ] , otherwise. Let x$_{1}$ ( t ) ∈ P C ( $^{R$\\_{+}$}$, θ $^{1}$) , θ 1 = { θ 1 i } , and x$_{2}$ ( t ) ∈ P C ( $^{R$\\_{+}$}$, θ $^{2}$) , θ 2 = { θ 2 i } , be two different solutions of (2.1).\n\nDefinition 2.3 The solution x$_{2}$ ( t ) is in the ϵ − neighborhood of x$_{1}$ ( t ) on the interval I if\n\nThe topology defined with the help of ϵ − neighborhoods is called the B-topology. It can be apparently seen that it is Hausdorff and it can be considered also if two solutions x$_{1}$ ( t ) and x$_{2}$ ( t ) are defined on a semi-axis or on the entire real axis.\n\nDefinition 2.4 The solution x$_{0}$ ( t ) = x ( t, 0 , x$_{0}$ ) , t ∈ $^{R}$, x$_{0}$ ∈ D, of (2.1) B-continuously depends on x$_{0}$ for increasing t if there corresponds a positive number δ to any positive ϵ and a finite interval [0 , b ] , b > 0 such that any other solution x ( t ) = x ( t, 0 , ˜ x ) of (2.1) lies in ϵ − neighborhood of x$_{0}$ ( t ) on [0 , b ] whenever ˜ x ∈ B ( x$_{0}$, δ ) . Similarly, the solution x$_{0}$ ( t ) of (2.1) B-continuously depends on x$_{0}$ for decreasing t if there corresponds a positive number δ to any positive ϵ and a finite interval [ a, 0] , a < 0 such that any other solution x ( t ) = x ( t, 0 , ˜ x ) of (2.1) lies in ϵ − neighborhood of x$_{0}$ ( t ) on [ a, 0] whenever ˜ x ∈ B ( x$_{0}$, δ ) . The solution x$_{0}$ ( t ) of (2.1) B-continuously depends on x$_{0}$ if it continuously depends on the initial value, x$_{0}$, for both increasing and decreasing t.\n\nIf conditions (C1)-(C7) hold, then each solution x$_{0}$ ( t ) : $^{R}$→ R $^{n}$, x$_{0}$ ( t ) = x ( t, 0 , x$_{0}$ ) , of (2.1) continu- ously depends on x$_{0}$ [1].\n\nIn order to facilitate the analysis of the system with variable moments of impulses (2.1), a B-equivalent system [1] to the system with variable moments of impulses will be utilized in our study. Below, we will construct the B-equivalent system.\n\nLet x ( t ) = x ( t, 0 , x$_{0}$ + Δ x ) be a solution of system (2.1) neighbor to x$_{0}$ ( t ) with small ‖ Δ x ‖ . If the point x$_{0}$ ( θ$_{i}$ ) is a ( β ) − or ( γ ) − type point, then it is a boundary point. For this reason, there exist two different possibilities for the near solution x ( t ) with respect to the surface of discontinuity. They are:\n\n- • the sets θ 1 and θ 2 have same number of elements in I ;\n\n- • | θ 1 i − θ 2 i | < ϵ for all θ 1 i ∈ I ;\n\n- • the inequality || x$_{1}$ ( t ) − x$_{2}$ ( t ) || < ϵ is valid for all t, which satisfy t ∈ I \\ ∪ θ 1 i ∈ I ( θ 1 i − ϵ, θ 1 i + ϵ ) .\n\n- ( N 1) The solution x ( t ) intersects the surface of discontinuity, Γ , at a moment near to θ$_{i}$,\n\n- ( N 2) The solution x ( t ) does not intersect Γ , in a small time interval centered at θ$_{i}$.\n\n## 2.1 B-equivalence to a system with fixed moments of impulses\n\n6" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.36618624024374685, + "doc_id": "2bbd785ae67784ec03933a351f4826bd0cc893b4de7f2b6756e2dc91b6150fff", + "edit_distance": 0.5586206896551724, + "f1_score": 0.9051490514905149, + "meteor": 0.5393885050750322, + "precision": 0.9277777777777778, + "pred_md": "where\n\n\n\n\n\nwhere A δ = { { a k } ∞ k = -∞ ; 0 ≤ a k +1 -a k ≤ δ for each integer k } .\n\n## Proof. See Appendix A.\n\nThe identifying power of MTR on the lower bound has an interesting graphical interpretation. As shown in Figure 7(a), the DTE under MTR corresponds to the probability of the region between two straight lines Y 1 = Y 0 and Y 1 = Y 0 + . Given marginal distributions, the Makarov lower bound is obtained by picking δ y ∗ ∈ R such that a rectangle [ y ∗ -δ, ∞ × -∞ ) ( , y ∗ ] yields the maximum Fr' echet lower bound among all rectangles below the straight line Y 1 = Y 0 + δ. As shown in Figure 7(b), under MTR the probability of any rectangle [ y -δ, ∞ × -∞ ) ( , y ] below the straight line Y 1 = Y 0 + δ is equal to that of the triangle between two straight lines Y 1 = Y 0 + δ and Y 1 = Y . 0 Now one can draw multiple mutually disjoint triangles between two straight lines Y 1 = Y 0 and Y 1 = Y 0 + δ as in Figure 7(c). Since the probability of each triangle is equal to the probability of the rectangle extended to the right and bottom sides, the lower bound on each triangle is obtained by applying the Fr'chet lower bound to the extended rectangle. Then the improved lower bound e is obtained by summing the Fr'chet e lower bounds on the triangles.\n\nOne of the key benefits of my characterization based on the optimal transportation approach is that it guarantees sharpness of the bounds. To show sharpness of given bounds in a copula approach, one should show what dependence structures achieve the bounds under fixed marginal distributions. This is technically difficult under MTR. However, the optimal transportation approach gets around this challenge by focusing on a dual representation involving given marginal distributions only.\n\nNow I provide a sketch of the procedure to derive the lower bound under MTR from Theorem 1. The proof of deriving the lower bound from Theorem 1 proceeds in two stpng.\n\nThe first step is to show that the dual function ϕ is nondecreasing so that one can put A k = ( a , k ∞ ) for a k ∈ -∞ ∞ [ , ] at the optimum. For any ( y , y 0 1 ) in the support of the optimal joint distribution, the dual function ϕ for the lower bound is written as\n\n\n\n20", + "recall": 0.8835978835978836, + "true_md": "where\n\nProof. See Appendix A.\n\nThe identifying power of MTR on the lower bound has an interesting graphical interpretation. As shown in Figure 7(a), the DTE under MTR corresponds to the probability of the region between two straight lines Y$_{1}$ = Y$_{0}$ and Y$_{1}$ = Y$_{0}$ + δ . Given marginal distributions, the Makarov lower bound is obtained by picking y ∗ ∈ R such that a rectangle [ y ∗ − δ, ∞ ) × ( −∞ , y $^{∗}$] yields the maximum Fr´echet lower bound among all rectangles below the straight line Y$_{1}$ = Y$_{0}$ + δ. As shown in Figure 7(b), under MTR the probability of any rectangle [ y − δ, ∞ ) × ( −∞ , y ] below the straight line Y$_{1}$ = Y$_{0}$ + δ is equal to that of the triangle between two straight lines Y$_{1}$ = Y$_{0}$ + δ and Y$_{1}$ = Y$_{0}$. Now one can draw multiple mutually disjoint triangles between two straight lines Y$_{1}$ = Y$_{0}$ and Y$_{1}$ = Y$_{0}$ + δ as in Figure 7(c). Since the probability of each triangle is equal to the probability of the rectangle extended to the right and bottom sides, the lower bound on each triangle is obtained by applying the Fr´echet lower bound to the extended rectangle. Then the improved lower bound is obtained by summing the Fr´echet lower bounds on the triangles.\n\nOne of the key benefits of my characterization based on the optimal transportation approach is that it guarantees sharpness of the bounds. To show sharpness of given bounds in a copula approach, one should show what dependence structures achieve the bounds under fixed marginal distributions. This is technically difficult under MTR. However, the optimal transportation approach gets around this challenge by focusing on a dual representation involving given marginal distributions only.\n\nNow I provide a sketch of the procedure to derive the lower bound under MTR from Theorem 1. The proof of deriving the lower bound from Theorem 1 proceeds in two stpng.\n\nThe first step is to show that the dual function ϕ is nondecreasing so that one can put A$_{k}$ = ( a$_{k}$, ∞ ) for a$_{k}$ ∈ [ −∞ , ∞ ] at the optimum. For any ( y$_{0}$, y$_{1}$ ) in the support of the optimal joint distribution, the dual function ϕ for the lower bound is written as\n\n$$ϕ ( y$_{0}$ ) = inf y$_{1}$ ≥ y$_{0}$ { 1 { y$_{1}$ − y$_{0}$ < δ } − ψ ( y$_{1}$ ) } .$$\n\n$$F U Δ ( δ ) =      1 + inf y ∈$_{R}$ { min ( F$_{1}$ ( y ) − F$_{0}$ ( y − δ )) , 0 } , for δ ≥ 0 , 0 , for δ < 0 . , F L Δ ( δ ) =      sup { a$_{k}$ } ∞ k = $_{−∞}$∈A$_{δ}$ ∞ ∑ k = −∞ max { F$_{1}$ ( a$_{k}$$_{+1}$ ) − F$_{0}$ ( a$_{k}$ ) , 0 } , for δ ≥ 0 , 0 , for δ < 0 , , where A$_{δ}$ = $^{{}${ a$_{k}$ } ∞ k = $_{−∞}$; 0 ≤ a$_{k}$$_{+1}$ − a$_{k}$ ≤ δ for each integer k $^{}}$.$$\n\n20" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9560210639214667, + "doc_id": "90df7658fdb8d3c32c5c79a29389588a9fde8e3496509130677515d6b517b1ae", + "edit_distance": 0.07142857142857142, + "f1_score": 0.9829787234042554, + "meteor": 0.9808549726971268, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "arXiv:1509.01678v1 [math.DS] 5 Sep 2015\n\n## Discontinuous dynamics with grazing points\n\nM. U. Akhmet a, ∗ , A. Kıvılcım a\n\na Department of Mathematics, Middle East Technical University, 06800, Ankara, Turkey\n\n## Abstract\n\nDiscontinuous dynamical systems with grazing solutions are discussed. The group property, continuation of solutions, continuity and smoothness of motions are thoroughly analyzed. A variational system around a grazing solution which depends on near solutions is constructed. Orbital stability of grazing cycles is examined by linearization. Small parameter method is extended for analysis of neighborhoods of grazing orbits, and grazing bifurcation of cycles is observed in an example. Linearization around an equilibrium grazing point is discussed. The mathematical background of the study relies on the theory of discontinuous dynamical systems [1]. Our approach is analogous to that one of the continuous dynamics analysis and results can be extended on functional differential, partial differential equations and others. Appropriate illustrations with grazing limit cycles and bifurcations are depicted to support the theoretical results.\n\nKeywords: Discontinuous dynamical systems; Grazing points and orbits; Axial and non-axial grazing; Variational system; Orbital stability; Small parameter; Bifurcation of cycles; Impact mechanisms\n\n## 1 Introduction\n\nVibro-impacting systems provide examples of non-linear dynamical systems, exhibiting new levels of complicated dynamics due to their non-smoothness. Grazing phenomenon is one of the attractive features for these dynamics [13]-[36], [26]-[29]. There are two approaches for the definition of grazing in literature. One is presented in the studies of Bernardo, Budd and Champneys [7, 8], Bernardo and Hogan [9], and Luo [26]-[29]. In these studies, it is asserted that grazing occurs when a trajectory hits the surface of discontinuity tangentially. In [36]-[39], Nordmark defines grazing as the approach of the velocity to zero in the neighborhood of the surface of discontinuity which is the case of the studies conducted in [7]-[9], [26]-[29]. Our comprehension of grazing in this paper is close to that one in [8],[9],[26]. In the paper [15], grazing is considered as a bounding case which separates regions of quite different dynamic behaviors. It is understood that the system trajectory makes tangential contact with an event triggering hypersurface. The shooting, continuation and optimization methods are developed and illustrated for both transient and grazing phenomena. It is exemplified by utilizing power electronics and robotics. In [41], the grazing periodic orbit and its linearization are obtained by means of a numerical continuation method\n\n∗ Corresponding Author Tel.: +90 312 210 5355, Fax: +90 312 210 2972, E-mail: marat@metu.edu.tr\n\n1", + "recall": 0.9665271966527197, + "true_md": "# Discontinuous dynamics with grazing points\n\nM. U. Akhmet $^{a,}$∗ , A. Kıvılcım a\n\na Department of Mathematics, Middle East Technical University, 06800, Ankara, Turkey\n\nDiscontinuous dynamical systems with grazing solutions are discussed. The group property, continu- ation of solutions, continuity and smoothness of motions are thoroughly analyzed. A variational system around a grazing solution which depends on near solutions is constructed. Orbital stability of grazing cycles is examined by linearization. Small parameter method is extended for analysis of neighborhoods of grazing orbits, and grazing bifurcation of cycles is observed in an example. Linearization around an equilibrium grazing point is discussed. The mathematical background of the study relies on the theory of discontinuous dynamical systems [1]. Our approach is analogous to that one of the continuous dy- namics analysis and results can be extended on functional differential, partial differential equations and others. Appropriate illustrations with grazing limit cycles and bifurcations are depicted to support the theoretical results.\n\nKeywords: Discontinuous dynamical systems; Grazing points and orbits; Axial and non-axial grazing; Variational system; Orbital stability; Small parameter; Bifurcation of cycles; Impact mechanisms\n\nVibro-impacting systems provide examples of non-linear dynamical systems, exhibiting new levels of complicated dynamics due to their non-smoothness. Grazing phenomenon is one of the attractive features for these dynamics [13]-[36], [26]-[29]. There are two approaches for the definition of grazing in literature. One is presented in the studies of Bernardo, Budd and Champneys [7, 8], Bernardo and Hogan [9], and Luo [26]-[29]. In these studies, it is asserted that grazing occurs when a trajectory hits the surface of discontinuity tangentially. In [36]-[39], Nordmark defines grazing as the approach of the velocity to zero in the neighborhood of the surface of discontinuity which is the case of the studies conducted in [7]-[9], [26]-[29]. Our comprehension of grazing in this paper is close to that one in [8],[9],[26]. In the paper [15], grazing is considered as a bounding case which separates regions of quite different dynamic behaviors. It is understood that the system trajectory makes tangential contact with an event triggering hypersurface. The shooting, continuation and optimization methods are developed and illustrated for both transient and grazing phenomena. It is exemplified by utilizing power electronics and robotics. In [41], the grazing periodic orbit and its linearization are obtained by means of a numerical continuation method\n\n## 1 Introduction\n\n## Abstract\n\n∗ Corresponding Author Tel.: +90 312 210 5355, Fax: +90 312 210 2972, E-mail: marat@metu.edu.tr\n\n1\n\narXiv:1509.01678v1 [math.DS] 5 Sep 2015" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9324048689685406, + "doc_id": "3f051980c16323750222d0e901f9e5e30501f386079e423dbb1a7208f2171a83", + "edit_distance": 0.06720430107526881, + "f1_score": 0.9596199524940617, + "meteor": 0.9646564820096146, + "precision": 0.9805825242718447, + "pred_md": "band imaging data, which appeared superior to the other acquisitions in terms of both accuracy and reliability of rfMRI (Zuo and Xing, 2014). More details on these data are publicly accessible via the FCP/INDI website (http: //fcon\\_1000.projects.nitrc.org/indi/enhanced/index.html) . All image data were preprocessed using the Connectome Computation System (CCS) pipeline. The preprocessing strategy included discarding the first several volumes (10 seconds), removing and interpolating spikes that arise from either hardware instability or head motion, slice-time correction, image intensity normalization, and removing the effect of physiological noise by regressing out twenty-four parameters from a motion model (Yan et al., 2013; Satterthwaite et al., 2013) as well as nuisance variables such as white matter and cerebrospinal fluid signals, along with both linear and quadratic trends. Details of the image preprocessing steps are described in Xu et al. (2015). In total, we processed data from 418 individual participants. The quality control procedure in the CCS excluded 19 participants due to their low-quality multimodal imaging datasets, which met at least one of the following criteria: (1) failed visual inspection of anatomical images and surfaces; (2) mean frame-wise displacement > 0.2 mm; (3) maximum translation > 3 mm; (4) maximum rotation > 3 ; · or (5) minimum cost of boundary-based registration (a measure of image registration quality) > 0.6. Additionally, 51 participants were excluded from subsequent analyses because of clinical diagnoses as defined by DSM-IV or ICD10 and 32 due to incompleteness of the multimodal imaging datasets. This leads to a lifespan sample of 316 healthy participants. Within this sample we focus on a sub-sample of healthy adults aged 18-30 years, comprising 80 participants.\n\n## Static functional connectivity\n\nWe term the functional connectivity network estimated over the duration of the entire scan session as the static functional connectivity (sFC). We con-\n\n5", + "recall": 0.9395348837209302, + "true_md": "band imaging data, which appeared superior to the other acquisitions in terms of both accuracy and reliability of rfMRI (Zuo and Xing, 2014). More de- tails on these data are publicly accessible via the FCP/INDI website (http: //fcon\\_1000.projects.nitrc.org/indi/enhanced/index.html) . All image data were preprocessed using the Connectome Computation System (CCS) pipeline. The preprocessing strategy included discarding the first several vol- umes (10 seconds), removing and interpolating spikes that arise from either hardware instability or head motion, slice-time correction, image intensity nor- malization, and removing the effect of physiological noise by regressing out twenty-four parameters from a motion model (Yan et al., 2013; Satterthwaite et al., 2013) as well as nuisance variables such as white matter and cerebrospinal fluid signals, along with both linear and quadratic trends. Details of the image preprocessing steps are described in Xu et al. (2015). In total, we processed data from 418 individual participants. The quality control procedure in the CCS ex- cluded 19 participants due to their low-quality multimodal imaging datasets, which met at least one of the following criteria: (1) failed visual inspection of anatomical images and surfaces; (2) mean frame-wise displacement > 0.2 mm; (3) maximum translation > 3 mm; (4) maximum rotation > 3 $^{◦}$; or (5) minimum cost of boundary-based registration (a measure of image registration quality) > 0.6. Additionally, 51 participants were excluded from subsequent analyses because of clinical diagnoses as defined by DSM-IV or ICD10 and 32 due to incompleteness of the multimodal imaging datasets. This leads to a lifespan sample of 316 healthy participants. Within this sample we focus on a sub-sample of healthy adults aged 18-30 years, comprising 80 participants.\n\nWe term the functional connectivity network estimated over the duration of the entire scan session as the static functional connectivity (sFC). We con-\n\n## Static functional connectivity\n\n5" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6070475904721354, + "doc_id": "be6ca4ecb77ab9eb30e3c8107aaab9a593cce798a3ce98281f0c81b5a978e015", + "edit_distance": 0.25942350332594233, + "f1_score": 0.9587155963302754, + "meteor": 0.7749889924634221, + "precision": 0.9720930232558139, + "pred_md": "model parameters and latent states (the unknown components for which we may seek inferences) as Θ = { θ , . . . , θ 1 d } , which will be referred to as the parameters of M .\n\nAn MCMC algorithm may be defined in terms of its sampling scheme over Θ. Let b be any non-empty subset ('block') of Θ, and u ∈ U be any valid MCMC sampling (or 'updating') method such as slice sampling or conjugate Gibbs sampling (see Gilks, 2005, for a broad overview of MCMC sampling methods). We define a valid MCMC sampler ψ = u b ( ) as the application of u to b , where b satisfies any assumptions of u ( e.g., conjugacy). In addition to satisfying standard properties of Markov chains (see, for example, Robert and Casella, 2004), we define a valid MCMC algorithm as any set of samplers Ψ = { ψ , . . . , ψ 1 k } , where ψ i = u i ( b i ) for i = 1 , . . . , k , satisfying ∪ k i =1 b i = Θ; that is, the MCMC algorithm updates each model parameter in at least one sampler. We represent the chain of samples generated from successive applications of Ψ as X (0) , X (1) , . . . , where sample X ( ) i implies model state Θ = X ( ) i , X (0) is the set of initial values, X ( ) i = ( X ( ) i 1 , . . . , X ( ) i d ), and X k = { X (0) k , X (1) k , . . . } is the scalar chain of samples of θ k (for k = 1 , . . . , d ).\n\nThis paper focuses attention on the restricted set of sampling methods U 0 = { u scalar , u block } , where u scalar denotes univariate adaptive random walk Metropolis-Hastings sampling (hereafter, scalar sampling; Metropolis et al., 1953; Hastings, 1970), and u block denotes the multivariate generalization of this algorithm (hereafter, block sampling; Haario, Saksman, and Tamminen, 1999), with the practical restriction that any ψ = u block ( b ) satisfies | b | > 1. The u scalar algorithm adaptively tunes the proposal scale, while u block additionally tunes the proposal covariance (Roberts and Rosenthal, 2009). All scalar and block samplers asymptotically achieve the theoretically optimal scaling of proposal distributions (and therefore acceptance rates, and mixing) as derived in Roberts, Gelman, and Gilks (1997), and implement adaptation routines as set out in Shaby and Wells (2011).\n\nFor hierarchical model M with parameters Θ, our studies focus almost exclusively on the set of MCMC algorithms Ψ M , which contains all algorithms of the form Ψ = { ψ , . . . , ψ 1 k } , where ψ i = u i ( b i ), each u i ∈ U 0 , and the sets b i form a partition of Θ. We specifically name two algorithms in Ψ M which are boundary cases. The first consists of d scalar samplers: Ψ scalar = { ψ , . . . , ψ 1 d } , where each ψ i = u scalar ( θ i ). The second has a single block sampler for all parameters: Ψ block = { u block (Θ) . } Implicit is the assumption that each θ i is continuous-valued, which is the case throughout this paper.\n\n6", + "recall": 0.9457013574660633, + "true_md": "model parameters and latent states (the unknown components for which we may seek inferences) as Θ = { θ$_{1}$, . . . , θ$_{d}$ } , which will be referred to as the parameters of M .\n\nAn MCMC algorithm may be defined in terms of its sampling scheme over Θ. Let b be any non-empty subset (“block”) of Θ, and u ∈ U be any valid MCMC sampling (or “updating”) method such as slice sampling or conjugate Gibbs sampling (see Gilks, 2005, for a broad overview of MCMC sampling methods). We define a valid MCMC sampler ψ = u ( b ) as the application of u to b , where b satisfies any assumptions of u ( e.g., conjugacy). In addition to satisfying standard properties of Markov chains (see, for example, Robert and Casella, 2004), we define a valid MCMC algorithm as any set of samplers Ψ = { ψ$_{1}$, . . . , ψ$_{k}$ } , where ψ$_{i}$ = u$_{i}$ ( b$_{i}$ ) for i = 1 , . . . , k , satisfying ∪ k i $_{=1}$b$_{i}$ = Θ; that is, the MCMC algorithm updates each model parameter in at least one sampler. We represent the chain of samples generated from successive applications of Ψ as X $^{(0)}$, X$^{(1)}$, . . . , where sample X ( i ) implies model state Θ = X ( i $^{)}$, X (0) is the set of initial values, X ( i ) = ( X ( i ) 1 , . . . , X ( i ) d ), and X$_{k}$ = { X (0) k , X (1) k , . . . } is the scalar chain of samples of θ$_{k}$ (for k = 1 , . . . , d ).\n\nThis paper focuses attention on the restricted set of sampling methods U$_{0}$ = { u$_{scalar}$, u$_{block}$ } , where u$_{scalar}$ denotes univariate adaptive random walk Metropolis-Hastings sampling (hereafter, scalar sampling; Metropolis et al., 1953; Hastings, 1970), and u$_{block}$ denotes the multivariate gen- eralization of this algorithm (hereafter, block sampling; Haario, Saksman, and Tamminen, 1999), with the practical restriction that any ψ = u$_{block}$ ( b ) satisfies | b | > 1. The u$_{scalar}$ algorithm adap- tively tunes the proposal scale, while u$_{block}$ additionally tunes the proposal covariance (Roberts and Rosenthal, 2009). All scalar and block samplers asymptotically achieve the theoretically op- timal scaling of proposal distributions (and therefore acceptance rates, and mixing) as derived in Roberts, Gelman, and Gilks (1997), and implement adaptation routines as set out in Shaby and Wells (2011).\n\nFor hierarchical model M with parameters Θ, our studies focus almost exclusively on the set of MCMC algorithms Ψ$_{M}$ , which contains all algorithms of the form Ψ = { ψ$_{1}$, . . . , ψ$_{k}$ } , where ψ$_{i}$ = u$_{i}$ ( b$_{i}$ ), each u$_{i}$ ∈ U$_{0}$ , and the sets b$_{i}$ form a partition of Θ. We specifically name two algorithms in Ψ$_{M}$ which are boundary cases. The first consists of d scalar samplers: Ψ$_{scalar}$ = { ψ$_{1}$, . . . , ψ$_{d}$ } , where each ψ$_{i}$ = u$_{scalar}$ ( θ$_{i}$ ). The second has a single block sampler for all parameters: Ψ$_{block}$ = { u$_{block}$ (Θ) } . Implicit is the assumption that each θ$_{i}$ is continuous-valued, which is the case throughout this paper.\n\n6" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7708553149000094, + "doc_id": "c7823cba977ecc2cba770b597349e12a18623c2845deaf3b5716e454d6f3cc3a", + "edit_distance": 0.14918414918414918, + "f1_score": 0.8463611859838275, + "meteor": 0.8615987935577278, + "precision": 0.8870056497175142, + "pred_md": "19\n\n- [7] A. Abardo, A. Alessio, P. Detti and M. Moretti, 'Centralized radio resource allocation for OFDMA cellular systems,' Proceedings of IEEE International Conference on Communications, (ICC'07) , pp. 5738 - 5743, Glasgow, Scotland, 24-28 June 2007.\n- [8] M. Moretti and A. Todini, 'A resource allocator for the uplink of multi-cell OFDMA systems,' IEEE Transactions on Wireless Communications , vol. 6, no. 8, pp. 2807-2812, August 2007.\n- [9] S. G. Kiani, G. E. Jien, and D. Gesbert, 'Maximizing multicell capacity using distributed power allocation and scheduling,' Proceedings of IEEE Wireless Communications and Networking Conference , (WCNC'07) , Hong Kong, March 2007.\n- [10] K. Yang, N. Prasad, X. Wang, 'An auction approach to resource allocation in uplink multi-Cell OFDMA systems,' Proceedings of Global Communications Conference, (GLOBECOM' 08) , New Orleans, Louisinia, USA, November 30December 4, 2008.\n- [11] E. Yaacoub and Z. Dawy, 'A transparent pricing scheme for interference mitigation in uplink OFDMA with collaborative distributed scheduling,' Proceedings of 17th International Conference on Telecommunications 2010 (ICT'10) , Doha, Qatar, April 2010.\n- [12] H. Tabassum, Z. Dawy and M-S. Alouini, 'Sum Rate maximization in the uplink of multi-cell OFDMA networks,' Proceedings of 7th International Wireless Communications and Mobile Computing Conference 2011 (IWCMC'11) , Istanbul, Turkey, July 2011.\n- [13] M. Grant and S. Boyd, 'CVX: MATLAB software for disciplined convex programming,' 2007.\n- [14] M. Chiang, C. W. Tan, D. Palomar, D. O'Neill, and D. Julian, 'Power control by geometric programming,' IEEE Transactions on Wireless Communications , vol. 6, no. 7, pp. 2640-2651, July 2007.\n- [15] K. O. Kortanek, X. Xu, and Y.Ye, 'An infeasible interior-point algorithm for solving primal and dual geometric programs,' Mathematical Programming , vol. 76, pp. 155-181, 1997.\n\nMarch 19, 2018\n\nDRAFT", + "recall": 0.8092783505154639, + "true_md": "19\n\n- [7] A. Abardo, A. Alessio, P. Detti and M. Moretti, “Centrali zed radio resource allocation for OFDMA cellular systems,” Proceedings of IEEE International Conference on Communications, (ICC’07) , pp. 5738 – 5743, Glasgow, Scotland, 24-28 June 2007.\n\n- [8] M. Moretti and A. Todini, “A resource allocator for the up link of multi-cell OFDMA systems,” IEEE Transactions on Wireless Communications , vol. 6, no. 8, pp. 2807–2812, August 2007.\n\n- [9] S. G. Kiani, G. E. Jien, and D. Gesbert, “Maximizing multi cell capacity using distributed power allocation and scheduling,” Proceedings of IEEE Wireless Communications and Networking Conference , (WCNC’07) , Hong Kong, March 2007.\n\n- [10] K. Yang, N. Prasad, X. Wang, “An auction approach to reso urce allocation in uplink multi-Cell OFDMA systems,” Proceedings of Global Communications Conference, (GLOBECOM’ 08) , New Orleans, Louisinia, USA, November 30- December 4, 2008.\n\n- [11] E. Yaacoub and Z. Dawy, “A transparent pricing scheme fo r interference mitigation in uplink OFDMA with collaborative distributed scheduling,” Proceedings of 17th International Conference on Telecommunications 2010 (ICT’10) , Doha, Qatar, April 2010.\n\n- [12] H. Tabassum, Z. Dawy and M-S. Alouini, “Sum Rate maximiz ation in the uplink of multi-cell OFDMA networks,” Proceedings of 7th International Wireless Communications and Mobile Computing Conference 2011 (IWCMC’11) , Istanbul, Turkey, July 2011.\n\n- [13] M. Grant and S. Boyd, “CVX: MATLAB software for discipli ned convex programming,” 2007.\n\n- [14] M. Chiang, C. W. Tan, D. Palomar, D. O’Neill, and D. Julian, “Power control by geometric programming,” IEEE Transactions on Wireless Communications , vol. 6, no. 7, pp. 2640–2651, July 2007.\n\n- [15] K. O. Kortanek, X. Xu, and Y.Ye, “An infeasible interior -point algorithm for solving primal and dual geometric programs,” Mathematical Programming , vol. 76, pp. 155–181, 1997.\n\nDRAFT\n\nMarch 19, 2018" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8788265128763764, + "doc_id": "ce17b4186486afea9a747fa775f958a1365f50eea08eb327ede458b8854d612a", + "edit_distance": 0.09667673716012085, + "f1_score": 0.9516129032258066, + "meteor": 0.9379219898010779, + "precision": 0.9725274725274725, + "pred_md": "groups. For each group, we generated, separately, estimates of x -ij , x + ij . We then asked whether the elements of these matrices from the low-motion correlation group were similar to those generated from the full cohort. We found a strong correspondence in both cases, with matrix-wise correlations of r + = 0 85 and . r -= 0 75 (Figure S4). .\n\n## Discussion\n\nIn this report we focus on an aspect of dynamic functional connectivity that has so far been left relatively unexplored. We show that, when measured using Pearson's correlation coefficient, certain aspects of dynamic functional connectivity, namely the temporal mean and the range of dynamic fluctuations, can be partially predicted from the static connectivity alone. Our analyses indicate that this relationship is, in part, a mathematical consequence of time series dynamics and may therefore not implicate any underlying neurobiological process that actively drives dFC fluctuations. To account for this statistical relationship, we propose a measure that highlights fluctuations in functional connectivity that are unexpected given the underlying static connectivity. We use this method to identify time points when specific connections are unexpectedly strong or weak, and find that these connections tend to cluster temporally, resulting in mass excursions. We find that during these events, functional brain networks adopt highly modular topologies compared to other time periods. Furthermore, we show that such events tend to involve a disproportionately large number of connections associated with visual and somatomotor systems compared to higher-level association networks. We go on to show that, across participants, these events are not systematically related to participant head motion and include many long-range connections, suggesting that they cannot be explained as spatial artifacts.\n\n20", + "recall": 0.9315789473684211, + "true_md": "groups. For each group, we generated, separately, estimates of x − $_{ij}$, x + $_{ij}$. We then asked whether the elements of these matrices from the low-motion correlation group were similar to those generated from the full cohort. We found a strong correspondence in both cases, with matrix-wise correlations of r + = 0 . 85 and r − = 0 . 75 (Figure S4).\n\nIn this report we focus on an aspect of dynamic functional connectivity that has so far been left relatively unexplored. We show that, when measured using Pearson’s correlation coefficient, certain aspects of dynamic functional connec- tivity, namely the temporal mean and the range of dynamic fluctuations, can be partially predicted from the static connectivity alone. Our analyses indicate that this relationship is, in part, a mathematical consequence of time series dynam- ics and may therefore not implicate any underlying neurobiological process that actively drives dFC fluctuations. To account for this statistical relationship, we propose a measure that highlights fluctuations in functional connectivity that are unexpected given the underlying static connectivity. We use this method to identify time points when specific connections are unexpectedly strong or weak, and find that these connections tend to cluster temporally, resulting in mass excursions. We find that during these events, functional brain networks adopt highly modular topologies compared to other time periods. Furthermore, we show that such events tend to involve a disproportionately large number of connections associated with visual and somatomotor systems compared to higher-level association networks. We go on to show that, across participants, these events are not systematically related to participant head motion and in- clude many long-range connections, suggesting that they cannot be explained as spatial artifacts.\n\n20\n\n## Discussion" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.06855428878810456, + "doc_id": "2e0f619a68bcc210a613ca32a5653cfbcd71ac954f67c089b0cf0a300c20238e", + "edit_distance": 0.762051282051282, + "f1_score": 0.8876404494382022, + "meteor": 0.2155809784537527, + "precision": 0.9186046511627907, + "pred_md": "Figure A.5: Support under concave treatment response\n\nFigure A.5: Support under concave treatment response\n\nThe function ϕ can be readily shown to be nonincreasing. Thus, at the optimum B k = ( -∞ , b k ) with b k +1 ≤ b k and b k ∈ -∞ ∞ [ , ] for every integer k . By Theorem 1, for δ > 0 , B D k is written as\n\n\n\nNote that Y 1 = Y 0 + δ and Y 1 = t 1 -t W t 0 -t W Y 0 -t 1 -t 0 t 0 -t W w intersect at ( t 0 -t W t 1 -t 0 δ + y -1 , t 1 -t W t 1 -t 0 δ + w ) . I consider the following three cases: a) b k +1 ≤ b k ≤ t 0 -t W t 1 -t 0 δ + w, b) b k +1 ≤ t 0 -t W t 1 -t 0 δ + w ≤ b k , and c) t 0 -t W t 1 -t 0 δ + w ≤ b k +1 ≤ b k .\n\nFigure. A.6: B D k for B k = ( -∞ , b k ) and B k +1 = ( -∞ , b k +1 )\n\nFigure. A.6: B D k for B k = ( -∞ , b k ) and B k +1 = ( -∞ , b k +1 )\n\nt -t\n\nCase a) b k +1 ≤ b k ≤ 0 W t 1 -t 0 δ + w If b k +1 ≤ b k ≤ t 0 -t W t 1 -t 0 δ + w, as illustrated in Figure A.5(a), for any y 0 < b k +1 ≤ t 0 -t W t 1 -t 0 δ + w, there exists\n\n69", + "recall": 0.8586956521739131, + "true_md": "Figure A.5: Support under concave treatment response\n\nThe function ϕ can be readily shown to be nonincreasing. Thus, at the optimum B$_{k}$ = ( −∞ , b$_{k}$ ) with b$_{k}$$\\_{+1}$ ≤ b$\\_{k}$ and b$\\_{k}$ ∈ [ −∞ , ∞ ] for every integer k . By Theorem 1, for δ > 0 , B D k is written as\n\nNote that Y$_{1}$ = Y$_{0}$ + δ and Y$_{1}$ = t$_{1}$ − t$_{W}$ t$_{0}$ − t$_{W}$ Y$_{0}$ − t$_{1}$ − t$_{0}$ t$_{0}$ − t$_{W}$ w intersect at ( t$_{0}$ − t$_{W}$ t$_{1}$ − t$_{0}$ δ + y$_{−}$$\\_{1}$, t$\\_{1}$ − t$\\_{W}$ t$\\_{1}$ − t$\\_{0}$ δ + w $^{)}$. I consider the following three cases: a) b$\\_{k}$$_{+1}$ ≤ b$_{k}$ ≤ t$_{0}$ − t$_{W}$ t$_{1}$ − t$_{0}$ δ + w, b) b$_{k}$$\\_{+1}$ ≤ t$\\_{0}$ − t$\\_{W}$ t$\\_{1}$ − t$\\_{0}$ δ + w ≤ b$\\_{k}$, and c) t$\\_{0}$ − t$\\_{W}$ t$\\_{1}$ − t$\\_{0}$ δ + w ≤ b$\\_{k}$$_{+1}$ ≤ b$_{k}$.\n\nCase a) b$_{k}$$\\_{+1}$ ≤ b$\\_{k}$ ≤ t$\\_{0}$ − t$\\_{W}$ t$\\_{1}$ − t$\\_{0}$ δ + w\n\nIf b$_{k}$$\\_{+1}$ ≤ b$\\_{k}$ ≤ t$\\_{0}$ − t$\\_{W}$ t$\\_{1}$ − t$\\_{0}$ δ + w, as illustrated in Figure A.5(a), for any y$\\_{0}$ < b$\\_{k}$$_{+1}$ ≤ t$_{0}$ − t$_{W}$ t$_{1}$ − t$_{0}$ δ + w, there exists\n\nFigure. A.6: B D k for B$_{k}$ = ( −∞ , b$_{k}$ ) and B$_{k}$$\\_{+1}$ = ( −∞ , b$\\_{k}$$_{+1}$ )\n\n$$B D k = { y$_{1}$ ∈$_{R}$|∃ y$_{0}$ < b$_{k}$ s.t. 0 ≤ y$_{1}$ − y$_{0}$ < δ and ( t$_{0}$ − t$_{W}$ ) y$_{1}$ − ( t$_{1}$ − t$_{W}$ ) y$_{0}$ ≤ − ( t$_{1}$ − t$_{0}$ ) w } ∪ { y$_{1}$ ∈$_{R}$|∃ y$_{0}$ < b$_{k}$$_{+1}$ s.t. y$_{1}$ − y$_{0}$ ≥ δ and ( t$_{0}$ − t$_{W}$ ) y$_{1}$ − ( t$_{1}$ − t$_{W}$ ) y$_{0}$ ≤ − ( t$_{1}$ − t$_{0}$ ) w } .$$\n\n69" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.061241798295488294, + "doc_id": "edaa8ad96a00d01cfd29c1fdb7033e84c6f87d31da04e6ce23050d199745c3d4", + "edit_distance": 0.7591801878736123, + "f1_score": 0.8854961832061068, + "meteor": 0.2489863508723495, + "precision": 0.928, + "pred_md": "Define the auxiliary empirical process\n\n\n\nNext lemma states that the unprojected process ˆ R n ( u ) defined in (2.10) is asymptotically equivalent under H 0 to the auxiliary process ˜ R n ( u ) defined above.\n\nLemma A.3 Under Assumptions 3.1-3.3 and under the null hypothesis H 0 , we have\n\n\n\nProof of Lemma A.3: Note that we have uniformly in u ,\n\n\n\nwhere the second to last equality follows by the Taylor expansion of q X , θ ( i ˆ n ) around q X , θ ( i 0 ) and the Assumptions 3.1 and 3.2. Following the arguments in the proof of Theorem 1 in Stute and Zhu (2002), we next show that both A 1 n ( u ) and A 2 n ( u ) are uniformly negligible in u .\n\nFor the first term A 1 n ( u ), define the process\n\n\n\nSince under H 0 the ε i 's are centered conditionally on X i 's, α n ( u, θ ) has i.i.d. centered summands. Clearly, the first term A 1 n ( u ) can be expressed as α n ( u, θ ˆ n ) -α n ( u, θ 0 ). From Lemma A.2, α n ( · , · ) is asymptotically equicontinuous, see e.g. Corollary 2.3.12 in van der Vaart and Wellner (1996). Since ˆ θ n → p θ 0 by Assumption 3.1, A 1 n ( u ) → 0 in probability uniformly in u .\n\nFor the second term A 2 n ( u ), since by Assumption 3.1, √ n θ ( ˆ n -θ 0 ) = O p (1), it remains to\n\n35", + "recall": 0.8467153284671532, + "true_md": "Define the auxiliary empirical process\n\nNext lemma states that the unprojected process ˆ R$_{n}$ ( u ) defined in (2.10) is asymptotically equiv- alent under H$_{0}$ to the auxiliary process ˜ R$_{n}$ ( u ) defined above.\n\nLemma A.3 Under Assumptions 3.1-3.3 and under the null hypothesis H$_{0}$ , we have\n\nProof of Lemma A.3: Note that we have uniformly in u ,\n\nwhere the second to last equality follows by the Taylor expansion of q ( X$_{i}$, ˆ θ$_{n}$ ) around q ( X$_{i}$, θ$_{0}$ ) and the Assumptions 3.1 and 3.2. Following the arguments in the proof of Theorem 1 in Stute and Zhu (2002), we next show that both A$_{1}$$\\_{n}$ ( u ) and A$\\_{2}$$_{n}$ ( u ) are uniformly negligible in u .\n\nFor the first term A$_{1}$$\\_{n}$ ( u ), define the process\n\nSince under H$_{0}$ the ε$_{i}$ ’s are centered conditionally on X$_{i}$ ’s, α$_{n}$ ( u, θ ) has i.i.d. centered summands. Clearly, the first term A$_{1}$$\\_{n}$ ( u ) can be expressed as α$\\_{n}$ ( u, ˆ θ$\\_{n}$ ) − α$\\_{n}$ ( u, θ$\\_{0}$ ). From Lemma A.2, α$\\_{n}$ ( · , · ) is asymptotically equicontinuous, see e.g. Corollary 2.3.12 in van der Vaart and Wellner (1996). Since ˆ θ$\\_{n}$ → p θ$\\_{0}$ by Assumption 3.1, A$\\_{1}$$_{n}$ ( u ) → 0 in probability uniformly in u . √$_{n}$$\\_{(}$ ˆ\n\n→ → For the second term A$_{2}$$\\_{n}$ ( u ), since by Assumption 3.1, √$\\_{n}$$_{(}$ ˆ θ$_{n}$ − θ$_{0}$ ) = O$_{p}$ (1), it remains to\n\n35\n\n$$˜ R$_{n}$ ( u ) = 1 √$_{n}$ n ∑ i =1 ε$_{i}$ ( ˆ θ$_{n}$ )1 { q ( X$_{i}$, θ$_{0}$ ) ≤ u } .$$\n\n$$sup u ∈ Π ∣ ˆ R$_{n}$ ( u ) − ˜ R$_{n}$ ( u ) ∣ = o$_{p}$ (1) .$$\n\n$$ˆ R$_{n}$ ( u ) − ˜ R$_{n}$ ( u ) = 1 √$_{n}$ n ∑ i =1 ε$_{i}$ ( ˆ θ$_{n}$ ) ( 1 { q ( X$_{i}$, ˆ θ$_{n}$ ) ≤ u } − 1 { q ( X$_{i}$, θ$_{0}$ ) ≤ u } ) = 1 √$_{n}$ n ∑ i =1 ( ε$_{i}$ ( θ$_{0}$ ) − ( q ( X$_{i}$, ˆ θ$_{n}$ ) − q ( X$_{i}$, θ$_{0}$ ))) ( 1 { q ( X$_{i}$, ˆ θ$_{n}$ ) ≤ u } − 1 { q ( X$_{i}$, θ$_{0}$ ) ≤ u } ) = 1 √$_{n}$ n ∑ i =1 ε$_{i}$ ( θ$_{0}$ ) ( 1 { q ( X$_{i}$, ˆ θ$_{n}$ ) ≤ u } − 1 { q ( X$_{i}$, θ$_{0}$ ) ≤ u } ) − √$_{n}$$_{(}$ ˆ θ$_{n}$ − θ$_{0}$ ) $_{′}$1 n n ∑ i =1 g ( X$_{i}$, θ$_{0}$ ) ( 1 { q ( X$_{i}$, ˆ θ$_{n}$ ) ≤ u } − 1 { q ( X$_{i}$, θ$_{0}$ ) ≤ u } ) + o$_{p}$ (1) := A$_{1}$$_{n}$ ( u ) + A$_{2}$$_{n}$ ( u ) + o$_{p}$ (1) ,$$\n\n$$α$_{n}$ ( u, θ ) = 1 √$_{n}$ n ∑ i =1 ε$_{i}$ ( θ$_{0}$ )1 { q ( X$_{i}$, θ ) ≤ u } .$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.22681744486572256, + "doc_id": "fca7405ed1e1aae08951f81fcd261a0e2710814be51b03d3043dd841c0d68724", + "edit_distance": 0.6116173120728929, + "f1_score": 0.881081081081081, + "meteor": 0.40597447823584387, + "precision": 0.9314285714285714, + "pred_md": "investigate further this issue, we consider the following five DGPs:\n\n\n\n\n\nwhere X 1 , X 2 and ε are defined as before, { X i } 10 k =3 are independent standard normal random variables, D = 1 { D > ∗ 0 } , and ε ⊥ ⊥ X , with X = (1 , X 1 , X 2 , . . . , X 10 ) . ' For each of these DGPs we consider the potential outcomes\n\n\n\nwhere m 2 ( X ) = 1 + ∑ 10 j =1 X j , u (1) and u (0) are independent normal random variables with mean zero and variance 0 1. The observed outcome is . Y = DY (1)+(1 -D Y ) (0), and the true ATE is 1.\n\nFor DGP 6 -DGP 10, the H 0 considered is\n\n\n\nWe estimate θ 0 by ML Note that . DGP 6 falls under H , 0 whereas DGP 7DGP 10 fall under H 1 . The simulation results for DGP 6DGP 10 are presented in Table 2.\n\nAs before, we first discuss the size properties of the tests. From the results of DGP 6, we find that KS n and CvM n tests are oversized when n = 100, but as sample size n increases, the empirical size gets closer to its nominal value. The same holds true for ICM tests based on the unprojected process (2.10). Shaikh et al. (2009)'s test tends to be conservative (with the exception when c = 0 01) . , and sensitive to the bandwidth choice. The traditional balancing tests, and the ICM tests based on (4.1) are conservative, reflecting the 'curse of dimensionality'. Finally, note that when the propensity score is correctly specified, the finite sample properties of the ATE estimator (4.3) are good: the bias and the length of the 95% confidence interval get smaller when sample size increases, and the coverage probability is relatively close to its\n\n23", + "recall": 0.8358974358974359, + "true_md": "investigate further this issue, we consider the following five DGPs:\n\nwhere X$_{1}$ , X$_{2}$ and ε are defined as before, { X$_{i}$ } 10 k =3 are independent standard normal random variables, D = 1 { D ∗ > 0 } , and ε ⊥ X , with X = (1 ,X$_{1}$,X$_{2}$,... ,X$_{10}$ ) $^{′}$. For each of these DGPs we consider the potential outcomes\n\nwhere m$_{2}$ ( X ) = 1 + ∑ 10 j $_{=1}$X$_{j}$ , u (1) and u (0) are independent normal random variables with mean zero and variance 0 . 1. The observed outcome is Y = DY (1)+(1 − D ) Y (0), and the true ATE is 1.\n\nFor DGP 6 − DGP 10, the H$_{0}$ considered is\n\nWe estimate θ$_{0}$ by ML . Note that DGP 6 falls under H$_{0}$, whereas DGP 7- DGP 10 fall under H$_{1}$ . The simulation results for DGP 6- DGP 10 are presented in Table 2.\n\nAs before, we first discuss the size properties of the tests. From the results of DGP 6, we find that KS$_{n}$ and CvM$_{n}$ tests are oversized when n = 100, but as sample size n increases, the empirical size gets closer to its nominal value. The same holds true for ICM tests based on the unprojected process (2.10). Shaikh et al. (2009)’s test tends to be conservative (with the exception when c = 0 . 01) , and sensitive to the bandwidth choice. The traditional balancing tests, and the ICM tests based on (4.1) are conservative, reflecting the “curse of dimensionality”. Finally, note that when the propensity score is correctly specified, the finite sample properties of the ATE estimator (4.3) are good: the bias and the length of the 95% confidence interval get smaller when sample size increases, and the coverage probability is relatively close to its\n\n23\n\n$$H$_{0}$ : ∃ θ$_{0}$ = ( β$_{0}$,β$_{1}$,β$_{2}$,... ,β$_{10}$ ) ′ ∈ Θ : E [ D | Φ ( X $^{′}$θ$_{0}$ )] = Φ ( X $^{′}$θ$_{0}$ ) a.s.. (4.4)$$\n\n$$Y (1) = 2 m$_{2}$ ( X ) + u (1) and Y (0) = m$_{2}$ ( X ) + u (0) ,$$\n\n$$DGP 6 . D ∗ = − ∑ 10 j $_{=1}$X$_{j}$ 6 − ε, ; 10$$\n\n$$∑ DGP 7 . D ∗ = − 1 − ∑ 10 j $_{=1}$X$_{j}$ 10 + X$_{1}$X$_{2}$ 2 − ε, ; 10$$\n\n$$∑ DGP 8 . D ∗ = − 1 − ∑ 10 j $_{=1}$X$_{j}$ 10 + X$_{1}$ ∑ 5 k $_{=2}$X$_{k}$ 4 − ε, ; 10 10$$\n\n$$∑ ∑ DGP 9 . D ∗ = − 1 . 5 − ∑ 10 j $_{=1}$X$_{j}$ 6 + ∑ 10 k $_{=1}$X 2 k 10 − ε ; 5$$\n\n$$∑ ∑ DGP 10 . D ∗ = − 0 . 1 + 0 . 1 ∑ 5 j $_{=1}$X$_{j}$ exp ( − 0 . 2 10 k $_{=1}$X$_{j}$ ) − ε,,$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.25092885176192614, + "doc_id": "c02c3aec8b51a7451b46a2cee10bc7a9963ad23230bf0b0650b7fa79fdf9e415", + "edit_distance": 0.6065128900949797, + "f1_score": 0.9169435215946844, + "meteor": 0.43641651350911154, + "precision": 0.9452054794520548, + "pred_md": "For example, the distribution of the college premium for people whose potential wage without college degrees is less than or equal to θ can be written as\n\n\n\nwhere Y 0 and Y 1 denote the potential wage without and with college degrees, respectively.\n\n## 2.2 DTE Bounds without Support Restrictions\n\nPrior to considering support restrictions, I briefly discuss bounds on the DTE given marginal distributions without those restrictions.\n\nLemma 1 (Makarov (1981)) Let\n\n\n\n\n\nThen for any δ ∈ R ,\n\n\n\nand both F L ∆ ( δ ) and F U ∆ ( δ ) are sharp.\n\nHenceforth, I call these bounds Makarov bounds. One way to bound the DTE is to use joint distribution bounds since the DTE can be obtained from the joint distribution. When the marginal distributions of Y 0 and Y 1 are given, Fr'chet inequalities provide some information on their unknown joint distribution as e follows: for any measurable sets A 0 and A 1 in R ,\n\n\n\nConsider the event { Y 0 ∈ A , Y 0 1 ∈ A 1 } for any interval A d = [ a , b d d ] with a d < b d and d ∈ { 0 1 , } . In Figure 3, π ( A 0 × A 1 ) corresponds to the probability of the shaded rectangular region in the support space of ( Y , Y 0 1 ) . 6 Note that since marginal distributions are defined in the one dimensional space, they are informative on the joint distribution for rectangular regions in the two-dimensional support space of ( Y , Y 0 1 ), as illustrated in Figure 3.\n\n6 If A 0 and A 1 are given as the unions of multiple intervals, { Y 0 ∈ A ,Y 0 1 ∈ A 1 } would correspond to multiple rectangular regions.\n\n9", + "recall": 0.8903225806451613, + "true_md": "For example, the distribution of the college premium for people whose potential wage without college degrees is less than or equal to θ can be written as\n\nwhere Y$_{0}$ and Y$_{1}$ denote the potential wage without and with college degrees, respectively.\n\nPrior to considering support restrictions, I briefly discuss bounds on the DTE given marginal distributions without those restrictions.\n\nLemma 1 (Makarov (1981)) Let\n\nThen for any δ ∈$_{R}$ ,\n\nand both F L Δ ( δ ) and F U Δ ( δ ) are sharp.\n\nHenceforth, I call these bounds Makarov bounds. One way to bound the DTE is to use joint distribution bounds since the DTE can be obtained from the joint distribution. When the marginal distributions of Y$_{0}$ and Y$_{1}$ are given, Fr´ echet inequalities provide some information on their unknown joint distribution as follows: for any measurable sets A$_{0}$ and A$_{1}$ in$_{R}$,\n\nConsider the event { Y$_{0}$ ∈ A$_{0}$, Y$_{1}$ ∈ A$_{1}$ } for any interval A$_{d}$ = [ a$_{d}$, b$_{d}$ ] with a$_{d}$ < b$_{d}$ and d ∈ { 0 , 1 } . In Figure 3, π ( A$_{0}$ × A$_{1}$ ) corresponds to the probability of the shaded rectangular region in the support space of ( Y$_{0}$, Y$_{1}$ ) . 6 Note that since marginal distributions are defined in the one dimensional space, they are informative on the joint distribution for rectangular regions in the two-dimensional support space of ( Y$_{0}$, Y$_{1}$ ), as illustrated in Figure 3.\n\n$^{6}$If A$_{0}$ and A$_{1}$ are given as the unions of multiple intervals, { Y$_{0}$ ∈ A$_{0}$,Y$_{1}$ ∈ A$_{1}$ } would correspond to multiple rectangular regions.\n\n9\n\n$$max { µ$_{0}$ ( A$_{0}$ ) + µ$_{1}$ ( A$_{1}$ ) − 1 , 0 } ≤ π ( A$_{0}$ × A$_{1}$ ) ≤ min { µ$_{0}$ ( A$_{0}$ ) , µ$_{1}$ ( A$_{1}$ ) } .$$\n\n$$F L Δ ( δ ) = sup y max ( F$_{1}$ ( y ) − F$_{0}$ ( y − δ ) , 0) , F U Δ ( δ ) = 1 + inf y min ( F$_{1}$ ( y ) − F$_{0}$ ( y − δ ) , 0) .$$\n\n$$F L Δ ( δ ) ≤ F$_{Δ}$ ( δ ) ≤ F U Δ ( δ ) ,$$\n\n$$Pr { Y$_{1}$ − Y$_{0}$ ≤ δ | Y$_{0}$ ≤ θ } ,$$\n\n## 2.2 DTE Bounds without Support Restrictions" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.14396226435088247, + "doc_id": "49e28313f123fc7ed213fdd269cc1fbd54bedbd2592c1b62fd759fa9ed18e80f", + "edit_distance": 0.7166666666666667, + "f1_score": 0.8497854077253217, + "meteor": 0.3056232611446941, + "precision": 0.9339622641509434, + "pred_md": "points, they are\n\n\n\nIn the following part of the example, we will show that two of them, y ∗ = ( y ∗ 1 , y ∗ 2 ) = (exp(0 00025 . π , ) 0) and the origin, (0 , 0) are grazing points. Moreover, it can be easily validated that other two points are of β -type.\n\nIssuing from system (3.14), the curve of discontinuity ˜ Γ consists of two components ˜ Γ 1 and ˜ Γ 2 . The components are the following sets\n\n\n\nand\n\n\n\nOne can verify that the function\n\n\n\nis a discontinuous periodic solution of (3.14) with period ω = π, whose discontinuity points (0 , 1) and (0 , -exp(0 0005 . π )) belong to ˜ Γ and Γ , respectively. The expression\n\n\n\nverifies that y ∗ is a ( γ ) -type point, i.e. a grazing point of the solution Ψ( ) t . It is easily seen that the grazing is axial. Now, we can assert that the periodic solution (3.15) is a grazing solution in the sense of Definition 2.5. Its simulation is depicted in Figure 2.\n\nFigure 2: The grazing orbit of system (3.14).\n\nFigure 2: The grazing orbit of system (3.14).\n\n1\n\nSince the complement of G is invariant in both directions and consists of continuous trajectories of\n\n14", + "recall": 0.7795275590551181, + "true_md": "points, they are\n\n∂ Γ = { (0 , 0) , (exp(0 . 00025 π ) , 0) , (exp(0 . 00025 π ) , y$_{2}$ ( θ$_{1}$, 0 , (0 , ¯ y$_{2}$ ))) , (0 , y$_{2}$ ( θ$_{2}$, 0 , − R$_{1}$y$_{2}$ ( θ$_{1}$, 0 , (0 , ¯ y$_{2}$ ))) } .\n\nIn the following part of the example, we will show that two of them, y ∗ = ( y ∗ $_{1}$, y ∗ $_{2}$) = (exp(0 . 00025 π ) , 0) and the origin, (0 , 0) are grazing points. Moreover, it can be easily validated that other two points are of β − type. ˜ ˜ ˜\n\n− Issuing from system (3.14), the curve of discontinuity ˜ Γ consists of two components ˜ Γ$_{1}$ and ˜ Γ$_{2}$ . The components are the following sets\n\nand\n\nOne can verify that the function\n\n$^{exp(0}$$^{.}$$^{0005}$$^{t}$$^{)}$ is a discontinuous periodic solution of (3.14) with period ω = π, whose discontinuity points (0 , 1) and (0 , − exp(0 . 0005 π )) belong to ˜ Γ and Γ , respectively. The expression\n\n$$Ψ( t ) =    $^{exp(0}$$^{.}$$^{0005}$$^{t}$$^{)}$ ( sin( t ) , cos( t ) , if t ∈ [0 , π ) , (0 , 1) , if t = π, (3.15) is a discontinuous periodic solution of (3.14) with period ω = π, whose discontinuity points (0 , 1) and$$\n\n$$˜ Γ$_{2}$ = { ( y$_{1}$, y$_{2}$ ) | y$_{1}$ = 0 , 0 ≤ − R$_{2}$y$_{2}$ ( θ$_{2}$, 0 , Q$_{2}$ ) } .$$\n\n$$˜ Γ$_{1}$ = { ( y$_{1}$, y$_{2}$ ) | y$_{1}$ = exp(0 . 00025 π ) , − R$_{1}$y$_{2}$ ( θ$_{1}$, 0 , (0 , ¯ y$_{2}$ )) 2 ≤ y$_{2}$ ≤ 0 }$$\n\n$$〈∇ Φ((exp(0 . 00025 π ) , 0)) , f ((exp(0 . 00025 π ) , 0)) 〉 = 〈 (1 , 0) , (0 , − exp( − 0 . 00025 π )) 〉 = 0$$\n\nverifies that y ∗ is a ( γ ) − type point, i.e. a grazing point of the solution Ψ( t ) . It is easily seen that the grazing is axial. Now, we can assert that the periodic solution (3.15) is a grazing solution in the sense of Definition 2.5. Its simulation is depicted in Figure 2.\n\nFigure 2: The grazing orbit of system (3.14).\n\nSince the complement of G is invariant in both directions and consists of continuous trajectories of\n\n14" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9476033464048212, + "doc_id": "20089d21e2279e7a28c8dc13fd47d52942c2d15dcbdba96b1b050a225c13c3e1", + "edit_distance": 0.06526315789473684, + "f1_score": 0.968609865470852, + "meteor": 0.9778473975280946, + "precision": 0.9773755656108597, + "pred_md": "our approach is that ( ) we exploit the dimension-reduction coming from our derived restrici tion between propensity score CDFs, and ( ii ) we acknowledge our lack of knowledge of the 'true' correct specification of the propensity score, by means of an orthogonal projection onto the tangent space of nuisance parameters. The result of ( ) and ( i ii ) is a test with improved power properties, and with a simple bootstrap implementation. The power improvement due to the dimension reduction has been noticed by Stute and Zhu (2002), Escanciano (2006 a ) and Shaikh et al. (2009), whereas the power improvement due to the use of orthogonal projections has been noticed in different contexts, see e.g. Neyman (1959), and more recently, Bickel et al. (2006) and Escanciano and Goh (2014). To the best of our knowledge, our proposal is the first to incorporate both procedures.\n\nAs mentioned above, our paper is related to the relatively scarce literature on projectionbased specification tests, see e.g. Escanciano (2009 b ) and Escanciano and Goh (2014) for two notable exceptions. Escanciano (2009 b ) proposes a simple bootstrap testing procedure for conditional moment restrictions that acknowledges specifically the fact that the nuisance parameters are unknown and introduces the projection methodology, while Escanciano and Goh (2014) propose a projection-based testing procedure for linear quantile regression using a related projection weight function. Our proposal builds on these papers, with the important difference that our test statistics also exploit the dimension-reduction property of the propensity score.\n\nThe rest of the paper is organized as follows. In Section 2 we present the testing framework and derive the restriction upon which our tests are based. The asymptotic properties of our tests are established in Section 3. We next examine the finite sample properties of our tests by means of a Monte Carlo study in Section 4. We provide an empirical illustration of our procedures in Section 5. Section 6 concludes. Mathematical proofs are gathered in an appendix at the end of the article.\n\nFinally, all proposed tests discussed in this article can be implemented via open-source R package pstest, which is freely available from GitHub ( https://github.com/pedrohcgs/pstest ).\n\n## 2 Testing Framework\n\n## 2.1 Background\n\nLet D be a binary random variable that indicates participation in the program, i.e. D = 1 if the individual participates in the treatment and D = 0 otherwise. Define Y (1) and Y (0) as the\n\n4", + "recall": 0.96, + "true_md": "our approach is that ( i ) we exploit the dimension-reduction coming from our derived restric- tion between propensity score CDFs, and ( ii ) we acknowledge our lack of knowledge of the “true” correct specification of the propensity score, by means of an orthogonal projection onto the tangent space of nuisance parameters. The result of ( i ) and ( ii ) is a test with improved power properties, and with a simple bootstrap implementation. The power improvement due to the dimension reduction has been noticed by Stute and Zhu (2002), Escanciano (2006 a ) and Shaikh et al. (2009), whereas the power improvement due to the use of orthogonal projections has been noticed in different contexts, see e.g. Neyman (1959), and more recently, Bickel et al. (2006) and Escanciano and Goh (2014). To the best of our knowledge, our proposal is the first to incorporate both procedures.\n\nAs mentioned above, our paper is related to the relatively scarce literature on projection- based specification tests, see e.g. Escanciano (2009 b ) and Escanciano and Goh (2014) for two notable exceptions. Escanciano (2009 b ) proposes a simple bootstrap testing procedure for condi- tional moment restrictions that acknowledges specifically the fact that the nuisance parameters are unknown and introduces the projection methodology, while Escanciano and Goh (2014) propose a projection-based testing procedure for linear quantile regression using a related pro- jection weight function. Our proposal builds on these papers, with the important difference that our test statistics also exploit the dimension-reduction property of the propensity score.\n\nThe rest of the paper is organized as follows. In Section 2 we present the testing framework and derive the restriction upon which our tests are based. The asymptotic properties of our tests are established in Section 3. We next examine the finite sample properties of our tests by means of a Monte Carlo study in Section 4. We provide an empirical illustration of our procedures in Section 5. Section 6 concludes. Mathematical proofs are gathered in an appendix at the end of the article.\n\nFinally, all proposed tests discussed in this article can be implemented via open-source R package pstest, which is freely available from GitHub ( https://github.com/pedrohcgs/pstest ).\n\nLet D be a binary random variable that indicates participation in the program, i.e. D = 1 if the individual participates in the treatment and D = 0 otherwise. Define Y (1) and Y (0) as the\n\n## 2 Testing Framework\n\n## 2.1 Background\n\n4" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.1687430132503538, + "doc_id": "5bb4d34b24bd9b267369ac65f763690938c0c128e487d82945d492be4c04713a", + "edit_distance": 0.6947743467933492, + "f1_score": 0.8835616438356164, + "meteor": 0.34740709599046926, + "precision": 0.9214285714285714, + "pred_md": "Now I present the constrained optimization procedure to compute the sharp lower bound under MTR. I pay particular attention to the special case where a k +1 -a k = δ for each integer k at the optimum. In this case, the lower bound reduces to\n\n\n\nand computation of (B.1) poses a simple one-dimensional optimization problem.\n\nLet\n\n\n\nand\n\n\n\nwhere y ∗ ∈ arg max 0 ≤ ≤ y δ ∑ ∞ k = -∞ max( F 1 ( y +( k +1) δ ) -F 0 ( y + kδ ) , 0) and K is a nonnegative integer.\n\nStep 1. Compute V ( δ ) .\n\nStep 2. To further reduce computational costs, set K to be a nonnegative integer satisfying | V ( δ ) -V K ( δ ) | ε for small ε > 0 . 24\n\n<\n\nStep 3. For J = K , solve the following optimization problem:\n\n\n\nwhere\n\n\n\nStep 4. Repeat Step 3 for J = K +1 , . . . , 2 K. 25\n\nIt is not straightforward to solve the problem (B.2) numerically in Step 3; the function max { x, 0 } is nondifferentiable. Furthermore in practice, marginal distribution functions are often estimated in a complicated\n\n24 I put ε = 10 -5 for the implementation in Section 4 and Section 5.\n\n25 By Lemma B.1, I considered J = K, K +1 , . . . , 2 K for the sequence { a k } J k = -J and compared the values of local maxima achieved by { a k } J k = -J with V K ( δ )\n\n74", + "recall": 0.8486842105263158, + "true_md": "Now I present the constrained optimization procedure to compute the sharp lower bound under MTR. I pay particular attention to the special case where a$_{k}$$\\_{+1}$ − a$\\_{k}$ = δ for each integer k at the optimum. In this case, the lower bound reduces to\n\nand computation of (B.1) poses a simple one-dimensional optimization problem.\n\nLet\n\nand\n\nwhere\n\nStep 4. Repeat Step 3 for J = K + 1 , . . . , 2 K. 25\n\n$$sup 0 ≤ y ≤ δ ∞ ∑ k = −∞ max ( F$_{1}$ ( y + ( k + 1) δ ) − F$_{0}$ ( y + kδ ) , 0) , (B.1)$$\n\n$$V ( δ ) = sup 0 ≤ y ≤ δ ∞ ∑ k = −∞ max ( F$_{1}$ ( y + ( k + 1) δ ) − F$_{0}$ ( y + kδ ) , 0) ,$$\n\n$$V$_{K}$ ( δ ) = max y ∈{ y $^{∗}$+ kδ } ∞ k = −∞ K ∑ k = − K max ( F$_{1}$ ( y + ( k + 1) δ ) − F$_{0}$ ( y + kδ ) , 0) ,$$\n\n$$sup { a$_{k}$ } J k = − $_{J}$∈S J,K δ ($_{̂}$ y ) J ∑ k = − J max { F$_{1}$ ( a$_{k}$$_{+1}$ ) − F$_{0}$ ( a$_{k}$ ) , 0 } , (B.2)$$\n\n$$S J,K δ ( y ) =      { a$_{k}$ } J k = − J ; a$_{J}$ ≤ y + Kδ, a$_{−}$$_{J}$ ≥ y − Kδ, 0 ≤ a$_{k}$$_{+1}$ − a$_{k}$ ≤ δ, δ < a$_{k}$$_{+2}$ − a$_{k}$ for each integer k      , ̂ y = arg max y ∈{ y $^{∗}$+ kδ } ∞ k = −∞ K ∑ k = − K max ( F$_{1}$ ( y + ( k + 1) δ ) − F$_{0}$ ( y + kδ ) , 0) .$$\n\n- Step 1. Compute V ( δ ) .\n\n- Step 2. To further reduce computational costs, set K to be a nonnegative integer satisfying | V ( δ ) − V$_{K}$ ( δ ) | < ε for small ε > 0 . 24\n\n- Step 3. For J = K , solve the following optimization problem:\n\nwhere y ∗ ∈ arg max 0 ≤ y ≤ δ ∑ ∞ k = $_{−∞}$max ( F$_{1}$ ( y + ( k + 1) δ ) − F$_{0}$ ( y + kδ ) , 0) and K is a nonnegative integer.\n\nIt is not straightforward to solve the problem (B.2) numerically in Step 3; the function max { x, 0 } is non- differentiable. Furthermore in practice, marginal distribution functions are often estimated in a complicated\n\n$^{24}$I put ε = 10 − 5 for the implementation in Section 4 and Section 5.\n\n$^{25}$By Lemma B.1, I considered J = K, K + 1 , . . . , 2 K for the sequence { a$_{k}$ } J k = − J and compared the values of local maxima achieved by { a$_{k}$ } J k = − J with V$_{K}$ ( δ )\n\n74" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8911875005340071, + "doc_id": "3a8c73d965da13d935e4da5ac67bbc75bf95e3b3ccfe1e13fecb718b1f38c99c", + "edit_distance": 0.13387978142076504, + "f1_score": 0.9268292682926829, + "meteor": 0.9297785496584136, + "precision": 0.926829268292683, + "pred_md": "M. C., 2012. Eeg alpha power modulation of fmri resting-state connectivity. Brain connectivity 2 (5), 254-264.\n\nShen, K., Hutchison, R. M., Bezgin, G., Everling, S., McIntosh, A. R., 2015a. Network structure shapes spontaneous functional connectivity dynamics. The Journal of Neuroscience 35 (14), 5579-5588.\n\nShen, K., Miˇ si', c B., Cipollini, B. N., Bezgin, G., Buschkuehl, M., Hutchison, R. M., Jaeggi, S. M., Kross, E., Peltier, S. J., Everling, S., et al., 2015b. Stable long-range interhemispheric coordination is supported by direct anatomical projections. Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences USA 112 (20), 6473-6478.\n\nSmith, S. M., Miller, K. L., Salimi-Khorshidi, G., Webster, M., Beckmann, C. F., Nichols, T. E., Ramsey, J. D., Woolrich, M. W., 2011. Network modelling methods for FMRI. Neuroimage 54 (2), 875-891.\n\nSporns, O., 2011. Networks of the Brain. MIT press.\n\nSporns, O., Betzel, R. F., 2016. Modular brain networks. Annual review of psychology 67 (1), 10.1146/annurev-psych-122414-033634.\n\nSporns, O., Tononi, G., Ktter, R., 2005. The human connectome: a structural o description of the human brain. PLoS Computational Biology 1 (4), e42.\n\nTagliazucchi, E., Balenzuela, P., Fraiman, D., Chialvo, D. R., 2012a. Criticality in large-scale brain fMRI dynamics unveiled by a novel point process analysis. Frontiers in Physiology 3, 15.\n\nTagliazucchi, E., Carhart-Harris, R., Leech, R., Nutt, D., Chialvo, D. R., 2014. Enhanced repertoire of brain dynamical states during the psychedelic experience. Human Brain Mapping 35 (11), 5442-5456.\n\n36", + "recall": 0.926829268292683, + "true_md": "M. C., 2012. Eeg alpha power modulation of fmri resting-state connectivity.\n\nBrain connectivity 2 (5), 254–264.\n\n- Shen, K., Hutchison, R. M., Bezgin, G., Everling, S., McIntosh, A. R., 2015a. Network structure shapes spontaneous functional connectivity dynamics. The Journal of Neuroscience 35 (14), 5579–5588.\n\n- Shen, K., Miˇsi´ c, B., Cipollini, B. N., Bezgin, G., Buschkuehl, M., Hutchison, R. M., Jaeggi, S. M., Kross, E., Peltier, S. J., Everling, S., et al., 2015b. Stable long-range interhemispheric coordination is supported by direct anatomical projections. Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences USA 112 (20), 6473–6478.\n\n- Smith, S. M., Miller, K. L., Salimi-Khorshidi, G., Webster, M., Beckmann, C. F., Nichols, T. E., Ramsey, J. D., Woolrich, M. W., 2011. Network modelling methods for FMRI. Neuroimage 54 (2), 875–891.\n\n- Sporns, O., Betzel, R. F., 2016. Modular brain networks. Annual review of psychology 67 (1), 10.1146/annurev–psych–122414–033634.\n\n- Sporns, O., Tononi, G., K¨ otter, R., 2005. The human connectome: a structural description of the human brain. PLoS Computational Biology 1 (4), e42.\n\n- Tagliazucchi, E., Balenzuela, P., Fraiman, D., Chialvo, D. R., 2012a. Criticality in large-scale brain fMRI dynamics unveiled by a novel point process analysis. Frontiers in Physiology 3, 15.\n\n- Tagliazucchi, E., Carhart-Harris, R., Leech, R., Nutt, D., Chialvo, D. R., 2014. Enhanced repertoire of brain dynamical states during the psychedelic experi- ence. Human Brain Mapping 35 (11), 5442–5456.\n\n36\n\nSporns, O., 2011. Networks of the Brain. MIT press." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.21294492719197805, + "doc_id": "7929ba74146b4d8cd76e970bfcd3a00236d3a0ce2abe8258e44b89b83468d5f2", + "edit_distance": 0.6275946275946276, + "f1_score": 0.9135802469135803, + "meteor": 0.39774500485272174, + "precision": 0.9426751592356688, + "pred_md": "Note that the integrating measure in CvM n is a random measure, but Corollary 1 shows that the asymptotic distribution is not affected by this fact. Further details can be found in the Appendix A.\n\n## 3.2 Asymptotic power\n\nNow, we investigate the power properties of tests based on continuous functionals Γ( ˆ R p n ), like CvM n and KS n in (2.8) and (2.9), respectively. We consider fixed alternatives, and a sequence of local alternatives H 1 n that converges to H 0 at the parametric rate n -1 2 / .\n\n## 3.2.1 Power against fixed alternatives\n\nNext theorem analyzes the asymptotic properties of our tests under fixed alternatives of the type\n\n\n\n/negationslash\n\nwhere Π = [0 1] is the unit interval. , Note that H 1 is simply the negation of H 0 in (2.3).\n\nTheorem 2 Suppose Assumptions 3.1-3.3 hold. Then, under the fixed alternative hypothesis H 1 in (3.2), we have that\n\n\n\n∣ ∣ From Theorem 2, we see that test statistics of the form of Γ( ˆ R p n ) are not consistent against all fixed alternative hypotheses in (3.2), but only those not collinear to the score function g X,θ ( 0 ). To see this, note that\n\n\n\nis equal to zero under (3.2) if p ( X ) -q ( X,θ 0 ) and g X,θ ( 0 ) are collinear almost surely. We do not see this as a limitation. First, when one estimates θ 0 using the NLS method, the population first order condition for θ 0 sets E [( D -q ( X,θ 0 )) g ' ( X,θ 0 )] = 0 , implying that, for some u ∈ Π ,\n\n\n\n/negationslash\n\n13", + "recall": 0.8862275449101796, + "true_md": "Note that the integrating measure in CvM$_{n}$ is a random measure, but Corollary 1 shows that the asymptotic distribution is not affected by this fact. Further details can be found in the Appendix A.\n\nNow, we investigate the power properties of tests based on continuous functionals Γ( ˆ R p $_{n}$), like CvM$_{n}$ and KS$_{n}$ in (2.8) and (2.9), respectively. We consider fixed alternatives, and a sequence of local alternatives H$_{1}$$\\_{n}$ that converges to H$\\_{0}$ at the parametric rate n − 1 / $^{2}$.\n\n## 3.2 Asymptotic power\n\n## 3.2.1 Power against fixed alternatives\n\nNext theorem analyzes the asymptotic properties of our tests under fixed alternatives of the type\n\nwhere Π = [0 , 1] is the unit interval. Note that H$_{1}$ is simply the negation of H$_{0}$ in (2.3).\n\nTheorem 2 Suppose Assumptions 3.1-3.3 hold. Then, under the fixed alternative hypothesis H$_{1}$ in (3.2), we have that\n\n$$H$_{1}$ : E [( D − q ( X, θ ))1 { q ( X, θ ) ≤ u } ] ̸ = 0 for all θ ∈ Θ and for some u ∈ Π , (3.2)$$\n\nFrom Theorem 2, we see that test statistics of the form of Γ( ˆ R p $_{n}$) are not consistent against all fixed alternative hypotheses in (3.2), but only those not collinear to the score function g ( X, θ$_{0}$ ). To see this, note that\n\nis equal to zero under (3.2) if p ( X ) − q ( X, θ$_{0}$ ) and g ( X, θ$_{0}$ ) are collinear almost surely. We do not see this as a limitation. First, when one estimates θ$_{0}$ using the NLS method, the population first order condition for θ$_{0}$ sets E [( D − q ( X, θ$_{0}$ )) g $^{′}$( X, θ$_{0}$ )] = 0 , implying that, for some u ∈ Π ,\n\n$$E [( p ( X ) − q ( X, θ$_{0}$ )) P 1 { q ( X, θ$_{0}$ ) ≤ u } ] = E [( p ( X ) − q ( X, θ$_{0}$ )) 1 { q ( X, θ$_{0}$ ) ≤ u } ] − E [ ( p ( X ) − q ( X, θ$_{0}$ )) g $^{′}$( X, θ$_{0}$ ) ] Δ − $^{1}$( θ$_{0}$ ) G ( u, θ$_{0}$ )$$\n\n$$E [( p ( X ) − q ( X, θ$_{0}$ )) P 1 { q ( X, θ$_{0}$ ) ≤ u } ] = E [( p ( X ) − q ( X, θ$_{0}$ )) 1 { q ( X, θ$_{0}$ ) ≤ u } ] ̸ = 0 .$$\n\n13\n\n$$sup u ∈ Π ∣ 1 √$_{n}$ ˆ R p $_{n}$( u ) − E [( p ( X ) − q ( X, θ$_{0}$ )) P 1 { q ( X, θ$_{0}$ ) ≤ u } ] ∣ = o$_{p}$ (1) .$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8879248181254252, + "doc_id": "d65316ad56ad8d48510910766db3a56a4f588ca147e0cff310f19ba871250d8c", + "edit_distance": 0.06970509383378017, + "f1_score": 0.9189189189189189, + "meteor": 0.933974476204013, + "precision": 0.9386503067484663, + "pred_md": "Gonzalez-Castillo, J., Handwerker, D. A., Robinson, M. E., Hoy, C. W., Buchanan, L. C., Saad, Z. S., Bandettini, P. A., 2014. The spatial structure of resting state connectivity stability on the scale of minutes. Frontiers in Neuroscience 8, 138.\n\nGood, B. H., de Montjoye, Y.-A., Clauset, A., 2010. Performance of modularity maximization in practical contexts. Physical Review E 81 (4), 046106.\n\nHansen, E. C., Battaglia, D., Spiegler, A., Deco, G., Jirsa, V. K., 2015. Functional connectivity dynamics: Modeling the switching behavior of the resting state. NeuroImage 105, 525-535.\n\nHlinka, J., Hadrava, M., 2015. On the danger of detecting network states in white noise. Frontiers in Computational Neuroscience 9.\n\nHoney, C. J., Kotter, R., Breakspear, M., Sporns, O., 2007. Network structure of cerebral cortex shapes functional connectivity on multiple time scales. Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences USA 104 (24), 10240-10245.\n\nHutchison, R. M., Morton, J. B., 2015. Tracking the brain's functional coupling dynamics over development. The Journal of Neuroscience 35 (17), 6849-6859.\n\nHutchison, R. M., Womelsdorf, T., Allen, E. A., Bandettini, P. A., Calhoun, V. D., Corbetta, M., Della Penna, S., Duyn, J. H., Glover, G. H., GonzalezCastillo, J., et al., 2013a. Dynamic functional connectivity: promise, issues, and interpretations. Neuroimage 80, 360-378.\n\nHutchison, R. M., Womelsdorf, T., Gati, J. S., Everling, S., Menon, R. S., 2013b. Resting-state networks show dynamic functional connectivity in awake humans and anesthetized macaques. Human Brain Mapping 34 (9), 21542177.\n\n32", + "recall": 0.9, + "true_md": "- Gonzalez-Castillo, J., Handwerker, D. A., Robinson, M. E., Hoy, C. W., Buchanan, L. C., Saad, Z. S., Bandettini, P. A., 2014. The spatial struc- ture of resting state connectivity stability on the scale of minutes. Frontiers in Neuroscience 8, 138.\n\n- Good, B. H., de Montjoye, Y.-A., Clauset, A., 2010. Performance of modularity maximization in practical contexts. Physical Review E 81 (4), 046106.\n\n- Hansen, E. C., Battaglia, D., Spiegler, A., Deco, G., Jirsa, V. K., 2015. Func- tional connectivity dynamics: Modeling the switching behavior of the resting state. NeuroImage 105, 525–535.\n\n- Hlinka, J., Hadrava, M., 2015. On the danger of detecting network states in white noise. Frontiers in Computational Neuroscience 9.\n\n- Honey, C. J., K¨ otter, R., Breakspear, M., Sporns, O., 2007. Network struc- ture of cerebral cortex shapes functional connectivity on multiple time scales. Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences USA 104 (24), 10240–10245.\n\n- Hutchison, R. M., Morton, J. B., 2015. Tracking the brain’s functional coupling dynamics over development. The Journal of Neuroscience 35 (17), 6849–6859.\n\n- Hutchison, R. M., Womelsdorf, T., Allen, E. A., Bandettini, P. A., Calhoun, V. D., Corbetta, M., Della Penna, S., Duyn, J. H., Glover, G. H., Gonzalez- Castillo, J., et al., 2013a. Dynamic functional connectivity: promise, issues, and interpretations. Neuroimage 80, 360–378.\n\n- Hutchison, R. M., Womelsdorf, T., Gati, J. S., Everling, S., Menon, R. S., 2013b. Resting-state networks show dynamic functional connectivity in awake humans and anesthetized macaques. Human Brain Mapping 34 (9), 2154– 2177.\n\n32" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.369049309348453, + "doc_id": "1ee2b6f3eab7e5769816fa935878568873bf4f7b10d411093c6e00861e9eda91", + "edit_distance": 0.5751295336787565, + "f1_score": 0.9224489795918367, + "meteor": 0.4722819558474163, + "precision": 0.9186991869918699, + "pred_md": "Figure 6: A D for A = [ a, ∞ )\n\nFigure 6: A D for A = [ a, ∞ )\n\n## Proof. See pp. 44 -46 of Villani (2003).\n\nIn the following discussion, I focus on the lower bound on the DTE since the procedure to obtain the upper bound is similar.\n\nRemark 2 In the proof of Lemma 3, Villani (2003) showed that at the optimum, A = { x ∈ R | ϕ x ( ) ≥ } s for some s ∈ [0 , 1] . Since the function ϕ is continuous, if ϕ is nondecreasing then A = [ a, ∞ ) for some a ∈ -∞ ∞ [ , ] where A = φ if a = ∞ . In contrast, if ϕ is nonincreasing, then A = ( -∞ , a ] where A = φ if a = -∞\n\nRemember that for any ( y , y 0 1 ) in the support of the optimal joint distribution, ϕ and ψ satisfy\n\n\n\nPick ( y , y ' 0 ' 1 ) and ( y '' 0 , y '' 1 ) with y '' 0 > y ' 0 in the support of the optimal joint distribution. Then,\n\n\n\nThe inequality in the second line of (8) is obvious from (7) and the inequality in the third line of (8) holds because 1 { y 1 -y 0 < δ } is nondecreasing in y 0 . Since ϕ is nondecreasing on the set { y 0 ∈ Y |∃ 0 y 1 ∈ Y 1 s.t. ( y , y 0 1 ) ∈ Supp π ( ) } by Remark 2 A can be written as [ a, ∞ ) for some a ∈ -∞ ∞ [ , ] .\n\n15", + "recall": 0.9262295081967213, + "true_md": "Proof. See pp. 44 − 46 of Villani (2003).\n\nIn the following discussion, I focus on the lower bound on the DTE since the procedure to obtain the upper bound is similar.\n\nRemark 2 In the proof of Lemma 3, Villani (2003) showed that at the optimum, A = { x ∈$_{R}$| ϕ ( x ) ≥ s } for some s ∈ [0 , 1] . Since the function ϕ is continuous, if ϕ is nondecreasing then A = [ a, ∞ ) for some a ∈ [ −∞ , ∞ ] where A = φ if a = ∞ . In contrast, if ϕ is nonincreasing, then A = ( −∞ , a ] where A = φ if a = −∞\n\nRemember that for any ( y$_{0}$, y$_{1}$ ) in the support of the optimal joint distribution, ϕ and ψ satisfy\n\nPick ( y ′ $_{0}$, y ′ $_{1}$) and ( y ′′ $_{0}$, y ′′ $_{1}$) with y ′′ 0 > y ′ 0 in the support of the optimal joint distribution. Then,\n\nThe inequality in the second line of (8) is obvious from (7) and the inequality in the third line of (8) holds because 1 { y$_{1}$ − y$_{0}$ < δ } is nondecreasing in y$_{0}$ . Since ϕ is nondecreasing on the set { y$_{0}$ ∈ Y$_{0}$|∃ y$_{1}$ ∈ Y$_{1}$ s.t. ( y$_{0}$, y$_{1}$ ) ∈ Supp ( π ) } by Remark 2 A can be written as [ a, ∞ ) for some a ∈ [ −∞ , ∞ ] .\n\n15\n\n$$ϕ ( y ′ $_{0}$) = 1 { y ′ 1 − y ′ 0 < δ } − ψ ( y ′ $_{1}$) (8) ≤ 1 { y ′′ 1 − y ′ 0 < δ } − ψ ( y ′′ $_{1}$) ≤ 1 { y ′′ 1 − y ′′ 0 < δ } − ψ ( y ′′ $_{1}$) = ϕ ( y ′′ $_{0}$) .$$\n\n$$ϕ ( y$_{0}$ ) = inf y$_{1}$ ∈$_{R}$ { 1 { y$_{1}$ − y$_{0}$ < δ } − ψ ( y$_{1}$ ) } . (7)$$\n\nFigure 6: A D for A = [ a, ∞ )" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9305413970179321, + "doc_id": "2b6b91b3f2e53a5d6e94f10a91754e7155df2a44006e712383e3693551ad4651", + "edit_distance": 0.059154929577464786, + "f1_score": 0.955, + "meteor": 0.967547955063819, + "precision": 0.9695431472081218, + "pred_md": "2014) and other drowsiness (Allen et al., 2012).\n\nFinally, the intermittent occurrence of mass excursions is similar to other experimental results that suggest that the emergence of critical dynamics, canonical resting-state networks, and even BOLD activity is not a continuous process, but is driven by instantaneous events at the level of functional connections or in the activity profiles of brain regions, themselves (Tagliazucchi et al., 2012a; Liu and Duyn, 2013; Allan et al., 2015; Karahano˘lu and Van De Ville, 2015). g Presently, however, the precise neurobiological relevance of the highversus low-modularity states remains unclear. An intriguing lead in this regard is the apparent importance of somatosensory and visual networks, which participate disproportionately often in excursions and are, hence, more temporally variable than expected. Interestingly, functional connections between these systems have also been reported as being highly variable across scan sessions (Laumann et al., 2015). Future work is needed to determine if mass excursions are driven by dynamic events involving these networks or another subset of connections.\n\nred It should be noted that modularity scores, Q , are in general, biased by a network's total connection weight. The modularity function used here has a particular bias wherein networks with strong, positive connection weights will tend to have higher modularity scores. In this light, one might anticipate our observation that episodes of high modularity tend to coincide with periods when dynamic connections are unexpectedly strong. Nonetheless, having many positive connections does not, by itself, guarantee a large Q ; for that to occur, these positive connections also must be distributed in such a way that they cluster into communities.\n\n## Possible improvements\n\nOur results are in line with earlier work by (Thompson and Fransson, 2015) and Zalesky and Breakspear (2015), indicating that a great deal of what we\n\n24", + "recall": 0.9408866995073891, + "true_md": "2014) and other drowsiness (Allen et al., 2012).\n\nFinally, the intermittent occurrence of mass excursions is similar to other ex- perimental results that suggest that the emergence of critical dynamics, canoni- cal resting-state networks, and even BOLD activity is not a continuous process, but is driven by instantaneous events at the level of functional connections or in the activity profiles of brain regions, themselves (Tagliazucchi et al., 2012a; Liu and Duyn, 2013; Allan et al., 2015; Karahano˘ glu and Van De Ville, 2015).\n\nPresently, however, the precise neurobiological relevance of the high- versus low-modularity states remains unclear. An intriguing lead in this regard is the apparent importance of somatosensory and visual networks, which participate disproportionately often in excursions and are, hence, more temporally vari- able than expected. Interestingly, functional connections between these systems have also been reported as being highly variable across scan sessions (Laumann et al., 2015). Future work is needed to determine if mass excursions are driven by dynamic events involving these networks or another subset of connections.\n\nred It should be noted that modularity scores, Q , are in general, biased by a network’s total connection weight. The modularity function used here has a particular bias wherein networks with strong, positive connection weights will tend to have higher modularity scores. In this light, one might anticipate our observation that episodes of high modularity tend to coincide with periods when dynamic connections are unexpectedly strong. Nonetheless, having many positive connections does not, by itself, guarantee a large Q ; for that to occur, these positive connections also must be distributed in such a way that they cluster into communities.\n\nOur results are in line with earlier work by (Thompson and Fransson, 2015) and Zalesky and Breakspear (2015), indicating that a great deal of what we\n\n24\n\n## Possible improvements" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.22813412578084505, + "doc_id": "b1b1bec986cf419df7532cd00e38c0ca10048ce046e122b4de8fb3e6e04465a4", + "edit_distance": 0.5936454849498328, + "f1_score": 0.8879310344827587, + "meteor": 0.43495934873995895, + "precision": 0.944954128440367, + "pred_md": "Figure 9: a k +1 ≤ a k + δ at the optimum\n\nFigure 9: a k +1 ≤ a k + δ at the optimum\n\nthat a k +1 > a k + δ for some integer k . This implies that triangles in the region between two straight lines Y 1 = Y 0 + δ and Y 1 = Y 0 lie sparsely as shown in Figure 9(a). Then by adding extra triangles that fill the empty region between two sparse triangles as shown in Figure 9(b), one can always construct a sequence of mutually exclusive triangles that yield the identical or improved lower bound. Therefore, without loss of generality, one can assume a k +1 ≤ a k + δ for every integer k .\n\nOn the other hand, ones cannot exclude the case where a k +1 < a k + δ for some integer k at the optimum . This implies that for some k, the triangle is not large enough to fit in the region corresponding to the DTE under MTR as shown in Figure 10(b). It depends on the underlying joint distribution which sequence of triangles would yield the tighter lower bound, and it is possible that a k +1 < a k + δ for some integer k at the optimum . Therefore,\n\n\n\nConsequently, for δ ≥ 0 ,\n\nwhere 0 ≤ a k +1 -a k ≤ δ.\n\n\n\n23", + "recall": 0.8373983739837398, + "true_md": "Figure 9: a$_{k}$$\\_{+1}$ ≤ a$\\_{k}$ + δ at the optimum\n\nthat a$_{k}$$\\_{+1}$ > a$\\_{k}$ + δ for some integer k . This implies that triangles in the region between two straight lines Y$\\_{1}$ = Y$\\_{0}$ + δ and Y$\\_{1}$ = Y$\\_{0}$ lie sparsely as shown in Figure 9(a). Then by adding extra triangles that fill the empty region between two sparse triangles as shown in Figure 9(b), one can always construct a sequence of mutually exclusive triangles that yield the identical or improved lower bound. Therefore, without loss of generality, one can assume a$\\_{k}$$_{+1}$ ≤ a$_{k}$ + δ for every integer k .\n\nOn the other hand, ones cannot exclude the case where a$_{k}$$\\_{+1}$ < a$\\_{k}$ + δ for some integer k at the optimum . This implies that for some k, the triangle is not large enough to fit in the region corresponding to the DTE under MTR as shown in Figure 10(b). It depends on the underlying joint distribution which sequence of triangles would yield the tighter lower bound, and it is possible that a$\\_{k}$$_{+1}$ < a$_{k}$ + δ for some integer k at the optimum . Therefore,\n\nConsequently, for δ ≥ 0 ,\n\nwhere 0 ≤ a$_{k}$$\\_{+1}$ − a$\\_{k}$ ≤ δ.\n\n23\n\n$$A D k = ( a$_{k}$ + δ, ∞ ) ∪ ( a$_{k}$$_{+1}$, ∞ ) = (min { a$_{k}$ + δ, a$_{k}$$_{+1}$ } , ∞ ) = ( a$_{k}$$_{+1}$, ∞ ) .$$\n\n$$F L Δ ( δ ) = sup { A$_{k}$ } ∞ k = −∞ ∞ ∑ k = −∞ max $^{{}$µ$_{0}$ ( A$_{k}$ ) − µ$_{1}$ $^{(}$A D k $^{)}$, 0 } = sup { a$_{k}$ } ∞ k = −∞ ∞ ∑ k = −∞ max { F$_{1}$ ( a$_{k}$$_{+1}$ ) − F$_{0}$ ( a$_{k}$ ) , 0 }$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.809019217177957, + "doc_id": "29de0c80fb3387c5e78195879fd4f3a4ede85d07aeeaeee364f2dbc4c6af70a3", + "edit_distance": 0.10560344827586207, + "f1_score": 0.9166666666666667, + "meteor": 0.8995076870665139, + "precision": 0.9339622641509434, + "pred_md": "## References\n\nBanerjee, Sudipto, Bradley P. Carlin, and Alan E. Gelfand (Dec. 17, 2003). Hierarchical Modeling and Analysis for Spatial Data . CRC Press. 470 pp.\n\nBreslow, N. E. and D. G. Clayton (Mar. 1, 1993). 'Approximate Inference in Generalized Linear Mixed Models'. Journal of the American Statistical Association 88.421, pp. 9-25.\n\nCaffo, Brian S., Wolfgang Jank, and Galin L. Jones (2005). 'Ascent-Based Monte Carlo ExpectationMaximization'. Journal of the Royal Statistical Society. Series B (Statistical Methodology) 67.2. ArticleType: primary article / Full publication date: 2005 / Copyright 2005 Royal Statistical Society, pp. 235-251.\n\nCai, Tony and Weidong Liu (June 1, 2011). 'Adaptive Thresholding for Sparse Covariance Matrix Estimation'. Journal of the American Statistical Association 106.494, pp. 672-684.\n\nDuane, Simon et al. (Sept. 3, 1987). 'Hybrid Monte Carlo'. Physics Letters B 195.2, pp. 216-222. Durbin, James and Siem Jan Koopman (May 3, 2012). Time Series Analysis by State Space Methods: Second Edition . Oxford University Press. 370 pp.\n\nEfron, Bradley and R. J. Tibshirani (May 15, 1994). An Introduction to the Bootstrap . CRC Press. 456 pp.\n\nEveritt, Brian (2011). Cluster Analysis . 5th ed. Wiley series in probability and statistics. Hoboken: Wiley.\n\nGelman, Andrew and Jennifer Hill (Dec. 18, 2006). Data Analysis Using Regression and Multilevel/Hierarchical Models . Cambridge University Press. 651 pp.\n\nGilks, W. R. (2005). 'Markov Chain Monte Carlo'. Encyclopedia of Biostatistics . John Wiley & Sons, Ltd.\n\nGneiting, Tilmann and Adrian E Raftery (Mar. 1, 2007). 'Strictly Proper Scoring Rules, Prediction, and Estimation'. Journal of the American Statistical Association 102.477, pp. 359-378.\n\nGuennebaud, Gal and Benoit Jacob (2010). Eigen . url : http://eigen.tuxfamily.org .\n\nHaario, Heikki, Eero Saksman, and Johanna Tamminen (1999). 'Adaptive proposal distribution for random walk Metropolis algorithm'. Computational Statistics 3.\n\nHarvey, Andrew C (1993). Time series models . 2nd ed. Cambridge, Massachusetts: The MIT Press.\n\n30", + "recall": 0.9, + "true_md": "## References\n\n- Banerjee, Sudipto, Bradley P. Carlin, and Alan E. Gelfand (Dec. 17, 2003). Hierarchical Modeling and Analysis for Spatial Data . CRC Press. 470 pp.\n\n- Breslow, N. E. and D. G. Clayton (Mar. 1, 1993). “Approximate Inference in Generalized Linear Mixed Models”. Journal of the American Statistical Association 88.421, pp. 9–25.\n\n- Caffo, Brian S., Wolfgang Jank, and Galin L. Jones (2005). “Ascent-Based Monte Carlo Expectation- Maximization”. Journal of the Royal Statistical Society. Series B (Statistical Methodology) 67.2. ArticleType: primary article / Full publication date: 2005 / Copyright 2005 Royal Statistical Society, pp. 235–251.\n\n- Cai, Tony and Weidong Liu (June 1, 2011). “Adaptive Thresholding for Sparse Covariance Matrix Estimation”. Journal of the American Statistical Association 106.494, pp. 672–684.\n\n- Duane, Simon et al. (Sept. 3, 1987). “Hybrid Monte Carlo”. Physics Letters B 195.2, pp. 216–222.\n\n- Durbin, James and Siem Jan Koopman (May 3, 2012). Time Series Analysis by State Space Methods: Second Edition . Oxford University Press. 370 pp.\n\n- Efron, Bradley and R. J. Tibshirani (May 15, 1994). An Introduction to the Bootstrap . CRC Press. 456 pp.\n\n- Everitt, Brian (2011). Cluster Analysis . 5th ed. Wiley series in probability and statistics. Hoboken: Wiley.\n\n- Gelman, Andrew and Jennifer Hill (Dec. 18, 2006). Data Analysis Using Regression and Multi- level/Hierarchical Models . Cambridge University Press. 651 pp.\n\n- Gilks, W. R. (2005). “Markov Chain Monte Carlo”. Encyclopedia of Biostatistics . John Wiley & Sons, Ltd.\n\n- Gneiting, Tilmann and Adrian E Raftery (Mar. 1, 2007). “Strictly Proper Scoring Rules, Prediction, and Estimation”. Journal of the American Statistical Association 102.477, pp. 359–378.\n\n- Guennebaud, Gal and Benoit Jacob (2010). Eigen . $_{url}$: http://eigen.tuxfamily.org .\n\n- Haario, Heikki, Eero Saksman, and Johanna Tamminen (1999). “Adaptive proposal distribution for random walk Metropolis algorithm”. Computational Statistics 3.\n\n- Harvey, Andrew C (1993). Time series models . 2nd ed. Cambridge, Massachusetts: The MIT Press.\n\n30" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8384848464355571, + "doc_id": "5f926e805ecccee1f61da31171484f6f1ccb92dd984551489fbe638c6fe307a7", + "edit_distance": 0.12053571428571429, + "f1_score": 0.9132420091324202, + "meteor": 0.8907751800695702, + "precision": 0.9216589861751152, + "pred_md": "Makarov, G. D. (1981). 'Estimates for the Distribution Function of a Sum of Two Random Variables when the Marginal Distributions are Fixed,' Theory of Probability and its Applications , 26, 803-806.\n\nManski, C. F. (1997). 'Monotone Treatment Response,' Econometrica , 65, 1311-1334.\n\nManski, C. F. and J. Pepper (2000). 'Monotone Instrumental Variables: With an Application to the Returns to Schooling,' Econometrica , 68, 997-1010.\n\nMassachusetts Department of Public Health (2007). 'Accomplishments of the Massachusetts Tobacco Control Program,' online at http://www.mass.gov/eohhs/docs/dph/tobacco-control/accomplishments.pdf.\n\nMonge, G. (1781). 'M' emoire sur la th'orie des d'blais et remblais,' In Histoire de l'Acad'mie Royale des e e e Sciences de Paris, pp. 666-704.\n\nNelsen, R.B. (2006). An Introduction to Copulas. Springer.\n\nNewhouse, J. P., R. H. Brook, N. Duan, E. B. Keeler, A. Leibowitz, W. G. Manning, M. S. Marquis, C. N. Morris, C. E. Phelps and J. E. Rolph (2008). 'Attrition in the RAND Health Insurance Experiment: a response to Nyman,' Journal of Health Politics, Policy and Law , 33, 295-308.\n\nOrzechowski and Walker (2011). 'The Tax Burden On Tobacco,' The Tax Burden onTobacco: Historical Compilation , 46.\n\nPark, C. and C. Kang (2008). 'Does Education Induce Healthy Lifestyle?,' Journal of Health Economics, 27, 1516-1531.\n\nPark, S. S. (2010). 'Heterogeneous Effects of Class Size Reduction: Re-Visiting Project STAR,' Working Paper.\n\nPark, B. G. (2013). 'Nonparametric Identification and Estimation of the Extended Roy Model,' Working Paper.\n\nPermutt, T. and J.R. Hebel (1989). 'Simultaneous Equation Estimation in a Clinical Trial of the Effect of Smoking on Birth Weight,' Biometrics , 45, 619-622.\n\nPolitis, D. N., J.P. Romano and M. Wolf (1999). 'Subsampling,' Springer-Verlag.\n\nSuri, T. (2011). 'Selection and Comparative Advantage in Technology Adoption,' Econometrica , 79, 159-209.\n\nSimon, D. (2012). 'Does Early Life Exposure to Cigarette Smoke Permanently Harm Childhood Health? Evidence from Cigarette Tax Hikes,' Working Paper.\n\n53", + "recall": 0.9049773755656109, + "true_md": "53\n\nMakarov, G. D. (1981). “Estimates for the Distribution Function of a Sum of Two Random Variables when the Marginal Distributions are Fixed,” Theory of Probability and its Applications , 26, 803-806.\n\nManski, C. F. (1997). “Monotone Treatment Response,” Econometrica , 65, 1311-1334.\n\nManski, C. F. and J. Pepper (2000). “Monotone Instrumental Variables: With an Application to the Returns to Schooling,” Econometrica , 68, 997-1010.\n\nMassachusetts Department of Public Health (2007). “Accomplishments of the Massachusetts Tobacco Control Program,” online at http://www.mass.gov/eohhs/docs/dph/tobacco-control/accomplishments.pdf.\n\nMonge, G. (1781). “M´ emoire sur la th´ eorie des d´ eblais et remblais,” In Histoire de l’Acad´ emie Royale des Sciences de Paris, pp. 666-704.\n\nNelsen, R.B. (2006). An Introduction to Copulas. Springer.\n\nNewhouse, J. P., R. H. Brook, N. Duan, E. B. Keeler, A. Leibowitz, W. G. Manning, M. S. Marquis, C. N. Morris, C. E. Phelps and J. E. Rolph (2008). “Attrition in the RAND Health Insurance Experiment: a response to Nyman,” Journal of Health Politics, Policy and Law , 33, 295-308.\n\nOrzechowski and Walker (2011). “The Tax Burden On Tobacco,” The Tax Burden onTobacco: Historical Compilation , 46.\n\nPark, C. and C. Kang (2008). “Does Education Induce Healthy Lifestyle?,” Journal of Health Economics, 27, 1516-1531.\n\nPark, S. S. (2010). “Heterogeneous Effects of Class Size Reduction: Re-Visiting Project STAR,” Working Paper.\n\nPark, B. G. (2013). “Nonparametric Identification and Estimation of the Extended Roy Model,” Working Paper.\n\nPermutt, T. and J.R. Hebel (1989). “Simultaneous Equation Estimation in a Clinical Trial of the Effect of Smoking on Birth Weight,” Biometrics , 45, 619-622.\n\nPolitis, D. N., J.P. Romano and M. Wolf (1999). “Subsampling,” Springer-Verlag.\n\nSuri, T. (2011). “Selection and Comparative Advantage in Technology Adoption,” Econometrica , 79, 159-209.\n\nSimon, D. (2012). “Does Early Life Exposure to Cigarette Smoke Permanently Harm Childhood Health? Evidence from Cigarette Tax Hikes,” Working Paper." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.33189958658875296, + "doc_id": "c54055d86aafe3d0cdca0ec4fa79b585bbddb5d4f70d71eff706a66532f8cf21", + "edit_distance": 0.49068901303538176, + "f1_score": 0.9197860962566844, + "meteor": 0.5381087007658346, + "precision": 0.945054945054945, + "pred_md": "8\n\nKABALAN GASPARD\n\nThe equation can be solved using cyclotomy and quadratic residues. A partial solution was found by Dirichlet using this method, building upon the work of Gauss [3]. In this section, we build upon Dirichlet's work, explicitly writing the solution and using the modern machinery of Galois Theory to streamline the approach. Again, we let p be an odd prime, and define p ∗ = ( -1) p -1 2 p , i = √ -1, and start by introducing an important lemma.\n\n\n\nProof. Note that the product of the 2 above polynomials (on the left-hand side) is 4 ∏ 1 ≤ k<p ( x -ζ k ) = 4 m x p ( ) ∈ Z [ x ]. It is therefore fixed by any Galois automorphism in Gal K ( : Q ). Now taking θ = ζ p 2 -1 8 p -1 2 ∏ k =1 (1 -ζ k ) 2 , we see that θ 2 = p ∗ since ( -1) p 2 -1 8 ≡ ( ) 2 p (mod 2), and trivially θ ∈ O K . So √ p ∗ ∈ O K , Now an automorphism σ in the Galois group fixes p ∗ if and only if σ is a square. But this is if and only if σ fixes all (and only) the ζ k such that k is a quadratic residue modulo p . So ∏ 1 ≤ k<p ( ) k p =1 ( x -ζ k ) ∈ L x [ ] where L = Q ( √ p ∗ ). All the\n\ncoefficients in L x [ ] are of the form a + b √ p ∗ where a and b are both rational, and 1 2 · an algebraic integer (allowing for the fact that p ∗ ≡ 1 (4)). The coefficients of 2 ∏ 1 ≤ k<p ( ) k p =1 ( x -ζ k )\n\nare therefore rational algebraic integers and thus in Z . We can now expand q 1 ( x ) and rewrite it as q 1 ( x ) = f ( x ) + √ p g x ∗ ( ) where f ( x , g ) ( x ) are polynomials in Z [ x ].\n\nA similar argument shows that q -1 ( x ) ∈ L x [ ]. Now let τ be the Galois automorphism in Gal K ( : Q ) defined by τ ( √ p ∗ ) = - √ p ∗ (noting that K : L : Q is a tower of fields). Then by the above, and since τ 2 must fix q 1 ( x ), we must have that τ ( ζ k ) = ζ l where ( )( ) k p l p = -1. So since τ is a Galois automorphism over K , we must have τ ( q 1 ( x )) = q -1 ( x ). This yields that q -1 ( x ) = f ( x ) - √ p g x ∗ ( ). /square\n\nWe will primarily consider the case where d is an odd prime. Pell's Equation then becomes\n\n", + "recall": 0.8958333333333334, + "true_md": "The equation can be solved using cyclotomy and quadratic residues. A partial solution was found by Dirichlet using this method, building upon the work of Gauss [3]. In this section, we build upon Dirichlet’s work, explicitly writing the solution and using the modern machinery of Galois Theory to streamline the approach. Again, we let p be an odd prime, and define p ∗ = ( − 1) $^{p}$− 1 2 p , i = √ − 1, and start by introducing an important lemma.\n\nLemma 3.      q$_{1}$ ( x ) = 2 ∏ $^{1}$≤ k<p ( k $_{p}$) =1 ( x − ζ $^{k}$) = f ( x ) + √ p ∗ g ( x ) q − $_{1}$( x ) = 2 ∏ $^{1}$≤ k<p ( k $_{p}$) $^{=}$−1 ( x − ζ $^{k}$) = f ( x ) − √$_{p}$$\\_{∗}$$_{g}$$\\_{(}$$_{x}$$\\_{)}$ where f ( x ) , g ( x ) are polynomi- als in Z [ x ] .\n\nProof. Note that the product of the 2 above polynomials (on the left-hand side) is 4 ∏ $^{1}$≤ k<p ( x − ζ $^{k}$) = 4 m$_{p}$ ( x ) ∈ Z [ x ]. It is therefore fixed by any Galois automorphism in Gal ( K : Q ). Now taking θ = ζ$^{$\\_{p}$2}$ − 1 8 $^{p}$− 1 2 ∏ k =1 (1 − ζ $^{k}$) $^{2}$, we see that θ 2 = p ∗ since ( − 1)$^{$\\_{p}$2}$ − 1 8 ≡ ( 2 p ) (mod 2), and trivially θ ∈ O $_{K}$. So √$_{p}$$\\_{∗}$ ∈ O $\\_{K}$, Now an automorphism σ in the Galois group fixes p ∗ if and only if σ is a square. But this is if and only if σ fixes all (and only) the ζ k such that k is a quadratic residue modulo p . So ∏ $^{1}$≤ k<p ( k $\\_{p}$) =1 ( x − ζ $^{k}$) ∈ L [ x ] where L = Q $\\_{(}$√$\\_{p}$$_{∗}$$\\_{).}$ All the coefficients in L [ x ] are of the form a + b √ p ∗ where a and b are both rational, and 1 2 · an algebraic integer (allowing for the fact that p ∗ ≡ 1 (4)). The coefficients of 2 ∏ $^{1}$≤ k<p ( k $\\_{p}$) =1 ( x − ζ $^{k}$) are therefore rational algebraic integers and thus in Z . We can now expand q$\\_{1}$ ( x ) and rewrite it as q$\\_{1}$ ( x ) = f ( x $\\_{) +}$√$\\_{p}$$_{∗}$$\\_{g}$$_{(}$$\\_{x}$$_{) where}$ f ( x ) , g ( x ) are polynomials in Z [ x ].\n\nA similar argument shows that q − $_{1}$( x ) ∈ L [ x ]. Now let τ be the Galois automorphism in Gal ( K : Q ) defined by τ $_{(}$√$_{p}$$\\_{∗}$$_{) =}$ − √$_{p}$$\\_{∗}$ (noting that K : L : Q is a tower of fields). Then by the above, and since τ 2 must fix q$\\_{1}$ ( x ), we must have that τ ( ζ $^{k}$) = ζ l where ( k p )( l p ) = − 1. So since τ is a Galois automorphism over K , we must have τ ( q$\\_{1}$ ( x )) = q − $\\_{1}$( x ). This yields that q − $\\_{1}$( x ) = f ( x ) − √$\\_{p}$$_{∗}$$\\_{g}$$_{(}$$\\_{x}$$_{).}$ □\n\nWe will primarily consider the case where d is an odd prime. Pell’s Equation then becomes\n\n$$(3.1) x 2 − py 2 = 1$$\n\n8\n\nKABALAN GASPARD" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.15368552491830828, + "doc_id": "d7bbcb9f6dc0abb3caded8c9ea80b0b551170a232e732643c03e5768b0eaa64d", + "edit_distance": 0.6924398625429553, + "f1_score": 0.8999999999999999, + "meteor": 0.263721503892755, + "precision": 0.9, + "pred_md": "ON THE APPLICATIONS OF CYCLOTOMIC FIELDS IN INTRODUCTORY NUMBER THEORY\n\n11\n\n\n\n\n\nsince there are precisely l quadratic residues modulo p\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nquadratic character modulo p and since\n\n\n\n\n\nSo f ( ζ ) = -ζ f l ( ζ -1 ). So writing f ( x ) = a x l l + a l -1 x l -1 + ... + a x 1 + a 0 , this yields a ζ l l + a l -1 ζ l -1 + ... + a ζ 1 + a 0 = -a ζ 0 l -a ζ 1 l -1 -... -a l -1 ζ -a l , i.e.\n\n\n\n\n\nNow it is trivial to see that a l = 2 by the above formula for f ( x ). Also, q 1 ( x ) = 2 ∏ 1 ≤ k<p ( ) k p =1 ( x -\n\n\n\n/negationslash\n\nNow 3 | p 2 -1 since p = 3 ( p ≡ 3 (4)), and p 2 ≡ 1 (8) since p is odd. So 3 · 8 = 24 | p 2 -1. So The constant term of q 1 is - · 2 1 = -2. But q 1 ( x ) = f ( x ) + √ p g x ∗ ( ) where f ( x , g ) ( x ) ∈ Z [ x ]. So we must have a 0 = -2. Therefore a l = -a 0 . So (3.4) now yields l -1 ∑ k =1 a ζ k k = l -1 ∑ k =1 ( -a k ) ζ l -k = l -1 ∑ k =1 ( -a l -k ) ζ k (after replacing k by l -k ), and { ζ, ..., ζ l -1 } is a Z -linearly independent subset. So a l -k = -a l for 1 ≤ k ≤ l -1, and so by the above, a l -k = -a l for all 0 ≤ k ≤ l . We can therefore rewrite f ( x ) as 2( x l -1) + b x x 1 ( l -2 -1) + b x 2 2 ( x l -4 -1) + ... + b l -1 2 x l -1 2 ( x -1) = l -1 2 ∑ k =0 b k x k ( x l -2 k -1), b k ∈ Z for all 0 ≤ k ≤ l -1 2 (with b 0 = 2).", + "recall": 0.9, + "true_md": "ON THE APPLICATIONS OF CYCLOTOMIC FIELDS IN INTRODUCTORY NUMBER THEORY 11\n\nsince there are precisely l quadratic residues modulo p\n\nquadratic character modulo p and since ( 0 p ) = 0.\n\nSo f ( ζ ) = − ζ $^{l}$f ( ζ − $^{1}$). So writing f ( x ) = a$_{l}$x l + a$_{l}$ − $_{1}$x $^{l}$− 1 + ... + a$_{1}$x + a$_{0}$ , this yields a$_{l}$ζ l + a$_{l}$ − $_{1}$ζ $^{l}$− 1 + ... + a$_{1}$ζ + a$_{0}$ = − a$_{0}$ζ l − a$_{1}$ζ $^{l}$− 1 − ... − a$_{l}$ − $_{1}$ζ − a$_{l}$ , i.e.\n\n$$(3.4) l ∑ k =0 a$_{k}$ζ k = l ∑ k =0 ( − a$_{k}$ ) ζ $^{l}$−k$$\n\nNow it is trivial to see that a$_{l}$ = 2 by the above formula for f ( x ). Also, q$_{1}$ ( x ) = 2 ∏ $^{1}$≤ k<p ( k $_{p}$) =1 ( x −\n\nζ $^{k}$). The constant term of q$_{1}$ is 2( − 1) l ∏ $^{1}$≤ k<p ( k $_{p}$) =1 ζ k = − 2 ∏ $^{1}$≤ $^{k}$≤l ζ k 2 = − 2 ζ l ( l +1)(2 l +1) 6 = − 2 ζ p $^{$\\_{p}$2}$− 1 24 . 2 2\n\n∏ ∏ Now 3 | p 2 − 1 since p ̸ = 3 ( p ≡ 3 (4)), and p 2 ≡ 1 (8) since p is odd. So 3 · 8 = 24 | p 2 − 1. So The constant term of q$_{1}$ is − 2 · 1 = − 2. But q$_{1}$ ( x ) = f ( x ) + √ p ∗ g ( x ) where f ( x ) , g ( x ) ∈ Z [ x ]. So we must have a$_{0}$ = − 2. Therefore a$_{l}$ = − a$_{0}$ . So (3.4) now yields $^{l}$− 1 ∑ k =1 a$_{k}$ζ k = $^{l}$− 1 ∑ k =1 ( − a$_{k}$ ) ζ $^{l}$−k = $^{l}$− 1 ∑ k =1 ( − a$_{l}$ − $_{k}$) ζ k (after replacing k by l − k ), and { ζ, ..., ζ $^{l}$− $^{1}$} is a Z -linearly independent subset. So a$_{l}$ − k = − a$_{l}$ for 1 ≤ k ≤ l − 1, and so by the above, a$_{l}$ − k = − a$_{l}$ for all 0 ≤ k ≤ l . We can therefore rewrite f ( x ) as 2( x l − 1) + b$_{1}$x ( x $^{l}$− 2 − 1) + b$_{2}$x $^{2}$( x $^{l}$− 4 − 1) + ... + b $^{l}$− 1 2 x $^{l}$− 1 2 ( x − 1) = $^{l}$− 1 2 ∑ k =0 b$_{k}$x $^{k}$( x $^{l}$− 2 k − 1), b$_{k}$ ∈ Z for all 0 ≤ k ≤ $^{l}$− 1 2 (with b$_{0}$ = 2).\n\n∏ $^{1}$≤ k<p ( k $_{p}$) =1 ( ζ − 1 − ζ $^{k}$). So\n\n$$f ( ζ ) f ( ζ − $^{1}$) = ∏ $^{1}$≤ k

\n\nwhere A t ( ) and B i are n × n function-matrices, A t ( + ω ) = A t , ( ) for all t ∈ R and there exists an integer p such that ζ i + p = ζ i + ω and B i + p = B , i for all i ∈ Z .\n\nLemma 4.1 Assume that system (4.31) has a simple unit characteristic multiplier and the remaining n -1 ones are in modulus less than unity. Then, the system (4.31) has a real fundamental matrix X t , ( ) of the form\n\nwhere P ∈ PC 1 ( R , θ ) is a regular, ω -periodic matrix, and B is an ( n -1) × ( n -1) matrix with all eigenvalues have negative real parts.\n\n\n\nProof. Denote the matrix X t , X ( ) (0) = I, as fundamental matrix of system (4.31). There exists a matrix B 1 such that the substitution x = P t z, ( ) where P t ( ) = X t ( ) exp( -B t , 1 ) transforms (4.31) to the following system with constant coefficient [1],\n\n\n\nThe matrix exp(Λ ω ) has a simple unit eigenvalue and remaining ( n -1) ones are in modulus less\n\n21", + "recall": 0.8855721393034826, + "true_md": "Definition 4.1 The periodic solution Ψ( t ) : $^{R}$→ D of (2.1) is said to be orbitally stable if for every ϵ > 0 , there corresponds δ = δ ( ϵ ) > 0 such that dist ( x ( t, 0 , x$_{0}$ ) , η ) < ϵ, for all t ≥ 0 , provided dist ( x$_{0}$, η ) < δ and x$_{0}$ / ∈ ∪ $_{i}$c $^{+}$(Ψ( θ$_{i}$ ) , δ ) , for i = 1 , . . . , m, where m is the number of points Ψ( θ$_{i}$ ) ∈ Γ \\ ∂ Γ .\n\nThe point x$_{0}$ is not considered in regions c $^{+}$(Ψ( θ$_{i}$ ) , δ ) , i = 1 , . . . , m, since solutions which start there move continuously on a finite interval, while Ψ( t ) experiences a non-zero jump at t = θ$_{i}$ and this violates the continuity in initial value, in general. In the same time, we take into account any region adjoint to points of ∂ Γ , since the jump of Ψ( t ) is zero there and, consequently, the continuous dependence in initial value is valid for all near points.\n\nDefinition 4.2 The solution Ψ( t ) : R$_{+}$ → D of (2.1) is said to have asymptotic phase property if a δ > 0 exists such that to each x$_{0}$ satisfying dist ( x$_{0}$, η ) < δ and x$_{0}$ / ∈ ∪ $_{i}$c $^{+}$(Ψ( θ$_{i}$ ) , δ ) , for i = 1 , . . . , m, there corresponds an asymptotic phase α ( x$_{0}$ ) ∈ $^{R}$with property: for all ϵ > 0 , there exists T ( ϵ ) > 0 , such that x ( t + α ( x$_{0}$ ) , 0 , x$_{0}$ ) is in ϵ -neighborhood of Ψ( t ) in B − topology for t ∈ [ T ( ϵ ) , ∞ ) .\n\nLet us consider the following system, which will be needed in the following lemmas and theorem\n\nwhere A ( t ) and B$_{i}$ are n × n function-matrices, A ( t + ω ) = A ( t ) , for all t ∈ $^{R}$and there exists an integer p such that ζ$_{i}$$\\_{+}$$_{p}$ = ζ$_{i}$ + ω and B$_{i}$$\\_{+}$$_{p}$ = B$_{i}$, for all i ∈ $^{Z}$.\n\nLemma 4.1 Assume that system (4.31) has a simple unit characteristic multiplier and the remaining n − 1 ones are in modulus less than unity. Then, the system (4.31) has a real fundamental matrix X ( t ) , of the form  \n\n  where P ∈ P C $^{1}$( $^{R}$, θ ) is a regular, ω -periodic matrix, and B is an ( n − 1) × ( n − 1) matrix with all eigenvalues have negative real parts.\n\n$$X ( t ) = P ( t )    1 0 0 exp ( Bt )    , (4.32) ω -periodic matrix, and B is an ( n − 1) × ( n − 1) matrix with all$$\n\n$$$_{x}$′ = A ( t ) x, Δ x | t = ζ$_{i}$ = B$_{i}$u, (4.31)$$\n\n$$z ′ = Λ z. (4.33)$$\n\nProof. Denote the matrix X ( t ) , X (0) = I, as fundamental matrix of system (4.31). There exists a matrix B$_{1}$ such that the substitution x = P ( t ) z, where P ( t ) = X ( t ) exp( − B$_{1}$t ) , transforms (4.31) to the following system with constant coefficient [1],\n\nThe matrix exp(Λ ω ) has a simple unit eigenvalue and remaining ( n − 1) ones are in modulus less\n\n21" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6272909128861688, + "doc_id": "64b35280b262d1ebc84b5db1718d13982d0280b396ea9bc0ba152e3608bffea3", + "edit_distance": 0.31317829457364343, + "f1_score": 0.936893203883495, + "meteor": 0.7221655287905299, + "precision": 0.965, + "pred_md": "As a consequence, our projection-based tests would be consistent against all alternative hypotheses of the type of (3.2), avoiding the aforementioned problem.\n\nSecond, and perhaps more importantly, even when one does not use NLS to estimate θ , 0 we argue that the lack of power against alternatives collinear to the score function g X,θ ( 0 ) is not a main concern. As shown by Escanciano (2009 a ), every test based on ICM approach has trivial local power against these alternatives, and as a consequence, the global power of all ICM tests in the direction of the score function will also be low, see e.g. Strasser (1990). In fact, instead of considering this as a limitation one may consider this property as a feature of our tests: by acknowledging that such alternatives cannot be powerfully detected, our projection-based test statistics do not waste power in such directions, and therefore may have higher power against other, perhaps more important, alternatives; see Section 4 for an illustration.\n\nThe above discussion raises the question: are there other classes of fixed alternative hypotheses that our specification tests are not able to detect? As first pointed out by Shaikh et al. (2009), the answer is yes. Because our test statistics depend on X only through the propensity score q X,θ ( 0 ), our tests will have trivial power against the class of misspecified propensity scores, where\n\n\n\n/negationslash\n\nin a set of positive probability, but\n\n\n\nwhere θ 0 now is the probability limit of ˆ θ n . In other words, tests based on (2.3) (or equivalently on (2.4)), will have trivial power against alternatives such that p ( X ) is different from q ( X,θ 0 ) but\n\n\n\nThe leading case of such a class of alternatives is when the propensity score is correctly specified for a subvector of X , but not for the entire vector X , see e.g. Shaikh et al. (2009). Given the nonlinear nature of p ( X ), one may consider such a class of alternatives rather exceptional. However, they can still arise in practice under some particular circumstances as we will illustrate below.\n\nConsider the case where X = ( X ,X 1 2 ) and that both covariates are relevant for the propensity score, i.e., p ( X ) = p ( X ,X 1 2 ). Suppose that a researcher considers a Probit model for\n\n14", + "recall": 0.910377358490566, + "true_md": "As a consequence, our projection-based tests would be consistent against all alternative hy- potheses of the type of (3.2), avoiding the aforementioned problem.\n\nSecond, and perhaps more importantly, even when one does not use NLS to estimate θ$_{0}$, we argue that the lack of power against alternatives collinear to the score function g ( X, θ$_{0}$ ) is not a main concern. As shown by Escanciano (2009 a ), every test based on ICM approach has trivial local power against these alternatives, and as a consequence, the global power of all ICM tests in the direction of the score function will also be low, see e.g. Strasser (1990). In fact, instead of considering this as a limitation one may consider this property as a feature of our tests: by acknowledging that such alternatives cannot be powerfully detected, our projection-based test statistics do not waste power in such directions, and therefore may have higher power against other, perhaps more important, alternatives; see Section 4 for an illustration.\n\nThe above discussion raises the question: are there other classes of fixed alternative hy- potheses that our specification tests are not able to detect? As first pointed out by Shaikh et al. (2009), the answer is yes. Because our test statistics depend on X only through the propen- sity score q ( X, θ$_{0}$ ), our tests will have trivial power against the class of misspecified propensity scores, where\n\nin a set of positive probability, but\n\nwhere θ$_{0}$ now is the probability limit of ˆ θ$_{n}$ . In other words, tests based on (2.3) (or equivalently on (2.4)), will have trivial power against alternatives such that p ( X ) is different from q ( X, θ$_{0}$ ) but\n\nThe leading case of such a class of alternatives is when the propensity score is correctly specified for a subvector of X , but not for the entire vector X , see e.g. Shaikh et al. (2009). Given the nonlinear nature of p ( X ), one may consider such a class of alternatives rather exceptional. However, they can still arise in practice under some particular circumstances as we will illustrate below.\n\nConsider the case where X = ( X$_{1}$, X$_{2}$ ) and that both covariates are relevant for the propen- sity score, i.e., p ( X ) = p ( X$_{1}$, X$_{2}$ ). Suppose that a researcher considers a Probit model for\n\n$$E [ p ( X ) | q ( X, θ$_{0}$ )] = q ( X, θ$_{0}$ ) a.s.. (3.3)$$\n\n$$E [ D − q ( X, θ$_{0}$ ) | q ( X, θ$_{0}$ )] = 0 a.s.,$$\n\n$$E [ D − q ( X, θ$_{0}$ ) | X ] = p ( X ) − q ( X, θ$_{0}$ ) ̸ = 0$$\n\n14" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6723427772194689, + "doc_id": "ab2346e9b13cd4c32eea0f6356895a91ec9815dba98b675b0c7ed9ca2cebdfb0", + "edit_distance": 0.23583180987202926, + "f1_score": 0.9629629629629631, + "meteor": 0.8116678506795371, + "precision": 0.9848484848484849, + "pred_md": "9\n\n/negationslash\n\nThis criterion guarantees the selection of the users who possess not only better powergain product but also they offer less interference to the neighbor cells. The denominator ∑ L j =1 ,j = l P k, max g n,k,lj accounts for the maximum aggregate interference that the k th user in cell l , may cause to all cells. Even though this criterion is heuristic, it improves the performance compared to the traditional C/I scheme (which gives nearly similar results as our lower bound). Once the initial allocations are computed, we can calculate the initial throughput of the network C o using (1).\n\n- · Maximize Throughput Iteratively until Convergence : In this step, we select any cell l and subcarrier n arbitrarily and re-perform the allocation at this subcarrier considering the other cell allocations fixed, i.e., I n,l remains fixed. More explicitly, we compute C n,k,l = log (1 + 2 p n,k,l h n,k,l σ 2 + I n,l ) for all users in cell l one by one and select the user which gives the maximum incremental throughput at subcarrier n , i.e., C n,k,l - C o . Note that, in order to compute C n,k,l , we need to compute p n,k,l which can be obtained simply by dividing P k, max equally among all the fixed allocated subcarriers of user k and the new one which is currently under observation.\n\nOnce the reallocation is done at subcarrier n , we move to the next subcarrier in cell l and so on. As the new allocations are computed for cell l , we calculate the new increased network throughput C new and move to another cell j . The whole process is repeated again with C o = C new until convergence to a desired accuracy is achieved.\n\n## Phase II: Power Allocation\n\nOnce the subcarrier allocation is done, the optimal powers can then be calculated for the high SINR regime or for the general SINR regime through solving a series of GPs using successive convex approximation which is a provably convergent heuristic [14]. This approach is known to compute globally optimal power allocations in many cases. Thus, for given allocations, (1) can\n\nMarch 19, 2018\n\nDRAFT", + "recall": 0.9420289855072463, + "true_md": "9\n\nThis criterion guarantees the selection of the users who possess not only better power- gain product but also they offer less interference to the neighbor cells. The denominator ∑ L j =1 ,j ̸ = $_{l}$P$_{k,}$$\\_{max}$ g$\\_{n,k,lj}$ accounts for the maximum aggregate interference that the k th user in cell l , may cause to all cells. Even though this criterion is heuristic, it improves the performance compared to the traditional C/I scheme (which gives nearly similar results as our lower bound). Once the initial allocations are computed, we can calculate the initial throughput of the network C$\\_{o}$ using (1).\n\n- • Maximize Throughput Iteratively until Convergence : In this step, we select any cell l and subcarrier n arbitrarily and re-perform the allocation at this subcarrier considering the other cell allocations fixed, i.e., I$_{n,l}$ remains fixed. More explicitly, we compute C$_{n,k,l}$ = log$_{2}$(1+ p$_{n,k,l}$h$_{n,k,l}$ σ $^{2}$+ I$_{n,l}$ ) for all users in cell l one by one and select the user which gives the maximum incremental throughput at subcarrier n , i.e., C$_{n,k,l}$ − C$_{o}$ . Note that, in order to compute C$_{n,k,l}$ , we need to compute p$_{n,k,l}$ which can be obtained simply by dividing P$_{k,}$$\\_{max}$ equally among all the fixed allocated subcarriers of user k and the new one which is currently under observation.\n\nOnce the reallocation is done at subcarrier n , we move to the next subcarrier in cell l and so on. As the new allocations are computed for cell l , we calculate the new increased network throughput C$_{new}$ and move to another cell j . The whole process is repeated again with C$_{o}$ = C$_{new}$ until convergence to a desired accuracy is achieved.\n\nOnce the subcarrier allocation is done, the optimal powers can then be calculated for the high SINR regime or for the general SINR regime through solving a series of GPs using successive convex approximation which is a provably convergent heuristic [14]. This approach is known to compute globally optimal power allocations in many cases. Thus, for given allocations, (1) can\n\n## Phase II: Power Allocation\n\nDRAFT\n\nMarch 19, 2018" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4877593896965489, + "doc_id": "2869f3a3c803d8c1cb902d5425675a7e5de9c2c7647ef821484844d330a9b7d7", + "edit_distance": 0.5377207062600321, + "f1_score": 0.9389920424403182, + "meteor": 0.6005012939869095, + "precision": 0.9725274725274725, + "pred_md": "as follows:\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nwhere d ref is the reference distance and is set equal to 0.05 km, d k,l is the distance of the k th user from the l th BS. The first term denotes the path loss where γ is the path loss exponent and is set equal to 3. The second term represents log-normal shadowing with a mean of 0 dB and a standard deviation of 8 dB. The last factor F n,k,l corresponds to Rayleigh fading. The bandwidth of the system is assumed to be 20 MHz with a noise power spectral density of 8 6455 . × 10 -15 W/Hz at each receiver. The channel conditions are assumed to be fixed during a frame. The interfering gains from the j th interfering cell to the cell of interest l are computed as follows:\n\n\n\nwhere d k,l is the distance between the k th user in the interfering cell j and the l th BS. We consider the following two simulation scenarios:\n\n- · Scenario A: Users are equidistant from the BS and placed at equally spaced angles.\n- · Scenario B: Users are assumed to be uniformly distributed across the whole cellular area.\n\nIn Table 1, we compare the performance and complexity of the centralized and distributed schemes with the derived bounds and the optimal solution in high SINR regime. The optimal solution is computed by the exhaustive search based subcarrier allocation phase detailed in Section II. All users are placed at equal distance d from the BS and at equally spaced angles (i.e., scenario A). The results are taken after averaging over 100 channel realizations. The simulation results show that the performance gap between the benchmark centralized scheme A (with power control) and the optimal solution is negligible compared to the low complexity centralized and distributed schemes. However, this observation may not remain valid for bigger network scenarios. Moreover, as d increases the degradation of the average network throughput is evident.\n\nMarch 19, 2018\n\nDRAFT\n\n16", + "recall": 0.9076923076923077, + "true_md": "16\n\nas follows:\n\nwhere d$_{ref}$ is the reference distance and is set equal to 0.05 km, d$_{k,l}$ is the distance of the k th user from the l th BS. The first term denotes the path loss where γ is the path loss exponent and is set equal to 3. The second term represents log-normal shadowing with a mean of 0 dB and a standard deviation of 8 dB. The last factor F$_{n,k,l}$ corresponds to Rayleigh fading. The bandwidth of the system is assumed to be 20 MHz with a noise power spectral density of 8 . 6455 × 10 − 15 W/Hz at each receiver. The channel conditions are assumed to be fixed during a frame. The interfering gains from the j th interfering cell to the cell of interest l are computed as follows:\n\n$$h$_{n,k,l}$ = ( − 122 − 10 γ log$_{10}$ d$_{k,l}$ ) − N (0 , σ $^{2}$) + 10 log$_{10}$ F$_{n,k,l}$ d > d$_{ref}$$$\n\n$$h$_{n,k,l}$ = ( − 122 − 10 γ log$_{10}$ d$_{ref}$ ) − N (0 , σ $^{2}$) + 10 log$_{10}$ F$_{n,k,l}$ d < d$_{ref}$$$\n\n$$g$_{n,k,jl}$ = ( − 122 − 10 γ log$_{10}$ d$_{k,l}$ ) − N (0 , σ $^{2}$) + 10 log$_{10}$ F$_{n,k,j}$$$\n\nwhere d$_{k,l}$ is the distance between the k th user in the interfering cell j and the l th BS. We consider the following two simulation scenarios:\n\nIn Table 1, we compare the performance and complexity of the centralized and distributed schemes with the derived bounds and the optimal solution in high SINR regime. The optimal solution is computed by the exhaustive search based subcarrier allocation phase detailed in Section II. All users are placed at equal distance d from the BS and at equally spaced angles (i.e., scenario A). The results are taken after averaging over 100 channel realizations. The simulation results show that the performance gap between the benchmark centralized scheme A (with power control) and the optimal solution is negligible compared to the low complexity centralized and distributed schemes. However, this observation may not remain valid for bigger network scenarios. Moreover, as d increases the degradation of the average network throughput is evident.\n\n- • Scenario A: Users are equidistant from the BS and placed at equally spaced angles.\n\n- • Scenario B: Users are assumed to be uniformly distributed across the whole cellular area.\n\nDRAFT\n\nMarch 19, 2018" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.924847885772682, + "doc_id": "6fbdcde2a48a25121f2dc9949a766883e0ffd3de85e69e5a70fa2b8eed9a70ec", + "edit_distance": 0.08088235294117647, + "f1_score": 0.990033222591362, + "meteor": 0.9898109572005876, + "precision": 0.9933333333333333, + "pred_md": "Figure 13: Marginal distributions of potential outcomes\n\nFigure 13: Marginal distributions of potential outcomes\n\nbounds. I compare my new bounds to Makarov bounds to demonstrate the informativeness and usefulness of my methodology.\n\n## 5.1 Background\n\nBirth weight has been widely used as an indicator of infant health and welfare in economic research. Researchers have investigated social costs associated with low birth weight (LBW), which is defined as birth weight less than 2500 grams, to understand the short term and long term effects of children's endowments. For example, Almond et al. (2005) estimated the effects of birth weight on medical costs, other health outcomes, and mortality rate, and Currie and Hyson (1999) and Currie and Moretti (2007) evaluated the effects of low birth weight on educational attainment and long term labor market outcomes. Almond and Currie (2011) provide a survey of this literature.\n\nSmoking has been acknowledged as the most significant and preventable cause of LBW, and thus various efforts have been made to reduce the number of women smoking during pregnancy. As one of these efforts, increases in cigarette taxes have been widely used as a policy instrument between 1980 and 2009 in the U. S. Tax rates on cigarettes have increased by approximately $0 80 each year on average across all states, . and more than 80 tax increases of $0 25 . have been implemented in the past 15 years (Simon (2012) and\n\n31", + "recall": 0.9867549668874173, + "true_md": "Figure 13: Marginal distributions of potential outcomes\n\nbounds. I compare my new bounds to Makarov bounds to demonstrate the informativeness and usefulness of my methodology.\n\nBirth weight has been widely used as an indicator of infant health and welfare in economic research. Researchers have investigated social costs associated with low birth weight (LBW), which is defined as birth weight less than 2500 grams, to understand the short term and long term effects of children’s endowments. For example, Almond et al. (2005) estimated the effects of birth weight on medical costs, other health outcomes, and mortality rate, and Currie and Hyson (1999) and Currie and Moretti (2007) evaluated the effects of low birth weight on educational attainment and long term labor market outcomes. Almond and Currie (2011) provide a survey of this literature.\n\nSmoking has been acknowledged as the most significant and preventable cause of LBW, and thus various efforts have been made to reduce the number of women smoking during pregnancy. As one of these efforts, increases in cigarette taxes have been widely used as a policy instrument between 1980 and 2009 in the U. S. Tax rates on cigarettes have increased by approximately $0 . 80 each year on average across all states, and more than 80 tax increases of $0 . 25 have been implemented in the past 15 years (Simon (2012) and\n\n31\n\n## 5.1 Background" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9031681183690025, + "doc_id": "b7fcafeb4550d29ec11e1823ef7e85bb1a973a3b17728d0fe76e2b414135fe6f", + "edit_distance": 0.057692307692307696, + "f1_score": 0.9217391304347825, + "meteor": 0.9467184937856337, + "precision": 0.9408284023668639, + "pred_md": "- Tagliazucchi, E., Von Wegner, F., Morzelewski, A., Brodbeck, V., Laufs, H., 2012b. Dynamic bold functional connectivity in humans and its electrophysiological correlates. Frontiers in Human Neuroscience 6, 339.\n- Thompson, W. H., Fransson, P., 2015. The mean-variance relationship reveals two possible strategies for dynamic brain connectivity analysis in fmri. Frontiers in Human Neuroscience 9, 398.\n- Traud, A. L., Kelsic, E. D., Mucha, P. J., Porter, M. A., 2011. Comparing community structure to characteristics in online collegiate social networks. SIAM review 53 (3), 526-543.\n\nWatts, D. J., Strogatz, S. H., 1998. Collective dynamics of small-worldnetworks. nature 393 (6684), 440-442.\n\n- Xu, T., Yang, Z., Jiang, L., Xing, X.-X., Zuo, X.-N., 2015. A connectome computation system for discovery science of brain. Science Bulletin 60 (1), 86-95.\n- Yan, C.-G., Cheung, B., Kelly, C., Colcombe, S., Craddock, R. C., Di Martino, A., Li, Q., Zuo, X.-N., Castellanos, F. X., Milham, M. P., 2013. A comprehensive assessment of regional variation in the impact of head micromovements on functional connectomics. Neuroimage 76, 183-201.\n\nYeo, B. T., Krienen, F. M., Sepulcre, J., Sabuncu, M. R., Lashkari, D., Hollinshead, M., Roffman, J. L., Smoller, J. W., Zllei, L., Polimeni, J. R., o et al., 2011. The organization of the human cerebral cortex estimated by intrinsic functional connectivity. Journal of Neurophysiology 106 (3), 11251165.\n\nZalesky, A., Breakspear, M., 2015. Towards a statistical test for functional connectivity dynamics. Neuroimage 114, 466-470.\n\n37", + "recall": 0.9034090909090909, + "true_md": "- Tagliazucchi, E., Von Wegner, F., Morzelewski, A., Brodbeck, V., Laufs, H., 2012b. Dynamic bold functional connectivity in humans and its electrophys- iological correlates. Frontiers in Human Neuroscience 6, 339.\n\n- Thompson, W. H., Fransson, P., 2015. The mean-variance relationship reveals two possible strategies for dynamic brain connectivity analysis in fmri. Fron- tiers in Human Neuroscience 9, 398.\n\n- Traud, A. L., Kelsic, E. D., Mucha, P. J., Porter, M. A., 2011. Comparing community structure to characteristics in online collegiate social networks. SIAM review 53 (3), 526–543.\n\n- Watts, D. J., Strogatz, S. H., 1998. Collective dynamics of small-worldnetworks. nature 393 (6684), 440–442.\n\n- Xu, T., Yang, Z., Jiang, L., Xing, X.-X., Zuo, X.-N., 2015. A connectome computation system for discovery science of brain. Science Bulletin 60 (1), 86–95.\n\n- Yan, C.-G., Cheung, B., Kelly, C., Colcombe, S., Craddock, R. C., Di Martino, A., Li, Q., Zuo, X.-N., Castellanos, F. X., Milham, M. P., 2013. A comprehen- sive assessment of regional variation in the impact of head micromovements on functional connectomics. Neuroimage 76, 183–201.\n\n- Yeo, B. T., Krienen, F. M., Sepulcre, J., Sabuncu, M. R., Lashkari, D., Hollinshead, M., Roffman, J. L., Smoller, J. W., Z¨ ollei, L., Polimeni, J. R., et al., 2011. The organization of the human cerebral cortex estimated by intrinsic functional connectivity. Journal of Neurophysiology 106 (3), 1125– 1165.\n\n- Zalesky, A., Breakspear, M., 2015. Towards a statistical test for functional con- nectivity dynamics. Neuroimage 114, 466–470.\n\n37" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7535458970656148, + "doc_id": "cc107cf9a80dc343ed5f97917e559523cd56ab92b310cac4889320c5ca20751a", + "edit_distance": 0.16634429400386846, + "f1_score": 0.9451697127937336, + "meteor": 0.8603554796964089, + "precision": 0.9731182795698925, + "pred_md": "accesses to clean water. The evidence of propensity score misspecification is weaker when using the KS n test statistic (2.9). Spec2 , on the other hand, is not rejected for any outcome at the usual significance levels, using either CvM n or KS n test statistic. Thus, our tests suggests that Spec2 should be preferred when analyzing per capita CO , 2 deforestation and energy depletion, whereas for urban and rural water access, our tests do not favor either specification.\n\nTable 4: Effect of GATT/WTO membership on environmental quality\n\nNote: Spec 1 and Spec 2 are different specifications of the propensity score. ̂ ATE n and ̂ ATT n are the estimators for ATE and ATT in (4.3) and (5.1), respectively, but with observations with estimated propensity score outside [0 05 . , 0 95] trimmed. Standard errors . are in parenthesis, and p -values in brackets. ' CvM n ' and ' KS n ' respectively stand for the bootstrapped p -values of our proposed Cram' er-von Mises and Kolmogorov-Smirnov tests based on 100,000 bootstrap draws. See the main text for further details.\n\nNext we comment on the consequences of propensity score misspecification. For per capita CO 2 , our results suggest that the overall effect of GATT/WTO membership on emissions is negative and statistically significant at the 5% level under both propensity score specifications. On the other hand, we find the effect of GATT/WTO membership on per capita CO 2 is not statistically significant among the treated sub-population using either specification. In terms of point estimates, however, there are important differences. For example, the ATE point estimate under Spec1 (misspecified propensity score) is 30% higher (in absolute terms) than under Spec2 . Note that the 0 3 difference . in ATE represents roughly 8% of the overall per capita CO 2 emissions.\n\nWhen we analyze the effect of GATT/WTO on deforestation and energy depletion, our results again highlight the consequences of propensity score misspecifications. We find that the ATE point estimate for the effect of GATT/WTO membership on deforestation is 30% larger under Spec2 than under Spec1 , and the ATT point estimate for the effect of GATT/WTO membership on energy depletion is 25% smaller under Spec2 than under Spec1 . Such large differences are economically significant, as the 0.08 difference in ATEs on deforestation represents nearly 12% of the mean annual deforestation, and the 0.46 difference in ATTs on energy\n\n28", + "recall": 0.9187817258883249, + "true_md": "accesses to clean water. The evidence of propensity score misspecification is weaker when using the KS$_{n}$ test statistic (2.9). Spec2 , on the other hand, is not rejected for any outcome at the usual significance levels, using either CvM$_{n}$ or KS$_{n}$ test statistic. Thus, our tests suggests that Spec2 should be preferred when analyzing per capita CO$_{2}$, deforestation and energy depletion, whereas for urban and rural water access, our tests do not favor either specification.\n\nTable 4: Effect of GATT/WTO membership on environmental quality\n\nNote: Spec 1 and Spec 2 are different specifications of the propensity score. ̂ ATE$_{n}$ and ̂ ATT$_{n}$ are the estimators for ATE and ATT in (4.3) and (5.1), respectively, but with observations with estimated propensity score outside [0 . 05 , 0 . 95] trimmed. Standard errors are in parenthesis, and p -values in brackets. “ CvM$_{n}$ ” and “ KS$_{n}$ ” respectively stand for the bootstrapped p -values of our proposed Cram´er-von Mises and Kolmogorov-Smirnov tests based on 100,000 bootstrap draws. See the main text for further details.\n\nNext we comment on the consequences of propensity score misspecification. For per capita CO$_{2}$ , our results suggest that the overall effect of GATT/WTO membership on emissions is negative and statistically significant at the 5% level under both propensity score specifications. On the other hand, we find the effect of GATT/WTO membership on per capita CO$_{2}$ is not statistically significant among the treated sub-population using either specification. In terms of point estimates, however, there are important differences. For example, the AT E point estimate under Spec1 (misspecified propensity score) is 30% higher (in absolute terms) than under Spec2 . Note that the 0 . 3 difference in AT E represents roughly 8% of the overall per capita CO$_{2}$ emissions.\n\nWhen we analyze the effect of GATT/WTO on deforestation and energy depletion, our re- sults again highlight the consequences of propensity score misspecifications. We find that the AT E point estimate for the effect of GATT/WTO membership on deforestation is 30% larger under Spec2 than under Spec1 , and the AT T point estimate for the effect of GATT/WTO membership on energy depletion is 25% smaller under Spec2 than under Spec1 . Such large differences are economically significant, as the 0.08 difference in AT Es on deforestation repre- sents nearly 12% of the mean annual deforestation, and the 0.46 difference in AT T s on energy\n\n28" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4944665691057793, + "doc_id": "65a9109687563d98f6518eaa484e7a94c096d8e9efcdaa62d41d78cad96a0572", + "edit_distance": 0.706436420722135, + "f1_score": 0.99375, + "meteor": 0.725713824699166, + "precision": 0.99375, + "pred_md": "Figure 5: Partition degeneracy and correlation with excursion count. (A) As an example, we show the set of 100 partitions obtained by maximizing modularity for a single instance of dFC (169 events). (B) The association matrix for this set of partitions. Each element in the association matrix counts the number of times that two nodes were assigned to the same partition. The node order is the same as in Figure 4. (C) Matrix of z-score Rand indices for all pairs of the 100 partitions shown in panel (A). (D) We show the scatterplot of mean z-score Rand index for each time point plotted against the event count, both calculated at the same time point, for one representative participant. (E) Correlation coefficients for z-score Rand index and event count plotted across participants. Note that of the 80 participants, only four exhibited negative correlations.\n\nFigure 5: Partition degeneracy and correlation with excursion count. (A) As an example, we show the set of 100 partitions obtained by maximizing modularity for a single instance of dFC (169 events). (B) The association matrix for this set of partitions. Each element in the association matrix counts the number of times that two nodes were assigned to the same partition. The node order is the same as in Figure 4. (C) Matrix of z-score Rand indices for all pairs of the 100 partitions shown in panel (A). (D) We show the scatterplot of mean z-score Rand index for each time point plotted against the event count, both calculated at the same time point, for one representative participant. (E) Correlation coefficients for z-score Rand index and event count plotted across participants. Note that of the 80 participants, only four exhibited negative correlations.\n\nFigure 6: Default mode network dissociates during mass-excursions. A) Mean difference in association matrices constructed during non-mass excursions and excursions. B) Node pairs that were statistically more or less likely to be observed in the same community during nonexcursions compared to excursions. The network labels are taken from Yeo et al. (2011), with labels corresponding to networks for control (CONT), default mode (DMN), dorsal attention (DAN), limbic (LIM), ventral attention (VAN), somatomotor network (SMN), and visual (VIS). C) We sum the rows of the matrix in panel B) to identify regions that that consistently change their community co-assignments with other regions. The regions that change the most are predominantly regions associated with DMN.\n\nFigure 6: Default mode network dissociates during mass-excursions. A) Mean difference in association matrices constructed during non-mass excursions and excursions. B) Node pairs that were statistically more or less likely to be observed in the same community during nonexcursions compared to excursions. The network labels are taken from Yeo et al. (2011), with labels corresponding to networks for control (CONT), default mode (DMN), dorsal attention (DAN), limbic (LIM), ventral attention (VAN), somatomotor network (SMN), and visual (VIS). C) We sum the rows of the matrix in panel B) to identify regions that that consistently change their community co-assignments with other regions. The regions that change the most are predominantly regions associated with DMN.\n\n43", + "recall": 0.99375, + "true_md": "43\n\nFigure 6: Default mode network dissociates during mass-excursions. A) Mean difference in association matrices constructed during non-mass excursions and excursions. B) Node pairs that were statistically more or less likely to be observed in the same community during non- excursions compared to excursions. The network labels are taken from Yeo et al. (2011), with labels corresponding to networks for control (CONT), default mode (DMN), dorsal attention (DAN), limbic (LIM), ventral attention (VAN), somatomotor network (SMN), and visual (VIS). C) We sum the rows of the matrix in panel B) to identify regions that that consistently change their community co-assignments with other regions. The regions that change the most are predominantly regions associated with DMN.\n\nFigure 5: Partition degeneracy and correlation with excursion count. (A) As an example, we show the set of 100 partitions obtained by maximizing modularity for a single instance of dFC (169 events). (B) The association matrix for this set of partitions. Each element in the association matrix counts the number of times that two nodes were assigned to the same partition. The node order is the same as in Figure 4. (C) Matrix of z-score Rand indices for all pairs of the 100 partitions shown in panel (A). (D) We show the scatterplot of mean z-score Rand index for each time point plotted against the event count, both calculated at the same time point, for one representative participant. (E) Correlation coefficients for z-score Rand index and event count plotted across participants. Note that of the 80 participants, only four exhibited negative correlations." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5251436205564466, + "doc_id": "a211db3eb804f9c8720f10a6145ba7d4f0f8e1b775b6c2ffa170d79eb3d0e9b8", + "edit_distance": 0.33923705722070846, + "f1_score": 0.9385964912280703, + "meteor": 0.6978066626328571, + "precision": 0.9344978165938864, + "pred_md": "## Algorithm 1 Automated Blocking\n\nglyph[negationslash]\n\n```\n1: i ← 0 2: Ψ 0 ← Ψ scalar 3: loop : 4: i ← i +1 5: Generate samples of Θ under Ψ i -1 , where X j represents the sample chain of θ j 6: Discard initial 50% of each chain X j 7: ρ j,k ← cor( X , X j k ) 8: d j,k ← -| 1 ρ j,k | 9: Construct distance matrix D from elements d j,k 10: Construct hierarchical clustering tree T from D 11: Ψ cand ←{ Ψ( T cut=0 ) , Ψ( T cut=0 1 . ) , Ψ( T cut=0 2 . ) , . . . , Ψ( T cut=1 ) } 12: Ψ i ← argmax Ψ ∈ Ψ cand E (Ψ) 13: if E (Ψ ) i > E (Ψ i -1 ) and Ψ = Ψ i i -1 then goto loop 14: Ψ AutoBlock ← Ψ i 15: return Ψ AutoBlock\n```\n\nsomewhat arbitrary initial 50% of all samples. This should not be confused with a traditional 'burnin,' whose purpose is to 'forget' the initial state and ensure convergence to the target distribution. Instead, discarding these initial samples allows all adaptive scalar and block samplers ample time to self-tune, and thereby achieve their theoretically optimal algorithmic efficiency. The choice of 50% is largely arbitrary, and excessive in most cases, and could almost certainly be relaxed without affecting algorithm performance.\n\nEmpirical correlations are transformed into distances using the transformation d j,k = 1 -| ρ j,k | . The form of this transformation is selected to induce several properties for elements of the distance matrix D : the main diagonal consists of zeros; strong correlation results in d ≈ 0; weak or zero correlation results in d ≈ 1; and correlations of ρ and -ρ result in the same distance.\n\nWe use the R function hclust to create the hierarchical tree T from the distance matrix D . The default 'complete linkage' clustering (Everitt, 2011, chapter 4) is appropriate, since this ensures that all parameters within each cluster have a minimum absolute pairwise correlation. At height h ∈ [0 , 1] in T , the absolute correlation between parameter pairs (within clusters) is at least 1 -h .\n\nWe use the R function cutree for cutting the hierarchical clustering tree T at a specified height h ∈ [0 , 1] to produce disjoint parameter groupings, which may be used to define parameter blocks for the purpose of MCMC sampling. We justify this means of generating parameter sampling blocks, insofar as to increase algorithmic efficiency we strive to group correlated parameters into sampling\n\n15", + "recall": 0.9427312775330396, + "true_md": "Algorithm 1 Automated Blocking\n\n1: i ← 0 2: Ψ$_{0}$ ← Ψ$_{scalar}$ 3: loop : 4: i ← i + 1 5: Generate samples of Θ under Ψ$_{i}$$\\_{−}$$_{1}$, where X$_{j}$ represents the sample chain of θ$_{j}$ 6: Discard initial 50% of each chain X$_{j}$ 7: ρ$_{j,k}$ ← cor( X$_{j}$, X$_{k}$ ) 8: d$_{j,k}$ ← 1 − | ρ$_{j,k}$ | 9: Construct distance matrix D from elements d$_{j,k}$ 10: Construct hierarchical clustering tree T from D 11: Ψ$_{cand}$ ← { Ψ( T$_{cut=0}$ ) , Ψ( T$_{cut=0}$$\\_{.}$$_{1}$ ) , Ψ( T$_{cut=0}$$\\_{.}$$_{2}$ ) , . . . , Ψ( T$_{cut=1}$ ) } 12: Ψ$_{i}$ ← argmax$_{Ψ}$$\\_{∈}$$_{Ψ}$$\\_{cand}$ E (Ψ) 13: if E (Ψ$\\_{i}$) > E (Ψ$\\_{i}$$_{−}$$\\_{1}$) and Ψ$\\_{i}$ ̸ = Ψ$\\_{i}$$_{−}$$\\_{1}$ then goto loop 14: Ψ$\\_{AutoBlock}$ ← Ψ$\\_{i}$ 15: return Ψ$\\_{AutoBlock}$\n\nsomewhat arbitrary initial 50% of all samples. This should not be confused with a traditional “burn- in,” whose purpose is to “forget” the initial state and ensure convergence to the target distribution. Instead, discarding these initial samples allows all adaptive scalar and block samplers ample time to self-tune, and thereby achieve their theoretically optimal algorithmic efficiency. The choice of 50% is largely arbitrary, and excessive in most cases, and could almost certainly be relaxed without affecting algorithm performance.\n\nEmpirical correlations are transformed into distances using the transformation d$_{j,k}$ = 1 − | ρ$_{j,k}$ | . The form of this transformation is selected to induce several properties for elements of the distance matrix D : the main diagonal consists of zeros; strong correlation results in d ≈ 0; weak or zero correlation results in d ≈ 1; and correlations of ρ and − ρ result in the same distance.\n\nWe use the R function hclust to create the hierarchical tree T from the distance matrix D . The default “complete linkage” clustering (Everitt, 2011, chapter 4) is appropriate, since this ensures that all parameters within each cluster have a minimum absolute pairwise correlation. At height h ∈ [0 , 1] in T , the absolute correlation between parameter pairs (within clusters) is at least 1 − h .\n\nWe use the R function cutree for cutting the hierarchical clustering tree T at a specified height h ∈ [0 , 1] to produce disjoint parameter groupings, which may be used to define parameter blocks for the purpose of MCMC sampling. We justify this means of generating parameter sampling blocks, insofar as to increase algorithmic efficiency we strive to group correlated parameters into sampling\n\n15" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5810390685616307, + "doc_id": "f081766d1d7b399d98836772094a063a38634eec7c33fc2dc20d8ca74f1fd9b9", + "edit_distance": 0.3115942028985507, + "f1_score": 0.9484536082474226, + "meteor": 0.702027809700717, + "precision": 0.9583333333333334, + "pred_md": "F ( y , y 0 1 ) = π (( -∞ , y 0 ] × -∞ ( , y 1 ]) for any y d ∈ R and d ∈ { 0 1 , } . Let Y 0 and Y 1 denote the support of Y 0 and Y 1 , respectively.\n\nIn this paper, the identification region of F ∆ ( δ ) is obtained for fixed marginal distributions. When marginal distributions are only partially identified, DTE bounds are obtained by taking the union of the bounds over all possible pairs of marginal distributions. Marginal distributions of potential outcomes are point-identified in randomized experiments or under selection on observables. Furthermore, previous studies have shown that even if the selection is endogenous, marginal distributions of potential outcomes are point or partially identified under relatively weak conditions. Imbens and Rubin (1997) and Abadie (2002) showed that marginal distributions for compliers are point-identified under the local average treatment effects (LATE) assumptions, and Kitagawa (2009) obtained the identification region of marginal distributions under IV conditions. 3\n\nI impose the following assumption on the fixed marginal distribution functions throughout this paper:\n\nAssumption 1 The marginal distribution functions F 0 and F 1 are both absolutely continuous with respect to the Lebesgue measure on R .\n\nIn this paper, I obtain sharp bounds on the DTE. Sharp bounds are defined as the best possible bounds on the collection of DTE values that are compatible with the observations ( Y, D ) and given restrictions. Let F L ∆ ( δ ) and F U ∆ ( δ ) denote the lower and upper bounds on the DTE F ∆ ( δ ):\n\n\n\nIf there exists an underlying joint distribution function F that has fixed marginal distribution functions F 0 and F 1 and generates F ∆ ( δ ) = F L ∆ ( δ ) for fixed δ ∈ R , then F L ∆ ( δ ) is called the sharp lower bound. The sharp upper bound can be also defined in the same way. Note that throughout this study, sharp bounds indicate pointwise sharp bounds in the sense that the underlying joint distribution function F achieving sharp bounds is allowed to vary with the value of δ. 4\n\nTo identify the DTE, I consider support restrictions, which can be written as\n\n\n\n3 Note that the conditions considered in these studies do not restrict dependence between two potential outcomes.\n\n4 If the underlying joint distribution function F does not depend on δ , then the sharp bounds are called uniformly sharp bounds. Uniformly sharp bounds are outside of the scope of this paper. For more details on uniform sharpness, see Firpo and Ridder (2008).\n\n6", + "recall": 0.9387755102040817, + "true_md": "F ( y$_{0}$, y$_{1}$ ) = π (( −∞ , y$_{0}$ ] × ( −∞ , y$_{1}$ ]) for any y$_{d}$ ∈$_{R}$ and d ∈ { 0 , 1 } . Let Y$_{0}$ and Y$_{1}$ denote the support of Y$_{0}$ and Y$_{1}$ , respectively.\n\nIn this paper, the identification region of F$_{Δ}$ ( δ ) is obtained for fixed marginal distributions. When marginal distributions are only partially identified, DTE bounds are obtained by taking the union of the bounds over all possible pairs of marginal distributions. Marginal distributions of potential outcomes are point-identified in randomized experiments or under selection on observables. Furthermore, previous stud- ies have shown that even if the selection is endogenous, marginal distributions of potential outcomes are point or partially identified under relatively weak conditions. Imbens and Rubin (1997) and Abadie (2002) showed that marginal distributions for compliers are point-identified under the local average treatment ef- fects (LATE) assumptions, and Kitagawa (2009) obtained the identification region of marginal distributions under IV conditions. 3\n\nI impose the following assumption on the fixed marginal distribution functions throughout this paper:\n\nAssumption 1 The marginal distribution functions F$_{0}$ and F$_{1}$ are both absolutely continuous with respect to the Lebesgue measure on$_{R}$.\n\nIn this paper, I obtain sharp bounds on the DTE. Sharp bounds are defined as the best possible bounds on the collection of DTE values that are compatible with the observations ( Y, D ) and given restrictions. Let F L $_{Δ}$( δ ) and F U $_{Δ}$( δ ) denote the lower and upper bounds on the DTE F$_{Δ}$ ( δ ):\n\nIf there exists an underlying joint distribution function F that has fixed marginal distribution functions F$_{0}$ and F$_{1}$ and generates F$_{Δ}$ ( δ ) = F L $_{Δ}$( δ ) for fixed δ ∈$_{R}$ , then F L $_{Δ}$( δ ) is called the sharp lower bound. The sharp upper bound can be also defined in the same way. Note that throughout this study, sharp bounds indicate pointwise sharp bounds in the sense that the underlying joint distribution function F achieving sharp bounds is allowed to vary with the value of δ. 4\n\nTo identify the DTE, I consider support restrictions, which can be written as\n\n$$F L $_{Δ}$( δ ) ≤ F$_{Δ}$ ( δ ) ≤ F U $_{Δ}$( δ ) .$$\n\n$$Pr (( Y$_{0}$, Y$_{1}$ ) ∈ C ) = 1 ,$$\n\n$^{3}$Note that the conditions considered in these studies do not restrict dependence between two potential outcomes. $^{4}$If the underlying joint distribution function F does not depend on δ , then the sharp bounds are called uniformly sharp bounds. Uniformly sharp bounds are outside of the scope of this paper. For more details on uniform sharpness, see Firpo and Ridder (2008).\n\n6" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.14857067459215828, + "doc_id": "ce6ccfea6b5ca075ab40f6ea1b88c10e2e4c015631629411256d6c6567669c77", + "edit_distance": 0.6588818117480538, + "f1_score": 0.8894601542416452, + "meteor": 0.3514663885268198, + "precision": 0.9402173913043478, + "pred_md": "Ψ(0) for the periodicity, it is sufficient to consider those with j -th coordinate is equal to ζ 0 j , [31]. For the discontinuous dynamics, the choice of the fixed coordinate can be made easier if the surface of discontinuity is provided with a constant coordinate. We will demonstrate this in examples. Denote the initial values of the intended periodic solution by ζ 1 , ζ 2 , . . . , ζ n . Assume that one initial value ζ j is known, i.e. ζ 0 j . Thus, the problem contains n -many unknowns, they can be presented as ζ 1 , ζ 2 , . . . , ζ j -1 , ζ j +1 , . . . , ζ n , T . Denote the solution of (5.57) by x s ( t, ζ 1 , ζ 2 , . . . , ζ n , µ ) with initial conditions x s (0 , ζ 1 , ζ 2 , . . . , ζ n , µ ) = ζ . s To determine the unknowns, we will consider the Poincar ' e criterion, which can be written as\n\n\n\nwhere ζ j = ζ 0 j . The equations (5.58) are satisfied with µ = 0 , T = ω, ζ i = ζ 0 i , i = 1 2 , , . . . , n, since Ψ( ) t is the periodic solution.\n\nThe following condition for the determinant is also needed in the remaining part paper.\n\n(A6)\n\n\n\n/negationslash\n\nTheorem 5.1 Assume that condition ( A 6) is valid. Then, (5.57) admits a non-trivial periodic solution, which converges in the B -topology to the non-trivial ω -periodic solution of (5.57) as µ tends to zero.\n\nWe will present the following examples to realize our theoretical results.\n\nExample 5.1 In this example, we will consider the perturbed system in case the generating system has a graziness. To show that, let us take into account the following perturbed system\n\n\n\nIt is easy to see that the system (5.60) is of the form (5.57). For µ = 0 , the generating system became (3.14). For the perturbed system (5.60), we will investigate existence of the periodic solution around the grazing periodic solution of (3.14) with the help of Theorem 5.1.\n\nThere are two sorts of possible periodic solutions of (5.60) around the grazing one. One of them has two impulse moments during the period since it crosses both lines of discontinuity, i.e. x 1 = 0 and x 1 = exp(0 00025 . π . ) The other sort is the periodic solution which does not intersect the line x 1 =\n\n32", + "recall": 0.8439024390243902, + "true_md": "32\n\nΨ(0) for the periodicity, it is sufficient to consider those with j − th coordinate is equal to ζ 0 j , [31]. For the discontinuous dynamics, the choice of the fixed coordinate can be made easier if the surface of disconti- nuity is provided with a constant coordinate. We will demonstrate this in examples. Denote the initial values of the intended periodic solution by ζ$_{1}$, ζ$_{2}$, . . . , ζ$_{n}$. Assume that one initial value ζ$_{j}$ is known, i.e. ζ 0 j . Thus, the problem contains n − many unknowns, they can be presented as ζ$_{1}$, ζ$_{2}$$^{, . . . , ζ$_{j}$}$− $\\_{1}$, ζ$\\_{j}$$_{+1}$ , . . . , ζ$_{n}$, T . Denote the solution of (5.57) by x$_{s}$ ( t, ζ$_{1}$, ζ$_{2}$, . . . , ζ$_{n}$, µ ) with initial conditions x$_{s}$ (0 , ζ$_{1}$, ζ$_{2}$, . . . , ζ$_{n}$, µ ) = ζ$_{s}$. To determine the unknowns, we will consider the Poincar ´ e criterion, which can be written as\n\nwhere ζ$_{j}$ = ζ 0 j . The equations (5.58) are satisfied with µ = 0 , T = ω, ζ$_{i}$ = ζ 0 i , i = 1 , 2 , . . . , n, since Ψ( t ) is the periodic solution.\n\nThe following condition for the determinant is also needed in the remaining part paper. (A6) ∣ ∣\n\nTheorem 5.1 Assume that condition ( A 6) is valid. Then, (5.57) admits a non-trivial periodic solution, which converges in the B − topology to the non-trivial ω -periodic solution of (5.57) as µ tends to zero.\n\nWe will present the following examples to realize our theoretical results.\n\nExample 5.1 In this example, we will consider the perturbed system in case the generating system has a graziness. To show that, let us take into account the following perturbed system\n\nIt is easy to see that the system (5.60) is of the form (5.57). For µ = 0 , the generating system became (3.14). For the perturbed system (5.60), we will investigate existence of the periodic solution around the grazing periodic solution of (3.14) with the help of Theorem 5.1.\n\nThere are two sorts of possible periodic solutions of (5.60) around the grazing one. One of them has two impulse moments during the period since it crosses both lines of discontinuity, i.e. x$_{1}$ = 0 and x$_{1}$ = exp(0 . 00025 π ) . The other sort is the periodic solution which does not intersect the line x$_{1}$ =\n\n$$∣ ∣ ∂ ( S$_{1}$ ( ω,ζ 0 $_{1}$,ζ 0 $_{2}$,...,ζ 0 j$_{−}$ $_{1}$,ζ 0 j $_{+1}$,...,ζ 0 $_{n}$, 0)) ∂ T . . . ∂ ( S$_{1}$ ( ω,ζ 0 $_{1}$,ζ 0 $_{2}$,...,ζ 0 j$_{−}$ $_{1}$,ζ 0 j $_{+1}$,...,ζ 0 $_{n}$, 0)) ∂ζ$_{n}$ ∂ ( S$_{2}$ ( ω,ζ 0 $_{1}$,ζ 0 $_{2}$,...,ζ 0 j$_{−}$ $_{1}$,ζ 0 j $_{+1}$,...,ζ 0 $_{n}$, 0)) ∂ T . . . ∂ ( S$_{2}$ ( ω,ζ 0 $_{1}$,ζ 0 $_{2}$,...,ζ 0 j$_{−}$ $_{1}$,ζ 0 j $_{+1}$,...,ζ 0 $_{n}$, 0)) ∂ζ$_{n}$ . . . . . ∂ ( S$_{n}$ ( ω,ζ 0 $_{1}$,ζ 0 $_{2}$,...,ζ 0 j$_{−}$ $_{1}$,ζ 0 j $_{+1}$,...,ζ 0 $_{n}$, 0)) ∂ T . . . ∂ ( S$_{n}$ ( ω,ζ 0 $_{1}$,ζ 0 $_{2}$,...,ζ 0 j$_{−}$ $_{1}$,ζ 0 j $_{+1}$,...,ζ 0 $_{n}$, 0)) ∂ζ$_{n}$ ∣ ∣ ̸ = 0 (5.59)$$\n\n$$x ′ 1 = x$_{2}$, x ′ 2 = − 0 . 001 x$_{2}$ − x$_{1}$, Δ x$_{2}$ | $^{x}$∈ Γ$_{1}$ = − (1 + R$_{1}$x$_{2}$ + µx$_{2}$ ) x$_{2}$, Δ x$_{2}$ | $^{x}$∈ Γ$_{2}$ = − (1 + R$_{2}$ + µ ( x$_{2}$ − exp(0 . 001 π/ 2)) x$_{2}$. (5.60)$$\n\n$$S$_{k}$ ( T , ζ$_{1}$, ζ$_{2}$, . . . , ζ$_{n}$, µ ) ≡ x$_{k}$ ( T , ζ$_{1}$, ζ$_{2}$, . . . , ζ$_{n}$, µ ) − ζ$_{k}$ = 0 , k = 1 , 2 , . . . , n, (5.58)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9610699657776044, + "doc_id": "4a07346cf8f086988ccedf8b643a617c8f936040cf6c6f59c6d5e240a323fdea", + "edit_distance": 0.08972267536704731, + "f1_score": 0.9902534113060429, + "meteor": 0.9826677175312731, + "precision": 0.9921875, + "pred_md": "When the in-domain data is very limited, in-vocabulary hit rate with respect to the target domain provides a useful proxy for stylistic and topical similarity. In prior work [6], we found that a two-stage process of vocabulary hit rate followed by perplexity filtering was useful. Here, efforts to use the estimated n-gram probabilities to rank the Twitter sentences were not successful. There are two possible reasons for this. First, the in-domain LM training data is small and perplexity estimates on individual sentences have high variance. Second, for the high vocabulary growth rate languages explored here, many of the words are not in-vocabulary, so n-gram context is often broken and unigrams dominate the score.\n\nWe put a threshold on the in-vocabulary (IV) hit rate to decide which sentences we will keep and choose the threshold that minimizes perplexity on a held-out set. Obviously, there is a trade-off between the amount of data used to build the language model and the degree to which the data matches the target domain. The optimal threshold depends upon the amount of data we have to begin with. As the size of the unfiltered data increases, the optimal filtering threshold becomes more aggressive. This is most easily seen in Figure 1 when the unfiltered data size ranges from 14 million to 27 million tokens. Even though the 27 million token data is almost twice as big as the 14 million token one, the more aggressive filtering threshold on the bigger source causes them both to have about the same number of tokens after filtering. In our experiments the optimal vocabulary hit rate threshold tends to fall between 50% and 70% . Typically, only a small percentage of sentences have IV hit rates above the chosen threshold.\n\n## B. Language Modeling Approaches\n\nAfter filtering, the Twitter LM is built from the remaining sentences concatenated with the in-domain data. The LM is a trigram model with modified Kneser-Ney smoothing and is built using the SRILM toolkit [16]. This is interpolated with\n\nFig. 1. Optimal IV Threshold for Filtering Bengali Twitter Data\n\nFig. 1. Optimal IV Threshold for Filtering Bengali Twitter Data\n\nanother LM built only from the target domain data. Here, the vocabulary is restricted to the words found in the in-domain data.\n\nConcatenating the Twitter data with the in-domain data ensures that the full vocabulary from the in-domain data is represented in the language model training data. Thus, the mixture model combines two components: in-domain only and the in-domain plus Twitter combination. The size of the indomain data, in our case, is typically less than 1% of the size of the Twitter data. Except for rare words that only appear in the in-domain data, the n-gram counts of the in-domain plus Twitter combination are dominated by the Twitter data.\n\nAs noted earlier, prior work has shown that class-based models can be useful for combining data from multiple domains, though much of the work used part-of-speech (POS) classes. There is no POS tagger readily available for the languages we are working with. Instead, we need to learn the word class assignments from the data. Specifically, we use the unsupervised hierarchical clustering approach from Brown et al. [14]. The clustering algorithm attempts to find the assignment of words to clusters that maximizes the mutual\n\n4", + "recall": 0.9883268482490273, + "true_md": "4\n\nWhen the in-domain data is very limited, in-vocabulary hit rate with respect to the target domain provides a useful proxy for stylistic and topical similarity. In prior work [6], we found that a two-stage process of vocabulary hit rate followed by perplexity filtering was useful. Here, efforts to use the estimated n-gram probabilities to rank the Twitter sentences were not successful. There are two possible reasons for this. First, the in-domain LM training data is small and perplexity estimates on individual sentences have high variance. Second, for the high vocabulary growth rate languages explored here, many of the words are not in-vocabulary, so n-gram context is often broken and unigrams dominate the score.\n\nWe put a threshold on the in-vocabulary (IV) hit rate to decide which sentences we will keep and choose the threshold that minimizes perplexity on a held-out set. Obviously, there is a trade-off between the amount of data used to build the language model and the degree to which the data matches the target domain. The optimal threshold depends upon the amount of data we have to begin with. As the size of the unfiltered data increases, the optimal filtering threshold becomes more aggressive. This is most easily seen in Figure 1 when the unfiltered data size ranges from 14 million to 27 million tokens. Even though the 27 million token data is almost twice as big as the 14 million token one, the more aggressive filtering threshold on the bigger source causes them both to have about the same number of tokens after filtering. In our experiments the optimal vocabulary hit rate threshold tends to fall between 50% and 70% . Typically, only a small percentage of sentences have IV hit rates above the chosen threshold.\n\nAfter filtering, the Twitter LM is built from the remaining sentences concatenated with the in-domain data. The LM is a trigram model with modified Kneser-Ney smoothing and is built using the SRILM toolkit [16]. This is interpolated with\n\nanother LM built only from the target domain data. Here, the vocabulary is restricted to the words found in the in-domain data.\n\nConcatenating the Twitter data with the in-domain data ensures that the full vocabulary from the in-domain data is represented in the language model training data. Thus, the mixture model combines two components: in-domain only and the in-domain plus Twitter combination. The size of the in- domain data, in our case, is typically less than 1% of the size of the Twitter data. Except for rare words that only appear in the in-domain data, the n-gram counts of the in-domain plus Twitter combination are dominated by the Twitter data.\n\nAs noted earlier, prior work has shown that class-based models can be useful for combining data from multiple do- mains, though much of the work used part-of-speech (POS) classes. There is no POS tagger readily available for the languages we are working with. Instead, we need to learn the word class assignments from the data. Specifically, we use the unsupervised hierarchical clustering approach from Brown et al. [14]. The clustering algorithm attempts to find the assignment of words to clusters that maximizes the mutual\n\n## B. Language Modeling Approaches\n\nFig. 1. Optimal IV Threshold for Filtering Bengali Twitter Data" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.026517776491483697, + "doc_id": "5393b5c9cd540b4183afe3d280cc6f47ff5721fdfdcea91fb47394bc0c3622a4", + "edit_distance": 0.8299748110831234, + "f1_score": 0.9101796407185629, + "meteor": 0.17555166445910675, + "precision": 0.9047619047619048, + "pred_md": "Suppose that there exists an integer l s.t. a l +2 -a l ≤ δ. Let\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nThen\n\n\n\nThe inequality in the fourth line holds because MTR implies stochastic dominance of Y 1 over Y 0 . This is illustrated in Figure A.3(a) and (b), where the sum of the lower bound on each triangle is equal to ∞ ∑ k = -∞ max { F 1 ( a k +1 ) -F 0 ( a k ) , 0 } and ∞ ∑ k = -∞ max { F 1 ( ˜ a k +1 ) -F 0 ( ˜ a k ) , 0 } , respectively.\n\nFigure B.1: a k +2 -a k > δ at the optimum\n\nFigure B.1: a k +2 -a k > δ at the optimum\n\nTherefore, it is innocuous to assume a k +2 -a k > δ for every integer k at the optimum.\n\n73", + "recall": 0.9156626506024096, + "true_md": "Suppose that there exists an integer l s.t. a$_{l}$$\\_{+2}$ − a$\\_{l}$ ≤ δ. Let\n\nThen\n\nThe inequality in the fourth line holds because MTR implies stochastic dominance of Y$_{1}$ over Y$_{0}$ . This is illustrated in Figure A.3(a) and (b), where the sum of the lower bound on each triangle is equal to ∞ ∑ k = −∞ max { F$_{1}$ ( a$_{k}$$\\_{+1}$ ) − F$\\_{0}$ ( a$\\_{k}$ ) , 0 } and ∞ ∑ k = −∞ max { F$\\_{1}$ ($\\_{˜}$ a$\\_{k}$$_{+1}$ ) − F$_{0}$ ($_{˜}$ a$_{k}$ ) , 0 } , respectively.\n\nFigure B.1: a$_{k}$$\\_{+2}$ − a$\\_{k}$ > δ at the optimum Therefore, it is innocuous to assume a$\\_{k}$$_{+2}$ − a$_{k}$ > δ for every integer k at the optimum.\n\n73\n\n$$∞ ∑ k = −∞ max { F$_{1}$ ( a$_{k}$$_{+1}$ ) − F$_{0}$ ( a$_{k}$ ) , 0 } = l − 1 ∑ k = −∞ max { F$_{1}$ ( a$_{k}$$_{+1}$ ) − F$_{0}$ ( a$_{k}$ ) , 0 } + max { F$_{1}$ ( a$_{l}$$_{+1}$ ) − F$_{0}$ ( a$_{l}$ ) , 0 } + max { F$_{1}$ ( a$_{l}$$_{+2}$ ) − F$_{0}$ ( a$_{l}$$_{+1}$ ) , 0 } + ∞ ∑ k = l +2 max { F$_{1}$ ( a$_{k}$$_{+1}$ ) − F$_{0}$ ( a$_{k}$ ) , 0 } ≤ l − 1 ∑ k = −∞ max { F$_{1}$ ( a$_{k}$$_{+1}$ ) − F$_{0}$ ( a$_{k}$ ) , 0 } + max { F$_{1}$ ( a$_{l}$$_{+2}$ ) − F$_{0}$ ( a$_{l}$ ) , 0 } + ∞ ∑ k = l +2 max { F$_{1}$ ( a$_{k}$$_{+1}$ ) − F$_{0}$ ( a$_{k}$ ) , 0 } = ∞ ∑ k = −∞ max { F$_{1}$ ($_{˜}$ a$_{k}$$_{+1}$ ) − F$_{0}$ ($_{˜}$ a$_{k}$ ) , 0 } .$$\n\n$$˜ a$_{k}$ = a$_{k}$ for k ≤ l, ˜ a$_{k}$ = a$_{k}$$_{+1}$ for k ≥ l + 1 .$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.957573992226196, + "doc_id": "cf7f296c3a491d2f30f198bf374189f4d357cc51f5ff3cb78a94a65f62ff0512", + "edit_distance": 0.04008438818565401, + "f1_score": 0.9870689655172414, + "meteor": 0.9788558262103173, + "precision": 0.9956521739130435, + "pred_md": "Table 2: Estimated average smoking effects on infant birth weight\n\nMost existing studies used the Natality Data by the National Center for Health Statistics (NCHS) for its large sample size and a wealth of information on covariates. The birth data is based on birth records from every live birth in the U.S. and contains detailed information on birth outcomes, maternal prenatal behavior and medical status, and demographic attributes. 14 Table 1 describes the data used in the recent literature.\n\nWhile some studies such as Hoderlein and Sasaki (2011) and Caetano (2012) use the number of cigarettes per day as a continuous treatment variable, most applied research uses a binary variable for smoking. The literature, including Evans and Farrelly (1998), found that individuals, especially women, tend to underreport their cigarette consumption. On the other hand, smoking participation has shown to be more accurately reported among adults in the literature. Moreover, the literature has pointed out that the number of cigarettes may not be a good proxy for the level of nicotine intake. Previous studies, including Chaloupka and Warner (2000), Evans and Farrelly (1998), Farrelly et al. (2004), Adda and Cornaglia (2006), and Abrevaya and Puzzello (2012) discussed that although an increase in cigarette taxes leads to a lower percentage of smokers and less cigarettes consumed by smokers, it causes individuals to purchase cigarettes that contain more tar and nicotine as compensatory behavior.\n\nAlthough many recent studies are based on the same NCHS data set, their estimates of average smoking effects are quite varied, ranging from -144 grams to -600 grams depending on their estimation methods and samples. Table 2 summarizes their estimates.\n\n## 5.3 Data\n\nI use the NCHS Natality dataset. My sample consists of births to women who were in their first trimester during the period between two years before and two years after the tax increase. In other words, I consider births to women who conceived babies in MA between October 1990 and September 1994. 15 I define the instrument as an indicator of whether the agent faces the high tax rate from the tax hike during the first trimester of pregnancy. Since the tax increase occurred in MA in January of 1993, the instrument Z can be\n\n14 Unfortunately the Natality Data does not provide information on mothers' income and weight.\n\n15 To trace the month of conception, I use information on the month of birth and the clinical estimate of gestation weeks.\n\n34", + "recall": 0.9786324786324786, + "true_md": "Table 2: Estimated average smoking effects on infant birth weight\n\nMost existing studies used the Natality Data by the National Center for Health Statistics (NCHS) for its large sample size and a wealth of information on covariates. The birth data is based on birth records from every live birth in the U.S. and contains detailed information on birth outcomes, maternal prenatal behavior and medical status, and demographic attributes. 14 Table 1 describes the data used in the recent literature.\n\nWhile some studies such as Hoderlein and Sasaki (2011) and Caetano (2012) use the number of cigarettes per day as a continuous treatment variable, most applied research uses a binary variable for smoking. The literature, including Evans and Farrelly (1998), found that individuals, especially women, tend to underreport their cigarette consumption. On the other hand, smoking participation has shown to be more accurately reported among adults in the literature. Moreover, the literature has pointed out that the number of cigarettes may not be a good proxy for the level of nicotine intake. Previous studies, including Chaloupka and Warner (2000), Evans and Farrelly (1998), Farrelly et al. (2004), Adda and Cornaglia (2006), and Abrevaya and Puzzello (2012) discussed that although an increase in cigarette taxes leads to a lower percentage of smokers and less cigarettes consumed by smokers, it causes individuals to purchase cigarettes that contain more tar and nicotine as compensatory behavior.\n\nAlthough many recent studies are based on the same NCHS data set, their estimates of average smoking effects are quite varied, ranging from -144 grams to -600 grams depending on their estimation methods and samples. Table 2 summarizes their estimates.\n\nI use the NCHS Natality dataset. My sample consists of births to women who were in their first trimester during the period between two years before and two years after the tax increase. In other words, I consider births to women who conceived babies in MA between October 1990 and September 1994. 15 I define the instrument as an indicator of whether the agent faces the high tax rate from the tax hike during the first trimester of pregnancy. Since the tax increase occurred in MA in January of 1993, the instrument Z can be\n\n## 5.3 Data\n\n$^{14}$Unfortunately the Natality Data does not provide information on mothers’ income and weight.\n\n$^{15}$To trace the month of conception, I use information on the month of birth and the clinical estimate of gestation weeks.\n\n34" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.20791320908683475, + "doc_id": "254c44e0486302dc547fb74a073ac23186337e10cfd7c5334563ef8af048e915", + "edit_distance": 0.6337285902503293, + "f1_score": 0.8814814814814815, + "meteor": 0.39829067918038175, + "precision": 0.952, + "pred_md": "The DTE in the extended Roy model is written as follows:\n\n\n\nwhere p ( z ) = Pr ( D = 1 | Z = z ), F ∆ ( δ d, , X, z | ) = Pr ( Y 1 -Y 0 ≤ | δ D = d, X, Z = z ) for d ∈ { 0 1 , } . French and Taber (2011) listed sufficient conditions under which the marginal distributions of potential outcomes are point-identified in the generalized Roy model. 11 Those assumptions also apply to the extended Roy model since it is a special case of the generalized Roy model. Under their conditions, conditional marginal distributions of Y 0 and Y 1 on the treated ( D = 1) and untreated ( D = 0) are also all point-identified. Note that given Z = z , the treated and untreated groups correspond to the regions { Y 1 -Y 0 ≥ m C ( z ) } and { Y 1 -Y 0 < m C ( z ) } respectively. Let F d 1 ( y d | 2 , z ) = Pr ( Y d 1 ≤ y D | = d , Z 2 = z ) . Bounds on the DTE are obtained based on the identified marginal distributions on the treated and untreated as follows: for d ∈ { 0 1 , } ,\n\n\n\nwhere\n\n\n\nwith\n\n\n\n11 See Assumption 4.1-4.6 in French and Taber (2011). These assumptions include some high level conditions such as the full support of both instruments and of exclusive covariates for each sector. If those conditions are not satisfied, the marginal distributions may only be partially identified.\n\n27", + "recall": 0.8206896551724138, + "true_md": "The DTE in the extended Roy model is written as follows:\n\n$$F$_{Δ}$ ( δ ) = E [Pr ( Y$_{1}$ − Y$_{0}$ ≤ δ | X )] = E [Pr ( Y$_{1}$ − Y$_{0}$ ≤ δ | X, z )] = E [ F$_{Δ}$ ( δ | 1 , X, z )] p ( z ) + E [ F$_{Δ}$ ( δ | 0 , X, z )] (1 − p ( z )) ,$$\n\nwhere p ( z ) = Pr ( D = 1 | Z = z ), F$_{Δ}$ ( δ | d, , X, z ) = Pr ( Y$_{1}$ − Y$_{0}$ ≤ δ | D = d, X, Z = z ) for d ∈ { 0 , 1 } . French and Taber (2011) listed sufficient conditions under which the marginal distributions of potential outcomes are point-identified in the generalized Roy model. 11 Those assumptions also apply to the extended Roy model since it is a special case of the generalized Roy model. Under their conditions, conditional marginal distributions of Y$_{0}$ and Y$_{1}$ on the treated ( D = 1) and untreated ( D = 0) are also all point-identified. Note that given Z = z , the treated and untreated groups correspond to the regions { Y$_{1}$ − Y$_{0}$ ≥ m$_{C}$ ( z ) } and { Y$_{1}$ − Y$_{0}$ < m$_{C}$ ( z ) } respectively. Let F$_{d}$$\\_{1}$ ( y | d$\\_{2}$, z ) = Pr ( Y$\\_{d}$$_{1}$ ≤ y | D = d$_{2}$, Z = z ) . Bounds on the DTE are obtained based on the identified marginal distributions on the treated and untreated as follows: for d ∈ { 0 , 1 } ,\n\nwhere\n\nwith\n\n$^{11}$See Assumption 4.1-4.6 in French and Taber (2011). These assumptions include some high level conditions such as the full support of both instruments and of exclusive covariates for each sector. If those conditions are not satisfied, the marginal distributions may only be partially identified.\n\n27\n\n$$a$_{k}$ ≤ a$_{k}$$_{+1}$ ≤ a$_{k}$ + δ − m$_{C}$ ( z ) ,$$\n\n$$F L Δ ( δ | 1 , z ) =        sup { a$_{k}$ } ∞ k = −∞ ∞ ∑ k = −∞ max$^{}$     F$_{1}$ ( a$_{k}$$_{+1}$ + m$_{C}$ ( z ) | 1 , z ) − F$_{0}$ ( a$_{k}$ | 1 , z ) , 0      , for δ ≥ m$_{C}$ ( z ) , 0 , for δ < m$_{C}$ ( z ) ,$$\n\n$$F L Δ ( δ | d, z ) ≤ F$_{Δ}$ ( δ | d, z ) ≤ F U Δ ( δ | d, z ) ,$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9644652696560992, + "doc_id": "c484cc2f4ead65c57eb073e8f40e20b68ce3b97e9346958034f0e66e020e1030", + "edit_distance": 0.036414565826330535, + "f1_score": 0.9722921914357682, + "meteor": 0.9812127838519765, + "precision": 0.9796954314720813, + "pred_md": "are fundamentally different in nature from hierarchical clustering, or sparse covariance estimation. Granted, our automated procedure firstly utilizes an empirical covariance matrix generated from MCMC sampling chains. However, whereas sparse covariance estimation seeks to estimate the nonzero elements of the underlying covariance structure (Cai and Liu, 2011), our procedure concerns the non-trivial (correlated) elements, with little concern for the smaller entries. Our blocking algorithm also makes use of the complete linkage clustering algorithm, for determining groupings of correlated model parameters. Clustering algorithms have been applied to a wide variety of problems (Xu and Wunsch, 2005), but not to parameters of hierarchical models specifically with the aim of accounting for trade-offs between MCMC algorithmic efficiency and computational requirements, to produce a computationally efficient MCMC algorithm. This is a fundamentally different goal than merely producing groupings of 'similar' parameters (given some measure of similarity), as is generally the goal in most clustering applications. Thereby, the existing literature on these subjects is related, but not intimately applicable to our problem at hand. A deeper consideration of these topics may be worthwhile, but we consider it beyond the scope of this paper.\n\nReasonably straightforward improvements could be made to our automated blocking procedure, which is presented as a sensible first approach that addresses the factors affecting MCMC algorithm efficiency. By design, our procedure natively accounts for differences in system platform or architecture that may affect the relative efficiencies of MCMC algorithms. We can envision a wide variety of possible extensions to our algorithm, ranging from only re-blocking the slowest mixing parameter on each iteration, to permitting cuts at different heights on distinct branches of the hierarchical clustering tree. Our procedure is intended as a proof-of-concept for the automated generation of efficient MCMC algorithms, and to serve as a starting point for subsequent research.\n\n## Acknowledgements\n\nThis work was supported by the NSF under grant DBI-1147230.\n\n29", + "recall": 0.965, + "true_md": "are fundamentally different in nature from hierarchical clustering, or sparse covariance estimation. Granted, our automated procedure firstly utilizes an empirical covariance matrix generated from MCMC sampling chains. However, whereas sparse covariance estimation seeks to estimate the non- zero elements of the underlying covariance structure (Cai and Liu, 2011), our procedure concerns the non-trivial (correlated) elements, with little concern for the smaller entries. Our blocking algorithm also makes use of the complete linkage clustering algorithm, for determining groupings of correlated model parameters. Clustering algorithms have been applied to a wide variety of problems (Xu and Wunsch, 2005), but not to parameters of hierarchical models specifically with the aim of accounting for trade-offs between MCMC algorithmic efficiency and computational requirements, to produce a computationally efficient MCMC algorithm. This is a fundamentally different goal than merely producing groupings of “similar” parameters (given some measure of similarity), as is generally the goal in most clustering applications. Thereby, the existing literature on these subjects is related, but not intimately applicable to our problem at hand. A deeper consideration of these topics may be worthwhile, but we consider it beyond the scope of this paper.\n\nReasonably straightforward improvements could be made to our automated blocking procedure, which is presented as a sensible first approach that addresses the factors affecting MCMC algorithm efficiency. By design, our procedure natively accounts for differences in system platform or architec- ture that may affect the relative efficiencies of MCMC algorithms. We can envision a wide variety of possible extensions to our algorithm, ranging from only re-blocking the slowest mixing parameter on each iteration, to permitting cuts at different heights on distinct branches of the hierarchical clustering tree. Our procedure is intended as a proof-of-concept for the automated generation of efficient MCMC algorithms, and to serve as a starting point for subsequent research.\n\nThis work was supported by the NSF under grant DBI-1147230.\n\n## Acknowledgements\n\n29" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.479676449968321, + "doc_id": "4f71dd9501880f4ba65fe3f6f698ba0849ebc3aa9584a6f270f4b78c90a771dc", + "edit_distance": 0.47058823529411764, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9177374653565131, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Figure 7: Improved lower bound under MTR\n\nFigure 7: Improved lower bound under MTR\n\n21", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Figure 7: Improved lower bound under MTR\n\n21" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.49285557973680955, + "doc_id": "54260420a86293a5cf102875d58c810c9b675892642030b19b6933f074f63ced", + "edit_distance": 0.6267806267806267, + "f1_score": 0.9900990099009901, + "meteor": 0.8561360660476823, + "precision": 0.9900990099009901, + "pred_md": "Figure S3: Effect of non-overlapping windows on the relationship between static and dynamic FC. Each column displays the results using non-overlapping windows of different size (shown in terms of TRs/window). The top row shows the relationship between static functional connectivity (x-axis) and mean dynamic functional connectivity (y-axis). In all cases, there is a clear nearly-linear relationship. In the second row, we plot the correspondence between static functional connectivity (x-axis) versus the standard deviation dynamic functional connectivity (y-axis). In all cases, the smallest standard deviations correspond to strongest static functional connections, indicating that these measures are not independent of one another.\n\nFigure S3: Effect of non-overlapping windows on the relationship between static and dynamic FC. Each column displays the results using non-overlapping windows of different size (shown in terms of TRs/window). The top row shows the relationship between static functional connectivity (x-axis) and mean dynamic functional connectivity (y-axis). In all cases, there is a clear nearly-linear relationship. In the second row, we plot the correspondence between static functional connectivity (x-axis) versus the standard deviation dynamic functional connectivity (y-axis). In all cases, the smallest standard deviations correspond to strongest static functional connections, indicating that these measures are not independent of one another.\n\nFigure S4: Correlation of excursion count matrices generated from the full cohort against and from a sub-set of the participants whose excursion count time-series was not strongly correlated with framewise displacement. A) Scatterplot of x + ij for both groups; B) Scatterplot of x -ij for both groups.\n\nFigure S4: Correlation of excursion count matrices generated from the full cohort against and from a sub-set of the participants whose excursion count time-series was not strongly correlated with framewise displacement. A) Scatterplot of x + ij for both groups; B) Scatterplot of x -ij for both groups.\n\n47", + "recall": 0.9900990099009901, + "true_md": "Figure S4: Correlation of excursion count matrices generated from the full cohort against and from a sub-set of the participants whose excursion count time-series was not strongly correlated with framewise displacement. A) Scatterplot of x + ij for both groups; B) Scatterplot of x − ij for both groups.\n\nFigure S3: Effect of non-overlapping windows on the relationship between static and dynamic FC. Each column displays the results using non-overlapping windows of different size (shown in terms of TRs/window). The top row shows the relationship between static functional connectivity (x-axis) and mean dynamic functional connectivity (y-axis). In all cases, there is a clear nearly-linear relationship. In the second row, we plot the correspondence between static functional connectivity (x-axis) versus the standard deviation dynamic functional connectivity (y-axis). In all cases, the smallest standard deviations correspond to strongest static functional connections, indicating that these measures are not independent of one another.\n\n47" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.3253370111457713, + "doc_id": "ef54dd916a2023fca3045e088426987a08f8658c1d554ff9ebf1c86bf6f430aa", + "edit_distance": 0.4899713467048711, + "f1_score": 0.8688524590163935, + "meteor": 0.44306312746686993, + "precision": 0.8833333333333333, + "pred_md": "10\n\nKABALAN GASPARD\n\nwe have solved (3.1). Summarizing, we get a solution from\n\n\n\nIf p ≡ 5 (8), y 2 1 +3 ξ 2 1 ≡ 4 (8). Given that the only quadratic residues modulo 8 are 0 , 1 4, , we must have ( y , ξ 2 1 2 1 ) ≡ (1 , 1) , (0 , 4) or (4 , 0) (8).\n\nWe now use the fact that 8 2 = 2 2 3 · = 4 3 and consider ( y 1 + √ pξ 1 ) 3 = ( y 3 1 + 3 pξ y 2 1 1 ) + √ p pξ ( 3 1 +3 y ξ 2 1 1 ) = y 2 + √ pξ 2 and see that y 2 2 -pξ 2 2 = ( y 2 1 -pξ 2 1 ) 3 = -4 . 3\n\nBut y 2 = y 1 ( y 2 1 +3 pξ 2 1 ) ≡ y 1 ( y 2 1 -ξ 2 1 ) (8). ( y , ξ 2 1 2 1 ) ≡ (1 , 1) (8) ⇒ y 2 ≡ 0 (8). ( y , ξ 2 1 2 1 ) ≡ (0 , 4) or (4 , 0) (8) ⇒ y 2 ≡ 4 · 4 , 0 · 4 or ± · 2 4 ≡ 0 (8). So in any case y 2 ≡ 0 (8).\n\nSimilarly ξ 2 = ξ 1 ( pξ 2 1 +3 y 2 1 ) ≡ ξ 1 (5 ξ 2 1 +3 y 2 1 ) (8). ( y , ξ 2 1 2 1 ) ≡ (1 , 1) (8) ⇒ ξ 2 ≡ ξ 2 (5 + 3) ≡ 0 (8). ( y , ξ 2 1 2 1 ) ≡ (0 , 4) or (4 , 0) (8) ⇒ ξ 2 ≡ ± 2 · 4 , 0 · 4 or 4 · 0 ≡ 0 (8). So in any case ξ 2 ≡ 0 (8).\n\nSo 8 | y , ξ 2 2 and thus, writing y 3 = y 2 8 , ξ 3 = ξ 2 8 ∈ Z , we get ( y 2 3 -pξ 2 3 ) = -4 3 8 2 = -1. As in the case where p ≡ 1 (8), writing ( y 3 ± √ pξ 3 ) 2 = a ± b √ p , a, b ∈ Z , ( x, y ) = ( a, b ) is a solution of (3.1). Summarizing, we get a solution from\n\n\n\nCase 2: p ≡ 3 (4).\n\nLet l = p -1 2 . p ≡ 3 (4) ⇒ l is odd. We see that f ( x ) = 1 2 ( q 1 ( x ) + q -1 ( x )) = ∏ 1 ≤ k<p ( ) k p =1 ( x -ζ k ) +\n\n∏ 1 ≤ k<p ( ) k p = -1 ( x -ζ k ). f is of degree l . We shall find a relation amongst the coefficients of f by\n\ncomparing f ( ζ ) and f ( ζ ) = f ( ζ ) (since f ( x ) ∈ Z [ x ]). Trivially 1 p = 1, so 1 ≤ k<p ( ) k p =1 ( ζ -ζ k\n\nand so f ( ζ ) = ∏ 1 ≤ k<p ( ) k p = 1 ( ζ -ζ k ). Also note that ( -1 p ) = ( -1) -2 = -1, and so ( ) k p = -( -k p )\n\nall 1 ≤ k ≤ p -1. So f ( ζ ) = 1 ≤ k<p ( ) k p =1 ( ζ -ζ -k ). By the same line of reasoning, f ( ζ ) = f ( ζ -1\n\n( ) ∏ ) = 0 -p 1 for ∏ ) =", + "recall": 0.8548387096774194, + "true_md": "10\n\nKABALAN GASPARD\n\nwe have solved (3.1). Summarizing, we get a solution from\n\n$$( a, b ) = ( 1 4 ( g (1) 2 + f (1) 2 p ) , f (1) g (1) 2 p )$$\n\nwhere we can directly compute f (1) and g (1)\n\nIf p ≡ 5 (8), y 2 1 + 3 ξ 2 1 ≡ 4 (8). Given that the only quadratic residues modulo 8 are 0 , 1 , 4, we must have ( y 2 $_{1}$, ξ 2 $_{1}$) ≡ (1 , 1) , (0 , 4) or (4 , 0) (8). √ 2\n\n≡ We now use the fact that 8 2 = 2 $^{2}$·3 = 4 3 and consider ( y$_{1}$ + √ pξ$_{1}$ ) 3 = ( y 3 1 + 3 pξ 2 $_{1}$y$_{1}$ ) + √ p ( pξ 3 1 + 3 y 2 $_{1}$ξ$_{1}$ ) = y$_{2}$ + √ pξ$_{2}$ and see that y 2 − pξ 2 2 = ( y 2 1 − pξ 2 $_{1}$) 3 = − 4 $^{3}$. 2 2 2 2\n\n− − − But y$_{2}$ = y$_{1}$ ( y 2 $_{1}$+3 pξ 2 $_{1}$) ≡ y$_{1}$ ( y 2 1 − ξ 2 $_{1}$) (8). ( y 2 $_{1}$, ξ 2 $_{1}$) ≡ (1 , 1) (8) ⇒ y$_{2}$ ≡ 0 (8). ( y 2 $_{1}$, ξ 2 $_{1}$) ≡ (0 , 4) or (4 , 0) (8) ⇒ y$_{2}$ ≡ 4 · 4 , 0 · 4 or ± 2 · 4 ≡ 0 (8). So in any case y$_{2}$ ≡ 0 (8). 2 2 2\n\n⇒ ≡ · · ± · ≡ ≡ Similarly ξ$_{2}$ = ξ$_{1}$ ( pξ 2 $_{1}$+ 3 y 2 $_{1}$) ≡ ξ$_{1}$ (5 ξ 2 $_{1}$+ 3 y 2 $_{1}$) (8). ( y 2 $_{1}$, ξ 2 $_{1}$) ≡ (1 , 1) (8) ⇒ ξ$_{2}$ ≡ ξ$_{2}$ (5 + 3) ≡ 0 (8). ( y 2 $_{1}$, ξ 2 $_{1}$) ≡ (0 , 4) or (4 , 0) (8) ⇒ ξ$_{2}$ ≡ ± 2 · 4 , 0 · 4 or 4 · 0 ≡ 0 (8). So in any case ξ$_{2}$ ≡ 0 (8).\n\nSo 8 | y$_{2}$, ξ$_{2}$ and thus, writing y$_{3}$ = y$_{2}$ 8 , ξ$_{3}$ = ξ$_{2}$ 8 ∈ Z , we get ( y 2 3 − pξ 2 $_{3}$) = − 4 3 8 2 = − 1. As in the case where p ≡ 1 (8), writing ( y$_{3}$ ± √ pξ$_{3}$ ) 2 = a ± b √ p , a, b ∈ Z , ( x, y ) = ( a, b ) is a solution of (3.1). Summarizing, we get a solution from\n\n$$( a, b ) =   1 $_{64}$(( g (1) 3 + 3 f (1) $^{2}$g (1) p ) 2 + p ( f (1) 3 p 2 + 3 g (1) $^{2}$f (1) p ) $^{2}$) , 1 $_{32}$( g (1) 3 + 3 f (1) $^{2}$g (1) p )( f (1) 3 p 2 + 3 g (1) $^{2}$f (1) p )  $$\n\nCase 2: p ≡ 3 (4). 1\n\n≡ Let l = $^{p}$− 1 2 . p ≡ 3 (4) ⇒ l is odd. We see that f ( x ) = 1 $_{2}$( q$_{1}$ ( x ) + q − $_{1}$( x )) = ∏ $^{1}$≤ k<p ( k $_{p}$) =1 ( x − ζ $^{k}$) + ∏ $^{1}$≤ k<p ( k $_{p}$) $^{=}$−1 ( x − ζ $^{k}$). f is of degree l . We shall find a relation amongst the coefficients of f by comparing f ( ζ ) and f ( ζ ) = f ( ζ ) (since f ( x ) ∈ Z [ x ]). Trivially ( 1 p ) = 1, so ∏ $^{1}$≤ k<p ( k $_{p}$) =1 ( ζ − ζ $^{k}$) = 0 and so f ( ζ ) = ∏ $^{1}$≤ k<p ( k $_{p}$) $^{=}$−1 ( ζ − ζ $^{k}$). Also note that ( − 1 p ) = ( − 1) $^{p}$− 1 2 = − 1, and so ( k p ) = − ( − k p ) for all 1 ≤ k ≤ p − 1. So f ( ζ ) = ∏ $^{1}$≤ k<p ( k $_{p}$) =1 ( ζ − ζ − $^{k}$). By the same line of reasoning, f ( ζ ) = f ( ζ − $^{1}$) =" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0005669935444759114, + "doc_id": "53808d74ac885c1ee3cc52fb5fe98d15970265016c3a88e11ed3273ec5451baa", + "edit_distance": 0.9095127610208816, + "f1_score": 0.850828729281768, + "meteor": 0.09559721493855457, + "precision": 0.9058823529411765, + "pred_md": "Then for all ( y , y 0 1 ) ∈ R 2 ,\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nEqualities in the third and sixth lines of (A.7) are satisfied because ϕ and ψ are assumed to be bounded. To compress notation, refer to A k ( ϕ, s ) and A D k ( ϕ, s ) merely as A k and A . D k Then,\n\n\n\nBy taking integrals with respect to dF to both side, one obtains the following:\n\n\n\nThe third equality holds by Fubini's theorem because ∞ ∑ ∣ ∣ k = -∞ ∣ 1 A k ( y 0 ) -1 A D k ( y 1 ) ∣ ∣ ∣ ≤ ∞ ∑ k = -∞ 1 A k ( y 0 )+ ∞ ∑ k = -∞ 1 A D k ( y 1 ) < ∞ for bounded functions ϕ and ψ. Now, maximization of ∫ ϕ y ( 0 ) dF 0 + ∫ ψ y ( 1 ) dF 1 over ( ϕ, ψ ) ∈ Φ is equivc\n\n61", + "recall": 0.8020833333333334, + "true_md": "Then for all ( y$_{0}$, y$_{1}$ ) ∈$_{R}$ $^{2}$,\n\nEqualities in the third and sixth lines of (A.7) are satisfied because ϕ and ψ are assumed to be bounded. To compress notation, refer to A$_{k}$ ( ϕ, s ) and A D k ( ϕ, s ) merely as A$_{k}$ and A D k . Then,\n\nBy taking integrals with respect to dF to both side, one obtains the following:\n\nThe third equality holds by Fubini’s theorem because ∞ ∑ k = −∞ ∣ $_{∣}$1$_{A}$$\\_{k}$ ( y$\\_{0}$ ) − 1$\\_{A}$ D k ( y$\\_{1}$ ) ∣ ∣ ≤ ∞ ∑ k = −∞ 1$\\_{A}$$_{k}$ ( y$_{0}$ )+ ∞ ∑ k = −∞ 1$_{A}$ D k ( y$_{1}$ ) < ∞ for bounded functions ϕ and ψ. Now, maximization of ∫ ϕ ( y$_{0}$ ) dF$_{0}$ + ∫ ψ ( y$_{1}$ ) dF$_{1}$ over ( ϕ, ψ ) ∈ Φ$_{c}$ is equiv-\n\n61\n\n$$∫ { 1 { y$_{1}$ − y$_{0}$ < δ } − λ (1 − 1$_{C}$ ( y$_{0}$, y$_{1}$ )) } dπ (A.8) ≥ ∫ ∞ ∑ k = −∞ $^{(}$1$_{A}$$_{k}$ ( y$_{0}$ ) − 1$_{A}$ D k ( y$_{1}$ ) $^{)}$dπ = ∞ ∑ k = −∞ ∫ $^{(}$1$_{A}$$_{k}$ ( y$_{0}$ ) − 1$_{A}$ D k ( y$_{1}$ ) $^{)}$dπ = ∞ ∑ k = −∞ $^{{}$µ$_{0}$ ( A$_{k}$ ) − µ$_{1}$ $^{(}$A D k $^{)}}$.$$\n\n$$1 { y$_{1}$ − y$_{0}$ < δ } + λ (1 − 1$_{C}$ ( y$_{0}$, y$_{1}$ )) ≥ ∞ ∑ k = −∞ $^{(}$1$_{A}$$_{k}$ ( y$_{0}$ ) − 1$_{A}$ D k ( y$_{1}$ ) $^{)}$.$$\n\n$$1 { y$_{1}$ − y$_{0}$ < δ } + λ (1 − 1$_{C}$ ( y$_{0}$, y$_{1}$ )) (A.7) ≥ ∞ ∑ k =0 $^{(}$1$_{A}$ + $_{k}$( ϕ,s $_{)}$( y$_{0}$ ) − 1$_{A}$ − k ( ϕ,s $_{)}$( y$_{0}$ ) − ∞ ∑ k =0 $^{(}$1$_{A}$ + $_{k,D}$( ϕ,s $_{)}$( y$_{1}$ ) − 1$_{A}$ − $_{k,D}$( ϕ,s $_{)}$( y$_{1}$ ) = ∞ ∑ k =0 $^{{(}$1$_{A}$ + $_{k}$( ϕ,s $_{)}$( y$_{0}$ ) − 1$_{A}$ − k ( ϕ,s $_{)}$( y$_{0}$ ) ) − $^{(}$1$_{A}$ + $_{k,D}$( ϕ,s $_{)}$( y$_{1}$ ) − 1$_{A}$ − $_{k,D}$( ϕ,s $_{)}$( y$_{1}$ ) )} = ∞ ∑ k =0 $^{{}$1$_{A}$ + $_{k}$( ϕ,s $_{)}$( y$_{0}$ ) + $^{(}$1 − 1$_{A}$ − k ( ϕ,s $_{)}$( y$_{0}$ ) ) − 1$_{A}$ + $_{k,D}$( ϕ,s $_{)}$( y$_{1}$ ) − $^{(}$1 − 1$_{A}$ − $_{k,D}$( ϕ,s $_{)}$( y$_{1}$ ) )} = ∞ ∑ k =0 $^{{(}$1$_{A}$ + $_{k}$( ϕ,s $_{)}$( y$_{0}$ ) + 1 ( A − k ( ϕ,s ) c ( y$_{0}$ ) ) − $^{(}$1$_{A}$ + $_{k,D}$( ϕ,s $_{)}$( y$_{1}$ ) + 1 ( A − $_{k,D}$( ϕ,s ) c ( y$_{1}$ ) )} = ∞ ∑ k =0 $^{(}$1$_{A}$ + $_{k}$( ϕ,s $_{)}$( y$_{0}$ ) − 1$_{A}$ + $_{k,D}$( ϕ,s $_{)}$( y$_{1}$ ) $^{)}$+ ∞ ∑ k =0 $^{(}$1 ( A − k ( ϕ,s ) c ( y$_{0}$ ) − 1 ( A − $_{k,D}$( ϕ,s ) ) c ( y$_{1}$ ) = ∞ ∑ k =0 $^{(}$1$_{A}$$_{k}$$_{(}$$_{ϕ,s}$$_{)}$ ( y$_{0}$ ) − 1$_{A}$ D k ( ϕ,s $_{)}$( y$_{1}$ ) $^{)}$+ − 1 ∑ k = −∞ $^{(}$1$_{A}$$_{k}$$_{(}$$_{ϕ,s}$$_{)}$ ( y$_{0}$ ) − 1$_{A}$ D k ( ϕ,s $_{)}$( y$_{1}$ ) ) = ∞ ∑ k = −∞ $^{(}$1$_{A}$$_{k}$$_{(}$$_{ϕ,s}$$_{)}$ ( y$_{0}$ ) − 1$_{A}$ D k ( ϕ,s $_{)}$( y$_{1}$ )$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5046605924161432, + "doc_id": "5158090e7b0faa60a530f2c70982c2804fd3716c6f650aaa97a06b883d35433d", + "edit_distance": 0.4610552763819096, + "f1_score": 0.9032258064516129, + "meteor": 0.5027295474948904, + "precision": 0.9447852760736196, + "pred_md": "grazing orbit. Fix points y = ( y , y 1 2 ) ∈ H and ψ = ( ψ , ψ 1 2 ) of the orbits y t ( ) and Ψ ( ) 0 t , respectively such that 0 ≤ y 1 = ψ 1 ≤ 1 and ψ 2 < 0 . Since of the equation y ' 1 = y , 2 the speed of y 1 ( ) t at ( y , y 1 2 ) is larger than the speed of Ψ ( ) 1 t at ( ψ , ψ 1 2 ) . Consequently, one can find that τ ( y ) ≤ π 4 < π 2 for y ∈ H. Thus, the condition ( A 3) is valid and Lemma 3.1 verifies the condition ( C . )\n\nIt is easy to demonstrate that the condition ( A 4) is valid such that near solutions to the grazing one are either continuous or discontinuous. That is, they don't intersect the line of discontinuity Γ or intersect it permanently near to the grazing point and by means of the formula (5.76) , the linearization system for (5.71) around the grazing cycle Ψ ( ) 0 t consists of the following two subsystems\n\n\n\nand\n\n\n\nThe system (5.77) + (5.78) is (2 π, 1) periodic. The Floquet multipliers of system (5.77) + (5.78) are ρ (1) 1 = 1 , ρ (1) 2 = 0 939 . , ρ (2) 1 = 1 , ρ (2) 2 = 0 912 . . Thus, condition ( A 5) is validated. Moreover, the conditions ( C 1) -( C 7) and ( A 1) ( , A 2) can be verified utilizing similar way presented in Example 3.1. Consequently, Theorem 4.1 authenticates that the grazing periodic solution (cycle), Ψ ( ) 0 t of the system (5.71) is orbitally stable. The simulation results demonstrating the orbital stability of Ψ ( ) 0 t are depicted in Figure 8.\n\nFigure 8: The grazing cycle of system (5.71) is in red. The blue arcs are the trajectory of the system with initial point (0 5 . , 1 2) . and the green continuous orbit is with initial value (0 1 . , 0) . They demonstrate stability of the grazing solution.\n\nFigure 8: The grazing cycle of system (5.71) is in red. The blue arcs are the trajectory of the system with initial point (0 5 . , 1 2) . and the green continuous orbit is with initial value (0 1 . , 0) . They demonstrate stability of the grazing solution.\n\n1\n\nNext, we will investigate two sorts of periodic solutions of system (5.69) with a period T near to 2 π. The first one is continuous and the second admits discontinuities once on a period. For those solutions, corresponding linearization systems around the grazing cycle Ψ ( ) 0 t are (5.77) and (5.78) , respectively.\n\n37", + "recall": 0.8651685393258427, + "true_md": "grazing orbit. Fix points y = ( y$_{1}$, y$_{2}$ ) ∈ H and ψ = ( ψ$_{1}$, ψ$_{2}$ ) of the orbits y ( t ) and Ψ$_{0}$( t ) , respectively such that 0 ≤ y$_{1}$ = ψ$_{1}$ ≤ 1 and ψ$_{2}$ < 0 . Since of the equation y ′ 1 = y$_{2}$, the speed of y$_{1}$ ( t ) at ( y$_{1}$, y$_{2}$ ) is larger than the speed of Ψ$_{1}$( t ) at ( ψ$_{1}$, ψ$_{2}$ ) . Consequently, one can find that τ ( y ) ≤ π 4 < 2 π for y ∈ H. Thus, the condition ( A 3) is valid and Lemma 3.1 verifies the condition ( C ) .\n\nIt is easy to demonstrate that the condition ( A 4) is valid such that near solutions to the grazing one are either continuous or discontinuous. That is, they don’t intersect the line of discontinuity Γ or intersect it permanently near to the grazing point and by means of the formula (5.76) , the linearization system for (5.71) around the grazing cycle Ψ$_{0}$( t ) consists of the following two subsystems\n\nand\n\n  The system (5.77) + (5.78) is (2 π, 1) periodic. The Floquet multipliers of system (5.77) + (5.78) are ρ (1) 1 = 1 , ρ (1) 2 = 0 . 939 , ρ (2) 1 = 1 , ρ (2) 2 = 0 . 912 . Thus, condition ( A 5) is validated. Moreover, the conditions ( C 1) − ( C 7) and ( A 1) , ( A 2) can be verified utilizing similar way presented in Example 3.1. Consequently, Theorem 4.1 authenticates that the grazing periodic solution (cycle), Ψ$_{0}$( t ) of the system (5.71) is orbitally stable. The simulation results demonstrating the orbital stability of Ψ$_{0}$( t ) are depicted in Figure 8.\n\nNext, we will investigate two sorts of periodic solutions of system (5.69) with a period T near to 2 π. The first one is continuous and the second admits discontinuities once on a period. For those solutions, corresponding linearization systems around the grazing cycle Ψ$_{0}$( t ) are (5.77) and (5.78) , respectively.\n\nFigure 8: The grazing cycle of system (5.71) is in red. The blue arcs are the trajectory of the system with initial point (0 . 5 , 1 . 2) and the green continuous orbit is with initial value (0 . 1 , 0) . They demonstrate stability of the grazing solution.\n\n$$$_{u}$′ 1 = u$_{2}$, $_{u}$′ 2 = − 0 . 0001 sin(2 t ) u$_{1}$ + 0 . 0002 sin $^{2}$( t ) u$_{2}$, Δ u | 2 πi =    − 1 0 0 . 0003 R $_{0}$   u. (5.78) (2 π, 1) periodic. The Floquet multipliers of system (5.77) + (5.78) are$$\n\n$$u ′ 1 = u$_{2}$, u ′ 2 = − 0 . 0001 sin(2 t ) u$_{1}$ + 0 . 0002 sin $^{2}$( t ) u$_{2}$, (5.77)$$\n\n37" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9135509807429595, + "doc_id": "da32ccfb8565a0bf7dd13a3b761611098c7f35b7b0d08ec017636efb3fc710a0", + "edit_distance": 0.028688524590163935, + "f1_score": 0.9490196078431371, + "meteor": 0.9716971985009423, + "precision": 0.952755905511811, + "pred_md": "- [37] A.B. Nordmark. Universal limit mapping in grazing bifurcations. Physical Review E, 55:266-270, 1997.\n- [38] A.B. Nordmark. Existence of periodic orbits in grazing bifurcations of impacting mechanical oscillators. Nonlinearity, 14:1517-1542, 2001.\n- [39] A.B. Nordmark and P.A Kowalczyk. Codimension-two scenario of sliding solutions in grazing-sliding bifurcations. Nonlinearity, 19:1-26, 2006.\n- [40] L. Perko. Differential Equations and Dynamical Systems. Springer, 2001.\n- [41] P. T. Piiroinen, L. N. Virgin and A. R. Champneys. Chaos and Period-Adding: Experimental and Numerical Verification of the Grazing Bifurcation. J. Nonlinear Sci., 14:383-404, 2004 .\n- [42] C. Robinson. Dynamical Systems: Stability, Symbolic Dynamics and Chaos. Studies in Advanced Mathematics, CRC Press, Boca Raton, FL, 1995.\n- [43] W. Rudin. Principles of mathematical analysis. McGraw-Hill, 1953.\n- [44] P.S. Simeonov and D.D. Bainov. Orbital stability of the periodic solutions of autonomous systems with impulse effect, Publ. RIMS, Kyoto Univ., 25:312-346, 1989.\n- [45] A.M. Samoilenko and N.A. Perestyuk. Impulsive Differential Equations. World Scientific Series on Nonlinear Science Series A: Volume 14, 1995.\n\n44", + "recall": 0.9453125, + "true_md": "- [37] A.B. Nordmark. Universal limit mapping in grazing bifurcations. Physical Review E, 55:266–270, 1997.\n\n- [38] A.B. Nordmark. Existence of periodic orbits in grazing bifurcations of impacting mechanical oscil- lators. Nonlinearity, 14:1517–1542, 2001.\n\n- [39] A.B. Nordmark and P.A Kowalczyk. Codimension-two scenario of sliding solutions in grazing-sliding bifurcations. Nonlinearity, 19:1–26, 2006.\n\n- [40] L. Perko. Differential Equations and Dynamical Systems. Springer, 2001.\n\n- [41] P. T. Piiroinen, L. N. Virgin and A. R. Champneys. Chaos and Period-Adding: Experimental and Numerical Verification of the Grazing Bifurcation. J. Nonlinear Sci., 14:383–404, 2004 .\n\n- [42] C. Robinson. Dynamical Systems: Stability, Symbolic Dynamics and Chaos. Studies in Advanced Mathematics, CRC Press, Boca Raton, FL, 1995.\n\n- [43] W. Rudin. Principles of mathematical analysis. McGraw-Hill, 1953.\n\n- [44] P.S. Simeonov and D.D. Bainov. Orbital stability of the periodic solutions of autonomous systems with impulse effect, Publ. RIMS, Kyoto Univ., 25:312–346, 1989.\n\n- [45] A.M. Samoilenko and N.A. Perestyuk. Impulsive Differential Equations. World Scientific Series on Nonlinear Science Series A: Volume 14, 1995.\n\n44" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8186958283389147, + "doc_id": "81308603e8157ed675d800fc9252518f262636e40f47d94ffd97437305794230", + "edit_distance": 0.11335012594458438, + "f1_score": 0.9660377358490566, + "meteor": 0.9381885087996934, + "precision": 0.9770992366412213, + "pred_md": "I use Abadie et al. (2002)'s estimation procedure. They proposed an estimation method for moments involving ( Y, D, X ) for compliers by using weighted moments. See Section 3 of Abadie et al. (2002) for details about the estimation procedure and asymptotic distribution of the estimator. Following their estimation strategy, I estimate the equation (17). 18 The estimation results for the equation (17) are documented in Table C.3 in Appendix C.\n\nSmoking is estimated to have significantly negative effects on all quantiles of birth weight. The estimated causal effect of smoking on the q -quantile of infant birth weight is -195 grams at q = 0 15, . -214 grams at q = 0 25, and . -234 grams at q = 0 50. The effect significantly differs by women's race, education, age, and . the quality of prenatal care. This heterogeneity also varies across quantile levels of birth weight. For the low quantiles q = 0 15 and 0 25, the adverse effect of smoking is estimated to be the largest for births whose . . mothers are black and get inadequate prenatal care. In education, the adverse smoking effect is much less severe for college graduates compared to women with other education background. At q = 0 15, as women's . age increases up to 35 years, the adverse effect of smoking becomes less severe, but it increases with women's age for births to women who are older than 35 years old.\n\nControlling for the smoking status, compared to white women, black women bear lighter babies for all quantiles and Hispanic women bear similar weight babies at low quantiles q = 0 15 . , 0 25 but lighter babies . at higher q > 0 5 . . Also, at low quantiles q = 0 15 and 0 25, as mothers' education level increases, the birth . . weight noticeably increases except for post graduate women. Married women are more likely to give births to heavier babies for low quantiles q = 0 15 . , 0 25 . , 0 50 . , but lighter babies at high quantiles q = 0 75 0 85. . , . One should be cautious about interpreting the results at high quantiles. At high quantiles, heavier babies do not necessarily mean healthier babies because high birth weight could be also problematic. 19 The prenatal care seems to be associated with birth weight very differently at both ends of quantiles (at q = 0 15 and . at q = 0 85). . At q = 0 15, women with better prenatal care tend to have lighter babies, while at . q = 0 85 . women with better prenatal care are more likely to bear heavier infants. This suggests that women with higher medical risk factors are more likely to have more intense prenatal care.\n\nTo estimate marginal distributions of Y 0 and Y 1 , I first estimate the model (17) for a fine grid of q with 999 points from 0 001 to 0 999 and obtain quantile curves of . . Y 0 and Y 1 on the fine grid. Note that fitted quantile curves are non-monotonic as shown in Figure 16(a). I sort the estimated values of the quantile curves in an increasing order as proposed by Chernozhukov et al. (2009). They showed that this procedure improves the estimates of quantile functions and distribution functions in finite samples. Figure 16(b) shows\n\n18 I follow the same computation method as in Abadie et al. (2002). They used Barrodale-Roberts (1973) linear programming algorithm for quantile regression and a biweight kernel for the estimation of standard errors.\n\n19 High birth weight is defined as a birth weight of > 4000 grams or greater than 90 percentiles for gestational age. The causes of HBW are gestational diabetes, maternal obesity, grand multiparity, etc. The rates of birth injuries and infant mortality rates are higher among HBW infants than normal birth weight infants.\n\n40", + "recall": 0.9552238805970149, + "true_md": "I use Abadie et al. (2002)’s estimation procedure. They proposed an estimation method for moments involving ( Y, D, X ) for compliers by using weighted moments. See Section 3 of Abadie et al. (2002) for details about the estimation procedure and asymptotic distribution of the estimator. Following their estimation strategy, I estimate the equation (17). 18 The estimation results for the equation (17) are documented in Table C.3 in Appendix C.\n\nSmoking is estimated to have significantly negative effects on all quantiles of birth weight. The estimated causal effect of smoking on the q -quantile of infant birth weight is − 195 grams at q = 0 . 15, − 214 grams at q = 0 . 25, and − 234 grams at q = 0 . 50. The effect significantly differs by women’s race, education, age, and the quality of prenatal care. This heterogeneity also varies across quantile levels of birth weight. For the low quantiles q = 0 . 15 and 0 . 25, the adverse effect of smoking is estimated to be the largest for births whose mothers are black and get inadequate prenatal care. In education, the adverse smoking effect is much less severe for college graduates compared to women with other education background. At q = 0 . 15, as women’s age increases up to 35 years, the adverse effect of smoking becomes less severe, but it increases with women’s age for births to women who are older than 35 years old.\n\nControlling for the smoking status, compared to white women, black women bear lighter babies for all quantiles and Hispanic women bear similar weight babies at low quantiles q = 0 . 15 , 0 . 25 but lighter babies at higher q > 0 . 5 . Also, at low quantiles q = 0 . 15 and 0 . 25, as mothers’ education level increases, the birth weight noticeably increases except for post graduate women. Married women are more likely to give births to heavier babies for low quantiles q = 0 . 15 , 0 . 25 , 0 . 50 , but lighter babies at high quantiles q = 0 . 75 , 0 . 85. One should be cautious about interpreting the results at high quantiles. At high quantiles, heavier babies do not necessarily mean healthier babies because high birth weight could be also problematic. 19 The prenatal care seems to be associated with birth weight very differently at both ends of quantiles (at q = 0 . 15 and at q = 0 . 85). At q = 0 . 15, women with better prenatal care tend to have lighter babies, while at q = 0 . 85 women with better prenatal care are more likely to bear heavier infants. This suggests that women with higher medical risk factors are more likely to have more intense prenatal care.\n\nTo estimate marginal distributions of Y$_{0}$ and Y$_{1}$$\\_{,}$ I first estimate the model (17) for a fine grid of q with 999 points from 0 . 001 to 0 . 999 and obtain quantile curves of Y$\\_{0}$ and Y$\\_{1}$ on the fine grid. Note that fitted quantile curves are non-monotonic as shown in Figure 16(a). I sort the estimated values of the quantile curves in an increasing order as proposed by Chernozhukov et al. (2009). They showed that this procedure improves the estimates of quantile functions and distribution functions in finite samples. Figure 16(b) shows\n\n$^{18}$I follow the same computation method as in Abadie et al. (2002). They used Barrodale-Roberts (1973) linear programming algorithm for quantile regression and a biweight kernel for the estimation of standard errors.\n\n$^{19}$High birth weight is defined as a birth weight of > 4000 grams or greater than 90 percentiles for gestational age. The causes of HBW are gestational diabetes, maternal obesity, grand multiparity, etc. The rates of birth injuries and infant mortality rates are higher among HBW infants than normal birth weight infants.\n\n40" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.1107082489864438, + "doc_id": "51ee86cbfe34aa50c667b303a647e639c053e84e1026f6bc917f535aec4f7a2d", + "edit_distance": 0.7032520325203252, + "f1_score": 0.889589905362776, + "meteor": 0.3481282126293315, + "precision": 0.9527027027027027, + "pred_md": "\n\nThe above discussion proves that z ( j ) ( t, a ) , j = 1 , , 2 , . . . , m, are bounded solutions of system (4.35).\n\nWewill determine the initial values of bounded solutions in terms of ( n -1) parameters a ( j ) 2 , . . . , a ( j ) n , j = 1 , , 2 , . . . , m. Denote a ( j ) = [0 , a j 2 , a j 3 , . . . , a j n ] . By using (4.41), we obtain\n\n\n\nIn the way utilized in [17], one can show that the coordinates of the initial value ( x , . . . , x 1 n ) ∈ D of the solution z ( j ) satisfy the equation\n\n\n\nwhere h j ∈ C , j 1 = 1 , , 2 , . . . , m.\n\nOne can see that equation (4.49) determines ( n -1) dimensional hypersurfaces S j ⊂ D, j = 1 2 , , . . . , m, in a neighborhood of the origin such that each solution which starts at the surface satisfies inequality (4.48). From the analytical representation, it follows that the equation of the tangent space of S j at the origin is described by the equation x 1 + n ∑ i =2 c x j i i and the first coordinate of the gradient of the left hand side in (4.49) is unity. Moreover, the path η intersects S j transversely. This and condition ( A 4) imply that the path of every solution φ t ( ) near Ψ( ) t intersects one of the manifolds S , j j = 1 2 , , . . . , m, at some ¯ t ∈ [0 , 2 ω . ]\n\nBecause of the continuous dependence on initial values, a δ /epsilon1 ( ) > 0 exists for a given /epsilon1 > , 0 such that if dist x ( 0 , η δ ) < δ /epsilon1 ( ) , then the solution φ t, x ( 0 ) is defined on [0 , 2 ω , ] and dist φ t, x ( ( 0 ) , η ) < /epsilon1 ≤ /epsilon1 1 for t ∈ [0 , 2 T . ] Therefore, the path of φ t, x ( 0 ) intersects S j for some j = 1 2 , , . . . , m and t 1 ∈ [0 , 2 ω . ] The\n\n26", + "recall": 0.834319526627219, + "true_md": "$$z ( θ$_{k}$ +) − z ( θ$_{k}$ ) = Y$_{j}$ ( θ$_{k}$ +) a + θ$_{k}$ ∫ 0 G ( j ) 1 ( θ$_{k}$ + , s ) r ( s, z ( s )) ds − ∞ ∫ θ$_{k}$ G ( j ) 2 ( θ$_{k}$ + , s ) r ( s, z ( s )) ds + ∑ $^{0}$≤ θ$_{i}$<θ$_{k}$ G ( j ) 1 ( θ$_{k}$ + , θ$_{i}$ +) q$_{i}$ ( z ( θ$_{i}$ +)) − ∑ θ$_{k}$<θ$_{i}$$^{<}$∞$^{G}$$^{(}$$^{j}$$^{)}$ 2 ( θ$_{k}$ + , θ$_{i}$ +) q$_{i}$ ( z ( θ$_{i}$ +)) − Y$_{j}$ ( θ$_{k}$ ) a − θ$_{k}$ ∫ 0 G ( j ) 1 ( θ$_{k}$, s ) r ( s, z ( s )) ds + ∞ ∫ θ$_{k}$ G ( j ) 2 ( θ$_{k}$, s ) r ( s, z ( s )) ds − ∑ $^{0}$≤ θ$_{i}$<θ$_{k}$ G ( j ) 1 ( θ$_{k}$, θ$_{i}$ +) q$_{i}$ ( z ( θ$_{i}$ )) + ∑ $^{θ$_{k}$}$≤θ$_{i}$$^{<}$∞$^{G}$$^{(}$$^{j}$$^{)}$ 2 ( θ$_{k}$, θ$_{i}$ +) q$_{i}$ ( z ( θ$_{i}$ +)) = D ( j ) k z ( θ$_{k}$ ) + q$_{k}$ ( z ( θ$_{k}$ )) .$$\n\n$$z ( j $^{)}$(0 , a ( j $^{)}$) = Y$_{j}$ (0) a ( j ) − ∞ ∫ 0 G ( j ) 2 (0 , s ) r ( s, z ( s )) ds − ∑ 0 <θ$_{k}$$^{<}$∞$^{G}$$^{(}$$^{j}$$^{)}$ 2 (0 , θ$_{k}$ +) q$_{k}$ ( z ( θ$_{k}$ )) = P$_{j}$ (0) a ( j ) − P$_{j}$ (0)    1 0 0 $^{O$_{n}$}$− 1    ∞ ∫ 0 $_{P}$− 1 j ( s ) r ( s, z ( s )) ds − ∑ 0 <θ$_{k}$$^{<}$∞ $_{P}$− 1 j ( s ) q$_{k}$ ( z ( θ$_{k}$ )) .$$\n\n$$x$_{1}$ + n ∑ i =2 c j $_{i}$x$_{i}$ − h$_{j}$ ( x$_{2}$, . . . , x$_{n}$ ) = 0 , (4.49)$$\n\nThe above discussion proves that z ( j $^{)}$( t, a ) , j = 1 , , 2 , . . . , m, are bounded solutions of system (4.35). We will determine the initial values of bounded solutions in terms of ( n − 1) parameters a ( j ) 2 , . . . , a ( j ) n , j = j j\n\n1 , , 2 , . . . , m. Denote a ( j ) = [0 , a j $_{2}$, a j $_{3}$, . . . , a j $_{n}$] . By using (4.41), we obtain\n\nIn the way utilized in [17], one can show that the coordinates of the initial value ( x$_{1}$, . . . , x$_{n}$ ) ∈ D of the solution z ( j ) satisfy the equation\n\nwhere h$_{j}$ ∈ C $^{1}$, j = 1 , , 2 , . . . , m.\n\nOne can see that equation (4.49) determines ( n − 1) dimensional hypersurfaces S j ⊂ D, j = 1 , 2 , . . . , m, in a neighborhood of the origin such that each solution which starts at the surface satisfies inequality (4.48). From the analytical representation, it follows that the equation of the tangent space of S j at the origin is described by the equation x$_{1}$ + n ∑ i =2 c j $_{i}$x$_{i}$ and the first coordinate of the gradient of the left hand side in (4.49) is unity. Moreover, the path η intersects S j transversely. This and condition ( A 4) imply that the path of every solution φ ( t ) near Ψ( t ) intersects one of the manifolds S $^{j}$, j = 1 , 2 , . . . , m, at some ¯ t ∈ [0 , 2 ω ] .\n\nBecause of the continuous dependence on initial values, a δ ( ϵ ) > 0 exists for a given ϵ > 0 , such that if dist ( x $^{0}$, η$_{δ}$ ) < δ ( ϵ ) , then the solution φ ( t, x $^{0}$) is defined on [0 , 2 ω ] , and dist ( φ ( t, x $^{0}$) , η ) < ϵ ≤ ϵ$_{1}$ for t ∈ [0 , 2 T ] . Therefore, the path of φ ( t, x $^{0}$) intersects S j for some j = 1 , 2 , . . . , m and t$_{1}$ ∈ [0 , 2 ω ] . The\n\n26" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9478749748478191, + "doc_id": "385b0398ccea046b29e17b9243714c785a97d0d980299c3da2a0d2d55bbc4535", + "edit_distance": 0.050980392156862744, + "f1_score": 0.9795081967213115, + "meteor": 0.9773323443024653, + "precision": 0.9835390946502057, + "pred_md": "Orzechowski and Walker (2011)).\n\nIn the literature, there have been various attempts to clarify the causal effects of smoking on infant birth weight. Most previous empirical studies have evaluated the average effects of smoking or effects on the marginal distribution of potential infant birth weight focusing on the methods to overcome the endogeneity of smoking behavior.\n\nMy analysis pays particular attention to the distribution of smoking effects on infant birth weight. The DTE conveys the information on the targets of anti-smoking policy, which is particularly important for this study, because the DTE can answer the following questions: 'how many births are significantly vulnerable to smoking ?' and 'who should the interventions intensively target?'.\n\nI make use of the cigarette tax increase in MA in January of 1993, which increased the state excise tax from $0 26 to $0 51 per pack, as an instrument to identify marginal distributions of potential birth weight . . acknowledging the presence of endogeneity in smoking behavior. In November 1992, MA voters passed a ballot referendum to raise the tax on tobacco products, and in 1993 the Massachusetts Tobacco Control Program was established with a portion of the funds raised through this referendum. The Massachusetts Tobacco Control Program initiated activities to promote smoking cessation such as media campaigns, smoking cessation counselling, enforcement of local antismoking laws, and educational programs targeted primarily at teenagers and pregnant women.\n\nThe IV framework developed by Abadie, Angrist and Imbens (2002) is used to identify and estimate marginal distributions of potential infant birth weight for pregnant women who change their smoking status from smoking to nonsmoking in response to the tax increase. Henceforth, I call this group of people compliers. Based on the estimated marginal distributions, I establish sharp bounds on the smoking effects under the MTR assumption that smoking has adverse effects on infant birth weight.\n\n## 5.2 Related Literature\n\nThe related literature can be divided into three strands by their empirical strategy to overcome the endogenous selection problem. The first strand of the literature, including Almond et al. (2005), assumes that smoking behavior is exogenous conditional on observables such as mother's and father's characteristics, prenatal care information, and maternal medical risk factors. However, Caetano (2012) found strong evidence that smoking behavior is still endogenous after controlling for the most complete covariate specification in the literature. The second strand of the literature, including Permutt and Hebel (1989), Evans and Ringel (1999), Lien and Evans (2005), and Hoderlein and Sasaki (2011) takes an IV strategy. Permutt and Hebel (1989) made use of randomized counselling as an exogenous variation, while Evans and Ringel (1999), Hoderlein\n\n32", + "recall": 0.9755102040816327, + "true_md": "Orzechowski and Walker (2011)).\n\nIn the literature, there have been various attempts to clarify the causal effects of smoking on infant birth weight. Most previous empirical studies have evaluated the average effects of smoking or effects on the marginal distribution of potential infant birth weight focusing on the methods to overcome the endogeneity of smoking behavior.\n\nMy analysis pays particular attention to the distribution of smoking effects on infant birth weight. The DTE conveys the information on the targets of anti-smoking policy, which is particularly important for this study, because the DTE can answer the following questions: ”how many births are significantly vulnerable to smoking ?” and ”who should the interventions intensively target?”.\n\nI make use of the cigarette tax increase in MA in January of 1993, which increased the state excise tax from $0 . 26 to $0 . 51 per pack, as an instrument to identify marginal distributions of potential birth weight acknowledging the presence of endogeneity in smoking behavior. In November 1992, MA voters passed a ballot referendum to raise the tax on tobacco products, and in 1993 the Massachusetts Tobacco Control Program was established with a portion of the funds raised through this referendum. The Massachusetts To- bacco Control Program initiated activities to promote smoking cessation such as media campaigns, smoking cessation counselling, enforcement of local antismoking laws, and educational programs targeted primarily at teenagers and pregnant women.\n\nThe IV framework developed by Abadie, Angrist and Imbens (2002) is used to identify and estimate marginal distributions of potential infant birth weight for pregnant women who change their smoking status from smoking to nonsmoking in response to the tax increase. Henceforth, I call this group of people compliers. Based on the estimated marginal distributions, I establish sharp bounds on the smoking effects under the MTR assumption that smoking has adverse effects on infant birth weight.\n\nThe related literature can be divided into three strands by their empirical strategy to overcome the endogenous selection problem. The first strand of the literature, including Almond et al. (2005), assumes that smoking behavior is exogenous conditional on observables such as mother’s and father’s characteristics, prenatal care information, and maternal medical risk factors. However, Caetano (2012) found strong evidence that smoking behavior is still endogenous after controlling for the most complete covariate specification in the literature. The second strand of the literature, including Permutt and Hebel (1989), Evans and Ringel (1999), Lien and Evans (2005), and Hoderlein and Sasaki (2011) takes an IV strategy. Permutt and Hebel (1989) made use of randomized counselling as an exogenous variation, while Evans and Ringel (1999), Hoderlein\n\n32\n\n## 5.2 Related Literature" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.06955763117447405, + "doc_id": "40eb8313d2cca78f835abcd6b95005290d22bf787b095f547835ca814ef25502", + "edit_distance": 0.7992957746478874, + "f1_score": 0.8446601941747571, + "meteor": 0.1957869055641125, + "precision": 0.9157894736842105, + "pred_md": "12\n\nKABALAN GASPARD\n\nReplacing x by i = √ -1, we see that x k ( x l -2 k -1) depends on whether p ≡ 3 or 7 (8).\n\nLet p ≡ 3 (8). Then l ≡ 1 (4) and simple calculation yields\n\n p ≡ 7 (8) ⇒ ≡ l 3 (4), and the same type of calculation yields\n\n\n\n\n\ny 2 ∈ Z .\n\n\n\nNow,\n\nAnd so\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nA similar line of reasoning as for f ( x ) gives us that g ζ ( ) = + ζ g l ( ζ -1 ). Following the same steps as for f ( x ), we find that, writing g x ( ) as 1 √ p ∗ l ∑ k =0 a x k k , we get a l -k = + a l for all 0 ≤ k ≤ l (with a l = a 0 = 0 this time). We can therefore similarly rewrite g x ( ) as l -1 2 ∑ k =0 b k x k ( x l -2 k +1), b k ∈ Z (remembering that g x ( ) ∈ Z [ x ] by 3). A similar argument shows\n\n", + "recall": 0.7837837837837838, + "true_md": "12\n\nReplacing x by i = √ − 1, we see that x $^{k}$( x $^{l}$− 2 k − 1) depends on whether p ≡ 3 or 7 (8).\n\n$$g ( x ) = 1 $_{2}$√$_{p}$$_{∗}$ ( q$_{1}$ ( x ) − q − $_{1}$( x ))$$\n\n$$= 1 √$_{p}$$_{∗}$    ∏ $^{1}$≤ k

\n\nby ULLN of Newey and McFadden (1994) and similar arguments in proving Lemmas A.3, A.6 and A.7. /square\n\nProof of Theorem 3: Note that under the local alternatives H 1 n in (3.4), we have that uniformly in u ∈ Π:\n\n\n\nwhere the second equality follows by similar arguments in proving Theorem 1 and by ULLN. Since ε i ( θ 0 ) -n -1 2 / r q X , θ ( ( i 0 )) forms a zero mean and i.i.d. summand in this local alternative framework, we can apply the functional central limit theorem to R p n 1 ( u ), just as we applied it to R p n 0 ( u ) defined in (2.14), leading to R p n 1 ( u ) ⇒ R p ∞ . The last step then follows and we finish the proof of Theorem 3. /square\n\nProof of Theorem 4: As in Theorem 1, we have the following decomposition:\n\n\n\nBy Lemma A.2, it follows from a stochastic equicontinuity argument and the consistency of ˆ θ n to θ 0 that, uniformly in u ∈ Π,\n\n\n\n40", + "recall": 0.78125, + "true_md": "by ULLN of Newey and McFadden (1994) and similar arguments in proving Lemmas A.3, A.6 and A.7. □\n\nProof of Theorem 3: Note that under the local alternatives H$_{1}$$\\_{n}$ in (3.4), we have that uniformly in u ∈ Π:\n\n$$ˆ R p $_{n}$( u ) = 1 √$_{n}$ n ∑ i =1 ( ε$_{i}$ ( ˆ θ$_{n}$ ) − r ( q ( X$_{i}$, ˆ θ$_{n}$ )) √$_{n}$ ) P $_{n}$1 { q ( X$_{i}$, ˆ θ$_{n}$ ) ≤ u } + 1 n n ∑ i =1 r ( q ( X$_{i}$, ˆ θ$_{n}$ )) P $_{n}$1 { q ( X$_{i}$, ˆ θ$_{n}$ ) ≤ u } = 1 √$_{n}$ n ∑ i =1 ( ε$_{i}$ ( θ$_{0}$ ) − r ( q ( X$_{i}$, θ$_{0}$ )) √$_{n}$ ) P 1 { q ( X$_{i}$, θ$_{0}$ ) ≤ u } + E [ r ( q ( X, θ$_{0}$ )) P 1 { q ( X, θ$_{0}$ ) ≤ u } ] + o$_{p}$ (1) := R p n $_{1}$( u ) + Δ$_{r}$( u ) + o$_{p}$ (1) ⇒ R p ∞ + Δ$_{r}$ ,$$\n\nwhere the second equality follows by similar arguments in proving Theorem 1 and by ULLN. Since ε$_{i}$ ( θ$_{0}$ ) − n − 1 / $^{2}$r ( q ( X$_{i}$, θ$_{0}$ )) forms a zero mean and i.i.d. summand in this local alternative framework, we can apply the functional central limit theorem to R p n $_{1}$( u ), just as we applied it to R p n $_{0}$( u ) defined in (2.14), leading to R p n $_{1}$( u ) ⇒ R p $_{∞}$. The last step then follows and we finish the proof of Theorem 3. □\n\nProof of Theorem 4: As in Theorem 1, we have the following decomposition:\n\nBy Lemma A.2, it follows from a stochastic equicontinuity argument and the consistency of ˆ θ$_{n}$ to θ$_{0}$ that, uniformly in u ∈ Π,\n\n$$ˆ R p ∗ n ( u ) = 1 √$_{n}$ n ∑ i =1 ε$_{i}$ ( ˆ θ$_{n}$ ) ( 1 { q ( X$_{i}$, ˆ θ$_{n}$ ) ≤ u } − g $^{′}$( X$_{i}$, ˆ θ$_{n}$ )Δ − 1 n ( ˆ θ$_{n}$ ) G$_{n}$ ( u, ˆ θ$_{n}$ ) V$_{i}$ = 1 √$_{n}$ n ∑ i =1 ε$_{i}$ ( ˆ θ$_{n}$ )1 { q ( X$_{i}$, ˆ θ$_{n}$ ) ≤ u } V$_{i}$ − G ′ $_{n}$( u, ˆ θ$_{n}$ )Δ − 1 n ( ˆ θ$_{n}$ ) 1 √$_{n}$ n ∑ i =1 ε$_{i}$ ( ˆ θ$_{n}$ ) g ( X$_{i}$, ˆ θ$_{n}$ ) V$_{i}$ := ˆ R ∗ $_{n}$( u ) − G ′ $_{n}$( u, ˆ θ$_{n}$ )Δ − 1 n ( ˆ θ$_{n}$ ) ˆ S ∗ $_{n}$.$$\n\n$$ˆ R ∗ $_{n}$( u ) = 1 √$_{n}$ n ∑ i =1 ε$_{i}$ ( θ$_{0}$ )1 { q ( X$_{i}$, θ$_{0}$ ) ≤ u } V$_{i}$ + o$_{p}$ (1) ,$$\n\n40\n\n$$= sup u ∈ Π ∣ 1 √$_{n}$ ˆ R p $_{n}$( u ) − E [( p ( X ) − q ( X, θ$_{0}$ )) P 1 { q ( X, θ$_{0}$ ) ≤ u } ] ∣ = o$_{p}$ (1)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9682986068809267, + "doc_id": "8d076f80f94e953582218e5d46fa5925ebf9d482711840b60f01c9f2628184c8", + "edit_distance": 0.048672566371681415, + "f1_score": 0.9802371541501977, + "meteor": 0.9871568976895944, + "precision": 0.9841269841269841, + "pred_md": "## Abstract\n\nMarkov chain Monte Carlo (MCMC) sampling is an important and commonly used tool for the analysis of hierarchical models. Nevertheless, practitioners generally have two options for MCMC: utilize existing software that generates a black-box 'one size fits all' algorithm, or the challenging (and time consuming) task of implementing a problem-specific MCMC algorithm. Either choice may result in inefficient sampling, and hence researchers have become accustomed to MCMC runtimes on the order of days (or longer) for large models. We propose an automated procedure to determine an efficient MCMC algorithm for a given model and computing platform. Our procedure dynamically determines blocks of parameters for joint sampling that result in efficient sampling of the entire model. We test this procedure using a diverse suite of example models, and observe non-trivial improvements in MCMC efficiency for many models. Our procedure is the first attempt at such, and may be generalized to a broader space of MCMC algorithms. Our results suggest that substantive improvements in MCMC efficiency may be practically realized using our automated blocking procedure, or variants thereof, which warrants additional study and application.\n\n## Keywords:\n\nMCMC, Metropolis-Hastings, Block sampling, Integrated autocorrelation time, Mixing.", + "recall": 0.9763779527559056, + "true_md": "## Abstract\n\nMarkov chain Monte Carlo (MCMC) sampling is an important and commonly used tool for the analysis of hierarchical models. Nevertheless, practitioners generally have two options for MCMC: utilize existing software that generates a black-box “one size fits all” algorithm, or the challenging (and time consuming) task of implementing a problem-specific MCMC algorithm. Either choice may result in inefficient sampling, and hence researchers have become accustomed to MCMC runtimes on the order of days (or longer) for large models. We propose an automated procedure to determine an efficient MCMC algorithm for a given model and computing platform. Our procedure dynamically determines blocks of parameters for joint sampling that result in efficient sampling of the entire model. We test this procedure using a diverse suite of example models, and observe non-trivial improvements in MCMC efficiency for many models. Our procedure is the first attempt at such, and may be generalized to a broader space of MCMC algorithms. Our results suggest that substantive improvements in MCMC efficiency may be practically realized using our automated blocking procedure, or variants thereof, which warrants additional study and application.\n\nMCMC, Metropolis-Hastings, Block sampling, Integrated autocorrelation time, Mixing.\n\n## Keywords:" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9525718385987579, + "doc_id": "a0332f01431f9baa416acf18ca923c9b25469c9fa4834ab239479567da6ce66c", + "edit_distance": 0.030660377358490566, + "f1_score": 0.9592326139088729, + "meteor": 0.9706573459889796, + "precision": 0.975609756097561, + "pred_md": "static algorithms, reinforcing our notion that overall MCMC efficiency is highly dependent upon hierarchical model structure, and attempting to infer what might be an efficient MCMC algorithm for a particular problem is, in general, difficult.\n\n## 5 Discussion\n\nWe have presented a general automated procedure for determining an 'efficient' MCMC algorithm for hierarchical models. Our procedure is a greedy, iterative algorithm, which traverses a finite and well-defined set of MCMC algorithms. This is the first such automated MCMC-generating procedure of its kind, so far as we are aware. Using a suite of example models, we have observed that our automated procedure generates improvements in efficiency (relative to static MCMC algorithms) ranging between one and three orders of magnitude. In each case, the automated procedure produced an MCMC algorithm at least as efficient as any model-specific MCMC algorithm making use of prior knowledge or expert opinion. In all examples, our iterative procedure terminated within four iterations, although it is plausible that for more complex models it would proceed longer.\n\nOur study has been confined to a single dimension of a much broader problem. We have strictly considered combinations of scalar and blocked adaptive Metropolis-Hastings sampling, with a small number of exceptions only for the purpose of comparison ( e.g. , the use of conjugate sampling). No less, we have restricted ourselves to non-overlapping sampling: each model parameter may only be sampled by a single MCMC sampler function. We may instead view the domain of our problem (automated determination of an efficient MCMC algorithm) as a broader space of MCMC algorithms. This space may permit a wide range of sampling algorithms not considered herein: auxiliary variable algorithms such as slice sampling (Neal, 2003), or derivative-based sampling algorithms such as Hamiltonian Monte Carlo (Duane et al., 1987), among many possibilities. The resulting combinatorial explosion in the space of MCMC algorithms makes any process of trial-and-error, or an attempt at comprehensive exploration, futile. It is for this reason we seek to develop an automated procedure for determining an efficient MCMC algorithm, which may not be globally, maximally efficient, but provides non-trivial improvements in efficiency, nonetheless.\n\nIt should be noted that aspects of the problem addressed herein superficially resemble, but\n\n28", + "recall": 0.9433962264150944, + "true_md": "static algorithms, reinforcing our notion that overall MCMC efficiency is highly dependent upon hierarchical model structure, and attempting to infer what might be an efficient MCMC algorithm for a particular problem is, in general, difficult.\n\n## 5 Discussion\n\nWe have presented a general automated procedure for determining an “efficient” MCMC algorithm for hierarchical models. Our procedure is a greedy, iterative algorithm, which traverses a finite and well-defined set of MCMC algorithms. This is the first such automated MCMC-generating proce- dure of its kind, so far as we are aware. Using a suite of example models, we have observed that our automated procedure generates improvements in efficiency (relative to static MCMC algorithms) ranging between one and three orders of magnitude. In each case, the automated procedure pro- duced an MCMC algorithm at least as efficient as any model-specific MCMC algorithm making use of prior knowledge or expert opinion. In all examples, our iterative procedure terminated within four iterations, although it is plausible that for more complex models it would proceed longer.\n\nOur study has been confined to a single dimension of a much broader problem. We have strictly considered combinations of scalar and blocked adaptive Metropolis-Hastings sampling, with a small number of exceptions only for the purpose of comparison ( e.g. , the use of conjugate sampling). No less, we have restricted ourselves to non-overlapping sampling: each model parameter may only be sampled by a single MCMC sampler function. We may instead view the domain of our problem (au- tomated determination of an efficient MCMC algorithm) as a broader space of MCMC algorithms. This space may permit a wide range of sampling algorithms not considered herein: auxiliary vari- able algorithms such as slice sampling (Neal, 2003), or derivative-based sampling algorithms such as Hamiltonian Monte Carlo (Duane et al., 1987), among many possibilities. The resulting com- binatorial explosion in the space of MCMC algorithms makes any process of trial-and-error, or an attempt at comprehensive exploration, futile. It is for this reason we seek to develop an automated procedure for determining an efficient MCMC algorithm, which may not be globally, maximally efficient, but provides non-trivial improvements in efficiency, nonetheless.\n\nIt should be noted that aspects of the problem addressed herein superficially resemble, but\n\n28" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.40277185566106877, + "doc_id": "860c685db99dc4052146010a7741d1ff9b2dba58dfc0f2e9ea725d446ca913f7", + "edit_distance": 0.4770755885997522, + "f1_score": 0.9127906976744187, + "meteor": 0.5405398762938676, + "precision": 0.9235294117647059, + "pred_md": "θ , i i ∈ Z , then the linearization system for the equation around the equilibrium is\n\n\n\nIndeed, if u 1 ( ) t , u 1 (0) = e , u 1 2 ( ) t , u 2 (0) = e , 2 are solutions of (3.28) , then one can see that x t ( ) -(0 , 0) = x u 0 1 1 ( ) + t x u 0 2 2 ( ) t , for all t ∈ R .\n\nWe have obtained that linearization exists for both grazing solutions Ψ( ) t , and the equilibrium at the origin. Moreover, conditions ( C 1) -( C 10) are valid and all other solutions are B-differentiable in parameters [1]. Thus, the system (3.14) defines a K -smooth discontinuous flow in the plane.\n\nIn the next example, we will finalize the linearization around the grazing solution Ψ( ) t .\n\nExample 3.2 (Linearization around the grazing discontinuous cycle). We continue analysis of the last example, and complete the variational system for Ψ( ) t .\n\nLet us consider this time, the linearization at the non-grazing moment ω = π. The discontinuity point is c = (0 , -exp(0 0005 . π )) and it is of ( α ) -type, since\n\n\n\n/negationslash\n\nBy using formula (3.10), one can compute the gradient as ∇ τ ( c ) = (exp( -0 0005 . π , ) 0) .\n\nThen, utilizing ∇ τ ( c ) and formula (3.11), one can determine that the matrix of linearization at the moment π is\n\n\n\nFrom the monotonicity of the jump function, -R y , 1 2 2 it follows that the the yellow and blue subregions of G are invariant. Consequently, for each solution near to Ψ( ) t , the sequences B i is of two types B i = D ( j ) i , i ∈ Z and j = 1 2 , , where D (1) 2 i -1 = O , D 2 (2) 2 i -1 = D (2) 1 =    -1 0 0 001 . -1 8 exp(0 00025 . . π ) 0    ,\n\nD (1) 2 i = D (2) 2 i =    exp( -0 0005 . π ) 0 0 001 . 0    , i ∈ Z . That is, the condition ( A 4) is valid and the linearization around the periodic solution (3.15) on R is of two subsystems:\n\n19", + "recall": 0.9022988505747126, + "true_md": "θ$_{i}$, i ∈ $^{Z}$, then the linearization system for the equation around the equilibrium is\n\nIndeed, if u$_{1}$ ( t ) , u$_{1}$ (0) = e$_{1}$, u$_{2}$ ( t ) , u$_{2}$ (0) = e$_{2}$, are solutions of (3.28) , then one can see that x ( t ) − (0 , 0) = x 0 $_{1}$u$_{1}$ ( t ) + x 0 $_{2}$u$_{2}$ ( t ) , for all t ∈ $^{R}$.\n\nWe have obtained that linearization exists for both grazing solutions Ψ( t ) , and the equilibrium at the origin. Moreover, conditions ( C 1) − ( C 10) are valid and all other solutions are B-differentiable in parameters [1]. Thus, the system (3.14) defines a K − smooth discontinuous flow in the plane.\n\nIn the next example, we will finalize the linearization around the grazing solution Ψ( t ) .\n\nExample 3.2 (Linearization around the grazing discontinuous cycle). We continue analysis of the last example, and complete the variational system for Ψ( t ) .\n\nLet us consider this time, the linearization at the non-grazing moment ω = π. The discontinuity point is c = (0 , − exp(0 . 0005 π )) and it is of ( α ) − type, since\n\nBy using formula (3.10), one can compute the gradient as ∇ τ ( c ) = (exp( − 0 . 0005 π ) , 0) .\n\nThen, utilizing ∇ τ ( c ) and formula (3.11), one can determine that the matrix of linearization at the moment π is\n\nFrom the monotonicity of the jump function, − R$_{1}$y 2 $_{2}$, it follows that the the yellow and blue subregions of G are invariant. Consequently, for each solution near to Ψ( t ) , the sequences B$_{i}$ is of two types B$_{i}$ = D ( j ) i , i ∈ Z and j = 1 , 2 , where D (1) 2 $^{i}$− 1 = O$_{2}$, D (2) 2 $^{i}$− 1 = D (2) 1 =    − 1 0 0 . 001 − 1 . 8 exp(0 . 00025 π ) $_{0}$   , D (1) 2 i = D (2) 2 i =    exp( − 0 . 0005 π ) 0 0 . 001 $_{0}$   , i ∈ $^{Z}$. That is, the condition ( A 4) is valid and the linearization around the periodic solution (3.15) on R is of two subsystems:\n\n$$$_{u}$′ 1 = u$_{2}$, $_{u}$′ 2 = − u$_{1}$ + 0 . 001 u$_{2}$, Δ u$_{2}$ | t = θ$_{i}$ = − (1 + R$_{2}$ ) u$_{2}$. (3.28)$$\n\n$$〈∇ Φ( c ) , f ( c ) 〉 = 〈 (1 , 0)( − exp(0 . 0005 π ) , − 0 . 001 exp(0 . 0005 π )) 〉 = − exp(0 . 0005 π ) ̸ = 0 .$$\n\n$$B$_{2}$ =    exp( − 0 . 0005 π ) 0 0 . 001 $_{0}$   .$$\n\n19" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7432416627493368, + "doc_id": "254ac99093bdaf15010ea092b14693dd81c6bd27d7321e23380e6b48994d75e4", + "edit_distance": 0.17954545454545454, + "f1_score": 0.9267139479905437, + "meteor": 0.8472122477524511, + "precision": 0.9514563106796117, + "pred_md": "ure 7). Most conspicuous were homotopic connections between left and right central sulcus, primary somatosensory area, striate, and superior extra-striate cortex. Similarly, the connections that were most frequently weaker than expected were dominated by those involving visual and somatomotor networks (see Figure 7C-D for more detail of the connections between visual and motor networks).\n\nPortions of the visual (VIS) and somatomotor (SMN) networks are situated near the midline dividing the left and right cerebral hemispheres. One possibility is that these connections appear disproportionately often due to the short Euclidean distance between the brain regions that make up those networks (i.e. a bias towards shorter functional connections). While it is difficult to completely discount this possibility (and some of the most consistently strong/weak connections are short-range), many are long-range, especially those involving their homotopic partners (see Figure 8E), suggesting that whether or not a connection participates in an excursion is not a mere consequence of its length. To verify that distance is not the principal driver of excursion counts, we calculated the Spearman rank-correlation of x -ij , x + ij , and x -ij + x + ij with Euclidean distance and found, r -= 0 14, . r + = 0 035, and . r -, + = -0 092. . Each of these correlations were significant at p < 0 005, due mainly to the fact that the correlations . included many observations (113 × 112 2 points); the actual magnitudes of the / correlations were small in all cases.\n\nWe also wished to determine what was the influence, if any, of motion on this result. To this end, we divided our population of N = 80 participants into two groups based on the magnitude with which their excursion count time series was correlated with framewise displacement. The cutoff correlation for the 'low motion correlation' group was | r motion,excursioncount | < 0 15. . This resulted in a division of our participant pool into 38 low- and 42 high-motion correlation\n\n19", + "recall": 0.9032258064516129, + "true_md": "ure 7). Most conspicuous were homotopic connections between left and right central sulcus, primary somatosensory area, striate, and superior extra-striate cortex. Similarly, the connections that were most frequently weaker than ex- pected were dominated by those involving visual and somatomotor networks (see Figure 7C-D for more detail of the connections between visual and motor networks).\n\nPortions of the visual (VIS) and somatomotor (SMN) networks are situated near the midline dividing the left and right cerebral hemispheres. One possibil- ity is that these connections appear disproportionately often due to the short Euclidean distance between the brain regions that make up those networks (i.e. a bias towards shorter functional connections). While it is difficult to completely discount this possibility (and some of the most consistently strong/weak con- nections are short-range), many are long-range, especially those involving their homotopic partners (see Figure 8E), suggesting that whether or not a connec- tion participates in an excursion is not a mere consequence of its length. To verify that distance is not the principal driver of excursion counts, we calculated the Spearman rank-correlation of x − $_{ij}$, x + $_{ij}$, and x − $_{ij}$+ x + ij with Euclidean distance and found, r$_{−}$ = 0 . 14, r$_{+}$ = 0 . 035, and r$_{−}$$\\_{,}$$_{+}$ = − 0 . 092. Each of these correla- tions were significant at p < 0 . 005, due mainly to the fact that the correlations included many observations (113 × 112 / 2 points); the actual magnitudes of the correlations were small in all cases.\n\nWe also wished to determine what was the influence, if any, of motion on this result. To this end, we divided our population of N = 80 participants into two groups based on the magnitude with which their excursion count time series was correlated with framewise displacement. The cutoff correlation for the “low motion correlation” group was | r$_{motion,excursioncount}$ | < 0 . 15. This resulted in a division of our participant pool into 38 low- and 42 high-motion correlation\n\n19" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.716334330743544, + "doc_id": "7288e7aa2725c065737b5299365687b0ed10e51174d787a0d56728e19fdf3d3d", + "edit_distance": 0.23986486486486486, + "f1_score": 0.9894736842105263, + "meteor": 0.832048534232009, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Figure 2: We use (b) and (c) to find a G -sourcing set for the relation of (a).\n\nFigure 2: We use (b) and (c) to find a G -sourcing set for the relation of (a).\n\nrelation on X 2 = { 1 2 3 4 5 , , , , } determined by (b) in Figure 2 then ρ 2 is a preorder on X 2 and there is a compression map θ : X 2 → X 1 given by θ (1) = 1 , θ (2) = 2 , θ (3) = 2 , θ (4) = 3 , and θ (5) = 4 . By equating paired elements we may relate ( X , ρ 2 2 ) to a partial order. This gives ρ 3 , the minimally-connected partial order on X 3 = { 1 2 3 4 , , , } determined by (c) in Figure 2. By Theorem 3.8 a G -grading set for ρ 3 is σ 3 = { (1 , 2) , (3 , 4) } . Following the proof of Theorem 5.1 a G -grading set for ρ 2 is σ 2 = β ∪ γ with β = { (1 , 2) , (3 , 4) } and γ = { (4 , 5) } . The proof of Theorem 4.3 shows a G -grading set of ρ 1 is σ 1 = { (1 , 2) , (2 , 3) , (3 , 4) } . Thus for any associative ring with unity R and any group G the G -gradings of S = I ( X,ρ,R ) are uniquely determined by functions from σ 1 to G .\n\nSuppose σ is the Hasse diagram for a partial order ( X, ≤ ) and F is a field. The incidence algebra A = I ( X, ≤ , F ) is said to have the free-extension property (see [4, Definition 2]) if there exists γ ⊆ σ such that for any group G and any function φ : γ → G , there is a unique grading of I ( X, ≤ , F ) such that e xy ∈ A φ x,y ( ) for all x, y ∈ X such that ( x, y ) ∈ γ .\n\nTheorem 3.4 shows a good group grading of a generalized incidence ring induced by a homomorphism must be a finite grading. This kind of result was already known for incidence algebras over partial orders (see [5, Theorem 3.3]). The free-extension property may fail for partial orders on an infinite set even if it contains a cross-cut\n\n18", + "recall": 0.9791666666666666, + "true_md": "Figure 2: We use (b) and (c) to find a G -sourcing set for the relation of (a).\n\nrelation on X$_{2}$ = { 1 , 2 , 3 , 4 , 5 } determined by (b) in Figure 2 then ρ$_{2}$ is a preorder on X$_{2}$ and there is a compression map θ : X$_{2}$ → X$_{1}$ given by θ (1) = 1 , θ (2) = 2 , θ (3) = 2 , θ (4) = 3 , and θ (5) = 4 . By equating paired elements we may relate ( X$_{2}$, ρ$_{2}$ ) to a partial order. This gives ρ$_{3}$ , the minimally-connected partial order on X$_{3}$ = { 1 , 2 , 3 , 4 } determined by (c) in Figure 2. By Theorem 3.8 a G -grading set for ρ$_{3}$ is σ$_{3}$ = { (1 , 2) , (3 , 4) } . Following the proof of Theorem 5.1 a G -grading set for ρ$_{2}$ is σ$_{2}$ = β ∪ γ with β = { (1 , 2) , (3 , 4) } and γ = { (4 , 5) } . The proof of Theorem 4.3 shows a G -grading set of ρ$_{1}$ is σ$_{1}$ = { (1 , 2) , (2 , 3) , (3 , 4) } . Thus for any associative ring with unity R and any group G the G -gradings of S = I ( X, ρ, R ) are uniquely determined by functions from σ$_{1}$ to G .\n\nSuppose σ is the Hasse diagram for a partial order ( X, ≤ ) and F is a field. The incidence algebra A = I ( X, ≤ , F ) is said to have the free-extension property (see [4, Definition 2]) if there exists γ ⊆ σ such that for any group G and any function φ : γ → G , there is a unique grading of I ( X, ≤ , F ) such that e$_{xy}$ ∈ A$_{φ}$$\\_{(}$$_{x,y}$$\\_{)}$ for all x, y ∈ X such that ( x, y ) ∈ γ .\n\nTheorem 3.4 shows a good group grading of a generalized incidence ring induced by a homomorphism must be a finite grading. This kind of result was already known for incidence algebras over partial orders (see [5, Theorem 3.3]). The free-extension property may fail for partial orders on an infinite set even if it contains a cross-cut\n\n18" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9730517356481699, + "doc_id": "cf259c5e578c99fb92576b34f79d8af3b5ae653148b998641b0699750494c21b", + "edit_distance": 0.01348314606741573, + "f1_score": 0.9822222222222223, + "meteor": 0.9869597025561871, + "precision": 0.9866071428571429, + "pred_md": "## 1 Introduction\n\nMarkov chain Monte Carlo (MCMC) has become a core computational method for many statistical analyses. These include routine Bayesian analyses, but also hybrid algorithms that use MCMC as one component, such as Monte Carlo Expectation Maximization (MCEM; Caffo, Jank, and Jones, 2005) or data cloning (Lele, Dennis, and Lutscher, 2007). Nevertheless, the automated generation of black-box MCMC algorithms, as occurs in generally available software, does not necessarily result in efficient MCMC sampling. Analysts are thereby accustomed to MCMC run times measured in minutes, hours or even days for large hierarchical models. Computation time is frequently the limiting factor, either limiting the range of models considered, or limiting the potential for performing diagnostics and comparisons using methods such as bootstrapping (Efron and Tibshirani, 1994), cross validation (Gneiting and Raftery, 2007), or calibration of posterior predictive p-values (Hjort, Dahl, and Steinbakk, 2006), among others. Therefore, any widely applicable improvements to MCMC performance may greatly improve the practical analyses of large hierarchical models.\n\nAmong the many MCMC sampling algorithms developed to improve MCMC efficiency, one of the most basic approaches has been block sampling: jointly updating multiple dimensions of a target distribution simultaneously (Roberts and Sahu, 1997; Sargent, Hodges, and Carlin, 2000). When one or more dimensions of the posterior distribution are correlated, joint sampling of these dimensions (with any variety of block samplers) can increase sampling performance relative to updating each dimension independently ( e.g., Liu, Wong, and Kong, 1994). Despite wide recognition of the usefulness of this basic idea for designing efficient MCMC algorithms, there has been no automated method for choosing blocks to optimize - or at least greatly improve - performance. Here we develop such a method.\n\nExisting theoretical work comparing block samplers to univariate samplers (Mengersen and Tweedie, 1996; Roberts and Tweedie, 1996; Roberts, Gelman, and Gilks, 1997, among others) has provided many insights but falls short of providing a complete assessment of MCMC efficiency for several reasons. First, it uses MCMC convergence rates as the metric for comparison, without consideration of the computational demands of block sampling. Instead, our viewpoint is that any measure of MCMC efficiency must incorporate both the convergence rate and the computational\n\n3", + "recall": 0.9778761061946902, + "true_md": "## 1 Introduction\n\nMarkov chain Monte Carlo (MCMC) has become a core computational method for many statistical analyses. These include routine Bayesian analyses, but also hybrid algorithms that use MCMC as one component, such as Monte Carlo Expectation Maximization (MCEM; Caffo, Jank, and Jones, 2005) or data cloning (Lele, Dennis, and Lutscher, 2007). Nevertheless, the automated generation of black-box MCMC algorithms, as occurs in generally available software, does not necessarily re- sult in efficient MCMC sampling. Analysts are thereby accustomed to MCMC run times measured in minutes, hours or even days for large hierarchical models. Computation time is frequently the limiting factor, either limiting the range of models considered, or limiting the potential for per- forming diagnostics and comparisons using methods such as bootstrapping (Efron and Tibshirani, 1994), cross validation (Gneiting and Raftery, 2007), or calibration of posterior predictive p-values (Hjort, Dahl, and Steinbakk, 2006), among others. Therefore, any widely applicable improvements to MCMC performance may greatly improve the practical analyses of large hierarchical models.\n\nAmong the many MCMC sampling algorithms developed to improve MCMC efficiency, one of the most basic approaches has been block sampling: jointly updating multiple dimensions of a target distribution simultaneously (Roberts and Sahu, 1997; Sargent, Hodges, and Carlin, 2000). When one or more dimensions of the posterior distribution are correlated, joint sampling of these dimensions (with any variety of block samplers) can increase sampling performance relative to updating each dimension independently ( e.g., Liu, Wong, and Kong, 1994). Despite wide recognition of the usefulness of this basic idea for designing efficient MCMC algorithms, there has been no automated method for choosing blocks to optimize – or at least greatly improve – performance. Here we develop such a method.\n\nExisting theoretical work comparing block samplers to univariate samplers (Mengersen and Tweedie, 1996; Roberts and Tweedie, 1996; Roberts, Gelman, and Gilks, 1997, among others) has provided many insights but falls short of providing a complete assessment of MCMC efficiency for several reasons. First, it uses MCMC convergence rates as the metric for comparison, without consideration of the computational demands of block sampling. Instead, our viewpoint is that any measure of MCMC efficiency must incorporate both the convergence rate and the computational\n\n3" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.23065163853590107, + "doc_id": "cda491834a37f218a56218f3b3aa93db937eddd7b3f5f38f927a53fdcdd826e2", + "edit_distance": 0.6779964221824687, + "f1_score": 0.8661971830985915, + "meteor": 0.3628415232146602, + "precision": 0.9318181818181818, + "pred_md": "Villani, C. (2003). 'Topics in Optimal Transportation,' Graduate Studies in Mathematics 58, American Mathematical Society.\n\nWilliamson, R. C. and T. Downs. (1990). 'Probabilistic Arithmetic I: Numerical Methods for Calculating Convolutions and Dependency Bounds,' International Journal of Approximate Reasoning , 4, 89-158.\n\n## Appendix A\n\nIn Appendix A. I provide technical proofs for Theorem 1, Corollary 1 and Corollary 2. Throughout Appendix A, the function ϕ is assumed to be bounded and continuous without loss of generality by Lemma 2.\n\n## Proof of Theorem 1\n\nSince the proofs of characterization of F U ∆ and F L ∆ are very similar, I provide a proof for characterization of F L ∆ only. Let\n\n\n\nfor λ = ∞ . To prove Theorem 1, I introduce Lemma A.1:\n\nLemma A.1 For any function f : R → R , s ∈ [0 , 1] , and nonnegative integer k, define A + k and A -k to be level sets of a function f as follows:\n\n\n\nThen for the following dual problems\n\n\n\neach ( ϕ, ψ ) ∈ Φ can be represented as a continuous convex combination of a continuum of pairs of the form c\n\n\n\n54", + "recall": 0.8092105263157895, + "true_md": "Villani, C. (2003). “Topics in Optimal Transportation,” Graduate Studies in Mathematics 58, American Mathematical Society.\n\nWilliamson, R. C. and T. Downs. (1990). “Probabilistic Arithmetic I: Numerical Methods for Calculating Convolutions and Dependency Bounds,” International Journal of Approximate Reasoning , 4, 89–158.\n\nIn Appendix A. I provide technical proofs for Theorem 1, Corollary 1 and Corollary 2. Throughout Appendix A, the function ϕ is assumed to be bounded and continuous without loss of generality by Lemma 2.\n\nSince the proofs of characterization of F U Δ and F L Δ are very similar, I provide a proof for characterization of F L Δ only. Let\n\nfor λ = ∞ . To prove Theorem 1, I introduce Lemma A.1:\n\nLemma A.1 For any function f :$_{R}$ →$_{R}$ , s ∈ [0 , 1] , and nonnegative integer k, define A + k and A − k to be level sets of a function f as follows:\n\nThen for the following dual problems\n\neach ( ϕ, ψ ) ∈ Φ$_{c}$ can be represented as a continuous convex combination of a continuum of pairs of the form\n\n54\n\n$$( ∞ ∑ k =0 1$_{A}$ + $_{k}$( ϕ,s ) − ∞ ∑ k =0 1$_{A}$ − k ( ϕ,s $_{)}$, ∞ ∑ k =0 1$_{A}$ + $_{k}$( ψ,s ) − ∞ ∑ k =0 1$_{A}$ − k ( ψ,s ) ) ∈ Φ$_{c}$$$\n\n$$inf π ∈ Π( µ$_{0}$,µ$_{1}$ ) I [ π ] = sup ( ϕ,ψ ) ∈ Φ$_{c}$ J ( ϕ, ψ ) ,$$\n\n$$A + k ( f, s ) = { y ∈$_{R}$ ; f ( y ) > s + k } , A − k ( f, s ) = { y ∈$_{R}$ ; f ( y ) ≤ − ( s + k ) } .$$\n\n$$I [ π ] = ∫ { 1 { y$_{1}$ − y$_{0}$ < δ } + λ (1 − 1$_{C}$ ( y$_{0}$, y$_{1}$ )) } dπ, J ( ϕ, ψ ) = ∫ ϕdµ$_{0}$ +$^{∫}$ ψdµ$_{1}$,$$\n\n## Proof of Theorem 1\n\n## Appendix A" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4145808277014357, + "doc_id": "56d56a02433789b75398b4843a0967f2095a47eed615e7e9816ba8520b4d50c3", + "edit_distance": 0.45264452644526443, + "f1_score": 0.8789473684210527, + "meteor": 0.5651848818333863, + "precision": 0.9382022471910112, + "pred_md": "ON THE APPLICATIONS OF CYCLOTOMIC FIELDS IN INTRODUCTORY NUMBER THEORY\n\n5\n\n\n\n## 2. Application to a Special Case of Fermat's Last Theorem\n\nFermat's well-known final theorem, proved by Andrew Wiles and Richard Taylor in 1994, states that\n\n\n\nwhere x, y, z, n ∈ Z has no non-trivial solutions ( x, y, z ) for n ≥ 3.\n\nIn fact, to prove this theorem, it suffices to prove that x p + y p = z p has no integral solutions for any positive odd prime p , since x n 0 + y n 0 = z n 0 ⇒ x p 1 + y p 1 = z p 1 where p is an odd prime dividing n (exists since n ≥ 3) and ( x , y 1 1 , z 1 ) = ( x n/p 0 , y n/p 0 , z n/p 0 ). In other words, we can restrict our study to the case where n is an odd prime.\n\nThere is a very elegant proof of a special case of this theorem using cyclotomy. The main use of the concept here is that it allows us to transform a 'sum of n -th powers' problem into a 'divisibility' problem since we can now factor x p + y p as p -1 ∏ i =0 ( x + ζ i p y ).\n\nIn this section, we shall lay out said proof. Let K = Q ( ζ ) where ζ = ζ p . We will suppose that for some ( x 0 , y , z 0 0 ) is a solution to x p + y p = z p for some odd prime p . Then\n\n\n\nWLOG, we can take x 0 , y 0 and z 0 to be pairwise relatively prime, for if some d ∈ Z divides two of them, it must divide the 3 rd , and then x p 0 + y p 0 = z p 0 ⇔ x p 1 + y p 1 = z p 1 where x , y 0 0 , z 0 = dx , dy , dz 1 1 1 respectively, with x , y 1 1 , z 1 ∈ Z .\n\nWe shall now reduce the problem to a special case and suppose that p does not divide the class number h of O K , and that p /notbar x y z 0 0 0 . From (2.1), we shall reach a contradiction.\n\nThis case has been treated in Number Theory textbooks such as [1]. However, using the", + "recall": 0.8267326732673267, + "true_md": "(1.4) then becomes ( b$_{k}$$\\_{0}$$_{+}$$\\_{t}$ + 2 $^{p}$− 1 2 ∑ k =1 b$\\_{k}$ ) x ≡ − ( (2 − $^{1}$t mod p ) b$\\_{k}$$_{0}$ + $^{p}$− 2 2 ∑ k =1 tb$_{k}$ ) ( p ). It is clear that c ≡ − 2 − $^{1}$t ( p ) is the solution to this congruence. By its uniqueness, we see that u is primary ⇔ t ≡ 0 ( p ) ⇔ u = ζ $^{t}$u is real. □\n\n## 2. Application to a Special Case of Fermat’s Last Theorem\n\nFermat’s well-known final theorem, proved by Andrew Wiles and Richard Taylor in 1994, states that\n\n$$x n + y n = z n$$\n\nwhere x, y, z, n ∈ Z has no non-trivial solutions ( x, y, z ) for n ≥ 3.\n\nIn fact, to prove this theorem, it suffices to prove that x $^{p}$+ y p = z p has no integral solutions for any positive odd prime p , since x n 0 + y n 0 = z n 0 ⇒ x p 1 + y p 1 = z p 1 where p is an odd prime dividing n (exists since n ≥ 3) and ( x$_{1}$, y$_{1}$, z$_{1}$ ) = ( x n/p 0 , y n/p 0 , z n/p 0 ). In other words, we can restrict our study to the case where n is an odd prime.\n\nThere is a very elegant proof of a special case of this theorem using cyclotomy. The main use of the concept here is that it allows us to transform a ”sum of n -th powers” problem into a ”divisibility” problem since we can now factor x p + y p as $^{p}$− 1 ∏ i =0 ( x + ζ i $_{p}$y ).\n\nIn this section, we shall lay out said proof. Let K = Q ( ζ ) where ζ = ζ$_{p}$ . We will suppose that for some ( x$_{0}$$\\_{,}$y$\\_{0}$, z$\\_{0}$ ) is a solution to x p + y p = z p for some odd prime p . Then\n\n$$(2.1) x p 0 + y p 0 = z p 0$$\n\nWLOG, we can take x$_{0}$ , y$_{0}$ and z$_{0}$ to be pairwise relatively prime, for if some d ∈ Z divides two of them, it must divide the 3 $^{rd}$, and then x p 0 + y p 0 = z p 0 ⇔ x p 1 + y p 1 = z p 1 where x$_{0}$, y$_{0}$, z$_{0}$ = dx$_{1}$, dy$_{1}$, dz$_{1}$ respectively, with x$_{1}$, y$_{1}$, z$_{1}$ ∈ Z .\n\nWe shall now reduce the problem to a special case and suppose that p does not divide the class number h of O$_{K}$ , and that p ∤ x$_{0}$y$_{0}$z$_{0}$ . From (2.1), we shall reach a contradiction.\n\nThis case has been treated in Number Theory textbooks such as [1]. However, using the\n\nON THE APPLICATIONS OF CYCLOTOMIC FIELDS IN INTRODUCTORY NUMBER THEORY 5" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5833765075397728, + "doc_id": "47747afceb4b0cf5f0dcdae2429bd68d9c77094407b8954c9b8199de8855f26b", + "edit_distance": 0.3424, + "f1_score": 0.9575070821529744, + "meteor": 0.6970762613552078, + "precision": 0.9548022598870056, + "pred_md": "It is worth noting that my new bounds on the quantile of the effects of smoking are much tighter for SCCG women, compared to the entire sample and other subsamples. For q ≤ 0 5, the refinement rate ranges . from 51% to 64% compared to Makarov bounds. For SCCG women, my new sharp bounds on the median are [0 , 299] grams, while Makarov bounds on the median are [0 764] grams. , The higher identification gains result from relatively heavier potential nonsmokers' infant birth weight, which leads to the shorter distance between two potential outcomes distributions as reported in Table 5. Note that the shorter distance between marginal distributions of potential outcomes improves both my new lower bound and the Makarov lower bound. 22\n\nTable 7: QTE and bounds on the quantiles of smoking effects\n\nAlthough QTE is placed within the identification region for q = 0 15 to 0 85 and for all . . groups, at q = 0 15, QTE is very close to the upper bound on the quantile of smoking effects for SCCG and age 26-35 . subgroups. Furthermore, at q = 0 10, QTE is placed outside of the improved identification region for SCCG . group and age 26-35. This implies that QTE is not identical to the quantile of treatment effects in my example and so one should not interpret the value of QTE as a quantile of smoking effects.\n\n22 To develop intuition, recall Figure 7(c). The size of the lower bound on each triangle's probability is related to the distance between marginal distribution functions of Y 0 and Y 1 . To see this, consider two marginal distribution functions F A 1 and F B 1 of Y 1 with F A 1 ( y ) ≤ F B 1 ( y ) for all y ∈ R and fix the marginal distribution F 0 of Y 0 where ( Y , Y 0 1 ) satisfies MTR. Since MTR implies stochastic dominance of Y 1 over Y 0 for each y ∈ R , F A 1 ( y ) < F B 1 ( y ) ≤ F 0 ( y ) . Thus,\n\n\n\nSince the probability lower bound on the triangle is written as max { F 1 ( y ) -F 0 ( y -δ ) } for some y ∈ R , the above inequality shows that the closer marginal distributions F 0 and F 1 generates higher probability lower bound on each triangle.\n\n44", + "recall": 0.9602272727272727, + "true_md": "It is worth noting that my new bounds on the quantile of the effects of smoking are much tighter for SCCG women, compared to the entire sample and other subsamples. For q ≤ 0 . 5, the refinement rate ranges from 51% to 64% compared to Makarov bounds. For SCCG women, my new sharp bounds on the median are [0 , 299] grams, while Makarov bounds on the median are [0 , 764] grams. The higher identification gains result from relatively heavier potential nonsmokers’ infant birth weight, which leads to the shorter distance between two potential outcomes distributions as reported in Table 5. Note that the shorter distance between marginal distributions of potential outcomes improves both my new lower bound and the Makarov lower bound. 22\n\nAlthough QTE is placed within the identification region for q = 0 . 15 to 0 . 85 and for all groups, at q = 0 . 15, QTE is very close to the upper bound on the quantile of smoking effects for SCCG and age 26-35 subgroups. Furthermore, at q = 0 . 10, QTE is placed outside of the improved identification region for SCCG group and age 26-35. This implies that QTE is not identical to the quantile of treatment effects in my example and so one should not interpret the value of QTE as a quantile of smoking effects.\n\nTable 7: QTE and bounds on the quantiles of smoking effects\n\n$^{22}$To develop intuition, recall Figure 7(c). The size of the lower bound on each triangle’s probability is related to the distance between marginal distribution functions of Y$_{0}$ and Y$_{1}$ . To see this, consider two marginal distribution functions F A 1 and F B 1 of Y$_{1}$ with F A 1 ( y ) ≤ F B 1 ( y ) for all y ∈$_{R}$ and fix the marginal distribution F$_{0}$ of Y$_{0}$ where ( Y$_{0}$, Y$_{1}$ ) satisfies MTR. Since MTR implies stochastic dominance of Y$_{1}$ over Y$_{0}$ for each y ∈$_{R}$ , F A 1 ( y ) < F B 1 ( y ) ≤ F$_{0}$ ( y ) . Thus,\n\nSince the probability lower bound on the triangle is written as max { F$_{1}$ ( y ) − F$_{0}$ ( y − δ ) } for some y ∈$_{R}$ , the above inequality shows that the closer marginal distributions F$_{0}$ and F$_{1}$ generates higher probability lower bound on each triangle.\n\n$$max $^{{}$F A 1 ( y ) − F$_{0}$ ( y − δ ) , 0 $^{}}$< max $^{{}$F B 1 ( y ) − F$_{0}$ ( y − δ ) , 0 $^{}}$.$$\n\n44" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9728365738719267, + "doc_id": "821fbe242a19b6c3cacc4fcfcc0a40c3b9fc495f0d8054762b36be3ebc923c6e", + "edit_distance": 0.35714285714285715, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9151814185495627, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Table C.2: Series estimation of the second stage regression\n\nNote :The table reports the second stage resgression estimates for the effect of smoking cessation on infant birth weight. ̂ p denotes\n\nthe propensity score estimate in the first stage probit regression. The specification also includes indicators for birth orders, weight\n\n77", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Note :The table reports the second stage resgression estimates for the effect of smoking cessation on infant birth weight. ̂ p denotes the propensity score estimate in the first stage probit regression. The specification also includes indicators for birth orders, weight\n\n77\n\nTable C.2: Series estimation of the second stage regression" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4197922594840673, + "doc_id": "3fa0f6daa26ec10bede338bfeebeb2903e012bccbc2ea87fd0ad7833b37c59f7", + "edit_distance": 0.4141519250780437, + "f1_score": 0.9285714285714284, + "meteor": 0.6373923977173808, + "precision": 0.9435483870967742, + "pred_md": "- 1. If G is a semigroup and Φ : 1 ρ 1 → G is a homomorphism then a homomorphism Φ : 2 ρ 2 → G is given by Φ ( 2 x, y ) = Φ 1 ( θ ( x , θ ) ( y )) for all x, y ∈ X with xρ y 2 .\n- 2. If S = I ( X , ρ , R 1 1 ) and T = I ( X , ρ , R 2 2 ) have gradings induced by Φ 1 and Φ 2 , respectively, then there is an injective homomorphism of G -graded rings h : S → T such that equation 7 holds for all f ∈ S and all x, y ∈ X 2 .\n\n\n\nProof. (1) Part 1 is trivial. (2) A routine check shows h is an R -module homomorphism. In the definition of multiplication in equation 1, it is easy to see h is a ring homomorphism if θ ([ x, y ]) = [ θ ( x , θ ) ( y )] for all x, y ∈ X 2 such that xρ y 2 . For any c ∈ [ θ ( x , θ ) ( y )] there is a transitive triple ( θ ( x , c, θ ) ( y )) ∈ Trans ( X 1 ) so by part 2 of definition 4.1 there exists u, v, w ∈ X 2 such that ( υ, v, w ) ∈ Trans ( X 2 ), θ ( u ) = θ ( x ), θ ( v ) = c , and θ ( w ) = θ ( y ). We find u = x and w = y since θ ∗ ( x, y ) = θ ∗ ( u, v ) and θ ∗ is bijective. Therefore v ∈ [ x, y ] and c ∈ θ ([ x, y ]). Since c was arbitrarily chosen we have θ ([ x, y ]) ⊆ θ ([ x, y ]). Moreover θ ([ x, y ]) ⊆ [ θ ( x , θ ) ( y )] since θ is order-preserving. Therefore θ ([ x, y ]) = [ θ ( x , θ ) ( y )] as desired.\n\nglyph[negationslash]\n\nglyph[negationslash]\n\nGiven f ∈ S \\ { 0 } there exist a , b 1 1 ∈ X 1 such that f ( a , b 1 1 ) = 0. If a 1 = b 1 then there exist x , y 1 1 ∈ X 2 such that x ρ y 1 ∗ 2 1 and θ ∗ ( x , y 1 1 ) = ( a , b 1 1 ) ∈ ρ ∗ 2 . If a 1 = b 1 then there exists x 1 ∈ X 2 such that a 1 = θ ( x 1 ) and we set y 1 = x 1 . In either case x ρ y 1 2 1 and h f ( ) ( x , y 1 1 ) = f ( a , b 1 1 ). Therefore h f ( ) ( x , y 1 1 ) = 0 and h f ( ) is nonzero. This proves h is injective.\n\nglyph[negationslash]\n\n12", + "recall": 0.9140625, + "true_md": "- 1. If G is a semigroup and Φ$_{1}$ : ρ$_{1}$ → G is a homomorphism then a homomorphism Φ$_{2}$ : ρ$_{2}$ → G is given by Φ$_{2}$ ( x, y ) = Φ$_{1}$ ( θ ( x ) , θ ( y )) for all x, y ∈ X with xρ$_{2}$y .\n\n- 2. If S = I ( X$_{1}$, ρ$_{1}$, R ) and T = I ( X$_{2}$, ρ$_{2}$, R ) have gradings induced by Φ$_{1}$ and Φ$_{2}$ , respectively, then there is an injective homomorphism of G -graded rings h : S → T such that equation 7 holds for all f ∈ S and all x, y ∈ X$_{2}$ .\n\n$$( h ( f )) ( x, y ) =      f ( θ ( x ) , θ ( y )) if xρ$_{2}$y in X$_{2}$ 0 otherwise (7)$$\n\nProof. (1) Part 1 is trivial. (2) A routine check shows h is an R -module homomor- phism. In the definition of multiplication in equation 1, it is easy to see h is a ring homomorphism if θ ([ x, y ]) = [ θ ( x ) , θ ( y )] for all x, y ∈ X$_{2}$ such that xρ$_{2}$y . For any c ∈ [ θ ( x ) , θ ( y )] there is a transitive triple ( θ ( x ) , c, θ ( y )) ∈ Trans ( X$_{1}$ ) so by part 2 of definition 4.1 there exists u, v, w ∈ X$_{2}$ such that ( υ, v, w ) ∈ Trans ( X$_{2}$ ), θ ( u ) = θ ( x ), θ ( v ) = c , and θ ( w ) = θ ( y ). We find u = x and w = y since θ $^{∗}$( x, y ) = θ $^{∗}$( u, v ) and θ ∗ is bijective. Therefore v ∈ [ x, y ] and c ∈ θ ([ x, y ]). Since c was arbitrarily chosen we have θ ([ x, y ]) ⊆ θ ([ x, y ]). Moreover θ ([ x, y ]) ⊆ [ θ ( x ) , θ ( y )] since θ is order-preserving. Therefore θ ([ x, y ]) = [ θ ( x ) , θ ( y )] as desired.\n\nGiven f ∈ S \\ { 0 } there exist a$_{1}$, b$_{1}$ ∈ X$_{1}$ such that f ( a$_{1}$, b$_{1}$ ) ̸ = 0. If a$_{1}$ ̸ = b$_{1}$ then there exist x$_{1}$, y$_{1}$ ∈ X$_{2}$ such that x$_{1}$ρ ∗ $_{2}$y$_{1}$ and θ $^{∗}$( x$_{1}$, y$_{1}$ ) = ( a$_{1}$, b$_{1}$ ) ∈ ρ ∗ $_{2}$. If a$_{1}$ = b$_{1}$ then there exists x$_{1}$ ∈ X$_{2}$ such that a$_{1}$ = θ ( x$_{1}$ ) and we set y$_{1}$ = x$_{1}$ . In either case x$_{1}$ρ$_{2}$y$_{1}$ and h ( f ) ( x$_{1}$, y$_{1}$ ) = f ( a$_{1}$, b$_{1}$ ). Therefore h ( f ) ( x$_{1}$, y$_{1}$ ) ̸ = 0 and h ( f ) is nonzero. This proves h is injective.\n\n12" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0659868719433791, + "doc_id": "9d928ad93e5f0e67aa96a33ffc7ea5675a5b5df051efb0ba897724f3ab539492", + "edit_distance": 0.7694915254237288, + "f1_score": 0.8700564971751412, + "meteor": 0.22944009654762684, + "precision": 0.927710843373494, + "pred_md": "Figure. A.2: A D k for A k = ( a , k ∞ ) and A k +1 = ( a k +1 , ∞ )\n\nFigure. A.2: A D k for A k = ( a , k ∞ ) and A k +1 = ( a k +1 , ∞ )\n\nSince the function ϕ is nondecreasing in the support of the optimal joint distribution, A k reduces to ( a , k ∞ ) with a k ≤ a k +1 and a k ∈ -∞ ∞ [ , ] where A k = φ for a k = ∞ . By Theorem 1, for each integer k and δ > 0 ,\n\n\n\nThen, F 0 ( A k ) -F 1 ( A D k ) = 0 for a k = ∞ , while F 0 ( A k ) -F 1 ( A D k ) = min { F 1 ( a k + ) δ , F 1 ( a k +1 ) } -F 0 ( a k ) for a k < ∞ . Therefore, By Theorem 1,\n\n\n\nNow I show that it is innocuous to assume that a k +1 -a k ≤ δ for each integer k. Suppose that there exists an integer l s.t. a l +1 > a l + . Consider δ { ˜ A k } ∞ k = -∞ with ˜ A k = ( ˜ a , k ∞ ) as follows:\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n64", + "recall": 0.8191489361702128, + "true_md": "Figure. A.2: A D k for A$_{k}$ = ( a$_{k}$, ∞ ) and A$_{k}$$\\_{+1}$ = ( a$\\_{k}$$_{+1}$, ∞ )\n\nSince the function ϕ is nondecreasing in the support of the optimal joint distribution, A$_{k}$ reduces to ( a$_{k}$, ∞ ) with a$_{k}$ ≤ a$_{k}$$\\_{+1}$ and a$\\_{k}$ ∈ [ −∞ , ∞ ] where A$\\_{k}$ = φ for a$\\_{k}$ = ∞ . By Theorem 1, for each integer k and δ > 0 ,\n\nThen, F$_{0}$ ( A$_{k}$ ) − F$_{1}$ $^{(}$A D k ) = 0 for a$_{k}$ = ∞ , while F$_{0}$ ( A$_{k}$ ) − F$_{1}$ $^{(}$A D k ) = min { F$_{1}$ ( a$_{k}$ + δ ) , F$_{1}$ ( a$_{k}$$\\_{+1}$ ) } − F$\\_{0}$ ( a$\\_{k}$ ) for a$\\_{k}$ < ∞ . Therefore, By Theorem 1,\n\nNow I show that it is innocuous to assume that a$_{k}$$\\_{+1}$ − a$\\_{k}$ ≤ δ for each integer k. Suppose that there exists an integer l s.t. a$\\_{l}$$_{+1}$ > a$_{l}$ + δ . Consider { ˜ A$_{k}$ } ∞ k = −∞ with ˜ A$_{k}$ = ($_{˜}$ a$_{k}$, ∞ ) as follows:\n\n64\n\n$$˜ a$_{k}$ = a$_{k}$ for k ≤ l, ˜ a$_{l}$$_{+1}$ = a$_{l}$ + δ, ˜ a$_{k}$$_{+1}$ = a$_{k}$ for k ≥ l + 1 .$$\n\n$$F L Δ ( δ ) = sup { A$_{k}$ } ∞ k = −∞ [ ∞ ∑ k = −∞ max $^{{}$µ$_{0}$ ( A$_{k}$ ) − µ$_{1}$ $^{(}$A D k $^{)}$, 0 } ] = sup { a$_{k}$ } ∞ k = −∞ [ ∞ ∑ k = −∞ max { min { F$_{1}$ ( a$_{k}$ + δ ) , F$_{1}$ ( a$_{k}$$_{+1}$ ) } − F$_{0}$ ( a$_{k}$ ) , 0 }$^{]}$ .$$\n\n$$A D k = { y$_{1}$ ∈$_{R}$|∃ y$_{0}$ > a$_{k}$ s.t. y$_{1}$ − y$_{0}$ ≥ δ } ∪ { y$_{1}$ ∈$_{R}$|∃ y$_{0}$ > a$_{k}$$_{+1}$ s.t. 0 ≤ y$_{1}$ − y$_{0}$ < δ } = ( a$_{k}$ + δ, ∞ ) ∪ ( a$_{k}$$_{+1}$, ∞ ) = (min { a$_{k}$ + δ, a$_{k}$$_{+1}$ } , ∞ )$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9232961758878392, + "doc_id": "1527142d30eb727f1ecd5be9254828d0ff4761db5eae6c7d2d2d6aad49813853", + "edit_distance": 0.026143790849673203, + "f1_score": 0.9471032745591939, + "meteor": 0.974273472796861, + "precision": 0.9494949494949495, + "pred_md": "- [5] J. Awrejcewicz and CH Lamarque. Bifurcation and Chaos in Nonsmooth Mechanical Systems. World Scientific Series on Nonlinear Science, Singapore, 2003.\n- [6] Babitsky V. I., Theory of Vibro-impact systems and applications. Berlin, Heidelberg: SpringerVerlag, 1998.\n- [7] M. di Bernardo, Budd C. J., and A.R. Champneys. Grazing bifurcations in n-dimensional piecewisesmooth dynamical systems. Physica D , 160:222-254, 2001.\n- [8] M. di Bernardo, Budd C. J., and A.R. Champneys. Grazing, skipping and sliding: analysis of the nonsmooth dynamics of the DC/DC buck converter. Nonlinearity, 11:858-890, 1998.\n- [9] M. di Bernardo and S. J. Hogan. Discontinuity-induced bifurcations of piecewise smooth dynamical systems. Philosophical Transactions of The royal society A, 368:4915-4935, 2010.\n- [10] M. di Bernardo, C. J. Budd, A.R. Champneys and P. Kowalczyk. Piecewise-smooth dynamical systems theory and applications. Springer-Verlag, London, 2008.\n- [11] B. Brogliato. Impacts in Mechanical Systems. Springer-Verlag, Berlin, Heidelberg, 2000.\n- [12] B. Brogliato. Nonsmooth mechanics. Springer-Verlag, London, 1999.\n- [13] W. Chin, E. Ott, H.E. Nusse, and C. Grebogi. Grazing bifurcations in impact oscillators. Physical Review E, 50:4427-4444, 1994.\n- [14] E.A. Coddington, N. Levinson. Theory of Ordinary Differential Equations, McGraw-Hill, New York, 1955.\n- [15] V. Donde and I.A. Hiskens. Shooting methods for locating grazing phenomena in hybrid systems. International Journal of Bifurcation and Chaos, 16:3:671-692, 2006.\n- [16] E. Falcon, C. Laroche, S. Fauve and C. Coste. Behavior of one inelastic ball bouncing repeatedly off the ground. The European Physical Journal B, 3:45-57, 1998.\n- [17] M. Farkas, Periodic Motions, Springer-Verlag, 1994.\n- [18] M.I. Feigin. Doubling of the oscillation period with C-bifurcations in piecewise continuous systems. Journal of Applied Mathematics and Mechanics (Prikladnaya Matematika i Mechanika), 34:861-869, 1970.\n- [19] M.I. Feigin. On the structure of C-bifurcation boundaries of piecewise continuous systems. Journal of Applied Mathematics and Mechanics (Prikladnaya Matematika i Mechanika), 42:820-829, 1978.\n- [20] H. Goldstein. Classical Mechanics. Addison Wesley, United States of America, 1980.\n\n42", + "recall": 0.9447236180904522, + "true_md": "- [5] J. Awrejcewicz and CH Lamarque. Bifurcation and Chaos in Nonsmooth Mechanical Systems. World Scientific Series on Nonlinear Science, Singapore, 2003.\n\n- [6] Babitsky V. I., Theory of Vibro-impact systems and applications. Berlin, Heidelberg: Springer- Verlag, 1998.\n\n- [7] M. di Bernardo, Budd C. J., and A.R. Champneys. Grazing bifurcations in n-dimensional piecewise- smooth dynamical systems. Physica D , 160:222–254, 2001.\n\n- [8] M. di Bernardo, Budd C. J., and A.R. Champneys. Grazing, skipping and sliding: analysis of the nonsmooth dynamics of the DC/DC buck converter. Nonlinearity, 11:858–890, 1998.\n\n- [9] M. di Bernardo and S. J. Hogan. Discontinuity-induced bifurcations of piecewise smooth dynamical systems. Philosophical Transactions of The royal society A, 368:4915–4935, 2010.\n\n- [10] M. di Bernardo, C. J. Budd, A.R. Champneys and P. Kowalczyk. Piecewise-smooth dynamical systems theory and applications. Springer-Verlag, London, 2008.\n\n- [11] B. Brogliato. Impacts in Mechanical Systems. Springer-Verlag, Berlin, Heidelberg, 2000.\n\n- [12] B. Brogliato. Nonsmooth mechanics. Springer-Verlag, London, 1999.\n\n- [13] W. Chin, E. Ott, H.E. Nusse, and C. Grebogi. Grazing bifurcations in impact oscillators. Physical Review E, 50:4427–4444, 1994.\n\n- [14] E.A. Coddington, N. Levinson. Theory of Ordinary Differential Equations, McGraw-Hill, New York, 1955.\n\n- [15] V. Donde and I.A. Hiskens. Shooting methods for locating grazing phenomena in hybrid systems. International Journal of Bifurcation and Chaos, 16:3:671–692, 2006.\n\n- [16] E. Falcon, C. Laroche, S. Fauve and C. Coste. Behavior of one inelastic ball bouncing repeatedly off the ground. The European Physical Journal B, 3:45–57, 1998.\n\n- [17] M. Farkas, Periodic Motions, Springer-Verlag, 1994.\n\n- [18] M.I. Feigin. Doubling of the oscillation period with C-bifurcations in piecewise continuous systems. Journal of Applied Mathematics and Mechanics (Prikladnaya Matematika i Mechanika), 34:861–869, 1970.\n\n- [19] M.I. Feigin. On the structure of C-bifurcation boundaries of piecewise continuous systems. Journal of Applied Mathematics and Mechanics (Prikladnaya Matematika i Mechanika), 42:820–829, 1978.\n\n- [20] H. Goldstein. Classical Mechanics. Addison Wesley, United States of America, 1980.\n\n42" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.47848183276857287, + "doc_id": "c9040ec530007bffbf04b7f4b62cb438676299704f31fc5a8378b14e7dbf4a9f", + "edit_distance": 0.35294117647058826, + "f1_score": 0.9551020408163264, + "meteor": 0.6933022212532198, + "precision": 0.9669421487603306, + "pred_md": "glyph[negationslash]\n\nNext we prove σ 1 is a G -extendible set for ρ 1 . Given ψ 1 : σ 1 → G we let ψ 2 : σ 2 → G be the function given by ψ 2 = ψ 1 · θ ∗ . There is also a homomorphism Ψ 2 : ρ 2 → G such that Ψ 2 | σ 2 = ψ 2 since σ 2 is a G -extendible set for ρ 2 . There is a homomorphism Ψ 1 : ρ 1 → G such that for all a, b ∈ X 1 such that aρ b 1 we have Ψ ( 1 a, b ) = Ψ 2 ( ( θ ∗ ) -1 ( a, b ) ) if a = b andΨ ( 1 a, b ) = 1 if a = b . Given a, b ∈ X 1 such that ( a, b ) ∈ σ 1 there exist x, y ∈ X 1 such that a = θ ( x ), b = θ ( y ), and ( x, y ) ∈ σ 2 . We have θ ∗ ( x, y ) = ( a, b ) and Ψ 2 ( x, y ) = Ψ ( 1 a, b ) by construction, Ψ ( 2 x, y ) = ψ 2 ( x, y ) since ( x, y ) ∈ σ 2 , and ψ 2 ( x, y ) = ψ 1 ( a, b ) since ψ 2 = ψ 1 · θ ∗ . This shows Ψ 1 | σ 1 = ψ 1 and σ 1 is a G -extendible set for ρ 1 .\n\nDefinition 4.4 Let ρ be a reflexive relation on a set X .\n\n- 1. ( X,ρ ) is stable if ρ is balanced and if the relations aρb , aρc , bρc , bρd , and cρd imply aρd for all distinct a, b, c, d ∈ X .\n- 2. An element x ∈ X is a clasp if there exist w, y ∈ X \\ { x } such that wρx , xρy , and ( w, y ) / ρ ∈ .\n- 3. x ∈ X is a locked clasp if there exist u, v, w, y ∈ X \\ { x } such that ( w, y ) / ρ ∈ and ( u, x, y ) , ( u, x, v ) , ( w, x, v ) ∈ Trans ( X ) .\n- 4. An unlocked clasp is a clasp which is not locked.\n\nIt is easy to see a preorder is stable. The balanced relation determined by (d) in Figure 1 is not stable. Neither a balanced relation which is not stable nor a stable relation which contains a locked clasp can be the compression of a preorder by [8, Theorem 2.4 and Lemma 3.4].\n\n14", + "recall": 0.9435483870967742, + "true_md": "Definition 4.4 Let ρ be a reflexive relation on a set X .\n\nNext we prove σ$_{1}$ is a G -extendible set for ρ$_{1}$ . Given ψ$_{1}$ : σ$_{1}$ → G we let ψ$_{2}$ : σ$_{2}$ → G be the function given by ψ$_{2}$ = ψ$_{1}$ ◦ θ $^{∗}$. There is also a homomorphism Ψ$_{2}$ : ρ$_{2}$ → G such that Ψ$_{2}$ |$_{σ}$$\\_{2}$ = ψ$\\_{2}$ since σ$\\_{2}$ is a G -extendible set for ρ$\\_{2}$ . There is a homomorphism Ψ$\\_{1}$ : ρ$\\_{1}$ → G such that for all a, b ∈ X$\\_{1}$ such that aρ$\\_{1}$b we have Ψ$\\_{1}$ ( a, b ) = Ψ$\\_{2}$ $^{(}$( θ $^{∗}$) − $^{1}$( a, b ) ) if a ̸ = b andΨ$\\_{1}$ ( a, b ) = 1 if a = b . Given a, b ∈ X$\\_{1}$ such that ( a, b ) ∈ σ$\\_{1}$ there exist x, y ∈ X$\\_{1}$ such that a = θ ( x ), b = θ ( y ), and ( x, y ) ∈ σ$\\_{2}$ . We have θ $^{∗}$( x, y ) = ( a, b ) and Ψ$\\_{2}$ ( x, y ) = Ψ$\\_{1}$ ( a, b ) by construction, Ψ$\\_{2}$ ( x, y ) = ψ$\\_{2}$ ( x, y ) since ( x, y ) ∈ σ$\\_{2}$ , and ψ$\\_{2}$ ( x, y ) = ψ$\\_{1}$ ( a, b ) since ψ$\\_{2}$ = ψ$\\_{1}$ ◦ θ $^{∗}$. This shows Ψ$\\_{1}$ |$\\_{σ}$$_{1}$ = ψ$_{1}$ and σ$_{1}$ is a G -extendible set for ρ$_{1}$ .\n\n- 1. ( X, ρ ) is stable if ρ is balanced and if the relations aρb , aρc , bρc , bρd , and cρd imply aρd for all distinct a, b, c, d ∈ X .\n\n- 2. An element x ∈ X is a clasp if there exist w, y ∈ X \\ { x } such that wρx , xρy , and ( w, y ) / ∈ ρ .\n\n- 3. x ∈ X is a locked clasp if there exist u, v, w, y ∈ X \\ { x } such that ( w, y ) / ∈ ρ and ( u, x, y ) , ( u, x, v ) , ( w, x, v ) ∈ Trans ( X ) .\n\n- 4. An unlocked clasp is a clasp which is not locked.\n\nIt is easy to see a preorder is stable. The balanced relation determined by (d) in Figure 1 is not stable. Neither a balanced relation which is not stable nor a stable relation which contains a locked clasp can be the compression of a preorder by [8, Theorem 2.4 and Lemma 3.4].\n\n14" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.44880228155499485, + "doc_id": "977b635df08d5cbb58e37bbc4b4c47bb5e972dd389fa4a121f048d850554f0c4", + "edit_distance": 0.44920440636474906, + "f1_score": 0.8999999999999999, + "meteor": 0.5869925319897993, + "precision": 0.9428571428571428, + "pred_md": "where m 1 ( X ) = 1 + X 1 + X 2 , u (1) and u (0) are independent normal random variables with mean zero and variance 0 1. The observed outcome is . Y = DY (1)+(1 -D Y ) (0), and the true ATE is 1. Although these outcome equations are not necessary to assess the size and power properties of the tests, they can be used to assess the utility of our proposed tests to distinguish between 'good' and 'bad' estimates of the ATE .\n\nLet X = (1 , X 1 , X 2 ) . ' For DGP 1 -DGP 5, the H 0 considered is\n\n\n\nwhere Φ( ) is the cumulative distribution function (CDF) of the standard normal distribution. · We estimate θ 0 using the Probit ML, i.e.\n\n\n\nClearly, DGP 1 falls under H 0 , whereas DGP 2 -DGP 5 fall under H 1 . Note that D follows a heteroskedastic Probit model in DGP 4 and DGP 5.\n\nThe simulation results are presented in Table 1. We report empirical rejection frequencies at the 5% significance level. Results for 10% and 1% significance levels are similar and are available upon request. We also report the bias of the normalized IPW estimator\n\n\n\nand the average length and coverage of its estimated 95% confidence interval based on its asymptotically normal approximation (assuming that the propensity score model is correctly specified).\n\nWe first analyze the size of our test. From the results of DGP 1, we find that the actual finite sample size of both KS n and CvM n tests is close to their nominal size, even when the sample size is as small as 100. The same holds for the other ICM-type tests. On the other hand, we find that Shaikh et al. (2009)'s test is, in general, conservative, and sensitive to the choice of bandwidth. For instance, when c = 0 15, the empirical size is close to zero even with . n = 1 000. , On the other hand, with c = 0 01, . the empirical size of Shaikh et al. (2009)'s test is closer to the nominal value. In terms of traditional balancing tests, we find that Wald test and Bonferroni-corrected t -test do not control size. Such a drawback is due to the random denominator being relatively close to zero: when we trim observations with estimated propensity score outside the [0 05 . , 0 95] . range, we find that classical balancing tests can control size. We\n\n20", + "recall": 0.8608695652173913, + "true_md": "where m$_{1}$ ( X ) = 1 + X$_{1}$ + X$_{2}$ , u (1) and u (0) are independent normal random variables with mean zero and variance 0 . 1. The observed outcome is Y = DY (1)+(1 − D ) Y (0), and the true ATE is 1. Although these outcome equations are not necessary to assess the size and power properties of the tests, they can be used to assess the utility of our proposed tests to distinguish between “good” and “bad” estimates of the ATE .\n\nLet X = (1 ,X$_{1}$,X$_{2}$ ) $^{′}$. For DGP 1 − DGP 5, the H$_{0}$ considered is\n\nwhere Φ( · ) is the cumulative distribution function (CDF) of the standard normal distribution. We estimate θ$_{0}$ using the Probit ML, i.e.\n\nClearly, DGP 1 falls under H$_{0}$ , whereas DGP 2 − DGP 5 fall under H$_{1}$ . Note that D follows a heteroskedastic Probit model in DGP 4 and DGP 5.\n\nThe simulation results are presented in Table 1. We report empirical rejection frequencies at the 5% significance level. Results for 10% and 1% significance levels are similar and are available upon request. We also report the bias of the normalized IPW estimator\n\nand the average length and coverage of its estimated 95% confidence interval based on its asymptotically normal approximation (assuming that the propensity score model is correctly specified).\n\nWe first analyze the size of our test. From the results of DGP 1, we find that the actual finite sample size of both KS$_{n}$ and CvM$_{n}$ tests is close to their nominal size, even when the sample size is as small as 100. The same holds for the other ICM-type tests. On the other hand, we find that Shaikh et al. (2009)’s test is, in general, conservative, and sensitive to the choice of bandwidth. For instance, when c = 0 . 15, the empirical size is close to zero even with n = 1 , 000. On the other hand, with c = 0 . 01, the empirical size of Shaikh et al. (2009)’s test is closer to the nominal value. In terms of traditional balancing tests, we find that Wald test and Bonferroni-corrected t -test do not control size. Such a drawback is due to the random denominator being relatively close to zero: when we trim observations with estimated propensity score outside the [0 . 05 , 0 . 95] range, we find that classical balancing tests can control size. We\n\n20\n\n$$̂ ATE$_{n}$ = 1 n n ∑ i =1 ( w$_{1}$$_{,i}$ ¯ w$_{1}$$_{,n}$ − w$_{0}$$_{,i}$ ¯ w$_{0}$$_{,n}$ ) Y$_{i}$, (4.3)$$\n\n$$ˆ θ$_{n}$ = arg max θ ∈ Θ n ∑ i =1 D$_{i}$ ln ( Φ ( X ′ $_{i}$θ )) + (1 − D$_{i}$ ) ln ( 1 − Φ ( X ′ $_{i}$θ )) .$$\n\n$$H$_{0}$ : ∃ θ$_{0}$ = ( β$_{0}$,β$_{1}$,β$_{2}$ ) ′ ∈ Θ : E [ D | Φ ( X $^{′}$θ$_{0}$ )] = Φ ( X $^{′}$θ$_{0}$ ) a.s.,$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.921174279450223, + "doc_id": "dc56dc439bb21e32038d6f4e1b7a38258737cf3c3abe43dc61497c40bd2896c2", + "edit_distance": 0.046511627906976744, + "f1_score": 0.9526315789473684, + "meteor": 0.956174155437634, + "precision": 0.9627659574468085, + "pred_md": "Liao, W., Wu, G.-R., Xu, Q., Ji, G.-J., Zhang, Z., Zang, Y.-F., Lu, G., 2014. Dynamicbc: a matlab toolbox for dynamic brain connectome analysis. Brain Connectivity 4 (10), 780-790.\n\nLiegeois, R., Ziegler, E., Geurts, P., Gomez, F., Bahri, M. A., Phillips, C., Soddu, A., Vanhaudenhuyse, A., Laureys, S., Sepulchre, R., 2015. Cerebral functional connectivity periodically (de) synchronizes with anatomical constraints. Brain Structure and Function.\n\nLindquist, M. A., Xu, Y., Nebel, M. B., Caffo, B. S., 2014. Evaluating dynamic bivariate correlations in resting-state fMRI: A comparison study and a new approach. Neuroimage 101, 531-546.\n\nLiu, X., Duyn, J. H., 2013. Time-varying functional network information extracted from brief instances of spontaneous brain activity. Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences USA 110 (11), 4392-4397.\n\nMacMahon, M., Garlaschelli, D., 2015. Community detection for correlation matrices. Physical Review X 5, 021006.\n\nMiller, R. L., Yaesoubi, M., Calhoun, V. D., 2014. Higher dimensional analysis shows reduced dynamism of time-varying network connectivity in schizophrenia patients. In: Engineering in Medicine and Biology Society (EMBC), 2014 36th Annual International Conference of the IEEE. IEEE, pp. 3837-3840.\n\nNewman, M. E., Girvan, M., 2004. Finding and evaluating community structure in networks. Physical Review E 69 (2), 026113.\n\nNooner, K. B., Colcombe, S. J., Tobe, R. H., Mennes, M., Benedict, M. M., Moreno, A. L., Panek, L. J., Brown, S., Zavitz, S. T., Li, Q., et al., 2012. The nki-rockland sample: a model for accelerating the pace of discovery science in psychiatry. Frontiers in Neuroscience 6, 152.\n\n34", + "recall": 0.9427083333333334, + "true_md": "- Liao, W., Wu, G.-R., Xu, Q., Ji, G.-J., Zhang, Z., Zang, Y.-F., Lu, G., 2014. Dynamicbc: a matlab toolbox for dynamic brain connectome analysis. Brain Connectivity 4 (10), 780–790.\n\n- Liegeois, R., Ziegler, E., Geurts, P., Gomez, F., Bahri, M. A., Phillips, C., Soddu, A., Vanhaudenhuyse, A., Laureys, S., Sepulchre, R., 2015. Cerebral functional connectivity periodically (de) synchronizes with anatomical con- straints. Brain Structure and Function.\n\n- Lindquist, M. A., Xu, Y., Nebel, M. B., Caffo, B. S., 2014. Evaluating dynamic bivariate correlations in resting-state fMRI: A comparison study and a new approach. Neuroimage 101, 531–546.\n\n- Liu, X., Duyn, J. H., 2013. Time-varying functional network information ex- tracted from brief instances of spontaneous brain activity. Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences USA 110 (11), 4392–4397.\n\n- MacMahon, M., Garlaschelli, D., 2015. Community detection for correlation matrices. Physical Review X 5, 021006.\n\n- Miller, R. L., Yaesoubi, M., Calhoun, V. D., 2014. Higher dimensional analysis shows reduced dynamism of time-varying network connectivity in schizophre- nia patients. In: Engineering in Medicine and Biology Society (EMBC), 2014 36th Annual International Conference of the IEEE. IEEE, pp. 3837–3840.\n\n- Newman, M. E., Girvan, M., 2004. Finding and evaluating community structure in networks. Physical Review E 69 (2), 026113.\n\n- Nooner, K. B., Colcombe, S. J., Tobe, R. H., Mennes, M., Benedict, M. M., Moreno, A. L., Panek, L. J., Brown, S., Zavitz, S. T., Li, Q., et al., 2012. The nki-rockland sample: a model for accelerating the pace of discovery science in psychiatry. Frontiers in Neuroscience 6, 152.\n\n34" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.07351297168162443, + "doc_id": "410b1d2b4674f8e1386f4f3a321c1014d125e01307994e6d66f87eedf1ba2f1b", + "edit_distance": 0.7898032200357782, + "f1_score": 0.8502415458937197, + "meteor": 0.24019668197381674, + "precision": 0.9263157894736842, + "pred_md": "alent to the that of ∞ ∑ { k = -∞ F 0 ( A k ) -F 1 ( A D k )} over { A k } ∞ k = -∞ with the following monotonicity condition:\n\n\n\nTherefore, it follows that\n\n\n\nwhere\n\n{ A k } ∞ k = -∞ is a monotonically decreasing sequence of open sets,\n\n\n\n\n\nNote that the expression (A.9) can be equivalently written as follows:\n\n\n\nThat is, F 0 ( A k ) -F 1 ( A D k ) ≥ 0 for each integer k at the optimum in the expression (A.9) . This is easily shown by proof by contradiction.\n\nSuppose that there exists an integer p s.t. F 0 ( A p ) -F 1 ( A D p ) < 0 at the optimum. If there exists an integer q > p s.t. F 0 ( A q ) -F 1 ( A D q ) > 0 , then there exists another monotonically decreasing sequence of open sets { ˜ A k } ∞ k = -∞ s.t.\n\n\n\nwhere ˜ A k = A k for k < p and ˜ A k = A k +1 for k ≥ p. If there is no integer q > p s.t. F 0 ( A q ) -F 1 ( A D q ) > 0 , then also there exists a monotonically decreasing sequence of open sets { ̂ A k } ∞ k = -∞ s.t.\n\n\n\nwhere ̂ A k = A k for k < p and ̂ A k = φ for k ≥ p. This contradicts the optimality of { A k } ∞ k = -∞ . glyph[squaresolid]\n\n62", + "recall": 0.7857142857142857, + "true_md": "alent to the that of ∞ ∑ k = −∞ $^{{}$F$_{0}$ ( A$_{k}$ ) − F$_{1}$ $^{(}$A D k )} over { A$_{k}$ } ∞ k = −∞ with the following monotonicity condition:\n\nTherefore, it follows that\n\nwhere\n\nNote that the expression (A.9) can be equivalently written as follows:\n\nThat is, F$_{0}$ ( A$_{k}$ ) − F$_{1}$ $^{(}$A D k ) ≥ 0 for each integer k at the optimum in the expression (A.9) . This is easily shown by proof by contradiction.\n\nSuppose that there exists an integer p s.t. F$_{0}$ ( A$_{p}$ ) − F$_{1}$ $^{(}$A D p ) < 0 at the optimum. If there exists an integer q > p s.t. F$_{0}$ ( A$_{q}$ ) − F$_{1}$ $^{(}$A D q ) > 0 , then there exists another monotonically decreasing sequence of open sets { ˜ A$_{k}$ } ∞ k = −∞ s.t.\n\nwhere ˜ A$_{k}$ = A$_{k}$ for k < p and ˜ A$_{k}$ = A$_{k}$$\\_{+1}$ for k ≥ p. If there is no integer q > p s.t. F$\\_{0}$ ( A$\\_{q}$ ) − F$\\_{1}$ $^{(}$A D q ) > 0 , then also there exists a monotonically decreasing sequence of open sets { ̂ A$\\_{k}$ } ∞ k = −∞ s.t.\n\nwhere ̂ A$_{k}$ = A$_{k}$ for k < p and ̂ A$_{k}$ = φ for k ≥ p. This contradicts the optimality of { A$_{k}$ } ∞ k = $_{−∞}$. ■\n\n62\n\n$$∞ ∑ k = −∞ $^{{}$µ$_{0}$ ( ̂ A$_{k}$ $^{)}$− µ$_{1}$ ( ̂ A D k )} > $^{{}$µ$_{0}$ ( A$_{k}$ ) − µ$_{1}$ $^{(}$A D k $^{)}}$,$$\n\n$$∞ ∑ k = −∞ $^{{}$µ$_{0}$ ( ˜ A$_{k}$ $^{)}$− µ$_{1}$ ( ˜ A D k )} > ∞ ∑ k = −∞ $^{{}$µ$_{0}$ ( A$_{k}$ ) − µ$_{1}$ $^{(}$A D k $^{)}}$,$$\n\n$$inf π ∈ Π( µ$_{0}$,µ$_{1}$ ) I [ F ] = sup { A$_{k}$ } ∞ k = −∞ ∞ ∑ k = −∞ max $^{{}$µ$_{0}$ ( A$_{k}$ ) − µ$_{1}$ $^{(}$A D k $^{)}$, 0 $^{}}$.$$\n\n$${ A$_{k}$ } ∞ k = −∞ is a monotonically decreasing sequence of open sets, A D k = { y$_{1}$ ∈$_{R}$|∃ y$_{0}$ ∈ A$_{k}$ s.t. y$_{1}$ − y$_{0}$ ≥ δ and ( y$_{0}$, y$_{1}$ ) ∈ C } ∪ { y$_{1}$ ∈$_{R}$|∃ y$_{0}$ ∈ A$_{k}$$_{+1}$ s.t. y$_{1}$ − y$_{0}$ < δ and ( y$_{0}$, y$_{1}$ ) ∈ C } for any integer k.$$\n\n$$inf F ∈ Π( µ$_{0}$,µ$_{1}$ ) I [ F ] = sup { A$_{k}$ } ∞ k = −∞ ∞ ∑ k = −∞ $^{(}$µ$_{0}$ ( A$_{k}$ ) − µ$_{1}$ $^{(}$A D k $^{))}$, (A.9)$$\n\n$$. . . ⊆ A$_{k}$$_{+1}$ ⊆ A$_{k}$ ⊆ A$_{k}$$_{−}$$_{1}$ ⊆ . . . .$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9097519007125507, + "doc_id": "f9d41aec9629da059ab0fbba3decc4411f60cc32bc7e12dce8ff4196c1a79707", + "edit_distance": 0.03811659192825112, + "f1_score": 0.9406392694063928, + "meteor": 0.9672148019447432, + "precision": 0.9493087557603687, + "pred_md": "- [21] E. Goursat. A course in mathematical analysis. Gauthier-Villars, 1910.\n- [22] P. Hartman. Ordinary Differential Equations. SIAM, 2002.\n- [23] M.W. Hirsch, S. Smale and R.L. Devaney Differential Equations, Dynamical Systems, and an Introduction to Chaos, Elsevier, USA, 2004.\n- [24] C. H s and A.R. Champneys. Grazing bifurcations and chatter in a pressure relief valve model. o Physica D, 241:2068-2076, 2012.\n- [25] R.A. Ibrahim. Vibro-impact Dynamics Modeling, Mapping and Applications. Springer-Verlag, Berlin Heidelberg, 2009.\n- [26] A.C.J. Luo. A theory for non-smooth dynamical systems on connectable domains. Communications in Nonlinear Science and Numerical Simulations, 10:1-55, 2005.\n- [27] A.C.J. Luo and B. C. Gegg. Grazing phenomena in a periodically forced, friction-induced, linear oscillator. Communications in Nonlinear Science and Numerical Simulations, 11:777-802, 2006.\n- [28] A.C.J. Luo. Singularity and Dynamics on Discontinuous Vectorfields, Elsevier, Amsterdam, 2006.\n- [29] A.C.J. Luo. Discontinuous Dynamical Systems on Time-varying Domains. Higher Education Press, Beijing, 2009.\n- [30] G. Luo, J. Xie , X. Zhu and J. Zhang. Periodic motions and bifurcations of a vibro-impact system. Chaos, Solitons & Fractals, 36:1340-1347, 2008.\n- [31] I.G. Malkin. Some Problems in the Theory of Nonlinear Oscillations. State Technical Publishing House, Moscow, 1956.\n- [32] D.W. Marhefka and D.E. Orin. A compliant contact model with nonlinear damping for simulation of robotic systems. IEEE Transactions on Systems, Man, and Cybernetics-Part A:Systems and Humans, 29:566-572, 1999.\n- [33] S. McNamara and E. Falcon. Simulations of vibrated granular medium with impact velocity dependent restitution coefficient. Physical Review E, 71:031302:1-6, 2005.\n- [34] R. K. Miller and A. N. Michel. Ordinary Differential Equations. Academic Press, 1982.\n- [35] J. Molenaar, J. G. de Weger and W. van de Water. Mappings of grazing-impact oscillators. Nonlinearity, 14:301-321, 2001.\n- [36] A.B. Nordmark. Non-periodic motion caused by grazing incidence in an impact oscillator. Journal of Sound and Vibration, 145:279-297, 1991.\n\n43", + "recall": 0.9321266968325792, + "true_md": "- [21] E. Goursat. A course in mathematical analysis. Gauthier-Villars, 1910.\n\n- [22] P. Hartman. Ordinary Differential Equations. SIAM, 2002.\n\n- [23] M.W. Hirsch, S. Smale and R.L. Devaney Differential Equations, Dynamical Systems, and an In- troduction to Chaos, Elsevier, USA, 2004.\n\n- [24] C. H ¨ o s and A.R. Champneys. Grazing bifurcations and chatter in a pressure relief valve model. Physica D, 241:2068–2076, 2012.\n\n- [25] R.A. Ibrahim. Vibro-impact Dynamics Modeling, Mapping and Applications. Springer-Verlag, Berlin Heidelberg, 2009.\n\n- [26] A.C.J. Luo. A theory for non-smooth dynamical systems on connectable domains. Communications in Nonlinear Science and Numerical Simulations, 10:1–55, 2005.\n\n- [27] A.C.J. Luo and B. C. Gegg. Grazing phenomena in a periodically forced, friction-induced, linear oscillator. Communications in Nonlinear Science and Numerical Simulations, 11:777–802, 2006.\n\n- [28] A.C.J. Luo. Singularity and Dynamics on Discontinuous Vectorfields, Elsevier, Amsterdam, 2006.\n\n- [29] A.C.J. Luo. Discontinuous Dynamical Systems on Time-varying Domains. Higher Education Press, Beijing, 2009.\n\n- [30] G. Luo, J. Xie , X. Zhu and J. Zhang. Periodic motions and bifurcations of a vibro-impact system. Chaos, Solitons & Fractals, 36:1340–1347, 2008.\n\n- [31] I.G. Malkin. Some Problems in the Theory of Nonlinear Oscillations. State Technical Publishing House, Moscow, 1956.\n\n- [32] D.W. Marhefka and D.E. Orin. A compliant contact model with nonlinear damping for simulation of robotic systems. IEEE Transactions on Systems, Man, and Cybernetics-Part A:Systems and Humans, 29:566–572, 1999.\n\n- [33] S. McNamara and E. Falcon. Simulations of vibrated granular medium with impact velocity depen- dent restitution coefficient. Physical Review E, 71:031302:1–6, 2005.\n\n- [34] R. K. Miller and A. N. Michel. Ordinary Differential Equations. Academic Press, 1982.\n\n- [35] J. Molenaar, J. G. de Weger and W. van de Water. Mappings of grazing-impact oscillators. Nonlin- earity, 14:301–321, 2001.\n\n- [36] A.B. Nordmark. Non-periodic motion caused by grazing incidence in an impact oscillator. Journal of Sound and Vibration, 145:279–297, 1991.\n\n43" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9326177538369635, + "doc_id": "611569b3b99dfb05122e36c78c90c7d37751f3d946787344068f5d028fb52fc1", + "edit_distance": 0.1046831955922865, + "f1_score": 0.96875, + "meteor": 0.9721412881755576, + "precision": 0.9738219895287958, + "pred_md": "in terms of algorithmic and computational efficiencies. From these considerations we conclude that the combination of samplers that yields optimal MCMC efficiency (defined as an MCMC algorithm's rate of generating effectively independent samples) will be model- and platform-specific. Section 3 introduces a procedure for automated blocking of hierarchical model parameters, designed to maximize the resulting MCMC algorithm efficiency. The main idea of this procedure is to iteratively cluster model parameters based upon empirical posterior correlations, then intelligently subdivide the hierarchical clustering tree (a dendrogram) to determine blockings of parameters that result in efficient MCMC sampling. A series of simulated and real data examples given in section 4 demonstrate that this procedure can improve MCMC efficiency many-fold over statically defined MCMC algorithms and can dynamically generate algorithms comparable in performance to modelspecific, hand-tuned algorithms. We close with a discussion in section 5.\n\n## 2 MCMC Algorithms: Definitions and Efficiency\n\nIn this section, we first define a space of valid MCMC algorithms. Then, we examine two dominant contributors to the efficiency of an MCMC algorithm: the algorithmic capability to produce effectively-independent samples from the target distribution, and the computational demands of the algorithm in generating MCMC samples; these are composed to form our metric of overall MCMC efficiency. Drawing upon existing asymptotic theory of MCMC sampling, the scaling of computational costs of different sampling schemes, and on several illustrative examples, we argue that achieving an optimally efficient MCMC algorithm for a specific model by pure theory is prohibitively difficult. That conclusion motivates our approach of computationally optimizing - or at least greatly improving - MCMC performance through automated exploration of a space of valid MCMC algorithms.\n\n## 2.1 MCMC Definition\n\nWe assume a given, fixed, hierarchical model M , which may be represented as a directed acyclic graph where vertices represent top-level model parameters, latent states, or fixed observations (data), and edges represent dependencies between these components. Denote the set of all top-level\n\n5", + "recall": 0.9637305699481865, + "true_md": "in terms of algorithmic and computational efficiencies. From these considerations we conclude that the combination of samplers that yields optimal MCMC efficiency (defined as an MCMC algorithm’s rate of generating effectively independent samples) will be model- and platform-specific. Section 3 introduces a procedure for automated blocking of hierarchical model parameters, designed to maximize the resulting MCMC algorithm efficiency. The main idea of this procedure is to iteratively cluster model parameters based upon empirical posterior correlations, then intelligently subdivide the hierarchical clustering tree (a dendrogram) to determine blockings of parameters that result in efficient MCMC sampling. A series of simulated and real data examples given in section 4 demonstrate that this procedure can improve MCMC efficiency many-fold over statically defined MCMC algorithms and can dynamically generate algorithms comparable in performance to model- specific, hand-tuned algorithms. We close with a discussion in section 5.\n\nIn this section, we first define a space of valid MCMC algorithms. Then, we examine two domi- nant contributors to the efficiency of an MCMC algorithm: the algorithmic capability to produce effectively-independent samples from the target distribution, and the computational demands of the algorithm in generating MCMC samples; these are composed to form our metric of overall MCMC efficiency. Drawing upon existing asymptotic theory of MCMC sampling, the scaling of computational costs of different sampling schemes, and on several illustrative examples, we argue that achieving an optimally efficient MCMC algorithm for a specific model by pure theory is pro- hibitively difficult. That conclusion motivates our approach of computationally optimizing – or at least greatly improving – MCMC performance through automated exploration of a space of valid MCMC algorithms.\n\nWe assume a given, fixed, hierarchical model M , which may be represented as a directed acyclic graph where vertices represent top-level model parameters, latent states, or fixed observations (data), and edges represent dependencies between these components. Denote the set of all top-level\n\n5\n\n## 2.1 MCMC Definition\n\n## 2 MCMC Algorithms: Definitions and Efficiency" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.906656866410622, + "doc_id": "b2b5f71b44dbc577bf820494e773e9a801ed47b42cb2eb38f6ffc0ebe917816a", + "edit_distance": 0.13879598662207357, + "f1_score": 0.9683098591549296, + "meteor": 0.9698526301661117, + "precision": 0.9683098591549296, + "pred_md": "Fig. 3.\n\nVocabulary Type Coverage by Crawling Strategy TABLE VI QUEUE RANKING STRATEGY LM PERPLEXITY COMPARISON\n\nFig. 3.Vocabulary Type Coverage by Crawling Strategy TABLE VI QUEUE RANKING STRATEGY LM PERPLEXITY COMPARISON\n\nranking. However, once enough data has been acquired the difference in perplexity between the two ranking systems is small. We reached two conclusions from this experiment: either of the two ranking systems is better than not doing any ranking and the predictive ranking has a definite advantage at covering the in-domain vocabulary.\n\nThe amount of data used for these language models is small compared to the previous experiments from Table III. As a result, the perplexities are much larger. However, if more data is downloaded the size of the queue will expand and the predictive ranking will continue to have an advantage. In a real-world application, the predictive ranking model would be retrained as additional batches of users are downloaded for maximum performance.\n\n## VI. CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE WORK\n\nWe have shown that Twitter data is useful for modeling conversational speech in a variety of languages. The high weights assigned to the Twitter data in the mixture models\n\n9\n\nproves the point. As a point of comparison, using Turkish newspaper text in the mixture model only got 2% weight compared to the 27% weight assigned to the Twitter data. The combination of Twitter data with the use of class language models is an especially strong result. The approximately 20% reduction in perplexity would be hard to achieve by means of collecting additional in-domain speech data without incurring significant collection costs.\n\nThere are still many pieces of unexploited information that could be used to improve the language modeling. For example, further analysis and clustering of the Twitter social graph could reveal linguistic subgroups. Additionally, selected Tweets have GPS tagging enabled, which could be used to automatically identify and model regional dialects.\n\nIn the introduction we mention that one reason to prefer collecting data from Twitter is the ease and speed with which the data can be collected. Our method for prioritizing the download queue builds off this advantage to increase the amount of data collected and maximize the vocabulary coverage, which justifies increased effort in searching and crawling. Since the data gathered using the predictive ranking contains many vocabulary types from held-out data, it could be used for vocabulary expansion. The real-world benefit of our predictive ranking approach is sensitive to the rate limits of the Twitter API. For simplicity, these considerations were not taken into account in our experiments but, should be addressed in future work.\n\n## REFERENCES\n\n- [1] A. Marin, S. Feldman, M. Ostendorf, and M. Gupta, 'Filtering web text to match target genres,' in Proc. ICASSP , 2009, pp. 3705-3708.\n- [2] X. Zhu and R. Rosenfeld, 'Improving trigram language modeling with the World Wide Web,' in Proc. ICASSP , 2001, pp. I:533-536.\n- [3] R. Rosenfeld, 'Two decades of statistical language modeling: where do we go from here?' Proc. IEEE , vol. 88, no. 8, pp. 1270-1278, 2000.\n- [4] I. Bulyko, M. Ostendorf, and A. Stolcke, 'Getting more mileage from", + "recall": 0.9683098591549296, + "true_md": "9\n\nranking. However, once enough data has been acquired the difference in perplexity between the two ranking systems is small. We reached two conclusions from this experiment: either of the two ranking systems is better than not doing any ranking and the predictive ranking has a definite advantage at covering the in-domain vocabulary.\n\nThe amount of data used for these language models is small compared to the previous experiments from Table III. As a result, the perplexities are much larger. However, if more data is downloaded the size of the queue will expand and the predictive ranking will continue to have an advantage. In a real-world application, the predictive ranking model would be retrained as additional batches of users are downloaded for maximum performance.\n\nWe have shown that Twitter data is useful for modeling conversational speech in a variety of languages. The high weights assigned to the Twitter data in the mixture models\n\nproves the point. As a point of comparison, using Turkish newspaper text in the mixture model only got 2% weight compared to the 27% weight assigned to the Twitter data. The combination of Twitter data with the use of class language models is an especially strong result. The approximately 20% reduction in perplexity would be hard to achieve by means of collecting additional in-domain speech data without incurring significant collection costs.\n\nThere are still many pieces of unexploited information that could be used to improve the language modeling. For example, further analysis and clustering of the Twitter social graph could reveal linguistic subgroups. Additionally, selected Tweets have GPS tagging enabled, which could be used to automatically identify and model regional dialects.\n\nIn the introduction we mention that one reason to prefer collecting data from Twitter is the ease and speed with which the data can be collected. Our method for prioritizing the download queue builds off this advantage to increase the amount of data collected and maximize the vocabulary coverage, which justifies increased effort in searching and crawling. Since the data gathered using the predictive ranking contains many vocabulary types from held-out data, it could be used for vocabulary expansion. The real-world benefit of our predictive ranking approach is sensitive to the rate limits of the Twitter API. For simplicity, these considerations were not taken into account in our experiments but, should be addressed in future work.\n\n## REFERENCES\n\n## VI. CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE WORK\n\nFig. 3. Vocabulary Type Coverage by Crawling Strategy\n\nTABLE VI QUEUE RANKING STRATEGY LM PERPLEXITY COMPARISON\n\n- [1] A. Marin, S. Feldman, M. Ostendorf, and M. Gupta, “Filtering web text to match target genres,” in Proc. ICASSP , 2009, pp. 3705–3708.\n\n- [2] X. Zhu and R. Rosenfeld, “Improving trigram language modeling with the World Wide Web,” in Proc. ICASSP , 2001, pp. I:533–536.\n\n- [3] R. Rosenfeld, “Two decades of statistical language modeling: where do we go from here?” Proc. IEEE , vol. 88, no. 8, pp. 1270–1278, 2000.\n\n- [4] I. Bulyko, M. Ostendorf, and A. Stolcke, “Getting more mileage from" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.21250559134389066, + "doc_id": "68fb9739124ab8829593ca0ff8639fdfae1e508d7f56a9064d5125c935b68c75", + "edit_distance": 0.6699857752489331, + "f1_score": 0.9052631578947369, + "meteor": 0.37542879695189313, + "precision": 0.9626865671641791, + "pred_md": "Table 4: Local Average Treatment Effects (grams)\n\nPark and Kang (2008), has found a positive association between smoking behavior and other unhealthy lifestyles, and between higher education and a healthier lifestyle. Given this association, my MTE and LATE estimates suggest that births to women with an unhealthier lifestyle on average are more vulnerable to smoking.\n\n## 5.4.2 Quantile Treatment Effects for Compliers\n\nIn this subsection, I estimate the effect of smoking on quantiles of infant birth weight through the quantile treatment effect (QTE) parameter. q -QTE measures the difference in the q -quantile of Y 1 and Y 0 , which is written as Q q ( Y 1 ) -Q q ( Y 0 ) where Q q ( Y d ) denotes the q -quantile of Y d for d ∈ { 0 1 , } .\n\nLemma 4 forms a basis for causal inferences for compliers under Assumption 2.\n\n## Lemma 4 (Abadie et al. (2002)) Given Assumption 2(i),\n\n\n\nLemma 4 allows QTE to provide causal interpretations for compliers. Let Q q ( Y X,D,D | 1 > D 0 ) denote the q -quantile of Y given X and D for compliers. Then by Lemma 4,\n\n\n\nrepresents the causal effect of smoking cessation on the q -quantile infant birth weight for compliers. Now I estimate the quantile regression model based on the following specification for the q -quantile of Y given X and D for compliers : for q ∈ (0 1) , ,\n\n\n\n\n\n39", + "recall": 0.8543046357615894, + "true_md": "Park and Kang (2008), has found a positive association between smoking behavior and other unhealthy lifestyles, and between higher education and a healthier lifestyle. Given this association, my MTE and LATE estimates suggest that births to women with an unhealthier lifestyle on average are more vulnerable to smoking.\n\nIn this subsection, I estimate the effect of smoking on quantiles of infant birth weight through the quantile treatment effect (QTE) parameter. q -QTE measures the difference in the q -quantile of Y$_{1}$ and Y$_{0}$ , which is written as Q$_{q}$ ( Y$_{1}$ ) − Q$_{q}$ ( Y$_{0}$ ) where Q$_{q}$ ( Y$_{d}$ ) denotes the q -quantile of Y$_{d}$ for d ∈ { 0 , 1 } . Lemma 4 forms a basis for causal inferences for compliers under Assumption 2.\n\nLemma 4 (Abadie et al. (2002)) Given Assumption 2(i),\n\nLemma 4 allows QTE to provide causal interpretations for compliers. Let Q$_{q}$ ( Y | X, D, D$_{1}$ > D$_{0}$ ) denote the q -quantile of Y given X and D for compliers. Then by Lemma 4,\n\nrepresents the causal effect of smoking cessation on the q -quantile infant birth weight for compliers. Now I estimate the quantile regression model based on the following specification for the q -quantile of Y given X and D for compliers : for q ∈ (0 , 1) ,\n\nwhere β$_{q}$ ( X ) = β$_{1}$$\\_{q}$ + X $^{′}$β$\\_{2}$$_{q}$ , β$_{q}$ =    β$_{1}$$\\_{q}$ β$\\_{2}$$_{q}$   $_{}$, ( α$_{q}$, β$_{1}$$\\_{q}$ ) ∈$\\_{R}$ ×$\\_{R}$ , β$\\_{2}$$_{q}$ ∈$_{R}$ k and γ$_{q}$ ∈$_{R}$ $^{k}$.\n\n39\n\n$$Q$_{q}$ ( Y | X, D, D$_{1}$ > D$_{0}$ ) = α$_{q}$ + β$_{q}$ ( X ) D + X $^{′}$γ$_{q}$ , (17)$$\n\n$$Q$_{q}$ ( Y | X, D = 1 , D$_{1}$ > D$_{0}$ ) − Q$_{q}$ ( Y | X, D = 0 , D$_{1}$ > D$_{0}$ )$$\n\n$$( Y$_{1}$, Y$_{0}$ ) ⊥ D | X, D$_{1}$ > D$_{0}$$$\n\n## 5.4.2 Quantile Treatment Effects for Compliers\n\nTable 4: Local Average Treatment Effects (grams)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9066866283950602, + "doc_id": "73d4434fe4f5e5f55a2a491edc705afed35f8db1ccc61143aa883ec894dac449", + "edit_distance": 0.05654761904761905, + "f1_score": 0.93841642228739, + "meteor": 0.9459455289893238, + "precision": 0.9696969696969697, + "pred_md": "nection's sFC. Observing a strong static correlation coefficient makes it highly unlikely, if not physically impossible, for the corresponding dFC to fluctuate over a wide range. Instead, observing a weak static correlation coefficient is compatible with much more pronounced fluctuations, including temporary expression of strong positive or strong negative dFC. Hence, the interpretation of fluctuations in dFC will vary depending on whether the corresponding sFC is weak or strong.\n\nA corollary of this approach is that fluctuations in dynamic functional connectivity may be unsurprising, in a statistical sense, unless they violate expectations conditioned by the level of sFC. We argue that the interpretation of dFC should take into account whether observed features of dFC are expected or unexpected. Doing so allows one to uncover fluctuations in dynamic functional connectivity between regions that are unexpectedly strong or weak given those regions' static connectivity. To characterize such fluctuations, we propose a measure that we term conditional dynamic functional connectivity (or cdFC), which is defined as the probability of observing a dynamic functional connection of a particular magnitude given the magnitude of static connectivity for the same pair of brain regions.\n\nTo estimate the cdFC for any dynamic functional connection, we first characterize the distribution of expected dynamic fluctuations given a connection's static connectivity. There are many ways to approximate this distribution; the approach we use is to generate surrogate BOLD time series using the amplitude adjusted phase randomization procedure. Briefly, this procedure works by generating a normally-distributed surrogate time series that is rank-matched to the original time series. The surrogate time series is then transformed into the frequency domain via a discrete Fourier transform. Random phase (between [0 , 2 π ]) is then added to each frequency bin. If this procedure is being performed\n\n8", + "recall": 0.9090909090909091, + "true_md": "nection’s sFC. Observing a strong static correlation coefficient makes it highly unlikely, if not physically impossible, for the corresponding dFC to fluctuate over a wide range. Instead, observing a weak static correlation coefficient is compatible with much more pronounced fluctuations, including temporary ex- pression of strong positive or strong negative dFC. Hence, the interpretation of fluctuations in dFC will vary depending on whether the corresponding sFC is weak or strong.\n\nA corollary of this approach is that fluctuations in dynamic functional con- nectivity may be unsurprising, in a statistical sense, unless they violate expec- tations conditioned by the level of sFC. We argue that the interpretation of dFC should take into account whether observed features of dFC are expected or unexpected. Doing so allows one to uncover fluctuations in dynamic func- tional connectivity between regions that are unexpectedly strong or weak given those regions’ static connectivity. To characterize such fluctuations, we propose a measure that we term conditional dynamic functional connectivity (or cdFC), which is defined as the probability of observing a dynamic functional connec- tion of a particular magnitude given the magnitude of static connectivity for the same pair of brain regions.\n\nTo estimate the cdFC for any dynamic functional connection, we first char- acterize the distribution of expected dynamic fluctuations given a connection’s static connectivity. There are many ways to approximate this distribution; the approach we use is to generate surrogate BOLD time series using the ampli- tude adjusted phase randomization procedure. Briefly, this procedure works by generating a normally-distributed surrogate time series that is rank-matched to the original time series. The surrogate time series is then transformed into the frequency domain via a discrete Fourier transform. Random phase (between [0 , 2 π ]) is then added to each frequency bin. If this procedure is being performed\n\n8" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7250628171288992, + "doc_id": "503e47840d5f24e039fd1926f57b02487efd22cc23a77e7dc459de1204e54b3c", + "edit_distance": 0.21598639455782312, + "f1_score": 0.9457013574660634, + "meteor": 0.81222070438534, + "precision": 0.9587155963302753, + "pred_md": "Table 1: Data used in the recent literature\n\nand Sasaki (2013) took advantage of cigarette tax rates or tax increases. 13 The last strand takes a panel data approach. This approach isolates the effects of unobservables using data on mothers with multiple births and identifies the effect of smoking from the change in their smoking status from one pregnancy to another. To do this, Abrevaya (2006) constructed the panel data set with novel matching algorithms between women having multiple births and children on federal natality data. The panel data set constructed by Abrevaya (2006) has been used in other recent studies such as Arellano and Bonhomme (2011) and Jun et al. (2013). Jun et al. (2013) tested stochastic dominance between two marginal distributions of potential birth weight with and without smoking. Arellano and Bonhomme (2011) identified the distribution of smoking effects using the random coefficient panel data model.\n\nTo the best of my knowledge, the only existing study that examines the distribution of smoking effects is Arellano and Bonhomme (2012). While they point-identify the distribution of smoking effects, their approach presumes access to the panel data with individuals who changed their smoking status within their multiple births. Specifically, they use the following panel data model with random coefficients:\n\n\n\nwhere Y it is infant birth weight and D it is an indicator for woman i smoking before she had her t -th baby. Extending Kotlarski's deconvolution idea, they identify the distribution of β i = E Y [ it | D it = 1 , α , β i i ] -E Y [ it | D it = 0 , α , β i i ], which indicates the distribution of smoking effects in this example. For the identification, they assume strict exogeneity that mothers do not change their smoking behavior from their previous babies' birth weight. Furthermore, their estimation result is somewhat implausible. It is interpreted that smoking has a positive effect on infant birth weight for approximately 30% mothers. They conjecture that this might result from a misspecification problem such as the strict exogeneity condition, i.i.d. idiosyncratic shock, etc.\n\n13 Permutt and Hebel (1989), Evans and Ringel (1999) and Lien and Evans (2005) two-stage linear regression to estimate the average effect of smoking using an instrument. Hoderlein and Sasaki (2011) adopted the number of cigarettes as a continuous treatment, and identified and estimated the average marginal effect of a cigarette based on the nonseparable model with a triangular structure.\n\n33", + "recall": 0.9330357142857143, + "true_md": "Table 1: Data used in the recent literature\n\nand Sasaki (2013) took advantage of cigarette tax rates or tax increases. 13 The last strand takes a panel data approach. This approach isolates the effects of unobservables using data on mothers with multiple births and identifies the effect of smoking from the change in their smoking status from one pregnancy to another. To do this, Abrevaya (2006) constructed the panel data set with novel matching algorithms between women having multiple births and children on federal natality data. The panel data set constructed by Abrevaya (2006) has been used in other recent studies such as Arellano and Bonhomme (2011) and Jun et al. (2013). Jun et al. (2013) tested stochastic dominance between two marginal distributions of potential birth weight with and without smoking. Arellano and Bonhomme (2011) identified the distribution of smoking effects using the random coefficient panel data model.\n\nTo the best of my knowledge, the only existing study that examines the distribution of smoking effects is Arellano and Bonhomme (2012). While they point-identify the distribution of smoking effects, their approach presumes access to the panel data with individuals who changed their smoking status within their multiple births. Specifically, they use the following panel data model with random coefficients:\n\nwhere Y$_{it}$ is infant birth weight and D$_{it}$ is an indicator for woman i smoking before she had her t -th baby. Extending Kotlarski’s deconvolution idea, they identify the distribution of β$_{i}$ = E [ Y$_{it}$ | D$_{it}$ = 1 , α$_{i}$, β$_{i}$ ] − E [ Y$_{it}$ | D$_{it}$ = 0 , α$_{i}$, β$_{i}$ ], which indicates the distribution of smoking effects in this example. For the identifica- tion, they assume strict exogeneity that mothers do not change their smoking behavior from their previous babies’ birth weight. Furthermore, their estimation result is somewhat implausible. It is interpreted that smoking has a positive effect on infant birth weight for approximately 30% mothers. They conjecture that this might result from a misspecification problem such as the strict exogeneity condition, i.i.d. idiosyncratic shock, etc.\n\n$^{13}$Permutt and Hebel (1989), Evans and Ringel (1999) and Lien and Evans (2005) two-stage linear regression to estimate the average effect of smoking using an instrument. Hoderlein and Sasaki (2011) adopted the number of cigarettes as a continuous treatment, and identified and estimated the average marginal effect of a cigarette based on the nonseparable model with a triangular structure.\n\n33\n\n$$Y$_{it}$ = α$_{i}$ + β$_{i}$D$_{it}$ + X ′ $_{it}$γ + ε$_{it}$$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5243742852128556, + "doc_id": "15e05cbcf1ff6ab678d28849e441acee94b48c94db5d5deb4a4ba02ed4e60ed6", + "edit_distance": 0.3553459119496855, + "f1_score": 0.9476584022038569, + "meteor": 0.679029094949064, + "precision": 0.9608938547486033, + "pred_md": "depend on θ i , or the set of direct descendants of θ i in the model graph introduced in section 2.1. Finally, we denote the computational cost of evaluating the density functions corresponding to any subset x ⊂ Θ ∪ Y as dens( x ).\n\n## Scalar Sampling Computation\n\nOn each iteration of Ψ scalar = { ψ , . . . , ψ 1 d } , each sampler ψ i will incur computational cost C ψ ( i ) = dens( θ i ) + dens( x i ) + O (1). The trailing constant term represents generation of the proposal value and making the MH decision (generation from normal and uniform distributions, respectively). The total computational requirement of Ψ scalar is thus\n\n\n\nNote that under Ψ scalar , each density evaluation dens( θ i ) must occur independently. This is true even when the evaluation of a particular dens( θ i ) term necessitates the calculation of a subsuming multivariate density - in the most extreme case, dens(Θ). Thus, in the worst case, a single MCMC iteration of Ψ scalar could incur d evaluations of the entire joint density of Θ. A similar computational explosion can result from the calculation of each dens( x i ) term.\n\n## Block Sampling Computation\n\nWe now consider the components of C (Ψ block ). On each iteration of Ψ block , the sole sampler u block (Θ) requires evaluation of the complete prior and likelihood densities, dens(Θ ∪ Y ). This is notably different from the density evaluation terms appearing in C (Ψ scalar ), in that it incurs only a single evaluation of the complete joint model density. In addition, the adaptation routine of u block (Θ) requires a Cholesky factorization of the adapted covariance matrix, which requires O d ( 3 ) operations to calculate in full generality (Trefethen and Bau, 1997, p.176). This factorization occurs every AI iterations, where AI is the adaptation interval of u block , and therefore has an amortized computational cost of O d / ( 3 AI). Each iteration of u block requires generating a d -dimensional multivariate normal proposal, which requires O d ( 2 ) operations, and performing a single constant-time MH decision, which is dropped as a lower-order term. The total amortized computational requirement of\n\n11", + "recall": 0.9347826086956522, + "true_md": "depend on θ$_{i}$ , or the set of direct descendants of θ$_{i}$ in the model graph introduced in section 2.1. Finally, we denote the computational cost of evaluating the density functions corresponding to any subset x ⊂ Θ ∪ Y as dens( x ).\n\nOn each iteration of Ψ$_{scalar}$ = { ψ$_{1}$, . . . , ψ$_{d}$ } , each sampler ψ$_{i}$ will incur computational cost C ( ψ$_{i}$ ) = dens( θ$_{i}$ ) + dens( x$_{i}$ ) + O (1). The trailing constant term represents generation of the proposal value and making the MH decision (generation from normal and uniform distributions, respectively). The total computational requirement of Ψ$_{scalar}$ is thus\n\nNote that under Ψ$_{scalar}$, each density evaluation dens( θ$_{i}$ ) must occur independently. This is true even when the evaluation of a particular dens( θ$_{i}$ ) term necessitates the calculation of a subsuming multivariate density – in the most extreme case, dens(Θ). Thus, in the worst case, a single MCMC iteration of Ψ$_{scalar}$ could incur d evaluations of the entire joint density of Θ. A similar computational explosion can result from the calculation of each dens( x$_{i}$ ) term.\n\nWe now consider the components of C (Ψ$_{block}$). On each iteration of Ψ$_{block}$, the sole sampler u$_{block}$ (Θ) requires evaluation of the complete prior and likelihood densities, dens(Θ ∪ Y ). This is notably dif- ferent from the density evaluation terms appearing in C (Ψ$_{scalar}$), in that it incurs only a single evaluation of the complete joint model density. In addition, the adaptation routine of u$_{block}$ (Θ) requires a Cholesky factorization of the adapted covariance matrix, which requires O ( d $^{3}$) operations to calculate in full generality (Trefethen and Bau, 1997, p.176). This factorization occurs every AI iterations, where AI is the adaptation interval of u$_{block}$ , and therefore has an amortized computa- tional cost of O ( d $^{3}$/ AI). Each iteration of u$_{block}$ requires generating a d -dimensional multivariate normal proposal, which requires O ( d $^{2}$) operations, and performing a single constant-time MH de- cision, which is dropped as a lower-order term. The total amortized computational requirement of\n\n## Scalar Sampling Computation\n\n## Block Sampling Computation\n\n11\n\n$$C (Ψ$_{scalar}$) = d ∑ i =1 C ( ψ$_{i}$ ) = d ∑ i =1 dens( θ$_{i}$ ) + d ∑ i =1 dens( x$_{i}$ ) + O ( d ) .$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9795648242679993, + "doc_id": "b8ba77a552e0a964218c60b3aa166f80f0fab8e00ebdab9b1fec49157d31bf43", + "edit_distance": 0.010416666666666666, + "f1_score": 0.9879032258064517, + "meteor": 0.9897879555932418, + "precision": 0.9879032258064516, + "pred_md": "requirements of achieving improvements in convergence rate. This may give a different picture of the actual efficiency of a sampling algorithm. Accelerated convergence at an extreme computational cost is obviously not optimal. Second, the computational requirements of different steps will vary greatly across platforms, depending on such factors as processor, memory architecture, use of efficient linear algebra packages, etc. Therefore, even if theoretical comparisons were extended to incorporate aspects of computation, the best block sampling scheme would remain platform-dependent. It is important to recognize that computational costs affect not only the proposal step - such as the cost of generating a multivariate normal proposal - but also model computations and density evaluations. Some parts of hierarchical models may inherently involve expensive computations, which can impact the relative efficiency of different blocking schemes. Third, existing theories and methods presume that some wise, manual selection of blocks may be feasible, based for example on an understanding of the model structure, which leads to understanding which posterior dimensions may be correlated. In general, however, it is difficult to know a priori which dimensions will be correlated, which is one purpose of automating a procedure like MCMC in the first place.\n\nHere, we present a procedure for the automated exploration of MCMC blocking schemes, seeking a highly efficient MCMC algorithm specific to the hierarchical model and computing environment at hand. This represents a higher level of automated algorithm generation than is provided by existing software, which serve to produce 'one size fits all' MCMC algorithms. The family of BUGS packages (WinBUGS, JAGS, and OpenBUGS; Lunn et al., 2000; Plummer, 2011; Lunn et al., 2012) assigns samplers based on local characteristics of each model parameter, using a combination of Gibbs sampling, adaptive rejection sampling, slice sampling, and, in limited cases, block sampling. Other MCMC packages including ADMB (Skaug and Fournier, 2006) and Stan (Stan Development Team, 2014) use Hamiltonian MCMC sampling (Neal, 2011), which may generally be more efficient but nevertheless represents a static approach to MCMC algorithm generation. Yet other promising methods such as Langevin sampling (Marshall and Roberts, 2012) are not incorporated into software commonly used by practitioners. For simplicity, we restrict our attention to univariate and blocked adaptive random walk sampling. However, the main concept of exploring the space of parameter blocks to improve MCMC efficiency generalizes to allow the use of other sampling methods.\n\nIn section 2, we examine the pros and cons of univariate versus block random walk sampling, both\n\n4", + "recall": 0.9879032258064516, + "true_md": "requirements of achieving improvements in convergence rate. This may give a different picture of the actual efficiency of a sampling algorithm. Accelerated convergence at an extreme computational cost is obviously not optimal. Second, the computational requirements of different steps will vary greatly across platforms, depending on such factors as processor, memory architecture, use of efficient linear algebra packages, etc. Therefore, even if theoretical comparisons were extended to incorporate aspects of computation, the best block sampling scheme would remain platform-dependent. It is important to recognize that computational costs affect not only the proposal step – such as the cost of generating a multivariate normal proposal – but also model computations and density evaluations. Some parts of hierarchical models may inherently involve expensive computations, which can impact the relative efficiency of different blocking schemes. Third, existing theories and methods presume that some wise, manual selection of blocks may be feasible, based for example on an understanding of the model structure, which leads to understanding which posterior dimensions may be correlated. In general, however, it is difficult to know a priori which dimensions will be correlated, which is one purpose of automating a procedure like MCMC in the first place.\n\nHere, we present a procedure for the automated exploration of MCMC blocking schemes, seeking a highly efficient MCMC algorithm specific to the hierarchical model and computing environment at hand. This represents a higher level of automated algorithm generation than is provided by existing software, which serve to produce “one size fits all” MCMC algorithms. The family of BUGS packages (WinBUGS, JAGS, and OpenBUGS; Lunn et al., 2000; Plummer, 2011; Lunn et al., 2012) assigns samplers based on local characteristics of each model parameter, using a combination of Gibbs sampling, adaptive rejection sampling, slice sampling, and, in limited cases, block sampling. Other MCMC packages including ADMB (Skaug and Fournier, 2006) and Stan (Stan Development Team, 2014) use Hamiltonian MCMC sampling (Neal, 2011), which may generally be more efficient but nevertheless represents a static approach to MCMC algorithm generation. Yet other promising methods such as Langevin sampling (Marshall and Roberts, 2012) are not incorporated into software commonly used by practitioners. For simplicity, we restrict our attention to univariate and blocked adaptive random walk sampling. However, the main concept of exploring the space of parameter blocks to improve MCMC efficiency generalizes to allow the use of other sampling methods.\n\nIn section 2, we examine the pros and cons of univariate versus block random walk sampling, both\n\n4" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8961142232510827, + "doc_id": "420cec8bb3929a4426390a9c34b2c6f9322ca6593042e1471bc60fedf505dea3", + "edit_distance": 0.5928753180661578, + "f1_score": 0.9718670076726341, + "meteor": 0.747942359772469, + "precision": 0.9844559585492227, + "pred_md": "## Fixed Size Blocks of Varying Correlation\n\nThe next model structure exhibits fixed size groupings of parameters, with posterior correlations ranging between 0 and 0.9. Each such model contains N = 10 n parameters. Again employing multivariate normal distributions, we induce nine disjoint groupings of n parameters each, having intra-group pairwise correlations of 0.1, 0.2, . . . , and 0.9. The remaining n parameters are fully uncorrelated. Three such models of this structure are constructed, using the values n = 2, 5, and 10. As in the previous models, these do not include any likelihood term.\n\n## Random Effects Model\n\nWe select the 'litters' model from among the original example models provided with the MCMC package WinBUGS. This random effects model contains two groups of 16 binomial observations. Within each group, the binomial probabilities are modeled as random effects arising from a beta distribution. The particular parameterization of the beta distributions (in terms of α and β , rather than µ and σ ) results in strong correlations between each α , β i i pair. The WinBUGS manual comments upfront that this model exhibits slow mixing. We consider an informed MCMC algorithm, which blocks each α , β i i pair. In addition, the beta-binomial conjugacy relationships permit use of cross-level sampling, where we jointly sample top-level parameters and conjugate latent states, as used by Rue and Held (2005, p.141-143).\n\n## Auto-Regressive Model\n\nWe select the 'ice' model from among the examples provided with WinBUGS as an auto-regressive (AR; Harvey, 1993) example, which is also analyzed in Breslow and Clayton (1993). The data contains 77 incident counts of breast cancer occurring in Iceland, which are modeled as Poisson counts. Explanatory variables include age group, year of birth (represented using 11 cohorts ranging between 1840 and 1949), and the total person-years for the subjects in each group. The model uses second-order AR smoothing of birth cohort effects.\n\n19", + "recall": 0.9595959595959596, + "true_md": "## Fixed Size Blocks of Varying Correlation\n\n## Random Effects Model\n\n## Auto-Regressive Model\n\nWe select the “ice” model from among the examples provided with WinBUGS as an auto-regressive (AR; Harvey, 1993) example, which is also analyzed in Breslow and Clayton (1993). The data contains 77 incident counts of breast cancer occurring in Iceland, which are modeled as Poisson counts. Explanatory variables include age group, year of birth (represented using 11 cohorts ranging between 1840 and 1949), and the total person-years for the subjects in each group. The model uses second-order AR smoothing of birth cohort effects.\n\nWe select the “litters” model from among the original example models provided with the MCMC package WinBUGS. This random effects model contains two groups of 16 binomial observations. Within each group, the binomial probabilities are modeled as random effects arising from a beta distribution. The particular parameterization of the beta distributions (in terms of α and β , rather than µ and σ ) results in strong correlations between each α$_{i}$, β$_{i}$ pair. The WinBUGS manual comments upfront that this model exhibits slow mixing. We consider an informed MCMC algorithm, which blocks each α$_{i}$, β$_{i}$ pair. In addition, the beta-binomial conjugacy relationships permit use of cross-level sampling, where we jointly sample top-level parameters and conjugate latent states, as used by Rue and Held (2005, p.141-143).\n\nThe next model structure exhibits fixed size groupings of parameters, with posterior correlations ranging between 0 and 0.9. Each such model contains N = 10 n parameters. Again employing multivariate normal distributions, we induce nine disjoint groupings of n parameters each, having intra-group pairwise correlations of 0.1, 0.2, . . . , and 0.9. The remaining n parameters are fully uncorrelated. Three such models of this structure are constructed, using the values n = 2, 5, and 10. As in the previous models, these do not include any likelihood term.\n\n19" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "6be3b0de8011176970ab395794cabd7f39368ed67cfb09eee966cb023713ca9d", + "edit_distance": 0.9988165680473373, + "f1_score": 0.006920415224913495, + "meteor": 0.0006573757559821193, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "45", + "recall": 0.003472222222222222, + "true_md": "- Chernozhukov, V., Escanciano, J. C., Ichimura, H., and Newey, W. K. (2016), “Locally Robust Semi- parametric Estimation,” arXiv preprint arXiv:1608.00033 , .\n\n- Crump, R. K., Hotz, V. J., Imbens, G. W., and Mitnik, O. A. (2009), “Dealing with limited overlap in estimation of average treatment effects,” Biometrika , 96(1), 187–199.\n\n- Dehejia, R., and Wahba, S. (2002), “Propensity score-matching methods for nonexperimental causal studies,” The Review of Economics and Statistics , 84(1), 151–161.\n\n- Dominguez, M. A., and Lobato, I. N. (2004), “Consistent Estimation of Models Defined by Conditional Moment Restrictions,” Econometrica , 72(5), 1601–1615.\n\n- Donald, S. G., and Hsu, Y.-C. (2014), “Estimation and inference for distribution functions and quantile functions in treatment effect models,” Journal of Econometrics , 178(3), 383–397.\n\n- Escanciano, J. C. (2006 a ), “A consistent diagnostic test for regression models using projections,” Econo- metric Theory , 22, 1030–1051.\n\n- Escanciano, J. C. (2006 b ), “Goodness-of-Fit Tests for Linear and Nonlinear Time Series Models,” Journal of the American Statistical Association , 101(474), 531–541.\n\n- Escanciano, J. C. (2009 a ), “On the Lack of Power of Omnibus Specification Tests,” Econometric Theory , 25(01), 162–194.\n\n- Escanciano, J. C. (2009 b ), Simple bootstrap tests for conditional moment restrictions,, Technical report, Indiana University.\n\n- Escanciano, J. C., and Goh, S. C. (2014), “Specification analysis of linear quantile models,” Journal of Econometrics , 178, 495–507.\n\n- Fan, Y., and Li, Q. (1996), “Consistent model specification tests: omitted variables and semiparametric functional forms,” Econometrica , 64(4), 865–890.\n\n- Firpo, S. (2007), “Efficient semiparametric estimation of quantile treatment effects,” Econometrica , 75(1), 259–276.\n\n- Fortin, N., Lemieux, T., and Firpo, S. (2011), “Decomposition Methods in Economics,” Handbook of Labor Economics , 4(a), 1–102.\n\n- Frankel, J. A., and Rose, A. K. (2005), “Is Trade Good or Bad for the Environment? Sorting Out the Causality,” Review of Economics and Statistics , 87(1), 85–91.\n\n- Frazier, D. T., Oka, T., and Zhu, D. (2018), “Indirect Inference with a Non-Smooth Criterion Function,” Mimeo , .\n\n- Fr¨ olich, M. (2004), “Finite-sample properties of propensity-score matching and weighting estimators,” The Review of Economics and Statistics , 86(1), 77–90.\n\n- Gonz´ alez-Manteiga, W., and Crujeiras, R. M. (2013), “An updated review of Goodness-of-Fit tests for regression models,” Test , 22(3), 361–411.\n\n- Hahn, J. (1998), “On the Role of the Propensity Score in Efficient Semiparametric Estimation of Average Treatment Effects,” Econometrica , 66(2), 315–331.\n\n- Hardle, W., and Mammen, E. (1993), “Comparing nonparametric versus parametric regression fits,” The Annals of Statistics , 21(4), 1926–1947.\n\n- Heckman, J. J., Ichimura, H., Smith, J., and Todd, P. (1998), “Characterizing selection bias using experimental data,” Econometrica , 66(5), 1017–1098.\n\n- Heckman, J. J., Ichimura, H., and Todd, P. (1997), “Matching as an econometric evaluation estimator: Evidence from evaluating a job training programme,” The Review of Economic Studies , 64(4605-654).\n\n- Heckman, J. J., Ichimura, H., and Todd, P. (1998), “Matching as an econometric evaluation estimator,” The Review of Economic Studies , 65(2), 261–294.\n\n- Heckman, J. J., and Vytlacil, E. J. (2007), “Econometric evaluation of social programs, part I: Causal models, structural models and econometric policy evaluation,” Handbook of Econometrics , 6B(70), 4779–4874.\n\n45" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9505243194701811, + "doc_id": "af3aa0d294ec508278dc3cd939ae7ad5ce67dd659e3f5e31648877e794df3914", + "edit_distance": 0.03232323232323232, + "f1_score": 0.9556025369978859, + "meteor": 0.9696324116524219, + "precision": 0.9741379310344828, + "pred_md": "## 1 Introduction\n\nThe propensity score, which is defined as the conditional probability of receiving treatment given covariates, is one of the most widely used tools for causal inference. Part of its popularity can be credited to the seminal result of Rosenbaum and Rubin (1983): if the treatment assignment is independent of the potential outcomes conditional on a vector of covariates, then one can obtain unbiased and consistent estimators of different treatment effect measures by adjusting for the propensity score alone, greatly reducing the dimensionality of the underlying problem. Several methods that exploit this important insight are now an essential part of the applied researcher's toolkit. Examples include matching, see e.g. Rosenbaum and Rubin (1985), Heckman et al. (1997) and Abadie and Imbens (2016); inverse probability weighting (IPW), see e.g. Rosenbaum (1987), Hirano et al. (2003) and Donald and Hsu (2014); regression methods, see e.g. Hahn (1998) and Firpo (2007); and many others. For literature reviews, see Heckman and Vytlacil (2007) and Imbens and Wooldridge (2009).\n\nDespite their popularity, a main concern of these methods is that the propensity score is usually unknown, and therefore has to be estimated. Given the high dimensionality of available covariates, researchers are usually coerced to adopt a parametric model for the propensity score since nonparametric estimation methods suffer from the 'curse of dimensionality', implying that the resulting treatment effect estimators can have considerably poor properties, even for large sample sizes. Such a common practice raises the important issue of model misspecification. Indeed, as shown by Frolich (2004), Millimet and Tchernis (2009), Huber et al. (2013) and Busso et al. (2014), propensity score misspecifications can lead to misleading treatment effect estimates.\n\nIn this paper we propose new specification tests for parametric propensity score models. Our proposal builds on the common practice of comparing the density of the propensity score between treated and control groups to determine the covariate overlap region, see e.g. Heckman, Ichimura, Smith and Todd (1998). However, instead of comparing conditional densities, we focus on comparing conditional cumulative distribution functions (CDFs). In particular, we derive a restriction between the propensity score CDFs among treated and control groups that gives information on overlapping 1 , show that such a restriction is equivalent to a particular infinite number of unconditional moment conditions, and develop tests based upon it.\n\n1 We thank an anonymous referee for making this suggestion.\n\n2", + "recall": 0.9377593360995851, + "true_md": "## 1 Introduction\n\nThe propensity score, which is defined as the conditional probability of receiving treatment given covariates, is one of the most widely used tools for causal inference. Part of its popularity can be credited to the seminal result of Rosenbaum and Rubin (1983): if the treatment assignment is independent of the potential outcomes conditional on a vector of covariates, then one can obtain unbiased and consistent estimators of different treatment effect measures by adjusting for the propensity score alone, greatly reducing the dimensionality of the underlying problem. Several methods that exploit this important insight are now an essential part of the applied researcher’s toolkit. Examples include matching, see e.g. Rosenbaum and Rubin (1985), Heckman et al. (1997) and Abadie and Imbens (2016); inverse probability weighting (IPW), see e.g. Rosenbaum (1987), Hirano et al. (2003) and Donald and Hsu (2014); regression methods, see e.g. Hahn (1998) and Firpo (2007); and many others. For literature reviews, see Heckman and Vytlacil (2007) and Imbens and Wooldridge (2009).\n\nDespite their popularity, a main concern of these methods is that the propensity score is usually unknown, and therefore has to be estimated. Given the high dimensionality of available covariates, researchers are usually coerced to adopt a parametric model for the propensity score since nonparametric estimation methods suffer from the “curse of dimensionality”, implying that the resulting treatment effect estimators can have considerably poor properties, even for large sample sizes. Such a common practice raises the important issue of model misspecification. Indeed, as shown by Fr¨ olich (2004), Millimet and Tchernis (2009), Huber et al. (2013) and Busso et al. (2014), propensity score misspecifications can lead to misleading treatment effect estimates.\n\nIn this paper we propose new specification tests for parametric propensity score mod- els. Our proposal builds on the common practice of comparing the density of the propensity score between treated and control groups to determine the covariate overlap region, see e.g. Heckman, Ichimura, Smith and Todd (1998). However, instead of comparing conditional densi- ties, we focus on comparing conditional cumulative distribution functions (CDFs). In particular, we derive a restriction between the propensity score CDFs among treated and control groups that gives information on overlapping $^{1}$, show that such a restriction is equivalent to a particular infinite number of unconditional moment conditions, and develop tests based upon it.\n\n1 We thank an anonymous referee for making this suggestion.\n\n2" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6357102190344566, + "doc_id": "9719bc13c656c716b113cbbccabefeae1b69c36f197b0ed25e95cbe327ac31de", + "edit_distance": 0.24838709677419354, + "f1_score": 0.9708029197080292, + "meteor": 0.7865510148961992, + "precision": 0.9637681159420289, + "pred_md": "S = ⊕ a ∈ G S a then we may write h as the sum of homogeneous elements. Thus there is a positive integer p and distinct b , . . . , b 1 p ∈ G such that h = h 1 + · · · + h p where ∂h i = b i for each i = 1 , . . . , p . We will show Im Φ ⊆ { b , . . . , b 1 p } .\n\nglyph[negationslash]\n\nFor all x, y ∈ X if xρy we have h x, y ( ) = 1 hence h 1 ( x, y ) + · · · + h p ( x, y ) = 1. Then h i ( x, y ) = 0 for some i ≤ p so, by construction, we have Φ ( x, y ) = b i . Since x, y ∈ X with xρy were arbitrarily chosen we can conclude Im Φ ⊆ { b , . . . , b 1 p } . This gives the desired result, Im Φ is finite.\n\nDefinition 3.3 We say a grading is induced by a homomorphism Φ if it can be constructed in the setting of Theorem 3.2 with ImΦ finite.\n\nTheorem 3.4 Let S = I ( X,ρ,R ) be a generalized incidence ring and let G be a monoid. Suppose S = ⊕ a ∈ G S a is a G -graded ring.\n\n- 1. If the grading is good then there is a homomorphism Φ : ρ → G given by Φ( x, y ) = ∂e x,y for all x, y ∈ X with xρy .\n- 2. If the grading is good and e xx ∈ S 1 for all x ∈ X then the grading is induced by Φ . Moreover, the grading is finite.\n\nProof. Part 1 can be proved directly from equation 4. To prove part 2 we let a ∈ Supp G S be arbitrarily chosen. We will show S a is given by equation 5 so the grading is induced by Φ. Then the grading is finite since Supp G S = ImΦ.\n\nglyph[negationslash]\n\nSuppose f ∈ I ( X,ρ,R ) and for all x, y ∈ X with xρy if f ( x, y ) = 0 then Φ( x, y ) = a . We must prove such an f is contained in S a . Since S is graded there is a positive integer m and nonzero homogeneous f , . . . , f 1 m ∈ S such that\n\n8", + "recall": 0.9779411764705882, + "true_md": "S = ⊕ a ∈ $_{G}$S$_{a}$ then we may write h as the sum of homogeneous elements. Thus there is a positive integer p and distinct b$_{1}$, . . . , b$_{p}$ ∈ G such that h = h$_{1}$ + · · · + h$_{p}$ where ∂h$_{i}$ = b$_{i}$ for each i = 1 , . . . , p . We will show Im Φ ⊆ { b$_{1}$, . . . , b$_{p}$ } .\n\nFor all x, y ∈ X if xρy we have h ( x, y ) = 1 hence h$_{1}$ ( x, y ) + · · · + h$_{p}$ ( x, y ) = 1. Then h$_{i}$ ( x, y ) ̸ = 0 for some i ≤ p so, by construction, we have Φ ( x, y ) = b$_{i}$ . Since x, y ∈ X with xρy were arbitrarily chosen we can conclude Im Φ ⊆ { b$_{1}$, . . . , b$_{p}$ } . This gives the desired result, Im Φ is finite.\n\nDefinition 3.3 We say a grading is induced by a homomorphism Φ if it can be constructed in the setting of Theorem 3.2 with Im Φ finite.\n\nTheorem 3.4 Let S = I ( X, ρ, R ) be a generalized incidence ring and let G be a monoid. Suppose S = ⊕ a ∈ $_{G}$S$_{a}$ is a G -graded ring.\n\n- 1. If the grading is good then there is a homomorphism Φ : ρ → G given by Φ ( x, y ) = ∂e$_{x,y}$ for all x, y ∈ X with xρy .\n\n- 2. If the grading is good and e$_{xx}$ ∈ S$_{1}$ for all x ∈ X then the grading is induced by Φ . Moreover, the grading is finite.\n\nProof. Part 1 can be proved directly from equation 4. To prove part 2 we let a ∈ Supp$_{G}$ S be arbitrarily chosen. We will show S$_{a}$ is given by equation 5 so the grading is induced by Φ. Then the grading is finite since Supp$_{G}$ S = Im Φ.\n\nSuppose f ∈ I ( X, ρ, R ) and for all x, y ∈ X with xρy if f ( x, y ) ̸ = 0 then Φ ( x, y ) = a . We must prove such an f is contained in S$_{a}$ . Since S is graded there is a positive integer m and nonzero homogeneous f$_{1}$, . . . , f$_{m}$ ∈ S such that\n\n8" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8262177443252597, + "doc_id": "feb226f5ca3873c47580bb7665c51abafd5ab8b2cce39815f7352ef75ea3a1cc", + "edit_distance": 0.22424242424242424, + "f1_score": 0.9788732394366199, + "meteor": 0.8923207294258326, + "precision": 0.9928571428571429, + "pred_md": "Figure 2: MCMC runtimes for the All Scalar and All Blocked algorithms, for univariate normal, univariate gamma, and multivariate normal model structures.\n\nFigure 2: MCMC runtimes for the All Scalar and All Blocked algorithms, for univariate normal, univariate gamma, and multivariate normal model structures.\n\n## 2.4 Overall Efficiency\n\nWe have examined both the algorithmic and computational efficiency of MCMC algorithms, each of which fundamentally affect overall MCMC efficiency. We define the overall efficiency of Ψ simply as E (Ψ) = A (Ψ) /C (Ψ). We consider this to be a sensible measure of the overall efficiency of an MCMC algorithm, since E (Ψ) may be interpreted as the number of effective samples produced per unit of MCMC algorithm runtime, for the slowest mixing model parameter. If we can construct Ψ to maximize E (Ψ), then Ψ is the most time-efficient MCMC algorithm for generating effectively independent samples to approximate the true, joint posterior distribution of Θ.\n\nThat being said, from our examination of algorithmic and computational efficiency, it is not immediately clear how to balance tradeoffs between A (Ψ) and C (Ψ) to maximize E (Ψ). We have generally considered the two boundary-case algorithms Ψ scalar and Ψ block , but a huge number of intermediate algorithms exist. For Ψ ∈ Ψ M , we may gain useful insights regarding the factors affecting E (Ψ) in terms of the properties of each ψ i . C (Ψ) = ∑ k i =1 C ψ ( i ), and the values A (Ψ , θ i ) which determine A (Ψ) each result from a single application of scalar or block sampling - although\n\n13", + "recall": 0.9652777777777778, + "true_md": "Figure 2: MCMC runtimes for the All Scalar and All Blocked algorithms, for univariate normal, univariate gamma, and multivariate normal model structures.\n\nWe have examined both the algorithmic and computational efficiency of MCMC algorithms, each of which fundamentally affect overall MCMC efficiency. We define the overall efficiency of Ψ simply as E (Ψ) = A (Ψ) /C (Ψ). We consider this to be a sensible measure of the overall efficiency of an MCMC algorithm, since E (Ψ) may be interpreted as the number of effective samples produced per unit of MCMC algorithm runtime, for the slowest mixing model parameter. If we can construct Ψ to maximize E (Ψ), then Ψ is the most time-efficient MCMC algorithm for generating effectively independent samples to approximate the true, joint posterior distribution of Θ.\n\nThat being said, from our examination of algorithmic and computational efficiency, it is not immediately clear how to balance tradeoffs between A (Ψ) and C (Ψ) to maximize E (Ψ). We have generally considered the two boundary-case algorithms Ψ$_{scalar}$ and Ψ$_{block}$, but a huge number of intermediate algorithms exist. For Ψ ∈ Ψ$_{M}$ , we may gain useful insights regarding the factors affecting E (Ψ) in terms of the properties of each ψ$_{i}$ . C (Ψ) = ∑ k i $_{=1}$C ( ψ$_{i}$ ), and the values A (Ψ ,θ$_{i}$ ) which determine A (Ψ) each result from a single application of scalar or block sampling – although\n\n13\n\n## 2.4 Overall Efficiency" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9623391992210193, + "doc_id": "9779fa3111e6e13a2c03132d1e281c781744728e7ff003c6019b78d3124cc806", + "edit_distance": 0.42467948717948717, + "f1_score": 0.9793977812995246, + "meteor": 0.9615846269249227, + "precision": 0.987220447284345, + "pred_md": "arXiv:1504.02490v1 [cs.CL] 9 Apr 2015\n\n## Leveraging Twitter for Low-Resource Conversational Speech Language Modeling\n\nAaron Jaech, and Mari Ostendorf\n\nAbstract -In applications involving conversational speech, data sparsity is a limiting factor in building a better language model. We propose a simple, language-independent method to quickly harvest large amounts of data from Twitter to supplement a smaller training set that is more closely matched to the domain. The techniques lead to a significant reduction in perplexity on four low-resource languages even though the presence on Twitter of these languages is relatively small. We also find that the Twitter text is more useful for learning word classes than the in-domain text and that use of these word classes leads to further reductions in perplexity. Additionally, we introduce a method of using social and textual information to prioritize the download queue during the Twitter crawling. This maximizes the amount of useful data that can be collected, impacting both perplexity and vocabulary coverage.\n\n## I. INTRODUCTION\n\nC ONVERSATIONAL speech is very different in style from broadcast news and prepared speeches, so the language models used in automatic speech recognition (ASR) of conversational speech rely on training from speech transcripts, which are more costly to obtain than more formal written text. Thus, data sparsity is typically the limiting factor\n\nSupported by the Intelligence Advanced Research Projects Activity (IARPA) via Department of Defense US Army Research Laboratory contract number W911NF-12-C-0014. The U.S. Government is authorized to reproduce and distribute reprints for Governmental purposes notwithstanding any copyright annotation thereon. Disclaimer: The views and conclusions contained herein are those of the authors and should not be interpreted as necessarily representing the official policies or endorsements, either expressed or implied, of IARPA, DoD/ARL, or the U.S. Government.\n\nA. Jaech and M. Ostendorf are with the Department of Electrical Engineering, University of Washington, Seattle, WA 98195 USA e-mail: { ajaech,ostendor } @uw.edu.\n\nfor language model performance. For many less well-studied languages, there is little transcribed speech available and obtaining additional training data in the target domain is no easy task. An attractive alternative to collecting additional data is to direct that effort towards building models that require less training data. Since little additional work is needed to reuse these models, the benefit of this effort is compounded with each new language thus lowering the barrier for bringing ASR to low-resource languages. While new modeling approaches are valuable, it is the case that even these models benefit from additional data, and researchers have long been exploring mechanisms for using out-of-domain data in combination with a small in-domain corpus to build more robust language models. Different sources of spontaneous speech can help with common words, but these are often not available for less well-studied languages. Even with such data, covering domainspecific vocabulary typically means using written text sources for training language models for ASR. Finding informal text that is useful for modeling conversational speech can be a challenge.\n\nThe Internet has been an attractive place to go for researchers looking to expand their training data, as described in the next section. However, if done without care, pulling large amounts of data from the Internet will give no benefit. For example, in work on recognizing English conversational speech in broadcast talk shows, the Google n-grams provided no benefit to perplexity or word error rate [1]. Here, we instead\n\n1", + "recall": 0.9716981132075472, + "true_md": "# Leveraging Twitter for Low-Resource Conversational Speech Language Modeling\n\nAaron Jaech, and Mari Ostendorf\n\nAbstract —In applications involving conversational speech, data sparsity is a limiting factor in building a better language model. We propose a simple, language-independent method to quickly harvest large amounts of data from Twitter to supplement a smaller training set that is more closely matched to the domain. The techniques lead to a significant reduction in perplexity on four low-resource languages even though the presence on Twitter of these languages is relatively small. We also find that the Twitter text is more useful for learning word classes than the in-domain text and that use of these word classes leads to further reductions in perplexity. Additionally, we introduce a method of using social and textual information to prioritize the download queue during the Twitter crawling. This maximizes the amount of useful data that can be collected, impacting both perplexity and vocabulary coverage.\n\nC ONVERSATIONAL speech is very different in style from broadcast news and prepared speeches, so the language models used in automatic speech recognition (ASR) of conversational speech rely on training from speech tran- scripts, which are more costly to obtain than more formal written text. Thus, data sparsity is typically the limiting factor\n\nfor language model performance. For many less well-studied languages, there is little transcribed speech available and obtaining additional training data in the target domain is no easy task. An attractive alternative to collecting additional data is to direct that effort towards building models that require less training data. Since little additional work is needed to reuse these models, the benefit of this effort is compounded with each new language thus lowering the barrier for bringing ASR to low-resource languages. While new modeling approaches are valuable, it is the case that even these models benefit from additional data, and researchers have long been exploring mechanisms for using out-of-domain data in combination with a small in-domain corpus to build more robust language models. Different sources of spontaneous speech can help with common words, but these are often not available for less well-studied languages. Even with such data, covering domain- specific vocabulary typically means using written text sources for training language models for ASR. Finding informal text that is useful for modeling conversational speech can be a challenge.\n\nThe Internet has been an attractive place to go for re- searchers looking to expand their training data, as described in the next section. However, if done without care, pulling large amounts of data from the Internet will give no benefit. For example, in work on recognizing English conversational speech in broadcast talk shows, the Google n-grams provided no benefit to perplexity or word error rate [1]. Here, we instead\n\nSupported by the Intelligence Advanced Research Projects Activity (IARPA) via Department of Defense US Army Research Laboratory contract number W911NF-12-C-0014. The U.S. Government is authorized to reproduce and distribute reprints for Governmental purposes notwithstanding any copy- right annotation thereon. Disclaimer: The views and conclusions contained herein are those of the authors and should not be interpreted as necessarily representing the official policies or endorsements, either expressed or implied, of IARPA, DoD/ARL, or the U.S. Government.\n\nA. Jaech and M. Ostendorf are with the Department of Electrical Engineering, University of Washington, Seattle, WA 98195 USA e-mail: { ajaech,ostendor } @uw.edu.\n\n## I. INTRODUCTION\n\narXiv:1504.02490v1 [cs.CL] 9 Apr 2015\n\n1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.23326007564596743, + "doc_id": "eb511735078d00716b6e8f4471ed39a830ac67b0365aa7214d9670254ffda19a", + "edit_distance": 0.599128540305011, + "f1_score": 0.8949152542372881, + "meteor": 0.47642191247915316, + "precision": 0.9361702127659575, + "pred_md": "\n\nUsing similar method with that of the first one, the second derivative can be computed as\n\n\n\nCombining (4.52) and (4.53) , we can obtain the following matrix for the linearization at the grazing point x , ∗\n\n\n\nIt is appearant that the matrix W ix ( x ∗ ) is continuous with respect to its arguments, since it is constant if the point x ∗ +∆ x is not from the orbit of the grazing solution. Since of the limit procedure, it is the same constant for all points of the grazing solution. Thus, the Jacobian is constant matrix in a neighborhood of the grazing point and condition ( A 2) is valid.\n\nNow, let us check the validity of the condition ( A 3) . Consider a near solution x t ( ) = x t, ( 0 , x ¯) , to the grazing cycle Ψ( ) t , where ¯ x = (0 ¯ ) , x 2 , ¯ x 2 > Ψ (0) 2 = 1 . So, the near solution x t ( ) satisfies the condition ( N 1) . For the grazing periodic solution, it is true that θ i +1 -θ i = 2 π = ω. The grazing solution Ψ( ) = t x t, ( 0 (0 1)) , , , touches the line of discontinuity Γ at t = ω 8 . The first coordinate of the near solution is x 1 ( ) = ¯ t x 2 sin( ) t , and x 1 ( ω 8 ) = ¯ x 2 sin( ω 8 ) = ¯ x 2 √ 2 > Ψ ( 1 ω 8 ) = 1 √ 2 . Consequently, the near solution x t ( ) meets the line of discontinuity Γ before the moment ω 8 . This implies that 0 < τ x ( ) < π 4 -/epsilon1, for a small positive /epsilon1 whenever x 1 ( ) t is close to 1 √ 2 . Thus, the condition ( A 3) is valid and Lemma 3.1 proves condition ( C . )\n\nIn the light of the above discussion, the bivalued matrix of coefficients for the grazing point is easily obtained as\n\n29", + "recall": 0.8571428571428571, + "true_md": "$$∂W$_{i}$ ( x ( ξ, 0 , x ∗ + Δ x )) ∂x 0 1 =   $^{−}$$^{√$_{2 + 0}$$_{.}$$_{22}$}$ $_{2}$√$_{2}$ √$_{2 + 0}$$_{.}$$_{22}$ $_{2}$√$_{2}$    . (4.52)$$\n\n$$∂W$_{i}$ ( x ( ξ, 0 , x ∗ + Δ x )) ∂x 0 2 =    √$_{2 + 0}$$_{.}$$_{22}$ $_{2}$√$_{2}$ − √$_{2 + 0}$$_{.}$$_{22}$ $_{2}$√$_{2}$    . (4.53)$$\n\n$$W$_{ix}$ ( x ∗ ) =   $^{−}$$^{√$_{2 + 0}$$_{.}$$_{22}$}$ $_{2}$√$_{2}$ √$_{2 + 0}$$_{.}$$_{22}$ $_{2}$√$_{2}$ √$_{2 + 0}$$_{.}$$_{22}$ $_{2}$√$_{2}$ − √$_{2 + 0}$$_{.}$$_{22}$ $_{2}$√$_{2}$    . (4.54)$$\n\nUsing similar method with that of the first one, the second derivative can be computed as\n\nCombining (4.52) and (4.53) , we can obtain the following matrix for the linearization at the grazing point x ∗ ,\n\nIt is appearant that the matrix W$_{ix}$ ( x ∗ ) is continuous with respect to its arguments, since it is constant if the point x ∗ +Δ x is not from the orbit of the grazing solution. Since of the limit procedure, it is the same constant for all points of the grazing solution. Thus, the Jacobian is constant matrix in a neighborhood of the grazing point and condition ( A 2) is valid.\n\nNow, let us check the validity of the condition ( A 3) . Consider a near solution x ( t ) = x ( t, 0 , ¯ x ) , to the grazing cycle Ψ( t ) , where ¯ x = (0 , ¯ x$_{2}$ ) , ¯ x$_{2}$ > Ψ$_{2}$(0) = 1 . So, the near solution x ( t ) satisfies the condition ( N 1) . For the grazing periodic solution, it is true that θ$_{i}$$\\_{+1}$ − θ$\\_{i}$ = 2 π = ω. The grazing solution Ψ( t ) = x ( t, 0 , (0 , 1)) , touches the line of discontinuity Γ at t = ω $\\_{8}$. The first coordinate of the near solution is x$\\_{1}$ ( t ) = ¯ x$\\_{2}$ sin( t ) , and x$\\_{1}$ ( ω 8 ) = ¯ x$\\_{2}$ sin( ω 8 ) = ¯ x$\\_{2}$ √$\\_{2}$ > Ψ$\\_{1}$( ω 8 ) = 1 √$\\_{2}$ . Consequently, the near solution x ( t ) meets the line of discontinuity Γ before the moment ω $\\_{8}$. This implies that 0 < τ ( x ) < π 4 − ϵ, for a small positive ϵ whenever x$\\_{1}$ ( t ) is close to 1 √$\\_{2}$ . Thus, the condition ( A 3) is valid and Lemma 3.1 proves condition ( C ) .\n\nIn the light of the above discussion, the bivalued matrix of coefficients for the grazing point is easily obtained as\n\n29" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.34641010854779397, + "doc_id": "bc5fd3f3292f6f978eb22937cf233127a3b2270d42a3b483e5825ca0d8f0f358", + "edit_distance": 0.5795228628230616, + "f1_score": 0.9597523219814241, + "meteor": 0.4434716842924506, + "precision": 0.9567901234567902, + "pred_md": "\n\nwith the domain D = R 2 , R 1 = exp( -0 0005 . π ) and R 2 = 0 9 . . In the paper [16], it is stated that the coefficient of restitution for low velocity impact still remains as an open problem. In the study [4], by considering Kelvin-Voigt model for the elastic impact, we derived quadratic terms of the velocity in the impact law. This arguments make the quadratic term for the impulse equation (3.14b) reasonable.\n\nLet us describe the set of discontinuity curves by Γ = Γ 1 ∪ Γ 2 . The components Γ 1 and Γ 2 are intervals of the vertical lines y 1 = exp(0 00025 . π ) and y 1 = 0 , respectively and they will be precised next. Fix a point P = (0 , y ¯ ) 2 ∈ D, with ¯ y 2 > 1 . Let y t, ( 0 , P ) be a solution of (3.14a) and it meets with the vertical line x 1 = exp(0 00025 . π , ) x 2 > 0 at the point P 2 = (exp(0 00025 . π , y ) 2 ( θ , 1 0 , P )) , where θ 1 is the meeting moment with the line. Consider the point Q 2 = (exp(0 00025 . π , ) -R y 1 2 ( θ , 1 0 , P 2 ) 2 ) and denote Q 1 = (0 , y 2 ( θ , 2 0 , Q 2 )) , where θ 2 is the moment of meeting of the solution y t, ( 0 , Q 2 ) with the vertical line x 1 = 0 , x 2 < 0 . We shall need also the point P 1 = (0 , -R y 2 2 ( θ , 2 0 , Q 2 )) . Finally, we obtain the region G in yellow and blue between the vertical lines and graphs of the solutions in Figure 1. The region G contains discontinuous trajectories and outside of this region all trajectories are continuous. Moreover, both region G and its complement are invariant.\n\nFigure 1: The region G for system (3.14) is depicted in details. The curves of discontinuity Γ = Γ 1 ∪ Γ 2 and ˜ Γ = ˜ Γ 1 ∪ ˜ Γ 2 are drawn as vertical lines in red and green, respectively and the grazing orbit in magenta.\n\nFigure 1: The region G for system (3.14) is depicted in details. The curves of discontinuity Γ = Γ 1 ∪ Γ 2 and ˜ Γ = ˜ Γ 1 ∪ ˜ Γ 2 are drawn as vertical lines in red and green, respectively and the grazing orbit in magenta.\n\nDefine Γ 1 = { ( y , y 1 2 ) | y 1 = exp(0 00025 . π , ) 0 ≤ y 2 ≤ y 2 ( θ , 1 0 (0 , , y ¯ )) 2 } , and Γ 2 = { ( y , y 1 2 ) | y 1 = 0 , y 2 ( θ , 2 0 , -R y 1 2 (( θ , 1 0 (0 , , y ¯ ))) 2 2 ) ≤ y 2 ≤ 0 } . The boundary of the curve, Γ = Γ 1 ∪ Γ 2 , has of four\n\n13", + "recall": 0.9627329192546584, + "true_md": "$$Δ y$_{2}$ | $^{y}$∈ Γ$_{1}$ = − y$_{2}$ − R$_{1}$y 2 $_{2}$, Δ y$_{2}$ | $^{y}$∈ Γ$_{2}$ = − (1 + R$_{2}$ ) y$_{2}$, (3.14b)$$\n\nwith the domain D = R $^{2}$, R$_{1}$ = exp( − 0 . 0005 π ) and R$_{2}$ = 0 . 9 . In the paper [16], it is stated that the coefficient of restitution for low velocity impact still remains as an open problem. In the study [4], by considering Kelvin-Voigt model for the elastic impact, we derived quadratic terms of the velocity in the impact law. This arguments make the quadratic term for the impulse equation (3.14b) reasonable.\n\nLet us describe the set of discontinuity curves by Γ = Γ$_{1}$ ∪ Γ$_{2}$ . The components Γ$_{1}$ and Γ$_{2}$ are intervals of the vertical lines y$_{1}$ = exp(0 . 00025 π ) and y$_{1}$ = 0 , respectively and they will be precised next. Fix a point P = (0 , ¯ y$_{2}$ ) ∈ D, with ¯ y$_{2}$ > 1 . Let y ( t, 0 , P ) be a solution of (3.14a) and it meets with the vertical line x$_{1}$ = exp(0 . 00025 π ) , x$_{2}$ > 0 at the point P$_{2}$ = (exp(0 . 00025 π ) , y$_{2}$ ( θ$_{1}$, 0 , P )) , where θ$_{1}$ is the meeting moment with the line. Consider the point Q$_{2}$ = (exp(0 . 00025 π ) , − R$_{1}$y$_{2}$ ( θ$_{1}$, 0 , P$_{2}$ ) $^{2}$) and denote Q$_{1}$ = (0 , y$_{2}$ ( θ$_{2}$, 0 , Q$_{2}$ )) , where θ$_{2}$ is the moment of meeting of the solution y ( t, 0 , Q$_{2}$ ) with the vertical line x$_{1}$ = 0 , x$_{2}$ < 0 . We shall need also the point P$_{1}$ = (0 , − R$_{2}$y$_{2}$ ( θ$_{2}$, 0 , Q$_{2}$ )) . Finally, we obtain the region G in yellow and blue between the vertical lines and graphs of the solutions in Figure 1. The region G contains discontinuous trajectories and outside of this region all trajectories are continuous. Moreover, both region G and its complement are invariant.\n\nDefine Γ$_{1}$ = { ( y$_{1}$, y$_{2}$ ) | y$_{1}$ = exp(0 . 00025 π ) , 0 ≤ y$_{2}$ ≤ y$_{2}$ ( θ$_{1}$, 0 , (0 , ¯ y$_{2}$ )) } , and Γ$_{2}$ = { ( y$_{1}$, y$_{2}$ ) | y$_{1}$ = 0 , y$_{2}$ ( θ$_{2}$, 0 , − R$_{1}$y$_{2}$ (( θ$_{1}$, 0 , (0 , ¯ y$_{2}$ ))) $^{2}$) ≤ y$_{2}$ ≤ 0 } . The boundary of the curve, Γ = Γ$_{1}$ ∪ Γ$_{2}$ , has of four\n\nFigure 1: The region G for system (3.14) is depicted in details. The curves of discontinuity Γ = Γ$_{1}$ ∪ Γ$_{2}$ and ˜ Γ = ˜ Γ$_{1}$ ∪ ˜ Γ$_{2}$ are drawn as vertical lines in red and green, respectively and the grazing orbit in magenta.\n\n13" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5380780888553947, + "doc_id": "13cfbe5a1a312f6d76cb0bc38364c492abf0f755383a102ef222b6298f5ee8ec", + "edit_distance": 0.38074588031222895, + "f1_score": 0.9513513513513513, + "meteor": 0.733596024139155, + "precision": 0.9411764705882353, + "pred_md": "Let us set the system\n\n\n\nfor the possible usage in the remaining part of the paper.\n\nConsider a solution y t, ( 0 , x 0 ) , x 0 ∈ ˜ Γ , of (2.2). Denote the first meeting point of the solution with the surface Γ , provided the point exists, by y ζ, ( 0 , x 0 ) . The following conditions are sufficient for the continuation property.\n\n- (C9) (a) Every solution y t, ( 0 , x 0 ) , x 0 ∈ D, of (2.2) is continuable to either ∞ or Γ as time increases,\n- (b) Every solution y t, ( 0 , x 0 ) , x 0 ∈ D, of (2.2) is continuable to either -∞ or ˜ Γ as time decreases.\n\nTo verify the continuation of the solutions of (2.1), the following theorems can be applied.\n\nTheorem 2.1 [1] Assume that conditions ( C 8) and ( C 9) are valid. Then, every solution x t ( ) = x t, ( 0 , x 0 ) , x 0 ∈ D of (2.1) is continuable on R .\n\nNow, we will present a condition which is sufficient for the group property .\n\n- (C10) For all x 0 ∈ D, the solution y t, ( 0 , x 0 ) of (2.2) does not intersect ˜ Γ before it meets the surface Γ as time increases.\n\nIn other words, for each x 0 ∈ D and a positive number s such that y s, ( 0 , x 0 ) ∈ ˜ Γ , there exists a number r, 0 ≤ r < s, such that y r, ( 0 , x 0 ) ∈ Γ .\n\nIt is easy to verify that the condition ( C 10) is equivalent to the assertion that for all x 0 ∈ D, the solution y t, ( 0 , x 0 ) of (2.2) does not intersect Γ before it meets the surface ˜ Γ as time decreases. In other words, for each x 0 ∈ D and a negative number s such that y s, ( 0 , x 0 ) ∈ ˜ Γ , there exists a number r, s < r ≤ 0 , such that y r, ( 0 , x 0 ) ∈ ˜ Γ .\n\nTheorem 2.2 (The group property) Assume that conditions (C1)-(C10) are valid. Then, x t ( 2 , 0 , x ( t 1 , 0 , x 0 )) = x t ( 2 + t 1 , 0 , x 0 ) , for all t 1 , t 2 ∈ R .\n\nProof. Denote by ξ t ( ) = x t ( + ¯ ) t , for a fixed ¯ t ∈ R . It can be verified that the sequence { θ i - } ¯ t is a set of discontinuity moments of ξ t ( ) and the function is a solution of (2.1) [1]. The next step is to show that the following equality x ( -t, 0 , x ( t, 0 , x 0 )) = x , 0 holds for all x 0 ∈ D and t ∈ R . Consider the case t > 0 . If the set of discontinuity moments { θ i } is empty, the proof is same with that for continuous dynamical systems [23]. Because of the condition ( C 2) , which corresponds to invertibility of the jump function J, the equality x θ , ( i 0 , x ( θ i +)) = x θ ( i ) , holds for all i ∈ A . Assuming that θ -1 < 0 < θ , 1 we should verify x ( -θ , 1 0 , x ( θ , 1 0 , x 0 )) = x . 0 Denote by ¯( ) x t = x t, ( 0 , x ( θ 1 )) . The point x θ ( 1 ) lies on the discontinuity surface Γ . By condition ( C 3) the solution ¯( ) x t is a trajectory of y ' = f ( y ) for decreasing t. Condition ( C 10) , part ( a , ) implies that the trajectory ¯( ) x t cannot meet with ˜ Γ if t > -θ 1 as time decreases. That is, ¯( x -θ 1 ) = x 0 as the dynamics is continuous. The proof for t < 0 can be done in a similar way. /square\n\n5", + "recall": 0.9617486338797814, + "true_md": "Let us set the system\n\nfor the possible usage in the remaining part of the paper.\n\nConsider a solution y ( t, 0 , x$_{0}$ ) , x$_{0}$ ∈ ˜ Γ , of (2.2). Denote the first meeting point of the solution with the surface Γ , provided the point exists, by y ( ζ, 0 , x$_{0}$ ) . The following conditions are sufficient for the continuation property.\n\nTo verify the continuation of the solutions of (2.1), the following theorems can be applied.\n\n- (C9) (a) Every solution y ( t, 0 , x$_{0}$ ) , x$_{0}$ ∈ D, of (2.2) is continuable to either ∞ or Γ as time increases, (b) Every solution y ( t, 0 , x$_{0}$ ) , x$_{0}$ ∈ D, of (2.2) is continuable to either −∞ or ˜ Γ as time decreases.\n\n- (C10) For all x$_{0}$ ∈ D, the solution y ( t, 0 , x$_{0}$ ) of (2.2) does not intersect ˜ Γ before it meets the surface Γ as time increases.\n\nTheorem 2.1 [1] Assume that conditions ( C 8) and ( C 9) are valid. Then, every solution x ( t ) = x ( t, 0 , x$_{0}$ ) , x$_{0}$ ∈ D of (2.1) is continuable on $^{R}$.\n\nNow, we will present a condition which is sufficient for the group property .\n\nIn other words, for each x$_{0}$ ∈ D and a positive number s such that y ( s, 0 , x$_{0}$ ) ∈ ˜ Γ , there exists a number r, 0 ≤ r < s, such that y ( r, 0 , x$_{0}$ ) ∈ Γ .\n\nIt is easy to verify that the condition ( C 10) is equivalent to the assertion that for all x$_{0}$ ∈ D, the solution y ( t, 0 , x$_{0}$ ) of (2.2) does not intersect Γ before it meets the surface ˜ Γ as time decreases. In other words, for each x$_{0}$ ∈ D and a negative number s such that y ( s, 0 , x$_{0}$ ) ∈ ˜ Γ , there exists a number r, s < r ≤ 0 , such that y ( r, 0 , x$_{0}$ ) ∈ ˜ Γ .\n\nTheorem 2.2 (The group property) Assume that conditions (C1)-(C10) are valid. Then, x ( t$_{2}$, 0 , x ( t$_{1}$, 0 , x$_{0}$ )) = x ( t$_{2}$ + t$_{1}$, 0 , x$_{0}$ ) , for all t$_{1}$, t$_{2}$ ∈ $^{R}$.\n\nProof. Denote by ξ ( t ) = x ( t + ¯ t ) , for a fixed ¯ t ∈ $^{R}$. It can be verified that the sequence { θ$_{i}$ − ¯ t } is a set of discontinuity moments of ξ ( t ) and the function is a solution of (2.1) [1]. The next step is to show that the following equality x ( − t, 0 , x ( t, 0 , x$_{0}$ )) = x$_{0}$, holds for all x$_{0}$ ∈ D and t ∈ $^{R}$. Consider the case t > 0 . If the set of discontinuity moments { θ$_{i}$ } is empty, the proof is same with that for continuous dynamical systems [23]. Because of the condition ( C 2) , which corresponds to invertibility of the jump function J, the equality x ( θ$_{i}$, 0 , x ( θ$_{i}$ +)) = x ( θ$_{i}$ ) , holds for all i ∈ A . Assuming that $^{θ}$− 1 < 0 < θ$_{1}$, we should verify x ( − θ$_{1}$, 0 , x ( θ$_{1}$, 0 , x$_{0}$ )) = x$_{0}$. Denote by ¯ x ( t ) = x ( t, 0 , x ( θ$_{1}$ )) . The point x ( θ$_{1}$ ) lies on the discontinuity surface Γ . By condition ( C 3) the solution ¯ x ( t ) is a trajectory of y ′ = f ( y ) for decreasing t. Condition ( C 10) , part ( a ) , implies that the trajectory ¯ x ( t ) cannot meet with ˜ Γ if t > − θ$_{1}$ as time decreases. That is, ¯ x ( − θ$_{1}$ ) = x$_{0}$ as the dynamics is continuous. The proof for t < 0 can be done in a similar way. □\n\n$$y ′ = f ( y ) (2.2)$$\n\n5" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9470459926810361, + "doc_id": "7aa8e545614ab903385e6d4f6d84059634c377d530bfe166a770a5aea08db06b", + "edit_distance": 0.048027444253859346, + "f1_score": 0.9580152671755725, + "meteor": 0.9558130420281893, + "precision": 0.9691119691119691, + "pred_md": "In contrast to existing proposals, our tests are fully data-driven, do not require user-chosen tuning parameters such as bandwidths, and are able to detect a broad class of local alternatives converging to the null at the parametric rate n -1 2 / , with n the sample size. Furthermore, our tests do not suffer from the 'curse of dimensionality' when the vector of covariates is of high dimensionality, and have greater power than competing tests for many alternatives. Of course, such power gains do not come without a cost: there exist some classes of alternative hypotheses against which our tests have trivial power. Nonetheless, we believe that such a compromise is reasonable since, as pointed out by Janssen (2000) and Escanciano (2009 a ), achieving reasonable power over all possible directions seems hopeless.\n\nThe proposal closest to ours is Shaikh et al. (2009). Despite using a similar characterization of the null hypothesis as Shaikh et al. (2009), our proposal greatly differs from theirs. Whereas Shaikh et al. (2009) adopts the local smoothing approach, see e.g. Hardle and Mammen (1993), Zheng (1996), Fan and Li (1996) and Li and Wang (1998), we adopt the integrated conditional moment (ICM) approach, see e.g. Bierens (1982, 1990), Bierens and Ploberger (1997), Stute (1997) and Escanciano (2006 a ). As a consequence, our approach inherits some advantages of ICM when compared to Shaikh et al. (2009). First, our tests do not require delicate bandwidth choice, unlike Shaikh et al. (2009)'s test whose performance can be sensitive to it. Second, in contrast with Shaikh et al. (2009), our approach has power against local alternatives converging to the null at the parametric rate.\n\nAnother popular procedure to assess misspecification of the propensity score model is to use 'balancing' tests. Initially proposed by Rosenbaum and Rubin (1985), these tests consist of assessing if each covariate is independent of the treatment assignment, conditional on the propensity score. This is often implemented examining whether moments (usually just the mean) of the observable characteristics between the two 'matched' or 'weighted' groups are the same; see e.g. Dehejia and Wahba (2002) and Smith and Todd (2005). One should bear in mind that because 'balancing' tests are usually based on a finite number of orthogonality conditions, there are uncountably many directions of misspecification that cannot be detected with these tests. Furthermore, as shown by Lee (2013), balancing tests may have size distortions due to the 'multiple testing problem', the failure to account for the estimation effect of the propensity score, and poor covariate overlap. Such drawbacks put at stake the reliability of many of these procedures. Our proposal, on the other hand, does not suffer from these.\n\nOur paper also contributes to the literature on ICM tests. What appears distinctive to\n\n3", + "recall": 0.9471698113207547, + "true_md": "In contrast to existing proposals, our tests are fully data-driven, do not require user-chosen tuning parameters such as bandwidths, and are able to detect a broad class of local alternatives converging to the null at the parametric rate n − 1 / $^{2}$, with n the sample size. Furthermore, our tests do not suffer from the “curse of dimensionality” when the vector of covariates is of high dimensionality, and have greater power than competing tests for many alternatives. Of course, such power gains do not come without a cost: there exist some classes of alternative hypotheses against which our tests have trivial power. Nonetheless, we believe that such a compromise is reasonable since, as pointed out by Janssen (2000) and Escanciano (2009 a ), achieving reasonable power over all possible directions seems hopeless.\n\nThe proposal closest to ours is Shaikh et al. (2009). Despite using a similar characterization of the null hypothesis as Shaikh et al. (2009), our proposal greatly differs from theirs. Whereas Shaikh et al. (2009) adopts the local smoothing approach, see e.g. Hardle and Mammen (1993), Zheng (1996), Fan and Li (1996) and Li and Wang (1998), we adopt the integrated conditional moment (ICM) approach, see e.g. Bierens (1982, 1990), Bierens and Ploberger (1997), Stute (1997) and Escanciano (2006 a ). As a consequence, our approach inherits some advantages of ICM when compared to Shaikh et al. (2009). First, our tests do not require delicate bandwidth choice, unlike Shaikh et al. (2009)’s test whose performance can be sensitive to it. Second, in contrast with Shaikh et al. (2009), our approach has power against local alternatives converging to the null at the parametric rate.\n\nAnother popular procedure to assess misspecification of the propensity score model is to use “balancing” tests. Initially proposed by Rosenbaum and Rubin (1985), these tests consist of assessing if each covariate is independent of the treatment assignment, conditional on the propensity score. This is often implemented examining whether moments (usually just the mean) of the observable characteristics between the two “matched” or “weighted” groups are the same; see e.g. Dehejia and Wahba (2002) and Smith and Todd (2005). One should bear in mind that because “balancing” tests are usually based on a finite number of orthogonality conditions, there are uncountably many directions of misspecification that cannot be detected with these tests. Furthermore, as shown by Lee (2013), balancing tests may have size distortions due to the “multiple testing problem”, the failure to account for the estimation effect of the propensity score, and poor covariate overlap. Such drawbacks put at stake the reliability of many of these procedures. Our proposal, on the other hand, does not suffer from these.\n\nOur paper also contributes to the literature on ICM tests. What appears distinctive to\n\n3" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.26155272448668654, + "doc_id": "3c5f1df0c9803bdecda8ad59a16883dea424f672a37c413c000a32f9f355047c", + "edit_distance": 0.6070796460176991, + "f1_score": 0.8835341365461847, + "meteor": 0.43736532880878304, + "precision": 0.9482758620689655, + "pred_md": "with\n\n## Proof. See Appendix A.\n\n## 3.2.3 Roy Model\n\nEstablishing sharp DTE bounds under support restrictions allows us to derive sharp DTE bounds in the Roy model. In the Roy model, each agent selects into treatment when the net benefit from doing so is positive. The Roy model is often divided into three versions according to the form of its selection equation: the original Roy model, the extended Roy model, and the generalized Roy model. Most of the recent literature considers the extended or generalized Roy model that accounts for nonpecuniary costs of selection.\n\nConsider the generalized Roy model in Heckman et al. (2011) and French and Taber (2011):\n\n\n\nwhere X is a vector of observed covariates while ( U , U 1 0 ) are unobserved gains in the equation of potential outcomes. In the selection equation, Z is a vector of observed cost shifters while U C is an unobserved scalar cost. The main assumption in this model is\n\n\n\nAs two special cases of the generalized Roy model, the original Roy model assumes that µ C ( Z ) = U C = 0 and the extended Roy model assumes that each agent's cost is deterministic with U C = 0. My result provides DTE bounds in the extended Roy model:\n\n\n\n26\n\n", + "recall": 0.8270676691729323, + "true_md": "$$a$_{k}$ ≤ a$_{k}$$_{+1}$ ≤ 1 S$_{1}$$^{{}$ ( a$_{k}$ + δ ) + 1 S$_{0}$ w$^{}}$ , S$_{1}$ = t$_{1}$ − t$_{W}$ t$_{0}$ − t$_{W}$ , S$_{0}$ = t$_{0}$ − t$_{W}$ t$_{1}$ − t$_{0}$ .$$\n\nwith\n\nProof. See Appendix A.\n\n## 3.2.3 Roy Model\n\nEstablishing sharp DTE bounds under support restrictions allows us to derive sharp DTE bounds in the Roy model. In the Roy model, each agent selects into treatment when the net benefit from doing so is positive. The Roy model is often divided into three versions according to the form of its selection equation: the original Roy model, the extended Roy model, and the generalized Roy model. Most of the recent literature considers the extended or generalized Roy model that accounts for nonpecuniary costs of selection.\n\nConsider the generalized Roy model in Heckman et al. (2011) and French and Taber (2011):\n\nwhere X is a vector of observed covariates while ( U$_{1}$, U$_{0}$ ) are unobserved gains in the equation of potential outcomes. In the selection equation, Z is a vector of observed cost shifters while U$_{C}$ is an unobserved scalar cost. The main assumption in this model is\n\nAs two special cases of the generalized Roy model, the original Roy model assumes that µ$_{C}$ ( Z ) = U$_{C}$ = 0 and the extended Roy model assumes that each agent’s cost is deterministic with U$_{C}$ = 0. My result provides DTE bounds in the extended Roy model:\n\n26\n\n$$Y = m ( D, X ) + U$_{D}$, D = 1 { Y$_{1}$ − Y$_{0}$ ≥ m$_{C}$ ( Z ) } .$$\n\n$$( U$_{1}$, U$_{0}$, U$_{c}$ ) ⊥ ( X, Z ) .$$\n\n$$Y = µ ( D, X ) + U$_{D}$, D = 1 { Y$_{1}$ − Y$_{0}$ ≥ m$_{C}$ ( Z ) + U$_{C}$ } ,$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8279291088324071, + "doc_id": "64098f70665f1da6d24f3894530c5199e5122b872339d4e87977c307dd716ca4", + "edit_distance": 0.10683012259194395, + "f1_score": 0.9009345794392523, + "meteor": 0.9082535461834129, + "precision": 0.9128787878787878, + "pred_md": "covariates is relatively high as in DGP 6, these balancing tests tend to be conservative even with trimming, reflecting the 'curse of dimensionality'. In terms of power, it is clear that balancing tests are dominated by our projection-based tests in all designs. In particular, as shown in Table B.2 balancing tests can have zero to no power when the dimension of covariates is high. The comparison between our tests and other specification tests is exactly as discussed in the main text and is therefore omitted.\n\n## Acknowledgements\n\nWe would like to thank Han Hong and Elie Tamer (Editors), an Associate Editor, and four anonymous referees for comments that greatly improved this paper. We also thank Daniel Millimet for sharing with us the data we use in the empirical application, Tymon S/suppress loczy'ski, n Tatsushi Oka, and several seminar and conference participants for their useful comments.\n\nPedro H. C. Sant'Anna acknowledge financial support from the Spanish Plan Nacional de I+D+I (Grant No. ECO2014-55858-P). Xiaojun Song acknowledge financial support from the National Natural Science Foundation of China (Grant No. 71532001) and Key Laboratory of Mathematical Economics and Quantitative Finance (Peking University), Ministry of Education.\n\n## References\n\nAbadie, A., and Imbens, G. W. (2016), 'Matching on the estimated propensity score,' Econometrica , 84(2), 781-807.\n\n- Akritas, M. G., and van Keilegom, I. (2001), 'Non-Parametric Estimation of the Residual Distribution,' Scandinavian Journal of Statistic , 28(3), 549-567.\n- Belloni, A., Chernozhukov, V., Fernandez-Val, I., and Hansen, C. (2017), 'Program Evaluation and Causal Inference With High-Dimensional Data,' Econometrica , 85(1), 233-298.\n- Belloni, A., Chernozhukov, V., and Hansen, C. (2014), 'Inference on Treatment Effects after Selection among High-Dimensional Controls,' The Review of Economic Studies , 81(2), 608-650.\n- Bickel, P. J., Ritov, Y., and Stoker, T. M. (2006), 'Tailor-made tests for goodness of fit to semiparametric hypotheses,' Annals of Statistics , 34(2), 721-741.\n- Bierens, H. J. (1982), 'Consistent model specification tests,' Journal of Econometrics , 20(1982), 105134.\n- Bierens, H. J. (1990), 'A consistent conditional moment test of functional form,' Econometrica , 58(6), 1443-1458.\n- Bierens, H. J., and Ploberger, W. (1997), 'Asymptotic theory of integrated conditional moment tests,' Econometrica , 65(5), 1129-1151.\n\nBusso, M., Dinardo, J., and McCrary, J. (2014), 'New Evidence on the Finite Sample Properties of Propensity Score Reweighting and Matching Estimators,' The Review of Economics and Statistics , 96(5), 885-895.\n\n44", + "recall": 0.8892988929889298, + "true_md": "covariates is relatively high as in DGP 6, these balancing tests tend to be conservative even with trimming, reflecting the “curse of dimensionality”. In terms of power, it is clear that balancing tests are dominated by our projection-based tests in all designs. In particular, as shown in Table B.2 balancing tests can have zero to no power when the dimension of covariates is high. The comparison between our tests and other specification tests is exactly as discussed in the main text and is therefore omitted.\n\nWe would like to thank Han Hong and Elie Tamer (Editors), an Associate Editor, and four anonymous referees for comments that greatly improved this paper. We also thank Daniel Millimet for sharing with us the data we use in the empirical application, Tymon SGLYPH<suppress>loczy´ nski, Tatsushi Oka, and several seminar and conference participants for their useful comments.\n\nPedro H. C. Sant’Anna acknowledge financial support from the Spanish Plan Nacional de I+D+I (Grant No. ECO2014-55858-P). Xiaojun Song acknowledge financial support from the National Natural Science Foundation of China (Grant No. 71532001) and Key Laboratory of Mathematical Economics and Quantitative Finance (Peking University), Ministry of Education.\n\n## Acknowledgements\n\n## References\n\n- Abadie, A., and Imbens, G. W. (2016), “Matching on the estimated propensity score,” Econometrica , 84(2), 781–807.\n\n- Akritas, M. G., and van Keilegom, I. (2001), “Non-Parametric Estimation of the Residual Distribution,” Scandinavian Journal of Statistic , 28(3), 549–567.\n\n- Belloni, A., Chernozhukov, V., Fernandez-Val, I., and Hansen, C. (2017), “Program Evaluation and Causal Inference With High-Dimensional Data,” Econometrica , 85(1), 233–298.\n\n- Belloni, A., Chernozhukov, V., and Hansen, C. (2014), “Inference on Treatment Effects after Selection among High-Dimensional Controls,” The Review of Economic Studies , 81(2), 608–650.\n\n- Bickel, P. J., Ritov, Y., and Stoker, T. M. (2006), “Tailor-made tests for goodness of fit to semiparametric hypotheses,” Annals of Statistics , 34(2), 721–741.\n\n- Bierens, H. J. (1982), “Consistent model specification tests,” Journal of Econometrics , 20(1982), 105– 134.\n\n- Bierens, H. J. (1990), “A consistent conditional moment test of functional form,” Econometrica , 58(6), 1443–1458.\n\n- Bierens, H. J., and Ploberger, W. (1997), “Asymptotic theory of integrated conditional moment tests,” Econometrica , 65(5), 1129–1151.\n\n- Busso, M., Dinardo, J., and McCrary, J. (2014), “New Evidence on the Finite Sample Properties of Propensity Score Reweighting and Matching Estimators,” The Review of Economics and Statistics , 96(5), 885–895.\n\n44" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5256446964951412, + "doc_id": "bdbe6861199a1566c462b848df9348d9f97819253a7475dea3794acceb14e78d", + "edit_distance": 0.3373015873015873, + "f1_score": 0.9677419354838711, + "meteor": 0.6643537364965209, + "precision": 0.9821428571428571, + "pred_md": "## Algorithm 2 Centralized Scheme A\n\n- 1) Input: [ H l ] , [ A l ] , [ P l ] , [ G lj ] where α n,k,l = 0 , p n,k,l = P k, max /N ∀ k, ∀ n Subcarrier Allocation (Phase I)\n\nInitial Allocation:\n\n- 2) For each user k in cell l , power is divided equally over all of its allocated subcarriers and the remaining unallocated subcarriers of the system.\n- 3) Using [ P l ] from step 2, [ H l ] and [ G lj ] , compute χ n,k,l for every k th user at n th subcarrier in cell l .\n- 4) Find the ( n, k ) pair that has the maximum value of χ n,k,l . Allocate subcarrier n to user k .\n- 5) Delete the n th subcarrier from the set of unallocated subcarriers. If there are still unallocated subcarriers in the system go to step 2, else terminate after distributing the maximum power at each user over all of its assigned subcarriers\n- 6) Compute C o\n\nMaximize Throughput Iteratively until Convergence\n\ndo while\n\n(\n\nC\n\nnew\n\n-C ≥ o\n\n/epsilon1\n\n)\n\n- l = 1 , do while l ≤ L, l = l +1\n- n = 1 , do while n ≤ N,n = n +1\n- k = 1 , do while k ≤ K,k = k +1\n- 7) Allocate the subcarrier n to user k .\n- 8) Compute p n,k,l by dividing P k, max equally among the allocated subcarriers.\n- 9) Compute C n,k,l -C o\n\nend\n\n- 10) Allocate subcarrier n to the user who maximizes C n,k,l -C o end\n- 11) Compute C new using (1).\n- 12) C o = C new\n\nend\n\n## Power Allocation (Phase II)\n\n- 13) Compute the optimal powers P l in the high SINR regime (7) given the allocations from Phase I.\n- 14) For general SINR regime, take P l from step 13 as an initial starting point.\n- 15) Using P l , evaluate p n,k,l h n,k,l + σ 2 + I n,l for each allocated user k in cell l at subcarrier n .\n- 16) Compute the weights s n,k,l as follows:\n- s n,k,l = u n,k,l f ( p )\n- 17) Approximate the posynomial using (13).\n- 18) Solve the approximated GP using any available commercial software [13]\n- 19) Go to step 15 using P l of step 18 until convergence.\n\nMarch 19, 2018\n\nDRAFT\n\n11", + "recall": 0.953757225433526, + "true_md": "11\n\n## Algorithm 2 Centralized Scheme A\n\n- 1) Input: [ H$_{l}$ ] , [ A$_{l}$ ] , [ P$_{l}$ ] , [ G$_{lj}$ ] where α$_{n,k,l}$ = 0 , p$_{n,k,l}$ = P$_{k,}$$\\_{max}$/N ∀ k, ∀ n Subcarrier Allocation (Phase I)\n\n- 2) For each user k in cell l , power is divided equally over all of its allocated subcarriers and the remaining unallocated subcarriers of the system.\n\nInitial Allocation:\n\n- 3) Using [ P$_{l}$ ] from step 2, [ H$_{l}$ ] and [ G$_{lj}$ ] , compute χ$_{n,k,l}$ for every k th user at n th subcarrier in cell l .\n\n- 4) Find the ( n, k ) pair that has the maximum value of χ$_{n,k,l}$ . Allocate subcarrier n to user k . th\n\n- ( n, k ) χ$_{n,k,l}$ 5) Delete the n th subcarrier from the set of unallocated subcarriers.\n\nIf there are still unallocated subcarriers in the system go to step 2,\n\nelse terminate after distributing the maximum power at each user over all of its assigned subcarriers\n\nMaximize Throughput Iteratively until Convergence do while ( C$_{new}$ − C$_{o}$ ≥ ϵ ) l = 1 , do while l ≤ L, l = l + 1 n = 1 , do while n ≤ N, n = n + 1 k = 1 , do while k ≤ K, k = k + 1\n\n- 6) Compute C$_{o}$\n\n- 7) Allocate the subcarrier n to user k .\n\n- 8) Compute p$_{n,k,l}$ by dividing P$_{k,}$$\\_{max}$ equally among the allocated subcarriers.\n\n- 9) Compute C$_{n,k,l}$ − C$_{o}$ end\n\n- 10) Allocate subcarrier n to the user who maximizes C$_{n,k,l}$ − C$_{o}$ end\n\n- 11) Compute C$_{new}$ using (1).\n\n- 12) C$_{o}$ = C$_{new}$ end Power Allocation (Phase II)\n\n- 13) Compute the optimal powers P$_{l}$ in the high SINR regime (7) given the allocations from Phase I.\n\n- 14) For general SINR regime, take P$_{l}$ from step 13 as an initial starting point.\n\n- 15) Using P$_{l}$ , evaluate p$_{n,k,l}$h$_{n,k,l}$ + σ $^{2}$+ I$_{n,l}$ for each allocated user k in cell l at subcarrier n .\n\n- 16) Compute the weights s$_{n,k,l}$ as follows: s$_{n,k,l}$ = u$_{n,k,l}$ f ( p ) 17) Approximate the posynomial using (13).\n\n- f ( p ) 17) Approximate the posynomial using (13).\n\n- 18) Solve the approximated GP using any available commercial software [13]\n\n- 19) Go to step 15 using P$_{l}$ of step 18 until convergence.\n\nDRAFT\n\nMarch 19, 2018" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7647739014302184, + "doc_id": "fbe75166066c52b30de1b0a2dc1747c4828902520ff30ec6784bf92c8f93cad7", + "edit_distance": 0.20705882352941177, + "f1_score": 0.9098360655737704, + "meteor": 0.806900909062485, + "precision": 0.9487179487179487, + "pred_md": "hold for all f ∈ I ( X,ρ,R ) and x, y, z, w ∈ X such that xρy and zρw .\n\n\n\n\n\nIn any situation where we refer to a generalized incidence ring we mean an associative ring with unity formed on the R -module of functions I ( X,ρ,R ) where R is a ring with unity and ρ is a locally finite balanced relation on X . The operation of R on I ( X,ρ,R ) does not play a significant role in our investigation. We reserve the term generalized incidence algebra for I ( X,ρ,R ) where R is a commutative ring with unity and ρ is a locally finite balanced relation on X . If, additionally, ρ is a partial order then I ( X,ρ,R ) is the usual incidence algebra over R (see [9]).\n\n## 3 Good Gradings\n\nDefinition 3.1 Assume G is a semigroup and ρ is a relation on X .\n\n- 1. Set Trans ( X ) = { ( x, y, z ) : xρy , yρz , xρz , and x, y, z ∈ X } . A transitive triple in X is an ordered triple in Trans ( X ) .\n- 2. We say Φ : ρ → G is a homomorphism if Φ( x, y ) Φ ( y, z ) = Φ ( x, z ) holds for any x, y, z ∈ X such that ( x, y, z ) ∈ Trans ( X ) .\n- 3. If I ( X,ρ,R ) is a G -graded generalized incidence ring then the grading is good if e xy is homogeneous for all x, y ∈ X such that xρy .\n\n6", + "recall": 0.8740157480314961, + "true_md": "hold for all f ∈ I ( X, ρ, R ) and x, y, z, w ∈ X such that xρy and zρw .\n\n$$f ( x, y ) e$_{xy}$ = e$_{xx}$fe$_{yy}$ (3)$$\n\n$$e$_{xy}$e$_{zw}$ =      e$_{x,w}$ if y = z and xρw in X 0 otherwise (4)$$\n\nIn any situation where we refer to a generalized incidence ring we mean an as- sociative ring with unity formed on the R -module of functions I ( X, ρ, R ) where R is a ring with unity and ρ is a locally finite balanced relation on X . The operation of R on I ( X, ρ, R ) does not play a significant role in our investigation. We reserve the term generalized incidence algebra for I ( X, ρ, R ) where R is a commutative ring with unity and ρ is a locally finite balanced relation on X . If, additionally, ρ is a partial order then I ( X, ρ, R ) is the usual incidence algebra over R (see [9]).\n\n## 3 Good Gradings\n\nDefinition 3.1 Assume G is a semigroup and ρ is a relation on X .\n\n- 1. Set Trans ( X ) = { ( x, y, z ) : xρy , yρz , xρz , and x, y, z ∈ X } . A transitive triple in X is an ordered triple in Trans ( X ) .\n\n- 2. We say Φ : ρ → G is a homomorphism if Φ ( x, y ) Φ ( y, z ) = Φ ( x, z ) holds for any x, y, z ∈ X such that ( x, y, z ) ∈ Trans ( X ) .\n\n- 3. If I ( X, ρ, R ) is a G -graded generalized incidence ring then the grading is good if e$_{xy}$ is homogeneous for all x, y ∈ X such that xρy .\n\n6" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.44976648170689243, + "doc_id": "39c5f7a83574fc319a27af91ce4d5fb172aae80c7044c61a263d5e7738823690", + "edit_distance": 0.3847601128880527, + "f1_score": 0.958490566037736, + "meteor": 0.6449631763729354, + "precision": 0.9731800766283525, + "pred_md": "parametric rate n -1 2 / , n being the sample size. We also characterize classes of alternative hypotheses against which our tests have no power, and argue that such classes are rather exceptional. Finally, we show that critical values can be computed with the assistance of a multiplier-type bootstrap that is easy to implement.\n\n## 3.1 Asymptotic null distribution\n\nThe asymptotic null distributions of our tests are the limiting distributions of continuous functionals of ˆ R p n ( u ) under H 0 . To derive the asymptotic results, we adopt the following notation. For a generic set G , let l ∞ ( G ) be the Banach space of all uniformly bounded real functions on G , equipped with the uniform metric ‖ f ‖ G ≡ sup z ∈G | f ( z ) . | We study the weak convergence of ˆ R p n ( u ) and its related processes as elements of l ∞ (Π), where Π ≡ [0 , 1]. Let ' ⇒ ' denote weak convergence on ( l ∞ (Π) , B ∞ ) in the sense of J. Hoffmann-J φ rgensen, where B ∞ denotes the corresponding Borel σ -algebra - see e.g. Definition 1.3.3 in van der Vaart and Wellner (1996).\n\nWe assume the following regularity conditions. Let Θ 0 be an arbitrarily small neighborhood around θ 0 such that Θ 0 ⊂ Θ. For any d 1 × d 2 matrix A = ( a ij ), let || A || denote its Euclidean norm, i.e. || A || = [tr( AA ' )] 1 2 / .\n\nAssumption 3.1 ( ) i The parameter space Θ is a compact subset of R k ; ( ii ) the true parameter θ 0 belongs to the interior of Θ ; and ( iii ) ∥ ∥ ˆ θ n -θ 0 ∥ ∥ = O p ( n -1 2 / ) .\n\n∥ ∥ Assumption 3.2 The parametric propensity score function q x, θ ( ) is twice continuously differentiable in Θ 0 for each x ∈ X , with its first derivative g x, θ ( ) = ∂q x, θ ( ) /∂θ = ( g 1 ( x, θ ) , . . . , g k ( x, θ )) ' satisfying E [sup θ ∈ Θ 0 || g X,θ ( ) || ] < ∞ and its second derivative satisfying E [sup θ ∈ Θ 0 || ∂g X,θ /∂θ ( ) || ] < ∞ . Furthermore, the matrix ∆( ) θ ≡ E [ g X,θ g ( ) ' ( X,θ )] is nonsingular in Θ 0 .\n\nAssumption 3.3 The function F θ ( u ) = P ( q X,θ ( ) ≤ u ) satisfies sup u ∈ Π | F θ 1 ( u ) -F θ 2 ( u ) | ≤ C θ || 1 -θ 2 || , where C is a bounded positive number, not depending on θ 1 and θ 2 .\n\nAssumptions 3.1-3.3 are weaker than related conditions in the literature. For instance, Assumption 3.1 only requires √ n ( ˆ θ n -θ 0 ) = O p (1) , but does not require √ n ( ˆ θ n -θ 0 ) to admit an asymptotically linear representation. Assumption 3.2 is a condition concerning the degree of smoothness of the propensity score q x, θ ( ), and is satisfied for standard parametric models such as the Probit and the Logit specifications. It also only requires finite first moment of g X,θ ( ), instead of more than four moments as in Shaikh et al. (2009). Assumption 3.3 simply imposes a Lipschitz type continuity condition on the CDF of the parametric propensity score.\n\n11", + "recall": 0.9442379182156134, + "true_md": "parametric rate n − 1 / $^{2}$, n being the sample size. We also characterize classes of alternative hypotheses against which our tests have no power, and argue that such classes are rather exceptional. Finally, we show that critical values can be computed with the assistance of a multiplier-type bootstrap that is easy to implement.\n\nThe asymptotic null distributions of our tests are the limiting distributions of continuous func- tionals of ˆ R p $_{n}$( u ) under H$_{0}$ . To derive the asymptotic results, we adopt the following notation. For a generic set G , let l $^{∞}$( G ) be the Banach space of all uniformly bounded real functions on G , equipped with the uniform metric ‖ f ‖ G ≡ sup$_{z}$$\\_{∈G}$ | f ( z ) | . We study the weak convergence of ˆ R p $\\_{n}$( u ) and its related processes as elements of l $^{∞}$(Π), where Π ≡ [0 , 1]. Let “ ⇒ ” denote weak convergence on ( l $^{∞}$(Π) , B $\\_{∞}$) in the sense of J. Hoffmann-J φ rgensen, where B ∞ denotes the corresponding Borel σ -algebra - see e.g. Definition 1.3.3 in van der Vaart and Wellner (1996).\n\nWe assume the following regularity conditions. Let Θ$_{0}$ be an arbitrarily small neighborhood around θ$_{0}$ such that Θ$_{0}$ ⊂ Θ. For any d$_{1}$ × d$_{2}$ matrix A = ( a$_{ij}$ ), let || A || denote its Euclidean norm, i.e. || A || = [tr( AA $^{′}$)] 1 / $^{2}$.\n\nAssumption 3.1 ( i ) The parameter space Θ is a compact subset of R $^{k}$; ( ii ) the true parameter θ$_{0}$ belongs to the interior of Θ ; and ( iii ) ∥ ∥$^{ˆ}$ θ$_{n}$ − θ$_{0}$ ∥ = O$_{p}$ ( n − 1 / $^{2}$) .\n\nθ$_{0}$ belongs to the interior of Θ ; and ( iii ) ∥ ∥$^{ˆ}$ θ$_{n}$ − θ$_{0}$ ∥ = O$_{p}$ ( n $^{2}$) . Assumption 3.2 The parametric propensity score function q ( x, θ ) is twice continuously differ- entiable in Θ$_{0}$ for each x ∈ X , with its first derivative g ( x, θ ) = ∂q ( x, θ ) /∂θ = ( g$_{1}$ ( x, θ ) , . . . , g$_{k}$ ( x, θ )) ′ satisfying E [sup$_{θ}$$\\_{∈}$$_{Θ}$$\\_{0}$ || g ( X, θ ) || ] < ∞ and its second derivative satisfying E [sup$\\_{θ}$$_{∈}$$\\_{Θ}$$_{0}$ || ∂g ( X, θ ) /∂θ || ] < ∞ . Furthermore, the matrix Δ( θ ) ≡ E [ g ( X, θ ) g $^{′}$( X, θ )] is nonsingular in Θ$_{0}$ .\n\nAssumption 3.3 The function F$_{θ}$ ( u ) = P ( q ( X, θ ) ≤ u ) satisfies sup$_{u}$$\\_{∈}$$_{Π}$ | F$_{θ}$$\\_{1}$ ( u ) − F$\\_{θ}$$_{2}$ ( u ) | ≤ C || θ$_{1}$ − θ$_{2}$ || , where C is a bounded positive number, not depending on θ$_{1}$ and θ$_{2}$ .\n\nAssumptions 3.1-3.3 are weaker than related conditions in the literature. For instance, Assumption 3.1 only requires √$_{n}$ ( ˆ θ$_{n}$ − θ$_{0}$ ) = O$_{p}$ (1) , but does not require √$_{n}$ ( ˆ θ$_{n}$ − θ$_{0}$ ) to admit an asymptotically linear representation. Assumption 3.2 is a condition concerning the degree of smoothness of the propensity score q ( x, θ ), and is satisfied for standard parametric models such as the Probit and the Logit specifications. It also only requires finite first moment of g ( X, θ ), instead of more than four moments as in Shaikh et al. (2009). Assumption 3.3 simply imposes a Lipschitz type continuity condition on the CDF of the parametric propensity score.\n\n11\n\n## 3.1 Asymptotic null distribution" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.27007825218438075, + "doc_id": "968dcb1adcb55167fc8c529412274968bc059c96f5118dc78e296b86f7f44d0b", + "edit_distance": 0.49245283018867925, + "f1_score": 0.9574468085106382, + "meteor": 0.5638381091318186, + "precision": 0.9712230215827338, + "pred_md": "define Υ ˜ i : ˜ ρ → G by Υ ([ ˜ i a , ] [ b ]) = Υ ( i a, b ) for all a, b ∈ P such that ( a, b ) ∈ ρ . A routine check proves Υ ˜ 1 , ˜ Υ 2 are homomorphisms such that Υ ˜ 1 | ˜ β = ˜ Υ 2 | ˜ β . Thus ˜ Υ 1 = ˜ Υ 2 since ˜ β is a G -grading set for ˜ . X This proves Υ 1 ( a, b ) = Υ 2 ( a, b ) for all a, b ∈ P such that ( a, b ) ∈ ρ .\n\nSuppose x , x 1 2 ∈ X such that x ρx 1 2 are given. There are uniquely determined p , p 1 2 ∈ P such that [ x 1 ] = [ p 1 ] and [ x 2 ] = [ p 2 ]. Transitivity and the homomorphism property gives Υ 1 ( x , x 1 2 ) = Υ 1 ( p , x 1 1 ) -1 Υ ( 1 p , p 1 2 ) Υ 1 ( p , x 2 2 ). By the result of the previous paragraph Υ 1 ( p , p 1 2 ) = Υ 2 ( p , p 1 2 ). Moreover Υ 1 ( p , x 2 2 ) = Υ 2 ( p , x 2 2 ) and Υ ( 1 p , x 1 1 ) = Υ ( 2 p , x 1 1 ) since Υ 1 | σ = Υ 2 | σ and ( p , x 1 1 ) , ( p , x 2 2 ) ∈ γ . Substitution gives Υ ( 1 x , x 1 2 ) = Υ ( 2 p , x 1 1 ) -1 Υ ( 2 p , p 1 2 ) Υ 2 ( p , x 2 2 ) and this reduces to Υ ( 1 x , x 1 2 ) = Υ ( 2 x , x 1 2 ). Since x , x 1 2 ∈ X such that ( x , x 1 2 ) ∈ ρ were arbitrarily chosen we can conclude Υ 1 = Υ 2 and σ is a G -essential set for ρ . Therefore σ is a G -grading set for ρ .\n\nCorollary 5.2 Assume ( X,ρ ) is the compression of a preorder ( Y, ≤ ) . If Y has a cross-cut of length one or two then there is a subset σ of ρ such that σ is a G -grading set for ρ for any group G .\n\n## Proof. This follows from Theorems 4.3 and 5.1.\n\nThe directed graphs in Figure 2 represent reflexive relations. The vertices have been replaced with elements of the sets they represent.\n\nExample 5.3 Suppose ρ 1 is the stable relation on X 1 = { 1 2 3 4 , , , } determined by (a) in Figure 2. The only clasp in X 1 is 2, which is an unlocked clasp, so X 1 is the compression of a preordered set by part 1 of Theorem 4.5. If ρ 2 is the reflexive\n\n17", + "recall": 0.9440559440559441, + "true_md": "define ˜ Υ$_{i}$ : ˜ ρ → G by ˜ Υ$_{i}$ ([ a ] , [ b ]) = Υ$_{i}$ ( a, b ) for all a, b ∈ P such that ( a, b ) ∈ ρ . A routine check proves ˜ Υ$_{1}$ , ˜ Υ$_{2}$ are homomorphisms such that ˜ Υ$_{1}$ |$_{˜}$ β = ˜ Υ$_{2}$ |$_{˜}$ $_{β}$. Thus ˜ Υ$_{1}$ = ˜ Υ$_{2}$ since ˜ β is a G -grading set for ˜ X . This proves Υ$_{1}$ ( a, b ) = Υ$_{2}$ ( a, b ) for all a, b ∈ P such that ( a, b ) ∈ ρ .\n\nSuppose x$_{1}$, x$_{2}$ ∈ X such that x$_{1}$ρx$_{2}$ are given. There are uniquely determined p$_{1}$, p$_{2}$ ∈ P such that [ x$_{1}$ ] = [ p$_{1}$ ] and [ x$_{2}$ ] = [ p$_{2}$ ]. Transitivity and the homomor- phism property gives Υ$_{1}$ ( x$_{1}$, x$_{2}$ ) = Υ$_{1}$ ( p$_{1}$, x$_{1}$ ) − $^{1}$Υ$_{1}$ ( p$_{1}$, p$_{2}$ ) Υ$_{1}$ ( p$_{2}$, x$_{2}$ ). By the result of the previous paragraph Υ$_{1}$ ( p$_{1}$, p$_{2}$ ) = Υ$_{2}$ ( p$_{1}$, p$_{2}$ ). Moreover Υ$_{1}$ ( p$_{2}$, x$_{2}$ ) = Υ$_{2}$ ( p$_{2}$, x$_{2}$ ) and Υ$_{1}$ ( p$_{1}$, x$_{1}$ ) = Υ$_{2}$ ( p$_{1}$, x$_{1}$ ) since Υ$_{1}$ |$_{σ}$ = Υ$_{2}$ |$_{σ}$ and ( p$_{1}$, x$_{1}$ ) , ( p$_{2}$, x$_{2}$ ) ∈ γ . Sub- stitution gives Υ$_{1}$ ( x$_{1}$, x$_{2}$ ) = Υ$_{2}$ ( p$_{1}$, x$_{1}$ ) − $^{1}$Υ$_{2}$ ( p$_{1}$, p$_{2}$ ) Υ$_{2}$ ( p$_{2}$, x$_{2}$ ) and this reduces to Υ$_{1}$ ( x$_{1}$, x$_{2}$ ) = Υ$_{2}$ ( x$_{1}$, x$_{2}$ ). Since x$_{1}$, x$_{2}$ ∈ X such that ( x$_{1}$, x$_{2}$ ) ∈ ρ were arbitrarily chosen we can conclude Υ$_{1}$ = Υ$_{2}$ and σ is a G -essential set for ρ . Therefore σ is a G -grading set for ρ .\n\nCorollary 5.2 Assume ( X, ρ ) is the compression of a preorder ( Y, ≤ ) . If Y has a cross-cut of length one or two then there is a subset σ of ρ such that σ is a G -grading set for ρ for any group G .\n\nProof. This follows from Theorems 4.3 and 5.1.\n\nThe directed graphs in Figure 2 represent reflexive relations. The vertices have been replaced with elements of the sets they represent.\n\nExample 5.3 Suppose ρ$_{1}$ is the stable relation on X$_{1}$ = { 1 , 2 , 3 , 4 } determined by (a) in Figure 2. The only clasp in X$_{1}$ is 2, which is an unlocked clasp, so X$_{1}$ is the compression of a preordered set by part 1 of Theorem 4.5. If ρ$_{2}$ is the reflexive\n\n17" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9708805601780259, + "doc_id": "f7edd0991c960a82d485821ad3ac082b194ae0438593527a54dc76b1247945fe", + "edit_distance": 0.09036144578313253, + "f1_score": 0.9840425531914893, + "meteor": 0.9869982526403132, + "precision": 0.9893048128342246, + "pred_md": "calculations and simulation, and running under Macintosh OSX version 10.9.5 on a 2.5 GHz Intel Core i7 processor.\n\n## 4.2 Model Descriptions\n\nWe tested the automated blocking procedure on seven examples, including real-data and toy models, and compared the results against standard MCMC algorithms. When there are obvious 'handtuned' algorithms that a seasoned MCMC practitioner would consider for a particular model, we included those as well. For the toy models, the goal was to construct posterior distributions with specific correlation structures as described below. In these cases the models are simply prior distributions without any likelihood component.\n\n## Varying Size Blocks of Fixed Correlation\n\nThis model structure demonstrates parameter groups of varying size, where each group exhibits a fixed intra-group pairwise correlation. The model contains N = 64 parameters, half of which are grouped to have pairwise posterior correlation of ρ . This is accomplished using a prior multivariate normal distribution with appropriate covariance (equivalently, correlation) matrix, which in the absence of a likelihood term fully determines the posterior distribution for these 32 parameters. Similarly, additional disjoint groups of correlated parameters are constructed of sizes 16, 8, 4, and 2. The remaining two parameters are uncorrelated to any others, specified using univariate normal prior distributions. We consider three values for the intra-group correlation, ρ = 0.2, 0.5, and 0.8. As these models have no likelihood, we are using MCMC to sample from the prior distribution. We note that the dependence structure is the same as the block-diagonal covariance structure (with the blocks having compound symmetry) obtained when analytically integrating over the exchangeable prior means of clustered random effects. This example thereby mimics the structure found in basic multilevel hierarchical models, albeit without the explicit computational expense of a likelihood calculation.\n\n18", + "recall": 0.9788359788359788, + "true_md": "calculations and simulation, and running under Macintosh OSX version 10.9.5 on a 2.5 GHz Intel Core i7 processor.\n\nWe tested the automated blocking procedure on seven examples, including real-data and toy models, and compared the results against standard MCMC algorithms. When there are obvious “hand- tuned” algorithms that a seasoned MCMC practitioner would consider for a particular model, we included those as well. For the toy models, the goal was to construct posterior distributions with specific correlation structures as described below. In these cases the models are simply prior distributions without any likelihood component.\n\nThis model structure demonstrates parameter groups of varying size, where each group exhibits a fixed intra-group pairwise correlation. The model contains N = 64 parameters, half of which are grouped to have pairwise posterior correlation of ρ . This is accomplished using a prior multivariate normal distribution with appropriate covariance (equivalently, correlation) matrix, which in the absence of a likelihood term fully determines the posterior distribution for these 32 parameters. Similarly, additional disjoint groups of correlated parameters are constructed of sizes 16, 8, 4, and 2. The remaining two parameters are uncorrelated to any others, specified using univariate normal prior distributions. We consider three values for the intra-group correlation, ρ = 0.2, 0.5, and 0.8. As these models have no likelihood, we are using MCMC to sample from the prior distribution. We note that the dependence structure is the same as the block-diagonal covariance structure (with the blocks having compound symmetry) obtained when analytically integrating over the exchangeable prior means of clustered random effects. This example thereby mimics the structure found in basic multilevel hierarchical models, albeit without the explicit computational expense of a likelihood calculation.\n\n18\n\n## Varying Size Blocks of Fixed Correlation\n\n## 4.2 Model Descriptions" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4691934971412147, + "doc_id": "8b9edf40e8c4d0e830872e83f54fad2d0df954bb7d0a618b7ca1a936148c05bf", + "edit_distance": 0.5115303983228512, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9093636563702513, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Figure 1: Functional connectivity at long time scales constrains the range over which functional connectivity is expected to vary at shorter time scales (A) Four pairs of real BOLD time series whose static connectivity varies from ρ = 0 11 (blue), . ρ = 0 33 (yellow), . ρ = 0 55 (green), and . ρ = 0 77 (red). . (B) We then sub-divided the full time series into 730 windows containing 156 time points each (the same parameters used for generating dynamic FC matrices), estimated dynamic FC for each window, and then plotted the histogram of dynamic FC magnitude. (C) In general, the distribution is centered around the magnitude of the static connection and also becomes tighter and more skewed as the static connection increases in magnitude. The top panel shows the magnitude of static connectivity on the x-axis and the median (50th percentile) of dynamic connectivity on the y-axis. The two curves are correlated to a value of 0.95. The bottom panel shows the magnitude of static connectivity plotted against the range of the 95% confidence interval for the distribution of dynamic fluctuations (i.e. we expect that 95% of all dynamic functional connection magnitudes will fall within this range).\n\nFigure 1: Functional connectivity at long time scales constrains the range over which functional connectivity is expected to vary at shorter time scales (A) Four pairs of real BOLD time series whose static connectivity varies from ρ = 0 11 (blue), . ρ = 0 33 (yellow), . ρ = 0 55 (green), and . ρ = 0 77 (red). . (B) We then sub-divided the full time series into 730 windows containing 156 time points each (the same parameters used for generating dynamic FC matrices), estimated dynamic FC for each window, and then plotted the histogram of dynamic FC magnitude. (C) In general, the distribution is centered around the magnitude of the static connection and also becomes tighter and more skewed as the static connection increases in magnitude. The top panel shows the magnitude of static connectivity on the x-axis and the median (50th percentile) of dynamic connectivity on the y-axis. The two curves are correlated to a value of 0.95. The bottom panel shows the magnitude of static connectivity plotted against the range of the 95% confidence interval for the distribution of dynamic fluctuations (i.e. we expect that 95% of all dynamic functional connection magnitudes will fall within this range).\n\n39", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Figure 1: Functional connectivity at long time scales constrains the range over which functional connectivity is expected to vary at shorter time scales (A) Four pairs of real BOLD time series whose static connectivity varies from ρ = 0 . 11 (blue), ρ = 0 . 33 (yellow), ρ = 0 . 55 (green), and ρ = 0 . 77 (red). (B) We then sub-divided the full time series into 730 windows containing 156 time points each (the same parameters used for generating dynamic FC matrices), estimated dynamic FC for each window, and then plotted the histogram of dynamic FC magnitude. (C) In general, the distribution is centered around the magnitude of the static connection and also becomes tighter and more skewed as the static connection increases in magnitude. The top panel shows the magnitude of static connectivity on the x-axis and the median (50th percentile) of dynamic connectivity on the y-axis. The two curves are correlated to a value of 0.95. The bottom panel shows the magnitude of static connectivity plotted against the range of the 95% confidence interval for the distribution of dynamic fluctuations (i.e. we expect that 95% of all dynamic functional connection magnitudes will fall within this range).\n\n39" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8847535979487626, + "doc_id": "a63762363f3d78ed8a8c49b8d07b5dca1704f304d830bf601bf48feeaa093cc9", + "edit_distance": 0.18181818181818182, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9982608453682834, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "AVERAGE NETWORK THROUGHPUT (IN BPS/HZ/CELL) OF THE DERIVED BOUNDS, CENTRALIZED AND DISTRIBUTED SCHEMES FOR L =2 CELLS AND N = 6 SUBCARRIERS/CELL\n\nTABLE I\n\nMarch 19, 2018\n\nDRAFT\n\n20", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "TABLE I AVERAGE NETWORK THROUGHPUT (IN BPS/HZ/CELL) OF THE DERIVED BOUNDS, CENTRALIZED AND DISTRIBUTED SCHEMES FOR L =2 CELLS AND N = 6 SUBCARRIERS/CELL\n\n20\n\nDRAFT\n\nMarch 19, 2018" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.10399662151882814, + "doc_id": "ff6c5559985711f53e54226825fa27f4db298c368dc36af24acccc57f3c498d2", + "edit_distance": 0.8592297476759628, + "f1_score": 0.8652482269503547, + "meteor": 0.291794085932651, + "precision": 0.9606299212598425, + "pred_md": "and\n\nwith\n\n\n\nBased on the bounds on F ∆ ( δ d, z | ), the identification region of the DTE can be obtained by intersection bounds as presented in Chernozhukov et al. (2013). 12\n\nCorollary 3 The DTE in the extended Roy model is bounded as follows:\n\n\n\nwhere\n\n\n\n## 4 Numerical Illustration\n\nThis section provides numerical illustration to assess the informativeness of my new bounds. Since my sharp bounds on the DTE under support restrictions are written with respect to given marginal distribution functions F 0 and F 1 , the tightness of the bounds is affected by the properties of these marginal distributions. I report the results of numerical examples to clarify the association between the identifying power of my bounds and the marginal distribution functions F 0 and F . 1 I focus on MTR, which is one of the most widely applicable support restrictions in economics.\n\nMy numerical examples use the following data generating process for the potential outcomes equation:\n\n12 The bounds on the DTE are sharp without any other additional assumption. Park (2013) showed that the DTE can be point-identified in the extended Roy model under continuous IV with the large support and a restriction on the function m . c\n\n28\n\n", + "recall": 0.7870967741935484, + "true_md": "and\n\nwith\n\nwhere\n\nThis section provides numerical illustration to assess the informativeness of my new bounds. Since my sharp bounds on the DTE under support restrictions are written with respect to given marginal distribution functions F$_{0}$ and F$_{1}$ , the tightness of the bounds is affected by the properties of these marginal distributions. I report the results of numerical examples to clarify the association between the identifying power of my bounds and the marginal distribution functions F$_{0}$ and F$_{1}$. I focus on MTR, which is one of the most widely applicable support restrictions in economics.\n\nMy numerical examples use the following data generating process for the potential outcomes equation:\n\nBased on the bounds on F$_{Δ}$ ( δ | d, z ), the identification region of the DTE can be obtained by intersection bounds as presented in Chernozhukov et al. (2013). 12\n\nCorollary 3 The DTE in the extended Roy model is bounded as follows:\n\n$$F U Δ ( δ | 1 , z ) =      1 + inf y ∈$_{R}$ { min ( F$_{1}$ ( y | 1 , z ) − F$_{0}$ ( y − δ | 1 , z )) , 0 } , for δ ≥ m$_{C}$ ( z ) , 0 , for δ < m$_{C}$ ( z ) , F L Δ ( δ | 0 , z ) =      1 , for δ ≥ m$_{C}$ ( z ) , sup y ∈$_{R}$ max { F$_{1}$ ( y ) − F$_{0}$ ( y − δ ) , 0 } , for δ < m$_{C}$ ( z ) , F U Δ ( δ | 0 , z ) =      1 , for δ ≥ m$_{C}$ ( z ) , 1 + inf { b$_{k}$ } ∞ k = −∞ { min ( F$_{1}$ ( b$_{k}$$_{+1}$ + m$_{C}$ ( z )) − F$_{0}$ ( b$_{k}$ )) , 0 } , for δ < m$_{C}$ ( z ) ,$$\n\n$$b$_{k}$ + δ − m$_{C}$ ( z ) ≤ b$_{k}$$_{+1}$ ≤ b$_{k}$.$$\n\n$$F L Δ ( δ ) ≤ F$_{Δ}$ ( δ ) ≤ F U Δ ( δ ) ,$$\n\n$$F L Δ ( δ ) = sup z $^{[}$F L Δ ( δ | 1 , z ) p ( z ) + F L Δ ( δ | 0 , z ) (1 − p ( z )) $^{]}$, F U Δ ( δ ) = inf z $^{[}$F U Δ ( δ | 1 , z ) p ( z ) + F U Δ ( δ | 0 , z ) (1 − p ( z )) $^{]}$.$$\n\n## 4 Numerical Illustration\n\n$^{12}$The bounds on the DTE are sharp without any other additional assumption. Park (2013) showed that the DTE can be point-identified in the extended Roy model under continuous IV with the large support and a restriction on the function m$_{c}$.\n\n28" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9487910547316193, + "doc_id": "817338d5b509104f2efbbd8636209011a6f43d0758fb6bdb73eced1fa4333914", + "edit_distance": 0.04085603112840467, + "f1_score": 0.9659574468085108, + "meteor": 0.9617471200070001, + "precision": 0.9826839826839827, + "pred_md": "or World Trade Organization (WTO) on 5 different measures of environmental quality: per capita CO 2 emissions, average annual deforestation rate for 1990-1996, energy depletion, rural access to clear water and urban access to clear water.\n\nAs Millimet and Tchernis (2009), we use three different covariates to model the probability of being a GATT/WTO member: real per capita GDP, land area per capita, and polity, which is a measure of how democratic (versus autocratic) is the structure of the government. The motivation to include these three covariates is to increase the plausibility of Assumption 2.1 as discussed by Frankel and Rose (2005). GDP per capita is associated with the probability of being member of the GATT/WTO and at the same time may have effects on different measures of environment quality, for instance, via the environmental Kuznetz curve. Land area per capita is another potential confounder since higher population density may lead to environmental degradation and 'larger' countries are more likely to trade more, affecting the probability of being member of he GATT/WTO. Finally, as noted by Frankel and Rose (2005), low-democracy countries tend to have lower measures of environmental quality, and can also confound the effect of GATT/WTO membership. In what follows and in the same spirit of Millimet and Tchernis (2009), we assume that Assumption 2.1 holds after controlling for these three confounding factors 6 .\n\nThe unbalanced country-level panel data we use follows from Millimet and Tchernis (2009), and includes observations from 1990 (before the WTO) and 1995 (after the WTO). However, it is important to have in mind that treatment is defined as being a GATT/WTO member, and therefore there are countries who were treated in both times, and others who were treated only in 1995. Table 3 provides summary statistics and more detailed description of the variables. Finally, we highlight that the data we analyze is from an unbalanced country-level panel and instead of only considering the 'always observed' countries, we follow Millimet and Tchernis (2009) and run a separate analysis for each outcome. For further details, see Section 4.1 of Millimet and Tchernis (2009).\n\nThe main goal of this section is to assess the 'reliability' of different treatment effect measures by analyzing if different propensity score models are correctly specified or not. Given that the sample constitutes of an unbalanced panel, we estimate separate propensity score models\n\n6 If one finds the plausibility of this assumption rather low, all the estimates presented below should be interpreted as associations/correlations and not as causal effects. In light of Remark 1, however, Assumption 2.1 plays no role in our specification tests.\n\n26", + "recall": 0.9497907949790795, + "true_md": "or World Trade Organization (WTO) on 5 different measures of environmental quality: per capita CO$_{2}$ emissions, average annual deforestation rate for 1990-1996, energy depletion, rural access to clear water and urban access to clear water.\n\nAs Millimet and Tchernis (2009), we use three different covariates to model the probability of being a GATT/WTO member: real per capita GDP, land area per capita, and polity, which is a measure of how democratic (versus autocratic) is the structure of the government. The motivation to include these three covariates is to increase the plausibility of Assumption 2.1 as discussed by Frankel and Rose (2005). GDP per capita is associated with the probability of being member of the GATT/WTO and at the same time may have effects on different measures of environment quality, for instance, via the environmental Kuznetz curve. Land area per capita is another potential confounder since higher population density may lead to environmental degradation and “larger” countries are more likely to trade more, affecting the probability of being member of he GATT/WTO. Finally, as noted by Frankel and Rose (2005), low-democracy countries tend to have lower measures of environmental quality, and can also confound the effect of GATT/WTO membership. In what follows and in the same spirit of Millimet and Tchernis (2009), we assume that Assumption 2.1 holds after controlling for these three confounding factors $^{6}$.\n\nThe unbalanced country-level panel data we use follows from Millimet and Tchernis (2009), and includes observations from 1990 (before the WTO) and 1995 (after the WTO). However, it is important to have in mind that treatment is defined as being a GATT/WTO member, and therefore there are countries who were treated in both times, and others who were treated only in 1995. Table 3 provides summary statistics and more detailed description of the variables. Finally, we highlight that the data we analyze is from an unbalanced country-level panel and instead of only considering the “always observed” countries, we follow Millimet and Tchernis (2009) and run a separate analysis for each outcome. For further details, see Section 4.1 of Millimet and Tchernis (2009).\n\nThe main goal of this section is to assess the “reliability” of different treatment effect mea- sures by analyzing if different propensity score models are correctly specified or not. Given that the sample constitutes of an unbalanced panel, we estimate separate propensity score models\n\n6 If one finds the plausibility of this assumption rather low, all the estimates presented below should be interpreted as associations/correlations and not as causal effects. In light of Remark 1, however, Assumption 2.1 plays no role in our specification tests.\n\n26" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4822583079523866, + "doc_id": "a43953dc0e962f6c0d6d4a405fe9273bca52c7461f5ea537e67a33c7c37153f5", + "edit_distance": 0.5035460992907801, + "f1_score": 0.9696969696969697, + "meteor": 0.8871886397144408, + "precision": 0.9795918367346939, + "pred_md": "Figure 8: Anatomical distribution of stronger-/weaker-than-expected functional connections. In all panels A-B we focus on the 25 connections that appear most frequently as strongerthan-expected. In panels C-D we focus on the 25 connections that are consistently weaker than expected. The connections are color-coded in both cases so that they can be identified in the anatomical plots as well as the distance vs event count plots.\n\nFigure 8: Anatomical distribution of stronger-/weaker-than-expected functional connections. In all panels A-B we focus on the 25 connections that appear most frequently as strongerthan-expected. In panels C-D we focus on the 25 connections that are consistently weaker than expected. The connections are color-coded in both cases so that they can be identified in the anatomical plots as well as the distance vs event count plots.\n\n45", + "recall": 0.96, + "true_md": "Figure 8: Anatomical distribution of stronger-/weaker-than-expected functional connections. In all panels A-B we focus on the 25 connections that appear most frequently as stronger- than-expected. In panels C-D we focus on the 25 connections that are consistently weaker than expected. The connections are color-coded in both cases so that they can be identified in the anatomical plots as well as the distance vs event count plots.\n\n45" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.23700238964349063, + "doc_id": "5eccdb849bf6550e61478141ab2f2d7bbfe070b7bb550625e5cc551ae90d1b95", + "edit_distance": 0.5930232558139535, + "f1_score": 0.9226190476190476, + "meteor": 0.41814163137397714, + "precision": 0.9451219512195121, + "pred_md": "distribution with d degrees of freedom. For the t -test, we consider Bonferroni corrected CVs based on the standard normal distribution. Note that the Bonferroni correction is necessary to address the multiple testing problem.\n\nWe consider sample sizes n equal to 100, 200, 400, 600, 800 and 1 , 000. For each design, we consider 1 000 Monte Carlo experiments. , The { V i } n i = used in the bootstrap implementations are independently generated as V with P ( V = 1 -κ ) = κ/ √ 5 and P ( V = κ ) = 1 -κ/ √ 5, where κ = ( √ 5 + 1 ) / 2, as proposed by Mammen (1993). The bootstrapped critical values are approximated using B = 999 bootstrap replications. To compute Shaikh et al. (2009)'s test, we use the standard normal kernel\n\n\n\nFollowing Shaikh et al. (2009), the bandwidth sequence h n is chosen to be equal to cn -1 8 / for c equal to 0.01, 0.05, 0.10 and 0.15. We choose different c 's to assess how sensitive Shaikh et al. (2009)'s test may be with respect to the bandwidth h n .\n\n## 4.1 Simulation 1\n\nWe first consider the following data generating processes (DGPs):\n\n\n\nFor each of these five DGPs, D = 1 { D > ∗ 0 } , ε ⊥ ⊥ ( X ,X 1 2 ), where X 1 = Z 1 , X 2 = ( Z 1 + Z 2 ) / √ 2, and Z 1 , Z , 2 and ε are independent standard normal random variables. All the DGPs considered have the propensity score bounded away from zero and one. Finally, for each of these DGPs we consider the potential outcomes\n\n\n\n19", + "recall": 0.9011627906976745, + "true_md": "distribution with d degrees of freedom. For the t -test, we consider Bonferroni corrected CVs based on the standard normal distribution. Note that the Bonferroni correction is necessary to address the multiple testing problem.\n\nWe consider sample sizes n equal to 100, 200, 400, 600, 800 and 1 , 000. For each design, we consider 1 , 000 Monte Carlo experiments. The { V$_{i}$ } n i = used in the bootstrap implementations are independently generated as V with P ( V = 1 − κ ) = $_{κ/}$√$_{5 and}$ P ( V = κ ) = 1 − $_{κ/}$√$_{5,}$ where κ = ( $^{√$\\_{5 + 1}$}$) / 2, as proposed by Mammen (1993). The bootstrapped critical values are approximated using B = 999 bootstrap replications. To compute Shaikh et al. (2009)’s test, we use the standard normal kernel\n\nFollowing Shaikh et al. (2009), the bandwidth sequence h$_{n}$ is chosen to be equal to cn − 1 / 8 for c equal to 0.01, 0.05, 0.10 and 0.15. We choose different c ’s to assess how sensitive Shaikh et al. (2009)’s test may be with respect to the bandwidth h$_{n}$ .\n\n$$K ( u ) = 1 √$_{2}$$_{π}$ exp ( − u 2 2 ) .$$\n\nWe first consider the following data generating processes (DGPs):\n\n## 4.1 Simulation 1\n\nFor each of these five DGPs, D = 1 { D ∗ > 0 } ,ε ⊥ ( X$_{1}$,X$_{2}$ ), where X$_{1}$ = Z$_{1}$ , X$_{2}$ = ( Z$_{1}$ + Z$_{2}$ ) $_{/}$√$_{2,}$ and Z$_{1}$ , Z$_{2}$, and ε are independent standard normal random variables. All the DGPs considered have the propensity score bounded away from zero and one. Finally, for each of these DGPs we consider the potential outcomes\n\n19\n\nY (1) = 2 m$_{1}$ ( X ) + u (1) and Y (0) = m$_{1}$ ( X ) + u (0) ,\n\n$$DGP 1 . D ∗ = ( X$_{1}$ + X$_{2}$ ) 3 − ε ;$$\n\n$$DGP 2 . D ∗ = − 1 + ( X$_{1}$ + X$_{2}$ + X$_{1}$X$_{2}$ ) 3 − ε ;$$\n\n$$DGP 3 . D ∗ = − 0 . 2 + ( X 2 1 − X 2 ) 2 − ε ; (0 . 1 + X$_{1}$/ 3)$$\n\n$$( ) DGP 4 . D ∗ = (0 . 1 + X$_{1}$/ 3) exp (( X$_{1}$ + X$_{2}$ )/ 3) − ε ;$$\n\n$$DGP 5 . D ∗ = ( − 0 . 8 + ( X$_{1}$ + X$_{2}$ + X$_{1}$X$_{2}$ ) / 3) exp (0 . 2 + ( X$_{1}$ + X$_{2}$ )/ 3) − ε.$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.19267676983847443, + "doc_id": "bfa2b21fc5caeda975032538a32f17e7933ef90b82b44e372e79b5409f87753c", + "edit_distance": 0.655958549222798, + "f1_score": 0.9161290322580644, + "meteor": 0.4015322758772412, + "precision": 0.9594594594594594, + "pred_md": "The partial lagrange L (˜ p n,k,l , z ˜ n,lj , λ , η l n,lj ) for (16) can then be written explicitly as follows:\n\n/negationslash\n\n\n\n/negationslash\n\nEq. (17) can be decomposed into L sub-problems with local variables ˜ p n,k,l , z ˜ n,lj , λ l and coupling variable η n,lj . The simple lagrangian L l for each cell l can then be written as follows:\n\n/negationslash\n\n\n\n/negationslash\n\n/negationslash\n\n/negationslash\n\nwhere λ l is the lagrange multiplier for the inequality constraints and η n,lj are the consistency prices. Thus, the minimization of (18) with respect to the local variables can be done in a distributed way at all BSs. At every iteration, each cell l receives the term ( L ∑ j =1 ,j = l η n,jl ) by message passing and minimizes the local Lagrangian (18) with respect to the local variables ˜ p n,k,l , z ˜ n,lj , λ l subject to the local constraints. In order to obtain η n,lj the following master lagrange dual problem has to be solved:\n\n\n\nA simple way to solve (19) is to use the following subgradient update for the consistency prices:\n\n\n\n/negationslash\n\nIn summary, each BS minimizes (18) in parallel with respect to the local variables after receiving the term ∑ L j =1 ,j = l η n,jl . Each BS then estimates the received interference z n,lj from each cell and update the local consistency prices using (20). Finally, each BS broadcast them by message passing to all BSs. Note that δ in (20) represents the step size and is non-negative.\n\n## VI. PERFORMANCE EVALUATION\n\nA cellular OFDMA network is considered where the radius of each cell is assumed to be 1 km. The maximum user transmit power is considered to be 1 W. The channel gain is defined\n\nMarch 19, 2018\n\nDRAFT\n\n15", + "recall": 0.8765432098765432, + "true_md": "15\n\nThe partial lagrange L (˜ p$_{n,k,l}$, ˜ z$_{n,lj}$, λ$_{l}$, η$_{n,lj}$ ) for (16) can then be written explicitly as follows:\n\nEq. (17) can be decomposed into L sub-problems with local variables ˜ p$_{n,k,l}$, ˜ z$_{n,lj}$, λ$_{l}$ and coupling variable η$_{n,lj}$ . The simple lagrangian L$_{l}$ for each cell l can then be written as follows:\n\nwhere λ$_{l}$ is the lagrange multiplier for the inequality constraints and η$_{n,lj}$ are the consistency prices. Thus, the minimization of (18) with respect to the local variables can be done in a distributed way at all BSs. At every iteration, each cell l receives the term ( L ∑ j =1 ,j ̸ = l η$_{n,jl}$ ) by message passing and minimizes the local Lagrangian (18) with respect to the local variables ˜ p$_{n,k,l}$, ˜ z$_{n,lj}$, λ$_{l}$ subject to the local constraints. In order to obtain η$_{n,lj}$ the following master lagrange dual problem has to be solved:\n\n$$L ∑ l =1 log$_{2}$ ( σ 2 + ∑ L j =1 ,j ̸ = l e ˜ z$_{n,lj}$ e ˜ $^{p$_{n,k,l}$}$h$_{n,k,l}$ ) + L ∑ l =1 L ∑ j =1 ,j ̸ = l η$_{n,lj}$ (˜ z$_{n,lj}$ − ˜ g$_{n,k,jl}$ − ˜ p$_{n,k,j}$ )+ L ∑ l =1 λ$_{l}$ ( e ˜ p$_{n,k,l}$ − P$_{n,k,l,}$$_{eq}$ ) (17)$$\n\n$$L$_{l}$ = log$_{2}$ ( σ 2 + ∑ L j =1 ,j ̸ = l e ˜ z$_{n,lj}$ e ˜ $^{p$_{n,k,l}$}$h$_{n,k,l}$ ) + L ∑ j =1 ,j ̸ = l η$_{n,lj}$ ˜ z$_{n,lj}$ − ( L ∑ j =1 ,j ̸ = l η$_{n,jl}$ ) ˜ p$_{n,k,l}$ + λ$_{l}$ (˜ p$_{n,k,l}$ − P$_{n,k,l,}$$_{eq}$) (18)$$\n\n$$maximize η$_{n,lj}$ L ∑ l =1 minimize ˜ p$_{n,k,l}$, ˜ z$_{n,lj}$,λ$_{l}$ L$_{l}$ (19)$$\n\n$$η$_{n,lj}$ ( t + 1) = η$_{n,lj}$ ( t ) + ( δ/t ) (˜ z$_{n,lj}$ − log$_{2}$ p$_{n,k,j}$g$_{n,k,jl}$ ) (20)$$\n\nA simple way to solve (19) is to use the following subgradient update for the consistency prices:\n\nIn summary, each BS minimizes (18) in parallel with respect to the local variables after receiving the term ∑ L j =1 ,j ̸ = l η$_{n,jl}$ . Each BS then estimates the received interference z$_{n,lj}$ from each cell and update the local consistency prices using (20). Finally, each BS broadcast them by message passing to all BSs. Note that δ in (20) represents the step size and is non-negative.\n\nA cellular OFDMA network is considered where the radius of each cell is assumed to be 1 km. The maximum user transmit power is considered to be 1 W. The channel gain is defined\n\n## VI. PERFORMANCE EVALUATION\n\nDRAFT\n\nMarch 19, 2018" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.788705700050812, + "doc_id": "a3d9276fc3ec93631a3ad6c86700bb272ab0ba5683a056e8a412cab17c1f6d39", + "edit_distance": 0.15422885572139303, + "f1_score": 0.9184782608695652, + "meteor": 0.879897129052855, + "precision": 0.949438202247191, + "pred_md": "connections at each time point, E + ( ) and t E -( ), respectively, which we refer to t as excursions . We also counted the total number of excursions of both types at each time t as E t ( ) = E + ( )+ t E -( ). t To contextualize the number of excursions at any time point, we compared the observed counts to those obtained from an additional sample of 1000 surrogate datasets generated as described before. This allowed us to assign each excursion count score to a percentile and to focus on time points at which the number of excursions was greater than expected (greater than or equal to the 97.5th percentile).This process of contextualizing dynamic functional connections can be seen from a statistical point of view as an assessment of whether there is enough evidence to reject the null hypothesis that a dynamic functional connection is neither significantly stronger or weaker than its corresponding static connection.\n\nIt should be noted that the characterization of a dynamic functional connections as stronger or weaker than expected is always made with respect to a connection's static weight and never in an absolute sense. In other words, 'stronger' refers to 'more positive than expected' and 'weaker' means 'more negative than expected.' This can lead to confusion when dealing with static connections whose weights are < 0. In such cases, weaker-than-expected actually means a more negative correlation (i.e. close to -1) while stronger-thanexpected means a more positive correlation (i.e. closer to +1). As a consequence of adopting this convention a stronger-than-expected dynamic functional connection may actually approach a value of 0.\n\nAn alternative, and admittedly simpler, method for contextualizing excursion counts would be to randomly permute the order of time points, repeat this process many times, and compare the observed excursion counts to the distribution generated from the permutations. We believe that this approach, though simpler, is not appropriate, because dynamic functional networks are not in-\n\n10", + "recall": 0.8894736842105263, + "true_md": "connections at each time point, E $^{+}$( t ) and E $^{−}$( t ), respectively, which we refer to as excursions . We also counted the total number of excursions of both types at each time t as E ( t ) = E $^{+}$( t )+ E $^{−}$( t ). To contextualize the number of excursions at any time point, we compared the observed counts to those obtained from an additional sample of 1000 surrogate datasets generated as described before.\n\nThis allowed us to assign each excursion count score to a percentile and to focus on time points at which the number of excursions was greater than expected (greater than or equal to the 97.5th percentile).This process of contextualizing dynamic functional connections can be seen from a statistical point of view as an assessment of whether there is enough evidence to reject the null hypothesis that a dynamic functional connection is neither significantly stronger or weaker than its corresponding static connection.\n\nIt should be noted that the characterization of a dynamic functional con- nections as stronger or weaker than expected is always made with respect to a connection’s static weight and never in an absolute sense. In other words, “stronger” refers to “more positive than expected” and “weaker” means “more negative than expected.” This can lead to confusion when dealing with static connections whose weights are < 0. In such cases, weaker-than-expected actu- ally means a more negative correlation (i.e. close to − 1) while stronger-than- expected means a more positive correlation (i.e. closer to +1). As a consequence of adopting this convention a stronger-than-expected dynamic functional con- nection may actually approach a value of 0.\n\nAn alternative, and admittedly simpler, method for contextualizing excur- sion counts would be to randomly permute the order of time points, repeat this process many times, and compare the observed excursion counts to the distribu- tion generated from the permutations. We believe that this approach, though simpler, is not appropriate, because dynamic functional networks are not in-\n\n10" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5739958240925855, + "doc_id": "ba57f6c5c6383da42cba91a31274d6d4ea06be832304e9d35947d5da849c30c8", + "edit_distance": 0.3583138173302108, + "f1_score": 0.9173789173789175, + "meteor": 0.7056147384798657, + "precision": 0.9415204678362573, + "pred_md": "tion of P is left up to the user. Recent work has shown that P must be chosen carefully when one applies modularity maximization to correlation matrices. One possible choice is to set P = . where I I is the identity matrix (MacMahon and Garlaschelli, 2015; Bazzi et al., 2014). This definition corresponds to a null model where time series are uncorrelated with one another. Thus, community detection amounts to placing as many positive correlation coefficients within each community as possible.To normalize Q so that it is bounded between 0 and 1, we scale Q t ( ) by 1 / m 2 , where 2 m = ∑ ij | W ij | .\n\nIt is worth noting that the modularity function used here differs from most standard approaches for dealing with signed networks. Traditionally, signed networks are sub-divided into two separate networks: one containing just positive connections:\n\n\n\nand\n\n\n\nModularity functions are then defined for both the positive and negative components as: Q ± = ∑ ij [ W ± ij -P ± ij ] δ g , g ( i j ). The choice of how to combine the two components to obtain the total modularity is left up to the user, though a number of weighting schemes have been proposed (G'mez et al., 2009; o Rubinov and Sporns, 2011). In general, the total modularity is of the form: Q = c + Q + -c -Q -, where c ± are constants. Thus, modularity maximization for signed networks can be viewed as an attempt to maximize the modularity of positive connections while penalizing negative connections when they fall within\n\n12", + "recall": 0.8944444444444445, + "true_md": "tion of P is left up to the user. Recent work has shown that P must be chosen carefully when one applies modularity maximization to correlation matrices.\n\nOne possible choice is to set P = I . where I is the identity matrix (MacMahon and Garlaschelli, 2015; Bazzi et al., 2014). This definition corresponds to a null model where time series are uncorrelated with one another. Thus, community detection amounts to placing as many positive correlation coefficients within each community as possible.To normalize Q so that it is bounded between 0 and 1, we scale Q ( t ) by 1 / 2 m , where 2 m = ∑ ij | W$_{ij}$ | .\n\nIt is worth noting that the modularity function used here differs from most standard approaches for dealing with signed networks. Traditionally, signed net- works are sub-divided into two separate networks: one containing just positive connections:\n\nand\n\nModularity functions are then defined for both the positive and negative components as: Q ± = $^{∑}$$\\_{ij}$[ W ± ij − P ± $\\_{ij}$] δ ( g$\\_{i}$,g$\\_{j}$ ). The choice of how to com- bine the two components to obtain the total modularity is left up to the user, though a number of weighting schemes have been proposed (G´ omez et al., 2009; Rubinov and Sporns, 2011). In general, the total modularity is of the form: Q = c $^{+}$Q$^{+}$− c $^{−}$Q$^{−}$, where c ± are constants. Thus, modularity maximization for signed networks can be viewed as an attempt to maximize the modularity of positive connections while penalizing negative connections when they fall within\n\n12\n\n$$W − ij =      − W$_{ij}$, if W$_{ij}$ < 0 0 , otherwise$$\n\n$$W + ij =      W$_{ij}$, if W$_{ij}$ > 0 0 , otherwise$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.30257634591063604, + "doc_id": "796ecb110cf49919004eccf1eb14ad8d5edbc8e345f92351762275a8245ce3b4", + "edit_distance": 0.48726467331118495, + "f1_score": 0.9375000000000002, + "meteor": 0.5397347773859547, + "precision": 0.9574468085106383, + "pred_md": "/negationslash\n\n4\n\nThe average network throughput C is a function of both subcarrier and power allocation variables. The sum rate maximization problem is formulated as follows using the standard Shannon capacity formula, C n,k,l = log (1 + 2 γ n,k,l ) , where C n,k,l and γ n,k,l represent the throughput and SINR of the k th user at n th subcarrier in cell l , respectively:\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n/negationslash\n\nIn (1), I n,l = ∑ L j =1 ,j = l ∑ K k =1 α n,k,j p n,k,j g n,k,jl represents the cumulative interference at n th subcarrier in cell l from the users in all other cells, p n,k,l denotes the power transmitted by k th user at the n th subcarrier in cell l , α n,k,l represents the allocation of k th user at the n th subcarrier in cell l and h n,k,l is the channel gain of k th user at the n th subcarrier in cell l . Constraint (2) implies that the power spent by k th user on its allocated subcarriers cannot exceed the maximum available power, P k max . For each cell, we collect the power allocation variables p n,k,l in a vector p n,l = [ p n, 1 ,l , p n, 2 ,l , ...., p n,K,l ] and then stack all the vectors in a power matrix P l of cell l where P l ∈ R N × K . Constraint (3) restricts the allocation of each subcarrier to only one user. The channel gains h n,k,l and binary allocation variables α n,k,l are stacked up similarly in the matrices H l and A l , respectively, where A H l , l ∈ R N × K . Moreover, we define g n,k,lj as the interfering gain from the k th user in cell l to cell j , ∀ j = l at n th subcarrier. We collect these interfering gains into a vector g n,lj = [ g n, 1 ,lj , g n, 2 ,lj ...., g n,K,lj ] and then stack all the vectors in a matrix G lj ∈ R N × K .\n\nMarch 19, 2018\n\nDRAFT", + "recall": 0.9183673469387755, + "true_md": "4\n\nThe average network throughput C is a function of both subcarrier and power allocation variables. The sum rate maximization problem is formulated as follows using the standard Shannon capacity formula, C$_{n,k,l}$ = log$_{2}$(1 + γ$_{n,k,l}$ ) , where C$_{n,k,l}$ and γ$_{n,k,l}$ represent the throughput and SINR of the k th user at n th subcarrier in cell l , respectively:\n\n$$maximize p$_{n,k,l}$,α$_{n,k,l}$ L ∑ l =1 K ∑ k =1 N ∑ n =1 α$_{n,k,l}$ log$_{2}$ ( 1 + p$_{n,k,l}$h$_{n,k,l}$ σ $^{2}$+ I$_{n,l}$ ) (1)$$\n\n$$subject to N ∑ n =1 p$_{n,k,l}$ ≤ P$_{k,}$$_{max}$ , ∀ k, ∀ l (2)$$\n\n$$K ∑ k =1 α$_{n,k,l}$ = 1 , ∀ n, ∀ l (3)$$\n\n$$α$_{n,k,l}$ ∈ { 0 , 1 } , ∀ n, ∀ l, ∀ k (4)$$\n\nIn (1), I$_{n,l}$ = ∑ L j =1 ,j ̸ = l ∑ K k =1 α$_{n,k,j}$p$_{n,k,j}$g$_{n,k,jl}$ represents the cumulative interference at n th subcarrier in cell l from the users in all other cells, p$_{n,k,l}$ denotes the power transmitted by k th user at the n th subcarrier in cell l , α$_{n,k,l}$ represents the allocation of k th user at the n th subcarrier in cell l and h$_{n,k,l}$ is the channel gain of k th user at the n th subcarrier in cell l . Constraint (2) implies that the power spent by k th user on its allocated subcarriers cannot exceed the maximum available power, P$_{k}$$\\_{max}$ . For each cell, we collect the power allocation variables p$\\_{n,k,l}$ in a vector p$\\_{n,l}$ = [ p$\\_{n,}$$_{1}$$\\_{,l}$, p$\\_{n,}$$_{2}$$\\_{,l}$, ...., p$\\_{n,K,l}$ ] and then stack all the vectors in a power matrix P$\\_{l}$ of cell l where P$\\_{l}$ ∈ R N × $^{K}$. Constraint (3) restricts the allocation of each subcarrier to only one user. The channel gains h$\\_{n,k,l}$ and binary allocation variables α$\\_{n,k,l}$ are stacked up similarly in the matrices H$\\_{l}$ and A$\\_{l}$ , respectively, where A$\\_{l}$ , H$\\_{l}$ ∈ R N × $^{K}$. Moreover, we define g$\\_{n,k,lj}$ as the interfering gain from the k th user in cell l to cell j , ∀ j ̸ = l at n th subcarrier. We collect these interfering gains into a vector g$\\_{n,lj}$ = [ g$\\_{n,}$$_{1}$$\\_{,lj}$, g$\\_{n,}$$_{2}$$\\_{,lj}$...., g$\\_{n,K,lj}$ ] and then stack all the vectors in a matrix G$\\_{lj}$ ∈ R N × $^{K}$.\n\nDRAFT\n\nMarch 19, 2018" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8875246384408974, + "doc_id": "d793543864b42f3681f3622015f81522fcd4769a0fa358e22e9e7d4a106030b8", + "edit_distance": 0.09357798165137615, + "f1_score": 0.9559748427672956, + "meteor": 0.9432803066655023, + "precision": 0.9702127659574468, + "pred_md": "nominal value. When one trims observations with extreme estimated propensity score, these properties further improve; see Table B.2 in the Appendix B.\n\nNote that when the propensity score is misspecified, the ATE estimator (4.3) can be severely biased, and inference can be unreliable. Thus, tests with higher power to detect such misspecifications can prevent one to make misleading conclusions about the effectiveness of a given policy. What is clear from Table 2 is that, regardless of the sample size and bandwidth considered, Shaikh et al. (2009)'s test seems to have little to no power to detect the alternatives described in DGP 7, DGP 9, and DGP 10. For DGP 8, the maximum power for their test is approximately 55% when n = 1 000 and , c = 0 1 . . However, with c = 0 01 . , the power of Shaikh et al. (2009)'s test reduces to approximately 30%, highlighting again how important (and non-trivial) is to 'appropriately' choose the bandwidth. In sharp contrast with Shaikh et al. (2009)'s test, note that for moderately sized samples, our proposed KS n and CvM n tests have non-trivial power to detect all the alternatives. Our projection-based tests seem to dominate the other tests in the scenarios considered. Note that the traditional balancing tests have no power to detect the alternatives considered. Finally, ICM tests based on the traditional empirical process (4.1) have substantially less power than our proposed tests, reflecting the cost of the 'curse of dimensionality'. The power gains from using the projection-based process (2.7) instead of the unprojected process (2.10) can also be noted.\n\nOverall, the simulation results highlight that the proposed projection-based tests perform favorably compared to other alternative testing procedures in terms of size and power. Importantly, the simulations illustrate that the gains in power can be credited to each distinguished feature of our tests, that is, ( ) i the avoidance of smoothing parameters by using the ICM approach, ( ii ) the dimension-reduction coming from considering 1 { q ( X,θ 0 ) ≤ u } instead of 1 { X ≤ u } , and ( iii ) the use of orthogonal projections. Given these attractive features, we believe that our tests can be of great use in practice.\n\n## 5 Empirical Illustration\n\nIn this section, we provide an empirical illustration of our testing procedure. We revisit the analysis of Frankel and Rose (2005) and Millimet and Tchernis (2009), and study the effect of trade on the environment. More specifically, following Millimet and Tchernis (2009), we assess the effect of a country being a member of the General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade (GATT)\n\n24", + "recall": 0.9421487603305785, + "true_md": "nominal value. When one trims observations with extreme estimated propensity score, these properties further improve; see Table B.2 in the Appendix B.\n\nNote that when the propensity score is misspecified, the ATE estimator (4.3) can be severely biased, and inference can be unreliable. Thus, tests with higher power to detect such misspecifi- cations can prevent one to make misleading conclusions about the effectiveness of a given policy. What is clear from Table 2 is that, regardless of the sample size and bandwidth considered, Shaikh et al. (2009)’s test seems to have little to no power to detect the alternatives described in DGP 7, DGP 9, and DGP 10. For DGP 8, the maximum power for their test is approximately 55% when n = 1 , 000 and c = 0 . 1 . However, with c = 0 . 01 , the power of Shaikh et al. (2009)’s test reduces to approximately 30%, highlighting again how important (and non-trivial) is to “appropriately” choose the bandwidth. In sharp contrast with Shaikh et al. (2009)’s test, note that for moderately sized samples, our proposed KS$_{n}$ and CvM$_{n}$ tests have non-trivial power to detect all the alternatives. Our projection-based tests seem to dominate the other tests in the scenarios considered. Note that the traditional balancing tests have no power to detect the alternatives considered. Finally, ICM tests based on the traditional empirical process (4.1) have substantially less power than our proposed tests, reflecting the cost of the “curse of di- mensionality”. The power gains from using the projection-based process (2.7) instead of the unprojected process (2.10) can also be noted.\n\nOverall, the simulation results highlight that the proposed projection-based tests perform favorably compared to other alternative testing procedures in terms of size and power. Impor- tantly, the simulations illustrate that the gains in power can be credited to each distinguished feature of our tests, that is, ( i ) the avoidance of smoothing parameters by using the ICM approach, ( ii ) the dimension-reduction coming from considering 1 { q ( X,θ$_{0}$ ) ≤ u } instead of 1 { X ≤ u } , and ( iii ) the use of orthogonal projections. Given these attractive features, we believe that our tests can be of great use in practice.\n\nIn this section, we provide an empirical illustration of our testing procedure. We revisit the analysis of Frankel and Rose (2005) and Millimet and Tchernis (2009), and study the effect of trade on the environment. More specifically, following Millimet and Tchernis (2009), we assess the effect of a country being a member of the General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade (GATT)\n\n## 5 Empirical Illustration\n\n24" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8436923835065526, + "doc_id": "5de80e1454535b495a028a1d3f81f0ca2970ff7ccc174b6eb0989bd7de66caae", + "edit_distance": 0.12259194395796848, + "f1_score": 0.9430523917995446, + "meteor": 0.9085390205926097, + "precision": 0.9627906976744186, + "pred_md": "report these results in Table B.1 in the Appendix B. Finally, note that when the propensity score is correctly specified, the bias of the ̂ ATE n estimator in (4.3) is small, the length of the 95% confidence interval reduces as sample size increases, but the coverage probability is smaller than its nominal value even when n = 1 000. , However, as we show in Table B.1 in the Appendix B, such undercoverage disappears when we trim observations with extreme estimated propensity scores.\n\nNote that when the propensity score is misspecified in DGP 2 -DGP 5, the ATE estimator (4.3) can be severely biased, and its confidence interval can be 'too small' when the propensity score is misspecified, leading to severe undercoverage . 5 Thus, detecting propensity score misspecifications can prevent misleading inference about ATE . Our proposed KS n and CvM n tests perform admirably well in such a task, particularly in moderate sample sizes. In these scenarios, CvM n performs slightly better than KS n . Looking at the results from Shaikh et al. (2009)'s test, we note that bandwidth choices can play an important role, and the choice of the 'best' bandwidth h n via c varies across DGPs. Perhaps, what is more important to emphasize in terms of power is that in all alternative hypotheses and sample sizes analyzed, our projection based tests have higher power than Shaikh et al. (2009)'s test, regardless of the bandwidth choice. Our proposed tests also dominate the balancing tests, as balancing tests have little to no power in all DGPs considered but DGP 2, even with n = 1 000. Finally, the results in Table , 1 show that projection-based tests perform either better or as well as the other ICM tests in the DGPs considered. Among the considered DGPs, DGP 3 is the only one where some existing specification testing has higher power than our proposed procedure. For this particular DGP, ICM type tests KS trad n and CvM trad n based on (4.1) have higher power than our proposed tests when sample size n is large. Given the discussion in Section 3.2 and the fact that none of the ICM tests are strictly better than the others uniformly over the space of alternatives, such a finding does not come with a surprise.\n\n## 4.2 Simulation 2\n\nIn this simulation, we push forward the dimensionality of the covariates to see how our proposed tests and the other alternative tests perform in scenarios with 10 continuous covariates. To\n\n5 In DGP 3, the bias, confidence interval length, and coverage of the ATE estimator are good. However, it is important to have in mind that we consider only one particular DGP for the ATE , and that such 'robust' results may not translate to other DGPs.\n\n21", + "recall": 0.9241071428571429, + "true_md": "report these results in Table B.1 in the Appendix B. Finally, note that when the propensity score is correctly specified, the bias of the ̂ ATE$_{n}$ estimator in (4.3) is small, the length of the 95% confidence interval reduces as sample size increases, but the coverage probability is smaller than its nominal value even when n = 1 , 000. However, as we show in Table B.1 in the Appendix B, such undercoverage disappears when we trim observations with extreme estimated propensity scores.\n\nNote that when the propensity score is misspecified in DGP 2 − DGP 5, the ATE estimator (4.3) can be severely biased, and its confidence interval can be “too small” when the propen- sity score is misspecified, leading to severe undercoverage $^{5}$. Thus, detecting propensity score misspecifications can prevent misleading inference about ATE . Our proposed KS$_{n}$ and CvM$_{n}$ tests perform admirably well in such a task, particularly in moderate sample sizes. In these scenarios, CvM$_{n}$ performs slightly better than KS$_{n}$ . Looking at the results from Shaikh et al. (2009)’s test, we note that bandwidth choices can play an important role, and the choice of the “best” bandwidth h$_{n}$ via c varies across DGPs. Perhaps, what is more important to emphasize in terms of power is that in all alternative hypotheses and sample sizes analyzed, our projec- tion based tests have higher power than Shaikh et al. (2009)’s test, regardless of the bandwidth choice. Our proposed tests also dominate the balancing tests, as balancing tests have little to no power in all DGPs considered but DGP 2, even with n = 1 , 000. Finally, the results in Table 1 show that projection-based tests perform either better or as well as the other ICM tests in the DGPs considered. Among the considered DGPs, DGP 3 is the only one where some existing specification testing has higher power than our proposed procedure. For this particular DGP, ICM type tests KS trad n and CvM trad n based on (4.1) have higher power than our proposed tests when sample size n is large. Given the discussion in Section 3.2 and the fact that none of the ICM tests are strictly better than the others uniformly over the space of alternatives, such a finding does not come with a surprise.\n\nIn this simulation, we push forward the dimensionality of the covariates to see how our proposed tests and the other alternative tests perform in scenarios with 10 continuous covariates. To\n\n## 4.2 Simulation 2\n\n5 In DGP 3, the bias, confidence interval length, and coverage of the ATE estimator are good. However, it is important to have in mind that we consider only one particular DGP for the ATE , and that such “robust” results may not translate to other DGPs.\n\n21" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.87782545161228, + "doc_id": "2c91f5d1968287f48bebce175752b47d03d96981bbc5b47a8583042fe5d7df29", + "edit_distance": 0.08482142857142858, + "f1_score": 0.8962264150943396, + "meteor": 0.9339885707937183, + "precision": 0.9134615384615384, + "pred_md": "- [2] Y. Bahturin and M. Zaicev, Semigroup Gradings on Associative Rings, Adv. Appl. Math. 37 (2006) 153-161.\n- [3] S. D˘sc˘lescu, B. Ion, C. N˘st˘sescu, and J. Rios Montes, Group Gradings on a a a a Full Matrix Rings, J. Alg. 220 (1999) 709-728.\n- [4] Jones, M. R., Elementary and good group gradings of incidence algebras over partially-ordered sets with cross-cuts, Comm. Algebra 34 (7) 2369-2387 (2006).\n- [5] Jones, M. R. Group Gradings of Incidence Algebras , Ph.D. thesis, University of Connecticut (2003).\n- [6] L. Miller and E. Spiegel, Group Gradings in Incidence Algebras Comm. Algebra 38 (3) 953-963 (2010).\n- [7] M. M. Parmenter and E. Spiegel, Central Gradings of Incidence Algebras, Algebra Colloquium 11 (4) 421-426 (2004).\n- [8] K. Price, Compression Maps and Stable Relations, submitted.\n- [9] E. Spiegel and C. O'Donnell, 'Incidence Algebras,' Marcel Dekker, New York, NY (1997).\n\n20", + "recall": 0.8796296296296297, + "true_md": "- [2] Y. Bahturin and M. Zaicev, Semigroup Gradings on Associative Rings, Adv. Appl. Math. 37 (2006) 153-161.\n\n- [3] S. D˘ asc˘ alescu, B. Ion, C. N˘ ast˘ asescu, and J. Rios Montes, Group Gradings on Full Matrix Rings, J. Alg. 220 (1999) 709-728.\n\n- [4] Jones, M. R., Elementary and good group gradings of incidence algebras over partially-ordered sets with cross-cuts, Comm. Algebra 34 (7) 2369–2387 (2006).\n\n- [5] Jones, M. R. Group Gradings of Incidence Algebras , Ph.D. thesis, University of Connecticut (2003).\n\n- [6] L. Miller and E. Spiegel, Group Gradings in Incidence Algebras Comm. Algebra 38 (3) 953–963 (2010).\n\n- [7] M. M. Parmenter and E. Spiegel, Central Gradings of Incidence Algebras, Algebra Colloquium 11 (4) 421–426 (2004).\n\n- [8] K. Price, Compression Maps and Stable Relations, submitted.\n\n- [9] E. Spiegel and C. O’Donnell, ”Incidence Algebras,” Marcel Dekker, New York, NY (1997).\n\n20" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9142505259656551, + "doc_id": "14bc4369dcb0d28c0fbb1463c86c9f54d3e5467b9f3c9376867a41d8cfc1b4ae", + "edit_distance": 0.2265625, + "f1_score": 0.9924242424242425, + "meteor": 0.9356470729195976, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "calculations. For this model (Table 1), the automated procedure converges on the All Scalar algorithm, which is the same as its initial state, and which produces overall MCMC Efficiency of about 3. In hindsight this result may not surprise us, since the fully exchangeable nature of the random effects in this model does not induce correlations among the sampled parameters for this particular dataset. Correspondingly, for a large number of un-correlated random effects, and in the absence of multivariate distributions, univariate sampling produces the highest Efficiency. We also note that the All Blocked algorithm, which consists of a single block sampler of dimension 858, has Runtime approximately twice that of the All Scalar algorithm, and produces an overall Efficiency of approximately 0.05.\n\nFigure 4: Efficiencies of MCMC algorithms for the suite of example models.\n\nFigure 4: Efficiencies of MCMC algorithms for the suite of example models.\n\n## Efficiency Gains from Automated Blocking\n\nIn Figure 4, we present the overall Efficiencies achieved for our suite of example models (excluding the two contrived model structures). The Auto Blocking algorithm consistently out-performs any static algorithm in terms of Efficiency, ranging between roughly a 50% increase to several orders of magnitude of improvement. The exception is the GLMM example, in which Auto Blocking matches the All Scalar algorithm identically. We observe variation in the relative Efficiencies among the\n\n27", + "recall": 0.9849624060150376, + "true_md": "calculations. For this model (Table 1), the automated procedure converges on the All Scalar al- gorithm, which is the same as its initial state, and which produces overall MCMC Efficiency of about 3. In hindsight this result may not surprise us, since the fully exchangeable nature of the random effects in this model does not induce correlations among the sampled parameters for this particular dataset. Correspondingly, for a large number of un-correlated random effects, and in the absence of multivariate distributions, univariate sampling produces the highest Efficiency. We also note that the All Blocked algorithm, which consists of a single block sampler of dimension 858, has Runtime approximately twice that of the All Scalar algorithm, and produces an overall Efficiency of approximately 0.05.\n\nIn Figure 4, we present the overall Efficiencies achieved for our suite of example models (excluding the two contrived model structures). The Auto Blocking algorithm consistently out-performs any static algorithm in terms of Efficiency, ranging between roughly a 50% increase to several orders of magnitude of improvement. The exception is the GLMM example, in which Auto Blocking matches the All Scalar algorithm identically. We observe variation in the relative Efficiencies among the\n\n## Efficiency Gains from Automated Blocking\n\nFigure 4: Efficiencies of MCMC algorithms for the suite of example models.\n\n27" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.29109576242689766, + "doc_id": "b5a6162a824b9bbcc014316046ba85f425c692667b249dfd98391aae9a50dde2", + "edit_distance": 0.6959276018099547, + "f1_score": 0.9074626865671642, + "meteor": 0.43971695465413296, + "precision": 0.9212121212121213, + "pred_md": "x t ( ) = x t, ( 0 , y (0)) of (2.1) which has an integral curve in D , r and (2.5) holds.\n\nA solution x 0 ( ) t satisfies (2.1) and (2.4) simultaneously.\n\nConsider a solution x 0 ( ) t : R → R n , x 0 ( ) t = x t, ( 0 , x 0 ) , x 0 ∈ D with discontinuity moments { θ i } . Fix a discontinuity moment θ . i At this discontinuity moment, the trajectory may be on Γ and ˜ Γ . All possibilities of discontinuity moment should be analyzed. For this reason, we should investigate the following six cases:\n\n\n\n- ( β ) x 0 ( θ i ) ∈ ∂ Γ & 〈∇ Φ( x 0 ( θ i )) , f ( x 0 ( θ i )) 〉 /negationslash = 0 , ( β ' ) x 0 ( θ i ) ∈ ∂ ˜ & Γ 〈∇ ˜ ( Φ x 0 ( θ i )) , f ( x 0 ( θ i )) 〉 /negationslash = 0 ,\n\n\n\nIf a discontinuity point x 0 ( θ i ) satisfy the case ( α , ) (( α ' )) the case ( β , ) (( β ' )) and the case ( γ , ) (( γ ' )) we will call it an ( α ) -type point, a ( β ) -type point and a ( γ ) -type point, respectively.\n\nBesides, we present the following definition which is compliant with Definition 2.2.\n\nDefinition 2.5 If there exists a discontinuity moment, θ , i i ∈ A , for which one of the cases ( γ ) or ( γ ' ) is valid, then the solution x 0 ( ) = t x t, ( 0 , x 0 ) , x 0 ∈ R n of (2.1) is called a grazing solution and t = θ i is called a grazing moment.\n\nNext, we consider the differentiability properties of grazing solutions . The theory for the smoothness of discontinuous dynamical systems' solutions without grazing phenomenon is provided in [1].\n\nDenote by ¯( ) x t , j = 1 2 , , . . . , n, a solution of (2.4) such that ¯(0) = x x 0 + ∆ x, ∆ x = ( ξ 1 , ξ 2 , . . . , ξ n ) , and let η i be the moments of discontinuity of ¯( ) x t .\n\nThe following conditions are required in what follows.\n\n- (A) For all t ∈ [0 , b ] \\ ∪ i ∈ A ̂ ( η , θ i i ] , the following equality is satisfied\n\n\n\nwhere u i ( ) t ∈ PC ([0 , b , θ ] ) .\n\n- (B) There exist constants ν ij , j ∈ A , such that\n\n\n\n- ( C ) The discontinuity moment η j of the near solution approaches to the discontinuity moment θ , j j ∈ A , of grazing one as ξ tends to zero.\n\n8", + "recall": 0.8941176470588236, + "true_md": "x ( t ) = x ( t, 0 , y (0)) of (2.1) which has an integral curve in D $^{r}$, and (2.5) holds.\n\nA solution x$_{0}$ ( t ) satisfies (2.1) and (2.4) simultaneously.\n\nConsider a solution x$_{0}$ ( t ) : $^{R}$→ R $^{n}$, x$_{0}$ ( t ) = x ( t, 0 , x$_{0}$ ) , x$_{0}$ ∈ D with discontinuity moments { θ$_{i}$ } . Fix a discontinuity moment θ$_{i}$. At this discontinuity moment, the trajectory may be on Γ and ˜ Γ . All possibilities of discontinuity moment should be analyzed. For this reason, we should investigate the following six cases:\n\nIf a discontinuity point x$_{0}$ ( θ$_{i}$ ) satisfy the case ( α ) , (( α ′ )) the case ( β ) , (( β ′ )) and the case ( γ ) , (( γ ′ )) we will call it an ( α ) − type point, a ( β ) − type point and a ( γ ) − type point, respectively.\n\nBesides, we present the following definition which is compliant with Definition 2.2.\n\nDefinition 2.5 If there exists a discontinuity moment, θ$_{i}$, i ∈ A , for which one of the cases ( γ ) or ( γ ′ ) is valid, then the solution x$_{0}$ ( t ) = x ( t, 0 , x$_{0}$ ) , x$_{0}$ ∈ R n of (2.1) is called a grazing solution and t = θ$_{i}$ is called a grazing moment.\n\nNext, we consider the differentiability properties of grazing solutions . The theory for the smoothness of discontinuous dynamical systems’ solutions without grazing phenomenon is provided in [1].\n\nDenote by ¯ x ( t ) , j = 1 , 2 , . . . , n, a solution of (2.4) such that ¯ x (0) = x$_{0}$ + Δ x, Δ x = ( ξ$_{1}$, ξ$_{2}$, . . . , ξ$_{n}$ ) , and let η$_{i}$ be the moments of discontinuity of ¯ x ( t ) .\n\nThe following conditions are required in what follows.\n\nwhere u$_{i}$ ( t ) ∈ P C ([0 , b ] , θ ) .\n\n- ( C ) The discontinuity moment η$_{j}$ of the near solution approaches to the discontinuity moment θ$_{j}$, j ∈ A , of grazing one as ξ tends to zero.\n\n- (B) There exist constants ν$_{ij}$, j ∈ A , such that\n\n- (A) For all t ∈ [0 , b ] \\ ∪ $^{i}$∈ A ̂ ( η$_{i}$, θ$_{i}$ ] , the following equality is satisfied\n\n$$¯ x ( t ) − x$_{0}$ ( t ) = n ∑ i =1 u$_{i}$ ( t ) ξ$_{i}$ + O ( ‖ Δ x ‖ ) , (2.7)$$\n\n$$η$_{j}$ − θ$_{j}$ = n ∑ i =1 ν$_{ij}$ ξ$_{i}$ + O ( ‖ Δ x ‖ ); (2.8)$$\n\n$$( α ) x$_{0}$ ( θ$_{i}$ ) ∈ Γ \\ ∂ Γ , ( α ′ ) x$_{0}$ ( θ$_{i}$ ) ∈ ˜ Γ \\ ∂ ˜ Γ , ( β ) x$_{0}$ ( θ$_{i}$ ) ∈ ∂ Γ & 〈∇ Φ( x$_{0}$ ( θ$_{i}$ )) , f ( x$_{0}$ ( θ$_{i}$ )) 〉 ̸ = 0 , ( β ′ ) x$_{0}$ ( θ$_{i}$ ) ∈ ∂ ˜ Γ & 〈∇ ˜ Φ( x$_{0}$ ( θ$_{i}$ )) , f ( x$_{0}$ ( θ$_{i}$ )) 〉 ̸ = 0 , ( γ ) x$_{0}$ ( θ$_{i}$ ) ∈ ∂ Γ & 〈∇ Φ( x$_{0}$ ( θ$_{i}$ )) , f ( x$_{0}$ ( θ$_{i}$ )) 〉 = 0 , ( γ ′ ) x$_{0}$ ( θ$_{i}$ ) ∈ ∂ ˜ Γ & 〈∇ ˜ Φ( x$_{0}$ ( θ$_{i}$ )) , f ( x$_{0}$ ( θ$_{i}$ )) 〉 = 0 .$$\n\n8" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.3994724622279646, + "doc_id": "53859e0afd81138a7c605484e46b2d7ae7639354d08b4671abc6ca8092b38b72", + "edit_distance": 0.4904386951631046, + "f1_score": 0.9046321525885559, + "meteor": 0.4688503410568851, + "precision": 0.9222222222222223, + "pred_md": "Case 2: If u ∈ [ F a ( j -1 ) , F ( a j -)), similar arguments as in Case 1 yields\n\n\n\nCase 3: If u ∈ [0 , F ( a 1 )), obviously,\n\n\n\nCase 4: If u ∈ [ F a ( J ) , 1], obviously,\n\n\n\nThus, it follows that U is uniformly distributed on [0 1]. , /square\n\n↦\n\nLemma A.2 Under Assumptions 3.1 and 3.3, F = { x → { 1 q x, θ ( ) ≤ u } : u ∈ [0 , 1] , θ ∈ Θ } is a Donsker class of functions.\n\nProof of Lemma A.2: From Lemma A.1, simply letting Y = q X,θ ( ), we have that 1 { q X,θ ( ) ≤ u } = 1 { U ≤ F θ ( u ) } for all u ∈ [0 , 1], i.e., we can exploit the quantile transformation and express each indicator function 1 { q X,θ ( ) ≤ u } through U via the time transformation F θ . In light of this quantile transformation, it suffices to study the class of functions F cd f = { ¯ u → { 1 ¯ u ≤ F θ ( u ) } : u ∈ [0 , 1] , θ ∈ Θ } .\n\n↦\n\nLet N [ ] (¯ /epsilon1, F cd f , L 2 ( P )) be the bracketing number of the class F cd f with respect to the underlying probability P , which by definition is the minimal number of ¯-brackets under /epsilon1 L 2 ( P ) metric that cover F cd f . Henceforth, we define the underlying probability P as the probability measure of U . By Theorem 2.5.6 in van der Vaart and Wellner (1996), the Donsker property is implied by\n\n\n\nTo show that such entropy result hold, we follow similar steps as the proof of Lemma 1 in Akritas and van Keilegom (2001) and of Lemma A.4 in Frazier et al. (2018).\n\nLet ¯ /epsilon1 > 0 be an arbitrarily small constant, and consider partitions { Θ l } L l =1 of Θ. Given that Θ is compact, under Assumption 3.3, there exists a finite constant K ≤ diam (Θ ¯) //epsilon1 k such that diam (Θ ) l ≤ ¯ for every /epsilon1 l = 1 , . . . , K . Fix l ∈ { 1 , . . . , K } and pick up some θ l ∈ Θ . l Then, for any fixed u ∈ [0 , 1] and any θ ∈ Θ , it follows from the Lipschitz condition in Assumption 3.3 l that\n\n\n\n33", + "recall": 0.8877005347593583, + "true_md": "Case 2: If u ∈ [ F ( a$_{j}$$\\_{−}$$_{1}$ ) , F ( a$_{j}$ − )), similar arguments as in Case 1 yields\n\nCase 3: If u ∈ [0 , F ( a$_{1}$ )), obviously,\n\n$$P ( U ≤ u ) = ( u − F { a$_{j}$$_{−}$$_{1}$ } − . . . − F { a$_{1}$ } ) + ( F { a$_{1}$ } + . . . + F { a$_{j}$$_{−}$$_{1}$ } ) = u.$$\n\n$$P ( U ≤ u ) = u.$$\n\n$$P ( U ≤ u ) = ( u − F { a$_{J}$ } − . . . − F { a$_{1}$ } ) + ( F { a$_{1}$ } + . . . + F { a$_{J}$ } ) = u.$$\n\nCase 4: If u ∈ [ F ( a$_{J}$ ) , 1], obviously,\n\nThus, it follows that U is uniformly distributed on [0 , 1]. □\n\nLemma A.2 Under Assumptions 3.1 and 3.3, F = { x ↦→ 1 { q ( x, θ ) ≤ u } : u ∈ [0 , 1] , θ ∈ Θ } is a Donsker class of functions.\n\nProof of Lemma A.2: From Lemma A.1, simply letting Y = q ( X, θ ), we have that 1 { q ( X, θ ) ≤ u } = 1 { U ≤ F$_{θ}$ ( u ) } for all u ∈ [0 , 1], i.e., we can exploit the quantile transfor- mation and express each indicator function 1 { q ( X, θ ) ≤ u } through U via the time transfor- mation F$_{θ}$ . In light of this quantile transformation, it suffices to study the class of functions F cdf = { ¯ u ↦→ 1 { ¯ u ≤ F$_{θ}$ ( u ) } : u ∈ [0 , 1] , θ ∈ Θ } .\n\nLet N$_{[ ]}$ (¯ ϵ, F $_{cdf}$, L $_{2}$( P )) be the bracketing number of the class F cdf with respect to the un- derlying probability P , which by definition is the minimal number of ¯ ϵ -brackets under L $_{2}$( P ) metric that cover F $_{cdf}$. Henceforth, we define the underlying probability P as the probability measure of U . By Theorem 2.5.6 in van der Vaart and Wellner (1996), the Donsker property is implied by\n\n√ To show that such entropy result hold, we follow similar steps as the proof of Lemma 1 in Akritas and van Keilegom (2001) and of Lemma A.4 in Frazier et al. (2018).\n\n$$∫ ∞ 0 √ log N$_{[ ]}$ (¯ ϵ, F $_{cdf}$, L $_{2}$( P )) d ¯ ϵ < ∞ . To show that such entropy result hold, we follow similar steps as the proof of Lemma 1 in$$\n\nLet ¯ ϵ > 0 be an arbitrarily small constant, and consider partitions { Θ$_{l}$ } L l =1 of Θ. Given that Θ is compact, under Assumption 3.3, there exists a finite constant K ≤ diam (Θ / ¯ ϵ ) k such that diam (Θ$_{l}$) ≤ ¯ ϵ for every l = 1 , . . . , K . Fix l ∈ { 1 , . . . , K } and pick up some θ$_{l}$ ∈ Θ$_{l}$. Then, for any fixed u ∈ [0 , 1] and any θ ∈ Θ$_{l}$, it follows from the Lipschitz condition in Assumption 3.3 that\n\n$$F − l ( u ) ≤ F$_{θ}$ ( u ) ≤ F + l ( u ) , (A.4)$$\n\n33" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.965627465401263, + "doc_id": "83f533c65acff2ff73c1d7ec2afb3b28657c5cf0f15e7cb1091ee070f4cdc32a", + "edit_distance": 0.07713498622589532, + "f1_score": 0.9798994974874372, + "meteor": 0.9840470892671659, + "precision": 0.9848484848484849, + "pred_md": "situation arises where the final iteration produces a different MCMC algorithm with efficiency inferior to that of the previous iteration, then prudence would suggest a thoughtful examination of the posterior samples, empirical correlation matrices, properties of the adapted samplers, convergence diagnostics, etc.\n\n## 4 Automated Blocking Performance\n\nWe now compare the performance of MCMC algorithms produced using the automated blocking procedure of section 3 against various static MCMC algorithms. First, we describe the computing environment in which our analyses are performed. We then describe a broadly representative suite of example models, and present the performance results of automated and static MCMC algorithms for each. A public Github repository containing scripts for reproducing our results may be found at https://github.com/danielturek/automated-blocking-examples .\n\n## 4.1 Computing Environment\n\nSince one of our points is that optimal design of MCMC algorithms depends on the computing environment, we briefly summarize the software tools and computing platform used. All statistical models and MCMC algorithms were built using the NIMBLE package (NIMBLE Development Team, 2014) for R (R Core Team, 2014). NIMBLE allows hierarchical models to be defined within R using the BUGS model declaration syntax introduced by the BUGS project (Lunn et al., 2000; Lunn et al., 2012). MCMC algorithms in NIMBLE are written using NIMBLE's domain specific language for specifying hierarchical model algorithms. This language is an enhanced subset of R (interfaced through an R session) which is compiled into C++ code, which is subsequently compiled and run.\n\nAs a result, the examples here use highly efficient code generated automatically for each model and algorithm. Of particular importance is that matrix operations are done via the highly optimized C++Eigen library (Guennebaud and Jacob, 2010). Finally, the high-level programmability provided by R facilitated the dynamic exploration of MCMC algorithms. Examples were run using R version 3.1.2, using the BLAS (Basic Linear Algebra Subprograms) provided by R for multivariate density\n\n17", + "recall": 0.975, + "true_md": "situation arises where the final iteration produces a different MCMC algorithm with efficiency infe- rior to that of the previous iteration, then prudence would suggest a thoughtful examination of the posterior samples, empirical correlation matrices, properties of the adapted samplers, convergence diagnostics, etc.\n\nWe now compare the performance of MCMC algorithms produced using the automated blocking procedure of section 3 against various static MCMC algorithms. First, we describe the computing environment in which our analyses are performed. We then describe a broadly representative suite of example models, and present the performance results of automated and static MCMC algorithms for each. A public Github repository containing scripts for reproducing our results may be found at https://github.com/danielturek/automated-blocking-examples .\n\nSince one of our points is that optimal design of MCMC algorithms depends on the computing environment, we briefly summarize the software tools and computing platform used. All statistical models and MCMC algorithms were built using the NIMBLE package (NIMBLE Development Team, 2014) for R (R Core Team, 2014). NIMBLE allows hierarchical models to be defined within R using the BUGS model declaration syntax introduced by the BUGS project (Lunn et al., 2000; Lunn et al., 2012). MCMC algorithms in NIMBLE are written using NIMBLE’s domain specific language for specifying hierarchical model algorithms. This language is an enhanced subset of R (interfaced through an R session) which is compiled into C++ code, which is subsequently compiled and run.\n\nAs a result, the examples here use highly efficient code generated automatically for each model and algorithm. Of particular importance is that matrix operations are done via the highly optimized C++ Eigen library (Guennebaud and Jacob, 2010). Finally, the high-level programmability provided by R facilitated the dynamic exploration of MCMC algorithms. Examples were run using R version 3.1.2, using the BLAS (Basic Linear Algebra Subprograms) provided by R for multivariate density\n\n## 4 Automated Blocking Performance\n\n## 4.1 Computing Environment\n\n17" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4833850774371396, + "doc_id": "54ae24a0cf70a5eb445179deb7bdbb5d68d16b32ba22a215fbff9403bc399de7", + "edit_distance": 0.5, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9253019188323653, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Fig. 4. Comparison of all proposed schemes for L =7 cells, K =100 users from cell center to cell edge\n\nFig. 4. Comparison of all proposed schemes for L =7 cells, K =100 users from cell center to cell edge\n\nMarch 19, 2018\n\nDRAFT\n\n24", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "24\n\nFig. 4. Comparison of all proposed schemes for L =7 cells, K =100 users from cell center to cell edge\n\nDRAFT\n\nMarch 19, 2018" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7877365785443098, + "doc_id": "560645f4c03c8b3552f04b502501cf6f9ead44dc7d9e4adb1fdfd2cf338bbcb2", + "edit_distance": 0.12087912087912088, + "f1_score": 0.8905472636815921, + "meteor": 0.8834270744653485, + "precision": 0.895, + "pred_md": "Andrews, D. W. K and S. Han. (2009). 'Invalidity of the Bootstrap and the m out of n Bootstrap for Confidence Interval Endpoints Defined by Moment Inequalities,' Econometrics Journal , 12, 172-199.\n\nAndrews, D.W.K. and P. Guggenberger (2009a). 'Incorrect Asymptotic Size of Subsampling Procedures Based on Post- Consistent Model Selection Estimators,' Journal of Econometrics , 152, 19-27.\n\n--- (2009b). 'Hybrid and size-corrected subsampling methods,' Econometrica , 77, 721-762.\n\nArellano, M. and S. Bonhomme (2012). 'Identifying Distributional Characteristics in Random Coefficients Panel Data Models,' Review of Economic Studies , 79, 987-1020.\n\nBandiera, O., V. Larcinese and I. Rasul (2008). 'Heterogeneous Class Size Effects: New Evidence from a Panel of University Students,' Economic Journal , 120, 1365-1398.\n\nBhattacharya, J., A. Shaikh and E. Vytlacil (2008). 'Treatment Effect Bounds under Monotonicity Assumptions: An Application to Swan-Ganz Catheterization, ' American Economic Review , 98, 351-56.\n\nBhattacharya, J., A. Shaikh and E. Vytlacil (2012). 'Treatment Effect Bounds: An Application to SwanGanz Catheterization,' Journal of Econometrics , 168, 223-243.\n\nBoes, S. (2010). 'Convex Treatment Response and Treatment Selection,' SOI Working Paper 1001, University of Zurich.\n\nByrd, R., J. Nocedal and R. Waltz (2006). 'KNITRO: AN Integrated Package for Nonlinear Optimization,' in Large-Scale Nonlinear Optimization, Springer Verlag.\n\nCarlier, G. (2010). 'Optimal Transportation and Economic Applications,' Letcure Notes.\n\nCaetano, C. (2012). 'A Test of Endogeneity without Instrumental Variables,' Working Paper.\n\nConlon, C. (2012). 'A Dynamic Model of Prices and Margins in the LCD TA Industry,' Working Paper.\n\nCarneiro, P., K. T. Hansen and J. Heckman (2003). 'Estimating Distributions of Treatment Effects with an Application to the Returns to Schooling and Measurement of the Effects of Uncertainty on College Choice,' International Economic Review , 44, 361-422.\n\nChernozhukov, V. and C. Hansen (2005), 'An IV Model of Quantile Treatment Effects,' Econometrica , 73, 245-261.\n\nChernozhukov, V., P.-A. Chiappori and M. Henry (2010). 'Introduction,' Economic Theory , 42, 271-273.\n\n49", + "recall": 0.8861386138613861, + "true_md": "Andrews, D. W. K and S. Han. (2009). “Invalidity of the Bootstrap and the m out of n Bootstrap for Confidence Interval Endpoints Defined by Moment Inequalities,” Econometrics Journal , 12, 172–199.\n\nAndrews, D.W.K. and P. Guggenberger (2009a). “Incorrect Asymptotic Size of Subsampling Procedures Based on Post- Consistent Model Selection Estimators,” Journal of Econometrics , 152, 19-27.\n\n——— (2009b). “Hybrid and size-corrected subsampling methods,” Econometrica , 77, 721-762.\n\nArellano, M. and S. Bonhomme (2012). “Identifying Distributional Characteristics in Random Coefficients Panel Data Models,” Review of Economic Studies , 79, 987-1020.\n\nBandiera, O., V. Larcinese and I. Rasul (2008). “Heterogeneous Class Size Effects: New Evidence from a Panel of University Students,” Economic Journal , 120, 1365–1398.\n\nBhattacharya, J., A. Shaikh and E. Vytlacil (2008). “Treatment Effect Bounds under Monotonicity Assump- tions: An Application to Swan-Ganz Catheterization, ” American Economic Review , 98, 351-56.\n\nBhattacharya, J., A. Shaikh and E. Vytlacil (2012). “Treatment Effect Bounds: An Application to Swan– Ganz Catheterization,” Journal of Econometrics , 168, 223-243.\n\nBoes, S. (2010). “Convex Treatment Response and Treatment Selection,” SOI Working Paper 1001, Univer- sity of Zurich.\n\nByrd, R., J. Nocedal and R. Waltz (2006). “KNITRO: AN Integrated Package for Nonlinear Optimization,” in Large-Scale Nonlinear Optimization, Springer Verlag.\n\nCarlier, G. (2010). “Optimal Transportation and Economic Applications,” Letcure Notes.\n\nCaetano, C. (2012). “A Test of Endogeneity without Instrumental Variables,” Working Paper.\n\nConlon, C. (2012). “A Dynamic Model of Prices and Margins in the LCD TA Industry,” Working Paper.\n\nCarneiro, P., K. T. Hansen and J. Heckman (2003). “Estimating Distributions of Treatment Effects with an Application to the Returns to Schooling and Measurement of the Effects of Uncertainty on College Choice,” International Economic Review , 44, 361–422.\n\nChernozhukov, V. and C. Hansen (2005), “An IV Model of Quantile Treatment Effects,” Econometrica , 73, 245–261.\n\nChernozhukov, V., P.-A. Chiappori and M. Henry (2010). “Introduction,” Economic Theory , 42, 271-273.\n\n49" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6826666182192976, + "doc_id": "c44a8bbab4c40b2df95a0d530490849c854f9ecb8b97bb39fceb382f589e09b6", + "edit_distance": 0.22988505747126436, + "f1_score": 0.9724137931034482, + "meteor": 0.8110213643040071, + "precision": 0.9791666666666666, + "pred_md": "glyph[negationslash]\n\nglyph[negationslash]\n\n- 2. A subset γ of ρ is a G -essential set for ρ if for all homomorphisms Φ 1 , Φ 2 : ρ → G such that Φ = Φ 2 1 there exists c ∈ γ such that Φ ( ) = Φ 2 c 1 ( c ) .\n- 3. A G -extendible and G -essential subset is called a G -grading set for ρ .\n\nRemark 3.7 σ is a G -grading set for ρ if and only if for every function φ : σ → G there is a unique homomorphism Φ : ρ → G such that Φ | σ = φ . If ρ is balanced and ρ contains a G -grading set then all good G -gradings of a generalized incidence ring S = I ( X,ρ,R ) such that e xx ∈ S 1 for all x ∈ X are uniquely determined by grading admissible functions from the G -grading set to G .\n\nWe finish this section with a result on partial orders. Recall ( X, ≤ ) is minimally connected if ( X, ≤ ) is a connected, locally finite partial-order and [ x, y ] is either empty or a chain for all x, y ∈ X . The Hasse diagram of X is the directed graph H with vertex set X and arrow set { ( a, b ) : a, b ∈ X and b covers a } .\n\nTheorem 3.8 Assume G is a semigroup, R is an associative ring with unity, and ( X, ≤ ) is a minimally-connected partial order. Then the arrow set of the Hasse diagram of ( X, ≤ ) is a G -grading set for ≤ .\n\nProof. Let φ : σ → G be given, where σ is the set of arrows in the Hasse diagram for ( X, ≤ ). We use φ to define a function Φ : ≤→ G . Let x, y ∈ X such that x ≤ y be given. Since ( X, ≤ ) is a minimally connected there is a unique chain { x , . . . , x 1 m } in σ such that x = x 1 ≤ x 2 ≤ . . . ≤ x m = y and ( x , x i i +1 ) ∈ σ for each i < m . We set Φ ( x, y ) = φ x , x ( 1 2 ) · · · φ x ( m -1 , x m ). A straightforward check proves Φ is a homomorphism such that Φ | σ = φ . Thus σ is a G -extendible set for ≤ .\n\n10", + "recall": 0.9657534246575342, + "true_md": "- 2. A subset γ of ρ is a G -essential set for ρ if for all homomorphisms Φ$_{1}$ , Φ$_{2}$ : ρ → G such that Φ$_{2}$ ̸ = Φ$_{1}$ there exists c ∈ γ such that Φ$_{2}$ ( c ) ̸ = Φ$_{1}$ ( c ) .\n\n- 3. A G -extendible and G -essential subset is called a G -grading set for ρ .\n\nRemark 3.7 σ is a G -grading set for ρ if and only if for every function φ : σ → G there is a unique homomorphism Φ : ρ → G such that Φ |$_{σ}$ = φ . If ρ is balanced and ρ contains a G -grading set then all good G -gradings of a generalized incidence ring S = I ( X, ρ, R ) such that e$_{xx}$ ∈ S$_{1}$ for all x ∈ X are uniquely determined by grading admissible functions from the G -grading set to G .\n\nWe finish this section with a result on partial orders. Recall ( X, ≤ ) is minimally connected if ( X, ≤ ) is a connected, locally finite partial-order and [ x, y ] is either empty or a chain for all x, y ∈ X . The Hasse diagram of X is the directed graph H with vertex set X and arrow set { ( a, b ) : a, b ∈ X and b covers a } .\n\nTheorem 3.8 Assume G is a semigroup, R is an associative ring with unity, and ( X, ≤ ) is a minimally-connected partial order. Then the arrow set of the Hasse diagram of ( X, ≤ ) is a G -grading set for ≤ .\n\nProof. Let φ : σ → G be given, where σ is the set of arrows in the Hasse diagram for ( X, ≤ ). We use φ to define a function Φ : ≤→ G . Let x, y ∈ X such that x ≤ y be given. Since ( X, ≤ ) is a minimally connected there is a unique chain { x$_{1}$, . . . , x$_{m}$ } in σ such that x = x$_{1}$ ≤ x$_{2}$ ≤ . . . ≤ x$_{m}$ = y and ( x$_{i}$, x$_{i}$$\\_{+1}$ ) ∈ σ for each i < m . We set Φ ( x, y ) = φ ( x$\\_{1}$, x$\\_{2}$ ) · · · φ ( x$\\_{m}$$_{−}$$\\_{1}$, x$\\_{m}$ ). A straightforward check proves Φ is a homomorphism such that Φ |$\\_{σ}$ = φ . Thus σ is a G -extendible set for ≤ .\n\n10" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.14428085483913894, + "doc_id": "378d9f1b517cb0b6dc1508b1ac1c6ebeb21f01d4fa2438e91f8bdf14a0221f4b", + "edit_distance": 0.7648401826484018, + "f1_score": 0.8790322580645161, + "meteor": 0.2711644634437994, + "precision": 0.9159663865546218, + "pred_md": "autonomous system with variable moments of impulses\n\n\n\nwhere Γ = { ( x , x 1 2 ) | x 1 + x 2 = √ 2 } , ˜ = Γ { ( x , x 1 2 ) | x 1 = x 2 } and K = 0 11 . . It is easy to verify that the point x ∗ = ( 1 2 , 1 2 ) is a grazing point because 〈∇ τ ( x ∗ ) , f ( x ∗ ) 〉 = (1 1) ( 〈 , , 1 2 , -1 2 ) 〉 = 0 and the grazing is non-axial. We assume that the domain is the plane.\n\nThe solution Ψ( ) = (sin( ) cos( )) t t , t , t ∈ R is a grazing one, since the point x ∗ = Ψ( π 4 ) is from its orbit. The cycle and the line of discontinuity are depicted in Figure 5.\n\nFigure 5: The red curve is the orbit of Ψ( ) t which grazes non-axially the line of discontinuity.\n\nFigure 5: The red curve is the orbit of Ψ( ) t which grazes non-axially the line of discontinuity.\n\n1\n\nLet us consider the linearization at the grazing point x ∗ next. We will consider the near solution x t ( ) = x t, ( 0 , x ∗ +∆ ) x . Denote t = ξ, the moment when the solution meets the surface of discontinuity Γ at the point ¯ = x x ξ ( ) = x ξ, ( 0 , x ∗ +∆ ) x . Taking into account formulae (3.17) , (3.18) with (4.50) , one can obtain the following matrix\n\n\n\nCalculating the right hand side of the expression (4.51) , we obtain that\n\n28", + "recall": 0.8449612403100775, + "true_md": "autonomous system with variable moments of impulses\n\n$$$_{x}$′$_{1}$ = x$_{2}$, $_{x}$′$_{2}$ = − x$_{1}$, Δ x$_{1}$ | $^{x}$∈ Γ = 1 √$_{2}$ − x$_{1}$ + K ( x$_{2}$ − x$_{1}$ ) $^{2}$, Δ x$_{2}$ | $^{x}$∈ Γ = 1 √$_{2}$ − x$_{2}$ + K ( x$_{2}$ − x$_{1}$ ) $^{2}$, (4.50)$$\n\nwhere Γ = { ( x$_{1}$, x$_{2}$ ) | x$_{1}$ + x$_{2}$ = √$_{2}$ } , ˜ Γ = { ( x$_{1}$, x$_{2}$ ) | x$_{1}$ = x$_{2}$ } and K = 0 . 11 . It is easy to verify that the point x ∗ = ( 1 2 , 1 2 ) is a grazing point because 〈∇ τ ( x ∗ ) , f ( x ∗ ) 〉 = 〈 (1 , 1) , ( 1 $_{2}$, − 1 $_{2}$) 〉 = 0 and the grazing is non-axial. We assume that the domain is the plane.\n\nThe solution Ψ( t ) = (sin( t ) , cos( t )) , t ∈ R is a grazing one, since the point x ∗ = Ψ( π $_{4}$) is from its orbit. The cycle and the line of discontinuity are depicted in Figure 5.\n\nLet us consider the linearization at the grazing point x ∗ next. We will consider the near solution x ( t ) = x ( t, 0 , x ∗ + Δ x ) . Denote t = ξ, the moment when the solution meets the surface of discontinuity Γ at the point ¯ x = x ( ξ ) = x ( ξ, 0 , x ∗ + Δ x ) . Taking into account formulae (3.17) , (3.18) with (4.50) , one can obtain the following matrix\n\nCalculating the right hand side of the expression (4.51) , we obtain that\n\n$$∂W$_{i}$ ( x ( ξ, 0 , x ∗ + Δ x )) ∂x 0 1 =    ¯ x$_{2}$ − ¯ $_{x$_{1}$}$   1 ¯ x$_{1}$ − ¯ x$_{2}$ +    − 2 K (¯ x$_{2}$ − ¯ x$_{1}$ ) − 2 K (¯ x$_{2}$ − ¯ x$_{1}$ ) − 2 K (¯ x$_{2}$ − ¯ x$_{1}$ ) − 2 K (¯ x$_{2}$ − ¯ x$_{1}$ $_{)}$   × ( e$_{1}$ +    ¯ x$_{2}$ − ¯ $_{x$_{1}$}$   1 ¯ $^{x$_{1}$}$− ¯ x$_{2}$ ) +    − 1 √$_{2}$ + K (¯ x$_{2}$ − ¯ x$_{1}$ ) 2 1 √$_{2}$ − K (¯ x$_{2}$ − ¯ x$_{1}$ ) 2    1 ¯ x$_{1}$ − ¯ x$_{2}$ . (4.51)$$\n\n28\n\nFigure 5: The red curve is the orbit of Ψ( t ) which grazes non-axially the line of discontinuity." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.895008353363976, + "doc_id": "6140216727638f211a821efe621dd9fd90d90eb3de99d850fa52fe9cac86dc80", + "edit_distance": 0.12209302325581395, + "f1_score": 0.9852216748768472, + "meteor": 0.9853068801549099, + "precision": 0.9900990099009901, + "pred_md": "arXiv:1108.3355v1 [math.RA] 16 Aug 2011\n\n## Good Gradings of Generalized Incidence Rings\n\n## Kenneth L. Price\n\n## University of Wisconsin Oshkosh\n\nOctober 11, 2018\n\n## Abstract\n\nThis inquiry is based on both the construction of generalized incidence rings due to Gene Abrams and the construction of good group gradings of incidence algebras due to Molli Jones. We provide conditions for a generalized incidence ring to be graded isomorphic to a subring of an incidence ring over a preorder. We also extend Jones's construction to good group gradings for incidence algebras over preorders with crosscuts of length one or two.\n\n## 1 Overview\n\nUnless otherwise stated we use multiplicative notation for all semigroup, monoid, or group operations and the identity is denoted by 1.\n\nSuppose G is a semigroup and S is a ring which does not necessarily contain a multiplicative identity. We say S is a G -graded ring if there is a direct sum\n\n1", + "recall": 0.9803921568627451, + "true_md": "arXiv:1108.3355v1 [math.RA] 16 Aug 2011\n\n# Good Gradings of Generalized Incidence Rings\n\nKenneth L. Price\n\nUniversity of Wisconsin Oshkosh\n\nOctober 11, 2018\n\nThis inquiry is based on both the construction of generalized incidence rings due to Gene Abrams and the construction of good group gradings of incidence algebras due to Molli Jones. We provide conditions for a generalized incidence ring to be graded isomorphic to a subring of an incidence ring over a preorder. We also extend Jones’s construction to good group gradings for incidence algebras over preorders with crosscuts of length one or two.\n\nUnless otherwise stated we use multiplicative notation for all semigroup, monoid, or group operations and the identity is denoted by 1.\n\nSuppose G is a semigroup and S is a ring which does not necessarily contain a multiplicative identity. We say S is a G -graded ring if there is a direct sum\n\n## 1 Overview\n\n## Abstract\n\n1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.47922108177994105, + "doc_id": "9f447751158e2cc5434c83c72d1625f4431b137656712894821ea65785cbc4c7", + "edit_distance": 0.5078864353312302, + "f1_score": 0.9704142011834319, + "meteor": 0.8946527393557708, + "precision": 0.9879518072289156, + "pred_md": "Figure 3: Transformation of dynamic FC to conditional dynamic FC. (A) Observed dynamic FC matrix. (B) Conditional dynamic FC matrix. (C) Example FC time series with many fluctuations beyond the the 95% confidence intervals. (D) Example FC time series where all fluctuations fall within the 95% confidence interval. The time series shown in (C) and (D) were selected because they had similar values of static connectivity. (E) Thresholded matrix, highlighting fluctuations that are stronger than expected (shown in red) and fluctuations that are weaker than expected (shown in blue). The x-axes of panels A, B, and E represent functional connection indices. Each column in those matrices represents the temporal evolution of one of the n n ( -1) / 2 = 6441 functional connections.\n\nFigure 3: Transformation of dynamic FC to conditional dynamic FC. (A) Observed dynamic FC matrix. (B) Conditional dynamic FC matrix. (C) Example FC time series with many fluctuations beyond the the 95% confidence intervals. (D) Example FC time series where all fluctuations fall within the 95% confidence interval. The time series shown in (C) and (D) were selected because they had similar values of static connectivity. (E) Thresholded matrix, highlighting fluctuations that are stronger than expected (shown in red) and fluctuations that are weaker than expected (shown in blue). The x-axes of panels A, B, and E represent functional connection indices. Each column in those matrices represents the temporal evolution of one of the n n ( -1) / 2 = 6441 functional connections.\n\n41", + "recall": 0.9534883720930233, + "true_md": "Figure 3: Transformation of dynamic FC to conditional dynamic FC. (A) Observed dynamic FC matrix. (B) Conditional dynamic FC matrix. (C) Example FC time series with many fluctuations beyond the the 95% confidence intervals. (D) Example FC time series where all fluctuations fall within the 95% confidence interval. The time series shown in (C) and (D) were selected because they had similar values of static connectivity. (E) Thresholded matrix, highlighting fluctuations that are stronger than expected (shown in red) and fluctuations that are weaker than expected (shown in blue). The x-axes of panels A, B, and E represent func- tional connection indices. Each column in those matrices represents the temporal evolution of one of the n ( n − 1) / 2 = 6441 functional connections.\n\n41" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.012763946894066198, + "doc_id": "310c8cbd32ab43cebf78b04e7505c050a8e5b4b3643c909c498fb010c70b994d", + "edit_distance": 0.8641509433962264, + "f1_score": 0.8099999999999999, + "meteor": 0.17894914711027674, + "precision": 0.9310344827586207, + "pred_md": "that\n\n\n\n\n\nwhere e 1 = (1 0) , T , T denotes the transpose of a matrix. Substituting y = ¯ y to the formula (3.17) , we obtain that\n\n\n\nConsidering the formula (3.10) for the transversal point ¯ = (¯ y y , y 1 ¯ ) 2 , the first component ∂τ y (¯) ∂y 0 1 can be evaluated as ∂τ y (¯) ∂y 0 1 = -1 ¯ y 2 . From the last equality, it is seen how the singularity appears at the grazing point. Finally, we obtain that\n\n\n\n\n\nCalculating the righthand side of (3.19) we have\n\n\n\nThe last expression demonstrates that the derivative is a continuous function of its arguments in a neighborhood of the grazing point. Since it is defined and continuous for the points, which are not from the grazing orbit by the last expression and for other points it can be determined by the limit procedure.\n\n16\n\n.", + "recall": 0.7168141592920354, + "true_md": "that\n\n$$∂W$_{i}$ ( y ) ∂y 0 1 = τ ( y ) ∫ θ$_{i}$ ∂f ( y ( s )) ∂y ∂y ( s ) ∂y 0 1 ds + f ( y ( s )) ∂τ ( y ) ∂y 0 1 + J$_{y}$ ( y )( e$_{1}$ + f ( y ( s )) ∂τ ( y ) ∂y 0 1 ) + f ( y ( s ) + J ( y ( s ))) ∂τ ( y ) ∂y 0 1 + θ$_{i}$ ∫ τ ( y ) ∂f ( y ( s ) + J ( y ( s ))) ∂x ∂y ( s ) ∂y 0 1 ds, (3.17)$$\n\n$$∂W$_{i}$ ( y ( ξ, 0 , y ∗ + Δ y )) ∂y 0 1 = f ( y ( ξ, 0 , y ∗ + Δ y )) ∂τ ( y ( ξ, 0 , y ∗ + Δ y )) ∂y 0 1 + J$_{y}$ ( y ( ξ, 0 , y ∗ + Δ y )) ( e$_{1}$ + f ( y ( ξ, 0 , y ∗ + Δ y ))) ∂τ ( y ( ξ, 0 , y ∗ + Δ y ))) ∂y 0 1 ) + f ( y ( ξ, 0 , ( J ( y ( ξ, 0 , y ∗ + Δ y ))))) ∂τ ( J ( y ( ξ, 0 , y ∗ + Δ y ))) ∂y 0 1 . (3.18)$$\n\n$$∂W$_{i}$ (¯ y ) ∂y 0 1 =    ¯ y$_{2}$ − ¯ y$_{1}$ − 0 . 001¯ $_{y$_{2}$}$   ( − 1 ¯ y$_{2}$ ) +    1 0 0 − 2 R$_{1}$ ¯ $_{y$_{2}$}$   ( e$_{1}$ +    ¯ y$_{2}$ − ¯ y$_{1}$ − 0 . 001¯ $_{y$_{2}$}$   ( − 1 ¯ y$_{2}$ ) (3.19) −    − R$_{1}$ (¯ y$_{2}$ ) 2 − ¯ y$_{1}$ + 0 . 001 R$_{1}$ (¯ y$_{2}$ ) $_{2}$   ( − 1 ¯ y$_{2}$ ) =    ¯ y$_{2}$ − R$_{1}$ (¯ y$_{2}$ ) 2 − ¯ y$_{1}$ − 0 . 001(¯ y$_{2}$ − R$_{1}$ (¯ y$_{2}$ ) 2 $_{)}$   ( − 1 ¯ y$_{2}$ ) +    1 0 0 − 2 R$_{1}$ ¯ $_{y$_{2}$}$      0 ¯ y$_{1}$ + 0 . 001¯ y$_{2}$ ¯ y$_{2}$    . Calculating the righthand side of (3.19) we have$$\n\n$$∂W$_{i}$ (¯ y ) ∂y 0 1 =    − R$_{1}$ ¯ y$_{2}$ − 1 0 . 001(1 − R$_{1}$ ¯ y$_{2}$ ) + 2 R$_{1}$ (0 . 001¯ y$_{2}$ − ¯ y$_{1}$ $_{)}$   . (3.20)$$\n\nwhere e$_{1}$ = (1 , 0) $^{T}$, T denotes the transpose of a matrix. Substituting y = ¯ y to the formula (3.17) , we obtain that\n\nConsidering the formula (3.10) for the transversal point ¯ y = (¯ y$_{1}$, ¯ y$_{2}$ ) , the first component ∂τ (¯ y ) ∂y 0 1 can be evaluated as ∂τ (¯ y ) ∂y 0 1 = − 1 ¯ y$_{2}$ . From the last equality, it is seen how the singularity appears at the grazing point. Finally, we obtain that\n\n   Calculating the righthand side of (3.19) we have\n\nThe last expression demonstrates that the derivative is a continuous function of its arguments in a neighborhood of the grazing point. Since it is defined and continuous for the points, which are not from the grazing orbit by the last expression and for other points it can be determined by the limit procedure.\n\n16" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9374037383137818, + "doc_id": "d32a4afb453e3f44e1d678ccc9ed746e5f1876d1a61c6a02779921ff9dc4d0c5", + "edit_distance": 0.03783783783783784, + "f1_score": 0.9742268041237113, + "meteor": 0.9742468133446934, + "precision": 0.9792746113989638, + "pred_md": "other words, if there are many highly-modular, yet dissimilar, partitions, then we would expect the Louvain algorithm to return a diverse set of partitions; sometimes the algorithm would converge to one partition while other times it would converge to another. However, if the maximum modularity corresponds to only a small number of similar partitions, we expect the algorithm to find and converge to these few solutions. Thus, we can interpret the similarity measure as indicating the level of the degeneracy in the landscape of partitions.\n\nIt is important to note that the use of Pearson's correlation or other similar measures for estimating functional connectivity may make it easier for many connections to simultaneously become stronger or weaker than expected. This is a consequence of transitive correlations and the fact that functional connections are not independent of one another (Zalesky et al., 2012). In other words, if a small set of regions becomes more strongly or weakly correlated with one another, then other regions with which any of these regions are also correlated will likely experience a similar effect. This could potentially cause us to overestimate the number of independent excursions at any time point and hence the size of mass excursions.\n\nAnother important consideration is that excursion count might be driven by extraneous (or otherwise unwanted) factors, such as head motion (Power et al., 2012, 2014). To this end, we compared excursion count to the frame-wise displacement time series, which we processed in precisely the same way as the BOLDtime series, so that the motion estimate at each time point was a weighted average of displacements that occurred within a window of time. We find no consistent group-level relationship between motion estimates and excursion counts when we aggregate these variables across all participants (Pearson's correlation coefficients of r = 0 044 and . r = 0 041 for frame-wise displacement measured as . L1 and L2 norms from a reference volume). At the level of individual partici-\n\n16", + "recall": 0.9692307692307692, + "true_md": "other words, if there are many highly-modular, yet dissimilar, partitions, then we would expect the Louvain algorithm to return a diverse set of partitions; sometimes the algorithm would converge to one partition while other times it would converge to another. However, if the maximum modularity corresponds to only a small number of similar partitions, we expect the algorithm to find and converge to these few solutions. Thus, we can interpret the similarity measure as indicating the level of the degeneracy in the landscape of partitions.\n\nIt is important to note that the use of Pearson’s correlation or other similar measures for estimating functional connectivity may make it easier for many connections to simultaneously become stronger or weaker than expected. This is a consequence of transitive correlations and the fact that functional connections are not independent of one another (Zalesky et al., 2012). In other words, if a small set of regions becomes more strongly or weakly correlated with one another, then other regions with which any of these regions are also correlated will likely experience a similar effect. This could potentially cause us to over- estimate the number of independent excursions at any time point and hence the size of mass excursions.\n\nAnother important consideration is that excursion count might be driven by extraneous (or otherwise unwanted) factors, such as head motion (Power et al., 2012, 2014). To this end, we compared excursion count to the frame-wise displacement time series, which we processed in precisely the same way as the BOLD time series, so that the motion estimate at each time point was a weighted average of displacements that occurred within a window of time. We find no con- sistent group-level relationship between motion estimates and excursion counts when we aggregate these variables across all participants (Pearson’s correlation coefficients of r = 0 . 044 and r = 0 . 041 for frame-wise displacement measured as L1 and L2 norms from a reference volume). At the level of individual partici-\n\n16" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9774207882543798, + "doc_id": "93861ad71ff1d899683d57f4b6a4c28a8836ff330fa01e931c83ddf38641043e", + "edit_distance": 0.05, + "f1_score": 0.9902912621359223, + "meteor": 0.994052730398783, + "precision": 0.9935064935064936, + "pred_md": "on multiple time series, the random phase is added uniformly across all channels to the same frequency bin. Next, the data are transformed back into time series via an inverse Fourier transform. Finally, the original time series amplitudes are rank-matched to the phase-randomized time series. The resulting surrogate time series preserve the same amplitude distribution of the original data and approximate the same power spectrum.\n\nFor each realization of surrogate data, we generate a dynamic functional connectivity matrix, from which we collect observations of dynamic fluctuations. Repeating this procedure many times allows us to approximate the distribution of dynamic fluctuations for each functional connection (Figure 2). We return to the original data and assign each dynamic functional connection a percentile based on where that dynamic fluctuation falls with respect to the distribution of expected fluctuations.\n\nIt should be noted that there are alternative methods for estimating this null distribution. For example, instead of estimating this distribution using phase-randomized surrogates, one could follow the approach of Zalesky et al. (2014) and estimate the parameters of a bi-variate time series model (e.g. autoregressive moving average - ARMA) for a dynamic functional connection. The ARMA model and its parameters could then be used to generate surrogate time series and dynamic functional connectivity matrices, and from these matrices one could approximate the distribution of expected fluctuations.\n\n## Characterizing conditional dynamic functional connectivity\n\nWe made several measurements based on the conditional dynamic functional connectivity matrices. First, we applied a threshold to each matrix, retaining only those connections that were unexpectedly strong or weak (greater than the 97.5th percentile or less than the 2.5th percentile; see Figure 3). From these thresholded matrices, we calculated the number of unexpectedly strong/weak\n\n9", + "recall": 0.9870967741935484, + "true_md": "on multiple time series, the random phase is added uniformly across all channels to the same frequency bin. Next, the data are transformed back into time series via an inverse Fourier transform. Finally, the original time series amplitudes are rank-matched to the phase-randomized time series. The resulting surrogate time series preserve the same amplitude distribution of the original data and approximate the same power spectrum.\n\nFor each realization of surrogate data, we generate a dynamic functional connectivity matrix, from which we collect observations of dynamic fluctuations.\n\nRepeating this procedure many times allows us to approximate the distribution of dynamic fluctuations for each functional connection (Figure 2). We return to the original data and assign each dynamic functional connection a percentile based on where that dynamic fluctuation falls with respect to the distribution of expected fluctuations.\n\nIt should be noted that there are alternative methods for estimating this null distribution. For example, instead of estimating this distribution using phase-randomized surrogates, one could follow the approach of Zalesky et al. (2014) and estimate the parameters of a bi-variate time series model (e.g. au- toregressive moving average - ARMA) for a dynamic functional connection. The ARMA model and its parameters could then be used to generate surrogate time series and dynamic functional connectivity matrices, and from these matrices one could approximate the distribution of expected fluctuations.\n\nWe made several measurements based on the conditional dynamic functional connectivity matrices. First, we applied a threshold to each matrix, retaining only those connections that were unexpectedly strong or weak (greater than the 97.5th percentile or less than the 2.5th percentile; see Figure 3). From these thresholded matrices, we calculated the number of unexpectedly strong/weak\n\n## Characterizing conditional dynamic functional connectivity\n\n9" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9667708825207658, + "doc_id": "2068cdb9ef88357beabb09363f81016543bcc99dda04d785b25eca00ed317dad", + "edit_distance": 0.022151898734177215, + "f1_score": 0.9791271347248577, + "meteor": 0.9792415302005635, + "precision": 0.9885057471264368, + "pred_md": "(2000)), the effect of funds for low-ability pupils (Haan (2012)), the impact of the National School Lunch Program on children's health (Gundersen et al. (2011)), and various medical treatments (Bhattacharya et al. (2005, 2012)). Researchers sometimes have plausible information on the shape of treatment response functions from economic theory or from empirical results in previous studies. For example, based on diminishing marginal returns to production, one may find it plausible to assume that the marginal effect of improved maize seed adoption on productivity diminishes as the level of adoption increases, holding other inputs fixed. Also, one may want to assume that the marginal adverse effect of an additional cigarette on infant birth weight diminishes as the number of cigarettes increases as shown in Hoderlein and Sasaki (2013). In the empirical literature, concave treatment response has been assumed for returns to schooling (Okumura (2010)) and convex treatment response for the effect of education on smoking (Boes (2010)). 2\n\nA considerable amount of the literature has used the Roy model to describe people's self-selection ranging from immigration to the U.S. (Borjas (1987)) to college entrance (Heckman et al. (2011)). Also, heterogeneity in treatment effects for unobservable subgroups defined by particular sets of potential outcomes has been of central interest in various empirical studies. Heterogeneous peer effects and tracking impacts (Duflo et al. (2011)) and heterogeneous class size effects (Ding and Lehrer (2008)) by the level of students' performance, and the heterogeneity in smoking effects by potential infant's birth weight (Hoderlein and Sasaki (2013)) have also been discussed in the literature focusing on heterogeneous average effects.\n\nI apply my method to an empirical analysis of the effects of smoking on infant birth weight. I propose an estimation procedure and illustrate the usefulness of my approach by showing that MTR has a substantial identifying power for the distribution of smoking effects given marginal distributions. As a support restriction, I assume that smoking has nonpositive effects on infant birth weight. Smoking not only has a direct impact on infant birth weight, but is also associated with unobservable factors that affect infant birth weight. To overcome the endogenous selection problem, I make use of the tax increase in Massachusetts in January 1993 as a source of exogenous variation. I point-identify marginal distributions of potential infant birth weight with and without smoking for compliers, which indicate pregnant women who changed their smoking status from smoking to nonsmoking in response to this tax shock. To estimate the marginal distributions of potential infant birth weight, I use the instrumental variables (IV) method presented in Abadie et al. (2002). Furthermore, I estimate the DTE bounds using plug-in estimators based on the estimates of marginal distribution functions. As a by-product, I find that the average adverse effect of smoking is more severe for women with a higher tendency to smoke and that smoking women with some college and college graduates are less likely to give births to low birth weight infants than other smoking women.\n\nIn the next section, I give a formal description of the basic setup, notation, terms and assumptions\n\n2 All of these studies considered ATE or marginal distributions of potential outcomes only.\n\n4", + "recall": 0.9699248120300752, + "true_md": "(2000)), the effect of funds for low-ability pupils (Haan (2012)), the impact of the National School Lunch Program on children’s health (Gundersen et al. (2011)), and various medical treatments (Bhattacharya et al. (2005, 2012)). Researchers sometimes have plausible information on the shape of treatment response functions from economic theory or from empirical results in previous studies. For example, based on di- minishing marginal returns to production, one may find it plausible to assume that the marginal effect of improved maize seed adoption on productivity diminishes as the level of adoption increases, holding other inputs fixed. Also, one may want to assume that the marginal adverse effect of an additional cigarette on infant birth weight diminishes as the number of cigarettes increases as shown in Hoderlein and Sasaki (2013). In the empirical literature, concave treatment response has been assumed for returns to schooling (Okumura (2010)) and convex treatment response for the effect of education on smoking (Boes (2010)). 2\n\nA considerable amount of the literature has used the Roy model to describe people’s self-selection ranging from immigration to the U.S. (Borjas (1987)) to college entrance (Heckman et al. (2011)). Also, heterogeneity in treatment effects for unobservable subgroups defined by particular sets of potential outcomes has been of central interest in various empirical studies. Heterogeneous peer effects and tracking impacts (Duflo et al. (2011)) and heterogeneous class size effects (Ding and Lehrer (2008)) by the level of students’ performance, and the heterogeneity in smoking effects by potential infant’s birth weight (Hoderlein and Sasaki (2013)) have also been discussed in the literature focusing on heterogeneous average effects.\n\nI apply my method to an empirical analysis of the effects of smoking on infant birth weight. I propose an estimation procedure and illustrate the usefulness of my approach by showing that MTR has a substantial identifying power for the distribution of smoking effects given marginal distributions. As a support restriction, I assume that smoking has nonpositive effects on infant birth weight. Smoking not only has a direct impact on infant birth weight, but is also associated with unobservable factors that affect infant birth weight. To overcome the endogenous selection problem, I make use of the tax increase in Massachusetts in January 1993 as a source of exogenous variation. I point-identify marginal distributions of potential infant birth weight with and without smoking for compliers, which indicate pregnant women who changed their smoking status from smoking to nonsmoking in response to this tax shock. To estimate the marginal distributions of potential infant birth weight, I use the instrumental variables (IV) method presented in Abadie et al. (2002). Furthermore, I estimate the DTE bounds using plug-in estimators based on the estimates of marginal distribution functions. As a by-product, I find that the average adverse effect of smoking is more severe for women with a higher tendency to smoke and that smoking women with some college and college graduates are less likely to give births to low birth weight infants than other smoking women.\n\nIn the next section, I give a formal description of the basic setup, notation, terms and assumptions\n\n$^{2}$All of these studies considered ATE or marginal distributions of potential outcomes only.\n\n4" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7276817202342092, + "doc_id": "acc5eb3a877f470ae941adda01fb73e324d823314b2645e577098bf18406a31e", + "edit_distance": 0.625, + "f1_score": 0.9629629629629631, + "meteor": 0.9242957746478874, + "precision": 0.9285714285714286, + "pred_md": "## Dependent variable: birth weight (grams)\n\nTable C.3: Quantile regression\n\n79", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Table C.3: Quantile regression Dependent variable: birth weight (grams)\n\n79" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.3466839335675297, + "doc_id": "6019e6735e20252f9be6b47c92e4ada4a77077bc44686d06ef24f96b82e7f18f", + "edit_distance": 0.5601577909270217, + "f1_score": 0.8794326241134751, + "meteor": 0.5202204010777116, + "precision": 0.9323308270676691, + "pred_md": "\n\n\n\nThe estimated functional connectivity at time t was then calculated as W ij ( ) = t σ ij ( ) t / σ ( i ( ) t σ j ( )). t\n\nFrom W , we can estimate the variability in the fluctuations of the functional connection between nodes i and j over time as:\n\n\n\nwhere m ij = 1 T -L +1 ∑ T -L +1 t =1 W ij ( ) is the mean dynamic functional connectivt ity over time.\n\n## Conditional dynamic functional connectivity\n\nIt is important to recognize that the strength of static functional connectivity observed over a long time period imposes constraints on the extent to which dynamic functional connectivity is expected to fluctuate over shorter time scales within that same period (Thompson and Fransson, 2015). We can think of these constraints in the following way. Suppose we have two BOLD time series: x = { x (1) . . . x ( T ) } and y = { y (1) . . . y ( T ) } that are correlated with magnitude ρ xy . Now, suppose we were to divide both x and y into sub-intervals and calculate each sub-interval's correlation coefficient. It turns out that the magnitude ρ xy plays an important role in constraining the distribution of subinterval correlation coefficients (Figure 1). Because of these constraints, we can make predictions about the expected range of dynamic fluctuations given a con-\n\n7", + "recall": 0.8322147651006712, + "true_md": "The estimated functional connectivity at time t was then calculated as W$_{ij}$ ( t ) = σ$_{ij}$ ( t ) / ( σ$_{i}$ ( t ) σ$_{j}$ ( t )).\n\nFrom W , we can estimate the variability in the fluctuations of the functional connection between nodes i and j over time as:\n\nwhere m$_{ij}$ = 1 T − L +1 ∑ T − L +1 t =1 W$_{ij}$ ( t ) is the mean dynamic functional connectiv- ity over time.\n\nIt is important to recognize that the strength of static functional connec- tivity observed over a long time period imposes constraints on the extent to which dynamic functional connectivity is expected to fluctuate over shorter time scales within that same period (Thompson and Fransson, 2015). We can think of these constraints in the following way. Suppose we have two BOLD time series: x = { x (1) . . . x ( T ) } and y = { y (1) . . . y ( T ) } that are correlated with magnitude ρ$_{xy}$ . Now, suppose we were to divide both x and y into sub-intervals and calculate each sub-interval’s correlation coefficient. It turns out that the magnitude ρ$_{xy}$ plays an important role in constraining the distribution of sub- interval correlation coefficients (Figure 1). Because of these constraints, we can make predictions about the expected range of dynamic fluctuations given a con-\n\n7\n\n## Conditional dynamic functional connectivity\n\n$$s$_{ij}$ = √ √ 1 T − L T − L +1 ∑ t =1 ( W$_{ij}$ ( t ) − m$_{ij}$ ) (5)$$\n\n$$σ$_{ij}$ ( t ) = [ L ∑ τ =1 w ( τ )( z$_{i}$ ( t − N + τ ) − ¯ z$_{i}$ ( t )) · ( z$_{j}$ ( t − N + τ ) − ¯ z$_{j}$ ( t )) ] 1 / 2 (4)$$\n\n$$σ$_{i}$ ( t ) = [ L ∑ τ =1 w ( τ )( z$_{i}$ ( t − N + τ ) − ¯ z$_{i}$ ( t )) ] 1 / 2 (3)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.05418679816474766, + "doc_id": "e1f5c2683824d4c61fc25332e96574c858daf4361fa82fc4ef1ee515c0393b6c", + "edit_distance": 0.8049951969260326, + "f1_score": 0.8516746411483255, + "meteor": 0.19183594423650646, + "precision": 0.9468085106382979, + "pred_md": "and\n\n\n\nuniformly in t ∈ [0 , ∞ ) .\n\nNext, by using mathematical induction, we are going to show that z ( j ) s ( t, a ) , s = 1 2 , , . . . , are defined for t ∈ [0 , ∞ ) and satisfy\n\n\n\n\n\nif L < L . 1 Utilizing Lemma 4.2 and inequalities (4.40), (4.44), (4.45) and θ i +1 -θ i ≥ θ, i ∈ Z , one can verify that\n\n\n\nAs a consequence of (4.46), the sequence z ( j ) k +1 ( t, a ) converges uniformly on t ∈ [0 , ∞ ) , | a | < δ/ K 2 ( j ) 1 , and\n\n\n\nTherefore, the limit function z ( j ) ( t, a ) exists on the same domain, it is piecewise continuous, satisfies (4.41) and the following estimate\n\n\n\nDenote by z t ( ) = z ( j ) ( t, a ) , for j = 1 2 , , . . . , m. Next, we will verify that z ( j ) ( t, a ) satisfies (4.35). For it, differentiate (4.41)\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nFix θ k , k ∈ Z , then\n\n25", + "recall": 0.7739130434782608, + "true_md": "and\n\nuniformly in t ∈ [0 , ∞ ) .\n\nuniformly in t ∈ [0 , ∞ ) . Denote by L$_{1}$ = 4 K ( j ) ( 2 α − 1 1 − exp( − αθ/ 2) ) . Next, by using mathematical induction, we are going to show that\n\n( α − 1 − exp( − αθ/ 2) ) Next, by using mathematical induction, we are going to show that z ( j ) s ( t, a ) , s = 1 , 2 , . . . , are defined for t ∈ [0 , ∞ ) and satisfy\n\nif L < L$_{1}$. Utilizing Lemma 4.2 and inequalities (4.40), (4.44), (4.45) and θ$_{i}$$\\_{+1}$ − θ$\\_{i}$ ≥ θ, i ∈ $^{Z}$, one can verify that\n\nAs a consequence of (4.46), the sequence z ( j ) k $_{+1}$( t, a ) converges uniformly on t ∈ [0 , ∞ ) , | a | < δ/ 2 K ( j ) 1 , and\n\nTherefore, the limit function z ( j $^{)}$( t, a ) exists on the same domain, it is piecewise continuous, satisfies (4.41) and the following estimate\n\nDenote by z ( t ) = z ( j $^{)}$( t, a ) , for j = 1 , 2 , . . . , m. Next, we will verify that z ( j $^{)}$( t, a ) satisfies (4.35). For it, differentiate (4.41)\n\nFix θ$_{k}$, k ∈ $^{Z}$, then\n\n$$| q$_{i}$ ( z$_{1}$ ) − q$_{i}$ ( z$_{2}$ ) | ≤ L | z$_{1}$ − z$_{2}$ | , (4.45)$$\n\n$$| z ( j ) s $_{+1}$( t, a ) − z ( j ) s ( t, a ) | ≤ K ( j ) 1 | a | exp( − αt/ 2) / 2 $^{s}$, s = 0 , 1 , 2 , . . . , (4.46)$$\n\n$$| z ( j ) k $_{+1}$( t, a ) − z ( j ) k ( t, a ) | ≤ K ( j ) 1 | a | L$_{1}$ exp( − αt/ 2) / (2 $^{k}$α ) . (4.47)$$\n\n$$| z ( j ) s ( t, a ) | ≤ 2 K ( j ) 1 | a | exp( − αt/ 2) , s = 1 , 2 , . . . .$$\n\n$$| z ( j $^{)}$( t, a ) | ≤ 2 K ( j ) 1 | a | exp( − αt/ 2) . (4.48)$$\n\n$$z ′ ( t ) = Y ′ $_{j}$( t ) a + G ( j ) 1 ( t, t ) r ( t, z ( t )) + G j $_{2}$( t, t ) r ( t, z ( t )) + t ∫ 0 G ( j ) 1 t ( t, s ) r ( s, z ( s )) ds − ∞ ∫ t G ( j ) 2 t ( t, s ) r ( s, z ( s )) ds + ∑ 0 <θ$_{k}$\n\nwhich is a continuous convex combination of a continuum of pairs of\n\n\n\nTo see if ( ∑ ∞ k =0 ( 1 A d ϕ,s + k ( ) -1 A -k ( ϕ,s ) ) , ∑ ∞ k =0 ( 1 A + k ( ψ,s ) -1 A -k ( ψ,s ) )) ∈ Φ c , check the following: for any s ∈ [0 , 1] and λ = ∞ ,\n\n\n\n\n\nThe nontrivial case to check is when the LHS in (A.4) is positive. Consider the case where s + t < ϕ ( y 0 ) ≤ s + t +1 and -( s + ) t < ψ ( y 1 ) ≤ -( s + t -1) for some nonnegative integer t and s ∈ [0 , 1]. Then,\n\n\n\nand so the LHS in (A.4) is 1. Also, it follows from (A.1) that for ( y , y 0 1 ) ∈ R × R s.t. s + t ≤ ϕ y ( 0 ) < s + +1 t and -( s + ) t < ψ ( y 1 ) ,\n\n\n\nand thus (A.4) is satisfied in this case from the following:\n\n\n\nConsider another case where s + t ≤ ϕ y ( 0 ) < s + t +1 and -( s + t -1) < ψ y ( 1 ) ≤ -( s + t -2) for\n\n57", + "recall": 0.875, + "true_md": "For any ( ϕ, ψ ) ∈ Φ$_{c}$ , one can write\n\nwhich is a continuous convex combination of a continuum of pairs of\n\nThe nontrivial case to check is when the LHS in (A.4) is positive. Consider the case where s + t < ϕ ( y$_{0}$ ) ≤ s + t + 1 and − ( s + t ) < ψ ( y$_{1}$ ) ≤ − ( s + t − 1) for some nonnegative integer t and s ∈ [0 , 1]. Then,\n\nand so the LHS in (A.4) is 1. Also, it follows from (A.1) that for ( y$_{0}$, y$_{1}$ ) ∈$_{R}$×$_{R}$ s.t. s + t ≤ ϕ ( y$_{0}$ ) < s + t +1 and − ( s + t ) < ψ ( y$_{1}$ ) ,\n\nand thus (A.4) is satisfied in this case from the following:\n\nConsider another case where s + t ≤ ϕ ( y$_{0}$ ) < s + t + 1 and − ( s + t − 1) < ψ ( y$_{1}$ ) ≤ − ( s + t − 2) for\n\n57\n\n$$1 { y$_{1}$ − y$_{0}$ < δ } + λ (1 − 1$_{C}$ ( y$_{0}$, y$_{1}$ )) ≥ 1 .$$\n\n$$0 < ϕ ( y$_{0}$ ) + ψ ( y$_{1}$ ) ≤ 1 { y$_{1}$ − y$_{0}$ < δ } + λ (1 − 1$_{C}$ ( y$_{0}$, y$_{1}$ )) ,$$\n\n$$∞ ∑ k =0 $^{(}$1$_{A}$ + $_{k}$( ϕ,s $_{)}$( y$_{0}$ ) − 1$_{A}$ − k ( ϕ,s $_{)}$( y$_{0}$ ) ) = t + 1 , ∞ ∑ k =0 $^{(}$1$_{A}$ + $_{k}$( ψ,s $_{)}$( y$_{1}$ ) − 1$_{A}$ − k ( ψ,s $_{)}$( y$_{1}$ ) ) = − t,$$\n\n$$( ∞ ∑ k =0 $^{(}$1$_{A}$ + $_{k}$( ϕ,s ) − 1$_{A}$ − k ( ϕ,s ) $^{)}$, ∞ ∑ k =0 $^{(}$1$_{A}$ + $_{k}$( ψ,s ) − 1$_{A}$ − k ( ψ,s ) ) ) s ∈ [0 , 1] .$$\n\n$$∞ ∑ k =0 $^{(}$1$_{A}$ + $_{k}$( ϕ,s $_{)}$( y$_{0}$ ) − 1$_{A}$ − k ( ϕ,s $_{)}$( y$_{0}$ ) $^{)}$+ ∞ ∑ k =0 $^{(}$1$_{A}$ + $_{k}$( ψ,s $_{)}$( y$_{1}$ ) − 1$_{A}$ − k ( ψ,s $_{)}$( y$_{1}$ ) (A.4) ≤ 1 { y$_{1}$ − y$_{0}$ < δ } + λ (1 − 1$_{C}$ ( y$_{0}$, y$_{1}$ )) .$$\n\n$$( ϕ, ψ ) = ( ϕ$_{+}$ + ϕ$_{−}$, ψ$_{+}$ + ψ$_{−}$ ) = ∫ 1 0 ( ∞ ∑ k =0 $^{(}$1$_{A}$ + $_{k}$( ϕ,s ) − 1$_{A}$ − k ( ϕ,s ) $^{)}$ds, ∞ ∑ k =0 $^{(}$1$_{A}$ + $_{k}$( ψ,s ) − 1$_{A}$ − k ( ψ,s ) ) ) ds,$$\n\nTo see if ( ∑ ∞ k =0 $^{(}$1$_{A}$ + $_{k}$d ( ϕ,s ) − 1$_{A}$ − k ( ϕ,s ) $^{)}$, ∑ ∞ k =0 $^{(}$1$_{A}$ + $_{k}$( ψ,s ) − 1$_{A}$ − k ( ψ,s ) )) ∈ Φ$_{c}$ , check the following: for any s ∈ [0 , 1] and λ = ∞ ," + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9096634467872072, + "doc_id": "8bfb2662afee93dc9d97ac0ee913c2646acb42bbd6af6bd85e2e7c080fac9a42", + "edit_distance": 0.06547619047619048, + "f1_score": 0.9505494505494505, + "meteor": 0.9545689840020882, + "precision": 0.9719101123595506, + "pred_md": "cases, there is a strong correlation between the mean dynamic functional with the static connectivity and that, to varying degrees, static connectivity still constrains the shape of the standard deviation in dynamic functional connectivity (Figure S3).\n\nOur results were based on a univariate analysis of fluctuations in dynamic functional connections. Specifically, in estimating the number of connections that were unexpectedly strong or weak at any time point, we considered each connection independently. Of course, due to the correlative nature of the connection weights, functional connections are very often not independent of one another. Future work could include explicitly multivariate methods, as in Leonardi et al. (2013), where the authors identified connection-level components with spatial distributions reminiscent of known functional systems that collectively co-varied together across time. Importantly, this component-style analysis included a step in which time-averaged connectivity levels were subtracted from each connection's time course prior to estimating each component's temporal profile. This reveals patterns of temporal fluctuations of functional connections while discounting the baseline level of dynamic functional connectivity, which, as we and others show, is constrained by the level of static connectivity.\n\n## Limitations\n\nIn this report we argue that the magnitude of static functional connectivity plays an important role in constraining expectations about dynamic fluctuations. We cite some practical examples using fMRI BOLD times series to motivate our claim. It is important to note, however, that in all but the most trivial examples (i.e. correlations of ± 1), it is mathematically possible for a dynamic fluctuation to take on any possible correlation value between -1 and 1. While this may be true, we assert that the probability of observing such fluctuations is not uniform, and that the shape of such a probability distribution is determined\n\n26", + "recall": 0.9301075268817204, + "true_md": "cases, there is a strong correlation between the mean dynamic functional with the static connectivity and that, to varying degrees, static connectivity still con- strains the shape of the standard deviation in dynamic functional connectivity (Figure S3).\n\nOur results were based on a univariate analysis of fluctuations in dynamic functional connections. Specifically, in estimating the number of connections that were unexpectedly strong or weak at any time point, we considered each connection independently. Of course, due to the correlative nature of the con- nection weights, functional connections are very often not independent of one an- other. Future work could include explicitly multivariate methods, as in Leonardi et al. (2013), where the authors identified connection-level components with spatial distributions reminiscent of known functional systems that collectively co-varied together across time. Importantly, this component-style analysis in- cluded a step in which time-averaged connectivity levels were subtracted from each connection’s time course prior to estimating each component’s temporal profile. This reveals patterns of temporal fluctuations of functional connections while discounting the baseline level of dynamic functional connectivity, which, as we and others show, is constrained by the level of static connectivity.\n\nIn this report we argue that the magnitude of static functional connectivity plays an important role in constraining expectations about dynamic fluctua- tions. We cite some practical examples using fMRI BOLD times series to moti- vate our claim. It is important to note, however, that in all but the most trivial examples (i.e. correlations of ± 1), it is mathematically possible for a dynamic fluctuation to take on any possible correlation value between -1 and 1. While this may be true, we assert that the probability of observing such fluctuations is not uniform, and that the shape of such a probability distribution is determined\n\n## Limitations\n\n26" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8884472561824144, + "doc_id": "6037d4eec09f5346e7cd36f14c4b778ccc91921bc1546bbdc81097292896c28d", + "edit_distance": 0.06646525679758308, + "f1_score": 0.9467084639498433, + "meteor": 0.9593268451031646, + "precision": 0.9805194805194806, + "pred_md": "point in this landscape can be assigned a fitness score equal to Q . We can think of the Louvain algorithm as moving through this landscape, looking for solutions of increasingly greater fitness (highly-modular partitions). If the landscape features a single highly-fit partition (meaning that this partition is much more modular than other nearby partitions), we expect the Louvain algorithm to successfully negotiate the landscape and, more times than not, return as its output a partition that approximates the optimal partition. However, if the landscape features multiple near-optimal partitions we expect the Louvain algorithm to have difficulty arriving at the same solution each run. We refer to this type of landscape as a degenerate or near-degenerate modularity landscape, indicating the presence of multiple near-optimal solutions (Good et al., 2010).\n\nWith this intuition in mind, we calculated the similarity of all pairs of detected partitions at time t (a total of 100(100 -1) / 2 = 4950 pairs) using the z-score of the Rand index (Traud et al., 2011) and subsequently averaged over all pairs, thus obtaining a single score, Z t ( ), that quantified the average pairwise similarity of partitions at time t . If Z t ( ) was large, it indicated the the Louvain algorithm consistently returned similar partitions. On the other hand, if Z t ( ) was small, then the partitions varied from run to run. We interpreted the magnitude of Z t ( ) as an indication of the level of degeneracy in the modularity landscape, with high values indicating low levels of degneracy. It should be noted that the Louvain algorithm uses a greedy heuristic to maximize modularity and very likely samples near-optimal partitions in a somewhat biased manner.\n\n14", + "recall": 0.9151515151515152, + "true_md": "point in this landscape can be assigned a fitness score equal to Q . We can think of the Louvain algorithm as moving through this landscape, looking for solutions of increasingly greater fitness (highly-modular partitions). If the land- scape features a single highly-fit partition (meaning that this partition is much more modular than other nearby partitions), we expect the Louvain algorithm to successfully negotiate the landscape and, more times than not, return as its output a partition that approximates the optimal partition. However, if the landscape features multiple near-optimal partitions we expect the Louvain al- gorithm to have difficulty arriving at the same solution each run. We refer to this type of landscape as a degenerate or near-degenerate modularity landscape, indicating the presence of multiple near-optimal solutions (Good et al., 2010).\n\nWith this intuition in mind, we calculated the similarity of all pairs of de- tected partitions at time t (a total of 100(100 − 1) / 2 = 4950 pairs) using the z-score of the Rand index (Traud et al., 2011) and subsequently averaged over all pairs, thus obtaining a single score, Z ( t ), that quantified the average pair- wise similarity of partitions at time t . If Z ( t ) was large, it indicated the the Louvain algorithm consistently returned similar partitions. On the other hand, if Z ( t ) was small, then the partitions varied from run to run. We interpreted the magnitude of Z ( t ) as an indication of the level of degeneracy in the modu- larity landscape, with high values indicating low levels of degneracy. It should be noted that the Louvain algorithm uses a greedy heuristic to maximize mod- ularity and very likely samples near-optimal partitions in a somewhat biased manner.\n\n14" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.032939917491350536, + "doc_id": "4908bc34c142ab498f9c7620f28b0869f5c59b14d54475bcc8790b199a6d5d6a", + "edit_distance": 0.8172231985940246, + "f1_score": 0.8480000000000001, + "meteor": 0.19896284400318917, + "precision": 0.8833333333333333, + "pred_md": "By the layer cake representation theorem, ϕ + ( x ) can be written as\n\n\n\nwhere A + k ( f, s ) = { y ∈ R ; f ( y ) > s + k } for any function f. The fourth equality in (A.3) follows from Fubini's theorem. Similarly, the nonpositive function ϕ -( x ) can be represented as\n\n\n\nwhere A -k ( f, s ) = { y ∈ R ; f ( y ) ≤ -( s + ) k } for any function f. Similarly, ψ + ( x ) and ψ -( x ) are written as follows:\n\n\n\n\n\n56", + "recall": 0.8153846153846154, + "true_md": "By the layer cake representation theorem, ϕ$_{+}$ ( x ) can be written as\n\nwhere A + k ( f, s ) = { y ∈$_{R}$ ; f ( y ) > s + k } for any function f. The fourth equality in (A.3) follows from Fubini’s theorem. Similarly, the nonpositive function ϕ$_{−}$ ( x ) can be represented as\n\nwhere A − k ( f, s ) = { y ∈$_{R}$ ; f ( y ) ≤ − ( s + k ) } for any function f. Similarly, ψ$_{+}$ ( x ) and ψ$_{−}$ ( x ) are written as follows:\n\n56\n\n$$ψ$_{+}$ ( x ) = ∫ 1 0 ∞ ∑ k =0 1$_{A}$ + $_{k}$( ψ,s $_{)}$( x ) ds, ψ$_{−}$ ( x ) = − ∫ 1 0 ∞ ∑ k =0 1$_{A}$ − $_{k}$( ψ,s $_{)}$( x ) ds.$$\n\n$$ϕ$_{−}$ ( x ) = − ∫ ∞ 0 1 { ϕ$_{−}$ ( x ) ≤ − s } ds = − ∞ ∑ k =0 ∫ 1 0 1 { ϕ$_{−}$ ( x ) ≤ − ( s + k ) } ds = − ∫ 1 0 ∞ ∑ k =0 1 { ϕ$_{−}$ ( x ) ≤ − ( s + k ) } ds = − ∫ 1 0 ∞ ∑ k =0 1 { ϕ ( x ) ≤ − ( s + k ) } ds = − ∫ 1 0 ∞ ∑ k =0 1$_{A}$ − $_{k}$( ϕ,s $_{)}$( x ) ds.$$\n\n$$ϕ$_{+}$ ( x ) = ∫ ϕ$_{+}$ ( x ) 0 ds (A.3) = ∫ ∞ 0 1 { ϕ$_{+}$ ( x ) > s } ds = ∞ ∑ k =0 ∫ 1 0 1 { ϕ$_{+}$ ( x ) > s + k } ds = ∫ 1 0 ∞ ∑ k =0 1 { ϕ$_{+}$ ( x ) > s + k } ds = ∫ 1 0 ∞ ∑ k =0 1 { ϕ ( x ) > s + k } ds = ∫ 1 0 ∞ ∑ k =0 1$_{A}$ + $_{k}$( ϕ,s $_{)}$( x ) ds,$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.47468132135512126, + "doc_id": "7930e03b3b02d0915a652dbb92625fff662a76144ecf4bd137ffb9ec0ec86a78", + "edit_distance": 0.38315988647114474, + "f1_score": 0.9261363636363636, + "meteor": 0.5538470468513543, + "precision": 0.9421965317919075, + "pred_md": "The main object of our discussion is the following system,\n\n\n\nIn order to define a solution of (2.1), we need the following function and spaces.\n\nA function φ t ( ) : R → R n , n ∈ N , θ is a B -sequence, is from the set PC ( R , θ ) if it : ( ) i is left continuous, ( ii ) is continuous, except, possibly, points of θ, where it has discontinuities of the first kind.\n\nA function φ t ( ) is from the set PC 1 ( R , θ ) if φ t , φ ( ) ' ( ) t ∈ PC ( R , θ ) , where the derivative at points of θ is assumed to be the left derivative. If φ t ( ) is a solution of (2.1), then it is required that it belongs to PC 1 ( R , θ ) [1].\n\nWe say that x t ( ) : I → R n , I ⊂ R , is a solution of (2.1) on I if there exists an extension ˜( ) x t of the function on R such that ˜( ) x t ∈ PC 1 ( R , θ ) , the equality x ' ( ) = t f ( x t ( )) , t ∈ I , is true if x t ( ) / ∈ Γ , x θ ( i +) = J x θ ( ( i )) for x θ ( i ) ∈ Γ and x θ ( i +) ∈ ˜ Γ , θ i ∈ I . If θ i is a discontinuity moment of x t , ( ) then x θ ( i ) ∈ Γ , for θ i > 0 and x θ ( i ) ∈ ˜ Γ , for θ i < 0 . If x θ ( i ) ∈ ∂ Γ or x θ ( i ) ∈ ∂ ˜ Γ , then x θ ( i ) is a point of discontinuity with zero jump.\n\nDefinition 2.1 A point x ∗ from ∂ Γ or ∂ ˜ Γ is a grazing point of system (2.1) if 〈∇ Φ( x ∗ ) , f ( x ∗ ) 〉 = 0 or 〈∇ ˜ ( Φ x ∗ ) , f ( x ∗ ) 〉 = 0 , respectively. If at least one of coordinates of ∇ ˜ ( Φ x ∗ ) is zero then the grazing is axial, otherwise it is non-axial.\n\nDefinition 2.2 An orbit γ x ( ∗ ) = { x t, ( 0 , x ∗ ) | x ∗ ∈ D, t ∈ R } of (2.1) is grazing if there exists at least one grazing point on the orbit.\n\nConsider a solution x t ( ) : R → R n and { θ i } be the moments of the discontinuity, they are the moments where solution x t ( ) intersects Γ as time increases and the moments when the solution it intersects ˜ Γ as time decreases.\n\nA solution x t ( ) = x t, ( 0 , x 0 ) , x 0 ∈ D of (2.1) locally exists and is unique if the conditions ( C 1) -( C 3) are valid [1].\n\nIn what follows, let ‖ · ‖ be the Euclidean norm, that is for a vector x = ( x , x 1 2 , . . . , x n ) in R n , the norm is equal to √ x 2 1 + x 2 2 + . . . + x . 2 n\n\nThe following condition for (2.1) guarantees that any set of discontinuity moments of the system constitutes a B -sequence and we call the condition B -sequence condition .\n\n\n\nIn [1], some other B -sequence conditions are provided.\n\nWe will request for discontinuous dynamical systems that any sequence of discontinuity moments to be a B -sequence.\n\n4", + "recall": 0.9106145251396648, + "true_md": "The main object of our discussion is the following system,\n\nIn order to define a solution of (2.1), we need the following function and spaces.\n\nA function φ ( t ) : R → R $^{n}$, n ∈ $^{N}$, θ is a B − sequence, is from the set P C ( $^{R}$, θ ) if it : ( i ) is left continuous, ( ii ) is continuous, except, possibly, points of θ, where it has discontinuities of the first kind.\n\nA function φ ( t ) is from the set P C $^{1}$( $^{R}$, θ ) if φ ( t ) , φ ′ ( t ) ∈ P C ( $^{R}$, θ ) , where the derivative at points of θ is assumed to be the left derivative. If φ ( t ) is a solution of (2.1), then it is required that it belongs to P C $^{1}$( $^{R}$, θ ) [1].\n\nWe say that x ( t ) : I → R $^{n}$, I ⊂ $^{R}$, is a solution of (2.1) on I if there exists an extension ˜ x ( t ) of the function on R such that ˜ x ( t ) ∈ P C $^{1}$( $^{R}$, θ ) , the equality x ′ ( t ) = f ( x ( t )) , t ∈ I , is true if x ( t ) / ∈ Γ , x ( θ$_{i}$ +) = J ( x ( θ$_{i}$ )) for x ( θ$_{i}$ ) ∈ Γ and x ( θ$_{i}$ +) ∈ ˜ Γ , θ$_{i}$ ∈ I . If θ$_{i}$ is a discontinuity moment of x ( t ) , then x ( θ$_{i}$ ) ∈ Γ , for θ$_{i}$ > 0 and x ( θ$_{i}$ ) ∈ ˜ Γ , for θ$_{i}$ < 0 . If x ( θ$_{i}$ ) ∈ ∂ Γ or x ( θ$_{i}$ ) ∈ ∂ ˜ Γ , then x ( θ$_{i}$ ) is a point of discontinuity with zero jump.\n\nDefinition 2.1 A point x ∗ from ∂ Γ or ∂ ˜ Γ is a grazing point of system (2.1) if 〈∇ Φ( x ∗ ) , f ( x ∗ ) 〉 = 0 or 〈∇ ˜ Φ( x ∗ ) , f ( x ∗ ) 〉 = 0 , respectively. If at least one of coordinates of ∇ ˜ Φ( x ∗ ) is zero then the grazing is axial, otherwise it is non-axial.\n\nDefinition 2.2 An orbit γ ( x ∗ ) = { x ( t, 0 , x ∗ ) | x ∗ ∈ D, t ∈ $^{R}$} of (2.1) is grazing if there exists at least one grazing point on the orbit.\n\nConsider a solution x ( t ) : $^{R}$→ R n and { θ$_{i}$ } be the moments of the discontinuity, they are the moments where solution x ( t ) intersects Γ as time increases and the moments when the solution it intersects ˜ Γ as time decreases.\n\nA solution x ( t ) = x ( t, 0 , x$_{0}$ ) , x$_{0}$ ∈ D of (2.1) locally exists and is unique if the conditions ( C 1) − ( C 3) are valid [1].\n\nIn what follows, let ‖ · ‖ be the Euclidean norm, that is for a vector x = ( x$_{1}$, x$_{2}$, . . . , x$_{n}$ ) in R $^{n}$, the norm is equal to √ x 2 1 + x 2 + . . . + x 2 $_{n}$. The following condition for (2.1) guarantees that any set of discontinuity moments of the system\n\n√ The following condition for (2.1) guarantees that any set of discontinuity moments of the system constitutes a B − sequence and we call the condition B − sequence condition .\n\nIn [1], some other B − sequence conditions are provided.\n\nWe will request for discontinuous dynamical systems that any sequence of discontinuity moments to be a B − sequence.\n\n- (C8) sup$_{D}$ ‖ f ( x ) ‖ < + ∞ , and $^{inf$\\_{x}$$_{0}$}$∈ ˜ $\\_{Γ}$( x$\\_{0}$, y ( ζ, 0 , x$\\_{0}$ )) > 0 .\n\n4\n\n$$x ′ = f ( x ) , Δ x | $^{x}$∈ Γ = I ( x ) . (2.1)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7816116528178235, + "doc_id": "fb14a8b8b68fa37497f97c4ebefcb565009d618914cceb6de6ed297911bba9e2", + "edit_distance": 0.22125435540069685, + "f1_score": 0.933649289099526, + "meteor": 0.7927129164254904, + "precision": 0.9563106796116505, + "pred_md": "(2016).\n\nIn order to ensure that such estimators are well-defined and stable, it is important to assess the overlap between the distribution of the propensity score among treatment and control groups, i.e. to check whether the propensity score is bounded away from zero and one, and if the support of the propensity score in both groups are nearly the same, see e.g. Heckman, Ichimura, Smith and Todd (1998), Smith and Todd (2005), Crump et al. (2009) and Khan and Tamer (2010). Following Heckman, Ichimura, Smith and Todd (1998), it is now routine to compare kernel density estimates of the propensity score among treated and control samples to determine the common support region. In cases where there is strong overlap one proceeds as described above, otherwise, one usually considers trimmed samples, see e.g. Crump et al. (2009) and Sasaki and Ura (2018).\n\nAlthough kernel density estimators are popular, they involve choosing tuning parameters such as bandwidths and often suffer from boundary bias. Of course such inconveniences can be easily avoided if one focuses on CDFs instead of densities. In the following we show that propensity score overlap implies a particular set of restrictions between the CDFs of treated and control groups, and that these restrictions can form the basis for testing the correct specification of propensity score models.\n\nAssume that the propensity score p ( X ) has a density with respect to a dominating measure, and that the density is bounded away from zero and infinity uniformly over its support. The following lemma builds on Shaikh et al. (2009) and formalizes the above discussion.\n\nLemma 1 Let α = P ( D = 0) / P ( D = 1) and assume that 0 < P ( D = 1) < 1 . If 0 < p ( X < ) 1 a.s., then\n\n\n\nFurthermore, (2.1) holds if and only if\n\n\n\nLemma 1 implies that, when the propensity score is correctly specified, one can expect that the sample analogue of (2.1) should hold. Thus, (2.1) provides a graphical diagnostic tool for propensity score misspecification; see Lemma 3.2 of S/suppress loczy'ski and Wooldridge (2018) n for a result related to (2.1). Perhaps more importantly, note that (2.2) provides an infinite number of simple unconditional moment restrictions that can be used to formally test whether\n\n6", + "recall": 0.9120370370370371, + "true_md": "(2016).\n\nIn order to ensure that such estimators are well-defined and stable, it is important to assess the overlap between the distribution of the propensity score among treatment and control groups, i.e. to check whether the propensity score is bounded away from zero and one, and if the support of the propensity score in both groups are nearly the same, see e.g. Heckman, Ichimura, Smith and Todd (1998), Smith and Todd (2005), Crump et al. (2009) and Khan and Tamer (2010). Following Heckman, Ichimura, Smith and Todd (1998), it is now rou- tine to compare kernel density estimates of the propensity score among treated and control samples to determine the common support region. In cases where there is strong overlap one proceeds as described above, otherwise, one usually considers trimmed samples, see e.g. Crump et al. (2009) and Sasaki and Ura (2018).\n\nAlthough kernel density estimators are popular, they involve choosing tuning parameters such as bandwidths and often suffer from boundary bias. Of course such inconveniences can be easily avoided if one focuses on CDFs instead of densities. In the following we show that propensity score overlap implies a particular set of restrictions between the CDFs of treated and control groups, and that these restrictions can form the basis for testing the correct specification of propensity score models.\n\nAssume that the propensity score p ( X ) has a density with respect to a dominating measure, and that the density is bounded away from zero and infinity uniformly over its support. The following lemma builds on Shaikh et al. (2009) and formalizes the above discussion.\n\nLemma 1 Let α = P ( D = 0) / P ( D = 1) and assume that 0 < P ( D = 1) < 1 . If 0 < p ( X ) < 1 a.s., then\n\nFurthermore, (2.1) holds if and only if\n\nLemma 1 implies that, when the propensity score is correctly specified, one can expect that the sample analogue of (2.1) should hold. Thus, (2.1) provides a graphical diagnostic tool for propensity score misspecification; see Lemma 3.2 of SGLYPH<suppress>loczy´ nski and Wooldridge (2018) for a result related to (2.1). Perhaps more importantly, note that (2.2) provides an infinite number of simple unconditional moment restrictions that can be used to formally test whether\n\n6\n\n$$E [1 { p ( X ) ≤ u } | D = 1] = α E [ p ( X ) 1 − p ( X ) 1 { p ( X ) ≤ u } | D = 0 ] , ∀ u ∈ [0 , 1] . (2.1)$$\n\n$$E [( D − p ( X )) 1 { p ( X ) ≤ u } ] = 0 , ∀ u ∈ [0 , 1] . (2.2)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7438355070600918, + "doc_id": "4426549336e7929868176bc808f69ca83930233bedde29fa36130a0d3cbbfe4f", + "edit_distance": 0.21762589928057555, + "f1_score": 0.983132530120482, + "meteor": 0.8507968973490312, + "precision": 0.9951219512195122, + "pred_md": "We now study the potential for algorithmic inefficiency that may result from scalar or block sampling, by examining situations in which each are particularly ill-suited.\n\n## Efficiency loss from block sampling\n\nConsider MCMC algorithm Ψ block ∈ Ψ M . Application of Ψ block generates a random proposal vector X ∗ ∈ R d , then jointly accepts or rejects X ∗ . In the framework of the sampling method u block , X ∗ ∼ N ( d µ, σ 2 d Σ), where µ and Σ vary according to current state of the MCMC chain and properties of the target stationary distribution, but not proportionally to d . Roberts, Gelman, and Gilks (1997) show that in order to achieve the asymptotically optimal acceptance rate, and therefore sample chain mixing, σ 2 d ∝ d -1 . As a consequence of this attenuation in the proposal variance, the rate at which Ψ block explores the space of R d , and accordingly A (Ψ block ), is proportional to d -1 . This result applies equivalently to block samplers ψ = u block ( b ) acting on subsets b ⊂ Θ, where the algorithmic efficiency (for the elements of b ) achieved by application of ψ is inversely proportional to the number of elements in b .\n\nThis result has an important implication on block sampling. All other factors being equal ( e.g. , effect of posterior correlations), a block sampler of dimension k must generate k times more samples to have the same effective sample size as those samples produced through scalar sampling (Roberts and Rosenthal, 2001). This inefficiency is inherent to block sampling and scales with the dimension of any block sampler.\n\n## Efficiency loss from scalar sampling\n\nTo study the potential loss of algorithmic efficiency which may result from scalar sampling under Ψ scalar ∈ Ψ M , we consider correlated posterior distributions. It is well-understood that strong posterior correlations can retard the speed of convergence of MCMC sampling ( e.g., Roberts and Sahu, 1997; Gilks, 2005), and that block sampling can alleviate this. However, the nature of this inefficiency is not characterized, in particular as a function of the degree of correlation and number of dimensions exhibiting correlation. We undertake a simulation study, to gauge how these factors effect algorithmic efficiency. Consider target distribution N (0 Σ), where the covariance d , (equivalently, correlation) matrix Σ consists of 1s on the main diagonal and ρ elsewhere, | ρ | < 1.\n\n8", + "recall": 0.9714285714285714, + "true_md": "We now study the potential for algorithmic inefficiency that may result from scalar or block sampling, by examining situations in which each are particularly ill-suited.\n\nConsider MCMC algorithm Ψ$_{block}$ ∈ Ψ$_{M}$ . Application of Ψ$_{block}$ generates a random proposal vector X ∗ ∈ R $^{d}$, then jointly accepts or rejects X $^{∗}$. In the framework of the sampling method u$_{block}$ , X ∗ ∼ N$_{d}$( µ, σ 2 $_{d}$Σ), where µ and Σ vary according to current state of the MCMC chain and properties of the target stationary distribution, but not proportionally to d . Roberts, Gelman, and Gilks (1997) show that in order to achieve the asymptotically optimal acceptance rate, and therefore sample chain mixing, σ 2 d ∝ d − $^{1}$. As a consequence of this attenuation in the proposal variance, the rate at which Ψ$_{block}$ explores the space of R $^{d}$, and accordingly A (Ψ$_{block}$), is proportional to d − $^{1}$. This result applies equivalently to block samplers ψ = u$_{block}$ ( b ) acting on subsets b ⊂ Θ, where the algorithmic efficiency (for the elements of b ) achieved by application of ψ is inversely proportional to the number of elements in b .\n\nThis result has an important implication on block sampling. All other factors being equal ( e.g. , effect of posterior correlations), a block sampler of dimension k must generate k times more samples to have the same effective sample size as those samples produced through scalar sampling (Roberts and Rosenthal, 2001). This inefficiency is inherent to block sampling and scales with the dimension of any block sampler.\n\nTo study the potential loss of algorithmic efficiency which may result from scalar sampling under Ψ$_{scalar}$ ∈ Ψ$_{M}$ , we consider correlated posterior distributions. It is well-understood that strong posterior correlations can retard the speed of convergence of MCMC sampling ( e.g., Roberts and Sahu, 1997; Gilks, 2005), and that block sampling can alleviate this. However, the nature of this inefficiency is not characterized, in particular as a function of the degree of correlation and number of dimensions exhibiting correlation. We undertake a simulation study, to gauge how these factors effect algorithmic efficiency. Consider target distribution N$_{d}$(0 , Σ), where the covariance (equivalently, correlation) matrix Σ consists of 1s on the main diagonal and ρ elsewhere, | ρ | < 1.\n\n8\n\n## Efficiency loss from scalar sampling\n\n## Efficiency loss from block sampling" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "b695c453331bd6bff279406e3301e892cf5ac410fd81d351c429f43b57331e50", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999982608453682, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Table C.3 - continued from previous page\n\nNote: The table reports quantile regression estimates for the effect of smoking on the quantiles of infant birth weight for compliers.\n\nThe tax increase is used as an instrument for smoking. The specification also includes indicators for birth orders, weight gains and medical risk factors. Robust standard errors are reported in parentheses.\n\n80", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Table C.3 - continued from previous page\n\nNote: The table reports quantile regression estimates for the effect of smoking on the quantiles of infant birth weight for compliers. The tax increase is used as an instrument for smoking. The specification also includes indicators for birth orders, weight gains and medical risk factors. Robust standard errors are reported in parentheses.\n\n80" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7960367859820964, + "doc_id": "c59ce1a047c28412fe03715424d4186d639c6736ee9beecabc25b803699e9891", + "edit_distance": 0.18677685950413223, + "f1_score": 0.9352818371607518, + "meteor": 0.8428983194791159, + "precision": 0.9531914893617022, + "pred_md": "written as\n\n\n\nThe first trimester of pregnancy has received particular attention in the medical literature on the effects of smoking. Mainous and Hueston (1994) demonstrated that smokers who quit smoking within the first trimester showed reductions in the proportion of preterm deliveries and low birth weight infants, compared with those who smoked beyond the first trimester. Also, Fingerhut et al. (1990) showed that approximately 70% of women who quit smoking during pregnancy do so as soon as they are aware of their pregnancy, which is mostly the first trimester of pregnancy.\n\nI take only singleton births into account and focus on births to mothers who are white, Hispanic or black, and whose age is between 15 and 44. The covariates that I use to control for observed characteristics include mothers' race, education, age, martial status, birth year, sex of the baby, the 'Kessner' prenatal care index, pregnancy history, information on various diseases such as anemia, cardiac, diabete alcohol use, etc. 16\n\nDescriptive statistics for this sample are reported in Table 3. After the tax increase, the smoking rate of pregnant women decreased from 23% to 16%. As expected, babies of nonsmokers are on average heavier than babies of smokers by 214 grams and furthermore, nonsmokers' infant birth weight stochastically dominate smokers' infant birth weight as shown in Figure 14. Also, smokers are on average 1.63 years younger, 1.27 years less educated than nonsmokers, and less likely to have adequate prenatal care in the Kessner index. Regarding race, black or Hispanic pregnant women are less likely to smoke than white women.\n\n## 5.4 Estimation\n\nUsing the earlier notation, let Y be observed infant birth weight and D the nonsmoking indicator defined as\n\n\n\nIn addition, let D z denote a potential nonsmoking indicator given Z = z. Let Y 0 be the potential infant birth weight if the mother is a smoker, while Y 1 the potential infant birth weight if the mother is not a smoker. As defined in (14), Z is a tax increase indicator during the first trimester. The k × 1 vector X of covariates consists of binary indicators for mother's race, age, education, marital status, birth order, sex of the baby, 'Kessner' prenatal care index, drinking status, and medical risk factors. Since the treatment\n\n16 As an index measure for the quality of prenatal care, the Kessner index is calculated based on month of pregnancy care started, number of prenatal visits, and length of gestation. If the value 1 in the Kessner index indicates 'adequate' prenatal care, while the value 2 and the value 3 indicate 'intermediate' and 'inadequate' prenatal care, respectively. For details, see Abrevaya (2006).\n\n35", + "recall": 0.9180327868852459, + "true_md": "$$Z =      1 , if a baby is conceived in Oct. 1992 or later 0 , if a baby is conceived before Oct. 1992 (14)$$\n\nwritten as\n\nThe first trimester of pregnancy has received particular attention in the medical literature on the effects of smoking. Mainous and Hueston (1994) demonstrated that smokers who quit smoking within the first trimester showed reductions in the proportion of preterm deliveries and low birth weight infants, compared with those who smoked beyond the first trimester. Also, Fingerhut et al. (1990) showed that approximately 70% of women who quit smoking during pregnancy do so as soon as they are aware of their pregnancy, which is mostly the first trimester of pregnancy.\n\nI take only singleton births into account and focus on births to mothers who are white, Hispanic or black, and whose age is between 15 and 44. The covariates that I use to control for observed characteristics include mothers’ race, education, age, martial status, birth year, sex of the baby, the ”Kessner” prenatal care index, pregnancy history, information on various diseases such as anemia, cardiac, diabete alcohol use, etc. 16\n\nDescriptive statistics for this sample are reported in Table 3. After the tax increase, the smoking rate of pregnant women decreased from 23% to 16%. As expected, babies of nonsmokers are on average heavier than babies of smokers by 214 grams and furthermore, nonsmokers’ infant birth weight stochastically dominate smokers’ infant birth weight as shown in Figure 14. Also, smokers are on average 1.63 years younger, 1.27 years less educated than nonsmokers, and less likely to have adequate prenatal care in the Kessner index. Regarding race, black or Hispanic pregnant women are less likely to smoke than white women.\n\nUsing the earlier notation, let Y be observed infant birth weight and D the nonsmoking indicator defined as \n\nIn addition, let D$_{z}$ denote a potential nonsmoking indicator given Z = z. Let Y$_{0}$ be the potential infant birth weight if the mother is a smoker, while Y$_{1}$ the potential infant birth weight if the mother is not a smoker. As defined in (14), Z is a tax increase indicator during the first trimester. The k × 1 vector X of covariates consists of binary indicators for mother’s race, age, education, marital status, birth order, sex of the baby, ”Kessner” prenatal care index, drinking status, and medical risk factors. Since the treatment\n\n## 5.4 Estimation\n\n$$D =      1 , for a nonsmoker 0 , for a smoker$$\n\n$^{16}$As an index measure for the quality of prenatal care, the Kessner index is calculated based on month of pregnancy care started, number of prenatal visits, and length of gestation. If the value 1 in the Kessner index indicates ’adequate’ prenatal care, while the value 2 and the value 3 indicate ’intermediate’ and ’inadequate’ prenatal care, respectively. For details, see Abrevaya (2006).\n\n35" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8809264358851063, + "doc_id": "b5fe3861503fecbca771f37fecf938e299b908e008e52fb292a3456996270c45", + "edit_distance": 0.08450704225352113, + "f1_score": 0.9735099337748344, + "meteor": 0.9432405889287699, + "precision": 0.9865771812080537, + "pred_md": "28\n\nTABLE II: Low lying masses of the spectrum (zero modes and first two KK excitations) for the model in the RS limit, with the following parameter choice: k = 6 6 . · 10 18 GeV , kπR = 35 , ¯ g 5 = 1 , naive unitarity cut-off equal to 19 · 10 3 GeV .\n\nTABLE III: Low lying masses of the spectrum (zero modes and first two KK excitations) for the model in the RS limit, with the following parameter choice: k = 4 7 . · 10 18 GeV , kπR = 10 , ¯ g 5 = 1 , naive unitarity cut-off equal to 34 · 10 3 GeV .\n\nThe qualitative analysis made for the flat case generalizes almost verbatim to the AdS case. The main difference is the typical distance between two adjacent eigenstates, which is given by ∆ M rather than simply by 1 /R . In Tables II and III, we show examples of spectra corresponding to particular choices of the model parameters. It is interesting to compare this situation to the one of flat case; even though the masses of the first KK level in each sector are roughly the same, the appearance of the second KK level is delayed to a much higher scale.\n\nAlso in this case, we have checked the model against EW precision data using the /epsilon1 parameters. In Fig. 5, we show the allowed region at 95% C.L. in parameter space ( M ,g 1 ¯ ); 5 experimental data and SM radiative correction are the same of the flat case. The regions slightly depend on the choice of kπR ; here we have chosen kπR = 35; Fig. 5 also reports contours that correspond to different values of the naive unitarity cut-off, (81) . Notice that", + "recall": 0.9607843137254902, + "true_md": "28\n\nTABLE II: Low lying masses of the spectrum (zero modes and first two KK excitations) for the model in the RS limit, with the following parameter choice: k = 6 . 6 · 10 18 GeV , kπR = 35 , ¯ g$_{5}$ = 1 , naive unitarity cut-off equal to 19 · 10 3 GeV .\n\nTABLE III: Low lying masses of the spectrum (zero modes and first two KK excitations) for the model in the RS limit, with the following parameter choice: k = 4 . 7 · 10 18 GeV , kπR = 10 , ¯ g$_{5}$ = 1 , naive unitarity cut-off equal to 34 · 10 3 GeV .\n\nThe qualitative analysis made for the flat case generalizes almost verbatim to the AdS case. The main difference is the typical distance between two adjacent eigenstates, which is given by Δ M rather than simply by 1 /R . In Tables II and III, we show examples of spectra corresponding to particular choices of the model parameters. It is interesting to compare this situation to the one of flat case; even though the masses of the first KK level in each sector are roughly the same, the appearance of the second KK level is delayed to a much higher scale.\n\nAlso in this case, we have checked the model against EW precision data using the ϵ parameters. In Fig. 5, we show the allowed region at 95% C.L. in parameter space ( M$_{1}$, ¯ g$_{5}$ ); experimental data and SM radiative correction are the same of the flat case. The regions slightly depend on the choice of kπR ; here we have chosen kπR = 35; Fig. 5 also reports contours that correspond to different values of the naive unitarity cut-off, (81) . Notice that" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9507688855631048, + "doc_id": "b843415326a169c78d1ded83114659a7ee8a5ef3ac9930bdc64f4ec42467a541", + "edit_distance": 0.013745704467353952, + "f1_score": 0.9923664122137404, + "meteor": 0.9862516880391438, + "precision": 0.9923664122137404, + "pred_md": "TABLE I: Third and fourth moments of the position distribution of the piston, obtained from the simulations. The position /lscript is given in the dimensionless scale defined in Eq. (6).\n\nparameters within the ranges mentioned above, although it seems that a small but systematic deviation shows up as the mass of the piston M becomes smaller, approaching the mass of the particles. A possible explanation for this behavior is that, as the mass of the piston decreases, the amplitude of its position fluctuations increases, and the effect of the external gravitational field breaks the symmetry of the fluctuations around the average position. To check this idea and to quantify the deviations from the Gaussian of the position fluctuations, the third and fourth moments of /lscript have been computed from the simulation data. The results for some of the simulations are given in Table I. For a Gaussian distribution it is < /lscript 3 > = 0 and < /lscript 4 > = 3. The deviations of the third moment from the Gaussian value are much stronger than those of the fourth one, supporting the idea that the main cause of the deviation from the Gaussian is due to the symmetry breaking produced by the external field, when the mass of the piston is not much larger than the mass of the particles. In any case, the deviations are rather weak and it can be concluded that, in the explored parameter region, the position fluctuations of the piston can be considered as Gaussian with a very good accuracy.\n\n8", + "recall": 0.9923664122137404, + "true_md": "TABLE I: Third and fourth moments of the position distribution of the piston, obtained from the simulations. The position ℓ is given in the dimensionless scale defined in Eq. (6).\n\nparameters within the ranges mentioned above, although it seems that a small but systematic deviation shows up as the mass of the piston M becomes smaller, approaching the mass of the particles. A possible explanation for this behavior is that, as the mass of the piston decreases, the amplitude of its position fluctuations increases, and the effect of the external gravitational field breaks the symmetry of the fluctuations around the average position. To check this idea and to quantify the deviations from the Gaussian of the position fluctuations, the third and fourth moments of ℓ have been computed from the simulation data. The results for some of the simulations are given in Table I. For a Gaussian distribution it is < ℓ 3 > = 0 and < ℓ 4 > = 3. The deviations of the third moment from the Gaussian value are much stronger than those of the fourth one, supporting the idea that the main cause of the deviation from the Gaussian is due to the symmetry breaking produced by the external field, when the mass of the piston is not much larger than the mass of the particles. In any case, the deviations are rather weak and it can be concluded that, in the explored parameter region, the position fluctuations of the piston can be considered as Gaussian with a very good accuracy.\n\n8" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.289962246957011, + "doc_id": "cdd2c9a85899b86479d3e0138e495aa53cc4bb02ce5d948b1beb1ce88b4956eb", + "edit_distance": 0.5552763819095478, + "f1_score": 0.9046321525885559, + "meteor": 0.46169050035197423, + "precision": 0.9485714285714286, + "pred_md": "## I. INTRODUCTION\n\nNeutral B -meson mixing is a sensitive probe of quark flavor-changing interactions. When combined with experimental measurements of the B 0 d and B 0 s oscillation frequencies, precise QCD determinations of the B 0 d and B 0 s -mixing hadronic matrix elements allow clean determinations of the Cabibbo-Kobayashi-Maskawa (CKM) [1, 2] matrix elements | V td | and | V ts | with all sources of systematic uncertainty under control. In the Standard Model, the mass-difference of the neutral B -meson mass eigenstates ∆ m q (often called the oscillation frequency) is given by [3, 4]\n\n\n\nwhere q ∈ { d, s } . Both the Inami-Lim function S 0 ( x t ) with x t = m /m 2 t 2 W [5] and the QCD coefficient η B can be computed in perturbation theory [3]. The hadronic contribution to the ∆ B = 2 mixing matrix element,\n\nmust be calculated nonperturbatively from first principles using lattice QCD.\n\n\n\nThe hadronic matrix element M q is conventionally parametrized as\n\n\n\nwhere m B q is the mass of the B -meson, f B q is the B -meson decay constant and B B q is the B -meson bag parameter. Many statistical and systematic uncertainties from lattice calculations cancel in the SU (3)-breaking ratio M M s / d , which would be one in the limit m d → m s . It is therefore convenient and conventional to introduce the quantity\n\nGiven improved lattice calculations of the nonperturbative factor ξ , recent experimental measurements of the oscillation frequencies ∆ m d and ∆ m s to about 1% accuracy [6-9] now allow the possibility of precisely determining the ratio of the CKM matrix elements | V td | / V | ts | (see, for example, Ref. [10]).\n\n\n\nThe ratio | V td | / V | ts | constrains the apex of the CKM unitarity triangle [11, 12]. It is likely that new physics would give rise to new quark-flavor changing interactions and additional\n\n3", + "recall": 0.8645833333333334, + "true_md": "## I. INTRODUCTION\n\nNeutral B -meson mixing is a sensitive probe of quark flavor-changing interactions. When combined with experimental measurements of the B 0 d and B 0 s oscillation frequencies, pre- cise QCD determinations of the B 0 d and B 0 $_{s}$-mixing hadronic matrix elements allow clean determinations of the Cabibbo-Kobayashi-Maskawa (CKM) [1, 2] matrix elements | V$_{td}$ | and | V$_{ts}$ | with all sources of systematic uncertainty under control. In the Standard Model, the mass-difference of the neutral B -meson mass eigenstates Δ m$_{q}$ (often called the oscillation frequency) is given by [3, 4]\n\nwhere q ∈ { d, s } . Both the Inami–Lim function S$_{0}$ ( x$_{t}$ ) with x$_{t}$ = m 2 $_{t}$/m 2 W [5] and the QCD coefficient η$_{B}$ can be computed in perturbation theory [3]. The hadronic contribution to the Δ B = 2 mixing matrix element,\n\nmust be calculated nonperturbatively from first principles using lattice QCD.\n\nThe hadronic matrix element M q is conventionally parametrized as\n\nwhere m$_{B}$$\\_{q}$ is the mass of the B -meson, f$\\_{B}$$_{q}$ is the B -meson decay constant and B$_{B}$$\\_{q}$ is the B -meson bag parameter. Many statistical and systematic uncertainties from lattice calculations cancel in the SU (3)-breaking ratio M $\\_{s}$/ M $\\_{d}$, which would be one in the limit m$\\_{d}$ → m$\\_{s}$ . It is therefore convenient and conventional to introduce the quantity √\n\nGiven improved lattice calculations of the nonperturbative factor ξ , recent experimental measurements of the oscillation frequencies Δ m$_{d}$ and Δ m$_{s}$ to about 1% accuracy [6–9] now allow the possibility of precisely determining the ratio of the CKM matrix elements | V$_{td}$ | / | V$_{ts}$ | (see, for example, Ref. [10]).\n\nThe ratio | V$_{td}$ | / | V$_{ts}$ | constrains the apex of the CKM unitarity triangle [11, 12]. It is likely that new physics would give rise to new quark-flavor changing interactions and additional\n\n3\n\n$$ξ ≡ f$_{B}$$_{s}$ √ B$_{B}$$_{s}$ f$_{B}$$_{d}$ B$_{B}$$_{d}$ . (4)$$\n\n$$M q = 8 3 m 2 $_{B$_{q}$}$f 2 $_{B$_{q}$}$B$_{B}$$_{q}$ , (3)$$\n\n$$M q = 〈 B 0 q ∣ [ bγ $^{µ}$(1 − γ$_{5}$ ) q ][ bγ$_{µ}$ (1 − γ$_{5}$ ) q ] ∣ B 0 q 〉 , (2)$$\n\n$$Δ m$_{q}$ = G 2 $_{F}$m 2 W 16 π $^{2}$m$_{B}$$_{q}$ | V ∗ $_{tq}$V$_{tb}$ | $^{2}$S$_{0}$ ( x$_{t}$ ) η$_{B}$ M $_{q}$, (1)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8156978059198874, + "doc_id": "aea3fb03c2d22c2081024793f1f186bd57e3e0dbcb5a6f6b6d6a88783030b218", + "edit_distance": 0.4652173913043478, + "f1_score": 0.9735849056603774, + "meteor": 0.8831872745601409, + "precision": 0.9847328244274809, + "pred_md": "There is an underlying continuum in the high excitation-energy region in the spectrum; it is reasonable to assume that this continuum, remaining after elimination of the instrumental background, is primarily due to contributions from excitation of the higher multipoles and quasifree knockout processes [44].\n\nFIG. 3: Excitation-energy spectra obtained from inelastic α scattering at θ lab = 0.69 · for all even-A Sn isotopes.\n\nFIG. 3: Excitation-energy spectra obtained from inelastic α scattering at θ lab = 0.69 · for all even-A Sn isotopes.\n\n/s120\n\n## III. DATA ANALYSIS\n\nWe have employed the MDA procedure [25] to extract the strengths of the isoscalar giant monopole resonance (ISGMR), the isoscalar giant dipole resonance (ISGDR), the isoscalar giant quadrupole resonance (ISGQR), and the high-energy octupole resonance (HEOR) in the Sn isotopes. The cross-section data were binned into 1-MeV energy intervals to reduce the statistical fluctuations. For each excitation energy bin from 8.5 MeV to 31.5 MeV, the experimental 17-point angular distribution dσ exp d Ω ( θ cm , E x ) has been fitted by means of the least-square method with the linear combination of calculated distributions dσ cal L d Ω ( θ cm , E x )\n\n7", + "recall": 0.9626865671641791, + "true_md": "There is an underlying continuum in the high excitation-energy region in the spectrum; it is reasonable to assume that this continuum, remaining after elimination of the instrumental background, is primarily due to contributions from excitation of the higher multipoles and quasifree knockout processes [44].\n\nWe have employed the MDA procedure [25] to extract the strengths of the isoscalar giant monopole resonance (ISGMR), the isoscalar giant dipole resonance (ISGDR), the isoscalar giant quadrupole resonance (ISGQR), and the high-energy octupole resonance (HEOR) in the Sn isotopes. The cross-section data were binned into 1-MeV energy intervals to reduce the statistical fluctuations. For each excitation energy bin from 8.5 MeV to 31.5 MeV, the experimental 17-point angular distribution dσ exp d Ω ( θ$_{cm}$, E$_{x}$ ) has been fitted by means of the least-square method with the linear combination of calculated distributions dσ cal L d Ω ( θ$_{cm}$, E$_{x}$ )\n\nFIG. 3: Excitation-energy spectra obtained from inelastic α scattering at θ$_{lab}$ = 0.69 ◦ for all even-A Sn isotopes.\n\n## III. DATA ANALYSIS\n\n7" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.3947330208361956, + "doc_id": "f578082b4b5c0aa1ad34098d8cacf8d35ef445e992e2f5568804c9f648f561ae", + "edit_distance": 0.5824436536180309, + "f1_score": 0.972972972972973, + "meteor": 0.5711748053394277, + "precision": 0.989010989010989, + "pred_md": "pseudoscalar meson masses and decay constants. We can therefore estimate the effect of the incorrect strange sea-quark mass on f B s /f B d and ξ based on observations in the light pseudoscalar meson sector. Preliminary studies by RBC and UKQCD find that reweighting to the physical strange sea-quark mass leads to no statistically significant change in m π and a 2% change in f π [78]. If we assume that the unphysical strange sea-quark mass leads to a 2% error in the decay constants and matrix elements, then it will lead to a 2% × ( m s -m / d ) Λ QCD ∼ 0 4% error in the . SU (3)-breaking ratios f B s /f B d and ξ .\n\n˜ ˜ In order to obtain the total systematic error in f B s /f B d and ξ due to the lightand strange-quark masses, we add the three estimates for the light-quark error, the strange valence-quark error, and the strange sea-quark error in quadrature. This leads to an error in f B s /f B d of 0.6% for both the APE and HYP data and an error in ξ of 0.6% (0.5%) for the APE (HYP) data.\n\n## G. Finite-volume errors\n\nWe estimate the uncertainties in the ratios f B s /f B d and ξ due to finite volume effects using one-loop finite-volume HM χ PT. The effect of the finite spatial lattice volume is simply to turn the one-loop integrals that appear in the HM χ PT expressions into sums, which we show in Eqs. (D13)-(D14). It is therefore straightforward to compute the corrections to our data given the parameters of our simulations. We find that the one-loop finite volume corrections are about 1% at our lightest quark mass and even less at heavier masses. We therefore take 1% to be the systematic uncertainty in f B s /f B d and ξ due to the finite spatial lattice volume.\n\n## H. 1 /m b corrections\n\nBecause we work in the static heavy-quark limit, our results for f B s /f B d and ξ neglect relativistic effects due to the finite b -quark mass. We therefore estimate the size of the omitted relativistic corrections using power-counting. The leading 1 /m b corrections to the decay constants and matrix elements are of O (Λ QCD /m b ). Because we are only computing the SU (3)-breaking ratios f B s /f B d and ξ , however, relativistic effects in these quantities are further suppressed by a factor of ( m s -m / d ) Λ QCD . Therefore we expect the relativistic\n\n41", + "recall": 0.9574468085106383, + "true_md": "2% × $^{(}$˜ m$_{s}$ − ˜ m$_{d}$ ) / Λ$_{QCD}$ ∼ 0 . 4% error in the SU (3)-breaking ratios f$_{B}$$\\_{s}$/f$\\_{B}$$_{d}$ and ξ . In order to obtain the total systematic error in f$_{B}$$\\_{s}$/f$\\_{B}$$_{d}$ and ξ due to the light- and strange-quark masses, we add the three estimates for the light-quark error, the strange valence-quark error, and the strange sea-quark error in quadrature. This leads to an error in f$_{B}$$\\_{s}$/f$\\_{B}$$_{d}$ of 0.6% for both the APE and HYP data and an error in ξ of 0.6% (0.5%) for the APE (HYP) data.\n\npseudoscalar meson masses and decay constants. We can therefore estimate the effect of the incorrect strange sea-quark mass on f$_{B}$$\\_{s}$/f$\\_{B}$$_{d}$ and ξ based on observations in the light pseudoscalar meson sector. Preliminary studies by RBC and UKQCD find that reweighting to the physical strange sea-quark mass leads to no statistically significant change in m$_{π}$ and a 2% change in f$_{π}$ [78]. If we assume that the unphysical strange sea-quark mass leads to a 2% error in the decay constants and matrix elements, then it will lead to a 2% × $^{(}$˜ m$_{s}$ − ˜ m$_{d}$ ) / Λ$_{QCD}$ ∼ 0 . 4% error in the SU (3)-breaking ratios f$_{B}$$\\_{s}$/f$\\_{B}$$_{d}$ and ξ . In order to obtain the total systematic error in f$_{B}$$\\_{s}$/f$\\_{B}$$_{d}$ and ξ due to the light- and\n\nWe estimate the uncertainties in the ratios f$_{B}$$\\_{s}$/f$\\_{B}$$_{d}$ and ξ due to finite volume effects using one-loop finite-volume HM χ PT. The effect of the finite spatial lattice volume is simply to turn the one-loop integrals that appear in the HM χ PT expressions into sums, which we show in Eqs. (D13)-(D14). It is therefore straightforward to compute the corrections to our data given the parameters of our simulations. We find that the one-loop finite volume corrections are about 1% at our lightest quark mass and even less at heavier masses. We therefore take 1% to be the systematic uncertainty in f$_{B}$$\\_{s}$/f$\\_{B}$$_{d}$ and ξ due to the finite spatial lattice volume.\n\nBecause we work in the static heavy-quark limit, our results for f$_{B}$$\\_{s}$/f$\\_{B}$$_{d}$ and ξ neglect relativistic effects due to the finite b -quark mass. We therefore estimate the size of the omitted relativistic corrections using power-counting. The leading 1 /m$_{b}$ corrections to the decay constants and matrix elements are of O (Λ$_{QCD}$ /m$_{b}$ ). Because we are only computing the SU (3)-breaking ratios f$_{B}$$\\_{s}$/f$\\_{B}$$_{d}$ and ξ , however, relativistic effects in these quantities are further suppressed by a factor of ( m$_{s}$ − m$_{d}$ ) / Λ$_{QCD}$. Therefore we expect the relativistic\n\n41\n\n## H. 1 /m$_{b}$ corrections\n\n## G. Finite-volume errors" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.40873683193253335, + "doc_id": "2dd7832c0d6778eb3cd77f98e965202540b9f99eb61388285e3aef05994b11a5", + "edit_distance": 0.7214285714285714, + "f1_score": 0.9130434782608695, + "meteor": 0.4756871823778733, + "precision": 0.9417040358744395, + "pred_md": "27\n\naccording to which a model on AdS 5 can be viewed as the dual description of a strongly interacting model on four dimensions. In particular, in AdS/CFT fields localized near the IR brane are interpreted as duals to composite states of the strong sector; in this interpretation the Higgs field is no longer a fundamental field, but only an effective low-energy degree of freedom, just like the KK excitations of the gauge fields.\n\nWith this choice we are in a sense come full circle, since we started my theoretical exploration by considering the GD-BESS model, which gives a 4D low-energy effective description of a strongly interacting sector; we generalized that model first to a moose one, then to a 5-dimensional one; finally, thanks to the AdS/CFT correspondence, we can read the generalized 5D model again as an effective description of a strongly interacting theory.\n\nThe choice b y ( ) = e -2 ky implies (again by eq. (62))\n\n\n\nthe model has now an extra parameter, the curvature k , in addition to the usual πR , ¯ , g 5 ˜, g ˜ , g ' ˜ and v λ . Eqs. (78), (79) and (80) still hold (with the new definition of ¯ M (93)); then, after fixing the standard EW input parameters, we are left with three free quantities, πR and ¯ g 5 and k . Then, if we want this model to be a potential solution to the hierarchy problem, as the RS1 model [5], we need to fix the curvature parameter k to be around the Planck scale, M P /similarequal 10 19 GeV. Then, to have ¯ M around one TeV, we need kπR /similarequal 35.\n\nLet's look at the spectrum again. In this case, the C and S functions (eq. (45)) are given by:\n\n\n\nwhere J i and Y i are Bessel function of the first and of the second kind respectively. In this case, not even the condition for the right charged eigenstates can be solved analytically. However, using standard properties of the Bessel functions it is possible to give an estimate\n\nfor the first eigenvalue,\n\nand for the characteristic spacing between two adjacent states, which is approximately constant and equal to ∆ M = πke -kπR . Notice that for kπR >> 1 the scale given by ¯ M is nothing but M 1 .\n\n", + "recall": 0.8860759493670886, + "true_md": "27\n\naccording to which a model on AdS$_{5}$ can be viewed as the dual description of a strongly interacting model on four dimensions. In particular, in AdS/CFT fields localized near the IR brane are interpreted as duals to composite states of the strong sector; in this interpretation the Higgs field is no longer a fundamental field, but only an effective low-energy degree of freedom, just like the KK excitations of the gauge fields.\n\nWith this choice we are in a sense come full circle, since we started my theoretical explo- ration by considering the GD-BESS model, which gives a 4D low-energy effective description of a strongly interacting sector; we generalized that model first to a moose one, then to a 5-dimensional one; finally, thanks to the AdS/CFT correspondence, we can read the gener- alized 5D model again as an effective description of a strongly interacting theory.\n\nThe choice b ( y ) = e − 2 ky implies (again by eq. (62))\n\n≃ ≃ Let’s look at the spectrum again. In this case, the C and S functions (eq. (45)) are given by:\n\n) ( ) ( )) where J$_{i}$ and Y$_{i}$ are Bessel function of the first and of the second kind respectively. In this case, not even the condition for the right charged eigenstates can be solved analytically. However, using standard properties of the Bessel functions it is possible to give an estimate for the first eigenvalue, $_{2}$√$_{2}$\n\n− and for the characteristic spacing between two adjacent states, which is approximately con- stant and equal to Δ M = πke − $^{kπR}$. Notice that for kπR >> 1 the scale given by ¯ M is nothing but M$_{1}$ .\n\n$$1 ¯ M 2 = 1 4 k 2 ( e 2 $^{kπR}$(2 k $^{2}$( πR ) 2 − 2 kπR + 1) − 1 kπR ) ; (93)$$\n\n$$S ( y, m ) = e ky 2 k π m ( J$_{1}$ ( m k ) Y$_{1}$ ( e $^{ky}$m k ) − J$_{1}$ ( e $^{ky}$m k ) Y$_{1}$ ( m k ) C ( y, m ) = e ky 2 k π m J$_{1}$ e $^{ky}$m k ) Y$_{0}$ ( m k − J$_{0}$ m k ) Y$_{1}$ ( e $^{ky}$m k )) , (94) are Bessel function of the first and of the second kind respectively. In this$$\n\n$$M$_{1}$ ≃ $_{k e}$− kπR $_{2}$√$_{2}$ √$_{4}$$_{kπR}$ − 3 , (95) and for the characteristic spacing between two adjacent states, which is approximately con-$$\n\nthe model has now an extra parameter, the curvature k , in addition to the usual πR , ¯ g$_{5}$ , ˜ g , ˜ g ′ , ˜ v and λ . Eqs. (78), (79) and (80) still hold (with the new definition of ¯ M (93)); then, after fixing the standard EW input parameters, we are left with three free quantities, πR and ¯ g$_{5}$ and k . Then, if we want this model to be a potential solution to the hierarchy problem, as the RS1 model [5], we need to fix the curvature parameter k to be around the Planck scale, M$_{P}$ ≃ 10 19 GeV. Then, to have ¯ M around one TeV, we need kπR ≃ 35. Let’s look at the spectrum again. In this case, the C and S functions (eq. (45)) are given" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7854538920760683, + "doc_id": "2dfde198bd83c22a0f99a3321c093f5ef6ecc6dd14364ef1e7bba5e98aa8112f", + "edit_distance": 0.10570469798657718, + "f1_score": 0.8617886178861788, + "meteor": 0.8961825601664543, + "precision": 0.8688524590163934, + "pred_md": "- [20] C. Tomlinson, 'On the motion of certain liquids on the surface of water,' Phil. Mag. Ser. 4 39 , 32-48 (1870).\n- [21] C. G. Marangoni, 'Ueber die Ausbreitung der Tropfen einer Flussigkeit auf der Oberflache einer anderen,' Ann. Phys. (Poggendorf) 143 , 337-354 (1871).\n- [22] O. Karthaus, L. Grasj¨, N. Maruyama, and M. Shimomura, 'Formation of ordered mesoscopic polyo mer arrays by dewetting,' Chaos 9 , 308-314 (1999).\n- [23] X. Gu, D. Raghavan, J. F. Douglas, and A. Karim, 'Hole-growth instability in the dewetting of evaporating polymer solution films,' J. Polym. Sci. Pt. B-Polym. Phys. 40 , 2825-2832 (2002).\n- [24] S. W. Hong, J. F. Xia, and Z. Q. Lin, 'Spontaneous formation of mesoscale polymer patterns in an evaporating bound solution,' Adv. Mater. 19 , 1413-1417 (2007).\n- [25] G. Liu, C. F. Zhang, J. Zhao, and Y. X. Zhu, 'Study of the morphology of the three-phase contact line and its evolution by morphological examination after droplet evaporation of aqueous polymer solutions,' Langmuir 24 , 7923-7930 (2008).\n- [26] M. Mertig, U. Thiele, J. Bradt, G. Leibiger, W. Pompe, and H. Wendrock, 'Scanning force microscopy and geometrical analysis of two-dimensional collagen network formation,' Surface and Interface Analysis 25 , 514-521 (1997).\n- [27] M. Mertig, U. Thiele, J. Bradt, D. Klemm, and W. Pompe, 'Dewetting of thin collagenous precursor films,' Appl. Phys. A 66 , S565-S568 (1998).\n- [28] U. Thiele, M. Mertig, and W. Pompe, 'Dewetting of an evaporating thin liquid film: Heterogeneous nucleation and surface instability,' Phys. Rev. Lett. 80 , 2869-2872 (1998).\n- [29] H. Maeda, 'An atomic force microscopy study of ordered molecular assemblies and concentric ring patterns from evaporating droplets of collagen solutions,' Langmuir 15 , 8505-8513 (1999).\n- [30] I. I. Smalyukh, O. V. Zribi, J. C. Butler, O. D. Lavrentovich, and G. C. L. Wong, 'Structure and dynamics of liquid crystalline pattern formation in drying droplets of DNA,' Phys. Rev. Lett. 96 , 177801 (2006).\n- [31] L. Zhang, S. Maheshwari, H. C. Chang, and Y. X. Zhu, 'Evaporative self-assembly from complex DNA-colloid suspensions,' Langmuir 24 , 3911-3917 (2008).\n- [32] M. Maillard, L. Motte, A. T. Ngo, and M. P. Pileni, 'Rings and hexagons made of nanocrystals: A Marangoni effect,' J. Phys. Chem. B 104 , 11871-11877 (2000).\n- [33] G. L. Ge and L. Brus, 'Evidence for spinodal phase separation in two-dimensional nanocrystal selfassembly,' J. Phys. Chem. B 104 , 9573-9575 (2000).\n\n27", + "recall": 0.8548387096774194, + "true_md": "- [20] C. Tomlinson, “On the motion of certain liquids on the surface of water,” Phil. Mag. Ser. 4 39 , 32–48 (1870).\n\n- [21] C. G. Marangoni, “Ueber die Ausbreitung der Tropfen einer Fl¨ussigkeit auf der Oberfl¨ache einer anderen,” Ann. Phys. (Poggendorf) 143 , 337–354 (1871).\n\n- [22] O. Karthaus, L. Grasj¨o, N. Maruyama, and M. Shimomura, “Formation of ordered mesoscopic poly- mer arrays by dewetting,” Chaos 9 , 308–314 (1999).\n\n- [23] X. Gu, D. Raghavan, J. F. Douglas, and A. Karim, “Hole-growth instability in the dewetting of evaporating polymer solution films,” J. Polym. Sci. Pt. B-Polym. Phys. 40 , 2825–2832 (2002).\n\n- [24] S. W. Hong, J. F. Xia, and Z. Q. Lin, “Spontaneous formation of mesoscale polymer patterns in an evaporating bound solution,” Adv. Mater. 19 , 1413–1417 (2007).\n\n- [25] G. Liu, C. F. Zhang, J. Zhao, and Y. X. Zhu, “Study of the morphology of the three-phase contact line and its evolution by morphological examination after droplet evaporation of aqueous polymer solutions,” Langmuir 24 , 7923–7930 (2008).\n\n- [26] M. Mertig, U. Thiele, J. Bradt, G. Leibiger, W. Pompe, and H. Wendrock, “Scanning force mi- croscopy and geometrical analysis of two-dimensional collagen network formation,” Surface and Interface Analysis 25 , 514–521 (1997).\n\n- [27] M. Mertig, U. Thiele, J. Bradt, D. Klemm, and W. Pompe, “Dewetting of thin collagenous precursor films,” Appl. Phys. A 66 , S565–S568 (1998).\n\n- [28] U. Thiele, M. Mertig, and W. Pompe, “Dewetting of an evaporating thin liquid film: Heterogeneous nucleation and surface instability,” Phys. Rev. Lett. 80 , 2869–2872 (1998).\n\n- [29] H. Maeda, “An atomic force microscopy study of ordered molecular assemblies and concentric ring patterns from evaporating droplets of collagen solutions,” Langmuir 15 , 8505–8513 (1999).\n\n- [30] I. I. Smalyukh, O. V. Zribi, J. C. Butler, O. D. Lavrentovich, and G. C. L. Wong, “Structure and dynamics of liquid crystalline pattern formation in drying droplets of DNA,” Phys. Rev. Lett. 96 , 177801 (2006).\n\n- [31] L. Zhang, S. Maheshwari, H. C. Chang, and Y. X. Zhu, “Evaporative self-assembly from complex DNA-colloid suspensions,” Langmuir 24 , 3911–3917 (2008).\n\n- [32] M. Maillard, L. Motte, A. T. Ngo, and M. P. Pileni, “Rings and hexagons made of nanocrystals: A Marangoni effect,” J. Phys. Chem. B 104 , 11871–11877 (2000).\n\n- [33] G. L. Ge and L. Brus, “Evidence for spinodal phase separation in two-dimensional nanocrystal self- assembly,” J. Phys. Chem. B 104 , 9573–9575 (2000).\n\n27" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.986479440227323, + "doc_id": "8309f5c2cc24d52433c3ed24a1a3634a7a86889bd1bd2123a5876c939112ba09", + "edit_distance": 0.00894187779433681, + "f1_score": 0.9806763285024155, + "meteor": 0.9915013085412934, + "precision": 0.9854368932038835, + "pred_md": "- [23] S. R. Sharpe and Y. Zhang, Phys. Rev. D53 , 5125 (1996), hep-lat/9510037.\n- [24] C. Bernard, J. Laiho, and R. S. Van de Water, private communication .\n- [25] M. Della Morte, A. Shindler, and R. Sommer (ALPHA), JHEP 08 , 051 (2005), heplat/0506008.\n- [26] M. Della Morte et al. (ALPHA), Phys. Lett. B581 , 93 (2004), hep-lat/0307021.\n- [27] M. Albanese et al. (APE), Phys. Lett. B192 , 163 (1987).\n- [28] M. Falcioni, M. L. Paciello, G. Parisi, and B. Taglienti, Nucl. Phys. B251 , 624 (1985).\n- [29] A. Hasenfratz and F. Knechtli, Phys. Rev. D64 , 034504 (2001), hep-lat/0103029.\n- [30] E. Eichten and B. Hill, Phys. Lett. B234 , 511 (1990).\n- [31] D. Becirevic and J. Reyes, Nucl. Phys. Proc. Suppl. 129 , 435 (2004), hep-lat/0309131.\n- [32] O. Loktik and T. Izubuchi, Phys. Rev. D75 , 034504 (2007), hep-lat/0612022.\n- [33] V. Gadiyak and O. Loktik, Phys. Rev. D72 , 114504 (2005), hep-lat/0509075.\n- [34] C. Allton et al. (RBC-UKQCD), Phys. Rev. D78 , 114509 (2008), arXiv:0804.0473.\n- [35] S. Aoki et al. (PACS-CS), Phys. Rev. D79 , 034503 (2009), arXiv:0807.1661.\n- [36] D. Kadoh et al. (PACS-CS) (2008), arXiv:0810.0351.\n- [37] A. Bazavov et al. (MILC), PoS LAT2009 , 077 (2009), arXiv:0911.0472.\n- [38] T. Ishikawa, Y. Aoki, T. T. Dumitrescu, J. M. Flynn, T. Izubuchi, and O. Loktik, in preparation .\n- [39] Y. Iwasaki, UTHEP-118 (1983).\n- [40] A. Ali Khan et al. (CP-PACS), Phys. Rev. D63 , 114504 (2001), hep-lat/0007014.\n- [41] Y. Aoki et al., Phys. Rev. D69 , 074504 (2004), hep-lat/0211023.\n- [42] K. G. Wilson, Phys. Rev. D10 , 2445 (1974).\n- [43] D. J. Antonio et al. (RBC and UKQCD), Phys. Rev. D77 , 014509 (2008), arXiv:0705.2340.\n- [44] E. Eichten and B. Hill, Phys. Lett. B240 , 193 (1990).\n- [45] W.-J. Lee, Phys. Rev. D66 , 114504 (2002), hep-lat/0208032.\n- [46] W. Kamleh, D. B. Leinweber, and A. G. Williams, Phys. Rev. D70 , 014502 (2004), heplat/0403019.\n- [47] G. S. Bali and K. Schilling, Phys. Rev. D46 , 2636 (1992).\n- [48] X.-D. Ji and M. J. Musolf, Phys. Lett. B257 , 409 (1991).\n- [49] D. J. Broadhurst and A. G. Grozin, Phys. Lett. B267 , 105 (1991), hep-ph/9908362.\n- [50] J. M. Flynn, O. F. Hernandez, and B. R. Hill, Phys. Rev. D43 , 3709 (1991).\n\n58", + "recall": 0.9759615384615384, + "true_md": "- [23] S. R. Sharpe and Y. Zhang, Phys. Rev. D53 , 5125 (1996), hep-lat/9510037.\n\n- [24] C. Bernard, J. Laiho, and R. S. Van de Water, private communication .\n\n- [25] M. Della Morte, A. Shindler, and R. Sommer (ALPHA), JHEP 08 , 051 (2005), hep- lat/0506008.\n\n- [26] M. Della Morte et al. (ALPHA), Phys. Lett. B581 , 93 (2004), hep-lat/0307021.\n\n- [27] M. Albanese et al. (APE), Phys. Lett. B192 , 163 (1987).\n\n- [28] M. Falcioni, M. L. Paciello, G. Parisi, and B. Taglienti, Nucl. Phys. B251 , 624 (1985).\n\n- [29] A. Hasenfratz and F. Knechtli, Phys. Rev. D64 , 034504 (2001), hep-lat/0103029.\n\n- [30] E. Eichten and B. Hill, Phys. Lett. B234 , 511 (1990).\n\n- [31] D. Becirevic and J. Reyes, Nucl. Phys. Proc. Suppl. 129 , 435 (2004), hep-lat/0309131.\n\n- [32] O. Loktik and T. Izubuchi, Phys. Rev. D75 , 034504 (2007), hep-lat/0612022.\n\n- [33] V. Gadiyak and O. Loktik, Phys. Rev. D72 , 114504 (2005), hep-lat/0509075.\n\n- [34] C. Allton et al. (RBC-UKQCD), Phys. Rev. D78 , 114509 (2008), arXiv:0804.0473.\n\n- [35] S. Aoki et al. (PACS-CS), Phys. Rev. D79 , 034503 (2009), arXiv:0807.1661.\n\n- [36] D. Kadoh et al. (PACS-CS) (2008), arXiv:0810.0351.\n\n- [37] A. Bazavov et al. (MILC), PoS LAT2009 , 077 (2009), arXiv:0911.0472.\n\n- [38] T. Ishikawa, Y. Aoki, T. T. Dumitrescu, J. M. Flynn, T. Izubuchi, and O. Loktik, in prepa- ration .\n\n- [39] Y. Iwasaki, UTHEP-118 (1983).\n\n- [40] A. Ali Khan et al. (CP-PACS), Phys. Rev. D63 , 114504 (2001), hep-lat/0007014.\n\n- [41] Y. Aoki et al., Phys. Rev. D69 , 074504 (2004), hep-lat/0211023.\n\n- [42] K. G. Wilson, Phys. Rev. D10 , 2445 (1974).\n\n- [43] D. J. Antonio et al. (RBC and UKQCD), Phys. Rev. D77 , 014509 (2008), arXiv:0705.2340.\n\n- [44] E. Eichten and B. Hill, Phys. Lett. B240 , 193 (1990).\n\n- [45] W.-J. Lee, Phys. Rev. D66 , 114504 (2002), hep-lat/0208032.\n\n- [46] W. Kamleh, D. B. Leinweber, and A. G. Williams, Phys. Rev. D70 , 014502 (2004), hep- lat/0403019.\n\n- [47] G. S. Bali and K. Schilling, Phys. Rev. D46 , 2636 (1992).\n\n- [48] X.-D. Ji and M. J. Musolf, Phys. Lett. B257 , 409 (1991).\n\n- [49] D. J. Broadhurst and A. G. Grozin, Phys. Lett. B267 , 105 (1991), hep-ph/9908362.\n\n- [50] J. M. Flynn, O. F. Hernandez, and B. R. Hill, Phys. Rev. D43 , 3709 (1991).\n\n58" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6633644285641189, + "doc_id": "458a2ce6aeedc7d6466a5662ebf49f6bd43afcbdac67086d32ac7e6f67248eed", + "edit_distance": 0.4147465437788018, + "f1_score": 0.9351851851851851, + "meteor": 0.794896678049262, + "precision": 0.9439252336448598, + "pred_md": "arXiv:1002.1045v2 [hep-th] 22 Feb 2010\n\n## Slavnov-Taylor identities for noncommutative QED 4\n\nB. Charneski, 1 M. Gomes, 1 T. Mariz, 2 J. R. Nascimento, 3 and A. J. da Silva 1\n\n1\n\nInstituto de F' ısica, Universidade de S˜ ao Paulo\n\nCaixa Postal 66318, 05315-970, S˜ ao Paulo, SP, Brazil ∗ 2 Instituto de F' ısica, Universidade Federal de Alagoas, 57072-270, Macei', Alagoas, Brazil o † 3 Departamento de F' ısica, Universidade Federal da Para' ıba Caixa Postal 5008, 58051-970, Jo˜ ao Pessoa, Para' ıba, Brazil ‡\n\n(Dated: October 29, 2018)\n\n## Abstract\n\nIn this work we present an analysis of the one-loop Slavnov-Taylor identities in noncommutative QED . 4 The vectorial fermion-photon and the triple photon vertex functions were studied, with the conclusion that no anomalies arise.\n\n∗ Electronic address: bruno,mgomes,ajsilva@fma.if.usp.br\n\n† Electronic address: tmariz@if.ufal.br\n\n‡ Electronic address: jroberto@fisica.ufpb.br\n\n1", + "recall": 0.926605504587156, + "true_md": "# Slavnov-Taylor identities for noncommutative QED$_{4}$\n\nB. Charneski, 1 M. Gomes, 1 T. Mariz, 2 J. R. Nascimento, 3 and A. J. da Silva 1\n\n$^{1}$Instituto de F´ısica, Universidade de S˜ ao Paulo Caixa Postal 66318, 05315-970, S˜ ao Paulo, SP, Brazil ∗\n\n$^{2}$Instituto de F´ısica, Universidade Federal de Alagoas, 57072-270, Macei´ o, Alagoas, Brazil †\n\n$^{3}$Departamento de F´ısica, Universidade Federal da Para´ıba Caixa Postal 5008, 58051-970, Jo˜ ao Pessoa, Para´ıba, Brazil ‡\n\n(Dated: October 29, 2018)\n\nIn this work we present an analysis of the one-loop Slavnov-Taylor identities in noncommutative QED$_{4}$. The vectorial fermion-photon and the triple photon vertex functions were studied, with the conclusion that no anomalies arise.\n\n## Abstract\n\narXiv:1002.1045v2 [hep-th] 22 Feb 2010\n\n$^{†}$Electronic address: tmariz@if.ufal.br\n\n$^{∗}$Electronic address: bruno,mgomes,ajsilva@fma.if.usp.br\n\n$^{‡}$Electronic address: jroberto@fisica.ufpb.br\n\n1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8535785795647782, + "doc_id": "c8ba817a31d876a231afa22ca0512e3a87e7b0cb16ea48048eb3c71606f435f4", + "edit_distance": 0.09235668789808917, + "f1_score": 0.9662027833001988, + "meteor": 0.9214424709984848, + "precision": 0.9759036144578314, + "pred_md": "In 2008, Shina Tan derived a number of universal relations for an interacting Fermi gas with short-range, or contact, interactions [1-3]. These relations are very powerful because they connect microscopic quantities, such as the momentum distribution of the fermions, to macroscopic quantities, such as the total energy of the system. Furthermore, the relations are universal in that they do not depend on the details of the interparticle potential that gives rise to the interaction, nor do they depend on the state of the system, which could be an exotic Fermi superfluid, a normal Fermi liquid, or even a simple two-body state such as a diatomic molecule composed of two fermionic atoms. At the heart of the universal relations is a single quantity, which Tan termed the contact. The contact is defined as the amplitude of the highk tail of the momentum distribution n k ( ), which was previously predicted to scale as 1 /k 4 for an interacting Fermi gas [7]. Remarkably, it can be shown that the contact encapsulates all of the many-body physics [6]. Therefore, it is predicted that by measuring this tail of the momentum distribution and then applying universal relations, one could determine many other properties of the system. Two recent papers report the contact for a strongly interacting Fermi gas, extracted from photoassociation measurements [5, 8] and inelastic Bragg spectroscopy [9] and compare the results with theoretical predictions for the BCSBEC crossover. Here, we present a series of measurements that not only measure the contact in the BCS-BEC crossover with two different techniques, but moreover test the Tan relations experimentally by comparing measurements of both microscopic and macroscopic quantities in the same system. Our results directly verify the universal relations by exploiting the fact that while the value of the contact depends on the many-body state and on parameters such as temperature, number density, and interaction strength, the universal relations do not.\n\nOur measurements are done in an ultra cold gas of fermionic 40 K atoms confined in a harmonic trapping potential. We cool the gas to quantum degeneracy in a far-detuned optical dipole trap as described in previous work [10]. The trap is axially symmetric and parameterized by a radial trap frequency, which varies for these data from ω r = 2 π · 230 to 2 π · 260 Hz and an axial trap frequency, which varies from ω z = 2 π · 17 to 2 π · 21 Hz. We obtain a 50 / 50 mixture of atoms in two spin states, namely the | f, m f 〉 = 9 2 | / , -9 / 2 〉 and | 9 / 2 , -7 / 2 〉 states, where f is the total atomic spin and m f is the projection along the magnetic-field axis. Our final stage of evaporation occurs at a magnetic field of 203.5 G, where the s -wave scattering length, a , that characterizes the interactions between atoms in the | 9 / 2 , -9 / 2 〉 and | 9 / 2 , -7 / 2 〉 states is approximately 800 a 0 , where a 0 is the Bohr radius.\n\n2", + "recall": 0.9566929133858267, + "true_md": "In 2008, Shina Tan derived a number of universal relations for an interacting Fermi gas with short-range, or contact, interactions [1–3]. These relations are very powerful because they connect microscopic quantities, such as the momentum distribution of the fermions, to macroscopic quantities, such as the total energy of the system. Furthermore, the relations are universal in that they do not depend on the details of the interparticle potential that gives rise to the interaction, nor do they depend on the state of the system, which could be an exotic Fermi superfluid, a normal Fermi liquid, or even a simple two-body state such as a diatomic molecule composed of two fermionic atoms. At the heart of the universal relations is a single quantity, which Tan termed the contact. The contact is defined as the amplitude of the high- k tail of the momentum distribution n ( k ), which was previously predicted to scale as 1 /k 4 for an interacting Fermi gas [7]. Remarkably, it can be shown that the contact encapsulates all of the many-body physics [6]. Therefore, it is predicted that by measuring this tail of the momentum distribution and then applying universal relations, one could determine many other properties of the system. Two recent papers report the contact for a strongly interacting Fermi gas, extracted from photoassociation measurements [5, 8] and inelastic Bragg spectroscopy [9] and compare the results with theoretical predictions for the BCS- BEC crossover. Here, we present a series of measurements that not only measure the contact in the BCS-BEC crossover with two different techniques, but moreover test the Tan relations experimentally by comparing measurements of both microscopic and macroscopic quantities in the same system. Our results directly verify the universal relations by exploiting the fact that while the value of the contact depends on the many-body state and on parameters such as temperature, number density, and interaction strength, the universal relations do not.\n\nOur measurements are done in an ultra cold gas of fermionic $^{40}$K atoms confined in a harmonic trapping potential. We cool the gas to quantum degeneracy in a far-detuned optical dipole trap as described in previous work [10]. The trap is axially symmetric and parameterized by a radial trap frequency, which varies for these data from ω$_{r}$ = 2 π · 230 to 2 π · 260 Hz and an axial trap frequency, which varies from ω$_{z}$ = 2 π · 17 to 2 π · 21 Hz. We obtain a 50 / 50 mixture of atoms in two spin states, namely the | f, m$_{f}$ 〉 = | 9 / 2 , − 9 / 2 〉 and | 9 / 2 , − 7 / 2 〉 states, where f is the total atomic spin and m$_{f}$ is the projection along the magnetic-field axis. Our final stage of evaporation occurs at a magnetic field of 203.5 G, where the s -wave scattering length, a , that characterizes the interactions between atoms in the | 9 / 2 , − 9 / 2 〉 and | 9 / 2 , − 7 / 2 〉 states is approximately 800 a$_{0}$ , where a$_{0}$ is the Bohr radius.\n\n2" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9370127663928103, + "doc_id": "6501ce1a9d6365e898e02e832bee7a61992f432d4f30b439a75c7adc9a963388", + "edit_distance": 0.04878048780487805, + "f1_score": 0.9860834990059641, + "meteor": 0.9549971708720966, + "precision": 0.992, + "pred_md": "29\n\nof what constitutes a reasonably good observable. Our work has shown that extracting the geometric data requires making judicious choices of these observables. Otherwise, one might find pathological distributions whose averages are infinity entering into the problem when N becomes finite, even though when N is very large they seem to be well behaved. Learning how to avoid pathological measurements requires some trial and error and we gave some examples of how to improve this simple class of observables so that they had better\n\nbehavior.\n\nWe also studied how large were the fluctuations on the observables we chose and how fast the results approached the large N limit. From the data we could analyze, the corrections to large N are controlled by various powers of 1 /N , and some of them seem to be inconsistent with the naive planar counting lore. Surprisingly, the convergence to large N was slower than expected, and the fact that some observables had pathologically large fluctuations renders a lot of the analysis inconclusive: even with N /similarequal 10000, N was not large enough to see a clear pattern emerging from the simulations. From this point of view we have learned a lot about the scale of simulations that would be required to sort out these features with the same procedures in future studies. We should have much larger simulations, with N /similarequal 10 . 6\n\nPart of the reason why such large numbers are required should be obvious to anyone that tries to understand higher dimensional geometries of dimension d by adding a discretized grid approximation to the geometry. If we want to double the spatial resolution, we need a factor of 2 d enhancement on the number of cells. As d becomes larger, this is an issue. A value of N /similarequal 10 4 is small to refine five dimensional geometries by these standards.\n\nClearly, any future study should require smarter and faster algorithms than what we have used so far. We have used a simple Monte Carlo that runs on a single processor for these simulations. Abetter algorithm would involve parallel processing, a faster procedure of generating data sets and it might also require some coarse graining improvements to perform calculations with a study of the consequent systematic errors introduced by approximations.\n\nAnother feature that we discovered is that it is very likely that there are better ways of analyzing the data than what we did. Particularly, features of the data as shown in figure 1 suggest that that the density profile in the various variables is a rich area to explore. If we improve our theoretical understanding of the data this might be exploited to address issues of geometry further. For example, in our analysis the fact that the geometry is a submanifold of R 6 was not crucial. However, it is a robust theoretical feature that should", + "recall": 0.9802371541501976, + "true_md": "29\n\nof what constitutes a reasonably good observable. Our work has shown that extracting the geometric data requires making judicious choices of these observables. Otherwise, one might find pathological distributions whose averages are infinity entering into the problem when N becomes finite, even though when N is very large they seem to be well behaved.\n\nLearning how to avoid pathological measurements requires some trial and error and we gave some examples of how to improve this simple class of observables so that they had better behavior.\n\nWe also studied how large were the fluctuations on the observables we chose and how fast the results approached the large N limit. From the data we could analyze, the corrections to large N are controlled by various powers of 1 /N , and some of them seem to be inconsistent with the naive planar counting lore. Surprisingly, the convergence to large N was slower than expected, and the fact that some observables had pathologically large fluctuations renders a lot of the analysis inconclusive: even with N ≃ 10000, N was not large enough to see a clear pattern emerging from the simulations. From this point of view we have learned a lot about the scale of simulations that would be required to sort out these features with the same procedures in future studies. We should have much larger simulations, with N ≃ 10 $^{6}$. Part of the reason why such large numbers are required should be obvious to anyone that\n\ntries to understand higher dimensional geometries of dimension d by adding a discretized grid approximation to the geometry. If we want to double the spatial resolution, we need a factor of 2 d enhancement on the number of cells. As d becomes larger, this is an issue. A value of N ≃ 10 4 is small to refine five dimensional geometries by these standards. Clearly, any future study should require smarter and faster algorithms than what we\n\n≃ Clearly, any future study should require smarter and faster algorithms than what we have used so far. We have used a simple Monte Carlo that runs on a single processor for these simulations. A better algorithm would involve parallel processing, a faster procedure of generating data sets and it might also require some coarse graining improvements to perform calculations with a study of the consequent systematic errors introduced by approximations.\n\nAnother feature that we discovered is that it is very likely that there are better ways of analyzing the data than what we did. Particularly, features of the data as shown in figure 1 suggest that that the density profile in the various variables is a rich area to explore. If we improve our theoretical understanding of the data this might be exploited to address issues of geometry further. For example, in our analysis the fact that the geometry is a submanifold of R 6 was not crucial. However, it is a robust theoretical feature that should" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6335444868504437, + "doc_id": "d18878f0fcd599cc0fa96934d2e5384a6d241dea7f8e95703de6870cc93836c8", + "edit_distance": 0.5389048991354467, + "f1_score": 0.9266666666666667, + "meteor": 0.7623124050151976, + "precision": 0.9586206896551724, + "pred_md": "FIG. 4: (Color online) Dimensionless relative standard deviation σ Z /L of the position of the movable piston as a function of the mass ratio M/m . The symbols are simulation data and the lines guides for the eye. The two upper curves correspond to α = 0 94, and the two lower ones to . α = 0 98. . In each case, two values of α P have been employed: 0 99 (circles) and 0 8 (triangles). . .\n\nFIG. 4: (Color online) Dimensionless relative standard deviation σ Z /L of the position of the movable piston as a function of the mass ratio M/m . The symbols are simulation data and the lines guides for the eye. The two upper curves correspond to α = 0 94, and the two lower ones to . α = 0 98. . In each case, two values of α P have been employed: 0 99 (circles) and 0 8 (triangles). . .\n\nW can lead to the set up of transversal instabilities, as already mentioned. The notation stresses the constancy of the velocity of the vibrating wall. Although other compressibility coefficients could be defined, the one in (7) has the advantage of being easy to implement in experiments, at least at a conceptual level. On the other hand, it is worth to remark that by keeping v W constant and changing M , both the hydrodynamic profiles inside the fluid and the power injected into it through the vibrating wall are modified. In particular, the latter is given by [19]\n\n\n\nTherefore, increasing M while keeping v W constant produces an increase of the power Q 0 . For the two dimensional systems being considered here, the definition (7) is equivalent to\n\n\n\n12", + "recall": 0.896774193548387, + "true_md": "FIG. 4: (Color online) Dimensionless relative standard deviation σ$_{Z}$/L of the position of the movable piston as a function of the mass ratio M/m . The symbols are simulation data and the lines guides for the eye. The two upper curves correspond to α = 0 . 94, and the two lower ones to α = 0 . 98. In each case, two values of α$_{P}$ have been employed: 0 . 99 (circles) and 0 . 8 (triangles).\n\nW can lead to the set up of transversal instabilities, as already mentioned. The notation stresses the constancy of the velocity of the vibrating wall. Although other compressibility coefficients could be defined, the one in (7) has the advantage of being easy to implement in experiments, at least at a conceptual level. On the other hand, it is worth to remark that by keeping v$_{W}$ constant and changing M , both the hydrodynamic profiles inside the fluid and the power injected into it through the vibrating wall are modified. In particular, the latter is given by [19] ( )\n\nTherefore, increasing M while keeping v$_{W}$ constant produces an increase of the power Q 0 . For the two dimensional systems being considered here, the definition (7) is equivalent to\n\n$$k = − W Lg 0 ( ∂L ∂M )$_{v}$$_{W}$ . (9)$$\n\n$$Q 0 = W ( N$_{z}$ + M mW ) mg 0 v$_{W}$. (8)$$\n\n12" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.40966885961728583, + "doc_id": "740e487fd2daed72a272693fbc13a22edf80cdc3640695491d5b96d01f27ef90", + "edit_distance": 0.5943396226415094, + "f1_score": 0.8818897637795275, + "meteor": 0.7339559229438096, + "precision": 0.9180327868852459, + "pred_md": "FIG. 2: (Color online) The pressure as a function of the quark chemical potential (left panel) and the baryon density (right panel) for the nuclear and quark matter. The EOSs for the quark matter in the 2SC and CFL phases are obtained within the NJL model using GV = 0 with GD = 1 1 . GS and 1 2 . GS . The solid circles on the various EOSs for the nuclear matter indicate the pressure at the center of the neutron star with the canonical mass (1 4 . M /circledot ).\n\nFIG. 2: (Color online) The pressure as a function of the quark chemical potential (left panel) and the baryon density (right panel) for the nuclear and quark matter. The EOSs for the quark matter in the 2SC and CFL phases are obtained within the NJL model using GV = 0 with GD = 1 1 . GS and 1 2 . GS . The solid circles on the various EOSs for the nuclear matter indicate the pressure at the center of the neutron star with the canonical mass (1 4 . M /circledot ).\n\nB\n\n14", + "recall": 0.8484848484848485, + "true_md": "14\n\nFIG. 2: (Color online) The pressure as a function of the quark chemical potential (left panel) and the baryon density (right panel) for the nuclear and quark matter. The EOSs for the quark matter in the 2SC and CFL phases are obtained within the NJL model using G$_{V}$ = 0 with G$_{D}$ = 1 . 1 G$_{S}$ and 1 . 2 G$_{S}$ . The solid circles on the various EOSs for the nuclear matter indicate the pressure at the center of the neutron star with the canonical mass (1 . 4 $^{M}$⊙ )." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9001532211430413, + "doc_id": "4968f25ee244ac788554d59f6ccb1915550d33520055491feec8c562bc818a37", + "edit_distance": 0.05103969754253308, + "f1_score": 0.9284332688588007, + "meteor": 0.9503821907324322, + "precision": 0.9375, + "pred_md": "## I. INTRODUCTION\n\nThe patterns formed in dewetting processes have attracted strong interest since Reiter analysed the process quantitatively in the early nineties. In these experiments, that proved to be a paradigm in our understanding of dewetting, a uniform thin film of polystyrene (tens of nanometers thick) is deposited on a flat silicon oxide substrate is brought above the glass transition temperature. The film ruptures in several places, forming holes which subsequently grow, competing for space. As a result, a random polygonal network of liquid rims emerges. The rims may further decay into lines of small drops due to a Rayleigh-type instability [1-3]. The related problems of retracting contact lines on partially wetting substrates and the opening of single holes in rather thick films have also been studied [4, 5].\n\nSubsequent work has mainly focused on many different aspects of the dewetting process for simple non-volatile liquids and polymers (for reviews see Refs. [6-8]). All stages of the dewetting of a film are studied: the initial film rupture via nucleation or a surface instability (called spinodal dewetting) [1, 9-13], the growth process of individual holes [14-16], the evolution of the resulting hole pattern [3, 13], and the stability of the individual dewetting fronts [17-19]. We note in passing, that descriptions of dewetting patterns may also be found in historic papers, particularly for the dewetting of a liquid film on a liquid substrate. Tomlinson [20, footnote 18 on p. 40] considered turpentine on water and Marangoni [21, p. 352f] oil on water.\n\nMore recently, interest has turned to the dewetting processes of solutions and suspensions. However, these systems have not yet been investigated in any great depth. Such systems are complicated because their behaviour is determined by the interplay between the various solute (or colloid) and solvent transport processes. Furthermore, the solvents that are used often evaporate, i.e., one has to distinguish between 'normal' convective dewetting and evaporative dewetting. A number of experiments have been performed employing (colloidal) solutions of polymers [22-25], macromolecules like collagen and DNA [26-31] and nanoparticles [32-40]. The latter are sometimes referred to as 'nanofluids'. The initial focus of much of the research in the field has been on investigating the structures that are formed which are similar to the ones observed in the 'classical' dewetting of non-volatile liquids. Labyrinthine structures and polygonal networks result from spinodal dewetting and heterogeneous nucleation and growth, respectively. They are 'decorated' with the solute and therefore conserve the transient dewetting pattern as a dried-in structure when all the solvent has evaporated [28, 34]. The picture is, however, not complete. The solute may\n\n3", + "recall": 0.9195402298850575, + "true_md": "## I. INTRODUCTION\n\nThe patterns formed in dewetting processes have attracted strong interest since Reiter analysed the process quantitatively in the early nineties. In these experiments, that proved to be a paradigm in our understanding of dewetting, a uniform thin film of polystyrene (tens of nanometers thick) is deposited on a flat silicon oxide substrate is brought above the glass transition temperature. The film ruptures in several places, forming holes which subsequently grow, competing for space. As a result, a random polygonal network of liquid rims emerges. The rims may further decay into lines of small drops due to a Rayleigh-type instability [1–3]. The related problems of retracting contact lines on partially wetting substrates and the opening of single holes in rather thick films have also been studied [4, 5].\n\nSubsequent work has mainly focused on many different aspects of the dewetting process for simple non-volatile liquids and polymers (for reviews see Refs. [6–8]). All stages of the dewetting of a film are studied: the initial film rupture via nucleation or a surface instability (called spinodal dewetting) [1, 9–13], the growth process of individual holes [14–16], the evolution of the resulting hole pattern [3, 13], and the stability of the individual dewetting fronts [17–19]. We note in passing, that descriptions of dewetting patterns may also be found in historic papers, particularly for the dewetting of a liquid film on a liquid substrate. Tomlinson [20, footnote 18 on p. 40] considered turpentine on water and Marangoni [21, p. 352f] oil on water.\n\nMore recently, interest has turned to the dewetting processes of solutions and suspensions. How- ever, these systems have not yet been investigated in any great depth. Such systems are compli- cated because their behaviour is determined by the interplay between the various solute (or colloid) and solvent transport processes. Furthermore, the solvents that are used often evaporate, i.e., one has to distinguish between ‘normal’ convective dewetting and evaporative dewetting. A number of experiments have been performed employing (colloidal) solutions of polymers [22–25], macro- molecules like collagen and DNA [26–31] and nanoparticles [32–40]. The latter are sometimes referred to as ‘nanofluids’. The initial focus of much of the research in the field has been on investigating the structures that are formed which are similar to the ones observed in the ‘classi- cal’ dewetting of non-volatile liquids. Labyrinthine structures and polygonal networks result from spinodal dewetting and heterogeneous nucleation and growth, respectively. They are ‘decorated’ with the solute and therefore conserve the transient dewetting pattern as a dried-in structure when all the solvent has evaporated [28, 34]. The picture is, however, not complete. The solute may\n\n3" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5805949296375751, + "doc_id": "c6d2a9dd146afb52b94cf6eca6443c409cc74c21952f1a9485d5f89d4db2fc19", + "edit_distance": 0.6573913043478261, + "f1_score": 0.962536023054755, + "meteor": 0.5662302387879168, + "precision": 0.9823529411764705, + "pred_md": "field theory, it cannot be ruled out by the data. We therefore take the difference between the extrapolated values for f B s /f B d and ξ obtained with the preferred fit and with a purely linear fit to estimate the systematic error due to the choice of matching point; this leads to an error in f B s /f B d of 6.6% for both the APE and HYP data and in ξ of 6.8% (6.9%) for the APE (HYP) data. We compare the results of the preferred fit with those of the purely linear extrapolation in Fig. 7 for Φ B s / Φ B l and in Fig. 8 for √ m B s /m B l ξ . Comparison with the linear extrapolation leads to a conservative systematic error estimate since we know that, when the pion mass is sufficiently light, the chiral logarithms will become important and the extrapolation function will begin to curve upward. However, the linear fit provides a clear lower-bound on the possible extrapolated value.\n\nFIG. 7: Chiral extrapolation of Φ B s / Φ B l = √ m B s /m B l · f B s /f B l using a linear fit matched onto NLO SU (2) HM PT at the lightest data point (solid band) and a linear extrapolation χ all the way to the chiral limit (hatched band). Errors shown are statistical only. The left plot shows the comparison for the APE data, while the right plot shows the same comparison for they HYPsmeared data.\n\nFIG. 7: Chiral extrapolation of Φ B s / Φ B l = √ m B s /m B l · f B s /f B l using a linear fit matched onto NLO SU (2) HM PT at the lightest data point (solid band) and a linear extrapolation χ all the way to the chiral limit (hatched band). Errors shown are statistical only. The left plot shows the comparison for the APE data, while the right plot shows the same comparison for they HYPsmeared data.\n\nIn order to estimate the error due to the omission of higher-order terms in the chiral expansion, we compare the result of the linear plus NLO SU (2) HM χ PT fit to a fit supplemented by NNLO analytic terms. Once the valence and sea strange quarks have been integrated out of the chiral effective theory, the SU (2) HM χ PT expressions can only depend upon the light up-down quark mass m l and the lattice spacing a . Thus the only possible NNLO analytic terms are those proportional to m 2 l , ma l 2 , and a 4 . Because we are working at\n\n32", + "recall": 0.943502824858757, + "true_md": "field theory, it cannot be ruled out by the data. We therefore take the difference between the extrapolated values for f$_{B}$$\\_{s}$/f$\\_{B}$$_{d}$ and ξ obtained with the preferred fit and with a purely linear fit to estimate the systematic error due to the choice of matching point; this leads to an error in f$_{B}$$\\_{s}$/f$\\_{B}$$_{d}$ of 6.6% for both the APE and HYP data and in ξ of 6.8% (6.9%) for the APE (HYP) data. We compare the results of the preferred fit with those of the purely linear extrapolation in Fig. 7 for Φ$_{B}$$\\_{s}$ / Φ$\\_{B}$$_{l}$ and in Fig. 8 for √ m$_{B}$$\\_{s}$/m$\\_{B}$$_{l}$ ξ . Comparison with the linear extrapolation leads to a conservative systematic error estimate since we know that, when the pion mass is sufficiently light, the chiral logarithms will become important and the extrapolation function will begin to curve upward. However, the linear fit provides a clear lower-bound on the possible extrapolated value.\n\nIn order to estimate the error due to the omission of higher-order terms in the chiral expansion, we compare the result of the linear plus NLO SU (2) HM χ PT fit to a fit sup- plemented by NNLO analytic terms. Once the valence and sea strange quarks have been integrated out of the chiral effective theory, the SU (2) HM χ PT expressions can only depend upon the light up-down quark mass m$_{l}$ and the lattice spacing a . Thus the only possible NNLO analytic terms are those proportional to m 2 $_{l}$, m$_{l}$a $^{2}$, and a $^{4}$. Because we are working at\n\n32\n\nFIG. 7: Chiral extrapolation of Φ$_{B}$$\\_{s}$ / Φ$\\_{B}$$_{l}$ = √ m$_{B}$$\\_{s}$/m$\\_{B}$$_{l}$ · f$_{B}$$\\_{s}$/f$\\_{B}$$_{l}$ using a linear fit matched onto NLO SU (2) HM χ PT at the lightest data point (solid band) and a linear extrapolation all the way to the chiral limit (hatched band). Errors shown are statistical only. The left plot shows the comparison for the APE data, while the right plot shows the same comparison for they HYP- smeared data." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8547737703001594, + "doc_id": "6d2ada9ed503e097c70cf4c7a541a94e4aa05b85991a51551d9a9b4426a26492", + "edit_distance": 0.07674418604651163, + "f1_score": 0.9285714285714286, + "meteor": 0.9456279231596981, + "precision": 0.9369369369369369, + "pred_md": "fast evaporation [104, 105]. These complex experimental systems all represent systems of high practical interest that the theories presented here are not (yet) able to describe. Such experiments do, however, provide a strong motivation for further work to extend the theories presented here, as well as to develop new approaches.\n\nLet us finally mention that several topics were entirely excluded from our discussion here. First, we focused on a limited range of descriptions and did, for instance, not mention lattice Boltzmann, molecular dynamics or dissipative particle dynamics approaches that may also be employed to describe fluid suspensions [106-109]. Second, we have only discussed spatially homogeneous substrates. Patterned substrates are widely used in dewetting experiments [38, 110-112]. Theoretical descriptions are well developed for the dewetting of films of pure non-volatile liquids on such substrates [68, 113-119]. However, in the case of volatile liquids on heterogeneous substrates, much less work has been done. A third topic that we did not touch upon are possible continuum thin film approaches to demixing dewetting suspensions. We believe it is feasible to extend the diffuse interface theories such as model-H [120] to include the influence of evaporation in dewetting nanoparticle suspensions. For instance, such models have already been adapted to describe demixing free surface films of polymer blends [121-123].\n\n## Acknowledgments\n\nAJA and MJR gratefully acknowledge RCUK and EPSRC, respectively, for financial support. We acknowledge support by the European Union via the FP6 and FP7 Marie Curie schemes [Grants MRTN-CT-2004005728 (PATTERNS) and PITN-GA-2008-214919 (MULTIFLOW)].\n\n[1] G. Reiter, 'Dewetting of thin polymer films,' Phys. Rev. Lett. 68 , 75-78 (1992).\n\n- [2] G. Reiter, 'Mobility of polymers in films thinner than their unperturbed size,' Europhys. Lett. 23 , 579-584 (1993).\n- [3] A. Sharma and G. Reiter, 'Instability of thin polymer films on coated substrates: Rupture, dewetting and drop formation,' J. Colloid Interface Sci. 178 , 383-399 (1996).\n- [4] P.-G. de Gennes, 'Wetting: Statics and dynamics,' Rev. Mod. Phys. 57 , 827-863 (1985).\n\n25", + "recall": 0.9203539823008849, + "true_md": "fast evaporation [104, 105]. These complex experimental systems all represent systems of high practical interest that the theories presented here are not (yet) able to describe. Such experiments do, however, provide a strong motivation for further work to extend the theories presented here, as well as to develop new approaches.\n\nLet us finally mention that several topics were entirely excluded from our discussion here. First, we focused on a limited range of descriptions and did, for instance, not mention lattice Boltzmann, molecular dynamics or dissipative particle dynamics approaches that may also be employed to describe fluid suspensions [106–109]. Second, we have only discussed spatially homogeneous substrates. Patterned substrates are widely used in dewetting experiments [38, 110–112]. Theoret- ical descriptions are well developed for the dewetting of films of pure non-volatile liquids on such substrates [68, 113–119]. However, in the case of volatile liquids on heterogeneous substrates, much less work has been done. A third topic that we did not touch upon are possible continuum thin film approaches to demixing dewetting suspensions. We believe it is feasible to extend the diffuse interface theories such as model-H [120] to include the influence of evaporation in dewet- ting nanoparticle suspensions. For instance, such models have already been adapted to describe demixing free surface films of polymer blends [121–123].\n\nAJA and MJR gratefully acknowledge RCUK and EPSRC, respectively, for financial support. We acknowledge support by the European Union via the FP6 and FP7 Marie Curie schemes [Grants MRTN-CT-2004005728 (PATTERNS) and PITN-GA-2008-214919 (MULTIFLOW)].\n\n## Acknowledgments\n\n25\n\n- [1] G. Reiter, “Dewetting of thin polymer films,” Phys. Rev. Lett. 68 , 75–78 (1992).\n\n- [2] G. Reiter, “Mobility of polymers in films thinner than their unperturbed size,” Europhys. Lett. 23 , 579–584 (1993).\n\n- [3] A. Sharma and G. Reiter, “Instability of thin polymer films on coated substrates: Rupture, dewetting and drop formation,” J. Colloid Interface Sci. 178 , 383–399 (1996).\n\n- [4] P.-G. de Gennes, “Wetting: Statics and dynamics,” Rev. Mod. Phys. 57 , 827–863 (1985)." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.03335854428853353, + "doc_id": "4376fa92f88018fd326d007571b93f655cdcdcc3dc72d30d2b517136b4803c89", + "edit_distance": 0.8619909502262444, + "f1_score": 0.7800829875518672, + "meteor": 0.19523352953908915, + "precision": 0.94, + "pred_md": "The coefficients in the evolution factor are\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nand the one- and two-loop anomalous dimensions\n\n\n\n\n\nThe one-loop QCD to HQET matching factors for the ∆ B = 2 four quark operator are calculated in Refs. [50, 53]:\n\n\n\nThe operators O L and O S mix under RG evolution (see Eq. (32)), such that the evolution factors for the matching coefficients can be written as a 2 × 2 matrix:\n\n\n\n\n\nNote that the matrix element U ( N f ) 12 is zero to all-orders in perturbation theory due to the fact that heavy-quark spin symmetry prohibits mixing from O S into O L . Because ˜ Z 2 in Eq. (B11) has no tree-level contribution, the two-loop expression for U ( N f ) 11 and one-loop expressions for U ( N f ) 21 and U ( N f ) 22 are sufficient to determine the O ( α s ) matching coefficients.\n\n48\n\nwith", + "recall": 0.6666666666666666, + "true_md": "The coefficients in the evolution factor are\n\nwith\n\nand the one- and two-loop anomalous dimensions\n\nThe one-loop QCD to HQET matching factors for the Δ B = 2 four quark operator are calculated in Refs. [50, 53]:\n\nThe operators O$_{L}$ and O$_{S}$ mix under RG evolution (see Eq. (32)), such that the evolution factors for the matching coefficients can be written as a 2 × 2 matrix:  \n\n  Note that the matrix element U ( N$_{f}$ ) 12 is zero to all-orders in perturbation theory due to the fact that heavy-quark spin symmetry prohibits mixing from O$_{S}$ into O$_{L}$ . Because ˜ Z$_{2}$ in Eq. (B11) has no tree-level contribution, the two-loop expression for U ( N$_{f}$ ) 11 and one-loop expressions for U ( N$_{f}$ ) 21 and U ( N$_{f}$ ) 22 are sufficient to determine the O ( α$_{s}$ ) matching coefficients.\n\n48\n\n$$× U ( N$_{f}$ ) L =   U ( N$_{f}$ ) 11 0 U ( N$_{f}$ ) 21 U ( N$_{f}$ ) 22   . (B12) ( N$_{f}$ )$$\n\n$$˜ Z$_{1}$ ( m$_{b}$, m$_{b}$ ) = 1 − 8 N 2 c + 9 N$_{c}$ − 15 2 N$_{c}$ α$_{s}$ ( m$_{b}$ ) 4 π + O ( α 2 $_{s}$) , (B10)$$\n\n$$˜ Z$_{1}$ ( m$_{b}$, m$_{b}$ ) = 1 − 8 N 2 c + 9 N$_{c}$ − 15 2 N$_{c}$ α$_{s}$ ( m$_{b}$ ) 4 π + O ( α 2 $_{s}$) , (B10) Z$_{2}$ ( m$_{b}$, m$_{b}$ ) = − 2( N$_{c}$ + 1) α$_{s}$ ( m$_{b}$ ) 4 π + O ( α 2 $_{s}$) . (B11)$$\n\n$$γ A = − 3 C$_{F}$, (B8) γ (1) A = − 16 C$_{F}$ ( 49 96 C$_{A}$ − 5 32 C$_{F}$ − 5 24 T$_{F}$N$_{f}$ − ( 1 4 C$_{A}$ − C$_{F}$ ) π 2 6 ) . (B9)$$\n\n$$γ (0) A = − 3 C$_{F}$, (B8) (1) ( 49 5 5 1 π 2 )$$\n\n$$3 − 3 β$_{1}$ = 34 3 C 2 A − 4 C$_{F}$T$_{F}$N$_{f}$ − 20 3 C$_{A}$T$_{F}$N$_{f}$, (B7)$$\n\n$$β$_{0}$ = 11 3 C$_{A}$ − 4 3 T$_{F}$N$_{f}$, (B6) 34 20$$\n\n$$J ( N$_{f}$ ) A = γ (1) A / 2 β$_{0}$ − γ (0) A β$_{1}$/ 2 β 2 $_{0}$, (B5)$$\n\n$$d ( N$_{f}$ ) A = γ (0) A / 2 β$_{0}$, (B4)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.03218474409524872, + "doc_id": "b2807886079aa1c44c232c57fc004f57154b336b24ca650de461e843d6dafae8", + "edit_distance": 0.8655097613882863, + "f1_score": 0.6928104575163399, + "meteor": 0.18678519206288743, + "precision": 0.8688524590163934, + "pred_md": "as follows. First, the free propagators are the same as in the commutative version of the model, i.e.,\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nfor the fermion, photon and ghost field propagators, respectively. Introducing the notation p ∧ k ≡ 1 2 ξθ µν p µ k ν , we determine the vertices as being\n\n\n\n/c108\n\nwhere γ µνα ( p, q, k ) = ( p -q ) α g µν +( q -k ) µ g να +( k -p ) ν g αµ .\n\n4", + "recall": 0.5760869565217391, + "true_md": "as follows. First, the free propagators are the same as in the commutative version of the model, i.e.,\n\nfor the fermion, photon and ghost field propagators, respectively. Introducing the notation p ∧ k ≡ 1 $_{2}$ξθ $^{µν}$p$_{µ}$ k$_{ν}$ , we determine the vertices as being\n\nwhere γ $^{µνα}$( p, q, k ) = ( p − q ) $^{α}$gµν + ( q − k ) $^{µ}$gνα + ( k − p ) $^{ν}$g$^{αµ}$.\n\n4\n\n$$p = i / p − m , (6)$$\n\n$$p GLYPH GLYPH = − i p 2 [ g µν − (1 − α ) p$_{µ}$p$_{ν}$ p 2 ] , and (7) p i$$\n\n$$[ ] p = i p $_{2}$, (8)$$\n\n$$p q k GLYPH = − ieγ $^{µ}$eip ∧ $^{k}$, (9)$$\n\n$$q p k GLYPH GLYPH GLYPH = 2 e sin( p ∧ q ) γ $^{µνα}$( p, q, k ) , (10)$$\n\n$$= − 4 ie 2 [ ( g $^{µβ}$gαν − g $^{µν}$g$^{αβ}$) sin( p ∧ r ) sin( q ∧ k ) +( g $^{µν}$gαβ − g $^{µα}$g$^{νβ}$) sin( q ∧ p ) sin( r ∧ k ) (11) + ( g $^{µα}$gνβ − g $^{µβ}$g$^{αν}$) sin( p ∧ k ) sin( r ∧ q ) ] ,$$\n\n$$] p q k GLYPH = 2 ek $^{µ}$sin( p ∧ k ) , (12)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5066919950144563, + "doc_id": "dbe6cf4eb04a77c5d8b7ad9dfa16b13dc04c5db6f2e85cec0a8fdb8501803c74", + "edit_distance": 0.8163672654690619, + "f1_score": 0.9236363636363638, + "meteor": 0.5401514441322767, + "precision": 0.9621212121212122, + "pred_md": "FIG. 3: (Color online). r max ( λ ) in function of the coupling λ , for different values of α and N . Black lines represent the case α = 0; dark grey (red online) lines, α = 0 4; grey (magenta online), . α = 0 6; . and light grey (cyan online), α = 0 7. . Solid lines represent N = 10000; dotted lines, N = 2500; and dashed lines, N = 600.\n\nFIG. 3: (Color online). r max ( λ ) in function of the coupling λ , for different values of α and N . Black lines represent the case α = 0; dark grey (red online) lines, α = 0 4; grey (magenta online), . α = 0 6; . and light grey (cyan online), α = 0 7. . Solid lines represent N = 10000; dotted lines, N = 2500; and dashed lines, N = 600.\n\nFIG. 4: r max ( λ c ) in function of the size of the environment N , in a double logarithmic scale. Squares represent the case α = 0; circles, α = 0 4; . upper triangles, α = 0 6; . lower triangles, α = 0 7. . The straight lines correspond to a least squares fit to the power law r max ( λ c ) = AN -1 4 / .\n\nFIG. 4: r max ( λ c ) in function of the size of the environment N , in a double logarithmic scale. Squares represent the case α = 0; circles, α = 0 4; . upper triangles, α = 0 6; . lower triangles, α = 0 7. . The straight lines correspond to a least squares fit to the power law r max ( λ c ) = AN -1 4 / .\n\na small region around λ ≈ λ c where it becomes sharp and size dependent. Therefore, the decoherence factor behaves in a critical way around λ = λ c where r max ( λ c ) undergoes a dip towards zero which is sharper and deeper for larger values of N .\n\nOn the light of these results, one may wonder how r max ( λ c ) behaves in the thermodynamical limit. As it is very difficult to do exact calculations beyond size N > 10000, we will rely on the finite size scaling analysis to extrapolate its behavior for N →∞ . In Fig. 4 we show how this quantity evolves with the size N of the environment. We plot results for the\n\n7", + "recall": 0.8881118881118881, + "true_md": "7\n\nOn the light of these results, one may wonder how r$_{max}$ ( λ$_{c}$ ) behaves in the thermody- namical limit. As it is very difficult to do exact calculations beyond size N > 10000, we will rely on the finite size scaling analysis to extrapolate its behavior for N → ∞ . In Fig. 4 we show how this quantity evolves with the size N of the environment. We plot results for the\n\na small region around λ ≈ λ$_{c}$ where it becomes sharp and size dependent. Therefore, the decoherence factor behaves in a critical way around λ = λ$_{c}$ where r$_{max}$ ( λ$_{c}$ ) undergoes a dip towards zero which is sharper and deeper for larger values of N .\n\nFIG. 4: r $_{max}$( λ $_{c}$) in function of the size of the environment N , in a double logarithmic scale. Squares represent the case α = 0; circles, α = 0 . 4; upper triangles, α = 0 . 6; lower triangles, α = 0 . 7. The straight lines correspond to a least squares fit to the power law r $_{max}$( λ $_{c}$) = AN − 1 / $^{4}$.\n\nFIG. 3: (Color online). r $_{max}$( λ ) i n function of the coupling λ , for different values of α and N . Black lines represent the case α = 0; dark grey (red online) lines, α = 0 . 4; grey (magenta online), α = 0 . 6; and light grey (cyan onlin e), α = 0 . 7. Solid lines represent N = 10000; dotted lines, N = 2500; and dashed lines, N = 6 00." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.07689654056707343, + "doc_id": "babbf27fefb9b752bd9d5e1dd9abc74543e15bf915360e725714b6768ff66201", + "edit_distance": 0.8436293436293436, + "f1_score": 0.824858757062147, + "meteor": 0.24542587495520662, + "precision": 0.9605263157894737, + "pred_md": "The equation (14) and the equation (15) can be rewritten to obtain:\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nIn general, the inversion of the Laplace transform of any of the g functions has to be done via contour integration in the complex s plane . In addition, extensive mathematical tables are also available with many worked out examples 12 . This section shows only one of the g functions, g 1 a , as an illustration of the use of these tables (the rest of functions g 1 b , g 2 a , g 2 b are easy to obtain due to their similarity). The following expressions can be found 12\n\n\n\n7\n\nAlternatively,\n\nand,", + "recall": 0.7227722772277227, + "true_md": "The equation (14) and the equation (15) can be rewritten to obtain:\n\nAlternatively,\n\nand,\n\nIn general, the inversion of the Laplace transform of any of the g functions has to be done via contour integration in the complex s plane . In addition, extensive mathematical tables are also available with many worked out examples $^{12}$. This section shows only one of the g functions, g$_{1}$$\\_{a}$ , as an illustration of the use of these tables (the rest of functions g$\\_{1}$$_{b}$ , g$_{2}$$\\_{a}$ , g$\\_{2}$$_{b}$ are easy to obtain due to their similarity). The following expressions can be found 12\n\n7\n\n$$f ( s ) F ( t ) 1 √ s e − k √ s 1 √$_{πt}$ e − k 2 4 t$$\n\n$$g$_{1}$ = g$_{1}$$_{a}$ + g$_{1}$$_{b}$ g$_{1}$$_{a}$ = − 1 2 P e − P ( x $^{′}$− x ) (20) g$_{1}$$_{b}$ = 1 2 P $_{e}$− P ( x + x $^{′}$) (21)$$\n\n$$g$_{2}$ = g$_{2}$$_{a}$ + g$_{2}$$_{b}$ g$_{2}$$_{a}$ = − 1 2 P e − P ( x − x $^{′}$) (22) g$_{2}$$_{b}$ = 1 2 P $_{e}$− P ( x + x $^{$^{′}$)}$. (23)$$\n\n$$for x < x ′ g$_{1}$ = − 1 2 P e − Px ′ ( e Px − e − Px ) (18) for x > x ′ g$_{2}$ = − 1 2 P ( e Px ′ − $_{e}$− Px ′ ) $_{e}$− $^{Px}$. (19)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6560029710536545, + "doc_id": "ddc6e2df32cc802f95e5923170594b300ace5162144dc4dbab3a9af80d7e52a0", + "edit_distance": 0.31746031746031744, + "f1_score": 0.9420654911838791, + "meteor": 0.722568845413676, + "precision": 0.9689119170984456, + "pred_md": "on a scale of many wavelengths. The ' ⊥ ' configuration presents a much closer analogy to the 1D problems considered in [1, 2], although some details inevitably differ. We will discuss it below in Sec. V. Further in this section, we only consider the ' ‖ ' case, where both E in and E L lie in the lattice plain.\n\n## A. Near-ring approximation\n\nOptical response of a triangular lattice of atoms is, in general, anisotropic: it depends on the orientation of E in in the lattice plane with respect to the symmetry directions of the lattice. We have demonstrated, however, that one can use the near-ring approximation (NRA) to describe the behavior of long-wavelength locsitons in the lattice [1] in an isotropic fashion. In this approximation, the contribution from the surrounding dipoles to the LF E L [the second term in Eq. (1)] is substituted with a field from an effective dipole ring with the radius l a , such that the polarizability of the nearest six atoms is evenly redistributed along the ring. The NRA is thus a further simplification of the NNA, making the model isotropic in the lattice plane. Within the NRA we then replace the summation in Eq. (4) with an integration over the imaginary ring, so that the equation for the LF becomes\n\n\n\nwhere u is a unit vector in the direction from the center r of the effective ring to a point at the ring, and θ is the polar angle of u counted from the direction of E in in the lattice plane. The strength of the dipole-dipole coupling between neighboring atoms is still given by the dimensionless parameter Q [Eq. (5)].\n\nEquation (7) has a uniform ( Lorentz ) solution\n\n\n\nwhere\n\n\n\nis the normalized frequency detuning at which the Lorentz-Lorenz resonance is achieved in the triangular lattice of atoms within the NRA. As we will see in Sec. V, δ LL is different for the ' ‖ ' and ' ⊥ ' configurations, but to simplify the formulas, we omit the index ' ‖ ' everywhere in this section and in Sec. IV, except for Eq. (9). From Eq. (8) one can see that,\n\n9", + "recall": 0.9166666666666666, + "true_md": "on a scale of many wavelengths. The “ ⊥ ” configuration presents a much closer analogy to the 1D problems considered in [1, 2], although some details inevitably differ. We will discuss it below in Sec. V. Further in this section, we only consider the “ ‖ ” case, where both E$_{in}$ and E$_{L}$ lie in the lattice plain.\n\nOptical response of a triangular lattice of atoms is, in general, anisotropic: it depends on the orientation of E$_{in}$ in the lattice plane with respect to the symmetry directions of the lattice. We have demonstrated, however, that one can use the near-ring approximation (NRA) to describe the behavior of long-wavelength locsitons in the lattice [1] in an isotropic fashion. In this approximation, the contribution from the surrounding dipoles to the LF E$_{L}$ [the second term in Eq. (1)] is substituted with a field from an effective dipole ring with the radius l a , such that the polarizability of the nearest six atoms is evenly redistributed along the ring. The NRA is thus a further simplification of the NNA, making the model isotropic in the lattice plane. Within the NRA we then replace the summation in Eq. (4) with an integration over the imaginary ring, so that the equation for the LF becomes\n\nwhere u is a unit vector in the direction from the center r of the effective ring to a point at the ring, and θ is the polar angle of u counted from the direction of E$_{in}$ in the lattice plane. The strength of the dipole-dipole coupling between neighboring atoms is still given by the dimensionless parameter Q [Eq. (5)].\n\nEquation (7) has a uniform ( Lorentz ) solution\n\nwhere\n\nis the normalized frequency detuning at which the Lorentz-Lorenz resonance is achieved in the triangular lattice of atoms within the NRA. As we will see in Sec. V, δ$_{LL}$ is different for the “ ‖ ” and “ ⊥ ” configurations, but to simplify the formulas, we omit the index “ ‖ ” everywhere in this section and in Sec. IV, except for Eq. (9). From Eq. (8) one can see that,\n\n9\n\n$$¯ E$_{L}$ = δ + i δ − δ$_{LL}$ + i E$_{in}$ , (8)$$\n\n$$δ ‖ LL = − 3 4 Q a (9)$$\n\n$$E$_{L}$ ( r ) = E$_{in}$ − 3 4 π Q ∫ 2 π 0 E$_{L}$ ( r + l a u ) (3 cos 2 θ − 1) dθ, (7)$$\n\n## A. Near-ring approximation" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9115157194989225, + "doc_id": "43293352513ff59c2d3f6d0a5d129a7b35b86c6628f04d98895a32d3d89986bc", + "edit_distance": 0.7979094076655052, + "f1_score": 0.9776357827476039, + "meteor": 0.8129701380561086, + "precision": 0.9807692307692307, + "pred_md": "- 4 Shuiqing Hu and Arvind Raman,\"Chaos in Atomic Force Microscopy,\" Phys. Rev. Lett. 96 , 036107-1-4 (2006).\n- 5 Mason A. Porter and Richard L. Liboff,\"Chaos on the Quantum Scale,\" American Scientist 89 , 532-537 (2001).\n- 6 H. E. Lehtihet and B. N. Miller,\"Numerical Study of a Billiard in a Gravitational Field,\" Physica D 21 , 93-104 (1986).\n- 7 V. Milner and J. L. Hanssen and W.C. Campbell and M.G. Raizen,\"Optial Billiards for Atoms,\" Phys. Rev. Lett. 86 1514-1517 (2001).\n- 8 A. Arnold,\"Mathematical concepts of open quantum boundary conditions,\" Trans. Theory Stat. Phys. 30 561-584 (2001).\n- 9 M. Ehrhardt and A. Arnold,\"Discrete transparent boundary conditions for the Schrödinger equation,\"Revista di Matematica della Universita di Parma 6 57-108 (2001).\n- 10 Matthias Ehrhardt, Discrete Artificial Boundary Conditions (Dissertation, Berlin, 2001).\n- 11 Kerson Huang,\"Bose-Einstein condensation of a Knudsen gas,\" Electronic Resource Cornell University Library, <http://arxiv.org/abs/0708.2234>,(2007).\n- 12 M. Abromowitz and Irene A. Stegun, Handbook of Mathematical Tables (National Bureau of Standards, Applied Mathematics Series 55, USA, 1985).\n- 13 Joe D. Hoffman, Numerical Methods for Engineers and Scientists (Marcel Dekker, New York, 2001)pp 587-650.\n\n16", + "recall": 0.9745222929936306, + "true_md": "5 Mason A. Porter and Richard L. Liboff,\"Chaos on the Quantum Scale,\" American Scientist 89 , 532-537 (2001).\n\n4 Shuiqing Hu and Arvind Raman,\"Chaos in Atomic Force Microscopy,\" Phys. Rev. Lett. 96 , 036107-1-4 (2006).\n\n13 Joe D. Hoffman, Numerical Methods for Engineers and Scientists (Marcel Dekker, New York, 2001)pp 587-650.\n\n16\n\n12 M. Abromowitz and Irene A. Stegun, Handbook of Mathematical Tables (National Bureau of Standards, Applied Mathematics Series 55, USA, 1985).\n\n11 Kerson Huang,\"Bose-Einstein condensation of a Knudsen gas,\" Electronic Resource Cornell Uni- versity Library, <http://arxiv.org/abs/0708.2234>,(2007).\n\n10 Matthias Ehrhardt, Discrete Artificial Boundary Conditions (Dissertation, Berlin, 2001).\n\n9 M. Ehrhardt and A. Arnold,\"Discrete transparent boundary conditions for the Schrödinger equa- tion,\"Revista di Matematica della Universita di Parma 6 57-108 (2001).\n\n8 A. Arnold,\"Mathematical concepts of open quantum boundary conditions,\" Trans. Theory Stat. Phys. 30 561-584 (2001).\n\n7 V. Milner and J. L. Hanssen and W.C. Campbell and M.G. Raizen,\"Optial Billiards for Atoms,\" Phys. Rev. Lett. 86 1514-1517 (2001).\n\n6 H. E. Lehtihet and B. N. Miller,\"Numerical Study of a Billiard in a Gravitational Field,\" Physica D 21 , 93-104 (1986)." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7467200939787529, + "doc_id": "ca8a7910852e4aa5645edeb55f20d8f379aff15299cc1d520ef739367624b6c1", + "edit_distance": 0.16331994645247658, + "f1_score": 0.9834515366430262, + "meteor": 0.8755183889695053, + "precision": 0.9904761904761905, + "pred_md": "## V. CONCLUSIONS AND DISCUSSIONS\n\nIn this paper we have investigated the dynamical behavior of the EoS of DE in the region of low redshift in a nearly model-independent way. The redshift in that region is binned and w de in each bin is approximated by a linear expansion of redshift z , and in the large redshift region we set w de to be a constant w L . While fitting the model with some observational data which include SnIa, BAO, CMB and Hubble evolution data, we leave the divided points of bins as free parameters. If the evolution of w de is not monotonous, or is not linear enough in the region under consideration, the best-fitted divided points will represent the turning points, where w de changes its evolving direction significantly. In this way we can explicitly reconstruct w de by using a few bins, and the errors of parameters from observational data will be small due to the small number of bins. First we have tried to find the turning points within the region of redshift z ∈ (0 , 1 8), and set . w L = -1 in the region z ∈ (1 8 . , ∞ ) (Model I). Our results show that the data favor two turning points of w de in z ∈ (0 , 1 8), and . w de may have an oscillation form [30]. Our results are consistent with those by the UBE method in [27].\n\nSince the main data points are in z ∈ (0 , 1) and our result in Model I shows there may be a turning point around z ∼ 1, to see clearly the dynamical behavior of EoS in that region, we have focused on the region z ∈ (0 , 0 9) in Model II. We have found one turning point . only in z ∈ (0 , 0 9), the reconstructed . w de in the best-fitted model is almost the same as that reconstructed in Model I in z ∈ (0 , 0 9). . We have also obtained the errors of w de at 1 σ and 2 σ in z ∈ (0 , 0 9). . In both correlated and uncorrelated estimates with a fixed w L = -1 or a floating constant w L , we found that there is a 2 σ deviation of w de from -1 around z = 0 9. .\n\nIt is interesting to see whether the deviation of EoS from -1 around z = 0 9 is physical, . or is caused by some unknown technical causes in fitting. If it is physical, it then clearly shows that DE is dynamical. But in UBE of w de there seems no such distinct deviation around z = 0 9, it may be due to the difference between the discontinuity . of w de in the piecewise constant case and the continuity in LS case [31]. In [16], where the cubic-spline method is used, there is also no such an explicit deviation around z = 0 9, but it is likely due . to its set of EoS in the last bin w L = w (1): to fit well with the data of z > 1, w (1) should be much minus, which would suppress the reconstructed w de around z = 1. Of course, it is also possible that such a big deviation around z = 0 9 is due to the non-smoothness of .\n\n13", + "recall": 0.9765258215962441, + "true_md": "## V. CONCLUSIONS AND DISCUSSIONS\n\nIn this paper we have investigated the dynamical behavior of the EoS of DE in the region of low redshift in a nearly model-independent way. The redshift in that region is binned and w$_{de}$ in each bin is approximated by a linear expansion of redshift z , and in the large redshift region we set w$_{de}$ to be a constant w$_{L}$ . While fitting the model with some observational data which include SnIa, BAO, CMB and Hubble evolution data, we leave the divided points of bins as free parameters. If the evolution of w$_{de}$ is not monotonous, or is not linear enough in the region under consideration, the best-fitted divided points will represent the turning points, where w$_{de}$ changes its evolving direction significantly. In this way we can explicitly reconstruct w$_{de}$ by using a few bins, and the errors of parameters from observational data will be small due to the small number of bins. First we have tried to find the turning points within the region of redshift z ∈ (0 , 1 . 8), and set w$_{L}$ = − 1 in the region z ∈ (1 . 8 , ∞ ) (Model I). Our results show that the data favor two turning points of w$_{de}$ in z ∈ (0 , 1 . 8), and w$_{de}$ may have an oscillation form [30]. Our results are consistent with those by the UBE method in [27].\n\nSince the main data points are in z ∈ (0 , 1) and our result in Model I shows there may be a turning point around z ∼ 1, to see clearly the dynamical behavior of EoS in that region, we have focused on the region z ∈ (0 , 0 . 9) in Model II. We have found one turning point only in z ∈ (0 , 0 . 9), the reconstructed w$_{de}$ in the best-fitted model is almost the same as that reconstructed in Model I in z ∈ (0 , 0 . 9). We have also obtained the errors of w$_{de}$ at 1 σ and 2 σ in z ∈ (0 , 0 . 9). In both correlated and uncorrelated estimates with a fixed w$_{L}$ = − 1 or a floating constant w$_{L}$ , we found that there is a 2 σ deviation of w$_{de}$ from − 1 around z = 0 . 9.\n\nIt is interesting to see whether the deviation of EoS from − 1 around z = 0 . 9 is physical, or is caused by some unknown technical causes in fitting. If it is physical, it then clearly shows that DE is dynamical. But in UBE of w$_{de}$ there seems no such distinct deviation around z = 0 . 9, it may be due to the difference between the discontinuity of w$_{de}$ in the piecewise constant case and the continuity in LS case [31]. In [16], where the cubic-spline method is used, there is also no such an explicit deviation around z = 0 . 9, but it is likely due to its set of EoS in the last bin w$_{L}$ = w (1): to fit well with the data of z > 1, w (1) should be much minus, which would suppress the reconstructed w$_{de}$ around z = 1. Of course, it is also possible that such a big deviation around z = 0 . 9 is due to the non-smoothness of\n\n13" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6523167953231612, + "doc_id": "b900eb5b2cb9aa490eab3407fde2e404e450a232a553ef9ee40236797a49dd08", + "edit_distance": 0.34622823984526113, + "f1_score": 0.978723404255319, + "meteor": 0.9121973122493163, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "FIG. 7: (Colour online) A sequence of profiles during a dewetting process with competing evaporation and convection that leads to the dried-in ring structure of nanoparticles displayed in Fig. 6(b). Profiles are at (a) before pinning ( t = 0 08 . T ), (b) at self-pinning ( t = 0 13 . T ), and (c) after depinning ( t = 0 29 . T ), where T = 3 × 10 10 τ with τ = η γH/κ 0 2 ( T is of order of 1s). The film thickness profiles h are the bold solid lines, the nanoparticle concentrations φ are the dotted lines and the nanoparticle layer height h p = hφ are the dashed lines. The remaining parameters and scalings are as in Fig. 6(b).\n\nFIG. 7: (Colour online) A sequence of profiles during a dewetting process with competing evaporation and convection that leads to the dried-in ring structure of nanoparticles displayed in Fig. 6(b). Profiles are at (a) before pinning ( t = 0 08 . T ), (b) at self-pinning ( t = 0 13 . T ), and (c) after depinning ( t = 0 29 . T ), where T = 3 × 10 10 τ with τ = η γH/κ 0 2 ( T is of order of 1s). The film thickness profiles h are the bold solid lines, the nanoparticle concentrations φ are the dotted lines and the nanoparticle layer height h p = hφ are the dashed lines. The remaining parameters and scalings are as in Fig. 6(b).\n\n(i) in Fig. 8). The concentration increases further and when it approaches random close packing φ c , the viscosity diverges and the front pins itself. When pinned, further retraction only occurs through evaporation (Fig. 7(b) and regime (ii) in Fig. 8). The front eventually depins and starts to move again, leaving a nanoparticle ring behind (Fig. 7(c) and regime (iii) in Fig. 8). However, the velocity is not as large as at the beginning, owing to the fact that the mean concentration of particles has increased. The remaining particles are transported to the centre and are deposited there when the remaining solvent evaporates (regime (iv) in Fig. 8).\n\nThe simple model used here shows, (i) that the contact line stops due to self-pinning by the deposited particles and (ii) the Marangoni effect is not necessary for the ring formation. The model can easily be refined to account for solutal and/or thermal Marangoni effects [88] but self-pinning\n\n22", + "recall": 0.9583333333333334, + "true_md": "FIG. 7: (Colour online) A sequence of profiles during a dewetting process with competing evaporation and convection that leads to the dried-in ring structure of nanoparticles displayed in Fig. 6(b). Profiles are at (a) before pinning ( t = 0 . 08 T ), (b) at self-pinning ( t = 0 . 13 T ), and (c) after depinning ( t = 0 . 29 T ), where T = 3 × 10 $^{10}$τ with τ = η$_{0}$γH/κ 2 ( T is of order of 1s). The film thickness profiles h are the bold solid lines, the nanoparticle concentrations φ are the dotted lines and the nanoparticle layer height h$_{p}$ = hφ are the dashed lines. The remaining parameters and scalings are as in Fig. 6(b).\n\n(i) in Fig. 8). The concentration increases further and when it approaches random close packing φ$_{c}$ , the viscosity diverges and the front pins itself. When pinned, further retraction only occurs through evaporation (Fig. 7(b) and regime (ii) in Fig. 8). The front eventually depins and starts to move again, leaving a nanoparticle ring behind (Fig. 7(c) and regime (iii) in Fig. 8). However, the velocity is not as large as at the beginning, owing to the fact that the mean concentration of particles has increased. The remaining particles are transported to the centre and are deposited there when the remaining solvent evaporates (regime (iv) in Fig. 8).\n\nThe simple model used here shows, (i) that the contact line stops due to self-pinning by the de- posited particles and (ii) the Marangoni effect is not necessary for the ring formation. The model can easily be refined to account for solutal and/or thermal Marangoni effects [88] but self-pinning\n\n22" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6897577070978063, + "doc_id": "bf3b5d0514675237bc6d2c65ef633446bcf7e179d474ad0ddba68f2597c514e4", + "edit_distance": 0.2777777777777778, + "f1_score": 0.9104116222760291, + "meteor": 0.7581543902016145, + "precision": 0.9306930693069307, + "pred_md": "for the case of APR and SLY4 EOSs. For the TM1 and NL3 EOSs, transition from nuclear matter to the CFL quark matter proceeds via 2SC phase at intermediate densities. For the BSR10 EOS, nuclear matter to CFL quark matter phase transition proceeds via 2SC phase only for GD = 1 2 . GS with GV = 0. We see from these figures that the pressure, at which the transition from the nuclear to quark matter occurs, decreases with increasing GD or decreasing GV . For instance, pressure at the phase transition reduces almost by a factor of two with increase in GD from 1 1 . GS to 1 2 . GS . The solid circles on the various EOSs for the nuclear matter indicate the values of P 1 4 . which is the pressure at the center of the neutron star with the canonical mass (1 4 . M /circledot ). The values of transition pressure is close to that of P 1 4 . for the cases plotted in the lower and the upper panels of Figs. 2 and 3, respectively. For the completeness, in the right panels of Figs. 2 and 3, we display the plots for the pressure as a function of the baryon density for the case of APR, BSR10 and NL3 EOSs. The phase transition to the quark matter is computed by a Maxwell construction.\n\n## III. HYBRID STARS WITH CSQM CORE\n\nWeconstruct the equilibrium sequences of the non-rotating and rotating compact stars using the EOSs obtained in the last section. These EOSs correspond to the nuclear matter at lower densities and the CSQM in the 2SC or CFL phase at higher densities as shown in Figs. 2 and 3. The nuclear matter EOSs are taken from the published literature as summarized in Table I. The EOSs for the CSQM are computed within the NJL model for di ff erent values of the scalar diquark coupling strength GD and the vector current coupling strength GV . The other parameters of the model are determined by fit to some of the observables of the vacuum QCD. The various EOSs as obtained in the present work can be completely specified by (i) the source for the nuclear matter EOS as listed in Table I and (ii) the values of GD and GV used in computing the EOS of the CSQM within the NJL model. The properties of spherically symmetric non-rotating and axially symmetric rotating compact stars are obtained by solving the Einstein's equations in 1D and 2D, respectively. The numerical computations are performed by using RNS code written by Stergioulas and Friedman [42].\n\nThe equilibrium sequence of compact stars for a given EOS is obtained by varying the central energy density /epsilon1 c . For the stable configuration,\n\n\n\nwhere, M is the gravitational mass of the non-rotating compact star. The equilibrium sequences for the non-rotating compact stars resulting from our EOSs are plotted as mass versus radius in\n\n6", + "recall": 0.8909952606635071, + "true_md": "for the case of APR and SLY4 EOSs. For the TM1 and NL3 EOSs, transition from nuclear matter to the CFL quark matter proceeds via 2SC phase at intermediate densities. For the BSR10 EOS, nuclear matter to CFL quark matter phase transition proceeds via 2SC phase only for G$_{D}$ = 1 . 2 G$_{S}$ with G$_{V}$ = 0. We see from these figures that the pressure, at which the tra nsition from the nuclear to quark matter occurs, decreases with increasing G$_{D}$ or decreasing G$_{V}$ . For instance, pressure at the phase transition reduces almost by a factor of two with increase in G$_{D}$ from 1 . 1 G$_{S}$ to 1 . 2 G$_{S}$ . The solid circles on the various EOSs for the nuclear matter indicate the values of P$_{1}$$\\_{.}$$_{4}$ which is the pressure at the center of the neutron star with the canonical mass (1 . 4 $^{M}$⊙ ). The values of transition pressure is close to that of P$_{1}$$\\_{.}$$_{4}$ for the cases plotted in the lower and the upper panels of Figs. 2 and 3, respectively. For the completeness, in the right panels of Figs. 2 and 3, we display the plots for the pressure as a function of the baryon density for the case of APR, BSR10 and NL3 EOSs. The phase transition to the quark matter is computed by a Maxwell construction.\n\nWe construct the equilibrium sequences of the non-rotating and rotating compact stars using the EOSs obtained in the last section. These EOSs correspond to the nuclear matter at lower densities and the CSQM in the 2SC or CFL phase at higher densities as shown in Figs. 2 and 3. The nuclear matter EOSs are taken from the published literature as summarized in Table I. The EOSs for the CSQM are computed within the NJL model for di ff erent values of the scalar diquark coupling strength G$_{D}$ and the vector current coupling strength G$_{V}$ . The other parameters of the model are determined by fit to some of the observables of the vacuum QCD.The various EOSs as obtained in the present work can be completely specified by (i) the sourcefor the nuclear matter EOS as listed in Table I and (ii) the values of G$_{D}$ and G$_{V}$ used in computing the EOS of the CSQM within the NJL model. The properties of spherically symmetric non-rotating and axially symmetric rotating compact stars are obtained by solving the Einstein’s equations in 1D and 2D, respectively. The numerical computations are performed by using RNS code written by Stergioulas and Friedman [42].\n\nThe equilibrium sequence of compact stars for a given EOS is obtained by varying the central energy density ϵ$_{c}$ . For the stable configuration,\n\nwhere, M is the gravitational mass of the non-rotating compact star. The equilibrium sequences for the non-rotating compact stars resulting from our EOSs are plotted as mass versus radius in\n\n6\n\n## III. HYBRID STARS WITH CSQM CORE\n\n$$∂ M ∂ϵ$_{c}$ ⩾ 0 , (13)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6651318448031831, + "doc_id": "63896ee03d4e84eff8ff11fecb6baa61b2566c67602950a987cdba42ca6ae48e", + "edit_distance": 0.4225, + "f1_score": 0.9726027397260274, + "meteor": 0.7802448131364275, + "precision": 0.9861111111111112, + "pred_md": "FIG. 5: (Color online) Ratio of the temperature parameter of the piston, T P , to the granular temperature of the gas next to it, T L , versus the mass ratio M/m , for several values of the coefficient of restitution of the gas α , as indicated in the insert. The curves are guides for the eye. In all the cases, the coefficient of restitution for the gas-movable piston collisions is α P = 0 99. .\n\nFIG. 5: (Color online) Ratio of the temperature parameter of the piston, T P , to the granular temperature of the gas next to it, T L , versus the mass ratio M/m , for several values of the coefficient of restitution of the gas α , as indicated in the insert. The curves are guides for the eye. In all the cases, the coefficient of restitution for the gas-movable piston collisions is α P = 0 99. .\n\nFor instance, T P /T L decreases as M/m increases for α > 0 95, . but it happens the other way round for α < 0 95. . Actually, as α decreases below this value, the increase of the temperature ratio is rather fast, and T P reaches to be up to four times larger than T L . If the parameters T P and T L were interpreted as real temperature parameters, this latter behavior would be fully counterintuitive. The temperature of the heated body (the piston) is larger than the temperature of the heating one (the gas next to the piston).\n\nFrom the values of σ Z and ( ∂L/∂M ) v W obtained from the event driven simulation data, the effective temperature T eff has been computed by means of its definition, Eq. (12). In the Appendix some details are given of the way in which the above derivative was actually evaluated. Then, in Figs. 6 and 7 the temperature ratios T eff /T L and T eff /T P are plotted, respectively, as a function of the mass ratio for the same systems as in Fig. 5. A clear\n\n14", + "recall": 0.9594594594594594, + "true_md": "FIG. 5: (Color online) Ratio of the temperature parameter of the piston, T$_{P}$ , to the granular temperature of the gas next to it, T$_{L}$ , versus the mass ratio M/m , for several values of the coefficient of restitution of the gas α , as indicated in the insert. The curves are guides for the eye. In all the cases, the coefficient of restitution for the gas-movable piston collisions is α$_{P}$ = 0 . 99.\n\nFor instance, T$_{P}$ /T$_{L}$ decreases as M/m increases for α > 0 . 95, but it happens the other way round for α < 0 . 95. Actually, as α decreases below this value, the increase of the temperature ratio is rather fast, and T$_{P}$ reaches to be up to four times larger than T$_{L}$ . If the parameters T$_{P}$ and T$_{L}$ were interpreted as real temperature parameters, this latter behavior would be fully counterintuitive. The temperature of the heated body (the piston) is larger than the temperature of the heating one (the gas next to the piston).\n\nFrom the values of σ$_{Z}$ and ( ∂L/∂M )$_{v}$$\\_{W}$ obtained from the event driven simulation data, the effective temperature T$\\_{eff}$ has been computed by means of its definition, Eq. (12). In the Appendix some details are given of the way in which the above derivative was actually evaluated. Then, in Figs. 6 and 7 the temperature ratios T$\\_{eff}$/T$\\_{L}$ and T$\\_{eff}$/T$\\_{P}$ are plotted, respectively, as a function of the mass ratio for the same systems as in Fig. 5. A clear\n\n14" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7341538638040241, + "doc_id": "ec90d9ec53a18e60bda5c83441aee67291030507cc2cb04750d3a5c47734871e", + "edit_distance": 0.2562358276643991, + "f1_score": 0.9773462783171523, + "meteor": 0.8113365457635793, + "precision": 0.9869281045751634, + "pred_md": "which indicates that there exist (at least) two turning points of w de in z ∈ (0 , 1 8) and the . best-fitted values z 1 = 0 44 and . z 2 = 1 07. . Here χ 2 total,min = 467 409 for the best-fitted . parameters, roughly speaking it is a good improvement, compared with the corresponding χ 2 total,min = 478 406 for the best-fitted CPL model and . χ 2 total,min = 479 093 for the ΛCDM . model. As shown in Table I, this improvement of χ 2 total,min is mainly due to the decrease of ˜ χ 2 sn,min and χ 2 H,min . It is not surprising, as redshifts of the two data sets are distributed in whole range of z ∈ (0 , 1 8), while the BAO data are in the region . z ≤ 0 35 and the CMB . data are in the region z ∈ (0 , z ∗ ∼ 1090). The result implies that these two data sets are quite favor of turnings of w de around z = 0 44 and . z = 1 07 respectively. . This result is consistent with recent UBE of w de [27]. While in CPL and ΛCDM models it is impossible to have such turnings of w de , which leads to the big differences between χ 2 total,min of Model I and that of ΛCDM and CPL models. This result also implies that there exists the possibility with an oscillating EoS. Note that the error bar of w de in the third bin is larger than those in the first two bins because there are much less data points.\n\nWe have also divided the region of z ∈ (0 , 1 8) into 4 bins, and found that there is almost .\n\nFIG. 1: The best-fitted w de for Model I (blue, solid), Model II (red, dashed) and the CPL model (green, dotted), the black line is for w = -1.\n\nFIG. 1: The best-fitted w de for Model I (blue, solid), Model II (red, dashed) and the CPL model (green, dotted), the black line is for w = -1.\n\n9", + "recall": 0.967948717948718, + "true_md": "which indicates that there exist (at least) two turning points of w$_{de}$ in z ∈ (0 , 1 . 8) and the best-fitted values z$_{1}$ = 0 . 44 and z$_{2}$ = 1 . 07. Here χ 2 total,min = 467 . 409 for the best-fitted parameters, roughly speaking it is a good improvement, compared with the corresponding χ 2 total,min = 478 . 406 for the best-fitted CPL model and χ 2 total,min = 479 . 093 for the ΛCDM model. As shown in Table I, this improvement of χ 2 total,min is mainly due to the decrease of ˜ χ 2 sn,min and χ 2 $_{H,min}$. It is not surprising, as redshifts of the two data sets are distributed in whole range of z ∈ (0 , 1 . 8), while the BAO data are in the region z ≤ 0 . 35 and the CMB data are in the region z ∈ (0 , z$_{∗}$ ∼ 1090). The result implies that these two data sets are quite favor of turnings of w$_{de}$ around z = 0 . 44 and z = 1 . 07 respectively. This result is consistent with recent UBE of w$_{de}$ [27]. While in CPL and ΛCDM models it is impossible to have such turnings of w$_{de}$ , which leads to the big differences between χ 2 total,min of Model I and that of ΛCDM and CPL models. This result also implies that there exists the possibility with an oscillating EoS. Note that the error bar of w$_{de}$ in the third bin is larger than those in the first two bins because there are much less data points.\n\nWe have also divided the region of z ∈ (0 , 1 . 8) into 4 bins, and found that there is almost\n\nFIG. 1: The best-fitted w$_{de}$ for Model I (blue, solid), Model II (red, dashed) and the CPL model (green, dotted), the black line is for w = − 1.\n\n9" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7818194374203369, + "doc_id": "1774a88713e2e052df251e2362ec74da9669e95e1a8260dcad259d26f46f420e", + "edit_distance": 0.10896309314586995, + "f1_score": 0.8713318284424378, + "meteor": 0.8933036392155084, + "precision": 0.8772727272727273, + "pred_md": "- [65] J. P. Burelbach, S. G. Bankoff, and S. H. Davis, 'Nonlinear stability of evaporating/condensing liquid films,' J. Fluid Mech. 195 , 463-494 (1988).\n- [66] A. Oron and S. G. Bankoff, 'Dewetting of a heated surface by an evaporating liquid film under conjoining/disjoining pressures,' J. Colloid Interface Sci. 218 , 152-166 (1999).\n- [67] L. W. Schwartz, R. V. Roy, R. R. Eley, and S. Petrash, 'Dewetting patterns in a drying liquid film,' J. Colloid Interface Sci. 214 , 363-374 (2001).\n- [68] K. Kargupta, R. Konnur, and A. Sharma, 'Spontaneous dewetting and ordered patterns in evaporating thin liquid films on homogeneous and heterogeneous substrates,' Langmuir 17 , 1294-1305 (2001).\n- [69] M. Bestehorn and D. Merkt, 'Regular surface patterns on Rayleigh-Taylor unstable evaporating films heated from below,' Phys. Rev. Lett. 97 , 127802 (2006).\n- [70] G. F. Teletzke, H. T. Davis, and L. E. Scriven, 'Wetting hydrodynamics,' Rev. Phys. Appl. 23 , 9891007 (1988).\n- [71] J. N. Israelachvili, Intermolecular and Surface Forces , Academic Press, London (1992).\n- [72] V. S. Mitlin, 'Dewetting of solid surface: Analogy with spinodal decomposition,' J. Colloid Interface Sci. 156 , 491-497 (1993).\n- [73] L. M. Pismen and Y. Pomeau, 'Disjoining potential and spreading of thin liquid layers in the diffuse interface model coupled to hydrodynamics,' Phys. Rev. E 62 , 2480-2492 (2000).\n- [74] L. Onsager, 'Crystal statistics. I. A two-dimensional model with an order-disorder transition,' Phys. Rev. 65 , 117-149 (1944).\n- [75] G. Reiter, 'Unstable thin polymer films: Rupture and dewetting processes,' Langmuir 9 , 1344-1351 (1993).\n- [76] C. G. Sztrum, O. Hod, and E. Rabani, 'Self-assembly of nanoparticles in three-dimensions: Formation of stalagmites,' J. Phys. Chem. B 109 , 6741-6747 (2005).\n- [77] G. Yosef and E. Rabani, 'Self-assembly of nanoparticles into rings: A lattice-gas model,' J. Phys. Chem. B 110 , 20965-20972 (2006).\n- [78] J. F. Gouyet, M. Plapp, W. Dieterich, and P. Maass, 'Description of far-from-equilibrium processes by mean-field lattice gas models,' Adv. Phys. 52 , 523-638 (2003).\n- [79] U. M. B. Marconi and P. Tarazona, 'Dynamic density functional theory of fluids,' J. Chem. Phys. 110 , 8032-8044 (1999).\n- [80] U. M. B. Marconi and P. Tarazona, 'Dynamic density functional theory of fluids,' J. Phys.-Condes. Matter 12 , A413-A418 (2000).\n\n30", + "recall": 0.8654708520179372, + "true_md": "- [65] J. P. Burelbach, S. G. Bankoff, and S. H. Davis, “Nonlinear stability of evaporating/condensing liquid films,” J. Fluid Mech. 195 , 463–494 (1988).\n\n- [66] A. Oron and S. G. Bankoff, “Dewetting of a heated surface by an evaporating liquid film under conjoining/disjoining pressures,” J. Colloid Interface Sci. 218 , 152–166 (1999).\n\n- [67] L. W. Schwartz, R. V. Roy, R. R. Eley, and S. Petrash, “Dewetting patterns in a drying liquid film,” J. Colloid Interface Sci. 214 , 363–374 (2001).\n\n- [68] K. Kargupta, R. Konnur, and A. Sharma, “Spontaneous dewetting and ordered patterns in evaporating thin liquid films on homogeneous and heterogeneous substrates,” Langmuir 17 , 1294–1305 (2001).\n\n- [69] M. Bestehorn and D. Merkt, “Regular surface patterns on Rayleigh-Taylor unstable evaporating films heated from below,” Phys. Rev. Lett. 97 , 127802 (2006).\n\n- [70] G. F. Teletzke, H. T. Davis, and L. E. Scriven, “Wetting hydrodynamics,” Rev. Phys. Appl. 23 , 989– 1007 (1988).\n\n- [71] J. N. Israelachvili, Intermolecular and Surface Forces , Academic Press, London (1992).\n\n- [72] V. S. Mitlin, “Dewetting of solid surface: Analogy with spinodal decomposition,” J. Colloid Interface Sci. 156 , 491–497 (1993).\n\n- [73] L. M. Pismen and Y. Pomeau, “Disjoining potential and spreading of thin liquid layers in the diffuse interface model coupled to hydrodynamics,” Phys. Rev. E 62 , 2480–2492 (2000).\n\n- [74] L. Onsager, “Crystal statistics. I. A two-dimensional model with an order-disorder transition,” Phys. Rev. 65 , 117–149 (1944).\n\n- [75] G. Reiter, “Unstable thin polymer films: Rupture and dewetting processes,” Langmuir 9 , 1344–1351 (1993).\n\n- [76] C. G. Sztrum, O. Hod, and E. Rabani, “Self-assembly of nanoparticles in three-dimensions: Forma- tion of stalagmites,” J. Phys. Chem. B 109 , 6741–6747 (2005).\n\n- [77] G. Yosef and E. Rabani, “Self-assembly of nanoparticles into rings: A lattice-gas model,” J. Phys. Chem. B 110 , 20965–20972 (2006).\n\n- [78] J. F. Gouyet, M. Plapp, W. Dieterich, and P. Maass, “Description of far-from-equilibrium processes by mean-field lattice gas models,” Adv. Phys. 52 , 523–638 (2003).\n\n- [79] U. M. B. Marconi and P. Tarazona, “Dynamic density functional theory of fluids,” J. Chem. Phys. 110 , 8032–8044 (1999).\n\n- [80] U. M. B. Marconi and P. Tarazona, “Dynamic density functional theory of fluids,” J. Phys.-Condes. Matter 12 , A413–A418 (2000).\n\n30" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8069109301472691, + "doc_id": "a73a6aff5a16225144804992353082c018edb077f5d2d85b85cb8d9e1958fd5f", + "edit_distance": 0.14136125654450263, + "f1_score": 0.9598214285714286, + "meteor": 0.8740295671173072, + "precision": 0.9772727272727273, + "pred_md": "both protons and neutrons, which indicates that the former configuration favors a prolate shape and the latter one induces a triaxial shape. The SD states in 40 Ar have dominantly the [( sd ) -4 ( pf ) 2 ] π [( sd ) -2 ( pf ) 4 ] ν configuration, which shows an admixture of shell effects of these configurations. The triaxiality γ values of protons and neutrons of the SD states in 40 Ar are approximately 10 · (Fig. 1), which is the intermediate value between γ ∼ 0 · and 25 · for the SD states in 36 Ar and 44 Ti, respectively. Protons and neutrons may favor similar deformations to increase overlap and gain attractive forces between them. Thus, the triaxiality of the SD states in 40 Ar is understood by a competition of a prolate shape favored by proton shell effects for Z = 18 and a significantly triaxial shape induced by neutron shell effects for N = 22.\n\nIn conclusion, the structure of the SD states in 40 Ar has been investigated with the deformed-basis AMD and the GCM. The SD states in 40 Ar form triaxial shapes. Owing to the triaxial deformation, the K π = 2 + SD band exists. Calculated B E ( 2) values for intraband transition of the GS and SD0 bands are consistent with experimental data. The triaxiality γ of the SD states is understood by the competition of deformations favored by their proton and neutron structures. To understand details of nuclear structures, it is necessary to take into account triaxiality.\n\nNumerical calculations were conducted on the RIKEN Cluster of Clusters (RICC) and the supercomputer SX9 in the Research Center for Nuclear Physics, Osaka University. The authors thank Dr. N. Itagaki in the Department of Physics, Faculty of Science, The University of Tokyo and Dr. T. Yoshida in the Center for Nuclear Study, The University of Tokyo, for fruitful discussions.\n\n- [1] C. E. Svensson, A. O. Macchiavelli, A. Juodagalvis, A. Poves, I. Ragnarsson, S. ˚ berg, D. E. A Appelbe, R. A. E. Austin, G. C. Ball, M. P. Carpenter, et al., Phys. Rev. C 63 , 061301(R) (2001).\n- [2] E. Ideguchi, D. G. Sarantites, W. Reviol, A. V. Afanasjev, M. Devlin, C. Baktash, R. V. F. Janssens, D. Rudolph, A. Axelsson, M. P. Carpenter, et al., Phys. Rev. Lett. 87 , 222501 (2001).\n- [3] C. D. O'Leary, M. A. Bentley, B. A. Brown, D. E. Appelbe, R. A. Bark, D. M. Cullen,\n\n10", + "recall": 0.9429824561403509, + "true_md": "both protons and neutrons, which indicates that the former configuration favors a prolate shape and the latter one induces a triaxial shape. The SD states in $^{40}$Ar have dominantly the [( sd ) − $^{4}$( pf ) $^{2}$]$_{π}$ [( sd ) − $^{2}$( pf ) $^{4}$]$_{ν}$ configuration, which shows an admixture of shell effects of these configurations. The triaxiality γ values of protons and neutrons of the SD states in $^{40}$Ar are approximately 10 ◦ (Fig. 1), which is the intermediate value between γ ∼ 0 ◦ and 25 ◦ for the SD states in $^{36}$Ar and $^{44}$Ti, respectively. Protons and neutrons may favor similar deformations to increase overlap and gain attractive forces between them. Thus, the triaxiality of the SD states in $^{40}$Ar is understood by a competition of a prolate shape favored by proton shell effects for Z = 18 and a significantly triaxial shape induced by neutron shell effects for N = 22.\n\nIn conclusion, the structure of the SD states in $^{40}$Ar has been investigated with the deformed-basis AMD and the GCM. The SD states in $^{40}$Ar form triaxial shapes. Owing to the triaxial deformation, the K π = 2 + SD band exists. Calculated B ( E 2) values for intraband transition of the GS and SD0 bands are consistent with experimental data. The triaxiality γ of the SD states is understood by the competition of deformations favored by their proton and neutron structures. To understand details of nuclear structures, it is necessary to take into account triaxiality.\n\nNumerical calculations were conducted on the RIKEN Cluster of Clusters (RICC) and the supercomputer SX9 in the Research Center for Nuclear Physics, Osaka University. The authors thank Dr. N. Itagaki in the Department of Physics, Faculty of Science, The Univer- sity of Tokyo and Dr. T. Yoshida in the Center for Nuclear Study, The University of Tokyo, for fruitful discussions.\n\n- [1] C. E. Svensson, A. O. Macchiavelli, A. Juodagalvis, A. Poves, I. Ragnarsson, S. ˚ Aberg, D. E. Appelbe, R. A. E. Austin, G. C. Ball, M. P. Carpenter, et al., Phys. Rev. C 63 , 061301(R) (2001).\n\n- [2] E. Ideguchi, D. G. Sarantites, W. Reviol, A. V. Afanasjev, M. Devlin, C. Baktash, R. V. F. Janssens, D. Rudolph, A. Axelsson, M. P. Carpenter, et al., Phys. Rev. Lett. 87 , 222501 (2001).\n\n- [3] C. D. O’Leary, M. A. Bentley, B. A. Brown, D. E. Appelbe, R. A. Bark, D. M. Cullen,\n\n10" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.10222511570074458, + "doc_id": "6f6fed09430ede7da068b3ae12a6301de48123c812af4433d91857af88f86f6a", + "edit_distance": 0.818069306930693, + "f1_score": 0.8389261744966443, + "meteor": 0.2762837109813301, + "precision": 0.946969696969697, + "pred_md": "TABLE V: The renormalized decay amplitude ratio Φ ren B s / Φ ren B l for both the APE- and HYP-smeared data sets. Errors shown are statistical only.\n\nthree-point correlation functions\n\n\n\nwhere A ( ± ) I 0 ( ) is either the box-source axial current t A ( ± ) B 0 ( ) or the wall-source axial current t A ( ± ) W 0 ( ). t The operator O i can be either the sum of the squared vector plus squared axial vector current or the squared scalar plus squared pseudoscalar current, respectively, 2\n\n\n\n\n\nAlthough the SS + PP operator does not contribute to B q -B q mixing in continuum QCD, its counterpart in HQET is introduced through the QCD → HQET matching as shown in Eq. (27).\n\nBecause of the different spatial wavefunctions used for the APE- and HYP-smeared data, we extract the B q -B q matrix element in different ways for the two data sets. With the APE-smeared box source data, we can compute the matrix element directly from the ratio of correlators [57]\n\n\n\n2 We neglect the odd-parity parts of O lat L and O lat S , Eqs. (44) and (45), when computing the lattice threepoint correlation functions because only the parity-conserving components contribute to the desired matrix element.\n\n22", + "recall": 0.7530120481927711, + "true_md": "three-point correlation functions\n\nwhere A ( ± ) I 0 ( t ) is either the box-source axial current A ( ± ) B 0 ( t ) or the wall-source axial current A ( ± ) W 0 ( t ). The operator O$_{i}$ can be either the sum of the squared vector plus squared axial vector current or the squared scalar plus squared pseudoscalar current, respectively, 2\n\nAlthough the SS + P P operator does not contribute to B$_{q}$ − B$_{q}$ mixing in continuum QCD, its counterpart in HQET is introduced through the QCD → HQET matching as shown in Eq. (27).\n\nBecause of the different spatial wavefunctions used for the APE- and HYP-smeared data, we extract the B$_{q}$ − B$_{q}$ matrix element in different ways for the two data sets. With the APE-smeared box source data, we can compute the matrix element directly from the ratio of correlators [57]\n\n2 We neglect the odd-parity parts of O lat L and O lat S , Eqs. (44) and (45), when computing the lattice three- point correlation functions because only the parity-conserving components contribute to the desired matrix element.\n\n22\n\n$$M$_{O}$$_{i}$ = lim t$_{f}$ ≫ t ≫ $_{t$_{0}$}$2 C B $_{O$_{i}$}$( t$_{f}$, t, t$_{0}$ ) e m ∗ B $_{q}$( t$_{f}$ − t$_{0}$ ) / 2 √ C $^{BB}$( t, t$_{f}$ ) C $^{BB}$( t, t$_{0}$ ) . (72)$$\n\n$$V V + AA ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) O lat SS + PP = 2 h $^{(+)}$q h ( − $^{)}$q ) + 2 ( h $^{(+)}$γ$_{5}$ q ) ( h ( − $^{)}$γ$_{5}$ q ) . (71)$$\n\n$$O lat V V + AA = 2 ( h $^{(+)}$γ $^{µ}$q ) ( h ( − $^{)}$γ$_{µ}$ q ) + 2 ( h $^{(+)}$γ $^{µ}$γ$_{5}$ q ) ( h ( − $^{)}$γ $^{µ}$γ$_{5}$ q ) , (70) O lat = 2 h $^{(+)}$q h ( − $^{)}$q ) + 2 ( h $^{(+)}$γ$_{5}$ q ) ( h ( − $^{)}$γ$_{5}$ q ) . (71)$$\n\n$$C I $_{O$_{i}$}$( t$_{f}$, t, t$_{0}$ ) = a 3 ∑ ⃗x ∈ $_{V}$〈 0 | A (+) I 0 ( t$_{f}$ ) $^{†}$O lat i ( ⃗ x, t ) A ( − ) I 0 ( t$_{0}$ ) $^{†}$| 0 〉 , (69)$$\n\nTABLE V: The renormalized decay amplitude ratio Φ ren $_{B$\\_{s}$}$/ Φ ren B$_{l}$ for both the APE- and HYP-smeared data sets. Errors shown are statistical only." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.26429160952292124, + "doc_id": "377adf71b490e267f8d2c9a430525fcc7c47a0e38a553e48673cda9a2306e8df", + "edit_distance": 0.6262230919765166, + "f1_score": 0.863157894736842, + "meteor": 0.4487830535836486, + "precision": 0.9534883720930233, + "pred_md": "## III. RESULTS.\n\nSince we use the implicit method called Crank-Nicholson with a degree of approximation through second order that is unconditionally stable, there is no formal restriction on the step sizes, and we expected little difference between the results obtained by both methods. The real and imaginary parts of the wave function are plotted for a set of different values of the time. For simplicity, dimensionless units are used where m = /planckover2pi1 = 1 . In these units we choose the length of the region to be L = 2 . The set begins with two small values of time and ends with a relatively longer value compared with the value of the natural period. In dimensionless units, T = 2 π ω = 5 092 . , for the first ground state with a value of ω = 1 233 . .\n\n## A. ANALYTICAL METHOD.\n\nThe exact, time dependent wave function on the semi-infinite domain is obtained by replacing the value of the initial condition in the equation (29) as follows:\n\n\n\nAfter performing the integration using Mathematica Software, the explicit form of the wave function is\n\n\n\nwhere Erfi is the error function with imaginary argument 12 .\n\n13", + "recall": 0.7884615384615384, + "true_md": "## III. RESULTS.\n\nSince we use the implicit method called Crank-Nicholson with a degree of approximation through second order that is unconditionally stable, there is no formal restriction on the step sizes, and we expected little difference between the results obtained by both methods. The real and imaginary parts of the wave function are plotted for a set of different values of the time. For simplicity, dimensionless units are used where m = ℏ = 1 . In these units we choose the length of the region to be L = 2 . The set begins with two small values of time and ends with a relatively longer value compared with the value of the natural period. In dimensionless units, T = 2 π ω = 5 . 092 , for the first ground state with a value of ω = 1 . 233 .\n\nThe exact, time dependent wave function on the semi-infinite domain is obtained by replacing the value of the initial condition in the equation (29) as follows:\n\nAfter performing the integration using Mathematica Software, the explicit form of the wave function is\n\nwhere Erfi is the error function with imaginary argument $^{12}$.\n\n13\n\n## A. ANALYTICAL METHOD.\n\n$$Ψ ( x, t ) = i αC √$_{t}$ ∫ L 0 $_{dx}$′ ( − e ia t ( x $^{′}$− x ) 2 + e ia t ( x $^{′}$+ x ) 2 ) sin ( $_{kx}$′$_{)}$ (47)$$\n\n$$Ψ ( x, t ) = 1 √$_{2}$ [ (( 1 4 − i 4 ) ( − 1) 1 4 $_{e}$− iπ ( πt +2 aLx ) 2 aL 2 ) ( Erfi [( 1 2 + i 2 ( − πt + aL ( L − x )) √ $_{aL}$√$_{t}$ ] − e 2 iπx L Erfi [( 1 2 + i 2 ) ( πt + aL ( L − x )) √ $_{aL}$√$_{t}$ ] − e 2 iπx L Erfi [( 1 2 + i 2 ) ( − πt + aL ( L + x )) √ $_{aL}$√$_{t}$ ] + Erfi [( 1 2 + i 2 ) ( πt + aL ( L + x )) √ $_{aL}$√$_{t}$ ] )] (48)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9200365039989188, + "doc_id": "d523562fde34c3faf4c5eca3b7dcf12b6996490b5de32ef9ba8e44d16402e0cf", + "edit_distance": 0.054365733113673806, + "f1_score": 0.9892933618843683, + "meteor": 0.9627531549850263, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "to perform a study comparing the use of SU (2) versus SU (3) HM χ PT for the extrapolation of B -meson decay constants and mixing matrix elements to the physical quark masses in a future analysis when we have lighter data with smaller statistical errors in order to see which procedure leads to a more accurate determination of these quantities.\n\nAlthough we know that HM χ PT is the correct low-energy effective description of the lattice theory when the simulated quark masses are sufficiently light, we do not know a priori at what mass the range of validity of HM χ PT ends. Studies of the light pseudoscalar meson sector on the RBC/UKQCD domain-wall ensembles show that NLO χ PT does not describe the numerical data for the masses and decay constants when the pion masses are above about 420 MeV [34]. Since the lightest pion mass in our analysis is approximately 430 MeV, this suggests that most of our data may be too heavy for NLO HM χ PT to apply and that the inclusion of NNLO terms may be necessary. Unfortunately, because we only have three data points for each of the SU (3)-breaking ratios, we do not have enough data points to reliably constrain the values of the higher-order terms (there are two free parameters at NNLO in the SU (3) HM PT expressions, and even more at NNLO in SU(2) HM χ χ PT). When the masses of the light pseudoscalar mesons in the chiral logarithms are sufficiently heavy, however, the logarithms can be well-approximated by polynomials. We therefore choose to fit the data to a linear fit function that is constrained to be equal to one in the SU (3) limit ( m l → m s ) and then match this result onto the NLO SU (2) HM χ PT expression at the location of our lightest data point ( am l = 0 01), which we believe is sufficiently light . that NLO SU (2) HM PT should apply. χ Although the behavior of the data is unlikely to be strictly linear in the heavy-mass region, the statistical errors in our data points are sufficiently large (as great as ∼ 8%) that we can successfully perform a linear fit and obtain a good χ / 2 dof without the addition of higher-order polynomial terms. 3 Furthermore, we cannot reliably determine the size of a quadratic term if we include one in the fit. Given our poor statistical errors, however, we cannot exclude the possibility of other fit functions, and we use alternate fit forms as one way to estimate the chiral extrapolation error. We also vary the location of the SU (2) HM χ PT matching point and the parameters that enter the SU (2) HM χ PT expressions, and consider matching onto SU (3) HM χ PT. All of these\n\n3 Because the data points for the SU (3)-breaking ratios in Tables V and VI were generated on three different sea-quark ensembles, they are statistically independent; thus the uncorrelated χ / 2 dof correctly reflects the goodness-of-fit.\n\n26", + "recall": 0.9788135593220338, + "true_md": "to perform a study comparing the use of SU (2) versus SU (3) HM χ PT for the extrapolation of B -meson decay constants and mixing matrix elements to the physical quark masses in a future analysis when we have lighter data with smaller statistical errors in order to see which procedure leads to a more accurate determination of these quantities.\n\nAlthough we know that HM χ PT is the correct low-energy effective description of the lattice theory when the simulated quark masses are sufficiently light, we do not know a priori at what mass the range of validity of HM χ PT ends. Studies of the light pseudoscalar meson sector on the RBC/UKQCD domain-wall ensembles show that NLO χ PT does not describe the numerical data for the masses and decay constants when the pion masses are above about 420 MeV [34]. Since the lightest pion mass in our analysis is approximately 430 MeV, this suggests that most of our data may be too heavy for NLO HM χ PT to apply and that the inclusion of NNLO terms may be necessary. Unfortunately, because we only have three data points for each of the SU (3)-breaking ratios, we do not have enough data points to reliably constrain the values of the higher-order terms (there are two free parameters at NNLO in the SU (3) HM χ PT expressions, and even more at NNLO in SU(2) HM χ PT). When the masses of the light pseudoscalar mesons in the chiral logarithms are sufficiently heavy, however, the logarithms can be well-approximated by polynomials. We therefore choose to fit the data to a linear fit function that is constrained to be equal to one in the SU (3) limit ( m$_{l}$ → m$_{s}$ ) and then match this result onto the NLO SU (2) HM χ PT expression at the location of our lightest data point ( am$_{l}$ = 0 . 01), which we believe is sufficiently light that NLO SU (2) HM χ PT should apply. Although the behavior of the data is unlikely to be strictly linear in the heavy-mass region, the statistical errors in our data points are sufficiently large (as great as ∼ 8%) that we can successfully perform a linear fit and obtain a good χ $^{2}$/ dof without the addition of higher-order polynomial terms. 3 Furthermore, we cannot reliably determine the size of a quadratic term if we include one in the fit. Given our poor statistical errors, however, we cannot exclude the possibility of other fit functions, and we use alternate fit forms as one way to estimate the chiral extrapolation error. We also vary the location of the SU (2) HM χ PT matching point and the parameters that enter the SU (2) HM χ PT expressions, and consider matching onto SU (3) HM χ PT. All of these\n\n3 Because the data points for the SU (3)-breaking ratios in Tables V and VI were generated on three different sea-quark ensembles, they are statistically independent; thus the uncorrelated χ $^{2}$/ dof correctly reflects the goodness-of-fit.\n\n26" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9010483873369711, + "doc_id": "2c729f5d599af4dca1c2d57c12407bd6d99fefef7d7672399d822602ffd07b51", + "edit_distance": 0.09852216748768473, + "f1_score": 0.9820051413881746, + "meteor": 0.9564143757470952, + "precision": 0.9896373056994818, + "pred_md": "FIG. 8: Scaling exponent for the variance of R 0 at various values of k .\n\nFIG. 8: Scaling exponent for the variance of R 0 at various values of k .\n\nbe restored once we take λ finite. It would require subtle cancellations to take place in order to do that. The upshot is that this is an interesting observation that the numerical exploration is giving us. It would be very hard to guess this behavior for observables with our current understanding of large N systems [45]. The one thing that is very special of this setup is that when we look at the eigenvalue density distribution in the saddle point limit, it is singular: it has a δ function behavior. Singular distributions get smeared by fluctuations and because they are singular, they might induce anomalous scalings of fluctuations, etc. Again, a thorough understanding of these issues requires further work.\n\n## C. A scaling relation: size of the hole for varying q at fixed N\n\nThe next item in the list is to check some of the geometric features of our ensemble and compare them to the expected solutions of supergravity and in particular with the free fermion picture [31, 40]. The idea is to fix N and vary Q , thereby exploring the parameter q = Q/N . We do this for our largest value of N = 10000 and for the largest k that we recorded k = 13. We plot R 0 ( q ) versus Q in the figure 9.\n\nA fit of the form R 0 ( q ) ∼ q α shows that the best fit is with α /similarequal 0 47 . ± 0 1, . where the error is an estimate of the systematic error. We use the variance in the inner radius as a measurement of the systematic uncertainty. This is consistent with α = 0 5. . Incidentally, α = 0 5 is the scaling value for the free fermion droplets. . The reason for this is that the free fermion system (quantum hall system) is equivalent to a Coulomb gas in two dimensions. For that system both particles and holes form incompressible fluids, and the radius of the\n\n26", + "recall": 0.9744897959183674, + "true_md": "26\n\nFIG. 8: Scaling exponent for the variance of R$_{0}$ at various values of k .\n\nbe restored once we take λ finite. It would require subtle cancellations to take place in order to do that. The upshot is that this is an interesting observation that the numerical exploration is giving us. It would be very hard to guess this behavior for observables with our current understanding of large N systems [45]. The one thing that is very special of this setup is that when we look at the eigenvalue density distribution in the saddle point limit, it is singular: it has a δ function behavior. Singular distributions get smeared by fluctuations and because they are singular, they might induce anomalous scalings of fluctuations, etc.\n\nAgain, a thorough understanding of these issues requires further work.\n\n## C. A scaling relation: size of the hole for varying q at fixed N\n\nThe next item in the list is to check some of the geometric features of our ensemble and compare them to the expected solutions of supergravity and in particular with the free fermion picture [31, 40]. The idea is to fix N and vary Q , thereby exploring the parameter q = Q/N . We do this for our largest value of N = 10000 and for the largest k that we recorded k = 13. We plot R$_{0}$ ( q ) versus Q in the figure 9.\n\nA fit of the form R$_{0}$ ( q ) ∼ q α shows that the best fit is with α ≃ 0 . 47 ± 0 . 1, where the error is an estimate of the systematic error. We use the variance in the inner radius as a measurement of the systematic uncertainty. This is consistent with α = 0 . 5. Incidentally, α = 0 . 5 is the scaling value for the free fermion droplets. The reason for this is that the free fermion system (quantum hall system) is equivalent to a Coulomb gas in two dimensions.\n\nFor that system both particles and holes form incompressible fluids, and the radius of the" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8597929438712553, + "doc_id": "f4e48f5bd12e6fe650f648028ee50b5a32a7195d7c7a2ce4a49fca186a7f75b4", + "edit_distance": 0.12087912087912088, + "f1_score": 0.9492385786802032, + "meteor": 0.917712638670422, + "precision": 0.9739583333333334, + "pred_md": "The EOSs for the quark matter in the unpaired or in the various colour superconducting phases employed in these investigations were obtained within the MIT bag model. Recently [40], a more realistic EOS for the unpaired quark matter computed within the NJL model is used to show that the maximum mass of the non-rotating hybrid stars depends sensitively on the choice of the EOS of the nuclear matter. It is necessary to construct stable configurations of the non-rotating and rotating hybrid stars using realistic EOSs for the nuclear matter and for the quark matter in the colour superconducting phases.\n\nIn the present work, we compute several EOSs and use them to study the properties of the nonrotating and rotating hybrid stars composed of CSQM core. The lower density part of these EOSs correspond to the nuclear matter and are based on the variational and mean-field approaches. Our set of EOSs for the nuclear matter around the saturation density ( ρ 0 = 0 16 fm . -3 ) is constrained by the bulk properties of the finite nuclei. But, their behaviour at densities, ρ > ρ 0 , are significantly di ff erent. The EOSs for CSQM are calculated within the NJL model using di ff erent values for the scalar diquark and vector current coupling strengths. The EOS at intermediate densities are obtained using a Maxwell construction.\n\nThe paper is organized as follows, in Sec. II we describe , in brief, the models employed to construct the EOSs for nuclear matter and the CSQM. In Sec. III we present the results for the equilibrium sequences for non-rotating and rotating hybrid stars. In Sec. IV we state our conclusions.\n\n## II. EQUATIONS OF STATE\n\nWe compute the EOSs which correspond to the nuclear matter at lower densities and CSQM in the 2SC or CFL phases at higher densities. The EOS at intermediate densities are obtained using a Maxwell construction. For nuclear matter in the β equilibrium, we employ a set of diverse EOSs which are obtained using various approaches, like, variational, non-relativistic mean field (NRMF) and relativistic mean field (RMF). In Fig. 1 we plot various nuclear matter EOSs. The low density behaviour these EOSs are very much similar as they are constrained by the bulk properties of the finite nuclei. But, their behaviour at higher densities are so di ff erent that the resulting neutron star properties are at variance. In Table I, we list some key properties of the non-rotating neutron stars obtained using these nuclear matter EOSs. It can be seen from Table I that the values of the maximum neutron star masses are in the range of 2 0 . -2 8 . M /circledot and the radius R 1 4 . at the canonical\n\n3", + "recall": 0.9257425742574258, + "true_md": "The EOSs for the quark matter in the unpaired or in the various colour superconducting phases employed in these investigations were obtained within the MIT bag model. Recently [40], a more realistic EOS for the unpaired quark matter computed within the NJL model is used to show that the maximum mass of the non-rotating hybrid stars depends sensitively on the choice of the EOS of the nuclear matter. It is necessary to construct stable configurations of the non-rotating and rotating hybrid stars using realistic EOSs for the nuclear matter and for the quark matter in the colour superconducting phases.\n\nIn the present work, we compute several EOSs and use them to study the properties of the non- rotating and rotating hybrid stars composed of CSQM core. The lower density part of these EOSs correspond to the nuclear matter and are based on the variational and mean-field approaches. Our set of EOSs for the nuclear matter around the saturation density ( ρ$_{0}$ = 0 . 16 fm − $^{3}$) is constrained by the bulk properties of the finite nuclei. But, their behaviou r at densities, ρ > ρ$_{0}$ , are significantly di ff erent. The EOSs for CSQM are calculated within the NJL model using di ff erent values for the scalar diquark and vector current coupling strengths. The EOS at intermediate densities are obtained using a Maxwell construction.\n\nThe paper is organized as follows, in Sec. II we describe , in brief, the models employed to construct the EOSs for nuclear matter and the CSQM. In Sec. III we present the results for the equilibrium sequences for non-rotating and rotating hybrid stars. In Sec. IV we state our conclusions.\n\nWe compute the EOSs which correspond to the nuclear matter at lower densities and CSQM in the 2SC or CFL phases at higher densities. The EOS at intermediate densities are obtained using a Maxwell construction. For nuclear matter in the β equilibrium, we employ a set of diverse EOSs which are obtained using various approaches, like, variational, non-relativistic mean field (NRMF) and relativistic mean field (RMF). In Fig. 1 we plot various nu clear matter EOSs. The low density behaviour these EOSs are very much similar as they are constrained by the bulk properties of the finite nuclei. But, their behaviour at higher densities are s o di ff erent that the resulting neutron star properties are at variance. In Table I, we list some key properties of the non-rotating neutron stars obtained using these nuclear matter EOSs. It can be seen from Table I that the values of the maximum neutron star masses are in the range of 2 . 0 − 2 . 8 $^{M}$⊙ and the radius R$_{1}$$\\_{.}$$_{4}$ at the canonical\n\n3\n\n## II. EQUATIONS OF STATE" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6633824235311502, + "doc_id": "359fdef8e1b3923eb82cb5de4d50affb08c50da6be5baab8dac74acd09017d85", + "edit_distance": 0.34210526315789475, + "f1_score": 0.9435215946843853, + "meteor": 0.8568868334576213, + "precision": 0.9659863945578231, + "pred_md": "FIG. 9: (Color online) Dimensionless compressibility -mL -1 ( ∂L/∂M ) v W (filled symbols) and scaled position fluctuations of the piston σ 2 Z mg /Lb α,α 0 ( P ) T P ( empty symbols) as a function of the mass ratio, M/m . The different symbols correspond to different values of the coefficient of restitution for the collision between particles, α , as indicated in the insert. The straight line has a slope -3 4, and it is a guide for the eye. /\n\nFIG. 9: (Color online) Dimensionless compressibility -mL -1 ( ∂L/∂M ) v W (filled symbols) and scaled position fluctuations of the piston σ 2 Z mg /Lb α,α 0 ( P ) T P ( empty symbols) as a function of the mass ratio, M/m . The different symbols correspond to different values of the coefficient of restitution for the collision between particles, α , as indicated in the insert. The straight line has a slope -3 4, and it is a guide for the eye. /\n\nNevertheless, the analysis carried out in ref. [19] indicates that the range of hydrodynamic gradients considered here exceeds the limit of validity of the Navier-Stokes approximation.\n\nSome of the main results can be summarized as follows: i) for large mass of the movable piston compared with the mass of the gas particles, the volume fluctuations are Gaussian with very good accuracy, ii) the square root of the second moment of their distribution scales with the square of the velocity of the vibrating wall at the bottom, i.e. in the same way as the amplitudes of the hydrodynamic fields in the gas, iii) by requiring the same relation between volume fluctuations and compressibility as in equilibrium systems to be verified, an 'effective temperature' can be defined, iv) the effective temperature turns out to be proportional to the second moment of the velocity fluctuations of the piston, with a proportionality parameter that depends on the inelasticity of both the particle-particle\n\n18", + "recall": 0.922077922077922, + "true_md": "FIG. 9: (Color online) Dimensionless compressibility − mL − $^{1}$( ∂L/∂M )$_{v}$$\\_{W}$ (filled symbols) and scaled position fluctuations of the piston σ 2 $\\_{Z}$mg 0 /Lb ( α, α$\\_{P}$ ) T$\\_{P}$ ( empty symbols) as a function of the mass ratio, M/m . The different symbols correspond to different values of the coefficient of restitution for the collision between particles, α , as indicated in the insert. The straight line has a slope − 3 / 4, and it is a guide for the eye.\n\nNevertheless, the analysis carried out in ref. [19] indicates that the range of hydrodynamic gradients considered here exceeds the limit of validity of the Navier-Stokes approximation.\n\nSome of the main results can be summarized as follows: i) for large mass of the movable piston compared with the mass of the gas particles, the volume fluctuations are Gaussian with very good accuracy, ii) the square root of the second moment of their distribution scales with the square of the velocity of the vibrating wall at the bottom, i.e. in the same way as the amplitudes of the hydrodynamic fields in the gas, iii) by requiring the same relation between volume fluctuations and compressibility as in equilibrium systems to be verified, an “effective temperature” can be defined, iv) the effective temperature turns out to be proportional to the second moment of the velocity fluctuations of the piston, with a proportionality parameter that depends on the inelasticity of both the particle-particle\n\n18" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.660083252051162, + "doc_id": "8f6dd5e18ab343755f98fe7f4a5f7d93a039dd43041c16e1d7286791d4171976", + "edit_distance": 0.2708688245315162, + "f1_score": 0.9481132075471698, + "meteor": 0.7724105550280599, + "precision": 0.9617224880382775, + "pred_md": "w de at the divided points in our LS method. In the LS method, w de is continuous, but not smooth at the divided points, i.e., its derivative is not continuous at those points. In fact, w de in LS method can be made smooth at the divided points, such as by the relation\n\n\n\nwhere w ' i is the slope of linear expansion in the i th bin ( i ≥ 1 and w ' 0 = 0), and ∆ is related to the smoothed extent at the divided points. With this parameterization, one can still find out the turning positions of w de that are favored by observational data, and perturbations of DE can be calculated.\n\nFurthermore our results are also dependent on the data set we have used [32]. For example, although there is still a 2 σ deviation at z = 0 9 by using the widely-used data . set SnIa + CMB-shift R + BAO parameter A [33], now the best-fitted turning point in z ∈ (0 , 0 9) changes to . z = 0 39. Whatever, from the observational data we have used, a big . deviation of w de from -1 around z = 0 9 is found. . Unlike the deviations around z = 0 and z = 0 45, this deviation around . z = 0 9 does not to be reduced in the uncorrelated estimate. . At least, our result shows that if DE is dynamical it is more possible to find the deviation of w de from -1 around this redshift value.\n\nIf the EoS of DE is indeed of an oscillating behavior around -1, it is then not surprising that the cosmological constant always fits well with observational data because the oscillating behavior could be smeared in the luminosity distance. However, if the oscillation region of w de is wide enough (like the case of our best-fitted w de in Model I), DE may be distinguished confidently from the cosmological constant by more precise astronomical observations in the next generation. In addition, let us mention that an oscillating behavior of w de is also possibly due to some systematic errors in observational data, or due to some interactions between DE and dark matter [34].\n\n## Acknowledgments\n\nRGC thanks Y.G. Gong and B. Wang for some relevant discussions. This work was partially supported by NNSF of China (No. 10821504 and No. 10975168) and the National\n\n14", + "recall": 0.9348837209302325, + "true_md": "w$_{de}$ at the divided points in our LS method. In the LS method, w$_{de}$ is continuous, but not smooth at the divided points, i.e., its derivative is not continuous at those points. In fact, w$_{de}$ in LS method can be made smooth at the divided points, such as by the relation\n\nwhere w ′ i is the slope of linear expansion in the i th bin ( i ≥ 1 and w ′ 0 = 0), and Δ is related to the smoothed extent at the divided points. With this parameterization, one can still find out the turning positions of w$_{de}$ that are favored by observational data, and perturbations of DE can be calculated.\n\nFurthermore our results are also dependent on the data set we have used [32]. For example, although there is still a 2 σ deviation at z = 0 . 9 by using the widely-used data set SnIa + CMB-shift R + BAO parameter A [33], now the best-fitted turning point in z ∈ (0 , 0 . 9) changes to z = 0 . 39. Whatever, from the observational data we have used, a big deviation of w$_{de}$ from − 1 around z = 0 . 9 is found. Unlike the deviations around z = 0 and z = 0 . 45, this deviation around z = 0 . 9 does not to be reduced in the uncorrelated estimate. At least, our result shows that if DE is dynamical it is more possible to find the deviation of w$_{de}$ from − 1 around this redshift value.\n\nIf the EoS of DE is indeed of an oscillating behavior around − 1, it is then not surprising that the cosmological constant always fits well with observational data because the oscillating behavior could be smeared in the luminosity distance. However, if the oscillation region of w$_{de}$ is wide enough (like the case of our best-fitted w$_{de}$ in Model I), DE may be distinguished confidently from the cosmological constant by more precise astronomical observations in the next generation. In addition, let us mention that an oscillating behavior of w$_{de}$ is also possibly due to some systematic errors in observational data, or due to some interactions between DE and dark matter [34].\n\nRGC thanks Y.G. Gong and B. Wang for some relevant discussions. This work was partially supported by NNSF of China (No. 10821504 and No. 10975168) and the National\n\n14\n\n## Acknowledgments\n\n$$w$_{de}$ ( z ) = w$_{0}$ + m ∑ i =1 w ′ i − w ′ i − 1 2 ( z + Δ ln cosh( z − z i − 1 Δ ) cosh( z$_{i}$$_{−}$$_{1}$/ Δ) ) , (28)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8753424973831475, + "doc_id": "95d4b064e037d181bda3d77dc4879186cad8e03d5c67f1526ffbd4d2e550558f", + "edit_distance": 0.1063063063063063, + "f1_score": 0.9531914893617022, + "meteor": 0.9150228735755848, + "precision": 0.9655172413793104, + "pred_md": "6\n\nThe simplest wave functions which do this are powers of determinants of one of the complex matrices Z (these are wave functions describing many giant gravitons on top of each other, at weak coupling they are described by similar formulae involving operators of the full matrices [32, 33]. At strong coupling, the giant gravitons condense into a topology change once the gravitational backreaction is taken into account). The matrix Z is a diagonal matrix. The eigenvalues represent one of the three complex coordinates determining R 6 /similarequal C 3 as a complex manifold. Such wave functions are of the form\n\n\n\nwhere Z + X 1 + iX 2 for example, and Q is an arbitrary integer.\n\nWhen N is finite, the system (with the wave function) should be considered as a version of quantum geometry at finite values of /planckover2pi1 . The quantity 1 /N plays such a role in the AdS geometry. After all N 1 4 / measures the size of AdS in Planck units. Thus, finite N effects and how fluctuations depend on N can be said to encode quantum gravity corrections.\n\nThe idea of this paper is to gain some understanding of emergent quantum geometry. Since we do not have direct access to the ten dimensional geometry from current methods, we will use the quenched field theory geometry to explore the problem of convergence to large N and the problem of determining the shape of the geometry at finite N . A similar problem has been studied in [34, 35] for the case of fuzzy geometries of brane embeddings (where the brane configurations are non-abelian). In our case the notion of shape needs to be refined with respect to the thermodynamic limit. What we call geometry according to the prescription [5, 18] is characterized by the (support of the) large N density of eigenvalue distributions, properly rescaled by the size of the ground state, √ N . This can be shown to be a singular distribution of R 6 in the thermodynamic limit, namely the eigenvalues form a manifold of lower dimension, for some general class of BPS wave functions [5, 23]. However, this is just the saddle point description at large N of the wave function. This procedure does not take into account that the eigenvalues are discrete, or that there are fluctuations around this saddle point.\n\nAt finite N we expect that there are corrections to this geometric saddle point approximation of the wave function. These quantum corrections will be due both to granularity of the constituents (the system has finitely many eigenvalues in R 6 ), as well as due to the quantum spread of the wave function (so that the support of the wave function is not sin-", + "recall": 0.9411764705882353, + "true_md": "6\n\n$$ψ$_{Q}$ = det( Z ) $^{Q}$ψ$_{0}$ (1)$$\n\nThe simplest wave functions which do this are powers of determinants of one of the complex matrices Z (these are wave functions describing many giant gravitons on top of each other, at weak coupling they are described by similar formulae involving operators of the full matrices [32, 33]. At strong coupling, the giant gravitons condense into a topology change once the gravitational backreaction is taken into account). The matrix Z is a diagonal matrix. The eigenvalues represent one of the three complex coordinates determining R 6 ≃ C 3 as a complex manifold. Such wave functions are of the form\n\nwhere Z + X 1 + iX 2 for example, and Q is an arbitrary integer.\n\nWhen N is finite, the system (with the wave function) should be considered as a version of quantum geometry at finite values of ℏ . The quantity 1 /N plays such a role in the AdS geometry. After all N 1 / 4 measures the size of AdS in Planck units. Thus, finite N effects and how fluctuations depend on N can be said to encode quantum gravity corrections.\n\nThe idea of this paper is to gain some understanding of emergent quantum geometry.\n\nSince we do not have direct access to the ten dimensional geometry from current methods, we will use the quenched field theory geometry to explore the problem of convergence to large N and the problem of determining the shape of the geometry at finite N . A similar problem has been studied in [34, 35] for the case of fuzzy geometries of brane embeddings (where the brane configurations are non-abelian). In our case the notion of shape needs to be refined with respect to the thermodynamic limit. What we call geometry according to the prescription [5, 18] is characterized by the (support of the) large N density of eigenvalue distributions, properly rescaled by the size of the ground state, √$_{N}$$\\_{. This can be shown to}$ be a singular distribution of R 6 in the thermodynamic limit, namely the eigenvalues form a manifold of lower dimension, for some general class of BPS wave functions [5, 23]. However, this is just the saddle point description at large N of the wave function. This procedure does not take into account that the eigenvalues are discrete, or that there are fluctuations around this saddle point.\n\nAt finite N we expect that there are corrections to this geometric saddle point approx- imation of the wave function. These quantum corrections will be due both to granularity of the constituents (the system has finitely many eigenvalues in R $^{6}$), as well as due to the quantum spread of the wave function (so that the support of the wave function is not sin-" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4308035857070219, + "doc_id": "07008bc020f888555801b65767472d16d89df20d8d2b58d3c3dc427ba4847663", + "edit_distance": 0.5228758169934641, + "f1_score": 0.9649122807017544, + "meteor": 0.8829787234042554, + "precision": 0.9649122807017544, + "pred_md": "FIG. 2: Steady position distribution of the piston P l ( ) in both normal and logarithmic scales. The symbols are from the simulations while the solid lines are Gaussian with unity dispersion. The data correspond to three systems differing in the mass of the piston, as indicated. The coefficient of normal restitution for the particle collisions is α = 0 94. . The dimensionless length /lscript is defined 9\n\nFIG. 2: Steady position distribution of the piston P l ( ) in both normal and logarithmic scales. The symbols are from the simulations while the solid lines are Gaussian with unity dispersion. The data correspond to three systems differing in the mass of the piston, as indicated. The coefficient of normal restitution for the particle collisions is α = 0 94. . The dimensionless length /lscript is defined 9\n\nl", + "recall": 0.9649122807017544, + "true_md": "FIG. 2: Steady position distribution of the piston P ( l ) in both normal and logarithmic scales. The symbols are from the simulations while the solid lines are Gaussian with unity dispersion. The data correspond to three systems differing in the mass of the piston, as indicated. The coefficient of normal restitution for the particle collisions is α = 0 . 94. The dimensionless length ℓ is defined 9" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8475002110518681, + "doc_id": "57ae0751c848bf5176a9fe71744f801786ebfbf08c4f31c44fe5e6aac60cb8fb", + "edit_distance": 0.17857142857142858, + "f1_score": 0.972972972972973, + "meteor": 0.914963699308896, + "precision": 0.9863013698630136, + "pred_md": "arXiv:1002.2169v2 [cond-mat.soft] 3 Jun 2010\n\n## Microscopic implications of S-DNA\n\nStephen Whitelam ∗ 1 , Phillip L. Geissler 2 and Sander Pronk 3 1 The Molecular Foundry, Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory, Berkeley, CA 94720, USA 2 Department of Chemistry, University of California at Berkeley, Berkeley, CA 94720, USA 3 Center for Biomembrane Research, Department of Biochemistry & Biophysics, Stockholm University, SE-106 91 Stockholm, Sweden\n\n## Abstract\n\nRecent experiments [J. van Mameren et al. PNAS 106, 18231 (2009)] provide a detailed spatial picture of overstretched DNA, showing that under certain conditions the two strands of the double helix separate at about 65 pN. It was proposed that this observation rules out the existence of an elongated, hybridized form of DNA (S-DNA). Here we argue that the S-DNA picture is consistent with the observation of unpeeling during overstretching. We demonstrate that assuming the existence of S-DNA does not imply DNA overstretching to consist of the complete or near-complete conversion of the molecule from B- to Sform. Instead, this assumption implies in general a more complex dynamic coexistence of hybridized and unhybridized forms of DNA. We argue that such coexistence can rationalize several recent experimental observations.\n\n∗ swhitelam@lbl.gov\n\n1", + "recall": 0.96, + "true_md": "# Microscopic implications of S-DNA\n\nStephen Whitelam ∗ $^{1}$, Phillip L. Geissler2 and Sander Pronk 3\n\n$^{1}$The Molecular Foundry, Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory, Berkeley, CA 94720, USA\n\n$^{2}$Department of Chemistry, University of California at Berkeley, Berkeley, CA 94720, USA\n\n$^{3}$Center for Biomembrane Research, Department of Biochemistry & Biophysics, Stockholm University, SE-106 91 Stockholm, Sweden\n\nRecent experiments [J. van Mameren et al. PNAS 106, 18231 (2009)] provide a detailed spatial picture of overstretched DNA, showing that under certain conditions the two strands of the double helix separate at about 65 pN. It was proposed that this observation rules out the existence of an elongated, hybridized form of DNA (S-DNA). Here we argue that the S-DNA picture is consistent with the observation of unpeeling during overstretching. We demonstrate that assuming the existence of S-DNA does not imply DNA overstretching to consist of the complete or near-complete conversion of the molecule from B- to S- form. Instead, this assumption implies in general a more complex dynamic coexistence of hybridized and unhybridized forms of DNA. We argue that such coexistence can rationalize several recent experimental observations.\n\n∗ swhitelam@lbl.gov\n\n1\n\narXiv:1002.2169v2 [cond-mat.soft] 3 Jun 2010\n\n## Abstract" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "18d06c372c6955b162d5bd1684161dc8a016fca3b25b1b61a0d70667dfd14a70", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.999968, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "This figure \"Fig01.jpg\" is available in \"jpg\"GLYPH<10> format from:\n\nhttp://arxiv.org/ps/1001.4384v3", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "This figure \"Fig01.jpg\" is available in \"jpg\"GLYPH<10> format from:\n\nhttp://arxiv.org/ps/1001.4384v3" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.010640583293498703, + "doc_id": "be59d9abb5e882d93b7455beba1a94c1d7f57ce716f784b22c9c1866e934111c", + "edit_distance": 0.8986301369863013, + "f1_score": 0.7480916030534353, + "meteor": 0.16839776212964386, + "precision": 0.9074074074074074, + "pred_md": "that must be stored by the selected numerical method. For the purpose of illustrating the procedure the first n = 3 equations are:\n\n\n\n\n\nIn matrix form,\n\nA code called RTBC was written in C which employed the LU Factorization package to solve the complex valued tri-diagonal system of simultaneous linear equations numerically.\n\n12", + "recall": 0.6363636363636364, + "true_md": "that must be stored by the selected numerical method. For the purpose of illustrating the procedure the first n = 3 equations are:\n\nA code called RTBC was written in C which employed the LU Factorization package to solve the complex valued tri-diagonal system of simultaneous linear equations numerically.\n\n12\n\nIn matrix form,\n\n$$n = 1 Ψ 1 imax − 1 − l (0) $_{imax}$Ψ 1 imax = − Ψ 0 imax − 1 = b $^{0}$( imax ) (43)$$\n\n$$n = 2 Ψ 2 imax − 1 − l (0) $_{imax}$Ψ 2 imax = l 1 $_{imax}$Ψ 1 imax − Ψ 1 imax − 1 = b $^{1}$( imax ) (44)$$\n\n$$n = 3 Ψ 3 imax − 1 − l (0) $_{imax}$Ψ 3 imax = l 2 $_{imax}$Ψ 1 imax + l 1 $_{imax}$Ψ 2 imax − Ψ 2 imax − 1 = b $^{2}$( imax ) (45)$$\n\n    C − 1 0 0 0 · · · − 1 C − 1 0 0 · · · 0 − 1 C − 1 0 · · · . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 0 · · · − 1 C − 1 0 0 0 · · · − 1 l (0) imax         Ψ n 2 Ψ n 3 Ψ n 4 . Ψ n imax − 1 Ψ n imax     =     b (2) b (3) b (4) . b ( imax − 1) b ( imax )     (46)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.13513281915767217, + "doc_id": "382180b0d375f59e1dcef45a4c0b9df86333802671b341b5eef9041e07de5745", + "edit_distance": 0.7, + "f1_score": 0.8895705521472392, + "meteor": 0.2931355933889467, + "precision": 0.9602649006622517, + "pred_md": "two degenerate light sea quarks is:\n\n\n\nwhere we use the superscript '(2)' to distinguish the SU (2) low-energy constants from their SU (3) analogs in the previous section. The NLO expression for M B x is similar:\n\n\n\nThese results agree with the continuum partially-quenched calculation of Sharpe and Zhang in the limit a → 0 [23]. The unitary QCD expressions can easily be obtained by the replacement m x → m l . In the SU (2) theory, the effects of the dynamical strange quark are fully contained in the values of the low-energy constants, e.g. φ (2) 0 ( m h ). For simplicity of notation, however, we suppress the functional dependence of the coefficients on m h .\n\nNext we consider B s -type mesons composed of a b -quark and a heavy valence quark with mass m y . Because the SU (2) chiral effective Lagrangian includes only two light quark flavors, this requires an extension of SU (2) χ PT to the kaon sector, and the resulting theory is sometimes called Kaon SU (2) Chiral Perturbation Theory (K χ PT) [34, 87]. In this case, we take the limits of Eqs. (D2) and (D3) assuming\n\n\n\nThe resulting NLO expressions for Φ B y and M B y are:\n\n\n\n\n\nwhere we use the superscript '(s)' to distinguish the coefficients from those in Eqs. (D16) and (D17). Because the valence quark has been integrated out, there are no longer any\n\n56", + "recall": 0.8285714285714286, + "true_md": "two degenerate light sea quarks is:\n\nwhere we use the superscript “(2)” to distinguish the SU (2) low-energy constants from their SU (3) analogs in the previous section. The NLO expression for M$_{B}$$\\_{x}$ is similar:\n\n˜ These results agree with the continuum partially-quenched calculation of Sharpe and Zhang in the limit a → 0 [23]. The unitary QCD expressions can easily be obtained by the replacement m$_{x}$ → m$_{l}$ . In the SU (2) theory, the effects of the dynamical strange quark are fully contained in the values of the low-energy constants, e.g. φ (2) 0 ( m$_{h}$ ). For simplicity of notation, however, we suppress the functional dependence of the coefficients on m$_{h}$ .\n\nNext we consider B$_{s}$ -type mesons composed of a b -quark and a heavy valence quark with mass m$_{y}$ . Because the SU (2) chiral effective Lagrangian includes only two light quark flavors, this requires an extension of SU (2) χ PT to the kaon sector, and the resulting theory is sometimes called Kaon SU (2) Chiral Perturbation Theory (K χ PT) [34, 87]. In this case, we take the limits of Eqs. (D2) and (D3) assuming\n\nThe resulting NLO expressions for Φ$_{B}$$\\_{y}$ and M$\\_{B}$$_{y}$ are:\n\nwhere we use the superscript “(s)” to distinguish the coefficients from those in Eqs. (D16) and (D17). Because the valence quark has been integrated out, there are no longer any\n\n$$Φ$_{B}$$_{x}$ = φ (2) 0 { 1 − 1 + 3 ( g (2) B ∗ Bπ ) 2 (4 πf $^{(2)}$) 2 ℓ ( m 2 $_{xl}$) + 1 + 3 ( g (2) B ∗ Bπ ) 2 (4 πf $^{(2)}$) 2 ( 1 4 )[ ( m 2 L − m 2 $_{X}$) ˜ ℓ ( m 2 $_{X}$) + ℓ ( m 2 $_{X}$) ] + c (2) $_{sea}$m$_{l}$ + c (2) $_{val}$m$_{x}$ + c (2) a a 2 } , (D16)$$\n\n$$M$_{B}$$_{x}$ = β (2) 0 { 1 − 1 + 3 ( g (2) B ∗ Bπ ) 2 (4 πf $^{(2)}$) 2 2 ℓ ( m 2 $_{xl}$) − 1 − 3 ( g (2) B ∗ Bπ ) 2 (4 πf $^{(2)}$) 2 ℓ ( m 2 $_{X}$) + 1 (4 πf $^{(2)}$) 2 [ ( m 2 L − m 2 $_{X}$) ˜ ℓ ( m 2 $_{X}$) + ℓ ( m 2 $_{X}$) ] + d (2) $_{sea}$m$_{l}$ + d (2) $_{val}$m$_{x}$ + d (2) a a 2 } . (D17) These results agree with the continuum partially-quenched calculation of Sharpe and Zhang$$\n\n$$m$_{l}$ m$_{y}$ , m$_{l}$ m$_{h}$ ≪ 1 . (D18)$$\n\n$$Φ$_{B}$$_{y}$ = φ ( s ) 0 { 1 + c ( s ) $_{sea}$m$_{l}$ + c ( s ) a a 2 } , (D19)$$\n\n$$M$_{B}$$_{y}$ = β ( s ) 0 1 + d ( s ) $_{sea}$m$_{l}$ + d ( s ) a a 2 , (D20)$$\n\n56" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7653612051071683, + "doc_id": "8c3d48fcc0ffacf116f84a5bb1a50731d8256a6c71512bb389d588ac6086a54c", + "edit_distance": 0.2065972222222222, + "f1_score": 0.9391304347826086, + "meteor": 0.7845261322597222, + "precision": 0.9557522123893806, + "pred_md": "21\n\n## A. Notes on unitarity and the Higgs field\n\nAs any gauge theory in 5 space-time dimensions, the 5D-DBESS model has couplings with negative mass dimension and is therefore not renormalizable. In the KK expanded 4D theory emerging from the compactification of the extra dimension, the nonrenormalizability manifests as a partial wave unitarity violation at tree level at an energy scale proportional to the inverse square of the gauge coupling [75]. A detailed study of the unitarity properties of the model was beyond the scope of the present work, but it is still possible to give an estimate based on naive dimensional analysis. In flat space, the naive estimate for a gauge theory with dimensional coupling constant g 5 gives a cut-off Λ = (16 π 2 ) /g 2 5 [45].\n\nIn a warped space, the cut-off is dependent on the location along the fifth dimension: starting from Λ at the y = 0 brane, it is redshifted along the interval (as any other energy scale in the theory), getting down to Λ ' = Λ √ b πR ( ) upon reaching the y = πR brane. To get an estimate for the Kaluza-Klein 4D effective theory, we will use the most restrictive cut-off:\n\n\n\nIn addition to the one coming from the negative mass dimension bulk coupling g 5 (or equivalently from the infinite tower of KK excitations), the 5D-DBESS has another, more stringent unitarity bound: the one coming from the WW scattering. In this model, in fact, the longitudinal components of the electroweak gauge bosons are only coupled to the U field and, as a consequence, the corresponding scattering amplitudes violate partial wave unitarity at the same energy scale as in the Higgsless SM [61], that is Λ cut -off /similarequal 1 7 TeV. . The violation of unitarity is not postponed to higher scales as in the 5D Higgsless model [8, 10]. This situation exactly mirrors the one of the GD-BESS model [39, 60].\n\nHowever, this problem can be easily cured by generalizing the U field to a matrix containing an additional real scalar excitation ρ , mimicking the standard Higgs sector in the matrix formulation:\n\n\n\nJust as in the case of the SM, the exchange of the new scalar degree of freedom ρ cancels the growing with energy terms in the scattering of the longitudinal EW gauge bosons, delaying unitarity violation. A similar process of unitarization via the addition of scalar fields was also studied in the context of the D-BESS model in ref. [76].", + "recall": 0.9230769230769231, + "true_md": "21\n\n## A. Notes on unitarity and the Higgs field\n\nAs any gauge theory in 5 space-time dimensions, the 5D-DBESS model has couplings with negative mass dimension and is therefore not renormalizable. In the KK expanded 4D theory emerging from the compactification of the extra dimension, the nonrenormalizability manifests as a partial wave unitarity violation at tree level at an energy scale proportional to the inverse square of the gauge coupling [75]. A detailed study of the unitarity properties of the model was beyond the scope of the present work, but it is still possible to give an estimate based on naive dimensional analysis. In flat space, the naive estimate for a gauge theory with dimensional coupling constant g$_{5}$ gives a cut-off Λ = (16 π $^{2}$) /g 2 5 [45].\n\nIn a warped space, the cut-off is dependent on the location along the fifth dimension: starting from Λ at the y = 0 brane, it is redshifted along the interval (as any other energy scale in the theory), getting down to Λ ′ = Λ √ b ( πR ) upon reaching the y = πR brane. To get an estimate for the Kaluza-Klein 4D effective theory, we will use the most restrictive cut-off: 2\n\n√ In addition to the one coming from the negative mass dimension bulk coupling g$_{5}$ (or equivalently from the infinite tower of KK excitations), the 5D-DBESS has another, more stringent unitarity bound: the one coming from the W W scattering. In this model, in fact, the longitudinal components of the electroweak gauge bosons are only coupled to the U field and, as a consequence, the corresponding scattering amplitudes violate partial wave $^{unitarity at the same energy scale as in the Higgsless SM [61], that is Λ$\\_{cut}$}$− off ≃ 1 . 7 TeV. The violation of unitarity is not postponed to higher scales as in the 5D Higgsless model [8, 10]. This situation exactly mirrors the one of the GD-BESS model [39, 60].\n\nHowever, this problem can be easily cured by generalizing the U field to a matrix con- taining an additional real scalar excitation ρ , mimicking the standard Higgs sector in the matrix formulation:\n\nJust as in the case of the SM, the exchange of the new scalar degree of freedom ρ cancels the growing with energy terms in the scattering of the longitudinal EW gauge bosons, delaying unitarity violation. A similar process of unitarization via the addition of scalar fields was also studied in the context of the D-BESS model in ref. [76].\n\n$$$_{Λ}$′ = 16 π 2 g 2 5 √ b ( πR ) . (81) In addition to the one coming from the negative mass dimension bulk coupling g$_{5}$ (or$$\n\n$$U → M ≡ ρ √$_{2}$ U. (82)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.060427266723222246, + "doc_id": "1997cd8543a1aa902770300dcc3477b79b14be126a290b8dfaffac330cd13dff", + "edit_distance": 0.8323632130384168, + "f1_score": 0.8014981273408239, + "meteor": 0.19730401653335566, + "precision": 0.9304347826086956, + "pred_md": "12\n\nAgain, in this sector there is no massless solution, for the constant profile of a massless mode is incompatible with the BC (25). Also, the equation of motion and the BCs are again diagonal in the isospin index, so f 1 Rn = f 2 Rn . The right charged sector obeys the usual L 2 orthogonality property:\n\n\n\nwhere the factor 1 /g 2 5 has been inserted to compensate for the mass dimension of the integral, so that we can normalize: R m ≡ 1, again ensuring that the kinetic terms will have the canonical normalization.\n\n- · Finally, a neutral sector coming from the expansion of ( W 3 L M ) , ( W 3 R M ) and π 3 . The expansion has the form\n\n\n\nthe equation of motion and the BCs for the vector profiles are given by:\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n/negationslash\n\nIn contrast with the charged ones, the neutral sector admits a single massless solution; we have m N 0 = 0. Eqs. (29) and (30) imply for a massless mode that both f 3 Ln and\n\n and the pseudo-scalar profiles satisfy\n\n", + "recall": 0.7039473684210527, + "true_md": "Again, in this sector there is no massless solution, for the constant profile of a massless mode is incompatible with the BC (25). Also, the equation of motion and the BCs are again diagonal in the isospin index, so f 1 R n = f 2 $_{Rn}$. The right charged sector obeys the usual L 2 orthogonality property:\n\n( ) where the factor 1 /g 2 5 has been inserted to compensate for the mass dimension of the integral, so that we can normalize: R$_{m}$ ≡ 1, again ensuring that the kinetic terms will have the canonical normalization.\n\nthe equation of motion and the BCs for the vector profiles are given by:\n\n and the pseudo-scalar profiles satisfy\n\n( )∣ ∣ In contrast with the charged ones, the neutral sector admits a single massless solution; we have m$_{N}$$\\_{0}$ = 0. Eqs. (29) and (30) imply for a massless mode that both f 3 Ln and\n\n$$g 3 L,Rn = 1 m$_{N n}$ f 3 $_{L,Rn}$, if m$_{N n}$ ̸ = 0 g 3 L,Rn = 0 if m$_{N n}$ = 0 (32) c 3 n = ˜ v 2 m$_{n}$ ( f 3 Ln − f 3 R n )∣ ∣ $_{πR}$. In contrast with the charged ones, the neutral sector admits a single massless solution;$$\n\n$$ˆ Df 3 L,Rn = − m 2 $_{N n}$f 3 $_{L,Rn}$, (29) ∂$_{y}$f 3 L,Rn = 0 at y = 0 , (30)     ( ˜ g 2 g 2 $_{5}$∂$_{y}$ − b ( πR ) m 2 N n + ˜ g $^{2}$˜ v 2 4 ) f 3 Ln − ˜ g $^{2}$˜ v 2 4 f 3 R n = 0 ˜ g ′$_{2}$ g 2 5 ∂$_{y}$ − b ( πR ) m 2 N n + ˜ g $^{′$_{2}$}$˜ v 2 4 f 3 Rn − ˜ g $^{′$_{2}$}$˜ v 2 4 f 3 Ln = 0 at y = πR, (31) and the pseudo-scalar profiles satisfy$$\n\n$$W 3 $_{L µ}$( x, y ) = ∞ ∑ n =0 f 3 $_{Ln}$( y ) N ( n ) µ ( x ) , W 3 L $_{5}$( x, y ) = ∞ ∑ n =0 g 3 $_{Ln}$( y ) G ( n ) N ( x ) , W 3 $_{R µ}$( x, y ) = ∞ ∑ n =0 f 3 $_{R n}$( y ) N ( n ) µ ( x ) , W 3 R $_{5}$( x, y ) = ∞ ∑ n =0 g 3 $_{Rn}$( y ) G ( n ) N ( x ) , π $^{3}$( x ) = ∞ ∑ j =0 c 3 j G ( j $^{)}$( x ); (28)$$\n\n$$( f 1 , 2 $_{Rn}$, f 1 , 2 Rm ) ≡ 1 g 2 5 ∫ πR 0 dy f 1 , 2 $_{R n}$f 1 , 2 R m = R 2 $_{m}$δ$_{mn}$ , (27) 2 has been inserted to compensate for the mass dimension of the$$\n\n• Finally, a neutral sector coming from the expansion of ( W 3 $_{L}$)$_{M}$ , ( W 3 $_{R}$)$_{M}$ and π $^{3}$. The expansion has the form\n\n12" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6026068248923966, + "doc_id": "79df312bc7ceaae7577b6f79b11a72ddc8eb34d6c2d62448e2610cf64e25cd87", + "edit_distance": 0.34946236559139787, + "f1_score": 0.9121140142517814, + "meteor": 0.6826825600245604, + "precision": 0.964824120603015, + "pred_md": "center of mass of one of the molecules encountered the boundary . The boundary distance of 36Å was adjusted to reproduce the experimental density of water at room temperature. The equations of motion were solved using an implicit quaternion method 11 for the rotations and a Leap frog method for the translations. The timestep used was 1 fsec.\n\nIn our simulation we neglected electrostatic interactions with solvent outside the cube. We calculated the missing contribution to the solvation energy from a simple PCM model 12 . The simulated box was put into a cubic cavity in a dielectric continuum and the contribution to the solvation energy was calculated from the interaction between the charges within the box and the induced surface charges. It gave 13% of the total solvation energy. This value stayed rather constant along the trajectory. Therefore we assume that the essential changes of interaction with solvent molecules in the immediate surroundings are taken into account sufficiently.\n\nThe force field was designed to reproduce the local electrostatic interactions properly, which is especially important for the large sized PIC molecule with its extended π -electron system. It is based on a simplified version of the effective fragment model 13-15 . The charge distribution is approximated by distributed multipoles which were calculated with GAMESS on the basis of TZV/HF wavefunctions 16 . For the simulation only point charges q i and dipoles /vector p i were used which are centered at the positions of the nuclei and the bond centers. The Coulombic interaction energy is\n\n\n\nThe values of point charges and dipoles are given for the symmetry unique atoms in Table I.\n\nThe electronic spectra were calculated on the ZINDO/CI-S level 17 including the point monopoles and dipoles of all water molecules. The two lowest excited states of the dimer are to a large extent linear combinations of the lowest monomer excitations with only very small admixture of higher monomer excitations and of charge resonance states. Therefore we use a simple 2-state model to analyze the delocalized dimer states in terms of the local excitations A ∗ and B ∗ . The interaction matrix is\n\n\n\n3", + "recall": 0.8648648648648649, + "true_md": "center of mass of one of the molecules encountered the boundary . The boundary distance of 36Å was adjusted to reproduce the experimental density of water at room temperature. The equations of motion were solved using an implicit quaternion method 11 for the rotations and a Leap frog method for the translations. The timestep used was 1 fsec.\n\nIn our simulation we neglected electrostatic interactions with solvent outside the cube. We calculated the missing contribution to the solvation energy from a simple PCM model 12 . The simulated box was put into a cubic cavity in a dielectric continuum and the contribution to the solvation energy was calculated from the interaction between the charges within the box and the induced surface charges. It gave 13% of the total solvation energy. This value stayed rather constant along the trajectory. Therefore we assume that the essential changes of interaction with solvent molecules in the immediate surroundings are taken into account sufficiently.\n\nThe force field was designed to reproduce the local electrostatic interactions properly, which is especially important for the large sized PIC molecule with its extended π -electron system. It is based on a simplified version of the effective fragment model 13–15 . The charge distribution is approximated by distributed multipoles which were calculated with GAMESS on the basis of TZV/HF wavefunctions 16 . For the simulation only point charges q$_{i}$ and dipoles ⃗ p$_{i}$ were used which are centered at the positions of the nuclei and the bond centers. The Coulombic interaction energy is\n\nThe values of point charges and dipoles are given for the symmetry unique atoms in Table I.\n\nThe electronic spectra were calculated on the ZINDO/CI-S level 17 including the point monopoles and dipoles of all water molecules. The two lowest excited states of the dimer are to a large extent linear combinations of the lowest monomer excitations with only very small admixture of higher monomer excitations and of charge resonance states. Therefore we use a simple 2-state model to analyze the delocalized dimer states in terms of the local excitations A ∗ and B ∗ . The interaction matrix is\n\n3\n\n$$   E − Δ / 2 V V E + Δ / 2    (2)$$\n\n$$V Coul ij = q$_{i}$q$_{j}$ 4 πϵ 0 R$_{ij}$ + ⃗ R$_{ij}$ ( q$_{i}$ ⃗ p$_{j}$ − q$_{j}$⃗ p$_{i}$ ) 4 πϵ 0 R 3 ij + R 2 $_{ij}$⃗ p$_{i}$⃗ p$_{j}$ − 3( ⃗ R$_{ij}$⃗ p$_{i}$ )( ⃗ R$_{ij}$⃗ p$_{j}$ ) 4 πϵ 0 R 5 ij (1)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.17413437221677316, + "doc_id": "e0a0e81c809de5de9bf34d2e15aea9e8726bc5e6e578a0ef14b28c897a27542d", + "edit_distance": 0.6877729257641921, + "f1_score": 0.9056603773584905, + "meteor": 0.37083007970387205, + "precision": 0.96, + "pred_md": "where the total number of parameters is 1 + m with m ≥ 1. Alternatively, we can express w de as\n\n\n\nNow the parameters become w z ( n )'s, which are values of w de at the divided points and boundaries z n (0 ≤ n ≤ m ) . In this case we have\n\n\n\n\n\nwhere we have used z 0 = 0. For w de in the last bin z ∈ ( z m , ∞ ), we set it to be a constant w L , and\n\n\n\nNow the formula for H z ( ) is ready.\n\nThere is one more thing to be mentioned: once we have fitted our model with the data introduced in the next section, errors of w z ( i ) are correlated, i.e., the errors of w z ( i ) are dependent on each other. New parameters can be defined by transforming the covariance matrix of w z ( i ), so that errors of new parameters are decorrelated and do not entangle with each other. The new uncorrelated parameters are referred to as the principal components [10, 23], and they are directly related to their own locations (unlike the correlated case). So errors of the uncorrelated parameters are more interpretable and meaningful. For more discussions and implications of the uncorrelated parameters, we refer to the references [11, 14, 24]. In section IV, we will show both errors of correlated and uncorrelated parameters of w de . The uncorrelated technique we adopt from [11] is as follows.\n\n## 1. Get the covariance matrix\n\n\n\nwhere W is the vector of w z ( i ). The Fisher matrix F is defined by F = C -1 .\n\n- 2. Diagonalize the Fisher matrix by an orthogonal matrix O\n\n\n\n5", + "recall": 0.8571428571428571, + "true_md": "where the total number of parameters is 1 + m with m ≥ 1. Alternatively, we can express w$_{de}$ as\n\nNow the parameters become w ( z$_{n}$ )’s, which are values of w$_{de}$ at the divided points and boundaries z$_{n}$ (0 ≤ n ≤ m ) . In this case we have\n\nwhere we have used z$_{0}$ = 0. For w$_{de}$ in the last bin z ∈ ( z$_{m}$, ∞ ), we set it to be a constant w$_{L}$ , and\n\nNow the formula for H ( z ) is ready.\n\nThere is one more thing to be mentioned: once we have fitted our model with the data introduced in the next section, errors of w ( z$_{i}$ ) are correlated, i.e., the errors of w ( z$_{i}$ ) are dependent on each other. New parameters can be defined by transforming the covariance matrix of w ( z$_{i}$ ), so that errors of new parameters are decorrelated and do not entangle with each other. The new uncorrelated parameters are referred to as the principal components [10, 23], and they are directly related to their own locations (unlike the correlated case). So errors of the uncorrelated parameters are more interpretable and meaningful. For more discussions and implications of the uncorrelated parameters, we refer to the references [11, 14, 24]. In section IV, we will show both errors of correlated and uncorrelated parameters of w$_{de}$ . The uncorrelated technique we adopt from [11] is as follows.\n\nwhere W is the vector of w ( z$_{i}$ ). The Fisher matrix F is defined by F = C − $^{1}$.\n\n- 1. Get the covariance matrix\n\n- 2. Diagonalize the Fisher matrix by an orthogonal matrix O\n\n$$C = 〈 WW $^{T}$〉 − 〈 W 〉〈 W $^{T}$〉 (9)$$\n\n$$F = O $^{T}$Λ O, (10)$$\n\n$$F ( z > z$_{m}$ ) = F ( z$_{m}$ )( 1 + z 1 + z$_{m}$ ) 3(1+ w L ) (8)$$\n\n$$F ( z$_{n}$$_{−}$$_{1}$ < z ≤ z$_{n}$ ) = e 3 { [ w ( z n − $_{1}$) − w (0)]+ w ( z n ) − w ( z n − 1 ) z n − z n − 1 ( z − z n − $_{1}$) } ( 1 + z 1 + z$_{n}$$_{−}$$_{1}$ ) 3 w ( z n − 1 )(1+ z n ) − w ( z n )(1+ z n − 1 ) z n − z n − 1 × (1 + z ) 3 n − 1 ∏ i =1 ( 1 + z$_{i}$ 1 + z$_{i}$$_{−}$$_{1}$ ) 3 w ( z i − 1 )(1+ z $_{i}$) − w ( z $_{i}$)(1+ z i − 1 z i − z i − 1 , (1 ≤ n ≤ m ) (7)$$\n\n$$w$_{de}$ ( z$_{n}$$_{−}$$_{1}$ < z ≤ z$_{n}$ ) = w ( z$_{n}$$_{−}$$_{1}$ ) + w ( z$_{n}$ ) − w ( z$_{n}$$_{−}$$_{1}$ ) z$_{n}$ − z$_{n}$$_{−}$$_{1}$ ( z − z$_{n}$$_{−}$$_{1}$ ) , (1 ≤ n ≤ m ) (6)$$\n\n5" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.061867559136940406, + "doc_id": "da2e42e54528a1df33cd750dc1bab00bf8e238610c6c1a390ee4f4fafc1b640e", + "edit_distance": 0.8317191283292978, + "f1_score": 0.8044280442804427, + "meteor": 0.23605187495318009, + "precision": 0.9316239316239316, + "pred_md": "Notice that, because of the charge conjugation properties [9, 11], terms of the type\n\n\n\nare not allowed in the decomposition (29). Thus the longitudinal part of the propagator is the same as in the free approximation. Notice also that\n\n\n\nwhich will be useful in the next section when we will analyze the ST identity for the vectorial vertex function.\n\n## B. The vectorial vertex function\n\nThe ST identity for the vectorial fermion-photon vertex, the proper part of 〈 0 | T ψψA ( ¯ µ ) 0 , | 〉 can be derived by turning off all the sources after differentiating the functional equation (15) with respect the sources η y ( ), ¯( η x ), and ζ ( z ). The result is\n\nor, equivalently,\n\n\n\n\n\ni.e.,\n\n\n\nwhere ∂ x ∧ ∂ ˆ x = 1 2 ξθ µν ∂ ∂x µ ∂ ∂x ˆ ν . Notice that as consequence of this identity\n\n\n\nWe may translate the above equations into identities for the proper, one-particle irreducible, vertex functions. These functions are given by\n\n\n\n7", + "recall": 0.7077922077922078, + "true_md": "Notice that, because of the charge conjugation properties [9, 11], terms of the type\n\nare not allowed in the decomposition (29). Thus the longitudinal part of the propagator is the same as in the free approximation. Notice also that\n\nwhich will be useful in the next section when we will analyze the ST identity for the vectorial vertex function.\n\nThe ST identity for the vectorial fermion-photon vertex, the proper part of 〈 0 | T ( ψ ¯ ψA$_{µ}$ ) | 0 〉 , can be derived by turning off all the sources after differentiating the functional equation (15) with respect the sources η ( y ), ¯ η ( x ), and ζ ( z ). The result is\n\nor, equivalently,\n\ni.e.,\n\nwhere ∂$_{x}$ ∧ ∂$_{ˆ}$ x = 1 $_{2}$ξθ µν ∂ ∂x µ ∂ ∂ ˆ x $_{ν}$. Notice that as consequence of this identity\n\nWe may translate the above equations into identities for the proper, one-particle irreducible, vertex functions. These functions are given by\n\n7\n\n$$˜ q µ q ν + ˜ q ν q µ ˜ q 2 (30)$$\n\n$$q $^{µ}$D$_{µν}$ ( q ) = − i αq$_{ν}$ q 2 , (31)$$\n\n$$δ 〈 0 | T ( ψ ( x ) ¯ ψ ( y ) ¯ C ( z )) | 0 〉 = 0 .$$\n\n## B. The vectorial vertex function\n\n$$1 αe ∂ µ z δ $^{3}$W δ ¯ η ( x ) δη ( y ) δJ $^{µ}$( z ) ∣ = δ $^{3}$W δζ ( z ) δ ¯ η ( x ) δω ( y ) ∣ − δ $^{3}$W δζ ( z ) δη ( y ) δ ¯ ω ( x ) ∣ , (32)$$\n\n$$1 αe ∂ µ z 〈 0 | T ( ψ ( x ) ¯ ψ ( y ) A$_{µ}$ ( z )) | 0 〉 = i 〈 0 | T ( ¯ C ( z ) ψ ( x ) ¯ ψ ( y ) ⋆ C ( y )) | 0 〉 − i 〈 0 | T ( ¯ C ( z ) ¯ ψ ( y ) C ( x ) ⋆ ψ ( x )) | 0 〉 , (33)$$\n\n$$1 αe ∂ µ z 〈 0 | T ( ψ ( x ) ¯ ψ ( y ) A$_{µ}$ ( z )) | 0 〉 = ie i∂$_{x}$ ∧ ∂$_{ˆ}$ x 〈 0 | T ( ψ (ˆ x ) ¯ ψ ( y ) C ( x ) ¯ C ( z )) | 0 〉|$_{ˆ}$ x = x − ie i∂$_{y}$ ∧ ∂$_{ˆ}$ y 〈 0 | T ( ψ ( x ) ¯ ψ ( y ) C (ˆ y ) ¯ C ( z )) | 0 〉|$_{ˆ}$ y = $_{y}$, (34)$$\n\n$$〈 0 | T ( ψ ( x ) ¯ ψ ( y ) A$_{µ}$ ( z )) | 0 〉 = − ∫ d $^{4}$x $^{′}$d $^{4}$y $^{′}$d $^{4}$z $^{′}$S$_{F}$ ( x − x $^{′}$)Γ $^{ν}$( x $^{′}$, y $^{′}$, z $^{′}$) S$_{F}$ ( y ′ − y ) D$_{µν}$ ( z − z $^{′}$) , (35)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9045184395873882, + "doc_id": "5eed055af98b2f494b602e3926a8449b146006c06935a7bc02843fa178c4a20f", + "edit_distance": 0.06229508196721312, + "f1_score": 0.9716088328075709, + "meteor": 0.9429460725086466, + "precision": 0.9935483870967742, + "pred_md": "TABLE V: Lorentzian-fit parameters for the low-energy component of ISGDR strength distributions in the Sn isotopes, as extracted from MDA. The results from TAMU work, where available, are provided for comparison [19, 21].\n\nwith neutron excess predicted by this hybrid model might be unrealistic. They also suggest that the failure of the FSUGold to reproduce the ISGMR energies might be due to missing physics unrelated to the incompressibility of neutron-rich nuclear matter; as an example of such missing physics, they mention the superfluid character of the Sn isotopes resulting from their open-shell structure.\n\nCalculations have also become available recently from the RMF approach with the DDME2 interaction [75], and these reproduce the centroids of the ISGMR in the Sn isotopes rather well [68]. It is also seen that the DD-ME2 interaction falls within the constraints imposed by the experimental K ∞ and K τ values (see discussion below). Some concern has been expressed, however, that this agreement of the centroid energies might be just a coincidence since the ISGMR strength distributions for the Sn isotopes from this work appear to be not significantly different from those obtained from, for example, the FSUGold [76].\n\nIn calculations using the T5 Skyrme interaction within the quasiparticle time blocking approximation (QTBA) approach, Tselyaev et al. [69] have obtained the ISGMR strength distributions in all the Sn isotopes in good agreement with the experimental data, including the resonance widths. However, T5 has the associated K ∞ value of only 202 MeV, which is\n\n19", + "recall": 0.9506172839506173, + "true_md": "TABLE V: Lorentzian-fit parameters for the low-energy component of ISGDR strength distribu- tions in the Sn isotopes, as extracted from MDA. The results from TAMU work, where available, are provided for comparison [19, 21].\n\nwith neutron excess predicted by this hybrid model might be unrealistic. They also suggest that the failure of the FSUGold to reproduce the ISGMR energies might be due to missing physics unrelated to the incompressibility of neutron-rich nuclear matter; as an example of such missing physics, they mention the superfluid character of the Sn isotopes resulting from their open-shell structure.\n\nCalculations have also become available recently from the RMF approach with the DD- ME2 interaction [75], and these reproduce the centroids of the ISGMR in the Sn isotopes rather well [68]. It is also seen that the DD-ME2 interaction falls within the constraints imposed by the experimental K$_{∞}$ and K$_{τ}$ values (see discussion below). Some concern has been expressed, however, that this agreement of the centroid energies might be just a coincidence since the ISGMR strength distributions for the Sn isotopes from this work appear to be not significantly different from those obtained from, for example, the FSUGold [76].\n\nIn calculations using the T5 Skyrme interaction within the quasiparticle time blocking approximation (QTBA) approach, Tselyaev et al. [69] have obtained the ISGMR strength distributions in all the Sn isotopes in good agreement with the experimental data, including the resonance widths. However, T5 has the associated K$_{∞}$ value of only 202 MeV, which is\n\n19" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4730508876376113, + "doc_id": "913f83a257dd77e6f9b47758f642661c9a636ddc5a16c902b0450670e1d3242a", + "edit_distance": 0.5226781857451404, + "f1_score": 0.9565217391304348, + "meteor": 0.8574388425240573, + "precision": 0.9758064516129032, + "pred_md": "FIG. 3: (Color) 'Dynamic phase diagram' for 40 kbp fragments of λ -DNA with one free end, at salt concentration c =150 mM: compare the thermodynamic phase diagram of Fig 1. Color code: B-DNA (off-white), U-DNA (red), and S-DNA (blue). Here we use the 'optical trap' protocol described in Ref. [10] (trap stiffness 1 pN/nm) to stretch DNA at fixed temperature T at a rate of 1000 nm/s until a force f 0 is achieved. The loading rate is then set to zero, and the composition of the molecule is monitored (both molecular force and extension may vary, and force typically decreases slowly). We show molecular composition (fraction of B-DNA (off-white), U-DNA (red), and S-DNA (blue) denoted by bars on the vertical axis, where maximum height represents 40 kbp) for a molecule at specified temperature T for target force f 0 at times 0 and 10 seconds after setting the loading rate to zero. Two features are apparent. First, S-DNA is sufficiently long-lived to be seen after 10 seconds of waiting at low temperatures. Second, near and above room temperature, S-DNA is short-lived.\n\nFIG. 3: (Color) 'Dynamic phase diagram' for 40 kbp fragments of λ -DNA with one free end, at salt concentration c =150 mM: compare the thermodynamic phase diagram of Fig 1. Color code: B-DNA (off-white), U-DNA (red), and S-DNA (blue). Here we use the 'optical trap' protocol described in Ref. [10] (trap stiffness 1 pN/nm) to stretch DNA at fixed temperature T at a rate of 1000 nm/s until a force f 0 is achieved. The loading rate is then set to zero, and the composition of the molecule is monitored (both molecular force and extension may vary, and force typically decreases slowly). We show molecular composition (fraction of B-DNA (off-white), U-DNA (red), and S-DNA (blue) denoted by bars on the vertical axis, where maximum height represents 40 kbp) for a molecule at specified temperature T for target force f 0 at times 0 and 10 seconds after setting the loading rate to zero. Two features are apparent. First, S-DNA is sufficiently long-lived to be seen after 10 seconds of waiting at low temperatures. Second, near and above room temperature, S-DNA is short-lived.\n\n10", + "recall": 0.937984496124031, + "true_md": "FIG. 3: (Color) ‘Dynamic phase diagram’ for 40 kbp fragments of λ -DNA with one free end, at salt concentration c =150 mM: compare the thermodynamic phase diagram of Fig 1. Color code: B-DNA (off-white), U-DNA (red), and S-DNA (blue). Here we use the ‘optical trap’ protocol described in Ref. [10] (trap stiffness 1 pN/nm) to stretch DNA at fixed temperature T at a rate of 1000 nm/s until a force f$_{0}$ is achieved. The loading rate is then set to zero, and the composition of the molecule is monitored (both molecular force and extension may vary, and force typically decreases slowly). We show molecular composition (fraction of B-DNA (off-white), U-DNA (red), and S-DNA (blue) denoted by bars on the vertical axis, where maximum height represents 40 kbp) for a molecule at specified temperature T for target force f$_{0}$ at times 0 and 10 seconds after setting the loading rate to zero. Two features are apparent. First, S-DNA is sufficiently long-lived to be seen after 10 seconds of waiting at low temperatures. Second, near and above room temperature, S-DNA is short-lived.\n\n10" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.3393669017204259, + "doc_id": "ca3be8448b436c3678b03679f7655ca55c1392d0e337268e271a88b3d58ad10d", + "edit_distance": 0.6692913385826772, + "f1_score": 0.7534883720930233, + "meteor": 0.43965041199600147, + "precision": 0.9101123595505618, + "pred_md": "7\n\nFIG. 2: Interpretation of the cut link in the continuum limit of the GD-BESS model. The first half of the moose is 'flipped' and superimposed to the second half. In this way, the N th and the N +1 th sites are identified with the y = 0 brane, while the 1 st and the 2 N +1 th with the y = πR one.\n\nFIG. 2: Interpretation of the cut link in the continuum limit of the GD-BESS model. The first half of the moose is 'flipped' and superimposed to the second half. In this way, the N th and the N +1 th sites are identified with the y = 0 brane, while the 1 st and the 2 N +1 th with the y = πR one.\n\nfields living next to the cut link, A N and A N +1 .\n\nPutting all together, the 5D limit of GD-BESS is described by the action\n\n\n\nwhere:\n\n- · with the usual convention, the greek indices run from 0 to 3, while capital latin ones take the values (0 , 1 2 3 5), with '5' labelling the extra direction , , ,\n- · g is the determinant of the metric tensor g MN , defined by\n\n", + "recall": 0.6428571428571429, + "true_md": "7\n\nFIG. 2: Interpretation of the cut link in the continuum limit of the GD-BESS model. The first half of the moose is “flipped” and superimposed to the second half. In this way, the N th and the N + 1 th sites are identified with the y = 0 brane, while the 1 st and the 2 N + 1 th with the y = πR one.\n\nfields living next to the cut link, A N and A N $^{+1}$.\n\nPutting all together, the 5D limit of GD-BESS is described by the action\n\nwhere:\n\n$$S = ∫ d $^{4}$x ∫ πR 0 √ − g dy [ − 1 4 g 2 5 L a $_{MN}$L a MN − 1 4 g 2 5 R a $_{MN}$R a MN + δ ( y − πR ) ( − 1 4˜ g $_{2}$L a $_{µν}$L a µν − 1 4˜ g ′ $_{2}$R 3 $_{µν}$R 3 µν − ˜ v 2 4 ( D$_{µ}$U $_{)}$†$_{D}$ $^{µ}$U + fermion terms )] , (8)$$\n\n- • with the usual convention, the greek indices run from 0 to 3, while capital latin ones take the values (0 , 1 , 2 , 3 , 5), with “5” labelling the extra direction\n\n- • g is the determinant of the metric tensor g$_{MN}$ , defined by\n\n$$ds 2 = g$_{MN}$dx $^{M}$dxN ≡ b ( y ) η$_{µν}$dx $^{µ}$dxν + dy $^{2}$, (9)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8165537980411735, + "doc_id": "7116d33132c73c2a59c12e327da2e32e457ae39cea460faa9a8191526a67e7e2", + "edit_distance": 0.09628378378378379, + "f1_score": 0.8792710706150342, + "meteor": 0.9056173619972727, + "precision": 0.8853211009174312, + "pred_md": "Benard instability,' Phys. Rev. Lett. 88 , 164501 (2002).\n\n- [50] J. Huang, F. Kim, A. R. Tao, S. Connor, and P. Yang, 'Spontaneous formation of nanoparticle stripe patterns through dewetting,' Nat. Mater. 4 , 896-900 (2005).\n- [51] S. H. Lee, P. J. Yoo, S. J. Kwon, and H. H. Lee, 'Solvent-driven dewetting and rim instability,' J. Chem. Phys. 121 , 4346-4351 (2004).\n- [52] L. Xu, T. F. Shi, P. K. Dutta, and L. An, 'Rim instability by solvent-induced dewetting,' J. Chem. Phys. 127 , 144704 (2007).\n- [53] L. Xu, T. F. Shi, and L. J. An, 'The dewetting dynamics of the polymer thin film by solvent annealing,' J. Chem. Phys. 129 , 044904 (2008).\n- [54] M. Elbaum and S. G. Lipson, 'How does a thin wetted film dry up?' Phys. Rev. Lett. 72 , 3562-3565 (1994).\n- [55] N. Samid-Merzel, S. G. Lipson, and D. S. Tannhauser, 'Pattern formation in drying water films,' Phys. Rev. E 57 , 2906-2913 (1998).\n- [56] A. Padmakar, K. Kargupta, and A. Sharma, 'Instability and dewetting of evaporating thin water films on partially and completely wettable substrates,' J. Chem. Phys. 110 , 1735-1744 (1999).\n- [57] A. V. Lyushnin, A. A. Golovin, and L. M. Pismen, 'Fingering instability of thin evaporating liquid films,' Phys. Rev. E 65 , 021602 (2002).\n- [58] L. M. Pismen, 'Spinodal dewetting in a volatile liquid film,' Phys. Rev. E 70 , 021601 (2004).\n- [59] C. Poulard, O. Benichou, and A. M. Cazabat, 'Freely receding evaporating droplets,' Langmuir 19 , 8828-8834 (2003).\n- [60] Y. Gotkis, I. Ivanov, N. Murisic, and L. Kondic, 'Dynamic structure formation at the fronts of volatile liquid drops,' Phys. Rev. Lett. 97 , 186101 (2006).\n- [61] E. Pauliac-Vaujour and P. Moriarty, 'Meniscus-mediated organization of colloidal nanoparticles,' J. Phys. Chem. C 111 , 16255-16260 (2007).\n- [62] C. Gigault, K. Dalnoki-Veress, and J. R. Dutcher, 'Changes in the morphology of self-assembled polystyrene microsphere monolayers produced by annealing,' J. Colloid Interface Sci. 243 , 143-155 (2001).\n- [63] A. Oron, S. H. Davis, and S. G. Bankoff, 'Long-scale evolution of thin liquid films,' Rev. Mod. Phys. 69 , 931-980 (1997).\n- [64] U. Thiele, 'Thin film evolution equations from (evaporating) dewetting liquid layers to epitaxial growth,' J. Phys.-Cond. Mat. (2010), (at press).\n\n29", + "recall": 0.8733031674208145, + "true_md": "Benard instability,” Phys. Rev. Lett. 88 , 164501 (2002).\n\n- [50] J. Huang, F. Kim, A. R. Tao, S. Connor, and P. Yang, “Spontaneous formation of nanoparticle stripe patterns through dewetting,” Nat. Mater. 4 , 896–900 (2005).\n\n- [51] S. H. Lee, P. J. Yoo, S. J. Kwon, and H. H. Lee, “Solvent-driven dewetting and rim instability,” J. Chem. Phys. 121 , 4346–4351 (2004).\n\n- [52] L. Xu, T. F. Shi, P. K. Dutta, and L. An, “Rim instability by solvent-induced dewetting,” J. Chem. Phys. 127 , 144704 (2007).\n\n- [53] L. Xu, T. F. Shi, and L. J. An, “The dewetting dynamics of the polymer thin film by solvent anneal- ing,” J. Chem. Phys. 129 , 044904 (2008).\n\n- [54] M. Elbaum and S. G. Lipson, “How does a thin wetted film dry up?” Phys. Rev. Lett. 72 , 3562–3565 (1994).\n\n- [55] N. Samid-Merzel, S. G. Lipson, and D. S. Tannhauser, “Pattern formation in drying water films,” Phys. Rev. E 57 , 2906–2913 (1998).\n\n- [56] A. Padmakar, K. Kargupta, and A. Sharma, “Instability and dewetting of evaporating thin water films on partially and completely wettable substrates,” J. Chem. Phys. 110 , 1735–1744 (1999).\n\n- [57] A. V. Lyushnin, A. A. Golovin, and L. M. Pismen, “Fingering instability of thin evaporating liquid films,” Phys. Rev. E 65 , 021602 (2002).\n\n- [58] L. M. Pismen, “Spinodal dewetting in a volatile liquid film,” Phys. Rev. E 70 , 021601 (2004).\n\n- [59] C. Poulard, O. Benichou, and A. M. Cazabat, “Freely receding evaporating droplets,” Langmuir 19 , 8828–8834 (2003).\n\n- [60] Y. Gotkis, I. Ivanov, N. Murisic, and L. Kondic, “Dynamic structure formation at the fronts of volatile liquid drops,” Phys. Rev. Lett. 97 , 186101 (2006).\n\n- [61] E. Pauliac-Vaujour and P. Moriarty, “Meniscus-mediated organization of colloidal nanoparticles,” J. Phys. Chem. C 111 , 16255–16260 (2007).\n\n- [62] C. Gigault, K. Dalnoki-Veress, and J. R. Dutcher, “Changes in the morphology of self-assembled polystyrene microsphere monolayers produced by annealing,” J. Colloid Interface Sci. 243 , 143–155 (2001).\n\n- [63] A. Oron, S. H. Davis, and S. G. Bankoff, “Long-scale evolution of thin liquid films,” Rev. Mod. Phys. 69 , 931–980 (1997).\n\n- [64] U. Thiele, “Thin film evolution equations from (evaporating) dewetting liquid layers to epitaxial growth,” J. Phys.-Cond. Mat. (2010), (at press).\n\n29" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.3354503636257382, + "doc_id": "3636528977ad5c44b4d00a5efc3d4735086090e7224cf17ff31cb4a95cac4120", + "edit_distance": 0.6857923497267759, + "f1_score": 0.8528301886792452, + "meteor": 0.472409097833463, + "precision": 0.9495798319327731, + "pred_md": "FIG. 2: The same as Fig. 1 but for sin θ = 0 3. .\n\nFIG. 2: The same as Fig. 1 but for sin θ = 0 3. .\n\nmode into W -boson pair becomes kinematically available, it is not possible to obtain the desired DM abundance without the Higgs resonant annihilation because the bound on v ' given by Eq. (12) is stringent.\n\n## B. Direct detection of dark matter\n\nOur RH neutrino DM can elastically scatter off with nucleon, unlike another RH neutrino DM model has been proposed by Krauss et. al. [21] and studied [22, 23]. The main process is Higgs exchange and the resultant cross section for a proton is given by\n\n\n\nwith the hadronic matrix element\n\n\n\nand the effective vertex (see Appendix for notations)\n\n\n\nwhere m q is a mass of a quark with a Yukawa coupling y q , and f ( p ) Tq and f ( p ) TG are constants.\n\n7", + "recall": 0.773972602739726, + "true_md": "FIG. 2: The same as Fig. 1 but for sin θ = 0 . 3.\n\nmode into W -boson pair becomes kinematically available, it is not possible to obtain the desired DM abundance without the Higgs resonant annihilation because the bound on v ′ given by Eq. (12) is stringent.\n\nOur RH neutrino DM can elastically scatter off with nucleon, unlike another RH neutrino DM model has been proposed by Krauss et. al. [21] and studied [22, 23]. The main process is Higgs exchange and the resultant cross section for a proton is given by\n\nwith the hadronic matrix element\n\nand the effective vertex (see Appendix for notations)\n\nwhere m$_{q}$ is a mass of a quark with a Yukawa coupling y$_{q}$ , and f ( p ) Tq and f ( p ) TG are constants.\n\n$$σ ( p ) SI = 4 π ( m$_{p}$m$_{N}$ m$_{p}$ + m$_{N}$ ) 2 f 2 $_{p}$, (17)$$\n\n$$f$_{p}$ m$_{p}$ = ∑ q = u,d,s f ( p ) Tq α$_{q}$ m$_{q}$ + 2 27 f ( p ) TG ∑ c,b,t α$_{q}$ m$_{q}$ , (18)$$\n\n$$α$_{q}$ = − λ$_{N}$y$_{q}$ ( ∂ Φ ∂h 1 M 2 h ∂ Ψ ∂h + ∂ Φ ∂H 1 M 2 H ∂ Ψ ∂H ) , (19)$$\n\n## B. Direct detection of dark matter\n\n7" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4650189054115576, + "doc_id": "aa3499cc76e50405fd3f00c91da6d50afa7a1bb39aa8506923bbd6f21dcfe824", + "edit_distance": 0.4566813509544787, + "f1_score": 0.9154228855721392, + "meteor": 0.5604993608210955, + "precision": 0.9583333333333334, + "pred_md": "## V. LOCSITONS IN TRIANGULAR LATTICES: NORMAL POLARIZATION\n\nThe ' ⊥ ' configuration, where the incident field is polarized at the normal to the lattice plane, may be realized, for example, by creating a standing wave by two counter-propagating laser beams with the beam axes lying in the lattice plane. For systems much smaller than the laser wavelength, the incident field may be then assumed nearly uniform. Locsitons emerging in the ' ⊥ ' configuration are similar in many respects to 1D locsitons discussed in detail in [2], so here we only provide a brief overview of the ' ⊥ ' case and outline the most distinctive features appearing in this geometry.\n\nLet us start again with describing locsitons in unbounded lattices. The most general equation for the LF in the ' ⊥ ' case is obtained from Eq. (4) by setting E in ( r ) ‖ E L ( r ) ⊥ u :\n\n/negationslash\n\n\n\nAs in the ' ‖ ' case, we will assume here that the incident optical field is uniform, E in ( r ) ≡ E in , which will help us to build a clearer understanding of the locsiton behavior in 2D lattices. For an equilateral triangular lattice, Eq. (31) can be simplified using the NNA as\n\n\n\nEquation (32) has a uniform, Lorentz, solution, which is given by Eq. (8) with δ LL = δ ⊥ LL where\n\n\n\nwhich is three times the NNA value for δ LL in a 1D array of atoms if E in is perpendicular to the array (and the dipoles are aligned 'side-to-side') [2]. This is a consequence of each atom having now 6 instead of 2 neighbors.\n\nTo obtain the corresponding dispersion relation δ ( q ) for ' ⊥ ' locsitons in the lattice, we substitute the LF E L ( r ) in Eq. (32) as a sum of the Lorentz solution given by Eqs. (8) and (33) and 2D plane-wave excitations (12). This dispersion relation can be written as\n\n\n\nwhere, as in Sec. III B, θ n = θ 0 + nπ/ 3. In the long-wavelength limit,\n\n\n\n22", + "recall": 0.8761904761904762, + "true_md": "## V. LOCSITONS IN TRIANGULAR LATTICES: NORMAL POLARIZATION\n\nThe “ ⊥ ” configuration, where the incident field is polarized at the normal to the lattice plane, may be realized, for example, by creating a standing wave by two counter-propagating laser beams with the beam axes lying in the lattice plane. For systems much smaller than the laser wavelength, the incident field may be then assumed nearly uniform. Locsitons emerging in the “ ⊥ ” configuration are similar in many respects to 1D locsitons discussed in detail in [2], so here we only provide a brief overview of the “ ⊥ ” case and outline the most distinctive features appearing in this geometry.\n\nLet us start again with describing locsitons in unbounded lattices. The most general equation for the LF in the “ ⊥ ” case is obtained from Eq. (4) by setting E$_{in}$ ( r ) ‖ E$_{L}$ ( r ) ⊥ u :\n\nAs in the “ ‖ ” case, we will assume here that the incident optical field is uniform, E$_{in}$ ( r ) ≡ E$_{in}$ , which will help us to build a clearer understanding of the locsiton behavior in 2D lattices. For an equilateral triangular lattice, Eq. (31) can be simplified using the NNA as\n\nEquation (32) has a uniform, Lorentz, solution, which is given by Eq. (8) with δ$_{LL}$ = δ ⊥ LL where\n\nwhich is three times the NNA value for δ$_{LL}$ in a 1D array of atoms if E$_{in}$ is perpendicular to the array (and the dipoles are aligned “side-to-side”) [2]. This is a consequence of each atom having now 6 instead of 2 neighbors.\n\nTo obtain the corresponding dispersion relation δ ( q ) for “ ⊥ ” locsitons in the lattice, we substitute the LF E$_{L}$ ( r ) in Eq. (32) as a sum of the Lorentz solution given by Eqs. (8) and (33) and 2D plane-wave excitations (12). This dispersion relation can be written as\n\n$$E$_{L}$ ( r ) = E$_{in}$ ( r ) + Q 4 $^{$_{r}$′}$̸ = r ∑ lattice l 3 a | r ′ − r | $_{3}$E$_{L}$ ( r $^{′}$) . (31)$$\n\n$$E$_{L}$ ( r ) = E$_{in}$ + Q 4 ∑ $^{u}$K E$_{L}$ ( r + l a u$_{K}$ ) . (32)$$\n\n$$δ ⊥ LL = 3 2 Q a , (33)$$\n\n$$D NNA 2 ⊥ ( q ) ≡ 1 3 2 ∑ n =0 cos[ q cos( θ n − ψ )] = δ + i δ ⊥ LL , (34)$$\n\n$$D NNA 2 ⊥ ( q ) ≈ 1 − 1 4 q 2 + O ( q $^{4}$) , (35)$$\n\nwhere, as in Sec. III B, θ n = θ$_{0}$ + nπ/ 3. In the long-wavelength limit,\n\n22" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.45125014196197727, + "doc_id": "84b3a05c85940875dc4d1b53440671a32a24f9bdb0bc75ee08a9ce3f80388a71", + "edit_distance": 0.5276381909547738, + "f1_score": 0.9240506329113926, + "meteor": 0.8457552274535, + "precision": 0.9358974358974359, + "pred_md": "65\n\n50\n\n20\n\n30\n\nFIG. 7: (Color) Molecular compositions at 20 C as a function of sequence (horizontal axis) for 40 kbp · fragments of λ -DNA stretched to two target forces f 0 at three salt concentrations c . The stretching protocol is as Fig. 3 (force and molecular extension may vary after zeroing the loading rate). Each molecule possesses one free end. Low salt conditions and long waiting times favor unpeeling; at high salt conditions and short waiting times one is more likely to observe S-DNA.\n\nFIG. 7: (Color) Molecular compositions at 20 C as a function of sequence (horizontal axis) for 40 kbp · fragments of λ -DNA stretched to two target forces f 0 at three salt concentrations c . The stretching protocol is as Fig. 3 (force and molecular extension may vary after zeroing the loading rate). Each molecule possesses one free end. Low salt conditions and long waiting times favor unpeeling; at high salt conditions and short waiting times one is more likely to observe S-DNA.\n\n14", + "recall": 0.9125, + "true_md": "FIG. 7: (Color) Molecular compositions at 20 ◦ C as a function of sequence (horizontal axis) for 40 kbp fragmen ts of λ -DNA stretched to two target forces f$_{0}$ at three salt concentrations c . The stretching protocol is as Fig. 3 (force and molecular extension may vary after zeroing the loading rate). Each molecule possesses one free end. Low salt conditions and long waiting times favor unpeeling; at high salt conditions and short waiting times one is more likely to observe S-DNA.\n\n14" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6993162970324157, + "doc_id": "3dedf9006c7630f86d6067b12a124bf355c6bca80f4a76027e97bc8a7514b39e", + "edit_distance": 0.2655172413793103, + "f1_score": 0.9666666666666666, + "meteor": 0.7603140898088051, + "precision": 0.9747899159663865, + "pred_md": "in the ratios. We therefore average the APE and HYP determinations to obtain our final results. After adding the statistical and systematic errors for each link smearing in quadrature, we compute the average assuming that the two determinations are 100% correlated using the method of Ref. [79]:\n\n\n\n\n\nwhere the errors reflect the combined statistical and systematic uncertainties. Although we computed these quantities in the static b -quark limit, the inclusion of the neglected 1 /m b corrections (which we estimate to be about 2%) produces a negligible change in the total errors in Eqs. (86) and (87) given the size of our other uncertaintites; thus our results can be directly compared to phenomenological determinations and other lattice QCD results using relativistic b -quarks. As shown in Fig. 9, our results agree with the published results of the HPQCD Collaboration ( ξ = 1 258 . ± 0 025 . stat. ± 0 021 . sys. ) [14] and the preliminary results of the Fermilab Lattice and MILC Collaborations ( ξ = 1 205 . ± 0 037 . stat. ± 0 034 . sys ) [15].\n\nAlthough our results have significantly larger errors than the other N f = 2 + 1 flavor determinations, in this work we have demonstrated the viability of our lattice computation method. In particular, we have introduced the new approach of using SU (2) heavy-light meson chiral perturbation theory to extrapolate N f = 2+1 lattice QCD results for B -meson quantities to the physical quark masses. The largest sources of error in our calculation are from statistics and the chiral extrapolation, and we expect to reduce the sizes of both in a future work that analyzes the 24 3 domain-wall ensembles with the same lattice spacing [34]. Some of the 24 3 ensembles contain almost three times as many configurations as we have analyzed in this work. Furthermore, the use of a larger spatial volume will allow us to simulate at lighter valence and sea quark masses. Once we have made these improvements, our results will provide a valuable cross-check of these important inputs to the CKM unitarity triangle analysis and determination of the ratio of CKM matrix elements | V td | / V | ts | .\n\n## Acknowledgments\n\nWe thank S. Aoki, S.D. Cohen, C. Dawson, E. Gamiz, C. Jung, A. Lenz, M. Lin, and N. Yamada for useful discussions.\n\n43", + "recall": 0.9586776859504132, + "true_md": "in the ratios. We therefore average the APE and HYP determinations to obtain our final results. After adding the statistical and systematic errors for each link smearing in quadra- ture, we compute the average assuming that the two determinations are 100% correlated using the method of Ref. [79]:\n\nwhere the errors reflect the combined statistical and systematic uncertainties. Although we computed these quantities in the static b -quark limit, the inclusion of the neglected 1 /m$_{b}$ corrections (which we estimate to be about 2%) produces a negligible change in the total errors in Eqs. (86) and (87) given the size of our other uncertaintites; thus our results can be directly compared to phenomenological determinations and other lattice QCD results using relativistic b -quarks. As shown in Fig. 9, our results agree with the published results of the HPQCD Collaboration ( ξ = 1 . 258 ± 0 . 025$_{stat.}$ ± 0 . 021$_{sys.}$) [14] and the preliminary results of the Fermilab Lattice and MILC Collaborations ( ξ = 1 . 205 ± 0 . 037$_{stat.}$ ± 0 . 034$_{sys}$) [15]. Although our results have significantly larger errors than the other N$_{f}$ = 2 + 1 flavor\n\n± ± Although our results have significantly larger errors than the other N$_{f}$ = 2 + 1 flavor determinations, in this work we have demonstrated the viability of our lattice computation method. In particular, we have introduced the new approach of using SU (2) heavy-light meson chiral perturbation theory to extrapolate N$_{f}$ = 2+1 lattice QCD results for B -meson quantities to the physical quark masses. The largest sources of error in our calculation are from statistics and the chiral extrapolation, and we expect to reduce the sizes of both in a future work that analyzes the 24 3 domain-wall ensembles with the same lattice spacing [34]. Some of the 24 3 ensembles contain almost three times as many configurations as we have analyzed in this work. Furthermore, the use of a larger spatial volume will allow us to simulate at lighter valence and sea quark masses. Once we have made these improvements, our results will provide a valuable cross-check of these important inputs to the CKM unitarity triangle analysis and determination of the ratio of CKM matrix elements | V$_{td}$ | / | V$_{ts}$ | .\n\nWe thank S. Aoki, S.D. Cohen, C. Dawson, E. Gamiz, C. Jung, A. Lenz, M. Lin, and N. Yamada for useful discussions.\n\n## Acknowledgments\n\n43\n\n$$f$_{B}$$_{s}$ f$_{B}$$_{d}$ = 1 . 15(12) (86)$$\n\n$$ξ = 1 . 13(12) , (87)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8019040255280925, + "doc_id": "d19d3eb49082028d4c8c9d28dde645f1a7c14a659640c48204bb0705f51c3ef5", + "edit_distance": 0.13513513513513514, + "f1_score": 0.976525821596244, + "meteor": 0.8749845866932052, + "precision": 0.985781990521327, + "pred_md": "## I. INTRODUCTION\n\nThe nonvanishing neutrino masses have been confirmed by various neutrino oscillation phenomena and indicate the evidence of new physics beyond the Standard Model. The most attractive idea to naturally explain the tiny neutrino masses is the seesaw mechanism [1], in which the right-handed (RH) neutrinos singlet under the SM gauge group are introduced. The minimal gauged U (1) B -L model based on the gauge group SU (3) C × SU (2) L × U (1) Y × U (1) B -L [2] is an elegant and simple extension of the SM, in which the RH neutrinos of three generations are necessarily introduced because of the gauge and gravitational anomaly cancellations. In addition, the mass of RH neutrinos arises associated with the U (1) B -L gauge symmetry breaking.\n\nAlthough the scale of the B -L gauge symmetry breaking is basically arbitrary as long as phenomenological constraints are satisfied, one interesting option is to take it to be the TeV scale [3]. It has been recently pointed out [4] that when the classical conformal invariance is imposed on the minimal U (1) B -L model, the symmetry breaking scale appears to be the TeV scale naturally. If this is the case, all new particles, the Z ' gauge boson, the B -L Higgs boson H and the RH neutrinos appear at the TeV scale unless the U (1) B -L gauge coupling is extremely small, and they can be discovered at Large Hadron Collider [5-8]. Then we may be able to understand the relation between the gauge symmetry breaking and the origin of neutrino masses.\n\nAlthough such a TeV scale model is interesting and appealing, one might think that the absence of dark matter (DM) candidate is a shortcoming of this model. A sterile RH neutrino with mass of the order of MeV is one possibility [9]. In this paper, we propose a very simple idea to introduce the DM candidate in the minimal gauged U (1) B -L model. We introduce the Z 2 parity into the model and impose one of three RH neutrinos to be odd, while the others even. In this way, the Z 2 -odd RH neutrino becomes stable and the DM candidate. Note that two RH neutrinos are enough to reconcile with the observed neutrino oscillation data, with a prediction of one massless light neutrino. Therefore, without introducing any additional new dynamical degrees of freedom, the DM particle arises in the minimal gauged U (1) B -L model.\n\nThe paper is organized as follows. In the next section, we briefly describe our model. In section III, we estimate the thermal relic density of the RH neutrino and identify the model\n\n2", + "recall": 0.9674418604651163, + "true_md": "## I. INTRODUCTION\n\nThe nonvanishing neutrino masses have been confirmed by various neutrino oscillation phenomena and indicate the evidence of new physics beyond the Standard Model. The most attractive idea to naturally explain the tiny neutrino masses is the seesaw mechanism [1], in which the right-handed (RH) neutrinos singlet under the SM gauge group are introduced. The minimal gauged U (1)$_{B}$ − L model based on the gauge group SU (3)$_{C}$ × SU (2)$_{L}$ × U (1)$_{Y}$ × U (1)$_{B}$ − L [2] is an elegant and simple extension of the SM, in which the RH neutrinos of three generations are necessarily introduced because of the gauge and gravitational anomaly cancellations. In addition, the mass of RH neutrinos arises associated with the U (1)$_{B}$ − L gauge symmetry breaking.\n\nAlthough the scale of the B − L gauge symmetry breaking is basically arbitrary as long as phenomenological constraints are satisfied, one interesting option is to take it to be the TeV scale [3]. It has been recently pointed out [4] that when the classical conformal invariance is imposed on the minimal U (1)$_{B}$ − L model, the symmetry breaking scale appears to be the TeV scale naturally. If this is the case, all new particles, the Z ′ gauge boson, the B − L Higgs boson H and the RH neutrinos appear at the TeV scale unless the U (1)$_{B}$ − L gauge coupling is extremely small, and they can be discovered at Large Hadron Collider [5–8]. Then we may be able to understand the relation between the gauge symmetry breaking and the origin of neutrino masses.\n\nAlthough such a TeV scale model is interesting and appealing, one might think that the absence of dark matter (DM) candidate is a shortcoming of this model. A sterile RH neutrino with mass of the order of MeV is one possibility [9]. In this paper, we propose a very simple idea to introduce the DM candidate in the minimal gauged U (1)$_{B}$ − L model. We introduce the Z$_{2}$ parity into the model and impose one of three RH neutrinos to be odd, while the others even. In this way, the Z$_{2}$ -odd RH neutrino becomes stable and the DM candidate. Note that two RH neutrinos are enough to reconcile with the observed neutrino oscillation data, with a prediction of one massless light neutrino. Therefore, without introducing any additional new dynamical degrees of freedom, the DM particle arises in the minimal gauged U (1)$_{B}$ − L model.\n\nThe paper is organized as follows. In the next section, we briefly describe our model. In section III, we estimate the thermal relic density of the RH neutrino and identify the model\n\n2" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8485650641308425, + "doc_id": "171384ba2d5c5afe1fff04486d8c6cdaae69bc89cd0b4c2cb527d204ed6172f1", + "edit_distance": 0.12710280373831775, + "f1_score": 0.9652351738241308, + "meteor": 0.9157173301540713, + "precision": 0.9833333333333333, + "pred_md": "2-point and 3-point lattice correlation functions and extract the decay constants and mixing matrix elements in Sec. IV, and extrapolate these results to the physical light-quark masses using a phenomenologically-motivated function based on next-to-leading order (NLO) SU (2) heavy-meson chiral perturbation theory in Sec. V. In Section VI we estimate the contributions of the various systematic uncertainties to f B s /f B d and ξ , discussing each item in the error budget separately. We present our final results and conclude in Section VII.\n\nThis paper also contains four appendices. Appendix A specifies the SU (3) projection methods that are used in our APE and HYP-smeared gauge links. In App. B some details of the perturbative formulae used to match from continuum QCD to HQET as well as for the HQET running are presented. Appendix C discusses the large ground state degeneracy present in HQET and how it can be exploited to compute B -meson mixing matrix elements using localized sources and sinks. The SU (3) and SU (2) NLO HM χ PT expressions for the B -meson decay constants and mixing matrix elements relevant for N f = 2 + 1 domain-wall lattice simulations are provided in App. D; some of these results have not been presented previously in the literature.\n\n## II. LATTICE ACTIONS AND PARAMETERS\n\nIn this section we briefly describe our numerical lattice simulations. We use the unquenched lattices generated by the RBC and UKQCD Collaborations which include the effects of 2+1 dynamical flavors of domain-wall quarks [19]. We calculate the decay constants and matrix elements on configurations with a lattice spacing of a -1 = 1 729(28) GeV [34] . and an approximate spatial volume of L 3 ≈ (1 8 fm) . . 3 For each ensemble, the masses of the up and down sea quarks are degenerate and the mass of the strange sea quark is slightly larger than its physical value. In order to distinguish the dynamical quark masses used in our simulations from the physical u , d , and s -quark masses, we denote the lighter sea quark mass by m l and the heavier sea quark mass by m h . Our lightest pion mass is approximately 430 MeV. Table I summarizes the parameters of the dynamical domain-wall ensembles used in our analyses.\n\nIn Section II A we present the domain-wall fermion action used for both the valence and sea light u , d , and s quarks. Next, in Sec. II B, we show the Iwasaki gauge action used for the gluon fields. Finally, we discuss the static action used for the heavy b quarks in Sec. II C.\n\n6", + "recall": 0.9477911646586346, + "true_md": "2-point and 3-point lattice correlation functions and extract the decay constants and mixing matrix elements in Sec. IV, and extrapolate these results to the physical light-quark masses using a phenomenologically-motivated function based on next-to-leading order (NLO) SU (2) heavy-meson chiral perturbation theory in Sec. V. In Section VI we estimate the contribu- tions of the various systematic uncertainties to f$_{B}$$\\_{s}$/f$\\_{B}$$_{d}$ and ξ , discussing each item in the error budget separately. We present our final results and conclude in Section VII.\n\nThis paper also contains four appendices. Appendix A specifies the SU (3) projection methods that are used in our APE and HYP-smeared gauge links. In App. B some details of the perturbative formulae used to match from continuum QCD to HQET as well as for the HQET running are presented. Appendix C discusses the large ground state degeneracy present in HQET and how it can be exploited to compute B -meson mixing matrix elements using localized sources and sinks. The SU (3) and SU (2) NLO HM χ PT expressions for the B -meson decay constants and mixing matrix elements relevant for N$_{f}$ = 2 + 1 domain-wall lattice simulations are provided in App. D; some of these results have not been presented previously in the literature.\n\nIn this section we briefly describe our numerical lattice simulations. We use the un- quenched lattices generated by the RBC and UKQCD Collaborations which include the ef- fects of 2+1 dynamical flavors of domain-wall quarks [19]. We calculate the decay constants and matrix elements on configurations with a lattice spacing of a − 1 = 1 . 729(28) GeV [34] and an approximate spatial volume of L 3 ≈ (1 . 8 fm) $^{3}$. For each ensemble, the masses of the up and down sea quarks are degenerate and the mass of the strange sea quark is slightly larger than its physical value. In order to distinguish the dynamical quark masses used in our simulations from the physical u , d , and s -quark masses, we denote the lighter sea quark mass by m$_{l}$ and the heavier sea quark mass by m$_{h}$ . Our lightest pion mass is approximately 430 MeV. Table I summarizes the parameters of the dynamical domain-wall ensembles used in our analyses.\n\nIn Section II A we present the domain-wall fermion action used for both the valence and sea light u , d , and s quarks. Next, in Sec. II B, we show the Iwasaki gauge action used for the gluon fields. Finally, we discuss the static action used for the heavy b quarks in Sec. II C.\n\n## II. LATTICE ACTIONS AND PARAMETERS\n\n6" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.3507742282027133, + "doc_id": "5d5c2cd99d16b94dfc43f72e8bf426e06e727dd1e537e02d1a9d2ac335ef29f9", + "edit_distance": 0.8097165991902834, + "f1_score": 0.8840579710144928, + "meteor": 0.3869380747731432, + "precision": 0.9312977099236641, + "pred_md": "first derivative is given by:\n\n\n\nThe second space derivative is\n\n\n\nThe future time level occurs at n, the past time level at n -1 and the algebraic relationship for the one-dimensional approximation of the Schrödinger equation is:\n\n\n\nThen the Crank-Nicholson difference equation is:\n\n\n\nwith C = (2 -iρ ) , C ' = (2 + iρ ) , and ρ = 4 /triangle x 2 /triangle t .\n\nThe algebraic relationship develops a tri-diagonal system represented by the following equation\n\n\n\nof a set of imax simultaneous linear equations, where imax is the maximum number of grid points , imax -1 equations come from the interior scheme and one equation comes from the Right Transparent Boundary Condition (at i = imax ). The left boundary at i = 0 is still a Dirichlet Boundary Condition and it is set to zero in order to force the function to stay in the domain.\n\nThe code presented in this work was based on the design of DTBCs derived by the work of Arnold 8,9 with the inclusion of modifications that adapt DTBCs to the particular example of the escape problem. The original problem as conceived by Arnold and derived in the dissertation of his student, Earhardt 10 , evaluates the transport of a quantum particle that enters one side of a finite domain and exits from the opposite side.\n\nThe Right TBC is:\n\n10", + "recall": 0.8413793103448276, + "true_md": "first derivative is given by:\n\nThe second space derivative is\n\n− △ The algebraic relationship develops a tri-diagonal system represented by the following equation\n\nThe code presented in this work was based on the design of DTBCs derived by the work of Arnold 8,9 with the inclusion of modifications that adapt DTBCs to the particular example of the escape problem. The original problem as conceived by Arnold and derived in the dissertation of his student, Earhardt $^{10}$, evaluates the transport of a quantum particle that enters one side of a finite domain and exits from the opposite side.\n\nThe Right TBC is:\n\n10\n\n̂ of a set of imax simultaneous linear equations, where imax is the maximum number of grid points , imax − 1 equations come from the interior scheme and one equation comes from the Right Transparent Boundary Condition (at i = imax ). The left boundary at i = 0 is still a Dirichlet Boundary Condition and it is set to zero in order to force the function to stay in the domain.\n\n$$̂ A Ψ n = ⃗ b, (37) simultaneous linear equations, where imax is the maximum number of grid$$\n\nThe future time level occurs at n, the past time level at n − 1 and the algebraic relationship for the one-dimensional approximation of the Schrödinger equation is:\n\n$$f$_{xx}$ | n + 1 2 i = 1 2 ( f$_{xx}$ | n +1 i + f$_{xx}$ | n i ) . (35)$$\n\nThen the Crank-Nicholson difference equation is:\n\n$$f$_{t}$ | n + 1 2 i = f n +1 i − f n i △ t . (34)$$\n\n$$− Ψ n i +1 + C Ψ n i − Ψ n i − 1 = Ψ n − 1 i +1 − C ′$_{Ψ}$ n − 1 i + Ψ n − 1 i 1 (36)$$\n\nwith C = (2 − iρ ) , C ′ = (2 + iρ ) , and ρ = $^{4}$△ x 2 △ t . The algebraic relationship develops a tri-diagonal system represented by the following\n\n$$i ( Ψ n i − Ψ n − 1 i △ t ) = − 1 4 ( Ψ n i +1 − 2Ψ n i + Ψ n i − 1 △ x 2 + Ψ n − 1 i +1 − 2Ψ n − 1 i + Ψ n − 1 i 1 △ x 2 ) .$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.2552979178080319, + "doc_id": "b2b0a6c1e03eb55e7b119962920f12d96828ae255cd94d49c4dba0962ef5d3c3", + "edit_distance": 0.6128654970760234, + "f1_score": 0.891891891891892, + "meteor": 0.40949649261779353, + "precision": 0.953757225433526, + "pred_md": "parameter to be consistent with the current observations. We also calculate the scattering cross section between the DM particle and nucleon and discuss the implication for the direct DM search experiments. We summarize our results in the section IV. Our notations and the formulas used in our analysis are listed in Appendix.\n\n## II. THE MINIMAL GAUGED U (1) B -L MODEL WITH Z 2 PARITY\n\nThe model is based on the gauge group SU (3) C × SU (2) L × U (1) Y × U (1) B -L . Additional fields besides the standard model fields are a gauge field Z ' µ of the U (1) B -L , a SM singlet B -L Higgs boson Ψ with two U (1) B -L charge, and three RH neutrinos N i which are necessary for the gauge and gravitational anomaly cancellations. In describing the RH neutrinos, we use the four component representation of RH neutrino constructed from the Weyl spinor ν R i ,\n\n\n\nFor the two RH neutrinos, N 1 and N 2 , we assign Z 2 parity even, while odd for N 3 , so that the RH neutrino N 3 is stable and, hence, the DM candidate.\n\nDue to the additional gauge symmetry U (1) B -L , the covariant derivative for each fields is given by\n\n\n\nwhere D ( SM ) µ is the covariant derivative in the SM, and q B -L is the charge of each fields under the U (1) B -L with its gauge coupling g B -L .\n\nYukawa interactions relevant for the neutrino masses are given by\n\n\n\nwhere ˜ = Φ -iτ 2 Φ for Φ being the SM Higgs doublet, and without loss of generality we have ∗ worked out in the basis where the second term in the right-hand-side is in flavor diagonal for RH neutrinos. Because of the Z 2 parity, the DM candidate N 3 has no Yukawa couplings with the left-handed lepton doublets.\n\nThe general Higgs potential for the SU (2) L doublet Φ and a singlet B -L Higgs Ψ is generally given by\n\n\n\n3", + "recall": 0.8375634517766497, + "true_md": "parameter to be consistent with the current observations. We also calculate the scattering cross section between the DM particle and nucleon and discuss the implication for the direct DM search experiments. We summarize our results in the section IV. Our notations and the formulas used in our analysis are listed in Appendix.\n\nThe model is based on the gauge group SU (3)$_{C}$ × SU (2)$_{L}$ × U (1)$_{Y}$ × U (1)$_{B}$ − $_{L}$. Additional fields besides the standard model fields are a gauge field Z ′ µ of the U (1)$_{B}$ − $_{L}$, a SM singlet B − L Higgs boson Ψ with two U (1)$_{B}$ − L charge, and three RH neutrinos N$_{i}$ which are necessary for the gauge and gravitational anomaly cancellations. In describing the RH neutrinos, we use the four component representation of RH neutrino constructed from the Weyl spinor ν$_{R}$$\\_{i}$ ,\n\n  For the two RH neutrinos, N$_{1}$ and N$_{2}$ , we assign Z$_{2}$ parity even, while odd for N$_{3}$ , so that the RH neutrino N$_{3}$ is stable and, hence, the DM candidate.\n\nDue to the additional gauge symmetry U (1)$_{B}$ − $_{L}$, the covariant derivative for each fields is given by\n\nwhere D ( SM ) µ is the covariant derivative in the SM, and q$_{B}$ − L is the charge of each fields under the U (1)$_{B}$ − L with its gauge coupling g$_{B}$ − $_{L}$.\n\nYukawa interactions relevant for the neutrino masses are given by\n\nwhere ˜ Φ = − iτ$_{2}$ Φ ∗ for Φ being the SM Higgs doublet, and without loss of generality we have worked out in the basis where the second term in the right-hand-side is in flavor diagonal for RH neutrinos. Because of the Z$_{2}$ parity, the DM candidate N$_{3}$ has no Yukawa couplings with the left-handed lepton doublets.\n\nThe general Higgs potential for the SU (2)$_{L}$ doublet Φ and a singlet B − L Higgs Ψ is generally given by\n\n## II. THE MINIMAL GAUGED U $^{(1)$\\_{B}$}$− L MODEL WITH Z$_{2}$ PARITY\n\n$$N$_{i}$ ≡   ν$_{R}$$_{i}$ ϵ ν ∗ R$_{i}$   , (1) N$_{2}$ , we assign Z$_{2}$ parity even, while odd for N$_{3}$ , so that$$\n\n$$D$_{µ}$ = D ( SM ) µ − iq$_{B}$ − $_{L}$g$_{B}$ − $_{L}$Z ′ $_{µ}$, (2)$$\n\n$$L int = 3 ∑ α =1 2 ∑ i =1 y$_{αi}$ ¯ L$_{α}$ ˜ Φ N$_{i}$ − 1 2 3 ∑ i =1 λ$_{R}$$_{i}$ ¯ N$_{i}$ Ψ P$_{R}$N$_{i}$ + h . c ., (3)$$\n\n$$V (Φ , Ψ) = m 2 1 | Φ | 2 + m 2 | Ψ | 2 + λ$_{1}$ | Φ | 4 + λ$_{2}$ | Ψ | 4 + λ$_{3}$ | Φ | $^{2}$| Ψ | $^{2}$. (4)$$\n\n3" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.96958879049723, + "doc_id": "5a7402a80f6a3b9c9b3b7b604b6373a7d0911498883f7c17b69e1e6e6b214854", + "edit_distance": 0.03416856492027335, + "f1_score": 0.9823008849557522, + "meteor": 0.9887546472008735, + "precision": 0.9866666666666667, + "pred_md": "28\n\nerrors of extrapolation make the determination of α done here somewhat unreliable. The best way to reduce errors is to have larger simulations and to improve the understanding of the limit k →∞ . What we see is that k /similarequal 14 is still too low. We did not know this ahead of the simulation and unfortunately larger values of k were not recorded. This decision was made ahead of the simulations: we only stored moments of distributions rather than full configurations. Full configurations generate very large data files in order to get large enough statistics. Due to various limitations, we opted for this approach. In a sense, we have performed this analysis as a blind analysis on the data. Consider however, that the information we have gathered is important from another perspective. If one sets out to do large simulations, the problems of data management is an issue. Our exploration gives us some rather precise information of how much data we need to keep and in what type of format.\n\nAs a further thought, one expects that there are corrections to the scaling behavior that would involve some power series of q . Such corrections would require much more data to do a proper fit, as well as a systematic understanding of the functional form of the correction. If this is studied, the dominant scaling exponent (that with the smallest power of α ) would be revealed for q small.\n\nIt would certainly be interesting to study these puzzles further and to match some properties to the gravity theory in observables that can be matched on both sides with better understanding (for example the energies of string states, as was done for the ground state in [18]).\n\n## IV. CONCLUSION\n\nIn this paper we have examined the problem of extracting geometric data from a system that exhibits emergent geometry in a thermodynamic limit where the number of particles N in a statistical mechanical system becomes large. The geometric data we computed was one single parameter: the radius of a feature, that depends functionally on a variable defining a one parameter family of wave functions of the system.\n\nIn order to measure this geometric feature, we needed some scheme to define the shape parameter at finite N . We chose observables that were simple to calculate numerically and that have a reasonable behavior at large N as given by our theoretical expectations", + "recall": 0.9779735682819384, + "true_md": "28\n\n## IV. CONCLUSION\n\nerrors of extrapolation make the determination of α done here somewhat unreliable. The best way to reduce errors is to have larger simulations and to improve the understanding of the limit k → ∞ . What we see is that k ≃ 14 is still too low. We did not know this ahead of the simulation and unfortunately larger values of k were not recorded. This decision was made ahead of the simulations: we only stored moments of distributions rather than full configurations. Full configurations generate very large data files in order to get large enough statistics. Due to various limitations, we opted for this approach. In a sense, we have performed this analysis as a blind analysis on the data. Consider however, that the information we have gathered is important from another perspective. If one sets out to do large simulations, the problems of data management is an issue. Our exploration gives us some rather precise information of how much data we need to keep and in what type of format.\n\nAs a further thought, one expects that there are corrections to the scaling behavior that would involve some power series of q . Such corrections would require much more data to do a proper fit, as well as a systematic understanding of the functional form of the correction.\n\nIf this is studied, the dominant scaling exponent (that with the smallest power of α ) would be revealed for q small.\n\nIt would certainly be interesting to study these puzzles further and to match some prop- erties to the gravity theory in observables that can be matched on both sides with better understanding (for example the energies of string states, as was done for the ground state in [18]).\n\nIn this paper we have examined the problem of extracting geometric data from a system that exhibits emergent geometry in a thermodynamic limit where the number of particles N in a statistical mechanical system becomes large. The geometric data we computed was one single parameter: the radius of a feature, that depends functionally on a variable defining a one parameter family of wave functions of the system.\n\nIn order to measure this geometric feature, we needed some scheme to define the shape parameter at finite N . We chose observables that were simple to calculate numerically and that have a reasonable behavior at large N as given by our theoretical expectations" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5782463136850137, + "doc_id": "dbbcd93b84286c4b3f0b79473a6e7925e97d71a999ea38db27500a9c4a2952eb", + "edit_distance": 0.3555240793201133, + "f1_score": 0.9385964912280703, + "meteor": 0.6961818120420047, + "precision": 0.963963963963964, + "pred_md": "substrate and force equilibria at the free surface, and applies a long-wave approximation. Under the assumption that concentrations equilibrate rapidly over the film thickness, we obtain coupled non-linear evolution equations for the film thickness profile h x, t ( ) and the amount of nanoparticles per unit length h p = φh , where φ is the volume concentration of the nanoparticles. Note, that h p corresponds to the local thickness of the nanoparticle layer when all the solvent is evaporated. The resulting evolution equation for the film thickness is Eq. (1) above and focusing on the influence of particle-independent capillarity and wettability only, the energy functional F h [ ] is given by Eq. (2) above. Note that the viscosity η depends on the particle concentration. Following Refs. [88, 89, 91, 92] we use the Quemada law for dense suspensions [93-95]\n\n\n\nwhere φ c = 0 64 . corresponds to random close packing of spherical particles. For the nanoparticle volume per length h p = φh one obtains the following evolution equation:\n\n\n\nwhere the particle concentration dependent diffusion coefficient D φ ( ) is related to the viscosity by the Einstein relation D φ ( ) = kT/ πRη φ 6 ( ) , where R is the radius of the nanoparticles [96].\n\nWe illustrate results obtained employing this thin film theory using the single example of a receding dewetting front for a partially wetting film. We use the disjoining pressure and material constants for the liquid considered in Ref. [57], where the evaporative and convective dewetting of a film of volatile liquid is studied. We add, however, the nanoparticles to the system. The expression that we employ for the local free energy term in Eq. (2) is:\n\n\n\nwhere the parameters characterising the interaction between the liquid film and the surface are the apolar and polar spreading coefficients S LW and S P , respectively, the Debye length l 0 and the Born repulsion length d 0 [57]. The resulting disjoining pressure Π = -∂ f h ( h ) allows for a stable precursor film (thickness h precursor ) and also has a second (larger) thickness ( h 0 ) that corresponds to a secondary minimum of the underlying energy functional. See Refs. [11, 97] for studies of film and drop states for similar disjoining pressures. Our results are calculated for a system where the profiles only vary in one Cartesian direction ( x ), corresponding to a straight dewetting front. However, our results may also be interpreted as applying to a circular flat drop whose front remains\n\n19", + "recall": 0.9145299145299145, + "true_md": "substrate and force equilibria at the free surface, and applies a long-wave approximation. Under the assumption that concentrations equilibrate rapidly over the film thickness, we obtain coupled non-linear evolution equations for the film thickness profile h ( x, t ) and the amount of nanoparticles per unit length h$_{p}$ = φh , where φ is the volume concentration of the nanoparticles. Note, that h$_{p}$ corresponds to the local thickness of the nanoparticle layer when all the solvent is evaporated. The resulting evolution equation for the film thickness is Eq. (1) above and focusing on the influence of particle-independent capillarity and wettability only, the energy functional F [ h ] is given by Eq. (2) above. Note that the viscosity η depends on the particle concentration. Following Refs. [88, 89, 91, 92] we use the Quemada law for dense suspensions [93–95]\n\nwhere φ$_{c}$ = 0 . 64 corresponds to random close packing of spherical particles. For the nanoparticle volume per length h$_{p}$ = φh one obtains the following evolution equation:\n\nwhere the particle concentration dependent diffusion coefficient D ( φ ) is related to the viscosity by the Einstein relation D ( φ ) = kT/ 6 πRη ( φ ) , where R is the radius of the nanoparticles [96]. We illustrate results obtained employing this thin film theory using the single example of a re- ceding dewetting front for a partially wetting film. We use the disjoining pressure and material constants for the liquid considered in Ref. [57], where the evaporative and convective dewetting of a film of volatile liquid is studied. We add, however, the nanoparticles to the system. The expression that we employ for the local free energy term in Eq. (2) is:\n\nwhere the parameters characterising the interaction between the liquid film and the surface are the apolar and polar spreading coefficients S$_{LW}$ and S$_{P}$ , respectively, the Debye length l$_{0}$ and the Born repulsion length d$_{0}$ [57]. The resulting disjoining pressure Π = − ∂$_{h}$f ( h ) allows for a stable precursor film (thickness h$_{precursor}$ ) and also has a second (larger) thickness ( h$_{0}$ ) that corresponds to a secondary minimum of the underlying energy functional. See Refs. [11, 97] for studies of film and drop states for similar disjoining pressures. Our results are calculated for a system where the profiles only vary in one Cartesian direction ( x ), corresponding to a straight dewetting front. However, our results may also be interpreted as applying to a circular flat drop whose front remains\n\n19\n\n$$η ( φ ) = η$_{0}$ ( 1 − φ φ$_{c}$$^{)}$$^{−}$$^{2}$ (8)$$\n\n$$∂$_{t}$ ( φh ) = ∇ ·$^{[}$ φQ$_{c}$ ∇ δF δh$^{]}$ + ∇ · [ D ( φ ) h ∇ φ ] , (9)$$\n\n$$f ( h ) = S$_{LW}$ d 2 0 h 2 + S$_{P}$ exp$^{(}$ d$_{0}$ − h l$_{0}$ ) , (10)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.006900076156829934, + "doc_id": "25bfef926b821fe0664c30387f8a20e81770e9dae86db867e7c057ea91e7ee5f", + "edit_distance": 0.9236051502145923, + "f1_score": 0.7404580152671755, + "meteor": 0.13375051669518626, + "precision": 0.9238095238095239, + "pred_md": "where we have used the ghost propagator (46) and the inverse of the photon propagator\n\n\n\nwhich satisfy\n\n\n\nUsing the energy-momentum conservation at the vertices Γ µνλ ( p, q, k ) and G ν λ ' ( p, q, k ), so that\n\n\n\nand\n\n\n\nwe get\n\n\n\n## IV. SLAVNOV-TAYLOR IDENTITIES AT ONE-LOOP: EXPLICIT CALCULATIONS\n\n## A. The vectorial vertex function\n\nThe ST identities derived previously are valid only in a formal way since the radiative corrections contain ultraviolet divergences. To eliminate these divergences counterterms must be introduced so that the action for noncommutative QED 4 becomes\n\n\n\nwhere G µν = ∂ A µ ν -∂ A ν µ .\n\nWe begin by considering the one-loop contributions to the vectorial vertex function. Writing the Γ ˜ µ ( p, p + ), q S -1 ( p + ) and q ˜ ( H p,p + ) expansions as q\n\n\n\n\n\n11", + "recall": 0.6178343949044586, + "true_md": "where we have used the ghost propagator (46) and the inverse of the photon propagator\n\nwhich satisfy\n\nUsing the energy-momentum conservation at the vertices Γ$_{µνλ}$( p, q, k ) and G$_{ν}$ ′ $_{λ}$( p, q, k ), so that\n\nand\n\nwe get\n\nThe ST identities derived previously are valid only in a formal way since the radiative corrections contain ultraviolet divergences. To eliminate these divergences counterterms must be introduced so that the action for noncommutative QED$_{4}$ becomes\n\nwhere G$_{µν}$ = ∂$_{µ}$A$_{ν}$ − ∂$_{ν}$A$_{µ}$ .\n\nWe begin by considering the one-loop contributions to the vectorial vertex function. Writing the ˜ Γ $^{µ}$( p, p + q ), S − $^{1}$( p + q ) and ˜ H ( p, p + q ) expansions as\n\n## IV. SLAVNOV-TAYLOR IDENTITIES AT ONE-LOOP: EXPLICIT CALCULATIONS\n\n## A. The vectorial vertex function\n\n$$iD − 1 $_{µν}$( q ) = − i { ( q $^{2}$g$_{µν}$ − q$_{µ}$q$_{ν}$ ) [1 + Π$_{T}$( q $^{2}$)] − q$_{µ}$q$_{ν}$ α − Π$_{θ}$( q $^{2}$)˜ q$_{µ}$ ˜ q$_{ν}$ } , (65)$$\n\n$$q $^{µ}$D − 1 $_{µν}$( q ) = − 1 α q $^{2}$q$_{ν}$ . (66)$$\n\n$$Γ$_{µνλ}$( p, q, k ) = (2 π ) $^{4}$δ$^{4}$( p + q + k ) ˜ Γ$_{µνλ}$( p, q, − p − q ) (67)$$\n\n$$G$_{λν}$ ′ ( p, q, k ) = (2 π ) $^{4}$δ$^{4}$( p + q + k ) ˜ G$_{λν}$ ′ ( p, q, − p − q ) , (68)$$\n\n$$p µ ˜ Γ$_{µνλ}$( p, q, k )[1 + b ( p $^{2}$)] = ˜ G$_{λν}$ ′ ( p, q, k ) { ( q $^{2}$g ν ′ ν − q ν $^{′}$q$_{ν}$ )[1 + Π$_{T}$( q $^{2}$)] + Π$_{θ}$ ( q $^{2}$)˜ q ν $^{′}$˜ q$_{ν}$ } (69) + ˜ G$_{νλ}$ ′ ( p, k, q ) { [ k $^{2}$g λ ′ λ − k λ $^{′}$k$_{λ}$ ][1 + Π$_{T}$( k $^{2}$)] + Π$_{θ}$ ( k $^{2}$) ˜ k λ $^{′}$˜ k$_{λ}$ } .$$\n\n$$S = ∫ d $^{4}$x [ − Z$_{3}$ 4 G$_{µν}$G µν − ieZ$_{1}$ 2 [ A$_{µ}$, A$_{ν}$ ]$_{⋆}$ G µν + e $^{2}$Z$_{4}$ 4 [ A$_{µ}$, A$_{ν}$ ]$_{⋆}$[ A $^{µ}$, A$^{ν}$]$_{⋆}$ + Z$_{2}$ ¯ ψi/ ∂ψ − ( m + δm ) ¯ ψψ + e Z$_{1}$$_{F}$ ¯ ψ ⋆ / Aψ − 1 2 α ( ∂$_{µ}$A $^{µ}$) 2 + ˜ Z$_{3}$∂$_{µ}$ ¯ C∂ $^{µ}$C − ie ˜ Z$_{1}$∂$_{µ}$ ¯ C ⋆ [ A $^{µ}$, C ]$_{⋆}$ ] , (70)$$\n\n$$˜ Γ $^{µ}$( p, p + q ) = Z$_{1}$$_{F}$ γ $^{µ}$eip ∧ q + Λ $^{µ}$( p, p + q ) e ip ∧ $^{q}$, (71)$$\n\n$$˜ H$_{i}$ ( p, p + q ) = [ Z$_{i}$$_{+4}$e ip ∧ q + B$_{i}$ ( p, p + q ) e ip ∧ q ] for i = 1 , 2 (72) 11$$\n\n11" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.23405897111786372, + "doc_id": "4c260c9b4c5c6fc09bbda28563e04994152b864350825313b1cb4a34d05a96ad", + "edit_distance": 0.7142857142857143, + "f1_score": 0.8582375478927202, + "meteor": 0.38123167155425214, + "precision": 0.9411764705882353, + "pred_md": "\n\n- ii ) In the potential, the reality condition requires also that\n\n\n\nAt the location of the throat this amounts to\n\n\n\nor after some manipulation it yields\n\n\n\nThis is equivalent to\n\n\n\niii ) Our last constraint condition concerns, the positivity of the energy density, which means that\n\n\n\nThis implies, from (31) that\n\nor equivalently\n\n\n\n\n\nIt is remarkable to observe now that the foregoing constraints ( i -iii ) on our parameters can all be expressed as a single constraint condition, namely\n\n\n\nWe plot ˜ V '' (˜) from (26) for various fixed values of mass and charge, as a projection into a the plane with coordinates β and ˜ a . 0 In other words, we search and identify the regions for which ˜ V '' (˜) a > 0, in 3 -dimensional figures considered as a projection in the ( β, a ˜ ) plane. 0 The metric function f ( r ) and energy density ˜ σ 0 > 0 , behavior also are given in Fig.s 1-4. It is evident from Fig.s 1-4 that for increasing charge the stability regions shrink to smaller\n\n8", + "recall": 0.7887323943661971, + "true_md": "$$1 − m ˜ a 4 0 + q 2 ˜ a 6 0 ≥ 0 . (37)$$\n\n$$A 2 + B 3 ≥ 0 . (38)$$\n\n$$( − π ˜ a 3 0 4 ˜ σ 0 ) 2 + ( − ˜ a 2 0 8 + 1 − f (˜ a 0 ) 2 ) 3 ≥ 0 (39)$$\n\n$$f (˜ a 0 ) − 2 + ˜ a 2 0 2 ≤ 0 . (40)$$\n\n$$0 ≤ 1 − m ˜ a 4 0 + q 2 ˜ a 6 0 ≤ ( 4 ˜ a 2 0 − 1 ) 2 . (41) ) Our last constraint condition concerns, the positivity of the energy density, which$$\n\n$$˜ σ 0 > 0 . (42)$$\n\n$$[ 3 ˜ a 0 + 4 ˜ a 3 0 ( f (˜ a 0 ) − 3) ] < 0 (43)$$\n\n$$0 ≤ 1 − m ˜ a 4 0 + q 2 ˜ a 6 0 < 4 ( 4 ˜ a 2 0 − 1 ) 2 . (44) It is remarkable to observe now that the foregoing constraints ( i − iii ) on our parameters$$\n\n$$0 ≤ 1 − m ˜ a 4 0 + q 2 ˜ a 6 0 ≤ ( 4 ˜ a 2 0 − 1 ) 2 . (45)$$\n\n8\n\nii ) In the potential, the reality condition requires also that\n\nAt the location of the throat this amounts to\n\nor after some manipulation it yields\n\nThis is equivalent to\n\n( ) iii ) Our last constraint condition concerns, the positivity of the energy density, which means that\n\nThis implies, from (31) that\n\nor equivalently\n\n( ) It is remarkable to observe now that the foregoing constraints ( i − iii ) on our parameters can all be expressed as a single constraint condition, namely\n\nWe plot ˜ V $^{′′}$(˜ a ) from (26) for various fixed values of mass and charge, as a projection into the plane with coordinates β and ˜ a 0 . In other words, we search and identify the regions for which ˜ V $^{′′}$(˜ a ) > 0, in 3 − dimensional figures considered as a projection in the ( β, ˜ a 0 ) plane. The metric function f ( r ) and energy density ˜ σ > 0 , behavior also are given in Fig.s 1-4.\n\n− The metric function f ( r ) and energy density ˜ σ 0 > 0 , behavior also are given in Fig.s 1-4.\n\nIt is evident from Fig.s 1-4 that for increasing charge the stability regions shrink to smaller" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9478066610444809, + "doc_id": "d277d5cd0079fef597a9874ddf073ad1e7118e85a72c9cddd5fc82f118b95e59", + "edit_distance": 0.15, + "f1_score": 0.9868995633187774, + "meteor": 0.9943669279727904, + "precision": 0.9826086956521739, + "pred_md": "arXiv:1002.0542v1 [cond-mat.stat-mech] 2 Feb 2010\n\n## Volume fluctuations and compressibility of a vibrated granular gas\n\nJ. Javier Brey and M.J. Ruiz-Montero\n\nF´ ısica Te´ orica, Universidad de Sevilla, E-41080, Sevilla, Spain\n\nApartado de Correos 1065,\n\n(Dated: October 29, 2018)\n\n## Abstract\n\nThe volume fluctuations in the steady state reached by a vibrated granular gas of hard particles confined by a movable piston on the top are investigated by means of event driven simulations. Also, a compressibility factor, measuring the response in volume of the system to a change in the mass of the piston, is introduced and measured. From the second moment of the volume fluctuations and the compressibility factor, an effective temperature is defined, by using the same relation as obeyed by equilibrium molecular systems. The interpretation of this effective temperature and its relationship with the granular temperature of the gas, and also with the velocity fluctuations of the movable piston, is discussed. It is found that the ratio of the temperature based on the volume fluctuations to the temperature based on the piston kinetic energy, obeys simple dependencies on the inelasticity and on the piston-particle mass ratio.\n\nPACS numbers: 45.70.-n,47.70.Nd,51.10.+y\n\n1", + "recall": 0.9912280701754386, + "true_md": "# Volume fluctuations and compressibility of a vibrated granular gas\n\nJ. Javier Brey and M.J. Ruiz-Montero\n\nF´ısica Te´ orica, Universidad de Sevilla, Apartado de Correos 1065, E-41080, Sevilla, Spain\n\n(Dated: October 29, 2018)\n\nThe volume fluctuations in the steady state reached by a vibrated granular gas of hard particles confined by a movable piston on the top are investigated by means of event driven simulations. Also, a compressibility factor, measuring the response in volume of the system to a change in the mass of the piston, is introduced and measured. From the second moment of the volume fluctuations and the compressibility factor, an effective temperature is defined, by using the same relation as obeyed by equilibrium molecular systems. The interpretation of this effective temperature and its relationship with the granular temperature of the gas, and also with the velocity fluctuations of the movable piston, is discussed. It is found that the ratio of the temperature based on the volume fluctuations to the temperature based on the piston kinetic energy, obeys simple dependencies on the inelasticity and on the piston-particle mass ratio.\n\nPACS numbers: 45.70.-n,47.70.Nd,51.10.+y\n\narXiv:1002.0542v1 [cond-mat.stat-mech] 2 Feb 2010\n\n## Abstract\n\n1" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "b854aa11e3445bebc14cf6a4ce96ef1e8dd33b63a9ca4abb2ccf216d4c408a15", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.99999997970958, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "- [76] C. Kelly, P. A. Boyle, and C. T. Sachrajda (RBC and UKQCD), PoS LAT2009 , 087 (2009), arXiv:0911.1309.\n- [77] A. Hasenfratz, R. Hoffmann, and S. Schaefer, Phys. Rev. D78 , 014515 (2008), arXiv:0805.2369.\n- [78] R. Mawhinney (RBC and UKQCD), PoS LAT2009 , 081 (2009), arXiv:0910.3194.\n- [79] M. Schmelling, Phys. Scripta 51 , 676 (1995).\n- [80] F. D. R. Bonnet, D. B. Leinweber, A. G. Williams, and J. M. Zanotti, Phys. Rev. D65 , 114510 (2002), hep-lat/0106023.\n- [81] D. Arndt and C. J. D. Lin, Phys. Rev. D70 , 014503 (2004), hep-lat/0403012.\n- [82] C. Aubin and C. Bernard, Phys. Rev. D73 , 014515 (2006), hep-lat/0510088.\n- [83] W. Detmold and C. J. D. Lin, Phys. Rev. D76 , 014501 (2007), hep-lat/0612028.\n- [84] E. E. Jenkins, Nucl. Phys. B412 , 181 (1994), hep-ph/9212295.\n- [85] J. L. Goity, Phys. Rev. D46 , 3929 (1992), hep-ph/9206230.\n- [86] C. Bernard (MILC), Phys. Rev. D65 , 054031 (2002), hep-lat/0111051.\n- [87] A. Roessl, Nucl. Phys. B555 , 507 (1999), hep-ph/9904230.\n\n60", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "- [76] C. Kelly, P. A. Boyle, and C. T. Sachrajda (RBC and UKQCD), PoS LAT2009 , 087 (2009), arXiv:0911.1309.\n\n- [77] A. Hasenfratz, R. Hoffmann, and S. Schaefer, Phys. Rev. D78 , 014515 (2008), arXiv:0805.2369.\n\n- [78] R. Mawhinney (RBC and UKQCD), PoS LAT2009 , 081 (2009), arXiv:0910.3194.\n\n- [79] M. Schmelling, Phys. Scripta 51 , 676 (1995).\n\n- [80] F. D. R. Bonnet, D. B. Leinweber, A. G. Williams, and J. M. Zanotti, Phys. Rev. D65 , 114510 (2002), hep-lat/0106023.\n\n- [81] D. Arndt and C. J. D. Lin, Phys. Rev. D70 , 014503 (2004), hep-lat/0403012.\n\n- [82] C. Aubin and C. Bernard, Phys. Rev. D73 , 014515 (2006), hep-lat/0510088.\n\n- [83] W. Detmold and C. J. D. Lin, Phys. Rev. D76 , 014501 (2007), hep-lat/0612028.\n\n- [84] E. E. Jenkins, Nucl. Phys. B412 , 181 (1994), hep-ph/9212295.\n\n- [85] J. L. Goity, Phys. Rev. D46 , 3929 (1992), hep-ph/9206230.\n\n- [86] C. Bernard (MILC), Phys. Rev. D65 , 054031 (2002), hep-lat/0111051.\n\n- [87] A. Roessl, Nucl. Phys. B555 , 507 (1999), hep-ph/9904230.\n\n60" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.24742042345444362, + "doc_id": "641065949845b4d7cf8e0153c06a82a8bde82a50c61d3353023f6d6d10f6cd38", + "edit_distance": 0.6452784503631961, + "f1_score": 0.9197530864197531, + "meteor": 0.38829704462684667, + "precision": 0.9371069182389937, + "pred_md": "results are presented in section IV. We give our conclusions and discussions in section V.\n\n## II. METHODOLOGY\n\nTo fit models with observational data, we need to know the form of Hubble function H z ( ) (or E z ( ) = H z /H ( ) 0 ). In a flat FRW universe\n\n\n\nwhere Ω (0) r , Ω (0) b , Ω (0) dm and Ω (0) de are present values of the dimensionless energy density for radiations, baryons, dark matter and dark energy, respectively, and Ω (0) r + Ω (0) b + Ω (0) dm + Ω (0) de = 1. The energy densities of baryons and dark matter are always written together as Ω (0) b (1 + z ) 3 +Ω (0) dm (1 + z ) 3 = Ω (0) m (1 + z ) 3 . The radiation density is the sum of photons and relativistic neutrinos [20]:\n\n\n\nwhere N n is the number of neutrino species and Ω (0) γ = 2 469 . × 10 -5 h -2 for T cmb = 2 725 . K ( h = H / 0 100 Mpc · km · s -1 ). The evolving function F z ( ) for DE depends on w de ( z ):\n\n\n\nFor example,\n\n\n\nfor the CPL parametrization and F z ( ) = 1 for w de = -1, respectively. Here we divide z ∈ (0 , ∞ ) into m +1 bins and assume w de ( z ) in the first m bins as\n\n\n\nand require w de ( z ) to be continuous at divided points:\n\n\n\nNote that here prime does not represent a derivative, instead w ' n is just the slope of the linear expansion in the n th bin. Thus the independent parameters are\n\n\n\n4", + "recall": 0.9030303030303031, + "true_md": "results are presented in section IV. We give our conclusions and discussions in section V.\n\nTo fit models with observational data, we need to know the form of Hubble function H ( z ) (or E ( z ) = H ( z ) /H$_{0}$ ). In a flat FRW universe\n\nwhere Ω (0) r , Ω (0) b , Ω (0) dm and Ω (0) de are present values of the dimensionless energy density for radiations, baryons, dark matter and dark energy, respectively, and Ω (0) r + Ω (0) b + Ω (0) dm + Ω (0) de = 1. The energy densities of baryons and dark matter are always written together as Ω (0) b (1 + z ) 3 + Ω (0) $_{dm}$(1 + z ) 3 = Ω (0) m (1 + z ) $^{3}$. The radiation density is the sum of photons and relativistic neutrinos [20]:\n\nwhere N$_{n}$ is the number of neutrino species and Ω (0) γ = 2 . 469 × 10 − $^{5}$h − 2 for T$_{cmb}$ = 2 . 725 K ( h = H$_{0}$/ 100 Mpc · km · s − $^{1}$). The evolving function F ( z ) for DE depends on w$_{de}$ ( z ):\n\nFor example,\n\nfor the CPL parametrization and F ( z ) = 1 for w$_{de}$ = − 1, respectively. Here we divide z ∈ (0 , ∞ ) into m + 1 bins and assume w$_{de}$ ( z ) in the first m bins as\n\nand require w$_{de}$ ( z ) to be continuous at divided points:\n\nNote that here prime does not represent a derivative, instead w ′ n is just the slope of the linear expansion in the n th bin. Thus the independent parameters are\n\n$$w$_{0}$, w ′ $_{1}$, w ′ $_{2}$, ..., w ′ $_{n}$, ..., w ′ m (5)$$\n\n$$w$_{n}$ = w$_{n}$$_{−}$$_{1}$ + w ′ n × ( z$_{n}$ − z$_{n}$$_{−}$$_{1}$ ) , (1 ≤ n ≤ m − 1) (4)$$\n\n$$w$_{de}$ ( z$_{n}$$_{−}$$_{1}$ < z ≤ z$_{n}$ ) = w$_{n}$$_{−}$$_{1}$ + w ′ n × ( z − z$_{n}$$_{−}$$_{1}$ ) , (1 ≤ n ≤ m ) (3)$$\n\n$$F ( z ) = (1 + z ) 3(1+ w$_{0}$ + w a $^{)}$e − 3 w a z 1+ z ,$$\n\n$$F ( z ) = e 3 ∫ z 0 1+ w de 1+ x $^{dx}$. (2)$$\n\n$$Ω (0) r = Ω (0) γ (1 + 0 . 2271 N$_{n}$ ) ,$$\n\n$$E $^{2}$( z ) = Ω (0) r (1 + z ) 4 + Ω (0) b (1 + z ) 3 + Ω (0) $_{dm}$(1 + z ) 3 + Ω (0) $_{de}$F ( z ) , (1)$$\n\n## II. METHODOLOGY\n\n4" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.010589406270033717, + "doc_id": "e67b2859a0e05b69f76f359be0bac16f06af87f8af6da67176a8810ebd643bff", + "edit_distance": 0.911504424778761, + "f1_score": 0.6506024096385542, + "meteor": 0.1467184108962229, + "precision": 0.9101123595505618, + "pred_md": "The matrix elements in Eq. (B12) are given in Refs. [51-53]:\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nwith the coefficients\n\n\n\n\n\nand the anomalous dimensions\n\n\n\n\n\n## Appendix C: Finding matrix elements from Green's functions\n\nIn this appendix we provide a derivation of Eqs. (63) and (72) which give the relationship between the Euclidean space correlation functions which are the direct results of our simulations and the matrix elements between normalized Hilbert space states which we wish to determine. In this appendix, all quantities are written in lattice units. The derivation of Eq. (63) follows the standard steps of inserting a complete set of energy eigenstates into the Green's functions C LW ( t, t 0 ) and C WW ( t, t 0 ) which are defined in Eqs. (59) and (60) and appear in the numerator and denominator of Eq. (63):\n\n\n\n\n\n49", + "recall": 0.50625, + "true_md": "The matrix elements in Eq. (B12) are given in Refs. [51–53]:\n\nwith the coefficients\n\nand the anomalous dimensions\n\nIn this appendix we provide a derivation of Eqs. (63) and (72) which give the relation- ship between the Euclidean space correlation functions which are the direct results of our simulations and the matrix elements between normalized Hilbert space states which we wish to determine. In this appendix, all quantities are written in lattice units. The derivation of Eq. (63) follows the standard steps of inserting a complete set of energy eigenstates into the Green’s functions C $^{LW}$( t, t$_{0}$ ) and C $^{WW}$( t, t$_{0}$ ) which are defined in Eqs. (59) and (60) and appear in the numerator and denominator of Eq. (63):\n\n$$∑ ∑ C $^{WW}$( t, t$_{0}$ ) = n |〈 n | A W 0 (0) $^{†}$| 0 〉| $^{2}$e − E$_{n}$ ( t − t$_{0}$ $^{)}$, (C2)$$\n\n$$C $^{LW}$( t, t$_{0}$ ) = ∑ n ∑ ⃗x ∈ $_{V}$〈 0 | A L $_{0}$( ⃗ x, 0) | n 〉〈 n | A W 0 (0) $^{†}$| 0 〉 e − E$_{n}$ ( t − t$_{0}$ ) (C1) C $^{WW}$( t, t$_{0}$ ) = |〈 n | A W (0) $^{†}$| 0 〉| $^{2}$e − E$_{n}$ ( t − t$_{0}$ $^{)}$, (C2)$$\n\n$$γ (0) =   − 6 C$_{F}$ 0 1 + 1 /N$_{c}$ − 6 C$_{F}$ + 4(1 + 1 /N$_{c}$ )   , (B18) γ (1) = − N$_{c}$ − 1 ( 127 N 2 + 143 N$_{c}$ + 63 − 57 /N$_{c}$$$\n\n$$ −  γ (1) 11 = − N$_{c}$ − 1 12 N$_{c}$ ( 127 N 2 c + 143 N$_{c}$ + 63 − 57 /N$_{c}$ +8 π $^{2}$( N 2 c − 2 N$_{c}$ + 4 /N$_{c}$ ) − N$_{f}$ (28 N$_{c}$ + 44) ) . (B19)$$\n\n$$d ( N$_{f}$ ) i = γ (0) ii / 2 β$_{0}$, (B16)$$\n\n$$J ( N$_{f}$ ) 11 = γ (1) 11 / 2 β$_{0}$ − γ (0) 11 β$_{1}$/ 2 β 2 $_{0}$, (B17)$$\n\n$$    U ( N$_{f}$ ) 22 ( µ $^{′}$, µ ) = ( α ( N$_{f}$ ) s ( µ $^{′}$) α ( N$_{f}$ ) s ( µ ) ) d ( N f ) 2 + O ( α$_{s}$ ) , (B15)$$\n\n$$( α s ( µ ) ) ( 4 π ) O U ( N$_{f}$ ) 21 ( µ $^{′}$, µ ) = − 1 4    ( α ( N$_{f}$ ) s ( µ $^{′}$) α ( N$_{f}$ ) s ( µ ) ) d ( N f ) 1 − ( α ( N$_{f}$ ) s ( µ $^{′}$) α ( N$_{f}$ ) s ( µ ) ) d ( N f ) 2    + O ( α$_{s}$ ) , (B14) ( ( N$_{f}$ ) ) d ( N f ) 2$$\n\n$$U ( N$_{f}$ ) 11 ( µ $^{′}$, µ ) = ( α ( N$_{f}$ ) s ( µ $^{′}$) α ( N$_{f}$ ) s ( µ ) ) d ( N f ) 1 ( 1 + J ( N$_{f}$ ) 11 α ( N$_{f}$ ) s ( µ $^{′}$) − α ( N$_{f}$ ) s ( µ ) 4 π ) + O ( α 2 $_{s}$) , (B13)  $$\n\n## Appendix C: Finding matrix elements from Green’s functions\n\n49" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.28790638187879786, + "doc_id": "34714f3afa92a7d55d7809234d6a156bb0f5241f2605d089783ad66363a849cb", + "edit_distance": 0.5581668625146886, + "f1_score": 0.898876404494382, + "meteor": 0.3794204992495218, + "precision": 0.9411764705882353, + "pred_md": "To obtain the root functions, we rewrite Eq. (8) as\n\n\n\n\n\nwhere ξ n ( x ) ≡ 〈 x ξ | n 〉 . It can be easily checked that the following is a solution to Eq. (22)\n\n\n\nBecause in the first step of the factorization procedure the root function ξ 1 ( x ) is equal to the first eigenfunction ψ 1 ( x ) (see Eq. (9) and Fig. 2) and we have replaced the index 1 by n , all the root functions are equal to the eigenfunctions of the Hamiltonian, that is, ξ n ( x ) = ψ n ( x ). This result is similar to Eq. (3) for x < pa . Moreover, because k b n = k a n -π , we have sin[ k n ( x -b )] = sin[ k n ( x -a ) + π ] = -sin[ k n ( x -a )]. So, these eigenfunctions are equivalent to the solutions in Eq. (3).\n\n## IV. SUGGESTED PROBLEMS\n\nProblem 1. Use the recursive relations (6) to show that | E n 〉 in Eq. (9) is the eigenfunction of the Hamiltonian with E n as its eigenvalue.\n\nProblem 2. Show that the eigenvalues E , E , E , . . . 1 2 3 form a monotonic increasing sequence, that is, E 1 ≤ E 2 ≤ E 3 ≤ . . . .\n\nProblem 3. Apply the factorization method to a particle in a box with no delta function potential. In the first step show that k 1 = π/a . Continue the factorization procedure to find all the eigenenergies and eigenfunctions. Hint: consider a n = 1 √ 2 m [ P + ic n cot( d x n )], where c n and d n are real constants.\n\n∗ Electronic address: pouria.pedram@gmail.com\n\n1 D. J. Griffiths, Introduction to Quantum Mechanics (Prentice Hall, Upper Saddle River, NJ, 2004).\n\n2 B. I. Shklovskii and A. L. Efros, Electronic Properties of Doped Semiconductors (Springer, New York, 1984), Chap. 1.\n\n7", + "recall": 0.8602150537634409, + "true_md": "To obtain the root functions, we rewrite Eq. (8) as\n\nwhere ξ$_{n}$ ( x ) ≡ 〈 x | ξ$_{n}$ 〉 . It can be easily checked that the following is a solution to Eq. (22) \n\n$^{A}$$^{sin(}$$^{k$\\_{n}$}$$^{x}$$^{)}$$^{,}$ Because in the first step of the factorization procedure the root function ξ$\\_{1}$ ( x ) is equal to the first eigenfunction ψ$\\_{1}$ ( x ) (see Eq. (9) and Fig. 2) and we have replaced the index 1 by n , all the root functions are equal to the eigenfunctions of the Hamiltonian, that is, ξ$\\_{n}$ ( x ) = ψ$\\_{n}$ ( x ). This result is similar to Eq. (3) for x < pa . Moreover, because k$\\_{n}$b = k$\\_{n}$a − π , we have sin[ k$\\_{n}$ ( x − b )] = sin[ k$\\_{n}$ ( x − a ) + π ] = − sin[ k$\\_{n}$ ( x − a )]. So, these eigenfunctions are equivalent to the solutions in Eq. (3).\n\nProblem 1. Use the recursive relations (6) to show that | E$_{n}$ 〉 in Eq. (9) is the eigenfunction of the Hamiltonian with E$_{n}$ as its eigenvalue.\n\nProblem 2. Show that the eigenvalues E$_{1}$, E$_{2}$, E$_{3}$, . . . form a monotonic increasing se- quence, that is, E$_{1}$ ≤ E$_{2}$ ≤ E$_{3}$ ≤ . . . . Apply the factorization method to a particle in a box with no delta function\n\n≤ ≤ ≤ Problem 3. Apply the factorization method to a particle in a box with no delta function potential. In the first step show that k$_{1}$ = π/a . Continue the factorization procedure to find all the eigenenergies and eigenfunctions. Hint: consider a$_{n}$ = 1 √$_{2}$$\\_{m}$ [ P + ic$\\_{n}$ cot( d$\\_{n}$x )], where c$\\_{n}$ and d$\\_{n}$ are real constants.\n\n∗ Electronic address: pouria.pedram@gmail.com\n\n1 D. J. Griffiths, Introduction to Quantum Mechanics (Prentice Hall, Upper Saddle River, NJ, 2004).\n\n2 B. I. Shklovskii and A. L. Efros, Electronic Properties of Doped Semiconductors (Springer, New York, 1984), Chap. 1.\n\n7\n\n## IV. SUGGESTED PROBLEMS\n\n$$( ¯ h i d dx + i ¯ hk$_{n}$ cot( k$_{n}$x ) ) ξ$_{n}$ ( x ) = 0 , ( x < pa ) , (22a)$$\n\n$$( ¯ h i d dx + i ¯ hk$_{n}$ cot[ k$_{n}$ ( x − b )] ) ξ$_{n}$ ( x ) = 0 , ( x > pa ) , (22b)$$\n\n$$ξ$_{n}$ ( x ) =    $^{A}$$^{sin(}$$^{k$_{n}$}$$^{x}$$^{)}$$^{,}$ ( x < pa ) , − B sin[ k$_{n}$ ( x − b )] , ( x > pa ) . (23) Because in the first step of the factorization procedure the root function ξ$_{1}$ ( x ) is equal$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6412804974969737, + "doc_id": "7417b6bd3c998c488e49d40bdd578733730aafc45a52443c80c061b8ae8bf431", + "edit_distance": 0.4280936454849498, + "f1_score": 0.9721115537848605, + "meteor": 0.7848788419776389, + "precision": 0.991869918699187, + "pred_md": "FIG. 4: Determination of √ M ren B s /M ren B l using the average of two time sources on the three sea quark ensembles. The blue (triangle) points denote the APE data, while the red (square) points denote the HYP-smeared data. The shaded (hatched) band corresponds to the plateau extracted from averaging the APE (HYP) data over four consecutive time slices. Errors shown are statistical only.\n\nFIG. 4: Determination of √ M ren B s /M ren B l using the average of two time sources on the three sea quark ensembles. The blue (triangle) points denote the APE data, while the red (square) points denote the HYP-smeared data. The shaded (hatched) band corresponds to the plateau extracted from averaging the APE (HYP) data over four consecutive time slices. Errors shown are statistical only.\n\nquickly than SU (3) χ PT [34-37]. For the case of SU (3)-breaking ratios such as f B s /f B d and ξ , however, SU (3) HM χ PT has the advantage that the chiral extrapolation formulae manifestly preserve the fact that the ratios must be equal to one in the limit m l → m s . Within the framework of SU (2) HM χ PT, this fact must be introduced in a more ad hoc manner such as by matching the SU (2) HM χ PT expression at small quark masses onto an analytic form at large quark masses that becomes one when m l → m s . We therefore plan\n\n25", + "recall": 0.953125, + "true_md": "FIG. 4: Determination of √ M ren $_{B$\\_{s}$}$/M ren B$_{l}$ using the average of two time sources on the three sea quark ensembles. The blue (triangle) points denote the APE data, while the red (square) points denote the HYP-smeared data. The shaded (hatched) band corresponds to the plateau extracted from averaging the APE (HYP) data over four consecutive time slices. Errors shown are statistical only.\n\nquickly than SU (3) χ PT [34–37]. For the case of SU (3)-breaking ratios such as f$_{B}$$\\_{s}$/f$\\_{B}$$_{d}$ and ξ , however, SU (3) HM χ PT has the advantage that the chiral extrapolation formulae manifestly preserve the fact that the ratios must be equal to one in the limit m$_{l}$ → m$_{s}$ . Within the framework of SU (2) HM χ PT, this fact must be introduced in a more ad hoc manner such as by matching the SU (2) HM χ PT expression at small quark masses onto an analytic form at large quark masses that becomes one when m$_{l}$ → m$_{s}$ . We therefore plan\n\n25" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.018083181472419437, + "doc_id": "b4009f75975a973c08b05f995bb76d55fc252c05fc1ca7ac3979de4c1427422a", + "edit_distance": 0.8647581441263573, + "f1_score": 0.8205128205128205, + "meteor": 0.17428687734333154, + "precision": 0.9411764705882353, + "pred_md": "18\n\ngeneral, without needing to specify b y ( ). In fact, using eq. (54), it is not difficult to show that the functions ˜ ( C y, ω ) and ˜ ( S y, ω ) obey the integral equations:\n\n\n\n\n\nfrom which we can derive a low-energy expansion (small ω ):\n\n\n\nWe will substitute expansions (60), (61) in eq. (57), keeping terms up to O ω ( 4 ), which as we will soon show - will reproduce the Standard model plus corrections of order m /M 2 Z ¯ 2 , where ¯ M is given by 1 :\n\n\n\nand, as we will show later, is of the order of the mass of the lightest resonance that we have integrated out. After the substitution, the bulk Lagrangian becomes\n\n\n\n1 Notice that the parameter ¯ M can be related to the integrals introduced in [74],\n\n\n\nwhere\n\n", + "recall": 0.7272727272727273, + "true_md": "18\n\ngeneral, without needing to specify b ( y ). In fact, using eq. (54), it is not difficult to show that the functions ˜ C ( y, ω ) and ˜ S ( y, ω ) obey the integral equations:\n\nfrom which we can derive a low-energy expansion (small ω ):\n\nWe will substitute expansions (60), (61) in eq. (57), keeping terms up to O ( ω $^{4}$), which - as we will soon show - will reproduce the Standard model plus corrections of order m 2 $_{Z}$/ ¯ M $^{2}$, where ¯ M is given by 1 :\n\nand, as we will show later, is of the order of the mass of the lightest resonance that we have integrated out. After the substitution, the bulk Lagrangian becomes\n\n1 Notice that the parameter ¯ M can be related to the integrals introduced in [74],\n\n$$1 ¯ M 2 = 1 πR ∫ πR 0 dy ∫ πR y $_{dz z b}$− $^{1}$( z ) (62)$$\n\n$$L (2) bulk = − πR 2 g 2 5 ( ˜ W a $_{µ}$( p $^{2}$η µν − p $^{µ}$p$^{ν}$)(1 − p 2 ¯ M $_{2}$) ˜ W a ν + ˜ B$_{µ}$ ( p $^{2}$η µν − p $^{µ}$p$^{ν}$)(1 − p 2 ¯ M $_{2}$) ˜ B$_{ν}$ ) ; (63)$$\n\n$$1 ¯ M 2 = I 2 ( πR ) − I 1 ( πR )$$\n\n$$I 1 ( y ) = 1 πR ∫ y 0 ∫ z 0 dz $^{′}$z $^{′}$b− $^{1}$( z $^{′}$) , I 2 ( y ) = ∫ y 0 dz $^{′}$z $^{′}$b− $^{1}$( z $^{′}$)$$\n\nwhere\n\n$$˜ C ( y, ω ) = 1 − ω 2 ∫ πR y $_{dy}$′$_{b}$ − $^{1}$( $_{y}$′$_{)}$ ∫ πR y ′ $_{dy}$′′ ˜ C ( $_{y}$′′$_{, ω}$$_{)}$ (58) ˜ S ( y, ω ) = ω ∫ πR y $_{dy}$′$_{b}$ − $^{1}$( $_{y}$′$_{)}$ − ω 2 ∫ πR y $_{dy}$′$_{b}$ − $^{1}$( $_{y}$′$_{)}$ ∫ πR y ′ $_{dy}$′′ ˜ S ( $_{y}$′′$_{, ω}$$_{)}$$_{,}$ (59)$$\n\n$$˜ C ( y, ω ) = 1 − ω 2 ∫ πR y $_{dy}$′$_{y}$ ′$_{b}$− $^{1}$( $_{y}$′$_{)}$ + ω 4 ∫ πR y $_{dy}$′$_{b}$ − $^{1}$( $_{y}$′$_{)}$ ∫ πR y ′ $_{dy}$′′ ∫ πR y ′′ $_{dy}$′′′$_{y}$ ′′′$_{b}$− $^{1}$( $_{y}$′′′$_{) +}$$_{. . .}$ (60) πR$$\n\n$$∫ ∫ ∫ ˜ S ( y, ω ) = ω πR y $_{dy}$′$_{b}$ − $^{1}$( $_{y}$′$_{)}$ − ω 3 ∫ πR y $_{dy}$′$_{b}$ − $^{1}$( $_{y}$′$_{)}$ ∫ πR y ′ $_{dy}$′′ ∫ πR y ′′ $_{dy}$′′′$_{b}$ − $^{1}$( $_{y}$′′′$_{) +}$$_{. . .}$ (61)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.45981459140623593, + "doc_id": "2f795a4cf2fa1ff11e793afb9ba4c95d30b97c916245e2caef278264fa676a8e", + "edit_distance": 0.5130434782608696, + "f1_score": 0.9494949494949494, + "meteor": 0.8822004770222226, + "precision": 0.9591836734693877, + "pred_md": "FIG. 5: (Color) 'Dynamic phase diagram' for 40 kbp fragments of λ -DNA with one free end, at salt concentration c =50 mM. The dynamic stretching protocol is as Fig. 3: note the smaller fraction of S-DNA seen here. At room temperature, S-DNA is short-lived.\n\nFIG. 5: (Color) 'Dynamic phase diagram' for 40 kbp fragments of λ -DNA with one free end, at salt concentration c =50 mM. The dynamic stretching protocol is as Fig. 3: note the smaller fraction of S-DNA seen here. At room temperature, S-DNA is short-lived.\n\n12", + "recall": 0.94, + "true_md": "FIG. 5: (Color) ‘Dynamic phase diagram’ for 40 kbp fragments of λ -DNA with one free end, at salt concentration c =50 mM. The dynamic stretching protocol is as Fig. 3: note the smaller fraction of S-DNA seen here. At room temperature, S-DNA is short-lived.\n\n12" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7127404899561358, + "doc_id": "c3e2de21d3195fe3b401e4b080dbff3462588baedd40c08ae46a2836ed02d931", + "edit_distance": 0.3192488262910798, + "f1_score": 0.9733333333333333, + "meteor": 0.8658771923482017, + "precision": 0.9864864864864865, + "pred_md": "FIG. 4: Testing the generalized virial theorem. The difference between the measured release energy and potential energy per particle T + I -V is shown as open circles. This corresponds to the left hand side of Eq. 3. Filled circles show the right hand side of Eq. 3 obtained from the average values of the contact shown in Fig. 2. The two quantities are equal to within the measurement uncertainty, which is on order of 0 01 . E F .\n\nFIG. 4: Testing the generalized virial theorem. The difference between the measured release energy and potential energy per particle T + I -V is shown as open circles. This corresponds to the left hand side of Eq. 3. Filled circles show the right hand side of Eq. 3 obtained from the average values of the contact shown in Fig. 2. The two quantities are equal to within the measurement uncertainty, which is on order of 0 01 . E F .\n\nas for the unitarity gas, where ( k F a ) -1 = 0. This result for the unitarity gas was previously verified in Ref. [28]. Here, we test Eqn. 3 for a range of interaction strengths. In Fig. 4 we plot the measured difference T + I -V versus ( k F a ) -1 along with C 4 πk F a , where we use our direct measurements of C . We find that these independent measurements of the left and the right sides of Eqn. 3 agree to within our error, which is roughly 1% of the Fermi energy. It is interesting to note that the measured energy difference T + I -V is small (in units of E F ), so that even a Fermi gas with a strongly attractive contact interaction nearly obeys the non-interacting virial equation.\n\nIn conclusion, we have measured the integrated contact for a strongly interacting Fermi gas and demonstrated the connection between the 1 /k 4 tail of the momentum distribution and the high frequency tail of rf spectra. Combining a measurement of C vs ( k F a ) -1 with measurements of the potential energy and the release energy of the trapped gas, we verify two universal relationships [2, 3], namely the adiabatic sweep theorem and the generalized\n\n9", + "recall": 0.9605263157894737, + "true_md": "FIG. 4: Testing the generalized virial theorem. The difference between the measured release energy and potential energy per particle T + I − V is shown as open circles. This corresponds to the left hand side of Eq. 3. Filled circles show the right hand side of Eq. 3 obtained from the average values of the contact shown in Fig. 2. The two quantities are equal to within the measurement uncertainty, which is on order of 0 . 01 E$_{F}$ .\n\nas for the unitarity gas, where ( k$_{F}$a ) − 1 = 0. This result for the unitarity gas was previously verified in Ref. [28]. Here, we test Eqn. 3 for a range of interaction strengths. In Fig. 4 we plot the measured difference T + I − V versus ( k$_{F}$a ) − 1 along with C 4 πk$_{F}$ $_{a}$, where we use our direct measurements of C . We find that these independent measurements of the left and the right sides of Eqn. 3 agree to within our error, which is roughly 1% of the Fermi energy. It is interesting to note that the measured energy difference T + I − V is small (in units of E$_{F}$ ), so that even a Fermi gas with a strongly attractive contact interaction nearly obeys the non-interacting virial equation.\n\nIn conclusion, we have measured the integrated contact for a strongly interacting Fermi gas and demonstrated the connection between the 1 /k 4 tail of the momentum distribution and the high frequency tail of rf spectra. Combining a measurement of C vs ( k$_{F}$a ) − 1 with measurements of the potential energy and the release energy of the trapped gas, we verify two universal relationships [2, 3], namely the adiabatic sweep theorem and the generalized\n\n9" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.12258005371493877, + "doc_id": "3013071f2bf20c1ed9a9807b90c17e078979ed797a75ba80a5998e1843a6b0e4", + "edit_distance": 0.8, + "f1_score": 0.8013468013468014, + "meteor": 0.28578397411777606, + "precision": 0.9444444444444444, + "pred_md": "and\n\n\n\nThe identity (20) can be simplified by redefining Γ:\n\n\n\nso that we obtain\n\nand\n\n\n\nLet us now consider some specific applications of the above identities.\n\n## A. The photon propagator\n\nAs a first application of the identities derived in the previous section, we will now prove that the longitudinal part of the photon propagator is not modified by radiative corrections. To this end, we twice differentiate the generating functional of the connected Green functions (15) with respect to ζ ( y ) and J ν ( z ) and set all sources equal to zero, which gives\n\n\n\n∣ ∣ where we have introduced the notation O| to imply that the object O at the left of the vertical bar has to be calculated with all sources equal to zero. But, from Eq. (16) it follows that\n\n\n\n∣ so that the photon propagator D µν ( z -y ) = -i δ 2 W δJ ν ( z δJ ) µ ( y ) | must satisfy\n\n\n\nwhich in momentum space becomes\n\n\n\nNow, compatibility with this constraint requires the propagator to have the general form\n\n\n\n6\n\n", + "recall": 0.695906432748538, + "true_md": "and\n\nThe identity (20) can be simplified by redefining Γ:\n\nso that we obtain\n\nand\n\nLet us now consider some specific applications of the above identities.\n\nAs a first application of the identities derived in the previous section, we will now prove that the longitudinal part of the photon propagator is not modified by radiative corrections. To this end, we twice differentiate the generating functional of the connected Green functions (15) with respect to ζ ( y ) and J $^{ν}$( z ) and set all sources equal to zero, which gives\n\nwhere we have introduced the notation O| to imply that the object O at the left of the vertical bar has to be calculated with all sources equal to zero. But, from Eq. (16) it follows that\n\nso that the photon propagator D$_{µν}$ ( z − y ) = − i δ $^{2}$W δJ $^{ν}$( z ) δJ $^{µ}$( y ) | must satisfy\n\nwhich in momentum space becomes\n\nNow, compatibility with this constraint requires the propagator to have the general form\n\n$$i δ Γ δ ¯ C$_{cl}$ = − e∂$_{µ}$ δ Γ δK$_{µ}$ . (21)$$\n\n$$Γ → Γ − 1 2 α ∫ d $^{4}$x ( ∂$_{µ}$A µ $_{cl}$) 2 (22)$$\n\n$$∫ d $^{4}$x [ δ Γ δA µ cl ⋆ δ Γ δK$_{µ}$ + δ Γ δC$_{cl}$ ⋆ δ Γ δv + δ Γ δψ ⋆ δ Γ δ ¯ ω + δ Γ δω ⋆ δ Γ δ ¯ ψ ] = 0 (23)$$\n\n$$i δ Γ δ ¯ C$_{cl}$ + e∂$_{µ}$ δ Γ δK$_{µ}$ = 0 . (24)$$\n\n$$− 1 αe ∂ µ y δ $^{2}$W δJ $^{ν}$( z ) J $^{µ}$( y ) ∣ + δ $^{2}$W δζ ( y ) δK $^{ν}$( z ) ∣ = 0 , (25)$$\n\n$$∂ ν z δ $^{2}$W δζ ( y ) δK $^{ν}$( z ) ∣ = 1 e δ ( z − y ) (26)$$\n\n$$∂ µ z ∂ ν $_{y}$D$_{µν}$ ( z − y ) = − iαδ ( z − y ) , (27)$$\n\n$$q $^{µ}$q$^{ν}$D$_{µν}$ ( q ) = − iα. (28)$$\n\n$$D$_{µν}$ ( q ) = ( g µν − q $^{µ}$qν q 2 ) D$_{T}$ ( q $^{2}$) + ˜ q $^{µ}$˜ q ν ˜ q 2 D$_{θ}$ ( q $^{2}$) − iα q 2 q $^{µ}$qν q 2 . (29)$$\n\n6\n\n## A. The photon propagator" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8633283848536708, + "doc_id": "b173789c57a86e786d6b0f05d35c1962ed13d99ddf633fa3749acc3af6aadbc1", + "edit_distance": 0.6822429906542056, + "f1_score": 0.9855072463768116, + "meteor": 0.8277095175700808, + "precision": 0.9855072463768116, + "pred_md": "Table II:\n\n## V. FIGURE CAPTIONS:\n\n## Figure 1:\n\nThe atom numbering for PIC is shown as it is used to tabulate the parameters\n\nFigure 2:\n\nThe experimental absorption spectrum 4 of monomeric PIC (dots) is compared with a calculated spectrum (full line) from the displaced oscillator model. The calculated spectrum was shifted to reproduce the absorption maximum at 19100 cm -1\n\nFigure 3:\n\nStarting from a sandwich (a) or brickwork (b) structure relative stable dimer configurations evolved. The figure shows representative snapshots.\n\n11", + "recall": 0.9855072463768116, + "true_md": "11\n\nStarting from a sandwich (a) or brickwork (b) structure relative stable dimer configurations evolved. The figure shows representative snapshots.\n\nThe experimental absorption spectrum 4 of monomeric PIC (dots) is compared with a calculated spectrum (full line) from the displaced oscillator model. The calculated spectrum was shifted to reproduce the absorption maximum at 19100 cm − 1\n\nThe atom numbering for PIC is shown as it is used to tabulate the parameters\n\nTable II:\n\n## V. FIGURE CAPTIONS:\n\n## Figure 1:\n\n## Figure 2:\n\n## Figure 3:" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.477457140513166, + "doc_id": "bb6e5e3e6bf9dc7e0846256e033c3304e5c4d315454a695f2af1bec6e420b70a", + "edit_distance": 0.5043478260869565, + "f1_score": 0.9565217391304348, + "meteor": 0.8503810398875797, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "FIG. 7: (Color online) The values of the critical rotation frequency f crit (left panel) for the hybrid stars with the CSQM core and their maximum masses (right panel) in the non rotating limit as obtained using di ff erent EOSs for the nuclear matter and the CSQM.\n\nFIG. 7: (Color online) The values of the critical rotation frequency f crit (left panel) for the hybrid stars with the CSQM core and their maximum masses (right panel) in the non rotating limit as obtained using di ff erent EOSs for the nuclear matter and the CSQM.\n\n19", + "recall": 0.9166666666666666, + "true_md": "FIG. 7: (Color online) The values of the critical rotation frequency f$_{crit}$ (left panel) for the hybrid stars with the CSQM core and their maximum masses (right panel) in the non rotating limit as obtained using di ff erent EOSs for the nuclear matter and the CSQM.\n\n19" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.23379141458096184, + "doc_id": "a79a7b6e853d1dc7868b8a7cbce93eb41d22aecb2c8d8139225d8023726b1689", + "edit_distance": 0.6273291925465838, + "f1_score": 0.8911392405063292, + "meteor": 0.36265537694379657, + "precision": 0.946236559139785, + "pred_md": "is as follows:\n\n\n\n/negationslash\n\n\n\n/negationslash\n\nWe use the HYP smearing parameters ( α , α , α 1 2 3 ) = (1 0 . , 1 0 . , 0 5), sometimes referred to as . HYP2. These were shown to approximately minimize the noise-to-signal ratio in Ref. [25].\n\nIn Eqs. (19)-(23), Proj SU(3) ( V ) indicates the projection of the link V onto an SU (3) matrix. This projection reduces the statistical noise and thus enhances the smearing effect without increasing the level of smearing. In some cases the SU (3) projection also suppresses quantum corrections to lattice operators in perturbation theory [45]. The projection of the smeared link onto SU (3) is not unique, and we use two different schemes: for the case of APE smearing, Eq. (19), we project by the unit circle method based on polar decomposition [46], while for the case of HYP smearing, Eqs. (21)-(23), we obtain the projected matrix by an iterative procedure seeking the SU (3) matrix U max that maximizes Re Tr ( U max V † ), where V is the HYP smeared link matrix [47]. We describe the details of the two schemes and show their equivalence in the weak coupling limit in Appendix A.\n\n## III. PERTURBATIVE MATCHING OF HEAVY-LIGHT CURRENT AND FOURFERMION OPERATORS\n\nIn order to renormalize the heavy-light axial current and ∆ B = 2 four-fermion operator, we adopt a two-step matching procedure. In the first step, we match the QCD operators renormalized in the MS scheme using naive dimensional regularization (NDR) at a scale µ b to continuum static effective theory operators renormalized at a scale µ . This step is described in Sec. III A. In this paper, we choose µ b to be the b -quark mass m b and µ to be the inverse lattice spacing a -1 . In the second step, we match the continuum static effective theory operators to the lattice ones. This step is described in Sec. III B. We combine the\n\n10", + "recall": 0.8421052631578947, + "true_md": "is as follows:\n\n  We use the HYP smearing parameters ( α$_{1}$, α$_{2}$, α$_{3}$ ) = (1 . 0 , 1 . 0 , 0 . 5), sometimes referred to as HYP2. These were shown to approximately minimize the noise-to-signal ratio in Ref. [25].\n\nIn Eqs. (19)–(23), Proj$_{SU(3)}$ ( V ) indicates the projection of the link V onto an SU (3) matrix. This projection reduces the statistical noise and thus enhances the smearing effect without increasing the level of smearing. In some cases the SU (3) projection also suppresses quantum corrections to lattice operators in perturbation theory [45]. The projection of the smeared link onto SU (3) is not unique, and we use two different schemes: for the case of APE smearing, Eq. (19), we project by the unit circle method based on polar decomposition [46], while for the case of HYP smearing, Eqs. (21)–(23), we obtain the projected matrix by an iterative procedure seeking the SU (3) matrix U$_{max}$ that maximizes Re Tr ( U$_{max}$V $^{†}$), where V is the HYP smeared link matrix [47]. We describe the details of the two schemes and show their equivalence in the weak coupling limit in Appendix A.\n\nIn order to renormalize the heavy-light axial current and Δ B = 2 four-fermion operator, we adopt a two-step matching procedure. In the first step, we match the QCD operators renormalized in the MS scheme using naive dimensional regularization (NDR) at a scale µ$_{b}$ to continuum static effective theory operators renormalized at a scale µ . This step is described in Sec. III A. In this paper, we choose µ$_{b}$ to be the b -quark mass m$_{b}$ and µ to be the inverse lattice spacing a − $^{1}$. In the second step, we match the continuum static effective theory operators to the lattice ones. This step is described in Sec. III B. We combine the\n\n10\n\n## III. PERTURBATIVE MATCHING OF HEAVY-LIGHT CURRENT AND FOUR- FERMION OPERATORS\n\n$$V$_{0}$ ( x ) = Proj$_{SU(3)}$ [ (1 − α$_{1}$ ) U$_{0}$ ( x ) + α$_{1}$ 6 ± 3 ∑ ν = ± 1 ˜ V$_{ν}$$_{;0}$ ( x ) ˜ V$_{0;}$$_{ν}$ ( x + ̂ ν ) ˜ V † ν $_{;0}$( x + ̂ 0) ] , (21)   α$_{2}$ ± 3 ∑  $$\n\n$$[ − 6 ∑ ν = ± 1 ˜ ˜ ̂ ˜ ̂ ] ˜ V$_{µ}$$_{;}$$_{ν}$ ( x ) = Proj$_{SU(3)}$    (1 − α$_{2}$ ) U$_{µ}$ ( x ) + α$_{2}$ 4 ± 3 ∑ ρ = ± 0 ρ ̸ = µ,ν V$_{ρ}$$_{;}$$_{νµ}$ ( x ) V$_{µ}$$_{;}$$_{ρν}$ ( x + ̂ ρ ) V † ρ ; $_{νµ}$( x + ̂ µ )    , (22)  $$\n\n$$˜   ∑ ρ ̸ = µ,ν ̂ ̂   V$_{µ}$$_{;}$$_{νρ}$ ( x ) = Proj$_{SU(3)}$    (1 − α$_{3}$ ) U$_{µ}$ ( x ) + α$_{3}$ 2 ± 3 ∑ η = ± 0 η ̸ = µ,ν,ρ U$_{η}$ ( x ) U$_{µ}$ ( x + ̂ η ) U † $_{η}$( x + ̂ µ )    . (23) We use the HYP smearing parameters ( α$_{1}$, α$_{2}$, α$_{3}$ ) = (1 . 0 , 1 . 0 , 0 . 5), sometimes referred to as$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5805775421752838, + "doc_id": "5d1b777fd2d9f3919f43bab31c60cbcd228c19996c21f906c456ab2343f6cc5b", + "edit_distance": 0.43830570902394106, + "f1_score": 0.9516539440203563, + "meteor": 0.815332130188156, + "precision": 0.9639175257731959, + "pred_md": "FIG. 5: (Colour online) Density profiles for the situation where the substrate is covered by nanoparticles with average density ρ av n = 0 3 . and with the liquid excluded from the region y < 0 . The top row shows the nanoparticle density profiles and bottom row the corresponding liquid density profiles at the times t/t l = 1000 (left), 10000 (middle) and 30000 (right), where t l = 1 /kTM nc l σ 2 . The parameters are kT/ε ll = 0 8 . , ε nl /ε ll = 0 6 . , ε nn = 0 , α = 0 2 . M σ nc l 4 , M c l = 0 , ρ l ( t = 0) = 0 9 . ± ξ (where ξ represents white noise of amplitude 0.05) and ( µ -µ coex ) /kT = -0 78 . .\n\nFIG. 5: (Colour online) Density profiles for the situation where the substrate is covered by nanoparticles with average density ρ av n = 0 3 . and with the liquid excluded from the region y < 0 . The top row shows the nanoparticle density profiles and bottom row the corresponding liquid density profiles at the times t/t l = 1000 (left), 10000 (middle) and 30000 (right), where t l = 1 /kTM nc l σ 2 . The parameters are kT/ε ll = 0 8 . , ε nl /ε ll = 0 6 . , ε nn = 0 , α = 0 2 . M σ nc l 4 , M c l = 0 , ρ l ( t = 0) = 0 9 . ± ξ (where ξ represents white noise of amplitude 0.05) and ( µ -µ coex ) /kT = -0 78 . .\n\nThis theory allows us to study the time evolution of the evaporating film of nanoparticle suspension without some of the restrictions of the kinetic Monte Carlo model. Here, however, we illustrate its application in similar parameter regimes as used above for the KMC. We focus on two examples: (i) the spinodal dewetting of a initially flat film of nanoparticle suspension characterised by constant ρ l and ρ n (Fig. 4); and (ii) the retraction of a dewetting front that is unstable with respect to a fingering instability (Fig. 5).\n\nFig. 4 presents two pairs of snapshots from a purely evaporative dewetting process deep inside the parameter region of the phase diagram where spinodal dewetting occurs. For small times the film becomes unstable showing a typical spinodal labyrinthine pattern with a typical wavelength. The nanoparticles concentrate where the remaining liquid is situated. However, they are 'slow' in their reaction: when ρ l already takes values in the range 0.08 - 0.83, the nanoparticle concentration has only deviated by about 25% from its initial value. The film thins strongly forming many\n\n17", + "recall": 0.9396984924623115, + "true_md": "FIG. 5: (Colour online) Density profiles for the situation where the substrate is covered by nanoparticles with average density ρ av n = 0 . 3 and with the liquid excluded from the region y < 0 . The top row shows the nanoparticle density profiles and bottom row the corresponding liquid density profiles at the times t/t$_{l}$ = 1000 (left), 10000 (middle) and 30000 (right), where t$_{l}$ = 1 /kT M nc l σ $^{2}$. The parameters are kT/ε$_{ll}$ = 0 . 8 , ε$_{nl}$/ε$_{ll}$ = 0 . 6 , ε$_{nn}$ = 0 , α = 0 . 2 M nc l σ $^{4}$, M c l = 0 , ρ$_{l}$ ( t = 0) = 0 . 9 ± ξ (where ξ represents white noise of amplitude 0.05) and ( µ − µ$_{coex}$ ) /kT = − 0 . 78 .\n\nThis theory allows us to study the time evolution of the evaporating film of nanoparticle suspension without some of the restrictions of the kinetic Monte Carlo model. Here, however, we illustrate its application in similar parameter regimes as used above for the KMC. We focus on two examples: (i) the spinodal dewetting of a initially flat film of nanoparticle suspension characterised by con- stant ρ$_{l}$ and ρ$_{n}$ (Fig. 4); and (ii) the retraction of a dewetting front that is unstable with respect to a fingering instability (Fig. 5).\n\nFig. 4 presents two pairs of snapshots from a purely evaporative dewetting process deep inside the parameter region of the phase diagram where spinodal dewetting occurs. For small times the film becomes unstable showing a typical spinodal labyrinthine pattern with a typical wavelength. The nanoparticles concentrate where the remaining liquid is situated. However, they are ‘slow’ in their reaction: when ρ$_{l}$ already takes values in the range 0.08 – 0.83, the nanoparticle concentration has only deviated by about 25% from its initial value. The film thins strongly forming many\n\n17" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9956704747683278, + "doc_id": "fecf3c0367a5435e44b5665280c20b6bc82e5c0d4e2d8537fd92b151cebfbd26", + "edit_distance": 0.02599388379204893, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.7340615738515482, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "- (2007), [hep-ph/0607191].\n- [53] S. Matsuzaki, R. S. Chivukula, E. H. Simmons and M. Tanabashi.\n- [54] S. Dawson and C. B. Jackson, Phys. Rev. D76 , 015014 (2007), [hep-ph/0703299].\n- [55] T. Abe, S. Matsuzaki and M. Tanabashi, Phys. Rev. D78 , 055020 (2008), [0807.2298].\n- [56] M. E. Peskin and T. Takeuchi, Phys. Rev. Lett. 65 , 964 (1990).\n- [57] M. E. Peskin and T. Takeuchi, Phys. Rev. D46 , 381 (1992).\n- [58] R. Casalbuoni et al. , Phys. Lett. B349 , 533 (1995), [hep-ph/9502247].\n- [59] R. Casalbuoni et al. , Phys. Rev. D53 , 5201 (1996), [hep-ph/9510431].\n- [60] R. Casalbuoni, F. Coradeschi, S. De Curtis and D. Dominici, Phys. Rev. D77 , 095005 (2008), [0710.3057].\n- [61] T. Appelquist and C. W. Bernard, Phys. Rev. D22 , 200 (1980).\n- [62] A. C. Longhitano, Phys. Rev. D22 , 1166 (1980).\n- [63] N. Arkani-Hamed, M. Porrati and L. Randall, JHEP 08 , 017 (2001), [hep-th/0012148].\n- [64] R. Rattazzi and A. Zaffaroni, JHEP 04 , 021 (2001), [hep-th/0012248].\n- [65] A. Falkowski, Phys. Rev. D75 , 025017 (2007), [hep-ph/0610336].\n- [66] A. Falkowski, S. Pokorski and J. P. Roberts, JHEP 12 , 063 (2007), [0705.4653].\n- [67] G. Altarelli and R. Barbieri, Phys. Lett. B253 , 161 (1991).\n- [68] G. Altarelli, R. Barbieri and S. Jadach, Nucl. Phys. B369 , 3 (1992).\n- [69] G. Altarelli, R. Barbieri and F. Caravaglios, Nucl. Phys. B405 , 3 (1993).\n- [70] E. Witten, Adv. Theor. Math. Phys. 2 , 253 (1998), [hep-th/9802150].\n- [71] M. Perez-Victoria, JHEP 05 , 064 (2001), [hep-th/0105048].\n- [72] G. Burdman and Y. Nomura, Phys. Rev. D69 , 115013 (2004), [hep-ph/0312247].\n- [73] M. A. Luty, M. Porrati and R. Rattazzi, JHEP 09 , 029 (2003), [hep-th/0303116].\n- [74] A. Delgado and A. Falkowski, JHEP 05 , 097 (2007), [hep-ph/0702234].\n- [75] R. Sekhar Chivukula, D. A. Dicus and H.-J. He, Phys. Lett. B525 , 175 (2002), [hep-ph/0111016].\n- [76] R. Casalbuoni, S. De Curtis, D. Dominici and M. Grazzini, Phys. Rev. D56 , 5731 (1997), [hep-ph/9704229].\n- [77] ALEPH, Phys. Rept. 427 , 257 (2006), [hep-ex/0509008].\n- [78] Tevatron Electroweak Working Group, 0903.2503.\n- [79] F. Jegerlehner, Nucl. Phys. Proc. Suppl. 181-182 , 135 (2008), [0807.4206].\n\n39", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "39\n\n- [53] S. Matsuzaki, R. S. Chivukula, E. H. Simmons and M. Tanabashi.\n\n- [54] S. Dawson and C. B. Jackson, Phys. Rev. D76 , 015014 (2007), [hep-ph/0703299].\n\n- [55] T. Abe, S. Matsuzaki and M. Tanabashi, Phys. Rev. D78 , 055020 (2008), [0807.2298].\n\n- [56] M. E. Peskin and T. Takeuchi, Phys. Rev. Lett. 65 , 964 (1990).\n\n- [57] M. E. Peskin and T. Takeuchi, Phys. Rev. D46 , 381 (1992).\n\n- [58] R. Casalbuoni et al. , Phys. Lett. B349 , 533 (1995), [hep-ph/9502247].\n\n- [59] R. Casalbuoni et al. , Phys. Rev. D53 , 5201 (1996), [hep-ph/9510431].\n\n- [60] R. Casalbuoni, F. Coradeschi, S. De Curtis and D. Dominici, Phys. Rev. D77 , 095005 (2008), [0710.3057].\n\n- [61] T. Appelquist and C. W. Bernard, Phys. Rev. D22 , 200 (1980).\n\n- [62] A. C. Longhitano, Phys. Rev. D22 , 1166 (1980).\n\n- [63] N. Arkani-Hamed, M. Porrati and L. Randall, JHEP 08 , 017 (2001), [hep-th/0012148].\n\n- [64] R. Rattazzi and A. Zaffaroni, JHEP 04 , 021 (2001), [hep-th/0012248].\n\n- [65] A. Falkowski, Phys. Rev. D75 , 025017 (2007), [hep-ph/0610336].\n\n- [66] A. Falkowski, S. Pokorski and J. P. Roberts, JHEP 12 , 063 (2007), [0705.4653].\n\n- [67] G. Altarelli and R. Barbieri, Phys. Lett. B253 , 161 (1991).\n\n- [68] G. Altarelli, R. Barbieri and S. Jadach, Nucl. Phys. B369 , 3 (1992).\n\n- [69] G. Altarelli, R. Barbieri and F. Caravaglios, Nucl. Phys. B405 , 3 (1993).\n\n- [70] E. Witten, Adv. Theor. Math. Phys. 2 , 253 (1998), [hep-th/9802150].\n\n- [71] M. Perez-Victoria, JHEP 05 , 064 (2001), [hep-th/0105048].\n\n- [72] G. Burdman and Y. Nomura, Phys. Rev. D69 , 115013 (2004), [hep-ph/0312247].\n\n- [73] M. A. Luty, M. Porrati and R. Rattazzi, JHEP 09 , 029 (2003), [hep-th/0303116].\n\n- [74] A. Delgado and A. Falkowski, JHEP 05 , 097 (2007), [hep-ph/0702234].\n\n- [75] R. Sekhar Chivukula, D. A. Dicus and H.-J. He, Phys. Lett. B525 , 175 (2002), [hep-ph/0111016].\n\n- [76] R. Casalbuoni, S. De Curtis, D. Dominici and M. Grazzini, Phys. Rev. D56 , 5731 (1997), [hep-ph/9704229].\n\n- [77] ALEPH, Phys. Rept. 427 , 257 (2006), [hep-ex/0509008].\n\n- [78] Tevatron Electroweak Working Group, 0903.2503.\n\n- [79] F. Jegerlehner, Nucl. Phys. Proc. Suppl. 181-182 , 135 (2008), [0807.4206].\n\n(2007), [hep-ph/0607191]." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7414117873985203, + "doc_id": "9c93448dbf4091fdc2be74a753dd642a718cff7f2403f44dad103556046abc2d", + "edit_distance": 0.3143350604490501, + "f1_score": 0.9665809768637532, + "meteor": 0.7578786029415738, + "precision": 0.9791666666666666, + "pred_md": "19\n\nfrom wave functions to geometries is not really understood, so how the details of the wave function appear in the data are still obscured. Given enough data, one should be able -at lest in principle- to reconstruct the 'theory' from the output of the black box. What we have chosen to do is to use simple geometric observables that describe integrals over a geometry. If we had a more precise understanding of the data, this could be exploited to get a picture of local geometric information.\n\nThe next step in our procedure is to examine the data of the moments of the inverse radius of the distribution and to check how big are the fluctuations, relative to the size of the moments for the same setup N = 10000 and Q = 100. This is the choice that we made before looking at the data. In particular, we are at first more interested in seeing how large are the fluctuations of these observables. This will give us a rough idea of how far from the large N limit we really are. In a certain sense, this is one of the most important pieces of information we can gather. If we expect some precision on the local geometry, we want basic geometric quantities to have low variance. If the variance is high, individual pictures of the data will be very fuzzy relative to the large N limit.\n\nThe results of this analysis appear in the figure 2.\n\nFIG. 2: On the left figure, the mean value of the moments at N = 10000, Q = 100, for k = 1 , . . . , 14. On the right, the statistical variance δf /f k k . As can be seen, the variance in the values increase as we take k larger, and are already of order 10% for k = 14, which is a moderate value of k . This indicates that fluctuations start becoming important for relatively low values of k , even in the case where Q is large. For smaller Q the inner radius is smaller, and fluctuations of one outlying particle near the inner edge are even more important in f k .\n\nFIG. 2: On the left figure, the mean value of the moments at N = 10000, Q = 100, for k = 1 , . . . , 14. On the right, the statistical variance δf /f k k . As can be seen, the variance in the values increase as we take k larger, and are already of order 10% for k = 14, which is a moderate value of k . This indicates that fluctuations start becoming important for relatively low values of k , even in the case where Q is large. For smaller Q the inner radius is smaller, and fluctuations of one outlying particle near the inner edge are even more important in f k .\n\nThe figure shows that the variance of the observables depends on the quantum numbers of the observables. A look of the data suggests a power law behavior. We can test this in a log plot, shown in figure 3.", + "recall": 0.9543147208121827, + "true_md": "19\n\nfrom wave functions to geometries is not really understood, so how the details of the wave function appear in the data are still obscured. Given enough data, one should be able –at lest in principle– to reconstruct the ‘theory’ from the output of the black box. What we have chosen to do is to use simple geometric observables that describe integrals over a geometry.\n\nIf we had a more precise understanding of the data, this could be exploited to get a picture of local geometric information.\n\nThe next step in our procedure is to examine the data of the moments of the inverse radius of the distribution and to check how big are the fluctuations, relative to the size of the moments for the same setup N = 10000 and Q = 100. This is the choice that we made before looking at the data. In particular, we are at first more interested in seeing how large are the fluctuations of these observables. This will give us a rough idea of how far from the large N limit we really are. In a certain sense, this is one of the most important pieces of information we can gather. If we expect some precision on the local geometry, we want basic geometric quantities to have low variance. If the variance is high, individual pictures of the data will be very fuzzy relative to the large N limit.\n\nThe results of this analysis appear in the figure 2.\n\nThe figure shows that the variance of the observables depends on the quantum numbers of the observables. A look of the data suggests a power law behavior. We can test this in a log plot, shown in figure 3.\n\nFIG. 2: On the left figure, the mean value of the moments at N = 10000, Q = 100, for k = 1 , . . . , 14. On the right, the statistical variance δf$_{k}$/f$_{k}$ . As can be seen, the variance in the values increase as we take k larger, and are already of order 10% for k = 14, which is a moderate value of k . This indicates that fluctuations start becoming important for relatively low values of k , even in the case where Q is large. For smaller Q the inner radius is smaller, and fluctuations of one outlying particle near the inner edge are even more important in f$_{k}$ ." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0009111901492048423, + "doc_id": "73b96d99adff5666cb243d5f74b757251d58d22ebd283fb80ee94d2f80c81bff", + "edit_distance": 0.9430555555555555, + "f1_score": 0.6405228758169934, + "meteor": 0.09445518219381219, + "precision": 0.8909090909090909, + "pred_md": "The diagram for the ghost self-energy has already been considered in (87) and its PP is given by\n\n\n\nIn the sequel we consider the diagrams Λ µνλ of the left-hand side of (103), with ghost loop,\n\n\n\n\n\nand photon loop,\n\n\n\nthat have the same phase factors and, therefore, can be calculated analogously. Their PP contributions are\n\n\n\n18", + "recall": 0.5, + "true_md": "The diagram for the ghost self-energy has already been considered in (87) and its PP is given by\n\nIn the sequel we consider the diagrams Λ µνλ of the left-hand side of (103), with ghost loop,\n\nand photon loop,\n\nthat have the same phase factors and, therefore, can be calculated analogously. Their PP contri- butions are\n\n$$PP[ p$_{µ}$γ $^{µνλ}$( p, q, k ) b ( p $^{2}$)] = e 2 16 π 2 1 ϵ [( k $^{2}$g λν − k $^{λ}$k$^{ν}$) − ( q $^{2}$g νλ − q $^{ν}$q$^{λ}$)] . (111)$$\n\n$$= 2 e sin( p ∧ q )Λ µνλ b 1 ( p, q, k ) (112) = − i $^{3}$(2 e ) 3 ∫ d $^{4}$l (2 π ) 4 l $^{λ}$( p + l ) $^{µ}$( p + q + l ) ν l $^{2}$( p + l ) $^{2}$( p + q + l ) 2 × sin( l ∧ p ) sin( l ∧ p + l ∧ q ) sin( l ∧ q + p ∧ q ) ,$$\n\n$$= 2 e sin( p ∧ q )Λ µνλ b 2 ( p, q, k ) (113) = − i $^{3}$(2 e ) 3 ∫ d $^{4}$l (2 π ) 4 ( − p − q − l ) $^{λ}$( − p − l ) $^{ν}$( − l ) µ l $^{2}$( p + l ) $^{2}$( p + q + l ) 2 × sin( l ∧ p ) sin( − l ∧ p − l ∧ q ) sin( l ∧ q + p ∧ q ) ,$$\n\n$$= 2 e sin( p ∧ q )Λ µνλ c ( p, q, k ) (114) = i $^{3}$(2 e ) 3 ∫ d $^{4}$l (2 π ) 4 γ $^{αλβ}$( p + q + l, − p − q, − l ) γ $^{βµρ}$( l, p, − p − l ) l $^{2}$( p + l ) $^{2}$( p + q + l ) 2 × γ $^{ρνα}$( l + p, q, − p − q − l ) sin( l ∧ p ) sin( − l ∧ p − l ∧ q ) sin( l ∧ q + p ∧ q ) ,$$\n\n$$PP[ p$_{µ}$ Λ µνλ b 1 ,b 2 $_{,c}$( p, q, k )] = − 19 e 2 96 π 2 1 ϵ [( k $^{2}$g λν − k $^{λ}$k$^{ν}$) − ( q $^{2}$g νλ − q $^{ν}$q$^{λ}$)] . (115)$$\n\n18" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9935925979223968, + "doc_id": "715b2cb5be8e9a89d1a619dc3ffa65b1b3316de2c57bef3a06927da5dbb0ac54", + "edit_distance": 0.003669724770642202, + "f1_score": 0.9978947368421054, + "meteor": 0.9965129224993046, + "precision": 0.9957983193277311, + "pred_md": "8\n\nuse simulates the probability distribution of eigenvalues from the square of the quenched wave function (including the measure effects). This is very different in spirit than lattice approaches. It also is free from sign or phase problems. Also, because our matrices are diagonal, we have only 6 N degrees of freedom, so N can be made large at moderate cost. Using the same Monte-Carlo code, we will address the questions above for a particularly simple class of wave functions, namely those described by equation 1. For these wave functions the geometry of the eigenvalues looks like a five-sphere with a hole in the center, so we are not studying the process of topology changes. We are fixing the topology at the beginning. The issue we will study seems very mundane: how do we measure the radius of the hole? Since these are wave functions of fixed topology, we will not address the first question above at all: the topology is known so we do not need an algorithm to figure it out. We also have chosen the orientation of the feature on the sphere and do not have to orient the data to analyze the geometry. Given this, we can see by eye the topology on these simple situations by projecting the particles positions on the Z plane. The more general problem of also determining the topology for a random configuration with a complicated wave function would be hard: we would need to find a way to do pattern recognition on these distributions to define topology. Regarding measurement of size, we propose various definitions of the size of the simplest geometric features and we study their virtues and failings. In particular, to simplify matters further, we want to characterize the simplest such non-trivial feature: the radius of the hole compared to the radius of the sphere. In the end, from the different choices of definitions of the radius at finite N , one such class of measurements seems to give an optimal solution to the problem. For this particular class of observables we can then address the 1 /N corrections in more detail. The definitions we use are simple to describe, but that does not mean that they are optimal. We can only say that they are optimal only within the choices we have.\n\nThe paper is organized as follows. In section II we describe some basic aspects of the wave functions and statistical distributions that we simulate later on. In particular, we show how the thermodynamic limit should be taken: N → ∞ , keeping q = Q/N fixed. We also pay special attention to how a factor of N 2 appears in front of the energy for the thermodynamic limit after appropriate rescalings. We also describe various functions that allow us to define the size of the features of the geometry of the eigenvalue distributions. The definition of the size depends on taking a limit k →∞ of such measurements, so that one expects a well", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "8\n\nuse simulates the probability distribution of eigenvalues from the square of the quenched wave function (including the measure effects). This is very different in spirit than lattice approaches. It also is free from sign or phase problems. Also, because our matrices are diagonal, we have only 6 N degrees of freedom, so N can be made large at moderate cost.\n\nUsing the same Monte-Carlo code, we will address the questions above for a particularly simple class of wave functions, namely those described by equation 1. For these wave functions the geometry of the eigenvalues looks like a five-sphere with a hole in the center, so we are not studying the process of topology changes. We are fixing the topology at the beginning. The issue we will study seems very mundane: how do we measure the radius of the hole? Since these are wave functions of fixed topology, we will not address the first question above at all: the topology is known so we do not need an algorithm to figure it out.\n\nWe also have chosen the orientation of the feature on the sphere and do not have to orient the data to analyze the geometry. Given this, we can see by eye the topology on these simple situations by projecting the particles positions on the Z plane. The more general problem of also determining the topology for a random configuration with a complicated wave function would be hard: we would need to find a way to do pattern recognition on these distributions to define topology. Regarding measurement of size, we propose various definitions of the size of the simplest geometric features and we study their virtues and failings. In particular, to simplify matters further, we want to characterize the simplest such non-trivial feature: the radius of the hole compared to the radius of the sphere. In the end, from the different choices of definitions of the radius at finite N , one such class of measurements seems to give an optimal solution to the problem. For this particular class of observables we can then address the 1 /N corrections in more detail. The definitions we use are simple to describe, but that does not mean that they are optimal. We can only say that they are optimal only within the choices we have.\n\nThe paper is organized as follows. In section II we describe some basic aspects of the wave functions and statistical distributions that we simulate later on. In particular, we show how the thermodynamic limit should be taken: N → ∞ , keeping q = Q/N fixed. We also pay special attention to how a factor of N 2 appears in front of the energy for the thermodynamic limit after appropriate rescalings. We also describe various functions that allow us to define the size of the features of the geometry of the eigenvalue distributions. The definition of the size depends on taking a limit k → ∞ of such measurements, so that one expects a well" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7739424774324483, + "doc_id": "a050516c82c507c0026cfab1fe263ac26e6503eb4539e3c5e216f2ce5233dc1b", + "edit_distance": 0.15721649484536082, + "f1_score": 0.9696969696969697, + "meteor": 0.8572226288183786, + "precision": 0.9811320754716981, + "pred_md": "6\n\nIn the following, we will not consider this possibility, but rather restrict for simplicity to a constant coupling (as it is standard in the literature), so, from the 4D side, we will have g i ≡ g c .\n\nThe trickiest part of the generalization, however, is to interpret the cutting of the link. To understand this properly, we can start by noticing that the cut link prevents any direct contact between the two sides of the moose; the fields on the left only couple to those on the right through the field U . In this sense, the moose is split by the cut in two separate pieces, linked by U . Due to the reflection symmetry (see Eq. (5)), the two pieces are identical to each other, at a site-by-site level, from every point of view: field content, coupling constants g i , link couplings f i . The right way to look at this set up is to consider the sites connected by the reflection symmetry as describing the same point along the extra dimension : for example, we can look at the fields A i and A 2 N -i not as values of the same 5D SU (2) gauge field at two different points along the extra dimension, but rather components of a single SU (2) ⊗ SU (2) gauge field at the same extra-dimensional location. We can do this, because by Eq. (7), the warp factor - and thus the 5D metric - at a given site, only depends on the value of the link coupling constant f i , which is equal at points identified by the reflection symmetry, that describe the same point y i on the 5 th dimension. The situation is depicted graphically in Fig. 2: it is equivalent to flip one of the pieces of the moose and superposing it to the other one. In this way, we do not obtain a 5D SU (2) gauge theory, but a SU (2) L ⊗ SU (2) R one, with the left part of the moose describing the SU (2) L gauge theory and the right part SU (2) R and the coupling constants of the two sectors of the gauge group identified by a discrete symmetry. The field U no longer appears as nonlocal, but rather as confined at one end of the extra-dimensional segment.\n\nThe last point to consider is the presence of different gauge fields - the ones corresponding to SU (2) L ⊗ U (1) Y -at the two ends of the moose, which are identified with one of the endpoints of the 5D interval (which for definiteness we will take to be y = πR ). This can be accounted for by considering localized kinetic terms at y = πR for the 5D gauge fields; the fields ˜ W and ˜ can then be simply identified with the values of the B SU (2) L and of the third component of the SU (2) R 5D gauge fields respectively. Notice that the 'flipped' GD-BESS moose has N + 1 sites: N for the SU (2) L ⊗ SU (2) R gauge fields and the last one for the fields corresponding to SU (2) L ⊗ U (1) Y . By convention, we will map this last site to the y = πR end of the extra dimension; the other endpoint, y = 0, will correspond to the gauge", + "recall": 0.9585253456221198, + "true_md": "6\n\nIn the following, we will not consider this possibility, but rather restrict for simplicity to a constant coupling (as it is standard in the literature), so, from the 4D side, we will have g$_{i}$ ≡ g$_{c}$ . The trickiest part of the generalization, however, is to interpret the cutting of the link.\n\n≡ The trickiest part of the generalization, however, is to interpret the cutting of the link. To understand this properly, we can start by noticing that the cut link prevents any direct contact between the two sides of the moose; the fields on the left only couple to those on the right through the field U . In this sense, the moose is split by the cut in two separate pieces, linked by U . Due to the reflection symmetry (see Eq. (5)), the two pieces are identical to each other, at a site-by-site level, from every point of view: field content, coupling constants g$_{i}$ , link couplings f$_{i}$ . The right way to look at this set up is to consider the sites connected by the reflection symmetry as describing the same point along the extra dimension : for example, we can look at the fields A i and A 2 $^{N}$−i not as values of the same 5D SU (2) gauge field at two different points along the extra dimension, but rather components of a single SU (2) ⊗ SU (2) gauge field at the same extra-dimensional location. We can do this, because by Eq. (7), the warp factor - and thus the 5D metric - at a given site, only depends on the value of the link coupling constant f$_{i}$ , which is equal at points identified by the reflection symmetry, that describe the same point y$_{i}$ on the 5 th dimension. The situation is depicted graphically in Fig. 2: it is equivalent to flip one of the pieces of the moose and superposing it to the other one. In this way, we do not obtain a 5D SU (2) gauge theory, but a SU (2)$_{L}$ ⊗ SU (2)$_{R}$ one, with the left part of the moose describing the SU (2)$_{L}$ gauge theory and the right part SU (2)$_{R}$ and the coupling constants of the two sectors of the gauge group identified by a discrete symmetry. The field U no longer appears as nonlocal, but rather as confined at one end of the extra-dimensional segment.\n\nThe last point to consider is the presence of different gauge fields - the ones corresponding to SU (2)$_{L}$ ⊗ U (1)$_{Y}$ - at the two ends of the moose, which are identified with one of the endpoints of the 5D interval (which for definiteness we will take to be y = πR ). This can be accounted for by considering localized kinetic terms at y = πR for the 5D gauge fields; the fields ˜ W and ˜ B can then be simply identified with the values of the SU (2)$_{L}$ and of the third component of the SU (2)$_{R}$ 5D gauge fields respectively. Notice that the “flipped” GD-BESS moose has N + 1 sites: N for the SU (2)$_{L}$ ⊗ SU (2)$_{R}$ gauge fields and the last one for the fields corresponding to SU (2)$_{L}$ ⊗ U (1)$_{Y}$ . By convention, we will map this last site to the y = πR end of the extra dimension; the other endpoint, y = 0, will correspond to the gauge" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4531066712143879, + "doc_id": "3672f622dde6474de1261b01b9f54ba2551953ca664769c29309512a7c087cec", + "edit_distance": 0.5151515151515151, + "f1_score": 0.9450549450549451, + "meteor": 0.8778973516112613, + "precision": 0.9555555555555556, + "pred_md": "FIG. 6: (Color) 'Dynamic phase diagram' for 40 kbp fragments of λ -DNA with one free end, at salt concentration c =500 mM. The dynamic stretching protocol is as Fig. 3: note the larger fraction of S-DNA seen here.\n\nFIG. 6: (Color) 'Dynamic phase diagram' for 40 kbp fragments of λ -DNA with one free end, at salt concentration c =500 mM. The dynamic stretching protocol is as Fig. 3: note the larger fraction of S-DNA seen here.\n\n13", + "recall": 0.9347826086956522, + "true_md": "FIG. 6: (Color) ‘Dynamic phase diagram’ for 40 kbp fragments of λ -DNA with one free end, at salt concentration c =500 mM. The dynamic stretching protocol is as Fig. 3: note the larger fraction of S-DNA seen here.\n\n13" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7785753583201962, + "doc_id": "d68d359b0289d7fa515d48e75ea8e4ee6a70bd6d4991b95e84bdf178c119909d", + "edit_distance": 0.26571428571428574, + "f1_score": 0.9578313253012049, + "meteor": 0.8823338467605465, + "precision": 0.9636363636363636, + "pred_md": "From Eq. (19), one can see that σ ( p ) SI ∝ (sin 2 θ/v ' ) 2 for a given DM mass m N . Fig. 3 shows the spin-independent cross section of RH neutrino with a proton. The resultant cross section is found to be far below the current limits reported by XENON10 [24] and CDMSII [25]: σ SI /lessorsimilar 4 × 10 -8 -2 × 10 -7 pb, for a DM mass of 100 GeV-1 TeV. Future experiments such as XENON1T [26] can reach the cross section predicted in our model.\n\nFIG. 3: The spin independent scattering cross section with a proton. All parameters are same as those used in the previous section. The upper and lower lines correspond to sin θ = 0 7 and 0 3, . . respectively.\n\nFIG. 3: The spin independent scattering cross section with a proton. All parameters are same as those used in the previous section. The upper and lower lines correspond to sin θ = 0 7 and 0 3, . . respectively.\n\n## IV. SUMMARY\n\nWe have proposed a scenario of the RH neutrino dark matter in the context of the minimal gauged U (1) B -L model. We have introduced a discrete Z 2 parity in the model, so that one RH neutrino assigned as Z 2 -odd can be stable and, hence, the DM candidate, while the other two RH neutrinos account for neutrino masses and mixings through the seesaw mechanism. No additional degrees of freedom are necessary to be added. We have evaluated the relic density of the dark matter particle. The dominant annihilation modes are via the Higgs boson exchange processes in the s -channel and thus, our model can be called Higgs portal DM model. It has been found that the relic density consistent with the current observation\n\n8", + "recall": 0.9520958083832335, + "true_md": "From Eq. (19), one can see that σ ( p ) SI ∝ (sin 2 θ/v ′ ) 2 for a given DM mass m$_{N}$ . Fig. 3 shows the spin-independent cross section of RH neutrino with a proton. The resultant cross section is found to be far below the current limits reported by XENON10 [24] and CDMSII [25]: σ$_{SI}$ ≲ 4 × 10 − 8 − 2 × 10 − 7 pb, for a DM mass of 100 GeV-1 TeV. Future experiments such as XENON1T [26] can reach the cross section predicted in our model.\n\nFIG. 3: The spin independent scattering cross section with a proton. All parameters are same as those used in the previous section. The upper and lower lines correspond to sin θ = 0 . 7 and 0 . 3, respectively.\n\nWe have proposed a scenario of the RH neutrino dark matter in the context of the minimal gauged U (1)$_{B}$ − L model. We have introduced a discrete Z$_{2}$ parity in the model, so that one RH neutrino assigned as Z$_{2}$ -odd can be stable and, hence, the DM candidate, while the other two RH neutrinos account for neutrino masses and mixings through the seesaw mechanism. No additional degrees of freedom are necessary to be added. We have evaluated the relic density of the dark matter particle. The dominant annihilation modes are via the Higgs boson exchange processes in the s -channel and thus, our model can be called Higgs portal DM model. It has been found that the relic density consistent with the current observation\n\n## IV. SUMMARY\n\n8" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5281225173213859, + "doc_id": "70c20668ecc92b558dd0302b2ce2bba7330c8251baa36f24a3c8584c217ed102", + "edit_distance": 0.3964968152866242, + "f1_score": 0.9072681704260652, + "meteor": 0.6528661912791792, + "precision": 0.9576719576719577, + "pred_md": "- (c) E in ‖ ΓK, q ‖ ΓK ‖ E in [solid line in Fig. 3(b)],\n\n\n\n\n\nwhere the maximum of δ/δ LL is reached outside the first Brillouin zone, which point more appropriately belongs to the case (a);\n\n- (d) E in ‖ ΓM, q ‖ ΓM ‖ E in [long-dashed line in Fig. 3(b)],\n\n\n\n\n\nThe inequalities (24) and (26) also represent the edges of the locsiton bands for the cases of E in ‖ ΓM and E in ‖ ΓK, respectively (which explains our desire not to restrict the range of q to the first Brillouin zone when obtaining these inequalities). Note that locsitons with the largest red shift ( δ/δ LL > 0) can be achieved with E in ‖ ΓK, while locsitons with the largest blue shift ( δ/δ LL < 0) can be achieved with E in ‖ ΓM. Therefore, re-orienting the lattice with respect to the polarization of the incident laser beam may assist in controlling the type of locsitons excited in the lattice.\n\n## IV. FINITE LATTICES: IN-PLANE POLARIZATION\n\nIn this section, like in Sec. III, we only consider the case where E in is spatially uniform and lies in the lattice plane (the ' ‖ ' case), which is easier to achieve if the laser beam is incident normally to the lattice plane. The presence of boundaries and defects in 2D lattices of resonant atoms can cause various locsitonic effects, including giant LF resonances, formation of dipole strata, and 'magic' cancellation of the resonant LF suppression. These effects are similar in their nature to their counterparts in 1D arrays of resonant atoms [1, 2], but their manifestations are much more diverse because of the inherent anisotropy of the dipole-dipole interaction in the 2D case, especially in the ' ‖ ' geometry. Because of this, an all-encompassing study of finite 2D lattices is hardly possible within this pilot study on the subject, so we will restrict ourselves to providing some of the most characteristic results, which emphasize distinctions from the 1D problem.\n\n17", + "recall": 0.861904761904762, + "true_md": "(c) E$_{in}$ ‖ ΓK, q ‖ ΓK ‖ E$_{in}$ [solid line in Fig. 3(b)],  √\n\n$$cos q 2 = 1 16   1 ± √ 1 + 32 ( 4 + 3 δ + i δ$_{LL}$ )   , (25) 33 δ 2$$\n\n$$  − 1 33 96 ≤ δ δ$_{LL}$ ≤ 1 2 3 ; (26)$$\n\n$$[long-dashed line in Fig. 3(b)], cos $_{q}$√$_{3}$ 2 = 1 5 ( 2 + 3 δ + i δ$_{LL}$ ) , (27)$$\n\n$$− 2 1 3 ≤ δ δ$_{LL}$ ≤ 1 . (28)$$\n\nwhere the maximum of δ/δ$_{LL}$ is reached outside the first Brillouin zone, which point more appropriately belongs to the case (a);\n\n(d) E$_{in}$ ‖ ΓM, q ‖ ΓM ‖ E$_{in}$ [long-dashed line in Fig. 3(b)], $_{q}$√$_{3}$ ( )\n\nThe inequalities (24) and (26) also represent the edges of the locsiton bands for the cases of E$_{in}$ ‖ ΓM and E$_{in}$ ‖ ΓK, respectively (which explains our desire not to restrict the range of q to the first Brillouin zone when obtaining these inequalities). Note that locsitons with the largest red shift ( δ/δ$_{LL}$ > 0) can be achieved with E$_{in}$ ‖ ΓK, while locsitons with the largest blue shift ( δ/δ$_{LL}$ < 0) can be achieved with E$_{in}$ ‖ ΓM. Therefore, re-orienting the lattice with respect to the polarization of the incident laser beam may assist in controlling the type of locsitons excited in the lattice.\n\nIn this section, like in Sec. III, we only consider the case where E$_{in}$ is spatially uniform and lies in the lattice plane (the “ ‖ ” case), which is easier to achieve if the laser beam is incident normally to the lattice plane. The presence of boundaries and defects in 2D lattices of resonant atoms can cause various locsitonic effects, including giant LF resonances, formation of dipole strata, and “magic” cancellation of the resonant LF suppression. These effects are similar in their nature to their counterparts in 1D arrays of resonant atoms [1, 2], but their manifestations are much more diverse because of the inherent anisotropy of the dipole-dipole interaction in the 2D case, especially in the “ ‖ ” geometry. Because of this, an all-encompassing study of finite 2D lattices is hardly possible within this pilot study on the subject, so we will restrict ourselves to providing some of the most characteristic results, which emphasize distinctions from the 1D problem.\n\n## IV. FINITE LATTICES: IN-PLANE POLARIZATION\n\n17" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8971611111037797, + "doc_id": "af1e5313ecfdf2f2069f7cd38bc6bec0c9a4769304b0bc739690e88bb40b7ba9", + "edit_distance": 0.2075, + "f1_score": 0.944700460829493, + "meteor": 0.9282224968466831, + "precision": 0.9534883720930233, + "pred_md": "30\n\nbe exploited to analyze the system better.\n\nFor geometries with more features than a single hole in the center of the distribution, it would be interesting to figure out if one can find a fit to the wave function from numerical data. Such a dictionary would help us understand a lot better the relation between the geometry and the original quantum setup. Such an approach will obviously use more information about how the configurations were generated to infer (or reconstruct) information.\n\nNotice also that we are not considering either coarse grained geometries (statistics over multiple states that share common features) nor random statistical states in the ensemble. For such states, other techniques are available that show how hard it is to measure microscopic geometries [44]. Distinguishing the geometries obtained from bona-fide 'geometries' from those obtained from random superpositions of states should also be interesting. We are currently looking into these matters.\n\n## Acknowledgments\n\nD. B. would like to thank G. Horowitz and especially L. Yaffe for many discussions on large N limits. Work supported in part by DOE under grant DE-FG02-91ER40618.\n\n- [1] J. M. Maldacena, 'The large N limit of superconformal field theories and supergravity,' Adv. Theor. Math. Phys. 2 , 231 (1998) [Int. J. Theor. Phys. 38 , 1113 (1999)] [arXiv:hepth/9711200].\n- [2] S. W. Hawking, 'Breakdown Of Predictability In Gravitational Collapse,' Phys. Rev. D 14 , 2460 (1976).\n- [3] S. S. Gubser, I. R. Klebanov and A. M. Polyakov, 'Gauge theory correlators from non-critical string theory,' Phys. Lett. B 428 , 105 (1998) [arXiv:hep-th/9802109].\n- [4] E. Witten, 'Anti-de Sitter space and holography,' Adv. Theor. Math. Phys. 2 , 253 (1998) [arXiv:hep-th/9802150].\n- [5] D. Berenstein, 'Large N BPS states and emergent quantum gravity,' JHEP 0601 , 125 (2006) [arXiv:hep-th/0507203].", + "recall": 0.9360730593607306, + "true_md": "30\n\n## Acknowledgments\n\nbe exploited to analyze the system better.\n\nFor geometries with more features than a single hole in the center of the distribution, it would be interesting to figure out if one can find a fit to the wave function from numerical data. Such a dictionary would help us understand a lot better the relation between the geom- etry and the original quantum setup. Such an approach will obviously use more information about how the configurations were generated to infer (or reconstruct) information.\n\nNotice also that we are not considering either coarse grained geometries (statistics over multiple states that share common features) nor random statistical states in the ensemble.\n\nFor such states, other techniques are available that show how hard it is to measure micro- scopic geometries [44]. Distinguishing the geometries obtained from bona-fide ’geometries’ from those obtained from random superpositions of states should also be interesting. We are currently looking into these matters.\n\nD. B. would like to thank G. Horowitz and especially L. Yaffe for many discussions on large N limits. Work supported in part by DOE under grant DE-FG02-91ER40618.\n\n- [1] J. M. Maldacena, “The large N limit of superconformal field theories and supergravity,” Adv. Theor. Math. Phys. 2 , 231 (1998) [Int. J. Theor. Phys. 38 , 1113 (1999)] [arXiv:hep- th/9711200].\n\n- [3] S. S. Gubser, I. R. Klebanov and A. M. Polyakov, “Gauge theory correlators from non-critical string theory,” Phys. Lett. B 428 , 105 (1998) [arXiv:hep-th/9802109].\n\n- [4] E. Witten, “Anti-de Sitter space and holography,” Adv. Theor. Math. Phys. 2 , 253 (1998) [arXiv:hep-th/9802150].\n\n- [5] D. Berenstein, “Large N BPS states and emergent quantum gravity,” JHEP 0601 , 125 (2006) [arXiv:hep-th/0507203].\n\n- [2] S. W. Hawking, “Breakdown Of Predictability In Gravitational Collapse,” Phys. Rev. D 14 , 2460 (1976)." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5691929324143733, + "doc_id": "f4008eb176259838c3204dfdd3d03af3ce745320c4d2ab619a007b8460a32e94", + "edit_distance": 0.39305555555555555, + "f1_score": 0.8927680798004988, + "meteor": 0.6277221991423507, + "precision": 0.9421052631578948, + "pred_md": "8\n\n- · L a MN and R a MN are the SU (2) L ⊗ SU (2) R gauge field strengths:\n\n\n\nthe fields W a L R ( ) represent the continuum limit of the A ai\n\n- · ˜, g ˜ , g ' g 5 are three, in general different, gauge couplings. ˜ and g ˜ g ' are the direct analogous of their deconstructed counterparts. g 5 is the bulk coupling, it has mass dimension -1 2 , and it is the 5D limit of the g i , as can be seen by Eq. (7)\n- · the brane scalar U is a SU (2)-valued field, with its covariant derivative defined by:\n\n\n\nin exact analogy with Eq. (4). Note that the field U is analogous to the one that describes the standard Higgs sector in the limit of an infinite Higgs mass [61]. It can be conveniently parametrized in terms of three real pseudo-scalar fields π a ,\n\n\n\n- · the fermionic terms, which we take to be confined on the brane for simplicity, have the usual SM form.\n\nIt is important to notice that the action (8) does not define the physics of the model uniquely: we still have the freedom of choosing boundary conditions (BCs) for the fields. This BC ambiguity is absent in deconstructed models: the BCs get implicitly specified by the way in which the discretization of the 5 th dimension is realized. This means that the GD-BESS model described by Eq. (1) already has a specific set of 'built-in' BCs. These can be understood by looking at the residual gauge symmetry at the ends of the moose. It is apparent that, after the 'flipping' depicted in Fig. 2, at the N th and ( N + 1) th sites, corresponding to y = 0 in the continuum limit, we have the full SU (2) L ⊗ SU (2) R gauge invariance. By contrast, at the 0 th and (2 N +1) th sites, corresponding to y = πR , the gauge symmetry is broken down to SU (2) L ⊗ U (1) Y . To do this, we have to impose Dirichlet BCs on two of the SU (2) R gauge fields at y = πR , while all the other fields, and all the fields at y = 0 are unconstrained. The complete gauge symmetry breaking pattern is thus as follows: we have a SU (2) L ⊗ SU (2) R gauge invariance in the bulk, unbroken on the y = 0 brane and", + "recall": 0.8483412322274881, + "true_md": "8\n\n- • L a MN and R a MN are the SU (2)$_{L}$ ⊗ SU (2)$_{R}$ gauge field strengths:\n\n- • ˜ g , ˜ g ′ , g$_{5}$ are three, in general different, gauge couplings. ˜ g and ˜ g ′ are the direct analogous of their deconstructed counterparts. g$_{5}$ is the bulk coupling, it has mass dimension − 1 $_{2}$, and it is the 5D limit of the g$_{i}$ , as can be seen by Eq. (7)\n\n- • the brane scalar U is a SU (2)-valued field, with its covariant derivative defined by:\n\nin exact analogy with Eq. (4). Note that the field U is analogous to the one that describes the standard Higgs sector in the limit of an infinite Higgs mass [61]. It can be conveniently parametrized in terms of three real pseudo-scalar fields π $^{a}$,\n\n- • the fermionic terms, which we take to be confined on the brane for simplicity, have the usual SM form.\n\nIt is important to notice that the action (8) does not define the physics of the model uniquely: we still have the freedom of choosing boundary conditions (BCs) for the fields. This BC ambiguity is absent in deconstructed models: the BCs get implicitly specified by the way in which the discretization of the 5 th dimension is realized. This means that the GD-BESS model described by Eq. (1) already has a specific set of “built-in” BCs. These can be understood by looking at the residual gauge symmetry at the ends of the moose. It is apparent that, after the “flipping” depicted in Fig. 2, at the N th and ( N + 1) th sites, corresponding to y = 0 in the continuum limit, we have the full SU (2)$_{L}$ ⊗ SU (2)$_{R}$ gauge invariance. By contrast, at the 0 th and (2 N + 1) th sites, corresponding to y = πR , the gauge symmetry is broken down to SU (2)$_{L}$ ⊗ U (1)$_{Y}$ . To do this, we have to impose Dirichlet BCs on two of the SU (2)$_{R}$ gauge fields at y = πR , while all the other fields, and all the fields at y = 0 are unconstrained. The complete gauge symmetry breaking pattern is thus as follows: we have a SU (2)$_{L}$ ⊗ SU (2)$_{R}$ gauge invariance in the bulk, unbroken on the y = 0 brane and\n\n$$U = exp( iπ $^{a}$τa 2˜ v ); (12)$$\n\n$$D$_{µ}$U = ∂$_{µ}$U + iW a L µ τ a 2 U − iW 3 $_{R µ}$U τ 3 2 , (11)$$\n\n$$L ( R ) a MN = ∂$_{M}$W a L ( R ) N − ∂$_{N}$W a L ( R ) M + iϵ $^{abc}$W b L ( R ) $_{M}$W c L ( R ) $_{N}$; (10)$$\n\nthe fields W a L ( R ) represent the continuum limit of the A ai" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.522576148569912, + "doc_id": "610fbb2f847382e8719335f776e7a0bd96f8011588bb4287a3b2305fbe3101bc", + "edit_distance": 0.49772727272727274, + "f1_score": 0.9049180327868852, + "meteor": 0.6168274140992543, + "precision": 0.9452054794520548, + "pred_md": "24\n\nFIG. 3: Graphical solutions of the eigenvalue equation (87) for the left charged sector. The intersections corresponding to the first and second KK excitations can be clearly seen. On the top right panel, the magnification of the low mass region showing the intersection corresponding to the zero mode, W.\n\nFIG. 3: Graphical solutions of the eigenvalue equation (87) for the left charged sector. The intersections corresponding to the first and second KK excitations can be clearly seen. On the top right panel, the magnification of the low mass region showing the intersection corresponding to the zero mode, W.\n\nThe neutral sector has a more complicated eigenvalue equation (48). However, it can be easily checked that, as soon as m /greatermuch m Z , the right-hand side of the equation is negligible so that it can be approximated:\n\n\n\nThe eigenvalue equation can then be approximately factorized into two independent ones; the first one is identical to eq. (87), the second one is similar with the replacement g → g ' . The tower of the neutral eigenstates is then composed by two sub-towers, one of which almost identical to the one of the left sector. In Table I, we show the lightest part of the spectrum in an explicit example corresponding to a particular choice of the parameters.\n\nLet us now check the model against EW precision tests. In Fig. 4, we show the allowed region at 95% C.L. in parameter space ( M ,g 1 ¯ ), based on the new physics contribution to 5 the /epsilon1 parameters. Here M 1 ≡ m R 1 = 1 2 / R is the mass of the lightest KK excitation, that is", + "recall": 0.8679245283018868, + "true_md": "24\n\nFIG. 3: Graphical solutions of the eigenvalue equation (87) for the left charged sector. The intersections corresponding to the first and second KK excitations can be clearly seen. On the top right panel, the magnification of the low mass region showing the intersection corresponding to the zero mode, W.\n\nThe neutral sector has a more complicated eigenvalue equation (48). However, it can be easily checked that, as soon as m ≫ m$_{Z}$ , the right-hand side of the equation is negligible so that it can be approximated:\n\n$$( ˜ g 2 g 2 $_{5}$m$_{N n}$ sin( πRm$_{N n}$ ) + ( m 2 N n − ˜ g $^{2}$˜ v 2 4 ) cos( πRm$_{N n}$ ) ) · ˜ g ′$_{2}$ g 2 $_{5}$m$_{N n}$ sin( πRm$_{N n}$ ) + ( m 2 N n − ˜ g $^{′$_{2}$}$˜ v 2 4 ) cos( πRm$_{N n}$ = 0 . (88)$$\n\nThe eigenvalue equation can then be approximately factorized into two independent ones; the first one is identical to eq. (87), the second one is similar with the replacement g → g ′ . The tower of the neutral eigenstates is then composed by two sub-towers, one of which almost identical to the one of the left sector. In Table I, we show the lightest part of the spectrum in an explicit example corresponding to a particular choice of the parameters.\n\nLet us now check the model against EW precision tests. In Fig. 4, we show the allowed region at 95% C.L. in parameter space ( M$_{1}$, ¯ g$_{5}$ ), based on the new physics contribution to the ϵ parameters. Here M$_{1}$ ≡ m$_{R}$$\\_{1}$ = 1 / 2 R is the mass of the lightest KK excitation, that is" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7160486984760412, + "doc_id": "1ddea6257749ccc6c5bcdb9c8c9f5812146bfb61443931469c1d6baffab70eca", + "edit_distance": 0.2, + "f1_score": 0.9387755102040818, + "meteor": 0.8598239242702911, + "precision": 0.971830985915493, + "pred_md": "TABLE I: Electric quadrupole transition strengths are shown in the Weisskopf unit. J i and J f indicate initial and final states, respectively. The blanks under theoretical values indicate that calculated B E ( 2) values are almost zero. As for the transitions labeled '-' under experimental values, γ decays have been observed, but multipolarities and strengths have not been measured. The experimental data are taken from Ref. 24. The observed (2 3 4) , , + state at 5.17 MeV is noted as the 4 + SD2 .\n\n9", + "recall": 0.9078947368421053, + "true_md": "TABLE I: Electric quadrupole transition strengths are shown in the Weisskopf unit. J$_{i}$ and J$_{f}$ indicate initial and final states, respectively. The blanks under theoretical values indicate that calculated B ( E 2) values are almost zero. As for the transitions labeled “—” under experimental values, γ decays have been observed, but multipolarities and strengths have not been measured. The experimental data are taken from Ref. 24. The observed (2 , 3 , 4) + state at 5.17 MeV is noted as the 4 + $_{SD2}$.\n\n9" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8682043351621607, + "doc_id": "8b47212cf5b1ed54cd85a2d2525c3c8d985dc44f74e1080062d14ef90374a3d1", + "edit_distance": 0.18932038834951456, + "f1_score": 0.9707112970711297, + "meteor": 0.9240871029204946, + "precision": 0.9914529914529915, + "pred_md": "arXiv:1001.4384v3 [gr-qc] 31 Mar 2010\n\n## Stability of thin-shell wormholes supported by normal matter in Einstein-Maxwell-Gauss-Bonnet gravity\n\nS. Habib Mazharimousavi, ∗ M. Halilsoy, † and Z. Amirabi ‡ Department of Physics, Eastern Mediterranean University, G. Magusa, north Cyprus, Mersin 10, Turkey.\n\n## Abstract\n\nRecently in ( Phys. Rev. D 76, 087502 (2007) and Phys. Rev. D 77, 089903(E) (2008)) a thinshell wormhole has been introduced in 5-dimensional Einstein-Maxwell-Gauss-Bonnet (EMGB) gravity which was supported by normal matter. We wish to consider this solution and investigate its stability. Our analysis shows that for the Gauss-Bonnet (GB) parameter α < 0 , stability regions form for a narrow band of finely-tuned mass and charge. For the case α > 0, we iterate once more that no stable, normal matter thin-shell wormhole exists.\n\n∗ Electronic address: habib.mazhari@emu.edu.tr\n\n† Electronic address: mustafa.halilsoy@emu.edu.tr\n\n‡ Electronic address: zahra.amirabi@emu.edu.tr\n\n1", + "recall": 0.9508196721311475, + "true_md": "# Stability of thin-shell wormholes supported by normal matter in Einstein-Maxwell-Gauss-Bonnet gravity\n\nS. Habib Mazharimousavi, ∗ M. Halilsoy, † and Z. Amirabi ‡\n\nDepartment of Physics, Eastern Mediterranean University, G. Magusa, north Cyprus, Mersin 10, Turkey.\n\nRecently in ( Phys. Rev. D 76, 087502 (2007) and Phys. Rev. D 77, 089903(E) (2008)) a thin- shell wormhole has been introduced in 5-dimensional Einstein-Maxwell-Gauss-Bonnet (EMGB) gravity which was supported by normal matter. We wish to consider this solution and investigate its stability. Our analysis shows that for the Gauss-Bonnet (GB) parameter α < 0 , stability regions form for a narrow band of finely-tuned mass and charge. For the case α > 0, we iterate once more that no stable, normal matter thin-shell wormhole exists.\n\n1\n\n$^{∗}$Electronic address: habib.mazhari@emu.edu.tr\n\n$^{†}$Electronic address: mustafa.halilsoy@emu.edu.tr\n\n$^{‡}$Electronic address: zahra.amirabi@emu.edu.tr\n\narXiv:1001.4384v3 [gr-qc] 31 Mar 2010\n\n## Abstract" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5686994798935716, + "doc_id": "dc0e247eddca9c059618212d8cbd3fd0226b29944d6820a19be9c16e09397500", + "edit_distance": 0.8027777777777778, + "f1_score": 0.9356223175965664, + "meteor": 0.5068017873876864, + "precision": 0.956140350877193, + "pred_md": "21\n\nFIG. 4: A plot of log 10 ( f k ) versus k for the case of N = 1000, Q = 5 for 50 different configurations. Notice how for large k the magnitudes cover various decades.\n\nFIG. 4: A plot of log 10 ( f k ) versus k for the case of N = 1000, Q = 5 for 50 different configurations. Notice how for large k the magnitudes cover various decades.\n\ncrosses the one defined by the fractions, even though configuration by configuration the naive definition gives a higher value. This is because the averaging procedure is different. Notice also how for low values of k the naive definition and the root definition agree for the most part. This is exactly what is expected when fluctuations are small.\n\nFIG. 5: The radius R 0 , r ( r ) , r ( s ) of the hole relative to the radius of the sphere at Q = 0, evaluated at different values of k before taking the limit . We see that the values of R 0 are lower than r ( r ) and show faster convergence, while r ( s ) , the naive definition of the radius converges towards zero and is dominated by fluctuations for large k .\n\nFIG. 5: The radius R 0 , r ( r ) , r ( s ) of the hole relative to the radius of the sphere at Q = 0, evaluated at different values of k before taking the limit . We see that the values of R 0 are lower than r ( r ) and show faster convergence, while r ( s ) , the naive definition of the radius converges towards zero and is dominated by fluctuations for large k .\n\nNow, let us prove that the inequalities R 0 k < r ( r ) k +1 . Notice that configuration by configuration we have the following equality\n\n", + "recall": 0.9159663865546218, + "true_md": "21\n\nFIG. 4: A plot of log$_{10}$ ( f$_{k}$ ) versus k for the case of N = 1000, Q = 5 for 50 different configurations. Notice how for large k the magnitudes cover various decades.\n\nFIG. 5: The radius R$_{0}$ , r ( r $^{)}$, r ( s ) of the hole relative to the radius of the sphere at Q = 0, evaluated at different values of k before taking the limit . We see that the values of R$_{0}$ are lower than r ( r ) and show faster convergence, while r ( s $^{)}$, the naive definition of the radius converges towards zero and is dominated by fluctuations for large k .\n\nNow, let us prove that the inequalities R$_{0}$$\\_{k}$ < r ( r ) k $\\_{+1}$. Notice that configuration by configu- ration we have the following equality\n\ncrosses the one defined by the fractions, even though configuration by configuration the naive definition gives a higher value. This is because the averaging procedure is different. Notice also how for low values of k the naive definition and the root definition agree for the most part. This is exactly what is expected when fluctuations are small.\n\n$$f$_{k}$ f$_{k}$$_{+1}$ = r − 2 k k r − 2( k +1) k +1 = ( r$_{k}$ r$_{k}$$_{+1}$ ) − 2 k r 2 k +1 (21)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4947858171090119, + "doc_id": "ba628624d2f3bbb1b5d79aec18b30ea1294055aa070fd128c181dad4ad66b4de", + "edit_distance": 0.49056603773584906, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9042143995847699, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "FIG. 3: Real part of the wave function obtained numerically.\n\nFIG. 3: Real part of the wave function obtained numerically.\n\nFIG. 4: Imaginary part of the wave function obtained analytically.\n\nFIG. 4: Imaginary part of the wave function obtained analytically.\n\n18", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "FIG. 3: Real part of the wave function obtained numerically.\n\nFIG. 4: Imaginary part of the wave function obtained analytically.\n\n18" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7534917797475332, + "doc_id": "643941e0806596b2ed8834b5f22e4b336b6cf36a1d41543c34e50570e6255ec3", + "edit_distance": 0.296137339055794, + "f1_score": 0.966386554621849, + "meteor": 0.8642543099474675, + "precision": 0.9913793103448276, + "pred_md": "arXiv:1002.2525v2 [hep-ph] 13 Feb 2010\n\n1\n\nHGU-CAP 002\n\n## Higgs portal dark matter in the minimal gauged U (1) B -L model\n\nNobuchika Okada ∗\n\nDepartment of Physics and Astronomy, of Alabama, Tuscaloosa, AL 35487, USA\n\nUniversity\n\nOsamu Seto †\n\nDepartment of Architecture and Building Engineering, Hokkai-Gakuen University, Sapporo 062-8605, Japan\n\n## Abstract\n\nWe propose a scenario of the right-handed neutrino dark matter in the context of the minimal gauged U (1) B -L model by introducing an additional parity which ensures the stability of dark matter particle. The annihilation of this right-handed neutrino takes place dominantly through the s -channel Higgs boson exchange, so that this model can be called Higgs portal dark matter model. We show that the thermal relic abundance of the right-handed neutrino dark matter with help of Higgs resonance can match the observed dark matter abundance. In addition we estimate the cross section with nucleon and show that the next generation direct dark matter search experiments can explore this model.\n\nPACS numbers:\n\n∗ Electronic address: okadan@ua.edu\n\n† Electronic address: seto@phyics.umn.edu", + "recall": 0.9426229508196722, + "true_md": "HGU-CAP 002\n\narXiv:1002.2525v2 [hep-ph] 13 Feb 2010\n\n1\n\n$^{∗}$Electronic address: okadan@ua.edu\n\n$^{†}$Electronic address: seto@phyics.umn.edu\n\n# Higgs portal dark matter in the minimal gauged U $^{(1)$\\_{B}$}$− L model\n\nNobuchika Okada ∗\n\nDepartment of Physics and Astronomy,\n\nUniversity of Alabama, Tuscaloosa, AL 35487, USA\n\nOsamu Seto †\n\nDepartment of Architecture and Building Engineering,\n\nHokkai-Gakuen University, Sapporo 062-8605, Japan\n\nWe propose a scenario of the right-handed neutrino dark matter in the context of the minimal gauged U $^{(1)$\\_{B}$}$− L model by introducing an additional parity which ensures the stability of dark matter particle. The annihilation of this right-handed neutrino takes place dominantly through the s -channel Higgs boson exchange, so that this model can be called Higgs portal dark matter model. We show that the thermal relic abundance of the right-handed neutrino dark matter with help of Higgs resonance can match the observed dark matter abundance. In addition we estimate the cross section with nucleon and show that the next generation direct dark matter search experiments can explore this model.\n\nPACS numbers:\n\n## Abstract" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9234211156899764, + "doc_id": "a073557d5d284aae61d563658784f96cb43ba1ab003ad1583ebe11ea204b693b", + "edit_distance": 0.6139240506329114, + "f1_score": 0.9857433808553971, + "meteor": 0.6812909842582286, + "precision": 0.9958847736625515, + "pred_md": "dewetted liquid. The front recedes until all liquid is collected in a central drop. Since no liquid evaporates [ Q nc = 0 in Eq. (1)], the particle concentration does not change during the process.\n\nThe situation changes when allowing for evaporation ( Q nc > 0 ). Now the front may retract by convection and/or evaporation. Evaporation leads to the possibility of a strong increase in the particle concentration at the contact line as evaporation is strongest there. Due to the strong nonlinear dependence of the viscosity on the particle concentration, this may lead to a dramatic decrease of the convective contribution to the front velocity. For moderate evaporation rates, this may result in a (temporary) self-pinning of the front. Within the present basic model, the process can (after complete dry-in) result in three different basic deposition patterns: (i) for very fast evaporation rates, all other processes occur over time scales that are much larger. In particular, the effects of convective redistribution of the liquid are neglectable. As a result one finds that a nearly homogeneous film of nanoparticles of thickness h p = φ h 0 0 is deposited (see Fig. 6(a)). Convection only results in the small heap of material visible at the left hand side of Fig. 6(a). The decrease in h p on the right side of Fig. 6(a) arises due to the diffusion of particles to the right of the initial front position; (ii) for very low evaporation rates, the film dynamics is dominated by convective dewetting as this process acts on a much shorter time scale than evaporation. As a result, all the liquid is collected into a drop before evaporation slowly removes the remaining solvent. Under these conditions most of the nanoparticles are deposited in a single heap (see Fig. 6(c)). Depending on the diffusivity, the heap might be highest at the centre or show a depression there; (iii) at intermediate evaporation rates, one may observe the deposition of a nanoparticle ring around a region with a nanoparticle film of much lower height. At the centre deposition might increase again (see Fig. 6(b)).\n\nThe most intriguing feature is the ring formation that has been observed experimentally for suspensions of very different particle sizes ranging from nanometers [32, 36, 46, 47] to hundreds of micrometers. Pinning of the contact line and thermal Marangoni effects are often mentioned as necessary conditions for the ring formation. The contact line pinning is often assumed to result from substrate heterogeneities. Film height and concentration profiles at various instants during the dewetting process are displayed in Fig. 7. The profiles are from before, at and after self-pinning of the contact line. In Fig. 8 we display a space-time plot for the complete process. At first, the front recedes in the same manner as when there is no evaporation, but now driven by convection and evaporation. A small capillary rim forms that collects all the dewetted liquid that does not evaporate. The particle concentration slowly increases at the contact line (Fig. 7(a) and regime\n\n21", + "recall": 0.9758064516129032, + "true_md": "The most intriguing feature is the ring formation that has been observed experimentally for sus- pensions of very different particle sizes ranging from nanometers [32, 36, 46, 47] to hundreds of micrometers. Pinning of the contact line and thermal Marangoni effects are often mentioned as necessary conditions for the ring formation. The contact line pinning is often assumed to result from substrate heterogeneities. Film height and concentration profiles at various instants during the dewetting process are displayed in Fig. 7. The profiles are from before, at and after self-pinning of the contact line. In Fig. 8 we display a space-time plot for the complete process. At first, the front recedes in the same manner as when there is no evaporation, but now driven by convection and evaporation. A small capillary rim forms that collects all the dewetted liquid that does not evaporate. The particle concentration slowly increases at the contact line (Fig. 7(a) and regime\n\n21\n\ndewetted liquid. The front recedes until all liquid is collected in a central drop. Since no liquid evaporates [ Q$_{nc}$ = 0 in Eq. (1)], the particle concentration does not change during the process.\n\nThe situation changes when allowing for evaporation ( Q$_{nc}$ > 0 ). Now the front may retract by convection and/or evaporation. Evaporation leads to the possibility of a strong increase in the particle concentration at the contact line as evaporation is strongest there. Due to the strong nonlinear dependence of the viscosity on the particle concentration, this may lead to a dramatic decrease of the convective contribution to the front velocity. For moderate evaporation rates, this may result in a (temporary) self-pinning of the front. Within the present basic model, the process can (after complete dry-in) result in three different basic deposition patterns: (i) for very fast evaporation rates, all other processes occur over time scales that are much larger. In particular, the effects of convective redistribution of the liquid are neglectable. As a result one finds that a nearly homogeneous film of nanoparticles of thickness h$_{p}$ = φ$_{0}$h$_{0}$ is deposited (see Fig. 6(a)). Convection only results in the small heap of material visible at the left hand side of Fig. 6(a). The decrease in h$_{p}$ on the right side of Fig. 6(a) arises due to the diffusion of particles to the right of the initial front position; (ii) for very low evaporation rates, the film dynamics is dominated by convective dewetting as this process acts on a much shorter time scale than evaporation. As a result, all the liquid is collected into a drop before evaporation slowly removes the remaining solvent. Under these conditions most of the nanoparticles are deposited in a single heap (see Fig. 6(c)). Depending on the diffusivity, the heap might be highest at the centre or show a depression there; (iii) at intermediate evaporation rates, one may observe the deposition of a nanoparticle ring around a region with a nanoparticle film of much lower height. At the centre deposition might increase again (see Fig. 6(b))." + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "df2870d472edc80d77fd88bfd44d24811bce8300d1ed5731be5a9f7f47b4d290", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.999999930449849, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "40\n\n- [80] G. Altarelli, Lectures given at Zuoz Summer School on Phenomenology of Gauge Interactions, 13-19 Aug 2000 , [hep-ph/0011078].\n- [81] S. J. Huber, Nucl. Phys. B666 , 269 (2003), [hep-ph/0303183].\n- [82] K. Agashe, G. Perez and A. Soni, Phys. Rev. D71 , 016002 (2005), [hep-ph/0408134].\n- [83] C. Csaki, A. Falkowski and A. Weiler, JHEP 09 , 008 (2008), [0804.1954].\n- [84] S. Casagrande, F. Goertz, U. Haisch, M. Neubert and T. Pfoh, JHEP 10 , 094 (2008), [0807.4937].\n- [85] M. E. Albrecht, M. Blanke, A. J. Buras, B. Duling and K. Gemmler, JHEP 09 , 064 (2009), [0903.2415].\n- [86] K. Agashe and R. Contino, Phys. Rev. D80 , 075016 (2009), [0906.1542].", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "40\n\n- [80] G. Altarelli, Lectures given at Zuoz Summer School on Phenomenology of Gauge Interactions, 13-19 Aug 2000 , [hep-ph/0011078].\n\n- [81] S. J. Huber, Nucl. Phys. B666 , 269 (2003), [hep-ph/0303183].\n\n- [82] K. Agashe, G. Perez and A. Soni, Phys. Rev. D71 , 016002 (2005), [hep-ph/0408134].\n\n- [83] C. Csaki, A. Falkowski and A. Weiler, JHEP 09 , 008 (2008), [0804.1954].\n\n- [84] S. Casagrande, F. Goertz, U. Haisch, M. Neubert and T. Pfoh, JHEP 10 , 094 (2008), [0807.4937].\n\n- [85] M. E. Albrecht, M. Blanke, A. J. Buras, B. Duling and K. Gemmler, JHEP 09 , 064 (2009), [0903.2415].\n\n- [86] K. Agashe and R. Contino, Phys. Rev. D80 , 075016 (2009), [0906.1542]." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9712124600498412, + "doc_id": "dbac787f2aba715a9f930ef927db4ea5d7cd12178d2d9710965c43334d73cee3", + "edit_distance": 0.023734177215189875, + "f1_score": 0.9785202863961814, + "meteor": 0.979707595050384, + "precision": 0.9903381642512077, + "pred_md": "chiral logarithms. The effects of both the valence and sea strange quarks are encapsulated in the values of the low-energy constants, e.g. φ ( s ) 0 ( m , m y h ).\n\n- [1] N. Cabibbo, Phys. Rev. Lett. 10 , 531 (1963).\n- [2] M. Kobayashi and T. Maskawa, Prog. Theor. Phys. 49 , 652 (1973).\n- [3] A. J. Buras, M. Jamin, and P. H. Weisz, Nucl. Phys. B347 , 491 (1990).\n- [4] G. Buchalla, A. J. Buras, and M. E. Lautenbacher, Rev. Mod. Phys. 68 , 1125 (1996), hepph/9512380.\n- [5] T. Inami and C. S. Lim, Prog. Theor. Phys. 65 , 297 (1981), erratum: ibid 65 (1981) 1772.\n- [6] C. Amsler et al. (Particle Data Group), Phys. Lett. B667 , 1 (2008).\n- [7] V. M. Abazov et al. (DØ), Phys. Rev. Lett. 97 , 021802 (2006), hep-ex/0603029.\n- [8] A. Abulencia et al. (CDF), Phys. Rev. Lett. 97 , 062003 (2006), hep-ex/0606027.\n- [9] A. Abulencia et al. (CDF), Phys. Rev. Lett. 97 , 242003 (2006), hep-ex/0609040.\n- [10] C. W. Bernard, T. Blum, and A. Soni, Phys. Rev. D58 , 014501 (1998), hep-lat/9801039.\n- [11] J. Charles et al. (CKMfitter Group), URL http://ckmfitter.in2p3.fr/ .\n- [12] M. Bona et al. (UTfit Collaboration), URL http://utfit.roma1.infn.it/ .\n- [13] E. Lunghi and A. Soni, Phys. Lett. B666 , 162 (2008), arXiv:0803.4340.\n- [14] E. Gamiz, C. T. H. Davies, G. P. Lepage, J. Shigemitsu, and M. Wingate (HPQCD), Phys. Rev. D80 , 014503 (2009), arXiv:0902.1815.\n- [15] R. T. Evans, E. Gamiz, A. El-Khadra, and A. Kronfeld (Fermilab Lattice and MILC) (2009), arXiv:0911.5432.\n- [16] G. P. Lepage, L. Magnea, C. Nakhleh, U. Magnea, and K. Hornbostel, Phys. Rev. D46 , 4052 (1992), hep-lat/9205007.\n- [17] A. X. El-Khadra, A. S. Kronfeld, and P. B. Mackenzie, Phys. Rev. D55 , 3933 (1997), heplat/9604004.\n- [18] C. W. Bernard et al., Phys. Rev. D64 , 054506 (2001), hep-lat/0104002.\n- [19] C. Allton et al. (RBC and UKQCD), Phys. Rev. D76 , 014504 (2007), hep-lat/0701013.\n- [20] D. B. Kaplan, Phys. Lett. B288 , 342 (1992), hep-lat/9206013.\n- [21] Y. Shamir, Nucl. Phys. B406 , 90 (1993), hep-lat/9303005.\n- [22] V. Furman and Y. Shamir, Nucl. Phys. B439 , 54 (1995), hep-lat/9405004.\n\n57", + "recall": 0.9669811320754716, + "true_md": "chiral logarithms. The effects of both the valence and sea strange quarks are encapsulated in the values of the low-energy constants, e.g. φ ( s ) 0 ( m$_{y}$, m$_{h}$ ).\n\n- [1] N. Cabibbo, Phys. Rev. Lett. 10 , 531 (1963).\n\n- [2] M. Kobayashi and T. Maskawa, Prog. Theor. Phys. 49 , 652 (1973).\n\n- [3] A. J. Buras, M. Jamin, and P. H. Weisz, Nucl. Phys. B347 , 491 (1990).\n\n- [4] G. Buchalla, A. J. Buras, and M. E. Lautenbacher, Rev. Mod. Phys. 68 , 1125 (1996), hep- ph/9512380.\n\n- [5] T. Inami and C. S. Lim, Prog. Theor. Phys. 65 , 297 (1981), erratum: ibid 65 (1981) 1772.\n\n- [6] C. Amsler et al. (Particle Data Group), Phys. Lett. B667 , 1 (2008).\n\n- [7] V. M. Abazov et al. (DØ), Phys. Rev. Lett. 97 , 021802 (2006), hep-ex/0603029.\n\n- [8] A. Abulencia et al. (CDF), Phys. Rev. Lett. 97 , 062003 (2006), hep-ex/0606027.\n\n- [9] A. Abulencia et al. (CDF), Phys. Rev. Lett. 97 , 242003 (2006), hep-ex/0609040.\n\n- [10] C. W. Bernard, T. Blum, and A. Soni, Phys. Rev. D58 , 014501 (1998), hep-lat/9801039.\n\n- [11] J. Charles et al. (CKMfitter Group), URL http://ckmfitter.in2p3.fr/ .\n\n- [12] M. Bona et al. (UTfit Collaboration), URL http://utfit.roma1.infn.it/ .\n\n- [13] E. Lunghi and A. Soni, Phys. Lett. B666 , 162 (2008), arXiv:0803.4340.\n\n- [14] E. Gamiz, C. T. H. Davies, G. P. Lepage, J. Shigemitsu, and M. Wingate (HPQCD), Phys. Rev. D80 , 014503 (2009), arXiv:0902.1815.\n\n- [15] R. T. Evans, E. Gamiz, A. El-Khadra, and A. Kronfeld (Fermilab Lattice and MILC) (2009), arXiv:0911.5432.\n\n- [16] G. P. Lepage, L. Magnea, C. Nakhleh, U. Magnea, and K. Hornbostel, Phys. Rev. D46 , 4052 (1992), hep-lat/9205007.\n\n- [17] A. X. El-Khadra, A. S. Kronfeld, and P. B. Mackenzie, Phys. Rev. D55 , 3933 (1997), hep- lat/9604004.\n\n- [18] C. W. Bernard et al., Phys. Rev. D64 , 054506 (2001), hep-lat/0104002.\n\n- [19] C. Allton et al. (RBC and UKQCD), Phys. Rev. D76 , 014504 (2007), hep-lat/0701013.\n\n- [20] D. B. Kaplan, Phys. Lett. B288 , 342 (1992), hep-lat/9206013.\n\n- [21] Y. Shamir, Nucl. Phys. B406 , 90 (1993), hep-lat/9303005.\n\n- [22] V. Furman and Y. Shamir, Nucl. Phys. B439 , 54 (1995), hep-lat/9405004.\n\n57" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.871360976137895, + "doc_id": "658e76aa86d1db11970b15a9be929f89891144149a8617b61d69685d0e7fd08a", + "edit_distance": 0.11452991452991453, + "f1_score": 0.9556025369978859, + "meteor": 0.9110126698367754, + "precision": 0.9658119658119658, + "pred_md": "electronic resonance of the two-level atom. The frequency of the incident wave is so chosen that the third size-related resonance (in the order of increasing wavenumbers, counting only those resonances allowed by the symmetry of the problem; for more detail see [2]) is excited in each dimension. Eight distinct vortices of the LF are visible in the plot. Fig. 4 only shows the imaginary parts of the complex field amplitudes, because they are dominant for each of the resonant locsitons. (We would like to note that a pair of vortices, apparently consistent with 2D-locsiton patterns originated by the 1-st locsiton resonance in our classification, was very recently observed in numerical simulations of plasmonic excitations in a 2D lattice of small metallic particles [17].)\n\n## B. 'Magic shapes'\n\nAs we noted in Sec. III A, the LF is 'pushed out' of the lattice of strongly interacting dipoles at the exact atomic resonance [see Eq. (10)]. This effect, which we call the resonant LF suppression, represents a typical LF behavior at the atomic resonance; it is not limited to 2D lattices, but also occurs in 1D arrays of interacting atoms [1, 2] and in many finite 2D structures. We have shown earlier that in the 1D case, if a linear array of atoms is of a certain 'magic size', one encounters a cancellation of the resonant LF suppression, where one of the size-related locsitonic resonances partially restores the LF in the system [1, 2].\n\nFinite 2D lattices and similar small systems of resonant atoms provide especially interesting examples of cancellation of the resonant LF suppression. Unlike in 1D arrays of atoms, the 'restoration' of the LF in such systems at δ = 0, compared to that in the uniform, Lorentz, case, can be more complete (up to 100%). Like in the 1D case [1, 2], the 2D 'magic shapes' have a certain 'cabbalistic' streak. For example, in the NNA the effect is most pronounced only in a system of N = 13 atoms arranged as an equilateral six-point star with an atom at the center, for which the maximum restoration of the LF is reached, E max /E in ≈ 1 02. . The directions and relative amplitudes of the LF at the atoms in this system are shown in Fig. 5(a) for E in ‖ u K and in Fig. 5(b) E in ⊥ u K . It is very notable that the system is 'magic' for both orientations of the incident field. One can see from the picture that the LF is concentrated on the outermost atoms and the one at the center, while the LF at the inner hexagon of atoms is almost completely suppressed. This suppression is a manifestation of a special case of a locsiton standing eigenwave in a finite discrete atomic\n\n20", + "recall": 0.9456066945606695, + "true_md": "electronic resonance of the two-level atom. The frequency of the incident wave is so chosen that the third size-related resonance (in the order of increasing wavenumbers, counting only those resonances allowed by the symmetry of the problem; for more detail see [2]) is excited in each dimension. Eight distinct vortices of the LF are visible in the plot. Fig. 4 only shows the imaginary parts of the complex field amplitudes, because they are dominant for each of the resonant locsitons. (We would like to note that a pair of vortices, apparently consistent with 2D-locsiton patterns originated by the 1-st locsiton resonance in our classification, was very recently observed in numerical simulations of plasmonic excitations in a 2D lattice of small metallic particles [17].)\n\nAs we noted in Sec. III A, the LF is “pushed out” of the lattice of strongly interacting dipoles at the exact atomic resonance [see Eq. (10)]. This effect, which we call the resonant LF suppression, represents a typical LF behavior at the atomic resonance; it is not limited to 2D lattices, but also occurs in 1D arrays of interacting atoms [1, 2] and in many finite 2D structures. We have shown earlier that in the 1D case, if a linear array of atoms is of a certain “magic size”, one encounters a cancellation of the resonant LF suppression, where one of the size-related locsitonic resonances partially restores the LF in the system [1, 2].\n\nFinite 2D lattices and similar small systems of resonant atoms provide especially interest- ing examples of cancellation of the resonant LF suppression. Unlike in 1D arrays of atoms, the “restoration” of the LF in such systems at δ = 0, compared to that in the uniform, Lorentz, case, can be more complete (up to 100%). Like in the 1D case [1, 2], the 2D “magic shapes” have a certain “cabbalistic” streak. For example, in the NNA the effect is most pronounced only in a system of N = 13 atoms arranged as an equilateral six-point star with an atom at the center, for which the maximum restoration of the LF is reached, E$_{max}$/E$_{in}$ ≈ 1 . 02. The directions and relative amplitudes of the LF at the atoms in this system are shown in Fig. 5(a) for E$_{in}$ ‖ u$_{K}$ and in Fig. 5(b) E$_{in}$ ⊥ u$_{K}$ . It is very notable that the system is “magic” for both orientations of the incident field. One can see from the picture that the LF is concentrated on the outermost atoms and the one at the center, while the LF at the inner hexagon of atoms is almost completely suppressed. This suppression is a manifestation of a special case of a locsiton standing eigenwave in a finite discrete atomic\n\n## B. “Magic shapes”\n\n20" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.623577196542032, + "doc_id": "4dd36afc3499130bf5fd623a392b1ceb97e3064a05b25e2870437bb9d26f3ab2", + "edit_distance": 0.31181102362204727, + "f1_score": 0.952991452991453, + "meteor": 0.7372594791976702, + "precision": 0.9867256637168141, + "pred_md": "The idea of introducing a compressibility for vibrated granular fluid was already used in ref. [22] in the context of hydrodynamical stability analysis. In a molecular system at equilibrium, the isothermal compressibility\n\n\n\nis related with the volume fluctuations by\n\n\n\nwhere k B is the Boltzmann constant. In non-equilibrium states, there is no reason to expect the above relationship to hold, but it is tempting to employ it to define an effective temperature parameter of the system, T eff , expecting it to have some intrinsic physical meaning. Therefore, taking into account that the volume fluctuations in the case being considered are associated to fluctuations of the position Z of the movable piston, we define T eff through\n\n\n\nThe Boltzmann constant has been set equal to unity as it is usually done when defining the granular temperature from the average kinetic energy of the grains. From Eq. (12) it follows that T eff relates the volume response to a pressure perturbations with the steady volume fluctuations of the system. Of course, Eq. (12) by itself is just a mathematical definition and does not add anything to the physical understanding of the system. On the other hand, the definition would become relevant if this effective temperature were related to other temperature-like parameters of the system. Two main candidates clearly stand out: the granular temperature of the gas in the vicinity of the piston, T L , and the temperature parameter of the piston, T P , defined through T P = M < V 2 z > [19]. Both parameters, T L and T P , are not at all the same, as it should be the case if the system under consideration were at equilibrium and energy equipartition would apply. Violation of equipartition is a general feature of granular systems known since long ago [23] and that has attracted a lot of attention in the last years. A more detailed discussion of this issue for the set up being considered here is given in [14]. In Fig. 5, event driven simulation results for the ratio T P /T L are plotted as a function of M/m . Several values of the coefficient of normal restitution of the gas in the interval 0 85 . ≤ α ≤ 0 98 have been considered, while again . α P = 0 99 for all . the data shown. It is observed that the behavior of this temperature ratio is quite intricate.\n\n13", + "recall": 0.9214876033057852, + "true_md": "The idea of introducing a compressibility for vibrated granular fluid was already used in ref. [22] in the context of hydrodynamical stability analysis. In a molecular system at equilibrium, the isothermal compressibility\n\nis related with the volume fluctuations by\n\nwhere k$_{B}$ is the Boltzmann constant. In non-equilibrium states, there is no reason to expect the above relationship to hold, but it is tempting to employ it to define an effective temper- ature parameter of the system, T$_{eff}$ , expecting it to have some intrinsic physical meaning. Therefore, taking into account that the volume fluctuations in the case being considered are associated to fluctuations of the position Z of the movable piston, we define T$_{eff}$ through\n\nThe Boltzmann constant has been set equal to unity as it is usually done when defining the granular temperature from the average kinetic energy of the grains. From Eq. (12) it follows that T$_{eff}$ relates the volume response to a pressure perturbations with the steady volume fluctuations of the system. Of course, Eq. (12) by itself is just a mathematical definition and does not add anything to the physical understanding of the system. On the other hand, the definition would become relevant if this effective temperature were related to other temperature-like parameters of the system. Two main candidates clearly stand out: the granular temperature of the gas in the vicinity of the piston, T$_{L}$ , and the temperature parameter of the piston, T$_{P}$ , defined through T$_{P}$ = M < V 2 z > [19]. Both parameters, T$_{L}$ and T$_{P}$ , are not at all the same, as it should be the case if the system under consideration were at equilibrium and energy equipartition would apply. Violation of equipartition is a general feature of granular systems known since long ago [23] and that has attracted a lot of attention in the last years. A more detailed discussion of this issue for the set up being considered here is given in [14]. In Fig. 5, event driven simulation results for the ratio T$_{P}$/T$_{L}$ are plotted as a function of M/m . Several values of the coefficient of normal restitution of the gas in the interval 0 . 85 ≤ α ≤ 0 . 98 have been considered, while again α$_{P}$ = 0 . 99 for all the data shown. It is observed that the behavior of this temperature ratio is quite intricate.\n\n13\n\n$$σ 2 Z = $_{−}$T$_{eff}$ g 0 ( ∂L ∂M )$_{v}$$_{W}$ . (12)$$\n\n$$σ 2 V ≡ < ( V − < V > ) 2 > = k$_{B}$T < V > k$_{T}$, (11)$$\n\n$$k$_{T}$ = − 1 < V > ( ∂ < V > ∂p )$_{T}$ (10)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5651788844414634, + "doc_id": "49614352dda86ba719cd829bc47546f334c7091c9d086aec1e175a687f4fad25", + "edit_distance": 0.349009900990099, + "f1_score": 0.9320987654320987, + "meteor": 0.6977022938100861, + "precision": 0.949685534591195, + "pred_md": "TABLE VIII: Lorentzian-fit parameters of HEOR strength distributions in the Sn isotopes, as extracted from MDA. The results from TAMU work, where available, are provided for comparison [19, 21].\n\na ( m /m 1 0 ) ratios.\n\nmeasurements of the ISGMR in the Pb isotopes, using background-free inelastic spectra with high-energy α beams, would be worthwhile to fully examine this possibility.\n\nThe incompressibility of a nucleus, K A , may be expressed as:\n\n\n\nHere, c ≈ -1[84], and K Coul is essentially model independent (in the sense that the deviations from one theoretical model to another are quite small), so that the associated term can be calculated for a given isotope. Thus, for a series of isotopes, the difference K A -K Coul Z A 2 -4 3 / may be approximated to have a quadratic relationship with the asymmetry parameter, of the type y = A + Bx , with K 2 τ being the coefficient, B, of the quadratic term. It has been established previously [85, 86] that direct fits to the Eq. 8 do not provide good constraints on the value of K ∞ . However, this expression is being used here not to obtain a value for K , but, rather, only to demonstrate the approximately quadratic relationship between K ∞ A and the asymmetry parameter.\n\nFrom such an analysis of the ISGMR data in the Sn isotopes, we have obtained a value of\n\n22", + "recall": 0.9151515151515152, + "true_md": "TABLE VIII: Lorentzian-fit parameters of HEOR strength distributions in the Sn isotopes, as extracted from MDA. The results from TAMU work, where available, are provided for compari- son [19, 21].\n\na ( m 1 /m 0 ) ratios.\n\nmeasurements of the ISGMR in the Pb isotopes, using background-free inelastic spectra with high-energy α beams, would be worthwhile to fully examine this possibility.\n\nThe incompressibility of a nucleus, K$_{A}$ , may be expressed as:\n\nHere, c ≈ -1[84], and K$_{Coul}$ is essentially model independent (in the sense that the deviations from one theoretical model to another are quite small), so that the associated term can be calculated for a given isotope. Thus, for a series of isotopes, the difference K$_{A}$ − K$_{Coul}$Z $^{2}$A − 4 / 3 may be approximated to have a quadratic relationship with the asymmetry parameter, of the type y = A + Bx $^{2}$, with K$_{τ}$ being the coefficient, B, of the quadratic term. It has been established previously [85, 86] that direct fits to the Eq. 8 do not provide good constraints on the value of K$_{∞}$. However, this expression is being used here not to obtain a value for K$_{∞}$, but, rather, only to demonstrate the approximately quadratic relationship between K$_{A}$ and the asymmetry parameter.\n\nFrom such an analysis of the ISGMR data in the Sn isotopes, we have obtained a value of\n\n22\n\n$$K$_{A}$ ∼ K$_{vol}$ (1 + cA − 1 / $^{3}$) + K$_{τ}$ (( N − Z ) /A ) 2 + K$_{Coul}$Z $^{2}$A − 4 / 3 (8)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.47116722853232845, + "doc_id": "440e0c24c009167608bedbc4c5995caf64cda2a23876c328069f19fd1923b9cd", + "edit_distance": 0.46210720887245843, + "f1_score": 0.8986486486486487, + "meteor": 0.6178113607453704, + "precision": 0.9236111111111112, + "pred_md": "FIG. 1: First three stationary states ψ n ( x ) for 2 mλ/h ¯ 2 = 8, a = 3, A = 1, and p = 1 2. /\n\nFIG. 1: First three stationary states ψ n ( x ) for 2 mλ/h ¯ 2 = 8, a = 3, A = 1, and p = 1 2. /\n\nwhere k n = √ 2 mE /h n ¯. The continuity condition of the wave function at x = pa gives A/B = sin[( p -1) k a / n ] sin( pk a n ). Because the delta function is infinite at x = pa , the first derivative of the wave function is not continuous and the relation between the left and right derivatives of the wave function can be obtained by integrating Eq. (2) over the small interval ( x 0 -/epsilon1, x 0 + ) /epsilon1\n\n\n\n\n\nWe substitute the eigenfunctions in Eq. (3) in Eq. (4b) and obtain the quantization condition 5,6\n\n\n\nThe solutions to Eq. (5) give the energy spectrum of the Hamiltonian, E n = ¯ h k / 2 2 n 2 m . Figure 1 shows the first three stationary states for 2 mλ/h ¯ 2 = 8, a = 3, A = 1, and p = 1 2. /\n\n## III. THE FACTORIZATION METHOD\n\nTo calculate the eigenvalues and eigenfunctions of a Hamiltonian operator H , we can use a general operational procedure called the factorization method. In this method the Hamiltonian is written as the product of two ladder operators plus a constant, H = a a † + E . These operators are used to obtain the eigenfunctions of the Hamiltonian. In contrast to the simple harmonic oscillator, one ladder operator is usually not sufficient to form all the Hamiltonian's eigenfunctions and another ladder operator is needed for each eigenfunction.\n\n3", + "recall": 0.875, + "true_md": "FIG. 1: First three stationary states ψ$_{n}$ ( x ) for 2 mλ/ ¯ h 2 = 8, a = 3, A = 1, and p = 1 / 2.\n\nwhere k$_{n}$ = √$_{2}$$\\_{mE}$$_{n}$$\\_{/}$$_{¯}$ h . The continuity condition of the wave function at x = pa gives A/B = sin[( p − 1) k$_{n}$a ] / sin( pk$_{n}$a ). Because the delta function is infinite at x = pa , the first derivative of the wave function is not continuous and the relation between the left and right derivatives of the wave function can be obtained by integrating Eq. (2) over the small interval ( x$_{0}$ − ϵ, x$_{0}$ + ϵ )\n\n$$dψ$_{n}$ ( x ) dx | pa + ϵ − dψ$_{n}$ ( x ) dx | pa − ϵ = 2 m ¯ h 2 ∫ pa + ϵ pa − ϵ V ( x ) ψ$_{n}$ ( x ) dx (4a) = 2 mλ ¯ h 2 ψ$_{n}$ ( pa ) . (4b)$$\n\nWe substitute the eigenfunctions in Eq. (3) in Eq. (4b) and obtain the quantization condition 5,6\n\n$$k$_{n}$ sin( k$_{n}$a ) = 2 mλ ¯ h 2 sin( pk$_{n}$a ) sin[( p − 1) k$_{n}$a ] . (5)$$\n\nThe solutions to Eq. (5) give the energy spectrum of the Hamiltonian, E$_{n}$ = ¯ h $^{2}$k 2 $_{n}$/ 2 m . Figure 1 shows the first three stationary states for 2 mλ/ ¯ h 2 = 8, a = 3, A = 1, and p = 1 / 2.\n\n## III. THE FACTORIZATION METHOD\n\nTo calculate the eigenvalues and eigenfunctions of a Hamiltonian operator H , we can use a general operational procedure called the factorization method. In this method the Hamiltonian is written as the product of two ladder operators plus a constant, H = a † a + E . These operators are used to obtain the eigenfunctions of the Hamiltonian. In contrast to the simple harmonic oscillator, one ladder operator is usually not sufficient to form all the Hamiltonian’s eigenfunctions and another ladder operator is needed for each eigenfunction.\n\n3" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "44ed9f8c4baefcc3caf9222d647c083813697f0055fa754ec7a40bd6bc400fc3", + "edit_distance": 0.46210720887245843, + "f1_score": 0.8986486486486487, + "meteor": 0.6178113607453704, + "precision": 0.9236111111111112, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.875, + "true_md": "Figure1:\n\n12" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.13848551286964272, + "doc_id": "f016f98ebe9c7596425a53e23f79adf42017af0cb4b9fe58d2722fe89ddf9174", + "edit_distance": 0.7686453576864536, + "f1_score": 0.831615120274914, + "meteor": 0.28146734582860566, + "precision": 0.9453125, + "pred_md": "The Higgs fields φ and ψ are obtained by expanding Φ and Ψ as\n\n\n\n\n\naround the true vacuum with the vacuum expectation values v and v ' . These are related with the mass eigenstates h and H through\n\n\n\nwith θ being the mixing angle. Their masses are given by\n\n\n\n\n\nThe mass of the new neutral gauge boson Z ' arises by the U (1) B -L gauge symmetry breaking,\n\n\n\nAssociated with the U (1) B -L gauge symmetry breaking, the RH neutrinos N i acquire masses\n\n\n\nFrom LEP experiment, the current lower bound on the Z ' boson mass has been found to be [10, 11]\n\n\n\nTwo Z 2 -even RH neutrinos N 1 and N 2 are responsible for light neutrino masses via the seesaw mechanism,\n\n\n\nNote that the rank of this mass matrix is two, so that the lightest neutrino is massless.\n\n## III. RIGHT-HANDED NEUTRINO DARK MATTER\n\nDue to the Z 2 parity, one of RH neutrino N 3 (we denote it as N hereafter) in our model can be the DM candidate. We first estimate its relic abundance and identify the model\n\n4", + "recall": 0.7423312883435583, + "true_md": "The Higgs fields φ and ψ are obtained by expanding Φ and Ψ as\n\n$$Φ =   0 1 √$_{2}$ ( v + φ )   , (5) 1$$\n\n$$  Ψ = 1 √$_{2}$ ( v ′ + ψ ) , (6)$$\n\n$$  h H   =   cos θ − sin θ sin θ cos θ     φ ψ   , (7)$$\n\naround the true vacuum with the vacuum expectation values v and v ′ . These are related with the mass eigenstates h and H through\n\nwith θ being the mixing angle. Their masses are given by\n\nThe mass of the new neutral gauge boson Z ′ arises by the U (1)$_{B}$ − L gauge symmetry breaking,\n\nAssociated with the U (1)$_{B}$ − L gauge symmetry breaking, the RH neutrinos N$_{i}$ acquire masses\n\nFrom LEP experiment, the current lower bound on the Z ′ boson mass has been found to be [10, 11]\n\n− Two Z$_{2}$ -even RH neutrinos N$_{1}$ and N$_{2}$ are responsible for light neutrino masses via the seesaw mechanism, 2\n\nNote that the rank of this mass matrix is two, so that the lightest neutrino is massless.\n\nDue to the Z$_{2}$ parity, one of RH neutrino N$_{3}$ (we denote it as N hereafter) in our model can be the DM candidate. We first estimate its relic abundance and identify the model\n\n$$M 2 h = 2 λ$_{1}$v $^{2}$cos2 θ + 2 λ$_{2}$v ′ $^{2}$sin2 θ − 2 λ$_{3}$vv ′ sin θ cos θ, (8)$$\n\n$$M 2 H = 2 λ$_{1}$v $^{2}$sin2 θ + 2 λ$_{2}$v ′ $^{2}$cos2 θ + 2 λ$_{3}$vv ′ sin θ cos θ. (9)$$\n\n$$M 2 Z ′ = 4 g 2 $^{B}$−$_{L}$v ′ $^{2}$. (10)$$\n\n$$M$_{N}$$_{i}$ = − λ$_{R}$$_{i}$ v ′ √$_{2}$ . (11)$$\n\n$$M$_{Z}$ ′ g$_{B}$ − L = 2 v ′ ≳ 6 − 7 TeV . (12) and N$_{2}$ are responsible for light neutrino masses via the$$\n\n$$m$_{ν}$$_{αβ}$ = − ∑ i =1 , 2 y$_{αi}$y$_{iβ}$ v 2 2 M$_{N}$$_{i}$ . (13)$$\n\n## III. RIGHT-HANDED NEUTRINO DARK MATTER\n\n4" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6908278241998818, + "doc_id": "3d96c3783c8d91903374ff8a5f7b2e60fe37c558582d03cb6a01ec03512f541a", + "edit_distance": 0.25443786982248523, + "f1_score": 0.9436325678496869, + "meteor": 0.7652530136664316, + "precision": 0.9576271186440678, + "pred_md": "where J m ( q ) is the Bessel function of the first kind, we evaluate the integral in Eq. (13) in an explicit form and write Eq. (13) as\n\n\n\nBy substituting Q from Eqs. (5) and (9), we can rewrite the last formula as an explicit dispersion relation connecting the normalized detuning δ with the normalized locsiton wave vector q which is represented by its polar coordinates q and ψ :\n\n\n\nIn the limit of low absorption, i. e., | δ LL | /greatermuch 1, the r. h. s. of Eq. (16) may be replaced with δ/δ LL . A more detailed analysis of the dispersion relation shows that spatial oscillationslocsitons with almost real q -emerge in a limited frequency band around ω 0 with a normalized bandwidth ∼ | δ LL | . It is exactly the frequency range where the interaction between resonant atomic dipoles may become comparable to or much stronger than the effects of the external field E in . The dispersion dependence δ/δ LL = D NRA 2 ( q ) in this case is shown in Fig. 2(a), where the external field is assumed to be aligned with the x axis. At every given laser frequency ω , locsitons with a whole range of wave vectors q may be excited. This set of q , all having different orientations, is represented by an isoline for the respective δ/δ LL = D NRA 2 ( q ) in Fig. 2(a). Recalling that δ LL < 0 [see Eq. (9)], we may notice that solid isolines (red shaded areas) correspond to red-shifted laser frequencies ( ω < ω 0 ), while dashed isolines (blue shaded areas) correspond to blue-shifted frequencies. The non-circular shape of the isolines reflects the highly anisotropic dispersion dependence for locsitons in the 2D lattice in the case of short-wave locsitons. In particular, at any given normalized frequency detuning δ , locsitons with different orientations of q with respect to E in may have very different q and, consequently, different wavelengths. At the same time, because the NRA describes the lattice in an averaged way, the orientation of E in with respect to the lattice does not affect the result.\n\nIn the general case, especially when looking at the limitations on the size of the structure, one needs to consider complex locsiton wave vectors q = q ' + i q '' in the dispersion relations (13) or (16), like it was done for 1D arrays of resonant atoms in [2]. This would allow to describe the dissipation of 2D locsitons, which is most prominent near the Lorentz resonance, and evanescent locsitons, which exist outside the locsiton band. One can also calculate the\n\n11", + "recall": 0.9300411522633745, + "true_md": "where J m ( q ) is the Bessel function of the first kind, we evaluate the integral in Eq. (13) in an explicit form and write Eq. (13) as\n\nBy substituting Q from Eqs. (5) and (9), we can rewrite the last formula as an explicit dispersion relation connecting the normalized detuning δ with the normalized locsiton wave vector q which is represented by its polar coordinates q and ψ :\n\nIn the limit of low absorption, i. e., | δ$_{LL}$ | ≫ 1, the r. h. s. of Eq. (16) may be replaced with δ/δ$_{LL}$ . A more detailed analysis of the dispersion relation shows that spatial oscillations— locsitons with almost real q —emerge in a limited frequency band around ω$_{0}$ with a normal- ized bandwidth ∼ | δ$_{LL}$ | . It is exactly the frequency range where the interaction between resonant atomic dipoles may become comparable to or much stronger than the effects of the external field E$_{in}$ . The dispersion dependence δ/δ$_{LL}$ = D NRA 2 ( q ) in this case is shown in Fig. 2(a), where the external field is assumed to be aligned with the x axis. At every given laser frequency ω , locsitons with a whole range of wave vectors q may be excited. This set of q , all having different orientations, is represented by an isoline for the respective δ/δ$_{LL}$ = D NRA 2 ( q ) in Fig. 2(a). Recalling that δ$_{LL}$ < 0 [see Eq. (9)], we may notice that solid isolines (red shaded areas) correspond to red-shifted laser frequencies ( ω < ω$_{0}$ ), while dashed isolines (blue shaded areas) correspond to blue-shifted frequencies. The non-circular shape of the isolines reflects the highly anisotropic dispersion dependence for locsitons in the 2D lattice in the case of short-wave locsitons. In particular, at any given normalized frequency detuning δ , locsitons with different orientations of q with respect to E$_{in}$ may have very different q and, consequently, different wavelengths. At the same time, because the NRA describes the lattice in an averaged way, the orientation of E$_{in}$ with respect to the lattice does not affect the result.\n\nIn the general case, especially when looking at the limitations on the size of the structure, one needs to consider complex locsiton wave vectors q = q ′ + i q ′′ in the dispersion relations (13) or (16), like it was done for 1D arrays of resonant atoms in [2]. This would allow to describe the dissipation of 2D locsitons, which is most prominent near the Lorentz resonance, and evanescent locsitons, which exist outside the locsiton band. One can also calculate the\n\n$$1 + 3 4 Q [ J$_{0}$ ( q ) − 3 J$_{2}$ ( q ) cos(2 ψ )] = 0 . (15)$$\n\n$$D NRA 2 ( q ) ≡ J$_{0}$ ( q ) − 3 J$_{2}$ ( q ) cos(2 ψ ) = δ + i δ$_{LL}$ . (16)$$\n\n11" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.34728773360576015, + "doc_id": "89c0e6dad74249fd5e4b4c6fd777e6115be9af9007ad99230426ea0e01072ce3", + "edit_distance": 0.6608996539792388, + "f1_score": 0.7979274611398963, + "meteor": 0.4328325566064986, + "precision": 0.9166666666666666, + "pred_md": "FIG. 2: Determination of Φ ren B s / Φ ren B l using the average of two time sources on the three sea quark ensembles. The blue (triangle) points denote the APE data, while the red (square) points denote the HYP-smeared data. The shaded (hatched) band corresponds to the plateau extracted from averaging the APE (HYP) data over four consecutive time slices. Errors shown are statistical only.\n\nFIG. 2: Determination of Φ ren B s / Φ ren B l using the average of two time sources on the three sea quark ensembles. The blue (triangle) points denote the APE data, while the red (square) points denote the HYP-smeared data. The shaded (hatched) band corresponds to the plateau extracted from averaging the APE (HYP) data over four consecutive time slices. Errors shown are statistical only.\n\ntime slice\n\nEq. (59), while the box-box two-point functions are given by\n\n\n\nwith\n\n\n\nwhere the superscript B denotes a box source in the region ∆ V . We also compute the\n\n21", + "recall": 0.7064220183486238, + "true_md": "FIG. 2: Determination of Φ ren $_{B$\\_{s}$}$/ Φ ren B$_{l}$ using the average of two time sources on the three sea quark ensembles. The blue (triangle) points denote the APE data, while the red (square) points denote the HYP-smeared data. The shaded (hatched) band corresponds to the plateau extracted from averaging the APE (HYP) data over four consecutive time slices. Errors shown are statistical only.\n\nEq. (59), while the box-box two-point functions are given by\n\nwhere the superscript B denotes a box source in the region Δ V . We also compute the\n\nwith\n\n$$C $^{BB}$( t, t$_{0}$ ) = 〈 0 | A B 0 ( t ) A B 0 ( t$_{0}$ ) $^{†}$| 0 〉 , (67)$$\n\n$$A B 0 ( t ) = a 6 ∑ ⃗x,⃗ y ∈ Δ V ( h $^{(+)}$( ⃗ x, t ) γ$_{0}$γ$_{5}$q ( ⃗ y, t ) + h ( − $^{)}$( ⃗ x, t ) γ$_{0}$γ$_{5}$q ( ⃗ y, t ) ) , (68)$$\n\n21" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7762364799479554, + "doc_id": "bb4acca4180c3d55e1b6cc323d4cc917519a09e0dbe17e2091bced9a234be6a0", + "edit_distance": 0.11419753086419752, + "f1_score": 0.8858131487889274, + "meteor": 0.8932411459624908, + "precision": 0.8888888888888888, + "pred_md": "- 3 P. Y. Yu and M. Cardona, Fundamentals of Semiconductors (Springer, New York, 2005), Chap. 9.\n- 4 I. R. Lapidus, 'Relativistic one-dimensional hydrogen atom,' Am. J. Phys. 51 , 1036-1038 (1983).\n- 5 N. Bera, K. Bhattacharya, and J. K. Bhattacharjee, 'Perturbative and non-perturbative studies with the delta function potential,' Am. J. Phys. 76 , 250-257 (2008).\n- 6 Y. N. Joglekara, 'Particle in a box with a δ -function potential: Strong and weak coupling limits,' Am. J. Phys. 77 , 734-736 (2009).\n- 7 E. Schrdinger, o 'A method of determining quantum-mechanical eigenvalues and eigenfunctions,' Proc. Roy. Irish Acad. Sect. A 46 , 9-16 (1941).\n- 8 E. Schrdinger, 'Further studies on solving eigenvalue problems by factorization,' Proc. Roy. o Irish Acad. Sect. A 46 , 183-206 (1941).\n- 9 E. Schrdinger, o 'The factorization of the hypergeometric equation,' Proc. Roy. Irish Acad. Sect. A 47 , 53-54 (1941) or arXiv:physics/9910003.\n- 10 P. M. Dirac, The Principles of Quantum Mechanics (Oxford University Press, Oxford, 1958).\n- 11 I. Infeld and T. E. Hull, 'The factorization method,' Rev. Mod. Phys. 23 , 21-68 (1951).\n- 12 H. S. Green, Matrix Methods in Quantum Mechanics (Barnes & Noble, New York, 1968).\n- 13 H. C. Ohanian, Principles of Quantum Mechanics (Prentice Hall, Englewood Cliffs, NJ, 1990).\n\n8", + "recall": 0.8827586206896552, + "true_md": "- 3 P. Y. Yu and M. Cardona, Fundamentals of Semiconductors (Springer, New York, 2005), Chap. 9.\n\n- 4 I. R. Lapidus, “Relativistic one-dimensional hydrogen atom,” Am. J. Phys. 51 , 1036–1038 (1983).\n\n- 5 N. Bera, K. Bhattacharya, and J. K. Bhattacharjee, “Perturbative and non-perturbative studies with the delta function potential,” Am. J. Phys. 76 , 250–257 (2008).\n\n- 6 Y. N. Joglekara, “Particle in a box with a δ -function potential: Strong and weak coupling limits,” Am. J. Phys. 77 , 734–736 (2009).\n\n- 7 E. Schr¨ odinger, “A method of determining quantum-mechanical eigenvalues and eigenfunc- tions,” Proc. Roy. Irish Acad. Sect. A 46 , 9–16 (1941).\n\n- 8 E. Schr¨ odinger, “Further studies on solving eigenvalue problems by factorization,” Proc. Roy. Irish Acad. Sect. A 46 , 183–206 (1941).\n\n- 9 E. Schr¨ odinger, “The factorization of the hypergeometric equation,” Proc. Roy. Irish Acad. Sect. A 47 , 53–54 (1941) or arXiv:physics/9910003.\n\n- 10 P. M. Dirac, The Principles of Quantum Mechanics (Oxford University Press, Oxford, 1958).\n\n- 11 I. Infeld and T. E. Hull, “The factorization method,” Rev. Mod. Phys. 23 , 21–68 (1951).\n\n- 12 H. S. Green, Matrix Methods in Quantum Mechanics (Barnes & Noble, New York, 1968).\n\n- 13 H. C. Ohanian, Principles of Quantum Mechanics (Prentice Hall, Englewood Cliffs, NJ, 1990).\n\n8" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6031942287986365, + "doc_id": "f061c8f4fa29bb606bffb5b8bdddced75f9a26e58559e54457c638fade72583d", + "edit_distance": 0.26635514018691586, + "f1_score": 0.9380530973451329, + "meteor": 0.7762226611986457, + "precision": 0.9724770642201835, + "pred_md": "TABLE I: Values of the maximum mass M max and corresponding central energy density /epsilon1 max and radius R max obtained for di ff erent EOSs of the nuclear matter. The radius R 1 4 . for the neutron star with canonical mass (1 4 . M /circledot ) are also given.\n\na This EOS is obtained using one of the several parameter sets of the extended RMF model given in our earlier work [48]. Each of these parameterizations corresponds to di ff erent values of the strength ζ for the ω -meson self-coupling term and neutron-skin thickness ∆ r in 208 Pb nucleus. The remaining parameters of the models were calibrated to yield reasonable fit to the bulk nuclear observables and nuclear matter incompressibility coe ffi cient. In the present work we use the parameter set with ζ = 0 03 and . ∆ r = 0 2fm which will be referred henceforth as BSR10. .\n\n12", + "recall": 0.905982905982906, + "true_md": "TABLE I: Values of the maximum mass M$_{max}$ and corresponding central energy density ϵ$_{max}$ and radius R$_{max}$ obtained for di ff erent EOSs of the nuclear matter. The radius R$_{1}$$\\_{.}$$_{4}$ for the neutron star with canonical mass (1 . 4 $^{M}$⊙ ) are also given.\n\n$^{a}$This EOS is obtained using one of the several parameter sets of the extended RMF model given in our earlier work [48]. Each of these parameterizations corresponds to di ff erent values of the strength ζ for the ω -meson self-coupling term and neutron-skin thickness Δ r in $^{208}$Pb nucleus. The remaining parameters of the models were calibrated to yield reasonable fit to the bulk nuclear observables and nuclear ma tter incompressibility coe ffi cient. In the present work we use the parameter set with ζ = 0 . 03 and Δ r = 0 . 2fm which will be referred henceforth as BSR10.\n\n12" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9335033016206294, + "doc_id": "c7a07a4fc6f2008df57e0f87c63fe6fb656da8b0c579e55825459469a95362c9", + "edit_distance": 0.09491525423728814, + "f1_score": 0.9657534246575343, + "meteor": 0.970722885610442, + "precision": 0.9929577464788732, + "pred_md": "arXiv:1001.1584v1 [astro-ph.HE] 11 Jan 2010\n\n## Equations of state and stability of color-superconducting quark matter cores in hybrid stars\n\n## B. K. Agrawal ∗\n\nSaha Institute of Nuclear Physics, Kolkata - 700064, India.\n\n(Dated: November 5, 2018)\n\n## Abstract\n\nThe stable configurations of non-rotating and rotating hybrid stars composed of colour superconducting quark matter core are constructed using several equations of state (EOSs). We use a set of diverse EOSs for the nuclear matter which represents the low density phase. The EOSs at higher densities correspond to the quark matter in the colour superconducting phase and are computed within the NJL-like model for di ff erent values of the scalar diquark and vector current couplings strengths. The phase transition to the quark matter is computed by a Maxwell construction. We find that the stability of the hybrid stars are mainly governed by the behaviour of the EOSs for the colour superconducting quark matter. However the compositions of hybrid star are sensitive to the EOS of the nuclear matter. The value of the critical rotation frequency for the hybrid star depends strongly on the EOS of the nuclear matter as well as that for the colour superconducting quark matter. Our results indicate that the EOS for the colour superconducting quark matter can be obtained, by adjusting the parameters of the NJL model, to yield the stable configurations of the hybrid star having the maximum mass ∼ 1 5 . M /circledot in the non-rotating limit and the critical rotation frequency ∼ 1 kHz.\n\nPACS numbers: 26.60. + c,91.60.Fe,97.10.Kc,97.10.Nf,97.10.Pg\n\n∗ Electronic address: bijay.agrawal@saha.ac.in\n\n1", + "recall": 0.94, + "true_md": "# Equations of state and stability of color-superconducting quark matter cores in hybrid stars\n\nB. K. Agrawal ∗\n\nSaha Institute of Nuclear Physics, Kolkata - 700064, India.\n\n(Dated: November 5, 2018)\n\n## Abstract\n\nThe stable configurations of non-rotating and rotating hybr id stars composed of colour superconducting quark matter core are constructed using several equations of state (EOSs). We use a set of diverse EOSs for the nuclear matter which represents the low density phase. The EOSs at higher densities correspond to the quark matter in the colour superconducting phase and are computed within the NJL-like model for di ff erent values of the scalar diquark and vector current couplings strengths. The phase transition to the quark matter is computed by a Maxwell construction. We find that the stabil ity of the hybrid stars are mainly governed by the behaviour of the EOSs for the colour superconducting quark matter. However the compositions of hybrid star are sensitive to the EOS of the nuclear matter. The value of the critical rotation frequency for the hybrid star depends strongly on the EOS of the nuclear matter as well as that for the colour superconducting quark matter. Our results indicate that the EOS for the colour superconducting quark matter can be obtained, by adjusting the parameters of the NJL model, to yield the stable configurations of the hybrid star having the maximum mass ∼ 1 . 5 $^{M}$⊙ in the non-rotating limit and the critical rotation frequency ∼ 1 kHz.\n\narXiv:1001.1584v1[astro-ph.HE]11 Jan 2010\n\nPACS numbers: 26.60. + c,91.60.Fe,97.10.Kc,97.10.Nf,97.10.Pg\n\n∗ Electronic address: bijay.agrawal@saha.ac.in\n\n1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7903549093845759, + "doc_id": "3f8cf137533867645d53b0ac1e4a732a2868967233d843fdc6f428ae94025018", + "edit_distance": 0.18028846153846154, + "f1_score": 0.9408866995073891, + "meteor": 0.8746586951661595, + "precision": 0.9646464646464646, + "pred_md": "the ISGMR measurements to longer isotopic chains. This provides strong motivation for measuring the ISGMR strength in unstable nuclei, a focus of current investigations at the new rare isotope beam facilities at RIKEN, GANIL, GSI, and NSCL [93-96].\n\nCombined with the value of K ∞ = 240 ± 10 MeV obtained from the ISGMR and ISGDR data [31, 65, 73, 97], we now have 'experimental' values of both K ∞ and K τ which, together, can provide a means of selecting the most appropriate of the interactions used in EOS calculations. For example, this combination of 'experimental' values for K ∞ and K τ essentially rules out a vast majority of the Skyrme-type interactions currently in use in nuclear structure calculations [90, 98]. Similar conclusions were reached for EOS equations in Refs. [99, 100].\n\n## V. SUMMARY\n\nWe have measured the strength distributions of the isoscalar giant resonances (ISGMR, ISGDR, ISGQR, and HEOR) in the even-A 112 -124 Sn isotopes via inelastic scattering of 386-MeV α particles at extremely forward angles, including 0 . · The extracted parameters for these resonances are in good agreement with previously-obtained values where available. The ISGMR centroid energies are significantly lower than those predicted for these isotopes by recent calculations and point to the need for further theoretical exploration of applicable nuclear structure effects, especially the role of pairing in ISGMR strength calculations in the open-shell nuclei. The asymmetry-term, K τ , in the expression for the nuclear incompressibility has been determined to be -550 ± 100 MeV from the ISGMR data in Sn isotopes and is found to be consistent with a number of indirectly extracted values for this parameter.\n\n## VI. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS\n\nWe wish to thank the RCNP staff for providing high-quality α beams required for these measurements. This work has been supported in part by the US-Japan Cooperative Science Program of the JSPS, and by the National Science Foundation (Grants No. INT03-42942,\n\n24", + "recall": 0.9182692307692307, + "true_md": "the ISGMR measurements to longer isotopic chains. This provides strong motivation for measuring the ISGMR strength in unstable nuclei, a focus of current investigations at the new rare isotope beam facilities at RIKEN, GANIL, GSI, and NSCL [93–96].\n\nCombined with the value of K$_{∞}$ = 240 ± 10 MeV obtained from the ISGMR and IS- GDR data [31, 65, 73, 97], we now have “experimental” values of both K$_{∞}$ and K$_{τ}$ which, together, can provide a means of selecting the most appropriate of the interactions used in EOS calculations. For example, this combination of “experimental” values for K$_{∞}$ and K$_{τ}$ essentially rules out a vast majority of the Skyrme-type interactions currently in use in nuclear structure calculations [90, 98]. Similar conclusions were reached for EOS equations in Refs. [99, 100].\n\nWe have measured the strength distributions of the isoscalar giant resonances (ISGMR, ISGDR, ISGQR, and HEOR) in the even-A 112 − $^{124}$Sn isotopes via inelastic scattering of 386-MeV α particles at extremely forward angles, including 0 $^{◦}$. The extracted parameters for these resonances are in good agreement with previously-obtained values where available. The ISGMR centroid energies are significantly lower than those predicted for these isotopes by recent calculations and point to the need for further theoretical exploration of applicable nuclear structure effects, especially the role of pairing in ISGMR strength calculations in the open-shell nuclei. The asymmetry-term, K$_{τ}$ , in the expression for the nuclear incompress- ibility has been determined to be − 550 ± 100 MeV from the ISGMR data in Sn isotopes and is found to be consistent with a number of indirectly extracted values for this parameter.\n\nWe wish to thank the RCNP staff for providing high-quality α beams required for these measurements. This work has been supported in part by the US-Japan Cooperative Science Program of the JSPS, and by the National Science Foundation (Grants No. INT03-42942,\n\n## VI. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS\n\n## V. SUMMARY\n\n24" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.895688950624686, + "doc_id": "a5fb979b77a1736e1a9d75f9298cc87980983a579b2cc1574bff3dea85527971", + "edit_distance": 0.4778156996587031, + "f1_score": 0.9638554216867469, + "meteor": 0.8198881002140207, + "precision": 0.9815950920245399, + "pred_md": "TABLE IV: Various moment ratios for the ISGMR strength distributions in the Sn isotopes. All moments have been calculated over E x = 10.5-20.5 MeV. The quoted EWSR values are from the strength observed within this energy range. The results from TAMU work, where available, are provided for comparison [19, 21].\n\na Only statistical uncertainties are included; systematic errors, mostly from DWBA calculations, are ∼ 15%.\n\nthan the nuclear incompressibility, requiring a modification of the scaling relationship given in Eq. 7?\n\nThere have been several attempts to explain this anomaly. One of the earliest was by Civitarese et al. [71] to estimate the effect of pairing correlations on the energy of the ISGMR. The shifts obtained for the ISGMR energies of 100-150 keV across the Sn isotopic chain were insufficient to explain the experimental data. Piekarewicz and Centelles [72] have constructed a hybrid model having the same incompressibility coefficient ( K ∞ =230 MeV) as the FSUGold [73] while preserving the stiff symmetry energy of NL3 [74]. This results in a considerably softer incompressibility coefficient for neutron-rich matter and produces a significant improvement in agreement with the experimental data on the ISGMR's in the Sn isotopes. However, as the authors point out, while the improvement in case of the Sn isotopes is unquestionable, an important problem remains: the hybrid model underestimates the ISGMR centroid energy in 208 Pb by almost 1 MeV, suggesting that the rapid softening\n\n18", + "recall": 0.9467455621301775, + "true_md": "a Only statistical uncertainties are included; systematic errors, mostly from DWBA calculations, are ∼ 15%.\n\nthan the nuclear incompressibility, requiring a modification of the scaling relationship given in Eq. 7?\n\nThere have been several attempts to explain this anomaly. One of the earliest was by Civitarese et al. [71] to estimate the effect of pairing correlations on the energy of the ISGMR. The shifts obtained for the ISGMR energies of 100–150 keV across the Sn isotopic chain were insufficient to explain the experimental data. Piekarewicz and Centelles [72] have constructed a hybrid model having the same incompressibility coefficient ( K$_{∞}$ =230 MeV) as the FSUGold [73] while preserving the stiff symmetry energy of NL3 [74]. This results in a considerably softer incompressibility coefficient for neutron-rich matter and produces a significant improvement in agreement with the experimental data on the ISGMR’s in the Sn isotopes. However, as the authors point out, while the improvement in case of the Sn isotopes is unquestionable, an important problem remains: the hybrid model underestimates the ISGMR centroid energy in $^{208}$Pb by almost 1 MeV, suggesting that the rapid softening\n\n18\n\nTABLE IV: Various moment ratios for the ISGMR strength distributions in the Sn isotopes. All moments have been calculated over E$_{x}$ = 10.5–20.5 MeV. The quoted EWSR values are from the strength observed within this energy range. The results from TAMU work, where available, are provided for comparison [19, 21]." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7764099059726703, + "doc_id": "7ef73ffc5cb2ce93f420d68e4a013835298e6d952c7f91c126f198ee7d0a8198", + "edit_distance": 0.24932249322493225, + "f1_score": 0.9727626459143969, + "meteor": 0.9295349412713977, + "precision": 0.984251968503937, + "pred_md": "FIG. 1: (upper) Energies projected to positive parity states, J π = 0 + and 2 + states, (middle) the triaxiality γ for protons and neutrons, and (lower) the H.O. values relative to lowest allowed states are plotted as functions of the quadrupole deformation parameter β of the total system.\n\nFIG. 1: (upper) Energies projected to positive parity states, J π = 0 + and 2 + states, (middle) the triaxiality γ for protons and neutrons, and (lower) the H.O. values relative to lowest allowed states are plotted as functions of the quadrupole deformation parameter β of the total system.\n\nperformed for the J π = 2 + states. Those energy curves have two local minima at β ∼ 0 2 . and 0.5, which are labeled GS and SD minima, respectively, because the GCM results show that these minima correspond to the GS and the SD states, respectively, as explained later. In the energy curves projected to positive parity states, the energy gap between the GS and SD minima is approximately 6.7 MeV, while the gap decreases to 2.5 MeV after the AMP to J π = 0 + states.\n\nThe values of triaxiality γ for protons and those for neutrons are similar in the entire β region (the middle panel of Fig. 1). In the small β region, the system forms an oblate shape with γ ∼ 60 , while in the large · β region around the SD minimum, it forms a triaxial deformation with γ ∼ 10 . · Density distributions of the obtained wave function at the SD minimum [( β, γ ) = (0 478 11 2 )] are shown in Fig. 2. . , . · Because of triaxial deformations around the SD minimum, each wave function contains different K components, and two J π = 2 + states are obtained after diagonalizing those different K components, i.e., K -mixing\n\n4", + "recall": 0.9615384615384616, + "true_md": "FIG. 1: (upper) Energies projected to positive parity states, J π = 0 + and 2 + states, (middle) the triaxiality γ for protons and neutrons, and (lower) the H.O. values relative to lowest allowed states are plotted as functions of the quadrupole deformation parameter β of the total system.\n\nperformed for the J π = 2 + states. Those energy curves have two local minima at β ∼ 0 . 2 and 0.5, which are labeled GS and SD minima, respectively, because the GCM results show that these minima correspond to the GS and the SD states, respectively, as explained later. In the energy curves projected to positive parity states, the energy gap between the GS and SD minima is approximately 6.7 MeV, while the gap decreases to 2.5 MeV after the AMP to J π = 0 + states.\n\nThe values of triaxiality γ for protons and those for neutrons are similar in the entire β region (the middle panel of Fig. 1). In the small β region, the system forms an oblate shape with γ ∼ 60 $^{◦}$, while in the large β region around the SD minimum, it forms a triaxial deformation with γ ∼ 10 $^{◦}$. Density distributions of the obtained wave function at the SD minimum [( β, γ ) = (0 . 478 , 11 . 2 $^{◦}$)] are shown in Fig. 2. Because of triaxial deformations around the SD minimum, each wave function contains different K components, and two J π = 2 + states are obtained after diagonalizing those different K components, i.e., K -mixing\n\n4" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.14428160378038088, + "doc_id": "3044ebfe3332d1f1076ca3013dbdb70202488c292e3756a69f648b40461e2dd5", + "edit_distance": 0.7697841726618705, + "f1_score": 0.8689655172413794, + "meteor": 0.2883921208068042, + "precision": 0.9473684210526315, + "pred_md": "is satisfied. The static configuration of radius a 0 has the following density and pressures\n\n\n\n\n\nIn what follows we shall study small radial perturbations around the radius of equilibrium a . 0 To this end we adapt a linear relation between p and σ as [7]\n\n\n\nHere since we are interested in the wormholes which are supported by normal matter, β 2 is the speed of sound. By virtue of Eq.s (19) and (22) we find the energy density in the form\n\n\n\nThis, together with (16) lead us to the equation of motion for the radius of the throat, which reads\n\n\n\nAfter some manipulation this can be cast into\n\n\n\n\n\nwhere\n\nin which the functions A and B are\n\n\n\n\n\nWe notice that V ( a ) , and more tediously V ' ( a ) , both vanish at a = a . 0 The stability requirement for equilibrium reduces therefore to the determination of V '' ( a 0 ) > 0 , and it is needless to add that, V ( a ) is complicated enough for an immediate analytical result. For this reason we shall proceed through numerical calculation to see whether stability regions/\n\n6", + "recall": 0.802547770700637, + "true_md": "is satisfied. The static configuration of radius a 0 has the following density and pressures\n\nIn what follows we shall study small radial perturbations around the radius of equilibrium a 0 . To this end we adapt a linear relation between p and σ as [7]\n\nHere since we are interested in the wormholes which are supported by normal matter, β 2 is the speed of sound. By virtue of Eq.s (19) and (22) we find the energy density in the form\n\nThis, together with (16) lead us to the equation of motion for the radius of the throat, which reads\n\n( $^{2}$) After some manipulation this can be cast into\n\nwhere\n\nin which the functions A and B are\n\nWe notice that V ( a ) , and more tediously V $^{′}$( a ) , both vanish at a = a 0 . The stability requirement for equilibrium reduces therefore to the determination of V $^{′′}$( a 0 ) > 0 , and it is needless to add that, V ( a ) is complicated enough for an immediate analytical result. For this reason we shall proceed through numerical calculation to see whether stability regions/\n\n6\n\n$$σ 0 = − √ f ( a 0 ) 4 π [ 3 a 0 − 4 α a 3 0 ( f ( a 0 ) − 3) ] , (20) p 0 = f ( a 0 ) 4 π [ 2 a 0 + f $^{′}$( a 0 ) 2 f ( a 0 ) − 2 α a 2 0 f $^{′}$( a 0 ) f ( a 0 ) ( f ( a 0 ) − 1) ] . (21)$$\n\n$$p = p 0 + β $^{2}$( σ − σ 0 ) . (22)$$\n\n$$− √ f ( a ) + ˙ a 2 4 π [ 3 a − 4 α a 3 ( f ( a ) − 3 − 2˙ a $^{2}$) ] = ( σ 0+ p 0 β 2 + 1 ) ( a 0 a ) 3 ( β $^{2}$+1 ) + β $^{2}$σ 0 $_{−}$p 0 β 2 + 1 . (24) After some manipulation this can be cast into$$\n\n$$˙ a 2 + V ( a ) = 0 , (25)$$\n\n$$A = πa 3 4 α [( σ 0+ p 0 β 2 + 1 ) ( a 0 a ) 3 ( β $^{2}$+1 ) + β $^{2}$σ 0 $_{−}$p 0 β 2 + 1 ] , (27) B = a 2 8 α + 1 − f ( a 2 . (28)$$\n\n$$σ ( a ) = ( σ 0+ p 0 β 2 + 1 ) ( a 0 a ) 3 ( β $^{2}$+1 ) + β $^{2}$σ 0 $_{−}$p 0 β 2 + 1 . (23)$$\n\n$$V ( a ) = f ( a ) − ( [ √$_{A}$ 2 + B 3 − A ] 1 / 3 − B [ √$_{A}$ 2 + B 3 − A ] 1 / 3 ) 2 (26) in which the functions A and B are$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6900215183171738, + "doc_id": "b31abdea0694aeaa43b73fd479d6421d5141d87d10848e3e67751ada2ac2657e", + "edit_distance": 0.25285171102661597, + "f1_score": 0.9261363636363636, + "meteor": 0.7951689644765659, + "precision": 0.9588235294117647, + "pred_md": "## E. Scale uncertainty\n\nBecause in this paper we only compute dimensionless ratios, the uncertainty in the determination of the lattice spacing only enters implicitly through the uncertainty in the light-quark masses and in the renormalization factors. We estimate the systematic error due to the truncation of lattice perturbation theory in the previous subsection and due to the light-quark mass determinations in the following subsection.\n\n## F. Light- and strange-quark mass uncertainties\n\nWe obtain the physical decay constants and mixing matrix elements by setting the lightquark masses to their physical values in the linear plus SU (2) HM χ PT chiral extrapolation formulae, once the low-energy constants have been determined from fits to numerical lattice data. We use the bare-quark mass value determined from fits to the light pseudoscalar meson masses [34]:\n\n\n\nwhere m ud is the average of the up and down quark masses. The quoted error includes both statistics and the systematic uncertainties from the chiral extrapolation, finite-volume effects, discretization effects, and the unphysical strange sea quark mass. In order to estimate the systematic uncertainty in the ratios f B s /f B d and ξ , we vary the bare light-quark masses within their stated uncertainties. We then take the maximal difference from the central value to be the systematic error. From this method, we find that the systematic error in f B s /f B d due to the uncertainty in the light-quark mass determination is 0.2% for both smearings and the systematic error in ξ is 0.2% regardless of the smearing used for the heavy quark.\n\nBecause the strange-quark mass does not explicitly appear in the SU (2) HM χ PT extrapolation formulae, we cannot estimate the errors in f B s /f B d and ξ due to the simulated valence and sea strange-quark masses with the simple method used above for the light quarks. We must instead address the errors due to the uncertainty in the strange valence-quark mass (which is set to the physical value of m s ) separately from those due to the choice of strange sea-quark mass (which is not tuned to the physical m s ).\n\nWe calculate the decay constants and mixing matrix elements with the strange valencequark mass tuned to the physical value obtained from fits of the light pseudoscalar meson\n\n39", + "recall": 0.8956043956043956, + "true_md": "## E. Scale uncertainty\n\n## F. Light- and strange-quark mass uncertainties\n\nBecause in this paper we only compute dimensionless ratios, the uncertainty in the de- termination of the lattice spacing only enters implicitly through the uncertainty in the light-quark masses and in the renormalization factors. We estimate the systematic error due to the truncation of lattice perturbation theory in the previous subsection and due to the light-quark mass determinations in the following subsection.\n\nWe obtain the physical decay constants and mixing matrix elements by setting the light- quark masses to their physical values in the linear plus SU (2) HM χ PT chiral extrapolation formulae, once the low-energy constants have been determined from fits to numerical lattice data. We use the bare-quark mass value determined from fits to the light pseudoscalar meson masses [34]:\n\nwhere m$_{ud}$ is the average of the up and down quark masses. The quoted error includes both statistics and the systematic uncertainties from the chiral extrapolation, finite-volume effects, discretization effects, and the unphysical strange sea quark mass. In order to estimate the systematic uncertainty in the ratios f$_{B}$$\\_{s}$/f$\\_{B}$$_{d}$ and ξ , we vary the bare light-quark masses within their stated uncertainties. We then take the maximal difference from the central value to be the systematic error. From this method, we find that the systematic error in f$_{B}$$\\_{s}$/f$\\_{B}$$_{d}$ due to the uncertainty in the light-quark mass determination is 0.2% for both smearings and the systematic error in ξ is 0.2% regardless of the smearing used for the heavy quark.\n\nBecause the strange-quark mass does not explicitly appear in the SU (2) HM χ PT extrap- olation formulae, we cannot estimate the errors in f$_{B}$$\\_{s}$/f$\\_{B}$$_{d}$ and ξ due to the simulated valence and sea strange-quark masses with the simple method used above for the light quarks. We must instead address the errors due to the uncertainty in the strange valence-quark mass (which is set to the physical value of m$_{s}$ ) separately from those due to the choice of strange sea-quark mass (which is not tuned to the physical m$_{s}$ ).\n\nWe calculate the decay constants and mixing matrix elements with the strange valence- quark mass tuned to the physical value obtained from fits of the light pseudoscalar meson\n\n39\n\n$$am$_{ud}$ + am$_{res}$ = 0 . 001300(85) , (82)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9818155048361425, + "doc_id": "796d12accdc6ef4b6986d5be713cf3d9ce9a24dd0dd87d5caef5b4f33428422d", + "edit_distance": 0.007668711656441718, + "f1_score": 0.99375, + "meteor": 0.9953983797398044, + "precision": 0.99375, + "pred_md": "- [55] S. S. Dietrich and B. L. Berman, At. Data Nucl. Data Tables 38 (1988).\n- [56] M. Hunyadi et al. , Phys. Lett. B 576 , 253 (2003).\n- [57] B. K. Nayak et al. , Phys. Lett. B 674 , 281 (2009).\n- [58] M. Hunyadi et al. , Phys. Rev. C 80 , 044317 (2009).\n- [59] G. Col' o et al. , Phys. Lett. B 485 , 362 (2000).\n- [60] D. Vretenar, A. Wandelt, and P. Ring, Phys. Lett. B 485 , 334 (2000).\n- [61] E. B. Balbutsev, I. V. Molodtsova, and A. V. Unzhakova, Europhys. Lett. 26 , 499 (1994).\n- [62] V. Nesterenko, private communication.\n- [63] J. M. Moss et al. , Phys. Rev. Lett. 37 , 816 (1976).\n- [64] J. M. Moss et al. , Phys. Rev. C 18 , 741 (1978).\n- [65] G. Col' o et al. , Phys. Rev. C 70 , 024307 (2004).\n- [66] G. Col', private communication. o\n- [67] J. Piekarewicz, Phys. Rev. C 76 , 031301 (2007).\n- [68] D. Vretenar, private communication.\n- [69] V. Tselyaev et al. , Phys. Rev. C 79 , 034309 (2009).\n- [70] S. Stringari, Phys. Lett. B 108 , 232 (1982).\n- [71] O. Civitarese et al. , Phys. Rev. C 43 , 2622 (1991).\n- [72] J. Piekarewicz and M. Centelles, Phys. Rev. C 79 , 054311 (2009).\n- [73] B. G. Todd-Rutel and J. Piekarewicz, Phys. Rev. Lett. 95 , 122501 (2005).\n- [74] G. A. Lalazissis et al. , Phys. Rev. C 55 , 540 (1997).\n- [75] G. A. Lalazissis et al. , Phys. Rev. C 71 , 024312 (2003).\n- [76] J. Piekarewicz, private communication.\n- [77] J. Li et al. , Phys. Rev. C 78 , 064304 (2008).\n- [78] J. Bartel et al. , Nucl. Phys. A 386 , 79 (1982).\n- [79] E. Khan, Phys. Rev. C 80 , 011307 (2009).\n- [80] E. Khan, Phys. Rev. C 80 , 057302 (2009).\n- [81] D. Lunney et al. , Rev. Mod. Phys. 75 , 1021 (2003).\n- [82] N. Zeldes et al. , Nucl. Phys. A 399 , 11 (1983).\n- [83] M. N. Harakeh et al. , Nucl. Phys. A 327 , 373 (1979).\n- [84] S. Patra et al. , Phys. Rev. C 65 , 044304 (2002).\n- [85] S. Shlomo and D. H. Youngblood, Phys. Rev. C 47 , 529 (1993).\n\n27", + "recall": 0.99375, + "true_md": "- [55] S. S. Dietrich and B. L. Berman, At. Data Nucl. Data Tables 38 (1988).\n\n- [56] M. Hunyadi et al. , Phys. Lett. B 576 , 253 (2003).\n\n- [57] B. K. Nayak et al. , Phys. Lett. B 674 , 281 (2009).\n\n- [58] M. Hunyadi et al. , Phys. Rev. C 80 , 044317 (2009).\n\n- [59] G. Col` o et al. , Phys. Lett. B 485 , 362 (2000).\n\n- [60] D. Vretenar, A. Wandelt, and P. Ring, Phys. Lett. B 485 , 334 (2000).\n\n- [61] E. B. Balbutsev, I. V. Molodtsova, and A. V. Unzhakova, Europhys. Lett. 26 , 499 (1994).\n\n- [62] V. Nesterenko, private communication.\n\n- [63] J. M. Moss et al. , Phys. Rev. Lett. 37 , 816 (1976).\n\n- [64] J. M. Moss et al. , Phys. Rev. C 18 , 741 (1978).\n\n- [65] G. Col` o et al. , Phys. Rev. C 70 , 024307 (2004).\n\n- [66] G. Col` o, private communication.\n\n- [67] J. Piekarewicz, Phys. Rev. C 76 , 031301 (2007).\n\n- [68] D. Vretenar, private communication.\n\n- [69] V. Tselyaev et al. , Phys. Rev. C 79 , 034309 (2009).\n\n- [70] S. Stringari, Phys. Lett. B 108 , 232 (1982).\n\n- [71] O. Civitarese et al. , Phys. Rev. C 43 , 2622 (1991).\n\n- [72] J. Piekarewicz and M. Centelles, Phys. Rev. C 79 , 054311 (2009).\n\n- [73] B. G. Todd-Rutel and J. Piekarewicz, Phys. Rev. Lett. 95 , 122501 (2005).\n\n- [74] G. A. Lalazissis et al. , Phys. Rev. C 55 , 540 (1997).\n\n- [75] G. A. Lalazissis et al. , Phys. Rev. C 71 , 024312 (2003).\n\n- [76] J. Piekarewicz, private communication.\n\n- [77] J. Li et al. , Phys. Rev. C 78 , 064304 (2008).\n\n- [78] J. Bartel et al. , Nucl. Phys. A 386 , 79 (1982).\n\n- [79] E. Khan, Phys. Rev. C 80 , 011307 (2009).\n\n- [80] E. Khan, Phys. Rev. C 80 , 057302 (2009).\n\n- [81] D. Lunney et al. , Rev. Mod. Phys. 75 , 1021 (2003).\n\n- [82] N. Zeldes et al. , Nucl. Phys. A 399 , 11 (1983).\n\n- [83] M. N. Harakeh et al. , Nucl. Phys. A 327 , 373 (1979).\n\n- [84] S. Patra et al. , Phys. Rev. C 65 , 044304 (2002).\n\n- [85] S. Shlomo and D. H. Youngblood, Phys. Rev. C 47 , 529 (1993).\n\n27" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.49073408444124406, + "doc_id": "2184f74cb9f3837282eb5ae36992b3904294f715591f0fd4beecd3bb894cc1f3", + "edit_distance": 0.734341252699784, + "f1_score": 0.9063670411985019, + "meteor": 0.6025506947536682, + "precision": 0.9166666666666666, + "pred_md": "FIG. 4: (Colour online) Density profiles for the situation where the substrate is covered by nanoparticles with average density ρ av n = 0 3 . . The top row are the nanoparticle density profiles and the bottom row are the corresponding liquid density profiles at the times t/t l = 8 (left) and 80 (right), where t l = 1 /kTM nc l σ 2 . The parameters are kT/ε ll = 0 8 . , ε nl /ε ll = 0 6 . , ε nn = 0 , α = 0 4 . M σ nc l 4 , M c l = 0 , ρ l ( t = 0) = 0 9 . ± ξ (where ξ represents white noise of amplitude 0.05) and ( µ -µ coex ) /kT = -0 88 . , where the liquid exhibits spinodal decomposition-evaporation.\n\nFIG. 4: (Colour online) Density profiles for the situation where the substrate is covered by nanoparticles with average density ρ av n = 0 3 . . The top row are the nanoparticle density profiles and the bottom row are the corresponding liquid density profiles at the times t/t l = 8 (left) and 80 (right), where t l = 1 /kTM nc l σ 2 . The parameters are kT/ε ll = 0 8 . , ε nl /ε ll = 0 6 . , ε nn = 0 , α = 0 4 . M σ nc l 4 , M c l = 0 , ρ l ( t = 0) = 0 9 . ± ξ (where ξ represents white noise of amplitude 0.05) and ( µ -µ coex ) /kT = -0 88 . , where the liquid exhibits spinodal decomposition-evaporation.\n\nalso diffuse over the substrate (conserved dynamics). The conserved part is treated along the lines developed above for the nanoparticles. For the non-conserved part we assume a standard form [85], i.e., the change in time of ρ l is proportional to -( µ surf ( r , t ) -µ ) = -δF ρ , ρ [ n l ] /δρ l ( r ) where µ surf ( r , t ) is the local chemical potential of the liquid at the point r on the surface at time t . This gives the evolution equation for the liquid density\n\n\n\nwhere we assume that the coefficients M c l and M nc l are constants.\n\n16", + "recall": 0.8962962962962963, + "true_md": "FIG. 4: (Colour online) Density profiles for the situation where the substrate is covered by nanoparticles with average density ρ av n = 0 . 3 . The top row are the nanoparticle density profiles and the bottom row are the corresponding liquid density profiles at the times t/t$_{l}$ = 8 (left) and 80 (right), where t$_{l}$ = 1 /kT M nc l σ $^{2}$. The parameters are kT /ε$_{ll}$ = 0 . 8 , ε$_{nl}$/ε$_{ll}$ = 0 . 6 , ε$_{nn}$ = 0 , α = 0 . 4 M nc l σ $^{4}$, M c l = 0 , ρ$_{l}$ ( t = 0) = 0 . 9 ± ξ (where ξ represents white noise of amplitude 0.05) and ( µ − µ$_{coex}$ ) /kT = − 0 . 88 , where the liquid exhibits spinodal decomposition-evaporation.\n\nalso diffuse over the substrate (conserved dynamics). The conserved part is treated along the lines developed above for the nanoparticles. For the non-conserved part we assume a standard form [85], i.e., the change in time of ρ$_{l}$ is proportional to − ( µ$_{surf}$ ( r , t ) − µ ) = − δF [ ρ$_{n}$, ρ$_{l}$ ] /δρ$_{l}$ ( r ) where µ$_{surf}$ ( r , t ) is the local chemical potential of the liquid at the point r on the surface at time t . This gives the evolution equation for the liquid density\n\nwhere we assume that the coefficients M c l and M nc l are constants.\n\n$$∂ρ$_{l}$ ∂t = ∇ ·$^{[}$ M c l ρ$_{l}$ ∇ δF [ ρ$_{n}$, ρ$_{l}$ ] δρ$_{l}$ ] − M nc l δF [ ρ$_{n}$, ρ$_{l}$ ] δρ$_{l}$ , (7)$$\n\n16" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4286245562887211, + "doc_id": "4ad05094c901bd11d6cc21546030d1b310ba06ae5a35143069c4eb3a391eef7e", + "edit_distance": 0.7600849256900213, + "f1_score": 0.9596774193548389, + "meteor": 0.6037566843267356, + "precision": 0.9834710743801653, + "pred_md": "FIG. 6: Chiral extrapolation of √ M B s /M B l = √ m B s /m B l ( f B s √ B B s /f B l √ B B l ) . The blue (triangle) points denote the APE data, while the red (square) points denote the HYP-smeared data. The color of the shaded (hatched) error band corresponds to those of the APE (HYP) data points. The dashed vertical line denotes the physical average u d -quark mass and the black dot denotes the physical strange quark mass, at which the SU (3)-breaking ratio must be one. The SU (2) HM χ PT coefficients obtained from the fit are R M = 1 18(8) and . D l = 2 6(1 1) in the case of APE smearing . . and R M = 1 18(6) and . D l = 2 6(8) in the case of HYP smearing. Errors shown are statistical only. .\n\nFIG. 6: Chiral extrapolation of √ M B s /M B l = √ m B s /m B l ( f B s √ B B s /f B l √ B B l ) . The blue (triangle) points denote the APE data, while the red (square) points denote the HYP-smeared data. The color of the shaded (hatched) error band corresponds to those of the APE (HYP) data points. The dashed vertical line denotes the physical average u d -quark mass and the black dot denotes the physical strange quark mass, at which the SU (3)-breaking ratio must be one. The SU (2) HM χ PT coefficients obtained from the fit are R M = 1 18(8) and . D l = 2 6(1 1) in the case of APE smearing . . and R M = 1 18(6) and . D l = 2 6(8) in the case of HYP smearing. Errors shown are statistical only. .\n\n√\n\nTABLE VII: Results for Φ B s / Φ B d and √ m B s /m B d · ξ at the physical point. Only statistical errors are shown.\n\n## VI. ESTIMATION OF SYSTEMATIC ERRORS\n\nIn this section we estimate the systematic uncertainties in the SU (3)-breaking ratios f B s /f B d and ξ . For clarity, we present each source of error in a separate subsection. The\n\n30", + "recall": 0.937007874015748, + "true_md": "FIG. 6: Chiral extrapolation of √ M$_{B}$$\\_{s}$/M$\\_{B}$$_{l}$ = √ m$_{B}$$\\_{s}$/m$\\_{B}$$_{l}$ ( f$_{B}$$\\_{s}$ √ B$\\_{B}$$_{s}$/f$_{B}$$\\_{l}$ √ B$\\_{B}$$_{l}$ ) . The blue (tri- angle) points denote the APE data, while the red (square) points denote the HYP-smeared data. The color of the shaded (hatched) error band corresponds to those of the APE (HYP) data points. The dashed vertical line denotes the physical average u - d quark mass and the black dot denotes the physical strange quark mass, at which the SU (3)-breaking ratio must be one. The SU (2) HM χ PT coefficients obtained from the fit are R$_{M}$ = 1 . 18(8) and D$_{l}$ = 2 . 6(1 . 1) in the case of APE smearing and R$_{M}$ = 1 . 18(6) and D$_{l}$ = 2 . 6(8) in the case of HYP smearing. Errors shown are statistical only.\n\nIn this section we estimate the systematic uncertainties in the SU (3)-breaking ratios f$_{B}$$\\_{s}$/f$\\_{B}$$_{d}$ and ξ . For clarity, we present each source of error in a separate subsection. The\n\nTABLE VII: Results for Φ$_{B}$$\\_{s}$ / Φ$\\_{B}$$_{d}$ and √ m$_{B}$$\\_{s}$/m$\\_{B}$$_{d}$ · ξ at the physical point. Only statistical errors are shown.\n\n## VI. ESTIMATION OF SYSTEMATIC ERRORS\n\n30" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9115457155286845, + "doc_id": "b0f4e6e8066b700bb439f2dd28b1b7f1717420bc1988ffd7f36ceede5f9fc65c", + "edit_distance": 0.061837455830388695, + "f1_score": 0.9656565656565655, + "meteor": 0.9458525786670393, + "precision": 0.9795081967213115, + "pred_md": "24\n\nWe can also see that the differences between the observables calculated at different N that are separated by the same amount are getting smaller as we increase N . This strongly suggests that there is convergence to a large N limit, but graphically we see that the convergence is rather slow.\n\nThis suggests that the deviations go as 1 /N rather than N -2 . This is rather surprising. This result should be contrasted with the results [45], where the limit N →∞ should be a classical system and we should be able to learn everything about the system expanding in powers of 1 /N 2 .\n\nHowever, in a sense, the model is not a matrix model in the t' Hooft limit [42]. We have taken the t' Hooft coupling λ = g N 2 → ∞ keeping N fixed and large, so that we can reduce our model to the set of commuting matrices. But a similar step of expanding about commuting matrices was done in [17] for a non-supersymmetric model. There it was found that the joint eigenvalue distribution obtained by taking this procedure was not exactly the correct size and that ignoring the loops of the variables that were integrated out gave the wrong answer. If we assume that something similar is happening here, where supersymmetry makes cancellations between integrated out modes happen, then we might still find problems if cancellations are not exact. This might be more pronounced at the edges of the distributions where small corrections have the biggest effects. At this stage, we are just speculating on what might be the cause for this feature of the numerical simulations. Another issue relates to the observations in the figure 4 which show that for large k we are not in the factorization regime yet for small N . Thus the idea of seeing a natural convergence to a standard large N expansion is suspect because N is not large enough yet. This is a general issue that one should be very cautions about before making claims of some effect. Different observables converge at different rates, and the corrections depend on the parameters describing the observable. For example, if in our setup above corrections go like k /N s , and s is large, then we need to go to very large N before making any claims, because for k = 10 the result could easily overwhelm N . Either way, for certain questions, a very large value of N will be required before being able to compare to N = ∞ . Considering also that the total number of degrees of freedom in the system before gauging is N 2 +5 N and that the 'energy of the ground state' is of order N 2 plus corrections of order N , it is perhaps not surprising that the naive planar counting argument [42] fails to give the right approach to the large N limit. After all, we are taking the planar parameter to infinity first", + "recall": 0.952191235059761, + "true_md": "24\n\nWe can also see that the differences between the observables calculated at different N that are separated by the same amount are getting smaller as we increase N . This strongly suggests that there is convergence to a large N limit, but graphically we see that the con- vergence is rather slow.\n\nThis suggests that the deviations go as 1 /N rather than N − $^{2}$. This is rather surprising.\n\nThis result should be contrasted with the results [45], where the limit N → ∞ should be a classical system and we should be able to learn everything about the system expanding in powers of 1 /N $^{2}$.\n\nHowever, in a sense, the model is not a matrix model in the t’ Hooft limit [42]. We have taken the t’ Hooft coupling λ = g $^{2}$N → ∞ keeping N fixed and large, so that we can reduce our model to the set of commuting matrices. But a similar step of expanding about commuting matrices was done in [17] for a non-supersymmetric model. There it was found that the joint eigenvalue distribution obtained by taking this procedure was not exactly the correct size and that ignoring the loops of the variables that were integrated out gave the wrong answer. If we assume that something similar is happening here, where supersymmetry makes cancellations between integrated out modes happen, then we might still find problems if cancellations are not exact. This might be more pronounced at the edges of the distributions where small corrections have the biggest effects. At this stage, we are just speculating on what might be the cause for this feature of the numerical simulations.\n\nAnother issue relates to the observations in the figure 4 which show that for large k we are not in the factorization regime yet for small N . Thus the idea of seeing a natural convergence to a standard large N expansion is suspect because N is not large enough yet.\n\nThis is a general issue that one should be very cautions about before making claims of some effect. Different observables converge at different rates, and the corrections depend on the parameters describing the observable. For example, if in our setup above corrections go like k $^{s}$/N , and s is large, then we need to go to very large N before making any claims, because for k = 10 the result could easily overwhelm N . Either way, for certain questions, a very large value of N will be required before being able to compare to N = ∞ . Considering also that the total number of degrees of freedom in the system before gauging is N 2 + 5 N and that the ‘energy of the ground state’ is of order N 2 plus corrections of order N , it is perhaps not surprising that the naive planar counting argument [42] fails to give the right approach to the large N limit. After all, we are taking the planar parameter to infinity first" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6651136448501731, + "doc_id": "bd0aca4af0f01fa47182f1e252e3c31769eb1aaa828bb25cd889615f691fbbfa", + "edit_distance": 0.3278008298755187, + "f1_score": 0.9396984924623115, + "meteor": 0.7776044692862601, + "precision": 0.958974358974359, + "pred_md": "22\n\nWe also add self interactions of the extra scalar field ρ , described by the potential\n\n\n\nwhereupon the field ρ acquires a VEV ˜ = v µ √ λ and a mass m h = √ 2 ( b πR µ ) . We then expand as usual:\n\n\n\nin this way the Lagrangian is equal to that of eq. (8) plus kinetic, mass and interaction terms for h . The interactions between h and the gauge bosons help unitarizing the scattering of the longitudinally polarized vectors, and the unitarity violation is postponed to the scale typical of a 5D theory, Λ . '\n\nIn the GD-BESS case, the presence of a physical scalar was undesirable since it seemed to reintroduce the hierarchy problem. In the continuum limit, however, at least for a particular choice of the extra-dimensional background, the slice of AdS 5 that we will analyze in section VIB, the h field can be interpreted as a composite Higgs state - just as the KK excitations of the gauge bosons - by the AdS/CFT correspondence [7, 63, 64, 70], sidestepping the hierarchy problem.\n\n## VI. PHENOMENOLOGY\n\nIn this last section, we are going to do a brief phenomenological study of the continuum GD-BESS in correspondence of two particular choices for the warp factor b y ( ): the flat limit , b y ( ) ≡ 1 and the RS limit , b y ( ) = e -2 ky . In both cases, we will report spectrum examples, bounds from electroweak precision tests and naive unitarity cut-off.\n\n## A. Flat extra dimension\n\nIn this case, we have b y ( ) ≡ 1. This immediately implies (using eq. (62))\n\n\n\nTo get an interesting phenomenology at an accessible scale, we need ¯ M ∼ TeV. The basic parameters of the model are πR , the gauge couplings g 5 , ˜ and ˜ , the VEV of the scalar g g ' field ˜ (which is v ≡ v since b = 1) and its self-coupling constant λ . The latter is only used", + "recall": 0.9211822660098522, + "true_md": "22\n\nWe also add self interactions of the extra scalar field ρ , described by the potential\n\nwhereupon the field ρ acquires a VEV ˜ v = µ √$_{λ}$ and a mass m$_{h}$ = √ 2 b ( πR ) µ . We then expand as usual:\n\nin this way the Lagrangian is equal to that of eq. (8) plus kinetic, mass and interaction terms for h . The interactions between h and the gauge bosons help unitarizing the scattering of the longitudinally polarized vectors, and the unitarity violation is postponed to the scale typical of a 5D theory, Λ ′ .\n\nIn the GD-BESS case, the presence of a physical scalar was undesirable since it seemed to reintroduce the hierarchy problem. In the continuum limit, however, at least for a particular choice of the extra-dimensional background, the slice of AdS$_{5}$ that we will analyze in section VI B, the h field can be interpreted as a composite Higgs state - just as the KK excitations of the gauge bosons - by the AdS/CFT correspondence [7, 63, 64, 70], sidestepping the hierarchy problem.\n\nIn this last section, we are going to do a brief phenomenological study of the continuum GD-BESS in correspondence of two particular choices for the warp factor b ( y ): the flat limit , b ( y ) ≡ 1 and the RS limit , b ( y ) = e − 2 $^{ky}$. In both cases, we will report spectrum examples, bounds from electroweak precision tests and naive unitarity cut-off.\n\nIn this case, we have b ( y ) ≡ 1. This immediately implies (using eq. (62)) √$_{3}$\n\nTo get an interesting phenomenology at an accessible scale, we need ¯ M ∼ TeV. The basic parameters of the model are πR , the gauge couplings g$_{5}$ , ˜ g and ˜ g ′ , the VEV of the scalar field ˜ v (which is ≡ v since b = 1) and its self-coupling constant λ . The latter is only used\n\n$$¯ M = √$_{3}$ πR . (85)$$\n\n## A. Flat extra dimension\n\n## VI. PHENOMENOLOGY\n\n$$V ( ρ ) = − µ 2 2 ρ 2 + λ 4 ρ $^{4}$, (83)$$\n\n$$ρ = h + ˜ v ; (84)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7652139085626329, + "doc_id": "285073825f05f8fafd02354757c01403524ff85d9c0a2fa91dfcac295002b742", + "edit_distance": 0.1676300578034682, + "f1_score": 0.9817351598173516, + "meteor": 0.8455335783111484, + "precision": 0.9907834101382489, + "pred_md": "for long locsiton wavelengths can be obtained by taking a Taylor series expansion of Eq. (20) at q → 0. By only retaining terms up to the order of q 2 and calculating all the necessary sums and products of trigonometric functions, we find that Eqs. (17) and (18) still hold in the NNA.\n\nIt is sufficient to find locsitons with q lying within the first Brillouin zone of the reciprocal lattice, because any solutions with q lying outside the first Brillouin zone are physically equivalent to them due to the discrete nature of our system. The dispersion relation D NNA 2 ( q ) in Eq. (20) also has the required symmetry and periodicity. It is common to use highsymmetry points in the first Brillouin zone to denote most interesting directions in the lattice [see Fig. 1(b)]. Note that in terms of u K we may write ΓK ‖ u K and ΓM ⊥ u K .\n\nThe dispersion dependence δ/δ LL = D NNA 2 ( q ) in the case of | δ LL | /greatermuch 1 is shown in Fig. 2(b,c) for two different orientations of E in with respect to the lattice: in Fig. 2(b) θ 0 = 0 (i. e., E in ‖ ΓK), while in Fig. 2(c) θ 0 = π/ 2 (i. e., E in ‖ ΓM). The x axis on the plots is aligned with the external field E in ; the hexagonal boundaries of the first Brillouin zones are shown with thicker dashed lines. The central parts of all three plots in Fig. 2 are very similar, which reflects our finding that Eqs. (17) and (18) hold for long locsiton wavelengths within both NRA and NNA. At the same time, significant differences accumulate closer to the boundaries of the first Brillouin zone. Fig. 2(b,c) also show that for both orientations of E in the maxima and minima of D NNA 2 ( q ) are attained at the zone boundaries, specifically, at different M points.\n\nTo facilitate the comparison of the three plots in Fig. 2 and finding the edges of the locsiton band, the NNA dispersion dependencies for two high-symmetry directions are presented in Fig. 3 and compared to the the NRA result. For both longitudinal and transverse locsitons, Fig. 3 shows corresponding cross-sections of the three plots of Fig. 2. As we already noted earlier in this paper, the NRA result is only meaningful for q up to ∼ π ; Fig. 3 suggests that it is a good approximation for the NNA result at q < π/ ∼ 2, regardless of the orientation of E in with respect to the lattice. It is instructive to give explicit analytic expressions for each of the four NNA-based dependencies in Fig. 3. The respective dispersion relations derived from Eq. (20) and the corresponding ranges for δ/δ LL , obtained in the assumption that | δ LL | /greatermuch 1, are as follows:\n\n15", + "recall": 0.9728506787330317, + "true_md": "for long locsiton wavelengths can be obtained by taking a Taylor series expansion of Eq. (20) at q → 0. By only retaining terms up to the order of q 2 and calculating all the necessary sums and products of trigonometric functions, we find that Eqs. (17) and (18) still hold in the NNA.\n\nIt is sufficient to find locsitons with q lying within the first Brillouin zone of the reciprocal lattice, because any solutions with q lying outside the first Brillouin zone are physically equivalent to them due to the discrete nature of our system. The dispersion relation D NNA 2 ( q ) in Eq. (20) also has the required symmetry and periodicity. It is common to use high- symmetry points in the first Brillouin zone to denote most interesting directions in the lattice [see Fig. 1(b)]. Note that in terms of u$_{K}$ we may write ΓK ‖ u$_{K}$ and ΓM ⊥ u$_{K}$ . The dispersion dependence δ/δ$_{LL}$ = D NNA ( ) in the case of | δ$_{LL}$ | ≫ 1 is shown in\n\n‖ ⊥ The dispersion dependence δ/δ$_{LL}$ = D NNA 2 ( q ) in the case of | δ$_{LL}$ | ≫ 1 is shown in Fig. 2(b,c) for two different orientations of E$_{in}$ with respect to the lattice: in Fig. 2(b) θ$_{0}$ = 0 (i. e., E$_{in}$ ‖ ΓK), while in Fig. 2(c) θ$_{0}$ = π/ 2 (i. e., E$_{in}$ ‖ ΓM). The x axis on the plots is aligned with the external field E$_{in}$ ; the hexagonal boundaries of the first Brillouin zones are shown with thicker dashed lines. The central parts of all three plots in Fig. 2 are very similar, which reflects our finding that Eqs. (17) and (18) hold for long locsiton wavelengths within both NRA and NNA. At the same time, significant differences accumulate closer to the boundaries of the first Brillouin zone. Fig. 2(b,c) also show that for both orientations of E$_{in}$ the maxima and minima of D NNA 2 ( q ) are attained at the zone boundaries, specifically, at different M points.\n\nTo facilitate the comparison of the three plots in Fig. 2 and finding the edges of the locsiton band, the NNA dispersion dependencies for two high-symmetry directions are presented in Fig. 3 and compared to the the NRA result. For both longitudinal and transverse locsitons, Fig. 3 shows corresponding cross-sections of the three plots of Fig. 2. As we already noted earlier in this paper, the NRA result is only meaningful for q up to ∼ π ; Fig. 3 suggests that it is a good approximation for the NNA result at q < ∼ π/ 2, regardless of the orientation of E$_{in}$ with respect to the lattice. It is instructive to give explicit analytic expressions for each of the four NNA-based dependencies in Fig. 3. The respective dispersion relations derived from Eq. (20) and the corresponding ranges for δ/δ$_{LL}$ , obtained in the assumption that | δ$_{LL}$ | ≫ 1, are as follows:\n\n15" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.10747126384573973, + "doc_id": "55bfe49c092a30f584ae81b85b7ae3dc1c992c14ea4a8c7de2fd335415c17349", + "edit_distance": 0.7388825541619156, + "f1_score": 0.847682119205298, + "meteor": 0.31748946868703737, + "precision": 0.9552238805970149, + "pred_md": "the physical quark masses and the continuum. Although we label the formulae with the subscript ' B ', we note that these functions can also be used to extrapolate D -meson decay constants and mixing matrix elements with the caveat that the low-energy constants (except for the light-light meson tree-level parameters f and B ) are different for the case of B -mesons and D -mesons. We first show the SU (3) HM χ PT formulae in Sec. D 1; we then take the appropriate limits of the SU (3) expressions to obtain those in SU (2) HM χ PT in Sec. D 2.\n\n## 1. SU (3) HM PT expressions χ\n\nThe tree-level mass-squared of a meson composed of two domain-wall valence quarks with flavors x and y is\n\n\n\nwhere B is a continuum low-energy constant and m res is the residual quark mass.\n\nThe NLO result for Φ B x = f B x √ m B x in the partially-quenched domain-wall theory with 2+1 flavors of sea quarks is [81, 82]:\n\n\n\nwhere f ≈ 130 4 MeV is the tree-level pion decay constant. . The NLO expression for M B x = 8 / 3 m B x f 2 B x B B x is similar [81, 83]:\n\n\n\nIn both the decay constant and the mixing matrix element, the only effect of the nonzero lattice spacing is a new analytic term proportional to a 2 . These results agree with the\n\n53", + "recall": 0.7619047619047619, + "true_md": "the physical quark masses and the continuum. Although we label the formulae with the subscript “ B ”, we note that these functions can also be used to extrapolate D -meson decay constants and mixing matrix elements with the caveat that the low-energy constants (except for the light-light meson tree-level parameters f and B ) are different for the case of B -mesons and D -mesons. We first show the SU (3) HM χ PT formulae in Sec. D 1; we then take the appropriate limits of the SU (3) expressions to obtain those in SU (2) HM χ PT in Sec. D 2.\n\nThe tree-level mass-squared of a meson composed of two domain-wall valence quarks with flavors x and y is\n\nwhere B is a continuum low-energy constant and m$_{res}$ is the residual quark mass.\n\nThe NLO result for Φ$_{B}$$\\_{x}$ = f$\\_{B}$$_{x}$ √ m$_{B}$$\\_{x}$ in the partially-quenched domain-wall theory with 2+1 flavors of sea quarks is [81, 82]:\n\nwhere f ≈ 130 . 4 MeV is the tree-level pion decay constant. The NLO expression for M$_{B}$$\\_{x}$ = 8 / 3 m$\\_{B}$$_{x}$f 2 $_{B$\\_{x}$}$B$_{B}$$\\_{x}$ is similar [81, 83]:\n\nIn both the decay constant and the mixing matrix element, the only effect of the nonzero lattice spacing is a new analytic term proportional to a $^{2}$. These results agree with the\n\n53\n\n$$M$_{B}$$_{x}$ = β$_{0}$ { 1 − 1 + 3 g 2 B ∗ Bπ 16 π $^{2}$f 2 ∑ f = l,l,h ℓ ( m 2 $_{xf}$) − 1 − 3 g 2 B ∗ Bπ 16 π $^{2}$f 2 ℓ ( m 2 $_{X}$) + 1 24 π $^{2}$f 2 [ R [2 , 2] X ( { M$_{X}$ } ; { µ } ) ˜ ℓ ( m 2 $_{X}$) − ∑ j ∈{ M$_{X}$ } ∂ ∂m 2 X ( R [2 , 2] j ( { M$_{X}$ } ; { µ } ) ) ℓ ( m 2 $_{j}$) ] + d$_{sea}$ (2 m$_{l}$ + m$_{h}$ ) + d$_{val}$m$_{x}$ + d$_{a}$a 2 } . (D3)$$\n\n$$Φ$_{B}$$_{x}$ = φ$_{0}$ { 1 − 1 16 π $^{2}$f 2 1 + 3 g 2 B ∗ Bπ 2 ∑ f = l,l,h ℓ ( m 2 $_{xf}$) + 1 16 π $^{2}$f 2 1 + 3 g 2 B ∗ Bπ 6 [ R [2 , 2] X ( { M$_{X}$ } ; { µ } ) ˜ ℓ ( m 2 $_{X}$) − ∑ j ∈{ M$_{X}$ } ∂ ∂m 2 X ( R [2 , 2] j ( { M$_{X}$ } ; { µ } ) ) ℓ ( m 2 $_{j}$) ] + c$_{sea}$ (2 m$_{l}$ + m$_{h}$ ) + c$_{val}$m$_{x}$ + c$_{a}$a 2 } , (D2)$$\n\n$$m 2 xy = B ( m$_{x}$ + m$_{y}$ + 2 m$_{res}$ ) , (D1)$$\n\n## 1. SU (3) HM χ PT expressions" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8898482279654232, + "doc_id": "150726aa55587a3d782dafbb8ed1e2fa844c086ec1c35125427de644fb4b38e1", + "edit_distance": 0.08191126279863481, + "f1_score": 0.9305135951661632, + "meteor": 0.9230981573675198, + "precision": 0.9565217391304348, + "pred_md": "TABLE VI: Lorentzian-fit parameters for the high-energy component of ISGDR strength distributions in the Sn isotopes, as extracted from MDA. The results from TAMU work, where available, are provided for comparison [19, 21].\n\na Only statistical uncertainties are included; systematic errors, mostly from DWBA calculations and the contributions at the highest energies (see text), are ∼ 30%.\n\nsignificantly lower than that extracted earlier from the ISGMR's in 208 Pb and 90 Zr. While the agreement with the experimental data is impressive (and, indeed, reproduces the Adependence rather well), it does leave the question of 'softness' of the Sn nuclei unanswered. As the authors themselves state, the goal of their work has not been to solve the problem of the nuclear-matter incompressibility but to find under which conditions one can obtain reasonable description of the experimental data for the considered tin isotopes.\n\nThe 'superfluid' character of the Sn isotopes, resulting from pairing correlations in openshell nuclei, has been investigated by Li et al. [77]. In a self-consistent QRPA model that employs the canonical HFB basis and an energy-density functional with a Skyrme mean-field part and density-dependent pairing, they calculated the energy of the ISGMR for the Sn isotopes and looked at the effects of different kinds of pairing forces (volume, surface, and mixed). They find that, compared with the HF+RPA and HF-BCS-QRPA formalisms, the HFB+QRPA calculations lead to energies for the ISGMR in Sn isotopes\n\n20", + "recall": 0.9058823529411765, + "true_md": "TABLE VI: Lorentzian-fit parameters for the high-energy component of ISGDR strength distribu- tions in the Sn isotopes, as extracted from MDA. The results from TAMU work, where available, are provided for comparison [19, 21].\n\na Only statistical uncertainties are included; systematic errors, mostly from DWBA calculations and the contributions at the highest energies (see text), are ∼ 30%.\n\nsignificantly lower than that extracted earlier from the ISGMR’s in $^{208}$Pb and $^{90}$Zr. While the agreement with the experimental data is impressive (and, indeed, reproduces the A- dependence rather well), it does leave the question of “softness” of the Sn nuclei unanswered. As the authors themselves state, the goal of their work has not been to solve the problem of the nuclear-matter incompressibility but to find under which conditions one can obtain reasonable description of the experimental data for the considered tin isotopes.\n\nThe “superfluid” character of the Sn isotopes, resulting from pairing correlations in open- shell nuclei, has been investigated by Li et al. [77]. In a self-consistent QRPA model that employs the canonical HFB basis and an energy-density functional with a Skyrme mean-field part and density-dependent pairing, they calculated the energy of the ISGMR for the Sn isotopes and looked at the effects of different kinds of pairing forces (volume, surface, and mixed). They find that, compared with the HF+RPA and HF-BCS-QRPA formalisms, the HFB+QRPA calculations lead to energies for the ISGMR in Sn isotopes\n\n20" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6735331113379468, + "doc_id": "2e4405e26e12856c0da3eeeb3df3fabbb3ab69b35cfee1d560d19f2e47dfa3b5", + "edit_distance": 0.34328358208955223, + "f1_score": 0.9467455621301776, + "meteor": 0.8006803641793597, + "precision": 0.963855421686747, + "pred_md": "FIG. 7: (Color online) Ratio of the effective temperature, T eff , defined in Eq. (12) to the temperature parameter of the piston, T P , as a function of the mass ratio for the same systems as in Fig. 5.\n\nFIG. 7: (Color online) Ratio of the effective temperature, T eff , defined in Eq. (12) to the temperature parameter of the piston, T P , as a function of the mass ratio for the same systems as in Fig. 5.\n\nlinearly with 1 -α 2 , at least in the considered interval, 0 85 . ≤ α ≤ 0 98. . It is worth to note that some care is needed when extrapolating to the elastic limit α → 1 these results. In this limit, a stationary state is only possible if, in addition, the vibrating wall is arrested, i.e. also the limit v W → 0 is taken. But all the previous discussion has been carried out at constant velocity of the vibrating wall. This explains why extrapolation of the linear fitting in Fig. 8 does not lead to b = 1, and this does not mean any kind of contradiction.\n\nIn Fig. 9, the dimensionless compressibility, -mL -1 ( ∂L/∂M ) v W and the scaled second moment of the position fluctuations σ 2 Z mg /Lb α, α 0 ( P ) T P have been plotted as functions of M/m . A logarithmic representation is employed. Data for several values of the coefficient α have been included. For all the data α P = 0 99. If . T eff had been used instead of b α, α ( P ) T P , the two plotted quantities would be the same by definition, i.e. the filled and empty symbols would agree in all the cases. It is seen that the dependence on M/m of the dimensionless compressibility is accurately described by a power law of the form ( M/m ) -3 4 / , indicated in\n\n16", + "recall": 0.9302325581395349, + "true_md": "FIG. 7: (Color online) Ratio of the effective temperature, T$_{eff}$ , defined in Eq. (12) to the temper- ature parameter of the piston, T$_{P}$ , as a function of the mass ratio for the same systems as in Fig. 5.\n\nlinearly with 1 − α $^{2}$, at least in the considered interval, 0 . 85 ≤ α ≤ 0 . 98. It is worth to note that some care is needed when extrapolating to the elastic limit α → 1 these results. In this limit, a stationary state is only possible if, in addition, the vibrating wall is arrested, i.e. also the limit v$_{W}$ → 0 is taken. But all the previous discussion has been carried out at constant velocity of the vibrating wall. This explains why extrapolation of the linear fitting in Fig. 8 does not lead to b = 1, and this does not mean any kind of contradiction.\n\nIn Fig. 9, the dimensionless compressibility, − mL − 1 ( ∂L/∂M )$_{v}$$\\_{W}$ and the scaled second moment of the position fluctuations σ 2 $\\_{Z}$mg 0 /Lb ( α, α$\\_{P}$ ) T$\\_{P}$ have been plotted as functions of M/m . A logarithmic representation is employed. Data for several values of the coefficient α have been included. For all the data α$\\_{P}$ = 0 . 99. If T$\\_{eff}$ had been used instead of b ( α, α$\\_{P}$ ) T$\\_{P}$ , the two plotted quantities would be the same by definition, i.e. the filled and empty symbols would agree in all the cases. It is seen that the dependence on M/m of the dimensionless compressibility is accurately described by a power law of the form ( M/m ) − 3 / $^{4}$, indicated in\n\n16" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.250603865852769, + "doc_id": "c988c6fb204ac663608bb35f6cc7f8caec858dfd97b2dc1a49fa086e6aa37167", + "edit_distance": 0.6200873362445415, + "f1_score": 0.8876404494382021, + "meteor": 0.3868732462265634, + "precision": 0.9461077844311377, + "pred_md": "25\n\nTABLE I: Low lying masses of the spectrum (zero modes and first two KK excitations) for the model in the flat limit, with the following parameter choice: πR = 1 57 . · 10 -3 GeV -1 , ¯ g 5 = 1 , naive unitarity cut-off equal to 10 5 GeV .\n\nof the first eigenstate of the right charged sector. The contour is obtained by a χ 2 analysis, based on the following experimental values for the /epsilon1 parameters:\n\n\n\nwith correlation matrix\n\n\n\ntaken from [77], and adding to the present model contribution the one from radiative corrections in the SM. To fix the SM contribution, we set m t = 173 1 [78], . α -1 ( m 2 Z ) = 128 957 . ± 0 020 [79] and consider two different test values of the Higgs mass, . m H = 1 TeV and m H = 300 GeV. Notice that, since we have considered SM fermion couplings, the new physics contribution to /epsilon1 b is zero. Since the /epsilon1 b experimental value is very slightly correlated to /epsilon1 1 2 3 , , , we did not include this observable in the analysis. We get:\n\n\n\n\n\n(these SM contributions are obtained as a linear interpolation from the values listed in [80]).\n\nFig. 4 also reports contours that correspond to several values of the naive unitarity cutoff, (81). As it can be seen, the model is potentially compatible with EW precision data, even for a relatively small mass scale for the new heavy vector states. Similarly to the SM", + "recall": 0.8359788359788359, + "true_md": "25\n\nTABLE I: Low lying masses of the spectrum (zero modes and first two KK excitations) for the model in the flat limit, with the following parameter choice: πR = 1 . 57 · 10 − 3 GeV − $^{1}$, ¯ g$_{5}$ = 1 , naive unitarity cut-off equal to 10 5 GeV .\n\nof the first eigenstate of the right charged sector. The contour is obtained by a χ 2 analysis, based on the following experimental values for the ϵ parameters:\n\nwith correlation matrix\n\n  taken from [77], and adding to the present model contribution the one from radiative corrections in the SM. To fix the SM contribution, we set m$_{t}$ = 173 . 1 [78], α − $^{1}$( m 2 $_{Z}$) = 128 . 957 ± 0 . 020 [79] and consider two different test values of the Higgs mass, m$_{H}$ = 1 TeV and m$_{H}$ = 300 GeV. Notice that, since we have considered SM fermion couplings, the new physics contribution to ϵ$_{b}$ is zero. Since the ϵ$_{b}$ experimental value is very slightly correlated to ϵ$_{1}$$\\_{,}$$_{2}$$\\_{,}$$_{3}$ , we did not include this observable in the analysis. We get:\n\n(these SM contributions are obtained as a linear interpolation from the values listed in [80]).\n\nFig. 4 also reports contours that correspond to several values of the naive unitarity cut- off, (81). As it can be seen, the model is potentially compatible with EW precision data, even for a relatively small mass scale for the new heavy vector states. Similarly to the SM\n\n$$ϵ$_{1}$ = 3 . $_{6 10}$− $^{3}$, ϵ$_{2}$ = − 6 . $_{6 10}$− $^{3}$, ϵ$_{3}$ = 6 . $_{7 10}$− $^{3}$, for m$_{H}$ = 1 TeV; (91)$$\n\n$$ϵ$_{1}$ = 4 . $_{8 10}$− $^{3}$, ϵ$_{2}$ = − 7 . $_{1 10}$− $^{3}$, ϵ$_{3}$ = 6 . $_{1 10}$− $^{3}$, for m$_{H}$ = 300 GeV; (92)$$\n\n$$   1 0 . 60 0 . 86 0 . 60 1 0 . 40 0 . 86 0 . 40 1    , (90) taken from [77], and adding to the present model contribution the one from radiative$$\n\n$$ϵ$_{1}$ = (+5 . 4 ± 1 . 0)10 − 3 ϵ$_{2}$ = ( − 8 . 9 ± 1 . 2)10 − 3 ϵ$_{3}$ = (+5 . 34 ± 0 . 94)10 − 3 (89)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9529266492273123, + "doc_id": "21ed11e7ef2392037fa79966a4e8a5b4c40b018349e958e535268d193bb1707e", + "edit_distance": 0.04267161410018553, + "f1_score": 0.9919678714859439, + "meteor": 0.9554586740088017, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "3\n\nquantum mechanics [15, 16], but they suffer from similar limits on taking N large.\n\nThe main problem at hand is that in order to compare gravity and the field theory, in the regime where gravity is described by a semiclassical expansion, we are required to solve a field theory at strong coupling. This is extremely hard in general and this is why numerical methods might offer a good insight into the strong coupling behavior of these field theories. However, as is well known, the gravitational limit also requires solving the field theory at large N . Current lattice methods can in principle solve four dimensional theories for moderate values oF N ∼ 10, but taking N large is too difficult. Remember that in the AdS/CFT correspondence the radius of the five sphere and also of the AdS sphere in Planck units scales like N 1 4 / . Thus, in order to have a resolution of the sphere which is many times the Planck length, let us say by an order of magnitude, we require four orders of magnitude on N . Such numbers are beyond what can be done with a full simulation. Clearly, some approximation to the full field theory problem is required that reduces effectively the number of degrees of freedom to something manageable. Only at this stage simulations become a viable option to analyze the problem.\n\nProgress in this direction was made in [5]. It was argued there that at strong coupling, when the N = 4 SYM field theory is compactified on a three-sphere, the configurations of commuting (constant) scalar matrices dominate the infrared dynamics. Toy models that exhibit this property were exhibited in [17], giving additional indirect evidence for this proposal in the case of N = 4 SYM.\n\nThe nature of the argument that leads to this conclusion requires various steps. First one argues that such classes of configurations are required for describing some supersymmetric states, so the truncation to such variables might be better behaved than naively expected. Afterwards one argues that the quartic scalar potential of the theory should be minimized. This second step is accomplished by systems of commuting matrices. The dominance of this configurations dynamically quenches the other off-diagonal degrees of freedom, meaning that they become heavy and their contributions can be ignored to some degree.\n\nThe end product is a model describing only a handful of the degrees of freedom of the full N = 4 SYM theory, and since the other degrees of freedom are essentially ignored, we can call this setup a quenched minisuperspace approximation. We will use the name quenched in the rest of the paper. What has been found is that the distribution of eigenvalues of the commuting matrices (in this approximation) has a geometry of its own [5, 18]. The", + "recall": 0.9840637450199203, + "true_md": "3\n\nquantum mechanics [15, 16], but they suffer from similar limits on taking N large.\n\nThe main problem at hand is that in order to compare gravity and the field theory, in the regime where gravity is described by a semiclassical expansion, we are required to solve a field theory at strong coupling. This is extremely hard in general and this is why numerical methods might offer a good insight into the strong coupling behavior of these field theories. However, as is well known, the gravitational limit also requires solving the field theory at large N . Current lattice methods can in principle solve four dimensional theories for moderate values oF N ∼ 10, but taking N large is too difficult. Remember that in the AdS/CFT correspondence the radius of the five sphere and also of the AdS sphere in Planck units scales like N 1 / $^{4}$. Thus, in order to have a resolution of the sphere which is many times the Planck length, let us say by an order of magnitude, we require four orders of magnitude on N . Such numbers are beyond what can be done with a full simulation. Clearly, some approximation to the full field theory problem is required that reduces effectively the number of degrees of freedom to something manageable. Only at this stage simulations become a viable option to analyze the problem.\n\nProgress in this direction was made in [5]. It was argued there that at strong coupling, when the N = 4 SYM field theory is compactified on a three-sphere, the configurations of commuting (constant) scalar matrices dominate the infrared dynamics. Toy models that exhibit this property were exhibited in [17], giving additional indirect evidence for this proposal in the case of N = 4 SYM. The nature of the argument that leads to this conclusion requires various steps. First one\n\nN The nature of the argument that leads to this conclusion requires various steps. First one argues that such classes of configurations are required for describing some supersymmetric states, so the truncation to such variables might be better behaved than naively expected. Afterwards one argues that the quartic scalar potential of the theory should be minimized.\n\nThis second step is accomplished by systems of commuting matrices. The dominance of this configurations dynamically quenches the other off-diagonal degrees of freedom, meaning that they become heavy and their contributions can be ignored to some degree.\n\nThe end product is a model describing only a handful of the degrees of freedom of the full N = 4 SYM theory, and since the other degrees of freedom are essentially ignored, we can call this setup a quenched minisuperspace approximation. We will use the name quenched in the rest of the paper. What has been found is that the distribution of eigenvalues of the commuting matrices (in this approximation) has a geometry of its own [5, 18]. The" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6421469850004798, + "doc_id": "a87d476982c39dcb36f3950306d463d51e7aea227fbedbbe9b5dc5eb4a09759d", + "edit_distance": 0.45930232558139533, + "f1_score": 0.9300411522633745, + "meteor": 0.7353548507742934, + "precision": 0.9416666666666667, + "pred_md": "FIG. 6: (Color online) Ratio of the effective temperature, T eff , defined in Eq. (12) to the temperature of the gas in the vicinity of the piston, T L , as a function of the mass ratio for the same systems as in Fig. 5.\n\nFIG. 6: (Color online) Ratio of the effective temperature, T eff , defined in Eq. (12) to the temperature of the gas in the vicinity of the piston, T L , as a function of the mass ratio for the same systems as in Fig. 5.\n\ndifference is observed in the behavior of the two temperature ratios for a given constant coefficient of restitution α . While T eff /T L exhibits a strong dependence on M/m and does not seem to tend to a well defined limit as it increases, the dependence of T eff /T P on M/m is very weak, being only appreciable for the least inelastic cases and when the mass ratio is small. Thus it is concluded that for large enough mass ratio M/m , the effective temperature is proportional to the temperature parameter of the piston with a coefficient of proportionality that is independent of the mass of the piston, i.e.\n\n\n\nwhere a possible dependence of the coefficient on α P has been included.\n\nTo identify the dependence of the coefficient b on α , in Fig. 8 the plateau values of T eff /T P , reached upon increasing the value of the mass ratio M/m , are plotted versus 1 -α 2 . The points are very well fitted by a straight line, indicating that T eff /T P grows\n\n15", + "recall": 0.9186991869918699, + "true_md": "FIG. 6: (Color online) Ratio of the effective temperature, T$_{eff}$ , defined in Eq. (12) to the tem- perature of the gas in the vicinity of the piston, T$_{L}$ , as a function of the mass ratio for the same systems as in Fig. 5.\n\ndifference is observed in the behavior of the two temperature ratios for a given constant coefficient of restitution α . While T$_{eff}$/T$_{L}$ exhibits a strong dependence on M/m and does not seem to tend to a well defined limit as it increases, the dependence of T$_{eff}$/T$_{P}$ on M/m is very weak, being only appreciable for the least inelastic cases and when the mass ratio is small. Thus it is concluded that for large enough mass ratio M/m , the effective temperature is proportional to the temperature parameter of the piston with a coefficient of proportionality that is independent of the mass of the piston, i.e.\n\nwhere a possible dependence of the coefficient on α$_{P}$ has been included.\n\nTo identify the dependence of the coefficient b on α , in Fig. 8 the plateau values of T$_{eff}$/T$_{P}$ , reached upon increasing the value of the mass ratio M/m , are plotted versus 1 − α $^{2}$. The points are very well fitted by a straight line, indicating that T$_{eff}$/T$_{P}$ grows\n\n$$T$_{eff}$ = b ( α, α$_{P}$ ) T$_{P}$, (13)$$\n\n15" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.39548007979427513, + "doc_id": "c69bc84d631b54fd3ab34cbe16a3c374ea445f7c31ac1aaf77eae36708b4797f", + "edit_distance": 0.5, + "f1_score": 0.9629629629629631, + "meteor": 0.9089252584150543, + "precision": 0.9285714285714286, + "pred_md": "/s73/s109/s32\n\nFIG. 5: Imaginary part of the wave function obtained numerically.\n\nFIG. 5: Imaginary part of the wave function obtained numerically.\n\n19", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "FIG. 5: Imaginary part of the wave function obtained numerically.\n\n19" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9436078483006255, + "doc_id": "863e2a792f70d55b1d5205789d8aea9d4c51f34c74c30c794239f6a1523ac2d2", + "edit_distance": 0.04017857142857143, + "f1_score": 0.9672727272727272, + "meteor": 0.9647039871081984, + "precision": 0.9708029197080292, + "pred_md": "arXiv:1001.2580v1 [physics.comp-ph] 14 Jan 2010\n\n## Solution of the Quantum Initial Value Problem with Transparent Boundary Conditions\n\nA. Puga and B.N.Miller\n\nDepartment of Physics and Astronomy, Texas\n\nChristian University, Fort Worth, Texas 76129,USA\n\n## Abstract\n\nPhysicists have used billiards to understand and explore both classical and quantum chaos. Recently, in 2001, a group at the University of Texas introduced an experimental set up for modeling the wedge billiard geometry called optical billiard in two dimensions. It is worth mentioning that this experiment is more closely related with classical rather than quantum chaos. The motivation for the present work was born from the idea of laying the foundations of a quantum treatment for optical billiards, named 'The Escape Problem', by presenting the concept of a Transparent Boundary Condition. We consider a 'gas of particles' initially confined to a one dimensional box of length L , that are permitted to escape. We find the solution of a Quantum Initial Value Problem using a numerical method developed and entirely checked with an exact, analytic method. The numerical method introduces a novel way to solve a Diffusion Type Equation by implementing Discrete Transparent Boundary Conditions recently developed by mathematicians.\n\nPACS numbers:\n\n1", + "recall": 0.9637681159420289, + "true_md": "arXiv:1001.2580v1 [physics.comp-ph] 14 Jan 2010\n\n# Solution of the Quantum Initial Value Problem with Transparent Boundary Conditions\n\nA. Puga and B.N.Miller\n\nDepartment of Physics and Astronomy, Texas Christian University, Fort Worth, Texas 76129,USA\n\n## Abstract\n\nPhysicists have used billiards to understand and explore both classical and quantum chaos. Re- cently, in 2001, a group at the University of Texas introduced an experimental set up for modeling the wedge billiard geometry called optical billiard in two dimensions. It is worth mentioning that this experiment is more closely related with classical rather than quantum chaos. The motivation for the present work was born from the idea of laying the foundations of a quantum treatment for optical billiards, named “The Escape Problem”, by presenting the concept of a Transparent Boundary Condition. We consider a “gas of particles” initially confined to a one dimensional box of length L , that are permitted to escape. We find the solution of a Quantum Initial Value Problem using a numerical method developed and entirely checked with an exact, analytic method. The numerical method introduces a novel way to solve a Diffusion Type Equation by implementing Discrete Transparent Boundary Conditions recently developed by mathematicians.\n\nPACS numbers:\n\n1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.09334734005084866, + "doc_id": "1a40fc845186453e312c8181035b19493025b739fb8e39bac4f7387f1dd92366", + "edit_distance": 0.8002421307506054, + "f1_score": 0.8551724137931034, + "meteor": 0.271738244158606, + "precision": 0.9323308270676691, + "pred_md": "with\n\n20\n\n\n\nNote that /epsilon1 1 2 3 , , are all proportional to X which contains a double suppression factor. This feature was the main ingredient for the compatibility of the D-BESS model with the EW precision tests. In the five dimensional formulation of this model the ratio ( g/g ¯ ) 5 2 originates from the presence of brane localized kinetic terms.\n\nThe /epsilon1 parameters can be tested against the experimental data. To do this, we need to express the model parameters in terms of the physical quantities. Proceeding again as in [60] we get the expressions the standard input parameters α , G F and m Z in terms of the model parameters. For convenience we rewrite the results:\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nwith\n\n\n\nIn section VI, we will study the constraints on the model parameter space by EW precision parameter for two choices of the warp factor, b y ( ) ≡ 1 (flat extra dimension) and b y ( ) = e -2 ky (a slice of AdS ). 5 To this aim we need to invert (73), (74) and (75),\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nthen, using definitions (65), obtain also ˜ and ˜ . g g '", + "recall": 0.7898089171974523, + "true_md": "20\n\nwith\n\nNote that ϵ$_{1}$$\\_{,}$$_{2}$$\\_{,}$$_{3}$ are all proportional to X which contains a double suppression factor. This feature was the main ingredient for the compatibility of the D-BESS model with the EW precision tests. In the five dimensional formulation of this model the ratio ( g/ ¯ g$_{5}$ ) 2 originates from the presence of brane localized kinetic terms.\n\nThe ϵ parameters can be tested against the experimental data. To do this, we need to express the model parameters in terms of the physical quantities. Proceeding again as in [60] we get the expressions the standard input parameters α , G$_{F}$ and m$_{Z}$ in terms of the model parameters. For convenience we rewrite the results:\n\nIn section VI, we will study the constraints on the model parameter space by EW precision parameter for two choices of the warp factor, b ( y ) ≡ 1 (flat extra dimension) and b ( y ) = e − 2 ky (a slice of AdS$_{5}$). To this aim we need to invert (73), (74) and (75),\n\nthen, using definitions (65), obtain also ˜ g and ˜ g ′ .\n\n$$X = m 2 Z ¯ M 2 ( g ¯ g$_{5}$ ) 2 . (72)$$\n\nwith\n\n$$α ≡ e 2 4 π = g $^{2}$s2 θ 4 π , (73) m 2 Z = ˜ M 2 Z ( 1 − z$_{Z}$ ˜ M 2 Z ¯ M 2 ) , m 2 W = ˜ M 2 W ( 1 − z$_{W}$ ˜ M 2 W ¯ M 2 ) , (74) G$_{F}$ √$_{2}$ ≡ e 2 8 s 2 θ $_{0}$c 2 θ $_{0}$m 2 Z , s 2 θ $_{0}$c 2 θ 0 = s 2 $_{θ}$c 2 θ ( 1 + z$_{Z}$ m 2 Z ¯ M 2 ) , (75)$$\n\n$$z$_{Z}$ = g $^{2}$( c 4 θ + s 4 $_{θ}$) c 2 θ ¯ g 2 5 , ˜ M 2 Z = v $^{2}$( g 2 + g ′ $^{2}$) 4 (76) z$_{W}$ = g 2 ¯ g 2 5 , ˜ M 2 W = v $^{2}$g2 4 (77)$$\n\n$$g 2 = 4 πα s 2 θ 0 ( 1 + 4 πα ( c 4 θ 0 + s 4 θ $_{0}$) ¯ g 2 $_{5}$s 2 θ $_{0}$c$_{2}$$_{θ}$$_{0}$ m 2 Z ¯ M 2 ) , (78) g $^{′}$2 = 4 πα c 2 θ 0 1 − 4 πα ( c 4 θ 0 + s 4 θ $_{0}$) ¯ g 2 $_{5}$c 2 θ $_{0}$c$_{2}$$_{θ}$$_{0}$ m 2 Z ¯ M 2 , (79) v 2 = 4 g 2 + g ′ $_{2}$m 2 Z ( 1 + 4 πα ( c 4 θ 0 + s 4 θ $_{0}$) ¯ g 2 $_{5}$s 2 θ $_{0}$c 2 θ 0 m 2 Z ¯ M 2 ) = 1 √$_{2}$$_{G}$$_{F}$ ; (80)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9423595174592392, + "doc_id": "74bfe9662d59399fb67e04fe3a5aa97bb0d71ca6231152e2414a5264f0e0cf5b", + "edit_distance": 0.0398406374501992, + "f1_score": 0.9747899159663864, + "meteor": 0.9706203310149784, + "precision": 0.9914529914529915, + "pred_md": "## I. INTRODUCTION\n\nQuantum field theories defined in a noncommutative space have been under intense scrutiny in the last years [1, 2]. The outcome of these investigations have unveiled various unusual and intriguing aspects which are consequences of their inherent nonlocality. Among these properties, the most peculiar one is the transmutation of part of the ultraviolet divergences into infrared ones, a property that has been called infrared/ultraviolet mixing [3]. From a technical viewpoint, the mixing is due to the separation of the contributions of Feynman diagrams in parts nonplanar, which are ultraviolet finite but may present an infrared singularity, and planar, which may have only ultraviolet divergences. Aside the potentially dangerous character of the infrared divergences, the mere separation of the amplitudes in planar and nonplanar parts may obstruct the ultraviolet renormalization of noncommutative theories.\n\nIn the commutative setting, it is well known that Slavnov-Taylor (ST) identities [4] play a fundamental role in the renormalization of non-Abelian gauge theories [4, 5]. It is therefore essential to verify to what extension these identities are affected by the noncommutativity of the underlying space. In this work we will present a detailed analysis of the one-loop ST identities in noncommutative QED . 4 As we will explicitly verify, there are no anomalies and the usual renormalization procedure is not basically modified.\n\nWe would like to point out some relevant studies on the subject. For the pure noncommutative U N ( ) Yang-Mills model, the compatibility of dimensional renormalization with the ST identities have been verified in [6] up to one-loop order. Reference [7] contains an explicit on-shell verification of the one-loop ST identity for the trilinear fermion-photon vertex. In the tree approximation, the identities have been verified in various scattering processes in [8]. They were also used in [9] to investigate the dependence of the two point function of the gauge field on the gauge parameter. To prove the absence of radiative corrections to the Chern-Simons coefficient, the axial gauge identities were used and explicitly verified in a one-loop calculation [10].\n\nThis work is organized as follows. In section II we introduce our basic notation and the Feynman rules for noncommutative QED . 4 Section III provides a formal derivation for the ST identities. In particular, using these relations the longitudinal part of photon propagator is fixed and the identities for the vectorial fermion-photon and triple photon vertex functions are presented. In Section IV these identities are subjected to a detailed analysis taking in consideration the counterterms needed to control the ultraviolet behavior. Section V contains some final comments and a discussion of our results.\n\n2", + "recall": 0.9586776859504132, + "true_md": "## I. INTRODUCTION\n\nQuantum field theories defined in a noncommutative space have been under intense scrutiny in the last years [1, 2]. The outcome of these investigations have unveiled various unusual and intriguing aspects which are consequences of their inherent nonlocality. Among these properties, the most peculiar one is the transmutation of part of the ultraviolet divergences into infrared ones, a property that has been called infrared/ultraviolet mixing [3]. From a technical viewpoint, the mixing is due to the separation of the contributions of Feynman diagrams in parts nonplanar, which are ultraviolet finite but may present an infrared singularity, and planar, which may have only ultraviolet divergences. Aside the potentially dangerous character of the infrared divergences, the mere separation of the amplitudes in planar and nonplanar parts may obstruct the ultraviolet renormalization of noncommutative theories.\n\nIn the commutative setting, it is well known that Slavnov-Taylor (ST) identities [4] play a fun- damental role in the renormalization of non-Abelian gauge theories [4, 5]. It is therefore essential to verify to what extension these identities are affected by the noncommutativity of the underlying space. In this work we will present a detailed analysis of the one-loop ST identities in noncommu- tative QED$_{4}$. As we will explicitly verify, there are no anomalies and the usual renormalization procedure is not basically modified.\n\nWe would like to point out some relevant studies on the subject. For the pure noncommutative U ( N ) Yang-Mills model, the compatibility of dimensional renormalization with the ST identities have been verified in [6] up to one-loop order. Reference [7] contains an explicit on-shell verification of the one-loop ST identity for the trilinear fermion-photon vertex. In the tree approximation, the identities have been verified in various scattering processes in [8]. They were also used in [9] to investigate the dependence of the two point function of the gauge field on the gauge parameter. To prove the absence of radiative corrections to the Chern-Simons coefficient, the axial gauge identities were used and explicitly verified in a one-loop calculation [10].\n\nThis work is organized as follows. In section II we introduce our basic notation and the Feynman rules for noncommutative QED$_{4}$. Section III provides a formal derivation for the ST identities. In particular, using these relations the longitudinal part of photon propagator is fixed and the identities for the vectorial fermion-photon and triple photon vertex functions are presented. In Section IV these identities are subjected to a detailed analysis taking in consideration the coun- terterms needed to control the ultraviolet behavior. Section V contains some final comments and a discussion of our results.\n\n2" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7839417882256043, + "doc_id": "febec129e33ce1087e7b975093983b87015d290b716047afe6f550906005eea2", + "edit_distance": 0.1146384479717813, + "f1_score": 0.8558139534883721, + "meteor": 0.8876532988155161, + "precision": 0.8720379146919431, + "pred_md": "- [110] L. Rockford, Y. Liu, P. Mansky, T. P. Russell, M. Yoon, and S. G. J. Mochrie, 'Polymers on nanoperiodic, heterogeneous surfaces,' Phys. Rev. Lett. 82 , 2602-2605 (1999).\n- [111] A. Sehgal, V. Ferreiro, J. F. Douglas, E. J. Amis, and A. Karim, 'Pattern-directed dewetting of ultrathin polymer films,' Langmuir 18 , 7041-7048 (2002).\n- [112] M. Geoghegan and G. Krausch, 'Wetting at polymer surfaces and interfaces,' Prog. Polym. Sci. 28 , 261-302 (2003).\n- [113] P. Lenz and R. Lipowsky, 'Morphological transitions of wetting layers on structured surfaces,' Phys. Rev. Lett. 80 , 1920-1923 (1998).\n- [114] C. Bauer, S. Dietrich, and A. O. Parry, 'Morphological phase transitions of thin fluid films on chemically structured substrates,' Europhys. Lett. 47 , 474-480 (1999).\n- [115] R. Konnur, K. Kargupta, and A. Sharma, 'Instability and morphology of thin liquid films on chemically heterogeneous substrates,' Phys. Rev. Lett. 84 , 931-934 (2000).\n- [116] M. Brinkmann and R. Lipowsky, 'Wetting morphologies on substrates with striped surface domains,' J. Appl. Phys. 92 , 4296-4306 (2002).\n- [117] L. Brusch, H. Kuhne, U. Thiele, and M. Bar, 'Dewetting of thin films on heterogeneous substrates: Pinning vs. coarsening,' Phys. Rev. E 66 , 011602 (2002).\n- [118] U. Thiele, L. Brusch, M. Bestehorn, and M. Bar, 'Modelling thin-film dewetting on structured substrates and templates: Bifurcation analysis and numerical simulations,' Eur. Phys. J. E 11 , 255-271 (2003).\n- [119] U. Thiele, 'Open questions and promising new fields in dewetting,' Eur. Phys. J. E 12 , 409-416 (2003).\n- [120] D. M. Anderson, G. B. McFadden, and A. A. Wheeler, 'Diffuse-interface methods in fluid mechanics,' Ann. Rev. Fluid Mech. 30 , 139-165 (1998).\n- [121] U. Thiele, S. Madruga, and L. Frastia, 'Decomposition driven interface evolution for layers of binary mixtures: I. Model derivation and stratified base states,' Phys. Fluids 19 , 122106 (2007).\n- [122] O. A. Frolovskaya, A. A. Nepomnyashchy, A. Oron, and A. A. Golovin, 'Stability of a two-layer binary-fluid system with a diffuse interface,' Phys. Fluids 20 , 112105 (2008).\n- [123] S. Madruga and U. Thiele, 'Decomposition driven interface evolution for layers of binary mixtures: II. Influence of convective transport on linear stability,' Phys. Fluids 21 , 062104 (2009).\n\n33", + "recall": 0.8401826484018264, + "true_md": "- [110] L. Rockford, Y. Liu, P. Mansky, T. P. Russell, M. Yoon, and S. G. J. Mochrie, “Polymers on nanope- riodic, heterogeneous surfaces,” Phys. Rev. Lett. 82 , 2602–2605 (1999).\n\n- [111] A. Sehgal, V. Ferreiro, J. F. Douglas, E. J. Amis, and A. Karim, “Pattern-directed dewetting of ultrathin polymer films,” Langmuir 18 , 7041–7048 (2002).\n\n- [112] M. Geoghegan and G. Krausch, “Wetting at polymer surfaces and interfaces,” Prog. Polym. Sci. 28 , 261–302 (2003).\n\n- [113] P. Lenz and R. Lipowsky, “Morphological transitions of wetting layers on structured surfaces,” Phys. Rev. Lett. 80 , 1920–1923 (1998).\n\n- [114] C. Bauer, S. Dietrich, and A. O. Parry, “Morphological phase transitions of thin fluid films on chem- ically structured substrates,” Europhys. Lett. 47 , 474–480 (1999).\n\n- [115] R. Konnur, K. Kargupta, and A. Sharma, “Instability and morphology of thin liquid films on chemi- cally heterogeneous substrates,” Phys. Rev. Lett. 84 , 931–934 (2000).\n\n- [116] M. Brinkmann and R. Lipowsky, “Wetting morphologies on substrates with striped surface domains,” J. Appl. Phys. 92 , 4296–4306 (2002).\n\n- [117] L. Brusch, H. K¨uhne, U. Thiele, and M. B¨ar, “Dewetting of thin films on heterogeneous substrates: Pinning vs. coarsening,” Phys. Rev. E 66 , 011602 (2002).\n\n- [118] U. Thiele, L. Brusch, M. Bestehorn, and M. B¨ar, “Modelling thin-film dewetting on structured sub- strates and templates: Bifurcation analysis and numerical simulations,” Eur. Phys. J. E 11 , 255–271 (2003).\n\n- [119] U. Thiele, “Open questions and promising new fields in dewetting,” Eur. Phys. J. E 12 , 409–416 (2003).\n\n- [120] D. M. Anderson, G. B. McFadden, and A. A. Wheeler, “Diffuse-interface methods in fluid mechan- ics,” Ann. Rev. Fluid Mech. 30 , 139–165 (1998).\n\n- [121] U. Thiele, S. Madruga, and L. Frastia, “Decomposition driven interface evolution for layers of binary mixtures: I. Model derivation and stratified base states,” Phys. Fluids 19 , 122106 (2007).\n\n- [122] O. A. Frolovskaya, A. A. Nepomnyashchy, A. Oron, and A. A. Golovin, “Stability of a two-layer binary-fluid system with a diffuse interface,” Phys. Fluids 20 , 112105 (2008).\n\n- [123] S. Madruga and U. Thiele, “Decomposition driven interface evolution for layers of binary mixtures: II. Influence of convective transport on linear stability,” Phys. Fluids 21 , 062104 (2009).\n\n33" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.634745446791841, + "doc_id": "32a0ba775569131ee3827c648eacde84ce80267affaa94216cba710107b93d9e", + "edit_distance": 0.25552825552825553, + "f1_score": 0.9796672828096119, + "meteor": 0.7864724189946212, + "precision": 0.9851301115241635, + "pred_md": "spectroscopy (ARPES) scans using a double Mott detector setup [21], which systematically measures all three components of the spin of a photoelectron as a function of its energy and momentum throughout the Brillouin zone (Supplementary Information). Although the surface electrons of both Bi Se 2 3 and Bi Te 2 3 exhibit a finite density of states near E F (Figs 1(a)-(d)), there is an additional contribution to the density of states around momentum Γ ¯ from the spin-degenerate bulk conduction band in Bi Se 2 3 [15]. Therefore, the helical nature of the surface electrons is most clearly resolved in Bi 2 Te . We analyzed the spin-polarization 3 of photoelectrons emitted at a binding energy E B = -20 meV along the k x ( ‖ ¯ -M) cut in Γ ¯ Bi Te 2 3 (inset Fig. 1(e)). Because the surface state dispersion of Bi X 2 3 exhibits a pronounced time dependence after cleavage (SI) related to semiconductor band bending effects [17], data collection times were only long enough to ensure a level of statistics sufficient to measure the spin-polarized character of the surface states.\n\nFigures 1(e) and (f) show the measured spin polarization spectra P i of the i = x , y and z (out-of-plane) components along the Γ- ¯ ¯ M direction. In the x and z directions, no clear signal can be discerned within the margins of statistical error. In the y direction on the other hand, clear polarization signals of equal magnitude and opposite sign are observed for surface electrons of opposite momentum, evidence that the spin and momentum directions are one-to-one locked. This is most clearly seen in the spin-resolved spectra ( I ↑ ↓ , y ; Fig. 1(g)), which are calculated from P y according to I y = I tot (1+ P y )/2 and I y = I tot (1P y )/2, where I tot is the spin-averaged intensity. To extract the spin polarization vectors of the forward (+ k x ) and backward (k x ) moving electrons, we performed a standard numerical fit (SI) [21]. The fit results yield 100( ± 15)% polarized (see Fig. 1(h)) spins that point along the ( k × z ) direction, which is consistent with its spin-orbit coupling origin [14, 21]. Our combined observations of a linear dispersion relation and a one-to-one locking of momentum and spin directions allow us to conclude that the surface electrons of Bi X 2 3 (X = Se, Te) are helical Dirac fermions of Z 2 topological order origin (Fig. 1).\n\nTo experimentally access these helical Dirac fermions for research device applications, the electronic structure must be in the topological transport regime where there is zero charge fermion density [7-9]. This regime occurs when E F lies in between the bulk valence band maximum (VBM) and the bulk conduction band minimum (CBM), and exactly at the surface Dirac point, which should in turn lie at a Kramers' time-reversal invariant momentum [3, 4]. This is clearly not the case in either Bi Te , 2 3 Bi (Sn)Te , 2 3 Bi Se 2 3 or\n\n4", + "recall": 0.9742647058823529, + "true_md": "spectroscopy (ARPES) scans using a double Mott detector setup [21], which systematically measures all three components of the spin of a photoelectron as a function of its energy and momentum throughout the Brillouin zone (Supplementary Information). Although the surface electrons of both Bi$_{2}$Se$_{3}$ and Bi$_{2}$Te$_{3}$ exhibit a finite density of states near E$_{F}$ (Figs 1(a)-(d)), there is an additional contribution to the density of states around momentum ¯ Γ from the spin-degenerate bulk conduction band in Bi$_{2}$Se$_{3}$ [15]. Therefore, the helical nature of the surface electrons is most clearly resolved in Bi$_{2}$Te$_{3}$. We analyzed the spin-polarization of photoelectrons emitted at a binding energy E$_{B}$ = -20 meV along the k$_{x}$ ( ‖ ¯ Γ- ¯ M) cut in Bi$_{2}$Te$_{3}$ (inset Fig. 1(e)). Because the surface state dispersion of Bi$_{2}$X$_{3}$ exhibits a pronounced time dependence after cleavage (SI) related to semiconductor band bending effects [17], data collection times were only long enough to ensure a level of statistics sufficient to measure the spin-polarized character of the surface states.\n\nFigures 1(e) and (f) show the measured spin polarization spectra P$_{i}$ of the i = x , y and z (out-of-plane) components along the ¯ Γ- ¯ M direction. In the x and z directions, no clear signal can be discerned within the margins of statistical error. In the y direction on the other hand, clear polarization signals of equal magnitude and opposite sign are observed for surface electrons of opposite momentum, evidence that the spin and momentum directions are one-to-one locked. This is most clearly seen in the spin-resolved spectra ( I ↑ , ↓ y ; Fig. 1(g)), which are calculated from P$_{y}$ according to I$_{y}$ = I$_{tot}$ (1+ P$_{y}$ )/2 and I$_{y}$ = I$_{tot}$ (1- P$_{y}$ )/2, where I$_{tot}$ is the spin-averaged intensity. To extract the spin polarization vectors of the forward (+ k$_{x}$ ) and backward (- k$_{x}$ ) moving electrons, we performed a standard numerical fit (SI) [21]. The fit results yield 100( ± 15)% polarized (see Fig. 1(h)) spins that point along the ( k × z ) direction, which is consistent with its spin-orbit coupling origin [14, 21]. Our combined observations of a linear dispersion relation and a one-to-one locking of momentum and spin directions allow us to conclude that the surface electrons of Bi$_{2}$X$_{3}$ (X = Se, Te) are helical Dirac fermions of Z$_{2}$ topological order origin (Fig. 1).\n\nTo experimentally access these helical Dirac fermions for research device applications, the electronic structure must be in the topological transport regime where there is zero charge fermion density [7–9]. This regime occurs when E$_{F}$ lies in between the bulk valence band maximum (VBM) and the bulk conduction band minimum (CBM), and exactly at the surface Dirac point, which should in turn lie at a Kramers’ time-reversal invariant momentum [3, 4]. This is clearly not the case in either Bi$_{2}$Te$_{3}$, Bi$_{2}$(Sn)Te$_{3}$, Bi$_{2}$Se$_{3}$ or\n\n4" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7773840480404396, + "doc_id": "3573df9b80d03be62921d9b85347115f17c0c98179f10bb23bcf3ebe153b3294", + "edit_distance": 0.24468085106382978, + "f1_score": 0.9679715302491102, + "meteor": 0.929806888132572, + "precision": 0.9855072463768116, + "pred_md": "FIG. 8: Ratio T eff /T P for large values of M/m as a function of 1 -α 2 for the same systems as in Fig. 5. The symbols are simulation results and the dashed line a linear fit of them.\n\nFIG. 8: Ratio T eff /T P for large values of M/m as a function of 1 -α 2 for the same systems as in Fig. 5. The symbols are simulation results and the dashed line a linear fit of them.\n\nthe figure by the solid straight line. Nevertheless, it is important to realize that the interval of values of M/m for which the above dependence is identified is rather narrow, just one order of magnitude, so that its range of validity can be limited.\n\n## IV. DISCUSSION AND SUMMARY\n\nThe aim here has been to investigate the volume fluctuations of a vibrated low density gas of inelastic hard disks in presence of gravity, and confined by a movable piston on the top. The study has been restricted to the parameter region in which the system reaches a steady state with gradients only in the direction of the external gravitational field, i.e. perpendicular to the movable piston. In practice, this has limited the values of the coefficient of normal restitution of the gas particles to the interval 0 85 . ≤ α < 1. Due to the coupling between inelasticity and hydrodynamic gradients, which is peculiar of steady states of granular systems, the above limitation also implies restriction to small gradients.\n\n17", + "recall": 0.951048951048951, + "true_md": "FIG. 8: Ratio T$_{eff}$/T$_{P}$ for large values of M/m as a function of 1 − α 2 for the same systems as in Fig. 5. The symbols are simulation results and the dashed line a linear fit of them.\n\nthe figure by the solid straight line. Nevertheless, it is important to realize that the interval of values of M/m for which the above dependence is identified is rather narrow, just one order of magnitude, so that its range of validity can be limited.\n\nThe aim here has been to investigate the volume fluctuations of a vibrated low density gas of inelastic hard disks in presence of gravity, and confined by a movable piston on the top. The study has been restricted to the parameter region in which the system reaches a steady state with gradients only in the direction of the external gravitational field, i.e. perpendicular to the movable piston. In practice, this has limited the values of the co- efficient of normal restitution of the gas particles to the interval 0 . 85 ≤ α < 1. Due to the coupling between inelasticity and hydrodynamic gradients, which is peculiar of steady states of granular systems, the above limitation also implies restriction to small gradients.\n\n## IV. DISCUSSION AND SUMMARY\n\n17" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6564578412781641, + "doc_id": "9cdfa25b1b8d0143320be9adec3b30fb12c6038ee2e463c266c44dce867581d2", + "edit_distance": 0.43073047858942065, + "f1_score": 0.932515337423313, + "meteor": 0.7303291865022257, + "precision": 0.95, + "pred_md": "We also have the the inequality given by\n\n\n\nThis is obvious, as the r k +1 is dominated more strongly by the particles near the inner edge than r k . It can also be proved mathematically using Hlders inequality or Jensen's o inequality.\n\nFrom here, it follows that\n\n\n\nAnd this inequality persists when we take averages. Hence the claim. Also, in the limit k → ∞ , both definitions would converge to the same value (before averaging the limit is exclusively dominated by the innermost particle), but the one based on the ratios converges faster (what we called R 0 ). Hence the definition R 0 is the most numerically economic calculation of the radius of the configuration, as promised earlier. For completeness, we show now the plot in figure 5 with the variance of the data set included.\n\nFIG. 6: Plot of R 0 k and r ( r ) k with the variance of sample included: this would indicate the error of a single measurement on the quantum system. It essentially accounts for the quantum fluctuations. This is the same data set used to generate figure 5.\n\nFIG. 6: Plot of R 0 k and r ( r ) k with the variance of sample included: this would indicate the error of a single measurement on the quantum system. It essentially accounts for the quantum fluctuations. This is the same data set used to generate figure 5.\n\nAs should be recognized from the analysis above, the choice of variable to measure a geometric property in a model of emergent geometry with quantum fluctuations can receive very large corrections due to the fluctuations. This depends on how we average over configurations. This is determined in essence by the observable that one chooses to probe the system with. Although this is not surprising, the fact that fluctuations can be rather large\n\n22", + "recall": 0.9156626506024096, + "true_md": "22\n\nWe also have the the inequality given by\n\nThis is obvious, as the r$_{k}$$\\_{+1}$ is dominated more strongly by the particles near the inner edge than r$\\_{k}$ . It can also be proved mathematically using H¨ olders inequality or Jensen’s inequality.\n\nFrom here, it follows that\n\nAnd this inequality persists when we take averages. Hence the claim. Also, in the limit k → ∞ , both definitions would converge to the same value (before averaging the limit is exclusively dominated by the innermost particle), but the one based on the ratios converges faster (what we called R$_{0}$ ). Hence the definition R$_{0}$ is the most numerically economic calculation of the radius of the configuration, as promised earlier. For completeness, we show now the plot in figure 5 with the variance of the data set included.\n\nFIG. 6: Plot of R$_{0}$$\\_{k}$ and r ( r ) k with the variance of sample included: this would indicate the error of a single measurement on the quantum system. It essentially accounts for the quantum fluctuations. This is the same data set used to generate figure 5.\n\nAs should be recognized from the analysis above, the choice of variable to measure a geometric property in a model of emergent geometry with quantum fluctuations can receive very large corrections due to the fluctuations. This depends on how we average over con- figurations. This is determined in essence by the observable that one chooses to probe the system with. Although this is not surprising, the fact that fluctuations can be rather large\n\n$$√ f$_{k}$ f$_{k}$$_{+1}$ < r$_{k}$$_{+1}$ (23)$$\n\n$$r$_{k}$$_{+1}$ < r$_{k}$ (22)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0015069381980039906, + "doc_id": "dfa7bc1010c63e1760cc2e5f7029c563831edc8a768b33e75c6002aea6936bf6", + "edit_distance": 0.928928928928929, + "f1_score": 0.6601941747572815, + "meteor": 0.11970918318880701, + "precision": 0.9577464788732394, + "pred_md": "\n\n\n\nwhose planar part logarithimically diverges. In fact its pole part (PP) is given by\n\n\n\nso that, in the minimal dimensional regularization scheme,\n\n\n\nwhich agrees with the result of previous calculation [12]. Contracting q µ in the expression (81), we get\n\n\n\nwhich may be further simplified using\n\n\n\nto yield\n\n\n\nwhere Σ is similar to Σ np of Eq. (80), but without the phase factor.\n\nFor the last term in left-hand side of Eq. (76), we get\n\n\n\n13", + "recall": 0.5037037037037037, + "true_md": "$$2 . p q l GLYPH p-l p+q-l p+q GLYPH GLYPH GLYPH GLYPH = − ie Λ µ $_{b}$( p, p + q ) e ip ∧ q (81) = ∫ d $^{4}$l (2 π ) 4 − ig$_{αβ}$ ( p + q − l ) 2 − ig$_{λρ}$ ( p − l ) $_{2}$( − ieγ $^{α}$) iS$_{0}$ ( l )( − ieγ $^{λ}$) × (2 e ) γ $^{µβρ}$( q, − p − q + l, p − l ) 1 2 i ( 1 − e 2 il ∧ $^{q}$e − 2 ip ∧ q ) e ip ∧ $^{q}$, whose planar part logarithimically diverges. In fact its pole part (PP) is given by$$\n\n$$PP[ − ie Λ µ $_{b}$( p, p + q )] = 3 16 π 2 1 ϵ γ µ (82)$$\n\n$$Z$_{1}$$_{F}$ = 1 − 3 16 π 2 1 ϵ , (83)$$\n\n$$q$_{µ}$ Λ µ $_{b}$( p, p + q ) = ∫ d $^{4}$l (2 π ) 4 − ig$_{αβ}$ ( p + q − l ) 2 − ig$_{λρ}$ ( p − l ) $_{2}$( − ieγ $^{α}$) iS$_{0}$ ( l )( − ieγ $^{λ}$) ( 1 − e 2 il ∧ $^{q}$e − 2 ip ∧ q ) × { ( p + q − l ) $^{ρ}$qβ + ( p − l ) $^{β}$qρ − [( p + q − l ) · q + ( p − l ) · q ] g βρ } , (84) which may be further simplified using$$\n\n$$( p + q − l ) $^{ρ}$qβ + ( p − l ) $^{β}$qρ = ( p + q − l ) $^{ρ}$( p + q − l ) β − ( p − l ) $^{ρ}$( p − l ) $^{β}$, and ( p + q − l ) · q + ( p − l ) · q = ( p + q − l ) 2 − ( p − l ) $^{2}$, (85)$$\n\n$$q$_{µ}$ Λ µ $_{b}$( p, p + q ) = Σ( p ) − Σ( p + q ) − Σ$_{np}$( p ) + Σ$_{np}$( p + q ) (86) + ∫ d $^{4}$l (2 π ) 4 i ( p + q − l ) 2 i ( p − l ) $_{2}$( ie )( / p + / q − / l ) iS$_{0}$ ( l )( ie )( / p + / q − / l ) ( 1 − e 2 il ∧ $^{q}$e − 2 ip ∧ q ) − d $^{4}$l (2 π ) 4 i ( p + q − l ) 2 i ( p − l ) $_{2}$( ie )( / p − / l ) iS$_{0}$ ( l )( ie )( / p − / l ) ( 1 − e 2 il ∧ $^{q}$e − 2 ip ∧ q ) , where Σ is similar to Σ$_{np}$ of Eq. (80), but without the phase factor.$$\n\n$$q q q-l l GLYPH GLYPH = iq $^{2}$b ( q $^{2}$) (87)$$\n\n13\n\n( whose planar part logarithimically diverges. In fact its pole part (PP) is given by\n\nso that, in the minimal dimensional regularization scheme,\n\nwhich agrees with the result of previous calculation [12]. Contracting q$_{µ}$ in the expression (81), we get\n\n{ which may be further simplified using\n\nto yield\n\nwhere Σ is similar to Σ$_{np}$ of Eq. (80), but without the phase factor.\n\nFor the last term in left-hand side of Eq. (76), we get" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.16056575888862915, + "doc_id": "c5c7b26979aa94e6e6d84b60b967241e91b17c724a969d85155dae35afceb1a5", + "edit_distance": 0.7883495145631068, + "f1_score": 0.8270676691729324, + "meteor": 0.3341362108500463, + "precision": 0.9401709401709402, + "pred_md": "islands develop or not. Since the hopes for obtaining thin-shell wormholes with normal matter when α > 0 , have already been dashed [5], we shall investigate here only the case for α < 0 .\n\nIn order to analyze the behavior of V ( a ) (and its second derivative) we introduce new parameterization as follows\n\n\n\nAccordingly, our new variables f (˜) a , ˜ σ , p , A 0 ˜ 0 and B take the following forms\n\n\n\nand\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nFollowing this parametrization our Eq. (25) takes the form\n\n\n\nwhere\n\n\n\nIn the next section we explore all possible constraints on our parameters that must satisfy to materialize a stable, normal matter wormhole through the requirement V '' (˜) a > 0 .\n\n## IV. CONSTRAINTS VERSUS FINELY-TUNED PARAMETERS AND SECOND DERIVATIVE PLOTS OF THE POTENTIAL\n\n- i ) Starting from the metric function we must have\n\n7", + "recall": 0.738255033557047, + "true_md": "islands develop or not. Since the hopes for obtaining thin-shell wormholes with normal matter when α > 0 , have already been dashed [5], we shall investigate here only the case for α < 0 .\n\nIn order to analyze the behavior of V ( a ) (and its second derivative) we introduce new parameterization as follows\n\nAccordingly, our new variables f (˜ a ) , ˜ σ 0 , ˜ p 0 , A and B take the following forms\n\nand\n\nFollowing this parametrization our Eq. (25) takes the form\n\nwhere\n\nIn the next section we explore all possible constraints on our parameters that must satisfy to materialize a stable, normal matter wormhole through the requirement V $^{′′}$(˜ a ) > 0 .\n\n7\n\n## IV. CONSTRAINTS VERSUS FINELY-TUNED PARAMETERS AND SECOND DERIVATIVE PLOTS OF THE POTENTIAL\n\n$$˜ a 2 = − a 2 α , m = − 16 M πα , q 2 = 8 Q 2 3 α 2 , ˜ σ 0 = √ − ασ 0 , p 0 = √ − αp 0 (29)$$\n\n$$f (˜ a ) = 1 − ˜ a 2 4 + ˜ a 2 4 √ 1 − m ˜ a 4 + q 2 ˜ a 6 (30)$$\n\n$$˜ σ 0 = − √ f (˜ a 0 ) 4 π [ 3 ˜ a 0 + 4 ˜ a 3 0 ( f (˜ a 0 ) − 3) ] , (31) ˜ p 0 = f (˜ a 0 ) 4 π [ 2 ˜ a 0 + f $^{′}$(˜ a 0 ) 2 f (˜ a 0 ) + 2 ˜ a 2 0 f $^{′}$(˜ a 0 ) f (˜ a 0 ) ( f (˜ a 0 ) − 1) ] , (32) A = − π ˜ a 3 4 [ ( ˜ σ 0+ ˜ p 0 β 2 + 1 ) ( ˜ a 0 ˜ a ) 3 ( β $^{2}$+1 ) + β $^{2}$˜ σ 0 $_{−}$˜ p 0 β 2 + 1 ] , (33) B = − ˜ a 2 8 + 1 − f (˜ a ) 2 . (34)$$\n\n$$( d ˜ a dτ ) 2 + ˜ V (˜ a ) = 0 , (35)$$\n\n$$˜ V (˜ a ) = − V (˜ a ) α . (36)$$\n\ni ) Starting from the metric function we must have" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.881529322959087, + "doc_id": "cc90d322ab4d9ddab451e850a63c93fdd4662326f2b21e86c7e1c287d9113fb6", + "edit_distance": 0.1404494382022472, + "f1_score": 0.9803921568627451, + "meteor": 0.9277257973452419, + "precision": 0.9887005649717514, + "pred_md": "Spin-helical/.notdefDirac/.notdefcones\n\nFIG. 1: Hsieh, Xia, Qian et al. , NATURE 460, 1101 (2009).\n\nFIG. 1: Hsieh, Xia, Qian et al. , NATURE 460, 1101 (2009).\n\n5, 12], which are predicted to manifest in several ways, provided the system can be tuned to the topological transport regime where the charge density vanishes (analogous to the charge neutrality point in graphene [19]). These manifestations include an anomalous half-integer quantization of Hall conductance [3-6], a realization of Majorana fermions (particles with anyon exchange statistics that differs from the conventional Bose or Fermi-Dirac statistics) [7, 8], and a generation of fractionally charged particles [9]. Helical fermions are believed to exist on the edges of certain types of three-dimensional (3D) topological insulators [3, 4, 12], with material candidates Bi X 2 3 (X = Se, Te) recently proposed based on observations [15, 17] and models [4, 20]. However, these materials cannot be used to detect helical Dirac fermion physics for three reasons: First, the helical properties of the surface electrons are unknown and depend on the materials class. Second, their electronic structure is not in the topological transport regime, thus not allowing any of the interesting topological insulator experiments to be performed to this date. And third, unlike 2D quantum Hall Dirac systems such as graphene [10, 19], 3D topological insulators cannot be tuned to this zero carrier density regime through electrical gating, which has prevented a revolution like that witnessed for graphene [10] from taking place for topological insulators.\n\nTo determine the key helical properties of the surface electrons near the Fermi level ( E F ) in the candidate Bi X 2 3 class, we performed spin- and angle-resolved photoemission\n\n3", + "recall": 0.9722222222222222, + "true_md": "FIG. 1: Hsieh, Xia, Qian et al. , NATURE 460, 1101 (2009).\n\n5, 12], which are predicted to manifest in several ways, provided the system can be tuned to the topological transport regime where the charge density vanishes (analogous to the charge neutrality point in graphene [19]). These manifestations include an anomalous half-integer quantization of Hall conductance [3–6], a realization of Majorana fermions (particles with anyon exchange statistics that differs from the conventional Bose or Fermi-Dirac statistics) [7, 8], and a generation of fractionally charged particles [9]. Helical fermions are believed to exist on the edges of certain types of three-dimensional (3D) topological insulators [3, 4, 12], with material candidates Bi$_{2}$X$_{3}$ (X = Se, Te) recently proposed based on observations [15, 17] and models [4, 20]. However, these materials cannot be used to detect helical Dirac fermion physics for three reasons: First, the helical properties of the surface electrons are unknown and depend on the materials class. Second, their electronic structure is not in the topological transport regime, thus not allowing any of the interesting topological insulator experiments to be performed to this date. And third, unlike 2D quantum Hall Dirac systems such as graphene [10, 19], 3D topological insulators cannot be tuned to this zero carrier density regime through electrical gating, which has prevented a revolution like that witnessed for graphene [10] from taking place for topological insulators.\n\nTo determine the key helical properties of the surface electrons near the Fermi level ( E$_{F}$ ) in the candidate Bi$_{2}$X$_{3}$ class, we performed spin- and angle-resolved photoemission\n\n3" + }, + { + "bleu": 4.156336644233524e-05, + "doc_id": "aa0872cd9c4bd891afbafe305c475f5e9efe063c672164d2ab2e7d7521401fad", + "edit_distance": 0.9791437980241493, + "f1_score": 0.49586776859504134, + "meteor": 0.05048483641859381, + "precision": 0.9090909090909091, + "pred_md": "Then,\n\nSince\n\n\n\n\n\nwe find\n\n\n\nHence, for the left-hand side of Eq. (76), we find\n\n\n\nLet us now consider the one-loop contributions to the right-hand side of Eq. (76). We have\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n14\n\nyielding\n\n", + "recall": 0.3409090909090909, + "true_md": "Then,\n\nSince\n\nwe find\n\nHence, for the left-hand side of Eq. (76), we find\n\nLet us now consider the one-loop contributions to the right-hand side of Eq. (76). We have\n\nyielding\n\n14\n\n$$= − ∫ d $^{4}$l (2 π ) 4 − ig$_{αβ}$ l 2 i ( q − l ) $_{2}$(2 e )( q − l ) $^{α}$(2 e ) q $_{β}$1 2 ( 1 − e 2 il ∧ q ) .$$\n\n$$/ qb ( q $^{2}$) = 2 i q 2 ∫ d $^{4}$l (2 π ) 4 i l 2 i ( q − l ) $_{2}$( ie ) / q ( ie )( q − l ) · q ( 1 − e 2 il ∧ q ) (88) l → l − p ︷︸︸︷ = 2 i q 2 d $^{4}$l (2 π ) 4 i ( p − l ) 2 i ( p + q − l ) $_{2}$( ie ) / q ( ie )( p + q − l ) · q ( 1 − e 2 il ∧ $^{q}$e − 2 ip ∧ q ) .$$\n\n$$2( p + q − l ) · q = ( p + q − l ) 2 − ( p − l ) 2 + q $^{2}$, (89)$$\n\n$$/ qb ( q $^{2}$) = i ∫ d $^{4}$l (2 π ) 4 i ( p − l ) 2 i ( p + q − l ) $_{2}$( ie ) / q ( ie ) ( 1 − e 2 il ∧ $^{q}$e − 2 ip ∧ q ) . (90)$$\n\n$$q$_{µ}$ Λ µ $_{a}$( p, p + q ) + q$_{µ}$ Λ µ $_{b}$( p, p + q ) + / qb ( q $^{2}$) = Σ( p ) − Σ( p + q ) + ∫ d $^{4}$l (2 π ) 4 i ( p + q − l ) 2 i ( p − l ) $_{2}$( ie )( / p + / q − / l ) iS$_{0}$ ( l )( ie )( / p + / q − / l ) ( 1 − e 2 il ∧ $^{q}$e − 2 ip ∧ q ) − d $^{4}$l (2 π ) 4 i ( p + q − l ) 2 i ( p − l ) $_{2}$( ie )( / p − / l ) iS$_{0}$ ( l )( ie )( / p − / l ) ( 1 − e 2 il ∧ $^{q}$e − 2 ip ∧ q ) + i ∫ d $^{4}$l (2 π ) 4 i ( p − l ) 2 i ( p + q − l ) $_{2}$( ie ) / q ( ie ) ( 1 − e 2 il ∧ $^{q}$e − 2 ip ∧ q ) . (91)$$\n\n$$p l p-l q p+q-l p+q GLYPH GLYPH = B$_{1}$ ( p, p + q ) e ip ∧ q (92) = − ∫ d $^{4}$l (2 π ) $_{4}$iS$_{0}$ ( l ) i ( p + q − l ) $_{2}$( − ieγ $^{α}$) − ig$_{αβ}$ ( p − l ) $_{2}$(2 e )( p + q − l ) β × 1 2 i ( 1 − e 2 il × $^{q}$e − 2 ip × q ) e ip × $^{q}$,$$\n\n$$Z$_{5}$ = 1 − e 2 16 π 2 1 ϵ . (93)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6570645912936637, + "doc_id": "f873da89fe5db6e7c805c216a458f5c353336b0f0dbbbeef8313a5fc1bcd0b80", + "edit_distance": 0.24664879356568364, + "f1_score": 0.9466666666666668, + "meteor": 0.7813705528188286, + "precision": 0.9551569506726457, + "pred_md": "to the axial trap period (40 times shorter) the density distribution in the axial direction reflects the in-trap axial density distribution. The potential energy per particle, in units of E F , is then V = 3 NE F 1 2 mω 2 z 〈 z 2 〉 , where 〈 z 2 〉 is the mean squared width of the cloud in the axial direction and we have assumed that the total potential energy is distributed equally over the three axes.\n\nTo measure the release energy T + I we turn off the trap suddenly and let the cloud expand for t = 16 ms (with interactions) before imaging along one of the radial directions; this is similar to measurements reported in Ref. [26]. The total release energy is the sum of the release energy in the two radial directions and the release energy in the axial direction. For the radial direction, the release energy per particle, in units of E F , is simply T r + I r = 2 NE F 1 2 m 〈 y 2 〉 t 2 where t is the expansion time and 〈 y 2 〉 is the mean squared width of the expanded cloud in the radial direction. For the axial direction, the expansion is slower and the expanded cloud may not be much larger than the in-trap density distribution. This is especially true near the Feshbach resonance where the cloud expands hydrodynamically [27]. Accounting for this, the axial release energy is T z + I z = 1 NE F 1 2 m 〈 z 2 〉-z 2 0 t 2 , where z 2 0 is mean squared axial width of the in-trap density distribution. We extract the mean squared cloud widths from surface fits to the images, where we fit to a finite temperature Fermi Dirac distribution while minimizing the difference in energy between the raw data and the fit. Rather than being theoretically motivated, we simply find empirically that this functional form fits well to our images. To eliminate systematic error due to uncertainty in the trap frequencies and imaging magnification, we measure the release energy and potential energy of a very weakly interacting Fermi gas at T T F = 0 11, where . T + I and V for an ideal Fermi gas is 0 40 . E F . We then use the ratio of 0 40 . E F to our measured values as a multiplicative correction factor that we apply to all of the data. This correction is within 5% of unity. For the point with 1 k F a > 0 we take into account the binding energy of the molecules in our tabulation of the release energy T + I by adding -1 / k ( F a ) 2 . We show our data for the V and T + I versus ( k F a ) -1 in the inset of Fig. 3.\n\nWe can now test the predicted universal relations connecting the 1 /k 4 tail of the momentum distribution with the thermodynamics of the trapped Fermi gas. We first consider the adiabatic sweep theorem [1],\n\n\n\nwhich relates the contact C to the change in the total energy of the system when the\n\n7", + "recall": 0.9383259911894273, + "true_md": "to the axial trap period (40 times shorter) the density distribution in the axial direction reflects the in-trap axial density distribution. The potential energy per particle, in units of E$_{F}$ , is then V = 3 NE$_{F}$ 1 $_{2}$mω 2 $_{z}$〈 z $^{2}$〉 , where 〈 z $^{2}$〉 is the mean squared width of the cloud in the axial direction and we have assumed that the total potential energy is distributed equally over the three axes.\n\nTo measure the release energy T + I we turn off the trap suddenly and let the cloud expand for t = 16 ms (with interactions) before imaging along one of the radial directions; this is similar to measurements reported in Ref. [26]. The total release energy is the sum of the release energy in the two radial directions and the release energy in the axial direction. For the radial direction, the release energy per particle, in units of E$_{F}$ , is simply T$_{r}$ + I$_{r}$ = 2 NE$_{F}$ 1 $_{2}$m 〈 y $^{2}$〉 t 2 where t is the expansion time and 〈 y $^{2}$〉 is the mean squared width of the expanded cloud in the radial direction. For the axial direction, the expansion is slower and the expanded cloud may not be much larger than the in-trap density distribution. This is especially true near the Feshbach resonance where the cloud expands hydrodynamically [27]. Accounting for this, the axial release energy is T$_{z}$ + I$_{z}$ = 1 NE$_{F}$ 1 $_{2}$m 〈 z $^{2}$〉− z 2 0 t 2 , where z 2 0 is mean squared axial width of the in-trap density distribution. We extract the mean squared cloud widths from surface fits to the images, where we fit to a finite temperature Fermi Dirac distribution while minimizing the difference in energy between the raw data and the fit. Rather than being theoretically motivated, we simply find empirically that this functional form fits well to our images. To eliminate systematic error due to uncertainty in the trap frequencies and imaging magnification, we measure the release energy and potential energy of a very weakly interacting Fermi gas at T T$_{F}$ = 0 . 11, where T + I and V for an ideal Fermi gas is 0 . 40 E$_{F}$ . We then use the ratio of 0 . 40 E$_{F}$ to our measured values as a multiplicative correction factor that we apply to all of the data. This correction is within 5% of unity. For the point with 1 k$_{F}$ a > 0 we take into account the binding energy of the molecules in our tabulation of the release energy T + I by adding − 1 / ( k$_{F}$a ) $^{2}$. We show our data for the V and T + I versus ( k$_{F}$a ) − 1 in the inset of Fig. 3.\n\nWe can now test the predicted universal relations connecting the 1 /k 4 tail of the momen- tum distribution with the thermodynamics of the trapped Fermi gas. We first consider the adiabatic sweep theorem [1],\n\nwhich relates the contact C to the change in the total energy of the system when the\n\n$$2 π dE d ( − 1 / ( k$_{F}$a )) = C, (2)$$\n\n7" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.3760522767159838, + "doc_id": "c09f9eb4e3d3290c52e29fcbd5ecc378b724e5e99a710d1f8f2c871805eec452", + "edit_distance": 0.6209302325581395, + "f1_score": 0.901098901098901, + "meteor": 0.5200669779785048, + "precision": 0.9461538461538461, + "pred_md": "FIG. 8: Same as Fig. 7 except for the 25.5-MeV energy bin (see text).\n\nFIG. 8: Same as Fig. 7 except for the 25.5-MeV energy bin (see text).\n\nin Figs. 9, 10, 11, and 12, respectively. The strengths are related to the coefficients a L in Eq. 1 as (see, Refs. [13, 51]):\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nwhere m A , and < r N > are the nucleon mass, the mass number, and the N th moment of the ground-state density, and /epsilon1 =(4/ E 2 +5/ E 0 )¯ h 2 /3 mA E ; 0 and E 2 are the centroid energies of the ISGMR and the ISGQR and have been taken as 80 A -1 3 / MeV and 64 A -1 3 / MeV, respectively.\n\nIt should be noted that although we employed calculated DWBA cross sections with up to L =7 in the MDA fitting procedure, it was not possible to reliably extract the strength distributions for L ≥ 4 because of the limited angular range (0 -9 ). Further, there is a small, · · near-constant ISGMR and ISGQR strength up to the highest excitation energies measured\n\n12", + "recall": 0.8601398601398601, + "true_md": "FIG. 8: Same as Fig. 7 except for the 25.5-MeV energy bin (see text).\n\nin Figs. 9, 10, 11, and 12, respectively. The strengths are related to the coefficients a$_{L}$ in Eq. 1 as (see, Refs. [13, 51]):\n\nwhere m , A and < r N > are the nucleon mass, the mass number, and the N th moment of the ground-state density, and ϵ =(4/ E 2 +5/ E 0 )¯ h $^{2}$/3 mA ; E 0 and E 2 are the centroid energies of the ISGMR and the ISGQR and have been taken as 80 A − 1 / 3 MeV and 64 A − 1 / 3 MeV, respectively.\n\nIt should be noted that although we employed calculated DWBA cross sections with up to L =7 in the MDA fitting procedure, it was not possible to reliably extract the strength distributions for L ≥ 4 because of the limited angular range (0 $^{◦}$–9$^{◦}$). Further, there is a small, near-constant ISGMR and ISGQR strength up to the highest excitation energies measured\n\n12\n\n$$S 0 ( E$_{x}$ ) = 2¯ h $^{2}$A < r 2 > mE$_{x}$ a 0 ( E$_{x}$ ) (4)$$\n\n$$S 1 ( E$_{x}$ ) = 3¯ h $^{2}$A 32 πmE$_{x}$ (11 < r 4 > − 25 3 < r 2 > 2 − 10 ϵ < r 2 > ) a 1 ( E$_{x}$ ) (5)$$\n\n$$S$_{L}$$_{≥}$ 2 ( E$_{x}$ ) = ¯ h $^{2}$A 8 πmE$_{x}$ L (2 L + 1) 2 < r 2 L − 2 > a 2 ( E$_{x}$ ) (6)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9486884814499564, + "doc_id": "275dc6f96182879d59d794e530756a91ecd435d32e1012f4308ccc6971eaf9bd", + "edit_distance": 0.04395604395604396, + "f1_score": 0.9620253164556962, + "meteor": 0.9753163274555703, + "precision": 0.95, + "pred_md": "- [14] F. P' erez-Bernal and F. Iachello, Phys. Rev. A 77 , 032115 (2008); F. P' erez-Bernal, L. F. Santos, P. H. Vaccaro, and F. Iachello, Chem. Phys. Lett. 414 , 398 (2005).\n- [15] S. Morrison and A. S. Parkins, Phys. Rev. Lett. 100 , 040403 (2008); Phys. Rev. A 77 , 043810 (2008).\n\n10", + "recall": 0.9743589743589743, + "true_md": "- [14] F. P´ erez-Bernal and F. Iachello, Phys. Rev. A 77 , 032115 (2008); F. P´ erez-Bernal, L. F. Santos, P. H. Vaccaro, and F. Iachello, Chem. Phys. Lett. 414 , 398 (2005).\n\n- [15] S. Morrison and A. S. Parkins, Phys. Rev. Lett. 100 , 040403 (2008); Phys. Rev. A 77 , 043810 (2008).\n\n10" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8752702978214169, + "doc_id": "50cdfcf77a6cdcffb5aad54811d3b92bdc091bddb94afb7d479d85d52293c6c8", + "edit_distance": 0.08514492753623189, + "f1_score": 0.9459962756052143, + "meteor": 0.9268955171916293, + "precision": 0.9621212121212122, + "pred_md": "CP-violating phases; these would manifest themselves as apparent inconsistencies among different measurements of quantities which should be identical within the standard CKM picture. Thus a precise determination of the ratio ξ will help to constrain physics beyond the Standard Model. Furthermore, possible indications of new physics in B 0 d -mixing at the ∼ 2.7σ level [13] make the lattice calculation of B -meson mixing parameters timely.\n\nRecently, the HPQCD Collaboration published the first unquenched determination of ξ with an accuracy of 2.6% [14], and the Fermilab Lattice and MILC Collaborations expect to have a result with similar errors soon [15]. The HPQCD calculation employs a nonrelativistic QCD (NRQCD) action for the heavy b -quark [16], while the Fermilab/MILC calculation uses the relativistic 'Fermilab' action for the b -quark [17]. Both of these computations, however, rely on the same '2+1' flavor asqtad-improved staggered ensembles generated by the MILC Collaboration [18], which include the effects of two degenerate light quarks and one heavier close-to-strange quark in the sea sector.\n\nFor such a phenomenologically important quantity as ξ , it is valuable to have an independent crosscheck using different formulations of the lattice action for both the light and heavy quarks. Our calculation employs the 2+1 flavor dynamical domain-wall ensembles generated by the RBC and UKQCD Collaborations with a lattice spacing of a ≈ 0 11 fm . ( a -1 = 1 729 GeV) [19]. . The use of domain-wall fermions [20-22] has the advantage over other light-quark formulations that the chiral perturbation theory expressions needed to extrapolate domain-wall lattice results to the physical u - and d -quark masses are closer to the continuum forms and have fewer parameters than in the Wilson or staggered cases [23, 24]. We compute the b -quarks in the static limit ( m b → ∞ ), which leads to correlation functions that are noisier than those with propagating b -quarks such as in the Fermilab [17] or NRQCD actions [16]. We therefore use the static-quark formulation of Refs. [25, 26] with either APE [27, 28] or HYP [29] smearing of the static-quark gauge links to increase the signal-to-noise ratio and reduce scaling violations (for some quantities) as compared to the Eichten-Hill action [30]. Furthermore, the approximate chiral symmetry of the domainwall action combined with the spin symmetry of the static action simplifies the lattice-tocontinuum operator matching as compared to the Wilson case by reducing the number of additional lattice operators which appear [31, 32]. The results of this work extend an earlier study with two flavors of dynamical quarks and heavier light-quark masses in Ref. [33].\n\nThe primary purpose of this paper is to demonstrate the viability of our method for\n\n4", + "recall": 0.9304029304029304, + "true_md": "CP-violating phases; these would manifest themselves as apparent inconsistencies among different measurements of quantities which should be identical within the standard CKM picture. Thus a precise determination of the ratio ξ will help to constrain physics beyond the Standard Model. Furthermore, possible indications of new physics in B 0 $_{d}$-mixing at the ∼ 2.7- σ level [13] make the lattice calculation of B -meson mixing parameters timely. Recently, the HPQCD Collaboration published the first unquenched determination of ξ\n\n∼ Recently, the HPQCD Collaboration published the first unquenched determination of ξ with an accuracy of 2.6% [14], and the Fermilab Lattice and MILC Collaborations expect to have a result with similar errors soon [15]. The HPQCD calculation employs a nonrelativistic QCD (NRQCD) action for the heavy b -quark [16], while the Fermilab/MILC calculation uses the relativistic “Fermilab” action for the b -quark [17]. Both of these computations, however, rely on the same “2+1” flavor asqtad-improved staggered ensembles generated by the MILC Collaboration [18], which include the effects of two degenerate light quarks and one heavier close-to-strange quark in the sea sector.\n\nFor such a phenomenologically important quantity as ξ , it is valuable to have an inde- pendent crosscheck using different formulations of the lattice action for both the light and heavy quarks. Our calculation employs the 2+1 flavor dynamical domain-wall ensembles generated by the RBC and UKQCD Collaborations with a lattice spacing of a ≈ 0 . 11 fm ( a − 1 = 1 . 729 GeV) [19]. The use of domain-wall fermions [20–22] has the advantage over other light-quark formulations that the chiral perturbation theory expressions needed to ex- trapolate domain-wall lattice results to the physical u - and d -quark masses are closer to the continuum forms and have fewer parameters than in the Wilson or staggered cases [23, 24]. We compute the b -quarks in the static limit ( m$_{b}$ → ∞ ), which leads to correlation func- tions that are noisier than those with propagating b -quarks such as in the Fermilab [17] or NRQCD actions [16]. We therefore use the static-quark formulation of Refs. [25, 26] with either APE [27, 28] or HYP [29] smearing of the static-quark gauge links to increase the signal-to-noise ratio and reduce scaling violations (for some quantities) as compared to the Eichten-Hill action [30]. Furthermore, the approximate chiral symmetry of the domain- wall action combined with the spin symmetry of the static action simplifies the lattice-to- continuum operator matching as compared to the Wilson case by reducing the number of additional lattice operators which appear [31, 32]. The results of this work extend an earlier study with two flavors of dynamical quarks and heavier light-quark masses in Ref. [33].\n\nThe primary purpose of this paper is to demonstrate the viability of our method for\n\n4" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "1aade09010f23aa7f007e5f97734407f209e5a15b79c16f063ea2bdb21de68ff", + "edit_distance": 0.08514492753623189, + "f1_score": 0.9459962756052143, + "meteor": 0.9268955171916293, + "precision": 0.9621212121212122, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.9304029304029304, + "true_md": "Figure2:\n\n13" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4924565221950189, + "doc_id": "3549a01f9a8e4709accc0c05f05d5be76d80ca2edc2a5b99e18a9dba87b21aa2", + "edit_distance": 0.46322378716744916, + "f1_score": 0.8850574712643677, + "meteor": 0.5976663902645544, + "precision": 0.9390243902439024, + "pred_md": "## I. INTRODUCTION\n\nThe time-independent form of Schrdinger's equation in the presence of a potential o V can be written as 1\n\n\n\nwhere ψ is the wave function, m is the mass of the particle, and E is the eigenenergy. Equation (1) can be solved exactly only for a few potentials. A particle in a box and a particle in a delta function potential are two well-known and instructive examples. 1 The former can be used to describe quantum dots and quantum wells at low temperatures, 2,3 and the latter can be used as a model for atoms and molecules. 4\n\nThe solution for a particle in a box with a delta function potential has been investigated using a perturbative expansion in the strength of the delta function potential λ . 5 Exact solutions have been obtained for the weak ( λ → 0) and the strong (1 /λ → 0) coupling limits. 6\n\nIn this paper we discuss the solution for a particle in a box with a delta function potential using the factorization method and show that the presence of the delta function simplifies the factorization procedure. In this way we find the full spectrum of the Hamiltonian in the first step of the factorization method. We also show that this result applies in the weak coupling limit λ → 0. Note that if we put λ = 0 from the beginning, we need to continue the factorization procedure to find each eigenvalue in each step.\n\n## II. PARTICLE IN A BOX WITH A DELTA FUNCTION POTENTIAL\n\nConsider a particle in a one-dimensional box of size a with the delta function potential V ( x ) = λδ x ( -x 0 ) = λδ x ( -pa ), where 0 < p < 1. In this case Eq. (1) takes the form\n\n\n\nwhere ψ n ( x ) and E n are the corresponding eigenfunctions and eigenvalues, respectively. Because of the boundary conditions, ψ n ( x ) = 0 for x ≤ 0 or x ≥ a , the form of the eigenfunctions inside the box is\n\n\n\n2", + "recall": 0.8369565217391305, + "true_md": "## I. INTRODUCTION\n\nThe time-independent form of Schr¨ odinger’s equation in the presence of a potential V can be written as 1 2\n\nwhere ψ is the wave function, m is the mass of the particle, and E is the eigenenergy. Equation (1) can be solved exactly only for a few potentials. A particle in a box and a particle in a delta function potential are two well-known and instructive examples. 1 The former can be used to describe quantum dots and quantum wells at low temperatures, 2,3 and the latter can be used as a model for atoms and molecules. 4\n\nThe solution for a particle in a box with a delta function potential has been investigated using a perturbative expansion in the strength of the delta function potential λ . 5 Exact solutions have been obtained for the weak ( λ → 0) and the strong (1 /λ → 0) coupling limits. 6\n\nIn this paper we discuss the solution for a particle in a box with a delta function potential using the factorization method and show that the presence of the delta function simplifies the factorization procedure. In this way we find the full spectrum of the Hamiltonian in the first step of the factorization method. We also show that this result applies in the weak coupling limit λ → 0. Note that if we put λ = 0 from the beginning, we need to continue the factorization procedure to find each eigenvalue in each step.\n\nConsider a particle in a one-dimensional box of size a with the delta function potential V ( x ) = λ δ ( x − x$_{0}$ ) = λ δ ( x − pa ), where 0 < p < 1. In this case Eq. (1) takes the form 2\n\nwhere ψ$_{n}$ ( x ) and E$_{n}$ are the corresponding eigenfunctions and eigenvalues, respectively. Because of the boundary conditions, ψ$_{n}$ ( x ) = 0 for x ≤ 0 or x ≥ a , the form of the eigenfunctions inside the box is\n\n## II. PARTICLE IN A BOX WITH A DELTA FUNCTION POTENTIAL\n\n$$− ¯ h 2 2 m ∇ $^{2}$ψ + V ψ = Eψ, (1)$$\n\n$$− − ¯ h 2 2 m d $^{2}$ψ$_{n}$ ( x ) dx 2 + λδ ( x − pa ) ψ$_{n}$ ( x ) = E$_{n}$ψ$_{n}$ ( x ) , (2)$$\n\n$$ψ$_{n}$ ( x ) =    $^{A}$$^{sin(}$$^{k$_{n}$}$$^{x}$$^{)}$ (0 ≤ x ≤ pa ) B sin[ k$_{n}$ ( x − a )] ( pa ≤ x ≤ a ) , (3) 2$$\n\n$^{A}$$^{sin(}$$^{k$\\_{n}$}$$^{x}$$^{)}$ 2" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9628131695333368, + "doc_id": "e3419b70d998dc08cd922eb91b18761f65359047eb02a483f9b7fcb3bbc9c288", + "edit_distance": 0.02527075812274368, + "f1_score": 0.9865470852017937, + "meteor": 0.9802572569126171, + "precision": 0.995475113122172, + "pred_md": "They are due to the coupling between inelasticity and gradients that exists in the stationary state, in such a way that strong inelasticity implies large gradients of the hydrodynamic fields. This coupling is a peculiarity of the steady states of inelastic fluids, following from the balance between the energy dissipated because of inelastic cooling and the hydrodynamic energy fluxes.\n\nA previous analysis, carried out in [19], focussed on the macroscopic description of the granular gas in terms of the density and granular temperature fields, the velocity field being zero. At this level of description, the role of the movable piston on top of the gas is to partially determine the boundary conditions needed to solve the hydrodynamic equations for the steady state under consideration. Here, the interest will be on the fluctuations of the movable piston, namely on its position fluctuations. Some results for the velocity fluctuations have been reported elsewhere [14]. There, it was shown that the steady state velocity fluctuations of the piston are gaussian with zero mean for α P ≥ 0 6 and . α ≥ 0 8. . Nevertheless, no simple relationship between the second moments of the velocity distributions of the piston and the gas next to it was found. It is worth to remark that there is no reason to expect such a relation to exist at a macroscopic level of description, i.e. involving only the hydrodynamic fields and the parameters of the system. Actually, the simulation results reported in [14] indicate that the details of the velocity distribution of the gas, beyond its first few moments, are relevant to determine the second moment of the velocity distribution of the piston.\n\nIt is clear that the position fluctuations of the movable piston are related with the volume fluctuations of the inelastic gas. Actually, this relationship can be made direct and exact by properly choosing the nature of the vibrating wall located at the bottom of the system. The mission of the latter is to energize the system, keeping the particles fluidized. The expectation is that the behavior in the bulk of the system is independent of the details of the way in which this wall is being vibrated. Consequently, the simplest possible choice has been used in all the results to be reported in the following. The bottom wall is vibrated with a sawtooth velocity profile, having a velocity v W . This means that all the particles colliding with the wall find it moving upwards with that velocity [20, 21]. Besides, the amplitude of the wall motion is considered much smaller than the mean free path of the particles in its vicinity, so that the position of the wall can be taken as fixed at z = 0. Therefore, the dynamics of the vibrating wall at the bottom does not induce directly any change in the volume (or area) occupied by the granular gas. Also, and again for the sake of simplicity,\n\n5", + "recall": 0.9777777777777777, + "true_md": "They are due to the coupling between inelasticity and gradients that exists in the stationary state, in such a way that strong inelasticity implies large gradients of the hydrodynamic fields. This coupling is a peculiarity of the steady states of inelastic fluids, following from the balance between the energy dissipated because of inelastic cooling and the hydrodynamic energy fluxes.\n\nA previous analysis, carried out in [19], focussed on the macroscopic description of the granular gas in terms of the density and granular temperature fields, the velocity field being zero. At this level of description, the role of the movable piston on top of the gas is to partially determine the boundary conditions needed to solve the hydrodynamic equations for the steady state under consideration. Here, the interest will be on the fluctuations of the movable piston, namely on its position fluctuations. Some results for the velocity fluctuations have been reported elsewhere [14]. There, it was shown that the steady state velocity fluctuations of the piston are gaussian with zero mean for α$_{P}$ ≥ 0 . 6 and α ≥ 0 . 8. Nevertheless, no simple relationship between the second moments of the velocity distributions of the piston and the gas next to it was found. It is worth to remark that there is no reason to expect such a relation to exist at a macroscopic level of description, i.e. involving only the hydrodynamic fields and the parameters of the system. Actually, the simulation results reported in [14] indicate that the details of the velocity distribution of the gas, beyond its first few moments, are relevant to determine the second moment of the velocity distribution of the piston.\n\nIt is clear that the position fluctuations of the movable piston are related with the volume fluctuations of the inelastic gas. Actually, this relationship can be made direct and exact by properly choosing the nature of the vibrating wall located at the bottom of the system. The mission of the latter is to energize the system, keeping the particles fluidized. The expectation is that the behavior in the bulk of the system is independent of the details of the way in which this wall is being vibrated. Consequently, the simplest possible choice has been used in all the results to be reported in the following. The bottom wall is vibrated with a sawtooth velocity profile, having a velocity v$_{W}$ . This means that all the particles colliding with the wall find it moving upwards with that velocity [20, 21]. Besides, the amplitude of the wall motion is considered much smaller than the mean free path of the particles in its vicinity, so that the position of the wall can be taken as fixed at z = 0. Therefore, the dynamics of the vibrating wall at the bottom does not induce directly any change in the volume (or area) occupied by the granular gas. Also, and again for the sake of simplicity,\n\n5" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.04959525156736502, + "doc_id": "6451e021b49e39ff1878f8aa048e0c3aacd8d1f541ac4e7531093cedc27c7f5b", + "edit_distance": 0.7745490981963928, + "f1_score": 0.8096885813148789, + "meteor": 0.23825771932738998, + "precision": 0.9285714285714286, + "pred_md": "14\n\n## A. The expanded Lagrangian\n\nAfter the expansion in mass eigenstates, the gauge Lagrangian, taking into account contributions from both brane and bulk terms, is reduced to the form:\n\n\n\nThe bilinear part of the Lagrangian is, as announced, diagonal. The trilinear and quadrilinear coupling constants g L klm , g 2 LL klmn , g 2 LN klmn are defined in terms of the gauge profiles:\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n(remember that f 1 L R n ( ) ≡ f 2 L R n ( ) ); similar definitions hold for the coupling constants g R klm , g 2 RR klmn , g 2 RN klmn of the right sector, but without any contribution from boundary terms due to eq. (25).\n\nAn important observation concerns the couplings g L R ( ) kl 0 . These give the coupling of N (0) , which we identified with the photon, with the charged fields; as a consequence, they should all be equal to the electric charge, for any value of k, l . By the definition (39) and eq. (33), we immediately get:\n\n\n\nthanks to the fact that the wave-functions f 1 Lk and f 1 Rk form an orthonormal basis. Then we conclude that\n\n", + "recall": 0.7177914110429447, + "true_md": "14\n\n## A. The expanded Lagrangian\n\nAfter the expansion in mass eigenstates, the gauge Lagrangian, taking into account con- tributions from both brane and bulk terms, is reduced to the form:\n\n$$L gauge = − 1 2 W + ( n ) L µν $_{W}$− ( n ) µν L − 1 2 W + ( n ) R µν $_{W}$− ( n ) µν R − 1 4 N ( n ) µν N ( n ) µν − ∣ ∂$_{µ}$G + ( n ) L − m$_{L n}$W + ( n ) L µ ∣ ∣$^{2}$ − ∣ ∂$_{µ}$G + ( n ) R − m$_{R n}$W + ( n ) L µ ∣ ∣$^{2}$ − 1 2 ( ∂$_{µ}$G ( n ) N − m$_{N n}$N ( n ) µ ) 2 + { i g L klm [ N ( m ) µν W + ( k ) µ L $_{W}$− ( l ) ν L + N ( m ) µ ( $_{W}$− ( l ) µν L ) W + ( k ) L ν − h.c. ) ] + g 2 LL klmn W + ( k ) µ L $_{W}$− ( l ) ν L W + ( m ) ρ L $_{W}$− ( n ) σ L ( η$_{µρ}$η$_{νσ}$ − η$_{µν}$η$_{ρσ}$ ) ] + g 2 LN klmn [ W + ( k ) µ L $_{W}$− ( l ) ν L N ( m ) $^{ρ}$N ( n ) $^{σ}$( η$_{µρ}$η$_{νσ}$ − η$_{µν}$η$_{ρσ}$ ) ] + ( L ↔ R ) } . (38)$$\n\nThe bilinear part of the Lagrangian is, as announced, diagonal. The trilinear and quadrilin- ear coupling constants g L $_{klm}$, g 2 LL $_{klmn}$, g 2 LN klmn are defined in terms of the gauge profiles:\n\n$$g L klm = 1 g 2 5 ∫ πR 0 dyf 1 $_{L k}$f 1 $_{L l}$f 3 L m + 1 ˜ g $_{2}$f 1 $_{L k}$f 1 $_{L l}$f 3 L m | $_{πR}$, (39) 1 πR 1$$\n\n$$∫ g 2 LL klmn = 1 g 2 5 πR 0 dyf 1 $_{L k}$f 1 $_{L l}$f 1 $_{L m}$f 1 L n + 1 ˜ g $_{2}$f 1 $_{L k}$f 1 $_{L l}$f 1 $_{L m}$f 1 L n | $_{πR}$, (40)$$\n\n$$klmn g 2 5 0 L n ˜ g L n | g 2 LN klmn = 1 g 2 5 ∫ πR 0 dyf 1 $_{L k}$f 1 $_{L l}$f 3 $_{L m}$f 3 L n + 1 ˜ g $_{2}$f 1 $_{L k}$f 1 $_{L l}$f 3 $_{L m}$f 3 L n | πR (41)$$\n\n(remember that f 1 L ( R ) n ≡ f 2 L ( R ) $_{n}$); similar definitions hold for the coupling constants g R $_{klm}$, g 2 RR $_{klmn}$, g 2 RN klmn of the right sector, but without any contribution from boundary terms due to eq. (25).\n\nAn important observation concerns the couplings g L ( R ) kl 0 . These give the coupling of N (0) , which we identified with the photon, with the charged fields; as a consequence, they should all be equal to the electric charge, for any value of k, l . By the definition (39) and eq. (33), we immediately get:\n\n$$g L kl 0 = g R kl 0 ≡ f$_{0}$δ$_{kl}$, (42)$$\n\nthanks to the fact that the wave-functions f 1 L k and f 1 R k form an orthonormal basis. Then we conclude that\n\n$$f$_{0}$ = e. (43)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0015425917718931436, + "doc_id": "9fb6a3ed6655941b5b18b09693768dbcc0ce6e3b8161502465d0e1a35070dba2", + "edit_distance": 0.9186785260482846, + "f1_score": 0.6618705035971223, + "meteor": 0.10112448170182078, + "precision": 0.8846153846153846, + "pred_md": "\n\nwhere their PP contributions take the form\n\n\n\nTherefore, the sum of all PP contributions of the left-hand side of Eq. (103) becomes\n\n\n\nLet us now look to the right-hand side of the identity (103). The diagrams are\n\n∫\n\n=\n\n-\n\ni\n\n(2\n\ne\n\n)\n\nd l 4\n\n(2\n\nπ\n\n)\n\n4\n\nl\n\nλ\n\nl\n\n2\n\n(\n\nl\n\n+ )\n\n(\n\nq\n\n+ )\n\nq\n\nl\n\nν\n\n2\n\nsin\n\n(\n\nl\n\n∧\n\nq ,\n\n)\n\n\n\n\n\n20\n\n2\n\n2\n\n2", + "recall": 0.5287356321839081, + "true_md": "where their PP contributions take the form\n\nTherefore, the sum of all PP contributions of the left-hand side of Eq. (103) becomes\n\nLet us now look to the right-hand side of the identity (103). The diagrams are\n\n$$+ 1 2 ( − i ) $^{2}$(2 e )( − 4 ie $^{2}$) ∫ d $^{4}$l (2 π ) 4 − ( g α α − 2)(2 l − k ) $^{λ}$gµν − ( l − 2 k ) $^{µ}$gνλ − ( l + k ) $^{ν}$gµλ l $^{2}$( p + q + l ) 2 × sin( l ∧ q ) sin( − l ∧ p − l ∧ q ) sin( − l ∧ p + p ∧ q ) + 1 2 ( − i ) $^{2}$(2 e )( − 4 ie $^{2}$) ∫ d $^{4}$l (2 π ) 4 3 k $^{ν}$gµλ − 3 k $^{µ}$gλν l $^{2}$( p + q + l ) 2 sin $^{2}$( l ∧ p + l ∧ q ) sin( p ∧ q ) ,$$\n\n$$PP[ p$_{µ}$ Λ µνλ d 1 ,d 2 ,d $_{3}$( p, q, k )] = 9 e 2 32 π 2 1 ϵ [( k $^{2}$g λν − k $^{λ}$k$^{ν}$) − ( q $^{2}$g νλ − q $^{ν}$q$^{λ}$)] . (119)$$\n\n$$PP[ p$_{µ}$ ( γ $^{µνλ}$( p, q, k ) b ( p $^{2}$) + Λ µνλ b 1 ,b 2 ,c,d 1 ,d 2 ,d $_{3}$( p, q, k ))] = 7 e 2 48 π 2 1 ϵ [( k $^{2}$g λν − k $^{λ}$k$^{ν}$) − ( q $^{2}$g νλ − q $^{ν}$q$^{λ}$)] . (120)$$\n\n$$= i Π νλ b ( q ) (121) = − i $^{2}$(2 e ) 2 ∫ d $^{4}$l (2 π ) 4 l $^{λ}$( l + q ) ν l $^{2}$( q + l ) 2 sin $^{2}$( l ∧ q ) ,$$\n\n$$= i Π νλ c ( q ) (122) = 1 2 ( − i ) $^{2}$(2 e ) 2 ∫ d $^{4}$l (2 π ) 4 γ $^{ανβ}$( l, q, − l − q ) γ $^{βνα}$( l + q, − q, − l ) l $^{2}$( q + l ) 2 sin $^{2}$( l ∧ q ) ,$$\n\n$$= i Π νλ d ( q ) (123) = 1 2 ( − i )( − 4 ie $^{2}$) ∫ d $^{4}$l (2 π ) 4 2( g α α − 1) g νλ l 2 sin $^{2}$( l ∧ q ) ,$$\n\n20" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.44235550469603724, + "doc_id": "39f1b66e0c0b9cdd52db74e45ba5a3269a34af70ae93f1646fd70c3533cf9a00", + "edit_distance": 0.4363143631436314, + "f1_score": 0.9099999999999999, + "meteor": 0.5859523680491252, + "precision": 0.9578947368421052, + "pred_md": "superdeformation. Nevertheless, neither theoretical studies of the SD state nor the triaxiality of 40 Ar have progressed.\n\nThe purpose of this study is to investigate the structure of the SD band in 40 Ar focusing on triaxiality. Competitions of deformations favored by protons and neutrons are also discussed.\n\nTo obtain the wave functions in low-lying states, the parity and angular momentum projection (AMP) and the generator coordinate method (GCM) with deformed-basis AMD wave functions were performed. A deformed-basis AMD wave function | Φ is a Slater determinant 〉 of triaxially deformed Gaussian wave packets, such that\n\n\n\n\n\n(3)\n\n\n\n\n\nwhere ˆ is the antisymmetrization operator and A | ϕ i 〉 are single-particle wave functions. The variables | φ i 〉 , | χ i 〉 , and | τ i 〉 are a spatial part, a spin part, and an isospin part, respectively, of every single-particle wave function | ϕ i 〉 . The values ν = ( ν , ν x y , ν z ) are real parameters that indicate the width of the Gaussian single-particle wave function, and Z i = ( Z ix , Z iy , Z iz ) are complex parameters that indicate centroids of the single-particle wave functions. The width parameters ν are common to all nucleons. The complex parameters χ ↑ i and χ ↓ i represent spin directions. Basis wave functions of the GCM were obtained by the energy variation with a constraint on the quadrupole deformation parameter β of a total system after the projection to positive parity states. Variation parameters were ν , Z i , and χ ↑ ↓ , i . The isospin part of each single-particle wave function was fixed as a proton or a neutron. The Gogny D1S force was used as an effective interaction. Details of the framework are provided in Refs. 21-23.\n\nCalculated values of energy, triaxiality γ , and harmonic oscillator (H.O.) quanta ∆ N H O . . for protons and neutrons measured from the lowest allowed states are shown as functions of the quadrupole deformation parameter β in the upper, middle, and lower panels, respectively, of Fig. 1. As for the energy curves, energies of the positive parity states and J π = 0 + and 2 + states, which were projected from each basis wave function, are plotted. K -mixing was\n\n3", + "recall": 0.8666666666666667, + "true_md": "superdeformation. Nevertheless, neither theoretical studies of the SD state nor the triaxiality of $^{40}$Ar have progressed.\n\nThe purpose of this study is to investigate the structure of the SD band in $^{40}$Ar focusing on triaxiality. Competitions of deformations favored by protons and neutrons are also discussed.\n\nTo obtain the wave functions in low-lying states, the parity and angular momentum pro- jection (AMP) and the generator coordinate method (GCM) with deformed-basis AMD wave functions were performed. A deformed-basis AMD wave function | Φ 〉 is a Slater determinant of triaxially deformed Gaussian wave packets, such that\n\n$$| Φ 〉 = ˆ A| ϕ 1 , ϕ 2 , · · · , ϕ$_{A}$ 〉 , (1)$$\n\n$$| ϕ$_{i}$ 〉 = | φ$_{i}$ 〉 ⊗ | χ$_{i}$ 〉 ⊗ | τ$_{i}$ 〉 , (2) 2 ν$_{σ}$ 1  ( Z$_{iσ}$ ) 2 $$\n\n$$| 〉 | 〉 ⊗ | 〉 ⊗ | 〉 〈 r | φ$_{i}$ 〉 = ∏ σ = x,y,z ( 2 ν$_{σ}$ π ) 1 4 exp   − ν$_{σ}$ ( σ − Z$_{iσ}$ √ ν$_{σ}$ ) 2   , (3)$$\n\nwhere ˆ A is the antisymmetrization operator and | ϕ$_{i}$ 〉 are single-particle wave functions. The variables | φ$_{i}$ 〉 , | χ$_{i}$ 〉 , and | τ$_{i}$ 〉 are a spatial part, a spin part, and an isospin part, respectively, of every single-particle wave function | ϕ$_{i}$ 〉 . The values ν = ( ν$_{x}$, ν$_{y}$, ν$_{z}$ ) are real parameters that indicate the width of the Gaussian single-particle wave function, and Z$_{i}$ = ( Z$_{ix}$, Z$_{iy}$, Z$_{iz}$ ) are complex parameters that indicate centroids of the single-particle wave functions. The width parameters ν are common to all nucleons. The complex parameters χ ↑ i and χ ↓ i represent spin directions. Basis wave functions of the GCM were obtained by the energy variation with a constraint on the quadrupole deformation parameter β of a total system after the projection to positive parity states. Variation parameters were ν , Z$_{i}$ , and χ ↑ , ↓ i . The isospin part of each single-particle wave function was fixed as a proton or a neutron. The Gogny D1S force was used as an effective interaction. Details of the framework are provided in Refs. 21–23.\n\nCalculated values of energy, triaxiality γ , and harmonic oscillator (H.O.) quanta Δ N H . O . for protons and neutrons measured from the lowest allowed states are shown as functions of the quadrupole deformation parameter β in the upper, middle, and lower panels, respectively, of Fig. 1. As for the energy curves, energies of the positive parity states and J π = 0 + and 2 + states, which were projected from each basis wave function, are plotted. K -mixing was\n\n3\n\n$$| χ$_{i}$ 〉 = χ ↑ i | ↑〉 + χ ↓ i | ↓〉 , | τ$_{i}$ 〉 = | π 〉 or | ν 〉 , (4)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "a4474d26ef5aff8c17adca10bd6359cbfcb5628549e8c087aff365b322093a47", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.999999997902051, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "PHY04-57120, and PHY07-58100).\n\n- [1] R. Pitthan and T. Walcher, Phys. Lett. 36B , 563 (1971).\n- [2] S. Fukuda and Y. Torizuka, Phys. Rev. Lett. 29 , 1109 (1972).\n- [3] M. B. Lewis and F. E. Bertrand, Nucl. Phys. A 196 , 337 (1972).\n- [4] M. N. Harakeh et al. , Phys. Rev. Lett. 38 , 686 (1977).\n- [5] D. H. Youngblood et al. , Phys. Rev. Lett. 39 , 1188 (1977).\n- [6] A. van der Woude, Int. Rev. Nucl. Phys. 7 , 100 (1991).\n- [7] D. H. Youngblood, P. Bogucki, J. D. Bronson, U. Garg, Y.-W. Lui, and C. M. Rozsa, Phys. Rev. C 23 , 1997 (1981).\n- [8] M. M. Sharma et al. , Phys. Rev. C 38 , 2562 (1988).\n- [9] H. P. Morsch, M. Rogge, P. Turek, and C. Mayer-Boricke, Phys. Rev. Lett. 45 , 337 (1980).\n- [10] B. F. Davis et al. , Phys. Rev. Lett. 79 , 607 (1997).\n- [11] J. Blaizot et al. , Nucl. Phys. A 591 , 435 (1995).\n- [12] J. Speth, Electric and Magnetic Giant Resonances in Nuclei (World Scientific, Singapore, 1991).\n- [13] M. N. Harakeh and A. van der Woude, Giant Resonances: Fundamental High-Frequency Modes of Nuclear Excitation (Oxford Univ. Press, New York, 2001).\n- [14] D. H. Youngblood et al. , Phys. Rev. Lett. 82 , 691 (1999).\n- [15] D. H. Youngblood et al. , Phys. Rev. C 60 , 014304 (1999).\n- [16] H. L. Clark, Y.-W. Lui, and D. H. Youngblood, Phys. Rev. C 63 , 031301(R) (2001).\n- [17] D. H. Youngblood, Y.-W. Lui, and H. L. Clark, Phys. Rev. C 65 , 034302 (2002).\n- [18] B. John, Y. Tokimoto, Y.-W. Lui, H. Clark, and D. Youngblood, Phys. Rev. C 68 , 014305 (2003).\n- [19] D. H. Youngblood et al. , Phys. Rev. C 69 , 034315 (2004).\n- [20] D. H. Youngblood et al. , Phys. Rev. C 69 , 054312 (2004).\n- [21] Y.-W. Lui et al. , Phys. Rev. C 70 , 014307 (2004).\n- [22] Y.-W. Lui et al. , Phys. Rev. C 73 , 014314 (2006).\n- [23] Y. Tokimoto et al. , Phys. Rev. C 74 , 044308 (2006).\n- [24] D. H. Youngblood, Y.-W. Lui, and H. L. Clark, Phys. Rev. C 76 , 027304 (2007).\n\n25", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "PHY04-57120, and PHY07-58100).\n\n- [1] R. Pitthan and T. Walcher, Phys. Lett. 36B , 563 (1971).\n\n- [2] S. Fukuda and Y. Torizuka, Phys. Rev. Lett. 29 , 1109 (1972).\n\n- [3] M. B. Lewis and F. E. Bertrand, Nucl. Phys. A 196 , 337 (1972).\n\n- [4] M. N. Harakeh et al. , Phys. Rev. Lett. 38 , 686 (1977).\n\n- [5] D. H. Youngblood et al. , Phys. Rev. Lett. 39 , 1188 (1977).\n\n- [6] A. van der Woude, Int. Rev. Nucl. Phys. 7 , 100 (1991).\n\n- [7] D. H. Youngblood, P. Bogucki, J. D. Bronson, U. Garg, Y.-W. Lui, and C. M. Rozsa, Phys. Rev. C 23 , 1997 (1981).\n\n- [8] M. M. Sharma et al. , Phys. Rev. C 38 , 2562 (1988).\n\n- [9] H. P. Morsch, M. Rogge, P. Turek, and C. Mayer-Boricke, Phys. Rev. Lett. 45 , 337 (1980).\n\n- [10] B. F. Davis et al. , Phys. Rev. Lett. 79 , 607 (1997).\n\n- [11] J. Blaizot et al. , Nucl. Phys. A 591 , 435 (1995).\n\n- [12] J. Speth, Electric and Magnetic Giant Resonances in Nuclei (World Scientific, Singapore, 1991).\n\n- [13] M. N. Harakeh and A. van der Woude, Giant Resonances: Fundamental High-Frequency Modes of Nuclear Excitation (Oxford Univ. Press, New York, 2001).\n\n- [14] D. H. Youngblood et al. , Phys. Rev. Lett. 82 , 691 (1999).\n\n- [15] D. H. Youngblood et al. , Phys. Rev. C 60 , 014304 (1999).\n\n- [16] H. L. Clark, Y.-W. Lui, and D. H. Youngblood, Phys. Rev. C 63 , 031301(R) (2001).\n\n- [17] D. H. Youngblood, Y.-W. Lui, and H. L. Clark, Phys. Rev. C 65 , 034302 (2002).\n\n- [18] B. John, Y. Tokimoto, Y.-W. Lui, H. Clark, and D. Youngblood, Phys. Rev. C 68 , 014305 (2003).\n\n- [19] D. H. Youngblood et al. , Phys. Rev. C 69 , 034315 (2004).\n\n- [20] D. H. Youngblood et al. , Phys. Rev. C 69 , 054312 (2004).\n\n- [21] Y.-W. Lui et al. , Phys. Rev. C 70 , 014307 (2004).\n\n- [22] Y.-W. Lui et al. , Phys. Rev. C 73 , 014314 (2006).\n\n- [23] Y. Tokimoto et al. , Phys. Rev. C 74 , 044308 (2006).\n\n- [24] D. H. Youngblood, Y.-W. Lui, and H. L. Clark, Phys. Rev. C 76 , 027304 (2007).\n\n25" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4162523413512705, + "doc_id": "9f65a864a2352313f798df4529e665133ab3b0d88cfc5db8fc56165d7ba6116d", + "edit_distance": 0.473224043715847, + "f1_score": 0.9115646258503401, + "meteor": 0.5449359196933615, + "precision": 0.9481132075471698, + "pred_md": "where E n is the energy of the state | n 〉 , a state with unit normalization. Because of the translational invariance of either the wall source operator A W 0 or the sum of the local operator A L 0 over a temporal hyperplane, the intermediate state | n 〉 must have zero momentum. There is then a single, finite-volume state, | B q ( /vector p = 0) V 〉 , separated from the other excited states by a non-zero energy gap, which will dominate as the time separation t -t 0 becomes large. Thus, in the limit of large t -t 0 , Eqs. (C1) and (C2) become:\n\n\n\n\n\nwhere we have used translational symmetry to replace the sum over /vector x in Eq. (C1) with the factor L 3 .\n\nFinally, Eq. (63) follows by taking the ratio of Eq. (C3) and the square root of Eq. (C4) to remove the unwanted factor 〈 0 | A L 0 (0) | B q ( /vector p = 0) 〉 and recognizing that in the limit of large volume the unit-normalized state | B q ( /vector p = 0) V 〉 in Eq. (C3) and the covariant, delta-function normalized state | B q ( /vector p = 0) 〉 in Eq. (57) are related by:\n\n\n\nThis discussion is standard and has been repeated here to provide a familiar background for the derivation of Eq. (72) where a new approach, special to the static approximation, is required. The complication in Eq. (72) arises because of the use of a box source which is not translationally invariant and which produces a superposition of B -meson states with various momenta. In the static limit, all of these states are degenerate since their energy no longer depends on their momenta. Thus, we cannot assume that the large time limit, t f /greatermuch t /greatermuch t 0 will project onto a unique ground state. However, as is worked out below, we can use an additional symmetry of the static approximation to show that the normalization of the box source cancels between the numerator and denominator of Eq. (72) [57].\n\nFortunately, this large set of degenerate states resulting from the momentum independence of the energy of the heavy-light meson, can be distinguished by a new conservation law which becomes exact in the static limit: the local conservation of heavy-quark number. The absence of spatial derivatives in heavy-quark actions shown in Eqs. (12) and (16) implies that the total number of heavy quarks at each spatial site is separately conserved. This conservation law results from the invariance of the heavy-quark action under the phase\n\n50", + "recall": 0.8777292576419214, + "true_md": "where E$_{n}$ is the energy of the state | n 〉 , a state with unit normalization. Because of the translational invariance of either the wall source operator A W 0 or the sum of the local operator A L 0 over a temporal hyperplane, the intermediate state | n 〉 must have zero momentum. There is then a single, finite-volume state, | B$_{q}$ ( ⃗ p = 0)$_{V}$ 〉 , separated from the other excited states by a non-zero energy gap, which will dominate as the time separation t − t$_{0}$ becomes large. Thus, in the limit of large t − t$_{0}$ , Eqs. (C1) and (C2) become:\n\nwhere we have used translational symmetry to replace the sum over ⃗ x in Eq. (C1) with the factor L $^{3}$.\n\nFinally, Eq. (63) follows by taking the ratio of Eq. (C3) and the square root of Eq. (C4) to remove the unwanted factor 〈 0 | A L $_{0}$(0) | B$_{q}$ ( ⃗ p = 0) 〉 and recognizing that in the limit of large volume the unit-normalized state | B$_{q}$ ( ⃗ p = 0)$_{V}$ 〉 in Eq. (C3) and the covariant, delta-function normalized state | B$_{q}$ ( ⃗ p = 0) 〉 in Eq. (57) are related by: √\n\nThis discussion is standard and has been repeated here to provide a familiar background for the derivation of Eq. (72) where a new approach, special to the static approximation, is required. The complication in Eq. (72) arises because of the use of a box source which is not translationally invariant and which produces a superposition of B -meson states with various momenta. In the static limit, all of these states are degenerate since their energy no longer depends on their momenta. Thus, we cannot assume that the large time limit, t$_{f}$ ≫ t ≫ t$_{0}$ will project onto a unique ground state. However, as is worked out below, we can use an additional symmetry of the static approximation to show that the normalization of the box source cancels between the numerator and denominator of Eq. (72) [57].\n\nFortunately, this large set of degenerate states resulting from the momentum indepen- dence of the energy of the heavy-light meson, can be distinguished by a new conservation law which becomes exact in the static limit: the local conservation of heavy-quark num- ber. The absence of spatial derivatives in heavy-quark actions shown in Eqs. (12) and (16) implies that the total number of heavy quarks at each spatial site is separately conserved. This conservation law results from the invariance of the heavy-quark action under the phase\n\n50\n\n$$〉 √ 2 m$_{B}$$_{q}$L $^{3}$| B$_{q}$ ( ⃗ p = 0)$_{V}$ 〉 → | B$_{q}$ ( ⃗ p = 0) 〉 . (C5)$$\n\n$$C $^{3}$〈 | | 〉〈 | $^{†}$| 〉 C $^{WW}$( t, t$_{0}$ ) = |〈 B$_{q}$ ( ⃗ p = 0)$_{V}$ | A W 0 (0) $^{†}$| 0 〉| $^{2}$e − m ∗ B $_{q}$( t − t$_{0}$ $^{)}$, (C4)$$\n\n$$C $^{LW}$( t, t$_{0}$ ) = L $^{3}$〈 0 | A L $_{0}$(0) | B$_{q}$ ( ⃗ p = 0)$_{V}$ 〉〈 B$_{q}$ ( ⃗ p = 0)$_{V}$ | A W 0 (0) $^{†}$| 0 〉 e − m ∗ B $_{q}$( t − t$_{0}$ ) (C3) − m ∗ $_{q}$( t − t$_{0}$$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6635569521542327, + "doc_id": "efbeaa0069eb96741b16cb5933766ee17f0df232d7117be9d4976c90993d899e", + "edit_distance": 0.43543543543543545, + "f1_score": 0.9496402877697843, + "meteor": 0.7818633407345232, + "precision": 0.9705882352941176, + "pred_md": "= 0 02\n\n= 0 02\n\nFIG. 3: Determination of M ren B s and M ren B l on the am l = 0 02 ensemble. . The left-hand plot shows the APE data, while the right-hand plot shows the HYP-smeared data. For each panel, the shaded band corresponds to the plateau extracted from averaging the data over four consecutive time slices. Errors shown are statistical only.\n\nFIG. 3: Determination of M ren B s and M ren B l on the am l = 0 02 ensemble. . The left-hand plot shows the APE data, while the right-hand plot shows the HYP-smeared data. For each panel, the shaded band corresponds to the plateau extracted from averaging the data over four consecutive time slices. Errors shown are statistical only.\n\nTABLE VI: The renormalized SU (3)-breaking ratio √ M ren B s /M ren B l for both the APE and HYPsmeared data sets. Errors shown are statistical only.\n\nη 's) are integrated out of the theory. Thus SU (2) χ PT does not require an expansion in the strange quark mass about the chiral limit, and the SU (2) χ PT expansion parameter in isospin-symmetric simulations is m/ l Λ , where χ m l is the light up-down sea quark mass and Λ χ is a typical hadronic scale. This improves the convergence of the chiral expansion relative to SU (3) χ PT, as long as m l is sufficiently light that corrections of O ( m/m l s ) are small. Studies by the RBC and UKQCD Collaborations, the PACS-CS Collaboration, and the MILC Collaboration confirm this picture and show that, for light pseudoscalar meson masses and decay constants, SU (2) χ PT within its applicable region converges more\n\n24", + "recall": 0.9295774647887324, + "true_md": "FIG. 3: Determination of M ren B$_{s}$ and M ren B$_{l}$ on the am$_{l}$ = 0 . 02 ensemble. The left-hand plot shows the APE data, while the right-hand plot shows the HYP-smeared data. For each panel, the shaded band corresponds to the plateau extracted from averaging the data over four consecutive time slices. Errors shown are statistical only.\n\nTABLE VI: The renormalized SU (3)-breaking ratio √ M ren $_{B$\\_{s}$}$/M ren B$_{l}$ for both the APE and HYP- smeared data sets. Errors shown are statistical only.\n\nη ’s) are integrated out of the theory. Thus SU (2) χ PT does not require an expansion in the strange quark mass about the chiral limit, and the SU (2) χ PT expansion parameter in isospin-symmetric simulations is m$_{l}$/ Λ$_{χ}$, where m$_{l}$ is the light up-down sea quark mass and Λ$_{χ}$ is a typical hadronic scale. This improves the convergence of the chiral expansion relative to SU (3) χ PT, as long as m$_{l}$ is sufficiently light that corrections of O ( m$_{l}$/m$_{s}$ ) are small. Studies by the RBC and UKQCD Collaborations, the PACS-CS Collaboration, and the MILC Collaboration confirm this picture and show that, for light pseudoscalar meson masses and decay constants, SU (2) χ PT within its applicable region converges more\n\n24" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5419281415161314, + "doc_id": "34577c0b9709c70d737a53815d1ce215fab1fb26690f812ec2f9bcda165529d6", + "edit_distance": 0.3103448275862069, + "f1_score": 0.9555555555555555, + "meteor": 0.7188010464695269, + "precision": 0.9728506787330317, + "pred_md": "ing behavior at inverse lattice spacings below a -1 ≈ 2 5 GeV, the difference between the . predicted value for f B s at a ≈ 0 11 fm given . O ( a 2 ) scaling and the value of f B s that they obtain in the continuum limit using data within the scaling region is only about 25%, which is again close to our power-counting estimate. Thus we expect that naive power-counting should lead to a reasonable estimate of the discretization error in the SU (3)-breaking ratios.\n\nFor the error estimates in this subsection, we evaluate the strong coupling constant at the lattice scale, α MS s (1 /a ) ∼ 1 / 3. We choose Λ QCD = 500 MeV because the typical QCD scale that enters heavy-light quantities tends to be larger than for light-light quantities, as indicated by fits to moments of inclusive B -decays using the heavy-quark expansion [74]. Fortunately, some of the finite lattice-spacing effects cancel in the ratios f B s /f B d and ξ . This can be seen by the fact that, although the APE and HYP data differ by about 15-20% for the individual decay constants and matrix elements, they agree within statistical errors for the ratios. In SU (3)-breaking quantities, errors must be proportional to the difference in quark masses ( m s -m d ). Dimensional analysis therefore suggests that contributions to the total discretization error are suppressed by the factor ( ˜ m s -˜ m / d ) Λ QCD ∼ 1 / 5, where we use ˜ m s and ˜ m d to denote the renormalized quark masses in the MS scheme [6] (as opposed to the bare lattice quark masses) in this subsection and the next. The observed size of SU (3)-breaking effects in the B -meson decay constants ( f B s /f B d -1) and in the B -mixing matrix elements ( ξ -1) are consistent with this expectation. Discretization errors in f B s /f B d and ξ can arise from both the actions and the operators. We estimate each source of error separately, and add them in quadrature to obtain the total discretization error.\n\nNone of the actions that we are using are O ( a 2 )-improved. Therefore the leading discretization errors from the domain-wall fermion action and Iwasaki gauge action are of O ( a 2 Λ 2 QCD ). When combined with the SU (3)-breaking suppression factor, this leads to discretization errors in the ratios f B s /f B d and ξ of O ( a 2 Λ 2 QCD × ( ˜ m s -˜ m / d ) Λ QCD ) ∼ 1 7%. The . leading heavy-quark discretization errors from the static action are also of O ( a 2 Λ 2 QCD ). Hence heavy-quark discretization errors also contribute ∼ 1 7% to the total error in the ratios. . Because we improve the heavy-light axial current used to compute the decay constant through O ( α ap s ), the leading discretization errors from the heavy-light current are of O ( α am s ), O ( α a 2 s Λ QCD ), and O ( a 2 Λ 2 QCD ). 4 When combined with the SU (3)-breaking suppression fac-\n\n4 There are also discretization errors from mixing with operators of other chiralities that are proportional\n\n37", + "recall": 0.9388646288209607, + "true_md": "ing behavior at inverse lattice spacings below a − 1 ≈ 2 . 5 GeV, the difference between the predicted value for f$_{B}$$\\_{s}$ at a ≈ 0 . 11 fm given O ( a $^{2}$) scaling and the value of f$\\_{B}$$_{s}$ that they obtain in the continuum limit using data within the scaling region is only about 25%, which is again close to our power-counting estimate. Thus we expect that naive power-counting should lead to a reasonable estimate of the discretization error in the SU (3)-breaking ratios.\n\nFor the error estimates in this subsection, we evaluate the strong coupling constant at the lattice scale, α MS s (1 /a ) ∼ 1 / 3. We choose Λ$_{QCD}$ = 500 MeV because the typical QCD scale that enters heavy-light quantities tends to be larger than for light-light quantities, as indicated by fits to moments of inclusive B -decays using the heavy-quark expansion [74]. Fortunately, some of the finite lattice-spacing effects cancel in the ratios f$_{B}$$\\_{s}$/f$\\_{B}$$_{d}$ and ξ . This can be seen by the fact that, although the APE and HYP data differ by about 15–20% for the individual decay constants and matrix elements, they agree within statistical errors for the ratios. In SU (3)-breaking quantities, errors must be proportional to the difference in quark masses ( m$_{s}$ − m$_{d}$ ). Dimensional analysis therefore suggests that contributions to the $^{total discretization error are suppressed by the factor (}$˜ m$_{s}$ − ˜ m$_{d}$ ) / Λ$_{QCD}$ ∼ 1 / 5, where we use ˜ m$_{s}$ and ˜ m$_{d}$ to denote the renormalized quark masses in the MS scheme [6] (as opposed to the bare lattice quark masses) in this subsection and the next. The observed size of SU (3)-breaking effects in the B -meson decay constants ( f$_{B}$$\\_{s}$/f$\\_{B}$$_{d}$ − 1) and in the B − mixing matrix elements ( ξ − 1) are consistent with this expectation. Discretization errors in f$_{B}$$\\_{s}$/f$\\_{B}$$_{d}$ and ξ can arise from both the actions and the operators. We estimate each source of error separately, and add them in quadrature to obtain the total discretization error.\n\nNone of the actions that we are using are O ( a $^{2}$)-improved. Therefore the leading dis- cretization errors from the domain-wall fermion action and Iwasaki gauge action are of O ( a $^{2}$Λ2$_{QCD}$). When combined with the SU (3)-breaking suppression factor, this leads to dis- cretization errors in the ratios f$_{B}$$\\_{s}$/f$\\_{B}$$_{d}$ and ξ of O ( a $^{2}$Λ2 QCD × $^{(}$˜ m$_{s}$ − ˜ m$_{d}$ ) / Λ$_{QCD}$) ∼ 1 . 7%. The leading heavy-quark discretization errors from the static action are also of O ( a $^{2}$Λ2$_{QCD}$). Hence heavy-quark discretization errors also contribute ∼ 1 . 7% to the total error in the ratios. Be- cause we improve the heavy-light axial current used to compute the decay constant through O ( α$_{s}$ap ), the leading discretization errors from the heavy-light current are of O ( α$_{s}$am ), O ( α 2 $_{s}$a Λ$_{QCD}$), and O ( a $^{2}$Λ2$_{QCD}$).4 When combined with the SU (3)-breaking suppression fac-\n\n4 There are also discretization errors from mixing with operators of other chiralities that are proportional\n\n37" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7963567214481458, + "doc_id": "9607b9fd46687034eba2bab6ad834ed3949bb3b8b3043caa6b2dd12750e68589", + "edit_distance": 0.4146341463414634, + "f1_score": 0.8571428571428572, + "meteor": 0.8312970150481475, + "precision": 0.8780487804878049, + "pred_md": "65\n\nλ -DNA s implied by the S-DNA picture of overstretching for salt concen(ce averaging), and averaged AT-DNA (right). The model of S-DNA described in the main text c ) 0 50 10 20 30 40 S-DNA B-DNA U-DNA FIG. 1: (Color) The thermodynamic tration c = 150 mM. (a) Cartoon sketches of phases B, M, U and S (see text). (b) Equilibrium phase stabilities (see Appendix) in the temperature-pulling force plane for phases U, B and S. We consider a 40 kbp fragment of λ -DNA (left), a similar length of 'averaged' CG-DNA (center; see Appendix for details of sequen is not thermodynamically stable at any temperature or stretching force within the first 40 kbps of λ -DNA as a whole. However, its considerable stability against unpeeling in CG-rich regions suggests the possibility of long-lived metastable 'pockets' of S-DNA during dynamic stretching experiments if nicks are few. Compare these data with the 'dynamic phase diagram' of Fig. 3.\n\n8", + "recall": 0.8372093023255814, + "true_md": "λ − DNA ( c ) 0 50 10 20 30 40 S-DNA B-DNA U-DNA FIG. 1: (Color) The thermo dynamics implied by the S-DNA picture of overstretching for salt concen- tration c = 150 mM. (a) Carto on sketc hes of phases B, M, U and S (see text). (b) Equilibrium phase stabilities (see Appendix) in the temp erature-pulling force plane for phases U, B and S. We consider a 40 kbp fragmen t of λ -DNA (left), a similar length of ‘av eraged’ CG-DNA (center; see Appendix for details of sequence averaging), and averaged AT-DNA (right). The model of S-DNA described in the main text is not thermodynamically stable at any temperature or stretching force within the first 40 kbps of λ -DNA as a whole. However, its considerable stability against unpeeling in CG-rich regions suggests the possibil- ity of long-lived metastable ‘pockets’ of S-DNA during dynamic stretching experiments if nicks are few. Compare these data with the ‘dynamic phase diagram’ of Fig. 3.\n\n8" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "725fa3e7a5bcbc4ddb3a2d3af2323cfbfeccb159bc2282e34e5516348329a2db", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.999968, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "This figure \"Fig03.jpg\" is available in \"jpg\"GLYPH<10> format from:\n\nhttp://arxiv.org/ps/1001.4384v3", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "This figure \"Fig03.jpg\" is available in \"jpg\"GLYPH<10> format from:\n\nhttp://arxiv.org/ps/1001.4384v3" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7266863319051965, + "doc_id": "e3466d1828c3a8df89575a9f2484a7f06c5b9007e57205f60e5109347936379a", + "edit_distance": 0.18607954545454544, + "f1_score": 0.9462809917355371, + "meteor": 0.8525053498993019, + "precision": 0.9662447257383966, + "pred_md": "and ν is given in units of E /h F . This prediction requires that atoms transferred to the third spin-state have only weak interactions with the other atoms, so that 'final state effects' are negligible [15-22], as is the case for 40 K atoms. In Fig. 1b, we plot a measured rf spectrum multiplied by 2 3 2 / π ν 2 3 2 / . The rf spectrum, Γ( ν ), is normalized so that the integral over the rf lineshape equals 0 5. . Empirically, we observe the predicted 1 /ν 3 2 / behavior for ν > ν C . To obtain the contact we average 2 3 2 / π ν 2 3 2 / Γ( ν ) for ν > ν C where ν C = 5 for ( k F a ) -1 > -0 5, . and ν C = 3 for ( k F a ) -1 < -0 5. .\n\nThe connection between the tail of the rf spectrum and the highk tail of the momentum distribution can be seen in the Fermi spectral function, which can be probed using photoemission spectroscopy for ultra cold atoms [10]. Recent photoemission spectroscopy results on a strongly interacting Fermi gas [23] revealed a weak, negatively dispersing feature at high k that persists to temperatures well above T F . This feature was attributed to the effect of interactions, or the contact, consistent with a recent prediction that the 1 /k 4 tail in n k ( ) should correspond to a highk part of the spectral function that disperses as -k 2 [24]. Atom photoemission spectroscopy, which is based upon momentum-resolved rf spectroscopy, also provides a method for measuring n k ( ). By integrating over the energy axis, or equivalently, summing data taken for different rf frequencies, we obtain n k ( ). This alternative method for measuring n k ( ) yields results similar to the ballistic expansion technique, but avoids the issue of magnetic-field ramp rates.\n\nIn Fig. 2 we show the measured contact for different values of the dimensionless interaction strength, 1 /k F a . Here, the contact is extracted using the three different techniques described above to probe two distinct microscopic quantities, namely the momentum distribution and the rf lineshape. We find that the amplitude of the 1 /k 4 tail of n k ( ) and the coefficient of the 1 /ν 3 2 / tail of the rf spectra yield consistent values for C . The solid line is a prediction for the contact that was reported in Fig. 1 of Ref. [5]. This prediction consists of the BCS limit, interpolation of Monte Carlo data near unitarity, and the BEC limit for a trapped gas at zero temperature and uses a local density approximation.\n\nRemarkably, the Tan relations predict that the contact, as revealed in probes of the microscopic behavior of the gas, is directly connected to the thermodynamics of the gas. To test the Tan relations, we measure the potential energy and release energy of the cloud. The total energy of the trapped gas divided by the number of particles, E , is the sum of three contributions, the kinetic energy T , the external potential energy V , and the interaction\n\n5", + "recall": 0.9271255060728745, + "true_md": "and ν is given in units of E$_{F}$ /h . This prediction requires that atoms transferred to the third spin-state have only weak interactions with the other atoms, so that “final state effects” are negligible [15–22], as is the case for $^{40}$K atoms. In Fig. 1b, we plot a measured rf spectrum multiplied by 2 3 / $^{2}$π$^{2}$ν3 / $^{2}$. The rf spectrum, Γ( ν ), is normalized so that the integral over the rf lineshape equals 0 . 5. Empirically, we observe the predicted 1 /ν 3 / 2 behavior for ν > ν$_{C}$ . To obtain the contact we average 2 3 / $^{2}$π$^{2}$ν3 / $^{2}$Γ( ν ) for ν > ν$_{C}$ where ν$_{C}$ = 5 for ( k$_{F}$ a ) − 1 > − 0 . 5, and ν$_{C}$ = 3 for ( k$_{F}$ a ) − 1 < − 0 . 5.\n\nThe connection between the tail of the rf spectrum and the high- k tail of the momentum distribution can be seen in the Fermi spectral function, which can be probed using photoe- mission spectroscopy for ultra cold atoms [10]. Recent photoemission spectroscopy results on a strongly interacting Fermi gas [23] revealed a weak, negatively dispersing feature at high k that persists to temperatures well above T$_{F}$ . This feature was attributed to the effect of interactions, or the contact, consistent with a recent prediction that the 1 /k 4 tail in n ( k ) should correspond to a high- k part of the spectral function that disperses as − k 2 [24]. Atom photoemission spectroscopy, which is based upon momentum-resolved rf spectroscopy, also provides a method for measuring n ( k ). By integrating over the energy axis, or equivalently, summing data taken for different rf frequencies, we obtain n ( k ). This alternative method for measuring n ( k ) yields results similar to the ballistic expansion technique, but avoids the issue of magnetic-field ramp rates.\n\nIn Fig. 2 we show the measured contact for different values of the dimensionless inter- action strength, 1 /k$_{F}$ a . Here, the contact is extracted using the three different techniques described above to probe two distinct microscopic quantities, namely the momentum dis- tribution and the rf lineshape. We find that the amplitude of the 1 /k 4 tail of n ( k ) and the coefficient of the 1 /ν 3 / 2 tail of the rf spectra yield consistent values for C . The solid line is a prediction for the contact that was reported in Fig. 1 of Ref. [5]. This prediction consists of the BCS limit, interpolation of Monte Carlo data near unitarity, and the BEC limit for a trapped gas at zero temperature and uses a local density approximation.\n\nRemarkably, the Tan relations predict that the contact, as revealed in probes of the microscopic behavior of the gas, is directly connected to the thermodynamics of the gas. To test the Tan relations, we measure the potential energy and release energy of the cloud. The total energy of the trapped gas divided by the number of particles, E , is the sum of three contributions, the kinetic energy T , the external potential energy V , and the interaction\n\n5" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.27601308933438856, + "doc_id": "ecf3a64ca271f12c3722a2f48aa7e7ed8b13694eccc37bd6039173e72c5dc14e", + "edit_distance": 0.8341543513957307, + "f1_score": 0.8676056338028169, + "meteor": 0.38190686698421217, + "precision": 0.9625, + "pred_md": "routinely, which is adopted here also, is to relate pressure and energy density by a linear expression [7]. For special choices of parameters we obtain islands of stability for such wormholes. To this end, we make use of numerical computation and plotting since the problem involves highly intricate functions for an analytical treatment.\n\nThe paper is organized as follows. In Sec. II the 5D EMGB thin-shell wormhole formalism has been reviewed briefly. We perturb the wormhole through radial linear perturbation and cast the problem into a potential-well problem in Sec. III. In Sec. IV we impose constraint conditions on parameters to determine possible stable regions through numerical analysis. The paper ends with Conclusion which appears in Sec. V.\n\n## II. A BRIEF REVIEW OF 5D EMGB THIN-SHELLS\n\nThe action of EMGB gravity in 5D (without cosmological constant, i.e. Λ = 0) is\n\n\n\nin which κ is related to the 5D Newton constant and α is the GB parameter. Beside the Maxwell Lagrangian the GB Lagrangian L GB consists of the quadratic scalar invariants in the combination\n\n\n\nin which R =scalar curvature, R µν =Ricci tensor and R µνρσ =Riemann tensor. Variational principle of S with respect to g µν yields\n\n\n\nwhere the Lovelock ( H µν ) and Maxwell ( T µν ) tensors respectively are\n\n\n\n\n\nThe Einstein tensor G µν is to be found from our metric ansatz\n\n\n\n3", + "recall": 0.7897435897435897, + "true_md": "routinely, which is adopted here also, is to relate pressure and energy density by a linear expression [7]. For special choices of parameters we obtain islands of stability for such wormholes. To this end, we make use of numerical computation and plotting since the problem involves highly intricate functions for an analytical treatment.\n\nThe action of EMGB gravity in 5D (without cosmological constant, i.e. Λ = 0) is\n\n√ in which κ is related to the 5D Newton constant and α is the GB parameter. Beside the Maxwell Lagrangian the GB Lagrangian L GB consists of the quadratic scalar invariants in the combination\n\nin which R =scalar curvature, R$_{µν}$ =Ricci tensor and R$_{µνρσ}$ =Riemann tensor. Variational principle of S with respect to g$_{µν}$ yields\n\nwhere the Lovelock ( H$_{µν}$ ) and Maxwell ( T$_{µν}$ ) tensors respectively are\n\nThe Einstein tensor G$_{µν}$ is to be found from our metric ansatz\n\n$$S = κ ∫ √ | g | d $^{5}$x ( R + α L GB − 1 4 F$_{µν}$F µν ) (1) is related to the 5D Newton constant and α is the GB parameter. Beside the$$\n\n$$L GB = R 2 − 4 R$_{µν}$R µν + R$_{µνρσ}$R µνρσ (2)$$\n\n$$G$_{µν}$ + 2 αH$_{µν}$ = κ $^{2}$T$_{µν}$ (3)$$\n\n$$H$_{µν}$ = 2( − R σκτ µ R$_{νσκτ}$ − 2 R $_{µρνσ}$R ρσ − 2 R$_{µσ}$R σ ν + RR$_{µν}$ ) − 1 2 g$_{µν}$L$_{GB}$, (4)$$\n\n$$T$_{µν}$ = F$_{µα}$F α ν − 1 4 g$_{µν}$F$_{αβ}$F $^{αβ}$. (5)$$\n\n$$ds 2 = − f ( r ) dt 2 + dr 2 f ( r ) + r $^{2}$( dθ 2 + sin $^{2}$θ ( dφ 2 + sin $^{2}$φdψ $^{2}$)) , (6)$$\n\n3\n\n## II. A BRIEF REVIEW OF 5D EMGB THIN-SHELLS\n\nThe paper is organized as follows. In Sec. II the 5D EMGB thin-shell wormhole formalism has been reviewed briefly. We perturb the wormhole through radial linear perturbation and cast the problem into a potential-well problem in Sec. III. In Sec. IV we impose constraint conditions on parameters to determine possible stable regions through numerical analysis.\n\nThe paper ends with Conclusion which appears in Sec. V." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7844243880754027, + "doc_id": "a6fe75e31bdce8edec7d67ed620c9d254a5ad98ba828dc091088aee90491ec41", + "edit_distance": 0.24242424242424243, + "f1_score": 0.9545454545454545, + "meteor": 0.8961348011232122, + "precision": 0.9735099337748344, + "pred_md": "FIG. 10: (Color online) ISGDR strength distributions obtained for the Sn isotopes in the present experiment. Error bars represent the uncertainties from fitting the angular distributions in the MDA procedure. The solid lines show Lorentzian fits to the data.\n\nFIG. 10: (Color online) ISGDR strength distributions obtained for the Sn isotopes in the present experiment. Error bars represent the uncertainties from fitting the angular distributions in the MDA procedure. The solid lines show Lorentzian fits to the data.\n\nFig. 9; the corresponding fitting parameters are presented in Table III and compared with results from TAMU [19, 21]. In this and subsequent comparisons and discussion, we refer only to the recent TAMU results because those are from comparable data and analysis-all other previous results on the Sn isotopes were from peak-fitting analyses of data taken at significantly lower energies.\n\nIn order to compare with the available theoretical results, various moment ratios for the experimental ISGMR strength distributions have been calculated over the excitation-energy range, E x = 10.5-20.5 MeV, encompassing the ISGMR peak. The results are listed in Table IV. The reasons for the difference between the present results and those from TAMU for 112 Sn and 124 Sn are not readily apparent but might be attributable to the fact that in their analysis the multipole decomposition is carried out after subtracting a 'background' from the excitation-energy spectrum, whereas, as pointed out earlier, no such subtraction is required in the present analysis since the Sn( α, α ' ) spectra obtained in our work have been rendered free of all instrumental background events.\n\n14", + "recall": 0.9363057324840764, + "true_md": "FIG. 10: (Color online) ISGDR strength distributions obtained for the Sn isotopes in the present experiment. Error bars represent the uncertainties from fitting the angular distributions in the MDA procedure. The solid lines show Lorentzian fits to the data.\n\nFig. 9; the corresponding fitting parameters are presented in Table III and compared with results from TAMU [19, 21]. In this and subsequent comparisons and discussion, we refer only to the recent TAMU results because those are from comparable data and analysis—all other previous results on the Sn isotopes were from peak-fitting analyses of data taken at significantly lower energies.\n\nIn order to compare with the available theoretical results, various moment ratios for the experimental ISGMR strength distributions have been calculated over the excitation-energy range, E$_{x}$ = 10.5–20.5 MeV, encompassing the ISGMR peak. The results are listed in Table IV. The reasons for the difference between the present results and those from TAMU for $^{112}$Sn and $^{124}$Sn are not readily apparent but might be attributable to the fact that in their analysis the multipole decomposition is carried out after subtracting a “background” from the excitation-energy spectrum, whereas, as pointed out earlier, no such subtraction is required in the present analysis since the Sn( α, α $^{′}$) spectra obtained in our work have been rendered free of all instrumental background events.\n\n14" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.12473144204158745, + "doc_id": "9106a5a351b51f14c5eb21d93d88d96b8335c7a435fa8d986fabe9c2729645c1", + "edit_distance": 0.7406896551724138, + "f1_score": 0.8461538461538461, + "meteor": 0.31602926087079997, + "precision": 0.9453125, + "pred_md": "17\n\nTaking into account the boundary conditions (50), (51), and defining | p 2 | ≡ ω 2 , eqs. (52) are simply solved; the solutions are given by\n\nwith\n\n\n\n\n\nAs it can be seen, the first two components of the right sector drop out from the low-energy effective Lagrangian altogether; this corresponds to the fact that in general the right charged sector does not contain any light mode, in contrast with the left charged and neutral ones.\n\nBefore substituting the solutions, note that the bulk contribution to the Lagrangian in Eq. (8) can be reduced - through an integration by parts - to a surface term plus a term proportional to the equations of motion,\n\n\n\nAfter the substitution, most of the terms vanish due to the BCs; we are left with\n\n\n\ntaking into account the definition of the ˜ and C ˜ functions (54), eq. S (56) reduces to\n\n\n\n∣ Eq. (57) has a complicated dependence on ω hidden in the functions ˜ S ' | 0 , ˜ C ' | 0 . In order to extract the low-energy behaviour of the theory, let's expand in ω . This can be done in", + "recall": 0.7658227848101266, + "true_md": "17\n\nTaking into account the boundary conditions (50), (51), and defining | p $^{2}$| ≡ ω $^{2}$, eqs. (52) are simply solved; the solutions are given by\n\nwith\n\nAs it can be seen, the first two components of the right sector drop out from the low-energy effective Lagrangian altogether; this corresponds to the fact that in general the right charged sector does not contain any light mode, in contrast with the left charged and neutral ones.\n\nBefore substituting the solutions, note that the bulk contribution to the Lagrangian in Eq. (8) can be reduced - through an integration by parts - to a surface term plus a term proportional to the equations of motion,\n\nAfter the substitution, most of the terms vanish due to the BCs; we are left with\n\ntaking into account the definition of the ˜ C and ˜ S functions (54), eq. (56) reduces to\n\nEq. (57) has a complicated dependence on ω hidden in the functions ˜ S $^{′}$| $_{0}$, ˜ C $^{′}$| $_{0}$. In order to extract the low-energy behaviour of the theory, let’s expand in ω . This can be done in\n\n$$L (2) bulk = ω b ( πR ) 2 g 2 5 ˜ C ′ ˜ S ′ ∣ 0 ( ˜ W a, tr µ ˜ W a, tr µ + ˜ B tr µ ˜ B tr µ ) . (57)$$\n\n$$L (2) bulk = − 1 2 g 2 5 b ( y ) W a L µ ∂$_{y}$W a µ L | πR + ( L → R, a → 3); (56)$$\n\n$$L (2) bulk = − 1 2 g 2 5 ( ∂$_{y}$ ( b ( y ) W a, tr L µ W a, tr µ L ) − W a, tr L µ (( ˆ D − p $^{2}$) δ µ ν + p $^{µ}$p$_{ν}$ ) W a, tr ν L ) + ( L → R ) . (55)$$\n\n$$ˆ D ( ˜ S, ˜ C ) = − ω $^{2}$( ˜ S, ˜ C ); ˜ S ( πR, ω ) = 0 , ˜ $_{S}$′$_{(}$$_{πR, ω}$$_{) =}$ ω ; ˜ C ( πR, ω ) = 1 , ˜ $_{C}$′$_{(}$$_{πR, ω}$$_{) = 0}$$_{.}$ (54)$$\n\n$$     $^{W}$$^{a, tr}$ L µ = ( ˜ C ( y, ω ) − ˜ C ′ (0 , ω ) ˜ S ′ (0 , ω ) ˜ S ( y, ω )) ˜ W a, tr µ W a, long L µ = ˜ W a, long µ W 3 , tr R µ = ( ˜ C ( y, ω ) − ˜ C ′ (0 , ω ) ˜ S ′ (0 , ω ) ˜ S ( y, ω )) ˜ B tr µ W 3 , long R µ = ˜ B long µ W 1 , 2 R µ = 0 (53)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "6b50ffadbb3a6fd89ef6c3f070f67fcd2fbc01c219a8a07d416d1cf8c7f0e037", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999999978712998, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "- [16] P. Serra, A. Cooray, D. E. Holz, A. Melchiorri, S. Pandolfi and D. Sarkar, arXiv:0908.3186 [astro-ph.CO].\n- [17] Y. Gong, R. G. Cai, Y. Chen and Z. H. Zhu, arXiv:0909.0596 [astro-ph.CO].\n- [18] M. Hicken et al. , Astrophys. J. 700 , 331 (2009) [arXiv:0901.4787 [astro-ph.CO]].\n- [19] W. J. Percival et al. , arXiv:0907.1660 [astro-ph.CO].\n- [20] E. Komatsu et al. [WMAP Collaboration], Astrophys. J. Suppl. 180 , 330 (2009) [arXiv:0803.0547 [astro-ph]].\n- [21] J. Simon, L. Verde and R. Jimenez, Phys. Rev. D 71 , 123001 (2005) [arXiv:astro-ph/0412269].\n- [22] E. Gaztanaga, A. Cabre and L. Hui, arXiv:0807.3551 [astro-ph].\n- [23] A. J. S. Hamilton and M. Tegmark, Mon. Not. Roy. Astron. Soc. 312 , 285 (2000) [arXiv:astro-ph/9905192].\n- [24] R. de Putter and E. V. Linder, Astropart. Phys. 29 , 424 (2008) [arXiv:0710.0373 [astro-ph]].\n- [25] S. Nesseris and L. Perivolaropoulos, Phys. Rev. D 72 , 123519 (2005) [arXiv:astro-ph/0511040].\n- [26] D. J. Eisenstein and W. Hu, Astrophys. J. 496 , 605 (1998) [arXiv:astro-ph/9709112].\n- [27] Q. G. Huang, M. Li, X. D. Li and S. Wang, Phys. Rev. D 80 , 083515 (2009) [arXiv:0905.0797 [astro-ph.CO]]; G. B. Zhao and X. Zhang, arXiv:0908.1568 [astro-ph.CO]; S. Qi, T. Lu and F. Y. Wang, arXiv:0904.2832 [astro-ph.CO].\n- [28] W. Hu and N. Sugiyama, Astrophys. J. 471 , 542 (1996) [arXiv:astro-ph/9510117].\n- [29] H. Zhang, arXiv:0909.3013 [astro-ph.CO].\n- [30] R. Lazkoz, S. Nesseris and L. Perivolaropoulos, JCAP 0511 , 010 (2005) [arXiv:astro-ph/0503230]; M. X. Luo and Q. P. Su, Phys. Lett. B 626 , 7 (2005) [arXiv:astro-ph/0506093].\n- [31] In preparing.\n- [32] J. C. B. Sanchez, S. Nesseris and L. Perivolaropoulos, JCAP 0911 , 029 (2009) [arXiv:0908.2636 [astro-ph.CO]]; H. Wei, arXiv:0906.0828 [astro-ph.CO]; Y. Gong, B. Wang and R. G. Cai, arXiv:1001.0807 [astro-ph.CO].\n- [33] D. J. Eisenstein et al. [SDSS Collaboration], Astrophys. J. 633 , 560 (2005) [arXiv:astro-ph/0501171].\n- [34] J. H. He, B. Wang and P. Zhang, Phys. Rev. D 80 , 063530 (2009) [arXiv:0906.0677 [gr-qc]]; R. G. Cai and Q. Su, arXiv:0912.1943 [astro-ph.CO]; C. Feng, B. Wang, E. Abdalla and R. K. Su, Phys. Lett. B 665 , 111 (2008) [arXiv:0804.0110 [astro-ph]]; H. H. Xiong, Y. F. Cai,\n\n16", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "- [16] P. Serra, A. Cooray, D. E. Holz, A. Melchiorri, S. Pandolfi and D. Sarkar, arXiv:0908.3186 [astro-ph.CO].\n\n- [17] Y. Gong, R. G. Cai, Y. Chen and Z. H. Zhu, arXiv:0909.0596 [astro-ph.CO].\n\n- [18] M. Hicken et al. , Astrophys. J. 700 , 331 (2009) [arXiv:0901.4787 [astro-ph.CO]].\n\n- [19] W. J. Percival et al. , arXiv:0907.1660 [astro-ph.CO].\n\n- [20] E. Komatsu et al. [WMAP Collaboration], Astrophys. J. Suppl. 180 , 330 (2009) [arXiv:0803.0547 [astro-ph]].\n\n- [21] J. Simon, L. Verde and R. Jimenez, Phys. Rev. D 71 , 123001 (2005) [arXiv:astro-ph/0412269].\n\n- [22] E. Gaztanaga, A. Cabre and L. Hui, arXiv:0807.3551 [astro-ph].\n\n- [23] A. J. S. Hamilton and M. Tegmark, Mon. Not. Roy. Astron. Soc. 312 , 285 (2000) [arXiv:astro-ph/9905192].\n\n- [24] R. de Putter and E. V. Linder, Astropart. Phys. 29 , 424 (2008) [arXiv:0710.0373 [astro-ph]].\n\n- [25] S. Nesseris and L. Perivolaropoulos, Phys. Rev. D 72 , 123519 (2005) [arXiv:astro-ph/0511040].\n\n- [26] D. J. Eisenstein and W. Hu, Astrophys. J. 496 , 605 (1998) [arXiv:astro-ph/9709112].\n\n- [27] Q. G. Huang, M. Li, X. D. Li and S. Wang, Phys. Rev. D 80 , 083515 (2009) [arXiv:0905.0797 [astro-ph.CO]]; G. B. Zhao and X. Zhang, arXiv:0908.1568 [astro-ph.CO]; S. Qi, T. Lu and F. Y. Wang, arXiv:0904.2832 [astro-ph.CO].\n\n- [28] W. Hu and N. Sugiyama, Astrophys. J. 471 , 542 (1996) [arXiv:astro-ph/9510117].\n\n- [29] H. Zhang, arXiv:0909.3013 [astro-ph.CO].\n\n- [30] R. Lazkoz, S. Nesseris and L. Perivolaropoulos, JCAP 0511 , 010 (2005) [arXiv:astro-ph/0503230]; M. X. Luo and Q. P. Su, Phys. Lett. B 626 , 7 (2005) [arXiv:astro-ph/0506093].\n\n- [31] In preparing.\n\n- [32] J. C. B. Sanchez, S. Nesseris and L. Perivolaropoulos, JCAP 0911 , 029 (2009) [arXiv:0908.2636 [astro-ph.CO]]; H. Wei, arXiv:0906.0828 [astro-ph.CO]; Y. Gong, B. Wang and R. G. Cai, arXiv:1001.0807 [astro-ph.CO].\n\n- [33] D. J. Eisenstein et al. [SDSS Collaboration], Astrophys. J. 633 , 560 (2005) [arXiv:astro-ph/0501171].\n\n- [34] J. H. He, B. Wang and P. Zhang, Phys. Rev. D 80 , 063530 (2009) [arXiv:0906.0677 [gr-qc]]; R. G. Cai and Q. Su, arXiv:0912.1943 [astro-ph.CO]; C. Feng, B. Wang, E. Abdalla and R. K. Su, Phys. Lett. B 665 , 111 (2008) [arXiv:0804.0110 [astro-ph]]; H. H. Xiong, Y. F. Cai,\n\n16" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.48086201317763655, + "doc_id": "74e5f0f887c3dc6c58f0bca6b159e502b1baa5b1f427df8c270ab717e681fa2c", + "edit_distance": 0.6367461430575035, + "f1_score": 0.9470404984423676, + "meteor": 0.4949615684082476, + "precision": 0.9681528662420382, + "pred_md": "no improvement of χ 2 total,min compared to the case of 3 bins, which indicates there is no more turning points of w de in this region.\n\nTABLE II: The best-fitted parameters for Model I.\n\n## B. Model II\n\nAs data points with z > 1 are rather less than those with z < 1, to see clearly the evolution behavior of EoS in the region of low redshift, we now focus on the region with z ∈ (0 , 0 9), avoiding the possible turning point around . z = 1, and set the divided points as: (0 , z 1 , 0 9 . , ∞ ), i.e.,\n\n\n\nIn this case, we obtain the best-fitted tuning point z 1 = 0 45, and the best-fitted . w de ( z ) is shown in Fig. 1 (the red, dashed line) which almost coincides with the best-fitted w de ( z ) of Model I in z ∈ (0 , 0 9). . This indicates that the data favor w de ( z ) to turn its evolution direction around z = 0 45, and favor an EoS with crossing the cosmological constant ( . w = -1) [29]. Then we obtain 1 σ and 2 σ errors of parameters by using the MCMC method. Here we have fixed z 1 = 0 45 in the process to obtain the errors of the parameters. . Note that the errors of the parameters w de ( z i ) also represent errors of whole w de ( z ) in each bin, the 1 σ and 2 σ errors of w de ( z ) shown in Fig. 2 are obtained by connecting the corresponding error ranges of w de ( z i ). If another parameter set of w de ( z ) (as introduced in section II) was used, one will get the same result as that of Fig. 2.\n\nWe see from the top left panel of Fig. 2 that there are deviations of w de from -1 around z = 0 and z = 0 45 beyond 1 . σ , and around z = 0 9 the deviation . is beyond 2 σ . We decorrelate the parameters in w de ( z ) by using the technique introduced in section II. The uncorrelated errors are shown in the bottom left panel of Fig. 2. In that case, there are no\n\n10", + "recall": 0.926829268292683, + "true_md": "no improvement of χ 2 total,min compared to the case of 3 bins, which indicates there is no more turning points of w$_{de}$ in this region.\n\nAs data points with z > 1 are rather less than those with z < 1, to see clearly the evolution behavior of EoS in the region of low redshift, we now focus on the region with z ∈ (0 , 0 . 9), avoiding the possible turning point around z = 1, and set the divided points as: (0 , z$_{1}$, 0 . 9 , ∞ ), i.e.,\n\nWe see from the top left panel of Fig. 2 that there are deviations of w$_{de}$ from − 1 around z = 0 and z = 0 . 45 beyond 1 σ , and around z = 0 . 9 the deviation is beyond 2 σ . We decorrelate the parameters in w$_{de}$ ( z ) by using the technique introduced in section II. The uncorrelated errors are shown in the bottom left panel of Fig. 2. In that case, there are no\n\n$$w$_{de}$ ( z ) =     w (0) + w ( z$_{1}$ ) − w (0) z$_{1}$ z , 0 < z ≤ z$_{1}$ w ( z$_{1}$ ) + w (0 . 9) − w ( z$_{1}$ ) 0 . 9 − z$_{1}$ ( z − z$_{1}$ ) , z$_{1}$ < z ≤ 0 . 9 − 1 , 0 . 9 < z < ∞ (27) In this case, we obtain the best-fitted tuning point z$_{1}$ = 0 . 45, and the best-fitted w$_{de}$ ( z ) is$$\n\n In this case, we obtain the best-fitted tuning point z$_{1}$ = 0 . 45, and the best-fitted w$_{de}$ ( z ) is shown in Fig. 1 (the red, dashed line) which almost coincides with the best-fitted w$_{de}$ ( z ) of Model I in z ∈ (0 , 0 . 9). This indicates that the data favor w$_{de}$ ( z ) to turn its evolution direction around z = 0 . 45, and favor an EoS with crossing the cosmological constant ( w = − 1) [29]. Then we obtain 1 σ and 2 σ errors of parameters by using the MCMC method. Here we have fixed z$_{1}$ = 0 . 45 in the process to obtain the errors of the parameters. Note that the errors of the parameters w$_{de}$ ( z$_{i}$ ) also represent errors of whole w$_{de}$ ( z ) in each bin, the 1 σ and 2 σ errors of w$_{de}$ ( z ) shown in Fig. 2 are obtained by connecting the corresponding error ranges of w$_{de}$ ( z$_{i}$ ). If another parameter set of w$_{de}$ ( z ) (as introduced in section II) was used, one will get the same result as that of Fig. 2.\n\n## B. Model II\n\nTABLE II: The best-fitted parameters for Model I.\n\n10" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.798099029047251, + "doc_id": "75923e124cbb25cc08ca921a60019f02f5a69a1369f210da8da2d629a422a68d", + "edit_distance": 0.29048843187660667, + "f1_score": 0.9811320754716982, + "meteor": 0.9453454584197999, + "precision": 0.9936305732484076, + "pred_md": "FIG. 9: Plot showing Dependence on the size of hole to the parameter Q , at N = 10000\n\nFIG. 9: Plot showing Dependence on the size of hole to the parameter Q , at N = 10000\n\ninner hole in these systems also scales like R /similarequal Q 0 5 . where Q is the number of holes. The full data for all k for the same data set is shown in the figure 10. This can be used to estimate errors. As can be seen, for large Q the data has not converged yet, so the values quoted in the figure 9 are high and taking care of this more systematically has a tendency to reduce the exponent α . It is hard to extrapolate to large k , because we do not have an exact functional form to match. This requires understanding the statistics and the large N limit better. As seen in the previous section, this is rather subtle.\n\nFIG. 10: The function R 0 ( Q ) at various values of k , for Q = 10 20 30 40 60 80 100, , , , , , , N = 10000\n\nFIG. 10: The function R 0 ( Q ) at various values of k , for Q = 10 20 30 40 60 80 100, , , , , , , N = 10000\n\nIn a previous paper [6], a different measurement was done by keeping Q fixed but varying N , and a scaling exponent of 1 / 4 was reported. This expression involved small values of N , so it is very likely that the system was subject to large fluctuations. In this paper we have seen how this is an issue in general, and the deviations can be very large. Also, the convergence to large N is slow, so the dependence on q = Q/N is not reliable in the paper [18]. The range of q = Q/N explored in that paper was similar to the one of this paper. Neither result is conclusive. In this paper the radius has not converged and the systematic\n\n27", + "recall": 0.968944099378882, + "true_md": "27\n\nFIG. 9: Plot showing Dependence on the size of hole to the parameter Q , at N = 10000\n\nFIG. 10: The function R$_{0}$ ( Q ) at various values of k , for Q = 10 , 20 , 30 , 40 , 60 , 80 , 100, N = 10000\n\ninner hole in these systems also scales like R ≃ Q 0 . 5 where Q is the number of holes. The full data for all k for the same data set is shown in the figure 10. This can be used to estimate errors. As can be seen, for large Q the data has not converged yet, so the values quoted in the figure 9 are high and taking care of this more systematically has a tendency to reduce the exponent α . It is hard to extrapolate to large k , because we do not have an exact functional form to match. This requires understanding the statistics and the large N limit better. As seen in the previous section, this is rather subtle.\n\nIn a previous paper [6], a different measurement was done by keeping Q fixed but varying N , and a scaling exponent of 1 / 4 was reported. This expression involved small values of N , so it is very likely that the system was subject to large fluctuations. In this paper we have seen how this is an issue in general, and the deviations can be very large. Also, the convergence to large N is slow, so the dependence on q = Q/N is not reliable in the paper [18]. The range of q = Q/N explored in that paper was similar to the one of this paper.\n\nNeither result is conclusive. In this paper the radius has not converged and the systematic" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "9dfaa7c9f9ed6f159550d31a703189e451d6f55a61cc7f8e127f75ce61fc341e", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999999979908236, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "38\n\n- [30] H.-C. Cheng, C. T. Hill, S. Pokorski and J. Wang, Phys. Rev. D64 , 065007 (2001), [hep-th/0104179].\n- [31] H. Abe, T. Kobayashi, N. Maru and K. Yoshioka, Phys. Rev. D67 , 045019 (2003), [hep-ph/0205344].\n- [32] A. Falkowski and H. D. Kim, JHEP 08 , 052 (2002), [hep-ph/0208058].\n- [33] L. Randall, Y. Shadmi and N. Weiner, JHEP 01 , 055 (2003), [hep-th/0208120].\n- [34] D. T. Son and M. A. Stephanov, Phys. Rev. D69 , 065020 (2004), [hep-ph/0304182].\n- [35] J. de Blas, A. Falkowski, M. Perez-Victoria and S. Pokorski, JHEP 08 , 061 (2006), [hep-th/0605150].\n- [36] R. Foadi, S. Gopalakrishna and C. Schmidt, JHEP 03 , 042 (2004), [hep-ph/0312324].\n- [37] R. Foadi, S. Gopalakrishna and C. Schmidt, Phys. Lett. B606 , 157 (2005), [hep-ph/0409266].\n- [38] J. Hirn and J. Stern, Eur. Phys. J. C34 , 447 (2004), [hep-ph/0401032].\n- [39] R. Casalbuoni, S. De Curtis and D. Dominici, Phys. Rev. D70 , 055010 (2004), [hep-ph/0405188].\n- [40] R. S. Chivukula, E. H. Simmons, H.-J. He, M. Kurachi and M. Tanabashi, Phys. Rev. D70 , 075008 (2004), [hep-ph/0406077].\n- [41] H. Georgi, Phys. Rev. D71 , 015016 (2005), [hep-ph/0408067].\n- [42] R. Casalbuoni, S. De Curtis, D. Dolce and D. Dominici, Phys. Rev. D71 , 075015 (2005), [hep-ph/0502209].\n- [43] J. Bechi, R. Casalbuoni, S. De Curtis and D. Dominici, Phys. Rev. D74 , 095002 (2006), [hep-ph/0607314].\n- [44] B. Coleppa, S. Di Chiara and R. Foadi, JHEP 05 , 015 (2007), [hep-ph/0612213].\n- [45] D. Becciolini, M. Redi and A. Wulzer, 0906.4562.\n- [46] R. Casalbuoni, S. De Curtis, D. Dominici and R. Gatto, Phys. Lett. B155 , 95 (1985).\n- [47] R. Casalbuoni, S. De Curtis, D. Dominici and R. Gatto, Nucl. Phys. B282 , 235 (1987).\n- [48] M. Bando, T. Kugo and K. Yamawaki, Phys. Rept. 164 , 217 (1988).\n- [49] M. Bando, T. Fujiwara and K. Yamawaki, Prog. Theor. Phys. 79 , 1140 (1988).\n- [50] M. Bando, T. Kugo, S. Uehara, K. Yamawaki and T. Yanagida, Phys. Rev. Lett. 54 , 1215 (1985).\n- [51] R. S. Chivukula et al. , Phys. Rev. D74 , 075011 (2006), [hep-ph/0607124].\n- [52] S. Matsuzaki, R. S. Chivukula, E. H. Simmons and M. Tanabashi, Phys. Rev. D75 , 073002", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "38\n\n- [30] H.-C. Cheng, C. T. Hill, S. Pokorski and J. Wang, Phys. Rev. D64 , 065007 (2001), [hep-th/0104179].\n\n- [31] H. Abe, T. Kobayashi, N. Maru and K. Yoshioka, Phys. Rev. D67 , 045019 (2003), [hep-ph/0205344].\n\n- [32] A. Falkowski and H. D. Kim, JHEP 08 , 052 (2002), [hep-ph/0208058].\n\n- [33] L. Randall, Y. Shadmi and N. Weiner, JHEP 01 , 055 (2003), [hep-th/0208120].\n\n- [34] D. T. Son and M. A. Stephanov, Phys. Rev. D69 , 065020 (2004), [hep-ph/0304182].\n\n- [35] J. de Blas, A. Falkowski, M. Perez-Victoria and S. Pokorski, JHEP 08 , 061 (2006), [hep-th/0605150].\n\n- [36] R. Foadi, S. Gopalakrishna and C. Schmidt, JHEP 03 , 042 (2004), [hep-ph/0312324].\n\n- [37] R. Foadi, S. Gopalakrishna and C. Schmidt, Phys. Lett. B606 , 157 (2005), [hep-ph/0409266].\n\n- [38] J. Hirn and J. Stern, Eur. Phys. J. C34 , 447 (2004), [hep-ph/0401032].\n\n- [39] R. Casalbuoni, S. De Curtis and D. Dominici, Phys. Rev. D70 , 055010 (2004), [hep-ph/0405188].\n\n- [40] R. S. Chivukula, E. H. Simmons, H.-J. He, M. Kurachi and M. Tanabashi, Phys. Rev. D70 , 075008 (2004), [hep-ph/0406077].\n\n- [41] H. Georgi, Phys. Rev. D71 , 015016 (2005), [hep-ph/0408067].\n\n- [42] R. Casalbuoni, S. De Curtis, D. Dolce and D. Dominici, Phys. Rev. D71 , 075015 (2005), [hep-ph/0502209].\n\n- [43] J. Bechi, R. Casalbuoni, S. De Curtis and D. Dominici, Phys. Rev. D74 , 095002 (2006), [hep-ph/0607314].\n\n- [44] B. Coleppa, S. Di Chiara and R. Foadi, JHEP 05 , 015 (2007), [hep-ph/0612213].\n\n- [45] D. Becciolini, M. Redi and A. Wulzer, 0906.4562.\n\n- [46] R. Casalbuoni, S. De Curtis, D. Dominici and R. Gatto, Phys. Lett. B155 , 95 (1985).\n\n- [47] R. Casalbuoni, S. De Curtis, D. Dominici and R. Gatto, Nucl. Phys. B282 , 235 (1987).\n\n- [48] M. Bando, T. Kugo and K. Yamawaki, Phys. Rept. 164 , 217 (1988).\n\n- [49] M. Bando, T. Fujiwara and K. Yamawaki, Prog. Theor. Phys. 79 , 1140 (1988).\n\n- [50] M. Bando, T. Kugo, S. Uehara, K. Yamawaki and T. Yanagida, Phys. Rev. Lett. 54 , 1215 (1985).\n\n- [51] R. S. Chivukula et al. , Phys. Rev. D74 , 075011 (2006), [hep-ph/0607124].\n\n- [52] S. Matsuzaki, R. S. Chivukula, E. H. Simmons and M. Tanabashi, Phys. Rev. D75 , 073002" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "8944fed9e33b4660f3264c12b27ba24eb1fbf04214cf27384f20d3ecbf4af3c3", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999999346009671, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "- 13 M.S.Gordon, M.A.Freitag, P.Bandyopadhyay, J.H.Jensen, V.Kairys, W.J.Stevens J.Phys.Chem.A 105 , 293 (2001)\n- 14 P.N.Day, J.H.Jensen,M.S.Gordon and S.P.Webb, W.J.Stevens and M.Krauss, D.Garmer, H.Basch and D.Cohen J.Chem.Phys. 105 , 1968 (1996)\n- 15 W.Chen, M.S.Gordon, J.Chem.Phys., 105 , 11081(1996)\n- 16 GAMESS - M.W.Schmidt, K.K.Baldridge, J.A.Boatz, S.T.Elbert, M.S.Gordon, J.J.Jensen, S.Koseki, N.Matsunaga, K.A.Nguyen, S.Su, T.L.Windus, M.Dupuis, J.A.Montgomery J.Comput.Chem. 14 , 1347 (1993)\n- 17 M.A.Thompson. M.C.Zerner, J.Am Chem.Soc. 112 , 7828 (1990)\n- 18 P.O.J.scherer, in: J-Aggregates, ed. T.Kobayashi, World scientific, p.95 (1996)\n- 19 E.T.J.Nibbering,D.A.Wiersma,K.Duppen, Chem.Phys. 183 , 167 (1994)\n- 20 M.Maroncelli, J.Chem.Phys. 94 ,2084 (1991)\n- 21 E.A.Carter, J.T.Hynes,J.Chem.Phys. 94 ,5961 (1991)\n- 22 T.Hayashi, T. la Cour Jansen,Wei Zhuang, and S.Mukamel, J.Phys.Chem. A 109 , 64 (2005)\n\n7", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "- 13 M.S.Gordon, M.A.Freitag, P.Bandyopadhyay, J.H.Jensen, V.Kairys, W.J.Stevens J.Phys.Chem.A 105 , 293 (2001)\n\n- 14 P.N.Day, J.H.Jensen,M.S.Gordon and S.P.Webb, W.J.Stevens and M.Krauss, D.Garmer, H.Basch and D.Cohen J.Chem.Phys. 105 , 1968 (1996)\n\n- 15 W.Chen, M.S.Gordon, J.Chem.Phys., 105 , 11081(1996)\n\n- 16 GAMESS - M.W.Schmidt, K.K.Baldridge, J.A.Boatz, S.T.Elbert, M.S.Gordon, J.J.Jensen, S.Koseki, N.Matsunaga, K.A.Nguyen, S.Su, T.L.Windus, M.Dupuis, J.A.Montgomery J.Comput.Chem. 14 , 1347 (1993)\n\n- 17 M.A.Thompson. M.C.Zerner, J.Am Chem.Soc. 112 , 7828 (1990)\n\n- 18 P.O.J.scherer, in: J-Aggregates, ed. T.Kobayashi, World scientific, p.95 (1996)\n\n- 19 E.T.J.Nibbering,D.A.Wiersma,K.Duppen, Chem.Phys. 183 , 167 (1994)\n\n- 20 M.Maroncelli, J.Chem.Phys. 94 ,2084 (1991)\n\n- 21 E.A.Carter, J.T.Hynes,J.Chem.Phys. 94 ,5961 (1991)\n\n- 22 T.Hayashi, T. la Cour Jansen,Wei Zhuang, and S.Mukamel, J.Phys.Chem. A 109 , 64 (2005)\n\n7" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9634173598904175, + "doc_id": "5ccdfd4eceaa34131b2690cb3796802781413eab35ea1ff6dcfe379ca0c78d3f", + "edit_distance": 0.16703296703296702, + "f1_score": 0.9771689497716894, + "meteor": 0.9657644268000813, + "precision": 0.981651376146789, + "pred_md": "7\n\ngular). The first one is non-perturbative in nature, as it provides a cutoff on the number of independent degrees of freedom characterizing the geometry. It also suggests that the system might have some 'granular' features. The second class of corrections can be used to represent the ordinary quantum fluctuations of the geometry.\n\nGiven a wave function for these degrees of freedom, we would ask the following simple questions:\n\n- 1. What is the topology of the distribution?\n- 2. What are the geometric measurements of the holes of the geometry?\n- 3. How big are the quantum fluctuations?\n\nNotice that when we consider N finite, the notion of topology and shape becomes fuzzy, due to both the fluctuations of the eigenvalues, as well as because of the discreteness of the eigenvalues themselves. First, the eigenvalues have some probability to be in any distribution, except on sets of measure zero. Thus the support of the distribution is not a very useful notion of geometry, but maybe it is enough to describe the topology. However, if one is trying to find sets of measure zero numerically this might not be easy to extract from a simulation in the general case. Secondly, measurements on fluctuating object shapes will have some inherent randomness and there will be errors in measurements. If the particles can be in any spatial distribution, there are no minimal distances to define sizes either. Thus how one chooses to sample the distribution to define a notion of size becomes important as well.\n\nIn such a situation, we have to change the questions to something that makes sense computationally. We need observables such that in the thermodynamic limit ( N →∞ ) they recover the classical measurement problem with probability arbitrarily close to one at finite sampling (taking a single measurement on a typical configuration, within some prescribed error bars). Some observables are better suited to this task than others. Moreover, different observables will differ at finite N by 1 /N corrections (see for example the discussion in [36] for fuzzy sphere membranes). So the real question we need to ask is what are the optimal choices of observables that characterize geometric measurements and how fast do they approach the thermodynamic large N limit?\n\nAs we said above, we will approach this problem by doing numerical simulations. The basic setup for these simulations was described in [21] and [7]. The Monte-Carlo model we", + "recall": 0.9727272727272728, + "true_md": "7\n\ngular). The first one is non-perturbative in nature, as it provides a cutoff on the number of independent degrees of freedom characterizing the geometry. It also suggests that the system might have some ’granular’ features. The second class of corrections can be used to represent the ordinary quantum fluctuations of the geometry.\n\nGiven a wave function for these degrees of freedom, we would ask the following simple questions:\n\nNotice that when we consider N finite, the notion of topology and shape becomes fuzzy, due to both the fluctuations of the eigenvalues, as well as because of the discreteness of the eigenvalues themselves. First, the eigenvalues have some probability to be in any distribu- tion, except on sets of measure zero. Thus the support of the distribution is not a very useful notion of geometry, but maybe it is enough to describe the topology. However, if one is trying to find sets of measure zero numerically this might not be easy to extract from a simulation in the general case. Secondly, measurements on fluctuating object shapes will have some inherent randomness and there will be errors in measurements. If the particles can be in any spatial distribution, there are no minimal distances to define sizes either. Thus how one chooses to sample the distribution to define a notion of size becomes important as well.\n\nIn such a situation, we have to change the questions to something that makes sense computationally. We need observables such that in the thermodynamic limit ( N → ∞ ) they recover the classical measurement problem with probability arbitrarily close to one at finite sampling (taking a single measurement on a typical configuration, within some prescribed error bars). Some observables are better suited to this task than others. Moreover, different observables will differ at finite N by 1 /N corrections (see for example the discussion in [36] for fuzzy sphere membranes). So the real question we need to ask is what are the optimal choices of observables that characterize geometric measurements and how fast do they approach the thermodynamic large N limit?\n\nAs we said above, we will approach this problem by doing numerical simulations. The basic setup for these simulations was described in [21] and [7]. The Monte-Carlo model we\n\n1. What is the topology of the distribution?\n\n2. What are the geometric measurements of the holes of the geometry?\n\n3. How big are the quantum fluctuations?" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.42016756815639617, + "doc_id": "77f26f97563ec5c64ae88ef3fc36b5116667a79757be6d4c0d3aadbd7366d9fa", + "edit_distance": 0.5339805825242718, + "f1_score": 0.9249999999999999, + "meteor": 0.8272480115040669, + "precision": 0.9736842105263158, + "pred_md": "FIG. 1: (Color online) The nuclear matter EOSs plotted as pressure versus energy density. The energy density is normalized by /epsilon1 0 = 150 MeV fm 3 / which is the typical value of the energy density for the nuclear matter at the saturation density.\n\nFIG. 1: (Color online) The nuclear matter EOSs plotted as pressure versus energy density. The energy density is normalized by /epsilon1 0 = 150 MeV fm 3 / which is the typical value of the energy density for the nuclear matter at the saturation density.\n\n13", + "recall": 0.8809523809523809, + "true_md": "FIG. 1: (Color online) The nuclear matter EOSs plotted as pressure versus energy density. The energy density is normalized by ϵ$_{0}$ = 150 MeV / fm 3 which is the typical value of the energy density for the nuclear matter at the saturation density.\n\n13" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4749367228135455, + "doc_id": "d1d7690b17275e884f3f8b72b6769e33c43103ea7b7e1871df4c87a5bf4ed0c2", + "edit_distance": 0.504424778761062, + "f1_score": 0.9647058823529412, + "meteor": 0.8818696770046601, + "precision": 0.9761904761904762, + "pred_md": "FIG. 5: (Color online) Plots for the mass-radius relationships for the equilibrium sequences of the nonrotating compact stars obtained using various EOSs as shown in Fig. 3. The solid circles and triangles divide the curves according to the composition of the hybrid stars as described in Fig. 4.\n\nFIG. 5: (Color online) Plots for the mass-radius relationships for the equilibrium sequences of the nonrotating compact stars obtained using various EOSs as shown in Fig. 3. The solid circles and triangles divide the curves according to the composition of the hybrid stars as described in Fig. 4.\n\n17", + "recall": 0.9534883720930233, + "true_md": "FIG. 5: (Color online) Plots for the mass-radius relationships for the equilibrium sequences of the non- rotating compact stars obtained using various EOSs as shown in Fig. 3. The solid circles and triangles divide the curves according to the composition of the hybrid stars as described in Fig. 4.\n\n17" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5557593860268704, + "doc_id": "337b1ea1bfbf92dab50fecb838f6040a2041324fb6f772db69567c9bfe0ec3d8", + "edit_distance": 0.4107142857142857, + "f1_score": 0.9457831325301205, + "meteor": 0.7191743651162582, + "precision": 0.9573170731707317, + "pred_md": "Fig. 1 shows the relic density Ω N h 2 as a function of the DM mass m N for a set of parameters: ( v , M ' h , M H , M Z ' , sin θ ) = (4000 GeV 120 GeV 200 GeV 1000 GeV 0 7), for , , , , . example. Willkinson Microwave Anisotropy Probe measured the value of DM abundance as Ω DM h 2 /similarequal 0 1 [15]. . The figure shows that a desired DM relic abundance can be obtained for only near Higgs resonances, m N ≈ M / h 2 or M / H 2.\n\nFig. 2 shows the relic density Ω N h 2 as a function of the DM mass m N for a smaller Higgs mixing sin θ = 0 3 (others are the same as in Fig. 1). . Compared with Fig. 1, for m N /lessorsimilar M W where the DM particles dominantly annihilate into ff ¯ , the relic density further increases because of the small mixing angle. When the DM is heavier, the annihilation mode into Higgs boson pairs is opened and the relic density slightly deceases, but the reduction is not enough to reach Ω N h 2 /similarequal 0 1. .\n\nFIG. 1: The thermal relic density of RH neutrino DM as a function of its mass for a parameter set: ( v , M ' h , M H , M Z ' , sin θ ) = (3000 GeV 120 GeV 200 GeV 1000 GeV 0 7). , , , , .\n\nFIG. 1: The thermal relic density of RH neutrino DM as a function of its mass for a parameter set: ( v , M ' h , M H , M Z ' , sin θ ) = (3000 GeV 120 GeV 200 GeV 1000 GeV 0 7). , , , , .\n\nOur model is quite analogous to the so-called gauge singlet scalar dark matter [16-18]. Some recent studies can be found in Refs. [19, 20]. In the gauge singlet scalar DM model, the thermal abundance is mainly controlled by the interactions between the SM Higgs boson and the DM particle. In our model, B -L Higgs VEV v ' can play the same role for m N < M W , namely a larger v ' corresponds to weaker coupling between DM and Higgs for a fixed DM mass. On the other hand, for m N > M W the difference appears. Even if the annihilation\n\n6", + "recall": 0.9345238095238095, + "true_md": "Fig. 1 shows the relic density Ω$_{N}$ h 2 as a function of the DM mass m$_{N}$ for a set of parameters: ( v ′ , M$_{h}$, M$_{H}$, M$_{Z}$ ′ , sin θ ) = (4000 GeV , 120 GeV , 200 GeV , 1000 GeV , 0 . 7), for example. Willkinson Microwave Anisotropy Probe measured the value of DM abundance as Ω$_{DM}$ h 2 ≃ 0 . 1 [15]. The figure shows that a desired DM relic abundance can be obtained for only near Higgs resonances, m$_{N}$ ≈ M$_{h}$/ 2 or M$_{H}$/ 2. Fig. 2 shows the relic density Ω$_{N}$ h 2 as a function of the DM mass m$_{N}$ for a smaller Higgs\n\n≈ Fig. 2 shows the relic density Ω$_{N}$ h 2 as a function of the DM mass m$_{N}$ for a smaller Higgs mixing sin θ = 0 . 3 (others are the same as in Fig. 1). Compared with Fig. 1, for m$_{N}$ ≲ M$_{W}$ where the DM particles dominantly annihilate into f ¯ f , the relic density further increases because of the small mixing angle. When the DM is heavier, the annihilation mode into Higgs boson pairs is opened and the relic density slightly deceases, but the reduction is not enough to reach Ω$_{N}$ h 2 ≃ 0 . 1.\n\nFIG. 1: The thermal relic density of RH neutrino DM as a function of its mass for a parameter set: ( v ′ , M$_{h}$, M$_{H}$, M$_{Z}$ ′ , sin θ ) = (3000 GeV , 120 GeV , 200 GeV , 1000 GeV , 0 . 7).\n\nOur model is quite analogous to the so-called gauge singlet scalar dark matter [16–18]. Some recent studies can be found in Refs. [19, 20]. In the gauge singlet scalar DM model, the thermal abundance is mainly controlled by the interactions between the SM Higgs boson and the DM particle. In our model, B − L Higgs VEV v ′ can play the same role for m$_{N}$ < M$_{W}$ , namely a larger v ′ corresponds to weaker coupling between DM and Higgs for a fixed DM mass. On the other hand, for m$_{N}$ > M$_{W}$ the difference appears. Even if the annihilation\n\n6" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9468147077783072, + "doc_id": "c3572f4d910a1538be0e0b912e990919924bbec5fb91f61b9adc06038f08d1a9", + "edit_distance": 0.24459234608985025, + "f1_score": 0.9653333333333335, + "meteor": 0.787312506737483, + "precision": 0.9679144385026738, + "pred_md": "our next venture in this line of research.\n\n- [1] M. Visser, Lorantzian Wormholes (AIP Press, Newyork, 1996).\n- [2] D. G. Boulware and S. Deser, Phys. Rev. Lett. 55 , 2656(1985).\n- [3] B. Zwiebach, Phys. Lett. B 156 , 315(1985);\n- D. G. Boulware and S. Deser, Phys. Rev. Lett., 55 , 2656(1985);\n- R. G. Cai and K. S. Soh, Phys. Rev. D 59 , 044013 (1999); R. G. Cai, ibid. 65 , 084014(2002);\n- R. Aros, R. Troncoso and J. Zanelli, Phys. Rev. D 63 , 084015(2001);\n- Y. M. Cho and I. P. Neupane, Phys. Rev. D 66 , 024044(2002);\n- M. H. Dehghani, Phys. Rev. D 67, 064017(2003);\n- S. H. Mazharimousavi and M. Halilsoy, Phys. Rev. D 76 , 087501(2007).\n- [4] E. Gravanis and S. Willison, Phys. Rev. D 75 , 084025(2007);\n- G. Dotti, J. Oliva and R. Troncoso, Phys. Rev. D 76 , 064038 (2007);\n- F. Canfora and A. Giacomini, Phys. Rev. D 78 , 084034 (2008).\n- [5] H. Maeda and M. Nozawa, Phys. Rev. D 78 , 024005(2008); M. Thibeault, C. Simeone, and E. F. Eiroa, Gen. Relativ. Gravit. 38 , 1593(2006).\n- [6] M. G. Richarte and C. Simeone, Phys. Rev. D 76 , 087502(2007); D 77 , 089903(E)(2008).\n- [7] P. R. Brady, J. Louko and E. Poisson, Phys. Rev. D 44 , 1891(1991);\n- E. Poisson and M. Visser, Phys. Rev. D 52 , 7318(1995).\n- [8] G. Darmois, M' emorial des Sciences Math'matiques, Fascicule XXV (Gauthier-Villars, Paris, e 1927), Chap. V;\n- W. Israel, Nuovo Cimento B 44 , 1(1966); B 48 , 463(E)(1967).\n- [9] S. C. Davis, Phys. Rev. D, 67 , 024030 (2003).\n- [10] E. Gravanis and S. Willison, Phys. Rev. D 75 , 084025(2007);\n- G. Dotti, J. Oliva and R. Troncoso, Phys. Rev. D 76 , 064038 (2007);\n- F. Canfora and A. Giacomini, Phys. Rev. D 78 , 084034 (2008).\n\n## Figure Captions:\n\nFig. 1: ˜ V '' (˜) a > 0 region ( m = 0 5, . q = 1 0) for various ranges of . β and ˜ a . 0 The lower and upper limits of the parameters are evident in the figure. The metric function f (˜) and r\n\n10", + "recall": 0.9627659574468085, + "true_md": "our next venture in this line of research.\n\n10\n\n## Figure Captions:\n\nFig. 1: ˜ V $^{′′}$(˜ a ) > 0 region ( m = 0 . 5, q = 1 . 0) for various ranges of β and ˜ a 0 . The lower and upper limits of the parameters are evident in the figure. The metric function f (˜ r ) and\n\n- [1] M. Visser, Lorantzian Wormholes (AIP Press, Newyork, 1996).\n\n- [2] D. G. Boulware and S. Deser, Phys. Rev. Lett. 55 , 2656(1985).\n\n- [3] B. Zwiebach, Phys. Lett. B 156 , 315(1985);\n\n- D. G. Boulware and S. Deser, Phys. Rev. Lett., 55 , 2656(1985);\n\n- R. G. Cai and K. S. Soh, Phys. Rev. D 59 , 044013 (1999); R. G. Cai, ibid. 65 , 084014(2002);\n\n- R. Aros, R. Troncoso and J. Zanelli, Phys. Rev. D 63 , 084015(2001);\n\n- Y. M. Cho and I. P. Neupane, Phys. Rev. D 66 , 024044(2002);\n\n- M. H. Dehghani, Phys. Rev. D 67, 064017(2003);\n\n- S. H. Mazharimousavi and M. Halilsoy, Phys. Rev. D 76 , 087501(2007).\n\n- [4] E. Gravanis and S. Willison, Phys. Rev. D 75 , 084025(2007);\n\n- G. Dotti, J. Oliva and R. Troncoso, Phys. Rev. D 76 , 064038 (2007);\n\n- F. Canfora and A. Giacomini, Phys. Rev. D 78 , 084034 (2008).\n\n- [5] H. Maeda and M. Nozawa, Phys. Rev. D 78 , 024005(2008);\n\n- M. Thibeault, C. Simeone, and E. F. Eiroa, Gen. Relativ. Gravit. 38 , 1593(2006).\n\n- [6] M. G. Richarte and C. Simeone, Phys. Rev. D 76 , 087502(2007); D 77 , 089903(E)(2008).\n\n- [7] P. R. Brady, J. Louko and E. Poisson, Phys. Rev. D 44 , 1891(1991);\n\n- E. Poisson and M. Visser, Phys. Rev. D 52 , 7318(1995).\n\n- [8] G. Darmois, M´emorial des Sciences Math´ematiques, Fascicule XXV (Gauthier-Villars, Paris, 1927), Chap. V;\n\n- W. Israel, Nuovo Cimento B 44 , 1(1966); B 48 , 463(E)(1967).\n\n- [9] S. C. Davis, Phys. Rev. D, 67 , 024030 (2003).\n\n- [10] E. Gravanis and S. Willison, Phys. Rev. D 75 , 084025(2007);\n\n- G. Dotti, J. Oliva and R. Troncoso, Phys. Rev. D 76 , 064038 (2007);\n\n- F. Canfora and A. Giacomini, Phys. Rev. D 78 , 084034 (2008)." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.526192471418947, + "doc_id": "78fbd71a909a5753fb25ac17de8920c8c23b3194e890196562c2007f388ba89f", + "edit_distance": 0.6983471074380165, + "f1_score": 0.934010152284264, + "meteor": 0.6788068786327115, + "precision": 0.9484536082474226, + "pred_md": "= 0 02\n\n= 0 02\n\nFIG. 1: Determination of m ∗ B q (left) and Φ ren B q (right) using the average of two time sources on the am l = 0 02 ensemble. . The upper plots show the APE data, while the lower plots show the HYP-smeared data. For each panel, the shaded band corresponds to the plateau extracted from averaging the data over four consecutive time slices. Errors shown are statistical only.\n\nFIG. 1: Determination of m ∗ B q (left) and Φ ren B q (right) using the average of two time sources on the am l = 0 02 ensemble. . The upper plots show the APE data, while the lower plots show the HYP-smeared data. For each panel, the shaded band corresponds to the plateau extracted from averaging the data over four consecutive time slices. Errors shown are statistical only.\n\nmatrix element divided by the B q -meson mass:\n\n\n\nFor the determination of M B q , we use different spatial sources for the two choices of link smearing: in the case of APE-smeared links we use box sources of size 8 , while for HYP 3 smearing we use wall sources. The local-wall two-point functions are already defined in\n\n20", + "recall": 0.92, + "true_md": "FIG. 1: Determination of m ∗ B$_{q}$ (left) and Φ ren B$_{q}$ (right) using the average of two time sources on the am$_{l}$ = 0 . 02 ensemble. The upper plots show the APE data, while the lower plots show the HYP-smeared data. For each panel, the shaded band corresponds to the plateau extracted from averaging the data over four consecutive time slices. Errors shown are statistical only.\n\nmatrix element divided by the B$_{q}$ -meson mass:\n\nFor the determination of M$_{B}$$\\_{q}$ , we use different spatial sources for the two choices of link smearing: in the case of APE-smeared links we use box sources of size 8 $^{3}$, while for HYP smearing we use wall sources. The local-wall two-point functions are already defined in\n\n20\n\n$$M$_{B}$$_{q}$ = M $_{q}$/m$_{B}$$_{q}$ . (66)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8272199590363192, + "doc_id": "6b1b7ba5d1b352ffa1ebd3b7d78b428340fd9f19b7056e3bb119032ceb71ae42", + "edit_distance": 0.21428571428571427, + "f1_score": 0.9314079422382671, + "meteor": 0.8898478455825383, + "precision": 0.9416058394160584, + "pred_md": "arXiv:1001.0397v1 [quant-ph] 3 Jan 2010\n\n## Decoherence as a signature of an excited state quantum phase transition\n\nA. Rela˜o , n 1 ∗ J. M. Arias , J. Dukelsky , J. E. Garc´ ıa-Ramos , and P. P´rez-Fern´ndez 2 1 3 e a 2\n\n1 Instituto de Estructura de la Materia, CSIC, Serrano 123, E-28006 Madrid, Spain\n\n2 Departamento de F´ ısica At´ omica,\n\nMolecular y Nuclear, Facultad de F´ ısica, Universidad de Sevilla,\n\nApartado 1065, 41080 Sevilla, Spain\n\n3 Departamento de F´ ısica Aplicada,\n\nUniversidad de Huelva, 21071 Huelva, Spain\n\n(Dated: November 10, 2018)\n\n## Abstract\n\nWe analyze the decoherence induced on a single qubit by the interaction with a two-level boson system with critical internal dynamics. We explore how the decoherence process is affected by the presence of quantum phase transitions in the environment. We conclude that the dynamics of the qubit changes dramatically when the environment passes through a continuous excited state quantum phase transition. If the system-environment coupling energy equals the energy at which the environment has a critical behavior, the decoherence induced on the qubit is maximal and the fidelity tends to zero with finite size scaling obeying a power-law.\n\nPACS numbers: 03.65.Yz, 05.70.Fh, 64.70.Tg\n\n∗ Electronic address: armando@iem.cfmac.csic.es\n\n1", + "recall": 0.9214285714285714, + "true_md": "# Decoherence as a signature of an excited state quantum phase transition\n\nA. Rela˜ no $^{1}$, ∗ J. M. Arias $^{2}$, J. Dukelsky$^{1}$, J. E. Garc´ıa-Ramos$^{3}$, and P. P´ erez-Fern´ andez 2\n\n1 Instituto de Estructura de la Materia, CSIC, Serrano 123, E-28006 Madrid, Spain\n\n2 Departamento de F´ısica At´ omica, Molecular y Nuclear, Facultad de F´ısica, Universidad de Sevilla, Apartado 1065, 41080 Sevilla, Spain\n\n3 Departamento de F´ısica Aplicada, Universidad de Huelva, 21071 Huelva, Spain\n\n(Dated: November 10, 2018)\n\n## Abstract\n\nWe analyze the decoherence induced on a single qubit by the interaction with a two-level boson system with critical internal dynamics. We explore how the decoherence process is affected by the presence of quantum phase transitions in the environment. We conclude that the dynamics of the qubit changes dramatically when the environment passes through a continuous excited state quantum phase transition. If the system-environment coupling energy equals the energy at which the environment has a critical behavior, the decoherence induced on the qubit is maximal and the fidelity tends to zero with finite size scaling obeying a power-law.\n\nPACS numbers: 03.65.Yz, 05.70.Fh, 64.70.Tg\n\n∗ Electronic address: armando@iem.cfmac.csic.es\n\n1\n\narXiv:1001.0397v1 [quant-ph] 3 Jan 2010" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.38133561615919875, + "doc_id": "726c0ba458fdf61ef11d8b3a9f61454dac9e8fdf31c858096a4807cc4c4d1d1a", + "edit_distance": 0.580896686159844, + "f1_score": 0.927536231884058, + "meteor": 0.8170962061717235, + "precision": 0.9320388349514563, + "pred_md": "FIG. 2: Typical KMC results for the final dried-in nanoparticle structures resulting from the evaporative dewetting processes of nanoparticle solutions (nanofluids) in the case of (a) a spinodal-like process at µ = -2 55 . , (b) nucleation and growth of holes at µ = -2 3 . , (c) unstable fronts at µ = -2 3 . and low mobility M = 5 , and (d) unstable fronts at µ = -2 3 . and medium mobility M = 10 . The starting configuration in (a) and (b) is a homogeneous liquid film with uniformly distributed particles whereas in (c) and (d) a hole at the center is nucleated 'by hand'. The remaining parameters are (a,b) M = 50 , glyph[epsilon1] nl = 2 0 . , glyph[epsilon1] nn = 1 5 . , ρ av n = 0 2 . , kT = 0 3 . , MC steps = 500 , domain size 1200 × 1200 ; (c,d) ε nn = 2 0 . , glyph[epsilon1] nl = 1 5 . , ρ av n = 0 2 . , kT = 0 2 . , MC steps = 3000 , domain size 1200 × 1200 . Lattice sites occupied by particles are coloured black, and the empty sites are coloured white.\n\nFIG. 2: Typical KMC results for the final dried-in nanoparticle structures resulting from the evaporative dewetting processes of nanoparticle solutions (nanofluids) in the case of (a) a spinodal-like process at µ = -2 55 . , (b) nucleation and growth of holes at µ = -2 3 . , (c) unstable fronts at µ = -2 3 . and low mobility M = 5 , and (d) unstable fronts at µ = -2 3 . and medium mobility M = 10 . The starting configuration in (a) and (b) is a homogeneous liquid film with uniformly distributed particles whereas in (c) and (d) a hole at the center is nucleated 'by hand'. The remaining parameters are (a,b) M = 50 , glyph[epsilon1] nl = 2 0 . , glyph[epsilon1] nn = 1 5 . , ρ av n = 0 2 . , kT = 0 3 . , MC steps = 500 , domain size 1200 × 1200 ; (c,d) ε nn = 2 0 . , glyph[epsilon1] nl = 1 5 . , ρ av n = 0 2 . , kT = 0 2 . , MC steps = 3000 , domain size 1200 × 1200 . Lattice sites occupied by particles are coloured black, and the empty sites are coloured white.\n\n11", + "recall": 0.9230769230769231, + "true_md": "FIG. 2: Typical KMC results for the final dried-in nanoparticle structures resulting from the evaporative dewetting processes of nanoparticle solutions (nanofluids) in the case of (a) a spinodal-like process at µ = − 2 . 55 , (b) nucleation and growth of holes at µ = − 2 . 3 , (c) unstable fronts at µ = − 2 . 3 and low mobility M = 5 , and (d) unstable fronts at µ = − 2 . 3 and medium mobility M = 10 . The starting configuration in (a) and (b) is a homogeneous liquid film with uniformly distributed particles whereas in (c) and (d) a hole at the center is nucleated ‘by hand’. The remaining parameters are (a,b) M = 50 , ϵ$_{nl}$ = 2 . 0 , ϵ$_{nn}$ = 1 . 5 , ρ av n = 0 . 2 , kT = 0 . 3 , MC steps = 500 , domain size 1200 × 1200 ; (c,d) ε$_{nn}$ = 2 . 0 , ϵ$_{nl}$ = 1 . 5 , ρ av n = 0 . 2 , kT = 0 . 2 , MC steps = 3000 , domain size 1200 × 1200 . Lattice sites occupied by particles are coloured black, and the empty sites are coloured white.\n\n11" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8921000475026821, + "doc_id": "55cc37f4f4d773facfbbbfe4b44336bd5bf020da2d3686d15de81348a29639f0", + "edit_distance": 0.06972789115646258, + "f1_score": 0.9213483146067415, + "meteor": 0.9387760920292658, + "precision": 0.9534883720930233, + "pred_md": "where γ is the liquid-gas surface tension and f ( h ) is a local free energy term that describes the wettability of the surface. Since µ corresponds to a chemical potential, the term µh may either bias the system towards the liquid or towards the gas state. The variation of F w.r.t. h gives the pressure. It contains the curvature (Laplace) pressure -γ ∆ h and the disjoining pressure Π( h ) = -∂ f h ( h ) . Many different forms for the latter are in use (see, e.g., Refs. [4, 8, 63, 70-73]).\n\nFor the present system a thin film description using Eq. (1) is not appropriate because the nanoparticles are not taken into account. However, under certain conditions one can augment equation (1) for the evolution of the film thickness by coupling it to an equation for the evolution of the mean particle concentration. The resulting model is able to describe the behaviour of an evaporating solution on the meso- and macroscale. Such an approach is briefly discussed below in Section III C. Weshould expect such a model to describe the mesoscopic dewetting front discussed above. However, the theory is less suited to a description of the dewetting dynamics of the ultrathin postcursor\n\nfilm.\n\nThe dewetting of the ultrathin film of highly concentrated suspension may be described by a discrete stochastic model such as, for instance, a kinetic Monte Carlo (KMC) model based solely on evaporation/condensation dynamics of the solvent and diffusion of the solute [35, 39, 41]. The validity of this strong assumption regarding the relevant transport processes can be confirmed from an estimate based on Eq. (1): The pressure p = δF/δh drives convection and evaporation. The convective mobility is proportional to h 3 , i.e., it is large for thick films but decreases strongly with reduced film thickness. The evaporative mobility, however, is a constant, implying that evaporation will dominate below a certain (cross-over) thickness. For the parameter values of Ref. [57] and a small contact angle ( ≈ 0 01 . ), the cross-over thickness is in the range of 1-5 nanometers. This estimate justifies the neglect of convective transport in a description of the postcursor film and may explain why one has such good agreement between the experimentally observed patterns and the patterns obtained from a purely two-dimensional (single layer) kinetic Monte Carlo model [35]. We introduce the KMC model below in Section III A.\n\nIn several respects, however, the kinetic Monte Carlo model is rather simplistic, limiting its potential applications. For instance, the thermodynamic chemical potential as well as any wetting interaction of the solvent with the substrate are collected in a single parameter - an effective chemical potential. This implies that any influence of a disjoining pressure is 'smeared out' over the whole system and that no distinction between the short- and the long-range parts of the disjoining pressure is possible. It is furthermore based on the assumption that evaporation/condensation is\n\n8", + "recall": 0.8913043478260869, + "true_md": "where γ is the liquid-gas surface tension and f ( h ) is a local free energy term that describes the wettability of the surface. Since µ corresponds to a chemical potential, the term µh may either bias the system towards the liquid or towards the gas state. The variation of F w.r.t. h gives the pressure. It contains the curvature (Laplace) pressure − γ Δ h and the disjoining pressure Π( h ) = − ∂$_{h}$f ( h ) . Many different forms for the latter are in use (see, e.g., Refs. [4, 8, 63, 70–73]).\n\nFor the present system a thin film description using Eq. (1) is not appropriate because the nanopar- ticles are not taken into account. However, under certain conditions one can augment equation (1) for the evolution of the film thickness by coupling it to an equation for the evolution of the mean particle concentration. The resulting model is able to describe the behaviour of an evaporating so- lution on the meso- and macroscale. Such an approach is briefly discussed below in Section III C. We should expect such a model to describe the mesoscopic dewetting front discussed above. How- ever, the theory is less suited to a description of the dewetting dynamics of the ultrathin postcursor film.\n\nThe dewetting of the ultrathin film of highly concentrated suspension may be described by a dis- crete stochastic model such as, for instance, a kinetic Monte Carlo (KMC) model based solely on evaporation/condensation dynamics of the solvent and diffusion of the solute [35, 39, 41]. The va- lidity of this strong assumption regarding the relevant transport processes can be confirmed from an estimate based on Eq. (1): The pressure p = δF/δh drives convection and evaporation. The convective mobility is proportional to h $^{3}$, i.e., it is large for thick films but decreases strongly with reduced film thickness. The evaporative mobility, however, is a constant, implying that evapora- tion will dominate below a certain (cross-over) thickness. For the parameter values of Ref. [57] and a small contact angle ( ≈ 0 . 01 ), the cross-over thickness is in the range of 1-5 nanometers. This estimate justifies the neglect of convective transport in a description of the postcursor film and may explain why one has such good agreement between the experimentally observed patterns and the patterns obtained from a purely two-dimensional (single layer) kinetic Monte Carlo model [35]. We introduce the KMC model below in Section III A.\n\nIn several respects, however, the kinetic Monte Carlo model is rather simplistic, limiting its po- tential applications. For instance, the thermodynamic chemical potential as well as any wetting interaction of the solvent with the substrate are collected in a single parameter – an effective chem- ical potential. This implies that any influence of a disjoining pressure is ‘smeared out’ over the whole system and that no distinction between the short- and the long-range parts of the disjoining pressure is possible. It is furthermore based on the assumption that evaporation/condensation is\n\n8" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.46812015596094764, + "doc_id": "20f16014422f0fcbeb1faf265cff316a96bd55b638412437c2f945b2895852b9", + "edit_distance": 0.37609649122807015, + "f1_score": 0.9690346083788707, + "meteor": 0.6754415345150953, + "precision": 0.981549815498155, + "pred_md": "surface hole doped with NO 2 at a temperature T = 10 K. Figures 4(c) and (d) illustrate that the charge neutral point-like FS (Fig. 4(a)) is robust up to room temperature ( T = 300 K) over days long measurement times. A density of states that decreases linearly to zero at the Dirac point energy at 300 K (Fig. 4(f)) is further evidence that the low energy properties of Bi 1 9975 . Ca 0 0025 . Se .NO 3 2 are dominated by a novel ground state that features massless helical Dirac fermions with nearly 100% spin polarization. This also confirms a non-trivial π Berrys phase on the surface due to the spin-momentum locking pattern that we observe, which is similar to the robust Berrys phase previously observed in the Bi-Sb system [14] (Fig. 1).\n\nHelical nodal Dirac fermions are forbidden from acquiring a mass through band gap formation because they are located around time-reversal invariant (Kramers') momenta k T = ¯ or M (Fig. Γ ¯ 4(h)). This makes them fundamentally different from chiral Dirac fermions such as those found in graphene, which are located at K and not topologically ¯ protected (Fig. 4(g)). The helical Dirac fermion on the surface of Bi Se 2 3 owes its existence to a non-zero topological number ν 0 given by (-1) ν 0 = Π k T Π N m =1 ξ 2 m ( k T ), where ξ 2 m ( k T ) is the parity eigenvalue of the bulk wavefunction at the 3D Kramers' point k T and N is the number of occupied bulk bands [4]. Because Ca dopants are present in only trace quantities in Bi 1 9975 . Ca 0 0025 . Se .NO , 3 2 the values of ξ 2 m ( k T ) do not deviate from those of pure Bi Se , as evidenced by the persistence of a single gapless surface band in both Bi Se 2 3 2 3 and Bi 1 9975 . Ca 0 0025 . Se . 3 Both Ca 2+ and NO 2 -are non-magnetic and so do not break timereversal symmetry, therefore the same topological number ( ν 0 = 1) applies even in the Dirac transport regime (Fig. 4) realized by our method shown here, which is stable with both time and temperature. Our direct demonstration of spin-polarized edge channels and room temperature operability of chemically gated stoichiometric Bi Se 2 3 or Bi 2 -δ Ca Se , not δ 3 achieved in purely 2D topological systems such as Hg(Cd)Te quantum wells [29], enables exciting future room temperature experiments on surface helical Dirac fermions that carry a non-trivial π Berry's phase.\n\nOur demonstration of topological order at room temperature opens up possibilities of using quantum Hall-like phenomena and spin-polarized protected edge channels for spintronic or computing device applications without the traditional requirements of high magnetic fields and delicate cryogenics. A direct detection of surface-edge states would be possible in stoichiometric Bi Se 2 3 or Bi 2 -δ Ca Se , using transport methods which will bear signatures of δ 3 weak anti-localization and thus exhibit anomalous magneto-optic effects. Here we envisage\n\n8", + "recall": 0.9568345323741008, + "true_md": "surface hole doped with NO$_{2}$ at a temperature T = 10 K. Figures 4(c) and (d) illustrate that the charge neutral point-like FS (Fig. 4(a)) is robust up to room temperature ( T = 300 K) over days long measurement times. A density of states that decreases linearly to zero at the Dirac point energy at 300 K (Fig. 4(f)) is further evidence that the low energy properties of Bi$_{1}$$\\_{.}$$_{9975}$Ca$_{0}$$\\_{.}$$_{0025}$Se$_{3}$.NO$_{2}$ are dominated by a novel ground state that features massless helical Dirac fermions with nearly 100% spin polarization. This also confirms a non-trivial π Berrys phase on the surface due to the spin-momentum locking pattern that we observe, which is similar to the robust Berrys phase previously observed in the Bi-Sb system [14] (Fig. 1).\n\nHelical nodal Dirac fermions are forbidden from acquiring a mass through band gap formation because they are located around time-reversal invariant (Kramers’) momenta k$_{T}$ = ¯ Γ or ¯ M (Fig. 4(h)). This makes them fundamentally different from chiral Dirac fermions such as those found in graphene, which are located at ¯ K and not topologically protected (Fig. 4(g)). The helical Dirac fermion on the surface of Bi$_{2}$Se$_{3}$ owes its existence to a non-zero topological number ν$_{0}$ given by (-1) ν 0 = Π$_{k}$$\\_{T}$ Π N m $\\_{=1}$ξ$\\_{2}$$_{m}$ ( k$_{T}$ ), where ξ$_{2}$$\\_{m}$ ( k$\\_{T}$ ) is the parity eigenvalue of the bulk wavefunction at the 3D Kramers’ point k$\\_{T}$ and N is the number of occupied bulk bands [4]. Because Ca dopants are present in only trace quantities in Bi$\\_{1}$$_{.}$$\\_{9975}$Ca$\\_{0}$$_{.}$$\\_{0025}$Se$\\_{3}$.NO$\\_{2}$, the values of ξ$\\_{2}$$_{m}$ ( k$_{T}$ ) do not deviate from those of pure Bi$_{2}$Se$_{3}$, as evidenced by the persistence of a single gapless surface band in both Bi$_{2}$Se$_{3}$ and Bi$_{1}$$\\_{.}$$_{9975}$Ca$_{0}$$\\_{.}$$_{0025}$Se$_{3}$. Both Ca 2+ and NO 2 − are non-magnetic and so do not break time- reversal symmetry, therefore the same topological number ( ν$_{0}$ = 1) applies even in the Dirac transport regime (Fig. 4) realized by our method shown here, which is stable with both time and temperature. Our direct demonstration of spin-polarized edge channels and room temperature operability of chemically gated stoichiometric Bi$_{2}$Se$_{3}$ or Bi$_{2}$$\\_{−}$$_{δ}$Ca$_{δ}$Se$_{3}$, not achieved in purely 2D topological systems such as Hg(Cd)Te quantum wells [29], enables exciting future room temperature experiments on surface helical Dirac fermions that carry a non-trivial π Berry’s phase.\n\nOur demonstration of topological order at room temperature opens up possibilities of us- ing quantum Hall-like phenomena and spin-polarized protected edge channels for spintronic or computing device applications without the traditional requirements of high magnetic fields and delicate cryogenics. A direct detection of surface-edge states would be possible in stoichiometric Bi$_{2}$Se$_{3}$ or Bi$_{2}$$\\_{−}$$_{δ}$Ca$_{δ}$Se$_{3}$, using transport methods which will bear signatures of weak anti-localization and thus exhibit anomalous magneto-optic effects. Here we envisage\n\n8" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5620306865379031, + "doc_id": "5ba47f94090b1b597ad288c64c8a794d8a784d9abf07dce4a5bdfce0ae6991a8", + "edit_distance": 0.4031141868512111, + "f1_score": 0.9392265193370166, + "meteor": 0.6952099359891948, + "precision": 0.9550561797752809, + "pred_md": "FIG. 8: Chiral extrapolation of √ M B s /M B l = √ m B s /m B l ( f B s √ B B s /f B l √ B B l ) using a linear fit matched onto NLO SU (2) HM χ PT at the lightest data point (solid band) and a linear extrapolation all the way to the chiral limit (hatched band). Errors shown are statistical only. The left plot shows the comparison for the APE data, while the right plot shows the same comparison for they HYPsmeared data.\n\nFIG. 8: Chiral extrapolation of √ M B s /M B l = √ m B s /m B l ( f B s √ B B s /f B l √ B B l ) using a linear fit matched onto NLO SU (2) HM χ PT at the lightest data point (solid band) and a linear extrapolation all the way to the chiral limit (hatched band). Errors shown are statistical only. The left plot shows the comparison for the APE data, while the right plot shows the same comparison for they HYPsmeared data.\n\na m l\n\na single lattice spacing, the contribution proportional to a 4 is indistinguishable from the LO normalization factors R Φ and R M in Eqs. (78) and (79) and the contribution proportional to ma l 2 is indistinguishable from the NLO terms C m l l and Dm l l . Thus there is only one additional free parameter at NNLO. In practice, we implement the 'NNLO fit' by performing a quadratic fit in m l to our data and then matching to the NLO SU (2) HM χ PT expressions supplemented by the NNLO analytic term proportional to m 2 l at the value of our lightest data point. When we include the term quadratic in m l , however, the extrapolated values for f B s /f B d and ξ have significantly larger statistical errors (about 20 -40%) than those obtained with the preferred fit (about 4 -8%). Therefore we cannot draw any meaningful conclusion about the change in the central values of f B s /f B d and ξ , since the outcome of the NNLO extrapolation is consistent with the NLO extrapolation within the large statistical errors. This increase in statistical errors is to be expected since we have introduced an extra free parameter, and it is difficult to constrain two parameters with only three data points. Thus we do not use the 'NNLO fit' as a way to estimate the chiral extrapolation error in this work, but leave it as a way to estimate the uncertainty due to the omission of higher-order terms in future analyses when we have more data points and smaller statistical\n\n33", + "recall": 0.9239130434782609, + "true_md": "FIG. 8: Chiral extrapolation of √ M$_{B}$$\\_{s}$/M$\\_{B}$$_{l}$ = √ m$_{B}$$\\_{s}$/m$\\_{B}$$_{l}$ ( f$_{B}$$\\_{s}$ √ B$\\_{B}$$_{s}$/f$_{B}$$\\_{l}$ √ B$\\_{B}$$_{l}$ ) using a linear fit matched onto NLO SU (2) HM χ PT at the lightest data point (solid band) and a linear extrapolation all the way to the chiral limit (hatched band). Errors shown are statistical only. The left plot shows the comparison for the APE data, while the right plot shows the same comparison for they HYP- smeared data.\n\na single lattice spacing, the contribution proportional to a 4 is indistinguishable from the LO normalization factors R$_{Φ}$ and R$_{M}$ in Eqs. (78) and (79) and the contribution proportional to m$_{l}$a 2 is indistinguishable from the NLO terms C$_{l}$m$_{l}$ and D$_{l}$m$_{l}$ . Thus there is only one ad- ditional free parameter at NNLO. In practice, we implement the “NNLO fit” by performing a quadratic fit in m$_{l}$ to our data and then matching to the NLO SU (2) HM χ PT expressions supplemented by the NNLO analytic term proportional to m 2 l at the value of our lightest data point. When we include the term quadratic in m$_{l}$ , however, the extrapolated values for f$_{B}$$\\_{s}$/f$\\_{B}$$_{d}$ and ξ have significantly larger statistical errors (about 20 − 40%) than those obtained with the preferred fit (about 4 − 8%). Therefore we cannot draw any meaningful conclusion about the change in the central values of f$_{B}$$\\_{s}$/f$\\_{B}$$_{d}$ and ξ , since the outcome of the NNLO extrapolation is consistent with the NLO extrapolation within the large statistical errors. This increase in statistical errors is to be expected since we have introduced an extra free parameter, and it is difficult to constrain two parameters with only three data points. Thus we do not use the “NNLO fit” as a way to estimate the chiral extrapolation error in this work, but leave it as a way to estimate the uncertainty due to the omission of higher-order terms in future analyses when we have more data points and smaller statistical\n\n33" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.116811688556056, + "doc_id": "b6d5ba8f0b41dc00dfc0df10c3b381fcafae105aea08131f766a4b6cec8adf07", + "edit_distance": 0.7487113402061856, + "f1_score": 0.8292682926829267, + "meteor": 0.2668008597195869, + "precision": 0.9296875, + "pred_md": "continuum calculation of Sharpe and Zhang in the limit of three degenerate sea quarks [23]. We note that one is free to multiply the above expressions by arbitrary powers of the heavylight meson mass m B x without modifying the chiral logarithms. This is because the chiral logarithm contributions to heavy-light meson masses are suppressed by 1 /m b and therefore of higher-order than we consider [84].\n\nIn the above expressions for Φ B x and M B x , the functions /lscript and ˜ /lscript are one-loop chiral logarithms:\n\n\n\n\n\nThe function R [ n,k ] j is due to single poles in the partially-quenched propagator:\n\n/negationslash\n\nand the sets of flavor-singlet masses that appear in the residue functions are\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nwhere m 2 X is the mass-squared of a meson composed of two x valence quarks, m 2 L H ( ) is the mass-squared of a meson composed of two l ( h ) sea quarks, and m 2 η = ( m 2 L + 2 m 2 H ) / 3 for 2+1 flavors of sea quarks.\n\nFor completeness, we also include the expressions for the decay constant and mixing matrix element at the unitary points. In the full QCD and isospin limits, the above expression for Φ x becomes\n\n\n\n\n\n54", + "recall": 0.7484276729559748, + "true_md": "continuum calculation of Sharpe and Zhang in the limit of three degenerate sea quarks [23]. We note that one is free to multiply the above expressions by arbitrary powers of the heavy- light meson mass m$_{B}$$\\_{x}$ without modifying the chiral logarithms. This is because the chiral logarithm contributions to heavy-light meson masses are suppressed by 1 /m$\\_{b}$ and therefore of higher-order than we consider [84].\n\nIn the above expressions for Φ$_{B}$$\\_{x}$ and M$\\_{B}$$_{x}$ , the functions ℓ and ˜ ℓ are one-loop chiral logarithms: ( )\n\n˜ The function R [ n,k ] j is due to single poles in the partially-quenched propagator:\n\nand the sets of flavor-singlet masses that appear in the residue functions are\n\nwhere m 2 X is the mass-squared of a meson composed of two x valence quarks, m 2 L ( H ) is the mass-squared of a meson composed of two l ( h ) sea quarks, and m 2 η = ( m 2 L + 2 m 2 $_{H}$) / 3 for 2+1 flavors of sea quarks.\n\nFor completeness, we also include the expressions for the decay constant and mixing ma- trix element at the unitary points. In the full QCD and isospin limits, the above expression for Φ$_{x}$ becomes\n\n54\n\n$$˜ ℓ ( m $^{2}$) ≡ m $^{2}$ln ( m 2 Λ 2 χ ) , (D4) m 2$$\n\n$$( ) ˜ ℓ ( m $^{2}$) ≡ − ln m 2 Λ 2 χ − 1 . (D5) is due to single poles in the partially-quenched propagator:$$\n\n$$R [ n,k ] j ( { m } , { µ } ) ≡ ∏ k a $_{=1}$( µ 2 a − m 2 $_{j}$) n i =1 ,i ̸ = $_{j}$( m 2 i m 2 $_{j}$) (D6)$$\n\n$${ µ } = { m 2 $_{L}$, m 2 H } , (D7)$$\n\n$${ M$_{X}$ } = { m 2 $_{X}$, m 2 η } , (D8)$$\n\n$$Φ$_{B}$$_{l}$ = φ$_{0}$ { 1 − 1 16 π $^{2}$f 2 ( 1 + 3 g 2 B ∗ Bπ 2 ) [ 3 2 ℓ ( m 2 $_{π}$) + ℓ ( m 2 $_{K}$) + 1 6 ℓ ( m 2 $_{η}$) ] + c$_{sea}$ (2 m$_{l}$ + m$_{h}$ ) + c$_{val}$m$_{l}$ + c$_{a}$a 2 } , (D9) { ( ) [ ]$$\n\n$$} Φ$_{B}$$_{h}$ = φ$_{0}$ { 1 − 1 16 π $^{2}$f 2 ( 1 + 3 g 2 B ∗ Bπ 2 ) [ 2 ℓ ( m 2 $_{K}$) + 2 3 ℓ ( m 2 $_{η}$) ] + c$_{sea}$ (2 m$_{l}$ + m$_{h}$ ) + c$_{val}$m$_{h}$ + c$_{a}$a 2 } , (D10)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.010388223888664295, + "doc_id": "8cca7d8d4a76f4c11dbf7106361b3d0da37f3340d841b795bbb55582f2c736a3", + "edit_distance": 0.8861538461538462, + "f1_score": 0.7678571428571428, + "meteor": 0.16046317648452593, + "precision": 0.8958333333333334, + "pred_md": "\n\nThese diagrams are different only in the circulation of the momentum integration. Since Cγ C µ -1 = -γ T µ and CS 0 ( ) l C -1 = S T 0 ( -l ), we can rewrite the above expression as\n\n\n\nThus, by summing the two diagrams, we obtain\n\n\n\ni.e.,\n\n\n\nTherefore, using also ( / p + / q + / l -m ) -( / q + / l -m ), we get\n\n\n\nwhere\n\n\n\nis the photon self-energy, with a fermion loop.\n\nFrom now on, differently for the previous calculations, the contributions to the ST identity turns out to be very involved and a complete verification is unfeasible. In this situation we restrict ourselves in to verify the matching of the divergent parts of the two sides of Eq. (103).\n\n17", + "recall": 0.671875, + "true_md": "$$× ( − ieγ $^{λ}$) iS$_{0}$ ( l ) e − ip ∧ $^{q}$, = 2 e sin( p ∧ q )Λ µνλ a 2 ( p, q, k ) (105) = − ∫ d $^{4}$l (2 π ) $_{4}$tr iS$_{0}$ ( − l )( − ieγ $^{λ}$) iS$_{0}$ ( − p − q − l ) × ( − ieγ $^{µ}$) iS$_{0}$ ( − q − l )( − ieγ $^{ν}$) e ip ∧ $^{q}$.$$\n\n$$2 e sin( p ∧ q )Λ µνλ a 2 ( p, q, k ) = e 3 ∫ d $^{4}$l (2 π ) $_{4}$tr S T 0 ( l ) γ T $^{λ}$S T 0 ( p + q + l ) γ T $^{µ}$S$_{0}$ ( q + l ) γ T $^{ν}$eip ∧ q = e 3 d $^{4}$l (2 π ) $_{4}$tr[ γ $^{ν}$S$_{0}$ ( q + l ) γ $^{µ}$S$_{0}$ ( p + q + l ) γ $^{λ}$S$_{0}$ ( l )] $^{T}$e ip ∧ q = e 3 ∫ d $^{4}$l (2 π ) $_{4}$tr γ $^{ν}$S$_{0}$ ( q + l ) γ $^{µ}$S$_{0}$ ( p + q + l ) γ $^{λ}$S$_{0}$ ( l ) e ip ∧ $^{q}$. (106)$$\n\n$$2 e sin( p ∧ q )Λ µνλ a ( p, q, k ) = 2 e sin( p ∧ q ) [ Λ µνλ a 1 ( p, q, k ) + Λ µνλ a 2 ( p, q, k ) ] (107) = 2 ie 3 ∫ d $^{4}$l (2 π ) $_{4}$tr γ $^{ν}$S$_{0}$ ( q + l ) γ $^{µ}$S$_{0}$ ( p + q + l ) γ $^{λ}$S$_{0}$ ( l ) sin( p ∧ q ) ,$$\n\n$$Λ µνλ a ( p, q, k ) = ie 2 ∫ d $^{4}$l (2 π ) $_{4}$tr γ $^{ν}$S$_{0}$ ( q + l ) γ $^{µ}$S$_{0}$ ( p + q + l ) γ $^{λ}$S$_{0}$ ( l ) . (108)$$\n\n$$p$_{µ}$ Λ µνλ a ( p, q, k ) = Π νλ a ( q ) − Π λν a ( k ) , (109)$$\n\n$$i Π νλ a ( q ) = − ∫ d $^{4}$l (2 π ) $_{4}$tr( − ieγ $^{ν}$) iS$_{0}$ ( q + l )( − ieγ $^{λ}$) iS$_{0}$ ( l ) (110)$$\n\nThese diagrams are different only in the circulation of the momentum integration. Since Cγ $^{µ}$C − 1 = − γ T µ and CS$_{0}$ ( l ) C − 1 = S T 0 ( − l ), we can rewrite the above expression as\n\nThus, by summing the two diagrams, we obtain\n\ni.e.,\n\nTherefore, using also ( / p + / q + / l − m ) − ( / q + / l − m ), we get\n\nwhere\n\nis the photon self-energy, with a fermion loop.\n\nFrom now on, differently for the previous calculations, the contributions to the ST identity turns out to be very involved and a complete verification is unfeasible. In this situation we restrict ourselves in to verify the matching of the divergent parts of the two sides of Eq. (103).\n\n17" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8921535689243596, + "doc_id": "d8928202eb3b021717dc3f2a859802eb045902e741f6665436a3b708398de0f8", + "edit_distance": 0.11484593837535013, + "f1_score": 0.9619565217391305, + "meteor": 0.9400669474491703, + "precision": 0.9888268156424581, + "pred_md": "arXiv:1001.4509v2 [hep-th] 3 Mar 2010\n\n## The shape of emergent quantum geometry from an N = 4 SYM minisuperspace approximation\n\nDavid Berenstein , † Yuichiro Nakada † ‡ ,\n\n† Department of Physics, University of California at Santa Barbara, CA 93106\n\nInstitute for Cosmic Ray Research University of Tokyo, Kashiwa, Chiba 277-8582 JAPAN\n\nWe study numerically various wave functions in a gauged matrix quantum mechanics of six commuting hermitian N × N matrices. Our simulations span ranges of N up to 10000. This system is a truncated and quenched version of N = 4 SYM that serves as a minisuperspace approximation to the full N = 4 SYM system. This setup encodes aspects of the geometry of the AdS dual in terms of joint eigenvalue distributions for the matrices in the large N limit. We analyze the problem of determining geometric measurements from these fluctuating distributions at finite N and how fast they approach to the large N limit. We treat this eigenvalue geometry information as a proxy for geometric calculations in quantum gravity in a description where gravity is an emergent phenomenon. Our results show that care is needed in choosing the observables that measure the geometry: different choices of observables give different answers, have different size fluctuations at finite N and they converge at different rates to the large N limit. We find that some natural choices of observables are pathological at finite N for N sufficiently small. Finally, we note that the approach to the large N limit does not seem to follow the expected convergence in powers of 1 /N 2 from planar diagram arguments. Our evidence suggests that different powers of N appear, but convergence to large N is rather slow so the values of N we have explored might be too small to conclude this unambiguously.\n\nPACS numbers: 11.25.Tq, 11.25.Sq ,02.70.Uu, 11.15.Pg\n\nKeywords: Emergent geometry, AdS/CFT\n\n‡", + "recall": 0.9365079365079365, + "true_md": "# The shape of emergent quantum geometry from an N = 4 SYM minisuperspace approximation\n\nDavid Berenstein $^{†}$, Yuichiro Nakada † , ‡\n\n$^{†}$Department of Physics, University of California at Santa Barbara, CA 93106\n\n$^{‡}$Institute for Cosmic Ray Research University of Tokyo, Kashiwa, Chiba 277-8582 JAPAN\n\nWe study numerically various wave functions in a gauged matrix quantum me- chanics of six commuting hermitian N × N matrices. Our simulations span ranges of N up to 10000. This system is a truncated and quenched version of N = 4 SYM that serves as a minisuperspace approximation to the full N = 4 SYM system. This setup encodes aspects of the geometry of the AdS dual in terms of joint eigenvalue distributions for the matrices in the large N limit. We analyze the problem of de- termining geometric measurements from these fluctuating distributions at finite N and how fast they approach to the large N limit. We treat this eigenvalue geometry information as a proxy for geometric calculations in quantum gravity in a description where gravity is an emergent phenomenon. Our results show that care is needed in choosing the observables that measure the geometry: different choices of observables give different answers, have different size fluctuations at finite N and they converge at different rates to the large N limit. We find that some natural choices of observ- ables are pathological at finite N for N sufficiently small. Finally, we note that the approach to the large N limit does not seem to follow the expected convergence in powers of 1 /N 2 from planar diagram arguments. Our evidence suggests that differ- ent powers of N appear, but convergence to large N is rather slow so the values of N we have explored might be too small to conclude this unambiguously.\n\nPACS numbers: 11.25.Tq, 11.25.Sq ,02.70.Uu, 11.15.Pg\n\nKeywords: Emergent geometry, AdS/CFT\n\narXiv:1001.4509v2 [hep-th] 3 Mar 2010" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7200717722900355, + "doc_id": "18e005e0f4e7069b0286d6864329798a88354e056f89916660ec6be430e2c202", + "edit_distance": 0.2972972972972973, + "f1_score": 0.9473684210526315, + "meteor": 0.8443450659946417, + "precision": 0.9818181818181818, + "pred_md": "## IV. TABLE CAPTIONS\n\n## Table I:\n\ncoordinates, atomic charges and dipoles for PIC\n\n## Table II:\n\nmean values and standard deviation of distances, orientation angles, excitation energies and excitonic couplings for the two structures. The long axis is defined by the vector connecting the two nitrogen atoms R ( N 13 ) -R ( N 14 ) , the short axis by the vector R ( N 14 ) -R ( C 20 ) + R ( N 13 ) -R ( C 19 ) .\n\n8", + "recall": 0.9152542372881356, + "true_md": "## IV. TABLE CAPTIONS\n\n## Table I:\n\n## Table II:\n\n8\n\nmean values and standard deviation of distances, orientation angles, excitation energies and excitonic couplings for the two structures. The long axis is defined by the vector connecting the two nitrogen atoms R ( N 13 ) − R ( N 14 $_{)}$, the short axis by the vector R ( N 14 ) − R ( C 20 ) + R ( N 13 ) − R ( C 19 $_{)}$.\n\ncoordinates, atomic charges and dipoles for PIC" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7255778616258126, + "doc_id": "1ac1c639a5b39de99cf9a45f6bcbd14063122a96c7dfbdc4a720bab4441ac868", + "edit_distance": 0.20689655172413793, + "f1_score": 0.9635974304068521, + "meteor": 0.8178979805924814, + "precision": 0.9782608695652174, + "pred_md": "Giant-resonance data were taken with the spectrometer central angle ( θ spec ) set at 0 , · 2.5 , 3.5 · · , 5.0 , 6.5 · · , and 8.0 , covering the angular range from 0 · · to 9.0 · in the laboratory system. The actual angular resolution of the MWDCs, including the nominal broadening of scattering angle due to the emittance of the 4 He ++ beam and the multiple Coulombscattering effects, was about 0.15 · [42]. The vertical acceptance was limited to ± 20 mr by a 2-mm-thick tantalum collimator. The energy bite of the Grand Raiden spectrometer and the special MWDC arrangements for the 0 · measurements limited the excitation energy range observed to E x =8.5-31.5 MeV.\n\nThe incident 4 He ++ beam was stopped at three independent Faraday Cups (FC) according to the different settings of Grand Raiden [29]. In the measurements at large angles ( θ ≥ 6 5 ), . · the beam was stopped on the FC mounted inside the scattering chamber (SC-FC). For measurements at 0 , the FC was located downstream of the MWDCs [29]; the incident · 4 He ++ particles were guided to a vacuum pipe situated at the high-momentum side of the MWDCs and finally stopped at the 0 -FC. A third FC was used for measurements in the scattering-· angle region 2 · ≤ θ ≤ 5 . · This FC was installed behind the Q1-magnet of the Grand Raiden (Q1-FC) [43]. The use of these three Faraday-cups allowed us to obtain reliable values of accumulated charges for the incident 4 He ++ beam at different scattering angles. Normalization of the FCs was obtained with a beamline polarimeter located upstream from the target. The polarimeter target was inserted in the beam, and the scattered 4 He ++ particles counted, before and after each change of the FC. The overall accuracy of this normalization is estimated to be ∼ 2%, including systematic errors from slight changes in the direction of the beam during the measurement [42].\n\nThe ion-optics of the Grand Raiden spectrometer is such that the particles scattered from the target position are focused vertically and horizontally at the focal plane. Using this property, the instrumental background was completely eliminated. While inelastically scattered α particles are focused at the focal plane, background events due to the rescattering of α particles from the wall and pole surfaces of the spectrometer show a flat distribution in the vertical-position spectra at the focal plane, as shown in Fig. 1. The peak region in the vertical position spectrum was treated as true+background events. The off-center regions were treated as background only. Figure 2(a) shows the horizontal position spectrum for the 112 Sn( α, α ' ) reaction at 0 . · The background spectrum has no distinct structure in the giant resonance region. Finally, we have obtained clean spectra by subtracting the background\n\n5", + "recall": 0.9493670886075949, + "true_md": "Giant-resonance data were taken with the spectrometer central angle ( θ$_{spec}$ ) set at 0 $^{◦}$, 2.5 $^{◦}$, 3.5$^{◦}$, 5.0$^{◦}$, 6.5$^{◦}$, and 8.0$^{◦}$, covering the angular range from 0◦ to 9.0 ◦ in the laboratory system. The actual angular resolution of the MWDCs, including the nominal broadening of scattering angle due to the emittance of the $^{4}$He++ beam and the multiple Coulomb- scattering effects, was about 0.15 ◦ [42]. The vertical acceptance was limited to ± 20 mr by a 2-mm-thick tantalum collimator. The energy bite of the Grand Raiden spectrometer and the special MWDC arrangements for the 0 ◦ measurements limited the excitation energy range observed to E$_{x}$ =8.5–31.5 MeV.\n\nThe incident $^{4}$He ++ beam was stopped at three independent Faraday Cups (FC) according to the different settings of Grand Raiden [29]. In the measurements at large angles ( θ ≥ 6 . 5 $^{◦}$), the beam was stopped on the FC mounted inside the scattering chamber (SC-FC). For measurements at 0 $^{◦}$, the FC was located downstream of the MWDCs [29]; the incident $^{4}$He++ particles were guided to a vacuum pipe situated at the high-momentum side of the MWDCs and finally stopped at the 0 $^{◦}$-FC. A third FC was used for measurements in the scattering- angle region 2 ◦ ≤ θ ≤ 5 $^{◦}$. This FC was installed behind the Q1-magnet of the Grand Raiden (Q1-FC) [43]. The use of these three Faraday-cups allowed us to obtain reliable values of accumulated charges for the incident $^{4}$He ++ beam at different scattering angles. Normalization of the FCs was obtained with a beamline polarimeter located upstream from the target. The polarimeter target was inserted in the beam, and the scattered $^{4}$He++ particles counted, before and after each change of the FC. The overall accuracy of this normalization is estimated to be ∼ 2%, including systematic errors from slight changes in the direction of the beam during the measurement [42].\n\nThe ion-optics of the Grand Raiden spectrometer is such that the particles scattered from the target position are focused vertically and horizontally at the focal plane. Using this property, the instrumental background was completely eliminated. While inelastically scattered α particles are focused at the focal plane, background events due to the rescattering of α particles from the wall and pole surfaces of the spectrometer show a flat distribution in the vertical-position spectra at the focal plane, as shown in Fig. 1. The peak region in the vertical position spectrum was treated as true+background events. The off-center regions were treated as background only. Figure 2(a) shows the horizontal position spectrum for the $^{112}$Sn( α, α $^{′}$) reaction at 0$^{◦}$. The background spectrum has no distinct structure in the giant resonance region. Finally, we have obtained clean spectra by subtracting the background\n\n5" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5273137024771565, + "doc_id": "386dbb66a8666ae948f0dd405340ea1d3e3da315e89ea151281994a15ae41aa2", + "edit_distance": 0.411214953271028, + "f1_score": 0.8911392405063292, + "meteor": 0.6598954134040295, + "precision": 0.9361702127659575, + "pred_md": "parameters to be consistent with the current observations. Next we calculate the scattering cross section between the DM particle and a proton and discuss the implication for the direct DM search experiments.\n\n## A. Thermal relic density\n\nThe DM RH neutrino interacts with the SM particles through couplings with B -L gauge and B -L Higgs bosons. Note that neutrino Dirac Yukawa interactions are absent because of the Z 2 parity. The most of annihilation of the RH neutrinos occurs via Z , H ' and h exchange processes in the s -channel. In practice, the dominant contributions come from the Higgs ( h and H ) exchange diagrams, because the Z ' exchange processes are suppressed by the inverse square of the B -L Higgs VEV v ' /greaterorsimilar 3 TeV. Thus, we obtain Higgs portal DM of RH neutrino effectively. The relevant annihilation modes are the annihilation into ff ¯ , W W + -, ZZ , and h H h H ( ) ( ). Since RH neutrino DM couples to only B -L Higgs Ψ while a SM particle does to SM Higgs Φ, the DM annihilation occurs only through the mixing between these two Higgs bosons. Although it is not so severe, the precision electroweak measurements [12] as well as the unitarity bound [13] give constraints on the mixing angle and mass spectrum of the Higgs bosons.\n\nThe thermal relic abundance of DM\n\n\n\nwith the Planck mass M P , the thermal averaged product of the annihilation cross section and the relative velocity 〈 σv 〉 , the total number of relativistic degrees of freedom in the thermal bath g ∗ , and the decoupling temperature T d , is evaluated by solving the Boltzmann equation for the number density of RH neutrino n N ;\n\n\n\nand the Friedmann equation\n\n\n\nwith n EQ and a t ( ) being the equilibrium number density and the scale factor, under the radiation dominated Universe with the energy density ρ = ρ rad [14].\n\n5", + "recall": 0.8502415458937198, + "true_md": "parameters to be consistent with the current observations. Next we calculate the scattering cross section between the DM particle and a proton and discuss the implication for the direct DM search experiments.\n\nThe DM RH neutrino interacts with the SM particles through couplings with B − L gauge and B − L Higgs bosons. Note that neutrino Dirac Yukawa interactions are absent because of the Z$_{2}$ parity. The most of annihilation of the RH neutrinos occurs via Z ′ , H and h exchange processes in the s -channel. In practice, the dominant contributions come from the Higgs ( h and H ) exchange diagrams, because the Z ′ exchange processes are suppressed by the inverse square of the B − L Higgs VEV v ′ ≳ 3 TeV. Thus, we obtain Higgs portal DM of RH neutrino effectively. The relevant annihilation modes are the annihilation into f ¯ f , W $^{+}$W − , ZZ , and h ( H ) h ( H ). Since RH neutrino DM couples to only B − L Higgs Ψ while a SM particle does to SM Higgs Φ, the DM annihilation occurs only through the mixing between these two Higgs bosons. Although it is not so severe, the precision electroweak measurements [12] as well as the unitarity bound [13] give constraints on the mixing angle and mass spectrum of the Higgs bosons.\n\nThe thermal relic abundance of DM\n\nwith the Planck mass M$_{P}$ , the thermal averaged product of the annihilation cross section and the relative velocity 〈 σv 〉 , the total number of relativistic degrees of freedom in the thermal bath g ∗ , and the decoupling temperature T$_{d}$ , is evaluated by solving the Boltzmann equation for the number density of RH neutrino n$_{N}$ ;\n\nand the Friedmann equation\n\nwith n$_{EQ}$ and a ( t ) being the equilibrium number density and the scale factor, under the radiation dominated Universe with the energy density ρ = ρ$_{rad}$ [14].\n\n## A. Thermal relic density\n\n$$Ω$_{N}$ h 2 = 1 . 1 × 10 9 m$_{N}$/T$_{d}$ √ g ∗ M$_{P}$ 〈 σv 〉 GeV − $^{1}$, (14)$$\n\n$$dn$_{N}$ dt + 3 Hn$_{N}$ = −〈 σv 〉 ( n 2 N − n 2 $_{EQ}$) , (15)$$\n\n$$H 2 $_{≡}$( ˙ a a ) 2 = 8 π 3 M 2 P ρ, (16)$$\n\n5" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9592617590553445, + "doc_id": "1c8866c83e767d164d296f8a0b0ffd03865d1a586804bac174824a70d576436d", + "edit_distance": 0.022540983606557378, + "f1_score": 0.973305954825462, + "meteor": 0.978399223497123, + "precision": 0.9916317991631799, + "pred_md": "2\n\n## I. INTRODUCTION\n\nThe AdS/CFT correspondence has revolutionized how we think about strongly quantum field theories and quantum gravity [1]. Because of these discoveries, classical gravitational techniques can be used to produce non-trivial statements about strongly coupled field theories. On the other hand, the manifest unitarity of the field theory seems to resolve (at least in principle), the information paradox related to the formation and evaporation of black holes [2].\n\nObviously, if the two sides are truly equivalent, we should ask that the quantum gravitational theory encode individual quanta and other phenomena that we associate to weakly coupled field theories. By the same token, we should be able to answer geometric questions posed in the gravity theory by studying the degrees of freedom of the quantum field theory directly. The usual AdS/CFT dictionary [3, 4] usually works as a black box: it permits us to compare calculations between the AdS and CFT setups, but it does not explain how the degrees of freedom of the field theory reorganize themselves as geometry. Nor does it tell us how geometry breaks down. What is needed is a theory of emergent geometry: a reason why higher dimensional geometry is the right answer for certain classes of questions. Solving the AdS/CFT correspondence requires doing this. The full answer to this question is still beyond what is currently known. However, a model that seem to capture some of these features is available [5] and can be used to explore the passage from a microscopic description of the degrees of freedom to collective degrees of freedom that represent geometry.\n\nGiven a model of emergent geometry, one can then ask for the simplest geometric questions, like what is the size of an object or geometric feature. This will be the main purpose of the present paper: to understand and explore how one can measure geometric properties of the dual spacetime directly in the quantum field theory. We will do this by Monte-Carlo simulations of a collection of minisuperspace wave functions in field theory, following the ideas presented in [6, 7]. Numerical methods to study gravity problems with a dual quantum mechanics have been advocated also in [8-14]. In particular these other studies try to match the black hole specific heat and perhaps even the radius of the horizon for a black hole made of D0 branes in ten dimensions. Those simulations use the full N × N matrix degrees of freedom in a Euclidean time formulation, so taking N large is problematic. Other approaches to study N = 4 SYM for large N numerically use clever truncations to matrix", + "recall": 0.9556451612903226, + "true_md": "2\n\n## I. INTRODUCTION\n\nThe AdS/CFT correspondence has revolutionized how we think about strongly quantum field theories and quantum gravity [1]. Because of these discoveries, classical gravitational techniques can be used to produce non-trivial statements about strongly coupled field theo- ries. On the other hand, the manifest unitarity of the field theory seems to resolve (at least in principle), the information paradox related to the formation and evaporation of black holes [2].\n\nObviously, if the two sides are truly equivalent, we should ask that the quantum gravi- tational theory encode individual quanta and other phenomena that we associate to weakly coupled field theories. By the same token, we should be able to answer geometric questions posed in the gravity theory by studying the degrees of freedom of the quantum field theory directly. The usual AdS/CFT dictionary [3, 4] usually works as a black box: it permits us to compare calculations between the AdS and CFT setups, but it does not explain how the degrees of freedom of the field theory reorganize themselves as geometry. Nor does it tell us how geometry breaks down. What is needed is a theory of emergent geometry: a reason why higher dimensional geometry is the right answer for certain classes of questions. Solving the AdS/CFT correspondence requires doing this. The full answer to this question is still beyond what is currently known. However, a model that seem to capture some of these fea- tures is available [5] and can be used to explore the passage from a microscopic description of the degrees of freedom to collective degrees of freedom that represent geometry.\n\nGiven a model of emergent geometry, one can then ask for the simplest geometric ques- tions, like what is the size of an object or geometric feature. This will be the main purpose of the present paper: to understand and explore how one can measure geometric properties of the dual spacetime directly in the quantum field theory. We will do this by Monte-Carlo simulations of a collection of minisuperspace wave functions in field theory, following the ideas presented in [6, 7]. Numerical methods to study gravity problems with a dual quan- tum mechanics have been advocated also in [8–14]. In particular these other studies try to match the black hole specific heat and perhaps even the radius of the horizon for a black hole made of D0 branes in ten dimensions. Those simulations use the full N × N matrix degrees of freedom in a Euclidean time formulation, so taking N large is problematic. Other approaches to study N = 4 SYM for large N numerically use clever truncations to matrix" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7777026797680646, + "doc_id": "39406d600b76887013fd70ff6d4ed6705cf4174022dc3d561102edce74f70eec", + "edit_distance": 0.18051575931232092, + "f1_score": 0.9672131147540984, + "meteor": 0.8596978672468175, + "precision": 0.9915966386554622, + "pred_md": "FIG. 6: Same as Fig. 4, except for 124 Sn.\n\nFIG. 6: Same as Fig. 4, except for 124 Sn.\n\nTABLE II: OM parameters obtained by fitting elastic scattering data. Also listed are the B(E2) values for the corresponding 2 + 1 states from Refs. [53, 54].\n\nThe optical-model (OM) parameters viz. the real part of the potential ( V F ( r )), the Woods-Saxon type imaginary part of potential ( W ), the reduced radius ( R I ), and the diffuseness ( a I ) in Eq. 2 were determined by fitting the differential cross sections of elastic α scattering measured for 112 Sn, 120 Sn, and 124 Sn in a companion experiment; the results are listed in Table II. The OM fits to the elastic scattering data for 112 Sn, 120 Sn, and 124 Sn, are shown in Figs. 4(a), 5(a), and 6(a), respectively. To test the efficacy of the OM parameters, DWBA calculations were carried out for the first 2 + states in these nuclei using a collective form factor and previously-established B(E2) values obtained from Refs. [53, 54] (also listed in Table II). Figures. 4(b), 5(b), and 6(b) compare the results of these calculations with the experimental data; indeed, the DWBA calculations reproduce the experimental differential cross sections for the 2 + 1 states well without any normalization.\n\nThe contribution of the IVGDR excitation to the measured cross sections was subtracted\n\n10", + "recall": 0.944, + "true_md": "FIG. 6: Same as Fig. 4, except for $^{124}$Sn.\n\nTABLE II: OM parameters obtained by fitting elastic scattering data. Also listed are the B(E2) values for the corresponding 2 + 1 states from Refs. [53, 54].\n\nThe optical-model (OM) parameters viz. the real part of the potential ( V$_{F}$ ( r )), the Woods-Saxon type imaginary part of potential ( W ), the reduced radius ( R$_{I}$ ), and the dif- fuseness ( a$_{I}$ ) in Eq. 2 were determined by fitting the differential cross sections of elastic α scattering measured for $^{112}$Sn, $^{120}$Sn, and $^{124}$Sn in a companion experiment; the results are listed in Table II. The OM fits to the elastic scattering data for $^{112}$Sn, $^{120}$Sn, and $^{124}$Sn, are shown in Figs. 4(a), 5(a), and 6(a), respectively. To test the efficacy of the OM parameters, DWBA calculations were carried out for the first 2 + states in these nuclei using a collective form factor and previously-established B(E2) values obtained from Refs. [53, 54] (also listed in Table II). Figures. 4(b), 5(b), and 6(b) compare the results of these calculations with the experimental data; indeed, the DWBA calculations reproduce the experimental differential cross sections for the 2 + 1 states well without any normalization.\n\nThe contribution of the IVGDR excitation to the measured cross sections was subtracted\n\n10" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8342489316819093, + "doc_id": "3b7219df9202aaa55df08624f2f78c90b8e7bdfe7a27d299461a3f3103815dc3", + "edit_distance": 0.1461864406779661, + "f1_score": 0.9711286089238846, + "meteor": 0.8946415312173788, + "precision": 0.9840425531914894, + "pred_md": "FIG. 3: A log plot of the data in figure 2\n\nFIG. 3: A log plot of the data in figure 2\n\nA fit to log suggests that δf /f k k /similarequal Ak 0 35 . , but looking carefully at the data in figure 3 the power law behavior sets in after k = 5 and for low values of k the answer is different. Since we do not have a theory of these fluctuations, we can not do a fit that is sufficiently informed to know if this behavior is typical and represents a departure from the large N limit or not. Also, one show notice that since all of the variables we are measuring are strictly positive, the distribution of the variables is not gaussian. For δf /f k k sufficiently small this should not matter too much. However for large k this is important and therefore the measurement of the fluctuations will have (large) non-gaussianities. Without a statistical model for how to deal with these issues, the numbers above just give order of magnitude estimates for deviations from typicality.\n\nNow, we can go to a more extreme case, where the 1 /N corrections are much larger. We do this in the figure 4, which is worked for the case N = 1000 , Q = 5. Notice that in this case the sizes of the different f k changes by various orders of magnitude at high k between different configurations. Hence the fluctuations are very large and dominate any calculation. This is a situation where we expect that the averages 〈 f k 〉 do not converge for k large, as described in the previous section. Hence the behavior of the graph is as would be expected: the large values of f k are dominated by large fluctuations rather than by the mean values.\n\nFor the same extreme setup, we can also plot the radius as measured by the three different measurements that we suggested in the previous section. This appears in the figure 5. As can be read from the figure, we find that for various k , the definition of the radius R 0 converges faster than the definition of the radius based on the roots of f k . We can prove this in general (the argument is found below). Moreover, we see that the naive definition of the inner radius\n\n20", + "recall": 0.9585492227979274, + "true_md": "20\n\nFIG. 3: A log plot of the data in figure 2\n\nA fit to log suggests that δf$_{k}$/f$_{k}$ ≃ Ak 0 . $^{35}$, but looking carefully at the data in figure 3 the power law behavior sets in after k = 5 and for low values of k the answer is different. Since we do not have a theory of these fluctuations, we can not do a fit that is sufficiently informed to know if this behavior is typical and represents a departure from the large N limit or not.\n\nAlso, one show notice that since all of the variables we are measuring are strictly positive, the distribution of the variables is not gaussian. For δf$_{k}$/f$_{k}$ sufficiently small this should not matter too much. However for large k this is important and therefore the measurement of the fluctuations will have (large) non-gaussianities. Without a statistical model for how to deal with these issues, the numbers above just give order of magnitude estimates for deviations from typicality.\n\nNow, we can go to a more extreme case, where the 1 /N corrections are much larger. We do this in the figure 4, which is worked for the case N = 1000 , Q = 5. Notice that in this case the sizes of the different f$_{k}$ changes by various orders of magnitude at high k between different configurations. Hence the fluctuations are very large and dominate any calculation.\n\nThis is a situation where we expect that the averages 〈 f$_{k}$ 〉 do not converge for k large, as described in the previous section. Hence the behavior of the graph is as would be expected: the large values of f$_{k}$ are dominated by large fluctuations rather than by the mean values.\n\nFor the same extreme setup, we can also plot the radius as measured by the three different measurements that we suggested in the previous section. This appears in the figure 5. As can be read from the figure, we find that for various k , the definition of the radius R$_{0}$ converges faster than the definition of the radius based on the roots of f$_{k}$ . We can prove this in general (the argument is found below). Moreover, we see that the naive definition of the inner radius" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5982275818413254, + "doc_id": "a2b1ca3482f994a59aa8308dec03cd8156fef7fe6aa811ef9a2339068d51dc35", + "edit_distance": 0.354014598540146, + "f1_score": 0.9361702127659575, + "meteor": 0.6372855625323202, + "precision": 0.9625, + "pred_md": "Subscripts t and xx represent the first time derivative and second position derivative of the function f . The factor α in the equation is called the diffusivity which is defined by the system under investigation. The Schrödinger equation (in dimensionless units) using the same notation as in equation (29) becomes\n\n\n\nExcept for the imaginary number i , the equation (30) is identical to (29). Therefore, it is mathematically correct to proceed to solve (30) with the complex extension of the same tools used in the numerical method for the Diffusion Equation. Numerical methods 13 solve the PDE by transforming the integral problem into an algebraic one that is computationally accessible. The Crank-Nicholson method is the preferred numerical algorithm used to solve the Schrödinger equation as a diffusion type equation. It is an implicit algorithm valid through second order in both space and time coordinates, so it is very stable 13 .\n\nTo make that equation equivalent to the escape problem, it is necessary to employ the mathematical concepts of TBCs . The discretized domain of the solution is constructed using the following finite difference grids\n\n\n\n\n\nwith i = 0 1 2 , , , . . . , imax and n = 1 2 , , . . . , nmax . The domain D x,t ( ) is from 0 to L on the x -axis and the solution is marching in a positive time direction on the y -axis. We introduce the following notation in the context of the finite difference method grid point ( i, t ) → ( x , t i n ) , function f ( x , t i n ) → f n i , first time derivative ∂f n i ∂t → f t | n i , and second space derivative ∂ 2 f n i ∂t 2 → f xx i | n .\n\nThe 2nd Order Central Space approximation of the second derivative is:\n\n\n\nTo obtain second order precision in the time, a key point of the method is to estimate derivatives at half integral time steps. The 2nd Order Central Time approximation of the\n\n9", + "recall": 0.9112426035502958, + "true_md": "Subscripts t and xx represent the first time derivative and second position derivative of the function f . The factor α in the equation is called the diffusivity which is defined by the system under investigation. The Schrödinger equation (in dimensionless units) using the same notation as in equation (29) becomes\n\nExcept for the imaginary number i , the equation (30) is identical to (29). Therefore, it is mathematically correct to proceed to solve (30) with the complex extension of the same tools used in the numerical method for the Diffusion Equation. Numerical methods 13 solve the PDE by transforming the integral problem into an algebraic one that is computationally accessible. The Crank-Nicholson method is the preferred numerical algorithm used to solve the Schrödinger equation as a diffusion type equation. It is an implicit algorithm valid through second order in both space and time coordinates, so it is very stable $^{13}$.\n\nTo make that equation equivalent to the escape problem, it is necessary to employ the mathematical concepts of TBCs . The discretized domain of the solution is constructed using the following finite difference grids\n\nwith i = 0 , 1 , 2 , . . . , imax and n = 1 , 2 , . . . , nmax . The domain D ( x, t ) is from 0 to L on the x − axis and the solution is marching in a positive time direction on the y − axis. We introduce the following notation in the context of the finite difference method grid point ( i, t ) → ( x$_{i}$, t $^{n}$) , function f ( x$_{i}$, t $^{n}$) → f n i , first time derivative ∂f n i ∂t → f$_{t}$ | n i , and second space derivative ∂ $^{2}$f n i ∂t 2 → f$_{xx}$ | n $_{i}$. The 2nd Order Central Space approximation of the second derivative is:\n\n→ | The 2nd Order Central Space approximation of the second derivative is:\n\nTo obtain second order precision in the time, a key point of the method is to estimate derivatives at half integral time steps. The 2nd Order Central Time approximation of the\n\n9\n\n$$f$_{xx}$ | n i = f n i +1 − 2 f n i + f n i − 1 △ x 2 (33)$$\n\n$$t n = n △ t ( △ t constant ) (32)$$\n\n$$x$_{i}$ = ( i − 1) △ x (31)$$\n\n$$i Ψ$_{t}$ = − 1 2 Ψ$_{xx}$ . (30)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7818069743724448, + "doc_id": "1bbda3f6ad2fe5d3b0b64bd8450e5cd41644f416f71eb2d15f1b928893fd37b9", + "edit_distance": 0.14511494252873564, + "f1_score": 0.9549902152641878, + "meteor": 0.8840575460547745, + "precision": 0.9682539682539683, + "pred_md": "same values of α as in Fig. 3 in a double logarithmic scale (see caption of Fig. 4 for details). In all the cases we obtain a power law r max ( λ c ) ∼ N -γ , with γ = 1 4. /\n\nThe results displayed in figures 3 and 4 confirm that the presence of an ESQPT in the environment spectrum is clearly signaled by the qubit decoherence factor. Moreover, the quantity r max behaves in parallel way as the order parameter n t at the ESQPT [11].\n\n/negationslash\n\nPrior to the conclusions, it is worth mentioning that the environmental Hamiltonian Eq. (4) is a particular case of a more generic class of two-level bosonic systems [12], described by H = αn l -(1 -α ) Q ( ω ) l · Q ( ω ) l /N , with Q ( ω ) l = ( s l † ˜ + l † s ) ( ) l + ω ( l † ˜ l ) ( ) l , where the boson s † is a scalar and the boson l † has multipolarity l , as well as the operator Q ( ω ) l depending on an extra parameter ω . As a representative case, we have presented here calculations using the environmental Hamiltonian with l = 0 and ω = 0, characterized by a second order QPT. For l > 1 this wide class of Hamiltonians, that have been extensively used in nuclear and molecular physics, present a richer structure with second order ( ω = 0) and first order ( ω = 0) QPTs. A complete analysis on the influence of the order of the ESQPT in the decoherence process will be given in a future publication. Moreover, as the natural state of a realistic environment is a thermal one -that is, a mixed state in which the environment is in contact with a thermal bath characterized by a temperature T -it will be also interesting to check to which extent the temperature affects this critical behavior.\n\nIn this paper, we have studied the decoherence induced on a one-qubit system by the interaction with a two-level boson environment, which presents both a standard QPT and an ESQPT. Our main finding is that the decoherence is maximal when the system-environment coupling introduces in the environment the energy required to undergo a continuous ESQPT. The decoherence factor displays a critical behavior well described by r max ( λ ), the value of the second local maximum of | r t ( ) . | r max ( λ ) approaches zero for λ → λ c in the thermodynamical limit showing a finite size scaling r max ( λ c ) ∝ N -γ , with a critical exponent γ = 1 4. / Therefore, we conclude that the decoherence induced in a one-qubit system gives a unique signature of an ESQPT in the environment. Finally, let us point out that quantum decoherence could constitute an important tool to detect critical regions in the energy spectrum of mesoscopic systems; conversely, this knowledge could help to avoid certain environments that are particularly efficient to destroy quantum coherence. Moreover, as the particular Hamiltonian we have studied in this paper has been broadly applied in nuclear structure, molecular physics and, more recently, optical cavity QED, it is feasible to use any of these\n\n8", + "recall": 0.9420849420849421, + "true_md": "same values of α as in Fig. 3 in a double logarithmic scale (see caption of Fig. 4 for details). In all the cases we obtain a power law r$_{max}$ ( λ$_{c}$ ) ∼ N − $^{γ}$, with γ = 1 / 4.\n\nThe results displayed in figures 3 and 4 confirm that the presence of an ESQPT in the environment spectrum is clearly signaled by the qubit decoherence factor. Moreover, the quantity r$_{max}$ behaves in parallel way as the order parameter n$_{t}$ at the ESQPT [11].\n\nPrior to the conclusions, it is worth mentioning that the environmental Hamiltonian Eq. (4) is a particular case of a more generic class of two-level bosonic systems [12], described by H = αn$_{l}$ − (1 − α ) Q ( ω ) l · Q ( ω ) l /N , with Q ( ω ) l = ( s † ˜ l + l $^{†}$s ) ( l ) + ω ( l † ˜ l ) ( l $^{)}$, where the boson s † is a scalar and the boson l † has multipolarity l , as well as the operator Q ( ω ) l depending on an extra parameter ω . As a representative case, we have presented here calculations using the environmental Hamiltonian with l = 0 and ω = 0, characterized by a second order QPT. For l > 1 this wide class of Hamiltonians, that have been extensively used in nuclear and molecular physics, present a richer structure with second order ( ω = 0) and first order ( ω ̸ = 0) QPTs. A complete analysis on the influence of the order of the ESQPT in the decoherence process will be given in a future publication. Moreover, as the natural state of a realistic environment is a thermal one —that is, a mixed state in which the environment is in contact with a thermal bath characterized by a temperature T — it will be also interesting to check to which extent the temperature affects this critical behavior.\n\nIn this paper, we have studied the decoherence induced on a one-qubit system by the in- teraction with a two-level boson environment, which presents both a standard QPT and an ESQPT. Our main finding is that the decoherence is maximal when the system-environment coupling introduces in the environment the energy required to undergo a continuous ESQPT. The decoherence factor displays a critical behavior well described by r$_{max}$ ( λ ), the value of the second local maximum of | r ( t ) | . r$_{max}$ ( λ ) approaches zero for λ → λ$_{c}$ in the thermody- namical limit showing a finite size scaling r$_{max}$ ( λ$_{c}$ ) ∝ N − $^{γ}$, with a critical exponent γ = 1 / 4. Therefore, we conclude that the decoherence induced in a one-qubit system gives a unique signature of an ESQPT in the environment. Finally, let us point out that quantum deco- herence could constitute an important tool to detect critical regions in the energy spectrum of mesoscopic systems; conversely, this knowledge could help to avoid certain environments that are particularly efficient to destroy quantum coherence. Moreover, as the particular Hamiltonian we have studied in this paper has been broadly applied in nuclear structure, molecular physics and, more recently, optical cavity QED, it is feasible to use any of these\n\n8" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.49314465193916124, + "doc_id": "558a6665d55cf662a10b908a7dbcd825017f67a372f995cd5b595d5e9cfcbb47", + "edit_distance": 0.7725437415881561, + "f1_score": 0.9055690072639228, + "meteor": 0.42071270777011505, + "precision": 0.935, + "pred_md": "If we do this substitution we find that\n\n\n\nwhere q = Q/N . Notice that the extra numerical factors that are obtained from the rescaling of x inside the logarithms give a constant, due to the constraint ∫ ˆ = 1. ρ This can be absorbed in the normalization of p . In this new setup, we see that a limit should be smooth at large N if q is held fixed in the process. Also, the factor of N 2 in front of the exponential term shows that when N →∞ we should be able to use a saddle point configuration for ˆ ρ with confidence. It is also clear that 1 /N 2 plays a similar role to /planckover2pi1 in semiclassical physics, where the saddle point equations to a Euclidean path integral involve finding the extrema of exp( -S/ /planckover2pi1 ). 1 /N 2 can also be interpreted as a temperature, so large N cools the system and suppresses fluctuations. This is exactly what is expected from the match to supergravity [1] and to the planar diagram counting [42].\n\n12\n\n/negationslash\n\npotential. The logarithmic repulsions in six dimensions are long range. Because of that, the associated statistical mechanical problem is not standard. If Q = 0 the background potential is confining towards the origin. If Q = 0, the background potential is confining in generic directions, but it is repulsive from the z 1 = 0 locus with a logarithmic repulsion (this is, particles are repelled from the locus x 1 = x 2 = 0).\n\nIn the gravity theory, we usually take the large N limit to go to the classical limit. In this case, we can take the large N limit of the Boltzmann gas which is a thermodynamic limit of large number of particles. In the thermodynamic limit we should be able to replace individual eigenvalues by a density of eigenvalues on R 6 , given by ρ /vector ( x ). The probability density for the eigenvalue distribution is then given by\n\n\n\nThe density is constrained so that ρ ≥ 0 and ∫ d xρ x 6 ( ) = N . As shown in [18], the size of the distribution for Q = 0 is of order √ N . So we can rescale the coordinates /vector x = √ N/vector a and the density ˆ( ρ a d a ) 6 = ρ x N ( ) -1 d x 6 . In this way, we have that the normalized distribution ˆ ρ satisfies\n\n", + "recall": 0.8779342723004695, + "true_md": "12\n\npotential. The logarithmic repulsions in six dimensions are long range. Because of that, the associated statistical mechanical problem is not standard. If Q = 0 the background potential is confining towards the origin. If Q ̸ = 0, the background potential is confining in generic directions, but it is repulsive from the z 1 = 0 locus with a logarithmic repulsion (this is, particles are repelled from the locus x 1 = x 2 = 0).\n\nIn the gravity theory, we usually take the large N limit to go to the classical limit. In this case, we can take the large N limit of the Boltzmann gas which is a thermodynamic limit of large number of particles. In the thermodynamic limit we should be able to replace individual eigenvalues by a density of eigenvalues on R $^{6}$, given by ρ ( ⃗ x ). The probability density for the eigenvalue distribution is then given by\n\n[ ] The density is constrained so that ρ ≥ 0 and ∫ d $^{6}$xρ ( x ) = N . As shown in [18], the size of the distribution for Q = 0 is of order √$_{N}$$\\_{. So we can rescale the coordinates}$ ⃗ x = √$\\_{N⃗a}$ and the density ˆ ρ ( a ) d $^{6}$a = ρ ( x ) N − $^{1}$d$^{6}$x . In this way, we have that the normalized distribution ˆ ρ satisfies\n\nIf we do this substitution we find that\n\nwhere q = Q/N . Notice that the extra numerical factors that are obtained from the rescaling of x inside the logarithms give a constant, due to the constraint ∫ ˆ ρ = 1. This can be absorbed in the normalization of p . In this new setup, we see that a limit should be smooth at large N if q is held fixed in the process. Also, the factor of N 2 in front of the exponential term shows that when N → ∞ we should be able to use a saddle point configuration for ˆ ρ with confidence. It is also clear that 1 /N 2 plays a similar role to ℏ in semiclassical physics, where the saddle point equations to a Euclidean path integral involve finding the extrema of exp( − S/ ℏ ). 1 /N 2 can also be interpreted as a temperature, so large N cools the system and suppresses fluctuations. This is exactly what is expected from the match to supergravity [1] and to the planar diagram counting [42].\n\n$$∫ ˆ ρ ( a ) d $^{6}$a = 1 (9)$$\n\n$$p (ˆ ρ ) ∝ exp ( − N 2 ∫ d $^{6}$a ˆ ρ ( a ) [ − ⃗ a 2 + q log( a 2 1 + a 2 $_{2}$) ] + N 2 2 ∫ ∫ d $^{6}$ad$^{6}$b ˆ ρ ( a )ˆ ρ ( b ) log | ⃗ a − ⃗ b | 2 ) (10)$$\n\n$$p ( ρ ) ∝ exp ( − ∫ d $^{6}$xρ ( x ) [ ⃗ x 2 + Q log( x 2 1 + x 2 $_{2}$) ] + 1 2 ∫ ∫ d $^{6}$xd$^{6}$yρ ( x ) ρ ( y ) log | ⃗ x − ⃗ y | 2 ) (8) The density is constrained so that ρ ≥ 0 and ∫ d $^{6}$xρ ( x ) = N . As shown in [18], the size of$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.478185843256279, + "doc_id": "1db528bf2d0c847bda95431b3ba43479a48f2b2e96a063536de80e6d7819b0ef", + "edit_distance": 0.4842105263157895, + "f1_score": 0.9146757679180888, + "meteor": 0.5713561873385524, + "precision": 0.950354609929078, + "pred_md": "## Appendix A: SU (3) projection\n\nIn this appendix we describe the two SU (3) projection schemes used in this paper and show their equivalence in the weak coupling limit. Necessary properties of the projector mapping an arbitrary, complex 3 × 3 matrix on the SU (3) subgroup are idempotence and gauge-covariance. These properties are not sufficient to specify a unique projector and hence several choices exist. For APE smearing we use the unit circle projection [46] which is based on polar decomposition, while for HYP smearing we seek iteratively the matrix U max ∈ SU (3) which maximizes Re Tr( U max V † ) [47].\n\nFirst we describe the unit circle projection [46]. For a complex 3 × 3 matrix V with det( V ) = 0, we calculate the matrix\n\n/negationslash\n\n\n\nwhich is unitary by construction and has a spectrum lying on the unit circle. The square root is obtained by Jacobi matrix diagonalization. From W we obtain a special unitary matrix by computing\n\n\n\nThis projection is idempotent since an element of SU (3) is projected by Eqs. (A1) and (A2) back onto itself. The projection is also gauge covariant, as we now show. The matrices V and V † transform as\n\n\n\nand hence\n\n\n\nSince [ V † V ] -1 2 / has the same transformation properties as V † V one finds for the transformation of W\n\n\n\nfrom which the gauge-covariance of V follows.\n\n45", + "recall": 0.881578947368421, + "true_md": "## Appendix A: SU (3) projection\n\nIn this appendix we describe the two SU (3) projection schemes used in this paper and show their equivalence in the weak coupling limit. Necessary properties of the projector mapping an arbitrary, complex 3 × 3 matrix on the SU (3) subgroup are idempotence and gauge-covariance. These properties are not sufficient to specify a unique projector and hence several choices exist. For APE smearing we use the unit circle projection [46] which is based on polar decomposition, while for HYP smearing we seek iteratively the matrix U$_{max}$ ∈ SU (3) which maximizes Re Tr( U$_{max}$V $^{†}$) [47].\n\nFirst we describe the unit circle projection [46]. For a complex 3 × 3 matrix V with det( V ) ̸ = 0, we calculate the matrix\n\nwhich is unitary by construction and has a spectrum lying on the unit circle. The square root is obtained by Jacobi matrix diagonalization. From W we obtain a special unitary matrix by computing\n\nThis projection is idempotent since an element of SU (3) is projected by Eqs. (A1) and (A2) back onto itself. The projection is also gauge covariant, as we now show. The matrices V and V † transform as\n\nand hence\n\nSince [ V $^{†}$V ] − 1 / 2 has the same transformation properties as V $^{†}$V one finds for the transfor- mation of W\n\nfrom which the gauge-covariance of V follows.\n\n45\n\n$$W → G$_{L}$WG † $_{R}$, (A5)$$\n\n$$V $^{†}$V → G$_{R}$V $^{†}$V G † $_{R}$. (A4)$$\n\n$$V → G$_{L}$V G † R and V † → G$_{R}$V $^{†}$G † $_{L}$, (A3)$$\n\n$$W = V [ V $^{†}$V ] − 1 / $^{2}$, (A1)$$\n\n$$V = [(det( W )] − 1 / $^{3}$W. (A2)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7595542170829399, + "doc_id": "f1d3ea30d8e3d09217003bb6f86089f6d750e22b3ce36651da8f2bd804bf87ec", + "edit_distance": 0.17606602475928473, + "f1_score": 0.9255813953488373, + "meteor": 0.8470011719995212, + "precision": 0.9521531100478469, + "pred_md": "Figs. 4 and 5. The central energy density increases as we move along these curves from the right hand side. The portion of the curves left to the solid circles represent the equilibrium sequences of hybrid stars with CFL quark matter core. The curves between the solid circle and triangle represent the sequences of hybrid star composed of 2SC quark matter core. It is clear from the lower panel of Fig. 4 and upper panel of Fig. 5 that the stable configurations of hybrid stars with CFL quark matter core belong to third family of compact stars. Further, irrespective of the choice of the EOS of the nuclear matter, the stable configurations of the non-rotating hybrid stars exist within the NJL model only when the EOSs for the CSQM are constructed for GD = 1 2 . GS with GV /lessorsimilar 0 1 . GS . These values of GD and GV , for which the stable configurations of the hybrid star exist, are very much similar to the ones found in Ref. [33]. It appears that the stability of the hybrid stars with CSQM core depends solely on the choice of the EOS for the CSQM. However, the composition of the hybrid stars depend on the behaviour of the nuclear matter EOS. For instance, in case of the TM1 and the NL3 EOSs of the nuclear matter, the core of the hybrid stars are composed of CSQM which is either in 2SC phase or in the CFL phase. In the later case, CFL quark matter core is surrounded by a layer of 2SC quark matter with the outer layer composed of nuclear matter . The thickness of the 2SC quark matter at the maximum hybrid star mass is around 0 5 . -0 7km and . its mass is ∼ 0 1 . M /circledot . On the other hand, no 2SC quark matter appears in the stable configurations of the hybrid star constructed using the EOSs for which the nuclear matter part correspond to the APR and SLY4.\n\nThe equilibrium sequences for the hybrid stars rotating with fixed rotation frequency f are constructed. As an illustration, in Fig. 6, we plot mass verses circumferential equatorial radius R eq at fixed values of the rotational frequency obtained for two di ff erent EOSs. For the clarity, we mainly focus on the regions of the M -Req curves corresponding to the sequences of the hybrid stars which are relevant in the present context. We see that beyond certain frequency, so-called the critical rotation frequency f crit , the stable configuration for the rotating hybrid star does not exist. The solid black lines in Fig. 6 represent the result obtained at the f = f crit . In Fig. 7 we plot the values for the f crit (left panel) calculated for the cases for which the stable configurations for the non-rotating hybrid star exist. It is evident that the values of f crit are quite sensitive to the choice of the EOS for the nuclear matter as well as the CSQM. Depending on the EOSs, f crit varies in the range of 350 -1275 Hz. We also plot in Fig. 7 (right panel) the maximum mass M max for the non-rotating hybrid stars with CSQM core. It is interesting to note from this Fig. that the values of GD and GV for a given nuclear matter EOS can be so adjusted that the resulting hybrid\n\n7", + "recall": 0.9004524886877828, + "true_md": "Figs. 4 and 5. The central energy density increases as we move along these curves from the right hand side. The portion of the curves left to the solid circles represent the equilibrium sequences of hybrid stars with CFL quark matter core. The curves between the solid circle and triangle represent the sequences of hybrid star composed of 2SC quark matter core. It is clear from the lower panel of Fig. 4 and upper panel of Fig. 5 that the stable configuratio ns of hybrid stars with CFL quark matter core belong to third family of compact stars. Further, irrespective of the choice of the EOS of the nuclear matter, the stable configurations of the non-r otating hybrid stars exist within the NJL model only when the EOSs for the CSQM are constructed for G$_{D}$ = 1 . 2 G$_{S}$ with G$_{V}$ ≲ 0 . 1 G$_{S}$ . These values of G$_{D}$ and G$_{V}$ , for which the stable configurations of the hybrid star exist , are very much similar to the ones found in Ref. [33]. It appears that the stability of the hybrid stars with CSQM core depends solely on the choice of the EOS for the CSQM. However, the composition of the hybrid stars depend on the behaviour of the nuclear matter EOS. For instance, in case of the TM1 and the NL3 EOSs of the nuclear matter, the core of the hybrid stars are composed of CSQM which is either in 2SC phase or in the CFL phase. In the later case, CFL quark matter core is surrounded by a layer of 2SC quark matter with the outer layer composed of nuclear matter . The thickness of the 2SC quark matter at the maximum hybrid star mass is around 0 . $^{5}$−0 . 7km and its mass is ∼ 0 . 1 $^{M}$⊙ . On the other hand, no 2SC quark matter appears in the stable configurations of the hybrid star constructed using the EOSs for which the nuclear matter part correspond to the APR and SLY4.\n\nThe equilibrium sequences for the hybrid stars rotating with fixed rotation frequency f are constructed. As an illustration, in Fig. 6, we plot mass verses circumferential equatorial radius R$_{eq}$ at fixed values of the rotational frequency obtained for two d i ff erent EOSs. For the clarity, we mainly focus on the regions of the M − R$_{eq}$ curves corresponding to the sequences of the hybrid stars which are relevant in the present context. We see that beyond certain frequency, so-called the critical rotation frequency f$_{crit}$ , the stable configuration for the rotating hybrid star does n ot exist. The solid black lines in Fig. 6 represent the result obtained at the f = f$_{crit}$ . In Fig. 7 we plot the values for the f$_{crit}$ (left panel) calculated for the cases for which the stable configurations for the non-rotating hybrid star exist. It is evident that the values of f$_{crit}$ are quite sensitive to the choice of the EOS for the nuclear matter as well as the CSQM. Depending on the EOSs, f$_{crit}$ varies in the range of 350 − 1275 Hz. We also plot in Fig. 7 (right panel) the maximum mass M$_{max}$ for the non-rotating hybrid stars with CSQM core. It is interesting to note from this Fig. that the values of G$_{D}$ and G$_{V}$ for a given nuclear matter EOS can be so adjusted that the resulting hybrid\n\n7" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8070276236379613, + "doc_id": "641d081bf9d7d83059129e0485d526850b06128a19e70a62e3d45a486b80c785", + "edit_distance": 0.218436873747495, + "f1_score": 0.9724310776942356, + "meteor": 0.8990516310412955, + "precision": 0.9897959183673469, + "pred_md": "FIG. 1: (a) Geometry of an equilateral triangular lattice of resonant atoms. (b) The corresponding reciprocal lattice, shown with open circles, and some high-symmetry points and directions in the first Brillouin zone. The dashed lines in (b) illustrate constructing the first Brillouin zone as the Wigner-Seitz cell of the reciprocal lattice.\n\nFIG. 1: (a) Geometry of an equilateral triangular lattice of resonant atoms. (b) The corresponding reciprocal lattice, shown with open circles, and some high-symmetry points and directions in the first Brillouin zone. The dashed lines in (b) illustrate constructing the first Brillouin zone as the Wigner-Seitz cell of the reciprocal lattice.\n\nto study systems that are much smaller than λ . For the same reason, we will assume the incident field to be uniform throughout the lattice, E in ( r ) ≡ E in , although our formalism is not limited to this case. As we have proven in [1, 2] for linear (1D) systems of interacting atoms, such an approach is indeed of a great help for understanding the locsitons' behavior.\n\nWe consider an equilateral triangular lattice (also known as a hexagonal lattice) of atoms, which has a six-fold rotation symmetry and belongs to the plane symmetry group (wallpaper group) p6m . [See Fig. 1(a).] This lattice type has a remarkable property of providing the most close-packed configuration of identical circular objects in a plane. Each atom in the lattice has six neighbors at the distances of l a . The 'second layer' of neighbors is removed by √ 3 l a or 2 l a ; considering the fast decrease of the dipole-dipole interaction force with the distance ( ∝ 1 /r 3 ), the NNA which ignores interaction with the second and further layers of neighbors is expected to work well.\n\nAs in the case of 1D arrays of atoms [1, 2], two major cases can be studied separately, where the incident laser field E in lies in plane (the ' ‖ ' case) or is normal to the plane of the lattice (the ' ⊥ ' case). The linear optical response in the case of any other incident polarization can be obtained using a superposition of these two configurations. Of the two major cases, the ' ‖ ' configuration is by far more interesting, exhibiting richer locsiton behavior and differing significantly from the 1D case due to the crucial in-plane anisotropy of the dipole-dipole interaction. It is also easier to implement, as the laser beam may be incident at the normal to the lattice of atoms, with the incident field being virtually uniform\n\n8", + "recall": 0.9556650246305419, + "true_md": "FIG. 1: (a) Geometry of an equilateral triangular lattice of resonant atoms. (b) The corresponding reciprocal lattice, shown with open circles, and some high-symmetry points and directions in the first Brillouin zone. The dashed lines in (b) illustrate constructing the first Brillouin zone as the Wigner-Seitz cell of the reciprocal lattice.\n\nto study systems that are much smaller than λ . For the same reason, we will assume the incident field to be uniform throughout the lattice, E$_{in}$ ( r ) ≡ E$_{in}$ , although our formalism is not limited to this case. As we have proven in [1, 2] for linear (1D) systems of interacting atoms, such an approach is indeed of a great help for understanding the locsitons’ behavior.\n\nWe consider an equilateral triangular lattice (also known as a hexagonal lattice) of atoms, which has a six-fold rotation symmetry and belongs to the plane symmetry group (wallpaper group) p6m . [See Fig. 1(a).] This lattice type has a remarkable property of providing the most close-packed configuration of identical circular objects in a plane. Each atom in the lattice has six neighbors at the distances of l a . The “second layer” of neighbors is removed by √$_{3}$$\\_{l}$$_{a}$ or 2 l a ; considering the fast decrease of the dipole-dipole interaction force with the distance ( ∝ 1 /r $^{3}$), the NNA which ignores interaction with the second and further layers of neighbors is expected to work well.\n\nAs in the case of 1D arrays of atoms [1, 2], two major cases can be studied separately, where the incident laser field E$_{in}$ lies in plane (the “ ‖ ” case) or is normal to the plane of the lattice (the “ ⊥ ” case). The linear optical response in the case of any other incident polarization can be obtained using a superposition of these two configurations. Of the two major cases, the “ ‖ ” configuration is by far more interesting, exhibiting richer locsiton behavior and differing significantly from the 1D case due to the crucial in-plane anisotropy of the dipole-dipole interaction. It is also easier to implement, as the laser beam may be incident at the normal to the lattice of atoms, with the incident field being virtually uniform\n\n8" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.020901273779607262, + "doc_id": "541d3b2df0bffa110025f136bfc0cb29de6ef287f608eb222eee73bd40a41f21", + "edit_distance": 0.8489208633093526, + "f1_score": 0.8081632653061224, + "meteor": 0.15713334988377795, + "precision": 0.9339622641509434, + "pred_md": "34\n\nreal, so we can choose the matrices R and S to be orthogonal) have to be diagonal. Since in general it is not possible to diagonalize four independent matrices using just two rotations, we will need to impose a set of consistency conditions on the wave-functions f a L,Rj and g a L,Rj and the constants c a j , that will determine the wave functions uniquely.\n\nLet's define:\n\n\n\nthe conditions that we need to impose on the KK modes are then:\n\n\n\n\n\n∣ We want to reduce the set of eqs. (A5) to a more explicit form. As a first thing, consider the integral appearing in the left-hand side of eq. (A5b). It can be rewritten\n\n\n\nIf the eigenfunctions ˜ f a L,Rj satisfy the equation of motion:\n\n\n\nwhere we leave the eigenvalue m j for now unspecified, then the integral in eq. (A6) can be further simplified to\n\n", + "recall": 0.7122302158273381, + "true_md": "34\n\nreal, so we can choose the matrices R and S to be orthogonal) have to be diagonal. Since in general it is not possible to diagonalize four independent matrices using just two rotations, we will need to impose a set of consistency conditions on the wave-functions f a L,R j and g a L,R j and the constants c a $_{j}$, that will determine the wave functions uniquely. Let’s define:\n\nthe conditions that we need to impose on the KK modes are then:\n\n( )∣ ∣ We want to reduce the set of eqs. (A5) to a more explicit form. As a first thing, consider the integral appearing in the left-hand side of eq. (A5b). It can be rewritten\n\nIf the eigenfunctions ˜ f a L,R j satisfy the equation of motion:\n\nwhere we leave the eigenvalue m$_{j}$ for now unspecified, then the integral in eq. (A6) can be further simplified to\n\n$$− m 2 k ∫ πR 0 ˜ f a L j ˜ f a L k dy + b ( πR ) ˜ f a $_{L j}$∂$_{y}$ ˜ f a L k ∣ ∣$^{πR}$ 0 + ( L → R ) . (A8)$$\n\n$$ˆ Df a L,R j = − m 2 $_{j}$f a $_{L,R j}$, (A7)$$\n\n$$∫ πR 0 b ( y ) ∂$_{y}$ ˜ f a $_{L j}$∂$_{y}$ ˜ f a L k dy + ( L → R ) = − ∫ πR 0 ˜ f a $_{L j}$∂$_{y}$ ( b ( y ) ∂$_{y}$ ˜ f a $_{Lk}$) dy + b ( πR ) ˜ f a $_{Lj}$∂$_{y}$ ˜ f a L k ∣ ∣$^{πR}$ 0 + ( L → R ) . (A6) If the eigenfunctions ˜ f a L,R j satisfy the equation of motion:$$\n\n$$f a L,R j = R$_{jk}$ ˜ f a $_{L,R k}$; g a L,R j = S$_{jk}$ ˜ g a $_{L,R k}$, c a j = S$_{jk}$ ˜ c a $_{k}$; (A4)$$\n\n$$1 g 2 5 ∫ πR 0 dy ( ˜ f a L j ˜ f a L k + ˜ f a R j ˜ f a R k ) + 1 ˜ g 2 ˜ f a L j ˜ f a L k ∣ πR + 1 ˜ g ′ 2 ˜ f 3 R j ˜ f 3 R k ∣ πR = a$_{j}$δ$_{jk}$ ; (A5a) 1 g 2 5 ∫ πR 0 dy b ( y ) ( ∂$_{y}$ ˜ f a $_{L j}$∂$_{y}$ ˜ f a L k + ∂$_{y}$ ˜ f a $_{R j}$∂$_{y}$ ˜ f a R k ) + ˜ v 2 4 b ( πR ) ( ˜ f a L j ˜ f a L k + ˜ f 3 R j ˜ f 3 R k − 2 ˜ f 3 L j ˜ f 3 R k ∣ πR = b$_{j}$δ$_{jk}$ ; (A5b) 1 g 2 5 ∫ πR 0 dy b y ) ( ˜ g a $_{Lj}$˜ g a Lk + ˜ g a $_{R j}$˜ g a R k ) + ˜ c a $_{j}$˜ c a k = c$_{j}$δ$_{jk}$ ; (A5c) 1 g 2 5 πR 0 dy b ( y ) ∂$_{y}$ ˜ f a $_{L j}$˜ g a L k + ∂$_{y}$ ˜ f a $_{R j}$˜ g a R k ) − ˜ v 2 ( ˜ f a $_{L j}$˜ c a k − ˜ f 3 $_{R j}$˜ c 3 k )∣ ∣ πR = d$_{j}$δ$_{jk}$. (A5d) We want to reduce the set of eqs. (A5) to a more explicit form. As a first thing, consider$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.46220848413506804, + "doc_id": "ea91a6ab3d82def6662fc344621939d69276149c67388f55efea9a9e2ed9a0f6", + "edit_distance": 0.437125748502994, + "f1_score": 0.92, + "meteor": 0.6057151851911665, + "precision": 0.9583333333333334, + "pred_md": "defined by:\n\n\n\nwhere dσ cal L d Ω ( θ cm , E x ) is the calculated distorted-wave Born approximation (DWBA) cross section corresponding to 100% energy-weighted sum rule (EWSR) for the L-th multipole. The fractions of the EWSR, a L ( E x ), for various multipole components were determined by minimizing χ 2 . This procedure is justified since the angular distributions are well characterized by the transferred angular momentum L , according to the DWBA calculations for α scattering. It was confirmed that the MDA fits were not affected by including L > 7.\n\nThe DWBA calculations were performed following the method of Satchler and Khoa [45], using the density-dependent single-folding model for the real part, obtained with a Gaussian α -nucleon potential, and a phenomenological Woods-Saxon potential for the imaginary term. Therefore, the α -nucleus interaction is given by:\n\n\n\nwhere V F ( R ) is the real single-folding potential obtained by folding the ground-state density with the density-dependent α -nucleon interaction:\n\n\n\nwhere v DDG ( r, r , ρ ' ) is the density-dependent α -nucleon interaction, | r -r ' | is the distance between the center of mass of the α particle and a target nucleon, ρ r ( ' ) is the ground-state density of the target nucleus at the position r ' of the target nucleon, β =1.9 fm , and 2 t =1.88 fm. W is the depth of the Woods-Saxon type imaginary part of the potential, with the reduced radius R I and diffuseness a I .\n\nThese calculations were performed with the computer code PTOLEMY [46, 47], with the input values modified [48] to take into account the correct relativistic kinematics. The shape of the real part of the potential and the form factor for PTOLEMY were obtained using the codes SDOLFIN and DOLFIN [49]. We use the transition densities and sum rules for various multipolarities described in Refs. [13, 50, 51]. The radial moments were obtained by numerical integration of the Fermi mass distribution with the parameter values from Ref. [52] (listed in Table I).\n\n8", + "recall": 0.8846153846153846, + "true_md": "defined by:\n\nwhere dσ cal L d Ω ( θ$_{cm}$, E$_{x}$ ) is the calculated distorted-wave Born approximation (DWBA) cross section corresponding to 100% energy-weighted sum rule (EWSR) for the L-th multipole. The fractions of the EWSR, a$_{L}$ ( E$_{x}$ ), for various multipole components were determined by minimizing χ $^{2}$. This procedure is justified since the angular distributions are well charac- terized by the transferred angular momentum L , according to the DWBA calculations for α scattering. It was confirmed that the MDA fits were not affected by including L > 7.\n\nThe DWBA calculations were performed following the method of Satchler and Khoa [45], using the density-dependent single-folding model for the real part, obtained with a Gaussian α -nucleon potential, and a phenomenological Woods-Saxon potential for the imaginary term. Therefore, the α -nucleus interaction is given by:\n\nwhere V$_{F}$ ( R ) is the real single-folding potential obtained by folding the ground-state density with the density-dependent α -nucleon interaction:\n\nwhere v$_{DDG}$ ( r, r $^{′}$, ρ ) is the density-dependent α -nucleon interaction, | r − r $^{′}$| is the distance between the center of mass of the α particle and a target nucleon, ρ ( r $^{′}$) is the ground-state density of the target nucleus at the position r ′ of the target nucleon, β =1.9 fm $^{2}$, and t =1.88 fm. W is the depth of the Woods-Saxon type imaginary part of the potential, with the reduced radius R$_{I}$ and diffuseness a$_{I}$ .\n\nThese calculations were performed with the computer code PTOLEMY [46, 47], with the input values modified [48] to take into account the correct relativistic kinematics. The shape of the real part of the potential and the form factor for PTOLEMY were obtained using the codes SDOLFIN and DOLFIN [49]. We use the transition densities and sum rules for various multipolarities described in Refs. [13, 50, 51]. The radial moments were obtained by numerical integration of the Fermi mass distribution with the parameter values from Ref. [52] (listed in Table I).\n\n8\n\n$$U ( r ) = V$_{F}$ ( r ) + iW/ (1 + exp (( r − R$_{I}$ ) /a$_{I}$ )) (2)$$\n\n$$v$_{DDG}$ ( r, r $^{′}$, ρ ) = − v (1 − βρ ( r $^{′}$) 2 / $^{3}$) exp ( −| r − r $^{′}$| $^{2}$/t$^{2}$)) (3)$$\n\n$$dσ exp d Ω ( θ$_{cm}$, E$_{x}$ ) = 7 ∑ L =0 a$_{L}$ ( E$_{x}$ ) × dσ cal L d Ω ( θ$_{cm}$, E$_{x}$ ) (1)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.1209888040481924, + "doc_id": "56649f2df3d1b3db0c1a0639c5173bfe92854c12bc098676c5f6761a01748eee", + "edit_distance": 0.7273853779429987, + "f1_score": 0.8282828282828283, + "meteor": 0.31109964496583337, + "precision": 0.9111111111111111, + "pred_md": "## II. NONCOMMUTATIVE QED 4\n\nClassically, the noncommutative QED 4 is described by the action\n\n\n\nwhere F µν = ∂ A µ ν -∂ A ν µ -ie A [ µ , A ν /star ] , with [ A ,A µ ν /star ] = A /star A µ ν -A /star A ν µ , is the field strength, D ψ µ = ∂ψ -ieA µ /star ψ is a gauge covariant derivative and the star (Moyal) product is defined by\n\n\n\nwhere θ µν is a real antisymmetric matrix and ξ is a parameter which sets the strength of the noncommutativity.\n\nThe above action is invariant under the gauge transformations\n\n\n\nTo complete the quantum version of the model, we need to add to (1) a gauge fixing, S GF , and the corresponding Faddeev-Popov, S FP , actions. For the general class of Lorentz gauges in which we will work\n\n\n\nwhere α is the gauge fixing parameter. As it happens in the commutative gauge theories, the total action S = S INV + S GF + S FP is not invariant under gauge transformations anymore but instead has a BRST symmetry such that\n\n\n\nwhere λ is a constant Grassmmanian parameter. At a formal level, the invariance of the action under these transformations imply in relations between the Green functions as it will be shortly verified. For an explicit calculation, we will need the Feynman rules for the model which are fixed\n\n3", + "recall": 0.7592592592592593, + "true_md": "## II. NONCOMMUTATIVE QED$_{4}$\n\nClassically, the noncommutative QED$_{4}$ is described by the action\n\nwhere F$_{µν}$ = ∂$_{µ}$A$_{ν}$ − ∂$_{ν}$A$_{µ}$ − ie [ A$_{µ}$, A$_{ν}$ ]$_{⋆}$, with [ A$_{µ}$, A$_{ν}$ ]$_{⋆}$ = A$_{µ}$ ⋆ A$_{ν}$ − A$_{ν}$ ⋆ A$_{µ}$ , is the field strength, D$_{µ}$ψ = ∂ψ − ieA$_{µ}$ ⋆ ψ is a gauge covariant derivative and the star (Moyal) product is defined by\n\nwhere θ$_{µν}$ is a real antisymmetric matrix and ξ is a parameter which sets the strength of the noncommutativity.\n\nThe above action is invariant under the gauge transformations\n\nTo complete the quantum version of the model, we need to add to (1) a gauge fixing, S$_{GF}$ , and the corresponding Faddeev-Popov, S$_{F P}$ , actions. For the general class of Lorentz gauges in which we will work\n\nwhere α is the gauge fixing parameter. As it happens in the commutative gauge theories, the total action S = S$_{IN V}$ + S$_{GF}$ + S$_{F P}$ is not invariant under gauge transformations anymore but instead has a BRST symmetry such that\n\nwhere λ is a constant Grassmmanian parameter. At a formal level, the invariance of the action under these transformations imply in relations between the Green functions as it will be shortly verified. For an explicit calculation, we will need the Feynman rules for the model which are fixed\n\n$$S$_{IN V}$ = ∫ d $^{4}$x [ − 1 4 F$_{µν}$ ⋆ F µν + ¯ ψ ⋆ ( i / D − m ) ψ ] , (1)$$\n\n$$φ$_{1}$ ( x ) ⋆ φ$_{2}$ ( x ) ≡ e i $_{2}$ξθ µν ∂ ∂x µ ∂ ∂y µ φ$_{1}$ ( x ) φ$_{2}$ ( y ) |$_{y}$$_{=}$$_{x}$ , (2)$$\n\n$$δA$_{µ}$ = 1 e D$_{µ}$ Λ ≡ 1 e ( ∂$_{µ}$ Λ − ie [ A$_{µ}$, Λ]$_{⋆}$) , δψ = i Λ ⋆ ψ ( δ ¯ ψ = − i ¯ ψ ⋆ Λ) . (3)$$\n\n$$S$_{GF}$ + S$_{F P}$ = ∫ d $^{4}$x [ − 1 2 α ( ∂$_{µ}$A $^{µ}$) 2 ⋆ + ∂$_{µ}$ ¯ C ⋆ ( ∂ $^{µ}$C − ie [ A $^{µ}$, C ]$_{⋆}$) ] , (4)$$\n\n$$δA$_{µ}$ = − 1 e ( ∂$_{µ}$C − ie [ A$_{µ}$, C ]$_{⋆}$) λ, δψ = − iCλ ⋆ ψ ( δ ¯ ψ = i ¯ ψ ⋆ Cλ ) , δC = iC ⋆ Cλ, δ ¯ C = − 1 αe ( ∂$_{µ}$A $^{µ}$) λ, (5)$$\n\n3" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.001330579389857348, + "doc_id": "6d923b614f721154c5684e0fcf8748ab3ad31f962937f4aaccbde570dcfb6104", + "edit_distance": 0.9272326350606395, + "f1_score": 0.6956521739130435, + "meteor": 0.09326050410157677, + "precision": 0.9056603773584906, + "pred_md": "Notice that in the Landau gauge Z 5 = 1 as it happens in ordinary commutative QCD [5]. Now,\n\n\n\nand making the substitution ( / p + / q -m ) → ( / p + / q -/ l ) + ( / l -m ), we obtain\n\n\n\nSimilarly,\n\n\n\n\n\nTherefore,\n\n\n\nwhere we also have done the replacement ( / p -m ) → ( / p -/ l ) + ( / l -m ). Finally, summing the above results,\n\n\n\n15", + "recall": 0.5647058823529412, + "true_md": "Notice that in the Landau gauge Z$_{5}$ = 1 as it happens in ordinary commutative QCD [5]. Now,\n\nand making the substitution ( / p + / q − m ) → ( / p + / q − / l ) + ( / l − m ), we obtain\n\nSimilarly,\n\nTherefore,\n\nwhere we also have done the replacement ( / p − m ) → ( / p − / l )+ ( / l − m ). Finally, summing the above results,\n\n$$( / p + / q − m ) B$_{1}$ ( p, p + q ) = ∫ d $^{4}$l (2 π ) 4 i ( p + q − l ) 2 i ( p − l ) $_{2}$( ie )( / p + / q − m ) iS$_{0}$ ( l )( ie )( / p + / q − / l ) × ( 1 − e 2 il × $^{q}$e − 2 ip × q ) (94)$$\n\n$$( / p + / q − m ) B$_{1}$ ( p, p + q ) = ∫ d $^{4}$l (2 π ) 4 i ( p + q − l ) 2 i ( p − l ) $_{2}$( ie )( / p + / q − / l ) iS$_{0}$ ( l )( ie )( / p + / q − / l ) × ( 1 − e 2 il ∧ $^{q}$e − 2 ip ∧ q ) + i ∫ d $^{4}$l (2 π ) 4 i ( p + q − l ) 2 i ( p − l ) $_{2}$( ie )( / p + / q − / l )( ie ) × ( 1 − e 2 il ∧ $^{q}$e − 2 ip ∧ q ) . (95)$$\n\n$$p l l-p q l-p-q p+q GLYPH GLYPH = B$_{2}$ ( p, p + q ) e ip ∧ q (96) = ∫ d $^{4}$l (2 π ) $_{4}$( − ieγ $^{α}$) − ig$_{αβ}$ ( p + q − l ) $_{2}$(2 e )( l − p ) β i ( p − l ) $_{2}$iS$_{0}$ ( l ) × 1 2 i ( 1 − e 2 il × $^{q}$e − 2 ip × q ) e ip × $^{q}$.$$\n\n$$B$_{2}$ ( p, p + q )( / p − m ) = ∫ d $^{4}$l (2 π ) 4 i ( p + q − l ) 2 i ( p − l ) $_{2}$( ie )( / p − / l ) iS$_{0}$ ( l )( ie )( / p − / l ) × ( 1 − e 2 il ∧ $^{q}$e − 2 ip ∧ q ) + i ∫ d $^{4}$l (2 π ) 4 i ( p + q − l ) 2 i ( p − l ) $_{2}$( ie )( / p − / l )( ie ) × ( 1 − e 2 il × $^{q}$e − 2 ip × q ) , (97)$$\n\n$$( / p + / q − m ) B$_{1}$ ( p, p + q ) − B$_{2}$ ( p, p + q )( / p − m ) = + ∫ d $^{4}$l (2 π ) 4 i ( p + q − l ) 2 i ( p − l ) $_{2}$( ie )( / p + / q − / l ) iS$_{0}$ ( l )( ie )( / p + / q − / l ) ( 1 − e 2 il ∧ $^{q}$e − 2 ip ∧ q )$$\n\n15" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5934991767994218, + "doc_id": "3130d58595520319241a1b31d02b5eb8241ba80c607e013346a0fa9e82c29e9a", + "edit_distance": 0.35930047694753575, + "f1_score": 0.9326683291770573, + "meteor": 0.6838856083320053, + "precision": 0.9739583333333334, + "pred_md": "10\n\nThe ground state wave function is given by [5]\n\n\n\nThe associated probability density for the particle positions is then given by\n\n\n\nIt is also easy to show also that the wave function above is an eigenfunction of the following similar looking Hamiltonian\n\n\n\nwith the derivatives being holomorphic and anti-holomorphic in the prescribed order. To prove this, one has to use the fact that µ 2 is a scaling function under rescalings of the z variables that leave ¯ fixed z (we are treating them as independent variables, rather than complex conjugate variables for that). The complete argument, which is beyond the scope of the present paper, is very similar to the one appearing in [5, 23].\n\nThe next set of simplest wave functions in this quenched dynamics are those associated to BPS states. They are described by holomorphic wave functions of the z variables multiplying the ground state wave function and these are symmetrized over the eigenvalues (this is is a discrete gauge symmetry of permutation of eigenvalues). These are not exact wave functions of H , but they are argued to be close to exact wave functions of the system. However, it turns out that all the homogeneous holomorphic wave functions are eigenfunctions of ˜ , H with energy E -E 0 equal to the degree of the polynomial of the z . As such, the Hamiltonian ˜ H seems more appropriate to capture all BPS states exactly than H , since the holomorphic wave functions do not seem to be eigenfunctions of H , except under certain approximations in the large N limit [23]. In general, the set of BPS solutions of the classical equations of motion on S 3 are in one to one correspondence with the moduli space of vacua of superconformal field theories. The quantization of these configurations is a particular holomorphic quantization of the moduli space of vacua [22], which requires a measure. The Hamiltonian ˜ H would give the exact answer for the chiral ring state energies and has the correct measure of the ground state wave function in the classical approximation to these solutions, which is the same quenched approximation we have been studying. This is the main reason to introduce it above. However, nothing else that we do depends on that fact.", + "recall": 0.8947368421052632, + "true_md": "10\n\nThe ground state wave function is given by [5]\n\n∑ ∑ The associated probability density for the particle positions is then given by\n\nIt is also easy to show also that the wave function above is an eigenfunction of the following similar looking Hamiltonian\n\n$$ψ$_{0}$ ( x ) = exp ( − 1 2 ∑ i | ⃗ x$_{i}$ | 2 ) = exp( − ∑ i ⃗ z$_{i}$ ⃗ ¯ z$_{i}$ ) (3) The associated probability density for the particle positions is then given by$$\n\n$$p = | ψ$_{0}$ | $^{2}$µ2 = exp ( − ∑ i | ⃗ x$_{i}$ | 2 + ∑ i\n\nThis is another way of removing the problem with the poles, and instead of a root of the single trace expressions, we are taking a ratio of these expressions for different k . In the ratio, if the numerator gets big when one particle goes towards the z 1 locus, the denominator also gets large at the same time, and in the observables the average is not unduly dominated by large fluctuations.\n\nIt turns out that this last definition, from the ones we have given, is optimal. We will explain how this works in the next section, where we can see directly in the data why this is so. Notice moreover, that if we take N →∞ first, one can use large N factorization (one expects small corrections in inverse powers of N ), so in the limit we also have that\n\n\n\nso it is clear that the different definitions are not too different from each other at large N . However, they behave very differently at finite N .\n\nAll of these functions are chosen because when we take N → ∞ at q fixed, they have (at least in principle) a theoretically controlled approach to large N that can be evaluated around the saddle point configuration. There are other reasons to choose inverse powers of the radius: in the paper of Chen et al. [43] it was shown that inverse powers of these matrices also appear in the description of closed string states in the presence of backgrounds with topology changes. Also, the moments of the eigenvalue density distribution serve as a characteristic description of shape that determines the half BPS states, and these can also be measured gravitationally in the AdS dual geometry [44] ( these particular calculations", + "recall": 0.926829268292683, + "true_md": "16\n\n$$R$_{0}$ = lim k →∞ 〈 ( r 2 k +2 k +1 r 2 k k ) 1 / 2 〉 = lim k →∞ 〈 ( f$_{k}$ f$_{k}$$_{+1}$ ) 1 / 2 〉 (19)$$\n\n$$R 2 0 | N →∞ = lim k →∞ 〈 f$_{k}$ f$_{k}$$_{+1}$ 〉 = lim k →∞ 〈 f$_{k}$ 〉 〈 f$_{k}$$_{+1}$ 〉 (20)$$\n\nstudy the result for various k and collect them together. We should see convergence to a limit in the numerical exploration of these configurations. For our setups the k will vary between one and fourteen. If the inner radius is at 1 / 2 of the full size of the geometry, the suppression of the outer edge contribution relative to the inner edge in a given sum can be as large as (0 . 5) 28 ≃ 10 − 9 for the case of maximum k , but for particles sitting at r ≃ 1 . 1 r$_{in}$ the suppression is only a factor of 14 smaller, so they should still be contributing. Of course, if the inner radius is very small, the near inner radius region is also very small and the suppression of the other regions will be more pronounced.\n\nThere is a third definition that is useful, and that is the following\n\nThis is another way of removing the problem with the poles, and instead of a root of the single trace expressions, we are taking a ratio of these expressions for different k . In the ratio, if the numerator gets big when one particle goes towards the z 1 locus, the denominator also gets large at the same time, and in the observables the average is not unduly dominated by large fluctuations.\n\nIt turns out that this last definition, from the ones we have given, is optimal. We will explain how this works in the next section, where we can see directly in the data why this is so. Notice moreover, that if we take N → ∞ first, one can use large N factorization (one expects small corrections in inverse powers of N ), so in the limit we also have that\n\nso it is clear that the different definitions are not too different from each other at large N .\n\nHowever, they behave very differently at finite N .\n\nAll of these functions are chosen because when we take N → ∞ at q fixed, they have (at least in principle) a theoretically controlled approach to large N that can be evaluated around the saddle point configuration. There are other reasons to choose inverse powers of the radius: in the paper of Chen et al. [43] it was shown that inverse powers of these matrices also appear in the description of closed string states in the presence of backgrounds with topology changes. Also, the moments of the eigenvalue density distribution serve as a characteristic description of shape that determines the half BPS states, and these can also be measured gravitationally in the AdS dual geometry [44] ( these particular calculations" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7376756807588548, + "doc_id": "d61497af979e67cfb5072c9962097c488bd1aa5fd460042d60ccf88b78f260d1", + "edit_distance": 0.2097457627118644, + "f1_score": 0.9545454545454545, + "meteor": 0.8234637394030304, + "precision": 0.9767441860465116, + "pred_md": "Acknowledgements The spin-resolved ARPES measurements are supported by NSF through the Center for Complex Materials (DMR-0819860) and Princeton University; the use of synchrotron X-ray facilities (ALS-LBNL Berkeley) is supported by the Basic Energy Sciences of the U.S. Department of Energy (DE-FG-02-05ER46200) and by the Swiss Light Source, Paul Scherrer Institute, Villigen, Switzerland.\n\nAuthor information Correspondence and requests for materials should be addressed to M.Z.H (mzhasan@princeton.edu).\n\n## METHODS\n\nSpin-integrated ARPES data were taken at beamlines 12.0.1 and 7.0.1 of the Advanced Light Source in Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory with 29 eV to 100 eV photons. Typical energy and momentum resolutions were 15 meV and 1% of the surface BZ and 50 meV and 2% of the surface BZ respectively. Spin-resolved ARPES measurements were performed at the SIS beamline at the Swiss Light Source using the COPHEE spectrometer, which consists of two 40 kV classical Mott detectors that measure all three spatial components of spin polarization. Spin-resolved measurements were taken with 20 eV to 22 eV photons with energy and momentum resolutions of 80 meV and 3% of the surface BZ respectively. Spin-integrated data were collected on Bi 2 -δ Ca Se δ 3 and Bi Te 2 3 single crystals cleaved in ultra high vacuum pressures better than 5 × 10 -11 torr and maintained at a temperature of 10 K unless otherwise specified. Spin-resolved data were collected at 50 K. Adsorption of NO 2 molecules on Bi 2 -δ Ca Se δ 3 was achieved via controlled exposures to NO gas (Matheson, 99.5%). The adsorption effects were studied under static flow mode by expos2 ing the cleaved sample surface to the gas for a certain time then taking data after the chamber was pumped down to the base pressure. Spectra of the NO 2 adsorbed surfaces were taken within minutes of opening the photon shutter to minimize photon exposure related effects. The calculations were performed with the LAPW method in slab geometry using the WIEN2K package.\n\n[1] Day, C. Exotic spin textures show up in diverse materials. Phys. Today 62 , 12-13 (2009). http://dx.doi.org/10.1063/1.3120883\n\n10", + "recall": 0.9333333333333333, + "true_md": "Acknowledgements The spin-resolved ARPES measurements are supported by NSF through the Center for Complex Materials (DMR-0819860) and Princeton University; the use of synchrotron X-ray facilities (ALS-LBNL Berkeley) is supported by the Basic Energy Sciences of the U.S. Depart- ment of Energy (DE-FG-02-05ER46200) and by the Swiss Light Source, Paul Scherrer Institute, Villigen, Switzerland.\n\nAuthor information Correspondence and requests for materials should be addressed to M.Z.H (mzhasan@princeton.edu).\n\nSpin-integrated ARPES data were taken at beamlines 12.0.1 and 7.0.1 of the Advanced Light Source in Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory with 29 eV to 100 eV photons. Typical energy and momentum resolutions were 15 meV and 1% of the surface BZ and 50 meV and 2% of the surface BZ respectively. Spin-resolved ARPES measurements were performed at the SIS beamline at the Swiss Light Source using the COPHEE spectrometer, which consists of two 40 kV classical Mott detectors that measure all three spatial components of spin polarization. Spin-resolved mea- surements were taken with 20 eV to 22 eV photons with energy and momentum resolutions of 80 meV and 3% of the surface BZ respectively. Spin-integrated data were collected on Bi$_{2}$$\\_{−}$$_{δ}$Ca$_{δ}$Se$_{3}$ and Bi$_{2}$Te$_{3}$ single crystals cleaved in ultra high vacuum pressures better than 5 × 10 − 11 torr and maintained at a temperature of 10 K unless otherwise specified. Spin-resolved data were collected at 50 K. Adsorption of NO$_{2}$ molecules on Bi$_{2}$$\\_{−}$$_{δ}$Ca$_{δ}$Se$_{3}$ was achieved via controlled exposures to NO$_{2}$ gas (Matheson, 99.5%). The adsorption effects were studied under static flow mode by expos- ing the cleaved sample surface to the gas for a certain time then taking data after the chamber was pumped down to the base pressure. Spectra of the NO$_{2}$ adsorbed surfaces were taken within min- utes of opening the photon shutter to minimize photon exposure related effects. The calculations were performed with the LAPW method in slab geometry using the WIEN2K package.\n\n## METHODS\n\n- [1] Day, C. Exotic spin textures show up in diverse materials. Phys. Today 62 , 12-13 (2009). http://dx.doi.org/10.1063/1.3120883\n\n10" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6192613899762661, + "doc_id": "acc4e8cec7375b0a92167c8674229afb81fe250cac8868cad9d5950f6d90448e", + "edit_distance": 0.3956692913385827, + "f1_score": 0.9090909090909091, + "meteor": 0.6834754037886844, + "precision": 0.9536082474226805, + "pred_md": "effects with promising applications, like the optical bistability and hysteresis. In the present paper, however, we will only consider linear effects in 2D lattices of resonant atoms.\n\nWe can rewrite Eqs. (1)-(3) in the following closed form,\n\n/negationslash\n\n\n\nwhere we introduced the dimensionless strength Q of the dipole-dipole coupling between neighboring atoms, which is easily controlled through the normalized frequency detuning δ ,\n\n\n\nThe maximum normalized strength of interaction between neighboring atoms,\n\n\n\nis reached at zero detuning of the incident laser frequency from the atomic resonance ( δ = 0). Note that this is the point where our approach drastically departs from the conventional LF theory, where the LF is implied quasi-uniform on a scale of many l a , so that E L ( r ) ≈ E L ( r ' ). More details on the general LF model that we use in this paper, including some quantitative estimates of Q a for realistic systems, can be found in our recent publication [2].\n\nIn the present paper we restrict our considerations to the nearest-neighbor approximation (NNA), in which only interactions between the closest atoms are taken into account in Eq. (4). As we demonstrated in [1, 2], this approximation leads to qualitatively similar results compared to the full solution, that takes into account interactions between all pairs of atoms in the system. The NNA allows us to derive simpler analytic expressions and undertake numerical simulations for reasonably large lattices.\n\n## III. LOCSITONS IN TRIANGULAR LATTICES: IN-PLANE POLARIZATION\n\nIn this section we consider the emergence and properties of locsitons in infinite unbounded planar lattices of atoms. Here we aim at studying locsitons in their 'simplest' form, without the system boundaries complicating the picture. At the same time, we will continue to assume the near-field character of the interatomic interaction, because our ultimate goal is\n\n7", + "recall": 0.8685446009389671, + "true_md": "effects with promising applications, like the optical bistability and hysteresis. In the present paper, however, we will only consider linear effects in 2D lattices of resonant atoms.\n\nWe can rewrite Eqs. (1)–(3) in the following closed form,\n\nwhere we introduced the dimensionless strength Q of the dipole-dipole coupling between neighboring atoms, which is easily controlled through the normalized frequency detuning δ ,\n\nThe maximum normalized strength of interaction between neighboring atoms,\n\nis reached at zero detuning of the incident laser frequency from the atomic resonance ( δ = 0). Note that this is the point where our approach drastically departs from the conventional LF theory, where the LF is implied quasi-uniform on a scale of many l a , so that E$_{L}$ ( r ) ≈ E$_{L}$ ( r $^{′}$). More details on the general LF model that we use in this paper, including some quantitative estimates of Q a for realistic systems, can be found in our recent publication [2].\n\nIn the present paper we restrict our considerations to the nearest-neighbor approximation (NNA), in which only interactions between the closest atoms are taken into account in Eq. (4). As we demonstrated in [1, 2], this approximation leads to qualitatively similar results compared to the full solution, that takes into account interactions between all pairs of atoms in the system. The NNA allows us to derive simpler analytic expressions and undertake numerical simulations for reasonably large lattices.\n\nIn this section we consider the emergence and properties of locsitons in infinite unbounded planar lattices of atoms. Here we aim at studying locsitons in their “simplest” form, without the system boundaries complicating the picture. At the same time, we will continue to assume the near-field character of the interatomic interaction, because our ultimate goal is\n\n## III. LOCSITONS IN TRIANGULAR LATTICES: IN-PLANE POLARIZATION\n\n$$E$_{L}$ ( r ) = E$_{in}$ ( r ) − Q 4 $^{$_{r}$′}$̸ = r ∑ lattice l 3 a | r ′ − r | 3 × { 3 u [ E$_{L}$ ( r $^{′}$) · u ] − E$_{L}$ ( r $^{′}$) } , (4)$$\n\n$$Q = Q a δ + i . (5)$$\n\n$$Q a = 8 | d a | 2 ϵ ¯ h Γ l 3 a , (6)$$\n\n7" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9360058082327628, + "doc_id": "aad9e5177c1494a5cf82d1cb532921ad6233df9ad014cd147a9dfd998bfc8183", + "edit_distance": 0.05405405405405406, + "f1_score": 0.9541595925297114, + "meteor": 0.9638022237207581, + "precision": 0.9689655172413794, + "pred_md": "height represents 40 kbp) at a range of thermodynamic states at times 0 and 10 seconds after setting the loading rate to zero. Two features are apparent. First, S-DNA is sufficiently long-lived to be seen after 10 seconds of waiting at low temperatures. Second, near and above room temperature, S-DNA is short-lived. We show a similar diagram in Fig. 4 for identical thermodynamic conditions but a smaller stretching rate of 100 nm/s. Because the target force f 0 is attained more slowly, and molecules spend more time at high forces than do their counterparts in Fig. 3, more unpeeling is observed. We show additional 'dynamic phase diagrams' at salt concentrations of 50 mM (Fig. 5) and 500 mM (Fig. 6), and individual molecular compositions as a function of sequence in Fig. 7. We find that S-DNA is short-lived and that unpeeling occurs readily under the conditions considered in Ref. [9]: we would not expect S-DNA to be observed at forces near 65 pN after a few seconds under those conditions. Repeating such experiments at high salt concentrations and at low temperatures would provide a test of the predictions presented here.\n\nWe have argued previously [10, 11] that the transient emergence of S-DNA rationalizes several recent experimental observations. The basepair-by-basepair processivity of U-DNA means that its emergence and disappearance is slow, which renders hysteretic a stretching-shortening cycle [4, 6]. Moreover, competition between S-DNA's basepairing-stacking energy and U-DNA's entropy confers a strong temperature dependence upon the degree of hysteresis accompanying a stretchingshortening cycle, in agreement with the striking kinetic data of Ref. [17]. The transient stability of S-DNA also rationalizes [6, 10] a multi-stage force-extension behavior (for DNA at sufficiently low temperature, high salt concentration and possessing sufficiently low AT content), in which a pulling rate-independent plateau at 65 pN is succeeded at high forces by a second, rate-dependent transition, as seen experimentally [16, 18]. By contrast, we predict that DNA forced to dehybridize during overstretching (as would happen if S-DNA does not exist) gives rise to considerable hysteresis under all solution conditions (rather than only at high temperatures) and a strongly pulling rate-dependent overstretching force [10]. Finally, we note that the 'force-induced melting' picture proposes that overstretched DNA near 65 pN consists of internal molten bubbles (M-DNA) punctuated by small regions of B-DNA, and that unpeeling occurs at higher forces [1-3]. The observation of Ref. [9] that DNA at low salt concentrations progressively unpeels near 65 pN from nicks and free ends appears to challenge this picture.\n\n## III. SUMMARY\n\nStatistical mechanical considerations cannot suggest likely atomistic structures for S-DNA (possible manifestations of which have been reported in recent atomistic simulations [19, 20]). However, we argue that overstretching dynamics revealed by experiments, especially the recent Ref. [12], implies the existence of an elongated phase of DNA energetically preferred to U-DNA. We have noted previously the limitations of the coarse-grained picture that we advocate, as well as the fact that a different interpretation of M-DNA (does it retain some energetic advantage over U-DNA, for instance?) might yield agreement between our model calculations and experimental data in\n\n4", + "recall": 0.939799331103679, + "true_md": "height represents 40 kbp) at a range of thermodynamic states at times 0 and 10 seconds after setting the loading rate to zero. Two features are apparent. First, S-DNA is sufficiently long-lived to be seen after 10 seconds of waiting at low temperatures. Second, near and above room temperature, S-DNA is short-lived. We show a similar diagram in Fig. 4 for identical thermodynamic conditions but a smaller stretching rate of 100 nm/s. Because the target force f$_{0}$ is attained more slowly, and molecules spend more time at high forces than do their counterparts in Fig. 3, more unpeeling is observed. We show additional ‘dynamic phase diagrams’ at salt concentrations of 50 mM (Fig. 5) and 500 mM (Fig. 6), and individual molecular compositions as a function of sequence in Fig. 7. We find that S-DNA is short-lived and that unpeeling occurs readily under the conditions considered in Ref. [9]: we would not expect S-DNA to be observed at forces near 65 pN after a few seconds under those conditions. Repeating such experiments at high salt concentrations and at low temperatures would provide a test of the predictions presented here.\n\nWe have argued previously [10, 11] that the transient emergence of S-DNA rationalizes several recent experimental observations. The basepair-by-basepair processivity of U-DNA means that its emergence and disappearance is slow, which renders hysteretic a stretching-shortening cycle [4, 6]. Moreover, competition between S-DNA’s basepairing-stacking energy and U-DNA’s entropy con- fers a strong temperature dependence upon the degree of hysteresis accompanying a stretching- shortening cycle, in agreement with the striking kinetic data of Ref. [17]. The transient stability of S-DNA also rationalizes [6, 10] a multi-stage force-extension behavior (for DNA at sufficiently low temperature, high salt concentration and possessing sufficiently low AT content), in which a pulling rate-independent plateau at 65 pN is succeeded at high forces by a second, rate-dependent transition, as seen experimentally [16, 18]. By contrast, we predict that DNA forced to dehy- bridize during overstretching (as would happen if S-DNA does not exist) gives rise to considerable hysteresis under all solution conditions (rather than only at high temperatures) and a strongly pulling rate-dependent overstretching force [10]. Finally, we note that the ‘force-induced melting’ picture proposes that overstretched DNA near 65 pN consists of internal molten bubbles (M-DNA) punctuated by small regions of B-DNA, and that unpeeling occurs at higher forces [1–3]. The ob- servation of Ref. [9] that DNA at low salt concentrations progressively unpeels near 65 pN from nicks and free ends appears to challenge this picture.\n\nStatistical mechanical considerations cannot suggest likely atomistic structures for S-DNA (possible manifestations of which have been reported in recent atomistic simulations [19, 20]). However, we argue that overstretching dynamics revealed by experiments, especially the recent Ref. [12], implies the existence of an elongated phase of DNA energetically preferred to U-DNA. We have noted previously the limitations of the coarse-grained picture that we advocate, as well as the fact that a different interpretation of M-DNA (does it retain some energetic advantage over U-DNA, for instance?) might yield agreement between our model calculations and experimental data in\n\n## III. SUMMARY\n\n4" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.672563640696525, + "doc_id": "f635539880cb8e6d858c7b3d244781c1a4afac11800124c38783592067e2ec25", + "edit_distance": 0.405152224824356, + "f1_score": 0.9323843416370107, + "meteor": 0.8127741863460011, + "precision": 0.9357142857142857, + "pred_md": "FIG. 3: Testing the adiabatic sweep theorem. (Inset) The measured potential energy, V , and release energy, T + , per particle in units of I E F is shown as a function of 1 /k F a . (Main) Taking a discrete derivative of the data shown in the inset, we find that 2 π dE d ( -1 ( / k F a )) ( · ) agrees well with the contact C measured from the highk tail momentum distribution ( · ).\n\nFIG. 3: Testing the adiabatic sweep theorem. (Inset) The measured potential energy, V , and release energy, T + , per particle in units of I E F is shown as a function of 1 /k F a . (Main) Taking a discrete derivative of the data shown in the inset, we find that 2 π dE d ( -1 ( / k F a )) ( · ) agrees well with the contact C measured from the highk tail momentum distribution ( · ).\n\ninteraction strength is changed adiabatically. To obtain the energy per particle, E , we sum the values for T + I and V shown in the inset of Fig. 3. To test the adiabatic sweep theorem, we find the derivative, dE d ( -1 ( / k F a )) , simply by calculating the slope for pairs of neighboring points in the inset to Fig. 3. In the main part of Fig. 4, we compare this point-by-point derivative, multiplied by 2 π , to C obtained from the average values of the data shown in Fig. 2( · ). Comparing these measurements of the left and right sides of Eqn. 2, we find good agreement and thus verify the adiabatic sweep theorem for our strongly interacting Fermi gas.\n\nA second universal relation that we can directly test is the generalized virial theorem [2],\n\n\n\nwhich relates the difference between the release energy and the potential energy to the contact. Eqn. 3 is predicted to be valid for all values of the interaction strength ( k F a ) -1 . This generalized virial theorem reduces to E -2 V = 0 for the ideal gas, where I = 0, as well\n\n8", + "recall": 0.9290780141843972, + "true_md": "FIG. 3: Testing the adiabatic sweep theorem. (Inset) The measured potential energy, V , and release energy, T + I , per particle in units of E$_{F}$ is shown as a function of 1 /k$_{F}$ a . (Main) Taking a discrete derivative of the data shown in the inset, we find that 2 π dE d ( − 1 / ( k$_{F}$ a )) ( • ) agrees well with the contact C measured from the high- k tail momentum distribution ( ◦ ).\n\ninteraction strength is changed adiabatically. To obtain the energy per particle, E , we sum the values for T + I and V shown in the inset of Fig. 3. To test the adiabatic sweep theorem, we find the derivative, dE d ( − 1 / ( k$_{F}$ a $_{))}$, simply by calculating the slope for pairs of neighboring points in the inset to Fig. 3. In the main part of Fig. 4, we compare this point-by-point derivative, multiplied by 2 π , to C obtained from the average values of the data shown in Fig. 2( ◦ ). Comparing these measurements of the left and right sides of Eqn. 2, we find good agreement and thus verify the adiabatic sweep theorem for our strongly interacting Fermi gas.\n\nA second universal relation that we can directly test is the generalized virial theorem [2],\n\n$$E − 2 V = T + I − V = − C 4 πk$_{F}$a , (3)$$\n\nwhich relates the difference between the release energy and the potential energy to the contact. Eqn. 3 is predicted to be valid for all values of the interaction strength ( k$_{F}$a ) − $^{1}$. This generalized virial theorem reduces to E − 2 V = 0 for the ideal gas, where I = 0, as well\n\n8" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "b443653d92cd66498d213ad5e1b9ac494b8f6bd73ba99ce905270e8504d33b5f", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.999968, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "This figure \"Fig04.jpg\" is available in \"jpg\"GLYPH<10> format from:\n\nhttp://arxiv.org/ps/1001.4384v3", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "This figure \"Fig04.jpg\" is available in \"jpg\"GLYPH<10> format from:\n\nhttp://arxiv.org/ps/1001.4384v3" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.018747537080700743, + "doc_id": "135f05ccf631a07a2b4fdd6ad19d0d648e423ca4a8a3cb5f980215b03b7bea77", + "edit_distance": 0.9002463054187192, + "f1_score": 0.6990291262135924, + "meteor": 0.1332723709323703, + "precision": 0.9230769230769231, + "pred_md": "and\n\n\n\nwhere Λ µ ( p, p + ), Σ( ) and q p B p,p ( + ) are the one-loop contributions. q Thus, the ST identity for the vectorial vertex (50), in the tree approximation, becomes\n\n\n\nso that the validity of the ST identity requires that\n\n\n\nFor the one-loop approximation, we have\n\n\n\nThe diagrams representing these contributions are given by: (from now on, we restrict ourselves to the Feynman gauge, α = 1)\n\n\n\n\n\nwith\n\n\n\nThis contribution is entirely nonplanar and using / q = ( / q + / p -/ l -m ) -( / p -/ l -m ) can be shown to satisfy\n\n\n\nwhere the nonplanar fermion self-energy is\n\n\n\n12", + "recall": 0.5625, + "true_md": "and\n\n[ ] where Λ $^{µ}$( p, p + q ), Σ( p ) and B ( p, p + q ) are the one-loop contributions. Thus, the ST identity for the vectorial vertex (50), in the tree approximation, becomes\n\nso that the validity of the ST identity requires that\n\nFor the one-loop approximation, we have\n\nThe diagrams representing these contributions are given by: (from now on, we restrict ourselves to the Feynman gauge, α = 1)\n\nwith\n\nThis contribution is entirely nonplanar and using / q = ( / q + / p − / l − m ) − ( / p − / l − m ) can be shown to satisfy\n\nwhere the nonplanar fermion self-energy is\n\n12\n\n$$S − 1 F ( p ) = [ Z$_{2}$ / p − m − δm − Σ( p ) ] , (73) ( p, p + q ) are the one-loop contributions. Thus, the ST identity for$$\n\n$$Z$_{1}$$_{F}$ ˜ Z$_{3}$ / qe ip ∧ q = [ Z$_{2}$Z$_{5}$ ( / p + / q ) − ( m + δm ) Z$_{5}$ ] e ip ∧ q − [ Z$_{2}$Z$_{6}$ / p − ( m + δm ) Z$_{6}$ ] e ip ∧ $^{q}$, (74)$$\n\n$$Z$_{5}$ = Z$_{6}$ and ˜ Z$_{3}$/Z$_{5}$ = Z$_{2}$/Z$_{1}$$_{F}$ . (75)$$\n\n$$q$_{µ}$ Λ µ $_{a}$( p, p + q ) + q$_{µ}$ Λ µ $_{b}$( p, p + q ) + / qb ( q $^{2}$) = Σ( p ) − Σ( p + q ) + ( / p + / q − m ) B$_{1}$ ( p, p + q ) − B$_{2}$ ( p, p + q )( / p − m ) . (76)$$\n\n$$1 . p q l GLYPH p-l p+q-l p+q GLYPH GLYPH = − ie Λ µ $_{a}$( p, p + q ) e ip ∧ q (77) = ∫ d $^{4}$l (2 π ) 4 − ig$_{αβ}$ l 2 ( − ieγ $^{α}$) iS$_{0}$ ( p + q − l )( − ieγ $^{µ}$) iS$_{0}$ ( p − l )( − ieγ $^{β}$) e − 2 il ∧ $^{q}$eip ∧ $^{q}$,$$\n\n$$iS$_{0}$ ( p ) = i / p − m . (78)$$\n\n$$q$_{µ}$ Λ µ $_{a}$( p, p + q ) = Σ$_{np}$( p ) − Σ$_{np}$( p + q ) , (79)$$\n\n$$− i Σ$_{np}$( p ) = ∫ d $^{4}$l (2 π ) 4 − ig$_{αβ}$ l 2 ( − ieγ $^{α}$) iS$_{0}$ ( p − l )( − ieγ $^{β}$) e − 2 il ∧ $^{q}$. (80)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.3291610576084753, + "doc_id": "b265e974664a8b53f72e80db4c33d331aef4532e8413f2e1a14d4822393def7b", + "edit_distance": 0.5452488687782805, + "f1_score": 0.8975069252077562, + "meteor": 0.4964908522043585, + "precision": 0.9473684210526315, + "pred_md": "canonical ensemble. The free energy functional is first defined on the original KMC lattice. However, after re-writing the interaction terms employing gradient operators [78] one finally obtains the free energy functional for a continuous system\n\n\n\nwhere\n\n\n\nSince the liquid may evaporate from the surface into the vapour above the surface, µ is the (true) chemical potential of this reservoir and determines the rate of evaporation [condensation] from [to] the surface. Note that normally a free energy of the form in Eq. (4) is obtained by making a gradient expansion of the free energy functional of a continuous system [84]. However, here we have made the mapping from the free energy of the lattice KMC system.\n\nThe chemical potential for the nanoparticles may be determined from the functional derivative µ n = δF ρ , ρ [ n l ] /δρ n ( r ) . In equilibrium it is constant throughout the system, but it may vary spatially in a non-equilibrium system, i.e., µ n = µ n ( r , t ) . We assume that the dynamics of the nanoparticles is governed by the thermodynamic force ∇ µ n - i.e. that the nanoparticle current is j = -M ρ n n ∇ µ n , where M ρ n ( l ) is a mobility coefficient that depends on the local density of the liquid. Combining this expression for the current with the continuity equation, we obtain the following evolution equation for the nanoparticle density profile\n\n\n\nNote that this equation of motion may also be obtained by assuming that the nanoparticles have over-damped stochastic equations of motion [80-83]. Here, we assume that M ρ n ( l ) = α Θ ( s ρ l -0 5) . , where Θ ( s x ) is a continuous function that switches smoothly from the value 0 to the value 1 at x = 0 (i.e. it is essentially a smooth analogue of the Heaviside function). This ensures that the nanoparticles are immobile when the local liquid density is small (dry substrate) and have a mobility coefficient α when ρ l is high (wet substrate).\n\nFor the evolution of the liquid density distribution we assume that the liquid is able to evaporate from the surface into the vapour (reservoir) above the surface (non-conserved dynamics) and may\n\n15", + "recall": 0.8526315789473684, + "true_md": "canonical ensemble. The free energy functional is first defined on the original KMC lattice. How- ever, after re-writing the interaction terms employing gradient operators [78] one finally obtains the free energy functional for a continuous system\n\nwhere\n\nSince the liquid may evaporate from the surface into the vapour above the surface, µ is the (true) chemical potential of this reservoir and determines the rate of evaporation [condensation] from [to] the surface. Note that normally a free energy of the form in Eq. (4) is obtained by making a gradient expansion of the free energy functional of a continuous system [84]. However, here we have made the mapping from the free energy of the lattice KMC system.\n\nThe chemical potential for the nanoparticles may be determined from the functional derivative µ$_{n}$ = δF [ ρ$_{n}$, ρ$_{l}$ ] /δρ$_{n}$ ( r ) . In equilibrium it is constant throughout the system, but it may vary spatially in a non-equilibrium system, i.e., µ$_{n}$ = µ$_{n}$ ( r , t ) . We assume that the dynamics of the nanoparticles is governed by the thermodynamic force ∇ µ$_{n}$ – i.e. that the nanoparticle current is j = − M$_{n}$ρ$_{n}$ ∇ µ$_{n}$ , where M$_{n}$ ( ρ$_{l}$ ) is a mobility coefficient that depends on the local density of the liquid. Combining this expression for the current with the continuity equation, we obtain the following evolution equation for the nanoparticle density profile\n\nNote that this equation of motion may also be obtained by assuming that the nanoparticles have over-damped stochastic equations of motion [80–83]. Here, we assume that M$_{n}$ ( ρ$_{l}$ ) = α Θ$_{s}$( ρ$_{l}$ − 0 . 5) , where Θ$_{s}$( x ) is a continuous function that switches smoothly from the value 0 to the value 1 at x = 0 (i.e. it is essentially a smooth analogue of the Heaviside function). This ensures that the nanoparticles are immobile when the local liquid density is small (dry substrate) and have a mobility coefficient α when ρ$_{l}$ is high (wet substrate).\n\nFor the evolution of the liquid density distribution we assume that the liquid is able to evaporate from the surface into the vapour (reservoir) above the surface (non-conserved dynamics) and may\n\n15\n\n$$∂ρ$_{n}$ ∂t = ∇ · [ M$_{n}$ρ$_{n}$ ∇ δF [ ρ$_{n}$, ρ$_{l}$ ] δρ$_{n}$ ] . (6)$$\n\n$$F [ ρ$_{l}$, ρ$_{n}$ ] = ∫ d r $^{[}$f ( ρ$_{l}$, ρ$_{n}$ ) + ε$_{ll}$ 2 ( ∇ ρ$_{l}$ ) 2 + ε$_{nn}$ 2 ( ∇ ρ$_{n}$ ) 2 + ε$_{nl}$ ( ∇ ρ$_{n}$ ) · ( ∇ ρ$_{l}$ ) − µρ$_{l}$ $^{]}$, (4)$$\n\n$$f ( ρ$_{l}$, ρ$_{n}$ ) = kT [ ρ$_{l}$ ln ρ$_{l}$ + (1 − ρ$_{l}$ ) ln(1 − ρ$_{l}$ )] + kT [ ρ$_{n}$ ln ρ$_{n}$ + (1 − ρ$_{n}$ ) ln(1 − ρ$_{n}$ )] − 2 ε$_{ll}$ρ 2 l − 2 ε$_{nn}$ρ 2 n − 4 ε$_{nl}$ρ$_{n}$ρ$_{l}$. (5)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4795806199269999, + "doc_id": "2ab06e940ef25ff7b2e832ab8176de15dc06fd97f22f6b543c8146aac0e7b82f", + "edit_distance": 0.5823353293413174, + "f1_score": 0.9287469287469288, + "meteor": 0.5091554827816315, + "precision": 0.949748743718593, + "pred_md": "13\n\nThe equations of the saddle point are the following\n\n\n\nwhere C is a Lagrange multiplier enforcing the constraint (9). These equations are valid on the support of ρ . We can prove that these equations lead to a singular support for ρ . We do this by contradiction.\n\nAssume that a smooth locus for the support of ˆ is allowed. ρ In that case, we can differentiate the equation 11 six times, with the Laplacian in 6 dimensions to the cubed power. We find then that\n\n\n\nas the first two terms obviously are cancelled. Notice that\n\n\n\nso that away from z 1 = 0 we have that\n\n\n\nbecause the function is harmonic: a sum of a holomorphic plus an antiholomorphic piece. Also, is is easy to show that ( ∇ 2 ) 2 log( /vector a -/vector b ) ∝ δ 6 ( /vector a -/vector b ). With these, we would find that ˆ = 0. ρ This argument contradicts that ∫ ˆ = 1, so the assumption that ρ ˆ is ρ smooth does not work. This argument has been given before in [5, 23], and we are presenting it here for completeness.\n\nWhat this indicates is that the density distribution of particles is singular. Since for q = 0 the original probability distribution is spherically symmetric, it is natural to assume that the associated distribution is spherically symmetric. The radius was computed in [18]. This has also been checked numerically in [6, 7]. A generalization to all Calabi-Yau cone conformal field theory singularities for this result can be found in [23], where it was seen that this procedure matches various other supergravity calculations in the absence of symmetry.\n\nFor q > 0 but very small, we expect that the distribution does not change much, except in the region z 1 /similarequal 0. Thus we expect that the distribution gives a five dimensional manifold of R 6 , possibly with a boundary, and that the region near z 1 = 0 has no density of eigenvalues present. After all, the effective potential repels all particles from the locus z 1 = 0. This", + "recall": 0.9086538461538461, + "true_md": "13\n\nThe equations of the saddle point are the following\n\nAssume that a smooth locus for the support of ˆ ρ is allowed. In that case, we can differ- entiate the equation 11 six times, with the Laplacian in 6 dimensions to the cubed power.\n\nWe find then that\n\nas the first two terms obviously are cancelled. Notice that\n\nso that away from z 1 = 0 we have that\n\n( ) because the function is harmonic: a sum of a holomorphic plus an antiholomorphic piece.\n\nAlso, is is easy to show that ( ∇ $^{2}$)$^{2}$log( ⃗ a − ⃗ b ) ∝ δ $^{6}$( ⃗ a − ⃗ b ). With these, we would find that ˆ ρ = 0. This argument contradicts that ∫ ˆ ρ = 1, so the assumption that ˆ ρ is smooth does not work. This argument has been given before in [5, 23], and we are presenting it here for completeness.\n\nWhat this indicates is that the density distribution of particles is singular. Since for q = 0 the original probability distribution is spherically symmetric, it is natural to assume that the associated distribution is spherically symmetric. The radius was computed in [18].\n\nThis has also been checked numerically in [6, 7]. A generalization to all Calabi-Yau cone conformal field theory singularities for this result can be found in [23], where it was seen that this procedure matches various other supergravity calculations in the absence of symmetry.\n\nFor q > 0 but very small, we expect that the distribution does not change much, except in the region z 1 ≃ 0. Thus we expect that the distribution gives a five dimensional manifold of R $^{6}$, possibly with a boundary, and that the region near z 1 = 0 has no density of eigenvalues present. After all, the effective potential repels all particles from the locus z 1 = 0. This\n\nwhere C is a Lagrange multiplier enforcing the constraint (9). These equations are valid on the support of ρ . We can prove that these equations lead to a singular support for ρ . We do this by contradiction.\n\n$$C − ⃗ a 2 + q log( a 2 1 + a 2 $_{2}$) + ∫ d $^{6}$b ˆ ρ ( b ) log | ⃗ a − ⃗ b | 2 = 0 (11)$$\n\n$$( ∇ $^{2}$)$^{3}$q log( a 2 1 + a 2 $_{2}$) + ∫ db $^{6}$ˆ ρ ( b ) ∇ $^{2}$log | ⃗ a − ⃗ b | 2 = 0 (12)$$\n\n$$log( a 1 + a 2 $_{2}$) ≃ log( z $^{1}$) + log(¯ z $^{1}$) (13)$$\n\n$$∇ $^{2}$log( a 1 + a 2 $_{2}$) = ∇ 2 ( log( z $^{1}$) + log(¯ z $^{1}$) ) = 0 (14) because the function is harmonic: a sum of a holomorphic plus an antiholomorphic piece.$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.3775688847926355, + "doc_id": "62c37e01b2cbc43ec1621a601183eebac8f22439872deecf6b8cb4b3d19a809a", + "edit_distance": 0.5253036437246964, + "f1_score": 0.9705093833780161, + "meteor": 0.5868944041232974, + "precision": 0.9836956521739131, + "pred_md": "tor, this leads to discretization errors in the ratio f B s /f B d of O ( α s × ( am s -am d )) ∼ 1 2% . plus O ( α a 2 s Λ QCD × ( ˜ m s -˜ m / d ) Λ QCD ) ∼ 0 6% plus . O ( a 2 Λ 2 QCD × ( ˜ m s -˜ m / d ) Λ QCD ) ∼ 1 7%. . Although we do not improve the heavy-light four fermion operator used to compute the B -mixing matrix element, the operator does not have any tree-level O ( a ) errors [38]. Thus the leading discretization errors in the ratio ξ from the four-fermion operator are of O ( α s × ( am s -am d )) ∼ 1 2% . plus O ( α a s Λ QCD × ( ˜ m s -˜ m / d ) Λ QCD ) ∼ 1 9% . plus O ( a 2 Λ 2 QCD × ( m s -m / d ) Λ QCD ) ∼ 1 7%. .\n\n˜ ˜ Adding the contributions from light-quark and gluon discretization errors, heavy-quark discretization errors, and discretization errors in the heavy-light current or four-fermion operator in quadrature, we estimate the error in f B s /f B d to be ∼ 3.2% and the error in ξ to be ∼ 3.7%.\n\n## D. Heavy-light current and four-fermion operator renormalization\n\nWe compute the renormalization factors needed to match the lattice axial current and four-fermion operator to the continuum using one-loop lattice perturbation theory. This leaves a residual error due to the omission of higher-order terms. Based on power-counting, we estimate the truncation error in the coefficients to be of O ( α 2 s ), which is the size of the first neglected term in the series. As we noted earlier in Sec. III C, however, the matching coefficient Z Φ cancels in the ratio of decay constants f B s /f B d ; thus its contribution to the error in f B s /f B d is zero. Although such an exact cancellation does not occur for the ratio of mixing matrix elements ξ , the error in ξ due to the uncertainty in the ratio of matching coefficients Z SP /Z V A is suppressed by the SU (3)-breaking factor ( ˜ m s -˜ m / d ) Λ QCD . This is because, in the SU (3) limit, the four-fermion operator matrix elements would be equal in the numerator and denominator, so the error in ξ from the renormalization factor uncertainty would be zero. We therefore expect the error in f B s /f B d to be 0% and the error in ξ to be of O ( α 2 s × ( ˜ m s -˜ m / d ) Λ QCD ) ∼ 2 2%. This error will decrease with the inclusion of data at . a finer lattice spacing because the smaller coupling constant will improve the convergence of the series.\n\nto am res . These effects, however, are expected to be sub-percent level in the matrix elements [75], and therefore negligible in the SU (3)-breaking ratios.\n\n38", + "recall": 0.9576719576719577, + "true_md": "O × − ∼ O × $^{(}$˜ − ˜ ∼ O ( a $^{2}$Λ2 QCD × $^{(}$˜ m$_{s}$ − ˜ m$_{d}$ ) / Λ$_{QCD}$) ∼ 1 . 7%. Adding the contributions from light-quark and gluon discretization errors, heavy-quark discretization errors, and discretization errors in the heavy-light current or four-fermion operator in quadrature, we estimate the error in f$_{B}$$\\_{s}$/f$\\_{B}$$_{d}$ to be ∼ 3.2% and the error in ξ to be ∼ 3.7%.\n\ntor, this leads to discretization errors in the ratio f$_{B}$$\\_{s}$/f$\\_{B}$$_{d}$ of O ( α$_{s}$ × ( am$_{s}$ − am$_{d}$ )) ∼ 1 . 2% plus O ( α 2 $_{s}$a Λ$_{QCD}$ × $^{(}$˜ m$_{s}$ − ˜ m$_{d}$ ) / Λ$_{QCD}$) ∼ 0 . 6% plus O ( a $^{2}$Λ2 QCD × $^{(}$˜ m$_{s}$ − ˜ m$_{d}$ ) / Λ$_{QCD}$) ∼ 1 . 7%. Although we do not improve the heavy-light four fermion operator used to compute the B -mixing matrix element, the operator does not have any tree-level O ( a ) errors [38]. Thus the leading discretization errors in the ratio ξ from the four-fermion operator are of O ( α$_{s}$ × ( am$_{s}$ − am$_{d}$ )) ∼ 1 . 2% plus O ( α$_{s}$a Λ$_{QCD}$ × $^{(}$˜ m$_{s}$ − ˜ m$_{d}$ ) / Λ$_{QCD}$) ∼ 1 . 9% plus O ( a $^{2}$Λ2 QCD × $^{(}$˜ m$_{s}$ − ˜ m$_{d}$ ) / Λ$_{QCD}$) ∼ 1 . 7%. Adding the contributions from light-quark and gluon discretization errors, heavy-quark\n\nWe compute the renormalization factors needed to match the lattice axial current and four-fermion operator to the continuum using one-loop lattice perturbation theory. This leaves a residual error due to the omission of higher-order terms. Based on power-counting, we estimate the truncation error in the coefficients to be of O ( α 2 $_{s}$), which is the size of the first neglected term in the series. As we noted earlier in Sec. III C, however, the matching coefficient Z$_{Φ}$ cancels in the ratio of decay constants f$_{B}$$\\_{s}$/f$\\_{B}$$_{d}$ ; thus its contribution to the error in f$_{B}$$\\_{s}$/f$\\_{B}$$_{d}$ is zero. Although such an exact cancellation does not occur for the ratio of mixing matrix elements ξ , the error in ξ due to the uncertainty in the ratio of matching coefficients Z$_{SP}$/Z$_{V A}$ is suppressed by the SU $^{(3)-breaking factor (}$˜ m$_{s}$ − ˜ m$_{d}$ ) / Λ$_{QCD}$. This is because, in the SU (3) limit, the four-fermion operator matrix elements would be equal in the numerator and denominator, so the error in ξ from the renormalization factor uncertainty would be zero. We therefore expect the error in f$_{B}$$\\_{s}$/f$\\_{B}$$_{d}$ to be 0% and the error in ξ to be of O ( α 2 s × $^{(}$˜ m$_{s}$ − ˜ m$_{d}$ ) / Λ$_{QCD}$) ∼ 2 . 2%. This error will decrease with the inclusion of data at a finer lattice spacing because the smaller coupling constant will improve the convergence of the series.\n\nto am$_{res}$ . These effects, however, are expected to be sub-percent level in the matrix elements [75], and therefore negligible in the SU (3)-breaking ratios.\n\n## D. Heavy-light current and four-fermion operator renormalization\n\n38" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6801503771656281, + "doc_id": "66a6ca6c99890a6b39433fdec4e23bd919beda0eb3770b0f960575a735f0ed71", + "edit_distance": 0.23391812865497075, + "f1_score": 0.9660194174757283, + "meteor": 0.812339216274903, + "precision": 0.9802955665024631, + "pred_md": "on several lattice correlators; we refer to this as a derived quantity and refer to the lattice correlators as primary observables. When calculating the errors in a derived quantity, we account for the correlations between primary observables by using the functional dependence of the derived quantity on the primary observables. As a cross-check of the statistical error estimate, we compared the results obtained with this approach with those obtained using a single-elimination jackknife procedure; we find that both the central values and statistical errors are consistent between the two error estimation methods.\n\nFor example, Fig. 1 shows the determinations of m ∗ B q and Φ ren B q on the am l = 0 02 ensemble . for the APE (upper plots) and HYP data sets (lower plots). The central value and statistical error of each data point in Fig. 1 are computed as functions of the primary observables C LW and C WW . Then the value of the plateau and its error are computed using a function which averages the values of m ∗ B q (or Φ ren B q ) on time-slices 12, 13, 14 and 15 because we do not observe excited-state contamination in this region. In order to reduce the size of the statistical errors, we average the correlators beginning at two time sources. We achieve the averaging of our two sources by replacing e.g. C LW ( t, 0) with [ C LW ( t, 0) + C LW (20 a -t, 20 a ) ] / 2 in Eqs. (63)(65). For the case of the HYP-smeared data, these are located at t/a = 0 and t/a = 20, whereas for the APE-smeared data the second source is located either at t/a = 20, 21, or 24.\n\nFinally, we compute the ratio Φ ren B s / Φ ren B l on each ensemble as a function of Φ ren B s and Φ ren B l , which themselves depend on the corresponding primary observables C LW and C WW ; this is shown in Fig. 2. We obtain the plateau for the ratio from time-slices 12-15, where we do not observe excited-state contamination in the numerator Φ ren B s or the denominator Φ ren B l . Table V presents the values of Φ ren B s / Φ ren B l on the three sea-quark ensembles. Despite the use of two time sources, the statistical errors in the ratio are as large as 7 5% in case of the data . using APE smearing.\n\n## B. Calculation of the ratio of B -meson mixing matrix elements\n\nThe B q -B q mixing parameter in continuum QCD is defined in terms of the matrix element of the ∆ B = 2 four-fermion operator via Eqs. (2) and (3). Because the matrix element M q behaves as m B q in the limit of large B q -meson mass, we calculate the desired\n\n19", + "recall": 0.9521531100478469, + "true_md": "on several lattice correlators; we refer to this as a derived quantity and refer to the lattice correlators as primary observables. When calculating the errors in a derived quantity, we account for the correlations between primary observables by using the functional dependence of the derived quantity on the primary observables. As a cross-check of the statistical error estimate, we compared the results obtained with this approach with those obtained using a single-elimination jackknife procedure; we find that both the central values and statistical errors are consistent between the two error estimation methods.\n\nFor example, Fig. 1 shows the determinations of m ∗ B$_{q}$ and Φ ren B$_{q}$ on the am$_{l}$ = 0 . 02 ensemble for the APE (upper plots) and HYP data sets (lower plots). The central value and statistical error of each data point in Fig. 1 are computed as functions of the primary observables C LW and C $^{WW}$. Then the value of the plateau and its error are computed using a function which averages the values of m ∗ B$_{q}$ (or Φ ren $_{B$\\_{q}$}$) on time-slices 12, 13, 14 and 15 because we do not observe excited-state contamination in this region. In order to reduce the size of the statistical errors, we average the correlators beginning at two time sources. We achieve the averaging of our two sources by replacing e.g. C $^{LW}$( t, 0) with [ C $^{LW}$( t, 0) + C $^{LW}$(20 a − t, 20 a ) ] / 2 in Eqs. (63)- (65). For the case of the HYP-smeared data, these are located at t/a = 0 and t/a = 20, whereas for the APE-smeared data the second source is located either at t/a = 20, 21, or 24.\n\nFinally, we compute the ratio Φ ren $_{B$\\_{s}$}$/ Φ ren B$_{l}$ on each ensemble as a function of Φ ren B$_{s}$ and Φ ren B$_{l}$ , which themselves depend on the corresponding primary observables C LW and C $^{WW}$; this is shown in Fig. 2. We obtain the plateau for the ratio from time-slices 12–15, where we do not observe excited-state contamination in the numerator Φ ren B$_{s}$ or the denominator Φ ren B$_{l}$ . Table V presents the values of Φ ren $_{B$\\_{s}$}$/ Φ ren B$_{l}$ on the three sea-quark ensembles. Despite the use of two time sources, the statistical errors in the ratio are as large as 7 . 5% in case of the data using APE smearing.\n\nThe B$_{q}$ − B$_{q}$ mixing parameter in continuum QCD is defined in terms of the matrix element of the Δ B = 2 four-fermion operator via Eqs. (2) and (3). Because the matrix element M q behaves as m$_{B}$$\\_{q}$ in the limit of large B$\\_{q}$ -meson mass, we calculate the desired\n\n19\n\n## B. Calculation of the ratio of B -meson mixing matrix elements" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.06558305636879892, + "doc_id": "d8d45b56f05fc5a65f51d923dbe7473726c8cea5ff27c86f8a3a8f5ce4b22524", + "edit_distance": 0.9105691056910569, + "f1_score": 0.8078431372549019, + "meteor": 0.20372554319572558, + "precision": 0.9279279279279279, + "pred_md": "for k > 0 . Then, using (7) and (12) it is easy to see that\n\n\n\nand its corresponding inverse Laplace transform\n\nSimilarly, it is easy to obtain\n\n\n\n\n\nDefining the following constants C ≡ 1 2(1 -i ) √ mπ /planckover2pi1 , and a ≡ m 2 /planckover2pi1 the total Green's function is found to be:\n\n\n\n\n\nOnce the Green's function is constructed by the above procedure, in order to obtain the wave function it is necessary to substitute equation (28) into the equation (11) resulting in the complete solution:\n\n\n\nMathematica was employed for these computations and for plotting the results.\n\n## C. NUMERICAL METHOD.\n\nAs mentioned earlier, the QIVP can be treated as a propagation problem. These are initial-value problems governed by a parabolic Partial Differential Equation ( PDE ) of first order in the time. A familiar representation of a parabolic PDE in one dimension is the Diffusion Equation,\n\n\n\n8", + "recall": 0.7152777777777778, + "true_md": "for k > 0 . Then, using (7) and (12) it is easy to see that\n\nand its corresponding inverse Laplace transform\n\nSimilarly, it is easy to obtain\n\n[ ] Once the Green’s function is constructed by the above procedure, in order to obtain the wave function it is necessary to substitute equation (28) into the equation (11) resulting in the complete solution:\n\nMathematica was employed for these computations and for plotting the results.\n\nAs mentioned earlier, the QIVP can be treated as a propagation problem. These are initial-value problems governed by a parabolic Partial Differential Equation ( PDE ) of first order in the time. A familiar representation of a parabolic PDE in one dimension is the Diffusion Equation,\n\n## C. NUMERICAL METHOD.\n\n$$f$_{t}$ = α f$_{xx}$. (29)$$\n\n8\n\n$$G ( x.x ′ , t ) = C √$_{t}$ [ − e ia t ( x $^{′}$− x ) 2 + e ia t ( x $^{′}$+ x ) 2 ] . (28) Once the Green’s function is constructed by the above procedure, in order to obtain the$$\n\n$$g$_{1}$$_{a}$ = $_{e}$− $^{(1}$− i ) √ ms ℏ ( x $^{′}$− x ) 2 (1 − i ) √ ms ℏ (24) Laplace transform$$\n\n$$G$_{1}$$_{b}$ = $_{e}$− 1 4 $_{t}$[ m h $^{(1}$− i ) $^{2}$( x $^{′}$+ x ) ] 2 (1 − i ) √ πt m ℏ . (25)$$\n\n$$G$_{2}$$_{a}$ = − $_{e}$− 1 4 $_{t}$[ m h $^{(1}$− i ) $^{2}$( x $^{′}$− x ) ] 2 (1 − i ) √ πt m ℏ (26) $_{e}$− 1 $_{t}$[ m $^{(1}$− i ) $^{2}$( x $^{′}$+ x ) ]$$\n\n$$√ G$_{2}$$_{b}$ = $_{e}$− 1 4 $_{t}$[ m h $^{(1}$− i ) $^{2}$( x $^{′}$+ x ) ] 2 (1 − i ) √ πt m ℏ . (27) Defining the following constants C ≡ 1 $^{2(1}$− i ) √ mπ , and a ≡ m 2 ℏ the total Green’s function is$$\n\n√ Defining the following constants C ≡ 1 $^{2(1}$− i ) √ mπ ℏ , and a ≡ m 2 ℏ the total Green’s function is found to be: [ ]\n\n$$Ψ ( x, t ) = i αC √$_{t}$ ∫ ∞ 0 dx ′ ( − e ia t ( x $^{′}$− x ) 2 + e ia t ( x $^{′}$+ x ) 2 ) Ψ$_{I}$ ( x ′ , 0)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8579337970127388, + "doc_id": "978daed93b74184fd0a0702be2e6c1dbdce6cf67a30ca6986d88aeae8fab1b9a", + "edit_distance": 0.09380530973451327, + "f1_score": 0.9267139479905437, + "meteor": 0.9089006807723239, + "precision": 0.9289099526066351, + "pred_md": "32\n\n- [20] D. Berenstein and D. H. Correa, 'Emergent geometry from q-deformations of N = 4 super Yang-Mills,' JHEP 0608 , 006 (2006) [arXiv:hep-th/0511104].\n- [21] D. Berenstein and R. Cotta, 'Aspects of emergent geometry in the AdS/CFT context,' Phys. Rev. D 74 , 026006 (2006) [arXiv:hep-th/0605220].\n- [22] D. Berenstein, 'Strings on conifolds from strong coupling dynamics, part I,' JHEP 0804 , 002 (2008) [arXiv:0710.2086 [hep-th]].\n- [23] D. E. Berenstein and S. A. Hartnoll, 'Strings on conifolds from strong coupling dynamics: quantitative results,' JHEP 0803 , 072 (2008) [arXiv:0711.3026 [hep-th]].\n- [24] L. Susskind and E. Witten, 'The holographic bound in anti-de Sitter space,' arXiv:hepth/9805114.\n- [25] V. Balasubramanian and P. Kraus, 'Spacetime and the holographic renormalization group,' Phys. Rev. Lett. 83 , 3605 (1999) [arXiv:hep-th/9903190].\n- [26] J. de Boer, E. P. Verlinde and H. L. Verlinde, 'On the holographic renormalization group,' JHEP 0008 , 003 (2000) [arXiv:hep-th/9912012].\n- [27] M. Fukuma, S. Matsuura and T. Sakai, 'Holographic renormalization group,' Prog. Theor. Phys. 109 , 489 (2003) [arXiv:hep-th/0212314].\n- [28] G. Policastro, D. T. Son and A. O. Starinets, 'The shear viscosity of strongly coupled N = 4 supersymmetric Yang-Mills plasma,' Phys. Rev. Lett. 87 , 081601 (2001) [arXiv:hepth/0104066].\n- [29] J. B. Hartle and S. W. Hawking, 'Wave Function Of The Universe,' Phys. Rev. D 28 , 2960 (1983).\n- [30] J. Henson, 'The causal set approach to quantum gravity,' arXiv:gr-qc/0601121.\n- [31] H. Lin, O. Lunin and J. M. Maldacena, 'Bubbling AdS space and 1/2 BPS geometries,' JHEP 0410 , 025 (2004) [arXiv:hep-th/0409174].\n- [32] V. Balasubramanian, M. Berkooz, A. Naqvi and M. J. Strassler, 'Giant gravitons in conformal field theory,' JHEP 0204 , 034 (2002) [arXiv:hep-th/0107119].\n- [33] S. Corley, A. Jevicki and S. Ramgoolam, 'Exact correlators of giant gravitons from dual N = 4 SYM theory,' Adv. Theor. Math. Phys. 5 , 809 (2002) [arXiv:hep-th/0111222].\n- [34] K. Hashimoto, 'The shape of non-Abelian D-branes,' JHEP 0404 , 004 (2004) [arXiv:hepth/0401043].\n- [35] T. Azeyanagi, M. Hanada, T. Hirata and H. Shimada, 'On the shape of a D-brane bound", + "recall": 0.9245283018867925, + "true_md": "32\n\n- [20] D. Berenstein and D. H. Correa, “Emergent geometry from q-deformations of N = 4 super Yang-Mills,” JHEP 0608 , 006 (2006) [arXiv:hep-th/0511104].\n\n- [21] D. Berenstein and R. Cotta, “Aspects of emergent geometry in the AdS/CFT context,” Phys. Rev. D 74 , 026006 (2006) [arXiv:hep-th/0605220].\n\n- [22] D. Berenstein, “Strings on conifolds from strong coupling dynamics, part I,” JHEP 0804 , 002 (2008) [arXiv:0710.2086 [hep-th]].\n\n- [23] D. E. Berenstein and S. A. Hartnoll, “Strings on conifolds from strong coupling dynamics: quantitative results,” JHEP 0803 , 072 (2008) [arXiv:0711.3026 [hep-th]].\n\n- [24] L. Susskind and E. Witten, “The holographic bound in anti-de Sitter space,” arXiv:hep- th/9805114.\n\n- [25] V. Balasubramanian and P. Kraus, “Spacetime and the holographic renormalization group,” Phys. Rev. Lett. 83 , 3605 (1999) [arXiv:hep-th/9903190].\n\n- [26] J. de Boer, E. P. Verlinde and H. L. Verlinde, “On the holographic renormalization group,” JHEP 0008 , 003 (2000) [arXiv:hep-th/9912012].\n\n- [27] M. Fukuma, S. Matsuura and T. Sakai, “Holographic renormalization group,” Prog. Theor. Phys. 109 , 489 (2003) [arXiv:hep-th/0212314].\n\n- [28] G. Policastro, D. T. Son and A. O. Starinets, “The shear viscosity of strongly coupled N = 4 supersymmetric Yang-Mills plasma,” Phys. Rev. Lett. 87 , 081601 (2001) [arXiv:hep- th/0104066].\n\n- [29] J. B. Hartle and S. W. Hawking, “Wave Function Of The Universe,” Phys. Rev. D 28 , 2960 (1983).\n\n- [30] J. Henson, “The causal set approach to quantum gravity,” arXiv:gr-qc/0601121.\n\n- [31] H. Lin, O. Lunin and J. M. Maldacena, “Bubbling AdS space and 1/2 BPS geometries,” JHEP 0410 , 025 (2004) [arXiv:hep-th/0409174].\n\n- [32] V. Balasubramanian, M. Berkooz, A. Naqvi and M. J. Strassler, “Giant gravitons in conformal field theory,” JHEP 0204 , 034 (2002) [arXiv:hep-th/0107119].\n\n- [33] S. Corley, A. Jevicki and S. Ramgoolam, “Exact correlators of giant gravitons from dual N = 4 SYM theory,” Adv. Theor. Math. Phys. 5 , 809 (2002) [arXiv:hep-th/0111222].\n\n- [34] K. Hashimoto, “The shape of non-Abelian D-branes,” JHEP 0404 , 004 (2004) [arXiv:hep- th/0401043].\n\n- [35] T. Azeyanagi, M. Hanada, T. Hirata and H. Shimada, “On the shape of a D-brane bound" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.41256953695183146, + "doc_id": "86b75d75771d800f257a3370f88416f4931d94117807002de332b9fc8ab52f14", + "edit_distance": 0.5844155844155844, + "f1_score": 0.9315068493150686, + "meteor": 0.6395928492335375, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "FIG. 8: (Color online) Correlations between values of f crit for the hybrid stars and the radius R 1 4 . for the neutron star with canonical mass as listed in Table I.\n\nFIG. 8: (Color online) Correlations between values of f crit for the hybrid stars and the radius R 1 4 . for the neutron star with canonical mass as listed in Table I.\n\n20", + "recall": 0.8717948717948718, + "true_md": "FIG. 8: (Color online) Correlations between values of f$_{crit}$ for the hybrid stars and the radius R$_{1}$$\\_{.}$$_{4}$ for the neutron star with canonical mass as listed in Table I.\n\n20" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.930583137004919, + "doc_id": "6e7e0cf1a27c57f23d4b735e67a3bc62f41cedd7cf97bfaf3f97f24f021c9c06", + "edit_distance": 0.07598039215686274, + "f1_score": 0.9706666666666668, + "meteor": 0.9682335531606192, + "precision": 0.9891304347826086, + "pred_md": "and particle-piston collisions, but it seems to be independent of the mass of the piston, and v) the effective temperature can not be related in a simple way to the temperature of the granular gas; even more, the relationship between both parameters is not monotonic.\n\nA relevant open question is the relationship between the granular temperature of the gas in the vicinity of the piston and the temperature parameter of the piston, the latter defined from the second moment of its velocity distribution. An explanation of the simulation results seems to require a detailed knowledge of the velocity distribution function of the gas next to the piston [14]. If this is the case, approximated solutions of the Boltzmann equation, as provided by instance by the Chapman-Enskog procedure in the first Sonine approximation, would not be of enough accuracy as to describe the deviation from equipartition between the gas and the movable piston.\n\nThe present study complements the one in ref. [14], in which the velocity fluctuations of the piston were investigated in detail. A natural issue now is whether the velocity fluctuations and the position fluctuations of the piston are correlated. We have computed from the simulation data the joint probability distribution for the position and velocity of the piston and compared it with the product of the marginal distributions for the position and the velocity. Both results agree within the statistical uncertainties, indicating the absence of correlations.\n\n## V. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS\n\nThis research was supported by the Ministerio de Educaci'n y Ciencia (Spain) through o Grant No. FIS2008-01339 (partially financed by FEDER funds).\n\n## Appendix A\n\nIn ref. [19], an expression for the average position of the piston, L , was derived by using a hydrodynamic description of the granular with the appropriate boundary conditions. The theoretical prediction was showed to be in reasonable agreement with the simulation results. Although this expression could have been used to compute ( ∂L/∂M ) v W , here this quantity has been obtained from the simulation data for the sake of consistency.\n\nWhen trying to compute from the values of L as a function of M/m the derivative of\n\n19", + "recall": 0.9528795811518325, + "true_md": "and particle-piston collisions, but it seems to be independent of the mass of the piston, and v) the effective temperature can not be related in a simple way to the temperature of the granular gas; even more, the relationship between both parameters is not monotonic.\n\nA relevant open question is the relationship between the granular temperature of the gas in the vicinity of the piston and the temperature parameter of the piston, the latter defined from the second moment of its velocity distribution. An explanation of the simulation results seems to require a detailed knowledge of the velocity distribution function of the gas next to the piston [14]. If this is the case, approximated solutions of the Boltzmann equation, as provided by instance by the Chapman-Enskog procedure in the first Sonine approximation, would not be of enough accuracy as to describe the deviation from equipartition between the gas and the movable piston.\n\nThe present study complements the one in ref. [14], in which the velocity fluctuations of the piston were investigated in detail. A natural issue now is whether the velocity fluctu- ations and the position fluctuations of the piston are correlated. We have computed from the simulation data the joint probability distribution for the position and velocity of the piston and compared it with the product of the marginal distributions for the position and the velocity. Both results agree within the statistical uncertainties, indicating the absence of correlations.\n\nThis research was supported by the Ministerio de Educaci´ on y Ciencia (Spain) through Grant No. FIS2008-01339 (partially financed by FEDER funds).\n\nIn ref. [19], an expression for the average position of the piston, L , was derived by using a hydrodynamic description of the granular with the appropriate boundary conditions. The theoretical prediction was showed to be in reasonable agreement with the simulation results. Although this expression could have been used to compute ( ∂L/∂M )$_{v}$$\\_{W}$ , here this quantity has been obtained from the simulation data for the sake of consistency.\n\nWhen trying to compute from the values of L as a function of M/m the derivative of\n\n19\n\n## Appendix A\n\n## V. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9882304135056136, + "doc_id": "f0479b94f68e2ebf23782d22d919d12fadd4debd5e502917bcd7aacefa84b625", + "edit_distance": 0.007194244604316547, + "f1_score": 0.9927360774818402, + "meteor": 0.9962167093488052, + "precision": 0.9951456310679612, + "pred_md": "virial theorem. These universal relations, which have now been experimentally confirmed, represent a significant advance in the understanding of many-body quantum systems with strong short-range interactions. Furthermore, these connections between microscopic and macroscopic quantities could be exploited to develop novel experimental probes of the manybody physics of strongly interacting quantum gases.\n\nWe acknowledge funding from the NSF and NIST. We thank the JILA BEC group and also A. Perali and G. C. Strinati for helpful discussions.\n\n- ∗ Electronic address: gaeblerj@jila.colorado.edu\n- † URL: http://jilawww.colorado.edu/ ~ jin/\n- [1] S. Tan, Ann. Phys. 323 , 2971 (2008).\n- [2] S. Tan, Ann. Phys. 323 , 2987 (2008).\n- [3] S. Tan, Ann. Phys. 323 , 2952 (2008).\n- [4] E. Braaten, and L. Platter, Phys. Rev. Lett. 100 , 205301 (2008).\n- [5] F. Werner, L. Tarruel, and Y. Castin, Eur. Phys. J. B 68 , 401 (2009).\n- [6] S. Zhang and A. J. Leggett, Phys. Rev. A 79 , 023601 (2009).\n- [7] L. Viverit, S. Giorgini, L. P. Pitaevskii, and S. Stringari, Phys. Rev. A 69 , 013607 (2004).\n- [8] G. B. Partridge et al. , Phys. Rev. Lett. 95 , 020404 (2005).\n- [9] H. Hu et al. , arXiv:1001.3200 (unpublished).\n- [10] J. T. Stewart, J. P. Gaebler, and D. S. Jin, Nature 454 , 744 (2008).\n- [11] C. A. Regal et al. , Phys. Rev. Lett. 95 , 250404 (2005).\n- [12] C. A. Regal, C. Ticknor, J. L. Bohn, and D. S. Jin, Nature 424 , 47 (2003).\n- [13] P. Pieri, A. Perali, and G. C. Strinati, Nat. Phys. 5 , 736 (2009), arXiv:0811.0770.\n- [14] W. Schneider, V. B. Shenoy, and M. Randeria, arXiv:0903.3006v1 (unpublished).\n- [15] E. Braaten, D. Kang, and L. Platter, arXiv:1001.4518v1 (unpublished).\n- [16] C. Chin and P. S. Julienne, Phys. Rev. A 71 , 012713 (2005).\n- [17] Z. Yu and G. Baym, Phys. Rev. A 73 , 063601 (2006).\n- [18] M. Punk and W. Zwerger, Phys. Rev. Lett. 99 , 170404 (2007).\n- [19] S. Basu and E. J. Mueller, arXiv:0712.1007v1 (unpublished).\n- [20] A. Perali, P. Pieri, and G. C. Strinati, Phys. Rev. Lett. 100 , 010402 (2008).\n\n10", + "recall": 0.9903381642512077, + "true_md": "virial theorem. These universal relations, which have now been experimentally confirmed, represent a significant advance in the understanding of many-body quantum systems with strong short-range interactions. Furthermore, these connections between microscopic and macroscopic quantities could be exploited to develop novel experimental probes of the many- body physics of strongly interacting quantum gases.\n\nWe acknowledge funding from the NSF and NIST. We thank the JILA BEC group and also A. Perali and G. C. Strinati for helpful discussions.\n\n∗ Electronic address: gaeblerj@jila.colorado.edu\n\n† URL: http://jilawww.colorado.edu/ ~ jin/\n\n- [1] S. Tan, Ann. Phys. 323 , 2971 (2008).\n\n- [2] S. Tan, Ann. Phys. 323 , 2987 (2008).\n\n- [3] S. Tan, Ann. Phys. 323 , 2952 (2008).\n\n- [4] E. Braaten, and L. Platter, Phys. Rev. Lett. 100 , 205301 (2008).\n\n- [5] F. Werner, L. Tarruel, and Y. Castin, Eur. Phys. J. B 68 , 401 (2009).\n\n- [6] S. Zhang and A. J. Leggett, Phys. Rev. A 79 , 023601 (2009).\n\n- [7] L. Viverit, S. Giorgini, L. P. Pitaevskii, and S. Stringari, Phys. Rev. A 69 , 013607 (2004).\n\n- [8] G. B. Partridge et al. , Phys. Rev. Lett. 95 , 020404 (2005).\n\n- [9] H. Hu et al. , arXiv:1001.3200 (unpublished).\n\n- [10] J. T. Stewart, J. P. Gaebler, and D. S. Jin, Nature 454 , 744 (2008).\n\n- [11] C. A. Regal et al. , Phys. Rev. Lett. 95 , 250404 (2005).\n\n- [12] C. A. Regal, C. Ticknor, J. L. Bohn, and D. S. Jin, Nature 424 , 47 (2003).\n\n- [13] P. Pieri, A. Perali, and G. C. Strinati, Nat. Phys. 5 , 736 (2009), arXiv:0811.0770.\n\n- [14] W. Schneider, V. B. Shenoy, and M. Randeria, arXiv:0903.3006v1 (unpublished).\n\n- [15] E. Braaten, D. Kang, and L. Platter, arXiv:1001.4518v1 (unpublished).\n\n- [16] C. Chin and P. S. Julienne, Phys. Rev. A 71 , 012713 (2005).\n\n- [17] Z. Yu and G. Baym, Phys. Rev. A 73 , 063601 (2006).\n\n- [18] M. Punk and W. Zwerger, Phys. Rev. Lett. 99 , 170404 (2007).\n\n- [19] S. Basu and E. J. Mueller, arXiv:0712.1007v1 (unpublished).\n\n- [20] A. Perali, P. Pieri, and G. C. Strinati, Phys. Rev. Lett. 100 , 010402 (2008).\n\n10" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9893043084862078, + "doc_id": "c5cf1c7bb6653e854190618fb07314e413fa273a814b2a6486288a96dca2b724", + "edit_distance": 0.014285714285714285, + "f1_score": 0.978021978021978, + "meteor": 0.9866535111960437, + "precision": 0.9888888888888889, + "pred_md": "- [21] M. Veillette et al. , Phys. Rev. A 78 , 033614 (2008), arXiv:0803.2517v1.\n- [22] Y. He, C. C. Chien, Q. Chen, and K. Levin, Phys. Rev. A 77 , 011602(R) (2008).\n- [23] J. P. Gaebler et al. , Observation of pseudogap phase in a strongly interacting Fermi gas, 2010, to be submitted for publication.\n- [24] W. Schneider and M. Randeria, arXiv:0910.2693 (unpublished).\n- [25] J. T. Stewart, J. P. Gaebler, C. A. Regal, and D. S. Jin, Phys. Rev. Lett. 97 , 220406 (2006).\n- [26] T. Bourdel et al. , Phys. Rev. Lett. 91 , 020402 (2003).\n- [27] K. M. O'Hara et al. , Science 298 , 2179 (2002).\n- [28] J. E. Thomas, J. Kinast, and A. Turlapov, Phys. Rev. Lett. 95 , 120402 (2005).\n\n11", + "recall": 0.967391304347826, + "true_md": "- [21] M. Veillette et al. , Phys. Rev. A 78 , 033614 (2008), arXiv:0803.2517v1.\n\n- [22] Y. He, C. C. Chien, Q. Chen, and K. Levin, Phys. Rev. A 77 , 011602(R) (2008).\n\n- [23] J. P. Gaebler et al. , Observation of pseudogap phase in a strongly interacting Fermi gas, 2010, to be submitted for publication.\n\n- [24] W. Schneider and M. Randeria, arXiv:0910.2693 (unpublished).\n\n- [25] J. T. Stewart, J. P. Gaebler, C. A. Regal, and D. S. Jin, Phys. Rev. Lett. 97 , 220406 (2006).\n\n- [26] T. Bourdel et al. , Phys. Rev. Lett. 91 , 020402 (2003).\n\n- [27] K. M. O’Hara et al. , Science 298 , 2179 (2002).\n\n- [28] J. E. Thomas, J. Kinast, and A. Turlapov, Phys. Rev. Lett. 95 , 120402 (2005).\n\n11" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9910845803952082, + "doc_id": "172b31ec4942e670841b5406ed0b4e522bc83d43f403c3d2fa3674ca0d144ac3", + "edit_distance": 0.004092769440654843, + "f1_score": 0.9900990099009901, + "meteor": 0.9959071486373948, + "precision": 0.9900990099009901, + "pred_md": "- [1] M. G. Alford, K. Rajagopal, and F. Wilczek, Phys. Lett. B 422 , 247 (1998).\n- [2] S. B. Ruster and D. H. Rischke, Phys. Rev. D 69 , 0745011 (2004).\n- [3] S. B. Ruster, V. Werth, M. Buballa, I. A. Shovkovy, and D. H. Rischke, Phys. Rev. D 72 , 034004 (2005).\n- [4] M. G. Alford, K. Rajagopal, and F. Wilczek, Nucl. Phys. A 537 , 443 (1999).\n- [5] K. Rajagopal and F. Wilczek, Phys. Rev. Lett. 86 , 3492 (2001).\n- [6] M. G. Alford, J. Bowers, and K. Rajagopal, Phys. Rev. D 63 , 074016 (2001).\n- [7] K. Rajagopal and R. Sharma, Phys. Rev. D 74 , 094019 (2006).\n- [8] M. G. Alford, A. Schmitt, and T. Schfer, Rev. Mod. Phys. 80 , 1455 (2008).\n- [9] V. R. Pandharipande and R. A. Smith, Nucl. Phys. A237 , 507 (1975).\n- [10] E. Chabanat, P. Bonche, P. Haensel, J. Meyer, and R. Schae ff er, Nucl. Phys. A627 , 710 (1997).\n- [11] J. R. Stone, J. C. Miller, R. Koncewicz, P. D. Stevenson, and M. R. Strayer, Phys. Rev. C 68 , 034324 (2003).\n- [12] L. Mornas, Eur. Phys. J. A24 , 293 (2005).\n- [13] B. K. Agrawal, S. K. Dhiman, and R. Kumar, Phys. Rev. C 73 , 034319 (2006).\n- [14] M. Prakash, J. R. Cooke, and J. M. Lattimer, Phys. Rev. D 52 , 661 (1995).\n- [15] N. K. Glendenning and J. Scha ff ner-Bielich, Phys. Rev. C 60 , 025803 (1999).\n- [16] A. W. Steiner, M. Prakash, J. M. Lattimer, and P. Ellis, Phys. Rep. 411 , 325 (2005).\n- [17] H. Muther, M. Prakash, and T. L. Ainsworth, Phys. Lett. B199 , 469 (1987).\n- [18] L. Engvik, M. Hjorth-Jensen, E. Osnes, G. Bao, and E. Østgaard, Phys. Rev. Lett. 73 , 2650 (1994).\n- [19] L. Engvik, E. Osnes, M. Hjorth-Jensen, G. Bao, and E. Østgaard, Astrophys. J. 469 , 794 (1996).\n- [20] H. J. Schulze, A. Polls, A. Ramos, and I. Vidana, Phys. Rev. C 73 , 058801 (2006).\n- [21] M. Alford and S. Reddy, Phys. Rev. D 67 , 074024 (2003).\n- [22] S. Banik and D. Bandyopadhyay, Phys. Rev. D 67 , 123003 (2003).\n- [23] A. Drago, A. Lavagno, and G. Pagliara, Phys. Rev. D 69 , 057505 (2004).\n- [24] I. Bombaci, G. Lugones, and I. Vidana, Astron. Astrophys. 462 , 1017 (2007).\n- [25] M. Alford and K. Rajagopal, J. High Energy Phys. 06 , 031 (2002).\n- [26] D. Blaschke1, S. Fredriksson, H. Grigorian, A. M. zta, and F. Sandin, Phys. Rev. D 72 , 065020 (2005).\n- [27] D. N. Aguilera, D. Blaschke, and H. Grigorian, Astronomy and Astrophysics 416 , 991 (2004).\n\n10", + "recall": 0.9900990099009901, + "true_md": "- [1] M. G. Alford, K. Rajagopal, and F. Wilczek, Phys. Lett. B 422 , 247 (1998).\n\n- [2] S. B. R¨uster and D. H. Rischke, Phys. Rev. D 69 , 0745011 (2004).\n\n- [3] S. B. R¨uster, V. Werth, M. Buballa, I. A. Shovkovy, and D. H. Rischke, Phys. Rev. D 72 , 034004 (2005).\n\n- [4] M. G. Alford, K. Rajagopal, and F. Wilczek, Nucl. Phys. A 537 , 443 (1999).\n\n- [5] K. Rajagopal and F. Wilczek, Phys. Rev. Lett. 86 , 3492 (2001).\n\n- [6] M. G. Alford, J. Bowers, and K. Rajagopal, Phys. Rev. D 63 , 074016 (2001).\n\n- [7] K. Rajagopal and R. Sharma, Phys. Rev. D 74 , 094019 (2006).\n\n- [8] M. G. Alford, A. Schmitt, and T. Schfer, Rev. Mod. Phys. 80 , 1455 (2008).\n\n- [9] V. R. Pandharipande and R. A. Smith, Nucl. Phys. A237 , 507 (1975).\n\n- [10] E. Chabanat, P. Bonche, P. Haensel, J. Meyer, and R. Schae ff er, Nucl. Phys. A627 , 710 (1997).\n\n- [11] J. R. Stone, J. C. Miller, R. Koncewicz, P. D. Stevenson, and M. R. Strayer, Phys. Rev. C 68 , 034324 (2003).\n\n- [12] L. Mornas, Eur. Phys. J. A24 , 293 (2005).\n\n- [13] B. K. Agrawal, S. K. Dhiman, and R. Kumar, Phys. Rev. C 73 , 034319 (2006).\n\n- [14] M. Prakash, J. R. Cooke, and J. M. Lattimer, Phys. Rev. D 52 , 661 (1995).\n\n- [15] N. K. Glendenning and J. Scha ff ner-Bielich, Phys. Rev. C 60 , 025803 (1999).\n\n- [16] A. W. Steiner, M. Prakash, J. M. Lattimer, and P. Ellis, Phys. Rep. 411 , 325 (2005).\n\n- [17] H. M¨uther, M. Prakash, and T. L. Ainsworth, Phys. Lett. B199 , 469 (1987).\n\n- [18] L. Engvik, M. Hjorth-Jensen, E. Osnes, G. Bao, and E. Østgaard, Phys. Rev. Lett. 73 , 2650 (1994).\n\n- [19] L. Engvik, E. Osnes, M. Hjorth-Jensen, G. Bao, and E. Østgaard, Astrophys. J. 469 , 794 (1996).\n\n- [20] H. J. Schulze, A. Polls, A. Ramos, and I. Vidana, Phys. Rev. C 73 , 058801 (2006).\n\n- [21] M. Alford and S. Reddy, Phys. Rev. D 67 , 074024 (2003).\n\n- [22] S. Banik and D. Bandyopadhyay, Phys. Rev. D 67 , 123003 (2003).\n\n- [23] A. Drago, A. Lavagno, and G. Pagliara, Phys. Rev. D 69 , 057505 (2004).\n\n- [24] I. Bombaci, G. Lugones, and I. Vidana, Astron. Astrophys. 462 , 1017 (2007).\n\n- [25] M. Alford and K. Rajagopal, J. High Energy Phys. 06 , 031 (2002).\n\n- [26] D. Blaschke1, S. Fredriksson, H. Grigorian, A. M. zta, and F. Sandin, Phys. Rev. D 72 , 065020 (2005).\n\n- [27] D. N. Aguilera, D. Blaschke, and H. Grigorian, Astronomy and Astrophysics 416 , 991 (2004).\n\n10" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7316874188022419, + "doc_id": "835d3e1c6fea084477b19634068f9377d8664631da751842be517012264fb03e", + "edit_distance": 0.21333333333333335, + "f1_score": 0.9421965317919074, + "meteor": 0.8710431617204283, + "precision": 0.9476744186046512, + "pred_md": "FIG. 1: Extracting the contact from the momentum distribution and rf lineshape. (a)\n\nFIG. 1: Extracting the contact from the momentum distribution and rf lineshape. (a)\n\nMeasured momentum distribution for a Fermi gas at 1 k F a = -0 08 . ± 0 10. . Here, the wave number k is given in units of k F , and we plot the normalized n k ( ) multiplied by k 4 . The dashed line corresponds to C = 2 15 . ± 0 2, . which is obtained by averaging k n k 4 ( ) for k > 1 85. . (Inset) The measured value for C depends on the rate of the magnetic-field ramp that turns off the interactions before time-of-flight expansion. (b) RF lineshape measured for a Fermi gas at 1 k F a = -0 03 . ± 0 10. . Here, ν is the rf detuning from the single-particle Zeeman resonance, given in units of E /h F . We plot the normalized rf lineshape multiplied by 2 3 2 / π ν 2 3 2 / , which is predicted to asymptote to C for large ν . Here, we obtain C = 2 13 . ± 0 2 (dashed line) from an average of the data for . ν > 5.\n\nFig. 1a were taken using a magnetic-field sweep rate of approximately 1 4 . G µs to turn off the interactions for the expansion. In the inset to Fig. 1a, we show the dependence of the measured C on the magnetic-field sweep rate. Using an empirical exponential fit (line in Fig. 1a inset), we estimate that at our typical sweep rate of approximately 1 4 . G µs our measured C is systematically low by about 10%. We have therefore scaled the contact measured with this method by 1 1. .\n\nThe contact is also manifest in rf spectroscopy, where one applies a pulsed rf field and counts the number of atoms that are transferred from one of the two original spin states into a third, previously unoccupied, spin state [12]. We transfer atoms from the | 9 / 2 , -7 / 2 〉 state to the | 9 / 2 , -5 / 2 〉 state. It is predicted that the number of atoms transferred as a function of the rf frequency, ν , scales as ν -3 2 / for large ν , and that the amplitude of this high frequency tail is C 2 3 / 2 π 2 [13-15]. Here, ν = 0 is the single-particle spin-flip resonance,\n\n4", + "recall": 0.9367816091954023, + "true_md": "FIG. 1: Extracting the contact from the momentum distribution and rf lineshape. (a) Measured momentum distribution for a Fermi gas at 1 k$_{F}$ a = − 0 . 08 ± 0 . 10. Here, the wave number k is given in units of k$_{F}$ , and we plot the normalized n ( k ) multiplied by k $^{4}$. The dashed line corresponds to C = 2 . 15 ± 0 . 2, which is obtained by averaging k $^{4}$n ( k ) for k > 1 . 85. (Inset) The measured value for C depends on the rate of the magnetic-field ramp that turns off the interactions before time-of-flight expansion. (b) RF lineshape measured for a Fermi gas at 1 k$_{F}$ a = − 0 . 03 ± 0 . 10. Here, ν is the rf detuning from the single-particle Zeeman resonance, given in units of E$_{F}$ /h . We plot the normalized rf lineshape multiplied by 2 3 / $^{2}$π$^{2}$ν3 / $^{2}$, which is predicted to asymptote to C for large ν . Here, we obtain C = 2 . 13 ± 0 . 2 (dashed line) from an average of the data for ν > 5.\n\nFig. 1a were taken using a magnetic-field sweep rate of approximately 1 . 4 G µs to turn off the interactions for the expansion. In the inset to Fig. 1a, we show the dependence of the measured C on the magnetic-field sweep rate. Using an empirical exponential fit (line in Fig. 1a inset), we estimate that at our typical sweep rate of approximately 1 . 4 G µs our measured C is systematically low by about 10%. We have therefore scaled the contact measured with this method by 1 . 1.\n\nThe contact is also manifest in rf spectroscopy, where one applies a pulsed rf field and counts the number of atoms that are transferred from one of the two original spin states into a third, previously unoccupied, spin state [12]. We transfer atoms from the | 9 / 2 , − 7 / 2 〉 state to the | 9 / 2 , − 5 / 2 〉 state. It is predicted that the number of atoms transferred as a function of the rf frequency, ν , scales as ν − 3 / 2 for large ν , and that the amplitude of this high frequency tail is C 2 3 / $^{2}$π 2 [13–15]. Here, ν = 0 is the single-particle spin-flip resonance,\n\n4" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9398848932283925, + "doc_id": "565b7a6e3072fe937ae61b4c3e7feaee595bee2c6868119201b37c470f141a3f", + "edit_distance": 0.7448979591836735, + "f1_score": 0.9762419006479481, + "meteor": 0.8205451362983829, + "precision": 0.9912280701754386, + "pred_md": "## I. INTRODUCTION\n\nSince the discovery of the so called J-band 1,2 , an unusual sharp absorption band which is characteristic for the aggregation of the classical sensitizing dye 1,1'-diethyl-2,2'cyaninchloride (pseudoisocyanine) a large amount of experimental and theoretical work addressed the investigation of molecular aggregates and their red shifted J-bands. At lower concentration blue shifted H-bands were observed which were attributed to molecular dimers, the smallest possible aggregates. Molecular modelling of the J-aggregates is difficult due to the fact that the PIC molecule is a cation and therefore the Coulombic interactions as well as dielectric shielding have to be taken into account carefully. For the formation of larger aggregates the counterions are important whereas this seems not the case for the smaller H-aggregates . 3 Therefore we started the simulation of PIC aggregates by a detailed investigation of the dimer. From the analysis of the experimental spectrum in water 4 it was deduced that both excitonic components contribute with an intensity ratio of 2:1. This can not be explained 5 by dimer models 4,6 where the dipole moments are almost parallel or antiparallel as it is the case for the common brickwork or ladder models which are found in the literature for the J-aggregate 7,8 . Another focus of our investigations concerns the contribution of local Coulombic interactions to the inhomogeneous broadening of the site energies and its importance in comparison to intramolecular vibrations.\n\n## II. METHODS\n\nFor the classical MD simulation we used the model of rigid rotors which can be easily combined with quantum calculations to obtain electronic excitations and coupling matrix elements . 9 Since also the position of the ethyl groups is fixed we have to distinguish not only two stereoisomers but also a fully C2-symmetric form and another form where the ethyl-groups break this symmetry. A possible interconversion between these conformations was not taken into account.\n\nWe simulated a cube containing a pair of PIC (positively charged) molecules and 2150 TIP5 10 water molecules. We did not use periodic boundary conditions to avoid artefacts from the Coulombic interaction with the mirror images. Instead reflecting boundaries kept the molecules from escaping the box by reversing the normal velocity component whenever the\n\n2", + "recall": 0.9617021276595744, + "true_md": "## I. INTRODUCTION\n\n## II. METHODS\n\n2\n\nWe simulated a cube containing a pair of PIC (positively charged) molecules and 2150 TIP5 10 water molecules. We did not use periodic boundary conditions to avoid artefacts from the Coulombic interaction with the mirror images. Instead reflecting boundaries kept the molecules from escaping the box by reversing the normal velocity component whenever the\n\nFor the classical MD simulation we used the model of rigid rotors which can be easily combined with quantum calculations to obtain electronic excitations and coupling matrix elements 9 . Since also the position of the ethyl groups is fixed we have to distinguish not only two stereoisomers but also a fully C2-symmetric form and another form where the ethyl-groups break this symmetry. A possible interconversion between these conformations was not taken into account.\n\nSince the discovery of the so called J-band 1,2 , an unusual sharp absorption band which is characteristic for the aggregation of the classical sensitizing dye 1,1’-diethyl-2,2’- cyaninchloride (pseudoisocyanine) a large amount of experimental and theoretical work ad- dressed the investigation of molecular aggregates and their red shifted J-bands. At lower concentration blue shifted H-bands were observed which were attributed to molecular dimers, the smallest possible aggregates. Molecular modelling of the J-aggregates is difficult due to the fact that the PIC molecule is a cation and therefore the Coulombic interactions as well as dielectric shielding have to be taken into account carefully. For the formation of larger aggregates the counterions are important whereas this seems not the case for the smaller H-aggregates 3 . Therefore we started the simulation of PIC aggregates by a detailed inves- tigation of the dimer. From the analysis of the experimental spectrum in water 4 it was deduced that both excitonic components contribute with an intensity ratio of 2:1. This can not be explained 5 by dimer models 4,6 where the dipole moments are almost parallel or antiparallel as it is the case for the common brickwork or ladder models which are found in the literature for the J-aggregate 7,8 . Another focus of our investigations concerns the contribution of local Coulombic interactions to the inhomogeneous broadening of the site energies and its importance in comparison to intramolecular vibrations." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7557595518630761, + "doc_id": "eeb93b8f2c7649b38d0ba3cc43b0e23db23cb90e2c00dd631d60ac73026e8bee", + "edit_distance": 0.23728813559322035, + "f1_score": 0.9703703703703703, + "meteor": 0.8615242129892229, + "precision": 0.9776119402985075, + "pred_md": "FIG. 2: | r t ( ) | for α = 0 and five different values of λ . In all cases N = 10000.\n\nFIG. 2: | r t ( ) | for α = 0 and five different values of λ . In all cases N = 10000.\n\nthe envelope of | r t ( ) | and the period of its oscillating part. Making use of Eq. (7) for α = 0 we obtain precisely λ c = 2, the value at which the coherence of the system is completely lost. Therefore, the existence of an ESQPT in the environment has a strong influence on the decoherence that it induces in the central system. We can summarize this result with the following conjecture:\n\nIf the system-environment coupling drives the environment to the critical energy E c of a continuous ESQPT, the decoherence induced in the coupled qubit is maximal .\n\nLet us check this conjecture for different values of α < α c = 4 5 . / In Fig. 3 we show how the decoherence process changes around the critical value λ c for different values of N and α . As a representative quantity, we plot r max ( α ) which is the value of | r t ( ) | at the second maximum (the first maximum is | r (0) | = 1 in all cases). We can extract two main conclusions from Fig. 3. First, r max ( λ ) is minimum at λ ≈ λ c , as given in Eq. (7) -the four cases plotted in the figure correspond to λ c = 0 25 . , 0 5 . , 1 0 . , and 2 0. . Second, the behavior of this quantity is smooth and independent of the environment size N , except in\n\n6", + "recall": 0.9632352941176471, + "true_md": "FIG. 2: | r ( t ) | for α = 0 and five different values of λ . In all cases N = 10000.\n\nthe envelope of | r ( t ) | and the period of its oscillating part. Making use of Eq. (7) for α = 0 we obtain precisely λ$_{c}$ = 2, the value at which the coherence of the system is completely lost. Therefore, the existence of an ESQPT in the environment has a strong influence on the decoherence that it induces in the central system. We can summarize this result with the following conjecture:\n\nIf the system-environment coupling drives the environment to the critical energy E$_{c}$ of a continuous ESQPT, the decoherence induced in the coupled qubit is maximal .\n\nLet us check this conjecture for different values of α < α$_{c}$ = 4 / 5 . In Fig. 3 we show how the decoherence process changes around the critical value λ$_{c}$ for different values of N and α . As a representative quantity, we plot r$_{max}$ ( α ) which is the value of | r ( t ) | at the second maximum (the first maximum is | r (0) | = 1 in all cases). We can extract two main conclusions from Fig. 3. First, r$_{max}$ ( λ ) is minimum at λ ≈ λ$_{c}$ , as given in Eq. (7) — the four cases plotted in the figure correspond to λ$_{c}$ = 0 . 25 , 0 . 5 , 1 . 0 , and 2 . 0. Second, the behavior of this quantity is smooth and independent of the environment size N , except in\n\n6" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9710965700694266, + "doc_id": "bdeca6fedf2ce119dd0118a07e0d3a12830047fc3335081bffc3fe3550a9e33d", + "edit_distance": 0.022900763358778626, + "f1_score": 0.9833024118738404, + "meteor": 0.9817996435091837, + "precision": 0.9925093632958801, + "pred_md": "## V. FINAL COMMENTS\n\nIn this work, for some specific Green functions, we have analysed the ST identities in the context of noncommutative QED . Special attention was given to the vectorial fermion-photon and triple 4 photon vertex functions, explicitly verifying that no anomalies arise. The validity of these identities imply that, in spite of the presence of dangerous infrared singularities, the ultraviolet structure is not essentially modified by the noncommutativity. In fact, although the individual pole parts have been changed and new divergences appeared, the counterterms are related as they should in a non-Abelian situation. This however does not preclude the occurrence of dangerous infrared singularities which, in higher orders, jeopardizes the perturbative series. To extend our results to higher orders, our study must therefore be supplemented by some mechanism to control the mentioned singularities. One possibility is to consider the effect of supersymmetry; as known supersymmetric theories have a better ultraviolet behavior and consequently they may be free from dangerous infrared/ultraviolet mixing. This is what happens in susy noncommutative QED 4 [13].\n\n- [1] M. R. Douglas and N. A. Nekrasov, Rev. Mod. Phys. 73 , 977 (2001) [arXiv:hep-th/0106048].\n- [2] R. J. Szabo, Phys. Rept. 378 , 207 (2003) [arXiv:hep-th/0109162].\n- [3] S. Minwalla, M. Van Raamsdonk and N. Seiberg, 0002 , 020 (2000) [arXiv:hep-th/9912072].\n- [4] A. A. Slavnov, Theor. Math. Phys. 10 , 99 (1972) [Teor. Mat. Fiz. 10 , 153 (1972)]; J. C. Taylor, Nucl. Phys. B33, 436 (1971).\n- [5] W. Marciano and H. Pagels, Phys. Rept. 36 , 137 (1978).\n- [6] C. P. Martin and D. Sanchez-Ruiz, Nucl. Phys. B 598 (2001) 348 [arXiv:hep-th/0012024]; Phys. Rev. Lett. 83 (1999) 476 [arXiv:hep-th/9903077].\n- [7] I. F. Riad and M. M. Sheikh-Jabbari, JHEP 0008 , 045 (2000) [arXiv:hep-th/0008132].\n- [8] T. Mariz, C. A. de S. Pires and R. F. Ribeiro, Int. J. Mod. Phys. A 18 , 5433 (2003) [arXiv:hep-ph/0211416].\n- [9] F. T. Brandt, A. Das and J. Frenkel, Phys. Rev. D 65 , 085017 (2002) [arXiv:hep-th/0112127].\n- [10] A. Das and M. M. Sheikh-Jabbari, JHEP 0106 , 028 (2001) [arXiv:hep-th/0103139].\n- [11] M. M. Sheikh-Jabbari, Phys. Rev. Lett. 84 , 5265 (2000) [arXiv:hep-th/0001167].\n- [12] M. Hayakawa, Phys. Lett. B 478 , 394 (2000) [arXiv:hep-th/9912094]; 'Perturbative analysis on infrared and ultraviolet aspects of noncommutative QED on R**4', arXiv:hep-th/9912167.\n- [13] F. R. Ruiz, Phys. Lett. B 502 , 274 (2001) [arXiv:hep-th/0012171]; A .F. Ferrari, H. O. Girotti, M. Gomes, A. Yu. Petrov, A. A. Ribeiro, Victor O. Rivelles, A. J. da Silva, Phys. Rev. D 69 , 025008\n\n23", + "recall": 0.9742647058823529, + "true_md": "## V. FINAL COMMENTS\n\nIn this work, for some specific Green functions, we have analysed the ST identities in the context of noncommutative QED$_{4}$. Special attention was given to the vectorial fermion-photon and triple photon vertex functions, explicitly verifying that no anomalies arise. The validity of these identities imply that, in spite of the presence of dangerous infrared singularities, the ultraviolet structure is not essentially modified by the noncommutativity. In fact, although the individual pole parts have been changed and new divergences appeared, the counterterms are related as they should in a non-Abelian situation. This however does not preclude the occurrence of dangerous infrared singularities which, in higher orders, jeopardizes the perturbative series. To extend our results to higher orders, our study must therefore be supplemented by some mechanism to control the mentioned singularities. One possibility is to consider the effect of supersymmetry; as known supersymmetric theories have a better ultraviolet behavior and consequently they may be free from dangerous infrared/ultraviolet mixing. This is what happens in susy noncommutative QED$_{4}$ [13].\n\n- [1] M. R. Douglas and N. A. Nekrasov, Rev. Mod. Phys. 73 , 977 (2001) [arXiv:hep-th/0106048].\n\n- [2] R. J. Szabo, Phys. Rept. 378 , 207 (2003) [arXiv:hep-th/0109162].\n\n- [3] S. Minwalla, M. Van Raamsdonk and N. Seiberg, 0002 , 020 (2000) [arXiv:hep-th/9912072].\n\n- [4] A. A. Slavnov, Theor. Math. Phys. 10 , 99 (1972) [Teor. Mat. Fiz. 10 , 153 (1972)]; J. C. Taylor, Nucl. Phys. B33, 436 (1971).\n\n- [5] W. Marciano and H. Pagels, Phys. Rept. 36 , 137 (1978).\n\n- [6] C. P. Martin and D. Sanchez-Ruiz, Nucl. Phys. B 598 (2001) 348 [arXiv:hep-th/0012024]; Phys. Rev. Lett. 83 (1999) 476 [arXiv:hep-th/9903077].\n\n- [7] I. F. Riad and M. M. Sheikh-Jabbari, JHEP 0008 , 045 (2000) [arXiv:hep-th/0008132].\n\n- [8] T. Mariz, C. A. de S. Pires and R. F. Ribeiro, Int. J. Mod. Phys. A 18 , 5433 (2003) [arXiv:hep-ph/0211416].\n\n- [9] F. T. Brandt, A. Das and J. Frenkel, Phys. Rev. D 65 , 085017 (2002) [arXiv:hep-th/0112127].\n\n- [10] A. Das and M. M. Sheikh-Jabbari, JHEP 0106 , 028 (2001) [arXiv:hep-th/0103139].\n\n- [11] M. M. Sheikh-Jabbari, Phys. Rev. Lett. 84 , 5265 (2000) [arXiv:hep-th/0001167].\n\n- [12] M. Hayakawa, Phys. Lett. B 478 , 394 (2000) [arXiv:hep-th/9912094]; “Perturbative analysis on infrared and ultraviolet aspects of noncommutative QED on R**4”, arXiv:hep-th/9912167.\n\n- [13] F. R. Ruiz, Phys. Lett. B 502 , 274 (2001) [arXiv:hep-th/0012171]; A .F. Ferrari, H. O. Girotti, M. Gomes, A. Yu. Petrov, A. A. Ribeiro, Victor O. Rivelles, A. J. da Silva, Phys. Rev. D 69 , 025008\n\n23" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7510890619402412, + "doc_id": "8e2421cb3c4521812bdbcc83ce85fb67c891ed86a3235b8f97c6131aca14e449", + "edit_distance": 0.16338028169014085, + "f1_score": 0.9843400447427292, + "meteor": 0.8563966467628259, + "precision": 0.995475113122172, + "pred_md": "redshift, such as z ∈ (0 , 0 9) and . z ∈ (0 , 1 8). . In such regions, the width of each redshift bin is small and the linear expansion could be a better approximation of w de ( z ) than a constant in each bin. When fitting with the observational data, we leave the divided positions of bins z i as free parameters. Since the linear function is monotonic, the best-fitted z i can represent the turning points of w de ( z ), where w de ( z ) is not linear enough or even non-monotonic (i.e., where d w 2 de /dz 2 departs from zero substantially). Actually we do find some turning points of w de from observational data, and the constructed w de ( z ) just turns its evolution direction at the best-fitted positions of z i . In this way, we only need to divide redshift into a few bins, the turning points are natural divided points of redshift and w de between two nearby points can be accurately reconstructed by linear expansion. Compared to the cubic-spline method, the linear-spline (LS) method can find turning locations of w de more accurately and reduce the errors due to less the number of bins. The LS method is also nearly model-independent, like the piecewise constant and cubic-spline method. Replacing the linear expansion by CPL parametrization in each bin, we have reached the almost same results.\n\nFor the current status of observational data, LS method may be more suitable to study w de than the piecewise constant and the cubic spline method. If DE is dynamical or even oscillating, by using the LS method it should be more possible to find deviations from the cosmological constant, at the turning points the deviation from -1 should be more explicit. If DE is just the cosmological constant, it seems more confident if the best-fitted linear expansions construct an w = -1 line, while the oscillation of w de around w = -1 could disappear by averaging with the piecewise constant method. Compared to the piecewise constant case, the only price we pay is that there is one more parameter in the LS method if the number of bins is the same in two cases. Compared to the cubic spline method, the form of w de ( z ) in each bin only depends on values of w de at two boundaries, thus the parameters in w de ( z ) will not be heavily correlated. Furthermore, the cubic-spline method seems not suitable for finding the turning points of w de . In all, the LS method could reconstruct w de explicitly by using the least number of bins, and errors of the parameters from observational data will be small, compared to the case with more bins.\n\nThe paper is organized as follows. In section II we introduce in detail the method we will use and construct corresponding cosmological models. In section III, we show how to fit our model with 397 Constitution SnIa sample [18], BAO data from SDSS DR7 [19], CMB datapoints ( R, l a , z ∗ ) from WMAP5 [20] and 12 Hubble evolution data [21, 22]. The fitting\n\n3", + "recall": 0.9734513274336283, + "true_md": "redshift, such as z ∈ (0 , 0 . 9) and z ∈ (0 , 1 . 8). In such regions, the width of each redshift bin is small and the linear expansion could be a better approximation of w$_{de}$ ( z ) than a constant in each bin. When fitting with the observational data, we leave the divided positions of bins z$_{i}$ as free parameters. Since the linear function is monotonic, the best-fitted z$_{i}$ can represent the turning points of w$_{de}$ ( z ), where w$_{de}$ ( z ) is not linear enough or even non-monotonic (i.e., where d $^{2}$w$_{de}$ /dz 2 departs from zero substantially). Actually we do find some turning points of w$_{de}$ from observational data, and the constructed w$_{de}$ ( z ) just turns its evolution direction at the best-fitted positions of z$_{i}$ . In this way, we only need to divide redshift into a few bins, the turning points are natural divided points of redshift and w$_{de}$ between two nearby points can be accurately reconstructed by linear expansion. Compared to the cubic-spline method, the linear-spline (LS) method can find turning locations of w$_{de}$ more accurately and reduce the errors due to less the number of bins. The LS method is also nearly model-independent, like the piecewise constant and cubic-spline method. Replacing the linear expansion by CPL parametrization in each bin, we have reached the almost same results.\n\nFor the current status of observational data, LS method may be more suitable to study w$_{de}$ than the piecewise constant and the cubic spline method. If DE is dynamical or even oscillating, by using the LS method it should be more possible to find deviations from the cosmological constant, at the turning points the deviation from − 1 should be more explicit. If DE is just the cosmological constant, it seems more confident if the best-fitted linear expansions construct an w = − 1 line, while the oscillation of w$_{de}$ around w = − 1 could disappear by averaging with the piecewise constant method. Compared to the piecewise constant case, the only price we pay is that there is one more parameter in the LS method if the number of bins is the same in two cases. Compared to the cubic spline method, the form of w$_{de}$ ( z ) in each bin only depends on values of w$_{de}$ at two boundaries, thus the parameters in w$_{de}$ ( z ) will not be heavily correlated. Furthermore, the cubic-spline method seems not suitable for finding the turning points of w$_{de}$ . In all, the LS method could reconstruct w$_{de}$ explicitly by using the least number of bins, and errors of the parameters from observational data will be small, compared to the case with more bins.\n\nThe paper is organized as follows. In section II we introduce in detail the method we will use and construct corresponding cosmological models. In section III, we show how to fit our model with 397 Constitution SnIa sample [18], BAO data from SDSS DR7 [19], CMB datapoints ( R, l$_{a}$, z$_{∗}$ ) from WMAP5 [20] and 12 Hubble evolution data [21, 22]. The fitting\n\n3" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.11439811131097952, + "doc_id": "92a38d2884e2081974a54ecb37aa442d13bd17c656fef2db0ee0bc29d21c291c", + "edit_distance": 0.7077393075356415, + "f1_score": 0.8882175226586102, + "meteor": 0.27623528000886877, + "precision": 0.9671052631578947, + "pred_md": "33\n\n## Appendix A: Derivation of the conditions for the KK expansion\n\nWe will now show how eqs. from (14) to (32) can be derived from the request that the effective 4D Lagrangian is diagonal. Throughout the following calculation, we will only need to work with the bilinear gauge part of the action (8). Expanding the gauge fields as in eq. (13) without assuming anything a priori on the form of the functions f a j and g a j and the constants c a j and carrying out the integration with respect to the extra dimension, we get\n\n\n\nwhere we defined the matrices:\n\n\n\n∣ In the expanded Lagrangian (A1), it is possible to recognize vector and scalar kinetic-like terms, vector mass-like terms and vector / would-be goldstone mixings. However, all those terms are in general not diagonal with respect to the KK number. This is of course a direct consequence of the general nature of the expansion (13). However, if the expanded theory is to be consistent, it must be possible to obtain the actual physical degrees of freedom - with explicitly diagonal mass and kinetic terms - by defining appropriate linear combinations of the modes V ( j ) µ and G ( j ) . We then introduce a still general basis change in field space:\n\n\n\nand require the Lagrangian (A1) to be diagonal in terms of the new degrees of freedom ˜ V ( j ) µ and ˜ G ( j ) . This means that the matrices R AR R BR S CS T , T , T and R DS T (all the fields are", + "recall": 0.8212290502793296, + "true_md": "33\n\n## Appendix A: Derivation of the conditions for the KK expansion\n\nWe will now show how eqs. from (14) to (32) can be derived from the request that the effective 4D Lagrangian is diagonal. Throughout the following calculation, we will only need to work with the bilinear gauge part of the action (8). Expanding the gauge fields as in eq. (13) without assuming anything a priori on the form of the functions f a j and g a j and the constants c a j and carrying out the integration with respect to the extra dimension, we get\n\nwhere we defined the matrices:\n\n− 2 ( f a $_{L j}$c a k − f 3 $_{R j}$c 3 k )∣ ∣ $_{πR}$. In the expanded Lagrangian (A1), it is possible to recognize vector and scalar kinetic-like terms, vector mass-like terms and vector / would-be goldstone mixings. However, all those terms are in general not diagonal with respect to the KK number. This is of course a direct consequence of the general nature of the expansion (13). However, if the expanded theory is to be consistent, it must be possible to obtain the actual physical degrees of freedom - with explicitly diagonal mass and kinetic terms - by defining appropriate linear combinations of the modes V ( j ) µ and G ( j $^{)}$. We then introduce a still general basis change in field space:\n\nand require the Lagrangian (A1) to be diagonal in terms of the new degrees of freedom ˜ V ( j ) µ and ˜ G ( j $^{)}$. This means that the matrices R $^{T}$AR , R $^{T}$BR , S $^{T}$CS and R $^{T}$DS (all the fields are\n\n$$V ( j ) µ = R$_{jk}$ ˜ V ( k ) µ ; G ( j ) = S$_{jk}$ ˜ G ( k $^{)}$, (A3)$$\n\n$$L (2) = − 1 4 V ( j ) µν V ( k ) $^{µν}$A$_{jk}$ − 1 2 V ( j ) µ V ( k ) $^{µ}$B$_{jk}$ − 1 2 ∂$_{µ}$G ( j $^{)}$∂ $^{µ}$G ( k $^{)}$C$_{jk}$ + V ( j ) µ ∂ $^{µ}$G ( k $^{)}$D$_{jk}$ , (A1)$$\n\n$$A$_{jk}$ = 1 g 2 5 ∫ πR 0 dy ( f a $_{L j}$f a L k + f a $_{R j}$f a R k ) + 1 ˜ g $_{2}$f a $_{L j}$f a L k ∣ πR + 1 ˜ g ′ $_{2}$f 3 $_{R j}$f 3 R k ∣ $_{πR}$; B$_{jk}$ = 1 g 2 5 ∫ πR 0 dy b ( y ) ( ∂$_{y}$f a $_{L j}$∂$_{y}$ f a L k + ∂$_{y}$f a $_{R j}$∂$_{y}$ f a R k ) + ˜ v 2 4 b ( πR ) ( f a $_{L j}$f a L k + f 3 $_{R j}$f 3 R k − 2 f 3 $_{L j}$f 3 R k ) ∣ ∣ $_{πR}$; C$_{jk}$ = 1 g 2 5 ∫ πR 0 dy b y ) ( g a $_{L j}$g a L k + g a $_{R j}$g a R k ) + c a $_{j}$c a $_{k}$; D$_{jk}$ = 1 g 2 5 πR 0 dy b ( y ) ∂$_{y}$ ( f a $_{L j}$g a L k + f a $_{R j}$g a R k ) − ˜ v 2 ( f a $_{L j}$c a k − f 3 $_{R j}$c 3 k )∣ ∣ $_{πR}$. (A2) In the expanded Lagrangian (A1), it is possible to recognize vector and scalar kinetic-like$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.47504535513214935, + "doc_id": "4e85fb175cec4cbda7d934634f89bad697fec2e34969c49d29aa8b44e35535e6", + "edit_distance": 0.510752688172043, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9054468780358563, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "(a)\n\n(b)\n\n(c)\n\nFIG. 1: (Colour online) Images of strongly ramified dewetting structures obtained using Atomic Force Microscopy in the case of (a) an aqueous collagen solution on graphite (courtesy of U. Thiele, M. Mertig and W. Pompe; see also Ref. [42]. Image size: 5 µ m × 5 µ m); (b) poly(acrylic acid) in water spin-coated onto a polystyrene substrate (reprinted with permission of John Wiley & Sons, Inc. from Ref. [23]; copyright John Wiley & Sons, Inc. 2002; Image size: 2 5 . µ m × 2 5 . µ m); and in both (c) and (d), a solution of gold nanoparticles in toluene, spin-coated onto native oxide terminated silicon substrates (scale bars given in panels). In all the images the lighter areas correspond to the deposited solute and the dark areas to the empty substrate.\n\nFIG. 1: (Colour online) Images of strongly ramified dewetting structures obtained using Atomic Force Microscopy in the case of (a) an aqueous collagen solution on graphite (courtesy of U. Thiele, M. Mertig and W. Pompe; see also Ref. [42]. Image size: 5 µ m × 5 µ m); (b) poly(acrylic acid) in water spin-coated onto a polystyrene substrate (reprinted with permission of John Wiley & Sons, Inc. from Ref. [23]; copyright John Wiley & Sons, Inc. 2002; Image size: 2 5 . µ m × 2 5 . µ m); and in both (c) and (d), a solution of gold nanoparticles in toluene, spin-coated onto native oxide terminated silicon substrates (scale bars given in panels). In all the images the lighter areas correspond to the deposited solute and the dark areas to the empty substrate.\n\n5", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "FIG. 1: (Colour online) Images of strongly ramified dewetting structures obtained using Atomic Force Microscopy in the case of (a) an aqueous collagen solution on graphite (courtesy of U. Thiele, M. Mertig and W. Pompe; see also Ref. [42]. Image size: 5 µ m × 5 µ m); (b) poly(acrylic acid) in water spin-coated onto a polystyrene substrate (reprinted with permission of John Wiley & Sons, Inc. from Ref. [23]; copyright John Wiley & Sons, Inc. 2002; Image size: 2 . 5 µ m × 2 . 5 µ m); and in both (c) and (d), a solution of gold nanoparticles in toluene, spin-coated onto native oxide terminated silicon substrates (scale bars given in panels). In all the images the lighter areas correspond to the deposited solute and the dark areas to the empty substrate.\n\n5" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8425342532163911, + "doc_id": "314f2bf5452ea0c25603ad04edddac8d3f142257aa25e1eff047c4a9ce9c0493", + "edit_distance": 0.11845102505694761, + "f1_score": 0.9677419354838711, + "meteor": 0.8954506590656871, + "precision": 0.9798994974874372, + "pred_md": "3\n\n(at least for a particular choice of the extra-dimensional background) in the 5D model it is meaningful to reintroduce an Higgs field, delaying unitarity violation to a scale /greaterorsimilar 10 TeV. In the 'holographic' interpretation of AdS 5 models [63, 64], inspired by the AdS/CFT correspondence, this Higgs can be thought as a composite state and thus does not suffer from the hierarchy problem. The 5-dimensional D-BESS (5D-DBESS) on AdS 5 then provides a coherent description of the low energy phenomenology of a new strongly interacting sector up to energies significantly beyond the ∼ 2 TeV limit of the Higgsless SM, still showing a good compatibility with EW precision observables. While studying this 5D extension, furthermore, we have clarified a not-so-obvious fact: there is at least a particular limit, where the 5D-DBESS can be related to a realization of the RS1 model [5], specifically the one proposed in ref. [20].\n\nIn Section II we review the generalization of D-BESS to N sites. In Section III we extend the model to five dimensions clarifying how the boundary conditions at the ends of the 5D segment emerge from the deconstructed version of the model. The 5D model is described by a SU (2) L × SU (2) R bulk Lagrangian with boundary kinetic terms, broken both spontaneously and by boundary conditions. In Section IV we develop the expansion in mass eigenstates consisting in two charged gauge sectors, left (including W ) and right, and one neutral (including the photon and the Z ). We also get the expanded Lagrangian for the modes. In Section V we derive the low energy Lagrangian by means of the holographic technique and the EW precision parameters /epsilon1 1 2 3 , , . In Section VI we show the spectrum of KK excitations and derive the bounds from EW precision measurements on the model parameters for two choices of the 5D metric, the flat case and the RS one. Conclusions are given in Section VII. In Appendix A, by following [65, 66], we develop the technique for Kaluza-Klein expansion.", + "recall": 0.9558823529411765, + "true_md": "3\n\n(at least for a particular choice of the extra-dimensional background) in the 5D model it is meaningful to reintroduce an Higgs field, delaying unitarity violation to a scale ≳ 10 TeV. In the “holographic” interpretation of AdS$_{5}$ models [63, 64], inspired by the AdS/CFT correspondence, this Higgs can be thought as a composite state and thus does not suffer from the hierarchy problem. The 5-dimensional D-BESS (5D-DBESS) on AdS$_{5}$ then provides a coherent description of the low energy phenomenology of a new strongly interacting sector up to energies significantly beyond the ∼ 2 TeV limit of the Higgsless SM, still showing a good compatibility with EW precision observables. While studying this 5D extension, furthermore, we have clarified a not-so-obvious fact: there is at least a particular limit, where the 5D-DBESS can be related to a realization of the RS1 model [5], specifically the one proposed in ref. [20].\n\nIn Section II we review the generalization of D-BESS to N sites. In Section III we extend the model to five dimensions clarifying how the boundary conditions at the ends of the 5D segment emerge from the deconstructed version of the model. The 5D model is described by a SU (2)$_{L}$ × SU (2)$_{R}$ bulk Lagrangian with boundary kinetic terms, broken both spontaneously and by boundary conditions. In Section IV we develop the expansion in mass eigenstates consisting in two charged gauge sectors, left (including W ) and right, and one neutral (including the photon and the Z ). We also get the expanded Lagrangian for the modes. In Section V we derive the low energy Lagrangian by means of the holographic technique and the EW precision parameters ϵ$_{1}$$\\_{,}$$_{2}$$\\_{,}$$_{3}$ . In Section VI we show the spectrum of KK excitations and derive the bounds from EW precision measurements on the model parameters for two choices of the 5D metric, the flat case and the RS one. Conclusions are given in Section VII. In Appendix A, by following [65, 66], we develop the technique for Kaluza-Klein expansion." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.20884505825247612, + "doc_id": "231160e9e3cbf17a486853503b3adc35d32eee096c08cdeaaa5543356741ff2e", + "edit_distance": 0.6555555555555556, + "f1_score": 0.8774703557312252, + "meteor": 0.39737297637267605, + "precision": 0.9568965517241379, + "pred_md": "TABLE VIII: Total error budget for the SU (3)-breaking ratios f B s /f B d and ξ . Each source of uncertainty is discussed in Sec. VI, and is rounded to the nearest percentage.\n\ncorrections to these quantities to be approximately\n\n\n\nwhere the scale Λ QCD cancels in the ratio, and we use the average MS quark masses listed in the PDG [6].\n\n## VII. RESULTS AND CONCLUSIONS\n\nUsing the experimentally-measured ratio of masses m B 0 s /m B 0 d = 5366 6 . / 5279 5 . = 1 0165 [6], we obtain the following values for the . SU (3)-breaking ratios of B -meson decay constants and mixing matrix elements:\n\n\n\nwhere the first errors are statistical and the second are the sum of the individual systematic errors added in quadrature. We find good agreement between the different link-smearings, indicating that, despite the use of a single lattice spacing, discretization errors are small\n\n42", + "recall": 0.8102189781021898, + "true_md": "TABLE VIII: Total error budget for the SU (3)-breaking ratios f$_{B}$$\\_{s}$/f$\\_{B}$$_{d}$ and ξ . Each source of uncertainty is discussed in Sec. VI, and is rounded to the nearest percentage.\n\ncorrections to these quantities to be approximately\n\nwhere the scale Λ$_{QCD}$ cancels in the ratio, and we use the average MS quark masses listed in the PDG [6].\n\nUsing the experimentally-measured ratio of masses m$_{B}$ 0 $_{s}$/m$_{B}$ 0 d = 5366 . 6 / 5279 . 5 = 1 . 0165 [6], we obtain the following values for the SU (3)-breaking ratios of B -meson decay constants and mixing matrix elements:\n\n42\n\n## VII. RESULTS AND CONCLUSIONS\n\n$$f$_{B}$$_{s}$ f$_{B}$$_{d}$ =   $^{1}$$^{.}$$^{16(09)(10)}$ APE 1 . 14(05)(10) HYP and ξ =   $^{1}$$^{.}$$^{13(07)(10)}$ APE 1 . 13(05)(10) HYP , (85) where the first errors are statistical and the second are the sum of the individual systematic$$\n\n$^{1}$$^{.}$$^{16(09)(10)}$ $^{1}$$^{.}$$^{13(07)(10)}$ where the first errors are statistical and the second are the sum of the individual systematic errors added in quadrature. We find good agreement between the different link-smearings, indicating that, despite the use of a single lattice spacing, discretization errors are small\n\n$$Λ$_{QCD}$ m$_{b}$ × m$_{s}$ − m$_{d}$ Λ$_{QCD}$ ∼ 2% , (84)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.2544869580397109, + "doc_id": "3f90933943093f51dff250b3db1766d3ff2d731d42b7b735282079b35db111e2", + "edit_distance": 0.7073474470734745, + "f1_score": 0.8932584269662922, + "meteor": 0.3590549726857699, + "precision": 0.9464285714285714, + "pred_md": "Right charged:\n\nNeutral:\n\n\n\nIn section VI we will make extensive use of these equations for specific choices of the warp factor and of the parameters of the models to obtain explicit examples of the KK spectrum.\n\n15\n\nThen, from Eq. (37), we derive an expression for the electric charge as a function of the model parameters:\n\n\n\nThe actual profiles and masses can of course only be obtained by specifying the warp factor b y ( ). However, it is possible to write, in general, the equations from (14) to (32)) in a more compact form. In fact, equations of motion (15), (23) and (29) all have the same form, ˆ Df = -m f 2 . This is a second order ODE, so it admits two independent solutions. Following ref. [66], we can introduce two convenient linear combinations C y, m ( n ) and S y, m ( n ) ('warped sine and cosine') such that\n\n\n\n/negationslash\n\nwith m = 0 (we have already seen that there is a single massless mode and that its profile is constant). In the limit of a flat extra dimension, these functions reduce to the ordinary sine and cosine.\n\nThanks to the Neumann BCs on the y = 0 brane (17), (24), (30), the vector profiles f a L,Rn are all proportional to C y, m ( n ). The eigenvalues, that is the physical masses of the vector fields m Ln , m Rn and m N n , are then fixed by the BCs on the IR brane (18), (25) and (31). For the three sectors we can easily derive three eigenvalue equations:\n\nLeft charged:\n\n\n\n", + "recall": 0.8457446808510638, + "true_md": "15\n\nThen, from Eq. (37), we derive an expression for the electric charge as a function of the model parameters:\n\nThe actual profiles and masses can of course only be obtained by specifying the warp factor b ( y ). However, it is possible to write, in general, the equations from (14) to (32)) in a more compact form. In fact, equations of motion (15), (23) and (29) all have the same form, ˆ Df = − m $^{2}$f . This is a second order ODE, so it admits two independent solutions. Following ref. [66], we can introduce two convenient linear combinations C ( y, m$_{n}$ ) and S ( y, m$_{n}$ ) (“warped sine and cosine”) such that\n\nwith m ̸ = 0 (we have already seen that there is a single massless mode and that its profile is constant). In the limit of a flat extra dimension, these functions reduce to the ordinary sine and cosine.\n\nThanks to the Neumann BCs on the y = 0 brane (17), (24), (30), the vector profiles f a L,Rn are all proportional to C ( y, m$_{n}$ ). The eigenvalues, that is the physical masses of the vector fields m$_{Ln}$ , m$_{Rn}$ and m$_{N n}$ , are then fixed by the BCs on the IR brane (18), (25) and (31). For the three sectors we can easily derive three eigenvalue equations:\n\nLeft charged:\n\nRight charged:\n\nNeutral:\n\nIn section VI we will make extensive use of these equations for specific choices of the warp factor and of the parameters of the models to obtain explicit examples of the KK spectrum.\n\n$$1 e 2 = 2 πR g 2 5 + 1 ˜ g 2 + 1 ˜ g ′ $_{2}$. (44)$$\n\n$$C (0 , m ) = 1 , ∂$_{y}$C (0 , m ) = 0; S (0 , m ) = 0 , ∂$_{y}$S (0 , m ) = m (45)$$\n\n$$˜ g 2 g 2 $_{$_{5}$C}$′$_{(}$$_{πR, m}$$_{Ln}$$_{)}$ − ( b ( πR ) m 2 Ln − ˜ g $^{2}$˜ v 2 4 ) C ( πR, m$_{Ln}$ ) = 0 (46)$$\n\n$$C ( πR, m$_{Rn}$ ) = 0 (47)$$\n\n$$( ˜ g 2 g 2 $_{$_{5}$C}$′$_{(}$$_{πR, m}$$_{N n}$$_{)}$ − ( b ( πR ) m 2 N n − ˜ g $^{2}$˜ v 2 4 ) C ( πR, m$_{N n}$ ) ) · ˜ g ′$_{2}$ g 2 5 $^{$_{C}$′$_{(}$$_{πR, m}$$_{N n}$$_{)}$}$− ( b ( πR ) m 2 N n − ˜ g $^{′$_{2}$}$˜ v 2 4 ) C ( πR, m$_{N n}$ = ˜ g $^{2}$˜ g $^{′$_{2}$}$˜ v 4 16 C ( πR, m$_{N n}$ ) 2 (48)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "456836d7ffee079e3662eac7847664030916015aed7dffdc354cf6dfa8212227", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999999983074274, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "- [25] B. Bonin et al. , Nucl. Phys. A 430 , 349 (1984).\n- [26] M. Hedden et al , AIP Conf. Proc. 610 , 880 (2002).\n- [27] M. Itoh et al. , Phys. Lett. B 549 , 58 (2002).\n- [28] M. Uchida et al. , Phys. Lett. B 557 , 12 (2003).\n- [29] M. Itoh et al. , Phys. Rev. C 68 , 064602 (2003).\n- [30] M. Uchida et al. , Phys. Rev. C 69 , 051301(R) (2004).\n- [31] U. Garg, Nucl. Phys. A 731 , 3 (2004).\n- [32] M. Itoh et al. , Nucl. Phys. A 731 , 41 (2004).\n- [33] B. K. Nayak et al. , Phys. Lett. B 637 , 43 (2006).\n- [34] T. Li et al. , Phys. Rev. Lett. 99 , 162503 (2007).\n- [35] U. Garg et al. , Nucl. Phys. A 788 , 36 (2007).\n- [36] M. Fujiwara et al. , Nucl. Instrum. Meth. Phys. Res. A 422 , 484 (1999).\n- [37] Y.-W. Lui, P. Bogucki, J. D. Bronson, D. H. Youngblood, and U. Garg, Phys. Rev. C 30 , 51 (1984).\n- [38] James M. Lattimer and Madappa Prakash, Phys. Rep. 333 , 121 (2000).\n- [39] J. M. Lattimer and M. Prakash, Science 304 , 532 (2004).\n- [40] A. W. Steiner et al. , Phys. Rep. 411 (2005).\n- [41] B.-A. Li and A. W. Steiner, Phys. Lett. B 642 , 436 (2006).\n- [42] M. Itoh, Ph.D. thesis, Kyoto University (2003).\n- [43] M. Itoh et al. , RCNP Annual Report p. 7 (1999).\n- [44] S. Brandenburg et al. , Nuc. Phys. A 466 , 29 (1987).\n- [45] G. R. Satchler and D. T. Khoa, Phys. Rev. C 55 , 285 (1997).\n- [46] M. Rhoades-Brown, M. H. Macfarlane, and S. C. Pieper, Phys. Rev. C 21 , 2417 (1980).\n- [47] M. Rhoades-Brown, M. H. Macfarlane, and S. C. Pieper, Phys. Rev. C 21 , 2436 (1980).\n- [48] G. R. Satchler, Nucl. Phys. A 540 (1992).\n- [49] L. D. Rickersten, unpublished (1976).\n- [50] G. R. Satchler, Nucl. Phys. A 472 (1987).\n- [51] M. N. Harakeh and A. E. L. Dieperink, Phys. Rev. C 23 , 2329 (1981).\n- [52] G. Frickle et al. , At. Data Nucl. Data Tables 60 , 2 (1995).\n- [53] S. Raman et al. , At. Data Nucl. Data Table 36 (1987).\n- [54] R. H. Spear, At. Data Nucl. Data Table 42 (1989).\n\n26", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "- [25] B. Bonin et al. , Nucl. Phys. A 430 , 349 (1984).\n\n- [26] M. Hedden et al , AIP Conf. Proc. 610 , 880 (2002).\n\n- [27] M. Itoh et al. , Phys. Lett. B 549 , 58 (2002).\n\n- [28] M. Uchida et al. , Phys. Lett. B 557 , 12 (2003).\n\n- [29] M. Itoh et al. , Phys. Rev. C 68 , 064602 (2003).\n\n- [30] M. Uchida et al. , Phys. Rev. C 69 , 051301(R) (2004).\n\n- [31] U. Garg, Nucl. Phys. A 731 , 3 (2004).\n\n- [32] M. Itoh et al. , Nucl. Phys. A 731 , 41 (2004).\n\n- [33] B. K. Nayak et al. , Phys. Lett. B 637 , 43 (2006).\n\n- [34] T. Li et al. , Phys. Rev. Lett. 99 , 162503 (2007).\n\n- [35] U. Garg et al. , Nucl. Phys. A 788 , 36 (2007).\n\n- [36] M. Fujiwara et al. , Nucl. Instrum. Meth. Phys. Res. A 422 , 484 (1999).\n\n- [37] Y.-W. Lui, P. Bogucki, J. D. Bronson, D. H. Youngblood, and U. Garg, Phys. Rev. C 30 , 51 (1984).\n\n- [38] James M. Lattimer and Madappa Prakash, Phys. Rep. 333 , 121 (2000).\n\n- [39] J. M. Lattimer and M. Prakash, Science 304 , 532 (2004).\n\n- [40] A. W. Steiner et al. , Phys. Rep. 411 (2005).\n\n- [41] B.-A. Li and A. W. Steiner, Phys. Lett. B 642 , 436 (2006).\n\n- [42] M. Itoh, Ph.D. thesis, Kyoto University (2003).\n\n- [43] M. Itoh et al. , RCNP Annual Report p. 7 (1999).\n\n- [44] S. Brandenburg et al. , Nuc. Phys. A 466 , 29 (1987).\n\n- [45] G. R. Satchler and D. T. Khoa, Phys. Rev. C 55 , 285 (1997).\n\n- [46] M. Rhoades-Brown, M. H. Macfarlane, and S. C. Pieper, Phys. Rev. C 21 , 2417 (1980).\n\n- [47] M. Rhoades-Brown, M. H. Macfarlane, and S. C. Pieper, Phys. Rev. C 21 , 2436 (1980).\n\n- [48] G. R. Satchler, Nucl. Phys. A 540 (1992).\n\n- [49] L. D. Rickersten, unpublished (1976).\n\n- [50] G. R. Satchler, Nucl. Phys. A 472 (1987).\n\n- [51] M. N. Harakeh and A. E. L. Dieperink, Phys. Rev. C 23 , 2329 (1981).\n\n- [52] G. Frickle et al. , At. Data Nucl. Data Tables 60 , 2 (1995).\n\n- [53] S. Raman et al. , At. Data Nucl. Data Table 36 (1987).\n\n- [54] R. H. Spear, At. Data Nucl. Data Table 42 (1989).\n\n26" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9664429649097, + "doc_id": "507485f7701eccab371254fff34f913ab1d60b56ca61fdf0b03b7b7c57372ff8", + "edit_distance": 0.029565217391304348, + "f1_score": 0.9539295392953929, + "meteor": 0.9817970630579914, + "precision": 0.9513513513513514, + "pred_md": "systems as the environment in a decoherence experiment.\n\nThis work has been partially supported by the Spanish Ministerio de Educaci'n y Ciencia o and by the European regional development fund (FEDER) under projects number FIS200501105, FIS2006-12783-C03-01 FPA2006-13807-C02-02 and FPA2007-63074, by Comunidad de Madrid and CSIC under project 200650M012, and by Junta de Analuc' ıa under projects FQM160, FQM318, P05-FQM437 and P07-FQM-02962. A.R. is supported by the Spanish program 'Juan de la Cierva', and P. P-F., by a grant from the Plan Propio of the University of Sevilla.\n\n- [1] W. H. Zurek, Rev. Mod. Phys. 75 , 715 (2003).\n- [2] M. Nielsen and I. Chuang, Quantum Computation and Quantum Information (Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, UK, 2000).\n- [3] H. T. Quan, Z. Song, X. F. Liu, P. Zanardi, and C. P. Sun, Phys. Rev. Lett. 96 , 140604 (2006).\n- [4] F. M. Cucchietti, S. Fernandez-Vidal, and J. P. Paz, Phys. Rev. A 75 , 032337 (2007).\n- [5] C. Cormick and J. P. Paz, Phys Rev. A 77 , 022317 (2008).\n- [6] D. Rossini, T. Calarco, V. Giovannetti, S. Montangero, and R. Fazio, Phys. Rev. A 75 , 032333 (2007).\n- [7] P. Cejnar, S. Heinze, and M. Macek, Phys. Rev. Lett. 99 , 100601 (2007).\n- [8] P. Cejnar and J. Jolie, arXiv:0807.3467 (2008).\n- [9] W. D. Heiss, F. G. Scholtz, and H. B. Geyer, J. Phys. A 38 , 1843 (2005); F. Leyvraz and W. D. Heiss, Phys. Rev. Lett. 95 , 050402 (2005); W. D. Heiss, J. Phys. A 39 , 10081 (2006).\n- [10] S. Heinze, P. Cejnar, J. Jolie, and M. Macek, Phys. Rev. C 73 , 014306 (2006); M. Macek, P. Cejnar, J. Jolie, and S. Heinze, Phys. Rev. C 73 , 014307 (2006); P. Cejnar, M. Macek, S. Heinze. J. Jolie, and J. Dobes, J. Phys. A 39 , L515 (2006).\n- [11] M. A. Caprio, P. Cejnar, and F. Iachello, Ann. Phys 323 , 1106 (2008).\n- [12] J. Vidal, J. M. Arias, J. Dukelsky, J. E. Garc' ıa-Ramos, Phys. Rev. C 73 , 054305 (2006); J. M. Arias, J. Dukelsky, J. E. Garc' ıa-Ramos, and J. Vidal, Phys. Rev. C 75 , 014301 (2007).\n- [13] D. Bonatsos, E. A. McCutchan, R. F. Casten, and R. J. Casperson, Phys. Rev. Lett. 100 , 142501 (2008).\n\n9", + "recall": 0.9565217391304348, + "true_md": "systems as the environment in a decoherence experiment.\n\nThis work has been partially supported by the Spanish Ministerio de Educaci´ on y Ciencia and by the European regional development fund (FEDER) under projects number FIS2005- 01105, FIS2006-12783-C03-01 FPA2006-13807-C02-02 and FPA2007-63074, by Comunidad de Madrid and CSIC under project 200650M012, and by Junta de Analuc´ıa under projects FQM160, FQM318, P05-FQM437 and P07-FQM-02962. A.R. is supported by the Spanish program ”Juan de la Cierva”, and P. P-F., by a grant from the Plan Propio of the University of Sevilla.\n\n- [1] W. H. Zurek, Rev. Mod. Phys. 75 , 715 (2003).\n\n- [2] M. Nielsen and I. Chuang, Quantum Computation and Quantum Information (Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, UK, 2000).\n\n- [3] H. T. Quan, Z. Song, X. F. Liu, P. Zanardi, and C. P. Sun, Phys. Rev. Lett. 96 , 140604 (2006).\n\n- [4] F. M. Cucchietti, S. Fernandez-Vidal, and J. P. Paz, Phys. Rev. A 75 , 032337 (2007).\n\n- [5] C. Cormick and J. P. Paz, Phys Rev. A 77 , 022317 (2008).\n\n- [6] D. Rossini, T. Calarco, V. Giovannetti, S. Montangero, and R. Fazio, Phys. Rev. A 75 , 032333 (2007).\n\n- [7] P. Cejnar, S. Heinze, and M. Macek, Phys. Rev. Lett. 99 , 100601 (2007).\n\n- [8] P. Cejnar and J. Jolie, arXiv:0807.3467 (2008).\n\n- [9] W. D. Heiss, F. G. Scholtz, and H. B. Geyer, J. Phys. A 38 , 1843 (2005); F. Leyvraz and W. D. Heiss, Phys. Rev. Lett. 95 , 050402 (2005); W. D. Heiss, J. Phys. A 39 , 10081 (2006).\n\n- [10] S. Heinze, P. Cejnar, J. Jolie, and M. Macek, Phys. Rev. C 73 , 014306 (2006); M. Macek, P. Cejnar, J. Jolie, and S. Heinze, Phys. Rev. C 73 , 014307 (2006); P. Cejnar, M. Macek, S. Heinze. J. Jolie, and J. Dobes, J. Phys. A 39 , L515 (2006).\n\n- [11] M. A. Caprio, P. Cejnar, and F. Iachello, Ann. Phys 323 , 1106 (2008).\n\n- [12] J. Vidal, J. M. Arias, J. Dukelsky, J. E. Garc´ıa-Ramos, Phys. Rev. C 73 , 054305 (2006); J. M. Arias, J. Dukelsky, J. E. Garc´ıa-Ramos, and J. Vidal, Phys. Rev. C 75 , 014301 (2007).\n\n- [13] D. Bonatsos, E. A. McCutchan, R. F. Casten, and R. J. Casperson, Phys. Rev. Lett. 100 , 142501 (2008).\n\n9" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8206376762097758, + "doc_id": "6482543f4e6b569aaeaef5547650d67ee38ebc3a8fb4359f3c200833a0cbbf21", + "edit_distance": 0.12121212121212122, + "f1_score": 0.9604863221884496, + "meteor": 0.8886631649565645, + "precision": 0.9813664596273292, + "pred_md": "TABLE VII: Lorentzian-fit parameters of ISGQR strength distributions in the Sn isotopes, as extracted from MDA. The results from TAMU work, where available, are provided for comparison [19, 21].\n\na Only statistical uncertainties are included; systematic errors, mostly from DWBA calculations, are ∼ 20%.\n\nthat are significantly closer to the experimental values, in particular with the surface pairing forces and the SKM* interaction ( K ∞ ∼ 215 MeV) [78]. Thus, while pairing effects lower the ISGMR excitation energies, one still needs to reduce the K ∞ value by ∼ 10% for achieving a reasonable agreement with the experimental data.\n\nA very intriguing possibility in explaining the 'softness' of the Sn isotopes has been offered very recently by Khan [79, 80]. The author asserts that, in analogy with the mutually-enhanced-magicity (MEM) effect observed in predictions of masses with different energy-density functionals [81, 82], the ISGMR energy in the doubly-magic nuclei might be anomalously higher. The obvious implication is that the calculations using interactions that are successful in describing the ISGMR in the doubly-magic nucleus 208 Pb would necessarily overestimate the ISGMR energies in the open-shell nuclei. If this effect is manifested in any significant way, the energy of the ISGMR in the non-doubly-magic Pb isotopes, 204 Pb and 206 Pb, would be measurably lower than that in 208 Pb [80]. In the only measurement of the ISGMR in 206 Pb reported so far [83], this conjecture does not appear to hold. Still, precise\n\n21", + "recall": 0.9404761904761905, + "true_md": "TABLE VII: Lorentzian-fit parameters of ISGQR strength distributions in the Sn isotopes, as extracted from MDA. The results from TAMU work, where available, are provided for compari- son [19, 21].\n\na Only statistical uncertainties are included; systematic errors, mostly from DWBA calculations, are ∼ 20%.\n\nthat are significantly closer to the experimental values, in particular with the surface pairing forces and the SKM* interaction ( K$_{∞}$ ∼ 215 MeV) [78]. Thus, while pairing effects lower the ISGMR excitation energies, one still needs to reduce the K$_{∞}$ value by ∼ 10% for achieving a reasonable agreement with the experimental data.\n\nA very intriguing possibility in explaining the “softness” of the Sn isotopes has been offered very recently by Khan [79, 80]. The author asserts that, in analogy with the mutually-enhanced-magicity (MEM) effect observed in predictions of masses with different energy-density functionals [81, 82], the ISGMR energy in the doubly-magic nuclei might be anomalously higher. The obvious implication is that the calculations using interactions that are successful in describing the ISGMR in the doubly-magic nucleus $^{208}$Pb would necessarily overestimate the ISGMR energies in the open-shell nuclei. If this effect is manifested in any significant way, the energy of the ISGMR in the non-doubly-magic Pb isotopes, $^{204}$Pb and $^{206}$Pb, would be measurably lower than that in $^{208}$Pb [80]. In the only measurement of the ISGMR in $^{206}$Pb reported so far [83], this conjecture does not appear to hold. Still, precise\n\n21" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "b34c033061a84aa611a3f7812f72d06192fefbf88189314e8877b3ebe3200ffc", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999999981104216, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "- [51] V. Gimenez, Nucl. Phys. B401 , 116 (1993).\n- [52] M. Ciuchini, E. Franco, and V. Gimenez, Phys. Lett. B388 , 167 (1996), hep-ph/9608204.\n- [53] G. Buchalla, Phys. Lett. B395 , 364 (1997), hep-ph/9608232.\n- [54] K. G. Chetyrkin, Phys. Lett. B404 , 161 (1997), hep-ph/9703278.\n- [55] J. A. M. Vermaseren, S. A. Larin, and T. van Ritbergen, Phys. Lett. B405 , 327 (1997), hep-ph/9703284.\n- [56] K. I. Ishikawa, T. Onogi, and N. Yamada, Phys. Rev. D60 , 034501 (1999), hep-lat/9812007.\n- [57] N. H. Christ, T. T. Dumitrescu, O. Loktik, and T. Izubuchi (RBC and UKQCD), PoS LAT2007 , 351 (2007), arXiv:0710.5283.\n- [58] S. Aoki, T. Izubuchi, Y. Kuramashi, and Y. Taniguchi, Phys. Rev. D67 , 094502 (2003), hep-lat/0206013.\n- [59] G. P. Lepage and P. B. Mackenzie, Phys. Rev. D48 , 2250 (1993), hep-lat/9209022.\n- [60] S. Aoki and Y. Kuramashi, Phys. Rev. D68 , 034507 (2003), hep-lat/0306008.\n- [61] U. Wolff (ALPHA), Comput. Phys. Commun. 156 , 143 (2004), hep-lat/0306017.\n- [62] H. Ohki, H. Matsufuru, and T. Onogi, Phys. Rev. D77 , 094509 (2008), arXiv:0802.1563.\n- [63] C. Aubin et al. (MILC), Phys. Rev. D70 , 114501 (2004), hep-lat/0407028.\n- [64] J. Noaki et al. (JLQCD and TWQCD), Phys. Rev. Lett. 101 , 202004 (2008), arXiv:0806.0894.\n- [65] D. Becirevic, B. Blossier, E. Chang, and B. Haas, Phys. Lett. B679 , 231 (2009), arXiv:0905.3355.\n- [66] R. Casalbuoni et al., Phys. Rept. 281 , 145 (1997), hep-ph/9605342.\n- [67] D. Becirevic and B. Haas (2009), arXiv:0903.2407.\n- [68] I. W. Stewart, Nucl. Phys. B529 , 62 (1998), hep-ph/9803227.\n- [69] A. Anastassov et al. (CLEO), Phys. Rev. D65 , 032003 (2002), hep-ex/0108043.\n- [70] M. C. Arnesen, B. Grinstein, I. Z. Rothstein, and I. W. Stewart, Phys. Rev. Lett. 95 , 071802 (2005), hep-ph/0504209.\n- [71] S. Fajfer and J. F. Kamenik, Phys. Rev. D74 , 074023 (2006), hep-ph/0606278.\n- [72] J. A. Bailey et al. (Fermilab Lattice and MILC), Phys. Rev. D79 , 054507 (2009), arXiv:0811.3640.\n- [73] M. Della Morte et al. (ALPHA), JHEP 02 , 078 (2008), arXiv:0710.2201.\n- [74] O. Buchmuller and H. Flacher, Phys. Rev. D73 , 073008 (2006), hep-ph/0507253.\n- [75] Y. Aoki and J. Wennekers (RBC and UKQCD), PoS LAT2007 , 345 (2007).\n\n59", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "- [51] V. Gimenez, Nucl. Phys. B401 , 116 (1993).\n\n- [52] M. Ciuchini, E. Franco, and V. Gimenez, Phys. Lett. B388 , 167 (1996), hep-ph/9608204.\n\n- [53] G. Buchalla, Phys. Lett. B395 , 364 (1997), hep-ph/9608232.\n\n- [54] K. G. Chetyrkin, Phys. Lett. B404 , 161 (1997), hep-ph/9703278.\n\n- [55] J. A. M. Vermaseren, S. A. Larin, and T. van Ritbergen, Phys. Lett. B405 , 327 (1997), hep-ph/9703284.\n\n- [56] K. I. Ishikawa, T. Onogi, and N. Yamada, Phys. Rev. D60 , 034501 (1999), hep-lat/9812007.\n\n- [57] N. H. Christ, T. T. Dumitrescu, O. Loktik, and T. Izubuchi (RBC and UKQCD), PoS LAT2007 , 351 (2007), arXiv:0710.5283.\n\n- [58] S. Aoki, T. Izubuchi, Y. Kuramashi, and Y. Taniguchi, Phys. Rev. D67 , 094502 (2003), hep-lat/0206013.\n\n- [59] G. P. Lepage and P. B. Mackenzie, Phys. Rev. D48 , 2250 (1993), hep-lat/9209022.\n\n- [60] S. Aoki and Y. Kuramashi, Phys. Rev. D68 , 034507 (2003), hep-lat/0306008.\n\n- [61] U. Wolff (ALPHA), Comput. Phys. Commun. 156 , 143 (2004), hep-lat/0306017.\n\n- [62] H. Ohki, H. Matsufuru, and T. Onogi, Phys. Rev. D77 , 094509 (2008), arXiv:0802.1563.\n\n- [63] C. Aubin et al. (MILC), Phys. Rev. D70 , 114501 (2004), hep-lat/0407028.\n\n- [64] J. Noaki et al. (JLQCD and TWQCD), Phys. Rev. Lett. 101 , 202004 (2008), arXiv:0806.0894.\n\n- [65] D. Becirevic, B. Blossier, E. Chang, and B. Haas, Phys. Lett. B679 , 231 (2009), arXiv:0905.3355.\n\n- [66] R. Casalbuoni et al., Phys. Rept. 281 , 145 (1997), hep-ph/9605342.\n\n- [67] D. Becirevic and B. Haas (2009), arXiv:0903.2407.\n\n- [68] I. W. Stewart, Nucl. Phys. B529 , 62 (1998), hep-ph/9803227.\n\n- [69] A. Anastassov et al. (CLEO), Phys. Rev. D65 , 032003 (2002), hep-ex/0108043.\n\n- [70] M. C. Arnesen, B. Grinstein, I. Z. Rothstein, and I. W. Stewart, Phys. Rev. Lett. 95 , 071802 (2005), hep-ph/0504209.\n\n- [71] S. Fajfer and J. F. Kamenik, Phys. Rev. D74 , 074023 (2006), hep-ph/0606278.\n\n- [72] J. A. Bailey et al. (Fermilab Lattice and MILC), Phys. Rev. D79 , 054507 (2009), arXiv:0811.3640.\n\n- [73] M. Della Morte et al. (ALPHA), JHEP 02 , 078 (2008), arXiv:0710.2201.\n\n- [74] O. Buchmuller and H. Flacher, Phys. Rev. D73 , 073008 (2006), hep-ph/0507253.\n\n- [75] Y. Aoki and J. Wennekers (RBC and UKQCD), PoS LAT2007 , 345 (2007).\n\n59" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6581703854662325, + "doc_id": "6ea54b6d11184f7b94b725478027bb0e8a0ec2fbd0faab6d9ba3745186355668", + "edit_distance": 0.345565749235474, + "f1_score": 0.9576271186440677, + "meteor": 0.7693011561767997, + "precision": 0.9826086956521739, + "pred_md": "FIG. 3: Single-particle energies for protons (upper) and neutrons (lower) are plotted as functions of the quadrupole deformation parameter β of the total system.\n\nFIG. 3: Single-particle energies for protons (upper) and neutrons (lower) are plotted as functions of the quadrupole deformation parameter β of the total system.\n\nof the obtained wave functions have approximately parity symmetric shapes, extracted single-particle orbits are almost pure-parity orbits. Figure 3 shows single-particle energies of positive- and negative-parity orbits for protons and neutrons. Two orbits degenerate because of the time reversal symmetry except for β ∼ 0 and 0.3. In the small β region with β < ∼ 0 25, the single-particle orbits are normal order for both protons and neutrons, which . shows that configurations around the GS minimum are roughly [( sd ) -2 ] π [( pf ) 2 ] ν relative to the ground state of 40 Ca. With an increase of deformation β , the highest positive-parity orbits in the sd -shell disappear at β ∼ 0 3 and negative-parity orbits come down for both . protons and neutrons, which corresponds to the orbit inversion when the pf -orbits intrude into the sd -orbits in the large β region. Consequently, configurations in the large β region with β > ∼ 0 35 around the SD minimum are roughly [( . sd ) -4 ( pf ) 2 ] π [( sd ) -2 ( pf ) 4 ] ν .\n\nFigure 4 shows the experimental and theoretical excitation energies obtained by the\n\n6", + "recall": 0.9338842975206612, + "true_md": "FIG. 3: Single-particle energies for protons (upper) and neutrons (lower) are plotted as functions of the quadrupole deformation parameter β of the total system.\n\nof the obtained wave functions have approximately parity symmetric shapes, extracted single-particle orbits are almost pure-parity orbits. Figure 3 shows single-particle ener- gies of positive- and negative-parity orbits for protons and neutrons. Two orbits degenerate because of the time reversal symmetry except for β ∼ 0 and 0.3. In the small β region with β < ∼ 0 . 25, the single-particle orbits are normal order for both protons and neutrons, which shows that configurations around the GS minimum are roughly [( sd ) − $^{2}$]$_{π}$ [( pf ) $^{2}$]$_{ν}$ relative to the ground state of $^{40}$Ca. With an increase of deformation β , the highest positive-parity orbits in the sd -shell disappear at β ∼ 0 . 3 and negative-parity orbits come down for both protons and neutrons, which corresponds to the orbit inversion when the pf -orbits intrude into the sd -orbits in the large β region. Consequently, configurations in the large β region with β > ∼ 0 . 35 around the SD minimum are roughly [( sd ) − $^{4}$( pf ) $^{2}$]$_{π}$ [( sd ) − $^{2}$( pf ) $^{4}$]$_{ν}$ . Figure 4 shows the experimental and theoretical excitation energies obtained by the\n\n∼ Figure 4 shows the experimental and theoretical excitation energies obtained by the\n\n6" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.48198162500565234, + "doc_id": "9bc846d93a24fc48a8c77c3fa1ce23d5e7a5466e5c2cb073b23eea5a272a8add", + "edit_distance": 0.5802469135802469, + "f1_score": 0.9344262295081968, + "meteor": 0.7197347477433914, + "precision": 0.9344262295081968, + "pred_md": "FIG. 6: Profiles of the final dried-in nanoparticle layer for the dewetting of a suspension of nanoparticles in a volatile solvent that partially wets the substrate for (a) high ( Ω = 10 -3 ), (b) medium ( Ω = 2 × 10 -6 ) and (c) low ( Ω = 0 78 . × 10 -8 ) evaporation rates, for the case when χ = H/l 0 = 1 09 . , the lateral length scale is glyph[lscript] = √ γ/κH with κ = ( S /l p 0 ) exp( d /l 0 0 ) H being an energy scale related to wettability and the vertical length scale is H = √ 2 S LW /κd 0 . The remaining dimensionless parameters are the evaporation number Ω = Q η glyph[lscript] e 0 2 /H 3 , the diffusion number Γ = D (0) η /Hκ 0 = 10 -4 and the dimensionless chemical potential M = Hµ/κ = -0 0035 . . The system size is L = 19500 glyph[lscript] . Film thickness and h p in the plots are scaled by the precursor film thickness.\n\nFIG. 6: Profiles of the final dried-in nanoparticle layer for the dewetting of a suspension of nanoparticles in a volatile solvent that partially wets the substrate for (a) high ( Ω = 10 -3 ), (b) medium ( Ω = 2 × 10 -6 ) and (c) low ( Ω = 0 78 . × 10 -8 ) evaporation rates, for the case when χ = H/l 0 = 1 09 . , the lateral length scale is glyph[lscript] = √ γ/κH with κ = ( S /l p 0 ) exp( d /l 0 0 ) H being an energy scale related to wettability and the vertical length scale is H = √ 2 S LW /κd 0 . The remaining dimensionless parameters are the evaporation number Ω = Q η glyph[lscript] e 0 2 /H 3 , the diffusion number Γ = D (0) η /Hκ 0 = 10 -4 and the dimensionless chemical potential M = Hµ/κ = -0 0035 . . The system size is L = 19500 glyph[lscript] . Film thickness and h p in the plots are scaled by the precursor film thickness.\n\nx/L\n\ncircular throughout the dewetting and evaporation process. In this case one should interprete the coordinate x as the distance from the centre of the circular film.\n\nWe start with a film of height h 0 of finite length sitting on a precursor film and assume that the film contains nanoparticles at constant concentration φ 0 . The chosen parameter values ensure that the film of thickness h 0 is linearly stable. As we do not incorporate noise, no nucleation of additional holes can occur (even with noise the probability would be extremely low). Without evaporation the film dewets 'classically' by a retraction of the initially step-like front. After a short time, surface tension smoothes the profile of the receding front and a capillary rim forms that collects all the\n\n20\n\n1\n\n1", + "recall": 0.9344262295081968, + "true_md": "FIG. 6: Profiles of the final dried-in nanoparticle layer for the dewetting of a suspension of nanoparticles in a volatile solvent that partially wets the substrate for (a) high ( Ω = 10 − $^{3}$), (b) medium ( Ω = 2 × 10 − $^{6}$) and (c) low ( Ω = 0 . 78 × 10 − $^{8}$) evaporation rates, for the case when χ = H/l$_{0}$ = 1 . 09 , the lateral length scale is ℓ = $^{√}$γ/κH with κ = ( S$_{p}$/l$_{0}$ ) exp( d$_{0}$/l$_{0}$ ) H being an energy scale related to wettability and the vertical length scale is H = $^{√}$2 S$_{LW}$ /κd$_{0}$ . The remaining dimensionless parameters are the evaporation number Ω = Q$_{e}$η$_{0}$ℓ $^{2}$/H$^{3}$, the diffusion number Γ = D (0) η$_{0}$/Hκ = 10 − 4 and the dimensionless chemical potential M = Hµ/κ = − 0 . 0035 . The system size is L = 19500 ℓ . Film thickness and h$_{p}$ in the plots are scaled by the precursor film thickness.\n\ncircular throughout the dewetting and evaporation process. In this case one should interprete the coordinate x as the distance from the centre of the circular film.\n\nWe start with a film of height h$_{0}$ of finite length sitting on a precursor film and assume that the film contains nanoparticles at constant concentration φ$_{0}$ . The chosen parameter values ensure that the film of thickness h$_{0}$ is linearly stable. As we do not incorporate noise, no nucleation of additional holes can occur (even with noise the probability would be extremely low). Without evaporation the film dewets ‘classically’ by a retraction of the initially step-like front. After a short time, surface tension smoothes the profile of the receding front and a capillary rim forms that collects all the\n\n20" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0003836081956775902, + "doc_id": "15b81dc199c9bb811395785b6f0c67cdd45b3ab94963337e8563c6b4f8176900", + "edit_distance": 0.9312977099236641, + "f1_score": 0.6145251396648045, + "meteor": 0.06672437330911132, + "precision": 0.859375, + "pred_md": "These Green functions have the following one-particle irreducible decomposition:\n\n\n\nyν\n\n∂\n\n〈\n\n0\n\n|\n\nT C x C y A ( ¯ ( ) ( )\n\nλ\n\n(\n\nz\n\n)) 0\n\n|\n\n〉\n\n\n\n2 e sin( ∂ y ∧ ∂ ˆ y ) 0 〈 | T C x A ( ¯ ( ) ν ( y C y A ) (ˆ) λ ( z )) 0 | 〉\n\n\n\n∂ zλ 〈 0 | T C x A ( ¯ ( ) ν ( y C z ) ( )) 0 | 〉\n\n2\n\ne\n\nsin(\n\n∂\n\nz\n\n∧\n\n∂\n\n\n\nz\n\nˆ\n\n) 0\n\n〈\n\n|\n\nT C x A\n\n( ¯ (\n\n)\n\nν\n\n(\n\ny A\n\n)\n\nλ\n\n(\n\nz C z\n\n)\n\n(ˆ)) 0\n\n|\n\n〉\n\n\n\nwhere Γ µ ν λ ' ' ' ( x , y , z ' ' ' ) and G ρ ( x , z , y ' ' ' ) are the triple gauge and the ghost-gauge vertices respectively,\n\n\n\nand\n\nAlso\n\nin which\n\n\n\nIn momentum space the Eq. (53) reads\n\n\n\nwith\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n10", + "recall": 0.4782608695652174, + "true_md": "These Green functions have the following one-particle irreducible decomposition:\n\nwhere Γ µ $^{′}$ν $^{′}$λ$^{′}$( x $^{′}$, y $^{′}$, z $^{′}$) and G $^{ρ}$( x $^{′}$, z $^{′}$, y $^{′}$) are the triple gauge and the ghost-gauge vertices respec- tively,\n\nin which\n\nIn momentum space the Eq. (53) reads\n\nwith\n\n$$∫ 2 e sin( ∂$_{z}$ ∧ ∂$_{ˆ}$ $_{z}$) 〈 0 | T ( ¯ C ( x ) A$_{ν}$ ( y ) A$_{λ}$ ( z ) C (ˆ z )) | 0 〉 = − i ∫ d $^{4}$x $^{′}$d $^{4}$y $^{′}$Δ( x ′ − x ) G$_{λ}$ ν $^{′}$( x $^{′}$, z, y $^{′}$) D$_{ν}$ ′ $_{ν}$( y ′ − y ) , (58)$$\n\n$$∫ ∂$_{zλ}$ 〈 0 | T ( ¯ C ( x ) A$_{ν}$ ( y ) C ( z )) | 0 〉 = i ∫ d $^{4}$x $^{′}$d $^{4}$y $^{′}$d $^{4}$z $^{′}$Δ( x ′ − x ) D$_{νρ}$ ( y − y $^{′}$) ∂$_{zλ}$ Δ( z − z $^{′}$) G $^{ρ}$( x $^{′}$, z $^{′}$, y $^{′}$) , (57) 2 e sin( ∂$_{z}$ ∧ ∂$_{ˆ}$ $_{z}$) 〈 0 | T ( ¯ C ( x ) A$_{ν}$ ( y ) A$_{λ}$ ( z ) C (ˆ z )) | 0 〉$$\n\n$$∫ 2 e sin( ∂$_{y}$ ∧ ∂$_{ˆ}$ $_{y}$) 〈 0 | T ( ¯ C ( x ) A$_{ν}$ ( y ) C (ˆ y ) A$_{λ}$ ( z )) | 0 〉 = − i ∫ d $^{4}$x $^{′}$d $^{4}$z $^{′}$Δ( x ′ − x ) G λ ′ ν ( x $^{′}$, y, z $^{′}$) D$_{λ}$ ′ $_{λ}$( z ′ − z ) , (56) ∂$_{zλ}$ 〈 0 | T ( ¯ C ( x ) A$_{ν}$ ( y ) C ( z )) | 0 〉$$\n\n$$∫ ∂$_{yν}$ 〈 0 | T ( ¯ C ( x ) C ( y ) A$_{λ}$ ( z )) | 0 〉 = i ∫ d $^{4}$x $^{′}$d $^{4}$y $^{′}$d $^{4}$z $^{′}$Δ( x − x $^{′}$) ∂$_{yν}$ Δ( y − y $^{′}$) D$_{λρ}$ ( z − z $^{′}$) G $^{ρ}$( x $^{′}$, y $^{′}$, z $^{′}$) , (55) 2 e sin( ∂$_{y}$ ∧ ∂$_{ˆ}$ $_{y}$) 〈 0 | T ( ¯ C ( x ) A$_{ν}$ ( y ) C (ˆ y ) A$_{λ}$ ( z )) | 0 〉$$\n\n$$〈 0 | T ( A$_{µ}$ ( x ) A$_{ν}$ ( y ) A$_{λ}$ ( z )) | 0 〉 = ∫ d $^{4}$x $^{′}$d $^{4}$y $^{′}$d $^{4}$z $^{′}$D$_{µµ}$ ′ ( x − x $^{′}$) D$_{νν}$ ′ ( y − y $^{′}$) D$_{λλ}$ ′ ( z − z $^{′}$)Γ µ $^{′}$ν $^{′}$λ$^{′}$( x $^{′}$, y $^{′}$, z $^{′}$) , (54) ∂$_{yν}$ 〈 0 | T ( ¯ C ( x ) C ( y ) A$_{λ}$ ( z )) | 0 〉$$\n\n$$Γ µ $^{′}$ν $^{′}$λ$^{′}$( x $^{′}$, y $^{′}$, z $^{′}$) = δ $^{3}$Γ δA$_{cl µ}$ ′ ( x $^{′}$) δA$_{cl ν}$ ′ ( y $^{′}$) δA$_{cl λ}$ ′ ( z $^{′}$) (59)$$\n\n$$G $^{ρ}$( x $^{′}$, z $^{′}$, y $^{′}$) = δ $^{3}$Γ δC$_{cl}$ ( x $^{′}$) δ ¯ C$_{cl}$ ( y $^{′}$) δA$_{cl ρ}$ ( z $^{′}$) . (60)$$\n\n$$G$_{ν}$ λ $^{′}$( x $^{′}$, y, z $^{′}$) = − 2 e ∫ d $^{4}$u d$^{4}$v sin( ∂$_{y}$ ∧ ∂$_{ˆ}$ $_{y}$)Δ( y − u ) D ν ′ ν (ˆ y − v )Γ λ ′ ν ′ ( x $^{′}$, u, v, z $^{′}$) , (61)$$\n\n$$Γ λ ′ ν ′ ( x $^{′}$, u, v, z $^{′}$) = δ $^{4}$Γ δC$_{cl}$ ( x $^{′}$) δ ¯ C$_{cl}$ ( u ) δA ν ′ $_{cl}$( v ) δA$_{cl λ}$ ′ ( z $^{′}$) . (62)$$\n\n$$p $^{µ}$Γ$_{µνλ}$ ( p, q, k )[1 + b ( p $^{2}$)] = G$_{λν}$ ′ ( p, q, k ) { ( q $^{2}$g ν ′ ν − q ν $^{′}$q$_{ν}$ )[1 + Π$_{T}$( q $^{2}$)] + Π$_{θ}$ ( q $^{2}$)˜ q ν $^{′}$˜ q$_{ν}$ } + G$_{νλ}$ ′ ( p, k, q ) { ( k $^{2}$g λ ′ λ − k λ $^{′}$k$_{λ}$ )[1 + Π$_{T}$( k $^{2}$)] + Π$_{θ}$ ( k $^{2}$) ˜ k λ $^{′}$˜ k$_{λ}$ } (63)$$\n\n$$G$_{λν}$ ′ ( p, q, k ) = − 2 e ∫ d $^{4}$q ′ (2 π ) 4 sin( q ′ ∧ q ) i Δ( q $^{′}$) iD α ν ′ ( q − q $^{′}$)Γ$_{αλ}$ ( p, q $^{′}$, q − q $^{′}$, k ) , (64)$$\n\n10\n\nAlso\n\nand" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6262827431466834, + "doc_id": "169fbef021015d68a5b3073670f8387457e19453333aee3642c467d5ac750c90", + "edit_distance": 0.2490974729241877, + "f1_score": 0.9408740359897173, + "meteor": 0.7944687500390375, + "precision": 0.953125, + "pred_md": "## V. APPENDIX\n\nDirect sampling of unpeeling dynamics within λ -DNA is prohibitively slow near B/U phase coexistence, because the junction separating unhybridized and hybridized regions of the molecule is akin to a random walker in a free energy landscape replete with barriers in excess of hundreds of k B T [6]. We therefore computed thermal averages in Fig. 1(b) within a constrained ensemble (at constant force and temperature) in which the molecule possessed one free end, permitting unpeeling, and melting was disallowed. Thermal averages were computed from 〈 A 〉 ≡ ∑ n g n ( f, T ) A n e ( ) -βF n ( ) / ∑ n g n ( f, T ) e -βF n ( ) , with F n ( ) ≡ ( L -n ) 〈 F 〉 hyb . + nF U + glyph[epsilon1] BU δ n, 0 . Here n ∈ [0 , L ] is the number of unpeeled basepairs; F U is the bulk internal energy per basepair of state U (see Equation (5) of Ref. [10]); glyph[epsilon1] BU < 0 is the U/B surface tension parameter; and 〈 F 〉 hyb . is the bulk energy per basepair of a molecule that is constrained to remain hybridized (calculated by direct Monte Carlo sampling). The degeneracy g n ( f, T ) accounts for the mixing entropy of B- and S-DNA within this hybridized phase. Here we have used the approximation g n ( f, T ) = exp { (1 -n/L ) ln ( L m )} , where m is half the thermal average of the number of S/B domain walls.\n\nSequence averaging in Fig. 1 was done by dividing the basepairing-stacking parameters of the melting model of Ref. [13] into two sets, containing 1) any A or T bases, or 2) any C or G bases. As in Ref. [10], this leads to bulk free energies (at f = 0) of melting of 0 67 + 0 19 ln( . . M/ . 0 150) (AT) and 2 78 + 0 19 ln( . . M/ . 0 150) (CG), in units of k B T at 310 K. Here M is the molar NaCl concentration (we use the salt-dependent correction from [6]).\n\n6", + "recall": 0.9289340101522843, + "true_md": "## V. APPENDIX\n\nDirect sampling of unpeeling dynamics within λ -DNA is prohibitively slow near B/U phase co- existence, because the junction separating unhybridized and hybridized regions of the molecule is akin to a random walker in a free energy landscape replete with barriers in excess of hun- dreds of k$_{B}$T [6]. We therefore computed thermal averages in Fig. 1(b) within a constrained ensemble (at constant force and temperature) in which the molecule possessed one free end, permitting unpeeling, and melting was disallowed. Thermal averages were computed from 〈 A 〉 ≡ $^{∑}$$\\_{n}$g$\\_{n}$ ( f, T ) A ( n ) e − βF ( n $^{)}$/ $^{∑}$$_{n}$g$_{n}$ ( f, T ) e − βF ( n $^{)}$, with F ( n ) ≡ ( L − n ) 〈 F 〉 hyb . + nF$_{U}$ + ϵ$_{BU}$δ$_{n,}$$\\_{0}$ . Here n ∈ [0 , L ] is the number of unpeeled basepairs; F$\\_{U}$ is the bulk internal energy per basepair of state U (see Equation (5) of Ref. [10]); ϵ$\\_{BU}$ < 0 is the U/B surface tension parameter; and 〈 F 〉 hyb . is the bulk energy per basepair of a molecule that is constrained to remain hybridized (calculated by direct Monte Carlo sampling). The degeneracy g$\\_{n}$ ( f, T ) accounts for the mixing entropy of B- and S-DNA within this hybridized phase. Here we have used the approximation g$\\_{n}$ ( f, T ) = exp $^{{}$(1 − n/L ) ln ( L m $^{)}}$, where m is half the thermal average of the number of S/B domain walls.\n\nSequence averaging in Fig. 1 was done by dividing the basepairing-stacking parameters of the melting model of Ref. [13] into two sets, containing 1) any A or T bases, or 2) any C or G bases. As in Ref. [10], this leads to bulk free energies (at f = 0) of melting of 0 . 67 + 0 . 19 ln( M/ 0 . 150) (AT) and 2 . 78 + 0 . 19 ln( M/ 0 . 150) (CG), in units of k$_{B}$T at 310 K. Here M is the molar NaCl concentration (we use the salt-dependent correction from [6]).\n\n6" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6472362919078478, + "doc_id": "d1b589a193a55a834a21a3753b6d235d651f7babd5d6e89b33ac0585796ee0e9", + "edit_distance": 0.3851851851851852, + "f1_score": 0.9343832020997376, + "meteor": 0.8142932014264941, + "precision": 0.9518716577540107, + "pred_md": "FIG. 13: (Color online) Systematics of the moment ratios m /m 1 0 for the ISGMR strength distributions in the Sn isotopes. The experimental results (filled squares) are compared with results from non-relativistic RPA calculations (without pairing) by Col' o et al. [65, 66] (filled circles); relativistic calculations of Piekarewicz [67] (triangles); RMF calculations from Vretenar et al. [68] (diamonds); and, QTBA calculations from the Jlich group [69] (sideways triangles). u Results for 112 Sn, 116 Sn and 124 Sn reported by the TAMU group [19, 21] are also shown (inverted triangles).\n\nFIG. 13: (Color online) Systematics of the moment ratios m /m 1 0 for the ISGMR strength distributions in the Sn isotopes. The experimental results (filled squares) are compared with results from non-relativistic RPA calculations (without pairing) by Col' o et al. [65, 66] (filled circles); relativistic calculations of Piekarewicz [67] (triangles); RMF calculations from Vretenar et al. [68] (diamonds); and, QTBA calculations from the Jlich group [69] (sideways triangles). u Results for 112 Sn, 116 Sn and 124 Sn reported by the TAMU group [19, 21] are also shown (inverted triangles).\n\nK τ = -550 ± 100 MeV (see Fig. 4 in Ref. [34]). This number is consistent with the value of K τ = -370 ± 120 MeV obtained from an analysis of the isotopic transport ratios in mediumenergy heavy-ion reactions [87]. Incidentally, this value has been modified from the value of -500 ± 50 MeV that was quoted previously by this group [88, 89] and referred to in Ref. [34]. It transpires that they had identified the quantity that they had obtained, K asy , as being identical to K τ , the quantity that has been obtained from the ISGMR measurements; the two differ by a higher-order term [87, 90]. More recently, a value of K τ = -500 +125 -100 MeV has been obtained by Centelles et al. [91] from constraints put by neutron-skin data from anti-protonic atoms across the mass table; here again, it would appear that what the authors have termed K τ is actually the aforementioned K asy . Further, a value of K τ = -500 ± 50 MeV has been obtained also by Sagawa et al. by comparing our Sn ISGMR data with calculations using different Skyrme Hamiltonians and RMF Lagrangians [92]. The K τ value obtained from our ISGMR measurements has, thus, been verified by a number of different procedures involving quite different data. A more precise determination of K τ will likely result from extending\n\n23", + "recall": 0.9175257731958762, + "true_md": "FIG. 13: (Color online) Systematics of the moment ratios m 1 /m 0 for the ISGMR strength distribu- tions in the Sn isotopes. The experimental results (filled squares) are compared with results from non-relativistic RPA calculations (without pairing) by Col` o et al. [65, 66] (filled circles); relativistic calculations of Piekarewicz [67] (triangles); RMF calculations from Vretenar et al. [68] (diamonds); and, QTBA calculations from the J¨ ulich group [69] (sideways triangles). Results for $^{112}$Sn, $^{116}$Sn and $^{124}$Sn reported by the TAMU group [19, 21] are also shown (inverted triangles).\n\nK$_{τ}$ = − 550 ± 100 MeV (see Fig. 4 in Ref. [34]). This number is consistent with the value of K$_{τ}$ = − 370 ± 120 MeV obtained from an analysis of the isotopic transport ratios in medium- energy heavy-ion reactions [87]. Incidentally, this value has been modified from the value of − 500 ± 50 MeV that was quoted previously by this group [88, 89] and referred to in Ref. [34]. It transpires that they had identified the quantity that they had obtained, K$_{asy}$ , as being identical to K$_{τ}$ , the quantity that has been obtained from the ISGMR measurements; the two differ by a higher-order term [87, 90]. More recently, a value of K$_{τ}$ = − 500 +125 − 100 MeV has been obtained by Centelles et al. [91] from constraints put by neutron-skin data from anti-protonic atoms across the mass table; here again, it would appear that what the authors have termed K$_{τ}$ is actually the aforementioned K$_{asy}$ . Further, a value of K$_{τ}$ = − 500 ± 50 MeV has been obtained also by Sagawa et al. by comparing our Sn ISGMR data with calculations using different Skyrme Hamiltonians and RMF Lagrangians [92]. The K$_{τ}$ value obtained from our ISGMR measurements has, thus, been verified by a number of different procedures involving quite different data. A more precise determination of K$_{τ}$ will likely result from extending\n\n23" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9259216761216735, + "doc_id": "488c6fc396cfe424aaf30dd0df6f03b31e435038455c1041b465af35b8774434", + "edit_distance": 0.07920792079207921, + "f1_score": 0.9710144927536231, + "meteor": 0.9542069415106582, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "arXiv:1001.2669v1 [cond-mat.soft] 15 Jan 2010\n\n## Modelling approaches to the dewetting of evaporating thin films of nanoparticle suspensions\n\nU. Thiele , I. Vancea, A. J. Archer, M. J. Robbins, L. Frastia ∗ Department of Mathematical Sciences,\n\nLoughborough University, Leicestershire LE11 3TU, UK\n\nA. Stannard, E. Pauliac-Vaujour, C. P. Martin, M. O. Blunt, P. J. Moriarty The School of Physics and Astronomy,\n\nThe University of Nottingham, Nottingham NG7 2RD, UK\n\n∗ homepage: http://www.uwethiele.de, u.thiele@lboro.ac.uk\n\n1", + "recall": 0.9436619718309859, + "true_md": "arXiv:1001.2669v1 [cond-mat.soft] 15 Jan 2010\n\n# Modelling approaches to the dewetting of evaporating thin films of nanoparticle suspensions\n\nU. Thiele $^{∗}$, I. Vancea, A. J. Archer, M. J. Robbins, L. Frastia\n\nDepartment of Mathematical Sciences, Loughborough University, Leicestershire LE11 3TU, UK\n\nA. Stannard, E. Pauliac-Vaujour, C. P. Martin, M. O. Blunt, P. J. Moriarty\n\nThe School of Physics and Astronomy, The University of Nottingham, Nottingham NG7 2RD, UK\n\n∗ homepage: http://www.uwethiele.de, u.thiele@lboro.ac.uk\n\n1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7149916672789725, + "doc_id": "f7c894dadd212a608e8858a8880d42762ad7a77933c2557c77aa8714cd1f0f78", + "edit_distance": 0.18411552346570398, + "f1_score": 0.9556135770234986, + "meteor": 0.8623902439024389, + "precision": 0.9682539682539683, + "pred_md": "The level spacings of the J π ≤ 6 + states in the calculated GS band are rotational, but the level spacings between the J π = 6 + and 8 + are smaller than those in the case of a rotational band (Fig. 4). The 2¯ hω [(∆ N π H O . . , ∆ N ν H O . . ) = (1 , 1)] components mix in the J π = 8 + state; that breaks the rotational spectra. The calculated GS band deviates from the experimental one and is more rotational. The experimental GS band may be reproduced by adding sufficient basis wave functions such as (∆ N π H O . . , ∆ N ν H O . . ) = (1 , 1) components. The observed J π = 2 + 3 (3.21 MeV) and 2 + 4 (3.51 MeV) states were not obtained perhaps because basis wave functions with a total of 2¯ hω configurations are insufficient in the present basis set.\n\nTable I shows theoretical and experimental values of electric quadrupole transition strengths B E ( 2) in the Weisskopf unit. The B E ( 2) values for the intraband transitions of the SD0 and SD2 bands take larger values than those of the GS band, which reflects the large deformations of the SD0 and SD2 bands. The B E ( 2) values for the intraband transitions of the GS and SD0 bands are consistent with experimental data. Since the SD0 and SD2 bands are approximately regarded as the K π = 0 + and 2 + bands associated with the triaxial superdeformation, the interband transitions between them have non-negligible values. The observed J π = 2 + 5 (3.92 MeV), 3 + (4.23 MeV), and (2 3 4) , , + (5.17 MeV) decay to the SD0 band members. The agreement of the theoretical and experimental B E ( 2) values of the 2 + SD2 → 0 + SD0 transition supports the band assignment of the SD2 band for the J π = 2 + 5 (3.92 MeV) state. B E ( 2) ratios of B E ( 2; 2 + SD2 → 0 + SD0 ) /B E ( 2; 2 + SD0 → 0 + SD0 ) and B E ( 2; 2 + SD2 → 2 + SD0 ) /B E ( 2; 2 + SD0 → 0 + SD0 ) are consistent in the case of γ ∼ 10 · with the Davydov-Filippov model [25], which is a schematic triaxial rotor model. To confirm the proposed band assignment of the SD2 band and triaxial deformation of the SD states, more experimental data for intraband transitions of the SD2 band and interband transitions between the SD0 and the SD2 are required.\n\nTo discuss shell effects of protons and neutrons in the SD states of 40 Ar, triaxial aspects of the superdeformation in 40 Ar[( Z, N ) = (18 22)] are compared with those in the , N = Z isotope ( 36 Ar[( Z, N ) = (18 18)]) , and isotone ( 44 Ti[( Z, N ) = (22 22)]). , The deformedbasis AMD and HF calculations suggest that the SD states in 36 Ar [6, 13] and 44 Ti [6, 9] form prolate and significantly triaxial shapes, respectively. The theoretically suggested triaxiality γ values of the SD states in 44 Ti are approximately 25 · [9] by the deformedbasis AMD, which is consistent with the HF [6]. The particle-hole configurations of the SD states in 36 Ar and 44 Ti are considered to be [( sd ) -4 ( pf ) 2 ] and [( sd ) -2 ( pf ) 4 ], respectively, for\n\n8", + "recall": 0.9432989690721649, + "true_md": "The level spacings of the J π ≤ 6 + states in the calculated GS band are rotational, but the level spacings between the J π = 6 + and 8 + are smaller than those in the case of a rotational band (Fig. 4). The 2¯ hω [(Δ N π H . O $_{.}$, Δ N ν H . O $_{.}$) = (1 , 1)] components mix in the J π = 8 + state; that breaks the rotational spectra. The calculated GS band deviates from the experimental one and is more rotational. The experimental GS band may be reproduced by adding sufficient basis wave functions such as (Δ N π H . O $_{.}$, Δ N ν H . O $_{.}$) = (1 , 1) components. The observed J π = 2 + 3 (3.21 MeV) and 2 + 4 (3.51 MeV) states were not obtained perhaps because basis wave functions with a total of 2¯ hω configurations are insufficient in the present basis set.\n\nTable I shows theoretical and experimental values of electric quadrupole transition strengths B ( E 2) in the Weisskopf unit. The B ( E 2) values for the intraband transitions of the SD0 and SD2 bands take larger values than those of the GS band, which reflects the large deformations of the SD0 and SD2 bands. The B ( E 2) values for the intraband transitions of the GS and SD0 bands are consistent with experimental data. Since the SD0 and SD2 bands are approximately regarded as the K π = 0 + and 2 + bands associated with the triaxial superdeformation, the interband transitions between them have non-negligible values. The observed J π = 2 + 5 (3.92 MeV), 3 + (4.23 MeV), and (2 , 3 , 4) + (5.17 MeV) de- cay to the SD0 band members. The agreement of the theoretical and experimental B ( E 2) values of the 2 + SD2 → 0 + SD0 transition supports the band assignment of the SD2 band for the J π = 2 + 5 (3.92 MeV) state. B ( E 2) ratios of B ( E 2; 2 + SD2 → 0 + $_{SD0}$) /B ( E 2; 2 + SD0 → 0 + $_{SD0}$) and B ( E 2; 2 + SD2 → 2 + $_{SD0}$) /B ( E 2; 2 + SD0 → 0 + $_{SD0}$) are consistent in the case of γ ∼ 10 ◦ with the Davydov-Filippov model [25], which is a schematic triaxial rotor model. To confirm the proposed band assignment of the SD2 band and triaxial deformation of the SD states, more experimental data for intraband transitions of the SD2 band and interband transitions between the SD0 and the SD2 are required.\n\nTo discuss shell effects of protons and neutrons in the SD states of $^{40}$Ar, triaxial aspects of the superdeformation in $^{40}$Ar[( Z, N ) = (18 , 22)] are compared with those in the N = Z isotope ( $^{36}$Ar[( Z, N ) = (18 , 18)]) and isotone ( $^{44}$Ti[( Z, N ) = (22 , 22)]). The deformed- basis AMD and HF calculations suggest that the SD states in $^{36}$Ar [6, 13] and $^{44}$Ti [6, 9] form prolate and significantly triaxial shapes, respectively. The theoretically suggested triaxiality γ values of the SD states in $^{44}$Ti are approximately 25 ◦ [9] by the deformed- basis AMD, which is consistent with the HF [6]. The particle-hole configurations of the SD states in $^{36}$Ar and $^{44}$Ti are considered to be [( sd ) − $^{4}$( pf ) $^{2}$] and [( sd ) − $^{2}$( pf ) $^{4}$], respectively, for\n\n8" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6647951162994775, + "doc_id": "d92ab1f7873b03bd549058ac0ec4d333293d842f1d47025808b00746fa1fd7c9", + "edit_distance": 0.3755274261603376, + "f1_score": 0.8997134670487107, + "meteor": 0.7261173282911958, + "precision": 0.9289940828402367, + "pred_md": "5\n\nFIG. 1: Graphic representation of the moose model described by the Lagrangian given in Eq. (1) . The dashed lines represent the identification of the corresponding moose sites.\n\nFIG. 1: Graphic representation of the moose model described by the Lagrangian given in Eq. (1) . The dashed lines represent the identification of the corresponding moose sites.\n\n## III. GENERALIZATION TO 5 DIMENSIONS\n\nWe now want to describe the continuum limit N →∞ of the Lagrangian given in Eq. (1). As it is well known, a [ SU (2)] K linear moose model can be interpreted as the discretized version of a SU(2) 5D gauge theory. The GD-BESS model, however, has a number of new features with respect to a basic linear moose. In particular, we have the 'cut link' and the presence of an apparently nonlocal field U which connects the gauge fields of the SU (2) L ⊗ U (1) Y local symmetry.\n\nTo be able to properly describe the 5D generalization, we need a representation for the 5D metric. Since the deconstructed model possesses ordinary 4D Lorentz invariance, the extra-dimensional metric must be compatible with this symmetry. Such a metric can in general be written in the form:\n\n\n\nwhere η is the standard Lorentz metric with the ( -, + + +) signature choice, , , y the variable corresponding to the extra dimension and b y ( ) is a generic positive definite function, usually known as the 'warp factor'. We normalize b y ( ) by requiring that b (0) = 1. For definiteness, we will consider a finite extra dimension, with y ∈ (0 , πR ). With this choice, it is possible to write down an identification between the GD-BESS and the continuum limit parameters:\n\n\n\nwhere g 5 is a 5D gauge coupling, with mass dimension -1 / 2. As can be seen, a general choice for the g i implies that g 5 is 'running' , with an explicit dependence on the extra variable.", + "recall": 0.8722222222222222, + "true_md": "FIG. 1: Graphic representation of the moose model described by the Lagrangian given in Eq. (1) . The dashed lines represent the identification of the corresponding moose sites.\n\n## III. GENERALIZATION TO 5 DIMENSIONS\n\nWe now want to describe the continuum limit N → ∞ of the Lagrangian given in Eq. (1). As it is well known, a [ SU (2)] K linear moose model can be interpreted as the discretized version of a SU(2) 5D gauge theory. The GD-BESS model, however, has a number of new features with respect to a basic linear moose. In particular, we have the “cut link” and the presence of an apparently nonlocal field U which connects the gauge fields of the SU (2)$_{L}$ ⊗ U (1)$_{Y}$ local symmetry. To be able to properly describe the 5D generalization, we need a representation for the\n\n⊗ To be able to properly describe the 5D generalization, we need a representation for the 5D metric. Since the deconstructed model possesses ordinary 4D Lorentz invariance, the extra-dimensional metric must be compatible with this symmetry. Such a metric can in general be written in the form:\n\nwhere η is the standard Lorentz metric with the ( − , + , + , +) signature choice, y the variable corresponding to the extra dimension and b ( y ) is a generic positive definite function, usually known as the “warp factor”. We normalize b ( y ) by requiring that b (0) = 1. For definiteness, we will consider a finite extra dimension, with y ∈ (0 , πR ). With this choice, it is possible to write down an identification between the GD-BESS and the continuum limit parameters:\n\nwhere g$_{5}$ is a 5D gauge coupling, with mass dimension − 1 / 2. As can be seen, a general choice for the g$_{i}$ implies that g$_{5}$ is “running” , with an explicit dependence on the extra variable.\n\n$$ds 2 = b ( y ) η$_{µν}$ dx $^{µ}$dxν + dy $^{2}$, (6)$$\n\n$$g 2 i N → g 2 5 πR , f 2 i → b ( y ) N πRg 2 5 , (7)$$\n\n5" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "5fc9416a2eb9e4a973bbe633a82e65c4a591513518f85f6305d10d462fb1bb23", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.999999984597261, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "- [86] J. M. Pearson, Phys. Lett. B 271 , 12 (1991).\n- [87] L.-W. Chen et al. , Phys. Rev. C 80 , 014322 (2009).\n- [88] B.-A. Li and L.-W. Chen, Phys. Rev. C 72 , 064611 (2005).\n- [89] Lie-Wen Chen, Che Ming Ko, and Bao-An Li, Phys. Rev. Lett 94 , 032701 (2005).\n- [90] S. Yoshida and H. Sagawa, Phys. Rev. C 73 , 044320 (2006).\n- [91] M. Centelles et al. , Phys. Rev. Lett. 102 , 122502 (2009).\n- [92] H. Sagawa et al. , Phys. Rev. C 76 , 034327 (2007).\n- [93] H. Baba et al. , Nucl. Phys. A 788 , 188c (2007).\n- [94] C. Monrozeau et al. , Phys. Rev. Lett. 100 , 042501 (2008).\n- [95] http://www.gsi.de/fair/index e.html.\n- [96] http://www.frib.msu.edu/.\n- [97] B. K. Agrawal, S. Shlomo, and V. Kim Au, Phys. Rev. C 68 , 031304 (2003).\n- [98] U. Garg, AIP Conf. Proc. 1128 , 100 (2009).\n- [99] Lie-Wen Chen, Che Ming Ko, and Bao-An Li, Phys. Rev. C 72 , 064309 (2005).\n- [100] D. N. Basu et al. , Phys. Rev. C 80 , 057304 (2009).\n\n28", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "- [86] J. M. Pearson, Phys. Lett. B 271 , 12 (1991).\n\n- [87] L.-W. Chen et al. , Phys. Rev. C 80 , 014322 (2009).\n\n- [88] B.-A. Li and L.-W. Chen, Phys. Rev. C 72 , 064611 (2005).\n\n- [89] Lie-Wen Chen, Che Ming Ko, and Bao-An Li, Phys. Rev. Lett 94 , 032701 (2005).\n\n- [90] S. Yoshida and H. Sagawa, Phys. Rev. C 73 , 044320 (2006).\n\n- [91] M. Centelles et al. , Phys. Rev. Lett. 102 , 122502 (2009).\n\n- [92] H. Sagawa et al. , Phys. Rev. C 76 , 034327 (2007).\n\n- [93] H. Baba et al. , Nucl. Phys. A 788 , 188c (2007).\n\n- [94] C. Monrozeau et al. , Phys. Rev. Lett. 100 , 042501 (2008).\n\n- [95] http://www.gsi.de/fair/index e.html.\n\n- [96] http://www.frib.msu.edu/.\n\n- [97] B. K. Agrawal, S. Shlomo, and V. Kim Au, Phys. Rev. C 68 , 031304 (2003).\n\n- [98] U. Garg, AIP Conf. Proc. 1128 , 100 (2009).\n\n- [99] Lie-Wen Chen, Che Ming Ko, and Bao-An Li, Phys. Rev. C 72 , 064309 (2005).\n\n- [100] D. N. Basu et al. , Phys. Rev. C 80 , 057304 (2009).\n\n28" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.2789392164741627, + "doc_id": "9a9a450ea050d30b414aee35c52170efc733cfbf14d8e373b4456885a292a7dd", + "edit_distance": 0.5833333333333334, + "f1_score": 0.9018567639257294, + "meteor": 0.456864495771493, + "precision": 0.9444444444444444, + "pred_md": "variations are discussed in greater detail when we estimate the systematic uncertainty due to the chiral extrapolation in Sec. VI A.\n\nIn the case of the decay constants, we extrapolate the ratio\n\n\n\nwhile for the mixing matrix elements we consider\n\n\n\nFrom here on, we drop the superscript 'ren' for simplicity because we only refer to the renormalized quantities. The expressions for the heavy-light meson decay constant and mixing matrix element to NLO in the light-quark expansion, but zeroth order in 1 /m b , are given in Appendix D. For completeness, we present formulae for both SU (3) and SU (2) HM χ PT. The SU (3) fit functions depend on the valence and sea light-quark masses ( m , m , m s l h ) and the lattice spacing a . The SU (2) functions are obtained from the SU (3) expressions by taking the limit ( m l m s , m l m h ) /lessmuch 1. Thus they only apply in the region in which the value of the average up-down quark mass is much smaller than the valence and sea strange quark masses. Furthermore, because the strange quark has been integrated out of the SU (2) theory, the SU (2) fit functions only depend upon the light-quark mass m l and the lattice spacing a . Therefore the expressions for the SU (3)-breaking ratios at NLO in SU (2) HM χ PT are particularly simple:\n\n\n\n\n\nwhere m 2 L = 2 B m ( l + m res ) is the tree-level mass-squared of a pseudoscalar meson composed of two quarks with mass m l , B, and f are the leading-order low-energy constants of χ PT, and the quark masses in the analytic terms are expressed in terms of dimensionless ratios to make the coefficients C l and D l of O (1). These functional forms are derived from Eqs. (D16)(D20) by taking the ratio of the expressions for the valence quark y = s over the expressions for x = . Because we are working at a single lattice spacing, the analytic terms proportional l to a 2 are absorbed into the values of the leading-order coefficients R Φ and R M . Note that\n\n27", + "recall": 0.8629441624365483, + "true_md": "variations are discussed in greater detail when we estimate the systematic uncertainty due to the chiral extrapolation in Sec. VI A.\n\nIn the case of the decay constants, we extrapolate the ratio\n\nwhile for the mixing matrix elements we consider\n\nFrom here on, we drop the superscript “ren” for simplicity because we only refer to the renor- malized quantities. The expressions for the heavy-light meson decay constant and mixing matrix element to NLO in the light-quark expansion, but zeroth order in 1 /m$_{b}$ , are given in Appendix D. For completeness, we present formulae for both SU (3) and SU (2) HM χ PT. The SU (3) fit functions depend on the valence and sea light-quark masses ( m$_{s}$,m$_{l}$,m$_{h}$ ) and the lattice spacing a . The SU (2) functions are obtained from the SU (3) expressions by taking the limit ( m$_{l}$ $_{m$\\_{s}$}$, m$_{l}$ m$_{h}$ ) ≪ 1. Thus they only apply in the region in which the value of the average up-down quark mass is much smaller than the valence and sea strange quark masses. Furthermore, because the strange quark has been integrated out of the SU (2) the- ory, the SU (2) fit functions only depend upon the light-quark mass m$_{l}$ and the lattice spacing a . Therefore the expressions for the SU (3)-breaking ratios at NLO in SU (2) HM χ PT are particularly simple:\n\nwhere m 2 L = 2 B ( m$_{l}$ + m$_{res}$ ) is the tree-level mass-squared of a pseudoscalar meson composed of two quarks with mass m$_{l}$ , B, and f are the leading-order low-energy constants of χ PT, and the quark masses in the analytic terms are expressed in terms of dimensionless ratios to make the coefficients C$_{l}$ and D$_{l}$ of O (1). These functional forms are derived from Eqs. (D16)– (D20) by taking the ratio of the expressions for the valence quark y = s over the expressions for x = l . Because we are working at a single lattice spacing, the analytic terms proportional to a 2 are absorbed into the values of the leading-order coefficients R$_{Φ}$ and R$_{M}$ . Note that\n\n27\n\n$$Φ$_{B}$$_{l}$ { (4 πf ) ( 4 ) ( Λ χ ) (4 πf ) } √ M$_{B}$$_{s}$ M$_{B}$$_{l}$ = R$_{M}$ 1 + 2 + 3 g 2 B ∗ Bπ (4 πf ) 2 1 2 m 2 $_{L}$ln m 2 L Λ 2 χ + D$_{l}$ Bm$_{l}$ (4 πf ) 2 , (79)$$\n\n$$Φ$_{B}$$_{s}$ Φ$_{B}$$_{l}$ = R$_{Φ}$ { 1 + 1 + 3 g 2 B ∗ Bπ (4 πf ) 2 ( 3 4 ) m 2 $_{L}$ln ( m 2 L Λ 2 χ ) + C$_{l}$ 2 Bm$_{l}$ (4 πf ) 2 } , (78)$$\n\n$$√ M ren B$_{s}$ M ren B$_{l}$ = √ m$_{B}$$_{s}$ m$_{B}$$_{l}$ ( f$_{B}$$_{s}$ √ B$_{B}$$_{s}$ f$_{B}$$_{l}$ B$_{B}$$_{l}$ ) . (77)$$\n\n$$Φ ren B$_{s}$ Φ ren B$_{l}$ = √ m$_{B}$$_{s}$ m$_{B}$$_{l}$ f$_{B}$$_{s}$ f$_{B}$$_{l}$ , (76)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8984616249705623, + "doc_id": "b44ebcf7be4b17c96f6640308e6b187d2f89a455f6e08cd4022b24e92255d6c1", + "edit_distance": 0.04779411764705882, + "f1_score": 0.924170616113744, + "meteor": 0.9568320564721715, + "precision": 0.9512195121951219, + "pred_md": "## I. INTRODUCTION\n\nThe present knowledge of quantum chromodynamics (QCD) suggests that quark matter might be in di ff erent color superconducting phases at high densities. Thus, one expects the core of the hybrid stars to be composed of color superconducting quark matter (CSQM) surrounded by a nuclear mantle. The possible CSQM phases are the two-flavor color superconductor (2SC) [1-3], the colour flavour locked (CFL) phase [4, 5], and crystalline color superconductor (CCS) [6, 7]. The speculation that the CSQM exists in the core of the hybrid stars has triggered many theoretical investigations both on the modeling of the equation of state (EOS) of quark matter and on the phenomenological signatures of the presence of quark matter in the compact stars [8].\n\nThe nuclear matter phase of the hybrid star is described by the various models which can be broadly grouped into (i) non-relativistic potential models [9], (ii) non-relativistic mean-field models [10-13], (iii) field theoretical based relativistic mean-field models [14-16] and (iv) DiracBrueckner-Hartree-Fock model [17-20]. The quark matter in the colour superconducting phases are usually described either within the MIT bag model or using a more realistic NJL-like model. The studies based on the MIT bag model indicate the existence of stable configurations of hybrid stars with the CFL quark matter core [21-24]. Further, the MIT bag model predicts the absence of the 2SC colour superconducting phase in the hybrid stars [25]. The scenario is some what di ff erent when NJL model is employed to study the hybrid stars with CSQM core. The stable configurations of hybrid stars with 2SC quark matter core are possible within the NJL model [2629]. However, earlier investigations [30-32] based on the NJL model ruled out the possibility of CFL quark matter at the core of the hybrid stars, because, it rendered the hybrid star unstable. Only very recently [33, 34], it has been demonstrated that inclusion of the six-fermion interaction term together with large enough values of the scalar diquark coupling strength in the NJL model can yield stable configurations of the hybrid star containing 2SC or CFL quark matter core. The NJL model is also applied to study the possibility of existence of the CCS quark matter phase in the hybrid stars [35, 36].\n\nThe stability and the structure of the non-rotating hybrid stars are quite sensitive to the choice of the EOS of the nuclear matter and the quark matter [21, 37]. Further, one often finds that even though the stable configurations of the non-rotating hybrid star for a given EOS belong to the third family of compact stars, but, the maximum rotation frequency upto which these hybrid stars are stable is much lower than the corresponding mass-shedding (Keplerian) frequency [38, 39].\n\n2", + "recall": 0.8986175115207373, + "true_md": "## I. INTRODUCTION\n\nThe present knowledge of quantum chromodynamics (QCD) suggests that quark matter might be in di ff erent color superconducting phases at high densities. Thus, one expects the core of the hybrid stars to be composed of color superconducting quark matter (CSQM) surrounded by a nuclear mantle. The possible CSQM phases are the two-flavor c olor superconductor (2SC) [1–3], the colour flavour locked (CFL) phase [4, 5], and crystallinecolor superconductor (CCS) [6, 7]. The speculation that the CSQM exists in the core of the hybrid stars has triggered many theoretical investigations both on the modeling of the equation of state (EOS) of quark matter and on the phenomenological signatures of the presence of quark matter in the compact stars [8].\n\nThe nuclear matter phase of the hybrid star is described by the various models which can be broadly grouped into (i) non-relativistic potential models [9], (ii) non-relativistic mean-field models [10–13], (iii) field theoretical based relativistic mean-field models [14–16] and (iv) Dirac- Brueckner-Hartree-Fock model [17–20]. The quark matter inthe colour superconducting phases are usually described either within the MIT bag model or using a more realistic NJL-like model. The studies based on the MIT bag model indicate the existence of stable configurations of hybrid stars with the CFL quark matter core [21–24]. Further, the MI T bag model predicts the absence of the 2SC colour superconducting phase in the hybrid stars [25]. The scenario is some what di ff erent when NJL model is employed to study the hybrid stars with CSQM core. The stable configurations of hybrid stars with 2SC quark matter core arepossible within the NJL model [26– 29]. However, earlier investigations [30–32] based on the N JL model ruled out the possibility of CFL quark matter at the core of the hybrid stars, because, it rendered the hybrid star unstable. Only very recently [33, 34], it has been demonstrated that inclusion of the six-fermion interaction term together with large enough values of the scalar diquark coupling strength in the NJL model can yield stable configurations of the hybrid star containin g 2SC or CFL quark matter core. The NJL model is also applied to study the possibility of existence of the CCS quark matter phase in the hybrid stars [35, 36].\n\nThe stability and the structure of the non-rotating hybrid stars are quite sensitive to the choice of the EOS of the nuclear matter and the quark matter [21, 37]. Further, one often finds that even though the stable configurations of the non-rotating hybridstar for a given EOS belong to the third family of compact stars, but, the maximum rotation frequency upto which these hybrid stars are stable is much lower than the corresponding mass-shedding (Keplerian) frequency [38, 39].\n\n2" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9920014191088464, + "doc_id": "4acf9b54646b7d493adccd2f310b6071a425e693817a78609e94b6fa7e3fa1e5", + "edit_distance": 0.05084745762711865, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9998441904965941, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "system. The first obvious candidate to be considered is the granular temperature of the gas, defined from the second moment of the velocity distribution of the grains. Actually, this parameter is known to play in the hydrodynamic description of granular gases a role similar to the usual temperature in molecular hydrodynamics [13]. But there is another temperature parameter that is relevant for the description of the system, the one defined from the second moment of the velocity distribution of the movable piston. Both temperatures, defined from the velocity of the gas and of the piston, respectively, are the same in equilibrium systems, but they can differ strongly in granular systems, as a manifestation of the violation of energy equipartition [14]. Clarifying the relationship between the effective temperature defined from the volume fluctuations, the granular temperature, and the temperature parameter of the piston, is one of the aims of this work.\n\nThe structure of the remaining of this paper is as follows. In Sec. II, the system is described and the macroscopic steady state to be considered is characterized. Also, the parameter region to be investigated is specified. It is shown than when the mass of the piston is much larger than the mass of the grains, the volume fluctuations of the system exhibit a Gaussian distribution. The second moment of this distribution depends much stronger on the inelasticity of collisions between particles than on the elastic or inelastic character of the collisions of the particles with the piston. In Sec. III, a compressibility factor is defined for the granular gas. As usual, it is a measurement of the change in the volume of the system as a consequence of a change in the external pressure under well defined constrains. From the values of the second moment of the volume fluctuations and of the compressibility factor, an effective temperature is defined, as indicated above. This temperature turns out to be quite simply related with the temperature parameter of the piston, but its relationship with the granular temperature of the gas appears to be very intricate. Finally, Sec. IV contains a short summary of the main results in the paper and some general comments.\n\n## II. STEADY FLUCTUATIONS OF THE POSITION OF THE PISTON\n\nConsider a system composed by N smooth inelastic hard disks of mass m and diameter d , in presence of gravity, and confined by a movable piston of mass M located on the top. By definition, the piston can only move in the direction of the gravity field. Moreover,\n\n3", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "system. The first obvious candidate to be considered is the granular temperature of the gas, defined from the second moment of the velocity distribution of the grains. Actually, this parameter is known to play in the hydrodynamic description of granular gases a role similar to the usual temperature in molecular hydrodynamics [13]. But there is another temperature parameter that is relevant for the description of the system, the one defined from the second moment of the velocity distribution of the movable piston. Both temperatures, defined from the velocity of the gas and of the piston, respectively, are the same in equilibrium systems, but they can differ strongly in granular systems, as a manifestation of the violation of energy equipartition [14]. Clarifying the relationship between the effective temperature defined from the volume fluctuations, the granular temperature, and the temperature parameter of the piston, is one of the aims of this work.\n\nThe structure of the remaining of this paper is as follows. In Sec. II, the system is described and the macroscopic steady state to be considered is characterized. Also, the parameter region to be investigated is specified. It is shown than when the mass of the piston is much larger than the mass of the grains, the volume fluctuations of the system exhibit a Gaussian distribution. The second moment of this distribution depends much stronger on the inelasticity of collisions between particles than on the elastic or inelastic character of the collisions of the particles with the piston. In Sec. III, a compressibility factor is defined for the granular gas. As usual, it is a measurement of the change in the volume of the system as a consequence of a change in the external pressure under well defined constrains. From the values of the second moment of the volume fluctuations and of the compressibility factor, an effective temperature is defined, as indicated above. This temperature turns out to be quite simply related with the temperature parameter of the piston, but its relationship with the granular temperature of the gas appears to be very intricate. Finally, Sec. IV contains a short summary of the main results in the paper and some general comments.\n\nConsider a system composed by N smooth inelastic hard disks of mass m and diameter d , in presence of gravity, and confined by a movable piston of mass M located on the top. By definition, the piston can only move in the direction of the gravity field. Moreover,\n\n## II. STEADY FLUCTUATIONS OF THE POSITION OF THE PISTON\n\n3" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9390584175200215, + "doc_id": "dc1c7d114f16d2be193466473387fc8c7793fbf93a8d752733bc47648327845c", + "edit_distance": 0.037800687285223365, + "f1_score": 0.9557894736842105, + "meteor": 0.9635049278981207, + "precision": 0.9578059071729957, + "pred_md": "## I. INTRODUCTION\n\nTorsionally unconstrained, double-stranded DNA under longitudinal tension undergoes an abrupt elongation or 'overstretching' at about 65 pN, attributed either to melting [1-3] or to the emergence of an elongated, hybridized state called S-DNA [4-8]. Recent elegant experiments [9] show directly that stretched, torsionally unconstrained molecules strand-separate or 'unpeel' near 65 pN, an observation argued to rule out the existence of S-DNA. Here we argue instead that the S-DNA picture is consistent with the observation of unpeeling during stretching. Specifically, we demonstrate that this picture predicts that at low temperatures, high salt concentrations and when large forces are applied only for short times, S-DNA may be observed, but that under the converse conditions -those probed in Ref. [9] -unpeeling will coexist with or occur in preference to S-DNA. We argue further that dynamic coexistence of S-DNA and unpeeled DNA can rationalize several recent experimental observations.\n\nThe essence of the S-DNA picture of overstretching [4-8] is the conjecture that there exists an elongated, hybridized phase of DNA distinct from B-DNA. While cartoon sketches of this picture may convey the idea that it predicts overstretching to consist of the complete conversion of the molecule from B- to S-form, thermodynamic and kinetic analysis [6, 10, 11] predicts a more complex scenario of dynamic coexistence between hybridized and unhybridized forms of DNA. The nature of this coexistence is strongly dependent upon conditions of salt and temperature low salt concentrations and high temperatures favoring unpeeling - and upon stretching dynamics.\n\nHere we use the coarse-grained, statistical mechanical model of Refs. [10, 11] to make predictions for the molecular composition of a 40 kbp fragment of nicked λ -DNA under tension, for a range of environmental conditions, assuming the existence of S-DNA. We find that the thermodynamicallyfavored composition of DNA under tension (summarized in Fig. 1) is very different from the composition that results if the molecule is stretched dynamically (Figs. 3 to 7). This difference results from the very slow emergence of unpeeled DNA [6]. We find that the instantaneous fraction of S-form DNA varies strongly with stretching force, ambient temperature and salt concentration, and observation time. At the 50 mM salt concentration and (presumably, room) temperatures considered in Ref. [9] we find S-DNA to be very short-lived, and likely unobservable in stretching experiments lasting a few seconds or more. At low temperatures and/or high salt concentrations, S-DNA can be long-lived. These predictions are in accord with those of Ref. [6], and with recent experimental evidence for the existence of S-DNA [12]. The latter work identifies two DNA overstretching 'modes': a fast mode that operates principally at low temperatures, high salt concentrations and in CG-rich sequences, and a slow mode that proliferates under the converse conditions. These observations were argued to be in accord with the predictions of the S-DNA picture advanced in Ref. [6], with the fast mode reflecting the emergence of S-DNA and the slow mode signaling unpeeling.\n\n2", + "recall": 0.9537815126050421, + "true_md": "## I. INTRODUCTION\n\nTorsionally unconstrained, double-stranded DNA under longitudinal tension undergoes an abrupt elongation or ‘overstretching’ at about 65 pN, attributed either to melting [1–3] or to the emergence of an elongated, hybridized state called S-DNA [4–8]. Recent elegant experiments [9] show directly that stretched, torsionally unconstrained molecules strand-separate or ‘unpeel’ near 65 pN, an observation argued to rule out the existence of S-DNA. Here we argue instead that the S-DNA picture is consistent with the observation of unpeeling during stretching. Specifically, we demonstrate that this picture predicts that at low temperatures, high salt concentrations and when large forces are applied only for short times, S-DNA may be observed, but that under the converse conditions – those probed in Ref. [9] – unpeeling will coexist with or occur in preference to S-DNA. We argue further that dynamic coexistence of S-DNA and unpeeled DNA can rationalize several recent experimental observations.\n\nThe essence of the S-DNA picture of overstretching [4–8] is the conjecture that there exists an elongated, hybridized phase of DNA distinct from B-DNA. While cartoon sketches of this picture may convey the idea that it predicts overstretching to consist of the complete conversion of the molecule from B- to S-form, thermodynamic and kinetic analysis [6, 10, 11] predicts a more complex scenario of dynamic coexistence between hybridized and unhybridized forms of DNA. The nature of this coexistence is strongly dependent upon conditions of salt and temperature – low salt concentrations and high temperatures favoring unpeeling – and upon stretching dynamics.\n\nHere we use the coarse-grained, statistical mechanical model of Refs. [10, 11] to make predictions for the molecular composition of a 40 kbp fragment of nicked λ -DNA under tension, for a range of environmental conditions, assuming the existence of S-DNA. We find that the thermodynamically- favored composition of DNA under tension (summarized in Fig. 1) is very different from the composition that results if the molecule is stretched dynamically (Figs. 3 to 7). This difference results from the very slow emergence of unpeeled DNA [6]. We find that the instantaneous fraction of S-form DNA varies strongly with stretching force, ambient temperature and salt concentration, and observation time. At the 50 mM salt concentration and (presumably, room) temperatures considered in Ref. [9] we find S-DNA to be very short-lived, and likely unobservable in stretching experiments lasting a few seconds or more. At low temperatures and/or high salt concentra- tions, S-DNA can be long-lived. These predictions are in accord with those of Ref. [6], and with recent experimental evidence for the existence of S-DNA [12]. The latter work identifies two DNA overstretching ‘modes’: a fast mode that operates principally at low temperatures, high salt concentrations and in CG-rich sequences, and a slow mode that proliferates under the converse conditions. These observations were argued to be in accord with the predictions of the S-DNA picture advanced in Ref. [6], with the fast mode reflecting the emergence of S-DNA and the slow mode signaling unpeeling.\n\n2" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.1933853138176172, + "doc_id": "a869c1d51e9980ced27c0c80650ff4349b2ba0910ca86e2c2e150e33adf558c8", + "edit_distance": 0.6923076923076923, + "f1_score": 0.6666666666666666, + "meteor": 0.8099489795918368, + "precision": 0.5, + "pred_md": "(a)\n\n(b)\n\nFigure 3:\n\nFigure 3:\n\n14", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Figure 3:\n\n14" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9746854210563171, + "doc_id": "f23ff4fb173c0785493613d88ff5aa804f137f2f1cb08b7c1d940b819ec4ac33", + "edit_distance": 0.03469387755102041, + "f1_score": 0.9885931558935361, + "meteor": 0.9901653634234027, + "precision": 0.9923664122137404, + "pred_md": "small holes. The competition for space results in a fine-meshed polygonal network of nanoparticle deposits. The concentration of particles is much higher at the network nodes - an effect that can not been seen within the KMC model. As the particles attract the liquid there remains some liquid on the substrate where the nanoparticles are.\n\nFig. 5 gives snapshots of the evolution of a fingering instability for a retracting dewetting front. At early times the straight front shows a rather short-wave instability, about 16 wiggles can be seen. However, they are only a transient: the finger pattern coarsens rapidly till only about 7 fingers remain. The fingering then becomes stationary, i.e., just as in the KMC, the mean finger number remains constant, although new branches are continuously created and old branches join each other. In general, the results on fingering agree well with results obtained using the KMC model [41]. From this we conclude that jamming of discrete particles is not a necessary factor for causing the instability, since the fingering is seen here in a continuum model with a diffusion constant that is independent of the nanoparticle concentration. The DDFT is better suited than the KMC for investigations of the early instability stages: they are more easy to discern without the discrete background noise of the KMC. Furthermore, one may perform a linear stability analysis of the one-dimensional undisturbed streamwise front profiles with respect to transverse perturbations (in analogy to the approach used in Refs. [19, 86, 87]).\n\n## C. Thin film hydrodynamics\n\nThe previous two sections focused on two approaches to describe the experimentally observed patterning dynamics in the ultrathin postcursor film left behind by a mesoscopic receding dewetting front. Although both the kinetic Monte Carlo model and the dynamical density functional theory are able to describe well the processes in the ultrathin film, they can not be employed to describe mesoscale hydrodynamics. A relatively simple model for the latter can be derived in the framework of a long-wave or lubrication equation [8, 63]. We will illustrate here the approach by considering an isothermal situation where the nanoparticles are not surface active, i.e., they do not act as surfactants. For a model incorporating the effects of latent heat generation and surfaceactive particles resulting in thermal and solutal Marangoni stresses, see Ref. [88]. A description of spreading particle solutions incorporating a structural disjoining pressure has also been considered [89]. For related work on particle-laden film flow on an incline see Refs. [90, 91].\n\nOne starts from the Stokes equations, together with continuity, no-slip boundary conditions at the\n\n18", + "recall": 0.9848484848484849, + "true_md": "small holes. The competition for space results in a fine-meshed polygonal network of nanoparticle deposits. The concentration of particles is much higher at the network nodes – an effect that can not been seen within the KMC model. As the particles attract the liquid there remains some liquid on the substrate where the nanoparticles are.\n\nFig. 5 gives snapshots of the evolution of a fingering instability for a retracting dewetting front. At early times the straight front shows a rather short-wave instability, about 16 wiggles can be seen. However, they are only a transient: the finger pattern coarsens rapidly till only about 7 fingers remain. The fingering then becomes stationary, i.e., just as in the KMC, the mean finger number remains constant, although new branches are continuously created and old branches join each other. In general, the results on fingering agree well with results obtained using the KMC model [41]. From this we conclude that jamming of discrete particles is not a necessary factor for causing the instability, since the fingering is seen here in a continuum model with a diffusion constant that is independent of the nanoparticle concentration. The DDFT is better suited than the KMC for investigations of the early instability stages: they are more easy to discern without the discrete background noise of the KMC. Furthermore, one may perform a linear stability analysis of the one-dimensional undisturbed streamwise front profiles with respect to transverse perturbations (in analogy to the approach used in Refs. [19, 86, 87]).\n\nThe previous two sections focused on two approaches to describe the experimentally observed patterning dynamics in the ultrathin postcursor film left behind by a mesoscopic receding dewet- ting front. Although both the kinetic Monte Carlo model and the dynamical density functional theory are able to describe well the processes in the ultrathin film, they can not be employed to describe mesoscale hydrodynamics. A relatively simple model for the latter can be derived in the framework of a long-wave or lubrication equation [8, 63]. We will illustrate here the approach by considering an isothermal situation where the nanoparticles are not surface active, i.e., they do not act as surfactants. For a model incorporating the effects of latent heat generation and surface- active particles resulting in thermal and solutal Marangoni stresses, see Ref. [88]. A description of spreading particle solutions incorporating a structural disjoining pressure has also been considered [89]. For related work on particle-laden film flow on an incline see Refs. [90, 91].\n\nOne starts from the Stokes equations, together with continuity, no-slip boundary conditions at the\n\n18\n\n## C. Thin film hydrodynamics" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9427451645362966, + "doc_id": "9195b4b583c884893b46a6193d64ceb35260e5b60baf5d2d664ce76382885c9b", + "edit_distance": 0.07514450867052024, + "f1_score": 0.9634146341463414, + "meteor": 0.961408688669507, + "precision": 0.9753086419753086, + "pred_md": "excitons [7], because there is no charge transfer between atoms and the dipole interaction is due to bound electrons. Some of the locsiton effects, first of all, wave resonances, may be viewed as analogues of other types of oscillations and waves in condensed matter, like plasmons and phonons [7], as well as low-dimensional effects, like surface plasmons [8, 9], size-related resonances in thin metal films [10] or long organic molecules [11], 'quantum carpets' [12], arrays of pendulums or electronic circuits [2], etc. Approaching from another perspective, one can view the formation of a locsiton band as a Rabi broadening of the atomic resonance due to strong interatomic interactions, which is essentially similar to the band formation in solid-state theory. However, although all waves and oscillations may be said to have something in common, locsitons form a distinct new class of phenomena because of the nonconductive, dielectric, nature of their optical response and a strong coupling between atoms, which is needed for attaining dramatic size-related resonances, magic configurations, and other interesting effects. A separate issue outside of the scope of this paper is how the structures can be fabricated or arranged. One can envision placing the atoms in a controlled way on the surface of suitable dielectric materials; recent developments in the atomic- and ion-traps technology allow for arranging atoms in vacuum as 1D arrays and 2D 'crystals' in the so called wire traps [13].\n\nOur paper is structured as follows. In Sec. II we outline our problem and present some general formulas; for more details the reader should refer to our recent paper [2]. In Sec. III we describe locsitons in infinite, unbounded, 2D lattices of resonant atoms in the case when the incident field is polarized in the lattice plane. The equations for the LF and the dispersion relations for the locsitons are first obtained in the NRA and then in the more precise NNA. In Sec. IV we discuss effects that arise in finite 2D lattices, in particular, formation of 2D patterns of the LF, due to size-related locsiton resonances, and the 'magic' cancellation of the resonant LF suppression. In Sec. V we describe 2D locsitons in the case when the incident field is normal to the lattice plane. Sec. VI summarizes main results of our paper.\n\n## II. 2D LATTICES: GENERAL MODEL\n\nLet us consider a 2D lattice of strongly resonant identical particles, which we will further call 'atoms'. We will assume that, for the incident laser frequency ω near their resonant frequency ω 0 , these atoms can be described by a two-level model with the transition dipole\n\n5", + "recall": 0.9518072289156626, + "true_md": "excitons [7], because there is no charge transfer between atoms and the dipole interaction is due to bound electrons. Some of the locsiton effects, first of all, wave resonances, may be viewed as analogues of other types of oscillations and waves in condensed matter, like plasmons and phonons [7], as well as low-dimensional effects, like surface plasmons [8, 9], size-related resonances in thin metal films [10] or long organic molecules [11], “quantum carpets” [12], arrays of pendulums or electronic circuits [2], etc. Approaching from another perspective, one can view the formation of a locsiton band as a Rabi broadening of the atomic resonance due to strong interatomic interactions, which is essentially similar to the band formation in solid-state theory. However, although all waves and oscillations may be said to have something in common, locsitons form a distinct new class of phenomena be- cause of the nonconductive, dielectric, nature of their optical response and a strong coupling between atoms, which is needed for attaining dramatic size-related resonances, magic con- figurations, and other interesting effects. A separate issue outside of the scope of this paper is how the structures can be fabricated or arranged. One can envision placing the atoms in a controlled way on the surface of suitable dielectric materials; recent developments in the atomic- and ion-traps technology allow for arranging atoms in vacuum as 1D arrays and 2D “crystals” in the so called wire traps [13].\n\nOur paper is structured as follows. In Sec. II we outline our problem and present some general formulas; for more details the reader should refer to our recent paper [2]. In Sec. III we describe locsitons in infinite, unbounded, 2D lattices of resonant atoms in the case when the incident field is polarized in the lattice plane. The equations for the LF and the dispersion relations for the locsitons are first obtained in the NRA and then in the more precise NNA. In Sec. IV we discuss effects that arise in finite 2D lattices, in particular, formation of 2D patterns of the LF, due to size-related locsiton resonances, and the “magic” cancellation of the resonant LF suppression. In Sec. V we describe 2D locsitons in the case when the incident field is normal to the lattice plane. Sec. VI summarizes main results of our paper.\n\nLet us consider a 2D lattice of strongly resonant identical particles, which we will further call “atoms”. We will assume that, for the incident laser frequency ω near their resonant frequency ω$_{0}$ , these atoms can be described by a two-level model with the transition dipole\n\n## II. 2D LATTICES: GENERAL MODEL\n\n5" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.2673688362182858, + "doc_id": "ac026963822dd014c7f3775cf01602d91d50a64a80a8e6fca6b7a22ef35fb5cd", + "edit_distance": 0.6621621621621622, + "f1_score": 0.7777777777777779, + "meteor": 0.515066146029458, + "precision": 0.84, + "pred_md": "FIG. 3: (Color online) Same as Fig. 2, but, for GV = 0 1 . GS and 0 2 . GS with GD = 1 2 . GS .\n\nFIG. 3: (Color online) Same as Fig. 2, but, for GV = 0 1 . GS and 0 2 . GS with GD = 1 2 . GS .\n\nΒ\n\n15", + "recall": 0.7241379310344828, + "true_md": "FIG. 3: (Color online) Same as Fig. 2, but, for G$_{V}$ = 0 . 1 G$_{S}$ and 0 . 2 G$_{S}$ with G$_{D}$ = 1 . 2 G$_{S}$ .\n\n15" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9781970561110989, + "doc_id": "8e02df72825fa7eb560155f86fbc547d6412ef09c4e7556b54630904068abdb3", + "edit_distance": 0.012371134020618556, + "f1_score": 0.9817351598173516, + "meteor": 0.9880357417467333, + "precision": 0.9862385321100917, + "pred_md": "## I. INTRODUCTION\n\nGranular matter in general [1, 2], and granular gases in particular [3-5], have been recently the object of intensive theoretical and experimental research. Not in the least this is because of the opportunity they offer to investigate fundamental questions of non-equilibrium physics. One of these issues is the nature and properties of non-equilibrium fluctuations and their relevance for the description of the macroscopic behavior of the system. The simplest fluctuations that can be considered are those of global properties of a system. The total energy fluctuations of an isolated granular gas, modeled as an ensemble of smooth inelastic hard spheres, have already been investigated elsewhere [6, 7]. They are specific of granular systems, and a consequence of the localized character of the energy dissipation in collisions.\n\nIn this paper, the volume fluctuations of a vibrated granular gas are studied by means of event driven simulations [8, 9]. The volume of the system changes because the wall on top of the grains is a piston that can move in the vertical direction. The equilibrium position of the piston is determined by equating its weight per unit of area with the pressure of the granular gas just below it. On the other hand, the properties of the fluctuations of the piston around that position, and therefore the volume fluctuations of the system, are not known. If the system were a molecular gas at equilibrium, therefore without being energized by vibration, the total volume fluctuations are known to be Gaussian, and with a second moment that is proportional to the temperature and the isothermal compressibility of the gas [10]. There is no reason to expect the above properties to hold in granular gases, that are inherently in non-equilibrium states. Even more, to give a meaning to them, a first point to be addressed is to specify the notion of temperature to be used. Actually, the equilibrium expression for the volume fluctuations can be used to define a temperature-like quantity, that can be experimentally measured. This is somehow an extension of the usual way of defining 'effective temperatures' from the extension to non-equilibrium states of the Fluctuation-Dissipation Theorem. A revision of these ideas in the context of granular media is given in [11]. See also [12] for a discussion of the validity of the Einstein relation in externally driven granular gases.\n\nThe emerging natural question is whether the effective temperature defined from the relationship between volume fluctuations and compressibility has some other conceptual interpretation, and if it is related to other possible sensible definitions of temperature in the\n\n2", + "recall": 0.9772727272727273, + "true_md": "## I. INTRODUCTION\n\nGranular matter in general [1, 2], and granular gases in particular [3–5], have been recently the object of intensive theoretical and experimental research. Not in the least this is be- cause of the opportunity they offer to investigate fundamental questions of non-equilibrium physics. One of these issues is the nature and properties of non-equilibrium fluctuations and their relevance for the description of the macroscopic behavior of the system. The simplest fluctuations that can be considered are those of global properties of a system. The total energy fluctuations of an isolated granular gas, modeled as an ensemble of smooth inelastic hard spheres, have already been investigated elsewhere [6, 7]. They are specific of granular systems, and a consequence of the localized character of the energy dissipation in collisions.\n\nIn this paper, the volume fluctuations of a vibrated granular gas are studied by means of event driven simulations [8, 9]. The volume of the system changes because the wall on top of the grains is a piston that can move in the vertical direction. The equilibrium position of the piston is determined by equating its weight per unit of area with the pressure of the granular gas just below it. On the other hand, the properties of the fluctuations of the piston around that position, and therefore the volume fluctuations of the system, are not known. If the system were a molecular gas at equilibrium, therefore without being energized by vibration, the total volume fluctuations are known to be Gaussian, and with a second moment that is proportional to the temperature and the isothermal compressibility of the gas [10]. There is no reason to expect the above properties to hold in granular gases, that are inherently in non-equilibrium states. Even more, to give a meaning to them, a first point to be addressed is to specify the notion of temperature to be used. Actually, the equilibrium expression for the volume fluctuations can be used to define a temperature-like quantity, that can be experimentally measured. This is somehow an extension of the usual way of defining “effective temperatures” from the extension to non-equilibrium states of the Fluctuation-Dissipation Theorem. A revision of these ideas in the context of granular media is given in [11]. See also [12] for a discussion of the validity of the Einstein relation in externally driven granular gases.\n\nThe emerging natural question is whether the effective temperature defined from the relationship between volume fluctuations and compressibility has some other conceptual interpretation, and if it is related to other possible sensible definitions of temperature in the\n\n2" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9808068149437282, + "doc_id": "f59bee9f0999d9fe8fcd2c1dfc60d1fc6a283b653527cccc8f946ba01ff9c1cf", + "edit_distance": 0.08854166666666667, + "f1_score": 0.978021978021978, + "meteor": 0.9938442141383707, + "precision": 0.967391304347826, + "pred_md": "- [1] I. Rouzina and V. A. Bloomfield, Biophysical Journal 80 , 882 (2001).\n- [2] M. C. Williams, J. R. Wenner, I. Rouzina, and V. A. Bloomfield, Biophysical Journal 80 , 874 (2001).\n- [3] M. C. Williams, J. R. Wenner, I. Rouzina, and V. A. Bloomfield, Biophysical Journal 80 , 1932 (2001).\n- [4] S. B. Smith, Y. Cui, and C. Bustamante, Science 271 , 795 (1996).\n- [5] P. Cluzel, A. Lebrun, C. Heller, R. Lavery, J. L. Viovy, D. Chatenay, and F. Caron, Science 271 , 792 (1996).\n- [6] S. Cocco, J. Yan, J. F. L'ger, D. Chatenay, and J. F. Marko, Phys. Rev. E e 70 , 11910 (2004).\n- [7] J. L' eger, G. Romano, A. Sarkar, J. Robert, L. Bourdieu, D. Chatenay, and J. Marko, Phys. Rev. Lett. 83 , 1066 (1999).\n- [8] C. Storm and P. Nelson, Phys. Rev. E 67 , 51906 (2003).\n- [9] J. van Mameren, P. Gross, G. Farge, P. Hooijman, M. Modesti, M. Falkenberg, G. J. L. Wuite, and E. J. G. Peterman, Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. 106 , 18231 (2009).\n- [10] S. Whitelam, S. Pronk, and P. L. Geissler, Biophysical Journal 94 , 2452 (2008).\n- [11] S. Whitelam, S. Pronk, and P. L. Geissler, The Journal of Chemical Physics 129 , 205101 (2008).\n- [12] H. Fu, H. Chen, J. F. Marko, and J. Yan, Nucleic Acids Research (2010).\n- [13] J. SantaLucia Jr, Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences 95 , 1460 (1998).\n- [14] C. Storm and P. Nelson, Phys. Rev. E 67 , 51906 (2003).\n- [15] C. P. Calderon, W. H. Chen, K. J. Lin, N. C. Harris, and C. H. Kiang, Journal of Physics: Condensed Matter 21 , 034114 (2009).\n- [16] H. Clausen-Schaumann, M. Rief, C. Tolksdorf, and H. E. Gaub, Biophysical Journal 78 , 1997 (2000).\n- [17] H. Mao, J. R. Arias-Gonzalez, S. B. Smith, I. Tinoco, and C. Bustamante, Biophysical Journal 89 , 1308 (2005).\n- [18] M. Rief, H. Clausen-Schaumann, and H. E. Gaub, Nature Structural Biology 6 , 346 (1999).\n- [19] B. Luan and A. Aksimentiev, Phys. Rev. Lett. 101 , 118101 (2008).\n- [20] H. Li and T. Gisler, The European Physical Journal E: Soft Matter and Biological Physics pp. 1-8 (2009).\n\n7", + "recall": 0.9888888888888889, + "true_md": "- [1] I. Rouzina and V. A. Bloomfield, Biophysical Journal 80 , 882 (2001).\n\n- [2] M. C. Williams, J. R. Wenner, I. Rouzina, and V. A. Bloomfield, Biophysical Journal 80 , 874 (2001).\n\n- [3] M. C. Williams, J. R. Wenner, I. Rouzina, and V. A. Bloomfield, Biophysical Journal 80 , 1932 (2001).\n\n- [4] S. B. Smith, Y. Cui, and C. Bustamante, Science 271 , 795 (1996).\n\n- [6] S. Cocco, J. Yan, J. F. L´eger, D. Chatenay, and J. F. Marko, Phys. Rev. E 70 , 11910 (2004).\n\n- [5] P. Cluzel, A. Lebrun, C. Heller, R. Lavery, J. L. Viovy, D. Chatenay, and F. Caron, Science 271 , 792 (1996).\n\n- [7] J. L´eger, G. Romano, A. Sarkar, J. Robert, L. Bourdieu, D. Chatenay, and J. Marko, Phys. Rev. Lett. 83 , 1066 (1999).\n\n- [8] C. Storm and P. Nelson, Phys. Rev. E 67 , 51906 (2003).\n\n- [9] J. van Mameren, P. Gross, G. Farge, P. Hooijman, M. Modesti, M. Falkenberg, G. J. L. Wuite, and E. J. G. Peterman, Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. 106 , 18231 (2009).\n\n- [10] S. Whitelam, S. Pronk, and P. L. Geissler, Biophysical Journal 94 , 2452 (2008).\n\n- [11] S. Whitelam, S. Pronk, and P. L. Geissler, The Journal of Chemical Physics 129 , 205101 (2008).\n\n- [12] H. Fu, H. Chen, J. F. Marko, and J. Yan, Nucleic Acids Research (2010).\n\n- [13] J. SantaLucia Jr, Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences 95 , 1460 (1998).\n\n- [14] C. Storm and P. Nelson, Phys. Rev. E 67 , 51906 (2003).\n\n- [15] C. P. Calderon, W. H. Chen, K. J. Lin, N. C. Harris, and C. H. Kiang, Journal of Physics: Condensed Matter 21 , 034114 (2009).\n\n- [16] H. Clausen-Schaumann, M. Rief, C. Tolksdorf, and H. E. Gaub, Biophysical Journal 78 , 1997 (2000).\n\n- [17] H. Mao, J. R. Arias-Gonzalez, S. B. Smith, I. Tinoco, and C. Bustamante, Biophysical Journal 89 , 1308 (2005).\n\n- [18] M. Rief, H. Clausen-Schaumann, and H. E. Gaub, Nature Structural Biology 6 , 346 (1999).\n\n- [19] B. Luan and A. Aksimentiev, Phys. Rev. Lett. 101 , 118101 (2008).\n\n- [20] H. Li and T. Gisler, The European Physical Journal E: Soft Matter and Biological Physics pp. 1–8 (2009).\n\n7" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9628896864839159, + "doc_id": "8d3d97e8ce4031fcf255db84a58edec04482ea3962abf1ae96427aa20e4935f8", + "edit_distance": 0.02576112412177986, + "f1_score": 0.9705882352941176, + "meteor": 0.9800669046473106, + "precision": 0.9880239520958084, + "pred_md": "using di ff erent values of coupling strengths for the scalar diquark and isoscaler vector terms. The EOS at intermediate densities are obtained using a Maxwell construction.\n\nWe find that the stability of the non-rotating hybrid stars is very much sensitive to the EOSs for the colour superconducting quark matter and almost independent of the choice for the EOS for the nuclear matter. The stable configurations of the hybrid stars exist only for the large enough value for the scalar diquark coupling strength. Though, the stability of the hybrid stars are not sensitive to the choice of the EOSs for the nuclear matter, but, compositions of the hybrid stars are at variance for these EOSs. If the EOS for the nuclear matter is sti ff , core of the hybrid star is composed of colour superconducting quark matter which is either in the 2SC or the CFL phase. In the later case, CFL quark matter core is surrounded by a thin layer of the 2SC quark matter and the outer layer composed of nuclear matter .\n\nThe stability of the rotating hybrid star is sensitive to the choice of the EOS for the nuclear matter as well as that for the colour superconducting quark matter. In particular, we find that the values of the critical rotation frequency vary from about 350 Hz to 1275 Hz depending upon the choice of the EOSs for the nuclear matter and the colour superconducting quark matter. Our results also indicate that the EOSs for the colour superconducting quark matter obtained within the NJL model may be adjusted for the various nuclear matter EOSs in such a way that it yields (a) the maximum mass in the non-rotating limit larger than 1 44 . M /circledot which is the most accurately measured value for the maximum mass of a compact star and (b) the maximum allowed rotation frequency is larger than the current observational limit of 716 Hz.\n\nFinally, we would like to mention that our present study can be extended in several ways. The quark matter in the crystalline color superconducting phase, expected to appear at the intermediate densities, should also be considered. One might also include the contributions from the hyperons which would soften the hadronic EOS. The phase transition from hadron to the quark matter should proceed via mixed phase which can be constructed using the Gibbs conditions.\n\n9", + "recall": 0.953757225433526, + "true_md": "using di ff erent values of coupling strengths for the scalar diquark and isoscaler vector terms. The EOS at intermediate densities are obtained using a Maxwell construction.\n\nWe find that the stability of the non-rotating hybrid stars isvery much sensitive to the EOSs for the colour superconducting quark matter and almost independent of the choice for the EOS for the nuclear matter. The stable configurations of the hybrid s tars exist only for the large enough value for the scalar diquark coupling strength. Though, the stability of the hybrid stars are not sensitive to the choice of the EOSs for the nuclear matter, but, compositions of the hybrid stars are at variance for these EOSs. If the EOS for the nuclear matter is sti ff , core of the hybrid star is composed of colour superconducting quark matter which is either in the 2SC or the CFL phase. In the later case, CFL quark matter core is surrounded by a thin layer of the 2SC quark matter and the outer layer composed of nuclear matter .\n\nThe stability of the rotating hybrid star is sensitive to the choice of the EOS for the nuclear matter as well as that for the colour superconducting quark matter. In particular, we find that the values of the critical rotation frequency vary from about 350 Hz to 1275 Hz depending upon the choice of the EOSs for the nuclear matter and the colour superconducting quark matter. Our results also indicate that the EOSs for the colour superconducting quark matter obtained within the NJL model may be adjusted for the various nuclear matter EOSs in such a way that it yields (a) the maximum mass in the non-rotating limit larger than 1 . 44 $^{M}$⊙ which is the most accurately measured value for the maximum mass of a compact star and (b) the maximum allowed rotation frequency is larger than the current observational limit of 716 Hz.\n\nFinally, we would like to mention that our present study can be extended in several ways. The quark matter in the crystalline color superconducting phase, expected to appear at the intermediate densities, should also be considered. One might also include the contributions from the hyperons which would soften the hadronic EOS. The phase transition from hadron to the quark matter should proceed via mixed phase which can be constructed using the Gibbs conditions.\n\n9" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8866619559803984, + "doc_id": "cc84e654a00fcc088d7d597de8702c2c05267919630ddbf5ea88b25d6b9e4f94", + "edit_distance": 0.10472972972972973, + "f1_score": 0.9903846153846154, + "meteor": 0.938110406155741, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "total error budgets for both quantities are given at the end of the section in Table VIII.\n\n## A. Chiral extrapolation fit ansatz\n\nAs described in the previous section, we extrapolate our data to the physical quark masses using a linear fit matched onto NLO SU (2) HM χ PT at the value of our lightest data point. The SU (2) expressions are derived using the symmetries of the lattice theory; therefore they contain the correct dependence of the B -meson decay constants and mixing matrix elements on the quark mass and lattice spacing through NLO when the quark masses are sufficiently light. Given the large light-quark masses used in our simulations, however, it may be that the SU (2) chiral logarithms do not become important until the pion mass is even lighter than the range of our data. Thus we vary the location of the matching point as one way to estimate the systematic uncertainty due to the chiral extrapolation. In addition, because we use NLO SU (2) HM χ PT to obtain our central value, we must estimate the systematic uncertainty due to the truncation of higher-orders in HM χ PT. We do this in several ways: (i) by explicitly adding higher-order terms to the linear plus SU (2) HM χ PT fit function, (ii) by matching the linear fit onto the NLO SU (3) HM χ PT expressions, and (iii) by varying the value of the low-energy constant f in the coefficient of the NLO chiral logarithms.\n\nBecause we do not know a priori at what mass the SU (2) chiral logarithms become important, we vary the point at which we match the linear fit onto NLO SU (2) HM χ PT in order to estimate the systematic uncertainty due to the choice of matching point. At the matching point used in the preferred fit, the ratio of the light up-down quark mass to the strange valence-quark mass is am /am l s ≈ 0 28 and to the strange sea quark mass is . am /am l h = 0 25. Since both of these quantities are small, we expect the strange quark can . be integrated out of the chiral effective theory and that SU (2) HM χ PT is applicable in this region. As the light-quark mass decreases, SU (2) becomes an even better approximation. At light-quark masses above this point, however, the ratios am /am l s and am /am l h are no longer small expansion parameters, and SU (2) will eventually cease to apply. Therefore, when we estimate the systematic error due to the choice of matching point, we only consider extrapolations in which the matching point is closer to the chiral limit than in the preferred fit. The limiting case is where the matching point is at the chiral limit, which corresponds to a purely linear extrapolation. Although the choice of a linear fit is not based on effective\n\n31", + "recall": 0.9809523809523809, + "true_md": "total error budgets for both quantities are given at the end of the section in Table VIII.\n\nAs described in the previous section, we extrapolate our data to the physical quark masses using a linear fit matched onto NLO SU (2) HM χ PT at the value of our lightest data point. The SU (2) expressions are derived using the symmetries of the lattice theory; therefore they contain the correct dependence of the B -meson decay constants and mixing matrix elements on the quark mass and lattice spacing through NLO when the quark masses are sufficiently light. Given the large light-quark masses used in our simulations, however, it may be that the SU (2) chiral logarithms do not become important until the pion mass is even lighter than the range of our data. Thus we vary the location of the matching point as one way to estimate the systematic uncertainty due to the chiral extrapolation. In addition, because we use NLO SU (2) HM χ PT to obtain our central value, we must estimate the systematic uncertainty due to the truncation of higher-orders in HM χ PT. We do this in several ways: (i) by explicitly adding higher-order terms to the linear plus SU (2) HM χ PT fit function, (ii) by matching the linear fit onto the NLO SU (3) HM χ PT expressions, and (iii) by varying the value of the low-energy constant f in the coefficient of the NLO chiral logarithms.\n\nBecause we do not know a priori at what mass the SU (2) chiral logarithms become important, we vary the point at which we match the linear fit onto NLO SU (2) HM χ PT in order to estimate the systematic uncertainty due to the choice of matching point. At the matching point used in the preferred fit, the ratio of the light up-down quark mass to the strange valence-quark mass is am$_{l}$/am$_{s}$ ≈ 0 . 28 and to the strange sea quark mass is am$_{l}$/am$_{h}$ = 0 . 25. Since both of these quantities are small, we expect the strange quark can be integrated out of the chiral effective theory and that SU (2) HM χ PT is applicable in this region. As the light-quark mass decreases, SU (2) becomes an even better approximation. At light-quark masses above this point, however, the ratios am$_{l}$/am$_{s}$ and am$_{l}$/am$_{h}$ are no longer small expansion parameters, and SU (2) will eventually cease to apply. Therefore, when we estimate the systematic error due to the choice of matching point, we only consider extrapolations in which the matching point is closer to the chiral limit than in the preferred fit. The limiting case is where the matching point is at the chiral limit, which corresponds to a purely linear extrapolation. Although the choice of a linear fit is not based on effective\n\n31\n\n## A. Chiral extrapolation fit ansatz" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6949974024762097, + "doc_id": "991ce7d227bfc6223173c5ad485657755399168849d3dab40cd825b6d17bf1ef", + "edit_distance": 0.48158640226628896, + "f1_score": 0.9762711864406779, + "meteor": 0.7996097085339371, + "precision": 0.993103448275862, + "pred_md": "arXiv:1001.2207v2 [astro-ph.CO] 13 Apr 2010\n\n## Probing the dynamical behavior of dark energy\n\nRong-Gen Cai, ∗ Qiping Su, † and Hong-Bo Zhang ‡ Key Laboratory of Frontiers in Theoretical Physics, Institute of Theoretical Physics, Chinese Academy of Sciences, P.O. Box 2735, Beijing 100190, China\n\n## Abstract\n\nWe investigate dynamical behavior of the equation of state of dark energy w de by employing the linear-spline method in the region of low redshifts from observational data (SnIa, BAO, CMB and 12 H z ( ) data). The redshift is binned and w de is approximated by a linear expansion of redshift in each bin. We leave the divided points of redshift bins as free parameters of the model, the best-fitted values of divided points will represent the turning positions of w de where w de changes its evolving direction significantly (if there exist such turnings in our considered region). These turning points are natural divided points of redshift bins, and w de between two nearby divided points can be well approximated by a linear expansion of redshift. We find two turning points of w de in z ∈ (0 1 8) , . and one turning point in z ∈ (0 0 9), , . and w de ( z ) could be oscillating around w = -1. Moreover, we find that there is a 2 σ deviation of w de from -1 around z = 0 9 in both . correlated and uncorrelated estimates.\n\n∗ Electronic address: cairg@itp.ac.cn\n\n† Electronic address: sqp@itp.ac.cn\n\n‡ Electronic address: hbzhang@itp.ac.cn\n\n1", + "recall": 0.96, + "true_md": "# Probing the dynamical behavior of dark energy\n\nWe investigate dynamical behavior of the equation of state of dark energy w$_{de}$ by employing the linear-spline method in the region of low redshifts from observational data (SnIa, BAO, CMB and 12 H ( z ) data). The redshift is binned and w$_{de}$ is approximated by a linear expansion of redshift in each bin. We leave the divided points of redshift bins as free parameters of the model, the best-fitted values of divided points will represent the turning positions of w$_{de}$ where w$_{de}$ changes its evolving direction significantly (if there exist such turnings in our considered region). These turning points are natural divided points of redshift bins, and w$_{de}$ between two nearby divided points can be well approximated by a linear expansion of redshift. We find two turning points of w$_{de}$ in z ∈ (0 , 1 . 8) and one turning point in z ∈ (0 , 0 . 9), and w$_{de}$ ( z ) could be oscillating around w = − 1. Moreover, we find that there is a 2 σ deviation of w$_{de}$ from − 1 around z = 0 . 9 in both correlated and uncorrelated estimates.\n\n$^{∗}$Electronic address: cairg@itp.ac.cn\n\n$^{†}$Electronic address: sqp@itp.ac.cn\n\n$^{‡}$Electronic address: hbzhang@itp.ac.cn\n\n1\n\narXiv:1001.2207v2 [astro-ph.CO] 13 Apr 2010\n\n## Abstract\n\nRong-Gen Cai, ∗ Qiping Su, † and Hong-Bo Zhang ‡\n\nKey Laboratory of Frontiers in Theoretical Physics, Institute of Theoretical Physics, Chinese Academy of Sciences, P.O. Box 2735, Beijing 100190, China" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5642499372778393, + "doc_id": "e88420933487a4647a6d0b6c4b0092edcc1b5eef6d83581471b91d1d843a136d", + "edit_distance": 0.5392670157068062, + "f1_score": 0.8218181818181818, + "meteor": 0.5999167042321404, + "precision": 0.773972602739726, + "pred_md": "13\n\nf 3 Rn must be constant; then, using also eq. (31) we get:\n\n\n\nwhere f 0 is a constant. The massless mode has to be identified with the photon ⇒ N (0) µ ≡ A µ ; since it is the only massless mode in the spectrum we have that the symmetry of the vacuum is, correctly, just U (1) e.m. . The 'charged' and 'neutral' labels we have given to the three sectors refer to their transformation properties with respect to this unbroken symmetry.\n\nAs in the case of the left charged sector, the BCs at y = πR in this case explicitly contain the mass of the n th mode, so that again the basis wave-functions f 3 Ln and f 3 Rn have nonstandard orthogonality properties. The correct relations are:\n\n\n\nwhere ( · , · ) ˜ g ' is defined in a way analogous to ( · , · ) ˜ g (eq. (20)). Completeness relations similar to that in eq. (21) also hold. Note that it is not possible to set both N L n and N R n to 1. In fact, since they obey the same differential equation (29) and the same BC at y = 0 (30), f 3 Ln and f 3 Rn are proportional to each other:\n\n\n\nand the constants K n are fixed by the BCs at y = πR (31). To get, also in this case, canonically normalized kinetic terms we have to set:\n\n\n\nthe ratio ( N L n ) / N ( R n ) will be fixed by the value of K n and by eq. (34). In particular, for the massless mode it is easy to get\n\n", + "recall": 0.875968992248062, + "true_md": "13\n\nf 3 Rn must be constant; then, using also eq. (31) we get:\n\n$$f 3 L 0 = f 3 R 0 ≡ f$_{0}$, (33)$$\n\nwhere f$_{0}$ is a constant. The massless mode has to be identified with the photon ⇒ N (0) µ ≡ A$_{µ}$ ; since it is the only massless mode in the spectrum we have that the symmetry of the vacuum is, correctly, just U (1)$_{e.m.}$. The “charged” and “neutral” labels we have given to the three sectors refer to their transformation properties with respect to this unbroken symmetry.\n\nAs in the case of the left charged sector, the BCs at y = πR in this case explicitly contain the mass of the n th mode, so that again the basis wave-functions f 3 Ln and f 3 Rn have nonstandard orthogonality properties. The correct relations are:\n\n$$f 3 Ln = K$_{n}$f 3 $_{Rn}$, (35)$$\n\n$$( N L $_{n}$) 2 + ( N R $_{m}$) 2 = 1; (36)$$\n\nand the constants K$_{n}$ are fixed by the BCs at y = πR (31). To get, also in this case, canonically normalized kinetic terms we have to set:\n\nthe ratio ( N L $_{n}$) / ( N R n ) will be fixed by the value of K$_{n}$ and by eq. (34). In particular, for the massless mode it is easy to get\n\n$$1 f 2 0 = 2 πR g 2 5 + 1 ˜ g 2 + 1 ˜ g ′ $_{2}$. (37)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4775984698020309, + "doc_id": "2b5abce0421a2415adb6823774f66407393ca6102943231c2bd7a3012b430120", + "edit_distance": 0.4472049689440994, + "f1_score": 0.9162790697674418, + "meteor": 0.5953529087591303, + "precision": 0.9656862745098039, + "pred_md": "For the HYP-smeared wall-source data, however, we must first extract the bag parameter B B q\n\n\n\nthen we obtain the matrix element via\n\n\n\nThe derivation Eq. (72) is more complex than that of either Eq. (63) or Eq. (73) because the box sources in the amplitudes appearing in both the numerator and denominator are not translationally invariant and will create B -meson states carrying a variety of spatial momenta. As explained in greater detail in App. C, these states are degenerate with the lowest energy B -meson state and so cannot be suppressed by simply going to large Euclidean time separations. Instead, Eq. (72) is derived in App. C using the local conservation of heavyquark number, a property special to the static approximation. Finally, for both the APE and HYP-smeared data, we compute the renormalized matrix element through O ( α s ),\n\n\n\nusing the perturbative matching factors given in Table III.\n\nWe compute the ratio of mixing matrix elements in the same manner as we compute the ratio of decay constants in the previous subsection. For example, Fig. 3 shows the determination of the numerator M ren B s and the denominator M ren B l on the am l = 0 02 ensemble . for the APE (left-hand plot) and HYP data sets (right-hand plot). We compute the values of the plateaux using time-slices 8-12 because we do not observe excited-state contamination in this region. Table VI shows the results for the SU (3)-breaking ratios √ M ren B s /M ren B l on the three sea quark ensembles; the corresponding plateau plots are shown in Fig. 4.\n\n## V. CHIRAL EXTRAPOLATION\n\nWe extrapolate our results for the ratio of the decay constants and for the ratio of mixing matrix elements to the physical point using a phenomenologically-motivated function based on next-to-leading order partially quenched SU (2) heavy-light meson chiral perturbation theory. In SU (2) χ PT, the pesudoscalar mesons containing strange quarks (i.e. kaons and\n\n23", + "recall": 0.8716814159292036, + "true_md": "For the HYP-smeared wall-source data, however, we must first extract the bag parameter B$_{B}$$\\_{q}$\n\nthen we obtain the matrix element via\n\nThe derivation Eq. (72) is more complex than that of either Eq. (63) or Eq. (73) because the box sources in the amplitudes appearing in both the numerator and denominator are not translationally invariant and will create B -meson states carrying a variety of spatial momenta. As explained in greater detail in App. C, these states are degenerate with the lowest energy B -meson state and so cannot be suppressed by simply going to large Euclidean time separations. Instead, Eq. (72) is derived in App. C using the local conservation of heavy- quark number, a property special to the static approximation. Finally, for both the APE and HYP-smeared data, we compute the renormalized matrix element through O ( α$_{s}$ ),\n\nusing the perturbative matching factors given in Table III.\n\nWe compute the ratio of mixing matrix elements in the same manner as we compute the ratio of decay constants in the previous subsection. For example, Fig. 3 shows the determination of the numerator M ren B$_{s}$ and the denominator M ren B$_{l}$ on the am$_{l}$ = 0 . 02 ensemble for the APE (left-hand plot) and HYP data sets (right-hand plot). We compute the values of the plateaux using time-slices 8–12 because we do not observe excited-state contamination in this region. Table VI shows the results for the SU (3)-breaking ratios √ M ren B$_{s}$ /M ren B$_{l}$ on the three sea quark ensembles; the corresponding plateau plots are shown in Fig. 4.\n\nWe extrapolate our results for the ratio of the decay constants and for the ratio of mixing matrix elements to the physical point using a phenomenologically-motivated function based on next-to-leading order partially quenched SU (2) heavy-light meson chiral perturbation theory. In SU (2) χ PT, the pesudoscalar mesons containing strange quarks (i.e. kaons and\n\n23\n\n## V. CHIRAL EXTRAPOLATION\n\n$$M ren B$_{q}$ = Z$_{V A}$M lat V V + AA + Z$_{SP}$M lat SS + $_{PP}$, (75)$$\n\n$$M$_{O}$$_{i}$ = 8 3 B$_{O}$$_{i}$ (Φ ren $_{B$_{q}$}$) $^{2}$. (74)$$\n\n$$B$_{O}$$_{i}$ = lim t$_{f}$ ≫ t ≫ t$_{0}$ 3 8 L 3 C W $_{O$_{i}$}$( t$_{f}$,t,t$_{0}$ ) C $^{LW}$( t,t$_{f}$ ) C $^{LW}$( t,t$_{0}$ ) , (73)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9782422898718028, + "doc_id": "4f584b73fc2d1e71756d20482cfe128395cc063f8ac0dd1fb77fdc628353c6ac", + "edit_distance": 0.012578616352201259, + "f1_score": 0.9936575052854123, + "meteor": 0.988042491614314, + "precision": 0.9957627118644068, + "pred_md": "so that a direct comparison with the profile of the absorption spectrum becomes feasible. The normal modes were calculated on the 6-31G/MP2 level and the coupling to the optical transition on the CI/SD level. Using these couplings and the displaced harmonic oscillator model the lineshape was calculated as the Fourier transformed time correlation function. In the low frequency region the largest vibronic couplings are found for normal modes at 40 and 46 cm -1 which contribute significantly to the broadening of the absorption band. Another important contribution from modes around 1500 cm -1 which are also known from Raman spectra is the origin of the observed vibrational progression. Further modes between 50 and 1400 cm -1 form a rather dense continuum of coupling states. The simulated spectrum (fig. 2) largely resembles the experimental absorption profile. The width of the simulated bands is somewhat too small and the intensity of the prominent stretching modes is slightly overestimated. This could be possibly further improved by taking frequency changes and mode coupling into account.\n\nThe MD simulations were started from several plausible dimer structures. First the PIC molecules were kept fixed and the solvent was equilibrated for 50 psec. Then the restraints were removed and the system was simulated for another 50 psec. The distance and orientation of the two PIC molecules were analyzed to identify periods of relative stability.\n\nStarting from a sandwich structure, a rather stable structure evolved within 10 psec (fig.3a). It is not symmetric but still there is almost no splitting of the calculated site energies (Table 2) which show rapid fluctuations with components down to 20fsec. Such fast fluctations are well known from experimental and theoretical work on the dynamics of dephasing and solvation in molecular liquids 19 . They have been attributed to the inertial motion of the solvent molecules, which show up as the Gaussian shaped rapid initial decay of the solvation time correlation function 20,21 . In our simulations the orientational time correlation function of the water molecules can be described by a Gaussian with a correlation time of 60 fs at short times. The time correlation of the electrostatic potential decays faster. The initial Gaussian decay with 20 fs is very similar to that of the correlation function of the transition energies. Probably collective librational motions contribute more efficiently to the electronic dephasing than the motion of the individual molecules. 19,22\n\nThe center of the site energies is shifted by 0.06 eV to lower energies as compared to a monomer in vacuum and the variance of the site energies is comparable to that of a monomer. The two transition dipoles are almost parallel and the lower transition carries\n\n5", + "recall": 0.9915611814345991, + "true_md": "so that a direct comparison with the profile of the absorption spectrum becomes feasible. The normal modes were calculated on the 6-31G/MP2 level and the coupling to the optical transition on the CI/SD level. Using these couplings and the displaced harmonic oscillator model the lineshape was calculated as the Fourier transformed time correlation function. In the low frequency region the largest vibronic couplings are found for normal modes at 40 and 46 cm − 1 which contribute significantly to the broadening of the absorption band. Another important contribution from modes around 1500 cm − 1 which are also known from Raman spectra is the origin of the observed vibrational progression. Further modes between 50 and 1400 cm − 1 form a rather dense continuum of coupling states. The simulated spectrum (fig. 2) largely resembles the experimental absorption profile. The width of the simulated bands is somewhat too small and the intensity of the prominent stretching modes is slightly overestimated. This could be possibly further improved by taking frequency changes and mode coupling into account.\n\nThe MD simulations were started from several plausible dimer structures. First the PIC molecules were kept fixed and the solvent was equilibrated for 50 psec. Then the restraints were removed and the system was simulated for another 50 psec. The distance and orientation of the two PIC molecules were analyzed to identify periods of relative stability.\n\nStarting from a sandwich structure, a rather stable structure evolved within 10 psec (fig.3a). It is not symmetric but still there is almost no splitting of the calculated site energies (Table 2) which show rapid fluctuations with components down to 20fsec. Such fast fluctations are well known from experimental and theoretical work on the dynamics of dephasing and solvation in molecular liquids 19 . They have been attributed to the inertial motion of the solvent molecules, which show up as the Gaussian shaped rapid initial decay of the solvation time correlation function 20,21 . In our simulations the orientational time correlation function of the water molecules can be described by a Gaussian with a correlation time of 60 fs at short times. The time correlation of the electrostatic potential decays faster. The initial Gaussian decay with 20 fs is very similar to that of the correlation function of the transition energies. Probably collective librational motions contribute more efficiently to the electronic dephasing than the motion of the individual molecules. 19,22\n\nThe center of the site energies is shifted by 0.06 eV to lower energies as compared to a monomer in vacuum and the variance of the site energies is comparable to that of a monomer. The two transition dipoles are almost parallel and the lower transition carries\n\n5" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4465202125594164, + "doc_id": "f0f528624911c3cb0846b3691a40c9d3a336ace306d9f6b139234832a4c26881", + "edit_distance": 0.5673758865248227, + "f1_score": 0.9649122807017544, + "meteor": 0.7755844696440012, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "FIG. 6: (Color online) Plots for the mass verses circumferential equatorial radius R eq at fixed values of the rotational frequency as indicated along each of the curves (in Hz). The black solid lines represent the results obtained at the critical frequencies f crit . For f > f crit , the stable configurations of hybrid star do not exist.\n\nFIG. 6: (Color online) Plots for the mass verses circumferential equatorial radius R eq at fixed values of the rotational frequency as indicated along each of the curves (in Hz). The black solid lines represent the results obtained at the critical frequencies f crit . For f > f crit , the stable configurations of hybrid star do not exist.\n\n18", + "recall": 0.9322033898305084, + "true_md": "FIG. 6: (Color online) Plots for the mass verses circumferential equatorial radius R$_{eq}$ at fixed values of the rotational frequency as indicated along each of the curves (in Hz). The black solid lines represent the results obtained at the critical frequencies f$_{crit}$ . For f > f$_{crit}$ , the stable configurations of hybrid star do not exist.\n\n18" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7559598684355805, + "doc_id": "9c435892bd45bd1ebaba7be37fca05527f3ee68252ec3415f2d15b224398cb80", + "edit_distance": 0.26857142857142857, + "f1_score": 0.9521410579345089, + "meteor": 0.8150046138607784, + "precision": 0.9742268041237113, + "pred_md": "25\n\n(we are integrating out heavy modes and assuming they have no corrections to the truncated theory), and we keep N finite. Still, this is a puzzle that we can not resolve satisfactorily yet. Further study is required to understand this issue better.\n\nWith our data, we can find a fit to the exponent and see what happens. We can do the following analysis. We can assume that there is a limit and a scaling exponent that describes how close we are to the limit, by the following argument\n\n\n\nThen, if we take the following differences\n\n\n\nwe can make a fit for α and check the exponent appearing in the corrections. The data is not very illuminating. We find values as large as α ∼ 0 7 for low values of . k up to k = 6, and then it decreases towards α ∼ 0 1 for . k = 13. Again, we should not give too much meaning to these numbers for the large values of k if the corresponding correlators are not factorized yet.\n\nSimilarly, the standard-deviation fluctuations should have some scaling pattern\n\n\n\nIf we plot the data sample to the best fit for β we get the results in figure 8. The results are roughly consistent with β ∼ 1, which is the exponent that the planar counting would suggest, but it is unclear how this data should be used, seeing as we might not yet have converged to large N sufficiently.\n\nAgain, rough consistency with β ∼ 1 is not the same as knowing that β = 1. A much larger data set from more simulations would be able to verify this hypothesis. It would also require going to much large values of N (hopefully stepping up to a factor of 100 in N might be enough).\n\nIf the planar counting does not work, it could be because we ignored some degrees of freedom that contribute to the limit, and that these make the full system behave as is expected. However, we should expect that the corrections induced by integrating out heavy modes involve their masses, which are expressed as powers of the large N coupling constant λ = g N 2 [5, 18]. We do not have a clear understanding on how the planar counting would", + "recall": 0.9310344827586207, + "true_md": "25\n\n$$S$_{N}$ ≃ S$_{∞}$ + Δ S N α + . . . (24)$$\n\n$$S$_{N}$ − S$_{2}$$_{N}$ = (1 − 2 − $^{α}$) δS N α (25)$$\n\n$$δS$_{N}$ ≃ A$_{N}$ N β (26)$$\n\n(we are integrating out heavy modes and assuming they have no corrections to the truncated theory), and we keep N finite. Still, this is a puzzle that we can not resolve satisfactorily yet. Further study is required to understand this issue better.\n\nWith our data, we can find a fit to the exponent and see what happens. We can do the following analysis. We can assume that there is a limit and a scaling exponent that describes how close we are to the limit, by the following argument\n\nThen, if we take the following differences\n\nSimilarly, the standard-deviation fluctuations should have some scaling pattern\n\nwe can make a fit for α and check the exponent appearing in the corrections. The data is not very illuminating. We find values as large as α ∼ 0 . 7 for low values of k up to k = 6, and then it decreases towards α ∼ 0 . 1 for k = 13. Again, we should not give too much meaning to these numbers for the large values of k if the corresponding correlators are not factorized yet.\n\nIf we plot the data sample to the best fit for β we get the results in figure 8. The results are roughly consistent with β ∼ 1, which is the exponent that the planar counting would suggest, but it is unclear how this data should be used, seeing as we might not yet have converged to large N sufficiently.\n\nAgain, rough consistency with β ∼ 1 is not the same as knowing that β = 1. A much larger data set from more simulations would be able to verify this hypothesis. It would also require going to much large values of N (hopefully stepping up to a factor of 100 in N might be enough).\n\nIf the planar counting does not work, it could be because we ignored some degrees of freedom that contribute to the limit, and that these make the full system behave as is expected. However, we should expect that the corrections induced by integrating out heavy modes involve their masses, which are expressed as powers of the large N coupling constant λ = g $^{2}$N [5, 18]. We do not have a clear understanding on how the planar counting would" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.25611290022457267, + "doc_id": "acd8d28289e4389839dcb802f25ff134782beb1cd1d99467f4ea9f362ee2d47e", + "edit_distance": 0.7506172839506173, + "f1_score": 0.8223350253807106, + "meteor": 0.34423550231674066, + "precision": 0.9310344827586207, + "pred_md": "which has the solution\n\nFIG. 2: A schematic diagram describing the relation between the root functions ξ n , the stationary states Ψ n , and the ladder operators a n , a † n .\n\nFIG. 2: A schematic diagram describing the relation between the root functions ξ n , the stationary states Ψ n , and the ladder operators a n , a † n .\n\nWe are now ready to find the ladder operators and eigenenergies for our problem. First, we consider Eq. (6) for n = 1\n\n\n\nFrom the form of the Hamiltonian (2) and Eq. (11) we can rewrite Eq. (12) as\n\n\n\nor equivalently\n\n\n\nNote that in contrast to Eq. (2), Eq. (14) is a nonlinear first-order differential equation.\n\nTo solve Eq. (14), we consider the left-hand and right-hand sides of the delta function potential separately. For these regions, Eq. (14) reduces to\n\n\n\n/negationslash\n\n\n\n5", + "recall": 0.7363636363636363, + "true_md": "FIG. 2: A schematic diagram describing the relation between the root functions ξ$_{n}$ , the stationary states Ψ$_{n}$, and the ladder operators a$_{n}$ , $_{a}$† $_{n}$.\n\nWe are now ready to find the ladder operators and eigenenergies for our problem. First, we consider Eq. (6) for n = 1\n\nFrom the form of the Hamiltonian (2) and Eq. (11) we can rewrite Eq. (12) as\n\nor equivalently\n\nNote that in contrast to Eq. (2), Eq. (14) is a nonlinear first-order differential equation.\n\nTo solve Eq. (14), we consider the left-hand and right-hand sides of the delta function potential separately. For these regions, Eq. (14) reduces to\n\nwhich has the solution\n\n5\n\n$$f$_{1}$ ( x ) = √ 2 mE$_{1}$ $_{cot[}$√$_{2}$$_{mE}$$_{1}$ ¯ h ( x − b )] , (16)$$\n\n$$1 2 m f 2 1 + ¯ h 2 m df$_{1}$ dx + E$_{1}$ = 0 ( x ̸ = pa ) , (15)$$\n\n$$1 2 m f 2 1 + ¯ h 2 m df$_{1}$ dx + E$_{1}$ = λδ ( x − pa ) . (14)$$\n\n$$P 2 2 m + 1 2 m f 2 1 + ¯ h 2 m df$_{1}$ dx + E$_{1}$ = P 2 2 m + λδ ( x − pa ) , (13)$$\n\n$$a † $_{1}$a$_{1}$ + E$_{1}$ = H. (12)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9041957138982131, + "doc_id": "f9a10f51054fa8cec2b2cebeceb0081343f407e06f59dde9f92059a9a1e2d785", + "edit_distance": 0.0633147113594041, + "f1_score": 0.9790794979079499, + "meteor": 0.9422822983499783, + "precision": 0.9957446808510638, + "pred_md": "4\n\nmatrix eigenvalues experience some quantum induced repulsion (similar to the VanderMonde repulsion of eigenvalues in matrix models [19]), arising from the volume of the gauge orbit of the configurations, and a confining potential due to the coupling to the curvature of the sphere (this is realized as an effective mass term for the eigenvalues). Repulsion wins at short distances, and the confining potential wins at long distances. Because of these competing effects one expects an equilibrium at finite radius and shape.\n\nIn the large N thermodynamic limit the eigenvalues can form a geometric distribution that depends on the particular wave function of the system that is chosen. For the ground state, the wave function is known [5]. We will call this wave function ψ 0 . For this wave function the eigenvalue distribution is an S 5 submanifold of R 6 , where the radius is of order √ N in field theory units. Locality in S 5 is induced from locality in R 6 : the masses of off-diagonal degrees of freedom depend on the distances between eigenvalues in R 6 . Modes connecting nearby eigenvalues correspond to lighter degrees of freedom, whereas modes connecting distant eigenvalues correspond to very heavy degrees of freedom that decouple sooner. Hence the distance in R 6 is meaningfully describing a notion of locality: how coupled the different degrees of freedom are to each other when integrating out heavy fields.\n\nOne can argue this way that this distribution describes the S 5 of the AdS 5 × S 5 dual geometry. Other supersymmetric wave functions are obtained by multiplying the ground state wave function with holomorphic polynomials of the variables, properly symmetrized between the eigenvalues. This type of argument has also been generalized to orbifolds [20, 21] and conifolds [22, 23], giving a large number of qualitative and quantitative tests of this idea. However, reproducing the exact geometry of supergravity from the field theory is still beyond the current understanding of the AdS/CFT dictionary. A particularly difficult question to answer is how different field theory degrees of freedom are encoded and localize in different parts of the AdS geometry, how the holographic bound is realized in practice [24] and in particular how to relate these questions to the holographic renormalization group [25, 26] (for a recent review see [27]).\n\nThe upshot is that some geometric information can be extracted from these wave functions, but the said geometry contains only partial information about the full ten dimensional geometry that supergravity would see. Since to date there is no convincing way to extract the ten dimensional geometry directly from the field theory without assuming a correspondence, we will use the limited geometric information that can be derived from the field", + "recall": 0.9629629629629629, + "true_md": "4\n\nmatrix eigenvalues experience some quantum induced repulsion (similar to the VanderMonde repulsion of eigenvalues in matrix models [19]), arising from the volume of the gauge orbit of the configurations, and a confining potential due to the coupling to the curvature of the sphere (this is realized as an effective mass term for the eigenvalues). Repulsion wins at short distances, and the confining potential wins at long distances. Because of these competing effects one expects an equilibrium at finite radius and shape.\n\nIn the large N thermodynamic limit the eigenvalues can form a geometric distribution that depends on the particular wave function of the system that is chosen. For the ground state, the wave function is known [5]. We will call this wave function ψ$_{0}$ . For this wave function the eigenvalue distribution is an S 5 submanifold of R $^{6}$, where the radius is of order √$_{N}$ in field theory units. Locality in S 5 is induced from locality in R $^{6}$: the masses of off-diagonal degrees of freedom depend on the distances between eigenvalues in R $^{6}$. Modes connecting nearby eigenvalues correspond to lighter degrees of freedom, whereas modes connecting distant eigenvalues correspond to very heavy degrees of freedom that decouple sooner. Hence the distance in R 6 is meaningfully describing a notion of locality: how coupled the different degrees of freedom are to each other when integrating out heavy fields.\n\nOne can argue this way that this distribution describes the S 5 of the AdS$_{5}$ × S 5 dual geometry. Other supersymmetric wave functions are obtained by multiplying the ground state wave function with holomorphic polynomials of the variables, properly symmetrized between the eigenvalues. This type of argument has also been generalized to orbifolds [20, 21] and conifolds [22, 23], giving a large number of qualitative and quantitative tests of this idea.\n\nHowever, reproducing the exact geometry of supergravity from the field theory is still beyond the current understanding of the AdS/CFT dictionary. A particularly difficult question to answer is how different field theory degrees of freedom are encoded and localize in different parts of the AdS geometry, how the holographic bound is realized in practice [24] and in particular how to relate these questions to the holographic renormalization group [25, 26] (for a recent review see [27]).\n\nThe upshot is that some geometric information can be extracted from these wave func- tions, but the said geometry contains only partial information about the full ten dimensional geometry that supergravity would see. Since to date there is no convincing way to extract the ten dimensional geometry directly from the field theory without assuming a correspon- dence, we will use the limited geometric information that can be derived from the field" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9598650467215826, + "doc_id": "d3f423b6a353d37c149f1c35ea19d64734b2a25309fe68a5d300d9c27b6871d0", + "edit_distance": 0.029661016949152543, + "f1_score": 0.9768211920529802, + "meteor": 0.9722553930539979, + "precision": 0.9833333333333333, + "pred_md": "## II. MODEL AND SIMULATION DETAILS\n\nThe model we consider resolves a given basepair (of type A, T, C or G) only to the extent that we assign to it a particular instantaneous state. We consider four possible states, sketched in Fig. 1(a). The first is the helical B-form of DNA. The second is the 'molten bubble' form of DNA (M-DNA) in which both strands bear tension but do not interact with each other. The third state is the unpeeled form (U-DNA) in which one strand has frayed and no longer bears tension. It is crucial to distinguish between the two forms of unhybridized DNA: in the presence of nicks, M-DNA is unstable to U-DNA [6]. All three states can be parameterized using thermal and mechanical data [4, 6, 13]. The fourth state is the putative S-form (S-DNA). The model of S-DNA used in Refs. [10, 11] is based on two assumptions: first, that S-DNA has a contour length 70% greater than B-DNA and is stiffer at large forces [6, 14, 15]; and second, that it is in thermal equilibrium with B-DNA, irrespective of sequence composition, at 65 pN. The motivation for the latter assumption is the observation that λ -DNA (about 50% CG content) and poly(dG-dC) DNA both overstretch at about 65 pN [16]. This observation is difficult to reconcile with the assumption that overstretching consists solely of melting of the double helix.\n\nThe thermodynamics implied by this picture at a salt concentration of 150 mM is summarized in Fig. 1(b) (see Appendix). At low forces B-DNA is stable; at high forces either U-DNA or S-DNA are stable. The assumption that S-B phase coexistence occurs at 65 pN independently of sequence and environmental conditions immediately implies that S-DNA is more stable with respect to U-DNA in CG-rich DNA than in AT-rich DNA, and that increasing temperature favors U-DNA over S-DNA. Further, for the parameters used in Ref. [10], we find that S-DNA is not thermodynamically stable (under the conditions shown) with respect to U-DNA within the first 40 kbp of λ -DNA as a whole. However, as discussed in Ref. [6], this does not mean that S-DNA is never observed in dynamic stretching simulations. U-DNA must emerge in a processive, basepair-by-basepair fashion. It is therefore possible to find thermodynamic conditions such that while complete unpeeling of the molecule is thermodynamically favorable, the passage of U-DNA through CG-rich tracts of the molecule is hindered by free energy barriers in excess of hundreds of k B T . Under such conditions, S-DNA can be transiently stable.\n\nTo illustrate this point, we show in Fig. 2 a microscopic space-versus-time plot of dynamic molecular composition within a 300-basepair fragment of λ -DNA stretched at 1000 nm/s. Unpeeling from the molecule's free end eventually leads to complete dehybridization, but because the advance of the unpeeled front is processive and slow, S-DNA is transiently stable. To reveal the effect of environmental conditions on the degree of this stability, we plot in Fig. 3 a 'dynamic phase diagram' at salt concentration c = 150 mM for 40 kbp fragments of λ -DNA stretched at 1000 nm/s at temperature T to a target force f 0 . We use the 'optical trap' protocol described in detail in Ref. [10]: trap stiffness is 1 pN/nm, and molecules possess one free end and no internal nicks. Once the target force is achieved, the loading rate is set to zero and the molecular composition monitored. We show molecular composition (vertical axis, maximum\n\n3", + "recall": 0.9703947368421053, + "true_md": "## II. MODEL AND SIMULATION DETAILS\n\nThe model we consider resolves a given basepair (of type A, T, C or G) only to the extent that we assign to it a particular instantaneous state. We consider four possible states, sketched in Fig. 1(a). The first is the helical B-form of DNA. The second is the ‘molten bubble’ form of DNA (M-DNA) in which both strands bear tension but do not interact with each other. The third state is the unpeeled form (U-DNA) in which one strand has frayed and no longer bears tension. It is crucial to distinguish between the two forms of unhybridized DNA: in the presence of nicks, M-DNA is unstable to U-DNA [6]. All three states can be parameterized using thermal and mechanical data [4, 6, 13]. The fourth state is the putative S-form (S-DNA). The model of S-DNA used in Refs. [10, 11] is based on two assumptions: first, that S-DNA has a contour length 70% greater than B-DNA and is stiffer at large forces [6, 14, 15]; and second, that it is in thermal equilibrium with B-DNA, irrespective of sequence composition, at 65 pN. The motivation for the latter assumption is the observation that λ -DNA (about 50% CG content) and poly(dG-dC) DNA both overstretch at about 65 pN [16]. This observation is difficult to reconcile with the assumption that overstretching consists solely of melting of the double helix.\n\nThe thermodynamics implied by this picture at a salt concentration of 150 mM is summarized in Fig. 1(b) (see Appendix). At low forces B-DNA is stable; at high forces either U-DNA or S-DNA are stable. The assumption that S-B phase coexistence occurs at 65 pN independently of sequence and environmental conditions immediately implies that S-DNA is more stable with respect to U-DNA in CG-rich DNA than in AT-rich DNA, and that increasing temperature favors U-DNA over S-DNA. Further, for the parameters used in Ref. [10], we find that S-DNA is not thermodynamically stable (under the conditions shown) with respect to U-DNA within the first 40 kbp of λ -DNA as a whole. However, as discussed in Ref. [6], this does not mean that S-DNA is never observed in dynamic stretching simulations. U-DNA must emerge in a processive, basepair-by-basepair fashion. It is therefore possible to find thermodynamic conditions such that while complete unpeeling of the molecule is thermodynamically favorable, the passage of U-DNA through CG-rich tracts of the molecule is hindered by free energy barriers in excess of hundreds of k$_{B}$T . Under such conditions, S-DNA can be transiently stable.\n\nTo illustrate this point, we show in Fig. 2 a microscopic space-versus-time plot of dynamic molecular composition within a 300-basepair fragment of λ -DNA stretched at 1000 nm/s. Unpeeling from the molecule’s free end eventually leads to complete dehybridization, but because the advance of the unpeeled front is processive and slow, S-DNA is transiently stable. To reveal the effect of environmental conditions on the degree of this stability, we plot in Fig. 3 a ‘dynamic phase diagram’ at salt concentration c = 150 mM for 40 kbp fragments of λ -DNA stretched at 1000 nm/s at temperature T to a target force f$_{0}$ . We use the ‘optical trap’ protocol described in detail in Ref. [10]: trap stiffness is 1 pN/nm, and molecules possess one free end and no internal nicks. Once the target force is achieved, the loading rate is set to zero and the molecular composition monitored. We show molecular composition (vertical axis, maximum\n\n3" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.019433199531073524, + "doc_id": "4811d723f69ff47cd01b676a74649aa61ad2a0b02f8f9d899299ae1a576b89ea", + "edit_distance": 0.9071925754060325, + "f1_score": 0.6869565217391305, + "meteor": 0.15200618644741698, + "precision": 0.9404761904761905, + "pred_md": "with\n\n\n\n\n\n∣ ∣ where θ is the scattering angle in the center of mass frame. The auxiliary functions appear above are defined as\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n## Appendix C: Thermal averaged annihilation cross section\n\nIn partial wave expansion, the thermal averaged cross section is given by\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nwhere m final is the mass of final state particle.\n\n- [1] T. Yanagida, in Proceedings of Workshop on the Unified Theory and the Baryon Number in the Universe , Tsukuba, Japan, edited by A. Sawada and A. Sugamoto (KEK, Tsukuba, 1979), p 95; M. Gell-Mann, P. Ramond, and R. Slansky, in Supergravity , Proceedings of Workshop,\n\n12", + "recall": 0.541095890410959, + "true_md": "$$− − ($_{−}$ 4 + s − 4 m 2 N + A 2 b ln ∣ ∣$^{A}$$^{+ 2}$$^{b}$ A − 2 $_{b}$∣ ∣ ) , (B9)$$\n\n$$∫ d cos θ 2 |M 2 | 2 = λ 4 N ( ∂ Ψ ∂h ) 4 ($_{−}$ 8 − I$_{22}$ + J$_{22}$ ln ∣ ∣$^{A}$$^{+ 2}$$^{b}$ A − 2 $_{b}$∣ ∣ ) , (B8) ∫ d cos θ 2 M 1 M ∗ 2 = 4 m$_{N}$λ 3 N ( ∂ Ψ ∂h ) 2 ( ∂ Ψ ∂h i s − M 2 h + iM$_{h}$ Γ$_{h}$ iλ$_{hhh}$ + ∂ Ψ ∂H i s − M 2 H + iM$_{H}$ Γ$_{H}$ iλ$_{Hhh}$ ) ($_{−}$ s − 4 m 2 + A ∣ $_{b}$∣ )$$\n\n$$I$_{22}$ ( s ) ≡ 4 ( A + 2 a ) 2 − 2( s + 4 m 2 $_{N}$) A − s ( A + m 2 $_{N}$) − 3 m 2 $_{N}$( s − 4 m 2 $_{N}$) A 2 4 b 2 , (B10) 1$$\n\n$$b ( s, m$_{N}$, m$_{h}$ ) ≡ √ s 4 − m 2 h √ s 4 − m 2 $_{N}$. (B13)$$\n\n$$≡ A 4 b J$_{22}$ ( s, m$_{h}$ ) ≡ 1 Ab ( 2 A ( A + 2 a ) − A ( s + 4 m 2 $_{N}$) + A 2 − 4 a 2 − ( s − 2 m 2 $_{N}$)( m 2 N − m 2 $_{h}$) +3 m 2 $_{N}$( s − 4 m 2 $_{N}$) ) , (B11) A ( s, m$_{h}$ ) ≡ − s + m 2 $_{h}$, (B12)$$\n\n$$) A ( s, m$_{h}$ ) ≡ − s 2 + m 2 $_{h}$, (B12)$$\n\n$$〈 σv 〉 = 1 m 2 N [ w ( s ) − 3 2 ( 2 w ( s ) − 4 m 2 N dw ds ) T m$_{N}$ ]∣ ∣ s =4 m 2 N (C1) $_{ds}$∣$$\n\n$$∣ = 6 dw $_{ds}$∣ ∣ s =4 m 2 N T m$_{N}$ , (C2)$$\n\n$$4 w ( s ) ≡ ∫ d LIPS ∑ |M| 2 = 1 8 $_{π}$√ s − 4 m 2 final s ∫ d cos θ 2 ∑ |M| $^{2}$, (C3)$$\n\n∣$^{A}$$^{+ 2}$$^{b}$ where θ is the scattering angle in the center of mass frame. The auxiliary functions appear above are defined as\n\nIn partial wave expansion, the thermal averaged cross section is given by\n\nwith\n\nwhere m$_{final}$ is the mass of final state particle.\n\n## Appendix C: Thermal averaged annihilation cross section\n\n- [1] T. Yanagida, in Proceedings of Workshop on the Unified Theory and the Baryon Number in the Universe , Tsukuba, Japan, edited by A. Sawada and A. Sugamoto (KEK, Tsukuba, 1979), p 95; M. Gell-Mann, P. Ramond, and R. Slansky, in Supergravity , Proceedings of Workshop,\n\n12" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6625364378940483, + "doc_id": "c27bb45cc421f4eec9e2e23cba05691c773450030d9ad3ddce60db86ad2d03cf", + "edit_distance": 0.3900414937759336, + "f1_score": 0.9514563106796117, + "meteor": 0.7878061079987013, + "precision": 0.9702970297029703, + "pred_md": "FIG. 3: Likelihoods and weight functions of uncorrelated parameters q i and corresponding weight functions. The left panels are for the model with w L = -1 and the right panels are for the case with a floating w L .\n\nFIG. 3: Likelihoods and weight functions of uncorrelated parameters q i and corresponding weight functions. The left panels are for the model with w L = -1 and the right panels are for the case with a floating w L .\n\nTABLE III: The best-fitted parameters and 2 σ errors for Model II with w L fixed to -1 or floating. ML is for 'Maximum Likelihood', and the value in {} means this parameter has been fixed.\n\npoints of w de in this region. We found that with the additional 2 parameters ( z 2 and w z ( 2 )), there is almost no improvement of χ 2 min , compared to the 2 bins case (Model II). This indicates that there is no more turning points and w de ( z ) can be well approximated by just two linear expansions in the region z ∈ (0 , 0 9). . Of course, there is another possibility that the current data are not enough to find out more turning points.\n\n12", + "recall": 0.9333333333333333, + "true_md": "FIG. 3: Likelihoods and weight functions of uncorrelated parameters q$_{i}$ and corresponding weight functions. The left panels are for the model with w$_{L}$ = − 1 and the right panels are for the case with a floating w$_{L}$ .\n\nTABLE III: The best-fitted parameters and 2 σ errors for Model II with w$_{L}$ fixed to − 1 or floating. ML is for “Maximum Likelihood”, and the value in {} means this parameter has been fixed.\n\npoints of w$_{de}$ in this region. We found that with the additional 2 parameters ( z$_{2}$ and w ( z$_{2}$ )), there is almost no improvement of χ 2 $_{min}$, compared to the 2 bins case (Model II). This indicates that there is no more turning points and w$_{de}$ ( z ) can be well approximated by just two linear expansions in the region z ∈ (0 , 0 . 9). Of course, there is another possibility that the current data are not enough to find out more turning points.\n\n12" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9858847005762985, + "doc_id": "9ef30cabc65f95485af93e4554cfaef413ed058bba754492c2f2aa72ab747fe0", + "edit_distance": 0.008064516129032258, + "f1_score": 0.9873417721518988, + "meteor": 0.9923355067156621, + "precision": 0.9915254237288136, + "pred_md": "As we have shown in [1, 2], this assumption of the LF uniformity is not universally applicable; moreover, it completely falls apart when the uniformity of the atomic lattice is disturbed by impurities, boundaries, etc. Indeed, when the interatomic interactions are sufficiently strong and the system is not very large, highly nonuniform LF distributions emerge, resulting in a strong stratification of the LF and atomic excitations. This effect is best manifested in small-scale ordered arrays and lattices of atoms at near-resonance conditions, which allow to attain high interaction strength between neighboring atoms and to easily control it by tuning the laser frequency. We have shown [1, 2] that when the interaction with neighboring atoms becomes comparable to that with the external field, so that the interaction strength exceeds some critical value, the system will support LF excitations, which we call locsitons . In finite-size arrays and lattices, standing waves of locsitons may form nanoscale strata and complex patterns in the LF (and hence, in the induced atomic dipoles). A typical spacing between atoms in the arrays and lattices exhibiting the LF stratification is a few orders of magnitude shorter than the wavelength of light, so the quasistatic approximation of the standard LLT can still be used.\n\nIt is worth noting that locsitons are basically a linear phenomenon and can be excited by a weak incident field. We want to stress that locsitons, i. e., spatially nonuniform solutions, are not new stable-state alternatives to a presumably unstable uniform Lorentz solution at certain interaction parameters; the stability or instability of the solution is not an issue here. The emergence of locsitons is determined by the boundary conditions in a finite structure , so a locsiton is essentially the only physical solution, which thus replaces the uniform Lorentz solution. Absorption plays an important role here, as it directly affects spatial attenuation of locsitons and thus the maximum distance to a boundary, defect, or other inhomogeneity where locsitons can appear. In particular, as we have shown in [2], the size of an array that can support well pronounced locsitons is directly related to the characteristic absorption length. Locsitons vanish in the bulk of a crystal sufficiently far away from boundaries or defects.\n\nDue to recent advances in fabricating nanoscale structures, the observation and practical applications of the LF nanostratification are becoming a reality. Theoretically, strongly interacting resonant particles discussed in [1] do not have to be atoms, but may also be quantum dots, molecules, clusters, etc. However, one has to remember that one of the major conditions for the structure to support the locsitons is that the interaction strength has\n\n3", + "recall": 0.9831932773109243, + "true_md": "As we have shown in [1, 2], this assumption of the LF uniformity is not universally applicable; moreover, it completely falls apart when the uniformity of the atomic lattice is disturbed by impurities, boundaries, etc. Indeed, when the interatomic interactions are sufficiently strong and the system is not very large, highly nonuniform LF distributions emerge, resulting in a strong stratification of the LF and atomic excitations. This effect is best manifested in small-scale ordered arrays and lattices of atoms at near-resonance conditions, which allow to attain high interaction strength between neighboring atoms and to easily control it by tuning the laser frequency. We have shown [1, 2] that when the interaction with neighboring atoms becomes comparable to that with the external field, so that the interaction strength exceeds some critical value, the system will support LF excitations, which we call locsitons . In finite-size arrays and lattices, standing waves of locsitons may form nanoscale strata and complex patterns in the LF (and hence, in the induced atomic dipoles). A typical spacing between atoms in the arrays and lattices exhibiting the LF stratification is a few orders of magnitude shorter than the wavelength of light, so the quasistatic approximation of the standard LLT can still be used.\n\nIt is worth noting that locsitons are basically a linear phenomenon and can be excited by a weak incident field. We want to stress that locsitons, i. e., spatially nonuniform solutions, are not new stable-state alternatives to a presumably unstable uniform Lorentz solution at certain interaction parameters; the stability or instability of the solution is not an issue here. The emergence of locsitons is determined by the boundary conditions in a finite structure , so a locsiton is essentially the only physical solution, which thus replaces the uniform Lorentz solution. Absorption plays an important role here, as it directly affects spatial attenuation of locsitons and thus the maximum distance to a boundary, defect, or other inhomogeneity where locsitons can appear. In particular, as we have shown in [2], the size of an array that can support well pronounced locsitons is directly related to the characteristic absorption length. Locsitons vanish in the bulk of a crystal sufficiently far away from boundaries or defects.\n\nDue to recent advances in fabricating nanoscale structures, the observation and practi- cal applications of the LF nanostratification are becoming a reality. Theoretically, strongly interacting resonant particles discussed in [1] do not have to be atoms, but may also be quantum dots, molecules, clusters, etc. However, one has to remember that one of the ma- jor conditions for the structure to support the locsitons is that the interaction strength has\n\n3" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.45843204161731654, + "doc_id": "ef9fec320af247186d607bee3cd5b49a4d708c88b50e257806579c0d4b181817", + "edit_distance": 0.5, + "f1_score": 0.972972972972973, + "meteor": 0.9089365487544264, + "precision": 0.9473684210526315, + "pred_md": "Spin-helical/.notdefDirac/.notdefcones\n\nFIG. 5: Hsieh, Xia, Qian et al. , NATURE 460, 1101 (2009).\n\nFIG. 5: Hsieh, Xia, Qian et al. , NATURE 460, 1101 (2009).\n\nFIG. 6: Hsieh, Xia, Qian et al. , NATURE 460, 1101 (2009).\n\nFIG. 6: Hsieh, Xia, Qian et al. , NATURE 460, 1101 (2009).\n\n16", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "FIG. 5: Hsieh, Xia, Qian et al. , NATURE 460, 1101 (2009).\n\nFIG. 6: Hsieh, Xia, Qian et al. , NATURE 460, 1101 (2009).\n\n16" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9571793295817066, + "doc_id": "8a004a4eb1d953bbd956f4e66bb8af014d9c62ede82103796017fcb64970a5cf", + "edit_distance": 0.05071315372424723, + "f1_score": 0.9526462395543175, + "meteor": 0.9519468259740833, + "precision": 0.9606741573033708, + "pred_md": "- S. Ertrk, A. Maj, and A. C. Merchant, Phys. Rev. C u 61 , 064314 (2000).\n- [4] E. Caurier, F. Nowacki, and A. Poves, Phys. Rev. Lett. 95 , 042502 (2005).\n- [5] E. Caurier, J. Men'ndez, F. Nowacki, and A. Poves, Phys. Rev. C e 75 , 054317 (2007).\n- [6] T. Inakura, S. Mizutori, M. Yamagami, and K. Matsuyanagi, Nucl. Phys. A 710 , 261 (2002).\n- [7] R.R.Rodriguez-Guzman, J.L.Egido, and L.M.Robledo, Int.J.Mod.Phys. E 13 , 139 (2004).\n- [8] M. Bender, H. Flocard, and P. H. Heenen, Phys. Rev. C 68 , 044321 (2003).\n- [9] M. Kimura and H. Horiuchi, Nucl. Phys. A 767 , 58 (2006).\n- [10] Y. Taniguchi, M. Kimura, Y. Kanada-En'yo, and H. Horiuchi, Phys. Rev. C 76 , 044317 (2007).\n- [11] M. Kimura and H. Horiuchi, Phys. Rev. C 69 , 051304(R) (2004).\n- [12] Y. Kanada-En'yo and M. Kimura, Phys. Rev. C 72 , 064322 (2005).\n- [13] Y. Taniguchi, Y. Kanada-En'yo, and M. Kimura, Prog. Theor. Phys. 121 , 533 (2009).\n- [14] Y. Taniguchi, Y. Kanada-En'yo, and M. Kimura, Phys. Rev. C 80 , 044316 (2009).\n- [15] W. J. Gerace and A. M. Green, Nucl. Phys. A 123 , 241 (1969).\n- [16] W. J. Gerace and J. P. Mestre, Nucl. Phys. A 285 , 253 (1977).\n- [17] E. Ideguchi, S. Ota, T. Morikawa, M. Oshima, M. Koizumi, Y. Toh, A. Kimura, H. Harada, K. Furutaka, S. Nakamura, et al., Phys. Lett. B 686 , 18 (2010).\n- [18] C. A. Davis, Phys. Rev. C 20 , 38 (1979).\n- [19] J. R. Southon, A. R. Poletti, and D. J. Beale, Nucl. Phys. A 267 , 263 (1976).\n- [20] E. Bitterwolf, A. Burkard, P. Betz, F. Glatz, F. Heidinger, T. Kern, R. Lehmann, S. Norbert, H. Ropke, C. Schneider, et al., Z. Phys. A 313 , 123 (1983).\n- [21] A. Dot' e, H. Horiuchi, and Y. Kanada-En'yo, Phys. Rev. C 56 , 1844 (1997).\n- [22] M. Kimura, Phys. Rev. C 69 , 044319 (2004).\n- [23] Y. Kanada-En'yo and H. Horiuchi, Prog. Theor. Phys. 93 , 115 (1995).\n- [24] J. A. Cameron and B. Singh, Nuclear Data Sheets 102 , 293 (2004).\n- [25] A. S. Davydov and G. F. Filippov, Nucl. Phys. 8 , 237 (1958).\n\n11", + "recall": 0.9447513812154696, + "true_md": "S. Ert¨ urk, A. Maj, and A. C. Merchant, Phys. Rev. C 61 , 064314 (2000).\n\n- [4] E. Caurier, F. Nowacki, and A. Poves, Phys. Rev. Lett. 95 , 042502 (2005).\n\n- [5] E. Caurier, J. Men´ endez, F. Nowacki, and A. Poves, Phys. Rev. C 75 , 054317 (2007).\n\n- [6] T. Inakura, S. Mizutori, M. Yamagami, and K. Matsuyanagi, Nucl. Phys. A 710 , 261 (2002).\n\n- [7] R.R.Rodriguez-Guzman, J.L.Egido, and L.M.Robledo, Int.J.Mod.Phys. E 13 , 139 (2004).\n\n- [8] M. Bender, H. Flocard, and P. H. Heenen, Phys. Rev. C 68 , 044321 (2003).\n\n- [9] M. Kimura and H. Horiuchi, Nucl. Phys. A 767 , 58 (2006).\n\n- [10] Y. Taniguchi, M. Kimura, Y. Kanada-En’yo, and H. Horiuchi, Phys. Rev. C 76 , 044317 (2007).\n\n- [11] M. Kimura and H. Horiuchi, Phys. Rev. C 69 , 051304(R) (2004).\n\n- [12] Y. Kanada-En’yo and M. Kimura, Phys. Rev. C 72 , 064322 (2005).\n\n- [13] Y. Taniguchi, Y. Kanada-En’yo, and M. Kimura, Prog. Theor. Phys. 121 , 533 (2009).\n\n- [14] Y. Taniguchi, Y. Kanada-En’yo, and M. Kimura, Phys. Rev. C 80 , 044316 (2009).\n\n- [15] W. J. Gerace and A. M. Green, Nucl. Phys. A 123 , 241 (1969).\n\n- [16] W. J. Gerace and J. P. Mestre, Nucl. Phys. A 285 , 253 (1977).\n\n- [17] E. Ideguchi, S. Ota, T. Morikawa, M. Oshima, M. Koizumi, Y. Toh, A. Kimura, H. Harada, K. Furutaka, S. Nakamura, et al., Phys. Lett. B 686 , 18 (2010).\n\n- [18] C. A. Davis, Phys. Rev. C 20 , 38 (1979).\n\n- [19] J. R. Southon, A. R. Poletti, and D. J. Beale, Nucl. Phys. A 267 , 263 (1976).\n\n- [20] E. Bitterwolf, A. Burkard, P. Betz, F. Glatz, F. Heidinger, T. Kern, R. Lehmann, S. Norbert, H. R¨ opke, C. Schneider, et al., Z. Phys. A 313 , 123 (1983).\n\n- [21] A. Dot´ e, H. Horiuchi, and Y. Kanada-En’yo, Phys. Rev. C 56 , 1844 (1997).\n\n- [22] M. Kimura, Phys. Rev. C 69 , 044319 (2004).\n\n- [23] Y. Kanada-En’yo and H. Horiuchi, Prog. Theor. Phys. 93 , 115 (1995).\n\n- [24] J. A. Cameron and B. Singh, Nuclear Data Sheets 102 , 293 (2004).\n\n- [25] A. S. Davydov and G. F. Filippov, Nucl. Phys. 8 , 237 (1958).\n\n11" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5233198410643173, + "doc_id": "1fa6d921514b5f422550a44919bf5da8e990c2c16106aa200b1bfef26abd2c61", + "edit_distance": 0.7792207792207793, + "f1_score": 0.9316770186335405, + "meteor": 0.6081083175015015, + "precision": 0.974025974025974, + "pred_md": "spectrum from the true+background spectrum, as shown in Fig. 2(b).\n\nFIG. 1: Vertical-position spectrum at the focal plane of the Grand Raiden spectrometer, taken at 2.5 · . The central densely-hatched region represents true+background events. The off-center sparsely-hatched regions represent only background events. The real events were obtained by subtracting background events from the true+background events.\n\nFIG. 1: Vertical-position spectrum at the focal plane of the Grand Raiden spectrometer, taken at 2.5 · . The central densely-hatched region represents true+background events. The off-center sparsely-hatched regions represent only background events. The real events were obtained by subtracting background events from the true+background events.\n\nFIG. 2: (a) Horizontal-position spectrum of the 112 Sn( α α , ' ) reaction at 0 · . The hatched region is background events. (b) Background-free spectrum\n\nFIG. 2: (a) Horizontal-position spectrum of the 112 Sn( α α , ' ) reaction at 0 · . The hatched region is background events. (b) Background-free spectrum\n\nThe background-free '0 ' inelastic spectra for the Sn isotopes are presented in Fig. 3. · In all cases, the spectrum is dominated by the ISGMR+ISGQR peak near E x ∼ 15 MeV.\n\n6", + "recall": 0.8928571428571429, + "true_md": "spectrum from the true+background spectrum, as shown in Fig. 2(b).\n\nThe background-free “0 $^{◦}$” inelastic spectra for the Sn isotopes are presented in Fig. 3. In all cases, the spectrum is dominated by the ISGMR+ISGQR peak near E$_{x}$ ∼ 15 MeV.\n\n6\n\nFIG. 2: (a) Horizontal-position spectrum of the $^{112}$Sn( α , α $^{′}$) reaction at 0$^{◦}$. The hatched region is background events. (b) Background-free spectrum\n\nFIG. 1: Vertical-position spectrum at the focal plane of the Grand Raiden spectrometer, taken at 2.5 $^{◦}$. The central densely-hatched region represents true+background events. The off-center sparsely-hatched regions represent only background events. The real events were obtained by subtracting background events from the true+background events." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8204326745991831, + "doc_id": "a5f9a5262844330201536054b313d148a9deecb262e85c64c78f94c08944c2c9", + "edit_distance": 0.18141592920353983, + "f1_score": 0.9705882352941176, + "meteor": 0.9546881746346908, + "precision": 0.9850746268656716, + "pred_md": "FIG. 4: Level scheme of 40 Ar is shown. In experimental data, the GS, the SD band (SD0), candidate states of the side band of the SD band (SD2), and other low-lying J π ≤ 4 + states are listed. The experimental data are taken from Refs. 17 and 24.\n\nFIG. 4: Level scheme of 40 Ar is shown. In experimental data, the GS, the SD band (SD0), candidate states of the side band of the SD band (SD2), and other low-lying J π ≤ 4 + states are listed. The experimental data are taken from Refs. 17 and 24.\n\nGCM. The K π = 0 + GS band, the K π = 0 + SD band (SD0), and the K π = 2 + SD band (SD2) are obtained by the GCM calculation. The energy levels of the GS and SD0 bands agree with the experimental data. The observed J π = 2 + 5 (3.92 MeV), 3 + (4.23 MeV), and (2 , 3 4) , + (5.17 MeV) states are tentatively assigned as members of the SD2 band in this study because their excitation energies are similar to calculated ones of the SD2 band and the candidates states decay to the members of the SD0 band. Dominant components of the GS band are the deformed-basis AMD wave functions around the GS minimum on the energy curve, and those of the SD0 and SD2 bands are the basis wave functions around the SD minimum with the triaxial deformations. Owing to the triaxial deformations around the SD local minimum, the SD2 band appears. The members of the SD0 and SD2 bands are dominated by the | K | = 0 and 2 components, respectively, projected from a single deformedbasis AMD wave function at ( β, γ ) = (0 478 11 2 ) up to high spin states. . , . · Both the SD0 and SD2 bands show rigid rotor-like behavior. The calculated level spacings in the SD0 band members show the rotational band spectra and match experimental data, and those of the SD2 band members are consistent with experimental data. The energy gap between the J π = 0 + SD0 and the J π = 2 + SD2 states is slightly overestimated, and it may indicate that the triaxiality of the SD states is underestimated.\n\n7", + "recall": 0.9565217391304348, + "true_md": "FIG. 4: Level scheme of $^{40}$Ar is shown. In experimental data, the GS, the SD band (SD0), candidate states of the side band of the SD band (SD2), and other low-lying J π ≤ 4 + states are listed. The experimental data are taken from Refs. 17 and 24.\n\nGCM. The K π = 0 + GS band, the K π = 0 + SD band (SD0), and the K π = 2 + SD band (SD2) are obtained by the GCM calculation. The energy levels of the GS and SD0 bands agree with the experimental data. The observed J π = 2 + 5 (3.92 MeV), 3 + (4.23 MeV), and (2 , 3 , 4) + (5.17 MeV) states are tentatively assigned as members of the SD2 band in this study because their excitation energies are similar to calculated ones of the SD2 band and the candidates states decay to the members of the SD0 band. Dominant components of the GS band are the deformed-basis AMD wave functions around the GS minimum on the energy curve, and those of the SD0 and SD2 bands are the basis wave functions around the SD minimum with the triaxial deformations. Owing to the triaxial deformations around the SD local minimum, the SD2 band appears. The members of the SD0 and SD2 bands are dominated by the | K | = 0 and 2 components, respectively, projected from a single deformed- basis AMD wave function at ( β, γ ) = (0 . 478 , 11 . 2 $^{◦}$) up to high spin states. Both the SD0 and SD2 bands show rigid rotor-like behavior. The calculated level spacings in the SD0 band members show the rotational band spectra and match experimental data, and those of the SD2 band members are consistent with experimental data. The energy gap between the J π = 0 + SD0 and the J π = 2 + SD2 states is slightly overestimated, and it may indicate that the triaxiality of the SD states is underestimated.\n\n7" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6854107095985092, + "doc_id": "aac52ca2288766cef054927fae5c60bfe33c6ac67236b56cab4276a9679dd007", + "edit_distance": 0.33668341708542715, + "f1_score": 0.9739776951672864, + "meteor": 0.8174343895706042, + "precision": 0.9849624060150376, + "pred_md": "FIG. 2: 1 σ and 2 σ errors of w de in Model II. Left panels are for the model with w L = -1 and right panels are with w L floating, top panels are for correlated parameters in w de ( z ) and the bottom panels are for uncorrelated ones.\n\nFIG. 2: 1 σ and 2 σ errors of w de in Model II. Left panels are for the model with w L = -1 and right panels are with w L floating, top panels are for correlated parameters in w de ( z ) and the bottom panels are for uncorrelated ones.\n\nz\n\nz\n\nz\n\nmore explicit deviations from -1 around z = 0 and z = 0 45, however, there is still a 2 . σ deviation from -1 around z = 0 9. .\n\nOne may suspect that the explicit derivations are caused due to the fact that we have fixed the value of w de as w L = -1 in the third bin. To check this, we consider the case with a floating w L . Two right panels of Fig. 2 show the correlated and uncorrelated results for the case with the floating w L . We see that in this case, there is even larger deviation from -1 around z = 0 9. We have also used the CPL parametrization to replace the linear expansion . in each bin, and found that the errors are almost the same as those in the case of the linear expansion and there is still a deviation of w de from -1 around z = 0 9. . We will extend our discussion of this result in the last section. In Fig. 3 we plot the likelihoods and weight functions of the uncorrelated parameters q i . The weight functions are constructed from the transformation matrix U, which show how uncorrelated parameters q i are determined. It is shown that the parameters of w de are less correlated than that of the cubic-spline case [16].\n\nWe have also divided z ∈ (0 , 0 9) into three bins, to see whether there exist two turning .\n\n11", + "recall": 0.9632352941176471, + "true_md": "FIG. 2: 1 σ and 2 σ errors of w$_{de}$ in Model II. Left panels are for the model with w$_{L}$ = − 1 and right panels are with w$_{L}$ floating, top panels are for correlated parameters in w$_{de}$ ( z ) and the bottom panels are for uncorrelated ones.\n\nmore explicit deviations from − 1 around z = 0 and z = 0 . 45, however, there is still a 2 σ deviation from − 1 around z = 0 . 9.\n\nOne may suspect that the explicit derivations are caused due to the fact that we have fixed the value of w$_{de}$ as w$_{L}$ = − 1 in the third bin. To check this, we consider the case with a floating w$_{L}$ . Two right panels of Fig. 2 show the correlated and uncorrelated results for the case with the floating w$_{L}$ . We see that in this case, there is even larger deviation from − 1 around z = 0 . 9. We have also used the CPL parametrization to replace the linear expansion in each bin, and found that the errors are almost the same as those in the case of the linear expansion and there is still a deviation of w$_{de}$ from − 1 around z = 0 . 9. We will extend our discussion of this result in the last section. In Fig. 3 we plot the likelihoods and weight functions of the uncorrelated parameters q$_{i}$ . The weight functions are constructed from the transformation matrix U, which show how uncorrelated parameters q$_{i}$ are determined. It is shown that the parameters of w$_{de}$ are less correlated than that of the cubic-spline case [16].\n\nWe have also divided z ∈ (0 , 0 . 9) into three bins, to see whether there exist two turning\n\n11" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7630696460388939, + "doc_id": "bb3c9484150b843685fd3989b34815be85dc536b7838c16ec032491c62ad1c1f", + "edit_distance": 0.2134453781512605, + "f1_score": 0.9168443496801707, + "meteor": 0.791004510015093, + "precision": 0.9513274336283186, + "pred_md": "so that the uniform, Lorentz, solution for the LF is reached at δ = δ ⊥ LL , where D NNA 2 ⊥ ( q = 0 ) = 1. The second term in the r. h. s. of Eq. (35) is independent of the orientation of q , which means that no anisotropy caused by the lattice structure is present in the longwavelength limit. We may thus conclude that, compared to the ' ‖ ' case, the locsitons in the ' ⊥ ' configuration are more reminiscent of the locsitons in 1D arrays of resonant atoms considered in [1, 2]. There is still no complete analogy here, as, e. g., the second term in the r. h. s. of Eq. (35) differs by a factor of 1 / 2 from the 1D result [2]. Moreover, dispersion relation (34) does become anisotropic for larger q , closer to the boundaries of the first Brillouin zone. This anisotropy, however, is by far less pronounced than that in the ' ‖ ' case.\n\nIt is instructive to also obtain the dispersion relation in the NRA. By replacing the summation in Eq. (34) with an integration over the 'near ring', following the procedure outlined in Sec. III A, we get\n\n\n\nThe resulting dispersion relation turns out to be independent of the orientation of q :\n\n\n\nwhich is not surprising given the NRA applicability in the long-wavelength limit.\n\nWhile it might be somewhat harder to create a uniform incident field polarized normally to a 2D lattice, the resulting locsitons could be much easier to control because of the small anisotropy of the interatomic interactions in the ' ⊥ ' geometry, compared to the ' ‖ ' geometry. For example, defects in a 2D lattice can support localized locsitons, not unlike the evanescent 1D locsitons discussed in [2]. Compared to the complex locsiton patterns emerging in the ' ‖ ' geometry [cf. Fig. 4] these localized locsitons are more likely to form well-organized strata-like patterns in the ' ⊥ ' geometry.\n\nFig. 6 shows concentric dipole strata that are formed around a circular hole made by removing a few tens of atoms from a triangular lattice. The locsiton 'attached' to the defect 'decays' as the distance to the hole boundary increases, which is mostly a 'diffraction' effect, although some contribution from the imaginary part of q (like in evanescent 1D locsitons) is also present. In performing the numerical simulations for the plot, we made sure that the locsitons attached to the outside boundaries of the lattice patch (lying far outside the plotted region) do not interfere with the locsiton localized at the defect.\n\n23", + "recall": 0.8847736625514403, + "true_md": "so that the uniform, Lorentz, solution for the LF is reached at δ = δ ⊥ $_{LL}$, where D NNA 2 ⊥ ( q = 0 ) = 1. The second term in the r. h. s. of Eq. (35) is independent of the orientation of q , which means that no anisotropy caused by the lattice structure is present in the long- wavelength limit. We may thus conclude that, compared to the “ ‖ ” case, the locsitons in the “ ⊥ ” configuration are more reminiscent of the locsitons in 1D arrays of resonant atoms considered in [1, 2]. There is still no complete analogy here, as, e. g., the second term in the r. h. s. of Eq. (35) differs by a factor of 1 / 2 from the 1D result [2]. Moreover, dispersion relation (34) does become anisotropic for larger q , closer to the boundaries of the first Brillouin zone. This anisotropy, however, is by far less pronounced than that in the “ ‖ ” case.\n\nIt is instructive to also obtain the dispersion relation in the NRA. By replacing the summation in Eq. (34) with an integration over the “near ring”, following the procedure outlined in Sec. III A, we get\n\nThe resulting dispersion relation turns out to be independent of the orientation of q :\n\nwhich is not surprising given the NRA applicability in the long-wavelength limit.\n\nWhile it might be somewhat harder to create a uniform incident field polarized normally to a 2D lattice, the resulting locsitons could be much easier to control because of the small anisotropy of the interatomic interactions in the “ ⊥ ” geometry, compared to the “ ‖ ” ge- ometry. For example, defects in a 2D lattice can support localized locsitons, not unlike the evanescent 1D locsitons discussed in [2]. Compared to the complex locsiton patterns emerging in the “ ‖ ” geometry [cf. Fig. 4] these localized locsitons are more likely to form well-organized strata-like patterns in the “ ⊥ ” geometry. Fig. 6 shows concentric dipole strata that are formed around a circular hole made by\n\n⊥ Fig. 6 shows concentric dipole strata that are formed around a circular hole made by removing a few tens of atoms from a triangular lattice. The locsiton “attached” to the defect “decays” as the distance to the hole boundary increases, which is mostly a “diffraction” effect, although some contribution from the imaginary part of q (like in evanescent 1D locsitons) is also present. In performing the numerical simulations for the plot, we made sure that the locsitons attached to the outside boundaries of the lattice patch (lying far outside the plotted region) do not interfere with the locsiton localized at the defect.\n\n$$1 − 3 Q 2 π ∫ π 0 cos[ q cos( θ − ψ )] dθ = 0 . (36)$$\n\n$$D NRA 2 ⊥ ( q ) ≡ J$_{0}$ ( q ) = δ + i δ ⊥ LL , (37)$$\n\n23" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.12191512242262828, + "doc_id": "7af2a844f40a5f259ba7b428e0441db25d136f205e084815298ba89fd6c8a914", + "edit_distance": 0.7608426270136307, + "f1_score": 0.875, + "meteor": 0.32248490102700306, + "precision": 0.9459459459459459, + "pred_md": "TABLE III: Perturbative matching factors for the decay constants and mixing matrix elements evaluated for APE smeared and HYP smeared static-quark gauge links for the choices of the strong coupling constant α MF s .\n\nas\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nand present their values for our choice of simulation parameters in Table III. These will be used in the following section to extract the physical decay constants and ∆ B = 2 fourfermion matrix elements via the relations\n\n\n\n\n\nIn practice, the renormalization factor Z Φ cancels in the ratio f B s /f B d , and only the quantity Z SP /Z V A enters the ratio ξ . Therefore we do not need Z Φ (or Z V A and Z SP by themselves) for our current analysis of the SU (3)-breaking ratios. We present all three matching coefficients for completeness, however, because they will be necessary for calculating the individual decay constants and four-fermion operator-mixing matrix elements in future work.\n\n## IV. LATTICE CALCULATION OF SU (3) BREAKING RATIOS\n\nIn this section we calculate the ratios of the B -meson decay constants and mixing matrix elements at unphysical values of the light and strange quark masses. On each sea quark ensemble, we compute the necessary 2-point and 3-point correlation functions at two values of the valence quark mass: the unitary point m x = m l and a point tuned to the physical\n\n16", + "recall": 0.813953488372093, + "true_md": "TABLE III: Perturbative matching factors for the decay constants and mixing matrix elements evaluated for APE smeared and HYP smeared static-quark gauge links for the choices of the strong coupling constant α MF s .\n\nas\n\nand present their values for our choice of simulation parameters in Table III. These will be used in the following section to extract the physical decay constants and Δ B = 2 four- fermion matrix elements via the relations\n\nIn practice, the renormalization factor Z$_{Φ}$ cancels in the ratio f$_{B}$$\\_{s}$/f$\\_{B}$$_{d}$ , and only the quantity Z$_{SP}$/Z$_{V A}$ enters the ratio ξ . Therefore we do not need Z$_{Φ}$ (or Z$_{V A}$ and Z$_{SP}$ by themselves) for our current analysis of the SU (3)-breaking ratios. We present all three matching coefficients for completeness, however, because they will be necessary for calcu- lating the individual decay constants and four-fermion operator-mixing matrix elements in future work.\n\nIn this section we calculate the ratios of the B -meson decay constants and mixing matrix elements at unphysical values of the light and strange quark masses. On each sea quark ensemble, we compute the necessary 2-point and 3-point correlation functions at two values of the valence quark mass: the unitary point m$_{x}$ = m$_{l}$ and a point tuned to the physical\n\n16\n\n## IV. LATTICE CALCULATION OF SU (3) BREAKING RATIOS\n\n$$Z$_{Φ}$ ( a − $^{1}$) = C$_{A}$ ( a − $^{1}$) · Z MF A ( a − $^{1}$, a − $^{1}$) , (52)$$\n\n$$Z$_{V A}$ ( µ$_{b}$, a − $^{1}$) = Z$_{1}$ ( µ$_{b}$, a − $^{1}$) · Z MF L ( a − $^{1}$, a − $^{1}$) , (53)$$\n\n$$Z$_{SP}$ ( µ$_{b}$, a − $^{1}$) = Z$_{2}$ ( µ$_{b}$, a − $^{1}$) · Z MF S ( a − $^{1}$, a − $^{1}$) , (54)$$\n\n$$A QCD 0 = Z$_{Φ}$ ( a − $^{1}$) ( A lat 0 ( a − $^{1}$) + c MF A aA lat ∂, $_{0}$( a − $^{1}$) ) , (55) QCD ( µ$_{b}$ ) = Z$_{V A}$ ( µ$_{b}$, a − $^{1}$) O lat L ( a − $^{1}$) + Z$_{SP}$ ( µ$_{b}$, a − $^{1}$) O lat S ( a − $^{1}$) . (56)$$\n\n$$( ) O QCD L ( µ$_{b}$ ) = Z$_{V A}$ ( µ$_{b}$, a − $^{1}$) O lat L ( a − $^{1}$) + Z$_{SP}$ ( µ$_{b}$, a − $^{1}$) O lat S ( a − $^{1}$) . (56)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5920035345310047, + "doc_id": "8908b70338b74563087fafe9b8e4145f0e8d3a2644d8867cf0f2dbacddb7a68e", + "edit_distance": 0.389937106918239, + "f1_score": 0.9693593314763231, + "meteor": 0.8869495143405147, + "precision": 0.9775280898876404, + "pred_md": "distance between particle clusters resulting from the demixing process that occurs already in the bulk liquid and is not related to the front instability at all. Note that one finds a similar sequence of regimes (i) to (iv) when increasing the particle-particle interaction strengths for fixed ε nl (see Ref. [41]) for further details.\n\nFIG. 3: (Colour online) Dependence of the mean finger number left behind by the unstable dewetting front on the particle-liquid interaction strength ε nl . The regions marked (i) to (iv) are discussed in the main text. The insets display typical snapshots obtained in the four different regions. Particles are black, liquid is grey (green online) and the empty substrate is white. The remaining parameters are kT = 0 2 . , M = 20 , µ = -2 2 . , ρ av n = 0 1 . , glyph[epsilon1] nn = 2 0 . , domain size 1200 × 1200 . For the insets, from left to right, glyph[epsilon1] nl = 1 2 1 4 1 45 1 8 . , . , . , . .\n\nFIG. 3: (Colour online) Dependence of the mean finger number left behind by the unstable dewetting front on the particle-liquid interaction strength ε nl . The regions marked (i) to (iv) are discussed in the main text. The insets display typical snapshots obtained in the four different regions. Particles are black, liquid is grey (green online) and the empty substrate is white. The remaining parameters are kT = 0 2 . , M = 20 , µ = -2 2 . , ρ av n = 0 1 . , glyph[epsilon1] nn = 2 0 . , domain size 1200 × 1200 . For the insets, from left to right, glyph[epsilon1] nl = 1 2 1 4 1 45 1 8 . , . , . , . .\n\nnl\n\nWe note also that the fingering process may be viewed as self-optimising the front motion - i.e. the front keeps its average velocity constant by expelling particles into the fingers. A similar effect exists for dewetting polymer films [18], where liquid is expelled from the growing moving rim which collects the dewetted polymer. There, the surplus liquid is left on the surface as a droplet pattern.\n\nThe kinetic Monte Carlo model is a very useful tool that helps one to understand the pattern formation in drying nanoparticle suspensions. One has, however, to keep in mind the restrictions\n\n13", + "recall": 0.9613259668508287, + "true_md": "distance between particle clusters resulting from the demixing process that occurs already in the bulk liquid and is not related to the front instability at all. Note that one finds a similar sequence of regimes (i) to (iv) when increasing the particle-particle interaction strengths for fixed ε$_{nl}$ (see Ref. [41]) for further details.\n\nFIG. 3: (Colour online) Dependence of the mean finger number left behind by the unstable dewetting front on the particle-liquid interaction strength ε$_{nl}$ . The regions marked (i) to (iv) are discussed in the main text. The insets display typical snapshots obtained in the four different regions. Particles are black, liquid is grey (green online) and the empty substrate is white. The remaining parameters are kT = 0 . 2 , M = 20 , µ = − 2 . 2 , ρ av n = 0 . 1 , ϵ$_{nn}$ = 2 . 0 , domain size 1200 × 1200 . For the insets, from left to right, ϵ$_{nl}$ = 1 . 2 , 1 . 4 , 1 . 45 , 1 . 8 .\n\nWe note also that the fingering process may be viewed as self-optimising the front motion – i.e. the front keeps its average velocity constant by expelling particles into the fingers. A similar effect exists for dewetting polymer films [18], where liquid is expelled from the growing moving rim which collects the dewetted polymer. There, the surplus liquid is left on the surface as a droplet pattern.\n\nThe kinetic Monte Carlo model is a very useful tool that helps one to understand the pattern formation in drying nanoparticle suspensions. One has, however, to keep in mind the restrictions\n\n13" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7132240380472057, + "doc_id": "51c18315f8f4bbf74deb94dd415c04e9cc6996f50761790692239a4b629e0179", + "edit_distance": 0.3054003724394786, + "f1_score": 0.9553805774278215, + "meteor": 0.8078574607445786, + "precision": 0.9629629629629629, + "pred_md": "FIG. 1: (Color online). Energy levels for the environment Hamiltonian (4) with N = 50. The arrow (red online) shows the jump that the coupling with the central qubit produces in the environment.\n\nFIG. 1: (Color online). Energy levels for the environment Hamiltonian (4) with N = 50. The arrow (red online) shows the jump that the coupling with the central qubit produces in the environment.\n\nground state of the environment | g 0 〉 . At t = 0 we switch on the interaction between the system and the environment, and let the system evolve under the complete Hamiltonian. By instantaneously switching on this interaction, the energy of the environment increases, and its state gets fragmented into a region with average energy equal to E = 〈 g 0 | H α 1 ( ) | g 0 〉 . Therefore, if 〈 g 0 | H α 1 ( ) | g 0 〉 = 0, the coupling with the central qubit induces the environment to jump into a region arround the critical energy E c . This is illustrated in Fig. 1. Starting from a state in the parity broken phase with α < α c , the coupling with the qubit, H λ 1 = λn t increases the energy of the environment up to the critical point E c . Resorting to the coherent state approach [12], we can obtain a critical value of the coupling strength\n\n\n\nIn Fig. 2 we show the modulus of the decoherence factor | r t ( ) | for α = 0 and several values of λ (see caption). In four of the five cases we can see a similar pattern, fast oscillations plus a smooth decaying envelope. For λ /greaterorsimilar λ ∗ , this envelope is weakly dependent on λ . As we increase λ , the frequency of the short period oscillations increases linearly ν ≈ λ/ 3, but the main trend of the curve remains the same. The shape of the envelope can be fitted to a Gaussian decay for short times, and to a power-law decay for longer times; a similar behavior was identified in [5] if the Hamiltonian parameter is close to or larger than the critical value. However, the most striking feature of Fig. 2 is the panel corresponding to λ = 2, for which | r t ( ) | quickly decays to zero and then randomly oscillates around a small value. We note that this particular case constitutes a singular point for both the shape of\n\n5", + "recall": 0.9479166666666666, + "true_md": "FIG. 1: (Color online). Energy levels for the environment Hamiltonian (4) with N = 50. The arrow (red online) shows the jump that the coupling with the central qubit produces in the environment.\n\nground state of the environment | g$_{0}$ 〉 . At t = 0 we switch on the interaction between the system and the environment, and let the system evolve under the complete Hamiltonian. By instantaneously switching on this interaction, the energy of the environment increases, and its state gets fragmented into a region with average energy equal to E = 〈 g$_{0}$ | H$_{1}$ ( α ) | g$_{0}$ 〉 . Therefore, if 〈 g$_{0}$ | H$_{1}$ ( α ) | g$_{0}$ 〉 = 0, the coupling with the central qubit induces the environment to jump into a region arround the critical energy E$_{c}$ . This is illustrated in Fig. 1. Starting from a state in the parity broken phase with α < α$_{c}$ , the coupling with the qubit, H$_{λ}$$\\_{1}$ = λn$\\_{t}$ increases the energy of the environment up to the critical point E$\\_{c}$ . Resorting to the coherent state approach [12], we can obtain a critical value of the coupling strength\n\nIn Fig. 2 we show the modulus of the decoherence factor | r ( t ) | for α = 0 and several values of λ (see caption). In four of the five cases we can see a similar pattern, fast oscillations plus a smooth decaying envelope. For λ ≳ λ$_{∗}$ , this envelope is weakly dependent on λ . As we increase λ , the frequency of the short period oscillations increases linearly ν ≈ λ/ 3, but the main trend of the curve remains the same. The shape of the envelope can be fitted to a Gaussian decay for short times, and to a power-law decay for longer times; a similar behavior was identified in [5] if the Hamiltonian parameter is close to or larger than the critical value. However, the most striking feature of Fig. 2 is the panel corresponding to λ = 2, for which | r ( t ) | quickly decays to zero and then randomly oscillates around a small value. We note that this particular case constitutes a singular point for both the shape of\n\n$$λ$_{c}$ ( α ) = 1 2 (4 − 5 α ) , α < 4 5 . (7)$$\n\n5" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7542203182027692, + "doc_id": "263b11d266d4dcfecc1d328a911a3658a6ae501c9675b78c7bea8d65660b0066", + "edit_distance": 0.480225988700565, + "f1_score": 0.9562289562289562, + "meteor": 0.7280276883649247, + "precision": 0.9726027397260274, + "pred_md": "arXiv:1001.1590v1 [cond-mat.mes-hall] 11 Jan 2010\n\nTheoretical and experimental discovery of single-Dirac-cone topological-insulator class was reported in the same paper at arXiv:0812.2078 (2008) [http://arxiv.org/abs/0812.2078]. Perspectives and Published version at Y. Xia et.al., Nature Physics 5, 398-402 (2009) [http://dx.doi.org/10.1038/nphys1294].\n\n## First observation of Spin-Momentum helical locking in Bi Se 2 3 and Bi Te , demonstration of Topological-Order at 300K and a 2 3 realization of topological-transport-regime\n\nD. Hsieh, 1 Y. Xia, 1 D. Qian, 1, 2 L.A. Wray, 1 J. H. Dil, 3, 4 F. Meier, 3, 4 J. Osterwalder, 4 L. Patthey, 3 J. G. Checkelsky, 1 N. P. Ong, 1 A. V. Fedorov, 5 H. Lin, 6 A. Bansil, 6 D. Grauer, 7 Y. S. Hor, 7 R. J. Cava, 7 and M. Z. Hasan 1, 8 1 Joseph Henry Laboratories of Physics, Department of Physics, Princeton University, Princeton, NJ 08544, USA 2 Department of Physics, Shanghai Jiao Tong University, Shanghai 200030, China 3 Swiss Light Source, Paul Scherrer Institute, CH-5232, Villigen, Switzerland 4 Physik-Institut, Universitt Zrich-Irchel, 8057 Zrich, Switzerland a u u 5 Advanced Light Source, Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory, Berkeley, CA 94720, USA 6 Department of Physics, Northeastern University, Boston, MA 02115, USA 7 Department of Chemistry, Princeton University, Princeton, NJ 08544, USA 8 Princeton Center for Complex Materials, Princeton University, Princeton NJ 08544, USA ∗\n\n∗ Electronic address: mzhasan@Princeton.edu\n\n1", + "recall": 0.9403973509933775, + "true_md": "# First observation of Spin-Momentum helical locking in Bi$_{2}$Se$_{3}$ and Bi$_{2}$Te$_{3}$, demonstration of Topological-Order at 300K and a realization of topological-transport-regime\n\nD. Hsieh, 1 Y. Xia, 1 D. Qian, 1, 2 L.A. Wray, 1 J. H. Dil, 3, 4 F. Meier, 3, 4 J. Osterwalder, 4 L. Patthey, 3 J. G. Checkelsky, 1 N. P. Ong, 1 A. V. Fedorov, 5 H. Lin, 6 A. Bansil, 6 D. Grauer, 7 Y. S. Hor, 7 R. J. Cava, 7 and M. Z. Hasan 1, 8\n\n$^{1}$Joseph Henry Laboratories of Physics, Department of Physics, Princeton University, Princeton, NJ 08544, USA\n\n$^{2}$Department of Physics, Shanghai Jiao Tong University, Shanghai 200030, China\n\n$^{3}$Swiss Light Source, Paul Scherrer Institute, CH-5232, Villigen, Switzerland\n\n$^{4}$Physik-Institut, Universit¨ at Z¨ urich-Irchel, 8057 Z¨ urich, Switzerland\n\n$^{5}$Advanced Light Source, Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory, Berkeley, CA 94720, USA\n\n$^{6}$Department of Physics, Northeastern University, Boston, MA 02115, USA\n\n$^{7}$Department of Chemistry, Princeton University, Princeton, NJ 08544, USA\n\n$^{8}$Princeton Center for Complex Materials, Princeton University, Princeton NJ 08544, USA ∗\n\n∗ Electronic address: mzhasan@Princeton.edu\n\n1\n\narXiv:1001.1590v1 [cond-mat.mes-hall] 11 Jan 2010\n\nTheoretical and experimental discovery of single-Dirac-cone topological-insulator class was reported in the same paper at arXiv:0812.2078 (2008) [http://arxiv.org/abs/0812.2078]. Perspectives and Published version at Y. Xia et.al., Nature Physics 5, 398-402 (2009) [http://dx.doi.org/10.1038/nphys1294]." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5272702169052486, + "doc_id": "bca4f8775e004c65a3f6deffc4fe7f05f93dcdc803d4baea628809f02d523e2c", + "edit_distance": 0.3904191616766467, + "f1_score": 0.9307875894988067, + "meteor": 0.643875461100063, + "precision": 0.9605911330049262, + "pred_md": "errors.\n\nWe can also estimate the systematic uncertainty in the chiral extrapolation by comparing the values of f B s /f B d and ξ obtained by matching onto SU (2) HM χ PT with those obtained by matching onto SU (3) HM χ PT. Although the SU (2) chiral logarithms are a subset of the SU (3) chiral logarithms, the SU (2) and SU (3) theories have different series expansions and different degrees-of-convergence within their ranges of applicability. Therefore the comparison with NLO SU (3) HM χ PT provides another means of estimating the error due to the use of NLO SU (2) HM χ PT. The expressions for SU (3)-breaking ratios at NLO in SU (3) HM PT are, schematically, χ\n\n\n\nwhere 'chiral logs' indicate non-analytic functions of the pseudo-Goldstone meson masses, e.g. m 2 L log( m / 2 L Λ ). These are derived from Eqs. (D2) and (D3) by taking the ratio of the 2 χ expressions for the valence quark x = s over the expressions for x = . Because the strange l quark is treated in the same manner as the up and down quarks in the SU (3) chiral effective theory, the low-energy constants are the same in the numerator and denominator. Thus the overall normalizations cancel in the expressions in Eqs. (80) and (81) and the ratios are constrained to unity in the limit m l → m s . Therefore the expressions for the SU (3)breaking ratios have one free parameter each, instead of two as in the SU (2) HM χ PT case. This means that the SU (3) HM χ PT expressions cannot be matched smoothly onto the linear fit of the heavy data. We choose to make the value of the extrapolation function continuous, while leaving a discontinuity in the slope at the matching point. The difference between the linear plus NLO SU (2) HM χ PT fit and the linear plus NLO SU (3) HM χ PT fit leads to a difference in f B s /f B d of 2.3% (2.4%) for the APE (HYP) data and in ξ of 2.6% (2.5%) for APE (HYP).\n\n\n\nIn the preferred linear plus NLO SU (2) HM χ PT fit, we set the leading-order pseudoscalar meson decay constant f equal to the experimentally-measured value of f π . This fixes the coefficient of the chiral logarithms and improves the convergence of the chiral expansion [63, 64]. At NLO in χ PT, however, it is equally consistent to use the pseudoscalar decay constant in the SU (2) chiral limit f 0 or the kaon decay constant f K because the different choices only\n\n34", + "recall": 0.9027777777777778, + "true_md": "errors.\n\nWe can also estimate the systematic uncertainty in the chiral extrapolation by comparing the values of f$_{B}$$\\_{s}$/f$\\_{B}$$_{d}$ and ξ obtained by matching onto SU (2) HM χ PT with those obtained by matching onto SU (3) HM χ PT. Although the SU (2) chiral logarithms are a subset of the SU (3) chiral logarithms, the SU (2) and SU (3) theories have different series expansions and different degrees-of-convergence within their ranges of applicability. Therefore the compar- ison with NLO SU (3) HM χ PT provides another means of estimating the error due to the use of NLO SU (2) HM χ PT. The expressions for SU (3)-breaking ratios at NLO in SU (3) HM χ PT are, schematically,\n\nwhere “chiral logs” indicate non-analytic functions of the pseudo-Goldstone meson masses, e.g. m 2 $_{L}$log( m 2 $_{L}$/ Λ 2 $_{χ}$). These are derived from Eqs. (D2) and (D3) by taking the ratio of the expressions for the valence quark x = s over the expressions for x = l . Because the strange quark is treated in the same manner as the up and down quarks in the SU (3) chiral effective theory, the low-energy constants are the same in the numerator and denominator. Thus the overall normalizations cancel in the expressions in Eqs. (80) and (81) and the ratios are constrained to unity in the limit m$_{l}$ → m$_{s}$ . Therefore the expressions for the SU (3)- breaking ratios have one free parameter each, instead of two as in the SU (2) HM χ PT case. This means that the SU (3) HM χ PT expressions cannot be matched smoothly onto the linear fit of the heavy data. We choose to make the value of the extrapolation function continuous, while leaving a discontinuity in the slope at the matching point. The difference between the linear plus NLO SU (2) HM χ PT fit and the linear plus NLO SU (3) HM χ PT fit leads to a difference in f$_{B}$$\\_{s}$/f$\\_{B}$$_{d}$ of 2.3% (2.4%) for the APE (HYP) data and in ξ of 2.6% (2.5%) for APE (HYP).\n\nIn the preferred linear plus NLO SU (2) HM χ PT fit, we set the leading-order pseudoscalar meson decay constant f equal to the experimentally-measured value of f$_{π}$ . This fixes the coefficient of the chiral logarithms and improves the convergence of the chiral expansion [63, 64]. At NLO in χ PT, however, it is equally consistent to use the pseudoscalar decay constant in the SU (2) chiral limit f$_{0}$ or the kaon decay constant f$_{K}$ because the different choices only\n\n34\n\n$$Φ$_{B}$$_{s}$ Φ$_{B}$$_{l}$ = 1 + “chiral logs” + 2 B (4 πf ) 2 ˜ c$_{val}$ ( m$_{s}$ − m$_{l}$ ) , (80) M$_{B}$$_{s}$ = 1 + “chiral logs” + B 2 d$_{val}$ ( m$_{s}$ − m$_{l}$ ) , (81)$$\n\n$$Φ$_{B}$$_{l}$ (4 πf ) 2 ˜ − √ M$_{B}$$_{s}$ M$_{B}$$_{l}$ = 1 + “chiral logs” + B (4 πf ) 2 d$_{val}$ ( m$_{s}$ − m$_{l}$ ) , (81)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7801442456346837, + "doc_id": "bcdb485f019101def0adba399ecbff153abbbb09aeb3c2e665e7bef4397ad328", + "edit_distance": 0.12265758091993186, + "f1_score": 0.8279569892473118, + "meteor": 0.8693587429707077, + "precision": 0.8369565217391305, + "pred_md": "- [5] F. Brochard-Wyart and J. Daillant, 'Drying of solids wetted by thin liquid films,' Can. J. Phys. 68 , 1084-1088 (1989).\n- [6] P. Muller-Buschbaum, 'Dewetting and pattern formation in thin polymer films as investigated in real and reciprocal space,' J. Phys.-Condes. Matter 15 , R1549-R1582 (2003).\n- [7] R. Seemann, S. Herminghaus, C. Neto, S. Schlagowski, D. Podzimek, R. Konrad, H. Mantz, and K. Jacobs, 'Dynamics and structure formation in thin polymer melt films,' J. Phys.-Condes. Matter 17 , S267-S290 (2005).\n- [8] U. Thiele, 'Structure formation in thin liquid films,' in S. Kalliadasis and U. Thiele, editors, 'Thin films of Soft Matter,' pages 25-93, Springer, Wien (2007).\n- [9] R. Xie, A. Karim, J. F. Douglas, C. C. Han, and R. A. Weiss, 'Spinodal dewetting of thin polymer films,' Phys. Rev. Lett. 81 , 1251-1254 (1998).\n- [10] R. Seemann, S. Herminghaus, and K. Jacobs, 'Dewetting patterns and molecular forces: A reconciliation,' Phys. Rev. Lett. 86 , 5534-5537 (2001).\n- [11] U. Thiele, M. G. Velarde, and K. Neuffer, 'Dewetting: Film rupture by nucleation in the spinodal regime,' Phys. Rev. Lett. 87 , 016104 (2001).\n- [12] M. Bestehorn and K. Neuffer, 'Surface patterns of laterally extended thin liquid films in three dimensions,' Phys. Rev. Lett. 87 , 046101 (2001).\n- [13] J. Becker, G. Grun, R. Seemann, H. Mantz, K. Jacobs, K. R. Mecke, and R. Blossey, 'Complex dewetting scenarios captured by thin-film models,' Nat. Mater. 2 , 59-63 (2003).\n- [14] C. Redon, F. Brochard-Wyart, and F. Rondelez, 'Dynamics of dewetting,' Phys. Rev. Lett. 66 , 715718 (1991).\n- [15] R. Seemann, S. Herminghaus, and K. Jacobs, 'Shape of a liquid front upon dewetting,' Phys. Rev. Lett. 87 , 196101 (2001).\n- [16] R. Fetzer, K. Jacobs, A. Mnch, B. Wagner, and T. P. Witelski, 'New slip regimes and the shape of u dewetting thin liquid films,' Phys. Rev. Lett. 95 , 127801 (2005).\n- [17] F. Brochard-Wyart and C. Redon, 'Dynamics of liquid rim instabilities,' Langmuir 8 , 2324-2329 (1992).\n- [18] G. Reiter and A. Sharma, 'Auto-optimization of dewetting rates by rim instabilities in slipping polymer films,' Phys. Rev. Lett. 87 , 166103 (2001).\n- [19] A. Munch and B. Wagner, 'Contact-line instability of dewetting thin films,' Physica D 209 , 178-190 (2005).\n\n26", + "recall": 0.8191489361702128, + "true_md": "- [5] F. Brochard-Wyart and J. Daillant, “Drying of solids wetted by thin liquid films,” Can. J. Phys. 68 , 1084–1088 (1989).\n\n- [6] P. M¨uller-Buschbaum, “Dewetting and pattern formation in thin polymer films as investigated in real and reciprocal space,” J. Phys.-Condes. Matter 15 , R1549–R1582 (2003).\n\n- [7] R. Seemann, S. Herminghaus, C. Neto, S. Schlagowski, D. Podzimek, R. Konrad, H. Mantz, and K. Jacobs, “Dynamics and structure formation in thin polymer melt films,” J. Phys.-Condes. Matter 17 , S267–S290 (2005).\n\n- [8] U. Thiele, “Structure formation in thin liquid films,” in S. Kalliadasis and U. Thiele, editors, “Thin films of Soft Matter,” pages 25–93, Springer, Wien (2007).\n\n- [9] R. Xie, A. Karim, J. F. Douglas, C. C. Han, and R. A. Weiss, “Spinodal dewetting of thin polymer films,” Phys. Rev. Lett. 81 , 1251–1254 (1998).\n\n- [10] R. Seemann, S. Herminghaus, and K. Jacobs, “Dewetting patterns and molecular forces: A reconcil- iation,” Phys. Rev. Lett. 86 , 5534–5537 (2001).\n\n- [11] U. Thiele, M. G. Velarde, and K. Neuffer, “Dewetting: Film rupture by nucleation in the spinodal regime,” Phys. Rev. Lett. 87 , 016104 (2001).\n\n- [12] M. Bestehorn and K. Neuffer, “Surface patterns of laterally extended thin liquid films in three di- mensions,” Phys. Rev. Lett. 87 , 046101 (2001).\n\n- [13] J. Becker, G. Gr¨un, R. Seemann, H. Mantz, K. Jacobs, K. R. Mecke, and R. Blossey, “Complex dewetting scenarios captured by thin-film models,” Nat. Mater. 2 , 59–63 (2003).\n\n- [14] C. Redon, F. Brochard-Wyart, and F. Rondelez, “Dynamics of dewetting,” Phys. Rev. Lett. 66 , 715– 718 (1991).\n\n- [15] R. Seemann, S. Herminghaus, and K. Jacobs, “Shape of a liquid front upon dewetting,” Phys. Rev. Lett. 87 , 196101 (2001).\n\n- [16] R. Fetzer, K. Jacobs, A. M¨unch, B. Wagner, and T. P. Witelski, “New slip regimes and the shape of dewetting thin liquid films,” Phys. Rev. Lett. 95 , 127801 (2005).\n\n- [17] F. Brochard-Wyart and C. Redon, “Dynamics of liquid rim instabilities,” Langmuir 8 , 2324–2329 (1992).\n\n- [18] G. Reiter and A. Sharma, “Auto-optimization of dewetting rates by rim instabilities in slipping poly- mer films,” Phys. Rev. Lett. 87 , 166103 (2001).\n\n- [19] A. M¨unch and B. Wagner, “Contact-line instability of dewetting thin films,” Physica D 209 , 178–190 (2005).\n\n26" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5542542092864281, + "doc_id": "3798b710d4b193e7e4de67dde91968afc3beabacdd3911e3d53712c72ee86396", + "edit_distance": 0.37632776934749623, + "f1_score": 0.9115044247787611, + "meteor": 0.6409343327294086, + "precision": 0.9321266968325792, + "pred_md": "moment d a . In the linear case, i. e., when the laser intensity is significantly lower than the saturation intensity, the results for the two-level model coincide exactly with those for the classical harmonic oscillator, see [2]. We further only consider lattices of atoms interacting via quasistatic near-field dipole forces. In general, this assumption is valid if, on one hand, the minimum separation l a between atoms is not too small, so that their atomic orbitals do not overlap, and, on the other hand, the lattice is finite and its overall dimensions are smaller than the laser wavelength λ . However, in most cases, in particular within the NNA, which is the most common one and used throughout this paper, the sufficient condition is much less restrictive, only requiring that the interatomic separation l a /lessmuch λ , which is the same limit as in the standard LLT [3].\n\nThe LF acting upon a given atom located at a point r is a superposition of the incident ('external') field E in and the sum of the fields E dp ( r r , ' ) from surrounding dipoles at all other lattice positions r ' over the entire lattice:\n\n/negationslash\n\n\n\nwhere the near fields of the surrounding atomic dipoles p r ( ' ) are dominated by the nonradiative (quasi-static) components [14],\n\n\n\n/negationslash\n\nHere u ≡ ( r -r ' ) / | r -r ' | is a unit vector along the line connecting the two atoms, /epsilon1 is the background dielectric constant ( /epsilon1 = 1 in vacuum and /epsilon1 = 1 if a host medium is present). The atomic dipoles p r ( ' ) are, in turn, induced by the LF acting upon them. In the case of linear optical response of a two-level atom, its induced dipole moment is\n\n\n\nwhere δ ≡ T ω ( -ω 0 ) is a dimensionless laser frequency detuning and T = 2 Γ is the / transverse relaxation time of the atom with a resonant homogeneous linewidth Γ. The condition that the electron orbitals of neighboring atoms do not overlap implies that l a /greatermuch | d a | /e and justifies our use of a semiclassical approach. Nonlinear effects in systems of resonant atoms could be included into this picture via the saturation nonlinearity of the twolevel system. As we have recently demonstrated [1, 2], the nonlinearity enables interesting\n\n6", + "recall": 0.8917748917748918, + "true_md": "moment d a . In the linear case, i. e., when the laser intensity is significantly lower than the saturation intensity, the results for the two-level model coincide exactly with those for the classical harmonic oscillator, see [2]. We further only consider lattices of atoms interacting via quasistatic near-field dipole forces. In general, this assumption is valid if, on one hand, the minimum separation l a between atoms is not too small, so that their atomic orbitals do not overlap, and, on the other hand, the lattice is finite and its overall dimensions are smaller than the laser wavelength λ . However, in most cases, in particular within the NNA, which is the most common one and used throughout this paper, the sufficient condition is much less restrictive, only requiring that the interatomic separation l a ≪ λ , which is the same limit as in the standard LLT [3].\n\nThe LF acting upon a given atom located at a point r is a superposition of the incident (“external”) field E$_{in}$ and the sum of the fields E$_{dp}$ ( r , r $^{′}$) from surrounding dipoles at all other lattice positions r ′ over the entire lattice:\n\n$$E$_{L}$ ( r ) = E$_{in}$ ( r ) + $^{$_{r}$′}$̸ = r ∑ lattice E$_{dp}$ ( r , r $^{′}$) , (1)$$\n\nwhere the near fields of the surrounding atomic dipoles p ( r $^{′}$) are dominated by the non- radiative (quasi-static) components [14],\n\nHere u ≡ ( r − r $^{′}$) / | r − r $^{′}$| is a unit vector along the line connecting the two atoms, ϵ is the background dielectric constant ( ϵ = 1 in vacuum and ϵ ̸ = 1 if a host medium is present). The atomic dipoles p ( r $^{′}$) are, in turn, induced by the LF acting upon them. In the case of linear optical response of a two-level atom, its induced dipole moment is\n\nwhere δ ≡ T ( ω − ω$_{0}$ ) is a dimensionless laser frequency detuning and T = 2 / Γ is the transverse relaxation time of the atom with a resonant homogeneous linewidth Γ. The condition that the electron orbitals of neighboring atoms do not overlap implies that l a ≫ | d a | /e and justifies our use of a semiclassical approach. Nonlinear effects in systems of resonant atoms could be included into this picture via the saturation nonlinearity of the two- level system. As we have recently demonstrated [1, 2], the nonlinearity enables interesting\n\n$$E$_{dp}$ ( r , r $^{′}$) = 3 u [ p ( r $^{′}$) · u ] − p ( r $^{′}$) ϵ | r ′ − r | 3 . (2)$$\n\n$$p ( r ) = − E$_{L}$ ( r ) 2 | d a | 2 ¯ h Γ( δ + i ) , (3)$$\n\n6" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.948817232064567, + "doc_id": "4b3aac5cd7281f110f20930268041120b72717fcd8953bfdaca4636e84ff4e04", + "edit_distance": 0.06666666666666667, + "f1_score": 0.978723404255319, + "meteor": 0.9964001291213619, + "precision": 0.9583333333333334, + "pred_md": "- T. Qiu, Y. S. Piao and X. Zhang, Phys. Lett. B 666 , 212 (2008) [arXiv:0805.0413 [astro-ph]].\n\n17", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "17\n\nT. Qiu, Y. S. Piao and X. Zhang, Phys. Lett. B 666 , 212 (2008) [arXiv:0805.0413 [astro-ph]]." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.004743742789709116, + "doc_id": "de943d48d85020628a2e70ac142d14647de76845e24c543dfc4e5053b3ad5299", + "edit_distance": 0.8803088803088803, + "f1_score": 0.6323529411764706, + "meteor": 0.14040968836710555, + "precision": 0.8775510204081632, + "pred_md": "In the expression of annihilation cross section, we used the following notations :\n\n\n\n## Appendix B: Amplitude\n\nWe give explicit formulas of the invariant amplitude squared for the pair annihilation processes of the RH neutrinos.\n\n## 1. Annihilation into charged fermions\n\n\n\n## 2. Annihilation into neutrinos\n\n- a. Annihilation into ν , ν a a (light active-like neutrinos)\n\n\n\n10", + "recall": 0.4942528735632184, + "true_md": "In the expression of annihilation cross section, we used the following notations :\n\n$$∂ Φ ∂h = 1 √$_{2}$ cos θ, ∂ Φ ∂H = 1 √$_{2}$ sin θ, ∂ Ψ ∂h = − 1 √$_{2}$ sin θ, ∂ Ψ ∂H = 1 √$_{2}$ cos θ. (A6)$$\n\n$$|M| 2 = 32 ∣ g 2 $^{B}$−$_{L}$q$_{f}$ q$_{N}$ s − M 2 Z ′ + iM$_{Z}$ ′ Γ$_{Z}$ ′ ∣ ∣$^{2}$$^{(}$$^{s}$ − 4 m 2 $_{N}$) ( 3 8 s − 1 2 ( s 2 − m 2 f ) + 1 2 ( s 4 − m 2 f ) cos 2 θ ) +16 λ 2 N ∣ ∣$^{y$_{f}$}$ ( ∂ Φ ∂h i s − M 2 h + iM$_{h}$ Γ$_{h}$ ∂ Ψ ∂h + ∂ Φ ∂H i s − M 2 H + iM$_{H}$ Γ$_{H}$ ∂ Ψ ∂H )∣ ∣ ∣$^{2}$ ( s − 4 m 2 $_{N}$) ( s 4 − m 2 f ) . (B1)$$\n\n## Appendix B: Amplitude\n\nWe give explicit formulas of the invariant amplitude squared for the pair annihilation processes of the RH neutrinos.\n\n## 1. Annihilation into charged fermions\n\n## 2. Annihilation into neutrinos\n\n## a. Annihilation into ν$_{a}$, ν$_{a}$ (light active-like neutrinos)\n\n$$|M| 2 = 32 ∣ g 2 $^{B}$−$_{L}$q$_{f}$ q$_{N}$ s − M 2 Z ′ + iM$_{Z}$ ′ Γ$_{Z}$ ′ ∣ ∣$^{2}$$^{(}$$^{s}$ − 4 m 2 $_{N}$) ( 3 8 s − 1 2 ( s 2 + m 2 ν$_{a}$ ) + 1 2 ( s 4 + m 2 ν$_{a}$ ) cos 2 θ ) . (B2)$$\n\n10" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "261c7fca8c5c46129d17245fa2c43aa93ee2feb4c35d935fde9d6293cd9231fd", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999999975405498, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "37\n\n- [10] C. Csaki, C. Grojean, L. Pilo and J. Terning, Phys. Rev. Lett. 92 , 101802 (2004), [hep-ph/0308038].\n- [11] G. Cacciapaglia, C. Csaki, C. Grojean and J. Terning, ECONF C040802 , FRT004 (2004).\n- [12] G. Cacciapaglia, C. Csaki, C. Grojean and J. Terning, Phys. Rev. D71 , 035015 (2005), [hep-ph/0409126].\n- [13] G. Cacciapaglia, C. Csaki, C. Grojean and J. Terning, Phys. Rev. D70 , 075014 (2004), [hep-ph/0401160].\n- [14] H. Davoudiasl, J. L. Hewett, B. Lillie and T. G. Rizzo, JHEP 05 , 015 (2004), [hep-ph/0403300].\n- [15] M. S. Carena, E. Ponton, J. Santiago and C. E. M. Wagner, Nucl. Phys. B759 , 202 (2006), [hep-ph/0607106].\n- [16] G. Cacciapaglia, C. Csaki, G. Marandella and J. Terning, JHEP 02 , 036 (2007), [hep-ph/0611358].\n- [17] R. Contino, T. Kramer, M. Son and R. Sundrum, JHEP 05 , 074 (2007), [hep-ph/0612180].\n- [18] M. S. Carena, T. M. P. Tait and C. E. M. Wagner, Acta Phys. Polon. B33 , 2355 (2002), [hep-ph/0207056].\n- [19] C. Csaki, J. Erlich and J. Terning, Phys. Rev. D66 , 064021 (2002), [hep-ph/0203034].\n- [20] M. S. Carena, E. Ponton, T. M. P. Tait and C. E. M. Wagner, Phys. Rev. D67 , 096006 (2003), [hep-ph/0212307].\n- [21] Y. Cui, T. Gherghetta and J. D. Wells, JHEP 11 , 080 (2009), [0907.0906].\n- [22] R. Foadi and C. Schmidt, Phys. Rev. D73 , 075011 (2006), [hep-ph/0509071].\n- [23] R. Casalbuoni, S. De Curtis, D. Dominici and D. Dolce, JHEP 08 , 053 (2007), [arXiv:0705.2510 [hep-ph]].\n- [24] Y. Nomura, JHEP 11 , 050 (2003), [hep-ph/0309189].\n- [25] R. Barbieri, A. Pomarol and R. Rattazzi, Phys. Lett. B591 , 141 (2004), [hep-ph/0310285].\n- [26] R. Barbieri, A. Pomarol, R. Rattazzi and A. Strumia, Nucl. Phys. B703 , 127 (2004), [hep-ph/0405040].\n- [27] N. Arkani-Hamed, A. G. Cohen and H. Georgi, Phys. Rev. Lett. 86 , 4757 (2001), [hep-th/0104005].\n- [28] N. Arkani-Hamed, A. G. Cohen and H. Georgi, Phys. Lett. B513 , 232 (2001), [hep-ph/0105239].\n- [29] C. T. Hill, S. Pokorski and J. Wang, Phys. Rev. D64 , 105005 (2001), [hep-th/0104035].", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "37\n\n- [10] C. Csaki, C. Grojean, L. Pilo and J. Terning, Phys. Rev. Lett. 92 , 101802 (2004), [hep-ph/0308038].\n\n- [11] G. Cacciapaglia, C. Csaki, C. Grojean and J. Terning, ECONF C040802 , FRT004 (2004).\n\n- [12] G. Cacciapaglia, C. Csaki, C. Grojean and J. Terning, Phys. Rev. D71 , 035015 (2005), [hep-ph/0409126].\n\n- [13] G. Cacciapaglia, C. Csaki, C. Grojean and J. Terning, Phys. Rev. D70 , 075014 (2004), [hep-ph/0401160].\n\n- [14] H. Davoudiasl, J. L. Hewett, B. Lillie and T. G. Rizzo, JHEP 05 , 015 (2004), [hep-ph/0403300].\n\n- [15] M. S. Carena, E. Ponton, J. Santiago and C. E. M. Wagner, Nucl. Phys. B759 , 202 (2006), [hep-ph/0607106].\n\n- [16] G. Cacciapaglia, C. Csaki, G. Marandella and J. Terning, JHEP 02 , 036 (2007), [hep-ph/0611358].\n\n- [17] R. Contino, T. Kramer, M. Son and R. Sundrum, JHEP 05 , 074 (2007), [hep-ph/0612180].\n\n- [18] M. S. Carena, T. M. P. Tait and C. E. M. Wagner, Acta Phys. Polon. B33 , 2355 (2002), [hep-ph/0207056].\n\n- [19] C. Csaki, J. Erlich and J. Terning, Phys. Rev. D66 , 064021 (2002), [hep-ph/0203034].\n\n- [20] M. S. Carena, E. Ponton, T. M. P. Tait and C. E. M. Wagner, Phys. Rev. D67 , 096006 (2003), [hep-ph/0212307].\n\n- [21] Y. Cui, T. Gherghetta and J. D. Wells, JHEP 11 , 080 (2009), [0907.0906].\n\n- [22] R. Foadi and C. Schmidt, Phys. Rev. D73 , 075011 (2006), [hep-ph/0509071].\n\n- [23] R. Casalbuoni, S. De Curtis, D. Dominici and D. Dolce, JHEP 08 , 053 (2007), [arXiv:0705.2510 [hep-ph]].\n\n- [24] Y. Nomura, JHEP 11 , 050 (2003), [hep-ph/0309189].\n\n- [25] R. Barbieri, A. Pomarol and R. Rattazzi, Phys. Lett. B591 , 141 (2004), [hep-ph/0310285].\n\n- [26] R. Barbieri, A. Pomarol, R. Rattazzi and A. Strumia, Nucl. Phys. B703 , 127 (2004), [hep-ph/0405040].\n\n- [27] N. Arkani-Hamed, A. G. Cohen and H. Georgi, Phys. Rev. Lett. 86 , 4757 (2001), [hep-th/0104005].\n\n- [28] N. Arkani-Hamed, A. G. Cohen and H. Georgi, Phys. Lett. B513 , 232 (2001), [hep-ph/0105239].\n\n- [29] C. T. Hill, S. Pokorski and J. Wang, Phys. Rev. D64 , 105005 (2001), [hep-th/0104035]." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.3181685615358668, + "doc_id": "e6522577d0fa85892341b4d54ff9ee682cedc4125756a1e240a432838e9e3e6f", + "edit_distance": 0.6986062717770035, + "f1_score": 0.842443729903537, + "meteor": 0.4100244974597228, + "precision": 0.916083916083916, + "pred_md": "The EMGB solution that will be employed as a thin-shell solution with a normal matter [6] is given by (with Λ = 0)\n\n\n\nwith constants, M =mass and Q =charge. For a black hole solution the inner ( r -) and event horizons ( r + = r h ) are\n\n\n\nBy employing the solution (14) we determine the surface energy-momentum on the thinshell, which will play the major role in the perturbation. We shall address this problem in the next section.\n\n## III. RADIAL, LINEAR PERTURBATION OF THE THIN-SHELL WORMHOLE WITH NORMAL MATTER\n\nIn order to study the radial perturbations of the wormhole we take the throat radius as a function of the proper time, i.e., a = a ( τ ). Based on the generalized Birkhoff theorem, for r > a ( τ ) the geometry will be given still by (6). For the metric function f ( r ) given in (14) one finds the energy density and pressures as [6]\n\n\n\nwhere /lscript = ¨ + a f ' ( a ) / 2 and ∆ = √ f ( a ) + ˙ a 2 in which\n\n\n\n\n\nWe note that in our notation a 'dot' denotes derivative with respect to the proper time τ and a 'prime' implies differentiation with respect to the argument of the function. By a simple substitution one can show that, the conservation equation\n\n\n\n5", + "recall": 0.7797619047619048, + "true_md": "The EMGB solution that will be employed as a thin-shell solution with a normal matter [6] is given by (with Λ = 0)\n\nwith constants, M =mass and Q =charge. For a black hole solution the inner ( r$_{−}$ ) and event horizons ( r + = r$_{h}$ ) are\n\nBy employing the solution (14) we determine the surface energy-momentum on the thin- shell, which will play the major role in the perturbation. We shall address this problem in the next section.\n\nIn order to study the radial perturbations of the wormhole we take the throat radius as a function of the proper time, i.e., a = a ( τ ). Based on the generalized Birkhoff theorem, for r > a ( τ ) the geometry will be given still by (6). For the metric function f ( r ) given in (14) one finds the energy density and pressures as [6]\n\n## III. RADIAL, LINEAR PERTURBATION OF THE THIN-SHELL WORMHOLE WITH NORMAL MATTER\n\nWe note that in our notation a ’dot’ denotes derivative with respect to the proper time τ and a ’prime’ implies differentiation with respect to the argument of the function. By a simple substitution one can show that, the conservation equation\n\n5\n\n$$d dτ ( σa $^{3}$) + p d dτ ( a $^{3}$) = 0 . (19) 5$$\n\n$$√ f ( a ) = 1 + a 2 4 α ( 1 − √ 1 + 8 α a 4 ( 2 M π − Q 2 3 a 2 ) . (18)$$\n\n$$σ = − S τ = − Δ 4 π [ 3 a − 4 α a 3 ( Δ 2 − 3 ( 1 + ˙ a $^{2}$)) ] , (16) S θ = S φ φ = S ψ ψ = p = 1 4 π [ 2Δ a + ℓ Δ − 4 α a 2 ( ℓ Δ − ℓ Δ ( 1 + ˙ a $^{2}$) − 2¨ a Δ )] , (17) = ¨ a + f $^{′}$( a ) / 2 and Δ = √ f ( a ) + ˙ a 2 in which$$\n\n$$r$_{±}$ = √ M π − α ± [ ( M π − α ) 2 − Q 2 3 ] 1 / 2 . (15)$$\n\n$$f ( r ) = 1 + r 2 4 α ( 1 − √ 1 + 8 α r 4 ( 2 M π − Q 2 3 r 2 ) ) (14)$$\n\nwhere ℓ = ¨ a + f $^{′}$( a ) / 2 and Δ = √ f ( a ) + ˙ a 2 in which a 2 ( √ 8 α (" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5727042911993891, + "doc_id": "c53cfc40596e7264c8c51719665867f06b20e70e36cd89b59e5bbf4d8c675d77", + "edit_distance": 0.3811965811965812, + "f1_score": 0.9358288770053477, + "meteor": 0.6808537484129825, + "precision": 0.9562841530054644, + "pred_md": "there is no friction between the piston and the lateral walls of the vessel containing the gas. The system of particles is kept fluidized and at low density by injecting energy through the bottom wall, which is vibrating. Inelasticity in collisions between particles is modeled by means of a constant coefficient of normal restitution, α , defined in the interval 0 < α < 1. Thus when two particles i and j collide their velocities change instantaneously from the initial values v i , v j to the post-collisional ones given by\n\n\n\nwhere v ij ≡ v i -v j is the relative velocity and ̂ σ is the unit vector joining the center of the two particles at contact. The z axis will be taken in the direction of the gravitational field, so that the particles are submitted to an external force of the form f = -mg 0 ̂ e z , g 0 being a positive constant and ̂ e z the positive unit vector along the z axis. Collisions of particles with the movable piston on the top are also considered as smooth and inelastic, α P being the coefficient of normal restitution for them. Therefore, in a collision between particle i and the piston, the component v i,x of the velocity of the particle perpendicular to the z axis remains unchanged,\n\n\n\n\n\nwhile the component v i,z of the velocity of the particle and the velocity V z of the piston are instantaneously modified accordingly with\n\n\n\nand\n\n\n\nrespectively. When the transversal section of the system, i.e. the size of the piston W , is smaller than a critical value [15, 16], the gas reaches, after a transient time interval, a stationary state with gradients only in the direction of the gravitational field. If, in addition, the inelasticity of the system is small, the inelastic hydrodynamic Navier-Stokes equations with the appropriate boundary conditions [17, 18] provide an accurate description of the stationary state [19]. As the coefficient of normal restitution of the gas α decreases, significant deviations from the predictions following from the Navier-Stokes equations show up.\n\n4", + "recall": 0.9162303664921466, + "true_md": "there is no friction between the piston and the lateral walls of the vessel containing the gas. The system of particles is kept fluidized and at low density by injecting energy through the bottom wall, which is vibrating. Inelasticity in collisions between particles is modeled by means of a constant coefficient of normal restitution, α , defined in the interval 0 < α < 1. Thus when two particles i and j collide their velocities change instantaneously from the initial values v$_{i}$ , v$_{j}$ to the post-collisional ones given by\n\nwhere v$_{ij}$ ≡ v$_{i}$ − v$_{j}$ is the relative velocity and ̂ σ is the unit vector joining the center of the two particles at contact. The z axis will be taken in the direction of the gravitational field, so that the particles are submitted to an external force of the form f = − mg 0 ̂ e$_{z}$ , g 0 being a positive constant and ̂ e$_{z}$ the positive unit vector along the z axis. Collisions of particles with the movable piston on the top are also considered as smooth and inelastic, α$_{P}$ being the coefficient of normal restitution for them. Therefore, in a collision between particle i and the piston, the component v$_{i,x}$ of the velocity of the particle perpendicular to the z axis remains unchanged,\n\nwhile the component v$_{i,z}$ of the velocity of the particle and the velocity V$_{z}$ of the piston are instantaneously modified accordingly with\n\nand\n\nrespectively. When the transversal section of the system, i.e. the size of the piston W , is smaller than a critical value [15, 16], the gas reaches, after a transient time interval, a stationary state with gradients only in the direction of the gravitational field. If, in addition, the inelasticity of the system is small, the inelastic hydrodynamic Navier-Stokes equations with the appropriate boundary conditions [17, 18] provide an accurate description of the stationary state [19]. As the coefficient of normal restitution of the gas α decreases, signif- icant deviations from the predictions following from the Navier-Stokes equations show up.\n\n$$v ′ i,x = v$_{i,x}$, (3)$$\n\n$$v ′ i,z = v$_{i,z}$ − M m + M (1 + α$_{P}$ )( v$_{i,z}$ − V$_{z}$ ) (4)$$\n\n$$V ′ z = V$_{z}$ + m m + M (1 + α$_{P}$ )( v$_{i,z}$ − V$_{z}$ ) , (5)$$\n\n4" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.734062448229834, + "doc_id": "d42e06f455fd7291a74c01df208b6e7e9539ca80b5553f31dad97295d9f9fdbf", + "edit_distance": 0.2413223140495868, + "f1_score": 0.9475890985324946, + "meteor": 0.7817969846534694, + "precision": 0.9783549783549783, + "pred_md": "11\n\nThe simplest wave functions that change the topology are those that involve many (maximal) giant gravitons on top of each other. The giant gravitons in the type IIB gravity theory in AdS 5 × S 5 are extended brane configuration with the same quantum numbers as gravitons [37] that wrap an S 3 inside S 5 . If one places many of them on top of each other one expects a throat to form in the geometry near the location of the branes and to excise the branes from the geometry and replace them by fluxes [31, 38, 39]. The new topological feature is associated to the removal of the branes and the capping of the region of spacetime where they have been removed.\n\nIn the dual field theory these are described at weak coupling in [32] and can be related to a system of free fermions on a two-dimensional phase space [33, 40]. This picture, in terms of incompressible quantum droplets is recovered geometrically in the half-BPS geometries [31], where the exact geometries of the capping are understood for half BPS D-branes with arbitrary shapes. These giant graviton states have been extensively studied at weak coupling. A recent review of many of these results can be found in [41].\n\nNow, just having the map of droplets to states and to gravity does not mean that we understand the ten dimensional geometry from field theory. It just gives us a correspondence of particular solutions, and our task would be to explain the ten dimensional geometry from this data: how did the extra dimensions arise and why is there locality, time bending, etc., in the geometries. This is too hard with present techniques, which is why we will look at the field theory probability distributions for the quenched wave functions directly.\n\nThe wave functions we consider are given by\n\n\n\nwhere Z 1 = X 1 + iX 2 in terms of the matrices and Q is an integer determining the number of giant gravitons. These are also given by z 1 i coordinates. Notice that Q is an integer in order for the wave function to be single valued. The normalization of ψ does not matter to determine the eigenvalue distribution, after all, wave functions are rays in a Hilbert space.\n\nThe associated probability distribution of the eigenvalues (particles in six dimensions) is given by\n\n\n\nNotice that this probability distribution can be interpreted as a Boltzmann gas of particles with two body repulsive logarithmic interactions in 6 dimensions, subject to a background", + "recall": 0.9186991869918699, + "true_md": "11\n\nThe simplest wave functions that change the topology are those that involve many (max- imal) giant gravitons on top of each other. The giant gravitons in the type IIB gravity theory in AdS$_{5}$ × S 5 are extended brane configuration with the same quantum numbers as gravitons [37] that wrap an S 3 inside S $^{5}$. If one places many of them on top of each other one expects a throat to form in the geometry near the location of the branes and to excise the branes from the geometry and replace them by fluxes [31, 38, 39]. The new topological feature is associated to the removal of the branes and the capping of the region of spacetime where they have been removed.\n\nIn the dual field theory these are described at weak coupling in [32] and can be related to a system of free fermions on a two-dimensional phase space [33, 40]. This picture, in terms of incompressible quantum droplets is recovered geometrically in the half-BPS geometries [31], where the exact geometries of the capping are understood for half BPS D-branes with arbitrary shapes. These giant graviton states have been extensively studied at weak coupling.\n\nA recent review of many of these results can be found in [41].\n\nNow, just having the map of droplets to states and to gravity does not mean that we understand the ten dimensional geometry from field theory. It just gives us a correspondence of particular solutions, and our task would be to explain the ten dimensional geometry from this data: how did the extra dimensions arise and why is there locality, time bending, etc., in the geometries. This is too hard with present techniques, which is why we will look at the field theory probability distributions for the quenched wave functions directly.\n\nThe wave functions we consider are given by\n\nwhere Z 1 = X 1 + iX 2 in terms of the matrices and Q is an integer determining the number of giant gravitons. These are also given by z 1 i coordinates. Notice that Q is an integer in order for the wave function to be single valued. The normalization of ψ does not matter to determine the eigenvalue distribution, after all, wave functions are rays in a Hilbert space.\n\nThe associated probability distribution of the eigenvalues (particles in six dimensions) is given by ( )\n\n∑ ∑ ∑ Notice that this probability distribution can be interpreted as a Boltzmann gas of particles with two body repulsive logarithmic interactions in 6 dimensions, subject to a background\n\n$$ψ$_{Q}$ = det( Z $^{1}$) $^{Q}$ψ$_{0}$ (6)$$\n\n$$p ∼ exp ( − ∑ i | ⃗ x$_{i}$ | 2 + Q ∑ i log( | z 1 i | $^{2}$) + ∑ i\n\nThe maximizing matrix U max is found iteratively by decomposing it into its SU (2) subgroups as outlined in Refs. [47, 80]. Although, by the compactness of SU (3), a global maximum exists, it is not guaranteed that this iterative procedure converges to the true maximum. Furthermore, the matrix obtained by the iterative procedure depends on the details of the iteration algorithm. In practice, however, one finds that U max is numerically very close to V , the SU (3) projection of the matrix V obtained from the unit circle projection, [46], and hence the iteratively found maximum is close to the true maximum. Thus we choose\n\n\n\nFinally, we show that although the two projection methods are generally not equivalent they differ only at second order. For this discussion we assume that the iterative method converges to the global maximum and that the unprojected matrix V is approximately unitary and unimodular (which is true in the weak coupling limit).\n\nas the SU (3) projection of the complex matrix V . This projection is idempotent because for V ∈ SU (3), unitarity and the triangle inequality imply the bound Re Tr( ˜ V V † ) ≤ 3 which is uniquely saturated by ˜ V = V . By construction this projection is also gauge-covariant.\n\nIn order to compare the two projection schemes, we first write the polar decomposition of V as\n\n\n\nwhere θ ∈ ( -π/ , π/ 3 3], H is a Hermitian matrix with eigenvalues λ , λ , λ 1 2 3 > 0, and V is the SU (3)-projected matrix given by Eq. (A2). We then diagonalize H = M M Λ † [Λ = diag( λ , λ , λ 1 2 3 ) and M ∈ SU (3)] and substitute Eq. (A8) into Eq. (A6). The resulting function to be maximized is\n\n\n\nwhere u ' ij is an element of U ' ≡ M V U † † max M ∈ SU (3). If the maximization is carried out over U (3) rather than SU (3), we could choose u ' 11 = u ' 22 = u ' 33 = e iθ . This satisfies the\n\n46", + "recall": 0.9336734693877551, + "true_md": "Next we describe the projection method used for HYP smearing. This method is based on seeking a matrix U$_{max}$ for which [47]\n\n∣ The maximizing matrix U$_{max}$ is found iteratively by decomposing it into its SU (2) subgroups as outlined in Refs. [47, 80]. Although, by the compactness of SU (3), a global maximum exists, it is not guaranteed that this iterative procedure converges to the true maximum. Furthermore, the matrix obtained by the iterative procedure depends on the details of the iteration algorithm. In practice, however, one finds that U$_{max}$ is numerically very close to V , the SU (3) projection of the matrix V obtained from the unit circle projection, [46], and hence the iteratively found maximum is close to the true maximum. Thus we choose\n\n˜ as the SU (3) projection of the complex matrix V . This projection is idempotent because for V ∈ SU (3), unitarity and the triangle inequality imply the bound Re Tr( ˜ V V $^{†}$) ≤ 3 which is uniquely saturated by ˜ V = V . By construction this projection is also gauge-covariant. Finally, we show that although the two projection methods are generally not equivalent they differ only at second order. For this discussion we assume that the iterative method converges to the global maximum and that the unprojected matrix V is approximately unitary and unimodular (which is true in the weak coupling limit).\n\nIn order to compare the two projection schemes, we first write the polar decomposition of V as\n\nwhere θ ∈ ( − π/ 3 , π/ 3], H is a Hermitian matrix with eigenvalues λ$_{1}$, λ$_{2}$, λ$_{3}$ > 0, and V is the SU (3)-projected matrix given by Eq. (A2). We then diagonalize H = M Λ M † [Λ = diag( λ$_{1}$, λ$_{2}$, λ$_{3}$ ) and M ∈ SU (3)] and substitute Eq. (A8) into Eq. (A6). The resulting function to be maximized is\n\nwhere u ′ ij is an element of U ′ ≡ M $^{†}$V $^{†}$U$_{max}$ M ∈ SU (3). If the maximization is carried out over U (3) rather than SU (3), we could choose u ′ 11 = u ′ 22 = u ′ 33 = e $^{iθ}$. This satisfies the\n\n46\n\n$$ReTr( e − $^{iθ}$U $^{′}$Λ) = Re( e − $^{iθ}$( λ$_{1}$u ′ 11 + λ$_{2}$u ′ 22 + λ$_{3}$u $^{′}$$_{33}$)) , (A9)$$\n\n$$V = e $^{iθ}$V H, (A8)$$\n\n$$˜ V = U$_{max}$ (A7) projection of the complex matrix V . This projection is idempotent because for$$\n\n$$U$_{max}$ ∈ SU (3) ∣ Re Tr( U$_{max}$V $^{†}$) is maximal . (A6) U$_{max}$ is found iteratively by decomposing it into its SU (2) subgroups$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.807555220881897, + "doc_id": "6da90e9ef14f0bf8f7a0637503e72161a61c4970d7030d7b5835696357d3dda4", + "edit_distance": 0.1671388101983003, + "f1_score": 0.957983193277311, + "meteor": 0.8691854471457257, + "precision": 0.9827586206896551, + "pred_md": "TABLE III: Lorentzian-fit parameters for the ISGMR strength distributions in the Sn isotopes, as extracted from MDA. The quoted EWSR values are from the fitted Lorentzians. The results from TAMU work (from Gaussian fits), where available, are provided for comparison [19, 21].\n\na Only statistical uncertainties are included; systematic errors, mostly from DWBA calculations, are ∼ 15%.\n\nThe primary focus of this work has been on the ISGMR because of its direct connection with the nuclear incompressibility. The excitation energy of the ISGMR is expressed in the scaling model [70] as:\n\n\n\nwhere m is the nucleon mass, < r 2 > the ground-state mean-square radius, and K A , the incompressibility of the nucleus.\n\nThe moment ratios, m /m 1 0 , for the ISGMR strengths in the Sn isotopes are shown in Fig. 13 and compared with recent theoretical results from Col' o et al. (non-relativistic) [65, 66] and Piekarewicz (relativistic) [67]. The calculations overestimate the experimental ISGMR energies significantly (by almost 1 MeV in case of the higher-A isotopes!). This difference is very surprising since the interactions used in these calculations are those that very closely reproduce the ISGMR energies in 208 Pb and 90 Zr. Indeed, this disagreement leaves open a puzzling question: Why are the tin isotopes so soft [67]? Are there any nuclear structure effects that need to be taken into account to describe the ISGMR energies in the Sn isotopes? Or, more provocatively, do the ISGMR energies depend on something more\n\n17", + "recall": 0.9344262295081968, + "true_md": "TABLE III: Lorentzian-fit parameters for the ISGMR strength distributions in the Sn isotopes, as extracted from MDA. The quoted EWSR values are from the fitted Lorentzians. The results from TAMU work (from Gaussian fits), where available, are provided for comparison [19, 21].\n\na Only statistical uncertainties are included; systematic errors, mostly from DWBA calculations, are ∼ 15%.\n\nThe primary focus of this work has been on the ISGMR because of its direct connection with the nuclear incompressibility. The excitation energy of the ISGMR is expressed in the scaling model [70] as:\n\nwhere m is the nucleon mass, < r 2 > the ground-state mean-square radius, and K$_{A}$ , the incompressibility of the nucleus.\n\nThe moment ratios, m 1 /m 0 , for the ISGMR strengths in the Sn isotopes are shown in Fig. 13 and compared with recent theoretical results from Col` o et al. (non-relativistic) [65, 66] and Piekarewicz (relativistic) [67]. The calculations overestimate the experimental ISGMR energies significantly (by almost 1 MeV in case of the higher-A isotopes!). This difference is very surprising since the interactions used in these calculations are those that very closely reproduce the ISGMR energies in $^{208}$Pb and $^{90}$Zr. Indeed, this disagreement leaves open a puzzling question: Why are the tin isotopes so soft [67]? Are there any nuclear structure effects that need to be taken into account to describe the ISGMR energies in the Sn isotopes? Or, more provocatively, do the ISGMR energies depend on something more\n\n17\n\n$$E$_{ISGMR}$ = ¯ h √ K$_{A}$ m < r $^{2}$> (7)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.033323230011363475, + "doc_id": "2870a58866b1e3ea0f89ae283b377ac1f11f00bcf9ce413e5a16bbe2c0115e9b", + "edit_distance": 0.8429368029739777, + "f1_score": 0.7810218978102191, + "meteor": 0.20652469445551958, + "precision": 0.9553571428571429, + "pred_md": "\n\nwhere their PP contributions are\n\n\n\nFrom this, we see that the renormalization constant ˜ Z 1 must be\n\n\n\nso that ˜ Z 1 = Z 5 and thus we obtain the relations\n\n\n\nTherefore, the sum of all PP contributions of the right-hand side of Eq. (103) becomes\n\n\n\nwhich is the same result as for the left-hand side, Eq. (120).\n\nBesides these ultraviolet divergent parts, arising from the planar parts of the diagrams, we have also infrared singular parts (SP) coming from the nonplanar parts of the same diagrams, at p, q, k = 0. Explicit calculations, combining denominators with Feynman parameters and using nonplanar integrals, give us the SP for the diagrams Λ µνλ on the left-hand side of Eq. (103):\n\n\n\nwhere we are not taking into account the logarithmic singularities. Contracting q µ in the above expression, we obtain\n\n\n\nwhich is exactly the same SP for the photon self-energy diagrams on the right-hand side of Eq. (103),\n\n\n\nThe other diagrams of the ST identity (103) contribute only with logarithmic SP. These singularities are not problematic as they are integrable.\n\n22", + "recall": 0.6604938271604939, + "true_md": "where their PP contributions are\n\nFrom this, we see that the renormalization constant ˜ Z$_{1}$ must be\n\nso that ˜ Z$_{1}$ = Z$_{5}$ and thus we obtain the relations\n\nTherefore, the sum of all PP contributions of the right-hand side of Eq. (103) becomes\n\nwhich is the same result as for the left-hand side, Eq. (120).\n\nBesides these ultraviolet divergent parts, arising from the planar parts of the diagrams, we have also infrared singular parts (SP) coming from the nonplanar parts of the same diagrams, at p, q, k = 0. Explicit calculations, combining denominators with Feynman parameters and using nonplanar integrals, give us the SP for the diagrams Λ µνλ on the left-hand side of Eq. (103):\n\nwhere we are not taking into account the logarithmic singularities. Contracting q$_{µ}$ in the above expression, we obtain\n\nwhich is exactly the same SP for the photon self-energy diagrams on the right-hand side of Eq. (103),\n\nThe other diagrams of the ST identity (103) contribute only with logarithmic SP. These singularities are not problematic as they are integrable.\n\n$$= i ( − i ) $^{2}$(2 e ) 3 ∫ d $^{4}$l (2 π ) 4 ( − l )$_{α}$ γ αν λ ′ ( p + l, q, − p − q − l ) l $^{2}$( p + l ) $^{2}$( p + q + l ) 2 × sin( l ∧ p ) sin( − l ∧ p − l ∧ q ) sin( l ∧ q + p ∧ q ) ,$$\n\n$$PP[ B λ ν ′ ( p, q, k )( q $^{2}$g νν ′ − q $^{ν}$qν $^{′}$) + B ν λ ′ ( p, k, q )( k $^{2}$g λλ ′ − k $^{λ}$kλ $^{′}$)] = − e 2 16 π 2 1 ϵ [( k $^{2}$g λν − k $^{λ}$k$^{ν}$) − ( q $^{2}$g νλ − q $^{ν}$q$^{λ}$)] . (129)$$\n\n$$˜ Z$_{1}$ = 1 − e 2 16 π 2 1 ϵ , (130)$$\n\n$$Z$_{2}$/Z$_{1}$$_{F}$ = ˜ Z$_{3}$/ ˜ Z$_{1}$ = Z$_{3}$/Z$_{1}$. (131)$$\n\n$$P P [Π νλ $_{b,c,d}$( q ) − Π λν $_{b,c,d}$( k ) + B λ ν ′ ( p, q, k )( q $^{2}$g νν ′ − q $^{ν}$qν $^{′}$) + B ν λ ′ ( p, q, k )( k $^{2}$g λλ ′ − q $^{λ}$qλ $^{′}$)] = 7 e 2 48 π 2 1 ϵ [( k $^{2}$g λν − k $^{λ}$k$^{ν}$) − ( q $^{2}$g νλ − q $^{ν}$q$^{λ}$)] , (132)$$\n\n$$SP[2 e sin( p ∧ q )Λ µνλ b 1 ,b 2 ,c,d 1 ,d 2 ,d $_{3}$( p, q, k )] = 4 e 3 π 2 sin( p ∧ q ) p ∧ q ( ˜ p $^{µ}$˜ p $^{ν}$˜ p λ ξ ˜ p 4 + ˜ q $^{µ}$˜ q $^{ν}$˜ q λ ξ ˜ q 4 + ˜ k µ ˜ k ν ˜ k λ ξ ˜ k 4 ) , (133)$$\n\n$$SP[ q$_{µ}$ Λ µνλ b 1 ,b 2 ,c,d 1 ,d 2 ,d $_{3}$( p, q, k )] = 2 e 2 π 2 ( ˜ q $^{ν}$˜ q λ ξ $^{2}$˜ q 4 − ˜ k ν ˜ k λ ξ 2 ˜ k 4 ) , (134)$$\n\n$$SP[Π νλ $_{b,c,d}$( q ) − Π λν $_{b,c,d}$( k )] = 2 e 2 π 2 ( ˜ q $^{ν}$˜ q λ ξ $^{2}$˜ q 4 − ˜ k ν ˜ k λ ξ 2 ˜ k 4 ) . (135)$$\n\n22" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7991426691860569, + "doc_id": "23b348599fdff552aba8fdc7de1dc0c574621bc530dc7a9352e52f944060f142", + "edit_distance": 0.2053872053872054, + "f1_score": 0.9381107491856676, + "meteor": 0.9296945050594617, + "precision": 0.9664429530201343, + "pred_md": "FIG. 9: (Color online) ISGMR strength distributions obtained for the Sn isotopes in the present experiment. Error bars represent the uncertainties from fitting the angular distributions in the MDA procedure. The solid lines show Lorentzian fits to the data.\n\nFIG. 9: (Color online) ISGMR strength distributions obtained for the Sn isotopes in the present experiment. Error bars represent the uncertainties from fitting the angular distributions in the MDA procedure. The solid lines show Lorentzian fits to the data.\n\nin this experiment. The raison d'ˆtre e of this extra strength is not quite well understood. However, similarly enhanced E1 strengths at high excitation energies were noted previously [29, 30] and have been attributed to contributions to the continuum from three-body channels, such as knockout reactions [44]. These processes are implicitly included in the MDA as background and may lead to spurious contributions to the extracted multipole strengths at higher energies where the associated cross sections are very small. This conjecture is supported by measurements of proton decay from the ISGDR at backward angles wherein no such spurious strength is observed in spectra in coincidence with the decay protons [31, 5658]; quasifree knockout results in protons that are forward peaked. A similar increase in the ISGMR strength at high excitation energies was reported as well by the TAMU group in 12 C when they carried out MDA without subtracting the continuum from the excitation-energy spectra [18].\n\nThe L = 0 strength distributions were fitted with a Lorentzian function to determine the centroid energies and widths of the ISGMR. These fits are shown superimposed in\n\n13", + "recall": 0.9113924050632911, + "true_md": "FIG. 9: (Color online) ISGMR strength distributions obtained for the Sn isotopes in the present experiment. Error bars represent the uncertainties from fitting the angular distributions in the MDA procedure. The solid lines show Lorentzian fits to the data.\n\nin this experiment. The raison d‘ˆ etre of this extra strength is not quite well understood. However, similarly enhanced E1 strengths at high excitation energies were noted previously [29, 30] and have been attributed to contributions to the continuum from three-body chan- nels, such as knockout reactions [44]. These processes are implicitly included in the MDA as background and may lead to spurious contributions to the extracted multipole strengths at higher energies where the associated cross sections are very small. This conjecture is sup- ported by measurements of proton decay from the ISGDR at backward angles wherein no such spurious strength is observed in spectra in coincidence with the decay protons [31, 56– 58]; quasifree knockout results in protons that are forward peaked. A similar increase in the ISGMR strength at high excitation energies was reported as well by the TAMU group in $^{12}$C when they carried out MDA without subtracting the continuum from the excitation-energy spectra [18].\n\nThe L = 0 strength distributions were fitted with a Lorentzian function to determine the centroid energies and widths of the ISGMR. These fits are shown superimposed in\n\n13" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7944211268561793, + "doc_id": "b7b9af5c9b2d8ef0cd075b6a255f65b831ff9baf6da33fb11e557680cc79f9c2", + "edit_distance": 0.13314037626628075, + "f1_score": 0.9572649572649572, + "meteor": 0.8800694298012732, + "precision": 0.9696969696969697, + "pred_md": "Numerous superdeformed (SD) bands have been identified and studied in various domains of the nuclear chart. An example of recent progress in this research area is the discovery of the SD states in a very light mass region ( A ∼ 40) such as 36 Ar [1], 40 Ca [2], and 44 Ti [3]. A striking feature of these experimental works is that the SD band members were assigned from band heads up to high spin states. Discrete γ transitions linked those SD bands to spherical or normal-deformed states, which established the excitation energies and the spin-parities of the SD bands.\n\nTheoretical microscopic studies of deformed states in the A ∼ 40 region have been performed based on the shell model [4, 5], mean-field models [6-8], and the antisymmetrized molecular dynamics (AMD) [9-14]. Calculations with no assumption for the axial symmetry suggest the systematic triaxial deformation of the SD states. For example, the AMD calculations suggest that SD bands in 40 Ca [10] and 44 Ti [9] are constructed from triaxial shapes and their side bands exist. The triaxiality of superdeformations in this mass region has also been discussed in the three-dimensional coordinate-mesh Hartree-Fock (HF) [6].\n\nTriaxiality is also an important feature of normal-deformed states in the A ∼ 40 region. Established triaxial states are in 40 Ca, in which an observed K π = 2 + band with low excitation energies [2] is interpreted as a side band of a K π = 0 + band caused by the triaxial normal-deformation [5, 10, 15, 16]. Therefore, triaxiality is one of the key properties to clarify the structure of normal-deformations and superdeformations in A ∼ 40 nuclei. However, theoretical studies taking into account triaxiality are still limited due to the higher numerical costs than axially symmetric calculations.\n\n/negationslash\n\n/negationslash\n\nQuite recently, an SD K π = 0 + band built on the J π = 0 + state (2.12 MeV) in 40 Ar was experimentally identified up to the J π = (12 + ) state by the 26 Mg( 18 O, 2p2n) 40 Ar reactions [17], which were the lightest SD states ever in N = Z nuclei. Superdeformations in N = Z nuclei in this mass region are frontier topics.\n\nTo discuss triaxiality, features of unnatural spin-parity [ π = ( -) J +1 ] states are helpful data. In 40 Ar, a state at 4.23 MeV was assigned to an unnatural parity J π = 3 + state by the 40 Ar( α , α ' ) reaction [18]. This J π = 3 + state decays to the J π = 2 + state in the SD band [19, 20]. The J π = 2 + state at 3.92 MeV just below the J π = 3 + at 4.23 MeV also decays to the SD band member J π = 0 + , and the E 2 transition strength takes a non-negligible value [20]. These observations show that the states J π = 2 + and 3 + are candidates for members of the side band in the SD band, which can be discussed in relation to the triaxiality of the\n\n2", + "recall": 0.9451476793248945, + "true_md": "Numerous superdeformed (SD) bands have been identified and studied in various domains of the nuclear chart. An example of recent progress in this research area is the discovery of the SD states in a very light mass region ( A ∼ 40) such as $^{36}$Ar [1], $^{40}$Ca [2], and $^{44}$Ti [3]. A striking feature of these experimental works is that the SD band members were assigned from band heads up to high spin states. Discrete γ transitions linked those SD bands to spherical or normal-deformed states, which established the excitation energies and the spin-parities of the SD bands.\n\nTheoretical microscopic studies of deformed states in the A ∼ 40 region have been per- formed based on the shell model [4, 5], mean-field models [6–8], and the antisymmetrized molecular dynamics (AMD) [9–14]. Calculations with no assumption for the axial symme- try suggest the systematic triaxial deformation of the SD states. For example, the AMD calculations suggest that SD bands in $^{40}$Ca [10] and $^{44}$Ti [9] are constructed from triaxial shapes and their side bands exist. The triaxiality of superdeformations in this mass region has also been discussed in the three-dimensional coordinate-mesh Hartree-Fock (HF) [6].\n\nTriaxiality is also an important feature of normal-deformed states in the A ∼ 40 region. Established triaxial states are in $^{40}$Ca, in which an observed K π = 2 + band with low excitation energies [2] is interpreted as a side band of a K π = 0 + band caused by the triaxial normal-deformation [5, 10, 15, 16]. Therefore, triaxiality is one of the key properties to clarify the structure of normal-deformations and superdeformations in A ∼ 40 nuclei. However, theoretical studies taking into account triaxiality are still limited due to the higher numerical costs than axially symmetric calculations.\n\nQuite recently, an SD K π = 0 + band built on the J π = 0 + state (2.12 MeV) in $^{40}$Ar was experimentally identified up to the J π = (12 $^{+}$) state by the $^{26}$Mg($^{18}$O, 2p2n)$^{40}$Ar reactions [17], which were the lightest SD states ever in N ̸ = Z nuclei. Superdeformations in N ̸ = Z nuclei in this mass region are frontier topics.\n\nTo discuss triaxiality, features of unnatural spin-parity [ π = ( − ) J $^{+1}$] states are helpful data. In $^{40}$Ar, a state at 4.23 MeV was assigned to an unnatural parity J π = 3 + state by the $^{40}$Ar( α , α $^{′}$) reaction [18]. This J π = 3 + state decays to the J π = 2 + state in the SD band [19, 20]. The J π = 2 + state at 3.92 MeV just below the J π = 3 + at 4.23 MeV also decays to the SD band member J π = 0 $^{+}$, and the E 2 transition strength takes a non-negligible value [20]. These observations show that the states J π = 2 + and 3 + are candidates for members of the side band in the SD band, which can be discussed in relation to the triaxiality of the\n\n2" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.21195855477607276, + "doc_id": "8974722955ebfa2ba54e85c36cf66d1b75eb778073e03b994a86d4c145b1780b", + "edit_distance": 0.6473265073947668, + "f1_score": 0.8611111111111113, + "meteor": 0.342456676325056, + "precision": 0.9627329192546584, + "pred_md": "in which f ( r ) will be determined from (3). A thin-shell wormhole is constructed in EMGB theory as follows. Two copies of the spacetime are chosen from which the regions\n\n\n\nare removed. We note that a will be identified in the sequel as the radius of the thin-shell and r h stands for the event horizon radius. (Note that our notation a corresponds to b in Ref. [6]. Other notations all agree with those in Ref. [6]). The boundary, time-like surface Σ 1 2 , of each M 1 2 , , accordingly will be\n\n\n\nNext, these surfaces are identified on r = a with a surface energy-momentum of a thin-shell such that geodesic completeness holds. Following the Darmois-Israel formalism [8] in terms of the original coordinates x γ = ( t, r, θ, φ, ψ ) , we define ξ a = ( τ, θ, φ, ψ ), with τ the proper time. The GB extension of the thin-shell EM theory requires further modifications. This entails the generalized Darmois-Israel boundary conditions [9], where the surface energymomentum tensor is expressed by S b a =diag( σ, p θ , p φ , p ψ ). We are interested in the thin-shell geometry whose radius is assumed a function of τ , so that the hypersurface becomes\n\n\n\nThe generalized Darmois-Israel conditions on Σ take the form\n\n\n\nwhere a bracket implies a jump across Σ, and h ab = g ab -n n a b is the induced metric on Σ with normal vector n . K a ab is the extrinsic curvature (with trace K ), defined by\n\n\n\nThe remaining expressions are as follows. The divergence-free part of the Riemann tensor P abcd and the tensor J ab (with trace J ) are given by\n\n\n\n\n\n4", + "recall": 0.7788944723618091, + "true_md": "in which f ( r ) will be determined from (3). A thin-shell wormhole is constructed in EMGB theory as follows. Two copies of the spacetime are chosen from which the regions\n\nare removed. We note that a will be identified in the sequel as the radius of the thin-shell and r$_{h}$ stands for the event horizon radius. (Note that our notation a corresponds to b in Ref. [6]. Other notations all agree with those in Ref. [6]). The boundary, time-like surface Σ 1 , 2 of each M 1 , 2 , accordingly will be\n\nNext, these surfaces are identified on r = a with a surface energy-momentum of a thin-shell such that geodesic completeness holds. Following the Darmois-Israel formalism [8] in terms of the original coordinates x γ = ( t, r, θ, φ, ψ ) , we define ξ a = ( τ, θ, φ, ψ ), with τ the proper time. The GB extension of the thin-shell EM theory requires further modifications. This entails the generalized Darmois-Israel boundary conditions [9], where the surface energy- momentum tensor is expressed by S b a =diag( σ, p$_{θ}$, p$_{φ}$, p$_{ψ}$ ). We are interested in the thin-shell geometry whose radius is assumed a function of τ , so that the hypersurface becomes\n\nThe generalized Darmois-Israel conditions on Σ take the form\n\n〈 $^{cd}$〉 where a bracket implies a jump across Σ, and h$_{ab}$ = g$_{ab}$ − n$_{a}$n$_{b}$ is the induced metric on Σ with normal vector n$_{a}$. K$_{ab}$ is the extrinsic curvature (with trace K ), defined by\n\nThe remaining expressions are as follows. The divergence-free part of the Riemann tensor P$_{abcd}$ and the tensor J$_{ab}$ (with trace J ) are given by\n\n4\n\n$$M 1 , 2 = { r 1 , 2 ≤ a, a > r$_{h}$ } (7)$$\n\n$$Σ 1 , 2 = { r 1 , 2 = a, a > r$_{h}$ } . (8)$$\n\n$$Σ : f ( r, τ ) = r − a ( τ ) = 0 . (9)$$\n\n$$2 〈 K$_{ab}$ − Kh$_{ab}$ 〉 + 4 α 〈 3 J$_{ab}$ − Jh$_{ab}$ + 2 P$_{acdb}$K $^{cd}$〉 = − κ $^{2}$S$_{ab}$ , (10) where a bracket implies a jump across Σ, and h$_{ab}$ = g$_{ab}$ − n$_{a}$n$_{b}$ is the induced metric on Σ$$\n\n$$K ± ab = − n ± c ( ∂ $^{2}$x c ∂ξ $^{a}$∂ξb + Γ c mn ∂x m ∂ξ a ∂x n ∂ξ b ) r = a . (11)$$\n\n$$P$_{abcd}$ = R$_{abcd}$ + ( R$_{bc}$h$_{da}$ − R$_{bd}$h$_{ca}$ ) − ( R$_{ac}$h$_{db}$ − R$_{ad}$h$_{cb}$ ) + 1 2 R ( h$_{ac}$h$_{db}$ − h$_{ad}$h$_{cb}$ ) , (12) J$_{ab}$ = 1 3 [ 2 KK$_{ac}$K c b + K$_{cd}$K $^{cd}$K$_{ab}$ − 2 K$_{ac}$K $^{cd}$K$_{ab}$ − K $^{2}$K$_{ab}$ ] . (13)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7380187016361429, + "doc_id": "d7ae97368387ef8cf079414fedd26a1440aabb1ce4fc5e7207952100af92255b", + "edit_distance": 0.26744186046511625, + "f1_score": 0.9894179894179894, + "meteor": 0.9365153258519869, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "18\n\nFIG. 1: The distribution of radii of the configuration. The plot on the left shows that r 3456 can be considered as a function of r 12 , as expected by the singular nature of the saddle point distribution. It also shows that the radius of the distribution makes sense, except for one outlying point that one can call a statistical fluctuation. The plot on the right bins the number of particles in r 12 values in increments of a half. One notices a strong peak in the distribution, but it does not happen at the inner edge of the distribution. The sample is taken with N = 1000 , Q = 100, from the final configuration.\n\nFIG. 1: The distribution of radii of the configuration. The plot on the left shows that r 3456 can be considered as a function of r 12 , as expected by the singular nature of the saddle point distribution. It also shows that the radius of the distribution makes sense, except for one outlying point that one can call a statistical fluctuation. The plot on the right bins the number of particles in r 12 values in increments of a half. One notices a strong peak in the distribution, but it does not happen at the inner edge of the distribution. The sample is taken with N = 1000 , Q = 100, from the final configuration.\n\nunderstand how it would approach the large N limit without extensive modeling. Since we do not have an analytic understanding of these distributions yet, it is very hard to use their prominent features in a meaningful way to obtain a reasonable definition of the geometry. For illustration, should we use the density in six dimensions to define the radius? Or should we use the projection of the density distribution to the 12 plane? The choice would depend on which observable we need to evaluate and how it is realized geometrically in the ten dimensional dual geometry. Notice also that the definitions of the radius that we use in most cases do not suppress the peak very much relative to the inner radius. Because there are so many more particles there, one can expect that the radius measurements we are doing at k = 14 are tracking the peak in the distribution above. The distributions above were plotted after the choice was made of which functions to average.\n\nIn hindsight, other definitions of the radius might have been better choices. After all, we actually know how the distributions were generated, so there is in principle a lot more information encoded in the eigenvalue distributions. In a certain sense, we are purposefully ignoring this information except for some qualitative understanding. The main reason to do this is to think of the algorithm that generated the geometry as a black box: the passage", + "recall": 0.9790575916230366, + "true_md": "18\n\nFIG. 1: The distribution of radii of the configuration. The plot on the left shows that r$_{3456}$ can be considered as a function of r$_{12}$ , as expected by the singular nature of the saddle point distribution. It also shows that the radius of the distribution makes sense, except for one outlying point that one can call a statistical fluctuation. The plot on the right bins the number of particles in r$_{12}$ values in increments of a half. One notices a strong peak in the distribution, but it does not happen at the inner edge of the distribution. The sample is taken with N = 1000 , Q = 100, from the final configuration.\n\nunderstand how it would approach the large N limit without extensive modeling. Since we do not have an analytic understanding of these distributions yet, it is very hard to use their prominent features in a meaningful way to obtain a reasonable definition of the geometry.\n\nFor illustration, should we use the density in six dimensions to define the radius? Or should we use the projection of the density distribution to the 12 plane? The choice would depend on which observable we need to evaluate and how it is realized geometrically in the ten dimensional dual geometry. Notice also that the definitions of the radius that we use in most cases do not suppress the peak very much relative to the inner radius. Because there are so many more particles there, one can expect that the radius measurements we are doing at k = 14 are tracking the peak in the distribution above. The distributions above were plotted after the choice was made of which functions to average.\n\nIn hindsight, other definitions of the radius might have been better choices. After all, we actually know how the distributions were generated, so there is in principle a lot more information encoded in the eigenvalue distributions. In a certain sense, we are purposefully ignoring this information except for some qualitative understanding. The main reason to do this is to think of the algorithm that generated the geometry as a black box: the passage" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5859588039040221, + "doc_id": "7f40b51fffeca64ee66323767101d206beffcbb37562c7a0e0bf47ac64194e7d", + "edit_distance": 0.46875, + "f1_score": 0.9236111111111112, + "meteor": 0.8029446312287758, + "precision": 0.9300699300699301, + "pred_md": "FIG. 1: Time evolution of the dimensionless scaled position Z ∗ ≡ Zg /v 0 2 W of the movable piston located on top of the system, once the steady state has been reached. There are 420 disks in a box of width W = 70 . d In all cases the coefficient of normal restitution of the particle collisions is α = 0 95 and that for the particle-piston collisions . is α P = 0 99. . Results for three values of the mass of the piston M are shown, as indicated. Time τ is measured in accumulated number of collisions per particle.\n\nFIG. 1: Time evolution of the dimensionless scaled position Z ∗ ≡ Zg /v 0 2 W of the movable piston located on top of the system, once the steady state has been reached. There are 420 disks in a box of width W = 70 . d In all cases the coefficient of normal restitution of the particle collisions is α = 0 95 and that for the particle-piston collisions . is α P = 0 99. . Results for three values of the mass of the piston M are shown, as indicated. Time τ is measured in accumulated number of collisions per particle.\n\nas\n\n\n\nwhere σ Z is the square root of the second central moment or standard deviation of Z σ , 2 Z ≡ < Z 2 > -L 2 , and the star indicates that lengths are being measured in the dimensionless scale defined above. In Fig. 2, the obtained probability distribution of /lscript , P /lscript ( ), is plotted for a system with α = 0 94. . Again, three values of the mass ratio have been considered, namely M = 36 m M , = 60 m , and M = 120 m . It is seen that the probability distributions are accurately fitted by a Gaussian (solid lines), at least up to values of the probability density of the order of 10 -4 . A similar behavior has been found in all the simulated systems with\n\n7", + "recall": 0.9172413793103448, + "true_md": "FIG. 1: Time evolution of the dimensionless scaled position Z ∗ ≡ Zg 0 /v 2 W of the movable piston located on top of the system, once the steady state has been reached. There are 420 disks in a box of width W = 70 d . In all cases the coefficient of normal restitution of the particle collisions is α = 0 . 95 and that for the particle-piston collisions is α$_{P}$ = 0 . 99. Results for three values of the mass of the piston M are shown, as indicated. Time τ is measured in accumulated number of collisions per particle.\n\nas\n\nwhere σ$_{Z}$ is the square root of the second central moment or standard deviation of Z , σ 2 Z ≡ < Z 2 > − L $^{2}$, and the star indicates that lengths are being measured in the dimensionless scale defined above. In Fig. 2, the obtained probability distribution of ℓ , P ( ℓ ), is plotted for a system with α = 0 . 94. Again, three values of the mass ratio have been considered, namely M = 36 m , M = 60 m , and M = 120 m . It is seen that the probability distributions are accurately fitted by a Gaussian (solid lines), at least up to values of the probability density of the order of 10 − $^{4}$. A similar behavior has been found in all the simulated systems with\n\n7\n\n$$ℓ ≡ Z − L σ$_{Z}$ = Z ∗ − L ∗ σ ∗ Z , (6)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "947984c90e83fea42a1b624b11fea6b23572e8d27464e56e3ed6c8e20817e6fa", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9921875, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Table I:\n\n9", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Table I:\n\n9" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.07500627220999961, + "doc_id": "86a7ddad896367e4d2bcdd3cdeb5335c79fc40d00ecb41d124d9f55f4ddb80c5", + "edit_distance": 0.7955974842767296, + "f1_score": 0.854368932038835, + "meteor": 0.24038823492998196, + "precision": 0.9496402877697842, + "pred_md": "where m 2 π = m 2 L and m 2 K = ( m 2 L + m 2 H ) / 2. Similarly, the expression for M x becomes\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nThe expressions for Φ l and Φ h agree with those derived by Goity in Ref. [85].\n\nOne can account for lattice finite volume effects at NLO in χ PT by turning the one-loop integrals to sums. This yields an additive correction to the chiral logarithms [86]:\n\n/negationslash\n\n\n\n/negationslash\n\nwhere δ FV i ( m L) is the finite volume correction to the infinite volume result and K 0 and K 1 are modified Bessel functions of imaginary argument.\n\n\n\n## 2. SU (2) HM PT expressions χ\n\nThe NLO SU (2) HM χ PT expressions can easily be obtained from the SU (3) results in the previous subsection by integrating out the strange valence and sea quarks. After this procedure, however, the expressions for the decay constant and mixing matrix element differ for B d -type mesons and B s -type mesons.\n\nFirst we consider B d -type mesons composed of a b -quark and a light valence quark with mass m x . In this case, we take the limits of Eqs. (D2) and (D3) assuming\n\n\n\nThe resulting expression for Φ B x at NLO in the partially-quenched domain-wall theory with\n\n55", + "recall": 0.7764705882352941, + "true_md": "where m 2 π = m 2 L and m 2 K = ( m 2 L + m 2 $_{H}$) / 2. Similarly, the expression for M$_{x}$ becomes\n\nThe expressions for Φ$_{l}$ and Φ$_{h}$ agree with those derived by Goity in Ref. [85].\n\nOne can account for lattice finite volume effects at NLO in χ PT by turning the one-loop integrals to sums. This yields an additive correction to the chiral logarithms [86]:\n\n˜ where δ F V i ( m L) is the finite volume correction to the infinite volume result and K$_{0}$ and K$_{1}$ are modified Bessel functions of imaginary argument.\n\nThe NLO SU (2) HM χ PT expressions can easily be obtained from the SU (3) results in the previous subsection by integrating out the strange valence and sea quarks. After this procedure, however, the expressions for the decay constant and mixing matrix element differ for B$_{d}$ -type mesons and B$_{s}$ -type mesons.\n\nFirst we consider B$_{d}$ -type mesons composed of a b -quark and a light valence quark with mass m$_{x}$ . In this case, we take the limits of Eqs. (D2) and (D3) assuming\n\nThe resulting expression for Φ$_{B}$$\\_{x}$ at NLO in the partially-quenched domain-wall theory with\n\n55\n\n$$m$_{x}$ m$_{h}$ , m$_{l}$ m$_{h}$ ≪ 1 . (D15)$$\n\n$$( χ ) ∑ ⃗r ̸ =0 ˜ ℓ ( m $^{2}$) = − ln m 2 Λ 2 χ + 1 ) + δ F V 3 ( m L) , δ F V 3 ( m L) = 2 ⃗ r ̸ =0 K$_{0}$ ( | ⃗ r | m L) , (D14) ( m L) is the finite volume correction to the infinite volume result and K$_{0}$ and K$_{1}$$$\n\n$$ℓ ( m $^{2}$) = m 2 ( ln m 2 Λ 2 χ + δ F V 1 ( m L) ) , δ F V 1 ( m L) = 4 m L ∑ ⃗r ̸ =0 K$_{1}$ ( | ⃗ r | m L) ⃗ r , (D13) m 2 )$$\n\n$$48 π $^{2}$f 2 [ − ] } M$_{B}$$_{h}$ = β$_{0}$ { 1 − 1 + 3 g 2 B ∗ Bπ 16 π $^{2}$f 2 [ 2 ℓ ( m 2 $_{K}$) + ℓ ( m 2 $_{S}$) ] − 1 − 3 g 2 B ∗ Bπ 16 π $^{2}$f 2 ℓ ( m 2 $_{S}$) + 1 24 π $^{2}$f 2 [ 3 ℓ ( m 2 $_{S}$) − 2 ℓ ( m 2 $_{η}$) ] + d$_{sea}$ (2 m$_{l}$ + m$_{h}$ ) + d$_{val}$m$_{h}$ + d$_{a}$a 2 } . (D12)$$\n\n$$M$_{B}$$_{l}$ = β$_{0}$ { 1 − 1 + 3 g 2 B ∗ Bπ 16 π $^{2}$f 2 [ 2 ℓ ( m 2 $_{π}$) + ℓ ( m 2 $_{K}$) ] − 1 − 3 g 2 B ∗ Bπ 16 π $^{2}$f 2 ℓ ( m 2 $_{π}$) + 1 48 π $^{2}$f 2 [ 3 ℓ ( m 2 $_{π}$) − ℓ ( m 2 $_{η}$) ] + d$_{sea}$ (2 m$_{l}$ + m$_{h}$ ) + d$_{val}$m$_{l}$ + d$_{a}$a 2 } , (D11) { 1 + 3 g 2 [ ] 1 − 3 g 2$$\n\n## 2. SU (2) HM χ PT expressions" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7595251551242413, + "doc_id": "888a4c64108156f10e2e871c4a0a79575a7c4fa8cc6d358e2214155ede3a2edf", + "edit_distance": 0.6238532110091743, + "f1_score": 0.9650349650349651, + "meteor": 0.8008550030093863, + "precision": 0.971830985915493, + "pred_md": "arXiv:1001.2023v1 [hep-lat] 12 Jan 2010\n\nCU-TP-1192, Edinburgh 2010/1 RBRC-827, SHEP 0928\n\n## Neutral B -meson mixing from unquenched lattice QCD with domain-wall light quarks and static b -quarks\n\nC. Albertus , ∗ 1 Y. Aoki, 2 P. A. Boyle, 3 N. H. Christ, 4 T. T. Dumitrescu , † 4\n\n- J. M. Flynn, 1 T. Ishikawa , ‡ 2 T. Izubuchi, 2, 5 O. Loktik, 4 C. T. Sachrajda, 1\n\nA. Soni, 5 R. S. Van de Water, 5 J. Wennekers , § 3 and O. Witzel 5\n\n(RBC and UKQCD Collaborations)\n\n1 School of Physics and Astronomy, University of Southampton, Southampton SO17 1BJ, UK 2 RIKEN-BNL Research Center, Brookhaven National Laboratory, Upton, NY 11973, USA 3 SUPA, School of Physics, The University of Edinburgh, Edinburgh EH9 3JZ, UK 4 Physics Department, Columbia University, New York, NY 10027, USA 5 Physics Department, Brookhaven National Laboratory, Upton, NY 11973, USA (Dated: October 29, 2018)\n\nIn memory of Jan Wennekers.\n\n∗ Present address: Departamento de F´ ısica Fundamental, Facultad de Ciencias, Universidad de Salamanca, Plaza de la Merced s/n, 37008, Salamanca, Spain\n\n† Present address: Department of Physics, Princeton University, Princeton, NJ 08544, USA\n\n‡ Present address: Physics Department, University of Connecticut, Storrs, CT 06269-3046, USA\n\n§ Also: Instituto de F´ ısica Corpuscular, CSIC-Universidad de Valencia, P.O. Box 22085, 46071 Valencia, Spain\n\n1", + "recall": 0.9583333333333334, + "true_md": "CU-TP-1192, Edinburgh 2010/1 RBRC–827, SHEP 0928\n\nC. Albertus $^{∗}$, 1 Y. Aoki, 2 P. A. Boyle, 3 N. H. Christ, 4 T. T. Dumitrescu $^{†}$, 4 J. M. Flynn, 1 T. Ishikawa $^{‡}$, 2 T. Izubuchi, 2, 5 O. Loktik, 4 C. T. Sachrajda, 1 A. Soni, 5 R. S. Van de Water, 5 J. Wennekers $^{§}$, 3 and O. Witzel 5\n\n$^{4}$Physics Department, Columbia University, New York, NY 10027, USA\n\n$^{5}$Physics Department, Brookhaven National Laboratory, Upton, NY 11973, USA\n\n(Dated: October 29, 2018)\n\nIn memory of Jan Wennekers.\n\n∗ Present address: Departamento de F´ısica Fundamental, Facultad de Ciencias, Universidad de Salamanca, Plaza de la Merced s/n, 37008, Salamanca, Spain\n\n† Present address: Department of Physics, Princeton University, Princeton, NJ 08544, USA\n\n‡ Present address: Physics Department, University of Connecticut, Storrs, CT 06269-3046, USA\n\n§ Also: Instituto de F´ısica Corpuscular, CSIC-Universidad de Valencia, P.O. Box 22085, 46071 Valencia, Spain\n\n# Neutral B -meson mixing from unquenched lattice QCD with domain-wall light quarks and static b -quarks\n\n$^{1}$School of Physics and Astronomy, University of Southampton, Southampton SO17 1BJ, UK\n\n$^{2}$RIKEN-BNL Research Center, Brookhaven National Laboratory, Upton, NY 11973, USA\n\n$^{3}$SUPA, School of Physics, The University of Edinburgh, Edinburgh EH9 3JZ, UK\n\narXiv:1001.2023v1 [hep-lat] 12 Jan 2010\n\n(RBC and UKQCD Collaborations)\n\n1" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "ede228299567df0d17c212171082acd7ce3de27c4d93d47eea51b176189595b2", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999999981104216, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Basic Research Program of China under grant 2010CB833000.\n\n- [1] A. G. Riess et al. [Supernova Search Team Collaboration], Astron. J. 116 , 1009 (1998) [arXiv:astro-ph/9805201]; S. Perlmutter et al. [Supernova Cosmology Project Collaboration], Astrophys. J. 517 , 565 (1999) [arXiv:astro-ph/9812133].\n- [2] E. J. Copeland, M. Sami and S. Tsujikawa, Int. J. Mod. Phys. D 15 , 1753 (2006) [arXiv:hep-th/0603057].\n- [3] R. R. Caldwell and P. J. Steinhardt, Phys. Rev. D 57 , 6057 (1998) [arXiv:astro-ph/9710062].\n- [4] P. J. Steinhardt, L. M. Wang and I. Zlatev, Phys. Rev. D 59 , 123504 (1999) [arXiv:astro-ph/9812313].\n- [5] S. Capozziello, S. Carloni and A. Troisi, Recent Res. Dev. Astron. Astrophys. 1 , 625 (2003) [arXiv:astro-ph/0303041].\n- [6] M. Li, Phys. Lett. B 603 , 1 (2004) [arXiv:hep-th/0403127]; R. G. Cai, Phys. Lett. B 657 , 228 (2007) [arXiv:0707.4049 [hep-th]]; H. Wei and R. G. Cai, Phys. Lett. B 660 , 113 (2008) [arXiv:0708.0884 [astro-ph]]. B. Feng, X. L. Wang and X. M. Zhang, Phys. Lett. B 607 , 35 (2005) [arXiv:astro-ph/0404224]; C. Gao, X. Chen and Y. G. Shen, Phys. Rev. D 79 , 043511 (2009) [arXiv:0712.1394 [astro-ph]].\n- [7] D. Huterer and M. S. Turner, Phys. Rev. D 64 , 123527 (2001) [arXiv:astro-ph/0012510]; A. R. Cooray and D. Huterer, Astrophys. J. 513 , L95 (1999) [arXiv:astro-ph/9901097]; D. Huterer and M. S. Turner, Phys. Rev. D 60 , 081301 (1999) [arXiv:astro-ph/9808133]; J. Weller and A. J. Albrecht, Phys. Rev. Lett. 86 , 1939 (2001) [arXiv:astro-ph/0008314].\n- [8] M. Chevallier and D. Polarski, Int. J. Mod. Phys. D 10 , 213 (2001) [arXiv:gr-qc/0009008].\n- [9] E. V. Linder, Phys. Rev. Lett. 90 , 091301 (2003) [arXiv:astro-ph/0208512].\n- [10] D. Huterer and G. Starkman, Phys. Rev. Lett. 90 , 031301 (2003) [arXiv:astro-ph/0207517].\n- [11] D. Huterer and A. Cooray, Phys. Rev. D 71 , 023506 (2005) [arXiv:astro-ph/0404062].\n- [12] A. Hojjati, L. Pogosian and G. B. Zhao, arXiv:0912.4843 [astro-ph.CO].\n- [13] Y. Wang, Phys. Rev. D 80 , 123525 (2009) [arXiv:0910.2492 [astro-ph.CO]].\n- [14] S. Sullivan, A. Cooray and D. E. Holz, JCAP 0709 , 004 (2007) [arXiv:0706.3730 [astro-ph]].\n- [15] G. B. Zhao, D. Huterer and X. Zhang, Phys. Rev. D 77 , 121302 (2008) [arXiv:0712.2277 [astro-ph]].\n\n15", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Basic Research Program of China under grant 2010CB833000.\n\n- [1] A. G. Riess et al. [Supernova Search Team Collaboration], Astron. J. 116 , 1009 (1998) [arXiv:astro-ph/9805201]; S. Perlmutter et al. [Supernova Cosmology Project Collaboration], Astrophys. J. 517 , 565 (1999) [arXiv:astro-ph/9812133].\n\n- [2] E. J. Copeland, M. Sami and S. Tsujikawa, Int. J. Mod. Phys. D 15 , 1753 (2006) [arXiv:hep-th/0603057].\n\n- [3] R. R. Caldwell and P. J. Steinhardt, Phys. Rev. D 57 , 6057 (1998) [arXiv:astro-ph/9710062].\n\n- [4] P. J. Steinhardt, L. M. Wang and I. Zlatev, Phys. Rev. D 59 , 123504 (1999) [arXiv:astro-ph/9812313].\n\n- [5] S. Capozziello, S. Carloni and A. Troisi, Recent Res. Dev. Astron. Astrophys. 1 , 625 (2003) [arXiv:astro-ph/0303041].\n\n- [6] M. Li, Phys. Lett. B 603 , 1 (2004) [arXiv:hep-th/0403127]; R. G. Cai, Phys. Lett. B 657 , 228 (2007) [arXiv:0707.4049 [hep-th]]; H. Wei and R. G. Cai, Phys. Lett. B 660 , 113 (2008) [arXiv:0708.0884 [astro-ph]]. B. Feng, X. L. Wang and X. M. Zhang, Phys. Lett. B 607 , 35 (2005) [arXiv:astro-ph/0404224]; C. Gao, X. Chen and Y. G. Shen, Phys. Rev. D 79 , 043511 (2009) [arXiv:0712.1394 [astro-ph]].\n\n- [7] D. Huterer and M. S. Turner, Phys. Rev. D 64 , 123527 (2001) [arXiv:astro-ph/0012510]; A. R. Cooray and D. Huterer, Astrophys. J. 513 , L95 (1999) [arXiv:astro-ph/9901097]; D. Huterer and M. S. Turner, Phys. Rev. D 60 , 081301 (1999) [arXiv:astro-ph/9808133]; J. Weller and A. J. Albrecht, Phys. Rev. Lett. 86 , 1939 (2001) [arXiv:astro-ph/0008314].\n\n- [8] M. Chevallier and D. Polarski, Int. J. Mod. Phys. D 10 , 213 (2001) [arXiv:gr-qc/0009008].\n\n- [9] E. V. Linder, Phys. Rev. Lett. 90 , 091301 (2003) [arXiv:astro-ph/0208512].\n\n- [10] D. Huterer and G. Starkman, Phys. Rev. Lett. 90 , 031301 (2003) [arXiv:astro-ph/0207517].\n\n- [11] D. Huterer and A. Cooray, Phys. Rev. D 71 , 023506 (2005) [arXiv:astro-ph/0404062].\n\n- [12] A. Hojjati, L. Pogosian and G. B. Zhao, arXiv:0912.4843 [astro-ph.CO].\n\n- [13] Y. Wang, Phys. Rev. D 80 , 123525 (2009) [arXiv:0910.2492 [astro-ph.CO]].\n\n- [14] S. Sullivan, A. Cooray and D. E. Holz, JCAP 0709 , 004 (2007) [arXiv:0706.3730 [astro-ph]].\n\n- [15] G. B. Zhao, D. Huterer and X. Zhang, Phys. Rev. D 77 , 121302 (2008) [arXiv:0712.2277 [astro-ph]].\n\n15" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5910622301520064, + "doc_id": "1e57ba377d2258b6d183e693e638d9102c51dec587b7c50b31d3735c3c6748ff", + "edit_distance": 0.3627906976744186, + "f1_score": 0.927400468384075, + "meteor": 0.646698971303027, + "precision": 0.9565217391304348, + "pred_md": "locsitons with ψ ≈ ± π/ 2 (i. e., nearly transverse locsitons) may be exited at δ/δ LL > 1, and can be thus viewed as the 'easiest to excite' on the Lorentz side of the band. On the opposite, 'anti-Lorentz' side of the band, where δ/δ LL < ∼ -1, nearly longitudinal locsitons with ψ ≈ 0 or π lie closer to the band edge and thus are easier to excite. The exact positions of the edges of the locsiton band cannot be found within the NRA, because minima and maxima of D NRA 2 ( q ) are reached at such q where the NRA may only be used for qualitative estimates. The case of larger q is addressed when we go beyond the NRA in the next subsection.\n\n## B. Locsitons in the first Brillouin zone\n\nWhen going beyond the NRA, the orientation of E in within the lattice plane becomes an important factor, except for small q . Staying within the NNA, i. e., only taking into account the six nearest neighbors in Eq. (4) (but individually , instead of them being washed out over the ring, as in the NRA), we are still able to approach the problem analytically. The resulting equation is\n\n\n\nwhere u K denotes any of the six unit vectors pointing in the directions from the atom (located at r ) to one of its nearest neighbors.\n\nThe uniform, Lorentz, solution of Eq. (19) is still given by Eq. (8) and (9), which supports the above-mentioned convergence of the NRA and NNA results at q → 0. Spatially varying locsiton solutions are found as in the previous subsection by using the ansatz (12) in Eq. (19). The corresponding dispersion relation δ ( q ) for locsitons in a 2D triangular lattice can be\n\nnow written as\n\n\n\nwhere θ n = θ 0 + nπ/ 3, and q is represented by its polar coordinates q and ψ . The orientation of the lattice with respect to the incident field E in is described by θ 0 , which is the angle that one of the vectors u K makes with E in (the fact that θ 0 is not unique does not affect the result). The ultimate proof that the results of the NRA and the more precise NNA converge\n\n14", + "recall": 0.9, + "true_md": "locsitons with ψ ≈ ± π/ 2 (i. e., nearly transverse locsitons) may be exited at δ/δ$_{LL}$ > 1, and can be thus viewed as the “easiest to excite” on the Lorentz side of the band. On the opposite, “anti-Lorentz” side of the band, where δ/δ$_{LL}$ < ∼ − 1, nearly longitudinal locsitons with ψ ≈ 0 or π lie closer to the band edge and thus are easier to excite. The exact positions of the edges of the locsiton band cannot be found within the NRA, because minima and maxima of D NRA 2 ( q ) are reached at such q where the NRA may only be used for qualitative estimates. The case of larger q is addressed when we go beyond the NRA in the next subsection.\n\nWhen going beyond the NRA, the orientation of E$_{in}$ within the lattice plane becomes an important factor, except for small q . Staying within the NNA, i. e., only taking into account the six nearest neighbors in Eq. (4) (but individually , instead of them being washed out over the ring, as in the NRA), we are still able to approach the problem analytically. The resulting equation is\n\nwhere u$_{K}$ denotes any of the six unit vectors pointing in the directions from the atom (located at r ) to one of its nearest neighbors.\n\nThe uniform, Lorentz, solution of Eq. (19) is still given by Eq. (8) and (9), which supports the above-mentioned convergence of the NRA and NNA results at q → 0. Spatially varying locsiton solutions are found as in the previous subsection by using the ansatz (12) in Eq. (19). The corresponding dispersion relation δ ( q ) for locsitons in a 2D triangular lattice can be now written as\n\nwhere θ n = θ$_{0}$ + nπ/ 3, and q is represented by its polar coordinates q and ψ . The orientation of the lattice with respect to the incident field E$_{in}$ is described by θ$_{0}$ , which is the angle that one of the vectors u$_{K}$ makes with E$_{in}$ (the fact that θ$_{0}$ is not unique does not affect the result). The ultimate proof that the results of the NRA and the more precise NNA converge\n\n## B. Locsitons in the first Brillouin zone\n\n$$E$_{L}$ ( r ) = E$_{in}$ − Q 4 ∑ $^{u}$K { 3 u$_{K}$ [ E$_{L}$ ( r + l a u$_{K}$ ) · u$_{K}$ ] − E$_{L}$ ( r + l a u$_{K}$ ) } , (19)$$\n\n$$D NNA 2 ( q ) ≡ 2 ∑ n =0 ( cos 2 θ n + 1 3 ) cos[ q cos( θ n − ψ )] = δ + i δ$_{LL}$ . (20)$$\n\n14" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.027761629554104945, + "doc_id": "b89a6ee4f49943f726a640ba937444d5cd7882b49117fce72399014c70414e84", + "edit_distance": 0.8641552511415526, + "f1_score": 0.7432950191570881, + "meteor": 0.17549184038225274, + "precision": 0.9238095238095239, + "pred_md": "## III. SLAVNOV-TAYLOR IDENTITIES FOR THE GENERATING FUNCTIONALS: FORMAL ASPECTS\n\nFollowing the standard procedure adopted in commutative gauge theories, we start by considering the generating functional for the Green functions of the basic fields and their BRST variations,\n\n\n\nwhere S was given in the previous section and\n\n\n\nThe invariance of the functional integral (13) under the field-coordinate transformation (5) and the nilpotency of that variations imply the ST identity\n\n\n\nwhere W = -i ln Z is the generating functional for the connected Green functions. Furthermore, by subjecting the functional integral to an arbitrary variable change δC ¯ , we may derive that\n\n\n\nAs usual, the generating functional Γ of proper (one-particle-irreducible) vertex functions is obtained by a Legendre transformation\n\n\n\nwhere we have introduced the classical fields\n\n\n\nFrom these definitions, it follows that\n\n\n\nIn terms of Γ the identities (15) and (16) become\n\n\n\n5", + "recall": 0.6217948717948718, + "true_md": "## III. SLAVNOV-TAYLOR IDENTITIES FOR THE GENERATING FUNCTIONALS: FOR- MAL ASPECTS\n\nFollowing the standard procedure adopted in commutative gauge theories, we start by consider- ing the generating functional for the Green functions of the basic fields and their BRST variations,\n\nwhere S was given in the previous section and\n\nThe invariance of the functional integral (13) under the field-coordinate transformation (5) and the nilpotency of that variations imply the ST identity\n\nwhere W = − i ln Z is the generating functional for the connected Green functions. Furthermore, by subjecting the functional integral to an arbitrary variable change δ ¯ C , we may derive that\n\nAs usual, the generating functional Γ of proper (one-particle-irreducible) vertex functions is obtained by a Legendre transformation\n\n( where we have introduced the classical fields\n\nFrom these definitions, it follows that\n\nIn terms of Γ the identities (15) and (16) become\n\n$$Z [ J, η, ¯ η, ζ, ¯ ζ ; K, v, ω, ¯ ω ] = ∫ DA$_{µ}$DψD ¯ ψDCD ¯ Ce i ( S + S$_{source}$ $^{)}$, (13)$$\n\n$$S$_{source}$ = ∫ d $^{4}$x [ J$_{µ}$ ⋆ A µ + ¯ η ⋆ ψ + ¯ ψ ⋆ η + ¯ ζ ⋆ C + ¯ C ⋆ ζ + K$_{µ}$ ⋆ 1 e ( ∂ $^{µ}$C − ie [ A $^{µ}$, C ]$_{⋆}$) + iv ⋆ C ⋆ C + i ¯ ω ⋆ C ⋆ ψ + i ¯ ψ ⋆ C ⋆ ω ] . (14)$$\n\n$$∫ d $^{4}$x ( J$_{µ}$ ⋆ δW δK$_{µ}$ − ¯ ζ ⋆ δW δv − 1 αe ∂$_{µ}$ δW δJ$_{µ}$ ⋆ ζ − ¯ η ⋆ δW δ ¯ ω + δW δω ⋆ η ) = 0 , (15)$$\n\n$$ζ = e∂$_{µ}$ δW δK$_{µ}$ . (16)$$\n\n$$W [ J, η, ¯ η, ζ, ¯ ζ ; K, v, ω, ¯ ω ] = Γ[ A$_{cl}$, ψ$_{cl}$, ¯ ψ$_{cl}$, C$_{cl}$, ¯ C$_{cl}$ ; K, v, ω, ¯ ω ] + ∫ d $^{4}$x ( J$_{µ}$ ⋆ A µ cl + ¯ η ⋆ ψ$_{cl}$ + ¯ ψ$_{cl}$ ⋆ η + ¯ ζ ⋆ C$_{cl}$ + ¯ C$_{cl}$ ⋆ ζ ) , (17) where we have introduced the classical fields$$\n\n$$A µ cl = δW δJ$_{µ}$ , ψ$_{cl}$ = δW δ ¯ η , ¯ ψ$_{cl}$ = − δW δη , C$_{cl}$ = δW δ ¯ ζ , ¯ C$_{cl}$ = − δW δζ . (18)$$\n\n$$δ Γ δA$_{cl µ}$ = − J $^{µ}$, δ Γ δψ$_{cl}$ = ¯ η, δ Γ δ ¯ ψ$_{cl}$ = − η, δ Γ δC$_{cl}$ = ¯ ζ, δ Γ δ ¯ C$_{cl}$ = − ζ. (19)$$\n\n$$∫ d $^{4}$x ( δ Γ δA µ cl ⋆ δ Γ δK$_{µ}$ + δ Γ δC$_{cl}$ ⋆ δ Γ δv − 1 αe ( ∂$_{µ}$A µ $_{cl}$) ⋆ δ Γ δ ¯ C$_{cl}$ + δ Γ δψ$_{cl}$ ⋆ δ Γ δ ¯ ω + δ Γ δω ⋆ δ Γ δ ¯ ψ$_{cl}$ ) = 0 (20)$$\n\n5" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6375624152104522, + "doc_id": "8df3720033229ad8a9c013a91c6424f6a5c8755133de4a1773ff64d0ccf5591d", + "edit_distance": 0.2583081570996979, + "f1_score": 0.944558521560575, + "meteor": 0.8108739274933686, + "precision": 0.9583333333333334, + "pred_md": "g D Dπ ∗ as estimates. Be' cirevi' and Haas recently computed c g D Dπ ∗ = 0 71(7) in 2-flavor lattice . QCD, but this result is from only a single lattice spacing and presents no estimate of the systematic error [67]. Stewart computed the value of g D Dπ ∗ in 1998 by fitting to experimental data [68], and recently updated his result to include the experimental measurement of the D ∗ decay width [69]. His latest determination is g D Dπ ∗ = 0 51, but with no error quoted [70]. . The most sophisticated extraction of the D D π ∗ --coupling was performed by Kamenik and Fajfer, and gives g D Dπ ∗ = 0 66 . +0 08 . -0 06 . , where the uncertainty only reflects the error due to counterterms [71]. Finally, we note that the chiral-continuum extrapolations of B -meson quantities by the Fermilab/MILC Collaboration [72] and the HPQCD Collaboration [14] tend to prefer even smaller values of the B ∗ -B π -coupling than those in the literature.\n\nMost of the results presented above do not have complete error budgets, and are inconsistent within the quoted errors, so for this work we take g B Bπ ∗ = 0 516 . ± 0 2 to account . for the spread of values. We then vary g B Bπ ∗ within this range to determine how much it changes the central values for f B s /f B d and ξ . This leads to an uncertainty in f B s /f B d of 3 2% for both APE and HYP and in . ξ of 2 1%. .\n\n## C. Discretization errors\n\nIn this work we only analyze data at a single, relatively coarse lattice spacing of a ≈ 0 11 fm, . so we estimate the size of discretization errors with power-counting. As a consistency-check of our estimation procedure, however, we can compare the estimated errors in the individual decay constants and matrix elements with the observed differences in those quantities for the APE and HYP-smeared data. This is because, aside from statistical errors, the differences in the values obtained from the two smearings are due to discretization effects and higher-order corrections to the renormalization factors. We find about 15-20% differences in the decay constants and matrix elements obtained from the APE and HYP-smeared data, whereas we estimate by power-counting that discretization errors in f B q should be about 15% and in M q should be about 20%. Thus our observations are consistent with the scaling behavior expected from power-counting. We can also compare our power-counting estimates with the findings of the ALPHA Collaboration, who performed a study of f B s at several lattice spacings using static b -quarks with similar link-smearings in the quenched approximation [73]. Although ALPHA observes a violation of O ( a 2 ) scal-\n\n36", + "recall": 0.9311740890688259, + "true_md": "g$_{D}$ ∗ Dπ as estimates. Be´ cirevi´ c and Haas recently computed g$_{D}$ ∗ Dπ = 0 . 71(7) in 2-flavor lattice QCD, but this result is from only a single lattice spacing and presents no estimate of the systematic error [67]. Stewart computed the value of g$_{D}$ ∗ Dπ in 1998 by fitting to experimental data [68], and recently updated his result to include the experimental measurement of the D ∗ decay width [69]. His latest determination is g$_{D}$ ∗ Dπ = 0 . 51, but with no error quoted [70]. The most sophisticated extraction of the D $^{∗}$- D - π coupling was performed by Kamenik and Fajfer, and gives g$_{D}$ ∗ Dπ = 0 . 66 +0 . 08 − 0 $_{06}$, where the uncertainty only reflects the error due to counterterms [71]. Finally, we note that the chiral-continuum extrapolations of B -meson quantities by the Fermilab/MILC Collaboration [72] and the HPQCD Collaboration [14] tend to prefer even smaller values of the B $^{∗}$- B - π coupling than those in the literature.\n\nMost of the results presented above do not have complete error budgets, and are incon- sistent within the quoted errors, so for this work we take g$_{B}$ ∗ Bπ = 0 . 516 ± 0 . 2 to account for the spread of values. We then vary g$_{B}$ ∗ Bπ within this range to determine how much it changes the central values for f$_{B}$$\\_{s}$/f$\\_{B}$$_{d}$ and ξ . This leads to an uncertainty in f$_{B}$$\\_{s}$/f$\\_{B}$$_{d}$ of 3 . 2% for both APE and HYP and in ξ of 2 . 1%.\n\nIn this work we only analyze data at a single, relatively coarse lattice spacing of a ≈ 0 . 11 fm, so we estimate the size of discretization errors with power-counting. As a consistency-check of our estimation procedure, however, we can compare the estimated er- rors in the individual decay constants and matrix elements with the observed differences in those quantities for the APE and HYP-smeared data. This is because, aside from sta- tistical errors, the differences in the values obtained from the two smearings are due to discretization effects and higher-order corrections to the renormalization factors. We find about 15–20% differences in the decay constants and matrix elements obtained from the APE and HYP-smeared data, whereas we estimate by power-counting that discretization errors in f$_{B}$$\\_{q}$ should be about 15% and in M q should be about 20%. Thus our observations are consistent with the scaling behavior expected from power-counting. We can also compare our power-counting estimates with the findings of the ALPHA Collaboration, who performed a study of f$\\_{B}$$_{s}$ at several lattice spacings using static b -quarks with similar link-smearings in the quenched approximation [73]. Although ALPHA observes a violation of O ( a $^{2}$) scal-\n\n36\n\n## C. Discretization errors" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9062998677803148, + "doc_id": "82c159b7f9162832d6b6b350ec32ca10a53d22b15b719917287e8f6f9613723f", + "edit_distance": 0.05944055944055944, + "f1_score": 0.9477911646586344, + "meteor": 0.9476593476593477, + "precision": 0.959349593495935, + "pred_md": "2\n\nin a perturbative regime the holographic dual is strongly interacting and vice versa. This fact provides an unique tool to make quantitative calculations in 4D strongly interacting theories, and creates a very interesting connection between extra-dimensional and TC-like theories.\n\nWorking in the framework suggested by the AdS/CFT correspondence, one considers for the fifth dimension a segment ending with two branes (one ultraviolet, UV, and the other one infrared, IR). Several choices of gauge groups in the bulk have been proposed: there are models, with or without the Higgs, which assume a SU (2) L × SU (2) R × U (1) B -L gauge group, [8-17], or SU (2) × U (1) [18-21] or a simpler SU (2) in the 5D bulk [22, 23]. Compactification from five to four dimensions is often performed by the standard Kaluza Klein mode expansion, however alternative methods have been suggested. Effective low energy chiral Lagrangians in four dimensions, can be obtained by holographic versions of 5D theories in warped background [24-26] or via the deconstruction technique [27-35]. The deconstruction mechanism provides a correspondence at low energies between theories with replicated 4D gauge symmetries G and theories with a 5D gauge symmetry G on a lattice.\n\nWe will refer to the deconstructed models also as moose models. Several examples mainly based on the gauge group SU (2) have recently received attention [36-44]. It is interesting to note that even few sites of the moose give a good approximation of the 5D theory [45]. The BESS model [46, 47], based on the hidden symmetry approach [48-50], is a prototype of models of this kind: with a particular choice of its parameters it can generate the recently investigated three site model [51-55].\n\nGeneric TC models usually have difficulties in satisfying the constraints coming from EW precision measurements on S, T, U observables [56, 57]. In this paper, we have reconsidered the Degenerate BESS (D-BESS) model [58, 59], a low-energy effective theory which possesses a ( SU (2) ⊗ SU (2)) 2 custodial symmetry that leads to a suppressed contribution from the new physics to the EW precision observables, making possible to have new vector bosons at a relatively low energy scale (around a TeV). This new vector states are interpreted as composites of a strongly interacting sector. Starting from the generalization to N sites of the D-BESS model (GD-BESS) [39, 60], based on the deconstruction or 'moose' technique [27], we consider the continuum limit to a 5D theory.\n\nThe D-BESS model and its generalization suffer the drawback of the unitarity constraint, which is as low as that of the Higgsless SM [61, 62], that is around 1 7 TeV. However, .", + "recall": 0.9365079365079365, + "true_md": "2\n\nin a perturbative regime the holographic dual is strongly interacting and vice versa. This fact provides an unique tool to make quantitative calculations in 4D strongly interacting theories, and creates a very interesting connection between extra-dimensional and TC-like theories.\n\nWorking in the framework suggested by the AdS/CFT correspondence, one considers for the fifth dimension a segment ending with two branes (one ultraviolet, UV, and the other one infrared, IR). Several choices of gauge groups in the bulk have been proposed: there are models, with or without the Higgs, which assume a SU (2)$_{L}$ × SU (2)$_{R}$ × U $^{(1)$\\_{B}$}$− L gauge group, [8–17], or SU (2) × U (1) [18–21] or a simpler SU (2) in the 5D bulk [22, 23]. Compactification from five to four dimensions is often performed by the standard Kaluza Klein mode expansion, however alternative methods have been suggested. Effective low energy chiral Lagrangians in four dimensions, can be obtained by holographic versions of 5D theories in warped background [24–26] or via the deconstruction technique [27–35]. The deconstruction mechanism provides a correspondence at low energies between theories with replicated 4D gauge symmetries G and theories with a 5D gauge symmetry G on a lattice.\n\nWe will refer to the deconstructed models also as moose models. Several examples mainly based on the gauge group SU (2) have recently received attention [36–44]. It is interesting to note that even few sites of the moose give a good approximation of the 5D theory [45]. The BESS model [46, 47], based on the hidden symmetry approach [48–50], is a prototype of models of this kind: with a particular choice of its parameters it can generate the recently investigated three site model [51–55].\n\nGeneric TC models usually have difficulties in satisfying the constraints coming from EW precision measurements on S,T,U observables [56, 57]. In this paper, we have reconsidered the Degenerate BESS (D-BESS) model [58, 59], a low-energy effective theory which possesses a ( SU (2) ⊗ SU (2)) 2 custodial symmetry that leads to a suppressed contribution from the new physics to the EW precision observables, making possible to have new vector bosons at a relatively low energy scale (around a TeV). This new vector states are interpreted as composites of a strongly interacting sector. Starting from the generalization to N sites of the D-BESS model (GD-BESS) [39, 60], based on the deconstruction or “moose” technique [27], we consider the continuum limit to a 5D theory.\n\nThe D-BESS model and its generalization suffer the drawback of the unitarity constraint, which is as low as that of the Higgsless SM [61, 62], that is around 1 . 7 TeV. However," + }, + { + "bleu": 0.41177930277023594, + "doc_id": "c24fb0e8c754e2211483bd27aeba3cc01daa811bdd06c3f0b8829c9833cf7a81", + "edit_distance": 0.4762773722627737, + "f1_score": 0.9177215189873418, + "meteor": 0.5599733645032983, + "precision": 0.9477124183006536, + "pred_md": "TABLE IV: Parameters used in our simulations. The columns from left to right are the light and (approximately) strange sea quark masses, the light and strange valence quark masses, and the number of configurations analyzed for both of our setups using APE or HYP link smearing in the static quark gauge links.\n\nstrange quark mass am s = 0 0359 [19]. . We also use two different link smearings (APE and HYP) to improve the static heavy quark action in order to help estimate discretization effects. Table IV presents the parameters chosen for our matrix element computations. In the first subsection we calculate the ratio of B -meson decay constants and in the second we calculate the ratio of ∆ B = 2 mixing matrix elements.\n\n## A. Calculation of the ratio of B -meson decay constants\n\nIn QCD the decay constant f B q for the B q -meson is defined by the vacuum-to-meson matrix element\n\n\n\nBecause the decay constant f B q behaves as 1 / √ m B q in the limit of large B q -meson mass, we calculate the combined decay amplitude\n\n\n\nwhere m B q is the physical mass of the B q -meson. We determine the quantity Φ B q by computing two-point correlation functions of the static-light axial current A ( ± )stat µ = h ( ± ) γ γ q µ 5 . 1\n\n1 For the case of static b -quarks, we can relate the B -meson interpolating operator h ( -) γ q 5 to the axial current operator in the temporal direction using the relation h ( ± ) ( x γ ) 0 = ± h ( ± ) ( x ), and thereby express all correlation functions entirely in terms of the axial current.\n\n17", + "recall": 0.8895705521472392, + "true_md": "TABLE IV: Parameters used in our simulations. The columns from left to right are the light and (approximately) strange sea quark masses, the light and strange valence quark masses, and the number of configurations analyzed for both of our setups using APE or HYP link smearing in the static quark gauge links.\n\nstrange quark mass am$_{s}$ = 0 . 0359 [19]. We also use two different link smearings (APE and HYP) to improve the static heavy quark action in order to help estimate discretization effects. Table IV presents the parameters chosen for our matrix element computations. In the first subsection we calculate the ratio of B -meson decay constants and in the second we calculate the ratio of Δ B = 2 mixing matrix elements.\n\nIn QCD the decay constant f$_{B}$$\\_{q}$ for the B$\\_{q}$ -meson is defined by the vacuum-to-meson matrix element\n\n〈 | | 〉 Because the decay constant f$_{B}$$\\_{q}$ behaves as 1 / √ m$\\_{B}$$_{q}$ in the limit of large B$_{q}$ -meson mass, we calculate the combined decay amplitude\n\nwhere m$_{B}$$\\_{q}$ is the physical mass of the B$\\_{q}$ -meson. We determine the quantity Φ$\\_{B}$$_{q}$ by com- puting two-point correlation functions of the static-light axial current A ( ± )stat µ = h ( ± $^{)}$γ$_{µ}$ γ$_{5}$q . 1\n\n1 For the case of static b -quarks, we can relate the B -meson interpolating operator h ( − $^{)}$γ$_{5}$ q to the axial current operator in the temporal direction using the relation h ( ± $^{)}$( x ) γ$_{0}$ = ± h ( ± $^{)}$( x ), and thereby express all correlation functions entirely in terms of the axial current.\n\n17\n\n$$Φ$_{B}$$_{q}$ = f$_{B}$$_{q}$ √ m$_{B}$$_{q}$, (58)$$\n\n$$〈 0 | bγ$_{µ}$γ$_{5}$q | B$_{q}$ ( p ) 〉 = if$_{B}$$_{q}$p$_{µ}$. (57) √$$\n\n## A. Calculation of the ratio of B -meson decay constants" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4620865868533436, + "doc_id": "c0137c91e0447b25f1294e7680ea2736b0b19aaf524c8e8b80f5d09e8e1294a6", + "edit_distance": 0.5506072874493927, + "f1_score": 0.9726027397260274, + "meteor": 0.803475659266143, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "FIG. 2: (Color online) Dispersion dependences for locsitons in a triangular lattice of atoms (a) in the near-ring approximation; (b) for E in ‖ ΓK; (c) for E in ‖ ΓM. Isolines of equal D 2 ( q ) are spaced at 0.25 (i. e., they correspond to the ticks on the color bars); solid isolines and red shading correspond to positive D 2 ( q ), dashed isolines and blue shading correspond to negative ones, while the thicker solid isoline marks the zero level. The hexagons in plots (b,c) show the boundaries of the first Brillouin zone.\n\nFIG. 2: (Color online) Dispersion dependences for locsitons in a triangular lattice of atoms (a) in the near-ring approximation; (b) for E in ‖ ΓK; (c) for E in ‖ ΓM. Isolines of equal D 2 ( q ) are spaced at 0.25 (i. e., they correspond to the ticks on the color bars); solid isolines and red shading correspond to positive D 2 ( q ), dashed isolines and blue shading correspond to negative ones, while the thicker solid isoline marks the zero level. The hexagons in plots (b,c) show the boundaries of the first Brillouin zone.\n\n12", + "recall": 0.9466666666666667, + "true_md": "FIG. 2: (Color online) Dispersion dependences for locsitons in a triangular lattice of atoms (a) in the near-ring approximation; (b) for E$_{in}$ ‖ ΓK; (c) for E$_{in}$ ‖ ΓM. Isolines of equal D $_{2}$( q ) are spaced at 0.25 (i. e., they correspond to the ticks on the color bars); solid isolines and red shading correspond to positive D $_{2}$( q ), dashed isolines and blue shading correspond to negative ones, while the thicker solid isoline marks the zero level. The hexagons in plots (b,c) show the boundaries of the first Brillouin zone.\n\n12" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.785117213399787, + "doc_id": "9036adb53f6e2a12631459fca724f4f3265846954abd13a6977ec2067ee80d42", + "edit_distance": 0.16233766233766234, + "f1_score": 0.9490445859872613, + "meteor": 0.870852634143704, + "precision": 0.9738562091503268, + "pred_md": "arXiv:1002.4495v2 [nucl-th] 15 Jun 2010\n\n## Triaxial superdeformation in 40 Ar\n\nYasutaka Taniguchi, 1 Yoshiko Kanada-En'yo, 2 Masaaki Kimura, 3 Kiyomi Ikeda, 1 Hisashi Horiuchi, 4 and Eiji Ideguchi 5\n\n1 RIKEN Nishina Center for Accelerator-Based Science,\n\nRIKEN, Wako, Saitama 351-0198, Japan\n\n2 Yukawa Institute for Theoretical Physics,\n\nKyoto University, Kyoto, Kyoto 606-8502, Japan\n\n3\n\nCreative Research Initiative 'Sousei,\n\n' Hokkaido University, Sapporo, Hokkaido 001-0021, Japan\n\n4 Research Center for Nuclear Physics,\n\nOsaka University, Ibaraki, Osaka 567-0047, Japan\n\n5 Center for Nuclear Study, The University of Tokyo, Wako, Saitama 351-0198, Japan\n\n(Dated: August 29, 2018)\n\n## Abstract\n\nSuperdeformed (SD) states in 40 Ar have been studied using the deformed-basis antisymmetrized molecular dynamics. Low energy states were calculated by the parity and angular momentum projection (AMP) and the generator coordinate method (GCM). Basis wave functions were obtained by the energy variation with a constraint on the quadrupole deformation parameter β , while other quantities such as triaxiality γ were optimized by the energy variation. By the GCM calculation, an SD band was obtained just above the ground state (GS) band. The SD band involves a K π = 2 + side band due to the triaxiality. The calculated electric quadrupole transition strengths of the SD band reproduce the experimental values appropriately. Triaxiality is significant for understanding low-lying states.\n\nPACS numbers:\n\n1", + "recall": 0.9254658385093167, + "true_md": "arXiv:1002.4495v2 [nucl-th] 15 Jun 2010\n\n# Triaxial superdeformation in $^{40}$Ar\n\nYasutaka Taniguchi, 1 Yoshiko Kanada-En’yo, 2 Masaaki Kimura, 3\n\nKiyomi Ikeda, 1 Hisashi Horiuchi, 4 and Eiji Ideguchi 5\n\n$^{1}$RIKEN Nishina Center for Accelerator-Based Science, RIKEN, Wako, Saitama 351-0198, Japan\n\n$^{2}$Yukawa Institute for Theoretical Physics, Kyoto University, Kyoto, Kyoto 606-8502, Japan\n\n$^{3}$Creative Research Initiative “Sousei, ” Hokkaido University, Sapporo, Hokkaido 001-0021, Japan\n\n$^{4}$Research Center for Nuclear Physics, Osaka University, Ibaraki, Osaka 567-0047, Japan\n\n$^{5}$Center for Nuclear Study, The University of Tokyo, Wako, Saitama 351-0198, Japan\n\n(Dated: August 29, 2018)\n\nSuperdeformed (SD) states in $^{40}$Ar have been studied using the deformed-basis antisymmetrized molecular dynamics. Low energy states were calculated by the parity and angular momentum pro- jection (AMP) and the generator coordinate method (GCM). Basis wave functions were obtained by the energy variation with a constraint on the quadrupole deformation parameter β , while other quantities such as triaxiality γ were optimized by the energy variation. By the GCM calculation, an SD band was obtained just above the ground state (GS) band. The SD band involves a K π = 2 + side band due to the triaxiality. The calculated electric quadrupole transition strengths of the SD band reproduce the experimental values appropriately. Triaxiality is significant for understanding low-lying states.\n\nPACS numbers:\n\n## Abstract\n\n1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9515786819565855, + "doc_id": "0a543e68dbb5dd68ea965012786b3d07a1d32018f4dfe9f9016c62428ca38d0d", + "edit_distance": 0.09022556390977443, + "f1_score": 0.9933774834437087, + "meteor": 0.995001888130226, + "precision": 0.9933774834437086, + "pred_md": "arXiv:1002.1987v1 [cond-mat.quant-gas] 9 Feb 2010\n\n## Verification of universal relations in a strongly interacting Fermi\n\n## gas\n\nJ. T. Stewart, J. P. Gaebler, ∗ T. E. Drake, and D. S. Jin † JILA, Quantum Physics Division, National Institute of Standards and Technology and Department of Physics, University of Colorado, Boulder, CO 80309-0440, USA\n\n(Dated: October 31, 2018)\n\n## Abstract\n\nMany-body fermion systems are important in many branches of physics, including condensed matter, nuclear, and now cold atom physics. In many cases, the interactions between fermions can be approximated by a contact interaction. A recent theoretical advance in the study of these systems is the derivation of a number of exact universal relations that are predicted to be valid for all interaction strengths, temperatures, and spin compositions [1-6]. These equations, referred to as the Tan relations, relate a microscopic quantity, namely, the amplitude of the high-momentum tail of the fermion momentum distribution, to the thermodynamics of the many-body system. In this work, we provide experimental verification of the Tan relations in a strongly interacting gas of fermionic atoms. Specifically, we measure the fermion momentum distribution using two different techniques, as well as the rf excitation spectrum and determine the effect of interactions on these microscopic probes. We then measure the potential energy and release energy of the trapped gas and test the predicted universal relations.\n\n1", + "recall": 0.9933774834437086, + "true_md": "# Verification of universal relations in a strongly interacting Fermi gas\n\nJ. T. Stewart, J. P. Gaebler, ∗ T. E. Drake, and D. S. Jin †\n\nJILA, Quantum Physics Division, National Institute of Standards and Technology and Department of Physics, University of Colorado, Boulder, CO 80309-0440, USA\n\n(Dated: October 31, 2018)\n\nMany-body fermion systems are important in many branches of physics, including condensed matter, nuclear, and now cold atom physics. In many cases, the interactions between fermions can be approximated by a contact interaction. A recent theoretical advance in the study of these systems is the derivation of a number of exact universal relations that are predicted to be valid for all interaction strengths, temperatures, and spin compositions [1–6]. These equations, referred to as the Tan relations, relate a microscopic quantity, namely, the amplitude of the high-momentum tail of the fermion momentum distribution, to the thermodynamics of the many-body system. In this work, we provide experimental verification of the Tan relations in a strongly interacting gas of fermionic atoms. Specifically, we measure the fermion momentum distribution using two different techniques, as well as the rf excitation spectrum and determine the effect of interactions on these microscopic probes. We then measure the potential energy and release energy of the trapped gas and test the predicted universal relations.\n\n1\n\n## Abstract\n\narXiv:1002.1987v1 [cond-mat.quant-gas] 9 Feb 2010" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6215988503582117, + "doc_id": "c0d7629433ce5961ad0f8a1ef1e24d05137fcec9db77d1d056a4710b50e6d570", + "edit_distance": 0.283072546230441, + "f1_score": 0.9557109557109557, + "meteor": 0.7868129456916108, + "precision": 0.9669811320754716, + "pred_md": "affect NNLO terms that are of higher-order than we consider. We therefore vary f between f 0 = 115 MeV [34] and f K = 155 5 MeV [6] in order to estimate the systematic uncertainty . due to the omission of higher-order terms in the chiral expansion. The use of f 0 in the SU (2) chiral limit, which the RBC and UKQCD Collaborations find to be about 10% lower than f π , leads to a difference from the central value for f B s /f B d of 2.1% (2.2%) for APE (HYP) and from the central value for ξ of 2.3% for both APE and HYP. The use of f K leads to similar changes in f B s /f B d of 2.1% and in ξ of 2.2%.\n\nWe take the largest of the uncertainties enumerated above, which is obtained from the difference between the preferred linear plus NLO SU (2) HM χ PT fit and the purely linear fit, for the final estimate of the chiral extrapolation error; this leads to the values in the row labeled 'chiral extrapolation' in Tab. VIII.\n\n## B. Uncertainty due to g B Bπ ∗\n\nAlthough we fix the value of the B ∗ -B π -coupling (and hence the coefficient of the oneloop chiral logarithms) in the chiral extrapolation of our lattice data, g B Bπ ∗ is in fact poorly known from phenomenology. Hence we must vary the value of g B Bπ ∗ over a sensible range based on lattice QCD calculations and phenomenology in order to estimate the systematic errors in f B s /f B d and ξ due to the uncertainty in the coefficient of the one-loop chiral logarithms.\n\nThere has only been one unquenched lattice QCD calculation of the B ∗ -B π -coupling with a complete associated error budget, which gives g B Bπ ∗ = 0 516(5)(50), where the first . uncertainty is statistical and the second is systematic [62]. Although this value was computed in the static heavy-quark limit and neglects the effects of the dynamical strange quark, we take this as our central value because of its small statistical errors and full systematic error budget, as well as because it lies in the middle of the range of values presented in the literature. Another recent determination of g B Bπ ∗ = 0 44 . ± 0 03 . +0 07 . -0 00 . in the static limit in two-flavor lattice QCD, where the errors are due to statistics and the chiral extrapolation uncertainty, is consistent with this result [65]. QCD sum rules and the relativistic quark model give a slightly lower value of g B Bπ ∗ ≈ 0 38 . ± 0 08 [66]. . The value of the B ∗ -B π -coupling is expected to be close to the D D π ∗ --coupling because of heavy-quark symmetry. We can therefore also use lattice QCD calculations and phenomenological extractions of\n\n35", + "recall": 0.9447004608294931, + "true_md": "affect NNLO terms that are of higher-order than we consider. We therefore vary f between f$_{0}$ = 115 MeV [34] and f$_{K}$ = 155 . 5 MeV [6] in order to estimate the systematic uncertainty due to the omission of higher-order terms in the chiral expansion. The use of f$_{0}$ in the SU (2) chiral limit, which the RBC and UKQCD Collaborations find to be about 10% lower than f$_{π}$ , leads to a difference from the central value for f$_{B}$$\\_{s}$/f$\\_{B}$$_{d}$ of 2.1% (2.2%) for APE (HYP) and from the central value for ξ of 2.3% for both APE and HYP. The use of f$_{K}$ leads to similar changes in f$_{B}$$\\_{s}$/f$\\_{B}$$_{d}$ of 2.1% and in ξ of 2.2%.\n\nWe take the largest of the uncertainties enumerated above, which is obtained from the difference between the preferred linear plus NLO SU (2) HM χ PT fit and the purely linear fit, for the final estimate of the chiral extrapolation error; this leads to the values in the row labeled “chiral extrapolation” in Tab. VIII.\n\nAlthough we fix the value of the B $^{∗}$- B - π coupling (and hence the coefficient of the one- loop chiral logarithms) in the chiral extrapolation of our lattice data, g$_{B}$ ∗ Bπ is in fact poorly known from phenomenology. Hence we must vary the value of g$_{B}$ ∗ Bπ over a sensible range based on lattice QCD calculations and phenomenology in order to estimate the systematic errors in f$_{B}$$\\_{s}$/f$\\_{B}$$_{d}$ and ξ due to the uncertainty in the coefficient of the one-loop chiral logarithms.\n\nThere has only been one unquenched lattice QCD calculation of the B $^{∗}$- B - π coupling with a complete associated error budget, which gives g$_{B}$ ∗ Bπ = 0 . 516(5)(50), where the first uncertainty is statistical and the second is systematic [62]. Although this value was computed in the static heavy-quark limit and neglects the effects of the dynamical strange quark, we take this as our central value because of its small statistical errors and full systematic error budget, as well as because it lies in the middle of the range of values presented in the literature. Another recent determination of g$_{B}$ ∗ Bπ = 0 . 44 ± 0 . 03 +0 . 07 − 0 00 in the static limit in two-flavor lattice QCD, where the errors are due to statistics and the chiral extrapolation uncertainty, is consistent with this result [65]. QCD sum rules and the relativistic quark model give a slightly lower value of g$_{B}$ ∗ Bπ ≈ 0 . 38 ± 0 . 08 [66]. The value of the B $^{∗}$- B - π coupling is expected to be close to the D $^{∗}$- D - π coupling because of heavy-quark symmetry. We can therefore also use lattice QCD calculations and phenomenological extractions of\n\n35\n\n## B. Uncertainty due to g$_{B}$ ∗ Bπ" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.027334607493293216, + "doc_id": "b6b374be3a24d0229de73e907c8fe7c1f21a8eb7452e494f2dc7a5cf90872fa4", + "edit_distance": 0.8669354838709677, + "f1_score": 0.7711864406779662, + "meteor": 0.1707469751174093, + "precision": 0.9285714285714286, + "pred_md": "\n\nThus, the left-hand side of Eq. (76) is identical to the right-hand side as we can see from Eq. (91). Therefore, the ST identity for the vectorial vertex is satisfied at one-loop.\n\n## B. The triple photon vertex\n\nWriting the expansions for Γ ˜ µνλ ( p, q, k ) and ˜ G λ ν ' ( p, q, k ), defined in (59) and (61), as\n\n\n\n\n\nwe obtain the ST identity (69) for the triple photon vertex, in the tree approximation,\n\n\n\nwhich requires that\n\n\n\nOn the other hand, the one-loop approximation is given by\n\n\n\nwhere we have introduced the photon self-energy Π νν ' ( q ) ≡ Π ( T q 2 )( q 2 g νν ' -q ν q ν ' ) + Π ( θ q 2 )˜ ˜ q ν q ν ' .\n\nThe contributions with a fermion loop in the left and right-hand sides of Eq. (103) are directly identified when we consider the diagrams:\n\n\n\n16", + "recall": 0.6594202898550725, + "true_md": "Thus, the left-hand side of Eq. (76) is identical to the right-hand side as we can see from Eq. (91). Therefore, the ST identity for the vectorial vertex is satisfied at one-loop.\n\nWriting the expansions for ˜ Γ $^{µνλ}$( p, q, k ) and ˜ G λ ν ′ ( p, q, k ), defined in (59) and (61), as\n\nwe obtain the ST identity (69) for the triple photon vertex, in the tree approximation,\n\nwhich requires that\n\nOn the other hand, the one-loop approximation is given by\n\nwhere we have introduced the photon self-energy Π νν $^{′}$( q ) ≡ Π$_{T}$( q $^{2}$)( q $^{2}$g νν ′ − q $^{ν}$qν $^{′}$) + Π$_{θ}$ ( q $^{2}$)˜ q $^{ν}$˜ q ν $^{′}$.\n\nThe contributions with a fermion loop in the left and right-hand sides of Eq. (103) are directly identified when we consider the diagrams:\n\n$$− ∫ d $^{4}$l (2 π ) 4 i ( p + q − l ) 2 i ( p − l ) $_{2}$( ie )( / p − / l ) iS$_{0}$ ( l )( ie )( / p − / l ) ( 1 − e 2 il ∧ $^{q}$e − 2 ip ∧ q ) + i d $^{4}$l (2 π ) 4 i ( p − l ) 2 i ( p + q − l ) $_{2}$( ie ) / q ( ie ) ( 1 − e 2 il ∧ $^{q}$e − 2 ip ∧ q ) . (98)$$\n\n$$˜ Γ $^{µνλ}$( p, q, k ) = 2 eZ$_{1}$ sin( p ∧ q ) γ $^{µνλ}$( p, q, k ) + 2 e sin( p ∧ q )Λ $^{µνλ}$( p, q, k ) , (99)$$\n\n$$˜ G λ ν ′ ( p, q, k ) = − 2 e ˜ Z$_{1}$ sin( p ∧ q ) g λ ν ′ + 2 e sin( p ∧ q ) B λ ν ′ ( p, q, k ) , (100)$$\n\n$$Z$_{1}$ ˜ Z$_{3}$ [ ( k $^{2}$g λν − k $^{λ}$k$^{ν}$) − ( q $^{2}$g νλ − q $^{ν}$q$^{λ}$) ] = ˜ Z$_{1}$Z$_{3}$ [ ( k $^{2}$g λν − k $^{λ}$k$^{ν}$) − ( q $^{2}$g νλ − q $^{ν}$q$^{λ}$) ] , (101)$$\n\n$$˜ Z$_{3}$/ ˜ Z$_{1}$ = Z$_{3}$/Z$_{1}$. (102)$$\n\n$$p$_{µ}$γ $^{µνλ}$( p, q, k ) b ( p $^{2}$) + p$_{µ}$ Λ $^{µνλ}$( p, q, k ) = Π $^{νλ}$( q ) − Π $^{λν}$( k ) + B λ ν ′ ( p, q, k )( q $^{2}$g νν ′ − q $^{ν}$qν $^{′}$) + B ν λ ′ ( p, k, q )( k $^{2}$g λλ ′ − k $^{λ}$kλ $^{′}$) , (103)$$\n\n$$= 2 e sin( p ∧ q )Λ µνλ a 1 ( p, q, k ) (104) = − ∫ d $^{4}$l (2 π ) $_{4}$tr( − ieγ $^{ν}$) iS$_{0}$ ( q + l )( − ieγ $^{µ}$) iS$_{0}$ ( p + q + l )$$\n\n## B. The triple photon vertex\n\n16" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9341403717923789, + "doc_id": "afe290b8f1881ee20a5d1c631d9318f269dac96d2228ff9137115ab2108f146f", + "edit_distance": 0.0421455938697318, + "f1_score": 0.9686746987951806, + "meteor": 0.9611558054594386, + "precision": 0.9852941176470589, + "pred_md": "Real quantum systems always interact with the environment. This interaction leads to decoherence, the process by which quantum information is degraded and purely quantum properties of a system are lost. Decoherence provides a theoretical basis for the quantumclassical transition [1], emerging as a possible explanation of the quantum origin of the classical world. It is also a major obstacle for building a quantum computer [2] since it can produce the loss of the quantum character of the computer. Therefore, a complete characterization of the decoherence process and its relation with the physical properties of the system and the environment is needed for both fundamental and practical purposes.\n\nThe connection between decoherence and environmental quantum phase transitions has been recently investigated [3-5]. A universal Gaussian decay regime in the fidelity of the system was initially identified, and related to a second-order quantum phase transition in the environment [4]; as a consequence, the decoherence process was postulated as an indicator of a quantum phase transition in the environment. Subsequently, this analysis was refined, and it was found that the universal regime is neither always Gaussian [6], nor always related to an environmental quantum phase transition [5].\n\nIn this paper we analyze the relationship between decoherence and an environmental excited state quantum phase transition (ESQPT). We show that the fidelity of a single qubit, coupled to a two-level boson environment, becomes singular when the system-environment coupling energy equals the critical energy for the occurrence of a continuous ESQPT in the environment. Therefore, our results establish that a critical phenomenon in the environment entails a singular behavior in the decoherence induced in the central system.\n\nAn ESQPT is a nonanalytic evolution of some excited states of a system as the Hamiltonian control parameter is varied. It is analogous to a standard quantum phase transition (QPT), but taking place in some excited state of the system, which defines the critical energy E c at which the transition takes place. We can distinguish between different kinds of ESQPT. As it is stated in [7], in the thermodynamic limit a crossing of two levels at E = E c determines a first order ESQPT, while if the number of interacting levels is locally large at E = E c but without real crossings, the ESQPT is continuous. In this paper we will concentrate in the latter case, which usually entails a singularity in the density of states (for an illustration see Fig. 1). As the entropy of a quantum system is related to its density of states, a relationship between an ESQPT and a standard phase transition at a certain critical temperature, can be established in the thermodynamic limit [8].\n\n2", + "recall": 0.95260663507109, + "true_md": "Real quantum systems always interact with the environment. This interaction leads to decoherence, the process by which quantum information is degraded and purely quantum properties of a system are lost. Decoherence provides a theoretical basis for the quantum- classical transition [1], emerging as a possible explanation of the quantum origin of the classical world. It is also a major obstacle for building a quantum computer [2] since it can produce the loss of the quantum character of the computer. Therefore, a complete characterization of the decoherence process and its relation with the physical properties of the system and the environment is needed for both fundamental and practical purposes.\n\nThe connection between decoherence and environmental quantum phase transitions has been recently investigated [3–5]. A universal Gaussian decay regime in the fidelity of the system was initially identified, and related to a second-order quantum phase transition in the environment [4]; as a consequence, the decoherence process was postulated as an indicator of a quantum phase transition in the environment. Subsequently, this analysis was refined, and it was found that the universal regime is neither always Gaussian [6], nor always related to an environmental quantum phase transition [5].\n\nIn this paper we analyze the relationship between decoherence and an environmental excited state quantum phase transition (ESQPT). We show that the fidelity of a single qubit, coupled to a two-level boson environment, becomes singular when the system-environment coupling energy equals the critical energy for the occurrence of a continuous ESQPT in the environment. Therefore, our results establish that a critical phenomenon in the environment entails a singular behavior in the decoherence induced in the central system.\n\nAn ESQPT is a nonanalytic evolution of some excited states of a system as the Hamil- tonian control parameter is varied. It is analogous to a standard quantum phase transition (QPT), but taking place in some excited state of the system, which defines the critical en- ergy E$_{c}$ at which the transition takes place. We can distinguish between different kinds of ESQPT. As it is stated in [7], in the thermodynamic limit a crossing of two levels at E = E$_{c}$ determines a first order ESQPT, while if the number of interacting levels is locally large at E = E$_{c}$ but without real crossings, the ESQPT is continuous. In this paper we will concentrate in the latter case, which usually entails a singularity in the density of states (for an illustration see Fig. 1). As the entropy of a quantum system is related to its density of states, a relationship between an ESQPT and a standard phase transition at a certain critical temperature, can be established in the thermodynamic limit [8].\n\n2" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9262707769045428, + "doc_id": "24d19a32ac09eeedfcc13d779621e7a937c6b16fc79d9f1d1d3d04baca89f857", + "edit_distance": 0.05314009661835749, + "f1_score": 0.9679144385026739, + "meteor": 0.9575679888129817, + "precision": 0.9783783783783784, + "pred_md": "method for solving the Schrödinger equation is required. Since it is extremely difficult to develop a numerical method for a two dimensional integro-differential equation with nonlocal transparent boundary conditions and skew boundaries, this work will develop an essential numerical method for obtaining the solution of the non-relativistic one-dimensional Schrödinger equation.\n\nThe most demanding part of this work is the implementation of Transparent Boundary Conditions ( TBCs ) 8,9 . The TBCs , recently developed by mathematicians, arise in the necessity to deal numerically with the natural infinite domain of the wave function. That is, due to the limitation of the computer core size, the infinite wave solution of the Schrödinger equation has to be solved in a finite domain by imposing artificial boundary conditions. The criterion of transparency is that the incident wave at the boundary has the smallest reflection coefficient possible. If the solution with these artificial conditions agrees with the infinite solution, the artificial boundary conditions are said to be transparent. From the several available approaches to derive TBCs , this work is based on the excellent treatment carried out by Anton Arnold and his student Mathias Earhardt 8 9,10 that concerns the transport of a quantum particle that enters one side of a finite domain and exits from the opposite side.\n\nIn the following, in the next section, we first set up the ' Escape Problem , i.e. the escape of a particle from a finite region, as a Quantum Initial Value Problem ( QIVP ). We then develop two different approaches for solving the EP . The first is the analytic method that provides the certainty of the result. The second is the numerical method, where an algorithm will be meticulously presented by introducing Discrete Transparent Boundary Conditions (DTBC) 10 , based on the implicit Crank-Nicholson method. Subsequently, the consistency of both methods is confirmed in section III by comparing the solutions for the real and imaginary parts of the wave function at different times, showing an excellent agreement. In the last section, conclusions are drawn from the work that has been accomplished, stressing the valuable physical information provided by the wave function as well as the numerical importance of the method developed in this work.\n\n3", + "recall": 0.9576719576719577, + "true_md": "method for solving the Schrödinger equation is required. Since it is extremely difficult to develop a numerical method for a two dimensional integro-differential equation with nonlocal transparent boundary conditions and skew boundaries, this work will develop an essential numerical method for obtaining the solution of the non-relativistic one-dimensional Schrödinger equation.\n\nThe most demanding part of this work is the implementation of Transparent Boundary Conditions ( TBCs ) $^{8,9}$. The TBCs , recently developed by mathematicians, arise in the ne- cessity to deal numerically with the natural infinite domain of the wave function. That is, due to the limitation of the computer core size, the infinite wave solution of the Schrödinger equation has to be solved in a finite domain by imposing artificial boundary conditions. The criterion of transparency is that the incident wave at the boundary has the smallest reflection coefficient possible. If the solution with these artificial conditions agrees with the infinite solution, the artificial boundary conditions are said to be transparent. From the several available approaches to derive TBCs , this work is based on the excellent treatment carried out by Anton Arnold $^{8}$and his student Mathias Earhardt9,10 that concerns the transport of a quantum particle that enters one side of a finite domain and exits from the opposite side.\n\nIn the following, in the next section, we first set up the “ Escape Problem , i.e. the escape of a particle from a finite region, as a Quantum Initial Value Problem ( QIVP ). We then develop two different approaches for solving the EP . The first is the analytic method that provides the certainty of the result. The second is the numerical method, where an algorithm will be meticulously presented by introducing Discrete Transparent Boundary Conditions (DTBC) $^{10}$, based on the implicit Crank-Nicholson method. Subsequently, the consistency of both methods is confirmed in section III by comparing the solutions for the real and imaginary parts of the wave function at different times, showing an excellent agreement. In the last section, conclusions are drawn from the work that has been accomplished, stressing the valuable physical information provided by the wave function as well as the numerical importance of the method developed in this work.\n\n3" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.46917637953903757, + "doc_id": "59e3aa1ab0dfd1510a3f8669a35933b40726fb780366ee13778270477d0a8cb4", + "edit_distance": 0.5162790697674419, + "f1_score": 0.9447852760736196, + "meteor": 0.8621318844620036, + "precision": 0.9746835443037974, + "pred_md": "FIG. 4: (Color) 'Dynamic phase diagram' for 40 kbp fragments of λ -DNA with one free end, at salt concentration c =150 mM. The dynamic stretching protocol is as Fig. 3, except that the molecular stretching rate is 100 nm/s rather than 1000 nm/s. In general, more U-DNA is seen here then in Fig. 3: here, attainment of the target force f 0 takes of order hundreds of seconds near 65 pN, and as a result the molecule has more time to unpeel than it does at the smaller stretching rate.\n\nFIG. 4: (Color) 'Dynamic phase diagram' for 40 kbp fragments of λ -DNA with one free end, at salt concentration c =150 mM. The dynamic stretching protocol is as Fig. 3, except that the molecular stretching rate is 100 nm/s rather than 1000 nm/s. In general, more U-DNA is seen here then in Fig. 3: here, attainment of the target force f 0 takes of order hundreds of seconds near 65 pN, and as a result the molecule has more time to unpeel than it does at the smaller stretching rate.\n\n11", + "recall": 0.9166666666666666, + "true_md": "FIG. 4: (Color) ‘Dynamic phase diagram’ for 40 kbp fragments of λ -DNA with one free end, at salt concentration c =150 mM. The dynamic stretching protocol is as Fig. 3, except that the molecular stretching rate is 100 nm/s rather than 1000 nm/s. In general, more U-DNA is seen here then in Fig. 3: here, attainment of the target force f$_{0}$ takes of order hundreds of seconds near 65 pN, and as a result the molecule has more time to unpeel than it does at the smaller stretching rate.\n\n11" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.37024406161586926, + "doc_id": "e6f25bc64bc15704d7ee90a2f04ee07c871b581c12a61b5199a158adf23813d1", + "edit_distance": 0.5758754863813229, + "f1_score": 0.851851851851852, + "meteor": 0.5099400483285852, + "precision": 0.8944444444444445, + "pred_md": "the pressure from the electrons. The constant B is so determined that the pressure vanishes at zero density and temperature. In addition to the Eqs. (3) and (4), the pressure must satisfy,\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nso that local electric and colour charge neutrality conditions are met. Once, the pressure as a function of quark chemical potential is known, quark matter EOS can be easily computed.\n\nThe model parameters, the current quark masses mud s , , , quark-antiquark coupling GS , the strength K of the six fermion or 't Hooft' interaction and the cuto ff parameter Λ are taken to be [41],\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nAfter fixing the masses of the up and down quarks, mu = md = 5 5 MeV, the other four parameters . are chosen to reproduce the following observables of vacuum QCD [41]: m π = 135 0 MeV, . mK = 497 7 MeV, . m η ' = 957 8 MeV, and . f π = 92 4 MeV. This parameter set gives . m η = 514 8 MeV. . The value of B for this set of parameters is (425 4MeV) . . 4 There are two more parameters, the diquark coupling strength GD and the vector current coupling strength GV , which are not known. One expects that the diquark coupling has a similar strength as the quark-antiquark coupling. We construct quark matter EOS for GD = 1 1 . -1 2 . GS with GV = 0 -0 2 . GS .\n\nIn the 2SC phase, pairing occurs only between the u and d quarks and the s quarks remain unpaired leading to ∆ 1 = ∆ 2 = 0 and ∆ 3 /nequal 0. On the other hand, in the CFL phase, ∆ 1 /nequal 0, ∆ 2 /nequal 0 and ∆ 3 /nequal 0. In the left panels of Figs. 2 and 3, we plot the pressure as a function of the quark chemical potential for the nuclear matter and for the quark matter in the 2SC and CFL phases. The phase realized at a given chemical potential is the one having largest pressure. Thus, it is evident from the P -µ curves that direct transition from nuclear matter to the CFL quark matter occurs\n\n5", + "recall": 0.8131313131313131, + "true_md": "the pressure from the electrons. The constant B is so determined that the pressure vanishes at zero density and temperature. In addition to the Eqs. (3) and (4), the pressure must satisfy,\n\nso that local electric and colour charge neutrality conditions are met. Once, the pressure as a function of quark chemical potential is known, quark matter EOS can be easily computed.\n\nThe model parameters, the current quark masses m$_{u}$$\\_{,}$$_{d}$$\\_{,}$$_{s}$ , quark-antiquark coupling G$_{S}$ , the strength K of the six fermion or ”t Hooft” interaction and the cuto ff parameter Λ are taken to be [41],\n\nAfter fixing the masses of the up and down quarks, m$_{u}$ = m$_{d}$ = 5 . 5 MeV, the other four parameters are chosen to reproduce the following observables of vacuum QCD [41]: m$_{π}$ = 135 . 0 MeV, m$_{K}$ = 497 . 7 MeV, m$_{η}$ ′ = 957 . 8 MeV, and f$_{π}$ = 92 . 4 MeV. This parameter set gives m$_{η}$ = 514 . 8 MeV. The value of B for this set of parameters is (425 . 4MeV)$^{4}$. There are two more parameters, the diquark coupling strength G$_{D}$ and the vector current coupling strength G$_{V}$ , which are not known. One expects that the diquark coupling has a similar strength as the quark-antiquark coupling. We construct quark matter EOS for G$_{D}$ = 1 . 1 − 1 . 2 G$_{S}$ with G$_{V}$ = 0 − 0 . 2 G$_{S}$ .\n\nIn the 2SC phase, pairing occurs only between the u and d quarks and the s quarks remain unpaired leading to Δ$_{1}$ = Δ$_{2}$ = 0 and Δ$_{3}$ GLYPH<nequal> 0. On the other hand, in the CFL phase, Δ$_{1}$ GLYPH<nequal> 0, Δ$_{2}$ GLYPH<nequal> 0 and Δ$_{3}$ GLYPH<nequal> 0. In the left panels of Figs. 2 and 3, we plot the pressure as a function of the quark chemical potential for the nuclear matter and for the quark matter in the 2SC and CFL phases. The phase realized at a given chemical potential is the one having largest pressure. Thus, it is evident from the P − µ curves that direct transition from nuclear matter to the CFL quark matter occurs\n\n5\n\n$$n$_{Q}$ ≡ ∂ p ∂µ$_{Q}$ = 0 , (5)$$\n\n$$n$_{3}$ ≡ ∂ p ∂µ$_{3}$ = 0 , (6)$$\n\n$$n$_{8}$ ≡ ∂ p ∂µ$_{8}$ = 0 , (7)$$\n\n$$m$_{u}$ = m$_{d}$ = 5 . 5 MeV , (8)$$\n\n$$m$_{s}$ = 140 . 7 MeV , (9)$$\n\n$$G$_{S}$ Λ 2 = 1 . 835 , (10)$$\n\n$$K Λ 5 = 12 . 36 , (11)$$\n\n$$Λ = 602 . 3 MeV. (12)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8581732452699401, + "doc_id": "a580c1d409d19512b132e4ebff1697c384806b55d91d1f70e23de51efd1e7ab6", + "edit_distance": 0.12359550561797752, + "f1_score": 0.953020134228188, + "meteor": 0.8924342259581092, + "precision": 0.9638009049773756, + "pred_md": "arXiv:1001.2716v1 [hep-ph] 15 Jan 2010\n\n## From hidden symmetry to extra dimensions: a five dimensional formulation of the Degenerate BESS model\n\nFrancesco Coradeschi, Stefania De Curtis and Daniele Dominici Department of Physics, University of Florence, and INFN, Via Sansone 1, 50019 Sesto F., (FI), Italy\n\n(Dated: December 15, 2018)\n\nWe consider the continuum limit of a moose model corresponding to a generalization to N sites of the Degenerate BESS model. The five dimensional formulation emerging in this limit is a realization of a RS1 type model with SU (2) L ⊗ SU (2) R in the bulk, broken by boundary conditions and a vacuum expectation value on the infrared brane. A low energy effective Lagrangian is derived by means of the holographic technique and corresponding bounds on the model parameters are obtained.\n\n## I. INTRODUCTION\n\nThe exact nature of the mechanism that leads to the breakdown of the electroweak (EW) symmetry is one of the relevant open questions in particle physics. While waiting for the first experimental data from the Large Hadron Collider, it is worthwhile to explore the potential electroweak breaking scenarios from a theoretical point of view.\n\nIn the Standard Model (SM), the mechanism of the EW symmetry breaking implies the presence a fundamental scalar particle, the Higgs boson, with a light mass as suggested by EWfits. However, this mechanism is affected by a serious fine-tuning problem, the hierarchy problem, because the mass of the Higgs boson is not protected against radiative corrections and would naturally be expected to be as large as the physical UV cut-off of the SM, which could be as high as M P /similarequal 10 19 GeV.\n\nPossible solutions to the hierarchy problem are the technicolor (TC) theories [1-3] (that postulate the presence of new strong interactions around the TeV scale) and extradimensional theories [4-6]. These seemingly unrelated classes of theories have in fact a profound connection through the AdS/CFT correspondence [7]. According to this conjecture, five dimensional (5D) models on AdS space are 'holographic duals' to 4D theories with spontaneously broken conformal invariance. The duality means that when the 5D theory is", + "recall": 0.9424778761061947, + "true_md": "arXiv:1001.2716v1 [hep-ph] 15 Jan 2010\n\n# From hidden symmetry to extra dimensions: a five dimensional formulation of the Degenerate BESS model\n\nFrancesco Coradeschi, Stefania De Curtis and Daniele Dominici\n\nDepartment of Physics, University of Florence, and INFN, Via Sansone 1, 50019 Sesto F., (FI), Italy\n\n(Dated: December 15, 2018)\n\nWe consider the continuum limit of a moose model corresponding to a generalization to N sites of the Degenerate BESS model. The five dimensional formulation emerging in this limit is a realization of a RS1 type model with SU (2)$_{L}$ ⊗ SU (2)$_{R}$ in the bulk, broken by boundary conditions and a vacuum expectation value on the infrared brane. A low energy effective Lagrangian is derived by means of the holographic technique and corresponding bounds on the model parameters are obtained.\n\nThe exact nature of the mechanism that leads to the breakdown of the electroweak (EW) symmetry is one of the relevant open questions in particle physics. While waiting for the first experimental data from the Large Hadron Collider, it is worthwhile to explore the potential electroweak breaking scenarios from a theoretical point of view.\n\nIn the Standard Model (SM), the mechanism of the EW symmetry breaking implies the presence a fundamental scalar particle, the Higgs boson, with a light mass as suggested by EW fits. However, this mechanism is affected by a serious fine-tuning problem, the hierarchy problem, because the mass of the Higgs boson is not protected against radiative corrections and would naturally be expected to be as large as the physical UV cut-off of the SM, which could be as high as M$_{P}$ ≃ 10 19 GeV. Possible solutions to the hierarchy problem are the technicolor (TC) theories [1–3]\n\n≃ Possible solutions to the hierarchy problem are the technicolor (TC) theories [1–3] (that postulate the presence of new strong interactions around the TeV scale) and extra- dimensional theories [4–6]. These seemingly unrelated classes of theories have in fact a profound connection through the AdS/CFT correspondence [7]. According to this conjec- ture, five dimensional (5D) models on AdS space are “holographic duals” to 4D theories with spontaneously broken conformal invariance. The duality means that when the 5D theory is\n\n## I. INTRODUCTION" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8681814664587504, + "doc_id": "3f3729e7048c752c91c9a55709882b53f54f358b822c4fe718867143b0094431", + "edit_distance": 0.10116731517509728, + "f1_score": 0.9242424242424243, + "meteor": 0.9330220421545179, + "precision": 0.953125, + "pred_md": "also shift the spinodal and binodal lines as compared to the locations of these lines in the phase diagram for the pure solvent [41]. As a consequence, the solute concentration influences the hole nucleation rate. More importantly, the solute particles may also destabilise the dewetting fronts. As a result, one may find strongly ramified structures in all three systems [23, 25, 40, 42]. A selection of images exhibiting some of the possible structures is displayed in Fig.1.\n\nFor volatile solvents, the contact lines retract even for wetting fluids. It has been found that such evaporatively receding contact lines may deposit very regular line or ring patterns parallel to the moving contact line [24, 43]. The deposition of a single ring of colloids from a evaporating drop of colloidal suspension is well known as the 'coffee stain effect' [44]. Detailed investigations reveal the emergence of rich structures including multiple irregular rings, networks, regular droplet patterns, sawtooth patterns, Sierpinski carpets, and - in the case of DNA - liquid crystalline structures [22, 30, 45-49]. The deposition of regularly spaced straight lines orthogonal to the moving contact line has also been reported [50]. Droplet patterns may as well be created employing solvent-induced dewetting of glassy polymer layers below the glass transition temperature [51-53].\n\nNote that the dewetting of pure volatile liquids has also been studied experimentally [54] and theoretically [55-58]. In this case, different contact line instabilities have been observed for evaporating liquid drops [59, 60].\n\nIn the present article we review and preview the experiments and in particular the various modelling approaches for dewetting suspensions of (nano-)particles in volatile partially wetting solvents. After reviewing the basic experimental results in Section II, we discuss in Section III several theoretical approaches. In particular, we present a kinetic Monte Carlo model in Section III A, a dynamic density functional theory in Section III B, and a thin film evolution equation in Section III C. Finally, we conclude in Section IV by discussing advantages and shortcomings of the individual approaches and future challenges to all of them.\n\n## II. EXPERIMENT WITH NANOPARTICLE SOLUTIONS\n\nWe focus on experiments that use monodisperse colloidal suspensions of thiol-passivated gold nanoparticles in toluene [33, 34, 37-40, 61]. The gold core of 2 - 3 nm diameter is coated by a layer of alkyl-thiol molecules. The length of the carbon backbone of the thiol used in the experiments ranges from 6 to 12 carbon atoms ( C 6 to C 12 ) [40]. By varying the chain length, one can control\n\n4", + "recall": 0.8970588235294118, + "true_md": "also shift the spinodal and binodal lines as compared to the locations of these lines in the phase diagram for the pure solvent [41]. As a consequence, the solute concentration influences the hole nucleation rate. More importantly, the solute particles may also destabilise the dewetting fronts. As a result, one may find strongly ramified structures in all three systems [23, 25, 40, 42]. A selection of images exhibiting some of the possible structures is displayed in Fig.1.\n\nFor volatile solvents, the contact lines retract even for wetting fluids. It has been found that such evaporatively receding contact lines may deposit very regular line or ring patterns parallel to the moving contact line [24, 43]. The deposition of a single ring of colloids from a evaporating drop of colloidal suspension is well known as the ‘coffee stain effect’ [44]. Detailed investiga- tions reveal the emergence of rich structures including multiple irregular rings, networks, regular droplet patterns, sawtooth patterns, Sierpinski carpets, and – in the case of DNA – liquid crys- talline structures [22, 30, 45–49]. The deposition of regularly spaced straight lines orthogonal to the moving contact line has also been reported [50]. Droplet patterns may as well be created em- ploying solvent-induced dewetting of glassy polymer layers below the glass transition temperature [51–53].\n\nNote that the dewetting of pure volatile liquids has also been studied experimentally [54] and theoretically [55–58]. In this case, different contact line instabilities have been observed for evap- orating liquid drops [59, 60].\n\nIn the present article we review and preview the experiments and in particular the various mod- elling approaches for dewetting suspensions of (nano-)particles in volatile partially wetting sol- vents. After reviewing the basic experimental results in Section II, we discuss in Section III sev- eral theoretical approaches. In particular, we present a kinetic Monte Carlo model in Section III A, a dynamic density functional theory in Section III B, and a thin film evolution equation in Sec- tion III C. Finally, we conclude in Section IV by discussing advantages and shortcomings of the individual approaches and future challenges to all of them.\n\nWe focus on experiments that use monodisperse colloidal suspensions of thiol-passivated gold nanoparticles in toluene [33, 34, 37–40, 61]. The gold core of 2 – 3 nm diameter is coated by a layer of alkyl-thiol molecules. The length of the carbon backbone of the thiol used in the experiments ranges from 6 to 12 carbon atoms ( C$_{6}$ to C$_{12}$ ) [40]. By varying the chain length, one can control\n\n## II. EXPERIMENT WITH NANOPARTICLE SOLUTIONS\n\n4" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8385300216535785, + "doc_id": "46028ef5f1d8af8065dffb2d4db9f4895a47a536c4bac51d640ce0fe08f18487", + "edit_distance": 0.10038610038610038, + "f1_score": 0.9038031319910516, + "meteor": 0.908827861952862, + "precision": 0.9351851851851852, + "pred_md": "## I. INTRODUCTION\n\nIsoscalar giant resonances have been extensively studied since the discovery of the isoscalar giant quadrupole resonance (ISGQR) in the early 1970s [1-3]. The isoscalar giant monopole resonance (ISGMR) was identified in 1977 [4, 5] and was the subject of a number of studies through the 1980s [6-8]. The isoscalar giant dipole resonance (ISGDR) was first reported by Morsch et al. [9] in 208 Pb but was conclusively identified by Davis et al. [10]. Both ISGMR and ISGDR are classified as compression modes and provide information about nuclear incompressibility, K A , from which the incompressibility of infinite nuclear matter, K , may be obtained [11]. ∞\n\nMost of the earlier investigations of the isoscalar giant resonances used inelastic α scattering at 100-200 MeV and the strength of a particular giant resonance was assumed to be concentrated in a single peak with a Gaussian or Lorentzian shape. The resonance parameters were obtained by multiple-peak fits to the inelastic scattering spectra, after subtraction of a suitable 'background' [12, 13]. In the last decade, the Texas A&M (TAMU) group has carried out ( α, α ' ) studies of many nuclei at a bombarding energy of 240 MeV and extracted the strength distributions of various isoscalar giant resonances in a number of nuclei [14-24] using a multipole decomposition analysis (MDA) [25]. Contemporaneously, we have carried out giant resonance measurements using inelastic scattering of 386 MeV α particles at extremely small angles, including 0 · [26-35]. An especially useful feature of our measurements has been the elimination of all instrumental background events from the inelastic scattering spectra which was rendered possible by the optical properties of the Grand Raiden spectrometer [36].\n\nHere, we report on measurements of the isoscalar giant resonances in the even-A Sn isotopes (A=112-124) over the excitation-energy range 8.5-31.5 MeV. Previously, giant resonance measurements on the Sn isotopes have been reported by the TAMU group [7, 37] and KVI group [8], using inelastic α scattering at 120-130 MeV and peak-fitting analyses of spectra. More recently, the strength distributions of various isoscalar resonances have been obtained in some Sn isotopes (A=112,116,124) by the TAMU group [19, 21].\n\nHigh-quality measurements of the ISGMR over the full range of isotopes provide the opportunity to investigate the asymmetry term, K τ , of the nuclear incompressibility. This term, associated with the neutron excess ( N -Z ), is crucial in obtaining the radii of neutron\n\n3", + "recall": 0.8744588744588745, + "true_md": "## I. INTRODUCTION\n\nIsoscalar giant resonances have been extensively studied since the discovery of the isoscalar giant quadrupole resonance (ISGQR) in the early 1970s [1–3]. The isoscalar giant monopole resonance (ISGMR) was identified in 1977 [4, 5] and was the subject of a number of studies through the 1980s [6–8]. The isoscalar giant dipole resonance (ISGDR) was first reported by Morsch et al. [9] in $^{208}$Pb but was conclusively identified by Davis et al. [10]. Both ISGMR and ISGDR are classified as compression modes and provide information about nuclear incompressibility, K$_{A}$ , from which the incompressibility of infinite nuclear matter, K$_{∞}$, may be obtained [11].\n\nMost of the earlier investigations of the isoscalar giant resonances used inelastic α scat- tering at 100–200 MeV and the strength of a particular giant resonance was assumed to be concentrated in a single peak with a Gaussian or Lorentzian shape. The resonance parame- ters were obtained by multiple-peak fits to the inelastic scattering spectra, after subtraction of a suitable “background” [12, 13]. In the last decade, the Texas A&M (TAMU) group has carried out ( α, α $^{′}$) studies of many nuclei at a bombarding energy of 240 MeV and ex- tracted the strength distributions of various isoscalar giant resonances in a number of nuclei [14–24] using a multipole decomposition analysis (MDA) [25]. Contemporaneously, we have carried out giant resonance measurements using inelastic scattering of 386 MeV α particles at extremely small angles, including 0 ◦ [26–35]. An especially useful feature of our mea- surements has been the elimination of all instrumental background events from the inelastic scattering spectra which was rendered possible by the optical properties of the Grand Raiden spectrometer [36].\n\nHere, we report on measurements of the isoscalar giant resonances in the even-A Sn isotopes (A=112–124) over the excitation-energy range 8.5–31.5 MeV. Previously, giant res- onance measurements on the Sn isotopes have been reported by the TAMU group [7, 37] and KVI group [8], using inelastic α scattering at 120–130 MeV and peak-fitting analyses of spectra. More recently, the strength distributions of various isoscalar resonances have been obtained in some Sn isotopes (A=112,116,124) by the TAMU group [19, 21].\n\nHigh-quality measurements of the ISGMR over the full range of isotopes provide the opportunity to investigate the asymmetry term, K$_{τ}$ , of the nuclear incompressibility. This term, associated with the neutron excess ( N − Z ), is crucial in obtaining the radii of neutron\n\n3" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "66cabbcc3afe50657132e2c84c86019b1ad87b95c0fb370e3203e06677457b54", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.999968, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "This figure \"Fig02.jpg\" is available in \"jpg\"GLYPH<10> format from:\n\nhttp://arxiv.org/ps/1001.4384v3", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "This figure \"Fig02.jpg\" is available in \"jpg\"GLYPH<10> format from:\n\nhttp://arxiv.org/ps/1001.4384v3" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9434448406347045, + "doc_id": "c375935171bc2fba387b8611e9eae0458ed4a3b219a695c881cb4b3d72ad30ea", + "edit_distance": 0.040983606557377046, + "f1_score": 0.9974554707379136, + "meteor": 0.9974612485780161, + "precision": 0.9949238578680203, + "pred_md": "only 2% of the total oscillator strength. The excitonic coupling shows fluctuations similar to the site energies. Its variance, however, amounts to only 7% of the average value of 0.25eV. Hallermeier et al 4 deduced a smaller excitonic coupling of 0.078 eV. Most probably their dimer spectrum has some admixture of the monomer spectrum. We assume that the absorption maximum at 520nm is due to monomers and the maximum of the real dimer spectrum is at 480nm. This would be consistent with an H-aggregate with an excitonic coupling of 0.2eV.\n\nWe studied also brickwork structures as a model for the J-aggregates with a red shifted absorption. We found a relative stable structure which is shown in fig. 3b. The structural fluctuations are much larger than for the sandwich model but the fluctuations of site energies and excitonic coupling are even somewhat smaller. The coupling of -0.064eV is close to the value of -0.078eV which was used to simulate the vibronic spectrum of the J-aggregates 18 .\n\n## Acknowledgments\n\nThis work has been supported by the Deutsche Forschungsgemeinschaft (SFB 533)\n\n∗ Electronic address: philipp.scherer@ph.tum.de\n\n- 1 G.Scheibe, Angew. Chemie 49 , 563 (1936)\n- 2 E.E.Jelley, Nature 138 ,1009 (1936)\n- 3 B.Neumann, J.Phys.Chem. B 105 , 8268 (2001)\n- 4 B.Kopainsky, J.K.Hallermeier and W.Kaiser, Chem.Phys.Lett. 83 , 498 (1981)\n- 5 G.R.Bird,K.S.Norland,A.E.Rosenoff,H.B.Michaud, Phot.Sci.Eng. 12 ,196 (1968)\n- 6 R.E.Graves, P.I.Rose, J.Phys.Chem. 79 , 746 (1975)\n- 7 H.J.Nolte, Chem.Phys.Lett. 31 , 134 (1975)\n- 8 G.Scheibe, Z.Elektrochemie, 52 , 283 (1948)\n- 9 P.O.J.Scherer, J.Phys.Chem. A 104 , 6301 (2000)\n\n10 M.W.Mahoney, W.L.Jorgensen, J.Chem.Phys. 112 , 8910 (2000)\n\n11 I.P.Omelyan, Phys.Rev.E 58 , 1169 (1998)\n\n12 H.Li, C.S.Pomelli, J.H.Jensen, Theor. Chem. Acc. 109 ,71 (2003)\n\n6", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "only 2% of the total oscillator strength. The excitonic coupling shows fluctuations similar to the site energies. Its variance, however, amounts to only 7% of the average value of 0.25eV. Hallermeier et al 4 deduced a smaller excitonic coupling of 0.078 eV. Most probably their dimer spectrum has some admixture of the monomer spectrum. We assume that the absorption maximum at 520nm is due to monomers and the maximum of the real dimer spectrum is at 480nm. This would be consistent with an H-aggregate with an excitonic coupling of 0.2eV.\n\nWe studied also brickwork structures as a model for the J-aggregates with a red shifted absorption. We found a relative stable structure which is shown in fig. 3b. The structural fluctuations are much larger than for the sandwich model but the fluctuations of site energies and excitonic coupling are even somewhat smaller. The coupling of -0.064eV is close to the value of -0.078eV which was used to simulate the vibronic spectrum of the J-aggregates 18 .\n\nThis work has been supported by the Deutsche Forschungsgemeinschaft (SFB 533)\n\n## Acknowledgments\n\n∗ Electronic address: philipp.scherer@ph.tum.de\n\n1 G.Scheibe, Angew. Chemie 49 , 563 (1936)\n\n2 E.E.Jelley, Nature 138 ,1009 (1936)\n\n3 B.Neumann, J.Phys.Chem. B 105 , 8268 (2001)\n\n4 B.Kopainsky, J.K.Hallermeier and W.Kaiser, Chem.Phys.Lett. 83 , 498 (1981)\n\n5 G.R.Bird,K.S.Norland,A.E.Rosenoff,H.B.Michaud, Phot.Sci.Eng. 12 ,196 (1968)\n\n6 R.E.Graves, P.I.Rose, J.Phys.Chem. 79 , 746 (1975)\n\n7 H.J.Nolte, Chem.Phys.Lett. 31 , 134 (1975)\n\n8 G.Scheibe, Z.Elektrochemie, 52 , 283 (1948)\n\n9 P.O.J.Scherer, J.Phys.Chem. A 104 , 6301 (2000)\n\n10 M.W.Mahoney, W.L.Jorgensen, J.Chem.Phys. 112 , 8910 (2000)\n\n11 I.P.Omelyan, Phys.Rev.E 58 , 1169 (1998)\n\n12 H.Li, C.S.Pomelli, J.H.Jensen, Theor. Chem. Acc. 109 ,71 (2003)\n\n6" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.19163276414492028, + "doc_id": "b239a732cdaa74c51017448d41f8ccb4853d2fb0a607b5adf01d60f09701ba85", + "edit_distance": 0.7045813586097947, + "f1_score": 0.8484848484848485, + "meteor": 0.35960754473333745, + "precision": 0.9411764705882353, + "pred_md": "10\n\nSince the proof of the diagonalization is somewhat technical, we will proceed in reverse order, first defining the three sectors of the model, together with the conditions that the corresponding wave-functions have to satisfy, then show how the three sectors are derived by the request of diagonalizing the KK expanded Lagrangian. The three sectors are:\n\n- · A left charged sector coming from the expansion of the ( W 1 2 , L ) M fields and the brane pseudo-scalars π 1 2 , . The explicit form of the expansion is\n\n\n\n\n\nThe wave-functions of the vector fields satisfy the equation of motion:\n\n\n\nwhere we defined the differential operator:\n\n\n\nand the set of BCs:\n\n\n\nThe pseudo-scalar profiles are fixed by the conditions:\n\n\n\nNote that in this sector no massless solution is allowed; in fact, eq. (15) together with the Neumann BC at y = 0 (17) imply that a massless mode must have a constant profile, and a constant, massless solution cannot satisfy the BC at y = πR (18). Also note that eq. (15) and the BCs (17) and (18) are diagonal in the isospin index, so we have f 1 Ln = f 2 Ln .", + "recall": 0.7724137931034483, + "true_md": "10\n\nSince the proof of the diagonalization is somewhat technical, we will proceed in reverse order, first defining the three sectors of the model, together with the conditions that the corresponding wave-functions have to satisfy, then show how the three sectors are derived by the request of diagonalizing the KK expanded Lagrangian. The three sectors are:\n\n• A left charged sector coming from the expansion of the ( W 1 , 2 L )$_{M}$ fields and the brane pseudo-scalars π 1 , $^{2}$. The explicit form of the expansion is\n\nThe wave-functions of the vector fields satisfy the equation of motion:\n\nwhere we defined the differential operator:\n\nand the set of BCs:\n\nThe pseudo-scalar profiles are fixed by the conditions:\n\n∣ Note that in this sector no massless solution is allowed; in fact, eq. (15) together with the Neumann BC at y = 0 (17) imply that a massless mode must have a constant profile, and a constant, massless solution cannot satisfy the BC at y = πR (18). Also note that eq. (15) and the BCs (17) and (18) are diagonal in the isospin index, so we have f 1 L n = f 2 $_{L n}$.\n\n$$W 1 , 2 $_{L µ}$( x, y ) = ∞ ∑ n =0 f 1 , 2 $_{L n}$( y ) W 1 , 2( n ) Lµ ( x ) , W 1 , 2 L $_{5}$( x, y ) = ∞ ∑ n =0 g 1 , 2 $_{L n}$( y ) G 1 , 2 ( n ) L ( x ) , π 1 , $^{2}$( x ) = ∞ ∑ n =0 c 1 , 2 n G ( n $^{)}$( x ) . (14)$$\n\n$$ˆ Df 1 , 2 L n = − m 2 $_{L n}$f 1 , 2 $_{L n}$, (15)$$\n\n$$ˆ D ≡ ∂$_{y}$ ( b ( y ) ∂$_{y}$ ( · )) , (16)$$\n\n$$∂$_{y}$f 1 , 2 L n = 0 at y = 0 , (17) ( ˜ g 2 g 2 $_{5}$∂$_{y}$ − b ( πR ) m 2 L n + ˜ g $^{2}$˜ v 2 4 ) f 1 , 2 L n = 0 at y = πR. (18)$$\n\n$$g 1 , 2 L n = 1 m$_{L n}$ ∂$_{y}$f 1 , 2 $_{L n}$, c 1 , 2 n = ˜ v 2 m$_{L n}$ f 1 , 2 L n ∣ $_{πR}$. (19) Note that in this sector no massless solution is allowed; in fact, eq. (15) together with$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.3435719063779258, + "doc_id": "9526793f35974506078d6089465125c4aef2206814c9b0c6f4feebd3d60166f1", + "edit_distance": 0.5273010920436817, + "f1_score": 0.8941798941798941, + "meteor": 0.45540201645064676, + "precision": 0.949438202247191, + "pred_md": "16\n\n## V. LOW ENERGY LIMIT AND EW PRECISION OBSERVABLES\n\nWe can obtain a convenient low-energy approximation of the theory by using the socalled holographic approach [25, 63, 64, 70-73], which consists in integrating out the bulk degrees of freedom in the functional integral. For the purposes of the present calculation it is sufficient to take into account just the tree-level effects of the heavy resonances, so the integration can be done by simply eliminating the bulk fields from the Lagrangian via their classical equations of motion; moreover, bulk gauge self-interactions can be neglected.\n\nThe equations to be solved are:\n\n\n\nwith ˆ D defined in eq. (16)) and we have Fourier transformed with respect to the first four coordinates. As previously discussed, on the y = 0 brane, we do not want to make any assumptions on the value of the fields; so we leave their variations arbitrary, and since there are no localized terms on the brane, this leads to Neumann boundary conditions for all of the fields:\n\n At the other end of the AdS segment, we account for the presence of localized terms by imposing four fields to be equal to generic source fields , while the other two (those corresponding to the right charged sector) are vanishing:\n\n\n\n\n\nThe first step in solving the equations is to split the fields in their longitudinal (aligned with p µ ) and transverse parts. The operator ( p δ 2 µν -p p µ ν ) is vanishing when acting on the longitudinal part, while it is simply equivalent to p 2 when acting on the transverse one. In this way, each equation can be split into two simpler ones:\n\n", + "recall": 0.845, + "true_md": "16\n\n## V. LOW ENERGY LIMIT AND EW PRECISION OBSERVABLES\n\nWe can obtain a convenient low-energy approximation of the theory by using the so- called holographic approach [25, 63, 64, 70–73], which consists in integrating out the bulk degrees of freedom in the functional integral. For the purposes of the present calculation it is sufficient to take into account just the tree-level effects of the heavy resonances, so the integration can be done by simply eliminating the bulk fields from the Lagrangian via their classical equations of motion; moreover, bulk gauge self-interactions can be neglected.\n\nThe equations to be solved are:\n\nwith ˆ D defined in eq. (16)) and we have Fourier transformed with respect to the first four coordinates. As previously discussed, on the y = 0 brane, we do not want to make any assumptions on the value of the fields; so we leave their variations arbitrary, and since there are no localized terms on the brane, this leads to Neumann boundary conditions for all of the fields: \n\n  $^{∂$\\_{y}$}$$^{W}$$^{a}$ ∂$_{y}$W a R µ = 0 At the other end of the AdS segment, we account for the presence of localized terms by imposing four fields to be equal to generic source fields , while the other two (those corre- sponding to the right charged sector) are vanishing:\n\n $^{W}$$^{a}$ The first step in solving the equations is to split the fields in their longitudinal (aligned with p$\\_{µ}$ ) and transverse parts. The operator ( p $^{2}$δ$\\_{µν}$ − p$\\_{µ}$p$\\_{ν}$ ) is vanishing when acting on the longitudinal part, while it is simply equivalent to p 2 when acting on the transverse one. In this way, each equation can be split into two simpler ones:\n\n$$ˆ D W a L ( R ) $_{µ}$( p, y ) = ( p $^{2}$δ$_{µν}$ − p$_{µ}$p$_{ν}$ ) W a ν L ( R $_{)}$( p, y ) (49)$$\n\n$$  $^{∂$_{y}$}$$^{W}$$^{a}$ L µ = 0 ∂$_{y}$W a R µ = 0 y = 0 . (50)$$\n\n$$    $^{W}$$^{a}$ L µ = ˜ W a µ W 3 R µ = ˜ B$_{µ}$ W 1 , 2 R µ = 0 y = πR. (51) The first step in solving the equations is to split the fields in their longitudinal (aligned$$\n\n$$   ˆ D W a, tr L/R µ = p $^{2}$W a, tr L/R µ ˆ D W a, long L/R µ = 0 (52)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7639602358715177, + "doc_id": "237c29b603a73687fde72fd0180b346303b7eb07385da2a693a77b1333d8fcdb", + "edit_distance": 0.21926910299003322, + "f1_score": 0.9477611940298508, + "meteor": 0.9431342168120488, + "precision": 0.9621212121212122, + "pred_md": "/s32\n\nFIG. 12: (Color online) HEOR strength distributions obtained for the Sn isotopes in the present experiment. Error bars represent the uncertainties from fitting the angular distributions in the MDA procedure. The solid lines show Lorentzian fits to the data.\n\nFIG. 12: (Color online) HEOR strength distributions obtained for the Sn isotopes in the present experiment. Error bars represent the uncertainties from fitting the angular distributions in the MDA procedure. The solid lines show Lorentzian fits to the data.\n\n/s120\n\nwith a two-Lorentzian function and the fitting parameters for the LE- and HE-components are presented in Tables V and VI, respectively. It may be noted that because of the 'spurious' strength at the higher excitation energies mentioned previously, the numbers for the extracted EWSR are significantly larger than 100% in some cases.\n\nThe strength distributions of the ISGQR are shown in Fig. 11. These too were fitted with a Lorentzian function to determine the centroid energies and the widths. The fit parameters are presented in Table VII.\n\nThe L =3 strength distributions (Fig. 12) show an enhanced strength at E x < 10 MeV. This part is, most likely, from the low-energy octupole resonance (LEOR). The LEOR represents the 1¯ hω component of the L =3 strength and has been reported in a number of nuclei previously [63, 64]. The strength distributions were, therefore, fitted with a twoLorentzian function to determine the centroid energy of HEOR (the high-excitation-energy component). The extracted HEOR peak-energies are presented in Table VIII.\n\n16\n\n/s32\n\n/s32\n\n/s32\n\n/s32\n\n/s32\n\n/s32\n\n/s32", + "recall": 0.9338235294117647, + "true_md": "FIG. 12: (Color online) HEOR strength distributions obtained for the Sn isotopes in the present experiment. Error bars represent the uncertainties from fitting the angular distributions in the MDA procedure. The solid lines show Lorentzian fits to the data.\n\nwith a two-Lorentzian function and the fitting parameters for the LE- and HE-components are presented in Tables V and VI, respectively. It may be noted that because of the “spu- rious” strength at the higher excitation energies mentioned previously, the numbers for the extracted EWSR are significantly larger than 100% in some cases.\n\nThe strength distributions of the ISGQR are shown in Fig. 11. These too were fitted with a Lorentzian function to determine the centroid energies and the widths. The fit parameters are presented in Table VII.\n\nThe L =3 strength distributions (Fig. 12) show an enhanced strength at E$_{x}$ < 10 MeV. This part is, most likely, from the low-energy octupole resonance (LEOR). The LEOR represents the 1¯ hω component of the L =3 strength and has been reported in a number of nuclei previously [63, 64]. The strength distributions were, therefore, fitted with a two- Lorentzian function to determine the centroid energy of HEOR (the high-excitation-energy component). The extracted HEOR peak-energies are presented in Table VIII.\n\n16" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.515088362542432, + "doc_id": "8961738a1e61e404bec670bed51cdaa95f0e7135cd1f01f7c24903ad17498577", + "edit_distance": 0.41725601131541723, + "f1_score": 0.8807339449541286, + "meteor": 0.5942014815413448, + "precision": 0.9411764705882353, + "pred_md": "if | δ LL | ∼ Q a /greatermuch 1, the uniform Lorentz LF is suppressed when the laser is tuned closely to the exact atomic resonance, δ ≈ 0, reaching its minimum intensity\n\n\n\nThe LF in this case is effectively 'pushed out' by the lattice atoms. Interestingly, a huge LF enhancement is reached at a red-shifted frequency, at δ ≈ δ LL < 0, where\n\n\n\nNote that Eqs. (8), (10), and (11) are very similar to the corresponding equations for 1D arrays of atoms which were discussed in [1, 2]. The only difference is that the relation between δ LL and Q a there was δ LL = -Q a if E in is parallel to the array (and dipoles are aligned 'head-to-tail') and δ LL = Q / a 2 if E in is perpendicular to the array (and dipoles are aligned 'side-to-side'), assuming the NNA [see, e. g., Eq. (3.4) of Ref. [2]]. Here, within the NRA, δ LL does not depend on the incident field polarization in the lattice plane. Quite naturally, its value (9) lies in-between the two values for the 1D array, because mutual orientations of different pairs of dipoles in the lattice vary between the two extremes.\n\nThe frequency dependence of a spatially uniform LF, like in Eq. (8), and the associated Lorentz shift are long known phenomena. Similar effect was also observed experimentally in alkali vapors [15]. The unusual new phenomenon is that in ordered low-dimensional structures there are spatially varying solutions, which we call locsitons [1], that emerge at some values of Q in addition to the uniform LF. We will look for the locsitons in the form of 2D plane-wave excitations of the LF:\n\n\n\nwhere q is the normalized wave vector of the locsiton. By substituting E L = ¯ E L +∆ E L into Eq. (7) we obtain the dispersion relation for the wave vector q in an integral form:\n\n\n\nwhere ψ is the polar angle of q counted from the direction of E in in the lattice plane. Using the standard expansion of trigonometric functions with a harmonic argument into Bessel functions [see, e. g., Eq. (21.8-25 a ) in Ref. [16]],\n\n\n\n10", + "recall": 0.8275862068965517, + "true_md": "if | δ$_{LL}$ | ∼ Q a ≫ 1, the uniform Lorentz LF is suppressed when the laser is tuned closely to the exact atomic resonance, δ ≈ 0, reaching its minimum intensity 2\n\nThe LF in this case is effectively “pushed out” by the lattice atoms. Interestingly, a huge LF enhancement is reached at a red-shifted frequency, at δ ≈ δ$_{LL}$ < 0, where\n\nNote that Eqs. (8), (10), and (11) are very similar to the corresponding equations for 1D arrays of atoms which were discussed in [1, 2]. The only difference is that the relation between δ$_{LL}$ and Q a there was δ$_{LL}$ = − Q a if E$_{in}$ is parallel to the array (and dipoles are aligned “head-to-tail”) and δ$_{LL}$ = Q a / 2 if E$_{in}$ is perpendicular to the array (and dipoles are aligned “side-to-side”), assuming the NNA [see, e. g., Eq. (3.4) of Ref. [2]]. Here, within the NRA, δ$_{LL}$ does not depend on the incident field polarization in the lattice plane. Quite naturally, its value (9) lies in-between the two values for the 1D array, because mutual orientations of different pairs of dipoles in the lattice vary between the two extremes.\n\nThe frequency dependence of a spatially uniform LF, like in Eq. (8), and the associated Lorentz shift are long known phenomena. Similar effect was also observed experimentally in alkali vapors [15]. The unusual new phenomenon is that in ordered low-dimensional structures there are spatially varying solutions, which we call locsitons [1], that emerge at some values of Q in addition to the uniform LF. We will look for the locsitons in the form of 2D plane-wave excitations of the LF:\n\nwhere q is the normalized wave vector of the locsiton. By substituting E$_{L}$ = ¯ E$_{L}$ + Δ E$_{L}$ into Eq. (7) we obtain the dispersion relation for the wave vector q in an integral form:\n\nwhere ψ is the polar angle of q counted from the direction of E$_{in}$ in the lattice plane. Using the standard expansion of trigonometric functions with a harmonic argument into Bessel functions [see, e. g., Eq. (21.8-25 a ) in Ref. [16]],\n\n$$| ¯ E$_{L}$ | 2 min ≈ | E$_{in}$ | 2 1 + δ 2 LL . (10)$$\n\n$$| ¯ E$_{L}$ | 2 max ≈ (1 + δ 2 $_{LL}$) | E$_{in}$ | $^{2}$. (11)$$\n\n$$Δ E$_{L}$ ∝ exp( i q · r /l a ) , (12)$$\n\n$$1 + 3 Q 4 π ∫ π 0 (3 cos 2 θ + 1) cos[ q cos( θ − ψ )] dθ = 0 , (13)$$\n\n$$cos( q sin φ ) = J$_{0}$ ( q ) + 2 ∞ ∑ m =1 J$_{2}$ m ( q ) cos(2 mφ ) , (14)$$\n\n10" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9449096084106029, + "doc_id": "1f01f78d287814977cd83b0853502f5f485e7b09da694eef93d9efa21d9cddf1", + "edit_distance": 0.09166666666666666, + "f1_score": 0.9876543209876544, + "meteor": 0.9904614787091307, + "precision": 0.9876543209876543, + "pred_md": "the absence of the putative S-phase. However, we stress that if experiments are to conclusively rule for or against either picture of overstretching, then the consequences of both must be better understood. This paper is an attempt to clarify the physical consequences of assuming the existence of an elongated, hybridized phase of DNA.\n\n## IV. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS\n\nWe thank Gijs Wuite, Erwin Peterman and John Marko for correspondence. Fig. 2 was adapted from Ref. [11]. This work was supported by the Director, Office of Science, Office of Basic Energy Sciences, of the U.S. Department of Energy under Contract No. DE-AC02-05CH11231.\n\n5", + "recall": 0.9876543209876543, + "true_md": "the absence of the putative S-phase. However, we stress that if experiments are to conclusively rule for or against either picture of overstretching, then the consequences of both must be better understood. This paper is an attempt to clarify the physical consequences of assuming the existence of an elongated, hybridized phase of DNA.\n\nWe thank Gijs Wuite, Erwin Peterman and John Marko for correspondence. Fig. 2 was adapted from Ref. [11]. This work was supported by the Director, Office of Science, Office of Basic Energy Sciences, of the U.S. Department of Energy under Contract No. DE-AC02–05CH11231.\n\n## IV. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS\n\n5" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9569023583339306, + "doc_id": "b6afb9d0c131296c7c365dce9acea37977e6d5cb4279897e616c57c82b56dae4", + "edit_distance": 0.19822485207100593, + "f1_score": 0.9863013698630138, + "meteor": 0.9715953395611362, + "precision": 0.989010989010989, + "pred_md": "arXiv:1002.2663v1 [physics.optics] 13 Feb 2010\n\nSubmitted to Phys. Rev. A\n\n## Local-field excitations in 2D lattices of resonant atoms\n\nS. N. Volkov and A. E. Kaplan\n\nDept. of Electrical and Computer Engineering, Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, MD 21218\n\n(Dated: February 12, 2010)\n\n## Abstract\n\nWe study excitations of the local field (locsitons) in nanoscale two-dimensional (2D) lattices of strongly interacting resonant atoms and various unusual effects associated with them. Locsitons in low-dimensional systems and the resulting spatial strata and more complex patterns on a scale of just a few atoms were predicted by us earlier [A. E. Kaplan and S. N. Volkov, Phys. Rev. Lett. 101 , 133902 (2008)]. These effects present a radical departure from the classical Lorentz-Lorenz theory of the local field (LF), which assumes that the LF is virtually uniform on this scale. We demonstrate that the strata and patterns in the 2D lattices may be described as an interference of plane-wave locsitons, build an analytic model for such unbounded locsitons, and derive and analyze dispersion relations for the locsitons in an equilateral triangular lattice. We draw useful analogies between one-dimensional and 2D locsitons, but also show that the 2D case enables locsitons with the most diverse and unusual properties. Using the nearest-neighbor approximation, we find the locsiton frequency band for different mutual orientations of the lattice and the incident field. We demonstrate a formation of distinct vector locsiton patterns consisting of multiple vortices in the LF distribution and suggest a way to design finite 2D lattices that exhibit such patterns at certain frequencies. We illustrate the role of lattice defects in supporting localized locsitons and also demonstrate the existence of 'magic shapes', for which the LF suppression at the exact atomic resonance is cancelled.\n\nPACS numbers: 42.65.Pc, 85.50.-n\n\n1", + "recall": 0.9836065573770492, + "true_md": "Submitted to Phys. Rev. A\n\n# Local-field excitations in 2D lattices of resonant atoms\n\n(Dated: February 12, 2010)\n\nS. N. Volkov and A. E. Kaplan\n\nWe study excitations of the local field (locsitons) in nanoscale two-dimensional (2D) lattices of strongly interacting resonant atoms and various unusual effects associated with them. Locsitons in low-dimensional systems and the resulting spatial strata and more complex patterns on a scale of just a few atoms were predicted by us earlier [A. E. Kaplan and S. N. Volkov, Phys. Rev. Lett. 101 , 133902 (2008)]. These effects present a radical departure from the classical Lorentz-Lorenz theory of the local field (LF), which assumes that the LF is virtually uniform on this scale. We demonstrate that the strata and patterns in the 2D lattices may be described as an interference of plane-wave locsitons, build an analytic model for such unbounded locsitons, and derive and analyze dispersion relations for the locsitons in an equilateral triangular lattice. We draw useful analogies between one-dimensional and 2D locsitons, but also show that the 2D case enables locsitons with the most diverse and unusual properties. Using the nearest-neighbor approximation, we find the locsiton frequency band for different mutual orientations of the lattice and the incident field. We demonstrate a formation of distinct vector locsiton patterns consisting of multiple vortices in the LF distribution and suggest a way to design finite 2D lattices that exhibit such patterns at certain frequencies. We illustrate the role of lattice defects in supporting localized locsitons and also demonstrate the existence of “magic shapes”, for which the LF suppression at the exact atomic resonance is cancelled.\n\nPACS numbers: 42.65.Pc, 85.50.-n\n\narXiv:1002.2663v1 [physics.optics] 13 Feb 2010\n\n## Abstract\n\n1\n\nDept. of Electrical and Computer Engineering,\n\nJohns Hopkins University, Baltimore, MD 21218" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9442725297141658, + "doc_id": "4c4a333c04844a997d790af91c2c5ea6c0fe96a335cc7a53ffdc396d86083615", + "edit_distance": 0.03740157480314961, + "f1_score": 0.9603174603174602, + "meteor": 0.9641054067805145, + "precision": 0.9758064516129032, + "pred_md": "to exceed a critical value. Since this strength is proportional to the square of an individual dipole momentum and inversely proportional to the cube of the interparticle spacing and the linewidth of the particle resonance (see below), the atoms may become preferred candidates. A very high finesse of atomic resonances (i. e., their narrow linewidth), compared, for example, to plasmons (see below), also contributes greatly to the phenomenon, allowing one to see high-order locsiton resonances.\n\nTo observe locsitons, one have to create conditions to couple them efficiently to an optical or some other kind of a probe. In [1, 2] we suggested a few promising methods of locsiton detection. In particular, locsitons could be observed via size-related resonances in a scattering of laser radiation or via x-ray or electron-energy-loss spectroscopy.\n\nThere are many potential applications of locsitons; here we will mention two of them which were discussed in [1]. It was shown in [1] that in the presence of a sufficiently strong optical field (i. e., in the nonlinear case), the LF in 1D arrays of strongly coupled dipoles can exhibit optical bistability, which could be used to design nanoscale all-dielectric logic elements and switches. Such devices might complement currently used semiconductor-based electronic circuits. Another potential application of locsitons could be based on the extreme sensitivity of size-related locsiton resonances to the size and shape of the system. At the exact atomic resonance, the field is normally 'pushed out' of the atomic system, unless it has a certain 'magic shape' [1]. Consequently, such 'magic structures' of atoms could find applications in designing nanoscale biosensors.\n\nRemoving the assumption of the LLT that the dipoles in the medium oscillate in lockstep with the incident electromagnetic wave is a substantial paradigm shift in the theory of light-matter interaction. Locsitons predicted within our broader approach are a new phenomenon, although we can provide some incomplete but illustrative analogies from other areas of physics. For example, short- and long-wavelength strata in [1] are reminiscent of ferromagnetic and antiferromagnetic arrangements of static magnetic dipoles in the Ising model. The LLT is, on the other hand, more similar to the mean-field approach of the Curie-Weiss theory for magnetic media [6]. The Ising model is known to have richer consequences than the Curie-Weiss theory. Our case is, however, substantially different and most of all, more versatile than the Ising model. Indeed, instead of being static, as in the Ising model, the atomic dipoles are induced by the applied optical field and can oscillate with arbitrary amplitude and phase. By their nature, locsitons may be classified as Frenkel\n\n4", + "recall": 0.9453125, + "true_md": "to exceed a critical value. Since this strength is proportional to the square of an individual dipole momentum and inversely proportional to the cube of the interparticle spacing and the linewidth of the particle resonance (see below), the atoms may become preferred can- didates. A very high finesse of atomic resonances (i. e., their narrow linewidth), compared, for example, to plasmons (see below), also contributes greatly to the phenomenon, allowing one to see high-order locsiton resonances.\n\nTo observe locsitons, one have to create conditions to couple them efficiently to an op- tical or some other kind of a probe. In [1, 2] we suggested a few promising methods of locsiton detection. In particular, locsitons could be observed via size-related resonances in a scattering of laser radiation or via x-ray or electron-energy-loss spectroscopy.\n\nThere are many potential applications of locsitons; here we will mention two of them which were discussed in [1]. It was shown in [1] that in the presence of a sufficiently strong optical field (i. e., in the nonlinear case), the LF in 1D arrays of strongly coupled dipoles can exhibit optical bistability, which could be used to design nanoscale all-dielectric logic elements and switches. Such devices might complement currently used semiconductor-based electronic circuits. Another potential application of locsitons could be based on the extreme sensitivity of size-related locsiton resonances to the size and shape of the system. At the exact atomic resonance, the field is normally “pushed out” of the atomic system, unless it has a certain “magic shape” [1]. Consequently, such “magic structures” of atoms could find applications in designing nanoscale biosensors.\n\nRemoving the assumption of the LLT that the dipoles in the medium oscillate in lock- step with the incident electromagnetic wave is a substantial paradigm shift in the theory of light-matter interaction. Locsitons predicted within our broader approach are a new phe- nomenon, although we can provide some incomplete but illustrative analogies from other areas of physics. For example, short- and long-wavelength strata in [1] are reminiscent of ferromagnetic and antiferromagnetic arrangements of static magnetic dipoles in the Ising model. The LLT is, on the other hand, more similar to the mean-field approach of the Curie-Weiss theory for magnetic media [6]. The Ising model is known to have richer con- sequences than the Curie-Weiss theory. Our case is, however, substantially different and most of all, more versatile than the Ising model. Indeed, instead of being static, as in the Ising model, the atomic dipoles are induced by the applied optical field and can oscillate with arbitrary amplitude and phase. By their nature, locsitons may be classified as Frenkel\n\n4" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.04120491205157425, + "doc_id": "3be606ecb820cd2e0e2565540f85296a8b88261bca1a428751639a7e4e362a72", + "edit_distance": 0.8447653429602888, + "f1_score": 0.829090909090909, + "meteor": 0.2037111202161947, + "precision": 0.926829268292683, + "pred_md": "in which the self-energy has been expressed as i Σ ( ) = C q q 2 b q ( 2 ).\n\nThus, with the expressions (31) and (46), we can rewrite the identity (42) as follows\n\n\n\nBy considering that energy-momentum conservation holds at the vertices Γ µ ( k, p, q ) and H k,p,q ( ), we can write\n\n\n\nand\n\n\n\nWith this representation we may obtain from Eq. (47) that\n\n\n\n## C. The triple photon vertex\n\nTo obtain ST identity for the triple photon vertex, the proper part of 〈 0 | T A A A ( µ ν λ ) 0 , | 〉 we differentiate the functional equation (15) with respect to ζ ( x ), J ν ( y ) and J λ ( z ) and turn off all the sources. The result is\n\nor in terms of the Green functions,\n\n\n\n\n\nwhere D AD ν ( y ) denotes the covariant derivative in the adjoint representation, D AD ν ( y C y ) ( ) = ∂ yν C y ( ) -ie A [ ν ( y , C ) ( y )] /star . Thus, we can rewrite the above expression as\n\n\n\nwhere, after the application of the differential operators, we must identify ˆ and ˆ respectively with y z y and z .\n\n9", + "recall": 0.75, + "true_md": "in which the self-energy has been expressed as i Σ$_{C}$( q ) = q $^{2}$b ( q $^{2}$).\n\nThus, with the expressions (31) and (46), we can rewrite the identity (42) as follows\n\nBy considering that energy-momentum conservation holds at the vertices Γ $^{µ}$( k, p, q ) and H ( k, p, q ), we can write\n\nand\n\nWith this representation we may obtain from Eq. (47) that\n\nTo obtain ST identity for the triple photon vertex, the proper part of 〈 0 | T ( A$_{µ}$A$_{ν}$A$_{λ}$ ) | 0 〉 , we differentiate the functional equation (15) with respect to ζ ( x ), J $^{ν}$( y ) and J $^{λ}$( z ) and turn off all the sources. The result is\n\nor in terms of the Green functions,\n\nwhere D AD ν ( y ) denotes the covariant derivative in the adjoint representation, D AD ν ( y ) C ( y ) = ∂$_{yν}$C ( y ) − ie [ A$_{ν}$ ( y ) , C ( y )]$_{⋆}$. Thus, we can rewrite the above expression as\n\nwhere, after the application of the differential operators, we must identify ˆ y and ˆ z respectively with y and z .\n\n$$q$_{µ}$ Γ $^{µ}$( k, p, q )[1 + b ( q $^{2}$)] = ie [ S − 1 F ( k ) H$_{1}$ ( k, p, q ) − H$_{2}$ ( k, p, q ) S − 1 F ( p )] . (47)$$\n\n$$Γ $^{µ}$( k, p, q ) = ie (2 π ) $^{4}$δ$^{4}$( k − p − q ) ˜ Γ $^{µ}$( p, p + q ) (48)$$\n\n$$H ( k, p, q ) = (2 π ) $^{4}$δ$^{4}$( k − p − q ) ˜ H ( p, p + q ) . (49)$$\n\n$$q$_{µ}$ ˜ Γ $^{µ}$( p, p + q )[1 + b ( q $^{2}$)] = S − 1 F ( p + q ) ˜ H$_{1}$ ( p, p + q ) − ˜ H$_{2}$ ( p, p + q ) S − 1 F ( p ) . (50)$$\n\n$$1 αe ∂ µ x δ $^{3}$W δJ $^{µ}$( x ) δJ $^{ν}$( y ) δJ $^{λ}$( z ) ∣ = δ $^{3}$W δζ ( x ) δK $^{ν}$( y ) δJ $^{λ}$( z ) ∣ + δ $^{3}$W δζ ( x ) δJ $^{ν}$( y ) δK $^{λ}$( z ) ∣ , (51)$$\n\n$$− 1 α ∂ µ x 〈 0 | T ( A$_{µ}$ ( x ) A$_{ν}$ ( y ) A$_{λ}$ ( z )) | 0 〉 = 〈 0 | T ( ¯ C ( x ) D AD ν ( y ) C ( y ) A$_{λ}$ ( z )) | 0 〉 + 〈 0 | T ( ¯ C ( x ) A$_{ν}$ ( y ) D AD λ ( z ) C ( z )) | 0 〉 , (52)$$\n\n$$− 1 α ∂ µ x 〈 0 | T ( A$_{µ}$ ( x ) A$_{ν}$ ( y ) A$_{λ}$ ( z )) | 0 〉 = ∂$_{yν}$ 〈 0 | T ( ¯ C ( x ) C ( y ) A$_{λ}$ ( z )) | 0 〉 +2 e sin( ∂$_{y}$ ∧ ∂$_{ˆ}$ $_{y}$) 〈 0 | T ( ¯ C ( x ) A$_{ν}$ ( y ) C (ˆ y ) A$_{λ}$ ( z )) | 0 〉 + ∂$_{zλ}$ 〈 0 | T ( ¯ C ( x ) A$_{ν}$ ( y ) C ( z )) | 0 〉 +2 e sin( ∂$_{z}$ ∧ ∂$_{ˆ}$ $_{z}$) 〈 0 | T ( ¯ C ( x ) A$_{ν}$ ( y ) A$_{λ}$ ( z ) C (ˆ z )) | 0 〉 , (53)$$\n\n9\n\n## C. The triple photon vertex" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8522123326907786, + "doc_id": "f89e71944da05ef83c82af9561f8fbabfd4ebfaa989783058603787d704eac40", + "edit_distance": 0.14728682170542637, + "f1_score": 0.9510086455331412, + "meteor": 0.931432814511193, + "precision": 0.9649122807017544, + "pred_md": "FIG. 5: 'Magic' planar system of 13 resonant atoms for two different orientations of E in shown in plots (a) and (b). The inset illustrates the geometry of the system.\n\nFIG. 5: 'Magic' planar system of 13 resonant atoms for two different orientations of E in shown in plots (a) and (b). The inset illustrates the geometry of the system.\n\nstructure. (Within the NNA, the LF zeroes out at the 'empty' atomic locations outside the outer hexagon, so locsitons make a 2D standing wave.) In general, the zeroes (nodes) of that wave are located somewhere in between atoms, so at each individual atom we have a nonzero LF amplitude. However, in the magic atomic configuration at the precise atomic resonance, δ = 0, these nodes nearly coincide with the locations of the inner-hexagon atoms. Thus, we have a nearly ideal picture of a 2D standing wave, with large LF intensities at the antinodes (maxima), located at the central atom and the outer hexagon atoms, on one hand, and nodes (zeroes), located at the inner-hexagon atoms, on the other hand. To an extent, this situation is reminiscent of a 2D standing wave on a water surface in a round bucket with the first antinode at the center of the bucket, where some middle observation points are located at the nodes of the wave. Any symmetry distortion in this system (e. g., by attaching a foreign atom or molecule to it) would break the balance of the local fields in the system and bring back the resonant LF suppression, which is cancelled in the symmetric 'magic system'. This effect could potentially lead to designing nanometer-scale sensors for detecting various biological molecules, etc. For example, such a nanodevice may include target-specific receptor molecules that form a locsiton-supporting 'magic' system. A localized locsiton then would get suppressed whenever a target biomolecule attaches to a receptor, otherwise the locsiton suppression at the electronic resonance would be 'magically' cancelled.\n\n21", + "recall": 0.9375, + "true_md": "FIG. 5: “Magic” planar system of 13 resonant atoms for two different orientations of E$_{in}$ shown in plots (a) and (b). The inset illustrates the geometry of the system.\n\nstructure. (Within the NNA, the LF zeroes out at the “empty” atomic locations outside the outer hexagon, so locsitons make a 2D standing wave.) In general, the zeroes (nodes) of that wave are located somewhere in between atoms, so at each individual atom we have a nonzero LF amplitude. However, in the magic atomic configuration at the precise atomic resonance, δ = 0, these nodes nearly coincide with the locations of the inner-hexagon atoms. Thus, we have a nearly ideal picture of a 2D standing wave, with large LF intensities at the antinodes (maxima), located at the central atom and the outer hexagon atoms, on one hand, and nodes (zeroes), located at the inner-hexagon atoms, on the other hand. To an extent, this situation is reminiscent of a 2D standing wave on a water surface in a round bucket with the first antinode at the center of the bucket, where some middle observation points are located at the nodes of the wave. Any symmetry distortion in this system (e. g., by attaching a foreign atom or molecule to it) would break the balance of the local fields in the system and bring back the resonant LF suppression, which is cancelled in the symmetric “magic system”. This effect could potentially lead to designing nanometer-scale sensors for detecting various bio- logical molecules, etc. For example, such a nanodevice may include target-specific receptor molecules that form a locsiton-supporting “magic” system. A localized locsiton then would get suppressed whenever a target biomolecule attaches to a receptor, otherwise the locsiton suppression at the electronic resonance would be “magically” cancelled.\n\n21" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5841261404483015, + "doc_id": "7ebff15a677e8619bdb38fcd7d9508b7589896801afa8bb76e952e1949b87a7a", + "edit_distance": 0.27791563275434245, + "f1_score": 0.9589905362776024, + "meteor": 0.7655425791105887, + "precision": 0.9806451612903225, + "pred_md": "## Abstract\n\nWe demonstrate a method for calculating the neutral B -meson decay constants and mixing matrix elements in unquenched lattice QCD with domain-wall light quarks and static b -quarks. Our computation is performed on the '2+1' flavor gauge configurations generated by the RBC and UKQCD Collaborations with a lattice spacing of a ≈ 0 11 . fm ( a -1 = 1 729 GeV) and a . lattice spatial volume of approximately (1 8 fm) . . 3 We simulate at three different light sea quark masses with pion masses down to approximately 430 MeV, and extrapolate to the physical quark masses using a phenomenologically-motivated fit function based on next-to-leading order heavylight meson SU (2) chiral perturbation theory. For the b -quarks, we use an improved formulation of the Eichten-Hill action with static link-smearing to increase the signal-to-noise ratio. We also improve the heavy-light axial current used to compute the B -meson decay constant to O ( α pa s ) using one-loop lattice perturbation theory. We present initial results for the SU (3)-breaking ratios f B s /f B d and ξ = f B s √ B B s /f B d √ B B d , thereby demonstrating the viability of the method. For the ratio of decay constants, we find f B s /f B d = 1 15(12) and for the ratio of mixing matrix elements, . we find ξ = 1 13(12), where in both cases the errors reflect the combined statistical and systematic . uncertainties, including an estimate of the size of neglected O (1 /m b ) effects.\n\nPACS numbers: 12.38.Gc, 12.15.Hh, 14.40.Nd\n\n2", + "recall": 0.9382716049382716, + "true_md": "## Abstract\n\nWe demonstrate a method for calculating the neutral B -meson decay constants and mixing matrix elements in unquenched lattice QCD with domain-wall light quarks and static b -quarks. Our computation is performed on the “2+1” flavor gauge configurations generated by the RBC and UKQCD Collaborations with a lattice spacing of a ≈ 0 . 11 fm ( a − 1 = 1 . 729 GeV) and a lattice spatial volume of approximately (1 . 8 fm) $^{3}$. We simulate at three different light sea quark masses with pion masses down to approximately 430 MeV, and extrapolate to the physical quark masses using a phenomenologically-motivated fit function based on next-to-leading order heavy- light meson SU (2) chiral perturbation theory. For the b -quarks, we use an improved formulation of the Eichten-Hill action with static link-smearing to increase the signal-to-noise ratio. We also improve the heavy-light axial current used to compute the B -meson decay constant to O ( α$_{s}$pa ) using one-loop lattice perturbation theory. We present initial results for the SU (3)-breaking ratios f$_{B}$$\\_{s}$/f$\\_{B}$$_{d}$ and ξ = f$_{B}$$\\_{s}$ √ B$\\_{B}$$_{s}$/f$_{B}$$\\_{d}$ √ B$\\_{B}$$_{d}$ , thereby demonstrating the viability of the method. For the ratio of decay constants, we find f$_{B}$$\\_{s}$/f$\\_{B}$$_{d}$ = 1 . 15(12) and for the ratio of mixing matrix elements, we find ξ = 1 . 13(12), where in both cases the errors reflect the combined statistical and systematic uncertainties, including an estimate of the size of neglected O (1 /m$_{b}$ ) effects.\n\nPACS numbers: 12.38.Gc, 12.15.Hh, 14.40.Nd\n\n2" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9258136955934655, + "doc_id": "9361fd2b2e1942c6409aa0e59b6eca83975a6a9e9d54d2417909d04cd30240e6", + "edit_distance": 0.06762295081967214, + "f1_score": 0.9710467706013363, + "meteor": 0.9601431407045723, + "precision": 0.9819819819819819, + "pred_md": "30\n\nbrane). In fact, as can be seen by the effective Lagrangian calculation of section V, they do not contribute to the /epsilon1 parameters either. In conclusion, even if the bulk gauge group is different, the phenomenology of the two models is almost identical (the situation changes, however, if fermions are allowed to propagate in the bulk).\n\nThis is a very interesting conclusion: working with a completely bottom-up approach, starting from an effective 4D theory - the GD-BESS model - and generalizing, we have arrived at a 5D model that quite closely reproduces a particular version of RS1.\n\n## VII. CONCLUSIONS\n\nAmong the various TC schemes proposed so far, which have generally difficulties in satisfying the constraints coming from EW precision measurements, the Degenerate BESS model [59], provides a low-energy effective scheme which, taking advantage from a ( SU (2) ⊗ SU (2)) 2 custodial symmetry, leads to a suppressed contribution from the new physics to the EW observables. This feature allows new vector bosons, interpreted as composites of a strongly interacting sector, at a relatively low energy scale (around a TeV). The interpretation of the D-BESS as a four-site 'moose' model, makes the generalization to N sites natural [39, 60].\n\nDue to the correspondence at low energy between theories with replicated 4D gauge symmetries G and theories with a 5D gauge symmetry G on a lattice, via the deconstruction technique, in this paper we have considered the continuum limit of the D-BESS model to a 5D theory. Working in the framework suggested by the AdS/CFT correspondence, we have considered for the fifth dimension a segment ending with two branes. The boundary conditions, to be imposed on the branes, emerge univocally from the deconstruction. The 5D-DBESS model is described by a SU (2) L ⊗ SU (2) R gauge theory in the bulk with boundary kinetic terms, broken both spontaneously and by boundary conditions.\n\nBy choosing the geometry of the fifth dimension as a slice of AdS , we find that the 5 5D-DBESS model can be related to a realization of the RS1 model [5] with EW gauge fields propagating in the bulk and having brane kinetic terms localized on the infrared brane [20]. The gauge particle content of the theory consists of two charged sectors, left (including W ) and right, and one neutral (including photon and Z ).\n\nThe effective low energy 4D Lagrangian is obtained by means of the holographic tech-", + "recall": 0.960352422907489, + "true_md": "30\n\nbrane). In fact, as can be seen by the effective Lagrangian calculation of section V, they do not contribute to the ϵ parameters either. In conclusion, even if the bulk gauge group is different, the phenomenology of the two models is almost identical (the situation changes, however, if fermions are allowed to propagate in the bulk).\n\nThis is a very interesting conclusion: working with a completely bottom-up approach, starting from an effective 4D theory - the GD-BESS model - and generalizing, we have arrived at a 5D model that quite closely reproduces a particular version of RS1.\n\nAmong the various TC schemes proposed so far, which have generally difficulties in satisfying the constraints coming from EW precision measurements, the Degenerate BESS model [59], provides a low-energy effective scheme which, taking advantage from a ( SU (2) ⊗ SU (2)) 2 custodial symmetry, leads to a suppressed contribution from the new physics to the EW observables. This feature allows new vector bosons, interpreted as com- posites of a strongly interacting sector, at a relatively low energy scale (around a TeV). The interpretation of the D-BESS as a four-site ”moose” model, makes the generalization to N sites natural [39, 60].\n\nDue to the correspondence at low energy between theories with replicated 4D gauge symmetries G and theories with a 5D gauge symmetry G on a lattice, via the deconstruction technique, in this paper we have considered the continuum limit of the D-BESS model to a 5D theory. Working in the framework suggested by the AdS/CFT correspondence, we have considered for the fifth dimension a segment ending with two branes. The boundary conditions, to be imposed on the branes, emerge univocally from the deconstruction. The 5D-DBESS model is described by a SU (2)$_{L}$ ⊗ SU (2)$_{R}$ gauge theory in the bulk with boundary kinetic terms, broken both spontaneously and by boundary conditions.\n\nBy choosing the geometry of the fifth dimension as a slice of AdS$_{5}$, we find that the 5D-DBESS model can be related to a realization of the RS1 model [5] with EW gauge fields propagating in the bulk and having brane kinetic terms localized on the infrared brane [20]. The gauge particle content of the theory consists of two charged sectors, left (including W ) and right, and one neutral (including photon and Z ).\n\nThe effective low energy 4D Lagrangian is obtained by means of the holographic tech-\n\n## VII. CONCLUSIONS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9494266845182542, + "doc_id": "5af675827281d6af384fa16c463ce43975e3001a775569d717fd9bdeb5e68fe1", + "edit_distance": 0.04639175257731959, + "f1_score": 0.9716981132075472, + "meteor": 0.9759785712829235, + "precision": 0.9856459330143541, + "pred_md": "system is small, interactions can be ignored (it is a Knudsen Gas 11 ), and multiplying the survival probability by the total number of particles gives us a quantitative value of mass inside the region.\n\nThe second conclusion concerns the numerical significance. We have shown that the discretization developed by Arnold and Ehrhardt for the solution of open boundary problems provides a viable numerical approach for solving the time dependent Schrodinger equation 8-10 when a constraint is suddenly removed. Although the present work considers a one-dimensional model that is not sufficient to exhibit chaos, the code design forms the essential basis of future research on non-integrable, two-dimensional billiard models where chaos is present. The influence of chaos in these models will be explored by measuring the survival probability of particles in a trap with an open boundary.\n\nThe results obtained with the code presented here show an excellent agreement with the analytic approach, offering reliability not only in the result obtained but also in the novel numerical method used. The success in the development of the numerical method opens up a reasonable extension to higher dimensional models. Also, it offers the possibility of understanding the quantum mechanical version of billiard models that experience classical chaotic behavior. In spite of the very low, by normal standards, temperature regime, a classical theoretical model was still adequate for the analysis of the Austin experiment. The quantum regime should also be accessible experimentally at yet lower, but still attainable, temperatures. Experimentalists are beginning to probe this regime.\n\n## Acknowledgments\n\nThe authors benefitted from the suggestions of M. Ehrhardt, A. Arnold and K. Yawn, and the support of the division of Technology Resources at Texas Christian University.\n\n1 Oliver Knill,\"Sinai billiard\", <http://www.dynamical-systems.org/sinai/info.html>, (2000).\n\n2 David M. Harrison,\"Bunimovich stadium\",<http://www.upscale.utoronto.ca/GeneralInterest /Harrison/Flash/Chaos/Bunimovich/Bunimovich.html>,(2006).\n\n3 Eric W. Weisstein, \"Billiards\", <http://mathworld.wolfram.com/Billiards.html>,(2009).\n\n15", + "recall": 0.958139534883721, + "true_md": "system is small, interactions can be ignored (it is a Knudsen Gas $^{11}$), and multiplying the survival probability by the total number of particles gives us a quantitative value of mass inside the region.\n\nThe second conclusion concerns the numerical significance. We have shown that the discretization developed by Arnold and Ehrhardt for the solution of open boundary prob- lems provides a viable numerical approach for solving the time dependent Schrodinger equation 8–10 when a constraint is suddenly removed. Although the present work consid- ers a one-dimensional model that is not sufficient to exhibit chaos, the code design forms the essential basis of future research on non-integrable, two-dimensional billiard models where chaos is present. The influence of chaos in these models will be explored by measuring the survival probability of particles in a trap with an open boundary.\n\nThe results obtained with the code presented here show an excellent agreement with the analytic approach, offering reliability not only in the result obtained but also in the novel numerical method used. The success in the development of the numerical method opens up a reasonable extension to higher dimensional models. Also, it offers the possibility of understanding the quantum mechanical version of billiard models that experience classical chaotic behavior. In spite of the very low, by normal standards, temperature regime, a classical theoretical model was still adequate for the analysis of the Austin experiment. The quantum regime should also be accessible experimentally at yet lower, but still attainable, temperatures. Experimentalists are beginning to probe this regime.\n\nThe authors benefitted from the suggestions of M. Ehrhardt, A. Arnold and K. Yawn, and the support of the division of Technology Resources at Texas Christian University.\n\n## Acknowledgments\n\n15\n\n1 Oliver Knill,\"Sinai billiard\", <http://www.dynamical-systems.org/sinai/info.html>, (2000).\n\n2 David M. Harrison,\"Bunimovich stadium\",<http://www.upscale.utoronto.ca/GeneralInterest /Harrison/Flash/Chaos/Bunimovich/Bunimovich.html>,(2006).\n\n3 Eric W. Weisstein, \"Billiards\", <http://mathworld.wolfram.com/Billiards.html>,(2009)." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8983597381836473, + "doc_id": "e7ed2a3d28cfd979879ca32c4ad187b85a0f1c23693745ffc8aed2782f360b1a", + "edit_distance": 0.07072368421052631, + "f1_score": 0.958174904942966, + "meteor": 0.9373697441383078, + "precision": 0.972972972972973, + "pred_md": "to a certain extent the particle-particle attraction. Normally, the solution is deposited on to a plain silicon substrate that is covered by the native oxide layer only [34]. However, one may locally change the wetting behaviour of the solvent by further oxidising the substrate [38]. By adding excess thiol one can also vary the properties of the solvent [40].\n\nTwo different procedures are employed for the deposition of the solution on to the substrate: spincoating or a meniscus technique [61, 62]. The choice is important as it strongly influences the evaporation rate and, as a result, the pattern formation process. When using spin-coating, one finds that directly after deposition, evaporation competes with dewetting until all the solvent has evaporated. The resulting deposits of nanoparticles are imaged by atomic force microscopy (AFM). For spin-coated films, the evaporation rate is high and structuring is normally finished before the spincoater is stopped. Conversely, the solvent evaporation rate is strongly decreased when employing the meniscus technique [61], i.e., by depositing a drop of solution on a Teflon ring that is wetted by the solvent. This allows for a better control of the process and enables the use of contrast-enhanced microscopy to observe the dewetting process in situ [40]. All pattern formation is confined to the region of the receding contact line of toluene, silicon and air. With both techniques one may find mono-modal or bi-modal polygonal networks [34], labyrinthine spinodal structures, or branched patterns (see Fig. 1). The meniscus technique allows for the study of branched structures in a more controlled manner. The work in Ref. [40] indicates that fingering strongly depends on the interaction strength of the particles, i.e., on the chain length of the thiol molecules coating the gold cores. For short chains (C 5 and C ) no formation of branched structures is observed. 8 At similar concentrations, well-developed branched structures are formed for longer chains (C 10 and C 12 ). For even longer chains (C 14 ), however, one again finds less branching. It also depends on the amount of excess thiol in the solvent (for details see Ref. [40]).\n\nWhen following the evolution of the branched patterns in situ (see the complementary video material of Ref. [40]), one clearly observes that different processes occur on different lenght scales. First, a macroscopic dewetting front recedes, leaving behind a seemingly dry substrate. The macroscopic front can be transversely unstable resulting in large-scale ( > 100 µ m) strongly anisotropic fingered structures. For fronts that move relatively quickly these macroscopic structures cover all the available substrate. However, when at a later stage the macroscopic front becomes slower, those fingers become scarce and 'macroscopic fingering' finally ceases. At this stage it is possible to appreciate that the seemingly dry region left behind by the front is not at all dry, but covered by an ultrathin 'postcursor' film that is itself unstable. The thickness of this film\n\n6", + "recall": 0.9438202247191011, + "true_md": "to a certain extent the particle-particle attraction. Normally, the solution is deposited on to a plain silicon substrate that is covered by the native oxide layer only [34]. However, one may locally change the wetting behaviour of the solvent by further oxidising the substrate [38]. By adding excess thiol one can also vary the properties of the solvent [40].\n\nTwo different procedures are employed for the deposition of the solution on to the substrate: spin- coating or a meniscus technique [61, 62]. The choice is important as it strongly influences the evaporation rate and, as a result, the pattern formation process. When using spin-coating, one finds that directly after deposition, evaporation competes with dewetting until all the solvent has evapo- rated. The resulting deposits of nanoparticles are imaged by atomic force microscopy (AFM). For spin-coated films, the evaporation rate is high and structuring is normally finished before the spin- coater is stopped. Conversely, the solvent evaporation rate is strongly decreased when employing the meniscus technique [61], i.e., by depositing a drop of solution on a Teflon ring that is wetted by the solvent. This allows for a better control of the process and enables the use of contrast-enhanced microscopy to observe the dewetting process in situ [40]. All pattern formation is confined to the region of the receding contact line of toluene, silicon and air. With both techniques one may find mono-modal or bi-modal polygonal networks [34], labyrinthine spinodal structures, or branched patterns (see Fig. 1). The meniscus technique allows for the study of branched structures in a more controlled manner. The work in Ref. [40] indicates that fingering strongly depends on the interaction strength of the particles, i.e., on the chain length of the thiol molecules coating the gold cores. For short chains (C$_{5}$ and C$_{8}$) no formation of branched structures is observed. At similar concentrations, well-developed branched structures are formed for longer chains (C$_{10}$ and C$_{12}$). For even longer chains (C$_{14}$), however, one again finds less branching. It also depends on the amount of excess thiol in the solvent (for details see Ref. [40]).\n\nWhen following the evolution of the branched patterns in situ (see the complementary video material of Ref. [40]), one clearly observes that different processes occur on different lenght scales. First, a macroscopic dewetting front recedes, leaving behind a seemingly dry substrate. The macroscopic front can be transversely unstable resulting in large-scale ( > 100 µ m) strongly anisotropic fingered structures. For fronts that move relatively quickly these macroscopic struc- tures cover all the available substrate. However, when at a later stage the macroscopic front be- comes slower, those fingers become scarce and ‘macroscopic fingering’ finally ceases. At this stage it is possible to appreciate that the seemingly dry region left behind by the front is not at all dry, but covered by an ultrathin ‘postcursor’ film that is itself unstable. The thickness of this film\n\n6" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8270066734078311, + "doc_id": "a68ce77da2a278dc63477c356259d125252ed745d52767ebad0a69431db62bde", + "edit_distance": 0.13667820069204153, + "f1_score": 0.9854368932038836, + "meteor": 0.8827335972071483, + "precision": 0.9950980392156863, + "pred_md": "quantum spin Hall insulator. Preprint at ¡http://arxiv.org/abs/0902.2251¿ (2009).\n\n- [19] Checkelsky, J. G., Li, L. & Ong, N. P. Divergent resistance of the Dirac point in graphene: Evidence for a transition in high magnetic field. Phys. Rev. B 79 , 115434 (2009).\n- [20] Zhang, H. et al. Topological insulators in Bi 2 Se , Bi 3 2 Te 3 and Sb Te 2 3 with a single Dirac cone on the surface. Nature Phys. 5 , 438-442 (2009).\n- [21] Meier, F., Dil, J. H., Lobo-Checa, J., Patthey, L. & Osterwalder, J. Quantitative vectorial spin analysis in angle-resolved photoemission: Bi/Ag(111) and Pb/Ag(111). Phys. Rev. B 77 , 165431 (2008).\n- [22] Larson, P. et al. Electronic structure of Bi 2 X 3 (X = S, Se, T) compounds: Comparison of theoretical calculations with photoemission studies. Phys. Rev. B 65 , 085108 (2001).\n- [23] Mishra, S. K., Satpathy, S. & Jepsen, O. Electronic structure and thermoelectric properties of bismuth telluride and bismuth selenide. J. Phys: Condens. Mat. 9 , 461-470 (1997).\n- [24] Urazhdin, S. et al. Surface effects in layered semiconductors Bi 2 Se 3 and Bi Te . 2 3 Phys. Rev. B 69 , 085313 (2004).\n- [25] Black, J., Conwell, E. M., Seigle, L. & Spencer, C. W. Electrical and optical properties of some M V -B 2 N V I -B 3 semiconductors. J. Phys. Chem. Sol. 2 , 240-251 (1957).\n- [26] Thomas, G. A. et al. Large electron-density increase on cooling a layered metal: Doped Bi 2 Te . 3 Phys. Rev. B 46 , 1553-1556 (1992).\n- [27] Zhou, S. et al. A. Metal to insulator transition in epitaxial graphene induced by molecular doping. Phys. Rev. Lett. 101 , 086402 (2008).\n- [28] Schedin, F. et al. Detection of individual gas molecules adsorbed on graphene. Nature Mat. 6 , 652-655 (2007).\n- [29] Konig, M. et al. Quantum spin Hall insulator state in HgTe quantum wells. Science 318 , 766-770 (2007).\n- [30] Wilczek, F. Remarks on dyons. Phys. Rev. Lett. 48 , 1146-1149 (1982).\n\n12", + "recall": 0.9759615384615384, + "true_md": "quantum spin Hall insulator. Preprint at ¡http://arxiv.org/abs/0902.2251¿ (2009).\n\n- [19] Checkelsky, J. G., Li, L. & Ong, N. P. Divergent resistance of the Dirac point in graphene: Evidence for a transition in high magnetic field. Phys. Rev. B 79 , 115434 (2009).\n\n- [20] Zhang, H. et al. Topological insulators in Bi$_{2}$Se$_{3}$, Bi$_{2}$Te$_{3}$ and Sb$_{2}$Te$_{3}$ with a single Dirac cone on the surface. Nature Phys. 5 , 438-442 (2009).\n\n- [21] Meier, F., Dil, J. H., Lobo-Checa, J., Patthey, L. & Osterwalder, J. Quantitative vectorial spin analysis in angle-resolved photoemission: Bi/Ag(111) and Pb/Ag(111). Phys. Rev. B 77 , 165431 (2008).\n\n- [22] Larson, P. et al. Electronic structure of Bi$_{2}$X$_{3}$ (X = S, Se, T) compounds: Comparison of theoretical calculations with photoemission studies. Phys. Rev. B 65 , 085108 (2001).\n\n- [23] Mishra, S. K., Satpathy, S. & Jepsen, O. Electronic structure and thermoelectric properties of bismuth telluride and bismuth selenide. J. Phys: Condens. Mat. 9 , 461-470 (1997).\n\n- [24] Urazhdin, S. et al. Surface effects in layered semiconductors Bi$_{2}$Se$_{3}$ and Bi$_{2}$Te$_{3}$. Phys. Rev. B 69 , 085313 (2004).\n\n- [25] Black, J., Conwell, E. M., Seigle, L. & Spencer, C. W. Electrical and optical properties of some M V − B 2 N V I − B 3 semiconductors. J. Phys. Chem. Sol. 2 , 240-251 (1957).\n\n- [26] Thomas, G. A. et al. Large electron-density increase on cooling a layered metal: Doped Bi$_{2}$Te$_{3}$. Phys. Rev. B 46 , 1553-1556 (1992).\n\n- [27] Zhou, S. et al. A. Metal to insulator transition in epitaxial graphene induced by molecular doping. Phys. Rev. Lett. 101 , 086402 (2008).\n\n- [28] Schedin, F. et al. Detection of individual gas molecules adsorbed on graphene. Nature Mat. 6 , 652-655 (2007).\n\n- [29] Konig, M. et al. Quantum spin Hall insulator state in HgTe quantum wells. Science 318 , 766-770 (2007).\n\n- [30] Wilczek, F. Remarks on dyons. Phys. Rev. Lett. 48 , 1146-1149 (1982).\n\n12" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7268082053568985, + "doc_id": "8bd63b383396cdd2f71789e757eb241bc2704bbfb8ac96dc92690b075e8412d0", + "edit_distance": 0.31894484412470026, + "f1_score": 0.9147727272727274, + "meteor": 0.7851139871502111, + "precision": 0.9640718562874252, + "pred_md": "## II. THEORY\n\n## A. DESCRIPTION OF THE SYSTEM.\n\nThe system representing the one-dimensional Escape Problem ( EP ) is a group of particles restricted inside a region of size L delimited by boundaries and free of external influences where, abruptly, one of the boundaries becomes transparent, allowing particles to escape. The group of particles is a dilute gas rarefied enough to be considered as a ' Knudsen Gas ' 11 whose density is so small that only the interactions with the boundaries are relevant. From the perspective of quantum mechanics, the EP is a QIVP . Thus, the intention is to solve the 1-D Schrödinger equation from a given initial condition. The EP is similar to a diffusion type problem; it has the same structure as propagation problems in which a partial differential equation is solved with the aid of a known initial value. The evolution of the gas inside the region 0 < x < L will be determined by the wavefunction at the initial time. To demonstrate the approach, here the initial wavefunction is chosen to be the ground state of an Infinite Well Potential of length L . Therefore, the initial value or the initial condition inside of the box is\n\n\n\nwith k = π L . Of course, outside of the box the value of the initial wave function vanishes. The evolution of the EP is represented in the figure 1.\n\n## B. ANALYTICAL METHOD.\n\nThe non-relativistic, time dependent, one-dimensional Schrödinger equation is\n\n\n\nwith the initial condition:\n\n\n\nThe Laplace Transform Method is one of the many appropriate techniques to solve differential equations. The first task is to determine the Laplace transform of the wave function and its time derivative. For this particular example the definition of the Laplace transform\n\n4", + "recall": 0.8702702702702703, + "true_md": "## A. DESCRIPTION OF THE SYSTEM.\n\n## II. THEORY\n\nThe system representing the one-dimensional Escape Problem ( EP ) is a group of particles restricted inside a region of size L delimited by boundaries and free of external influences where, abruptly, one of the boundaries becomes transparent, allowing particles to escape. The group of particles is a dilute gas rarefied enough to be considered as a “ Knudsen Gas ” 11 whose density is so small that only the interactions with the boundaries are relevant. From the perspective of quantum mechanics, the EP is a QIVP . Thus, the intention is to solve the 1-D Schrödinger equation from a given initial condition. The EP is similar to a diffusion type problem; it has the same structure as propagation problems in which a partial differential equation is solved with the aid of a known initial value. The evolution of the gas inside the region 0 < x < L will be determined by the wavefunction at the initial time. To demonstrate the approach, here the initial wavefunction is chosen to be the ground state of an Infinite Well Potential of length L . Therefore, the initial value or the initial condition inside of the box is\n\nwith k = π L . Of course, outside of the box the value of the initial wave function vanishes. The evolution of the EP is represented in the figure 1.\n\nThe non-relativistic, time dependent, one-dimensional Schrödinger equation is\n\nwith the initial condition:\n\nThe Laplace Transform Method is one of the many appropriate techniques to solve differ- ential equations. The first task is to determine the Laplace transform of the wave function and its time derivative. For this particular example the definition of the Laplace transform\n\n4\n\n## B. ANALYTICAL METHOD.\n\n$$Ψ$_{I}$ ( x, 0) = sin ( kx ) (1)$$\n\n$$∂ Ψ ( x, t ) ∂t = i ℏ 2 m ∂ $^{2}$Ψ ( x, t ) ∂x 2 (2)$$\n\n$$Ψ ( x, t ) | t =0 = Ψ$_{I}$ ( x, 0) . (3)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.62768622074212, + "doc_id": "62e068a3ccd72059a5f33f1572ede4030ace94bd7c5dec163e8d7aa7097291b5", + "edit_distance": 0.2991869918699187, + "f1_score": 0.9444444444444446, + "meteor": 0.705034701516455, + "precision": 0.9540816326530612, + "pred_md": "23\n\nin the determination of the Higgs mass m h ; three out of four of the remaining parameters can be expressed in terms of the three measured quantities that are customarily chosen as input parameters for the SM, α G , F and m Z using Eqs. (78),(79),(80). The free parameters of the model are then just πR and g 5 . The order of magnitude of πR is fixed by eq. (85) together with the request ¯ M ∼ TeV, while ¯ g 5 is constrained by eq. (65). In fact, since we need ˜ g 2 and ˜ g ' 2 to be positive, eq. (65) implies ¯ g 5 > g, g ' .\n\nWe are now ready to calculate the spectrum. In the flat limit, the C and S functions (eq. (45)) reduce to ordinary trigonometric functions: C y, m ( ) = cos( my , S y, m ) ( ) = sin( my . ) However, even in this very simple case only the eigenvalue equation for the right charged sector (47) can be analytically solved. We get\n\n\n\nThe equations (46), (48), defining the eigenvalues for the other two sectors, have to be solved numerically. Some general remarks can be made at a qualitative level, however.\n\nEq. (46) can be recast in the form\n\n\n\nthe eigenvalues of the left charged sector are then determined by the intersection of two curves: the trigonometric curve tan( mπR ) and the parabola -g 2 5 ˜ g 2 ( m 2 -˜ g 2 ˜ v 2 4 ). The -˜ g 2 ˜ v 2 4 term - originating from the y = πR brane mass term in the action (8) - raises the vertex of the parabola, allowing for an intersection of the curves near m = 0. The corresponding light eigenvalue m L 0 can be identified with m W . For bigger values of m , the parabola goes down as -m 2 , and the intersections are nearer and nearer the asymptotes of tan( mπR ) (which correspond to the zeroes of cos( mπR ), and thus to the eigenvalues of the right charged sector, Eq. (86)), that are evenly spaced by 1 /R . The situation is illustrated in Fig. 3.", + "recall": 0.935, + "true_md": "23\n\nin the determination of the Higgs mass m$_{h}$ ; three out of four of the remaining parameters can be expressed in terms of the three measured quantities that are customarily chosen as input parameters for the SM, α , G$_{F}$ and m$_{Z}$ using Eqs. (78),(79),(80). The free parameters of the model are then just πR and g$_{5}$ . The order of magnitude of πR is fixed by eq. (85) together with the request ¯ M ∼ TeV, while ¯ g$_{5}$ is constrained by eq. (65). In fact, since we need ˜ g 2 and ˜ g $^{′}$2 to be positive, eq. (65) implies ¯ g$_{5}$ > g, g ′ .\n\nWe are now ready to calculate the spectrum. In the flat limit, the C and S functions (eq. (45)) reduce to ordinary trigonometric functions: C ( y, m ) = cos( my ) , S ( y, m ) = sin( my ) . However, even in this very simple case only the eigenvalue equation for the right charged sector (47) can be analytically solved. We get\n\nThe equations (46), (48), defining the eigenvalues for the other two sectors, have to be solved numerically. Some general remarks can be made at a qualitative level, however.\n\nEq. (46) can be recast in the form\n\nthe eigenvalues of the left charged sector are then determined by the intersection of two curves: the trigonometric curve tan( mπR ) and the parabola − g 2 5 ˜ g 2 ( m 2 − ˜ g $^{2}$˜ v 2 4 ). The − ˜ g $^{2}$˜ v 2 4 term - originating from the y = πR brane mass term in the action (8) - raises the vertex of the parabola, allowing for an intersection of the curves near m = 0. The corresponding light eigenvalue m$_{L}$$\\_{0}$ can be identified with m$\\_{W}$ . For bigger values of m , the parabola goes down as − m $^{2}$, and the intersections are nearer and nearer the asymptotes of tan( mπR ) (which correspond to the zeroes of cos( mπR ), and thus to the eigenvalues of the right charged sector, Eq. (86)), that are evenly spaced by 1 /R . The situation is illustrated in Fig. 3.\n\n$$m$_{Ln}$ tan( m$_{Ln}$πR ) = − g 2 5 ˜ g $_{2}$( m 2 Ln − ˜ g $^{2}$˜ v 2 4 ); (87)$$\n\n$$m$_{Rn}$ = 2 n − 1 2 R , n = 1 , 2 , . . . (86)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.024044029347094, + "doc_id": "21d36943118913f52f2f1edee849642b86fc5978ab42de58c2efa9054c876996", + "edit_distance": 0.8032915360501567, + "f1_score": 0.8661971830985916, + "meteor": 0.2089472175770175, + "precision": 0.9461538461538461, + "pred_md": "we run the coefficients at two-loops in three-flavor continuum HQET from m c to the scale µ = 1 /a , where the matching to three-flavor lattice HQET is done.\n\nThe matching factors and anomalous dimensions needed to compute these coefficients are given in Refs. [30, 48, 49] for the heavy-light current and in Refs. [50-53] for the four-quark operator. For completeness, we present them in Appendix B. Here we simply quote the results for the matching coefficients, which already contain some terms of O α ( 2 s ):\n\n\n\nwith the parameters J A and J 11 given by\n\n\n\n\n\nNote that the leading-order mixing between O QCD L and O HQET S is of O ( α s ). To determine the coupling constant α s at different scales, which is required to obtain these results, we fix the value of α s at the Z -boson mass to the PDG value α s ( m Z = 91 1876 GeV) = 0 1176 [6]. . . Using four-loop running [54, 55], we obtain α s ( m b = 4 20 GeV [6]) = 0 2228, . . α s ( m c = 1 27 GeV [6]) = 0 3819, and . . α (3) s ( a -1 = 1 729 GeV [34]) = 0 3141. Hence we find . .\n\n\n\n12", + "recall": 0.7987012987012987, + "true_md": "we run the coefficients at two-loops in three-flavor continuum HQET from m$_{c}$ to the scale µ = 1 /a , where the matching to three-flavor lattice HQET is done.\n\nThe matching factors and anomalous dimensions needed to compute these coefficients are given in Refs. [30, 48, 49] for the heavy-light current and in Refs. [50–53] for the four-quark operator. For completeness, we present them in Appendix B. Here we simply quote the results for the matching coefficients, which already contain some terms of O ( α 2 $_{s}$):\n\n$$C$_{A}$ ( µ ) = [ α$_{s}$ ( m$_{b}$ ) α$_{s}$ ( m$_{c}$ ) ] − 6 25 · [ α$_{s}$ ( m$_{c}$ ) α (3) s ( µ ) ] − 2 9 · ( 1 − 8 3 α$_{s}$ ( m$_{b}$ ) 4 π ) · ( 1 + J (4) A α$_{s}$ ( m$_{b}$ ) − α$_{s}$ ( m$_{c}$ ) 4 π ) · ( 1 + J (3) A α$_{s}$ ( m$_{c}$ ) − α (3) s ( µ ) 4 π ) + O ( α 2 $_{s}$) , (33) [ ] [ ] 4$$\n\n$$[ ]   Z$_{2}$ ( m$_{b}$, µ ) = − 8 α$_{s}$ ( m$_{b}$ ) 4 π [ α$_{s}$ ( m$_{b}$ ) α$_{s}$ ( m$_{c}$ ) ] − 4 25 [ α$_{s}$ ( m$_{c}$ ) α (3) s ( µ ) ] − 4 27 + O ( α 2 $_{s}$) , (35)$$\n\n$$( ) ( ) Z$_{1}$ ( m$_{b}$, µ ) = [ α$_{s}$ ( m$_{b}$ ) α$_{s}$ ( m$_{c}$ ) ] − 12 25 · [ α$_{s}$ ( m$_{c}$ ) α (3) s ( µ ) ] − 4 9 · {( 1 − 14 α$_{s}$ ( m$_{b}$ ) 4 π ) · ( 1 + J (4) 11 α$_{s}$ ( m$_{b}$ ) − α$_{s}$ ( m$_{c}$ ) 4 π ) · ( 1 + J (3) 11 α$_{s}$ ( m$_{c}$ ) − α (3) s ( µ ) 4 π ) + 2 α$_{s}$ ( m$_{b}$ ) 4 π {( 1 − [ α$_{s}$ ( m$_{b}$ ) α$_{s}$ ( m$_{c}$ ) ] 8 25 )( 1 + J (3) 11 α$_{s}$ ( m$_{c}$ ) − α (3) s ( µ ) 4 π ) + [ α$_{s}$ ( m$_{b}$ ) α$_{s}$ ( m$_{c}$ ) ] 8 25 $_{·}$  1 − [ α$_{s}$ ( m$_{c}$ ) α (3) s ( µ ) ] 8 27   }} + O ( α 2 $_{s}$) , (34) α$_{s}$ ( m$_{b}$ ) [ α$_{s}$ ( m$_{b}$ ) ] − 4 25 [ α$_{s}$ ( m$_{c}$ ) ] − 4 27$$\n\nwith the parameters J$_{A}$ and J$_{11}$ given by\n\n$$J (3) A = − 0 . 7545 , J (4) A = − 0 . 9098 , (36) (3) (4)$$\n\n$$− − J (3) 11 = − 1 . 6980 , J (4) 11 = − 1 . 8637 . (37)$$\n\nNote that the leading-order mixing between O QCD L and O HQET S is of O ( α$_{s}$ ). To determine the coupling constant α$_{s}$ at different scales, which is required to obtain these results, we fix the value of α$_{s}$ at the Z -boson mass to the PDG value α$_{s}$ ( m$_{Z}$ = 91 . 1876 GeV) = 0 . 1176 [6]. Using four-loop running [54, 55], we obtain α$_{s}$ ( m$_{b}$ = 4 . 20 GeV [6]) = 0 . 2228, α$_{s}$ ( m$_{c}$ = 1 . 27 GeV [6]) = 0 . 3819, and α (3) s ( a − 1 = 1 . 729 GeV [34]) = 0 . 3141. Hence we find\n\n$$C$_{A}$ ( a − $^{1}$) = 1 . 0459 , Z$_{1}$ ( m$_{b}$, a − $^{1}$) = 0 . 9100 , Z$_{2}$ ( m$_{b}$, a − $^{1}$) = − 0 . 1502 (38)$$\n\n12" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.891220604660118, + "doc_id": "ccc861d58b19204b4a8a64566cf2ebf4f8e8a78b3af4c54ebf7ba77e9601d851", + "edit_distance": 0.09927797833935018, + "f1_score": 0.9662447257383966, + "meteor": 0.9349855742773707, + "precision": 0.9786324786324786, + "pred_md": "on the model (see above). The purely two-dimensional character of the KMC was extended to a 'pseudo three-dimensional' one by making the effective chemical potential dependent on the mean liquid coverage [38]. As the latter is related to a mean film thickness, this corresponds to the introduction of a 'global' thickness-dependent disjoining pressure into the evaporation term without an explicit consideration of a film thickness. The amended model can reproduce bimodal structures that are beyond the scope of the purely two-dimensional model [38, 39]. Fully threedimensional models are also discussed in the literature [76, 77].\n\n## B. Dynamical Density Functional theory\n\nThe limitations of the kinetic Monte Carlo model introduced in the previous Section are related to its character as a two-dimensional lattice gas with only three states: gas, liquid or particle. This implies that (i) no liquid can be transported to a site on the surface already filled with liquid, i.e., diffusion of the liquid can not be incorporated in a sensible way and (ii) one is not able to distinguish between the influence of the short- and the long-range parts of the interactions with the substrate, as all such interactions are absorbed into the effective chemical potential.\n\nHowever, using dynamical density functional theory (DDFT) [78-83] one can develop a model for the processes in the ultrathin postcursor film without these limitations, although here we limit ourselves to developing the theory at the level of the KMC and solely discuss how to extend it to incorporate the influence of the liquid diffusion over the surface. Such a DDFT model describes the coupled dynamics of the density fields of the liquid ρ l and the nanoparticles ρ n . The densities ρ l and ρ n are defined as the probabilities of finding a given lattice site on the surface to be occupied by a film of liquid or by a nanoparticle, respectively. Note that the probability densities correspond to number densities as we use the lattice spacing σ = 1 as our unit of length.\n\nTo develop the DDFT, one must first derive the underlying free energy functional F ρ , ρ [ l n ] , and secondly, devise dynamical equations for both density fields that account for the conserved and the non-conserved aspects of their dynamics, i.e., transport and phase change processes, respectively. For a system governed by the hamiltonian (3), we may construct a mean-field (Bragg-Williams) approximation for the free energy of the system [78, 84] which contains an entropic contribution and contributions from the interactions between the different species (nanoparticles and liquid). The free energy is a semi-grand free energy, since the liquid is treated grand canonically (it is coupled to a reservoir with chemical potential µ ), whereas the nanoparticles are treated in the\n\n14", + "recall": 0.9541666666666667, + "true_md": "on the model (see above). The purely two-dimensional character of the KMC was extended to a ‘pseudo three-dimensional’ one by making the effective chemical potential dependent on the mean liquid coverage [38]. As the latter is related to a mean film thickness, this corresponds to the introduction of a ‘global’ thickness-dependent disjoining pressure into the evaporation term without an explicit consideration of a film thickness. The amended model can reproduce bimodal structures that are beyond the scope of the purely two-dimensional model [38, 39]. Fully three- dimensional models are also discussed in the literature [76, 77].\n\nThe limitations of the kinetic Monte Carlo model introduced in the previous Section are related to its character as a two-dimensional lattice gas with only three states: gas, liquid or particle. This implies that (i) no liquid can be transported to a site on the surface already filled with liquid, i.e., diffusion of the liquid can not be incorporated in a sensible way and (ii) one is not able to distinguish between the influence of the short- and the long-range parts of the interactions with the substrate, as all such interactions are absorbed into the effective chemical potential.\n\nHowever, using dynamical density functional theory (DDFT) [78–83] one can develop a model for the processes in the ultrathin postcursor film without these limitations, although here we limit ourselves to developing the theory at the level of the KMC and solely discuss how to extend it to incorporate the influence of the liquid diffusion over the surface. Such a DDFT model describes the coupled dynamics of the density fields of the liquid ρ$_{l}$ and the nanoparticles ρ$_{n}$ . The densities ρ$_{l}$ and ρ$_{n}$ are defined as the probabilities of finding a given lattice site on the surface to be occupied by a film of liquid or by a nanoparticle, respectively. Note that the probability densities correspond to number densities as we use the lattice spacing σ = 1 as our unit of length.\n\nTo develop the DDFT, one must first derive the underlying free energy functional F [ ρ$_{l}$, ρ$_{n}$ ] , and secondly, devise dynamical equations for both density fields that account for the conserved and the non-conserved aspects of their dynamics, i.e., transport and phase change processes, respectively. For a system governed by the hamiltonian (3), we may construct a mean-field (Bragg-Williams) approximation for the free energy of the system [78, 84] which contains an entropic contribution and contributions from the interactions between the different species (nanoparticles and liquid). The free energy is a semi-grand free energy, since the liquid is treated grand canonically (it is coupled to a reservoir with chemical potential µ ), whereas the nanoparticles are treated in the\n\n14\n\n## B. Dynamical Density Functional theory" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5352270413459423, + "doc_id": "c91654d8edc75c6e26e857a14b07e48562cc06e9d091cc30f6c1ab87746c7959", + "edit_distance": 0.40342679127725856, + "f1_score": 0.936470588235294, + "meteor": 0.6365322028337306, + "precision": 0.961352657004831, + "pred_md": "9\n\nbroken by a combination of Dirichlet BCs and scalar VEV (of the U field) to U (1) e.m. on the y = πR brane.\n\nIn the following of this work, we will study the model defined by the action (8). First of all, we will perform a general analysis of the full 5D theory by the standard technique of the Kaluza-Klein (KK) expansion. Then we will look at the low-energy limit and derive expression for the /epsilon1 parameters; the results will confirm that this is indeed the 5D limit of GD-BESS. Finally, we will make some remarks on the phenomenology of the model in correspondence with two interesting choices for the geometry of the 5 th dimension, that of a flat dimension ( ( b y ) ≡ 1) and that of a slice of AdS 5 ( b y ( ) = e -2 ky ).\n\n## IV. EXPANSION IN MASS EIGENSTATES\n\nSince we wish to keep the metric generic for the moment, a convenient strategy is to expand the gauge fields W a L R M ( ) (and the goldstones π a ) directly in terms of mass eigenstates [65, 66]. So we define:\n\n\n\nThe expansion (13) is written in full generality. A priori , this means that fields with different SU (2) index could be mixed. The index '( j )' labels all the mass eigenstates. This procedure is in fact more general than it is needed; we will see that, with our choice of BCs for the model, we will get three decoupled towers of eigenstates, so that many of the above wave-functions (or constant coefficients in the case of the brane pseudo-scalars) are vanishing. We will require that the wave-functions in eq.(13) form complete sets, and that after substituting the expansion and performing the integration over the extra-dimensional variable y , a diagonal bilinear Lagrangian result, i.e. the fields defined in eq. (13) are the mass eigenstates. These requests lead to an equation of motion plus a set of BCs that the profiles must satisfy. Details on the derivation are given in Appendix A; here we only report the results.", + "recall": 0.9128440366972477, + "true_md": "broken by a combination of Dirichlet BCs and scalar VEV (of the U field) to U (1)$_{e.m.}$ on the y = πR brane.\n\nIn the following of this work, we will study the model defined by the action (8). First of all, we will perform a general analysis of the full 5D theory by the standard technique of the Kaluza-Klein (KK) expansion. Then we will look at the low-energy limit and derive expression for the ϵ parameters; the results will confirm that this is indeed the 5D limit of GD-BESS. Finally, we will make some remarks on the phenomenology of the model in correspondence with two interesting choices for the geometry of the 5 th dimension, that of a flat dimension ( b ( y ) ≡ 1) and that of a slice of AdS$_{5}$ ( b ( y ) = e − 2 $^{ky}$).\n\n9\n\nSince we wish to keep the metric generic for the moment, a convenient strategy is to expand the gauge fields W a L ( R ) M (and the goldstones π $^{a}$) directly in terms of mass eigenstates [65, 66]. So we define:\n\nThe expansion (13) is written in full generality. A priori , this means that fields with different SU (2) index could be mixed. The index “( j )” labels all the mass eigenstates. This procedure is in fact more general than it is needed; we will see that, with our choice of BCs for the model, we will get three decoupled towers of eigenstates, so that many of the above wave-functions (or constant coefficients in the case of the brane pseudo-scalars) are vanishing. We will require that the wave-functions in eq.(13) form complete sets, and that after substituting the expansion and performing the integration over the extra-dimensional variable y , a diagonal bilinear Lagrangian result, i.e. the fields defined in eq. (13) are the mass eigenstates. These requests lead to an equation of motion plus a set of BCs that the profiles must satisfy. Details on the derivation are given in Appendix A; here we only report the results.\n\n## IV. EXPANSION IN MASS EIGENSTATES\n\n$$W a $_{L µ}$( x, y ) = ∞ ∑ j =0 f a $_{L j}$( y ) V ( j ) µ ( x ) , W a L $_{5}$( x, y ) = ∞ ∑ j =0 g a $_{L j}$( y ) G ( j $^{)}$( x ) , W a $_{R µ}$( x, y ) = ∞ ∑ j =0 f a $_{R j}$( y ) V ( j ) µ ( x ) , W a R $_{5}$( x, y ) = ∞ ∑ j =0 g a $_{R j}$( y ) G ( j $^{)}$( x ) , π $^{a}$( x ) = ∞ ∑ j =0 c a j G ( j $^{)}$( x ) . (13)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.806982361859325, + "doc_id": "e6ca80fa7998c9cde2dd8d6414aa4895f6e17032091e62e7eb7be20f729c5329", + "edit_distance": 0.10154905335628227, + "f1_score": 0.886128364389234, + "meteor": 0.9006159419168813, + "precision": 0.8879668049792531, + "pred_md": "- [81] A. J. Archer and M. Rauscher, 'Dynamical density functional theory for interacting brownian particles: Stochastic or deterministic?' J. Phys. A-Math. Gen. 37 , 9325-9333 (2004).\n- [82] A. J. Archer and R. Evans, 'Dynamical density functional theory and its application to spinodal decomposition,' J. Chem. Phys. 121 , 4246-4254 (2004).\n- [83] P. A. Monson, 'Mean field kinetic theory for a lattice gas model of fluids confined in porous materials,' J. Chem. Phys. 128 , 084701 (2008).\n- [84] P. M. Chaikin and T. C. Lubensky, Principles of condensed matter physics , Cambridge University Press (1997).\n- [85] J. S. Langer, 'An introduction to the kinetics of first-order phase transitions,' in C. Godreche, editor, 'Solids far from Equilibrium,' pages 297-363, Cambridge University Press (1992).\n- [86] M. A. Spaid and G. M. Homsy, 'Stability of Newtonian and viscoelastic dynamic contact lines,' Phys. Fluids 8 , 460-478 (1996).\n- [87] U. Thiele and E. Knobloch, 'Front and back instability of a liquid film on a slightly inclined plate,' Phys. Fluids 15 , 892-907 (2003).\n- [88] M. R. E. Warner, R. V. Craster, and O. K. Matar, 'Surface patterning via evaporation of ultrathin films containing nanoparticles,' J. Colloid Interface Sci. 267 , 92-110 (2003).\n- [89] O. K. Matar, R. V. Craster, and K. Sefiane, 'Dynamic spreading of droplets containing nanoparticles,' Phys. Rev. E 76 , 056315 (2007).\n- [90] J. J. Zhou, B. Dupuy, A. L. Bertozzi, and A. E. Hosoi, 'Theory for shock dynamics in particle-laden thin films,' Phys. Rev. Lett. 94 , 117803 (2005).\n- [91] B. P. Cook, A. L. Bertozzi, and A. E. Hosoi, 'Shock solutions for particle-laden thin films,' SIAM J. Appl. Math. 68 , 760-783 (2008).\n- [92] R. V. Craster, O. K. Matar, and K. Sefiane, 'Pinning, retraction, and terracing of evaporating droplets containing nanoparticles,' Langmuir (2009), online available.\n- [93] D. Quemada, 'Rheology of concentrated disperse systems and minimum energy-dissipation principle I. Viscosity-concentration relationship,' Rheol. Acta 16 , 82-94 (1977).\n- [94] D. Quemada and C. Berli, 'Energy of interaction in colloids and its implications in rheological modeling,' Adv. Colloid Interface Sci. 98 , 51-85 (2002).\n- [95] J. J. Stickel and R. L. Powell, 'Fluid mechanics and rheology of dense suspensions,' Annu. Rev. Fluid Mech. 37 , 129-149 (2005).\n- [96] J. K. G. Dhont, An Introduction to Dynamics of Colloids , Elsevier, Amsterdam (1996).\n\n31", + "recall": 0.8842975206611571, + "true_md": "- [81] A. J. Archer and M. Rauscher, “Dynamical density functional theory for interacting brownian parti- cles: Stochastic or deterministic?” J. Phys. A-Math. Gen. 37 , 9325–9333 (2004).\n\n- [82] A. J. Archer and R. Evans, “Dynamical density functional theory and its application to spinodal decomposition,” J. Chem. Phys. 121 , 4246–4254 (2004).\n\n- [83] P. A. Monson, “Mean field kinetic theory for a lattice gas model of fluids confined in porous materi- als,” J. Chem. Phys. 128 , 084701 (2008).\n\n- [84] P. M. Chaikin and T. C. Lubensky, Principles of condensed matter physics , Cambridge University Press (1997).\n\n- [85] J. S. Langer, “An introduction to the kinetics of first-order phase transitions,” in C. Godreche, editor, “Solids far from Equilibrium,” pages 297–363, Cambridge University Press (1992).\n\n- [86] M. A. Spaid and G. M. Homsy, “Stability of Newtonian and viscoelastic dynamic contact lines,” Phys. Fluids 8 , 460–478 (1996).\n\n- [87] U. Thiele and E. Knobloch, “Front and back instability of a liquid film on a slightly inclined plate,” Phys. Fluids 15 , 892–907 (2003).\n\n- [88] M. R. E. Warner, R. V. Craster, and O. K. Matar, “Surface patterning via evaporation of ultrathin films containing nanoparticles,” J. Colloid Interface Sci. 267 , 92–110 (2003).\n\n- [89] O. K. Matar, R. V. Craster, and K. Sefiane, “Dynamic spreading of droplets containing nanoparticles,” Phys. Rev. E 76 , 056315 (2007).\n\n- [90] J. J. Zhou, B. Dupuy, A. L. Bertozzi, and A. E. Hosoi, “Theory for shock dynamics in particle-laden thin films,” Phys. Rev. Lett. 94 , 117803 (2005).\n\n- [91] B. P. Cook, A. L. Bertozzi, and A. E. Hosoi, “Shock solutions for particle-laden thin films,” SIAM J. Appl. Math. 68 , 760–783 (2008).\n\n- [92] R. V. Craster, O. K. Matar, and K. Sefiane, “Pinning, retraction, and terracing of evaporating droplets containing nanoparticles,” Langmuir (2009), online available.\n\n- [93] D. Quemada, “Rheology of concentrated disperse systems and minimum energy-dissipation principle I. Viscosity-concentration relationship,” Rheol. Acta 16 , 82–94 (1977).\n\n- [94] D. Quemada and C. Berli, “Energy of interaction in colloids and its implications in rheological modeling,” Adv. Colloid Interface Sci. 98 , 51–85 (2002).\n\n- [95] J. J. Stickel and R. L. Powell, “Fluid mechanics and rheology of dense suspensions,” Annu. Rev. Fluid Mech. 37 , 129–149 (2005).\n\n- [96] J. K. G. Dhont, An Introduction to Dynamics of Colloids , Elsevier, Amsterdam (1996).\n\n31" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5120549847135616, + "doc_id": "18174638356d03163b8fcbeb17021e59864035dd78a7b5a881f2e70c0820bad9", + "edit_distance": 0.3952380952380952, + "f1_score": 0.9433962264150942, + "meteor": 0.6823632312076147, + "precision": 0.974025974025974, + "pred_md": "Bi 2 -δ Ca Se .NO , tuned to the topological transport regime. δ 3 2 (f) Angle-integrated intensity near (red) shows a linear trend. The inset shows the expected density of states (DOS) of a helical Dirac cone, which is 1/2 that of a graphene Dirac cone due to its single spin degeneracy. (g) Schematic of the chiral Dirac fermion ground state of graphene, which exhibits spin-degenerate Dirac cones that intersect away from the Kramers' points. (h) Schematic of the helical Dirac fermion ground state of Bi 2 -δ Ca Se .NO , which exhibits a spin-polarized Dirac cone that intersects at a Kramers' δ 3 2 point and guarantees a ν 0 = 1 topological quantum number for the ground state.\n\n15", + "recall": 0.9146341463414634, + "true_md": "Bi$_{2}$$\\_{−}$$_{δ}$Ca$_{δ}$Se$_{3}$.NO$_{2}$, tuned to the topological transport regime. (f) Angle-integrated intensity near (red) shows a linear trend. The inset shows the expected density of states (DOS) of a helical Dirac cone, which is 1/2 that of a graphene Dirac cone due to its single spin degeneracy. (g) Schematic of the chiral Dirac fermion ground state of graphene, which exhibits spin-degenerate Dirac cones that intersect away from the Kramers’ points. (h) Schematic of the helical Dirac fermion ground state of Bi$_{2}$$\\_{−}$$_{δ}$Ca$_{δ}$Se$_{3}$.NO$_{2}$, which exhibits a spin-polarized Dirac cone that intersects at a Kramers’ point and guarantees a ν$_{0}$ = 1 topological quantum number for the ground state.\n\n15" + }, + { + "bleu": 7.601217146947583e-05, + "doc_id": "7a6beec192ea3aa454481790820f3e60c5313b3c27ea58933847b1c7c6514621", + "edit_distance": 0.9536878216123499, + "f1_score": 0.4565217391304348, + "meteor": 0.04802448030054972, + "precision": 0.7777777777777778, + "pred_md": "so that\n\n\n\nFinally, let us see the diagrams B λ ν ' ( p, q, k ) and B ν λ ' ( p, k, q ), given by\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n21", + "recall": 0.3230769230769231, + "true_md": "so that\n\nFinally, let us see the diagrams B λ ν ′ ( p, q, k ) and B ν λ ′ ( p, k, q ), given by\n\n21\n\n$$PP[Π νλ $_{b,c,d}$( q ) − Π λν $_{b,c,d}$( k )] = 5 e 2 24 π 2 1 ϵ [( k $^{2}$g λν − k $^{λ}$k$^{ν}$) − ( q $^{2}$g νλ − q $^{ν}$q$^{λ}$)] . (124)$$\n\n$$= 2 e sin( p ∧ q ) B λ a ν ′ ( p, q, k ) (125) = i $^{2}$( − i )(2 e ) 3 ∫ d $^{4}$l (2 π ) 4 ( − l )$_{ν}$ ′ ( − p − q − l ) λ l $^{2}$( p + l ) $^{2}$( p + q + l ) 2 × sin( l ∧ p ) sin( − l ∧ p − l ∧ q ) sin( − l ∧ q − p ∧ q ) ,$$\n\n$$= 2 e sin( p ∧ q ) B λ b ν ′ ( p, q, k ) (126) = i ( − i ) $^{2}$(2 e ) 3 ∫ d $^{4}$l (2 π ) 4 ( p + l )$_{α}$ γ αλ ν ′ ( − l, − p − q, p + q + l ) l $^{2}$( p + l ) $^{2}$( p + q + l ) 2 × sin( l ∧ p ) sin( − l ∧ p − l ∧ q ) sin( l ∧ q + p ∧ q ) ,$$\n\n$$= 2 e sin( p ∧ q ) B ν a λ ′ ( p, k, q ) (127) = i $^{2}$( − i )(2 e ) 3 ∫ d $^{4}$l (2 π ) 4 ( p + l )$_{λ}$ ′ ( p + q + l ) ν l $^{2}$( p + l ) $^{2}$( p + q + l ) 2 × sin( l ∧ p ) sin( l ∧ p + l ∧ q ) sin( l ∧ q + p ∧ q ) , and$$\n\n$$= 2 e sin( p ∧ q ) B ν b λ ′ ( p, q, k ) (128)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4251932118742104, + "doc_id": "3346cabda3577d8309e9eeb1b13be1bc20b8af5efbc90a838b280484bf5b2bc1", + "edit_distance": 0.48354792560801146, + "f1_score": 0.9384615384615383, + "meteor": 0.5815740396493628, + "precision": 0.9631578947368421, + "pred_md": "tions. This leads to a small amount of chiral symmetry breaking which can be parameterized in terms of an additive shift to the bare domain-wall quark mass. At the value L s = 16 used in our simulations we obtain a residual quark mass of am res = 0 00315(2) [34]. . Because mixing between heavy-light four-fermion operators of different chiralities is proportional to the value of am res , this indicates that the size of errors from mixing with wrong-chirality operators is negligible.\n\n## B. Gluon action\n\nWe use the Iwasaki gauge action for the gluons [39]:\n\n\n\nwhere β ≡ 6 /g 2 0 and g 0 is the bare lattice coupling. U P is the path-ordered product of gauge links around the 1 × 1 plaquette P and U R is the path-ordered product of gauge links around the 1 × 2 rectangle R . The constant c 1 is set to -0 331 in the Iwasaki action . and we use β = 2 13 in our simulations. . As was shown in Refs. [40, 41] for the quenched approximation, the use of the Iwasaki action in combination with domain-wall valence quarks leads to improved chiral symmetry and a smaller residual quark mass than for the Wilson gauge action [42]. In the case of N f = 2 + 1 dynamical domain-wall simulations, the use of the Iwasaki action also allows frequent tunneling between topological sectors [43].\n\n## C. Heavy-quark action\n\nWe use an improved static action for the b -quarks in the 2-point and 3-point correlation functions needed to compute the decay constants and matrix elements. We build upon the original lattice formulation of the static effective action that was constructed by Eichten and Hill [44]:\n\n\n\nwhere h x ( ) is the static quark field at site x U , 0 ( x ) is the gauge link in the temporal direction and 0 denotes the unit vector along the temporal direction. ̂ The projectors P ± = 1 2 (1 ± γ 0 ) select the parity even and odd components of h x ( ), which we denote by h (+) ( x ) and h ( -) ( x ).\n\n8", + "recall": 0.915, + "true_md": "tions. This leads to a small amount of chiral symmetry breaking which can be parameterized in terms of an additive shift to the bare domain-wall quark mass. At the value L$_{s}$ = 16 used in our simulations we obtain a residual quark mass of am$_{res}$ = 0 . 00315(2) [34]. Because mixing between heavy-light four-fermion operators of different chiralities is proportional to the value of am$_{res}$ , this indicates that the size of errors from mixing with wrong-chirality operators is negligible.\n\nWe use the Iwasaki gauge action for the gluons [39]:\n\nwhere β ≡ 6 /g 2 0 and g$_{0}$ is the bare lattice coupling. U$_{P}$ is the path-ordered product of gauge links around the 1 × 1 plaquette P and U$_{R}$ is the path-ordered product of gauge links around the 1 × 2 rectangle R . The constant c$_{1}$ is set to − 0 . 331 in the Iwasaki action and we use β = 2 . 13 in our simulations. As was shown in Refs. [40, 41] for the quenched approximation, the use of the Iwasaki action in combination with domain-wall valence quarks leads to improved chiral symmetry and a smaller residual quark mass than for the Wilson gauge action [42]. In the case of N$_{f}$ = 2 + 1 dynamical domain-wall simulations, the use of the Iwasaki action also allows frequent tunneling between topological sectors [43].\n\nWe use an improved static action for the b -quarks in the 2-point and 3-point correlation functions needed to compute the decay constants and matrix elements. We build upon the original lattice formulation of the static effective action that was constructed by Eichten and Hill [44]:\n\nwhere h ( x ) is the static quark field at site x , U$_{0}$ ( x ) is the gauge link in the temporal direction and ̂ 0 denotes the unit vector along the temporal direction. The projectors P$_{±}$ = 1 $_{2}$(1 ± γ$_{0}$ ) select the parity even and odd components of h ( x ), which we denote by h $^{(+)}$( x ) and h ( − $^{)}$( x ).\n\n8\n\n$$S$_{static}$ = a 3 ∑ x,y ( h ( x )[ δ$_{x,y}$ − U † $_{0}$( y ) δ$_{x}$$_{−}$$_{̂}$ 0 $_{,y}$] P$_{+}$h ( y ) − h ( x )[ δ$_{x,y}$ − U$_{0}$ ( x ) δ$_{x}$$_{+}$$_{̂}$ 0 $_{,y}$] P$_{−}$h ( y ) ) , (12)$$\n\n$$S$_{gauge}$ = − β 3 ( (1 − 8 c$_{1}$ ) ∑ P Re Tr [ U$_{P}$ ] + c$_{1}$ ∑ R ReTr[ U$_{R}$ ] ) , (11)$$\n\n## B. Gluon action\n\n## C. Heavy-quark action" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.49763808152303135, + "doc_id": "f43cb9691a10e1c70cab7aec9fad741701468679d4cab0bd41d1b4d5ca5675e4", + "edit_distance": 0.4957983193277311, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.8936098465688753, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "FIG. 1: Top : The EP at time t < 0 , the right boundary is closed. Bottom : The EP at time t > 0 , the right boundary is transparent allowing the wave function to escape.\n\nFIG. 1: Top : The EP at time t < 0 , the right boundary is closed. Bottom : The EP at time t > 0 , the right boundary is transparent allowing the wave function to escape.\n\nFIG. 2: Real part of the wave function obtained analytically.\n\nFIG. 2: Real part of the wave function obtained analytically.\n\n17", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "FIG. 1: Top : The EP at time t < 0 , the right boundary is closed. Bottom : The EP at time t > 0 , the right boundary is transparent allowing the wave function to escape.\n\nFIG. 2: Real part of the wave function obtained analytically.\n\n17" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9297510231694556, + "doc_id": "1b166859d3fae3c18f92b8a18e82db74dc559cfa48cb4fd01226add8ac58689b", + "edit_distance": 0.13807531380753138, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9955363290354747, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "arXiv:1002.0896v2 [nucl-ex] 17 Feb 2010\n\n## Isoscalar giant resonances in the Sn nuclei and implications for the asymmetry term in the nuclear-matter incompressibility\n\nT. Li, U. Garg, Y. Liu, R. Marks, B.K. Nayak, and P. V. Madhusudhana Rao Physics Department, University of Notre Dame, Notre Dame, IN 46556, USA\n\nM. Fujiwara, H. Hashimoto, K. Nakanishi, S. Okumura, and M. Yosoi Research Center for Nuclear Physics, Osaka University, Mihogaoka Ibaraki 10-1 Osaka, 567-0047 Japan\n\nM. Ichikawa, M. Itoh, R. Matsuo, and T. Terazono Cyclotron and Radioisotope Center, Tohoku University, Sendai 980-8578, Japan\n\n## M. Uchida\n\nTokyo Institute of Technology, 2-12-1 O-Okayama, Tokyo 152-8550, Japan\n\nY. Iwao, T. Kawabata, T. Murakami, H. Sakaguchi,\n\nS. Terashima, Y. Yasuda, and J. Zenihiro\n\nDepartment of Physics, Kyoto University, Kyoto 606-8502, Japan\n\n## H. Akimune\n\nDepartment of Physics, Konan University, Hyogo, 658-8501 Japan\n\n## K. Kawase\n\nAdvanced Photon Research Center, Japan Atomic Energy Agency, Kizugawa, Kyoto 619-0215, Japan\n\n## M. N. Harakeh\n\nKernfysisch Versneller Instituut, University of Groningen, 9747 AA Groningen, The Netherlands and GANIL, CEA/DSM - CNRS/IN2P3, F-14076 Caen, France (Dated: October 25, 2018)\n\n1", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "# Isoscalar giant resonances in the Sn nuclei and implications for the asymmetry term in the nuclear-matter incompressibility\n\nT. Li, U. Garg, Y. Liu, R. Marks, B.K. Nayak, and P. V. Madhusudhana Rao\n\nPhysics Department, University of Notre Dame, Notre Dame, IN 46556, USA\n\nM. Fujiwara, H. Hashimoto, K. Nakanishi, S. Okumura, and M. Yosoi\n\nResearch Center for Nuclear Physics, Osaka University, Mihogaoka Ibaraki 10-1 Osaka, 567-0047 Japan\n\nM. Ichikawa, M. Itoh, R. Matsuo, and T. Terazono\n\nCyclotron and Radioisotope Center, Tohoku University, Sendai 980-8578, Japan\n\nM. Uchida\n\nTokyo Institute of Technology, 2-12-1 O-Okayama, Tokyo 152-8550, Japan\n\nY. Iwao, T. Kawabata, T. Murakami, H. Sakaguchi,\n\nS. Terashima, Y. Yasuda, and J. Zenihiro\n\nDepartment of Physics, Kyoto University, Kyoto 606-8502, Japan\n\nH. Akimune\n\nDepartment of Physics, Konan University, Hyogo, 658-8501 Japan\n\nK. Kawase\n\nAdvanced Photon Research Center, Japan Atomic Energy Agency, Kizugawa, Kyoto 619-0215, Japan\n\nM. N. Harakeh\n\n(Dated: October 25, 2018)\n\nKernfysisch Versneller Instituut, University of Groningen, 9747 AA Groningen, The Netherlands and GANIL, CEA/DSM - CNRS/IN2P3, F-14076 Caen, France\n\n1\n\narXiv:1002.0896v2 [nucl-ex] 17 Feb 2010" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8455687498101719, + "doc_id": "7b2bc71eda5d43d93d940662e64f901d9cfe01a73690d80725113adc366bf63c", + "edit_distance": 0.10570824524312897, + "f1_score": 0.9327548806941433, + "meteor": 0.905348369338462, + "precision": 0.9555555555555556, + "pred_md": "Helical Dirac fermions - charge carriers that behave as massless relativistic particles with a quantum magnetic moment that is locked to its direction of motion - are proposed to be the key to realizing fundamentally new phenomena in condensed matter physics [1, 2]. Prominent examples include the anomalous quantization of magneto-electric coupling [3-6], half-fermion states that are their own anti-particle [7, 8], and charge fractionalization in a Bose-Einstein condensate [9], all of which are not possible with conventional Dirac fermions of the graphene variety [10]. Helical Dirac fermions are challenging to find, and so far remain undiscovered, because they are forbidden to exist in ordinary Dirac materials such as graphene [10] or bismuth [11], and because the necessary spin-sensitive measurements are lacking. It has recently been proposed that helical Dirac fermions may exist at the edges of certain types of topologically ordered insulators [3, 4, 12], and that their peculiar properties may be accessed provided the insulator is tuned into a topological transport regime [3-9]. However, helical Dirac fermions have not been observed in existing topological insulators [13-18] to date because conventional electrical gating based tuning techniques that work for graphene [10, 19] cannot be applied and the necessary spin-resolved photoelectron detections do not exist. Here we report the first realization of a tunable topological insulator in a bismuth based class by combining spin- and momentum-resolved spectroscopies, bulk charge compensation and surface control. Our results reveal a spin-momentum locked Dirac cone that is nearly 100% spin-polarized, which exhibits a tunable topological fermion density in the vicinity of the Kramers' point and can be driven to the long-sought topological transport regime. The observed topological nodal Dirac ground state is found to be protected even up to room temperature (300 K). Our results on Bi 2 -δ Ca Se .NO δ 3 2 pave the way for future transport based studies of topological insulators, and possible room temperature applications of protected spin-polarized edge channels in microelectronics technology.\n\nUnlike conventional Dirac fermions as in graphene, helical Dirac fermions possess a net spin and are guaranteed to be conducting because of time-reversal symmetry [3-5], allowing the unique possibility to carry spin currents without heat dissipation. However, the most important difference lies in the topological properties of helical Dirac fermion systems [3-\n\n2", + "recall": 0.9110169491525424, + "true_md": "Helical Dirac fermions - charge carriers that behave as massless relativistic particles with a quantum magnetic moment that is locked to its direction of motion - are proposed to be the key to realizing fundamentally new phenomena in condensed matter physics [1, 2]. Prominent examples include the anoma- lous quantization of magneto-electric coupling [3–6], half-fermion states that are their own anti-particle [7, 8], and charge fractionalization in a Bose-Einstein condensate [9], all of which are not possible with conventional Dirac fermions of the graphene variety [10]. Helical Dirac fermions are challenging to find, and so far remain undiscovered, because they are forbidden to exist in ordinary Dirac materials such as graphene [10] or bismuth [11], and because the nec- essary spin-sensitive measurements are lacking. It has recently been proposed that helical Dirac fermions may exist at the edges of certain types of topo- logically ordered insulators [3, 4, 12], and that their peculiar properties may be accessed provided the insulator is tuned into a topological transport regime [3–9]. However, helical Dirac fermions have not been observed in existing topo- logical insulators [13–18] to date because conventional electrical gating based tuning techniques that work for graphene [10, 19] cannot be applied and the necessary spin-resolved photoelectron detections do not exist. Here we report the first realization of a tunable topological insulator in a bismuth based class by combining spin- and momentum-resolved spectroscopies, bulk charge compen- sation and surface control. Our results reveal a spin-momentum locked Dirac cone that is nearly 100% spin-polarized, which exhibits a tunable topological fermion density in the vicinity of the Kramers’ point and can be driven to the long-sought topological transport regime. The observed topological nodal Dirac ground state is found to be protected even up to room temperature (300 K). Our results on Bi$_{2}$$\\_{−}$$_{δ}$Ca$_{δ}$Se$_{3}$.NO$_{2}$ pave the way for future transport based studies of topological insulators, and possible room temperature applications of protected spin-polarized edge channels in microelectronics technology.\n\nUnlike conventional Dirac fermions as in graphene, helical Dirac fermions possess a net spin and are guaranteed to be conducting because of time-reversal symmetry [3–5], allowing the unique possibility to carry spin currents without heat dissipation. However, the most important difference lies in the topological properties of helical Dirac fermion systems [3–\n\n2" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.353363354250112, + "doc_id": "93e87a980fc4b29b8ed3dd4ded0a795f322537d7e6c796b817dbb40690fd7f31", + "edit_distance": 0.6241758241758242, + "f1_score": 0.8333333333333333, + "meteor": 0.8011042974762407, + "precision": 0.8041958041958042, + "pred_md": "(\n\nc\n\n)\n\n0\n\n0\n\n10\n\n20\n\n30\n\n65\n\nT\n\n(\n\n·\n\nC)\n\nT\n\n(\n\n·\n\nC)\n\nT\n\n(\n\n·\n\nC)\n\n50\n\nFIG. 2: (Color) Dynamic simulations of a microscopic model accommodating U, M, B and S forms of DNA [11]. Here we show microscopic configurations (vertical axis) as a function of time (horizontal axis) from an illustrative simulation of a 300-basepair fragment of λ -DNA at 21 C and salt concentration 150 · mM, extended at 1000 nm/s. The molecule possesses one free end, permitting unpeeling. White indicates B-DNA, red indicates unhybridized DNA (unpeeled or molten), and blue indicates S-DNA. The spatial scale indicates molecular length. The maximum force attained is 90 pN (central dotted line). At forces in excess of about 50 pN, S-form DNA is themodynamically unstable with respect to unpeeled DNA. However, unpeeling takes time to proliferate, and S-DNA is seen to be transiently stable even near forces of about 90 pN. The step-by-step processivity of unpeeling confers upon overstretching an anomalous kinetics that, we argue, rationalizes several nontrivial experimental observations [16-18].\n\nFIG. 2: (Color) Dynamic simulations of a microscopic model accommodating U, M, B and S forms of DNA [11]. Here we show microscopic configurations (vertical axis) as a function of time (horizontal axis) from an illustrative simulation of a 300-basepair fragment of λ -DNA at 21 C and salt concentration 150 · mM, extended at 1000 nm/s. The molecule possesses one free end, permitting unpeeling. White indicates B-DNA, red indicates unhybridized DNA (unpeeled or molten), and blue indicates S-DNA. The spatial scale indicates molecular length. The maximum force attained is 90 pN (central dotted line). At forces in excess of about 50 pN, S-form DNA is themodynamically unstable with respect to unpeeled DNA. However, unpeeling takes time to proliferate, and S-DNA is seen to be transiently stable even near forces of about 90 pN. The step-by-step processivity of unpeeling confers upon overstretching an anomalous kinetics that, we argue, rationalizes several nontrivial experimental observations [16-18].\n\n9\n\nS-DNA (S):\n\nS\n\nH\n\n=\n\n-\n\n0\n\nλ\n\n0\n\n/\n\n/epsilon1\n\n/\n\nAT CG AT CG\n\n10\n\n20\n\n30\n\n40\n\n-\n\nw\n\ns\n\n10\n\n20\n\n30\n\n40\n\n(\n\nf\n\n)\n\nM-S:\n\nM S\n\nH\n\n-\n\n0\n\n=\n\n1\n\n2\n\n/epsilon1\n\nBM\n\n10\n\n20\n\n30\n\n40", + "recall": 0.8646616541353384, + "true_md": "FIG. 2: (Color) Dynamic simulations of a microscop ic model accommodating U, M, B and S forms of DNA [11]. Here we show microscopic configurations (v ertical axis) as a function of time (horizontal axis) from an illustrativ e simulation of a 300-basepair fragmen t of λ -DNA at 21 ◦ C and salt concentration 150 mM, extended at 1000 nm/s. The molecule possesses one free end, permitting unpeeling. White indicates B-DNA, red indicates unhybridized DNA (unpeeled or molten), and blue indicates S-DNA. The spatial scale indicates molecular length. The maximum force attained is 90 pN (central dotted line). At forces in excess of ab out 50 pN, S-form DNA is themo dynamically unstable with respect to unpeeled DNA. However, unp eeling takes time to proliferate, and S-DNA is seen to be transiently stable even near forces of about 90 pN. The step-by-step processivity of unp eeling confers upon overstretc hing an anomalous kinetics that, we argue, rationalizes several nontrivial experimental observations [16–18].\n\n9" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.981664506849813, + "doc_id": "60319de44797d0bf78cd0d6fe63d2fdcfccf0f24509a9660d7d37b897b3b9c2d", + "edit_distance": 0.12300319488817892, + "f1_score": 0.9788359788359788, + "meteor": 0.8010481869351097, + "precision": 0.9736842105263158, + "pred_md": "- [28] D. N. Aguilera, D. Blaschke, and H. Grigorian, Nucl. Phys. A757 , 527 (2005).\n- [29] H. Grigorian, D. Blaschke, and D. N. Aguilera, Phys. Rev. C 69 , 065802 (2004).\n- [30] M. Baldo, M. Buballa, F. Burgio, F. Neumann, M. Oertel, and H. Schulze, Phys. Lett. B 562 , 153 (2003).\n- [31] M. Buballa, Phys. Rep. 407 , 205 (2005).\n- [32] T. Klahn, D. Blaschke, F. Sandin, C. Fuchs, A. Faessler , H. Grigorian, G. Ropke, and J. Trmper, u Phys. Lett. B 654 , 170 (2007).\n- [33] G. Pagliara and J. Scha ff ner-Bielich, Phy. Rev. D 77 , 063004 (2008).\n- [34] A. Drago, G. Pagliara, and J. Scha ff ner-Bielich, J. Phys. G 35 , 014052 (2008).\n- [35] N. D. Ippolito, M. Nardulli, and M. Ruggieri, J. Heigh Energy Phys. 04 , 036 (2007).\n- [36] N. D. Ippolito, M. Ruggieri, D. H. Rischke, A. Sedrakian, and F. Weber, Phys. Rev. D 77 , 023004 (2008).\n- [37] M. Alford, M. Braby, M. Paris, and S. Reddy, Astrophys. J. 629 , 969 (2005).\n- [38] S. Banik, M. Hanauske, and D. Bandyopadhyay, J. Phys. G 31 , S841 (2005).\n- [39] A. Bhattacharyya, S. K. Ghosh, M. Hanauske, and S. Raha, Phys. Rev. C 71 , 048801 (2005).\n- [40] F. Yang and H. Shen, Phys. Rev. C 77 , 025801 (2008).\n- [41] P. Rehberg, S. P. Klevansky, and J. Hfner, Phys. Rev. C u 53 , 410 (1996).\n- [42] N. Stergioulas and J. L. Friedman, Astrophys. J. 444 , 306 (1995).\n- [43] S. E. Thorsett and D. Chakrabarty, Astrophys. J 512 , 288 (1999).\n- [44] J. W. T. Hessels, S. M. Ransom, I. H. Stairs, P. C. C. Freire, V . M. Kaspi, and F. Camilo, Science 311 , 1901 (2006).\n- [45] B. K. Agrawal and S. K. Dhiman, Phys. Rev. D 79 , 103006 (2009).\n- [46] A. Akmal, V. Pandharipande, and D. Ravenhall, Phys. Rev. C 58 , 1804 (1998).\n- [47] A. Douchin and P. Haensel, Astron. Astrophys. 380 , 151 (2001).\n- [48] S. K. Dhiman, R. Kumar, and B. K. Agrawal, Phys. Rev. C 76 , 045801 (2007).\n- [49] K. Sumiyoshi, H. Kuwabara, and H. Toki, Nucl. Phys. A581 , 725 (1995).\n- [50] G. A. Lalazissis, J. Konig, and P. Ring, Phys. Rev. C 55 , 540 (1997).\n\n11", + "recall": 0.9840425531914894, + "true_md": "- [28] D. N. Aguilera, D. Blaschke, and H. Grigorian, Nucl. Phys. A757 , 527 (2005).\n\n- [29] H. Grigorian, D. Blaschke, and D. N. Aguilera, Phys. Rev. C 69 , 065802 (2004).\n\n- [31] M. Buballa, Phys. Rep. 407 , 205 (2005).\n\n- [32] T. Kl¨ahn, D. Blaschke, F. Sandin, C. Fuchs, A. Faessler, H. Grigorian, G. Ropke, and J. Tr¨umper, Phys. Lett. B 654 , 170 (2007).\n\n- [33] G. Pagliara and J. Scha ff ner-Bielich, Phy. Rev. D 77 , 063004 (2008).\n\n- [34] A. Drago, G. Pagliara, and J. Scha ff ner-Bielich, J. Phys. G 35 , 014052 (2008).\n\n- [35] N. D. Ippolito, M. Nardulli, and M. Ruggieri, J. Heigh Energy Phys. 04 , 036 (2007).\n\n- [36] N. D. Ippolito, M. Ruggieri, D. H. Rischke, A. Sedrakian, and F. Weber, Phys. Rev. D 77 , 023004 (2008).\n\n- [37] M. Alford, M. Braby, M. Paris, and S. Reddy, Astrophys. J. 629 , 969 (2005).\n\n- [38] S. Banik, M. Hanauske, and D. Bandyopadhyay, J. Phys. G 31 , S841 (2005).\n\n- [39] A. Bhattacharyya, S. K. Ghosh, M. Hanauske, and S. Raha, Phys. Rev. C 71 , 048801 (2005).\n\n- [40] F. Yang and H. Shen, Phys. Rev. C 77 , 025801 (2008).\n\n- [41] P. Rehberg, S. P. Klevansky, and J. H¨ufner, Phys. Rev. C 53 , 410 (1996).\n\n- [42] N. Stergioulas and J. L. Friedman, Astrophys. J. 444 , 306 (1995).\n\n- [43] S. E. Thorsett and D. Chakrabarty, Astrophys. J 512 , 288 (1999).\n\n- [44] J. W. T. Hessels, S. M. Ransom, I. H. Stairs, P. C. C. Freire, V. M. Kaspi, and F. Camilo, Science 311 , 1901 (2006).\n\n- [45] B. K. Agrawal and S. K. Dhiman, Phys. Rev. D 79 , 103006 (2009).\n\n- [46] A. Akmal, V. Pandharipande, and D. Ravenhall, Phys. Rev. C 58 , 1804 (1998).\n\n- [47] A. Douchin and P. Haensel, Astron. Astrophys. 380 , 151 (2001).\n\n- [48] S. K. Dhiman, R. Kumar, and B. K. Agrawal, Phys. Rev. C 76 , 045801 (2007).\n\n- [49] K. Sumiyoshi, H. Kuwabara, and H. Toki, Nucl. Phys. A581 , 725 (1995).\n\n- [50] G. A. Lalazissis, J. Konig, and P. Ring, Phys. Rev. C 55 , 540 (1997).\n\n11\n\n- [30] M. Baldo, M. Buballa, F. Burgio, F. Neumann, M. Oertel, and H. Schulze, Phys. Lett. B 562 , 153 (2003)." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9849166592788621, + "doc_id": "2e9c8d6370200e9dd39320308eb647324dfda111df3bf7b10c5302f1099f754e", + "edit_distance": 0.009689922480620155, + "f1_score": 0.9872881355932203, + "meteor": 0.992439933284398, + "precision": 0.9872881355932204, + "pred_md": "5\n\ntheory in these approximations as a proxy for the full dual (quantum) geometry. Naturally, one can argue that this is the same problem of comparing apples to oranges and therefore the results are of limited value. Although this is technically true, a toy model that performs this reorganization of degrees of freedom into some type of geometry is extremely valuable because some of the conclusions might be universal enough that they apply even in the general case. A case in point is the usage of N = 4 SYM at finite temperature as a proxy for finite temperature QCD, and the use of the gravity dual to SYM to make predictions about the viscosity of the quark gluon plasma [28].\n\nContrary to other approaches of quantum gravity that attempt to build a spacetime from nothing: like those growing spacetime from a point in the no-boundary proposal for the wave function of the universe [29], or the causal set approach to quantum gravity [30]; in this setup there is no unique preferred wave function, and different wave functions correspond to different geometries. Some wave functions might not correspond to a single geometry either: superposition of geometries is possible. These states would be like a Schrdinger cat o state: a simple measurement would destroy the superposition. However, when we can barely understand a single geometry at this stage of the research program, studying this feature of superpositions of geometry is not desirable. The setup we are describing is similar to string states as solutions of the string equations of motion in a background spacetime: for each vertex operator of dimension (1 , 1) (this is how we describe quantum states via the operatorstate correspondence) one can associate a different motion to the string in the semiclassical setup, and that motion defines a geometric trajectory for the string. Neither of these motions is preferred a priori, except as described by some preparation of an experiment. What we are studying here is the same: how different wave functions in our quenched minisuperspace description correspond to different geometries. Our ultimate goal is to establish a tractable dictionary between geometries and wave functions in this very limited context and to study how the fluctuations inherent to the wave function give fluctuations of geometric data. Our aim is not to be exhaustive, but to instead develop some intuition about emergent geometry with some simple wave functions that are easy to evaluate numerically.\n\nIt has also been found that by changing the wave function, the geometry of the field theory degrees of freedom admits different topologies in the thermodynamic limit. Numerically this has been observed in [6]. This is also what is expected from the classification of half BPS states in the dual supergravity theory [31], where topology changing transitions are allowed.", + "recall": 0.9872881355932204, + "true_md": "5\n\ntheory in these approximations as a proxy for the full dual (quantum) geometry. Naturally, one can argue that this is the same problem of comparing apples to oranges and therefore the results are of limited value. Although this is technically true, a toy model that performs this reorganization of degrees of freedom into some type of geometry is extremely valuable because some of the conclusions might be universal enough that they apply even in the general case. A case in point is the usage of N = 4 SYM at finite temperature as a proxy for finite temperature QCD, and the use of the gravity dual to SYM to make predictions about the viscosity of the quark gluon plasma [28].\n\nContrary to other approaches of quantum gravity that attempt to build a spacetime from nothing: like those growing spacetime from a point in the no-boundary proposal for the wave function of the universe [29], or the causal set approach to quantum gravity [30]; in this setup there is no unique preferred wave function, and different wave functions correspond to different geometries. Some wave functions might not correspond to a single geometry either: superposition of geometries is possible. These states would be like a Schr¨ odinger cat state: a simple measurement would destroy the superposition. However, when we can barely understand a single geometry at this stage of the research program, studying this feature of superpositions of geometry is not desirable. The setup we are describing is similar to string states as solutions of the string equations of motion in a background spacetime: for each vertex operator of dimension (1 , 1) (this is how we describe quantum states via the operator- state correspondence) one can associate a different motion to the string in the semiclassical setup, and that motion defines a geometric trajectory for the string. Neither of these motions is preferred a priori, except as described by some preparation of an experiment. What we are studying here is the same: how different wave functions in our quenched minisuperspace description correspond to different geometries. Our ultimate goal is to establish a tractable dictionary between geometries and wave functions in this very limited context and to study how the fluctuations inherent to the wave function give fluctuations of geometric data. Our aim is not to be exhaustive, but to instead develop some intuition about emergent geometry with some simple wave functions that are easy to evaluate numerically.\n\nIt has also been found that by changing the wave function, the geometry of the field theory degrees of freedom admits different topologies in the thermodynamic limit. Numerically this has been observed in [6]. This is also what is expected from the classification of half BPS states in the dual supergravity theory [31], where topology changing transitions are allowed." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.23535938780804522, + "doc_id": "ee9bb2f57177656c36d7a17016acbdca64d6c470662f9d8a5d3180b7cfd13513", + "edit_distance": 0.9032258064516129, + "f1_score": 0.901098901098901, + "meteor": 0.3536356171261874, + "precision": 0.9647058823529412, + "pred_md": "Furthermore, eq. (A5b) splits into three independent conditions:\n\n\n\n\n\n∣ which are identically satisfied as soon as the f a L,Rn obey the BCs (17), (18), (24), (25), (30) and (31). Notice that eq. (15), (23), (29) together with the above mentioned BCs guarantee the orthogonality of the wave-functions that we assumed in eq. (A13), so we have a selfconsistent solution of eqs. (A5a) and (A5b). To complete the diagonalization and finally get an expanded bilinear Lagrangian, we just need to solve the last two equations in the set (A5). This can be obtained by imposing the conditions (19), (26) and (32) respectively on the scalar profiles of the three sectors.\n\n- [1] S. Weinberg, Phys. Rev. D13 , 974 (1976).\n- [2] L. Susskind, Phys. Rev. D20 , 2619 (1979).\n- [3] S. Weinberg, Phys. Rev. D19 , 1277 (1979).\n- [4] N. Arkani-Hamed, S. Dimopoulos and G. R. Dvali, Phys. Lett. B429 , 263 (1998), [hep-ph/9803315].\n- [5] L. Randall and R. Sundrum, Phys. Rev. Lett. 83 , 3370 (1999), [hep-ph/9905221].\n- [6] L. Randall and R. Sundrum, Phys. Rev. Lett. 83 , 4690 (1999), [hep-th/9906064].\n- [7] J. M. Maldacena, Adv. Theor. Math. Phys. 2 , 231 (1998), [hep-th/9711200].\n- [8] C. Csaki, C. Grojean, H. Murayama, L. Pilo and J. Terning, Phys. Rev. D69 , 055006 (2004), [hep-ph/0305237].\n- [9] K. Agashe, A. Delgado, M. J. May and R. Sundrum, JHEP 08 , 050 (2003), [hep-ph/0308036].\n\n36", + "recall": 0.845360824742268, + "true_md": "36\n\nFurthermore, eq. (A5b) splits into three independent conditions:\n\n- [1] S. Weinberg, Phys. Rev. D13 , 974 (1976).\n\n- [2] L. Susskind, Phys. Rev. D20 , 2619 (1979).\n\n- [3] S. Weinberg, Phys. Rev. D19 , 1277 (1979).\n\n- [4] N. Arkani-Hamed, S. Dimopoulos and G. R. Dvali, Phys. Lett. B429 , 263 (1998), [hep-ph/9803315].\n\n- [5] L. Randall and R. Sundrum, Phys. Rev. Lett. 83 , 3370 (1999), [hep-ph/9905221].\n\n- [6] L. Randall and R. Sundrum, Phys. Rev. Lett. 83 , 4690 (1999), [hep-th/9906064].\n\n- [7] J. M. Maldacena, Adv. Theor. Math. Phys. 2 , 231 (1998), [hep-th/9711200].\n\n- [8] C. Csaki, C. Grojean, H. Murayama, L. Pilo and J. Terning, Phys. Rev. D69 , 055006 (2004), [hep-ph/0305237].\n\n- [9] K. Agashe, A. Delgado, M. J. May and R. Sundrum, JHEP 08 , 050 (2003), [hep-ph/0308036].\n\n$$+ b ( πR ) ( ˜ f 1 , 2 $_{Rm}$∂$_{y}$ ˜ f 1 , 2 Rn ) ∣ ∣$^{0}$ $_{πR}$, b N n δ$_{mn}$ = − m 2 $_{N n}$δ$_{mn}$ + m 2 N n ˜ g 2 ( ˜ f 3 Lm ˜ f 3 Ln + ˜ f 3 Rm ˜ f 3 Rn ) ∣ πR + ˜ v 2 4 b ( πR ) ( ˜ f 3 Lm ˜ f 3 Ln + ˜ f 3 Lm ˜ f 3 Ln − 2 ˜ f 3 Lm ˜ f 3 Ln ) ∣ πR + b ( πR ) ( ˜ f 3 $_{Lm}$∂$_{y}$ ˜ f 3 Ln + ˜ f 3 Rm ˜ f 3 Rn ) ∣ ∣$^{0}$ $_{πR}$, (A16) which are identically satisfied as soon as the f a L,Rn obey the BCs (17), (18), (24), (25), (30)$$\n\n$$+ b ( πR ) ( ˜ f 1 , 2 $_{Lm}$∂$_{y}$ ˜ f 1 , 2 Ln ) ∣ ∣$^{0}$ $_{πR}$, b R $_{n}$δ$_{mn}$ = − m 2 $_{Rn}$δ$_{mn}$ + ( m 2 Rn ˜ g 2 + ˜ v 2 4 b ( πR ) ) ˜ f 1 , 2 Rm ˜ f 1 , 2 Rn ∣ πR + b ( πR ) ( ˜ f 1 , 2 $_{Rm}$∂$_{y}$ ˜ f 1 , 2 Rn ) ∣ ∣$^{0}$ $_{πR}$, (A15) δ$_{mn}$ = − m 2 $_{N n}$δ$_{mn}$ + m 2 N n ( ˜ f 3 ˜ f 3 + ˜ f 3 ˜ f 3 ) ∣$$\n\n$$b L $_{n}$δ$_{mn}$ = − m 2 $_{Ln}$δ$_{mn}$ + ( m 2 Ln ˜ g 2 + ˜ v 2 4 b ( πR ) ) ˜ f 1 , 2 Lm ˜ f 1 , 2 Ln ∣ πR + b ( πR ) ( ˜ f 1 , 2 $_{Lm}$∂$_{y}$ ˜ f 1 , 2 Ln ) ∣ ∣$^{0}$ $_{πR}$, (A14) b R $_{n}$δ$_{mn}$ = − m 2 $_{Rn}$δ$_{mn}$ + ( m 2 Rn + ˜ v 2 b ( πR ) ) ˜ f 1 , 2 ˜ f 1 , 2 ∣$$\n\n( ) ∣ ∣$^{0}$ which are identically satisfied as soon as the f a L,Rn obey the BCs (17), (18), (24), (25), (30) and (31). Notice that eq. (15), (23), (29) together with the above mentioned BCs guarantee the orthogonality of the wave-functions that we assumed in eq. (A13), so we have a self- consistent solution of eqs. (A5a) and (A5b). To complete the diagonalization and finally get an expanded bilinear Lagrangian, we just need to solve the last two equations in the set (A5). This can be obtained by imposing the conditions (19), (26) and (32) respectively on the scalar profiles of the three sectors." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7979865624591387, + "doc_id": "4149e909925f142ba590697cd36ab63561f3414b9d51d630d81070446a0ebec3", + "edit_distance": 0.2347560975609756, + "f1_score": 0.9396825396825397, + "meteor": 0.8903054723381603, + "precision": 0.961038961038961, + "pred_md": "FIG. 11: (Color online) ISGQR strength distributions obtained for the Sn isotopes in the present experiment. Error bars represent the uncertainties from fitting the angular distributions in the MDA procedure. The solid lines show Lorentzian fits to the data.\n\nFIG. 11: (Color online) ISGQR strength distributions obtained for the Sn isotopes in the present experiment. Error bars represent the uncertainties from fitting the angular distributions in the MDA procedure. The solid lines show Lorentzian fits to the data.\n\nFigure 10 shows the strength distributions of ISGDR. We observe a 'bi-modal' distribution between E x =8.5 MeV and E x =31.5 MeV. This bi-modal pattern for the ISGDR has been observed in all nuclei investigated so far, both in the RCNP and TAMU measurements. This 'low-energy' isoscalar L =1 strength (LE) has engendered considerable interest and argument over the past few years. It is present in nearly all of the recent theoretical calculations in some form or the other, and at similar energies, although with varying strength. It has been shown [59, 60] that the centroid of this component of the L =1 strength is independent of the nuclear incompressibility and while the exact nature of this component is not fully understood yet, suggestions have been extended to the effect that this component might represent the 'toroidal' [60, 61] or the 'vortex' modes [62]. It is impossible to distinguish between the competing possibilities based on currently-available data [31]. There is general agreement, however, that only the high-energy (HE) component of this bi-modal distribution needs to be considered in obtaining a value of K ∞ from the energy of the ISGDR. The strength distributions of the ISGDR, therefore, have been fitted\n\n15", + "recall": 0.9192546583850931, + "true_md": "FIG. 11: (Color online) ISGQR strength distributions obtained for the Sn isotopes in the present experiment. Error bars represent the uncertainties from fitting the angular distributions in the MDA procedure. The solid lines show Lorentzian fits to the data.\n\nFigure 10 shows the strength distributions of ISGDR. We observe a “bi-modal” distri- bution between E$_{x}$ =8.5 MeV and E$_{x}$ =31.5 MeV. This bi-modal pattern for the ISGDR has been observed in all nuclei investigated so far, both in the RCNP and TAMU mea- surements. This “low-energy” isoscalar L =1 strength (LE) has engendered considerable interest and argument over the past few years. It is present in nearly all of the recent theoretical calculations in some form or the other, and at similar energies, although with varying strength. It has been shown [59, 60] that the centroid of this component of the L =1 strength is independent of the nuclear incompressibility and while the exact nature of this component is not fully understood yet, suggestions have been extended to the effect that this component might represent the “toroidal” [60, 61] or the “vortex” modes [62]. It is impossible to distinguish between the competing possibilities based on currently-available data [31]. There is general agreement, however, that only the high-energy (HE) component of this bi-modal distribution needs to be considered in obtaining a value of K$_{∞}$ from the energy of the ISGDR. The strength distributions of the ISGDR, therefore, have been fitted\n\n15" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6847713083202094, + "doc_id": "7e45e34aeb8d90b67e71fff4b1f7206dc4569364389a8c7f85ea5a4424f86f8f", + "edit_distance": 0.27104377104377103, + "f1_score": 0.9420289855072462, + "meteor": 0.7506461853106267, + "precision": 0.9653465346534653, + "pred_md": "14\n\nindeed was seen numerically in [6], but the treatment was not systematic. This paper studies this issue in detail.\n\nIn this situation, we see from the saddle point equations that the radius of the hole should be a function of q in the large N limit. However, for N finite there are corrections. The corrections from fluctuations about the saddle point are of order 1 /N 2 , because N 2 is playing the role of /planckover2pi1 in the saddle point approximation. There are also corrections due to granularity, for which there is currently no theoretical understanding as to how they systematically affect the correlations.\n\nThe projection of the density of particles in the 12 plane gives us a disk with a hole in it. Let us assume that this picture from these simulations is correct geometrically. Therefore in the large N limit the saddle point density has no fluctuations (they are suppressed by 1 /N 2 ). Because of this we should be able to define a geometric radius of the inner radius of the distribution at N →∞ . This should be measurable.\n\nNow, we need to find a good geometric description of the size of the hole that can be evaluated numerically for configurations that are not strictly at N = ∞ , but that have some fluctuations. This is, we want to find a radius function of the distribution that we can average over configurations\n\n\n\nWe want the function r 0 (ˆ ρ, N ) to be as well behaved as possible. This is, we want the fluctuations of r 0 to be small. There is more than one such function. Let us consider various options.\n\nThe arguments of planar diagrams suggest that good functions are traces over matrices. These are given in the thermodynamic limit by integrals over ρ (equivalently, integrals over ˆ). ρ Consider for example the following numbers\n\n\n\nThe quantities r k are natural. They weigh the points in the distribution by how far they are from the z 1 = 0 locus. For very large k , these are dominates by the smallest value r 0 that ˆ can attain. ρ These are also easy to compute numerically. This was the rationale for using them in our numerical codes and this choice was made before taking the data. We collected these for various k for many statistically independent configurations at different values of Q,N . We will explain the data later.", + "recall": 0.9198113207547169, + "true_md": "14\n\nindeed was seen numerically in [6], but the treatment was not systematic. This paper studies this issue in detail.\n\nIn this situation, we see from the saddle point equations that the radius of the hole should be a function of q in the large N limit. However, for N finite there are corrections. The corrections from fluctuations about the saddle point are of order 1 /N $^{2}$, because N 2 is playing the role of ℏ in the saddle point approximation. There are also corrections due to granularity, for which there is currently no theoretical understanding as to how they systematically affect the correlations.\n\nThe projection of the density of particles in the 12 plane gives us a disk with a hole in it.\n\nLet us assume that this picture from these simulations is correct geometrically. Therefore in the large N limit the saddle point density has no fluctuations (they are suppressed by 1 /N $^{2}$). Because of this we should be able to define a geometric radius of the inner radius of the distribution at N → ∞ . This should be measurable. Now, we need to find a good geometric description of the size of the hole that can be\n\n→ ∞ Now, we need to find a good geometric description of the size of the hole that can be evaluated numerically for configurations that are not strictly at N = ∞ , but that have some fluctuations. This is, we want to find a radius function of the distribution that we can average over configurations\n\nWe want the function r$_{0}$ (ˆ ρ, N ) to be as well behaved as possible. This is, we want the fluctuations of r$_{0}$ to be small. There is more than one such function. Let us consider various options.\n\nThe arguments of planar diagrams suggest that good functions are traces over matrices.\n\nThese are given in the thermodynamic limit by integrals over ρ (equivalently, integrals over ˆ ρ ). Consider for example the following numbers\n\nThe quantities r$_{k}$ are natural. They weigh the points in the distribution by how far they are from the z 1 = 0 locus. For very large k , these are dominates by the smallest value r$_{0}$ that ˆ ρ can attain. These are also easy to compute numerically. This was the rationale for using them in our numerical codes and this choice was made before taking the data. We collected these for various k for many statistically independent configurations at different values of Q, N . We will explain the data later.\n\n$$r$_{0}$ ( N, q ) = 〈 r$_{0}$ (ˆ ρ, N ) 〉 (15)$$\n\n$$f$_{k}$ = r − 2 k k = ∫ ˆ ρ ( a ) 1 | ( a$_{1}$ ) 2 + ( a$_{2}$ ) $^{2}$|2 k (16)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6347644344162444, + "doc_id": "ed22c8884faf3ada90805ca646ed4076cf200116ccafd48eb57b8d64f743afc3", + "edit_distance": 0.3288973384030418, + "f1_score": 0.92, + "meteor": 0.7304468560172941, + "precision": 0.9583333333333334, + "pred_md": "domains and tends ultimately to disappear completely. For smaller ˜ a 0 bounds we obtain fluctuations in ˜ V '' (˜) a , which is smooth otherwise.\n\nIn each plot it is observed that the maximum of ˜ V '' (˜) occurs at the right-below corner a (say, at a max ) which decreases to the left (with ˜ ) and in the upward direction (with a 0 β ). Beyond certain limit (say a min ), the region of instability takes the start. The proper time domain of stability can be computed from (35) as\n\n\n\nFrom a distant observer's point of view the timespan ∆ t can be found by using the radial geodesics Lagrangian which admits the energy integral\n\n\n\nThis gives the lifetime of each stability region determined by\n\n\n\nOnce a min ( a max ) are found numerically, assuming that no zeros of f (˜) and a V (˜) occurs a for a min < a < a max , the lifespan of each stability island can be determined. We must admit that the mathematical complexity discouraged us to search for possible metastable region that may be triggered by employing a semi-classical treatment.\n\n## V. CONCLUSION\n\nOur numerical analysis shows that for α < 0 , and specific ranges of mass and charge the 5D EMGB thin-shell wormholes with normal matter can be made stable against linear, radial perturbations. The fact that for α > 0 there is no such wormholes is well-known. The magnitude of α is irrelevant to the stability analysis. This reflects the universality of wormholes in parallel with black holes, i.e., the fact that they arise at each scale. Stable regions develop for each set of finely-tuned parameters which determine the lifespan of each such region. Beyond those regions instability takes the start. Our study concerns entirely the exact EMGB gravity solution given in Ref. [6]. It is our belief that beside EMGB theory in different theories also such stable, normal-matter wormholes are abound, which will be\n\n9", + "recall": 0.8846153846153846, + "true_md": "domains and tends ultimately to disappear completely. For smaller ˜ a 0 bounds we obtain fluctuations in ˜ V $^{′′}$(˜ a ) , which is smooth otherwise.\n\nIn each plot it is observed that the maximum of ˜ V $^{′′}$(˜ a ) occurs at the right-below corner (say, at a max ) which decreases to the left (with ˜ a 0 ) and in the upward direction (with β ).\n\nBeyond certain limit (say a min ), the region of instability takes the start. The proper time domain of stability can be computed from (35) as\n\n$$Δ τ = ∫ a max a min d ˜ a √ − V (˜ a ) . (46) From a distant observer’s point of view the timespan Δ t can be found by using the radial$$\n\n√ From a distant observer’s point of view the timespan Δ t can be found by using the radial geodesics Lagrangian which admits the energy integral\n\nThis gives the lifetime of each stability region determined by\n\n$$f ( dt dτ ) = E$_{◦}$ = const. (47)$$\n\n$$Δ t = 1 E$_{◦}$ ∫ a max a min d ˜ a f (˜ a ) √ − V (˜ a ) . (48) ) are found numerically, assuming that no zeros of f (˜ a ) and V (˜ a ) occurs$$\n\n√ Once a min ( a max ) are found numerically, assuming that no zeros of f (˜ a ) and V (˜ a ) occurs for a min < a < a max , the lifespan of each stability island can be determined. We must admit that the mathematical complexity discouraged us to search for possible metastable region that may be triggered by employing a semi-classical treatment.\n\nOur numerical analysis shows that for α < 0 , and specific ranges of mass and charge the 5D EMGB thin-shell wormholes with normal matter can be made stable against linear, radial perturbations. The fact that for α > 0 there is no such wormholes is well-known. The magnitude of α is irrelevant to the stability analysis. This reflects the universality of wormholes in parallel with black holes, i.e., the fact that they arise at each scale. Stable regions develop for each set of finely-tuned parameters which determine the lifespan of each such region. Beyond those regions instability takes the start. Our study concerns entirely the exact EMGB gravity solution given in Ref. [6]. It is our belief that beside EMGB theory in different theories also such stable, normal-matter wormholes are abound, which will be\n\n9\n\n## V. CONCLUSION" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "ec3c6d8fd2ab6a099af39359e35e650102788cecfd3ddaf08fc0f1b0edd32357", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9995, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "(2004) [arXiv:hep-th/0309154].\n\n24", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "(2004) [arXiv:hep-th/0309154].\n\n24" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7308700226823612, + "doc_id": "bf104770e787c5ebd43992ac9af948e504047851b4c7c84a2975de84f2db91d4", + "edit_distance": 0.29471544715447157, + "f1_score": 0.9677419354838711, + "meteor": 0.8762216261136342, + "precision": 0.9798994974874372, + "pred_md": "29\n\nFIG. 5: Allowed regions in the ( M ,g 1 ¯ ) 5 parameter space for the model in the RS limit ( b y ( ) = e -2 ky , with kπR fixed at 35 ), for two values of the Higgs mass: m H = 1 TeV (on the left) and m H = 300 GeV (on the right), based on electroweak precision constraints. Also shown are the constraints from naive dimensional analysis (contours correspond to different choices of the UV cut-off).\n\nFIG. 5: Allowed regions in the ( M ,g 1 ¯ ) 5 parameter space for the model in the RS limit ( b y ( ) = e -2 ky , with kπR fixed at 35 ), for two values of the Higgs mass: m H = 1 TeV (on the left) and m H = 300 GeV (on the right), based on electroweak precision constraints. Also shown are the constraints from naive dimensional analysis (contours correspond to different choices of the UV cut-off).\n\nin this case, the UV cut-off due to unitarity is generally much lower than it was in the flat case. Nevertheless, the model is again potentially compatible with EW precision data, even when the new heavy vector states have masses around one TeV and an Higgs mass sensibly greater than 100 -200 GeV. The unitarity cut-off scale, which is quite low, calls for an UV extension of the model at an energy scale which is not much higher than the potential reach of the LHC; still the scenario described by the model seems interesting and deserves an accurate study.\n\nThe physical content of the 5D D-BESS on an AdS background is very similar to the one of the RS1-like model described in [20]. In that reference, the authors studied a SU (2) L ⊗ U (1) Y 5D gauge theory in AdS background, with localized kinetic terms on the IR brane. The main difference between this set-up and the one we have outlined in this work is that we have considered a larger SU (2) L ⊗ SU (2) R bulk gauge symmetry. Notice, however, that if we add fermions in the simplest way, that is by localizing them on the IR brane (similarly to what was done in refs. [39, 60]), then the extra gauge fields (that correspond to what we called the 'right charged sector') are almost impossible to detect experimentally, since they cannot interact with the fermions (by eq. (25) they have no superposition with the IR", + "recall": 0.9558823529411765, + "true_md": "29\n\nFIG. 5: Allowed regions in the ( M$_{1}$, ¯ g$_{5}$ ) parameter space for the model in the RS limit ( b ( y ) = e − 2 $^{ky}$, with kπR fixed at 35 ), for two values of the Higgs mass: m$_{H}$ = 1 TeV (on the left) and m$_{H}$ = 300 GeV (on the right), based on electroweak precision constraints. Also shown are the constraints from naive dimensional analysis (contours correspond to different choices of the UV cut-off).\n\nin this case, the UV cut-off due to unitarity is generally much lower than it was in the flat case. Nevertheless, the model is again potentially compatible with EW precision data, even when the new heavy vector states have masses around one TeV and an Higgs mass sensibly greater than 100 − 200 GeV. The unitarity cut-off scale, which is quite low, calls for an UV extension of the model at an energy scale which is not much higher than the potential reach of the LHC; still the scenario described by the model seems interesting and deserves an accurate study.\n\nThe physical content of the 5D D-BESS on an AdS background is very similar to the one of the RS1-like model described in [20]. In that reference, the authors studied a SU (2)$_{L}$ ⊗ U (1)$_{Y}$ 5D gauge theory in AdS background, with localized kinetic terms on the IR brane. The main difference between this set-up and the one we have outlined in this work is that we have considered a larger SU (2)$_{L}$ ⊗ SU (2)$_{R}$ bulk gauge symmetry. Notice, however, that if we add fermions in the simplest way, that is by localizing them on the IR brane (similarly to what was done in refs. [39, 60]), then the extra gauge fields (that correspond to what we called the “right charged sector”) are almost impossible to detect experimentally, since they cannot interact with the fermions (by eq. (25) they have no superposition with the IR" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8347177864939105, + "doc_id": "83e020b4f1125ac3a5bc5e2a560fba7dbc742bfbf063d52c55748ee09fa86298", + "edit_distance": 0.1416490486257928, + "f1_score": 0.9376344086021505, + "meteor": 0.8965679286854323, + "precision": 0.956140350877193, + "pred_md": "stars in equation-of-state (EOS) calculations [38-41]; the asymmetry ratio, [( N -Z /A ) ], changes by more than 80% over the range of the investigated Sn isotopes.\n\n## II. EXPERIMENTAL TECHNIQUES\n\nThe experiment was performed at the ring cyclotron facility of the Research Center for Nuclear Physics (RCNP), Osaka University, using inelastic scattering of 386-MeV α particles at extremely forward angles, including 0 . · A 4 He ++ beam was accelerated by the Azimuthally Varying Field (AVF) cyclotron up to 86 MeV, injected into the K = 400 ring cyclotron for acceleration up to 386 MeV, and achromatically transported to the WS experimental hall without any defining slits. To reduce the background at and near 0 , the · beam halo has to be tuned carefully in the experiment. This was accomplished by tuning the beam profile of the injection beam for the ring cyclotron, and typically less than 1 out of 10000 events had contamination from the other bunches. The beam current was 1-20 nA, which was limited by the data acquisition rate and by the maximum available current of the accelerator. The energy resolution obtained was ∼ 150 keV full width at half maximum (FWHM).\n\nSelf supporting target foils of enriched even-A 112 -124 Sn isotopes of thickness 5.0-9.25 mg/cm 2 were employed; we used special target frames with a large aperture in order to reduce the background caused by the beam-halo hitting the frames. Data were also taken with a nat C target at the actual field settings used in the experiments and the energy calibration was obtained from the peak positions of the 7.652- and 9.641-MeV states in the 12 C( α, α ' ) spectra.\n\nInelastically-scattered α particles were momentum-analyzed with the high-resolution magnetic spectrometer, 'Grand Raiden' [36], and the vertical and horizontal positions of the α particles were measured with the focal-plane detector system comprised of two positionsensitive multi-wire drift chambers (MWDCs) and two scintillators [29]. The MWDCs and scintillators enabled us to make particle identification and to reconstruct the trajectories of the scattered particles. The scattering angle at the target and the momentum of the scattered particles were determined by the ray-tracing method. The vertical-position spectrum obtained in the double-focusing mode of the spectrometer was exploited to eliminate the instrumental background [28, 29].\n\n4", + "recall": 0.919831223628692, + "true_md": "stars in equation-of-state (EOS) calculations [38–41]; the asymmetry ratio, [( N − Z ) /A ], changes by more than 80% over the range of the investigated Sn isotopes.\n\nThe experiment was performed at the ring cyclotron facility of the Research Center for Nuclear Physics (RCNP), Osaka University, using inelastic scattering of 386-MeV α particles at extremely forward angles, including 0 $^{◦}$. A $^{4}$He++ beam was accelerated by the Azimuthally Varying Field (AVF) cyclotron up to 86 MeV, injected into the K = 400 ring cyclotron for acceleration up to 386 MeV, and achromatically transported to the WS experimental hall without any defining slits. To reduce the background at and near 0 $^{◦}$, the beam halo has to be tuned carefully in the experiment. This was accomplished by tuning the beam profile of the injection beam for the ring cyclotron, and typically less than 1 out of 10000 events had contamination from the other bunches. The beam current was 1-20 nA, which was limited by the data acquisition rate and by the maximum available current of the accelerator. The energy resolution obtained was ∼ 150 keV full width at half maximum (FWHM).\n\nSelf supporting target foils of enriched even-A 112 − $^{124}$Sn isotopes of thickness 5.0–9.25 mg/cm 2 were employed; we used special target frames with a large aperture in order to reduce the background caused by the beam-halo hitting the frames. Data were also taken with a $^{nat}$C target at the actual field settings used in the experiments and the energy calibration was obtained from the peak positions of the 7.652- and 9.641-MeV states in the $^{12}$C( α, α $^{′}$) spectra.\n\nInelastically-scattered α particles were momentum-analyzed with the high-resolution magnetic spectrometer, “Grand Raiden” [36], and the vertical and horizontal positions of the α particles were measured with the focal-plane detector system comprised of two position- sensitive multi-wire drift chambers (MWDCs) and two scintillators [29]. The MWDCs and scintillators enabled us to make particle identification and to reconstruct the trajectories of the scattered particles. The scattering angle at the target and the momentum of the scat- tered particles were determined by the ray-tracing method. The vertical-position spectrum obtained in the double-focusing mode of the spectrometer was exploited to eliminate the instrumental background [28, 29].\n\n4\n\n## II. EXPERIMENTAL TECHNIQUES" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.49873611727629, + "doc_id": "bde1bb4b25cb81997c3fd61207dca7891f96d60fe02f7d59e8e153cb94b223df", + "edit_distance": 0.4975369458128079, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9099014446169575, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "FIG. 4: (Color online) Plots for the mass-radius relationships for the equilibrium sequences of non-rotating compact stars obtained using various EOSs as shown in Fig. 2. The curves on the left of the solid circles represent the equilibrium sequences for the hybrid stars with core composed of the quark matter in the CFL phase. The curves between the solid circles and triangles represent the hybrid stars with 2SC quark matter core. The absence of solid triangle on a curve means that the hybrid stars contain quark matter only in the CFL phase.\n\nFIG. 4: (Color online) Plots for the mass-radius relationships for the equilibrium sequences of non-rotating compact stars obtained using various EOSs as shown in Fig. 2. The curves on the left of the solid circles represent the equilibrium sequences for the hybrid stars with core composed of the quark matter in the CFL phase. The curves between the solid circles and triangles represent the hybrid stars with 2SC quark matter core. The absence of solid triangle on a curve means that the hybrid stars contain quark matter only in the CFL phase.\n\n16", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "FIG. 4: (Color online) Plots for the mass-radius relationships for the equilibrium sequences of non-rotating compact stars obtained using various EOSs as shown in Fig. 2. The curves on the left of the solid circles represent the equilibrium sequences for the hybrid stars with core composed of the quark matter in the CFL phase. The curves between the solid circles and triangles represent the hybrid stars with 2SC quark matter core. The absence of solid triangle on a curve means that the hybrid stars contain quark matter only in the CFL phase.\n\n16" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6730224257298771, + "doc_id": "616119950d8b1990cd9ff7ff9c61494402c83291f8d2edcb79133d43feb77da4", + "edit_distance": 0.21909424724602203, + "f1_score": 0.9573283858998144, + "meteor": 0.8123593618344584, + "precision": 0.9699248120300752, + "pred_md": "in the limit m l → m s the SU (3)-breaking ratios are not constrained to unity, as would be the case in SU (3) HM χ PT. (In fact, the point m l = m s does not even lie within the range of validity of SU(2) HM χ PT and hence of Eqs. (78) and (79).) This is because, once the strange quark has been integrated out of the SU (2) theory, the expressions no longer contain explicit strange-quark mass dependence. All of the effects of the strange quark are encoded in the values of the low-energy constants, which differ in the SU (2) and SU (3) theories.\n\nAlthough the coefficients of the chiral logarithms depend on the low-energy constants g B Bπ ∗ , f , and B , once these are fixed as we now describe, there are only two free parameters each in Eqs. (78) and (79): the overall normalization and the coefficient of the analytic term proportional to m l . This allows us to smoothly match the SU (2) expressions onto the linear fit of the heavy data without ambiguity. In the chiral extrapolation we obtain our central value using g B Bπ ∗ = 0 516 for the . B ∗ -B π -coupling, which comes from a two-flavor lattice determination in the static heavy quark limit by Ohki, Matsufuru, and Onogi [62]. We then vary the value of g B Bπ ∗ over a reasonable spread of values based on both lattice calculations and phenomenological fits to experimental data in order to estimate the systematic uncertainty, as described in further detail in Sec. VI B. Moreover we set the leading-order pseudoscalar meson decay constant f to the experimental value of f π = 130 4 . ± 0 04 . ± 0 2 MeV [6]. . This is consistent to the order in χ PT at which we are working since it only modifies higherorder NNLO terms. Studies by both the MILC and JLQCD Collaborations suggest that the use of a physical parameter in the chiral coupling ( f → f π ) leads to improved convergence of χ PT [63, 64]. The scale in the chiral logarithms is fixed by setting Λ χ = 1 GeV. For the low-energy constant B we use the value aB = 2 414(61) obtained from a NLO fit of the . pseudoscalar meson masses [34]. Finally, whenever the residual quark mass appears, we use its value in the chiral limit am res = 0 00315. .\n\nThe results of the chiral extrapolation are shown in Figs. 5 and 6. The blue triangles (red squares) show the data obtained using APE (HYP) link smearing and are plotted versus the light sea quark mass. We indicate the location of the physical strange quark mass m s by the black dot. The dashed vertical line marks the physical average u d -quark mass, which is the point at which we extract the physical values for Φ B s / Φ B d and √ m B s /m B d ξ . The agreement between the two smearings is good. For the case of the APE data, the χ / 2 dof for the fit of both SU (3)-breaking ratios is below one, indicating that the data are welldescribed by the linear fit function. For the HYP data, the χ / 2 dof's are 1 8 for Φ . B s / Φ B d\n\n28", + "recall": 0.945054945054945, + "true_md": "in the limit m$_{l}$ → m$_{s}$ the SU (3)-breaking ratios are not constrained to unity, as would be the case in SU (3) HM χ PT. (In fact, the point m$_{l}$ = m$_{s}$ does not even lie within the range of validity of SU(2) HM χ PT and hence of Eqs. (78) and (79).) This is because, once the strange quark has been integrated out of the SU (2) theory, the expressions no longer contain explicit strange-quark mass dependence. All of the effects of the strange quark are encoded in the values of the low-energy constants, which differ in the SU (2) and SU (3) theories.\n\nAlthough the coefficients of the chiral logarithms depend on the low-energy constants g$_{B}$ ∗ $_{Bπ}$, f , and B , once these are fixed as we now describe, there are only two free parameters each in Eqs. (78) and (79): the overall normalization and the coefficient of the analytic term proportional to m$_{l}$ . This allows us to smoothly match the SU (2) expressions onto the linear fit of the heavy data without ambiguity. In the chiral extrapolation we obtain our central value using g$_{B}$ ∗ Bπ = 0 . 516 for the B $^{∗}$- B - π coupling, which comes from a two-flavor lattice determination in the static heavy quark limit by Ohki, Matsufuru, and Onogi [62]. We then vary the value of g$_{B}$ ∗ Bπ over a reasonable spread of values based on both lattice calculations and phenomenological fits to experimental data in order to estimate the systematic uncer- tainty, as described in further detail in Sec. VI B. Moreover we set the leading-order pseu- doscalar meson decay constant f to the experimental value of f$_{π}$ = 130 . 4 ± 0 . 04 ± 0 . 2 MeV [6]. This is consistent to the order in χ PT at which we are working since it only modifies higher- order NNLO terms. Studies by both the MILC and JLQCD Collaborations suggest that the use of a physical parameter in the chiral coupling ( f → f$_{π}$ ) leads to improved convergence of χ PT [63, 64]. The scale in the chiral logarithms is fixed by setting Λ$_{χ}$ = 1 GeV. For the low-energy constant B we use the value aB = 2 . 414(61) obtained from a NLO fit of the pseudoscalar meson masses [34]. Finally, whenever the residual quark mass appears, we use its value in the chiral limit am$_{res}$ = 0 . 00315.\n\nThe results of the chiral extrapolation are shown in Figs. 5 and 6. The blue triangles (red squares) show the data obtained using APE (HYP) link smearing and are plotted versus the light sea quark mass. We indicate the location of the physical strange quark mass m$_{s}$ by the black dot. The dashed vertical line marks the physical average u - d quark mass, which is the point at which we extract the physical values for Φ$_{B}$$\\_{s}$ / Φ$\\_{B}$$_{d}$ and √ m$_{B}$$\\_{s}$/m$\\_{B}$$_{d}$ ξ . The agreement between the two smearings is good. For the case of the APE data, the χ $^{2}$/ dof for the fit of both SU (3)-breaking ratios is below one, indicating that the data are well- described by the linear fit function. For the HYP data, the χ $^{2}$/ dof’s are 1 . 8 for Φ$_{B}$$\\_{s}$ / Φ$\\_{B}$$_{d}$\n\n28" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.23315571142355232, + "doc_id": "999d6b35cdb1b4fe464e494e5cce186b12177883e174cd02d85660e3a7382272", + "edit_distance": 0.6519065190651907, + "f1_score": 0.8817891373801917, + "meteor": 0.39779905518673636, + "precision": 0.9261744966442953, + "pred_md": "This method was first introduced by Schrdinger o 7-9 and Dirac 10 and was further developed by Infeld and Hull 11 and Green. 12 The spirit of the factorization method is to write the second-order differential operator H as the product of two first-order differential operators a and a † , plus a real constant E . The form of these operators depends on the form of the potential V ( x ) and the factorization energy.\n\nThe procedure for finding the ladder operators and the eigenfunctions is as follows. 13 We find operators a , a 1 2 , a 3 , . . . and real constants E , E , E , . . . 1 2 3 from the recursive relations 13\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nMore generally\n\n\n\nAlso assume that there exists a null eigenfunction (root function) | ξ n 〉 with zero eigenvalue for each a n , namely,\n\n\n\nHence, E n is the n th eigenvalue of the Hamiltonian with the corresponding eigenfunction 13 (up to a normalization coefficient)\n\n\n\nFigure 2 shows a schematic diagram describing the relation between root functions, the stationary states, and the ladder operators. As can be seen from Eq. (6), a a † 1 1 is equal to H except for a constant. Thus, a 1 must have a linear momentum term to be consistent with the kinetic energy part of the Hamiltonian. According to Eq. (7), each of the annihilation operators a n should also have a a linear momentum term. Thus, a n can be written as\n\n\n\n/negationslash\n\nwhere P is the momentum operator and f n ( x ) is a real function of x . Although these operators are not hermitian ( a † n = 1 √ 2 m ( P -if n ( x )) = a n ), their product is hermitian\n\n\n\n4", + "recall": 0.8414634146341463, + "true_md": "This method was first introduced by Schr¨ odinger 7–9 and Dirac 10 and was further developed by Infeld and Hull 11 and Green. 12 The spirit of the factorization method is to write the second-order differential operator H as the product of two first-order differential operators a and a † , plus a real constant E . The form of these operators depends on the form of the potential V ( x ) and the factorization energy.\n\nThe procedure for finding the ladder operators and the eigenfunctions is as follows. 13 We find operators a$_{1}$, a$_{2}$, a$_{3}$, . . . and real constants E$_{1}$, E$_{2}$, E$_{3}$, . . . from the recursive relations 13\n\nMore generally\n\nAlso assume that there exists a null eigenfunction (root function) | ξ$_{n}$ 〉 with zero eigenvalue for each a$_{n}$ , namely,\n\nHence, E$_{n}$ is the n th eigenvalue of the Hamiltonian with the corresponding eigenfunction 13 (up to a normalization coefficient)\n\nFigure 2 shows a schematic diagram describing the relation between root functions, the stationary states, and the ladder operators. As can be seen from Eq. (6), a † $_{1}$a$_{1}$ is equal to H except for a constant. Thus, a$_{1}$ must have a linear momentum term to be consistent with the kinetic energy part of the Hamiltonian. According to Eq. (7), each of the annihilation operators a$_{n}$ should also have a a linear momentum term. Thus, a$_{n}$ can be written as\n\nwhere P is the momentum operator and f$_{n}$ ( x ) is a real function of x . Although these operators are not hermitian ( a † n = 1 √$_{2}$$\\_{m}$ ( P − if$\\_{n}$ ( x )) ̸ = a$\\_{n}$ ), their product is hermitian\n\n$$a † $_{n}$a$_{n}$ = 1 2 m P 2 + 1 2 m f 2 n + ¯ h 2 m df$_{n}$ dx . (11)$$\n\n4\n\n$$a$_{n}$ = 1 √$_{2}$$_{m}$ [ P + if$_{n}$ ( x )] , (10)$$\n\n$$| E$_{n}$ 〉 = a † $_{1}$a † $_{2}$. . . a † n − 1 | ξ$_{n}$ 〉 . (9)$$\n\n$$a$_{n}$ | ξ$_{n}$ 〉 = 0 . (8)$$\n\n$$a † n $_{+1}$a$_{n}$$_{+1}$ + E$_{n}$$_{+1}$ = a$_{n}$a † n + E$_{n}$, ( n = 1 , 2 , . . . ) . (7)$$\n\n$$a † $_{3}$a$_{3}$ + E$_{3}$ = a$_{2}$a † 2 + E$_{2}$, . . . . (6c)$$\n\n$$a † $_{2}$a$_{2}$ + E$_{2}$ = a$_{1}$a † 1 + E$_{1}$, (6b)$$\n\n$$a † $_{1}$a$_{1}$ + E$_{1}$ = H, (6a)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9838003343818256, + "doc_id": "1941bae3131e7c649f1167a70f029c3e00a99f3b4d1e557dd6a2c77a759c727c", + "edit_distance": 0.011673151750972763, + "f1_score": 0.9903660886319846, + "meteor": 0.9926013986296555, + "precision": 0.9922779922779923, + "pred_md": "## I. INTRODUCTION\n\nWhenever the agenda is about wormholes exotic matter (i.e. matter violating the energy conditions) continues to occupy a major issue in general relativity [1]. It is a fact that Einstein's equations admit wormhole solutions that require such matter for its maintenance. In quantum theory temporary violation of energy conditions is permissible but in classical physics this can hardly be justified. One way to minimize such exotic matter, even if we can not ignore it completely, is to concentrate it on a thin-shell. This seemed feasible, because general relativity admits such thin-shell solutions and by employing these shells at the throat region may provide the necessary repulsion to support the wormhole against collapse. The ultimate aim of course, is to get rid of exotic matter completely, no matter how small. In the 4-dimensional (4D) general relativity with a cosmological term, however, such a dream never turned into reality. For this reason the next search should naturally cover extensions of general relativity to higher dimensions and with additional structures. One such possibility that received a great deal of attention in recent years, for a number of reasons, is the Gauss-Bonnet (GB) extension of general relativity [2]. In the brane-world scenario our universe is modelled as a brane in a 5D bulk universe in which the higher order curvature terms, and therefore the GB gravity comes in naturally. Einstein-Gauss-Bonnet (EGB) gravity, with additional sources such as Maxwell, Yang-Mills, dilaton etc. has already been investigated extensively in the literature [3]. Not to mention, all these theories admit black hole, wormhole [4] and other physically interesting solutions. As it is the usual trend in theoretical physics, each new parameter invokes new hopes and from that token, the GB parameter α does the same. Although the case α > 0 , has been exalted much more than the case α < 0 in EGB gravity so far [5] (and references cited therein), it turns out here in the stable, normal matter thin-shell wormholes that the latter comes first time to the fore.\n\nConstruction and maintenance of thin-shell wormholes has been the subject of a large literature, so that we shall provide only a brief review here. Instead, one class [6] that made use of non-exotic matter for its maintenance attracted our interest and we intend to analyze its stability in this paper. This is the 5D thin-shell solution of Einstein-MaxwellGauss-Bonnet (EMGB) gravity, whose radius is identified with the minimum radius of the wormhole. For this purpose we employ radial, linear perturbations to cast the motion into a potential-well problem in the background. In doing this, a reasonable assumption employed\n\n2", + "recall": 0.9884615384615385, + "true_md": "## I. INTRODUCTION\n\n2\n\nWhenever the agenda is about wormholes exotic matter (i.e. matter violating the energy conditions) continues to occupy a major issue in general relativity [1]. It is a fact that Einstein’s equations admit wormhole solutions that require such matter for its maintenance. In quantum theory temporary violation of energy conditions is permissible but in classical physics this can hardly be justified. One way to minimize such exotic matter, even if we can not ignore it completely, is to concentrate it on a thin-shell. This seemed feasible, because general relativity admits such thin-shell solutions and by employing these shells at the throat region may provide the necessary repulsion to support the wormhole against collapse. The ultimate aim of course, is to get rid of exotic matter completely, no matter how small. In the 4-dimensional (4D) general relativity with a cosmological term, however, such a dream never turned into reality. For this reason the next search should naturally cover extensions of general relativity to higher dimensions and with additional structures. One such possibility that received a great deal of attention in recent years, for a number of reasons, is the Gauss-Bonnet (GB) extension of general relativity [2]. In the brane-world scenario our universe is modelled as a brane in a 5D bulk universe in which the higher order curvature terms, and therefore the GB gravity comes in naturally. Einstein-Gauss-Bonnet (EGB) gravity, with additional sources such as Maxwell, Yang-Mills, dilaton etc. has already been investigated extensively in the literature [3]. Not to mention, all these theories admit black hole, wormhole [4] and other physically interesting solutions. As it is the usual trend in theoretical physics, each new parameter invokes new hopes and from that token, the GB parameter α does the same. Although the case α > 0 , has been exalted much more than the case α < 0 in EGB gravity so far [5] (and references cited therein), it turns out here in the stable, normal matter thin-shell wormholes that the latter comes first time to the fore.\n\nConstruction and maintenance of thin-shell wormholes has been the subject of a large literature, so that we shall provide only a brief review here. Instead, one class [6] that made use of non-exotic matter for its maintenance attracted our interest and we intend to analyze its stability in this paper. This is the 5D thin-shell solution of Einstein-Maxwell- Gauss-Bonnet (EMGB) gravity, whose radius is identified with the minimum radius of the wormhole. For this purpose we employ radial, linear perturbations to cast the motion into a potential-well problem in the background. In doing this, a reasonable assumption employed" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8743184722358326, + "doc_id": "7b28584b489410def53c42c7f54a04bc1427741094692bb1b40bd4a6de055b77", + "edit_distance": 0.11156186612576065, + "f1_score": 0.9457700650759219, + "meteor": 0.9068752516411133, + "precision": 0.956140350877193, + "pred_md": "## A. Size-related resonances and local-field patterns\n\nLocsitons in a finite 1D array of atoms exhibit size-related resonances, characterized by large increases in their amplitudes at certain frequencies within the locsitonic band, because locsitons are reflected at the boundaries and form standing waves ( strata ) [1, 2]. Essentially, these resonances correspond to locsiton eigenmodes defined by the boundaries. For the longwave strata they are similar to oscillations of a quantum particle in a box, as, e. g., for 1Dconfined electrons [10, 11], or a common violin string. It is natural to expect such resonances and eigenmodes to also exist in higher dimensions, in particular, in finite 2D lattices, where we also encounter locsiton reflections at the boundaries. An important distinction of the 2D case is that the wave vector q of a locsiton may have an arbitrary orientation in the lattice plane with respect to the incident field E in . Multiple reflections and interference of locsitons with all possible q quickly make the whole picture very complicated and highly susceptible to minor changes to the size and shape of the lattice patch. We found that at certain geometries only a limited number of locsiton eigenmodes are dominant. Their interference produces various dipole patterns and strata; some of them are reminiscent to 'quantum carpets' [12]. An important issue is, therefore, how one can control the locsiton patterns via the geometry of the lattice patch and the frequency and polarization of the laser beam.\n\nOne way to engineer a distinct 2D locsiton pattern is to start with a rectangular lattice patch and ensure that size-related resonances are achieved for locsitons with wave vectors parallel to its boundaries. We have to choose the lattice shape, such that the size-related locsiton resonances emerge in both dimensions at the same frequency detuning δ . To simplify our task, we will consider long-wavelength locsitons, which are not too sensitive to the system sizes and thus are easier to control, and, incidentally, also form more pronounced patterns and are described by the simpler formula (18).\n\nIn the limit of long-wavelength locsitons ( q /lessmuch 1, δ ≈ δ LL ), the dispersion relations in the cases (a) and (b) described in Sec. III B coincide with each other:\n\n\n\n[cf. Eq. (18) at ψ = π/ 2]. In a similar manner, one obtains approximate solutions for the\n\n18", + "recall": 0.9356223175965666, + "true_md": "## A. Size-related resonances and local-field patterns\n\nLocsitons in a finite 1D array of atoms exhibit size-related resonances, characterized by large increases in their amplitudes at certain frequencies within the locsitonic band, because locsitons are reflected at the boundaries and form standing waves ( strata ) [1, 2]. Essentially, these resonances correspond to locsiton eigenmodes defined by the boundaries. For the long- wave strata they are similar to oscillations of a quantum particle in a box, as, e. g., for 1D- confined electrons [10, 11], or a common violin string. It is natural to expect such resonances and eigenmodes to also exist in higher dimensions, in particular, in finite 2D lattices, where we also encounter locsiton reflections at the boundaries. An important distinction of the 2D case is that the wave vector q of a locsiton may have an arbitrary orientation in the lattice plane with respect to the incident field E$_{in}$ . Multiple reflections and interference of locsitons with all possible q quickly make the whole picture very complicated and highly susceptible to minor changes to the size and shape of the lattice patch. We found that at certain geometries only a limited number of locsiton eigenmodes are dominant. Their interference produces various dipole patterns and strata; some of them are reminiscent to “quantum carpets” [12]. An important issue is, therefore, how one can control the locsiton patterns via the geometry of the lattice patch and the frequency and polarization of the laser beam.\n\nOne way to engineer a distinct 2D locsiton pattern is to start with a rectangular lattice patch and ensure that size-related resonances are achieved for locsitons with wave vectors parallel to its boundaries. We have to choose the lattice shape, such that the size-related locsiton resonances emerge in both dimensions at the same frequency detuning δ . To simplify our task, we will consider long-wavelength locsitons, which are not too sensitive to the system sizes and thus are easier to control, and, incidentally, also form more pronounced patterns and are described by the simpler formula (18).\n\nIn the limit of long-wavelength locsitons ( q ≪ 1, δ ≈ δ$_{LL}$ ), the dispersion relations in the cases (a) and (b) described in Sec. III B coincide with each other:\n\n[cf. Eq. (18) at ψ = π/ 2]. In a similar manner, one obtains approximate solutions for the\n\n$$q 2 = 8 ( δ − δ$_{LL}$ ) + i δ$_{LL}$ (29)$$\n\n18" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9032236316658105, + "doc_id": "80606dd24607786254f617da7685ad6de7953874d6788161ff99773dc923827a", + "edit_distance": 0.07302231237322515, + "f1_score": 0.9761904761904762, + "meteor": 0.9434664871950676, + "precision": 0.984, + "pred_md": "## I. INTRODUCTION\n\nThe seminal model for understanding both classical and quantum chaos is the billiard. Depending on different considerations, such as shape and topology, a billiard model can present either stable or chaotic behavior. The most celebrated versions of classical billiards in two dimensions, in which chaos has been observed, are the Sinai billiard , Bunimovich 1 stadium , and Polygonal billiards . 2 3 In all of these examples, the shape of the boundaries plays a crucial role. In recent years, physicists have detected chaotic behavior at the nano scale 4 making an important impact in technology and, once again, billiards have helped to model quantum devices 5 such as nanotubes, quantum dots, etc. which are governed by quantum theory.\n\nA novel model of billiard is the one introduced in 1986 by Lehtihet and Miller 6 known as the 'Wedge Billiard .' The model consists of a symmetrically inclined wedge of angle 2 θ with respect to the direction of a constant gravitational field g in which the particle is confined. They found surprising properties when the parameter θ is changed. Later, in 2001, Valery Milner , working in Mark Raizen's laboratory at the University of Texas, 7 introduced an experiment referencing the Wedge Billiard model geometry and confirming the properties mentioned above. This first experiment of billiards was named ' Optical Billiards .' It is worth mentioning that this experiment is more closely related to classical rather than 'quantum' chaos . While very low by normal standards, the temperature they employed is not low enough to easily exhibit any quantum effects. Consequently, a classical theoretical model was adequate to obtain a good point of comparison.\n\nA key element in the experiment is that, by removing a small segment of the boundary, an escape route is provided at the billiard vertex. As time progresses, the atoms, moving under the influence of gravity, will eventually exit the billiard. A measure of the influence of \"chaotic\" orbits is provided by the mean lifetime that the atoms remain in the billiard. This scenario is mimicked in this work by setting up the Escape Problem ( EP ). Currently experimentalists are starting to probe the quantum regime.\n\nThe idea of the work presented here springs from laying the foundation of a quantum treatment for optical billiards. However, the quantum mechanical problem is much more difficult since the system is two-dimensional (equivalent to four dimensions in the phase space), and not integrable. Thus analytical methods are not available, and a viable numerical\n\n2", + "recall": 0.968503937007874, + "true_md": "## I. INTRODUCTION\n\nThe seminal model for understanding both classical and quantum chaos is the billiard. Depending on different considerations, such as shape and topology, a billiard model can present either stable or chaotic behavior. The most celebrated versions of classical billiards in two dimensions, in which chaos has been observed, are the Sinai billiard $^{1}$, Bunimovich stadium $^{2}$, and Polygonal billiards$^{3}$. In all of these examples, the shape of the boundaries plays a crucial role. In recent years, physicists have detected chaotic behavior at the nano scale 4 making an important impact in technology and, once again, billiards have helped to model quantum devices 5 such as nanotubes, quantum dots, etc. which are governed by quantum theory.\n\nA novel model of billiard is the one introduced in 1986 by Lehtihet and Miller 6 known as the “Wedge Billiard .” The model consists of a symmetrically inclined wedge of angle 2 θ with respect to the direction of a constant gravitational field g in which the particle is confined. They found surprising properties when the parameter θ is changed. Later, in 2001, Valery Milner $^{7}$, working in Mark Raizen’s laboratory at the University of Texas, introduced an experiment referencing the Wedge Billiard model geometry and confirming the properties mentioned above. This first experiment of billiards was named “ Optical Billiards .” It is worth mentioning that this experiment is more closely related to classical rather than “quantum” chaos . While very low by normal standards, the temperature they employed is not low enough to easily exhibit any quantum effects. Consequently, a classical theoretical model was adequate to obtain a good point of comparison.\n\nA key element in the experiment is that, by removing a small segment of the boundary, an escape route is provided at the billiard vertex. As time progresses, the atoms, moving under the influence of gravity, will eventually exit the billiard. A measure of the influence of \"chaotic\" orbits is provided by the mean lifetime that the atoms remain in the billiard. This scenario is mimicked in this work by setting up the Escape Problem ( EP ). Currently experimentalists are starting to probe the quantum regime.\n\nThe idea of the work presented here springs from laying the foundation of a quantum treatment for optical billiards. However, the quantum mechanical problem is much more difficult since the system is two-dimensional (equivalent to four dimensions in the phase space), and not integrable. Thus analytical methods are not available, and a viable numerical\n\n2" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.39012031055935004, + "doc_id": "7583c372dae61d0cc7f15a44fc817b923ffbd10320d0596932771cbce441b75a", + "edit_distance": 0.4361036639857015, + "f1_score": 0.9544554455445546, + "meteor": 0.6113316071557633, + "precision": 0.9717741935483871, + "pred_md": "Figure 1 : Detection of spin-momentum locking of spin-helical Dirac electrons in Bi Se 2 3 and Bi Te 2 3 using spin-resolved ARPES. (a) ARPES intensity map at E F of the (111) surface of tuned Bi 2 -δ Ca Se δ 3 (see text) and (b) the (111) surface of Bi 2 Te . 3 Red arrows denote the direction of spin around the Fermi surface. (c) ARPES dispersion of tuned Bi 2 -δ Ca Se δ 3 and (d) Bi Te 2 3 along the k x cut. The dotted red lines are guides to the eye. The shaded regions in (c) and (d) are our calculated projections of the bulk bands of pure Bi Se 2 3 and Bi Te 2 3 onto the (111) surface respectively. (e) Measured y component of spin-polarization along the ¯ -M Γ ¯ direction at E B = -20 meV, which only cuts through the surface states. Inset shows a schematic of the cut direction. (f) Measured x (red triangles) and z (black circles) components of spinpolarization along the ¯ -M Γ ¯ direction at E B = -20 meV. Error bars in (e) and (f) denote the standard deviation of P x,y,z , where typical detector counts reach 5 × 10 ; Solid lines are numerical 5 fits [21]. (g) Spin-resolved spectra obtained from the y component spin polarization data. The non-Lorentzian lineshape of the I ↑ y and I ↓ y curves and their non-exact merger at large | k x | is due to the time evolution of the surface band dispersion, which is the dominant source of statistical uncertainty. a.u., arbitrary units. (h) Fitted values of the spin polarization vector P = ( S x , S y , S z ) are (sin(90 · )cos(-95 · ), sin(90 )sin(-95 · · ), cos(90 )) · for electrons with + k x and (sin(86 )cos(85 · · ), sin(86 )sin(85 · · ), cos(86 · )) for electrons with k x , which demonstrates the topological helicity of the spin-Dirac cone. The angular uncertainties are of order ± 10 · and the magnitude uncertainty is of order ± 0.15.\n\nFigure 2 : Tuning the bulk Fermi level through systematic bulk charge compensation monitored through systematic transport and ARPES measurements. (a) Resistivity at T = 4 K measured for samples of Bi Se 2 3 that are bulk electron doped due to varying concentrations of Se vacancies [16] ( x ) or bulk hole doped through Ca/Bi substitution ( δ ). These are compared to analogous values for topological insulators Bi 0 9 . Sb 0 1 . (black square, arrowed; [13]) and Bi 1 9933 . Sn 0 0067 . Te 3 (purple triangle, arrowed). The stoichiometric Bi Se 2 3 (Bi 1 9975 . Ca 0 0025 . Se ) 3 is found to be the most insulating of these topological insulators. In Bi 2 -δ Ca Se , bulk resistivity in δ 3 excess of 75 mΩcm is possible, which will be shown elsewhere. The bulk insulating state in Bi 0 9 . Sb 0 1 . [13] is intrinsic and not due to disorder which will also be shown elsewhere. Bi 1 9975 . Ca 0 0025 . Se 3 is known to be most metallic-like among the three classes studied so far. (b) Hall carrier density\n\n13", + "recall": 0.9377431906614786, + "true_md": "Figure 1 : Detection of spin-momentum locking of spin-helical Dirac electrons in Bi$_{2}$Se$_{3}$ and Bi$_{2}$Te$_{3}$ using spin-resolved ARPES. (a) ARPES intensity map at E$_{F}$ of the (111) surface of tuned Bi$_{2}$$\\_{−}$$_{δ}$Ca$_{δ}$Se$_{3}$ (see text) and (b) the (111) surface of Bi$_{2}$Te$_{3}$. Red arrows denote the direction of spin around the Fermi surface. (c) ARPES dispersion of tuned Bi$_{2}$$\\_{−}$$_{δ}$Ca$_{δ}$Se$_{3}$ and (d) Bi$_{2}$Te$_{3}$ along the k$_{x}$ cut. The dotted red lines are guides to the eye. The shaded regions in (c) and (d) are our calculated projections of the bulk bands of pure Bi$_{2}$Se$_{3}$ and Bi$_{2}$Te$_{3}$ onto the (111) surface respectively. (e) Measured y component of spin-polarization along the ¯ Γ- ¯ M direction at E$_{B}$ = -20 meV, which only cuts through the surface states. Inset shows a schematic of the cut direction. (f) Measured x (red triangles) and z (black circles) components of spin- polarization along the ¯ Γ- ¯ M direction at E$_{B}$ = -20 meV. Error bars in (e) and (f) denote the standard deviation of P$_{x,y,z}$ , where typical detector counts reach 5 × 10 $^{5}$; Solid lines are numerical fits [21]. (g) Spin-resolved spectra obtained from the y component spin polarization data. The non-Lorentzian lineshape of the I ↑ y and I ↓ y curves and their non-exact merger at large | k$_{x}$ | is due to the time evolution of the surface band dispersion, which is the dominant source of statistical uncertainty. a.u., arbitrary units. (h) Fitted values of the spin polarization vector P = ( S$_{x}$ , S$_{y}$ , S$_{z}$ ) are (sin(90 $^{◦}$)cos(-95$^{◦}$), sin(90$^{◦}$)sin(-95$^{◦}$), cos(90$^{◦}$)) for electrons with + k$_{x}$ and (sin(86 $^{◦}$)cos(85$^{◦}$), sin(86 $^{◦}$)sin(85$^{◦}$), cos(86$^{◦}$)) for electrons with - k$_{x}$ , which demonstrates the topological helicity of the spin-Dirac cone. The angular uncertainties are of order ± 10 ◦ and the magnitude uncertainty is of order ± 0.15.\n\nFigure 2 : Tuning the bulk Fermi level through systematic bulk charge compensa- tion monitored through systematic transport and ARPES measurements. (a) Resistivity at T = 4 K measured for samples of Bi$_{2}$Se$_{3}$ that are bulk electron doped due to varying concen- trations of Se vacancies [16] ( x ) or bulk hole doped through Ca/Bi substitution ( δ ). These are compared to analogous values for topological insulators Bi$_{0}$$\\_{.}$$_{9}$Sb$_{0}$$\\_{.}$$_{1}$ (black square, arrowed; [13]) and Bi$_{1}$$\\_{.}$$_{9933}$Sn$_{0}$$\\_{.}$$_{0067}$Te$_{3}$ (purple triangle, arrowed). The stoichiometric Bi$_{2}$Se$_{3}$ (Bi$_{1}$$\\_{.}$$_{9975}$Ca$_{0}$$\\_{.}$$_{0025}$Se$_{3}$) is found to be the most insulating of these topological insulators. In Bi$_{2}$$\\_{−}$$_{δ}$Ca$_{δ}$Se$_{3}$, bulk resistivity in excess of 75 mΩcm is possible, which will be shown elsewhere. The bulk insulating state in Bi$_{0}$$\\_{.}$$_{9}$Sb$_{0}$$\\_{.}$$_{1}$ [13] is intrinsic and not due to disorder which will also be shown elsewhere. Bi$_{1}$$\\_{.}$$_{9975}$Ca$_{0}$$\\_{.}$$_{0025}$Se$_{3}$ is known to be most metallic-like among the three classes studied so far. (b) Hall carrier density\n\n13" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.609465432384646, + "doc_id": "f06ebe65b24e9e3fc558f4bedaa8e03d6c848443c96dbc758f5ac8a55f938f2b", + "edit_distance": 0.6586826347305389, + "f1_score": 0.9254901960784314, + "meteor": 0.6469126670224671, + "precision": 0.959349593495935, + "pred_md": "FIG. 3: (Color online) Dimensionless relative standard deviation σ Z /L of the position of the movable piston as a function of the mass ratio M/m , for several values of the coefficient of normal restitution of the gas α , as indicated in the insert. The curves are guides for the eye. In all the cases, the coefficient of restitution for the gas-movable piston collisions is α P = 0 99. .\n\nFIG. 3: (Color online) Dimensionless relative standard deviation σ Z /L of the position of the movable piston as a function of the mass ratio M/m , for several values of the coefficient of normal restitution of the gas α , as indicated in the insert. The curves are guides for the eye. In all the cases, the coefficient of restitution for the gas-movable piston collisions is α P = 0 99. .\n\n## III. COMPRESSIBILITY AND EFFECTIVE TEMPERATURE\n\nTo measure the facility of the system to be compressed, define a coefficient of compressibility k by\n\n\n\nwhere p L is the pressure of the granular gas in the vicinity of the movable piston and V is the volume (area) of the system. The derivative in the above equation is computed at constant value of all the parameters defining the system, α , α P , N z and v W , except p L = Mg /W 0 , as it follows from the definition of the pressure. In the following, p L will be modified by changing the mass of the piston M , keeping g 0 and W unchanged. The reason for this choice is twofold. First, changing g 0 is equivalent to modifying v W and, second, increasing\n\n11", + "recall": 0.8939393939393939, + "true_md": "FIG. 3: (Color online) Dimensionless relative standard deviation σ$_{Z}$/L of the position of the movable piston as a function of the mass ratio M/m , for several values of the coefficient of normal restitution of the gas α , as indicated in the insert. The curves are guides for the eye. In all the cases, the coefficient of restitution for the gas-movable piston collisions is α$_{P}$ = 0 . 99.\n\n## III. COMPRESSIBILITY AND EFFECTIVE TEMPERATURE\n\nwhere p$_{L}$ is the pressure of the granular gas in the vicinity of the movable piston and V is the volume (area) of the system. The derivative in the above equation is computed at constant value of all the parameters defining the system, α , α$_{P}$ , N$_{z}$ and v$_{W}$ , except p$_{L}$ = Mg 0 /W , as it follows from the definition of the pressure. In the following, p$_{L}$ will be modified by changing the mass of the piston M , keeping g 0 and W unchanged. The reason for this choice is twofold. First, changing g 0 is equivalent to modifying v$_{W}$ and, second, increasing\n\n$$k ≡ − 1 < V > ( ∂ < V > ∂p$_{L}$ )$_{v}$$_{W}$ , (7)$$\n\n11\n\nTo measure the facility of the system to be compressed, define a coefficient of compress- ibility k by ( )$_{v}$$\\_{W}$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.15382086688396301, + "doc_id": "ce410553aac995893d7180cec64c0e30a32ca2f398556acf55517424aaa39e1d", + "edit_distance": 0.7244444444444444, + "f1_score": 0.8275862068965516, + "meteor": 0.3181368296529969, + "precision": 0.9448818897637795, + "pred_md": "11\n\nSome caution must be used in writing down the completeness and orthogonality relations for the f 1 2 , Ln mode functions. The differential operator ˆ D (16) is in fact not hermitian with respect to the ordinary scalar product when evaluated on functions obeying BCs of the kind (18), due to the presence of terms explicitly containing the eigenvalues m Ln which are induced by πR -localized terms in the action. To obtain the correct completeness and orthogonality properties of this function set, a generalized scalar product must be used which takes into account such terms. This is given by\n\n\n\nwhere L m sets the normalization. Since the scalar product ( · , · ) ˜ g is dimensionless, we will set: L m ≡ 1. This will ensure that the kinetic terms of the bosons of this sector are canonically normalized. From this definition we deduce the completeness relation:\n\n\n\n- · A right charged sector coming from the expansion of ( W 1 2 , R ) M . The explicit form of the expansion for this sector is\n\n\n\nThe wave-functions of the vector fields satisfy a similar equation of motion:\n\n\n\nand the set of BCs:\n\n\n\n\n\nThe scalar profiles are given by:\n\n", + "recall": 0.7361963190184049, + "true_md": "Some caution must be used in writing down the completeness and orthogonality re- lations for the f 1 , 2 Ln mode functions. The differential operator ˆ D (16) is in fact not hermitian with respect to the ordinary scalar product when evaluated on functions obeying BCs of the kind (18), due to the presence of terms explicitly containing the eigenvalues m$_{L n}$ which are induced by πR -localized terms in the action. To obtain the correct completeness and orthogonality properties of this function set, a generalized scalar product must be used which takes into account such terms. This is given by\n\n( ) where L$_{m}$ sets the normalization. Since the scalar product ( · , · )$_{˜}$ g is dimensionless, we will set: L$_{m}$ ≡ 1. This will ensure that the kinetic terms of the bosons of this sector are canonically normalized. From this definition we deduce the completeness relation:\n\n• A right charged sector coming from the expansion of ( W 1 , 2 R )$_{M}$. The explicit form of the expansion for this sector is\n\nThe wave-functions of the vector fields satisfy a similar equation of motion:\n\nand the set of BCs:\n\nThe scalar profiles are given by:\n\n$$g 1 , 2 R n = 1 m$_{R n}$ ∂$_{y}$f 1 , 2 $_{R n}$. (26)$$\n\n$$∂$_{y}$f 1 , 2 R n = 0 at y = 0 , (24)$$\n\n$$f 1 , 2 R n = 0 at y = πR. (25)$$\n\n$$ˆ Df 1 , 2 R n = − m 2 $_{R n}$f 1 , 2 $_{R n}$, (23)$$\n\n$$W 1 , 2 $_{R µ}$( x, y ) = ∞ ∑ n =0 f 1 , 2 $_{R n}$( y ) W 1 , 2( n ) Rµ ( x ) , W 1 , 2 R $_{5}$( x, y ) = ∞ ∑ n =0 g 1 , 2 $_{R n}$( y ) G 1 , 2 ( n ) R ( x ) . (22)$$\n\n$$1 g 2 5 ∑ k f 1 , 2 $_{L k}$( y ) f 1 , 2 $_{Lk}$( z ) + 1 ˜ g $_{2}$δ ( z − πR ) ∑ k f 1 , 2 $_{L k}$( y ) f 1 , 2 $_{Lk}$( πR ) = δ ( y − z ); (21)$$\n\n$$( f 1 , 2 $_{L n}$, f 1 , 2 Lm ) ˜ g = L 2 $_{m}$δ$_{mn}$ , ( f, h )$_{˜}$ g = 1 g 2 5 ∫ πR 0 dy fh + 1 ˜ g 2 fh | $_{πR}$, (20) sets the normalization. Since the scalar product ( · , · )$_{˜}$ is dimensionless, we$$\n\n11" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5837594755169153, + "doc_id": "725f33ba9eaf8a7576a699cadb8d776d01e6cbc0971006b07f100be529959773", + "edit_distance": 0.29316770186335406, + "f1_score": 0.9596602972399151, + "meteor": 0.7588986280524525, + "precision": 0.9576271186440678, + "pred_md": "At the end of the evaporation, we have 10 5 atoms per spin state at a normalized temperature T T F = 0 11 . ± 0 02 where the Fermi temperature corresponds to the Fermi Energy, . E F = k T b F = ¯ hω (6 N ) 1 3 / where N is the total atom number in one spin state and ω = ( ω ω 2 r z ) 1 3 / and k b is the the Boltzmann constant. After the evaporation we increase the interaction strength adiabatically with a slow magnetic-field ramp to a Fano-Feshbach scattering resonance.\n\nThe momentum distribution of the fermions, n k ( ), is predicted to scale as 1 /k 4 at high k , with the contact being the coefficient of this high momentum tail. Following Tan [2], we define the integrated contact per particle for the trapped gas, which we will refer to simply as the contact, using\n\n\n\nHere, k is the wave number in units of the Fermi wave number, k F = 2 mE F ¯ h , and n k ( ) for a 50/50 spin mixture is normalized such that ∫ ∞ 0 n k ( ) (2 π ) 3 d k 3 = 0 5 . . Note that the contact is expected to be the same for both spin states in the interacting Fermi gas, even in the case of an imbalanced spin mixture. Theoretically, the contact is defined in the limit of 1 << k << 1 / k ( F r 0 ), where r 0 is the range of the interatomic potential. Using a typical value of k F = 1 2200 a -1 0 for our trapped 40 K gas and the van der Waals length, r 0 = 60 a 0 , we find 1 / k ( F r 0 ) = 37.\n\nWe directly measure n k ( ) using ballistic expansion of the trapped gas, where we turn off the interactions for the expansion. We accomplish this by rapidly sweeping the magnetic field to 209 2 G where . a vanishes, and then immediately turning off the external trapping potential [11]. We let the gas expand for 6 ms before taking an absorption image of the cloud. The probe light for the imaging propagates along the axial direction of the trap and thus we measure the radial momentum distribution. Assuming the momentum distribution is spherically symmetric, we obtain the full momentum distribution with an inverse Abel transform.\n\nFig. 1a shows an example n k ( ) for a strongly interacting gas measured with this technique. For this data, the dimensionless interactions strength ( k F a ) -1 , is -0 08 . ± 0 10. . Empirically, we find that the measured n k ( ) exhibits a 1 /k 4 tail and we extract the contact C from the average value of k n k 4 ( ) for k > k C where we use k C = 1 85 for ( . k F a ) -1 > -0 5, . and k C = 1 55 for ( . k F a ) -1 < -0 5. . One issue is whether or not the interactions are switched off sufficiently quickly to accurately measure the highk part of the n k ( ). The data in\n\n3", + "recall": 0.9617021276595744, + "true_md": "At the end of the evaporation, we have 10 5 atoms per spin state at a normalized temperature T T$_{F}$ = 0 . 11 ± 0 . 02 where the Fermi temperature corresponds to the Fermi Energy, E$_{F}$ = k$_{b}$T$_{F}$ = ¯ hω (6 N ) 1 / 3 where N is the total atom number in one spin state and ω = ( ω 2 $_{r}$ω$_{z}$ ) 1 / 3 and k$_{b}$ is the the Boltzmann constant. After the evaporation we increase the interaction strength adiabatically with a slow magnetic-field ramp to a Fano-Feshbach scattering resonance.\n\nThe momentum distribution of the fermions, n ( k ), is predicted to scale as 1 /k 4 at high k , with the contact being the coefficient of this high momentum tail. Following Tan [2], we define the integrated contact per particle for the trapped gas, which we will refer to simply as the contact, using\n\nHere, k is the wave number in units of the Fermi wave number, k$_{F}$ = 2 mE$_{F}$ ¯ h , and n ( k ) for a 50/50 spin mixture is normalized such that ∫ ∞ 0 n ( k ) (2 π ) 3 d $^{3}$k = 0 . 5 . Note that the contact is expected to be the same for both spin states in the interacting Fermi gas, even in the case of an imbalanced spin mixture. Theoretically, the contact is defined in the limit of 1 << k << 1 / ( k$_{F}$r$_{0}$ ), where r$_{0}$ is the range of the interatomic potential. Using a typical value of k$_{F}$ = 1 $_{2200}$a − 1 0 for our trapped $^{40}$K gas and the van der Waals length, r$_{0}$ = 60 a$_{0}$ , we find 1 / ( k$_{F}$r$_{0}$ ) = 37.\n\nWe directly measure n ( k ) using ballistic expansion of the trapped gas, where we turn off the interactions for the expansion. We accomplish this by rapidly sweeping the magnetic field to 209 . 2 G where a vanishes, and then immediately turning off the external trapping potential [11]. We let the gas expand for 6 ms before taking an absorption image of the cloud. The probe light for the imaging propagates along the axial direction of the trap and thus we measure the radial momentum distribution. Assuming the momentum distribution is spherically symmetric, we obtain the full momentum distribution with an inverse Abel transform.\n\nFig. 1a shows an example n ( k ) for a strongly interacting gas measured with this technique. For this data, the dimensionless interactions strength ( k$_{F}$a ) − $^{1}$, is − 0 . 08 ± 0 . 10. Empirically, we find that the measured n ( k ) exhibits a 1 /k 4 tail and we extract the contact C from the average value of k $^{4}$n ( k ) for k > k$_{C}$ where we use k$_{C}$ = 1 . 85 for ( k$_{F}$a ) − 1 > − 0 . 5, and k$_{C}$ = 1 . 55 for ( k$_{F}$a ) − 1 < − 0 . 5. One issue is whether or not the interactions are switched off sufficiently quickly to accurately measure the high- k part of the n ( k ). The data in\n\n3\n\n$$C = lim k $_{→∞}$k $^{4}$n ( k ) . (1)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4040368885392315, + "doc_id": "5538f0c950f2ff26ed75d981a130ed7856c1f5cfd51a957efa78bd162be4e92e", + "edit_distance": 0.5337620578778135, + "f1_score": 0.9037433155080213, + "meteor": 0.4970492450579893, + "precision": 0.949438202247191, + "pred_md": "with the constant\n\n\n\nwhere the mean-field link u 0 = P 1 4 / is obtained from the expectation value of the plaquette P . In Eqs. (39)-(41) we match A HQET and O HQET L at one-loop, but match O HQET S at tree-level. This is sufficient because the leading-order mixing between the continuum QCD operator O QCD L and the continuum HQET operator O HQET S is already of O ( α s ), and has no tree-level component. The lattice operators have the same form as in the continuum static effective theory\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nThe O pa ( ) derivative operator in the equation for the axial current is given by\n\n\n\nwhere we have simplified the expression using the equations-of-motion. The domain-wall specific renormalization factor Z MF w that enters the above equations was calculated perturbatively in Ref. [58].\n\nThe superscript 'MF' denotes mean-field improvement [59], in which we modify the bare lattice coupling using the value of the mean-field link. Use of this 'boosted' coupling as the new expansion parameter improves the convergence of lattice perturbation theory. The mean-field improved coupling α MF has several definitions which differ only at higher-order in perturbation theory than we consider. These differences enter our estimate of the systematic error in Section VI. Our choice for obtaining the mean-field improved coupling from the bare lattice coupling g 2 0 is\n\n\n\nwhere N f = 3 is the number of dynamical flavors. We use the plaquette value averaged over different light sea quark mass, P = 0 5881, because the difference in the value of . P for different light sea quark masses is less than 0 05% for the ensembles used in this work. . The constants d g = 0 1053 and . c p = 0 1401 were calculated for the Iwasaki gauge action in .\n\n14", + "recall": 0.8622448979591837, + "true_md": "with the constant\n\nwhere the mean-field link u$_{0}$ = P 1 / 4 is obtained from the expectation value of the plaquette P . In Eqs. (39)-(41) we match A HQET and O HQET L at one-loop, but match O HQET S at tree-level. This is sufficient because the leading-order mixing between the continuum QCD operator O QCD L and the continuum HQET operator O HQET S is already of O ( α$_{s}$ ), and has no tree-level component. The lattice operators have the same form as in the continuum static effective theory\n\nThe O ( pa ) derivative operator in the equation for the axial current is given by\n\n( ) where we have simplified the expression using the equations-of-motion. The domain-wall specific renormalization factor Z MF w that enters the above equations was calculated pertur- batively in Ref. [58].\n\nThe superscript “MF” denotes mean-field improvement [59], in which we modify the bare lattice coupling using the value of the mean-field link. Use of this “boosted” coupling as the new expansion parameter improves the convergence of lattice perturbation theory. The mean-field improved coupling α MF has several definitions which differ only at higher-order in perturbation theory than we consider. These differences enter our estimate of the systematic error in Section VI. Our choice for obtaining the mean-field improved coupling from the bare lattice coupling g 2 0 is\n\nwhere N$_{f}$ = 3 is the number of dynamical flavors. We use the plaquette value averaged over different light sea quark mass, P = 0 . 5881, because the difference in the value of P for different light sea quark masses is less than 0 . 05% for the ensembles used in this work. The constants d$_{g}$ = 0 . 1053 and c$_{p}$ = 0 . 1401 were calculated for the Iwasaki gauge action in\n\n$$1 ( g $^{MF}$)2 = P g 2 0 + d$_{g}$ + c$_{p}$ + N$_{f}$d$_{f}$, (47)$$\n\n$$A lat ∂, 0 = ∂$_{0}$ ( hγ$_{5}$q ) , (46) where we have simplified the expression using the equations-of-motion. The domain-wall$$\n\n$$O lat S = [ h (1 − γ$_{5}$ ) q ][ h (1 − γ$_{5}$ ) q ] . (45)$$\n\n$$O lat L = [ hγ$_{µ}$ (1 − γ$_{5}$ ) q ][ hγ$_{µ}$ (1 − γ$_{5}$ ) q ] , (44)$$\n\n$$A lat 0 = hγ$_{0}$γ$_{5}$q, (43)$$\n\n$$w MF 0 = 1 − M$_{5}$ + 4(1 − u$_{0}$ ) , (42)$$\n\n14" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7265481383699783, + "doc_id": "4f50c23946c02653fa9c63299416d610da8007a69e32ff3ee7a2e23b027b06bc", + "edit_distance": 0.18328445747800587, + "f1_score": 0.959830866807611, + "meteor": 0.8359818348881752, + "precision": 0.9742489270386266, + "pred_md": "## I. INTRODUCTION\n\nIt has been more than ten years since our universe was found to be in accelerating expansion [1]. A dominated and uniformly distributed energy component of the universe, called dark energy (DE), should be responsible for the acceleration. Many DE models have been proposed [2-6]. The simplest cosmological model is ΛCDM model, which contains a cosmological constant as dark energy. While ΛCDM model is still consistent well with all observational data, a lot of efforts have been made to find out whether DE is time-evolving or is just the cosmological constant. To do that, several parameterizations of equation of state (EoS) of DE have been proposed to fit with observational data, such as the ansatz w de = w 0 + w z ' [7], the EoS expanded by redshift, and the CPL parametrization [8, 9] w de = w 0 + w z/ a (1+ z ), expanded by scale factor. Both of them contain two free parameters: w 0 , the present value of EoS, and w ' or w a , represents the time evolution of EoS. Clearly, constraints of EoS obtained by using these parameterizations are model-dependent. Given an unreal assumption of EoS of DE, one may lead to wrong conclusions. Some modelindependent methods have also been proposed [10-13], such as the widely-used uncorrelated bandpower estimates (UBE) [11, 14], in which the redshift is binned and w de is assumed as a constant in each redshift bin. Note that the UBE method just approximates the actual w de by an averaged constant in each bin if DE is dynamical. If there are sufficient data, w de ( z ) can be accurately reconstructed. However, current data could only support a few bins, thus UBE is always used to test the deviation of w de from the cosmological constant and used as a supplementary for the parameterizations of w de . Note that the cubic-spline interpolation has also been proposed to study the binned w de ( z ) [15, 16]. However, no convincing evidence of dynamic DE has been found [15-17]. In addition, let us note that the ansatz, w de = w 0 + w z ' , of redshift expansion and CPL parametrization exclude the possibility of an oscillation EoS, if they are used to fit the whole expansion history of the universe. While the UBE method needs enough bins to reveal the real dynamical behavior of DE, the errors will get larger as the number of bins increases.\n\nIn this paper, we would like to probe the dynamical behavior of w de by using the linearspline method. We will approximate w de in each redshift bin by a linear function w = w 0 + w z ' , and require that w de ( z ) is continuous in the region under consideration. Since most of data we used (e.g., SnIa data) are in low redshift, we will focus on the region of low\n\n2", + "recall": 0.9458333333333333, + "true_md": "## I. INTRODUCTION\n\nIt has been more than ten years since our universe was found to be in accelerating expansion [1]. A dominated and uniformly distributed energy component of the universe, called dark energy (DE), should be responsible for the acceleration. Many DE models have been proposed [2–6]. The simplest cosmological model is ΛCDM model, which contains a cosmological constant as dark energy. While ΛCDM model is still consistent well with all observational data, a lot of efforts have been made to find out whether DE is time-evolving or is just the cosmological constant. To do that, several parameterizations of equation of state (EoS) of DE have been proposed to fit with observational data, such as the ansatz w$_{de}$ = w$_{0}$ + w $^{′}$z [7], the EoS expanded by redshift, and the CPL parametrization [8, 9] w$_{de}$ = w$_{0}$ + w$_{a}$z/ (1+ z ), expanded by scale factor. Both of them contain two free parameters: w$_{0}$ , the present value of EoS, and w ′ or w$_{a}$ , represents the time evolution of EoS. Clearly, constraints of EoS obtained by using these parameterizations are model-dependent. Given an unreal assumption of EoS of DE, one may lead to wrong conclusions. Some model- independent methods have also been proposed [10–13], such as the widely-used uncorrelated bandpower estimates (UBE) [11, 14], in which the redshift is binned and w$_{de}$ is assumed as a constant in each redshift bin. Note that the UBE method just approximates the actual w$_{de}$ by an averaged constant in each bin if DE is dynamical. If there are sufficient data, w$_{de}$ ( z ) can be accurately reconstructed. However, current data could only support a few bins, thus UBE is always used to test the deviation of w$_{de}$ from the cosmological constant and used as a supplementary for the parameterizations of w$_{de}$ . Note that the cubic-spline interpolation has also been proposed to study the binned w$_{de}$ ( z ) [15, 16]. However, no convincing evidence of dynamic DE has been found [15–17]. In addition, let us note that the ansatz, w$_{de}$ = w$_{0}$ + w $^{′}$z , of redshift expansion and CPL parametrization exclude the possibility of an oscillation EoS, if they are used to fit the whole expansion history of the universe. While the UBE method needs enough bins to reveal the real dynamical behavior of DE, the errors will get larger as the number of bins increases.\n\nIn this paper, we would like to probe the dynamical behavior of w$_{de}$ by using the linear- spline method. We will approximate w$_{de}$ in each redshift bin by a linear function w = w$_{0}$ + w $^{′}$z , and require that w$_{de}$ ( z ) is continuous in the region under consideration. Since most of data we used (e.g., SnIa data) are in low redshift, we will focus on the region of low\n\n2" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7646329908182611, + "doc_id": "a8c3bb5e07b47e5de01e140557812381fc3b64306d35363a30b0477b72d5745e", + "edit_distance": 0.17708333333333334, + "f1_score": 0.9209302325581393, + "meteor": 0.8393126934356042, + "precision": 0.9519230769230769, + "pred_md": "## Abstract\n\nWe have investigated the isoscalar giant resonances in the Sn isotopes using inelastic scattering of 386-MeV α -particles at extremely forward angles, including 0 . · We have obtained completely 'background-free' inelastic-scattering spectra for the Sn isotopes over the angular range 0 -9 · · and up to an excitation energy of 31.5 MeV. The strength distributions for various multipoles were extracted by a multipole decomposition analysis based on the expected angular distributions of the respective multipoles. We find that the centroid energies of the isoscalar giant monopole resonance (ISGMR) in the Sn isotopes are significantly lower than the theoretical predictions. In addition, based on the ISGMR results, a value of K τ = -550 ± 100 MeV is obtained for the asymmetry term in the nuclear incompressibility. Constraints on interactions employed in nuclear structure calculations are discussed on the basis of the experimentally-obtained values for K ∞ and K τ .\n\n2", + "recall": 0.8918918918918919, + "true_md": "## Abstract\n\nWe have investigated the isoscalar giant resonances in the Sn isotopes using inelastic scattering of 386-MeV α -particles at extremely forward angles, including 0 $^{◦}$. We have obtained completely “background-free” inelastic-scattering spectra for the Sn isotopes over the angular range 0 $^{◦}$-9◦ and up to an excitation energy of 31.5 MeV. The strength distributions for various multipoles were extracted by a multipole decomposition analysis based on the expected angular distributions of the respective multipoles. We find that the centroid energies of the isoscalar giant monopole resonance (ISGMR) in the Sn isotopes are significantly lower than the theoretical predictions. In addition, based on the ISGMR results, a value of K$_{τ}$ = − 550 ± 100 MeV is obtained for the asymmetry term in the nuclear incompressibility. Constraints on interactions employed in nuclear structure calculations are discussed on the basis of the experimentally-obtained values for K$_{∞}$ and K$_{τ}$ .\n\n2" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9796212664291131, + "doc_id": "4df0ebb6bd218042758b9d1eb744b9470ef1c48f288088fbd2c9489080b5d8e7", + "edit_distance": 0.02247191011235955, + "f1_score": 0.9829683698296837, + "meteor": 0.9912320030698691, + "precision": 0.9853658536585366, + "pred_md": "more detail on the local field distribution in the simplest 'magic shape' that can be cut out of a triangular lattice-a six-point star with an atom at the center.\n\nIn the case where the incident field is polarized normally to the lattice, we found that locsitons bear more analogy to locsitons in 1D arrays of atoms, compared to the case of an in-plane polarization. Finally, we illustrated the role of lattice defects in supporting localized locsitons.\n\nWhile this paper does not elaborate on nonlinear effects involving 2D locsitons, to be addressed in our future publications, we note that, similarly to the 1D case [1, 2], our numerical simulations have shown optical bistability and hysteresis, which may be especially important for potential applications of 2D locsitons in designing all-dielectric nanoscale logic elements, devices for signal processing, etc.\n\n## Acknowledgments\n\nThis work is supported by US AFOSR.\n\n- [1] A. E. Kaplan and S. N. Volkov, Phys. Rev. Lett. 101 , 133902 (2008).\n- [2] A. E. Kaplan and S. N. Volkov, Phys. Rev. A 79 , 053834 (2009).\n- [3] M. Born and E. Wolf, Principles of Optics , (Pergamon, Oxford, 1980), Ch. 2 and references therein.\n- [4] H. A. Lorentz, Ann. Phys. Chem. 9 , 641 (1880).\n- [5] L. Lorenz, Ann. Phys. Chem. 11 , 70 (1881).\n- [6] A. Aharoni, Introduction to the Theory of Ferromagnetism (Oxford Univ. Press, Oxford, 2001).\n- [7] C. Kittel, Introduction to Solid State Physics (Wiley, New York, 1996).\n- [8] V. M. Shalaev, W. Cai, U. K. Chettiar, H.-K. Yuan, A. K. Sarychev, V. P. Drachev, and A. V. Kildishev, Opt. Lett. 30 , 3356 (2005).\n- [9] V. A. Markel and A. K. Sarychev, Phys. Rev. B 75 , 085426 (2007).\n- [10] V. B. Sandomirskii, Sov. Phys. JETP 25 , 101 (1967).\n- [11] V. Chernyak, S. N. Volkov, and S. Mukamel, Phys. Rev. Lett. 86 , 995 (2001).\n\n25", + "recall": 0.9805825242718447, + "true_md": "more detail on the local field distribution in the simplest “magic shape” that can be cut out of a triangular lattice—a six-point star with an atom at the center.\n\nIn the case where the incident field is polarized normally to the lattice, we found that locsitons bear more analogy to locsitons in 1D arrays of atoms, compared to the case of an in-plane polarization. Finally, we illustrated the role of lattice defects in supporting localized locsitons.\n\nWhile this paper does not elaborate on nonlinear effects involving 2D locsitons, to be addressed in our future publications, we note that, similarly to the 1D case [1, 2], our numerical simulations have shown optical bistability and hysteresis, which may be especially important for potential applications of 2D locsitons in designing all-dielectric nanoscale logic elements, devices for signal processing, etc.\n\nThis work is supported by US AFOSR.\n\n## Acknowledgments\n\n- [1] A. E. Kaplan and S. N. Volkov, Phys. Rev. Lett. 101 , 133902 (2008).\n\n- [2] A. E. Kaplan and S. N. Volkov, Phys. Rev. A 79 , 053834 (2009).\n\n- [3] M. Born and E. Wolf, Principles of Optics , (Pergamon, Oxford, 1980), Ch. 2 and references therein.\n\n- [4] H. A. Lorentz, Ann. Phys. Chem. 9 , 641 (1880).\n\n- [5] L. Lorenz, Ann. Phys. Chem. 11 , 70 (1881).\n\n- [6] A. Aharoni, Introduction to the Theory of Ferromagnetism (Oxford Univ. Press, Oxford, 2001).\n\n- [7] C. Kittel, Introduction to Solid State Physics (Wiley, New York, 1996).\n\n- [8] V. M. Shalaev, W. Cai, U. K. Chettiar, H.-K. Yuan, A. K. Sarychev, V. P. Drachev, and A. V. Kildishev, Opt. Lett. 30 , 3356 (2005).\n\n- [9] V. A. Markel and A. K. Sarychev, Phys. Rev. B 75 , 085426 (2007).\n\n- [10] V. B. Sandomirskii, Sov. Phys. JETP 25 , 101 (1967).\n\n- [11] V. Chernyak, S. N. Volkov, and S. Mukamel, Phys. Rev. Lett. 86 , 995 (2001).\n\n25" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.943227294670346, + "doc_id": "316ae2f8542e64e2f11fb7b8b75bb76e15f24f73e934d644775064a636a4ff6b", + "edit_distance": 0.1004566210045662, + "f1_score": 0.9951690821256038, + "meteor": 0.9915678426269456, + "precision": 0.9951690821256038, + "pred_md": "## B. NUMERICAL METHOD.\n\nAcode based on the Crank-Nicholson algorithm was developed to solve the TBC problem. All of the code was written in the C programming language and the calculations were performed on a LINUX workstation using the GNU compiler. The major effort has gone into adapting the techniques of TBCs because it is complicated by the fact that the boundary condition is non-local in the time, but rather depends on a convolution related to fractional calculus that cannot be treated by standard techniques. The standard algorithm had to be modified to include the non-local, time dependent boundary conditions, which now have to be updated at each time step. To solve the Schrödinger equation on the finite interval, the LU decomposition method was employed. The function libraries were obtained from the open source literature for the GNU compiler.\n\n## C. COMPARISON OF THE METHODS.\n\nThe first set of plots compare the real part of the wave function for both methods at the same time steps t = 0 1 . , t = 0 2 . , and t = 1 4 . as shown in figures 2 and 3.\n\nThe second set of plots, figures 4 and 5, compare the imaginary part of the wave function for both methods at the same time steps t = 0 01 . , t = 0 1 . , and t = 1 4 . .\n\nThe comparison between the plots for each method shows an excellent agreement as we expected. This confirms the adequate implementation of the numerical method for a QIVP. Therefore, the basis can be established for a more complex version of the RTBC .\n\n## IV. CONCLUSIONS.\n\nIn this work we investigated the problem of solving the time dependent Schrodinger equation within a confined region when a constraint is suddenly removed. We accomplished two important goals; the first one is of physical significance. We determined the wave function at any time t, and therefore provided all the physical information for the evolution of the EP within the trap. Therefore, we are able to extract important physical properties of the system such as the mean fraction of mass inside the region, which is called the survival probability, as well as the time dependence of the properties of the particle kinetic energy, potential energy, the total energy, etc.. Since it is assumed that the particle density in the\n\n14", + "recall": 0.9951690821256038, + "true_md": "## B. NUMERICAL METHOD.\n\n## C. COMPARISON OF THE METHODS.\n\n## IV. CONCLUSIONS.\n\n14\n\nA code based on the Crank-Nicholson algorithm was developed to solve the TBC problem. All of the code was written in the C programming language and the calculations were performed on a LINUX workstation using the GNU compiler. The major effort has gone into adapting the techniques of TBCs because it is complicated by the fact that the boundary condition is non-local in the time, but rather depends on a convolution related to fractional calculus that cannot be treated by standard techniques. The standard algorithm had to be modified to include the non-local, time dependent boundary conditions, which now have to be updated at each time step. To solve the Schrödinger equation on the finite interval, the LU decomposition method was employed. The function libraries were obtained from the open source literature for the GNU compiler.\n\nThe first set of plots compare the real part of the wave function for both methods at the same time steps t = 0 . 1 , t = 0 . 2 , and t = 1 . 4 as shown in figures 2 and 3.\n\nThe second set of plots, figures 4 and 5, compare the imaginary part of the wave function for both methods at the same time steps t = 0 . 01 , t = 0 . 1 , and t = 1 . 4 .\n\nThe comparison between the plots for each method shows an excellent agreement as we expected. This confirms the adequate implementation of the numerical method for a QIVP. Therefore, the basis can be established for a more complex version of the RTBC .\n\nIn this work we investigated the problem of solving the time dependent Schrodinger equation within a confined region when a constraint is suddenly removed. We accomplished two important goals; the first one is of physical significance. We determined the wave function at any time t, and therefore provided all the physical information for the evolution of the EP within the trap. Therefore, we are able to extract important physical properties of the system such as the mean fraction of mass inside the region, which is called the survival probability, as well as the time dependence of the properties of the particle kinetic energy, potential energy, the total energy, etc.. Since it is assumed that the particle density in the" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5957155571586787, + "doc_id": "bdbbad02576c2a3a3c98fe0a4918d7032b319a1a4222a663d5ff17df370eed90", + "edit_distance": 0.2923076923076923, + "f1_score": 0.9844357976653697, + "meteor": 0.7412813154174822, + "precision": 0.9960629921259843, + "pred_md": "trend such that by δ = 0.01, it is located clearly below the Dirac node (Fig. 2(e)) and intersects the hole-like bulk valence band. The systematic lowering of E F with increasing δ in Bi 2 -δ Ca Se δ 3 observed in early time ARPES measurements (Figs 2(i)-(k)), which reflect the electronic structure of the sample bulk, consistently explain the measured transport behavior. However, we observe that E F rises back up over time across all samples such that all spectra relax back to a δ = 0 like spectrum on a typical time scale of 18 hours (Fig. 2(l)). Such a slow upward shift of the surface Fermi level has been observed also in Bi Te 2 3 [17] and is due to a surface band bending effect commonly observed in most semiconductors (SI). Therefore, although bulk Ca doping succeeds in tuning E F between the bulk valence and conduction bands, it does not change the position of E F relative to the surface Dirac point in the ground state.\n\nBecause the surface Dirac point in the ground state of most insulating Bi 1 9975 . Ca 0 0025 . Se 3 lies ∼ 0.3 eV below E F , its electronic structure is still not in the much desired topological transport regime. To bring the surface Dirac point level with E F in Bi 2 -δ Ca Se , we show δ 3 that hole carriers can be systematically introduced into the surface by dosing with NO 2 molecules, which has been demonstrated in graphene [27, 28]. Figure 3 shows that with increasing surface hole donor concentration, the binding energy of the surface Dirac point rises monotonically towards E F . Starting from E B ∼ -0.3 eV at a 0 Langmuir (L) dose, it rises to -0.15 eV at 0.1 L where the surface bent CBM has completely disappeared, and finally to the charge neutrality point ( E B = 0 eV) at 2 L. No further changes of the chemical potential are observed with higher dosages. To quantify the surface carrier density ( n ) dependence on surface hole donor concentration, we mapped the surface state FS in Figures 3(a)-(c) and performed an electron count based on FS area n = A FS / A BZ , where A FS is the area of the FS and A BZ is the area of the surface Brillouin zone. We find that 0.1 L of NO 2 removes approximately 0.0066 electrons per surface unit cell of Bi 2 -δ Ca Se δ 3 (111), and an excess of 2 L reduces the FS to a single point within our experimental resolution, which has an additional 0.005 electrons per unit cell removed. Because surface doping does not affect the carrier density in the bulk (which thus remains insulating), the energy of the Dirac point is lifted above the bulk VBM; a new time independent electronic ground state is realized that lies in the topological transport regime with E F intersecting the Dirac node.\n\nIn order to investigate the thermal stability of this nodal Dirac ground state (Fig. 4(e)), temperature dependent ARPES scans were collected on Bi 2 -δ Ca Se δ 3 samples that were first\n\n7", + "recall": 0.9730769230769231, + "true_md": "trend such that by δ = 0.01, it is located clearly below the Dirac node (Fig. 2(e)) and intersects the hole-like bulk valence band. The systematic lowering of E$_{F}$ with increasing δ in Bi$_{2}$$\\_{−}$$_{δ}$Ca$_{δ}$Se$_{3}$ observed in early time ARPES measurements (Figs 2(i)-(k)), which reflect the electronic structure of the sample bulk, consistently explain the measured transport behavior. However, we observe that E$_{F}$ rises back up over time across all samples such that all spectra relax back to a δ = 0 like spectrum on a typical time scale of 18 hours (Fig. 2(l)). Such a slow upward shift of the surface Fermi level has been observed also in Bi$_{2}$Te$_{3}$ [17] and is due to a surface band bending effect commonly observed in most semiconductors (SI). Therefore, although bulk Ca doping succeeds in tuning E$_{F}$ between the bulk valence and conduction bands, it does not change the position of E$_{F}$ relative to the surface Dirac point in the ground state.\n\nBecause the surface Dirac point in the ground state of most insulating Bi$_{1}$$\\_{.}$$_{9975}$Ca$_{0}$$\\_{.}$$_{0025}$Se$_{3}$ lies ∼ 0.3 eV below E$_{F}$ , its electronic structure is still not in the much desired topological transport regime. To bring the surface Dirac point level with E$_{F}$ in Bi$_{2}$$\\_{−}$$_{δ}$Ca$_{δ}$Se$_{3}$, we show that hole carriers can be systematically introduced into the surface by dosing with NO$_{2}$ molecules, which has been demonstrated in graphene [27, 28]. Figure 3 shows that with increasing surface hole donor concentration, the binding energy of the surface Dirac point rises monotonically towards E$_{F}$ . Starting from E$_{B}$ ∼ -0.3 eV at a 0 Langmuir (L) dose, it rises to -0.15 eV at 0.1 L where the surface bent CBM has completely disappeared, and finally to the charge neutrality point ( E$_{B}$ = 0 eV) at 2 L. No further changes of the chemical potential are observed with higher dosages. To quantify the surface carrier density ( n ) dependence on surface hole donor concentration, we mapped the surface state FS in Figures 3(a)-(c) and performed an electron count based on FS area n = A$_{F S}$ / A$_{BZ}$ , where A$_{F S}$ is the area of the FS and A$_{BZ}$ is the area of the surface Brillouin zone. We find that 0.1 L of NO$_{2}$ removes approximately 0.0066 electrons per surface unit cell of Bi$_{2}$$\\_{−}$$_{δ}$Ca$_{δ}$Se$_{3}$ (111), and an excess of 2 L reduces the FS to a single point within our experimental resolution, which has an additional 0.005 electrons per unit cell removed. Because surface doping does not affect the carrier density in the bulk (which thus remains insulating), the energy of the Dirac point is lifted above the bulk VBM; a new time independent electronic ground state is realized that lies in the topological transport regime with E$_{F}$ intersecting the Dirac node.\n\nIn order to investigate the thermal stability of this nodal Dirac ground state (Fig. 4(e)), temperature dependent ARPES scans were collected on Bi$_{2}$$\\_{−}$$_{δ}$Ca$_{δ}$Se$_{3}$ samples that were first\n\n7" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8567048360566343, + "doc_id": "7d071a8efd1b507aa4522f2cbfda0e23a407eaf3c4e363e18032d3303d587e6f", + "edit_distance": 0.08823529411764706, + "f1_score": 0.9258160237388723, + "meteor": 0.914006499878161, + "precision": 0.9341317365269461, + "pred_md": "33\n\nstate and its topology change,' JHEP 0903 , 121 (2009) [arXiv:0901.4073 [hep-th]].\n\n- [36] D. N. Kabat and W. Taylor, 'Spherical membranes in matrix theory,' Adv. Theor. Math. Phys. 2 , 181 (1998) [arXiv:hep-th/9711078].\n- [37] J. McGreevy, L. Susskind and N. Toumbas, 'Invasion of the giant gravitons from anti-de Sitter space,' JHEP 0006 , 008 (2000) [arXiv:hep-th/0003075].\n- [38] I. R. Klebanov and M. J. Strassler, 'Supergravity and a confining gauge theory: Duality cascades and chiSB-resolution of naked singularities,' JHEP 0008 , 052 (2000) [arXiv:hepth/0007191].\n- [39] C. Vafa, 'Superstrings and topological strings at large N,' J. Math. Phys. 42 , 2798 (2001) [arXiv:hep-th/0008142].\n- [40] D. Berenstein, 'A toy model for the AdS/CFT correspondence,' JHEP 0407 , 018 (2004) [arXiv:hep-th/0403110].\n- [41] R. d. M. Koch and J. Murugan, 'Emergent Spacetime,' arXiv:0911.4817 [hep-th].\n- [42] G. 't Hooft, 'A planar theory for strong interactions,' Nucl. Phys. B 72 , 461 (1974).\n- [43] H. Y. Chen, D. H. Correa and G. A. Silva, 'Geometry and topology of bubble solutions from gauge theory,' Phys. Rev. D 76 , 026003 (2007) [arXiv:hep-th/0703068].\n- [44] V. Balasubramanian, B. Czech, K. Larjo and J. Simon, 'Integrability vs. information loss: A simple example,' JHEP 0611 , 001 (2006) [arXiv:hep-th/0602263].\n- [45] L. G. Yaffe, 'Large N Limits As Classical Mechanics,' Rev. Mod. Phys. 54 , 407 (1982).", + "recall": 0.9176470588235294, + "true_md": "33\n\nstate and its topology change,” JHEP 0903 , 121 (2009) [arXiv:0901.4073 [hep-th]].\n\n- [36] D. N. Kabat and W. Taylor, “Spherical membranes in matrix theory,” Adv. Theor. Math. Phys. 2 , 181 (1998) [arXiv:hep-th/9711078].\n\n- [37] J. McGreevy, L. Susskind and N. Toumbas, “Invasion of the giant gravitons from anti-de Sitter space,” JHEP 0006 , 008 (2000) [arXiv:hep-th/0003075].\n\n- [38] I. R. Klebanov and M. J. Strassler, “Supergravity and a confining gauge theory: Duality cascades and chiSB-resolution of naked singularities,” JHEP 0008 , 052 (2000) [arXiv:hep- th/0007191].\n\n- [39] C. Vafa, “Superstrings and topological strings at large N,” J. Math. Phys. 42 , 2798 (2001) [arXiv:hep-th/0008142].\n\n- [40] D. Berenstein, “A toy model for the AdS/CFT correspondence,” JHEP 0407 , 018 (2004) [arXiv:hep-th/0403110].\n\n- [41] R. d. M. Koch and J. Murugan, “Emergent Spacetime,” arXiv:0911.4817 [hep-th].\n\n- [42] G. ’t Hooft, “A planar theory for strong interactions,” Nucl. Phys. B 72 , 461 (1974).\n\n- [43] H. Y. Chen, D. H. Correa and G. A. Silva, “Geometry and topology of bubble solutions from gauge theory,” Phys. Rev. D 76 , 026003 (2007) [arXiv:hep-th/0703068].\n\n- [44] V. Balasubramanian, B. Czech, K. Larjo and J. Simon, “Integrability vs. information loss: A simple example,” JHEP 0611 , 001 (2006) [arXiv:hep-th/0602263].\n\n- [45] L. G. Yaffe, “Large N Limits As Classical Mechanics,” Rev. Mod. Phys. 54 , 407 (1982)." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6718852011569888, + "doc_id": "9274abc0ff803058bf600b9a158b3e65cd78f2e65e0d687f35f3abefb544b0e2", + "edit_distance": 0.26657458563535913, + "f1_score": 0.9620253164556962, + "meteor": 0.757485539354317, + "precision": 0.9702127659574468, + "pred_md": "group velocity of the locsiton, v gr = ( l a /T )( dδ/d q ), by taking a derivative of Eq. (16). Due to the anisotropy of Eq. (16), one may expect that the resulting dissipation and group velocity are highly dependent on the orientation of q with respect to E in .\n\nBy its nature, the NRA only works well for long-wave locsitons, i. e., those with relatively small q . Indeed, for a long-wave locsiton, the LF at neighboring atoms differs insignificantly, so one may reasonably expect that replacing the neighboring dipoles at their actual positions with an effective dipole ring will not cause a significant change to the result. Our results obtained without resorting to the NRA (see Sec. III B), suggest that the NRA provides a good quantitative description of locsitons for q < π/ ∼ 2, while it gives reasonable qualitative estimates for q up to ∼ π . One may use the two first terms from the Taylor series expansion to analyze Eq. (16) at small q , which is easy to do by recalling that J 0 ( q ) = 1 -1 4 q 2 + O q ( 4 ) and J 2 ( q ) = 1 8 q 2 + O q ( 4 ) [cf. Eq. (21.8-3) in Ref. [16]], so that\n\n\n\nIn the long-wavelength limit, D NRA 2 ( q = 0 ) = 1 is reached at δ = δ LL , yielding the uniform, Lorentz, solution for the LF. The second term in the r. h. s. of Eq. (17) indicates that the anisotropy with respect to the locsiton polarization shows up even at very small q , where Eqs. (16) and (17) can be rewritten as\n\n\n\nNote that in describing locsitons at very small q (i. e., for δ ≈ δ LL ), the imaginary unit in the last formula cannot always be neglected compared to δ -δ LL . The locsiton dissipation in this case may become significant, depending on δ LL , and the necessity of considering complex q could appreciably complicate calculations. We will not go into the details of this special case in the present paper.\n\nIn 1D arrays of atoms, the Lorentz resonance, δ = δ LL , always coincides with one of the edges of the locsiton frequency band [1, 2]. In that case, when one tunes the frequency of the incident laser beam towards ω 0 from the side of the Lorentz resonance, locsitons with the longest wavelength emerge first very close to the Lorentz resonance. The locsiton wavelength subsequently decreases as we approach and move past ω 0 . In a 2D lattice, the Lorentz resonance lies within the locsiton band, which means that, when similarly tuning the laser frequency towards ω 0 , short-wave locsitons will be excited first. In particular,\n\n13", + "recall": 0.9539748953974896, + "true_md": "group velocity of the locsiton, v$_{gr}$ = ( l a /T )( dδ/d q ), by taking a derivative of Eq. (16). Due to the anisotropy of Eq. (16), one may expect that the resulting dissipation and group velocity are highly dependent on the orientation of q with respect to E$_{in}$ .\n\nBy its nature, the NRA only works well for long-wave locsitons, i. e., those with relatively small q . Indeed, for a long-wave locsiton, the LF at neighboring atoms differs insignificantly, so one may reasonably expect that replacing the neighboring dipoles at their actual positions with an effective dipole ring will not cause a significant change to the result. Our results obtained without resorting to the NRA (see Sec. III B), suggest that the NRA provides a good quantitative description of locsitons for q < ∼ π/ 2, while it gives reasonable qualitative estimates for q up to ∼ π . One may use the two first terms from the Taylor series expansion to analyze Eq. (16) at small q , which is easy to do by recalling that J$_{0}$ ( q ) = 1 − 1 $_{4}$q$^{2}$+ O ( q $^{4}$) and J$_{2}$ ( q ) = 1 $_{8}$q 2 + O ( q $^{4}$) [cf. Eq. (21.8-3) in Ref. [16]], so that\n\nIn the long-wavelength limit, D NRA 2 ( q = 0 ) = 1 is reached at δ = δ$_{LL}$ , yielding the uniform, Lorentz, solution for the LF. The second term in the r. h. s. of Eq. (17) indicates that the anisotropy with respect to the locsiton polarization shows up even at very small q , where Eqs. (16) and (17) can be rewritten as\n\nNote that in describing locsitons at very small q (i. e., for δ ≈ δ$_{LL}$ ), the imaginary unit in the last formula cannot always be neglected compared to δ − δ$_{LL}$ . The locsiton dissipation in this case may become significant, depending on δ$_{LL}$ , and the necessity of considering complex q could appreciably complicate calculations. We will not go into the details of this special case in the present paper.\n\nIn 1D arrays of atoms, the Lorentz resonance, δ = δ$_{LL}$ , always coincides with one of the edges of the locsiton frequency band [1, 2]. In that case, when one tunes the frequency of the incident laser beam towards ω$_{0}$ from the side of the Lorentz resonance, locsitons with the longest wavelength emerge first very close to the Lorentz resonance. The locsiton wavelength subsequently decreases as we approach and move past ω$_{0}$ . In a 2D lattice, the Lorentz resonance lies within the locsiton band, which means that, when similarly tuning the laser frequency towards ω$_{0}$ , short-wave locsitons will be excited first. In particular,\n\n$$D NRA 2 ( q ) ≈ 1 − 1 8 q $^{2}$[2 + 3 cos(2 ψ )] + O ( q $^{4}$) . (17)$$\n\n$$q 2 = − 8 2 + 3 cos(2 ψ ) ( δ − δ$_{LL}$ ) + i δ$_{LL}$ . (18)$$\n\n13" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6339033575370968, + "doc_id": "33ca1182c026ccaa1f9e75042f17f8a153c532a1687b3273327caa4a31401d4c", + "edit_distance": 0.48517520215633425, + "f1_score": 0.9531250000000001, + "meteor": 0.6970565380371043, + "precision": 0.976, + "pred_md": "prior to multipole decomposition. Cross sections for exciting the IVGDR were obtained with DWBA calculations on the basis of the Goldhaber-Teller model and using the strength distribution obtained from photonuclear work [55].\n\nFigs. 7 and 8 show the MDA fits to the experimental angular distributions of the differential cross sections for the 16.5-MeV and 25.5-MeV energy bins in the inelastic-scattering spectra of 112 Sn and 124 Sn, respectively, along with the contributions from the L =0, 1 and 2 multipoles. The ISGMR contribution is dominant in comparison to the other multipoles at E =16.5 MeV. On the other hand, the ISGDR is the dominant contributor at E =25.5 x x MeV.\n\nFIG. 7: Angular distribution of 1-MeV bins centered at E =16.5 x MeV for 112 Sn( α α , ' ) and 124 Sn( α α , ' ). The solid squares are the experimental data and the solid lines are the MDA fits to the data. Also shown are the contributions to the fits from L =0 (dashed line), L =1 (dotted line), L =2 (dash-dotted line) and L =3 (small-dashed line) multipoles, as well as from the IVGDR (dash-dot-dotted line).\n\nFIG. 7: Angular distribution of 1-MeV bins centered at E =16.5 x MeV for 112 Sn( α α , ' ) and 124 Sn( α α , ' ). The solid squares are the experimental data and the solid lines are the MDA fits to the data. Also shown are the contributions to the fits from L =0 (dashed line), L =1 (dotted line), L =2 (dash-dotted line) and L =3 (small-dashed line) multipoles, as well as from the IVGDR (dash-dot-dotted line).\n\n## IV. RESULTS AND DISCUSSION\n\nWe have extracted strength distributions for L =0, 1, 2, and 3 multipoles over the energy range 8.5 MeV-31.5 MeV in all the Sn isotopes investigated in this work. These are displayed\n\n11", + "recall": 0.9312977099236641, + "true_md": "prior to multipole decomposition. Cross sections for exciting the IVGDR were obtained with DWBA calculations on the basis of the Goldhaber-Teller model and using the strength distribution obtained from photonuclear work [55].\n\nFigs. 7 and 8 show the MDA fits to the experimental angular distributions of the differ- ential cross sections for the 16.5-MeV and 25.5-MeV energy bins in the inelastic-scattering spectra of $^{112}$Sn and $^{124}$Sn, respectively, along with the contributions from the L =0, 1 and 2 multipoles. The ISGMR contribution is dominant in comparison to the other multipoles at E$_{x}$=16.5 MeV. On the other hand, the ISGDR is the dominant contributor at E$_{x}$=25.5 MeV.\n\nWe have extracted strength distributions for L =0, 1, 2, and 3 multipoles over the energy range 8.5 MeV–31.5 MeV in all the Sn isotopes investigated in this work. These are displayed\n\nFIG. 7: Angular distribution of 1-MeV bins centered at E$_{x}$=16.5 MeV for $^{112}$Sn( α , α $^{′}$) and $^{124}$Sn( α , α $^{′}$). The solid squares are the experimental data and the solid lines are the MDA fits to the data. Also shown are the contributions to the fits from L =0 (dashed line), L =1 (dotted line), L =2 (dash-dotted line) and L =3 (small-dashed line) multipoles, as well as from the IVGDR (dash-dot-dotted line).\n\n## IV. RESULTS AND DISCUSSION\n\n11" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7572889587033081, + "doc_id": "c9ab3f20494576593d686c874345a95bf26a3ec3b10ccb25aae9aaeb5798ea5c", + "edit_distance": 0.14965986394557823, + "f1_score": 0.9552238805970149, + "meteor": 0.9594400677203422, + "precision": 0.9846153846153847, + "pred_md": "˜ σ 0 > 0, are also indicated in the smaller figures.\n\nFig. 2: ˜ V '' (˜) a > 0 plot for m = 1 0, . q = 1 5. The stability region is seen clearly to shrink . with the increasing charge. This effect reflects also to the ˜ σ 0 > 0 , behavior.\n\nFig. 3: The stability region for m = 1 0, . q = 2 0, is seen to shift outward and get smaller. .\n\nFig. 4: For fixed mass m = 1 0 but increased charge . q = 2 5 it is clearly seen that the . stability region and the associated energy density both get further reduced.\n\n11", + "recall": 0.927536231884058, + "true_md": "11\n\n˜ σ 0 > 0, are also indicated in the smaller figures.\n\nFig. 2: ˜ V $^{′′}$(˜ a ) > 0 plot for m = 1 . 0, q = 1 . 5. The stability region is seen clearly to shrink with the increasing charge. This effect reflects also to the ˜ σ 0 > 0 , behavior.\n\nFig. 3: The stability region for m = 1 . 0, q = 2 . 0, is seen to shift outward and get smaller.\n\nFig. 4: For fixed mass m = 1 . 0 but increased charge q = 2 . 5 it is clearly seen that the stability region and the associated energy density both get further reduced." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8278396475396025, + "doc_id": "a71e7512aa4fa53adf2ff9fe2d18884a662d43ae77838c6c6929540e97de0d84", + "edit_distance": 0.09628378378378379, + "f1_score": 0.8834355828220859, + "meteor": 0.9062370569536807, + "precision": 0.9, + "pred_md": "- [97] U. Thiele, M. G. Velarde, K. Neuffer, and Y. Pomeau, 'Film rupture in the diffuse interface model coupled to hydrodynamics,' Phys. Rev. E 64 , 031602 (2001).\n- [98] J. Heier, J. Groenewold, F. A. Castro, F. Nueesch, and R. Hany, 'Enlarged bilayer interfaces from liquid-liquid dewetting for photovoltaic applications,' P Soc Photo-Opt Instrum Eng 6999 , J9991J9991 (2008).\n- [99] M. D. Haw, M. Gillie, and W. C. K. Poon, 'Effects of phase behavior on the drying of colloidal suspensions,' Langmuir 18 , 1626-1633 (2002).\n- [100] L. V. Govor, J. Parisi, G. H. Bauer, and G. Reiter, 'Instability and droplet formation in evaporating thin films of a binary solution,' Phys. Rev. E 71 , 051603 (2005).\n- [101] L. V. Govor, G. Reiter, G. H. Bauer, and J. Parisi, 'Self-assembled treelike patterns from an evaporating binary solution,' Phys. Rev. E 74 , 061603 (2006).\n- [102] M. Yamamura, T. Nishio, T. Kajiwara, and K. Adachi, 'Evaporation-induced pattern formation in polymer films via secondary phase separation,' Chem. Eng. Sci. 57 , 2901-2905 (2002).\n- [103] P. Muller-Buschbaum, E. Bauer, S. Pfister, S. V. Roth, M. Burghammer, C. Riekel, C. David, and U. Thiele, 'Creation of multi-scale stripe-like patterns in thin polymer blend films,' Europhys. Lett. 73 , 35-41 (2006).\n- [104] E. Bormashenko, R. Pogreb, O. Stanevsky, Y. Bormashenko, T. Stein, and O. Gengelman, 'Mesoscopic patterning in evaporated polymer solutions: New experimental data and physical mechanisms,' Langmuir 21 , 9604-9609 (2005).\n- [105] E. Bormashenko, R. Pogreb, O. Stanevsky, Y. Bormashenko, T. Stein, V. Z. Gaisin, R. Cohen, and O. V. Gendelman, 'Mesoscopic patterning in thin polymer films formed under the fast dip-coating process,' Macromol. Mater. Eng. 290 , 114-121 (2005).\n- [106] J. B. Gibson, K. Zhang, K. Chen, S. Chynoweth, and C. W. Manke, 'Simulation of colloid-polymer systems using dissipative particle dynamics,' Mol. Simul. 23 , 1-41 (1999).\n- [107] K. Stratford and I. Pagonabarraga, 'Parallel simulation of particle suspensions with the lattice Boltzmann method,' Comput. Math. Appl. 55 , 1585-1593 (2008).\n- [108] G. Drazer, B. Khusid, J. Koplik, and A. Acrivos, 'Wetting and particle adsorption in nanoflows,' Phys. Fluids 17 , 017102 (2005).\n- [109] J. Kromkamp, D. van den Ende, D. Kandhai, R. van der Sman, and R. Boom, 'Lattice Boltzmann simulation of 2d and 3d non-Brownian suspensions in Couette flow,' Chem. Eng. Sci. 61 , 858-873 (2006).\n\n32", + "recall": 0.8674698795180723, + "true_md": "- [97] U. Thiele, M. G. Velarde, K. Neuffer, and Y. Pomeau, “Film rupture in the diffuse interface model coupled to hydrodynamics,” Phys. Rev. E 64 , 031602 (2001).\n\n- [98] J. Heier, J. Groenewold, F. A. Castro, F. Nueesch, and R. Hany, “Enlarged bilayer interfaces from liquid-liquid dewetting for photovoltaic applications,” P Soc Photo-Opt Instrum Eng 6999 , J9991– J9991 (2008).\n\n- [99] M. D. Haw, M. Gillie, and W. C. K. Poon, “Effects of phase behavior on the drying of colloidal suspensions,” Langmuir 18 , 1626–1633 (2002).\n\n- [100] L. V. Govor, J. Parisi, G. H. Bauer, and G. Reiter, “Instability and droplet formation in evaporating thin films of a binary solution,” Phys. Rev. E 71 , 051603 (2005).\n\n- [101] L. V. Govor, G. Reiter, G. H. Bauer, and J. Parisi, “Self-assembled treelike patterns from an evapo- rating binary solution,” Phys. Rev. E 74 , 061603 (2006).\n\n- [102] M. Yamamura, T. Nishio, T. Kajiwara, and K. Adachi, “Evaporation-induced pattern formation in polymer films via secondary phase separation,” Chem. Eng. Sci. 57 , 2901–2905 (2002).\n\n- [103] P. M¨uller-Buschbaum, E. Bauer, S. Pfister, S. V. Roth, M. Burghammer, C. Riekel, C. David, and U. Thiele, “Creation of multi-scale stripe-like patterns in thin polymer blend films,” Europhys. Lett. 73 , 35–41 (2006).\n\n- [104] E. Bormashenko, R. Pogreb, O. Stanevsky, Y. Bormashenko, T. Stein, and O. Gengelman, “Meso- scopic patterning in evaporated polymer solutions: New experimental data and physical mecha- nisms,” Langmuir 21 , 9604–9609 (2005).\n\n- [105] E. Bormashenko, R. Pogreb, O. Stanevsky, Y. Bormashenko, T. Stein, V. Z. Gaisin, R. Cohen, and O. V. Gendelman, “Mesoscopic patterning in thin polymer films formed under the fast dip-coating process,” Macromol. Mater. Eng. 290 , 114–121 (2005).\n\n- [106] J. B. Gibson, K. Zhang, K. Chen, S. Chynoweth, and C. W. Manke, “Simulation of colloid-polymer systems using dissipative particle dynamics,” Mol. Simul. 23 , 1–41 (1999).\n\n- [107] K. Stratford and I. Pagonabarraga, “Parallel simulation of particle suspensions with the lattice Boltz- mann method,” Comput. Math. Appl. 55 , 1585–1593 (2008).\n\n- [108] G. Drazer, B. Khusid, J. Koplik, and A. Acrivos, “Wetting and particle adsorption in nanoflows,” Phys. Fluids 17 , 017102 (2005).\n\n- [109] J. Kromkamp, D. van den Ende, D. Kandhai, R. van der Sman, and R. Boom, “Lattice Boltzmann simulation of 2d and 3d non-Brownian suspensions in Couette flow,” Chem. Eng. Sci. 61 , 858–873 (2006).\n\n32" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9517970906761383, + "doc_id": "657ba5fabdc3b447cc0e0b091f009ddf6bfc7939e8415998b8516493cb430459", + "edit_distance": 0.027833001988071572, + "f1_score": 0.9667318982387476, + "meteor": 0.973517636887139, + "precision": 0.9840637450199203, + "pred_md": "scopic film. We have seen that the KMC model is able to describe the interplay of solute diffusion within the solvent and solvent evaporation/condensation. It also takes the liquid-liquid, liquidparticle and particle-particle interactions into account and therefore allows us to distinguish different regimes of the transverse (fingering) instability of the evaporative dewetting front: a transport regime where the instability is almost completely independent of the interaction strengths and a demixing regime where particles and liquid demix at the receding front thereby increasing its transverse instability.\n\nThe dynamical density functional theory describes the coupled dynamics of the density fields of the liquid and the nanoparticles. In the form described above (i.e. based on the two-dimensional hamiltonian (3)) we obtain a simple theory that allows us to study the time evolution of the evaporating ultrathin film and also to investigate the influence of processes such as surface diffusion by the liquid, which are not incorporated in the KMC model. However, it is straightforward to extend the theory to consider a fully three-dimensional fluid film, in which one can distinguish between short- and long-range interactions of solvent and/or solute with the substrate. We have, however, restricted the examples given here to situations that can also be described using the KMC model. A further exploration will be presented elsewhere.\n\nFinally, we have discussed a simple thin film model for the hydrodynamics on the mesoscale. It results from a long-wave approximation and consists of coupled evolution equations for the film thickness profile and the mean particle concentration. It has been used to discuss the self-pinning of receding contact lines that is related to the formation of rings of dried-in particles (coffeestain effect) that frequently occurs when films or drops of solutions or suspensions dewet by the combined effects of convection and evaporation.\n\nOne of the primary goals of researchers in this field, is the search for simple-to-use techniques that allow one to produce hierarchically structured functional layers for a wide range of applications such as, e.g., organic solar cells [98]. This means that the experiments advance very rapidly towards increasingly complex systems. For example, there have been investigations of the influence of the phase behaviour on the drying of droplets of a suspension of hard-sphere colloidal particles and non-adsorbing polymer [99], of the instabilities and the formation of drops in evaporating thin films of binary solutions [100] that may lead to treelike patterns [101], of effects of a secondary phase separation on evaporation-induced pattern formation in polymer films [102], and of the influence of an imposed flow on decomposition and deposition processes in a sliding ridge of evaporating solution of a binary polymer mixture [103] and of the influence of rather\n\n24", + "recall": 0.95, + "true_md": "scopic film. We have seen that the KMC model is able to describe the interplay of solute diffusion within the solvent and solvent evaporation/condensation. It also takes the liquid-liquid, liquid- particle and particle-particle interactions into account and therefore allows us to distinguish differ- ent regimes of the transverse (fingering) instability of the evaporative dewetting front: a transport regime where the instability is almost completely independent of the interaction strengths and a demixing regime where particles and liquid demix at the receding front thereby increasing its transverse instability.\n\nThe dynamical density functional theory describes the coupled dynamics of the density fields of the liquid and the nanoparticles. In the form described above (i.e. based on the two-dimensional hamiltonian (3)) we obtain a simple theory that allows us to study the time evolution of the evapo- rating ultrathin film and also to investigate the influence of processes such as surface diffusion by the liquid, which are not incorporated in the KMC model. However, it is straightforward to extend the theory to consider a fully three-dimensional fluid film, in which one can distinguish between short- and long-range interactions of solvent and/or solute with the substrate. We have, however, restricted the examples given here to situations that can also be described using the KMC model. A further exploration will be presented elsewhere.\n\nFinally, we have discussed a simple thin film model for the hydrodynamics on the mesoscale. It results from a long-wave approximation and consists of coupled evolution equations for the film thickness profile and the mean particle concentration. It has been used to discuss the self-pinning of receding contact lines that is related to the formation of rings of dried-in particles (coffee- stain effect) that frequently occurs when films or drops of solutions or suspensions dewet by the combined effects of convection and evaporation.\n\nOne of the primary goals of researchers in this field, is the search for simple-to-use techniques that allow one to produce hierarchically structured functional layers for a wide range of applica- tions such as, e.g., organic solar cells [98]. This means that the experiments advance very rapidly towards increasingly complex systems. For example, there have been investigations of the influ- ence of the phase behaviour on the drying of droplets of a suspension of hard-sphere colloidal particles and non-adsorbing polymer [99], of the instabilities and the formation of drops in evap- orating thin films of binary solutions [100] that may lead to treelike patterns [101], of effects of a secondary phase separation on evaporation-induced pattern formation in polymer films [102], and of the influence of an imposed flow on decomposition and deposition processes in a sliding ridge of evaporating solution of a binary polymer mixture [103] and of the influence of rather\n\n24" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0007929240741379479, + "doc_id": "201abac583015f104ce4635f722bf79af6fbb55b0b78c8892eb0c514958b43b8", + "edit_distance": 0.9562264150943396, + "f1_score": 0.6597938144329897, + "meteor": 0.07969235929684398, + "precision": 0.8767123287671232, + "pred_md": "and\n\n\n\nwhere S F ( x -x ' ) and ∆( z ' -z ) are the fermion and ghost fields propagators, respectively, Γ ( ν x , y , z ' ' ' ) is the vectorial proper vertex,\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nin which\n\nis the fermion-ghost four-vertex.\n\n\n\nIn momentum space, Eq. (34) reads\n\nwhere\n\n\n\n\n\nand\n\n\n\nwith k = p + . q\n\nSimilarly, we may determine ∆( q ) from the Dyson-Schwinger equation,\n\n\n\nwhere ∆ (0) ( q ) = i q 2 and Σ C ( q ) denotes the proper self-energy operator of the ghost field. Therefore, it is easy to verify that\n\n\n\n8", + "recall": 0.5289256198347108, + "true_md": "where S$_{F}$ ( x − x $^{′}$) and Δ( z ′ − z ) are the fermion and ghost fields propagators, respectively, Γ $^{ν}$( x $^{′}$, y $^{′}$, z $^{′}$) is the vectorial proper vertex,\n\nand\n\nin which\n\nis the fermion-ghost four-vertex.\n\nIn momentum space, Eq. (34) reads\n\nwhere\n\nand\n\nSimilarly, we may determine Δ( q ) from the Dyson-Schwinger equation,\n\nwith k = p + q .\n\nwhere Δ$_{(0)}$( q ) = i q 2 and Σ$_{C}$( q ) denotes the proper self-energy operator of the ghost field. Therefore, it is easy to verify that\n\n$$ie i∂$_{x}$ ∧ ∂$_{ˆ}$ x 〈 0 | T ( ψ (ˆ x ) ¯ ψ ( y ) C ( x ) ¯ C ( z )) | 0 〉|$_{ˆ}$ x = x = ∫ d $^{4}$y $^{′}$d $^{4}$z $^{′}$H$_{1}$ ( x, y $^{′}$, z $^{′}$) S$_{F}$ ( y ′ − y )Δ( z ′ − z ) , (36) ie i∂$_{y}$ ∧ ∂$_{ˆ}$ y 〈 0 | T ( ψ ( x ) ¯ ψ ( y ) C (ˆ y ) ¯ C ( z )) | 0 〉|$_{ˆ}$$$\n\n$$∫ ie i∂$_{y}$ ∧ ∂$_{ˆ}$ y 〈 0 | T ( ψ ( x ) ¯ ψ ( y ) C (ˆ y ) ¯ C ( z )) | 0 〉|$_{ˆ}$ y = y = ∫ d $^{4}$x $^{′}$d $^{4}$z $^{′}$S$_{F}$ ( x − x $^{′}$) H$_{2}$ ( x $^{′}$, y, z $^{′}$)Δ( z ′ − z ) , (37)$$\n\n$$Γ $^{ν}$( x $^{′}$, y $^{′}$, z $^{′}$) = δ $^{3}$Γ δ ¯ ψ$_{cl}$ ( x $^{′}$) δψ$_{cl}$ ( y $^{′}$) δA$_{clν}$ ( z $^{′}$) , (38)$$\n\n$$H$_{1}$ ( x, y $^{′}$, z $^{′}$) = i ∫ d $^{4}$u d$^{4}$v e i∂$_{x}$ ∧ ∂$_{ˆ}$ x S$_{F}$ ( x − u )Δ(ˆ x − v )Γ( u, y $^{′}$, v, z $^{′}$) |$_{ˆ}$ x = x (39)$$\n\n$$H$_{2}$ ( x $^{′}$, y, z $^{′}$) = i ∫ d $^{4}$u d$^{4}$v Γ( x $^{′}$, u, v, z $^{′}$) e i∂$_{y}$ ∧ ∂$_{ˆ}$ y S$_{F}$ ( u − y )Δ(ˆ y − v ) |$_{ˆ}$ y = $_{y}$, (40)$$\n\n$$Γ( u, y $^{′}$, v, z $^{′}$) = δ $^{4}$Γ δ ¯ ψ$_{cl}$ ( u ) δψ$_{cl}$ ( y $^{′}$) δ ¯ C$_{cl}$ ( v ) δC$_{cl}$ ( z $^{′}$) ∣ (41)$$\n\n$$Γ $^{ν}$( k, p, q ) q $^{µ}$D$_{µν}$ ( − q ) = − iαe [ S − 1 F ( k ) H$_{1}$ ( k, p, q )Δ( q ) − H$_{2}$ ( k, p, q ) S − 1 F ( p )Δ( q ) ] , (42)$$\n\n$$H$_{1}$ ( k, p, q ) = i ∫ d $^{4}$k ′ (2 π ) $_{4}$e ik ′ ∧ $^{k}$S$_{F}$ ( k $^{′}$)Δ( k − k $^{′}$)Γ( k $^{′}$, p, k − k $^{′}$, q ) (43)$$\n\n$$H$_{2}$ ( k, p, q ) = i ∫ d $^{4}$p ′ (2 π ) $_{4}$e − ip $^{′}$∧ $^{p}$Γ( k, p $^{′}$, p′ − p, q ) S$_{F}$ ( p $^{′}$)Δ( p ′ − p ) , (44)$$\n\n$$Δ( q ) = Δ$_{(0)}$( q ) − Δ$_{(0)}$( q )Σ$_{C}$( q )Δ( q ) , (45)$$\n\n$$Δ( q ) = i q $^{2}$[1 + b ( q $^{2}$)] , (46)$$\n\n8" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.08976377707720816, + "doc_id": "bd1a256f9c69f8acf20e583001a8fcfda411305394bbb1f77ce7b6501fbaa568", + "edit_distance": 0.7719836400817995, + "f1_score": 0.8438356164383563, + "meteor": 0.24535215305488, + "precision": 0.9565217391304348, + "pred_md": "In practice, we use Coulomb gauge-fixed wall sources for the b -quark to calculate the local-wall ( LW ) and wall-wall ( WW ) correlation functions\n\n\n\n\n\nwith the local ( L ) and wall-source ( W ) axial currents given by\n\n\n\n\n\nFrom the ratio of C LW to C WW we obtain the combined decay amplitude\n\nwhere we determine the unphysical B -meson rest mass m ∗ B q via\n\n\n\n\n\nA derivation of Eq. (63) is presented in Appendix C. Finally we compute the renormalized decay amplitude\n\nusing the perturbative matching factors given in Tables II and III. The contribution proportional to c MF A improves the heavy-light axial current operator through O ( α pa s ), where the sinh arises from the symmetric derivative in the O ( pa ) operator. The overall multiplicative factor Z Φ is needed to obtain the combined decay amplitude in the continuum.\n\n\n\nThe computation of the statistical errors throughout this paper follows the prescription for numerically computing the autocorrelation function as proposed in reference [61]. The autocorrelation function quantifies the degree of correlation between two measurements made at different trajectories, and depends upon the observable of interest. By summing the autocorrelation function over the separation between measurements, one obtains the integrated autocorrelation time. We obtain a better estimate of the true statistical error by inflating the variance of the measured Monte Carlo data using the integrated autocorrelation time. In many instances we must compute the errors in a quantity which itself depends\n\n18", + "recall": 0.7549019607843137, + "true_md": "In practice, we use Coulomb gauge-fixed wall sources for the b -quark to calculate the local-wall ( LW ) and wall-wall ( W W ) correlation functions\n\nwith the local ( L ) and wall-source ( W ) axial currents given by\n\nFrom the ratio of C LW to C WW we obtain the combined decay amplitude √\n\n√ where we determine the unphysical B -meson rest mass m ∗ B$_{q}$ via\n\nA derivation of Eq. (63) is presented in Appendix C. Finally we compute the renormalized decay amplitude [ ( ) ]\n\n[ ( ) ] using the perturbative matching factors given in Tables II and III. The contribution propor- tional to c MF A improves the heavy-light axial current operator through O ( α$_{s}$pa ), where the sinh arises from the symmetric derivative in the O ( pa ) operator. The overall multiplicative factor Z$_{Φ}$ is needed to obtain the combined decay amplitude in the continuum.\n\nThe computation of the statistical errors throughout this paper follows the prescrip- tion for numerically computing the autocorrelation function as proposed in reference [61]. The autocorrelation function quantifies the degree of correlation between two measurements made at different trajectories, and depends upon the observable of interest. By summing the autocorrelation function over the separation between measurements, one obtains the integrated autocorrelation time. We obtain a better estimate of the true statistical error by inflating the variance of the measured Monte Carlo data using the integrated autocorrela- tion time. In many instances we must compute the errors in a quantity which itself depends\n\n18\n\n$$Φ ren B$_{q}$ = Z$_{Φ}$ [ 1 + c MF A sinh ( am ∗ B$_{q}$ ) ] Φ lat $_{B$_{q}$}$, (65) using the perturbative matching factors given in Tables II and III. The contribution propor-$$\n\n$$am ∗ B$_{q}$ = lim t ≫ $_{t$_{0}$}$log ( C $^{LW}$( t, t$_{0}$ ) C $^{LW}$( t + a, t$_{0}$ ) ) . (64)$$\n\n$$C Φ lat B$_{q}$ = lim t ≫ t$_{0}$ √ 2 L 3 |C $^{LW}$( t, t$_{0}$ ) | √ C $^{WW}$( t, t$_{0}$ )e − m ∗ B $_{q}$( t − t$_{0}$ $_{)}$, (63) where we determine the unphysical B -meson rest mass m ∗ via$$\n\n$$A $_{0}$( ⃗ x, t ) = h $^{(+)}$( ⃗ x, t ) γ$_{0}$γ$_{5}$q ( ⃗ x, t ) + h $^{)}$( ⃗ x, t ) γ$_{0}$γ$_{5}$q ( ⃗ x, t ) , (61) A W 0 ( t ) = a 6 ∑ ⃗y ∈ V ∑ ⃗z ∈ V ( h $^{(+)}$( ⃗ y, t ) γ$_{0}$γ$_{5}$q ( ⃗ z, t ) + h ( − $^{)}$( ⃗ y, t ) γ$_{0}$γ$_{5}$q ( ⃗ z, t ) ) . (62)$$\n\n$$A L $_{0}$( ⃗ x, t ) = h $^{(+)}$( ⃗ x, t ) γ$_{0}$γ$_{5}$q ( ⃗ x, t ) + h ( − $^{)}$( ⃗ x, t ) γ$_{0}$γ$_{5}$q ( ⃗ x, t ) , (61) ∑ ∑ ( )$$\n\n$$C $^{LW}$( t, t$_{0}$ ) = a 3 ∑ ⃗x ∈ $_{V}$〈 0 | A L $_{0}$( ⃗ x, t ) A W 0 ( t$_{0}$ ) $^{†}$| 0 〉 , (59) W W$$\n\n$$∑ C $^{WW}$( t, t$_{0}$ ) = 〈 0 | A W 0 ( t ) A W 0 ( t$_{0}$ ) $^{†}$| 0 〉 , (60)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9430495278339767, + "doc_id": "cb8d6cbfbb3c304a93fd850d9793674c11298377d44e491a57c5dece82053f76", + "edit_distance": 0.04424778761061947, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9971992237548983, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "arXiv:1001.0110v1 [physics.chem-ph] 31 Dec 2009\n\n## On the Dimers of Pseudoisocyanine\n\nP.O.J. Scherer ∗\n\nPhysics Department T38, TU Munich, 85748 Garching\n\n## Abstract\n\nThe self organisation of pseudoisocyanine-dimers in dilute aqueous solutions is studied by classical MD simulations. The electronic structure of the dimer is evaluated with the semiempirical ZINDO method to determine the fluctuations of site energies and excitonic coupling. We study different dimer conformations with blue or red shifted absorption maxima as models for H and J-aggregates. The width of the absorption bands is mainly explained by low frequency vibrations whereas the fluctuations of site energies are less important.\n\n1", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "arXiv:1001.0110v1 [physics.chem-ph] 31 Dec 2009\n\n# On the Dimers of Pseudoisocyanine\n\nP.O.J. Scherer ∗\n\nPhysics Department T38, TU Munich, 85748 Garching\n\nThe self organisation of pseudoisocyanine-dimers in dilute aqueous solutions is studied by classical MD simulations. The electronic structure of the dimer is evaluated with the semiempirical ZINDO method to determine the fluctuations of site energies and excitonic coupling. We study different dimer conformations with blue or red shifted absorption maxima as models for H and J-aggregates. The width of the absorption bands is mainly explained by low frequency vibrations whereas the fluctuations of site energies are less important.\n\nAbstract\n\n1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8750941865808858, + "doc_id": "54d1f3efd5f54ed60e8844e2382a5bc9dba96e8a17a33eec48546858b372c8ea", + "edit_distance": 0.08333333333333333, + "f1_score": 0.9170506912442397, + "meteor": 0.9196139334973327, + "precision": 0.9299065420560748, + "pred_md": "31\n\n- [6] D. Berenstein and R. Cotta, 'A Monte-Carlo study of the AdS/CFT correspondence: an exploration of quantum gravity effects,' JHEP 0704 , 071 (2007) [arXiv:hep-th/0702090].\n- [7] D. Berenstein, R. Cotta and R. Leonardi, 'Numerical tests of AdS/CFT at strong coupling,' Phys. Rev. D 78 , 025008 (2008) [arXiv:0801.2739 [hep-th]].\n- [8] R. A. Janik and J. Wosiek, 'Towards the matrix model of M-theory on a lattice,' Acta Phys. Polon. B 32 , 2143 (2001) [arXiv:hep-th/0003121].\n- [9] S. Catterall and T. Wiseman, 'Towards lattice simulation of the gauge theory duals to black holes and hot strings,' JHEP 0712 , 104 (2007) [arXiv:0706.3518 [hep-lat]].\n- [10] K. N. Anagnostopoulos, M. Hanada, J. Nishimura and S. Takeuchi, 'Monte Carlo studies of supersymmetric matrix quantum mechanics with sixteen supercharges at finite temperature,' Phys. Rev. Lett. 100 , 021601 (2008) [arXiv:0707.4454 [hep-th]].\n- [11] S. Catterall and T. Wiseman, 'Black hole thermodynamics from simulations of lattice YangMills theory,' Phys. Rev. D 78 , 041502 (2008) [arXiv:0803.4273 [hep-th]].\n- [12] M. Hanada, A. Miwa, J. Nishimura and S. Takeuchi, 'Schwarzschild radius from Monte Carlo calculation of the Wilson loop in supersymmetric matrix quantum mechanics,' Phys. Rev. Lett. 102 , 181602 (2009) [arXiv:0811.2081 [hep-th]].\n- [13] M. Hanada, Y. Hyakutake, J. Nishimura and S. Takeuchi, 'Higher derivative corrections to black hole thermodynamics from supersymmetric matrix quantum mechanics,' Phys. Rev. Lett. 102 , 191602 (2009) [arXiv:0811.3102 [hep-th]].\n- [14] S. Catterall and T. Wiseman, 'Extracting black hole physics from the lattice,' arXiv:0909.4947 [hep-th].\n- [15] T. Ishii, G. Ishiki, S. Shimasaki and A. Tsuchiya, 'N=4 Super Yang-Mills from the Plane Wave Matrix Model,' Phys. Rev. D 78 , 106001 (2008) [arXiv:0807.2352 [hep-th]].\n- [16] G. Ishiki, S. W. Kim, J. Nishimura and A. Tsuchiya, 'Testing a novel large-N reduction for N = 4 super Yang-Mills theory on R × S 3 ,' JHEP 0909 , 029 (2009) [arXiv:0907.1488 [hep-th]].\n- [17] D. E. Berenstein, M. Hanada and S. A. Hartnoll, 'Multi-matrix models and emergent geometry,' JHEP 0902 , 010 (2009) [arXiv:0805.4658 [hep-th]].\n- [18] D. Berenstein, D. H. Correa and S. E. Vazquez, 'All loop BMN state energies from matrices,' JHEP 0602 , 048 (2006) [arXiv:hep-th/0509015].\n- [19] E. Brezin, C. Itzykson, G. Parisi and J. B. Zuber, 'Planar Diagrams,' Commun. Math. Phys. 59 , 35 (1978).", + "recall": 0.9045454545454545, + "true_md": "31\n\n- [6] D. Berenstein and R. Cotta, “A Monte-Carlo study of the AdS/CFT correspondence: an exploration of quantum gravity effects,” JHEP 0704 , 071 (2007) [arXiv:hep-th/0702090].\n\n- [7] D. Berenstein, R. Cotta and R. Leonardi, “Numerical tests of AdS/CFT at strong coupling,” Phys. Rev. D 78 , 025008 (2008) [arXiv:0801.2739 [hep-th]].\n\n- [8] R. A. Janik and J. Wosiek, “Towards the matrix model of M-theory on a lattice,” Acta Phys. Polon. B 32 , 2143 (2001) [arXiv:hep-th/0003121].\n\n- [9] S. Catterall and T. Wiseman, “Towards lattice simulation of the gauge theory duals to black holes and hot strings,” JHEP 0712 , 104 (2007) [arXiv:0706.3518 [hep-lat]].\n\n- [10] K. N. Anagnostopoulos, M. Hanada, J. Nishimura and S. Takeuchi, “Monte Carlo studies of supersymmetric matrix quantum mechanics with sixteen supercharges at finite temperature,” Phys. Rev. Lett. 100 , 021601 (2008) [arXiv:0707.4454 [hep-th]].\n\n- [11] S. Catterall and T. Wiseman, “Black hole thermodynamics from simulations of lattice Yang- Mills theory,” Phys. Rev. D 78 , 041502 (2008) [arXiv:0803.4273 [hep-th]].\n\n- [12] M. Hanada, A. Miwa, J. Nishimura and S. Takeuchi, “Schwarzschild radius from Monte Carlo calculation of the Wilson loop in supersymmetric matrix quantum mechanics,” Phys. Rev. Lett. 102 , 181602 (2009) [arXiv:0811.2081 [hep-th]].\n\n- [13] M. Hanada, Y. Hyakutake, J. Nishimura and S. Takeuchi, “Higher derivative corrections to black hole thermodynamics from supersymmetric matrix quantum mechanics,” Phys. Rev. Lett. 102 , 191602 (2009) [arXiv:0811.3102 [hep-th]].\n\n- [14] S. Catterall and T. Wiseman, “Extracting black hole physics from the lattice,” arXiv:0909.4947 [hep-th].\n\n- [15] T. Ishii, G. Ishiki, S. Shimasaki and A. Tsuchiya, “N=4 Super Yang-Mills from the Plane Wave Matrix Model,” Phys. Rev. D 78 , 106001 (2008) [arXiv:0807.2352 [hep-th]].\n\n- [16] G. Ishiki, S. W. Kim, J. Nishimura and A. Tsuchiya, “Testing a novel large-N reduction for N = 4 super Yang-Mills theory on R × S $^{3}$,” JHEP 0909 , 029 (2009) [arXiv:0907.1488 [hep-th]].\n\n- [17] D. E. Berenstein, M. Hanada and S. A. Hartnoll, “Multi-matrix models and emergent geom- etry,” JHEP 0902 , 010 (2009) [arXiv:0805.4658 [hep-th]].\n\n- [18] D. Berenstein, D. H. Correa and S. E. Vazquez, “All loop BMN state energies from matrices,” JHEP 0602 , 048 (2006) [arXiv:hep-th/0509015].\n\n- [19] E. Brezin, C. Itzykson, G. Parisi and J. B. Zuber, “Planar Diagrams,” Commun. Math. Phys. 59 , 35 (1978)." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0018566505584623628, + "doc_id": "714e0207d7237e4550fdf988cfa8bd3aeee06e560367cf0d6ba36c25c18a9f7e", + "edit_distance": 0.8975609756097561, + "f1_score": 0.7228915662650602, + "meteor": 0.12386478752471054, + "precision": 0.9090909090909091, + "pred_md": "b. Annihilation into ν , ν s s (heavy sterile-like neutrinos)\n\n\n\n## 3. Annihilation into W W + -\n\n\n\n## 4. Annihilation into ZZ\n\n\n\n## 5. Annihilation into hh\n\nM 1 denotes the amplitude by s -channel Higgs bosons h and H exchange, while M 2 does that for t ( u )-channel N exchange diagram. The formulas for NN → hH and HH can be obtained by appropriate replacement of the vertexes, e.g., λ hhh → λ hhH .\n\n\n\n11", + "recall": 0.6, + "true_md": "b. Annihilation into ν$_{s}$, ν$_{s}$ (heavy sterile-like neutrinos)\n\n$$|M| 2 = 32 ∣ g 2 $^{B}$−$_{L}$q$_{f}$ q$_{N}$ s − M 2 Z ′ + iM$_{Z}$ ′ Γ$_{Z}$ ′ ∣ ∣$^{2}$$^{(}$$^{s}$ − 4 m 2 $_{N}$) ( 3 8 s − 1 2 ( s 2 + m 2 ν$_{s}$ ) + 1 2 ( s 4 + m 2 ν$_{s}$ ) cos 2 θ ) +4 λ 2 $_{N}$λ 2 ν$_{s}$ ∣ ∣$^{∂}$$^{Ψ}$ ∂h i s − M 2 h + iM$_{h}$ Γ$_{h}$ ∂ Ψ ∂h + ∂ Ψ ∂H i s − M 2 H + iM$_{H}$ Γ$_{H}$ ∂ Ψ $_{∂H}$∣ ∣ ∣$^{2}$$^{(}$$^{s}$ − 4 m 2 $_{N}$)( s − 4 m 2 $_{ν$_{s}$}$) . (B3)$$\n\n$$|M| 2 = 8 λ 2 N ( 1 2 g $^{2}$v ) 2 ∣ ∣$^{∂}$$^{Ψ}$ ∂h 1 s − M 2 h + iM$_{h}$ Γ$_{h}$ ∂φ ∂h + ∂ Ψ ∂H 1 s − M 2 H + iM$_{H}$ Γ$_{H}$ ∂φ $_{∂H}$∣ ∣ ∣$^{2}$ ( s − 4 m 2 $_{N}$) ( 1 + 1 2 M 4 W ( s 2 − M 2 W ) 2 ) . (B4)$$\n\n$$|M| 2 = 8 λ 2 N ( 1 4 ( g 2 + g ′ $^{2}$) v ) 2 ∣ ∣$^{∂}$$^{Ψ}$ ∂h 1 s − M 2 h + iM$_{h}$ Γ$_{h}$ ∂φ ∂h + ∂ Ψ ∂H 1 s − M 2 H + iM$_{H}$ Γ$_{H}$ ∂φ $_{∂H}$∣ ∣ ∣$^{2}$ ( s − 4 m 2 $_{N}$) ( 1 + 1 2 M 4 Z ( s 2 − M 2 Z ) 2 ) . (B5)$$\n\n$$( ) ∣ ∣$^{∂}$$^{Ψ}$ ∂h i s − M 2 h + iM$_{h}$ Γ$_{h}$ iλ$_{hhh}$ + ∂ Ψ ∂H i s − M 2 H + iM$_{H}$ Γ$_{H}$ iλ$_{Hhh}$ ∣ ∣$^{2}$ , (B7)$$\n\n$$|M| 2 = |M 1 + M 2 | $^{2}$, (B6) |M 1 | 2 = λ 2 N ( s 2 − 2 m 2 N ) ∣ i ∂ Ψ i ∣$$\n\n11\n\n## 4. Annihilation into ZZ\n\n## 3. Annihilation into W $^{+}$W −\n\n## 5. Annihilation into hh\n\nM 1 denotes the amplitude by s -channel Higgs bosons h and H exchange, while M 2 does that for t ( u )-channel N exchange diagram. The formulas for NN → hH and HH can be obtained by appropriate replacement of the vertexes, e.g., λ$_{hhh}$ → λ$_{hhH}$ ." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6850973980849361, + "doc_id": "73cf92db115e5b0e268e423e48d8d056789fe32285cbfa8cfc520c69404efc33", + "edit_distance": 0.3282937365010799, + "f1_score": 0.9757412398921832, + "meteor": 0.9314759362505837, + "precision": 0.9890710382513661, + "pred_md": "FIG. 8: (Colour online) Space-time plots are given for (left) the film thickness h and (right) the nanoparticle layer height h p = hφ . The plot corresponds to the complete evolution resulting in the ring profile of Fig. 6(b). In both panels bright [dark] parts denote high [low] regions. The prominent central dark-bright border in the left panel indicates the change of the position of the contact line in time. Over time, four regimes can be distinguished: (i) fast motion before pinning, (ii) nearly no front motion during self-pinning, (iii) slow motion after depinning, and (iv) final evaporation from the center.\n\nFIG. 8: (Colour online) Space-time plots are given for (left) the film thickness h and (right) the nanoparticle layer height h p = hφ . The plot corresponds to the complete evolution resulting in the ring profile of Fig. 6(b). In both panels bright [dark] parts denote high [low] regions. The prominent central dark-bright border in the left panel indicates the change of the position of the contact line in time. Over time, four regimes can be distinguished: (i) fast motion before pinning, (ii) nearly no front motion during self-pinning, (iii) slow motion after depinning, and (iv) final evaporation from the center.\n\nshould also be investigated further in the simple case presented here.\n\n## IV. CONCLUSION\n\nWe have discussed recent work on pattern formation processes in films and drops of evaporating suspensions/solutions of polymers and particles. After reviewing experiments on suspensions of thiol-coated gold nanoparticles in toluene we have focused on the modelling of the transport and phase change processes involved. A theoretical approach to the modelling of the hydrodynamics on the mesoscale has been described as well as more microscopic models for the dynamics in the observed nanoscopic 'postcursor' film. In particular, we have introduced (i) a microscopic kinetic Monte Carlo model, (ii) a dynamical density functional theory and (iii) a hydrodynamic thin film model.\n\nThe kinetic Monte Carlo model and the dynamical density functional theory can both be used to investigate and understand the formation of polygonal networks, spinodal and branched structures resulting from the dewetting of an ultrathin 'postcursor' film that remains behind the mesoscopic dewetting front. They are, however, not capable of describing the dynamical processes in a meso-\n\n23", + "recall": 0.9627659574468085, + "true_md": "FIG. 8: (Colour online) Space-time plots are given for (left) the film thickness h and (right) the nanoparticle layer height h$_{p}$ = hφ . The plot corresponds to the complete evolution resulting in the ring profile of Fig. 6(b). In both panels bright [dark] parts denote high [low] regions. The prominent central dark-bright border in the left panel indicates the change of the position of the contact line in time. Over time, four regimes can be distinguished: (i) fast motion before pinning, (ii) nearly no front motion during self-pinning, (iii) slow motion after depinning, and (iv) final evaporation from the center.\n\nshould also be investigated further in the simple case presented here.\n\nWe have discussed recent work on pattern formation processes in films and drops of evaporating suspensions/solutions of polymers and particles. After reviewing experiments on suspensions of thiol-coated gold nanoparticles in toluene we have focused on the modelling of the transport and phase change processes involved. A theoretical approach to the modelling of the hydrodynamics on the mesoscale has been described as well as more microscopic models for the dynamics in the observed nanoscopic ‘postcursor’ film. In particular, we have introduced (i) a microscopic kinetic Monte Carlo model, (ii) a dynamical density functional theory and (iii) a hydrodynamic thin film model.\n\nThe kinetic Monte Carlo model and the dynamical density functional theory can both be used to investigate and understand the formation of polygonal networks, spinodal and branched structures resulting from the dewetting of an ultrathin ‘postcursor’ film that remains behind the mesoscopic dewetting front. They are, however, not capable of describing the dynamical processes in a meso-\n\n23\n\n## IV. CONCLUSION" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.875194388497942, + "doc_id": "a6f059a15375e2323725076775aba9e370c8ddfe763450d6a8a7e6312ec7f27c", + "edit_distance": 0.20245398773006135, + "f1_score": 0.9528795811518326, + "meteor": 0.9437505367710133, + "precision": 0.978494623655914, + "pred_md": "arXiv:1001.0311v2 [quant-ph] 13 Mar 2010\n\n## Exact solutions of a particle in a box with a delta function potential: The factorization method\n\n## Pouria Pedram ∗\n\nPlasma Physics Research Center, Science and Research Campus, Islamic Azad University, P.O. Box 14665-678, Tehran, Iran\n\n## M. Vahabi\n\nDepartment of Physics, Shahid Beheshti University, G. C., Evin, Tehran 19839, Iran\n\n## Abstract\n\nWe use the factorization method to find the exact eigenvalues and eigenfunctions for a particle in a box with the delta function potential V ( x ) = λδ x ( -x 0 ). We show that the presence of the potential results in the discontinuity of the corresponding ladder operators. The presence of the delta function potential allows us to obtain the full spectrum in the first step of the factorization procedure even in the weak coupling limit λ → 0.\n\n1", + "recall": 0.9285714285714286, + "true_md": "# Exact solutions of a particle in a box with a delta function potential: The factorization method\n\nPlasma Physics Research Center, Science and Research Campus, Islamic Azad University, P.O. Box 14665–678, Tehran, Iran\n\nPouria Pedram ∗\n\nM. Vahabi\n\nDepartment of Physics, Shahid Beheshti University, G. C., Evin, Tehran 19839, Iran\n\n## Abstract\n\nWe use the factorization method to find the exact eigenvalues and eigenfunctions for a particle in a box with the delta function potential V ( x ) = λδ ( x − x$_{0}$ ). We show that the presence of the potential results in the discontinuity of the corresponding ladder operators. The presence of the delta function potential allows us to obtain the full spectrum in the first step of the factorization procedure even in the weak coupling limit λ → 0.\n\narXiv:1001.0311v2 [quant-ph] 13 Mar 2010\n\n1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5126817432675332, + "doc_id": "19872115886593fc7ff2bfdbb17102326d4a8a93c0d47049bc63b03fa140ccd2", + "edit_distance": 0.4602272727272727, + "f1_score": 0.9489051094890513, + "meteor": 0.7827265904366814, + "precision": 0.9848484848484849, + "pred_md": "TABLE I: Fermi-distribution parameters from Ref. [52]. 'c' is the adjusted half-density radius for the charge distribution and 'a' is the diffuseness parameter.\n\nFIG. 4: (a) Ratio of the elastic α -scattering cross sections to the Rutherford cross sections for 112 Sn at 386 MeV. (b) Differential cross sections for excitation of the 2 + 1 state in 112 Sn. The solid lines are the results of the folding-model calculations.\n\nFIG. 4: (a) Ratio of the elastic α -scattering cross sections to the Rutherford cross sections for 112 Sn at 386 MeV. (b) Differential cross sections for excitation of the 2 + 1 state in 112 Sn. The solid lines are the results of the folding-model calculations.\n\nFIG. 5: Same as Fig. 4, except for 120 Sn.\n\nFIG. 5: Same as Fig. 4, except for 120 Sn.\n\n9", + "recall": 0.9154929577464789, + "true_md": "TABLE I: Fermi-distribution parameters from Ref. [52]. “c” is the adjusted half-density radius for the charge distribution and “a” is the diffuseness parameter.\n\nFIG. 4: (a) Ratio of the elastic α -scattering cross sections to the Rutherford cross sections for $^{112}$Sn at 386 MeV. (b) Differential cross sections for excitation of the 2 + 1 state in $^{112}$Sn. The solid lines are the results of the folding-model calculations.\n\nFIG. 5: Same as Fig. 4, except for $^{120}$Sn.\n\n9" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5127018740458047, + "doc_id": "621c6bd79b640b343b000b4ece0d994916be0ccc8eea1bee73b1a6a7a38e1919", + "edit_distance": 0.5617760617760618, + "f1_score": 0.9636963696369638, + "meteor": 0.6598305308020854, + "precision": 0.9798657718120806, + "pred_md": "and 2 0 for . √ m B s /m B d ξ , respectively. These still correspond to confidence levels of greater than 10%, however, and are therefore consistent with the data. The error bands in Figs. 5 and 6 are fairly broad and hence the statistical uncertainty at the physical point is large, ∼ 4.1-7.6% for Φ B s / Φ B d and ∼ 4.7-6.3% for √ m B s /m B d ξ . This is due to the large statistical errors in our data points, as well as the fact that our lightest mass is still quite heavy, which forces us to extrapolate over a large mass range. We summarize the results of our preferred chiral extrapolation in Tab. VII and discuss the estimation of our systematic errors in the following section.\n\nFIG. 5: Chiral extrapolation of Φ B s / Φ B l = √ m B s /m B l · f B s /f B l . The blue (triangle) points denote the APE data, while the red (square) points denote the HYP-smeared data. The color of the shaded (hatched) error band corresponds to those of the APE (HYP) data points. The dashed vertical line denotes the physical average u d -quark mass and the black dot denotes the physical strange quark mass, at which the SU (3)-breaking ratio must be one. The SU (2) HM χ PT coefficients obtained from the fit are R Φ = 1 21(9) and . C l = 1 1(6) in the case of APE smearing . and R Φ = 1 19(5) and . C l = 1 2(3) in the case of HYP smearing. Errors shown are statistical only. .\n\nFIG. 5: Chiral extrapolation of Φ B s / Φ B l = √ m B s /m B l · f B s /f B l . The blue (triangle) points denote the APE data, while the red (square) points denote the HYP-smeared data. The color of the shaded (hatched) error band corresponds to those of the APE (HYP) data points. The dashed vertical line denotes the physical average u d -quark mass and the black dot denotes the physical strange quark mass, at which the SU (3)-breaking ratio must be one. The SU (2) HM χ PT coefficients obtained from the fit are R Φ = 1 21(9) and . C l = 1 1(6) in the case of APE smearing . and R Φ = 1 19(5) and . C l = 1 2(3) in the case of HYP smearing. Errors shown are statistical only. .\n\n29", + "recall": 0.948051948051948, + "true_md": "and 2 . 0 for √ m$_{B}$$\\_{s}$/m$\\_{B}$$_{d}$ ξ , respectively. These still correspond to confidence levels of greater than 10%, however, and are therefore consistent with the data. The error bands in Figs. 5 and 6 are fairly broad and hence the statistical uncertainty at the physical point is large, ∼ 4.1–7.6% for Φ$_{B}$$\\_{s}$ / Φ$\\_{B}$$_{d}$ and ∼ 4.7–6.3% for √ m$_{B}$$\\_{s}$/m$\\_{B}$$_{d}$ ξ . This is due to the large statistical errors in our data points, as well as the fact that our lightest mass is still quite heavy, which forces us to extrapolate over a large mass range. We summarize the results of our preferred chiral extrapolation in Tab. VII and discuss the estimation of our systematic errors in the following section.\n\nFIG. 5: Chiral extrapolation of Φ$_{B}$$\\_{s}$ / Φ$\\_{B}$$_{l}$ = √ m$_{B}$$\\_{s}$/m$\\_{B}$$_{l}$ · f$_{B}$$\\_{s}$/f$\\_{B}$$_{l}$ . The blue (triangle) points denote the APE data, while the red (square) points denote the HYP-smeared data. The color of the shaded (hatched) error band corresponds to those of the APE (HYP) data points. The dashed vertical line denotes the physical average u - d quark mass and the black dot denotes the physical strange quark mass, at which the SU (3)-breaking ratio must be one. The SU (2) HM χ PT coefficients obtained from the fit are R$_{Φ}$ = 1 . 21(9) and C$_{l}$ = 1 . 1(6) in the case of APE smearing and R$_{Φ}$ = 1 . 19(5) and C$_{l}$ = 1 . 2(3) in the case of HYP smearing. Errors shown are statistical only.\n\n29" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.25032460658808176, + "doc_id": "7d9088e1102f794f5971a5a660cca1761c76798889834d5b04c1c06af8669ff9", + "edit_distance": 0.7220376522702104, + "f1_score": 0.8579881656804734, + "meteor": 0.34133062803925446, + "precision": 0.90625, + "pred_md": "where\n\n\n\nwith A i ≡ A ai τ a 2 , i = 1 , . . . 2 N are the [ SU (2)] 2 N gauge fields, A 0 ≡ ˜ W ≡ ˜ W a τ a 2 and A 2 N +1 ≡ ˜ B ≡ ˜ B τ 3 2 are the SU (2) L ⊗ U (1) Y gauge fields, and the chiral fields Σ i and U have covariant derivatives defined by\n\n\n\n/negationslash\n\n\n\n/negationslash\n\nThe model has two sets of parameters, the gauge coupling constants ˜ g, ˜ g , g , ' i i = 1 , . . . 2 N , and the 'link coupling constants' f , i i = 1 , . . . 2 N +1 , i = N +1. For simplicity, we will impose a reflection invariance with respect to the ends of the moose, getting the following relations among the model parameters\n\n\n\nThe model content in terms of fields and symmetries can be summarized by the moose in Fig. 1.\n\nThe most peculiar feature is the absence in the Lagrangian given in Eq. (1) of any field connecting the N th and the N +1 th sites of the moose. This situation was referred to in ref. [39] as 'cutting a link'. As it was shown there, this choice guarantees the vanishing of the leading order corrections from new physics to the EW precision parameters; for instance, in ref. [60], the contributions to the /epsilon1 parameters [67-69] as well as the 'universal' form factors [26] were calculated, showing that all these contributions are of order m /M 2 Z ¯ 2 , where ¯ M is the mass scale of the lightest new resonance in the theory.\n\n4\n\n## II. REVIEW OF THE GD-BESS MODEL\n\nThe GD-BESS model is a moose model with a [ SU (2)] 2 N ⊗ SU (2) L ⊗ U (1) Y gauge symmetry, described by the Lagrangian [60]:\n\n/negationslash\n\n", + "recall": 0.8146067415730337, + "true_md": "4\n\n## II. REVIEW OF THE GD-BESS MODEL\n\nThe GD-BESS model is a moose model with a [ SU (2)] 2 N ⊗ SU (2)$_{L}$ ⊗ U (1)$_{Y}$ gauge sym- metry, described by the Lagrangian [60]:\n\n$$L = 2 N +1 ∑ i =1 $^{,i}$̸ = N +1 f 2 i Tr[ D$_{µ}$ $_{Σ}$† $_{i}$D$^{µ}$Σ$_{i}$ ] + f 2 $_{0}$Tr[ D$_{µ}$$_{U}$†$_{D}$ $^{µ}$U ] − 1 2˜ g $_{2}$Tr[( F ˜ W $_{µν}$) $^{2}$] − 1 2˜ g ′ $_{2}$Tr[( F ˜ B $_{µν}$) $^{2}$] − 1 2 g 2 i 2 N ∑ i =1 Tr[( F i $_{µν}$) $^{2}$] , (1)$$\n\nwhere\n\n$$F i µν = ∂$_{µ}$ A i ν − ∂$_{ν}$ A i µ + i [ A$_{µ}$ , A$_{ν}$ ] , i = 0 , . . . 2 N + 1 (2)$$\n\nwith A i ≡ A a i τ a 2 , i = 1 , . . . 2 N are the [ SU (2)] 2 N gauge fields, A 0 ≡ ˜ W ≡ ˜ W a τ a 2 and A 2 N +1 ≡ ˜ B ≡ ˜ B τ 3 2 are the SU (2)$_{L}$ ⊗ U (1)$_{Y}$ gauge fields, and the chiral fields Σ$_{i}$ and U have covariant derivatives defined by\n\n$$D$_{µ}$ Σ i = ∂$_{µ}$ Σ i + i A $^{i}$− 1 µ Σ i − i Σ $^{i}$Ai $_{µ}$, i = 1 , . . . 2 N + 1 , i ̸ = N + 1 (3)$$\n\n$$D$_{µ}$U = ∂$_{µ}$U + i ˜ W$_{µ}$ U − iU ˜ B$_{µ}$ (4)$$\n\n$$f$_{i}$ = $^{f$_{2}$$_{N}$$_{+2}$}$− $_{i}$, g$_{i}$ = $^{g$_{2}$$_{N}$$_{+1}$}$− $_{i}$. (5)$$\n\nThe model has two sets of parameters, the gauge coupling constants ˜ g, ˜ g ′ , g$_{i}$, i = 1 , . . . 2 N , and the “link coupling constants” f$_{i}$, i = 1 , . . . 2 N + 1 , i ̸ = N + 1. For simplicity, we will impose a reflection invariance with respect to the ends of the moose, getting the following relations among the model parameters\n\nThe model content in terms of fields and symmetries can be summarized by the moose in Fig. 1.\n\nThe most peculiar feature is the absence in the Lagrangian given in Eq. (1) of any field connecting the N th and the N + 1 th sites of the moose. This situation was referred to in ref. [39] as “cutting a link”. As it was shown there, this choice guarantees the vanishing of the leading order corrections from new physics to the EW precision parameters; for instance, in ref. [60], the contributions to the ϵ parameters [67–69] as well as the “universal” form factors [26] were calculated, showing that all these contributions are of order m 2 $_{Z}$/ ¯ M $^{2}$, where ¯ M is the mass scale of the lightest new resonance in the theory." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.2754095709113599, + "doc_id": "3b7d878ac4e69bcd54be2cc7146d2543d1af5b32078a3a1d938f7bd57219d0b6", + "edit_distance": 0.6427145708582834, + "f1_score": 0.7952755905511812, + "meteor": 0.39441517382211694, + "precision": 0.9351851851851852, + "pred_md": "where\n\n\n\nand the inverse covariance matrix\n\n\n\nThe fourth set of observational data is 12 Hubble evolution data from [21] and [22], its χ 2 H is defined as\n\n\n\nNote that redshifts of these data fall in the region z ∈ (0 , 1 75). .\n\nIn summary,\n\n\n\n## IV. FITTING RESULTS\n\n## A. Model I\n\nAt first, we divide the whole region of redshift into 4 bins (i.e., m = 3), the divided points and boundaries are (0 , z 1 , z 2 , 1 8 . , ∞ ), where z 1 and z 2 are left as free parameters of the model, and 0 < z 1 < z 2 < 1 8. . In the fourth bin we set w L = -1. It means that we divide the region with z ∈ (0 , 1 8) into 3 bins and seek for two possible turning points of . w de ( z ) in this region. The reconstructed w de of the best-fitted model is shown in Fig. 1,\n\nTABLE I: The best-fitted χ 2 of four data sets for Model I, CPL model and the ΛCDM model.\n\n8", + "recall": 0.6917808219178082, + "true_md": "where\n\nand the inverse covariance matrix\n\n  The fourth set of observational data is 12 Hubble evolution data from [21] and [22], its χ 2 H is defined as 12 ∑\n\n∑ Note that redshifts of these data fall in the region z ∈ (0 , 1 . 75).\n\nIn summary,\n\nAt first, we divide the whole region of redshift into 4 bins (i.e., m = 3), the divided points and boundaries are (0 , z$_{1}$, z$_{2}$, 1 . 8 , ∞ ), where z$_{1}$ and z$_{2}$ are left as free parameters of the model, and 0 < z$_{1}$ < z$_{2}$ < 1 . 8. In the fourth bin we set w$_{L}$ = − 1. It means that we divide the region with z ∈ (0 , 1 . 8) into 3 bins and seek for two possible turning points of w$_{de}$ ( z ) in this region. The reconstructed w$_{de}$ of the best-fitted model is shown in Fig. 1,\n\n$$X =    l$_{a}$ − 302 . 1 R − 1 . 71 z$_{∗}$ − 1090 . 04    (23) and the inverse covariance matrix$$\n\n$$C − 1 M =    1 . 8 27 . 968 − 1 . 103 27 . 968 5667 . 577 − 92 . 263 − 1 . 103 − 92 . 263 2 . 923    (24) The fourth set of observational data is 12 Hubble evolution data from [21] and [22], its$$\n\n$$χ 2 H = 12 ∑ i =1 [ H ( z$_{i}$ ) − H$_{ob}$ ( z$_{i}$ )] 2 σ 2 i . (25) Note that redshifts of these data fall in the region z ∈ (0 , 1 . 75).$$\n\n$$χ 2 total = ˜ χ 2 sn + χ 2 cmb + χ 2 bao + χ 2 $_{H}$. (26)$$\n\n## IV. FITTING RESULTS\n\n## A. Model I\n\nTABLE I: The best-fitted χ 2 of four data sets for Model I, CPL model and the ΛCDM model.\n\n8" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9954911156787525, + "doc_id": "8eecb197bee968839fd930396c407c9c24510bb6a415e180f4d4c9c5a108def7", + "edit_distance": 0.0029498525073746312, + "f1_score": 0.9927007299270073, + "meteor": 0.9971972138173848, + "precision": 0.9951219512195122, + "pred_md": "Stony Brook, New York, 1979, edited by P. Van Nieuwenhuizen and D. Z. Freedman (NorthHolland, Amsterdam, 1979), p 315; R. N. Mohapatra and G. Senjanovic, Phys. Rev. Lett. 44 , 912 (1980).\n\n- [2] R. N. Mohapatra and R. E. Marshak, Phys. Rev. Lett. 44 , 1316 (1980) [Erratum-ibid. 44 , 1643 (1980)]; R. E. Marshak and R. N. Mohapatra, Phys. Lett. B 91 , 222 (1980).\n- [3] S. Khalil, J. Phys. G 35 , 055001 (2008).\n- [4] S. Iso, N. Okada and Y. Orikasa, Phys. Lett. B 676 , 81 (2009); Phys. Rev. D 80 , 115007 (2009).\n- [5] W. Emam and S. Khalil, Eur. Phys. J. C 522 , 625 (2007).\n- [6] K. Huitu, S. Khalil, H. Okada and S. K. Rai, Phys. Rev. Lett. 101 , 181802 (2008).\n- [7] L. Basso, A. Belyaev, S. Moretti and C. H. Shepherd-Themistocleous, Phys. Rev. D 80 , 055030 (2009).\n- [8] P. F. Perez, T. Han and T. Li, Phys. Rev. D 80 , 073015 (2009).\n- [9] S. Khalil and O. Seto, JCAP 0810 , 024 (2008).\n- [10] M. S. Carena, A. Daleo, B. A. Dobrescu and T. M. P. Tait, Phys. Rev. D 70 , 093009 (2004).\n- [11] G. Cacciapaglia, C. Csaki, G. Marandella and A. Strumia, Phys. Rev. D 74 , 033011 (2006).\n- [12] S. Dawson and W. Yan, Phys. Rev. D 79 , 095002 (2009).\n- [13] L. Basso, A. Belyaev, S. Moretti and G. M. Pruna, arXiv:1002.1939 [hep-ph].\n- [14] E. W. Kolb and M. S. Turner, The Early Universe , Addison-Wesley (1990).\n- [15] D. N. Spergel et al. [WMAP Collaboration], Astrophys. J. Suppl. 170 , 377 (2007).\n- [16] J. McDonald, Phys. Rev. D 50 , 3637 (1994).\n- [17] C. P. Burgess, M. Pospelov and T. ter Veldhuis, Nucl. Phys. B 619 , 709 (2001).\n- [18] H. Davoudiasl, R. Kitano, T. Li and H. Murayama, Phys. Lett. B 609 , 117 (2005).\n- [19] T. Kikuchi and N. Okada, Phys. Lett. B 665 , 186 (2008).\n- [20] C. E. Yaguna, JCAP 0903 , 003 (2009).\n- [21] L. M. Krauss, S. Nasri and M. Trodden, Phys. Rev. D 67 , 085002 (2003).\n- [22] E. A. Baltz and L. Bergstrom, Phys. Rev. D 67 , 043516 (2003).\n- [23] K. Cheung and O. Seto, Phys. Rev. D 69 , 113009 (2004).\n- [24] J. Angle et al. [XENON Collaboration], Phys. Rev. Lett. 100 021303 (2008).\n- [25] Z. Ahmed et al. [The CDMS-II Collaboration], arXiv:0912.3592 [astro-ph.CO].\n- [26] http://xenon.astro.columbia.edu/.\n\n13", + "recall": 0.9902912621359223, + "true_md": "Stony Brook, New York, 1979, edited by P. Van Nieuwenhuizen and D. Z. Freedman (North- Holland, Amsterdam, 1979), p 315; R. N. Mohapatra and G. Senjanovic, Phys. Rev. Lett. 44 , 912 (1980).\n\n- [2] R. N. Mohapatra and R. E. Marshak, Phys. Rev. Lett. 44 , 1316 (1980) [Erratum-ibid. 44 , 1643 (1980)]; R. E. Marshak and R. N. Mohapatra, Phys. Lett. B 91 , 222 (1980).\n\n- [3] S. Khalil, J. Phys. G 35 , 055001 (2008).\n\n- [4] S. Iso, N. Okada and Y. Orikasa, Phys. Lett. B 676 , 81 (2009); Phys. Rev. D 80 , 115007 (2009).\n\n- [5] W. Emam and S. Khalil, Eur. Phys. J. C 522 , 625 (2007).\n\n- [6] K. Huitu, S. Khalil, H. Okada and S. K. Rai, Phys. Rev. Lett. 101 , 181802 (2008).\n\n- [7] L. Basso, A. Belyaev, S. Moretti and C. H. Shepherd-Themistocleous, Phys. Rev. D 80 , 055030 (2009).\n\n- [8] P. F. Perez, T. Han and T. Li, Phys. Rev. D 80 , 073015 (2009).\n\n- [9] S. Khalil and O. Seto, JCAP 0810 , 024 (2008).\n\n- [10] M. S. Carena, A. Daleo, B. A. Dobrescu and T. M. P. Tait, Phys. Rev. D 70 , 093009 (2004).\n\n- [11] G. Cacciapaglia, C. Csaki, G. Marandella and A. Strumia, Phys. Rev. D 74 , 033011 (2006).\n\n- [12] S. Dawson and W. Yan, Phys. Rev. D 79 , 095002 (2009).\n\n- [13] L. Basso, A. Belyaev, S. Moretti and G. M. Pruna, arXiv:1002.1939 [hep-ph].\n\n- [14] E. W. Kolb and M. S. Turner, The Early Universe , Addison-Wesley (1990).\n\n- [15] D. N. Spergel et al. [WMAP Collaboration], Astrophys. J. Suppl. 170 , 377 (2007).\n\n- [16] J. McDonald, Phys. Rev. D 50 , 3637 (1994).\n\n- [17] C. P. Burgess, M. Pospelov and T. ter Veldhuis, Nucl. Phys. B 619 , 709 (2001).\n\n- [18] H. Davoudiasl, R. Kitano, T. Li and H. Murayama, Phys. Lett. B 609 , 117 (2005).\n\n- [19] T. Kikuchi and N. Okada, Phys. Lett. B 665 , 186 (2008).\n\n- [20] C. E. Yaguna, JCAP 0903 , 003 (2009).\n\n- [21] L. M. Krauss, S. Nasri and M. Trodden, Phys. Rev. D 67 , 085002 (2003).\n\n- [22] E. A. Baltz and L. Bergstrom, Phys. Rev. D 67 , 043516 (2003).\n\n- [23] K. Cheung and O. Seto, Phys. Rev. D 69 , 113009 (2004).\n\n- [24] J. Angle et al. [XENON Collaboration], Phys. Rev. Lett. 100 021303 (2008).\n\n- [25] Z. Ahmed et al. [The CDMS-II Collaboration], arXiv:0912.3592 [astro-ph.CO].\n\n- [26] http://xenon.astro.columbia.edu/.\n\n13" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9041419405686313, + "doc_id": "7efbc29ba9261e703d33508f5c1c083d4ec4cd7d1577be6f07cfb367dd6a7837", + "edit_distance": 0.06349206349206349, + "f1_score": 0.970917225950783, + "meteor": 0.9434168538119323, + "precision": 0.9863636363636363, + "pred_md": "computing the B -meson decay constants and ∆ B = 2 mixing matrix elements. We therefore use the small-volume (16 ) 3 ensembles with only one lattice spacing and have relatively heavy light-quark masses and limited statistics. A novel feature of this work is the use of SU (2) heavy-light meson chiral perturbation theory (HM χ PT) to extrapolate N f = 2 + 1 lattice QCD results for B -meson quantities to the physical quark masses. This follows the approach taken by the RBC and UKQCD Collaborations in the light pseudoscalar meson sector in Ref. [34], and differs from the calculations of HPQCD and Fermilab/MILC, both of whom use SU (3) HM χ PT for their chiral and continuum extrapolations [14, 15]. The use of SU (2) χ PT is based on on the fact that the strange quark is much heavier than the up and down quarks, and can therefore be integrated out of the chiral effective theory. Because lattice QCD simulations at the physical strange-quark mass are possible via tuning, interpolation, or reweighting, SU (3) χ PT is generally not needed to extrapolate the strange quark to its physical value. When the masses of the light valence and sea quarks are sufficiently small such that SU (2) chiral perturbation theory is applicable, SU (2) χ PT for light pseudoscalar meson masses and decay constants converges more rapidly than SU (3) χ PT [34-37]. Although we do not have enough data or sufficiently light quark masses to perform a thorough comparison of SU (2) and SU (3) HM χ PT in this work, we believe that the use of SU (2) HM χ PT provides a promising alternative to SU (3) and warrants further study when better data is available.\n\nIn this work we compute both the ratio of decay constants, f B s /f B d , and the ratio of ∆ B = 2 matrix elements, ξ . We focus on the SU (3)-breaking ratios because both the statistical and systematic errors are smaller and under better control than for the individual decay constants and mixing matrix elements. Our results have large total uncertainties compared to those of HPQCD and Fermilab/MILC. Within errors, however, our results for the SU (3)-breaking ratios are consistent with the values presented in the literature and we expect to improve upon them and present values for the individual decay constants and matrix elements in a future work.\n\nThis paper is organized as follows. First, in Section II, we present the actions and parameters used in our lattice simulations. Next, in Sec. III, we briefly discuss the perturbative matching of the heavy-light current and the four-fermion operators; the details of the lattice perturbation theory calculation will be presented in another publication [38]. We compute\n\n5", + "recall": 0.9559471365638766, + "true_md": "computing the B -meson decay constants and Δ B = 2 mixing matrix elements. We therefore use the small-volume (16 $^{3}$) ensembles with only one lattice spacing and have relatively heavy light-quark masses and limited statistics. A novel feature of this work is the use of SU (2) heavy-light meson chiral perturbation theory (HM χ PT) to extrapolate N$_{f}$ = 2 + 1 lattice QCD results for B -meson quantities to the physical quark masses. This follows the approach taken by the RBC and UKQCD Collaborations in the light pseudoscalar meson sector in Ref. [34], and differs from the calculations of HPQCD and Fermilab/MILC, both of whom use SU (3) HM χ PT for their chiral and continuum extrapolations [14, 15]. The use of SU (2) χ PT is based on on the fact that the strange quark is much heavier than the up and down quarks, and can therefore be integrated out of the chiral effective theory. Because lattice QCD simulations at the physical strange-quark mass are possible via tuning, interpolation, or reweighting, SU (3) χ PT is generally not needed to extrapolate the strange quark to its physical value. When the masses of the light valence and sea quarks are sufficiently small such that SU (2) chiral perturbation theory is applicable, SU (2) χ PT for light pseudoscalar meson masses and decay constants converges more rapidly than SU (3) χ PT [34–37]. Although we do not have enough data or sufficiently light quark masses to perform a thorough comparison of SU (2) and SU (3) HM χ PT in this work, we believe that the use of SU (2) HM χ PT provides a promising alternative to SU (3) and warrants further study when better data is available.\n\nIn this work we compute both the ratio of decay constants, f$_{B}$$\\_{s}$/f$\\_{B}$$_{d}$ , and the ratio of Δ B = 2 matrix elements, ξ . We focus on the SU (3)-breaking ratios because both the statistical and systematic errors are smaller and under better control than for the individual decay constants and mixing matrix elements. Our results have large total uncertainties compared to those of HPQCD and Fermilab/MILC. Within errors, however, our results for the SU (3)-breaking ratios are consistent with the values presented in the literature and we expect to improve upon them and present values for the individual decay constants and matrix elements in a future work.\n\nThis paper is organized as follows. First, in Section II, we present the actions and param- eters used in our lattice simulations. Next, in Sec. III, we briefly discuss the perturbative matching of the heavy-light current and the four-fermion operators; the details of the lattice perturbation theory calculation will be presented in another publication [38]. We compute\n\n5" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7099864337893039, + "doc_id": "5fb9f1b2842d3d1990bd756cf1ec23d6fd76c3813c7148a1968f083d74d3dfe8", + "edit_distance": 0.26223776223776224, + "f1_score": 0.9559164733178653, + "meteor": 0.7632348970514006, + "precision": 0.9626168224299065, + "pred_md": "9\n\nbehaved 1 /N expansion at fixed k . We also review the argument that leads to a singular distribution of eigenvalues in the saddle point approximations. In section III we describe our numerical results for the wave functions. We describe data sets in various types of analyses. First we describe individual data sets for fixed Q,N . This lets us see the topology of the configuration from the plots and we also see that the support of the distribution of eigenvalues if of codimension one at large N , with fluctuations. We can also compare the different characterizations of the radius of the hole to see how big the fluctuations are on the various measurements and why some statistical characterizations of this feature are pathological (they are dominated by fluctuations). For the measurements that are well behaved we find that they converge at different rates, that one can mathematically prove some inequalities between them and that one such type of measurement converges faster and is optimal given our choices. Given this information, we then study the problem of varying N at fixed q = Q/N , to see how the large N limit is approached. Our numerical results show that the convergence to large N is slower than would be expected based on large N counting arguments. Finally, we also study the radius of the hole by varying q at fixed large N ( N = 10000) and obtain a scaling exponent of the radius as a function of q for small q . These results are different than those that were found previously in [6], that were obtained for much smaller values of N . We then conclude.\n\n## II. WAVE FUNCTIONS AND GEOMETRIC OBSERVABLES\n\nThe matrix model of commuting hermitian matrices X a [5] leads (by diagonalization of the matrices) to a model of N particles in six dimensions whose quantum Hamiltonian is given by\n\n\n\nwhere /vector x i are the positions of the particles in R 6 and µ 2 = ∏ i<j | /vector x i -/vector x j | 2 is a generalized Vandermonde determinant. The x a i are the i -th eigenvalue of the matrix X a . The six x variables per eigenvalue can be written in complex notation in terms of three complex numbers √ 2 z a = x 2 a -1 + ix 2 a , which can be arranges as a vector /vector z and their complex conjugates ¯ per each eigenvalue. /vector z", + "recall": 0.9493087557603687, + "true_md": "9\n\n## II. WAVE FUNCTIONS AND GEOMETRIC OBSERVABLES\n\nbehaved 1 /N expansion at fixed k . We also review the argument that leads to a singular distribution of eigenvalues in the saddle point approximations. In section III we describe our numerical results for the wave functions. We describe data sets in various types of analyses. First we describe individual data sets for fixed Q, N . This lets us see the topology of the configuration from the plots and we also see that the support of the distribution of eigenvalues if of codimension one at large N , with fluctuations. We can also compare the different characterizations of the radius of the hole to see how big the fluctuations are on the various measurements and why some statistical characterizations of this feature are pathological (they are dominated by fluctuations). For the measurements that are well behaved we find that they converge at different rates, that one can mathematically prove some inequalities between them and that one such type of measurement converges faster and is optimal given our choices. Given this information, we then study the problem of varying N at fixed q = Q/N , to see how the large N limit is approached. Our numerical results show that the convergence to large N is slower than would be expected based on large N counting arguments. Finally, we also study the radius of the hole by varying q at fixed large N ( N = 10000) and obtain a scaling exponent of the radius as a function of q for small q .\n\nThese results are different than those that were found previously in [6], that were obtained for much smaller values of N . We then conclude.\n\nThe matrix model of commuting hermitian matrices X a [5] leads (by diagonalization of the matrices) to a model of N particles in six dimensions whose quantum Hamiltonian is given by\n\n$$H = ∑ i − 1 2 1 µ 2 ⃗ ∇ $_{i}$µ $^{2}$∇ i + 1 2 | ⃗ x$_{i}$ | 2 (2) are the positions of the particles in R 6 and µ 2 = ∏ | ⃗ x$_{i}$ − ⃗ x$_{j}$ | 2 is a generalized$$\n\n∑ where ⃗ x$_{i}$ are the positions of the particles in R 6 and µ 2 = ∏ i<j | ⃗ x$_{i}$ − ⃗ x$_{j}$ | 2 is a generalized Vandermonde determinant. The x a i are the i -th eigenvalue of the matrix X $^{a}$. The six x variables per eigenvalue can be written in complex notation in terms of three complex numbers √$_{2}$$\\_{z}$ a = x 2 a − 1 + ix 2 $^{a}$, which can be arranges as a vector ⃗ z and their complex conjugates ⃗ ¯ z per each eigenvalue." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7826574147182161, + "doc_id": "94b25f87bb64edd664f3fb9177298a8499de78214cfd9414fbd144bd7995edb6", + "edit_distance": 0.23097826086956522, + "f1_score": 0.951768488745981, + "meteor": 0.9014386554002574, + "precision": 0.9801324503311258, + "pred_md": "FIG. 9: Comparison of lattice QCD results for f B s /f B d and ξ . The magenta (triangle) denotes our new values obtained by averaging the APE and HYP results, the gray (circle) the values published by the HPQCD Collaboration [14] and the beige (diamond) the preliminary value presented by the FNAL-MILC Collaboration at Lattice 2009 [15].\n\nFIG. 9: Comparison of lattice QCD results for f B s /f B d and ξ . The magenta (triangle) denotes our new values obtained by averaging the APE and HYP results, the gray (circle) the values published by the HPQCD Collaboration [14] and the beige (diamond) the preliminary value presented by the FNAL-MILC Collaboration at Lattice 2009 [15].\n\nComputations for this work were carried out in part on facilities of the USQCD Collaboration, which are funded by the Office of Science of the U.S. Department of Energy. We thank BNL, PPARC, RIKEN, University of Edinburgh, and the U.S. DOE for providing the facilities essential for the completion of this work. The Edinburgh QCDOC system was funded by PPARC JIF grant PPA/J/S/1998/00756 and operated through support from the Universities of Edinburgh, Southampton, and Wales, Swansea and from STFC grant PP/E006965/1.\n\nThis work was supported in part by the U.S. Department of Energy under grant No. DE-FG02-92ER40699, by Columbia University's I.I. Rabi grant, by PPARC grants PP/D000238/1 and PP/C503154/1, and by the Grant-in-Aid of the Ministry of Education, Culture, Sports, Science and Technology, Japan (MEXT Grant), No. 17740138, No. 19740134, and No.21540289. PAB is supported by RCUK. JMF and CTS acknowledge partial support from STFC grant ST/G000557/1 and EU contract MRTN-CT-2006-035482 (Flavianet). This manuscript has been authored by employees of Brookhaven Science Associates, LLC under Contract No. DE-AC02-98CH10886 with the U.S. Department of Energy. RV acknowledges support from BNL via the Goldhaber Distinguished Fellowship.\n\n44", + "recall": 0.925, + "true_md": "FIG. 9: Comparison of lattice QCD results for f$_{B}$$\\_{s}$/f$\\_{B}$$_{d}$ and ξ . The magenta (triangle) denotes our new values obtained by averaging the APE and HYP results, the gray (circle) the values published by the HPQCD Collaboration [14] and the beige (diamond) the preliminary value presented by the FNAL-MILC Collaboration at Lattice 2009 [15].\n\nComputations for this work were carried out in part on facilities of the USQCD Collab- oration, which are funded by the Office of Science of the U.S. Department of Energy. We thank BNL, PPARC, RIKEN, University of Edinburgh, and the U.S. DOE for providing the facilities essential for the completion of this work. The Edinburgh QCDOC system was funded by PPARC JIF grant PPA/J/S/1998/00756 and operated through support from the Universities of Edinburgh, Southampton, and Wales, Swansea and from STFC grant PP/E006965/1.\n\nThis work was supported in part by the U.S. Department of Energy under grant No. DE-FG02-92ER40699, by Columbia University’s I.I. Rabi grant, by PPARC grants PP/D000238/1 and PP/C503154/1, and by the Grant-in-Aid of the Ministry of Edu- cation, Culture, Sports, Science and Technology, Japan (MEXT Grant), No. 17740138, No. 19740134, and No.21540289. PAB is supported by RCUK. JMF and CTS acknowledge partial support from STFC grant ST/G000557/1 and EU contract MRTN-CT-2006-035482 (Flavianet). This manuscript has been authored by employees of Brookhaven Science Asso- ciates, LLC under Contract No. DE-AC02-98CH10886 with the U.S. Department of Energy. RV acknowledges support from BNL via the Goldhaber Distinguished Fellowship.\n\n44" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7584641233972242, + "doc_id": "af42555e47a911453a2b39c0c715991384050a9daa1facf3e824b41f0b8af3ef", + "edit_distance": 0.18847352024922118, + "f1_score": 0.9582309582309584, + "meteor": 0.8547265054667249, + "precision": 0.9798994974874372, + "pred_md": "star has (a) the maximum mass in the non-rotating limit larger than 1 44 . M /circledot which is the most accurately measured value for the maximum mass of a compact star [43] and (b) the maximum allowed rotation frequency is larger than the current observational limit of 716 Hz [44].\n\nIn Fig. 8 we show the correlations between the values of the f crit for the hybrid stars and the radius R 1 4 . for the neutron star with the canonical mass. We see that f crit is large if value of R 1 4 . is also large. Thus, hybrid star constructed for a given EOS for the CSQM can rotate faster if the EOS for the nuclear matter is sti ff er. The existence of the correlations between the values of f crit and R 1 4 . may be due to the fact that the pressure at which the nuclear to the quark matter transition occurs is closer to the values of P 1 4 . as can be seen from the lower and upper left panels of Figs. 2 and 3, respectively.\n\nFinally, we would like to compare the present results with coresponding ones obtained within the MIT bag model [37, 45]. The present results as obtained within the NJL model are significantly di ff erent with those for the MIT bag model. Within MIT bag model the EOS for the CSQM can be obtained by adjusting the value of the CFL gap parameter and the bag constant such that the resulting hybrid stars with CFL quark matter core are gravitationally stable upto the masses ∼ 2 M /circledot in the static limit and the the maximum allowed rotation frequency is much larger than 1 kHz. However, it can be seen from Fig. 7, stable configurations of the hybrid stars with CFL quark matter core obtained within the NJL model are having the maximum values for the mass and the rotational frequency appreciably lower than those obtained for the MIT bag model. The di ff erences between the results for the MIT bag model and the NJL model can be attributed to the fact that the constituent quark masses, chiral condensates and the colour superconducting gaps in the later case are computed self-consistently as a function of baryon density.\n\n## IV. CONCLUSIONS\n\nThe stability of non-rotating and rotating hybrid stars, composed of the colour superconducting quark matter core surrounded by a nuclear mantle, is studied by using several EOSs. The EOSs for the nuclear matter, employed at lower densities, are based on the variational and the mean field approaches. We use a diverse set of nuclear matter EOSs such that the resulting maximum neutron star mass lie in the range of 2 2 . -2 8 . M /circledot and the radius at the canonical neutron star mass vary between 11 3 . -14 8km. . The EOSs at higher densities corresponding to the colour superconducting quark matter in the 2SC or the CFL phase, are calculated within the NJL model\n\n8", + "recall": 0.9375, + "true_md": "star has (a) the maximum mass in the non-rotating limit larger than 1 . 44 $^{M}$⊙ which is the most accurately measured value for the maximum mass of a compact star [43] and (b) the maximum allowed rotation frequency is larger than the current observational limit of 716 Hz [44].\n\nIn Fig. 8 we show the correlations between the values of the f$_{crit}$ for the hybrid stars and the radius R$_{1}$$\\_{.}$$_{4}$ for the neutron star with the canonical mass. We see that f$_{crit}$ is large if value of R$_{1}$$\\_{.}$$_{4}$ is also large. Thus, hybrid star constructed for a given EOS for the CSQM can rotate faster if the EOS for the nuclear matter is sti ff er. The existence of the correlations between the values of f$_{crit}$ and R$_{1}$$\\_{.}$$_{4}$ may be due to the fact that the pressure at which the nuclear to the quark matter transition occurs is closer to the values of P$_{1}$$\\_{.}$$_{4}$ as can be seen from the lower and upper left panels of Figs. 2 and 3, respectively.\n\nFinally, we would like to compare the present results with coresponding ones obtained within the MIT bag model [37, 45]. The present results as obtained within the NJL model are significantly di ff erent with those for the MIT bag model. Within MIT bag model the EOS for the CSQM can be obtained by adjusting the value of the CFL gap parameter and the bag constant such that the resulting hybrid stars with CFL quark matter core are gravitationally stable upto the masses ∼ 2 $^{M}$⊙ in the static limit and the the maximum allowed rotation frequency is much larger than 1 kHz. However, it can be seen from Fig. 7, stable configuratio ns of the hybrid stars with CFL quark matter core obtained within the NJL model are having the maximum values for the mass and the rotational frequency appreciably lower than those obtained for the MIT bag model. The di ff erences between the results for the MIT bag model and the NJL model can be attributed to the fact that the constituent quark masses, chiral condensates and the colour superconducting gaps in the later case are computed self-consistently as a function of baryon density.\n\nThe stability of non-rotating and rotating hybrid stars, composed of the colour superconducting quark matter core surrounded by a nuclear mantle, is studied by using several EOSs. The EOSs for the nuclear matter, employed at lower densities, are based on the variational and the mean field approaches. We use a diverse set of nuclear matter EOSs s uch that the resulting maximum neutron star mass lie in the range of 2 . 2 − 2 . 8 $^{M}$⊙ and the radius at the canonical neutron star mass vary between 11 . 3 − 14 . 8km. The EOSs at higher densities corresponding to the colour superconducting quark matter in the 2SC or the CFL phase, are calculated within the NJL model\n\n## IV. CONCLUSIONS\n\n8" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "7ae1203fe26acc2be5d4df0c6c20553f5a9bed078bdc2f293ab23ec98c7c4cf3", + "edit_distance": 0.18847352024922118, + "f1_score": 0.9582309582309584, + "meteor": 0.8547265054667249, + "precision": 0.9798994974874372, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.9375, + "true_md": "" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9175758755188178, + "doc_id": "b37b5c1c79a581fffd22634879d20c602c7797a9bd40cd5af9e5676cdf5f5eab", + "edit_distance": 0.08737864077669903, + "f1_score": 0.9372549019607843, + "meteor": 0.9341168046601864, + "precision": 0.952191235059761, + "pred_md": "the former with respect the latter, the technical problem arises that the considered values of M/m are separated by intervals of the order of 10 or 15 units. Decreasing this interval would require to strongly increase the simulation time. In addition, some smoothing process should be used. Here, a different approach has been followed. The simulation data for L have been fitted by an analytical function of the mass ratio whose derivative has been afterwards computed. The trivial choice of a polynomial in m/M does not work so, motivated by the equilibrium elastic result, an expression of the form\n\n\n\nwhere A and B are two adjustable dimensionless parameters, was used. It turned out that it fits very well the results for all the values of α and α P considered here. Moreover, the values of the two fitting parameters are quite stable, in the sense that their value seem to converge very fast when the number of fitted data is increased.\n\n- [1] H.M. Jaeger, S.R. Nagel, and R.P. Behringer, Rev. Mod. Phys. 68 , 1259 (1996).\n- [2] J. Duran, Sands, Powers and Grains. An Introduction to the Physics of Granular Materials (Springer Verlag, New York, 2000).\n- [3] I. Goldhirsch, Annu. Rev. Fluid Mech. 35 , 267 (2003).\n- [4] N.V. Brilliantov and T. Pschel, o Kinetic Theory of Granular Gases (Oxford University Press, Oxford, 2004).\n- [5] I.S. Aranson and L.S. Tsimring, Rev. Mod. Phys. 78 , 641 (2006).\n- [6] J.J. Brey, M.I. Garc' ıa de Soria, P. Maynar, and M.J. Ruiz-Montero, Phys. Rev. E 70 , 011302 (2004).\n- [7] P. Visco, A. Puglisi, A. Barrat, F. van Wijland, and E. Trizac, Eur. Phys. J. B 51 , 377 (2006).\n- [8] M.P. Allen and D.J. Tildesley, Computer Simulations of Liquids (Clarendon Press, Oxford, 1987).\n- [9] T. Poschel and T. Schwager, Computational Granular Dynamics (Springer, Berlin 2005)\n- [10] L.D. Landau and E.M. Lifschitz, Statistical Physics, Part 1 (Pergamon Press, Oxford, 1978).\n- [11] A. Baldassarri, A. Barrat, G. D'Anna, V. Loreto, P. Mayor, and A. Puglisi, J. Phys.: Condens. Matter 17 , S2405 (2005).\n\n20", + "recall": 0.9227799227799228, + "true_md": "the former with respect the latter, the technical problem arises that the considered values of M/m are separated by intervals of the order of 10 or 15 units. Decreasing this interval would require to strongly increase the simulation time. In addition, some smoothing process should be used. Here, a different approach has been followed. The simulation data for L have been fitted by an analytical function of the mass ratio whose derivative has been afterwards computed. The trivial choice of a polynomial in m/M does not work so, motivated by the equilibrium elastic result, an expression of the form\n\nwhere A and B are two adjustable dimensionless parameters, was used. It turned out that it fits very well the results for all the values of α and α$_{P}$ considered here. Moreover, the values of the two fitting parameters are quite stable, in the sense that their value seem to converge very fast when the number of fitted data is increased.\n\n$$L = A g 0 mv 2 W ln ( 1 + Bm M ) , (A1)$$\n\n- [1] H.M. Jaeger, S.R. Nagel, and R.P. Behringer, Rev. Mod. Phys. 68 , 1259 (1996).\n\n- [2] J. Duran, Sands, Powers and Grains. An Introduction to the Physics of Granular Materials (Springer Verlag, New York, 2000).\n\n- [3] I. Goldhirsch, Annu. Rev. Fluid Mech. 35 , 267 (2003).\n\n- [4] N.V. Brilliantov and T. P¨ oschel, Kinetic Theory of Granular Gases (Oxford University Press, Oxford, 2004).\n\n- [5] I.S. Aranson and L.S. Tsimring, Rev. Mod. Phys. 78 , 641 (2006).\n\n- [6] J.J. Brey, M.I. Garc´ıa de Soria, P. Maynar, and M.J. Ruiz-Montero, Phys. Rev. E 70 , 011302 (2004).\n\n- [7] P. Visco, A. Puglisi, A. Barrat, F. van Wijland, and E. Trizac, Eur. Phys. J. B 51 , 377 (2006).\n\n- [8] M.P. Allen and D.J. Tildesley, Computer Simulations of Liquids (Clarendon Press, Oxford, 1987).\n\n- [9] T. P¨ oschel and T. Schwager, Computational Granular Dynamics (Springer, Berlin 2005)\n\n- [10] L.D. Landau and E.M. Lifschitz, Statistical Physics, Part 1 (Pergamon Press, Oxford, 1978).\n\n- [11] A. Baldassarri, A. Barrat, G. D’Anna, V. Loreto, P. Mayor, and A. Puglisi, J. Phys.: Condens. Matter 17 , S2405 (2005).\n\n20" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.07813995779186741, + "doc_id": "991044f7c43a7d2883d9e8885931ae8c427c80fad427246f08790f807de471a9", + "edit_distance": 0.8282988871224165, + "f1_score": 0.7309236947791165, + "meteor": 0.22439880207741003, + "precision": 0.9191919191919192, + "pred_md": "with tan θ = g /g ' and\n\n19\n\nFinally, let us add the contribution coming from the brane. Switching back to the coordinate space, the final expression is\n\n\n\n+ bosonic self-interactions + fermion terms\n\nwhere we have introduced the effective couplings\n\n\n\nand\n\n\n\nThe same result was obtained in the deconstructed GD-BESS model [60]. In fact from the correspondence in Eq. (7), taking the gauge couplings g i = g c , we get:\n\n\n\n\n\n∣ The Eq. (68) in the continuum limit reproduces Eq. (62).\n\nStarting from Eq. (64), we can mirror the calculation done in ref. [60] to obtain the seven form factors encoding the corrections from new physics to the EW precision observables [26], and then the /epsilon1 parameters. The results are\n\n\n\n\n\n", + "recall": 0.6066666666666667, + "true_md": "19\n\nFinally, let us add the contribution coming from the brane. Switching back to the coor- dinate space, the final expression is\n\n+ bosonic self-interactions + fermion terms\n\nwhere we have introduced the effective couplings\n\nand\n\nThe same result was obtained in the deconstructed GD-BESS model [60]. In fact from the correspondence in Eq. (7), taking the gauge couplings g$_{i}$ = g$_{c}$ , we get:\n\n∑ ∑ ∑ The Eq. (68) in the continuum limit reproduces Eq. (62).\n\nStarting from Eq. (64), we can mirror the calculation done in ref. [60] to obtain the seven form factors encoding the corrections from new physics to the EW precision observables [26], and then the ϵ parameters. The results are\n\nwith tan θ = g ′ /g and\n\n$$ϵ$_{1}$ = − ( c 4 θ + s 4 $_{θ}$) c 2 θ X, ϵ$_{2}$ = − c 2 $_{θ}$X, ϵ$_{3}$ = − X (71)$$\n\n$$W = g $^{2}$c2 $_{θ}$m 2 Z ¯ M $^{2}$¯ g 2 5 , Y = g $^{$^{′}$2}$c 2 $_{θ}$m 2 Z ¯ M $^{2}$¯ g 2 5 (70)$$\n\n$$ˆ S = ˆ T = ˆ U = V = X = 0 (69)$$\n\n$$1 ¯ g 2 5 → 1 G 2 = N ∑ k =1 1 g 2 k = N g 2 c (67)$$\n\n$$1 ¯ M 2 ∣ decon. = N ∑ i =1 1 g 2 c 2 N +1 ∑ j = N + i j − N f 2 $_{j}$g 2 c = N ∑ i =1 1 g 2 c N +1 ∑ j = i j f 2 $_{j}$g 2 c , (68) The Eq. (68) in the continuum limit reproduces Eq. (62).$$\n\n$$v = ˜ v b ( πR ) , ¯ g 2 5 = g 2 $_{5}$/πR. (66)$$\n\n$$1 g 2 = 1 ˜ g 2 + 1 ¯ g 2 5 , 1 g ′ 2 = 1 ˜ g ′ 2 + 1 ¯ g 2 5 . (65)$$\n\n$$L eff = − 1 4 g 2 ˜ W a µν ˜ W a µν − 1 4 g ′ 2 ˜ B$_{µν}$ ˜ B µν − v 2 8 ( ˜ W a µ ˜ W a µ + ˜ B$_{µ}$ ˜ B µ − 2 ˜ W 3 µ ˜ B µ ) + πR 4 g 2 5 ˜ W a µν □ ¯ M 2 ˜ W a µν + ˜ B$_{µν}$ □ ¯ M 2 ˜ B µν ) (64)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9766721105182574, + "doc_id": "6146e6dfec2417e3fbb11a05163a58f6523b40db2449f7a2dc1e3b96025dac64", + "edit_distance": 0.01929260450160772, + "f1_score": 0.9596412556053813, + "meteor": 0.9867773565014513, + "precision": 0.9553571428571429, + "pred_md": "- [12] A. Puglisi, A. Baldassarri, and A. Vulpiani, J. Stat. Mech.: Theory Exp. (2007) P08016.\n- [13] C.S. Campbell, Annu. Rev. Fluid Mech. 22 , 57 (1990).\n- [14] J.J. Brey and M.J. Ruiz-Montero, J. Stat. Mech.: Theory Exp. (2008) L09002.\n- [15] J.J. Brey, M.J. Ruiz-Montero, F. Moreno, and R. Garc' ıa-Rojo, Phys. Rev. E 65 , 061302 (2002).\n- [16] E. Livne, B. Meerson, and P.V. Sasorov, Phys. Rev. E 66 , 050301(R) 2002.\n- [17] J.J. Brey, J.W. Dufty, C.S. Kim, and A. Santos, Phys. Rev. E 58 , 4638 (1998).\n- [18] J.J. Brey and D. Cubero, in Granular Gases , edited by T. Pschel and S. Luding (Springero Verlag, Berlin, 2001).\n- [19] J.J. Brey and M.J. Ruiz-Montero, Phys. Rev. E 79 , 031305 (2009).\n- [20] S. McNamara and J-L. Barrat, Phys Rev. E 55 , 7767 (1997).\n- [21] S. McNamara and S. Luding, Phys. Rev. E 58 , 813 (1998).\n- [22] M. Argentina, M.G. Clerc, and R. Soto, Phys. Rev. Lett. 89 , 044301 (2002).\n- [23] J.T. Jenkins and F. Mancini, J. App. Mech. 54 , 27 (1987).\n\n21", + "recall": 0.963963963963964, + "true_md": "- [12] A. Puglisi, A. Baldassarri, and A. Vulpiani, J. Stat. Mech.: Theory Exp. (2007) P08016.\n\n- [13] C.S. Campbell, Annu. Rev. Fluid Mech. 22 , 57 (1990).\n\n- [14] J.J. Brey and M.J. Ruiz-Montero, J. Stat. Mech.: Theory Exp. (2008) L09002.\n\n- [15] J.J. Brey, M.J. Ruiz-Montero, F. Moreno, and R. Garc´ıa-Rojo, Phys. Rev. E 65 , 061302 (2002).\n\n- [16] E. Livne, B. Meerson, and P.V. Sasorov, Phys. Rev. E 66 , 050301(R) 2002.\n\n- [17] J.J. Brey, J.W. Dufty, C.S. Kim, and A. Santos, Phys. Rev. E 58 , 4638 (1998).\n\n- [18] J.J. Brey and D. Cubero, in Granular Gases , edited by T. P¨ oschel and S. Luding (Springer- Verlag, Berlin, 2001).\n\n- [19] J.J. Brey and M.J. Ruiz-Montero, Phys. Rev. E 79 , 031305 (2009).\n\n- [20] S. McNamara and J-L. Barrat, Phys Rev. E 55 , 7767 (1997).\n\n- [21] S. McNamara and S. Luding, Phys. Rev. E 58 , 813 (1998).\n\n- [22] M. Argentina, M.G. Clerc, and R. Soto, Phys. Rev. Lett. 89 , 044301 (2002).\n\n- [23] J.T. Jenkins and F. Mancini, J. App. Mech. 54 , 27 (1987).\n\n21" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9263678488946233, + "doc_id": "af4464353d39cadaf647ab312663f2b0d0456d0d633eeb6d6be455e9cf151f33", + "edit_distance": 0.17073170731707318, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9995357002945401, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "the existence of an interesting phenomenology that could be observed at LHC.\n\n## Acknowledgments\n\nThe authors would like to thank R. Contino and M. Redi for stimulating discussions and V. Ciulli for clarifying comments on statistical analysis.\n\n32", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "32\n\nthe existence of an interesting phenomenology that could be observed at LHC.\n\nThe authors would like to thank R. Contino and M. Redi for stimulating discussions and V. Ciulli for clarifying comments on statistical analysis.\n\n## Acknowledgments" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.2312754510108243, + "doc_id": "bd56c72409a0d51d73176bf79625ec44ade4edbe8e453c958ec9a4f41c1c8bec", + "edit_distance": 0.5964585274930102, + "f1_score": 0.8618266978922716, + "meteor": 0.44142311506214243, + "precision": 0.8975609756097561, + "pred_md": "neutron star mass vary between 11 3 . -14 8km. . It is interesting to note that the values of the maximum neutron star mass for both the APR and TM1 EOSs are equal, but, the radius at the canonical mass of the neutron star is reasonably smaller for the APR EOS. This is due to the fact that the APR EOS is softer relative to the TM1 at intermediate densities and it becomes sti ff er at high densities as can be seen from Fig. 1. Similar is the case with SLY4 and BSR10 EOSs. We shall see in next section that these pairs of nuclear matter EOSs, for which the maximum neutron star masses are the same, yield significantly di ff erent structure for the hybrid stars.\n\nThe EOSs for the CSQM in the 2SC or CFL phase are obtained within the NJL model. The input variables of the NJL model are the chemical potentials for all the quark flavours and colours in the chemical equilibrium which is given by the matrix:\n\n\n\nwhere, µ is the quark chemical potential, µ Q is the chemical potential of the electric charge equal to minus the electron chemical potential µ e and µ 3 and µ 8 are the colour chemical potentials associated with the two mutually commuting colour charges of the SU (3) c gauge group. The explicit form of the electric charge matrix Qf = diagf ( 2 3 , -1 3 , -1 3 ), and for the colour charge matrices T 3 = diagc ( 1 2 , -1 2 , 0), and √ 3 T 8 = diagc ( 1 2 , 1 2 , -1). In the mean-field approximation, the pressure at vanishing temperature reads as,\n\n\n\nwhere, σ , , u d s are the quark-antiquark condensates and ∆ c are the three diquark condensates. The values of σ i and ∆ c are determined using,\n\n\n\n\n\nIn Eq. (2) ω 0 is the mean field expectation value for isoscalar vector like meson ω given as [32] ω 0 = 2 GV 〈 QM | ψ ψ † u u + ψ ψ † d d + ψ ψ † s s | QM 〉 . This field modifies also the chemical potentials: µ , u d s , → µ , u d s , -ω 0 . The /epsilon1 i are the dispersion relations computed by following the Ref. [3]. The /epsilon1 i depend explicitly on the values of current quark masses, quark-antiquark and diquark condensates and various chemical potentials appearing in Eq. (1). The Pe = µ / 4 e (12 π 2 ) is the contribution to\n\n4", + "recall": 0.8288288288288288, + "true_md": "neutron star mass vary between 11 . 3 − 14 . 8km. It is interesting to note that the values of the maximum neutron star mass for both the APR and TM1 EOSs are equal, but, the radius at the canonical mass of the neutron star is reasonably smaller for the APR EOS. This is due to the fact that the APR EOS is softer relative to the TM1 at intermediate densities and it becomes sti ff er at high densities as can be seen from Fig. 1. Similar is the case with SLY4 and BSR10 EOSs. We shall see in next section that these pairs of nuclear matter EOSs, for which the maximum neutron star masses are the same, yield significantly di ff erent structure for the hybrid stars.\n\nThe EOSs for the CSQM in the 2SC or CFL phase are obtained within the NJL model. The input variables of the NJL model are the chemical potentials for all the quark flavours and colours in the chemical equilibrium which is given by the matrix:\n\nwhere, µ is the quark chemical potential, µ$_{Q}$ is the chemical potential of the electric charge equal to minus the electron chemical potential µ$_{e}$ and µ$_{3}$ and µ$_{8}$ are the colour chemical potentials asso- ciated with the two mutually commuting colour charges of the S U (3)$_{c}$ gauge group. The explicit form of the electric charge matrix Q$_{f}$ = diag$_{f}$ ( 2 $^{$\\_{3}$,}$− 1 $^{$\\_{3}$,}$− 1 $_{3}$), and for the colour charge matrices T$_{3}$ = diag$_{c}$ ( 1 $^{$\\_{2}$,}$− 1 $_{2}$, 0), and √$_{3}$$\\_{T}$$_{8}$ = diag$_{c}$ ( 1 $_{2}$, 1 $^{$\\_{2}$,}$− 1). In the mean-field approximation, the pressure at vanishing temperature reads as,\n\nwhere, σ$_{u}$$\\_{,}$$_{d}$$\\_{,}$$_{s}$ are the quark-antiquark condensates and Δ$_{c}$ are the three diquark condensates. The values of σ$_{i}$ and Δ$_{c}$ are determined using,\n\nIn Eq. (2) ω$_{0}$ is the mean field expectation value for isoscalar vector likemeson ω given as [32] ω$_{0}$ = 2 $^{G$\\_{V}$}$〈QM | $_{ψ}$† $_{u}$ψ$_{u}$ + $_{ψ}$† $_{d}$ψ$_{d}$ + $_{ψ}$† $_{s}$ψ$_{s}$ | $^{QM}$〉 . This field modifies also the chemical potentials: µ$_{u}$$\\_{,}$$_{d}$$\\_{,}$$_{s}$ → µ$_{u}$$\\_{,}$$_{d}$$\\_{,}$$_{s}$ − ω$_{0}$ . The ϵ$_{i}$ are the dispersion relations computed by following the Ref. [3]. The ϵ$_{i}$ depend explicitly on the values of current quark masses, quark-antiquark and diquark condensates and various chemical potentials appearing in Eq. (1). The P$_{e}$ = µ 4 $_{e}$/ (12 π $^{2}$) is the contribution to\n\n4\n\n$$µ αβ ab = ( µδ αβ + µ$_{Q}$ Q αβ f ) δ$_{ab}$ + [ µ$_{3}$ ( T$_{3}$ )$_{ab}$ + µ$_{8}$ ( T$_{8}$ )$_{ab}$ ] δ$^{αβ}$, (1)$$\n\n$$p = 4 K σ$_{u}$σ$_{d}$σ$_{s}$ − 1 4 G$_{D}$ 3 ∑ c = 1 | $^{Δ$_{c}$}$| 2 − 2 G$_{S}$ 3 ∑ α = 1 σ 2 α + ω 2 0 4 G$_{V}$ + 1 2 π 2 18 ∑ i = 1 ∫ Λ 0 dkk $^{2}$| $^{ϵ$_{i}$}$| + P$_{e}$ − B (2)$$\n\n$$∂ p ∂σ$_{i}$ = 0 (3)$$\n\n$$∂ p ∂ Δ$_{c}$ = 0 . (4)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.23719171782083082, + "doc_id": "19d8e066f16b94668c972439b33613ffad4c969f6010e68f9b8bf849b25e5acb", + "edit_distance": 0.7952069716775599, + "f1_score": 0.8860759493670887, + "meteor": 0.3379105987846892, + "precision": 0.9180327868852459, + "pred_md": "15]. Here µ l and R l are magnetic moment, and position of the l th nucleus and sum goes over all nucleus in the lattice. In second quantization it can be written as\n\n\n\nwhere A αβ ( R l ) = ˜ A ϕ l ∗ α ( R l ) ϕ β ( R l ). Finally\n\n\n\nwhere glyph[vector] Q αα ' = ∑ I J αα ' ( glyph[vector] R j ) glyph[vector] M j -∑ n A αα ' ( glyph[vector] R I glyph[vector] l ) l .\n\nFrom the total Hamiltonian H an effective Hamiltonian is obtained by tracing over the degrees of freedom of the electron wavefunction and by taking the interaction term H in into account to second order of perturbation theory, which yields\n\n\n\nHere we limit our calculation to a two electron and two MI system in a DQD. The two-electron wavefunction is confined to the Hilbert sub-space constructed from the bonding and anti-bonding (HOMO, LUMO) one-electron orbitals of the DQD, ϕ ± . Below the magnetic field corresponding to spin singlet-triplet transition, this results in six basis functions of two-electron, a spin singlet ( S 0 ) ground state Ψ g that can be expressed as superposition of ϕ + ( glyph[vector] r 1 ) ϕ + ( glyph[vector] r 2 ) | S 0 〉 and ϕ -( glyph[vector] r 1 ) ϕ -( glyph[vector] r 2 ) | S 0 〉 with binding energy E g , and five excited states Ψ x with energy E x , consisting of three degenerate first excited triplet states, and two higher excited singlet states [11].\n\nCalculating the matrix elements in Eq. 10 yields the effective Hamiltonian\n\n\n\nwhere H mm = ∑ j,j ' ∆ jj ' glyph[vector] M j · glyph[vector] M j ' is the electron mediated (RKKY-type [14]) interaction between the MIs, and H mn = ∑ j,l ∆ jl glyph[vector] I l · glyph[vector] M j is the electron mediated interaction between MIs and nuclear spin bath; the electron mediated interaction between host nuclear spins H nn is neglected. Here, ∆ jj ' = -γ J 2 2 em U R , glyph[vector] ( glyph[vector] j R j ' ) / (2∆ ) and e ∆ j,l = γ AJ 2 ˜ em U R , glyph[vector] ( glyph[vector] j R / l ) ∆ . e Further, γ = α + -α -, where α + , and α -are the coefficients of the two-electrons ground state that is expressed as linear combination of bonding-antibonding in two level model Ψ ( g glyph[vector] r , glyph[vector] 1 r 2 ) = [ α + ϕ + ( glyph[vector] r 1 ) ϕ + ( glyph[vector] r 2 ) + α -ϕ -( glyph[vector] r 1 ) ϕ -( glyph[vector] r 2 )] | S 0 〉 , ∆ is the two e electron singlet-triplet splitting, ˜ = 1 A /L ∑ L l =1 ˜ , A l and U R , glyph[vector] ( glyph[vector] j R λ ) = ϕ + ( glyph[vector] R j ) ϕ -( glyph[vector] R j ) ϕ + ( glyph[vector] R λ ) ϕ -( glyph[vector] R λ ) with λ = j , l ' .\n\nIn the following we use the effective Hamiltonian 11 to calculate the decoherence time of the DQD with two MIs\n\nFIG. 2: N i , the maximum number of elementary gate operations within the coherence-time normalized by factor 2 πA ( A ≡ A e ≈ A m ) in meV in a Fe:ZnSe DQD (2MI), compared with ZnSe DQD filled with two-electrons (2e) versus parabolic strength of confining potential of each dot, ω 0 , for various gate voltages, V g = 110 (circles), V g = 154 (squares), V g = 198 (triangles), and V g = 242 (diamonds) in meV. N i as a function of external magnetic field for ω 0 = 27 5 meV and . V g = 110 meV is shown in the inset.\n\nFIG. 2: N i , the maximum number of elementary gate operations within the coherence-time normalized by factor 2 πA ( A ≡ A e ≈ A m ) in meV in a Fe:ZnSe DQD (2MI), compared with ZnSe DQD filled with two-electrons (2e) versus parabolic strength of confining potential of each dot, ω 0 , for various gate voltages, V g = 110 (circles), V g = 154 (squares), V g = 198 (triangles), and V g = 242 (diamonds) in meV. N i as a function of external magnetic field for ω 0 = 27 5 meV and . V g = 110 meV is shown in the inset.\n\n0\n\nand two electrons, where each MI represents a spin qubit. The result is compared to a two qubit system realized by two electrons in a DQD. The calculation is performed by using the quasi-static bath approximation [15-17], where the host nuclear spins are approximated by a random magnetic field glyph[vector] B n with a Gaussian distribution. In this limit the two-electron and two-MI nuclear bath Hamiltonian are given by\n\n\n\nwhere k = e m and , glyph[vector] K = glyph[vector] S, M glyph[vector] for electrons and MI, respectively. The coherence time is obtained by solving the equation of motion for glyph[vector] K 1 and glyph[vector] K 2 with initial state |↑↓〉 and by averaging over the Gaussian magnetic field distribution. From that we obtain 〈 B e 〉 = 〈 B m 〉 = 0, 〈 B 2 e 〉 = 1 ( / g µ e b ) 2 ∑ l I l ( I l +1) ˜ A ϕ 2 l | + ( R l ) | 4 , and 〈 B 2 m 〉 = 1 / g ( m b µ ) 2 ∑ l I l ( I l +1) ˜ A ϕ 2 l | + ( R l ) ϕ -( R l ) | 2 . From there an effective Zeeman splitting ∆ ˜ k = (2 〈 B 2 k 〉 / 3) 1 / 2 is calculated, hence τ k = ¯ ( h/ g µ k b ˜ ∆ ). k Assuming I l = 1 2 / we find the spin relaxation time τ e = ¯ (2 h/ A e ) and τ m = Ch/ ¯ (2 A m ). Here A e = ( ∑ l ˜ A ϕ 2 l | + ( R l ) | 4 ) 1 / 2 , A m = ( ∑ l ˜ A ϕ 2 l | + ( R l ) ϕ -( R l ) | 2 ) 1 / 2 , and C = ∆ e / γ [ 2 J em Λ( glyph[vector] R , glyph[vector] 1 R 2 )] is the RKKY correction to the MI coherence time, stems from the MI-nuclear-spin in-\n\n3", + "recall": 0.8562691131498471, + "true_md": "15]. Here µ$_{l}$ and R$_{l}$ are magnetic moment, and position of the l th nucleus and sum goes over all nucleus in the lattice. In second quantization it can be written as\n\nwhere A$_{αβ}$ ( R$_{l}$ ) = ˜ A$_{l}$ϕ ∗ $_{α}$( R$_{l}$ ) ϕ$_{β}$ ( R$_{l}$ ). Finally\n\nwhere ⃗ Q$_{αα}$ ′ = ∑ I J$_{αα}$ ′ ( ⃗ R$_{j}$ ) ⃗ M$_{j}$ − ∑ n A$_{αα}$ ′ ( ⃗ R$_{l}$ ) ⃗ I$_{l}$ . From the total Hamiltonian H an effective Hamilto-\n\nI n From the total Hamiltonian H an effective Hamilto- nian is obtained by tracing over the degrees of freedom of the electron wavefunction and by taking the interaction term H$_{in}$ into account to second order of perturbation theory, which yields\n\n$$H$_{en}$ = − ∑ αβ ∑ l A$_{αβ}$ ( R$_{l}$ ) 2 [ I$_{zl}$ ( c † α $_{↑}$c$_{β}$$_{↑}$ − c † α $_{↓}$c$_{β}$$_{↓}$ ) + I + l c † α $_{↓}$c$_{β}$$_{↑}$ + I − l c † α $_{↑}$c$_{β}$$_{↓}$ ] , (8)$$\n\n$$H$_{int}$ = − 1 2 ∑ αα ′ ∑ σσ ′ ⃗ Q$_{αα}$ ′ · τ$_{σσ}$ ′ c † $_{ασ}$c$_{α}$ $^{′}$σ ′ , (9)$$\n\n$$H$_{eff}$ = H$_{m}$ + H$_{n}$ + ∑ x |〈 Ψ$_{x}$ | H$_{in}$ | Ψ$_{g}$ 〉| 2 E$_{g}$ − E$_{x}$ . (10)$$\n\n3\n\nFIG. 2: N$_{i}$ , the maximum number of elementary gate op- erations within the coherence-time normalized by factor 2 πA ( A ≡ A$_{e}$ ≈ A$_{m}$ ) in meV in a Fe:ZnSe DQD (2MI), com- pared with ZnSe DQD filled with two-electrons (2e) versus parabolic strength of confining potential of each dot, ω$_{0}$ , for various gate voltages, V$_{g}$ = 110 (circles), V$_{g}$ = 154 (squares), V$_{g}$ = 198 (triangles), and V$_{g}$ = 242 (diamonds) in meV. N$_{i}$ as a function of external magnetic field for ω$_{0}$ = 27 . 5 meV and V$_{g}$ = 110 meV is shown in the inset.\n\nHere we limit our calculation to a two electron and two MI system in a DQD. The two-electron wavefunction is confined to the Hilbert sub-space constructed from the bonding and anti-bonding (HOMO, LUMO) one-electron orbitals of the DQD, ϕ$_{±}$ . Below the magnetic field cor- responding to spin singlet-triplet transition, this results in six basis functions of two-electron, a spin singlet ( S$_{0}$ ) ground state Ψ$_{g}$ that can be expressed as superposition of ϕ$_{+}$ ( ⃗ r$_{1}$ ) ϕ$_{+}$ ( ⃗ r$_{2}$ ) | S$_{0}$ 〉 and ϕ$_{−}$ ( ⃗ r$_{1}$ ) ϕ$_{−}$ ( ⃗ r$_{2}$ ) | S$_{0}$ 〉 with binding energy E$_{g}$ , and five excited states Ψ$_{x}$ with energy E$_{x}$ , consisting of three degenerate first excited triplet states, and two higher excited singlet states [11].\n\nCalculating the matrix elements in Eq. 10 yields the effective Hamiltonian\n\nand two electrons, where each MI represents a spin qubit. The result is compared to a two qubit system realized by two electrons in a DQD. The calculation is performed by using the quasi-static bath approximation [15–17], where the host nuclear spins are approximated by a random magnetic field ⃗ B$_{n}$ with a Gaussian distribution. In this limit the two-electron and two-MI nuclear bath Hamilto- nian are given by\n\nwhere H$_{mm}$ = ∑ j,j ′ Δ$_{jj}$ ′ ⃗ M$_{j}$ · ⃗ M$_{j}$ ′ is the electron medi- ated (RKKY-type [14]) interaction between the MIs, and H$_{mn}$ = $^{∑}$$\\_{j,l}$Δ$\\_{jl}$ ⃗ I$\\_{l}$ · ⃗ M$\\_{j}$ is the electron mediated interac- tion between MIs and nuclear spin bath; the electron mediated interaction between host nuclear spins H$\\_{nn}$ is neglected. Here, Δ$\\_{jj}$ ′ = − γ $^{2}$J2 $\\_{em}$U ( ⃗ R$\\_{j}$, ⃗ R$\\_{j}$ ′ ) / (2Δ$\\_{e}$) and Δ$\\_{j,l}$ = γ 2 ˜ AJ$\\_{em}$U ( ⃗ R$\\_{j}$, ⃗ R$\\_{l}$ ) / Δ$\\_{e}$. Further, γ = α$\\_{+}$ − α$\\_{−}$ , where α$\\_{+}$ , and α$\\_{−}$ are the coefficients of the two-electrons ground state that is expressed as linear combination of bonding-antibonding in two level model Ψ$\\_{g}$( ⃗ r$\\_{1}$, ⃗ r$\\_{2}$ ) = [ α$\\_{+}$ϕ$\\_{+}$ ( ⃗ r$\\_{1}$ ) ϕ$\\_{+}$ ( ⃗ r$\\_{2}$ ) + α$\\_{−}$ϕ$\\_{−}$ ( ⃗ r$\\_{1}$ ) ϕ$\\_{−}$ ( ⃗ r$\\_{2}$ )] | S$\\_{0}$ 〉 , Δ$\\_{e}$ is the two electron singlet-triplet splitting, ˜ A = 1 /L ∑ L l =1 ˜ A$\\_{l}$ , and U ( ⃗ R$\\_{j}$, ⃗ R$\\_{λ}$ ) = ϕ$\\_{+}$ ( ⃗ R$\\_{j}$ ) ϕ$\\_{−}$ ( ⃗ R$\\_{j}$ ) ϕ$\\_{+}$ ( ⃗ R$\\_{λ}$ ) ϕ$\\_{−}$ ( ⃗ R$\\_{λ}$ ) with λ = j $^{′}$, l .\n\nwhere k = e , m and ⃗ K = ⃗ S, ⃗ M for electrons and MI, respectively. The coherence time is obtained by solving the equation of motion for ⃗ K$_{1}$ and ⃗ K$_{2}$ with initial state |↑↓〉 and by averaging over the Gaussian magnetic field distribution. From that we obtain 〈 B$_{e}$ 〉 = 〈 B$_{m}$ 〉 = 0, 〈 B 2 $_{e}$〉 = 1 / ( g$_{e}$µ$_{b}$ ) 2 ∑ l I$_{l}$ ( I$_{l}$ + 1) ˜ A 2 l | ϕ$_{+}$ ( R$_{l}$ ) | $^{4}$, and 〈 B 2 $_{m}$〉 = 1 / ( g$_{m}$µ$_{b}$ ) 2 ∑ l I$_{l}$ ( I$_{l}$ + 1) ˜ A 2 l | ϕ$_{+}$ ( R$_{l}$ ) ϕ$_{−}$ ( R$_{l}$ ) | $^{2}$. From there an effective Zeeman splitting ˜ Δ$_{k}$ = (2 〈 B 2 $_{k}$〉 / 3) 1 / 2 is cal- culated, hence τ$_{k}$ = ¯ h/ ( g$_{k}$µ$_{b}$ ˜ Δ$_{k}$). Assuming I$_{l}$ = 1 / 2 we find the spin relaxation time τ$_{e}$ = ¯ h/ (2 A$_{e}$ ) and τ$_{m}$ = C ¯ h/ (2 A$_{m}$ ). Here A$_{e}$ = ( ∑ l ˜ A 2 l | ϕ$_{+}$ ( R$_{l}$ ) | $^{4}$)1 / $^{2}$, A$_{m}$ = ( ∑ l ˜ A 2 l | ϕ$_{+}$ ( R$_{l}$ ) ϕ$_{−}$ ( R$_{l}$ ) | $^{2}$)1 / $^{2}$, and C = Δ$_{e}$ / [ γ $^{2}$J$_{em}$ Λ( ⃗ R$_{1}$, ⃗ R$_{2}$ )] is the RKKY correction to the MI coherence time, stems from the MI-nuclear-spin in-\n\nIn the following we use the effective Hamiltonian 11 to calculate the decoherence time of the DQD with two MIs\n\n$$H$_{kn}$ = 2 ∑ i =1 g$_{k}$µ$_{b}$ ⃗ B$_{n}$ · ⃗ K$_{i}$, (12)$$\n\n$$H$_{eff}$ = H$_{m}$ + H$_{n}$ + H$_{mm}$ + H$_{mn}$, (11)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6346625596315172, + "doc_id": "ab512fd3dc636383b33c5ab7bb8e518fd127783130a3333d29156477c25c98c1", + "edit_distance": 0.6795895096921323, + "f1_score": 0.9376344086021505, + "meteor": 0.6062630326781995, + "precision": 0.9646017699115044, + "pred_md": "1\n\nFIG. 11: The evolution of the optical integral in the NS (top) and the SCS (bottom) in the original MFLI model. Parameters are the same as above. Note that only ∼ 75 -80% of the spectral weight is recovered up to 1 eV .\n\nFIG. 11: The evolution of the optical integral in the NS (top) and the SCS (bottom) in the original MFLI model. Parameters are the same as above. Note that only ∼ 75 -80% of the spectral weight is recovered up to 1 eV .\n\nFIG. 12: Evolution of the difference of the optical integrals in the SCS and the NS with the upper cut-off ω c . Parameters are the same as before. Observe that the optical sum in the SCS is larger than in the NS and that ∆ W has not yet reached ∆ W K up to the bandwidth. The dashed line is the FGT result.\n\nFIG. 12: Evolution of the difference of the optical integrals in the SCS and the NS with the upper cut-off ω c . Parameters are the same as before. Observe that the optical sum in the SCS is larger than in the NS and that ∆ W has not yet reached ∆ W K up to the bandwidth. The dashed line is the FGT result.\n\nc\n\nThis clearly affects n k because it is expressed via the full Green's function and competes with the conventional effect of the gap opening. The distribution function from this model, which we show in Fig.2b brings this point out by showing that in a MFLI model, at /epsilon1 < 0, n k in a superconductor is larger than n k in the normal state, in clear difference with the BCSI case.\n\nWe analyzed the original MFLI model for various parameters and found that the behavior presented in Fig. 12, where ∆ W ω ( c ) > 0 for all frequencies, is typical but\n\n9\n\nFIG. 13: Behavior of W K with Γ for the original MFLI model at very small α = 0 05. . We set ω 1 = ∆ = 32 meV . Observe the inconsistency with W K in the BCSI model in Fig 4.\n\nFIG. 13: Behavior of W K with Γ for the original MFLI model at very small α = 0 05. . We set ω 1 = ∆ = 32 meV . Observe the inconsistency with W K in the BCSI model in Fig 4.\n\nFIG. 14: The special case of α = 1 5,Γ = 5 . meV , other parameters the same as in Fig. 10. These parameters are chosen to illustrate that two sign changes (indicated by arrows in the figure) are also possible within the original MFLI model.\n\nFIG. 14: The special case of α = 1 5,Γ = 5 . meV , other parameters the same as in Fig. 10. These parameters are chosen to illustrate that two sign changes (indicated by arrows in the figure) are also possible within the original MFLI model.\n\nnot not a generic one. There exists a range of parameters α and Γ where ∆ W K is still positive, but ∆ W ω ( c ) changes the sign twice and is negative at intermediate frequencies. We show an example of such behavior in Fig14. Still, for most of the parameters, the behavior of ∆ W ω ( c ) is the same as in Fig. 12.\n\nOn more careful looking we found the problem with the original MFLI model. We recall that in this model the self-energy in the SCS state was obtained by just cutting the NS self energy at ω 1 (see Eq.18). We argue that this phenomenological formalism is not fully consistent, at least for small α . Indeed, for α = 0, the MFLI model reduces to BCSI model for which the behavior of the selfenergy is given by Eq. (12). This self-energy evolves with ω and Σ '' has a square-root singularity at ω = ∆ + ω o (with ω o = 0). Meanwhile Σ '' in the original MFLI model in Eq. (18) simply jumps to zero at ω = ω 1 = ∆, and this happens for all values of α including α = 0 where the MFLI and BCSI model should merge. This inconsistency is reflected in Fig 13, where we plot the near-BCS limit of MFLI model by taking a very small α = 0 05. . We see that the optical integral W K in the SCS still remains larger than in the NS over a wide range of Γ, in clear difference with the exactly known behavior in the BCSI", + "recall": 0.9121338912133892, + "true_md": "9\n\nFIG. 13: Behavior of W K with Γ for the original MFLI model at very small α = 0 . 05. We set ω 1 = Δ = 32 meV . Observe the inconsistency with W K in the BCSI model in Fig 4.\n\nFIG. 11: The evolution of the optical integral in the NS (top) and the SCS (bottom) in the original MFLI model. Parame- ters are the same as above. Note that only ∼ $^{75}$− 80% of the spectral weight is recovered up to 1 eV .\n\nFIG. 12: Evolution of the difference of the optical integrals in the SCS and the NS with the upper cut-off ω c . Parameters are the same as before. Observe that the optical sum in the SCS is larger than in the NS and that Δ W has not yet reached Δ W K up to the bandwidth. The dashed line is the FGT result.\n\nFIG. 14: The special case of α = 1 . 5,Γ = 5 meV , other pa- rameters the same as in Fig. 10. These parameters are chosen to illustrate that two sign changes (indicated by arrows in the figure) are also possible within the original MFLI model.\n\nnot not a generic one. There exists a range of parame- ters α and Γ where Δ W$_{K}$ is still positive, but Δ W ( ω$_{c}$ ) changes the sign twice and is negative at intermediate frequencies. We show an example of such behavior in Fig14. Still, for most of the parameters, the behavior of Δ W ( ω$_{c}$ ) is the same as in Fig. 12.\n\nOn more careful looking we found the problem with the original MFLI model. We recall that in this model the self-energy in the SCS state was obtained by just cutting the NS self energy at ω$_{1}$ (see Eq.18). We argue that this phenomenological formalism is not fully consistent, at least for small α . Indeed, for α = 0, the MFLI model reduces to BCSI model for which the behavior of the self- energy is given by Eq. (12). This self-energy evolves with ω and Σ ′′ has a square-root singularity at ω = Δ + ω$_{o}$ (with ω$_{o}$ = 0). Meanwhile Σ ′′ in the original MFLI model in Eq. (18) simply jumps to zero at ω = ω$_{1}$ = Δ, and this happens for all values of α including α = 0 where the MFLI and BCSI model should merge. This inconsistency is reflected in Fig 13, where we plot the near-BCS limit of MFLI model by taking a very small α = 0 . 05. We see that the optical integral W$_{K}$ in the SCS still remains larger than in the NS over a wide range of Γ, in clear difference with the exactly known behavior in the BCSI\n\nThis clearly affects n$_{k}$ because it is expressed via the full Green’s function and competes with the conventional ef- fect of the gap opening. The distribution function from this model, which we show in Fig.2b brings this point out by showing that in a MFLI model, at ϵ < 0, n$_{k}$ in a superconductor is larger than n$_{k}$ in the normal state, in clear difference with the BCSI case.\n\nWe analyzed the original MFLI model for various pa- rameters and found that the behavior presented in Fig. 12, where Δ W ( ω$_{c}$ ) > 0 for all frequencies, is typical but" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.12872002462438853, + "doc_id": "1b6b12f1b6a01b6c838aaf1fe3a558cbf7b263ff09f4e9ce6074dc09b54ea617", + "edit_distance": 0.6910435497124076, + "f1_score": 0.8608695652173912, + "meteor": 0.24531076841428384, + "precision": 0.8878923766816144, + "pred_md": "TABLE I: dx /dA i , dy /dA i , and d (ln J /dA ) are expressed as sums of terms in 1 / D ( 1 -D 2 ), 1 ( / D 2 -D 3 ), and 1 / D ( 3 -D 1 ).\n\nExperimentally, it is known that δ 0 = m 2 2 -m 2 1 ∼ = 7 × 10 -5 eV 2 , ∆ 0 = m 2 3 -m 2 2 ∼ = 3 × 10 -3 eV 2 , so that δ 0 / ∆ 0 /lessmuch 1 (we assume the 'normal' ordering of neutrino masses. The 'inverted' case can be similarly treated). Note that these values are relevant to long baseline experiments since A = √ 2 G n E F e ∼ (7 6 . × 10 -5 eV 2 )( E/GeV )( ρ/gcm -3 ).\n\nSince δ 0 /lessmuch ∆ , we expect that the three-flavor prob0 lem can be approximated by a pair of well separated two-flavor problems [10]. Indeed, the structure of the differential equations in Table I shows that the variables ( x , y i i ) evolve slowly as a function of A except for two regions, where D 1 ≈ D 2 and D 2 ≈ D 3 , corresponding to the two resonance regions. More precisely, let us denote by ( A , A , A , A 0 l i h , A d ) the values of A in vacuum ( A 0 = 0), at the lower resonance ( A , l [ d D ( 1 -D 2 ) /dA ] A l = 0), intermediate range ( A i ), higher resonance ( A , d D h [ ( 2 -D 3 ) /dA ] A h = 0), and for dense medium ( A d ). Rapid evolution for ( x , y i i ) only occurs for A ≈ A l and A ≈ A h .\n\nFor 0 ≤ A < A i , we need only to keep the terms ∝ 1 / D ( 1 -D 2 ) in Table I. It is seen that\n\n\n\nGiven W 0 (Eq. (10)), with x i 0 + y i 0 ∼ = 0, Eq. (20) yields x i + y i ∼ = 0. Thus, we expect that for 0 ≤ A < A i , while the individual variables ( x , x 1 2 , y 1 , y 2 ) are rapidly changing, x 3 /similarequal y 3 /similarequal O ( /epsilon1 ) stay small, as do the combinations x 1 + y 1 ∼ = x 2 + y 2 ∼ = 0, and x 1 + x 2 /similarequal constant, y 1 + y 2 /similarequal constant. The differential equations can then be approximated, with δ ≡ D 2 -D 1 , by\n\n\n\nIt follows that\n\n\n\nwhere b l ∼ = 2( x 10 + x 20 ) 2 . So, in the lower resonance\n\nregion, the explicit, approximate, solutions are\n\n\n\nwith c l = δ 0 ( x 10 -x 20 ). Also, x 1 + y 1 ∼ = x 2 + y 2 ∼ = 0, x 3 ∼ = y 3 ∼ = 0. From W 0 , we have b l = 2( x 10 + x 20 ) 2 ∼ = 1 2. / We see thus, as A sweeps through the lower resonance region, δ goes through a minimum, x 1 decreases and x 2 rises while keeping x 1 + x 2 /similarequal 1 / 2. After the resonance, for large A A ( /greatermuch δ 0 ), δ /similarequal A x , 1 → 0, and x 2 → 1 / 2.\n\nA similar analysis can be done for the region A i < A < A d . Here, the starting values ( A l /lessmuch A < A h ) are x 1 /similarequal y 1 /similarequal 0, x 3 /similarequal y 3 /similarequal 0, x 2 → 1 / 2, y 2 → -1 / 2. The differential equations are dominated by terms proportional to 1 / D ( 2 -D 3 ), and they satisfy\n\n\n\nWith ∆ ≡ D 3 -D 2 , the approximate equations near A ≈ A h are then\n\n\n\ntogether with x 2 + y 2 /similarequal x 3 + y 3 /similarequal 0, while x 1 and y 1 are slowly varying so that x 1 /similarequal y 1 /similarequal 0 throughout.\n\nThe solutions are\n\n\n\nwith b h = 2( x 20 + x 30 ) 2 and c h = ∆ ( 0 x 20 -x 30 ).\n\nOur results can be summarized by the matrices W at\n\nThus, as A goes from A i through A h to A d , the changes for ( x , y i j ) are: x 2 /similarequal 1 / 2 → 0; y 2 /similarequal -1 / 2 → 0; x 3 /similarequal 0 → 1 / 2; and y 3 /similarequal 0 →-1 / 2.\n\n3", + "recall": 0.8354430379746836, + "true_md": "TABLE I: dx i /dA , dy i /dA , and d (ln J ) /dA are expressed as sums of terms in 1 / ( D 1 − D 2 ), 1 / ( D 2 − D 3 ), and 1 / ( D 3 − D 1 ).\n\nExperimentally, it is known that δ$_{0}$ = m 2 − m 2 1 ∼ = 7 × 10 − $^{5}$eV $^{2}$, Δ$_{0}$ = m 2 3 − m 2 ∼ = 3 × 10 − $^{3}$eV $^{2}$, so that δ$_{0}$/ Δ$_{0}$ ≪ 1 (we assume the “normal” ordering of neutrino masses. The “inverted” case can be similarly treated). Note that these values are relevant to long baseline experiments since A = √$_{2}$$\\_{G}$$_{F}$$\\_{n}$$_{e}$$\\_{E}$ ∼ (7 . 6 × 10 − $^{5}$eV $^{2}$)( E/GeV )( ρ/gcm − $^{3}$).\n\nregion, the explicit, approximate, solutions are\n\nSince δ$_{0}$ ≪ Δ$_{0}$, we expect that the three-flavor prob- lem can be approximated by a pair of well separated two-flavor problems [10]. Indeed, the structure of the differential equations in Table I shows that the vari- ables ( x$_{i}$, y$_{i}$ ) evolve slowly as a function of A except for two regions, where D$_{1}$ ≈ D$_{2}$ and D$_{2}$ ≈ D$_{3}$ , cor- responding to the two resonance regions. More pre- cisely, let us denote by ( A$_{0}$, A$_{l}$, A$_{i}$, A$_{h}$, A$_{d}$ ) the values of A in vacuum ( A$_{0}$ = 0), at the lower resonance ( A$_{l}$, [ d ( D$_{1}$ − D$_{2}$ ) /dA ]$_{A}$$\\_{l}$ = 0), intermediate range ( A$\\_{i}$ ), higher resonance ( A$\\_{h}$, [ d ( D$\\_{2}$ − D$\\_{3}$ ) /dA ]$\\_{A}$$_{h}$ = 0), and for dense medium ( A$_{d}$ ). Rapid evolution for ( x$_{i}$, y$_{i}$ ) only occurs for A ≈ A$_{l}$ and A ≈ A$_{h}$ . For 0 ≤ A < A$_{i}$ , we need only to keep the terms ∝\n\n≈ ≈ For 0 ≤ A < A$_{i}$ , we need only to keep the terms ∝ 1 / ( D$_{1}$ − D$_{2}$ ) in Table I. It is seen that\n\nGiven W$_{0}$ (Eq. (10)), with x$_{i}$$\\_{0}$ + y$\\_{i}$$_{0}$ ∼ = 0, Eq. (20) yields x$_{i}$ + y$_{i}$ ∼ = 0. Thus, we expect that for 0 ≤ A < A$_{i}$ , while the individual variables ( x$_{1}$, x$_{2}$, y$_{1}$, y$_{2}$ ) are rapidly changing, x$_{3}$ ≃ y$_{3}$ ≃ O ( ϵ ) stay small, as do the combi- nations x$_{1}$ + y$_{1}$ ∼ = x$_{2}$ + y$_{2}$ ∼ = 0, and x$_{1}$ + x$_{2}$ ≃ constant, y$_{1}$ + y$_{2}$ ≃ constant. The differential equations can then be approximated, with δ ≡ D$_{2}$ − D$_{1}$ , by\n\nIt follows that\n\nwhere b$_{l}$ ∼ = 2( x$_{10}$ + x$_{20}$ ) $^{2}$. So, in the lower resonance\n\n− Thus, as A goes from A$_{i}$ through A$_{h}$ to A$_{d}$ , the changes for ( x$_{i}$, y$_{j}$ ) are: x$_{2}$ ≃ 1 / 2 → 0; y$_{2}$ ≃ − 1 / 2 → 0; x$_{3}$ ≃ 0 → 1 / 2; and y$_{3}$ ≃ 0 → − 1 / 2. Our results can be summarized by the matrices W at\n\n→ ≃ → − Our results can be summarized by the matrices W at\n\nwith b$_{h}$ = 2( x$_{20}$ + x$_{30}$ ) 2 and c$_{h}$ = Δ$_{0}$( x$_{20}$ − x$_{30}$ ). Thus, as A goes from A$_{i}$ through A$_{h}$ to A$_{d}$ , the changes\n\nThe solutions are\n\ntogether with x$_{2}$ + y$_{2}$ ≃ x$_{3}$ + y$_{3}$ ≃ 0, while x$_{1}$ and y$_{1}$ are slowly varying so that x$_{1}$ ≃ y$_{1}$ 0 throughout. The solutions are\n\nWith Δ ≡ D$_{3}$ − D$_{2}$ , the approximate equations near A ≈ A$_{h}$ are then\n\nwith c$_{l}$ = δ$_{0}$ ( x$_{10}$ − x$_{20}$ ). Also, x$_{1}$ + y$_{1}$ ∼ = x$_{2}$ + y$_{2}$ ∼ = 0, x$_{3}$ ∼ = y$_{3}$ ∼ = 0. From W$_{0}$ , we have b$_{l}$ = 2( x$_{10}$ + x$_{20}$ ) 2 ∼ = 1 / 2. We see thus, as A sweeps through the lower resonance region, δ goes through a minimum, x$_{1}$ decreases and x$_{2}$ rises while keeping x$_{1}$ + x$_{2}$ ≃ 1 / 2. After the resonance, for large A ( A ≫ δ$_{0}$ ), δ ≃ A , x$_{1}$ → 0, and x$_{2}$ → 1 / 2. A similar analysis can be done for the region A$_{i}$ <\n\n≫ ≃ → → A similar analysis can be done for the region A$_{i}$ < A < A$_{d}$ . Here, the starting values ( A$_{l}$ ≪ A < A$_{h}$ ) are x$_{1}$ ≃ y$_{1}$ ≃ 0, x$_{3}$ ≃ y$_{3}$ ≃ 0, x$_{2}$ → 1 / 2, y$_{2}$ → − 1 / 2. The differential equations are dominated by terms pro- portional to 1 / ( D$_{2}$ − D$_{3}$ ), and they satisfy\n\n$$δ = [2 b$_{l}$A 2 − 4 c$_{l}$A + δ 2 $_{0}$] 1 / $^{2}$, x$_{1}$ = 1 2 [( x$_{10}$ + x$_{20}$ ) − ( b$_{l}$A − c$_{l}$ ) /δ ] , x$_{2}$ = 1 2 [( x$_{10}$ + x$_{20}$ ) + ( b$_{l}$A − c$_{l}$ ) /δ ] , (24)$$\n\n$$d ( x$_{1}$ − y$_{2}$ ) dA = d ( x$_{2}$ − y$_{1}$ ) dA = d ( x$_{3}$ − y$_{3}$ ) dA = 0 . (21)$$\n\n$$d ( x$_{1}$ − y$_{1}$ ) dA = d ( x$_{2}$ − y$_{3}$ ) dA = d ( x$_{3}$ − y$_{2}$ ) dA = 0 . (25)$$\n\n$$dx$_{2}$ dA ∼ = − 4 x$_{2}$x$_{3}$ Δ ∼ = − dx$_{3}$ dA , d Δ dA ∼ = 2( x$_{3}$ − x$_{2}$ ) , (26)$$\n\n$$dx$_{1}$ dA ∼ = − 4 x$_{1}$x$_{2}$ δ ∼ = − dx$_{2}$ dA , dδ dA ∼ = 2( x$_{2}$ − x$_{1}$ ) . (22)$$\n\n$$d dA [ x$_{1}$x$_{2}$δ $^{2}$] = 0 , d dA [( x$_{1}$ − x$_{2}$ ) δ ] = − 2( x$_{1}$ + x$_{2}$ ) 2 ≡ − b$_{l}$, (23)$$\n\n$$Δ = [2 b$_{h}$A 2 − 4 c$_{h}$A + Δ 2 $_{0}$] 1 / $^{2}$, x$_{2}$ = 1 2 [( x$_{20}$ + x$_{30}$ ) − ( b$_{h}$A − c$_{h}$ ) / Δ] , x$_{3}$ = 1 2 [( x$_{20}$ + x$_{30}$ ) + ( b$_{h}$A − c$_{h}$ ) / Δ] , (27)$$\n\n3" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.042636924430117885, + "doc_id": "a3b91823cf1f05e82e5e69ee5174508625f468ffd11997d87bbef76342e6fd6f", + "edit_distance": 0.8650693568726355, + "f1_score": 0.8080229226361031, + "meteor": 0.18839020731075723, + "precision": 0.9591836734693877, + "pred_md": "Now, employ the orthogonality properties of the Mathieu functions to obtain the relations\n\n\n\n\n\nIn view of (47), define the function ˜ ( F v, k ) by the rule\n\n\n\nand define functions ˜ ˜ F c r ( k ) and ˜ ˜ F s r ( k ) by the rules\n\n\n\n\n\nNote the similarity to (17), where cos( rφ ) and sin( rφ ) are replaced by ce ( r v, q ) and se ( r v, q ). We will call the functions ˜ ˜ F α r ( k ) Mathieu coefficient functions in analogy to the Fourier coefficients that arise in Fourier analysis.\n\nWith these definitions, the relations (47) can be rewritten in the form\n\n\n\nFinally, employ (50) in (42). So doing gives the result\n\n\n\nWe have obtained an elliptical cylinder harmonic expansion for ψ in terms of surface field data.\n\nOf course, what we really want are the on-axis gradients. Again, once these gradients are known, we may use\n\n9\n\n(11) and (12) to compute the associated scalar and vector potentials. The gradients can be found by employing two remarkable connections (identities) between elliptic and circular cylinder functions of the form [3]\n\n\n\n\n\nFor further reference, we will call the quantities α r m ( k ) and β r m ( k ) Mathieu-Bessel connection coefficients [3, 4]. Using these results, (51) can be rewritten in the form\n\n\n\nUpon comparing (53) with (5), we conclude that there are the relations\n\n\n\nand\n\n\n\nFinally, in view of (8) and (54), we have the desired results\n\n\n\n\n\nWe have found expressions for the on-axis gradients in terms of field data (normal component) on the surface of an elliptic cylinder.", + "recall": 0.698019801980198, + "true_md": "Now, employ the orthogonality properties of the Mathieu functions to obtain the relations\n\nIn view of (47), define the function ˜ F ( v, k ) by the rule\n\nand define functions ˜ F c $_{r}$( k ) and ˜ F s $_{r}$( k ) by the rules\n\nNote the similarity to (17), where cos( rφ ) and sin( rφ ) are replaced by ce$_{r}$( v, q ) and se$_{r}$( v, q ). We will call the functions ˜ F α r ( k ) Mathieu coefficient functions in analogy to the Fourier coefficients that arise in Fourier analysis.\n\nWith these definitions, the relations (47) can be rewrit- ten in the form\n\nFinally, employ (50) in (42). So doing gives the result\n\nWe have obtained an elliptical cylinder harmonic expan- sion for ψ in terms of surface field data.\n\nOf course, what we really want are the on-axis gradi- ents. Again, once these gradients are known, we may use\n\nWe have found expressions for the on-axis gradients in terms of field data (normal component) on the surface of an elliptic cylinder.\n\nFinally, in view of (8) and (54), we have the desired re- sults\n\nand\n\nUpon comparing (53) with (5), we conclude that there are the relations\n\nFor further reference, we will call the quantities α r $_{m}$( k ) and β r $_{m}$( k ) Mathieu-Bessel connection coefficients [3, 4]. Using these results, (51) can be rewritten in the form\n\n(11) and (12) to compute the associated scalar and vec- tor potentials. The gradients can be found by employing two remarkable connections (identities) between elliptic and circular cylinder functions of the form [3]\n\n9\n\n$$c$_{r}$ ( k )Ce ′ $_{r}$( U, q ) = 1 2 π 2 ∫ 2 π 0 dv ce$_{r}$( v, q )$^{∫}$ ∞ −∞ dz e − $^{ikz}$F ( U, v, z ) , (47a)$$\n\n$$s$_{r}$ ( k )Se ′ $_{r}$( U, q ) = 1 2 π 2 ∫ 2 π 0 dv se$_{r}$( v, q )$^{∫}$ ∞ −∞ dz e − $^{ikz}$F ( U, v, z ) . (47b)$$\n\n$$Ce$_{r}$( u, q ) ce$_{r}$( v, q ) = ∞ ∑ m =0 α r $_{m}$( k ) I$_{m}$ ( kρ ) cos( mφ ) , (52a)$$\n\n$$Se$_{r}$( u, q ) se$_{r}$( v, q ) = ∞ ∑ m =1 β r $_{m}$( k ) I$_{m}$ ( kρ ) sin( mφ ) . (52b)$$\n\n$$˜ F ( v, k ) = 1 2 π ∫ ∞ −∞ dz e − $^{ikz}$F ( U, v, z ) , (48)$$\n\n$$˜ F c $_{r}$( k ) = 1 π ∫ 2 π 0 dv ce$_{r}$( v, q ) ˜ F ( v, k ) = 1 2 π 2 ∫ 2 π 0 dv ce$_{r}$( v, q )$^{∫}$ ∞ −∞ dz e − $^{ikz}$F ( U, v, z ) , (49a)$$\n\n$$˜ F s $_{r}$( k ) = 1 π ∫ 2 π 0 dv se$_{r}$( v, q ) ˜ F ( v, k ) = 1 2 π 2 ∫ 2 π 0 dv se$_{r}$( v, q )$^{∫}$ ∞ −∞ dz e − $^{ikz}$F ( U, v, z ) . (49b)$$\n\n$$ψ ( x, y, z ) = ∞ ∑ m =0 ∫ ∞ −∞ dk e $^{ikz}$I$_{m}$ ( kρ ) cos( mφ ) ∞ ∑ r =0 α r $_{m}$( k )[ ˜ F c $_{r}$( k ) / Ce ′ $_{r}$( U, q )] + ∞ ∑ m =1 ∫ ∞ −∞ dk e $^{ikz}$I$_{m}$ ( kρ ) sin( mφ ) ∞ ∑ r =1 β r $_{m}$( k )[ ˜ F s $_{r}$( k ) / Se ′ $_{r}$( U, q )] . (53)$$\n\n$$G$_{m,c}$ ( k ) = ∞ ∑ r =0 α r $_{m}$( k )[ ˜ F c $_{r}$( k ) / Ce ′ $_{r}$( U, q )] , (54a)$$\n\n$$G$_{m,s}$ ( k ) = ∞ ∑ r =1 β r $_{m}$( k )[ ˜ F s $_{r}$( k ) / Se ′ $_{r}$( U, q )] . (54b)$$\n\n$$c$_{r}$ ( k ) = ˜ F c $_{r}$( k ) Ce ′ $_{r}$( U, q ) , s$_{r}$ ( k ) = ˜ F s $_{r}$( k ) Se ′ $_{r}$( U, q ) . (50)$$\n\n$$C [ n ] $_{m,c}$( z ) = i n 2 $^{m}$m ! ∫ ∞ −∞ dk e $^{ikz}$kn + m ∞ ∑ r =0 α r $_{m}$( k )[ ˜ F c $_{r}$( k ) / Ce ′ $_{r}$( U, q )] , (55a)$$\n\n$$C [ n ] $_{m,s}$( z ) = i n 2 $^{m}$m ! ∫ ∞ −∞ dk e $^{ikz}$kn + m ∞ ∑ r =1 β r $_{m}$( k )[ ˜ F s $_{r}$( k ) / Se ′ $_{r}$( U, q )] . (55b)$$\n\n$$ψ ( x, y, z ) = ∞ ∑ r =0 ∫ ∞ −∞ dk e $^{ikz}$[ ˜ F c $_{r}$( k ) / Ce ′ $_{r}$( U, q )]Ce$_{r}$( u, q ) ce$_{r}$( v, q ) + ∞ ∑ r =1 ∫ ∞ −∞ dk e $^{ikz}$[ ˜ F s $_{r}$( k ) / Se ′ $_{r}$( U, q )]Se$_{r}$( u, q ) se$_{r}$( v, q ) . (51)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8074414193738139, + "doc_id": "91396eaadc4f148048f7c7b028ad518ff8986f2317f76abf7ddcdd483976dd19", + "edit_distance": 0.6327900287631831, + "f1_score": 0.8964757709251101, + "meteor": 0.8085064377874008, + "precision": 0.9334862385321101, + "pred_md": "arXiv:1001.2120v2 [quant-ph] 21 Oct 2010\n\n## Quantum dynamics in the bosonic Josephson junction\n\nMaya Chuchem , Katrina Smith-Mannschott 1 2 3 , , Moritz Hiller 4 ,\n\nTsampikos Kottos , 2 Amichay Vardi 5 6 , , and Doron Cohen 1\n\n- 1 Department of Physics, Ben-Gurion University of the Negev, P.O.B. 653, Beer-Sheva 84105, Israel 2 Department of Physics, Wesleyan University, Middletown, Connecticut 06459, USA\n\n3 MPI for Dynamics and Self-Organization, Bunsenstrasse10, D-37073Gottingen, Germany 4 Physics Institute, Albert-Ludwigs-Universitt, a Hermann-Herder-Str. 3, D-79104 Freiburg, Germany\n\n- 5 Department of Chemistry, Ben-Gurion University of the Negev, P.O.B. 653, Beer-Sheva 84105, Israel 6 ITAMP, Harvard-Smithsonian CFA, 60 Garden St., Cambridge, Massachusetts 02138, USA\n\nWe employ a semiclassical picture to study dynamics in a bosonic Josephson junction with various initial conditions. Phase-diffusion of coherent preparations in the Josephson regime is shown to depend on the initial relative phase between the two condensates. For initially incoherent condensates, we find a universal value for the buildup of coherence in the Josephson regime. In addition, we contrast two seemingly similar on-separatrix coherent preparations, finding striking differences in their convergence to classicality as the number of particles increases.\n\n## I. INTRODUCTION\n\nBose-Einstein condensates (BECs) of dilute, weaklyinteracting gases offer a unique opportunity for exploring non-equilibrium many-body dynamics, far beyond small perturbations of the ground state. Highly excited states are naturally produced in BEC experiments and their dynamics can be traced with great precision and control. The most interesting possibilities lie in strong correlation effects, which imply a significant role of quantum fluctuations.\n\nThe importance of correlations and fluctuations may be enhanced by introducing an optical lattice, that can be controlled by tuning its depth. This tight confinement decreases the kinetic energy contribution with respect to the interactions between atoms. In the tight-binding limit, such systems are described by a Bose-Hubbard Hamiltonian (BHH), characterized by the hopping frequency K between adjacent lattice sites, the on-site interaction strength U , and the total atom number N . The strong correlation regime is attained when the characteristic coupling parameter u ≡ UN/K exceeds unity, as indicated by the quantum phase transition from a superfluid to a Mott-insulator [2, 3].\n\nThe simplest BHH is obtained for two weakly coupled condensates (dimer). Its dynamics is readily mapped onto a SU(2) spin problem and is closely related to the physics of superconductor Josephson junctions [4, 5]. To the lowest order approximation, it may be described by a Gross-Pitaevskii mean-field theory, accurately accounting for Josephson oscillations [6-8] and macroscopic self trapping [9], observed experimentally in Refs.[10, 11], as well as the equivalents of the ac and dc Josephson effect [12] observed in [13].\n\nBoth Josephson oscillations and macroscopic self trapping rely on coherent (Gaussian) preparations, with different initial population imbalance. The mean-field premise is that such states remain Gaussian throughout their evolution so that the relative phase ϕ between the two condensates remains defined. However, interactions\n\nbetween atoms lead to the collapse and revival of the relative phase in a process known as phase diffusion [14-16]. (the appropriate term is in fact phase spreading ). Phase diffusion has been observed with astounding precision in an optical lattice in Refs.[17], in a double-BEC system in Refs.[18-20], and in a 1D spinor BEC in Ref. [21]. Typically, the condensates are coherently prepared, held for a varying duration ('hold time') in which phase-diffusion takes place, and are then released and allowed to interfere, thus measuring the relative coherence through the many-realization fringe visibility. In order to establish this quantity, the experiment is repeated many times for each hold period.\n\nPhase-diffusion experiments focus on the initial preparation of a zero relative phase and its dispersion when no coupling is present between the condensates. However, in the presence of weak coupling during the hold time, the dynamics of phase diffusion is richer. It becomes sensitive to initial value of ϕ and the loss of coherence is most rapid for ϕ = π [22-24]. Here, we expand on a recent letter [24], showing that this quantum effect can be described to excellent accuracy by means of a semiclassical phase-space picture. Furthermore, exploiting the simplicity of the dimer phase space, we derive analytical expressions based on the classical phase-space propagation [25].\n\nPhase-space methods [26] have been extensively applied for the numerical simulation of quantum and thermal fluctuation effects in BECs [27-39]. Such methods utilize the semiclassical propagation of phase-space distributions with quantum fluctuations emulated via stochastic noise terms, and using a cloud of initial conditions that reflects the uncertainty of the initial quantum wave-packet. One particular example is the truncated Wigner approximation [28, 31, 34, 36] where higher order derivatives in the equation of motion for the Wigner distribution function are neglected, thus amounting to the propagation of an ensemble using the Gross-Pitaevskii equations.\n\nDue to the relative simplicity of the classical phasespace of the two-site BHH, it is possible to carry out its", + "recall": 0.8622881355932204, + "true_md": "# Quantum dynamics in the bosonic Josephson junction\n\nMaya Chuchem $^{1}$, Katrina Smith-Mannschott2 , $^{3}$, Moritz Hiller$^{4}$, Tsampikos Kottos $^{2}$, Amichay Vardi5 , $^{6}$, and Doron Cohen1\n\n$^{1}$Department of Physics, Ben-Gurion University of the Negev, P.O.B. 653, Beer-Sheva 84105, Israel\n\n$^{2}$Department of Physics, Wesleyan University, Middletown, Connecticut 06459, USA\n\n$^{3}$MPI for Dynamics and Self-Organization, Bunsenstrasse10, D-37073G¨ ottingen, Germany\n\n$^{4}$Physics Institute, Albert-Ludwigs-Universit¨ at, Hermann-Herder-Str. 3, D-79104 Freiburg, Germany\n\n$^{5}$Department of Chemistry, Ben-Gurion University of the Negev, P.O.B. 653, Beer-Sheva 84105, Israel\n\n$^{6}$ITAMP, Harvard-Smithsonian CFA, 60 Garden St., Cambridge, Massachusetts 02138, USA\n\nWe employ a semiclassical picture to study dynamics in a bosonic Josephson junction with vari- ous initial conditions. Phase-diffusion of coherent preparations in the Josephson regime is shown to depend on the initial relative phase between the two condensates. For initially incoherent conden- sates, we find a universal value for the buildup of coherence in the Josephson regime. In addition, we contrast two seemingly similar on-separatrix coherent preparations, finding striking differences in their convergence to classicality as the number of particles increases.\n\nBose-Einstein condensates (BECs) of dilute, weakly- interacting gases offer a unique opportunity for exploring non-equilibrium many-body dynamics, far beyond small perturbations of the ground state. Highly excited states are naturally produced in BEC experiments and their dynamics can be traced with great precision and control.\n\nThe most interesting possibilities lie in strong correlation effects, which imply a significant role of quantum fluctu- ations.\n\nbetween atoms lead to the collapse and revival of the rel- ative phase in a process known as phase diffusion [14–16]. (the appropriate term is in fact phase spreading ). Phase diffusion has been observed with astounding precision in an optical lattice in Refs.[17], in a double-BEC system in Refs.[18–20], and in a 1D spinor BEC in Ref. [21]. Typ- ically, the condensates are coherently prepared, held for a varying duration (‘hold time’) in which phase-diffusion takes place, and are then released and allowed to inter- fere, thus measuring the relative coherence through the many-realization fringe visibility. In order to establish this quantity, the experiment is repeated many times for each hold period.\n\nThe importance of correlations and fluctuations may be enhanced by introducing an optical lattice, that can be controlled by tuning its depth. This tight confinement decreases the kinetic energy contribution with respect to the interactions between atoms. In the tight-binding limit, such systems are described by a Bose-Hubbard Hamiltonian (BHH), characterized by the hopping fre- quency K between adjacent lattice sites, the on-site in- teraction strength U , and the total atom number N . The strong correlation regime is attained when the character- istic coupling parameter u ≡ UN/K exceeds unity, as indicated by the quantum phase transition from a super- fluid to a Mott-insulator [2, 3].\n\nPhase-diffusion experiments focus on the initial prepa- ration of a zero relative phase and its dispersion when no coupling is present between the condensates. However, in the presence of weak coupling during the hold time, the dynamics of phase diffusion is richer. It becomes sen- sitive to initial value of ϕ and the loss of coherence is most rapid for ϕ = π [22–24]. Here, we expand on a re- cent letter [24], showing that this quantum effect can be described to excellent accuracy by means of a semiclas- sical phase-space picture. Furthermore, exploiting the simplicity of the dimer phase space, we derive analytical expressions based on the classical phase-space propaga- tion [25].\n\nThe simplest BHH is obtained for two weakly coupled condensates (dimer). Its dynamics is readily mapped onto a SU(2) spin problem and is closely related to the physics of superconductor Josephson junctions [4, 5]. To the lowest order approximation, it may be described by a Gross-Pitaevskii mean-field theory, accurately account- ing for Josephson oscillations [6–8] and macroscopic self trapping [9], observed experimentally in Refs.[10, 11], as well as the equivalents of the ac and dc Josephson effect [12] observed in [13].\n\nPhase-space methods [26] have been extensively ap- plied for the numerical simulation of quantum and ther- mal fluctuation effects in BECs [27–39]. Such meth- ods utilize the semiclassical propagation of phase-space distributions with quantum fluctuations emulated via stochastic noise terms, and using a cloud of initial condi- tions that reflects the uncertainty of the initial quantum wave-packet. One particular example is the truncated Wigner approximation [28, 31, 34, 36] where higher order derivatives in the equation of motion for the Wigner dis- tribution function are neglected, thus amounting to the propagation of an ensemble using the Gross-Pitaevskii equations.\n\nDue to the relative simplicity of the classical phase- space of the two-site BHH, it is possible to carry out its\n\nBoth Josephson oscillations and macroscopic self trap- ping rely on coherent (Gaussian) preparations, with different initial population imbalance. The mean-field premise is that such states remain Gaussian throughout their evolution so that the relative phase ϕ between the two condensates remains defined. However, interactions\n\narXiv:1001.2120v2 [quant-ph] 21 Oct 2010\n\n## I. INTRODUCTION" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8152480427625396, + "doc_id": "3c7a50980415409c2e565d9dd98b601ec8b7166609685c8fe67640010a9f1f6e", + "edit_distance": 0.26620689655172414, + "f1_score": 0.9209302325581395, + "meteor": 0.8457184809482797, + "precision": 0.9611650485436893, + "pred_md": "arXiv:1001.0892v1 [cond-mat.mtrl-sci] 6 Jan 2010\n\n## Semiconducting-enriched single wall carbon nanotube networks applied to field effect transistors\n\nN. Izard, S. Kazaoui , K. Hata, T. Okazaki, T. Saito, S. Iijima, and N. Minami ∗ National Institute of Advanced Industrial Science and Technology (AIST)\n\n1-1-1\n\nHigashi, Tsukuba, Ibaraki, 305-8565 Japan\n\nSubstantial progress are reported on field effect transistors (FET) consisting of semiconducting single wall carbon nanotubes (s-SWNTs) without detectable traces of metallic nanotubes and impurities. This outstanding result was made possible in particular by ultracentrifugation (250,000g) of solutions composed of SWNT powders with polyfluorene as extracting agent in toluene. Such s-SWNTs processable solutions were applied to realize FET, embodying randomly or preferentially oriented nanotube networks prepared by spin coating or dielectrophoresis. Devices exhibit a stable p-type semiconductor behavior in air with very promising characteristics: the on-off current ratio is 10 , the on-current level is around 10 5 µ A and the estimated hole mobility is larger than 2 cm 2 /vs. The present results are demonstrated by optical absorption, Raman and electrical measurements.\n\nPACS numbers:\n\nNovel semiconductors materials for field effect transistor FET and thin-film transistors TFT are highly demanded. 1 In particular, semiconducting single wall carbon nanotubes (s-SWNTs) are very promising, because individual s-SWNTs are known to exhibit high on-off current ratio, high electron/hole mobility, to carry high current density and to operate at high frequencies. 2-5 Several groups have demonstrated excellent transfer characteristics using individual sSWNTs, 2-5 but generally poor ones using ensemble (network and thin film) of SWNTs due to traces of metallic nanotubes (m-SWNTs) and impurities (catalytic and amorphous particles). 6-8 Therefore, very efficient methods to selectively synthesis s-SWNTs or to selectively extract s-SWNTs from as-grown nanotubes are still required.\n\nIn recent years, several approaches to extract sSWNTs from nanotube powders were explored using for instance chemical functionalization, 9-11 DNA and polymers wrapping, 12,13 and density gradient ultracentrifugation techniques. 6 The latter efficiently separates s-SWNTs and m-SWNTs, but traces of surfactant and density gradient materials limit the performances of the FET. Very recently, two groups have reported on the selective extraction of near-armchair s-SWNTs from nanotube powders using polyfluorene as extracting agent. 14,15 According to Nish et al. , 14 the sample shows no detectable traces of m-SWNTs based only on optical spectroscopy. However, neither the electrical properties nor the fabrication of FET devices were addressed.\n\nIn this letter, we report on the electronic properties of FET consisting of semiconducting-enriched single wall carbon nanotubes, without detectable traces of metallic nanotubes and impurities , with in our detection limits. This unprecedented achievement is made possible by ultracentrifugation (250,000g), sonication and filtration of solutions composed of SWNT powders with polyfluorene as extracting agent in toluene. Evidences are gathered by optical absorption, Raman and electrical measurements (see Fig.1). We shall demonstrate that such s-\n\nFIG. 1: (Color online): (a) shows the optical absorption spectra and (b) the Raman spectra at 514.5 nm of L, M and S samples . (c) displays the transfer characteristic, I D vs V G for V DS =-14V of FET devices made of sample M and S.\n\nFIG. 1: (Color online): (a) shows the optical absorption spectra and (b) the Raman spectra at 514.5 nm of L, M and S samples . (c) displays the transfer characteristic, I D vs V G for V DS =-14V of FET devices made of sample M and S.\n\nSWNTs realize high-performances FET devices compare to networks/thin films of SWNTs and solution processable polymers/organic materials. 1,6,16\n\nS-SWNTs solutions were prepared as follow. First, SWNTs powders (as-prepared HiPco, Carbon Nanotechnologies Inc.), PFO (Poly-9,9-di-n-octyl-fluorenyl-2,7diyl, Sigma-Aldrich) and toluene were mixed in the following ratio SWNT (5 mg): PFO (5 mg): toluene (30 ml)", + "recall": 0.8839285714285714, + "true_md": "# Semiconducting-enriched single wall carbon nanotube networks applied to field effect transistors\n\nN. Izard, S. Kazaoui ∗ , K. Hata, T. Okazaki, T. Saito, S. Iijima, and N. Minami\n\nNational Institute of Advanced Industrial Science and Technology (AIST) 1-1-1 Higashi, Tsukuba, Ibaraki, 305-8565 Japan\n\nSubstantial progress are reported on field effect transistors (FET) consisting of semiconducting single wall carbon nanotubes (s-SWNTs) without detectable traces of metallic nanotubes and im- purities. This outstanding result was made possible in particular by ultracentrifugation (250,000g) of solutions composed of SWNT powders with polyfluorene as extracting agent in toluene. Such s-SWNTs processable solutions were applied to realize FET, embodying randomly or preferentially oriented nanotube networks prepared by spin coating or dielectrophoresis. Devices exhibit a stable p-type semiconductor behavior in air with very promising characteristics: the on-off current ratio is 10 $^{5}$, the on-current level is around 10 µ A and the estimated hole mobility is larger than 2 cm $^{2}$/vs. The present results are demonstrated by optical absorption, Raman and electrical measurements.\n\nPACS numbers:\n\nNovel semiconductors materials for field effect tran- sistor FET and thin-film transistors TFT are highly demanded. 1 In particular, semiconducting single wall carbon nanotubes (s-SWNTs) are very promising, because individual s-SWNTs are known to exhibit high on-off current ratio, high electron/hole mobil- ity, to carry high current density and to operate at high frequencies. 2–5 Several groups have demonstrated excellent transfer characteristics using individual s- SWNTs, 2–5 but generally poor ones using ensemble (net- work and thin film) of SWNTs due to traces of metal- lic nanotubes (m-SWNTs) and impurities (catalytic and amorphous particles). 6–8 Therefore, very efficient meth- ods to selectively synthesis s-SWNTs or to selectively extract s-SWNTs from as-grown nanotubes are still re- quired.\n\nIn recent years, several approaches to extract s- SWNTs from nanotube powders were explored using for instance chemical functionalization, 9–11 DNA and polymers wrapping, 12,13 and density gradient ultra- centrifugation techniques. 6 The latter efficiently sepa- rates s-SWNTs and m-SWNTs, but traces of surfactant and density gradient materials limit the performances of the FET. Very recently, two groups have reported on the selective extraction of near-armchair s-SWNTs from nanotube powders using polyfluorene as extracting agent. 14,15 According to Nish et al. , 14 the sample shows no detectable traces of m-SWNTs based only on optical spectroscopy. However, neither the electrical properties nor the fabrication of FET devices were addressed.\n\nIn this letter, we report on the electronic properties of FET consisting of semiconducting-enriched single wall carbon nanotubes, without detectable traces of metallic nanotubes and impurities , with in our detection limits. This unprecedented achievement is made possible by ul- tracentrifugation (250,000g), sonication and filtration of solutions composed of SWNT powders with polyfluorene as extracting agent in toluene. Evidences are gathered by optical absorption, Raman and electrical measure- ments (see Fig.1). We shall demonstrate that such s-\n\nSWNTs realize high-performances FET devices compare to networks/thin films of SWNTs and solution process- able polymers/organic materials. 1,6,16\n\nS-SWNTs solutions were prepared as follow. First, SWNTs powders (as-prepared HiPco, Carbon Nanotech- nologies Inc.), PFO (Poly-9,9-di-n-octyl-fluorenyl-2,7- diyl, Sigma-Aldrich) and toluene were mixed in the fol- lowing ratio SWNT (5 mg): PFO (5 mg): toluene (30 ml)\n\nFIG. 1: (Color online): (a) shows the optical absorption spec- tra and (b) the Raman spectra at 514.5 nm of L, M and S samples . (c) displays the transfer characteristic, I D vs V G for V DS =-14V of FET devices made of sample M and S.\n\narXiv:1001.0892v1 [cond-mat.mtrl-sci] 6 Jan 2010" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.47305124612320665, + "doc_id": "78506c3ce0bb65efb270da73adca61b3bf7a4640c2d87ff97a091ea4efe1b548", + "edit_distance": 0.7614814814814815, + "f1_score": 0.9268292682926829, + "meteor": 0.47628195069305007, + "precision": 0.9602888086642599, + "pred_md": "a maximally entangled state, an ensemble of orthogonal states\n\n\n\nis shared prior to the communication, where 0 ≤ θ ≤ π 4 . As above the first and second qubits belong to the sender and receiver, respectively. We show in Appendix A that the classical capacity assisted by limited entanglement [Eq. (8)] is attained when all states {| Φ i 〉} 4 i =1 are equiprobable, and that this yields:\n\n\n\nwith ω 1 = ω 2 = 0 and\n\n\n\nFor θ = 0 the states given by Eq. (29) are product states and we recover the classical capacity which is equal to one. The capacity C lim E increases as we increase the value of θ , attaining its maximum for θ = π 4 for which the states are maximally entangled and Eq. (30) reduces to Eq. (27).\n\nFIG. 2: Capacities C E = 1 + Q (solid, thick), Q E = C / E 2 (solid, thin) and Q (dashed) of qubit coupled to an Ising spin bath with N = 4 , for random values of g n and Ω n . Left: β = 10 , right: β = 1 . See text for details.\n\nFIG. 2: Capacities C E = 1 + Q (solid, thick), Q E = C / E 2 (solid, thin) and Q (dashed) of qubit coupled to an Ising spin bath with N = 4 , for random values of g n and Ω n . Left: β = 10 , right: β = 1 . See text for details.\n\nFIG. 3: Same as Fig. 2, with N = 100 .\n\nFIG. 3: Same as Fig. 2, with N = 100 .\n\nPlots of capacities for random values of couplings g n and bath frequencies Ω n , are given in Figs. 2 and 3. We generate\n\n5\n\nreal, random values of g n and Ω n uniformly distributed in the interval [ -1 1] , and plot average capacities for 50 random ensembles. In Fig. 2, we plot the capacities of the system spin coupled to a bath with N = 4 spins. We plot the capacities at low and high temperatures in order to study the effect of bath temperature. For low temperature ( β = 10 ), the bath is not too noisy and the system spin retains its coherence well. The capacities do not acquire their minimum values and partial recurrences occur, with an amplitude that diminishes over time. At high temperature ( β = 1 ) the capacities rapidly decrease to their minimum values and the recurrences are of smaller amplitude. As the system spin loses its coherence to the Ising bath, the entanglement shared between the sender and receiver is destroyed and C E is reduced to its minimum value of one. This corresponds to the qubit in possession of the receiver prior to the communication. The quantum capacity Q , which is a measure of the coherent information transmitted, is reduced to zero as the system spin decoheres completely. As we increase the number of bath spins to N = 100 , we observe a similar dependence on bath temperature. The main difference compared to the case of a small number of bath spins is the drastically diminished amplitude of the recurrences. As noted in Ref. [38], this behavior is due to the averaging of the positive and negative oscillations which arise for different values of the parameters g n and Ω n .\n\n## D. Limiting Cases\n\n## 1. Equal Couplings and Frequencies\n\nIf the bath spins have equal frequencies Ω n ≡ Ω ∀ n , and couplings g n ≡ g ∀ n with the system spin then Eq. (26) reduces to\n\n\n\nwhere\n\n\n\nThe second equality in Eq. (32) follows from the fact that the term ∑ N n =1 ( -1) i n = N -2 k for i with Hamming weight k , of which there are ( N k ) cases for i ∈ [0 , . . . , 2 N -1] . Therefore | Π N | = 2 N √ (cos 2 (2 αtg ) cosh 2 ( β 2 Ω) + sin 2 (2 αtg ) sinh 2 ( β 2 Ω)) N is periodic with period T p = π/ (2 αg ) , and the same is true of all the capacities computed above. At these times the bath spins destructively interfere and the dephasing channel becomes noiseless for information transmission. In the high temperature limit β Ω → 0 , and | Π N | → (2 cos(2 αtg )) N , so that the capacities exhibit full periodic recurrences independently", + "recall": 0.8956228956228957, + "true_md": "5\n\na maximally entangled state, an ensemble of orthogonal states\n\nis shared prior to the communication, where 0 ≤ θ ≤ π $_{4}$. As above the first and second qubits belong to the sender and receiver, respectively. We show in Appendix A that the clas- sical capacity assisted by limited entanglement [Eq. (8)] is at- tained when all states {| Φ$_{i}$ 〉} 4 i =1 are equiprobable, and that this yields:\n\nreal, random values of g$_{n}$ and Ω$_{n}$ uniformly distributed in the interval [ − 1 , 1] and plot average capacities for 50 random en- sembles. In Fig. 2, we plot the capacities of the system spin coupled to a bath with N = 4 spins. We plot the capacities at low and high temperatures in order to study the effect of bath temperature. For low temperature ( β = 10 ), the bath is not too noisy and the system spin retains its coherence well. The capacities do not acquire their minimum values and partial re- currences occur, with an amplitude that diminishes over time. At high temperature ( β = 1 ) the capacities rapidly decrease to their minimum values and the recurrences are of smaller amplitude. As the system spin loses its coherence to the Ising bath, the entanglement shared between the sender and receiver is destroyed and C$_{E}$ is reduced to its minimum value of one. This corresponds to the qubit in possession of the receiver prior to the communication. The quantum capacity Q , which is a measure of the coherent information transmitted, is re- duced to zero as the system spin decoheres completely. As we increase the number of bath spins to N = 100 , we observe a similar dependence on bath temperature. The main difference compared to the case of a small number of bath spins is the drastically diminished amplitude of the recurrences. As noted in Ref. [38], this behavior is due to the averaging of the pos- itive and negative oscillations which arise for different values of the parameters g$_{n}$ and Ω$_{n}$ .\n\n$$| Φ$_{1}$ 〉 = cos θ | 00 〉 + sin θ | 11 〉 , | Φ$_{2}$ 〉 = sin θ | 00 〉 − cos θ | 11 〉 , | Φ$_{3}$ 〉 = cos θ | 01 〉 + sin θ | 10 〉 , | Φ$_{4}$ 〉 = sin θ | 01 〉 − cos θ | 10 〉 , (29)$$\n\n$$C lim E = − [cos 2 θ log$_{2}$ cos 2 θ + sin 2 θ log$_{2}$ sin 2 θ ] + 1 + 4 ∑ i =1 ω$_{i}$ log$_{2}$ ω$_{i}$, (30)$$\n\n$$ω$_{3}$ = 1 2 [1 + { ( 2 cos θ sin θ Z | Π$_{N}$ | ) 2 + cos $^{2}$2 θ } 1 2 ] , ω$_{4}$ = 1 2 [1 − { ( 2 cos θ sin θ Z | Π$_{N}$ | ) 2 + cos $^{2}$2 θ } 1 2 ] . (31)$$\n\nwith ω$_{1}$ = ω$_{2}$ = 0 and\n\nFor θ = 0 the states given by Eq. (29) are product states and we recover the classical capacity which is equal to one. The capacity C lim E increases as we increase the value of θ , attaining its maximum for θ = π 4 for which the states are maximally entangled and Eq. (30) reduces to Eq. (27).\n\nIf the bath spins have equal frequencies Ω$_{n}$ ≡ Ω ∀ n , and couplings g$_{n}$ ≡ g ∀ n with the system spin then Eq. (26) re- duces to\n\n## D. Limiting Cases\n\n## 1. Equal Couplings and Frequencies\n\n$$Π$_{N}$ = 2 $^{N}$− 1 ∑ i =0 e − f ( t ) ∑ N n $_{=1}$( − 1) i n = N ∑ k =0 $^{(}$N k$^{)}$ e (2 k − N ) f ( t ) = (2 cosh[ f ( t )]) $^{N}$, (32)$$\n\n$$f ( t ) = 1 2 β Ω + 2 iαtg. (33)$$\n\nwhere\n\nFIG. 2: Capacities C$_{E}$ = 1 + Q (solid, thick), Q$_{E}$ = C$_{E}$/ 2 (solid, thin) and Q (dashed) of qubit coupled to an Ising spin bath with N = 4 , for random values of g$_{n}$ and Ω$_{n}$ . Left: β = 10 , right: β = 1 . See text for details.\n\nFIG. 3: Same as Fig. 2, with N = 100 .\n\nThe second equality in Eq. (32) follows from the fact that the term ∑ N n $_{=1}$( − 1) i$_{n}$ = N − 2 k for i with Hamming weight k , of which there are ( N k ) cases for i ∈ [0 , . . . , 2 N − 1] . Therefore | Π$_{N}$ | = 2 N $^{√}$(cos $^{2}$(2 αtg ) cosh $^{2}$( β $_{2}$Ω) + sin$^{2}$(2 αtg ) sinh $^{2}$( β $_{2}$Ω)) N is periodic with period T$_{p}$ = π/ (2 αg ) , and the same is true of all the capacities computed above. At these times the bath spins destructively interfere and the dephasing channel becomes noiseless for information transmission. In the high temper- ature limit β Ω → 0 , and | Π$_{N}$ | → (2 cos(2 αtg )) $^{N}$, so that the capacities exhibit full periodic recurrences independently\n\nPlots of capacities for random values of couplings g$_{n}$ and bath frequencies Ω$_{n}$ , are given in Figs. 2 and 3. We generate" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "d0b42f6932c80ef0360c911336c6ffd3968597d70ac5996795d88c33747fa9ea", + "edit_distance": 0.7614814814814815, + "f1_score": 0.9268292682926829, + "meteor": 0.47628195069305007, + "precision": 0.9602888086642599, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.8956228956228957, + "true_md": "" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.2488776235319902, + "doc_id": "de6bcfceb31472ad044f01c914fa6333c248611ce4c7f1881e1e3f43296910c2", + "edit_distance": 0.6619834710743802, + "f1_score": 0.8616780045351474, + "meteor": 0.3328583125328192, + "precision": 0.9547738693467337, + "pred_md": "At the shadow mass shell, ω ∼ k y we get\n\n\n\nOur analytical results, are presented graphycally in Fig. 2. The area of validity of these expressions is controlled by the energy scale\n\n\n\nEquation (7) is valid for | k y | > T K /v . Equation (9) is valid for | k x | > T K /v .\n\nThe remaining part of the paper contains a derivation of the results, Eqs. (7), (9). Following the approach of [3] we develop a perturbation theory in the coupling constant J . Though this perturbation theory is free of ultra-violet singularities it contains infra-red singularities at ω ∼ k x y ( ) which we sum up.\n\n## III. BEHAVIOR AT THE MASS SHELL: ω ∼ k x\n\nIn this section we derive the result (7). It is useful to consider the self-energy Σ ( ω k ) defined in the standard way by the Dyson equation\n\n\n\nAs is shown below, the self-energy is a regular function of frequency at the mass shell, and only weakly logarithmically non-analityc in the coupling constant.\n\nThe J 2 contribution to the self-energy is\n\n\n\nWe notice that in the limit of infinite phase stiffness, d = 0, Eq. (12) reproduces the mean field spectrum, Eq. (4), as expected. Note that the self energy Eq. (12) is regular at the mass shell. This, however, is not the case for higher order contribution. In fact, the fourth order contribution has a weak logarithmic singularity (see App. A 1),\n\n\n\nwhere\n\n\n\nThe aforementioned analyticity of the self-energy at the mass shell is restored once the leading on-shell singularities in all orders in J 2 are summed up. The reminder of the present section is devoted to this task.\n\nFIG. 2: (color online) The spectral density at the Fermi surface, A ω =0 ( k ), as given by Eqs. (7) and (9) at k y > k x and k x > k y respectively. These two graphs are separated by the area where the presented derivation ceases to be valid. The parameter d is (a) d = 0 08, and (b) . d = 0 2. .\n\nFIG. 2: (color online) The spectral density at the Fermi surface, A ω =0 ( k ), as given by Eqs. (7) and (9) at k y > k x and k x > k y respectively. These two graphs are separated by the area where the presented derivation ceases to be valid. The parameter d is (a) d = 0 08, and (b) . d = 0 2. .\n\nUsing the expressions for the bare (retarded) Green functions\n\n\n\nwe write the self-energy at the order J 2 n with n ≥ 3 in the form (see Fig.3)\n\n\n\n3", + "recall": 0.7851239669421488, + "true_md": "At the shadow mass shell, ω ∼ k$_{y}$ we get\n\nOur analytical results, are presented graphycally in Fig. 2. The area of validity of these expressions is con- trolled by the energy scale\n\nEquation (7) is valid for | k$_{y}$ | > T$_{K}$/v . Equation (9) is valid for | k$_{x}$ | > T$_{K}$/v .\n\nThe remaining part of the paper contains a deriva- tion of the results, Eqs. (7), (9). Following the approach of [3] we develop a perturbation theory in the coupling constant J . Though this perturbation theory is free of ultra-violet singularities it contains infra-red singularities at ω ∼ k$_{x}$$\\_{(}$$_{y}$$\\_{)}$ which we sum up.\n\nIn this section we derive the result (7). It is useful to consider the self-energy Σ$_{ω}$( k ) defined in the standard way by the Dyson equation\n\nAs is shown below, the self-energy is a regular function of frequency at the mass shell, and only weakly logarith- mically non-analityc in the coupling constant. 2\n\nmically non-analityc in the coupling constant. The J 2 contribution to the self-energy is\n\nWe notice that in the limit of infinite phase stiffness, d = 0, Eq. (12) reproduces the mean field spectrum, Eq. (4), as expected. Note that the self energy Eq. (12) is regular at the mass shell. This, however, is not the case for higher order contribution. In fact, the fourth order contribution has a weak logarithmic singularity (see App. A 1),\n\nwhere\n\nThe aforementioned analyticity of the self-energy at the mass shell is restored once the leading on-shell singulari- ties in all orders in J 2 are summed up. The reminder of the present section is devoted to this task.\n\nwe write the self-energy at the order J 2 n with n ≥ 3 in the form (see Fig.3)\n\nUsing the expressions for the bare (retarded) Green functions\n\nFIG. 2: (color online) The spectral density at the Fermi sur- face, A$_{ω}$$\\_{=0}$ ( k ), as given by Eqs. (7) and (9) at k$\\_{y}$ > k$\\_{x}$ and k$\\_{x}$ > k$\\_{y}$ respectively. These two graphs are separated by the area where the presented derivation ceases to be valid. The parameter d is (a) d = 0 . 08, and (b) d = 0 . 2.\n\n3\n\n$$G = J $^{2}$e i $^{πd}$Γ(1 − 2 d ) ( ω − k$_{x}$ ) 2 × [ ω − k$_{y}$ + i J $^{2}$a2 $^{d}$Γ(1 − 2 d ) ( − i( ω − k$_{x}$ )) 1 − 2 d ] − 1+2 d . (9)$$\n\n$$T$_{K}$ = J ( Ja ) d/ (1 − d $^{)}$. (10)$$\n\n$$G$_{ω}$ ( k ) = [ ω − k$_{x}$ − Σ$_{ω}$( k )] − 1 . (11)$$\n\n$$Σ (2) ω ( k ) = − i( Ja $^{d}$) $^{2}$Γ(1 − 2 d ) ( − i( ω − k$_{y}$ )) 1 − 2 d . (12)$$\n\n$$Σ (4) = 2 d − i( Ja $^{d}$) $^{4}$Γ$^{2}$(2 − 2 d ) ( − i( ω − k$_{y}$ )) 3 − 4 d α log α , (13)$$\n\n$$α = ω + i0 − k$_{x}$ ω + i0 − k$_{y}$ . (14)$$\n\n$$Σ (2 n ) ω ( k ) =i( − i J ) 2 n ∫ ∞ 0 dx$_{n}$ e i ( ω − k$_{x}$ ) x$_{n}$ ∫ ∞ 0 dy$_{n}$ e i ( ω − k$_{y}$ ) y$_{n}$ × n − 1 ∏ i =2 ∫ x$_{i}$$_{+1}$ 0 dx$_{i}$ n − 1 ∏ i =1 ∫ y$_{i}$$_{+1}$ 0 dy$_{i}$ × C (2 n $^{)}$( r$_{1}$ , . . . , r$_{n}$ ; p$_{1}$ , . . . , p$_{n}$ ) , (16)$$\n\n$$i G (0) $_{1(2)}$( ω, r ) = θ ( r$_{x}$$_{(}$$_{y}$$_{)}$ ) δ ( r$_{y}$$_{(}$$_{x}$$_{)}$ ) e i ωr$_{x}$$_{(}$$_{y}$$_{)}$ . (15)$$\n\n## III. BEHAVIOR AT THE MASS SHELL: ω ∼ k$_{x}$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7915930142870061, + "doc_id": "c9298dcf0a0bc0ef682932490ec229b697afa5420d992d0ed1c598f4890643ed", + "edit_distance": 0.8902564102564102, + "f1_score": 0.8870056497175142, + "meteor": 0.6618146096922549, + "precision": 0.9401197604790419, + "pred_md": "2\n\n2009 Fermi Symposium, Washington, D.C., Nov. 2-5\n\n## 3. VERITAS Blazar KSP\n\nVERITAS observes for ∼ 750 h and ∼ 250 h each year during periods of astronomical darkness and partial moonlight, respectively. The moonlight observations are almost exclusively used for a blazar discovery program, and a large fraction of the dark time is used for the blazar KSP, which consists of:\n\n- · A VHE blazar discovery program ( ∼ 200 h / yr): Each year ∼ 10 targets are selected to receive ∼ 10 h of observations each during astronomical darkness. These data are supplemented by discovery observations during periods of partial moonlight.\n- · A target-of-opportunity (ToO) observation program ( ∼ 50 h / yr): VERITAS blazar observations can be triggered by either a VERITAS blazar discovery, a VHE flaring alert ( > 2 Crab) from the blazar monitoring program of the Whipple 10-m telescope or from another VHE instrument, or a lower-energy flaring alert (optical, X-ray or Fermi-LAT). Should the guaranteed allocation be exhausted, further time can be requested from a pool of director's discretionary time.\n- · Multi-wavelength (MWL) studies of VHE blazars ( ∼ 50 h / yr + ToO): Each year one blazar receives a deep exposure in a pre-planned campaign of extensive, simultaneous MWL (Xray, optical, radio) measurements. ToO observation proposals for MWL measurements are also submitted to lower-energy observatories (e.g. Swift) and are triggered by a VERITAS discovery or flaring alert.\n- · Distant VHE blazar studies to constrain the extragalactic background light (EBL): Here distant targets are given a higher priority in the blazar discovery program, as well as for the MWL observations of known VHE blazars, particularly those with hard VHE spectra.\n\n## 4. Blazar Discovery Program\n\nThe blazars observed in the discovery program are largely high-frequency-peaked BL Lac objects. However, the program also includes IBLs (intermediatepeaked) and LBLs (low-peaked), as well as flat spectrum radio quasars (FSRQs), in an attempt to increase the types of blazars known to emit VHE γ -rays. The observed targets are drawn from a target list containing objects visible to the telescopes at reasonable zenith angles ( -8 · < δ < 72 ), without a previously · published VHE limit below 1.5% Crab, and with a measured redshift z < 0 3. . To further the study of the\n\neConf C091122\n\nEBL a few objects having a large ( z > 0 3) are also . included in the target list. The target list includes:\n\n- · All nearby ( z < 0 3) . HBL and IBL recommended as potential VHE emitters in [5, 6, 7].\n- · The X-ray brightest HBL ( z < 0 3) in the recent . Sedentary [8] and ROXA [9] surveys.\n- · Four distant ( z > 0 3) BL Lac objects recom-. mended by [5, 10].\n- · Several FSRQ recommended as potential VHE emitters in [6, 11].\n- · All nearby ( z < 0 3) . blazars detected by EGRET [12].\n- · All nearby ( z < 0 3) . blazars contained in the Fermi-LAT Bright AGN Sample [13].\n- · All sources ( | b | > 10 ) detected by Fermi-LAT · where extrapolations of their MeV-GeV γ -ray spectrum (including EBL absorption; assuming z = 0.3 if the redshift is unknown) indicates a possible VERITAS detection in less than 20 h. This criteria is the focus of the 2009-10 VERITAS blazar discovery program.\n\n## 5. VERITAS AGN Detections\n\nVERITAS has detected VHE γ -ray emission from 16 AGN (15 blazars), including 8 VHE discoveries. These AGN are shown in Table I, and each has been detected by the Large Area Telescope (LAT) instrument aboard the Fermi Gamma-ray Space Telescope. Every blazar discovered by VERITAS was the subject of ToO MWL observations to enable modeling of its simultaneously-measured SED. The known VHE blazars detected by VERITAS were similarly the targets of MWL observations.\n\n## 5.1. Recent VERITAS Blazar Discoveries\n\nPrior to the launch of Fermi VERITAS had discovered VHE emission from 2 blazars. These included the first VHE-detected IBL, WComae [14, 15], and the HBL 1ES0806+524 [16]. VERITAS has discovered 6 VHE blazars since the launch of Fermi. Three of these were initially observed by VERITAS prior to the release of Fermi-LAT results, due to the X-ray brightness of the synchrotron peaks of their SEDs.\n\nVHEemission from 3C66A was discovered by VERITAS in September 2008 [17] during a flaring episode that was also observed by the Fermi-LAT [18]. The observed flux above 200 GeV was 6% of the Crab Nebula flux and the measured VHE spectrum was very soft (Γ VHE ∼ 4 1). . RGBJ0710+591 was detected", + "recall": 0.839572192513369, + "true_md": "2\n\n2009 Fermi Symposium, Washington, D.C., Nov. 2-5\n\n## 3. VERITAS Blazar KSP\n\n## 5. VERITAS AGN Detections\n\n## 5.1. Recent VERITAS Blazar Discoveries\n\n## 4. Blazar Discovery Program\n\neConf C091122\n\nPrior to the launch of Fermi VERITAS had discov- ered VHE emission from 2 blazars. These included the first VHE-detected IBL, W Comae [14, 15], and the HBL 1ES 0806+524 [16]. VERITAS has discov- ered 6 VHE blazars since the launch of Fermi. Three of these were initially observed by VERITAS prior to the release of Fermi-LAT results, due to the X-ray brightness of the synchrotron peaks of their SEDs.\n\nVHE emission from 3C 66A was discovered by VER- ITAS in September 2008 [17] during a flaring episode that was also observed by the Fermi-LAT [18]. The observed flux above 200 GeV was 6% of the Crab Neb- ula flux and the measured VHE spectrum was very soft (Γ VHE ∼ 4 . 1). RGB J0710+591 was detected\n\nThe blazars observed in the discovery program are largely high-frequency-peaked BL Lac objects. How- ever, the program also includes IBLs (intermediate- peaked) and LBLs (low-peaked), as well as flat spec- trum radio quasars (FSRQs), in an attempt to in- crease the types of blazars known to emit VHE γ -rays. The observed targets are drawn from a target list con- taining objects visible to the telescopes at reasonable zenith angles ( − 8 ◦ < δ < 72 ◦ ), without a previously published VHE limit below 1.5% Crab, and with a measured redshift z < 0 . 3. To further the study of the\n\nVERITAS has detected VHE γ -ray emission from 16 AGN (15 blazars), including 8 VHE discoveries. These AGN are shown in Table I, and each has been detected by the Large Area Telescope (LAT) instru- ment aboard the Fermi Gamma-ray Space Telescope. Every blazar discovered by VERITAS was the sub- ject of ToO MWL observations to enable modeling of its simultaneously-measured SED. The known VHE blazars detected by VERITAS were similarly the tar- gets of MWL observations.\n\nEBL a few objects having a large ( z > 0 . 3) are also included in the target list. The target list includes:\n\nVERITAS observes for ∼ 750 h and ∼ 250 h each year during periods of astronomical darkness and par- tial moonlight, respectively. The moonlight observa- tions are almost exclusively used for a blazar discovery program, and a large fraction of the dark time is used for the blazar KSP, which consists of:\n\n- • A VHE blazar discovery program ( ∼ 200 h / yr): Each year ∼ 10 targets are selected to receive ∼ 10 h of observations each during astronomi- cal darkness. These data are supplemented by discovery observations during periods of partial moonlight.\n\n- • A target-of-opportunity (ToO) observation pro- gram ( ∼ 50 h / yr): VERITAS blazar obser- vations can be triggered by either a VERI- TAS blazar discovery, a VHE flaring alert ( > 2 Crab) from the blazar monitoring program of the Whipple 10-m telescope or from another VHE instrument, or a lower-energy flaring alert (optical, X-ray or Fermi-LAT). Should the guar- anteed allocation be exhausted, further time can be requested from a pool of director’s discre- tionary time.\n\n- • Multi-wavelength (MWL) studies of VHE blazars ( ∼ 50 h / yr + ToO): Each year one blazar receives a deep exposure in a pre-planned campaign of extensive, simultaneous MWL (X- ray, optical, radio) measurements. ToO observa- tion proposals for MWL measurements are also submitted to lower-energy observatories (e.g. Swift) and are triggered by a VERITAS discov- ery or flaring alert.\n\n- • Distant VHE blazar studies to constrain the ex- tragalactic background light (EBL): Here dis- tant targets are given a higher priority in the blazar discovery program, as well as for the MWL observations of known VHE blazars, par- ticularly those with hard VHE spectra.\n\n- • All nearby ( z < 0 . 3) HBL and IBL recom- mended as potential VHE emitters in [5, 6, 7].\n\n- • The X-ray brightest HBL ( z < 0 . 3) in the recent Sedentary [8] and ROXA [9] surveys.\n\n- • Four distant ( z > 0 . 3) BL Lac objects recom- mended by [5, 10].\n\n- • Several FSRQ recommended as potential VHE emitters in [6, 11].\n\n- • All nearby ( z < 0 . 3) blazars detected by EGRET [12].\n\n- • All nearby ( z < 0 . 3) blazars contained in the Fermi-LAT Bright AGN Sample [13].\n\n- • All sources ( | b | > 10 ◦ ) detected by Fermi-LAT where extrapolations of their MeV-GeV γ -ray spectrum (including EBL absorption; assuming z = 0.3 if the redshift is unknown) indicates a possible VERITAS detection in less than 20 h. This criteria is the focus of the 2009-10 VERI- TAS blazar discovery program." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6937633770484226, + "doc_id": "fe3b18e9d49d3ff5f19939e225a8c45ee7b49f3ba0a9d31c4fc48e7cc0b4486a", + "edit_distance": 0.741779497098646, + "f1_score": 0.9293233082706767, + "meteor": 0.5817066416932819, + "precision": 0.944954128440367, + "pred_md": "FIG. 7: (color online) ∆ ϕ l ( T ) vs. temperature for the surface planes, l = 1 (triangles), l = 2 (squares), l = 3 (diamonds), l = 4 (circles). Straight lines and full symbols: n = 8. Dashed lines and open symbols: n = 16.\n\nFIG. 7: (color online) ∆ ϕ l ( T ) vs. temperature for the surface planes, l = 1 (triangles), l = 2 (squares), l = 3 (diamonds), l = 4 (circles). Straight lines and full symbols: n = 8. Dashed lines and open symbols: n = 16.\n\nfilm leads to an effective 2d-like trend. Region ii ) looks however more intriguing, and requires a more accurate discussion, which can benefit from a careful comparison of the behaviour of a given quantity in regions i ) and ii ).\n\n/negationslash\n\nFor this purpose, we look at the temperature dependence of the rotation angle of the magnetization between NN planes. In Fig. 7, ∆ ϕ l ( T ) for n = 8 and n = 16 (continuous and dashed lines, respectively), is plotted for the outermost planes, l = 1 . . . 4. For both thicknesses, a monotonic trend is observed for all l , but at variance with what happens for the highest thickness, for n = 8 we see, starting from a temperature T /lessorsimilar T N (8), an abrupt drop of ∆ ϕ 3 and ∆ ϕ 4 , which rapidly reach an almost constant value, only slightly larger than ∆ ϕ 1 . In the temperature range T N (8) /lessorsimilar T < T C (8) we thus substantially observe the same small magnetic phase shifts between all NN layers, testifying an energetically stable quasi -FM configuration giving no contribution to the helical order parameters. The latter point can be made clearer by looking at the the peak position Q z,max of the structure factor S (0 , 0 , q z ). In Fig. 8 the average of Q z,max vs T is reported, again for n = 8 and for different lateral dimensions L 26 . As expected from the previous argument, we see that Q z,max = 0 for T N (8) < T < T C (8), while it begins to shift to higher values as soon as the temperature decreases below T N (8), making apparent a progressive fan stabilization with Q z,max = 0 and reaching a value of about 21 · for T = 10K.\n\nIn a previous study, where the magnetic properties of Ho thin films were investigated by MC simulations of a Heisenberg model with easy-plane single-ion anisotropy and six out-of-plane coupling constants (as obtained by experimental neutron scattering measurements 16 ) on a HCPlattice 14,15 , it was found that for thicknesses comparable with the helical pitch the phase diagram landscape is quite different from what we find here. Indeed, for n = 9 -16, three different magnetic phases could be sin-\n\n6\n\nFIG. 8: (color online) Q z , position of the maximum of S /vector ( q ), vs. temperature for thickness n = 8. Inset: magnetic vector ( m ,m x l y l ) profile for some temperatures for L = 64. Colors and symbols as in Fig. 2.\n\nFIG. 8: (color online) Q z , position of the maximum of S /vector ( q ), vs. temperature for thickness n = 8. Inset: magnetic vector ( m ,m x l y l ) profile for some temperatures for L = 64. Colors and symbols as in Fig. 2.\n\nFIG. 9: ∆ ϕ l for a BCT lattice and n = 12, when the six coupling constants set employed in Ref. 14,15 (see text) is used. The temperature range has been chosen around T C ( n ) (error bars lye within point size).\n\nFIG. 9: ∆ ϕ l for a BCT lattice and n = 12, when the six coupling constants set employed in Ref. 14,15 (see text) is used. The temperature range has been chosen around T C ( n ) (error bars lye within point size).\n\ngled out, with the high-temperature, paramagnetic phase separated from the low-temperature, long-range ordered one, by an intermediate-temperature block phase where outer ordered 4-layers blocks coexist with some inner disordered ones. Moreover, it was observed that the phase transition of such inner layers turns out to have the signatures of a Kosterlitz-Thouless one.\n\nThe absence of the block phase in the J 1 -J 2 model here investigated has to be attributed to the different range of interactions, rather than to the different lattice structure. We came to this conclusion by doing some simulations using the same set of interaction constants employed in Refs. 14,15, but using a BCT lattice: the results we obtained for ∆ ϕ l with n = 12 are reported in Fig. 9. The latter is absolutely similar to Fig.7 of Ref. 15 and clearly displays the footmarks of the block phase (see down-triangle), with two external blocks of ordered layers ( l =1.. . 5 and 8. . . 12 ), where ∆ ϕ l is roughly 10 , sep-· arated by a block of disordered layers, and with almost", + "recall": 0.9142011834319527, + "true_md": "FIG. 8: (color online) Q$_{z}$ , position of the maximum of S ( ⃗ q ), vs. temperature for thickness n = 8. Inset: magnetic vector ( m x l , m y $_{l}$) profile for some temperatures for L = 64. Colors and symbols as in Fig. 2.\n\nFIG. 7: (color online) Δ ϕ$_{l}$ ( T ) vs. temperature for the surface planes, l = 1 (triangles), l = 2 (squares), l = 3 (diamonds), l = 4 (circles). Straight lines and full symbols: n = 8. Dashed lines and open symbols: n = 16.\n\nFIG. 9: Δ ϕ$_{l}$ for a BCT lattice and n = 12, when the six coupling constants set employed in Ref. 14,15 (see text) is used. The temperature range has been chosen around T$_{C}$ ( n ) (error bars lye within point size).\n\n6\n\nfilm leads to an effective 2d-like trend. Region ii ) looks however more intriguing, and requires a more accurate discussion, which can benefit from a careful comparison of the behaviour of a given quantity in regions i ) and ii ).\n\ngled out, with the high-temperature, paramagnetic phase separated from the low-temperature, long-range ordered one, by an intermediate-temperature block phase where outer ordered 4-layers blocks coexist with some inner dis- ordered ones. Moreover, it was observed that the phase transition of such inner layers turns out to have the sig- natures of a Kosterlitz-Thouless one.\n\nFor this purpose, we look at the temperature depen- dence of the rotation angle of the magnetization between NN planes. In Fig. 7, Δ ϕ$_{l}$ ( T ) for n = 8 and n = 16 (continuous and dashed lines, respectively), is plotted for the outermost planes, l = 1 . . . 4. For both thicknesses, a monotonic trend is observed for all l , but at variance with what happens for the highest thickness, for n = 8 we see, starting from a temperature T ≲ T$_{N}$ (8), an abrupt drop of Δ ϕ$_{3}$ and Δ ϕ$_{4}$ , which rapidly reach an almost con- stant value, only slightly larger than Δ ϕ$_{1}$ . In the tem- perature range T$_{N}$ (8) ≲ T < T$_{C}$ (8) we thus substantially observe the same small magnetic phase shifts between all NN layers, testifying an energetically stable quasi -FM configuration giving no contribution to the helical order parameters. The latter point can be made clearer by looking at the the peak position Q$_{z,max}$ of the structure factor S (0 , 0 , q$_{z}$ ). In Fig. 8 the average of Q$_{z,max}$ vs T is reported, again for n = 8 and for different lateral dimen- sions L $^{26}$. As expected from the previous argument, we see that Q$_{z,max}$ = 0 for T$_{N}$ (8) < T < T$_{C}$ (8), while it be- gins to shift to higher values as soon as the temperature decreases below T$_{N}$ (8), making apparent a progressive fan stabilization with Q$_{z,max}$ ̸ = 0 and reaching a value of about 21 ◦ for T = 10 K.\n\nThe absence of the block phase in the J$_{1}$ − J$_{2}$ model here investigated has to be attributed to the different range of interactions, rather than to the different lattice structure. We came to this conclusion by doing some simulations using the same set of interaction constants employed in Refs. 14,15, but using a BCT lattice: the results we obtained for Δ ϕ$_{l}$ with n = 12 are reported in Fig. 9. The latter is absolutely similar to Fig.7 of Ref. 15 and clearly displays the footmarks of the block phase (see down-triangle), with two external blocks of ordered layers ( l =1. . . 5 and 8. . . 12 ), where Δ ϕ$_{l}$ is roughly 10 $^{◦}$, sep- arated by a block of disordered layers, and with almost\n\nIn a previous study, where the magnetic properties of Ho thin films were investigated by MC simulations of a Heisenberg model with easy-plane single-ion anisotropy and six out-of-plane coupling constants (as obtained by experimental neutron scattering measurements $^{16}$) on a HCP lattice $^{14,15}$, it was found that for thicknesses compa- rable with the helical pitch the phase diagram landscape is quite different from what we find here. Indeed, for n = 9 − 16, three different magnetic phases could be sin-" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.667955474297189, + "doc_id": "987cdbd63797496d4e3abfb1b549719dbc148db03051894ca9584f1932789190", + "edit_distance": 0.6837748344370861, + "f1_score": 0.9214659685863873, + "meteor": 0.6704954881431032, + "precision": 0.967032967032967, + "pred_md": "rather than interpolating off the grid onto the cylinder, we have also verified that the error due to interpolation onto the cylinder is comparable to that produced by numerical integration[4]. Finally, all these small errors can be further reduced with the aid of a finer grid [3, 4].\n\nFIG. 11: Exact and numerical results for C [0] 1 ,s ( z ). Exact results are shown as a solid line, and numerical results are shown as dots.\n\nFIG. 11: Exact and numerical results for C [0] 1 ,s ( z ). Exact results are shown as a solid line, and numerical results are shown as dots.\n\nFIG. 12: Exact and numerical results for C [6] 1 ,s ( z ). Exact results are shown as a solid line, and numerical results are shown as dots.\n\nFIG. 12: Exact and numerical results for C [6] 1 ,s ( z ). Exact results are shown as a solid line, and numerical results are shown as dots.\n\n## C. Elliptical Cylinder Results\n\nThe procedure discussed in Section III B has been benchmarked using grid values identitical to those described in the previous section. Consider an elliptical cylinder of semiminor axis of y max = 2 cm and semimajor axis x max = 4 cm. In this case, we evaluate the angular integrals (49) using a Riemann sum with N = 120. (This is necessary to ensure sufficient convergence of the angular integrals to within 10 -4 .) Doing so requires interpolation off the grid onto the elliptical cylinder at 120\n\n12\n\nFIG. 13: Exact and numerical results for C [0] 7 ,s ( z ). Exact results are shown as a solid line, and numerical results are shown as dots.\n\nFIG. 13: Exact and numerical results for C [0] 7 ,s ( z ). Exact results are shown as a solid line, and numerical results are shown as dots.\n\nFIG. 14: Difference between exact and numerical results for C [0] 1 ,s ( z ).\n\nFIG. 14: Difference between exact and numerical results for C [0] 1 ,s ( z ).\n\nangular points for each of the 4801 selected values of z . The sums in (55) are truncated beyond r = r max , where r max varies from 11 to 29 as necessary to achieve a tolerance of 1 part in 10 4 . We evaluate the Fourier transform at 401 values of k in the range [ -K ,K c c ] with K c = 20, using a spline-based Fourier transform algorithm. We use these same points in k space to evaluate the inverse Fourier transform, providing a set of numerically determined functions C [ n ] m,α ( z ).\n\nResults for the functions C [ n ] m,α ( z ) are similar to those found in the circular cylinder case [3, 4], and have comparable accuracy. In the following section, however, we illustrate that functions obtained using an elliptical cylinder are significantly more robust against numerical noise in the original grid values.", + "recall": 0.88, + "true_md": "rather than interpolating off the grid onto the cylinder, we have also verified that the error due to interpolation onto the cylinder is comparable to that produced by nu- merical integration[4]. Finally, all these small errors can be further reduced with the aid of a finer grid [3, 4].\n\nFIG. 14: Difference between exact and numerical results for C [0] 1 $_{,s}$( z ).\n\nFIG. 12: Exact and numerical results for C [6] 1 $_{,s}$( z ). Exact results are shown as a solid line, and numerical results are shown as dots.\n\nFIG. 11: Exact and numerical results for C [0] 1 $_{,s}$( z ). Exact results are shown as a solid line, and numerical results are shown as dots.\n\nFIG. 13: Exact and numerical results for C [0] 7 $_{,s}$( z ). Exact results are shown as a solid line, and numerical results are shown as dots.\n\n12\n\n## C. Elliptical Cylinder Results\n\nangular points for each of the 4801 selected values of z . The sums in (55) are truncated beyond r = r$_{max}$ , where r$_{max}$ varies from 11 to 29 as necessary to achieve a toler- ance of 1 part in 10 $^{4}$. We evaluate the Fourier transform at 401 values of k in the range [ − K$_{c}$,K$_{c}$ ] with K$_{c}$ = 20, using a spline-based Fourier transform algorithm. We use these same points in k space to evaluate the inverse Fourier transform, providing a set of numerically deter- mined functions C [ n ] $_{m,α}$( z ).\n\nResults for the functions C [ n ] $_{m,α}$( z ) are similar to those found in the circular cylinder case [3, 4], and have com- parable accuracy. In the following section, however, we illustrate that functions obtained using an elliptical cylin- der are significantly more robust against numerical noise in the original grid values.\n\nThe procedure discussed in Section III B has been benchmarked using grid values identitical to those de- scribed in the previous section. Consider an elliptical cylinder of semiminor axis of y$_{max}$ = 2 cm and semima- jor axis x$_{max}$ = 4 cm. In this case, we evaluate the an- gular integrals (49) using a Riemann sum with N = 120. (This is necessary to ensure sufficient convergence of the angular integrals to within 10 − $^{4}$.) Doing so requires in- terpolation off the grid onto the elliptical cylinder at 120" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.34083194860298727, + "doc_id": "8a377b44111394a8fe431a38f0a279566364623732b6cd0bf28d41af8427d5de", + "edit_distance": 0.7339650145772595, + "f1_score": 0.890595009596929, + "meteor": 0.40824689895719196, + "precision": 0.9354838709677419, + "pred_md": "## Appendix C: On the parametrization of the trade-off curve\n\nLemma 11 λ parametrizes all points on the CQ and CE trade-off curves with the possible exception of those lying on segments of constant slope.\n\nProof. We prove the lemma for the case of the CQ tradeoff curve. The proof for the CE trade-off curve is similar. Let ( C t , Q t ( ) ( )) for 0 ≤ t ≤ 1 be a parametrization of the trade-off curve with C (0) equal to the classical capacity and Q (1) equal to the quantum capacity. The function C t ( ) is monotonically decreasing and the function Q t ( ) is monotonically increasing. The graph of the trade-off curve is convex and, therefore, has one-sided directional derivatives at all points [70]. It is also monotonically decreasing.\n\nConsider the function f λ ( N ) where\n\n\n\nFor any 0 ≤ t ≤ 1, we have f λ ( N ) = C t ( ) + λQ t ( ) if and only if\n\n\n\nglyph[negationslash]\n\nfor all 0 ≤ s ≤ 1. Perhaps more instructively, if s < t and Q s ( ) = Q t ( ), this inequality can be written as\n\n\n\nbecause of the monotonicity of the functions C and Q . Likewise, when s > t , it has the form\n\n\n\nIf ( C t , Q t ( ) ( )) is a point on the graph at which the derivative is not constant, then setting -λ to be the slope of the graph will lead to Eq. (C1) being satisfied. If the graph is not differentiable at ( C t , Q t ( ) ( )), then the slope must drop discontinuously at that point. Setting -λ to any value in the gap will again lead to the condition being satisfied.\n\nAt points where the graph is differentiable but the slope is constant, λ might not be a good parameter. These points, however, are in the convex hull of the points that λ does parametrize.\n\n## Appendix D: Form of the CQ Trade-off Curve for Qubit Dephasing Channels\n\nWe first prove two important lemmas and then prove a theorem that gives the exact form of the CQ trade-off curve.\n\nLemma 12 Let N be a generalized dephasing channel. In the optimization task for the CQ trade-off curve, it\n\n21\n\nsuffices to consider a classical-quantum state with diagonal conditional density operators, in the sense that the following inequality holds:\n\n\n\nwhere\n\n\n\nU A ' → BE N is an isometric extension of N , ϕ A ' x = ∆( ϕ A ' x ) = ∆( φ A ' x ) , and ∆ is the completely dephasing channel.\n\nProof. The proof of this lemma is similar to the proof of Lemma 9 in Ref. [71]. Consider another classicalquantum state σ in addition to the two presented in the statement of the theorem:\n\n\n\nThen the following chain of inequalities holds for all λ ≥ 1:\n\n\n\nThe first equality follows from entropic manipulations. The inequality follows because the entropies H B ( ) ρ and H B X ( | ) ρ can only increase under a complete dephasing [61]. The second equality follows because N · ∆ = ∆ ·N and N c · ∆ = N c for a generalized dephasing channel N , and the final equality follows from entropic manipulations.\n\nLemma 13 An ensemble of the following form parametrizes all points on the CQ trade-off curve for a qubit dephasing channel:\n\n\n\nwhere ψ AA ' 0 and ψ AA ' 1 are pure states, defined as follows for µ ∈ [0 , 1 / 2] :\n\n\n\n\n\nProof. We assume without loss of generality that the dephasing basis is the computational basis. Consider a", + "recall": 0.8498168498168498, + "true_md": "21\n\nsuffices to consider a classical-quantum state with diag- onal conditional density operators, in the sense that the following inequality holds:\n\nLemma 11 λ parametrizes all points on the CQ and CE trade-off curves with the possible exception of those lying on segments of constant slope.\n\nwhere\n\nProof. We prove the lemma for the case of the CQ trade- off curve. The proof for the CE trade-off curve is similar. Let ( C ( t ) , Q ( t )) for 0 ≤ t ≤ 1 be a parametrization of the trade-off curve with C (0) equal to the classical capacity and Q (1) equal to the quantum capacity. The function C ( t ) is monotonically decreasing and the function Q ( t ) is monotonically increasing. The graph of the trade-off curve is convex and, therefore, has one-sided directional derivatives at all points [70]. It is also monotonically decreasing.\n\nConsider the function f$_{λ}$ ( N ) where\n\nU A $^{′}$→ BE N is an isometric extension of N , ϕ A ′ x = Δ( ϕ A ′ x ) = Δ( φ A ′ x ) , and Δ is the completely dephasing channel.\n\n## Appendix C: On the parametrization of the trade-off curve\n\n$$I ( X ; B )$_{ρ}$ + λI ( A 〉 BX )$_{ρ}$ ≤ I ( X ; B )$_{θ}$ + λI ( A 〉 BX )$_{θ}$ ,$$\n\n$$ρ XABE ≡ ∑ x p$_{X}$ ( x ) | x 〉 〈 x | X ⊗ U A $^{′}$→ BE N ( φ AA ′ x ) , θ XABE ≡ ∑ x p$_{X}$ ( x ) | x 〉 〈 x | X ⊗ U A $^{′}$→ BE N ( ϕ AA ′ x ) ,$$\n\n$$f$_{λ}$ ( N ) ≡ max$_{ρ}$ XBE I ( X ; B ) + λI ( A 〉 BX ) .$$\n\n$$C ( t ) + λQ ( t ) ≥ C ( s ) + λQ ( s ) . (C1)$$\n\n$$σ XAY E ≡ ∑ x p$_{X}$ ( x ) | x 〉 〈 x | $^{X}$⊗ (Δ B → Y ◦ U A $^{′}$→ BE N )( φ AA ′ x ) .$$\n\n$$C ( s ) − C ( t ) Q ( s ) − Q ( t ) ≥ − λ$$\n\n$$I ( X ; B )$_{ρ}$ + λI ( A 〉 BX )$_{ρ}$ = H ( B )$_{ρ}$ + ( λ − 1) H ( B | X )$_{ρ}$ − λH ( E | X )$_{ρ}$ ≤ H ( Y )$_{σ}$ + ( λ − 1) H ( Y | X )$_{σ}$ − λH ( E | X )$_{σ}$ = H ( B )$_{θ}$ + ( λ − 1) H ( B | X )$_{θ}$ − λH ( E | X )$_{θ}$ = I ( X ; B )$_{θ}$ + λI ( A 〉 BX )$_{θ}$ .$$\n\n$$C ( s ) − C ( t ) Q ( s ) − Q ( t ) ≤ − λ.$$\n\nProof. The proof of this lemma is similar to the proof of Lemma 9 in Ref. [71]. Consider another classical- quantum state σ in addition to the two presented in the statement of the theorem:\n\nFor any 0 ≤ t ≤ 1, we have f$_{λ}$ ( N ) = C ( t ) + λQ ( t ) if and only if\n\nThen the following chain of inequalities holds for all λ ≥ 1:\n\nfor all 0 ≤ s ≤ 1. Perhaps more instructively, if s < t and Q ( s ) ̸ = Q ( t ), this inequality can be written as\n\nbecause of the monotonicity of the functions C and Q . Likewise, when s > t , it has the form\n\nThe first equality follows from entropic manipulations. The inequality follows because the entropies H ( B )$_{ρ}$ and H ( B | X )$_{ρ}$ can only increase under a complete dephasing [61]. The second equality follows because N ◦ Δ = Δ ◦ N and N c ◦ Δ = N c for a generalized dephasing channel N , and the final equality follows from entropic manipu- lations.\n\nIf ( C ( t ) , Q ( t )) is a point on the graph at which the deriva- tive is not constant, then setting − λ to be the slope of the graph will lead to Eq. (C1) being satisfied. If the graph is not differentiable at ( C ( t ) , Q ( t )), then the slope must drop discontinuously at that point. Setting − λ to any value in the gap will again lead to the condition being satisfied.\n\nLemma 13 An ensemble of the following form parametrizes all points on the CQ trade-off curve for a qubit dephasing channel:\n\nAt points where the graph is differentiable but the slope is constant, λ might not be a good parameter. These points, however, are in the convex hull of the points that λ does parametrize.\n\nwhere ψ AA ′ 0 and ψ AA ′ 1 are pure states, defined as follows for µ ∈ [0 , 1 / 2] :\n\nWe first prove two important lemmas and then prove a theorem that gives the exact form of the CQ trade-off curve.\n\nLemma 12 Let N be a generalized dephasing channel. In the optimization task for the CQ trade-off curve, it\n\nProof. We assume without loss of generality that the dephasing basis is the computational basis. Consider a\n\n## Appendix D: Form of the CQ Trade-off Curve for Qubit Dephasing Channels\n\n$$1 2 | 0 〉 〈 0 | X ⊗ ψ AA ′ 0 + 1 2 | 1 〉 〈 1 | X ⊗ ψ AA ′ 1 , (D1)$$\n\n$$Tr$_{A}$ $^{{}$ψ AA ′ 0 } = µ | 0 〉 〈 0 | A ′ + (1 − µ ) | 1 〉 〈 1 | A ′ , (D2)$$\n\n$$Tr$_{A}$ $^{{}$ψ AA ′ 1 } = (1 − µ ) | 0 〉 〈 0 | A ′ + µ | 1 〉 〈 1 | A ′ . (D3)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.1355263461799344, + "doc_id": "81073ed7ee4a0e45d5684773b2de6a70d89be88d30879040ae4828e95cbc30ea", + "edit_distance": 0.8422103861517976, + "f1_score": 0.8893905191873589, + "meteor": 0.28698896136639335, + "precision": 0.9471153846153846, + "pred_md": "where\n\nand\n\n\n\nWe write\n\n\n\nIt is apparent form Eq. (A12) that the leading singularity originates from the first term, ( A -1) BC ≈ A -1 ≈ -2 d y ( 1 -0)( y 3 -y 2 ). Introducing new variables as in the Sec. III and integrating over x i s we obtain\n\n\n\nHere again, the integrals are divergent on the upper limit. Similarly to the previous section we differentiate it once with respect to the variable α introduced in Eq. (14) in order to isolate the leading logarithmic singularity,\n\n\n\nThe remaining integrals are easily evaluated. The subsequent integration over α restores the singularity in the\n\n- [1] Ar. Abanov, A. V. Chubukov and J. Schmalian, Adv. Phys. 52 , 119 (2003) and references therein.\n- [2] S. Sachdev, M. A. Metlitski, Y. Qi and C. Xu, arXiv: 0907.3732 and references therein.\n- [3] M. Khodas and A. M. Tsvelik, arXiv:0910.3967.\n\n\n\n\n\n7\n\nself energy correction,\n\n\n\nwhere C is an integration constant. The singular part of Eq. (A15) is given by Eq. (24).\n\n## Appendix B: Leading singularities at the shadow mass shell, ω ∼ k y to the fourth order.\n\nIn this appendix we evaluate the singular contributions to the Green function at the shadow mass shell, ω ∼ k y to fourth order in the coupling constant. We start with the expression (A1) introduced in App. A 1. In contrast to the discussion in App. A 1 we anticipate the singularity at ω = k y to come from the region y 2 /greatermuch x 2 , and introduce new variables accordingly, x 2 = ξy 2 , y 1 = ηy 2 . Performing integration over y 2 we obtain\n\n\n\nWe notice that the singularity at ω ∼ k y comes from the region of small ξ . Therefore we keep only the first term in the square brackets in Eq. (B1). After performing remaining integrations over ξ i s we obtain\n\n\n\nWe stress that contrary to the mass shell singularities discussed in App. A, where it was important to compute the self-energy, at the shadow mass shell it is enough to consider the Green function itself.\n\n- [4] N. Doiron-Leyraud et.al. , Nature (London) 447 , 565 (2007).\n- [5] E. A. Yelland et.al. , Phys. Rev. Lett. 100 , 047003 (2008).\n- [6] S. Sachdev, arXiv:0907.0008.", + "recall": 0.8382978723404255, + "true_md": "where\n\nself energy correction,\n\nand\n\nWe write\n\nIt is apparent form Eq. (A12) that the leading singularity originates from the first term, ( A − 1) BC ≈ A − 1 ≈ − 2 d ( y$_{1}$ − 0)( y$_{3}$ − y$_{2}$ ). Introducing new variables as in the Sec. III and integrating over x$_{i}$ s we obtain\n\nHere again, the integrals are divergent on the upper limit. Similarly to the previous section we differentiate it once with respect to the variable α introduced in Eq. (14) in order to isolate the leading logarithmic singularity,\n\nThe remaining integrals are easily evaluated. The sub- sequent integration over α restores the singularity in the\n\nWe stress that contrary to the mass shell singularities discussed in App. A, where it was important to compute the self-energy, at the shadow mass shell it is enough to consider the Green function itself.\n\nWe notice that the singularity at ω ∼ k$_{y}$ comes from the region of small ξ . Therefore we keep only the first term in the square brackets in Eq. (B1). After performing remaining integrations over ξ$_{i}$ s we obtain\n\nIn this appendix we evaluate the singular contributions to the Green function at the shadow mass shell, ω ∼ k$_{y}$ to fourth order in the coupling constant. We start with the expression (A1) introduced in App. A 1. In contrast to the discussion in App. A 1 we anticipate the singular- ity at ω = k$_{y}$ to come from the region y$_{2}$ ≫ x$_{2}$ , and introduce new variables accordingly, x$_{2}$ = ξy$_{2}$ , y$_{1}$ = ηy$_{2}$ . Performing integration over y$_{2}$ we obtain\n\nwhere C is an integration constant. The singular part of Eq. (A15) is given by Eq. (24).\n\n$$Σ (6) =2 d − i( Ja $^{d}$) $^{6}$Γ(1 − 2 d )Γ $^{2}$(2 − 2 d ) ( − i( ω − k$_{y}$ )) 5 − 6 d × (log α + C ) , (A15)$$\n\n$$Σ (4) =i( Ja $^{d}$) 4 ∫ ∞ 0 dξ ∫ 1 0 dη Γ(3 − 4 d ) η − 2 $^{d}$(1 − η ) − 2 d [( − i(( ω − k$_{y}$ ) + ( ω − k$_{x}$ ) ξ )] 3 − 4 d × [ | (1 − η ) 2 + ξ $^{2}$| $^{d}$| η 2 + ξ $^{2}$| d | 1 + ξ $^{2}$| $^{d}$| ξ | 2 d − 1 ] . (B1)$$\n\n$$Σ (4) = i( Ja $^{d}$) $^{4}$Γ(1 − 2 d )Γ(2 − 2 d ) α 2 − 2 d ( − i( ω − k$_{x}$ )) 3 − 4 d . (B2)$$\n\n$$∂ Σ (6) ∂α = − 2 d i α − 1 ( Ja $^{d}$) $^{6}$Γ(6 − 6 d ) ( − i( ω − k$_{y}$ )) 5 − 6 d × ∫ ∞ 0 3 ∏ i =1 dξ$_{i}$ ξ 1 − 2 d ξ − 2 d 2 ξ 1 − 2 d 3 (1 + ξ$_{1}$ + ξ$_{2}$ + ξ$_{3}$ ) 6 − 6 d . (A14)$$\n\n$$Σ (6) = 2 d i ( Ja $^{d}$) $^{6}$Γ(5 − 6 d ) ( − i( ω − k$_{y}$ )) 5 − 6 d × ∫ ∞ 0 3 ∏ i =1 dξ$_{i}$ ξ 1 − 2 d ξ − 2 d 2 ξ 1 − 2 d 3 ( α + ξ$_{1}$ + ξ$_{2}$ + ξ$_{3}$ ) 5 − 6 d . (A13)$$\n\n$$ABC − B − C +1 = ( A − 1) BC +( B − 1)( C − 1) . (A12)$$\n\n$$A = ( x 2 3 + y 2 $_{2}$) $^{d}$| x 2 3 + ( y$_{3}$ − y$_{1}$ ) $^{2}$| d ( x 2 3 + ( y$_{2}$ − y$_{1}$ ) $^{2}$) $^{d}$( x 2 3 + y 2 $_{3}$) d , (A9)$$\n\n$$B = [( x$_{3}$ − x$_{1}$ ) 2 + ( y$_{2}$ − y$_{1}$ ) $^{2}$] d ( x$_{3}$ − x$_{1}$ ) 2 d × [( x$_{3}$ − x$_{1}$ ) 2 + ( y$_{3}$ − y$_{2}$ ) $^{2}$] d [( y$_{3}$ − y$_{1}$ ) 2 + ( x$_{3}$ − x$_{1}$ ) $^{2}$] d , (A10)$$\n\n$$C = | x 2 1 + y 2 $_{1}$| $^{d}$| x 2 1 + ( y$_{2}$ − y$_{1}$ ) $^{2}$| d | x$_{1}$ | 2 $^{d}$| y 2 + x 2 $_{1}$| d . (A11)$$\n\n## Appendix B: Leading singularities at the shadow mass shell, ω ∼ k$_{y}$ to the fourth order.\n\n7\n\n- [1] Ar. Abanov, A. V. Chubukov and J. Schmalian, Adv. Phys. 52 , 119 (2003) and references therein.\n\n- [2] S. Sachdev, M. A. Metlitski, Y. Qi and C. Xu, arXiv: 0907.3732 and references therein.\n\n- [3] M. Khodas and A. M. Tsvelik, arXiv:0910.3967.\n\n- [4] N. Doiron-Leyraud et.al. , Nature (London) 447 , 565 (2007).\n\n- [5] E. A. Yelland et.al. , Phys. Rev. Lett. 100 , 047003 (2008).\n\n- [6] S. Sachdev, arXiv:0907.0008." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.2718141715917351, + "doc_id": "a9f03acc51623f5dd48851ddc6cb58f5e6cbc91130356355b9f87d6966194fd6", + "edit_distance": 0.7850182704019488, + "f1_score": 0.8714596949891068, + "meteor": 0.3310483198293902, + "precision": 0.9523809523809523, + "pred_md": "## A. The Hamiltonian\n\nLet us consider the non-Hermitian FFA model defined by the following relations for the energy dispersion E k ( ) and spectral coupling v k ( )\n\n\n\nwhere κ 0 , κ a are two real-valued positive constants and 0 ≤ k ≤ π . The Hermitian limit of this model, attained by assuming Im( E a ) = 0, is a special case of the FFA model previously investigated in Ref.[36], which is exactly solvable (see also [29]). Note that the continuous spectrum of H spans the band ( E , E 1 2 ), with E 2 = -E 1 = 2 κ 0 . The density of states for this model is given by\n\n\n\nwhich shows van-Hove singularities at the band edges, whereas the positive spectral function V ( E ), defined by V ( E ) = ρ E ( ) | v E ( ) | 2 , reads\n\n\n\n which is non-singular. Substitution of Eq.(49) into Eq.(11) yields the following expression for the self-energy Σ( ) [46] z\n\n\n\nand thus [see Eq.(12)]\n\n\n\n The condition for the non-Hermitian Hamiltonian to possess a real-valued spectrum (i.e. to avoid complex-valued energies arising from bound states outside the continuum) is derived in Appendix B. Precisely, let ξ 1 2 , be the two roots of the second-order algebraic equation\n\n\n\nThen the Hamiltonian H has a real-valued energy spectrum if and only if | ξ 1 2 , | ≤ 1. Figure 2 shows the domain in the plane (Im( E a ) /κ , κ 0 a /κ 0 ) where H has a purely continuous energy spectrum for a few increasing values of the ratio | Re( E a ) /κ 0 | . The domain lies in the sector\n\nFIG. 2: Domains of non-existence of bound states for the Hamiltonian H in the (Im( E a ) /κ , κ 0 a /κ 0 ) plane (shaded regions) for increasing values of the ratio | Re( E a ) | /κ 0 . For a non-Hermitian Hamiltonian, i.e. Im( E a ) = 0, in the shaded regions the energy spectrum of H is real-valued and purely continuous. Spectral singularities occur at the boundary of the shaded regions.\n\nFIG. 2: Domains of non-existence of bound states for the Hamiltonian H in the (Im( E a ) /κ , κ 0 a /κ 0 ) plane (shaded regions) for increasing values of the ratio | Re( E a ) | /κ 0 . For a non-Hermitian Hamiltonian, i.e. Im( E a ) = 0, in the shaded regions the energy spectrum of H is real-valued and purely continuous. Spectral singularities occur at the boundary of the shaded regions.\n\n/negationslash\n\nκ /κ a 0 ≤ √ 2 and shrinks toward Im( E a ) /κ 0 = κ /κ a 0 = 0 as | Re( E a ) /κ 0 | → 2 -. For | Re( E a ) /κ 0 | ≤ 2, bound states do exist for any value of κ /κ a 0 and Im( E a ) /κ 0 . The wider domain is attained for Re( E a ) = 0. In particular, for Re( E a ) = 0 and κ /κ a 0 = √ 2, from Eq.(52) it follows that H has a real-valued energy spectrum provided that\n\n\n\nLet us now consider the occurrence of spectral singularities. According to Eqs.(19) and (20) and using Eqs.(49) and (51), a spectral singularity at energy E = E 0 , inside the interval ( -2 κ , 0 2 κ 0 ), is found provided that the following two equations are simultaneously satisfied\n\n\n\n\n\nFor arbitrarily given values of E a , κ a and κ 0 , the above conditions are generally not satisfied [nowhere for E 0 in the range ( -2 κ , 0 2 κ 0 )], i.e. the non-Hermitian FFA Hamiltonian is generally diagonalizable. Spectral singularities appear solely when a constraint among Re( E a ) /κ 0 , Im( E a ) /κ 0 and κ /κ a 0 is satisfied. Let us first assume κ /κ a 0 strictly smaller that √ 2. In this case, a single spectral singularity, at the energy E 0 =\n\n7", + "recall": 0.8032128514056225, + "true_md": "7\n\nLet us consider the non-Hermitian FFA model defined by the following relations for the energy dispersion E ( k ) and spectral coupling v ( k )\n\nwhere κ$_{0}$ , κ$_{a}$ are two real-valued positive constants and 0 ≤ k ≤ π . The Hermitian limit of this model, at- tained by assuming Im( E$_{a}$ ) = 0, is a special case of the FFA model previously investigated in Ref.[36], which is exactly solvable (see also [29]). Note that the con- tinuous spectrum of H spans the band ( E$_{1}$, E$_{2}$ ), with E$_{2}$ = − E$_{1}$ = 2 κ$_{0}$ . The density of states for this model is given by\n\n$$E ( k ) = − 2 κ$_{0}$ cos k , v ( k ) = − √ 2 π κ$_{a}$ sin k (47)$$\n\n## A. The Hamiltonian\n\nFIG. 2: Domains of non-existence of bound states for the Hamiltonian H in the (Im( E$_{a}$ ) /κ 0 , κ$_{a}$/κ 0 ) plane (shaded re- gions) for increasing values of the ratio | Re( E$_{a}$ ) | /κ 0 . For a non-Hermitian Hamiltonian, i.e. Im( E$_{a}$ ) ̸ = 0, in the shaded regions the energy spectrum of H is real-valued and purely continuous. Spectral singularities occur at the boundary of the shaded regions.\n\nκ$_{a}$/κ$_{0}$ ≤ √$_{2 and shrinks toward Im(}$$\\_{E}$$_{a}$$\\_{)}$$_{/κ}$$\\_{0}$ = κ$\\_{a}$/κ$\\_{0}$ = 0 as | Re( E$\\_{a}$ ) /κ$\\_{0}$ | → 2 $^{−}$. For | Re( E$\\_{a}$ ) /κ$\\_{0}$ | ≤ 2, bound states do exist for any value of κ$\\_{a}$/κ$\\_{0}$ and Im( E$\\_{a}$ ) /κ$\\_{0}$ . The wider domain is attained for Re( E$\\_{a}$ ) = 0. In particular, for Re( E$\\_{a}$ ) = 0 and κ$\\_{a}$/κ$\\_{0}$ = √$\\_{2, from Eq.(52) it follows}$ that H has a real-valued energy spectrum provided that\n\n$$− 2 κ$_{0}$ < Im( E$_{a}$ ) < 2 κ$_{0}$. (53)$$\n\nLet us now consider the occurrence of spectral singulari- ties. According to Eqs.(19) and (20) and using Eqs.(49) and (51), a spectral singularity at energy E = E $_{0}$, in- side the interval ( − 2 κ$_{0}$, 2 κ$_{0}$ ), is found provided that the following two equations are simultaneously satisfied\n\n$$ρ ( E ) = ( ∂E ∂k ) − 1 = { 1 √ 4 κ 2 $_{0}$− E 2 − 2 κ$_{0}$ < E < 2 κ$_{0}$ 0 | E | > 2 κ$_{0}$ (48)$$\n\nwhich shows van-Hove singularities at the band edges, whereas the positive spectral function V ( E ), defined by V ( E ) = ρ ( E ) | v ( E ) | $^{2}$, reads\n\n   √ − ( ) − 0 | E | > 2 κ$_{0}$ which is non-singular. Substitution of Eq.(49) into Eq.(11) yields the following expression for the self-energy Σ( z ) [46]\n\n$$V ( E ) =    κ 2 a πκ 0 √ 1 − ( E 2 κ 0 ) 2 − 2 κ$_{0}$ < E < 2 κ$_{0}$ 0 | E | > 2 κ$_{0}$ (49)$$\n\n$$Σ( z ) = − i κ 2 a 2 κ 2 0 ( √ 4 κ 2 0 − z 2 + iz ) (50)$$\n\n$$Δ( E ) = Re ( Σ( z = E ± i 0 $^{+}$) ) = (51) =      κ 2 a 2 κ 2 0 ( E + √ E 2 − 4 κ 2 0 ) E < − 2 κ$_{0}$ κ 2 a 2 κ 2 0 E − 2 κ$_{0}$ ≤ E ≤ 2 κ$_{0}$ κ 2 a 2 κ 2 0 ( E − √ E 2 − 4 κ 2 0 ) E > 2 κ$_{0}$ The condition for the non-Hermitian Hamiltonian to pos-$$\n\n$$Im( E$_{a}$ ) = ± κ 2 a κ$_{0}$ √ 1 − ( E 0 2 κ$_{0}$ ) 2 (54) ( κ 2 )$$\n\n$$( ) Re( E$_{a}$ ) = ( 1 − κ 2 a 2 κ 2 0 ) E $_{0}$. (55)$$\n\nand thus [see Eq.(12)]\n\n   a 2 κ 2 0 ( E − √ E 2 − 4 κ 2 0 ) E > 2 κ$_{0}$ The condition for the non-Hermitian Hamiltonian to pos- sess a real-valued spectrum (i.e. to avoid complex-valued energies arising from bound states outside the contin- uum) is derived in Appendix B. Precisely, let ξ$_{1}$$\\_{,}$$_{2}$ be the two roots of the second-order algebraic equation\n\n$$ξ 2 + E$_{a}$ κ$_{0}$ ξ + 1 − ( κ$_{a}$/κ$_{0}$ ) 2 = 0 . (52)$$\n\nFor arbitrarily given values of E$_{a}$ , κ$_{a}$ and κ$_{0}$ , the above conditions are generally not satisfied [nowhere for E 0 in the range ( − 2 κ$_{0}$, 2 κ$_{0}$ )], i.e. the non-Hermitian FFA Hamiltonian is generally diagonalizable. Spec- tral singularities appear solely when a constraint among Re( E$_{a}$ ) /κ$_{0}$ , Im( E$_{a}$ ) /κ$_{0}$ and κ$_{a}$/κ$_{0}$ is satisfied. Let us first assume κ$_{a}$/κ$_{0}$ strictly smaller that √$_{2.}$ In this case, a single spectral singularity, at the energy E 0 =\n\nThen the Hamiltonian H has a real-valued energy spec- trum if and only if | ξ$_{1}$$\\_{,}$$_{2}$ | ≤ 1. Figure 2 shows the domain in the plane (Im( E$_{a}$ ) /κ$_{0}$, κ$_{a}$/κ$_{0}$ ) where H has a purely continuous energy spectrum for a few increasing values of the ratio | Re( E$_{a}$ ) /κ$_{0}$ | . The domain lies in the sector" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7544463698285427, + "doc_id": "e6c1d891c715bc165697d798ee1a7aaeb417de596c8128e16eb7c3d2d80fd059", + "edit_distance": 0.5131914893617021, + "f1_score": 0.889348500517063, + "meteor": 0.7672982154238212, + "precision": 0.9207708779443254, + "pred_md": "arXiv:1001.2538v1 [cond-mat.mes-hall] 14 Jan 2010\n\n## Computational Design of Chemical Nanosensors: Metal Doped Carbon Nanotubes\n\nJ. M. Garc´ ıa-Lastra 1,2 , ∗ D. J. Mowbray 1,2 , K. S. Thygesen 2 , A. Rubio 1,3 ,\n\nand K. W. Jacobsen 2 1 Nano-Bio Spectroscopy group and ETSF Scientific Development Centre, Dpto. F´ ısica de Materiales, Universidad del Pa´ ıs Vasco, 2 Center for Atomic-scale Materials Design, Department of Physics, Technical University of Denmark, DK-2800 Kgs. Lyngby, Denmark 3 Fritz-Haber-Institut der Max-Planck-Gesellschaft, Berlin, Germany\n\nCentro de F´ ısica de Materiales CSIC-UPV/EHU- MPC and DIPC, Av. Tolosa 72, E-20018 San Sebasti´ an, Spain\n\nWe use computational screening to systematically investigate the use of transition metal doped carbon nanotubes for chemical gas sensing. For a set of relevant target molecules (CO, NH3, H2S) and the main components of air (N2, O2, H2O), we calculate the binding energy and change in conductance upon adsorption on a metal atom occupying a vacancy of a (6,6) carbon nanotube. Based on these descriptors, we identify the most promising dopant candidates for detection of a given target molecule. From the fractional coverage of the metal sites in thermal equilibrium with air, we estimate the change in the nanotube resistance per doping site as a function of the target molecule concentration assuming charge transport in the diffusive regime. Our analysis points to Ni-doped nanotubes as candidates for CO sensors working under typical atmospheric conditions.\n\nPACS numbers: 73.63.-b, 68.43.-h, 73.50.Lw\n\nThe ability to detect small concentrations of specific chemical species is fundamental for a variety of industrial and scientific processes as well as for medical applications and environmental monitoring [1]. In general, nanostructured materials should be well suited for sensor applications because of their large surface to volume ratio which makes them sensitive to molecular adsorption. Specifically, carbon nanotubes (CNT) [2] have been shown to work remarkably well as detectors of small gas molecules. This has been demonstrated both for individual CNTs [3-8] as well as for CNT networks [9, 10].\n\nPristine CNTs are known to be chemically inert - a property closely related to their high stability. As a consequence, only radicals bind strong enough to the CNT to notably affect its electrical properties [2, 5, 11-13]. To make CNTs attractive for sensor applications thus requires some kind of functionalization, e.g. through doping or decoration of the CNT sidewall [13-21]. Ideally, this type of functionalization could be used to control not only the reactivity of the CNT but also the selectivity towards specific chemical species.\n\nIn this work we consider the possibility of using CNTs doped by 3d transition metal atoms for chemical gas sensing. We use computational screening to systematically identify the most promising dopant candidates for detection of three different target molecules (CO, NH3, H2S) under typical atmospheric conditions. The screening procedure is based on the calculation of two microscopic descriptors: the binding energy and scattering resistance of the molecules when adsorbed on a doped CNT. These two quantities give a good indication of the gas coverage and impact on the resistance. For the most promising candidates we then employ a simple thermodynamic model of the CNT sensor. In this model, the binding energies are used to obtain the fractional coverage of the metallic sites as a function of the target molecule concentration under ambient conditions. Under the assumption of transport in the diffusive rather than localization regime, the\n\nchange in CNT resistivity may then be obtained from the calculated coverages and single impurity conductances.\n\nWe find that oxidation of the active metal site passivates the sensor in the case of doping by Ti, V, Cr, and Mn under standard conditions (room temperature and 1 bar of pressure). Among the remaining metals, we identify Ni as is the most promising candidate for CO detection. For this system the change in resistance per active site is generally significant ( > 1 Ω ) for small changes in CO concentration in the relevant range of around 0.1-10 ppm. Our approach is quite general and is directly applicable to other nanostructures than CNTs, other functionalizations than metal doping, and other backgrounds than atmospheric air.\n\nAll total energy calculations and structure optimizations have been performed with the real-space density functional theory (DFT) code GPAW [22] which is based on the projector augmented wave method. We use a grid spacing of 0.2 A for ˚ representing the density and wave functions and the PBE exchange correlation functional [23]. Transport calculations for the optimized structures have been performed using the nonequilibrium Green's function method [24] with an electronic Hamiltonian obtained from the SIESTA code [25] in a double zeta polarized (DZP) basis set. Spin polarization has been taken into account in all calculations.\n\nMetallic doping of a (6,6) CNT has been modeled in a supercell containing six repeated minimal unit cells along the CNT axis (dimensions: 15 A ˚ × 15 ˚ A × 14.622 A). For this size ˚ of supercell a Γ -point sampling of the Brillouin zone was found to be sufficient. The formation energy for creating a vacancy (VC) occupied by a transition metal atom (M) was calculated using the relation\n\n\n\nwhere E [M@VC] is the total energy of a transition metal atom occupying a vacancy in the nanotube, n is the number of carbon atoms removed to form the vacancy, E [C] is the energy per carbon atom in a pristine nanotube, and E [M@NT]", + "recall": 0.86, + "true_md": "# Computational Design of Chemical Nanosensors: Metal Doped Carbon Nanotubes\n\nJ. M. Garc´ıa-Lastra$^{1,2}$, ∗ D. J. Mowbray$^{1,2}$, K. S. Thygesen$^{2}$, A. Rubio$^{1,3}$, and K. W. Jacobsen 2\n\n$^{1}$Nano-Bio Spectroscopy group and ETSF Scientific Development Centre, Dpto. F´ısica de Materiales, Universidad del Pa´ıs Vasco, Centro de F´ısica de Materiales CSIC-UPV/EHU- MPC and DIPC, Av. Tolosa 72, E-20018 San Sebasti´an, Spain\n\n$^{2}$Center for Atomic-scale Materials Design, Department of Physics, Technical University of Denmark, DK-2800 Kgs. Lyngby, Denmark\n\n$^{3}$Fritz-Haber-Institut der Max-Planck-Gesellschaft, Berlin, Germany\n\nWe use computational screening to systematically investigate the use of transition metal doped carbon nan- otubes for chemical gas sensing. For a set of relevant target molecules (CO, NH$_{3}$, H$_{2}$S) and the main components of air (N$_{2}$, O$_{2}$, H$_{2}$O), we calculate the binding energy and change in conductance upon adsorption on a metal atom occupying a vacancy of a (6,6) carbon nanotube. Based on these descriptors, we identify the most promis- ing dopant candidates for detection of a given target molecule. From the fractional coverage of the metal sites in thermal equilibrium with air, we estimate the change in the nanotube resistance per doping site as a function of the target molecule concentration assuming charge transport in the diffusive regime. Our analysis points to Ni-doped nanotubes as candidates for CO sensors working under typical atmospheric conditions.\n\nPACS numbers: 73.63.–b, 68.43.–h, 73.50.Lw\n\nThe ability to detect small concentrations of specific chem- ical species is fundamental for a variety of industrial and sci- entific processes as well as for medical applications and en- vironmental monitoring [1]. In general, nanostructured mate- rials should be well suited for sensor applications because of their large surface to volume ratio which makes them sensi- tive to molecular adsorption. Specifically, carbon nanotubes (CNT) [2] have been shown to work remarkably well as de- tectors of small gas molecules. This has been demonstrated both for individual CNTs [3–8] as well as for CNT networks [9, 10].\n\nchange in CNT resistivity may then be obtained from the cal- culated coverages and single impurity conductances.\n\nWe find that oxidation of the active metal site passivates the sensor in the case of doping by Ti, V, Cr, and Mn un- der standard conditions (room temperature and 1 bar of pres- sure). Among the remaining metals, we identify Ni as is the most promising candidate for CO detection. For this system the change in resistance per active site is generally significant ( > 1 Ω ) for small changes in CO concentration in the relevant range of around 0.1–10 ppm. Our approach is quite general and is directly applicable to other nanostructures than CNTs, other functionalizations than metal doping, and other back- grounds than atmospheric air.\n\nPristine CNTs are known to be chemically inert – a prop- erty closely related to their high stability. As a consequence, only radicals bind strong enough to the CNT to notably affect its electrical properties [2, 5, 11–13]. To make CNTs attrac- tive for sensor applications thus requires some kind of func- tionalization, e.g. through doping or decoration of the CNT sidewall [13–21]. Ideally, this type of functionalization could be used to control not only the reactivity of the CNT but also the selectivity towards specific chemical species.\n\nIn this work we consider the possibility of using CNTs doped by 3d transition metal atoms for chemical gas sens- ing. We use computational screening to systematically iden- tify the most promising dopant candidates for detection of three different target molecules (CO, NH$_{3}$, H$_{2}$S) under typi- cal atmospheric conditions. The screening procedure is based on the calculation of two microscopic descriptors: the bind- ing energy and scattering resistance of the molecules when adsorbed on a doped CNT. These two quantities give a good indication of the gas coverage and impact on the resistance. For the most promising candidates we then employ a simple thermodynamic model of the CNT sensor. In this model, the binding energies are used to obtain the fractional coverage of the metallic sites as a function of the target molecule concen- tration under ambient conditions. Under the assumption of transport in the diffusive rather than localization regime, the\n\nwhere E [M@VC] is the total energy of a transition metal atom occupying a vacancy in the nanotube, n is the number of carbon atoms removed to form the vacancy, E [C] is the en- ergy per carbon atom in a pristine nanotube, and E [M@NT]\n\nMetallic doping of a (6,6) CNT has been modeled in a su- percell containing six repeated minimal unit cells along the CNT axis (dimensions: 15 ˚ A × 15 ˚ A × 14.622 ˚ A). For this size of supercell a Γ -point sampling of the Brillouin zone was found to be sufficient. The formation energy for creating a vacancy (VC) occupied by a transition metal atom (M) was calculated using the relation\n\nAll total energy calculations and structure optimizations have been performed with the real-space density functional theory (DFT) code GPAW [22] which is based on the projector augmented wave method. We use a grid spacing of 0.2 ˚ A for representing the density and wave functions and the PBE ex- change correlation functional [23]. Transport calculations for the optimized structures have been performed using the non- equilibrium Green’s function method [24] with an electronic Hamiltonian obtained from the SIESTA code [25] in a dou- ble zeta polarized (DZP) basis set. Spin polarization has been taken into account in all calculations.\n\narXiv:1001.2538v1 [cond-mat.mes-hall] 14 Jan 2010\n\n$$E$_{form}$ [ M @ VC ] = E [ M @ VC ] + nE [ C ] − E [ M@NT ] (1)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8965264612467825, + "doc_id": "6f9317475aeb5d75c73e85dfdd946c1324e527a0fd5d79836e3d8dccee6caef7", + "edit_distance": 0.22379269729093051, + "f1_score": 0.9363395225464192, + "meteor": 0.9362168977788563, + "precision": 0.9671232876712329, + "pred_md": "arXiv:1001.0806v1 [astro-ph.HE] 6 Jan 2010\n\n2009 Fermi Symposium, Washington, D.C., Nov. 2-5\n\n1\n\n## Submillimeter Variability and the Gamma-ray Connection in Fermi Blazars\n\nA. Strom Univ. of Arizona, AZ 85721, USA A. Siemiginowska, M. Gurwell, B. Kelly\n\nCfA, MA 02138, USA\n\nWe present multi-epoch observations from the Submillimeter Array ( SMA ) for a sample of 171 bright blazars, 43 of which were detected by Fermi during the first three months of observations. We explore the correlation between their gamma-ray properties and submillimeter observations of their parsec-scale jets, with a special emphasis on spectral index in both bands and the variability of the synchrotron component. Subclass is determined using a combination of Fermi designation and the Candidate Gamma-Ray Blazar Survey (CGRaBS), resulting in 35 BL Lac objects and 136 flat-spectrum radio quasars (FSRQs) in our total sample. We calculate submillimeter energy spectral indices using contemporaneous observations in the 1 mm and 850 micron bands during the months August-October 2008. The submillimeter light curves are modeled as first-order continuous autoregressive processes, from which we derive characteristic timescales. Our blazar sample exhibits no differences in submillimeter variability amplitude or characteristic timescale as a function of subclass or luminosity. All of the the light curves are consistent with being produced by a single process that accounts for both low and high states, and there is additional evidence that objects may be transitioning between blazar class during flaring epochs.\n\n## 1. INTRODUCTION\n\nThe timescales on which high-amplitude flaring events occur in blazars indicate that much of the energy is being produced deep within the jet on small, sub-parsec scales [1, 2]. Understanding if/how emission differs between blazar subclasses (i.e., BL Lacs objects and flat-spectrum radio quasars (FSRQs)) may offer important insight into the similarity between blazars and, furthermore, can provide constraints on the formation and acceleration of the jets themselves.\n\nFor the synchrotron component of blazar spectra, the low-frequency spectral break due to synchrotron self-absorption moves to higher frequencies as one measures closer to the base of the jet [2]. This often places the peak of the spectrum in the millimeter and submillimeter bands, where the emission is optically-thin and originates on parsec and sub-parsec scales [3], allowing direct observation of the most compact regions near the central engine. The high energy γ -ray emission originates as a Compton process, typically a combination of synchrotron-self-Compton (SSC) and external-radiation-Compton (ERC). Depending on the source properties, the synchrotron photons or external photons are upscattered by the same population of electrons that emit the millimeter and submillimeter spectra. Therefore the submillimeter and γ -ray emission are closely linked and give the full information about the source emission.\n\nA systematic study of the submillimeter properties of the entire sample of Fermi blazars has yet to be conducted and is one of the primary goals of our work. We present here preliminary analysis of the submillimeter properties of Fermi blazars detected by the Submil-\n\neConf C091122\n\nlimeter Array 1 ( SMA ) at 1mm and 850 µ m, including an investigation of variable behavior and the determination of submillimeter energy spectral indices. In addition, we consider the connection to the observed γ -ray indices and luminosities.\n\n## 2. SMA BLAZARS\n\nThe Submillimeter Array [4] consists of eight 6 m antennas located near the summit of Mauna Kea. The SMA is used in a variety of baseline configurations and typically operates in the 1mm and 850 µ m windows, achieving spatial resolution as fine as 0.25' at 850 µ m. The sources used as phase calibrators for the array are compiled in a database known as the SMA Calibrator List 2 [5]. Essentially a collection of bright objects (stronger than 750 mJy at 230 GHz and 1 Jy at 345 GHz), these sources are monitored regularly, both during science observations and dedicated observing tracks.\n\nTo select our sample, we identified objects in the calibrator list that were also classified as BL Lacs or FSRQs by the Candidate Gamma-Ray Blazar Survey [6, CGRaBS]. Of the 243 total objects in the calibrator list, 171 (35 BL Lacs and 136 FSRQs) have positive blazar class identifications, although there are three sources (J0238+166, J0428-379, and\n\n1 The Submillimeter Array is a joint project between the Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory and the Academia Sinica Institute of Astronomy and Astrophysics and is funded by the Smithsonian Institution and the Academia Sinica.\n\n2 http://sma1.sma.hawaii.edu/callist/callist.html", + "recall": 0.9074550128534704, + "true_md": "2009 Fermi Symposium, Washington, D.C., Nov. 2-5\n\n1\n\narXiv:1001.0806v1 [astro-ph.HE] 6 Jan 2010\n\n# Submillimeter Variability and the Gamma-ray Connection in Fermi Blazars\n\nA. Strom\n\nUniv. of Arizona, AZ 85721, USA\n\nA. Siemiginowska, M. Gurwell, B. Kelly\n\nCfA, MA 02138, USA\n\nWe present multi-epoch observations from the Submillimeter Array ( SMA ) for a sample of 171 bright blazars, 43 of which were detected by Fermi during the first three months of observations. We explore the correlation between their gamma-ray properties and submillimeter observations of their parsec-scale jets, with a special emphasis on spectral index in both bands and the variability of the synchrotron component. Subclass is de- termined using a combination of Fermi designation and the Candidate Gamma-Ray Blazar Survey (CGRaBS), resulting in 35 BL Lac objects and 136 flat-spectrum radio quasars (FSRQs) in our total sample. We calculate submillimeter energy spectral indices using contemporaneous observations in the 1 mm and 850 micron bands during the months August–October 2008. The submillimeter light curves are modeled as first-order continuous autoregressive processes, from which we derive characteristic timescales. Our blazar sample exhibits no differ- ences in submillimeter variability amplitude or characteristic timescale as a function of subclass or luminosity. All of the the light curves are consistent with being produced by a single process that accounts for both low and high states, and there is additional evidence that objects may be transitioning between blazar class during flaring epochs.\n\nThe timescales on which high-amplitude flaring events occur in blazars indicate that much of the en- ergy is being produced deep within the jet on small, sub-parsec scales [1, 2]. Understanding if/how emis- sion differs between blazar subclasses (i.e., BL Lacs objects and flat-spectrum radio quasars (FSRQs)) may offer important insight into the similarity be- tween blazars and, furthermore, can provide con- straints on the formation and acceleration of the jets themselves.\n\nFor the synchrotron component of blazar spectra, the low-frequency spectral break due to synchrotron self-absorption moves to higher frequencies as one measures closer to the base of the jet [2]. This of- ten places the peak of the spectrum in the millime- ter and submillimeter bands, where the emission is optically-thin and originates on parsec and sub-parsec scales [3], allowing direct observation of the most com- pact regions near the central engine. The high en- ergy γ -ray emission originates as a Compton process, typically a combination of synchrotron-self-Compton (SSC) and external-radiation-Compton (ERC). De- pending on the source properties, the synchrotron photons or external photons are upscattered by the same population of electrons that emit the millimeter and submillimeter spectra. Therefore the submillime- ter and γ -ray emission are closely linked and give the full information about the source emission.\n\nA systematic study of the submillimeter properties of the entire sample of Fermi blazars has yet to be con- ducted and is one of the primary goals of our work. We present here preliminary analysis of the submillimeter properties of Fermi blazars detected by the Submil-\n\nTo select our sample, we identified objects in the calibrator list that were also classified as BL Lacs or FSRQs by the Candidate Gamma-Ray Blazar Sur- vey [6, CGRaBS]. Of the 243 total objects in the calibrator list, 171 (35 BL Lacs and 136 FSRQs) have positive blazar class identifications, although there are three sources (J0238+166, J0428-379, and\n\nThe Submillimeter Array [4] consists of eight 6 m antennas located near the summit of Mauna Kea. The SMA is used in a variety of baseline configurations and typically operates in the 1mm and 850 µ m win- dows, achieving spatial resolution as fine as 0.25” at 850 µ m. The sources used as phase calibrators for the array are compiled in a database known as the SMA Calibrator List 2 [5]. Essentially a collection of bright objects (stronger than 750 mJy at 230 GHz and 1 Jy at 345 GHz), these sources are monitored regularly, both during science observations and dedicated ob- serving tracks.\n\nlimeter Array 1 ( SMA ) at 1mm and 850 µ m, including an investigation of variable behavior and the deter- mination of submillimeter energy spectral indices. In addition, we consider the connection to the observed γ -ray indices and luminosities.\n\n## 1. INTRODUCTION\n\n## 2. SMA BLAZARS\n\n$^{1}$The Submillimeter Array is a joint project between the Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory and the Academia Sinica Institute of Astronomy and Astrophysics and is funded by the Smithsonian Institution and the Academia Sinica.\n\n$^{2}$http://sma1.sma.hawaii.edu/callist/callist.html\n\neConf C091122" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6293491369711712, + "doc_id": "a388d3d7fff80e1a7c42916d6e8006acd1526d20737979ea6e1e2342e8045504", + "edit_distance": 0.754337899543379, + "f1_score": 0.8894601542416453, + "meteor": 0.5874722189323309, + "precision": 0.9301075268817204, + "pred_md": "FIG. 4: An ordered list of the Eigenvalues for our cluster covariance matrix.\n\nFIG. 4: An ordered list of the Eigenvalues for our cluster covariance matrix.\n\nBefore we invert C ij in Eqn. 12, we note that the values of C ij are estimated to limited resolution,\n\n\n\nand therefore, if N jk is small, or there are degeneracies within C ij , the inversion will be affected. This problem can be eliminated by performing a Single Value Decomposition (SVD) of the matrix,\n\n\n\nwhere U and V are orthogonal matrices that span the range and the null space of C ij and D kl = λ δ 2 kl , a diagonal matrix with singular values along the diagonal. In doing the SVD, we select the dominant modes to contribute to the χ 2 by requiring that λ 2 > 2 /N jk .\n\n√ In Figure 4, we rank the eigenvalues ( λ i ) for the increasing eigenmodes and see a 'kink' in the distribution which we interpret as indicating a transition in the signal-to-noise of the eigenmodes, i.e., only the first ten modes contain most of the signal, while higher-ordered modes are dominated by noise. We therefore remove eigenmodes beyond this kink (with λ i < 0 01) where the . eigenvalues start to flatten out.\n\n## A. Statistical determination of large scale flow\n\nAs discussed in the Introduction, there is recent evidence for excessive bulk flow motions compared to the WMAP5-normalised ΛCDM model [18] and therefore, it is important to confirm these results as it may indicate\n\n6\n\nevidence for an alternative explanation for the observed cosmic acceleration such as modified gravity. In this paper, we provide a first demonstration of our new parameterization using clusters of galaxies from the SDSS. In detail, we attempt to model the 'squashing' of the 2D correlation function of the C4 cluster sample seen in Figure 5 using the formalism presented herein. We do however caution the reader that we expect the limited size of the DR3 sample to leads to large statistical errors, due to a significant shot-noise contribution because of their low number density. However, future cluster and galaxy samples (e.g., LRGs) should provide stronger constraints and provide a more robust test of these high bulk flow measurements in the literature.\n\nIn Figure 5, we provide the best fit parameters b and v p for the C4 correlation function presented in Figure 3 and there is as expected a clear anti-correlation between these two parameters because the anisotropic amplitude is generated by cross-correlations in the density and peculiar velocity fields. The best fit value from Figure 5 is v p = 270 +433 km/s (at the 1 σ level marginalised with other parameters including b ) and is consistent with v p = 0. We do not quote the negative bound of the error on v p as it is below zero and thus has no physical meaning. Instead, we quote the upper bound on v p and note that our result is consistent with zero. Our measurement of v p is close to the predicted value of 203 km/s for a WMAP5-normalised ΛCDM model.\n\nWe propose above that v p is a complementary parameter for reporting such peculiar velocity measurements. The parameter g Θ , which is equivalent to fσ 8 , is not determined precisely without the prior information of A S . But when we report our measurement with v p , there is no uncertainty due to other cosmological parameters which are not determined accurately, as it is equivalent to g ∗ Θ determined statistically from redshift space distortion. The observed value v p at a given redshift is not only independent of bias but also independent of normalisation.\n\n## B. Reconstruction of matter density field from v p\n\nWe convert v p measurement into g Θ using A s from WMAP5 ( g Θ : coherent growth factor of peculiar velocity, and it is equivalent to fσ 8 in other parameterizations). With the evolution of g Θ known, dynamics of perturbations are reconstructed to provide the history of Ψ through the Euler equation. In most theoretical models, the time variation of v p is minimal at these low redshifts discussed here for the C4 sample ( z /similarequal 0 1), which allows . us to ignore the time-derivative part in Eq. 9. Therefore, it is straightforward to transform the coherent evolution of Θ into the coherent evolution of Ψ. If we assume no anisotropic stress, then it is easy to convert to the coherent evolution of Φ, g Φ .\n\nWe are able to determine matter density fluctuations through the Poisson equation. We calculate the coherent growth of δ m , g δ = 0 7, . which is related to g Φ as", + "recall": 0.8522167487684729, + "true_md": "6\n\nFIG. 4: An ordered list of the Eigenvalues for our cluster covari- ance matrix.\n\nevidence for an alternative explanation for the observed cosmic acceleration such as modified gravity. In this pa- per, we provide a first demonstration of our new param- eterization using clusters of galaxies from the SDSS. In detail, we attempt to model the “squashing” of the 2- D correlation function of the C4 cluster sample seen in Figure 5 using the formalism presented herein. We do however caution the reader that we expect the limited size of the DR3 sample to leads to large statistical er- rors, due to a significant shot–noise contribution because of their low number density. However, future cluster and galaxy samples (e.g., LRGs) should provide stronger con- straints and provide a more robust test of these high bulk flow measurements in the literature.\n\nIn Figure 5, we provide the best fit parameters b and v$_{p}$ for the C4 correlation function presented in Figure 3 and there is as expected a clear anti-correlation be- tween these two parameters because the anisotropic am- plitude is generated by cross-correlations in the density and peculiar velocity fields. The best fit value from Fig- ure 5 is v$_{p}$ = 270 +433 km/s (at the 1 σ level marginalised with other parameters including b ) and is consistent with v$_{p}$ = 0. We do not quote the negative bound of the error on v$_{p}$ as it is below zero and thus has no physical mean- ing. Instead, we quote the upper bound on v$_{p}$ and note that our result is consistent with zero. Our measurement of v$_{p}$ is close to the predicted value of 203 km/s for a WMAP5–normalised ΛCDM model.\n\nWe propose above that v$_{p}$ is a complementary param- eter for reporting such peculiar velocity measurements. The parameter g Θ , which is equivalent to fσ 8 , is not de- termined precisely without the prior information of A$_{S}$ . But when we report our measurement with v$_{p}$ , there is no uncertainty due to other cosmological parameters which are not determined accurately, as it is equivalent to g ∗ Θ determined statistically from redshift space distortion. The observed value v$_{p}$ at a given redshift is not only in- dependent of bias but also independent of normalisation.\n\n$$Δ C$_{ij}$ = √ 2 N$_{jk}$ (14)$$\n\n$$C$_{ij}$ = U † $_{ik}$D$_{kl}$ V$_{lj}$, (15)$$\n\nand therefore, if N$_{jk}$ is small, or there are degeneracies within C$_{ij}$ , the inversion will be affected. This problem can be eliminated by performing a Single Value Decom- position (SVD) of the matrix,\n\nBefore we invert C$_{ij}$ in Eqn. 12, we note that the values of C$_{ij}$ are estimated to limited resolution,\n\ndoing the SVD, we select the dominant modes to con- tribute to the χ 2 by requiring that λ 2 > √ 2 /N$_{jk}$ . In Figure 4, we rank the eigenvalues ( λ$_{i}$ ) for the in- creasing eigenmodes and see a “kink” in the distribu- tion which we interpret as indicating a transition in the signal–to–noise of the eigenmodes, i.e., only the first ten modes contain most of the signal, while higher-ordered modes are dominated by noise. We therefore remove eigenmodes beyond this kink (with λ$_{i}$ < 0 . 01) where the eigenvalues start to flatten out.\n\nwhere U and V are orthogonal matrices that span the range and the null space of C$_{ij}$ and D$_{kl}$ = λ $^{2}$δ$_{kl}$ , a diag- onal matrix with singular values along the diagonal. In doing the SVD, we select the dominant modes to con- 2 2 √\n\nWe convert v$_{p}$ measurement into g Θ using A$_{s}$ from WMAP5 ( g Θ : coherent growth factor of peculiar veloc- ity, and it is equivalent to fσ 8 in other parameteriza- tions). With the evolution of g Θ known, dynamics of per- turbations are reconstructed to provide the history of Ψ through the Euler equation. In most theoretical models, the time variation of v$_{p}$ is minimal at these low redshifts discussed here for the C4 sample ( z ≃ 0 . 1), which allows us to ignore the time-derivative part in Eq. 9. Therefore, it is straightforward to transform the coherent evolution of Θ into the coherent evolution of Ψ. If we assume no anisotropic stress, then it is easy to convert to the coher- ent evolution of Φ, g Φ .\n\nWe are able to determine matter density fluctuations through the Poisson equation. We calculate the coher- ent growth of δ$_{m}$ , g$_{δ}$ = 0 . 7, which is related to g Φ as\n\nAs discussed in the Introduction, there is recent evi- dence for excessive bulk flow motions compared to the WMAP5-normalised ΛCDM model [18] and therefore, it is important to confirm these results as it may indicate\n\n## B. Reconstruction of matter density field from v p\n\n## A. Statistical determination of large scale flow" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.44472103235903737, + "doc_id": "8bf39035cb9708d9ffcf4744600e79bf90e535b83a0c417621f208c860f6c196", + "edit_distance": 0.5695461200585652, + "f1_score": 0.9085714285714286, + "meteor": 0.8167003435037381, + "precision": 0.9352941176470588, + "pred_md": "α\n\nFIG. 1: Quasienergy spectrum of the ratchet system for timesymmetric driving ( K = 2 4, . ω = 1, β = 0). The majority of the quasienergies show little dependence on the spatial asymmetry α , but the narrow avoided crossings (with a gap of ∆ /epsilon1 /similarequal 0 0014) . at α = ± 0 32 . (highlighted by red circles) give rise to long-lived transient currents, with a duration much longer than typical experimental observation times, even though the temporal symmetry of the driving is not broken.\n\nFIG. 2: Decay of the continuously averaged current 〈 I ( ) t 〉 for the strongly driven ratchet system, K = 2 4, . ω = 1, for different asymmetry parameters α and β . A typical experimental observation time, indicated by the vertical green line, is taken from the recent work of the Bonn group [4]. For β = 0 2 (black solid . line) time-symmetry of the driving is explicitly broken and 〈 I ( ) t 〉 approaches a non-zero asymptotic value. When β = 0, however, the time-symmetry of the driving is not broken and asymptotically the ratchet current must decay to zero. For α = 0 32 (red dashed line) the aver-. age current decays extremely slowly, due to a narrow avoided crossing in the quasienergy spectrum (see Fig. 1). We also plot the stroboscopically averaged value of the current (green dot-dashed line) for these driving parameters, which asymptotically approaches a constant value. For other values of α (blue dash-dot-dot line) the current decays more rapidly, but nonetheless remains significant over timescales much longer than those used in experiment.\n\nFIG. 1: Quasienergy spectrum of the ratchet system for timesymmetric driving ( K = 2 4, . ω = 1, β = 0). The majority of the quasienergies show little dependence on the spatial asymmetry α , but the narrow avoided crossings (with a gap of ∆ /epsilon1 /similarequal 0 0014) . at α = ± 0 32 . (highlighted by red circles) give rise to long-lived transient currents, with a duration much longer than typical experimental observation times, even though the temporal symmetry of the driving is not broken.FIG. 2: Decay of the continuously averaged current 〈 I ( ) t 〉 for the strongly driven ratchet system, K = 2 4, . ω = 1, for different asymmetry parameters α and β . A typical experimental observation time, indicated by the vertical green line, is taken from the recent work of the Bonn group [4]. For β = 0 2 (black solid . line) time-symmetry of the driving is explicitly broken and 〈 I ( ) t 〉 approaches a non-zero asymptotic value. When β = 0, however, the time-symmetry of the driving is not broken and asymptotically the ratchet current must decay to zero. For α = 0 32 (red dashed line) the aver-. age current decays extremely slowly, due to a narrow avoided crossing in the quasienergy spectrum (see Fig. 1). We also plot the stroboscopically averaged value of the current (green dot-dashed line) for these driving parameters, which asymptotically approaches a constant value. For other values of α (blue dash-dot-dot line) the current decays more rapidly, but nonetheless remains significant over timescales much longer than those used in experiment.\n\n2\n\n- [4] T. Salger, et al. , Science 326 , 1241 (2009).\n- [5] D H. Dunlap and V.M. Kenkre, Phys. Rev. B 34 , 3625 (1986).", + "recall": 0.8833333333333333, + "true_md": "2\n\n- [4] T. Salger, et al. , Science 326 , 1241 (2009).\n\n- [5] D H. Dunlap and V.M. Kenkre, Phys. Rev. B 34 , 3625 (1986).\n\nFIG. 1: Quasienergy spectrum of the ratchet system for time- symmetric driving ( K = 2 . 4, ω = 1, β = 0). The major- ity of the quasienergies show little dependence on the spa- tial asymmetry α , but the narrow avoided crossings (with a gap of Δ ϵ ≃ 0 . 0014) at α = ± 0 . 32 (highlighted by red circles) give rise to long-lived transient currents, with a dura- tion much longer than typical experimental observation times, even though the temporal symmetry of the driving is not bro- k en.\n\nFIG. 2: Decay of the continuously averaged current 〈 I ( t ) 〉 for the strongly driven ratchet system, K = 2 . 4, ω = 1, for different asymmetry parameters α and β . A typical experi- mental observation time, indicated by the vertical green line, is taken from the recent work of the Bonn group [4]. For β = 0 . 2 (black solid line) time-symmetry of the driving is explicitly broken and 〈 I ( t ) 〉 approaches a non-zero asymp- totic value. When β = 0, however, the time-symmetry of the driving is not broken and asymptotically the ratchet current must decay to zero. For α = 0 . 32 (red dashed line) the aver- age current decays extremely slowly, due to a narrow avoided crossing in the quasienergy spectrum (see Fig. 1). We also plot the stroboscopically averaged value of the current (green dot-dashed line) for these driving parameters, which asymp- totically approaches a constant value. For other values of α (blue dash-dot-dot line) the current decays more rapidly, but nonetheless remains significant over timescales much longer than those used in experiment." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6372152741138243, + "doc_id": "82c4cce1a6f86a1a201eb123cf834c83f3b96278214aaa53616758e11a9b287b", + "edit_distance": 0.8396778916544656, + "f1_score": 0.886255924170616, + "meteor": 0.5000254814205758, + "precision": 0.9280397022332506, + "pred_md": "∆ n ≈ √ N/ 2 width of the preparation, which is effectively like adding ( N/ 2) under the square root of Eq.(61), then we get Eq.(59).\n\nAs implied by the Wigner-Weyl picture one can get from P( ϕ ) the long time average S x through the integral\n\n\n\nThe calculation is straightforward leading to\n\n\n\n\n\nThese expressions agree with the numerics of Fig. 8, and confirm the predicted scaling with u/N .\n\n## VIII. DYNAMICS (III) - LONG TIME FLUCTUATIONS\n\nTo complete our phase-space characterization of the Bloch vector dynamics, we need to address the long-time fluctuations f ( ) from the average value t S x . As demonstrated in Fig. 4, the evaluation of S x could be done to excellent accuracy based on the semiclassical propagation of phase-space distributions according to purely classical equations of motion. This corresponds to the truncated Wigner approach of quantum optics [28, 31, 34, 36], retaining only the leading Liouville term in the equation of motion for the Wigner distribution. Obviously one can not guarantee that the remaining Moyal-bracket terms, which are initially O (1 /N ), will remain small throughout the evolution. This is the source of the fluctuations observed in Fig. 4. While their characterization goes beyond the lowest-order truncated Wigner semiclassics, we still can estimate them based on the phase-space LDOS expansion, as described below.\n\nThe two-site BHH has essentially one degree of freedom since both the energy and the number of the bosons is conserved. Therefore, away from the separatrix, level spacing is determined by the classical frequency ω E ( ) with small h dependent corrections. This should be contrasted with higher dimensions d > 1, for which the level spacing ∝ h d -1 is highly non-classical. For d = 1, the only region where h determines the level spacing ∝ | log( h ) | -1 is in the vicinity of the separatrix as implied by Eq. (30).\n\nThe Heisenberg time is defined as the inverse of the mean spacing of the participating levels. For a d = 1 system and away from the separatrix, the Heisenberg time is merely the period of classical oscillations. Thus in the case of a Zero preparation we have ω osc = ω J (the observed frequency is doubled due to Mirror symmetry). Close to the separatrix, ω osc becomes h dependent as in Eqs.(42-43). This prediction is confirmed by the numerics (see Fig. 7), including the non-symmetry related factor 2 that distinguishes the Edge from the Pi preparation.\n\n8\n\nAssume the system is prepared in some state ψ , e.g. a Gaussian-like SCS. We define M as in Eq. (44), implying that ψ is roughly a superposition of M energy states. If the energy levels are equally spaced the motion is strictly periodic. Otherwise it is quasi-periodic. Our aim is to trace the non-classical behavior in the RMS of the temporal fluctuations of an observable A , say of the FringeVisibility as defined in Eq. (56).\n\nBefore proceeding, it should be made clear that the RMS of the fluctuations of any observable A in a classical simulation (i.e. classical propagation of a single trajectory) is non-zero and characterized by its power spectrum ˜ C cl ( ω ). However, the RMS of the fluctuations in the semiclassical evolution (i.e. classical, leading-order propagation of a cloud of trajectories emulating the Wigner function) goes to zero due to the ergodic-like spreading of the wave-packet. In contrast, the RMS of the fluctuations in the quantum evolution (corresponding to the full propagation to all orders, of the Wigner distribution) depends on M . This dependence on M can be figured out by expanding the expectation value in the energy basis\n\n\n\nwhere ψ ν = 〈 E ν | ψ 〉 . The time average of this expectation value is 〈 A 〉 t = ∑ ν p ν A ν,ν where p ν = P( E ν ) of Eq. (38). This average has a well-defined h -independent classical limit. But if we first square, and then take the time average we get\n\n\n\nThe matrix elements can be evaluated semiclassically using the well know relation | A ν,µ | 2 = ˜ ( C cl E ν -E µ ) / (2 π/rho1 ), where /rho1 is the mean level spacing (see Eq.(6) of Ref.[51] and references therein). For presentation purpose it is convenient to visualize ˜ C cl ( ω ) as having a rectangularlike lineshape of width ω cl , such that its total area is ˜ (0) C × ω c . It is also convenient to define the dimensionless bandwidth b as the spectral width of ˜ C cl ( ω ) divided by the mean level spacing, namely b = /rho1ω c .\n\nUsing the semiclassical estimate for the matrix elements, we consider the outcome of Eq.(67), in two limiting cases. If the energy spread of the wave-packet is smaller than the spectral bandwidth, we can factor out ˜ C cl (0) / (2 π/rho1 ), and carry out the summation ∑ p ν p µ = 1, leading to\n\n\n\nFor integrable one-dimensional systems b ∼ 1 reflects that only nearby levels are coupled. A semiclassically large bandwidth b ∝ /planckover2pi1 1 -d is typical for chaotic systems, which is not the case under consideration. Therefore we turn to the other possibility, in which the energy spread of the wave-packet is large compared with the", + "recall": 0.8480725623582767, + "true_md": "8\n\nAssume the system is prepared in some state ψ , e.g. a Gaussian-like SCS. We define M as in Eq. (44), im- plying that ψ is roughly a superposition of M energy states. If the energy levels are equally spaced the motion is strictly periodic. Otherwise it is quasi-periodic. Our aim is to trace the non-classical behavior in the RMS of the temporal fluctuations of an observable A , say of the FringeVisibility as defined in Eq. (56).\n\nBefore proceeding, it should be made clear that the RMS of the fluctuations of any observable A in a classi- cal simulation (i.e. classical propagation of a single tra- jectory) is non-zero and characterized by its power spec- trum ˜ C$_{cl}$ ( ω ). However, the RMS of the fluctuations in the semiclassical evolution (i.e. classical, leading-order prop- agation of a cloud of trajectories emulating the Wigner function) goes to zero due to the ergodic-like spreading of the wave-packet. In contrast, the RMS of the fluctua- tions in the quantum evolution (corresponding to the full propagation to all orders, of the Wigner distribution) de- pends on M . This dependence on M can be figured out by expanding the expectation value in the energy basis\n\nΔ n ≈ √ N/ 2 width of the preparation, which is effec- tively like adding ( N/ 2) under the square root of Eq.(61), then we get Eq.(59).\n\nAs implied by the Wigner-Weyl picture one can get from P( ϕ ) the long time average S$_{x}$ through the integral\n\nThe calculation is straightforward leading to\n\n$$S$_{x}$ ≈ ∫ cos( ϕ ) P( ϕ ) dϕ . (62)$$\n\n$$〈 A 〉 t = ∑ ν,µ ψ ∗ $_{ν}$ψ$_{µ}$ A$_{νµ}$ e i ( E$_{ν}$ − E$_{µ}$ ) $^{t}$, (66)$$\n\nThese expressions agree with the numerics of Fig. 8, and confirm the predicted scaling with u/N .\n\n## VIII. DYNAMICS (III) - LONG TIME FLUCTUATIONS\n\nwhere ψ$_{ν}$ = 〈 E$_{ν}$ | ψ 〉 . The time average of this expectation value is 〈 A 〉 t = ∑ ν p$_{ν}$A$_{ν,ν}$ where p$_{ν}$ = P( E$_{ν}$ ) of Eq. (38). This average has a well-defined h -independent classical limit. But if we first square, and then take the time average we get\n\nTo complete our phase-space characterization of the Bloch vector dynamics, we need to address the long-time fluctuations f ( t ) from the average value S$_{x}$ . As demon- strated in Fig. 4, the evaluation of S$_{x}$ could be done to excellent accuracy based on the semiclassical propagation of phase-space distributions according to purely classical equations of motion. This corresponds to the truncated Wigner approach of quantum optics [28, 31, 34, 36], re- taining only the leading Liouville term in the equation of motion for the Wigner distribution. Obviously one can not guarantee that the remaining Moyal-bracket terms, which are initially O (1 /N ), will remain small through- out the evolution. This is the source of the fluctuations observed in Fig. 4. While their characterization goes be- yond the lowest-order truncated Wigner semiclassics, we still can estimate them based on the phase-space LDOS expansion, as described below.\n\nThe matrix elements can be evaluated semiclassically us- ing the well know relation | A$_{ν,µ}$ | 2 = ˜ C$_{cl}$ ( E$_{ν}$ − E$_{µ}$ ) / (2 πϱ ), where ϱ is the mean level spacing (see Eq.(6) of Ref.[51] and references therein). For presentation purpose it is convenient to visualize ˜ C$_{cl}$ ( ω ) as having a rectangular- like lineshape of width ω$_{cl}$ , such that its total area is ˜ C (0) × ω$_{c}$ . It is also convenient to define the dimension- less bandwidth b as the spectral width of ˜ C cl ( ω ) divided by the mean level spacing, namely b = ϱω$_{c}$ .\n\nThe two-site BHH has essentially one degree of free- dom since both the energy and the number of the bosons is conserved. Therefore, away from the separatrix, level spacing is determined by the classical frequency ω ( E ) with small h dependent corrections. This should be contrasted with higher dimensions d > 1, for which the level spacing ∝ h d − 1 is highly non-classical. For d = 1, the only region where h determines the level spacing ∝ | log( h ) | − 1 is in the vicinity of the separatrix as im- plied by Eq. (30).\n\nUsing the semiclassical estimate for the matrix ele- ments, we consider the outcome of Eq.(67), in two lim- iting cases. If the energy spread of the wave-packet is smaller than the spectral bandwidth, we can factor out ˜ C$_{cl}$ (0) / (2 πϱ ), and carry out the summation ∑ p$_{ν}$p$_{µ}$ = 1, leading to\n\n$$〈 A 〉 2 t = ∑ ν,µ p$_{ν}$p$_{µ}$ | A$_{ν,µ}$ | 2 . (67)$$\n\n$$RMS [ 〈 A 〉 $_{t}$] = [ 1 b ∫ ˜ C cl ( ω ) dω ] 1 / 2 . (68)$$\n\nFor integrable one-dimensional systems b ∼ 1 reflects that only nearby levels are coupled. A semiclassically large bandwidth b ∝ ℏ 1 − d is typical for chaotic systems, which is not the case under consideration. Therefore we turn to the other possibility, in which the energy spread of the wave-packet is large compared with the\n\nThe Heisenberg time is defined as the inverse of the mean spacing of the participating levels. For a d = 1 sys- tem and away from the separatrix, the Heisenberg time is merely the period of classical oscillations. Thus in the case of a Zero preparation we have ω$_{osc}$ = ω$_{J}$ (the ob- served frequency is doubled due to Mirror symmetry). Close to the separatrix, ω$_{osc}$ becomes h dependent as in Eqs.(42-43). This prediction is confirmed by the numer- ics (see Fig. 7), including the non-symmetry related fac- tor 2 that distinguishes the Edge from the Pi preparation." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.2158733825217853, + "doc_id": "c10636db4f55150c38592d38c10048a4defe3d69268de6abd3ec765e83776938", + "edit_distance": 0.8138820638820639, + "f1_score": 0.8675496688741723, + "meteor": 0.3380718393508749, + "precision": 0.9290780141843972, + "pred_md": "an energy of interband transitions, which is roughly 2 eV . This would be consistent with Refs. 8,9.\n\nWe begin with formulating our calculational basis in the next section. Then we take up the four cases and consider in each case the extent to which the Kubo sum is satisfied up to the order of bandwidth and the functional form and the sign of ∆ W ω ( c ). The last section presents our conclusions.\n\n## II. OPTICAL INTEGRAL IN NORMAL AND SUPERCONDUCTING STATES\n\nThe generic formalism of the computation of the optical conductivity and the optical integral has been discussed several times in the literature 21-23,26,29 and we\n\n4\n\njust list the formulas that we used in our computations. The conductivity σ (Ω) and the optical integral W ω ( c ) are given by (see for example Ref. 35).\n\n\n\n\n\nwhere ' X ' ' and ' X '' ' stand for real and imaginary parts of X . We will restrict with T = 0. The polarization operator Π(Ω) is (see Ref. 36)\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nwhere ∫ ' denotes the principal value of the integral, ∑ /vector k is understood to be 1 N ∑ /vector k ,( N is the number of lattice sites), n F ( x ) is the Fermi function which is a step function at zero temperature, G and F are the normal and anomalous Greens functions. given by 37\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nwhere Z k,ω = 1 -Σ( k,ω ) ω , and ∆ k,ω , is the SC gap. Following earlier works 31,33 , we assume that the fermionic self-energy Σ( k, ω ) predominantly depends on frequency and approximate Σ( k, ω ) ≈ Σ( ω ) and also neglect the frequency dependence of the gap, i.e., approximate ∆ k,ω by a d -wave ∆ . The lattice dispersion k ε /vector k is taken from Ref. 38. To calculate W K , one has to evaluate the Kubo term in Eq.3 wherein the distribution function n /vector k , is calculated from\n\n\n\nThe 2 is due to the trace over spin indices. We show the distribution functions in the NS and SCS under different circumstances in Fig 2.\n\nThe /vector k -summation is done over first Brillouin zone for a 2-D lattice with a 62x62 grid. The frequency integrals are done analytically wherever possible, otherwise performed using Simpson's rule for all regular parts. Contributions from the poles are computed separately using Cauchy's theorem. For comparison, in all four cases we also calculated FGT sum rule by replacing ∫ d k 2 = d Ω k d/epsilon1 k ν /epsilon1 k , Ω k and keeping ν constant. We remind that the FGT is the result when one assumes that the integral in W ω ( c ) predominantly comes from a narrow region around the Fermi surface.\n\nWe will first use Eq 3 and compute W K in NS and SCS. This will tell us about the magnitude of ∆ W ω ( c = ∞ ). We next compute the conductivity σ ω ( ) using the equations listed above, find W ω ( c ) and ∆ W ω ( c ) and compare ∆ ( f ω c ) and ∆ W K .\n\nFor simplicity and also for comparisons with earlier studies, for BCSI, EB, and MFLI models we assumed that the gap is just a constant along the FS. For CB model, we used a d -wave gap and included into consideration the fact that, if a CB is a spin fluctuation, its propagator develops a resonance when the pairing gap is d -wave.", + "recall": 0.8136645962732919, + "true_md": "4\n\nan energy of interband transitions, which is roughly 2 eV . This would be consistent with Refs. 8,9.\n\nWe begin with formulating our calculational basis in the next section. Then we take up the four cases and consider in each case the extent to which the Kubo sum is satisfied up to the order of bandwidth and the functional form and the sign of Δ W ( ω$_{c}$ ). The last section presents our conclusions.\n\njust list the formulas that we used in our computations. The conductivity σ (Ω) and the optical integral W ( ω$_{c}$ ) are given by (see for example Ref. 35).\n\nThe generic formalism of the computation of the op- tical conductivity and the optical integral has been dis- cussed several times in the literature 21–23,26,29 and we\n\nwhere ‘ X ′ ’ and ‘ X ′′ ’ stand for real and imaginary parts of X . We will restrict with T = 0. The polarization operator Π(Ω) is (see Ref. 36)\n\nwhere ∫ ′ denotes the principal value of the integral, ∑ ⃗ k is understood to be 1 N ∑ ⃗ $_{k}$,( N is the number of lat- tice sites), n$_{F}$ ( x ) is the Fermi function which is a step function at zero temperature, G and F are the normal and anomalous Greens functions. given by 37\n\nThe 2 is due to the trace over spin indices. We show the distribution functions in the NS and SCS under different circumstances in Fig 2.\n\nThe ⃗ k -summation is done over first Brillouin zone for a 2-D lattice with a 62x62 grid. The frequency integrals are done analytically wherever possible, otherwise performed using Simpson’s rule for all regular parts. Contributions from the poles are computed separately using Cauchy’s theorem. For comparison, in all four cases we also calcu- lated FGT sum rule by replacing ∫ d $^{2}$k = d Ω$_{k}$ dϵ$_{k}$ν$_{ϵ}$$\\_{k}$$_{,}$$\\_{Ω}$$_{k}$ and keeping ν constant. We remind that the FGT is the result when one assumes that the integral in W ( ω$_{c}$ ) predominantly comes from a narrow region around the Fermi surface.\n\nWe will first use Eq 3 and compute W$_{K}$ in NS and SCS. This will tell us about the magnitude of Δ W ( ω$_{c}$ = ∞ ). We next compute the conductivity σ ( ω ) using the equa- tions listed above, find W ( ω$_{c}$ ) and Δ W ( ω$_{c}$ ) and compare Δ f ( ω$_{c}$ ) and Δ W$_{K}$ .\n\nFor simplicity and also for comparisons with earlier studies, for BCSI, EB, and MFLI models we assumed that the gap is just a constant along the FS. For CB model, we used a d − wave gap and included into consid- eration the fact that, if a CB is a spin fluctuation, its propagator develops a resonance when the pairing gap is d − wave.\n\nwhere Z$_{k,ω}$ = 1 − Σ( k,ω ) ω , and Δ$_{k,ω}$, is the SC gap. Fol- lowing earlier works $^{31,33}$, we assume that the fermionic self-energy Σ( k, ω ) predominantly depends on frequency and approximate Σ( k, ω ) ≈ Σ( ω ) and also neglect the frequency dependence of the gap, i.e., approximate Δ$_{k,ω}$ by a d − wave Δ$_{k}$. The lattice dispersion ε$_{⃗}$ k is taken from Ref. 38. To calculate W$_{K}$ , one has to evaluate the Kubo term in Eq.3 wherein the distribution function n$_{⃗}$ $_{k}$, is cal- culated from\n\n$$For a NS, G ( ω, ⃗ k ) = 1 ω − Σ( k, ω ) − ε$_{⃗}$ k + iδ (9a)$$\n\n$$For a SCS, G ( ω, ⃗ k ) = Z$_{k,ω}$ω + ε$_{⃗}$ k Z 2 $_{k,ω}$( ω 2 − Δ 2 $_{k,ω}$) − ε 2 ⃗ k + iδsgn ( ω ) (9b)$$\n\n$$F ( ω, ⃗ k ) = Z$_{k,ω}$ Δ$_{k,ω}$ Z 2 $_{k,ω}$( ω 2 − Δ 2 $_{k,ω}$) − ε 2 ⃗ k + iδsgn ( ω ) (9c)$$\n\n$$n ( ε$_{⃗}$ $_{k}$) = − 2 ∫ 0 −∞ dω 2 π $_{G}$′′$_{(}$$_{ω,}$ ⃗ k ) (10)$$\n\n$$Π( i Ω) = T ∑ ω ∑ ⃗ k ( ∇$_{⃗}$ $_{k}$ε$_{⃗}$ $_{k}$) 2 ( G ( iω, ⃗ k ) G ( iω + i Ω , ⃗ k ) + F ( iω, ⃗ k ) F ( iω + i Ω , ⃗ k ) (8a) 1 ∫ 0$$\n\n$$∑ ( $_{Π}$′$_{(Ω) =}$ 1 π 2 ∑ ⃗ k ( ∇$_{⃗}$ $_{k}$ε$_{⃗}$ $_{k}$) 2 ∫ ′ ∫ ′ dx dy ( $_{G}$′′$_{(}$$_{x,}$ ⃗ k ) $_{G}$′′$_{(}$$_{y,}$ ⃗ k ) + $_{F}$′′$_{(}$$_{x,}$ ⃗ k ) $_{F}$′′$_{(}$$_{y,}$ ⃗ k ) n$_{F}$ ( y ) − n$_{F}$ ( x ) y − x (8c)$$\n\n$$∑ ∑ ( $_{Π}$′′$_{(Ω) =}$ − 1 π ∑ ⃗ k ( ∇$_{⃗}$ $_{k}$ε$_{⃗}$ $_{k}$) 2 ∫ 0 − Ω dω ( $_{G}$′′$_{(}$$_{ω,}$ ⃗ k ) $_{G}$′′$_{(}$$_{ω}$ + Ω , ⃗ k ) + $_{F}$′′$_{(}$$_{ω,}$ ⃗ k ) $_{F}$′′$_{(}$$_{ω}$ + Ω , ⃗ k ) (8b) 1 ∫ ′ ∫ ′ n$_{F}$ ( y ) − n$_{F}$ ( x )$$\n\n$$σ ′ (Ω) = Im [ − Π(Ω) Ω + iδ ] = − Π ′′ (Ω) Ω + πδ (Ω) Π ′ (Ω) (7a)$$\n\n$$W ( ω$_{c}$ ) = ∫ ω$_{c}$ 0 σ ′ (Ω) d Ω = − ∫ ω$_{c}$ 0+ Π ′′ (Ω) Ω d Ω + π 2 Π ′ (0) (7b)$$\n\n## II. OPTICAL INTEGRAL IN NORMAL AND SUPERCONDUCTING STATES" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.49684103622698733, + "doc_id": "5ca4ee251b5c521fb249d1ae4bb74259fa65d40b6c30b122edfd71be24e09284", + "edit_distance": 0.5948275862068966, + "f1_score": 0.8759124087591241, + "meteor": 0.5661952311111315, + "precision": 0.933852140077821, + "pred_md": "\n\nwhere ˜ is ζ the rapidity in the ( T, R, θ, ϕ ) local inertial frame. However constraining the two free variables ˜ N -1 and ˜ N ϕ by the normalization equation u u ν ν = -1 yields\n\n\n\nThe four velocity thus emerges out of the normalization condition. Now Eq.(45) clearly will be singular on both horizons since they are defined as the solution to ∆ = 0. In this way we find that even a freely falling observer can not extract the EPR correlation at and beyond the event horizon of a Kerr-Newman black hole. Thus no such observer can exist in this scenario which we attribute this to the strength of the frame dragging effects at the outer horizon since observers may be defined in the Schwarzschild black hole [1]. The result is a little surprising however it follows from the intrinsic nature of the Kerr-Newman black hole that no observer of this kind may be defined globally which is what would be required to make measurements on a bi-local property. Furthermore following the same method as with the observer at infinity, the local Wigner rotation also turns out not to be finite on and beyond the out horizon which is a clear consequence of the absence of observability and not the lost of the EPR correlation. Hence it is the inability of an observer, so defined, to make measurements that restrict the regions where the EPR correlation can be extracted successfully.\n\n## V. MAXIMUM VIOLATION OF BELL'S INEQUALITY\n\nAs in [1] we examined circularly moving particles in a local inertial frame. Similarly we measure the spin of one particle in the (1 , 0 0)-, direction (component Q) or in the (0 , 1 0)-, direction (component R) and the other particle in the ( -1 , -1 0)-direction (component S) or , (1 , -1 0)-direction (components T) in the local , inertial frames φ = Φ and φ = -Φ respectively.\n\n8\n\n\n\nIn the Kerr-Newman geometry a decrease in the maximal violation of Bell's inequality is observed, in particular as\n\n\n\nThis however still includes the trivial rotation Eq.(21) which could be causing the decrease in maximal violation of Bell's inequality. Rotating the components by ∓ Φ. The new spin components then become, (cos (Φ) , 0 , -sin (Φ))-direction (component Q ' ) or (0 , 1 0)-direction (component , R ' ) for one particle and 1 √ 2 ( -cos (Φ) , -1 , -sin (Φ))-direction (component S ' ) or 1 √ 2 (cos (Φ) , -1 sin (Φ))-, direction (component T ' ) for the other one. The violation of Bell's inequality still reduces from maximal as,\n\n\n\nThis is due to the gravitational field and accelerations involved. Taking in to account the general relativistic effect on spin measurements are thus take in the directions (cos (Θ) , 0 , -sin (Θ))direction or (0 1 0)-direction , , for one particle and 1 √ 2 ( -cos (Θ) , -1 , -sin (Θ))-direction or 1 √ 2 (cos (Θ) , -1 sin (Θ)) for the other one in the , same respective local inertial frames. However as the radius where the experiment takes place reduces to the outer horizon, a small error can build up which still causes maximal entanglement to be lost. This corresponds to a requirement of infinite accuracy in making measurements as the observer approaches infinitely close to the horizon.\n\nConsidering next the freely falling observer Eq.(42), the angle of precession is observed to become infinite on and beyond the outer event horizon r + since the observer looses the ability to take such measurements. Thus on the equatorial plane the EPR correlation can not be extracted and so infers a region where information may be lost for such an observer making measurements locally.", + "recall": 0.8247422680412371, + "true_md": "8\n\n$$˜ u $^{T}$( x ) = ˜ N − $^{1}$cosh $^{(}$˜ ζ ) ˜ u $^{ϕ}$( x ) = ˜ N − 1 ˜ N $^{ϕ}$cosh $^{(}$˜ ζ $^{)}$+ sinh $^{(}$˜ ζ ) √ g$_{φφ}$ (43)$$\n\nwhere ˜ ζ is the rapidity in the ( T, R, θ, ϕ ) local inertial frame. However constraining the two free variables ˜ N − 1 and ˜ N ϕ by the normalization equation u $^{ν}$u$_{ν}$ = − 1 yields\n\nThe four velocity thus emerges out of the nor- malization condition. Now Eq.(45) clearly will be singular on both horizons since they are defined as the solution to Δ = 0. In this way we find that even a freely falling observer can not extract the EPR correlation at and beyond the event hori- zon of a Kerr-Newman black hole. Thus no such observer can exist in this scenario which we at- tribute this to the strength of the frame dragging effects at the outer horizon since observers may be defined in the Schwarzschild black hole [1]. The result is a little surprising however it follows from the intrinsic nature of the Kerr-Newman black hole that no observer of this kind may be defined globally which is what would be required to make measurements on a bi-local property. Furthermore following the same method as with the observer at infinity, the local Wigner rotation also turns out not to be finite on and beyond the out horizon which is a clear consequence of the absence of observability and not the lost of the EPR correlation. Hence it is the inability of an observer, so defined, to make measurements that restrict the regions where the EPR correlation can be extracted successfully.\n\nAs in [1] we examined circularly moving par- ticles in a local inertial frame. Similarly we measure the spin of one particle in the (1 , 0 , 0)- direction (component Q) or in the (0 , 1 , 0)- direction (component R) and the other parti- cle in the ( − 1 , − 1 , 0)-direction (component S) or (1 , − 1 , 0)-direction (components T) in the local inertial frames φ = Φ and φ = − Φ respectively.\n\nConsidering next the freely falling observer Eq.(42), the angle of precession is observed to become infinite on and beyond the outer event horizon r$_{+}$ since the observer looses the ability to take such measurements. Thus on the equatorial plane the EPR correlation can not be extracted and so infers a region where information may be lost for such an observer making measurements locally.\n\nThis is due to the gravitational field and accel- erations involved. Taking in to account the gen- eral relativistic effect on spin measurements are thus take in the directions (cos (Θ) , 0 , − sin (Θ))- direction or (0 , 1 , 0)-direction for one parti- cle and 1 √ 2 ( − cos (Θ) , − 1 , − sin (Θ))-direction or 1 √ 2 (cos (Θ) , − 1 , sin (Θ)) for the other one in the same respective local inertial frames. However as the radius where the experiment takes place reduces to the outer horizon, a small error can build up which still causes maximal entanglement to be lost. This corresponds to a requirement of infinite accuracy in making measurements as the observer approaches infinitely close to the hori- zon.\n\nThis however still includes the trivial ro- tation Eq.(21) which could be causing the decrease in maximal violation of Bell’s in- equality. Rotating the components by ∓ Φ. The new spin components then become, (cos (Φ) , 0 , − sin (Φ))-direction (component Q $^{′}$) or (0 , 1 , 0)-direction (component R $^{′}$) for one par- ticle and 1 √ 2 ( − cos (Φ) , − 1 , − sin (Φ))-direction (component S $^{′}$) or 1 √ 2 (cos (Φ) , − 1 , sin (Φ))- direction (component T $^{′}$) for the other one. The violation of Bell’s inequality still reduces from maximal as,\n\nIn the Kerr-Newman geometry a decrease in the maximal violation of Bell’s inequality is observed, in particular as\n\n$$˜ N = a $^{(}$Q 2 − 2 MR ) − 2 a $^{2}$MR + a $^{2}$Q2 − a $^{2}$R2 − R 4 (44)$$\n\n$$˜ N ϕ = ±$^{√}$ − 2 a $^{2}$RM + a $^{2}$Q2 − a $^{2}$R2 − R 4 R $^{√}$Δ ( R ) (45)$$\n\n$$〈 QS 〉 + 〈 RS 〉 + 〈 RT 〉−〈 QT 〉 = 2 √ 2 cos $^{2}$(Θ) (46)$$\n\n$$〈 Q $^{′}$S $^{′}$〉 + 〈 R $^{′}$S $^{′}$〉 + 〈 R $^{′}$T $^{′}$〉 − 〈 Q $^{′}$T $^{′}$〉 = 2 √ 2 cos $^{2}$(Δ) (47)$$\n\n## V. MAXIMUM VIOLATION OF BELL’S INEQUALITY" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.49197720435358855, + "doc_id": "e352a8002ca51c658652151c48df30e7fbe530925185a51e575efdae624ee380", + "edit_distance": 0.6692913385826772, + "f1_score": 0.9375951293759514, + "meteor": 0.5586985283033862, + "precision": 0.9716088328075709, + "pred_md": "the different terms to the prefactor of e ix in the r.h.s of Eq. (A10)\n\n\n\nThe sum of these terms vanishes only if\n\n\n\nand thus either\n\n\n\n8\n\n√ ε . One could look for a more general expansion:\n\n\n\nIn this case, the expansion of equation (A5) yields two power series: ∑ R ε k αk and ∑ W ε k αk +1 . For the two series to give terms that can balance each-other, one needs α +1 = kα for k ≥ 2 and thus\n\n\n\n+31Φ+19) in the expansion of equation (A5) The candidates for α are thus 1; 1 / 2; 1 / 3; . . . . Note that α ≤ 1 implies 2 α + 1 ≥ 3 α . We can therefore stop the expansion at 3 α and 2 α +1 to get the first three terms\n\nFinally, the first order in the amplitude equation yields\n\n\n\nwhere x 0 is a constant. Note that by construction | A | 2 > 0 and a non-zero solution only exists for Φ ∈ [1 08439 . , 1 59237]. . For these values of Φ, Eq. (A18) and (A19) work very well, as can be checked in figure 7. Outside this range the transition becomes subcritical and the standard approach does not work anymore. Alternative treatments have been proposed but are not as reliable (see ref [20] for more details). Interestingly, we see that the order of the transition and the amplitude of the perturbation depend on how non-linear terms in g w ( ) balance the linear growth term -2 ε∂ 2 x w in (A5). Since the former depends on the non-linear relation v ρ ( ), we do not expect equation (A18) to be generic, as opposed to the stability analysis which can be expressed solely in terms of D e ( ρ 0 ) and its derivative.\n\n## 2. What is the correct expansion?\n\nIn (A7), we expanded w in power series of √ ε , thus assuming that the amplitude is an analytic function of\n\n- [1] Shapiro J. A. (1995) The significance of bacterial colony patterns. BioEssays 17: 597-607.\n- [2] Harshey R. M. (2003) Bacterial motility on a surface: Many ways to a common goal. Ann. Rev. Microbiol. 57:249-273.\n- [3] Budrene E. O., Berg H. C. (1991) Complex patterns formed by motile cells of Escherichia-coli . Nature 349: 630-633.\n- [4] Budrene E. O., Berg H. C. (1995) Dynamics of formation of symmetrical patterns by chemotactic bacteria. Nature\n\nLet us first try α = 1. The order by order the expansion yields\n\n\n\n\n\nEquation (A22) yields U 0 = Ae ikx + A e ∗ -ikx but equation (A23) cannot be solved since there is a non-zero multiple of e ikx on the r.h.s. ( -2 ∂ U 2 x 0 ) which cannot result from the application of L 2 to any function. Thus α = 1 is not an option.\n\nFor α ≤ 1 / 3, then α + 1 > 1 ≥ 3 α . There is thus no contribution of -2 ε∂ 2 x w to the first three orders in the expansion of (A5). In particular, the two first order are still given by (A8) and (A9), whereas the third order is given by (A10) without the term linear in U 0 . This means that the contribution (A14) is not present and the prefactor of e ikx in the r.h.s. of (A10) only contains multiples of | A A | 2 . The resolvability condition (A17) is thus of the form A A | | 2 f (Φ) = 0 which implies | A | = 0. The only expansion which yields a result is thus for α = 1 2. /\n\n376:49-53.\n\n- [5] Woodward D.E. et al. (1995) Spatiotemporal patterns generated by Salmonella Typhimurium . Biophys. J. 68:2181-2189.\n- [6] Murray J.D., Mathematical Biology , Vol. 2, SpringerVerlag, New York (2003).\n- [7] Ben-Jacob E., Cohen, I., Levine H. (2000) Cooperative self-organization of microorganisms Adv. in Phys. 49 , 395-554.\n- [8] Kawasaki K. et al (1997) Modeling Spatio-Temporal", + "recall": 0.9058823529411765, + "true_md": "8\n\nthe different terms to the prefactor of e ix in the r.h.s of Eq. (A10)\n\n√ ε . One could look for a more general expansion:\n\n$$− 2 ∂ 2 $_{x}$U$_{0}$ yields 2 A (A14)$$\n\n$$( 3 − 2Φ Φ − 1 2 ∂$_{x}$ − 2 Φ ) U$_{0}$U$_{1}$ yields 2 A | A | 2 ( 3 − 2Φ Φ − 1 − 1 Φ$^{)}$ (A15) × ( 1 9 (4 3 − 2Φ Φ − 1 − 1 Φ ) − 2 Φ$^{)}$$$\n\n$$− 4 3 Φ − 2 Φ − 1 ∂ 2 $_{x}$U 3 0 yields 4 Φ − 2 Φ − 1 A | A | 2 (A16)$$\n\n$$w = U$_{0}$ε α + U$_{1}$ε 2 α + U$_{2}$ε 3 α (A20)$$\n\n$$α = 1 k − 1 (A21)$$\n\n$$A $^{(}$9Φ $^{2}$(Φ − 1) $^{2}$+2 | A | $^{2}$(34Φ$^{4}$− 56Φ $^{3}$− 24Φ $^{2}$+31Φ+19) ) = 0 (A17)$$\n\nIn this case, the expansion of equation (A5) yields two power series: $^{∑}$R$_{k}$ ε αk and $^{∑}$W$_{k}$ ε αk $^{+1}$. For the two se- ries to give terms that can balance each-other, one needs α + 1 = kα for k ≥ 2 and thus\n\nThe sum of these terms vanishes only if\n\nand thus either\n\n+ 31Φ + 19) The candidates for α are thus 1; 1 / 2; 1 / 3; . . . . Note that α ≤ 1 implies 2 α + 1 ≥ 3 α . We can therefore stop the expansion at 3 α and 2 α + 1 to get the first three terms in the expansion of equation (A5)\n\nLet us first try α = 1. The order by order the expan- sion yields\n\nFinally, the first order in the amplitude equation yields\n\n$$A = 0; or | A | 2 = 9Φ $^{2}$(1 − Φ) 2 2(34Φ 4 − 56Φ 3 − 24Φ 2 + 31Φ + 19) (A18) expansion at 3 in the expansion of equation (A5)$$\n\n$$w ( x ) = 2 | A | √ ε cos( x − x$_{0}$ ) (A19)$$\n\n$$L $^{2}$U$_{0}$ = 0 , O ( ε ) (A22)$$\n\n$$L $^{2}$U$_{1}$ = − U 2 0 Φ − 3 − 2Φ Φ − 1 ∂ 2 $_{x}$U 2 0 − 2 ∂ 2 $_{x}$U$_{0}$ , O (2 ε ) (A23)$$\n\nwhere x$_{0}$ is a constant. Note that by construction | A | 2 > 0 and a non-zero solution only exists for Φ ∈ [1 . 08439 , 1 . 59237]. For these values of Φ, Eq. (A18) and (A19) work very well, as can be checked in figure 7. Outside this range the transition becomes subcritical and the standard approach does not work anymore. Al- ternative treatments have been proposed but are not as reliable (see ref [20] for more details). Interestingly, we see that the order of the transition and the amplitude of the perturbation depend on how non-linear terms in g ( w ) balance the linear growth term − 2 ε∂ 2 $_{x}$w in (A5). Since the former depends on the non-linear relation v ( ρ ), we do not expect equation (A18) to be generic, as opposed to the stability analysis which can be expressed solely in terms of D$_{e}$ ( ρ$_{0}$ ) and its derivative.\n\nEquation (A22) yields U$_{0}$ = Ae $^{ikx}$+ A $^{∗}$e− ikx but equation (A23) cannot be solved since there is a non-zero multiple of e ikx on the r.h.s. ( − 2 ∂ 2 $_{x}$U$_{0}$ ) which cannot result from the application of L 2 to any function. Thus α = 1 is not an option.\n\nFor α ≤ 1 / 3, then α + 1 > 1 ≥ 3 α . There is thus no contribution of − 2 ε∂ 2 $_{x}$w to the first three orders in the expansion of (A5). In particular, the two first order are still given by (A8) and (A9), whereas the third order is given by (A10) without the term linear in U$_{0}$ . This means that the contribution (A14) is not present and the prefactor of e ikx in the r.h.s. of (A10) only contains multiples of | A | $^{2}$A . The resolvability condition (A17) is thus of the form A | A | 2 f (Φ) = 0 which implies | A | = 0. The only expansion which yields a result is thus for α = 1 / 2.\n\nIn (A7), we expanded w in power series of √ ε , thus assuming that the amplitude is an analytic function of\n\n## 2. What is the correct expansion?\n\n- [1] Shapiro J. A. (1995) The significance of bacterial colony patterns. BioEssays 17: 597-607.\n\n- [2] Harshey R. M. (2003) Bacterial motility on a surface: Many ways to a common goal. Ann. Rev. Microbiol. 57:249-273.\n\n- [3] Budrene E. O., Berg H. C. (1991) Complex patterns formed by motile cells of Escherichia-coli . Nature 349: 630-633.\n\n- [4] Budrene E. O., Berg H. C. (1995) Dynamics of formation of symmetrical patterns by chemotactic bacteria. Nature\n\n376:49-53.\n\n- [5] Woodward D.E. et al. (1995) Spatiotemporal patterns generated by Salmonella Typhimurium . Biophys. J. 68:2181-2189.\n\n- [6] Murray J.D., Mathematical Biology , Vol. 2, Springer- Verlag, New York (2003).\n\n- [7] Ben-Jacob E., Cohen, I., Levine H. (2000) Cooperative self-organization of microorganisms Adv. in Phys. 49 , 395-554.\n\n- [8] Kawasaki K. et al (1997) Modeling Spatio-Temporal" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5586203396100962, + "doc_id": "5b701176b48bc43842be054cc78d8831e1f9e71750d466673159659efcf37e30", + "edit_distance": 0.5346756152125279, + "f1_score": 0.9268292682926829, + "meteor": 0.7718767640417725, + "precision": 0.9432624113475178, + "pred_md": "FIG. 9: Excess entropy of GCM for a set of isotherms. (a) T = 0 04; 0 07 and 0 1; (b) -. . . T = 0 5; 1 0 and 2 0. . . .\n\nFIG. 9: Excess entropy of GCM for a set of isotherms. (a) T = 0 04; 0 07 and 0 1; (b) -. . . T = 0 5; 1 0 and 2 0. . . .\n\n/s101/s120\n\nparts connected by the self crossing loop. It means that the Rosenfeld formula is valid in some narrow regions, but not in the whole range of densities.\n\nIn order to see the reason for the occurrence of the self crossing loop we compare the qualitative behavior of the diffusion coefficient and excess entropy. For this reasons we measure the densities corresponding to the minimum and maximum of the diffusion ( ρ D in m and ρ D ax m correspondingly) and excess entropy ( ρ S min and ρ S max ) at the lowest temperature we study T = 0 2. The values we . obtain are: ρ D in m = 0 44, . ρ D ax m = 0 55, . ρ S min = 0 40 and . ρ D ax m = 0 535. . One can see that there is a mismatch in the location of the extremal points of these two quantities\n\n8\n\nFIG. 10: Reduced diffusion coefficient (formula (1)) of GCM for a set of eleven isotherms\n\nFIG. 10: Reduced diffusion coefficient (formula (1)) of GCM for a set of eleven isotherms\n\nFIG. 11: Diffusion coefficient for soft repulsive shoulder system with σ 1 = 1 35 along several isotherms. . The inset enlarges the isotherms T = 0 5 (squares) and . T = 0 25 (circles). .\n\nFIG. 11: Diffusion coefficient for soft repulsive shoulder system with σ 1 = 1 35 along several isotherms. . The inset enlarges the isotherms T = 0 5 (squares) and . T = 0 25 (circles). .\n\nand therefore there are some regions where the qualitative behavior of diffusion and excess entropy is opposite. Taking into account exponential dependence supposed in the Rosenfeld formula one can expect that even small discrepancies in the qualitative behavior can lead to large errors in the scaling relation.", + "recall": 0.910958904109589, + "true_md": "FIG. 10: Reduced diffusion coefficient (formula (1)) of GCM for a set of eleven isotherms\n\nFIG. 9: Excess entropy of GCM for a set of isotherms. (a) - T = 0 . 04; 0 . 07 and 0 . 1; (b) - T = 0 . 5; 1 . 0 and 2 . 0.\n\nFIG. 11: Diffusion coefficient for soft repulsive shoulder sys- tem with σ$_{1}$ = 1 . 35 along several isotherms. The inset en- larges the isotherms T = 0 . 5 (squares) and T = 0 . 25 (circles).\n\nparts connected by the self crossing loop. It means that the Rosenfeld formula is valid in some narrow regions, but not in the whole range of densities.\n\nIn order to see the reason for the occurrence of the self crossing loop we compare the qualitative behavior of the diffusion coefficient and excess entropy. For this reasons we measure the densities corresponding to the minimum and maximum of the diffusion ( ρ D min and ρ D max correspondingly) and excess entropy ( ρ S min and ρ S $_{max}$) at the lowest temperature we study T = 0 . 2. The values we obtain are: ρ D min = 0 . 44, ρ D max = 0 . 55, ρ S min = 0 . 40 and ρ D max = 0 . 535. One can see that there is a mismatch in the location of the extremal points of these two quantities\n\nand therefore there are some regions where the qualita- tive behavior of diffusion and excess entropy is opposite. Taking into account exponential dependence supposed in the Rosenfeld formula one can expect that even small dis- crepancies in the qualitative behavior can lead to large errors in the scaling relation.\n\n8" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.029767557132947823, + "doc_id": "420f68f9adbb5a20c258a7c88ead84323dc51ee38cc354aa82497fa226763712", + "edit_distance": 0.8890562248995983, + "f1_score": 0.7863636363636364, + "meteor": 0.17210879568326268, + "precision": 0.9105263157894737, + "pred_md": "12\n\nidentity, has ghost number zero, and vanishing Q f number,\n\n\n\nwith a , . . . , a 0 11 arbitrary parameters. Now we can unleash the constraints on the counterterm. Firstly, although the the ghost Ward identity (A21) is broken, we know that this is not so in the standard Yang-Mills case. Therefore, we can already set a 3 = 0 as this term is not allowed in the counterterm of the standard YangMills action, which is a special case of the action we are studying[47]. Secondly, due to the Landau gauge condition (3.) and the antighost equation (4.) we find,\n\n\n\nNext, the linearly broken constraints (5.) give the following relations\n\n\n\nThe R ij symmetry does not give any new information, while the integrated Ward identity relates the two previous strings of parameters:\n\n\n\nTaking all this information together, we obtain the following counterterm\n\n\n\n## 4. The renormalization factors\n\nAs a final step, we have to show that the counterterm (B3) can be reabsorbed by means of a multiplicative\n\nrenormalization of the fields and sources. If we try to absorb the counterterm into the original action, we easily find,\n\n\n\nand\n\n\n\nThe results (A39) are already known from the renormalization of the original Yang-Mills action in the Landau gauge. Further, we also obtain\n\n\n\nThis concludes the proof of the renormalizability of the action (A1) which is the physical limit of Σ ' GZ .\n\n## Appendix B: Renormalization of the Gribov-Zwanziger action, option 2\n\nWe can also write down an alternative proof of the renormalization of the Gribov-Zwanziger action. Looking at (20), we are tempted to treat gf akb A ϕ k µ bc ν and gf akb A ϕ k µ bc ν as the relevant composite operators. However, we shall see that these operators mix with ∂ µ ϕ ac ν and ∂ ϕ µ ac ν , respectively. A similar observation holds for gf akb A ω k µ bc ν and gf akb A ω k µ bc ν . Such conclusion is evidently not unexpected, as we have learnt already from Appendix A that e.g.\n\nD ab µ ϕ bc ν = ∂ µ ϕ ab ν + gf akb A ϕ k µ bc ν is multiplicatively renormalizable.", + "recall": 0.692, + "true_md": "12\n\nrenormalization of the fields and sources. If we try to ab- sorb the counterterm into the original action, we easily find,\n\nidentity, has ghost number zero, and vanishing Q$_{f}$ num- ber,\n\nwith a$_{0}$, . . . , a$_{11}$ arbitrary parameters. Now we can un- leash the constraints on the counterterm. Firstly, al- though the the ghost Ward identity (A21) is broken, we know that this is not so in the standard Yang-Mills case. Therefore, we can already set a$_{3}$ = 0 as this term is not allowed in the counterterm of the standard Yang- Mills action, which is a special case of the action we are studying[47]. Secondly, due to the Landau gauge condi- tion (3.) and the antighost equation (4.) we find,\n\nThe results (A39) are already known from the renormal- ization of the original Yang-Mills action in the Landau gauge. Further, we also obtain\n\nNext, the linearly broken constraints (5.) give the fol- lowing relations\n\nThe R$_{ij}$ symmetry does not give any new information, while the integrated Ward identity relates the two previ- ous strings of parameters:\n\nTaking all this information together, we obtain the fol- lowing counterterm\n\nThis concludes the proof of the renormalizability of the action (A1) which is the physical limit of Σ ′ $_{GZ}$.\n\nWe can also write down an alternative proof of the renormalization of the Gribov-Zwanziger action. Look- ing at (20), we are tempted to treat gf$_{akb}$A k $_{µ}$ϕ bc ν and gf$_{akb}$A k $_{µ}$ϕ bc ν as the relevant composite operators. How- ever, we shall see that these operators mix with ∂$_{µ}$ϕ ac ν and ∂$_{µ}$ϕ ac ν , respectively. A similar observation holds for gf$_{akb}$A k $_{µ}$ω bc ν and gf$_{akb}$A k $_{µ}$ω bc ν . Such conclusion is ev- idently not unexpected, as we have learnt already from Appendix A that e.g. ab bc ab k bc\n\nAppendix A that e.g. D ab µ ϕ bc ν = ∂$_{µ}$ϕ ab ν + gf$_{akb}$A k $_{µ}$ϕ bc ν is multiplicatively renor- malizable.\n\nAs a final step, we have to show that the countert- erm (B3) can be reabsorbed by means of a multiplicative\n\n## Appendix B: Renormalization of the Gribov-Zwanziger action, option 2\n\n## 4. The renormalization factors\n\n$$a$_{1}$ = − a$_{8}$ = − a$_{9}$ = a$_{10}$ = a$_{11}$ = − b$_{3}$ = b$_{4}$ ≡ a$_{3}$ = a$_{4}$ = − a$_{5}$ = a$_{6}$ . (A38)$$\n\n$$Σ c = a$_{0}$S$_{Y M}$ + a$_{1}$ ∫ d $^{d}$x ( A a µ δS$_{Y M}$ δA a µ + ∂$_{µ}$c $^{a}$∂$_{µ}$ c a + K a $_{µ}$∂$_{µ}$ c a + M ai µ ∂$_{µ}$ϕ a i − U ai µ ∂$_{µ}$ω a i + N ai µ ∂$_{µ}$ω a i + V ai µ ∂$_{µ}$ϕ a i + ∂$_{µ}$ϕ a $_{i}$∂$_{µ}$ ϕ a i + ∂$_{µ}$ω a i ∂$_{µ}$ω a i + V ai µ M ai µ − U ai µ N ai µ − gf$_{abc}$U ai µ ϕ b $_{i}$∂$_{µ}$ c c − gf$_{abc}$V ai µ ω b $_{i}$∂$_{µ}$ c c − gf$_{abc}$∂$_{µ}$ω a i ϕ b $_{i}$∂$_{µ}$ c c − gf$_{abc}$R ai µ ∂$_{µ}$c $^{b}$ωc i + gf$_{abc}$T ai µ ∂$_{µ}$c $^{b}$ϕc i ) .$$\n\n$$Z 1 / 2 ϕ = Z 1 / 2 ϕ = Z − 1 / 2 g Z − 1 / 4 A = 1 − h a$_{1}$ 2 , Z 1 / 2 ω = Z − 1 / 2 A , Z 1 / 2 ω = Z − 1 g , Z$_{M}$ = 1 − a$_{1}$ 2 = Z − 1 / 2 g Z − 1 / 4 A , Z$_{N}$ = Z − 1 / 2 A , Z$_{U}$ = 1 + h a$_{0}$ 2 = Z − 1 g , Z$_{V}$ = 1 − h a$_{1}$ 2 = Z − 1 / 2 g Z − 1 / 4 A , Z$_{T}$ = 1 + h a$_{0}$ 2 = Z − 1 g , Z$_{R}$ = 1 − h a$_{1}$ 2 = Z − 1 / 2 g Z − 1 / 4 A . (A41)$$\n\n$$a$_{1}$ = a$_{2}$ . (A36)$$\n\n$$a$_{1}$ = − a$_{8}$ = − a$_{9}$ = a$_{10}$ = a$_{11}$ = − b$_{3}$ = b$_{4}$ , a$_{4}$ = a$_{5}$ = − a$_{6}$ = a$_{7}$ , b$_{1}$ = b$_{2}$ = b$_{5}$ = b$_{6}$ = 0 . (A37)$$\n\n$$Z$_{g}$ = 1 − h a$_{0}$ 2 , Z 1 / 2 A = 1 + h ( a$_{0}$ 2 + a$_{1}$ ) , (A39)$$\n\n$$Z 1 / 2 c = Z 1 / 2 c = Z − 1 / 4 A Z − 1 / 2 g = 1 − h a$_{1}$ 2 , Z$_{b}$ = Z − 1 A , Z$_{K}$ = Z 1 / 2 c , Z$_{L}$ = Z 1 / 2 A . (A40)$$\n\nand\n\n$$Σ c GZ = a$_{0}$S$_{YM}$ + B ∫ d $^{d}$x {[ a$_{1}$K a $_{µ}$A a $_{µ}$+ a$_{2}$∂$_{µ}$c $^{a}$Aa $_{µ}$+ a$_{3}$ L $^{a}$ca + a$_{4}$U ai µ ∂$_{µ}$ϕ a i + a$_{5}$ V ai µ ∂$_{µ}$ω a i + a$_{6}$ ω a $_{i}$∂ $^{2}$ϕ a i + a$_{7}$ U ai µ V ai µ + a$_{8}$ gf $^{abc}$U ai µ ϕ b $_{i}$A c µ + a$_{9}$ gf $^{abc}$V ai µ ω b $_{i}$A c µ + a$_{10}$ gf $^{abc}$ωa $_{i}$A c µ ∂$_{µ}$ϕ b i + a$_{11}$ gf $^{abc}$ωa $_{i}$( ∂$_{µ}$A c $_{µ}$) ϕ b i + b$_{1}$R ai µ U ai µ + b$_{2}$T ai µ M ai µ + b$_{3}$gf$_{abc}$R ai µ ω b $_{i}$A c µ + b$_{4}$gf$_{abc}$T ai µ ϕ b $_{i}$A c µ + b$_{5}$R ai µ ∂$_{µ}$ω a i + b$_{6}$T ai µ ∂$_{µ}$ϕ a i ]} , (A35)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6924850806348707, + "doc_id": "48b6e53801e31a1eec4926015efc58a7efd7498c0b625ea9402dccddcbfb7257", + "edit_distance": 0.48484848484848486, + "f1_score": 0.9022222222222221, + "meteor": 0.778131351102318, + "precision": 0.9441860465116279, + "pred_md": "were observed at least on 10 devices made from sample S and 3 devices from sample M (see the histogram in Fig. 2c). The electrical measurements unambiguously prove that sample S essentially consists of s-SWNTs, whereas sample M (and to greater extent L, not shown) contain s-SWNTs, m-SWNTs and probably impurities.\n\nAt this point it is important to stress that the electrical, optical absorption and Raman measurements provide strong evidence that sample S consist of s-SWNTs without detectable traces of m-SWNTs and impurities, within our detection limits. Ultracentrifugation (optimum conditions 250,000 g for 60 min) is the key technique that lead us to the selective extraction of s-SWNTs from nanotubes powders with PFO as extracting agent in toluene solution. Note that the centrifugation conditions (9,000 g, 3 min) described by Nish et al. are inadequate to remove traces of m-SWNTS. 14 The present achievement is extremely importance for both basic and applied research.\n\nNext, prototypical FET consisting of random network of SWNTs were fabricated by spin-coating the sample S on Si/SiO 2 wafer with pre-patterned drain and source electrodes. Remarkably, such device exhibits very promising characteristics rarely observed simultaneously. The on-off current is around 10 5 , the on-current is I ON = 15 9 . µ A, the transconductance is G m = 1 75 . µ S ( G m = δI D /δV G ) and the threshold slop is S p =3.15V/decade ( S p = δV DS /δLog I ( D )). In addition, I D vs V DS exhibits a well defined linear regime ( δI D /δV DS = -0 2 . µ A/V) and a saturation regime ( I sat = -7 2 . µ A). Similar results were observed on 10 devices, which were recorded using the same device structure but not necessarily the same density of SWNTs. The histogram in figure 2c shows that 5 devices are in the range R =5-5.5 and 3 are in the range R =3.5-4 (with R the on-off ratio defined as R = Log 10 ( I ON /I OFF ))). Admittedly, the characteristics of our devices are relatively scattered, but we believe that this technical challenge can be surmounted and reproducible FET can be fabricated.\n\nInterestingly by plotting the data related to sample S and M, the figure 2c can be divided in 3 areas indicated with circles. On one side, high R is correlated to low I ON and G m , on the other side low R is correlated to high I ON and G m , and in between there is an intermediate situation. Remarkably, I ON and G m decreases linearly with increasing R . In substance, this result suggest that FET devices can be fabricated with desired transfer characteristics depending on the targeted application, by simply tuning the centrifugation conditions (in other words, the ratio semiconducting/metallic SWNTs) and the spin-coating conditions (density of SWNTs).\n\nTo improve the performances of the FET devices, sSWNTs in NMP (similar to sample S) were deposited on pre-defined location and orientation by dielectrophore-\n\n1 J. Jang, Materials Today, 4 , 46 (2006).\n\n3\n\nsis (DEP). 5,17 This technique leads to a relatively dense network of s-SWNTs oriented perpendicular to the electrodes eventually bridging the electrodes with a few nanotube-nanotube junctions (Fig. 3c). Here again, the device present relatively good characteristics: R =4.8, I ON =6.5 µ A, G m =1.7 µ S, and S p =2.98V/decade. Similar results were observed at least for 3 devices (2 devices with R =4.8 and 1 device with R =3.6 as shown in figure 3c). The estimated field effect hole mobility is larger than µ =2 cm /vs. 2 The latter was calculated using established equations 7,8,16 with the following parameters L = 5 µ m (source-drain gap), W = 60 µ m (channel width), t ox = 500nm (gate thickness) and /epsilon1 = 34 5 . pF/m (permittivity of silicon dioxide). If we normalize I ON and G m to the width of the electrode W , than the performances of the FET made by DEP are exceeding (by a factor 400 µ m/60 µ m) those made by spin-coating method.\n\nHow our technique and the performances of our FET compare with previous reports? Fabrication of FET based on individual s-SWNTs are technically challenging, and methods involving selective break-down of mSWNT occasionally damage the entire device. 7,8 In contrast, deposition of already prepared s-SWNT processable solutions are compatible with FET and TFT technology. The performances of our device are comparable to those made using density gradient technique, larger than the state-of-the-art solution processable polymers and organic molecules, but lower than amorphous Si and vacuum deposited Pentacene. 1,16\n\nIn conclusion, we have demonstrated the selective extract s-SWNTs, without detectable traces of m-SWNTs and impurities, from carbon nanotube powders using PFO as extracting agent in toluene assisted in particular by ultracentrifugation (250,000g). We anticipate that this method will lead to pure s-SWNTs produced in sizable quantities and formulated as a printable 'ink'. We have also demonstrated that s-SWNTs processable solutions can realize high-performances p-type FET with very promising characteristics: the on-off current ratio around 10 , 5 I ON around 10 µ A and the estimated hole mobility larger than 2 cm /vs. 2 We believe that the present achievement pave the way to the future development of FET and TFT based on s-SWNT. Admittedly, further study and optimization of both the materials and the devices are still necessary to met the industrial requirements.\n\n## Acknowledgments\n\nWe thank all the members of the Nano-Carbon Team (AIST). N. Izard thanks the Japan Society for the Promotion of Science for financial support.\n\n2 M. J. Biercuk, S. Ilani, C. M. Marcus, and P. L. McEuen,", + "recall": 0.8638297872340426, + "true_md": "3\n\nwere observed at least on 10 devices made from sample S and 3 devices from sample M (see the histogram in Fig. 2c). The electrical measurements unambiguously prove that sample S essentially consists of s-SWNTs, whereas sample M (and to greater extent L, not shown) contain s-SWNTs, m-SWNTs and probably impurities.\n\nAt this point it is important to stress that the elec- trical, optical absorption and Raman measurements pro- vide strong evidence that sample S consist of s-SWNTs without detectable traces of m-SWNTs and impurities, within our detection limits. Ultracentrifugation (opti- mum conditions 250,000 g for 60 min) is the key tech- nique that lead us to the selective extraction of s-SWNTs from nanotubes powders with PFO as extracting agent in toluene solution. Note that the centrifugation conditions (9,000 g, 3 min) described by Nish et al. are inadequate to remove traces of m-SWNTS. 14 The present achieve- ment is extremely importance for both basic and applied research.\n\nNext, prototypical FET consisting of random network of SWNTs were fabricated by spin-coating the sam- ple S on Si/SiO$_{2}$ wafer with pre-patterned drain and source electrodes. Remarkably, such device exhibits very promising characteristics rarely observed simultaneously. The on-off current is around 10 $^{5}$, the on-current is I$_{ON}$ = 15 . 9 µ A, the transconductance is G$_{m}$ = 1 . 75 µ S ( G$_{m}$ = δI$_{D}$/δV$_{G}$ ) and the threshold slop is S$_{p}$ =3.15V/decade ( S$_{p}$ = δV$_{DS}$/δLog ( I$_{D}$ )). In addition, I$_{D}$ vs V$_{DS}$ exhibits a well defined linear regime ( δI$_{D}$/δV$_{DS}$ = − 0 . 2 µ A/V) and a saturation regime ( I$_{sat}$ = − 7 . 2 µ A). Similar results were observed on 10 devices, which were recorded using the same device structure but not necessarily the same density of SWNTs. The histogram in figure 2c shows that 5 devices are in the range R =5-5.5 and 3 are in the range R =3.5-4 (with R the on-off ratio defined as R = Log$_{10}$ ( I$_{ON}$/I$_{OFF}$ ))). Admittedly, the characteris- tics of our devices are relatively scattered, but we believe that this technical challenge can be surmounted and re- producible FET can be fabricated.\n\nInterestingly by plotting the data related to sample S and M, the figure 2c can be divided in 3 areas indicated with circles. On one side, high R is correlated to low I$_{ON}$ and G$_{m}$ , on the other side low R is correlated to high I$_{ON}$ and G$_{m}$ , and in between there is an interme- diate situation. Remarkably, I$_{ON}$ and G$_{m}$ decreases lin- early with increasing R . In substance, this result suggest that FET devices can be fabricated with desired trans- fer characteristics depending on the targeted application, by simply tuning the centrifugation conditions (in other words, the ratio semiconducting/metallic SWNTs) and the spin-coating conditions (density of SWNTs).\n\nTo improve the performances of the FET devices, s- SWNTs in NMP (similar to sample S) were deposited on pre-defined location and orientation by dielectrophore-\n\nWe thank all the members of the Nano-Carbon Team (AIST). N. Izard thanks the Japan Society for the Pro- motion of Science for financial support.\n\nIn conclusion, we have demonstrated the selective ex- tract s-SWNTs, without detectable traces of m-SWNTs and impurities, from carbon nanotube powders using PFO as extracting agent in toluene assisted in particu- lar by ultracentrifugation (250,000g). We anticipate that this method will lead to pure s-SWNTs produced in siz- able quantities and formulated as a printable ”ink”. We have also demonstrated that s-SWNTs processable so- lutions can realize high-performances p-type FET with very promising characteristics: the on-off current ratio around 10 $^{5}$, I$_{ON}$ around 10 µ A and the estimated hole mobility larger than 2 cm $^{2}$/vs. We believe that the present achievement pave the way to the future develop- ment of FET and TFT based on s-SWNT. Admittedly, further study and optimization of both the materials and the devices are still necessary to met the industrial re- quirements.\n\nHow our technique and the performances of our FET compare with previous reports? Fabrication of FET based on individual s-SWNTs are technically challeng- ing, and methods involving selective break-down of m- SWNT occasionally damage the entire device. 7,8 In con- trast, deposition of already prepared s-SWNT process- able solutions are compatible with FET and TFT tech- nology. The performances of our device are comparable to those made using density gradient technique, larger than the state-of-the-art solution processable polymers and organic molecules, but lower than amorphous Si and vacuum deposited Pentacene. 1,16\n\nsis (DEP). 5,17 This technique leads to a relatively dense network of s-SWNTs oriented perpendicular to the elec- trodes eventually bridging the electrodes with a few nanotube-nanotube junctions (Fig. 3c). Here again, the device present relatively good characteristics: R =4.8, I$_{ON}$ =6.5 µ A, G$_{m}$ =1.7 µ S, and S$_{p}$ =2.98V/decade. Simi- lar results were observed at least for 3 devices (2 devices with R =4.8 and 1 device with R =3.6 as shown in fig- ure 3c). The estimated field effect hole mobility is larger than µ =2 cm $^{2}$/vs. The latter was calculated using es- tablished equations 7,8,16 with the following parameters L = 5 µ m (source-drain gap), W = 60 µ m (channel width), t$_{ox}$ = 500nm (gate thickness) and ϵ = 34 . 5 pF/m (permittivity of silicon dioxide). If we normalize I$_{ON}$ and G$_{m}$ to the width of the electrode W , than the perfor- mances of the FET made by DEP are exceeding (by a fac- tor 400 µ m/60 µ m) those made by spin-coating method.\n\n2 M. J. Biercuk, S. Ilani, C. M. Marcus, and P. L. McEuen,\n\n1 J. Jang, Materials Today, 4 , 46 (2006).\n\n## Acknowledgments" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.36428824385330666, + "doc_id": "f7f366071cc8ce140022dd79331f8fdb5679fcb136ac90078f38fc2daa95a6b0", + "edit_distance": 0.6573859242072699, + "f1_score": 0.875, + "meteor": 0.38602634938194147, + "precision": 0.9459459459459459, + "pred_md": "yields to\n\n\n\nwhich have a maximum at θ = 1 2 arctan(4 / / 3) ≈ 0 464. . A graph of this results appears in figure 4(red line). Note that this value is different from that we obtain if we evaluate θ α ( = π/ 4) = 1 / 2, the launch angle of maximum range. The maximum curvature happens at a smaller angle than the angle of maximun range. It is interesting to note that the angle 2 θ = arctan(4 / 3) corresponds to a triangle which sides fulfill the relation 3 2 +4 2 = 5 , a 2 Pythagoras' triple.\n\nUsing the numerical results for α θ ( ) from the previous section, it is possible to carry on the calculation of K (see figure 4) performing the derivatives of ˜ from Eq. r (13) in a direct form and evaluating numerically the required values of α and its derivatives. For the required derivatives of W z ( ) we used the expressions [2]\n\n\n\nand\n\n\n\nUsing this method, we obtained good results for values of ε up to ≈ 1 but we require to calculate arguments of the Lambert W function near the limit z = -1 /e for larger values of ε . The reliability of our numerical result was done comparing the first and second derivatives of r θ ( ) with those corresponding to the ellipse.\n\nAs can be seen in figure 4, K present a maximum in all the cases which can be calculated as well. We left to an ulterior work the analysis of the maxima distribution as a function of the pertubative parameter, that is not the case for the curvature with α parameterization as we shall see in the next section.\n\n## B. Launch angle parameterization.\n\nFor the launch angle parameterization of C m we shall use expression [10]\n\n\n\nfor calculate the curvature from the rectangular form of equations (7) and (8), where the primes denote derivative respect the parameterization variable, α in this case.\n\nA direct calculation yields\n\n\n\nand\n\n4\n\nFIG. 4: (color online) Curvature of C m ( ε ) using the polar angle as the parameter from Eq. (19). In red line appears the corresponding result for the ellipse, Eq. (20). The maximum happens at θ = 1 2 arctan(4 / / 3), different from the value of maximum range α = π/ 4.\n\nFIG. 4: (color online) Curvature of C m ( ε ) using the polar angle as the parameter from Eq. (19). In red line appears the corresponding result for the ellipse, Eq. (20). The maximum happens at θ = 1 2 arctan(4 / / 3), different from the value of maximum range α = π/ 4.\n\nWith\n\n\n\n\n\nIn the limit ε → 0, we recover the drag-free curvature\n\n\n\nwhich have a maximum at α = π/ 4 in the interval α ∈ [0 , π/ 2], as expected. A plot of ρκ α ( ) for several values of ε beginning at zero and ending at ε = 10 appears in Figure 5(a). In red appears the drag-free case. Note that both extremal values increase for increasing ε value as ρκ (0) ≈ (16+6 ε -6 ε 2 ) and ρκ π/ ( 2) ≈ ε . Notice that for small ε , the κ crosses the drag-free curvature κ 0 .\n\nThe angles α ∗ at which κ attain their maxima are obtained in the usual way and requires to solve, numerical or graphically, the equation\n\n\n\nwith\n\n\n\n", + "recall": 0.813953488372093, + "true_md": "yields to\n\nwhich have a maximum at θ = 1 / 2 arctan(4 / 3) ≈ 0 . 464. A graph of this results appears in figure 4(red line). Note that this value is different from that we obtain if we eval- uate θ ( α = π/ 4) = 1 / 2, the launch angle of maximum range. The maximum curvature happens at a smaller angle than the angle of maximun range. It is interesting to note that the angle 2 θ = arctan(4 / 3) corresponds to a triangle which sides fulfill the relation 3 2 + 4 2 = 5 $^{2}$, a Pythagoras’ triple.\n\nUsing the numerical results for α ( θ ) from the previous section, it is possible to carry on the calculation of K (see figure 4) performing the derivatives of ˜ r from Eq. (13) in a direct form and evaluating numerically the re- quired values of α and its derivatives. For the required derivatives of W ( z ) we used the expressions [2]\n\nand\n\nUsing this method, we obtained good results for values of ε up to ≈ 1 but we require to calculate arguments of the Lambert W function near the limit z = − 1 /e for larger values of ε . The reliability of our numerical result was done comparing the first and second derivatives of r ( θ ) with those corresponding to the ellipse.\n\nAs can be seen in figure 4, K present a maximum in all the cases which can be calculated as well. We left to an ulterior work the analysis of the maxima distribution as a function of the pertubative parameter, that is not the case for the curvature with α parameterization as we shall see in the next section.\n\nFor the launch angle parameterization of C m we shall use expression [10]\n\nfor calculate the curvature from the rectangular form of equations (7) and (8), where the primes denote derivative respect the parameterization variable, α in this case.\n\nA direct calculation yields\n\nwhich have a maximum at α = π/ 4 in the interval α ∈ [0 , π/ 2], as expected. A plot of ρκ ( α ) for several values of ε beginning at zero and ending at ε = 10 appears in Figure 5(a). In red appears the drag-free case. Note that both extremal values increase for increasing ε value as ρκ (0) ≈ (16 + 6 $^{ε}$− 6 ε $^{2}$) and ρκ ( π/ 2) ≈ ε . Notice that for small ε , the κ crosses the drag-free curvature κ$_{0}$ . ∗\n\nsmall ε , the κ crosses the drag-free curvature κ$_{0}$ . The angles α ∗ at which κ attain their maxima are ob- tained in the usual way and requires to solve, numerical or graphically, the equation\n\nwith\n\nIn the limit ε → 0, we recover the drag-free curvature $_{16}$√$_{2}$\n\nand\n\nWith\n\nFIG. 4: (color online) Curvature of C m ( ε ) using the polar angle as the parameter from Eq. (19). In red line appears the corresponding result for the ellipse, Eq. (20). The maximum happens at θ = 1 / 2 arctan(4 / 3), different from the value of maximum range α = π/ 4.\n\n## B. Launch angle parameterization.\n\n4\n\n$$K$_{0}$ = 1 $_{2}$√$_{2}$$_{ρ}$ (5 − 3 cos 2 θ ) 6 (1 + 3 sin 2 θ ) $^{3}$(47 60 cos 2 θ + 21 cos 4 θ ) 3 / $_{2}$, (20)$$\n\n$$d dx W ( x ) = W ( x ) x (1 + W ( x )) , (21)$$\n\n$$d $^{2}$W ( x ) dx 2 = − $^{exp(}$−2 W ( x ))( W ( x ) + 2) (1 + W ( x )) 3 . (22)$$\n\n$$P $_{1}$( α ) = 16 + 6 ε 2 − 8 ε $^{2}$cos 2 α + 2 ε $^{2}$cos 4 α +30 ε sin α − ε sin 3 α + ε sin 5 α, (25)$$\n\n$$P $_{2}$( α ) = 5 + 3 cos 4 α + 3 ε 2 − 4 ε $^{2}$cos 2 α + ε $^{2}$cos 4 α + 10 ε sin α − 5 ε sin 3 α + ε sin 5 α. (26)$$\n\n$$→ κ$_{0}$ = $_{16}$√$_{2}$ ρ 1 (5 + 3 cos 4 α ) 3 / $_{2}$, (27)$$\n\n$$κ = x ′ y ′′ − y ′ x ′′ ( x ′ 2 + y ′ $^{2}$)3 / $_{2}$, (23)$$\n\n$$3(1 + ε sin α ∗ ) sin 2 α ∗ × Q $_{1}$( α ∗ $^{)}$Q $_{2}$( α ∗ )+ ε cos α $^{∗}$Q $_{3}$( α $^{)}$Q $_{4}$( α ) = 0 , (28)$$\n\n$$κ = √$_{2}$ ρ P 1 ( α ) ( √$_{P}$ 2 ( α )) 3 × (1 + ε sin α ) $^{2}$. (24)$$\n\n$$Q 1 = 4 (3 + ε $^{2}$) cos 2 α ∗ + ε $^{(}$−4 ε − 15 sin α ∗ + 5 sin 3 α ∗ ); (29)$$\n\n$$Q 2 = 16 + 6 ε 2 − 8 ε $^{2}$cos 2 α ∗ + 2 ε $^{2}$cos 4 α ∗ + 30 ε sin α ∗ ε sin 3 α ∗ + ε sin 5 α ∗ ; (30)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5080011386484506, + "doc_id": "3e1664f00ee74b8838978c7015549cb394ecb1a09f4f34579eacee418c04523d", + "edit_distance": 0.625, + "f1_score": 0.9059011164274322, + "meteor": 0.5211381544161131, + "precision": 0.9435215946843853, + "pred_md": "## B. Vector Potential\n\nTo determine an associated vector potential A , we must find a solution to the coupled system of equations ∇× A = ∇ ψ , where ψ is given by the series (11). We\n\n3\n\nalso must select some particular gauge. And even after a particular type of gauge has been chosen, say a Coulomb gauge, there is still some remaining freedom [4]. One convenient Coulomb gauge choice is given by the rules\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nThe coefficients C [ n ] m,s ( z ) and C [ n ] m,c ( z ) describe normal and skew components, respectively. For example, in the body of a long normal dipole ( m = 1), we expect C [0] 1 ,s ( z ) will be nearly constant (independent of z ) and therefore C [ n ] 1 ,s ( z ) glyph[similarequal] 0 for n > 0. Correspondingly, in the body of a long normal dipole, use of (12) gives the results A x glyph[similarequal] A y glyph[similarequal] 0 and\n\n\n\nSimilarly, in the body of a long normal quadrupole ( m = 2), use of (12) gives the results A x glyph[similarequal] A y glyph[similarequal] 0 and\n\n\n\nFor any set of analytic functions C [ n ] m,α ( z ) employed in (11), the vector potential defined by (12) satisfies the conditions: 1) ∇× A = ∇ ψ = B , 2) ∇×∇× A = 0, and 3) ∇· A = 0. Note that both Maxwell's equations and the Coulomb gauge condition are satisfied by construction. In the following section, we will see how the coefficient functions C [ n ] m,α ( z ) can be numerically determined.\n\n## III. SURFACE METHODS\n\nThere are cases in which Taylor expansions of the form (11) and (12) can be found analytically. In general, however, we have available only measured or numerical threedimensional magnetic field data on a discrete mesh of points distributed throughout the region of interest. The required high derivatives of ψ or A cannot be reliably computed directly from this data by numerical differentiation due to numerical noise, whose effect becomes worse with the order of derivative desired. The effect of numerical noise, and its amplification by numerical differentiation, can be overcome by fitting on a bounding\n\nsurface far from the axis and interpolating inward using the Maxwell equations. Surface fitting methods have several advantages, including:\n\n- 1. Only functions with known (othonormal) completeness properties and known (optimal) convergence properties are employed.\n- 2. The Maxwell equations are exactly satisfied.\n- 3. The results are manifestly analytic in all variables.\n- 4. The error is globally controlled. Fields that are harmonic (fields that satisfy the Laplace equation) take their extrema on boundaries. Both the exact and computed fields are harmonic. Therefore their difference, the error field, is also harmonic, and must take its extrema on the boundary. But this is precisely where a controlled fit is made. Thus, the error on the boundary is controlled, and the interior error must be even smaller.\n- 5. Because harmonic fields take their extrema on boundaries, interior values inferred from surface data are relatively insensitive to errors/noise in the surface data. Put another way, the inverse Laplacian (Laplace Green function), which relates interior data to surface data, is smoothing . It is this smoothing that we seek to exploit. In general, the sensitivity to noise in the data decreases rapidly (as some high inverse power of distance) with increasing distance from the surface, and this property improves the accuracy of the high-order interior derivatives needed to compute high-order transfer maps.\n\nLet us briefly compare this approach to that of on-axis or midplane fitting. In the case of on-axis fitting, it is common to use various analytic model profiles, such as Enge functions, and then differentiate them repeatedly", + "recall": 0.8711656441717791, + "true_md": "## B. Vector Potential\n\nalso must select some particular gauge. And even after a particular type of gauge has been chosen, say a Coulomb gauge, there is still some remaining freedom [4]. One convenient Coulomb gauge choice is given by the rules\n\nTo determine an associated vector potential A , we must find a solution to the coupled system of equations ∇ × A = ∇ ψ , where ψ is given by the series (11). We\n\nsurface far from the axis and interpolating inward us- ing the Maxwell equations. Surface fitting methods have several advantages, including:\n\nThe coefficients C [ n ] $_{m,s}$( z ) and C [ n ] $_{m,c}$( z ) describe normal and skew components, respectively. For example, in the body of a long normal dipole ( m = 1), we expect C [0] 1 $_{,s}$( z ) will be nearly constant (independent of z ) and there- fore C [ n ] 1 $_{,s}$( z ) ≃ 0 for n > 0. Correspondingly, in the body of a long normal dipole, use of (12) gives the re- sults A$_{x}$ ≃ A$_{y}$ ≃ 0 and\n\nSimilarly, in the body of a long normal quadrupole ( m = 2), use of (12) gives the results A$_{x}$ ≃ A$_{y}$ ≃ 0 and\n\nFor any set of analytic functions C [ n ] $_{m,α}$( z ) employed in (11), the vector potential defined by (12) satisfies the conditions: 1) ∇ × A = ∇ ψ = B , 2) ∇ × ∇ × A = 0, and 3) ∇· A = 0. Note that both Maxwell’s equations and the Coulomb gauge condition are satisfied by construction. In the following section, we will see how the coefficient functions C [ n ] $_{m,α}$( z ) can be numerically determined.\n\nThere are cases in which Taylor expansions of the form (11) and (12) can be found analytically. In general, how- ever, we have available only measured or numerical three- dimensional magnetic field data on a discrete mesh of points distributed throughout the region of interest. The required high derivatives of ψ or A cannot be reliably computed directly from this data by numerical differ- entiation due to numerical noise, whose effect becomes worse with the order of derivative desired. The effect of numerical noise, and its amplification by numerical dif- ferentiation, can be overcome by fitting on a bounding\n\nLet us briefly compare this approach to that of on-axis or midplane fitting. In the case of on-axis fitting, it is common to use various analytic model profiles, such as Enge functions, and then differentiate them repeatedly\n\n- 5. Because harmonic fields take their extrema on boundaries, interior values inferred from surface data are relatively insensitive to errors/noise in the surface data. Put another way, the inverse Lapla- cian (Laplace Green function), which relates inte- rior data to surface data, is smoothing . It is this smoothing that we seek to exploit. In general, the sensitivity to noise in the data decreases rapidly (as some high inverse power of distance) with increas- ing distance from the surface, and this property improves the accuracy of the high-order interior derivatives needed to compute high-order transfer maps.\n\n- 4. The error is globally controlled. Fields that are harmonic (fields that satisfy the Laplace equation) take their extrema on boundaries. Both the exact and computed fields are harmonic. Therefore their difference, the error field, is also harmonic, and must take its extrema on the boundary. But this is precisely where a controlled fit is made. Thus, the error on the boundary is controlled, and the interior error must be even smaller.\n\n- 3. The results are manifestly analytic in all variables.\n\n- 2. The Maxwell equations are exactly satisfied.\n\n- 1. Only functions with known (othonormal) complete- ness properties and known (optimal) convergence properties are employed.\n\n$$A$_{z}$ = − C [0] 1 $_{,s}$x. (13)$$\n\n$$A$_{z}$ = − C [0] 2 $_{,s}$( x 2 − y $^{2}$) . (14)$$\n\n## III. SURFACE METHODS\n\n$$A$_{z}$ = ∞ ∑ l =0 ∞ ∑ m =0 ( − 1) l m ! 2 2 $^{l}$l !( l + m )! $^{[}$C [2 l ] $_{m,c}$( z ) F l,m s − C [2 l ] $_{m,s}$( z ) F l,m c $^{]}$. (12c)$$\n\n$$A$_{y}$ = ∞ ∑ l =0 ∞ ∑ m =0 ( − 1) l m ! 2 2 l $^{+1}$l !( l + m + 1)! $^{[}$C [2 l +1] m,c ( z ) F l,m +1 c + C [2 l +1] m,s ( z ) F l,m +1 s $^{]}$, (12b)$$\n\n$$A$_{x}$ = ∞ ∑ l =0 ∞ ∑ m =0 ( − 1) l m ! 2 2 l $^{+1}$l !( l + m + 1)! $^{[}$C [2 l +1] m,s ( z ) F l,m +1 c − C [2 l +1] m,c ( z ) F l,m +1 s $^{]}$, (12a)$$\n\n3" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7768675071249828, + "doc_id": "3a986d5373f4d657d5e858d3b2cdbea16fb92c46183538dd5ec93da3a536b19b", + "edit_distance": 0.42592592592592593, + "f1_score": 0.9067796610169493, + "meteor": 0.899678999063481, + "precision": 0.9304347826086956, + "pred_md": "4\n\n2009 Fermi Symposium, Washington, D.C., Nov. 2-5\n\nFigure 4: The γ -ray index versus submillimeter index plane. The blazars fall more steeply in the γ -rays than in the submillimeter band, where most are, in fact, rising. This LAT-detected sample contrasts with the full SMA sample, where the blazars are more distributed around α S ∼ 0.\n\nFigure 4: The γ -ray index versus submillimeter index plane. The blazars fall more steeply in the γ -rays than in the submillimeter band, where most are, in fact, rising. This LAT-detected sample contrasts with the full SMA sample, where the blazars are more distributed around α S ∼ 0.\n\nas the presence of SSC versus ERC. Here, we use submillimeter luminosity as a proxy for jet power, which is correlated with the integrated luminosity of the synchrotron component. Elevated γ -ray luminosity with respect to the synchrotron component (which is often seen in FSRQs) suggests the upscattering of external photons off the synchrotron-emitting electrons. These objects should occupy the upper right of the ratio/jet power plot, and BL Lacs, which generally exhibit components with roughly comparable luminosities, should occupy the lower left. It is clear from the figure, however, that many FSRQs exhibit ratios similar to those of the BL Lacs and vis versa.\n\nSikora et al. [10] report that, during its flaring epochs, 3C 454.3 transitions from its typical FSRQ state to a more BL Lac-like state, where the synchrotron component emits much more strongly compared to the γ -ray component than during its 'low state'. 3C 454.3, which is the highest submillimeter luminosity FSRQ in our sample, would then shift down and to the right in Figure 5 when it enters a flaring period. For the first three months of the Fermi mission, 3C 454.3 was not flaring, which may explain its present location in Figure 5. The three objects for which there is a type discrepancy between CGRaBS and LBAS are all FSRQs (in CGRaBS) and exhibit\n\neConf C091122\n\nlow luminosity ratios and high luminosity, which suggest they may be undergoing the same changes as 3C 454.3. A possible interpretation of the elevated luminosity ratios observed in some BL Lacs objects is that there has been a dramatic increase in γ -ray luminosity due to ERC, which would not be reflected in the synchrotron component.\n\n## 5. CONCLUSIONS\n\nThe motivation for observing blazars in the submillimeter is to study behavior close to the central engine, where the jet material is presumably still being accelerated. The separate emission processes that contribute to overall SED may present differently in BL Lacs and FSRQs, allowing us to understand the similarities and differences between blazar types. We have investigated these differences between objects in terms of submillimeter behavior and, in conclusion, find that\n\n- · The SMA blazars exhibit submillimeter energy spectral indexes that follow the spectral sequence interpretation of blazars.", + "recall": 0.8842975206611571, + "true_md": "4\n\nFigure 4: The γ -ray index versus submillimeter index plane. The blazars fall more steeply in the γ -rays than in the submillimeter band, where most are, in fact, rising. This LAT-detected sample contrasts with the full SMA sample, where the blazars are more distributed around α$_{S}$ ∼ 0.\n\nas the presence of SSC versus ERC. Here, we use sub- millimeter luminosity as a proxy for jet power, which is correlated with the integrated luminosity of the syn- chrotron component. Elevated γ -ray luminosity with respect to the synchrotron component (which is often seen in FSRQs) suggests the upscattering of external photons off the synchrotron-emitting electrons. These objects should occupy the upper right of the ratio/jet power plot, and BL Lacs, which generally exhibit com- ponents with roughly comparable luminosities, should occupy the lower left. It is clear from the figure, how- ever, that many FSRQs exhibit ratios similar to those of the BL Lacs and vis versa.\n\nlow luminosity ratios and high luminosity, which sug- gest they may be undergoing the same changes as 3C 454.3. A possible interpretation of the elevated lumi- nosity ratios observed in some BL Lacs objects is that there has been a dramatic increase in γ -ray luminos- ity due to ERC, which would not be reflected in the synchrotron component.\n\nSikora et al. [10] report that, during its flaring epochs, 3C 454.3 transitions from its typical FSRQ state to a more BL Lac-like state, where the syn- chrotron component emits much more strongly com- pared to the γ -ray component than during its “low state”. 3C 454.3, which is the highest submillime- ter luminosity FSRQ in our sample, would then shift down and to the right in Figure 5 when it enters a flaring period. For the first three months of the Fermi mission, 3C 454.3 was not flaring, which may explain its present location in Figure 5. The three objects for which there is a type discrepancy between CGRaBS and LBAS are all FSRQs (in CGRaBS) and exhibit\n\nThe motivation for observing blazars in the sub- millimeter is to study behavior close to the central engine, where the jet material is presumably still be- ing accelerated. The separate emission processes that contribute to overall SED may present differently in BL Lacs and FSRQs, allowing us to understand the similarities and differences between blazar types. We have investigated these differences between objects in terms of submillimeter behavior and, in conclusion, find that\n\n- • The SMA blazars exhibit submillimeter energy spectral indexes that follow the spectral se- quence interpretation of blazars.\n\n## 5. CONCLUSIONS\n\neConf C091122" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7849391690003503, + "doc_id": "81daad488e496933cc06ef66c9759a1f566f59138b0bda109675b2f3597d57d0", + "edit_distance": 0.13624678663239073, + "f1_score": 0.8645833333333333, + "meteor": 0.8723613435148666, + "precision": 0.8829787234042553, + "pred_md": "- 9. I.M. Vellekoop, E.G. van Putten, A. Lagendijk, and A.P. Mosk, 'Demixing light paths inside disordered metamaterials,' Opt. Expr. 16, 67-80 (2008).\n- 10. S.H. Simon, A.L. Moustakas, M. Stoytchev, and H. Safar, 'Communication in a Disordered World,' Physics Today 54, 38-43 (2001)\n- 11. M. Fink, 'Time-reversed acoustics,' Phys. Today 50 3440 (1997)\n- 12. I.M. Vellekoop, A. Lagendijk, and A.P. Mosk, 'Exploiting disorder for perfect focusing,' Nature Photon. (2010), doi:10.1038/nphoton.2010.3\n- 13. O.L. Muskens and A. Lagendijk, 'Broadband enhanced backscattering spectroscopy of strongly scattering media,' Opt. Express 16 1222-1231 (2008)\n- 14. M.U. Vera and D.J. Durian, 'Angular distribution of diffusely transmitted light,' Phys. Rev. E 53 3215-3224 (1996)\n- 15. J.G. Rivas, D.H. Dau, A. Imhof, R. Sprik, B.P.J. Bret, P.M. Johnson, T.W. Hijmans, and A. Lagendijk, 'Experimental determination of the effective refractive index in strongly scattering media,' Optics Commun. 220 17-21 (2003)\n- 16. P. H. van Cittert, 'Die wahrscheinliche Schwingungsverteilung in einer von einer Lichtquelle direkt oder mittels einer Linse beleuchteten Ebene,' Physica 1, (1934), as discussed in Ref. [18].\n- 17. F. Zernike, 'The concept of degree of coherence and its application to optical problems,' Physica 5, 785 (1938), as discussed in Ref. [18].\n- 18. J.W. Goodman, 'Statistical optics,' Wiley, New York, (2000).\n- 19. B. Richards and E. Wolf, 'Electromagnetic Diffraction in Optical Systems. II. Structure of the Image Field in an Aplanatic System,' Proc. R. Soc. London, Ser. A 253 358-379 (1959)\n\n4", + "recall": 0.8469387755102041, + "true_md": "4\n\n- 9. I.M. Vellekoop, E.G. van Putten, A. Lagendijk, and A.P. Mosk, “Demixing light paths inside disordered metama- terials,” Opt. Expr. 16, 67–80 (2008).\n\n- 10. S.H. Simon, A.L. Moustakas, M. Stoytchev, and H. Sa- far, “Communication in a Disordered World,” Physics Today 54, 38–43 (2001)\n\n- 11. M. Fink, “Time-reversed acoustics,” Phys. Today 50 34– 40 (1997)\n\n- 12. I.M. Vellekoop, A. Lagendijk, and A.P. Mosk, “Ex- ploiting disorder for perfect focusing,” Nature Photon. (2010), doi:10.1038/nphoton.2010.3\n\n- 13. O.L. Muskens and A. Lagendijk, “Broadband enhanced backscattering spectroscopy of strongly scattering me- dia,” Opt. Express 16 1222–1231 (2008)\n\n- 14. M.U. Vera and D.J. Durian, “Angular distribution of diffusely transmitted light,” Phys. Rev. E 53 3215–3224 (1996)\n\n- 15. J.G. Rivas, D.H. Dau, A. Imhof, R. Sprik, B.P.J. Bret, P.M. Johnson, T.W. Hijmans, and A. Lagendijk, “Ex- perimental determination of the effective refractive in- dex in strongly scattering media,” Optics Commun. 220 17–21 (2003)\n\n- 16. P. H. van Cittert, “Die wahrscheinliche Schwingungsverteilung in einer von einer Lichtquelle direkt oder mittels einer Linse beleuchteten Ebene,” Physica 1, (1934), as discussed in Ref. [18].\n\n- 17. F. Zernike, “The concept of degree of coherence and its application to optical problems,” Physica 5, 785 (1938), as discussed in Ref. [18].\n\n- 18. J.W. Goodman, “Statistical optics,” Wiley, New York, (2000).\n\n- 19. B. Richards and E. Wolf, “Electromagnetic Diffraction in Optical Systems. II. Structure of the Image Field in an Aplanatic System,” Proc. R. Soc. London, Ser. A 253 358–379 (1959)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6712737854279575, + "doc_id": "b0b1deba51ac16bcbe4783d19ece1c9e57e6a0007350b549c275472d47216f7c", + "edit_distance": 0.34915865384615385, + "f1_score": 0.937142857142857, + "meteor": 0.6203461557959906, + "precision": 0.951276102088167, + "pred_md": "the other end lie those with little, perhaps negligible, magnetism: electron-doped ZrNCl and HfNCl, and electron-doped TiNCl. There are several other, lowerT c systems, whose behavior seems different still (hydrated Na x CoO , Li 2 1 -x NbO , and several 2 transition-metal disulfides and diselenides).\n\nA common feature of most of these systems is that they are 2D and have a small, but not tiny, concentration of charge carriers, often in the range of 0.05-0.15 carriers per unit cell. These materials also have ionic character. NaAlSi differs in that it has sp carriers-the others have carriers in d bands-and is self-doped, a compensated semimetal. We suggest that a useful view of NaAlSi is that it be regarded as arising from an underlying ionic semiconductor, but that it has a small negative gap rather than a true gap. Without the overlap of the valence and conduc-\n\n- 1 Y. Kamihara, T. Watanabe, M. Hirano, and H. Hosono, J. Am Chem. Soc. 130 , 3296 (2008).\n- 2 S. Yamanaka, H. Kawaji, K. Hotehama, and M. Ohashi, Adv. Mater. 8 , 771 (1996).\n- 3 S. Shamoto, T. Kato, Y. Ono, Y. Miyazaki, K. Ohoyama, M. Ohashi, Y. Yamaguchi, and T. Kajitani, Physica C 306 , 7 (1998).\n- 4 S. Yamanaka, K. Hotehama, and H. Kawaji, Nature 392 , 580 (1998).\n- 5 S. Shamoto, K. Iizawa, M. Yamada, K. Ohoyama, Y. Yamaguchi, and T. Kajitani, J. Phys. Chem. Solids 60 , 1431 (1999).\n- 6 S. Yamanaka, T. Yasunaga, K. Yamaguchi, and M. Tagawa, J. Mater. Chem. 19 , 2573 (2009).\n- 7 S. Kuroiwa, H. Kawashima, H. Kinoshita, H. Okabe, and J. Akimitsu, Physica C 466 , 11 (2007).\n- 8 E. Bustarret, C. Marcenat, P. Achatz, J. Kaˇmarˇik, c c F. L'vy, A. Huxley, L. Ort'ga, E. Bourgeois, X. Blase, e e D. D' ebarre, and J. Boulmer, Nature 444 , 465 (2006).\n- 9 L. F. Mattheiss, E. M. Gyorgy, and D. W. Johnson, Jr., Phys. Rev. B 37 , 3745 (1988).\n- 10 S. Jin, T. H. Tiefel, R. C. Sherwood, A. P. Ramirez, E. M. Gyorgy, G. W. Kammlott, and R. A. Fastnacht, Appl. Phys. Lett. 53 , 1116 (1988).\n- 11 E. A. Ekimov, V. A. Sidorov, E. D. Bauer, N. N. Mel'nik, N. J. Curro, J. D. Thompson, and S. M. Stishov, Nature 428 , 542 (2004).\n- 12 H. Rosner, A. Kitaigorodsky, and W. E. Pickett, Phys. Rev. Lett. 88 , 127001 (2002).\n- 13 H. Sagayama, Y. Wakabayashi, H. Sawa, T. Kamiyama, A. Hoshikawa, S. Harjo, K. Uozato, A. K. Ghosh, M. Tokunaga, and T. Tamegai, J. Phys. Soc. Jpn. 75 , 043713 (2006).\n- 14 S. Kuroiwa, H. Sagayama, T. Kakiuchi, H. Sawa, Y. Noda, and J. Akimitsu, Phys. Rev. B 74 , 014517 (2006).\n- 15 I. R. Shein, N. I. Medvedeva, and A. L. Ivanovskii, J. Phys.: Condens. Matter 15 , L541 (2003).\n- 16 G. Q. Huang, L. F. Chen, M. Liu, and D. Y. Xing,\n\n8\n\ntion bands, it would be a 2D, ionic, and somewhat covalent semiconductor like the aforementioned nitridochloride compounds, which superconduct in the 15-25 K range. Comparing the characteristics of these two classes of superconductors should further the understanding of 2D superconductivity.\n\n## VI. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS\n\nThis work was supported by DOE grant DEFG02-04ER46111, the Strategic Sciences Academic Alliance Program under grant DE-FG0303NA00071, and by DOE SciDAC Grant No. DEFC02-06ER25794.\n\n- Phys. Rev. B 69 , 064509 (2004).\n- 17 I. I. Mazin and D. A. Papaconstantopoulos, Phys. Rev. B 69 , 180512 (2004).\n- 18 M. Giantomassi, L. Boeri, and G. B. Bachelet, Phys. Rev. B 72 , 224512 (2005).\n- 19 R. Heid, K. -P.Bohnen, B. Renker, P. Adelmann, T. Wolf, D. Ernst, and H. Schober, J. Low Temp. Phys. 147 , 375 (2007).\n- 20 S. Kuroiwa, A. Q. R. Baron, T. Muranaka, R. Heid, K. -P. Bohnen, and J. Akimitsu, Phys. Rev. B 77 , 140503(R) (2008).\n- 21 K. Koepernik and H. Eschrig, Phys. Rev. B 59 , 1743 (1999).\n- 22 J. P. Perdew and Y. Wang, Phys. Rev. B 45 , 13244 (1992).\n- 23 W. Westerhaus and H. U. Schuster, Z. Naturforsch. 34b , 352 (1979).\n- 24 K. Momma and F. Izumi, J. Appl. Cryst. 41 , 653 (2008).\n- 25 A. B. Kyker and W. E. Pickett, Phys. REv. B 71 , 224517 (2005).\n- 26 H. Rosner, R. Weht, M. D. Johannes, W. E. Pickett, and E. Tosatti, Phys. Rev. Lett. 88 , 027001 (2002).\n- 27 D. J. Singh, Phys. Rev. B 78 , 094511 (2008).\n- 28 I. I. Mazin, D. J. Singh, M. D. Johannes, and M. H. Du, Phys. Rev. Lett 101 , 057003 (2008).\n- 29 A. N. Yaresko, G.-Q. Liu, V. N. Antonov, and O. K. Andersen, Phys. Rev. B 79 , 144421 (2009).\n- 30 F. S. Khan and P. B. Allen, Phys. Rev. Lett. 29 , 3341 (1984).\n- 31 J. F. Janak, Phys. Rev. B 16 , 255 (1977).\n- 32 H. Rietschel and L. J. Sham, Phys. Rev. B 28 , 5100 (1983).\n- 33 M. Grabowski and L. J. Sham, Phys. Rev. B 29 , 6132 (1984).\n- 34 A. Bill, H. Morawitz, and V. Z. Kresin, Phys. Rev. B 66 , 100501 (2002).\n- 35 A. Bill, H. Morawitz, and V. Z. Kresin, Phys. Rev. B 68 , 144519 (2003).", + "recall": 0.9234234234234234, + "true_md": "the other end lie those with little, perhaps negligi- ble, magnetism: electron-doped ZrNCl and HfNCl, and electron-doped TiNCl. There are several other, lower- T$_{c}$ systems, whose behavior seems different still (hydrated Na$_{x}$CoO$_{2}$, Li$_{1}$$\\_{−}$$_{x}$NbO$_{2}$, and several transition-metal disulfides and diselenides).\n\nA common feature of most of these systems is that they are 2D and have a small, but not tiny, con- centration of charge carriers, often in the range of 0.05–0.15 carriers per unit cell. These materials also have ionic character. NaAlSi differs in that it has sp carriers—the others have carriers in d bands—and is self-doped, a compensated semimetal. We suggest that a useful view of NaAlSi is that it be regarded as arising from an underlying ionic semiconductor, but that it has a small negative gap rather than a true gap. Without the overlap of the valence and conduc-\n\ntion bands, it would be a 2D, ionic, and somewhat covalent semiconductor like the aforementioned ni- tridochloride compounds, which superconduct in the 15–25 K range. Comparing the characteristics of these two classes of superconductors should further the understanding of 2D superconductivity.\n\nThis work was supported by DOE grant DE- FG02-04ER46111, the Strategic Sciences Aca- demic Alliance Program under grant DE-FG03- 03NA00071, and by DOE SciDAC Grant No. DE- FC02-06ER25794.\n\n## VI. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS\n\n- 1 Y. Kamihara, T. Watanabe, M. Hirano, and H. Hosono, J. Am Chem. Soc. 130 , 3296 (2008). 2\n\n- H. Hosono, J. Am Chem. Soc. 130 , 3296 (2008). 2 S. Yamanaka, H. Kawaji, K. Hotehama, and M. Ohashi, Adv. Mater. 8 , 771 (1996). 3\n\n- M. Ohashi, Adv. Mater. , 771 (1996). 3 S. Shamoto, T. Kato, Y. Ono, Y. Miyazaki, K. Ohoyama, M. Ohashi, Y. Yamaguchi, and T. Ka- jitani, Physica C 306 , 7 (1998). 4\n\n- jitani, Physica C 306 , 7 (1998). 4 S. Yamanaka, K. Hotehama, and H. Kawaji, Nature 392 , 580 (1998). 5\n\n- 392 , 580 (1998). 5 S. Shamoto, K. Iizawa, M. Yamada, K. Ohoyama, Y. Yamaguchi, and T. Kajitani, J. Phys. Chem. Solids 60 , 1431 (1999). 6\n\n- , 1431 (1999). 6 S. Yamanaka, T. Yasunaga, K. Yamaguchi, and M. Tagawa, J. Mater. Chem. 19 , 2573 (2009). 7\n\n- M. Tagawa, J. Mater. Chem. 19 , 2573 (2009). 7 S. Kuroiwa, H. Kawashima, H. Kinoshita, H. Okabe, and J. Akimitsu, Physica C 466 , 11 (2007). 8\n\n- and J. Akimitsu, Physica C , 11 (2007). 8 E. Bustarret, C. Marcenat, P. Achatz, J. Kaˇcmarˇcik, F. L´evy, A. Huxley, L. Ort´ega, E. Bourgeois, X. Blase, D. D´ebarre, and J. Boulmer, Nature 444 , 465 (2006). 9\n\n- D. D´ebarre, and J. Boulmer, Nature 444 , 465 (2006). 9 L. F. Mattheiss, E. M. Gyorgy, and D. W. Johnson, Jr., Phys. Rev. B 37 , 3745 (1988). 10\n\n- Jr., Phys. Rev. B 37 , 3745 (1988). 10 S. Jin, T. H. Tiefel, R. C. Sherwood, A. P. Ramirez, E. M. Gyorgy, G. W. Kammlott, and R. A. Fastnacht, Appl. Phys. Lett. 53 , 1116 (1988). 11\n\n- Appl. Phys. Lett. 53 , 1116 (1988). 11 E. A. Ekimov, V. A. Sidorov, E. D. Bauer, N. N. Mel’nik, N. J. Curro, J. D. Thompson, and S. M. Stishov, Nature 428 , 542 (2004). 12\n\n- Stishov, Nature , 542 (2004). 12 H. Rosner, A. Kitaigorodsky, and W. E. Pickett, Phys. Rev. Lett. 88 , 127001 (2002). 13\n\n- Phys. Rev. Lett. , 127001 (2002). 13 H. Sagayama, Y. Wakabayashi, H. Sawa, T. Kamiyama, A. Hoshikawa, S. Harjo, K. Uozato, A. K. Ghosh, M. Tokunaga, and T. Tamegai, J. Phys. Soc. Jpn. 75 , 043713 (2006). 14\n\n- Soc. Jpn. , 043713 (2006). 14 S. Kuroiwa, H. Sagayama, T. Kakiuchi, H. Sawa, Y. Noda, and J. Akimitsu, Phys. Rev. B 74 , 014517 (2006). 15\n\n- (2006). 15 I. R. Shein, N. I. Medvedeva, and A. L. Ivanovskii, J. Phys.: Condens. Matter 15 , L541 (2003). 16\n\n- J. Phys.: Condens. Matter 15 , L541 (2003). 16 G. Q. Huang, L. F. Chen, M. Liu, and D. Y. Xing,\n\n8\n\n- Phys. Rev. B 69 , 064509 (2004).\n\n- Phys. Rev. B 69 , 064509 (2004). 17 I. I. Mazin and D. A. Papaconstantopoulos, Phys. Rev. B 69 , 180512 (2004). 18\n\n- Rev. B 69 , 180512 (2004). 18 M. Giantomassi, L. Boeri, and G. B. Bachelet, Phys. Rev. B 72 , 224512 (2005). 19\n\n- Rev. B , 224512 (2005). 19 R. Heid, K. -P.Bohnen, B. Renker, P. Adelmann, T. Wolf, D. Ernst, and H. Schober, J. Low Temp. Phys. 147 , 375 (2007). 20\n\n- Phys. 147 , 375 (2007). 20 S. Kuroiwa, A. Q. R. Baron, T. Muranaka, R. Heid, K. -P. Bohnen, and J. Akimitsu, Phys. Rev. B 77 , 140503(R) (2008). 21\n\n- 140503(R) (2008). 21 K. Koepernik and H. Eschrig, Phys. Rev. B 59 , 1743 (1999). 22\n\n- (1999). 22 J. P. Perdew and Y. Wang, Phys. Rev. B 45 , 13244 (1992). 23\n\n- (1992). 23 W. Westerhaus and H. U. Schuster, Z. Naturforsch. 34b , 352 (1979). 24\n\n- , 352 (1979). 24 K. Momma and F. Izumi, J. Appl. Cryst. 41 , 653 (2008). 25\n\n- (2008). 25 A. B. Kyker and W. E. Pickett, Phys. REv. B 71 , 224517 (2005). 26\n\n- 224517 (2005). 26 H. Rosner, R. Weht, M. D. Johannes, W. E. Pickett, and E. Tosatti, Phys. Rev. Lett. 88 , 027001 (2002). 27\n\n- and E. Tosatti, Phys. Rev. Lett. , 027001 (2002). 27 D. J. Singh, Phys. Rev. B 78 , 094511 (2008). 28\n\n- D. J. Singh, Phys. Rev. B 78 , 094511 (2008). 28 I. I. Mazin, D. J. Singh, M. D. Johannes, and M. H. Du, Phys. Rev. Lett 101 , 057003 (2008). 29\n\n- Du, Phys. Rev. Lett 101 , 057003 (2008). 29 A. N. Yaresko, G.-Q. Liu, V. N. Antonov, and O. K. Andersen, Phys. Rev. B 79 , 144421 (2009). 30\n\n- Andersen, Phys. Rev. B , 144421 (2009). 30 F. S. Khan and P. B. Allen, Phys. Rev. Lett. 29 , 3341 (1984). 31\n\n- (1984). 31 J. F. Janak, Phys. Rev. B 16 , 255 (1977). 32\n\n- J. F. Janak, Phys. Rev. B 16 , 255 (1977). 32 H. Rietschel and L. J. Sham, Phys. Rev. B 28 , 5100 (1983). 33\n\n- (1983). 33 M. Grabowski and L. J. Sham, Phys. Rev. B 29 , 6132 (1984). 34\n\n- (1984). 34 A. Bill, H. Morawitz, and V. Z. Kresin, Phys. Rev. B 66 , 100501 (2002). 35\n\n- 66 , 100501 (2002). 35 A. Bill, H. Morawitz, and V. Z. Kresin, Phys. Rev. B 68 , 144519 (2003)." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5153628861644268, + "doc_id": "852f2fc1a3d6fb126c2de8768dd0657ae256a502b9be38a9c4cf23c9dd326014", + "edit_distance": 0.7341389728096677, + "f1_score": 0.864795918367347, + "meteor": 0.5135920054570144, + "precision": 0.9287671232876712, + "pred_md": "For the analysis of the temporal fluctuations it is crucial to determine the number of eigenstates that participate in the wave-packet superposition. This is given by the LDOS participation number ,\n\n\n\nSee Fig. 6 for numerical results. The participation number can be roughly estimated as M = ∆ E/ω osc , where ∆ E is the energy width of the wave-packet and ω osc is the mean level spacing. In the case of a Pi preparation\n\n\n\nwhile for an Edge preparation we find\n\n\n\nNote that M/ √ N is a function of the semiclassical ratio ( N/u ) 1 / 2 between the energy width of the wavepacket and the width of the separatrix region. The expected scaling is confirmed by the numerical results of Fig. 6. The above approximations for M assume u/N < 1 and are useful for the purpose of rough estimates.\n\nIn the next sections we analyze the temporal fluctuations of some observables. The associated Fourier power spectrum (Fig. 5, right panels) is related to the LDOS content of the wave-packet superposition. Both the characteristic frequency (Fig. 7) and the spectral spread of the frequencies can be estimated from the ω osc and the M that are implied by the above LDOS analysis.\n\n## VI. DYNAMICS (I) - THE TIME EVOLUTION OF THE BLOCH VECTOR\n\nAfter describing the semiclassical phase-space picture and using it to determine the spectral structure of the initial preparations, we now turn to the ensuing dynamics. At present, most experiments on the bosonic Josephson system, measure predominantly quantities related to the one-body reduced probability matrix, defined via the expectation values S i = (2 /N ) 〈 J i 〉 as,\n\n\n\nwhere S = ( S , S x y , S z ) is the Bloch vector and ˆ is comσ posed of Pauli matrices. The population imbalance and relative phase between the two sites, determined by direct imaging and the position of interference fringes [11], are given respectively by,\n\n\n\n\n\n6\n\nwhereas single-particle purity is reflected by the measures,\n\n\n\nIn particular the FringeVisibilty, given by the transverse component of the Bloch vector, corresponds to the visibility of fringes, averaged over many realizations [19, 20]. Loosely speaking it reflects the phase-uncertainty of the state. Coherent states have maximum OneBodyPurity. Of these, equal-population coherent states have maximal FringeVisibility with the smallest phase-variance. Starting from a coherent preparation, single-particle purity can be diminished over time due to nonlinear effects (see below) or due to interaction with environmental degrees of freedom (decoherence). By contrast, Fock states carry no phase information, but interactions may lead to their dynamical phase-locking over time and to the buildup of FringeVisibility (see below).\n\nWe carry out numerically-exact quantum simulations where the state | ψ 〉 is propagated according to | ψ t ( ) 〉 = exp( - H | it ) ψ 〉 , where the Hamiltonian is given by Eq.(4) which is equivalent to Eq.(1). The evolved state after time t can be visualized using its Wigner function. For example, the time evolution of the initial TwinFock state is illustrated in Fig. 3, with the Wigner function of an evolved state shown in Fig. 3(a). Comparison is made in Fig. 3(b) to the Liouville propagation for the same duration, of the corresponding cloud of points, according to the classical equations,\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nwhere time has been rescaled ( t := Kt ). Good quantumto-classical correspondence is observed for short-time simulation (e.g. see Fig. 4). In Fig. 3(c) we plot the resulting occupation statistics, which can be regarded as a projection of the phase space distribution (classical, dash-dotted line) or Wigner function (quantum, solid line), namely P ( t n ) = |〈 n ψ t | ( ) 〉| 2 = trace( ρ ( n ) ρ ( ψ t ( )) ). Our main interest is in the FringeVisibility, and hence in\n\n\n\nThe prefactor in the last equality is implied by Eq. (5), and cannot be neglected if the number of particles is small. In Fig. 4 we plot S x ( ) t for the four preparations defined in Sec. IV, comparing semiclassical results (dash-dotted lines) to the numerical full quantum calculation (solid lines). For all equatorial preparations (Zero,Pi,TwinFock), S x is in fact the FringeVisibility, because S y ( ) = 0 identically throughout the evolution. As t a general observation, the semiclassical simulation captures well the short-time transient evolution and the long", + "recall": 0.8090692124105012, + "true_md": "6\n\nwhereas single-particle purity is reflected by the mea- sures,\n\nFor the analysis of the temporal fluctuations it is cru- cial to determine the number of eigenstates that partici- pate in the wave-packet superposition. This is given by the LDOS participation number ,\n\nSee Fig. 6 for numerical results. The participation num- ber can be roughly estimated as M = Δ E/ω$_{osc}$ , where Δ E is the energy width of the wave-packet and ω$_{osc}$ is the mean level spacing. In the case of a Pi preparation\n\n$$M = [ ∑ ν P( E$_{ν}$ ) 2 ] − 1 . (44)$$\n\n$$M ≈ [ log ( N u )] √$_{u,}$ (45)$$\n\n$$M ≈ [ log ( N u )] √$_{N.}$ (46) $_{M/}$√$_{N}$$$\n\nwhile for an Edge preparation we find\n\n[ ] In particular the FringeVisibilty, given by the transverse component of the Bloch vector, corresponds to the visi- bility of fringes, averaged over many realizations [19, 20]. Loosely speaking it reflects the phase-uncertainty of the state. Coherent states have maximum OneBodyPurity. Of these, equal-population coherent states have maximal FringeVisibility with the smallest phase-variance. Start- ing from a coherent preparation, single-particle purity can be diminished over time due to nonlinear effects (see below) or due to interaction with environmental degrees of freedom (decoherence). By contrast, Fock states carry no phase information, but interactions may lead to their dynamical phase-locking over time and to the buildup of FringeVisibility (see below).\n\n[ ( )] Note that $_{M/}$√$_{N}$ is a function of the semiclassical ra- tio ( N/u ) 1 / 2 between the energy width of the wave- packet and the width of the separatrix region. The ex- pected scaling is confirmed by the numerical results of Fig. 6. The above approximations for M assume u/N < 1 and are useful for the purpose of rough estimates.\n\nIn the next sections we analyze the temporal fluctua- tions of some observables. The associated Fourier power spectrum (Fig. 5, right panels) is related to the LDOS content of the wave-packet superposition. Both the char- acteristic frequency (Fig. 7) and the spectral spread of the frequencies can be estimated from the ω$_{osc}$ and the M that are implied by the above LDOS analysis.\n\nWe carry out numerically-exact quantum simulations where the state | ψ 〉 is propagated according to | ψ ( t ) 〉 = exp( − it H ) | ψ 〉 , where the Hamiltonian is given by Eq.(4) which is equivalent to Eq.(1). The evolved state after time t can be visualized using its Wigner function. For example, the time evolution of the initial TwinFock state is illustrated in Fig. 3, with the Wigner function of an evolved state shown in Fig. 3(a). Comparison is made in Fig. 3(b) to the Liouville propagation for the same duration, of the corresponding cloud of points, according to the classical equations,\n\nwhere time has been rescaled ( t := Kt ). Good quantum- to-classical correspondence is observed for short-time simulation (e.g. see Fig. 4). In Fig. 3(c) we plot the resulting occupation statistics, which can be regarded as a projection of the phase space distribution (classical, dash-dotted line) or Wigner function (quantum, solid line), namely P$_{t}$( n ) = |〈 n | ψ ( t ) 〉| 2 = trace( ρ ( n $^{)}$ρ( ψ ( t $^{))}$). Our main interest is in the FringeVisibility, and hence in\n\nAfter describing the semiclassical phase-space picture and using it to determine the spectral structure of the ini- tial preparations, we now turn to the ensuing dynamics. At present, most experiments on the bosonic Josephson system, measure predominantly quantities related to the one-body reduced probability matrix, defined via the ex- pectation values S$_{i}$ = (2 /N ) 〈 J$_{i}$ 〉 as,\n\nwhere S = ( S$_{x}$, S$_{y}$, S$_{z}$ ) is the Bloch vector and ˆ σ is com- posed of Pauli matrices. The population imbalance and relative phase between the two sites, determined by di- rect imaging and the position of interference fringes [11], are given respectively by,\n\nThe prefactor in the last equality is implied by Eq. (5), and cannot be neglected if the number of particles is small. In Fig. 4 we plot S$_{x}$ ( t ) for the four prepara- tions defined in Sec. IV, comparing semiclassical results (dash-dotted lines) to the numerical full quantum cal- culation (solid lines). For all equatorial preparations (Zero,Pi,TwinFock), S$_{x}$ is in fact the FringeVisibility, be- cause S$_{y}$ ( t ) = 0 identically throughout the evolution. As a general observation, the semiclassical simulation cap- tures well the short-time transient evolution and the long\n\n$$S$_{x}$ ( t ) = 2 N 〈 J$_{x}$ 〉 = [( j +1) j ] 1 / 2 j 〈 sin( θ ) cos( ϕ ) 〉 . (55)$$\n\n$$˙ S$_{y}$ = − (1 + uS$_{x}$ ) S$_{z}$ , (53) ˙ S$_{z}$ = S$_{y}$ , (54)$$\n\n$$˙ S$_{x}$ = uS$_{z}$S$_{y}$ , (52)$$\n\n$$− ˙ S$_{z}$ = S$_{y}$ , (54)$$\n\n$$ρ [1] ji = 1 N 〈 ˆ a † $_{i}$ˆ a$_{j}$ 〉 = 1 2 ( ˆ 1 + S · ˆ σ )$_{ji}$ , (47)$$\n\n## VI. DYNAMICS (I) - THE TIME EVOLUTION OF THE BLOCH VECTOR\n\n$$OccupationDiff = N S$_{z}$, (48)$$\n\n$$RelativePhase = arctan( S$_{x}$, S$_{y}$ ) , (49)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9759106498063425, + "doc_id": "fe646ec95b491cb78b10493494ad21a343758635f619a2755c910f08600f9169", + "edit_distance": 0.5785191212367778, + "f1_score": 0.9559322033898305, + "meteor": 0.810354237450221, + "precision": 0.9690721649484536, + "pred_md": "- [25] M. R. Sadr-Lahijany, A. Scala, S. V. Buldyrev and H. E. Stanley, Phys. Rev. E 60 , 6714 (1999).\n- [26] P. Kumar, S. V. Buldyrev, F. Sciortino, E. Zaccarelli, and H. E. Stanley, Phys. Rev. E 72 , 021501 (2005).\n- [27] L. Xu, S. V. Buldyrev, C. A. Angell, and H. E. Stanley, Phys. Rev. E 74 , 031108 (2006).\n- [28] E. A. Jagla, J. Chem. Phys. 111 , 8980 (1999); E. A. Jagla, Phys. Rev. E 63 , 061501 (2001).\n- [29] F. H. Stillinger and D. K. Stillinger, Physica (Amsterdam) 244A, 358 (1997).\n- [30] A. B. de Oliveira, P. A. Netz, T. Colla, and M. C. Barbosa, J. Chem. Phys. 124, 084505 (2006).\n- [31] A. B. de Oliveira, P. A. Netz, T. Colla, and M. C. Barbosa, J. Chem. Phys. 125 , 124503 (2006).\n- [32] P. A. Netz, S. Buldyrev, M. C. Barbosa and H. E. Stanley Phys. Rev. E 73 , 061504 (2006).\n- [33] A. B. de Oliveira, M. C. Barbosa, and P. A. Netz, Physica A 386, 744 (2007).\n- [34] J. Mittal, J. R. Errington, and T. M. Truskett, J. Chem. Phys. 125, 076102 (2006).\n- [35] H. M. Gibson and N. B. Wilding, Phys. Rev. E 73, 061507 (2006).\n- [36] P. Camp, Phys. Rev. E 71, 031507 (2005).\n- [37] A. B. de Oliveira, G. Franzese, P. A. Netz, and M. C. Barbosa, J. Chem. Phys. 128, 064901 (2008).\n- [38] L. Xu, S. Buldyrev, C. A. Angell, and H. E. Stanley, Phys. Rev. E 74, 031108 (2006).\n- [39] A. B. de Oliveira, P. A. Netz, and M. C. Barbosa, Euro. Phys. J. B 64 , 481 (2008).\n- [40] A. B. de Oliveira, P. A. Netz, and M. C. Barbosa, arXiv:0804.2287v1.\n- [41] Yu. D. Fomin, N. V. Gribova, V. N. Ryzhov, S. M. Stishov, and Daan Frenkel, J. Chem. Phys. 129 , 064512 (2008).\n- [42] V. N. Ryzhov and S. M. Stishov, Zh. Eksp. Teor. Fiz. 122 , 820 (2002)[JETP 95 , 710 (2002)].\n- [43] V. N. Ryzhov and S. M. Stishov, Phys. Rev. E 67 , 010201(R) (2003).\n- [44] Yu. D. Fomin, V. N. Ryzhov, and E. E. Tareyeva, Phys. Rev. E 74 , 041201 (2006).\n- [45] N. V. Gribova, Yu. D. Fomin, Daan Frenkel, V. N. Ryzhov, Phys. Rev. E 79 , 051202 (2009).\n- [46] Ya. Rosenfeld, Phys. Rev. A, 15 , 2545 (1977).\n- [47] Ya. Rosenfeld, J. Phys.: Condens. Matter 11 , 5415 (1999).\n\n11\n\n- [48] S. Chapman and T.G. Cowling, The Mathematical Theory of Non-Uniform Gases (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press) (1970).\n- [49] M. Dzugutov, Nature, 381 , 137 (1996).\n- [50] J.J. Hoyt, M. Asta and B. Sadigh, Phys. Rev. Lett. 85 , 594 (2000).\n- [51] P. J. Camp, Phys. Rev. E 68 , 061506 (2003).\n- [52] G. Malescio and G. Pellicane, Phys. Rev. E 70 , 021202 (2004).\n- [53] Y. Norizoe and T. Kawakatsu, Europhys. Lett. 72 , 583 (2005).\n- [54] G. J. Pauschenwein and G. Kahl, Soft Matter, 4 , 1396 (2008).\n- [55] S. Prestipino, F. Saija and G. Malescio, Soft Matter, 2009, DOI: 10.1039/b903931g.\n- [56] F. Saija, S. Prestipino, and G. Malescio, Phys. Rev. E 80 , 031502 (2009).\n- [57] S V Buldyrev, G Malescio, C A Angell, N Giovambattista, S Prestipino, F Saija, H E Stanley and L Xu, J. Phys.: Condens. Matter 21 , 504106 (2009).\n- [58] S.N. Chakraborty and Ch. Chakravarty J. Chem. Phys. 124 , 014507 (2006).\n- [59] F.H. Stillinger, J. Chem. Phys. 65 , 3968 (1976).\n- [60] B.M. Mladek, M.J. Fernaud, G. Kahl, and M. Neumann, Condens. Matt. Phys. 8 , 135 (2005).\n- [61] B.M. Mladek, G.Kahl, and M. Neumann, J. Chem. Phys. 124 , 064503 (2006).\n- [62] S. Prestipino, F. Saija and P. Giaquinta, Phys. Rev. E, 71 , 050102(R) (2005).\n- [63] F. H. Stillinger, D. K. Stillinger, Physica A 244 , 358 (1997).\n- [64] P. Mausbach and H.-O. May, Fluid Phase Equilibria 249 , 17 (2006).\n- [65] P. Mausbach and H.-O. May, Proc. Appl. Math. Mech. 5 , 685 (2005).\n- [66] H.-O. May, P. Mausbach, Phys. Rev. E, 76 , 031201 (2007).\n- [67] J.C. P'mies, A. Cacciuto and D. Frenkel, J. Chem. Phys. a 131 , 044514 (2009).\n- [68] D. Frenkel, B. Smit 'Understanding Molecular Simulation' Academic Press (2002).\n- [69] A. Samanta, Sk. Musharaf Ali and S. K. Ghosh, Phys. Rev. Let. 87 , 245901.", + "recall": 0.9431438127090301, + "true_md": "11\n\n- [25] M. R. Sadr-Lahijany, A. Scala, S. V. Buldyrev and H. E. Stanley, Phys. Rev. E 60 , 6714 (1999).\n\n- [26] P. Kumar, S. V. Buldyrev, F. Sciortino, E. Zaccarelli, and H. E. Stanley, Phys. Rev. E 72 , 021501 (2005).\n\n- [27] L. Xu, S. V. Buldyrev, C. A. Angell, and H. E. Stanley, Phys. Rev. E 74 , 031108 (2006).\n\n- [28] E. A. Jagla, J. Chem. Phys. 111 , 8980 (1999); E. A. Jagla, Phys. Rev. E 63 , 061501 (2001).\n\n- [29] F. H. Stillinger and D. K. Stillinger, Physica (Amster- dam) 244A, 358 (1997).\n\n- [30] A. B. de Oliveira, P. A. Netz, T. Colla, and M. C. Bar- bosa, J. Chem. Phys. 124, 084505 (2006).\n\n- [31] A. B. de Oliveira, P. A. Netz, T. Colla, and M. C. Bar- bosa, J. Chem. Phys. 125 , 124503 (2006).\n\n- [32] P. A. Netz, S. Buldyrev, M. C. Barbosa and H. E. Stanley Phys. Rev. E 73 , 061504 (2006).\n\n- [48] S. Chapman and T.G. Cowling, The Mathematical The- ory of Non-Uniform Gases (Cambridge: Cambridge Uni- versity Press) (1970).\n\n- [49] M. Dzugutov, Nature, 381 , 137 (1996).\n\n- [50] J.J. Hoyt, M. Asta and B. Sadigh, Phys. Rev. Lett. 85 , 594 (2000).\n\n- [51] P. J. Camp, Phys. Rev. E 68 , 061506 (2003).\n\n- [52] G. Malescio and G. Pellicane, Phys. Rev. E 70 , 021202 (2004).\n\n- [53] Y. Norizoe and T. Kawakatsu, Europhys. Lett. 72 , 583 (2005).\n\n- [54] G. J. Pauschenwein and G. Kahl, Soft Matter, 4 , 1396 (2008).\n\n- [55] S. Prestipino, F. Saija and G. Malescio, Soft Matter, 2009, DOI: 10.1039/b903931g.\n\n- [56] F. Saija, S. Prestipino, and G. Malescio, Phys. Rev. E 80 , 031502 (2009).\n\n- [57] S V Buldyrev, G Malescio, C A Angell, N Giovambat- tista, S Prestipino, F Saija, H E Stanley and L Xu, J. Phys.: Condens. Matter 21 , 504106 (2009).\n\n- [58] S.N. Chakraborty and Ch. Chakravarty J. Chem. Phys. 124 , 014507 (2006).\n\n- [33] A. B. de Oliveira, M. C. Barbosa, and P. A. Netz, Physica A 386, 744 (2007).\n\n- [34] J. Mittal, J. R. Errington, and T. M. Truskett, J. Chem. Phys. 125, 076102 (2006).\n\n- [35] H. M. Gibson and N. B. Wilding, Phys. Rev. E 73, 061507 (2006).\n\n- [36] P. Camp, Phys. Rev. E 71, 031507 (2005).\n\n- [37] A. B. de Oliveira, G. Franzese, P. A. Netz, and M. C. Barbosa, J. Chem. Phys. 128, 064901 (2008).\n\n- [59] F.H. Stillinger, J. Chem. Phys. 65 , 3968 (1976).\n\n- [60] B.M. Mladek, M.J. Fernaud, G. Kahl, and M. Neumann, Condens. Matt. Phys. 8 , 135 (2005).\n\n- [38] L. Xu, S. Buldyrev, C. A. Angell, and H. E. Stanley, Phys. Rev. E 74, 031108 (2006).\n\n- [61] B.M. Mladek, G.Kahl, and M. Neumann, J. Chem. Phys. 124 , 064503 (2006).\n\n- [62] S. Prestipino, F. Saija and P. Giaquinta, Phys. Rev. E, 71 , 050102(R) (2005).\n\n- [39] A. B. de Oliveira, P. A. Netz, and M. C. Barbosa, Euro. Phys. J. B 64 , 481 (2008).\n\n- [40] A. B. de Oliveira, P. A. Netz, and M. C. Barbosa, arXiv:0804.2287v1.\n\n- [63] F. H. Stillinger, D. K. Stillinger, Physica A 244 , 358 (1997).\n\n- [64] P. Mausbach and H.-O. May, Fluid Phase Equilibria 249 , 17 (2006).\n\n- [41] Yu. D. Fomin, N. V. Gribova, V. N. Ryzhov, S. M. Stishov, and Daan Frenkel, J. Chem. Phys. 129 , 064512 (2008).\n\n- [65] P. Mausbach and H.-O. May, Proc. Appl. Math. Mech. 5 , 685 (2005).\n\n- [66] H.-O. May, P. Mausbach, Phys. Rev. E, 76 , 031201 (2007).\n\n- [67] J.C. P` amies, A. Cacciuto and D. Frenkel, J. Chem. Phys. 131 , 044514 (2009).\n\n- [42] V. N. Ryzhov and S. M. Stishov, Zh. Eksp. Teor. Fiz. 122 , 820 (2002)[JETP 95 , 710 (2002)].\n\n- [43] V. N. Ryzhov and S. M. Stishov, Phys. Rev. E 67 , 010201(R) (2003).\n\n- [44] Yu. D. Fomin, V. N. Ryzhov, and E. E. Tareyeva, Phys. Rev. E 74 , 041201 (2006).\n\n- [68] D. Frenkel, B. Smit ”Understanding Molecular Simula- tion” Academic Press (2002).\n\n- [69] A. Samanta, Sk. Musharaf Ali and S. K. Ghosh, Phys. Rev. Let. 87 , 245901.\n\n- [45] N. V. Gribova, Yu. D. Fomin, Daan Frenkel, V. N. Ryzhov, Phys. Rev. E 79 , 051202 (2009).\n\n- [46] Ya. Rosenfeld, Phys. Rev. A, 15 , 2545 (1977).\n\n- [47] Ya. Rosenfeld, J. Phys.: Condens. Matter 11 , 5415 (1999)." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9734876028394308, + "doc_id": "4b0b698be0fdc7116fa362d9bfd9188cb8b9ee48e51694dae3f906f6742660be", + "edit_distance": 0.5761589403973509, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.7741690724702049, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "2009 Fermi Symposium, Washington, D.C., Nov. 2-5\n\n5\n\n- J.G., MNRAS, 348, 1409 (2004).\n- [28] Bednarek, W., Sitarek, J., MNRAS, 377, 920 (2007).\n- [29] Venter, C., De Jager, O.-C., Clapson, A.-C., ApJ, 696, L52 (2009).\n- [30] Aharonian, F., et al., A&A, 499, 273 (2009).\n\neConf C091122\n\n- [31] Abdo, A.A, et al., ApJ Suppl. Ser. 183, 46 (2009).\n- [32] McLean, B.J., Greene, G.R., Lattanzi, M.G., Pirenne, B., ASP Conf. Ser. 216, 145 (2000).", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "5\n\n2009 Fermi Symposium, Washington, D.C., Nov. 2-5\n\nJ.G., MNRAS, 348, 1409 (2004).\n\n- [31] Abdo, A.A, et al., ApJ Suppl. Ser. 183, 46 (2009).\n\n- [32] McLean, B.J., Greene, G.R., Lattanzi, M.G., Pirenne, B., ASP Conf. Ser. 216, 145 (2000).\n\n- [28] Bednarek, W., Sitarek, J., MNRAS, 377, 920 (2007).\n\n- [29] Venter, C., De Jager, O.-C., Clapson, A.-C., ApJ, 696, L52 (2009).\n\n- [30] Aharonian, F., et al., A&A, 499, 273 (2009).\n\neConf C091122" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6858492681448628, + "doc_id": "daf851778a1cff4702f29e4e815ef826d191b127a8839127de47b12e153623c2", + "edit_distance": 0.5288611544461779, + "f1_score": 0.953995157384988, + "meteor": 0.7580288879356591, + "precision": 0.985, + "pred_md": "FIG. 5: Rosenfeld excess entropy scaling of diffusion coefficient for a set of ten isotherms for Herzian spheres system. The inset shows several high temperature isotherms in the enlarged scale.\n\nFIG. 5: Rosenfeld excess entropy scaling of diffusion coefficient for a set of ten isotherms for Herzian spheres system. The inset shows several high temperature isotherms in the enlarged scale.\n\nthe case of Herzian spheres there is no region '3' in the low temperature curves of the GCM. We suppose that this region corresponds to the higher densities which we do not consider in the present study. At low temperatures most of the points belong to the region '2'. However this region depresses with the temperature increase. Although even at the temperature as high as T = 2 0 . which is around 200 times higher then melting temperature of GCM the curve still demonstrates a bend from a straight line at high densities.\n\nFinally Fig. 10 shows the whole set of isotherms investigated in the present study. As one can see from this figure the system comes more close to the Rosenfeld relation with increasing the temperature. One can expect that at infinitely high temperatures the excess entropy relation is valid for the GCM, however in the temperatures range studied here, i.e. to approximately 200 · T mels a deviation from the linear behavior is still observed.\n\n## Soft Repulsive Shoulder Model\n\nThe last model considered in the present work is the soft repulsive shoulder potential (8). In the works [41, 45] it has already been shown that this system demonstrates anomalous behavior of diffusion at low temperatures and densities corresponding to the region where a competition between the characteristic length scales σ and σ 1 takes place. This competition gives the great complexity of the phase diagram of the system [41, 45], so one can expect\n\nFig. 11 represents the diffusion coefficient for the soft repulsive shoulder system with σ 1 = 1 35 for . a set of temperatures and densities. One can see that at T = 0 25 . an inflection point in the diffusion coefficient curve occurs which then develops into a loop ( T = 0 2). .\n\nFig. 11 represents the diffusion coefficient for the soft repulsive shoulder system with σ 1 = 1 35 for . a set of temperatures and densities. One can see that at T = 0 25 . an inflection point in the diffusion coefficient curve occurs which then develops into a loop ( T = 0 2). .\n\nFIG. 6: Diffusion coefficient of GCM for a set of isotherms. (a) T = 0 04; 0 07 and 0 1; (b) -. . . T = 0 5; 1 0 and 2 0. . . .\n\nFIG. 6: Diffusion coefficient of GCM for a set of isotherms. (a) T = 0 04; 0 07 and 0 1; (b) -. . . T = 0 5; 1 0 and 2 0. . . .\n\nthat the thermodynamic quantities, in particular entropy which is of the interest of the present study, also have a complex behavior in this region of densities. Taking into account the complex behavior of both entropy and diffusion coefficient it is interesting to check the Rosenfeld relation for this system.\n\nBoth pair and full excess entropies were considered for this potential. Fig. 12 (a) and (b) show the behavior\n\n6", + "recall": 0.9248826291079812, + "true_md": "6\n\nFIG. 5: Rosenfeld excess entropy scaling of diffusion coeffi- cient for a set of ten isotherms for Herzian spheres system. The inset shows several high temperature isotherms in the enlarged scale.\n\nFIG. 6: Diffusion coefficient of GCM for a set of isotherms. (a) - T = 0 . 04; 0 . 07 and 0 . 1; (b) - T = 0 . 5; 1 . 0 and 2 . 0.\n\nthe case of Herzian spheres there is no region ’3’ in the low temperature curves of the GCM. We suppose that this region corresponds to the higher densities which we do not consider in the present study. At low tempera- tures most of the points belong to the region ’2’. How- ever this region depresses with the temperature increase. Although even at the temperature as high as T = 2 . 0 which is around 200 times higher then melting tempera- ture of GCM the curve still demonstrates a bend from a straight line at high densities.\n\nFinally Fig. 10 shows the whole set of isotherms in- vestigated in the present study. As one can see from this figure the system comes more close to the Rosenfeld re- lation with increasing the temperature. One can expect that at infinitely high temperatures the excess entropy relation is valid for the GCM, however in the tempera- tures range studied here, i.e. to approximately 200 · T$_{mels}$ a deviation from the linear behavior is still observed.\n\nthat the thermodynamic quantities, in particular entropy which is of the interest of the present study, also have a complex behavior in this region of densities. Taking into account the complex behavior of both entropy and diffusion coefficient it is interesting to check the Rosenfeld relation for this system.\n\nThe last model considered in the present work is the soft repulsive shoulder potential (8). In the works [41, 45] it has already been shown that this system demonstrates anomalous behavior of diffusion at low temperatures and densities corresponding to the region where a competition between the characteristic length scales σ and σ 1 takes place. This competition gives the great complexity of the phase diagram of the system [41, 45], so one can expect\n\nFig. 11 represents the diffusion coefficient for the soft repulsive shoulder system with σ 1 = 1 . 35 for a set of temperatures and densities. One can see that at T = 0 . 25 an inflection point in the diffusion coefficient curve occurs which then develops into a loop ( T = 0 . 2).\n\nBoth pair and full excess entropies were considered for this potential. Fig. 12 (a) and (b) show the behavior\n\n## Soft Repulsive Shoulder Model" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7415733564701563, + "doc_id": "af7036cd602b00b7ee17163352976247911e46ecf647aeb64db466cd895e22ef", + "edit_distance": 0.8157689305230289, + "f1_score": 0.9032258064516129, + "meteor": 0.5969942271583415, + "precision": 0.9411764705882353, + "pred_md": "FIG. 3: Fractional coverage Θ in thermal equilibrium of Ni in a (a) monovacancy, (b) divacancy I, (c) divacancy II and (d) change in resistance ∆ R per dopant site as a function of CO concentration in a background of air at room temperature and 1 bar of pressure. The reference concentration of CO is taken to be C 0 = 0.1 ppm. Note the change from linear to log scale on the y -axis at ∆ R = 10 Ω .\n\nFIG. 3: Fractional coverage Θ in thermal equilibrium of Ni in a (a) monovacancy, (b) divacancy I, (c) divacancy II and (d) change in resistance ∆ R per dopant site as a function of CO concentration in a background of air at room temperature and 1 bar of pressure. The reference concentration of CO is taken to be C 0 = 0.1 ppm. Note the change from linear to log scale on the y -axis at ∆ R = 10 Ω .\n\nFor a given background composition we may thus estimate the fractional coverages for each available adsorbate for a given type of doping. As an example, Fig. 3(a)-(c) shows the fractional coverage of a Ni atom occupying a monovacancy, divacancy I, and divacancy II, versus CO concentration in a background of air at room temperature and 1 bar of pressure. Due to the relatively small binding energy of N2 and H2O as compared to O2 and CO, all Ni sites will be either empty or occupied by O2 or CO. In particular, Ni in a monovacancy (top panel of Fig. 3) will be completely oxidized for all relevant CO concentrations. For the Ni occupied divacancy II structures we find the coverage of CO changes significantly around toxic concentrations ( ∼ 10 ppm).\n\nTo estimate the effect of adsorbates on the electrical conductance of doped CNTs, we first consider the change in conductance when a single molecule is adsorbed on a metal site of an otherwise pristine CNT. In Fig. 2(b) we show the calculated change in conductance relative to the metal site with no adsorbate. In contrast to the binding energies, there are no clear trends in the conductances. The sensitivity of the conductance is perhaps most clearly demonstrated by the absence of correlation between different types of vacancies, i.e. between the three panels in Fig. 2(b). Close to the Fermi level, the conductance of a perfect armchair CNT equals 2 G 0 . The presence of the metal dopant leads to several dips in the transmission function known as Fano antiresonances [20]. The position and shape of these dips depend on the d -levels of the transition metal atom, the character of its bonding to the CNT, and is further affected by the presence of the adsorbate molecule. The coupling of all these factors is very complex and makes it difficult to estimate or rationalize the value of the conductance. For the spin polarized cases, we use the spin-averaged\n\n3\n\nconductances, i.e. G = ( G ↑ + G ↓ ) / 2.\n\nNext, we estimate the resistance of a CNT containing several impurities (a specific metal dopant with different molecular adsorbates). Under the assumption that the electron phasecoherence length, l φ , is smaller than the average distance between the dopants, d , we may neglect quantum interference and obtain the total resistance by adding the scattering resistances due to each impurity separately. The scattering resistance due to a single impurity is given by\n\n\n\nwhere G X ( ) is the Landauer conductance of the pristine CNT with a single metal dopant occupied by molecule X and 1 / ( 2 G 0 ) is the contact resistance of a (6,6) CNT.\n\nWe may now obtain the total resistance per dopant site relative to the reference background signal as a function of the target molecule concentration\n\n\n\nwhere N is the number of dopants, Θ[ X,C ] is the fractional coverage of species X at concentration C of the target and C 0 is the reference concentration. Notice that the contact resistance drops out as we evaluate a change in resistance.\n\nIn Fig. 3(d) we show the change in resistance calculated from Eq. (7) as a function of CO concentration for Ni occupying the three types of vacancies. The background reference concentration of CO is taken to be C 0 = 0 1 . ppm. For the monovacancy there is very little change in resistivity. This is because most active sites are blocked by O2 at relevant CO concentrations, as shown in the upper panel of Fig. 3. For Ni in the divacancies there is, however, a change in resistance on the order of 1Ω per site. For concentrations above ∼ 1 ppm, the CO coverage of Ni in the divacancy II increases dramatically and this leads to a significant increase in resistance.\n\nWe now return to the discussion of the validity of Eq. (7). As mentioned, the series coupling of individual scatterers should be valid when l φ < d . However, even for l φ > d and assuming that the Anderson localization length, l loc in the system exceeds l φ , Eq. (7) remains valid if one replaces the actual resistance R by the sample averaged resistance 〈 R 〉 [29]. At room temperature under ambient conditions, interactions with external degrees of freedom such as internal CNT phonons and vibrational modes of the adsorbed molecules would rapidly randomize the phase of the electrons. Therefore Eq. (7) should certainly be valid in the limit of low doping concentrations. On the other hand, the total number of dopants, N , should be large enough for the statistical treatment of the coverage to hold. Finally, we stress that Eq. (7) represents a conservative estimate of the change in resistance. In fact, in the regime where l φ > l loc , i.e. in the Anderson localization regime, the resistance would be highly sensitive to changes in the fractional coverage of active sites. Calculation of the actual resistance of the CNT in this regime would, however, involve a full transport calculation in the presence of", + "recall": 0.8682170542635659, + "true_md": "3\n\nconductances, i.e. G = ( G$_{↑}$ + G$_{↓}$ ) / 2.\n\nNext, we estimate the resistance of a CNT containing sev- eral impurities (a specific metal dopant with different molecu- lar adsorbates). Under the assumption that the electron phase- coherence length, l$_{φ}$ , is smaller than the average distance be- tween the dopants, d , we may neglect quantum interference and obtain the total resistance by adding the scattering resis- tances due to each impurity separately. The scattering resis- tance due to a single impurity is given by\n\nwhere G ( X ) is the Landauer conductance of the pristine CNT with a single metal dopant occupied by molecule X and 1 / ( 2 G$_{0}$ ) is the contact resistance of a (6,6) CNT.\n\nWe may now obtain the total resistance per dopant site rel- ative to the reference background signal as a function of the target molecule concentration\n\nFIG. 3: Fractional coverage Θ in thermal equilibrium of Ni in a (a) monovacancy, (b) divacancy I, (c) divacancy II and (d) change in resistance Δ R per dopant site as a function of CO concentration in a background of air at room temperature and 1 bar of pressure. The reference concentration of CO is taken to be C$_{0}$ = 0.1 ppm. Note the change from linear to log scale on the y -axis at Δ R = 10 Ω .\n\n$$R$_{s}$ ( X ) = 1 /G ( X ) − 1 / ( 2 G$_{0}$ ) , (6)$$\n\n$$Δ R N ≈ ∑ X R$_{s}$ ( X )(Θ[ X,C ] − Θ[ X,C$_{0}$ ]) , (7)$$\n\nFor a given background composition we may thus estimate the fractional coverages for each available adsorbate for a given type of doping. As an example, Fig. 3(a)-(c) shows the fractional coverage of a Ni atom occupying a monovacancy, divacancy I, and divacancy II, versus CO concentration in a background of air at room temperature and 1 bar of pressure. Due to the relatively small binding energy of N$_{2}$ and H$_{2}$O as compared to O$_{2}$ and CO, all Ni sites will be either empty or occupied by O$_{2}$ or CO. In particular, Ni in a monovacancy (top panel of Fig. 3) will be completely oxidized for all rel- evant CO concentrations. For the Ni occupied divacancy II structures we find the coverage of CO changes significantly around toxic concentrations ( ∼ 10 ppm).\n\nIn Fig. 3(d) we show the change in resistance calculated from Eq. (7) as a function of CO concentration for Ni occu- pying the three types of vacancies. The background reference concentration of CO is taken to be C$_{0}$ = 0 . 1 ppm. For the monovacancy there is very little change in resistivity. This is because most active sites are blocked by O$_{2}$ at relevant CO concentrations, as shown in the upper panel of Fig. 3. For Ni in the divacancies there is, however, a change in resistance on the order of 1Ω per site. For concentrations above ∼ 1 ppm, the CO coverage of Ni in the divacancy II increases dramati- cally and this leads to a significant increase in resistance.\n\nwhere N is the number of dopants, Θ[ X,C ] is the fractional coverage of species X at concentration C of the target and C$_{0}$ is the reference concentration. Notice that the contact resis- tance drops out as we evaluate a change in resistance.\n\nWe now return to the discussion of the validity of Eq. (7). As mentioned, the series coupling of individual scatterers should be valid when l$_{φ}$ < d . However, even for l$_{φ}$ > d and assuming that the Anderson localization length, l$_{loc}$ in the system exceeds l$_{φ}$ , Eq. (7) remains valid if one replaces the actual resistance R by the sample averaged resistance 〈 R 〉 [29]. At room temperature under ambient conditions, interac- tions with external degrees of freedom such as internal CNT phonons and vibrational modes of the adsorbed molecules would rapidly randomize the phase of the electrons. There- fore Eq. (7) should certainly be valid in the limit of low dop- ing concentrations. On the other hand, the total number of dopants, N , should be large enough for the statistical treat- ment of the coverage to hold. Finally, we stress that Eq. (7) represents a conservative estimate of the change in resistance. In fact, in the regime where l$_{φ}$ > l$_{loc}$ , i.e. in the Anderson localization regime, the resistance would be highly sensitive to changes in the fractional coverage of active sites. Calcula- tion of the actual resistance of the CNT in this regime would, however, involve a full transport calculation in the presence of\n\nTo estimate the effect of adsorbates on the electrical con- ductance of doped CNTs, we first consider the change in con- ductance when a single molecule is adsorbed on a metal site of an otherwise pristine CNT. In Fig. 2(b) we show the calculated change in conductance relative to the metal site with no ad- sorbate. In contrast to the binding energies, there are no clear trends in the conductances. The sensitivity of the conductance is perhaps most clearly demonstrated by the absence of cor- relation between different types of vacancies, i.e. between the three panels in Fig. 2(b). Close to the Fermi level, the conduc- tance of a perfect armchair CNT equals 2 G$_{0}$ . The presence of the metal dopant leads to several dips in the transmission function known as Fano antiresonances [20]. The position and shape of these dips depend on the d -levels of the transi- tion metal atom, the character of its bonding to the CNT, and is further affected by the presence of the adsorbate molecule. The coupling of all these factors is very complex and makes it difficult to estimate or rationalize the value of the conduc- tance. For the spin polarized cases, we use the spin-averaged" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4591300194200478, + "doc_id": "f7677e01b93d489a1bb7b68e59e6bb47caa81929212fe59e44b8a9de2771d84d", + "edit_distance": 0.5187165775401069, + "f1_score": 0.9357798165137613, + "meteor": 0.8191205705753728, + "precision": 0.9807692307692307, + "pred_md": "/s32\n\nFIG. 3. (color online) (a) Polarization-averaged Mn L 2 3 , spectrum for a Fe/(Ga,Mn)As film; (b) XMCD spectra measured in remanence at 2 K; (c) XMCD spectra measured under a 1000 Oe applied field at 2 K; (d) XMCD spectrum measured under a 2000 Oe applied field at 300 K. XMCD spectra are obtained using TEY (thick red lines) and FY (thin blue lines) detection.\n\nFIG. 3. (color online) (a) Polarization-averaged Mn L 2 3 , spectrum for a Fe/(Ga,Mn)As film; (b) XMCD spectra measured in remanence at 2 K; (c) XMCD spectra measured under a 1000 Oe applied field at 2 K; (d) XMCD spectrum measured under a 2000 Oe applied field at 300 K. XMCD spectra are obtained using TEY (thick red lines) and FY (thin blue lines) detection.\n\n/s32\n\n6", + "recall": 0.8947368421052632, + "true_md": "6\n\nFIG. 3. (color online) (a) Polarization-averaged Mn L$_{2}$ $_{,}$3 spec- trum for a Fe/(Ga,Mn)As film; (b) XMCD spectra measured in remanence at 2 K; (c) XMCD spectra measured under a 1000 Oe applied field at 2 K; (d) XMCD spectrum measured under a 2000 Oe applied field at 300 K. XMCD spectra are obtained using TEY (thick red lines) and FY (thin blue lines) detection." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9164695450248536, + "doc_id": "808136b7da653a8fb3ef57db9440ae4569cde53193a5ef5a8b631f6879ce63b9", + "edit_distance": 0.16554809843400448, + "f1_score": 0.9479166666666669, + "meteor": 0.9457776328423618, + "precision": 0.9732620320855615, + "pred_md": "- [16] J. A. Leegwater, The Journal of Physical Chemistry 100 , 14403 (1996).\n- [17] A. G. Redfield, IBM Journal of Research and Development 1 , 19 (1957).\n- [18] W. T. Pollard and R. A. Friesner, The Journal of Chemical Physics 100 , 5054 (1994).\n- [19] A. Nitzan, Chemical Dynamics in Condensed Phases: Relaxation, Transfer, and Reactions in Condensed Molecular Systems (Oxford University Press, USA, 2006).\n- [20] M. Richter, K. J. Ahn, A. Knorr, A. Schliwa, D. Bimberg, M. E. Madjet, and T. Renger, physica status solidi (b) 243 , 2302 (2006).\n- [21] T. Renger and R. A. Marcus, The Journal of Chemical Physics 116 , 999710019 (2002).\n- [22] T. Calarco, A. Datta, P. Fedichev, E. Pazy, and P. Zoller, Physical Review A 68 , 012310 (2003).\n- [23] We consider a typical GaAs QD with deformation potentials D e = -14 6 . eV, D h = -4 8 . eV, mass density\n\n4\n\n- of ρ = 5 4 g/cm , speed of sound . 3 u = 5000 cm/s, and radius of l = 5 nm.\n- [24] O. Madelung, ed., Semiconductors: data handbook (Springer, Berlin, 2004), 3rd ed.\n- [25] G. D. Scholes, Annual Review of Physical Chemistry 54 , 57 (2003), ISSN 0066-426X.\n- [26] A. L. Rogach, T. A. Klar, J. M. Lupton, A. Meijerink, and J. Feldmann, Journal of Materials Chemistry 19 , 1208 (2009).\n- [27] I. L. Medintz and H. Mattoussi, Physical Chemistry Chemical Physics 11 , 17 (2009).\n- [28] D. Kim, S. Okahara, M. Nakayama, and Y. Shim, Physical Review B 78 , 153301 (2008).\n- [29] V. I. Klimov, Annual Review of Physical Chemistry 58 , 635 (2007).\n- [30] A. Nazir, B. W. Lovett, S. D. Barrett, J. H. Reina, and G. A. D. Briggs, Physical Review B 71 , 045334 (2005).", + "recall": 0.9238578680203046, + "true_md": "4\n\n- [16] J. A. Leegwater, The Journal of Physical Chemistry 100 , 14403 (1996).\n\n- [17] A. G. Redfield, IBM Journal of Research and Develop- ment 1 , 19 (1957).\n\n- [18] W. T. Pollard and R. A. Friesner, The Journal of Chem- ical Physics 100 , 5054 (1994).\n\n- [19] A. Nitzan, Chemical Dynamics in Condensed Phases: Relaxation, Transfer, and Reactions in Condensed Molec- ular Systems (Oxford University Press, USA, 2006).\n\n- [20] M. Richter, K. J. Ahn, A. Knorr, A. Schliwa, D. Bimberg, M. E. Madjet, and T. Renger, physica status solidi (b) 243 , 2302 (2006).\n\n- [21] T. Renger and R. A. Marcus, The Journal of Chemical Physics 116 , 999710019 (2002).\n\n- [22] T. Calarco, A. Datta, P. Fedichev, E. Pazy, and P. Zoller, Physical Review A 68 , 012310 (2003).\n\n- [23] We consider a typical GaAs QD with deformation po- tentials D e = − 14 . 6 eV, D h = − 4 . 8 eV, mass density\n\n- [24] O. Madelung, ed., Semiconductors: data handbook (Springer, Berlin, 2004), 3rd ed.\n\n- [25] G. D. Scholes, Annual Review of Physical Chemistry 54 , 57 (2003), ISSN 0066-426X.\n\n- [26] A. L. Rogach, T. A. Klar, J. M. Lupton, A. Meijerink, and J. Feldmann, Journal of Materials Chemistry 19 , 1208 (2009).\n\n- [27] I. L. Medintz and H. Mattoussi, Physical Chemistry Chemical Physics 11 , 17 (2009).\n\n- [28] D. Kim, S. Okahara, M. Nakayama, and Y. Shim, Phys- ical Review B 78 , 153301 (2008).\n\n- [29] V. I. Klimov, Annual Review of Physical Chemistry 58 , 635 (2007).\n\n- [30] A. Nazir, B. W. Lovett, S. D. Barrett, J. H. Reina, and G. A. D. Briggs, Physical Review B 71 , 045334 (2005).\n\nof ρ = 5 . 4 g/cm $^{3}$, speed of sound u = 5000 cm/s, and radius of l = 5 nm." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4365845888258155, + "doc_id": "36b838b5b795997e70eb0fce5f036207c7ef3b056f8dbe67d1b025f20f235596", + "edit_distance": 0.6175523349436393, + "f1_score": 0.9038112522686026, + "meteor": 0.5231124686299784, + "precision": 0.9431818181818182, + "pred_md": "the terms to give,\n\n\n\n\n\nSubstituting these expressions in the identity cos 2 α + sin 2 α = 1 we obtain\n\n\n\nWith\n\n\n\nthe center and\n\n\n\nthe radius. In order to recover the case where b → 0, we consider a Taylor expansion for the exponential up to second order in the exponential in Eq. (40) and up to first order in Eq. (41). The fact that this circle exists in the presence of a drag force is remarkable.\n\n## VI. CONCLUSIONS\n\nWe obtained an explicit form for the locus C m composed by the set of maxima of all the trajectories of a projectile launched at an initial velocity /vector V 0 , and in the presence of a linear drag force, -mb/vector v , i.e. C m is the locus of the apexes. In polar coordinates, C m is written in terms of the principal branch of the Lambert W function for negative values. This represents the parameterization of the curve by the polar angle θ m only and gives C m in a closed form and exhibits the deep relationship between the Lambert W function and the linear drag problem. The curvature of C m was calculated for different values of the dimensionless parameter ε ≡ bV /g 0 in two parameterizations. The first one, the polar parameterization, shows a maximum that slightly departs from the dragfree case in θ = 1 2 arctan(4 / / 3). A wider exploration of the functional dependence respect to ε is pending due to numerical accuracy in the calculation of the Lambert W function near the limit at x = -1 /e . In the case of a parameterization using the launch angle α there is not such a restriction. In this case, the curvature was calculated for a wide range of the parameter ε yielding maximum at angle values larger than those corresponding to maximum range. Comparison with the maximum skewness angle [12] was also done and the difference is larger than the previous one. As an addendum, we demostrate that the synchronous curve, in this case, is a circle as in the drag-free case.\n\n6\n\n## Acknowledgments\n\nThis work was supported by PROMEP 2115/35621. HHS thanks to M. Olivares-Becerril for useful discussions and encouragement.\n\n## Appendix A: Polar form of an Ellipse with origin at bottom.\n\nEllipse canonical form or the polar form with the origin considered in one of the focus are standard knowledge. In the present case, however, we require to consider the origin of coordinates located in the bottom of the ellipse, since, in the presence of a drag force, the launching origin is the only invariant point when we change the drag force value. To obtain the ellipse form, we depart from the drag-free solutions at the locus of the apexes,\n\n\n\nand\n\n\n\nbeing ρ ≡ V 2 0 g . With the help of the trigonometric relations sin 2 α = 2sin α cos α and 2 sin 2 = 1 -cos 2 α we transform the upper equations into\n\n\n\n\n\nTaking the squares in both expressions, summing them and arranging terms, we arrive to\n\n\n\nWhere we used the polar coordinates x m = r m cos θ m and y m = r m sin θ m . The solutions are r m = 0 and\n\n\n\nThe second one is the required form for the ellipse.\n\n## Appendix B: Drag-free limit for ˜ r\n\nIn order to obtain the drag-free limit for the locus C m given in Equation (13), we note that\n\n\n\nand that f ( α ) = sin α θ ( m ) cos α θ ( m ). The first expression is obtainable from the drag-free solutions Eqs. (A1) and (A2), and the second is obtained by setting b → 0 in Eq. (11).", + "recall": 0.867595818815331, + "true_md": "the terms to give,\n\nSubstituting these expressions in the identity cos 2 α + sin 2 α = 1 we obtain\n\nWith\n\nthe center and\n\nthe radius. In order to recover the case where b → 0, we consider a Taylor expansion for the exponential up to second order in the exponential in Eq. (40) and up to first order in Eq. (41). The fact that this circle exists in the presence of a drag force is remarkable.\n\nWe obtained an explicit form for the locus C m com- posed by the set of maxima of all the trajectories of a projectile launched at an initial velocity ⃗ V$_{0}$ , and in the presence of a linear drag force, − mb⃗ v , i.e. C m is the lo- cus of the apexes. In polar coordinates, C m is written in terms of the principal branch of the Lambert W function for negative values. This represents the parameterization of the curve by the polar angle θ$_{m}$ only and gives C m in a closed form and exhibits the deep relationship between the Lambert W function and the linear drag problem. The curvature of C m was calculated for different values of the dimensionless parameter ε ≡ bV$_{0}$/g in two param- eterizations. The first one, the polar parameterization, shows a maximum that slightly departs from the drag- free case in θ = 1 / 2 arctan(4 / 3). A wider exploration of the functional dependence respect to ε is pending due to numerical accuracy in the calculation of the Lambert W function near the limit at x = − 1 /e . In the case of a pa- rameterization using the launch angle α there is not such a restriction. In this case, the curvature was calculated for a wide range of the parameter ε yielding maximum at angle values larger than those corresponding to max- imum range. Comparison with the maximum skewness angle [12] was also done and the difference is larger than the previous one. As an addendum, we demostrate that the synchronous curve, in this case, is a circle as in the drag-free case.\n\nand that f ( α ) = sin α ( θ$_{m}$ ) cos α ( θ$_{m}$ ). The first expres- sion is obtainable from the drag-free solutions Eqs. (A1) and (A2), and the second is obtained by setting b → 0 in Eq. (11).\n\nWhere we used the polar coordinates x$_{m}$ = r$_{m}$ cos θ$_{m}$ and y$_{m}$ = r$_{m}$ sin θ$_{m}$ . The solutions are r$_{m}$ = 0 and\n\nThe second one is the required form for the ellipse.\n\nTaking the squares in both expressions, summing them and arranging terms, we arrive to\n\nbeing ρ ≡ V 2 0 g . With the help of the trigonometric re- lations sin 2 α = 2 sin α cos α and 2 sin 2 = 1 − cos 2 α we transform the upper equations into\n\nand\n\nEllipse canonical form or the polar form with the origin considered in one of the focus are standard knowledge. In the present case, however, we require to consider the origin of coordinates located in the bottom of the ellipse, since, in the presence of a drag force, the launching origin is the only invariant point when we change the drag force value. To obtain the ellipse form, we depart from the drag-free solutions at the locus of the apexes,\n\nThis work was supported by PROMEP 2115/35621. HHS thanks to M. Olivares-Becerril for useful discussions and encouragement.\n\n## Acknowledgments\n\n## Appendix A: Polar form of an Ellipse with origin at bottom.\n\n## Appendix B: Drag-free limit for ˜ r\n\n## VI. CONCLUSIONS\n\nIn order to obtain the drag-free limit for the locus C m given in Equation (13), we note that\n\n$$tan θ = (1 / 2) tan α (B1)$$\n\n$$r$_{m}$ ( θ$_{m}$ ) = 2 ρ sin θ$_{m}$ 1 + 3 sin 2 θ$_{m}$ . (A6)$$\n\n$$4 r$_{m}$ ρ ( r$_{m}$ ρ (1 + 3 sin 2 θ$_{m}$ $^{)}$− 2 sin θ$_{m}$ ) = 0 . (A5)$$\n\n$$sin 2 α = 2 x$_{m}$ ρ , (A3)$$\n\n$$cos 2 α $^{= 1}$− 4 y$_{m}$ ρ . (A4)$$\n\n$$x$_{m}$ = ρ sin α cos α, (A1)$$\n\n$$y$_{m}$ = ρ 2 sin 2 α, (A2)$$\n\n$$cos α = b V$_{0}$ x $^{1}$− $^{exp(}$− b ) , (37) b y − g $^{(1}$− bt − $^{exp(}$− bt ))$$\n\n$$$^{1}$− $^{exp(}$− sin α = b V$_{0}$ y − g b 2 $^{(1}$− bt − $^{exp(}$− bt )) $^{1}$− $^{exp(}$− bt ) . (38)$$\n\n$$x 2 + ( y − y$_{c}$ ( t )) 2 = R $^{2}$( t ) . (39)$$\n\n$$y$_{c}$ ( t ) = g b $_{2}$(1 − bt − $^{exp(}$− bt )) , (40)$$\n\n$$R ( t ) = V$_{0}$ b (1 − $^{exp(}$− bt )) , (41)$$\n\n6" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.03994057048017237, + "doc_id": "8a232858f50157bfa9d0510665902cb2e9fc25754fcb1720598b8aad1502bb10", + "edit_distance": 0.8568166992824527, + "f1_score": 0.9069212410501194, + "meteor": 0.17564040750402085, + "precision": 0.926829268292683, + "pred_md": "## Appendix B: Derivation of the Terms Generated by Second Order Perturbation of Inter-cluster Magnetic Interactions\n\nIn this Appendix we derive the second order perturbations of inter-cluster Heisenberg and spin-chirality interactions. The results can then be used to construct (16).\n\nFirst consider the perturbation λH perturbation = λ [ S j 1 · S k 1 + ( r S j 2 · S k 2 )], where r is a real number to be tuned later. Due to the fact mentioned in Subsection IVB, the action of H perturbation on any cluster singlet state will produce a state with total spin-1 for both cluster j and k . Thus the first order perturbation in (15) vanishes. And the second order perturbation term can be greatly simplified: operator (1 - P jk )[0 -H cluster j -H cluster k ] -1 (1 - P jk ) can be replaced by a c -number ( -2 J cluster ) -1 . Therefore the perturbation up to second order is\n\n\n\nThis is true for other perturbations considered later in this Appendix. The cluster j and cluster k parts can be separated, this term then becomes ( a, b = x, y, z ),\n\n\n\nThen use the fact that P j S a j/lscript S b jm P j = δ ab (1 / 3) P j ( S j/lscript · S jm ) P j by spin rotation symmetry, the perturbation becomes\n\n\n\nSo we can choose -( r λ 2 ) / (12 J cluster ) = -J x , and include the last intra-cluster S j 1 · S j 2 + S k 1 · S k 2 term in the first order perturbation.\n\nThe perturbation on x -links is then (not unique),\n\n\n\nwith λ x = √ 12 | J x | · J cluster , and r = sgn( J x ) is the sign of J x . The non-trivial terms produced by up to second order perturbation will be the τ x j τ x k term. Note that the last term in the above equation commutes with cluster Hamiltonians so it does not produce second or higher order perturbations.\n\n9\n\nSimilarly considering the following perturbation on y -links, λH perturbation = λ [ S j 1 · ( S k 3 -S k 4 ) + r S k 1 · ( S j 3 -S j 4 )]. Following similar procedures we get the second order perturbation from this term\n\n\n\nSo we can choose -( r λ 2 ) / (4 J cluster ) = -J y , and include the last intra-cluster S k 3 · S k 4 + r 2 S j 3 · S j 4 term in the first order perturbation.\n\nTherefore we can choose the following perturbation on y -links (not unique),\n\n\n\nwith λ y = √ 4 | J y | · J cluster , r = sgn( J y ) is the sign of J y . The τ z j τ z k term is again more difficult to get. We use the representation of τ z by spin-chirality (6). And consider the following perturbation\n\n\n\nThe first order term in (15) vanishes due to the same reason as before. There are four terms in the second order perturbation. The first one is\n\n\n\nFor the cluster j part we can use the same arguments as before, the H cluster j can be replaced by a c -number J cluster . For the cluster k part, consider the fact that S k 3 × S k 4 equals to the commutator -i [ S k 4 , S k 3 · S k 4 ], the action of S k 3 × S k 4 on physical singlet states of k will also only produce spin-1 state. So we can replace the H cluster k in the denominator by a c -number J cluster as well. Use spin rotation symmetry to separate the j and k parts, this term simplifies to\n\n\n\nUse ( S ) 2 = 3 4 and /\n\n\n\n", + "recall": 0.8878504672897196, + "true_md": "## Appendix B: Derivation of the Terms Generated by Second Order Perturbation of Inter-cluster Magnetic Interactions\n\n$$− λ 2 6 $_{J$_{cluster}$}$[ 9 + 9 r 2 8 + 2 r P $_{jk}$[ S$_{j}$$_{1}$ · ( S$_{j}$$_{3}$ − S$_{j}$$_{4}$ )][ S$_{k}$$_{1}$ · ( S$_{k}$$_{3}$ − S$_{k}$$_{4}$ )] P jk − (3 / 2) P $_{jk}$( S$_{k}$$_{3}$ · S$_{k}$$_{4}$ + r $^{2}$S$_{j}$$_{3}$ · S$_{j}$$_{4}$ ) P jk ] = − λ 2 6 $_{J$_{cluster}$}$[ 9 + 9 r 2 8 + 2 r (3 / 4) τ y j τ y k − (3 / 2) P $_{jk}$( S$_{k}$$_{3}$ · S$_{k}$$_{4}$ + r $^{2}$S$_{j}$$_{3}$ · S$_{j}$$_{4}$ ) P jk ]$$\n\n$$− λ 2 2 J$_{cluster}$ P $_{jk}$( H$_{perturbation}$ ) $^{2}$P jk$$\n\n$$λ$_{y}$ H$_{perturbation}$$_{, y}$ = λ$_{y}$ [ S$_{j}$$_{1}$ · S$_{k}$$_{1}$ + sgn( J$_{y}$ ) · ( S$_{j}$$_{3}$ − S$_{j}$$_{4}$ ) · ( S$_{k}$$_{3}$ − S$_{k}$$_{4}$ )] − | J$_{y}$ | ( S$_{j}$$_{3}$ · S$_{j}$$_{4}$ + S$_{k}$$_{3}$ S$_{k}$$_{4}$ ) √$$\n\n$$− λ 2 2 J$_{cluster}$ ∑ a,b [ P $_{j}$S a j $_{1}$S b j 1 P j · P $_{k}$S a k $_{1}$S b k 1 P k + 2 r P $_{j}$S a j $_{1}$S b j 2 P j · P $_{k}$S a k $_{1}$S b k 2 P k + r 2 $_{j}$S a j $_{2}$S b j 2 j $_{k}$S a k $_{2}$S b k 2 k ]$$\n\n$$λ 2 P $_{jk}$S$_{j}$$_{2}$ · ( S$_{k}$$_{3}$ × S$_{k}$$_{4}$ )(1 − P $_{jk}$) × [0 − H$_{cluster}$ j − H$_{cluster}$ $_{k}$] $^{−}$1 (1 − P $_{jk}$) S$_{j}$$_{2}$ · ( S$_{k}$$_{3}$ × S$_{k}$$_{4}$ ) P jk For the cluster j part we can use the same arguments$$\n\n$$− λ 2 6 $_{J$_{cluster}$}$[ 9 + 9 r 2 16 + 2 r P $_{jk}$( S$_{j}$$_{1}$ · S$_{j}$$_{2}$ )( S$_{k}$$_{1}$ · S$_{k}$$_{2}$ ) P jk ] = − λ 2 6 $_{J$_{cluster}$}$[ 9 + 9 r 2 16 + ( r/ 2) τ x j τ x k − r/ 2 − r P $_{jk}$( S$_{j}$$_{1}$ · S$_{j}$$_{2}$ + S$_{k}$$_{1}$ · S$_{k}$$_{2}$ ) P jk ] .$$\n\n$$λ$_{x}$ H$_{perturbation}$$_{, x}$ = λ$_{x}$ [ S$_{j}$$_{1}$ · S$_{k}$$_{1}$ + sgn( J$_{x}$ ) · ( S$_{j}$$_{2}$ · S$_{k}$$_{2}$ )] − J$_{x}$ ( S$_{j}$$_{1}$ · S$_{j}$$_{2}$ + S$_{k}$$_{1}$ · S$_{k}$$_{2}$ )$$\n\n$$− λ 2 6 J$_{cluster}$ P $_{j}$S$_{j}$$_{2}$ · S$_{j}$$_{2}$ P j · P $_{k}$( S$_{k}$$_{3}$ × S$_{k}$$_{4}$ ) · ( S$_{k}$$_{3}$ × S$_{k}$$_{4}$ ) P $_{k}$. Use ( S ) 2 = 3 / 4 and ( S$_{k}$$_{3}$ × S$_{k}$$_{4}$ ) · ( S$_{k}$$_{3}$ × S$_{k}$$_{4}$ ) = ∑ a,b ( S a k $_{3}$S b k $_{4}$S a k $_{3}$S b k 4 − S a k $_{3}$S b k $_{4}$S b k $_{3}$S a k $_{4}$) = ( S$_{k}$$_{3}$ · S$_{k}$$_{3}$ )( S$_{k}$$_{4}$ · S$_{k}$$_{4}$ ) − ∑ a,b S a k $_{3}$S b k $_{3}$[ δ$_{ab}$/ 2 − S a k $_{4}$S b k $_{4}$] = 9 / 16 + ( S$_{k}$$_{3}$ · S$_{k}$$_{4}$ )( S$_{k}$$_{3}$ · S$_{k}$$_{4}$ ) − (3 / 8)$$\n\n9\n\nSimilarly considering the following perturbation on y - links, λ H$_{perturbation}$ = λ [ S$_{j}$$\\_{1}$ · ( S$\\_{k}$$_{3}$ − S$_{k}$$\\_{4}$ ) + r S$\\_{k}$$_{1}$ · ( S$_{j}$$\\_{3}$ − S$\\_{j}$$_{4}$ )]. Following similar procedures we get the second order perturbation from this term\n\nIn this Appendix we derive the second order pertur- bations of inter-cluster Heisenberg and spin-chirality in- teractions. The results can then be used to construct (16).\n\nFirst consider the perturbation λ H$_{perturbation}$ = λ [ S$_{j}$$\\_{1}$ · S$\\_{k}$$_{1}$ + r ( S$_{j}$$\\_{2}$ · S$\\_{k}$$_{2}$ )], where r is a real number to be tuned later. Due to the fact mentioned in Subsection IV B, the action of H$_{perturbation}$ on any cluster singlet state will produce a state with total spin-1 for both cluster j and k . Thus the first order perturbation in (15) van- ishes. And the second order perturbation term can be greatly simplified: operator (1 − P $_{jk}$)[0 − H$_{cluster}$ j − H$_{cluster}$ $_{k}$] $^{$^{−}$1}$(1 − P $_{jk}$) can be replaced by a c -number ( − 2 J$_{cluster}$ ) $^{$^{−}$1}$. Therefore the perturbation up to second order is\n\nSo we can choose − ( r λ $^{2}$) / (4 J$_{cluster}$ ) = − J$_{y}$ , and include the last intra-cluster S$_{k}$$\\_{3}$ · S$\\_{k}$$_{4}$ + r $^{2}$S$_{j}$$\\_{3}$ · S$\\_{j}$$_{4}$ term in the first order perturbation.\n\nTherefore we can choose the following perturbation on y -links (not unique),\n\n− | | · with λ$_{y}$ = √ 4 | J$_{y}$ | · J$_{cluster}$ , r = sgn( J$_{y}$ ) is the sign of J$_{y}$ . The τ z j τ z k term is again more difficult to get. We use\n\n√ | | · The τ z j τ z k term is again more difficult to get. We use the representation of τ z by spin-chirality (6). And con- sider the following perturbation\n\n· × · × The first order term in (15) vanishes due to the same reason as before. There are four terms in the second order perturbation. The first one is\n\n$$H$_{perturbation}$ = S$_{j}$$_{2}$ · ( S$_{j}$$_{3}$ × S$_{j}$$_{4}$ ) + r S$_{k}$$_{2}$ · ( S$_{j}$$_{3}$ × S$_{j}$$_{4}$ ) The first order term in (15) vanishes due to the same$$\n\nThis is true for other perturbations considered later in this Appendix. The cluster j and cluster k parts can be separated, this term then becomes ( a, b = x, y, z ),\n\nThen use the fact that P $_{j}$S a $_{jℓ}$S b jm P j = δ$_{ab}$ (1 / 3) P $_{j}$( S$_{jℓ}$ · S$_{jm}$ ) P j by spin rotation symmetry, the perturbation be- comes\n\n− P · × P For the cluster j part we can use the same arguments as before, the H$_{cluster}$ j can be replaced by a c -number J$_{cluster}$ . For the cluster k part, consider the fact that S$_{k}$$\\_{3}$ × S$\\_{k}$$_{4}$ equals to the commutator − i [ S$_{k}$$\\_{4}$ , S$\\_{k}$$_{3}$ · S$_{k}$$\\_{4}$ ], the action of S$\\_{k}$$_{3}$ × S$_{k}$$\\_{4}$ on physical singlet states of k will also only produce spin-1 state. So we can replace the H$\\_{cluster}$ k in the denominator by a c -number J$\\_{cluster}$ as well. Use spin rotation symmetry to separate the j and k parts, this term simplifies to\n\nSo we can choose − ( r λ $^{2}$) / (12 J$_{cluster}$ ) = − J$_{x}$ , and include the last intra-cluster S$_{j}$$\\_{1}$ · S$\\_{j}$$_{2}$ + S$_{k}$$\\_{1}$ · S$\\_{k}$$_{2}$ term in the first order perturbation.\n\nThe perturbation on x -links is then (not unique),\n\nwith λ$_{x}$ = √ 12 | J$_{x}$ | · J$_{cluster}$ , and r = sgn( J$_{x}$ ) is the sign of J$_{x}$ . The non-trivial terms produced by up to second order perturbation will be the τ x j τ x k term. Note that the last term in the above equation commutes with cluster Hamiltonians so it does not produce second or higher order perturbations." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7968346670268793, + "doc_id": "4349b3f54770b84894d652efcc9c696597c98ddd87d7c7d80d50387c98488e1a", + "edit_distance": 0.4121265377855888, + "f1_score": 0.9437428243398392, + "meteor": 0.8645820806549596, + "precision": 0.9716312056737588, + "pred_md": "arXiv:1001.2449v1 [cond-mat.mtrl-sci] 14 Jan 2010\n\n## Exchange bias of a ferromagnetic semiconductor by a ferromagnetic metal\n\nK. Olejnik, 1, 2 P. Wadley, 3 J. Haigh, 3 K. W. Edmonds, 3 R. P. Campion, 3 A. W. Rushforth, 3 B. L. Gallagher, 3 C. T. Foxon, 3 T. Jungwirth, 2, 3 J. Wunderlich, 1, 2 S. S. Dhesi, 4 S. Cavill, 4 G. van der Laan, 4 and E. Arenholz 5\n\n1 Hitachi Cambridge Laboratory, Cambridge CB3 0HE, United Kingdom\n\n2 Institute of Physics ASCR, v.v.i., Cukrovarnicka 10, 16253 Praha 6, Czech Republic\n\n3 School of Physics and Astronomy, University of Nottingham, Nottingham NG7 2RD, United Kingdom 4 Diamond Light Source, Harwell Science and Innovation Campus, Didcot, Oxfordshire, OX11 0DE, United Kingdom Advanced Light Source, Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory, Berkeley, California 94720, USA\n\n5 (Dated: August 24, 2018)\n\nWe demonstrate an exchange bias in (Ga,Mn)As induced by antiferromagnetic coupling to a thin overlayer of Fe. Bias fields of up to 240 Oe are observed. Using element-specific x-ray magnetic circular dichroism measurements, we distinguish a strongly exchange coupled (Ga,Mn)As interface layer in addition to the biassed bulk of the (Ga,Mn)As film. The interface layer remains polarized at room temperature.\n\nPACS numbers: 75.70.Cn, 75.50.Pp, 75.50.Bb\n\nFerromagnetic (FM) semiconductors offer the prospect of combining high-density storage and gate-controlled logic in a single material. The realization of spin-valve devices from FM semiconductors requires the controlled switching of magnetization in adjacent layers between antiferromagnetic (AFM) and FM configurations. This has motivated several theoretical investigations of interlayer coupling in all-semiconductor devices 1 , and AFM coupling has recently been demonstrated in (Ga,Mn)As multilayers separated by p -type non-magnetic spacers . 2 However, the Curie temperature T C of (Ga,Mn)As is currently limited to 185 K in single layers 3 , and is typically much lower for layers embedded within a heterostructure , 2 which is an obstacle to the practical implementation of semiconductor spintronics.\n\nThe development of FM metal/FM semiconductor heterostructures has the potential to bring together the benefits of metal and semiconductor based spintronics, offering access to new functionalities and physical phenomena. Recent studies of MnAs/(Ga,Mn)As and NiFe/(Ga,Mn)As bilayer films have shown FM interlayer coupling and independent magnetization behavior, respectively 4,5 . Of particular interest is the Fe/(Ga,Mn)As system, since the growth of epitaxial Fe/GaAs(001) films is well-established . 6 Remarkably, a recent x-ray magnetic circular dichroism (XMCD) study has shown that Fe may induce a proximity polarization in the near-surface region of (Ga,Mn)As, antiparallel to the Fe moment and persisting even above room temperature . 7 Devices incorporating Fe/(Ga,Mn)As therefore offer the prospect of obtaining non-volatile room temperature spin-polarization in a semiconductor.\n\nUntil now, no information has been revealed about the coupling of Fe to (Ga,Mn)As layers away from the nearsurface region. At the surface, the (Ga,Mn)As layer may be highly non-stoichiometric and Mn-rich, due to its nonequilibrium nature 8,9 . Previously, Fe/(Ga,Mn)As layers were produced by a process including exposure to air followed by sputtering and annealing prior to Fe deposition,\n\nwhich may further disrupt the interface order. The origin of the interface magnetism then had to be inferred by comparison to a series of reference samples 7 . Demonstration of coupling between the bulk of the layers, i.e. , an exchange bias effect, would provide direct evidence of the interface magnetic order. Moreover, such coupling would offer new means of manipulating the FM semiconductor spin state and utilizing the proximity polarization effect in a spintronic device.\n\nHere, we demonstrate an antiferromagnetic coupling and exchange bias in Fe/(Ga,Mn)As bilayer films, by combining element-specific XMCD measurements and bulk-sensitive superconducting quantum interference device (SQUID) magnetometry. As with previous studies of FM metal/FM semiconductor bilayers 4,5 (and in contrast to AFM coupled FM metal/FM metal exchange bias structures 10,11 ) the layers are in direct contact without a non-magnetic spacer in between. We distinguish interface and bulk (Ga,Mn)As layers that are respectively strongly and weakly antiferromagnetically coupled to the Fe overlayer. In agreement with Ref. 7 , the interface layer remains polarized at room temperature.\n\nThe Fe and (Ga,Mn)As layers of the present study were both grown by molecular beam epitaxy in the same ultra-high vacuum system, in order to ensure a clean interface between them. The (Ga,Mn)As layer of thickness 10 to 50 nm was deposited on a GaAs(001) substrate at a temperature of 260 C, using previously established · methods 3,8 . A low Mn concentration of x ≈ 0 03 was . chosen in order to avoid the formation of compensating Mn interstitials. The substrate temperature was then reduced to ∼ 0 C, · before depositing a 2 nm Fe layer, plus a 2 nm Al capping layer. In-situ reflection high energy electron diffraction and ex-situ x-ray reflectivity and diffraction measurements confirmed that the layers are single-crystalline with sub-nm interface roughness. SQUID magnetometry measurements were performed using a Quantum Design Magnetic Property Measurement System. Mn and Fe L 2 3 , x-ray absorption and XMCD", + "recall": 0.9174107142857143, + "true_md": "# Exchange bias of a ferromagnetic semiconductor by a ferromagnetic metal\n\narXiv:1001.2449v1 [cond-mat.mtrl-sci] 14 Jan 2010\n\nK. Olejnik, 1, 2 P. Wadley, 3 J. Haigh, 3 K. W. Edmonds, 3 R. P. Campion, 3 A. W. Rushforth, 3 B. L. Gallagher, 3 C. T. Foxon, 3 T. Jungwirth, 2, 3 J. Wunderlich, 1, 2 S. S. Dhesi, 4 S. Cavill, 4 G. van der Laan, 4 and E. Arenholz 5\n\n$^{1}$Hitachi Cambridge Laboratory, Cambridge CB3 0HE, United Kingdom\n\n$^{2}$Institute of Physics ASCR, v.v.i., Cukrovarnicka 10, 16253 Praha 6, Czech Republic\n\n$^{3}$School of Physics and Astronomy, University of Nottingham, Nottingham NG7 2RD, United Kingdom\n\n$^{4}$Diamond Light Source, Harwell Science and Innovation Campus, Didcot, Oxfordshire, OX11 0DE, United Kingdom\n\n$^{5}$Advanced Light Source, Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory, Berkeley, California 94720, USA (Dated: August 24, 2018)\n\nWe demonstrate an exchange bias in (Ga,Mn)As induced by antiferromagnetic coupling to a thin overlayer of Fe. Bias fields of up to 240 Oe are observed. Using element-specific x-ray magnetic circular dichroism measurements, we distinguish a strongly exchange coupled (Ga,Mn)As interface layer in addition to the biassed bulk of the (Ga,Mn)As film. The interface layer remains polarized at room temperature.\n\nPACS numbers: 75.70.Cn, 75.50.Pp, 75.50.Bb\n\nFerromagnetic (FM) semiconductors offer the prospect of combining high-density storage and gate-controlled logic in a single material. The realization of spin-valve devices from FM semiconductors requires the controlled switching of magnetization in adjacent layers between antiferromagnetic (AFM) and FM configurations. This has motivated several theoretical investigations of inter- layer coupling in all-semiconductor devices $^{1}$, and AFM coupling has recently been demonstrated in (Ga,Mn)As multilayers separated by p -type non-magnetic spacers $^{2}$. However, the Curie temperature T$_{C}$ of (Ga,Mn)As is currently limited to 185 K in single layers $^{3}$, and is typically much lower for layers embedded within a heterostructure $^{2}$, which is an obstacle to the practical implementation of semiconductor spintronics.\n\nThe development of FM metal/FM semiconductor het- erostructures has the potential to bring together the benefits of metal and semiconductor based spintron- ics, offering access to new functionalities and physi- cal phenomena. Recent studies of MnAs/(Ga,Mn)As and NiFe/(Ga,Mn)As bilayer films have shown FM in- terlayer coupling and independent magnetization be- havior, respectively $^{4,5}$. Of particular interest is the Fe/(Ga,Mn)As system, since the growth of epitaxial Fe/GaAs(001) films is well-established $^{6}$. Remarkably, a recent x-ray magnetic circular dichroism (XMCD) study has shown that Fe may induce a proximity polariza- tion in the near-surface region of (Ga,Mn)As, antipar- allel to the Fe moment and persisting even above room temperature $^{7}$. Devices incorporating Fe/(Ga,Mn)As therefore offer the prospect of obtaining non-volatile room temperature spin-polarization in a semiconductor. Until now, no information has been revealed about the coupling of Fe to (Ga,Mn)As layers away from the near- surface region. At the surface, the (Ga,Mn)As layer may be highly non-stoichiometric and Mn-rich, due to its non- equilibrium nature $^{8,9}$. Previously, Fe/(Ga,Mn)As layers were produced by a process including exposure to air fol- lowed by sputtering and annealing prior to Fe deposition,\n\nThe Fe and (Ga,Mn)As layers of the present study were both grown by molecular beam epitaxy in the same ultra-high vacuum system, in order to ensure a clean in- terface between them. The (Ga,Mn)As layer of thickness 10 to 50 nm was deposited on a GaAs(001) substrate at a temperature of 260 ◦ C, using previously established methods $^{3,8}$. A low Mn concentration of x ≈ 0 . 03 was chosen in order to avoid the formation of compensating Mn interstitials. The substrate temperature was then reduced to ∼ 0 ◦ C, before depositing a 2 nm Fe layer, plus a 2 nm Al capping layer. In-situ reflection high energy electron diffraction and ex-situ x-ray reflectivity and diffraction measurements confirmed that the layers are single-crystalline with sub-nm interface roughness. SQUID magnetometry measurements were performed us- ing a Quantum Design Magnetic Property Measurement System. Mn and Fe L$_{2}$$\\_{,}$$_{3}$ x-ray absorption and XMCD\n\nHere, we demonstrate an antiferromagnetic coupling and exchange bias in Fe/(Ga,Mn)As bilayer films, by combining element-specific XMCD measurements and bulk-sensitive superconducting quantum interference de- vice (SQUID) magnetometry. As with previous studies of FM metal/FM semiconductor bilayers 4,5 (and in con- trast to AFM coupled FM metal/FM metal exchange bias structures $^{10,11}$) the layers are in direct contact without a non-magnetic spacer in between. We distinguish in- terface and bulk (Ga,Mn)As layers that are respectively strongly and weakly antiferromagnetically coupled to the Fe overlayer. In agreement with Ref. $^{7}$, the interface layer remains polarized at room temperature.\n\nwhich may further disrupt the interface order. The ori- gin of the interface magnetism then had to be inferred by comparison to a series of reference samples $^{7}$. Demonstra- tion of coupling between the bulk of the layers, i.e. , an exchange bias effect, would provide direct evidence of the interface magnetic order. Moreover, such coupling would offer new means of manipulating the FM semiconductor spin state and utilizing the proximity polarization effect in a spintronic device." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7009508439205355, + "doc_id": "566e5dc0483ef15f75d52cc958692c89542450087a675f2bd7cfff8a6417b036", + "edit_distance": 0.3426791277258567, + "f1_score": 0.9054878048780487, + "meteor": 0.7626191191054525, + "precision": 0.9519230769230769, + "pred_md": "arXiv:1001.3103v2 [hep-th] 19 Mar 2010\n\n## More on the renormalization of the horizon function of the Gribov-Zwanziger action and the Kugo-Ojima Green function(s)\n\nD. Dudal , a ∗ S.P. Sorella , b † and N. Vandersickel a ‡ a\n\nGhent University, Department of Mathematical Physics and Astronomy Krijgslaan 281-S9, B-9000 Gent, Belgium\n\nb Departamento de F´ ısica Te´ orica, Instituto de F´ ısica, UERJ - Universidade do Estado do Rio de Janeiro Rua S˜ ao Francisco Xavier 524, 20550-013 Maracan˜, a Rio de Janeiro, Brasil\n\nIn this paper we provide strong evidence that there is no ambiguity in the choice of the horizon function underlying the Gribov-Zwanziger action. We show that there is only one correct possibility which is determined by the requirement of multiplicative renormalizability. As a consequence, this means that relations derived from other horizon functions cannot be given a consistent interpretation in terms of a local and renormalizable quantum field theory. In addition, we also discuss that the Kugo-Ojima functions u p ( 2 ) and w p ( 2 ) can only be defined after renormalization of the underlying Green function(s).\n\nPACS numbers: 11.10.Gh\n\n## I. INTRODUCTION\n\nIn 1977, Gribov [1] showed, in a saddle point approximation, that the restriction of the Euclidean functional integral to the Gribov region Ω has far reaching implications for the infrared behavior of the ghost and the gluon propagator. We recall that the region Ω is defined as the set of field configurations fulfilling the Landau gauge condition and for which the Faddeev-Popov operator,\n\n\n\nis strictly positive. Therefore,\n\n\n\nLater on, in a series of works, Zwanziger [2-5] elaborated on Gribov's approximation, being able to extend the previous results order by order at the quantum level. This resulted in an improvement of the Faddeev-Popov action which is now called the Gribov-Zwanziger action. In particular, the Gribov-Zwanziger action leads to a ghost propagator which is enhanced in the infrared region, a feature which has been confirmed by explicit two loop calculations in [6, 7], which constitute a nontrivial check of the predictions of the Gribov-Zwanziger formalism.\n\nRecently, it has been claimed [8-10] that the GribovZwanziger action is plagued by a certain ambiguity. Depending on the choice of the so called horizon function [2], different results for the ghost propagator might be\n\n∗ Electronic address: david.dudal@ugent.be\n\n† Electronic address: sorella@uerj.br\n\n‡ Electronic address: nele.vandersickel@ugent.be\n\nfound, namely: an enhanced or a non-enhanced ghost, according to [8-10]. Also, the recent lattice results seem to point towards a non-enhanced ghost[42] [11-15]. A natural conclusion would seem to be that one should take the horizon function which leads to the non-enhanced ghost. However, this does not agree with the original results by Gribov and Zwanziger and therefore asks for an explanation.\n\nIn this paper, we would like to clear the situation. We shall show that there is no ambiguity in the choice of the horizon function. The correct form of the horizon function is the one originally constructed by Zwanziger [4], and is clearly dictated by the renormalization properties of the Gribov-Zwanziger action. We stress that renormalization is of paramount importance for defining meaningful Green functions. A dynamical improvement of this Gribov-Zwanziger action, consistent with the renormalization, consequently allows to obtain the non-enhanced ghost, as discussed in previous work [21, 22], giving results compatible with other analytical approaches [18, 23-26], based on the Schwinger-Dyson formalism, see also [27].\n\nAs a corollary of the present analysis, we shall elaborate on the meaning of the Kugo-Ojima functions u p ( 2 ) and w p ( 2 ) defined as follows [28, 29]\n\n\n\nand their meaning at the level of renormalization, shedding more light on certain claims in [8-10]. We shall also discuss about several results obtained in the literature [8-10], where the other choice of the horizon function was investigated. As we shall show that this particular", + "recall": 0.8633720930232558, + "true_md": "# More on the renormalization of the horizon function of the Gribov-Zwanziger action and the Kugo-Ojima Green function(s)\n\nD. Dudal $^{a}$, ∗ S.P. Sorella $^{b}$, † and N. Vandersickel a ‡\n\na Ghent University, Department of Mathematical Physics and Astronomy Krijgslaan 281-S9, B-9000 Gent, Belgium\n\nb Departamento de F´ısica Te´ orica, Instituto de F´ısica, UERJ - Universidade do Estado do Rio de Janeiro Rua S˜ ao Francisco Xavier 524, 20550-013 Maracan˜ a, Rio de Janeiro, Brasil\n\nIn this paper we provide strong evidence that there is no ambiguity in the choice of the horizon function underlying the Gribov-Zwanziger action. We show that there is only one correct possibility which is determined by the requirement of multiplicative renormalizability. As a consequence, this means that relations derived from other horizon functions cannot be given a consistent interpretation in terms of a local and renormalizable quantum field theory. In addition, we also discuss that the Kugo-Ojima functions u ( p $^{2}$) and w ( p $^{2}$) can only be defined after renormalization of the underlying Green function(s).\n\nPACS numbers: 11.10.Gh\n\nIn 1977, Gribov [1] showed, in a saddle point approx- imation, that the restriction of the Euclidean functional integral to the Gribov region Ω has far reaching implica- tions for the infrared behavior of the ghost and the gluon propagator. We recall that the region Ω is defined as the set of field configurations fulfilling the Landau gauge condition and for which the Faddeev-Popov operator,\n\nLater on, in a series of works, Zwanziger [2–5] elaborated on Gribov’s approximation, being able to extend the previous results order by order at the quantum level. This resulted in an improvement of the Faddeev-Popov action which is now called the Gribov-Zwanziger action. In particular, the Gribov-Zwanziger action leads to a ghost propagator which is enhanced in the infrared region, a feature which has been confirmed by explicit two loop calculations in [6, 7], which constitute a non- trivial check of the predictions of the Gribov-Zwanziger formalism.\n\nRecently, it has been claimed [8–10] that the Gribov- Zwanziger action is plagued by a certain ambiguity. Depending on the choice of the so called horizon function [2], different results for the ghost propagator might be\n\nfound, namely: an enhanced or a non-enhanced ghost, according to [8–10]. Also, the recent lattice results seem to point towards a non-enhanced ghost[42] [11–15]. A natural conclusion would seem to be that one should take the horizon function which leads to the non-enhanced ghost. However, this does not agree with the original results by Gribov and Zwanziger and therefore asks for an explanation.\n\nIn this paper, we would like to clear the situation. We shall show that there is no ambiguity in the choice of the horizon function. The correct form of the horizon function is the one originally constructed by Zwanziger [4], and is clearly dictated by the renormalization properties of the Gribov-Zwanziger action. We stress that renormalization is of paramount importance for defining meaningful Green functions. A dynamical improvement of this Gribov-Zwanziger action, consistent with the renormalization, consequently allows to obtain the non-enhanced ghost, as discussed in previous work [21, 22], giving results compatible with other analytical approaches [18, 23–26], based on the Schwinger-Dyson formalism, see also [27].\n\nAs a corollary of the present analysis, we shall elaborate on the meaning of the Kugo-Ojima functions u ( p $^{2}$) and w ( p $^{2}$) defined as follows [28, 29]\n\nand their meaning at the level of renormalization, shed- ding more light on certain claims in [8–10]. We shall also discuss about several results obtained in the literature [8–10], where the other choice of the horizon function was investigated. As we shall show that this particular\n\n$$∫ d $^{d}$x d $^{d}$yeip ( x − y ) 〈 ( gf$_{abc}$A b $_{µ}$c $^{c}$)( x )( gf$_{akℓ}$A k $_{ν}$c $^{ℓ}$)( y ) 〉 1 P I = g$_{µν}$u ( p $^{2}$) + p$_{µ}$p$_{ν}$ p 2 w ( p $^{2}$) (3)$$\n\n$$Ω ≡ { A a $_{µ}$, ∂$_{µ}$ A a µ = 0 , M ab > 0 } . (2)$$\n\n( is strictly positive. Therefore,\n\n## I. INTRODUCTION\n\narXiv:1001.3103v2 [hep-th] 19 Mar 2010\n\n∗ Electronic address: david.dudal@ugent.be\n\n† Electronic address: sorella@uerj.br\n\n‡ Electronic address: nele.vandersickel@ugent.be" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8206661323821419, + "doc_id": "a348bcafbebdaf5b8dc02a495db0907ec1565404fa800cd0583a24253d70834a", + "edit_distance": 0.9137380191693291, + "f1_score": 0.9559748427672956, + "meteor": 0.7195064411291813, + "precision": 0.9743589743589743, + "pred_md": "16\n\n- [40] N. Maggiore and M. Schaden, Phys. Rev. D 50 (1994) 6616.\n- [41] O. Piguet and S. P. Sorella, Lect. Notes Phys. M28 (1995) 1.\n- [42] However, let us mention that no unanimous consensus on this matter has yet been reached, see e.g. [16-20] for possible other opinions on the infrared behavior of the ghost propagator.\n- [43] See also [32].\n- [44] We recall here that in order to consistently discuss composite operators at the quantum level, they need to be introduced into the theory by means of suitable sources.\n- [45] Actually, in [29], another notation v p ( 2 ) has been used instead of w p ( 2 ), the relation being w p ( 2 ) = p v p 2 ( 2 ) .\n- [46] The author of [8] came to the conclusion that a straightforward implementation of the horizon condition leads to G (0) = 3, rather than G (0) = ∞ .\n- [47] In particular, since we will always assume the use of a mass independent renormalization scheme, we may compute a 3 with all external mass scales (= sources) equal to zero. Said otherwise, a 3 is completely determined by the dynamics of the original Yang-Mills action, in which case it is known to vanish to all orders [41].", + "recall": 0.9382716049382716, + "true_md": "16\n\n- [45] Actually, in [29], another notation v ( p $^{2}$) has been used instead of w ( p $^{2}$), the relation being w ( p $^{2}$) = p $^{2}$v ( p $^{2}$) .\n\n- [46] The author of [8] came to the conclusion that a straight- forward implementation of the horizon condition leads to G (0) = 3, rather than G (0) = ∞ .\n\n- [47] In particular, since we will always assume the use of a mass independent renormalization scheme, we may com- pute a 3 with all external mass scales (= sources) equal to zero. Said otherwise, a 3 is completely determined by the dynamics of the original Yang-Mills action, in which case it is known to vanish to all orders [41].\n\n- [40] N. Maggiore and M. Schaden, Phys. Rev. D 50 (1994) 6616.\n\n- [41] O. Piguet and S. P. Sorella, Lect. Notes Phys. M28 (1995) 1.\n\n- [42] However, let us mention that no unanimous consensus on this matter has yet been reached, see e.g. [16–20] for possible other opinions on the infrared behavior of the ghost propagator.\n\n- [43] See also [32].\n\n- [44] We recall here that in order to consistently discuss com- posite operators at the quantum level, they need to be introduced into the theory by means of suitable sources." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.73809262390503, + "doc_id": "3c0793d0aa2b8d4ea2e2579398be4ca45fc1b3618ff44dc287c23380aa734450", + "edit_distance": 0.1957983193277311, + "f1_score": 0.9330357142857143, + "meteor": 0.8255257150654616, + "precision": 0.960919540229885, + "pred_md": "arXiv:1001.0510v1 [cond-mat.stat-mech] 4 Jan 2010\n\n## Interplay among helical order, surface effects and range of interacting layers in ultrathin films.\n\nF. Cinti (1 2 3) , , , A. Rettori (2 3) , , and A. Cuccoli (2)\n\n(1) Department of Physics, University of Alberta, Edmonton, Alberta, Canada T6G 2J1 (2) CNISM and Department of Physics, University of Florence, 50019 Sesto Fiorentino (FI), Italy. and (3) CNR-INFM S 3 National Research Center, I-41100 Modena, Italy (Dated: November 10, 2018)\n\nThe properties of helical thin films have been thoroughly investigated by classical Monte Carlo simulations. The employed model assumes classical planar spins in a body-centered tetragonal lattice, where the helical arrangement along the film growth direction has been modeled by nearest neighbor and next-nearest neighbor competing interactions, the minimal requirement to get helical order. We obtain that, while the in-plane transition temperatures remain essentially unchanged with respect to the bulk ones, the helical/fan arrangement is stabilized at more and more low temperature when the film thickness, n , decreases; in the ordered phase, increasing the temperature, a softening of the helix pitch wave-vector is also observed. Moreover, we show also that the simulation data around both transition temperatures lead us to exclude the presence of a first order transition for all analyzed sizes. Finally, by comparing the results of the present work with those obtained for other models previously adopted in literature, we can get a deeper insight about the entwined role played by the number (range) of interlayer interactions and surface effects in non-collinear thin films.\n\nPACS numbers: 64.60.an,64.60.De,75.10.Hk,75.40.Cx,75.70.Ak.\n\n## I. INTRODUCTION\n\nThe study of low dimensional frustrated magnetic systems 1 still raises great interest, both in consequence of theoretical aspects, related to their peculiar critical properties , 2 and in view of possible technological applications 3 . Indeed, beside conventional ferromagnetic or antiferromagnetic phase transitions, in many new materials other nontrivial and unconventional forms of ordering have been observed 4,5 . A quantity of particular interest in this context is the spin chirality, an order parameter which turned out to be extremely relevant in, e.g., magnetoelectric materials 6 , itinerant MnSi 7 , binary compounds as FeGe , glass transition of spins 8 9 , and XY helimagnets, as Holmium, Terbium or Dysprosium 10 . In the latter case, a new universality class was predicted because a Z 2 × SO (2) symmetry is spontaneously broken in the ordered phase : 2 In fact, when dealing with such systems, in addition to the SO (2) symmetry of the spin degrees of freedom /vector S i , one has to consider also the Z 2 symmetry of the spin chirality κ ij ∝ [ /vector S i × /vector S j ] z .\n\nFor these rare-earth elements, the development of new and sophisticated experimental methods 11 has allowed to obtain ultra-thin films where the non-collinear modulation is comparable with the film thickness. Under such conditions the lack of translational invariance due to the presence of surfaces results decisive in order to observe a drastic change of the magnetic structures 12 . Recent experimental data on ultra-thin Holmium films 13 have been lately interpreted and discussed 14,15 on the basis of detailed classical Monte Carlo (MC) simulations of a spin Hamiltonian, which is believed to give a realistic modeling of bulk Holmium. Such Hamiltonian, proposed by Bohr et al. 16 , allows for competitive middle-range in-\n\nteractions by including six different exchange constants along the c crystallographic axis, and gives a helix pitch wave-vector Q z such that Q c z ' /similarequal 30 , where · c ' = c/ 2 is the distance between nearest neighboring spin layers parallel to the ab crystallographic planes, henceforth denoted also as x -y planes, while z will be taken parallel to c . For n > 16, n being the number of spin layers in the film, a correct bulk limit is reached, while for lower n the film properties are clearly affected by the strong competition among the helical pitch and the surface effects, which involve the majority of the spin layers. In the thickness range n = 9 -16, i.e. right for thickness values comparable with the helical pitch, three different magnetic phases emerged, with the high-temperature, disordered, paramagnetic phase and the low-temperature, long-range ordered one separated by an intriguing, intermediatetemperature block phase, where outer ordered layers coexist with some inner disordered ones, the phase transition of the latter eventually displaying the signatures of a Kosterlitz-Thouless one. Finally, for n ≤ 7 the film collapses once and for all to a quasi-collinear order.\n\nThe complex phase diagram unveiled by such MC simulations awaken however a further intriguing question: to what extent the observed behavior may be considered a simple consequence of the competition between helical order and surface effects? I.e., is it just a matter of having such a competition or does the range of interactions also play a relevant role? Indeed, when the range of the interactions is large enough we have a greater number of planes which can be thought of as 'surface planes', i.e. for which the number of interacting neighbors are significantly reduced with respect to the bulk layers; therefore, we expect that the larger the interaction range, the stronger should be the surface effects. But, at the same time, the same modulation of the magnetic order can", + "recall": 0.9067245119305857, + "true_md": "# Interplay among helical order, surface effects and range of interacting layers in ultrathin films.\n\nF. Cinti (1 , 2 , $^{3)}$, A. Rettori(2 , $^{3)}$, and A. Cuccoli(2)\n\nF. Cinti $^{3)}$, A. Rettori(2 $^{3)}$, and A. Cuccoli(2) (1) Department of Physics, University of Alberta, Edmonton, Alberta, Canada T6G 2J1\n\n$^{(2)}$CNISM and Department of Physics, University of Florence, 50019 Sesto Fiorentino (FI), Italy. and\n\n$^{(3)}$CNR-INFM S3 National Research Center, I-41100 Modena, Italy\n\n(Dated: November 10, 2018)\n\nThe properties of helical thin films have been thoroughly investigated by classical Monte Carlo simulations. The employed model assumes classical planar spins in a body-centered tetragonal lattice, where the helical arrangement along the film growth direction has been modeled by nearest neighbor and next-nearest neighbor competing interactions, the minimal requirement to get helical order. We obtain that, while the in-plane transition temperatures remain essentially unchanged with respect to the bulk ones, the helical/fan arrangement is stabilized at more and more low temperature when the film thickness, n , decreases; in the ordered phase, increasing the temperature, a softening of the helix pitch wave-vector is also observed. Moreover, we show also that the simulation data around both transition temperatures lead us to exclude the presence of a first order transition for all analyzed sizes. Finally, by comparing the results of the present work with those obtained for other models previously adopted in literature, we can get a deeper insight about the entwined role played by the number (range) of interlayer interactions and surface effects in non-collinear thin films.\n\nPACS numbers: 64.60.an,64.60.De,75.10.Hk,75.40.Cx,75.70.Ak.\n\n## I. INTRODUCTION\n\nThe study of low dimensional frustrated magnetic systems 1 still raises great interest, both in consequence of theoretical aspects, related to their peculiar criti- cal properties $^{2}$, and in view of possible technological applications $^{3}$. Indeed, beside conventional ferromagnetic or antiferromagnetic phase transitions, in many new ma- terials other nontrivial and unconventional forms of or- dering have been observed $^{4,5}$. A quantity of particular interest in this context is the spin chirality, an order pa- rameter which turned out to be extremely relevant in, e.g., magnetoelectric materials $^{6}$, itinerant MnSi$^{7}$, binary compounds as FeGe $^{8}$, glass transition of spins$^{9}$, and XY helimagnets, as Holmium, Terbium or Dysprosium $^{10}$. In the latter case, a new universality class was predicted be- cause a Z$_{2}$ × SO (2) symmetry is spontaneously broken in the ordered phase $^{2}$: In fact, when dealing with such systems, in addition to the SO (2) symmetry of the spin degrees of freedom ⃗ S$_{i}$ , one has to consider also the Z$_{2}$ symmetry of the spin chirality κ$_{ij}$ ∝ [ ⃗ S$_{i}$ × ⃗ S$_{j}$ ] $^{z}$. For these rare-earth elements, the development of new\n\n[ ] For these rare-earth elements, the development of new and sophisticated experimental methods 11 has allowed to obtain ultra-thin films where the non-collinear modula- tion is comparable with the film thickness. Under such conditions the lack of translational invariance due to the presence of surfaces results decisive in order to observe a drastic change of the magnetic structures $^{12}$. Recent experimental data on ultra-thin Holmium films 13 have been lately interpreted and discussed 14,15 on the basis of detailed classical Monte Carlo (MC) simulations of a spin Hamiltonian, which is believed to give a realistic modeling of bulk Holmium. Such Hamiltonian, proposed by Bohr et al. $^{16}$, allows for competitive middle-range in-\n\nteractions by including six different exchange constants along the c crystallographic axis, and gives a helix pitch wave-vector Q$_{z}$ such that Q$_{z}$c ′ ≃ 30 $^{◦}$, where c ′ = c/ 2 is the distance between nearest neighboring spin layers par- allel to the ab crystallographic planes, henceforth denoted also as x − y planes, while z will be taken parallel to c . For n > 16, n being the number of spin layers in the film, a correct bulk limit is reached, while for lower n the film properties are clearly affected by the strong competition among the helical pitch and the surface effects, which in- volve the majority of the spin layers. In the thickness range n = 9 − 16, i.e. right for thickness values com- parable with the helical pitch, three different magnetic phases emerged, with the high-temperature, disordered, paramagnetic phase and the low-temperature, long-range ordered one separated by an intriguing, intermediate- temperature block phase, where outer ordered layers co- exist with some inner disordered ones, the phase tran- sition of the latter eventually displaying the signatures of a Kosterlitz-Thouless one. Finally, for n ≤ 7 the film collapses once and for all to a quasi-collinear order.\n\nThe complex phase diagram unveiled by such MC sim- ulations awaken however a further intriguing question: to what extent the observed behavior may be considered a simple consequence of the competition between helical order and surface effects? I.e., is it just a matter of hav- ing such a competition or does the range of interactions also play a relevant role? Indeed, when the range of the interactions is large enough we have a greater number of planes which can be thought of as ”surface planes”, i.e. for which the number of interacting neighbors are sig- nificantly reduced with respect to the bulk layers; there- fore, we expect that the larger the interaction range, the stronger should be the surface effects. But, at the same time, the same modulation of the magnetic order can\n\narXiv:1001.0510v1 [cond-mat.stat-mech] 4 Jan 2010" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7229868839752437, + "doc_id": "88ae9c960a24f68f3beba3249c1bc53164f8945f85c9611ee84c9c60efbc0204", + "edit_distance": 0.8746238716148446, + "f1_score": 0.9209809264305177, + "meteor": 0.5936893671849591, + "precision": 0.952112676056338, + "pred_md": "FIG. 5: The 2-D contours between b and v p with the DR3 cluster sample.\n\nFIG. 5: The 2-D contours between b and v p with the DR3 cluster sample.\n\ng δ = ag Φ , if no modified Poisson equation is assumed. Finally, the estimated g δ can be used to derive bias using measured g ∗ b . Through fitting to the redshift distortion effect, we extract both g ∗ b and g ∗ Θ . The density fluctuation evolution g δ is estimated only from g ∗ Θ , and the other measurement g ∗ b is not yet used. The combination of the estimated g δ and the measured g ∗ Θ provides bias from b = g ∗ b /g δ = 2 9 . ± 0 8, which is fully consistent with . our expectations for such massive clusters of galaxies in the C4 sample.\n\n## IV. DISCUSSION\n\nWe outline in this paper a new theoretical model for ξ s ( π, σ ), the 2-D two-point correlation function in configuration-space, which allows us to constrain the bulk flow motion of matter on large scales. We also propose that the 1-D linear velocity dispersion ( v p ) is a interesting quantity to report when measuring redshiftspace distortions. We demonstrate this method using C4 clusters from the SDSS and find a value for v p that is consistent with a WMAP5-normalised ΛCDM cosmology (within our large statistical errors). Our observed value for these bulk flows is marginally inconsistent with other recent observations in the literature, which find an excess flow compared to a WMAP5-normalised ΛCDM model [18-20]. We do not discuss this further as we plan\n\n[1] S. Perlmutter et al. (Supernova Cosmology Project), Astrophys. J. 517 , 565 (1999), astro-ph/9812133.\n\n[2] A. G. Riess et al. (Supernova Search Team), Astron. J. 116 , 1009 (1998), astro-ph/9805201.\n\n7\n\nto revisit these measurements using larger datasets and different tracers of the density field.\n\nAs discussed in Section II-C, our measurement of v p is correlated with g b , which is the combination of b and δ m , since the observed anisotropic shape of the 2-D correlation function in redshift-space is generated by a cross correlation between the density field and peculiar velocities. However, one of the important implications of our method is that we can measure v p without knowing how to decompose g b , and thus without the uncertainty of determining b .\n\nThere are however some caveats to our analysis. We do not analyse our data in Fourier space, but in configuration space. Small scales have been removed from our data analysis ( < 10Mpc), to ensure that the FoG effect will not contaminate our results. Our methodology is insensitive to a possible shape dependence at large scales for any exotic reason; scale dependent later time growth (e.g. f(R) gravity models [41]), or scale-dependent bias at large scales. In follow-up studies, we will measure the redshift-space distortions in Fourier space to test the effect of small-scales on our results. In addition, the formulation to derive ξ s used in this paper can be slightly biased due to the dispersion effect studied in [32]. This effect is not parameterised properly here, but the reported level of uncertainty is approximately 5% which is much smaller than the statistical errors on our present measurements. Therefore, we dismiss this shift here but it is worth revisiting this issue in the future to know how to incorporate this effect in a new parameterisation.\n\nFinally, Song and Percival [13] recently proposed a method to re-construct the structure formation observables from Θ measurements. Although it is not yet estimated precisely in that narrow range of measured values, we apply their methodology in practice. From the observed coherent evolution of Θ at z = 0 1 from the . DR3 C4 clusters, we re-construct Ψ, Φ and δ m . We then find that bias can be derived from the estimated δ m and the measured g ∗ b . Here, for the first time, we estimate bias from peculiar velocity measurements only. The estimated values are reasonable at b = g ∗ b /g δ = 2 9 . ± 0 8. . It is not precise measurement yet, as the time variation is ignored, but we will revisit this in a following paper.\n\n## Acknowledgments\n\nThe authors would like to thank Nick Kaiser, Kazuya Koyama and Will Percival for helpful conversations, Prina Patel for useful suggestions on the presentation of this article, and the referee for helpful comments. Y-SS, RCN and CGS are grateful for support from STFC .", + "recall": 0.8918205804749341, + "true_md": "7\n\nto revisit these measurements using larger datasets and different tracers of the density field.\n\nAs discussed in Section II-C, our measurement of v$_{p}$ is correlated with g$_{b}$ , which is the combination of b and δ$_{m}$ , since the observed anisotropic shape of the 2-D cor- relation function in redshift–space is generated by a cross correlation between the density field and peculiar veloc- ities. However, one of the important implications of our method is that we can measure v$_{p}$ without knowing how to decompose g$_{b}$ , and thus without the uncertainty of determining b .\n\nThere are however some caveats to our analysis. We do not analyse our data in Fourier space, but in config- uration space. Small scales have been removed from our data analysis ( < 10Mpc), to ensure that the FoG effect will not contaminate our results. Our methodology is in- sensitive to a possible shape dependence at large scales for any exotic reason; scale dependent later time growth (e.g. f(R) gravity models [41]), or scale–dependent bias at large scales. In follow-up studies, we will measure the redshift–space distortions in Fourier space to test the effect of small–scales on our results. In addition, the for- mulation to derive ξ$_{s}$ used in this paper can be slightly biased due to the dispersion effect studied in [32]. This ef- fect is not parameterised properly here, but the reported level of uncertainty is approximately 5% which is much smaller than the statistical errors on our present mea- surements. Therefore, we dismiss this shift here but it is worth revisiting this issue in the future to know how to incorporate this effect in a new parameterisation.\n\nFinally, Song and Percival [13] recently proposed a method to re-construct the structure formation observ- ables from Θ measurements. Although it is not yet es- timated precisely in that narrow range of measured val- ues, we apply their methodology in practice. From the observed coherent evolution of Θ at z = 0 . 1 from the DR3 C4 clusters, we re-construct Ψ, Φ and δ$_{m}$ . We then find that bias can be derived from the estimated δ$_{m}$ and the measured g ∗ $_{b}$. Here, for the first time, we estimate bias from peculiar velocity measurements only. The esti- mated values are reasonable at b = g ∗ $_{b}$/g$_{δ}$ = 2 . 9 ± 0 . 8. It is not precise measurement yet, as the time variation is ignored, but we will revisit this in a following paper.\n\nThe authors would like to thank Nick Kaiser, Kazuya Koyama and Will Percival for helpful conversations, Prina Patel for useful suggestions on the presentation of this article, and the referee for helpful comments. Y-SS, RCN and CGS are grateful for support from STFC .\n\n## Acknowledgments\n\n## IV. DISCUSSION\n\nWe outline in this paper a new theoretical model for ξ$_{s}$ ( π, σ ), the 2-D two–point correlation function in configuration–space, which allows us to constrain the bulk flow motion of matter on large scales. We also propose that the 1-D linear velocity dispersion ( v$_{p}$ ) is a interesting quantity to report when measuring redshift– space distortions. We demonstrate this method using C4 clusters from the SDSS and find a value for v$_{p}$ that is consistent with a WMAP5–normalised ΛCDM cosmol- ogy (within our large statistical errors). Our observed value for these bulk flows is marginally inconsistent with other recent observations in the literature, which find an excess flow compared to a WMAP5–normalised ΛCDM model [18–20]. We do not discuss this further as we plan\n\ng$_{δ}$ = ag Φ , if no modified Poisson equation is assumed. Finally, the estimated g$_{δ}$ can be used to derive bias using measured g ∗ $_{b}$. Through fitting to the redshift distortion effect, we extract both g ∗ b and g ∗ $_{Θ}$. The density fluctu- ation evolution g$_{δ}$ is estimated only from g ∗ $_{Θ}$, and the other measurement g ∗ b is not yet used. The combination of the estimated g$_{δ}$ and the measured g ∗ Θ provides bias from b = g ∗ $_{b}$/g$_{δ}$ = 2 . 9 ± 0 . 8, which is fully consistent with our expectations for such massive clusters of galaxies in the C4 sample.\n\nFIG. 5: The 2-D contours between b and v$_{p}$ with the DR3 cluster sample.\n\n- [1] S. Perlmutter et al. (Supernova Cosmology Project), As- trophys. J. 517 , 565 (1999), astro-ph/9812133.\n\n- [2] A. G. Riess et al. (Supernova Search Team), Astron. J. 116 , 1009 (1998), astro-ph/9805201." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.05997658729502112, + "doc_id": "1f1b1c112ff349cf095f74d6170360a3921ff1d16b22ec7963456cf5db77a876", + "edit_distance": 0.8976148923792903, + "f1_score": 0.8455696202531645, + "meteor": 0.187581208450479, + "precision": 0.9277777777777778, + "pred_md": "in this computation:\n\n\n\nWe compute the determinants of the density operators ψ E 0 and ψ E 1 :\n\n\n\nThese determinants lead to the same eigenvalues for both ψ E 0 and ψ E 1 :\n\n\n\nThus, the coherent information is as stated in the theorem: I ( A BX 〉 ) = H 2 ( µ ) -H 2 ( λ + ).\n\n## Appendix E: Form of the CE Trade-off Curve for Qubit Dephasing Channels\n\nWe first prove two important lemmas and then prove a theorem that gives the exact form of the CE trade-off curve.\n\nLemma 14 Let N be a generalized dephasing channel. In the optimization task for the CE trade-off curve, it suffices to consider a classical-quantum state with diagonal conditional density operators, in the sense that the following inequality holds when 0 ≤ λ ≤ 1 :\n\n\n\nwhere\n\n\n\nU A ' → BE N is an isometric extension of N , ϕ A ' x = ∆( ϕ A ' x ) = ∆( φ A ' x ) , and ∆ is the completely dephasing channel.\n\n23\n\nProof. The proof of this lemma is similar to the proof of Lemma 9 in Ref. [71]. Consider another classicalquantum state σ in addition to the two presented in the statement of the theorem:\n\n\n\nThen the following chain of inequalities holds when 0 ≤ λ ≤ 1:\n\n\n\nThe first equality follows from entropic manipulations. The second equality follows because the system X is classical and the states φ AA ' x are pure. The inequality follows because the entropies H A ( ' ) and H B ( ) ρ can only increase under a complete dephasing. The third equality follows because N · ∆ = ∆ · N and N · c ∆ = N c for a generalized dephasing channel N , and the final equality follows from entropic manipulations.\n\nLemma 15 An ensemble of the following form parametrizes all points on the CE trade-off curve for a qubit dephasing channel:\n\n\n\nwhere the states ψ 0 and ψ 1 are the same as they are in the statement of Lemma 13.\n\nProof. The proof proceeds similarly to the proof of Lemma 13, with the same definitions of states ρ and σ , but with the following different chain of inequalities for 0 ≤ λ ≤ 1:\n\n\n\nWe do not provide justifications for the above steps because they are identical those in the proof of Lemma 13.", + "recall": 0.7767441860465116, + "true_md": "23\n\nProof. The proof of this lemma is similar to the proof of Lemma 9 in Ref. [71]. Consider another classical- quantum state σ in addition to the two presented in the statement of the theorem:\n\nThen the following chain of inequalities holds when 0 ≤ λ ≤ 1:\n\nin this computation:\n\nWe compute the determinants of the density operators ψ E 0 and ψ E 1 :\n\nThe first equality follows from entropic manipulations. The second equality follows because the system X is clas- sical and the states φ AA ′ x are pure. The inequality follows because the entropies H ( A $^{′}$) and H ( B )$_{ρ}$ can only in- crease under a complete dephasing. The third equality follows because N ◦ Δ = Δ ◦ N and N c ◦ Δ = N c for a generalized dephasing channel N , and the final equality follows from entropic manipulations.\n\nThese determinants lead to the same eigenvalues for both ψ E 0 and ψ E 1 :\n\nThus, the coherent information is as stated in the theo- rem: I ( A 〉 BX ) = H$_{2}$ ( µ ) − H$_{2}$ ( λ$_{+}$ ).\n\nWe first prove two important lemmas and then prove a theorem that gives the exact form of the CE trade-off curve.\n\nwhere the states ψ$_{0}$ and ψ$_{1}$ are the same as they are in the statement of Lemma 13.\n\nLemma 15 An ensemble of the following form parametrizes all points on the CE trade-off curve for a qubit dephasing channel:\n\nProof. The proof proceeds similarly to the proof of Lemma 13, with the same definitions of states ρ and σ , but with the following different chain of inequalities for 0 ≤ λ ≤ 1:\n\nLemma 14 Let N be a generalized dephasing channel. In the optimization task for the CE trade-off curve, it suffices to consider a classical-quantum state with diag- onal conditional density operators, in the sense that the following inequality holds when 0 ≤ λ ≤ 1 :\n\nU A $^{′}$→ BE N is an isometric extension of N , ϕ A ′ x = Δ( ϕ A ′ x ) = Δ( φ A ′ x ) , and Δ is the completely dephasing channel.\n\nWe do not provide justifications for the above steps be- cause they are identical those in the proof of Lemma 13.\n\n$$I ( AX ; B )$_{ρ}$ − λH ( A | X )$_{ρ}$ = (1 − λ ) H ( A | X )$_{ρ}$ + H ( B )$_{ρ}$ − H ( E | X )$_{ρ}$ = (1 − λ ) H ( A | X )$_{σ}$ + H ( B )$_{ρ}$ − H ( E | X )$_{σ}$ ≤ (1 − λ ) H ( A | X )$_{σ}$ + H ( B )$_{σ}$ − H ( E | X )$_{σ}$ = (1 − λ ) H ( A | X )$_{σ}$ + 1 − H ( E | X )$_{σ}$ = 1 + ∑ x p$_{X}$ ( x ) $^{[}$(1 − λ ) H ( A )$_{ψ}$$_{x}$ − H ( E )$_{ψ}$$_{x}$ ] ≤ 1 + max$_{x}$ $^{[}$(1 − λ ) H ( A )$_{ψ}$$_{x}$ − H ( E )$_{ψ}$$_{x}$ ] = 1 + (1 − λ ) H ( A )$_{ψ}$$_{∗}$ x − H ( E )$_{ψ}$$_{∗}$ x .$$\n\n$$I ( AX ; B )$_{ρ}$ − λH ( A | X )$_{ρ}$ ≤ I ( AX ; B )$_{θ}$ − λH ( A | X )$_{θ}$ ,$$\n\n$$ρ XABE ≡ ∑ x p$_{X}$ ( x ) | x 〉 〈 x | X ⊗ U A $^{′}$→ BE N ( φ AA ′ x ) , θ XABE ≡ ∑ x p$_{X}$ ( x ) | x 〉 〈 x | X ⊗ U A $^{′}$→ BE N ( ϕ AA ′ x ) ,$$\n\nwhere\n\n## Appendix E: Form of the CE Trade-off Curve for Qubit Dephasing Channels\n\n$$1 2 ( | 0 〉 〈 0 | X ⊗ ψ AA ′ 0 + | 1 〉 〈 1 | X ⊗ ψ AA ′ 1 ) , (E1)$$\n\n$$λ$_{±}$ ≡ 1 2 ±$^{√}$ 1 4 − Det( ψ E o ) (D7) = 1 2 ± 1 2$^{√}$ 1 − 16 · p 2 $^{(}$1 − p 2$^{)}$ µ (1 − µ ) .$$\n\n$$Det( ψ E 0 ) = Det( ψ E 1 ) = $^{(}$1 − p 2$^{)}$ p 2 (1 − (2 µ − 1) $^{2}$) = 2 pµ $^{(}$1 − p 2$^{)}$ (1 − µ ) .$$\n\n$$I ( AX ; B )$_{ρ}$ − λH ( A | X )$_{ρ}$ = (1 − λ ) H ( A | X )$_{ρ}$ + H ( B )$_{ρ}$ − H ( E | X )$_{ρ}$ = (1 − λ ) ∑ x p$_{X}$ ( x ) H ( A $^{′}$)$_{φ}$$_{x}$ + H ( B )$_{ρ}$ − H ( E | X )$_{ρ}$ ≤ (1 − λ ) ∑ x p$_{X}$ ( x ) H ( A $^{′}$)$_{Δ(}$$_{φ}$$_{A}$ ′ x ) + H ( Y )$_{σ}$ − H ( E | X )$_{σ}$ = (1 − λ ) H ( A | X )$_{θ}$ + H ( B )$_{θ}$ − H ( E | X )$_{θ}$ = I ( AX ; B )$_{θ}$ − λH ( A | X )$_{θ}$ .$$\n\n$$ρ XE = 1 2$^{[}$ | 0 〉〈 0 | X ⊗ ψ E 0 + | 1 〉〈 1 | X ⊗ ψ E 1 ] , ψ E 0 = $^{(}$1 − p 2$^{)}$ | 0 〉〈 0 | E + p 2 | 1 〉〈 1 | E +$^{√}$1 − p 2$^{√}$ p 2 (2 µ − 1)( | 0 〉〈 1 | E + | 1 〉〈 0 | $^{E}$) , ψ E 1 = $^{(}$1 − p 2$^{)}$ | 0 〉〈 0 | E + p 2 | 1 〉〈 1 | E −$^{√}$ 1 − p 2$^{√}$ p 2 (2 µ − 1)( | 0 〉〈 1 | E + | 1 〉〈 0 | $^{E}$) .$$\n\n$$σ XY$_{A}$Y$_{B}$E ≡ ∑ x p$_{X}$ ( x ) | x 〉 〈 x | $^{X}$⊗ Δ B → $^{Y}$( U A $^{′}$→ BE N ( φ AA ′ x )) .$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6207996691953778, + "doc_id": "33845e8c789859e460f90e002c46ca2404cc85d369e8b132bf61310e5938c3ef", + "edit_distance": 0.475092936802974, + "f1_score": 0.8805790108564535, + "meteor": 0.6589362567150422, + "precision": 0.9311224489795918, + "pred_md": "FIG. 1: (colors online) (a) : body-centered tetragonal (BCT) lattice with J 0 in-plane coupling constant, and out-of-plane J 1 , and J 2 competing interactions.\n\nFIG. 1: (colors online) (a) : body-centered tetragonal (BCT) lattice with J 0 in-plane coupling constant, and out-of-plane J 1 , and J 2 competing interactions.\n\nbe achieved with different number of interacting layers: notably, nearest and next-nearest layers competitive interactions are enough to get a helical structure with a whatever pitch wavevector. Such observation gives us a possible way to solve the conundrum previously emerged, as we have the possibility of varying the range of interactions without modifying the helical pitch, thus decoupling the two relevant length scales along the film growth direction, and making accessible a range of n of the order of, or smaller than, the helical pitch, but still large enough that a substantial number of layers can behave as 'bulk' layers. Therefore, while in the previous papers we have studied the properties of ultrathin magnetic films of Ho assuming a model with six interlayer exchange interactions, here we investigate by MC simulations the properties of the same system by making use of the simplest model Hamiltonian able to describe the onset of a helical magnetic order in Holmium, i.e. we consider only two inter-layer coupling constants, as previously done in Ref. 11.\n\nThe paper is organized as follows: In Sec. II the model Hamiltonian will be defined, and the MC techniques, and all the thermodynamic quantities relevant for this study, will be introduced. In Sec. III the results obtained for different thicknesses will be presented, both in the matter of the critical properties of the model and of the magnetic ordered structures observed. Finally, in Sec. IV we shall discuss such results, drawing also some conclusions.\n\n## II. MODEL HAMILTONIAN AND MONTE CARLO OBSERVABLES\n\nThe model Hamiltonian we use in our simulations is the minimal one able to describe helimagnetic structures:\n\n\n\n2\n\n/vector S i are classical planar unit vectors representing the direction of the total angular momentum of the magnetic ions, whose magnitude √ j ( j +1) ( j = 8 for Holmium ions) is already encompassed within the definition of the interaction constants J 0 1 2 , , . As sketched in Fig. 1, the magnetic ions are located on the sites of a body-centered tetragonal (BCT) lattice; the first sum appearing in the Hamiltonian describes the in-plane ( xy ) nearest neighbor (NN) interaction, which is taken ferromagnetic (FM), with exchange strength J 0 > 0; the second sum represents the coupling, of exchange strength J 1 , between spins belonging to nearest neighbor (NN) planes along the z -direction (which we will assume to coincide with the film growth direction); finally, the third sum takes into account the interaction, of exchange strength J 2 , between spins lying on next-nearest neighbor (NNN) planes along z . In order to have frustration, giving rise to noncollinear order along z in the bulk, NN interaction J 1 can be taken both ferro- or antiferromagnetic, but NNN coupling J 2 has necessarily to be antiferromagnetic, and the condition | J 2 | > J | 1 | / 4 must be fulfilled. Such simplified Hamiltonian was already employed to simulate helical ordering in bulk systems by Diep 1,17 and Loison 18 . In the bulk limit, the state of minimal energy of a system described by Eq.(1) corresponds to a helical arrangement of spins. The ground state energy per spin is equal to e g ( Q z ) = [ -4 J 0 -2 J 1 (4 cos ( Q c z ' ) + δ cos (2 Q c z ' ))] where c ' is the distance between NN layers, δ = J 2 J 1 , and Q c z ' = arccos ( -1 δ ) is the angle between spins lying on adjacent planes along the z -direction. The observed helical arrangement in bulk holmium corresponds to Q c z ' /similarequal 30 5 . · 10 : such value can be obtained from the formula above with the set of coupling constants J 0 =67.2K, J 1 =20.9K, and J 2 = -24.2 K, that we have employed in our simulations. The given values for the exchange constants are the same already used by Weschke et al. in Ref. 13 to interpret experimental data on Holmium films on the basis of a J 1 -J 2 model, after a proper scaling by the numbers of NN and NNN on neighboring layers of a BCT lattice.\n\nIn the following we will denote with n the film thickness, i.e. the number of spin layers along the z direction, and with L × L the number of spins in each layer (i.e., L is the lattice size along both the x and y directions). In our simulations thickness values from 1 to 24 were considered, while the range of lateral size L was from 8 to 64. Periodic boundary conditions were applied along x and y , while free boundaries were obviously taken along the film growth direction z .\n\nThermal equilibrium was attained by the usual Metropolis algorithm 19 , supplemented by the overrelaxed technique 20 in order to speed-up the sampling of the spin configuration space: a typical 'Monte Carlo step' was composed by four Metropolis and four-five over-relaxed moves per particle. Such judicious mix of moves is able both to get faster the thermal equilibrium and to minimize the correlation 'time' between successive samples, i.e. the undesired effects due to lack of in-", + "recall": 0.8352402745995423, + "true_md": "2\n\nFIG. 1: (colors online) (a) : body-centered tetragonal (BCT) lattice with J$_{0}$ in-plane coupling constant, and out-of-plane J$_{1}$ , and J$_{2}$ competing interactions.\n\nbe achieved with different number of interacting layers: notably, nearest and next-nearest layers competitive in- teractions are enough to get a helical structure with a whatever pitch wavevector. Such observation gives us a possible way to solve the conundrum previously emerged, as we have the possibility of varying the range of inter- actions without modifying the helical pitch, thus decou- pling the two relevant length scales along the film growth direction, and making accessible a range of n of the or- der of, or smaller than, the helical pitch, but still large enough that a substantial number of layers can behave as “bulk” layers. Therefore, while in the previous papers we have studied the properties of ultrathin magnetic films of Ho assuming a model with six interlayer exchange in- teractions, here we investigate by MC simulations the properties of the same system by making use of the sim- plest model Hamiltonian able to describe the onset of a helical magnetic order in Holmium, i.e. we consider only two inter-layer coupling constants, as previously done in Ref. 11.\n\n⃗ S$_{i}$ are classical planar unit vectors representing the di- rection of the total angular momentum of the magnetic ions, whose magnitude √ j ( j + 1) ( j = 8 for Holmium ions) is already encompassed within the definition of the interaction constants J$_{0}$$\\_{,}$$_{1}$$\\_{,}$$_{2}$ . As sketched in Fig. 1, the magnetic ions are located on the sites of a body-centered tetragonal (BCT) lattice; the first sum appearing in the Hamiltonian describes the in-plane ( xy ) nearest neigh- bor (NN) interaction, which is taken ferromagnetic (FM), with exchange strength J$_{0}$ > 0; the second sum rep- resents the coupling, of exchange strength J$_{1}$ , between spins belonging to nearest neighbor (NN) planes along the z -direction (which we will assume to coincide with the film growth direction); finally, the third sum takes into account the interaction, of exchange strength J$_{2}$ , be- tween spins lying on next-nearest neighbor (NNN) planes along z . In order to have frustration, giving rise to non- collinear order along z in the bulk, NN interaction J$_{1}$ can be taken both ferro- or antiferromagnetic, but NNN coupling J$_{2}$ has necessarily to be antiferromagnetic, and the condition | J$_{2}$ | > | J$_{1}$ | / 4 must be fulfilled. Such simpli- fied Hamiltonian was already employed to simulate he- lical ordering in bulk systems by Diep 1,17 and Loison $^{18}$. In the bulk limit, the state of minimal energy of a sys- tem described by Eq.(1) corresponds to a helical arrange- ment of spins. The ground state energy per spin is equal to e$_{g}$ ( Q$_{z}$ ) = [ − 4 J$_{0}$ − 2 J$_{1}$ (4 cos ( Q$_{z}$c $^{′}$) + δ cos (2 Q$_{z}$c $^{′}$))] where c ′ is the distance between NN layers, δ = J$_{2}$ $_{J$\\_{1}$}$, and Q$_{z}$c ′ = arccos ( − 1 δ ) is the angle between spins ly- ing on adjacent planes along the z -direction. The ob- served helical arrangement in bulk holmium corresponds to Q$_{z}$c ′ ≃ 30 . 5 ◦ $^{10}$: such value can be obtained from the formula above with the set of coupling constants J$_{0}$ =67.2 K, J$_{1}$ =20.9 K, and J$_{2}$ = − 24.2 K, that we have employed in our simulations. The given values for the ex- change constants are the same already used by Weschke et al. in Ref. 13 to interpret experimental data on Holmium films on the basis of a J$_{1}$ − J$_{2}$ model, after a proper scaling by the numbers of NN and NNN on neighboring layers of a BCT lattice.\n\nThe paper is organized as follows: In Sec. II the model Hamiltonian will be defined, and the MC techniques, and all the thermodynamic quantities relevant for this study, will be introduced. In Sec. III the results obtained for different thicknesses will be presented, both in the matter of the critical properties of the model and of the magnetic ordered structures observed. Finally, in Sec. IV we shall discuss such results, drawing also some conclusions.\n\nIn the following we will denote with n the film thick- ness, i.e. the number of spin layers along the z direction, and with L × L the number of spins in each layer (i.e., L is the lattice size along both the x and y directions). In our simulations thickness values from 1 to 24 were con- sidered, while the range of lateral size L was from 8 to 64. Periodic boundary conditions were applied along x and y , while free boundaries were obviously taken along the film growth direction z .\n\nThermal equilibrium was attained by the usual Metropolis algorithm $^{19}$, supplemented by the over- relaxed technique 20 in order to speed-up the sampling of the spin configuration space: a typical “Monte Carlo step” was composed by four Metropolis and four-five over-relaxed moves per particle. Such judicious mix of moves is able both to get faster the thermal equilibrium and to minimize the correlation “time” between succes- sive samples, i.e. the undesired effects due to lack of in-\n\nThe model Hamiltonian we use in our simulations is the minimal one able to describe helimagnetic structures:\n\n## II. MODEL HAMILTONIAN AND MONTE CARLO OBSERVABLES\n\n$$H = −   J$_{0}$ ∑ 〈 ij 〉 ⃗ S$_{i}$ · ⃗ S$_{j}$ + J$_{1}$ ∑ 〈 ik 〉 ⃗ S$_{i}$ · ⃗ S$_{k}$ + J$_{2}$ ∑ 〈 il 〉 ⃗ S$_{i}$ · ⃗ $_{S$_{l}$}$  . (1)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4704226299776447, + "doc_id": "b7e4a78efcb79769a7e3b5f253f8389b0ef236ab1a56c63e2ff66d3596340d4d", + "edit_distance": 0.7719033232628398, + "f1_score": 0.8576051779935275, + "meteor": 0.41843872483690125, + "precision": 0.9106529209621993, + "pred_md": ".\n\nFIG. 3: (color online) Schematic of a semi-infinite onedimensional tight-binding lattice attached to a boundary impurity site | a 〉 .\n\nFIG. 3: (color online) Schematic of a semi-infinite onedimensional tight-binding lattice attached to a boundary impurity site | a 〉 .\n\n.....\n\nRe( E a ) / (1 -κ / κ 2 a 2 2 0 ) [see Eq.(55)], is found provided that\n\n\n\nIt can be readily shown that the condition (56) defines the boundary of the domains shown in Fig.2, i.e. a spectral singularity appears when the boundary of existence of bound states is approached. The case κ /κ a 0 = √ 2 is somehow singular. From Eqs.(54) and (55), for κ /κ a 0 = √ 2 it follows that there are two spectral singularities at energies\n\n\n\nprovided that Re( E a ) = 0. The physical meaning of such spectral singularities will be discussed in Sec.III.C.\n\n## B. Lattice realization\n\nFFA models are often encountered in connection to single-particle electronic or photonic transport in onedimensional tight-binding lattices or networks (see, e.g., [25-29, 33-38] and references therein), and in most cases the underlying Hamiltonian is Hermitian. In particular, the Hermitian limit of the FFA Hamiltonian H considered in the previous subsection has been previously studied in [29, 36] and shown to be equivalent to a tightbinding Hamiltonian of a semi-infinity lattice with an impurity site. The equivalence can be proven after representing the Bloch states | k 〉 of the tight-binding energy band in terms of localized Wannier states | n 〉 on a lattice. Let us introduce the Wannier states | n 〉 as\n\n\n\nfor n = 1 2 3 , , , ... . Taking into account that\n\n\n\n( n, m ≥ 1), one can readily show that the Wannier states form an orthonormal system, i.e. 〈 n m | 〉 = δ n,m . Additionally, from Eq.(58) it follows that the Bloch states | k 〉 can be decomposed as a superposition of Wannier states | n 〉 according to\n\n\n\n8\n\nIn the Wannier representation, one can readily show that\n\n\n\nand\n\n\n\nso that the Hamiltonian H = H 0 + V can be written in the equivalent form\n\n\n\nIn its present form, Eq.(63) describes single-particle electron or photon transport on a one-dimensional semiinfinite tight-binding lattice [29, 36, 37], with a hopping rate κ 0 between adjacent sites of the lattice and with the boundary attached to an impurity site | a 〉 with 'complex' potential energy E a and with hopping rate κ a (see Fig.3). From a physical viewpoint, the complex potential at the boundary impurity site may account for e.g. loss of the quantum particle flux into other decay channels (quantum absorbing potentials [47]), or optical gain or loss of light waves in photonic structures [34, 35]. For instance, light transport in a semi-infinite waveguide array as in Ref.[37], but with a lossy (or active) boundary waveguide, provides a simple and experimentally accessible realization of the tight-binding model (63). It should be noted that transport and scattering phenomena in tightbinding lattices with complex potentials have been theoretically investigated in recent works (see, for instance, [47, 48]), however spectral singularities were not found in these previous models.\n\n## C. Spectral singularities and lattice wave reflection\n\nThe physical meaning of spectral singularities in the non-Hermitian FFA model can be captured by analyzing the wave reflection properties of the lattice of Fig.3. As it will be shown below, a spectral singularity corresponds to the appearance of a diverging peak in the reflectance spectrum when the boundary site is an 'amplifying' impurity, i.e. when Im( E a ) > 0, and to the vanishing of wave reflection when the boundary site is an 'absorbing' impurity, i.e. when Im( E a ) < 0. In the former case, we retrieve for a 'discrete' scattering problem the physical explanation of spectral singularities as resonances with vanishing spectral width, established by Mostafazadeh Ref.[9] in the framework of 'continuous' wave scattering by complex potentials. Conversely, the latter case, i.e. that of an 'absorbing' impurity site, gives a different manifestation of a spectral singularity: a wave incident on the lattice boundary is totally absorbed.", + "recall": 0.8103975535168195, + "true_md": "8\n\nIn the Wannier representation, one can readily show that\n\nand\n\nso that the Hamiltonian H = H$_{0}$ + V can be written in the equivalent form\n\n$$∫ dkE ( k ) | k 〉〈 k | = − κ$_{0}$ ∞ ∑ n =1 ( | n 〉〈 n + 1 | + | n + 1 〉〈 n | ) (61)$$\n\n$$V = ∫ dk [ v ( k ) | a 〉〈 k | + v $^{∗}$( k ) | k 〉〈 a | ] = − κ$_{a}$ ( | a 〉〈 1 | + | 1 〉〈 a | ) (62)$$\n\n$$H = − κ$_{0}$ ∞ ∑ n =1 ( | n 〉〈 n + 1 | + | n + 1 〉〈 n | ) + E$_{a}$ | a 〉〈 a | + − κ$_{a}$ ( | a 〉〈 1 | + | 1 〉〈 a | ) . (63)$$\n\nFIG. 3: (color online) Schematic of a semi-infinite one- dimensional tight-binding lattice attached to a boundary im- purity site | a 〉 .\n\n$$− Im $^{2}$( E$_{a}$ ) = κ 4 a κ 2 0 [ 1 − Re $^{2}$( E$_{a}$ ) (2 κ$_{0}$ − κ 2 $_{a}$/κ$_{0}$ ) 2 ] . (56)$$\n\nRe( E$_{a}$ ) / (1 − κ 2 $_{a}$/ 2 κ 2 $_{0}$) [see Eq.(55)], is found provided that 4\n\nIn its present form, Eq.(63) describes single-particle elec- tron or photon transport on a one-dimensional semi- infinite tight-binding lattice [29, 36, 37], with a hopping rate κ$_{0}$ between adjacent sites of the lattice and with the boundary attached to an impurity site | a 〉 with ’complex’ potential energy E$_{a}$ and with hopping rate κ$_{a}$ (see Fig.3). From a physical viewpoint, the complex potential at the boundary impurity site may account for e.g. loss of the quantum particle flux into other decay channels (quan- tum absorbing potentials [47]), or optical gain or loss of light waves in photonic structures [34, 35]. For instance, light transport in a semi-infinite waveguide array as in Ref.[37], but with a lossy (or active) boundary waveg- uide, provides a simple and experimentally accessible re- alization of the tight-binding model (63). It should be noted that transport and scattering phenomena in tight- binding lattices with complex potentials have been the- oretically investigated in recent works (see, for instance, [47, 48]), however spectral singularities were not found in these previous models.\n\n## C. Spectral singularities and lattice wave reflection\n\n## B. Lattice realization\n\n√ provided that Re( E$_{a}$ ) = 0. The physical meaning of such spectral singularities will be discussed in Sec.III.C.\n\nIt can be readily shown that the condition (56) defines the boundary of the domains shown in Fig.2, i.e. a spectral singularity appears when the boundary of existence of bound states is approached. The case κ$_{a}$/κ$_{0}$ = √$_{2 is}$ somehow singular. From Eqs.(54) and (55), for κ$_{a}$/κ$_{0}$ = √$_{2 it follows that there are}$ two spectral singularities at energies\n\n$$E 0 = ± √ 4 κ 2 0 − Im $^{2}$( E$_{a}$ ) (57) provided that Re( E$_{a}$ ) = 0. The physical meaning of such$$\n\nFFA models are often encountered in connection to single-particle electronic or photonic transport in one- dimensional tight-binding lattices or networks (see, e.g., [25–29, 33–38] and references therein), and in most cases the underlying Hamiltonian is Hermitian. In particu- lar, the Hermitian limit of the FFA Hamiltonian H con- sidered in the previous subsection has been previously studied in [29, 36] and shown to be equivalent to a tight- binding Hamiltonian of a semi-infinity lattice with an impurity site. The equivalence can be proven after rep- resenting the Bloch states | k 〉 of the tight-binding energy band in terms of localized Wannier states | n 〉 on a lattice. Let us introduce the Wannier states | n 〉 as\n\nThe physical meaning of spectral singularities in the non-Hermitian FFA model can be captured by analyzing the wave reflection properties of the lattice of Fig.3. As it will be shown below, a spectral singularity corresponds to the appearance of a diverging peak in the reflectance spectrum when the boundary site is an ’amplifying’ im- purity, i.e. when Im( E$_{a}$ ) > 0, and to the vanishing of wave reflection when the boundary site is an ’absorbing’ impurity, i.e. when Im( E$_{a}$ ) < 0. In the former case, we retrieve for a ’discrete’ scattering problem the physical explanation of spectral singularities as resonances with vanishing spectral width, established by Mostafazadeh Ref.[9] in the framework of ’continuous’ wave scatter- ing by complex potentials. Conversely, the latter case, i.e. that of an ’absorbing’ impurity site, gives a different manifestation of a spectral singularity: a wave incident on the lattice boundary is totally absorbed.\n\n∫ for n = 1 , 2 , 3 , ... . Taking into account that\n\n$$| n 〉 = √ 2 π ∫ π 0 dk sin( nk ) | k 〉 (58) , ... . Taking into account that$$\n\n$$∫ π 0 dk sin( nk ) sin( mk ) = π 2 δ$_{n,m}$ (59)$$\n\n( n, m ≥ 1), one can readily show that the Wannier states form an orthonormal system, i.e. 〈 n | m 〉 = δ$_{n,m}$ . Addi- tionally, from Eq.(58) it follows that the Bloch states | k 〉 can be decomposed as a superposition of Wannier states | n 〉 according to ∞\n\n$$| k 〉 = √ 2 π ∞ ∑ n =1 sin( nk ) | n 〉 . (60)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.25799640165690596, + "doc_id": "96373c266aa855b16826911cf9f5c4bfcd0549fbcca9b31973f1aca584a2bd87", + "edit_distance": 0.8746694870438921, + "f1_score": 0.8773109243697479, + "meteor": 0.28277839392509246, + "precision": 0.9222614840989399, + "pred_md": "Eq.(28) into Eq.(26) and requiring that α ( E ) does not vanish. This yields\n\n\n\nwhere ∆( E ) is defined by Eq.(13), V ( E ) = ρ ( E | ) v ( E | ) 2 and ρ ( E ) = ( ∂E k /∂k ( ) ) -1 is the density of states. Similarly, the eigenvalue equation H † |E † 〉 = E|E † 〉 yields\n\n\n\n\n\nand the following expression of the coefficient β † ( E , k ) can be derived following the same procedure as above\n\n\n\nSubstitution of Eqs.(28) and (32) into Eq.(25) yields\n\n\n\nwhere we have set\n\n\n\nThe calculation of the integral on the right hand side of Eq.(34) is complicated by the product of two principal parts, which must be properly resolved into its partialfraction and singular terms (see [18] or the Appendix of Ref.[21]). Taking into account that\n\n\n\nand using Eq.(29), from Eq.(34) one obtains\n\n\n\nso that [see Eq.(33)]\n\n\n\nIn order {|E〉 |E , † 〉} to represent a complete biorthonormal set of functions [Eq.(21)], the amplitudes α ( E ) and α † ( E ) should be thus normalized such that\n\n\n\nFor the Hermitian FFA model, the energy E a is realvalued, z ( E ) turns out to be real-valued and α † ( E ) = α ( E ) [because of |E † 〉 = |E〉 ], so that Eq.(38) is solved to yield\n\n\n\n.\n\n5\n\naccording to Fano [18]. The physical meaning of Eq.(39) is well known [18]: owing to the coupling with the continuum, the discrete state | a 〉 is 'diluited' throughout a set of continuous states (i.e., it becomes a resonance for H ) with a typical resonance curve | α ( E | ) 2 peaked at E /similarequal E a -∆( E a ) of width /similarequal πV ( E a ) [44].\n\nFor the non-Hermitian FFA model, the energy E a is complex-valued and from Eq.(37) it follows that a spectral singularity can appear at the energy E = E 0 of the continuous spectrum such that π 2 + z ∗ 2 ( E 0 ) = 0, i.e. when\n\n\n\nUsing Eq.(29), Eq.(40) yields the following conditions for the appearance of a spectral singularity in the nonHermitian FFA model\n\n\n\nwhich are precisely Eqs.(19) and (20) derived in Sec.II.B following the resolvent approach to spectral singularities.\n\n## D. Spectral singularities and decay dynamics\n\nHermitian FFA models are often used to describe the evolution of unstable quantum systems and the related problem of quantum mechanical decay and deviations from an exponential decay law (see, for instance, [31, 32] and references therein). If the system is initially prepared in state | a 〉 , i.e. if | ψ t ( = 0) 〉 = | a 〉 , the survival probability P t ( ) to find the system at state | a 〉 at a successive time t is given by P t ( ) = | c a ( ) t | 2 , where\n\n\n\nHere we consider the case of a non-Hermitian FFA Hamiltonian H with a real-valued (and thus purely continuous) energy spectrum, and briefly discuss the physical implications of spectral singularities of H on the decay dynamics of survival probability P t ( ). The temporal evolution operator exp( -iHt ) of the system can be written in terms of the resolvent G z ( ) as\n\n\n\nwhere the Bromwich path B is any horizontal line Im( ) = const z > 0 in the upper half of the complex z plane [see Fig.1(a)]. Substitution of Eq.(43) into Eq.(42) yields\n\n\n\nwhere the matrix element G a,a ( z ) of the resolvent is given by Eq.(6). As discussed in Sec.II.B, G a,a ( z ) is analytic in the full complex plane, expect for the branch cut on the real axis, from z = E 1 to z = E 2 (see Fig.1), where it", + "recall": 0.8365384615384616, + "true_md": "5\n\naccording to Fano [18]. The physical meaning of Eq.(39) is well known [18]: owing to the coupling with the con- tinuum, the discrete state | a 〉 is ’diluited’ throughout a set of continuous states (i.e., it becomes a resonance for H ) with a typical resonance curve | α ( E ) | 2 peaked at E ≃ E$_{a}$ − Δ( E$_{a}$ ) of width ≃ πV ( E$_{a}$ ) [44]. For the non-Hermitian FFA model, the energy E$_{a}$ is\n\nE ≃ − ≃ For the non-Hermitian FFA model, the energy E$_{a}$ is complex-valued and from Eq.(37) it follows that a spec- tral singularity can appear at the energy E = E 0 of the continuous spectrum such that π 2 + z ∗ $^{2}$( $_{0}$) = 0, i.e. when\n\n$$z $^{∗}$( E $_{0}$) = ∓ iπ. (40)$$\n\nUsing Eq.(29), Eq.(40) yields the following conditions for the appearance of a spectral singularity in the non- Hermitian FFA model\n\nwhich are precisely Eqs.(19) and (20) derived in Sec.II.B following the resolvent approach to spectral singularities.\n\n$$Im( E$_{a}$ ) = ± πV ( E $_{0}$) , Re( E$_{a}$ ) − E 0 + Δ( E $_{0}$) = 0 (41)$$\n\n## D. Spectral singularities and decay dynamics\n\nHermitian FFA models are often used to describe the evolution of unstable quantum systems and the related problem of quantum mechanical decay and deviations from an exponential decay law (see, for instance, [31, 32] and references therein). If the system is initially prepared in state | a 〉 , i.e. if | ψ ( t = 0) 〉 = | a 〉 , the survival proba- bility P ( t ) to find the system at state | a 〉 at a successive time t is given by P ( t ) = | c$_{a}$ ( t ) | $^{2}$, where\n\n$$c$_{a}$ ( t ) = 〈 a | ψ ( t ) 〉 = 〈 a | exp( − iHt ) | a 〉 . (42)$$\n\nHere we consider the case of a non-Hermitian FFA Hamil- tonian H with a real-valued (and thus purely continuous) energy spectrum, and briefly discuss the physical implica- tions of spectral singularities of H on the decay dynamics of survival probability P ( t ). The temporal evolution op- erator exp( − iHt ) of the system can be written in terms of the resolvent G ( z ) as\n\n$$exp( − iHt ) = i 2 π ∫ B dzG ( z ) exp( − izt ) (43)$$\n\nwhere the Bromwich path B is any horizontal line Im( z ) = const > 0 in the upper half of the complex z plane [see Fig.1(a)]. Substitution of Eq.(43) into Eq.(42) yields\n\n$$c$_{a}$ ( t ) = i 2 π ∫ B dz G $_{a,a}$( z ) exp( − izt ) (44)$$\n\nwhere the matrix element G $_{a,a}$( z ) of the resolvent is given by Eq.(6). As discussed in Sec.II.B, G $_{a,a}$( z ) is analytic in the full complex plane, expect for the branch cut on the real axis, from z = E$_{1}$ to z = E$_{2}$ (see Fig.1), where it\n\n$$| α ( E ) | 2 = V ( E ) π $^{2}$V $^{2}$( E ) + [ E$_{a}$ − E + Δ( E )] 2 (39)$$\n\n$$α $^{∗}$( E ) α $^{†}$( E ) V ( E ) [ π 2 + z ∗ $^{2}$( E ) ] = 1 . (38) For the Hermitian FFA model, the energy E$_{a}$ is real-$$\n\n[ ] For the Hermitian FFA model, the energy E$_{a}$ is real- valued, z ( E ) turns out to be real-valued and α $^{†}$( E ) = α ( E ) [because of |E $^{†}$〉 = |E〉 ], so that Eq.(38) is solved to yield\n\nThe calculation of the integral on the right hand side of Eq.(34) is complicated by the product of two principal parts, which must be properly resolved into its partial- fraction and singular terms (see [18] or the Appendix of Ref.[21]). Taking into account that\n\n$$F ( E , E $^{′}$) = ∫ E 2 E 1 dEV ( E ) ( P 1 E − E + z $^{∗}$( E ) δ ( E − E ) × ( P 1 E − E ′ + z $^{∗}$( E $^{′}$) δ ( E − E $^{′}$) ) + 1 . (34)$$\n\n$$β $^{†}$( E , k ) = − v $^{∗}$( k ) α $^{†}$( E ) ( P 1 E ( k ) − E + z $^{∗}$( E ) δ ( E ( k ) − E ) . (32)$$\n\n$$〈E $^{′}$| E $^{†}$〉 = α $^{∗}$( E $^{′}$) α $^{†}$( E ) F ( E , E $^{′}$) (33)$$\n\nSubstitution of Eqs.(28) and (32) into Eq.(25) yields\n\nwhere we have set\n\nand the following expression of the coefficient β $^{†}$( E , k ) can be derived following the same procedure as above\n\nwhere Δ( E ) is defined by Eq.(13), V ( E ) = ρ ( E ) | v ( E ) | 2 and ρ ( E ) = ( ∂E ( k ) /∂k ) − 1 is the density of states. Similarly, the eigenvalue equation H $^{†}$| E $^{†}$〉 = E|E $^{†}$〉 yields\n\n$$( E ∗ a − E ) α $^{†}$( E ) + ∫ dkv ( k ) β $^{†}$( E , k ) = 0 (30) [ E ( k ) − E ] β $^{†}$( E , k ) + v $^{∗}$( k ) α $^{†}$( E ) = 0 (31)$$\n\n$$∫ [ E ( k ) − E ] β $^{†}$( E , k ) + v $^{∗}$( k ) α $^{†}$( E ) = 0 (31)$$\n\n$$z ( E ) = E$_{a}$ − E + Δ( E ) V ( E ) (29)$$\n\nEq.(28) into Eq.(26) and requiring that α ( E ) does not vanish. This yields\n\nand using Eq.(29), from Eq.(34) one obtains\n\n$$P 1 E − E P 1 E − E ′ = P 1 E − E ′ ( P 1 E ′ − E − P 1 E − E ) + + π $^{2}$δ ( E ′ − E ) δ ( E − E ) (35)$$\n\n$$F ( E , E $^{′}$) = V ( E ) [ π 2 + z ∗ $^{2}$( E ) ] δ ( E − E $^{′}$) (36) so that [see Eq.(33)]$$\n\n$$〈E $^{′}$| E $^{†}$〉 = α $^{∗}$( E ) α $^{†}$( E ) V ( E ) [ π 2 + z ∗ $^{2}$( E ) ] δ ( E − E $^{′}$) . (37) In order {|E〉 , |E $^{†}$〉} to represent a complete biorthonor-$$\n\nso that [see Eq.(33)]\n\n[ ] In order {|E〉 , |E $^{†}$〉} to represent a complete biorthonor- mal set of functions [Eq.(21)], the amplitudes α ( E ) and α $^{†}$( E ) should be thus normalized such that" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.811120866774758, + "doc_id": "7e570090cbe105c91b5609988d4b8bbc9c7bf53d5bc854664587c8dee1bddc2b", + "edit_distance": 0.4879032258064516, + "f1_score": 0.9029345372460498, + "meteor": 0.8357949971181086, + "precision": 0.9433962264150944, + "pred_md": "arXiv:1001.1154v1 [astro-ph.CO] 8 Jan 2010\n\n## Statistical Determination of Bulk Flow Motions\n\n1 Yong-Seon Song, 1 2 , Cristiano G. Sabiu, 1 Robert C. Nichol and 2 Christopher J. Miller ∗ 1 Institute of Cosmology & Gravitation, University of Portsmouth, Portsmouth, PO1 3FX, UK 2 Department of Physics & Astronomy, University College London, Gower Street, London, U.K 3 Cerro-Tololo Inter-American Observatory, National Optical Astronomy Observatory, 950 North Cherry Ave., Tucson, AZ 85719, USA\n\n(Dated: November 10, 2018)\n\nWe present here a new parameterization for the bulk motions of galaxies and clusters (in the linear regime) that can be measured statistically from the shape and amplitude of the two-dimensional two-point correlation function. We further propose the one-dimensional velocity dispersion ( v p ) of the bulk flow as a complementary measure of redshift-space distortions, which is model-independent and not dependent on the normalisation method. As a demonstration, we have applied our new methodology to the C4 cluster catalogue constructed from Data Release Three (DR3) of the Sloan Digital Sky Survey. We find v p = 270 +433 km/s (also consistent with v p = 0) for this cluster sample (at ¯ = 0 1), which is in agreement with that predicted for a WMAP5-normalised ΛCDM model z . (i.e., v p (ΛCDM) = 203km/s). This measurement does not lend support to recent claims of excessive bulk motions ( /similarequal 1000 km/s) which appear in conflict with ΛCDM, although our large statistical error cannot rule them out. From the measured coherent evolution of v p , we develop a technique to re-construct the perturbed potential, as well as estimating the unbiased matter density fluctuations and scale-independent bias.\n\nPACS numbers: draft\n\n## I. INTRODUCTION\n\nA decade ago, astronomers discovered the expansion of the Universe was accelerating via the cosmological dimming of distant supernovae [1, 2]. Since then, the combination of numerous, and diverse, experiments has helped to establish the Cosmological Constant (specifically a ΛCDM model) as the leading candidate to explain this cosmic acceleration. However, with no theoretical motivation to explain the required low energy vacuum of the ΛCDM model, there is no reason to preclude alternative models, especially those based upon the possible violation of fundamental physics which have yet to be proven on cosmological scales [3, 4].\n\nIn addition to using geometrical probes like Supernovae to constrain the cosmic acceleration, tests based on the formation of structures in the Universe also provide a method for validating our cosmological models. In particular, we can investigate the consistency between the geometrical expansion history of the Universe and the evolution of local density inhomogeneities to help reveal a deeper understanding of the nature of the cosmic acceleration [5-9].\n\nIn general, there are three observables that can be used to quantify structure formation in the Universe, namely geometrical perturbations, energy-momentum fluctuations and peculiar velocities, all of which will be measured to high precision via future experiments like DES, LSST, JDEM and Euclid (see details of these experiments in the recent FoMSWG report [10]). In more detail, such weak lensing experiments measure the integrated geometrical\n\n∗ Electronic address: yong-seon.song@port.ac.uk\n\neffect on light as its trajectory is bent by the gravitational potential. Likewise, galaxies (and clusters of galaxies) measure the correlations amongst large-scale local inhomogeneities, while the observed distortions in these correlations (in redshift-space) can be used to extract information about peculiar velocities [11-14]. In this paper, we explore the cosmological constraints on the physics of cosmic acceleration using peculiar velocities, as it is one of the key quantities required for a consistency test of General Relativity [15, 16].\n\nEarly observational studies of the peculiar velocity field, or 'bulk flows', have produced for many years discrepant results [17], primarily due to small sample sizes and the heterogeneous selection of galaxies. However, a recent re-analysis of these earlier surveys [18] has now provided a consistent observational picture from these data and finds significant evidence for a larger than expected bulk motion. This is consistent with new measurements of the bulk motion of clusters of galaxies using a completely different methodology[19, 20], which leads to the intriguing situation that all these measurements appear to be significantly greater in amplitude, and scale, than expected in a concordance, WMAP5normalised ΛCDM cosmological model. Such discrepancies with ΛCDM may give support to exotic cosmological models like modified gravity [21].\n\nGiven the importance of these large-scale bulk flow measurements, we propose here an alternative methodology to help check these recent claims of anomalously high peculiar velocities which are inconsistent with the standard ΛCDM cosmology. We start by outlining a statistical determination of bulk flow motions using redshiftspace distortions in large-scale galaxy or cluster surveys. Such redshift-space distortions are easily seen in the twodimensional correlation function ( ξ s ( σ, π )), which is the", + "recall": 0.8658008658008658, + "true_md": "arXiv:1001.1154v1 [astro-ph.CO] 8 Jan 2010\n\n# Statistical Determination of Bulk Flow Motions\n\n$^{1}$Yong-Seon Song, 1 , $^{2}$Cristiano G. Sabiu, $^{1}$Robert C. Nichol and $^{2}$Christopher J. Miller ∗\n\n$^{1}$Institute of Cosmology & Gravitation, University of Portsmouth, Portsmouth, PO1 3FX, UK\n\n$^{2}$Department of Physics & Astronomy, University College London, Gower Street, London, U.K\n\n$^{3}$Cerro-Tololo Inter-American Observatory, National Optical Astronomy Observatory, 950 North Cherry Ave., Tucson, AZ 85719, USA\n\n(Dated: November 10, 2018)\n\nWe present here a new parameterization for the bulk motions of galaxies and clusters (in the linear regime) that can be measured statistically from the shape and amplitude of the two–dimensional two–point correlation function. We further propose the one–dimensional velocity dispersion ( v p ) of the bulk flow as a complementary measure of redshift–space distortions, which is model–independent and not dependent on the normalisation method. As a demonstration, we have applied our new methodology to the C4 cluster catalogue constructed from Data Release Three (DR3) of the Sloan Digital Sky Survey. We find v p = 270 +433 km/s (also consistent with v p = 0) for this cluster sample (at ¯ z = 0 . 1), which is in agreement with that predicted for a WMAP5–normalised ΛCDM model (i.e., v p (ΛCDM) = 203 km/s). This measurement does not lend support to recent claims of excessive bulk motions ( ≃ 1000 km/s) which appear in conflict with ΛCDM, although our large statistical error cannot rule them out. From the measured coherent evolution of v p , we develop a technique to re-construct the perturbed potential, as well as estimating the unbiased matter density fluctuations and scale–independent bias.\n\neffect on light as its trajectory is bent by the gravitational potential. Likewise, galaxies (and clusters of galaxies) measure the correlations amongst large–scale local inho- mogeneities, while the observed distortions in these cor- relations (in redshift–space) can be used to extract infor- mation about peculiar velocities [11–14]. In this paper, we explore the cosmological constraints on the physics of cosmic acceleration using peculiar velocities, as it is one of the key quantities required for a consistency test of General Relativity [15, 16].\n\nIn addition to using geometrical probes like Super- novae to constrain the cosmic acceleration, tests based on the formation of structures in the Universe also pro- vide a method for validating our cosmological models. In particular, we can investigate the consistency between the geometrical expansion history of the Universe and the evolution of local density inhomogeneities to help re- veal a deeper understanding of the nature of the cosmic acceleration [5–9].\n\nA decade ago, astronomers discovered the expansion of the Universe was accelerating via the cosmological dimming of distant supernovae [1, 2]. Since then, the combination of numerous, and diverse, experiments has helped to establish the Cosmological Constant (specifi- cally a ΛCDM model) as the leading candidate to explain this cosmic acceleration. However, with no theoretical motivation to explain the required low energy vacuum of the ΛCDM model, there is no reason to preclude alter- native models, especially those based upon the possible violation of fundamental physics which have yet to be proven on cosmological scales [3, 4].\n\nPACS numbers: draft\n\nIn general, there are three observables that can be used to quantify structure formation in the Universe, namely geometrical perturbations, energy–momentum fluctua- tions and peculiar velocities, all of which will be measured to high precision via future experiments like DES, LSST, JDEM and Euclid (see details of these experiments in the recent FoMSWG report [10]). In more detail, such weak lensing experiments measure the integrated geometrical\n\nGiven the importance of these large–scale bulk flow measurements, we propose here an alternative methodol- ogy to help check these recent claims of anomalously high peculiar velocities which are inconsistent with the stan- dard ΛCDM cosmology. We start by outlining a statis- tical determination of bulk flow motions using redshift– space distortions in large-scale galaxy or cluster surveys. Such redshift-space distortions are easily seen in the two– dimensional correlation function ( ξ$_{s}$ ( σ, π )), which is the\n\nEarly observational studies of the peculiar velocity field, or “bulk flows”, have produced for many years dis- crepant results [17], primarily due to small sample sizes and the heterogeneous selection of galaxies. However, a recent re-analysis of these earlier surveys [18] has now provided a consistent observational picture from these data and finds significant evidence for a larger than ex- pected bulk motion. This is consistent with new mea- surements of the bulk motion of clusters of galaxies us- ing a completely different methodology[19, 20], which leads to the intriguing situation that all these measure- ments appear to be significantly greater in amplitude, and scale, than expected in a concordance, WMAP5– normalised ΛCDM cosmological model. Such discrepan- cies with ΛCDM may give support to exotic cosmological models like modified gravity [21].\n\n## I. INTRODUCTION\n\n∗ Electronic address: yong-seon.song@port.ac.uk" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9228867958507029, + "doc_id": "f107483d260a32ff07499ef726a3b1989b71db6adbe4a409bc0a4f8aa5f25a33", + "edit_distance": 0.059726962457337884, + "f1_score": 0.9464285714285714, + "meteor": 0.9564938372346126, + "precision": 0.977859778597786, + "pred_md": "## VI. CONCLUSION\n\nWe considered the EPR correlation of two accelerated particles in a Kerr-Newman background and found that the correlation apparently decreases as seen in the directions of flat spacetime as does the degree of violation of Bell's inequality. We derived the Wigner rotation and showed that maximal violation of Bell's inequality can be achieved through appropriate coordinate transformations of the local inertial frames. In this new inertial frame the EPR correlation can be extracted up to the outer event horizon which is to be expected for an observer at infinity.\n\nHowever at the outer horizon r + and below, for both the observer at infinity and the free fall observer, the EPR correlation is unmeasurable. In particular the rotation angle for an observer approaches negative infinity on both counts and so the correlation will not be extracted once both particles have gone over the outer even horizon. This occurs because the flow of spacetime itself does not allow the experimental set up required to extract the EPR correlation. Hence due to frame dragging effects becoming so intense one cannot achieve the relatively static condition required for extraction and so no further measurements may be made on the particles in question which means that the information stored in their spin states will become irrecoverable. Despite the apparent loss of information as measured by such an observer, it is actually stored by the black hole up to the singularity where theory fails to predict what will happen.\n\n9\n\n## ACKNOWLEDGMENTS\n\nThis work would not have been possible without the support and hospitality of Professor Steve Rawlings (Astrophysics, University of Oxford) and for this we thank him. Thanks are also due to Professor Steven Gull (Astrophysics, University of Cambridge) and the referees for important remarks and comments.\n\n- [1] Terashima H. and Ueda M., J. Phys. A, 38, 2029 (2005).\n- [2] Donato B., Christian C., Andrea G. and Robert T. J.,General Relativity and Grav. 40, 5 (2008).\n- [3] S. S. Xulu, gr-qc., 24, 15 (2000).\n- [4] C.J.L. Doran, Phys. Rev. D 61, 067503 (2000).\n- [5] D. Bini, C. Cherubini, A. Geralico, R.T. Jantzen, Gen Relativ Gravit 40 (2008).\n- [6] E. T. Newman, A. I. Janis. J. Math. Phys. 6, 915 (1965).\n- [7] R. M. Wald, General Relativity , (Chicago and London: the university of Chicago Press), 1984.\n- [8] M. Nakahara, Geometry, Topology and Physics (Institute of Physics Publishing, Bristol, 1990).\n- [9] S. Weinberg, The Quantum Theory of Fields. Vol 1 (Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, (1995)).\n- [10] E. Wigner, Ann. Math, 149, 40 (1939).\n- [11] P.M. Alsing, G.J. Milburn, Lorentz Invariance of Entanglement (2008).", + "recall": 0.916955017301038, + "true_md": "9\n\n## VI. CONCLUSION\n\n## ACKNOWLEDGMENTS\n\nWe considered the EPR correlation of two accel- erated particles in a Kerr-Newman background and found that the correlation apparently de- creases as seen in the directions of flat spacetime as does the degree of violation of Bell’s inequal- ity. We derived the Wigner rotation and showed that maximal violation of Bell’s inequality can be achieved through appropriate coordinate trans- formations of the local inertial frames. In this new inertial frame the EPR correlation can be extracted up to the outer event horizon which is to be expected for an observer at infinity.\n\nHowever at the outer horizon r$_{+}$ and below, for both the observer at infinity and the free fall ob- server, the EPR correlation is unmeasurable. In particular the rotation angle for an observer ap- proaches negative infinity on both counts and so the correlation will not be extracted once both particles have gone over the outer even horizon. This occurs because the flow of spacetime itself does not allow the experimental set up required to extract the EPR correlation. Hence due to frame dragging effects becoming so intense one cannot achieve the relatively static condition re- quired for extraction and so no further measure- ments may be made on the particles in question which means that the information stored in their spin states will become irrecoverable. Despite the apparent loss of information as measured by such an observer, it is actually stored by the black hole up to the singularity where theory fails to predict what will happen.\n\nThis work would not have been possible without the support and hospitality of Professor Steve Rawlings (Astrophysics, University of Oxford) and for this we thank him. Thanks are also due to Professor Steven Gull (Astrophysics, Univer- sity of Cambridge) and the referees for important remarks and comments.\n\n- [1] Terashima H. and Ueda M., J. Phys. A, 38, 2029 (2005).\n\n- [2] Donato B., Christian C., Andrea G. and Robert T. J.,General Relativity and Grav. 40, 5 (2008).\n\n- [3] S. S. Xulu, gr-qc., 24, 15 (2000).\n\n- [4] C.J.L. Doran, Phys. Rev. D 61, 067503 (2000).\n\n- [5] D. Bini, C. Cherubini, A. Geralico, R.T. Jantzen, Gen Relativ Gravit 40 (2008).\n\n- [6] E. T. Newman, A. I. Janis. J. Math. Phys. 6, 915 (1965).\n\n- [7] R. M. Wald, General Relativity , (Chicago and London: the university of Chicago Press), 1984.\n\n- [8] M. Nakahara, Geometry, Topology and Physics (Institute of Physics Publishing, Bristol, 1990).\n\n- [9] S. Weinberg, The Quantum Theory of Fields. Vol 1 (Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, (1995)).\n\n- [10] E. Wigner, Ann. Math, 149, 40 (1939).\n\n- [11] P.M. Alsing, G.J. Milburn, Lorentz Invariance of Entanglement (2008)." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8803984096659464, + "doc_id": "79e45c57f982be31557ffdcf5f0430fbb0e42ea082ff2cb5981b46adb07e8cee", + "edit_distance": 0.7994722955145118, + "f1_score": 0.9051490514905147, + "meteor": 0.6146676400653289, + "precision": 0.9175824175824175, + "pred_md": "- [24] M. Strange, I. S. Kristensen, K. S. Thygesen, and K. W. Jacobsen, 'Benchmark density functional theory calculations for nanoscale conductance', J. Chem. Phys. 128 (11), 114714 (Mar. 2008), doi:10.1063/1.2839275.\n- [25] J. M. Soler, E. Artacho, J. D. Gale, A. Garcia, J. Junquera, P. Ordej'n, and D. S' anchez-Portal, 'The SIESTA method for o ab initio ordern materials simulation', J. Phys.: Condens. Matter 14 (11), 2745 (Mar. 2002), doi:10.1088/0953-8984/14/11/302.\n- [26] J. S. Griffith, The Theory of Transition-Metal Ions (Cambridge University Press, London, 1961).\n- [27] P. Atkins and J. de Paula, Physical Chemistry , 8th ed. (Oxford University Press, London, 2006).\n- [28] D. Lide, Handbook of Chemistry and Physics , 87th ed. (CRCPress, 2006-2007).\n- [29] T. Markussen, R. Rurali, A.-P. Jauho, and M. Brandbyge, 'Scal-\n\n5\n\n- ing theory put into practice: First-principles modeling of transport in doped silicon wires', Phys. Rev. Lett. 99 (7), 076803 (Aug. 2007), doi:10.1103/PhysRevLett.99.076803.\n- [30] M. Ushiro, K. Uno, T. Fujikawa, Y. Sato, K. Tohji, F. Watari, W.-J. Chun, Y. Koike, and K. Asakura, 'X-ray absorption fine structure (XAFS) analyses of Ni species trapped in graphene sheet of carbon nanofibers', Phys. Rev. B 73 (14), 144103 (Apr. 2006), doi:10.1103/PhysRevB.73.144103.\n- [31] C. Gomez-Navarro, P. J. de Pablo, J. Gomez-Herrero, B. Biel, F. J. Garcia-Vidal, A. Rubio, and F. Flores, 'Tuning the conductance of single-walled carbon nanotubes by ion irradiation in the Anderson localization regime', Nature Materials 4 , 534 (Jun. 2005), doi:10.1038/nmat1414.", + "recall": 0.893048128342246, + "true_md": "ing theory put into practice: First-principles modeling of trans- port in doped silicon wires”, Phys. Rev. Lett. 99 (7), 076803 (Aug. 2007), doi:10.1103/PhysRevLett.99.076803.\n\n5\n\n- [31] C. Gomez-Navarro, P. J. de Pablo, J. Gomez-Herrero, B. Biel, F. J. Garcia-Vidal, A. Rubio, and F. Flores, “Tuning the con- ductance of single-walled carbon nanotubes by ion irradiation in the Anderson localization regime”, Nature Materials 4 , 534 (Jun. 2005), doi:10.1038/nmat1414.\n\n- [30] M. Ushiro, K. Uno, T. Fujikawa, Y. Sato, K. Tohji, F. Watari, W.-J. Chun, Y. Koike, and K. Asakura, “X-ray absorption fine structure (XAFS) analyses of Ni species trapped in graphene sheet of carbon nanofibers”, Phys. Rev. B 73 (14), 144103 (Apr. 2006), doi:10.1103/PhysRevB.73.144103.\n\n- [29] T. Markussen, R. Rurali, A.-P. Jauho, and M. Brandbyge, “Scal-\n\n- [27] P. Atkins and J. de Paula, Physical Chemistry , 8th ed. (Oxford University Press, London, 2006).\n\n- [28] D. Lide, Handbook of Chemistry and Physics , 87th ed. (CRC- Press, 2006–2007).\n\n- [26] J. S. Griffith, The Theory of Transition-Metal Ions (Cambridge University Press, London, 1961).\n\n- [25] J. M. Soler, E. Artacho, J. D. Gale, A. Garcia, J. Junquera, P. Or- dej´on, and D. S´anchez-Portal, “The SIESTA method for ab ini- tio order- n materials simulation”, J. Phys.: Condens. Matter 14 (11), 2745 (Mar. 2002), doi:10.1088/0953-8984/14/11/302.\n\n- [24] M. Strange, I. S. Kristensen, K. S. Thygesen, and K. W. Ja- cobsen, “Benchmark density functional theory calculations for nanoscale conductance”, J. Chem. Phys. 128 (11), 114714 (Mar. 2008), doi:10.1063/1.2839275." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6175124000222229, + "doc_id": "9accd8daea3e8e07653a49057fd9c8f745b92695ce3d29716604d98199374f8b", + "edit_distance": 0.7653167185877466, + "f1_score": 0.908108108108108, + "meteor": 0.5168214615179697, + "precision": 0.9438202247191011, + "pred_md": "2\n\nFIG. 1: Structural schematics and formation energy for a 3d transition metal occupied monovacancy (black), divacancy I (gray), or divacancy II (white) in a (6,6) carbon nanotube. Formation energies of the empty vacancies are indicated by dashed lines.\n\nFIG. 1: Structural schematics and formation energy for a 3d transition metal occupied monovacancy (black), divacancy I (gray), or divacancy II (white) in a (6,6) carbon nanotube. Formation energies of the empty vacancies are indicated by dashed lines.\n\nis the total energy of the pristine nanotube with a physisorbed transition metal atom. We have considered the monovacancy and two divacancies shown in Fig. 1. The energy required to form an empty vacancy is obtained from\n\n\n\nwhere E [VC] is the total energy of the nanotube with a vacancy of n atoms.\n\nThe calculated formation energies for the 3d transition metals are shown in Fig. 1. From the horizontal lines we see that both divacancies are more stable than the monovacancy. This may be attributed to the presence of a two-fold coordinated C atom in the monovacancy, while all C atoms remain three-fold coordinated in the divacancies. When a transition metal atom occupies a vacancy, the strongest bonding to the C atoms is through its d orbitals [26]. For this reason, Cu and Zn, which both have filled d-bands, are rather unstable in the CNT. For the remaining metals, adsorption in the monovacancies leads to quite stable structures. This is because the three-fold coordination of the C atoms and the CNT's hexagonal structure are recovered when the metal atom is inserted. On the other hand, metal adsorption in divacancies is slightly less stable because of the resulting pentagon defects, see upper panel in Fig. 1. A similar behaviour has been reported by Krasheninnikov et al. for transition metal atoms in graphene [21].\n\nThe adsorption energies for N2, O2, H2O, CO, NH3, and H2S on the metallic site of the doped (6,6) CNTs are shown in Fig. 2(a). The adsorption energy of a molecule X is defined by\n\n\n\nFIG. 2: Calculated (a) adsorption energy E ads in eV and (b) change in conductance ∆ G in units of G 0 = 2 e /h 2 for N2, O2, H2O, CO, NH3, and H2S on 3d transition metals occupying a monovacancy (top), divacancy I (middle), and divacancy II (bottom) in a (6,6) carbon nanotube.\n\nwhere E X [ @M@VC] is the total energy of molecule X on a transition metal atom occupying a vacancy, and E X [ ] is the gas phase energy of the molecule.\n\nFrom the adsorption energies plotted in Fig. 2(a), we see that the earlier transition metals tend to bind the adsorbates stronger than the late transition metals. The latest metals in the series (Cu and Zn) bind adsorbates rather weakly in the divacancy structures. We also note that O2 binds significantly stronger than any of the three target molecules on Ti, V, Cr, and Mn (except for Cr in divacancy I where H2S is found to dissociate). Active sites containing these metals are therefore expected to be completely passivated if oxygen is present in the background. Further, we find H2O is rather weakly bound to most of the active sites. This ensures that these types of sensors are robust against changes in humidity.\n\nIn thermodynamic equilibrium [27], the coverage of the active sites follows from\n\n\n\nwhere K = k + /k -is the ratio of forward and backward rate constants for the adsorption reaction,\n\n\n\nIn these expressions C X [ ] is the concentration of species X , S X [ ] is its gas phase entropy and T is the temperature. Experimental values for the gas phase entropies have been taken from Ref. [28].", + "recall": 0.875, + "true_md": "2\n\nFIG. 2: Calculated (a) adsorption energy E$_{ads}$ in eV and (b) change in conductance Δ G in units of G$_{0}$ = 2 e $^{2}$/h for N$_{2}$, O$_{2}$, H$_{2}$O, CO, NH$_{3}$, and H$_{2}$S on 3d transition metals occupying a monovacancy (top), divacancy I (middle), and divacancy II (bottom) in a (6,6) carbon nanotube.\n\nFIG. 1: Structural schematics and formation energy for a 3d tran- sition metal occupied monovacancy (black), divacancy I (gray), or divacancy II (white) in a (6,6) carbon nanotube. Formation energies of the empty vacancies are indicated by dashed lines.\n\nwhere E [ X @M@VC] is the total energy of molecule X on a transition metal atom occupying a vacancy, and E [ X ] is the gas phase energy of the molecule.\n\nis the total energy of the pristine nanotube with a physisorbed transition metal atom. We have considered the monovacancy and two divacancies shown in Fig. 1. The energy required to form an empty vacancy is obtained from\n\n$$E$_{form}$ [ VC ] = E [ VC ] + nE [ C ] − E [ NT ] , (2)$$\n\nFrom the adsorption energies plotted in Fig. 2(a), we see that the earlier transition metals tend to bind the adsorbates stronger than the late transition metals. The latest metals in the series (Cu and Zn) bind adsorbates rather weakly in the divacancy structures. We also note that O$_{2}$ binds significantly stronger than any of the three target molecules on Ti, V, Cr, and Mn (except for Cr in divacancy I where H$_{2}$S is found to dissociate). Active sites containing these metals are therefore expected to be completely passivated if oxygen is present in the background. Further, we find H$_{2}$O is rather weakly bound to most of the active sites. This ensures that these types of sensors are robust against changes in humidity.\n\nIn thermodynamic equilibrium [27], the coverage of the ac- tive sites follows from\n\nwhere E [VC] is the total energy of the nanotube with a va- cancy of n atoms.\n\nThe calculated formation energies for the 3d transition met- als are shown in Fig. 1. From the horizontal lines we see that both divacancies are more stable than the monovacancy. This may be attributed to the presence of a two-fold coordinated C atom in the monovacancy, while all C atoms remain three-fold coordinated in the divacancies. When a transition metal atom occupies a vacancy, the strongest bonding to the C atoms is through its d orbitals [26]. For this reason, Cu and Zn, which both have filled d-bands, are rather unstable in the CNT. For the remaining metals, adsorption in the monovacancies leads to quite stable structures. This is because the three-fold coor- dination of the C atoms and the CNT’s hexagonal structure are recovered when the metal atom is inserted. On the other hand, metal adsorption in divacancies is slightly less stable because of the resulting pentagon defects, see upper panel in Fig. 1. A similar behaviour has been reported by Krasheninnikov et al. for transition metal atoms in graphene [21].\n\nwhere K = k$_{+}$/k$_{−}$ is the ratio of forward and backward rate constants for the adsorption reaction,\n\nThe adsorption energies for N$_{2}$, O$_{2}$, H$_{2}$O, CO, NH$_{3}$, and H$_{2}$S on the metallic site of the doped (6,6) CNTs are shown in Fig. 2(a). The adsorption energy of a molecule X is defined by\n\nIn these expressions C [ X ] is the concentration of species X , S [ X ] is its gas phase entropy and T is the temperature. Ex- perimental values for the gas phase entropies have been taken from Ref. [28].\n\n$$Θ[ X ] = K [ X ] C [ X ] 1 + ∑ Y K [ Y ] C [ Y ] , (4)$$\n\n$$K [ X ] = exp$^{[}$ − E$_{ads}$ [ X ] + TS [ X ] k$_{B}$T ] . (5)$$\n\n$$E$_{ads}$ [ X @M@VC ] = E [ X @M@VC ] − E [ X ] − E [ M@VC ] , (3)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.759663539764732, + "doc_id": "d88567ed64a8785ef70bbb7a5e9f6c662cdba783a79f0b295299697d1cfc0c4c", + "edit_distance": 0.4875283446712018, + "f1_score": 0.8825301204819277, + "meteor": 0.7387506709798601, + "precision": 0.9272151898734177, + "pred_md": "2009 Fermi Symposium, Washington, D.C., Nov. 2-5\n\n3\n\ndetailed variability analysis for one of two reasons: (1) too few data points or (2) flux measurement uncertainties on the order of the amplitude of observed variability. It is important to note that, due to discrepancies between the sampling frequency in both bands, the variability indices for the 850 µ mband may be artificially depressed due to the fact that there are not always corresponding measurements at higher frequencies during flaring epochs.\n\n## 3.2. First-Order Continuous Autoregression\n\nWe follow the method of Kelly et al. [9], who model quasar optical light curves as a continuous time firstorder autoregressive process (CAR(1)) in order to extract characteristic time scales and the amplitude of flux variations. Although flaring behavior is not typically thought of as an autoregressive process, we find that the light curves are well-fit by the models and therefore adopt the method here to study blazar submillimeter light curves.\n\nThe CAR(1) process is described by a stochastic differential equation [9],\n\n\n\nassociated with a power spectrum of the form\n\n\n\nIn equations 3 and 4, τ is called the 'relaxation time' of the process S t ( ) and is identified by the break in P X ( f ). The power spectrum appears flat for timescales longer than this and falls off as 1 /f 2 for timescales shorter than the characteristic timescale of the process.\n\nTaking the logarithm of the blazar light curve (in Jy) to be S t ( ), we adopt τ (in days) as the characteristic timescale of variability, after which the physical process 'forgets' about what has happened at time lags of greater than τ . The two other relevant parameters, σ and µ = b/a , are the overall amplitude of variability and the logarithm of mean value of the light curve, respectively.\n\nIn the routine, we construct an autoregressive model for the light curves for a minimum of 100,000 iterations and calculate the value of τ from the break in the power spectrum in each instance. Due to the limited number of observations in the 850 µ m band, we performed this autoregressive analysis only for the 1mm light curves, which typically have more than 10 points per light curve.\n\nThis method yielded some surprising results. In Figure 3, we see that the BL Lacs and FSRQs exhibit virtually no difference in characteristic timescale, with\n\neConf C091122\n\nFigure 3: Characteristic timescale (days) versus submillimeter luminosity (erg s -1 ) in the 1mm band for all objects. Physically, τ represents a 'relaxation timescale', the timescale beyond which events are no longer correlated.\n\nFigure 3: Characteristic timescale (days) versus submillimeter luminosity (erg s -1 ) in the 1mm band for all objects. Physically, τ represents a 'relaxation timescale', the timescale beyond which events are no longer correlated.\n\nboth classes extending across a large range in τ . Because of the uncertainty for objects with shorter characteristic timescales, it is hard to draw any definitive conclusions about the differences between classes. It is important to note that τ does not necessarily represent a flaring timescale, which is a behavior that typically operates on a scale of ∼ 10-100 days and not on the longer timescales we see in τ .\n\n## 4. CONNECTION WITH GAMMA-RAYS\n\nIn general, we find that in the submillimeter, we are observing these blazars at or near the peak of the synchrotron component ( α S ∼ 0), but that Fermi -detected sources have more negative energy spectral indices overall than Fermi -nondetected sources. In Figure 4, we see that while the majority of Fermi blazars are observed on the rising part of the synchrotron component (at lower energies than the peak), all of the objects have very steeply falling γ -ray energy spectral indexes, putting the γ -ray peak at lower energies than the observed Fermi band. Knowing that we are not observing the synchrotron and γ -ray components at analagous points in the spectrum may allow us to better understand the magnetic field in the parsec-scale jet region and the population of external photons that is being upscattered to γ -rays.\n\nIn Figure 5, the ratio between L γ and νL ν, 1mm reflects the division between BL Lacs and FSRQs as well", + "recall": 0.8419540229885057, + "true_md": "2009 Fermi Symposium, Washington, D.C., Nov. 2-5\n\n3\n\ndetailed variability analysis for one of two reasons: (1) too few data points or (2) flux measurement un- certainties on the order of the amplitude of observed variability. It is important to note that, due to dis- crepancies between the sampling frequency in both bands, the variability indices for the 850 µ m band may be artificially depressed due to the fact that there are not always corresponding measurements at higher fre- quencies during flaring epochs.\n\nWe follow the method of Kelly et al. [9], who model quasar optical light curves as a continuous time first- order autoregressive process (CAR(1)) in order to ex- tract characteristic time scales and the amplitude of flux variations. Although flaring behavior is not typi- cally thought of as an autoregressive process, we find that the light curves are well-fit by the models and therefore adopt the method here to study blazar sub- millimeter light curves.\n\nThe CAR(1) process is described by a stochastic differential equation [9],\n\nassociated with a power spectrum of the form\n\nIn equations 3 and 4, τ is called the “relaxation time” of the process S ( t ) and is identified by the break in P$_{X}$ ( f ). The power spectrum appears flat for timescales longer than this and falls off as 1 /f 2 for timescales shorter than the characteristic timescale of the process.\n\nTaking the logarithm of the blazar light curve (in Jy) to be S ( t ), we adopt τ (in days) as the character- istic timescale of variability, after which the physical process “forgets” about what has happened at time lags of greater than τ . The two other relevant pa- rameters, σ and µ = b/a , are the overall amplitude of variability and the logarithm of mean value of the light curve, respectively.\n\nIn the routine, we construct an autoregressive model for the light curves for a minimum of 100,000 iterations and calculate the value of τ from the break in the power spectrum in each instance. Due to the limited number of observations in the 850 µ m band, we performed this autoregressive analysis only for the 1mm light curves, which typically have more than 10 points per light curve.\n\nThis method yielded some surprising results. In Figure 3, we see that the BL Lacs and FSRQs exhibit virtually no difference in characteristic timescale, with\n\nIn general, we find that in the submillimeter, we are observing these blazars at or near the peak of the synchrotron component ( α$_{S}$ ∼ 0), but that Fermi - detected sources have more negative energy spectral indices overall than Fermi -nondetected sources. In Figure 4, we see that while the majority of Fermi blazars are observed on the rising part of the syn- chrotron component (at lower energies than the peak), all of the objects have very steeply falling γ -ray energy spectral indexes, putting the γ -ray peak at lower en- ergies than the observed Fermi band. Knowing that we are not observing the synchrotron and γ -ray com- ponents at analagous points in the spectrum may al- low us to better understand the magnetic field in the parsec-scale jet region and the population of external photons that is being upscattered to γ -rays.\n\nIn Figure 5, the ratio between L$_{γ}$ and νL$_{ν,}$$\\_{1mm}$ re- flects the division between BL Lacs and FSRQs as well\n\nboth classes extending across a large range in τ . Be- cause of the uncertainty for objects with shorter char- acteristic timescales, it is hard to draw any definitive conclusions about the differences between classes. It is important to note that τ does not necessarily rep- resent a flaring timescale, which is a behavior that typically operates on a scale of ∼ 10–100 days and not on the longer timescales we see in τ .\n\nFigure 3: Characteristic timescale (days) versus submillimeter luminosity (erg s − $^{1}$) in the 1mm band for all objects. Physically, τ represents a “relaxation timescale”, the timescale beyond which events are no longer correlated.\n\n## 3.2. First-Order Continuous Autoregression\n\n$$dS ( t ) = 1 τ S ( t ) dt + σ √ dt ϵ ( t ) + b dt, (3)$$\n\n$$P$_{X}$ ( f ) = 2 σ $^{2}$τ2 1 + (2 πτ f ) $_{2}$. (4)$$\n\n## 4. CONNECTION WITH GAMMA-RAYS\n\neConf C091122" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9258580661461366, + "doc_id": "4f4a960863ed563edc14baa942d961d4c10698cf4f7fdde32e568d2a43f147ae", + "edit_distance": 0.04837595024187975, + "f1_score": 0.9407894736842105, + "meteor": 0.9587510569432018, + "precision": 0.959731543624161, + "pred_md": "The critical fields (19) belong to the confinement region below the T = 0 crossover scale, Eq. (2), as anticipated.\n\nAt the background magnetic field 0 < B < B ( u ) cr the string breaking in the B -transverse plane may proceed via the creation of both u and d quarks. In the field window B ( u ) cr < B < B ( d ) cr the creation of the uu ¯ pairs becomes energetically unfavorable, while the string breaking via the dd ¯ pair creation can still occur. At B > B ( d ) cr the QCD string cannot be broken neither by uu ¯- or by dd ¯ -pair creation.\n\nThe difference in the critical values (19) can be understood as follows. According to Eqs. (8) and (10), the magnetic length l d of the d -quark is √ 2 times longer then the magnetic length l u of the u -quark. Consequently, the gain in the energy due to the dd ¯ -pair creation is larger compared to the energy gain achieved due to emergence of the u -quark pair. Thus, one needs a stronger magnetic field to suppress the dd ¯ -pair creation compared to a field needed to suppress the creation of a uu ¯-pair, B ( u ) cr < B ( d ) cr .\n\nProposal for numerical simulations. The effect of 'freezing' of the QCD string breaking can be tested in the lattice simulations of QCD with dynamical fermions. The magnetic fields of the order of (19) and higher were already achieved in the (quenched) lattice simulations [7, 8, 10, 11]. There are no principal obstacles to extend these simulations to QCD with dynamical fermions and check the prediction (19).\n\nPossible experimental consequences. The freezing of the QCD string breaking in the magnetic field may also have experimental consequences. Firstly, according to the estimation (1) of Ref. [1], the fields of the order of the critical value (19) may emerge in noncentral heavyion collisions at the LHC. However, our considerations do not apply to the first moments of the created quarkgluon fireball because the system stays in the deconfinement phase due to hot environment of the collision. As the plasma expands and cools down, it hadronizes in the presence of the decaying magnetic fields. The hadronization process in the magnetic field background involves string breaking events which are more favorable for the u quarks compared to the d quarks. Thus, the flavordependent freezing of the string breaking in the external magnetic field leads to the u -quark-rich content of the hadrons created in noncentral heavy-ion collisions compared to the central ones.\n\nSecondly, the background magnetic field stabilizes highly excited mesons by (i) freezing the quarks at the end-points of QCD string and (ii) suppressing the process of the light pair creation in the B -transverse plane. Since in the noncentral collisions the magnetic field axis is perpendicular to the reaction plane, we expect that the magnetic field reveals itself via abundance of radially excited mesons in the noncentral collisions compared to the central ones. The excited mesons should dominantly be polarized in the reaction plane, as the QCD string\n\n4\n\nin such mesons should tend to be perpendicular to the magnetic field axis. In each noncentral collision the orientation of the reaction plane can easily be determined from the elliptic flow of the emitted particles.\n\nThus, we are coming to a qualitative prediction that can in principle be checked experimentally in the heavyion collision experiments. The long QCD strings should break into pieces by multiple qq ¯ pair creation leading to formation of generally unstable hadrons. These primary hadrons later decay into more stable hadrons, leptons and photons, eventually forming jets [18]. Since the particles in the jets come out essentially aligned along the original string axis, we expect that the flavor-dependent freezing effect of the magnetic field on the QCD string breaking leads to an excess of the u -quark rich jets parallel to the reaction plane of the noncentral heavy-ion collisions.\n\n- ∗ On leave of absence from ITEP, Moscow, Russia.\n- [1] V. Skokov, A. Illarionov and V. Toneev, arXiv:0907.1396.\n- [2] D.E. Kharzeev, L.D. McLerran, and H.J. Warringa, Nucl. Phys. A 803 , 227 (2008) [arXiv:0711.0950]; K. Fukushima, D.E. Kharzeev, and H.J. Warringa, Phys. Rev. D 78 , 074033 (2008) [arXiv:0808.3382].\n- [3] V.P. Gusynin, V.A. Miransky, I.A. Shovkovy, Phys. Rev. Lett. 73 , 3499 (1994); Phys. Rev. D 52 , 4747 (1995); Nucl. Phys. B 462 , 249 (1996); ibid. B 563 , 361 (1999).\n- [4] I. A. Shushpanov and A. V. Smilga, Phys. Lett. B 402 , 351 (1997); T. D. Cohen, D. A. McGady and E. S. Werbos, Phys. Rev. C 76 , 055201 (2007).\n- [5] E. S. Fraga and A. J. Mizher, Phys. Rev. D 78 , 025016 (2008) [arXiv:0804.1452]; Nucl. Phys. A 820 , 103C (2009) [arXiv:0810.3693].\n- [6] B. I. Abelev et al. [STAR Collaboration], Phys. Rev. Lett. 103 , 251601 (2009) [arXiv:0909.1739]; arXiv:0909.1717; see also a Viewpoint of B. Mller, Physics u 2 , 104 (2009).\n- [7] P. V. Buividovich et al, Phys. Rev. D 80 , 054503 (2009) [arXiv:0907.0494 [hep-lat]]; M. Abramczyk, T. Blum, G. Petropoulos and R. Zhou, arXiv:0911.1348 [hep-lat].\n- [8] P. V. Buividovich et al, Phys. Lett. B 682 , 484 (2010) [arXiv:0812.1740 [hep-lat]].\n- [9] B. L. Ioffe, A. V. Smilga, Nucl. Phys. B 232 , 109 (1984).\n- [10] P. V. Buividovich et al, Nucl. Phys. B 826 , 313 (2010) [arXiv:0906.0488 [hep-lat]].\n- [11] P. V. Buividovich et al, arXiv:0909.2350 [hep-ph].\n- [12] V. A. Miransky and I. A. Shovkovy, Phys. Rev. D 66 , 045006 (2002) [arXiv:hep-ph/0205348].\n- [13] N. O. Agasian and S. M. Fedorov, Phys. Lett. B 663 , 445 (2008) [arXiv:0803.3156 [hep-ph]].\n- [14] D. N. Kabat, K. M. Lee and E. J. Weinberg, Phys. Rev. D 66 , 014004 (2002) [arXiv:hep-ph/0204120].\n- [15] D. T. Son and M. A. Stephanov, Phys. Rev. D 77 , 014021 (2008) [arXiv:0710.1084 [hep-ph]].\n- [16] B. Bolder et al. , Phys. Rev. D 63 , 074504 (2001); G. S. Bali et al. , ibid. D 71 , 114513 (2005).\n- [17] M.H.Johnson, B.A.Lippmann, Phys. Rev. 77 , 702 (1950).\n- [18] B. Andersson, G. Gustafson, G. Ingelman and T. Sjostrand, Phys. Rept. 97 , 31 (1983).", + "recall": 0.9225806451612903, + "true_md": "4\n\nThe critical fields (19) belong to the confinement region below the T = 0 crossover scale, Eq. (2), as anticipated.\n\nAt the background magnetic field 0 < B < B ( u ) cr the string breaking in the B -transverse plane may proceed via the creation of both u and d quarks. In the field window B ( u ) cr < B < B ( d ) cr the creation of the u ¯ u pairs be- comes energetically unfavorable, while the string break- ing via the d ¯ pair creation can still occur. At B > B ( d ) cr the QCD string cannot be broken neither by u ¯ u - or by d ¯ -pair creation.\n\nThe difference in the critical values (19) can be un- derstood as follows. According to Eqs. (8) and (10), the magnetic length l$_{d}$ of the d -quark is √$_{2 times longer then}$ the magnetic length l$_{u}$ of the u -quark. Consequently, the gain in the energy due to the d ¯ -pair creation is larger compared to the energy gain achieved due to emergence of the u -quark pair. Thus, one needs a stronger magnetic field to suppress the d ¯ -pair creation compared to a field needed to suppress the creation of a u ¯ u -pair, B ( u ) cr < B ( d ) cr .\n\nProposal for numerical simulations. The effect of “freezing” of the QCD string breaking can be tested in the lattice simulations of QCD with dynamical fermions. The magnetic fields of the order of (19) and higher were already achieved in the (quenched) lattice simulations [7, 8, 10, 11]. There are no principal obstacles to extend these simulations to QCD with dynamical fermions and check the prediction (19).\n\nPossible experimental consequences. The freez- ing of the QCD string breaking in the magnetic field may also have experimental consequences. Firstly, according to the estimation (1) of Ref. [1], the fields of the order of the critical value (19) may emerge in noncentral heavy- ion collisions at the LHC. However, our considerations do not apply to the first moments of the created quark- gluon fireball because the system stays in the deconfine- ment phase due to hot environment of the collision. As the plasma expands and cools down, it hadronizes in the presence of the decaying magnetic fields. The hadroniza- tion process in the magnetic field background involves string breaking events which are more favorable for the u quarks compared to the d quarks. Thus, the flavor- dependent freezing of the string breaking in the external magnetic field leads to the u -quark-rich content of the hadrons created in noncentral heavy-ion collisions com- pared to the central ones.\n\nSecondly, the background magnetic field stabilizes highly excited mesons by (i) freezing the quarks at the end-points of QCD string and (ii) suppressing the pro- cess of the light pair creation in the B -transverse plane. Since in the noncentral collisions the magnetic field axis is perpendicular to the reaction plane, we expect that the magnetic field reveals itself via abundance of radially excited mesons in the noncentral collisions compared to the central ones. The excited mesons should dominantly be polarized in the reaction plane, as the QCD string\n\nin such mesons should tend to be perpendicular to the magnetic field axis. In each noncentral collision the ori- entation of the reaction plane can easily be determined from the elliptic flow of the emitted particles.\n\nThus, we are coming to a qualitative prediction that can in principle be checked experimentally in the heavy- ion collision experiments. The long QCD strings should break into pieces by multiple q ¯ q pair creation leading to formation of generally unstable hadrons. These primary hadrons later decay into more stable hadrons, leptons and photons, eventually forming jets [18]. Since the particles in the jets come out essentially aligned along the original string axis, we expect that the flavor-dependent freezing effect of the magnetic field on the QCD string breaking leads to an excess of the u -quark rich jets parallel to the reaction plane of the noncentral heavy-ion collisions.\n\n∗ On leave of absence from ITEP, Moscow, Russia.\n\n- [1] V. Skokov, A. Illarionov and V. Toneev, arXiv:0907.1396.\n\n- [2] D.E. Kharzeev, L.D. McLerran, and H.J. Warringa, Nucl. Phys. A 803 , 227 (2008) [arXiv:0711.0950]; K. Fukushima, D.E. Kharzeev, and H.J. Warringa, Phys. Rev. D 78 , 074033 (2008) [arXiv:0808.3382].\n\n- [3] V.P. Gusynin, V.A. Miransky, I.A. Shovkovy, Phys. Rev. Lett. 73 , 3499 (1994); Phys. Rev. D 52 , 4747 (1995); Nucl. Phys. B 462 , 249 (1996); ibid. B 563 , 361 (1999).\n\n- [4] I. A. Shushpanov and A. V. Smilga, Phys. Lett. B 402 , 351 (1997); T. D. Cohen, D. A. McGady and E. S. Wer- bos, Phys. Rev. C 76 , 055201 (2007).\n\n- [5] E. S. Fraga and A. J. Mizher, Phys. Rev. D 78 , 025016 (2008) [arXiv:0804.1452]; Nucl. Phys. A 820 , 103C (2009) [arXiv:0810.3693].\n\n- [6] B. I. Abelev et al. [STAR Collaboration], Phys. Rev. Lett. 103 , 251601 (2009) [arXiv:0909.1739]; arXiv:0909.1717; see also a Viewpoint of B. M¨ uller, Physics 2 , 104 (2009).\n\n- [7] P. V. Buividovich et al, Phys. Rev. D 80 , 054503 (2009) [arXiv:0907.0494 [hep-lat]]; M. Abramczyk, T. Blum, G. Petropoulos and R. Zhou, arXiv:0911.1348 [hep-lat].\n\n- [8] P. V. Buividovich et al, Phys. Lett. B 682 , 484 (2010) [arXiv:0812.1740 [hep-lat]].\n\n- [9] B. L. Ioffe, A. V. Smilga, Nucl. Phys. B 232 , 109 (1984).\n\n- [10] P. V. Buividovich et al, Nucl. Phys. B 826 , 313 (2010) [arXiv:0906.0488 [hep-lat]].\n\n- [11] P. V. Buividovich et al, arXiv:0909.2350 [hep-ph].\n\n- [12] V. A. Miransky and I. A. Shovkovy, Phys. Rev. D 66 , 045006 (2002) [arXiv:hep-ph/0205348].\n\n- [13] N. O. Agasian and S. M. Fedorov, Phys. Lett. B 663 , 445 (2008) [arXiv:0803.3156 [hep-ph]].\n\n- [14] D. N. Kabat, K. M. Lee and E. J. Weinberg, Phys. Rev. D 66 , 014004 (2002) [arXiv:hep-ph/0204120].\n\n- [15] D. T. Son and M. A. Stephanov, Phys. Rev. D 77 , 014021 (2008) [arXiv:0710.1084 [hep-ph]].\n\n- [16] B. Bolder et al. , Phys. Rev. D 63 , 074504 (2001); G. S. Bali et al. , ibid. D 71 , 114513 (2005).\n\n- [17] M.H.Johnson, B.A.Lippmann, Phys. Rev. 77 , 702 (1950).\n\n- [18] B. Andersson, G. Gustafson, G. Ingelman and T. Sjos- trand, Phys. Rept. 97 , 31 (1983)." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7313195233241285, + "doc_id": "4a4adc679d5f10ee9a433cea396adb600252fe0b04d5e76fb02966f7b1804bd5", + "edit_distance": 0.8379237288135594, + "f1_score": 0.9148936170212767, + "meteor": 0.576869721978378, + "precision": 0.9435736677115988, + "pred_md": "FIG. 15: Top σ ω ( ) in the NS and the SCS in the 'corrected' MFLI model with the feedback from SC on the quasiparticle damping: i Γ term transforms into Γ √ -ω 2 +∆ 2 . In the SCS σ now begins at Ω = 2∆. The parameters are same as in Fig. 10. Bottom - the behavior of Kubo sum with Γ. Observe that W ω ( c ) in the NS is larger than in the SCS.\n\nFIG. 15: Top σ ω ( ) in the NS and the SCS in the 'corrected' MFLI model with the feedback from SC on the quasiparticle damping: i Γ term transforms into Γ √ -ω 2 +∆ 2 . In the SCS σ now begins at Ω = 2∆. The parameters are same as in Fig. 10. Bottom - the behavior of Kubo sum with Γ. Observe that W ω ( c ) in the NS is larger than in the SCS.\n\nFIG. 16: Evolution of the difference of the optical integrals between the SCS and the NS with the upper cut-off ω c for the 'corrected' MFLI model. Now ∆ W ω ( c ) is negative above some frequency. Parameters are same as in the Fig 15.\n\nFIG. 16: Evolution of the difference of the optical integrals between the SCS and the NS with the upper cut-off ω c for the 'corrected' MFLI model. Now ∆ W ω ( c ) is negative above some frequency. Parameters are same as in the Fig 15.\n\nmodel, where W K is larger in the NS for all Γ (see Fig. 4). In other words, the original MFLI model does not have the BCSI theory as its limiting case.\n\nWe modified the MFLI model is a minimal way by changing the damping term in a SCS to Γ √ -ω 2 +∆ 2 to be consistent with BCSI model. We still use Eq. (18) for the MFL term simply because this term was introduced in the NS on phenomenological grounds and there is no way to guess how it gets modified in the SCS state with-\n\n10\n\nrst deriving the normal state self-energy microscopically (this is what we will do in the next section). The results of the calculations for the modified MFLI model are presented in Figs. 15 and 16. We clearly see that the behavior is now different and ∆ W K < 0 for all Γ. This is the same behavior as we previously found in BCSI and EB models. So we argue that the 'unconventional' behavior exhibited by the original MFLI model is most likely the manifestation of a particular modeling inconsistency. Still, Ref. 30 made a valid point that the fact that quasiparticles behave more close to free fermions in a SCS than in a NS, and this effect tends to reverse the signs of ∆ W K and of the kinetic energy 43 . It just happens that in a modified MFLI model the optical integral is still larger in the NS.\n\n## D. The collective boson model\n\nWe now turn to a more microscopic model- the CB model. The model describes fermions interacting by exchanging soft, overdamped collective bosons in a particular, near-critical, spin or charge channel 31,44,45 . This interaction is responsible for the normal state self-energy and also gives rise to a superconductivity. A peculiar feature of the CB model is that the propagator of a collective boson changes below T c because this boson is not an independent degree of freedom (as in EB model) but is made out of low-energy fermions which are affected by superconductivity 32 .\n\nThe most relevant point for our discussion is that this model contains the physics which we identified above as a source of a potential sign change of ∆ W K . Namely, at strong coupling the fermionic self-energy in the NS is large because there exists strong scattering between low-energy fermions mediated by low-energy collective bosons. In the SCS, the density of low-energy fermions drops and a continuum collective excitations becomes gaped. Both effects reduce fermionic damping and lead to the increase of W K in a SCS. If this increase exceeds a conventional loss of W K due to a gap opening, the total ∆ W K may become positive.\n\nThe CB model has been applied numerous times to the cuprates, most often under the assumption that nearcritical collective excitations are spin fluctuations with momenta near Q = ( π, π ). This version of a CB boson is commonly known as a spin-fermion model. This model yields d x 2 -y 2 superconductivity and explains in a quantitative way a number of measured electronic features of the cuprates, in particular the near-absence of the quasiparticle peak in the NS of optimally doped and underdoped cuprates 39 and the peak-dip-hump structure in the ARPES profile in the SCS 31,32,46,47 . In our analysis we assume that a CB is a spin fluctuation.\n\nThe results for the conductivity within a spin-fermion model depend in quantitative (but not qualitative) way on the assumption for the momentum dispersion of a collective boson. This momentum dependence comes from", + "recall": 0.887905604719764, + "true_md": "10\n\nout first deriving the normal state self-energy microscop- ically (this is what we will do in the next section). The results of the calculations for the modified MFLI model are presented in Figs. 15 and 16. We clearly see that the behavior is now different and Δ W$_{K}$ < 0 for all Γ. This is the same behavior as we previously found in BCSI and EB models. So we argue that the ‘unconventional’ behavior exhibited by the original MFLI model is most likely the manifestation of a particular modeling incon- sistency. Still, Ref. 30 made a valid point that the fact that quasiparticles behave more close to free fermions in a SCS than in a NS, and this effect tends to reverse the signs of Δ W$_{K}$ and of the kinetic energy $^{43}$. It just hap- pens that in a modified MFLI model the optical integral is still larger in the NS.\n\nWe now turn to a more microscopic model- the CB model. The model describes fermions interacting by ex- changing soft, overdamped collective bosons in a partic- ular, near-critical, spin or charge channel $^{31,44,45}$. This interaction is responsible for the normal state self-energy and also gives rise to a superconductivity. A peculiar feature of the CB model is that the propagator of a col- lective boson changes below T$_{c}$ because this boson is not an independent degree of freedom (as in EB model) but is made out of low-energy fermions which are affected by superconductivity $^{32}$.\n\nThe most relevant point for our discussion is that this model contains the physics which we identified above as a source of a potential sign change of Δ W$_{K}$ . Namely, at strong coupling the fermionic self-energy in the NS is large because there exists strong scattering between low-energy fermions mediated by low-energy collective bosons. In the SCS, the density of low-energy fermions drops and a continuum collective excitations becomes gaped. Both effects reduce fermionic damping and lead to the increase of W$_{K}$ in a SCS. If this increase exceeds a conventional loss of W$_{K}$ due to a gap opening, the total Δ W$_{K}$ may become positive.\n\nThe CB model has been applied numerous times to the cuprates, most often under the assumption that near- critical collective excitations are spin fluctuations with momenta near Q = ( π,π ). This version of a CB bo- son is commonly known as a spin-fermion model. This model yields d$_{x}$ $^{2}$− y 2 superconductivity and explains in a quantitative way a number of measured electronic fea- tures of the cuprates, in particular the near-absence of the quasiparticle peak in the NS of optimally doped and underdoped cuprates 39 and the peak-dip-hump structure in the ARPES profile in the SCS $^{31,32,46,47}$. In our analy- sis we assume that a CB is a spin fluctuation.\n\nThe results for the conductivity within a spin-fermion model depend in quantitative (but not qualitative) way on the assumption for the momentum dispersion of a col- lective boson. This momentum dependence comes from\n\nmodel, where W$_{K}$ is larger in the NS for all Γ (see Fig. 4). In other words, the original MFLI model does not have the BCSI theory as its limiting case.\n\nWe modified the MFLI model is a minimal way by changing the damping term in a SCS to Γ √ − ω $^{2}$+Δ2 to be consistent with BCSI model. We still use Eq. (18) for the MFL term simply because this term was introduced in the NS on phenomenological grounds and there is no way to guess how it gets modified in the SCS state with-\n\nFIG. 16: Evolution of the difference of the optical integrals between the SCS and the NS with the upper cut-off ω c for the “corrected” MFLI model. Now Δ W ( ω c ) is negative above some frequency. Parameters are same as in the Fig 15.\n\nFIG. 15: Top – σ ( ω ) in the NS and the SCS in the ‘corrected’ MFLI model with the feedback from SC on the quasiparticle damping: i Γ term transforms into Γ √ $_{−}$ω $^{2}$+Δ$_{2}$. In the SCS σ now begins at Ω = 2Δ. The parameters are same as in Fig. 10. Bottom – the behavior of Kubo sum with Γ. Observe that W ( ω c ) in the NS is larger than in the SCS.\n\n## D. The collective boson model" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7015569356991203, + "doc_id": "b83755611643c6b12c79114c37c1e6941a30ce156604414fc21fbb2034f2222d", + "edit_distance": 0.8055555555555556, + "f1_score": 0.8863636363636364, + "meteor": 0.7907670620493179, + "precision": 0.9285714285714286, + "pred_md": "- of ∆ W ω ( c ) in a system without a lattice (Ref. 51 ). The authors of that work also found that the frequency of zerocrossing of ∆ W ω ( c ) increases with the coupling strength.\n\n16\n\n- 51 Ar. Abanov and A.V. Chubukov, Phys. Rev. B 70 , 100504 (2004).", + "recall": 0.8478260869565217, + "true_md": "16\n\n51 Ar. Abanov and A.V. Chubukov, Phys. Rev. B 70 , 100504 (2004).\n\nof Δ W ( ω c ) in a system without a lattice (Ref. $^{51}$). The authors of that work also found that the frequency of zero- crossing of Δ W ( ω c ) increases with the coupling strength." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.16115880927540108, + "doc_id": "aca5ea4e25b7a9e1dd232880f27196fddf4f3e514c31254f0278b67c757fca10", + "edit_distance": 0.8354134165366615, + "f1_score": 0.8008474576271187, + "meteor": 0.2926025696733295, + "precision": 0.9356435643564357, + "pred_md": "ξ = δµ/T , and /epsilon1 ( T, 0) is the neutrino emissivity in equilibrium\n\n\n\nFor a periodic process, the expansion and contraction of the system will induce not only the dissipation of oscillation energy to heat, but also the loss of oscillation energy through an increasing of the neutrino emissivity. Bulk viscous coefficient ζ and radiative viscous coefficient R can be defined for the description of these dissipation mechanisms, respectively [20]\n\n\n\n\n\nwhere /vector v is the hydrodynamic velocity associated with the density oscillations, and τ = 2 π/ω is the oscillation period. Using the continuity equation, one obtains\n\n\n\n\n\nwhere the energy dissipation is\n\n\n\nand the neutrino emissivity caused by the oscillation is\n\n\n\nHere, we only present the results, for detailed calculations see [20]\n\n\n\n\n\nFrom Eqs. (8)and(9), one gets\n\n\n\nThis relation only holds for small oscillations. If the perturbation amplitude is large enough, the non-linear effect must be taken into account and this simple relation is no longer correct [21].\n\nApparently,\n\n\n\nIn the following, we will show how to calculate S /λ in the lowest order of ξ .\n\nIn non-beta equilibrium, the net reaction rate of direct Urca process with nucleon superfluidity is [24]\n\n\n\nand the total neutrino emissivity is[25, 26]\n\n\n\nwhere\n\n\n\nand the subscript j = 1 2 3 corresponds to , , n, p, e respectively. v j = ∆ j T is the gap amplitude and z j = ε j -µ j T (where j = 1 2), , x 3 = ε e -µ e T . x ν = ε ν T is the dimensionless energy of the neutrino, and f ( x ) = (1 + e x ) -1 is the Fermi-Dirac functions of nucleons and electrons, p F j is the Fermi momentum and m ∗ j is the effective particle mass. d Ω j is the solid angle element in the direction of the particle momentum, and | M fi | 2 is the squared reaction amplitude.\n\nHere, we want to stress that z 1 and z 2 in the above two formula carry all the information about nucleon superfluidity. Whether for neutron superfluidity or proton superfluidity, near the Fermi surface we have\n\n\n\n2\n\nNow let us consider the effect of nucleon superfluidity on radiative viscosity. Assuming\n\n\n\n", + "recall": 0.7, + "true_md": "2\n\n$$Γ$_{ν}$ − Γ$_{ν}$ = − λ ξ 2 δµ , (20)$$\n\n$$˙ E loss = S ξ $^{2}$. (21)$$\n\n$$R = ( S λ ) ζ. (22)$$\n\n$$ϵ ( T, 0) = 3 . 3 × 10 − 14 ( x$_{p}$ρ ρ 0 ) 1 / 3 T $^{6}$MeV$^{5}$. (10)$$\n\n$$〈 ˙ E diss 〉 = − ζ τ ∫ τ 0 dt ( ∇ · ⃗ v ) 2 , (11)$$\n\n$$〈 ˙ E loss 〉 = R τ ∫ τ 0 dt ( ∇ · ⃗ v ) 2 , (12)$$\n\n$$Γ$_{ν}$ − Γ$_{ν}$ = 4 π (2 π ) $_{8}$T 5   3 ∏ j $_{=1}$∫ d Ω$_{j}$   δ ( P$_{f}$ − P$_{i}$ ) | M$_{fi}$ | 2 3 ∏ j =1 p$_{F}$$_{j}$ m ∗ j + ∞ ∫ 0 dx$_{ν}$x 2 $_{ν}$[ J ( x$_{ν}$ − ξ, v$_{j}$ ) − J ( x$_{ν}$ + ξ, v$_{j}$ )] , (23)$$\n\n$$ζ = − 2 〈 ˙ E diss 〉 ( υ 0 Δ υ ) 2 ( τ 2 π ) 2 , (13)$$\n\n$$R = 2 〈 ˙ E loss 〉 ( υ 0 Δ υ ) 2 ( τ 2 π ) 2 , (14)$$\n\n$$〈 ˙ E diss 〉 = − ∫ τ 0 (Γ$_{ν}$ − Γ$_{ν}$) δµdt, (15)$$\n\n$$ϵ ( ξ, v$_{j}$ ) = 4 π (2 π ) $_{8}$T 6   3 ∏ j $_{=1}$∫ d Ω$_{j}$   δ ( P$_{f}$ − P$_{i}$ ) | M$_{fi}$ | 2 3 ∏ j =1 p$_{F}$$_{j}$ m ∗ j + ∞ ∫ 0 dx$_{ν}$x 3 $_{ν}$[ J ( x$_{ν}$ − ξ, v$_{j}$ ) + J ( x$_{ν}$ + ξ, v$_{j}$ )] , (24)$$\n\n$$J ( x, v$_{j}$ ) = + ∞ ∫ −∞ dx 1 dx 2 dx 3 f ( z 1 ) f ( z 2 ) f ( x 3 ) × δ ( z 1 + z 2 + x 3 − x ) , (25)$$\n\n$$〈 ˙ E loss 〉 = ∫ τ 0 ˙ E loss dt. (16)$$\n\n$$ζ = λC 2 ω 2 + ( λB/n$_{b}$ ) $_{2}$, (17)$$\n\n$$R = ( S 0 λ 0 ) ζ. (18)$$\n\n$$R = 3 2 ζ. (19)$$\n\n$$ε − µ = sign( η ) √ δ 2 + η $^{2}$, (26)$$\n\nξ = δµ/T , and ϵ ( T, 0) is the neutrino emissivity in equi- librium\n\nNow let us consider the effect of nucleon superfluidity on radiative viscosity. Assuming\n\nApparently,\n\nFor a periodic process, the expansion and contraction of the system will induce not only the dissipation of os- cillation energy to heat, but also the loss of oscillation energy through an increasing of the neutrino emissivity. Bulk viscous coefficient ζ and radiative viscous coefficient R can be defined for the description of these dissipation mechanisms, respectively [20]\n\nIn the following, we will show how to calculate S /λ in the lowest order of ξ .\n\nIn non-beta equilibrium, the net reaction rate of direct Urca process with nucleon superfluidity is [24]\n\nwhere ⃗ v is the hydrodynamic velocity associated with the density oscillations, and τ = 2 π/ω is the oscillation period. Using the continuity equation, one obtains\n\nand the total neutrino emissivity is[25, 26]\n\nwhere the energy dissipation is\n\nand the neutrino emissivity caused by the oscillation is\n\nwhere\n\nHere, we only present the results, for detailed calcula- tions see [20]\n\nand the subscript j = 1 , 2 , 3 corresponds to n, p, e re- spectively. v$_{j}$ = Δ$_{j}$ T is the gap amplitude and z$_{j}$ = ε$_{j}$ − µ$_{j}$ T (where j = 1 , 2), x 3 = ε$_{e}$ − µ$_{e}$ T . x$_{ν}$ = ε$_{ν}$ T is the dimen- sionless energy of the neutrino, and f ( x ) = (1 + e $^{x}$) − 1 is the Fermi-Dirac functions of nucleons and electrons, p$_{F}$$\\_{j}$ is the Fermi momentum and m ∗ j is the effective particle mass. d Ω$\\_{j}$ is the solid angle element in the direction of the particle momentum, and | M$\\_{fi}$ | 2 is the squared reac- tion amplitude.\n\nFrom Eqs. (8)and(9), one gets\n\nThis relation only holds for small oscillations. If the per- turbation amplitude is large enough, the non-linear effect must be taken into account and this simple relation is no longer correct [21].\n\nHere, we want to stress that z 1 and z 2 in the above two formula carry all the information about nucleon su- perfluidity. Whether for neutron superfluidity or proton superfluidity, near the Fermi surface we have" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7069606632679307, + "doc_id": "930c92b66cdbb3593e8df96a667d3acaf6e72e73263b5ad4acfb6e213133f37c", + "edit_distance": 0.8592027141645462, + "f1_score": 0.8901408450704226, + "meteor": 0.569793504389957, + "precision": 0.9321533923303835, + "pred_md": "FIG. 4. (Color online) Photocurrent density vs. applied voltage. (a) Influence of thermal treatment for solar cells with Ca/Al cathode. (b) Cells with Ca/Al and Ag cathode, in each case for two different active layer thicknesses. The magnitude of the voltage-independent offset can be influenced by thermal treatment and choice of cathode material.\n\nFIG. 4. (Color online) Photocurrent density vs. applied voltage. (a) Influence of thermal treatment for solar cells with Ca/Al cathode. (b) Cells with Ca/Al and Ag cathode, in each case for two different active layer thicknesses. The magnitude of the voltage-independent offset can be influenced by thermal treatment and choice of cathode material.\n\n## B. Voltage-independent offset of J Ph\n\nAs mentioned above, the photocurrent is composed of two contributions. The first is voltage-dependent and symmetric with respect to POS. The second contribution is a voltageindependent offset, which is crucial for device performance and can be influenced by processing parameters. Figure 4 shows the influence of cathode material and annealing conditions on the photocurrent. While the shape of J Ph remains similar, the offset is critically dependent on both cathode material and thermal treatment. With respect to the pristine sample, the offset decreases after thermal treatment at 80 or 200 · C, but increases upon treatment at 140 · C (Figure 4a). Using Ag as cathode material yields a much smaller offset than Ca/Al, while the shape of the photocurrent curves is very similar (Figure 4b). V POS is also smaller for cells with Ag cathode, with values of about 0.45 V, which is a direct consequence of the higher injection barriers. Active layer thickness d influences the magnitude of the offset as well. The highest negative offset, up to 4.1 mA cm -1 , was observed for solar cells with Ca/Al cathode, active layer thickness of 120 nm and thermal annealing at 140 · C. These cells had the highest J SC and PCE.\n\nAs this voltage-independent offset can be influenced by the choice of cathode material without changing the shape of the photocurrent significantly, we assume the contact regions to be responsible for the offset. The voltage dependent part of J Ph then corresponds to the photocurrent generated in the bulk of the solar cell.\n\nOoi et al. explained this offset with self-selective electrodes, 5 resulting in a constant diffusion current J Ph, offset = -( eDn ph / d ) , where e is the elementary charge, D the diffusivity and nph the concentration of photogenerated charge carriers at the selective electrode. In contrast to this predicted d -1 dependence, we observed a maximum (negative) offset for a thickness d of about 120 nm, with smaller\n\n4\n\noffsets for thinner and thicker devices (not shown).\n\nAs an alternative explanation for this constant offset, we propose the band bending in vicinity of the contacts, whichindependently of applied bias-has only one direction and results in an electric field high enough for efficient polaron pair dissociation (see Figure 2). The contact regions would then give a constant contribution to J Ph, which depends on the degree of band bending-and therefore the height of the injections barriers-while the bulk region contributes to J Ph as a function of applied voltage and causes the symmetry.\n\nThe exact nature of this offset and its dependence on the cathode material has to be further investigated. A highly negative offset is crucial for device performance, and should be optimized, e.g. by choice of cathode material.\n\n## C. Voltage vs. field dependence\n\nThe active layer thickness d has only little influence on the voltage dependence of the observed photocurrent (Figure 5(a)). Of course the absolute value of J Ph is higher for thicker cells, but the shape of J Ph ( V ) is very similar for cells with thicknesses between 55 and 130 nm. This is surprising, since e.g. polaron pair dissociation and thereby J Ph are supposed to be dependent on electric field E . 21 In the simplest approximation, assuming a constant slope in energy bands over the whole extension of the device, the effective field is the fraction of effective voltage and active layer thickness:\n\n\n\nCharacteristic points of the photocurrent, indicated by red dashed lines in Figure 5, lie on top of each other when plotted against effective voltage | V -V POS | . When plotted against the calculated field E (Equation (2)), the curves of J Ph disperse (Figure 5(b)). This indicates that the approximation for the internal field in Equation (2) is not realistic. The reason for this is the voltage drop at the contacts (Figure 2), which greatly reduces the electric field in the bulk of the cell. In addition the photocurrent is not only governed by field dependent polaron pair dissociation, but also depends on the extraction of charge carriers. As described below, the active layer thickness does not influence this extraction mechanism.\n\n## D. Polaron pair dissociation and charge extraction\n\nTo describe the voltage dependence of the photocurrent, we propose a model that takes field-dependent polaron pair (PP) dissociation and voltage dependent polaron extraction by drift and diffusion into account. A well-known model to describe field-dependent PP dissociation was presented by Braun in 1984. 6 Using the field dependence for ion-pair dissociation by Onsager and Langevin recombination for polarons, 7,15 Braun derives the following PP dissociation probability:\n\n", + "recall": 0.8517520215633423, + "true_md": "4\n\noffsets for thinner and thicker devices (not shown).\n\nAs an alternative explanation for this constant offset, we propose the band bending in vicinity of the contacts, which— independently of applied bias—has only one direction and re- sults in an electric field high enough for efficient polaron pair dissociation (see Figure 2). The contact regions would then give a constant contribution to J$_{Ph}$ , which depends on the de- gree of band bending—and therefore the height of the injec- tions barriers—while the bulk region contributes to J$_{Ph}$ as a function of applied voltage and causes the symmetry.\n\nThe exact nature of this offset and its dependence on the cathode material has to be further investigated. A highly neg- ative offset is crucial for device performance, and should be optimized, e.g. by choice of cathode material.\n\nFIG. 4. (Color online) Photocurrent density vs. applied voltage. (a) Influence of thermal treatment for solar cells with Ca/Al cathode. (b) Cells with Ca/Al and Ag cathode, in each case for two different active layer thicknesses. The magnitude of the voltage-independent offset can be influenced by thermal treatment and choice of cathode material.\n\n## C. Voltage vs. field dependence\n\n## B. Voltage-independent offset of J$_{Ph}$\n\n$$E = | V − V$_{POS}$ | / d (2)$$\n\nThe active layer thickness d has only little influence on the voltage dependence of the observed photocurrent (Fig- ure 5(a)). Of course the absolute value of J$_{Ph}$ is higher for thicker cells, but the shape of J$_{Ph}$ ( V ) is very similar for cells with thicknesses between 55 and 130 nm. This is surprising, since e.g. polaron pair dissociation and thereby J$_{Ph}$ are sup- posed to be dependent on electric field E . 21 In the simplest ap- proximation, assuming a constant slope in energy bands over the whole extension of the device, the effective field is the fraction of effective voltage and active layer thickness:\n\nCharacteristic points of the photocurrent, indicated by red dashed lines in Figure 5, lie on top of each other when plot- ted against effective voltage | V − V$_{POS}$ | . When plotted against the calculated field E (Equation (2)), the curves of J$_{Ph}$ disperse (Figure 5(b)). This indicates that the approximation for the in- ternal field in Equation (2) is not realistic. The reason for this is the voltage drop at the contacts (Figure 2), which greatly reduces the electric field in the bulk of the cell. In addition the photocurrent is not only governed by field dependent polaron pair dissociation, but also depends on the extraction of charge carriers. As described below, the active layer thickness does not influence this extraction mechanism.\n\nAs mentioned above, the photocurrent is composed of two contributions. The first is voltage-dependent and symmetric with respect to POS. The second contribution is a voltage- independent offset, which is crucial for device performance and can be influenced by processing parameters. Figure 4 shows the influence of cathode material and annealing con- ditions on the photocurrent. While the shape of J$_{Ph}$ remains similar, the offset is critically dependent on both cathode ma- terial and thermal treatment. With respect to the pristine sam- ple, the offset decreases after thermal treatment at 80 or 200 $^{◦}$C, but increases upon treatment at 140 $^{◦}$C (Figure 4a). Us- ing Ag as cathode material yields a much smaller offset than Ca/Al, while the shape of the photocurrent curves is very simi- lar (Figure 4b). V$_{POS}$ is also smaller for cells with Ag cathode, with values of about 0.45 V, which is a direct consequence of the higher injection barriers. Active layer thickness d influ- ences the magnitude of the offset as well. The highest negative offset, up to 4.1 mA cm − $^{1}$, was observed for solar cells with Ca/Al cathode, active layer thickness of 120 nm and thermal annealing at 140 $^{◦}$C. These cells had the highest J$_{SC}$ and PCE.\n\nAs this voltage-independent offset can be influenced by the choice of cathode material without changing the shape of the photocurrent significantly, we assume the contact regions to be responsible for the offset. The voltage dependent part of J$_{Ph}$ then corresponds to the photocurrent generated in the bulk of the solar cell.\n\nOoi et al. explained this offset with self-selective electrodes, 5 resulting in a constant diffusion current J$_{Ph, offset}$ = − ( eDn$_{ph}$ / d ) , where e is the elementary charge, D the diffusivity and n$_{ph}$ the concentration of photogenerated charge carriers at the selective electrode. In contrast to this predicted d − 1 dependence, we observed a maximum (nega- tive) offset for a thickness d of about 120 nm, with smaller\n\nTo describe the voltage dependence of the photocurrent, we propose a model that takes field-dependent polaron pair (PP) dissociation and voltage dependent polaron extraction by drift and diffusion into account. A well-known model to describe field-dependent PP dissociation was presented by Braun in 1984. 6 Using the field dependence for ion-pair dissociation by Onsager and Langevin recombination for polarons, 7,15 Braun derives the following PP dissociation probability:\n\n## D. Polaron pair dissociation and charge extraction\n\n$$P$_{Braun}$ ( E ) = k$_{d}$ ( E ) k$_{d}$ ( E )+ k$_{f}$ = $_{k$_{d}$}$( E ) $_{k$_{d}$}$( E )+( µ$_{t}$$_{f}$ ) − 1 , (3)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9049153788802254, + "doc_id": "78501025603bc0d592fedd0fd9fc94e69830ccb92049a81c56a4c0c4f8499367", + "edit_distance": 0.43109540636042404, + "f1_score": 0.9436769394261423, + "meteor": 0.9336401693379626, + "precision": 0.9715536105032823, + "pred_md": "from site 1 to site 2 since ω 1 31 ≈ ω 2 32 and C ω ( 1 31 ) ≈ C ω ( 2 32 ) (Fig. 1).\n\nTABLE I: Contributions of the system factor, ζ ab,ba , and of the overlap between transition frequency and phonon bath spectral properties, C ω ( ab ), to the calculation of the quantum kinetic rates k ab from energy eigenstate | e a 〉 to | e b 〉 . The two cases considered are described in Fig. 1.\n\nFrom the values of ζ and C ω ( ab ), it is clear that case 1 is designed such that an excitation starting on site 3 will tend to transfer to site 1, but in case 2 the population will go to site 2, albeit at different rates. Simulations of the quantum dynamics according to Redfield theory confirms this result (Fig. 2). Over the typical exciton lifetime of 1 ns in QDs, we not only achieve directed transfer, but also population enhancement compared to both the maximum site population during fully coherent dynamics and the population expected at thermal equilibrium.\n\nMoreover, while there are always experimental limitations in tuning parameters, the structure of Eq. 11 is valuable since it partitions the effects due to the system and bath. Using the calculated rates and/or a visual inspection of C ω ( ) (Fig. 1B), it is easy to determine the impact of varying a system parameter on exciton transfer. Future work will address exciton and electron transfer between sites with varying spectral density functions, as well as the role of aligning dipole moment orientations in engineering EET. We are also working to identify regimes in which preserved coherences enhance or reduce the efficiency of excitonic transfer. Of course, in situations where multiple excitons are present in the system due to incident light intensity, frequency range, and/or optical spectral density of the quantum dots, the Hamiltonian used to describe the system needs to be expanded\n\n- [1] G. D. Scholes, Annual Review of Physical Chemistry 54 , 57 (2003).\n- [2] J. R. Lakowicz, Principles of Fluorescence Spectroscopy (New York: Springer, 2006), 3rd ed.\n- [3] G. D. Scholes and G. Rumbles, Nat Mater 5 , 683 (2006).\n- [4] S. A. Crooker, J. A. Hollingsworth, S. Tretiak, and V. I. Klimov, Physical Review Letters 89 , 186802 (2002).\n- [5] E. Collini and G. D. Scholes, Science 323 , 369373 (2009).\n- [6] H. Lee, Y. Cheng, and G. R. Fleming, Science 316 , 1462 (2007).\n- [7] Y. Cheng and G. R. Fleming, Annual Review of Physical Chemistry 60 , 241 (2009).\n- [8] M. Christandl, N. Datta, T. C. Dorlas, A. Ekert, A. Kay, and A. J. Landahl, Phys. Rev. A 71 , 032312 (2005).\n- [9] E. Rozbicki and P. Machnikowski, Physical Review Let-\n\n3\n\naccordingly [29]. To the extent that each exciton couples to the environment through a spectral density as described in this letter, some of the intuition developed here should be transferable to these systems. However, there are a number of interesting complications, including many-body interactions among the excitons and corrections to the rates due to multi-phonon processes. A more careful analysis is needed when the offset in QD excitation energies is large compared with the characteristic frequency expanded by the phonon spectral densities or for systems at much higher temperature, e.g., room temperature, where multi-phonon processes are expected to be relevant, or even dominant. These effects are currently under investigation and are beyond the scope of the current communication.\n\nIn summary, we develop a framework for engineering environment-assisted and directed excitonic transfer in a network of coupled QDs based on a quantum kinetic rate approach. We emphasize the importance of how characteristic frequencies of a system fit within the spectral bath structure. Our examples utilize the factored and intuitive form of the population transfer rates equation, which separates the contributions from the system (electronic) and bath (vibrational) degrees of freedom. This equation is similar in spirit to the rate equation for FRET, making it convenient to design interesting scenarios for environment-assisted transfer. Although we focus on QD examples, the principles presented here form the basis for engineering a wide range of desired EET in a variety of nanostructures or artificial molecular photosynthetic units.\n\nThe authors thank Semion Saikin for helpful discussions. A. A.-G. and A. P. were supported as part of the Center for Excitonics, an Energy Frontier Research Center funded by the U.S. Department of Energy, Office of Science, Office of Basic Energy Sciences under Award Number de-sc0001088. L. V. acknowledges support from the NSF Graduate Research Fellowship. A.N. acknowledges support from NSERC (Canada)\n\nters 100 , 027401 (2008).\n\n- [10] P. Rebentrost, M. Mohseni, I. Kassal, S. Lloyd, and A. Aspuru-Guzik, New Journal of Physics 11 , 033003 (2009).\n- [11] M. B. Plenio and S. F. Huelga, New Journal of Physics 10 , 113019 (14pp) (2008).\n- [12] A. A. High, E. E. Novitskaya, L. V. Butov, M. Hanson, and A. C. Gossard, Science 321 , 229 (2008).\n- [13] K. M. Gaab and C. J. Bardeen, The Journal of Chemical Physics 121 , 7813 (2004).\n- [14] J. Cao and R. J. Silbey, The Journal of Physical Chemistry A 113 , 13825 (2009).\n- [15] V. May and O. Kuhn, Charge and Energy Transfer Dynamics in Molecular Systems (Wiley-VCH, 2004), 2nd ed.", + "recall": 0.9173553719008265, + "true_md": "3\n\nfrom site 1 to site 2 since ω 1 31 ≈ ω 2 32 and C ( ω 1 $_{31}$) ≈ C ( ω 2 $_{32}$) (Fig. 1).\n\nTABLE I: Contributions of the system factor, ζ ab,ba , and of the overlap between transition frequency and phonon bath spectral properties, C ( ω ab ), to the calculation of the quantum kinetic rates k ab from energy eigenstate | e a 〉 to | e b 〉 . The two cases considered are described in Fig. 1.\n\nFrom the values of ζ and C ( ω$_{ab}$ ), it is clear that case 1 is designed such that an excitation starting on site 3 will tend to transfer to site 1, but in case 2 the population will go to site 2, albeit at different rates. Simulations of the quantum dynamics according to Redfield theory confirms this result (Fig. 2). Over the typical exciton lifetime of 1 ns in QDs, we not only achieve directed transfer, but also population enhancement compared to both the maximum site population during fully coherent dynamics and the population expected at thermal equilibrium.\n\nMoreover, while there are always experimental limi- tations in tuning parameters, the structure of Eq. 11 is valuable since it partitions the effects due to the system and bath. Using the calculated rates and/or a visual in- spection of C ( ω ) (Fig. 1B), it is easy to determine the impact of varying a system parameter on exciton trans- fer. Future work will address exciton and electron trans- fer between sites with varying spectral density functions, as well as the role of aligning dipole moment orienta- tions in engineering EET. We are also working to identify regimes in which preserved coherences enhance or reduce the efficiency of excitonic transfer. Of course, in situa- tions where multiple excitons are present in the system due to incident light intensity, frequency range, and/or optical spectral density of the quantum dots, the Hamil- tonian used to describe the system needs to be expanded\n\naccordingly [29]. To the extent that each exciton cou- ples to the environment through a spectral density as described in this letter, some of the intuition developed here should be transferable to these systems. However, there are a number of interesting complications, including many-body interactions among the excitons and correc- tions to the rates due to multi-phonon processes. A more careful analysis is needed when the offset in QD excita- tion energies is large compared with the characteristic frequency expanded by the phonon spectral densities or for systems at much higher temperature, e.g., room tem- perature, where multi-phonon processes are expected to be relevant, or even dominant. These effects are cur- rently under investigation and are beyond the scope of the current communication.\n\nIn summary, we develop a framework for engineering environment-assisted and directed excitonic transfer in a network of coupled QDs based on a quantum kinetic rate approach. We emphasize the importance of how characteristic frequencies of a system fit within the spec- tral bath structure. Our examples utilize the factored and intuitive form of the population transfer rates equa- tion, which separates the contributions from the system (electronic) and bath (vibrational) degrees of freedom. This equation is similar in spirit to the rate equation for FRET, making it convenient to design interesting scenar- ios for environment-assisted transfer. Although we focus on QD examples, the principles presented here form the basis for engineering a wide range of desired EET in a variety of nanostructures or artificial molecular photo- synthetic units.\n\nThe authors thank Semion Saikin for helpful discus- sions. A. A.-G. and A. P. were supported as part of the Center for Excitonics, an Energy Frontier Research Center funded by the U.S. Department of Energy, Office of Science, Office of Basic Energy Sciences under Award Number de-sc0001088. L. V. acknowledges support from the NSF Graduate Research Fellowship. A.N. acknowl- edges support from NSERC (Canada)\n\n- [1] G. D. Scholes, Annual Review of Physical Chemistry 54 , 57 (2003).\n\n- [2] J. R. Lakowicz, Principles of Fluorescence Spectroscopy (New York: Springer, 2006), 3rd ed.\n\n- [3] G. D. Scholes and G. Rumbles, Nat Mater 5 , 683 (2006).\n\n- [4] S. A. Crooker, J. A. Hollingsworth, S. Tretiak, and V. I. Klimov, Physical Review Letters 89 , 186802 (2002).\n\n- [5] E. Collini and G. D. Scholes, Science 323 , 369373 (2009).\n\n- [6] H. Lee, Y. Cheng, and G. R. Fleming, Science 316 , 1462 (2007).\n\n- [7] Y. Cheng and G. R. Fleming, Annual Review of Physical Chemistry 60 , 241 (2009).\n\n- [8] M. Christandl, N. Datta, T. C. Dorlas, A. Ekert, A. Kay, and A. J. Landahl, Phys. Rev. A 71 , 032312 (2005).\n\n- [9] E. Rozbicki and P. Machnikowski, Physical Review Let-\n\nters 100 , 027401 (2008).\n\n- [10] P. Rebentrost, M. Mohseni, I. Kassal, S. Lloyd, and A. Aspuru-Guzik, New Journal of Physics 11 , 033003 (2009).\n\n- [11] M. B. Plenio and S. F. Huelga, New Journal of Physics 10 , 113019 (14pp) (2008).\n\n- [12] A. A. High, E. E. Novitskaya, L. V. Butov, M. Hanson, and A. C. Gossard, Science 321 , 229 (2008).\n\n- [13] K. M. Gaab and C. J. Bardeen, The Journal of Chemical Physics 121 , 7813 (2004).\n\n- [14] J. Cao and R. J. Silbey, The Journal of Physical Chem- istry A 113 , 13825 (2009).\n\n- [15] V. May and O. Kuhn, Charge and Energy Transfer Dy- namics in Molecular Systems (Wiley-VCH, 2004), 2nd ed." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8375717825520943, + "doc_id": "a2cb2fdaab7f7d17a752fac516d05e650edeaa573317d8c505bc7a5ae4d78a53", + "edit_distance": 0.4730656219392752, + "f1_score": 0.939521800281294, + "meteor": 0.7886593180255763, + "precision": 0.9737609329446064, + "pred_md": "arXiv:1001.1066v2 [physics.optics] 4 Mar 2010\n\n## Optimal Concentration of Light in Turbid Materials\n\n## E.G. van Putten, 1 , ∗ A. Lagendijk, 1 2 , and A.P. Mosk 1\n\n1 Complex Photonic Systems, Faculty of Science and Technology and MESA + Institute for Nanotechnology, University of Twente, P.O. Box 217, 7500 AE Enschede, The Netherlands 2 FOM Institute for Atomic and Molecular Physics, Science Park 104, 1098 XG Amsterdam, The Netherlands ∗ Corresponding author: E.G.vanPutten@utwente.nl\n\nCompiled September 27, 2018\n\nIn turbid materials it is impossible to concentrate light into a focus with conventional optics. Recently it has been shown that the intensity on a dyed probe inside a turbid material can be enhanced by spatially shaping the wave front of light before it enters a turbid medium. Here we show that this enhancement is due to concentration of light energy to a spot much smaller than a wavelength. We focus light on a dyed probe sphere that is hidden under an opaque layer. The light is optimally concentrated to a focus which does not exceed the smallest focal area physically possible by more than 68%. A comparison between the intensity enhancements of both the emission and excitation light supports the conclusion of optimal light concentration. c © 2018 Optical Society of America\n\nIn turbid materials such as white paint, biological tissue, and paper, spatial fluctuations in refractive index cause light to be scattered. Scattering is seen as a huge vexation in classical imaging techniques where it degrades the resolving power. [1] This decrease in resolution is caused by the fact that light carrying information about the fine spatial details of a structure has to travel further through the medium than the light carrying low spatial frequency information. [2] Due to the importance of imaging inside turbid materials, many researchers are trying to suppress turbidity. [3-8]\n\nAlthough light scattering is detrimental to imaging, it is recently shown that scattering can be exploited to increase the amount of light energy deep inside turbid materials. [9] By spatially shaping the wave front of the incident light, the emission of a small dyed probe sphere hidden inside the turbid layer was strongly enhanced. Despite the fact that this enhancement proves an increase of excitation intensity at the probe position, it remains unclear what the spatial distribution of the excitation light is. From experiments with microwaves [10] and ultrasound [11] and recent far field experiments with light [12] it is known that scattering can be used to concentrate energy.\n\nIn this Letter we will experimentally show that we can also use scattering to focus light inside a turbid material to an optimal small spot, i.e, as small as it can physically be. The focus is created on a nano-sized dyed probe sphere hidden under a strongly scattering layer. A comparison between the intensity enhancements of the probe emission and the excitation light supports our conclusion of optimal light concentration.\n\nFigure 1 shows the principle of our experiment. (a) Ordinarily a positive lens focusses an incident plane wave to a spot with a size that is limited by the numerical aperture (NA) of the lens. (b) A strongly turbid material behind the lens scatters the light so that no focus is formed. By matching the incident wave front to the scattering sample, we force constructive interference at\n\nFig. 1. Principle of the experiment. (a) A positive lens focusses a plane wave to a spot which is limited in size by the numerical aperture (NA) of the lens. (b) A strongly turbid material behind the lens scatters the light so that no focus is formed. By matching the incident wave front to the scattering sample, we force constructive interference at a target position inside the sample. The light now arrives from all directions at the target position, significantly increasing the NA of the system.\n\nFig. 1. Principle of the experiment. (a) A positive lens focusses a plane wave to a spot which is limited in size by the numerical aperture (NA) of the lens. (b) A strongly turbid material behind the lens scatters the light so that no focus is formed. By matching the incident wave front to the scattering sample, we force constructive interference at a target position inside the sample. The light now arrives from all directions at the target position, significantly increasing the NA of the system.\n\na target position inside the sample. At this position multiple scattered light arrives from all angles, significantly increasing the NA of the system. The focal size is no longer limited by the original lens, but can be minimized to the smallest spot size physically possible.\n\nThe possibility to focus light to a subwavelength spot inside scattering materials yields exciting opportunities. In biological imaging, for example, selective illumination of fluorescent areas with high resolution is highly desirable. The efficient light delivery to places inside scattering materials might also be used to study more fundamental properties of light transport in both ordered and disordered structures.\n\nOur experiments are performed on opaque layers of strongly scattering zinc oxide (ZnO) pigment sprayed on top of a low concentration of dyed polystyrene spheres that will act as local intensity probes. We used probe spheres with a radius of R = 150 nm and R = 80 nm. ZnO is one of the most strongly scattering materials known and shows no fluorescence in the spectral region where the probes emit. The thicknesses of the scattering layers\n\n1", + "recall": 0.907608695652174, + "true_md": "# Optimal Concentration of Light in Turbid Materials\n\narXiv:1001.1066v2 [physics.optics] 4 Mar 2010\n\nE.G. van Putten, 1 ,$_{∗}$ A. Lagendijk, 1 , 2 and A.P. Mosk 1\n\n$^{1}$Complex Photonic Systems, Faculty of Science and Technology and MESA+ Institute for Nanotechnology, University of Twente, P.O. Box 217, 7500 AE Enschede, The Netherlands\n\n$^{2}$FOM Institute for Atomic and Molecular Physics, Science Park 104, 1098 XG Amsterdam, The Netherlands\n\n$^{∗}$Corresponding author: E.G.vanPutten@utwente.nl\n\nIn turbid materials it is impossible to concentrate light into a focus with conventional optics. Recently it has been shown that the intensity on a dyed probe inside a turbid material can be enhanced by spatially shaping the wave front of light before it enters a turbid medium. Here we show that this enhancement is due to concentration of light energy to a spot much smaller than a wavelength. We focus light on a dyed probe sphere that is hidden under an opaque layer. The light is optimally concentrated to a focus which does not exceed the smallest focal area physically possible by more than 68%. A comparison between the intensity enhancements of both the emission and excitation light supports the conclusion of optimal light concentration. c ○ 2018 Optical Society of America\n\nFig. 1. Principle of the experiment. (a) A positive lens focusses a plane wave to a spot which is limited in size by the numerical aperture (NA) of the lens. (b) A strongly turbid material behind the lens scatters the light so that no focus is formed. By matching the incident wave front to the scattering sample, we force constructive interfer- ence at a target position inside the sample. The light now arrives from all directions at the target position, significantly increasing the NA of the system.\n\nIn turbid materials such as white paint, biological tissue, and paper, spatial fluctuations in refractive index cause light to be scattered. Scattering is seen as a huge vexa- tion in classical imaging techniques where it degrades the resolving power. [1] This decrease in resolution is caused by the fact that light carrying information about the fine spatial details of a structure has to travel further through the medium than the light carrying low spatial frequency information. [2] Due to the importance of imaging inside turbid materials, many researchers are trying to suppress turbidity. [3–8]\n\nAlthough light scattering is detrimental to imaging, it is recently shown that scattering can be exploited to increase the amount of light energy deep inside turbid materials. [9] By spatially shaping the wave front of the incident light, the emission of a small dyed probe sphere hidden inside the turbid layer was strongly enhanced. Despite the fact that this enhancement proves an in- crease of excitation intensity at the probe position, it remains unclear what the spatial distribution of the ex- citation light is. From experiments with microwaves [10] and ultrasound [11] and recent far field experiments with light [12] it is known that scattering can be used to con- centrate energy.\n\nIn this Letter we will experimentally show that we can also use scattering to focus light inside a turbid material to an optimal small spot, i.e, as small as it can physi- cally be. The focus is created on a nano-sized dyed probe sphere hidden under a strongly scattering layer. A com- parison between the intensity enhancements of the probe emission and the excitation light supports our conclusion of optimal light concentration.\n\nFigure 1 shows the principle of our experiment. (a) Or- dinarily a positive lens focusses an incident plane wave to a spot with a size that is limited by the numerical aperture (NA) of the lens. (b) A strongly turbid mate- rial behind the lens scatters the light so that no focus is formed. By matching the incident wave front to the scattering sample, we force constructive interference at\n\nOur experiments are performed on opaque layers of strongly scattering zinc oxide (ZnO) pigment sprayed on top of a low concentration of dyed polystyrene spheres that will act as local intensity probes. We used probe spheres with a radius of R = 150 nm and R = 80 nm. ZnO is one of the most strongly scattering materials known and shows no fluorescence in the spectral region where the probes emit. The thicknesses of the scattering layers\n\nThe possibility to focus light to a subwavelength spot inside scattering materials yields exciting opportunities. In biological imaging, for example, selective illumination of fluorescent areas with high resolution is highly desir- able. The efficient light delivery to places inside scatte- ring materials might also be used to study more funda- mental properties of light transport in both ordered and disordered structures.\n\na target position inside the sample. At this position mul- tiple scattered light arrives from all angles, significantly increasing the NA of the system. The focal size is no longer limited by the original lens, but can be minimized to the smallest spot size physically possible.\n\n## Compiled September 27, 2018\n\n1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7542011388425968, + "doc_id": "98b52c638c61018205797a39edd0929e47f3f8044beaf559b1d96a13c8532f27", + "edit_distance": 0.8014184397163121, + "f1_score": 0.8793686583990982, + "meteor": 0.6309142322881348, + "precision": 0.896551724137931, + "pred_md": "↦\n\n\n\nspectral bandwidth. In such case we can make in Eq.(67) the replacement p ν → 1 /M , and consequently the sum ∑ | A ν,µ | 2 equals M times the area of ˜ C cl ( ω ), leading to\n\nThis is the same as the classical result but suppressed by factor 1 / √ M . Note again that the semiclassical result is always zero, and corresponds formally to M = ∞ .\n\nConsider now the RMS of S x ( ). t For TwinFock preparation it follows from Eq.(41) that M ∝ N and hence Eq.(69) implies 1 /N 1 / 2 suppression of the RMS. For coherent preparations ˜ C cl ( ω ) becomes N dependent too, and consequently from the discussion after Eq. (46) it follows that the RMS is a function of the semiclassical ratio Eq. (57), and multiplied by 1 /N 1 / 4 suppression factor that spoils the semi-classical scaling. This is confirmed by the numerics (Fig. 8). If the dynamics is very close to the separatrix the classical fluctuations are O (1) and therefore the quantum result is RMS [ S x ( )] t ≈ 1 / √ M . The implication for the on-separatrix coherent preparations, Pi versus Edge, is striking: Substitution of Eqs.(45-46) into Eq.(69) leads to\n\n\n\nThus, convergence to classicality is far more rapid for the Edge-preparation than it is for the Pi-preparation, even though both lie on the separatrix. With the Pi preparation, even if N is very large (small ' h '), quantum fluctuations still remain pronounced. In fact, from Eq. (45) it follows that the fluctuations in the Pi case are mainly sensitive to the strength u of the interaction.\n\nFinally, we mention that the analysis of fluctuations above is somewhat related to the discussion of thermalization in Ref.[53], and we would like to further connect it with the observation of collapses and quantum revivals as discussed e.g. in Ref.[54]. Relating to the LDOS, as defined in Section V, we note that the collapse time is the semiclassical time which is determined by the the width of the classical envelope, while the revival time is related to the spacing between the spectral lines. The latter can be calculated using the formula\n\n\n\nwith the WKB estimate for E ν in Section III, leading in the separtatrix region to ∼ 2 π/ω x .\n\n## IX. CONCLUSIONS\n\nTo conclude, we have applied a semiclassical phasespace picture to the analysis of the one-particle coherence loss and buildup in the bosonic Josephson junction, described by the two-site BHH. The simplicity of the classical phase space of the dimer allows for its semi-analytic\n\n9\n\nWKB quantization. Thus, closed semiclassical results are obtained for the local density of states of the various initial preparations, providing useful insights for the associated quantum evolution.\n\nWithin the framework of mean-field theory (MFT), the dynamics is obtained by evolving a single point in phase space, using the Gross-Pitaevskii (GP) equation, which in this context is better known as the discrete nonlinear Schrdinger (DNLS) equation. o By contrast, the truncated Wigner phase-space method evolves an ensemble of points according to the DNLS equation, and thereby takes into account the non-linear squeezing or stretching of the distribution.\n\nIn the semiclassical treatment the quantum state in any moment is regarded as a 'mixture' of wavefunctions ψ i rather than a single ψ i . It is worth noting that the stationary solutions of the DNLS equation are simply the fixed points of the Hamiltonian flow. The small oscillations obtained by linearization around these fixed points are the so-called Bogoliubov excitations. The typical oscillation frequency of the Bloch vector generally approaches the classical frequency as N is increased keeping u fixed. However, in the vicinity of the separatrix convergence to the (vanishing) classical frequency is logarithmically slow, as found via WKB quantization.\n\nBased on the ratio between the width of the semiclassical distribution for SCS and the width of the separatrix phase-space region, we find that the long-time FringeVisibility of an initially coherent state in the Josephson interaction regime, has a u/N dependent value (Fig. 7). The functional dependence on u/N varies according to the preparation. In particular, whereas a Zero relative-phase preparation remains roughly Gaussian (i.e. phase-locked) throughout its motion, thereby justifying the use of MFT for the description of Josephson oscillations around it, a Pi relative-phase SCS squeezes rapidly and its relativephase information is lost [22, 24]. In contrast, starting from fully separated modes, the phase distribution in the Josephson regime assumes a non-uniform profile, peaked at ϕ = 0, yielding a universal FringeVisibility value of 1 / 3 [41].\n\nFocusing on two types of coherent preparations in the vicinity of the separatrix we find significant differences in their M dependence on ( u N ; ). The Pi SCS preparation (with vanishing population imbalance and a π relative-phase) exhibits u dependent fluctuations, whereas the Edge SCS (having a comparable population imbalance but located elsewhere along the separatrix) exhibits N dependent fluctuations. Only in the latter case is the classical limit approached easily by taking large N at fixed u .\n\nAcknowledgments: We thank Issac Israel for preparing a convenient code for the classical simulations during his visit in BGU. DC and TK acknowledge support from the USA-Israel Binational Science Foundation (Grant No.2006021). AV acknowledges support from the Israel", + "recall": 0.8628318584070797, + "true_md": "WKB quantization. Thus, closed semiclassical results are obtained for the local density of states of the vari- ous initial preparations, providing useful insights for the associated quantum evolution.\n\nWithin the framework of mean-field theory (MFT), the dynamics is obtained by evolving a single point in phase space, using the Gross-Pitaevskii (GP) equation, which in this context is better known as the discrete nonlinear Schr¨ odinger (DNLS) equation. By contrast, the trun- cated Wigner phase-space method evolves an ensemble of points according to the DNLS equation, and thereby takes into account the non-linear squeezing or stretching of the distribution.\n\n$$RMS [ 〈 A 〉 $_{t}$] = [ 1 M ∫ ˜ C cl ( ω ) dω ] 1 / 2 . (69)$$\n\n9\n\n∞ Consider now the RMS of S$_{x}$ ( t ). For TwinFock prepa- ration it follows from Eq.(41) that M ∝ N and hence Eq.(69) implies 1 /N 1 / 2 suppression of the RMS. For co- herent preparations ˜ C cl ( ω ) becomes N dependent too, and consequently from the discussion after Eq. (46) it follows that the RMS is a function of the semiclassical ra- tio Eq. (57), and multiplied by 1 /N 1 / 4 suppression factor that spoils the semi-classical scaling. This is confirmed by the numerics (Fig. 8). If the dynamics is very close to the separatrix the classical fluctuations are O (1) and there- fore the quantum result is RMS [ S$_{x}$ ( t )] ≈ 1 $_{/}$√$_{M}$$\\_{.}$ The implication for the on-separatrix coherent preparations, Pi versus Edge, is striking: Substitution of Eqs.(45-46) into Eq.(69) leads to\n\nIn the semiclassical treatment the quantum state in any moment is regarded as a “mixture” of wavefunctions ψ$_{i}$ rather than a single ψ$_{i}$ . It is worth noting that the stationary solutions of the DNLS equation are simply the fixed points of the Hamiltonian flow. The small oscilla- tions obtained by linearization around these fixed points are the so-called Bogoliubov excitations. The typical oscillation frequency of the Bloch vector generally ap- proaches the classical frequency as N is increased keep- ing u fixed. However, in the vicinity of the separatrix convergence to the (vanishing) classical frequency is log- arithmically slow, as found via WKB quantization.\n\nThus, convergence to classicality is far more rapid for the Edge-preparation than it is for the Pi-preparation, even though both lie on the separatrix. With the Pi prepara- tion, even if N is very large (small “ h ”), quantum fluc- tuations still remain pronounced. In fact, from Eq. (45) it follows that the fluctuations in the Pi case are mainly sensitive to the strength u of the interaction.\n\nBased on the ratio between the width of the semiclas- sical distribution for SCS and the width of the separatrix phase-space region, we find that the long-time FringeVisi- bility of an initially coherent state in the Josephson inter- action regime, has a u/N dependent value (Fig. 7). The functional dependence on u/N varies according to the preparation. In particular, whereas a Zero relative-phase preparation remains roughly Gaussian (i.e. phase-locked) throughout its motion, thereby justifying the use of MFT for the description of Josephson oscillations around it, a Pi relative-phase SCS squeezes rapidly and its relative- phase information is lost [22, 24]. In contrast, starting from fully separated modes, the phase distribution in the Josephson regime assumes a non-uniform profile, peaked at ϕ = 0, yielding a universal FringeVisibility value of 1 / 3 [41].\n\nFinally, we mention that the analysis of fluctuations above is somewhat related to the discussion of thermal- ization in Ref.[53], and we would like to further connect it with the observation of collapses and quantum revivals as discussed e.g. in Ref.[54]. Relating to the LDOS, as defined in Section V, we note that the collapse time is the semiclassical time which is determined by the the width of the classical envelope, while the revival time is related to the spacing between the spectral lines. The latter can be calculated using the formula\n\nFocusing on two types of coherent preparations in the vicinity of the separatrix we find significant differ- ences in their M dependence on ( u ; N ). The Pi SCS preparation (with vanishing population imbalance and a π relative-phase) exhibits u dependent fluctuations, whereas the Edge SCS (having a comparable population imbalance but located elsewhere along the separatrix) ex- hibits N dependent fluctuations. Only in the latter case is the classical limit approached easily by taking large N at fixed u .\n\nwith the WKB estimate for E$_{ν}$ in Section III, leading in the separtatrix region to ∼ 2 π/ω$_{x}$ .\n\nTo conclude, we have applied a semiclassical phase- space picture to the analysis of the one-particle coher- ence loss and buildup in the bosonic Josephson junction, described by the two-site BHH. The simplicity of the clas- sical phase space of the dimer allows for its semi-analytic\n\nAcknowledgments: We thank Issac Israel for prepar- ing a convenient code for the classical simulations during his visit in BGU. DC and TK acknowledge support from the USA-Israel Binational Science Foundation (Grant No.2006021). AV acknowledges support from the Israel\n\n## IX. CONCLUSIONS\n\n$$t$_{revival}$ = 2 π [ dE$_{ν}$/dν ] − 1 (71)$$\n\n$$RMS [ S$_{x}$ ( t )] ∼ { N − 1 / 4 for Edge (log( N )) − 1 / 2 for Pi (70)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9284767625753317, + "doc_id": "bacf52597787b99e195a7361ee94b3714943e6cadd8455fc47f52c64b20b66dc", + "edit_distance": 0.684981684981685, + "f1_score": 0.9674418604651162, + "meteor": 0.8055274110399332, + "precision": 0.9629629629629629, + "pred_md": "- Astron. Soc. 371 135\n- [15] Sa'd B A, Shovkovy I A and Rischke D H 2007 Phys. Rev. D 75 065016\n- [16] Sa'd B A, Shovkovy I A and Rischke D H 2007 Phys. Rev. D 75 125004\n- [17] Gusakov M E 2007 Phys. Rev. D 76 083001\n- [18] Gusakov M E and Kantor E M 2008 Phys. Rev. D 78 083006\n- [19] Dong H, Su N and Wang Q 2007 J. Phys. G 34 S643\n- [20] Sa'd B A and Schaffner-Bielich J arXiv:0908.4190\n- [21] Yang S H, Zheng X P and Pi C M 2010 Phys. Lett. B\n\n4\n\n## 683 255\n\n- [22] Lattimer J M, Pethick C J, Prakash M and Haensel P 1991 Phys. Rev. Lett. 66 2701\n- [23] Reisenegger A 1995 Astrophys. J. 442 749\n- [24] Villain L and Haensel P 2005 Astron. Astrophys. 444 539\n- [25] Yakovlev D G, Kaminker A D, Gnedin O Y and Haensel P 2001 Phys. Rept. 354 1\n- [26] Pi C M, Zheng X P and Yang S H 2010 Phys. Rev. C 81 , 045802\n- [27] Flores-Tuli'n S and Reisenegger A 2006 Mon. Not. Roy. a Astron. Soc. 372 276", + "recall": 0.9719626168224299, + "true_md": "4\n\n683 255\n\nAstron. Soc. 371 135\n\n- [15] Sa’d B A, Shovkovy I A and Rischke D H 2007 Phys. Rev. D 75 065016\n\n- [16] Sa’d B A, Shovkovy I A and Rischke D H 2007 Phys. Rev. D 75 125004\n\n- [22] Lattimer J M, Pethick C J, Prakash M and Haensel P 1991 Phys. Rev. Lett. 66 2701\n\n- [23] Reisenegger A 1995 Astrophys. J. 442 749\n\n- [24] Villain L and Haensel P 2005 Astron. Astrophys. 444 539\n\n- [25] Yakovlev D G, Kaminker A D, Gnedin O Y and Haensel P 2001 Phys. Rept. 354 1\n\n- [26] Pi C M, Zheng X P and Yang S H 2010 Phys. Rev. C 81 , 045802\n\n- [27] Flores-Tuli´an S and Reisenegger A 2006 Mon. Not. Roy. Astron. Soc. 372 276\n\n- [17] Gusakov M E 2007 Phys. Rev. D 76 083001\n\n- [18] Gusakov M E and Kantor E M 2008 Phys. Rev. D 78 083006\n\n- [19] Dong H, Su N and Wang Q 2007 J. Phys. G 34 S643\n\n- [20] Sa’d B A and Schaffner-Bielich J arXiv:0908.4190\n\n- [21] Yang S H, Zheng X P and Pi C M 2010 Phys. Lett. B" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8022862708242167, + "doc_id": "454392b0373dd98e9d2a924432b4a432ed6f7889bcca27c5c6b228595e507490", + "edit_distance": 0.6264744429882044, + "f1_score": 0.9342105263157896, + "meteor": 0.7661745595236219, + "precision": 0.9627118644067797, + "pred_md": "2\n\n2009 Fermi Symposium, Washington, D.C., Nov. 2-5\n\nFIG. 1: Single Crab occultation step in a single GBM NaI detector. Horizontal scale is in seconds centered on the occultation time. Vertical scale is in measured counts.\n\nFIG. 1: Single Crab occultation step in a single GBM NaI detector. Horizontal scale is in seconds centered on the occultation time. Vertical scale is in measured counts.\n\nThe shape of the individual occultation steps depends on energy and occultation angle. Transmission as a function of time is modeled as T t ( ) = exp [ -µ E A h ( ) ( )], where µ E ( ) is the mass attenuation coefficient of gamma rays at energy E in air and A h ( ) is the air mass along the line of sight at a given altitude h t ( ). Account is taken of the detector response as it changes as a function of angle across the fit window. For each source, occultation times are predicted. Each step is fit over a 4-minute window along with a quadratic background and using an assumed spectrum to determine the detector count rate due to the source. The instrument response is used to convert the count rate to a flux. Up to 31 steps are possible for a given source in a day, and these steps are summed to get a single daily average flux. The GBM occultation sensitivity exceeds that of BATSE at energies below ∼ 25 keV and above ∼ 1 5 MeV [5]. .\n\nThis work uses the GBM CTIME data, with its 8 broad energy channels and 0.256-second resolution, rebinned to 2-second resolution. The occultation technique relies on an input catalog of known sources. Currently, we are monitoring 64 sources. Of these 64 sources, 6 steady sources are detected above 100 keV with a significance of at least 5 σ after ∼ 490 days of observations, and one transient source.\n\n## III. RESULTS\n\nThe results presented here are preliminary. We have not completed the fine tuning of our algorithms, though the average fluxes are not expected to change much. Future work will include using the GBM CSPEC data, with its finer energy binning, to examine the detailed spectra for these sources.\n\nThe measured 20 - 50 keV GBM light curves are compared to Swift's 15 - 50 keV light curves for sev-\n\neConf C091122\n\nFIG. 2: Crab light curve. Horizontal scale is in modified Julian days over the 490 day GBM exposure period. Vertical scale is in photons/cm 2 /sec/keV averaged over daily intervals. Horizontal lines show the average flux in each of five energy bands increasing from top to bottom\n\nFIG. 2: Crab light curve. Horizontal scale is in modified Julian days over the 490 day GBM exposure period. Vertical scale is in photons/cm 2 /sec/keV averaged over daily intervals. Horizontal lines show the average flux in each of five energy bands increasing from top to bottom\n\neral sources over the same time intervals in ref. [2], where it is seen that the results measured by the two instruments compare well. At energies above the upper energy limit of ∼ 195 keV of the Swift 22-month catalog [6], however, the GBM observations provide the only wide-field monitor available of the low energy gamma ray sky.\n\n## A. Steady Sources\n\nThe sources Crab, Cyg X-1, Swift J1753.5-0127, 1E 1740-29, Cen A, and GRS 1915+105 are detected by GBM at energies above 100 keV. We show GBM light curves generated from the Earth occultation analysis in several energy bands with one day resolution for these six sources in Figures 2 - 7.\n\nTable I gives the fluxes and significances averaged over all the days from Aug. 12, 2008 (the beginning of science operations) to Dec. 15, 2009, approximately 490 days.\n\nThe Crab (Fig. 2) spectrum in the hard x-ray/low energy gamma-ray region can be described by a broken power law, with the spectrum steepening at 100 keV and then hardening at 650 keV [7, 8]. While the GBMCTIMEdata do not have the spectral resolution", + "recall": 0.9073482428115016, + "true_md": "FIG. 1: Single Crab occultation step in a single GBM NaI detector. Horizontal scale is in seconds centered on the occultation time. Vertical scale is in measured counts.\n\nThe shape of the individual occultation steps de- pends on energy and occultation angle. Transmis- sion as a function of time is modeled as T ( t ) = exp [ − µ ( E ) A ( h )], where µ ( E ) is the mass attenuation coefficient of gamma rays at energy E in air and A ( h ) is the air mass along the line of sight at a given alti- tude h ( t ). Account is taken of the detector response as it changes as a function of angle across the fit win- dow. For each source, occultation times are predicted. Each step is fit over a 4-minute window along with a quadratic background and using an assumed spectrum to determine the detector count rate due to the source. The instrument response is used to convert the count rate to a flux. Up to 31 steps are possible for a given source in a day, and these steps are summed to get a single daily average flux. The GBM occultation sensi- tivity exceeds that of BATSE at energies below ∼ 25 keV and above ∼ 1 . 5 MeV [5].\n\nFIG. 2: Crab light curve. Horizontal scale is in modified Julian days over the 490 day GBM exposure period. Ver- tical scale is in photons/cm $^{2}$/sec/keV averaged over daily intervals. Horizontal lines show the average flux in each of five energy bands increasing from top to bottom\n\neral sources over the same time intervals in ref. [2], where it is seen that the results measured by the two instruments compare well. At energies above the up- per energy limit of ∼ 195 keV of the Swift 22-month catalog [6], however, the GBM observations provide the only wide-field monitor available of the low en- ergy gamma ray sky.\n\nThe sources Crab, Cyg X-1, Swift J1753.5-0127, 1E 1740-29, Cen A, and GRS 1915+105 are detected by GBM at energies above 100 keV. We show GBM light curves generated from the Earth occultation analysis in several energy bands with one day resolution for these six sources in Figures 2 - 7.\n\nTable I gives the fluxes and significances averaged over all the days from Aug. 12, 2008 (the beginning of science operations) to Dec. 15, 2009, approximately 490 days.\n\nThe Crab (Fig. 2) spectrum in the hard x-ray/low energy gamma-ray region can be described by a bro- ken power law, with the spectrum steepening at 100 keV and then hardening at 650 keV [7, 8]. While the GBM CTIME data do not have the spectral resolution\n\nThe results presented here are preliminary. We have not completed the fine tuning of our algorithms, though the average fluxes are not expected to change much. Future work will include using the GBM CSPEC data, with its finer energy binning, to exam- ine the detailed spectra for these sources.\n\nThe measured 20 - 50 keV GBM light curves are compared to Swift’s 15 - 50 keV light curves for sev-\n\n## III. RESULTS\n\n## A. Steady Sources\n\nThis work uses the GBM CTIME data, with its 8 broad energy channels and 0.256-second resolution, rebinned to 2-second resolution. The occultation tech- nique relies on an input catalog of known sources. Currently, we are monitoring 64 sources. Of these 64 sources, 6 steady sources are detected above 100 keV with a significance of at least 5 σ after ∼ 490 days of observations, and one transient source.\n\neConf C091122\n\n2\n\n2009 Fermi Symposium, Washington, D.C., Nov. 2-5" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7373278355327754, + "doc_id": "e15ee20741218e703ac9d6148dddab04e0810e10f16f7b029f2b79268fcfe227", + "edit_distance": 0.5206378986866792, + "f1_score": 0.89058524173028, + "meteor": 0.8131931891025886, + "precision": 0.9333333333333333, + "pred_md": "These relations, combined with the preceding linear stability analysis, define a phase diagram in the ( R, Φ) plane (Figure 3) that agrees remarkably well with numerical results for systems prepared in a (slightly noisy) uniform initial state.\n\nFigure 3: Top : Phase diagram in the ( R, Φ) plane. The outer region corresponds to stable behavior whereas within the curve, patterning occurs. The solid line is the theoretical phase boundary - Eq (7) - which accurately fits the numerics (black squares). The blue and red sections correspond to continuous and discontinuous transitions respectively. The two magenta dots correspond to two 2D simulations which show ordered harmonic patterns close to supercriticality and amorphous patterns otherwise. Bottom-left : Transition in the supercritical regime. The blues lines correspond to the theory - Eq (8) - whereas the squares comes from simulations (Φ = 1 5; . 1 35; . 1 2 . from top to bottom). Bottom-right : Transition in the subcritical regime for Φ = 1 06 and Φ = 1 7 . . (bottom to top).\n\nFigure 3: Top : Phase diagram in the ( R, Φ) plane. The outer region corresponds to stable behavior whereas within the curve, patterning occurs. The solid line is the theoretical phase boundary - Eq (7) - which accurately fits the numerics (black squares). The blue and red sections correspond to continuous and discontinuous transitions respectively. The two magenta dots correspond to two 2D simulations which show ordered harmonic patterns close to supercriticality and amorphous patterns otherwise. Bottom-left : Transition in the supercritical regime. The blues lines correspond to the theory - Eq (8) - whereas the squares comes from simulations (Φ = 1 5; . 1 35; . 1 2 . from top to bottom). Bottom-right : Transition in the subcritical regime for Φ = 1 06 and Φ = 1 7 . . (bottom to top).\n\nClose to the transition, the emergent steady-state pattern can be studied using an amplitude equation (see Supporting Information). Introducing ε = ( R -R c ) /R c , one gets in 1D that for 1 08 . ≤ Φ ≤ 1 58, the transition is . supercritical (continuous) and the steady state is given by\n\n\n\nwhich agrees with simulations (Fig 3, bottom left). Outside this range, the transition becomes subcritical (discontinuous, Fig 3, bottom right) and the analytical tools\n\n4\n\navailable become less reliable [26]. We emphasize again that the basic mechanism for patterning presented above does not depend on the precise form chosen for v ρ ( ). Quantitatively however, Eq. (8), and the frontier between subcriticality and supercriticality, do depend on the details of the interplay between the nonlinearity in v ρ ( ) and the logistic growth term. We leave further analysis of such model-specific features to future work.\n\nWhile the amplitude equation is more easily developed in 1D, the stability analysis offered above is valid in higher dimensions and it is natural to ask what happens in 2D, which is the relevant geometry for Petri dish studies with growing bacterial colonies. Fig. 4 shows the simulated time evolution of ρ ( r , t ) for a system started with small random fluctuations around the equilibrium density ρ 0 , with other parameters as in Fig. 1. Perhaps not surprisingly, bands are replaced by droplets of the high density phase dispersed in a low density background at large times. This is the typical steady state obtained with a near-uniform starting condition. However, the structure and organization of the bacterial drops in the steady state depends on the point ( R, Φ) chosen in the phase diagram. Generally, the closer the system is to the supercritical instability curve, the more ordered the patterns. For instance we have observed an essentially crystalline distribution of bacterial drops, which develops defects and eventually becomes amorphous on moving further away from the phase boundary (Fig. 3, insets to main panel). For particular choices of parameters, our model can also admit other steady state patterns. Close to the supercritical line, where the phase transition is continuous, we can obtain long-lived stripes, whereas for fixed large values of R and Φ close to the (right) subcritical phase boundary, we have also observed 'inverted droplets' with a high density lawn punctuated by low density 'holes'.\n\nIn these 2D geometries initialized from a near-uniform state, droplets can coalesce in the early stages, while at late times the dynamics is governed by evaporationcondensation events (see Figs. 4 and 5). However it is already apparent from Fig. 4 that coarsening eventually stops and the droplets reach rather well-defined steady state sizes and centre-to-centre distances. This can be quantified by looking at the time evolution of the characteristic domain size, L t ( ), which we have computed as the inverse of first moment (times 2 π ) of the structure factor [20]. Fig. 5 suggests that L t ( ) at late times eventually stops increasing and reaches a steady state value. (The visible steps in domain size mark discrete evaporation events involving smaller bacterial droplets; presumably L t ( ) would become smooth for a large enough system.)\n\nThese droplet patterns in steady state are very similar to those observed for E. coli in a liquid medium or S. typhimurium in semi-solid agar (0.24% water-agar in Ref. [5]) when starting from a uniform distribution [6]. For the E. coli case, interactions are believed to come from chemoattractant, emitted by the bacteria them-", + "recall": 0.851581508515815, + "true_md": "4\n\nThese relations, combined with the preceding linear sta- bility analysis, define a phase diagram in the ( R, Φ) plane (Figure 3) that agrees remarkably well with numerical re- sults for systems prepared in a (slightly noisy) uniform initial state.\n\navailable become less reliable [26]. We emphasize again that the basic mechanism for patterning presented above does not depend on the precise form chosen for v ( ρ ). Quantitatively however, Eq. (8), and the frontier between subcriticality and supercriticality, do depend on the de- tails of the interplay between the nonlinearity in v ( ρ ) and the logistic growth term. We leave further analysis of such model-specific features to future work.\n\nFigure 3: Top : Phase diagram in the ( R, Φ) plane. The outer region corresponds to stable behavior whereas within the curve, patterning occurs. The solid line is the theoretical phase boundary – Eq (7) – which accurately fits the numerics (black squares). The blue and red sections correspond to continuous and discontinuous transitions respectively. The two magenta dots correspond to two 2D simulations which show ordered harmonic patterns close to supercriticality and amorphous patterns otherwise. Bottom-left : Transition in the supercritical regime. The blues lines correspond to the theory – Eq (8) – whereas the squares comes from simulations (Φ = 1 . 5; 1 . 35; 1 . 2 from top to bottom). Bottom-right : Transition in the subcritical regime for Φ = 1 . 06 and Φ = 1 . 7 (bottom to top).\n\nWhile the amplitude equation is more easily devel- oped in 1D, the stability analysis offered above is valid in higher dimensions and it is natural to ask what hap- pens in 2D, which is the relevant geometry for Petri dish studies with growing bacterial colonies. Fig. 4 shows the simulated time evolution of ρ ( r , t ) for a system started with small random fluctuations around the equilibrium density ρ$_{0}$ , with other parameters as in Fig. 1. Per- haps not surprisingly, bands are replaced by droplets of the high density phase dispersed in a low density back- ground at large times. This is the typical steady state obtained with a near-uniform starting condition. How- ever, the structure and organization of the bacterial drops in the steady state depends on the point ( R, Φ) chosen in the phase diagram. Generally, the closer the system is to the supercritical instability curve, the more ordered the patterns. For instance we have observed an essentially crystalline distribution of bacterial drops, which devel- ops defects and eventually becomes amorphous on mov- ing further away from the phase boundary (Fig. 3, insets to main panel). For particular choices of parameters, our model can also admit other steady state patterns. Close to the supercritical line, where the phase transition is continuous, we can obtain long-lived stripes, whereas for fixed large values of R and Φ close to the (right) sub- critical phase boundary, we have also observed ‘inverted droplets’ with a high density lawn punctuated by low density ‘holes’.\n\nClose to the transition, the emergent steady-state pat- tern can be studied using an amplitude equation (see Supporting Information). Introducing ε = ( R − R$_{c}$ ) /R$_{c}$ , one gets in 1D that for 1 . 08 ≤ Φ ≤ 1 . 58, the transition is supercritical (continuous) and the steady state is given by\n\nwhich agrees with simulations (Fig 3, bottom left). Out- side this range, the transition becomes subcritical (dis- continuous, Fig 3, bottom right) and the analytical tools\n\n$$u ≃ 1 + A ( ε ) cos( x ); A $^{2}$( ε ) = ε 18(1 − Φ) 2 34Φ 4 − 56Φ 3 − 24Φ 2 + 31Φ + 19 (8)$$\n\nIn these 2D geometries initialized from a near-uniform state, droplets can coalesce in the early stages, while at late times the dynamics is governed by evaporation- condensation events (see Figs. 4 and 5). However it is already apparent from Fig. 4 that coarsening eventually stops and the droplets reach rather well-defined steady state sizes and centre-to-centre distances. This can be quantified by looking at the time evolution of the char- acteristic domain size, L ( t ), which we have computed as the inverse of first moment (times 2 π ) of the structure factor [20]. Fig. 5 suggests that L ( t ) at late times even- tually stops increasing and reaches a steady state value. (The visible steps in domain size mark discrete evapo- ration events involving smaller bacterial droplets; pre- sumably L ( t ) would become smooth for a large enough system.)\n\nThese droplet patterns in steady state are very simi- lar to those observed for E. coli in a liquid medium or S. typhimurium in semi-solid agar (0.24% water-agar in Ref. [5]) when starting from a uniform distribution [6]. For the E. coli case, interactions are believed to come from chemoattractant, emitted by the bacteria them-" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.2096326732918914, + "doc_id": "4d2505b239f81aeffdbb65c115f5d9e446139f828ac05c3fc2793e48cd67cf7f", + "edit_distance": 0.5841078066914498, + "f1_score": 0.9014084507042254, + "meteor": 0.44242515403055244, + "precision": 0.9230769230769231, + "pred_md": "of inequalities then holds for all λ > 1:\n\n\n\nThe first equality follows from definitions and from the equality H AB X ( | ) ρ = H E X ( | ) ρ for the state ρ XABE , and the second equality follows from algebra and the fact that H BE X ( | ) ρ = H A X ( | ) ρ . The third equality follows because the von Neumann measurement does not affect the systems in the entropic quantities. The first inequality follows because λ > 1 and the entropy H BE X ( | ) ρ is always positive. The second inequality follows because conditioning reduces entropy. The fourth equality follows because the reduced state of σ XYBE on systems B and E is pure when conditioned on both X and Y . The last equality follows from the definition of the quantum mutual information.\n\nThus, it becomes clear that the maximization of the original quantity when λ > 1 is always less than the classical capacity because I ( XY B ; ) σ ≤ max ρ I ( X B ; ).\n\n20\n\nIt then follows that the trade-off curve really occurs for the interval 0 ≤ λ ≤ 1.\n\nThe following lemma is the crucial one that leads to our main result in this section: the single-letterization of the CE trade-off curve for Hadamard channels.\n\nLemma 10 The following additivity relation holds for a Hadamard channel N 1 and any other channel N 2 :\n\n\n\nProof. The inequality g λ ( N ⊗N 1 2 ) ≥ g λ ( N 1 ) + g λ ( N 2 ) trivially holds for all quantum channels, because the maximization on the RHS is a restriction of the maximization in the LHS to a tensor product of states of the form in (15). Therefore, we prove the non-trivial inequality g λ ( N ⊗ N 1 2 ) ≤ g λ ( N 1 ) + g λ ( N 2 ) when N 1 is a Hadamard channel.\n\nThe channels N A 1 → B 1 1 and N A 2 → B 2 2 and their respective complementary channels ( N c 1 ) A 1 → E 1 and ( N c 2 ) A 2 → E 2 have the same properties as they do in the proof of Theorem 1. The state that is the output of the channels is the state ρ XAB E B E 1 1 2 2 in (22), but we now define it to be the state that maximizes g λ ( N ⊗ N 1 2 ). Define θ as before and σ again to be the state after processing system B 1 of ρ with D 1 .\n\nThe following chain of inequalities holds when λ ≤ 1:\n\n```\ng λ ( N ⊗N 1 2 ) = I ( AX B B ; 1 2 ) ρ -λH A X ( | ) ρ = (1 -λ H B B E E ) ( 1 2 1 2 | X ) ρ -H E E ( 1 2 | X ) ρ + H B B ( 1 2 ) ρ = (1 -λ H B E ) ( 1 1 | X ) ρ -H E X ( 1 | ) ρ + H B ( 1 ) ρ +(1 -λ H B E ) ( 2 2 | B E X 1 1 ) ρ -H E E X ( 2 | 1 ) ρ + H B B ( 2 | 1 ) ρ ≤ (1 -λ H B E ) ( 1 1 | X ) ρ -H E X ( 1 | ) ρ + H B ( 1 ) ρ +(1 -λ H B E ) ( 2 2 | Y X ) σ -H E YX ( 2 | ) σ + H B ( 2 ) σ = (1 -λ H AA ) ( 2 | X ) θ -H AA B ( 2 1 | X ) θ + H B ( 1 ) θ +(1 -λ H AE ) ( 1 | Y X ) σ -H AE B ( 1 2 | Y X ) σ + H B ( 2 ) σ = [ I ( AA X B 2 ; 1 ) θ -λH AA ( 2 | X ) θ ] + [ I ( AE XY B 1 ; 2 ) σ -λH AE ( 1 | XY ) σ ] ≤ g λ ( N 1 ) + g λ ( N 2 ) .\n```\n\nThe first equality follows because ρ is the state that maximizes g λ ( N ⊗ N 1 2 ). The second equality follows from entropic manipulations. The third equality follows from the chain rule. The first and crucial inequality follows from monotonicity of the conditional entropy H B E ( 2 2 | B E X 1 1 ) ρ under the map D 1 and the discarding of system E 1 , monotonicity of the conditional entropy H E E X ( 2 | 1 ) ρ under the map D 2 , and conditioning does not increase entropy. The fourth equality follows because the reduced state of θ on systems A A , 2 , B 1 , and E 1 is pure when conditioned on X , and the reduced state of σ on systems A , E 1 , B 2 , and E 2 is pure when conditioned on both X and Y . The fifth equality follows from\n\nentropic manipulations, and the final inequality follows because θ and σ are both states of the form in (15).\n\nCorollary 2 The one-shot CE trade-off curve is equal to the regularized CE trade-off curve when the noisy quantum channel N is a Hadamard channel:\n\n\n\nProof. The proof exploits the same induction technique that Corollary 1 does, but it applies the result of Lemma 10.", + "recall": 0.8807339449541285, + "true_md": "20\n\nof inequalities then holds for all λ > 1:\n\n$$I ( AX ; B )$_{ρ}$ − λH ( A | X )$_{ρ}$ = H ( A | X )$_{ρ}$ − H ( E | X )$_{ρ}$ + H ( B )$_{ρ}$ − λH ( A | X )$_{ρ}$ = (1 − λ ) H ( BE | X )$_{ρ}$ − H ( E | X )$_{ρ}$ + H ( B )$_{ρ}$ = (1 − λ ) H ( BE | X )$_{σ}$ − H ( E | X )$_{σ}$ + H ( B )$_{σ}$ ≤ H ( B )$_{σ}$ − H ( E | X )$_{σ}$ ≤ H ( B )$_{σ}$ − H ( E | XY )$_{σ}$ = H ( B )$_{σ}$ − H ( B | XY )$_{σ}$ = I ( XY ; B )$_{σ}$ .$$\n\nThe first equality follows from definitions and from the equality H ( AB | X )$_{ρ}$ = H ( E | X )$_{ρ}$ for the state ρ $^{XABE}$, and the second equality follows from algebra and the fact that H ( BE | X )$_{ρ}$ = H ( A | X )$_{ρ}$. The third equality follows because the von Neumann measurement does not affect the systems in the entropic quantities. The first inequal- ity follows because λ > 1 and the entropy H ( BE | X )$_{ρ}$ is always positive. The second inequality follows because conditioning reduces entropy. The fourth equality fol- lows because the reduced state of σ XY BE on systems B and E is pure when conditioned on both X and Y . The last equality follows from the definition of the quantum mutual information.\n\nThus, it becomes clear that the maximization of the original quantity when λ > 1 is always less than the classical capacity because I ( XY ; B )$_{σ}$ ≤ max$_{ρ}$ I ( X ; B ).\n\nIt then follows that the trade-off curve really occurs for the interval 0 ≤ λ ≤ 1.\n\nThe following lemma is the crucial one that leads to our main result in this section: the single-letterization of the CE trade-off curve for Hadamard channels.\n\nLemma 10 The following additivity relation holds for a Hadamard channel N$_{1}$ and any other channel N$_{2}$ :\n\n$$g$_{λ}$ ( N$_{1}$ ⊗ N$_{2}$ ) = g$_{λ}$ ( N$_{1}$ ) + g$_{λ}$ ( N$_{2}$ )$$\n\nProof. The inequality g$_{λ}$ ( N$_{1}$ ⊗ N$_{2}$ ) ≥ g$_{λ}$ ( N$_{1}$ ) + g$_{λ}$ ( N$_{2}$ ) trivially holds for all quantum channels, because the maximization on the RHS is a restriction of the max- imization in the LHS to a tensor product of states of the form in (15). Therefore, we prove the non-trivial in- equality g$_{λ}$ ( N$_{1}$ ⊗ N$_{2}$ ) ≤ g$_{λ}$ ( N$_{1}$ ) + g$_{λ}$ ( N$_{2}$ ) when N$_{1}$ is a Hadamard channel.\n\nThe channels N A$_{1}$ → B$_{1}$ 1 and N A$_{2}$ → B$_{2}$ 2 and their respective complementary channels ( N c $_{1}$) A$_{1}$ → E$_{1}$ and ( N c $_{2}$) A$_{2}$ → E$_{2}$ have the same properties as they do in the proof of Theorem 1. The state that is the output of the channels is the state ρ XAB$_{1}$E$_{1}$B$_{2}$E$_{2}$ in (22), but we now define it to be the state that maximizes g$_{λ}$ ( N$_{1}$ ⊗ N$_{2}$ ). Define θ as before and σ again to be the state after pro- cessing system B$_{1}$ of ρ with D$_{1}$ .\n\nThe following chain of inequalities holds when λ ≤ 1:\n\n$$g$_{λ}$ ( N$_{1}$ ⊗ N$_{2}$ ) = I ( AX ; B$_{1}$B$_{2}$ )$_{ρ}$ − λH ( A | X )$_{ρ}$ = (1 − λ ) H ( B$_{1}$B$_{2}$E$_{1}$E$_{2}$ | X )$_{ρ}$ − H ( E$_{1}$E$_{2}$ | X )$_{ρ}$ + H ( B$_{1}$B$_{2}$ )$_{ρ}$ = (1 − λ ) H ( B$_{1}$E$_{1}$ | X )$_{ρ}$ − H ( E$_{1}$ | X )$_{ρ}$ + H ( B$_{1}$ )$_{ρ}$ + (1 − λ ) H ( B$_{2}$E$_{2}$ | B$_{1}$E$_{1}$X )$_{ρ}$ − H ( E$_{2}$ | E$_{1}$X )$_{ρ}$ + H ( B$_{2}$ | B$_{1}$ )$_{ρ}$ ≤ (1 − λ ) H ( B$_{1}$E$_{1}$ | X )$_{ρ}$ − H ( E$_{1}$ | X )$_{ρ}$ + H ( B$_{1}$ )$_{ρ}$ + (1 − λ ) H ( B$_{2}$E$_{2}$ | Y X )$_{σ}$ − H ( E$_{2}$ | Y X )$_{σ}$ + H ( B$_{2}$ )$_{σ}$ = (1 − λ ) H ( AA$_{2}$ | X )$_{θ}$ − H ( AA$_{2}$B$_{1}$ | X )$_{θ}$ + H ( B$_{1}$ )$_{θ}$ + (1 − λ ) H ( AE$_{1}$ | Y X )$_{σ}$ − H ( AE$_{1}$B$_{2}$ | Y X )$_{σ}$ + H ( B$_{2}$ )$_{σ}$ = [ I ( AA$_{2}$X ; B$_{1}$ )$_{θ}$ − λH ( AA$_{2}$ | X )$_{θ}$] + [ I ( AE$_{1}$XY ; B$_{2}$ )$_{σ}$ − λH ( AE$_{1}$ | XY )$_{σ}$] ≤ g$_{λ}$ ( N$_{1}$ ) + g$_{λ}$ ( N$_{2}$ ) .$$\n\nThe first equality follows because ρ is the state that maximizes g$_{λ}$ ( N$_{1}$ ⊗ N$_{2}$ ). The second equality follows from entropic manipulations. The third equality fol- lows from the chain rule. The first and crucial inequal- ity follows from monotonicity of the conditional entropy H ( B$_{2}$E$_{2}$ | B$_{1}$E$_{1}$X )$_{ρ}$ under the map D$_{1}$ and the discard- ing of system E$_{1}$ , monotonicity of the conditional entropy H ( E$_{2}$ | E$_{1}$X )$_{ρ}$ under the map D$_{2}$ , and conditioning does not increase entropy. The fourth equality follows because the reduced state of θ on systems A , A$_{2}$ , B$_{1}$ , and E$_{1}$ is pure when conditioned on X , and the reduced state of σ on systems A , E$_{1}$ , B$_{2}$ , and E$_{2}$ is pure when condi- tioned on both X and Y . The fifth equality follows from\n\nProof. The proof exploits the same induction tech- nique that Corollary 1 does, but it applies the result of Lemma 10.\n\n$$g$_{λ}$ $^{(}$N ⊗ n ) = ng$_{λ}$ ( N ) .$$\n\nCorollary 2 The one-shot CE trade-off curve is equal to the regularized CE trade-off curve when the noisy quan- tum channel N is a Hadamard channel:\n\nentropic manipulations, and the final inequality follows because θ and σ are both states of the form in (15)." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7397437712838963, + "doc_id": "c155c556c7f6a2ebcb9ea8e80a34f7a30df89ae6af35e60720dda875e4ad71de", + "edit_distance": 0.6908055329536208, + "f1_score": 0.9106382978723404, + "meteor": 0.6928785395951005, + "precision": 0.9525222551928784, + "pred_md": "was computed for the densities from ρ = 0 1 . to ρ = 1 0 . with the step of 0 1 . for the isotherms T = 0 04; 0 05; 0 06; 0 07; 0 1; 0 2; 0 3; 0 4; 0 5; 1 0; 2 0. . . . . . . . . . . . The calculation of the diffusion coefficient and excess entropy was carried in the same way as for Herzian spheres.\n\nThe last system considered in the present work is the continuous repulsive shoulder system introduced in the article [41]. The potential of this system has the form\n\n\n\nwhere k 0 = 10 0. . As it was reported in the paper [45] this system demonstrates anomalous behavior due to its quasibinary nature. Here we extend the investigation of the diffusion anomaly in the repulsive shoulder system with σ 1 = 1 35 and check the Rosenfeld relations for this . system in the anomalous region.\n\nFor the simulation of the repulsive shoulder system we used parallel tempering technic [68]. The details of the simulation were described in [45]. We computed the diffusion coefficients along different isochors starting from the density ρ = 0 3 to . ρ = 0 8 with the step 0 05. . . A set of 24 temperatures between T = 0 2 and . T = 0 5 . was simulated. Taking into account the exchange of the temperatures at the same density more then a hundred runs at the same isochor was done. This allowed us to collect a good statistics on the temperature dependence of the diffusion coefficient. The diffusion coefficient along an isochor was approximated by a 9 -th order polynome of the temperature. The excess entropy was calculated in the way described above.\n\nUsually excess entropy can be well approximated by the pair contribution only: S ex = S pair + S 3 + ... ≈ S pair , where\n\n\n\nwhere ρ is the density of the system and g ( r ) is the radial distribution function. We did not use the pair contribution to the excess entropy for the GCM and Herzian spheres because of the considerable overlap of the particles for the bounded potentials.\n\nSince the potentials studied in the present work have negative curvature regions or are bounded they can not be approximated by an one component hard spheres system. It allows us to pose a question about the applicability of the entropy scaling to these systems both in Rosenfeld and Dzugutov forms. Note that Dzugutov relation (Eq. (5)) involves the size of the particles σ which is ill defined for the negative curvature and bounded potentials systems. This makes problematic to apply the Dzugutov scaling rule to them. Because of this only Rosenfeld relations were used in this work.\n\n3\n\nIn this paper we use the dimensionless quantities: ˜ = r r /σ , ˜ = P Pσ /ε, V 3 ˜ = V/Nσ 3 = 1 /ρ, T ˜ ˜ = k B T/ε . Since we use only these reduced units we omit the tilde marks.\n\n## III. RESULTS AND DISCUSSION\n\nThis section reports the simulation results for the diffusion coefficient and excess entropy of the three models described above and checks the validity of the Rosenfeld relation for these systems.\n\n## Herzian spheres\n\nLow temperature behavior of the diffusion coefficient of Herzian spheres system was already reported in the work [67]. As it is seen from this publication the diffusivity shows even two anomalous regions at the temperature T = 0 01 where diffusion coefficient grows with growing . density. In the present work the dependence of the diffusion coefficient on density along several isotherms was monitored. The simulation data are presented on the Fig. 1 (a) - (b).\n\nOne can see from these figures that at low temperatures (Fig. 1(a)) the diffusion is non monotonic, while at high temperatures it monotonically decays with increasing density (Fig. 1(b)) and comes to a constant value (see inset of the Fig. 1(b)).\n\nIt is worth to note that the melting temperatures of Herzian spheres reported in the work [67] are of the order of 10 -3 , so the temperatures about 0 1 are extremely . high for this model. This is easily seen from the Fig. 2 (a) - (b) where the radial distribution functions for the density ρ = 6 0 are shown for the same set of temperatures. . One can see that at T = 0 01 the liquid has short range . structure which rapidly decays with increasing temperature. At the temperature T = 0 1 the liquid looks almost . like an ideal gas since g r ( ) comes to unity very quickly.\n\nExcess entropy also shows non monotonic dependence on density along an isotherm (Fig. 3(a) -(b)). One can see from these figures that at low temperatures excess entropy has two minima and a maxima in the investigated density range while at high temperature the first minima is depressed and the curves just change the slope smoothly.\n\nNow we turn to the Rosenfeld relation for the Herzian spheres system. The dependence of the reduced diffusion (see formula (1)) on the excess entropy along some isotherms is shown in the Fig. 4 (a) - (b). Looking at the curve for T = 0 01 (Fig. . 4 (a)) one can divide it into three distinct regions with different slopes which we denote as '1', '2' and '3'. The density increase corresponds to moving along the curves from right to left, i.e. region 2 corresponds to the higher densities then 1, and 3 - higher densities then 2. As is seen from the plots the region 3", + "recall": 0.8722826086956522, + "true_md": "3\n\nwas computed for the densities from ρ = 0 . 1 to ρ = 1 . 0 with the step of 0 . 1 for the isotherms T = 0 . 04; 0 . 05; 0 . 06; 0 . 07; 0 . 1; 0 . 2; 0 . 3; 0 . 4; 0 . 5; 1 . 0; 2 . 0. The calculation of the diffusion coefficient and excess en- tropy was carried in the same way as for Herzian spheres.\n\nThe last system considered in the present work is the continuous repulsive shoulder system introduced in the article [41]. The potential of this system has the form\n\nIn this paper we use the dimensionless quantities: ˜ r = r /σ , ˜ P = P σ $^{3}$/ε, ˜ V = V/Nσ 3 = 1 / ˜ ρ, ˜ T = k$_{B}$T /ε . Since we use only these reduced units we omit the tilde marks.\n\nThis section reports the simulation results for the dif- fusion coefficient and excess entropy of the three models described above and checks the validity of the Rosenfeld relation for these systems.\n\nwhere k 0 = 10 . 0. As it was reported in the paper [45] this system demonstrates anomalous behavior due to its quasibinary nature. Here we extend the investigation of the diffusion anomaly in the repulsive shoulder system with σ 1 = 1 . 35 and check the Rosenfeld relations for this system in the anomalous region.\n\nLow temperature behavior of the diffusion coefficient of Herzian spheres system was already reported in the work [67]. As it is seen from this publication the diffusivity shows even two anomalous regions at the temperature T = 0 . 01 where diffusion coefficient grows with growing density. In the present work the dependence of the dif- fusion coefficient on density along several isotherms was monitored. The simulation data are presented on the Fig. 1 (a) - (b).\n\nFor the simulation of the repulsive shoulder system we used parallel tempering technic [68]. The details of the simulation were described in [45]. We computed the dif- fusion coefficients along different isochors starting from the density ρ = 0 . 3 to ρ = 0 . 8 with the step 0 . 05. A set of 24 temperatures between T = 0 . 2 and T = 0 . 5 was simulated. Taking into account the exchange of the temperatures at the same density more then a hundred runs at the same isochor was done. This allowed us to collect a good statistics on the temperature dependence of the diffusion coefficient. The diffusion coefficient along an isochor was approximated by a 9 − th order polynome of the temperature. The excess entropy was calculated in the way described above.\n\n$$U ( r ) = ( σ r ) 14 + 1 2 ε · [1 − tanh ( k 0 { r − σ 1 } )] , (8)$$\n\n## III. RESULTS AND DISCUSSION\n\n## Herzian spheres\n\nOne can see from these figures that at low tempera- tures (Fig. 1(a)) the diffusion is non monotonic, while at high temperatures it monotonically decays with increas- ing density (Fig. 1(b)) and comes to a constant value (see inset of the Fig. 1(b)).\n\nUsually excess entropy can be well approximated by the pair contribution only: S$_{ex}$ = S$_{pair}$ + S 3 + ... ≈ S$_{pair}$ , where\n\nIt is worth to note that the melting temperatures of Herzian spheres reported in the work [67] are of the or- der of 10 − $^{3}$, so the temperatures about 0 . 1 are extremely high for this model. This is easily seen from the Fig. 2 (a) - (b) where the radial distribution functions for the den- sity ρ = 6 . 0 are shown for the same set of temperatures. One can see that at T = 0 . 01 the liquid has short range structure which rapidly decays with increasing tempera- ture. At the temperature T = 0 . 1 the liquid looks almost like an ideal gas since g ( r ) comes to unity very quickly.\n\nwhere ρ is the density of the system and g ( r ) is the radial distribution function. We did not use the pair con- tribution to the excess entropy for the GCM and Herzian spheres because of the considerable overlap of the parti- cles for the bounded potentials.\n\nExcess entropy also shows non monotonic dependence on density along an isotherm (Fig. 3(a) -(b)). One can see from these figures that at low temperatures excess entropy has two minima and a maxima in the investi- gated density range while at high temperature the first minima is depressed and the curves just change the slope smoothly.\n\nSince the potentials studied in the present work have negative curvature regions or are bounded they can not be approximated by an one component hard spheres sys- tem. It allows us to pose a question about the appli- cability of the entropy scaling to these systems both in Rosenfeld and Dzugutov forms. Note that Dzugutov re- lation (Eq. (5)) involves the size of the particles σ which is ill defined for the negative curvature and bounded po- tentials systems. This makes problematic to apply the Dzugutov scaling rule to them. Because of this only Rosenfeld relations were used in this work.\n\nNow we turn to the Rosenfeld relation for the Herzian spheres system. The dependence of the reduced diffu- sion (see formula (1)) on the excess entropy along some isotherms is shown in the Fig. 4 (a) - (b). Looking at the curve for T = 0 . 01 (Fig. 4 (a)) one can divide it into three distinct regions with different slopes which we de- note as ’1’, ’2’ and ’3’. The density increase corresponds to moving along the curves from right to left, i.e. region 2 corresponds to the higher densities then 1, and 3 - higher densities then 2. As is seen from the plots the region 3\n\n$$S$_{pair}$ = − 1 2 ρ ∫ d r [ g ( r ) ln( g ( r )) − ( g ( r ) − 1)] , (9)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4548681180704077, + "doc_id": "472787f2f69d065701708da0742ff23d6231f6e7f52703bfc74b4b673be1974b", + "edit_distance": 0.6979423868312757, + "f1_score": 0.8652246256239602, + "meteor": 0.44419121281833246, + "precision": 0.9252669039145908, + "pred_md": "into pieces above certain critical separation R br because of the light quark-antiquark pair creation. The pair creation leads to the collapse of the string, and, as a consequence, to formation of mesonic heavy-light bounds states,\n\n\n\nIndeed, at large separations it is more favorable to create the light pair because of the energy-related considerations: the energy of unbroken state [given by the total mass 2 m Q of the two heavy (or, test) quark sources Q and ¯ Q and the energy of the string (3)] is larger compared to the energy of the broken string state (given by the mass 2 m Qq ¯ of the created light-heavy mesons Qq ¯ and ¯ Qq ). The critical string-breaking distance R br is thus determined by the energy balance:\n\n\n\n(here we neglect a weak Coulomb interaction between the quarks in the unbroken state and we also disregard exponentially suppressed van der Waals interaction between the heavy-light mesons in the broken state). If R > R br , then the string breaks and light-heavy mesons are formed, Fig. 1 (we consider here a simplest case ignoring a multiple pair production via string fragmentation).\n\nFIG. 1. The conventional string breaking: the QCD string spanned between the static quark Q and the static antiquark ¯ breaks due to light Q qq ¯ pair creation.\n\nFIG. 1. The conventional string breaking: the QCD string spanned between the static quark Q and the static antiquark ¯ breaks due to light Q qq ¯ pair creation.\n\nThe string breaking was observed in lattice simulations of QCD with two flavors of equal-mass quarks [16]. An extrapolation of the lattice results to the real QCD gives the following string breaking distance [16]:\n\n\n\nwhere statistical and systematical errors are of the order of 0 1 fm each. .\n\nQCD string breaking at nonzero magnetic field.\n\nA sufficiently strong background magnetic field should\n\n2\n\nmodify the dynamics of the quarks, affecting not only the chiral features, but also influencing the confining properties of the system. An anisotropic effect of the magnetic field on the confining scales of QCD was first pointed out by Miransky and Shovkovy in Ref. [12].\n\nThe energy spectrum of a free relativistic quark in a uniform magnetic field B follows a typical Landau pattern [17]:\n\n\n\nwhere m q and e q are, respectively, the mass and the electric charge of the fermion, p ‖ ≡ p z is the momentum of the fermion along the direction of the magnetic field, and s ‖ = ± 1 / 2 is the projection of the fermion's spin onto the axis of the magnetic field. The integer number n = 0 1 2 , , , . . . labels the Landau levels. The signs ' ± ' in front of the square root in Eq. (7) refer to, respectively, particle and antiparticle branches of the energy spectrum. The electric charges of the light u and d quarks are, respectively:\n\n\n\nIn a strong magnetic field the lowest Landau level (LLL) with n = 0 and s z = 1 2 plays a dominant role / in the quark's motion because the excited states are too heavy. Indeed, for the soft (low-momentum) fermions the spin flips, s z →-s z and jumps to the higher states with n /greaterorequalslant 1 are energetically suppressed by the typical gap\n\n\n\nwhere\n\n\n\nis the magnetic length of the quark q .\n\nThus, at the LLL the motion of quarks becomes essentially (1+1) dimensional. The quark moves along the axis of the magnetic field and the longitudinal dynamics of a free quark is governed by one-dimensional relativistic dispersion relation:\n\n\n\nThe transverse dynamics (i.e., the motion of the quark in the plane orthogonal to the magnetic field) is restricted to a region of a typical size of the order of the magnetic length (10),\n\n\n\nIn QCD the influence of the magnetic field should become significant when the magnetic length (10) becomes comparable with a typical QCD length scale Λ QCD ∼ 1 fm -1 ∼ 200 MeV,\n\n", + "recall": 0.8125, + "true_md": "into pieces above certain critical separation R$_{br}$ because of the light quark-antiquark pair creation. The pair cre- ation leads to the collapse of the string, and, as a con- sequence, to formation of mesonic heavy-light bounds states,\n\nIndeed, at large separations it is more favorable to create the light pair because of the energy-related considera- tions: the energy of unbroken state [given by the total mass 2 m$_{Q}$ of the two heavy (or, test) quark sources Q and ¯ Q and the energy of the string (3)] is larger com- pared to the energy of the broken string state (given by the mass 2 m$_{Q}$$\\_{¯}$ q of the created light-heavy mesons Q ¯ q and ¯ Qq ). The critical string-breaking distance R$\\_{br}$ is thus de- termined by the energy balance:\n\n(here we neglect a weak Coulomb interaction between the quarks in the unbroken state and we also disregard exponentially suppressed van der Waals interaction be- tween the heavy-light mesons in the broken state). If R > R$_{br}$ , then the string breaks and light-heavy mesons are formed, Fig. 1 (we consider here a simplest case ignor- ing a multiple pair production via string fragmentation).\n\nThe string breaking was observed in lattice simulations of QCD with two flavors of equal-mass quarks [16]. An extrapolation of the lattice results to the real QCD gives the following string breaking distance [16]:\n\nwhere statistical and systematical errors are of the order of 0 . 1 fm each.\n\nA sufficiently strong background magnetic field should\n\nIn QCD the influence of the magnetic field should be- come significant when the magnetic length (10) becomes comparable with a typical QCD length scale Λ$_{QCD}$ ∼ 1 fm − 1 ∼ 200 MeV, − 1\n\nThe transverse dynamics (i.e., the motion of the quark in the plane orthogonal to the magnetic field) is restricted to a region of a typical size of the order of the magnetic length (10),\n\nThus, at the LLL the motion of quarks becomes es- sentially (1+1) dimensional. The quark moves along the axis of the magnetic field and the longitudinal dynamics of a free quark is governed by one-dimensional relativistic dispersion relation:\n\nis the magnetic length of the quark q .\n\nFIG. 1. The conventional string breaking: the QCD string spanned between the static quark Q and the static antiquark ¯ Q breaks due to light q ¯ q pair creation.\n\nIn a strong magnetic field the lowest Landau level (LLL) with n = 0 and s$_{z}$ = 1 / 2 plays a dominant role in the quark’s motion because the excited states are too heavy. Indeed, for the soft (low-momentum) fermions the spin flips, s$_{z}$ → − s$_{z}$ and jumps to the higher states with n ⩾ 1 are energetically suppressed by the typical gap √$_{2}$$\\_{/l}$$_{q}$$\\_{,}$\n\nwhere m$_{q}$ and e$_{q}$ are, respectively, the mass and the elec- tric charge of the fermion, p$_{‖}$ ≡ p$_{z}$ is the momentum of the fermion along the direction of the magnetic field, and s$_{‖}$ = ± 1 / 2 is the projection of the fermion’s spin onto the axis of the magnetic field. The integer num- ber n = 0 , 1 , 2 , . . . labels the Landau levels. The signs “ ± ” in front of the square root in Eq. (7) refer to, re- spectively, particle and antiparticle branches of the en- ergy spectrum. The electric charges of the light u and d quarks are, respectively:\n\nmodify the dynamics of the quarks, affecting not only the chiral features, but also influencing the confining proper- ties of the system. An anisotropic effect of the magnetic field on the confining scales of QCD was first pointed out by Miransky and Shovkovy in Ref. [12].\n\nThe energy spectrum of a free relativistic quark in a uniform magnetic field B follows a typical Landau pat- tern [17]:\n\n2\n\n## QCD string breaking at nonzero magnetic field.\n\n$$are energetically suppressed by the typical gap δE$_{q}$ ∼ √$_{2}$$_{/l}$$_{q}$$_{,}$ (9)$$\n\n$$l$_{q}$ ( B ) = 1 / √ | e$_{q}$B | , q = u, d (10)$$\n\n$$ω$_{LLL}$ ( p$_{‖}$ ) = ± √ p 2 ‖ + m 2 $_{q}$.$$\n\n$$| δr | q ≲ l$_{q}$ ( B ) . (11)$$\n\n$$l$_{q}$ ( B ) ≃ Λ − 1 QCD ≃ R$_{br}$ . (12)$$\n\n$$R$_{br}$ ≈ 1 . 13 fm , (6)$$\n\n$$q$_{u}$ = + 2 e 3 , q$_{d}$ = − e 3 . (8)$$\n\n$$2 m$_{Q}$ + σR$_{br}$ = 2 m$_{Q}$$_{¯}$ q (5)$$\n\n$$ω$_{n,s}$$_{‖}$ ( p$_{‖}$ ) = ± √ p 2 ‖ + m 2 q + (2 n + 1 − 2 s$_{z}$ ) | e$_{q}$ | B , (7)$$\n\n$$Q ¯ Q → Q ¯ Q + q ¯ q → Q ¯ q + q ¯ Q . (4)$$\n\nwhere" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.72985026690342, + "doc_id": "04eef95362daf7932b8b3946e3585f3a0cdf18379bd19754051ecc4ac01723fa", + "edit_distance": 0.6676986584107327, + "f1_score": 0.9255474452554745, + "meteor": 0.7083414759563318, + "precision": 0.9548192771084337, + "pred_md": "2\n\n2009 Fermi Symposium, Washington, D.C., Nov. 2-5\n\nFIG. 1: Fermi LAT gamma-ray image (200 MeV to 10 GeV) of a 1.5 · × 1.5 · region centered on the position of 47 Tuc. The map was adaptively smoothed by imposing a minimum signal-to-noise ratio of 5. A total of ∼ 290 counts were detected from the gamma-ray source. Black contours indicate the stellar density in 47 Tuc as derived from DSS2 red plates [32]. The white circle shows the 95% confidence region for the location of the gamma-ray source. The position of the LAT source coincides with the core region of 47 Tuc.\n\nFIG. 1: Fermi LAT gamma-ray image (200 MeV to 10 GeV) of a 1.5 · × 1.5 · region centered on the position of 47 Tuc. The map was adaptively smoothed by imposing a minimum signal-to-noise ratio of 5. A total of ∼ 290 counts were detected from the gamma-ray source. Black contours indicate the stellar density in 47 Tuc as derived from DSS2 red plates [32]. The white circle shows the 95% confidence region for the location of the gamma-ray source. The position of the LAT source coincides with the core region of 47 Tuc.\n\nsition due to inaccuracies in the point-spread function and the telescope alignment are estimated to be < 1'. The position of the gamma-ray source is spatially consistent with the location ( α 2000 = 0 24 h m 05 67, . s δ 2000 = -72 04'52 62) of the core of 47 Tuc [15]. · . '' We tested for a possible extent of the gamma-ray emission by fitting 2D Gaussian-shaped intensity profiles to the LAT data for which we adjusted the widths and positions. We find that the emission is best fitted as a point source. From the decrease of the likelihood with increasing Gaussian width we derive an upper limit for the extent (FWHM) of 21' (2 σ ). This limit is considerably larger than the 47 Tuc core radius of 25' [16], demonstrating that 47 Tuc's core cannot be resolved by the LAT.\n\nWe determined the gamma-ray spectrum of the LAT source by maximum likelihood fitting of the emission in 10 logarithmically spaced energy bins covering the interval 200 MeV to 10 GeV (Fig. 2). The spectrum reveals a relatively flat spectral energy distribution with a clear cutoff at energies above a few GeV; it is well fitted by an exponentially cut-off power law that provides a 3 σ improvement upon a simple power law, with best-fitting spectral index Γ = 1.3 ± 0.3 and cutoff energy E cut = 2.5 ± 1 6 . 0 8 . GeV. The system-\n\neConf C091122\n\nFIG. 2: Spectral energy distribution (E dN 2 γ /dE) of the Fermi source seen toward 47 Tuc. The solid line shows the fit of an exponentially cut-off power law obtained for the energy range 200 MeV to 20 GeV. The dashed line indicates the extrapolation of the fit to 100 MeV.\n\nFIG. 2: Spectral energy distribution (E dN 2 γ /dE) of the Fermi source seen toward 47 Tuc. The solid line shows the fit of an exponentially cut-off power law obtained for the energy range 200 MeV to 20 GeV. The dashed line indicates the extrapolation of the fit to 100 MeV.\n\n uncertainty in the spectral index is estimated to be 0.1; that in the cut-off energy is estimated to be 0.3 GeV. By integrating the best-fitting model over the energy range 100 MeV to 10 GeV, we determined the integral photon flux in this band to be 2.6 ( ± 0.8) × 10 8 photons cm -2 s -1 , which is slightly below the upper limit of 5 × 10 8 photons cm -2 s -1 reported by EGRET [17-19]. The photon flux corresponds to an energy flux of 2.5 ( ± 0.4) × 10 -11 ergs cm -2 s -1 . The systematic uncertainty in our fluxes is estimated to be < 10%. The overall detection significance of the source amounts to 17 σ .\n\nWe searched for time variability of the gamma-ray signal by dividing our data set into equally sized time bins of durations 1 day, 1 week, 2 weeks, and 1 month. We detected no source at the location of 47 Tuc in any of the daily or weekly time bins, which indicates that the observed emission did not arise from short-duration flares. The LAT source was significantly detected in all 2-week and monthly time bins at a comparable flux level, which suggests that the source was steady over the period of observation. Using ephemerides from [18] for 21 MSPs in 47 Tuc, we searched for gamma-ray pulsations in our data without finding any significant detection. The observed gamma-ray signal thus does not appear to be dominated by a single (or a few) known gamma-ray pulsars in 47 Tuc; this is in line with the absence of a single particularly powerful MSP in the cluster.\n\n## III. DISCUSSION\n\nPulsed gamma-ray curvature radiation (and eventually inverse Compton scattering) arising near the polar cap and/or in an outer magnetospheric gap in MSPs has been proposed as a possible source of high-", + "recall": 0.8980169971671388, + "true_md": "sition due to inaccuracies in the point-spread function and the telescope alignment are estimated to be < 1’. The position of the gamma-ray source is spatially con- sistent with the location ( α 2000 = 0 $^{h}$24$^{m}$05 . $^{s}$67, δ 2000 = -72 $^{◦}$04’52 . $^{′′}$62) of the core of 47 Tuc [15]. We tested for a possible extent of the gamma-ray emission by fitting 2D Gaussian-shaped intensity profiles to the LAT data for which we adjusted the widths and po- sitions. We find that the emission is best fitted as a point source. From the decrease of the likelihood with increasing Gaussian width we derive an upper limit for the extent (FWHM) of 21’ (2 σ ). This limit is considerably larger than the 47 Tuc core radius of 25” [16], demonstrating that 47 Tuc’s core cannot be resolved by the LAT.\n\nWe determined the gamma-ray spectrum of the LAT source by maximum likelihood fitting of the emis- sion in 10 logarithmically spaced energy bins covering the interval 200 MeV to 10 GeV (Fig. 2). The spec- trum reveals a relatively flat spectral energy distribu- tion with a clear cutoff at energies above a few GeV; it is well fitted by an exponentially cut-off power law that provides a 3 σ improvement upon a simple power law, with best-fitting spectral index Γ = 1.3 ± 0.3 and cutoff energy E$_{cut}$ = 2.5 ± 1$_{.}$6 0$_{.}$8 GeV. The system-\n\natic uncertainty in the spectral index is estimated to be 0.1; that in the cut-off energy is estimated to be 0.3 GeV. By integrating the best-fitting model over the energy range 100 MeV to 10 GeV, we determined the integral photon flux in this band to be 2.6 ( ± 0.8) × 10 8 photons cm − 2 s − $^{1}$, which is slightly below the upper limit of 5 × 10 8 photons cm − 2 s − 1 reported by EGRET [17-19]. The photon flux corresponds to an energy flux of 2.5 ( ± 0.4) × 10 − 11 ergs cm − 2 s − $^{1}$. The systematic uncertainty in our fluxes is estimated to be < 10%. The overall detection significance of the source amounts to 17 σ .\n\nWe searched for time variability of the gamma-ray signal by dividing our data set into equally sized time bins of durations 1 day, 1 week, 2 weeks, and 1 month. We detected no source at the location of 47 Tuc in any of the daily or weekly time bins, which indi- cates that the observed emission did not arise from short-duration flares. The LAT source was signifi- cantly detected in all 2-week and monthly time bins at a comparable flux level, which suggests that the source was steady over the period of observation. Us- ing ephemerides from [18] for 21 MSPs in 47 Tuc, we searched for gamma-ray pulsations in our data with- out finding any significant detection. The observed gamma-ray signal thus does not appear to be domi- nated by a single (or a few) known gamma-ray pulsars in 47 Tuc; this is in line with the absence of a single particularly powerful MSP in the cluster.\n\nPulsed gamma-ray curvature radiation (and even- tually inverse Compton scattering) arising near the polar cap and/or in an outer magnetospheric gap in MSPs has been proposed as a possible source of high-\n\n2009 Fermi Symposium, Washington, D.C., Nov. 2-5\n\n2\n\neConf C091122\n\n## III. DISCUSSION\n\nFIG. 1: Fermi LAT gamma-ray image (200 MeV to 10 GeV) of a 1.5 ◦ × 1.5 ◦ region centered on the position of 47 Tuc. The map was adaptively smoothed by imposing a minimum signal-to-noise ratio of 5. A total of ∼ 290 counts were detected from the gamma-ray source. Black contours indicate the stellar density in 47 Tuc as derived from DSS2 red plates [32]. The white circle shows the 95% confidence region for the location of the gamma-ray source. The position of the LAT source coincides with the core region of 47 Tuc.\n\nFIG. 2: Spectral energy distribution (E $^{2}$dN$_{γ}$ /dE) of the Fermi source seen toward 47 Tuc. The solid line shows the fit of an exponentially cut-off power law obtained for the energy range 200 MeV to 20 GeV. The dashed line indicates the extrapolation of the fit to 100 MeV." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8374294914177459, + "doc_id": "68a361b88a1372f574035f0854d69d585a91c3d7bb6ec9c85642ba50361caa27", + "edit_distance": 0.5739219712525667, + "f1_score": 0.9272467902995721, + "meteor": 0.6839350020496526, + "precision": 0.9643916913946587, + "pred_md": "2\n\nphotoemission[4], where all the bands are quite renormalized with respect to density-functional calculations, and the ones lying closest to the Fermi level have a significantly stronger renormalization. An indication of an orbital-selective physics is also provided by the magnetic response, which seems to be constituted by a metallic component (Pauli behavior) and a component associated to local moments (Curie susceptibility), as if two different kind of carriers are present[5].\n\n## 2 The mechanism: selective localization triggered by band degeneracy lifting\n\nIn a recent paper[6] we have outlined a mechanism for the Orbital-selective Mott transition, which is possibly the most likely to be found in nature, and in particular in the pnictides.\n\nThis reposes on the different kinetic energy of electrons lying in manifolds of bands of unequal degeneracy. In general, even if the bandwidths are equal, the higher the degeneracy, the higher the kinetic energy content. Thus, in case of reasonably decoupled manifolds, intermediate interactions can localize only the less mobile electrons, while the more mobile ones remain itinerant.\n\nThe necessary conditions for this to be realized are thus a suitable splitting of the conduction bands due to the crystal field, and a sizeable Hund's exchange coupling which suppresses the orbital fluctuations and hence decouples the manifolds.\n\nIndeed it is well known that manifolds of degenerate atomic orbitals are often split in energy by the anisotropy of the Crystal field. Distortions of the ionic structure lower the point group symmetry of the crystal and this changes the Madelung energy of the orbitals oriented along different directions. A typical example is the splitting, induced by tetragonal distortions, of the five d-obitals that generate the conduction bands in transition-metal oxydes in two groups, t 2 g and e g , respectively of three and two bands.\n\nWe also know from the study of the multi-orbital Hubbard model that Mott insulating phases can arise at large interaction strength for any integer filling[7,8] and it is now clear[9,10,11,12] that the critical interaction strength U c for the Mott transition is in general larger for manifolds of a larger number of bands (e.g. in the SU(N)-orbital Hubbard model it scales with N at large N, while the critical value for the closing of the gap scales with √ N .) due to the increased kinetic energy of electrons lying in degenerate bands.\n\nWe analyzed a model in which 4 electrons per site populate three degenerate bands which are split by the crystal field as depicted in Fig. 1 and found that the\n\nOSMT is realized for a large range of the parameter space U -∆ (interaction strength - crystal field splitting) if the Hund's coupling J is higher than a critical value.\n\nFig. 1 Sketch of the band structure and splitting that allows the new OSMT mechanism to apply. The three band-model realization was studied in Ref. [6]. In this paper we generalize it to the case relevant for the pnictides: 6 electrons in 5 bands. For simplicity we study the case in which one band is lifted and the remaining 4 stay degenerate.\n\nFig. 1 Sketch of the band structure and splitting that allows the new OSMT mechanism to apply. The three band-model realization was studied in Ref. [6]. In this paper we generalize it to the case relevant for the pnictides: 6 electrons in 5 bands. For simplicity we study the case in which one band is lifted and the remaining 4 stay degenerate.\n\nIn practice when J is large enough to suppress the orbital fluctuations, a gap due to U can open in the lifted band, such that the chemical potential falls within it and this band is half-filled. This, and the related localization can happen for the whole range of the crystal field that shifts the gapped band until the chemical potential hits one of the borders of the gap.\n\n## 3 Towards a realistic model for iron pnictides: 6 electrons in 5 bands\n\nHere we generalize the study performed in Ref. [6] by investigating the realization of the OSMT by the same mechanism, within a more appropriate (albeit still rather caricatured) model for Iron Pnictides.\n\nIndeed the case relevant for Pnictides[13,14], 6 electrons in 5 bands, is even more favorable than the previous one of 4 electrons in 3 bands, since it is closer to global half-filling. Thus an even smaller crystal field splitting can drive the top band to half-filling and to localization.\n\nThe crystal field in these compounds is estimated to split the orbitals by putting the xy 130 meV above the degenerate xy and yz , that are in turn 160meV above the 3 z 2 -r 2 and 220meV above the x 2 -y 2 . The Hund's coupling is estimated of the order of 0 35 . ∼ 0 7 eV while . the bandwidth is W ∼ 3 eV and U ∼ 4 eV .\n\nThis situation is ideal for our mechanism to apply, since the upper band is likely to be driven towards halffilling by the crystal field and the U/W value is just about what is needed for a single band to be localized by correlations. The top band is relatively close in", + "recall": 0.8928571428571429, + "true_md": "2\n\nphotoemission[4], where all the bands are quite renor- malized with respect to density-functional calculations, and the ones lying closest to the Fermi level have a significantly stronger renormalization. An indication of an orbital-selective physics is also provided by the mag- netic response, which seems to be constituted by a metal- lic component (Pauli behavior) and a component asso- ciated to local moments (Curie susceptibility), as if two different kind of carriers are present[5].\n\nOSMT is realized for a large range of the parameter space U − Δ (interaction strength - crystal field split- ting) if the Hund’s coupling J is higher than a critical value.\n\nFig. 1 Sketch of the band structure and splitting that allows the new OSMT mechanism to apply. The three band-model re- alization was studied in Ref. [6]. In this paper we generalize it to the case relevant for the pnictides: 6 electrons in 5 bands. For simplicity we study the case in which one band is lifted and the remaining 4 stay degenerate.\n\n## 2 The mechanism: selective localization triggered by band degeneracy lifting\n\nIn a recent paper[6] we have outlined a mechanism for the Orbital-selective Mott transition, which is possibly the most likely to be found in nature, and in particular in the pnictides.\n\nThis reposes on the different kinetic energy of elec- trons lying in manifolds of bands of unequal degeneracy. In general, even if the bandwidths are equal, the higher the degeneracy, the higher the kinetic energy content. Thus, in case of reasonably decoupled manifolds, inter- mediate interactions can localize only the less mobile electrons, while the more mobile ones remain itinerant.\n\nThe necessary conditions for this to be realized are thus a suitable splitting of the conduction bands due to the crystal field, and a sizeable Hund’s exchange coupling which suppresses the orbital fluctuations and hence decouples the manifolds.\n\nIndeed it is well known that manifolds of degen- erate atomic orbitals are often split in energy by the anisotropy of the Crystal field. Distortions of the ionic structure lower the point group symmetry of the crystal and this changes the Madelung energy of the orbitals oriented along different directions. A typical example is the splitting, induced by tetragonal distortions, of the five d-obitals that generate the conduction bands in transition-metal oxydes in two groups, t$_{2}$$\\_{g}$ and e$\\_{g}$ , respectively of three and two bands.\n\nWe also know from the study of the multi-orbital Hubbard model that Mott insulating phases can arise at large interaction strength for any integer filling[7,8] and it is now clear[9,10,11,12] that the critical interaction strength U$_{c}$ for the Mott transition is in general larger for manifolds of a larger number of bands (e.g. in the SU(N)-orbital Hubbard model it scales with N at large N, while the critical value for the closing of the gap scales with √$_{N}$$\\_{.) due to the increased kinetic energy of}$ electrons lying in degenerate bands.\n\nWe analyzed a model in which 4 electrons per site populate three degenerate bands which are split by the crystal field as depicted in Fig. 1 and found that the\n\n∼ ∼ This situation is ideal for our mechanism to apply, since the upper band is likely to be driven towards half- filling by the crystal field and the U/W value is just about what is needed for a single band to be local- ized by correlations. The top band is relatively close in\n\nThe crystal field in these compounds is estimated to split the orbitals by putting the xy 130 meV above the degenerate xy and yz , that are in turn 160meV above the 3 z $^{2}$− r 2 and 220meV above the x $^{2}$− y $^{2}$. The Hund’s coupling is estimated of the order of 0 . 35 ∼ 0 . 7 eV while the bandwidth is W ∼ 3 eV and U ∼ 4 eV . This situation is ideal for our mechanism to apply,\n\nIndeed the case relevant for Pnictides[13,14], 6 elec- trons in 5 bands, is even more favorable than the pre- vious one of 4 electrons in 3 bands, since it is closer to global half-filling. Thus an even smaller crystal field splitting can drive the top band to half-filling and to localization.\n\nHere we generalize the study performed in Ref. [6] by investigating the realization of the OSMT by the same mechanism, within a more appropriate (albeit still rather caricatured) model for Iron Pnictides.\n\n## 3 Towards a realistic model for iron pnictides: 6 electrons in 5 bands\n\nIn practice when J is large enough to suppress the orbital fluctuations, a gap due to U can open in the lifted band, such that the chemical potential falls within it and this band is half-filled. This, and the related lo- calization can happen for the whole range of the crystal field that shifts the gapped band until the chemical po- tential hits one of the borders of the gap." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8162323315252316, + "doc_id": "844bfbe13e7def858df92e5f66b472b3fc213455cb0a95f67e605ae5c39d8892", + "edit_distance": 0.7686189443239335, + "f1_score": 0.9152542372881356, + "meteor": 0.7190261664275783, + "precision": 0.9642857142857143, + "pred_md": "2009 Fermi Symposium, Washington, D.C., Nov. 2-5\n\n3\n\nenergy photons in globular clusters [21-24]. The main unknowns of this scenario are the exact site of gammaray production (polar cap versus slot gap or outer gap), the efficiency η γ with which the spin-down power is converted into gamma-ray luminosity, and the total number of MSPs in the cluster. The eight Galactic MSPs that have so far been detected by Fermi [8] have a mean spectral index of < Γ > = 1.5 ± 0.4 and a mean cutoff energy of < E cut > = 2.8 ± 1.8 GeV, similar to that which we found for the 47 Tuc source. Cumulative gamma-ray emission from MSPs in 47 Tuc is thus a plausible explanation for the observed signal.\n\nUnder this hypothesis, we estimate η γ from the gamma-ray flux of 47 Tuc by taking the average spindown power to be < ˙ E > = 1.8 ( ± 0.7) × 10 34 ergs s -1 . Keeping the total number of MSPs in 47 Tuc as a parameter of the solution, for a distance to 47 Tuc of 4.0 ± 0.4 kpc [10], the measured energy flux of 2.5 ( ± 0.4) × 10 -11 ergs cm -2 s -1 converts into an isotropic gamma-ray luminosity of L γ = 4.8 ( ± 1.2) × 10 34 ergs s -1 . This results in η γ = 0.12 ( ± 0.05) ¯ f Ω / N 23 , where ¯ f Ω is an average geometrical correction factor that accounts for non-isotropic emission [25] and N 23 is the number of MSPs in 47 Tuc in units of 23. N 23 ≥ 1 implies that 0.12 ( ± 0.05) ¯ f Ω is an upper limit on the spin-down to gamma-ray luminosity conversion efficiency in 47 Tuc; this is consistent with the predicted conversion efficiency of 6.1% based on a model of the expected gamma-ray emission from a population of MSPs in 47 Tuc in the framework of a fully three-dimensional general-relativistic polar cap pulsar model [24]. It is also compatible with the estimated conversion efficiency of ∼ 10% of [26] that was derived in the framework of a space charge-limited flow acceleration polar cap model.\n\nThe conversion efficiencies of the eight Galactic MSPs detected by Fermi cover the range from 0.02 ¯ f Ω to 1.0 ¯ f Ω with a mean value of < η γ > = 0.14 ¯ f Ω [8], which is larger than the upper limit we derive for 47 Tuc. However, the MSPs that have been detected so far by Fermi are faint gamma-ray sources, forming a sample that is likely biased toward intrinsically bright objects or objects for which the beam orientation is favorable. Selecting only the nearest MSPs should reduce this bias, because for close objects a larger fraction of the MSP parameter space is accessible to Fermi. Taking only the three nearest MSPs from the Fermi sample (which also corresponds to the three nearest known MSPs) results in a mean spindown to gamma-ray luminosity conversion efficiency of < η γ > = 0.08 ¯ f Ω , considerably lower than the global average. Taking the five nearest MSPs results in < η γ > = 0.10 ¯ f Ω . Both values are consistent with our upper limit on 47 Tuc. Thus, our data show no evidence for differences in the gamma-ray efficiencies of MSPs in globular clusters with respect to objects observed in the Galactic field.\n\nAssuming that the gamma-ray efficiencies of MSPs\n\neConf C091122\n\nin 47 Tuc are equal to those of the nearby Galactic field sample, and also assuming that their average geometrical correction factors ¯ f Ω are the same, we obtained an estimate of the total number of MSPs in 47 Tuc. Taking the mean < η γ > = 0.08 ¯ f Ω that we obtained for the sample of the nearest Galactic MSP as the most conservative estimate, we converted the observed gamma-ray efficiency η γ = 0.12 ( ± 0.05) ¯ f/N 23 for 47 Tuc into N 23 = 1.5 ± 0.6. Formally, this corresponds to a 95% confidence interval of 7 to 62 MSPs in 47 Tuc (assuming that uncertainties are Gaussian), which is consistent with the range of 45 to 60 MSPs estimated on the basis of X-ray observations obtained previously with Chandra [11]. The X-ray and gammaray constraints thus suggest a population of about 50 to 60 MSPs in 47 Tuc. This is a factor of ∼ 2 above the number of known radio MSPs in the cluster and also well above the upper limit of 30 radio MSPs estimated to be present in 47 Tuc [27], constraining the radio beaming fraction to > 0.5 times that of the gamma-ray beaming. We recall that this result relies on an estimate of the average gamma-ray efficiency of MSPs. We obtained this efficiency from a sample of Galactic field MSPs and selected the value that appears to be the least biased and that is the most conservative in the sense that it produces the largest estimate for the number of MSPs in 47 Tuc. The smallness of the gamma-ray sample of MSPs, however, implies that the average gamma-ray efficiency is still uncertain and likely biased.\n\nIt has been suggested that MSPs may produce relativistic magnetized winds that, when interacting with stellar winds or winds from other MSPs, create shocks that are capable of accelerating electrons and positrons into the GeV-TeV regime [28, 29]. These high-energy particles may eventually undergo inverse Compton scattering on stellar and cosmic microwave background radiation, producing detectable fluxes of GeV-TeV gamma-ray emissions. The expected gamma-ray emission from 47 Tuc has been modeled in this scenario by [28], who predicted 100 MeV to 10 GeV photon fluxes of the order of 10 8 photons cm -2 s -1 and energy fluxes of the order of ∼ 3 × 10 -11 ergs cm -2 s -1 , which are on the order of the values we observed using the LAT. However, [28] assumed for their calculations that the total power injected as relativistic electrons and positrons amounts to 1.2 × 10 35 ergs s -1 , which corresponds to a mean MSP spin-down power of < > ˙ E = 5.2 × 10 35 ergs s -1 under the assumptions that the total number of MSPs in 47 Tuc amounts to 23 objects and that the average energy conversion efficiency from the pulsar winds to relativistic electrons and positrons amounts to 1% [24, 28]. This spin-down power is about a factor of 30 larger than the average spin-down luminosity of MSPs in 47 Tuc, which suggests that the gamma-ray flux estimates of [28] are overly optimistic and that the contribution of pulsar wind interactions to the gamma-", + "recall": 0.8709677419354839, + "true_md": "3\n\n2009 Fermi Symposium, Washington, D.C., Nov. 2-5\n\nenergy photons in globular clusters [21-24]. The main unknowns of this scenario are the exact site of gamma- ray production (polar cap versus slot gap or outer gap), the efficiency η$_{γ}$ with which the spin-down power is converted into gamma-ray luminosity, and the to- tal number of MSPs in the cluster. The eight Galac- tic MSPs that have so far been detected by Fermi [8] have a mean spectral index of < Γ > = 1.5 ± 0.4 and a mean cutoff energy of < E$_{cut}$ > = 2.8 ± 1.8 GeV, similar to that which we found for the 47 Tuc source. Cumulative gamma-ray emission from MSPs in 47 Tuc is thus a plausible explanation for the observed signal.\n\nin 47 Tuc are equal to those of the nearby Galactic field sample, and also assuming that their average ge- ometrical correction factors ¯ f Ω are the same, we ob- tained an estimate of the total number of MSPs in 47 Tuc. Taking the mean < η$_{γ}$ > = 0.08 ¯ f Ω that we ob- tained for the sample of the nearest Galactic MSP as the most conservative estimate, we converted the ob- served gamma-ray efficiency η$_{γ}$ = 0.12 ( ± 0.05) ¯ f/N 23 for 47 Tuc into N 23 = 1.5 ± 0.6. Formally, this corre- sponds to a 95% confidence interval of 7 to 62 MSPs in 47 Tuc (assuming that uncertainties are Gaussian), which is consistent with the range of 45 to 60 MSPs estimated on the basis of X-ray observations obtained previously with Chandra [11]. The X-ray and gamma- ray constraints thus suggest a population of about 50 to 60 MSPs in 47 Tuc. This is a factor of ∼ 2 above the number of known radio MSPs in the cluster and also well above the upper limit of 30 radio MSPs estimated to be present in 47 Tuc [27], constraining the radio beaming fraction to > 0.5 times that of the gamma-ray beaming. We recall that this result relies on an esti- mate of the average gamma-ray efficiency of MSPs. We obtained this efficiency from a sample of Galac- tic field MSPs and selected the value that appears to be the least biased and that is the most conserva- tive in the sense that it produces the largest estimate for the number of MSPs in 47 Tuc. The smallness of the gamma-ray sample of MSPs, however, implies that the average gamma-ray efficiency is still uncertain and likely biased.\n\nUnder this hypothesis, we estimate η$_{γ}$ from the gamma-ray flux of 47 Tuc by taking the average spin- down power to be < ˙ E > = 1.8 ( ± 0.7) × 10 34 ergs s − $^{1}$. Keeping the total number of MSPs in 47 Tuc as a parameter of the solution, for a distance to 47 Tuc of 4.0 ± 0.4 kpc [10], the measured energy flux of 2.5 ( ± 0.4) × 10 − 11 ergs cm − 2 s − 1 converts into an isotropic gamma-ray luminosity of L$_{γ}$ = 4.8 ( ± 1.2) × 10 34 ergs s − $^{1}$. This results in η$_{γ}$ = 0.12 ( ± 0.05) ¯ f Ω / N 23 , where ¯ f Ω is an average geometrical correc- tion factor that accounts for non-isotropic emission [25] and N 23 is the number of MSPs in 47 Tuc in units of 23. N 23 ≥ 1 implies that 0.12 ( ± 0.05) ¯ f Ω is an up- per limit on the spin-down to gamma-ray luminosity conversion efficiency in 47 Tuc; this is consistent with the predicted conversion efficiency of 6.1% based on a model of the expected gamma-ray emission from a population of MSPs in 47 Tuc in the framework of a fully three-dimensional general-relativistic polar cap pulsar model [24]. It is also compatible with the esti- mated conversion efficiency of ∼ 10% of [26] that was derived in the framework of a space charge-limited flow acceleration polar cap model.\n\nIt has been suggested that MSPs may produce relativistic magnetized winds that, when interact- ing with stellar winds or winds from other MSPs, create shocks that are capable of accelerating elec- trons and positrons into the GeV-TeV regime [28, 29]. These high-energy particles may eventually undergo inverse Compton scattering on stellar and cosmic mi- crowave background radiation, producing detectable fluxes of GeV-TeV gamma-ray emissions. The ex- pected gamma-ray emission from 47 Tuc has been modeled in this scenario by [28], who predicted 100 MeV to 10 GeV photon fluxes of the order of 10 8 pho- tons cm − 2 s − 1 and energy fluxes of the order of ∼ 3 × 10 − 11 ergs cm − 2 s − $^{1}$, which are on the order of the values we observed using the LAT. However, [28] assumed for their calculations that the total power in- jected as relativistic electrons and positrons amounts to 1.2 × 10 35 ergs s − $^{1}$, which corresponds to a mean MSP spin-down power of < ˙ E > = 5.2 × 10 35 ergs s − 1 under the assumptions that the total number of MSPs in 47 Tuc amounts to 23 objects and that the aver- age energy conversion efficiency from the pulsar winds to relativistic electrons and positrons amounts to 1% [24, 28]. This spin-down power is about a factor of 30 larger than the average spin-down luminosity of MSPs in 47 Tuc, which suggests that the gamma-ray flux es- timates of [28] are overly optimistic and that the con- tribution of pulsar wind interactions to the gamma-\n\nThe conversion efficiencies of the eight Galactic MSPs detected by Fermi cover the range from 0.02 ¯ f Ω to 1.0 ¯ f Ω with a mean value of < η$_{γ}$ > = 0.14 ¯ f Ω [8], which is larger than the upper limit we derive for 47 Tuc. However, the MSPs that have been detected so far by Fermi are faint gamma-ray sources, form- ing a sample that is likely biased toward intrinsically bright objects or objects for which the beam orien- tation is favorable. Selecting only the nearest MSPs should reduce this bias, because for close objects a larger fraction of the MSP parameter space is acces- sible to Fermi. Taking only the three nearest MSPs from the Fermi sample (which also corresponds to the three nearest known MSPs) results in a mean spin- down to gamma-ray luminosity conversion efficiency of < η$_{γ}$ > = 0.08 ¯ f Ω , considerably lower than the global average. Taking the five nearest MSPs results in < η$_{γ}$ > = 0.10 ¯ f Ω . Both values are consistent with our upper limit on 47 Tuc. Thus, our data show no evidence for differences in the gamma-ray efficiencies of MSPs in globular clusters with respect to objects observed in the Galactic field.\n\nAssuming that the gamma-ray efficiencies of MSPs\n\neConf C091122" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6596246548747363, + "doc_id": "c38c8e0eb9437a70332e43a78988402d7f79447badae70144e064cc917bfc708", + "edit_distance": 0.7182866556836903, + "f1_score": 0.8919330289193304, + "meteor": 0.5394160709672828, + "precision": 0.9331210191082803, + "pred_md": "FIG. 3: (Color online) The dependence of the self-consistent value of the potential dip V 0 on the electronic density shows monotonic behavior. While the value of the dip is comparable to the Fermi energy ( EF = 3 01), the considered values do not lead to appearance of the . bound state at the edge.\n\nFIG. 3: (Color online) The dependence of the self-consistent value of the potential dip V 0 on the electronic density shows monotonic behavior. While the value of the dip is comparable to the Fermi energy ( EF = 3 01), the considered values do not lead to appearance of the . bound state at the edge.\n\nresult for the spin polarization mz = ( 5 53 . ± 0 003 . ) × 10 -5 , which is in perfect agreement with our analytical expression, Eq. 14.\n\nUsing this extrapolation scheme we can address the changes in the spin-polarization with parameters of the model discussed in the following. First, we confirm the observation that the dependence on the magnitude of the confining edge potential comes in the 3rd order of α E : the value of the slope of the polarization vs. the height of the confinement edge potential, ∆ V is ∂ mz / ∂ ( ∆ V ) ≈ 1 6 . × 10 -10 which is close to the analytical value 1 5 . × 10 -10 . The difference comes primarily from the extrapolation of the value of mz with respect to the upper limit of integration in x .\n\nConsidering nonzero values of the smearing length of the confining potential, d ∈ ( 0 , λ F / 2 , we find that the resulting ) spin polarization is changing only very little ( ∂ mz / ∂ d ∼ 3 3 . × 10 -8 ). The reason for this negligible dependence is, similarly to the dependence on ∆ V , the mutual cancellation of the two effects discussed earlier.\n\nThe second modification to the confining potential that we consider is partial self-consistency of the edge potential that guarantees charge neutrality of the edge of the sample. Presence of the model confining edge (Eq. 15) leads to redistribution of the charge density characterized with excess positive charge (per unit length of the sample)\n\n\n\nwhere n x ( ) is the electronic density and EF / π is the density of the positive background charge. The Fermi energy of the electrons guarantees that for large x we have n x ( ) = EF / π so that the system is charge neutral in the bulk even through the total charge at the edge is not necessarily zero. The behavior of the density at the edge of a 2D sample is in contrast with the typical situation for the edge of 3D metals where the work function and the Fermi energy, mutually comparable in value, lead to leakage of the electronic density into vacuum and thereby to an access of negative charge 31 . However at the edge of a 2DEG, the Fermi energy, typically few meV is much smaller than the work function which is of order of several eV and the situation is reversed.\n\n5\n\nFIG. 4: (Color online) The difference in the spin densities for noninteracting (red-full) and the partially self-consistent (green-dashed) electrons close to the edge of the sample (located at x = 0). The spatially resolved spin density difference exhibits pronounced differences due to the selfconsistency, the most important effect being the shift of the curve closer to the edge. However, this results only in weak enhancement of the total spin polarization, mz , shown in the inset for an interval of electronic densities, due to counter-acting spin-orbit coupling induced by the self-consistency correction in the region x ∈ ( 0 , λ F / 2 . )\n\nFIG. 4: (Color online) The difference in the spin densities for noninteracting (red-full) and the partially self-consistent (green-dashed) electrons close to the edge of the sample (located at x = 0). The spatially resolved spin density difference exhibits pronounced differences due to the selfconsistency, the most important effect being the shift of the curve closer to the edge. However, this results only in weak enhancement of the total spin polarization, mz , shown in the inset for an interval of electronic densities, due to counter-acting spin-orbit coupling induced by the self-consistency correction in the region x ∈ ( 0 , λ F / 2 . )\n\nThe overall charge of the edge can be neutralized by a simple model potential\n\n\n\nwhich on a distance λ F / 2 exhibits small potential dip to attract more electrons. The magnitude of the dip is obtained selfconsistently to achieve zero total charge at the edge, i.e. the condition ∆ N = 0. While in principle this form of the potential may support new bound states (edge states) for sufficiently large V 0, we have checked that for the here, self-consistently found values of V 0 no such states exist. The dependence of the self-consistent value of V 0 on the typical values of the density of the 2DEG is shown in Fig. 3.\n\nIncluding the SO interaction, Eq. 3, on top of the potential energy Vn ( x ) , we obtain aditional repulsive SO-induced contribution for the spin-down electrons due to the linearly rising potential of the dip for 0 < x < λ F / 2. This is in competition with the character of the edge-confinement potential preferring the spin-down electrons. However, the dip in the potential energy also tends to move the electrons closer to the confining edge and, by increasing the density in this region, effectively enhances the effect of the SO coupling there. While the form of the spin-density does change significantly due to all these mechanisms (see Fig. 4), the overall spin polarization per unit length remains essentially unaltered over a wide range of electronic densities, shown in the inset of Fig. 4. This result once again confirms the rigidity of the result given by Eq. 1.", + "recall": 0.8542274052478134, + "true_md": "5\n\nFIG. 3: (Color online) The dependence of the self-consistent value of the potential dip V$_{0}$ on the electronic density shows monotonic be- havior. While the value of the dip is comparable to the Fermi energy ( E$_{F}$ = 3 . 01), the considered values do not lead to appearance of the bound state at the edge.\n\nFIG. 4: (Color online) The difference in the spin densities for non- interacting (red-full) and the partially self-consistent (green-dashed) electrons close to the edge of the sample (located at x = 0). The spatially resolved spin density difference exhibits pronounced dif- ferences due to the selfconsistency, the most important effect being the shift of the curve closer to the edge. However, this results only in weak enhancement of the total spin polarization, m$_{z}$ , shown in the inset for an interval of electronic densities, due to counter-acting spin-orbit coupling induced by the self-consistency correction in the region x ∈ ( 0 , λ $_{F}$/ 2 ) .\n\nresult for the spin polarization m$_{z}$ = ( 5 . 53 ± 0 . 003 ) × 10 − $^{5}$, which is in perfect agreement with our analytical expression, Eq. 14.\n\nUsing this extrapolation scheme we can address the changes in the spin-polarization with parameters of the model discussed in the following. First, we confirm the observatio n that the dependence on the magnitude of the confining edge potential comes in the 3rd order of α $_{E}$: the value of the slope of the polarization vs. the height of the confinement edge po- tential, Δ V is ∂ m$_{z}$ / ∂ ( Δ V ) ≈ 1 . 6 × 10 − 10 which is close to the analytical value 1 . 5 × 10 − $^{10}$. The difference comes primarily from the extrapolation of the value of m$_{z}$ with respect to the upper limit of integration in x .\n\nConsidering nonzero values of the smearing length of the confining potential, d ∈ ( 0 , λ $_{F}$/ 2 ) , we find that the resulting spin polarization is changing only very little ( ∂ m$_{z}$ / ∂ d ∼ 3 . 3 × 10 − $^{8}$). The reason for this negligible dependence is, similarly to the dependence on Δ V , the mutual cancellation of the two effects discussed earlier.\n\nThe second modification to the confining potential that we consider is partial self-consistency of the edge potential that guarantees charge neutrality of the edge of the sample. Pres- ence of the model confining edge (Eq. 15) leads to redistribu- tion of the charge density characterized with excess positive charge (per unit length of the sample)\n\n which on a distance λ $_{F}$/ 2 exhibits small potential dip to attract more electrons. The magnitude of the dip is obtained self- consistently to achieve zero total charge at the edge, i.e. the condition Δ N = 0. While in principle this form of the potential may support new bound states (edge states) for sufficiently large V$_{0}$ , we have checked that for the here, self-consistently found values of V$_{0}$ no such states exist. The dependence of the self-consistent value of V$_{0}$ on the typical values of the density of the 2DEG is shown in Fig. 3.\n\nIncluding the SO interaction, Eq. 3, on top of the potential energy V$_{n}$ ( x ) , we obtain aditional repulsive SO-induced con- tribution for the spin-down electrons due to the linearly rising potential of the dip for 0 < x < λ $_{F}$/ 2. This is in competition with the character of the edge-confinement potential prefer - ring the spin-down electrons. However, the dip in the potential energy also tends to move the electrons closer to the confinin g edge and, by increasing the density in this region, effectively enhances the effect of the SO coupling there. While the form of the spin-density does change significantly due to all thes e mechanisms (see Fig. 4), the overall spin polarization per unit length remains essentially unaltered over a wide range of elec- tronic densities, shown in the inset of Fig. 4. This result once again confirms the rigidity of the result given by Eq. 1.\n\nwhere n ( x ) is the electronic density and E$_{F}$ / π is the density of the positive background charge. The Fermi energy of the electrons guarantees that for large x we have n ( x ) = E$_{F}$ / π so that the system is charge neutral in the bulk even through the total charge at the edge is not necessarily zero. The behav- ior of the density at the edge of a 2D sample is in contrast with the typical situation for the edge of 3D metals where the work function and the Fermi energy, mutually comparable in value, lead to leakage of the electronic density into vacuum and thereby to an access of negative charge$^{31}$. However at the edge of a 2DEG, the Fermi energy, typically few meV is much smaller than the work function which is of order of several eV and the situation is reversed.\n\nThe overall charge of the edge can be neutralized by a sim- ple model potential\n\n$$V$_{n}$ ( x ) =    Δ V x < 0 − V$_{0}$ + ( 2 V$_{0}$ / λ $_{F}$) x 0 < x < λ $_{F}$/ 2 0 x > λ $_{F}$/ 2 , (17) which on a distance $_{F}$/ 2 exhibits small potential dip to attract$$\n\n$$Δ N = ∫ + ∞ − ∞ dx Δ n ( x ) = ∫ + ∞ − ∞ dx ( E$_{F}$ / π − n ( x )) , (16)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7486203012299939, + "doc_id": "ad8633cdfd8f6644529b9c1d99c73200e166db98a106575c618ef173d7f1dc2b", + "edit_distance": 0.6159895150720839, + "f1_score": 0.9199255121042832, + "meteor": 0.6886033999217476, + "precision": 0.9536679536679536, + "pred_md": "tion on the central Si. The largest contribution to near-neighbor hopping in the Al-Si plane between p z and p x or p z is most likely due to this ring structure, as the p lobes are confined to the inside of a square of near-neighbor Al atoms, which are only edge sharing with the nearest Si atoms along b vectors. This is the likely reason that all the hoppings along b are approximately of the same magnitude. The dispersion which creates the FSs along Γ-Z (seen in Fig. 4) is composed only of the p x and p y WFs. This is not caused by the large hoppings, but by smaller hoppings along b ∗ between p x and p y WFs. Without these small hoppings, the band just above ε F is dispersionless along Γ-Z.\n\n## IV. RESPONSE TO CHANGES\n\n## A. Electron-ion coupling\n\nA deformation potential D is the shift in an energy band with respect to sublattice atomic displacement. One can freeze in phonon modes to calculate deformation potentials, which at the FS are directly connected to electron-phonon matrix elements. 30\n\nMoving the Si atoms in the z direction by ± 1% of the experimental parameter, such that the tetrahedra surrounding the Al atoms stretch or flatten (while remaining centered on Al), gives an average\n\nFIG. 5: (Color online.) Isosurface of the WFs for (a) Si 3 p x and (b) Si 3 p z . Na atoms are large and yellow (light) colored, Si atoms are small and blue (dark) colored. The two colors of the isosurface represent different signs. (c) The tight-binding fatbands band structure described in the text for the WFs, compared to the DFT band structure (black lines).\n\nFIG. 5: (Color online.) Isosurface of the WFs for (a) Si 3 p x and (b) Si 3 p z . Na atoms are large and yellow (light) colored, Si atoms are small and blue (dark) colored. The two colors of the isosurface represent different signs. (c) The tight-binding fatbands band structure described in the text for the WFs, compared to the DFT band structure (black lines).\n\n6\n\nTABLE I: Selected hopping integrals in meV for the Si 3 p WFs along the vectors a = ( a, 0 0) (hopping within a , Si layer), b = ( a/ , a/ 2 2 , d ) (hopping across an Al layer), and b ∗ = ( a/ , a/ 2 2 , c -d ) (hopping across a Na layer). d is the distance in the z direction between Si atoms above and below Al planes.\n\nFIG. 6: (Color online.) Comparison of band structures near ε F for different z Si values.\n\nFIG. 6: (Color online.) Comparison of band structures near ε F for different z Si values.\n\ndeformation potential of ∼ 0.8 eV/ ˚ over five band A positions near the Fermi level. The largest shift is for the ellipsoidal electron pockets, with D ∼ 1 2 . eV/˚. These ellipsoids disappear when the Si atoms A are displaced toward the Al plane (see Fig. 6).\n\nFlattening the Na bilayer, so as to remove the buckling of the Na atoms, requires a (very large) 12% change in the z component of the Na atoms. We chose such a large displacement because we do not expect a substantial deformation potential for Na movement. Even this large displacement does not alter very much the valence bands, as expected, and the hole FSs remain virtually unchanged. The conduction bands at the Fermi level however shift appreciably, resulting in a modulation of the electron ellipsoids along (1,1) near M. In addition, the accidental four-band near-degeneracy that is 0.5 eV above ε F at M splits the two separate doubly-degenerate states, opening up a gap of ∼ 0.7 eV, which is equivalent to a deformation potential of ∼ 0.8 eV/ ˚ (but A", + "recall": 0.8884892086330936, + "true_md": "tion on the central Si. The largest contribution to near-neighbor hopping in the Al-Si plane between p$_{z}$ and p$_{x}$ or p$_{z}$ is most likely due to this ring structure, as the p lobes are confined to the inside of a square of near-neighbor Al atoms, which are only edge shar- ing with the nearest Si atoms along b vectors. This is the likely reason that all the hoppings along b are approximately of the same magnitude. The disper- sion which creates the FSs along Γ-Z (seen in Fig. 4) is composed only of the p$_{x}$ and p$_{y}$ WFs. This is not caused by the large hoppings, but by smaller hoppings along b ∗ between p$_{x}$ and p$_{y}$ WFs. With- out these small hoppings, the band just above ε$_{F}$ is dispersionless along Γ-Z.\n\nA deformation potential D is the shift in an en- ergy band with respect to sublattice atomic displace- ment. One can freeze in phonon modes to calculate deformation potentials, which at the FS are directly connected to electron-phonon matrix elements. 30\n\nMoving the Si atoms in the z direction by ± 1% of the experimental parameter, such that the tetra- hedra surrounding the Al atoms stretch or flatten (while remaining centered on Al), gives an average\n\ndeformation potential of ∼ 0.8 eV/ ˚ A over five band positions near the Fermi level. The largest shift is for the ellipsoidal electron pockets, with D ∼ 1 . 2 eV/ ˚ A. These ellipsoids disappear when the Si atoms are displaced toward the Al plane (see Fig. 6).\n\nFlattening the Na bilayer, so as to remove the buckling of the Na atoms, requires a (very large) 12% change in the z component of the Na atoms. We chose such a large displacement because we do not expect a substantial deformation potential for Na movement. Even this large displacement does not alter very much the valence bands, as expected, and the hole FSs remain virtually unchanged. The con- duction bands at the Fermi level however shift appre- ciably, resulting in a modulation of the electron el- lipsoids along (1,1) near M. In addition, the acciden- tal four-band near-degeneracy that is 0.5 eV above ε$_{F}$ at M splits the two separate doubly-degenerate states, opening up a gap of ∼ 0.7 eV, which is equiv- alent to a deformation potential of ∼ 0.8 eV/ ˚ A (but\n\n6\n\nTABLE I: Selected hopping integrals in meV for the Si 3 p WFs along the vectors a = ( a, 0 , 0) (hopping within a Si layer), b = ( a/ 2 , a/ 2 , d ) (hopping across an Al layer), and b ∗ = ( a/ 2 , a/ 2 , c − d ) (hopping across a Na layer). d is the distance in the z direction between Si atoms above and below Al planes.\n\nFIG. 6: (Color online.) Comparison of band structures near ε F for different z Si values.\n\nFIG. 5: (Color online.) Isosurface of the WFs for (a) Si 3 p x and (b) Si 3 p z . Na atoms are large and yellow (light) colored, Si atoms are small and blue (dark) col- ored. The two colors of the isosurface represent different signs. (c) The tight-binding fatbands band structure de- scribed in the text for the WFs, compared to the DFT band structure (black lines).\n\n## IV. RESPONSE TO CHANGES\n\n## A. Electron-ion coupling" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7578534070663527, + "doc_id": "c1d61a3ce92865964eb6cfb53c28a34643512d90d00fdaeb305345cd88a95097", + "edit_distance": 0.6282051282051282, + "f1_score": 0.927710843373494, + "meteor": 0.6680533259861285, + "precision": 0.9649122807017544, + "pred_md": "measurements were performed on beamline I06 at the Diamond Light Source, and on beamline 4.0.2 at the Advanced Light Source. Total-electron yield (TEY) and fluorescence yield (FY) were monitored simultaneously using the sample drain current and the photocurrent of a diode mounted at 90 · to the incident beam, respectively.\n\nSQUID magnetometry measurements were first performed on control Fe/GaAs(001) and (Ga,Mn)As/GaAs(001) samples, grown under the same conditions as the bilayers, to determine the magnetic anisotropies of the individual layers and the Curie temperature of the (Ga,Mn)As layer. The Fe film has a uniaxial magnetic anisotropy with easy axis along the [110] orientation, similar to previous studies 6 . For the (Ga,Mn)As control sample, there is a competition between cubic and uniaxial magnetic anisotropies, with the former dominant at low temperatures and favoring easy axes along the in-plane 〈 100 〉 orientations, and the latter dominant close to T C ( ∼ 35 K) giving an easy axis along the [1 ¯ 0] orientation. 1 Figure 1 shows [110] magnetization versus temperature curves and low temperature hysteresis loops for a bilayer film containing a 20 nm thick (Ga,Mn)As layer. The total remnant moment of the bilayer film decreases on cooling under zero magnetic field below the T C of the (Ga,Mn)As, indicating that this layer aligns antiparallel to the Fe magnetization at zero field. The hysteresis curve shows a two-step magnetization reversal, indicating different behavior of the Fe and (Ga,Mn)As layers, with the smaller loop attributed to the dilute moment (Ga,Mn)As film. The minor hysteresis loop shown in Fig. 1 clearly shows a shift from zero field by a bias field H E , indicating that the Fe layer induces an exchange bias in the magnetic semiconductor. The shape and size of the minor loop is in agreement with the hysteresis loop for the control (Ga,Mn)As sample, also shown in Fig. 1. This strongly indicates that the exchange bias affects the whole of the (Ga,Mn)As layer in the bilayer sample.\n\nSimilar behavior is observed for bilayer samples containing a 10 nm or 50 nm (Ga,Mn)As layer, with a bias field which is approximately inversely proportional to the thickness d of the ferromagnetic semiconductor layer (Fig. 1, inset). This 1/ d dependence of H E was found previously for MnAs/(Ga,Mn)As bilayers , 4 and is generally observed in exchanged-biased thin films 12 . From this dependence it is possible to describe the exchange bias in terms of an interface energy per unit area, ∆ E = M FS H d E = 0 003 erg/cm . . 2 This value is rather small compared to typical exchange bias systems 12 , reflecting the low moment density M FS of the diluted FM semiconductor layer. However, the bias field for a given (Ga,Mn)As thickness is larger than is observed for MnO/(Ga,Mn)As structures 13 , while the reproducibility and flexibility of the present structures is much higher due to the single-crystalline ferromagnetic nature of the Fe layer.\n\nTo confirm the presence of AFM interlayer coupling, we performed XMCD measurements at the Mn and Fe\n\n2\n\nL 2 3 , absorption edges in order to determine the magnetic response of the individual elements. In L 2 3 , XMCD, electrons are excited from a 2 p core level to the unoccupied 3 d valence states of the element of interest by circularly polarized x-rays at the resonance energies of the transitions. The difference in absorption for opposite polarizations gives a direct and element-specific measurement of the projection of the 3 d magnetic moment along the xray polarization vector. The absorption cross-section is conventionally obtained by measuring the decay products - either fluorescent x-rays or electrons - of the photoexcited core hole. The type of decay product measured determines the probing depth of the technique. For Mn L 2 3 , absorption, the probing depths for FY and TEY detection are λ FY ≈ 100 nm and λ TEY ≈ 3 nm. In the current experiment, the Mn XMCD measured using FY and TEY are thus sensitive to the bulk of the (Ga,Mn)As film and the near-interface layers, respectively.\n\nFigure 2(a)-(c) shows the magnetic field dependence of XMCD asymmetry, defined as ( I l -I r ) / I ( l + I r ) where I l ( r ) is the absorption for left- (right-) circularly polarized x-rays. This is measured at the Fe and Mn L 3 absorption peaks for a Fe(2 nm)/(Ga,Mn)As(10 nm) sample at 2 K. The external field is applied along the photon incidence direction, which is at 70 · to the surface normal with an in-plane projection along the [110] axis. The XMCD data show that the Fe film displays a square hysteresis loop with a single magnetization switch, as expected for a monocrystalline Fe film with strong uniaxial magnetic anisotropy. The Mn XMCD shows a more complicated loop due to the effect of the interlayer coupling. The projected Mn moment aligns antiparallel to the Fe moment at remanence, and undergoes a magnetization reversal of opposite sign to the Fe. With further increase of the external magnetic field, the Mn moment gradually rotates away from antiparallel alignment with the Fe layer, and into the field direction. Qualitatively similar behavior is observed for the Fe(2 nm)/(Ga,Mn)As(20 nm) sample: the (Ga,Mn)As layer is aligned antiparallel to the Fe layer at zero field, although the bias field is lower by approximately a factor of two.\n\nClear differences are observed between the Mn XMCD hysteresis loops obtained using TEY and FY detection modes. For FY the magnitude of the XMCD is similar (but of opposite sign) at remanence and at high magnetic fields, whereas for TEY at remanence it is approximately a factor of two larger than at 1000 Oe. The Mn L 2 3 , XMCD spectra recorded at remanence and at 1000 Oe, shown in Fig. 3, confirm this result. At remanence the FY and TEY detected XMCD have similar magnitudes. However, under a large external field the XMCD is substantially smaller in TEY than in FY, confirming that the net magnetization of the Mn ions near the interface is significantly less than in the bulk of the (Ga,Mn)As film. This is the case even up to the highest field applied (20 kOe). By applying the XMCD sum rules 14 to the TEY data, and by comparing the spectra to previous measurements on well-characterized (Ga,Mn)As", + "recall": 0.8932714617169374, + "true_md": "2\n\nL$_{2}$$\\_{,}$$_{3}$ absorption edges in order to determine the magnetic response of the individual elements. In L$_{2}$$\\_{,}$$_{3}$ XMCD, elec- trons are excited from a 2 p core level to the unoccupied 3 d valence states of the element of interest by circularly polarized x-rays at the resonance energies of the transi- tions. The difference in absorption for opposite polariza- tions gives a direct and element-specific measurement of the projection of the 3 d magnetic moment along the x- ray polarization vector. The absorption cross-section is conventionally obtained by measuring the decay products – either fluorescent x-rays or electrons – of the photoex- cited core hole. The type of decay product measured determines the probing depth of the technique. For Mn L$_{2}$$\\_{,}$$_{3}$ absorption, the probing depths for FY and TEY de- tection are λ$_{FY}$ ≈ 100 nm and λ$_{TEY}$ ≈ 3 nm. In the current experiment, the Mn XMCD measured using FY and TEY are thus sensitive to the bulk of the (Ga,Mn)As film and the near-interface layers, respectively.\n\nmeasurements were performed on beamline I06 at the Diamond Light Source, and on beamline 4.0.2 at the Ad- vanced Light Source. Total-electron yield (TEY) and fluorescence yield (FY) were monitored simultaneously using the sample drain current and the photocurrent of a diode mounted at 90 ◦ to the incident beam, respectively.\n\nSQUID magnetometry measurements were first performed on control Fe/GaAs(001) and (Ga,Mn)As/GaAs(001) samples, grown under the same conditions as the bilayers, to determine the magnetic anisotropies of the individual layers and the Curie temperature of the (Ga,Mn)As layer. The Fe film has a uniaxial magnetic anisotropy with easy axis along the [110] orientation, similar to previous studies $^{6}$. For the (Ga,Mn)As control sample, there is a competition between cubic and uniaxial magnetic anisotropies, with the former dominant at low temperatures and favoring easy axes along the in-plane 〈 100 〉 orientations, and the latter dominant close to T$_{C}$ ( ∼ 35 K) giving an easy axis along the [1 ¯ 10] orientation. Figure 1 shows [110] magne- tization versus temperature curves and low temperature hysteresis loops for a bilayer film containing a 20 nm thick (Ga,Mn)As layer. The total remnant moment of the bilayer film decreases on cooling under zero magnetic field below the T$_{C}$ of the (Ga,Mn)As, indicating that this layer aligns antiparallel to the Fe magnetization at zero field. The hysteresis curve shows a two-step magnetization reversal, indicating different behavior of the Fe and (Ga,Mn)As layers, with the smaller loop attributed to the dilute moment (Ga,Mn)As film. The minor hysteresis loop shown in Fig. 1 clearly shows a shift from zero field by a bias field H$_{E}$ , indicating that the Fe layer induces an exchange bias in the magnetic semiconductor. The shape and size of the minor loop is in agreement with the hysteresis loop for the control (Ga,Mn)As sample, also shown in Fig. 1. This strongly indicates that the exchange bias affects the whole of the (Ga,Mn)As layer in the bilayer sample.\n\nFigure 2(a)-(c) shows the magnetic field dependence of XMCD asymmetry, defined as ( I$_{l}$ − I$_{r}$ ) / ( I$_{l}$ + I$_{r}$ ) where I$_{l}$$\\_{(}$$_{r}$$\\_{)}$ is the absorption for left- (right-) circularly polarized x-rays. This is measured at the Fe and Mn L$\\_{3}$ absorption peaks for a Fe(2 nm)/(Ga,Mn)As(10 nm) sample at 2 K. The external field is applied along the photon incidence direction, which is at 70 ◦ to the surface normal with an in-plane projection along the [110] axis. The XMCD data show that the Fe film displays a square hysteresis loop with a single magnetization switch, as expected for a monocrystalline Fe film with strong uniaxial magnetic anisotropy. The Mn XMCD shows a more complicated loop due to the effect of the interlayer coupling. The pro- jected Mn moment aligns antiparallel to the Fe moment at remanence, and undergoes a magnetization reversal of opposite sign to the Fe. With further increase of the ex- ternal magnetic field, the Mn moment gradually rotates away from antiparallel alignment with the Fe layer, and into the field direction. Qualitatively similar behavior is observed for the Fe(2 nm)/(Ga,Mn)As(20 nm) sam- ple: the (Ga,Mn)As layer is aligned antiparallel to the Fe layer at zero field, although the bias field is lower by approximately a factor of two.\n\nSimilar behavior is observed for bilayer samples con- taining a 10 nm or 50 nm (Ga,Mn)As layer, with a bias field which is approximately inversely proportional to the thickness d of the ferromagnetic semiconductor layer (Fig. 1, inset). This 1/ d dependence of H$_{E}$ was found previously for MnAs/(Ga,Mn)As bilayers $^{4}$, and is generally observed in exchanged-biased thin films $^{12}$. From this dependence it is possible to describe the ex- change bias in terms of an interface energy per unit area, Δ E = M$_{FS}$H$_{E}$d = 0 . 003 erg/cm $^{2}$. This value is rather small compared to typical exchange bias systems $^{12}$, re- flecting the low moment density M$_{FS}$ of the diluted FM semiconductor layer. However, the bias field for a given (Ga,Mn)As thickness is larger than is observed for MnO/(Ga,Mn)As structures $^{13}$, while the reproducibility and flexibility of the present structures is much higher due to the single-crystalline ferromagnetic nature of the Fe layer.\n\nClear differences are observed between the Mn XMCD hysteresis loops obtained using TEY and FY detection modes. For FY the magnitude of the XMCD is similar (but of opposite sign) at remanence and at high mag- netic fields, whereas for TEY at remanence it is approx- imately a factor of two larger than at 1000 Oe. The Mn L$_{2}$$\\_{,}$$_{3}$ XMCD spectra recorded at remanence and at 1000 Oe, shown in Fig. 3, confirm this result. At re- manence the FY and TEY detected XMCD have similar magnitudes. However, under a large external field the XMCD is substantially smaller in TEY than in FY, con- firming that the net magnetization of the Mn ions near the interface is significantly less than in the bulk of the (Ga,Mn)As film. This is the case even up to the high- est field applied (20 kOe). By applying the XMCD sum rules 14 to the TEY data, and by comparing the spectra to previous measurements on well-characterized (Ga,Mn)As\n\nTo confirm the presence of AFM interlayer coupling, we performed XMCD measurements at the Mn and Fe" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6928855531471794, + "doc_id": "3a4f72a276b77022dd32f559ef1016548c35295c5034f3aa9e04431d641c2769", + "edit_distance": 0.6729810568295115, + "f1_score": 0.9131121642969984, + "meteor": 0.6130518121924583, + "precision": 0.932258064516129, + "pred_md": "FIG. 9: ∆ W vs the cut-off for the EB model. It remains negative for larger cut-offs. Parameters are the same as before. The dot indicates the value of ∆ W ( ∞ ) = ∆ W K\n\nFIG. 9: ∆ W vs the cut-off for the EB model. It remains negative for larger cut-offs. Parameters are the same as before. The dot indicates the value of ∆ W ( ∞ ) = ∆ W K\n\nof the lattice (the dashed line in Fig. 9).\n\n## C. Marginal Fermi liquid model\n\nFor their analysis of the optical integral, Norman and P' epin 30 introduced a phenomenological model for the self energy which fits normal state scattering rate measurements by ARPES 41 . It constructs the NS Σ ( '' ω ) out of two contributions - impurity scattering and electronelectron scattering which they approximated phenomenologically by the marginal Fermi liquid form of αω at small frequencies 6 (MFLI model). The total Σ '' is\n\n\n\nwhere ω sat is about ∼ 1 2 of the bandwidth, and f ( x ) ≈ 1 for x < 1 and decreases for x > 1. In Ref 30 f ( x ) was assumed to scale as 1 /x at large x such that Σ '' is flat at large ω . The real part of Σ( ω ) is obtained from KramersKronig relations. For the superconducting state, they obtained Σ '' by cutting off the NS expression on the lower end at some frequency ω 1 (the analog of ω 0 +∆ that we had for EB model):\n\n\n\nwhere Θ( x ) is the step function. In reality, Σ '' which fits ARPESin the NS has some angular dependence along the Fermi surface 42 , but this was ignored for simplicity. This model had gained a lot of attention as it predicted the optical sum in the SCS to be larger than in the NS, i.e., ∆ W > 0 at large frequencies. This would be consistent with the experimental findings in Refs. 8,9 if, indeed, one identifies ∆ W measured up to 1eV with ∆ W K .\n\nWe will show below that the sign of ∆ W in the MFLI model actually depends on how the normal state results are extended to the superconducting state and, moreover, will argue that ∆ W K is actually negative if the extension is done such that at α = 0 the results are consistent with\n\n8\n\nBCSI model. However, before that, we show in Figs 1012 the conductivities and the optical integrals for the original MFLI model.\n\nσ ω\n\nFIG. 10: Top -the conductivities in the NS and SCS in the original MFLI model of Ref.30. We set Γ = 70 meV , α = 0 75, . ∆ = 32 meV , ω 1 = 71 meV . Note that σ ' ( ω ) in the SCS begins at Ω = ∆ + ω 1 . Bottom - the behavior of W K with Γ.\n\nFIG. 10: Top -the conductivities in the NS and SCS in the original MFLI model of Ref.30. We set Γ = 70 meV , α = 0 75, . ∆ = 32 meV , ω 1 = 71 meV . Note that σ ' ( ω ) in the SCS begins at Ω = ∆ + ω 1 . Bottom - the behavior of W K with Γ.\n\nIn Fig 10 we plot the conductivities in the NS and the SCS and Kubo sums W K vs Γ at α = 0 75 showing that . the spectral weight in the SCS is indeed larger than in the NS. In Fig 11 we show the behavior of the optical sums W ω ( c ) in NS and SCS. The observation here is that only ∼ 75 -80%of the Kubo sum is recovered up to the scale of the bandwidth implying that there is indeed a significant spectral weight well beyond the bandwidth. And in Fig 12 we show the behavior of ∆ W w ( c ). We see that it does not change sign and remain positive at all ω c , very much unlike the BCS case. Comparing the behavior of W w ( c ) with and without a lattice (solid and dashed lines in Fig. 12) we see that the 'finite bandwidth effect' just shifts the curve in the positive direction. We also see that the solid line flattens above roughly half of the bandwidth, i.e., at these frequencies ∆ W ω ( c ) ≈ ∆ W K . Still, we found that ∆ W continues going down even above the bandwidth and truly saturates only at about 2 eV (not shown in the figure) supporting the idea that there is 'more' left to recover from higher frequencies.\n\nThe rationale for ∆ W K > 0 in the original MFLI model has been provided in Ref. 30. They argued that this is closely linked to the absence of quasiparticle peaks in the NS and their restoration in the SCS state because the phase space for quasiparticle scattering at low energies is smaller in a superconductor than in a normal state.", + "recall": 0.8947368421052632, + "true_md": "8\n\nBCSI model. However, before that, we show in Figs 10- 12 the conductivities and the optical integrals for the original MFLI model.\n\nFIG. 9: Δ W vs the cut-off for the EB model. It remains neg- ative for larger cut-offs. Parameters are the same as before. The dot indicates the value of Δ W $^{(}$∞) = Δ W K\n\nof the lattice (the dashed line in Fig. 9).\n\nFor their analysis of the optical integral, Norman and P´ epin 30 introduced a phenomenological model for the self energy which fits normal state scattering rate measure- ments by ARPES $^{41}$. It constructs the NS Σ $^{′′}$( ω ) out of two contributions - impurity scattering and electron- electron scattering which they approximated phenomeno- logically by the marginal Fermi liquid form of αω at small frequencies 6 (MFLI model). The total Σ ′′ is\n\nwhere ω$_{sat}$ is about ∼ 1 2 of the bandwidth, and f ( x ) ≈ 1 for x < 1 and decreases for x > 1. In Ref 30 f ( x ) was assumed to scale as 1 /x at large x such that Σ ′′ is flat at large ω . The real part of Σ( ω ) is obtained from Kramers- Kr¨ onig relations. For the superconducting state, they obtained Σ ′′ by cutting off the NS expression on the lower end at some frequency ω$_{1}$ (the analog of ω$_{0}$ + Δ that we had for EB model):\n\nWe will show below that the sign of Δ W in the MFLI model actually depends on how the normal state results are extended to the superconducting state and, moreover, will argue that Δ W$_{K}$ is actually negative if the extension is done such that at α = 0 the results are consistent with\n\nThe rationale for Δ W$_{K}$ > 0 in the original MFLI model has been provided in Ref. 30. They argued that this is closely linked to the absence of quasiparticle peaks in the NS and their restoration in the SCS state because the phase space for quasiparticle scattering at low ener- gies is smaller in a superconductor than in a normal state.\n\nIn Fig 10 we plot the conductivities in the NS and the SCS and Kubo sums W$_{K}$ vs Γ at α = 0 . 75 showing that the spectral weight in the SCS is indeed larger than in the NS. In Fig 11 we show the behavior of the optical sums W ( ω$_{c}$ ) in NS and SCS. The observation here is that only ∼ 75 − 80% of the Kubo sum is recovered up to the scale of the bandwidth implying that there is indeed a significant spectral weight well beyond the bandwidth. And in Fig 12 we show the behavior of Δ W ( w$_{c}$ ). We see that it does not change sign and remain positive at all ω$_{c}$ , very much unlike the BCS case. Comparing the behavior of W ( w$_{c}$ ) with and without a lattice (solid and dashed lines in Fig. 12) we see that the ‘finite bandwidth effect’ just shifts the curve in the positive direction. We also see that the solid line flattens above roughly half of the bandwidth, i.e., at these frequencies Δ W ( ω$_{c}$ ) ≈ Δ W$_{K}$ . Still, we found that Δ W continues going down even above the bandwidth and truly saturates only at about 2 eV (not shown in the figure) supporting the idea that there is ‘more’ left to recover from higher frequencies.\n\nFIG. 10: Top –the conductivities in the NS and SCS in the original MFLI model of Ref.30. We set Γ = 70 meV , α = 0 . 75, Δ = 32 meV , ω 1 = 71 meV . Note that σ $^{′}$( ω ) in the SCS begins at Ω = Δ + ω 1 . Bottom – the behavior of W K with Γ.\n\n$$Σ ′′ ( ω ) = Γ + α | ω | f ( ω ω$_{sat}$ ) (17)$$\n\n$$Σ ′′ ( ω ) = (Γ + α | ω | )Θ( | ω | − ω$_{1}$ ) (18)$$\n\nwhere Θ( x ) is the step function. In reality, Σ ′′ which fits ARPES in the NS has some angular dependence along the Fermi surface $^{42}$, but this was ignored for simplicity. This model had gained a lot of attention as it predicted the optical sum in the SCS to be larger than in the NS, i.e., Δ W > 0 at large frequencies. This would be consistent with the experimental findings in Refs. 8,9 if, indeed, one identifies Δ W measured up to 1eV with Δ W$_{K}$ .\n\n## C. Marginal Fermi liquid model" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7067346648798624, + "doc_id": "436bddb2154aec082c7c12af1227b3192a3c0f467f230f7690ecc722be8a1be9", + "edit_distance": 0.6248830682881198, + "f1_score": 0.9147869674185465, + "meteor": 0.7756875316007685, + "precision": 0.9455958549222798, + "pred_md": "6\n\nFigure 6: Dynamics of formation of 'chemotactic patterns' in 2D, starting from a single small bacterial droplet in the middle of the simulation sample. Top row: Formation of 'chemotactic rings' in a system with α = 0 1, . λ = 0 33, and . κ = 0 001. The . simulation box has size 40 × 40. The snapshots correspond to times equal to (in simulation units, from left to right) 10, 50, 100 and 270. Bottom row: Breakage of 'rings' into 'dots'. The four snapshots correspond to the time evolution of a system with α = 0 1, . λ = 0 26, and . κ = 0 001. . We show a 40 × 40 fraction of the simulation box, with the boundaries far away and not affecting the pattern. The snapshots correspond to times equal to (in simulation units, from left to right) 10, 70, 290 and 1220.\n\nFigure 6: Dynamics of formation of 'chemotactic patterns' in 2D, starting from a single small bacterial droplet in the middle of the simulation sample. Top row: Formation of 'chemotactic rings' in a system with α = 0 1, . λ = 0 33, and . κ = 0 001. The . simulation box has size 40 × 40. The snapshots correspond to times equal to (in simulation units, from left to right) 10, 50, 100 and 270. Bottom row: Breakage of 'rings' into 'dots'. The four snapshots correspond to the time evolution of a system with α = 0 1, . λ = 0 26, and . κ = 0 001. . We show a 40 × 40 fraction of the simulation box, with the boundaries far away and not affecting the pattern. The snapshots correspond to times equal to (in simulation units, from left to right) 10, 70, 290 and 1220.\n\ninteractions between bacteria that are nonlocal in both space and time. It is not clear whether such nonlocality is essential for the chemotactic models in [5, 6] or if fast-variables approximations and gradient expansions would reduce these models (which invole between 9 and 12 parameters) into Eq.[1]. In this case, we would still have in Eq.[1] a highly economical model for chemotactic pattern-formation organisms, possibly with a different interpretation of D e and κ .\n\nAlternatively, the success of our local model for these chemotactic organisms might be largely coincidental. But in that case, such a sparse model should be easily falsified, for instance by using the linear stability analysis to relate the typical length scale of the patterns to microbial parameters. This length scale is of order 2 π/q c = 2 π √ |D | e /α , with |D | glyph[similarequal] e D , a typical bacterial diffusion coefficient ( D ∼ O (100 µ m s 2 -1 ) for E. coli [22]). Using the previously quoted growth rate α glyph[similarequal] 1 hr -1 , we get a ring separation of ∼ 1 mm, in order-of-magnitude agreement with the experimental value [5]. This test could perhaps be sharpened usefully by altering the growing medium so as to change α .\n\nMore generally, our analysis of Eq. (1) shows that the main prerequisite for pattern formation, assuming the presence the logistic growth term, is negativity of the effective diffusion constant D e . For run-and-tumble dynamics, D e < 0 was shown to arise for a sufficiently strong decay of swim-speed with density; it does so because spatial variations in the true diffusivity D ρ ( ) create a drift flux ρV = -ρD ' ( ρ ) ∇ ρ/ 2 which can overcompensate the true diffusive flux -D ∇ ρ [15]. Negative D e could, however, equally arise for any density dependent nonequilibrium diffusion process. Indeed, the principle of detailed balance, which holds only for equilibrium systems, leads to the Einstein relation, that D = k B Tµ\n\nwith D a many-body diffusivity and µ the corresponding mobility. This alone ensures that no drift velocity can arise purely from gradients in D . In nonequilbrium systems, one should expect generically to find such drift velocities, and the run-and-tumble model is merely one instance of this. Accordingly one can expect in principle to find cases of negative D e in other microorganisms showing distinctly different forms of density-dependent self-propulsion.\n\nTo summarize, we have studied the dynamics of a system of reproducing and interacting run-and-tumble bacteria, in the case where interactions lead to a decreasing local swim speed with increasing local density. We have thereby identified a potentially generic mechanism for pattern formation in which an instability towards phase separation, caused by the tendency for bacteria to move slowly where they are numerous, is arrested by the birth and death dynamics of bacterial populations. We have shown that these two ingredients alone are enough to capture many of the patterns observed experimentally in bacterial colonies - including some that have only previously been explained using far more complex models involving specific chemotactic mechanisms. Indeed, if motility decreases steeply enough with density, then a spatially homogeneous bacterial population becomes unstable to density fluctuations leading to the formation of bands (1D) or droplets (2D). The length scale of the resulting pattern is set by a balance between diffusion-drift fluxes and the logistic relaxation of the population density towards its fixed-point value. Starting instead from a small initial droplet of bacteria, we predict the formation of concentric rings, each of which may eventually further separate into droplets.\n\nIn several well studied systems, such characteristic patterns are (with good reason) believed to be the direct", + "recall": 0.8859223300970874, + "true_md": "6\n\nFigure 6: Dynamics of formation of ”chemotactic patterns” in 2D, starting from a single small bacterial droplet in the middle of the simulation sample. Top row: Formation of ”chemotactic rings” in a system with α = 0 . 1, λ = 0 . 33, and κ = 0 . 001. The simulation box has size 40 × 40. The snapshots correspond to times equal to (in simulation units, from left to right) 10, 50, 100 and 270. Bottom row: Breakage of ”rings” into ”dots”. The four snapshots correspond to the time evolution of a system with α = 0 . 1, λ = 0 . 26, and κ = 0 . 001. We show a 40 × 40 fraction of the simulation box, with the boundaries far away and not affecting the pattern. The snapshots correspond to times equal to (in simulation units, from left to right) 10, 70, 290 and 1220.\n\nwith D a many-body diffusivity and µ the correspond- ing mobility. This alone ensures that no drift velocity can arise purely from gradients in D . In nonequilbrium systems, one should expect generically to find such drift velocities, and the run-and-tumble model is merely one instance of this. Accordingly one can expect in princi- ple to find cases of negative D$_{e}$ in other microorganisms showing distinctly different forms of density-dependent self-propulsion.\n\ninteractions between bacteria that are nonlocal in both space and time. It is not clear whether such nonlocal- ity is essential for the chemotactic models in [5, 6] or if fast-variables approximations and gradient expansions would reduce these models (which invole between 9 and 12 parameters) into Eq.[1]. In this case, we would still have in Eq.[1] a highly economical model for chemotac- tic pattern-formation organisms, possibly with a different interpretation of D$_{e}$ and κ .\n\nAlternatively, the success of our local model for these chemotactic organisms might be largely coincidental. But in that case, such a sparse model should be easily falsified, for instance by using the linear stability anal- ysis to relate the typical length scale of the patterns to microbial parameters. This length scale is of order 2 π/q$_{c}$ = 2 π $^{√}$| D$_{e}$| /α , with |D$_{e}$| ≃ D , a typical bacterial diffusion coefficient ( D ∼ O (100 µ m $^{2}$s − $^{1}$) for E. coli [22]). Using the previously quoted growth rate α ≃ 1 hr − $^{1}$, we get a ring separation of ∼ 1 mm, in order-of-magnitude agreement with the experimental value [5]. This test could perhaps be sharpened usefully by altering the grow- ing medium so as to change α .\n\nTo summarize, we have studied the dynamics of a sys- tem of reproducing and interacting run-and-tumble bac- teria, in the case where interactions lead to a decreasing local swim speed with increasing local density. We have thereby identified a potentially generic mechanism for pattern formation in which an instability towards phase separation, caused by the tendency for bacteria to move slowly where they are numerous, is arrested by the birth and death dynamics of bacterial populations. We have shown that these two ingredients alone are enough to capture many of the patterns observed experimentally in bacterial colonies – including some that have only pre- viously been explained using far more complex models involving specific chemotactic mechanisms. Indeed, if motility decreases steeply enough with density, then a spatially homogeneous bacterial population becomes un- stable to density fluctuations leading to the formation of bands (1D) or droplets (2D). The length scale of the re- sulting pattern is set by a balance between diffusion-drift fluxes and the logistic relaxation of the population den- sity towards its fixed-point value. Starting instead from a small initial droplet of bacteria, we predict the formation of concentric rings, each of which may eventually further separate into droplets.\n\nMore generally, our analysis of Eq. (1) shows that the main prerequisite for pattern formation, assuming the presence the logistic growth term, is negativity of the effective diffusion constant D$_{e}$ . For run-and-tumble dy- namics, D$_{e}$ < 0 was shown to arise for a sufficiently strong decay of swim-speed with density; it does so be- cause spatial variations in the true diffusivity D ( ρ ) cre- ate a drift flux ρV = − ρD $^{′}$( ρ ) ∇ ρ/ 2 which can overcom- pensate the true diffusive flux − D ∇ ρ [15]. Negative D$_{e}$ could, however, equally arise for any density dependent nonequilibrium diffusion process. Indeed, the principle of detailed balance, which holds only for equilibrium sys- tems, leads to the Einstein relation, that D = k$_{B}$T µ\n\nIn several well studied systems, such characteristic pat- terns are (with good reason) believed to be the direct" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6973675492623475, + "doc_id": "ca2a10b0d150cf45adb4954b815cc8801788b81b684ed4bfb0ea596bebb11b4b", + "edit_distance": 0.3228346456692913, + "f1_score": 0.9158345221112697, + "meteor": 0.7468183504359025, + "precision": 0.9469026548672567, + "pred_md": "the bands are not at ε F ).\n\n## B. Magnetic susceptibility\n\nThe magnetic spin susceptibility χ is given by\n\n\n\nFixed-spin-moment calculations were conducted to produce an energy-vs.-moment E M ( ) curve, resulting in a susceptibility of χ = 2 93 . µ 2 B eV -1 , or 3 76 . × 10 -6 emu/mol. This is the exchange-enhanced susceptibility in the Stoner theory, and can be written as\n\n\n\nwhere S ≡ χ/χ 0 is the Stoner enhancement factor, I is the Stoner parameter, and the bare Pauli susceptibility χ 0 is equal to µ 2 B N ε ( F ). Janak has shown how to calculate I within density functional theory, 31 which must be equivalent (within a minor approximation he used) to our approach of using fixed-spin-moment calculations.\n\nWith our calculated values we obtain S = 2 75, . which translates to I = 0 60 eV. Some interpreta-. tion of this value of Stoner I should be noted. First, ε F falls where most of the states are Si-derived, so for simplicity we neglect Al (and Na, which is ionized). Second, we note that there are two Si atoms in the primitive cell. Thus to get an 'atomic value' of I Si , we should use a value of N ε ( F ) / 2 per Si atom. The result then is very roughly I Si ∼ 1 eV. This value can be compared to the atomic value for Al (next to Si in the periodic table) in the elemental metal, which is I Al = 0.6 eV. 31 It seems, therefore, that Si in NaAlSi is considerably more 'magnetically inclined' than is Al in aluminum. However, the Stoner enhancement overall is not large, indicating relatively modest magnetic enhancement and rather conventional magnitude of magnetic interactions.\n\n## C. Comparison to NaAlGe\n\nIsostructural and isovalent NaAlGe is not superconducting (above 1.6 K, at least), so it should be instructive to compare its electronic structure to that of NaAlSi. Using its experimental lattice parameters, 23 we have calculated the band structure of NaAlGe, and compared it with that of NaAlSi on a rather fine scale in Fig. 7. The band structures are very similar, the one difference being that the band along Γ-M near M does not cross ε F in NaAlGe. The free-electron band is also identical.\n\n7\n\nSupposing the tiny bit of FS along Γ-M cannot account for the difference in superconducting behaviors, the factors relevant for electron-phonon coupling will be the difference in mass (Ge is more than twice as heavy as Si) and the difference in electronic character, which can affect force constants and electron-phonon matrix elements. A real possibility is that the pairing mechanism is electronic rather than phononic. In three dimensions purely electronic pairing mechanisms have been attracting serious study (by Sham and collaborators 32,33 for example), but 2D semimetals introduce new features that deserve detailed study.\n\nAnother possibility is that these pockets are important, and that superconductivity arises from an enhancement of electron-phonon coupling in these tiny electron pockets from low frequency electronic response, either interband transitions or plasma oscillations, or both. A model in which the electronic response of a 2D electronic superlattice plays a central role in the mechanism has been previously studied 34,35 using a model of parallel conducting sheets separated by a dielectric spacer. This model may be useful as a starting point for understanding NaAlSi.\n\n## V. DISCUSSION\n\nThe classes of materials that contain relatively high temperature superconductors 36 continues to expand. Superconductors derived from doped 2D semiconductors pose many of the most interesting issues in superconductivity today. The cuprates and the Fe-pnictides (and -chalcogenides) are strongly magnetic, and comprise one end of the spectrum (though they are themselves quite different). On\n\nFIG. 7: (Color online.) Blowup of the band structures of NaAlSi and NaAlGe near ε F .\n\nFIG. 7: (Color online.) Blowup of the band structures of NaAlSi and NaAlGe near ε F .", + "recall": 0.8867403314917127, + "true_md": "the bands are not at ε$_{F}$ ).\n\nThe magnetic spin susceptibility χ is given by\n\nFixed-spin-moment calculations were conducted to produce an energy-vs.-moment E ( M ) curve, result- ing in a susceptibility of χ = 2 . 93 µ 2 B eV $^{$\\_{−}$1}$, or 3 . 76 × 10 $_{−}$6 emu/mol. This is the exchange-enhanced susceptibility in the Stoner theory, and can be writ- ten as\n\nwhere S ≡ χ/χ$_{0}$ is the Stoner enhancement fac- tor, I is the Stoner parameter, and the bare Pauli susceptibility χ$_{0}$ is equal to µ 2 $_{B}$N ( ε$_{F}$ ). Janak has shown how to calculate I within density functional theory, 31 which must be equivalent (within a minor approximation he used) to our approach of using fixed-spin-moment calculations.\n\nWith our calculated values we obtain S = 2 . 75, which translates to I = 0 . 60 eV. Some interpreta- tion of this value of Stoner I should be noted. First, ε$_{F}$ falls where most of the states are Si-derived, so for simplicity we neglect Al (and Na, which is ion- ized). Second, we note that there are two Si atoms in the primitive cell. Thus to get an “atomic value” of I$_{Si}$ , we should use a value of N ( ε$_{F}$ ) / 2 per Si atom. The result then is very roughly I$_{Si}$ ∼ 1 eV. This value can be compared to the atomic value for Al (next to Si in the periodic table) in the elemental metal, which is I$_{Al}$ = 0.6 eV. 31 It seems, therefore, that Si in NaAlSi is considerably more “magneti- cally inclined” than is Al in aluminum. However, the Stoner enhancement overall is not large, indicating relatively modest magnetic enhancement and rather conventional magnitude of magnetic interactions.\n\nIsostructural and isovalent NaAlGe is not super- conducting (above 1.6 K, at least), so it should be instructive to compare its electronic structure to that of NaAlSi. Using its experimental lattice parameters, 23 we have calculated the band structure of NaAlGe, and compared it with that of NaAlSi on a rather fine scale in Fig. 7. The band structures are very similar, the one difference being that the band along Γ-M near M does not cross ε$_{F}$ in NaAlGe. The free-electron band is also identical.\n\nThe classes of materials that contain relatively high temperature superconductors 36 continues to expand. Superconductors derived from doped 2D semiconductors pose many of the most interesting issues in superconductivity today. The cuprates and the Fe-pnictides (and -chalcogenides) are strongly magnetic, and comprise one end of the spectrum (though they are themselves quite different). On\n\nSupposing the tiny bit of FS along Γ-M cannot account for the difference in superconducting behav- iors, the factors relevant for electron-phonon cou- pling will be the difference in mass (Ge is more than twice as heavy as Si) and the difference in elec- tronic character, which can affect force constants and electron-phonon matrix elements. A real pos- sibility is that the pairing mechanism is electronic rather than phononic. In three dimensions purely electronic pairing mechanisms have been attracting serious study (by Sham and collaborators 32,33 for ex- ample), but 2D semimetals introduce new features that deserve detailed study.\n\nAnother possibility is that these pockets are im- portant, and that superconductivity arises from an enhancement of electron-phonon coupling in these tiny electron pockets from low frequency electronic response, either interband transitions or plasma os- cillations, or both. A model in which the elec- tronic response of a 2D electronic superlattice plays a central role in the mechanism has been previously studied 34,35 using a model of parallel conducting sheets separated by a dielectric spacer. This model may be useful as a starting point for understanding NaAlSi.\n\n## V. DISCUSSION\n\n## B. Magnetic susceptibility\n\n$$χ = ∂M ∂H = ( ∂ $^{2}$E/∂M$^{2}$) $^{$_{−}$1}$.$$\n\n$$χ = Sχ$_{0}$ ≡ χ$_{0}$ 1 − IN ( ε$_{F}$ ) ,$$\n\n7\n\n## C. Comparison to NaAlGe\n\nFIG. 7: (Color online.) Blowup of the band structures of NaAlSi and NaAlGe near ε F ." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.682553853527557, + "doc_id": "bb8bf2bafdf8f8391bff635958bb9092e397875ab14800659f9e8db6ef886152", + "edit_distance": 0.5386158475426279, + "f1_score": 0.9230769230769229, + "meteor": 0.6176464269999584, + "precision": 0.974169741697417, + "pred_md": "FIG. 2: (color online) The angle θ as a function of the launch angle α for two different values of ε and their inverses.\n\nFIG. 2: (color online) The angle θ as a function of the launch angle α for two different values of ε and their inverses.\n\nin the review of referencei [2], is absent. Even when it is possible to write the locus in terms of y m ( x m ) this form does not shows the formal elegance of relation (13).\n\nNow we return to equation (10) since we need to solve explicitly it in order to have the function α θ ( m ). This task is not trivial since even when we approximate the rhs in expression (10) up to first order in ε ,\n\n\n\nthe inversion is not easy. A way to do the inversion is to expand in a Taylor series the rhs and then invert the series term by term.[9] Using Mathematica to perform this procedure up to O (18), we obtain as a result\n\n\n\nThe ε -independent terms had been resumated to yield arctan(2 tan θ ). However, the series does not converge for values in the argument larger than 1. The reason is the small convergence ratio for the Taylor expansion of arcsin( ). ·\n\nAn easier way to perform the inversion is to evaluate θ m ( α ) using Eq. (10) and plot the points ( θ m ( α , α ) ), the result is shown in figure 2. The result is in agreement with the plot of Eq. (17) up to its convergence ratio and it is not shown. Notice that this method is exact in the sense that we can obtain as many pair of numbers as we need, a function is, finally, a relation one to one between two sets of real numbers. Another result is to obtain the derivative dα/dθ , since it shall be needed in the following sections. To this end, we note that both functions increase monotonically and their derivatives are not zero, except at the interval end. Hence, we can use the inverse function theorem in order to obtain\n\n\n\n3\n\nFIG. 3: (color online) (a) First and (b) second derivatives of α as function of θ for various values of parameter ε . Note that major changes occur for θ < π/ 4.\n\nFIG. 3: (color online) (a) First and (b) second derivatives of α as function of θ for various values of parameter ε . Note that major changes occur for θ < π/ 4.\n\nThe result is shown in Fig. 3(a) as well as the second derivative in Fig. 3(b). The second derivative is calculated using an approximation to the slope to the function previously calculated and using 10000 points in the interval [0 , π/ 2]. A smaller number of points could be considered.\n\n## IV. THE CURVATURE OF C m .\n\n## A. Polar angle parameterization.\n\nIn the drag-free situation, C m is an ellipse and its description is well know, however, in the presence of linear drag this is not the case. We do not expect that the locus could be a conic section and henceforth we need to characterize it. It is usual to consider curvature, radius of curvature or the length of arc in order to characterize a locus. In the present case we consider the curvature of C m in both parameterizations, first with the polar angle θ m and secondly with the launch angle α . We left the calculus of the length of arc to a posterior work, since the calculations became increasingly complex and the goal of the present section is to start the understanding of C m and to illustrate the way it can be done using the Lambert W function. Here and in the rest of the section we drop, for clearness, the subindex m in ˜ r m and θ m .\n\nThe corresponding formula for the curvature K for polar coordinates is [10]\n\n\n\nin order to use Eq. (13). Here the subindex θ corresponds a derivative respect to that variable.\n\nA direct calculation on the drag-free ˜( r θ ) of Eq.(15)", + "recall": 0.8770764119601329, + "true_md": "FIG. 2: (color online) The angle θ as a function of the launch angle α for two different values of ε and their inverses.\n\nFI G. 3: (color online) (a) First and (b) second derivatives of α as function of θ for various values of parameter ε . Note that major changes occur for θ < π/ 4.\n\nin the review of referencei [2], is absent. Even when it is possible to write the locus in terms of y$_{m}$ ( x$_{m}$ ) this form does not shows the formal elegance of relation (13).\n\nNow we return to equation (10) since we need to solve explicitly it in order to have the function α ( θ$_{m}$ ). This task is not trivial since even when we approximate the rhs in expression (10) up to first order in ε ,\n\nthe inversion is not easy. A way to do the inversion is to expand in a Taylor series the rhs and then invert the series term by term.[9] Using Mathematica to perform this procedure up to O (18), we obtain as a result\n\nThe ε -independent terms had been resumated to yield arctan(2 tan θ ). However, the series does not converge for values in the argument larger than 1. The reason is the small convergence ratio for the Taylor expansion of $^{arcsin(}$·). An easier way to perform the inversion is to evaluate\n\n$^{arcsin(}$·). An easier way to perform the inversion is to evaluate θ$_{m}$ ( α ) using Eq. (10) and plot the points ( θ$_{m}$ ( α ) , α ), the result is shown in figure 2. The result is in agreement with the plot of Eq. (17) up to its convergence ratio and it is not shown. Notice that this method is exact in the sense that we can obtain as many pair of numbers as we need, a function is, finally, a relation one to one between two sets of real numbers. Another result is to obtain the derivative dα/dθ , since it shall be needed in the following sections. To this end, we note that both functions increase monotonically and their derivatives are not zero, except at the interval end. Hence, we can use the inverse function theorem in order to obtain\n\nin order to use Eq. (13). Here the subindex θ corresponds a derivative respect to that variable.\n\nA direct calculation on the drag-free ˜ r ( θ ) of Eq.(15)\n\nIn the drag-free situation, C m is an ellipse and its de- scription is well know, however, in the presence of linear drag this is not the case. We do not expect that the lo- cus could be a conic section and henceforth we need to characterize it. It is usual to consider curvature, radius of curvature or the length of arc in order to characterize a locus. In the present case we consider the curvature of C m in both parameterizations, first with the polar an- gle θ$_{m}$ and secondly with the launch angle α . We left the calculus of the length of arc to a posterior work, since the calculations became increasingly complex and the goal of the present section is to start the understanding of C m and to illustrate the way it can be done using the Lam- bert W function. Here and in the rest of the section we drop, for clearness, the subindex m in ˜ r$_{m}$ and θ$_{m}$ .\n\nThe corresponding formula for the curvature K for po- lar coordinates is [10]\n\nThe result is shown in Fig. 3(a) as well as the second derivative in Fig. 3(b). The second derivative is calcu- lated using an approximation to the slope to the func- tion previously calculated and using 10000 points in the interval [0 , π/ 2]. A smaller number of points could be considered.\n\n## IV. THE CURVATURE OF C m .\n\n## A. Polar angle parameterization.\n\n$$K = 1 ρ ˜ r 2 + 2˜ r 2 θ − ˜ r r$_{θθ}$ (˜ r 2 + ˜ r 2 $_{θ}$) 3 / 2 , (19)$$\n\n$$dα dθ = 1 dθ dα . (18)$$\n\n$$α ( θ ) ≈ arctan(2 tan θ ) − 1 $_{3}$ε (2 tan θ ) 2 + 2 $_{9}$ε$^{2}$(2 tan θ ) 3 + 1 $_{54}$(27 ε − 10 ε $^{3}$)(2 tan θ )) 4 $^{+}$· · · (17)$$\n\n$$tan θ$_{m}$ = tan α 2 (1 + ε 3 sin α ) , (16)$$\n\n3" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7882525865490319, + "doc_id": "d085a6186b379585b7562b4649b14bcaf1d3582708327321b9f7935f7db2299d", + "edit_distance": 0.422365988909427, + "f1_score": 0.943854324734446, + "meteor": 0.743136196661761, + "precision": 0.9658385093167702, + "pred_md": "- tical Physics , edited by E. Tirapegui (Reidel, Dordrecht, 1981), pp. 237-245.\n- [40] M. Miyamoto, Phys. Rev. A 72 , 063405 (2005).\n- [41] For Im( E a ) = 0, we recover the Hermitian limit of the FFA Hamiltonian. In this case a divergence of the resolvent for z →E 0 , obtained from Eq.(20) with V ( E 0 ) = 0, corresponds to a bound state embedded into the continuum (see, e.g., [39, 40]) rather than to a spectral singularity of H .\n- [42] In fact, if z were a real-valued root of Eq.(18) outside the interval ( E , E 1 2 ), according to Eq.(12) one would have Σ( z ) = ∆( z ) because V ( z ) = 0. Hence, Σ( z ) turns out to be real-valued. To satisfy Eq.(18), the condition Im( E a ) = 0 must be thus satisfied. This means that a real-valued root z of Eq.(18) necessarily requires H to be Hermitian.\n- [43] Since the divergence of G z ( ) at z = E 0 on the continuous spectrum occurs when z approaches E 0 solely from one side (either from the top or from the bottom) of the complex plane, E 0 does not belong to the point spectrum of H , rather it is a spectral singularity. In fact, if E 0 were an eigenvalue of H corresponding to a square-integrable eigenfunction |E 0 〉 , denoting by |E † 0 〉 the eigenfunction of the adjoint H † corresponding to the same eigenvalue and taking in Eq.(5) | χ 〉 = |E † 0 〉 and | ϕ 〉 = |E 0 〉 , one would obtain G χ,ϕ ( z ) = 〈E † 0 |E 0 〉 / z ( -E 0 ). Since 〈E † 0 |E 0 〉 is finite, it would then follow that G χ,ϕ ( z ) should diverge when both z = E 0 + 0 i + and z = E 0 -i 0 + .\n- [44] For a featureless continuum, for which ∆( E ) and V ( E ) are smooth functions of E , the resonance curve (39) has a Lorentzian shape and the quantum system, intially prepared in state | a 〉 , would decay into the continuum following a (nearly) exponential decay law with lifetime 1 [ / πV ( E a )] (Weisskopf-Wigner or Breit-Wigner approx-\n\n14\n\n- on). See also the discussion in Sec.II.D.\n- [45] We assume here that the spectrum of H is purely continuous, i.e. we assume that there are not bound states (outside or embedded in the continuum). In this case, for the Hermitian FFA model the decay of the survival probability P t ( ) is always complete.\n- [46] The proper determination of the square root on the right hand side of Eq.(50) must be chosen such that Im ( Σ( z = E ± i 0 + ) ) = ∓ πV ( E ), according to Eq.(12).\n- [47] F. Dˇ ogan, W. Kim, C.M. Blois, and F. Marsiglio, Phys. Rev. B 77 , 195107 (2008).\n- [48] O. Bendix, R. Fleischmann, T. Kottos, and B. Shapiro, Phys. Rev. Lett. 103 , 030402 (2009).\n- [49] More precisely, far from the lattice boundary a wave packet of the form c n ( ) = t ∫ dkQ k ( ) exp[ -ikn -iE k t ( ) ], with spectrum Q k ( ) narrow at around k = k 0 (0 < k 0 < π ), propagates along the lattice with a group velocity v g = dn/dt = -2 κ 0 sin k 0 < 0, i.e. the wave packet is incident onto the lattice boundary. Conversely, a wave packet formed by the superposition c n ( ) t = ∫ dkQ k ( ) exp[ ikn -iE k t ( ) ], with spectrum Q k ( ) narrow at around k = k 0 , propagates along the lattice with a group velocity v g = 2 κ 0 sin k 0 > 0, i.e. it is reflected from the lattice edge.\n- [50] At the coalescent point, the resolvent G z ( ) has a secondorder pole at z = 0.\n- [51] R. El-Ganainy, K. G. Makris, D. N. Christodoulides, and Z. H. Musslimani, Opt. Lett. 32 , 2632 (2007); K.G. Makris, R. El-Ganainy, D.N. Christodoulides, and Z.H. Musslimani, Phys. Rev. Lett. 100 , 103904 (2008); A. Guo, G.J. Salamo, D. Duchesne, R. Morandotti, M. Volatier-Ravat, V. Aimez, G. A. Siviloglou, and D. N. Christodoulides, Phys. Rev. Lett. 103 , 093902 (2009).", + "recall": 0.9228486646884273, + "true_md": "14\n\nimation). See also the discussion in Sec.II.D.\n\ntical Physics , edited by E. Tirapegui (Reidel, Dordrecht, 1981), pp. 237-245.\n\n- [40] M. Miyamoto, Phys. Rev. A 72 , 063405 (2005).\n\n- [41] For Im( E$_{a}$ ) = 0, we recover the Hermitian limit of the FFA Hamiltonian. In this case a divergence of the resol- vent for z → E 0 , obtained from Eq.(20) with V ( E 0 ) = 0, corresponds to a bound state embedded into the contin- uum (see, e.g., [39, 40]) rather than to a spectral singu- larity of H .\n\n- [42] In fact, if z were a real-valued root of Eq.(18) outside the interval ( E 1 , E 2 ), according to Eq.(12) one would have Σ( z ) = Δ( z ) because V ( z ) = 0. Hence, Σ( z ) turns out to be real-valued. To satisfy Eq.(18), the condition Im( E$_{a}$ ) = 0 must be thus satisfied. This means that a real-valued root z of Eq.(18) necessarily requires H to be Hermitian.\n\n- [43] Since the divergence of G ( z ) at z = E 0 on the continu- ous spectrum occurs when z approaches E 0 solely from one side (either from the top or from the bottom) of the complex plane, E 0 does not belong to the point spectrum of H , rather it is a spectral singularity. In fact, if E 0 were an eigenvalue of H corresponding to a square-integrable eigenfunction |E 0 〉 , denoting by |E † 0 〉 the eigenfunction of the adjoint H † corresponding to the same eigenvalue and taking in Eq.(5) | χ 〉 = |E † 0 〉 and | ϕ 〉 = |E 0 〉 , one would obtain G $_{χ,ϕ}$( z ) = 〈E † 0 |E 0 〉 / ( z − E 0 ). Since 〈E † 0 |E 0 〉 is finite, it would then follow that G $_{χ,ϕ}$( z ) should diverge when both z = E 0 + i 0 + and z = E 0 − i 0 $^{+}$. [44] For a featureless continuum, for which Δ( E ) and V ( E )\n\n- E E − [44] For a featureless continuum, for which Δ( E ) and V ( E ) are smooth functions of E , the resonance curve (39) has a Lorentzian shape and the quantum system, intially prepared in state | a 〉 , would decay into the continuum following a (nearly) exponential decay law with lifetime 1 / [ πV ( E$_{a}$ )] (Weisskopf-Wigner or Breit-Wigner approx-\n\n- [51] R. El-Ganainy, K. G. Makris, D. N. Christodoulides, and Z. H. Musslimani, Opt. Lett. 32 , 2632 (2007); K.G. Makris, R. El-Ganainy, D.N. Christodoulides, and Z.H. Musslimani, Phys. Rev. Lett. 100 , 103904 (2008); A. Guo, G.J. Salamo, D. Duchesne, R. Morandotti, M. Volatier-Ravat, V. Aimez, G. A. Siviloglou, and D. N. Christodoulides, Phys. Rev. Lett. 103 , 093902 (2009).\n\n- [50] At the coalescent point, the resolvent G ( z ) has a second- order pole at z = 0.\n\n- [49] More precisely, far from the lattice boundary a wave packet of the form c$_{n}$ ( t ) = ∫ dkQ ( k ) exp[ − ikn − iE ( k ) t ], with spectrum Q ( k ) narrow at around k = k 0 (0 < k 0 < π ), propagates along the lattice with a group ve- locity v$_{g}$ = dn/dt = − 2 κ 0 sin k 0 < 0, i.e. the wave packet is incident onto the lattice boundary. Conversely, a wave packet formed by the superposition c$_{n}$ ( t ) = ∫ dkQ ( k ) exp[ ikn − iE ( k ) t ], with spectrum Q ( k ) narrow at around k = k 0 , propagates along the lattice with a group velocity v$_{g}$ = 2 κ 0 sin k 0 > 0, i.e. it is reflected from the lattice edge.\n\n- [48] O. Bendix, R. Fleischmann, T. Kottos, and B. Shapiro, Phys. Rev. Lett. 103 , 030402 (2009).\n\n- Im ( Σ( z = E ± i 0 $^{+}$) ) = ∓ πV ( E ), according to Eq.(12). [47] F. Dˇ ogan, W. Kim, C.M. Blois, and F. Marsiglio, Phys. Rev. B 77 , 195107 (2008).\n\n- [45] We assume here that the spectrum of H is purely con- tinuous, i.e. we assume that there are not bound states (outside or embedded in the continuum). In this case, for the Hermitian FFA model the decay of the survival probability P ( t ) is always complete.\n\n- [46] The proper determination of the square root on the right hand side of Eq.(50) must be chosen such that ( )" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6019485429093827, + "doc_id": "2293c7626cde091f14c3579354e6c69aa76cda37027eaf6f42503b2f38bb7768", + "edit_distance": 0.6105610561056105, + "f1_score": 0.8969258589511755, + "meteor": 0.5366160743610507, + "precision": 0.9393939393939394, + "pred_md": "FIG. 5. (Color online) Plot of the photocurrent in reverse direction (with the origin shifted to POS) against effective voltage (a) and calculated field (b) for cells with different active layer thicknesses. While the characteristic points, indicated by the red dashed lines, lie on top of each other in the left graph, they disperse in the right graph.\n\nFIG. 5. (Color online) Plot of the photocurrent in reverse direction (with the origin shifted to POS) against effective voltage (a) and calculated field (b) for cells with different active layer thicknesses. While the characteristic points, indicated by the red dashed lines, lie on top of each other in the left graph, they disperse in the right graph.\n\n1\n\nwhere kd ( E ) = k d ( E µ ) is the PP dissociation rate. It can be calculated by detailed balance from the recombination rate and the Coulomb binding energy, which depends on the PP radius r PP. k f is the decay rate of a PP to the ground state. Since µ and t f = k -1 f do not influence P Braun ( E ) independently, we use their product µ t f as a single parameter. 21\n\nUpon successful separation, the polarons need to travel to the electrodes to be extracted. This part can be described with a term introduced by Sokel and Hughes. 8 They solved the problem of photoconductivity in insulators analytically, neglecting dark current, trapping and recombination. The negligence of recombination is a resonable approximation. 22-24 The result depends on temperature T and applied voltage V :\n\n\n\nUsing an effective voltage V eff = | V -V POS | and a calculated field E = | V eff | / d , and adding the constant offset J Ph ( V POS ) , the overall photocurrent can be written as:\n\n\n\nThis combination of Braun-model for polaron pair dissociation and the Sokel-Hughes term for charge extraction was first proposed by Mihailetchi et al., 9 but with the assumption that V eff = | V -V 0 | . This corresponds to the special case of a vanishing offset, where V POS equals V 0. Also, they used a Gaussian distribution of polaron pair radii r PP to calculate the dissociation efficiency in the Braun model. While this assumption seems reasonable, a fixed value for r PP could describe our data better than a distributed one.\n\nAs shown in Figure 6, the product of PP dissociation after Braun and extraction after Sokel-Hughes (Equation (5))\n\n5\n\nFIG. 6. (Color online) Comparison of experimental photocurrent (cell with Ca/Al cathode under 1 sun) and a model based on BraunOnsager theory and extraction. Field dependent part of J Ph in forward and reverse direction (left axis) and PP dissociation probability (right axis) vs. effective voltage. The black lines show the PP dissociation after Braun (dotted), extraction after Sokel & Hughes (dashed) and their combined product (solid).\n\nFIG. 6. (Color online) Comparison of experimental photocurrent (cell with Ca/Al cathode under 1 sun) and a model based on BraunOnsager theory and extraction. Field dependent part of J Ph in forward and reverse direction (left axis) and PP dissociation probability (right axis) vs. effective voltage. The black lines show the PP dissociation after Braun (dotted), extraction after Sokel & Hughes (dashed) and their combined product (solid).\n\nFIG. 7. (Color online) Effective photocurrent J Ph -J Ph ( V POS ) vs. applied voltage for two solar cells with Ca/Al and Ag cathode (symbols). For both cells, the experimental data (symbols) agrees well with the model, Equation (5) (solid lines).\n\nFIG. 7. (Color online) Effective photocurrent J Ph -J Ph ( V POS ) vs. applied voltage for two solar cells with Ca/Al and Ag cathode (symbols). For both cells, the experimental data (symbols) agrees well with the model, Equation (5) (solid lines).\n\ndescribes the experimental photocurrent well in both forward and reverse directions. A set of parameters in a narrow range could be employed to describe the experimental photocurrent of solar cells with different active layer thickness and cathode material over the whole measured range (Figure 7).\n\nUsing Equation (2) to calculate E , effective values of about 400 nm for d were used in the model, almost independent of measured device thickness and clearly exceeding it. This is a", + "recall": 0.8581314878892734, + "true_md": "5\n\nFIG. 6. (Color online) Comparison of experimental photocurrent (cell with Ca/Al cathode under 1 sun) and a model based on Braun– Onsager theory and extraction. Field dependent part of J$_{Ph}$ in for- ward and reverse direction (left axis) and PP dissociation probabil- ity (right axis) vs. effective voltage. The black lines show the PP dissociation after Braun (dotted), extraction after Sokel & Hughes (dashed) and their combined product (solid).\n\nFIG. 5. (Color online) Plot of the photocurrent in reverse direction (with the origin shifted to POS) against effective voltage (a) and calculated field (b) for cells with different active layer thicknesses. While the characteristic points, indicated by the red dashed lines, lie on top of each other in the left graph, they disperse in the right graph.\n\nwhere k$_{d}$ ( E ) = $_{k$\\_{d}$}$( E ) µ is the PP dissociation rate. It can be calculated by detailed balance from the recombination rate and the Coulomb binding energy, which depends on the PP ra- dius r$_{PP}$ . k$_{f}$ is the decay rate of a PP to the ground state. Since µ and t f = k − 1 f do not influence P$_{Braun}$ ( E ) independently, we use their product µ$_{t}$$\\_{f}$ as a single parameter. 21\n\nUpon successful separation, the polarons need to travel to the electrodes to be extracted. This part can be described with a term introduced by Sokel and Hughes. 8 They solved the problem of photoconductivity in insulators analytically, ne- glecting dark current, trapping and recombination. The neg- ligence of recombination is a resonable approximation. 22–24 The result depends on temperature T and applied voltage V :\n\nUsing an effective voltage V$_{eff}$ = | V − V$_{POS}$ | and a calculated field E = | V$_{eff}$ | / d , and adding the constant offset J$_{Ph}$ ( V$_{POS}$ ) , the overall photocurrent can be written as:\n\nThis combination of Braun-model for polaron pair disso- ciation and the Sokel–Hughes term for charge extraction was first proposed by Mihailetchi et al., 9 but with the assumption that V$_{eff}$ = | V − V$_{0}$ | . This corresponds to the special case of a vanishing offset, where V$_{POS}$ equals V$_{0}$ . Also, they used a Gaussian distribution of polaron pair radii r$_{PP}$ to calculate the dissociation efficiency in the Braun model. While this as- sumption seems reasonable, a fixed value for r$_{PP}$ could de- scribe our data better than a distributed one.\n\ndescribes the experimental photocurrent well in both forward and reverse directions. A set of parameters in a narrow range could be employed to describe the experimental photocurrent of solar cells with different active layer thickness and cathode material over the whole measured range (Figure 7).\n\nUsing Equation (2) to calculate E , effective values of about 400 nm for d were used in the model, almost independent of measured device thickness and clearly exceeding it. This is a\n\nAs shown in Figure 6, the product of PP dissociation af- ter Braun and extraction after Sokel–Hughes (Equation (5))\n\nFIG. 7. (Color online) Effective photocurrent J$_{Ph}$ − J$_{Ph}$ ( V$_{POS}$ ) vs. applied voltage for two solar cells with Ca/Al and Ag cathode (sym- bols). For both cells, the experimental data (symbols) agrees well with the model, Equation (5) (solid lines).\n\n$$J$_{Ph}$ = J$_{Ph,max}$$^{[}$ coth$^{(}$ eV$_{eff}$ 2 kT ) − 2 kT eV$_{eff}$$^{]}$ P$_{Braun}$ ( E )+ J$_{Ph}$ ( V$_{POS}$ ) (5)$$\n\n$$J$_{Ph}$ = J$_{Ph,max}$$^{[}$ exp ( qV / kT + 1 ) exp ( qV / kT − 1 ) − 2 kT qV ] (4)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.485024822507342, + "doc_id": "a009f558dd4deac2833df2d72433916c441de40b12db1ecc516134f0d6fddf57", + "edit_distance": 0.7595330739299611, + "f1_score": 0.8739205526770293, + "meteor": 0.44147892056323373, + "precision": 0.933579335793358, + "pred_md": "\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nand H 2 is the binary entropy function.\n\nFigure 4 plots both the CQ and CE trade-off curves of the Unruh channel for several values of the acceleration parameter z = 0, 0 2, 0 4, . . 0 6, . 0 8, . 0 95. . The figure demonstrates that both classically-enhanced quantum coding and entanglement-assisted classical coding beat a time-sharing strategy for an Unruh channel when z > 0.\n\nFigure 5 plots the full CQE capacity region for an Unruh channel with acceleration parameter z = 0 95. . The figure demonstrates that the classically-enhanced father protocol, combined with entanglement distribution and super-dense coding beats a time-sharing strategy because the first two surfaces described in Section III C are strictly concave for the Unruh channel when z > 0.\n\n## VI. MEASURING THE GAIN OVER A TIME-SHARING STRATEGY\n\nFigures 1, 2, and 4 demonstrate that classicallyenhanced quantum coding and entanglement-assisted classical coding both beat the time-sharing strategy for the dephasing, cloning, and Unruh channels. Ref. [31] provided a simple way to compute the benefit of 'specialized coding' over the time-sharing strategy, simply by plotting the difference between a trade-off curve and the line of time-sharing as a function of one of the rates in a trade-off scenario.\n\nThe above gain measure illustrates the benefit of specialized coding, but it ignores the relative improvement that specialized coding may give over time-sharing for very noisy channels. As a result, that gain measure tends to zero as one of the capacities tends to zero and thus loses meaning in this asymptotic limit. For example, consider a cloning channel with N = 1 000 000. , , This channel is particularly noisy for quantum transmission with a low quantum capacity at approximately 1 5 . × 10 -6 qubits / channel use, but the classical capacity is approximately 0 27 bits . / channel use. Suppose\n\n16\n\nthat the sender would like to transmit classical data at a rate of 0 165 bits / channel use in order to transmit more . quantum information. With a time-sharing strategy, the sender can transmit quantum data at approximately the rate 5 9 . × 10 -7 qubits / channel use, while classicallyenhanced quantum coding transmits quantum data at approximately the rate 7 2 . × 10 -7 qubits / channel use. This improvement in transmission appears low in absolute terms, but the relative increase of transmission is substantial, and a measure that captures this relative increase may be more useful for studying the gain.\n\nWe suggest an alternate gain measure that highlights the relative improvement and is simple to compute numerically for both the CQ and CE trade-off curves. Let A CQ denote the area under the CQ trade-off curve and let A TSCQ denote the area under the line of time-sharing. Then the relative gain G CQ for CQ trading is the ratio of A CQ to A TSCQ :\n\n\n\nThe relative gain measure for the CE trade-off curve is similar. Let A CE denote the area under the CE trade-off curve and let A TSCE denote the area under the line of time-sharing. Then the relative gain G CE for CE trading is the ratio of A TSCQ to A CE :\n\n\n\nEach of the above relative gains exhibits non-trivial behavior even if one of the capacities vanishes as the noise of a channel increases. These measures are also average gains because the area involves an integration over all points on the trade-off curve. One could generalize these relative gain measures to the CQE capacity region by taking the ratio of the volume enclosed by the bounding surfaces for CQE capacity region to the volume enclosed by surfaces obtained by time-sharing.\n\nFigure 6 plots the relative gains G CQ and G CE as a function of the dephasing parameter p for the dephasing qubit channel, as a function of the acceleration parameter z for the Unruh channel, and as a function of the number of clones N for the 1 → N cloning channel. The accompanying caption features an interpretation of the results.\n\nOne criterion that seems to be necessary in order to obtain a large relative gain for the CQ trade-off curve is that the quantum capacity of the channel should be much smaller than the classical capacity, so that the area between the inner bounding line of time-sharing and the trade-off curve is relatively large.\n\n## VII. CONCLUSION\n\nWe have proven that the CQE capacity region for all Hadamard channels admits a single-letter characterization. Particular examples of the Hadamard channels are", + "recall": 0.8214285714285714, + "true_md": "16\n\nthat the sender would like to transmit classical data at a rate of 0 . 165 bits / channel use in order to transmit more quantum information. With a time-sharing strategy, the sender can transmit quantum data at approximately the rate 5 . 9 × 10 − 7 qubits / channel use, while classically- enhanced quantum coding transmits quantum data at approximately the rate 7 . 2 × 10 − 7 qubits / channel use. This improvement in transmission appears low in abso- lute terms, but the relative increase of transmission is substantial, and a measure that captures this relative in- crease may be more useful for studying the gain.\n\nWe suggest an alternate gain measure that highlights the relative improvement and is simple to compute nu- merically for both the CQ and CE trade-off curves. Let A$_{CQ}$ denote the area under the CQ trade-off curve and let A$_{TSCQ}$ denote the area under the line of time-sharing. Then the relative gain G$_{CQ}$ for CQ trading is the ratio of A$_{CQ}$ to A$_{TSCQ}$ :\n\n$$Q$_{CQ}$ ( z, µ ) ≡ − ∞ ∑ l =2 p$_{l}$ ( z ) Δ$_{l}$$_{−}$$_{1}$ l − 1 ∑ i =0 λ ( l − 1) i ( µ ) log ( λ ( l − 1) i ( µ )) + ∞ ∑ l =2 p$_{l}$ ( z ) Δ$_{l}$$_{−}$$_{1}$ l − 2 ∑ i =0 η ( l − 1) i ( µ ) log ( η ( l − 1) i ( µ )) , C$_{CE}$ ( z, µ ) ≡ H$_{2}$ ( µ ) + 1 − ∞ ∑ l =2 p$_{l}$ ( z ) log ( l − 1) + ∞ ∑ l =2 p$_{l}$ ( z ) Δ$_{l}$$_{−}$$_{1}$ l − 2 ∑ i =0 η ( l − 1) i ( µ ) log ( η ( l − 1) i ( µ )) , E$_{CE}$ ( µ ) ≡ H$_{2}$ ( µ ) , λ ( l − 1) i ( µ ) ≡ ( l − 1 − 2 i ) µ + i, η ( l − 1) i ( µ ) ≡ ( l − 2 − 2 i ) µ + i + 1 ,$$\n\n$$G$_{CQ}$ ≡ A$_{CQ}$ A$_{TSCQ}$ .$$\n\n$$G$_{CE}$ ≡ A$_{TSCE}$ A$_{CE}$ .$$\n\nand H$_{2}$ is the binary entropy function.\n\nFigure 4 plots both the CQ and CE trade-off curves of the Unruh channel for several values of the accelera- tion parameter z = 0, 0 . 2, 0 . 4, 0 . 6, 0 . 8, 0 . 95. The fig- ure demonstrates that both classically-enhanced quan- tum coding and entanglement-assisted classical coding beat a time-sharing strategy for an Unruh channel when z > 0.\n\nThe relative gain measure for the CE trade-off curve is similar. Let A$_{CE}$ denote the area under the CE trade-off curve and let A$_{TSCE}$ denote the area under the line of time-sharing. Then the relative gain G$_{CE}$ for CE trading is the ratio of A$_{TSCQ}$ to A$_{CE}$ :\n\nFigure 5 plots the full CQE capacity region for an Unruh channel with acceleration parameter z = 0 . 95. The figure demonstrates that the classically-enhanced fa- ther protocol, combined with entanglement distribution and super-dense coding beats a time-sharing strategy be- cause the first two surfaces described in Section III C are strictly concave for the Unruh channel when z > 0.\n\nEach of the above relative gains exhibits non-trivial be- havior even if one of the capacities vanishes as the noise of a channel increases. These measures are also average gains because the area involves an integration over all points on the trade-off curve. One could generalize these relative gain measures to the CQE capacity region by taking the ratio of the volume enclosed by the bounding surfaces for CQE capacity region to the volume enclosed by surfaces obtained by time-sharing.\n\nFigures 1, 2, and 4 demonstrate that classically- enhanced quantum coding and entanglement-assisted classical coding both beat the time-sharing strategy for the dephasing, cloning, and Unruh channels. Ref. [31] provided a simple way to compute the benefit of “spe- cialized coding” over the time-sharing strategy, simply by plotting the difference between a trade-off curve and the line of time-sharing as a function of one of the rates in a trade-off scenario.\n\nFigure 6 plots the relative gains G$_{CQ}$ and G$_{CE}$ as a function of the dephasing parameter p for the dephasing qubit channel, as a function of the acceleration param- eter z for the Unruh channel, and as a function of the number of clones N for the 1 → N cloning channel. The accompanying caption features an interpretation of the results.\n\nOne criterion that seems to be necessary in order to obtain a large relative gain for the CQ trade-off curve is that the quantum capacity of the channel should be much smaller than the classical capacity, so that the area between the inner bounding line of time-sharing and the trade-off curve is relatively large.\n\nThe above gain measure illustrates the benefit of spe- cialized coding, but it ignores the relative improvement that specialized coding may give over time-sharing for very noisy channels. As a result, that gain measure tends to zero as one of the capacities tends to zero and thus loses meaning in this asymptotic limit. For exam- ple, consider a cloning channel with N = 1 , 000 , 000. This channel is particularly noisy for quantum trans- mission with a low quantum capacity at approximately 1 . 5 × 10 − 6 qubits / channel use, but the classical capac- ity is approximately 0 . 27 bits / channel use. Suppose\n\nWe have proven that the CQE capacity region for all Hadamard channels admits a single-letter characteriza- tion. Particular examples of the Hadamard channels are\n\n## VII. CONCLUSION\n\n## VI. MEASURING THE GAIN OVER A TIME-SHARING STRATEGY" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9569779335871154, + "doc_id": "c3433ed74f466cfdee3e95d1a4159696c503fabe40d2bfb85c9531d9866c3ad1", + "edit_distance": 0.04688995215311005, + "f1_score": 0.9544863459037711, + "meteor": 0.9450419152107242, + "precision": 0.9683377308707124, + "pred_md": "Conclusion: In summary, we propose a new subnatural linewidth spectroscopy technique, which is a laser by using Ramsey seperated-field cavity to realize the output of stimulated-emission radiation via multiple coherent interaction with atomic beam. We find the linewidth of Ramsey laser is subnatural if we choose an appropriate atomic level, and the bad-cavity laser mechanism will dramatically reduce cavityrelated noise as discussed in active optical clock [15-19]. Our results show that this new subnatural linewidth spectroscopy is superior to conventional optical Ramsey seperated-field spectroscopy and any other available subnatural spectroscopy technique at present [3-10]. Considering one have to apply the separated-field method in any phase detection as in Ramsey-Bord 'interferometer [2], to investigate the e e ff ects of phase di ff erences between the two oscillating fields [31] in this stimulated separated-field method with such subnatural linewidth will be our next research aim.\n\nWe acknowledge Yiqiu Wang and Deshui Yu for fruitful discussions. This work is supported by MOST of China (grant 2005CB724500, National Natural Science Foundation of China (grant 60837004, 10874009), National Hi-Tech Research and Development (863) Program.\n\n- ∗ E-mail: jbchen@pku.edu.cn\n- † E-mail: hongguo@pku.edu.cn.\n- [1] N. F. Ramsey, Phys. Rev. 76 , 996 (1949).\n- [2] B. Dubetsky and P. R. Berman, In Atom Interferometry , edited by P. R. Berman (Academic Press, Cambridge, MA, 1997).\n- [3] M. M. Salour, Rev. Mod. Phys. 50 , 667 (1978).\n- [4] J. Wong and J. C. Garrison, Phys. Rev. Lett. 44 , 1254 (1980).\n- [5] P. L. Knight and P. E. Coleman, J. Phys. B: Atom. Molec. Phys. 13 4345 (1980).\n- [6] H. -W. Lee, P. Meystre, and M. O. Scully, Phys. Rev. A 24 , 1914 (1981).\n- [7] F. Shimizu, K. Shimizu, and H. Takuma, Phys. Rev. A 28 , 2248 (1983).\n- [8] W. Gawlik, J. Kowalski, F. Trager, and M. Vollmer, Phys.Rev.\n\n4\n\n- Lett. 48 , 871 (1982).\n- [9] H. J. Carmichael, R. J. Brecha, M. G. Raizen, H. J. Kimble, and P. R. Rice, Phys. Rev. A 40 , 5516 (1989).\n- [10] U. W. Rathe, M. O. Scully, Letters in Mathematical Physics 34 , 297 (1995)\n- [11] K. Numata, A. Kemery, J. Camp, Phys Rev Lett, 93 , 250602 (2004).\n- [12] A. D. Ludlow et al. , Opt. Lett. 32 , 641 (2007).\n- [13] H. J. Kimble, B. L. Lev, and J. Ye, Phys. Rev. Lett. 101 , 260602 (2008).\n- [14] J. Chen, and X.Chen, In Proceedings of the 2005 IEEE International Frequency Control Symposium and Exposition , (IEEE, 2005), p.608.\n- [15] J. Chen, e-print arXiv:0512096 quant-ph; Chinese Science Bulletin 54 , 348 (2009).\n- [16] D. Yu and J. Chen, Phys. Rev. A 78 , 013846 (2008).\n- [17] J. Chen, In Frequency Standards and Metrology: Proceedings of the 7th Symposium , edited by Maleki Lute (World Scientific Publishing Company, 2009).\n- [18] Y. Wang, Chinese Science Bulletin 54 , 347 (2009).\n- [19] D. Meiser, J. Ye, D. R. Carlson, and M. J. Holland, Phys. Rev. Lett. 102 , 163601 (2009)\n- [20] F. Strumia, Metrologia 8 , 85 (1972).\n- [21] G. Kramer, J. Opt. Soc. Am. 68 , 1634 (1978).\n- [22] V. S. Letokhov and B. D. Pavlik, Opt. Spectrosc. USSR 32 , 455 (1972).\n- [23] Ye. V. Baklanov, B. Ya, Dubetsky, V. P. Chebotayev, Appl. Phys. 9 , 171 (1976).\n- [24] J. C. Bergquist, S. A. Lee, and L. L. Hall, Phys. Rev. Lett. 38 , 159 (1977).\n- [25] L. Davidovich, Rev. Mod. Phys. 68 , 127 (1996).\n- [26] M. I. Kolobov, L. Davidovich, E. Giacobino, and C. Fabre, Phys. Rev. A 47 , 1431 (1993).\n- [27] M. Sargent III, M. O. Scully, and W. E. Lamb, Laser Physics (Addition Wesley, Reading, MA, 1974).\n- [28] N. A. Abraham, P. Mandel, and L. M. Narducci, Dynamic Instabilities and Pulsations in Lasers , Progress in Optics XXV, edited by E. Wolf (Elsevier, Amsterdam, 1988).\n- [29] L. Pasternack, D. M. Silver, D. R. Yarkony, and P. J. Dagdigian, J. Phys. B 13 , 2231 (1980).\n- [30] K. An and M. S. Feld, Phys. Rev. A 56 , 1662(1997).\n- [31] N. F. Ramsey and H. B. Silsbee, Phys. Rev. 84 , 506(1951).", + "recall": 0.941025641025641, + "true_md": "4\n\nConclusion: In summary, we propose a new subnatural linewidth spectroscopy technique, which is a laser by us- ing Ramsey seperated-field cavity to realize the output of stimulated-emission radiation via multiple coherent interac- tion with atomic beam. We find the linewidth of Ramsey laser is subnatural if we choose an appropriate atomic level, and the bad-cavity laser mechanism will dramatically reduce cavity- related noise as discussed in active optical clock [15–19].Our results show that this new subnatural linewidth spectroscopy is superior to conventional optical Ramsey seperated-field spectroscopy and any other available subnatural spectroscopy technique at present [3–10]. Considering one have to ap- ply the separated-field method in any phase detection as in Ramsey-Bord e ´interferometer [2], to investigate the e ff ects of phase di ff erences between the two oscillating fields [31] in this stimulated separated-field method with such subnatura l linewidth will be our next research aim.\n\nWe acknowledge Yiqiu Wang and Deshui Yu for fruitful discussions. This work is supported by MOST of China (grant 2005CB724500, National Natural Science Foundation of China (grant 60837004, 10874009), National Hi-Tech Re- search and Development (863) Program.\n\n- ∗ E-mail: jbchen@pku.edu.cn †\n\n- ∗ † E-mail: hongguo@pku.edu.cn.\n\n- [1] N. F. Ramsey, Phys. Rev. 76 , 996 (1949).\n\n- [2] B. Dubetsky and P. R. Berman, In Atom Interferometry , edited by P. R. Berman (Academic Press, Cambridge, MA, 1997).\n\n- [3] M. M. Salour, Rev. Mod. Phys. 50 , 667 (1978).\n\n- [4] J. Wong and J. C. Garrison, Phys. Rev. Lett. 44 , 1254 (1980).\n\n- [5] P. L. Knight and P. E. Coleman, J. Phys. B: Atom. Molec. Phys. 13 4345 (1980).\n\n- [6] H. -W. Lee, P. Meystre, and M. O. Scully, Phys. Rev. A 24 , 1914 (1981).\n\n- [7] F. Shimizu, K. Shimizu, and H. Takuma, Phys. Rev. A 28 , 2248 (1983).\n\n- [8] W. Gawlik, J. Kowalski, F. Tr¨ager, and M. Vollmer, Phys.Rev.\n\n- [9] H. J. Carmichael, R. J. Brecha, M. G. Raizen, H. J. Kimble, and P. R. Rice, Phys. Rev. A 40 , 5516 (1989).\n\n- [10] U. W. Rathe, M. O. Scully, Letters in Mathematical Physics 34 , 297 (1995)\n\n- [11] K. Numata, A. Kemery, J. Camp, Phys Rev Lett, 93 , 250602 (2004).\n\n- [12] A. D. Ludlow et al. , Opt. Lett. 32 , 641 (2007).\n\n- [13] H. J. Kimble, B. L. Lev, and J. Ye, Phys. Rev. Lett. 101 , 260602 (2008).\n\n- [14] J. Chen, and X.Chen, In Proceedings of the 2005 IEEE Inter- national Frequency Control Symposium and Exposition , (IEEE, 2005), p.608.\n\n- [15] J. Chen, e-print arXiv:0512096 quant-ph; Chinese Science Bul- letin 54 , 348 (2009).\n\n- [16] D. Yu and J. Chen, Phys. Rev. A 78 , 013846 (2008).\n\n- [17] J. Chen, In Frequency Standards and Metrology: Proceedings of the 7th Symposium , edited by Maleki Lute (World Scientific Publishing Company, 2009).\n\n- [18] Y. Wang, Chinese Science Bulletin 54 , 347 (2009).\n\n- [19] D. Meiser, J. Ye, D. R. Carlson, and M. J. Holland, Phys. Rev. Lett. 102 , 163601 (2009)\n\n- [20] F. Strumia, Metrologia 8 , 85 (1972).\n\n- [21] G. Kramer, J. Opt. Soc. Am. 68 , 1634 (1978).\n\n- [22] V. S. Letokhov and B. D. Pavlik, Opt. Spectrosc. USSR 32 , 455 (1972).\n\n- [23] Ye. V. Baklanov, B. Ya, Dubetsky, V. P. Chebotayev, Appl. Phys. 9 , 171 (1976).\n\n- [24] J. C. Bergquist, S. A. Lee, and L. L. Hall, Phys. Rev. Lett. 38 , 159 (1977).\n\n- [25] L. Davidovich, Rev. Mod. Phys. 68 , 127 (1996).\n\n- [26] M. I. Kolobov, L. Davidovich, E. Giacobino, and C. Fabre, Phys. Rev. A 47 , 1431 (1993).\n\n- [27] M. Sargent III, M. O. Scully, and W. E. Lamb, Laser Physics (Addition Wesley, Reading, MA, 1974).\n\n- [28] N. A. Abraham, P. Mandel, and L. M. Narducci, Dynamic In- stabilities and Pulsations in Lasers , Progress in Optics XXV, edited by E. Wolf (Elsevier, Amsterdam, 1988).\n\n- [29] L. Pasternack, D. M. Silver, D. R. Yarkony, and P. J. Dagdigian, J. Phys. B 13 , 2231 (1980).\n\n- [30] K. An and M. S. Feld, Phys. Rev. A 56 , 1662(1997).\n\n- [31] N. F. Ramsey and H. B. Silsbee, Phys. Rev. 84 , 506(1951).\n\nLett. 48 , 871 (1982)." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.43225884933241976, + "doc_id": "32f23ac0a817a21b158d0e8d19e26073230f306b16d9baeec8f6ff685e439722", + "edit_distance": 0.7205513784461153, + "f1_score": 0.9028006589785831, + "meteor": 0.4149726712824065, + "precision": 0.9415807560137457, + "pred_md": "FIG. 1: (color online) Locus C m ( ε ) formed by the apexes of all the projectile trajectories (continuous line in blue) given by Eqs. (7) and (8) in rectangular coordinates or by Eq. (13), the last one express C m in polar coordinates and in term of the Lambert W function. The dashed red line is the ellipse of eccentricity e = √ 3 / 2 which represents the drag-free case, i.e. C m (0). The parameters are V 0 = 10 and ε = 0 1. .\n\nFIG. 1: (color online) Locus C m ( ε ) formed by the apexes of all the projectile trajectories (continuous line in blue) given by Eqs. (7) and (8) in rectangular coordinates or by Eq. (13), the last one express C m in polar coordinates and in term of the Lambert W function. The dashed red line is the ellipse of eccentricity e = √ 3 / 2 which represents the drag-free case, i.e. C m (0). The parameters are V 0 = 10 and ε = 0 1. .\n\nwhere we introduce the dimensionless perturbative parameter ε ≡ bV /g 0 , the dimensionless length ρ = V 2 0 /g , and noticing that b 2 g can be expressed as ε 2 ρ . An alternative procedure consists in set the derivative dy/dt to zero to obtain the time of flight to the apex of the trajectory and, evaluate the coordinates at that time. The points ( x m , y m ) conform the locus of apexes C m ( ε ) for all parabolic trajectories as a function of the launch angle α . In Fig. 1 we plot C m ( ε ) described by Eqs. (7) and (8), for the drag-free case (in dashed red line) and for ε = 0 1 in continuous blue line. . Several projectile trajectories are plotted in thin black lines. The locus of apexes C m ( ε ) defined by ( x m , y m ) of Eqs. (7) and (8) is described parametrically by the launch angle α and it changes for different values of ε ≡ bV /g 0 . In the next section we shall find a description of C m ( ε ) in terms of polar coordinates and in a closed form using the Lambert W function.\n\n## III. THE LOCUS C m AS A LAMBERT W FUNCTION\n\nIn order to obtain an analytical closed form of the locus we change the variables to polar ones, i.e., x m = r m cos θ m and y m = r m sin θ m . The selection of a description departing from that origin instead of the center or the focus of the ellipse is because the resulting geometrical place is no longer symmetric and the only invariant point is just the launching origin. We substitute the polar forms of x m and y m into equations (7) and (8) and\n\n2\n\nrearranging terms it must be expressed as\n\n\n\nThe lhs depends on r m and θ m meanwhile the rhs depends on α , however the last angle is a function of θ m and reads as\n\n\n\nby making tan θ m = y m /x m from Eqs. (7) and (8). In order to obtain ˜( r θ m ) ≡ r m ( θ m ) /ρ we set\n\n\n\nsince Eq. (10) allows us to have, implicitly, α θ ( m ). We shall return to this point later. Hence, we can write Eq. (9) as\n\n\n\nWhere we multiplied both sides of Eq. (9) by -ε 2 sin θ m . Setting z = -ε 2 tan θ m f ( α ) and W z ( ) = -ε 2 sin θ m ˜( r θ m ) in Eq. (12), it shall have the familiar Lambert W function form, z = W z ( ) exp( W z ( )), from which we can obtain ˜ as r\n\n\n\nIt is important to note that the argument of the Lambert function in this equation is negative for all the values ε > 0. W x ( ) remains real in the range x ∈ -[ 1 /e, 0) and have the branches denoted by 0 and -1.[2] We select the principal branch, 0, since it is the bounded one, however, for values of ε > 1 1 there is a precision problem since the . required argument values are near to -1 /e ≡ -exp( -1). It is important to stress that in Eq. (13) the independent variable is the angle θ and, it constitutes the parameterization of the curve C m .\n\nThe polar expression of C m can also be written in terms of the tree function T z ( ) = -W ( -z ), giving\n\n\n\nWe recover the drag-free result\n\n\n\nwhen ε → 0. An explanation of this unfamiliar form of an ellipse is given in appendix A followed by a discussion about the ε → 0 limit of expression (13) in appendix B.\n\nFormula (13) exhibits the deep relationship between the Lambert W function and the linear drag force projectile problem, since not only the range is given as this function [4, 5]. The problem open the opportunity to study the W function in polar coordinates, that, almost", + "recall": 0.8670886075949367, + "true_md": "FIG. 1: (color online) Locus C m ( ε ) formed by the apexes of all the projectile trajectories (continuous line in blue) given by Eqs. (7) and (8) in rectangular coordinates or by Eq. (13), the last one express C m in polar coordinates and in term of the Lambert W function. The dashed red line is the ellipse of eccentricity e = √$_{3}$$\\_{/}$$_{2 which represents the drag-free case,}$ i.e. C m (0). The parameters are V 0 = 10 and ε = 0 . 1.\n\nwhere we introduce the dimensionless perturbative pa- rameter ε ≡ bV$_{0}$/g , the dimensionless length ρ = V 2 0 /g , and noticing that b 2 g can be expressed as ε 2 ρ . An alter- native procedure consists in set the derivative dy/dt to zero to obtain the time of flight to the apex of the tra- jectory and, evaluate the coordinates at that time. The points ( x$_{m}$, y$_{m}$ ) conform the locus of apexes C $_{m}$( ε ) for all parabolic trajectories as a function of the launch an- gle α . In Fig. 1 we plot C $_{m}$( ε ) described by Eqs. (7) and (8), for the drag-free case (in dashed red line) and for ε = 0 . 1 in continuous blue line. Several projectile trajectories are plotted in thin black lines. The locus of apexes C $_{m}$( ε ) defined by ( x$_{m}$, y$_{m}$ ) of Eqs. (7) and (8) is described parametrically by the launch angle α and it changes for different values of ε ≡ bV$_{0}$/g . In the next section we shall find a description of C $_{m}$( ε ) in terms of polar coordinates and in a closed form using the Lambert W function.\n\nIn order to obtain an analytical closed form of the lo- cus we change the variables to polar ones, i.e., x$_{m}$ = r$_{m}$ cos θ$_{m}$ and y$_{m}$ = r$_{m}$ sin θ$_{m}$ . The selection of a de- scription departing from that origin instead of the center or the focus of the ellipse is because the resulting geomet- rical place is no longer symmetric and the only invariant point is just the launching origin. We substitute the po- lar forms of x$_{m}$ and y$_{m}$ into equations (7) and (8) and\n\nwhen ε → 0. An explanation of this unfamiliar form of an ellipse is given in appendix A followed by a discussion about the ε → 0 limit of expression (13) in appendix B. Formula (13) exhibits the deep relationship between\n\n→ Formula (13) exhibits the deep relationship between the Lambert W function and the linear drag force pro- jectile problem, since not only the range is given as this function [4, 5]. The problem open the opportunity to study the W function in polar coordinates, that, almost\n\nWe recover the drag-free result\n\nIt is important to note that the argument of the Lam- bert function in this equation is negative for all the values ε > 0. W ( x ) remains real in the range x ∈ $^{[}$−1 /e, 0) and have the branches denoted by 0 and − 1.[2] We select the principal branch, 0, since it is the bounded one, however, for values of ε > 1 . 1 there is a precision problem since the required argument values are near to − 1 /e ≡ − $^{exp(}$−1). It is important to stress that in Eq. (13) the independent variable is the angle θ and, it constitutes the parameter- ization of the curve C $_{m}$. The polar expression of C $_{m}$can also be written in terms\n\nC The polar expression of C $_{m}$can also be written in terms of the tree function T ( z ) = − W $^{(}$− z ), giving\n\n( Where we multiplied both sides of Eq. (9) by − ε $^{2}$sin θ$_{m}$ . Setting z = − ε $^{2}$tan θ$_{m}$ f ( α ) and W ( z ) = ε $^{2}$sin θ$_{m}$ ˜ r ( θ$_{m}$ ) in Eq. (12), it shall have the familiar Lambert W function form, z = W ( z ) exp( W ( z )), from which we can obtain ˜ r as\n\nsince Eq. (10) allows us to have, implicitly, α ( θ$_{m}$ ). We shall return to this point later. Hence, we can write Eq. (9) as\n\nre arranging terms it must be expressed as\n\nT he lhs depends on r$_{m}$ and θ$_{m}$ meanwhile the rhs de- pe nds on α , however the last angle is a function of θ$_{m}$ an d reads as\n\nby making tan θ$_{m}$ = y$_{m}$/x$_{m}$ from Eqs. (7) and (8).\n\nIn order to obtain ˜ r ( θ$_{m}$ ) ≡ r$_{m}$ ( θ$_{m}$ ) /ρ we set\n\n2\n\n$$r m ( θ m ) ρ cos θ$_{m}$ exp ( − ε $^{2}$sin θ$_{m}$ r m ( θ m ) ρ ) = cos α sin α $^{exp(}$− ε sin α ) . (9)$$\n\n$$tan θ$_{m}$ = 1 ε 2 ( ε sin α − ln(1 + ε sin α )) cos α sin α 1 1+ ε sin α , (10)$$\n\n$$f ( α ( θ$_{m}$ )) ≡ cos α sin α $^{exp(}$− ε sin α ) , (11)$$\n\n$$˜ r ( θ$_{m}$ ) = − 1 ε $^{2}$sin θ$_{m}$ W $^{(}$− ε $^{2}$tan θ$_{m}$ f ( α )) . (13)$$\n\n$$− ε $^{2}$sin θ$_{m}$ ˜ r ( θ$_{m}$ ) exp ( − ε $^{2}$sin θ$_{m}$ ˜ r ( θ$_{m}$ ) = − ε $^{2}$tan θ$_{m}$ f ( α ) . (12) Where we multiplied both sides of Eq. (9) by$$\n\n$$˜ r ( θ$_{m}$ ) = 1 ε $^{2}$sin θ$_{m}$ T ( ε $^{2}$tan θ$_{m}$f ( α ( θ$_{m}$ ))) . (14)$$\n\n$$˜ r = 2 sin θ$_{m}$ 1 + 3 sin 2 θ$_{m}$ (15)$$\n\n## III. THE LOCUS C m AS A LAMBERT W FUNCTION" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.49434060156497767, + "doc_id": "4806c52fe75868cbae7db106a3970df8433e263453bcd5f7e08ca66a667ed2f3", + "edit_distance": 0.5835443037974684, + "f1_score": 0.878186968838527, + "meteor": 0.5252806941945921, + "precision": 0.9309309309309309, + "pred_md": "where η = v F ( p -p F ), v F and p F are the Fermi velocity and Fermi momentum, respectively; and δ 2 = ∆ 2 F ϑ ( ), ∆ is the energy gap and F ϑ ( ) describes the dependence of the gap on the angle ϑ between the quantization axis and the particle momentum. For different types of nucleon superfluidity, the expression of F ϑ ( ) is completely different, which can be seen in [24-26].\n\nIn the case of ξ /lessmuch 1, to the lowest order we have\n\n\n\n\n\nthen the net reaction rate is\n\n\n\nand the neutrino emissivity due to the departure from β -equilibrium is\n\n\n\nNote that, the leading order of ∆Γ is the first order of ξ , while for ˙ E loss it is the second order of ξ .\n\nUnlike normal matter, Eqs.(29) and (30) haven't exact analytical solutions. However, one can find that ∆Γ δµ is in proportion to ˙ E loss , thus we can easily obtain\n\n\n\n- [1] Finzi A and Wolf R A 1968 Astrophys. J. 153 835\n- [2] Sawyer R F 1989 Phys. Rev. D 39 3804\n- [3] Haensel P and Schaeffer R 1992 Phys. Rev. D 45 4708\n- [4] Haensel P, Levenfish K P and Yakovlev D G 2000 Astron. Astrophys. 357 1157\n- [5] Haensel P, Levenfish K P and Yakovlev D G 2001 Astron. Astrophys. 372 130\n- [6] Wang Q D and Lu T 1984 Phys. Lett. B 148 211\n- [7] Sawyer R F 1989 Phys. Lett. B 233 412\n- [8] Madsen J 1992 Phys. Rev. D 46 3290\n\n3\n\nwhich is the same as S 0 /λ 0 . This means that the nucleon superfluidity doesn't change the value of R /ζ .\n\nIn summary, we have studied the radiative viscous coefficient of superfluid npe matter, and find that for direct Urca process, the ratio of radiative viscosity to bulk viscosity in the lowest order of ξ yielded by Sa'd and Schaffner-Bielich [20] for normal nucleons could be extended to the superfluid case. In fact, it can be seen from our calculations that this is correct for modified Urca process, too. Thus, to the lowest order of ξ , the relation factor of 3 2 between the radiative viscosity and the bulk viscosity of npe matter is a generic one.\n\nThe following are the extensive discussions to our result:\n\nFirst, Although we have S /λ = S 0 /λ 0 in the lowest order, the viscosities in the superfluid case are different from these in the non-superfluid case. The bulk and radiative viscous coefficients could be easily expressed as ζ = ζ 0 R Γ and R = R 0 R /epsilon1 , where ζ 0 and R 0 are the viscosities in the non-superfluid case, R Γ = ∆Γ( ξ, v j ) / ∆Γ( ) and ξ R /epsilon1 = ˙ E loss ( ξ, v j ) / ˙ E loss ( ξ ) are the reduction factors caused by superfluidity. Of course, our result shows that to the lowest order of ξ , R /epsilon1 equals to R Γ (note that R Γ has been calculated numerically by Haensel et al. [4, 5]).\n\nSecond, our result satisfies the general relationship ∂ ˙ E loss /∂δµ = 3(Γ ν -Γ ), which has been found by Floresν Tuli'n and Reisenegger [27]. a They found that this relationship holds both in the case of normal nucleons and in the case of superfluid nucleons, and both in linear case and for precise solutions.\n\nFinally, our result based on the fact that to the lowest order of ξ , the existence of superfluidity don't change the relationship between the neutrino emissivity due to the departure from β -equilibrium and energy dissipation in the form of heat. Nevertheless, it is not correct for higher order calculations. As shown in [21, 23], for normal matter ∆Γ and ˙ E loss can be solved analytically as polynomials of ξ , while for superfluid matter they must be solved numerically. As a result, we expect that in non-linear regime, the ratio of radiative viscosity to bulk viscosity of superfluid matter no longer equals to that of normal matter. However, the calculation in the nonlinear case is far more complicated and we will consider it in our further study.\n\n- [9] Gupta V K, Wadhwa A, Singh S and Anand J D 1997 Pramana - J. Phys. 49 443\n- [10] Lindblom L and Owen B J 2002 Phys. Rev. D 65 063006\n- [11] Zheng X P, Yang S H and Li J R 2002 Phys. Lett. B 548 29\n- [12] Zheng X P, Liu X W, Kang M and Yang S H 2004 Phys. Rev. C 70 015803\n- [13] Zheng X P, Kang M, Liu X W and Yang S H 2005 Phys. Rev. C 72 025809\n- [14] Pan N N, Zheng X P, and Li J R 2006 Mon. Not. Roy.", + "recall": 0.8310991957104558, + "true_md": "3\n\n$$J ( x$_{ν}$ − ξ, v$_{j}$ ) − J ( x$_{ν}$ + ξ, v$_{j}$ ) = − 2 ξ∂J ( x$_{ν}$, v$_{j}$ ) /∂x$_{ν}$, (27)$$\n\n$$J ( x$_{ν}$ − ξ, v$_{j}$ )+ J ( x$_{ν}$ + ξ, v$_{j}$ ) − 2 J ( x$_{ν}$, v$_{j}$ ) = ξ $^{2}$∂$^{2}$J ( x$_{ν}$, v$_{j}$ ) /∂x 2 $_{ν}$, (28)$$\n\n$$ΔΓ = Γ$_{ν}$( ξ, v$_{j}$ ) − Γ$_{ν}$( ξ, v$_{j}$ ) = 4 π (2 π ) $_{8}$T 5   3 ∏ j $_{=1}$∫ d Ω$_{j}$   δ ( P$_{f}$ − P$_{i}$ ) | M$_{f i}$ | 2 3 ∏ j =1 p$_{F}$$_{j}$ m ∗ j × ( − 4 ξ ) + ∞ ∫ 0 dx$_{ν}$x$_{ν}$J ( x$_{ν}$, v$_{j}$ ) , (29)$$\n\n$$˙ E loss = ϵ ( ξ, v$_{j}$ ) − ϵ (0 , v$_{j}$ ) = 4 π (2 π ) $_{8}$T 6   3 ∏ j $_{=1}$∫ d Ω$_{j}$   δ ( P$_{f}$ − P$_{i}$ ) | M$_{f i}$ | 2 3 ∏ j =1 p$_{F}$$_{j}$ m ∗ j × 6 ξ 2 + ∞ ∫ 0 dx$_{ν}$x$_{ν}$J ( x$_{ν}$, v$_{j}$ ) . (30)$$\n\n$$S /λ = 3 2 , (31)$$\n\nwhere η = v F ( p − p F ), v F and p F are the Fermi velocity and Fermi momentum, respectively; and δ 2 = Δ $^{2}$F ( ϑ ), Δ is the energy gap and F ( ϑ ) describes the dependence of the gap on the angle ϑ between the quantization axis and the particle momentum. For different types of nu- cleon superfluidity, the expression of F ( ϑ ) is completely different, which can be seen in [24–26].\n\nIn the case of ξ ≪ 1, to the lowest order we have\n\nwhich is the same as S 0 /λ 0 . This means that the nucleon superfluidity doesn’t change the value of R /ζ .\n\nIn summary, we have studied the radiative viscous co- efficient of superfluid npe matter, and find that for di- rect Urca process, the ratio of radiative viscosity to bulk viscosity in the lowest order of ξ yielded by Sa’d and Schaffner-Bielich [20] for normal nucleons could be ex- tended to the superfluid case. In fact, it can be seen from our calculations that this is correct for modified Urca process, too. Thus, to the lowest order of ξ , the relation factor of 3 2 between the radiative viscosity and the bulk viscosity of npe matter is a generic one.\n\nThe following are the extensive discussions to our re- sult:\n\nthen the net reaction rate is\n\nand the neutrino emissivity due to the departure from β -equilibrium is\n\nFirst, Although we have S /λ = S 0 /λ 0 in the low- est order, the viscosities in the superfluid case are dif- ferent from these in the non-superfluid case. The bulk and radiative viscous coefficients could be easily ex- pressed as ζ = ζ 0 R Γ and R = R 0 R$_{ϵ}$ , where ζ 0 and R 0 are the viscosities in the non-superfluid case, R Γ = ΔΓ( ξ, v$_{j}$ ) / ΔΓ( ξ ) and R$_{ϵ}$ = ˙ E loss ( ξ, v$_{j}$ ) / ˙ E loss ( ξ ) are the reduction factors caused by superfluidity. Of course, our result shows that to the lowest order of ξ , R$_{ϵ}$ equals to R Γ (note that R Γ has been calculated numerically by Haensel et al. [4, 5]).\n\nSecond, our result satisfies the general relationship ∂ ˙ E loss /∂δµ = 3(Γ$_{ν}$ − Γ$_{ν}$), which has been found by Flores- Tuli´ an and Reisenegger [27]. They found that this rela- tionship holds both in the case of normal nucleons and in the case of superfluid nucleons, and both in linear case and for precise solutions.\n\nFinally, our result based on the fact that to the low- est order of ξ , the existence of superfluidity don’t change the relationship between the neutrino emissivity due to the departure from β -equilibrium and energy dissipation in the form of heat. Nevertheless, it is not correct for higher order calculations. As shown in [21, 23], for nor- mal matter ΔΓ and ˙ E loss can be solved analytically as polynomials of ξ , while for superfluid matter they must be solved numerically. As a result, we expect that in non-linear regime, the ratio of radiative viscosity to bulk viscosity of superfluid matter no longer equals to that of normal matter. However, the calculation in the non- linear case is far more complicated and we will consider it in our further study.\n\nNote that, the leading order of ΔΓ is the first order of ξ , while for ˙ E loss it is the second order of ξ .\n\nUnlike normal matter, Eqs.(29) and (30) haven’t exact analytical solutions. However, one can find that ΔΓ δµ is in proportion to ˙ E loss , thus we can easily obtain\n\n- [1] Finzi A and Wolf R A 1968 Astrophys. J. 153 835\n\n- [2] Sawyer R F 1989 Phys. Rev. D 39 3804\n\n- [3] Haensel P and Schaeffer R 1992 Phys. Rev. D 45 4708\n\n- [9] Gupta V K, Wadhwa A, Singh S and Anand J D 1997 Pramana - J. Phys. 49 443\n\n- [10] Lindblom L and Owen B J 2002 Phys. Rev. D 65 063006\n\n- [11] Zheng X P, Yang S H and Li J R 2002 Phys. Lett. B 548 29\n\n- [12] Zheng X P, Liu X W, Kang M and Yang S H 2004 Phys. Rev. C 70 015803\n\n- [4] Haensel P, Levenfish K P and Yakovlev D G 2000 Astron. Astrophys. 357 1157\n\n- [5] Haensel P, Levenfish K P and Yakovlev D G 2001 Astron. Astrophys. 372 130\n\n- [6] Wang Q D and Lu T 1984 Phys. Lett. B 148 211\n\n- [7] Sawyer R F 1989 Phys. Lett. B 233 412\n\n- [8] Madsen J 1992 Phys. Rev. D 46 3290\n\n- [13] Zheng X P, Kang M, Liu X W and Yang S H 2005 Phys. Rev. C 72 025809\n\n- [14] Pan N N, Zheng X P, and Li J R 2006 Mon. Not. Roy." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7939914282842697, + "doc_id": "c7a4090ba28287f0485c521db0454f710da988633bfd1fae808df1630cce541c", + "edit_distance": 0.1524822695035461, + "f1_score": 0.9172259507829977, + "meteor": 0.8694954432764245, + "precision": 0.9403669724770642, + "pred_md": "arXiv:1001.2648v1 [physics.chem-ph] 15 Jan 2010\n\n## Models of electrolyte solutions from molecular descriptions: The example of NaCl solutions\n\nJohn Jairo Molina 1 2 3 , , , ∗ Jean-Fran¸ cois Dufrˆ eche 1 2 3 , , , † Mathieu Salanne 1 2 , , Olivier Bernard 1 2 , , Marie Jardat 1 2 , , and Pierre Turq 1 2 , 1 UPMC-Universit' e Paris 06, UMR 7195, PECSA, F-75005 Paris, France 2 CNRS, UMR 7195, PECSA, F-75005 Paris, France 3 Institut de Chimie S' eparative de Marcoule (ICSM), UMR 5257 CEA-CNRS-Universit' e Montpellier 2, Site de Marcoule,\n\nBˆ atiment 426, BP 17171, 30207 Bagnols-sur-C' eze Cedex, France\n\nWe present a method to derive implicit solvent models of electrolyte solutions from all-atom descriptions; providing analytical expressions of the thermodynamic and structural properties of the ions consistent with the underlying explicit solvent representation. Effective potentials between ions in solution are calculated to perform perturbation theory calculations, in order to derive the best possible description in terms of charged hard spheres. Applying this method to NaCl solutions yields excellent agreement with the all-atom model, provided ion association is taken into account.\n\nSince the pioneering works of Debye, Huckel, and Onsager, electrolyte solutions have been commonly described by continuous solvent models, for which the McMillan-Mayer theory [1] provides a rigorous statistical-mechanical foundation. Within that level of description, simple phenomenological models such as the primitive model (PM), for which the ions are assimilated to charged hard spheres [2], can lead to explicit formulas for the thermodynamic and structural properties (e.g., with the help of the mean spherical approximation (MSA) [3] or the binding MSA (BIMSA) [4]). These models are the most practical to use [5], since they allow for a direct link between the experimental measurements and the microscopic parameters of the system. Nevertheless, they ignore the molecular structure of the solvent. Consequently, they cannot properly account for the complex specific effects of the ions, which appear in numerous biological, chemical, and physical interfacial phenomena [6, 7], without further developments.\n\nAn alternative procedure consists in carrying out molecular simulations, where both the solvent and solute are treated explicitly. After a rigorous averaging over the solvent configurations, a coarse-grained description of the ions, which still includes the effect of the solvent structure, can be obtained [8-11]. However, this set of methods is purely numeric; they do not provide any analytical expression for thermodynamic quantities. They are therefore restricted to simple geometries [12, 13] (bulk solutions or planar interfaces). The description of complex systems, such as porous or electrochemical materials, is still based on continuous solvent models [14].\n\nIn this letter we present a method aimed at bridging the gap between analytical and numerical approaches. It is based on the application of liquid perturbation theory (LPT) [15] to effective ion-ion potentials extracted from\n\n∗ Electronic address: john.molina@etu.upmc.fr\n\n† Electronic address: jean-francois.dufreche@upmc.fr\n\nmolecular dynamics (MD) results. Different approximations of the PM are employed for the case of NaCl electrolyte solutions: a two component model (MSA2), that only takes free ions into account, and two different three component models (MSA3 and BIMSA3), which include a third species (the contact ion pair). As we proceed to show, LPT allows us to select the best simple model which accurately accounts for the thermodynamics and the physical-chemistry of the system.\n\nThe first stage consists in calculating the McMillanMayer effective ion-ion interaction potentials V eff ij ( r ), by inverting the radial distribution functions (RDF) g ij ( r ) obtained by MD. The simulations were carried out on a box of 2000 water molecules and 48 NaCl pairs using the same interaction potentials as in reference [16]. This setup corresponds to a concentration of 0 64 mol l . -1 . NPT ensemble sampling at standard pressure and temperature was enforced, with a time step of 1 fs and a pressure bath coupling constant of 1 ps. An equilibration run of 0.25 ns was followed by a production run of 0.6 ns for five different initial configurations. The averages of the resulting RDF were then used for the potential inversion via the HNC closure [15]. These effective potentials are assumed to be concentration independent and will be used for simulations at all concentrations.\n\nSubtracting the long-range Coulombic potential V LR ij ( r ) (which depends on the dielectric constant of the solvent) from V eff ij ( r ), we obtain the short-range contribution V SR ij ( r ) to the effective potentials. These are given in Fig. 1 (species 1 and 2 refer to Na + and Cl -free ions, respectively). All the short-range potentials exhibit oscillations corresponding to the solvent layering between the ions, but this effect is particularly important for the cation-anion interaction: a considerable potential barrier ( /greaterorsimilar 2 k B T ) separates the first two attractive wells. To serve as a reference, Monte Carlo (MC) simulations were performed with these effective potentials; a comparison between MD and MC RDF is also provided in Fig. 1. The excellent agreement between both sets of RDF validates the HNC inversion procedure [17], and allows us to com-", + "recall": 0.8951965065502183, + "true_md": "arXiv:1001.2648v1 [physics.chem-ph] 15 Jan 2010\n\n# Models of electrolyte solutions from molecular descriptions: The example of NaCl solutions\n\nJohn Jairo Molina 1 , 2 , $^{3}$, ∗ Jean-Fran¸cois Dufrˆ eche 1 , 2 , $^{3}$, † Mathieu Salanne 1 , $^{2}$, Olivier Bernard1 , $^{2}$, Marie Jardat1 , $^{2}$, and Pierre Turq1 , 2\n\nSalanne $^{2}$, Olivier Bernard1 $^{2}$, Marie Jardat1 $^{2}$, and Pierre Turq1 1 UPMC-Universit´e Paris 06, UMR 7195, PECSA, F-75005 Paris, France 2\n\nUPMC-Universit´e Paris 06, UMR 7195, PECSA, F-75005 Paris, France 2 CNRS, UMR 7195, PECSA, F-75005 Paris, France 3\n\nCNRS, UMR 7195, PECSA, F-75005 Paris, France 3 Institut de Chimie S´eparative de Marcoule (ICSM), UMR 5257 CEA–CNRS–Universit´e Montpellier 2, Site de Marcoule, Bˆ atiment 426, BP 17171, 30207 Bagnols-sur-C`eze Cedex, France\n\nWe present a method to derive implicit solvent models of electrolyte solutions from all-atom descriptions; providing analytical expressions of the thermodynamic and structural properties of the ions consistent with the underlying explicit solvent representation. Effective potentials between ions in solution are calculated to perform perturbation theory calculations, in order to derive the best possible description in terms of charged hard spheres. Applying this method to NaCl solutions yields excellent agreement with the all-atom model, provided ion association is taken into account.\n\nSince the pioneering works of Debye, H¨ uckel, and Onsager, electrolyte solutions have been commonly described by continuous solvent models, for which the McMillan-Mayer theory [1] provides a rigorous statistical-mechanical foundation. Within that level of description, simple phenomenological models such as the primitive model (PM), for which the ions are assimi- lated to charged hard spheres [2], can lead to explicit formulas for the thermodynamic and structural proper- ties (e.g., with the help of the mean spherical approxima- tion (MSA) [3] or the binding MSA (BIMSA) [4]). These models are the most practical to use [5], since they allow for a direct link between the experimental measurements and the microscopic parameters of the system. Never- theless, they ignore the molecular structure of the sol- vent. Consequently, they cannot properly account for the complex specific effects of the ions, which appear in numerous biological, chemical, and physical interfacial phenomena [6, 7], without further developments.\n\nAn alternative procedure consists in carrying out molecular simulations, where both the solvent and solute are treated explicitly. After a rigorous averaging over the solvent configurations, a coarse-grained description of the ions, which still includes the effect of the solvent structure, can be obtained [8–11]. However, this set of methods is purely numeric; they do not provide any an- alytical expression for thermodynamic quantities. They are therefore restricted to simple geometries [12, 13] (bulk solutions or planar interfaces). The description of com- plex systems, such as porous or electrochemical materi- als, is still based on continuous solvent models [14].\n\nIn this letter we present a method aimed at bridging the gap between analytical and numerical approaches. It is based on the application of liquid perturbation theory (LPT) [15] to effective ion-ion potentials extracted from\n\n$^{∗}$Electronic address: john.molina@etu.upmc.fr\n\n$^{†}$Electronic address: jean-francois.dufreche@upmc.fr\n\nmolecular dynamics (MD) results. Different approxima- tions of the PM are employed for the case of NaCl elec- trolyte solutions: a two component model (MSA2), that only takes free ions into account, and two different three component models (MSA3 and BIMSA3), which include a third species (the contact ion pair). As we proceed to show, LPT allows us to select the best simple model which accurately accounts for the thermodynamics and the physical-chemistry of the system.\n\nThe first stage consists in calculating the McMillan- Mayer effective ion-ion interaction potentials V eff ij ( r ), by inverting the radial distribution functions (RDF) g$_{ij}$ ( r ) obtained by MD. The simulations were carried out on a box of 2000 water molecules and 48 NaCl pairs us- ing the same interaction potentials as in reference [16]. This setup corresponds to a concentration of 0 . $_{64 mol l}$− $^{1}$. NPT ensemble sampling at standard pressure and tem- perature was enforced, with a time step of 1 fs and a pressure bath coupling constant of 1 ps. An equilibration run of 0.25 ns was followed by a production run of 0.6 ns for five different initial configurations. The averages of the resulting RDF were then used for the potential inver- sion via the HNC closure [15]. These effective potentials are assumed to be concentration independent and will be used for simulations at all concentrations.\n\nSubtracting the long-range Coulombic potential V LR ij ( r ) (which depends on the dielectric constant of the solvent) from V eff ij ( r ), we obtain the short-range contri- bution V SR ij ( r ) to the effective potentials. These are given in Fig. 1 (species 1 and 2 refer to Na + and Cl − free ions, respectively). All the short-range potentials exhibit os- cillations corresponding to the solvent layering between the ions, but this effect is particularly important for the cation-anion interaction: a considerable potential barrier ( ≳ 2 k$_{B}$T ) separates the first two attractive wells. To serve as a reference, Monte Carlo (MC) simulations were performed with these effective potentials; a comparison between MD and MC RDF is also provided in Fig. 1. The excellent agreement between both sets of RDF validates the HNC inversion procedure [17], and allows us to com-" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.2579955774894931, + "doc_id": "5b537a6f3bc60394b838affe41f45a762d9b1f063c0ee195f078c6c2987f2310", + "edit_distance": 0.6329896907216495, + "f1_score": 0.875, + "meteor": 0.4387891862891734, + "precision": 0.9233128834355828, + "pred_md": "\n\nA detailed analysis about the stability of the steady-state can be found such as in [28]. In this paper, we assume the steadystate solution is stable.\n\nLaser linwidth: Suppose the quantum fluctuation is small, the evolution of the fluctuations can be obtained by making a linearization of the c-number Langevin equations around the steady-state solution. Then the measured spectra of field fluctuations will be directly related to these quantities. By Fourier transformations of the linearized equation, we get the amplitude and phase quadrature components δ X ( ω ) and δ Y ( ω ) [26]. Well above threshold, one can neglect the amplitude fluctuations, and the linewidth inside the cavity is related to the phase-di ff usion coe ffi cient [25]. For small fluctuation of laser phase, the spectrum of phase fluctuations is simply related to the spectrum of the phase quadrature component of the field fluctuations, namely,\n\n\n\nIn the region γ ab /lessmuch T -1 /lessmuch τ -1 /lessmuch κ/ 2, as in the recently proposed active optical clock [15] with atomic beam. The phase quadrature component of the field fluctuations can be expressed as\n\n\n\nSince the time τ and T is much shorter than the time scale of the atomic dampings, we can neglect the dampings when calculate Ai , Bi , Ci . By using\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nwe get\n\n\n\n3\n\nwhere Ω R is the Rabi frequency on resonance, DST = g Nass 2 ˜ / I 0 γ ab , DRam = g R 2 / 2 I 0 γ 2 ab , and ∆ 2 = ω -( ω a 2 -ω b 2 ) presents the detuning in the free drift region. p is a parameter, which characterizes the pumping statistics: a Poissonian excitation statistics corresponds to p = 0 , and for a regular statistics we have p = 1.\n\nThen the linewidth of Ramsey laser with bad cavity is given by\n\n\n\nSince DST / DRam /lessmuch 1 in our situation, and in the case of maximal photon number, the steady state value of ˜ Nass is about R τ/ 2. Then we get the\n\n\n\nFrom the expression above, we find that the pumping statistic can influence the linewidth. For regular injection ( p = 1), the linewidth is the narrowest, while for Poissonian injection ( p = 0), the linewidth is the broadest. But even for regular injection, the linewidth is larger than the case of one cavity. That means the mechanism of separated-field does not play the role in reducing the linewidth as in the conventional optical Ramsey method, which is counter-intuitive. However, the separated fields are indispensable for any phase detection like atom interferometry. The details about the method of active atom interferometry will appear elsewhere.\n\nOur method of Ramsey laser is suitable for any atoms with metastable energy level, as an example, we choose the transition from the metastable state 4 s 4 p 3 P 1 to the ground state 4 s 2 1 S 0 of 40 Ca to check the striking feature of this laser: subnatural linewidth. As mentioned in [29], the corresponding natural linewidth of the metastable state 4 s 4 p 3 P 1 is 320Hz. As in the recently proposed active optical clock with atomic beam [15], the velocity of the atoms in thermal atomic beam is about 500m s, and the length of the interaction region is about / 1mm, then the time for the atom to traverse each coherentinteraction region is on the order of magnitude of 1 µ s. If a bad cavity with κ is on the order of 10 7 Hz, the relation κ/ 2 /greatermuch τ -1 is satisfied. Then when g is on the order of the magnitude of kHz, which can be easily achieved for current technique [30], from the linewidth expression of Eq.(16) the order of magnitude of linewidth is below 1 Hz. This means the linewidth of a Ramsey laser can be more than two orders of magnitude narrower than the atomic natural linewidth, therefore our Ramsey method provides a new subnatural spectroscopy technique. And since it is stimulated-emission spectrum, it overcomes the di ffi culty in other subnatural linewidth spectroscopy schemes where the quick reduction of signal to noise ratio is a formidable limit. We should point out that this Ramsey laser does not escape the limitation of all active optical clock: in order to pump atoms to the excited state effectively and to be stimulated emit photon during the lifetime of a metastable state, this new method will only be applicable to some special transitions [17].", + "recall": 0.8314917127071824, + "true_md": "3\n\n$$˜ N$_{bss}$ = R τ 2 [ 1 − C$_{0}$ − C$_{1}$ + C$_{2}$ g τ √ κ R ( B$_{0}$ − B$_{1}$ + B$_{2}$ ) ] .$$\n\n$$D = γ 2 ab ( κ/ 2 + γ$_{ab}$ ) 2 { D$_{ST}$ + D$_{Ram}$ [2 − p sin$^{2}$( Ω$_{R}$ τ ) sin$^{2}$( Δ$_{2}$ T $^{)]}$} . (11)$$\n\n$$( δϕ $^{2}$)$_{ω}$ = 1 I$_{0}$ ( δ Y $^{2}$)$_{ω}$ .$$\n\n$$( δϕ $^{2}$)$_{ω}$ ≈ ( κ/ 2 + γ$_{ab}$ ) 2 I$_{0}$ ω $^{2}$[( κ/ 2 + γ$_{ab}$ ) 2 + ω $^{2}$] g 2 4( κ/ 2 + γ$_{ab}$ ) 2 { 4 γ$_{ab}$ ˜ N$_{ass}$ + 2 R [( A$_{0}$ + B$_{0}$ ) + ( A$_{2}$ + B$_{2}$ )] + Rp [( C$_{0}$ − C ∗ $_{0}$) 2 + ( C$_{1}$ − C ∗ $_{1}$) 2 + ( C$_{2}$ − C ∗ $_{2}$) $^{$^{2}$]}$} . (9)$$\n\n$$A$_{0}$ = cos 2 ( Ω$_{R}$ 2 τ ) , A$_{1}$ = cos 2 ( Ω$_{R}$ 2 τ ) ,$$\n\n$$A$_{2}$ = 1 − sin 2 ( Ω$_{R}$ τ ) cos 2 ( Δ$_{2}$ 2 T ) , B$_{0}$ = sin 2 ( Ω$_{R}$ 2 τ ) ,$$\n\n$$B$_{1}$ = sin 2 ( Ω$_{R}$ 2 τ ) , B$_{2}$ = sin 2 ( Ω$_{R}$ τ ) cos 2 ( Δ$_{2}$ T 2 ) ,$$\n\n$$( C$_{0}$ − C ∗ $_{0}$) 2 = 0 , ( C$_{1}$ − C ∗ $_{1}$) 2 = − sin 2 ( Ω$_{R}$ τ ) sin 2 ( Δ$_{2}$ T ) ,$$\n\n$$( C$_{2}$ − C ∗ $_{2}$) 2 = − sin 2 ( Ω$_{R}$ τ ) sin 2 ( Δ$_{2}$ T ) ,$$\n\n$$( δϕ $^{2}$)$_{ω}$ = ( κ/ 2 + γ$_{ab}$ ) 2 ω $^{2}$[( κ/ 2 + γ$_{ab}$ ) 2 + ω $^{2}$)] γ 2 ab ( κ/ 2 + γ$_{ab}$ ) 2 { D$_{ST}$ + D$_{Ram}$ [2 − p sin$^{2}$( Ω$_{R}$ τ ) sin$^{2}$( Δ$_{2}$ T $^{)]}$} , (10)$$\n\n$$D ≈ 2 g 2 κ [2 − p sin$^{2}$( Ω$_{R}$ τ ) sin$^{2}$( Δ$_{2}$ T )] . (12)$$\n\nA detailed analysis about the stability of the steady-state can be found such as in [28]. In this paper, we assume the steady- state solution is stable.\n\nLaser linwidth: Suppose the quantum fluctuation is small, the evolution of the fluctuations can be obtained by making a linearization of the c-number Langevin equations around the steady-state solution. Then the measured spectra of field flu c- tuations will be directly related to these quantities. By Fourier transformations of the linearized equation, we get the ampli- tude and phase quadrature components δ X ( ω ) and δ Y ( ω ) [26]. Well above threshold, one can neglect the amplitude fluctu- ations, and the linewidth inside the cavity is related to the phase-di ff usion coe ffi cient [25]. For small fluctuation of laser phase, the spectrum of phase fluctuations is simply related t o the spectrum of the phase quadrature component of the field fluctuations, namely,\n\nIn the region γ$_{ab}$ ≪ T − 1 ≪ τ − 1 ≪ κ/ 2, as in the recently proposed active optical clock [15] with atomic beam. The phase quadrature component of the field fluctuations can be expressed as\n\nSince the time τ and T is much shorter than the time scale of the atomic dampings, we can neglect the dampings when calculate A$_{i}$ , B$_{i}$ , C$_{i}$ . By using\n\nwe get\n\nSince D$_{ST}$ / D$_{Ram}$ ≪ 1 in our situation, and in the case of max- imal photon number, the steady state value of ˜ N$_{ass}$ is about R τ/ 2. Then we get the\n\nwhere Ω$_{R}$ is the Rabi frequency on resonance, D$_{ST}$ = g 2 ˜ N$_{ass}$ / I$_{0}$ γ$_{ab}$ , D$_{Ram}$ = g $^{2}$R / 2 I$_{0}$ γ 2 $_{ab}$, and Δ$_{2}$ = ω − ( ω$_{a}$$\\_{2}$ − ω$\\_{b}$$_{2}$ ) presents the detuning in the free drift region. p is a parameter, which characterizes the pump- ing statistics: a Poissonian excitation statistics corresponds to p = 0 , and for a regular statistics we have p = 1.\n\nThen the linewidth of Ramsey laser with bad cavity is given by\n\nFrom the expression above, we find that the pumping statis- tic can influence the linewidth. For regular injection ( p = 1), the linewidth is the narrowest, while for Poissonian injection ( p = 0), the linewidth is the broadest. But even for regular injection, the linewidth is larger than the case of one cavity. That means the mechanism of separated-field does not play the role in reducing the linewidth as in the conventional opti- cal Ramsey method, which is counter-intuitive. However, the separated fields are indispensable for any phase detection l ike atom interferometry. The details about the method of active atom interferometry will appear elsewhere.\n\nOur method of Ramsey laser is suitable for any atoms with metastable energy level, as an example, we choose the tran- sition from the metastable state 4 s 4 p $^{3}$P$_{1}$ to the ground state 4 s $^{2 1}$S$_{0}$ of $^{40}$Ca to check the striking feature of this laser: sub- natural linewidth. As mentioned in [29], the corresponding natural linewidth of the metastable state 4 s 4 p $^{3}$P$_{1}$ is 320Hz. As in the recently proposed active optical clock with atomic beam [15], the velocity of the atoms in thermal atomic beam is about 500m / s, and the length of the interaction region is about 1mm, then the time for the atom to traverse each coherent- interaction region is on the order of magnitude of 1 µ s. If a bad cavity with κ is on the order of 10$^{7}$Hz, the relation κ/ 2 ≫ τ − 1 is satisfied. Then when g is on the order of the magnitude of kHz, which can be easily achieved for current technique [30], from the linewidth expression of Eq.(16) the order of magnitude of linewidth is below 1 Hz. This means the linewidth of a Ramsey laser can be more than two or- ders of magnitude narrower than the atomic natural linewidth, therefore our Ramsey method provides a new subnatural spec- troscopy technique. And since it is stimulated-emission spec- trum, it overcomes the di ffi culty in other subnatural linewidth spectroscopy schemes where the quick reduction of signal to noise ratio is a formidable limit. We should point out that this Ramsey laser does not escape the limitation of all active optical clock: in order to pump atoms to the excited state ef- fectively and to be stimulated emit photon during the lifetime of a metastable state, this new method will only be applicable to some special transitions [17]." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.24758131392213337, + "doc_id": "2d5e8a90f5fc5fc574f0575797401794bbb23db8d6779e18bcd10be0794e2db3", + "edit_distance": 0.7886125654450262, + "f1_score": 0.8559837728194727, + "meteor": 0.3265221195149932, + "precision": 0.9134199134199135, + "pred_md": "rank and the construction in (2) for an isometric extension, we can write an isometric extension U N c for N c as\n\n\n\nThe sets {| ξ i 〉 E } and {| ζ i 〉 A ' } each do not necessarily consist of orthonormal states, but the set {| 〉 i B } does. Tracing over the system E gives the original channel from system A ' to B :\n\n\n\nLet Σ denote the matrix with elements [Σ] i,j = 〈 ζ i | A ' σ ζ | j 〉 A ' , a representation of the input state σ , and let Γ denote the matrix with elements [Γ] i,j = 〈 ξ j | ξ i 〉 E . Then, from (9), it is clear that the output of the channel is the Hadamard product ∗ of Σ and Γ † with respect to the basis {| 〉 i B } :\n\n\n\nFor this reason, such a channel is known as a Hadamard channel.\n\nHadamard channels are degradable. If Bob performs a von Neumann measurement of his state in the basis {| 〉 i B } and prepares the state | ξ i 〉 E conditional on the outcome of the measurement, this procedure simulates the complementary channel ( N c ) A ' → E and also implies that the degrading map D B → E is entanglementbreaking. To be more precise, the Kraus operators of the degrading map D B → E are {| ξ i 〉 E 〈 | i B } so that\n\n\n\ndemonstrating that this degrading map effectively simulates the complementary channel ( N c H ) A ' → E . Note that we can view this degrading map as the composition of two maps: a first map D B → Y 1 performs the von Neumann measurement, leading to a classical variable Y , and a second map D Y → E 2 performs the state preparation, conditional on the value of the classical variable Y . We can therefore write D B → E = D Y → E 2 · D B → Y 1 . This observation is crucial to our proof of the single-letterization of both the CQ and CE capacity regions of Hadamard channels. These structural relationships are summarized\n\nin the following commutative diagram:\n\nWe show in the next two sections that generalized dephasing channels and cloning channels are both members of the Hadamard class because their complementary channels are entanglement-breaking.\n\n## 3. Generalized Dephasing Channels\n\nGeneralized dephasing channels model physical processes where there is no loss of energy but there is a loss of quantum coherence [61], a type of quantum noise that dominates for example in superconducting qubits [56]. The respective input and output systems A ' and B of such channels are of the same dimension. Let {| 〉 i A ' } and {| 〉 i B } be some respective preferred orthonormal bases for these systems, the first of which we call the dephasing basis. The channel does not affect any state that is diagonal in the dephasing basis, but it mixes coherent superpositions of these basis states.\n\nAn isometric extension U A ' → BE N GD of a generalized dephasing channel N A ' → B GD has the form:\n\n\n\nwhere the set {| ϑ i 〉 E } is not necessarily an orthonormal set. The output of a generalized dephasing channel is as follows:\n\n\n\nIf the states | ϑ i 〉 E are orthonormal, the channel is a completely dephasing channel ∆ A ' → B :\n\n\n\nWe obtain the complementary channel of a generalized dephasing channel by tracing over Bob's system B :\n\n\n\nwhich we recognize to be an entanglement-breaking channel of the form in (7). Thus, a generalized dephasing\n\n5", + "recall": 0.8053435114503816, + "true_md": "5\n\nin the following commutative diagram:\n\nrank and the construction in (2) for an isometric exten- sion, we can write an isometric extension U$_{N}$ c for N c as\n\nThe sets {| ξ$_{i}$ 〉 $^{E}$} and {| ζ$_{i}$ 〉 A $^{′}$} each do not necessarily con- sist of orthonormal states, but the set {| i 〉 $^{B}$} does. Trac- ing over the system E gives the original channel from system A ′ to B :\n\nWe show in the next two sections that generalized de- phasing channels and cloning channels are both mem- bers of the Hadamard class because their complementary channels are entanglement-breaking.\n\n$$B A ′ N H ✲ Y (classical) D$_{1}$ ❄ . . . . . E D$_{2}$ ❄ . . . . N c H ✲$$\n\n$$U$_{N}$ c σU † N c = ∑ i,j | ξ$_{i}$ 〉 E 〈 ζ$_{i}$ | A ′ σ | ζ$_{j}$ 〉 A ′ 〈 ξ$_{j}$ | E ⊗ | i 〉 B 〈 j | B = ∑ i,j 〈 ζ$_{i}$ | A ′ σ | ζ$_{j}$ 〉 A ′ | ξ$_{i}$ 〉 E 〈 ξ$_{j}$ | E ⊗ | i 〉 B 〈 j | B . (8)$$\n\n$$N A $^{′}$→ B H ( σ ) = ∑ i,j 〈 ζ$_{i}$ | A ′ σ | ζ$_{j}$ 〉 A ′ 〈 ξ$_{j}$ | ξ$_{i}$ 〉 E | i 〉 B 〈 j | B . (9)$$\n\nGeneralized dephasing channels model physical pro- cesses where there is no loss of energy but there is a loss of quantum coherence [61], a type of quantum noise that dominates for example in superconducting qubits [56]. The respective input and output systems A ′ and B of such channels are of the same dimension. Let {| i 〉 A $^{′}$} and {| i 〉 $^{B}$} be some respective preferred orthonormal bases for these systems, the first of which we call the dephas- ing basis. The channel does not affect any state that is diagonal in the dephasing basis, but it mixes coherent superpositions of these basis states. $^{′}$→\n\nLet Σ denote the matrix with elements [Σ]$_{i,j}$ = 〈 ζ$_{i}$ | A ′ σ | ζ$_{j}$ 〉 A ′ , a representation of the input state σ , and let Γ denote the matrix with elements [Γ]$_{i,j}$ = 〈 ξ$_{j}$ | ξ$_{i}$ 〉 $^{E}$. Then, from (9), it is clear that the output of the channel is the Hadamard product ∗ of Σ and Γ † with respect to the basis {| i 〉 $^{B}$} :\n\nFor this reason, such a channel is known as a Hadamard channel.\n\nHadamard channels are degradable. If Bob per- forms a von Neumann measurement of his state in the basis {| i 〉 $^{B}$} and prepares the state | ξ$_{i}$ 〉 E conditional on the outcome of the measurement, this procedure sim- ulates the complementary channel ( N $^{c}$) A $^{′}$→ E and also implies that the degrading map D B → E is entanglement- breaking. To be more precise, the Kraus operators of the degrading map D B → E are {| ξ$_{i}$ 〉 E 〈 i | $^{B}$} so that\n\nsuperpositions of these basis states. An isometric extension U A $^{′}$→ BE N$_{GD}$ of a generalized de- phasing channel N A $^{′}$→ B GD has the form:\n\nwhere the set {| ϑ$_{i}$ 〉 $^{E}$} is not necessarily an orthonormal set. The output of a generalized dephasing channel is as follows:\n\n## 3. Generalized Dephasing Channels\n\n$$U A $^{′}$→ BE N$_{GD}$ ≡ ∑ i | i 〉 B 〈 i | A ′ ⊗ | ϑ$_{i}$ 〉 E , (10)$$\n\n$$N A $^{′}$→ B H ( σ ) = Σ ∗ Γ $^{†}$.$$\n\n$$N$_{GD}$ ( σ ) = ∑ i,j 〈 ϑ$_{j}$ | ϑ$_{i}$ 〉 E 〈 i | σ | j 〉 A ′ | i 〉〈 j | $^{B}$.$$\n\n$$D B → $^{E}$( N A $^{′}$→ B H ( σ )) = ∑ i | ξ$_{i}$ 〉 E 〈 i | B N A $^{′}$→ B ( σ ) | i 〉 B 〈 ξ$_{i}$ | E = ∑ i 〈 i | A ′ σ | i 〉 A ′ | ξ$_{i}$ 〉 〈 ξ$_{i}$ | E ,$$\n\n$$Δ A $^{′}$→ $^{B}$( σ ) ≡ ∑ i | i 〉 $^{B}$〈 i | A $^{′}$σ | i 〉 A $^{′}$〈 i | $^{B}$.$$\n\nIf the states | ϑ$_{i}$ 〉 E are orthonormal, the channel is a com- pletely dephasing channel Δ A $^{′}$→ $^{B}$:\n\nWe obtain the complementary channel of a generalized dephasing channel by tracing over Bob’s system B :\n\ndemonstrating that this degrading map effectively simu- lates the complementary channel ( N c $_{H}$) A $^{′}$→ $^{E}$. Note that we can view this degrading map as the composition of two maps: a first map D B → Y 1 performs the von Neumann measurement, leading to a classical variable Y , and a sec- ond map D Y → E 2 performs the state preparation, condi- tional on the value of the classical variable Y . We can therefore write D B → E = D Y → E 2 ◦ D B → Y 1 . This obser- vation is crucial to our proof of the single-letterization of both the CQ and CE capacity regions of Hadamard channels. These structural relationships are summarized\n\nwhich we recognize to be an entanglement-breaking chan- nel of the form in (7). Thus, a generalized dephasing\n\n$$Tr$_{B}$ $^{{}$U$_{N}$$_{GD}$ σU † N$_{GD}$ } = ∑ i 〈 i | A ′ σ | i 〉 A ′ | ϑ$_{i}$ 〉 〈 ϑ$_{i}$ | E ,$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.18992019737929722, + "doc_id": "de54e4216feb64768f2fb40721b0a78e125d3d1c9776a2eec67dd9ef913c5082", + "edit_distance": 0.7926221335992024, + "f1_score": 0.8612099644128114, + "meteor": 0.2874085175986745, + "precision": 0.9097744360902256, + "pred_md": "14\n\nFIG. 2: (Color online) Plot of (a) the CQ trade-off curve and (b) the CE trade-off curve of a 1 → N cloning channel for N = 1, 2, 3, 5, 8, 12, and 24. The trade-off curves for N = 1 correspond to those for the noiseless qubit channel and are the rightmost trade-off curves in each plot. In both plots, proceeding left from the N = 1 curve, we obtain trade-off curves for N = 2, 3, 5, 8, 12, and 24 and notice that they all beat a time-sharing strategy by a larger relative proportion when N increases.\n\nFIG. 2: (Color online) Plot of (a) the CQ trade-off curve and (b) the CE trade-off curve of a 1 → N cloning channel for N = 1, 2, 3, 5, 8, 12, and 24. The trade-off curves for N = 1 correspond to those for the noiseless qubit channel and are the rightmost trade-off curves in each plot. In both plots, proceeding left from the N = 1 curve, we obtain trade-off curves for N = 2, 3, 5, 8, 12, and 24 and notice that they all beat a time-sharing strategy by a larger relative proportion when N increases.\n\n\n\nThe state at the output of the isometric extension is as follows:\n\n\n\nDefining λ i ( µ ) ≡ ( N -2 ) i µ + i and ∆ N = N N ( +1) / 2 gives\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nWe can then compute the entropies H B ( ) and H B X ( | ):\n\n\n\ngiving the following expression for the Holevo information:\n\n\n\nThe above expression coincides with the expression for the classical capacity of the 1 → N cloning channel when µ = 0 (Corollary 2 in Ref. [30]):\n\n\n\nThe expression in (31) vanishes when µ = 1 2 .\n\nWenow compute the coherent information I ( A BX 〉 ) = H B X ( | ) -H E X ( | ). The following states are important in this computation:\n\n\n\n\n\nwhere η i ( µ ) ≡ ( N - -1 2 ) i µ + +1. We can then compute i the entropy H E X ( | ):\n\n\n\nand the coherent information is as follows:\n\n", + "recall": 0.8175675675675675, + "true_md": "14\n\nFIG. 2: (Color online) Plot of (a) the CQ trade-off curve and (b) the CE trade-off curve of a 1 → N cloning channel for N = 1, 2, 3, 5, 8, 12, and 24. The trade-off curves for N = 1 correspond to those for the noiseless qubit channel and are the rightmost trade-off curves in each plot. In both plots, proceeding left from the N = 1 curve, we obtain trade-off curves for N = 2, 3, 5, 8, 12, and 24 and notice that they all beat a time-sharing strategy by a larger relative proportion when N increases.\n\ngiving the following expression for the Holevo informa- tion:\n\nThe above expression coincides with the expression for the classical capacity of the 1 → N cloning channel when µ = 0 (Corollary 2 in Ref. [30]):\n\nThe state at the output of the isometric extension is as follows:\n\nThe expression in (31) vanishes when µ = 1 $_{2}$.\n\nWe now compute the coherent information I ( A 〉 BX ) = H ( B | X ) − H ( E | X ). The following states are important in this computation:\n\nDefining λ$_{i}$ ( µ ) ≡ ( N − 2 i ) µ + i and Δ$_{N}$ = N ( N + 1) / 2 gives\n\n$$I ( X ; B ) = H ( B ) − H ( B | X ) = log ( N + 1) − H ( λ$_{i}$ ( µ ) / Δ$_{N}$) , (31)$$\n\n$$| ψ$_{1}$ 〉 ABE = 1 √ Δ$_{N}$$^{[}$$^{N}$$^{−}$$^{1}$ ∑ i =0 ( $^{√}$1 − µ √ N − i | 0 〉 $^{A}$| i 〉 B + √ µ √ i + 1 | 1 〉 $^{A}$| i + 1 〉 B ) | i 〉 E ] .$$\n\n$$ρ XABE ≡ 1 2$^{[}$ | 0 〉〈 0 | X ⊗ ψ ABE 0 + | 1 〉〈 1 | X ⊗ ψ$_{1}$ ABE ] .$$\n\n$$I ( X ; B )$_{µ}$$_{=0}$ = 1 − log N + 1 Δ$_{N}$ N ∑ i =0 i log i$$\n\n$$ρ XE = 1 2$^{[}$ | 0 〉〈 0 | X ⊗ ψ E 0 + | 1 〉〈 1 | X ⊗ ψ E 1 ] , ψ E 0 = N − 1 ∑ i =0 η$_{i}$ ( µ ) Δ$_{N}$ | i 〉〈 i | $^{E}$, (32)$$\n\n$$ψ E 1 = N − 1 ∑ i =0 η$_{i}$ ( µ ) Δ$_{N}$ | N − 1 − i 〉〈 N − 1 − i | $^{E}$, (33)$$\n\n$$ρ XB = 1 2$^{[}$ | 0 〉〈 0 | X ⊗ ψ B 0 + | 1 〉〈 1 | X ⊗ ψ B 1 ] , ψ B 0 = N ∑ i =0 λ$_{i}$ ( µ ) Δ$_{N}$ | i 〉〈 i | $^{B}$, ψ B 1 = N ∑ i =0 λ$_{i}$ ( µ ) Δ$_{N}$ | N − i 〉〈 N − i | $^{B}$, (29)$$\n\n$$ρ B = 1 N + 1 N ∑ i =0 | i 〉〈 i | $^{B}$. (30)$$\n\n$$H ( E | X ) = H ( η$_{i}$ ( µ ) / Δ$_{N}$) ,$$\n\n$$I ( A 〉 BX ) = H ( λ$_{i}$ ( µ ) / Δ$_{N}$) − H ( η$_{i}$ ( µ ) / Δ$_{N}$) .$$\n\n$$H ( B ) = log ( N + 1) , H ( B | X ) = H ( λ$_{i}$ ( µ ) / Δ$_{N}$) ,$$\n\nwhere η$_{i}$ ( µ ) ≡ ( N − 1 − 2 i ) µ + i +1. We can then compute the entropy H ( E | X ):\n\nand the coherent information is as follows:\n\nWe can then compute the entropies H ( B ) and H ( B | X ):" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9455883135494523, + "doc_id": "a23d19f567f32ee32e646c33307063814ee30a1ce23ddc05f0ee9e43e1c48253", + "edit_distance": 0.4062250598563448, + "f1_score": 0.9546827794561933, + "meteor": 0.9498952987639622, + "precision": 0.977319587628866, + "pred_md": "4\n\n2009 Fermi Symposium, Washington, D.C., Nov. 2-5\n\nray emission observed by LAT is probably negligible.\n\nFurthermore, the pulsar wind interaction model of [28] predicts gamma-ray spectra that extend well above 1 GeV into the TeV domain, with possible spectral turnovers and breaks above ∼ 100 GeV. These high cutoff energies are at odds with our observed spectral break energy in the GeV range. To explain a GeV spectral break in the pulsar wind interaction model, the maximum energy of the accelerated particles should be limited to a few GeV; this scale is below the injection energies expected for electrons and positrons from the inner pulsar magnetospheres, which may range up to TeV energies [29]. Consequently, pulsar wind interactions should play a minor role in the acceleration of electrons and positrons in 47 Tuc. This is consistent with the model of [24], which suggests that the direct conversion efficiency of spin-down energy into gamma rays, η γ , is considerably larger than the efficiency η e ± for electron and positron production. We cannot exclude, however, the possibility that pulsar wind interactions contribute at a low level to the gamma-ray signal we detected from 47 Tuc. Because TeV gamma-ray emission from 47 Tuc has not yet been detected [30], we cannot place firm constraints on that contribution.\n\nUntil now the study of close binary systems in globular clusters has mainly relied on X-ray observations. Such studies, however, are hampered by the fact that a large variety of binary systems emit X-rays [cataclysmic variables (CVs), low-mass x-ray binaries (LMXBs), chromospherically active main-sequence binaries (BY Dras/RS CVns), and MSPs] and that it is difficult to assess the nature of the sources from X-ray observations alone (however, see [11]). X-ray stud-\n\n- [1] Clark, G. W., ApJ, 199, L143 (1975).\n- [2] Verbunt, F., Hut, P., IAU Symp, 125, 187 (1987).\n- [3] Gendre, B., Barret, D., Webb, N.A., A&A 403, 11 (2003).\n- [4] Pooley, D., et al., ApJ. 591, L131 (2003).\n- [5] Hut, P., et al., PASP, 104, 981 (1992).\n- [6] Alpar, M.A., Cheng, A.F., Ruderman, M.A., Shaham, J., Nature 300, 728 (1982).\n- [7] Abdo, A. A., et al., ApJ. 699, 1171 (2009).\n- [8] Abdo, A. A., et al., Science 325, 848 (2009)\n- [9] Camilo, F., Rasio, F.A., ASP Conf. Ser. 328, 147 (2005).\n- [10] McLaughlin, D.E., et al., ApJ. Suppl. Ser. 166, 249 (2006).\n- [11] Grindlay, J. E., Heinke, C., Edmonds, P.D., Murray, S. S., Science 292, 2290 (2001)\n- [12] Heinke, C. O., et al., ApJ. 625, 796 (2005).\n- [13] Camilo, F., Lorimer, D.R., Freire, P., Lyne, A.G., Manchester, R.N., ApJ. 535, 975 (2000).\n- [14] Atwood, W.B., Abdo, A.A, Ackermann, M., et al.,\n\neConf C091122\n\nies must therefore be backed up by multiwavelength identification programs that help to disentangle these source populations. High-energy gamma-ray observations are unique in that they should be sensitive mainly to the pulsar populations. This is illustrated by Fermi observations of our own Galaxy that have revealed that pulsars form the largest and most luminous point-source population in this energy domain. No CVs, LMXBs, or BY Dras have so far been detected in high-energy gamma rays [31]. It thus seems rather likely that pulsars (and MSPs in particular) are also the primary population of gamma-ray sources in globular clusters.\n\n## Acknowledgments\n\nThe Fermi LAT Collaboration is supported by NASA and the U.S. Department of Energy; the Commissariat ' a l'Energie Atomique and CNRS/Institut National de Physique Nuclaire et de Physique des Particules (France); the Agenzia Spaziale Italiana and Istituto Nazionale di Fisica Nucleare (Italy); the Ministry of Education, Culture, Sports, Science and Technology, High Energy Accelerator Research Organization (KEK), and Japan Aerospace Exploration Agency (Japan); and the K. A. Wallenberg Foundation, Swedish Research Council, and National Space Board (Sweden). Additional support was provided by the Istituto Nazionale di Astrofisica (Italy) and the Centre National Etudes Spatiales (France).\n\n- ApJ, 697, 1071 (2009)\n- [15] McLaughlin, D.E., Anderson, J., Meylan, G., et al., ApJS, 166, 249 (2006)\n- [16] Howell, J. H., Guhathakurta, P., Gilliland, R. L., PASP, 112, 1200 (2000)\n- [17] Michelson, P.F., et al., ApJ. 435, 218 (1994).\n- [18] Fierro, J.M. et al., ApJ. 447, 807 (1995).\n- [19] [Manandhar, R.P., Grindlay, J.E., Thompson, D.J., A&A Suppl. Ser., 120, 255 (1996).\n- [20] Freire, P.C et al., MNRAS, 340, 1359 (2003).\n- [21] Wei, D.M., Cheng, K.S., Lu, T., ApJ. 468, 207 (1996).\n- [22] Zhang, L., Cheng, K.S., A&A, 398, 639 (2003).\n- [23] Harding, A.K., Usov, V.V., Muslimov, A.G., ApJ, 622, 531 (2005).\n- [24] Venter, C., De Jager, O.C., ApJ, 680, L125 (2008).\n- [25] Watters, K.P., Romani, R.W., Weltevrede, P., Johnston, S., ApJ. 695, 1289 (2009).\n- [26] Harding, A.K., Muslimov, A.G., Zhang, B., ApJ, 576, 366 (2002).\n- [27] McConnell, D., Deshpande, A.A., Connors, T., Ables,", + "recall": 0.9330708661417323, + "true_md": "4\n\n2009 Fermi Symposium, Washington, D.C., Nov. 2-5\n\neConf C091122\n\n## Acknowledgments\n\nray emission observed by LAT is probably negligible.\n\nFurthermore, the pulsar wind interaction model of [28] predicts gamma-ray spectra that extend well above 1 GeV into the TeV domain, with possible spec- tral turnovers and breaks above ∼ 100 GeV. These high cutoff energies are at odds with our observed spectral break energy in the GeV range. To explain a GeV spectral break in the pulsar wind interaction model, the maximum energy of the accelerated par- ticles should be limited to a few GeV; this scale is below the injection energies expected for electrons and positrons from the inner pulsar magnetospheres, which may range up to TeV energies [29]. Conse- quently, pulsar wind interactions should play a mi- nor role in the acceleration of electrons and positrons in 47 Tuc. This is consistent with the model of [24], which suggests that the direct conversion efficiency of spin-down energy into gamma rays, η$_{γ}$ , is consid- erably larger than the efficiency η$_{e}$ ± for electron and positron production. We cannot exclude, however, the possibility that pulsar wind interactions contribute at a low level to the gamma-ray signal we detected from 47 Tuc. Because TeV gamma-ray emission from 47 Tuc has not yet been detected [30], we cannot place firm constraints on that contribution.\n\nUntil now the study of close binary systems in globular clusters has mainly relied on X-ray obser- vations. Such studies, however, are hampered by the fact that a large variety of binary systems emit X-rays [cataclysmic variables (CVs), low-mass x-ray binaries (LMXBs), chromospherically active main-sequence bi- naries (BY Dras/RS CVns), and MSPs] and that it is difficult to assess the nature of the sources from X-ray observations alone (however, see [11]). X-ray stud-\n\nies must therefore be backed up by multiwavelength identification programs that help to disentangle these source populations. High-energy gamma-ray obser- vations are unique in that they should be sensitive mainly to the pulsar populations. This is illustrated by Fermi observations of our own Galaxy that have revealed that pulsars form the largest and most lumi- nous point-source population in this energy domain. No CVs, LMXBs, or BY Dras have so far been de- tected in high-energy gamma rays [31]. It thus seems rather likely that pulsars (and MSPs in particular) are also the primary population of gamma-ray sources in globular clusters.\n\nThe Fermi LAT Collaboration is supported by NASA and the U.S. Department of Energy; the Com- missariat ` a l’Energie Atomique and CNRS/Institut National de Physique Nuclaire et de Physique des Particules (France); the Agenzia Spaziale Italiana and Istituto Nazionale di Fisica Nucleare (Italy); the Ministry of Education, Culture, Sports, Science and Technology, High Energy Accelerator Research Or- ganization (KEK), and Japan Aerospace Exploration Agency (Japan); and the K. A. Wallenberg Founda- tion, Swedish Research Council, and National Space Board (Sweden). Additional support was provided by the Istituto Nazionale di Astrofisica (Italy) and the Centre National Etudes Spatiales (France).\n\n- [1] Clark, G. W., ApJ, 199, L143 (1975).\n\n- [2] Verbunt, F., Hut, P., IAU Symp, 125, 187 (1987).\n\n- [3] Gendre, B., Barret, D., Webb, N.A., A&A 403, 11 (2003).\n\n- [4] Pooley, D., et al., ApJ. 591, L131 (2003).\n\n- [5] Hut, P., et al., PASP, 104, 981 (1992).\n\n- [6] Alpar, M.A., Cheng, A.F., Ruderman, M.A., Shaham, J., Nature 300, 728 (1982).\n\n- [7] Abdo, A. A., et al., ApJ. 699, 1171 (2009).\n\n- [8] Abdo, A. A., et al., Science 325, 848 (2009)\n\n- [9] Camilo, F., Rasio, F.A., ASP Conf. Ser. 328, 147 (2005).\n\n- [10] McLaughlin, D.E., et al., ApJ. Suppl. Ser. 166, 249 (2006).\n\n- [11] Grindlay, J. E., Heinke, C., Edmonds, P.D., Murray, S. S., Science 292, 2290 (2001)\n\n- [12] Heinke, C. O., et al., ApJ. 625, 796 (2005).\n\n- [13] Camilo, F., Lorimer, D.R., Freire, P., Lyne, A.G., Manchester, R.N., ApJ. 535, 975 (2000).\n\n- [14] Atwood, W.B., Abdo, A.A, Ackermann, M., et al.,\n\nApJ, 697, 1071 (2009)\n\n- [15] McLaughlin, D.E., Anderson, J., Meylan, G., et al., ApJS, 166, 249 (2006)\n\n- [16] Howell, J. H., Guhathakurta, P., Gilliland, R. L., PASP, 112, 1200 (2000)\n\n- [17] Michelson, P.F., et al., ApJ. 435, 218 (1994).\n\n- [18] Fierro, J.M. et al., ApJ. 447, 807 (1995).\n\n- [19] [Manandhar, R.P., Grindlay, J.E., Thompson, D.J., A&A Suppl. Ser., 120, 255 (1996).\n\n- [20] Freire, P.C et al., MNRAS, 340, 1359 (2003).\n\n- [21] Wei, D.M., Cheng, K.S., Lu, T., ApJ. 468, 207 (1996).\n\n- [22] Zhang, L., Cheng, K.S., A&A, 398, 639 (2003).\n\n- [23] Harding, A.K., Usov, V.V., Muslimov, A.G., ApJ, 622, 531 (2005).\n\n- [24] Venter, C., De Jager, O.C., ApJ, 680, L125 (2008).\n\n- [25] Watters, K.P., Romani, R.W., Weltevrede, P., John- ston, S., ApJ. 695, 1289 (2009).\n\n- [26] Harding, A.K., Muslimov, A.G., Zhang, B., ApJ, 576, 366 (2002).\n\n- [27] McConnell, D., Deshpande, A.A., Connors, T., Ables," + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8069620549686841, + "doc_id": "b8f70cf699a975c190ed9d66147c5c7afe4edf9997310143e2f064a676358074", + "edit_distance": 0.6486187845303868, + "f1_score": 0.9200524246395806, + "meteor": 0.6923943897804867, + "precision": 0.9486486486486486, + "pred_md": "ent structure superconduct in the 5-8 K range. 13,14 Linear-response and frozen-mode calculations indicate electron-phonon coupling is the likely mechanism; in particular, an ultra-soft phonon mode appears and is suggested to play a role in the superconductivity. 15-20 It is curious that in this compound, where divalent Ca (comparing it with NaAlSi) contributes one additional electron into the Si-Al sp bands, the preferred structure is that of AlB 2 ( i.e. , MgB ) with 2 sp 2 planar bonding 15,16,18 rather than the more sp 3 -like bonding in NaAlSi. Electronic structure calculations show that CaAlSi has one electron in the conduction band above a bonding-antibonding band separation at the NaAlSi band-filling level, a situation which would not appear to be particularly favorable for sp 2 bonding.\n\nIn this paper we analyze first-principles electronic structure calculations that reveal that NaAlSi is a naturally self-doped semimetal, with doping occurring-thus charge transfer occurring-between covalent bands within the Al-Si substructure, and two-dimensional (2D) free-electron-like bands within the Al layer. The resulting small Fermi surfaces (FSs) are unusual, complicated by the small but seemingly important interlayer coupling along the crystalline c -axis.\n\n## II. COMPUTATIONAL METHODS\n\nFirst-principles, local density approximation (LDA) calculations were carried out using the fullpotential local-orbital (FPLO) scheme. 21 A k -point mesh of 20 × 20 × 12 was used, and the Perdew-Wang\n\nFIG. 1: (Color online.) Crystal structure 24 of NaAlSi. Four Si atoms tetrahedrally surround an Al atom, and these Al-Si networks sandwich the Na atoms. The unit cell is outlined in black.\n\nFIG. 1: (Color online.) Crystal structure 24 of NaAlSi. Four Si atoms tetrahedrally surround an Al atom, and these Al-Si networks sandwich the Na atoms. The unit cell is outlined in black.\n\n2\n\n92 approximation 22 was applied for the exchangecorrelation potential. The experimental lattice constants obtained by Kuroiwa et al. 7 ( a = 4 119 ˚ . A and c = 7 632 A) and internal . ˚ coordinates published by Westerhaus and Schuster 23 ( z Na = 0 622, . z Si = 0 223) were used in our calculations. .\n\n## III. ELECTRONIC STRUCTURE\n\n## A. Discussion of the band structure\n\nThe calculated band structure of NaAlSi is shown in Fig. 2. As expected, the Na ion gives up its electron to the Si-Al-Si trilayer (see Fig. 1), which may have some ionic character, though it is not easy to quantify (the valence bands have much more Si character than Al character, seemingly more than suggested by their number of valence electrons). There are several readily identifiable classes of bands. Two primarily Si 3 s bands, with a small amount of Al 3 s character, are centered 9 eV below the Fermi level ε F and have a width of 2.5 eV. Above them there is a six-band complex of Al-Si s p -bands (heavily Si) that are very nearly filled, the band maximum only slightly overlapping ε F .\n\nAbove ε F lie non-bonding and antibonding bands, and the Na s bands. Among these there are a pair of distinctive bands, which can be identified most easily by their Al s character in the top panel of Fig. 2. These bands are nearly free-electron-like with large dispersions, and cross many other bands with little mixing. Along Γ-M they are degenerate and easily identifiable in Fig. 2, as they disperse up through the Fermi level to nearly 10 eV at the M point. Along ΓX, and similarly at the top of the zone Z-R, they are distinct: one again disperses upward rapidly, cutting through many other bands, also to nearly 10 eV at X; the other disperses much more weakly to X, with a bandwidth of about 2 eV. Their Al s character and nearly vanishing Si character identify these as free-electron states, in which electrons move down channels of Al atoms separately in x and y directions. (Note that their lack of k z dispersion identifies them as planar bands.) There is some coupling to the states in a parallel channel of Al atoms, giving rise to the 2 eV transverse dispersion. These bands lie 0.5 eV below ε F at Γ and contain electrons. Without interference with other bands near the Fermi level and supposing them to be isotropic in the plane (but see below), such FSs might include 3-4% of the area of the zone, which would equate to an intrinsic electron doping for two bands, both spins of around 0.12-0.16 carriers per unit cell, and the concentration of hole carriers would be equal. The anisotropy, discussed below, makes the actual", + "recall": 0.8931297709923665, + "true_md": "ent structure superconduct in the 5–8 K range. 13,14 Linear-response and frozen-mode calculations indi- cate electron-phonon coupling is the likely mech- anism; in particular, an ultra-soft phonon mode appears and is suggested to play a role in the superconductivity. 15–20 It is curious that in this compound, where divalent Ca (comparing it with NaAlSi) contributes one additional electron into the Si-Al sp bands, the preferred structure is that of AlB$_{2}$ ( i.e. , MgB$_{2}$) with sp 2 planar bonding 15,16,18 rather than the more sp $^{3}$-like bonding in NaAlSi. Electronic structure calculations show that CaAlSi has one electron in the conduction band above a bonding-antibonding band separation at the NaAlSi band-filling level, a situation which would not ap- pear to be particularly favorable for sp 2 bonding.\n\nIn this paper we analyze first-principles elec- tronic structure calculations that reveal that NaAlSi is a naturally self-doped semimetal, with doping occurring—thus charge transfer occurring—between covalent bands within the Al-Si substructure, and two-dimensional (2D) free-electron-like bands within the Al layer. The resulting small Fermi surfaces (FSs) are unusual, complicated by the small but seemingly important interlayer coupling along the crystalline c -axis.\n\n92 approximation 22 was applied for the exchange- correlation potential. The experimental lattice con- stants obtained by Kuroiwa et al. 7 ( a = 4 . 119 ˚ A and c = 7 . 632 ˚ A) and internal coordinates pub- lished by Westerhaus and Schuster 23 ( z$_{Na}$ = 0 . 622, z$_{Si}$ = 0 . 223) were used in our calculations.\n\nFirst-principles, local density approximation (LDA) calculations were carried out using the full- potential local-orbital (FPLO) scheme. 21 A k -point mesh of 20 × 20 × 12 was used, and the Perdew-Wang\n\nAbove ε$_{F}$ lie non-bonding and antibonding bands, and the Na s bands. Among these there are a pair of distinctive bands, which can be identified most eas- ily by their Al s character in the top panel of Fig. 2. These bands are nearly free-electron-like with large dispersions, and cross many other bands with little mixing. Along Γ-M they are degenerate and easily identifiable in Fig. 2, as they disperse up through the Fermi level to nearly 10 eV at the M point. Along Γ- X, and similarly at the top of the zone Z-R, they are distinct: one again disperses upward rapidly, cutting through many other bands, also to nearly 10 eV at X; the other disperses much more weakly to X, with a bandwidth of about 2 eV. Their Al s character and nearly vanishing Si character identify these as free-electron states, in which electrons move down channels of Al atoms separately in x and y direc- tions. (Note that their lack of k$_{z}$ dispersion identi- fies them as planar bands.) There is some coupling to the states in a parallel channel of Al atoms, giv- ing rise to the 2 eV transverse dispersion. These bands lie 0.5 eV below ε$_{F}$ at Γ and contain elec- trons. Without interference with other bands near the Fermi level and supposing them to be isotropic in the plane (but see below), such FSs might include 3–4% of the area of the zone, which would equate to an intrinsic electron doping for two bands, both spins of around 0.12–0.16 carriers per unit cell, and the concentration of hole carriers would be equal. The anisotropy, discussed below, makes the actual\n\nThe calculated band structure of NaAlSi is shown in Fig. 2. As expected, the Na ion gives up its elec- tron to the Si-Al-Si trilayer (see Fig. 1), which may have some ionic character, though it is not easy to quantify (the valence bands have much more Si char- acter than Al character, seemingly more than sug- gested by their number of valence electrons). There are several readily identifiable classes of bands. Two primarily Si 3 s bands, with a small amount of Al 3 s character, are centered 9 eV below the Fermi level ε$_{F}$ and have a width of 2.5 eV. Above them there is a six-band complex of Al-Si s - p bands (heavily Si) that are very nearly filled, the band maximum only slightly overlapping ε$_{F}$ .\n\n## III. ELECTRONIC STRUCTURE\n\n## A. Discussion of the band structure\n\n## II. COMPUTATIONAL METHODS\n\nFIG. 1: (Color online.) Crystal structure 24 of NaAlSi. Four Si atoms tetrahedrally surround an Al atom, and these Al-Si networks sandwich the Na atoms. The unit cell is outlined in black.\n\n2" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4887885970284479, + "doc_id": "9187c99907850841314dc253cd43e778a798b14e19f674400268187c233dc52c", + "edit_distance": 0.7802441731409545, + "f1_score": 0.9068923821039903, + "meteor": 0.44690314637497264, + "precision": 0.9445843828715366, + "pred_md": "teraction mediated by electrons. Here Λ( glyph[vector] R , glyph[vector] 1 R 2 ) = ∑ 2 j =1 | ϕ + ( glyph[vector] R j ) ϕ -( glyph[vector] R j ) | describes the spatial dependence of the e-MI exchange interaction, a parameter that depends on the electron envelop wavefunction at the MI positions glyph[vector] R j . Note that in the limit of zero inter-dot tunneling, A e = A m . The ratio of MI and electron coherence times can be calculated as\n\n\n\nThe performance of a quantum computing setup is given by the maximum number of operations N i = τ /T i i with i = e, m for electrons and MI qubits, respectively. Here, τ is the coherence time and T is the time required for the elementary gate operations. Our system is compared to the original proposal in Ref. [4], where an XOR gate control in a two-electron DQD is analyzed. The elementary gate operations needed for the XOR gate are: (i) a correlated spin swap from |↑↓〉 →|↓↑〉 , where the first and second position refers to the left and right dot, respectively, and (ii) single qubit operations with an external pulsed magnetic field. The second operation has to be done within the time of one spin swap. Therefore, the time for one XOR gate is determined by the correlated spin swap time T .\n\nThe MI and electron spin swap times are given by ∆ -1 m , and ∆ -1 e modulus πh ¯, assuming that the gate voltage and therewith exchange coupling is controlled by a square pulse [4]. Here, ∆ m ≡ ∆ jj ' is the coupling coefficient between the two MIs. As a result, N e = ∆ e / (2 πA e ), N m = [ J em U/ (2Λ)] / (2 πA m ) where U = ϕ + ( glyph[vector] R 1 ) ϕ -( glyph[vector] R 1 ) ϕ + ( glyph[vector] R 2 ) ϕ -( glyph[vector] R 2 ) and glyph[vector] R 1 , glyph[vector] R 2 are MI coordinates. The ratio of the maximum number of elementary operations (per coherence time) is given by N /N m e = ( τ m /τ e )(∆ m / ∆ ), which finally gives e\n\n\n\nIn Eq. (14), N /N m e ∝ 1 / ∆ . e Unlike the other parameters in Eq. (14), ∆ e decays to zero very rapidly by increasing the external magnetic field and inter-dot energy barrier that lowers the inter-dot coupling. Therefore one expects to observe decay in performance of the electron spin coded qubit due to variations in B and V g . Unlike the electrons, MIs show a robust increase in their quantum operation performance. To gain the optimum performance of MIs over electrons we employ a numerical calculation based on exact diagonalization of Eq.(1) from which the input parameters for Eq.(14) are obtained [11]. The DQD is chosen to be double Gaussian along the axis and parabolic in the perpendicular direction and each MI is centered at one of the QDs. We perform our calculation for three different materials, Gd:PbTe, Fe:CdSe, and Fe:ZnSe where they show τ m /τ e ≈ 300 20 2 respectively , , at V g = 154 meV and B = 0. The values for J em are\n\n4\n\nadopted from Ref. [18]. In this range of parameters the coupling between MIs and nuclear spins (∆ j,l ) is optimized to be weak to maximize τ m /τ e . However with decreasing ∆ j,l , the coupling between two MIs (∆ m ) lowers and as a result the time required for fundamental gate operations becomes longer. Thus, the gain in coherence time ( τ m /τ e ) is offset by a loss in gate operation times (∆ e / ∆ ). m To maximize N /N m e we search for a range of parameters that allows simultaneous maximization of τ m /τ e and ∆ m / ∆ . e\n\nIn Fig. 2 we show the results for Fe:ZnSe. N m and N e normalized to 2 πA e are plotted as a function of parabolic confining strength ω 0 for various values of the gate voltage V g , and the external magnetic field B (inset). Within numerical parameters considered in this calculation we found A e ≈ A m . We observe that N /N m e increases with increasing B V , g (inter-dot energy barrier) and ω 0 (tighter confinement). Within the parameter range considered here, a maximum performance increase of about three orders of magnitude can be achieved over the electron spin coded qubit. It is important to mention that even higher increases of N /N m e might be achievable. The maximum B and V g values used for our optimization had to be limited to the range of validity of our two level model. For increasing values of B and V g the system approaches the singlet triplet transition point at which ∆ e → 0 and N /N m e ∝ 1 / ∆ e → ∞ . In this limit our approximation based on the two level model fails, and a more exact analysis becomes necessary. This will be studied in more detail in a follow-up work. Further, the smallest realizable quantum dot size is around 5 nm corresponding to the maximum ω 0 in Fig. 2. However, an extrapolation of the numerical results to the atomic scale indicates performances gains N /N m e of more than five orders of magnitude. In this limit, our system becomes comparable to Kane's proposal [8], which demonstrates its favorable performance properties. The advantage of our system is that a compromise can be found between optimizing performance and accommodating technological limitations.\n\nIn conclusion the qubit system investigated here opens the possibility for noise and performance optimization. We have found that a combination of active and passive optimization is necessary to obtain appreciable improvements; our analysis of the hybrid MI/electron qubit predicts a performance gain of at least three orders of magnitude over electron spin coded qubits in the limit of small inter-dot coupling.\n\n[1] L. Jacak et al. , Quantum Dots (Springer, Berlin, 1998); D. Bimberg et al., Quantum Dot Heterostructures (John Wiley & Sons, Chichester, 1999). S. M. Reimann and M. Manninen, Rev. Mod. Phys. 74 , 1283 (2002), and the references therein.", + "recall": 0.872093023255814, + "true_md": "4\n\nadopted from Ref. [18]. In this range of parameters the coupling between MIs and nuclear spins (Δ$_{j,l}$) is opti- mized to be weak to maximize τ$_{m}$/τ$_{e}$ . However with de- creasing Δ$_{j,l}$, the coupling between two MIs (Δ$_{m}$) lowers and as a result the time required for fundamental gate operations becomes longer. Thus, the gain in coherence time ( τ$_{m}$/τ$_{e}$ ) is offset by a loss in gate operation times (Δ$_{e}$ / Δ$_{m}$). To maximize N$_{m}$/N$_{e}$ we search for a range of parameters that allows simultaneous maximization of τ$_{m}$/τ$_{e}$ and Δ$_{m}$ / Δ$_{e}$.\n\nteraction mediated by electrons. Here Λ( ⃗ R$_{1}$, ⃗ R$_{2}$ ) = ∑ 2 j $_{=1}$| ϕ$_{+}$ ( ⃗ R$_{j}$ ) ϕ$_{−}$ ( ⃗ R$_{j}$ ) | describes the spatial dependence of the e-MI exchange interaction, a parameter that de- pends on the electron envelop wavefunction at the MI positions ⃗ R$_{j}$ . Note that in the limit of zero inter-dot tunneling, A$_{e}$ = A$_{m}$ . The ratio of MI and electron co- herence times can be calculated as\n\n$$τ$_{m}$ τ$_{e}$ = Δ$_{e}$ γ $^{2}$J$_{em}$ Λ( ⃗ R$_{1}$, ⃗ R$_{2}$ ) A$_{e}$ A$_{m}$ . (13)$$\n\nIn Fig. 2 we show the results for Fe:ZnSe. N$_{m}$ and N$_{e}$ normalized to 2 πA$_{e}$ are plotted as a function of parabolic confining strength ω$_{0}$ for various values of the gate volt- age V$_{g}$ , and the external magnetic field B (inset). Within numerical parameters considered in this calculation we found A$_{e}$ ≈ A$_{m}$ . We observe that N$_{m}$/N$_{e}$ increases with increasing B , V$_{g}$ (inter-dot energy barrier) and ω$_{0}$ (tighter confinement). Within the parameter range con- sidered here, a maximum performance increase of about three orders of magnitude can be achieved over the elec- tron spin coded qubit. It is important to mention that even higher increases of N$_{m}$/N$_{e}$ might be achievable. The maximum B and V$_{g}$ values used for our optimization had to be limited to the range of validity of our two level model. For increasing values of B and V$_{g}$ the system approaches the singlet triplet transition point at which Δ$_{e}$ → 0 and N$_{m}$/N$_{e}$ ∝ 1 / Δ$_{e}$ → ∞ . In this limit our approximation based on the two level model fails, and a more exact analysis becomes necessary. This will be studied in more detail in a follow-up work. Further, the smallest realizable quantum dot size is around 5 nm cor- responding to the maximum ω$_{0}$ in Fig. 2. However, an extrapolation of the numerical results to the atomic scale indicates performances gains N$_{m}$/N$_{e}$ of more than five orders of magnitude. In this limit, our system becomes comparable to Kane’s proposal [8], which demonstrates its favorable performance properties. The advantage of our system is that a compromise can be found between optimizing performance and accommodating technologi- cal limitations.\n\nIn conclusion the qubit system investigated here opens the possibility for noise and performance optimization. We have found that a combination of active and passive optimization is necessary to obtain appreciable improve- ments; our analysis of the hybrid MI/electron qubit pre- dicts a performance gain of at least three orders of magni- tude over electron spin coded qubits in the limit of small inter-dot coupling.\n\nIn Eq. (14), N$_{m}$/N$_{e}$ ∝ 1 / Δ$_{e}$. Unlike the other param- eters in Eq. (14), Δ$_{e}$ decays to zero very rapidly by in- creasing the external magnetic field and inter-dot energy barrier that lowers the inter-dot coupling. Therefore one expects to observe decay in performance of the electron spin coded qubit due to variations in B and V$_{g}$ . Un- like the electrons, MIs show a robust increase in their quantum operation performance. To gain the optimum performance of MIs over electrons we employ a numerical calculation based on exact diagonalization of Eq.(1) from which the input parameters for Eq.(14) are obtained [11]. The DQD is chosen to be double Gaussian along the axis and parabolic in the perpendicular direction and each MI is centered at one of the QDs. We perform our calcula- tion for three different materials, Gd:PbTe, Fe:CdSe, and Fe:ZnSe where they show τ$_{m}$/τ$_{e}$ ≈ 300 , 20 , 2 respectively at V$_{g}$ = 154 meV and B = 0. The values for J$_{em}$ are\n\nThe MI and electron spin swap times are given by Δ − 1 m , and Δ − 1 e modulus π ¯ h , assuming that the gate voltage and therewith exchange coupling is controlled by a square pulse [4]. Here, Δ$_{m}$ ≡ Δ$_{jj}$ ′ is the cou- pling coefficient between the two MIs. As a result, N$_{e}$ = Δ$_{e}$ / (2 πA$_{e}$ ), N$_{m}$ = [ J$_{em}$U/ (2Λ)] / (2 πA$_{m}$ ) where U = ϕ$_{+}$ ( ⃗ R$_{1}$ ) ϕ$_{−}$ ( ⃗ R$_{1}$ ) ϕ$_{+}$ ( ⃗ R$_{2}$ ) ϕ$_{−}$ ( ⃗ R$_{2}$ ) and ⃗ R$_{1}$ , ⃗ R$_{2}$ are MI coordinates. The ratio of the maximum number of el- ementary operations (per coherence time) is given by N$_{m}$/N$_{e}$ = ( τ$_{m}$/τ$_{e}$ )(Δ$_{m}$ / Δ$_{e}$), which finally gives\n\nThe performance of a quantum computing setup is given by the maximum number of operations N$_{i}$ = τ$_{i}$/T$_{i}$ with i = e, m for electrons and MI qubits, respectively. Here, τ is the coherence time and T is the time required for the elementary gate operations. Our system is com- pared to the original proposal in Ref. [4], where an XOR gate control in a two-electron DQD is analyzed. The el- ementary gate operations needed for the XOR gate are: (i) a correlated spin swap from |↑↓〉 →|↓↑〉 , where the first and second position refers to the left and right dot, respectively, and (ii) single qubit operations with an ex- ternal pulsed magnetic field. The second operation has to be done within the time of one spin swap. Therefore, the time for one XOR gate is determined by the correlated spin swap time T .\n\n$$N$_{m}$ N$_{e}$ = J$_{em}$ Δ$_{e}$ U 2Λ A$_{e}$ A$_{m}$ . (14)$$\n\n- [1] L. Jacak et al. , Quantum Dots (Springer, Berlin, 1998); D. Bimberg et al., Quantum Dot Heterostructures (John Wiley & Sons, Chichester, 1999). S. M. Reimann and M. Manninen, Rev. Mod. Phys. 74 , 1283 (2002), and the references therein." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6845330297460783, + "doc_id": "2e2b42941dbc94b8f5052116de5e3e615b1c444856e3bc9caf36444752e4ca80", + "edit_distance": 0.6477272727272727, + "f1_score": 0.9081364829396326, + "meteor": 0.6464606850969615, + "precision": 0.9326145552560647, + "pred_md": "## V. SMOOTHING\n\nIn this section, we investigate the smoothing of numerical noise that results from the use of the surface fitting techniques described in Section III. Consider computing the on-axis gradients C [ n ] m,α from a grid of numerical field values B using a circular or elliptical cylinder, as described in the previous sections. Observe that (22) and (55) are linear in each of the values B x and B y at the grid points. The inclusion of additive numerical noise ∆ B at each grid point therefore results in on-axis gradients of the form C [ n ] m,α +∆ C [ n ] m,α , where the contribution ∆ C [ n ] m,α is determined by the values ∆ B according to the procedures of Section III. Note that only the field values ∆ B x and ∆ B y at grid points near the surface of the circular cylinder affect the functions ∆ C [ n ] m,α .\n\nTo examine the effect of additive noise, we generate a random noise field ∆ B whose components are proportional, at the 1% level, to the strength of the monopole-doublet on-axis vertical field. Consider the grid [ -4 4 . , 4 4] . × -[ 2 4 . , 2 4] . × -[ 300 300] cm used in Sec-, tion IV for fitting the field of the monopole doublet, with mesh points indexed by j = 1 , · · · N . Let B y (0 0 , , z ) denote the value of the monopole-doublet on-axis vertical field at longitudinal location z , as determined from (59). At each point ( x , y j j , z j ) we set\n\n\n\n\n\nHere the δ x ( j ) and δ y ( j ) are uniformly distributed random variables taking values in the interval [ -1 1], , and glyph[epsilon1] = 0 01. . After interpolating these values onto the surface of a circular cylinder with R = 2 cm and z ∈ [ -300 300] cm, we use the procedure described in Section , IIIA to compute the on-axis gradients (22).\n\nIn Fig. 15, we have displayed the computed quantity ˜ b m,s ( R,k ) appearing in (17) for the case m = 1. It is a function of the spatial frequency k , having random variations of approximately uniform variance over the interval [ -20 20] cm , -1 . Fig. 16 displays the kernel k m -1 /I ' m ( kR ) multiplying ˜ b m,s ( R,k ) in (22) for the case m = 1 and R = 2 cm. Note the rapid decay of this function for large | k | . Finally, Fig. 17 displays the product of these functions, illustrating the dramatic suppression of highk contributions to the Fourier integral appearing in (22).\n\nAsimilar phenomenon occurs when fitting is performed using an elliptical cylinder. In this case, a sequence of kernels contributes to (55) for each fixed m . In Fig. 18 we have displayed the kernels contributing to the case m = 1, with x max = 4 cm and y max = 2 cm. Kernels take their maxima at k = 0, and these maxima decrease monotonically with increasing index r . All kernels decrease rapidly with increasing | k | [3, 4].\n\nTo study the effect of noise on the on-axis gradients, twelve distinct random fields were generated on a mesh\n\n13\n\naccording to (61). Figs. 19-20 illustrate the on-axis gradients C [6] 1 ,c and C [0] 7 ,c as computed using these field values. The solid line in Fig. 19 illustrates the rms value of the on-axis gradient C [6] 1 ,c , as computed using a circular cylinder of radius R = 2 cm according to (22). The dashed line in Fig. 19 illustrates the rms value of the on-axis gradient C [6] 1 ,c , as computed using an elliptical cylinder of semiminor axis 2 cm and semimajor axis 4 cm according to (55). In Fig. 20, similar results are shown for the on-axis gradient C [0] 7 ,c .\n\nThe attentive reader might wonder why we have displayed the C [ n ] m,c for noise while the the monopole doublet field is governed by the gradients C [ n ] m,s . The reason is that the C [ n ] m,s are produced by fields that are predominantly in the vertical ( y ) direction, and for such fields there is relatively less difference between circular and elliptical surface fitting because the semi-minor axis of the elliptical cylinder is the same as the radius of the circular cylinder. Note also that in both cases only the component of the field normal to the surface is used. Horizontal fields drive primarily the C [ n ] m,c . However, in the horizontal direction, the semi-major axis of the elliptical cylinder is substantially larger than the radius of the circular cylinder. We therefore expect the advantage of using elliptical cylinders compared to circular cylinders will be most apparent in the C [ n ] m,c . Indeed, this is what Figs. 19 and 20 show. The effects of errors in the surface data are suppressed more when the bounding surface is farther away from the field observation point. As a result of this suppression, it is advantageous to use a fitting surface that is as far away as possible.\n\nSuppose we compare the C [ n ] m,c due to noise and shown in Figs. 19 and 20 with the corresponding C [ n ] m,s in Figs. 12 and 13. This is reasonable because a horizontal monopole doublet would produce C [ n ] m,c analogous to the C [ n ] m,s shown in Figs. 12 and 13. Remarkably, we find that, as a result of smoothing, the effect of 1% noise in the field data produces, on average, only on the order of 0.01% changes in the on-axis gradients.\n\n## VI. APPLICATIONS\n\n## A. ILC Damping Ring Wiggler Fields\n\nA less stringent test of the accuracy of surface methods is that the magnetic field, as computed from surface data using field values on a 3-dimensional mesh, should reproduce the magnetic field at the interior mesh points. (This is also a test of the quality of the magnetic data on the mesh.) We computed such an interior fit, and the associated transfer map, for the modified CESR-c design of the Cornell wiggler, which has been adopted as the design prototype for use in International Linear Collider studies [9, 10]. Cornell provided data obtained from the", + "recall": 0.8849104859335039, + "true_md": "## V. SMOOTHING\n\nIn this section, we investigate the smoothing of numer- ical noise that results from the use of the surface fitting techniques described in Section III. Consider computing the on-axis gradients C [ n ] m,α from a grid of numerical field values B using a circular or elliptical cylinder, as de- scribed in the previous sections. Observe that (22) and (55) are linear in each of the values B$_{x}$ and B$_{y}$ at the grid points. The inclusion of additive numerical noise Δ B at each grid point therefore results in on-axis gradients of the form C [ n ] m,α + Δ C [ n ] $_{m,α}$, where the contribution Δ C [ n ] m,α is determined by the values Δ B according to the proce- dures of Section III. Note that only the field values Δ B$_{x}$ and Δ B$_{y}$ at grid points near the surface of the circular cylinder affect the functions Δ C [ n ] $_{m,α}$.\n\nTo examine the effect of additive noise, we gener- ate a random noise field Δ B whose components are proportional, at the 1% level, to the strength of the monopole-doublet on-axis vertical field. Consider the grid [ − 4 . 4 , 4 . 4] × [ − 2 . 4 , 2 . 4] × [ − 300 , 300] cm used in Sec- tion IV for fitting the field of the monopole doublet, with mesh points indexed by j = 1 , · · · N . Let B$_{y}$ (0 , 0 , z ) de- note the value of the monopole-doublet on-axis vertical field at longitudinal location z , as determined from (59). At each point ( x$_{j}$, y$_{j}$, z$_{j}$ ) we set\n\naccording to (61). Figs. 19-20 illustrate the on-axis gra- dients C [6] 1 ,c and C [0] 7 ,c as computed using these field values. The solid line in Fig. 19 illustrates the rms value of the on-axis gradient C [6] 1 $_{,c}$, as computed using a circular cylin- der of radius R = 2 cm according to (22). The dashed line in Fig. 19 illustrates the rms value of the on-axis gradient C [6] 1 $_{,c}$, as computed using an elliptical cylinder of semiminor axis 2 cm and semimajor axis 4 cm according to (55). In Fig. 20, similar results are shown for the on-axis gradient C [0] 7 $_{,c}$.\n\nThe attentive reader might wonder why we have dis- played the C [ n ] m,c for noise while the the monopole doublet field is governed by the gradients C [ n ] $_{m,s}$. The reason is that the C [ n ] m,s are produced by fields that are predominantly in the vertical ( y ) direction, and for such fields there is rel- atively less difference between circular and elliptical sur- face fitting because the semi-minor axis of the elliptical cylinder is the same as the radius of the circular cylinder. Note also that in both cases only the component of the field normal to the surface is used. Horizontal fields drive primarily the C [ n ] $_{m,c}$. However, in the horizontal direction, the semi-major axis of the elliptical cylinder is substan- tially larger than the radius of the circular cylinder. We therefore expect the advantage of using elliptical cylin- ders compared to circular cylinders will be most apparent in the C [ n ] $_{m,c}$. Indeed, this is what Figs. 19 and 20 show. The effects of errors in the surface data are suppressed more when the bounding surface is farther away from the field observation point. As a result of this suppression, it is advantageous to use a fitting surface that is as far away as possible.\n\nSuppose we compare the C [ n ] m,c due to noise and shown in Figs. 19 and 20 with the corresponding C [ n ] m,s in Figs. 12 and 13. This is reasonable because a horizontal monopole doublet would produce C [ n ] m,c analogous to the C [ n ] m,s shown in Figs. 12 and 13. Remarkably, we find that, as a result of smoothing, the effect of 1% noise in the field data produces, on average, only on the order of 0.01% changes in the on-axis gradients.\n\nHere the δ$_{x}$ ( j ) and δ$_{y}$ ( j ) are uniformly distributed ran- dom variables taking values in the interval [ − 1 , 1], and ϵ = 0 . 01. After interpolating these values onto the sur- face of a circular cylinder with R = 2 cm and z ∈ [ − 300 , 300] cm, we use the procedure described in Section IIIA to compute the on-axis gradients (22).\n\nIn Fig. 15, we have displayed the computed quan- tity ˜ b$_{m,s}$ ( R, k ) appearing in (17) for the case m = 1. It is a function of the spatial frequency k , having ran- dom variations of approximately uniform variance over the interval [ − 20 , 20] cm − $^{1}$. Fig. 16 displays the kernel k m − $^{1}$/I ′ $_{m}$( kR ) multiplying ˜ b$_{m,s}$ ( R, k ) in (22) for the case m = 1 and R = 2 cm. Note the rapid decay of this func- tion for large | k | . Finally, Fig. 17 displays the product of these functions, illustrating the dramatic suppression of high- k contributions to the Fourier integral appearing in (22).\n\nA similar phenomenon occurs when fitting is performed using an elliptical cylinder. In this case, a sequence of kernels contributes to (55) for each fixed m . In Fig. 18 we have displayed the kernels contributing to the case m = 1, with x$_{max}$ = 4 cm and y$_{max}$ = 2 cm. Kernels take their maxima at k = 0, and these maxima decrease monotonically with increasing index r . All kernels de- crease rapidly with increasing | k | [3, 4].\n\nTo study the effect of noise on the on-axis gradients, twelve distinct random fields were generated on a mesh\n\nA less stringent test of the accuracy of surface meth- ods is that the magnetic field, as computed from surface data using field values on a 3-dimensional mesh, should reproduce the magnetic field at the interior mesh points. (This is also a test of the quality of the magnetic data on the mesh.) We computed such an interior fit, and the associated transfer map, for the modified CESR-c design of the Cornell wiggler, which has been adopted as the design prototype for use in International Linear Collider studies [9, 10]. Cornell provided data obtained from the\n\n## VI. APPLICATIONS\n\n## A. ILC Damping Ring Wiggler Fields\n\n$$Δ B$_{x}$ ( x$_{j}$, y$_{j}$, z$_{j}$ ) = ϵB$_{y}$ (0 , 0 , z$_{j}$ ) δ$_{x}$ ( j ) , (61a)$$\n\n$$Δ B$_{y}$ ( x$_{j}$, y$_{j}$, z$_{j}$ ) = ϵB$_{y}$ (0 , 0 , z$_{j}$ ) δ$_{y}$ ( j ) . (61b)$$\n\n13" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.12001640726162521, + "doc_id": "75685db1a7e7ab904d663bf93a7e06783cd3f2086f9157c6214d70e2d14e943d", + "edit_distance": 0.8731049971925884, + "f1_score": 0.8325791855203619, + "meteor": 0.2435781237641498, + "precision": 0.9019607843137255, + "pred_md": "classical-quantum state with a finite number N of diagonal conditional density operators ρ A ' x :\n\n\n\nWe can form a new classical-quantum state with double the number of conditional density operators by 'bitflipping' the original conditional density operators:\n\n\n\nwhere X is the σ X 'bit-flip' Pauli operator. Consider the following chain of inequalities that holds for all λ ≥ 1:\n\n\n\nThe first equality follows by standard entropic manipulations. The second equality follows because the conditional entropy H B X ( | ) is invariant under a bit-flipping unitary on the input state that commutes with the channel: H B ( ) Xρ B x X = H B ( ) ρ B x . Furthermore, a bit flip on the input state does not change the eigenvalues for the output of the dephasing channel's complementary channel (as observed in Section II C 3): H E ( ) N c ( Xρ A ' x X ) = H E ( ) N c ( ρ A ' x ) . The first inequality follows because entropy is concave, i.e., the local state σ B is a mixed version of ρ B . The third equality follows because H B ( ) σ B = H (∑ x 1 2 p X ( x ) ( ρ B x + Xρ X B x ) ) = H ( 1 2 ∑ x p X ( x I ) ) = 1. The fourth equality follows because the system X is classical. The second inequality follows because the maximum value of a realization of a random variable is not less than its expectation. The final equality simply follows by defining ρ ∗ x to be the conditional density operator on systems B and E that arises from sending a diagonal state of the form µ | 0 〉 〈 0 | A ' + (1 -µ ) | 1 〉 〈 1 | A ' through the channel. Thus, an ensemble of the kind in (D1) is sufficient to attain a point on the CQ trade-off curve.\n\nIn the last step above, we observe that there is a direct correspondence between µ that parametrizes the ensemble and λ that parametrizes a point on the CQ trade-off\n\ncurve.\n\n22\n\nProof of CQ trade-off in Theorem 4. We simply need to compute the Holevo information I ( X B ; ) and the coherent information I ( A BX 〉 ) for an ensemble of the form in the statement of Lemma 13, due to the results of Lemmas 12 and 13.\n\nFirst consider respective purifications of the states in (D2-D3):\n\n\n\n\n\nThe above states lead to a classical-quantum state of the form in (D1). An isometric extension U N = √ 1 -p 2 I ⊗ | 0 〉 E + √ p 2 Z ⊗| 〉 1 E of the qubit dephasing channel acts as follows on the above states:\n\n\n\n\n\nThe classical-quantum state at the output of the channel is as follows:\n\n\n\nThe following states are useful for computing the entropies H B ( ) and H B X ( | ):\n\n\n\nThe Holevo information is then as follows:\n\n\n\nWenow compute the coherent information I ( A BX 〉 ) = H B X ( | ) -H E X ( | ). The following states are important", + "recall": 0.773109243697479, + "true_md": "22\n\nProof of CQ trade-off in Theorem 4. We simply need to compute the Holevo information I ( X ; B ) and the coherent information I ( A 〉 BX ) for an ensemble of the form in the statement of Lemma 13, due to the results of Lemmas 12 and 13.\n\nFirst consider respective purifications of the states in (D2-D3):\n\nclassical-quantum state with a finite number N of diag- onal conditional density operators ρ A ′ x :\n\nWe can form a new classical-quantum state with dou- ble the number of conditional density operators by “bit- flipping” the original conditional density operators:\n\nThe above states lead to a classical-quantum state of the form in (D1). An isometric extension U$_{N}$ = $^{√}$1 − p $_{2}$I ⊗ | 0 〉 E + √ p $_{2}$Z ⊗ | 1 〉 E of the qubit dephasing channel acts as follows on the above states:\n\nwhere X is the σ$_{X}$ “bit-flip” Pauli operator. Consider the following chain of inequalities that holds for all λ ≥ 1:\n\n$$| ψ$_{0}$ 〉 AA ′ = √ µ | 0 〉 $^{A}$| 0 〉 A ′ + $^{√}$1 − µ | 1 〉 $^{A}$| 1 〉 A ′ , (D4)$$\n\n$$| ψ$_{1}$ 〉 AA ′ = $^{√}$1 − µ | 0 〉 $^{A}$| 0 〉 A ′ + √ µ | 1 〉 $^{A}$| 1 〉 A ′ . (D5)$$\n\n$$ρ XA ′ ≡ N − 1 ∑ x =0 p$_{X}$ ( x ) | x 〉〈 x | X ⊗ ρ A ′ x .$$\n\n$$σ XA ′ ≡ 1 2 N − 1 ∑ x =0 p$_{X}$ ( x ) | x 〉〈 x | X ⊗ ρ A ′ x + 1 2 N − 1 ∑ x =0 p$_{X}$ ( x ) | x + N 〉〈 x + N | X ⊗ Xρ A ′ x X,$$\n\n$$| ψ$_{0}$ 〉 ABE ≡ U$_{N}$ | ψ$_{0}$ 〉 AA ′ = √ µ | 0 〉 $^{A}$| 0 〉 B ( √ 1 − p 2 | 0 〉 E +$^{√}$ p 2 | 1 〉 E ) + $^{√}$1 − µ | 1 〉 $^{A}$| 1 〉 B ( √ 1 − p 2 | 0 〉 E −$^{√}$ p 2 | 1 〉 E ) , | ψ$_{1}$ 〉 ABE ≡ U$_{N}$ | ψ$_{1}$ 〉 AA ′ = $^{√}$1 − µ | 0 〉 $^{A}$| 0 〉 B ( √ 1 − p 2 | 0 〉 E +$^{√}$ p 2 | 1 〉 E ) + √ µ | 1 〉 $^{A}$| 1 〉 B ( √ 1 − p 2 | 0 〉 E −$^{√}$ p 2 | 1 〉 E ) .$$\n\n$$I ( X ; B )$_{ρ}$ + λI ( A 〉 BX )$_{ρ}$ = H ( B )$_{ρ}$ + ( λ − 1) H ( B | X )$_{ρ}$ − λH ( E | X )$_{ρ}$ = H ( B )$_{ρ}$ + ( λ − 1) H ( B | X )$_{σ}$ − λH ( E | X )$_{σ}$ ≤ H ( B )$_{σ}$ + ( λ − 1) H ( B | X )$_{σ}$ − λH ( E | X )$_{σ}$ = 1 + ( λ − 1) H ( B | X )$_{σ}$ − λH ( E | X )$_{σ}$ = 1 + ∑ x p$_{X}$ ( x ) $^{[}$( λ − 1) H ( B )$_{ρ}$$_{x}$ − λH ( E )$_{ρ}$$_{x}$ ] ≤ 1 + max$_{x}$ $^{[}$( λ − 1) H ( B )$_{ρ}$$_{x}$ − λH ( E )$_{ρ}$$_{x}$ ] = 1 + ( λ − 1) H ( B )$_{ρ}$$_{∗}$ x − λH ( E )$_{ρ}$$_{∗}$ x .$$\n\n$$ρ XABE ≡ 1 2$^{[}$ | 0 〉〈 0 | $^{X}$⊗ | ψ$_{0}$ 〉〈 ψ$_{0}$ | $^{ABE}$+ | 1 〉〈 1 | $^{X}$⊗ | ψ$_{1}$ 〉〈 ψ$_{1}$ | ABE ] . (D6)$$\n\n$$ρ XB = 1 2$^{[}$ | 0 〉〈 0 | X ⊗ ψ B 0 + | 1 〉〈 1 | X ⊗ ψ B 1 ] , ψ B 0 = µ | 0 〉〈 0 | B + (1 − µ ) | 1 〉〈 1 | $^{B}$, ψ B 1 = (1 − µ ) | 0 〉〈 0 | B + ( µ ) | 1 〉〈 1 | $^{B}$, ρ B = 1 2$^{[}$ | 0 〉〈 0 | B + | 1 〉〈 1 | B ] .$$\n\nThe first equality follows by standard entropic manipu- lations. The second equality follows because the condi- tional entropy H ( B | X ) is invariant under a bit-flipping unitary on the input state that commutes with the chan- nel: H ( B )$_{Xρ}$ B $_{x}$X = H ( B )$_{ρ}$ B x . Furthermore, a bit flip on the input state does not change the eigenvalues for the output of the dephasing channel’s complementary chan- nel (as observed in Section II C 3): H ( E )$_{N}$ $^{c}$( Xρ A ′ x X ) = H ( E )$_{N}$ $^{c}$( ρ A ′ x $_{)}$. The first inequality follows because en- tropy is concave, i.e., the local state σ B is a mixed ver- sion of ρ $^{B}$. The third equality follows because H ( B )$_{σ}$ B = H ( ∑ x 1 $_{2}$p$_{X}$ ( x ) ( ρ B x + Xρ B $_{x}$X ) = H ( 1 2 $^{∑}$$\\_{x}$p$\\_{X}$ ( x ) I ) = 1. The fourth equality follows because the system X is classical. The second inequality follows because the maximum value of a realization of a random variable is not less than its expectation. The final equality simply follows by defining ρ ∗ x to be the conditional density op- erator on systems B and E that arises from sending a diagonal state of the form µ | 0 〉 〈 0 | A ′ + (1 − µ ) | 1 〉 〈 1 | A ′ through the channel. Thus, an ensemble of the kind in (D1) is sufficient to attain a point on the CQ trade-off curve.\n\nThe classical-quantum state at the output of the channel is as follows:\n\nThe following states are useful for computing the en- tropies H ( B ) and H ( B | X ):\n\nThe Holevo information is then as follows:\n\nIn the last step above, we observe that there is a direct correspondence between µ that parametrizes the ensem- ble and λ that parametrizes a point on the CQ trade-off curve.\n\nWe now compute the coherent information I ( A 〉 BX ) = H ( B | X ) − H ( E | X ). The following states are important\n\n$$I ( X ; B ) = H ( B ) − H ( B | X ) = 1 − H$_{2}$ ( µ ) .$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6612923098161547, + "doc_id": "a9c20d9beb742882d2ff7eca1b6e861d746fdb3e89fb0389099c2ba0c1f630b6", + "edit_distance": 0.5370639534883721, + "f1_score": 0.8913649025069637, + "meteor": 0.5958981796989214, + "precision": 0.935672514619883, + "pred_md": "case, as we said, W K does not depend on temperature) and analyzed the T dependence of W ω ( c ) due to the T dependence of the cut-off term. They found a good agreement with the experiments. This still does not solve the problem fully as amount of the T dependence of W K in the same model but with a lattice dispersion has not been analyzed. For a superconductor, which of the two terms contributes more, remains an open issue. At small frequencies, ∆ W ω ( c ) between a SCS and a NS is positive simply because σ (Ω) in a SCS has a δ -functional term. In the models with a constant DOS, for which ∆ W K = 0, previous calculations 21 show that ∆ W ω ( c ) changes sign at some ω c , becomes negative at larger ω c and approaches zero from a negative side. The frequency when ∆ W ω ( c ) changes sign is of order ∆ at weak coupling, but increases as the coupling increases, and at large coupling becomes comparable to a bandwidth ( ∼ 1 eV ). At such frequencies the approximation of a DOS by a constant is questionable at best, and the behavior of ∆ W ω ( c ) should generally be influenced by a nonzero ∆ W K . In particular, the optical integral can either remain positive for all frequencies below interband transitions (for large enough positive ∆ W K ), or change sign and remain negative (for negative ∆ W K ). The first behavior would be consistent with Refs. 8,9, while the second would be consistent with Ref. 10. ∆ W can even show more exotic behavior with more than one sign change (for a small positive ∆ W K ). We show various cases schematically in Fig.1.\n\nFIG. 1: Schematic behavior of ∆ W vs ω c , Eq. (4). The limiting value of ∆ W at ω c = ∞ is ∆ W K given by Eq. (3) Depending on the value of ∆ W K , there can be either one sign change of ∆ W (panels a and c), or no sign changes (panel b), or two sign changes (panel d).\n\nFIG. 1: Schematic behavior of ∆ W vs ω c , Eq. (4). The limiting value of ∆ W at ω c = ∞ is ∆ W K given by Eq. (3) Depending on the value of ∆ W K , there can be either one sign change of ∆ W (panels a and c), or no sign changes (panel b), or two sign changes (panel d).\n\nIn our work, we perform direct numerical calculations of optical integrals at T = 0 for a lattice dispersion extracted from ARPES of the cuprates. The goal of our work is two-fold. First, we perform calculations of the optical integral in the NS and analyze how rapidly W ω ( c ) approaches W K , in other words we check how much of the Kubo sum is recovered up to the scale of the bandwidth. Second, we analyze the difference between optical\n\n3\n\nintegral in the SCS at T = 0 and in the NS extrapolated to T = 0 and compare the cut off effect ∆ f ( ω c ) to ∆ W K term. We also analyze the sign of ∆ W ω ( c ) at large frequencies and discuss under what conditions theoretical W ( ∞ ) increases in the SCS.\n\nWe perform calculations for four models. First is a conventional BCS model with impurities (BCSI model). Second is an Einstein boson (EB) model of fermions interacting with a single Einstein boson whose propagator does not change between NS and SCS. These two cases will illustrate a conventional idea of the spectral weight in SCS being less than in NS. Then we consider two more sophisticated models: a phenomenological 'marginal Fermi liquid with impurities' (MFLI) model of Norman and P' epin 30 , and a microscopic collective boson (CB) model 31 in which in the NS fermions interact with a gapless continuum of bosonic excitations, but in a d -wave SCS a gapless continuum splits into a resonance and a gaped continuum. This model describes, in particular, interaction of fermions with their own collective spin fluctuations 32 via\n\n\n\nwhere g is the spin-fermion coupling, and χ q, ω ( ) is the spin susceptibility whose dynamics changes between NS and SCS.\n\nFrom our analysis we found that the introduction of a finite fermionic bandwidth by means of a lattice has generally a notable effect on both W and ∆ W . We found that for all models except for BCSI model, only 70% -80% of the optical spectral weight is obtained by integrating up to the bandwidth. In these three models, there also exists a wide range of ω c in which the behavior of ∆ W ω ( c ) is due to variation of ∆ f ( ω c ) which is dominant comparable to the ∆ W K term. This dominance of the cut off term is consistent with the analysis in Refs. 21,22,33.\n\nWe also found that for all models except for the original version of the MFLI model the optical weight at the highest frequencies is greater in the NS than in the SCS (i.e., ∆ W < 0). This observation is consistent with the findings of Abanov and Chubukov 32 , Benfatto et. al. 28 , and Karakozov and Maksimov 34 . In the original version of the MFLI model 30 the spectral weight in SCS was found to be greater than in the NS (∆ W > 0). We show that the behavior of ∆ W ω ( c ) in this model crucially depends on how the fermionic self-energy modeled to fit ARPES data in a NS is modified when a system becomes a superconductor and can be of either sign. We also found, however, that ω c at which ∆ W becomes negative rapidly increases with the coupling strength and at strong coupling becomes comparable to the bandwidth. In the CB model, which, we believe, is most appropriate for the application to the cuprates, ∆ W K = ∆ W ( ∞ ) is quite small, and at strong coupling a negative ∆ W ω ( c ) up to ω c ∼ 1 eV is nearly compensated by the optical integral between ω c and 'infinity', which, in practice, is", + "recall": 0.851063829787234, + "true_md": "3\n\ncase, as we said, W$_{K}$ does not depend on temperature) and analyzed the T dependence of W ( ω$_{c}$ ) due to the T dependence of the cut-off term. They found a good agree- ment with the experiments. This still does not solve the problem fully as amount of the T dependence of W$_{K}$ in the same model but with a lattice dispersion has not been analyzed. For a superconductor, which of the two terms contributes more, remains an open issue. At small fre- quencies, Δ W ( ω$_{c}$ ) between a SCS and a NS is positive simply because σ (Ω) in a SCS has a δ − functional term. In the models with a constant DOS, for which Δ W$_{K}$ = 0, previous calculations 21 show that Δ W ( ω$_{c}$ ) changes sign at some ω$_{c}$ , becomes negative at larger ω$_{c}$ and approaches zero from a negative side. The frequency when Δ W ( ω$_{c}$ ) changes sign is of order Δ at weak coupling, but increases as the coupling increases, and at large coupling becomes comparable to a bandwidth ( ∼ 1 eV ). At such frequencies the approximation of a DOS by a constant is question- able at best, and the behavior of Δ W ( ω$_{c}$ ) should gen- erally be influenced by a nonzero Δ W$_{K}$ . In particular, the optical integral can either remain positive for all fre- quencies below interband transitions (for large enough positive Δ W$_{K}$ ), or change sign and remain negative (for negative Δ W$_{K}$ ). The first behavior would be consistent with Refs. 8,9, while the second would be consistent with Ref. 10. Δ W can even show more exotic behavior with more than one sign change (for a small positive Δ W$_{K}$ ). We show various cases schematically in Fig.1.\n\nintegral in the SCS at T = 0 and in the NS extrapolated to T = 0 and compare the cut off effect Δ f ( ω$_{c}$ ) to Δ W$_{K}$ term. We also analyze the sign of Δ W ( ω$_{c}$ ) at large fre- quencies and discuss under what conditions theoretical W ( ∞ ) increases in the SCS.\n\nWe perform calculations for four models. First is a conventional BCS model with impurities (BCSI model). Second is an Einstein boson (EB) model of fermions in- teracting with a single Einstein boson whose propaga- tor does not change between NS and SCS. These two cases will illustrate a conventional idea of the spectral weight in SCS being less than in NS. Then we con- sider two more sophisticated models: a phenomenological “marginal Fermi liquid with impurities” (MFLI) model of Norman and P´epin $^{30}$, and a microscopic collective bo- son (CB) model 31 in which in the NS fermions interact with a gapless continuum of bosonic excitations, but in a d − wave SCS a gapless continuum splits into a resonance and a gaped continuum. This model describes, in par- ticular, interaction of fermions with their own collective spin fluctuations 32 via\n\nwhere g is the spin-fermion coupling, and χ ( q, ω ) is the spin susceptibility whose dynamics changes between NS and SCS.\n\nFrom our analysis we found that the introduction of a finite fermionic bandwidth by means of a lattice has generally a notable effect on both W and Δ W . We found that for all models except for BCSI model, only 70% − 80% of the optical spectral weight is obtained by integrating up to the bandwidth. In these three models, there also exists a wide range of ω$_{c}$ in which the behavior of Δ W ( ω$_{c}$ ) is due to variation of Δ f ( ω$_{c}$ ) which is domi- nant comparable to the Δ W$_{K}$ term. This dominance of the cut off term is consistent with the analysis in Refs. 21,22,33.\n\nWe also found that for all models except for the origi- nal version of the MFLI model the optical weight at the highest frequencies is greater in the NS than in the SCS (i.e., Δ W < 0). This observation is consistent with the findings of Abanov and Chubukov $^{32}$, Benfatto et. al. $^{28}$, and Karakozov and Maksimov $^{34}$. In the original ver- sion of the MFLI model 30 the spectral weight in SCS was found to be greater than in the NS (Δ W > 0). We show that the behavior of Δ W ( ω$_{c}$ ) in this model cru- cially depends on how the fermionic self-energy modeled to fit ARPES data in a NS is modified when a system becomes a superconductor and can be of either sign. We also found, however, that ω$_{c}$ at which Δ W becomes neg- ative rapidly increases with the coupling strength and at strong coupling becomes comparable to the bandwidth. In the CB model, which, we believe, is most appropriate for the application to the cuprates, Δ W$_{K}$ = Δ W ( ∞ ) is quite small, and at strong coupling a negative Δ W ( ω$_{c}$ ) up to ω$_{c}$ ∼ 1 eV is nearly compensated by the optical integral between ω$_{c}$ and “infinity”, which, in practice, is\n\nIn our work, we perform direct numerical calculations of optical integrals at T = 0 for a lattice dispersion ex- tracted from ARPES of the cuprates. The goal of our work is two-fold. First, we perform calculations of the optical integral in the NS and analyze how rapidly W ( ω$_{c}$ ) approaches W$_{K}$ , in other words we check how much of the Kubo sum is recovered up to the scale of the band- width. Second, we analyze the difference between optical\n\nFIG. 1: Schematic behavior of Δ W vs ω c , Eq. (4). The limiting value of Δ W at ω c = ∞ is Δ W K given by Eq. (3) Depending on the value of Δ W K , there can be either one sign change of Δ W (panels a and c), or no sign changes (panel b), or two sign changes (panel d).\n\n$$Σ( k, Ω) = 3 g 2 ∫ dω 2 π d $^{2}$q (2 π ) 2 χ ( q, ω ) G ( k + q, ω + Ω) (6)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7854883203630223, + "doc_id": "36940de5f23a2a096c6a73e20c9a38097849e29af6f22f2c31b8c03a7e0c0193", + "edit_distance": 0.3423580786026201, + "f1_score": 0.9210866752910737, + "meteor": 0.7848608257015163, + "precision": 0.956989247311828, + "pred_md": "arXiv:1001.2670v1 [quant-ph] 15 Jan 2010\n\n.\n\n## The Linewidth of Ramsey Laser with Bad Cavity\n\nYang Li, Wei Zhuang, Jinbiao Chen, ∗ and Hong Guo † CREAM Group, State Key Laboratory of Advanced Optical Communication Systems and Networks (Peking University) and Institute of Quantum Electronics, School of Electronics Engineering and Computer Science, and Center for Computational Science and Engineering (CCSE), Peking University, Beijing 100871, P. R. China (Dated: October 29, 2018)\n\nWe investigate a new laser scheme by using Ramsey separated-field technique with bad cavity. By studying the linewidth of the stimulated-emission spectrum of this kind of laser inside the cavity, we find its linewidth is more than two orders of magnitude narrower than atomic natural linewidth, and it is far superior to that of conventional optical Ramsey method and any other available subnatural linewidth spectroscopy at present. Since any cavity related noise is reduced to cavity-pulling e ff ect in bad cavity laser, this Ramsey laser provides the possibility of precision subnatural linewidth spectroscopy, which is critical for the next generation of optical clock and atom interferometers.\n\nPACS numbers: 42.55.Ah, 42.50.Ar, 42.60.Da, 32.30.-r\n\nIntroduction: Since the invention of the separated-field technique [1], it has played an important role in the field of precision spectroscopy due to its linewidth narrowing e ff ect via multiple coherent interaction. Atomic clocks based on this technique have greatly extended our ability for frequency measurement, further, almost all the atom interferometers are based on this technique [2].\n\nThough, the natural linewidth of quantum transition was regarded as the ultimate limit to high-resolution laser spectroscopy [4], several methods of subnatural linewidth spectroscopy have been proposed to gain subnatural linewidth [310]. However, in all these e ff orts, including optical Ramsey spectroscopy, subnatural line is realized at the expense of a quick reduction in signal-to-noise (SNR) ratio due to the exponential decaying of signal, thus all these schemes can only get the linewidth several times narrower than the atomic natural linewidth. In the past three decades, this situation does not change in the field of the precision laser spectroscopy. On the other hand, the thermal noise of the cavity mirrors is the main obstacle for further linewidth reduction of a laser [11, 12], and it is a challenge to substantially reduce this noise further[13]. Recently, a new scheme, called active optical clock [14-18], was proposed to substantially reduce the laser linewidth. With lattice trapped atoms, it is possible to reach mHz linewidth laser based on the mechanism of active optical clock [14, 15, 19]. The principal mechanism of active optical clock is to directly extract light emitted from the ultranarrow atomic transition with a cavity mode linewidth much wider than that of lasing. This bad cavity ensures that any frequency shift due to cavity noise reduces to cavity-pulling e ff ect [1517], then the thermal noise is not the major obstacle again for reducing the linewidth. This means the bad cavity can play an indispensable role in new subnatural linewidth spectroscopy.\n\nIn this Letter, we propose a new scheme called Ramsey laser with bad cavity. Distinct from any previous applications of conventional Ramsey separated oscillating fields method [1], which focuses on the absorption spectrum, we here fo-\n\ncus on the stimulated emission spectrum via multiple coherent interactions inside the cavity. We find this Ramsey laser can provide a stimulated-emission spectrum with a linewidth much narrower than that of any conventional optical Ramsey seperated-field spectroscopy, which is commonly applied in optical atomic clock. Our results also show that a subnatural linewidth spectroscopy, superior to any other available subnatural spectroscopy technique at present [3-10], can be reached by this kind of laser, if a suitable atomic level structure is chosen. Thus, this method can provide an e ff ective subnatural spectroscopy, and the possibilities for the new optical clock scheme [15] and atom interferometers [2].\n\nTheoretical framework: We consider the case of a two-level atomic beam interacting with a single-mode Ramsey cavity of separated-oscillating-field resonators with the cavity mode linewidth is much wider than the atomic gain linewidth. Thus we call it bad-cavity Ramsey laser. All atoms are pumped onto the upper lasing state a before entering the first cavity of seperated field, and the lower lasing state is b . We assume all the atoms have the same velocities υ , that means what we consider here is a homogeneous laser system. And for the sake of simplicity, we consider the two-standing waves linear optical Ramsey configuration with a grid as spatial selector [20, 21]. Our treatment can be extended to other configurations as in [22-24]. The length of each oscillating part is l , and the length of the free drift region is L . The corresponding Hamiltonian is\n\n\n\nwhere ˆ, ˆ a a † are the annihilation and creation operators of the field mode inside the cavity, with the frequency ω , σ j a = ( | a 〉 〈 a | ) j and σ j b = ( | b 〉 〈 b | ) j are the projection operators for the jth atom corresponding to the upper and lower lasing levels,", + "recall": 0.8877805486284289, + "true_md": ".\n\n# The Linewidth of Ramsey Laser with Bad Cavity\n\nYang Li, Wei Zhuang, Jinbiao Chen, ∗ and Hong Guo †\n\nCREAM Group, State Key Laboratory of Advanced Optical Communication Systems and Networks (Peking University) and Institute of Quantum Electronics, School of Electronics Engineering and Computer Science, and Center for Computational Science and Engineering (CCSE), Peking University, Beijing 100871, P. R. China\n\n(Dated: October 29, 2018)\n\nWe investigate a new laser scheme by using Ramsey separated-field technique with bad cavity. By studying the linewidth of the stimulated-emission spectrum of this kind of laser inside the cavity, we find its linewidth is more than two orders of magnitude narrower than atomic natural linewidth, and it is far superior to that of conventional optical Ramsey method and any other available subnatural linewidth spectroscopy at present. Since any cavity related noise is reduced to cavity-pulling e ff ect in bad cavity laser, this Ramsey laser provides the possibility of precision subnatural linewidth spectroscopy, which is critical for the next generation of optical clock and atom interferometers.\n\nPACS numbers: 42.55.Ah, 42.50.Ar, 42.60.Da, 32.30.-r\n\nIntroduction: Since the invention of the separated-field technique [1], it has played an important role in the field of precision spectroscopy due to its linewidth narrowing e ff ect via multiple coherent interaction. Atomic clocks based on this technique have greatly extended our ability for frequency measurement, further, almost all the atom interferometers are based on this technique [2].\n\nThough, the natural linewidth of quantum transition was regarded as the ultimate limit to high-resolution laser spec- troscopy [4], several methods of subnatural linewidth spec- troscopy have been proposed to gain subnatural linewidth [3– 10]. However, in all these e ff orts, including optical Ramsey spectroscopy, subnatural line is realized at the expense of a quick reduction in signal-to-noise (SNR) ratio due to the ex- ponential decaying of signal, thus all these schemes can only get the linewidth several times narrower than the atomic nat- ural linewidth. In the past three decades, this situation does not change in the field of the precision laser spectroscopy. On the other hand, the thermal noise of the cavity mirrors is the main obstacle for further linewidth reduction of a laser [11, 12], and it is a challenge to substantially reduce this noise further[13]. Recently, a new scheme, called active optical clock [14–18], was proposed to substantially reduce the las er linewidth. With lattice trapped atoms, it is possible to reach mHz linewidth laser based on the mechanism of active optical clock [14, 15, 19]. The principal mechanism of active optical clock is to directly extract light emitted from the ultranarrow atomic transition with a cavity mode linewidth much wider than that of lasing. This bad cavity ensures that any frequency shift due to cavity noise reduces to cavity-pulling e ff ect [15– 17], then the thermal noise is not the major obstacle again for reducing the linewidth. This means the bad cavity can play an indispensable role in new subnatural linewidth spectroscopy.\n\nIn this Letter, we propose a new scheme called Ramsey laser with bad cavity. Distinct from any previous applications of conventional Ramsey separated oscillating fields method [1], which focuses on the absorption spectrum, we here fo-\n\nwhere ˆ a , ˆ a † are the annihilation and creation operators of the field mode inside the cavity, with the frequency ω , σ j a = $^{(}$| $^{a}$〉 〈$^{a}$| ) j and σ j b = $^{(}$| $^{b}$〉 〈$^{b}$| ) j are the projection operators for the jth atom corresponding to the upper and lower lasing levels,\n\nTheoretical framework: We consider the case of a two-level atomic beam interacting with a single-mode Ramsey cavity of separated-oscillating-field resonators with the cavitymode linewidth is much wider than the atomic gain linewidth. Thus we call it bad-cavity Ramsey laser. All atoms are pumped onto the upper lasing state a before entering the first cavity of seperated field, and the lower lasing state is b . We assume all the atoms have the same velocities υ , that means what we consider here is a homogeneous laser system. And for the sake of simplicity, we consider the two-standing waves linear optical Ramsey configuration with a grid as spatial selector [20, 21]. Our treatment can be extended to other configura- tions as in [22–24]. The length of each oscillating part is l , and the length of the free drift region is L . The corresponding Hamiltonian is\n\ncus on the stimulated emission spectrum via multiple coher- ent interactions inside the cavity. We find this Ramsey laser can provide a stimulated-emission spectrum with a linewidth much narrower than that of any conventional optical Ramsey seperated-field spectroscopy, which is commonly applied in optical atomic clock. Our results also show that a subnatural linewidth spectroscopy, superior to any other available subnat- ural spectroscopy technique at present [3–10], can be reach ed by this kind of laser, if a suitable atomic level structure is cho- sen. Thus, this method can provide an e ff ective subnatural spectroscopy, and the possibilities for the new optical clock scheme [15] and atom interferometers [2].\n\narXiv:1001.2670v1 [quant-ph] 15 Jan 2010\n\n$$H = ℏ ω ˆ a † a + ℏ ∑ j [ ω j $_{a}$(t ) σ j a + ω j $_{b}$(t ) σ j $_{b}$] + ℏ g ∑ j Γ$_{j}$ ( t )(ˆ a † ˆ σ j − e − i ⃗ $^{k}$· ⃗ r$_{j}$ + ˆ σ j $_{+}$ˆ ae i ⃗ $^{k}$· ⃗ $^{r$_{j}$}$) , (1)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.35514050132288427, + "doc_id": "ab806bd0a323d1fa8c92c465e9201cff5d3f09c14ce1b2f7179e7ca7e8720a91", + "edit_distance": 0.7686274509803922, + "f1_score": 0.8622540250447226, + "meteor": 0.3497296101858238, + "precision": 0.9488188976377953, + "pred_md": "therefore its Fourier transform is well defined. Next define the functions ˜ b m,s and ˜ b m,c by\n\n\n\n\n\nfor m ≥ 1 and\n\n\n\nWe know that\n\n\n\nfrom which it follows, using the representation (5), that\n\n\n\nNow substitute (19) into the right sides of (17) and perform the indicated integrations to get the results\n\n\n\nfrom which it follows that\n\n\n\nThis relation for G m,α ( k ) can be employed in (8) to give the result\n\n\n\nWe have found an expression for the on-axis gradients in terms of field data (normal component) on the surface of the cylinder. Equation (22) may be viewed as the convolution of Fourier surface data ˜ b m,α ( R,k ) with the inverse Laplacian kernel k n + m -1 /I ' m ( kR ). Moreover, this kernel has a very desirable property. The Bessel functions I ' m ( kR ) have the asymptotic behavior\n\n\n\nSince I ' m ( kR ) appears in the denominator of (22), we see that the integrand is exponentially damped for large | k | . Now suppose there is uncorrelated point-to-point noise in the surface data. Such noise will result in anomalously large | k | contributions to the ˜ b m,α ( R,k ). But, because of the exponential damping arising from I ' m ( kR ) in the denominator, the effect of this noise is effectively filtered\n\n6\n\nout. Moreover, this filtering action is improved by making R as large as possible. This filtering, or smoothing , feature will be discussed in more detail in Section V.\n\nWe close this subsection with the remark that if one wishes to extract the C [ n ] 0 ,c ( z ) (monopole) on-axis gradients from field data, as is required for example in the case of a solenoid, it may be preferable to use the longitudinal component B z ( R,φ,z ) on the surface of the cylinder rather than the normal component B ρ ( R,φ,z ) [4].\n\n## B. Use of Field Data on Surface of Elliptical Cylinder\n\n## 1. Background\n\nIn the previous subsection we employed a cylinder with circular cross section, and observed mathematically that it is desirable for error insensitivity to use a cylinder with a large radius R . Physically, this is because we want the field data points employed to be as far from the axis as possible since the effect of inhomogeneities (noise) in the data decays with distance from the inhomogeneity. Evidently the use of a large circular cylinder is optimal for beam-line elements with a circular bore. However, for dipoles or wigglers with small gaps and wide pole faces, use of a cylinder with elliptical cross section should give improved error insensitivity. See Fig. 3. In this subsection we will set up the machinery required for the use of elliptical cylinders, and apply it to the calculation of on-axis gradients based on field data [3, 4].\n\nFIG. 3: An elliptical cylinder, centered on the z -axis, fitting within the bore of a wiggler, and extending beyond the fringefield regions at the ends of the wiggler.\n\nFIG. 3: An elliptical cylinder, centered on the z -axis, fitting within the bore of a wiggler, and extending beyond the fringefield regions at the ends of the wiggler.\n\n## 2. Elliptic Coordinates\n\nElliptic coordinates in the x, y plane are described by the relations [6]\n\n\n\n", + "recall": 0.7901639344262295, + "true_md": "therefore its Fourier transform is well defined. Next de- fine the functions ˜ b$_{m,s}$ and ˜ b$_{m,c}$ by\n\nout. Moreover, this filtering action is improved by mak- ing R as large as possible. This filtering, or smoothing , feature will be discussed in more detail in Section V.\n\nWe close this subsection with the remark that if one wishes to extract the C [ n ] 0 $_{,c}$( z ) (monopole) on-axis gradi- ents from field data, as is required for example in the case of a solenoid, it may be preferable to use the longitudi- nal component B$_{z}$ ( R, φ, z ) on the surface of the cylinder rather than the normal component B$_{ρ}$ ( R, φ, z ) [4].\n\nIn the previous subsection we employed a cylinder with circular cross section, and observed mathematically that it is desirable for error insensitivity to use a cylinder with a large radius R . Physically, this is because we want the field data points employed to be as far from the axis as possible since the effect of inhomogeneities (noise) in the data decays with distance from the inhomogeneity. Evidently the use of a large circular cylinder is optimal for beam-line elements with a circular bore. However, for dipoles or wigglers with small gaps and wide pole faces, use of a cylinder with elliptical cross section should give improved error insensitivity. See Fig. 3. In this subsection we will set up the machinery required for the use of elliptical cylinders, and apply it to the calculation of on-axis gradients based on field data [3, 4].\n\nWe have found an expression for the on-axis gradients in terms of field data (normal component) on the surface of the cylinder. Equation (22) may be viewed as the con- volution of Fourier surface data ˜ b$_{m,α}$ ( R, k ) with the in- verse Laplacian kernel k n + m − $^{1}$/I ′ $_{m}$( kR ). Moreover, this kernel has a very desirable property. The Bessel functions I ′ $_{m}$( kR ) have the asymptotic behavior\n\nSince I ′ $_{m}$( kR ) appears in the denominator of (22), we see that the integrand is exponentially damped for large | k | . Now suppose there is uncorrelated point-to-point noise in the surface data. Such noise will result in anomalously large | k | contributions to the ˜ b$_{m,α}$ ( R, k ). But, because of the exponential damping arising from I ′ $_{m}$( kR ) in the denominator, the effect of this noise is effectively filtered\n\nElliptic coordinates in the x, y plane are described by the relations [6]\n\nThis relation for G$_{m,α}$ ( k ) can be employed in (8) to give the result\n\nfrom which it follows that\n\nNow substitute (19) into the right sides of (17) and per- form the indicated integrations to get the results\n\nfrom which it follows, using the representation (5), that\n\nWe know that\n\n1. Background\n\n2. Elliptic Coordinates\n\n6\n\n## B. Use of Field Data on Surface of Elliptical Cylinder\n\n$$˜ b$_{m,s}$ ( R, k ) = 1 2 π 2 ∫ 2 π 0 dφ sin mπ$^{∫}$ ∞ −∞ dz e − $^{ikz}$B$_{ρ}$ ( R, φ, z ) , (17a)$$\n\n$$˜ b$_{m,c}$ ( R, k ) = 1 2 π 2 ∫ 2 π 0 dφ cos mπ$^{∫}$ ∞ −∞ dz e − $^{ikz}$B$_{ρ}$ ( R, φ, z ) , (17b)$$\n\n$$˜ b$_{0}$$_{,c}$ ( R, k ) = 1 4 π 2 ∫ 2 π 0 dφ$^{∫}$ ∞ −∞ dz e − $^{ikz}$B$_{ρ}$ ( R, φ, z ) . (17c)$$\n\n$$B$_{ρ}$ ( R, φ, z ) = ∂ψ ( ρ, φ, z ) ∂ρ ∣ ∣ ρ = R , (18)$$\n\nfor m ≥ 1 and\n\n$$B$_{ρ}$ ( R, φ, z ) = ∞ ∑ m =0 ∫ ∞ −∞ dk kI ′ $_{m}$( kρ ) e ikz [ G$_{m,s}$ ( k ) sin mφ + G$_{m,c}$ ( k ) cos mφ ] . (19)$$\n\n$$˜ b$_{m,α}$ ( R, k ) = G$_{m,α}$ ( k ) kI ′ $_{m}$( kR ) , (20)$$\n\n$$G$_{m,α}$ ( k ) = ˜ b$_{m,α}$ ( R, k ) kI ′ $_{m}$( kR ) . (21)$$\n\n$$C [ n ] $_{m,α}$( z ) = i n 2 $^{m}$m ! ∫ ∞ −∞ dk e $^{ikz}$kn + m − $_{1}$˜ b$_{m,α}$ ( R, k ) I ′ $_{m}$( kR ) . (22)$$\n\n$$| I ′ $_{m}$( kR ) | ∼ exp( | k | R ) / $^{√}$2 π | k | R as | k | → ∞ . (23)$$\n\nFIG. 3: An elliptical cylinder, centered on the z -axis, fitting within the bore of a wiggler, and extending beyond the fringe- field regions at the ends of the wiggler.\n\n$$x = f cosh( u ) cos( v ) , (24a)$$\n\n$$y = f sinh( u ) sin( v ) . (24b)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6039139114454005, + "doc_id": "cc97537952f44b07b3dd8eef8f56452a997daf135c7888854775d438946b864e", + "edit_distance": 0.6930272108843537, + "f1_score": 0.8948948948948949, + "meteor": 0.5455026193992802, + "precision": 0.93125, + "pred_md": "of N , in contrast to the results for random couplings and frequencies. Clearly, as N gets larger, these recurrences become sharper, until in the limit N →∞ they become isolated peaks, as shown in the right-side panels of Figs. 4 and 5. In the low temperature limit β Ω → ∞ and | Π N | → exp( N 2 β Ω) , but so does the partition function Z = ∑ 2 N -1 i =0 e -1 2 β Ω ∑ N n =1 ( -1) i n = (2 cosh[ f (0)]) N → exp( N 2 β Ω) , so that χ , χ 3 4 → 1 , and all the capacities are saturated at their maximum values. For small, but finite temperatures, the capacities exhibit oscillations with an amplitude that grows with N , as can be seen in the left-side panels of Figs. 4 and 5. This is in contrast to the case of random couplings seen in Figs. 2 and 3; there destructive interference caused a cancellation of these oscillations, while in the case of equal couplings the capacity oscillations survive and grow with the number of bath spins, reflecting the increased information transfer from the system to the bath as a function of bath size.\n\nFIG. 4: Capacities C E (solid, thick), Q E (solid, thin) and Q (dashed) of a qubit coupled to an Ising spin bath with N = 4 , for g n = 1 and Ω n = 1 ∀ n . Left: β = 10 , right: β = 1 .\n\nFIG. 4: Capacities C E (solid, thick), Q E (solid, thin) and Q (dashed) of a qubit coupled to an Ising spin bath with N = 4 , for g n = 1 and Ω n = 1 ∀ n . Left: β = 10 , right: β = 1 .\n\nFIG. 5: Same as Fig. 4, with N = 100 .\n\nFIG. 5: Same as Fig. 4, with N = 100 .\n\n## 2. Large N\n\nWithout symmetries in the coupling constants or frequencies the capacities rapidly decrease to their minimum values and we find no recurrences for N glyph[greatermuch] 1 , high temperature and uniformly distributed random values of g n and Ω n . However, partial recurrences occur in this situation for small temperature.\n\n## 3. Short Times\n\nThe capacities are flat initially and do not decay exponentially in the limit of short times αt glyph[lessmuch] 1 , provided that the\n\n6\n\ntemperature and number of bath spins N is not too large. This is somewhat similar to the Zeno behavior pointed out in Ref. [38].\n\n## V. SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS\n\nWe have studied an exactly solvable spin-star system for transmission of classical and quantum information. The information is encoded into a system spin which interacts with a spin-bath via arbitrary Ising couplings. We considered the 'parallel uses' setting of a memoryless quantum channel, where multiple copies of the system spin are transmitted simultaneously via the same number of copies of the spin bath. As our model is described by the dephasing channel, classical information can be transmitted noiselessly, while the quantum capacity can be determined via the 'single-letter' formula Q = Q 1 , i.e., it suffices to consider a single copy of the spin-star system. We analytically determined the quantum capacities of this communication system, which exhibit a strong dependence on the couplings of the bath spins with the system, and on the bath temperature. The Ising spin bath becomes noisier as the temperature is increased, and the capacities rapidly deteriorate. For random couplings and frequencies, recurrences are of small amplitude and die out rapidly. However, for equal couplings and frequencies full periodic recurrences occur independently of the number of bath spins. These recurrences are a signature of the non-Markovian nature of the spin-bath. At low temperature the quantum capacities remain high when the number of bath spins is not too large.\n\n## Acknowledgments\n\nN.A. was supported by Higher Education Commission Pakistan under grant no. 063-111368-Ps3-001 and IRSIP-4-Ps08. D.A.L. was supported by the National Science Foundation under grants no. PHY-803304 and CHE-924318.\n\n## Appendix A: Derivation of the result for the classical capacity assisted by limited entanglement\n\nWe prove Eq. (30). Without loss of generality the ensemble of orthogonal states given by Eq. (29) can be assumed to appear with probabilities parametrized as\n\n\n\nwhere 0 ≤ θ, x 1 , x 2 ≤ π 4 . We will show by explicit calculation that for our pure dephasing model only the second term in Eq. (8) for the classical capacity assisted by limited entanglement depends on the parameters x , x 1 2 . Hence the maximization can be carried out, for fixed θ , by maximizing only this second term.", + "recall": 0.861271676300578, + "true_md": "temperature and number of bath spins N is not too large. This is somewhat similar to the Zeno behavior pointed out in Ref. [38].\n\nof N , in contrast to the results for random couplings and fre- quencies. Clearly, as N gets larger, these recurrences become sharper, until in the limit N → ∞ they become isolated peaks, as shown in the right-side panels of Figs. 4 and 5. In the low temperature limit β Ω → ∞ and | Π$_{N}$ | → exp( N 2 β Ω) , but so does the partition function Z = ∑ 2 $^{N}$− 1 i =0 e − 1 $_{2}$β Ω ∑ N n $_{=1}$( − 1) i n = (2 cosh[ f (0)]) N → exp( N 2 β Ω) , so that χ$_{3}$, χ$_{4}$ → 1 , and all the capacities are saturated at their maximum values. For small, but finite temperatures, the capacities exhibit oscilla- tions with an amplitude that grows with N , as can be seen in the left-side panels of Figs. 4 and 5. This is in contrast to the case of random couplings seen in Figs. 2 and 3; there destruc- tive interference caused a cancellation of these oscillations, while in the case of equal couplings the capacity oscillations survive and grow with the number of bath spins, reflecting the increased information transfer from the system to the bath as a function of bath size.\n\nWe have studied an exactly solvable spin-star system for transmission of classical and quantum information. The in- formation is encoded into a system spin which interacts with a spin-bath via arbitrary Ising couplings. We considered the “parallel uses” setting of a memoryless quantum channel, where multiple copies of the system spin are transmitted si- multaneously via the same number of copies of the spin bath. As our model is described by the dephasing channel, classical information can be transmitted noiselessly, while the quan- tum capacity can be determined via the “single-letter” for- mula Q = Q$_{1}$ , i.e., it suffices to consider a single copy of the spin-star system. We analytically determined the quan- tum capacities of this communication system, which exhibit a strong dependence on the couplings of the bath spins with the system, and on the bath temperature. The Ising spin bath be- comes noisier as the temperature is increased, and the capac- ities rapidly deteriorate. For random couplings and frequen- cies, recurrences are of small amplitude and die out rapidly. However, for equal couplings and frequencies full periodic recurrences occur independently of the number of bath spins. These recurrences are a signature of the non-Markovian nature of the spin-bath. At low temperature the quantum capacities remain high when the number of bath spins is not too large.\n\n## V. SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS\n\n6\n\n$$p$_{1}$ ( x$_{1}$, x$_{2}$ ) = cos $^{2}$x$_{1}$ cos $^{2}$x$_{2}$ , p$_{2}$ ( x$_{1}$, x$_{2}$ ) = sin $^{2}$x$_{1}$ cos $^{2}$x$_{2}$ , p$_{3}$ ( x$_{1}$, x$_{2}$ ) = cos $^{2}$x$_{1}$ sin $^{2}$x$_{2}$ , p$_{4}$ ( x$_{1}$, x$_{2}$ ) = sin $^{2}$x$_{1}$ sin $^{2}$x$_{2}$ , (A1)$$\n\nN.A. was supported by Higher Education Commission Pak- istan under grant no. 063-111368-Ps3-001 and IRSIP-4-Ps- 08. D.A.L. was supported by the National Science Foundation under grants no. PHY-803304 and CHE-924318.\n\nWe prove Eq. (30). Without loss of generality the ensem- ble of orthogonal states given by Eq. (29) can be assumed to appear with probabilities parametrized as\n\nWithout symmetries in the coupling constants or frequen- cies the capacities rapidly decrease to their minimum values and we find no recurrences for N ≫ 1 , high temperature and uniformly distributed random values of g$_{n}$ and Ω$_{n}$ . However, partial recurrences occur in this situation for small tempera- ture.\n\n## Appendix A: Derivation of the result for the classical capacity assisted by limited entanglement\n\n## Acknowledgments\n\n## 2. Large N\n\n## 3. Short Times\n\nFIG. 4: Capacities C$_{E}$ (solid, thick), Q$_{E}$ (solid, thin) and Q (dashed) of a qubit coupled to an Ising spin bath with N = 4 , for g$_{n}$ = 1 and Ω$_{n}$ = 1 ∀ n . Left: β = 10 , right: β = 1 .\n\nFIG. 5: Same as Fig. 4, with N = 100 .\n\nwhere 0 ≤ θ, x$_{1}$, x$_{2}$ ≤ π $_{4}$. We will show by explicit cal- culation that for our pure dephasing model only the second term in Eq. (8) for the classical capacity assisted by limited entanglement depends on the parameters x$_{1}$, x$_{2}$ . Hence the maximization can be carried out, for fixed θ , by maximizing only this second term.\n\nThe capacities are flat initially and do not decay exponen- tially in the limit of short times αt ≪ 1 , provided that the" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.060173363420662936, + "doc_id": "9550904348c3ebc572b34d04263548dd27deb55d48d1a1fe900994e0c144b7d0", + "edit_distance": 0.8796861377506539, + "f1_score": 0.8473282442748092, + "meteor": 0.19148394026817092, + "precision": 0.9327731092436975, + "pred_md": "3\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nwhere Σ( z ) is the self-energy, defined by\n\n\n\nNote that, by introducing the density of states ρ E ( ) = ( ∂E/∂k ) -1 and letting V ( E ) = ρ E ( ) | v E ( ) | 2 ( V ( E )=0 for E > E 2 and E < E 1 ), the self-energy can be written in the equivalent form\n\n\n\nNote also that Σ( ) z is not defined on the segment ( E , E 1 2 ) of the real axis, and one has\n\n\n\nwhere\n\n\n\nP denotes the principal value, and E is real-valued. Therefore, Σ( z ) has a branch cut in the interval ( E , E 1 2 ).\n\nFor two assigned functions | χ 〉 = χ a | a 〉 + ∫ dkχ k ( ) | k 〉 and | ϕ 〉 = ϕ a | a 〉 + ∫ dkϕ k ( ) | k 〉 of the Hilbert space, the complex function G χ,ϕ ( z ) = 〈 χ G z ϕ | ( ) 〉 can be readily calculated as\n\n\n\nSubstitution of Eqs.(6-9) into Eq.(14) finally yields\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nWe are now ready to determine the singularities of the resolvent, i.e. the spectrum of H and possible spectral\n\nsingularities. To this aim, let us notice that Φ 1 ( z ) and Φ ( ) are bounded functions of 2 z z and have a branch cut\n\nwhere we have set", + "recall": 0.7762237762237763, + "true_md": "where\n\nwhere Σ( z ) is the self-energy, defined by\n\nNote that, by introducing the density of states ρ ( E ) = ( ∂E/∂k ) − 1 and letting V ( E ) = ρ ( E ) | v ( E ) | 2 ( V ( E )=0 for E > E$_{2}$ and E < E$_{1}$ ), the self-energy can be written in the equivalent form\n\nP denotes the principal value, and E is real-valued. Therefore, Σ( z ) has a branch cut in the interval ( E$_{1}$, E$_{2}$ ).\n\nFor two assigned functions | χ 〉 = χ$_{a}$ | a 〉 + ∫ dkχ ( k ) | k 〉 and | ϕ 〉 = ϕ$_{a}$ | a 〉 + ∫ dkϕ ( k ) | k 〉 of the Hilbert space, the complex function G $_{χ,ϕ}$( z ) = 〈 χ | G ( z ) ϕ 〉 can be readily calculated as\n\n$$Δ( E ) = P ∫ E 2 E 1 dE V ( E ) E − E , (13)$$\n\n$$Σ( z ) = ∫ dk | v ( k ) | 2 z − E ( k ) . (10)$$\n\n$$Σ( z ) = ∫ E 2 E 1 dE V ( E ) z − E . (11)$$\n\n$$Σ( z = E ± i 0 $^{+}$) = Δ( E ) ∓ iπV ( E ) (12)$$\n\nNote also that Σ( z ) is not defined on the segment ( E$_{1}$, E$_{2}$ ) of the real axis, and one has\n\nSubstitution of Eqs.(6-9) into Eq.(14) finally yields\n\nwhere we have set\n\n$$G $_{χ,ϕ}$( z ) = χ ∗ $_{a}$ϕ$_{a}$ G $_{a,a}$( z ) + χ ∗ a ∫ dkϕ ( k ) G $_{a,k}$( z ) + ϕ$_{a}$ ∫ dkχ $^{∗}$( k ) G $_{k,a}$( z ) + ∫ dkdk $^{′}$χ$^{∗}$( k $^{′}$) ϕ ( k ) G k ′ $_{,k}$( z ) (14)$$\n\n$$G $_{χ,ϕ}$( z ) = G $_{a,a}$( z )Φ$_{1}$( z ) + Φ$_{2}$( z ) (15)$$\n\n$$Φ$_{1}$( z ) = χ ∗ $_{a}$ϕ$_{a}$ + χ ∗ a ∫ dE ρ ( E ) ϕ ( E ) v ( E ) z − E + ϕ$_{a}$ ∫ dE ρ ( E ) χ $^{∗}$( E ) v $^{∗}$( E ) z − E + + (∫ dE ρ ( E ) v ( E ) ϕ ( E ) z − E ) (∫ dE ρ ( E ) v $^{∗}$( E ) χ $^{∗}$( E ) z − E ) (16) Φ$_{2}$( z ) = ∫ dE ρ ( E ) χ $^{∗}$( E ) ϕ ( E ) z − E . (17)$$\n\nsingularities. To this aim, let us notice that Φ$_{1}$( z ) and Φ$_{2}$( z ) are bounded functions of z and have a branch cut\n\nWe are now ready to determine the singularities of the resolvent, i.e. the spectrum of H and possible spectral\n\n3\n\n$$G a,a ≡ 〈 a | G ( z ) a 〉 = 1 z − E$_{a}$ − Σ( z ) (6) v ( k )$$\n\n$$G k,a ≡ 〈 k | G ( z ) a 〉 = v $^{∗}$( k ) ( z − E ( k ))( z − E$_{a}$ − Σ( z )) (8) v ( k $^{′}$) v $^{∗}$( k ) δ ( k − k $^{′}$)$$\n\n$$− − − G k,k ′ ≡ 〈 k | G ( z ) k $^{′}$〉 = v ( k $^{′}$) v $^{∗}$( k ) ( z − E ( k ))( z − E ( k $^{′}$))( z − E$_{a}$ − Σ( z )) + δ ( k − k $^{′}$) z − E ( k $^{′}$) (9)$$\n\n$$− − G a,k ≡ 〈 a | G ( z ) k 〉 = v ( k ) ( z − E ( k ))( z − E$_{a}$ − Σ( z )) (7) G ≡ 〈 k | G ( z ) a 〉 = v $^{∗}$( k ) (8)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6558932352141646, + "doc_id": "d0d28d31334ab86018aa52a3afae19d37ff10b090f8028956dd407764430c1e0", + "edit_distance": 0.6091370558375635, + "f1_score": 0.9957446808510638, + "meteor": 0.8278215008378892, + "precision": 0.9915254237288136, + "pred_md": "FIG. 1. (color) Main figure: Major (red/black) and minor (green) hysteresis loops along the [110] axis at 5 K, for a Fe (2 nm)/(Ga,Mn)As (20 nm) film, and the hysteresis loop for a control (Ga,Mn)As (20 nm) film along the same axis (blue). Left inset: Magnetization versus temperature for the Fe/(Ga,Mn)As film at remanence (black) and under a 500 Oe applied field (red). Right inset: Exchange bias field versus thickness d of the (Ga,Mn)As film (points) and fit showing 1/ d dependence (dashed line).\n\nFIG. 1. (color) Main figure: Major (red/black) and minor (green) hysteresis loops along the [110] axis at 5 K, for a Fe (2 nm)/(Ga,Mn)As (20 nm) film, and the hysteresis loop for a control (Ga,Mn)As (20 nm) film along the same axis (blue). Left inset: Magnetization versus temperature for the Fe/(Ga,Mn)As film at remanence (black) and under a 500 Oe applied field (red). Right inset: Exchange bias field versus thickness d of the (Ga,Mn)As film (points) and fit showing 1/ d dependence (dashed line).\n\n/s32\n\n4\n\n- M. Sawicki, M. Polini, J. Sinova, A. H. MacDonald, R. P. Campion, L. X. Zhao, N. R. S. Farley, T. K. Johal, G. van der Laan, C. T. Foxon, and B. L. Gallagher, Phys. Rev. B 73 , 165205 (2006).\n- 16 K. W. Edmonds, A. A. Freeman, N. R. S. Farley, K. Y. Wang, R. P. Campion, B. L. Gallagher, C. T. Foxon, G. van der Laan, and E. Arenholz, J. Appl. Phys. 102 , 023902 (2007).", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "M. Sawicki, M. Polini, J. Sinova, A. H. MacDonald, R. P. Campion, L. X. Zhao, N. R. S. Farley, T. K. Johal, G. van der Laan, C. T. Foxon, and B. L. Gallagher, Phys. Rev. B 73 , 165205 (2006).\n\n- , 165205 (2006). 16 K. W. Edmonds, A. A. Freeman, N. R. S. Farley, K. Y. Wang, R. P. Campion, B. L. Gallagher, C. T. Foxon, G. van der Laan, and E. Arenholz, J. Appl. Phys. 102 , 023902 (2007).\n\n4\n\nFIG. 1. (color) Main figure: Major (red/black) and minor (green) hysteresis loops along the [110] axis at 5 K, for a Fe (2 nm)/(Ga,Mn)As (20 nm) film, and the hysteresis loop for a control (Ga,Mn)As (20 nm) film along the same axis (blue). Left inset: Magnetization versus temperature for the Fe/(Ga,Mn)As film at remanence (black) and under a 500 Oe applied field (red). Right inset: Exchange bias field versus thickness d of the (Ga,Mn)As film (points) and fit showing 1/ d dependence (dashed line)." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8702813423263346, + "doc_id": "233af507a6acbaac265ee06fb713da4578588473fcc606aac7de2166201d3384", + "edit_distance": 0.5870880968392737, + "f1_score": 0.8838883888388839, + "meteor": 0.7009947285737038, + "precision": 0.9042357274401474, + "pred_md": "4\n\nall N impurities. At this point it suffices to see that the conservative estimates obtained from Eq. (7) predict measurable signals in response to small changes in concentration of the target molecules.\n\nTo our knowledge, controlled doping of CNTs with transition metal atoms has so far not been achieved. It has, however, been found that metal atoms incorporated into the CNT lattice during catalytic growth are afterwards very difficult to remove [30]. Furthermore, it has been shown that CNT vacancies, which are needed for the metallic doping, may be formed in a controlled way by irradiation by Ar ions [31]. This suggests that metallic doping of CNTs should be possible.\n\nIn summary, we have presented a general model of nanostructured chemical sensors which takes the adsorption energies of the relevant chemical species and their individual scattering resistances as the only input. On the basis of this model we have performed a computational screening of transition metal doped CNTs, and found that Ni-doped CNTs are promising candidates for detecting CO in a background of air. The model may be applied straightforwardly to other nanostructures than CNTs, other functionalizations than metal doping and other gas compositions than air.\n\nThe authors acknowledge financial support from Spanish MEC (FIS2007-65702-C02-01), 'Grupos Consolidados UPV/EHU del Gobierno Vasco' (IT-319-07), e-I3 ETSF project (Contract Number 211956), 'Red Espa˜ nola de Supercomputaci' on', NABIIT and the Danish Center for Scientific Computing. The Center for Atomic-scale Materials Design (CAMD) is sponsored by the Lundbeck Foundation. JMG-L acknowledges funding from Spanish MICINN through Juan de la Cierva and Jos' e Castillejo programs.\n\n- ∗ Electronic address: juanmaria.garcia@ehu.es\n- [1] Gas Sensing Materials, MRS Bull. , vol. 24 (1999).\n- [2] J. C. Chalier, X. Blase, and S. Roche, 'Electronic and transport properties of nanotubes', Rev. Mod. Phys. 79 (2), 677 (May 2007), doi:10.1103/RevModPhys.79.677.\n- [3] J. Kong, N. R. Franklin, C. Zhou, M. G. Chapline, S. Peng, K. Cho, and H. Dai, 'Nanotube molecular wires as chemical sensors', Science 287 (5453), 622 (Jan. 2000), doi:10.1126/science.287.5453.622.\n- [4] P. G. Collins, K. Bradley, M. Ishigami, and A. Zettl, 'Extreme oxygen sensitivity of electronic properties of carbon nanotubes', Science 287 (5459), 1801 (Mar. 2000), doi:10.1126/science.287.5459.1801.\n- [5] C. Hierold, Carbon Nanotube Devices: Properties, Modeling, Integration and Applications (Wiley-VCH, Weinheim, 2008).\n- [6] F. Villalpando-P' aez, A. H. Romero, E. Mu˜ noz-Sandoval, L. M. Mart' ınez, H. Terrones, and M. Terrones, 'Fabrication of vapor and gas sensors using films of aligned CN x nanotubes', Chem. Phys. Lett. 386 (1-3), 137 (Mar. 2004), doi:10.1016/j.cplett.2004.01.052.\n- [7] A. R. Rocha, M. Rossi, A. Fazzio, and A. J. R. da Silva, 'Designing real nanotube-based gas sensors', Phys. Rev. Lett. 100 (17), 176803 (May 2008), doi:10.1103/PhysRevLett.100.176803.\n- [8] S. Brahim, S. Colbern, R. Gump, and L. Grigorian, 'Tailoring gas sensing properties of carbon nanotubes', J. Appl. Phys. 104 (2), 024502 (Jul. 2008), doi:10.1063/1.2956395.\n- [9] C. Morgan, Z. Alemipour, and M. Baxendale, 'Variable range hopping in oxygen-exposed single-wall carbon nanotube networks', Phys. Stat. Solidi A 205 (6), 1394 (May 2008), doi:10.1002/pssa.200778113.\n- [10] D. J. Mowbray, C. Morgan, and K. S. Thygesen, 'Influence of O2 and N2 on the conductivity of carbon nanotube networks', Phys. Rev. B 79 (19), 195431 (May 2009), doi:10.1103/PhysRevB.79.195431.\n- [11] L. Valentini, F. Mercuri, I. Armentano, C. Cantalini, S. Picozzi, L. Lozzi, S. Santucci, A. Sgamellotti, and J. M. Kenny, 'Role of defects on the gas sensing properties of carbon nanotubes thin films: experiment and theory', Chem. Phys. Lett. 387 (4-6), 356 (Apr. 2004), doi:10.1016/j.cplett.2004.02.038.\n- [12] Z. Zanolli and J.-C. Charlier, 'Defective carbon nanotubes for single-molecule sensing', Phys. Rev. B 80 (15), 155447 (Oct. 2009), doi:10.1103/PhysRevB.80.155447.\n- [13] J. M. Garc' ıa-Lastra, K. S. Thygesen, M. Strange, and ' ngel A Rubio, 'Conductance of sidewall-functionalized carbon nanotubes: Universal dependence on adsorption sites', Phys. Rev. Lett. 101 (23), 236806 (Dec. 2008), doi:10.1103/PhysRevLett.101.236806.\n- [14] S. B. Fagan, R. Mota, A. J. R. da Silva, and A. Fazzio, ' Ab initio study of an iron atom interacting with single-wall carbon nanotubes', Phys. Rev. B 67 (20), 205414 (May 2003), doi:10.1103/PhysRevB.67.205414.\n- [15] Y. Yagi, T. M. Briere, M. H. F. Sluiter, V . Kumar, A. A. Farajian, and Y. Kawazoe, 'Stable geometries and magnetic properties of single-walled carbon nanotubes doped with 3 d transition metals: A first-principles study', Phys. Rev. B 69 (7), 075414 (Feb 2004), doi:10.1103/PhysRevB.69.075414.\n- [16] S. H. Yang, W. H. Shin, J. W. Lee, S. Y. Kim, S. I. Woo, and J. K. Kang, 'Interaction of a transition metal atom with intrinsic defects in single-walled carbon nanotubes', J. Phys. Chem. B 110 (28), 13941 (Jun. 2006), doi:10.1021/jp061895q.\n- [17] K. T. Chan, J. B. Neaton, and M. L. Cohen, 'First-principles study of metal adatom adsorption on graphene', Phys. Rev. B 77 , 235430 (Jun. 2008), doi:10.1103/PhysRevB.77.235430.\n- [18] C. S. Yeung, L. V. Liu, and Y. A. Wang, 'Adsorption of small gas molecules onto Pt-doped single-walled carbon nanotubes', J. Phys. Chem. C 112 (19), 7401 (Apr. 2008), doi:10.1021/jp0753981.\n- [19] T. Vo, Y.-D. Wu, R. Car, and M. Robert, 'Structures, interactions, and ferromagnetism of Fe-carbon nanotube systems', J. Phys. Chem. C 112 (22), 400 (May 2008), doi:10.1021/jp0761968.\n- [20] J. A. Furst, M. Brandbyge, A.-P. Jauho, and K. Stokbro, ' Ab initio study of spin-dependent transport in carbon nanotubes with iron and vanadium adatoms', Phys. Rev. B 78 (19), 195405 (Nov. 2008), doi:10.1103/PhysRevB.78.195405.\n- [21] A. V. Krasheninnikov, P. O. Lehtinen, A. S. Foster, P. Pyykko, and R. M. Nieminen, 'Embedding transitionmetal atoms in graphene: Structure, bonding, and magnetism', Phys. Rev. Lett. 102 (12), 126807 (Mar. 2009), doi:10.1103/PhysRevLett.102.126807.\n- [22] J. J. Mortensen, L. B. Hansen, and K. W. Jacobsen, 'Real-space grid implementation of the projector augmented wave method', Phys. Rev. B 71 (3), 035109 (Jan. 2005), doi:10.1103/PhysRevB.71.035109.\n- [23] J. P. Perdew, K. Burke, and M. Ernzerhof, 'Generalized gradient approximation made simple', Phys. Rev. Lett. 77 (18), 3865 (Oct. 1996), doi:10.1103/PhysRevLett.77.3865.", + "recall": 0.8644366197183099, + "true_md": "4\n\nall N impurities. At this point it suffices to see that the con- servative estimates obtained from Eq. (7) predict measurable signals in response to small changes in concentration of the target molecules.\n\nTo our knowledge, controlled doping of CNTs with transi- tion metal atoms has so far not been achieved. It has, how- ever, been found that metal atoms incorporated into the CNT lattice during catalytic growth are afterwards very difficult to remove [30]. Furthermore, it has been shown that CNT vacan- cies, which are needed for the metallic doping, may be formed in a controlled way by irradiation by Ar ions [31]. This sug- gests that metallic doping of CNTs should be possible.\n\nIn summary, we have presented a general model of nanos- tructured chemical sensors which takes the adsorption en- ergies of the relevant chemical species and their individual scattering resistances as the only input. On the basis of this model we have performed a computational screening of tran- sition metal doped CNTs, and found that Ni-doped CNTs are promising candidates for detecting CO in a background of air. The model may be applied straightforwardly to other nanos- tructures than CNTs, other functionalizations than metal dop- ing and other gas compositions than air.\n\nThe authors acknowledge financial support from Span- ish MEC (FIS2007-65702-C02-01), “Grupos Consolidados UPV/EHU del Gobierno Vasco” (IT-319-07), e-I3 ETSF project (Contract Number 211956), “Red Espa˜ nola de Super- computaci´ on”, NABIIT and the Danish Center for Scientific Computing. The Center for Atomic-scale Materials Design (CAMD) is sponsored by the Lundbeck Foundation. JMG-L acknowledges funding from Spanish MICINN through Juan de la Cierva and Jos´e Castillejo programs.\n\n- [7] A. R. Rocha, M. Rossi, A. Fazzio, and A. J. R. da Silva, “Designing real nanotube-based gas sen- sors”, Phys. Rev. Lett. 100 (17), 176803 (May 2008), doi:10.1103/PhysRevLett.100.176803.\n\n- [6] F. Villalpando-P´aez, A. H. Romero, E. Mu˜noz-Sandoval, L. M. Mart´ınez, H. Terrones, and M. Terrones, “Fabrica- tion of vapor and gas sensors using films of aligned CN$_{x}$ nanotubes”, Chem. Phys. Lett. 386 (1-3), 137 (Mar. 2004), doi:10.1016/j.cplett.2004.01.052.\n\n- [23] J. P. Perdew, K. Burke, and M. Ernzerhof, “Generalized gradi- ent approximation made simple”, Phys. Rev. Lett. 77 (18), 3865 (Oct. 1996), doi:10.1103/PhysRevLett.77.3865.\n\n- [22] J. J. Mortensen, L. B. Hansen, and K. W. Jacobsen, “Real-space grid implementation of the projector augmented wave method”, Phys. Rev. B 71 (3), 035109 (Jan. 2005), doi:10.1103/PhysRevB.71.035109.\n\n- [21] A. V. Krasheninnikov, P. O. Lehtinen, A. S. Foster, P. Pyykk¨o, and R. M. Nieminen, “Embedding transition- metal atoms in graphene: Structure, bonding, and mag- netism”, Phys. Rev. Lett. 102 (12), 126807 (Mar. 2009), doi:10.1103/PhysRevLett.102.126807.\n\n- [5] C. Hierold, Carbon Nanotube Devices: Properties, Modeling, Integration and Applications (Wiley-VCH, Weinheim, 2008).\n\n- [4] P. G. Collins, K. Bradley, M. Ishigami, and A. Zettl, “Ex- treme oxygen sensitivity of electronic properties of car- bon nanotubes”, Science 287 (5459), 1801 (Mar. 2000), doi:10.1126/science.287.5459.1801.\n\n- [3] J. Kong, N. R. Franklin, C. Zhou, M. G. Chapline, S. Peng, K. Cho, and H. Dai, “Nanotube molecular wires as chemical sensors”, Science 287 (5453), 622 (Jan. 2000), doi:10.1126/science.287.5453.622.\n\n- [2] J. C. Chalier, X. Blase, and S. Roche, “Electronic and transport properties of nanotubes”, Rev. Mod. Phys. 79 (2), 677 (May 2007), doi:10.1103/RevModPhys.79.677.\n\n- [1] Gas Sensing Materials, MRS Bull. , vol. 24 (1999).\n\n- ∗ Electronic address: juanmaria.garcia@ehu.es\n\n- [20] J. A. F¨urst, M. Brandbyge, A.-P. Jauho, and K. Stokbro, “ Ab initio study of spin-dependent transport in carbon nanotubes with iron and vanadium adatoms”, Phys. Rev. B 78 (19), 195405 (Nov. 2008), doi:10.1103/PhysRevB.78.195405.\n\n- [19] T. Vo, Y.-D. Wu, R. Car, and M. Robert, “Structures, in- teractions, and ferromagnetism of Fe-carbon nanotube sys- tems”, J. Phys. Chem. C 112 (22), 400 (May 2008), doi:10.1021/jp0761968.\n\n- [18] C. S. Yeung, L. V. Liu, and Y. A. Wang, “Adsorption of small gas molecules onto Pt-doped single-walled carbon nanotubes”, J. Phys. Chem. C 112 (19), 7401 (Apr. 2008), doi:10.1021/jp0753981.\n\n- [17] K. T. Chan, J. B. Neaton, and M. L. Cohen, “First-principles study of metal adatom adsorption on graphene”, Phys. Rev. B 77 , 235430 (Jun. 2008), doi:10.1103/PhysRevB.77.235430.\n\n- [16] S. H. Yang, W. H. Shin, J. W. Lee, S. Y. Kim, S. I. Woo, and J. K. Kang, “Interaction of a transition metal atom with intrinsic defects in single-walled carbon nanotubes”, J. Phys. Chem. B 110 (28), 13941 (Jun. 2006), doi:10.1021/jp061895q.\n\n- [15] Y. Yagi, T. M. Briere, M. H. F. Sluiter, V. Kumar, A. A. Farajian, and Y. Kawazoe, “Stable geometries and magnetic properties of single-walled carbon nanotubes doped with 3 d transition met- als: A first-principles study”, Phys. Rev. B 69 (7), 075414 (Feb 2004), doi:10.1103/PhysRevB.69.075414.\n\n- [14] S. B. Fagan, R. Mota, A. J. R. da Silva, and A. Fazzio, “ Ab initio study of an iron atom interacting with single-wall car- bon nanotubes”, Phys. Rev. B 67 (20), 205414 (May 2003), doi:10.1103/PhysRevB.67.205414.\n\n- [13] J. M. Garc´ıa-Lastra, K. S. Thygesen, M. Strange, and ´ Angel Rubio, “Conductance of sidewall-functionalized carbon nanotubes: Universal dependence on adsorption sites”, Phys. Rev. Lett. 101 (23), 236806 (Dec. 2008), doi:10.1103/PhysRevLett.101.236806.\n\n- [12] Z. Zanolli and J.-C. Charlier, “Defective carbon nanotubes for single-molecule sensing”, Phys. Rev. B 80 (15), 155447 (Oct. 2009), doi:10.1103/PhysRevB.80.155447.\n\n- [11] L. Valentini, F. Mercuri, I. Armentano, C. Cantalini, S. Picozzi, L. Lozzi, S. Santucci, A. Sgamellotti, and J. M. Kenny, “Role of defects on the gas sensing properties of carbon nanotubes thin films: experiment and theory”, Chem. Phys. Lett. 387 (4-6), 356 (Apr. 2004), doi:10.1016/j.cplett.2004.02.038.\n\n- [10] D. J. Mowbray, C. Morgan, and K. S. Thygesen, “In- fluence of O$_{2}$ and N$_{2}$ on the conductivity of carbon nan- otube networks”, Phys. Rev. B 79 (19), 195431 (May 2009), doi:10.1103/PhysRevB.79.195431.\n\n- [9] C. Morgan, Z. Alemipour, and M. Baxendale, “Variable range hopping in oxygen-exposed single-wall carbon nanotube networks”, Phys. Stat. Solidi A 205 (6), 1394 (May 2008), doi:10.1002/pssa.200778113.\n\n- [8] S. Brahim, S. Colbern, R. Gump, and L. Grigorian, “Tailoring gas sensing properties of carbon nanotubes”, J. Appl. Phys. 104 (2), 024502 (Jul. 2008), doi:10.1063/1.2956395." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4923423547167743, + "doc_id": "3db802977f191d3b14c18581d1c674e56ae34f538ff4cd0e3b552922851ac9b6", + "edit_distance": 0.6253658536585366, + "f1_score": 0.8851063829787235, + "meteor": 0.4628735154800612, + "precision": 0.9454545454545454, + "pred_md": "FIG. 4: Top - a conductivity plot for the BCSI case in the presence of a lattice. The parameters are ∆ = 30 meV , Γ = 3 5 . meV . Bottom - the behavior of Kubo sums. Note that (a) the spectral weight in the NS is always greater in the SCS, (b) the spectral weight decreases with Γ, and (c) the difference between NS and SCS decreases as Γ increases.\n\nFIG. 4: Top - a conductivity plot for the BCSI case in the presence of a lattice. The parameters are ∆ = 30 meV , Γ = 3 5 . meV . Bottom - the behavior of Kubo sums. Note that (a) the spectral weight in the NS is always greater in the SCS, (b) the spectral weight decreases with Γ, and (c) the difference between NS and SCS decreases as Γ increases.\n\nlittle variation of ∆ W ω ( c ) at above 0 1 . -0 3 . eV what implies that for larger ω c , ∆ W ω ( c ) ≈ ∆ W K >> ∆ ( f ω c ).\n\nTo make this more quantitative, we compare in Fig. 6 ∆ W ω ( c ) obtained for a constant DOS, when ∆ W ω ( c ) = ∆ ( f ω c ), and for the actual lattice dispersion, when ∆ W ω ( c ) = ∆ W K + ∆ ( f ω c ). In the clean limit there is obviously little cutoff dependence beyond 0 1 . eV , i.e., ∆ ( f ω c ) is truly small, and the difference between the two cases is just ∆ W K . In the dirty limit, the situation is similar, but there is obviously more variation with ω c , and ∆ f ( ω c ) becomes truly small only above 0 3 . eV . Note also that the position of the dip in ∆ W ω ( c ) in the clean limit is at a larger ω c in the presence of the lattice than in a continuum.\n\n## B. The Einstein boson model\n\nWe next consider the case of electrons interacting with a single boson mode which by itself is not affected by superconductivity. The primary candidate for such mode is an optical phonon. The imaginary part of the NS self energy has been discussed numerous times in the literature. We make one simplifying assumption - approximate the DOS by a constant in calculating fermionic self-energy. We will, however, keep the full lattice dispersion in the calculations of the optical integral. The advantage of this\n\n6\n\nFIG. 5: The evolution of optical integral in NS(top) and SCS(bottom) for BCSI case. Plots are made for clean limit (solid lines, Γ = 3 5 . meV ) and dirty limit (dashed lines, Γ = 150 meV ) for ∆ = 30 meV . Observe that (a) W (0) = 0 in the NS, but has a non-zero value in the SCS because of the δ -function (this value decreases in the dirty limit), and (b) the flat region in the SCS is due to the fact that σ ' ( ω ) = 0 for Ω < 2∆. Also note that ∼ 90 -95% of the spectral weight is recovered up to 1 eV\n\nFIG. 5: The evolution of optical integral in NS(top) and SCS(bottom) for BCSI case. Plots are made for clean limit (solid lines, Γ = 3 5 . meV ) and dirty limit (dashed lines, Γ = 150 meV ) for ∆ = 30 meV . Observe that (a) W (0) = 0 in the NS, but has a non-zero value in the SCS because of the δ -function (this value decreases in the dirty limit), and (b) the flat region in the SCS is due to the fact that σ ' ( ω ) = 0 for Ω < 2∆. Also note that ∼ 90 -95% of the spectral weight is recovered up to 1 eV\n\napproximation is that the self-energy can be computed analytically. The full self-energy obtained with the lattice dispersion is more involved and can only be obtained numerically, but its structure is quite similar to the one obtained with a constant DOS.\n\nThe self-energy for a constant DOS is given by\n\n\n\nwhere\n\n\n\nand λ n is a dimensionless electron-boson coupling. Integrating and transforming to real frequencies, we obtain\n\n\n\nIn the SCS, we obtain for ω < 0\n\n\n\n", + "recall": 0.832, + "true_md": "6\n\nFIG. 4: Top - a conductivity plot for the BCSI case in the presence of a lattice. The parameters are Δ = 30 meV , Γ = 3 . 5 meV . Bottom – the behavior of Kubo sums. Note that (a) the spectral weight in the NS is always greater in the SCS, (b) the spectral weight decreases with Γ, and (c) the difference between NS and SCS decreases as Γ increases.\n\nFIG. 5: The evolution of optical integral in NS(top) and SCS(bottom) for BCSI case. Plots are made for clean limit (solid lines, Γ = 3 . 5 meV ) and dirty limit (dashed lines, Γ = 150 meV ) for Δ = 30 meV . Observe that (a) W (0) = 0 in the NS, but has a non-zero value in the SCS because of the δ -function (this value decreases in the dirty limit), and (b) the flat region in the SCS is due to the fact that σ $^{′}$( ω ) = 0 for Ω < 2Δ. Also note that ∼ 90 − 95% of the spectral weight is recovered up to 1 eV\n\nlittle variation of Δ W ( ω$_{c}$ ) at above 0 . 1 − 0 . 3 eV what implies that for larger ω$_{c}$ , Δ W ( ω$_{c}$ ) ≈ Δ W$_{K}$ >> Δ f ( ω$_{c}$ ).\n\nTo make this more quantitative, we compare in Fig. 6 Δ W ( ω$_{c}$ ) obtained for a constant DOS, when Δ W ( ω$_{c}$ ) = Δ f ( ω$_{c}$ ), and for the actual lattice dispersion, when Δ W ( ω$_{c}$ ) = Δ W$_{K}$ + Δ f ( ω$_{c}$ ). In the clean limit there is obviously little cutoff dependence beyond 0 . 1 eV , i.e., Δ f ( ω$_{c}$ ) is truly small, and the difference between the two cases is just Δ W$_{K}$ . In the dirty limit, the situation is similar, but there is obviously more variation with ω$_{c}$ , and Δ f ( ω$_{c}$ ) becomes truly small only above 0 . 3 eV . Note also that the position of the dip in Δ W ( ω$_{c}$ ) in the clean limit is at a larger ω$_{c}$ in the presence of the lattice than in a continuum.\n\nWe next consider the case of electrons interacting with a single boson mode which by itself is not affected by su- perconductivity. The primary candidate for such mode is an optical phonon. The imaginary part of the NS self en- ergy has been discussed numerous times in the literature. We make one simplifying assumption – approximate the DOS by a constant in calculating fermionic self-energy. We will, however, keep the full lattice dispersion in the calculations of the optical integral. The advantage of this\n\nIn the SCS, we obtain for ω < 0\n\nand λ$_{n}$ is a dimensionless electron-boson coupling. Inte- grating and transforming to real frequencies, we obtain Σ ′′ ( ω ) = − π λ$_{n}$ω$_{o}$ Θ( | ω | − ω$_{o}$ )\n\nwhere\n\napproximation is that the self-energy can be computed analytically. The full self-energy obtained with the lat- tice dispersion is more involved and can only be obtained numerically, but its structure is quite similar to the one obtained with a constant DOS.\n\nThe self-energy for a constant DOS is given by\n\n$$Σ( iω ) = − i 2 π λ$_{n}$ ∫ dϵ$_{k}$d ( i Ω) χ ( i Ω) G ( ϵ$_{k}$, iω + i Ω) (13) where$$\n\n$$χ ( i Ω) = ω 2 0 ω 2 0 − ( i Ω) 2 (14)$$\n\n$$Σ ′′ ( ω ) = − π 2 λ$_{n}$ω$_{o}$ Θ( | ω | − ω$_{o}$ ) Σ ′ ( ω ) = − 1 2 λ$_{n}$ω$_{o}$ log ∣ ∣$^{ω}$ + ω$_{o}$ ω − ω$_{o}$ ∣ (15) In the SCS, we obtain for ω < 0 ( )$$\n\n$$∣$^{ω}$ Σ ′′ ( ω ) = − π 2 λ$_{n}$ω$_{o}$ Re ( ω + ω$_{o}$ √ ( ω + ω$_{o}$ ) 2 − Δ 2 )$$\n\n## B. The Einstein boson model" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.12155432023965336, + "doc_id": "648cc6a2b583b5acab557ef1abb059dcf4c06f91b73f035ef73ecf902c85d4ea", + "edit_distance": 0.7716346153846154, + "f1_score": 0.8628318584070798, + "meteor": 0.3064943170284099, + "precision": 0.9512195121951219, + "pred_md": "\n\n2\n\n\n\nwhere\n\n\n\nand Q, a and M the charge, angular momentum per unit mass and mass of the black hole respectively. For the most part the explicit statement of the dependence of Eq.(2) on r will be assumed and so it will be suppressed for brevity unless otherwise stated. Together these three parameters form a family containing a set of all classical black holes. The coordinate system breaks down twice for this metric, firstly for the radial part when 1 g rr = 0 then for the time part of the metric when g tt = 0,\n\n\n\nWhere r +( -) is the outer (inner) event horizon. In order to relate local and global coordinates one must introduce a tetrad (or vierbein) formalism, which we have chosen to be\n\n\n\nThis describes a local inertial frame for a particle, in this case they are rotating with respect to an observer at infinity. In this respect Eq.(3) and its inverse are central to relating local and global coordinates. For example the momentum in a local inertial frame p a ( x ) is e a µ ( x p ) µ ( x ) in relation to its global definition. It is imperative that properties can be related locally and globally on a manifold. Henceforth terms not shown are vanishing unless explicitly stated otherwise.\n\nA straight-forward, but tedious calculation yields the components of the connection one-form [8], ω a µ b ( x ) = e a ν ( x ) ∇ µ e ν b ( x ), these are a spin connection. These are very involved equations in the Kerr-Newman spacetime. One notes however that the nonzero Schwarzschild symmetry is preserved and extended to some other pairs of elements. The following are the nonvanishing one-forms restricted to the equatorial plane,\n\n\n\nA particle in a circular orbit on the equatorial plane ( θ = π/ 2) is now considered, with a radius r( > r + ) and constant velocity. The four velocity of such a particle is given by\n\n\n\nwhere ζ is the rapidity in the local inertial frame defined by\n\nand", + "recall": 0.7894736842105263, + "true_md": "2\n\n$$ds 2 = g$_{µν}$ ( x ) dx $^{µ}$dxν = − Δ Σ ( dt − a sin $^{2}$θ dφ ) 2 + Σ Δ dr 2 + Σ dθ 2 + sin $^{2}$θ Σ ( a dt − ( r 2 + a $^{2}$) dφ ) 2 (1)$$\n\nwhere\n\n$$Σ ( r ) = r 2 + a $^{2}$cos$^{2}$θ Δ ( r ) = r 2 − 2 Mr + a 2 + Q 2 (2)$$\n\nand Q, a and M the charge, angular momentum per unit mass and mass of the black hole respec- tively. For the most part the explicit statement of the dependence of Eq.(2) on r will be assumed and so it will be suppressed for brevity unless otherwise stated. Together these three parame- ters form a family containing a set of all classical black holes. The coordinate system breaks down twice for this metric, firstly for the radial part when 1 g$_{rr}$ = 0 then for the time part of the met- ric when g$_{tt}$ = 0,\n\n$$r$_{±}$ = M ± $^{√}$M 2 − a 2 − Q 2$$\n\nWhere r$_{+(}$$\\_{−}$$_{)}$ is the outer (inner) event horizon. In order to relate local and global coordinates one must introduce a tetrad (or vierbein) formalism, which we have chosen to be\n\n$$e µ 0 ( x ) = $^{(}$a 2 + r 2 √ ΔΣ , 0 , 0 , − a sin( θ ) √ Σ ) e µ 1 ( x ) = ( 0 ,$^{√}$ Δ Σ , 0 , 0$^{)}$ e µ 2 ( x ) = ( 0 , 0 , 1 √ Σ , 0$^{)}$ e µ 3 ( x ) = ( − a √ ΔΣ , 0 , 0 , 1 sin( θ ) √ Σ$^{)}$ (3)$$\n\n$$u $^{t}$( x ) = N − $^{1}$cosh( ζ ) = r$^{√}$ √ √ ( a 2 + r $^{2}$) 2 − a $^{2}$Δ a $^{2}$(2 Mr − Q $^{2}$) 2 + (Δ − a $^{2}$) $^{(}$( a 2 + r $^{2}$) 2 − a $^{2}$Δ ) cosh( ζ ) u $^{ϕ}$( x ) = − N − $^{1}$N $^{ϕ}$cosh( ζ ) + sinh( ζ ) √ g$_{ϕϕ}$ = r $^{√}$( a 2 + r $^{2}$) 2 − a $^{2}$Δ    a $^{(}$2 Mr − Q 2 $^{)}$cosh( ζ ) √ a $^{2}$(2 Mr − Q $^{2}$) 2 + (Δ − a $^{2}$) $^{(}$( a 2 + r $^{2}$) 2 − a $^{2}$Δ ) + sinh( ζ )$^{}$   (5)$$\n\n$$N = 1 tt$$\n\nA particle in a circular orbit on the equatorial plane ( θ = π/ 2) is now considered, with a radius r( > r$_{+}$ ) and constant velocity. The four velocity of such a particle is given by\n\n$$ω 0 t $_{1}$( x ) = ω 1 t $_{0}$( x ) ω 1 θ $_{2}$( x ) = − ω 2 θ $_{1}$( x ) ω 1 ϕ $_{3}$( x ) = − ω 3 ϕ $_{1}$( x ) ω 1 t $_{3}$( x ) = − ω 3 t $_{1}$( x ) ω 0 ϕ $_{1}$( x ) = ω 1 ϕ $_{0}$( x ) ω 0 r $_{3}$( x ) = ω 3 r $_{0}$( x ) ω 0 r $_{0}$( x ) = ω 3 r $_{3}$( x ) (4)$$\n\nThis describes a local inertial frame for a parti- cle, in this case they are rotating with respect to an observer at infinity. In this respect Eq.(3) and its inverse are central to relating local and global coordinates. For example the momentum in a local inertial frame p $^{a}$( x ) is e $^{a}$$\\_{µ}$( x ) p $^{µ}$( x ) in relation to its global definition. It is imperative that properties can be related locally and glob- ally on a manifold. Henceforth terms not shown are vanishing unless explicitly stated otherwise. A straight-forward, but tedious calculation yields the components of the connection one-form [8], ω a µ $\\_{b}$( x ) = e $^{a}$$_{ν}$( x ) ∇$_{µ}$ e ν b ( x ), these are a spin con- nection. These are very involved equations in the Kerr-Newman spacetime. One notes how- ever that the nonzero Schwarzschild symmetry is preserved and extended to some other pairs of elements. The following are the nonvanishing one-forms restricted to the equatorial plane,\n\nwhere ζ is the rapidity in the local inertial frame defined by\n\nand" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.22255933570166034, + "doc_id": "7657a8b88d2ed9fc2f17d45ba047cde13ab3b3f1567ce75e4da6fd7698d0ebfa", + "edit_distance": 0.7926023778071334, + "f1_score": 0.8521400778210116, + "meteor": 0.295587213576252, + "precision": 0.9319148936170213, + "pred_md": "the next paragraph. For ε = 0 the four fixed points are:\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nwith corresponding energies E -, E x , and E + that are given by Eqs.(10-12). We can also determine the borders of the separatrix by solving the equation f ( θ 1 ' , 2 ' ) = f ( θ x ). Thus we get the following expressions for the outer borders of the islands\n\n\n\nThe value of the critical bias Eq. (9) is obtained by solving the equation f ' ( θ ) = 0 together with f '' ( θ ) = 0. An equivalent set of questions is\n\n\n\nleading to the solution\n\n\n\nFor ε c = , one island has zero area while the other has a ε critical area A c . For completeness we derive an estimate for A c , that we have used in [25]. The island is defined by the equation f ( θ, ϕ ) = const., where\n\n\n\n\n\nThe critical island is defined by the equation f ( θ, ϕ ) = f c where according to the previous paragraph\n\n\n\nThe outer turning point θ 1 ' is identified as the second root of the equation f ( θ ) = f c . Defining s ≡ cos θ the equation takes the form\n\n\n\nOne root with double degeneracy is obviously\n\n\n\nThen we can get the third root by solving a quadratic equation, leading to\n\n\n\nThe area of the critical island can be found numerically, and a very good approximation is s 3 x , namely\n\n\n\n11\n\n## Appendix C: The Wigner function of a spin\n\nThe Stratonovich-Wigner-Weyl correspondence (SWWC) associates with any Hermitian operator of a spin ( j ) , a real sphere (2 j ) function A W (Ω). Both spaces have the same dimension (2 +1) , and the association j 2 is one-to-one. This appendix provides the reasoning and the practical formulas following [43, 44].\n\nThe inner product of two operators is defined as trace[ ˆ A B † ˆ ]. An orthonormal-like set of projector-like operators, that are knows and the Stratonovich-Weyl operators, can be defined, such that\n\n\n\nwhere Ω = ( θ, ϕ ), and the 'delta' function is\n\n\n\n\n\nAccordingly any operator ˆ can be represented by the A phase-space function\n\n\n\nFrom the above definition it follows that the inner product of two Hermitian operators is given by a phase-space integral over the product of the corresponding Wigner functions as in Eq.(32).\n\nThe actual construction of the ˆ P Ω is not a simple task. One procedure is to start with the non-orthonormal set of coherent state projectors | Ω 〉〈 Ω and to perform an 'or-| thogonalization', very similar to that employed in condense matter physics for the purpose of defining a Wannier basis. The final result is conveniently expressed as\n\n\n\nwhich is an orthogonal transformation over the nonHermitian mulitpole operators ˆ T lm defined as\n\n\n\nWe use here the Wigner 3 j symbols. Consequently we can represent any operator ˆ A either by A lm = trace[( ˆ T lm ) † ˆ ] A or by A W (Ω) = trace[ ˆ P Ω ˆ ]. A In particular it follows that ρ = | ψ 〉〈 ψ | is represented by\n\n\n\nwhere\n\n", + "recall": 0.7849462365591398, + "true_md": "11\n\nAppendix C: The Wigner function of a spin\n\nthe next paragraph. For ε = 0 the four fixed points are:\n\nThe Stratonovich-Wigner-Weyl correspondence (SWWC) associates with any Hermitian operator of a spin ( j $^{)}$, a real sphere(2 j ) function A$_{W}$ (Ω). Both spaces have the same dimension (2 j +1) $^{2}$, and the association is one-to-one. This appendix provides the reasoning and the practical formulas following [43, 44].\n\nThe inner product of two operators is defined as trace[ ˆ A † ˆ B ]. An orthonormal-like set of projector-like op- erators, that are knows and the Stratonovich-Weyl oper- ators, can be defined, such that\n\nwith corresponding energies E$_{−}$ , E$_{x}$ , and E$_{+}$ that are given by Eqs.(10-12). We can also determine the borders of the separatrix by solving the equation f ( θ$_{1}$ $^{′}$, 2 ′ ) = f ( θ$_{x}$ ). Thus we get the following expressions for the outer borders of the islands\n\nThe value of the critical bias Eq. (9) is obtained by solving the equation f $^{′}$( θ ) = 0 together with f $^{′′}$( θ ) = 0. An equivalent set of questions is\n\n[ ] where Ω = ( θ, ϕ ), and the “delta” function is\n\n$$δ$_{j}$ (Ω − Ω $^{′}$) = 2 j ∑ ℓ =0 ℓ ∑ m = − ℓ Y $^{ℓm}$(Ω) Y ℓm $^{∗}$(Ω$^{′}$) (C3)$$\n\n$$θ$_{1}$ $^{′}$, 2 ′ = arcsin(1 − (2 /u )) . (B9)$$\n\n$$C$_{lm}$ = ∑ m $^{′}$,m′′ ( − 1) j − m ′ √ 4 π 2 l +1 2 j +1 ( j l j − m ′ m m ′′ ) ψ ∗ m ′ ψ$_{m}$ ′′ .$$\n\n$$ρ$_{W}$ (Ω) = ∑ l,m C$_{lm}$Y $^{lm}$(Ω) , (C6)$$\n\n$$ˆ T lm = ∑ m $^{′}$,m′′ ( − 1) j − m ′ √$_{2}$$_{l}$ + 1 ( j l j − m ′ m m ′′ ) | m $^{′}$〉〈 m $^{′′}$|$$\n\n$$ˆ P Ω = √ 4 π 2 j + 1 2 j ∑ l =0 l ∑ m = − l Y $^{lm}$(Ω) ˆ T $^{lm}$, (C5)$$\n\n$$s$_{1}$ ′ = 4 s 3 x − 3 s$_{x}$. (B17)$$\n\n$$A$_{c}$ ≈ 4 π (1 − u − 2 / $^{3}$)3 / $^{2}$. (B18)$$\n\n$$s$_{x}$ = cos( θ$_{x}$ ) = (1 − u − 2 / $^{3}$)1 / $^{2}$. (B16)$$\n\n$$u 2 4 s 4 − [ ε$_{c}$u ] s 3 + [1 − f$_{c}$u + ε 2 $_{c}$] s 2 + [2 ε$_{c}$f$_{c}$ ] s + [ f 2 c − 1] = 0 .$$\n\n$$f$_{c}$ ≡ f ( θ$_{x}$ ; ε$_{c}$ ) = − 1 2 u + 3 2 u 1 / $^{3}$. (B15)$$\n\n$$f ( θ, ϕ ) = 1 2 u (cos θ ) 2 − ε cos θ − sin θ cos ϕ. (B14)$$\n\n$$A$_{W}$ (Ω) = trace[ ˆ P Ω ˆ ρ ] . (C4)$$\n\nleading to the solution\n\nAccordingly any operator ˆ A can be represented by the phase-space function\n\n( ) For ε$_{c}$ = ε , one island has zero area while the other has a critical area A$_{c}$ . For completeness we derive an estimate for A$_{c}$ , that we have used in [25]. The island is defined by the equation f ( θ, ϕ ) = const., where\n\nFrom the above definition it follows that the inner prod- uct of two Hermitian operators is given by a phase-space integral over the product of the corresponding Wigner functions as in Eq.(32). ˆ\n\nfunctions as in Eq.(32). The actual construction of the ˆ P Ω is not a simple task. One procedure is to start with the non-orthonormal set of coherent state projectors | Ω 〉〈 Ω | and to perform an “or- thogonalization”, very similar to that employed in con- dense matter physics for the purpose of defining a Wan- nier basis. The final result is conveniently expressed as\n\nwhich is an orthogonal transformation over the non- Hermitian mulitpole operators ˆ T lm defined as\n\nThe outer turning point θ$_{1}$ ′ is identified as the second root of the equation f ( θ ) = f$_{c}$ . Defining s ≡ cos θ the equation takes the form\n\nThe critical island is defined by the equation f ( θ, ϕ ) = f$_{c}$ where according to the previous paragraph\n\nOne root with double degeneracy is obviously\n\nWe use here the Wigner 3 j symbols. Conse- quently we can represent any operator ˆ A either by A$_{lm}$ = trace[( ˆ T $^{lm}$) † ˆ A ] or by A$_{W}$ (Ω) = trace[ ˆ P Ω ˆ A ]. In particular it follows that ρ = | ψ 〉〈 ψ | is represented by\n\nThen we can get the third root by solving a quadratic equation, leading to\n\nThe area of the critical island can be found numerically, and a very good approximation is s 3 $_{x}$, namely\n\nwhere\n\n$$θ$_{−}$ = + π/ 2 , (B6)$$\n\n$$sin( θ ) f $^{′′}$( θ ) − cos( θ ) f $^{′}$( θ ) = 1 + u sin $^{3}$( θ ) = 0 , (B10) cos( θ ) f $^{′′}$( θ ) + sin( θ ) f $^{′}$( θ ) = ε − u cos 3 θ = 0 . (B11)$$\n\n$$− cos( θ ) f $^{′′}$( θ ) + sin( θ ) f $^{′}$( θ ) = ε − u cos 3 θ = 0 . (B11)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.19508926070591978, + "doc_id": "df4bfdc876fdfda6a30a2dc702936a9aaf00848859d73bb6c641b8ea16f53074", + "edit_distance": 0.7586538461538461, + "f1_score": 0.841870824053452, + "meteor": 0.3228558488427306, + "precision": 0.9310344827586207, + "pred_md": "∓ Φ about the 2-axis at φ = ± Φ respectively,\n\n\n\n(36)\n\n\n\nAs in [1],\n\n\n\nis found to describe the state, where\n\n\n\nSince the trivial rotation has been removed it is clear that a real deterioration of the perfect correlation between the spins is being observed,\n\n7\n\nglyph[negationslash]\n\nhowever only local unitary operations have been applied and the entanglement is invariant under unitary operations. Hence this must be an affect of the acceleration and gravity. If the pure state can be recovered then quantum computations may still be done while in the presence of a gravitational field. In particular the respective observers at φ = ± Φ must take measurements at an angle ∓ Θ in their local inertial frames. Since ϑ a b ( x ) = χ a b ( x ) a parallel transport would not reproduce this angle. Hence by transforming in the appropriate direction the full EPR correlation may still be recovered.\n\nNow it was found that ∆ is positive for r → ∞ to a radius r 0 very close to the outer horizon r + . As r becomes smaller than r 0 and furthermore r ↓ r + , ∆ →-∞ and thus to extract the perfect EPR correlation each observer would require infinite accuracy in the measurement that even a small error would lead to a mixed state element.\n\n## IV. THE INFALLING OBSERVER\n\nWe adopt the Doran [4] metric to remove the coordinate singularities of the metric. The observer can now fall through the apparent singularities of the Kerr-Newman spacetime observed by an observer at infinity. For this observer the line element is given by\n\n\n\n\n\nand the time coordinate coincides with the proper time for the free fall observer. The vierbein is now chosen to be,\n\n\n\nIn the ( t, r, θ, φ ) coordinates the vierbein inherited the r + and r -coordinate singularities, the above ( T, R, θ, φ ) also act as the metric does at those radii, and since the metric is singularity free there so is the vierbein. Now similarly to Eq.(5) we take a four velocity of the form,\n\nwhere", + "recall": 0.7682926829268293, + "true_md": "7\n\n∓ Φ about the 2-axis at φ = ± Φ respectively,\n\nAs in [1],\n\nis found to describe the state, where\n\nSince the trivial rotation has been removed it is clear that a real deterioration of the perfect correlation between the spins is being observed,\n\nWe adopt the Doran [4] metric to remove the co- ordinate singularities of the metric. The observer can now fall through the apparent singularities of the Kerr-Newman spacetime observed by an observer at infinity. For this observer the line element is given by\n\nhowever only local unitary operations have been applied and the entanglement is invariant under unitary operations. Hence this must be an af- fect of the acceleration and gravity. If the pure state can be recovered then quantum computa- tions may still be done while in the presence of a gravitational field. In particular the respective observers at φ = ± Φ must take measurements at an angle ∓ Θ in their local inertial frames. Since ϑ $^{a}$$\\_{b}$( x ) ̸ = χ $^{a}$$_{b}$( x ) a parallel transport would not reproduce this angle. Hence by transforming in the appropriate direction the full EPR correla- tion may still be recovered.\n\nNow it was found that Δ is positive for r → ∞ to a radius r$_{0}$ very close to the outer horizon r$_{+}$ . As r becomes smaller than r$_{0}$ and furthermore r ↓ r$_{+}$ , Δ → −∞ and thus to extract the perfect EPR correlation each observer would require in- finite accuracy in the measurement that even a small error would lead to a mixed state element.\n\nIn the ( t, r, θ, φ ) coordinates the vierbein inher- ited the r$_{+}$ and r$_{−}$ coordinate singularities, the above ( T, R, θ, φ ) also act as the metric does at those radii, and since the metric is singularity free there so is the vierbein. Now similarly to Eq.(5) we take a four velocity of the form,\n\nand the time coordinate coincides with the proper time for the free fall observer. The vier- bein is now chosen to be,\n\nwhere\n\n$$| p a $_{±}$, ↑ ; ± Φ 〉 ′ = cos( Φ 2 ) | p a $_{±}$, ↑ ; ± Φ 〉 ± sin( Φ 2 ) | p a $_{±}$, ↓ ; ± Φ 〉 , (35) (36)$$\n\n$$| p a $_{±}$, ↓ ; ± Φ 〉 ′ = ∓ sin( Φ 2 ) | p a $_{±}$, ↑ ; ± Φ 〉 + cos( Φ 2 ) | p a $_{±}$, ↓ ; ± Φ 〉 , (37)$$\n\n$$1 √ 2$^{[}$ cos(Δ) $^{(}$| p a $_{+}$, ↑ ; Φ 〉 ′ | p a $_{−}$, ↓ ; − Φ 〉 ′ − | p a $_{+}$, ↓ ; Φ 〉 ′ | p a $_{−}$, ↑ ; − Φ 〉 ′ ) + sin(Δ) $^{(}$| p a $_{+}$, ↑ ; Φ 〉 ′ | p a $_{−}$, ↑ ; − Φ 〉 ′ + | p a $_{+}$, ↓ ; Φ 〉 ′ | p a $_{−}$, ↓ ; − Φ 〉 ′ ) ] (38)$$\n\n$$Δ = Θ − Φ = Φ$^{[}$ r sinh( ζ ) ϑ 1 3 − 1$^{]}$ (39)$$\n\n$$Ω = $^{(}$R 2 + a 2 ) 1 2 b = ( 2 MR − Q $^{2}$) 1 2 Ω Σ = $^{(}$R 2 + a $^{2}$cos$^{2}$( θ ) ) 1 / 2 (41)$$\n\n$$˜ e µ 0 ( x ) = (1 , 0 , 0 , 0) ˜ e µ 1 ( x ) = ( b Ω Σ , Σ Ω , 0 , − a b sin $^{2}$( θ ) Ω Σ$^{)}$ ˜ e µ 2 ( x ) = (0 , 0 , Σ , 0) ˜ e µ 3 ( x ) = (0 , 0 , 0 , Ω sin ( θ )) (42)$$\n\n$$ds 2 = − dT 2 +$^{[}$ Σ Ω dR + b Ω Σ $^{(}$dT − a sin $^{2}$( θ ) dφ ) ] 2 + Σ $^{2}$dθ2 + Ω $^{2}$sin$^{2}$( θ ) dφ 2 (40)$$\n\n## IV. THE INFALLING OBSERVER" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.11643964772256934, + "doc_id": "a51ee3b4be231dbedd09f37cf9e1f9e022eafb42a710f14d709dfb5f60c729e5", + "edit_distance": 0.8529199711607787, + "f1_score": 0.8346883468834688, + "meteor": 0.2237612861358912, + "precision": 0.9221556886227545, + "pred_md": "FIG. 4: False color plot representing the spectral density at the Fermi surface, A ω =0 ( k ), as given by Eqs. (7) and (9) at k y > k x and k x > k y respectively. The region k , k x y < T K where the results are inapplicable is not shown. The parameter d is (a) d = 0 04, and (b) . d = 0 13. . Dashed line shows the mean field Fermi surface as given by Eq. (4).\n\nFIG. 4: False color plot representing the spectral density at the Fermi surface, A ω =0 ( k ), as given by Eqs. (7) and (9) at k y > k x and k x > k y respectively. The region k , k x y < T K where the results are inapplicable is not shown. The parameter d is (a) d = 0 04, and (b) . d = 0 13. . Dashed line shows the mean field Fermi surface as given by Eq. (4).\n\nx\n\n## 1. Fourth order contributions\n\nIn the fourth order the general expression (16) takes the form\n\n\n\n6\n\nwhere r 1 = (0 0), , r 2 = ( x , y 2 1 ), p 1 = (0 , y 1 ), and p 2 = ( x , y 2 2 ) (see Fig. 3). Equation (21) gives\n\n\n\nWe expect the main contribution to come from the region y , y 1 2 -y 1 /lessmuch x 2 it is convenient to introduce new variables, y 2 = ξx 2 , y 1 = ηξx 2 . To isolate the leading singularity in Eq. (A1) we expand the cumulant in Eq. (A2) for ξ /lessorsimilar 1\n\n\n\nThis expansion holds for any d < 1 / 2.\n\n\n\nThe integral in Eq. (A4) is not convergent at the upper limit. This is an artifact of the approximation (A3) which is not justified for ξ /greaterorsimilar 1. To overcome this we differentiate equation (A1) twice with respect to the parameter α defined by Eq. (14),\n\n\n\nThe integrations in Eq. (A5) are easily done with the result\n\n\n\nIntegrating Eq. (A6) back we finally get\n\n\n\nwith A B , constants. In the last equation the most singular term is presented in Eq. (13).\n\n## 2. Order J 6\n\nIn this case the general expression (16) with n = 3 reduces to\n\n", + "recall": 0.7623762376237624, + "true_md": "where r$_{1}$ = (0 , 0), r$_{2}$ = ( x$_{2}$, y$_{1}$ ), p$_{1}$ = (0 , y$_{1}$ ), and p$_{2}$ = ( x$_{2}$, y$_{2}$ ) (see Fig. 3). Equation (21) gives\n\nWe expect the main contribution to come from the re- gion y$_{1}$, y$_{2}$ − y$_{1}$ ≪ x$_{2}$ it is convenient to introduce new variables, y$_{2}$ = ξx$_{2}$ , y$_{1}$ = ηξx$_{2}$ . To isolate the leading sin- gularity in Eq. (A1) we expand the cumulant in Eq. (A2) for ξ ≲ 1\n\nThis expansion holds for any d < 1 / 2.\n\nThe integral in Eq. (A4) is not convergent at the upper limit. This is an artifact of the approximation (A3) which is not justified for ξ ≳ 1. To overcome this we differenti- ate equation (A1) twice with respect to the parameter α defined by Eq. (14),\n\nThe integrations in Eq. (A5) are easily done with the result\n\nIntegrating Eq. (A6) back we finally get\n\nwith A , B constants. In the last equation the most sin- gular term is presented in Eq. (13).\n\nIn this case the general expression (16) with n = 3 reduces to ∫ ∫\n\nIn the fourth order the general expression (16) takes the form\n\nFIG. 4: False color plot representing the spectral density at the Fermi surface, A$_{ω}$$\\_{=0}$ ( k ), as given by Eqs. (7) and (9) at k$\\_{y}$ > k$\\_{x}$ and k$\\_{x}$ > k$\\_{y}$ respectively. The region k$\\_{x}$, k$\\_{y}$ < T$\\_{K}$ where the results are inapplicable is not shown. The param- eter d is (a) d = 0 . 04, and (b) d = 0 . 13. Dashed line shows the mean field Fermi surface as given by Eq. (4).\n\n$$Σ (4) ω ( k ) =i J 4 ∫ ∞ 0 dx$_{2}$ e i ( ω − k$_{x}$ ) x$_{2}$ ∫ ∞ 0 dy$_{2}$ e i ( ω − k$_{y}$ ) y$_{2}$ ∫ y$_{2}$ 0 dy$_{1}$C $^{(4)}$( r$_{1}$ , r$_{2}$ ; p$_{1}$ , p$_{2}$ ) , (A1)$$\n\n$$reduces to Σ (6) ω ( k ) =i( − i Ja $^{d}$) 6 ∫ ∞ 0 dx$_{3}$ e i ( ω − k$_{x}$ ) x$_{3}$ ∫ ∞ 0 dy$_{3}$ e i ( ω − k$_{y}$ ) y$_{3}$ × ∫ x$_{3}$ 0 dx$_{2}$ ∫ y$_{3}$ 0 dy$_{2}$ ∫ y$_{2}$ 0 dy$_{1}$ × ABC − B − C + 1 y 2 d 1 ( y$_{2}$ − y$_{1}$ ) 2 $^{d}$( y$_{3}$ − y$_{2}$ ) 2 d , (A8)$$\n\n$$Σ (4) = − 2 d iΓ $^{2}$(2 − 2 d )( Ja $^{d}$) $^{4}$( − i( ω − k$_{y}$ )) 4 d − 3 × ( α log α + Aα + B ) (A7)$$\n\n$$∂ $^{2}$Σ(4) ∂α 2 = − 2 d i α − $^{1}$Γ$^{2}$(2 − 2 d ) ( Ja $^{d}$) 4 ( − i( ω − k$_{y}$ )) 3 − 4 d . (A6)$$\n\n$$∂ $^{2}$Σ(4) ∂α 2 = − 2 d iΓ(5 − 4 d )( Ja $^{d}$) $^{4}$( − i( ω − k$_{y}$ )) 4 d − 3 × ∫ ∞ 0 dξ ∫ 1 0 dη ξ 3 − 4 $^{d}$η 1 − 2 $^{d}$(1 − η ) 1 − 2 d ( ξ + α ) 5 − 4 d . (A5)$$\n\n$$Σ (4) = − 2 d i( Ja $^{d}$) $^{4}$Γ(3 − 4 d ) × ∫ ∞ 0 dξ ∫ 1 0 dη ξ 3 − 4 $^{d}$η 1 − 2 $^{d}$(1 − η ) 1 − 2 d [ − i (( ω − k$_{y}$ ) ξ + ( ω − k$_{x}$ ))] 3 − 4 d . (A4)$$\n\n$$C (4) = a 4 d y 2 d 1 ( y$_{2}$ − y$_{1}$ ) 2 d × [ ( y$_{2}$ − y$_{1}$ ) 2 + x 2 ) d ( y 2 1 + x 2 ) d ( x 2 + y 2 $_{2}$) $^{d}$x 2 d − 1 ] . (A2)$$\n\n6\n\n$$C (4) ≈ − 2 da 4 $^{d}$ξ 2 − 4 $^{d}$η 1 − 2 $^{d}$(1 − η ) 1 − 2 d . (A3)$$\n\n## 2. Order J 6\n\n## 1. Fourth order contributions" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8780425689992816, + "doc_id": "b992c6a5ba92970485299f766fe2b8c28141e327ffa76dfca7ca78639c62a008", + "edit_distance": 0.10622009569377991, + "f1_score": 0.9234507897934388, + "meteor": 0.9222712278373997, + "precision": 0.9620253164556962, + "pred_md": "arXiv:1001.1785v1 [quant-ph] 12 Jan 2010\n\n## Channel Capacities of an Exactly Solvable Spin-Star System\n\nNigum Arshed, 1 A. H. Toor, 1 and Daniel A. Lidar 2\n\n1\n\nDepartment of Physics, Quaid-i-Azam University Islamabad 45320, Pakistan 2 Departments of Physics, Chemistry, and Electrical Engineering, Center for Quantum Information Science & Technology, University of Southern California, Los Angeles 90089, USA\n\nWe calculate the entanglement-assisted and unassisted channel capacities of an exactly solvable spin star system, which models the quantum dephasing channel. The capacities for this non-Markovian model exhibit a strong dependence on the coupling strengths of the bath spins with the system, the bath temperature, and the number of bath spins. For equal couplings and bath frequencies, the channel becomes periodically noiseless.\n\nPACS numbers: 03.67.-a,03.67.Hk,89.70.Kn,75.10.Jm\n\n## I. INTRODUCTION\n\nOne of the fundamental tasks of quantum information theory is to determine the information transmission capacities of quantum channels [1, 2]. The maximum amount of information that can be reliably transmitted over a channel, per channel use is known as its capacity [3]. Classical channels can be uniquely characterized by their capacity [4]. The situation in the quantum realm is significantly more involved, with various capacities required to characterize a quantum channel [5].\n\nStudies of quantum channel capacities can be broadly divided into those considering memoryless quantum channels, for which the output at a given time depends only upon the corresponding input and not upon any previous inputs [622], and quantum memory channels, where successive uses of the channel modify its properties and description [23-30]. Another important distinction is between channels generated by Markovian vs . non-Markovian environments or baths. Markovian channels describe memoryless baths, while for non-Markovian channels bath memory plays a role [31, 32]. Many quantum optical [33] and nuclear magnetic resonance systems [34] are accurately described by Markovian channels, but the Markovian limit is always an approximation [35]. Non-Markovian effects are especially important in condensed matter systems, such as coupled electron or nuclear spins [36]. The master equations describing the dynamics of non-Markovian systems are often (though not always [37]) complicated integro-differential equations which are rarely exactly solvable [31]. A channel can be memoryless yet nonMarkovian. This situation arises when successive uses do not modify the channel, but a proper description of each use of the channel requires a non-Markovian treatment accounting for bath memory effects. In this work we investigate how nonMarkovian effects modify channel capacities by studying an exactly solvable model of a non-Markovian memoryless channel: the Ising spin-star system [38].\n\nOne reason to consider spin systems is that they are good candidates for the physical realization of quantum computation and communication, in part due to their relatively long relaxation and decoherence times [39-43]. Spin chains have attracted much recent interest as quantum communication channels [44]. Capacities of a spin chain with ferromagnetic Heisenberg interactions were calculated by studying the qubit\n\namplitude damping channel [21], and its successive use without resetting (quantum memory channel) was investigated for quantum and classical communication [30].\n\nDifferent flavors of the spin-star system, with both diagonal and non-diagonal coupling, have been used to study topics such as entanglement distribution [45], the dynamics of entanglement of two central spins [46], and analytically solvable models of decoherence [38, 47, 48]. However, spin-star systems are so far unexplored for quantum transmission of information, and this is our goal in the present paper. The system qubit in our communication model is represented by a spin located at the center of the star. It interacts with all non-central spins, comprising the environment, via Ising couplings. This provides a non-Markovian quantum dephasing channel whose dynamics can be solved exactly [38]. We allow arbitrary couplings between the system and environment spins and unlike the spin chain channels studied in Refs. [21, 30], obtain analytical expressions for the capacities of this model. We do not consider the quantum memory channel setting of successive channel uses, wherein a new spin is repeatedly introduced into the same channel [28]. Rather, we consider the parallel use setting of a memoryless channel [21], where n messages (classical or quantum) are simultaneously transmitted over n identical spin-star systems. Thus, in our treatment, non-Markovian memory effects are entirely associated with the non-Markovian dynamics of each spin-star system.\n\nThe organization of the paper is as follows. In Sec. II we give a brief review of quantum channels and their capacities. In Sec. III we describe the model of a quantum dephasing channel obtained by coupling a system spin via Ising interactions to a spin bath, and review its exact solution in the Kraus representation. In Sec. IV we present our communication model, calculate its capacities and study some limiting cases. Finally, in Sec. V we discuss the results and present our conclusions. Appendix A contains a technical calculation.\n\n## II. QUANTUM CHANNEL CAPACITIES\n\nFormally, a quantum channel E is a completely positive and trace preserving map (CPTP) of a quantum system from an initial system state ρ S to the final state E ( ρ S ) [2, 31]. Quantum channels arise by joint unitary evolution U of the system", + "recall": 0.8878504672897196, + "true_md": "# Channel Capacities of an Exactly Solvable Spin-Star System\n\nNigum Arshed, 1 A. H. Toor, 1 and Daniel A. Lidar 2\n\n$^{1}$Department of Physics, Quaid-i-Azam University Islamabad 45320, Pakistan\n\n$^{2}$Departments of Physics, Chemistry, and Electrical Engineering, Center for Quantum Information Science & Technology, University of Southern California, Los Angeles 90089, USA\n\nWe calculate the entanglement-assisted and unassisted channel capacities of an exactly solvable spin star system, which models the quantum dephasing channel. The capacities for this non-Markovian model exhibit a strong dependence on the coupling strengths of the bath spins with the system, the bath temperature, and the number of bath spins. For equal couplings and bath frequencies, the channel becomes periodically noiseless.\n\nPACS numbers: 03.67.-a,03.67.Hk,89.70.Kn,75.10.Jm\n\nOne of the fundamental tasks of quantum information the- ory is to determine the information transmission capacities of quantum channels [1, 2]. The maximum amount of informa- tion that can be reliably transmitted over a channel, per chan- nel use is known as its capacity [3]. Classical channels can be uniquely characterized by their capacity [4]. The situation in the quantum realm is significantly more involved, with vari- ous capacities required to characterize a quantum channel [5].\n\nStudies of quantum channel capacities can be broadly di- vided into those considering memoryless quantum channels, for which the output at a given time depends only upon the corresponding input and not upon any previous inputs [6– 22], and quantum memory channels, where successive uses of the channel modify its properties and description [23–30]. Another important distinction is between channels generated by Markovian vs . non-Markovian environments or baths. Markovian channels describe memoryless baths, while for non-Markovian channels bath memory plays a role [31, 32]. Many quantum optical [33] and nuclear magnetic resonance systems [34] are accurately described by Markovian chan- nels, but the Markovian limit is always an approximation [35]. Non-Markovian effects are especially important in con- densed matter systems, such as coupled electron or nuclear spins [36]. The master equations describing the dynamics of non-Markovian systems are often (though not always [37]) complicated integro-differential equations which are rarely exactly solvable [31]. A channel can be memoryless yet non- Markovian. This situation arises when successive uses do not modify the channel, but a proper description of each use of the channel requires a non-Markovian treatment accounting for bath memory effects. In this work we investigate how non- Markovian effects modify channel capacities by studying an exactly solvable model of a non-Markovian memoryless chan- nel: the Ising spin-star system [38].\n\nOne reason to consider spin systems is that they are good candidates for the physical realization of quantum computa- tion and communication, in part due to their relatively long re- laxation and decoherence times [39–43]. Spin chains have at- tracted much recent interest as quantum communication chan- nels [44]. Capacities of a spin chain with ferromagnetic Heisenberg interactions were calculated by studying the qubit\n\namplitude damping channel [21], and its successive use with- out resetting (quantum memory channel) was investigated for quantum and classical communication [30].\n\nDifferent flavors of the spin-star system, with both diago- nal and non-diagonal coupling, have been used to study top- ics such as entanglement distribution [45], the dynamics of entanglement of two central spins [46], and analytically solv- able models of decoherence [38, 47, 48]. However, spin-star systems are so far unexplored for quantum transmission of information, and this is our goal in the present paper. The system qubit in our communication model is represented by a spin located at the center of the star. It interacts with all non-central spins, comprising the environment, via Ising cou- plings. This provides a non-Markovian quantum dephasing channel whose dynamics can be solved exactly [38]. We allow arbitrary couplings between the system and environment spins and unlike the spin chain channels studied in Refs. [21, 30], obtain analytical expressions for the capacities of this model. We do not consider the quantum memory channel setting of successive channel uses, wherein a new spin is repeatedly in- troduced into the same channel [28]. Rather, we consider the parallel use setting of a memoryless channel [21], where n messages (classical or quantum) are simultaneously transmit- ted over n identical spin-star systems. Thus, in our treatment, non-Markovian memory effects are entirely associated with the non-Markovian dynamics of each spin-star system.\n\nThe organization of the paper is as follows. In Sec. II we give a brief review of quantum channels and their capacities. In Sec. III we describe the model of a quantum dephasing channel obtained by coupling a system spin via Ising inter- actions to a spin bath, and review its exact solution in the Kraus representation. In Sec. IV we present our communi- cation model, calculate its capacities and study some limiting cases. Finally, in Sec. V we discuss the results and present our conclusions. Appendix A contains a technical calculation.\n\nFormally, a quantum channel E is a completely positive and trace preserving map (CPTP) of a quantum system from an initial system state ρ$_{S}$ to the final state E ( ρ$_{S}$ ) [2, 31]. Quan- tum channels arise by joint unitary evolution U of the system\n\n## I. INTRODUCTION\n\narXiv:1001.1785v1 [quant-ph] 12 Jan 2010\n\n## II. QUANTUM CHANNEL CAPACITIES" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.771346815547384, + "doc_id": "7a75cca7c3f047add794c1dd083a21b663d826e8b3ffa85dc91c38b6ae472c32", + "edit_distance": 0.7370838117106774, + "f1_score": 0.9373996789727128, + "meteor": 0.689963111743316, + "precision": 0.9733333333333334, + "pred_md": "energy to the doublet but this, even if its population reduced from 6 / 5 by the crystal field, has larger critical U because of its degeneracy, certainly above the realistic value of the Coulomb repulsion in these materials. The other bands are pushed at still lower energies and will probably be populated by more than 6 / 5 particles.\n\nFig. 2 Phase diagram (Slave-spin mean-field), as a function of U and J, of a 5-band model with four bands degenerate and one lifted by the crystal field so to be always half-filled. The other bands host the remaining 5 electrons. D is the half-bandwidth.\n\nFig. 2 Phase diagram (Slave-spin mean-field), as a function of U and J, of a 5-band model with four bands degenerate and one lifted by the crystal field so to be always half-filled. The other bands host the remaining 5 electrons. D is the half-bandwidth.\n\nWe did not enter in the realistic calculation with all the details of the crystal field splitting, this is left for further work. We only show here (figure 2) the phase diagram of the system with four degenerate bands and one lifted by the crystal field in the (1,5) populated phase. It is easy to see that as predicted the OSMP is more easy to trigger than in the previous case (Fig. 1 of Ref. [6]) due to the increased proximity to half-filling. Indeed a smaller critical J is found and also a smaller crystal field is enough to enter the OSMP.\n\nWe also notice that within our naive model and crude approximation the values estimated for the local interaction in the pnictides ( U ∼ 2 7 . D,J/U ∼ 0 1 . ÷ 0 2) fall very close to the border of the OSMT. In this . regime, even if the zero-temperature transition has not happened yet, the renormalization of the electronic properties differs very strongly between the bands, the almost localized one having a very low coherence temperature compared to the others. Thus even if pnictides are not strictly in the zone of the phase diagram showing a selectively localized ground state (and even this has to be confirmed by more accurate methods in more realistic models), most probably they lie in a regime of selective localization at finite temperature.\n\n3\n\n## 4 Magnetic properties and comparison with experiments\n\nA key quantity for the individuation of the OSMT in materials is the local spin susceptibility χ loc . Indeed while the itinerant electrons will dominate the transport properties, the presence of a localized component will show up, thanks to the magnetic moments that form.\n\nDynamical mean-field theory allows a reliable calculation of this quantity. However the 5-band model under examination here requires a tremendous numerical effort to be tackled reliably by this technique. Here we just want to show some general features of the local magnetic susceptibility of a selectively localized phase, namely the dependence of the size of the local moment on the Hund's coupling J. In Fig.3 we show this dependence in a much simpler model, paradigmatic for the OSMT, of two bands with different bandwidth ( W 2 = 0 15 . W 1 ), in which the narrower one gets localized by correlations while the wider one remains itinerant.\n\nFig. 3 Local magnetic susceptibility in the 'classic' model for OSMT (2 bands of unequal bandwidth), as a function of U/D, for different strength of the Hund's coupling. It is easily seen that when J > 0 the local magnetic moment that develops in the selectively localized phase is bigger than the expected S = 1 2, / and grows with J.\n\nFig. 3 Local magnetic susceptibility in the 'classic' model for OSMT (2 bands of unequal bandwidth), as a function of U/D, for different strength of the Hund's coupling. It is easily seen that when J > 0 the local magnetic moment that develops in the selectively localized phase is bigger than the expected S = 1 2, / and grows with J.\n\nWhen a band gets localized the susceptibility goes from a Pauli-like to a Curie-like behaviour indicating the formation of free moments. As expected for an OSMT in Fig. 3 one sees a two stage saturation of the χ loc signaling the partial localization followed by the complete Mott insulating state with magnetic moments corresponding to the high-spin atomic state.\n\nOne could naively expects that the value at which the χ loc saturates upon entering the selective phase be the one for a local S = 1 2 moment. However the free / moments in the OSMP are coupled to the itinerant electrons by the exchange interaction. As a result we see", + "recall": 0.9040247678018576, + "true_md": "3\n\n## 4 Magnetic properties and comparison with experiments\n\nenergy to the doublet but this, even if its population reduced from 6 / 5 by the crystal field, has larger critical U because of its degeneracy, certainly above the realis- tic value of the Coulomb repulsion in these materials. The other bands are pushed at still lower energies and will probably be populated by more than 6 / 5 particles.\n\nA key quantity for the individuation of the OSMT in materials is the local spin susceptibility χ$_{loc}$ . Indeed while the itinerant electrons will dominate the trans- port properties, the presence of a localized component will show up, thanks to the magnetic moments that form.\n\nDynamical mean-field theory allows a reliable cal- culation of this quantity. However the 5-band model under examination here requires a tremendous numeri- cal effort to be tackled reliably by this technique. Here we just want to show some general features of the local magnetic susceptibility of a selectively localized phase, namely the dependence of the size of the local moment on the Hund’s coupling J. In Fig.3 we show this depen- dence in a much simpler model, paradigmatic for the OSMT, of two bands with different bandwidth ( W$_{2}$ = 0 . 15 W$_{1}$ ), in which the narrower one gets localized by correlations while the wider one remains itinerant.\n\nFig. 2 Phase diagram (Slave-spin mean-field), as a function of U and J, of a 5-band model with four bands degenerate and one lifted by the crystal field so to be always half-filled. The other bands host the remaining 5 electrons. D is the half-bandwidth.\n\nFig. 3 Local magnetic susceptibility in the ”classic” model for OSMT (2 bands of unequal bandwidth), as a function of U/D, for different strength of the Hund’s coupling. It is easily seen that when J > 0 the local magnetic moment that develops in the selectively localized phase is bigger than the expected S = 1 / 2, and grows with J.\n\nWe did not enter in the realistic calculation with all the details of the crystal field splitting, this is left for further work. We only show here (figure 2) the phase diagram of the system with four degenerate bands and one lifted by the crystal field in the (1,5) populated phase. It is easy to see that as predicted the OSMP is more easy to trigger than in the previous case (Fig. 1 of Ref. [6]) due to the increased proximity to half-filling. Indeed a smaller critical J is found and also a smaller crystal field is enough to enter the OSMP.\n\nWe also notice that within our naive model and crude approximation the values estimated for the local interaction in the pnictides ( U ∼ 2 . 7 D, J/U ∼ 0 . 1 ÷ 0 . 2) fall very close to the border of the OSMT. In this regime, even if the zero-temperature transition has not happened yet, the renormalization of the electronic prop- erties differs very strongly between the bands, the al- most localized one having a very low coherence temper- ature compared to the others. Thus even if pnictides are not strictly in the zone of the phase diagram showing a selectively localized ground state (and even this has to be confirmed by more accurate methods in more re- alistic models), most probably they lie in a regime of selective localization at finite temperature.\n\nOne could naively expects that the value at which the χ$_{loc}$ saturates upon entering the selective phase be the one for a local S = 1 / 2 moment. However the free moments in the OSMP are coupled to the itinerant elec- trons by the exchange interaction. As a result we see\n\nWhen a band gets localized the susceptibility goes from a Pauli-like to a Curie-like behaviour indicating the formation of free moments. As expected for an OSMT in Fig. 3 one sees a two stage saturation of the χ$_{loc}$ sig- naling the partial localization followed by the complete Mott insulating state with magnetic moments corre- sponding to the high-spin atomic state." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7829263128239042, + "doc_id": "5d982cc688c337b7f1e21f892b0984e2c2c71fcdfdc72f999f74fb9f918435a7", + "edit_distance": 0.6514336917562724, + "f1_score": 0.8790637191157347, + "meteor": 0.6613673883730345, + "precision": 0.931129476584022, + "pred_md": "by the full excess entropy S ex . It was also shown that Dzugutov formula does not work for silica modelled with an angular dependent potential [50]. It allows to say that Rosenfeld relation is more general.\n\nRemember that original idea underlying the Rosenfeld relation is to refer the system under investigation to the hard spheres system. In this respect it is interesting whether the Rosenfeld scaling relation is valid for the systems essentially different from the hard spheres. One of the examples of such systems is the system with potentials with negative curvature [19, 20]. It was shown in many publications that the behavior of such systems is very complex [41, 44, 45, 51-57]. In particular such systems can form complicated structures, like cluster liquids or different crystal phases. They can demonstrate maximum on the melting line and reentrant melting and many other unusual properties. In particular systems with negative curvature can demonstrate anomalous behavior [17, 26, 30-32, 39, 45, 58].\n\nIt was suggested that the Rosenfeld relations can hold even in the case of anomalous diffusion [17, 18]. For example, in the paper [18] the dependence of both excess entropy and diffusion coefficient on density are reported for the core-softening potential that consists of a combination of a Lennard-Jones potential plus a Gaussian well. This potential can represent a whole family of two length scales intermolecular interactions, from a deep double-well potential to a repulsive shoulder. Accordingly to these dependencies both excess entropy and diffusion have non monotonic behavior which allows to preserve exponential dependence of the diffusion coefficient on the excess entropy. It means that the thermodynamically anomalous regions are characterized by anomalous behavior of the excess entropy which induces anomalous diffusion as well.\n\nAnother example of systems which can not be approximated by a hard sphere model is the systems with bounded potentials [59-61, 67]. Since these potentials have no singularity in the origin the behavior of such system is strongly different from the behavior of hard spheres.\n\nOne of the most common model with bounded potential is the Gaussian Core Model (GCM). This system is defined by the potential\n\n\n\nThis potential was introduced by Stillinger [59] for simulation of the plastic crystals system . The phase diagram of the GCM demonstrates two crystal phases - fcc and bcc [62]. Starting from the densities around ρσ 3 ≈ 0 25 . the melting curve has a negative slope. It was also shown that GCM demonstrates liquid state anomalies: density anomaly [63, 64], diffusion anomaly [64, 65] and structural anomaly [64]. Interestingly Stockes-Einstein relation is also violated in the GCM system [66].\n\n2\n\nIn the article [67] an extensive study of another model with bounded potential was reported. This work is concerned to the Herzian spheres system which is defined by the interparticle potential of the form\n\n\n\nThe phase diagram of the Herzian spheres system demonstrates very complex behavior, including many crystal phases and reentrant melting. Anomalous diffusion is also reported [67].\n\nTaking into account that the behavior of the systems with negative curvature potentials and the systems with bounded potentials is rather different from the behavior of hard spheres a question arises if the Rosenfeld scaling relations are applicable for such systems.\n\nThe purpose of this article is to analyze the validity of the entropy scaling for the systems with anomalous behavior. For our analysis we have chosen the diffusion coefficient since it is the simplest transport coefficient to calculate in simulation. The article is organized as follows. In the second section we describe the models investigated in the present work and the simulation setup. Section III gives the results of the simulations and the discussion of these results. Finally the section IV represents our conclusions.\n\n## II. THE SYSTEMS AND METHODS\n\nThree systems were studied in the present work: Herzian spheres, Gauss core model and a soft repulsive shoulder system.\n\nFor the simulation of the Herzian spheres we used a system of 1000 particles in a cubic simulation box. NVE MD simulation was carried. Equations of motion were integrated by velocity Verlet algorithm. The time step was set to dt = 0 0005. . The equilibration run was 5 · 10 5 time steps and the production run 1 5 . · 10 6 time steps. During the equilibration the velocities were rescaled to keep the temperature constant. The diffusions were computed via the Einstein relation for the densities from ρ = 1 0 . till ρ = 15 0 . with the step ∆ ρ = 0 5. . Additional simulations were done for computing the equation of state for the densities less then unity. Free energy of the liquid was calculated by integrating the pressure along an isotherm [68] and the excess entropy was obtained from the relation S ex = U -F ex Nk B T , where U is the internal potential energy of the liquid. The simulations were done for the set of ten isotherms: T = 0 01; 0 02; 0 03; 0 05; 0 1; 0 15; 0 2; 0 25; 0 3; 0 5. . . . . . . . . . .\n\nIn the case of GCM the system consisted of 2000 particles. The time step was set to dt = 0 05. . The equilibration and production runs were 4 · 10 5 and 1 · 10 6 time steps respectively. The diffusion", + "recall": 0.8325123152709359, + "true_md": "2\n\nIn the article [67] an extensive study of another model with bounded potential was reported. This work is con- cerned to the Herzian spheres system which is defined by the interparticle potential of the form\n\nby the full excess entropy S$_{ex}$ . It was also shown that Dzugutov formula does not work for silica modelled with an angular dependent potential [50]. It allows to say that Rosenfeld relation is more general.\n\nRemember that original idea underlying the Rosen- feld relation is to refer the system under investigation to the hard spheres system. In this respect it is inter- esting whether the Rosenfeld scaling relation is valid for the systems essentially different from the hard spheres. One of the examples of such systems is the system with potentials with negative curvature [19, 20]. It was shown in many publications that the behavior of such systems is very complex [41, 44, 45, 51–57]. In particular such systems can form complicated structures, like cluster liq- uids or different crystal phases. They can demonstrate maximum on the melting line and reentrant melting and many other unusual properties. In particular systems with negative curvature can demonstrate anomalous be- havior [17, 26, 30–32, 39, 45, 58].\n\nThe phase diagram of the Herzian spheres system demonstrates very complex behavior, including many crystal phases and reentrant melting. Anomalous dif- fusion is also reported [67].\n\n$$Φ( r ) = { ε (1 − r/σ ) 5 / $^{2}$, r ≤ σ 0 , r > σ (7)$$\n\nTaking into account that the behavior of the systems with negative curvature potentials and the systems with bounded potentials is rather different from the behavior of hard spheres a question arises if the Rosenfeld scaling relations are applicable for such systems.\n\nThe purpose of this article is to analyze the validity of the entropy scaling for the systems with anomalous behavior. For our analysis we have chosen the diffusion coefficient since it is the simplest transport coefficient to calculate in simulation. The article is organized as follows. In the second section we describe the models in- vestigated in the present work and the simulation setup. Section III gives the results of the simulations and the discussion of these results. Finally the section IV repre- sents our conclusions.\n\nIt was suggested that the Rosenfeld relations can hold even in the case of anomalous diffusion [17, 18]. For example, in the paper [18] the dependence of both ex- cess entropy and diffusion coefficient on density are re- ported for the core-softening potential that consists of a combination of a Lennard-Jones potential plus a Gaus- sian well. This potential can represent a whole family of two length scales intermolecular interactions, from a deep double-well potential to a repulsive shoulder. Ac- cordingly to these dependencies both excess entropy and diffusion have non monotonic behavior which allows to preserve exponential dependence of the diffusion coef- ficient on the excess entropy. It means that the ther- modynamically anomalous regions are characterized by anomalous behavior of the excess entropy which induces anomalous diffusion as well.\n\nThree systems were studied in the present work: Herzian spheres, Gauss core model and a soft repulsive shoulder system.\n\nAnother example of systems which can not be ap- proximated by a hard sphere model is the systems with bounded potentials [59–61, 67]. Since these potentials have no singularity in the origin the behavior of such system is strongly different from the behavior of hard spheres.\n\nOne of the most common model with bounded poten- tial is the Gaussian Core Model (GCM). This system is defined by the potential\n\n## II. THE SYSTEMS AND METHODS\n\nFor the simulation of the Herzian spheres we used a system of 1000 particles in a cubic simulation box. NVE MD simulation was carried. Equations of mo- tion were integrated by velocity Verlet algorithm. The time step was set to dt = 0 . 0005. The equilibration run was 5 · 10 5 time steps and the production run 1 . 5 · 10 6 time steps. During the equilibration the velocities were rescaled to keep the temperature constant. The diffu- sions were computed via the Einstein relation for the densities from ρ = 1 . 0 till ρ = 15 . 0 with the step Δ ρ = 0 . 5. Additional simulations were done for com- puting the equation of state for the densities less then unity. Free energy of the liquid was calculated by inte- grating the pressure along an isotherm [68] and the excess entropy was obtained from the relation S$_{ex}$ = U − F ex Nk B T , where U is the internal potential energy of the liquid. The simulations were done for the set of ten isotherms: T = 0 . 01; 0 . 02; 0 . 03; 0 . 05; 0 . 1; 0 . 15; 0 . 2; 0 . 25; 0 . 3; 0 . 5.\n\nThis potential was introduced by Stillinger [59] for sim- ulation of the plastic crystals system . The phase diagram of the GCM demonstrates two crystal phases - fcc and bcc [62]. Starting from the densities around ρσ 3 ≈ 0 . 25 the melting curve has a negative slope. It was also shown that GCM demonstrates liquid state anomalies: density anomaly [63, 64], diffusion anomaly [64, 65] and struc- tural anomaly [64]. Interestingly Stockes-Einstein rela- tion is also violated in the GCM system [66].\n\nIn the case of GCM the system consisted of 2000 particles. The time step was set to dt = 0 . 05. The equilibration and production runs were 4 · 10 5 and 1 · 10 6 time steps respectively. The diffusion\n\n$$U$_{G}$ ( r ) = εe − r $^{2}$/σ$^{2}$. (6)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.48312337221072016, + "doc_id": "3426b9968d132eef664b2e938a0905e6b44c1cc1862a84acb8bbd8dd57cd2151", + "edit_distance": 0.838452787258248, + "f1_score": 0.889589905362776, + "meteor": 0.40541083341960327, + "precision": 0.9337748344370861, + "pred_md": "on the segment ( E , E 1 2 ) of the real axis (as for the selfenergy Σ). According to Eq.(15), we may therefore limit to consider the singularities of G a,a ( z ). From Eqs.(6), (11) and (12) one can conclude that:\n\n(i) The continuous spectrum of H is the same as that of H 0 , i.e. the interval ( E , E 1 2 ) of the real axis, where G z ( ) has a branch cut.\n\n- (ii) The point spectrum of H , corresponding to bound states outside the continuum, are the complex roots z of the equation\n\n\n\nin correspondence of which the resolvent G z ( ) has a pole. (iii) A spectral singularity E 0 of the continuous spectrum( E , E 1 2 ) is any solution of the coupled equations\n\n\n\n\n\nprovided that Im( E a ) = 0 [41].\n\nNote that real-valued energies can not belong to the point spectrum of H because Eq.(18) does not have real-valued roots whenever H is non-Hermitian [42]. This means that the point spectrum of H , if not empty, is strictly complexvalued. On the other hand, the continuous part of the spectrum is real-valued according to the property (i). Therefore, we may conclude that the energy spectrum of the non-Hermitian FFA Hamiltonian is real-valued if and only if its spectrum is purely continuous. In this case, spectral singularities in the continuous spectrum occur whenever Eqs.(19) and (20) can be simultaneously satisfied. It should be noted that the behavior of G z ( ) in the neighborhood of the spectral singularity z = E 0 on the continuous spectrum is different for an 'absorbing' [Im( E a ) < 0] and for an 'amplifying' [Im( E a ) > 0] complex energy E a of state | a 〉 . Since the spectral coupling V ( E 0 ) is always positive, for an absorbing complex energy Eq.(19) can be satisfied by taking the lower (negative) sign on the right hand side; correspondingly, from Eqs.(6) and (12) it follows that G a,a ( z ) is unbounded when z → E 0 from the bottom of the real energy axis, i.e. for Im( ) z < 0, but G a,a ( z ) remains bounded when z →E 0 with Im( z ) > 0 [43]. Conversely, for an 'amplifying' complex energy Im( E a ) > 0, Eq.(19) can be satisfied by taking the upper (positive) sign on the right hand side; correspondingly, G a,a ( z ) is unbounded when z →E 0 with Im( ) z > 0, but it remains bounded when z → E 0 with Im( ) z < 0 [43]. Such a different behavior of spectral singularities for an absorbing or an amplifying complex energy E a has some relevant physical implications, that will be discussed in Sec.II.D and Sec.III.C. In Sec.II.D it will be shown that the appearance of a spectral singularity in the amplifying case is responsible for the non-decay of state | a 〉 into the continuum, in spite of the absence of bound states; in Sec.III.C the interplay between spectral singularities and wave scattering will be investigated for a semi-infinite tight-binding lattice realization of the FFA Hamiltonian.\n\n/negationslash\n\n4\n\n## C. Spectral singularities: the Fano diagonalization procedure\n\nLet us assume that the spectrum of the non-Hermitian Hamiltonian H = H 0 + V is real-valued. As shown in the previous subsection, this implies that the spectrum of H is purely continuous and spans the interval ( E , E 1 2 ). Let us indicate by |E〉 the (improper) eigenfunction of H corresponding to the eigenvalue E , and by |E † 〉 the (improper) eigenfunction of the adjoint H † corresponding to the same eigenvalue E . For H to be diagonalizable, the set of functions {|E〉 |E , † 〉} must form a complete biorthonormal basis of Hilbert space [9], that is\n\n\n\nA spectral singularity at E = E 0 sets in when\n\n\n\nwhich prevents H to be diagonalizable. To determine the onset of spectral singularities of the FFA Hamiltonian H , we can thus proceed by calculating the eigenfunctions |E〉 of H and |E † 〉 of its adjoint H † following the diagonalization procedure used by Fano [18] in the problem of atomic autoionizing resonances (see also [17, 21]), properly modified to account for the non-Hermitian nature of H . To this aim, we expand the eigenstates |E〉 and |E † 〉 on the orthonormal and complete basis {| a , 〉 | k 〉} as\n\n\n\n\n\nwith expansion coefficients α ( E ), α † ( E ), β ( E , k ) and β † ( E , k ) to be determined. Note that\n\n\n\nUsing Eqs.(1), (2) and (23), the eigenvalue equation H |E〉 = E|E〉 yields the following coupled equations for the expansion coefficients α ( E ) and β ( E , k ):\n\n\n\n\n\nEquation (27) can be solved for β ( E , k ) and substituted into Eq.(26). However, there is a singularity at E k ( ) = E , so that 1 / E k [ ( ) -E ] must be written as its principal and delta function parts, yielding (see [18, 21])\n\n\n\nThe coefficient z ( E ) in front of the delta function on the right hand side of Eq.(28) is determined by substituting", + "recall": 0.8493975903614458, + "true_md": "4\n\n## C. Spectral singularities: the Fano diagonalization procedure\n\nLet us assume that the spectrum of the non-Hermitian Hamiltonian H = H$_{0}$ + V is real-valued. As shown in the previous subsection, this implies that the spectrum of H is purely continuous and spans the interval ( E$_{1}$, E$_{2}$ ). Let us indicate by |E〉 the (improper) eigenfunction of H corresponding to the eigenvalue E , and by |E $^{†}$〉 the (im- proper) eigenfunction of the adjoint H † corresponding to the same eigenvalue E . For H to be diagonalizable, the set of functions {|E〉 , |E $^{†}$〉} must form a complete biorthonormal basis of Hilbert space [9], that is\n\non the segment ( E$_{1}$, E$_{2}$ ) of the real axis (as for the self- energy Σ). According to Eq.(15), we may therefore limit to consider the singularities of G $_{a,a}$( z ). From Eqs.(6), (11) and (12) one can conclude that:\n\n(i) The continuous spectrum of H is the same as that of H$_{0}$ , i.e. the interval ( E$_{1}$, E$_{2}$ ) of the real axis, where G ( z ) has a branch cut.\n\n(ii) The point spectrum of H , corresponding to bound states outside the continuum, are the complex roots z of the equation\n\n$$z − E$_{a}$ = Σ( z ) (18)$$\n\n$$〈E $^{†}$| E $^{′}$〉 = δ ( E − E $^{′}$) , ∫ E 2 E 1 d E|E〉〈E $^{†}$| = I . (21)$$\n\nA spectral singularity at E = E 0 sets in when\n\n$$〈E 0 |E † 0 〉 = 0 , (22)$$\n\n$$Im( E$_{a}$ ) = ± πV ( E $_{0}$) (19) Re( E$_{a}$ ) = Δ( E $_{0}$) (20)$$\n\n$$± E E 0 − Re( E$_{a}$ ) = Δ( E $_{0}$) (20)$$\n\nwhich prevents H to be diagonalizable. To determine the onset of spectral singularities of the FFA Hamiltonian H , we can thus proceed by calculating the eigenfunctions |E〉 of H and |E $^{†}$〉 of its adjoint H † following the diagonal- ization procedure used by Fano [18] in the problem of atomic autoionizing resonances (see also [17, 21]), prop- erly modified to account for the non-Hermitian nature of H . To this aim, we expand the eigenstates |E〉 and |E $^{†}$〉 on the orthonormal and complete basis {| a 〉 , | k 〉} as\n\n$$|E〉 = α ( E ) | a 〉 + ∫ dkβ ( E , k ) | k 〉 (23)$$\n\n$$|E $^{†}$〉 = α $^{†}$( E ) | a 〉 + dkβ $^{†}$( E , k ) | k 〉 (24)$$\n\nwith expansion coefficients α ( E ), α $^{†}$( E ), β ( E , k ) and β $^{†}$( E , k ) to be determined. Note that\n\n$$〈E $^{′}$| E $^{†}$〉 = α $^{∗}$( E $^{′}$) α $^{†}$( E ) + ∫ dkβ $^{∗}$( E $^{′}$, k ) β $^{†}$( E , k ) . (25)$$\n\nUsing Eqs.(1), (2) and (23), the eigenvalue equation H |E〉 = E|E〉 yields the following coupled equations for the expansion coefficients α ( E ) and β ( E , k ):\n\n$$( E$_{a}$ − E ) α ( E ) + ∫ dkv ( k ) β ( E , k ) = 0 (26) [ E ( k ) − E ] β ( E , k ) + v $^{∗}$( k ) α ( E ) = 0 . (27)$$\n\n$$∫ [ E ( k ) − E ] β ( E , k ) + v $^{∗}$( k ) α ( E ) = 0 . (27)$$\n\nEquation (27) can be solved for β ( E , k ) and substituted into Eq.(26). However, there is a singularity at E ( k ) = E , so that 1 / [ E ( k ) − E ] must be written as its principal and delta function parts, yielding (see [18, 21])\n\nThe coefficient z ( E ) in front of the delta function on the right hand side of Eq.(28) is determined by substituting\n\n$$β ( E , k ) = − v $^{∗}$( k ) α ( E ) ( P 1 E ( k ) − E + z ( E ) δ ( E ( k ) − E ) . (28)$$\n\nprovided that Im( E$_{a}$ ) ̸ = 0 [41]. Note that real-valued energies can not belong to the point\n\n̸ Note that real-valued energies can not belong to the point spectrum of H because Eq.(18) does not have real-valued roots whenever H is non-Hermitian [42]. This means that the point spectrum of H , if not empty, is strictly complex- valued. On the other hand, the continuous part of the spectrum is real-valued according to the property (i). Therefore, we may conclude that the energy spectrum of the non-Hermitian FFA Hamiltonian is real-valued if and only if its spectrum is purely continuous. In this case, spectral singularities in the continuous spectrum occur whenever Eqs.(19) and (20) can be simultaneously satisfied. It should be noted that the behavior of G ( z ) in the neighborhood of the spectral singularity z = E 0 on the continuous spectrum is different for an ’absorb- ing’ [Im( E$_{a}$ ) < 0] and for an ’amplifying’ [Im( E$_{a}$ ) > 0] complex energy E$_{a}$ of state | a 〉 . Since the spectral cou- pling V ( E $_{0}$) is always positive, for an absorbing complex energy Eq.(19) can be satisfied by taking the lower (neg- ative) sign on the right hand side; correspondingly, from Eqs.(6) and (12) it follows that G $_{a,a}$( z ) is unbounded when z → E 0 from the bottom of the real energy axis, i.e. for Im( z ) < 0, but G $_{a,a}$( z ) remains bounded when z → E 0 with Im( z ) > 0 [43]. Conversely, for an ’amplify- ing’ complex energy Im( E$_{a}$ ) > 0, Eq.(19) can be satisfied by taking the upper (positive) sign on the right hand side; correspondingly, G $_{a,a}$( z ) is unbounded when z → E 0 with Im( z ) > 0, but it remains bounded when z 0 with Im( z ) < 0 [43]. Such a different behavior of spectral singularities for an absorbing or an amplifying complex energy E$_{a}$ has some relevant physical implications, that will be discussed in Sec.II.D and Sec.III.C. In Sec.II.D it will be shown that the appearance of a spectral singular- ity in the amplifying case is responsible for the non-decay of state | a 〉 into the continuum, in spite of the absence of bound states; in Sec.III.C the interplay between spec- tral singularities and wave scattering will be investigated for a semi-infinite tight-binding lattice realization of the FFA Hamiltonian.\n\nin correspondence of which the resolvent G ( z ) has a pole. (iii) A spectral singularity E 0 of the continuous spectrum( E$_{1}$, E$_{2}$ ) is any solution of the coupled equa- tions" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4864235788306241, + "doc_id": "b470c51882a671fb46863c53d68a36789afed66569abe07fd7499f961a6ca927", + "edit_distance": 0.664, + "f1_score": 0.9791666666666665, + "meteor": 0.6053741709192422, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "16\n\nFIG. 3: (Color online) The evolving quantum state of N = 40 bosons with u = 5 for TwinFock ( n = 0) preparation. Here and below the units are such that K = 1. The time is t = 4. (a) Wigner function of the evolved quantum state. (b) Semiclassical evolved state. (c) Occupation statistics, with the semiclassical result shown as dashed-dotted line.\n\nFIG. 3: (Color online) The evolving quantum state of N = 40 bosons with u = 5 for TwinFock ( n = 0) preparation. Here and below the units are such that K = 1. The time is t = 4. (a) Wigner function of the evolved quantum state. (b) Semiclassical evolved state. (c) Occupation statistics, with the semiclassical result shown as dashed-dotted line.\n\nFIG. 4: (Color online) The variation of S x ( ) t with time for N =40 particles with u = 5, for Zero (a), Pi (b), Edge (c), and TwinFock (d) preparations. Note the different vertical scale. The dashed-dotted lines are based on semiclassical simulation. Note that the fluctuations of a semiclassical preparation always die after a transient, which should be contrasted with both the classical (single trajectory) and quantum (superposition of M > 1 eigenstates) behavior.\n\nFIG. 4: (Color online) The variation of S x ( ) t with time for N =40 particles with u = 5, for Zero (a), Pi (b), Edge (c), and TwinFock (d) preparations. Note the different vertical scale. The dashed-dotted lines are based on semiclassical simulation. Note that the fluctuations of a semiclassical preparation always die after a transient, which should be contrasted with both the classical (single trajectory) and quantum (superposition of M > 1 eigenstates) behavior.", + "recall": 0.9591836734693877, + "true_md": "16\n\nFIG. 4: (Color online) The variation of S$_{x}$ ( t ) with time for N =40 particles with u = 5, for Zero (a), Pi (b), Edge (c), and TwinFock (d) preparations. Note the different vertical scale. The dashed-dotted lines are based on semiclassical simulation. Note that the fluctuations of a semiclassical preparation always die after a transient, which should be contrasted with both the classical (single trajectory) and quantum (superposition of M > 1 eigenstates) behavior.\n\nFIG. 3: (Color online) The evolving quantum state of N = 40 bosons with u = 5 for TwinFock ( n = 0) preparation. Here and below the units are such that K = 1. The time is t = 4. (a) Wigner function of the evolved quantum state. (b) Semiclassical evolved state. (c) Occupation statistics, with the semiclassical result shown as dashed-dotted line." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6345626448063008, + "doc_id": "2505a175d42ee6ea7d457cdf3186028e5bd9ab0e0ac3a39670038436f7707119", + "edit_distance": 0.6092066601371204, + "f1_score": 0.932, + "meteor": 0.6879999272363962, + "precision": 0.9433198380566802, + "pred_md": "FIG. 20: The function C [0] 7 ,c as computed from a mesh containing random noise (61) at each mesh point. Damping of this noise illustrates the effect of smoothing. (Solid line) Result obtained using a circular cylinder with R = 2 cm. (Dashed line) Result obtained using an elliptical cylinder with semiminor axis of 2 cm and a semimajor axis of 4 cm.\n\nFIG. 20: The function C [0] 7 ,c as computed from a mesh containing random noise (61) at each mesh point. Damping of this noise illustrates the effect of smoothing. (Solid line) Result obtained using a circular cylinder with R = 2 cm. (Dashed line) Result obtained using an elliptical cylinder with semiminor axis of 2 cm and a semimajor axis of 4 cm.\n\n( x, y ) = (0 4 0 2) . , . cm along the length of the wiggler. The field data (points) are shown along with computed values (solid line). Note that the fitted field captures the fringe-field behavior. The relative error was found to satisfy the bound δ | B data -B fit | / | B | peak ≤ 3 5 . × 10 -4 . We observe that this error is comparable to that found for the monopole-doublet benchmark. Presumably it is due to errors in numerical integration, errors in interpolating onto the elliptic cylinder, errors arising from neglecting terms beyond degree 6, etc., as well as possible failure of the OPERA-3d data to be Maxwellian. Fig. 22 illustrates the horizontal roll-off of the vertical field at y = 0 1 . cm, z = 104 2 cm for 0 . ≤ x ≤ 1 cm. Note the discrete jumps in the original data, reflecting the number of digits retained in the output of the numerical computation. Despite the small variation of B y in x , the fit goes through the interior data. Finally, Fig. 23 illustrates the longitudinal field B z , again at ( x, y ) = (0 4 . , 0 2) cm along the . wiggler. Note that no information about B z was used to generate this field, since only the component of B normal to the elliptic cylinder surface was used to generate the interior solution.\n\nThe error for B y on-axis lies in the range 0 1-0 2 . . G along the length of the wiggler, increasing slightly near the end poles. A plot of residuals in the plane y = 0 is displayed in Fig. 24. Note that the error is within 0 6 . G over this region of the x z -plane. The error begins to increase rapidly at about x = 2 cm; this may be due to retaining only terms through degree 6 in the on-axis gradients, or perhaps a finite domain of convergence of the associated power series for B y ( x, y, z ). For all | x | ≤ 2 cm, the peak error is 0 3 G. We remark that this peak . error amounts to a relative error of less than 2 parts in 10 , 5 which is remarkably small compared to the error for the data of Fig. 21. We expect the error to behave\n\n15\n\nFIG. 21: Fit to the proposed ILC wiggler vertical field versus z , where x = 0 4 cm, . y = 0 2 cm. The solid line is computed . using data on the surface of an elliptical cylinder with x max = 4 4 . cm, y max = 2 4 cm, using the polynomial series for . B obtained from (11) or (12). Dots represent numerical data provided by OPERA-3d.\n\nFIG. 21: Fit to the proposed ILC wiggler vertical field versus z , where x = 0 4 cm, . y = 0 2 cm. The solid line is computed . using data on the surface of an elliptical cylinder with x max = 4 4 . cm, y max = 2 4 cm, using the polynomial series for . B obtained from (11) or (12). Dots represent numerical data provided by OPERA-3d.\n\nVertical Field at y=0.1cm, z=104.2cm\n\n#\"\n\nFIG. 22: Fit to the proposed ILC wiggler vertical field versus x , where y = 0 1 cm, . z = 104 2 cm. The solid line is computed . using data on the surface of an elliptical cylinder with x max = 4 4 . cm, y max = 2 4 cm, using the polynomial series for . B obtained from (11) or (12). Dots represent numerical data provided by OPERA-3d.\n\nFIG. 22: Fit to the proposed ILC wiggler vertical field versus x , where y = 0 1 cm, . z = 104 2 cm. The solid line is computed . using data on the surface of an elliptical cylinder with x max = 4 4 . cm, y max = 2 4 cm, using the polynomial series for . B obtained from (11) or (12). Dots represent numerical data provided by OPERA-3d.\n\nlike a harmonic function, and therefore it should grow as one approaches the boundary. Conversely, it should be the smallest on the center line. The observed error follows this pattern. Finally, this phenomenon may also be a factor in the observed increase in the error at and beyond x = 2 cm.", + "recall": 0.9209486166007905, + "true_md": "FIG. 21: Fit to the proposed ILC wiggler vertical field versus z , where x = 0 . 4 cm, y = 0 . 2 cm. The solid line is computed using data on the surface of an elliptical cylinder with x$_{max}$ = 4 . 4 cm, y$_{max}$ = 2 . 4 cm, using the polynomial series for B obtained from (11) or (12). Dots represent numerical data provided by OPERA-3d.\n\nFIG. 20: The function C [0] 7 ,c as computed from a mesh con tain- ing random noise (61) at each mesh point. Damping of this noise illustrates the effect of smoothing. (Solid line) Result obtained using a circular cylinder with R = 2 cm. (Dashed line) Result obtained using an elliptical cylinder with semimi- nor axis of 2 cm and a semimajor axis of 4 cm.\n\nFIG. 22: Fit to the proposed ILC wiggler vertical field versus x , where y = 0 . 1 cm, z = 104 . 2 cm. The solid line is computed using data on the surface of an elliptical cylinder with x$_{max}$ = 4 . 4 cm, y$_{max}$ = 2 . 4 cm, using the polynomial series for B obtained from (11) or (12). Dots represent numerical data provided by OPERA-3d.\n\n( x, y ) = (0 . 4 , 0 . 2) cm along the length of the wiggler. The field data (points) are shown along with computed values (solid line). Note that the fitted field captures the fringe-field behavior. The relative error was found to sat- isfy the bound δ | B$_{data}$ − B$_{fit}$ | / | B |$_{peak}$ ≤ 3 . 5 × 10 − $^{4}$. We observe that this error is comparable to that found for the monopole-doublet benchmark. Presumably it is due to errors in numerical integration, errors in interpolating onto the elliptic cylinder, errors arising from neglecting terms beyond degree 6, etc., as well as possible failure of the OPERA-3d data to be Maxwellian. Fig. 22 illus- trates the horizontal roll-off of the vertical field at y = 0 . 1 cm, z = 104 . 2 cm for 0 ≤ x ≤ 1 cm. Note the discrete jumps in the original data, reflecting the number of digits retained in the output of the numerical computation. De- spite the small variation of B$_{y}$ in x , the fit goes through the interior data. Finally, Fig. 23 illustrates the longi- tudinal field B$_{z}$ , again at ( x, y ) = (0 . 4 , 0 . 2) cm along the wiggler. Note that no information about B$_{z}$ was used to generate this field, since only the component of B normal to the elliptic cylinder surface was used to generate the interior solution.\n\nThe error for B$_{y}$ on-axis lies in the range 0 . 1-0 . 2 G along the length of the wiggler, increasing slightly near the end poles. A plot of residuals in the plane y = 0 is displayed in Fig. 24. Note that the error is within 0 . 6 G over this region of the x - z plane. The error begins to increase rapidly at about x = 2 cm; this may be due to retaining only terms through degree 6 in the on-axis gradients, or perhaps a finite domain of convergence of the associated power series for B$_{y}$ ( x, y, z ). For all | x | ≤ 2 cm, the peak error is 0 . 3 G. We remark that this peak error amounts to a relative error of less than 2 parts in 10 $^{5}$, which is remarkably small compared to the error for the data of Fig. 21. We expect the error to behave\n\nlike a harmonic function, and therefore it should grow as one approaches the boundary. Conversely, it should be the smallest on the center line. The observed error follows this pattern. Finally, this phenomenon may also be a factor in the observed increase in the error at and beyond x = 2 cm.\n\n15" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7404044092042603, + "doc_id": "5ebc344391705d9d6ea63c683c8877e37afbeed1315e7c42cd6f0069ece5e3ac", + "edit_distance": 0.40865384615384615, + "f1_score": 0.8972222222222223, + "meteor": 0.7715158287699396, + "precision": 0.9335260115606936, + "pred_md": "FIG. 1: Effective McMillan-Mayer short-range pair potentials extracted from explicit solvent simulations using the HNC closure. (a) Cation anion, (b) cation cation, (c) anion anion, (d) cation anion RDF obtained from explicit solvent MD and implicit solvent MC simulations.\n\nFIG. 1: Effective McMillan-Mayer short-range pair potentials extracted from explicit solvent simulations using the HNC closure. (a) Cation anion, (b) cation cation, (c) anion anion, (d) cation anion RDF obtained from explicit solvent MD and implicit solvent MC simulations.\n\npute all ion thermodynamic properties through implicit solvent MC simulations.\n\nThe second stage of our coarse-graining procedure consists in applying LPT, in order to deduce the best analytical model of electrolyte solutions which reproduces this molecular description. The principle of LPT is to describe the properties of a given system in terms of those of a well known reference system, with the difference between them treated as a perturbation in the reference potential. Assuming pairwise additive potentials, V ij = V (0) ij + ∆V ij , a first-order truncated expression for the free energy density of the system βf v is obtained,\n\n\n\nwhich depends only on the free-energy density f (0) v and RDF g (0) of the reference fluid, with β = ( k B T ) -1 and ρ i the concentration of species i . The Gibbs-Bogoliubov inequality [15] ensures that the right-hand side of Eq. (1) is actually a strict upper bound. Once a reference system has been chosen, the expression on the right-hand side of Eq. (1) must be minimized with respect to the parameters defining the reference. This procedure yields the best first-order approximation to the free energy of the system under consideration.\n\nFor a system of charged particles in solution, the natural reference is the PM, defined in terms of the charge and diameter ( σ i ) of each species. In this case, the perturbing potentials are just the short-range effective potentials computed above (∆ V ij = V SR ij ). We use the MSA [3] solution to the PM, since it provides analytical expressions for both the free energy and the RDF. The perturbation term is evaluated using an exponential approximation to the RDF obtained within the MSA, g r ( ) = exp [ g MSA ( r ) -1], which removes any unphysical negative regions and improves the comparison with HNC calculations.\n\nΦ\n\nFIG. 2: (Color online) (a) Osmotic coefficient Φ in the McMillan-Mayer frame of reference. (diamond) MC simulations, (dot dashed) MSA2, (dot) Debye Hckel Limiting law u (DHLL), (cross) experiments (Ref. [18] with the McMillanMayer to Lewis Randall conversion). (b) Minimization diameters. (dot dashed) MSA2 and (diamond) MSA-fit.\n\nFIG. 2: (Color online) (a) Osmotic coefficient Φ in the McMillan-Mayer frame of reference. (diamond) MC simulations, (dot dashed) MSA2, (dot) Debye Hckel Limiting law u (DHLL), (cross) experiments (Ref. [18] with the McMillanMayer to Lewis Randall conversion). (b) Minimization diameters. (dot dashed) MSA2 and (diamond) MSA-fit.\n\nWe first used LPT for a two-component system (Na + and Cl -free ions) within the MSA (model MSA2), for concentrations ranging from 0.1 to 2 0 mol l . -1 . The minimization leads to almost constant diameters on the whole range of concentration: σ 1 = 3 67 ˚ and . A σ 2 = 4 78 ˚ . . A As shown in Fig. 2, these parameters yield osmotic coefficients close to MC calculations only at very low concentration, i.e., c ≤ 0 1 moll . -1 (experimental values are given for indicative purposes only, since a perfect model will exactly match the MC results). For molar solutions, the LPT results differ considerably from MC calculations. This discrepancy can easily be understood by comparing the diameters found within the MSA2 calculation with the effective potentials given in Fig. 1. The anion/cation contact distance obtained within the MSA2 calculation is 4 2 ˚ , which is in the region of the second minimum of . A the effective potential and corresponds to the situation where there is a single layer of water molecules between the ions. The first minimum of the potential, which corresponds to the contact ion pair (CIP) is thus completely ignored by the MSA2 calculation. If the MSA diameters are directly fitted to reproduce the MC osmotic pressure, much smaller values are obtained. These MSA-fit hydrated diameters, which are compared to the MSA2 diameters in the bottom part of Fig. 2, are averages of the CIP and the solvent-separated ion pair.\n\nTo overcome this difficulty, we have explicitly introduced the CIP in our model (species 3). Straightforward calculations, based on a characteristic-function formalism, allow us to define an equivalent model in which the free ions and the CIP are explicitly taken into account [19, 20]. We apply this formalism by defining a pair as an anion and a cation at a distance less than 4 ˚, which corresponds to the position of the effective A potential maximum. The interaction between free, like charges in this new system remains unchanged, and the cation-anion interactions are easily approximated by ex-\n\n2", + "recall": 0.8636363636363636, + "true_md": "2\n\nFIG. 1: Effective McMillan-Mayer short-range pair potentials extracted from explicit solvent simulations using the HNC closure. (a) Cation anion, (b) cation cation, (c) anion anion, (d) cation anion RDF obtained from explicit solvent MD and implicit solvent MC simulations.\n\nFIG. 2: (Color online) (a) Osmotic coefficient Φ in the McMillan-Mayer frame of reference. (diamond) MC simula- tions, (dot dashed) MSA2, (dot) Debye H¨ uckel Limiting law (DHLL), (cross) experiments (Ref. [18] with the McMillan- Mayer to Lewis Randall conversion). (b) Minimization diam- eters. (dot dashed) MSA2 and (diamond) MSA-fit.\n\npute all ion thermodynamic properties through implicit solvent MC simulations.\n\nThe second stage of our coarse-graining procedure con- sists in applying LPT, in order to deduce the best ana- lytical model of electrolyte solutions which reproduces this molecular description. The principle of LPT is to describe the properties of a given system in terms of those of a well known reference system, with the differ- ence between them treated as a perturbation in the ref- erence potential. Assuming pairwise additive potentials, V$_{ij}$ = V (0) ij + ΔV$_{ij}$ , a first-order truncated expression for the free energy density of the system βf$_{v}$ is obtained,\n\nwhich depends only on the free-energy density f (0) v and RDF g (0) of the reference fluid, with β = ( k$_{B}$T ) − 1 and ρ$_{i}$ the concentration of species i . The Gibbs-Bogoliubov inequality [15] ensures that the right-hand side of Eq. (1) is actually a strict upper bound. Once a reference system has been chosen, the expression on the right-hand side of Eq. (1) must be minimized with respect to the parameters defining the reference. This procedure yields the best first-order approximation to the free energy of the system under consideration.\n\nFor a system of charged particles in solution, the nat- ural reference is the PM, defined in terms of the charge and diameter ( σ$_{i}$ ) of each species. In this case, the per- turbing potentials are just the short-range effective po- tentials computed above (Δ V$_{ij}$ = V SR ij ). We use the MSA [3] solution to the PM, since it provides analyti- cal expressions for both the free energy and the RDF. The perturbation term is evaluated using an exponential approximation to the RDF obtained within the MSA, g ( r ) = exp [ g$_{MSA}$ ( r ) − 1], which removes any unphysical negative regions and improves the comparison with HNC calculations.\n\nWe first used LPT for a two-component system (Na + and Cl − free ions) within the MSA (model MSA2), for concentrations ranging from 0.1 to 2 . $_{0 mol l}$− $^{1}$. The mini- mization leads to almost constant diameters on the whole range of concentration: σ$_{1}$ = 3 . 67 ˚ A and σ$_{2}$ = 4 . 78 ˚ A. As shown in Fig. 2, these parameters yield osmotic co- efficients close to MC calculations only at very low con- centration, i.e., c ≤ 0 . $_{1 mol l}$− 1 (experimental values are given for indicative purposes only, since a perfect model will exactly match the MC results). For molar solutions, the LPT results differ considerably from MC calculations. This discrepancy can easily be understood by comparing the diameters found within the MSA2 calculation with the effective potentials given in Fig. 1. The anion/cation contact distance obtained within the MSA2 calculation is 4 . 2 ˚ A, which is in the region of the second minimum of the effective potential and corresponds to the situation where there is a single layer of water molecules between the ions. The first minimum of the potential, which cor- responds to the contact ion pair (CIP) is thus completely ignored by the MSA2 calculation. If the MSA diameters are directly fitted to reproduce the MC osmotic pres- sure, much smaller values are obtained. These MSA-fit hydrated diameters, which are compared to the MSA2 diameters in the bottom part of Fig. 2, are averages of the CIP and the solvent-separated ion pair.\n\nTo overcome this difficulty, we have explicitly intro- duced the CIP in our model (species 3). Straightforward calculations, based on a characteristic-function formal- ism, allow us to define an equivalent model in which the free ions and the CIP are explicitly taken into ac- count [19, 20]. We apply this formalism by defining a pair as an anion and a cation at a distance less than 4 ˚ A, which corresponds to the position of the effective potential maximum. The interaction between free, like charges in this new system remains unchanged, and the cation-anion interactions are easily approximated by ex-\n\n$$βf$_{v}$ ≲ βf (0) v + 1 2 β ∑ i,j ρ$_{i}$ρ$_{j}$ ∫ d r g (0) ij ( r ) ΔV$_{ij}$ ( r ) (1)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7338751480055368, + "doc_id": "e08bdcce8ceae1600aca7a95f57e5d11f65f4a9dcdd94ef95aa89bf5ef91c4c9", + "edit_distance": 0.6646571213263, + "f1_score": 0.8908296943231441, + "meteor": 0.6944530106056224, + "precision": 0.9272727272727272, + "pred_md": "rial run-and-tumble motion, involving a swim speed that depends (via unspecified interactions) on local bacterial density. This gives pattern similar to those observed in experiments [5, 6]. However, the basic mechanism -density-dependent motility coupled to logistic population growth- is not limited to this example. Our work demonstrates that chemotaxis per se is not a prerequisite for observing what are sometimes colloquially referred to as 'chemotactic patterns'.\n\nIt is indeed remarkable that density-dependent swim speed and logistic growth alone are sufficient to create some of the specific pattern types previously identified with specific chemotaxis mechanisms. In mechanistic terms, we find that the logistic growth dynamics effectively arrests a spinodal phase separation that is known to follow from a density-dependent swim speed [15]. Put differently, an initially uniform bacterial population with small fluctuations will aggregate into droplets, but these will not coarsen further once a characteristic length scale is achieved, at which aggregation and birth/death effects come into balance. Starting instead from a small inoculum, we predict formation of concentric rings which, under some conditions, at least partially break up into spots at late times [5].\n\nTo exemplify our generic mechanism we will start from a minimal model of run-and-tumble bacteria, that can run in straight lines with a swim speed v and randomly change direction at a constant tumbling rate τ -1 [21, 22]. To this we add our two key ingredients: a local densitydependent motility, and the birth/death of bacteria, the latter accounted for through a logistic growth model. Of course, bacteria can interact locally in various ways, ranging from steric collisions [15] to chemical quorumsensing [6]. (Indeed a nonspecific dependence of motility on bacterial density was previously argued to be central to bacterial patterning by Kawasaki [8].) Here we focus on the net effect of all such interactions on the swim speed v ρ ( ), which we assume to decrease with density ρ . This dependence might include the local effect of a secreted chemoattractant (such as aspartate [3-5] which causes aggregation, effectively decreasing v ) but does not assume one.\n\nIn addition to their run-and-tumble motion, real bacteria continuously reproduce, at a medium-dependent growth rate which ranges from about one reciprocal hour in favourable environments such as Luria broth to several orders of magnitude lower for 'minimal' media such as M9. In bacterial colonies patterns may evolve on timescales of days [6], over which such population growth dynamics can be important.\n\nWe now derive continuum equations for the local density ρ ( r , t ) in a population of run-and-tumble bacteria, with swim speed v ρ ( ), growing at a rate α (1 -ρ/ρ 0 ). The latter represents a sum of birth and death terms, in balance only at ρ = ρ 0 . At large scales in a uniform system, the motion of individual bacteria is characterized by a diffusivity D ρ ( ) = v ρ ( ) 2 τ/d , where τ -1 is the tumbling rate and d the dimensionality [21, 22]. Crucially how-\n\n2\n\n-uniform swimming speed v ( r ) also results in a mean drift velocity V = -vτ ∇ v [21] which here gives V = -D ρ ' ( ) ∇ ρ/ 2 [15]. This contribution is crucial to phase separation [15] and will again play a major role here. However this term has no counterpart in ordinary Brownian motion (even if particles have variable diffusivity) and was accordingly overlooked in previous studies which relied on phenomenological equations involving a density-dependent diffusivity and no drift [8].\n\nCoupling the diffusion-drift equation for run-andtumble bacteria, as derived in [15], with the logistic growth term, the full dynamics is then given by:\n\n\n\n\n\nwhere the 'effective diffusivity' is\n\n\n\nThis results from the summed effects of the true diffusive flux -D ρ ( ) ∇ ρ and the non-linear drift flux ρV . In Eq.(1) we have also introduced a phenomenological surface tension κ > 0, which controls gradients in the bacterial density. Such a contribution has been shown to arise when the speed of a bacterium depends on the average density in a small local region around it, rather than a strictly infinitesimal one [15]. Eq. (1) neglects noise, both in the run-and-tumble dynamics and in the birth/death process. The former noise source conserves density and should become irrelevant at the experimental time scale of days. On the other hand, the non-conservative noise in the birth and death dynamics may be more important, and we have verified that our results are robust to its introduction at small to moderate levels. Numerical simulations of Eq. (1) have been performed with standard finite difference methods (although noise does require careful treatment, as in [23, 24]), with periodic boundary conditions used throughout. For definiteness, all our simulations have been carried out with v ρ ( ) = v e 0 -λρ/ 2 , where v 0 > 0 is the swim speed of an isolated bacterium and λ > 0 controls the decay of velocity with density. The precise form of v ρ ( ) is however not crucial for the phenomenology presented here, and the instability analysis offered below does not assume it.\n\nThe logistic population dynamics alone would cause the bacterial density to evolve toward a uniform density, ρ ( r ) = ρ 0 , which constitutes a fixed point for the proposed model. Although this homogeneous configuration is stable in the absence of bacterial interactions, it has been shown [15] that, without logistic growth, a density-dependent swim speed v ρ ( ) leads to phase separation via a spinodal instability whenever dv/dρ < -v/ρ . By Eq. (2) this equates to the condition D e < 0, and it is indeed obvious that the diffusive part of Eq. (1) is unstable for negative D e . It is important, clearly, that", + "recall": 0.8571428571428571, + "true_md": "2\n\nrial run-and-tumble motion, involving a swim speed that depends (via unspecified interactions) on local bacterial density. This gives pattern similar to those observed in experiments [5, 6]. However, the basic mechanism —density-dependent motility coupled to logistic popu- lation growth— is not limited to this example. Our work demonstrates that chemotaxis per se is not a prerequisite for observing what are sometimes colloquially referred to as ‘chemotactic patterns’.\n\never, a non-uniform swimming speed v ( r ) also results in a mean drift velocity V = − vτ ∇ v [21] which here gives V = − D $^{′}$( ρ ) ∇ ρ/ 2 [15]. This contribution is crucial to phase separation [15] and will again play a major role here. However this term has no counterpart in ordinary Brownian motion (even if particles have variable diffusiv- ity) and was accordingly overlooked in previous studies which relied on phenomenological equations involving a density-dependent diffusivity and no drift [8].\n\nCoupling the diffusion-drift equation for run-and- tumble bacteria, as derived in [15], with the logistic growth term, the full dynamics is then given by:\n\nIt is indeed remarkable that density-dependent swim speed and logistic growth alone are sufficient to create some of the specific pattern types previously identified with specific chemotaxis mechanisms. In mechanistic terms, we find that the logistic growth dynamics effec- tively arrests a spinodal phase separation that is known to follow from a density-dependent swim speed [15]. Put differently, an initially uniform bacterial population with small fluctuations will aggregate into droplets, but these will not coarsen further once a characteristic length scale is achieved, at which aggregation and birth/death effects come into balance. Starting instead from a small inocu- lum, we predict formation of concentric rings which, un- der some conditions, at least partially break up into spots at late times [5].\n\nwhere the ‘effective diffusivity’ is\n\nTo exemplify our generic mechanism we will start from a minimal model of run-and-tumble bacteria, that can run in straight lines with a swim speed v and randomly change direction at a constant tumbling rate τ − 1 [21, 22]. To this we add our two key ingredients: a local density- dependent motility, and the birth/death of bacteria, the latter accounted for through a logistic growth model. Of course, bacteria can interact locally in various ways, ranging from steric collisions [15] to chemical quorum- sensing [6]. (Indeed a nonspecific dependence of motility on bacterial density was previously argued to be central to bacterial patterning by Kawasaki [8].) Here we fo- cus on the net effect of all such interactions on the swim speed v ( ρ ), which we assume to decrease with density ρ . This dependence might include the local effect of a secreted chemoattractant (such as aspartate [3–5] which causes aggregation, effectively decreasing v ) but does not assume one.\n\nThis results from the summed effects of the true diffu- sive flux − D ( ρ ) ∇ ρ and the non-linear drift flux ρV . In Eq.(1) we have also introduced a phenomenological sur- face tension κ > 0, which controls gradients in the bacte- rial density. Such a contribution has been shown to arise when the speed of a bacterium depends on the average density in a small local region around it, rather than a strictly infinitesimal one [15]. Eq. (1) neglects noise, both in the run-and-tumble dynamics and in the birth/death process. The former noise source conserves density and should become irrelevant at the experimental time scale of days. On the other hand, the non-conservative noise in the birth and death dynamics may be more important, and we have verified that our results are robust to its introduction at small to moderate levels. Numerical sim- ulations of Eq. (1) have been performed with standard finite difference methods (although noise does require careful treatment, as in [23, 24]), with periodic bound- ary conditions used throughout. For definiteness, all our simulations have been carried out with v ( ρ ) = v$_{0}$e − λρ/ $^{2}$, where v$_{0}$ > 0 is the swim speed of an isolated bacterium and λ > 0 controls the decay of velocity with density. The precise form of v ( ρ ) is however not crucial for the phenomenology presented here, and the instability anal- ysis offered below does not assume it.\n\nIn addition to their run-and-tumble motion, real bac- teria continuously reproduce, at a medium-dependent growth rate which ranges from about one reciprocal hour in favourable environments such as Luria broth to sev- eral orders of magnitude lower for ‘minimal’ media such as M9. In bacterial colonies patterns may evolve on timescales of days [6], over which such population growth dynamics can be important.\n\nWe now derive continuum equations for the local den- sity ρ ( r , t ) in a population of run-and-tumble bacteria, with swim speed v ( ρ ), growing at a rate α (1 − ρ/ρ$_{0}$ ). The latter represents a sum of birth and death terms, in balance only at ρ = ρ$_{0}$ . At large scales in a uniform sys- tem, the motion of individual bacteria is characterized by a diffusivity D ( ρ ) = v ( ρ ) $^{2}$τ /d , where τ − 1 is the tumbling rate and d the dimensionality [21, 22]. Crucially how-\n\nThe logistic population dynamics alone would cause the bacterial density to evolve toward a uniform den- sity, ρ ( r ) = ρ$_{0}$ , which constitutes a fixed point for the proposed model. Although this homogeneous configu- ration is stable in the absence of bacterial interactions, it has been shown [15] that, without logistic growth, a density-dependent swim speed v ( ρ ) leads to phase sepa- ration via a spinodal instability whenever dv/dρ < − v/ρ . By Eq. (2) this equates to the condition D$_{e}$ < 0, and it is indeed obvious that the diffusive part of Eq. (1) is unstable for negative D$_{e}$ . It is important, clearly, that\n\n$$∂ρ ( r , t ) ∂t = ∇ · [ D$_{e}$ ( ρ ) ∇ ρ ( r , t )] (1) + αρ ( r , t )$^{(}$1 − ρ ( r , t ) ρ$_{0}$ ) − κ ∇ $^{4}$ρ ( r , t )$$\n\n$$D$_{e}$ ( ρ ) = D ( ρ ) + 1 2 ρD $^{′}$( ρ ) (2)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8781551512082302, + "doc_id": "ca3199f39cceb2c216c27a4c252c3909b7e0c40fa8ce3631c81b89537b38750d", + "edit_distance": 0.11423550087873462, + "f1_score": 0.9672544080604535, + "meteor": 0.9318677526329895, + "precision": 0.9770992366412213, + "pred_md": "arXiv:1001.3421v2 [cs.IT] 3 Mar 2011\n\n## Multilevel Decoders Surpassing Belief Propagation on the Binary Symmetric Channel\n\nShiva Kumar Planjery Dept. of Electrical and Computer Eng. University of Arizona Tucson, AZ 85721, U.S.A. Email: shivap@ece.arizona.edu\n\nDavid Declercq ETIS ENSEA/UCP/CNRS UMR 8051 95014 Cergy-Pontoise, France Email: declercq@ensea.fr\n\nShashi Kiran Chilappagari, Bane Vasi ' c Dept. of Electrical and Computer Eng. University of Arizona Tucson, AZ 85721, U.S.A. Email: { shashic,vasic } @ece.arizona.edu\n\nAbstract -In this paper, we propose a new class of quantized message-passing decoders for LDPC codes over the BSC. The messages take values (or levels) from a finite set. The update rules do not mimic belief propagation but instead are derived using the knowledge of trapping sets. We show that the update rules can be derived to correct certain error patterns that are uncorrectable by algorithms such as BP and min-sum. In some cases even with a small message set, these decoders can guarantee correction of a higher number of errors than BP and min-sum. We provide particularly good 3-bit decoders for 3-left-regular LDPC codes. They significantly outperform the BP and minsum decoders, but more importantly, they achieve this at only a fraction of the complexity of the BP and min-sum decoders.\n\n## I. INTRODUCTION\n\nLow-density parity-check (LDPC) [2] codes have received much attention in the past several years owing to their exceptional performance under iterative decoding. A wide spectrum of iterative decoders of varying complexity have been developed ranging from simple hard-decision algorithms such as Gallager-A/B algorithms to the more sophisticated belief propagation (BP) algorithm. Recently, the design of quantized BP decoders and other low-complexity variants of BP have gained prominence due to the high-speed requirements and hardware constraints for practical realizations of these decoders. The first quantized decoders including a three-level decoder coined Gallager-E algorithm were proposed by Richardson and Urbanke [3]. They also developed the technique of density evolution to determine the asymptotic decoding thresholds of a code. Low complexity approximations to BP with minimal loss in the asymptotic decoding thresholds have been proposed by Chen et al. [4]. The class of quantized BP decoders have been investigated by Lee and Thorpe [5]. Quantized min-sum decoders have been proposed by Smith, Kschischang and Yu [6].\n\nA common theme in all the aforementioned works is that the underlying basis for design of the quantized decoders is to maximize the decoding thresholds which holds only in the asymptotic case. Therefore, these quantization schemes do not guarantee a good performance on a practical finite-length code especially in the high signal-to-noise (SNR) region. In addition, the effects of quantization can also contribute to the error-floor phenomenon. Richardson introduced the notion of trapping sets in [7] to characterize error floors. Trapping sets\n\ncan be present in any finite-length code irrespective of how good the decoding threshold is and hence, codes optimized for good decoding thresholds can still exhibit high error floors. Characterization of error floors and design of LDPC codes with low error floors has recently been a subject of wide interest [8], [9], [10], [11].\n\nIn this paper, we propose multilevel decoders for LDPC codes over the binary symmetric channel (BSC). A key distinction from the traditional quantized decoders is that the messages are not quantized values of beliefs and the update rules are not approximations of the rules used in BP. Instead, they are derived using trapping sets and trapping set ontology [12]. As we showed in [13] in the case of BSC, failure characterization is combinatorial in nature, and in the error floor region reduces to the problem of guaranteed errorcorrection capability of a code. In [14] we showed the potential of multilevel decoding for the case of four levels. In this paper, we provide two 3-bit decoders for 3-left-regular codes that outperform floating-point BP and min-sum in the error floor region inspite of having much lower complexity. The rest of the paper is organized as follows. Section II provides preliminaries. Section III provides the general framework of multilevel decoders. In Section IV, we provide the description of the 3-bit decoders for 3-left-regular codes. Finally results and conclusions are presented in Sections V and VI.\n\n## II. PRELIMINARIES\n\nglyph[negationslash]\n\nLet G = ( V ∪ C, E ) denote the Tanner graph of a binary LDPC code C with the set of variable nodes V = { v , 1 · · · , v n } and set of check nodes C = { c 1 , · · · , c m } . E is the set of edges in G . The code has length n and code rate R . For a vector v = ( v , v 1 2 , . . . , v n ) , the support of v denoted as supp ( v ) , is defined as the set of all variable nodes such that v i = 0 . A code C is said to be d v -left-regular if all variable nodes in V of graph G have the same degree d v . The degree of a node is the number of its neighbors.\n\nLet r = ( r , r 1 2 . . . , r n ) be the input to the decoder from the BSC. A trapping set T r ( ) is a non-empty set of variable nodes in G that are not eventually corrected by the decoder [7]. A standard notation for a trapping set is ( a, b ) where a = | T r ( ) | and b is the number of odd-degree check nodes in the subgraph induced by T r ( ) . The critical number of a trapping", + "recall": 0.9576059850374065, + "true_md": "# Multilevel Decoders Surpassing Belief Propagation on the Binary Symmetric Channel\n\nShiva Kumar Planjery Dept. of Electrical and Computer Eng. University of Arizona Tucson, AZ 85721, U.S.A. Email: shivap@ece.arizona.edu\n\nDavid Declercq ETIS ENSEA/UCP/CNRS UMR 8051 95014 Cergy-Pontoise, France Email: declercq@ensea.fr\n\nShashi Kiran Chilappagari, Bane Vasi ´ c Dept. of Electrical and Computer Eng. University of Arizona Tucson, AZ 85721, U.S.A. Email: { shashic,vasic } @ece.arizona.edu\n\nAbstract —In this paper, we propose a new class of quantized message-passing decoders for LDPC codes over the BSC. The messages take values (or levels) from a finite set. The update rules do not mimic belief propagation but instead are derived using the knowledge of trapping sets. We show that the update rules can be derived to correct certain error patterns that are uncorrectable by algorithms such as BP and min-sum. In some cases even with a small message set, these decoders can guarantee correction of a higher number of errors than BP and min-sum. We provide particularly good 3-bit decoders for 3-left-regular LDPC codes. They significantly outperform the BP and min- sum decoders, but more importantly, they achieve this at only a fraction of the complexity of the BP and min-sum decoders.\n\nLow-density parity-check (LDPC) [2] codes have received much attention in the past several years owing to their excep- tional performance under iterative decoding. A wide spectrum of iterative decoders of varying complexity have been devel- oped ranging from simple hard-decision algorithms such as Gallager-A/B algorithms to the more sophisticated belief prop- agation (BP) algorithm. Recently, the design of quantized BP decoders and other low-complexity variants of BP have gained prominence due to the high-speed requirements and hard- ware constraints for practical realizations of these decoders. The first quantized decoders including a three-level decoder coined Gallager-E algorithm were proposed by Richardson and Urbanke [3]. They also developed the technique of density evolution to determine the asymptotic decoding thresholds of a code. Low complexity approximations to BP with minimal loss in the asymptotic decoding thresholds have been proposed by Chen et al. [4]. The class of quantized BP decoders have been investigated by Lee and Thorpe [5]. Quantized min-sum decoders have been proposed by Smith, Kschischang and Yu [6].\n\nA common theme in all the aforementioned works is that the underlying basis for design of the quantized decoders is to maximize the decoding thresholds which holds only in the asymptotic case. Therefore, these quantization schemes do not guarantee a good performance on a practical finite-length code especially in the high signal-to-noise (SNR) region. In addition, the effects of quantization can also contribute to the error-floor phenomenon. Richardson introduced the notion of trapping sets in [7] to characterize error floors. Trapping sets\n\ncan be present in any finite-length code irrespective of how good the decoding threshold is and hence, codes optimized for good decoding thresholds can still exhibit high error floors. Characterization of error floors and design of LDPC codes with low error floors has recently been a subject of wide interest [8], [9], [10], [11].\n\nIn this paper, we propose multilevel decoders for LDPC codes over the binary symmetric channel (BSC). A key distinction from the traditional quantized decoders is that the messages are not quantized values of beliefs and the update rules are not approximations of the rules used in BP. Instead, they are derived using trapping sets and trapping set ontology [12]. As we showed in [13] in the case of BSC, failure characterization is combinatorial in nature, and in the error floor region reduces to the problem of guaranteed error- correction capability of a code. In [14] we showed the potential of multilevel decoding for the case of four levels. In this paper, we provide two 3-bit decoders for 3-left-regular codes that outperform floating-point BP and min-sum in the error floor region inspite of having much lower complexity. The rest of the paper is organized as follows. Section II provides preliminaries. Section III provides the general framework of multilevel decoders. In Section IV, we provide the description of the 3-bit decoders for 3-left-regular codes. Finally results and conclusions are presented in Sections V and VI.\n\nLet G = ( V ∪ C, E ) denote the Tanner graph of a binary LDPC code C with the set of variable nodes V = { v$_{1}$, · · · , v$_{n}$ } and set of check nodes C = { c$_{1}$, · · · , c$_{m}$ } . E is the set of edges in G . The code has length n and code rate R . For a vector v = ( v$_{1}$, v$_{2}$, . . . , v$_{n}$ ) , the support of v denoted as supp ( v ) , is defined as the set of all variable nodes such that v$_{i}$ ̸ = 0 . A code C is said to be d$_{v}$ -left-regular if all variable nodes in V of graph G have the same degree d$_{v}$ . The degree of a node is the number of its neighbors.\n\nLet r = ( r$_{1}$, r$_{2}$ . . . , r$_{n}$ ) be the input to the decoder from the BSC. A trapping set T ( r ) is a non-empty set of variable nodes in G that are not eventually corrected by the decoder [7]. A standard notation for a trapping set is ( a, b ) where a = | T ( r ) | and b is the number of odd-degree check nodes in the sub- graph induced by T ( r ) . The critical number of a trapping\n\n## II. PRELIMINARIES\n\n## I. INTRODUCTION\n\narXiv:1001.3421v2 [cs.IT] 3 Mar 2011" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5982895168111579, + "doc_id": "9dc1fd303d67c1b7a9a351522254d092a8574131ddc372246d72c81c7dd81bdb", + "edit_distance": 0.5375494071146245, + "f1_score": 0.8693467336683417, + "meteor": 0.6433684614028873, + "precision": 0.9081364829396326, + "pred_md": "## B. Density of states\n\nFig. 3 shows the total, partial, and projected densities of states (DOS) of NaAlSi. The Na contribution near the Fermi level is negligible and thus not shown. Except for a strong dip ('pseudogap') near the Fermi level and a less severe dip in the -3 to -4 eV range, the DOS hovers around 3 states/eV throughout both valence and conduction bands. Within the pseudogap encompassing the Fermi energy, there is an anomalous sharp and narrow peak with ε F lying on its upper slope, as noted previously by Kuroiwa et al. 7 The value of N ε ( F ) is 1.1 states/eV. We discuss below the FSs of both hole (Si) and electron (Al) character.\n\nIt seems clear that the transport properties and low-energy properties (which have not yet been reported), and in particular the superconductivity of NaAlSi, are intimately associated with this sharp and narrow peak in the DOS, which includes the Fermi level. The projected DOS shows the flat bands that give rise to this peak are very strongly Siderived. There is Al 3 s character that turns on just below ε F , but it is relatively small compared to the Si character at ε F , and its magnitude remains low and nearly constant through the peak. There is Al 3 p character of the same magnitude in the vicinity of the Fermi level. The top edge of the peak coincides with the flat band along Γ-X at 0.13 eV. The width of the peak, about 0.35 eV, must be due to dispersion and anticrossings that are mostly not visible along symmetry directions and arise from mixing away from symmetry lines of the valence and conduction bands.\n\nNonetheless, the slope of the DOS at ε F is rather steep, and this may give rise to high thermopower for the material. The standard low-temperature limit of thermopower (the Seebeck coefficient tensor) S ( T ) in semiclassical Bloch-Boltzmann theory is\n\n\n\nThe conductivity tensor σ ( E ) can be written in terms of the average velocity ( /vector v E ( )) product, DOS, and scattering time τ ( E ) over the constant energy ( E ) surface:\n\n\n\nThe thermopower thus picks up contributions from the energy variation of three quantities: the dyadic product 〈 /vector /vector vv 〉 , N E ( ), and τ ( E ). Often the energy dependence of τ is neglected, out of lack of detailed knowledge, though it also can be argued to follow roughly 1 /τ ( E ) ∝ N E ( ) for elastic scattering. The\n\n4\n\nenergy dependence of v 2 ( E ) also counteracts the energy dependence of N E ( ). Nevertheless it is observed that materials with large slope in N E ( ) frequently have large thermopower. For NaAlSi we calculate d ln N E /dE ( ) | ε F = -4 0 . eV -1 . This value can be compared with other materials that have fine structure near the Fermi level: TiBe , 2 where d ln N E /dE ( ) | ε F = 10-12 eV -1 and N ε ( F ) also is much larger; 25 and MgCNi 3 with its very impressive peak very near ε F , for which d ln N E /dE ( ) | ε F ∼ -15-20/eV -1 26 .\n\nThe energy derivative of diagonal elements of σ that occurs in Eq. 1 can also be expressed as\n\n\n\nwhere M -1 ( E ) is (a diagonal element of) the inverse mass tensor (second derivative of ε k ) averaged over the constant energy surface. This form makes it clear that the expressions should, for any quantitative estimate, be generalized to two-band form, since the valence and conduction bands have differing signs of their effective masses, and the scattering time-and its energy variation-is likely to be very different for Si-derived covalent valence bands and Al-derived free-electron conduction bands. Measurement of the thermopower, and a quantitative theoretical treatment, would be very useful in extending the understanding of the transport properties of NaAlSi.\n\n## C. Unusual Fermi surfaces\n\nFig. 4 depicts the calculated FSs. In spite of the generally 2D band structure, the small k z dispersion of bands at ε F make some of the FSs surprisingly three-dimensional. Electron pockets and hole pockets coexist in the Brillouin zone, with electron and hole concentrations necessarily being equal.\n\nHole surfaces. Four hole 'fan-blade' surfaces lie oriented in the xz -and yz -planes. At the center, extending from Γ half way to Z, lies a long and narrow surface with square cross section. The top view allows the origin of these surfaces to be understood. The cross sections in the xy -plane are of two ellipses that are very anisotropic (in the xy -plane) and at right angels to each other. Each corresponds to a dispersion that is weak in one direction (the long major axis) and strong in the other (minor axis). These bands would intersect, but in fact are intersected by the electron band that cuts a squarish hole (rotated by 45 ), · within which the elongated hole surface inside re-emerges.", + "recall": 0.8337349397590361, + "true_md": "## B. Density of states\n\n## C. Unusual Fermi surfaces\n\nFig. 3 shows the total, partial, and projected den- sities of states (DOS) of NaAlSi. The Na contri- bution near the Fermi level is negligible and thus not shown. Except for a strong dip (“pseudogap”) near the Fermi level and a less severe dip in the − 3 to − 4 eV range, the DOS hovers around 3 states/eV throughout both valence and conduction bands. Within the pseudogap encompassing the Fermi energy, there is an anomalous sharp and nar- row peak with ε$_{F}$ lying on its upper slope, as noted previously by Kuroiwa et al. 7 The value of N ( ε$_{F}$ ) is 1.1 states/eV. We discuss below the FSs of both hole (Si) and electron (Al) character.\n\nIt seems clear that the transport properties and low-energy properties (which have not yet been re- ported), and in particular the superconductivity of NaAlSi, are intimately associated with this sharp and narrow peak in the DOS, which includes the Fermi level. The projected DOS shows the flat bands that give rise to this peak are very strongly Si- derived. There is Al 3 s character that turns on just below ε$_{F}$ , but it is relatively small compared to the Si character at ε$_{F}$ , and its magnitude remains low and nearly constant through the peak. There is Al 3 p character of the same magnitude in the vicinity of the Fermi level. The top edge of the peak coin- cides with the flat band along Γ-X at 0.13 eV. The width of the peak, about 0.35 eV, must be due to dispersion and anticrossings that are mostly not visi- ble along symmetry directions and arise from mixing away from symmetry lines of the valence and con- duction bands.\n\nNonetheless, the slope of the DOS at ε$_{F}$ is rather steep, and this may give rise to high thermopower for the material. The standard low-temperature limit of thermopower (the Seebeck coefficient tensor) S ( T ) in semiclassical Bloch-Boltzmann theory is\n\nThe conductivity tensor σ ( E ) can be written in terms of the average velocity ( ⃗v ( E )) product, DOS, and scattering time τ ( E ) over the constant energy ( E ) surface:\n\nThe thermopower thus picks up contributions from the energy variation of three quantities: the dyadic product 〈 ⃗v⃗v 〉 , N ( E ), and τ ( E ). Often the energy dependence of τ is neglected, out of lack of detailed knowledge, though it also can be argued to follow roughly 1 /τ ( E ) ∝ N ( E ) for elastic scattering. The\n\nFig. 4 depicts the calculated FSs. In spite of the generally 2D band structure, the small k$_{z}$ dispersion of bands at ε$_{F}$ make some of the FSs surprisingly three-dimensional. Electron pockets and hole pock- ets coexist in the Brillouin zone, with electron and hole concentrations necessarily being equal.\n\nHole surfaces. Four hole “fan-blade” surfaces lie oriented in the xz - and yz -planes. At the center, extending from Γ half way to Z, lies a long and nar- row surface with square cross section. The top view allows the origin of these surfaces to be understood. The cross sections in the xy -plane are of two ellipses that are very anisotropic (in the xy -plane) and at right angels to each other. Each corresponds to a dispersion that is weak in one direction (the long major axis) and strong in the other (minor axis). These bands would intersect, but in fact are inter- sected by the electron band that cuts a squarish hole (rotated by 45 ◦ ), within which the elongated hole surface inside re-emerges.\n\nwhere M $^{$\\_{−}$1}$( E ) is (a diagonal element of) the in- verse mass tensor (second derivative of ε$_{k}$ ) averaged over the constant energy surface. This form makes it clear that the expressions should, for any quan- titative estimate, be generalized to two-band form, since the valence and conduction bands have differ- ing signs of their effective masses, and the scattering time—and its energy variation—is likely to be very different for Si-derived covalent valence bands and Al-derived free-electron conduction bands. Measure- ment of the thermopower, and a quantitative theo- retical treatment, would be very useful in extend- ing the understanding of the transport properties of NaAlSi.\n\nenergy dependence of v $^{2}$( E ) also counteracts the en- ergy dependence of N ( E ). Nevertheless it is ob- served that materials with large slope in N ( E ) fre- quently have large thermopower. For NaAlSi we cal- culate d ln N ( E ) /dE |$_{ε}$$\\_{F}$ = − 4 . 0 eV $^{$_{−}$1}$. This value can be compared with other materials that have fine structure near the Fermi level: TiBe$\\_{2}$, where d ln N ( E ) /dE |$\\_{ε}$$_{F}$ = 10–12 eV $_{−}$1 and N ( ε$_{F}$ ) also is much larger; 25 and MgCNi$_{3}$ with its very impres- sive peak very near ε$_{F}$ , for which d ln N ( E ) /dE |$_{ε}$$\\_{F}$ ∼ -15-20/eV $^{$_{−}$1}$. 26\n\nThe energy derivative of diagonal elements of σ that occurs in Eq. 1 can also be expressed as\n\n$$1 σ dσ dE = d ln τ ( E ) dE + 1 2 π 2 M $^{$_{−}$1}$( E ) v $^{2}$( E ) , (3)$$\n\n$$S ( T ) → − π $^{2}$k$_{B}$ 3 e d ln σ ( E ) dE ∣ ∣ ε$_{F}$ k$_{B}$T. (1)$$\n\n$$σ ( E ) = 4 πe $^{2}$〈 ⃗v ( E ) ⃗v ( E ) 〉 N ( E ) τ ( E ) . (2)$$\n\n4" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8337138972057043, + "doc_id": "d9e262841270bce3af421f1d695389bf36717a34e460cda18eceb35a2486e925", + "edit_distance": 0.15865384615384615, + "f1_score": 0.9663608562691129, + "meteor": 0.9478793491853423, + "precision": 0.9813664596273292, + "pred_md": "2009 Fermi Symposium, Washington, D.C., Nov. 2-5\n\n3\n\nFIG. 3: Cen A light curve. Horizontal scale is in modified Julian days.\n\nFIG. 3: Cen A light curve. Horizontal scale is in modified Julian days.\n\nto observe these breaks, GBM is able to see significant emission above 300 keV, consistent with the canonical hard spectrum.\n\nCen A (Fig. 3) is a Sy 2 galaxy that is the brightest AGN in hard x-rays/low energy gamma rays. It has a hard spectrum (Γ = 1 8) and has been observed at . energies > 1 MeV [9]. The GBM results are consistent with this hard spectrum, though GBM does not have the sensitivity to determine if the hard spectrum continues beyond 300 keV or if the spectrum cuts off.\n\nCyg X-1 (Fig. 4) is a HMXB and one of the first systems determined to contain a black hole. It has been observed to emit significant emission above 100 keV including a power law tail extending out to greater than 1 MeV [10, 11]. The GBM results show significant emission above 300 keV, consistent with the power law tail observed when Cyg X-1 is in its hard state.\n\nGRS 1915+105 (Fig. 5) is a LMXB with the compact object being a massive black hole. Evidence for emission above 100 keV has been seen previously [12] with BATSE. The GBM light curve integrated over 490 days shows significant emission above 100 keV.\n\n1E 1740-29 (Fig. 6) is a LMXB very near the Galactic Center. It is a microquasar, and spends most of its time in the low/hard state. Integral observations indicate the presence of a power law tail above 200 keV [13]. The present GBM results are consistent with this high energy emission. In the future, we\n\neConf C091122\n\nFIG. 4: Cyg X-1 light curve. Horizontal scale is in modified Julian days.\n\nFIG. 5: GRS 1915+105 light curve. Horizontal scale is in modified Julian days.\n\nFIG. 4: Cyg X-1 light curve. Horizontal scale is in modified Julian days.FIG. 5: GRS 1915+105 light curve. Horizontal scale is in modified Julian days.", + "recall": 0.9518072289156626, + "true_md": "3\n\n2009 Fermi Symposium, Washington, D.C., Nov. 2-5\n\nFIG. 4: Cyg X-1 light curve. Horizontal scale is in modi- fied Julian days.\n\nFIG. 3: Cen A light curve. Horizontal scale is in modified Julian days.\n\nto observe these breaks, GBM is able to see significant emission above 300 keV, consistent with the canonical hard spectrum.\n\nCen A (Fig. 3) is a Sy 2 galaxy that is the brightest AGN in hard x-rays/low energy gamma rays. It has a hard spectrum (Γ = 1 . 8) and has been observed at energies > 1 MeV [9]. The GBM results are consis- tent with this hard spectrum, though GBM does not have the sensitivity to determine if the hard spectrum continues beyond 300 keV or if the spectrum cuts off.\n\nCyg X-1 (Fig. 4) is a HMXB and one of the first systems determined to contain a black hole. It has been observed to emit significant emission above 100 keV including a power law tail extending out to greater than 1 MeV [10, 11]. The GBM results show significant emission above 300 keV, consistent with the power law tail observed when Cyg X-1 is in its hard state.\n\nGRS 1915+105 (Fig. 5) is a LMXB with the com- pact object being a massive black hole. Evidence for emission above 100 keV has been seen previously [12] with BATSE. The GBM light curve integrated over 490 days shows significant emission above 100 keV.\n\n1E 1740-29 (Fig. 6) is a LMXB very near the Galactic Center. It is a microquasar, and spends most of its time in the low/hard state. Integral observa- tions indicate the presence of a power law tail above 200 keV [13]. The present GBM results are consis- tent with this high energy emission. In the future, we\n\neConf C091122\n\nFIG. 5: GRS 1915+105 light curve. Horizontal scale is in modified Julian days." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9409382515392919, + "doc_id": "3f600bfdad04cfeaff3f0f73bcbdda72030bdfb5be612c88244b813b1c19f5d4", + "edit_distance": 0.7422622397298818, + "f1_score": 0.9474727452923686, + "meteor": 0.5918209678248455, + "precision": 0.9598393574297188, + "pred_md": "which is Eq.(52) given in the text. Localization of the surface state at the lattice edge requires c n → 0 as n → ∞ , i.e. Re( µ ) > 0 [see Eq.(B4)]. Therefore, if the two\n\n- [1] C.M. Bender, Rep. Prog. Phys. 70 , 947 (2007).\n- [2] P. Dorey, C. Dunning, and R. Tateo, J. Phys.A 40 , R205 (2007).\n- [3] A. Mostafazadeh, 'Pseudo-Hermitian Quantum Mechanics', arXiv:0810.5643v2 (2008).\n- [4] C.M. Bender and S. Boettcher, Phys. Rev. Lett. 80 , 5243 (1998).\n- [5] T. Kato, Perturbation Theroy of Linear Operators (Springer, Berlin, 1966).\n- [6] M.V. Berry, Czech. J. Phys. 54 , 1039 (2004).\n- [7] R. R.D. Kemp, Can. J. Math. 10 , 447 (1958); M. A. Naimark, Amer. Math. Soc. Transl. 16 , 103 (1960); J. Schwartz, Commun. Pure Appl. Math. 13 , 609 (1960); V. E. Ljance, Amer. Math. Soc. Trans. 60 , 185 (1967).\n- [8] B. F. Samsonov, J. Phys. A 38 , L397 (2005).\n- [9] A. Mostafazadeh and H. Mehri-Dehnavi, J. Phys. A 42 , 125303 (2009).\n- [10] W. D. Heiss, Phys. Rep. 242 , 443 (1994); E. Narevicius and N. Moiseyev, Phys. Rev. Lett. 81 , 2221 (1998); C. Dembowski, H.-D. Grf, H. L. Harney, A. Heine, W. a D. Heiss, H. Rehfeld, and A. Richter, Phys. Rev. Lett. 86 , 787 (2001); C. Dembowski, B. Dietz, H.-D. Graf, H. L. Harney, A. Heine, W. D. Heiss, and A. Richter, Phys. Rev. E 69 , 056216 (2004); T. Stehmann, W. D. Heiss, and F. G. Scholtz, J. Phys. A 37 , 7813 (2004); J. Rubinstein, P. Sternberg, and Q. Ma, Phys. Rev. Lett. 99 , 167003 (2007); U. Gnther, I. Rotter, and B. Samu sonov, J. Phys. A 40 , 8815 (2007); P. Cejnar, S. Heinze, and M. Macek, Phys. Rev. Lett. 99 , 100601 (2007); S. Klaiman, U. Gnther, and N. Moiseyev, Phys. Rev. Lett. u 101 , 080402 (2008); M. Mller and I. Rotter, J. Phys. A u 41 , 244 018 (2008).\n- [11] A. Mostafazadeh, Phys. Rev. Lett. 102 , 220402 (2009).\n- [12] A. Mostafazadeh, J. Phys. A 39 , 13495 (2006).\n- [13] Z. Ahmedar, 'Zero width resonance (spectral singularity) in a complex PT-symmetric potential', Xiv:0908.2876v1 (2009).\n- [14] J.G. Muga, J.P. Palao, B. Navarro, and I.L. Egusquiza, Phys. Rep. 395 , 357 (2004).\n- [15] A. Mostafazadeh, 'Resonance Phenomenon Related to Spectral Singularities, Complex Barrier Potential, and Resonating Waveguides', arXiv:0908.1713v1 (2009).\n- [16] A. Ruschhaupt, F. Delgado, and J.G. Muga, J. Phys. A 38 , L171 (2005).\n- [17] K.O. Friedrichs, Commun. Pure Appl. Math. 1 , 361 (1948).\n- [18] U. Fano, Phys. Rev. 124 , 1866 (1961).\n- [19] P.W. Anderson, Phys. Rev. 164 , 41 (1961).\n- [20] B. Piraux, R. Bhatt, and P.L. Knight, Phys. Rev. A 41 , 6296 (1990).\n- [21] P.L. Knight, M.A. Lauder, and B.J. Dalton, Phys. Rep. 190 , 1 (1990).\n- [22] C. Cohen-Tannoudji, J. Dupont-Roc, and G. Grynberg, Atom-Photon Interactions (Wiley, New York, 1992).\n- [23] A.G. Kofman, G. Kurizki, and B. Sherman, J. Mod. Opt. 41 , 353 (1994).\n\n13\n\nroots ξ 1 2 , of Eq.(B8) satisfy the condition | ξ 1 2 , | ≤ 1, there are not surface states at the lattice edge.\n\n- [24] P. Lambropoulos, G.M. Nikolopoulos, T.R. Nielsen, and S. Bay, Rep. Prog. Phys. 63 , 455 (2000).\n- [25] G.D. Mahan, Many-Particle Physics (New York, Plenum Press, 1990), pp.272-285.\n- [26] M. Cini, Topics and Methods in Condended-Matter Theory (Springer, Heidelberg, 2007), Chap.5, pp.81-89.\n- [27] J.W. Gadzuk and M. Plihal, Farady Discuss. 117 , 1 (2000).\n- [28] N. Stefanou and A. Modinos, Phys. Rev. B 57 , 12127 (1998); P. A. Orellana, M. L. Ladr'n de Guevara, and F. o Claro, Phys. Rev. B 70 , 233315 (2004); L. Zhou, F.M. Hu, J. Lu, and C.P. Sun, Phys. Rev. A 74 , 032102 (2006); E. Rufeil Fiori and H.M. Pastawski, Chem. Phys. Lett. 420 , 35 (2006); G.-B. Zhang, S.-J. Wang, and L. Li, Phys. Rev. B 74 , 085106 (2006); A. V. Malyshev, P. A. Orellana, and F. Dom' ınguez-Adame, Phys. Rev. B 74 , 033308 (2006); P. Zedler, G. Schaller, G. Kiesslich, C. Emary, and T. Brandes, Phys. Rev. B 80 , 045309 (2009).\n- [29] S. Tanaka, S. Garmon, and T. Petrosky, Phys. Rev. B 73 , 115340 (2006); S. Tanaka, S. Garmon, G. Ordonez, and T. Petrosky, Phys. Rev. B 76 , 153308 (2007); H. Nakamura, N. Hatano, S. Garmon, and T. Petrosky, Phys. Rev. Lett 99 , 210404 (2007).\n- [30] T. Petrosky, I. Prigogine and S. Tasaki, Physica A 173 , 175 (1991); G. Ordonez, T. Petrosky, and I. Prigogine, Phys. Rev. A 63 , 052106 (2001).\n- [31] H. Nakazato, M. Namiki, and S. Pascazio, Int. J. Mod. Phys. B 10 , 247 (1996); P. Facchi, H. Nakazato, and S. Pascazio, Phys. Rev. Lett. 86 , 2699 (2001); P. Facchi and S. Pascazio, La Regola dOro di Fermi , in Quaderni di Fisica Teorica, edited by S. Boffi (Bibliopolis, Napoli, 1999).\n- [32] A.G. Kofman and G. Kurizki, Nature (London) 405 , 546 (2000); A.G. Kofman and G. Kurizki, Phys. Rev. Lett. 87 , 270405 (2001); X.-H. Wang, B.-Y. Gu, R. Wang, and H.-Q. Xu, Phys. Rev. Lett. 91 , 113904 (2003); J. Martorell, D.W.L. Sprung, W. van Dijk, and J.G. Muga, Phys. Rev. A 79 , 062104 (2009).\n- [33] S. Fan, P. R. Villeneuve, J. D. Joannopoulos, and H. A. Haus, Phys. Rev. Lett. 80 , 960 (1998); S. Fan, P. R. Villeneuve, J. D. Joannopoulos, M. J. Khan, C. Manolatou, and H. A. Haus, Phys. Rev. B 59 , 15882 (1999); P. Chak, S. Pereira, and J. E. Sipe, Phys. Rev. B 73 , 035105 (2006); L.-L. Lin, Z.-Y. Li, and B. Lin, Phys. Rev. B 72 , 165330 (2005).\n- [34] Y. Xu, Y. Li, R. K. Lee, and A. Yariv, Phys. Rev. E 62 , 7389 (2000).\n- [35] S. Longhi, Phys. Rev. A 74 , 063826 (2006).\n- [36] S. Longhi, Eur. Phys. J. B 57 , 45 (2007).\n- [37] S. Longhi, Phys. Rev. Lett. 97 , 110402 (2006); P. Biagoni, G. Della Valle, M. Ornigotti, M. Finazzi, L. Duo, P. Laporta and S. Longhi, Optics Express 16 , 3762 (2008).\n- [38] A.E. Miroshnichenko, S. Flach, and Y.S. Kivshar, 'Fano resonances in nanoscale structures', arXiv:0902.3014v4 (2009).\n- [39] G. Sudarshan, in Field Theory, Quantization and Statis-", + "recall": 0.9354207436399217, + "true_md": "13\n\nroots ξ$_{1}$$\\_{,}$$_{2}$ of Eq.(B8) satisfy the condition | ξ$_{1}$$\\_{,}$$_{2}$ | ≤ 1, there are not surface states at the lattice edge.\n\nwhich is Eq.(52) given in the text. Localization of the surface state at the lattice edge requires c$_{n}$ → 0 as n → ∞ , i.e. Re( µ ) > 0 [see Eq.(B4)]. Therefore, if the two\n\n- [24] P. Lambropoulos, G.M. Nikolopoulos, T.R. Nielsen, and S. Bay, Rep. Prog. Phys. 63 , 455 (2000).\n\n- [25] G.D. Mahan, Many-Particle Physics (New York, Plenum Press, 1990), pp.272-285.\n\n- [26] M. Cini, Topics and Methods in Condended-Matter The- ory (Springer, Heidelberg, 2007), Chap.5, pp.81-89.\n\n- [27] J.W. Gadzuk and M. Plihal, Farady Discuss. 117 , 1 (2000).\n\n- [28] N. Stefanou and A. Modinos, Phys. Rev. B 57 , 12127 (1998); P. A. Orellana, M. L. Ladr´ on de Guevara, and F. Claro, Phys. Rev. B 70 , 233315 (2004); L. Zhou, F.M. Hu, J. Lu, and C.P. Sun, Phys. Rev. A 74 , 032102 (2006); E. Rufeil Fiori and H.M. Pastawski, Chem. Phys. Lett. 420 , 35 (2006); G.-B. Zhang, S.-J. Wang, and L. Li, Phys. Rev. B 74 , 085106 (2006); A. V. Malyshev, P. A. Orellana, and F. Dom´ınguez-Adame, Phys. Rev. B 74 , 033308 (2006); P. Zedler, G. Schaller, G. Kiesslich, C. Emary, and T. Brandes, Phys. Rev. B 80 , 045309 (2009).\n\n- [29] S. Tanaka, S. Garmon, and T. Petrosky, Phys. Rev. B 73 , 115340 (2006); S. Tanaka, S. Garmon, G. Ordonez, and T. Petrosky, Phys. Rev. B 76 , 153308 (2007); H. Naka- mura, N. Hatano, S. Garmon, and T. Petrosky, Phys. Rev. Lett 99 , 210404 (2007).\n\n- [30] T. Petrosky, I. Prigogine and S. Tasaki, Physica A 173 , 175 (1991); G. Ordonez, T. Petrosky, and I. Prigogine, Phys. Rev. A 63 , 052106 (2001).\n\n- [31] H. Nakazato, M. Namiki, and S. Pascazio, Int. J. Mod. Phys. B 10 , 247 (1996); P. Facchi, H. Nakazato, and S. Pascazio, Phys. Rev. Lett. 86 , 2699 (2001); P. Facchi and S. Pascazio, La Regola dOro di Fermi , in Quaderni di Fisica Teorica, edited by S. Boffi (Bibliopolis, Napoli, 1999).\n\n- [32] A.G. Kofman and G. Kurizki, Nature (London) 405 , 546 (2000); A.G. Kofman and G. Kurizki, Phys. Rev. Lett. 87 , 270405 (2001); X.-H. Wang, B.-Y. Gu, R. Wang, and H.-Q. Xu, Phys. Rev. Lett. 91 , 113904 (2003); J. Mar- torell, D.W.L. Sprung, W. van Dijk, and J.G. Muga, Phys. Rev. A 79 , 062104 (2009).\n\n- [33] S. Fan, P. R. Villeneuve, J. D. Joannopoulos, and H. A. Haus, Phys. Rev. Lett. 80 , 960 (1998); S. Fan, P. R. Villeneuve, J. D. Joannopoulos, M. J. Khan, C. Manola- tou, and H. A. Haus, Phys. Rev. B 59 , 15882 (1999); P. Chak, S. Pereira, and J. E. Sipe, Phys. Rev. B 73 , 035105 (2006); L.-L. Lin, Z.-Y. Li, and B. Lin, Phys. Rev. B 72 , 165330 (2005).\n\n- [34] Y. Xu, Y. Li, R. K. Lee, and A. Yariv, Phys. Rev. E 62 , 7389 (2000).\n\n- [35] S. Longhi, Phys. Rev. A 74 , 063826 (2006).\n\n- [36] S. Longhi, Eur. Phys. J. B 57 , 45 (2007).\n\n- [37] S. Longhi, Phys. Rev. Lett. 97 , 110402 (2006); P. Biag- oni, G. Della Valle, M. Ornigotti, M. Finazzi, L. Duo, P. Laporta and S. Longhi, Optics Express 16 , 3762 (2008).\n\n- [38] A.E. Miroshnichenko, S. Flach, and Y.S. Kivshar, ”Fano resonances in nanoscale structures”, arXiv:0902.3014v4 (2009).\n\n- [39] G. Sudarshan, in Field Theory, Quantization and Statis-\n\n- [1] C.M. Bender, Rep. Prog. Phys. 70 , 947 (2007).\n\n- [2] P. Dorey, C. Dunning, and R. Tateo, J. Phys.A 40 , R205 (2007).\n\n- [3] A. Mostafazadeh, ”Pseudo-Hermitian Quantum Mechan- ics”, arXiv:0810.5643v2 (2008).\n\n- [4] C.M. Bender and S. Boettcher, Phys. Rev. Lett. 80 , 5243 (1998).\n\n- [5] T. Kato, Perturbation Theroy of Linear Operators (Springer, Berlin, 1966).\n\n- [6] M.V. Berry, Czech. J. Phys. 54 , 1039 (2004).\n\n- [7] R. R.D. Kemp, Can. J. Math. 10 , 447 (1958); M. A. Naimark, Amer. Math. Soc. Transl. 16 , 103 (1960); J. Schwartz, Commun. Pure Appl. Math. 13 , 609 (1960); V. E. Ljance, Amer. Math. Soc. Trans. 60 , 185 (1967).\n\n- [8] B. F. Samsonov, J. Phys. A 38 , L397 (2005).\n\n- [9] A. Mostafazadeh and H. Mehri-Dehnavi, J. Phys. A 42 , 125303 (2009).\n\n- [10] W. D. Heiss, Phys. Rep. 242 , 443 (1994); E. Narevi- cius and N. Moiseyev, Phys. Rev. Lett. 81 , 2221 (1998); C. Dembowski, H.-D. Gr¨ af, H. L. Harney, A. Heine, W. D. Heiss, H. Rehfeld, and A. Richter, Phys. Rev. Lett. 86 , 787 (2001); C. Dembowski, B. Dietz, H.-D. Graf, H. L. Harney, A. Heine, W. D. Heiss, and A. Richter, Phys. Rev. E 69 , 056216 (2004); T. Stehmann, W. D. Heiss, and F. G. Scholtz, J. Phys. A 37 , 7813 (2004); J. Rubinstein, P. Sternberg, and Q. Ma, Phys. Rev. Lett. 99 , 167003 (2007); U. G¨ unther, I. Rotter, and B. Sam- sonov, J. Phys. A 40 , 8815 (2007); P. Cejnar, S. Heinze, and M. Macek, Phys. Rev. Lett. 99 , 100601 (2007); S. Klaiman, U. G¨ unther, and N. Moiseyev, Phys. Rev. Lett. 101 , 080402 (2008); M. M¨ uller and I. Rotter, J. Phys. A 41 , 244 018 (2008).\n\n- [11] A. Mostafazadeh, Phys. Rev. Lett. 102 , 220402 (2009).\n\n- [12] A. Mostafazadeh, J. Phys. A 39 , 13495 (2006).\n\n- [13] Z. Ahmedar, ”Zero width resonance (spectral singularity) in a complex PT-symmetric potential”, Xiv:0908.2876v1 (2009).\n\n- [14] J.G. Muga, J.P. Palao, B. Navarro, and I.L. Egusquiza, Phys. Rep. 395 , 357 (2004).\n\n- [15] A. Mostafazadeh, ”Resonance Phenomenon Related to Spectral Singularities, Complex Barrier Potential, and Resonating Waveguides”, arXiv:0908.1713v1 (2009).\n\n- [16] A. Ruschhaupt, F. Delgado, and J.G. Muga, J. Phys. A 38 , L171 (2005).\n\n- [17] K.O. Friedrichs, Commun. Pure Appl. Math. 1 , 361 (1948).\n\n- [18] U. Fano, Phys. Rev. 124 , 1866 (1961).\n\n- [19] P.W. Anderson, Phys. Rev. 164 , 41 (1961).\n\n- [21] P.L. Knight, M.A. Lauder, and B.J. Dalton, Phys. Rep. 190 , 1 (1990).\n\n- [20] B. Piraux, R. Bhatt, and P.L. Knight, Phys. Rev. A 41 , 6296 (1990).\n\n- [22] C. Cohen-Tannoudji, J. Dupont-Roc, and G. Grynberg, Atom-Photon Interactions (Wiley, New York, 1992).\n\n- [23] A.G. Kofman, G. Kurizki, and B. Sherman, J. Mod. Opt. 41 , 353 (1994)." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.39909198904131016, + "doc_id": "6d5768f00802abfbe409f6e5f6bb718a0706cdad1594d34fe7cf054503a6ff55", + "edit_distance": 0.6979655712050078, + "f1_score": 0.9099236641221374, + "meteor": 0.4301521564606099, + "precision": 0.9581993569131833, + "pred_md": "result of chemotactic behavior [5, 6]. It is therefore remarkable that they can also arise purely from the interplay of density-dependent diffusivity and logistic growth, without explicit reference to the dynamics (or even the presence) of a chemoattractant. This suggests that similar patterns might arise in organisms having no true chemotactic behavior at all. Such patterns could then be the result of local chemical signalling without gradient detection (quorum-sensing, not chemotaxis) or even purely physical interactions (steric hindrance), either of which could in principle produce the required dependence of motility on density. Last, a motility decreasing with density is only one of the many mechanism that could lead to D ' e ( ρ ) < 0 and our analysis would apply equally to all such cases.\n\nThe simplest version of our model allows identification of just two dimensionless parameters that control the entire pattern-forming process. In both homogeneous and centrosymmetric geometries, this gives predictions for how the pattern type depends on interaction strength which are broadly confirmed by experimental data. This suggests that some of the diverse patterns formed by colonies of motile bacteria could have a relatively universal origin.\n\n## Acknowledgments\n\nWe thank Otti Croze for discussions. We acknowledge funding from EPSRC EP/E030173. MEC holds a Royal Society Research Professorship. IP acknowledges the Spanish MICINN for financial support (FIS2008-04386).\n\n## Appendix A\n\nWe show here how to derive the amplitude equation (8). Let us start from the dimensionless equation of motion (6)\n\n\n\nand recall the two conditions for patterning Eq. (7):\n\n\n\nTo analyze precisely the transition, we derive below the steady-state limit of the amplitude equation in 1D. By inspection one sees that the unperturbed steady-state of (A1) is given by u = 1. To characterize the amplitude of the perturbation around u = 1, we introduce u = 1 + w/ Φ so that w evolves with\n\n\n\nWe are interested by the vicinity of the transition where\n\n\n\n7\n\nfor ε > 0 and small. The dynamics now reads\n\n\n\nwhere L = -(1 + ∂ 2 x ) 2 is the linear part of the evolution operator at the transition , 2 ε∂ 2 x w gives an extra linear part due to the perturbation ( ε > 0) and g w ( ) is the non-linear part:\n\n\n\n## 1. Amplitude equation\n\nAs usual with the amplitude equation approach, we expand w in power series of the perturbation ε and study Eq. (A5) order by order. As shown below (Eqs (21-23)), the correct expansion is\n\n\n\nExpanding (A6) to the order ε 3 / 2 and substituting in (A5) yields order by order:\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nEquation (A8) can be easily solved and yields\n\n\n\nThe amplitude of the perturbation we are trying to derive is thus 2 | A | . Equation (A9) can also be solved directly:\n\n\n\nwhere B can de determined from higher order equations (but does not interest us here), and C and D are given by\n\n\n\nas can be checked by direct substitution in Eq. (A9). Equation (A10) does not always have a solution. Indeed, the application of L to any function U 2 cannot yield a multiple of e ix , (since L e ix = 0 and L is linear). The r.h.s. however does contain a multiple of e ix whose prefactor must thus vanish. This gives a condition for the expansion to provide a proper steady-state solution of the problem. Let us summarize the contributions of", + "recall": 0.8662790697674418, + "true_md": "7\n\nfor ε > 0 and small. The dynamics now reads\n\nwhere L = − (1 + ∂ 2 $_{x}$) 2 is the linear part of the evolution operator at the transition , 2 ε∂ 2 $_{x}$w gives an extra linear part due to the perturbation ( ε > 0) and g ( w ) is the non-linear part:\n\nresult of chemotactic behavior [5, 6]. It is therefore re- markable that they can also arise purely from the inter- play of density-dependent diffusivity and logistic growth, without explicit reference to the dynamics (or even the presence) of a chemoattractant. This suggests that sim- ilar patterns might arise in organisms having no true chemotactic behavior at all. Such patterns could then be the result of local chemical signalling without gradi- ent detection (quorum-sensing, not chemotaxis) or even purely physical interactions (steric hindrance), either of which could in principle produce the required dependence of motility on density. Last, a motility decreasing with density is only one of the many mechanism that could lead to D ′ $_{e}$( ρ ) < 0 and our analysis would apply equally to all such cases.\n\nThe simplest version of our model allows identifica- tion of just two dimensionless parameters that control the entire pattern-forming process. In both homogeneous and centrosymmetric geometries, this gives predictions for how the pattern type depends on interaction strength which are broadly confirmed by experimental data. This suggests that some of the diverse patterns formed by colonies of motile bacteria could have a relatively uni- versal origin.\n\nAs usual with the amplitude equation approach, we expand w in power series of the perturbation ε and study Eq. (A5) order by order. As shown below (Eqs (21-23)), the correct expansion is\n\n## 1. Amplitude equation\n\n## Acknowledgments\n\n## Appendix A\n\nWe thank Otti Croze for discussions. We acknowledge funding from EPSRC EP/E030173. MEC holds a Royal Society Research Professorship. IP acknowledges the Spanish MICINN for financial support (FIS2008-04386).\n\nExpanding (A6) to the order ε 3 / 2 and substituting in (A5) yields order by order:\n\nEquation (A8) can be easily solved and yields\n\nThe amplitude of the perturbation we are trying to derive is thus 2 | A | . Equation (A9) can also be solved directly:\n\nWe show here how to derive the amplitude equa- tion (8). Let us start from the dimensionless equation of motion (6)\n\nand recall the two conditions for patterning Eq. (7):\n\nwhere B can de determined from higher order equations (but does not interest us here), and C and D are given by\n\nTo analyze precisely the transition, we derive below the steady-state limit of the amplitude equation in 1D. By inspection one sees that the unperturbed steady-state of (A1) is given by u = 1. To characterize the ampli- tude of the perturbation around u = 1, we introduce u = 1 + w/ Φ so that w evolves with\n\nas can be checked by direct substitution in Eq. (A9). Equation (A10) does not always have a solution. In- deed, the application of L to any function U$_{2}$ cannot yield a multiple of e $^{ix}$, (since L e ix = 0 and L is linear). The r.h.s. however does contain a multiple of e ix whose prefactor must thus vanish. This gives a condition for the expansion to provide a proper steady-state solution of the problem. Let us summarize the contributions of\n\nWe are interested by the vicinity of the transition where\n\n$$˙ w = L w − 2 ε∂ 2 $_{x}$w + g ( w ) (A5)$$\n\n$$g ( w ) = − w 2 Φ − ∂$_{x}$ $^{[}$2(1 + ε ) $^{(}$(1 + w Φ − 1 ) e − 2 w − 1 $^{)}$∂$_{x}$ w ] (A6)$$\n\n$$w = U$_{0}$ε 1 / 2 + U$_{1}$ε + U$_{2}$ε 3 / 2 + . . . (A7)$$\n\n$$− L U$_{0}$ = 0 (A8)$$\n\n$$−L U$_{1}$ = − U 2 0 Φ − 3 − 2Φ Φ − 1 ∂ 2 $_{x}$U 2 0 (A9)$$\n\n$$−L U$_{2}$ = − 2 ∂ 2 $_{x}$U$_{0}$ − 2 U$_{0}$U$_{1}$ Φ − 3 − 2Φ Φ − 1 2 ∂ 2 $_{x}$U$_{0}$ U$_{1}$ (A10) − 4 3 Φ − 2 Φ − 1 ∂ 2 $_{x}$U 3 0$$\n\n$$U$_{0}$ = Ae ix + A $^{∗}$e− ix (A11)$$\n\n$$˙ u = ∇ [ Re − 2Φ $^{u}$(1 − Φ u ) ∇ u ] + u (1 − u ) − ∇ $^{4}$u (A1)$$\n\n$$U$_{1}$ = Be ix + B $^{∗}$e− ix + C + De 2 ix + D $^{∗}$e− 2 ix (A12)$$\n\n$$Φ > 1; R exp( − 2Φ)(Φ − 1) > 2 (A2)$$\n\n$$C = − 2 | A | 2 Φ ; D = A 2 9 (4 3 − 2Φ Φ − 1 − 1 Φ ) (A13)$$\n\n$$˙ w = − ∂$_{x}$ [ Re − $^{2Φ}$(Φ − 1)(1+ w Φ − 1 ) e − 2 $^{w}$∂$_{x}$ w ] − w (1+ w Φ ) − ∂ 4 $_{x}$w (A3)$$\n\n$$Re − $^{2Φ}$(Φ − 1) = 2(1 + ε ) (A4)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.43076509713818384, + "doc_id": "cfe10b648179de41a72712a62825db3b27b8e74faf42b3183a1e6cf6752eb770", + "edit_distance": 0.5515463917525774, + "f1_score": 0.9310344827586208, + "meteor": 0.790013412548799, + "precision": 0.9642857142857143, + "pred_md": "FIG. 2. (color online) XMCD asymmetry versus applied field along the [110] axis at 2 K, for a Fe (2 nm)/(Ga,Mn)As (10 nm) film. (a) Fe L 3 , total electron yield; (b) Mn L 3 , total electron yield; (c) Mn L 3 , fluorescent yield. Black and red points are data for increasing and decreasing fields respectively; lines are to guide the eye.\n\nFIG. 2. (color online) XMCD asymmetry versus applied field along the [110] axis at 2 K, for a Fe (2 nm)/(Ga,Mn)As (10 nm) film. (a) Fe L 3 , total electron yield; (b) Mn L 3 , total electron yield; (c) Mn L 3 , fluorescent yield. Black and red points are data for increasing and decreasing fields respectively; lines are to guide the eye.\n\n/s32\n\n/s32\n\n/s32\n\n5", + "recall": 0.9, + "true_md": "5\n\nFIG. 2. (color online) XMCD asymmetry versus applied field along the [110] axis at 2 K, for a Fe (2 nm)/(Ga,Mn)As (10 nm) film. (a) Fe L$_{3}$ , total electron yield; (b) Mn L$_{3}$ , total electron yield; (c) Mn L$_{3}$ , fluorescent yield. Black and red points are data for increasing and decreasing fields respec- tively; lines are to guide the eye." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7897430477866304, + "doc_id": "de83ac55e033f302660673d8413813fffcafacb630ce28f69d5f40b93a01d5b3", + "edit_distance": 0.41181988742964354, + "f1_score": 0.9144981412639405, + "meteor": 0.8519189259655622, + "precision": 0.9461538461538461, + "pred_md": "arXiv:1001.2546v1 [cond-mat.mtrl-sci] 14 Jan 2010\n\n## Investigation of the Photocurrent in Bulk Heterojunction Solar Cells\n\nM. Limpinsel, A. Wagenpfahl, M. Mingebach, and C. Deibel a\n\nExperimental Physics VI, Julius-Maximilians-University of Wurzburg, D-97074 Wurzburg\n\n## V. Dyakonov\n\nExperimental Physics VI, Julius-Maximilians-University of Wurzburg, D-97074 Wurzburg and Functional Materials for Energy Technology, Bavarian Centre for Applied Energy Research (ZAE Bayern), D-97074 Wurzburg\n\n(Dated: July 30, 2018)\n\nWe investigated the photocurrent in poly(3-hexylthiophene-2,5-diyl) (P3HT):[6,6]-phenyl-C61 butyric acid methyl ester (PCBM) solar cells by applying a pulsed measurement technique. For annealed samples, a point of optimal symmetry (POS) with a corresponding voltage V POS of 0.52-0.64 V could be determined. Based on macroscopic simulations and results from capacitance-voltage measurements, we identify this voltage with flat band conditions in the bulk of the cell, but not the built-in voltage as proposed by [Ooi et al., J. Mater. Chem. 18 (2008) 1644]. We calculated the field dependent polaron pair dissociation after Onsager-Braun and the voltage dependent extraction of charge carriers after Sokel and Hughes with respect to this point of symmetry. Our analysis allows to explain the experimental photocurrent in both forward and reverse directions. Also, we observed a voltage-independent offset of the photocurrent. As this offset is crucial for the device performance, we investigated its dependence on cathode material and thermal treatment. From our considerations we gain new insight into the photocurrent's voltage dependence and the limitations of device efficiency.\n\nPACS numbers: 71.23.An, 72.20.Jv, 72.80.Le, 73.50.Pz, 73.63.Bd Keywords: organic semiconductors; polymers; photovoltaic effect; photocurrent; polaron pair dissociation\n\n## I. INTRODUCTION\n\nOrganic solar cells have improved greatly in the last years, reaching 5-6 % power conversion efficiency (PCE) today. 1 However, the Shockley diode equation cannot explain the voltage dependent photocurrent in organic solar cells based on a physical model. 2 The detailed process leading from photoinduced polaron pairs to extracted charge carriers and external photocurrent needs better understanding to push development of these devices systematically. 3 The first step in this process is singlet exciton formation upon absorption of a photon, usually on the polymer. Then, the exciton has to diffuse to a polymer-fullerene interface within its lifetime, where, due to the high electron affinity of the fullerene, a polaron pair is created via ultrafast charge-transfer. 4 These polaron pairs are still Coulomb-bound due to a low dielectric constant e r of the organic material system (typically 3-4), and have to be dissociated to free polarons. Provided the free polarons arrive at their respective electrodes, the last step is charge extraction.\n\nIn this paper, we investigate the symmetry and voltage dependence of the photocurrent, and compare this to a model that takes field dependent polaron pair dissociation and voltage dependent charge extraction into account. The photocurrent J Ph, defined as the difference of illuminated and dark current, J light -J dark , can experimentally be accessed using pulsed illumination (inset in Figure 1). This is necessary to avoid a major overestimation due to device heating. 5\n\nWe find the photocurrent of annealed P3HT:PCBM solar cells to have a point of optimal symmetry (POS). The photocurrent shows a point symmetry with respect to POS (see Figure 1), and the corresponding voltage V POS is in the range\n\na deibel@physik.uni-wuerzburg.de\n\nof 0.52-0.64 V. While these values agree with results of Ooi et al. 5 , our interpretation differs. We identify this voltage as the quasi flat band case-with flat bands in the bulk of the solar cell-which is well below the built-in voltage. Accordingly, our considerations lead to new insights into the origin of the photocurrent.\n\nAs shown in Figure 1, the photocurrent is composed of two contributions. The first is voltage-dependent and symmetric with respect to POS. The second contribution is a voltageindependent offset. This constant offset is usually negative, thereby increasing the short-circuit current J SC and PCE. As the magnitude of this offset is crucial for device performance, we investigated its dependence on thermal treatment, cathode material and active layer thickness in detail.\n\nIn order to describe the voltage dependence of J Ph, we use a combination of Braun-Onsager 6,7 theory and charge extraction as calculated by Sokel and Hughes. 8 This combination was proposed by Mihailetchi et al. 9 and could for the first time explain the experimental photocurrent in reverse direction. However, they calculated effective voltage and field with respect to the physically ill-defined voltage V 0, at which J Ph = 0. As we will show, this is correct only in the special case where V 0 coincides with V POS. In general, contact effects result in a lower value of V POS. Consequently, we consider voltage and electric field relative to V POS instead of V 0. Calculating polaron pair dissociation and charge extraction with respect to the point of symmetry now allows to describe the experimental photocurrent for solar cells with different electrode material. Using a pulsed measurement technique also makes the photocurrent in forward direction accessible, and shows that the model can describe the data in both directions.", + "recall": 0.8848920863309353, + "true_md": "# Investigation of the Photocurrent in Bulk Heterojunction Solar Cells\n\nM. Limpinsel, A. Wagenpfahl, M. Mingebach, and C. Deibel a\n\nExperimental Physics VI, Julius-Maximilians-University of W¨urzburg, D-97074 W¨urzburg\n\nV. Dyakonov\n\nExperimental Physics VI, Julius-Maximilians-University of W¨urzburg, D-97074 W¨urzburg and Functional Materials for Energy Technology, Bavarian Centre for Applied Energy Research (ZAE Bayern), D-97074 W¨urzburg\n\n(Dated: July 30, 2018)\n\nWe investigated the photocurrent in poly(3-hexylthiophene-2,5-diyl) (P3HT):[6,6]-phenyl-C$_{61}$ butyric acid methyl ester (PCBM) solar cells by applying a pulsed measurement technique. For annealed samples, a point of optimal symmetry (POS) with a corresponding voltage V$_{POS}$ of 0.52–0.64 V could be determined. Based on macroscopic simulations and results from capacitance–voltage measurements, we identify this voltage with flat band conditions in the bulk of the cell, but not the built-in voltage as proposed by [Ooi et al., J. Mater. Chem. 18 (2008) 1644]. We calculated the field dependent polaron pair dissociation after Onsager–Braun and the voltage dependent extraction of charge carriers after Sokel and Hughes with respect to this point of symmetry. Our analysis allows to explain the experimental photocurrent in both forward and reverse directions. Also, we observed a voltage–independent offset of the photocurrent. As this offset is crucial for the device performance, we investigated its dependence on cathode material and thermal treatment. From our considerations we gain new insight into the photocurrent‘s voltage dependence and the limitations of device efficiency.\n\nPACS numbers: 71.23.An, 72.20.Jv, 72.80.Le, 73.50.Pz, 73.63.Bd Keywords: organic semiconductors; polymers; photovoltaic effect; photocurrent; polaron pair dissociation\n\nOrganic solar cells have improved greatly in the last years, reaching 5–6 % power conversion efficiency (PCE) today. 1 However, the Shockley diode equation cannot explain the voltage dependent photocurrent in organic solar cells based on a physical model. 2 The detailed process leading from pho- toinduced polaron pairs to extracted charge carriers and ex- ternal photocurrent needs better understanding to push devel- opment of these devices systematically. 3 The first step in this process is singlet exciton formation upon absorption of a pho- ton, usually on the polymer. Then, the exciton has to diffuse to a polymer-fullerene interface within its lifetime, where, due to the high electron affinity of the fullerene, a polaron pair is created via ultrafast charge-transfer. 4 These polaron pairs are still Coulomb-bound due to a low dielectric constant e$_{r}$ of the organic material system (typically 3–4), and have to be disso- ciated to free polarons. Provided the free polarons arrive at their respective electrodes, the last step is charge extraction.\n\nIn this paper, we investigate the symmetry and voltage de- pendence of the photocurrent, and compare this to a model that takes field dependent polaron pair dissociation and volt- age dependent charge extraction into account. The photocur- rent J$_{Ph}$ , defined as the difference of illuminated and dark cur- rent, J$_{light}$ − J$_{dark}$ , can experimentally be accessed using pulsed illumination (inset in Figure 1). This is necessary to avoid a major overestimation due to device heating. 5\n\nWe find the photocurrent of annealed P3HT:PCBM solar cells to have a point of optimal symmetry (POS). The pho- tocurrent shows a point symmetry with respect to POS (see Figure 1), and the corresponding voltage V$_{POS}$ is in the range\n\na deibel@physik.uni-wuerzburg.de\n\nIn order to describe the voltage dependence of J$_{Ph}$ , we use a combination of Braun–Onsager 6,7 theory and charge extrac- tion as calculated by Sokel and Hughes. 8 This combination was proposed by Mihailetchi et al. 9 and could for the first time explain the experimental photocurrent in reverse direc- tion. However, they calculated effective voltage and field with respect to the physically ill-defined voltage V$_{0}$ , at which J$_{Ph}$ = 0. As we will show, this is correct only in the special case where V$_{0}$ coincides with V$_{POS}$ . In general, contact effects result in a lower value of V$_{POS}$ . Consequently, we consider voltage and electric field relative to V$_{POS}$ instead of V$_{0}$ . Cal- culating polaron pair dissociation and charge extraction with respect to the point of symmetry now allows to describe the experimental photocurrent for solar cells with different elec- trode material. Using a pulsed measurement technique also makes the photocurrent in forward direction accessible, and shows that the model can describe the data in both directions.\n\nAs shown in Figure 1, the photocurrent is composed of two contributions. The first is voltage-dependent and symmetric with respect to POS. The second contribution is a voltage- independent offset. This constant offset is usually negative, thereby increasing the short-circuit current J$_{SC}$ and PCE. As the magnitude of this offset is crucial for device performance, we investigated its dependence on thermal treatment, cathode material and active layer thickness in detail.\n\nof 0.52–0.64 V. While these values agree with results of Ooi et al.$^{5}$, our interpretation differs. We identify this voltage as the quasi flat band case–with flat bands in the bulk of the so- lar cell–which is well below the built-in voltage. Accordingly, our considerations lead to new insights into the origin of the photocurrent.\n\n## I. INTRODUCTION\n\narXiv:1001.2546v1 [cond-mat.mtrl-sci] 14 Jan 2010" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6626011312031714, + "doc_id": "59b989ed2a1ef6b1ca2a1ea1b93b6d487196dd7bdf76fe5fc1ee6d338f69b923", + "edit_distance": 0.7519430051813472, + "f1_score": 0.9355860612460402, + "meteor": 0.5230066375499492, + "precision": 0.9506437768240343, + "pred_md": "consequence of the voltage drops at the contacts (Figure 2). Low injection barriers result in a high band bending in vicinity of the electrodes and reduced electric field in the bulk of the cell, corresponding to a seemingly greater d . The approximation E = V eff / d is therefore flawed.\n\nThe saturated, voltage-dependent part of the photocurrent J Ph,max is typically 5-8 mA cm -2 , with higher values for thicker cells. The dielectric constant e r was set to 3.5 and temperature T to 310 K (slightly above room temperature to account for heating under illumination). The µ t f product of spatially averaged mobility µ and PP lifetime (with respect to the ground state) t f = 1 / k f was set to 1-3 10 · -14 m 2 V 1 and -the PP radius r PP to 1.8-2.0 nm.\n\nUsing this parameter set, the dissociation efficiency of polaron pairs in the bulk can be calculated to be 40-60 % at zero field. However, extraction is the limiting factor at low effective voltages. Only at higher effective voltages, the field dependence of polaron pair dissociation determines the shape of the photocurrent.\n\n## IV. CONCLUSIONS\n\nBy use of a pulsed measurement technique, we find a point of symmetry for the photocurrent at 0.52-0.64 V in P3HT:PCBM organic solar cells, which agrees with results from capacitance-voltage measurements. Based on our macroscopic simulation, we identify this voltage as the point of flat bands in the bulk of the solar cell, the quasi flat band case, well below the built-in potential. We find a voltage-\n\n- 1 S. H. Park, A. Roy, S. Beaupre, S. Cho, N. Coates, J. S. Moon, D. Moses, M. Leclerc, K. Lee, and A. J. Heeger, Nature Photonics 3 , 297 (2009).\n- 2 P. Schilinsky, C. Waldauf, J. Hauch, and C. J. Brabec, J. Appl. Phys. 95 , 2816 (2004).\n- 3 C. Deibel, Phys. Stat. Sol. A 206 , 2731 (2009).\n- 4 N. S. Sariciftci, L. Smilowitz, A. J. Heeger, and F. Wudl, Science 258 , 1474 (1992).\n- 5 Z. E. Ooi, R. Jin, J. Huang, Y. F. Loo, A. Sellinger, and J. C. deMello, Journal of Materials Chemistry 18 , 1644 (2008).\n- 6 C. L. Braun, J. Chem. Phys. 80 , 4157 (1984).\n- 7 L. Onsager, Phys. Rev. 54 , 554 (1938).\n- 8 R. Sokel and R. C. Hughes, J. Appl. Phys. 53 , 7414 (1982).\n- 9 V. D. Mihailetchi, L. J. A. Koster, J. C. Hummelen, and P. W. M. Blom, Phys. Rev. Lett. 93 , 216601 (2004).\n- 10 V. Shrotriya, G. Li, Y. Yao, T. Moriarty, K. Emery, and Y. Yang, Adv. Funct. Mater. 16 , 2016 (2006).\n- 11 S. Selberherr, Analysis and simulation of semiconductor devices (Springer, 1984).\n- 12 C. Deibel, A. Wagenpfahl, and V. Dyakonov, phys. stat. sol. (RRL) 2 4 , 175 (2008).\n- 13 A. Baumann, J. Lorrmann, C. Deibel, and V. Dyakonov, Appl. Phys. Lett. 93 , 252104 (2008).\n\n6\n\nindependent offset of the photocurrent, which is crucial for high J SC, which depends both on thermal annealing conditions and cathode material. We also propose a possible origin of this offset with the band-bending close to the contacts. Active layer thickness has an influence on this offset, but surprisingly little impact on the shape of J Ph.\n\nA model including polaron pair dissociation, based on Braun-Onsager theory, and extraction, based on the work by Sokel & Hughes, can describe our data for different solar cells with a narrow range of parameters. The electric field in the bulk of the cell is greatly reduced by the injection barriers. At zero electric field, polaron pair dissociation efficiency is 40-60 %.\n\nSince the maximum power point is close to V POS, where the effective voltage is zero, the photocurrent under operating conditions is largely determined by the voltage independent offset. For best device performance it is necessary to maximize this constant contribution from the contact regions and simultaneously enhance polaron pair dissociation and polaron extraction in the bulk.\n\n## ACKNOWLEDGMENTS\n\nThe authors thank the Bundesministerium fur Bildung und Forschung for financial support in the framework of the MOPS project (contract no. 13N9867). V.D.'s work at the ZAE Bayern is financed by the Bavarian Ministry of Economic Affairs, Infrastructure, Transport and Technology.\n\n- 14 D. Rauh, C. Deibel, and V. Dyakonov, unpublished.\n- 15 P. Langevin, Ann. Chim. Phys. 28 , 433 (1903).\n- 16 S. M. Sze, Physics of semiconductor devices, Second edition (John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 1981).\n- 17 M. Kemerink, J. M. Kramer, H. H. P. Gommans, and R. A. J. Janssen, Appl. Phys. Lett. 88 , 192108 (2006).\n- 18 P. Blood and J. W. Orton, The Electrical Characterization of Semiconductors: Majority Carriers and Electron States (Techniques of Physics) (Academic Press, 1992).\n- 19 F. Yakuphanoglu and B. F. Senkal, Polym. Adv. Technol. 19 , 1882 (2008).\n- 20 J. Bisquert, G. Garcia-Belmonte, A. Munar, M. Sessolo, A. Soriano, and H. J. Bolink, Chem. Phys. Lett. 465 , 57 (2008).\n- 21 C. Deibel, T. Strobel, and V. Dyakonov, Phys. Rev. Lett. 103 , 036402 (2009).\n- 22 A. Pivrikas, R. Osterbacka, G. Juˇ ska, K. Arlauskas, and H. Stubb, Synth. Met. 155 , 242 (2005).\n- 23 C. Deibel, A. Baumann, and V. Dyakonov, Appl. Phys. Lett. 93 , 163303 (2008).\n- 24 C. Deibel, A. Wagenpfahl, and V. Dyakonov, Phys. Rev. B 80 , 075203 (2009).", + "recall": 0.920997920997921, + "true_md": "independent offset of the photocurrent, which is crucial for high J$_{SC}$ , which depends both on thermal annealing conditions and cathode material. We also propose a possible origin of this offset with the band-bending close to the contacts. Active layer thickness has an influence on this offset, but surprisingly little impact on the shape of J$_{Ph}$ .\n\n6\n\nA model including polaron pair dissociation, based on Braun–Onsager theory, and extraction, based on the work by Sokel & Hughes, can describe our data for different solar cells with a narrow range of parameters. The electric field in the bulk of the cell is greatly reduced by the injection barriers. At zero electric field, polaron pair dissociation efficiency is 40–60 %.\n\nSince the maximum power point is close to V$_{POS}$ , where the effective voltage is zero, the photocurrent under operating conditions is largely determined by the voltage independent offset. For best device performance it is necessary to maxi- mize this constant contribution from the contact regions and simultaneously enhance polaron pair dissociation and polaron extraction in the bulk.\n\nUsing this parameter set, the dissociation efficiency of po- laron pairs in the bulk can be calculated to be 40–60 % at zero field. However, extraction is the limiting factor at low effective voltages. Only at higher effective voltages, the field dependence of polaron pair dissociation determines the shape of the photocurrent.\n\nThe saturated, voltage-dependent part of the photocurrent J$_{Ph,max}$ is typically 5–8 mA cm − $^{2}$, with higher values for thicker cells. The dielectric constant e$_{r}$ was set to 3.5 and temperature T to 310 K (slightly above room temperature to account for heating under illumination). The µ$_{t}$$\\_{f}$ product of spatially averaged mobility µ and PP lifetime (with respect to the ground state) $\\_{t$_{f}$}$= 1 / k$\\_{f}$ was set to 1–3 · 10 − $^{14}$m2 V − 1 and the PP radius r$\\_{PP}$ to 1.8–2.0 nm.\n\nconsequence of the voltage drops at the contacts (Figure 2). Low injection barriers result in a high band bending in vicin- ity of the electrodes and reduced electric field in the bulk of the cell, corresponding to a seemingly greater d . The approx- imation E = V$_{eff}$ / d is therefore flawed.\n\nBy use of a pulsed measurement technique, we find a point of symmetry for the photocurrent at 0.52–0.64 V in P3HT:PCBM organic solar cells, which agrees with re- sults from capacitance–voltage measurements. Based on our macroscopic simulation, we identify this voltage as the point of flat bands in the bulk of the solar cell, the quasi flat band case, well below the built-in potential. We find a voltage-\n\nThe authors thank the Bundesministerium f¨ ur Bildung und Forschung for financial support in the framework of the MOPS project (contract no. 13N9867). V.D.’s work at the ZAE Bayern is financed by the Bavarian Ministry of Eco- nomic Affairs, Infrastructure, Transport and Technology.\n\n## ACKNOWLEDGMENTS\n\n## IV. CONCLUSIONS\n\n- (RRL) 2 4 , 175 (2008). 13 A. Baumann, J. Lorrmann, C. Deibel, and V. Dyakonov, Appl. Phys. Lett. 93 , 252104 (2008).\n\n- (Springer, 1984). 12 C. Deibel, A. Wagenpfahl, and V. Dyakonov, phys. stat. sol. (RRL) 2 4 , 175 (2008). 13\n\n- Adv. Funct. Mater. 16 , 2016 (2006). 11 S. Selberherr, Analysis and simulation of semiconductor devices (Springer, 1984). 12\n\n- Blom, Phys. Rev. Lett. 93 , 216601 (2004). 10 V. Shrotriya, G. Li, Y. Yao, T. Moriarty, K. Emery, and Y. Yang, Adv. Funct. Mater. 16 , 2016 (2006). 11\n\n- 163303 (2008). 24 C. Deibel, A. Wagenpfahl, and V. Dyakonov, Phys. Rev. B 80 , 075203 (2009).\n\n- Synth. Met. 155 , 242 (2005). 23 C. Deibel, A. Baumann, and V. Dyakonov, Appl. Phys. Lett. 93 , 163303 (2008). 24\n\n- 036402 (2009). 22 A. Pivrikas, R. ¨ Osterbacka, G. Juˇska, K. Arlauskas, and H. Stubb, Synth. Met. 155 , 242 (2005). 23\n\n- ano, and H. J. Bolink, Chem. Phys. Lett. 465 , 57 (2008). 21 C. Deibel, T. Strobel, and V. Dyakonov, Phys. Rev. Lett. 103 , 036402 (2009). 22 ¨\n\n- (2008). 20 J. Bisquert, G. Garcia-Belmonte, A. Munar, M. Sessolo, A. Sori- ano, and H. J. Bolink, Chem. Phys. Lett. 465 , 57 (2008). 21\n\n- niques of Physics) (Academic Press, 1992). 19 F. Yakuphanoglu and B. F. Senkal, Polym. Adv. Technol. 19 , 1882 (2008). 20\n\n- R. Sokel and R. C. Hughes, J. Appl. Phys. 53 , 7414 (1982). 9 V. D. Mihailetchi, L. J. A. Koster, J. C. Hummelen, and P. W. M. Blom, Phys. Rev. Lett. 93 , 216601 (2004). 10\n\n- L. Onsager, Phys. Rev. 54 , 554 (1938). 8 R. Sokel and R. C. Hughes, J. Appl. Phys. 53 , 7414 (1982). 9\n\n- C. L. Braun, J. Chem. Phys. 80 , 4157 (1984). 7 L. Onsager, Phys. Rev. 54 , 554 (1938). 8\n\n- deMello, Journal of Materials Chemistry 18 , 1644 (2008). 6 C. L. Braun, J. Chem. Phys. 80 , 4157 (1984). 7\n\n- 258 , 1474 (1992). 5 Z. E. Ooi, R. Jin, J. Huang, Y. F. Loo, A. Sellinger, and J. C. deMello, Journal of Materials Chemistry 18 , 1644 (2008). 6\n\n- Janssen, Appl. Phys. Lett. 88 , 192108 (2006). 18 P. Blood and J. W. Orton, The Electrical Characterization of Semiconductors: Majority Carriers and Electron States (Tech- niques of Physics) (Academic Press, 1992). 19\n\n- C. Deibel, Phys. Stat. Sol. A 206 , 2731 (2009). 4 N. S. Sariciftci, L. Smilowitz, A. J. Heeger, and F. Wudl, Science 258 , 1474 (1992). 5\n\n- Phys. 95 , 2816 (2004). 3 C. Deibel, Phys. Stat. Sol. A 206 , 2731 (2009). 4\n\n- 3 , 297 (2009). 2 P. Schilinsky, C. Waldauf, J. Hauch, and C. J. Brabec, J. Appl. Phys. 95 , 2816 (2004). 3\n\n- 1 S. H. Park, A. Roy, S. Beaupre, S. Cho, N. Coates, J. S. Moon, D. Moses, M. Leclerc, K. Lee, and A. J. Heeger, Nature Photonics 3 , 297 (2009). 2\n\n- (John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 1981). 17 M. Kemerink, J. M. Kramer, H. H. P. Gommans, and R. A. J. Janssen, Appl. Phys. Lett. 88 , 192108 (2006). 18\n\n- P. Langevin, Ann. Chim. Phys. 28 , 433 (1903). 16 S. M. Sze, Physics of semiconductor devices, Second edition (John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 1981). 17\n\n- D. Rauh, C. Deibel, and V. Dyakonov, unpublished. 15 P. Langevin, Ann. Chim. Phys. 28 , 433 (1903). 16\n\n- 14 D. Rauh, C. Deibel, and V. Dyakonov, unpublished. 15" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.1469000651032277, + "doc_id": "8f0428d05b3299f5c4eb7d72fa356784177ae4f3f8f91204fbf2a4e505567c4f", + "edit_distance": 0.738928939237899, + "f1_score": 0.9034267912772584, + "meteor": 0.3297055797499561, + "precision": 0.9602649006622517, + "pred_md": "arXiv:1001.1469v3 [hep-ph] 7 Apr 2010\n\n## Neutrino mixing in matter\n\nS. H. Chiu, 1, ∗ T. K. Kuo, 2, † and Lu-Xin Liu 2, 3, ‡\n\n1 Physics Group, CGE, Chang Gung University, Kwei-Shan 333, Taiwan\n\n2 Department of Physics, Purdue University, West Lafayette, IN 47907, USA 3 National Institute for Theoretical Physics, Department of Physics and Centre for Theoretical Physics, University of the Witwatersrand, Wits, 2050, South Africa\n\nThree-neutrino mixing in matter is studied through a set of evolution equations which are based on a rephasing invariant parametrization. Making use of the known properties of measured neutrino parameters, analytic, approximate solutions are obtained. Their accuracy is confirmed by comparison with numerical integration of these equations. The results, when expressed in the elements squared of the mixing matrix, exhibit striking patterns as the matter density varies.\n\nPACS numbers: 14.60.Pq, 14.60.Lm, 13.15.+g\n\nIt is well-established that neutrino mixing is modified by the presence of matter [1]. Their effect has been used in the analyses of solar neutrinos, and is expected to impact those of the supernova neutrinos, when and if they become available. Closer to home, there is a plethora of long baseline experiments either in operation or in the planning stage. For these studies, it is essential to include the matter effects in order to understand neutrino mixing at the fundamental level.\n\nIn the literature, effort has been devoted to solving problems along this line [2]. However, the process involves the complication of the cubic eigenvalue problems, and the results are usually far from transparent for a clear extraction of the physical implications.\n\nIn this work we derive a set of evolution equations for the neutrino parameters, using a rephasing invariant parametrization which was developed for three-flavor quark mixing. The same formalism can be used in the neutrino sector, as long as it is used for lepton number conserving processes, such as in neutrino oscillation, which will be studied here. It will be shown that the coupled equations have simple, analytic, solutions which, when compared to the complete numerical solutions, are quite accurate.\n\nFor the neutrino mixing (PMNS) matrix ( V ), we adopt the parametrization introduced earlier [3]. Briefly, without loss of generality, one can demand det V = +1. There are then a set of rephasing invariants\n\n\n\nwhere their common imaginary part can be identified with the Jarlskog invariant J [4]. Their real parts were defined as\n\n\n\n∗ Electronic address: schiu@mail.cgu.edu.tw\n\n† Electronic address: tkkuo@purdue.edu\n\n‡ Electronic address: Luxin.Liu@wits.ac.za\n\nThese variables are bounded by ± 1: - ≤ 1 ( x , y i j ) ≤ +1, with y j ≤ x i for any ( i, j ). They satisfy two constraints\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nIn addition, it is found that\n\n\n\nThe ( x, y ) parameters are related to | V ij | 2 by\n\n\n\nOne can readily obtain the parameters ( x, y ) from W by computing its cofactors, which form the matrix w with w W T = (det W I ) , and is given by\n\n\n\nPhysical measurables can always be expressed in terms of ( x, y ). For instance, the ν µ → ν e transition probability is given by\n\n\n\nwhere D i = neutrino mass squared, L is the length of baseline, E is the neutrino energy, and\n\n", + "recall": 0.8529411764705882, + "true_md": "# Neutrino mixing in matter\n\nS. H. Chiu, $^{1,}$∗ T. K. Kuo, $^{2,}$† and Lu-Xin Liu $^{2, 3,}$‡\n\n$^{1}$Physics Group, CGE, Chang Gung University, Kwei-Shan 333, Taiwan\n\n$^{2}$Department of Physics, Purdue University, West Lafayette, IN 47907, USA\n\n$^{3}$National Institute for Theoretical Physics, Department of Physics and Centre for Theoretical Physics, University of the Witwatersrand, Wits, 2050, South Africa\n\nThree-neutrino mixing in matter is studied through a set of evolution equations which are based on a rephasing invariant parametrization. Making use of the known properties of measured neutrino parameters, analytic, approximate solutions are obtained. Their accuracy is confirmed by compar- ison with numerical integration of these equations. The results, when expressed in the elements squared of the mixing matrix, exhibit striking patterns as the matter density varies.\n\nPACS numbers: 14.60.Pq, 14.60.Lm, 13.15.+g\n\nIt is well-established that neutrino mixing is modified by the presence of matter [1]. Their effect has been used in the analyses of solar neutrinos, and is expected to im- pact those of the supernova neutrinos, when and if they become available. Closer to home, there is a plethora of long baseline experiments either in operation or in the planning stage. For these studies, it is essential to in- clude the matter effects in order to understand neutrino mixing at the fundamental level.\n\nIn the literature, effort has been devoted to solving problems along this line [2]. However, the process in- volves the complication of the cubic eigenvalue problems, and the results are usually far from transparent for a clear extraction of the physical implications.\n\nIn this work we derive a set of evolution equations for the neutrino parameters, using a rephasing invari- ant parametrization which was developed for three-flavor quark mixing. The same formalism can be used in the neutrino sector, as long as it is used for lepton num- ber conserving processes, such as in neutrino oscillation, which will be studied here. It will be shown that the coupled equations have simple, analytic, solutions which, when compared to the complete numerical solutions, are quite accurate.\n\nFor the neutrino mixing (PMNS) matrix ( V ), we adopt the parametrization introduced earlier [3]. Briefly, with- out loss of generality, one can demand det V = +1. There are then a set of rephasing invariants\n\nwhere their common imaginary part can be identified with the Jarlskog invariant J [4]. Their real parts were defined as\n\nwhere D$_{i}$ = neutrino mass squared, L is the length of baseline, E is the neutrino energy, and\n\nPhysical measurables can always be expressed in terms of ( x, y ). For instance, the ν$_{µ}$ → ν$_{e}$ transition probability is given by\n\nOne can readily obtain the parameters ( x, y ) from W by computing its cofactors, which form the matrix w with w $^{T}$W = (det W ) I , and is given by\n\nThe ( x, y ) parameters are related to | V$_{ij}$ | 2 by\n\nIn addition, it is found that\n\nThese variables are bounded by ± 1: − 1 ≤ ( x$_{i}$, y$_{j}$ ) ≤ +1, with y$_{j}$ ≤ x$_{i}$ for any ( i, j ). They satisfy two constraints\n\n$^{∗}$Electronic address: schiu@mail.cgu.edu.tw\n\n$^{†}$Electronic address: tkkuo@purdue.edu\n\n$^{‡}$Electronic address: Luxin.Liu@wits.ac.za\n\n$$( R$_{123}$, R$_{231}$, R$_{312}$ ; R$_{132}$, R$_{213}$, R$_{321}$ ) = ( x$_{1}$, x$_{2}$, x$_{3}$ ; y$_{1}$, y$_{2}$, y$_{3}$ ) . (2)$$\n\n$$Γ$_{ijk}$ = V$_{1}$$_{i}$V$_{2}$$_{j}$V$_{3}$$_{k}$ = R$_{ijk}$ − iJ, (1)$$\n\narXiv:1001.1469v3 [hep-ph] 7 Apr 2010\n\n$$det V = ( x$_{1}$ + x$_{2}$ + x$_{3}$ ) − ( y$_{1}$ + y$_{2}$ + y$_{3}$ ) = 1 , (3) x$_{1}$x$_{2}$ + x$_{2}$x$_{3}$ + x$_{3}$x$_{1}$ ) − ( y$_{1}$y$_{2}$ + y$_{2}$y$_{3}$ + y$_{3}$y$_{1}$ ) = 0 . (4)$$\n\n$$− ( x$_{1}$x$_{2}$ + x$_{2}$x$_{3}$ + x$_{3}$x$_{1}$ ) − ( y$_{1}$y$_{2}$ + y$_{2}$y$_{3}$ + y$_{3}$y$_{1}$ ) = 0 . (4)$$\n\n$$J 2 = x$_{1}$x$_{2}$x$_{3}$ − y$_{1}$y$_{2}$y$_{3}$. (5)$$\n\n$$W = [ | V$_{ij}$ | $^{2}$] =   x$_{1}$ − y$_{1}$ x$_{2}$ − y$_{2}$ x$_{3}$ − y$_{3}$ x$_{3}$ y$_{2}$ x$_{1}$ y$_{3}$ x$_{2}$ y$_{1}$ x$_{2}$ − y$_{3}$ x$_{3}$ − y$_{1}$ x$_{1}$ − y$_{2}$   . (6)$$\n\n$$w =   x$_{1}$ + y$_{1}$ x$_{2}$ + y$_{2}$ x$_{3}$ + y$_{3}$ x$_{3}$ + y$_{2}$ x$_{1}$ + y$_{3}$ x$_{2}$ + y$_{1}$ x$_{2}$ + y$_{3}$ x$_{3}$ + y$_{1}$ x$_{1}$ + y$_{2}$   . (7)$$\n\n$$P ( ν$_{µ}$ → ν$_{e}$ ) = − 4[ F µe 21 sin $^{2}$( D$_{2}$ − D$_{1}$ 4 E/L ) + F µe 31 sin $^{2}$( D$_{3}$ − D$_{1}$ 4 E/L ) + F µe 32 sin $^{2}$( D$_{3}$ − D$_{2}$ 4 E/L )] + 8 J sin( D$_{2}$ − D$_{1}$ 4 E/L ) sin( D$_{3}$ − D$_{1}$ 4 E/L ) sin( D$_{3}$ − D$_{2}$ 4 E/L ) , (8)$$\n\n$$x$_{2}$x$_{3}$ + x$_{1}$y$_{2}$ − y$_{1}$y$_{2}$ − y$_{2}$y$_{3}$ ≡ F µe $_{21}$, − x$_{1}$x$_{3}$ − x$_{2}$x$_{3}$ + x$_{3}$y$_{1}$ + y$_{2}$y$_{3}$ F µe $_{31}$, x$_{1}$x$_{3}$ + x$_{2}$y$_{3}$ − y$_{1}$y$_{3}$ − y$_{2}$y$_{3}$ ≡ F µe $_{32}$. (9)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.32433489757982326, + "doc_id": "a35c87e47a2acd350c325d5d91119db02937c431980dbb16860658ae1317b369", + "edit_distance": 0.7254073627036813, + "f1_score": 0.8747967479674795, + "meteor": 0.38853314483777657, + "precision": 0.9275862068965517, + "pred_md": "J cluster limit. So only the singlet sector remains in low energy.\n\nThe singlet sector is then treated as a pseudo-spin-1/2 Hilbert space. From now on we denote the pseudo-spin1/2 operators as T = (1 2) / /vector τ , with /vector τ the Pauli matrices. It is convenient to choose the following basis of the pseudo-spin\n\n\n\nwhere ω = e 2 πi/ 3 is the complex cubic root of unity, | ↓↓↑↑〉 and other states on the right-hand-side(RHS) are basis states of the four-spin system, in terms of S z quantum numbers of physical spins 1 , . . . , 4 in sequential order. This pseudo-spin representation has been used by Harris et al. to study magnetic ordering in pyrochlore antiferromagnets 21 .\n\nWe now consider the effect of Heisenberg-type interactions S j · S k inside the physical singlet sector. Note that since any S j · S k within the cluster commutes with the cluster Hamiltonian H cluster (2), their action do not mix physical spin singlet states with states of other total physical spin. This property is also true for the spinchirality operator used later. So the pseudo-spin Hamiltonian constructed below will be exact low energy Hamiltonian, without truncation errors in typical perturbation series expansions.\n\n/negationslash\n\nIt is simpler to consider the permutation operators P jk ≡ 2 S j · S k + 1 2, / which just exchange the states of the two physical spin-1/2 moments j and k ( j = k ). As an example we consider the action of P 34 ,\n\n\n\nand similarly P 34 | τ z = - 〉 1 = | τ z = +1 . 〉 Therefore P 34 is just τ x in the physical singlet sector. A complete list of all permutation operators is given in TABLE I. We can choose the following representation of τ x and τ y ,\n\n\n\nMany other representations are possible as well, because several physical spin interactions may correspond to the same pseudo-spin interaction in the physical singlet sector, and we will take advantage of this later.\n\nFor τ z we can use τ z = -iτ x τ y , where i is the imaginary unit,\n\n\n\nTABLE I: Correspondence between physical spin operators and pseudo-spin operators in the physical spin singlet sector of the four antiferromagnetically coupled physical spins. P jk = 2 S j · S k +1 2 are permutation operators, / χ jk/lscript = S j · ( S k × S /lscript ) are spin-chirality operators. Note that several physical spin operators may correspond to the same pseudo-spin operator.\n\n-\n\n-\n\nHowever there is another simpler representation of τ z , by the spin-chirality operator χ jk/lscript = S j · ( S k × S /lscript ). Explicit calculation shows that the effect of S 2 · ( S 3 × S 4 ) is -( √ 3 4) / τ z in the physical singlet sector. This can also be proved by using the commutation relation [ S 2 · S 3 , S 2 · S 4 ] = i S 2 · ( S 3 × S 4 ). A complete list of all chirality operators is given in TABLE I. Therefore we can choose another representation of τ z ,\n\n\n\nThe above representations of τ x,y,z are all invariant under global spin rotation of the physical spins.\n\nWith the machinery of equations (4), (5), and (6), it will be straightforward to construct various pseudo-spin1/2 Hamiltonians on various lattices, of the Kitaev variety and beyond, as the exact low energy effective Hamiltonian of certain spin-1/2 models with spin-rotation symmetry. In these constructions a pseudo-spin lattice site actually represents a cluster of four spin-1/2 moments.\n\n## III. REALIZATION OF THE KITAEV MODEL.\n\nIn this Section we will use directly the results of the previous Section to write down a Hamiltonian whose low energy sector is described by the Kitaev model. The Hamiltonian will be constructed on the physical spin lattice illustrated in FIG. 2. In this Section we will use j, k to label four-spin clusters (pseudo-spin-1/2 sites), the physical spins in cluster j are labeled as S j 1 , . . . , S j 4 .\n\nApply the mappings developed in Section II, we have the desired Hamiltonian in short notation,\n\n\n\nwhere j, k label the honeycomb lattice sites thus the fourspin clusters, H cluster is given by (2), τ x,y,z should be replaced by the corresponding physical spin operators in (4) and (5) or (6), or some other equivalent representations of personal preference.\n\n3", + "recall": 0.8276923076923077, + "true_md": "3\n\nTABLE I: Correspondence between physical spin operators and pseudo-spin operators in the physical spin singlet sector of the four antiferromagnetically coupled physical spins. P$_{jk}$ = 2 S j · S$_{k}$ +1 / 2 are permutation operators, χ$_{jkℓ}$ = S j · ( $^{S$\\_{k}$}$×S$_{ℓ}$ ) are spin-chirality operators. Note that several physical spin operators may correspond to the same pseudo-spin operator.\n\nJ$_{cluster}$ limit. So only the singlet sector remains in low energy.\n\nThe singlet sector is then treated as a pseudo-spin-1/2 Hilbert space. From now on we denote the pseudo-spin- 1/2 operators as T = (1 / 2) ⃗ τ , with ⃗ τ the Pauli matri- ces. It is convenient to choose the following basis of the pseudo-spin\n\n$$| τ z = ± 1 〉 = 1 √$_{6}$ ( | ↓↓↑↑〉 + ω − τ $^{z}$| ↓↑↓↑〉 + ω τ $^{z}$| ↓↑↑↓〉 + | ↑↑↓↓〉 + ω − τ $^{z}$| ↑↓↑↓〉 + ω τ $^{z}$| ↑↓↓↑〉 ) (3)$$\n\n$$τ z = − χ$_{234}$/ $_{(}$√$_{3}$$_{/}$$_{4) =}$ − (4 $_{/}$√$_{3)}$$_{S}$$_{2}$ · ( S$_{3}$ × S$_{4}$ ) (6)$$\n\n$$P$_{34}$ | τ z = − 1 〉 = 1 √$_{6}$ ( | ↓↓↑↑〉 + ω | ↓↑↑↓〉 + ω $^{2}$| ↓↑↓↑〉 + | ↑↑↓↓〉 + ω | ↑↓↓↑〉 + ω $^{2}$| ↑↓↑↓〉 ) = | τ z = +1 〉$$\n\n$$τ x = P$_{12}$ = 2 S$_{1}$ · S$_{2}$ + 1 / 2 τ y = ( P$_{13}$ − P$_{14}$ ) $_{/}$√$_{3 = (2}$$_{/}$ √$_{3)}$$_{S}$$_{1}$ · ( S$_{3}$ − S$_{4}$ ) (4)$$\n\n$$H = ∑ cluster H$_{cluster}$ − ∑ x $^{−}$links J$_{x}$τ x j τ x k − ∑ y $^{−}$links J$_{y}$τ y j τ y k − ∑ z $^{−}$links J$_{z}$τ z j τ z k (7)$$\n\n$$τ z = − i (2 $_{/}$√$_{3)(2}$$_{S}$$_{1}$ · S$_{2}$ + 1 / 2) S$_{1}$ · ( S$_{3}$ − S$_{4}$ ) (5)$$\n\nwhere ω = e 2 πi/ 3 is the complex cubic root of unity, | ↓↓↑↑〉 and other states on the right-hand-side(RHS) are basis states of the four-spin system, in terms of S z quan- tum numbers of physical spins 1 , . . . , 4 in sequential or- der. This pseudo-spin representation has been used by Harris et al. to study magnetic ordering in pyrochlore antiferromagnets $^{21}$.\n\nHowever there is another simpler representation of τ $^{z}$, by the spin-chirality operator χ$_{jkℓ}$ = S$_{j}$ · ( S$_{k}$ × S$_{ℓ}$ ). Ex- plicit calculation shows that the effect of S$_{2}$ · ( S$_{3}$ × S$_{4}$ ) is − $_{(}$√$_{3}$$\\_{/}$$_{4)}$$\\_{τ}$ z in the physical singlet sector. This can also be proved by using the commutation relation [ S$\\_{2}$ · S$\\_{3}$ , S$\\_{2}$ · S$\\_{4}$ ] = i S$\\_{2}$ · ( S$\\_{3}$ × S$\\_{4}$ ). A complete list of all chirality operators is given in TABLE I. Therefore we can choose another representation of τ $^{z}$,\n\nWe now consider the effect of Heisenberg-type inter- actions S$_{j}$ · S$_{k}$ inside the physical singlet sector. Note that since any S$_{j}$ · S$_{k}$ within the cluster commutes with the cluster Hamiltonian H$_{cluster}$ (2), their action do not mix physical spin singlet states with states of other total physical spin. This property is also true for the spin- chirality operator used later. So the pseudo-spin Hamil- tonian constructed below will be exact low energy Hamil- tonian, without truncation errors in typical perturbation series expansions.\n\nThe above representations of τ x,y,z are all invariant under global spin rotation of the physical spins.\n\nWith the machinery of equations (4), (5), and (6), it will be straightforward to construct various pseudo-spin- 1/2 Hamiltonians on various lattices, of the Kitaev vari- ety and beyond, as the exact low energy effective Hamil- tonian of certain spin-1/2 models with spin-rotation sym- metry. In these constructions a pseudo-spin lattice site actually represents a cluster of four spin-1/2 moments.\n\nIt is simpler to consider the permutation operators P$_{jk}$ ≡ 2 S$_{j}$ · S$_{k}$ + 1 / 2, which just exchange the states of the two physical spin-1/2 moments j and k ( j ̸ = k ). As an example we consider the action of P$_{34}$ ,\n\nIn this Section we will use directly the results of the previous Section to write down a Hamiltonian whose low energy sector is described by the Kitaev model. The Hamiltonian will be constructed on the physical spin lat- tice illustrated in FIG. 2. In this Section we will use j, k to label four-spin clusters (pseudo-spin-1/2 sites), the physical spins in cluster j are labeled as S$_{j}$$\\_{1}$ , . . . , S$\\_{j}$$_{4}$ .\n\nApply the mappings developed in Section II, we have the desired Hamiltonian in short notation,\n\nand similarly P$_{34}$ | τ z = − 1 〉 = | τ z = +1 〉 . Therefore P$_{34}$ is just τ x in the physical singlet sector. A complete list of all permutation operators is given in TABLE I. We can choose the following representation of τ x and τ $^{y}$,\n\n## III. REALIZATION OF THE KITAEV MODEL.\n\nwhere j, k label the honeycomb lattice sites thus the four- spin clusters, H$_{cluster}$ is given by (2), τ x,y,z should be replaced by the corresponding physical spin operators in (4) and (5) or (6), or some other equivalent representa- tions of personal preference.\n\nMany other representations are possible as well, because several physical spin interactions may correspond to the same pseudo-spin interaction in the physical singlet sec- tor, and we will take advantage of this later. z z\n\ntor, and we will take advantage of this later. For τ z we can use τ z = − iτ $^{x}$τ$^{y}$, where i is the imagi- nary unit," + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5916494675702744, + "doc_id": "b4c2de76e1d480cce60797cfd31478b3e49aa8d7db9c0704476a8389512bb00b", + "edit_distance": 0.6671961874503575, + "f1_score": 0.8830313014827017, + "meteor": 0.49178415761074706, + "precision": 0.9273356401384083, + "pred_md": "Here we quoted the string breaking distance R br which was determined by the lattice simulations [16], Eq. (6). The condition (12) is satisfied at\n\n\n\nfor u and d quarks, respectively.\n\nNotice that the magnitude of the magnetic field expected to be created at noncentral heavy-ion collisions at ALICE/LHC (1) is even greater than the thresholds (13), so that effects of the transverse quark localization may in principle be accessible in the LHC experiment. The localization effects should be much less visible at the RHIC experiment due to the much weaker magnetic fields (1).\n\nWhat is the effect of the strong magnetic field on the process of the QCD string breaking? The breaking occurs due to the light qq ¯ pair creation. In the absence of the magnetic field the created light quark (antiquark) gets attracted to the heavy antiquark (quark) and the long string disappears completely, Fig. 1. However, in a sufficiently strong magnetic field B the distance between the light quark and antiquark in the B -transverse plane is limited by the B -dependent magnetic length l q , Eq. (11). Therefore if the string is located in the B -transverse plane, then the created qq ¯ pair cannot destroy the whole string, because the light quark and antiquark are bounded together by the magnetic field at the mutual separation l q , Fig. 2.\n\nFIG. 2. The (partial) breaking of the QCD string in the background magnetic field. The distance between created quark q and antiquark ¯ is restricted by the magnetic length (11). q The axis of the magnetic field is perpendicular to the plane.\n\nFIG. 2. The (partial) breaking of the QCD string in the background magnetic field. The distance between created quark q and antiquark ¯ is restricted by the magnetic length (11). q The axis of the magnetic field is perpendicular to the plane.\n\nIn principle, the distance between the light quark and the light antiquark can be increased in the transverse directions by jumping to higher Landau levels. This is, however, an energetically costly process because of the presence of the magnetic gap (9). Therefore the creation of the qq ¯ pair from the vacuum may only remove a piece of a sufficiently long QCD string, Fig. (2). Moreover, due to the (1 + 1) dimensional character of the motion\n\n3\n\nof the light quarks in the external magnetic field, the qq ¯ pair creation leads to appearance of two nonlocal (elongated) heavy-light mesons, Fig. 2. On the contrary, in the absence of the background magnetic field the string breaking leads to formation of the tightly-bound heavylight mesons, Fig. 1.\n\nAn increase in the magnetic field causes a decrease in the length (11) of the string piece that can be 'removed' by the pair creation. Thus, as the magnetic field increases the system gets less gain in energy due to the string breaking. Intuitively it is clear that at certain strength of the magnetic field the pair creation become energetically unfavorable.\n\nLet us estimate the critical magnetic field which makes the string breaking impossible. Consider a static distantly separated quark-antiquark pair QQ ¯ in the B -transverse plane (i.e., with R ≡ R ⊥ and R ‖ = 0). The energy of the unbroken state is\n\n\n\nwhere the string tension is, generally, a function of the strength of the magnetic field B .\n\nThe emerging qq ¯ pair removes a segment of the string of the length l q ( B ), and the energy of the broken state is\n\n\n\nwhere m q is the mass of the light quark.\n\nThe condition for the string breaking not to occur is given by the inequality E broken /greaterorequalslant E string . Using Eqs. (14) and (15), one gets\n\n\n\nThe equality in (16) defines the lowest possible magnetic field ('critical no-breaking field') for which the string breaking does not occur.\n\nLet us consider the condition (16) at zero temperature. The dynamical masses of q = u, d quarks in the QCD vacuum without a background magnetic field are\n\n\n\nThe external magnetic field of the practical scale (1) makes negligible contribution to the quarks' masses (a significant contribution to the masses of the quarks is expected at the strength eB /greaterorsimilar (10 TeV) , 2 Ref. [12]). Assuming that the critical no-breaking magnetic field is lower than the crossover strength (2), and taking into account the fact that at the crossover all observables are smooth, we ignore an essentially nonperturbative B -dependence of the string tension. We set the string tension to its phenomenological value at B = 0,\n\n\n\nUsing Eqs. (16), (17) and (18) one finds that the QCD string fails to break via creation of uu ¯ and dd ¯ pairs if the magnetic fields reach the following values, respectively\n\n", + "recall": 0.8427672955974843, + "true_md": "Here we quoted the string breaking distance R$_{br}$ which was determined by the lattice simulations [16], Eq. (6). The condition (12) is satisfied at\n\nfor u and d quarks, respectively.\n\nNotice that the magnitude of the magnetic field ex- pected to be created at noncentral heavy-ion collisions at ALICE/LHC (1) is even greater than the thresholds (13), so that effects of the transverse quark localization may in principle be accessible in the LHC experiment. The lo- calization effects should be much less visible at the RHIC experiment due to the much weaker magnetic fields (1).\n\nWhat is the effect of the strong magnetic field on the process of the QCD string breaking? The breaking occurs due to the light q ¯ q pair creation. In the absence of the magnetic field the created light quark (an- tiquark) gets attracted to the heavy antiquark (quark) and the long string disappears completely, Fig. 1. How- ever, in a sufficiently strong magnetic field B the dis- tance between the light quark and antiquark in the B - transverse plane is limited by the B –dependent magnetic length l$_{q}$ , Eq. (11). Therefore if the string is located in the B -transverse plane, then the created q ¯ q pair cannot destroy the whole string, because the light quark and an- tiquark are bounded together by the magnetic field at the mutual separation l$_{q}$ , Fig. 2.\n\nIn principle, the distance between the light quark and the light antiquark can be increased in the transverse di- rections by jumping to higher Landau levels. This is, however, an energetically costly process because of the presence of the magnetic gap (9). Therefore the creation of the q ¯ q pair from the vacuum may only remove a piece of a sufficiently long QCD string, Fig. (2). Moreover, due to the (1 + 1) dimensional character of the motion\n\n≈ Using Eqs. (16), (17) and (18) one finds that the QCD string fails to break via creation of u ¯ u and d ¯ pairs if the magnetic fields reach the following values, respectively\n\n≃ The external magnetic field of the practical scale (1) makes negligible contribution to the quarks’ masses (a significant contribution to the masses of the quarks is expected at the strength eB ≳ (10 TeV) $^{2}$, Ref. [12]). Assuming that the critical no-breaking magnetic field is lower than the crossover strength (2), and taking into account the fact that at the crossover all observables are smooth, we ignore an essentially nonperturbative B - dependence of the string tension. We set the string ten- sion to its phenomenological value at B = 0,\n\nLet us consider the condition (16) at zero temperature. The dynamical masses of q = u, d quarks in the QCD vacuum without a background magnetic field are\n\nThe equality in (16) defines the lowest possible magnetic field (“critical no-breaking field”) for which the string breaking does not occur.\n\nThe condition for the string breaking not to occur is given by the inequality E$_{broken}$ ⩾ E$_{string}$ . Using Eqs. (14) and (15), one gets\n\n− where m$_{q}$ is the mass of the light quark.\n\nThe emerging q ¯ q pair removes a segment of the string of the length l$_{q}$ ( B ), and the energy of the broken state is\n\nwhere the string tension is, generally, a function of the strength of the magnetic field B .\n\nLet us estimate the critical magnetic field which makes the string breaking impossible. Consider a static dis- tantly separated quark-antiquark pair Q ¯ Q in the B - transverse plane (i.e., with R ≡ R$_{⊥}$ and R$_{‖}$ = 0). The energy of the unbroken state is\n\nAn increase in the magnetic field causes a decrease in the length (11) of the string piece that can be “re- moved” by the pair creation. Thus, as the magnetic field increases the system gets less gain in energy due to the string breaking. Intuitively it is clear that at certain strength of the magnetic field the pair creation become energetically unfavorable.\n\nof the light quarks in the external magnetic field, the q ¯ q pair creation leads to appearance of two nonlocal (elon- gated) heavy-light mesons, Fig. 2. On the contrary, in the absence of the background magnetic field the string breaking leads to formation of the tightly-bound heavy- light mesons, Fig. 1.\n\n3\n\n$$eB$_{u}$ ≃ 6 m 2 $_{π}$, eB$_{d}$ = 12 m 2 $_{π}$, (13)$$\n\n$$E$_{string}$ = 2 m$_{Q}$ + σ ( B ) R , (14)$$\n\n$$E$_{broken}$ = 2 m$_{Q}$ + 2 m$_{q}$ ( B ) + σ ( B )[ R − l$_{q}$ ( B )] , (15) where m$_{q}$ is the mass of the light quark.$$\n\n$$2 m$_{q}$ ( B ) ⩾ σ ( B ) l$_{q}$ ( B ) [no string breaking] . (16)$$\n\n$$m dyn q ≃ 300 MeV . (17) The external magnetic field of the practical scale (1)$$\n\n$$σ ( B ) ≈ σ ( B = 0) = (440 MeV) $^{2}$. (18) Using Eqs. (16), (17) and (18) one finds that the QCD$$\n\n$$eB ( u ) cr ≃ 8 m 2 $_{π}$, eB ( d ) cr = 16 m 2 $_{π}$. (19)$$\n\nFIG. 2. The (partial) breaking of the QCD string in the back- ground magnetic field. The distance between created quark q and antiquark ¯ q is restricted by the magnetic length (11). The axis of the magnetic field is perpendicular to the plane." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.16899674675969625, + "doc_id": "9f6455519a8507f4e26484db5285a0ecb331944c55fcd540ba1b60509ea375de", + "edit_distance": 0.7992831541218638, + "f1_score": 0.7874720357941833, + "meteor": 0.2827272631100109, + "precision": 0.9411764705882353, + "pred_md": "10\n\nTABLE I: Quantum numbers of the fields.\n\nend, we have to set the sources equal to the following values:\n\n\n\nIt is exactly here that we have committed a mistake. In previous papers, we have forgotten to introduce the doublet ( T ai µ , R ai µ ), and therefore, the intended physical limit did not exactly reproduce the original action (A1). In the original article [4], these two sources were also not introduced. When taking the physical limit, an extra term was generated, which was then removed by doing a (nonlocal) shift in the ω field. Here, we have circumvented this unnecessary shift by introducing the doublet ( T ai µ , R ai µ ).\n\n## 2. The Ward identities\n\nFollowing the procedure of algebraic renormalization [41], we should try to find all possible Ward identities. Before doing this, in order to be able to write the Slavnov-Taylor identity, we first have to couple all nonlinear BRST transformations to a new source. Looking at (A4), we see that only A a µ and c a transform nonlinearly under the BRST s . Therefore, we add the following term to the action Σ GZ ,\n\n\n\nwith K a µ and L a two new sources which shall be put to zero at the end,\n\n\n\nThese sources are invariant under the BRST transformation,\n\n\n\nThe new action is therefore given by\n\n\n\nThe next step is now to find all the Ward identities obeyed by the action Σ ' GZ . We have enlisted all the identities below:\n\nTABLE II: Quantum numbers of the sources.\n\n1. The Slavnov-Taylor identity is given by\n\n\n\nwith\n\n\n\n2. The U f ( ) invariance is given by\n\n\n\n\n\nBy means of the diagonal operator Q f = U ii , the i -valued fields and sources turn out to possess an additional quantum number. One can find all quantum numbers in Table I and Table II.\n\n## 3. The Landau gauge condition reads\n\n\n\n4. The antighost equation yields\n\n\n\n5. The linearly broken local constraints yield\n\n", + "recall": 0.676923076923077, + "true_md": "TABLE II: Quantum numbers of the sources.\n\nTABLE I: Quantum numbers of the fields.\n\n10\n\n- 1. The Slavnov-Taylor identity is given by\n\n- 2. The U ( f ) invariance is given by\n\n- 3. The Landau gauge condition reads\n\n- 4. The antighost equation yields\n\n- 5. The linearly broken local constraints yield\n\n$$δ Σ ′ GZ δc a + ∂$_{µ}$ δ Σ ′ GZ δK a µ = 0 . (A16)$$\n\n$$δ Σ ′ GZ δb a = ∂$_{µ}$A a µ . (A15)$$\n\n$$U$_{ij}$ Σ ′ GZ = 0 , (A14) U$_{ij}$ = ∫ d $^{d}$x ( ϕ a i δ δϕ a j − ϕ a j δ δϕ a i + ω a i δ δω a j − ω a j δ δω a i − M aj µ δ δM ai µ − U aj µ δ δU ai µ + N ai µ δ δN aj µ + V ai µ δ δV aj µ + R aj µ δ δR ai µ + T aj µ δ δT ai µ ) .$$\n\n$$S (Σ $^{′}$$_{GZ}$) = ∫ d $^{4}$x ( δ Σ ′ GZ δK a µ δ Σ ′ GZ δA a µ + δ Σ ′ GZ δL a δ Σ ′ GZ δc a + b $_{a}$δ Σ ′ GZ δc a + ϕ a i δ Σ ′ GZ δω a i + ω a i δ Σ ′ GZ δϕ a i + M ai µ δ Σ ′ GZ δU ai µ + N ai µ δ Σ ′ GZ δV ai µ + R ai µ δ Σ ′ GZ δT ai µ ) .$$\n\n$$S (Σ $^{′}$$_{GZ}$) = 0 , (A13)$$\n\n$$S$_{ext}$ = ∫ d $^{4}$x ( − K a $_{µ}$( D$_{µ}$c ) a + 1 2 gL $^{a}$f $^{abc}$c$^{b}$cc ) , (A9)$$\n\n$$sK a µ = 0 , sL a = 0 . (A11)$$\n\n$$Σ ′ GZ = Σ$_{GZ}$ + S$_{ext}$ . (A12)$$\n\n$$δ Σ ′ GZ δϕ a i + ∂$_{µ}$ δ Σ ′ GZ δM ai µ + gf$_{dba}$T di µ δ Σ ′ GZ δK bi µ = gf $^{abc}$Ab $_{µ}$V ci µ , δ Σ ′ GZ δω a i + ∂$_{µ}$ δ Σ ′ GZ δN ai µ − gf $^{abc}$ωb i δ Σ ′ GZ δb c = gf $^{abc}$Ab $_{µ}$U ci µ . (A17)$$\n\nend, we have to set the sources equal to the following values:\n\nwith\n\n∣ ∣ ∣ It is exactly here that we have committed a mistake. In previous papers, we have forgotten to introduce the dou- blet ( T ai µ , R ai µ ), and therefore, the intended physical limit did not exactly reproduce the original action (A1). In the original article [4], these two sources were also not intro- duced. When taking the physical limit, an extra term was generated, which was then removed by doing a (non- local) shift in the ω field. Here, we have circumvented this unnecessary shift by introducing the doublet ( T ai µ , R ai µ ).\n\nwith K a µ and L a two new sources which shall be put to zero at the end,\n\nFollowing the procedure of algebraic renormalization [41], we should try to find all possible Ward identi- ties. Before doing this, in order to be able to write the Slavnov-Taylor identity, we first have to couple all non- linear BRST transformations to a new source. Looking at (A4), we see that only A a µ and c a transform nonlin- early under the BRST s . Therefore, we add the following term to the action Σ$_{GZ}$,\n\n∣ These sources are invariant under the BRST transforma- tion,\n\nThe new action is therefore given by\n\nThe next step is now to find all the Ward identities obeyed by the action Σ $^{′}$$\\_{GZ}$. We have enlisted all the iden- tities below:\n\nBy means of the diagonal operator Q$_{f}$ = U$_{ii}$ , the i -valued fields and sources turn out to possess an additional quantum number. One can find all quan- tum numbers in Table I and Table II.\n\n$$K a µ ∣ phys = L $^{a}$|$_{phys}$ = 0 . (A10) These sources are invariant under the BRST transforma-$$\n\n$$U ai µ ∣ phys = N ai µ ∣ phys = T ai µ ∣ phys = 0 , M ab µν ∣ phys = V ab µν ∣ phys = − R ab µν ∣ phys = γ $^{2}$δ $^{ab}$δ$_{µν}$ . (A8) It is exactly here that we have committed a mistake. In$$\n\n## 2. The Ward identities" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6849169140932991, + "doc_id": "8fc35a58029c909c99165ccdb9a20cbf20f3ffdc30e4d2f21b4285bf4a7e0bdc", + "edit_distance": 0.3666044776119403, + "f1_score": 0.9392265193370164, + "meteor": 0.83899247822428, + "precision": 0.9622641509433962, + "pred_md": "FIG. 8: The on-axis field component B y ( x = 0 , y = 0 , z ) for the monopole doublet in the case that a = 2 5 cm and . g = 1 Tesla-(cm) . The coordinate 2 z is given in centimeters.\n\nFIG. 8: The on-axis field component B y ( x = 0 , y = 0 , z ) for the monopole doublet in the case that a = 2 5 cm and . g = 1 Tesla-(cm) . The coordinate 2 z is given in centimeters.\n\nFIG. 9: The field component B x on the line ρ = 1 2, / φ = π/ 4, z ∈ -∞ ∞ [ , ] for the monopole doublet in the case that a = 2 5 . cm and g = 1 Tesla-(cm) . 2 The coordinate z is given in centimeters.\n\nFIG. 9: The field component B x on the line ρ = 1 2, / φ = π/ 4, z ∈ -∞ ∞ [ , ] for the monopole doublet in the case that a = 2 5 . cm and g = 1 Tesla-(cm) . 2 The coordinate z is given in centimeters.\n\nFIG. 10: The field component B z on the line ρ = 1 2, / φ = π/ 4, z ∈ -∞ ∞ [ , ] for the monopole doublet in the case that a = 2 5 cm and . g = 1 Tesla-(cm) . The coordinate 2 z is given in centimeters.\n\nFIG. 10: The field component B z on the line ρ = 1 2, / φ = π/ 4, z ∈ -∞ ∞ [ , ] for the monopole doublet in the case that a = 2 5 cm and . g = 1 Tesla-(cm) . The coordinate 2 z is given in centimeters.\n\n11\n\nnomial series (11-12) representing the field in terms of the functions (60) is given by the condition √ x 2 + y 2 < √ z 2 + a 2 . In particular, the domain of convergence is a region of circular cross-section whose radius increases as we move longitudinally away from the location of the monopoles at z = 0.\n\nSuppose we wish to calculate a transfer map through 7 th order. Then, as shown in the Appendix, to do so requires knowledge of the C [ n ] m,α ( z ) with ( m + n ) ≤ 7 when m = 0 or m is odd, and knowledge of the C [ n ] m,α ( z ) with ( m + n ) ≤ 8 when m is even.\n\nGraphs of a selected few of these functions, for the monopole doublet in the case that a = 2 5 cm and . g = 1 Tesla-(cm) , are shown in Figs. 2 11 through 13. In these plots z has units of centimeters. Evidently the C [0] m,s become ever more highly peaked with increasing m . Fortunately, when working through some fixed degree, we need fewer derivatives with increasing m . Note that we expect that the function C [ n ] m,s ( z ) should have n zeroes. This is indeed the case.\n\n## B. Circular Cylinder Results\n\nThe procedure discussed in Section III A has been benchmarked using the field of a monopole doublet in the case that a = 2 5 cm and . g = 1 Tesla-(cm) . 2 We set up a regular grid in x , y , z space, where we let each variable range over the intervals x ∈ [ -4 4 . , 4 4] . with spacing h x = 0 1, . y ∈ [ -2 4 . , 2 4] . with h y = 0 1, . and z ∈ [ -300 300] with , h z = 0 125 (in units of cm). . The known values of the three components of the field are computed using (59) at each grid point. Consider a cylinder of radius R = 2 cm and length 600 cm. We use bicubic interpolation to interpolate B at these grid points onto 49 selected angular points on the cylinder, for each of the 4801 selected values of z . The angular integration in (17) is performed using a Riemann sum with N = 49. (This is necessary to ensure sufficient convergence of the angular integrals to within 10 -4 .) We evaluate the Fourier transform at 401 values of k in the range [ -K ,K c c ] with K c = 20, using a spline-based Fourier transform algorithm [3, 4]. We use these same points in k space to evaluate the inverse Fourier transform, providing a set of numerically determined functions C [ n ] m,α ( z ).\n\nA comparison between the exact on-axis gradients (60) and those obtained from grid data is provided in Figs. 11-13 for the functions C [0] 1 ,s , C [6] 1 ,s , and C [0] 7 ,s . Evidently the agreement is excellent. Fig. 14 illustrates the difference between the on-axis gradient C [0] 1 ,s as obtained from grid data and the exact on-axis gradient obtained from (60) with m = 1. The maximum error attained relative to peak is 1 7 . × 10 -4 . Further detailed study shows that numerical results agree with exact results to within relative errors less than a few parts in 10 4 for all the relevant C [ n ] m,α ( z ). By using exact data on the cylinder", + "recall": 0.9172661870503597, + "true_md": "FIG. 9: The field component B$_{x}$ on the line ρ = 1 / 2, φ = π/ 4, z ∈ [ −∞ , ∞ ] for the monopole doublet in the case that a = 2 . 5 cm and g = 1 Tesla-(cm) $^{2}$. The coordinate z is given in centimeters.\n\nFIG. 10: The field component B$_{z}$ on the line ρ = 1 / 2, φ = π/ 4, z ∈ [ −∞ , ∞ ] for the monopole doublet in the case that a = 2 . 5 cm and g = 1 Tesla-(cm) $^{2}$. The coordinate z is given in centimeters.\n\nFIG. 8: The on-axis field component B$_{y}$ ( x = 0 , y = 0 , z ) for the monopole doublet in the case that a = 2 . 5 cm and g = 1 Tesla-(cm) $^{2}$. The coordinate z is given in centimeters.\n\nnomial series (11-12) representing the field in terms of the functions (60) is given by the condition $^{√}$x 2 + y 2 < √ z 2 + a $^{2}$. In particular, the domain of convergence is a region of circular cross-section whose radius increases as we move longitudinally away from the location of the monopoles at z = 0.\n\nSuppose we wish to calculate a transfer map through 7 th order. Then, as shown in the Appendix, to do so requires knowledge of the C [ n ] $_{m,α}$( z ) with ( m + n ) ≤ 7 when m = 0 or m is odd, and knowledge of the C [ n ] $_{m,α}$( z ) with ( m + n ) ≤ 8 when m is even.\n\nGraphs of a selected few of these functions, for the monopole doublet in the case that a = 2 . 5 cm and g = 1 Tesla-(cm) $^{2}$, are shown in Figs. 11 through 13. In these plots z has units of centimeters. Evidently the C [0] m,s be- come ever more highly peaked with increasing m . For- tunately, when working through some fixed degree, we need fewer derivatives with increasing m . Note that we expect that the function C [ n ] $_{m,s}$( z ) should have n zeroes. This is indeed the case.\n\nThe procedure discussed in Section III A has been benchmarked using the field of a monopole doublet in the case that a = 2 . 5 cm and g = 1 Tesla-(cm) $^{2}$. We set up a regular grid in x , y , z space, where we let each variable range over the intervals x ∈ [ − 4 . 4 , 4 . 4] with spacing h$_{x}$ = 0 . 1, y ∈ [ − 2 . 4 , 2 . 4] with h$_{y}$ = 0 . 1, and z ∈ [ − 300 , 300] with h$_{z}$ = 0 . 125 (in units of cm). The known values of the three components of the field are computed using (59) at each grid point. Consider a cylinder of radius R = 2 cm and length 600 cm. We use bicubic interpolation to interpolate B at these grid points onto 49 selected angular points on the cylinder, for each of the 4801 selected values of z . The angular in- tegration in (17) is performed using a Riemann sum with N = 49. (This is necessary to ensure sufficient conver- gence of the angular integrals to within 10 − $^{4}$.) We evalu- ate the Fourier transform at 401 values of k in the range [ − K$_{c}$,K$_{c}$ ] with K$_{c}$ = 20, using a spline-based Fourier transform algorithm [3, 4]. We use these same points in k space to evaluate the inverse Fourier transform, provid- ing a set of numerically determined functions C [ n ] $_{m,α}$( z ).\n\nA comparison between the exact on-axis gradients (60) and those obtained from grid data is provided in Figs. 11-13 for the functions C [0] 1 $_{,s}$, C [6] 1 $_{,s}$, and C [0] 7 $_{,s}$. Evidently the agreement is excellent. Fig. 14 illustrates the differ- ence between the on-axis gradient C [0] 1 ,s as obtained from grid data and the exact on-axis gradient obtained from (60) with m = 1. The maximum error attained rela- tive to peak is 1 . 7 × 10 − $^{4}$. Further detailed study shows that numerical results agree with exact results to within relative errors less than a few parts in 10 4 for all the relevant C [ n ] $_{m,α}$( z ). By using exact data on the cylinder\n\n## B. Circular Cylinder Results\n\n11" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.666888351743113, + "doc_id": "d9918e08eee85ca905d4bef309461e28d88692b463a04476217f8c5934f8d31a", + "edit_distance": 0.4177671068427371, + "f1_score": 0.8892794376098418, + "meteor": 0.6480901894704355, + "precision": 0.9133574007220217, + "pred_md": "The expansion in a power series of the Lambert W function up to first order is just the identity [2] and hence,\n\n\n\nWhere we used relation (B1) in order to obtain the last\n\n- [1] See for instance scholar.google.com .\n- [2] R.M. Corless, G.H. Gonnet, G.H. Hare, D.E.G. Jeffrey, and D.E. Knuth, 'On the Lambert W function', Adv. in Comp. Mathematics 5 , 329-359 (1996).\n- [3] T.C. Scott, A.Lchow, D. Bressanini, and J.D. Morgan u III, 'The Nodal surfaces of Helium atom eigenfunctions', Phys. Rev. A, 75 . 060101-060104 (2007).\n- [4] R.D.H. Warburton and J. Wang, 'Analysis of asymptotic motion with air resistance using the Lambert W function', Am. J. Phys. 72 , 1404-1407 (2004).\n- [5] E. Packel and D. Yuen, 'Projectile motion with resistance and the Lambert function', Coll. Math. J. 35 (5), 337-350 (2004).\n- [6] J.L. Fern'ndez-Chapou, A.L. Salas-Brito, and C.A. Vara gas, 'An elliptic property of parabolic trajectories', Am. J. Phys. 72 ,1109-1109 (2004).\n- [7] W.D. MacMillan, Theoretical Mechanics: Static and the Dynamics of a Particle (McGraw-Hill, New York and London, 1927). Reprinted in (Dover, New York, 1958), pp. 249-254.\n- [8] G.B. Thomas, M.B. Weir, J. Hass, F.R. Giordano. Calculus . 11th Ed. (Addisson-Wesley, 2004).\n- [9] G.B. Arfken. Mathematical Methods for physicist . 5th Ed.\n\n7\n\nline. Using trigonometric identity sec 2 α -tan 2 α = 1 and Eq. (B1) we obtain that\n\n\n\nUsing this result in the expression of ˜ we obtain the r desired result, Eq. (15).\n\n(Academic Press, 2000).\n\n- [10] E. Kreyzig. 'Principal, Normal, Osculating Circle' in Diffential Geometry . (Dover,N.Y., 1991). E.W. Wiesstein 'Curvature' From MathWorld. http://mathworld.wolfram.com/Curvature.html .\n- [11] S.M. Steward, 'A little introductory and intermediate physics with the Lambert function', Proc. of the 16th Biennial Congress of the Australian Institute of Physics. M. Colla ed. Vol 2. pp 194-197. Australian Institute of Physics. Parville, VIC (2005).\n- [12] S.M. Steward, 'Characteristics of the trajectory of a projectile in a linear resisting medium and the Lambert W function', Australian Inst. of Physics. 17th. National Congress 2006. Paper No. WC0035.(2006).\n- [13] In Ref. 12, the author comment that for ε = 1 we obtain the special value α skew = sin -1 (1 /φ ) with φ = (1 + √ 5) / 2, the golden ratio. However, the solution that appears in the article is not longer valid for ε = 1. If the solution corresponds to another real root of the equation this special value corresponds to the case when the initial speed is equal to the limit speed b/g . This makes much more intriguing this fact.", + "recall": 0.8664383561643836, + "true_md": "The expansion in a power series of the Lambert W function up to first order is just the identity [2] and hence,\n\nline. Using trigonometric identity sec 2 $^{α}$− tan 2 α = 1 and Eq. (B1) we obtain that\n\nWhere we used relation (B1) in order to obtain the last\n\nUsing this result in the expression of ˜ r we obtain the desired result, Eq. (15).\n\n7\n\n$$˜ r ( θ$_{m}$ ) = − 1 ε 2 sin θ $_{m}$W $^{(}$− ε $^{2}$tan θ$_{m}$f ( α )) ≈ 1 ε 2 sin θ $^{$_{m}$(}$− ε $^{2}$tan θ$_{m}$f ( α )) . = sin α cos α cos θ m . = 2 sin θ cos 2 α cos 2 θ $_{m}$. (B2)$$\n\n$$cos 2 θ$_{m}$ cos 2 α = 1 + 3 sin 2 θ$_{m}$. (B3)$$\n\n- [2] R.M. Corless, G.H. Gonnet, G.H. Hare, D.E.G. Jeffrey, and D.E. Knuth, “On the Lambert W function”, Adv. in Comp. Mathematics 5 , 329-359 (1996).\n\n- [1] See for instance scholar.google.com .\n\n- [3] T.C. Scott, A.L¨ uchow, D. Bressanini, and J.D. Morgan III, “The Nodal surfaces of Helium atom eigenfunctions”, Phys. Rev. A, 75 . 060101-060104 (2007).\n\n- [4] R.D.H. Warburton and J. Wang, “Analysis of asymp- totic motion with air resistance using the Lambert W function”, Am. J. Phys. 72 , 1404-1407 (2004).\n\n- [5] E. Packel and D. Yuen, “Projectile motion with resis- tance and the Lambert function”, Coll. Math. J. 35 (5), 337-350 (2004).\n\n- [6] J.L. Fern´ andez-Chapou, A.L. Salas-Brito, and C.A. Var- gas, “An elliptic property of parabolic trajectories”, Am. J. Phys. 72 ,1109-1109 (2004).\n\n- [7] W.D. MacMillan, Theoretical Mechanics: Static and the Dynamics of a Particle (McGraw-Hill, New York and London, 1927). Reprinted in (Dover, New York, 1958), pp. 249-254.\n\n- [8] G.B. Thomas, M.B. Weir, J. Hass, F.R. Giordano. Cal- culus . 11th Ed. (Addisson-Wesley, 2004).\n\n- [9] G.B. Arfken. Mathematical Methods for physicist . 5th Ed.\n\n- [10] E. Kreyzig. “Principal, Normal, Osculating Cir- cle” in Diffential Geometry . (Dover,N.Y., 1991). E.W. Wiesstein “Curvature” From MathWorld. http://mathworld.wolfram.com/Curvature.html .\n\n- [11] S.M. Steward, “A little introductory and intermediate physics with the Lambert function”, Proc. of the 16th Biennial Congress of the Australian Institute of Physics. M. Colla ed. Vol 2. pp 194-197. Australian Institute of Physics. Parville, VIC (2005).\n\n- [12] S.M. Steward, “Characteristics of the trajectory of a pro- jectile in a linear resisting medium and the Lambert W function”, Australian Inst. of Physics. 17th. National Congress 2006. Paper No. WC0035.(2006).\n\n- [13] In Ref. 12, the author comment that for ε = 1 we obtain the special value α skew = sin − $^{1}$(1 /φ ) with φ = $_{(1 +}$√$_{5)}$$\\_{/}$$_{2, the golden ratio. However, the solution that}$ appears in the article is not longer valid for ε = 1. If the solution corresponds to another real root of the equation this special value corresponds to the case when the initial speed is equal to the limit speed b/g . This makes much more intriguing this fact.\n\n(Academic Press, 2000)." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8237258305631645, + "doc_id": "c9efd189c3f195ac6b878ee8e1205568d6752423419c176d4b7bf525e802aeac", + "edit_distance": 0.7360248447204969, + "f1_score": 0.9584664536741213, + "meteor": 0.8484091795175758, + "precision": 0.9803921568627451, + "pred_md": "4\n\n2009 Fermi Symposium, Washington, D.C., Nov. 2-5\n\nTABLE I: Fluxes and Significance in High Energy Bands\n\nFIG. 7: SWIFTJ1753.5-0127 light curve. Horizontal scale is in modified Julian days.\n\nFIG. 7: SWIFTJ1753.5-0127 light curve. Horizontal scale is in modified Julian days.\n\nFIG. 6: 1E1740-29 light curve. Horizontal scale is in modified Julian days.\n\nFIG. 6: 1E1740-29 light curve. Horizontal scale is in modified Julian days.\n\nwill use the GBM CSPEC data with their finer energy bins to obtain a fit to the spectrum and compare the power law index to that measured by Integral.\n\nSWIFT J1753.5-0127 (Fig. 7) is a LMXB with the compact object likely being a black hole. Swift discovered this source when it observed a large flare in July of 2005. The source did not return to quiescence but settled into a low intensity hard state [14]. BATSE occultation measurements from 19912000 showed no significant emission from this source above 25 keV [15]. The GBM results show that this source is still in a hard state, with significant emission above 100 keV. We will continue to monitor this\n\neConf C091122\n\nsource while it is in the hard state, with longer observations potentially verifying significant emission above 300 keV.\n\n## B. Transient Source\n\nThe new transient black hole candidate XTE J1752-223 rose from undetectable on 2009 October 24 to 511 ± 50 mCrab (12 - 25 keV), 570 ± 70 mCrab (25 - 50 keV), 970 ± 100 mCrab (50 - 100 keV), and 330 ± 100 mCrab (100 - 300 keV) on 2009 November 2 [2, 16]. The light curve is variable, especially in the", + "recall": 0.9375, + "true_md": "2009 Fermi Symposium, Washington, D.C., Nov. 2-5\n\n4\n\nTABLE I: Fluxes and Significance in High Energy Bands\n\nsource while it is in the hard state, with longer obser- vations potentially verifying significant emission above 300 keV.\n\nwill use the GBM CSPEC data with their finer energy bins to obtain a fit to the spectrum and compare the power law index to that measured by Integral.\n\nFIG. 7: SWIFTJ1753.5-0127 light curve. Horizontal scale is in modified Julian days.\n\nFIG. 6: 1E1740-29 light curve. Horizontal scale is in mod- ified Julian days.\n\nThe new transient black hole candidate XTE J1752-223 rose from undetectable on 2009 October 24 to 511 ± 50 mCrab (12 - 25 keV), 570 ± 70 mCrab (25 - 50 keV), 970 ± 100 mCrab (50 - 100 keV), and 330 ± 100 mCrab (100 - 300 keV) on 2009 November 2 [2, 16]. The light curve is variable, especially in the\n\nSWIFT J1753.5-0127 (Fig. 7) is a LMXB with the compact object likely being a black hole. Swift discovered this source when it observed a large flare in July of 2005. The source did not return to qui- escence but settled into a low intensity hard state [14]. BATSE occultation measurements from 1991- 2000 showed no significant emission from this source above 25 keV [15]. The GBM results show that this source is still in a hard state, with significant emis- sion above 100 keV. We will continue to monitor this\n\n## B. Transient Source\n\neConf C091122" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "7b558034554023570073d60679e8d775d27fa5b4dfd69e955b748014b8473930", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9998518518518519, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "36 W. E. Pickett, Physica B 296 , 112 (2001).\n\n9", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "36 W. E. Pickett, Physica B 296 , 112 (2001).\n\n9" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9714246108905952, + "doc_id": "2ecb070f4aa63d7946d0afc0db78a0889cf549f7679d233dab2debbf03e674d9", + "edit_distance": 0.652954808806489, + "f1_score": 0.955188679245283, + "meteor": 0.6056138118002338, + "precision": 0.9665871121718377, + "pred_md": "- [a] The arXiv:1001.2120 version of this paper includes 3 extra pedagogically oriented appendices: Bosons in N site system and MFT; Detailed analysis of phase space geometry in the N =2 case; The definition of a Wigner function of a spin; Concise discussion of the Rabi-Josephson oscillations in the semiclassical perspective.\n- [2] D. Jaksch C. Bruder, J. I. Cirac, C. W. Gardiner, and P. Zoller, Phys. Rev. Lett. 81 , 3108 (1998).\n- [3] M. Greiner, O. Mandel, T. Esslinger, T. W. Hnsch, and a I. Bloch, Nature (London) 415 , 39 (2002).\n- [4] Y. Makhlin, G. Schon, and A. Shnirman, Rev. Mod. Phys. 73 , 357 (2001); R. Gati and M. K. Oberthaler, J. Phys. B 40 , R61 (2007).\n- [5] Gh-S. Paraoanu et al. , J. Phys. B: At. Mol. Opt. Phys. 34 , 4689 (2001); A. J. Leggett, Rev. Mod. Phys. 73 , 307 (2001).\n- [6] J. Javanainen, Phys. Rev. Lett. 57 , 3164 (1986).\n- [7] F. Dalfovo, L. Pitaevskii, and S. Stringari, Phys. Rev. A 54 , 4213 (1996).\n- [8] I. Zapata, F. Sols, and A. J. Leggett, Phys. Rev. A 57 , 1050 (1998).\n- [9] A. Smerzi, S. Fantoni, S. Giovanazzi, and R. S. Shenoy, Phys. Rev. Lett. 79 , 4950 (1997).\n- [10] F. S. Cataliotti, S. Burger, C. Fort, P. Maddaloni, F. Minardi, A. Trombettoni, A. Smerzi, and M. Inguscio, Science 293 , 843 (2001).\n- [11] M. Albiez, R. Gati, J. Folling, S. Hunsmann, M. Cristiani, and M. K. Oberthaler, Phys. Rev. Lett. 95 , 010402 (2005).\n- [12] S. Giovanazzi, A. Smerzi, and S. Fantoni, Phys. Rev. Lett. 84 , 4521 (2000).\n- [13] S. Levy, E. Lahoud, I. Shomroni, and J. Steinhauer, Nature 449 , 579 (2007); C. A. Sackett, Nature 449 , 546 (2007).\n- [14] A. J. Leggett and F. Sols, Found. Phys. 21 , 353 (1998).\n- [15] E. M. Wright, D. F. Walls and J. C. Garrison Phys. Rev. Lett. 77 , 2158 (1996).\n- [16] J. Javanainen and M. Wilkens, Phys. Rev. Lett. 78 , 4675 (1997); Phys. Rev. Lett. 81 , 1345 (1998).\n- [17] M. Greiner, O. Mandel, T. W. Hansch, and I. Bloch, Nature 419 , 51 (2002).\n- [18] G.-B. Jo et al. , Phys. Rev. Lett. 98 , 030407 (2007).\n- [19] T. Schumm et al. , Nat. Phys. 1 , 57 (2005).\n- [20] S. Hofferberth et al. , Nature (London) 449 , 324 (2007).\n- [21] A. Widera, S. Trotzky, P. Cheinet, S. Flling, F. Gerbier, o I. Bloch, V. Gritsev, M. D. Lukin, and E. Demler, Phys. Rev. Lett. 100 , 140401 (2008).\n- [22] A. Vardi and J. R. Anglin, Phys. Rev. Lett. 86 , 568 (2001); J. R. Anglin and A. Vardi, Phys. Rev. A 64 , 013605 (2001).\n- [23] Y. Khodorkovsky, G. Kurizki, and A. Vardi, Phys. Rev. Lett. 100 , 220403 (2008); Phys. Rev. A 80 , 023609 (2009).\n- [24] E. Boukobza, M. Chuchem, D. Cohen, and A. Vardi, Phys. Rev. Lett. 102 , 180403 (2009).\n- [25] K. Smith-Mannschott, M. Chuchem, M. Hiller, T. Kottos, and D. Cohen, Phys. Rev. Lett. 102 , 230401 (2009).\n- [26] C. W. Gardiner and P. Zoller, Quantum Noise , 2nd ed.\n\n14\n\n- (Springer, New York, 2000).\n- [27] M. J. Steel, M. K. Olsen, L. I. Plimak, P. D. Drummond, S. M. Tan, M. J. Collett, D. F. Walls, and R. Graham, Phys. Rev. A 58 , 4824 (1998).\n- [28] A. Sinatra, C. Lobo, and Y. Castin, Phys. Rev. Lett. 87 , 210404 (2001); J. Phys. B: At. Mol. and Opt. Phys. 35 , 3599 (2002).\n- [29] I. Carusotto, Y. Castin, and J. Dalibard, Phys. Rev. A 63 , 023606 (2001).\n- [30] S. E. Hoffmann, J. F. Corney, and P. D. Drummond, Phys. Rev. A 78 , 013622 (2008).\n- [31] A. Polkovikov, Phys. Rev. A 68 , 053604 (2003).\n- [32] L. I. Plimak, M. Fleischhauer, M. K. Olsen, and M. J. Collett, Phys. Rev. A 67 , 013812 (2003).\n- [33] P. Deuar and P. D. Drummond, J. Phys. A: Math and Gen. 39 , 1163 (2006); J. Phys. A: Math and Gen. 39 , 2723 (2006);\n- [34] L. Isella and J. Ruostekoski, Phys. Rev. A 74 , 063625 (2006).\n- [35] M. Hiller, T. Kottos, and T.Geisel , Phys. Rev. A 73 , 061604(R) (2006); Phys. Rev. A 79 , 023621 (2009).\n- [36] S. L. W. Midggley, S. Wster, M. K. Olsen, M. J. Davis, u and K. V. Kheruntsyan, Phys. Rev. A 79 , 053632 (2009).\n- [37] P. Deuar, Phys. Rev. Lett 103 , 130402 (2009).\n- [38] F. Trimborn, D. Witthaut, and H. J. Korsch, Phys. Rev. A 77 , 043631 (2008); Phys. Rev. A 79 , 013608 (2009).\n- [39] K.W. Mahmud, H. Perry, and W.P. Reinhardt, Phys. Rev. A 71, 023615 (2005).\n- [40] Franzosi et al, Int. J. Mod. Phys. B 14, 943 (2000).\n- [41] E. Boukobza, D. Cohen, and A. Vardi, Phys. Rev. A 80 , 053619 (2009).\n- [42] E.M. Graefe, H.J. Korsch, Phys. Rev. A 76, 032116 (2007); D. Witthaut, E. M. Graefe, and H. J. Korsch, Phys. Rev. A 73, 063609 (2006).\n- [43] G. S. Agarwal, Phys. Rev. A. 24 , 2889 (1981). J. P. Dowling, G. S. Agarwal,W. P Schleich, Phys. Rev. A 49 , 4101 (1994).\n- [44] J.C. Varilly and J.M. Gracia-Bondia, Annals of Physics 190 , 107 (1989). C. Brif and A. Mann, J. Phys. A 31 , L9 (1998).\n- [45] A. Polkovnikov, S. Sachdev, and S.M. Girvin, Phys. Rev. A 66 , 053607 (2002).\n- [46] E. Altman and A. Auerbach, Phys. Rev. Lett. 89 , 250404 (2002).\n- [47] A. K. Tuchman, C. Orzel, A. Polkovnikov, and M. Kasevich, Phys. Rev. A 74 , 051601 (2006).\n- [48] B. Wu and Q. Niu, Phys. Rev. A 61 , 023402 (2000).\n- [49] J. C. Eilbeck, P. S. Lomdahl, and A. C. Scott, Physica D 16 , 318 (1985).\n- [50] R. L. Stratonovich, Sov. Phys. JETP 31 , 1012 (1956).\n- [51] D. Cohen and T. Kottos, Phys. Rev. E 63 , 36203 (2001).\n- [52] E. Boukobza, M. G. Moore, D. Cohen, and A. Vardi, Phys. Rev. Lett. 104 , 240402 (2010).\n- [53] M. Rigol, V. Dunjko, and M. Olshanii, Nature 452 , 854 (2008).\n- [54] Quantum Optics by M.O. Scully and M.S. Zubairy, (Cambridge University Press, 1997), p.201.", + "recall": 0.9440559440559441, + "true_md": "14\n\n(Springer, New York, 2000).\n\n- [a] The arXiv:1001.2120 version of this paper includes 3 ex- tra pedagogically oriented appendices: Bosons in N site system and MFT; Detailed analysis of phase space geom- etry in the N =2 case; The definition of a Wigner function of a spin; Concise discussion of the Rabi-Josephson oscil- lations in the semiclassical perspective.\n\n- [27] M. J. Steel, M. K. Olsen, L. I. Plimak, P. D. Drummond, S. M. Tan, M. J. Collett, D. F. Walls, and R. Graham, Phys. Rev. A 58 , 4824 (1998).\n\n- [28] A. Sinatra, C. Lobo, and Y. Castin, Phys. Rev. Lett. 87 , 210404 (2001); J. Phys. B: At. Mol. and Opt. Phys. 35 , 3599 (2002).\n\n- [29] I. Carusotto, Y. Castin, and J. Dalibard, Phys. Rev. A 63 , 023606 (2001).\n\n- [30] S. E. Hoffmann, J. F. Corney, and P. D. Drummond, Phys. Rev. A 78 , 013622 (2008).\n\n- [31] A. Polkovikov, Phys. Rev. A 68 , 053604 (2003).\n\n- [32] L. I. Plimak, M. Fleischhauer, M. K. Olsen, and M. J. Collett, Phys. Rev. A 67 , 013812 (2003).\n\n- [33] P. Deuar and P. D. Drummond, J. Phys. A: Math and Gen. 39 , 1163 (2006); J. Phys. A: Math and Gen. 39 , 2723 (2006);\n\n- [34] L. Isella and J. Ruostekoski, Phys. Rev. A 74 , 063625 (2006).\n\n- [35] M. Hiller, T. Kottos, and T.Geisel , Phys. Rev. A 73 , 061604(R) (2006); Phys. Rev. A 79 , 023621 (2009).\n\n- [36] S. L. W. Midggley, S. W¨ uster, M. K. Olsen, M. J. Davis, and K. V. Kheruntsyan, Phys. Rev. A 79 , 053632 (2009).\n\n- [37] P. Deuar, Phys. Rev. Lett 103 , 130402 (2009).\n\n- [38] F. Trimborn, D. Witthaut, and H. J. Korsch, Phys. Rev. A 77 , 043631 (2008); Phys. Rev. A 79 , 013608 (2009).\n\n- [2] D. Jaksch C. Bruder, J. I. Cirac, C. W. Gardiner, and P. Zoller, Phys. Rev. Lett. 81 , 3108 (1998).\n\n- [3] M. Greiner, O. Mandel, T. Esslinger, T. W. H¨ ansch, and I. Bloch, Nature (London) 415 , 39 (2002).\n\n- [4] Y. Makhlin, G. Sch¨ on, and A. Shnirman, Rev. Mod. Phys. 73 , 357 (2001); R. Gati and M. K. Oberthaler, J. Phys. B 40 , R61 (2007).\n\n- [5] Gh-S. Paraoanu et al. , J. Phys. B: At. Mol. Opt. Phys. 34 , 4689 (2001); A. J. Leggett, Rev. Mod. Phys. 73 , 307 (2001).\n\n- [6] J. Javanainen, Phys. Rev. Lett. 57 , 3164 (1986).\n\n- [7] F. Dalfovo, L. Pitaevskii, and S. Stringari, Phys. Rev. A 54 , 4213 (1996).\n\n- [8] I. Zapata, F. Sols, and A. J. Leggett, Phys. Rev. A 57 , 1050 (1998).\n\n- [9] A. Smerzi, S. Fantoni, S. Giovanazzi, and R. S. Shenoy, Phys. Rev. Lett. 79 , 4950 (1997).\n\n- [10] F. S. Cataliotti, S. Burger, C. Fort, P. Maddaloni, F. Minardi, A. Trombettoni, A. Smerzi, and M. Inguscio, Science 293 , 843 (2001).\n\n- [11] M. Albiez, R. Gati, J. F¨ olling, S. Hunsmann, M. Cris- tiani, and M. K. Oberthaler, Phys. Rev. Lett. 95 , 010402 (2005).\n\n- [39] K.W. Mahmud, H. Perry, and W.P. Reinhardt, Phys. Rev. A 71, 023615 (2005).\n\n- [40] Franzosi et al, Int. J. Mod. Phys. B 14, 943 (2000).\n\n- [41] E. Boukobza, D. Cohen, and A. Vardi, Phys. Rev. A 80 , 053619 (2009).\n\n- [12] S. Giovanazzi, A. Smerzi, and S. Fantoni, Phys. Rev. Lett. 84 , 4521 (2000).\n\n- [13] S. Levy, E. Lahoud, I. Shomroni, and J. Steinhauer, Na- ture 449 , 579 (2007); C. A. Sackett, Nature 449 , 546 (2007).\n\n- [14] A. J. Leggett and F. Sols, Found. Phys. 21 , 353 (1998).\n\n- [15] E. M. Wright, D. F. Walls and J. C. Garrison Phys. Rev. Lett. 77 , 2158 (1996).\n\n- [16] J. Javanainen and M. Wilkens, Phys. Rev. Lett. 78 , 4675 (1997); Phys. Rev. Lett. 81 , 1345 (1998).\n\n- [42] E.M. Graefe, H.J. Korsch, Phys. Rev. A 76, 032116 (2007); D. Witthaut, E. M. Graefe, and H. J. Korsch, Phys. Rev. A 73, 063609 (2006).\n\n- [43] G. S. Agarwal, Phys. Rev. A. 24 , 2889 (1981). J. P. Dowl- ing, G. S. Agarwal,W. P Schleich, Phys. Rev. A 49 , 4101 (1994).\n\n- [44] J.C. Varilly and J.M. Gracia-Bondia, Annals of Physics 190 , 107 (1989). C. Brif and A. Mann, J. Phys. A 31 , L9 (1998).\n\n- [45] A. Polkovnikov, S. Sachdev, and S.M. Girvin, Phys. Rev. A 66 , 053607 (2002).\n\n- [17] M. Greiner, O. Mandel, T. W. H¨ ansch, and I. Bloch, Nature 419 , 51 (2002).\n\n- [18] G.-B. Jo et al. , Phys. Rev. Lett. 98 , 030407 (2007).\n\n- [19] T. Schumm et al. , Nat. Phys. 1 , 57 (2005).\n\n- [20] S. Hofferberth et al. , Nature (London) 449 , 324 (2007).\n\n- [21] A. Widera, S. Trotzky, P. Cheinet, S. F¨ olling, F. Gerbier, I. Bloch, V. Gritsev, M. D. Lukin, and E. Demler, Phys. Rev. Lett. 100 , 140401 (2008).\n\n- [46] E. Altman and A. Auerbach, Phys. Rev. Lett. 89 , 250404 (2002).\n\n- [47] A. K. Tuchman, C. Orzel, A. Polkovnikov, and M. Kase- vich, Phys. Rev. A 74 , 051601 (2006).\n\n- [48] B. Wu and Q. Niu, Phys. Rev. A 61 , 023402 (2000).\n\n- [49] J. C. Eilbeck, P. S. Lomdahl, and A. C. Scott, Physica D 16 , 318 (1985).\n\n- [50] R. L. Stratonovich, Sov. Phys. JETP 31 , 1012 (1956).\n\n- [51] D. Cohen and T. Kottos, Phys. Rev. E 63 , 36203 (2001).\n\n- [52] E. Boukobza, M. G. Moore, D. Cohen, and A. Vardi, Phys. Rev. Lett. 104 , 240402 (2010).\n\n- [22] A. Vardi and J. R. Anglin, Phys. Rev. Lett. 86 , 568 (2001); J. R. Anglin and A. Vardi, Phys. Rev. A 64 , 013605 (2001).\n\n- [23] Y. Khodorkovsky, G. Kurizki, and A. Vardi, Phys. Rev. Lett. 100 , 220403 (2008); Phys. Rev. A 80 , 023609 (2009).\n\n- [24] E. Boukobza, M. Chuchem, D. Cohen, and A. Vardi, Phys. Rev. Lett. 102 , 180403 (2009).\n\n- [25] K. Smith-Mannschott, M. Chuchem, M. Hiller, T. Kot- tos, and D. Cohen, Phys. Rev. Lett. 102 , 230401 (2009).\n\n- [26] C. W. Gardiner and P. Zoller, Quantum Noise , 2nd ed.\n\n- [54] Quantum Optics by M.O. Scully and M.S. Zubairy, (Cambridge University Press, 1997), p.201.\n\n- [53] M. Rigol, V. Dunjko, and M. Olshanii, Nature 452 , 854 (2008)." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.449050129234566, + "doc_id": "26d038ebcbc16a9671bab433fd7d581cc52e47c66b351684406fcf4f66c89a7c", + "edit_distance": 0.5212464589235127, + "f1_score": 0.9647058823529412, + "meteor": 0.8168178323503433, + "precision": 0.9879518072289156, + "pred_md": "15\n\nFIG. 1: (Color online) Contour lines for u > 2. Sea levels are colored blue, Island levels are colored green, and the Separatrix is colored red (left panel). Energy spectrum for N = 20 and u = 10. WKB energies (red x) are compared with exact eigenvalues (blue +). Dashed lines indicate slopes ω J for low energies, ω x for near-separatrix energies, and ω + for high energies (right panel).\n\nFIG. 1: (Color online) Contour lines for u > 2. Sea levels are colored blue, Island levels are colored green, and the Separatrix is colored red (left panel). Energy spectrum for N = 20 and u = 10. WKB energies (red x) are compared with exact eigenvalues (blue +). Dashed lines indicate slopes ω J for low energies, ω x for near-separatrix energies, and ω + for high energies (right panel).\n\nFIG. 2: (Color online) An illustration of TwinFock ( n = 0) preparation (left), and of Pi (' π '), Zero ('0') and Edge ('e') preparations (right) using Wigner plots on a sphere. The left panel is a 3D plot, while the right panel is a Mercator projection of the sphere using ( ϕ n , ) coordinates.\n\nFIG. 2: (Color online) An illustration of TwinFock ( n = 0) preparation (left), and of Pi (' π '), Zero ('0') and Edge ('e') preparations (right) using Wigner plots on a sphere. The left panel is a 3D plot, while the right panel is a Mercator projection of the sphere using ( ϕ n , ) coordinates.", + "recall": 0.9425287356321839, + "true_md": "15\n\nFIG. 1: (Color online) Contour lines for u > 2. Sea levels are colored blue, Island levels are colored green, and the Separatrix is colored red (left panel). Energy spectrum for N = 20 and u = 10. WKB energies (red x) are compared with exact eigenvalues (blue +). Dashed lines indicate slopes ω$_{J}$ for low energies, ω$_{x}$ for near-separatrix energies, and ω + for high energies (right panel).\n\nFIG. 2: (Color online) An illustration of TwinFock ( n = 0) preparation (left), and of Pi (” π ”), Zero (”0”) and Edge (”e”) preparations (right) using Wigner plots on a sphere. The left panel is a 3D plot, while the right panel is a Mercator projection of the sphere using ( ϕ , n ) coordinates." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.3063875266317783, + "doc_id": "7fbd3b7fe20856d520eeeae5e4ba2855c312b5e5704dbd02014465a71d53b838", + "edit_distance": 0.6250764525993884, + "f1_score": 0.9077380952380952, + "meteor": 0.45505448371746, + "precision": 0.9501557632398754, + "pred_md": "chirality interactions in cold atom optical lattices has been proposed 38 .\n\nOur model (8) is achieved at second order of the perturbation series. Higher order terms become truncation errors but may be controlled by small parameters λ x,y,z /J cluster ∼ √ | J x,y,z | /J cluster .\n\n## V. CONCLUSIONS.\n\nWe constructed the exactly solvable Kitaev honeycomb model 1 as the exact low energy effective Hamiltonian of a spin-1/2 model [equations (8) or (9)] with spin-rotation and time reversal symmetry. The spin in Kitaev model is represented as the pseudo-spin in the two-fold degenerate spin singlet subspace of a cluster of four antiferromagnetically coupled spin-1/2 moments. The physical spin model is a honeycomb lattice of such four-spin clusters, with certain inter-cluster interactions. The machinery for the exact mapping to pseudo-spin Hamiltonian was developed (see e.g. TABLE I), which is quite general and can be used to construct other interesting (exactly solvable) spin-1/2 models from spin rotation invariant systems.\n\nIn this construction the pseudo-spin correlations in the Kitaev model will be mapped to dimer or spin-chirality correlations in the physical spin system. The corresponding picture of the fractionalized Majorana fermion excitations and Ising vortices still remain to be clarified.\n\nThis exact construction contains high order physical spin interactions, which is undesirable for practical implementation. We described two possible approaches to reduce this problem: generating the high order spin interactions by perturbative expansion of the coupling to optical phonon, or the magnetic coupling between clusters. This perturbative construction will introduce truncation error of perturbation series, which may be controlled by small expansion parameters. Whether these constructions can be experimentally engineered is however beyond the scope of this study. It is conceivable that other perturbative expansion can also generate these high order spin interactions, but this possibility will be left for future works.\n\n## Acknowledgments\n\nThe author thanks Ashvin Vishwanath, Yong-Baek Kim and Arun Paramekanti for inspiring discussions, and Todadri Senthil for critical comments. The author is supported by the MIT Pappalardo Fellowship in Physics.\n\n## Appendix A: Coupling between Distortions of a Tetrahedron and the Pseudo-spins\n\nIn this Appendix we reproduce from Ref. 35 the couplings of all tetrahedron distortion modes to the spin\n\n8\n\nsystem. And convert them to pseudo-spin notation in the physical spin singlet sector.\n\nConsider a general small distortion of the tetrahedron, the spin Hamiltonian becomes\n\n\n\nwhere δr /lscriptm is the change of bond length between spins /lscript and m J , ' is the derivative of J cluster with respect to bond length.\n\nThere are six orthogonal distortion modes of the tetrahedron [TABLE 1.1 in Ref. 35 ]. One of the modes A is the trivial representation of the tetrahedral group T d ; two E modes form the two dimensional irreducible representation of T d ; and three T 2 modes form the three dimensional irreducible representation. The E modes are also illustrated in FIG. 3.\n\nThe generic couplings in (A1) [second term] can be converted to couplings to these orthogonal modes,\n\n\n\nwhere Q are generalized coordinates of the corresponding modes, functions f can be read off from TABLE 1.2 of Ref. 35 . For the A mode, δr /lscriptm = √ 2 / Q 3 A , so f A is\n\n\n\nThe functions f E 1 2 , for the E modes have been given before but are reproduced here,\n\n\n\n\n\nThe functions f T 2 1 2 3 , , for the T 2 modes are\n\n\n\nNow we can use TABLE I to convert the above couplings into pseudo-spin. It is easy to see that f A and f T 2 1 2 3 , , are all zero when converted to pseudo-spins, namely projected to the physical spin singlet sector. But f E 1 = ( P 14 + P 23 + P 24 + P 13 -2 P 12 -2 P 34 ) / (4 √ 3) = -( √ 3 2) / τ x and f E 2 = ( P 24 + P 13 -P 14 -P 23 ) / 4 = ( √ 3 / 2) τ y . This has already been noted by Tchernyshyov et al. 28 , only the E modes can lift the degeneracy of the physical spin singlet ground states of the tetrahedron. Therefore the general spin lattice coupling is the form of (12) given in the main text.", + "recall": 0.8689458689458689, + "true_md": "8\n\nchirality interactions in cold atom optical lattices has been proposed $^{38}$.\n\nOur model (8) is achieved at second order of the per- turbation series. Higher order terms become trunca- tion errors but may be controlled by small parameters λ$_{x,y,z}$/J$_{cluster}$ ∼ √ | J$_{x,y,z}$ | /J$_{cluster}$ .\n\n## V. CONCLUSIONS.\n\nWe constructed the exactly solvable Kitaev honeycomb model 1 as the exact low energy effective Hamiltonian of a spin-1/2 model [equations (8) or (9)] with spin-rotation and time reversal symmetry. The spin in Kitaev model is represented as the pseudo-spin in the two-fold degenerate spin singlet subspace of a cluster of four antiferromag- netically coupled spin-1/2 moments. The physical spin model is a honeycomb lattice of such four-spin clusters, with certain inter-cluster interactions. The machinery for the exact mapping to pseudo-spin Hamiltonian was developed (see e.g. TABLE I), which is quite general and can be used to construct other interesting (exactly solvable) spin-1/2 models from spin rotation invariant systems.\n\nIn this construction the pseudo-spin correlations in the Kitaev model will be mapped to dimer or spin-chirality correlations in the physical spin system. The correspond- ing picture of the fractionalized Majorana fermion exci- tations and Ising vortices still remain to be clarified.\n\nThis exact construction contains high order physical spin interactions, which is undesirable for practical im- plementation. We described two possible approaches to reduce this problem: generating the high order spin in- teractions by perturbative expansion of the coupling to optical phonon, or the magnetic coupling between clus- ters. This perturbative construction will introduce trun- cation error of perturbation series, which may be con- trolled by small expansion parameters. Whether these constructions can be experimentally engineered is how- ever beyond the scope of this study. It is conceivable that other perturbative expansion can also generate these high order spin interactions, but this possibility will be left for future works.\n\n## Acknowledgments\n\nThe author thanks Ashvin Vishwanath, Yong-Baek Kim and Arun Paramekanti for inspiring discussions, and Todadri Senthil for critical comments. The author is sup- ported by the MIT Pappalardo Fellowship in Physics.\n\n## Appendix A: Coupling between Distortions of a Tetrahedron and the Pseudo-spins\n\nIn this Appendix we reproduce from Ref. 35 the cou- plings of all tetrahedron distortion modes to the spin\n\nNow we can use TABLE I to convert the above cou- plings into pseudo-spin. It is easy to see that f A and f T$_{2}$ 1 , 2 , 3 are all zero when converted to pseudo-spins, namely projected to the physical spin singlet sector. But f E 1 = ( P$_{14}$ + P$_{23}$ + P$_{24}$ + P$_{13}$ − 2 P$_{12}$ − 2 P$_{34}$ ) / $_{(4}$√$_{3) =}$ − $_{(}$√$_{3}$$\\_{/}$$_{2)}$$\\_{τ}$ x and f E 2 = ( P$\\_{24}$ + P$\\_{13}$ P$\\_{14}$ P$\\_{23}$ ) / $\\_{4 = (}$√$\\_{3}$$_{/}$$\\_{2)}$$_{τ}$ $^{y}$. This has already been noted by Tchernyshyov et al. $^{28}$, only the E modes can lift the degeneracy of the physical spin singlet ground states of the tetrahedron. Therefore the general spin lattice coupling is the form of (12) given in the main text.\n\n$$f A = √ 2 / 3 ( S$_{1}$ · S$_{2}$ + S$_{3}$ · S$_{4}$ + S$_{1}$ · S$_{3}$ + S$_{2}$ · S$_{4}$ + S$_{1}$ · S$_{4}$ + S$_{2}$ · S$_{3}$ ) .$$\n\n$$J $^{′}$( Q $^{A}$f $^{A}$+ Q E 1 f E 1 + Q E 2 f E 2 + Q T$_{2}$ 1 f T$_{2}$ 1 + Q T$_{2}$ 2 f T$_{2}$ 2 + Q T$_{2}$ 3 f T$_{2}$ 3 )$$\n\n$$H$_{cluster}$$_{,}$ SL = ( J$_{cluster}$/ 2)( ∑ ℓ S$_{ℓ}$ ) 2 + J ′ ∑ ℓ\n\nWith proper choice of λ and H perturbation we can generate\n\n7\n\nthe desired J x,y,z terms in (8) from the first and second order of perturbations.\n\nThe calculation can be dramatically simplified by the following fact that any physical spin-1/2 operator S x,y,z /lscript converts the cluster spin singlet states | τ z = ± 〉 1 into spin-1 states of the cluster. This can be checked by explicit calculations and will not be proved here. For all the perturbations to be considered later, the above mentioned fact can be exploited to replace the factor [0 -H cluster j -H cluster k ] -1 in the second order perturbation to a c -number ( -2 J cluster ) -1 .\n\nThe detailed calculations are given in Appendix B. We will only list the results here.\n\nThe perturbation on x -links is given by\n\n\n\nwhere λ x = √ 12 | J x | · J cluster , sgn( J x ) = ± 1 is the sign of J x .\n\nThe perturbation on y -links is\n\n\n\n\n\nThe perturbation on z -links is\n\n\n\nwith\n\nλ z = 4 √ | J z | · J cluster . The entire Hamiltonian H magnetic reads explicitly as,\n\n\n\nIn (16), we have been able to reduce the four spin interactions in (8) to inter-cluster Heisenberg interactions, and the six-spin interactions in (8) to inter-cluster spinchirality interactions. The inter-cluster Heisenberg couplings in H perturbation x,y may be easier to arrange. The\n\ninter-cluster spin-chirality coupling in H perturbation z explicitly breaks time reversal symmetry and is probably harder to implement in solid state systems. However spin-chirality order may have important consequences in frustrated magnets 36,37 , and a realization of spin-", + "recall": 0.8629629629629629, + "true_md": "7\n\nmodes of neighboring tetrahedra. And these coupling constants λ$_{x,y,z}$ need to be tuned to produce J$_{x,y,z}$ of the Kitaev model. This is still not easy to implement in solid state systems. At lowest non-trivial order of pertur- bative expansion, we do get our model (9). Higher order terms in expansion destroy the exact solvability, but may be controlled by the small parameters λ$_{x,y,z}$/k .\n\nthe desired J$_{x,y,z}$ terms in (8) from the first and second order of perturbations.\n\nThe calculation can be dramatically simplified by the following fact that any physical spin-1/2 operator S x,y,z ℓ converts the cluster spin singlet states | τ z = ± 1 〉 into spin-1 states of the cluster. This can be checked by explicit calculations and will not be proved here. For all the perturbations to be considered later, the above mentioned fact can be exploited to replace the factor [0 − H$_{cluster}$ j − H$_{cluster}$ $_{k}$] $^{−}$1 in the second order pertur- bation to a c -number ( − 2 J$_{cluster}$ ) $^{$^{−}$1}$. The detailed calculations are given in Appendix B. We\n\n− The detailed calculations are given in Appendix B. We will only list the results here.\n\nThe perturbation on x -links is given by\n\nIn this Subsection we consider more conventional per- turbations, magnetic interactions between the clusters, e.g. the Heisenberg coupling S$_{j}$ · S$_{k}$ with j and k belong to different tetrahedra. This has the advantage over the previous phonon approach for not introducing additional degrees of freedom. But it also has a significant disad- vantage: the perturbation does not commute with the cluster Heisenberg Hamiltonian (2), so the cluster sin- glet subspace will be mixed with other total spin states. In this Subsection we will use the spin-chirality represen- tation (6) for τ $^{z}$.\n\n## B. Generate the High Order Terms by Magnetic Interactions between Clusters.\n\n$$λ$_{x}$ H$_{perturbation}$$_{, x}$ = λ$_{x}$ [ S$_{j}$$_{1}$ · S$_{k}$$_{1}$ + sgn( J$_{x}$ ) · ( S$_{j}$$_{2}$ · S$_{k}$$_{2}$ )] − J$_{x}$ ( S$_{j}$$_{1}$ · S$_{j}$$_{2}$ + S$_{k}$$_{1}$ · S$_{k}$$_{2}$ ) .$$\n\nwhere λ$_{x}$ = √ 12 | J$_{x}$ | · J$_{cluster}$ , sgn( J$_{x}$ ) = ± 1 is the sign of J$_{x}$ .\n\nThe perturbation on y -links is\n\n$$λ$_{y}$ H$_{perturbation}$$_{, y}$ = λ$_{y}$ [ S$_{j}$$_{1}$ · S$_{k}$$_{1}$ + sgn( J$_{y}$ ) · ( S$_{j}$$_{3}$ − S$_{j}$$_{4}$ ) · ( S$_{k}$$_{3}$ − S$_{k}$$_{4}$ )] − | J$_{y}$ | ( S$_{j}$$_{3}$ · S$_{j}$$_{4}$ + S$_{k}$$_{3}$ S$_{k}$$_{4}$ )$$\n\nwith λ$_{y}$ = √ 4 | J$_{y}$ | · J$_{cluster}$ . The perturbation on z -links is\n\n$$λ$_{z}$ H$_{perturbation}$$_{, z}$ = λ$_{z}$ [ S$_{j}$$_{2}$ · ( S$_{k}$$_{3}$ × S$_{k}$$_{4}$ ) + sgn( J$_{z}$ ) · S$_{k}$$_{2}$ · ( S$_{j}$$_{3}$ × S$_{j}$$_{4}$ )] − | J$_{z}$ | ( S$_{j}$$_{3}$ · S$_{j}$$_{4}$ + S$_{k}$$_{3}$ · S$_{k}$$_{4}$ ) .$$\n\nwith λ$_{z}$ = 4 √ | J$_{z}$ | · J$_{cluster}$ . The entire Hamiltonian H$_{magnetic}$ reads explicitly as,\n\nAgain consider two clusters j and k . For simplicity of notations define a projection operator P jk = P j P $_{k}$, where P j,k is projection into the singlet subspace of clus- ter j and k , respectively, P j,k = ∑ s = $^{±}$1 | τ z j,k = s 〉〈 τ z j,k = s | . For a given perturbation λ H$_{perturbation}$ with small parameter λ (in factor λ/J$_{cluster}$ is the expansion param- eter), lowest two orders of the perturbation series are\n\nWith proper choice of λ and H$_{perturbation}$ we can generate\n\n$$λ P $_{jk}$H$_{perturbation}$ P jk + λ 2 P $_{jk}$H$_{perturbation}$ (1 − P $_{jk}$) × [0 − H$_{cluster}$ j − H$_{cluster}$ $_{k}$] $^{$^{−}$1}$(1 − P $_{jk}$) H$_{perturbation}$ P jk (15)$$\n\n$$H$_{magnetic}$ = ∑ cluster j ( J$_{cluster}$/ 2)( S$_{j}$$_{1}$ + S$_{j}$$_{2}$ + S$_{j}$$_{3}$ + S$_{j}$$_{4}$ ) 2 + ∑ x $^{−}$links $_{}${ √ 12 | J$_{x}$ | · J$_{cluster}$ [ S$_{j}$$_{1}$ · S$_{k}$$_{1}$ + sgn( J$_{x}$ ) · ( S$_{j}$$_{2}$ · S$_{k}$$_{2}$ ) ] − J$_{x}$ ( S$_{j}$$_{1}$ · S$_{j}$$_{2}$ + S$_{k}$$_{1}$ · S$_{k}$$_{2}$ ) } + ∑ y $^{−}$links $_{}${ √ 4 | J$_{y}$ | · J$_{cluster}$ [ S$_{j}$$_{1}$ · ( S$_{k}$$_{3}$ − S$_{k}$$_{4}$ ) + sgn( J$_{y}$ ) S$_{k}$$_{1}$ · ( S$_{j}$$_{3}$ − S$_{j}$$_{4}$ ) ] − | J$_{y}$ | ( S$_{j}$$_{3}$ · S$_{j}$$_{4}$ + S$_{k}$$_{3}$ · S$_{k}$$_{4}$ ) } + ∑ z $^{−}$links $_{}${ 4 √ | J$_{z}$ | · J$_{cluster}$ [ S$_{j}$$_{2}$ · ( S$_{k}$$_{3}$ × S$_{k}$$_{4}$ ) + sgn( J$_{z}$ ) S$_{k}$$_{2}$ · ( S$_{j}$$_{3}$ × S$_{j}$$_{4}$ ) ] − | J$_{z}$ | ( S$_{j}$$_{3}$ · S$_{j}$$_{4}$ + S$_{k}$$_{3}$ · S$_{k}$$_{4}$ ) } . (16)$$\n\nIn (16), we have been able to reduce the four spin in- teractions in (8) to inter-cluster Heisenberg interactions, and the six-spin interactions in (8) to inter-cluster spin- chirality interactions. The inter-cluster Heisenberg cou- plings in H$_{perturbation}$ x,y may be easier to arrange. The\n\ninter-cluster spin-chirality coupling in H$_{perturbation}$ z ex- plicitly breaks time reversal symmetry and is probably harder to implement in solid state systems. However spin-chirality order may have important consequences in frustrated magnets $^{36,37}$, and a realization of spin-" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7376790539220893, + "doc_id": "8e6c72f52ea318d5e6b04a1fff85945b0a31ea2c6b282c76252d2787fec468f1", + "edit_distance": 0.8026431718061674, + "f1_score": 0.9446254071661238, + "meteor": 0.6661303295367716, + "precision": 0.9698996655518395, + "pred_md": "Fig. 2. Fluorescence (a, c) and excitation (b, d) images taken at the position of a probe sphere hidden under a layer of zinc oxide. The probe sphere has a radius of R = 150 nm. The images are taken at the back of the sample where the sphere is directly visible. In (a) and (b) we focus a plane wave onto the sample. Scattering creates a random specular pattern of excitation light resulting in a small amount of fluorescent response of the probe sphere. In (c) and (d) we illuminate the sample with a shaped wave which is created to maximize the fluorescent emission. Aside from the fluorescent emission enhancement we see a sharp focus of excitation light. All intensities are in counts/second.\n\nFig. 2. Fluorescence (a, c) and excitation (b, d) images taken at the position of a probe sphere hidden under a layer of zinc oxide. The probe sphere has a radius of R = 150 nm. The images are taken at the back of the sample where the sphere is directly visible. In (a) and (b) we focus a plane wave onto the sample. Scattering creates a random specular pattern of excitation light resulting in a small amount of fluorescent response of the probe sphere. In (c) and (d) we illuminate the sample with a shaped wave which is created to maximize the fluorescent emission. Aside from the fluorescent emission enhancement we see a sharp focus of excitation light. All intensities are in counts/second.\n\nrange between 7 5 . ± 1 µ m and 25 ± 4 µ m and have a mean free path of /lscript = 0 7 . ± 0 2 . µ m. By measuring the angular resolved transmission through the ZnO layers [13], we determined their effective refractive index n eff to be 1 35 . ± 0 15. [14, 15] .\n\nUsing a wave front synthesizer, similar to the one discussed in Ref. [9], we spatially divide a monochromatic laser beam ( λ = 532 nm) into up to 640 square segments of which we individually control the phase. The shaped beam is focussed onto our sample using a microscope objective (NA = 0 95). The same microscope objective . is used to capture the fluorescence from a probe hidden under the scattering layer. At the back of the sample we use an oil-immersion microscope objective (NA = 1 49) . to directly image the excitation and emission light at the probe. A digital feedback system that monitors the amount of fluorescence, tailors the wave front to maximize the emission of a probe sphere hidden under the scattering layer. Both the fluorescence measured at the front and at the back of the sample were used independently to feed the digital feedback system and we did not observe a difference in our results. Because detecting fluorescence at the back of our sample allows us to use low shutter times on our camera, we used this signal as a feedback for most of our measurements.\n\nIn Fig. 2 we see a typical result of the experiment. When we illuminate the sample with a focussed plane wave, we measure a low fluorescence response from a R = 150 nm probe (a) and we see a speckle pattern in\n\n2\n\nFig. 3. The measured radial intensity profile of the generated spot (stars) and the speckle correlation functions of the illumination (NA = 0 95, triangles) and the imaging . (NA = 1 49, dots) microscope objectives. .\n\nFig. 3. The measured radial intensity profile of the generated spot (stars) and the speckle correlation functions of the illumination (NA = 0 95, triangles) and the imaging . (NA = 1 49, dots) microscope objectives. .\n\nthe excitation light (b). Nothing in the speckle pattern reveals the position of the probe. If a shaped wave, created to maximize the fluorescent emission, is focussed onto the sample we measure an intensity enhancement of the emission (c) and we see a sharp focus of excitation light at the position of the probe (d). It is surprising to see that this focus is smaller than the probe sphere.\n\nThe radial intensity profile in the focus is shown in Fig. 3 together with the speckle correlation functions (SCFs) measured through both the illumination and the imaging microscope objective. The SCF is equal to the point spread function (PSF) of an optical system [16-18] giving the resolution limit of the illumination and imaging optics. The measured intensity profile has a half width at half max (HWHM) of 111 ± 5 nm and a peak intensity of 32 1 times the average speckle background in-. tensity. The size of the created spot is not limited by the illumination system, as it is substantially smaller than the measured illumination SCF. We also see that the measured size of the created spot is equal to the SCF of the imaging system, meaning that the created spot is smaller than or equal to the resolution limit of our microscope objective.\n\nFrom literature we know that linear polarized light can be optimally concentrated to an elliptical focus. [19] The HWHM of the two axis of this elliptical focus are given by 0 28 . λ/n eff and 0 17 . λ/n eff and the focal area by 0 048 . πλ /n 2 2 eff . In our experiment this would result in a smallest possible focal area of 0 02 . µ m with the HWHM 2 of the two axes 110 nm and 67 nm. The resolution of our imaging microscope objective does not allow us to resolve the short axis of the spot. However, we see that without explicitly minimizing the spot size, the created spot area does not exceed the smallest spot area physically possible by more than 68%.\n\nTo further investigate the created focus, we compare the intensity enhancements of the emission η em and excitation η ex . For the excitation intensity, the enhancement", + "recall": 0.9206349206349206, + "true_md": "Fig. 3. The measured radial intensity profile of the gener- ated spot (stars) and the speckle correlation functions of the illumination (NA = 0 . 95, triangles) and the imaging (NA = 1 . 49, dots) microscope objectives.\n\nFig. 2. Fluorescence (a, c) and excitation (b, d) images taken at the position of a probe sphere hidden under a layer of zinc oxide. The probe sphere has a radius of R = 150 nm. The images are taken at the back of the sample where the sphere is directly visible. In (a) and (b) we focus a plane wave onto the sample. Scattering creates a random specular pattern of excitation light re- sulting in a small amount of fluorescent response of the probe sphere. In (c) and (d) we illuminate the sample with a shaped wave which is created to maximize the fluorescent emission. Aside from the fluorescent emission enhancement we see a sharp focus of excitation light. All intensities are in counts/second.\n\nthe excitation light (b). Nothing in the speckle pattern reveals the position of the probe. If a shaped wave, cre- ated to maximize the fluorescent emission, is focussed onto the sample we measure an intensity enhancement of the emission (c) and we see a sharp focus of excitation light at the position of the probe (d). It is surprising to see that this focus is smaller than the probe sphere.\n\nThe radial intensity profile in the focus is shown in Fig. 3 together with the speckle correlation functions (SCFs) measured through both the illumination and the imaging microscope objective. The SCF is equal to the point spread function (PSF) of an optical system [16–18] giving the resolution limit of the illumination and imag- ing optics. The measured intensity profile has a half width at half max (HWHM) of 111 ± 5 nm and a peak in- tensity of 32 . 1 times the average speckle background in- tensity. The size of the created spot is not limited by the illumination system, as it is substantially smaller than the measured illumination SCF. We also see that the measured size of the created spot is equal to the SCF of the imaging system, meaning that the created spot is smaller than or equal to the resolution limit of our microscope objective.\n\nFrom literature we know that linear polarized light can be optimally concentrated to an elliptical focus. [19] The HWHM of the two axis of this elliptical focus are given by 0 . 28 λ/n$_{eff}$ and 0 . 17 λ/n$_{eff}$ and the focal area by 0 . 048 πλ $^{2}$/n2 $_{eff}$. In our experiment this would result in a smallest possible focal area of 0 . 02 µ m 2 with the HWHM of the two axes 110 nm and 67 nm. The resolution of our imaging microscope objective does not allow us to resolve the short axis of the spot. However, we see that without explicitly minimizing the spot size, the created spot area does not exceed the smallest spot area physically possible by more than 68%.\n\nTo further investigate the created focus, we compare the intensity enhancements of the emission η em and exci- tation η $^{ex}$. For the excitation intensity, the enhancement\n\n2\n\nIn Fig. 2 we see a typical result of the experiment. When we illuminate the sample with a focussed plane wave, we measure a low fluorescence response from a R = 150 nm probe (a) and we see a speckle pattern in\n\nUsing a wave front synthesizer, similar to the one dis- cussed in Ref. [9], we spatially divide a monochromatic laser beam ( λ = 532 nm) into up to 640 square segments of which we individually control the phase. The shaped beam is focussed onto our sample using a microscope objective (NA = 0 . 95). The same microscope objective is used to capture the fluorescence from a probe hidden under the scattering layer. At the back of the sample we use an oil-immersion microscope objective (NA = 1 . 49) to directly image the excitation and emission light at the probe. A digital feedback system that monitors the amount of fluorescence, tailors the wave front to max- imize the emission of a probe sphere hidden under the scattering layer. Both the fluorescence measured at the front and at the back of the sample were used indepen- dently to feed the digital feedback system and we did not observe a difference in our results. Because detect- ing fluorescence at the back of our sample allows us to use low shutter times on our camera, we used this signal as a feedback for most of our measurements.\n\nrange between 7 . 5 ± 1 µ m and 25 ± 4 µ m and have a mean free path of ℓ = 0 . 7 ± 0 . 2 µ m. By measuring the angular resolved transmission through the ZnO layers [13], we determined their effective refractive index n$_{eff}$ to be 1 . 35 ± 0 . 15. [14,15]" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9443338112428302, + "doc_id": "9d1246bcfc62b551a0470a229918c4095e5df8b24d7099fb0e945f2d6c7cd43d", + "edit_distance": 0.14285714285714285, + "f1_score": 0.9575757575757575, + "meteor": 0.9718936821741212, + "precision": 0.9723076923076923, + "pred_md": "FIG. 14: The diffusion scaling with the excess entropy at (a) high and (b) low temperatures for the soft repulsive shoulder system.\n\nFIG. 14: The diffusion scaling with the excess entropy at (a) high and (b) low temperatures for the soft repulsive shoulder system.\n\nby a mixture of hard spheres of two different sizes. The concentration of components of such mixture is pressure and temperature dependent. As it was shown in literature (see, for example, [69]) the excess entropy scaling holds for binary mixtures too. But in the case of quasibinary mixture since the effective concentration depends on the pressure and temperature the behavior becomes more complex. This brings to the breakdown of the scaling rules for this case.\n\nObviously, the systems with bounded potentials can not be approximated by hard sphere potentials too. It seems that this may be the reason of violation of Rosen-\n\n10\n\nfeld entropy scaling for these systems.\n\nWe thank V. V. Brazhkin and Daan Frenkel for stimulating discussions. Our special thanks to Prof. Ch. Chakravarty who attracted our attention to the problems considered here. The work was supported in part by the Russian Foundation for Basic Research (Grant No 08-02-00781).\n\n- [1] P. Debenedetti, J. Phys.: Condens. Matter 15, R1669 (2003).\n- [2] S. V. Buldyrev, G. Franzese, N. Giovambattista, G. Malescio, M. R. Sadr-Lahijany, A. Scala, A. Skibinsky, and H. E. Stanley, Physica A 304 , 23 (2002).\n- [3] C. A. Angell, Annu. Rev. Phys. Chem. 55, 559 (2004).\n- [4] P. G. Debenedetti, Metastable Liquids: Concepts and Principles (Princeton University Press, Princeton, 1998).\n- [5] V. V. Brazhkin. S. V. Buldyrev, V. N. Ryzhov, and H. E. Stanley [eds], New Kinds of Phase Transitions: Transformations in Disordered Substances [Proc. NATO Advanced Research Workshop, Volga River] (Kluwer, Dordrecht, 2002).\n- [6] J. R. Errington and P. G. Debenedetti, Nature (London) 409 , 18 (2001).\n- [7] P.A. Netz, F.V. Starr, H.E. Stanley, and M.C. Barbosa, J. Chem. Phys. 115 , 318 (2001).\n- [8] O. Mishima and H. E. Stanley, Nature 396 , 329 (1998).\n- [9] C.A. Angell, E.D. Finch, and P. Bach, J. Chem. Phys. 65 , 3063 (1976).\n- [10] H. Thurn and J. Ruska, J. Non-Cryst. Solids 22 , 331 (1976).\n- [11] G.E. Sauer and L.B. Borst, Science 158 , 1567 (1967).\n- [12] F.X. Prielmeier, E.W. Lang, R.J. Speedy, H.-D. Ludemann, Phys. Rev. Lett. 59 , 1128 (1987).\n- [13] F.X. Prielmeier, E.W. Lang, R.J. Speedy, H.-D. Ludemann, B. Bunsenges, Phys. Chem. 92 , 1111 (1988).\n- [14] L. Haar, J. S. Gallagher, G. S. Kell, NBS/NRC Steam Tables. Thermodynamic and Transport Properties and Computer Programs for Vapor and Liquid States of Water in SI Units, Hemisphere Publishing Co., Washington DC, 1984, pp. 271-276.\n- [15] A. Scala,F. W. Starr, E. LaNave, F. Sciortino and H. E. Stanley, Nature 406 , 166 (2000).\n- [16] http://www.lsbu.ac.uk/water/anmlies.html\n- [17] J. R. Errington, Th. M. Truskett, J. Mittal, J. Chem. Phys. 125 , 244502 (2006).\n- [18] J. Mittal, J. R. Errington, Th. M. Truskett J. Chem. Phys. 125 , 076102 (2006).\n- [19] P. C. Hemmer and G. Stell, Phys. Rev. Lett. 24 , 1284(1970).\n- [20] G. Stell and P. C. Hemmer, J. Chem. Phys. 56 , 4274 (1972).\n- [21] G. Malescio, J. Phys.: Condens. Matter 19 , 07310 (2007).\n- [22] E.Velasco, L. Mederos, G. Navascues, P. C. Hemmer, and G. Stell, Phys. Rev. Lett. 85 , 122 (2000).\n- [23] P. C. Hemmer, E.Velasko, L. Mederos, G. Navascues, and G. Stell, J. Chem. Phys. 114 , 2268 (2001).\n- [24] M. R. Sadr-Lahijany, A. Scala, S. V. Buldyrev and H. E. Stanley, Phys. Rev. Lett. 81 , 4895 (1998).", + "recall": 0.9432835820895522, + "true_md": "10\n\nfeld entropy scaling for these systems.\n\nWe thank V. V. Brazhkin and Daan Frenkel for stim- ulating discussions. Our special thanks to Prof. Ch. Chakravarty who attracted our attention to the prob- lems considered here. The work was supported in part by the Russian Foundation for Basic Research (Grant No 08-02-00781).\n\nFIG. 14: The diffusion scaling with the excess entropy at (a) high and (b) low temperatures for the soft repulsive shoulder system.\n\nby a mixture of hard spheres of two different sizes. The concentration of components of such mixture is pressure and temperature dependent. As it was shown in liter- ature (see, for example, [69]) the excess entropy scaling holds for binary mixtures too. But in the case of quasi- binary mixture since the effective concentration depends on the pressure and temperature the behavior becomes more complex. This brings to the breakdown of the scal- ing rules for this case.\n\nObviously, the systems with bounded potentials can not be approximated by hard sphere potentials too. It seems that this may be the reason of violation of Rosen-\n\n- [1] P. Debenedetti, J. Phys.: Condens. Matter 15, R1669 (2003).\n\n- [2] S. V. Buldyrev, G. Franzese, N. Giovambattista, G. Malescio, M. R. Sadr-Lahijany, A. Scala, A. Skibinsky, and H. E. Stanley, Physica A 304 , 23 (2002).\n\n- [3] C. A. Angell, Annu. Rev. Phys. Chem. 55, 559 (2004).\n\n- [4] P. G. Debenedetti, Metastable Liquids: Concepts and Principles (Princeton University Press, Princeton, 1998).\n\n- [5] V. V. Brazhkin. S. V. Buldyrev, V. N. Ryzhov, and H. E. Stanley [eds], New Kinds of Phase Transitions: Trans- formations in Disordered Substances [Proc. NATO Ad- vanced Research Workshop, Volga River] (Kluwer, Dor- drecht, 2002).\n\n- [6] J. R. Errington and P. G. Debenedetti, Nature (London) 409 , 18 (2001).\n\n- [7] P.A. Netz, F.V. Starr, H.E. Stanley, and M.C. Barbosa, J. Chem. Phys. 115 , 318 (2001).\n\n- [8] O. Mishima and H. E. Stanley, Nature 396 , 329 (1998).\n\n- [9] C.A. Angell, E.D. Finch, and P. Bach, J. Chem. Phys. 65 , 3063 (1976).\n\n- [10] H. Thurn and J. Ruska, J. Non-Cryst. Solids 22 , 331 (1976).\n\n- [11] G.E. Sauer and L.B. Borst, Science 158 , 1567 (1967).\n\n- [12] F.X. Prielmeier, E.W. Lang, R.J. Speedy, H.-D. L¨ udemann, Phys. Rev. Lett. 59 , 1128 (1987).\n\n- [13] F.X. Prielmeier, E.W. Lang, R.J. Speedy, H.-D. L¨ udemann, B. Bunsenges, Phys. Chem. 92 , 1111 (1988).\n\n- [14] L. Haar, J. S. Gallagher, G. S. Kell, NBS/NRC Steam Tables. Thermodynamic and Transport Properties and Computer Programs for Vapor and Liquid States of Wa- ter in SI Units, Hemisphere Publishing Co., Washington DC, 1984, pp. 271-276.\n\n- [15] A. Scala,F. W. Starr, E. LaNave, F. Sciortino and H. E. Stanley, Nature 406 , 166 (2000).\n\n- [16] http://www.lsbu.ac.uk/water/anmlies.html\n\n- [17] J. R. Errington, Th. M. Truskett, J. Mittal, J. Chem. Phys. 125 , 244502 (2006).\n\n- [18] J. Mittal, J. R. Errington, Th. M. Truskett J. Chem. Phys. 125 , 076102 (2006).\n\n- [19] P. C. Hemmer and G. Stell, Phys. Rev. Lett. 24 , 1284(1970).\n\n- [20] G. Stell and P. C. Hemmer, J. Chem. Phys. 56 , 4274 (1972).\n\n- [21] G. Malescio, J. Phys.: Condens. Matter 19 , 07310 (2007).\n\n- [22] E.Velasco, L. Mederos, G. Navascues, P. C. Hemmer, and G. Stell, Phys. Rev. Lett. 85 , 122 (2000).\n\n- [23] P. C. Hemmer, E.Velasko, L. Mederos, G. Navascues, and G. Stell, J. Chem. Phys. 114 , 2268 (2001).\n\n- [24] M. R. Sadr-Lahijany, A. Scala, S. V. Buldyrev and H. E. Stanley, Phys. Rev. Lett. 81 , 4895 (1998)." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.3011038422298378, + "doc_id": "a6f814a3580d2358f33fda8ea43ad0dfb5648e9e1c85ff0c3c12538f3d9c15c1", + "edit_distance": 0.6433358153387937, + "f1_score": 0.8796992481203008, + "meteor": 0.38914548884001915, + "precision": 0.936, + "pred_md": "high-energy fermions and is an input for the low-energy theory. Below we follow Refs. 31,33 and assume that the momentum dependence of a collective boson is flat near ( π, π ). The self energy within such model has been worked out consistently in Ref. 31,33. In the normal state\n\n\n\n\n\nwhere λ n is the spin-fermion coupling constant, and ω sf is a typical spin relaxation frequency of overdamped spin collective excitations with a propagator\n\n\n\nwhere χ Q is the uniform static susceptibility. If we use Ornstein-Zernike form of χ q ( ) and use either Eliashberg 45 or FLEX computational schemes 48 , we get rather similar behavior of Σ as a function of frequency and rather similar behavior of optical integrals.\n\nThe collective nature of spin fluctuations is reflected in the fact that the coupling λ and the bosonic frequency ω sf are related: λ scales as ξ 2 , where ξ is the bosonic mass (the distance to a bosonic instability), and ω sf ∝ ξ -2 (see Ref. 49). For a flat χ q ( ∼ Q ) the product λω sf does not depend on ξ and is the overall dimensional scale for boson-mediated interactions.\n\nIn the SCS fermionic excitations acquire a gap. This gap affects fermionic self-energy in two ways: directly, via the change of the dispersion of an intermediate boson in the exchange process involving a CB, and indirectly, via the change of the propagator of a CB. We remind ourselves that the dynamics of a CB comes from a particlehole bubble which is indeed affected by ∆.\n\nThe effect of a d -wave pairing gap on a CB has been discussed in a number of papers, most recently in 31 . In\n\n11\n\na SCS a gapless continuum described by Eq. (20) transforms into a gaped continuum, with a gap about 2∆ and a resonance at ω = ω 0 < 2∆, where for a d -wave gap we define ∆ as a maximum of a d -wave gap.\n\nThe spin susceptibility near ( π, π ) in a superconductor can generally be written up as\n\n\n\nwhere Π is evaluated by adding up the bubbles made out of two normal and two anomalous Green's functions. Below 2∆, Π(Ω) is real ( ∼ Ω 2 / ∆ for small Ω), and the resonance emerges at Ω = ω 0 at which Π( ω 0 ) = ω sf . At frequencies larger than 2∆, Π(Ω) has an imaginary part, and this gives rise to a gaped continuum in χ (Ω).\n\nThe imaginary part of the spin susceptibility around the resonance frequency ω 0 is 31\n\n\n\nwhere Z o ∼ 2 ω sf χ / 0 ∂ Π ∂ω | Ω= ω 0 . The imaginary part of the spin susceptibility describing a gaped continuum exists for for Ω ≥ 2∆ and is\n\n\n\n\n\nIn Eq. (23) D x ( ) = K 1 ( x ) -K 2 ( x ) x , and K x 1 ( ) and K x 2 ( ) are Elliptic integrals of first and second kind. The real part of χ is obtained by Kramers-Krnig transform of the o imaginary part.\n\nSubstituting Eq 6 for χ q, ( Ω) into the formula for the self-energy one obtains Σ '' ( ω ) in a SCS state as a sum of two terms 31\n\n\n\nwhere,\n\ncomes from the interaction with the resonance and\n\n\n\n\n\ncomes from the interaction with the gaped continuum.\n\nThe real part of Σ is obtained by Kramers-Krnig transo", + "recall": 0.8297872340425532, + "true_md": "11\n\nhigh-energy fermions and is an input for the low-energy theory. Below we follow Refs. 31,33 and assume that the momentum dependence of a collective boson is flat near ( π, π ). The self energy within such model has been worked out consistently in Ref. 31,33. In the normal state\n\na SCS a gapless continuum described by Eq. (20) trans- forms into a gaped continuum, with a gap about 2Δ and a resonance at ω = ω$_{0}$ < 2Δ, where for a d − wave gap we define Δ as a maximum of a d − wave gap.\n\nThe spin susceptibility near ( π, π ) in a superconductor can generally be written up as\n\nwhere λ$_{n}$ is the spin-fermion coupling constant, and ω$_{sf}$ is a typical spin relaxation frequency of overdamped spin collective excitations with a propagator\n\nwhere χ$_{Q}$ is the uniform static susceptibility. If we use Ornstein-Zernike form of χ ( q ) and use either Eliashberg 45 or FLEX computational schemes $^{48}$, we get rather sim- ilar behavior of Σ as a function of frequency and rather similar behavior of optical integrals.\n\nThe collective nature of spin fluctuations is reflected in the fact that the coupling λ and the bosonic frequency ω$_{sf}$ are related: λ scales as ξ $^{2}$, where ξ is the bosonic mass (the distance to a bosonic instability), and ω$_{sf}$ ∝ ξ − 2 (see Ref. 49). For a flat χ ( q ∼ Q ) the product λω$_{sf}$ does not depend on ξ and is the overall dimensional scale for boson-mediated interactions.\n\nIn the SCS fermionic excitations acquire a gap. This gap affects fermionic self-energy in two ways: directly, via the change of the dispersion of an intermediate boson in the exchange process involving a CB, and indirectly, via the change of the propagator of a CB. We remind our- selves that the dynamics of a CB comes from a particle- hole bubble which is indeed affected by Δ.\n\nThe effect of a d − wave pairing gap on a CB has been discussed in a number of papers, most recently in $^{31}$. In\n\nSubstituting Eq 6 for χ ( q, Ω) into the formula for the self-energy one obtains Σ ′′ ( ω ) in a SCS state as a sum of two terms 31\n\n( ) In Eq. (23) D ( x ) = K 1 ( x ) − K 2 ( x x , and K$_{1}$ ( x ) and K$_{2}$ ( x ) are Elliptic integrals of first and second kind. The real part of χ is obtained by Kramers-Kr¨ onig transform of the imaginary part.\n\nwhere Z$_{o}$ ∼ 2 ω$_{sf}$ χ$_{0}$/ ∂ Π $^{∂ω}$| Ω= ω 0 . The imaginary part of the spin susceptibility describing a gaped continuum exists for for Ω ≥ 2Δ and is\n\nwhere Π is evaluated by adding up the bubbles made out of two normal and two anomalous Green’s functions. Below 2Δ, Π(Ω) is real ( ∼ Ω $^{2}$/ Δ for small Ω), and the resonance emerges at Ω = ω$_{0}$ at which Π( ω$_{0}$ ) = ω$_{sf}$ . At frequencies larger than 2Δ, Π(Ω) has an imaginary part, and this gives rise to a gaped continuum in χ (Ω).\n\nThe imaginary part of the spin susceptibility around the resonance frequency ω$_{0}$ is 31\n\n$$Σ ′′ ( ω ) = − 1 2 λ$_{n}$ω$_{sf}$ log ( 1 + ω 2 ω 2 sf ) Σ ′ ( ω ) = − λ$_{n}$ω$_{sf}$ arctan ω ω$_{sf}$ (19)$$\n\n$$χ ( q ∼ Q, Ω) = χ$_{Q}$ 1 − i Ω ω$_{sf}$ (20)$$\n\n$$χ ( q ∼ Q, Ω) = χ$_{Q}$ 1 − i Π(Ω) ω$_{sf}$ (21)$$\n\n$$χ $^{′′}$( q, Ω) = πZ$_{o}$ω$_{0}$ 2 δ (Ω − ω$_{0}$ ) (22)$$\n\n$$χ $^{′′}$( q, Ω) = Im [ χ$_{0}$ 1 − 1 ω$_{sf}$ ( 4Δ 2 Ω D ( 4Δ 2 Ω 2 ) + i Ω K$_{2}$ (1 − 4Δ 2 Ω 2 ) ] ≈ Im [ χ$_{0}$ 1 − 1 ω$_{sf}$ ( π Δ 2 Ω + i π $_{2}$Ω ) ] f or Ω >> 2Δ (23) In Eq. (23) D ( x ) = K 1 ( x ) − K 2 ( x , and K$_{1}$ ( x ) and K$_{2}$ ( x )$$\n\n$$Σ ′′ ( ω ) = Σ ′′ $_{A}$( ω ) + Σ ′′ $_{B}$( ω ) (24)$$\n\n$$Σ ′′ $_{A}$( ω ) = πZ$_{o}$ 2 λ$_{n}$ω$_{o}$ Re ( ω + ω$_{o}$ √ ( ω + ω$_{o}$ ) 2 − Δ 2 ) comes from the interaction with the resonance and$$\n\n$$Σ ′′ $_{B}$( ω ) = − λ$_{n}$ ∫ | E | 2Δ dx Re ω + x √ ( ω + x ) 2 − Δ 2 x ω$_{sf}$ K$_{2}$ ( 1 − 4Δ 2 x 2 ) [ 1 − 4Δ 2 xω$_{sf}$ D ( 4Δ 2 x 2 ) ] 2 + [ x ω$_{sf}$ K$_{2}$ ( 1 − 4Δ 2 x 2 ) ] 2 (25)$$\n\ncomes from the interaction with the resonance and\n\ncomes from the interaction with the gaped continuum.\n\nThe real part of Σ is obtained by Kramers-Kr¨ onig trans-\n\nwhere," + }, + { + "bleu": 0.2256745941225806, + "doc_id": "6be182d79bd1c5dd1c9bdf4694163207ca7e12ed718ee7f853d848facee40bf0", + "edit_distance": 0.8044025157232705, + "f1_score": 0.8378870673952641, + "meteor": 0.3320480954057951, + "precision": 0.8914728682170543, + "pred_md": "| 1 〉 〈 1 | A ' :\n\n\n\nThe following states are important in this calculation:\n\n\n\nwhere η ( l -1) i ( µ ) ≡ ( l -2 -2 ) i µ + i +1. Then the conditional entropy H E X ( | ) is as follows:\n\n\n\nThe relation ∑ l -2 i =0 η ( l -1) i ( µ ) = ∆ l -1 allows us to sim-\n\n- [1] Alexander S. Holevo. The capacity of the quantum channel with general signal states. IEEE Transactions on Information Theory , 44(1):269-273, 1998.\n- [2] Benjamin Schumacher and Michael D. Westmoreland. Sending classical information via noisy quantum channels. Physical Review A , 56(1):131-138, July 1997.\n- [3] Seth Lloyd. Capacity of the noisy quantum channel. Physical Review A , 55(3):1613-1622, March 1997.\n- [4] Peter W. Shor. The quantum channel capacity and coherent information. In Lecture Notes, MSRI Workshop on Quantum Computation , 2002.\n- [5] Igor Devetak. The private classical capacity and quantum capacity of a quantum channel. IEEE Transactions on Information Theory , 51:44-55, January 2005.\n- [6] Igor Devetak and Andreas Winter. Relating quantum privacy and quantum coherence: An operational approach. Physical Review Letters , 93(8):080501, August 2004.\n- [7] Patrick Hayden, Michal Horodecki, Andreas Winter, and Jon Yard. A decoupling approach to the quantum capacity. Open Systems & Information Dynamics , 15:7-19,\n\n.\n\n25\n\nplify the above expression for the conditional entropy H E X ( | ):\n\n\n\nWe finally obtain the coherent information as the difference of (F2) and (F3):\n\n\n\nThe above expression vanishes when µ = 0, and it coincides with the expression for the quantum capacity of the Unruh channel when µ = 1 2 (in Section III B of / Ref. [33]):\n\n\n\nWe now trace out the CE trade-off curve for a single use of the Unruh channel. We use the same input state as in Lemma 6 because that lemma proves that this input state traces out both the CQ curve and the CE curve. We then have here that H A X ( | ) = H 2 ( µ ), and we obtain the expression in the statement of the theorem by noting that I ( AX B ; ) = H A X ( | ) + H B ( ) -H E X ( | ).\n\nMarch 2008.\n\n- [8] Rochus Klesse. A random coding based proof for the quantum coding theorem. Open Systems & Information Dynamics , 15:21-45, March 2008.\n- [9] M. Horodecki, Seth Lloyd, and Andreas Winter. Quantum coding theorem from privacy and distinguishability. Open Systems & Information Dynamics , 15:47-69, March 2008.\n- [10] Patrick Hayden, Peter W. Shor, and Andreas Winter. Random quantum codes from Gaussian ensembles and an uncertainty relation. Open Systems & Information Dynamics , 15:71-89, March 2008.\n- [11] Charles H. Bennett, David P. DiVincenzo, John A. Smolin, and William K. Wootters. Mixed-state entanglement and quantum error correction. Physical Review A , 54(5):3824-3851, November 1996.\n- [12] Howard Barnum, Emmanuel Knill, and Michael A. Nielsen. On quantum fidelities and channel capacities. IEEE Transactions on Information Theory , 46(4):13171329, July 2000.", + "recall": 0.7903780068728522, + "true_md": "25\n\nplify the above expression for the conditional entropy H ( E | X ):\n\n| 1 〉〈 1 | A $^{′}$:\n\nThe following states are important in this calculation:\n\nWe finally obtain the coherent information as the differ- ence of (F2) and (F3):\n\n$$H ( E | X ) = H ( B ) − 1 + ∞ ∑ l =2 p$_{l}$ ( z ) log ( l − 1) − ∞ ∑ l =2 l − 2 ∑ i =0 p$_{l}$ ( z ) Δ$_{l}$$_{−}$$_{1}$ η ( l − 1) i ( µ ) log ( η ( l − 1) i ( µ )) . (F3)$$\n\n$$N $^{c}$( | 0 〉 〈 0 | ) ≡ ∞ ⊕ l =2 p$_{l}$ ( z ) S c $_{l}$( | 0 〉 〈 0 | ) = ∞ ⊕ l =2 p$_{l}$ ( z ) Δ$_{l}$$_{−}$$_{1}$ l − 2 ∑ i =0 ( l − 1 − i ) | i 〉〈 i | E N $^{c}$( | 1 〉 〈 1 | ) ≡ ∞ ⊕ l =2 p$_{l}$ ( z ) S c $_{l}$( | 1 〉 〈 1 | ) = ∞ ⊕ l =2 p$_{l}$ ( z ) Δ$_{l}$$_{−}$$_{1}$ l − 2 ∑ i =0 ( i + 1) | i 〉〈 i | $^{E}$.$$\n\n$$I ( A 〉 BX ) = − ∞ ∑ l =2 p$_{l}$ ( z ) Δ$_{l}$$_{−}$$_{1}$ l − 1 ∑ i =0 λ ( l − 1) i ( µ ) log ( λ ( l − 1) i ( µ )) + ∞ ∑ l =2 p$_{l}$ ( z ) Δ$_{l}$$_{−}$$_{1}$ l − 2 ∑ i =0 η ( l − 1) i ( µ ) log ( η ( l − 1) i ( µ )) .$$\n\n$$ρ XE = 1 2$^{[}$ | 0 〉〈 0 | X ⊗ ψ E 0 + | 1 〉〈 1 | X ⊗ ψ E 1 ] , ψ E 0 = µ N $^{c}$( | 0 〉 〈 0 | ) + (1 − µ ) N $^{c}$( | 1 〉 〈 1 | ) = ∞ ⊕ l =2 p$_{l}$ ( z ) Δ$_{l}$$_{−}$$_{1}$ l − 2 ∑ i =0 η ( l − 1) i ( µ ) | i 〉〈 i | $^{E}$, ψ E 1 = (1 − µ ) N $^{c}$( | 0 〉 〈 0 | ) + µ N $^{c}$( | 1 〉 〈 1 | ) = ∞ ⊕ l =2 p$_{l}$ ( z ) Δ$_{l}$$_{−}$$_{1}$ l − 2 ∑ i =0 η ( l − 1) i (1 − µ ) | i 〉〈 i | $^{E}$,$$\n\n$$I ( A 〉 BX )$_{µ}$$_{=1}$$_{/}$$_{2}$ = ∞ ∑ k =0 p$_{k}$$_{+2}$ ( z ) log$^{(}$ k + 2 k + 1$^{)}$ .$$\n\nThe above expression vanishes when µ = 0, and it co- incides with the expression for the quantum capacity of the Unruh channel when µ = 1 / 2 (in Section III B of Ref. [33]):\n\nwhere η ( l − 1) i ( µ ) ≡ ( l − 2 − 2 i ) µ + i + 1. Then the condi- tional entropy H ( E | X ) is as follows:\n\nWe now trace out the CE trade-off curve for a single use of the Unruh channel. We use the same input state as in Lemma 6 because that lemma proves that this input state traces out both the CQ curve and the CE curve. We then have here that H ( A | X ) = H$_{2}$ ( µ ), and we obtain the expression in the statement of the theorem by noting that I ( AX ; B ) = H ( A | X ) + H ( B ) − H ( E | X ).\n\nThe relation ∑ l − 2 i $_{=0}$η ( l − 1) i ( µ ) = Δ$_{l}$$\\_{−}$$_{1}$ allows us to sim-\n\n$$H ( E | X ) = − ∞ ∑ l =2 p$_{l}$ ( z ) Δ$_{l}$$_{−}$$_{1}$ l − 2 ∑ i =0 η ( l − 1)( µ ) i log$^{(}$ p$_{l}$ ( z ) η ( l − 1) i ( µ ) Δ$_{l}$$_{−}$$_{1}$ ) .$$\n\nMarch 2008.\n\n- [8] Rochus Klesse. A random coding based proof for the quantum coding theorem. Open Systems & Information Dynamics , 15:21–45, March 2008.\n\n- [1] Alexander S. Holevo. The capacity of the quantum chan- nel with general signal states. IEEE Transactions on Information Theory , 44(1):269–273, 1998.\n\n- [2] Benjamin Schumacher and Michael D. Westmoreland. Sending classical information via noisy quantum chan- nels. Physical Review A , 56(1):131–138, July 1997.\n\n- [3] Seth Lloyd. Capacity of the noisy quantum channel. Physical Review A , 55(3):1613–1622, March 1997.\n\n- [4] Peter W. Shor. The quantum channel capacity and co- herent information. In Lecture Notes, MSRI Workshop on Quantum Computation , 2002.\n\n- [5] Igor Devetak. The private classical capacity and quantum capacity of a quantum channel. IEEE Transactions on Information Theory , 51:44–55, January 2005.\n\n- [6] Igor Devetak and Andreas Winter. Relating quantum pri- vacy and quantum coherence: An operational approach. Physical Review Letters , 93(8):080501, August 2004.\n\n- [7] Patrick Hayden, Michal Horodecki, Andreas Winter, and Jon Yard. A decoupling approach to the quantum ca- pacity. Open Systems & Information Dynamics , 15:7–19,\n\n- [12] Howard Barnum, Emmanuel Knill, and Michael A. Nielsen. On quantum fidelities and channel capacities. IEEE Transactions on Information Theory , 46(4):1317– 1329, July 2000.\n\n- [11] Charles H. Bennett, David P. DiVincenzo, John A. Smolin, and William K. Wootters. Mixed-state entan- glement and quantum error correction. Physical Review A , 54(5):3824–3851, November 1996.\n\n- [10] Patrick Hayden, Peter W. Shor, and Andreas Winter. Random quantum codes from Gaussian ensembles and an uncertainty relation. Open Systems & Information Dynamics , 15:71–89, March 2008.\n\n- [9] M. Horodecki, Seth Lloyd, and Andreas Winter. Quan- tum coding theorem from privacy and distinguishabil- ity. Open Systems & Information Dynamics , 15:47–69, March 2008." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6945618658822109, + "doc_id": "d0b2a291cb5576b03ebd0261c16c08056a99ea5fa957291bc6c168eab4cd793b", + "edit_distance": 0.9464285714285714, + "f1_score": 0.8984126984126984, + "meteor": 0.5723588304646855, + "precision": 0.9464882943143813, + "pred_md": "FIG. 8: (color online) Evolution of occupation probability P t ( ) = | c a ( ) t | 2 in a semi-infinite lattice with an amplifying impurity site for Re( E a ) = 0, Im( E a ) = 1 and for (a) κ 0 = κ a = 1, (b) κ 0 = 1, κ a = √ 2.\n\nFIG. 8: (color online) Evolution of occupation probability P t ( ) = | c a ( ) t | 2 in a semi-infinite lattice with an amplifying impurity site for Re( E a ) = 0, Im( E a ) = 1 and for (a) κ 0 = κ a = 1, (b) κ 0 = 1, κ a = √ 2.\n\n.\n\nFIG. 9: (color online) Same as Fig.8, but for an absorbing impurity site (Im( E a ) = -1; other parameters as in Fig.8)\n\nFIG. 9: (color online) Same as Fig.8, but for an absorbing impurity site (Im( E a ) = -1; other parameters as in Fig.8)\n\n/negationslash\n\n.\n\neral analysis presented in Sec.II.D, the survival probability P t ( ) = | c a ( ) t | 2 decays to zero in the absorbing case (Fig.9), and the existence of a spectral singularity does not basically influence the decay dynamics of state | a 〉 . Conversely, for an amplifying impurity site the occupation probability P t ( ) does not decay to zero. Note that for κ /κ a 0 < √ 2 [like in Fig.8(a)], P t ( ) converges to a steady state value, whereas for κ /κ a 0 = √ 2 the probability P t ( ) is an oscillating function [see Fig.8(b)]. The different behavior in the two cases is explained by observing that, for κ /κ a 0 = √ 2 there is one spectral singularity and thus in Eq.(45) there is only one pole that contributes to the non-decaying part of c a ( ). t On the other hand, for the somehow special case κ /κ a 0 = √ 2 the Hamiltonian H has two spectral singularities [see Eq.(57)], and in Eq.(45) there are two poles that contribute to the non-decaying part of c a ( ). t The interference of these two non-decaying terms explains the oscillatory behavior of P t ( ) in Fig.8(b) (see also [35]).\n\n11\n\n## IV. CONCLUSIONS\n\nIn this work a comprehensive analysis of the spectral properties of a non-Hermitian extension of the FriedrichsFano-Anderson model has been presented. The FFA model generally describes the decay of a discrete state | a 〉 of energy E a coupled to a continuum of states. Here we have extended the ordinary model by allowing the energy E a to become complex-valued, with either Im( E a ) > 0 (the 'amplifying' case) or Im( E a ) < 0 (the 'absorbing' case). Contrary to the Hermitian FFA, it has been shown by a direct diagonalization procedure and by the analysis of the resolvent operator that spectral singularities in the continuous spectrum may exist for both the amplifying and the absorbing non-Hermitian FFA model. The physical implications and relevance of spectral singularities have been discussed, in particular with reference to a tight-binding realization of the non-Hermitian FFA model that describes single-particle electronic or photonic transport in a semi-infinite lattice attached to an impurity site with a complex energy. Different behaviors have been found for an amplifying and for an absorbing impurity site, reflecting the circumstance that the divergence of the resolvent G z ( ) appears when the spectral singularity is approached either from above or from below of the complex energy plane. For an amplifying impurity site, the spectral singularity manifests itself as a divergence of the reflection probability from the lattice boundary, a result which is the 'discrete' analogous of the general result recently established by Mostafazadeh for wave scattering by complex potentials in the framework of the continuous Schrdinger equation [11]. o As compared to Ref.[11], here we have also clarified the physical relevance of spectral singularities in the temporal domain, showing that in the amplifying non-Hermitian FFA Hamiltonian the spectral singularity of the resolvent prevents the decay of state | a 〉 into the continuum, in spite of the absence of bound states. For an absorbing impurity site, we have shown that a spectral singularity corresponds to a zero of the reflection probability from the lattice boundary. This result is clearly not observable in the problem of wave scattering from complex barriers addressed in Refs. [11, 12], where the double-degeneracy of energy levels plays a major role and a spectral singularity can never correspond to the total absorption of the incident wave.\n\nOwing to the importance of the FFA model in different areas of physics, it is envisaged that the present analysis may stimulate further theoretical and experimental studies aimed to investigate the unique features of nonHermitian physical systems. In particular, recent results obtained in photonic systems based on coupled waveguides or arrays of coupled waveguides with controlled regions of optical gain and/or loss [51], indicate that engineered photonic systems might provide an accessible laboratory tool to experimentally observe spectral singularities.", + "recall": 0.8549848942598187, + "true_md": "11\n\n## IV. CONCLUSIONS\n\nIn this work a comprehensive analysis of the spectral properties of a non-Hermitian extension of the Friedrichs- Fano-Anderson model has been presented. The FFA model generally describes the decay of a discrete state | a 〉 of energy E$_{a}$ coupled to a continuum of states. Here we have extended the ordinary model by allowing the energy E$_{a}$ to become complex-valued, with either Im( E$_{a}$ ) > 0 (the ’amplifying’ case) or Im( E$_{a}$ ) < 0 (the ’absorbing’ case). Contrary to the Hermitian FFA, it has been shown by a direct diagonalization procedure and by the analy- sis of the resolvent operator that spectral singularities in the continuous spectrum may exist for both the am- plifying and the absorbing non-Hermitian FFA model. The physical implications and relevance of spectral singu- larities have been discussed, in particular with reference to a tight-binding realization of the non-Hermitian FFA model that describes single-particle electronic or pho- tonic transport in a semi-infinite lattice attached to an impurity site with a complex energy. Different behaviors have been found for an amplifying and for an absorb- ing impurity site, reflecting the circumstance that the divergence of the resolvent G ( z ) appears when the spec- tral singularity is approached either from above or from below of the complex energy plane. For an amplifying impurity site, the spectral singularity manifests itself as a divergence of the reflection probability from the lattice boundary, a result which is the ’discrete’ analogous of the general result recently established by Mostafazadeh for wave scattering by complex potentials in the framework of the continuous Schr¨ odinger equation [11]. As com- pared to Ref.[11], here we have also clarified the phys- ical relevance of spectral singularities in the temporal domain, showing that in the amplifying non-Hermitian FFA Hamiltonian the spectral singularity of the resol- vent prevents the decay of state | a 〉 into the continuum, in spite of the absence of bound states. For an absorbing impurity site, we have shown that a spectral singularity corresponds to a zero of the reflection probability from the lattice boundary. This result is clearly not observable in the problem of wave scattering from complex barriers addressed in Refs. [11, 12], where the double-degeneracy of energy levels plays a major role and a spectral singu- larity can never correspond to the total absorption of the incident wave.\n\nOwing to the importance of the FFA model in different areas of physics, it is envisaged that the present anal- ysis may stimulate further theoretical and experimental studies aimed to investigate the unique features of non- Hermitian physical systems. In particular, recent results obtained in photonic systems based on coupled waveg- uides or arrays of coupled waveguides with controlled re- gions of optical gain and/or loss [51], indicate that en- gineered photonic systems might provide an accessible laboratory tool to experimentally observe spectral singu- larities.\n\neral analysis presented in Sec.II.D, the survival probabil- ity P ( t ) = | c$_{a}$ ( t ) | 2 decays to zero in the absorbing case (Fig.9), and the existence of a spectral singularity does not basically influence the decay dynamics of state | a 〉 . Conversely, for an amplifying impurity site the occupa- tion probability P ( t ) does not decay to zero. Note that for κ$_{a}$/κ$_{0}$ < √$_{2 [like in Fig.8(a)],}$ P ( t ) converges to a steady state value, whereas for κ$_{a}$/κ$_{0}$ = √$_{2 the proba-}$ bility P ( t ) is an oscillating function [see Fig.8(b)]. The different behavior in the two cases is explained by observ- ing that, for κ$_{a}$/κ$_{0}$ ̸ = √$_{2 there is one spectral singularity}$ and thus in Eq.(45) there is only one pole that contributes to the non-decaying part of c$_{a}$ ( t ). On the other hand, for the somehow special case κ$_{a}$/κ$_{0}$ = √$_{2 the Hamiltonian}$$\\_{H}$ has two spectral singularities [see Eq.(57)], and in Eq.(45) there are two poles that contribute to the non-decaying part of c$\\_{a}$ ( t ). The interference of these two non-decaying terms explains the oscillatory behavior of P ( t ) in Fig.8(b) (see also [35]).\n\nFIG. 9: (color online) Same as Fig.8, but for an absorbing impurity site (Im( E$_{a}$ ) = − 1; other parameters as in Fig.8) .\n\nFIG. 8: (color online) Evolution of occupation probability P ( t ) = | c$_{a}$ ( t ) | 2 in a semi-infinite lattice with an amplifying impurity site for Re( E$_{a}$ ) = 0, Im( E$_{a}$ ) = 1 and for (a) κ 0 = κ$_{a}$ = 1, (b) κ 0 = 1, κ$_{a}$ = √$_{2.}$\n\n." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5164656350922832, + "doc_id": "82e45428c163795a0b1a2a485256c6adb1e9fedacfa8f51a6f6403cceb456769", + "edit_distance": 0.7051561365286856, + "f1_score": 0.8536912751677853, + "meteor": 0.45153238153034075, + "precision": 0.8907563025210085, + "pred_md": "Science Foundation (Grant 582/07), the USA-Israel Binational Science Foundation (Grant No.2008141), and the National Science Foundation through a grant for the Institute for Theoretical Atomic, Molecular, and Optical Physics at Harvard University and the Smithsonian Astrophysical observatory. KSM, MH, and TK acknowledge support of the DFG within the Forschergruppe 760.\n\n## Appendix A: An L site system with N bosons\n\nA bosonic L site system has formally the same Hilbert space as that of L coupled (harmonic) oscillators, with an additional constant of motion N that counts the total number of quanta (rather than the total energy). The creation operator ˆ a † i corresponds to a raising operator and the occupation of the i th site n i = ˆ ˆ a a † i i corresponds to the number of quanta stored in the i th mode. The one-particle states of an L site system form an L dimensional Hilbert space. The set of unitary transformations (i.e. generalized rotations) within this space is the SU L ( ) group. For N particles in L sites, the dimensionality of the Hilbert space is dim( N ) = ( N +1)! / [( L -1)!( N -L +2)!]. For example for L = 2 we have dim( N ) = N +1 basis states | n , n 1 2 〉 with n 1 + n 2 = N . We can rotate the entire system using dim( N ) matrices. Thus we obtain a dim( N ) representation of the SU L ( ) group. By definition these rotations can be expressed as a linear combination of the SU L ( ) generators J µ , and they all commute with the conserved particle number operator ˆ . N The many-body Hamiltonian H may contain 'nonlinear' terms such as J 2 µ that correspond to interactions between the particles. Accordingly, for an interacting system, H is not merely a rotation. However, H still commutes with ˆ , N maintaining the fixed-number dim( N ) subspace.\n\nIn the semiclassical framework the dynamics in phase space is generated by the Hamilton equations of motion for the action-angle variables ˙ n i and ˙ ϕ i . These are the 'polar coordinates' that describe each of the oscillators. It is common to define the complex coordinates\n\n\n\n(representing a single point in phase space). This is the classical version of the destruction operator ˆ . a i The equation for Ψ ˙ i is the discrete nonlinear Schrdinger (DNLS) o equation:\n\n\n\nwhich is the space-discretized version of\n\n\n\nThis looks like the Gross-Pitaevskii (GP) equation, but strictly speaking it is not the GP equation. The GP equation is the outcome of a mean-field theory (MFT): it is\n\n10\n\nnot an equation for Ψ , but an approximated equation i for the mean-field Ψ . i We further clarify this point in the next paragraph.\n\nWithin the framework of the semiclassical treatment the quantum state is described as a distribution of points in phase space. This approach goes beyond the conventional MFT approximation: MFT essentially assumes that the state of the system remains coherent throughout its evolution. Such a state corresponds to a Gaussian-like distribution is phase space ('minimal wave-packet') and accordingly it is fully characterized by 'center of mass' coordinates ( ϕ , n i i ) that are defined through the mean field\n\n\n\n(representing the center of a wave-packet). To the extent that the MFT assumption can be trusted, the equation of motion for Ψ i is the DNLS / GP. Indeed, if u = 0 there is no nonlinear spreading and the MFT description becomes exact. The approximation holds well in the weak-interaction Rabi regime and for some regions of phase-space (e.g. around the ground state) in the strong-interaction Josephson regime, but in the nonlinear regions of phase-space MFT becomes too crude to provide an accurate description of the dynamics.\n\n## Appendix B: The structure of phase space\n\nThe energy contours in a representative case are displayed in Fig. 1. Considering a section along the big circle ϕ = 0 , π , it is convenient to take -π < θ < + π instead of 0 < θ < π . Along this section the energy is E θ ( ) = ( NK/ 2) f ( θ ) where\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nAll extremal points of the Hamiltonian are located along this section and are determined by the equation f ' ( θ ) = 0. The number of solutions depends on u and on the bias ε .\n\nFor u < 1, there are two fixed points: a minimum at θ -at the bottom of the sea and a maximum at the opposite point θ + . For ε = 0 the two fixed points are:\n\n\n\n\n\nwith corresponding energies E ± = ± ( N/ 2) K .\n\nFor u > 1, provided | ε | < ε c , the upper fixed point bifurcates into a saddle point θ x and two stable maxima θ 1 and θ 2 . The value of the critical bias ε c is derived in", + "recall": 0.8195876288659794, + "true_md": "10\n\nnot an equation for Ψ$_{i}$, but an approximated equation for the mean-field Ψ$_{i}$. We further clarify this point in the next paragraph.\n\nWithin the framework of the semiclassical treatment the quantum state is described as a distribution of points in phase space. This approach goes beyond the con- ventional MFT approximation: MFT essentially assumes that the state of the system remains coherent throughout its evolution. Such a state corresponds to a Gaussian-like distribution is phase space (“minimal wave-packet”) and accordingly it is fully characterized by “center of mass” coordinates ( ϕ$_{i}$, n$_{i}$ ) that are defined through the mean field\n\nScience Foundation (Grant 582/07), the USA-Israel Bi- national Science Foundation (Grant No.2008141), and the National Science Foundation through a grant for the Institute for Theoretical Atomic, Molecular, and Optical Physics at Harvard University and the Smithsonian As- trophysical observatory. KSM, MH, and TK acknowledge support of the DFG within the Forschergruppe 760.\n\n(representing the center of a wave-packet). To the extent that the MFT assumption can be trusted, the equation of motion for Ψ$_{i}$ is the DNLS / GP. Indeed, if u = 0 there is no nonlinear spreading and the MFT descrip- tion becomes exact. The approximation holds well in the weak-interaction Rabi regime and for some regions of phase-space (e.g. around the ground state) in the strong-interaction Josephson regime, but in the nonlin- ear regions of phase-space MFT becomes too crude to provide an accurate description of the dynamics.\n\nA bosonic L site system has formally the same Hilbert space as that of L coupled (harmonic) oscillators, with an additional constant of motion N that counts the to- tal number of quanta (rather than the total energy). The creation operator ˆ a † i corresponds to a raising op- erator and the occupation of the i th site n$_{i}$ = ˆ a † $_{i}$ˆ a$_{i}$ corresponds to the number of quanta stored in the i th mode. The one-particle states of an L site sys- tem form an L dimensional Hilbert space. The set of unitary transformations (i.e. generalized rotations) within this space is the SU ( L ) group. For N parti- cles in L sites, the dimensionality of the Hilbert space is dim( N ) = ( N +1)! / [( L − 1)!( N − L +2)!]. For example for L = 2 we have dim( N ) = N +1 basis states | n$_{1}$, n$_{2}$ 〉 with n$_{1}$ + n$_{2}$ = N . We can rotate the entire system using dim( N ) matrices. Thus we obtain a dim( N ) representa- tion of the SU ( L ) group. By definition these rotations can be expressed as a linear combination of the SU ( L ) generators J$_{µ}$ , and they all commute with the conserved particle number operator ˆ N . The many-body Hamilto- nian H may contain “nonlinear” terms such as J 2 µ that correspond to interactions between the particles. Accord- ingly, for an interacting system, H is not merely a rota- tion. However, H still commutes with ˆ N , maintaining the fixed-number dim( N ) subspace.\n\nThe energy contours in a representative case are dis- played in Fig. 1. Considering a section along the big circle ϕ = 0 , π , it is convenient to take − π < θ < + π instead of 0 < θ < π . Along this section the energy is E ( θ ) = ( NK/ 2) f ( θ ) where\n\nIn the semiclassical framework the dynamics in phase space is generated by the Hamilton equations of motion for the action-angle variables ˙ n$_{i}$ and ˙ ϕ$_{i}$ . These are the “polar coordinates” that describe each of the oscillators. It is common to define the complex coordinates\n\nAll extremal points of the Hamiltonian are located along this section and are determined by the equation f $^{′}$( θ ) = 0. The number of solutions depends on u and on the bias ε .\n\n(representing a single point in phase space). This is the classical version of the destruction operator ˆ a$_{i}$ . The equa- tion for ˙ Ψ$_{i}$ is the discrete nonlinear Schr¨ odinger (DNLS) equation:\n\nFor u < 1, there are two fixed points: a minimum at θ$_{−}$ at the bottom of the sea and a maximum at the opposite point θ$_{+}$ . For ε = 0 the two fixed points are:\n\n( ) which is the space-discretized version of\n\n[ ] This looks like the Gross-Pitaevskii (GP) equation, but strictly speaking it is not the GP equation. The GP equa- tion is the outcome of a mean-field theory (MFT): it is\n\n$$Ψ$_{i}$ = Mean Field ≡ 〈 Ψ$_{i}$ 〉 (A4)$$\n\n## Appendix A: An L site system with N bosons\n\n## Appendix B: The structure of phase space\n\n$$f ( θ ) ≡ 1 2 u (cos θ ) 2 − ε cos θ − sin θ (B1) 1$$\n\n$$≡ 2 − − f $^{′}$( θ ) = − 1 2 u sin(2 θ ) + ε sin θ − cos θ, (B2)$$\n\n$$f $^{′′}$( θ ) = − u cos(2 θ ) + ε cos θ + sin θ . (B3)$$\n\n$$Ψ$_{i}$ ≡ √ n$_{i}$ e i ϕ i (A1)$$\n\n$$i d Ψ$_{i}$ dt = ( ϵ$_{i}$ + U | Ψ$_{i}$ | 2 ) Ψ$_{i}$ − K 2 (Ψ$_{i}$$_{+1}$ + Ψ$_{i}$$_{−}$$_{1}$) , (A2) which is the space-discretized version of$$\n\n$$i d Ψ( x ) dt = [ V ( x ) + g$_{s}$ | Ψ( x ) | 2 − 1 2 m ∇ 2 ] Ψ( x ) (A3) This looks like the Gross-Pitaevskii (GP) equation, but$$\n\n$$θ$_{−}$ = π/ 2 [ ϕ =0 point] , (B4)$$\n\n$$θ$_{+}$ = − π/ 2 [ ϕ = π point] , (B5)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9448237574203567, + "doc_id": "759262ac8b914a1397c56881cd1aaf2c495bdf746ac397e7fb75c51e58d14078", + "edit_distance": 0.6185185185185185, + "f1_score": 0.9807692307692308, + "meteor": 0.8207805116750296, + "precision": 0.9902912621359223, + "pred_md": "2009 Fermi Symposium, Washington, D.C., Nov. 2-5\n\n5\n\nFIG. 8: XTEJ1752-223 light curve. Horizontal scale is in modified Julian days.\n\nFIG. 8: XTEJ1752-223 light curve. Horizontal scale is in modified Julian days.\n\n- [1] C. Meegan et al., Ap. J. 702 , 791 (2009).\n- [2] C. Wilson-Hodge et al. (2010), these proceedings.\n- [3] B. A. Harmon et al., Ap. J. Suppl. 138 , 149 (2002).\n- [4] B. A. Harmon et al., Ap. J. Suppl. 154 , 585 (2004).\n- [5] G. L. Case et al., in The First GLAST Symposium , edited by S. Ritz, P. Michelson, and C. Meegan (2007), vol. 921 of AIP Conf. Proceedings , p. 538.\n- [6] J. Tueller et al. (2010), ap. J. Suppl., (to be published), astro-ph/0903.3037.\n- [7] J. C. Ling and W. A. Wheaton, Ap. J. 598 , 334 (2003).\n- [8] E. Jourdain and J. P. Roques, Ap. J. 704 , 17 (2009).\n- [9] H. Steinle et al., Astron. and Astrophys. 330 , 97\n\neConf C091122\n\n12-25 keV band, where the flux initially rose to about 240 mCrab (2009 Oct 25-28), suddenly dropped to non-detectable on 2009 October 29-30, then rose again during the period 2009 October 31 to November 2. As of mid December 2009, the source remains in a high intensity state. The light curve is shown for the period MJD 54700-55200, again with 1-day resolution, in Fig. 8. The fluxes for XTE J1752-223 in Table 1 are given are for the interval of flaring activity, TJD 55130-55180.\n\n## Acknowledgments\n\nThis work is supported by the NASA Fermi Guest Investigator program. At LSU, additional support is provided by NASA/Louisiana Board of Regents Cooperative Agreement NNX07AT62A.\n\n(1998).\n\n- [10] M. McConnell et al., Ap. J. 523 , 928 (2000).\n- [11] J. C. Ling and W. A. Wheaton, Chinese J. Astron. Astrophys. Suppl. 5 , 80 (2005).\n- [12] G. L. Case et al., Chinese J. Astron. Astrophys. Suppl. 5 , 341 (2005).\n- [13] L. Bouchet et al., Ap. J. 693 , 1871 (2009).\n- [14] M. C. Bell et al., Ap. J. 659 , 549 (2007).\n- [15] G. L. Case et al. (2010), to be submitted.\n- [16] C. Wilson-Hodge et al., Astron. Telegram 2280 (2009).", + "recall": 0.9714285714285714, + "true_md": "5\n\n12-25 keV band, where the flux initially rose to about 240 mCrab (2009 Oct 25-28), suddenly dropped to non-detectable on 2009 October 29-30, then rose again during the period 2009 October 31 to November 2. As of mid December 2009, the source remains in a high intensity state. The light curve is shown for the pe- riod MJD 54700-55200, again with 1-day resolution, in Fig. 8. The fluxes for XTE J1752-223 in Table 1 are given are for the interval of flaring activity, TJD 55130-55180.\n\n2009 Fermi Symposium, Washington, D.C., Nov. 2-5\n\n## Acknowledgments\n\nThis work is supported by the NASA Fermi Guest Investigator program. At LSU, additional support is provided by NASA/Louisiana Board of Regents Co- operative Agreement NNX07AT62A.\n\nFIG. 8: XTEJ1752-223 light curve. Horizontal scale is in modified Julian days.\n\n- [1] C. Meegan et al., Ap. J. 702 , 791 (2009).\n\n- [2] C. Wilson-Hodge et al. (2010), these proceedings.\n\n- [3] B. A. Harmon et al., Ap. J. Suppl. 138 , 149 (2002).\n\n- [4] B. A. Harmon et al., Ap. J. Suppl. 154 , 585 (2004).\n\n- [5] G. L. Case et al., in The First GLAST Symposium , edited by S. Ritz, P. Michelson, and C. Meegan (2007), vol. 921 of AIP Conf. Proceedings , p. 538.\n\n- [6] J. Tueller et al. (2010), ap. J. Suppl., (to be pub- lished), astro-ph/0903.3037.\n\n- [7] J. C. Ling and W. A. Wheaton, Ap. J. 598 , 334 (2003).\n\n- [8] E. Jourdain and J. P. Roques, Ap. J. 704 , 17 (2009).\n\n- [9] H. Steinle et al., Astron. and Astrophys. 330 , 97\n\n- [16] C. Wilson-Hodge et al., Astron. Telegram 2280 (2009).\n\n- [15] G. L. Case et al. (2010), to be submitted.\n\n- [14] M. C. Bell et al., Ap. J. 659 , 549 (2007).\n\n- [13] L. Bouchet et al., Ap. J. 693 , 1871 (2009).\n\n- [12] G. L. Case et al., Chinese J. Astron. Astrophys. Suppl. 5 , 341 (2005).\n\n- [11] J. C. Ling and W. A. Wheaton, Chinese J. Astron. Astrophys. Suppl. 5 , 80 (2005).\n\n- [10] M. McConnell et al., Ap. J. 523 , 928 (2000).\n\n(1998).\n\neConf C091122" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.593940996157266, + "doc_id": "fe35f1a314f11a185e67a493ad3a6ae4b94b065a237523c34e572fe7efc44ec6", + "edit_distance": 0.6287566293459045, + "f1_score": 0.916535433070866, + "meteor": 0.41131736386208123, + "precision": 0.97, + "pred_md": "we find\n\n\n\n15\n\ncheck that equations (A39) and (A40) still hold, and also the Z -factors of Z 1 / 2 ϕ , Z 1 / 2 ϕ , Z 1 / 2 ω , Z 1 / 2 ω , Z T and Z R do not change. Only the renormalization of the sources U , V , M N , is different as they mix with respectively U ' , V ' , M ' , N ' . Indeed, we find that\n\nWe notice the close similarity between this counterterm and the one in expression (B3).\n\n## 4. The renormalization factors\n\nThe last step is to find all the renormalization factors. Due to the close similarity with the output of Appendix A, many Z factors will be the same. One can indeed\n\n- [1] V. N. Gribov, Nucl. Phys. B 139 (1978) 1.\n- [2] D. Zwanziger, Nucl. Phys. B 323 (1989) 513.\n- [3] G. Dell'Antonio and D. Zwanziger, Nucl. Phys. B 326 (1989) 333.\n- [4] D. Zwanziger, Nucl. Phys. B 399 (1993) 477.\n- [5] D. Zwanziger, Phys. Rev. D 65 (2002) 094039.\n- [6] J. A. Gracey, Phys. Lett. B 632 (2006) 282\n- [7] F. R. Ford and J. A. Gracey, J. Phys. A 42 (2009) 325402.\n- [8] K. I. Kondo, arXiv:0909.4866 [hep-th].\n- [9] K. I. Kondo, arXiv:0907.3249 [hep-th].\n- [10] K. I. Kondo, Phys. Lett. B 678 (2009) 322.\n- [11] A. Cucchieri and T. Mendes, PoS LAT2007 (2007) 297\n- [12] A. Cucchieri and T. Mendes, Phys. Rev. D 78 (2008) 094503.\n- [13] V. G. Bornyakov, V. K. Mitrjushkin and M. MullerPreussker, Phys. Rev. D 79 (2009) 074504.\n- [14] I. L. Bogolubsky, E. M. Ilgenfritz, M. Muller-Preussker and A. Sternbeck, Phys. Lett. B 676 (2009) 69.\n- [15] A. Maas, Phys. Rev. D 79 (2009) 014505.\n- [16] A. Maas, arXiv:0907.5185 [hep-lat].\n- [17] A. Maas, J. M. Pawlowski, D. Spielmann, A. Sternbeck and L. von Smekal, arXiv:0912.4203 [hep-lat].\n- [18] C. S. Fischer, A. Maas and J. M. Pawlowski, Annals Phys. 324 (2009) 2408.\n- [19] O. Oliveira and P. J. Silva, PoS LAT2007 (2007) 332.\n- [20] P. J. Silva and O. Oliveira, AIP Conf. Proc. 892 (2007) 220.\n- [21] D. Dudal, S. P. Sorella, N. Vandersickel and H. Verschelde, Phys. Rev. D 77 (2008) 071501.\n- [22] D. Dudal, J. A. Gracey, S. P. Sorella, N. Vandersickel and H. Verschelde, Phys. Rev. D 78 (2008) 065047.\n- [23] Ph. Boucaud, J. P. Leroy, A. L. Yaouanc, J. Micheli, O. Pene and J. Rodriguez-Quintero, JHEP 0806 (2008) 012.\n\n\n\nwhich again proves the renormalizability of the GribovZwanziger action. The consequences of this mixing shall be explained in sections II.B and III.B.\n\n- [24] Ph. Boucaud, J. P. Leroy, A. Le Yaouanc, J. Micheli, O. Pene and J. Rodriguez-Quintero, JHEP 0806 (2008) 099.\n- [25] A. C. Aguilar, D. Binosi and J. Papavassiliou, Phys. Rev. D 78 (2008) 025010.\n- [26] A. C. Aguilar, D. Binosi, J. Papavassiliou and J. Rodriguez-Quintero, Phys. Rev. D 80 (2009) 085018.\n- [27] M. Q. Huber, R. Alkofer and S. P. Sorella, Phys. Rev. D 81 (2010) 065003\n- [28] T. Kugo and I. Ojima, Prog. Theor. Phys. Suppl. 66 (1979) 1.\n- [29] T. Kugo, arXiv:hep-th/9511033.\n- [30] D. Dudal, R. F. Sobreiro, S. P. Sorella and H. Verschelde, Phys. Rev. D 72 (2005) 014016.\n- [31] D. Dudal, S. P. Sorella, N. Vandersickel and H. Verschelde, JHEP 0908 (2009) 110.\n- [32] D. Zwanziger, Nucl. Phys. B 412 (1994) 657.\n- [33] D. Dudal, S. P. Sorella, N. Vandersickel and H. Verschelde, Phys. Rev. D 79 (2009) 121701.\n- [34] D. Dudal , V. E. R. Lemes, M. S. Sarandy, S. P. Sorella, M. Picariello, A. Vicini, J. A. Gracey and H. Verschelde, JHEP 0306 (2003) 003.\n- [35] P. A. Grassi, T. Hurth and A. Quadri, Phys. Rev. D 70 (2004) 105014.\n- [36] Ph. Boucaud, J. P. Leroy, A. Le Yaouanc, J. Micheli, O. Pene and J. Rodriguez-Quintero, Phys. Rev. D 80 (2009) 094501.\n- [37] D. Dudal, S. P. Sorella, N. Vandersickel, H. Verschelde, work in progress .\n- [38] D. Dudal, O. Oliveira and N. Vandersickel, arXiv:1002.2374 [hep-lat].\n- [39] M. A. L. Capri, V. E. R. Lemes, R. F. Sobreiro, S. P. Sorella and R. Thibes, Annals Phys. 323 (2008) 752.", + "recall": 0.8686567164179104, + "true_md": "15\n\nwe find\n\nWe notice the close similarity between this counterterm and the one in expression (B3).\n\ncheck that equations (A39) and (A40) still hold, and also the Z -factors of Z 1 / 2 ϕ , Z 1 / 2 ϕ , Z 1 / 2 ω , Z 1 / 2 ω , Z$_{T}$ and Z$_{R}$ do not change. Only the renormalization of the sources U , V , M , N is different as they mix with respectively U $^{′}$, V $^{′}$, M $^{′}$, N $^{′}$. Indeed, we find that\n\nwhich again proves the renormalizability of the Gribov- Zwanziger action. The consequences of this mixing shall be explained in sections II.B and III.B.\n\nThe last step is to find all the renormalization factors. Due to the close similarity with the output of Appendix A, many Z factors will be the same. One can indeed\n\n- [24] Ph. Boucaud, J. P. Leroy, A. Le Yaouanc, J. Micheli, O. Pene and J. Rodriguez-Quintero, JHEP 0806 (2008) 099.\n\n- [25] A. C. Aguilar, D. Binosi and J. Papavassiliou, Phys. Rev. D 78 (2008) 025010.\n\n- [26] A. C. Aguilar, D. Binosi, J. Papavassiliou and J. Rodriguez-Quintero, Phys. Rev. D 80 (2009) 085018.\n\n- [27] M. Q. Huber, R. Alkofer and S. P. Sorella, Phys. Rev. D 81 (2010) 065003\n\n- [28] T. Kugo and I. Ojima, Prog. Theor. Phys. Suppl. 66 (1979) 1.\n\n- [29] T. Kugo, arXiv:hep-th/9511033.\n\n- [30] D. Dudal, R. F. Sobreiro, S. P. Sorella and H. Verschelde, Phys. Rev. D 72 (2005) 014016.\n\n- [31] D. Dudal, S. P. Sorella, N. Vandersickel and H. Ver- schelde, JHEP 0908 (2009) 110.\n\n- [32] D. Zwanziger, Nucl. Phys. B 412 (1994) 657.\n\n- [33] D. Dudal, S. P. Sorella, N. Vandersickel and H. Ver- schelde, Phys. Rev. D 79 (2009) 121701.\n\n- [34] D. Dudal , V. E. R. Lemes, M. S. Sarandy, S. P. Sorella, M. Picariello, A. Vicini, J. A. Gracey and H. Verschelde, JHEP 0306 (2003) 003.\n\n- [35] P. A. Grassi, T. Hurth and A. Quadri, Phys. Rev. D 70 (2004) 105014.\n\n- [36] Ph. Boucaud, J. P. Leroy, A. Le Yaouanc, J. Micheli, O. Pene and J. Rodriguez-Quintero, Phys. Rev. D 80 (2009) 094501.\n\n- [1] V. N. Gribov, Nucl. Phys. B 139 (1978) 1.\n\n- [2] D. Zwanziger, Nucl. Phys. B 323 (1989) 513.\n\n- [3] G. Dell’Antonio and D. Zwanziger, Nucl. Phys. B 326 (1989) 333.\n\n- [4] D. Zwanziger, Nucl. Phys. B 399 (1993) 477.\n\n- [5] D. Zwanziger, Phys. Rev. D 65 (2002) 094039.\n\n- [6] J. A. Gracey, Phys. Lett. B 632 (2006) 282\n\n- [7] F. R. Ford and J. A. Gracey, J. Phys. A 42 (2009) 325402.\n\n- [8] K. I. Kondo, arXiv:0909.4866 [hep-th].\n\n- [9] K. I. Kondo, arXiv:0907.3249 [hep-th].\n\n- [10] K. I. Kondo, Phys. Lett. B 678 (2009) 322.\n\n- [11] A. Cucchieri and T. Mendes, PoS LAT2007 (2007) 297\n\n- [12] A. Cucchieri and T. Mendes, Phys. Rev. D 78 (2008) 094503.\n\n- [13] V. G. Bornyakov, V. K. Mitrjushkin and M. Muller- Preussker, Phys. Rev. D 79 (2009) 074504.\n\n- [14] I. L. Bogolubsky, E. M. Ilgenfritz, M. Muller-Preussker and A. Sternbeck, Phys. Lett. B 676 (2009) 69.\n\n- [15] A. Maas, Phys. Rev. D 79 (2009) 014505.\n\n- [16] A. Maas, arXiv:0907.5185 [hep-lat].\n\n- [17] A. Maas, J. M. Pawlowski, D. Spielmann, A. Sternbeck and L. von Smekal, arXiv:0912.4203 [hep-lat].\n\n- [18] C. S. Fischer, A. Maas and J. M. Pawlowski, Annals Phys. 324 (2009) 2408.\n\n- [19] O. Oliveira and P. J. Silva, PoS LAT2007 (2007) 332.\n\n- [20] P. J. Silva and O. Oliveira, AIP Conf. Proc. 892 (2007) 220.\n\n- [21] D. Dudal, S. P. Sorella, N. Vandersickel and H. Ver- schelde, Phys. Rev. D 77 (2008) 071501.\n\n- [22] D. Dudal, J. A. Gracey, S. P. Sorella, N. Vandersickel and H. Verschelde, Phys. Rev. D 78 (2008) 065047.\n\n- [23] Ph. Boucaud, J. P. Leroy, A. L. Yaouanc, J. Micheli, O. Pene and J. Rodriguez-Quintero, JHEP 0806 (2008) 012.\n\n- [38] D. Dudal, O. Oliveira and N. Vandersickel, arXiv:1002.2374 [hep-lat].\n\n- [37] D. Dudal, S. P. Sorella, N. Vandersickel, H. Verschelde, work in progress .\n\n- [39] M. A. L. Capri, V. E. R. Lemes, R. F. Sobreiro, S. P. Sorella and R. Thibes, Annals Phys. 323 (2008) 752.\n\n## 4. The renormalization factors\n\n$$[ M$_{0}$ M ′ 0 ] = [ Z 1 / 2 g Z 1 / 4 A − a$_{1}$ 0 Z − 1 / 2 g Z − 1 / 4 A ][ M M ′ ] , [ U$_{0}$ U ′ 0 ] = [ Z 1 / 2 A − a$_{1}$ 0 Z − 1 g ] [ U U ′ ] , [ N$_{0}$ N ′ 0 ] = [ Z 1 g − a$_{1}$ 0 Z − 1 / 2 A ] [ N N ′ ] , [ V$_{0}$ V ′ 0 ] = [ Z 1 / 2 g Z 1 / 4 A − a$_{1}$ 0 Z − 1 / 2 g Z − 1 / 4 A ][ V V ′ ] , (B23)$$\n\n$$Σ (2) c GZ = a$_{0}$S$_{Y M}$ + a$_{1}$ ∫ d $^{d}$x ( A a µ δS$_{Y M}$ δA a µ + ∂$_{µ}$c $^{a}$∂$_{µ}$ c a + K a $_{µ}$∂$_{µ}$ c a + M ′ ai µ ∂$_{µ}$ϕ a i − U ′ ai µ ∂$_{µ}$ω a i + N ′ ai µ ∂$_{µ}$ω a i + V ′ ai µ ∂$_{µ}$ϕ ai µ + ∂$_{µ}$ϕ a $_{i}$∂$_{µ}$ ϕ a i + ∂$_{µ}$ω a i ∂$_{µ}$ω a i + V ′ ai µ M ′ ai µ − U ′ ai µ N ′ ai µ − gf$_{abc}$U ′ ia µ ϕ b $_{i}$∂$_{µ}$ c c − gf$_{abc}$V ′ ia µ ω b $_{i}$∂$_{µ}$ c c − gf$_{abc}$∂$_{µ}$ω $^{a}$ϕb $_{i}$∂$_{µ}$ c c − gf$_{abc}$R ai µ ∂$_{µ}$c $^{b}$ωc + gf$_{abc}$T ai µ ∂$_{µ}$c $^{b}$ϕc ) . (B22) the not change. Only the renormalization of the sources V V$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.04194672194327538, + "doc_id": "aa6acae5058d958319b3c4914433ea5496156619afe0f76534daa4ef1d33523b", + "edit_distance": 0.8444302176696543, + "f1_score": 0.8494983277591972, + "meteor": 0.2098026045549073, + "precision": 0.9202898550724637, + "pred_md": "Proof of CE trade-off in Theorem 4. The proof follows by noting that I ( AX B ; ) = H A X ( | ) + H B ( ) -H E X ( | ), H A X ( | ) = H 2 ( µ ), and that we have already computed H B ( ) and H E X ( | ) in the first part of the proof of Theorem 4.\n\n## Appendix F: CQ and CE Trade-off Curves for the Unruh Channel\n\nProof. The input state in (24) that traces out the CQ curve for the cloning channels also does so for the Unruh channel. We consider the purification of this state, so that the output state is as follows:\n\n\n\nLet N | 〉 〈 ( 0 0 ) | and N | 〉 〈 ( 1 1 ) | denote the Unruh channel outputs corresponding to the respective input states | 0 〉 〈 0 | A ' and | 1 〉 〈 1 | A ' :\n\n\n\nThe following states are useful for calculating the Holevo information:\n\n\n\n24\n\nwhere λ N i ( µ ) ≡ ( N -2 ) i µ + . i We then compute the entropies H B ( ) and H B X ( | ):\n\n\n\nObserve that the following relationships hold:\n\n\n\nThese relationships allow us to rewrite the expression in (F1) for H B X ( | ) as follows:\n\n\n\nand we get the Holevo information:\n\n\n\nThe Holevo information I ( X B ; ) coincides with the expression for the classical capacity of an Unruh channel when µ = 0 (Corollary 3, Equation (19) in Ref. [30], though note the slightly different definition of ∆ l in that paper):\n\n\n\nThe Holevo information vanishes when µ = 1 2. /\n\nWe now compute the coherent information. Let N c ( 0 | 〉 〈 0 ) | and N c ( 1 | 〉 〈 1 ) | denote the outputs of the complementary channel of the Unruh channel corresponding to the respective input states | 0 〉 〈 0 | A ' and", + "recall": 0.7888198757763976, + "true_md": "24\n\nwhere λ N i ( µ ) ≡ ( N − 2 i ) µ + i . We then compute the entropies H ( B ) and H ( B | X ):\n\nProof of CE trade-off in Theorem 4. The proof follows by noting that I ( AX ; B ) = H ( A | X ) + H ( B ) − H ( E | X ), H ( A | X ) = H$_{2}$ ( µ ), and that we have already computed H ( B ) and H ( E | X ) in the first part of the proof of Theorem 4.\n\nProof. The input state in (24) that traces out the CQ curve for the cloning channels also does so for the Unruh channel. We consider the purification of this state, so that the output state is as follows:\n\nObserve that the following relationships hold:\n\nLet N ( | 0 〉 〈 0 | ) and N ( | 1 〉 〈 1 | ) denote the Unruh chan- nel outputs corresponding to the respective input states | 0 〉〈 0 | A ′ and | 1 〉〈 1 | A $^{′}$:\n\nThese relationships allow us to rewrite the expression in (F1) for H ( B | X ) as follows:\n\n$$H ( B )$_{ρ}$ = − ∞ ∑ l =2 l − 1 ∑ i =0 p$_{l}$ ( z ) l log$^{(}$ p$_{l}$ ( z ) l ) = − ∞ ∑ l =2 p$_{l}$ ( z ) log$^{(}$ p$_{l}$ ( z ) l ) , H ( B | X )$_{ρ}$ = 1 2 $^{(}$H ( B )$_{ψ}$$_{0}$ + H ( B )$_{ψ}$$_{1}$ ) = − ∞ ∑ l =2 l − 1 ∑ i =0 p$_{l}$ ( z ) λ l − 1 i ( µ ) Δ$_{l}$$_{−}$$_{1}$ log$^{(}$ p$_{l}$ ( z ) λ l − 1 i ( µ ) Δ$_{l}$$_{−}$$_{1}$ ) . (F1)$$\n\n$$ρ XABE ≡ 1 2$^{[}$ | 0 〉〈 0 | X ⊗ ψ$_{0}$ ABE + | 1 〉〈 1 | X ⊗ ψ ABE 1 ] .$$\n\n$$l − 1 ∑ i =0 λ ( l − 1) i ( µ ) = Δ$_{l}$$_{−}$$_{1}$ , ∞ ∑ l =2 p$_{l}$ ( z ) = 1 .$$\n\n$$H ( B | X ) = H ( B ) − 1 + ∞ ∑ l =2 p$_{l}$ ( z ) log ( l − 1) − ∞ ∑ l =2 l − 1 ∑ i =0 p$_{l}$ ( z ) Δ$_{l}$$_{−}$$_{1}$ λ ( l − 1) i ( µ ) log$^{(}$ λ ( l − 1) i ( µ )$^{)}$ . (F2)$$\n\n## Appendix F: CQ and CE Trade-off Curves for the Unruh Channel\n\n$$N ( | 0 〉 〈 0 | ) ≡ ∞ ⊕ l =2 p$_{l}$ ( z ) S$_{l}$ ( | 0 〉 〈 0 | ) = ∞ ⊕ l =2 p$_{l}$ ( z ) Δ$_{l}$$_{−}$$_{1}$ l − 2 ∑ i =0 ( l − 1 − i ) | i 〉〈 i | $^{B}$, N ( | 1 〉 〈 1 | ) ≡ ∞ ⊕ l =2 p$_{l}$ ( z ) S$_{l}$ ( | 1 〉 〈 1 | ) = ∞ ⊕ l =2 p$_{l}$ ( z ) Δ$_{l}$$_{−}$$_{1}$ l − 2 ∑ i =0 ( i + 1) | i + 1 〉〈 i + 1 | $^{B}$.$$\n\n$$I ( X ; B ) = 1 − ∞ ∑ l =2 p$_{l}$ ( z ) log ( l − 1) + ∞ ∑ l =2 p$_{l}$ ( z ) Δ$_{l}$$_{−}$$_{1}$ l − 1 ∑ i =0 λ ( l − 1) i ( µ ) log$^{(}$ λ ( l − 1) i ( µ )$^{)}$ .$$\n\nand we get the Holevo information:\n\nThe following states are useful for calculating the Holevo information:\n\nThe Holevo information I ( X ; B ) coincides with the ex- pression for the classical capacity of an Unruh channel when µ = 0 (Corollary 3, Equation (19) in Ref. [30], though note the slightly different definition of Δ$_{l}$ in that paper):\n\nThe Holevo information vanishes when µ = 1 / 2.\n\nWe now compute the coherent information. Let N $^{c}$( | 0 〉 〈 0 | ) and N $^{c}$( | 1 〉 〈 1 | ) denote the outputs of the complementary channel of the Unruh channel corre- sponding to the respective input states | 0 〉〈 0 | A ′ and\n\n$$I ( X ; B )$_{µ}$$_{=0}$ = 1 − ∞ ∑ l =2 p$_{l}$ ( z ) log ( l − 1)+ ∞ ∑ l =2 p$_{l}$ ( z ) Δ$_{l}$$_{−}$$_{1}$ l − 1 ∑ i =0 i log i.$$\n\n$$ρ XB = 1 2$^{[}$ | 0 〉〈 0 | X ⊗ ψ B 0 + | 1 〉〈 1 | X ⊗ ψ B 1 ] . ψ B 0 = µ N ( | 0 〉 〈 0 | ) + (1 − µ ) N ( | 1 〉 〈 1 | ) = ∞ ⊕ l =2 p$_{l}$ ( z ) Δ$_{l}$$_{−}$$_{1}$ l − 1 ∑ i =0 λ l − 1 i ( µ ) | i 〉〈 i | $^{B}$, ψ B 1 = (1 − µ ) N ( | 0 〉 〈 0 | ) + µ N ( | 1 〉 〈 1 | ) = ∞ ⊕ l =2 p$_{l}$ ( z ) Δ$_{l}$$_{−}$$_{1}$ l − 1 ∑ i =0 λ l − 1 i (1 − µ ) | i 〉〈 i | $^{B}$, ρ B = 1 2$^{(}$ N ( | 0 〉 〈 0 | ) + N ( | 1 〉 〈 1 | )$^{)}$ = ∞ ⊕ l =2 p$_{l}$ ( z ) l l − 1 ∑ i =0 | i 〉〈 i | $^{B}$,$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9845839290077126, + "doc_id": "fb930291b35ef01ef1ebb3fad52a756e1f7c4bc37740dee86e03b55734de82cc", + "edit_distance": 0.611791730474732, + "f1_score": 0.9661971830985917, + "meteor": 0.6633502288170887, + "precision": 0.9661971830985916, + "pred_md": "- [9] C. H. Bennett, D. P. DiVincenzo, and J. A. Smolin, Phys. Rev. Lett. 78 , 3217 (1997).\n- [10] C. Adami and N. J. Cerf, Phys. Rev. A 56 , 3470 (1997).\n- [11] H. Barnum, M. A. Nielsen, and B. Schumacher, Phys. Rev. A 57 , 4153 (1998).\n- [12] C. H. Bennett, P. W. Shor, J. A. Smolin, and A. V. Thapliyal, Phys. Rev. Lett. 83 , 3081 (1999).\n- [13] C. Bennett, P. Shor, J. Smolin, and A. Thapliyal, IEEE Trans. Inf. Theory 48 , 2637 (2002).\n- [14] P. Shor, The quantum channel capacity and coherent information , Tech. Rep., Lecture Notes MSRI Workshop on quantum computation (2002), URL http://www.msri.org/publications/ln/msri/ 2002/quantumcrypto/shor/1/ .\n- [15] A. S. Holevo, J. Math. Phys. 43 , 4326 (2002).\n- [16] X. T. Liang, Mod. Phys. Lett. 16 , 19 (2002).\n- [17] S. Daffer, K. W' odkiewicz, and J. K. McIver, Phys. Rev. A 67 , 062312 (2003).\n- [18] P. W. Shor, Quantum Inf. Comput. 4 , 537 (2004).\n- [19] D. Kretschmann and R. F. Werner, New J. Phys. 6 , 26 (2004).\n- [20] I. Devetak, IEEE Trans. Inf. Theory 51 , 44 (2005).\n- [21] V. Giovannetti and R. Fazio, Phys. Rev. A 71 , 032314 (2005).\n- [22] M. M. Wolf and D. P' erez-Garc' ıa, Phys. Rev. A 75 , 012303 (2007).\n- [23] C. Macchiavello and G. M. Palma, Phys. Rev. A 65 , 050301 (2002).\n- [24] Y. Yeo and A. Skeen, Phys. Rev. A 67 , 064301 (2003).\n- [25] C. Macchiavello, G. M. Palma, and S. Virmani, Phys. Rev. A 69 , 010303 (2004).\n- [26] G. Bowen and S. Mancini, Phys. Rev. A 69 , 012306 (2004).\n- [27] N. Arshed and A. H. Toor, Phys. Rev. A 73 , 014304 (2006).\n- [28] A. D'Arrigo, G. Benenti, and G. Falci, New J. Phys. 9 , 310 (2007).\n- [29] M. B. Plenio and S. Virmani, Phys. Rev. Lett. 99 , 120504 (2007).\n- [30] A. Bayat, D. Burgarth, S. Mancini, and S. Bose, Phys. Rev. A 77 , 050306 (2008).\n- [31] H.-P. Breuer and F. Petruccione, The Theory of Open Quantum Systems (Oxford University Press, Oxford, 2002).\n- [32] H.-P. Breuer, E.-M. Laine, and J. Piilo, Phys. Rev. Lett. 103 , 210401 (2009).\n- [33] H. Carmichael, An open systems approach to quantum optics , no. m18 in Lecture notes in physics (Springer-Verlag, Berlin, 1993).\n\n8\n\n- [34] C. Slichter, Principles of Magnetic Resonance , no. 1 in Springer Series in Solid-State Sciences (Springer, Berlin, 1996).\n- [35] R. Alicki, D. A. Lidar, and P. Zanardi, Phys. Rev. A 73 , 052311 (2006).\n- [36] U. Weiss, Quantum Dissipative Systems (World Scientific, Singapore, 1993).\n- [37] A. Shabani and D. A. Lidar, Phys. Rev. A 71 , 020101(R) (2005).\n- [38] H. Krovi, O. Oreshkov, M. Ryazanov, and D. A. Lidar, Phys. Rev. A 76 , 052117 (2007).\n- [39] D. Loss and D. DiVincenzo, Phys. Rev. A 57 , 120 (1998).\n- [40] B. E. Kane, Nature 393 , 133 (1998).\n- [41] R. Vrijen, E. Yablonovitch, H. J. K. Wang, A. Balandin, V. Roychowdhury, T. Mor, and D. DiVincenzo, Phys. Rev. A 62 , 012306 (2000).\n- [42] J. Petta, A. Johnson, J. Taylor, E. Laird, A. Yacoby, M. D. Lukin, C. Marcus, M. Hanson, and A. C. Gossard, Science 309 , 2180 (2005).\n- [43] J. J. L. Morton, A. M. Tyryshkin, R. M. Brown, S. Shankar, B. W. Lovett, A. Ardavan, T. Schenkel, E. E. Haller, J. W. Ager, and S. A. Lyon, Nature 455 , 1085 (2008).\n- [44] S. Bose, Contemp. Phys 48 , 13 (2007).\n- [45] A. Hutton and S. Bose, Phys. Rev. A 69 , 042312 (2004).\n- [46] X.-Z. Yuan, H.-S. Goan, and K.-D. Zhu, Phys. Rev. B 75 , 045331 (2007).\n- [47] H.-P. Breuer, D. Burgarth, and F. Petruccione, Phys. Rev. B 70 , 045323 (2004).\n- [48] Y. Hamdouni, M. Fannes, and F. Petruccione, Phys. Rev. B 73 , 245323 (2006).\n- [49] A. Shabani and D. A. Lidar, Phys. Rev. Lett. 102 , 100402 (2009).\n- [50] C. King, K. Matsumoto, M. Nathanson, and M. B. Ruskai, Markov Process and Related Fields 13 , 391 (2007).\n- [51] I. Devetak and P. W. Shor, Commun. Math. Phys. 256 , 287 (2005).\n- [52] A. S. Holevo, Probl. Inf. Transm. 9 , 177 (1973).\n- [53] M. B. Hastings, Nature Phys. 5 , 255 (2009).\n- [54] P. W. Shor, Commun. Math. Phys. 246 , 453 (2004).\n- [55] T.A. Brun, I. Devetak, M.-H. Hsieh, Science 314 , 436 (2006).\n- [56] C. Bennett and S. Wiesner, Phys. Rev. Lett. 69 , 2881 (1992).\n- [57] C.H. Bennett, G. Brassard, C. Cr' epeau, R. Jozsa, A. Peres and W.K. Wootters, Phys. Rev. Lett. 70 , 1895 (1993).\n- [58] K. Kraus, Ann. of Phys. 64 , 311 (1977).", + "recall": 0.9661971830985916, + "true_md": "8\n\n- [34] C. Slichter, Principles of Magnetic Resonance , no. 1 in Springer Series in Solid-State Sciences (Springer, Berlin, 1996).\n\n- [9] C. H. Bennett, D. P. DiVincenzo, and J. A. Smolin, Phys. Rev. Lett. 78 , 3217 (1997).\n\n- [10] C. Adami and N. J. Cerf, Phys. Rev. A 56 , 3470 (1997).\n\n- [11] H. Barnum, M. A. Nielsen, and B. Schumacher, Phys. Rev. A 57 , 4153 (1998).\n\n- [12] C. H. Bennett, P. W. Shor, J. A. Smolin, and A. V. Thapliyal, Phys. Rev. Lett. 83 , 3081 (1999).\n\n- [13] C. Bennett, P. Shor, J. Smolin, and A. Thapliyal, IEEE Trans. Inf. Theory 48 , 2637 (2002).\n\n- [35] R. Alicki, D. A. Lidar, and P. Zanardi, Phys. Rev. A 73 , 052311 (2006).\n\n- [36] U. Weiss, Quantum Dissipative Systems (World Scientific, Sin- gapore, 1993).\n\n- [37] A. Shabani and D. A. Lidar, Phys. Rev. A 71 , 020101(R) (2005).\n\n- [38] H. Krovi, O. Oreshkov, M. Ryazanov, and D. A. Lidar, Phys. Rev. A 76 , 052117 (2007).\n\n- [39] D. Loss and D. DiVincenzo, Phys. Rev. A 57 , 120 (1998).\n\n- [40] B. E. Kane, Nature 393 , 133 (1998).\n\n- [41] R. Vrijen, E. Yablonovitch, H. J. K. Wang, A. Balandin, V. Roy- chowdhury, T. Mor, and D. DiVincenzo, Phys. Rev. A 62 , 012306 (2000).\n\n- [42] J. Petta, A. Johnson, J. Taylor, E. Laird, A. Yacoby, M. D. Lukin, C. Marcus, M. Hanson, and A. C. Gossard, Science 309 , 2180 (2005).\n\n- [14] P. Shor, The quantum channel capacity and coher- ent information , Tech. Rep., Lecture Notes MSRI Workshop on quantum computation (2002), URL http://www.msri.org/publications/ln/msri/ 2002/quantumcrypto/shor/1/ .\n\n- [15] A. S. Holevo, J. Math. Phys. 43 , 4326 (2002).\n\n- [16] X. T. Liang, Mod. Phys. Lett. 16 , 19 (2002).\n\n- [17] S. Daffer, K. W´odkiewicz, and J. K. McIver, Phys. Rev. A 67 , 062312 (2003).\n\n- [43] J. J. L. Morton, A. M. Tyryshkin, R. M. Brown, S. Shankar, B. W. Lovett, A. Ardavan, T. Schenkel, E. E. Haller, J. W. Ager, and S. A. Lyon, Nature 455 , 1085 (2008).\n\n- [44] S. Bose, Contemp. Phys 48 , 13 (2007).\n\n- [45] A. Hutton and S. Bose, Phys. Rev. A 69 , 042312 (2004).\n\n- [46] X.-Z. Yuan, H.-S. Goan, and K.-D. Zhu, Phys. Rev. B 75 , 045331 (2007).\n\n- [47] H.-P. Breuer, D. Burgarth, and F. Petruccione, Phys. Rev. B 70 , 045323 (2004).\n\n- [48] Y. Hamdouni, M. Fannes, and F. Petruccione, Phys. Rev. B 73 , 245323 (2006).\n\n- [18] P. W. Shor, Quantum Inf. Comput. 4 , 537 (2004).\n\n- [19] D. Kretschmann and R. F. Werner, New J. Phys. 6 , 26 (2004).\n\n- [20] I. Devetak, IEEE Trans. Inf. Theory 51 , 44 (2005).\n\n- [21] V. Giovannetti and R. Fazio, Phys. Rev. A 71 , 032314 (2005).\n\n- [22] M. M. Wolf and D. P´erez-Garc´ıa, Phys. Rev. A 75 , 012303 (2007).\n\n- [23] C. Macchiavello and G. M. Palma, Phys. Rev. A 65 , 050301 (2002).\n\n- [24] Y. Yeo and A. Skeen, Phys. Rev. A 67 , 064301 (2003).\n\n- [25] C. Macchiavello, G. M. Palma, and S. Virmani, Phys. Rev. A 69 , 010303 (2004).\n\n- [26] G. Bowen and S. Mancini, Phys. Rev. A 69 , 012306 (2004).\n\n- [27] N. Arshed and A. H. Toor, Phys. Rev. A 73 , 014304 (2006).\n\n- [28] A. D’Arrigo, G. Benenti, and G. Falci, New J. Phys. 9 , 310 (2007).\n\n- [29] M. B. Plenio and S. Virmani, Phys. Rev. Lett. 99 , 120504 (2007).\n\n- [30] A. Bayat, D. Burgarth, S. Mancini, and S. Bose, Phys. Rev. A 77 , 050306 (2008).\n\n- [31] H.-P. Breuer and F. Petruccione, The Theory of Open Quantum Systems (Oxford University Press, Oxford, 2002).\n\n- [32] H.-P. Breuer, E.-M. Laine, and J. Piilo, Phys. Rev. Lett. 103 , 210401 (2009).\n\n- [33] H. Carmichael, An open systems approach to quantum optics , no. m18 in Lecture notes in physics (Springer-Verlag, Berlin, 1993).\n\n- [58] K. Kraus, Ann. of Phys. 64 , 311 (1977).\n\n- [57] C.H. Bennett, G. Brassard, C. Cr´epeau, R. Jozsa, A. Peres and W.K. Wootters, Phys. Rev. Lett. 70 , 1895 (1993).\n\n- [56] C. Bennett and S. Wiesner, Phys. Rev. Lett. 69 , 2881 (1992).\n\n- [55] T.A. Brun, I. Devetak, M.-H. Hsieh, Science 314 , 436 (2006).\n\n- [54] P. W. Shor, Commun. Math. Phys. 246 , 453 (2004).\n\n- [53] M. B. Hastings, Nature Phys. 5 , 255 (2009).\n\n- [52] A. S. Holevo, Probl. Inf. Transm. 9 , 177 (1973).\n\n- [51] I. Devetak and P. W. Shor, Commun. Math. Phys. 256 , 287 (2005).\n\n- [50] C. King, K. Matsumoto, M. Nathanson, and M. B. Ruskai, Markov Process and Related Fields 13 , 391 (2007).\n\n- [49] A. Shabani and D. A. Lidar, Phys. Rev. Lett. 102 , 100402 (2009)." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8606369923865905, + "doc_id": "bd77b868dff43afe3885bf6bec9b64033be92a7358db513cc33185161555af01", + "edit_distance": 0.7645669291338583, + "f1_score": 0.8763505402160864, + "meteor": 0.6894290361214198, + "precision": 0.9170854271356784, + "pred_md": "- [13] Claude E. Shannon. A mathematical theory of communication. Bell System Technical Journal , 27:379-423, 1948.\n- [14] Matthew B. Hastings. Superadditivity of communication capacity using entangled inputs. Nature Physics , 5:255257, 2009.\n- [15] Patrick Hayden and Andreas Winter. Counterexamples to the maximal p-norm multiplicativity conjecture for all p > 1. Communications in Mathematical Physics , 284(1):263-280, November 2008.\n- [16] Motohisa Fukuda, Christopher King, and David Moser. Comments on Hastings' additivity counterexamples. arXiv:0905.3697 , 2009.\n- [17] Fernando G.S.L. Brandao and Michal Horodecki. On Hastings' counterexamples to the minimum output entropy additivity conjecture. arXiv:0907.3210 , 2009.\n- [18] David P. DiVincenzo, Peter W. Shor, and John A. Smolin. Quantum-channel capacity of very noisy channels. Physical Review A , 57(2):830-839, February 1998.\n- [19] Graeme Smith and John A. Smolin. Degenerate quantum codes for Pauli channels. Physical Review Letters , 98(3):030501, 2007.\n- [20] Peter W. Shor. The additivity conjecture in quantum information theory. Current Developments in Mathematics , 2005:173-189, 2007.\n- [21] Peter W. Shor. Equivalence of additivity questions in quantum information theory. Communications in Mathematical Physics , 246(3):453-472, April 2004.\n- [22] Grigori G. Amosov, Alexander S. Holevo, and R. F. Werner. On some additivity problems in quantum information theory. Problems of Information Transmission , 36(4):25, 2000.\n- [23] Christopher King. Additivity for unital qubit channels. Journal of Mathematical Physics , 43(10):4641-4653, 2002.\n- [24] Charles H. Bennett, David P. DiVincenzo, and John A. Smolin. Capacities of quantum erasure channels. Physical Review Letters , 78(16):3217-3220, April 1997.\n- [25] Christopher King, Keiji Matsumoto, Michael Nathanson, and Mary Beth Ruskai. Properties of conjugate channels with applications to additivity and multiplicativity. Markov Processes and Related Fields , 13(2):391-423, 2007. J. T. Lewis memorial issue.\n- [26] Peter W. Shor. Additivity of the classical capacity of entanglement-breaking quantum channels. Journal of Mathematical Physics , 43(9):4334-4340, 2002.\n- [27] Christopher King. The capacity of the quantum depolarizing channel. IEEE Transactions on Information Theory , 49(1):221-229, January 2003.\n- [28] Nilanjana Datta, Alexander S. Holevo, and Yuri Suhov. Additivity for transpose depolarizing channels. International Journal of Quantum Information , 4(1):85-98, 2006.\n- [29] Motohisa Fukuda. Extending additivity from symmetric to asymmetric channels. Journal of Physics A: Mathematical and General , 38(45):L753-L758, 2005.\n- [30] Kamil Br' adler. An infinite sequence of additive channels: the classical capacity of cloning channels. arXiv:0903.1638 , 2009.\n- [31] Igor Devetak and Peter W. Shor. The capacity of a quantum channel for simultaneous transmission of classical and quantum information. Communications in Mathematical Physics , 256:287-303, 2005.\n- [32] Toby S. Cubitt, Mary Beth Ruskai, and Graeme Smith. The structure of degradable quantum channels. Journal\n\n26\n\n- of Mathematical Physics , 49(10):102104, October 2008.\n- [33] Kamil Br' adler, Nicolas Dutil, Patrick Hayden, and Abubakr Muhammad. Conjugate degradability and the quantum capacity of cloning channels. arXiv:0909.3297 , 2009.\n- [34] Vittorio Giovannetti and Rosario Fazio. Informationcapacity description of spin-chain correlations. Physical Review A , 71(3):032314, March 2005.\n- [35] Kamil Br' adler, Patrick Hayden, and Prakash Panangaden. Private information via the Unruh effect. Journal of High Energy Physics , 2009(08):074, 2009.\n- [36] Charles H. Bennett, Peter W. Shor, John A. Smolin, and Ashish V. Thapliyal. Entanglement-assisted classical capacity of noisy quantum channels. Physical Review Letters , 83(15):3081-3084, October 1999.\n- [37] Charles H. Bennett, Peter W. Shor, John A. Smolin, and Ashish V. Thapliyal. Entanglement-assisted capacity of a quantum channel and the reverse Shannon theorem. IEEE Transactions on Information Theory , 48:2637-2655, 2002.\n- [38] Charles H. Bennett and Stephen J. Wiesner. Communication via oneand two-particle operators on Einstein-Podolsky-Rosen states. Physical Review Letters , 69(20):2881-2884, November 1992.\n- [39] Peter W. Shor. Quantum Information, Statistics, Probability (Dedicated to A. S. Holevo on the occasion of his 60th birthday) , chapter The classical capacity achievable by a quantum channel assisted by limited entanglement, pages 144-152. Rinton Press, Inc., (quant-ph/0402129), 2004.\n- [40] Min-Hsiu Hsieh and Mark M. Wilde. Entanglementassisted communication of classical and quantum information. arXiv:0811.4227 , 2008.\n- [41] Min-Hsiu Hsieh and Mark M. Wilde. Trading classical communication, quantum communication, and entanglement in quantum Shannon theory. arXiv:0901.3038 , 2009.\n- [42] Isaac Kremsky, Min-Hsiu Hsieh, and Todd A. Brun. Classical enhancement of quantum-error-correcting codes. Physical Review A , 78(1):012341, 2008.\n- [43] Mark M. Wilde and Todd A. Brun. Unified quantum convolutional coding. In Proceedings of the IEEE International Symposium on Information Theory (arXiv:0801.0821) , pages 359-363, July 2008.\n- [44] Igor Devetak, Aram W. Harrow, and Andreas Winter. A resource framework for quantum Shannon theory. IEEE Transactions on Information Theory , 54(10):4587-4618, October 2008.\n- [45] Igor Devetak, Aram W. Harrow, and Andreas Winter. A family of quantum protocols. Physical Review Letters , 93(23):230504, December 2004.\n- [46] Howard Barnum, Patrick Hayden, Richard Jozsa, and Andreas Winter. On the reversible extraction of classical information from a quantum source. Proceedings of the Royal Society A , 457(2012):2019-2039, July 2001.\n- [47] Patrick Hayden, Richard Jozsa, and Andreas Winter. Trading quantum for classical resources in quantum data compression. Journal of Mathematical Physics , 43(9):4404-4444, 2002.\n- [48] Masato Koashi and Nobuyuki Imoto. Teleportation cost and hybrid compression of quantum signals. arXiv:quantph/0104001 , 2001.\n- [49] Charles H. Bennett, Patrick Hayden, Debbie W. Leung, Peter W. Shor, and Andreas Winter. Remote preparation", + "recall": 0.8390804597701149, + "true_md": "26\n\nof Mathematical Physics , 49(10):102104, October 2008.\n\n- [13] Claude E. Shannon. A mathematical theory of communi- cation. Bell System Technical Journal , 27:379–423, 1948.\n\n- [33] Kamil Br´ adler, Nicolas Dutil, Patrick Hayden, and Abubakr Muhammad. Conjugate degradability and the quantum capacity of cloning channels. arXiv:0909.3297 , 2009.\n\n- [34] Vittorio Giovannetti and Rosario Fazio. Information- capacity description of spin-chain correlations. Physical Review A , 71(3):032314, March 2005.\n\n- [35] Kamil Br´ adler, Patrick Hayden, and Prakash Panan- gaden. Private information via the Unruh effect. Journal of High Energy Physics , 2009(08):074, 2009.\n\n- [36] Charles H. Bennett, Peter W. Shor, John A. Smolin, and Ashish V. Thapliyal. Entanglement-assisted classical ca- pacity of noisy quantum channels. Physical Review Let- ters , 83(15):3081–3084, October 1999.\n\n- [37] Charles H. Bennett, Peter W. Shor, John A. Smolin, and Ashish V. Thapliyal. Entanglement-assisted ca- pacity of a quantum channel and the reverse Shannon theorem. IEEE Transactions on Information Theory , 48:2637–2655, 2002.\n\n- [14] Matthew B. Hastings. Superadditivity of communication capacity using entangled inputs. Nature Physics , 5:255– 257, 2009.\n\n- [15] Patrick Hayden and Andreas Winter. Counterexamples to the maximal p-norm multiplicativity conjecture for all p > 1. Communications in Mathematical Physics , 284(1):263–280, November 2008.\n\n- [16] Motohisa Fukuda, Christopher King, and David Moser. Comments on Hastings’ additivity counterexamples. arXiv:0905.3697 , 2009.\n\n- [17] Fernando G.S.L. Brandao and Michal Horodecki. On Hastings’ counterexamples to the minimum output en- tropy additivity conjecture. arXiv:0907.3210 , 2009.\n\n- [18] David P. DiVincenzo, Peter W. Shor, and John A. Smolin. Quantum-channel capacity of very noisy chan- nels. Physical Review A , 57(2):830–839, February 1998.\n\n- [19] Graeme Smith and John A. Smolin. Degenerate quan- tum codes for Pauli channels. Physical Review Letters , 98(3):030501, 2007.\n\n- [38] Charles H. Bennett and Stephen J. Wiesner. Com- munication via one- and two-particle operators on Einstein-Podolsky-Rosen states. Physical Review Letters , 69(20):2881–2884, November 1992.\n\n- [20] Peter W. Shor. The additivity conjecture in quantum in- formation theory. Current Developments in Mathematics , 2005:173–189, 2007.\n\n- [21] Peter W. Shor. Equivalence of additivity questions in quantum information theory. Communications in Math- ematical Physics , 246(3):453–472, April 2004.\n\n- [22] Grigori G. Amosov, Alexander S. Holevo, and R. F. Werner. On some additivity problems in quantum infor- mation theory. Problems of Information Transmission , 36(4):25, 2000.\n\n- [23] Christopher King. Additivity for unital qubit chan- nels. Journal of Mathematical Physics , 43(10):4641–4653, 2002.\n\n- [39] Peter W. Shor. Quantum Information, Statistics, Prob- ability (Dedicated to A. S. Holevo on the occasion of his 60th birthday) , chapter The classical capacity achievable by a quantum channel assisted by limited entanglement, pages 144–152. Rinton Press, Inc., (quant-ph/0402129), 2004.\n\n- [40] Min-Hsiu Hsieh and Mark M. Wilde. Entanglement- assisted communication of classical and quantum infor- mation. arXiv:0811.4227 , 2008.\n\n- [41] Min-Hsiu Hsieh and Mark M. Wilde. Trading classi- cal communication, quantum communication, and entan- glement in quantum Shannon theory. arXiv:0901.3038 , 2009.\n\n- [24] Charles H. Bennett, David P. DiVincenzo, and John A. Smolin. Capacities of quantum erasure channels. Physical Review Letters , 78(16):3217–3220, April 1997.\n\n- [25] Christopher King, Keiji Matsumoto, Michael Nathanson, and Mary Beth Ruskai. Properties of conjugate chan- nels with applications to additivity and multiplicativ- ity. Markov Processes and Related Fields , 13(2):391–423, 2007. J. T. Lewis memorial issue.\n\n- [42] Isaac Kremsky, Min-Hsiu Hsieh, and Todd A. Brun. Clas- sical enhancement of quantum-error-correcting codes. Physical Review A , 78(1):012341, 2008.\n\n- [43] Mark M. Wilde and Todd A. Brun. Unified quan- tum convolutional coding. In Proceedings of the IEEE International Symposium on Information Theory (arXiv:0801.0821) , pages 359–363, July 2008.\n\n- [44] Igor Devetak, Aram W. Harrow, and Andreas Winter. A resource framework for quantum Shannon theory. IEEE Transactions on Information Theory , 54(10):4587–4618, October 2008.\n\n- [26] Peter W. Shor. Additivity of the classical capacity of entanglement-breaking quantum channels. Journal of Mathematical Physics , 43(9):4334–4340, 2002.\n\n- [27] Christopher King. The capacity of the quantum depolar- izing channel. IEEE Transactions on Information The- ory , 49(1):221–229, January 2003.\n\n- [28] Nilanjana Datta, Alexander S. Holevo, and Yuri Suhov. Additivity for transpose depolarizing channels. Inter- national Journal of Quantum Information , 4(1):85–98, 2006.\n\n- [45] Igor Devetak, Aram W. Harrow, and Andreas Winter. A family of quantum protocols. Physical Review Letters , 93(23):230504, December 2004.\n\n- [46] Howard Barnum, Patrick Hayden, Richard Jozsa, and Andreas Winter. On the reversible extraction of classical information from a quantum source. Proceedings of the Royal Society A , 457(2012):2019–2039, July 2001.\n\n- [47] Patrick Hayden, Richard Jozsa, and Andreas Winter. Trading quantum for classical resources in quantum data compression. Journal of Mathematical Physics , 43(9):4404–4444, 2002.\n\n- [48] Masato Koashi and Nobuyuki Imoto. Teleportation cost and hybrid compression of quantum signals. arXiv:quant- ph/0104001 , 2001.\n\n- [49] Charles H. Bennett, Patrick Hayden, Debbie W. Leung, Peter W. Shor, and Andreas Winter. Remote preparation\n\n- [29] Motohisa Fukuda. Extending additivity from symmetric to asymmetric channels. Journal of Physics A: Mathe- matical and General , 38(45):L753–L758, 2005.\n\n- [30] Kamil Br´ adler. An infinite sequence of additive channels: the classical capacity of cloning channels. arXiv:0903.1638 , 2009.\n\n- [31] Igor Devetak and Peter W. Shor. The capacity of a quan- tum channel for simultaneous transmission of classical and quantum information. Communications in Mathe- matical Physics , 256:287–303, 2005.\n\n- [32] Toby S. Cubitt, Mary Beth Ruskai, and Graeme Smith. The structure of degradable quantum channels. Journal" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.18008397184423888, + "doc_id": "73e9118e89cbe4c2d3a3ace62e68df9a62138b19d18cbd638486f56af2ad48e5", + "edit_distance": 0.7878063359234907, + "f1_score": 0.9026548672566371, + "meteor": 0.3058780097591529, + "precision": 0.966824644549763, + "pred_md": "## Appendix A: Single-letterization of the Plane in (17)\n\nThe following additivity lemma aids in proving the additivity of the plane in (17).\n\nLemma 7 The following additivity relation holds for any two quantum channels N 1 and N 2 :\n\n\n\nProof. The inequality h ( N ⊗N 1 2 ) ≥ h ( N 1 )+ h ( N 2 ) trivially holds for all quantum channels, because the maximization on the RHS is a restriction of the maximization in the LHS to a tensor product of states of the form in (15). Therefore, we prove the non-trivial inequality h ( N ⊗N 1 2 ) ≤ h ( N 1 ) + h ( N 2 ).\n\nLet\n\n\n\nwhere U A j → B E j j j is the isometric extension of N j . Suppose further that ρ is the state that maximizes h ( N ⊗N 1 2 ).\n\nThe following chain of inequalities holds for any two channels N 1 and N 2 :\n\n\n\nThe first equality holds because ρ is the state that maximizes h ( N ⊗N 1 2 ). The second equality follows from straightforward entropic manipulations by noting that the state ρ on systems A B , 1 , B 2 , E 1 , and E 2 is pure when conditioned on X . The first inequality follows from an application of strong subadditivity [61] and subadditivity. The next three equalities follow by straightforward entropic manipulations. The last inequality follows from the definition of h in (20) and the fact that both θ and ω are states of the form in (15).\n\nProof of Lemma 1. The proof follows from Lemma 7 in the same way as Corollary 1 does from Lemma 4.\n\nWe remark that the above lemma follows from the single-letterization of the entanglement-assisted classical capacity [37], but we have included the result for completeness.\n\n## Appendix B: Proof of the Single-letterization of the CE Trade-off Curve for Hadamard channels\n\nLemma 8 For any fixed λ ≥ 0 , the function in (23) leads to a point ( I ( AX B ; ) ρ , H ( A X | ) ρ ) on the one-shot CE trade-off curve in the sense of Theorem 3.\n\nProof. We argue by contradiction. Suppose that ρ XAB maximizes (23). Suppose further that it does not lead\n\nto a point on the CE trade-off curve. That is, given the constraint C = I ( AX B ; ) ρ , there exists some other state σ XAB of the form in (15) such that I ( AX B ; ) σ = I ( AX B ; ) ρ = C , but E = H A X ( | ) σ < H A X ( | ) ρ . That is, the state σ allows for communication of as much classical information as the state ρ does, but consumes less entanglement. But then the following inequality holds for all λ ≥ 0:\n\n\n\ncontradicting the fact that the state ρ XAB maximizes (23).\n\nLemma 9 We get all points on the CE trade-off curve by considering 0 ≤ λ ≤ 1 in the maximization in (23) because the maximization optimizes only the classical capacity when λ > 1 .\n\nProof. Consider a state ρ XABE of the form in (15). Suppose that we perform a von Neumann measurement of the system A , resulting in a classical variable Y , and let σ XYBE denote the resulting state. The following chain\n\n19", + "recall": 0.8464730290456431, + "true_md": "19\n\nThe following additivity lemma aids in proving the ad- ditivity of the plane in (17).\n\nLemma 7 The following additivity relation holds for any two quantum channels N$_{1}$ and N$_{2}$ :\n\nwhere U A$_{j}$ → B$_{j}$E$_{j}$ j is the isometric extension of N$_{j}$ . Suppose further that ρ is the state that maximizes h ( N$_{1}$ ⊗ N$_{2}$ ).\n\nProof. The inequality h ( N$_{1}$ ⊗N$_{2}$ ) ≥ h ( N$_{1}$ )+ h ( N$_{2}$ ) triv- ially holds for all quantum channels, because the maxi- mization on the RHS is a restriction of the maximization in the LHS to a tensor product of states of the form in (15). Therefore, we prove the non-trivial inequality h ( N$_{1}$ ⊗ N$_{2}$ ) ≤ h ( N$_{1}$ ) + h ( N$_{2}$ ).\n\nLet\n\n## Appendix A: Single-letterization of the Plane in (17)\n\n$$ψ XAA$_{1}$A$_{2}$ ≡ ∑ x p$_{X}$ ( x ) | x 〉〈 x | X ⊗ | ϕ$_{x}$ 〉〈 ϕ$_{x}$ | AA$_{1}$$^{A$_{2}$}$, θ XAB$_{1}$E$_{1}$A$_{2}$ ≡ U$_{1}$ψU † $_{1}$, ω XAA$_{1}$B$_{2}$E$_{2}$ ≡ U$_{2}$ψU † $_{2}$, ρ XAB$_{1}$E$_{1}$B$_{2}$E$_{2}$ ≡ ( U$_{1}$ ⊗ U$_{2}$ ) ψ ( U$_{1}$ ⊗ U$_{2}$ ) $^{†}$,$$\n\n$$h ( N$_{1}$ ⊗ N$_{2}$ ) = h ( N$_{1}$ ) + h ( N$_{2}$ ) .$$\n\n$$h ( N$_{1}$ ⊗ N$_{2}$ ) = I ( AX ; B$_{1}$B$_{2}$ )$_{ρ}$ = H ( B$_{1}$B$_{2}$ | E$_{1}$E$_{2}$X )$_{ρ}$ + H ( B$_{1}$B$_{2}$ )$_{ρ}$ ≤ H ( B$_{1}$ | E$_{1}$X )$_{ρ}$ + H ( B$_{1}$ )$_{ρ}$ + H ( B$_{2}$ | E$_{2}$X )$_{ρ}$ + H ( B$_{2}$ )$_{ρ}$ , = H ( B$_{1}$E$_{1}$ | X )$_{ρ}$ − H ( E$_{1}$ | X )$_{ρ}$ + H ( B$_{1}$ )$_{ρ}$ + H ( B$_{2}$E$_{2}$ | X )$_{ρ}$ − H ( E$_{2}$ | X )$_{ρ}$ + H ( B$_{2}$ )$_{ρ}$ = H ( AA$_{2}$ | X )$_{θ}$ − H ( AA$_{2}$B$_{1}$ | X )$_{θ}$ + H ( B$_{1}$ )$_{θ}$ + H ( AA$_{1}$ | X )$_{ω}$ − H ( AA$_{1}$B$_{1}$ | X )$_{ω}$ + H ( B$_{2}$ )$_{ω}$ = I ( AA$_{2}$X ; B$_{1}$ )$_{θ}$ + I ( AA$_{1}$X ; B$_{2}$ )$_{ω}$ ≤ h ( N$_{1}$ ) + h ( N$_{2}$ ) .$$\n\nThe following chain of inequalities holds for any two channels N$_{1}$ and N$_{2}$ :\n\nto a point on the CE trade-off curve. That is, given the constraint C = I ( AX ; B )$_{ρ}$, there exists some other state σ XAB of the form in (15) such that I ( AX ; B )$_{σ}$ = I ( AX ; B )$_{ρ}$ = C , but E = H ( A | X )$_{σ}$ < H ( A | X )$_{ρ}$. That is, the state σ allows for communication of as much clas- sical information as the state ρ does, but consumes less entanglement. But then the following inequality holds for all λ ≥ 0:\n\nThe first equality holds because ρ is the state that max- imizes h ( N$_{1}$ ⊗ N$_{2}$ ). The second equality follows from straightforward entropic manipulations by noting that the state ρ on systems A , B$_{1}$ , B$_{2}$ , E$_{1}$ , and E$_{2}$ is pure when conditioned on X . The first inequality follows from an application of strong subadditivity [61] and subaddi- tivity. The next three equalities follow by straightforward entropic manipulations. The last inequality follows from the definition of h in (20) and the fact that both θ and ω are states of the form in (15).\n\nProof of Lemma 1. The proof follows from Lemma 7 in the same way as Corollary 1 does from Lemma 4.\n\nWe remark that the above lemma follows from the single-letterization of the entanglement-assisted classical capacity [37], but we have included the result for com- pleteness.\n\ncontradicting the fact that the state ρ XAB maximizes (23).\n\n$$I ( AX ; B )$_{σ}$ − λH ( A | X )$_{σ}$ > I ( AX ; B )$_{ρ}$ − λH ( A | X )$_{ρ}$ ,$$\n\nLemma 9 We get all points on the CE trade-off curve by considering 0 ≤ λ ≤ 1 in the maximization in (23) because the maximization optimizes only the classical ca- pacity when λ > 1 .\n\nProof. Consider a state ρ XABE of the form in (15). Suppose that we perform a von Neumann measurement of the system A , resulting in a classical variable Y , and let σ XY BE denote the resulting state. The following chain\n\nProof. We argue by contradiction. Suppose that ρ XAB maximizes (23). Suppose further that it does not lead\n\nLemma 8 For any fixed λ ≥ 0 , the function in (23) leads to a point ( I ( AX ; B )$_{ρ}$ ,H ( A | X )$_{ρ}$) on the one-shot CE trade-off curve in the sense of Theorem 3.\n\n## Appendix B: Proof of the Single-letterization of the CE Trade-off Curve for Hadamard channels" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6416396115204356, + "doc_id": "1b4f88eb36633118e9c2febe9842e3104ab3e9b9f104d2bb8fd92c6ad9a32c92", + "edit_distance": 0.8857958600999286, + "f1_score": 0.90625, + "meteor": 0.5148238317483598, + "precision": 0.9354838709677419, + "pred_md": "FIG. 2: The ξ s ( σ, π ) correlation function. We plot for three contours of ξ s ( σ, π ) = 1 0 1 0 01 (from the inner to outer contour). , . , . In the upper panel, the solid curves are for a ΛCDM cosmology, while the dash and dotted curves are for models with g b = 1 5 and . 2 respectively. In the lower panel, the solid curves are for a ΛCDM cosmology, while the dash and dotted curves are for models with g Θ m = 1 5 and 2 respectively. .\n\nFIG. 2: The ξ s ( σ, π ) correlation function. We plot for three contours of ξ s ( σ, π ) = 1 0 1 0 01 (from the inner to outer contour). , . , . In the upper panel, the solid curves are for a ΛCDM cosmology, while the dash and dotted curves are for models with g b = 1 5 and . 2 respectively. In the lower panel, the solid curves are for a ΛCDM cosmology, while the dash and dotted curves are for models with g Θ m = 1 5 and 2 respectively. .\n\nwhere P l ( µ ) is the Legendre polynomial and the spherical harmonic moment ξ ∗ l ( r ) is given by,\n\n\n\nwhere j l is a spherical Bessel function and ∗ denotes scaling of the shape factor with A ∗ 2 S .\n\nAs discussed above, we ignore the effect on ξ s ( σ, π ) of the small-scale velocity dispersions within a single dark matter halo [32] as the effect is only a few percent, and split Eqn. 6 into a shape-dependent part ( ξ ∗ l ( r )), which is determined by the cosmological parameters ( n S and ω m ), and a coherent evolution component, which is parameterised by g ∗ b i , g ∗ Θ m i at the targeted redshift z i . The shape part is therefore almost completely determined by CMB priors, while the coherent evolution of structure formation can be determined from fitting ξ s ( σ, π ), in redshift-space, as a function of redshift.\n\nIn Figure 1, we present the effect of CMB priors on the value of ξ ∗ l ( r ). In the top panel of Fig. 1, we provide the expected variation in ξ ∗ l ( r ) from varying ω m . We see that varying a eq causes greater tilting in the shape of ξ ∗ l ( r ), since larger scale modes can come into the horizon earlier. In addition to this contribution, the overall amplitude of ξ ∗ l ( r ) depends on ω m by a weighted transformation between D Φ ( k ) and D m ( k ). Considering the marginalisation over CMB priors, we expect a discrepancy of /similarequal 5% with WMAP5 measurements, and just a\n\n4\n\nfew percent effect with the projected Planck priors.\n\nIn the bottom panel of Fig. 1, the dependence of ξ ∗ l ( r ) on n S is given for both WMAP5 and Planck priors. The overall shifting can be re-scaled by adjusting the pivot point to the effective median scale of the survey. With the measured WMAP5 prior of ∆ n S = 0 015 [36], we ex-. pect variations of a few percent on the shape, while for an estimated Planck prior of ∆ n S = 0 0071 [37], we expect . ξ ∗ l ( r ) to be nearly invariant to n S . The shape of ξ ∗ l ( r ) is affected maximally during the intermediate epoch, from horizon crossing to the matter-radiation epoch. The decay rate of the inhomogeneities differs by the ratio between matter and radiation energy densities.\n\nOnce CMB constraints are placed on the shape part of Eqn. 6, the coherent history of structure formation is obtained from the anisotropic moment of ξ s ( σ, π ). Even though both g ∗ b i and g ∗ Θ m i weight the evolution sector simultaneously, their contribution to ξ s ( σ, π ) are different, which enables us to discriminate g ∗ Θ m i from g ∗ b i . In the monopole moment, g ∗ b i is the dominant component since g ∗ b i > g ∗ Θ m i unless their is an excessive bulk flow. Thus the variation of g ∗ b i generates a near isotropic amplification as illustrated in the top panel of Figure 2. In the quadrupole moment, the cross-correlation between δ m and Θ m is leading order. The reversed sign of the quadrupole moment results in the squashing effect, and it is sensitive to the variation of g ∗ Θ m i as the crosscorrelation is the leading order. In the bottom panel of Figure 2 the variation of g ∗ Θ m i mainly contributes to the anisotropic moment. It is this signal which allows both g ∗ b i and g ∗ Θ m i to be probed separately using the anisotropic structure of ξ s ( σ, π ). The contribution from the term having peculiar velocity autocorrelation is not significant if excessive bulk flows are excluded.\n\n## C. Implication for cosmology from measuring g ∗ b i and g ∗ Θ m i\n\nA measurement of g ∗ Θ m i is equivalent to the quantity fσ mass 8 [14] and therefore, an excellent test of dark energy models (where f is the logarithmic derivative of the linear growth rate and σ mass 8 is the root-mean-square mass fluctuation in spheres with radius 8 h -1 Mpc). While cosmological test of g ∗ Θ m i are free from bias, which is notoriously difficult to measure accurately in a modelindependent way, the reported value of g ∗ Θ m i does depend on the normalization which is also poorly constrained (i.e., primordial amplitude) or model-dependent (i.e., σ mass 8 ).\n\nThus, we introduce a more convenient parameterisation of peculiar velocity which is independent of these normalization issues. The measured g ∗ Θ m i (in the redshift bin i ) which can be translated into the one-dimensional (1-D) velocity dispersion in that redshift bin ( v i p ) by,\n\n", + "recall": 0.8787878787878788, + "true_md": "4\n\nfew percent effect with the projected Planck priors.\n\nIn the bottom panel of Fig. 1, the dependence of ξ ∗ l ( r ) on n$_{S}$ is given for both WMAP5 and Planck priors. The overall shifting can be re-scaled by adjusting the pivot point to the effective median scale of the survey. With the measured WMAP5 prior of Δ n$_{S}$ = 0 . 015 [36], we ex- pect variations of a few percent on the shape, while for an estimated Planck prior of Δ n$_{S}$ = 0 . 0071 [37], we expect ξ ∗ l ( r ) to be nearly invariant to n$_{S}$ . The shape of ξ ∗ l ( r ) is affected maximally during the intermediate epoch, from horizon crossing to the matter-radiation epoch. The de- cay rate of the inhomogeneities differs by the ratio be- tween matter and radiation energy densities.\n\nOnce CMB constraints are placed on the shape part of Eqn. 6, the coherent history of structure formation is obtained from the anisotropic moment of ξ$_{s}$ ( σ, π ). Even though both g ∗ b i and g ∗ Θ$_{m}$ i weight the evolution sector simultaneously, their contribution to ξ$_{s}$ ( σ, π ) are differ- ent, which enables us to discriminate g ∗ Θ$_{m}$ i from g ∗ $_{b i}$. In the monopole moment, g ∗ b i is the dominant component since g ∗ b i > g ∗ Θ$_{m}$ i unless their is an excessive bulk flow. Thus the variation of g ∗ b i generates a near isotropic am- plification as illustrated in the top panel of Figure 2. In the quadrupole moment, the cross-correlation between δ$_{m}$ and Θ$_{m}$ is leading order. The reversed sign of the quadrupole moment results in the squashing effect, and it is sensitive to the variation of g ∗ Θ$_{m}$ i as the cross- correlation is the leading order. In the bottom panel of Figure 2 the variation of g ∗ Θ$_{m}$ i mainly contributes to the anisotropic moment. It is this signal which allows both g ∗ b i and g ∗ Θ$_{m}$ i to be probed separately using the anisotropic structure of ξ$_{s}$ ( σ, π ). The contribution from the term having peculiar velocity autocorrelation is not significant if excessive bulk flows are excluded.\n\n## C. Implication for cosmology from measuring g ∗ b i and g ∗ Θ$_{m}$ i\n\nA measurement of g ∗ Θ$_{m}$ i is equivalent to the quantity fσ mass 8 [14] and therefore, an excellent test of dark en- ergy models (where f is the logarithmic derivative of the linear growth rate and σ mass 8 is the root-mean-square mass fluctuation in spheres with radius 8 h − $^{1}$Mpc). While cosmological test of g ∗ Θ$_{m}$ i are free from bias, which is notoriously difficult to measure accurately in a model– independent way, the reported value of g ∗ Θ$_{m}$ i does depend on the normalization which is also poorly constrained (i.e., primordial amplitude) or model–dependent (i.e., σ mass 8 ).\n\nFIG. 2: The ξ$_{s}$ ( σ, π ) correlation function. We plot for three con- tours of ξ$_{s}$ ( σ, π ) = 1 , 0 . 1 , 0 . 01 (from the inner to outer contour). In the upper panel, the solid curves are for a ΛCDM cosmology, while the dash and dotted curves are for models with g$_{b}$ = 1 . 5 and 2 respectively. In the lower panel, the solid curves are for a ΛCDM cosmology, while the dash and dotted curves are for models with g$_{Θ}$$\\_{m}$ = 1 . 5 and 2 respectively.\n\nwhere P$_{l}$ ( µ ) is the Legendre polynomial and the spherical harmonic moment ξ ∗ l ( r ) is given by,\n\n$$ξ ∗ l ( r ) = ∫ k $^{2}$dk 2 π 2 D ∗ $_{m}$( k ) j$_{l}$ ( kr ) , (7)$$\n\nwhere j$_{l}$ is a spherical Bessel function and ∗ denotes scal- ing of the shape factor with A ∗ 2 S . As discussed above, we ignore the effect on ξ$_{s}$ ( σ, π ) of\n\nS As discussed above, we ignore the effect on ξ$_{s}$ ( σ, π ) of the small-scale velocity dispersions within a single dark matter halo [32] as the effect is only a few percent, and split Eqn. 6 into a shape–dependent part ( ξ ∗ l ( r )), which is determined by the cosmological parameters ( n$_{S}$ and ω$_{m}$ ), and a coherent evolution component, which is pa- rameterised by g ∗ $_{b i}$, g ∗ Θ$_{m}$ i at the targeted redshift z$_{i}$ . The shape part is therefore almost completely determined by CMB priors, while the coherent evolution of structure formation can be determined from fitting ξ$_{s}$ ( σ, π ), in redshift–space, as a function of redshift.\n\nIn Figure 1, we present the effect of CMB priors on the value of ξ ∗ l ( r ). In the top panel of Fig. 1, we provide the expected variation in ξ ∗ l ( r ) from varying ω$_{m}$ . We see that varying a$_{eq}$ causes greater tilting in the shape of ξ ∗ l ( r ), since larger scale modes can come into the hori- zon earlier. In addition to this contribution, the overall amplitude of ξ ∗ l ( r ) depends on ω$_{m}$ by a weighted trans- formation between D Φ ( k ) and D$_{m}$ ( k ). Considering the marginalisation over CMB priors, we expect a discrep- ancy of ≃ 5% with WMAP5 measurements, and just a\n\nThus, we introduce a more convenient parameterisa- tion of peculiar velocity which is independent of these normalization issues. The measured g ∗ Θ$_{m}$ i (in the redshift bin i ) which can be translated into the one-dimensional (1-D) velocity dispersion in that redshift bin ( v i $_{p}$) by,\n\n$$v i 2 p = g ∗ 2 Θ$_{m}$ i H 2 3 ∫ ∞ 0 dk k D$_{m}$ ( k ) dk. (8)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.809811624394428, + "doc_id": "cb5f1e36cfe39757ee8bf100a46a94f58709f29111339f7687b641f04dc5df1b", + "edit_distance": 0.755688622754491, + "f1_score": 0.9329073482428113, + "meteor": 0.8136285653808403, + "precision": 0.9573770491803278, + "pred_md": "4\n\n2009 Fermi Symposium, Washington, D.C., Nov. 2-5\n\nFigure 1: (Left) The preliminary significance measured from each of the 49 non-detected candidates using standard analysis cuts. The curve shows a Gaussian distribution, with mean zero and standard deviation one, normalized to the number of blazars. A similar result is obtained using analysis cuts optimized for soft-spectrum sources. (Right) The distribution of flux upper limits for the non-detected blazars in percentage of Crab Nebula flux above the observation threshold. The time-weighted average limit is less than ∼ 2% Crab flux.\n\nFigure 1: (Left) The preliminary significance measured from each of the 49 non-detected candidates using standard analysis cuts. The curve shows a Gaussian distribution, with mean zero and standard deviation one, normalized to the number of blazars. A similar result is obtained using analysis cuts optimized for soft-spectrum sources. (Right) The distribution of flux upper limits for the non-detected blazars in percentage of Crab Nebula flux above the observation threshold. The time-weighted average limit is less than ∼ 2% Crab flux.\n\nσ\n\nsince the launch of Fermi include LAT detections. In addition, several MWL campaigns on the well-studied VHE blazars Mkn 421 and Mkn 501 (please see the contributions of D. Gall and A. Konopelko in these proceedings) were also performed. Highlights of these campaigns include:\n\n- · 1ES 2344+514: A major (50% Crab) VHE flare, along with correlations of the VHE and X-ray flux were observed from this HBL. The VHE and X-ray spectra harden during bright states, and a synchrotron self-Compton (SSC) model can explain the observed SED in both the high and low states [26].\n- · 1ES 1218+304: This HBL flared during VERITAS MWL observations. Its unusually hard VHE spectrum strongly constrains the EBL. The observed flaring rules out kpc-scale jet emission as the explanation of the spectral hardness and places the EBL constraints on more solidfooting [27, 28].\n- · 1ES 0806+524: The observed SED of this new VHE HBL can be explained by an SSC model [16].\n- · W Comae: This IBL, the first discovered at VHE, flared twice in 2008 [14, 15]. Modeling of the SED is improved by including an externalCompton (EC) component in an SSC interpretation.\n- · 3C 66A: This IBL flared at VHE and MeV-GeV energies in 2008[17, 18]. Similar to W Comae and PKS 1424+240, modeling of observed SED suggests a strong EC component in addition to an SSC component.\n- · Mkn 421: This HBL exhibited major flaring behavior for several months in 2008. Correlations of the VHE and X-ray flux were observed, along with spectral hardening with increased flux in both bands [29].\n\neConf C091122\n\n- · RGBJ0710+591: Modeling the SED of this HBL with an SSC model yields a good fit to the data. The inclusion of an external Compton component does not improve the fit.\n- · PKS1424+240: The broadband SED of this IBL (at unknown redshift) is well described by an SSC model favoring a redshift of less than 0.1 [21]. Using the photon index measured with Fermi-LAT in combination with recent EBL absorption models, the VERITAS data indicate that the redshift of PKS 1424+240 is less than 0.66.\n\n## 8. Conclusions\n\nThe first two years of the VERITAS blazar KSP were highly successful. Highlights include the detection of more than a 16 VHE blazars with the observations almost always having contemporaneous MWL data. Among these detections are 8 VHE blazar discoveries, including the first three IBLs known to emit VHE γ -rays. All but a handful of the blazars on the initial VERITAS discovery target list were observed, and the flux limits generated for those not VHE detected are generally the most-constraining ever. The excess seen in the stacked blazar analysis suggests that the initial direction of the VERITAS discovery program was well justified, and that follow-up observations of many of these initial targets will result in VHE discoveries. In addition, the Fermi-LAT is identifying many new compelling targets for the VERITAS blazar discovery program. These new candidates have already resulted in 3 VHE blazar discoveries. The future of the VERITAS blazar discovery program is clearly very bright.\n\nThe MWL aspect of the VERITAS blazar KSP has also been highly successful. Every VERITAS observation of a known, or newly discovered, VHE blazar has been accompanied by contemporaneous MWL observations. These data have resulted in the identifica-", + "recall": 0.9096573208722741, + "true_md": "4\n\n2009 Fermi Symposium, Washington, D.C., Nov. 2-5\n\nFigure 1: (Left) The preliminary significance measured from each of the 49 non-detected candidates using standard analysis cuts. The curve shows a Gaussian distribution, with mean zero and standard deviation one, normalized to the number of blazars. A similar result is obtained using analysis cuts optimized for soft-spectrum sources. (Right) The distribution of flux upper limits for the non-detected blazars in percentage of Crab Nebula flux above the observation threshold. The time-weighted average limit is less than ∼ 2% Crab flux.\n\nsince the launch of Fermi include LAT detections. In addition, several MWL campaigns on the well-studied VHE blazars Mkn 421 and Mkn 501 (please see the contributions of D. Gall and A. Konopelko in these proceedings) were also performed. Highlights of these campaigns include:\n\nThe first two years of the VERITAS blazar KSP were highly successful. Highlights include the detec- tion of more than a 16 VHE blazars with the obser- vations almost always having contemporaneous MWL data. Among these detections are 8 VHE blazar dis- coveries, including the first three IBLs known to emit VHE γ -rays. All but a handful of the blazars on the initial VERITAS discovery target list were observed, and the flux limits generated for those not VHE de- tected are generally the most-constraining ever. The excess seen in the stacked blazar analysis suggests that the initial direction of the VERITAS discovery program was well justified, and that follow-up obser- vations of many of these initial targets will result in VHE discoveries. In addition, the Fermi-LAT is iden- tifying many new compelling targets for the VERITAS blazar discovery program. These new candidates have already resulted in 3 VHE blazar discoveries. The future of the VERITAS blazar discovery program is clearly very bright.\n\nThe MWL aspect of the VERITAS blazar KSP has also been highly successful. Every VERITAS obser- vation of a known, or newly discovered, VHE blazar has been accompanied by contemporaneous MWL ob- servations. These data have resulted in the identifica-\n\n## 8. Conclusions\n\neConf C091122\n\n- • Mkn 421: This HBL exhibited major flaring be- havior for several months in 2008. Correlations of the VHE and X-ray flux were observed, along with spectral hardening with increased flux in both bands [29].\n\n- • 3C 66A: This IBL flared at VHE and MeV-GeV energies in 2008[17, 18]. Similar to W Comae and PKS 1424+240, modeling of observed SED suggests a strong EC component in addition to an SSC component.\n\n- • W Comae: This IBL, the first discovered at VHE, flared twice in 2008 [14, 15]. Modeling of the SED is improved by including an external- Compton (EC) component in an SSC interpre- tation.\n\n- • 1ES 0806+524: The observed SED of this new VHE HBL can be explained by an SSC model [16].\n\n- • 1ES 1218+304: This HBL flared during VER- ITAS MWL observations. Its unusually hard VHE spectrum strongly constrains the EBL. The observed flaring rules out kpc-scale jet emis- sion as the explanation of the spectral hardness and places the EBL constraints on more solid- footing [27, 28].\n\n- • 1ES 2344+514: A major (50% Crab) VHE flare, along with correlations of the VHE and X-ray flux were observed from this HBL. The VHE and X-ray spectra harden during bright states, and a synchrotron self-Compton (SSC) model can explain the observed SED in both the high and low states [26].\n\n- • RGB J0710+591: Modeling the SED of this HBL with an SSC model yields a good fit to the data. The inclusion of an external Compton component does not improve the fit.\n\n- • PKS 1424+240: The broadband SED of this IBL (at unknown redshift) is well described by an SSC model favoring a redshift of less than 0.1 [21]. Using the photon index measured with Fermi-LAT in combination with recent EBL ab- sorption models, the VERITAS data indicate that the redshift of PKS 1424+240 is less than 0.66." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7096113390658352, + "doc_id": "e07644a0d2841317eea7760304965b6ef22094fd125f58f379927e67a6885d75", + "edit_distance": 0.36312849162011174, + "f1_score": 0.9017632241813601, + "meteor": 0.7080543101999628, + "precision": 0.9496021220159151, + "pred_md": "arXiv:1001.0590v1 [cond-mat.str-el] 4 Jan 2010\n\n## Influence of Thermal Fluctuations of Spin Density Wave Order Parameter on the Quasiparticle Spectral Function.\n\nM. Khodas and A.M. Tsvelik\n\nDepartment of Condensed Matter Physics and Materials Science, Brookhaven National Laboratory, Upton, NY 11973-5000, USA\n\nThe two-dimensional model of itinerant electrons coupled to an anti-ferromagnetic order parameter is considered. In the mean field solution the Fermi surface undergoes reconstruction, and breaks into disconnected 'pockets'. We have studied the effect of the thermal fluctuations of the order parameter on the spectral density in such system. These fluctuations lead to a finite width of the spectral line scaling linearly with temperature. Due to the thermal fluctuations the quasi-particle spectral weight is transfered into a magnetic Brillouin zone. This can be interpreted as restoration of 'arcs' of the non-interacting Fermi surface.\n\nPACS numbers: 71.27.+a, 75.30.Fv, 71.10.-w\n\n## I. INTRODUCTION\n\nFluctuations play a prominent role in systems of reduced dimensionalities leading to a complete or partial suppression of long range order and rendering mean field approximation inapplicable. Calculation of correlation functions then becomes an arduous task. The question is whether in the absence of true long range order these functions display features of the ordered state and if yes, to what extent. The correlation function we are concerned with in this paper is the single electron spectral function. Measurements of this function constitute the most powerful experimental probes in the physics of strongly correlated systems. We discuss the situation when the system is close to being antiferromagnetically ordered and study the effect of thermal order parameter fluctuations.\n\nThere is a considerable literature addressing the influence of quantum fluctuations (we refer the reader to [1] and [2] which also provide references to the related papers). However, at finite temperatures one has to take into account thermal fluctuations which brings specific problems. In our previous publication [3] we considered the influence of thermal fluctuations on the spectral function of a two dimensional (2D) superconductor. 2D superconductors have quasi long range order such that phase fluctuations are critical in the entire temperature region below T c . We have found that at least as far as the thermal fluctuations were concerned, the frequently used approach based on the conversion of this problem into a gauge theory turned out to be inadequate. The latter approach includes a gauge transformation of the fermion fields with a subsequent attempts to treat the problem as a gauge field theory one (as, for instance, in [2]). The difficulty comes from the fact that the resulting calculational scheme contains strong ultraviolet divergencies and hence requires knowledge about states located far from the Fermi surface. As an alternative we have suggested the direct perturbation expansion in the order parameter. This procedure contains only infrared divergencies and is therefore universal.\n\nIn the present paper we apply the approach of [3] to calculate the spectral function in the presence of a fluctuating commensurate Spin Density Wave (SDW). This problem has a potential relevance to the problem of cuprates. There is a significant experimental evidence in favor of Fermi surface reconstruction taking place in the underdoped phase of the copper oxide superconductors (see, for example, [4],[5]). On the other hand, it is still unclear whether one needs a real long range order to observe such reconstruction or a short range one will suffice. In the present paper we will address this question in the context of the spectral function. We consider only classical (thermal) fluctuations of the order parameter. This is more than an academic excercise since thermally fluctuating SDW phase has been suggested to occupy a part of the cuprate phase diagram in the strongly underdoped regime [6].\n\n## II. DESCRIPTION OF THE MODEL AND THE RESULTS.\n\nWe consider a popular spin-fermion model in twodimensions where electrons interact with a commensurate SDW [1]. The antiferromagnetic ordering open gaps at the points of the Fermi surface (FS) connected by the vector of anti-ferromagnetic fluctuation Q = ( π, π ), see Fig. 1. As a result the FS undergoes reconstruction into disconnected pockets. The Hamiltonian for quasiparticles located near two FS points connected by Q is\n\n\n\nwhere k is a momentum vector in the Brillouin zone, and α is the spin index. The kinetic energy close to the 'hot spots' can be approximated as\n\n\n\nwith the index i enumerating two subbands related by the vector Q . The sum in Eq. (2) is over small momenta and two subbands can be combined together (see", + "recall": 0.8585131894484412, + "true_md": "# Influence of Thermal Fluctuations of Spin Density Wave Order Parameter on the Quasiparticle Spectral Function.\n\nM. Khodas and A.M. Tsvelik\n\nDepartment of Condensed Matter Physics and Materials Science, Brookhaven National Laboratory, Upton, NY 11973-5000, USA\n\nThe two-dimensional model of itinerant electrons coupled to an anti-ferromagnetic order parame- ter is considered. In the mean field solution the Fermi surface undergoes reconstruction, and breaks into disconnected “pockets”. We have studied the effect of the thermal fluctuations of the order parameter on the spectral density in such system. These fluctuations lead to a finite width of the spectral line scaling linearly with temperature. Due to the thermal fluctuations the quasi-particle spectral weight is transfered into a magnetic Brillouin zone. This can be interpreted as restoration of “arcs” of the non-interacting Fermi surface.\n\nPACS numbers: 71.27.+a, 75.30.Fv, 71.10.-w\n\n## I. INTRODUCTION\n\nFluctuations play a prominent role in systems of re- duced dimensionalities leading to a complete or partial suppression of long range order and rendering mean field approximation inapplicable. Calculation of correlation functions then becomes an arduous task. The question is whether in the absence of true long range order these functions display features of the ordered state and if yes, to what extent. The correlation function we are con- cerned with in this paper is the single electron spec- tral function. Measurements of this function constitute the most powerful experimental probes in the physics of strongly correlated systems. We discuss the situation when the system is close to being antiferromagnetically ordered and study the effect of thermal order parameter fluctuations.\n\nThere is a considerable literature addressing the influ- ence of quantum fluctuations (we refer the reader to [1] and [2] which also provide references to the related pa- pers). However, at finite temperatures one has to take into account thermal fluctuations which brings specific problems. In our previous publication [3] we consid- ered the influence of thermal fluctuations on the spectral function of a two dimensional (2D) superconductor. 2D superconductors have quasi long range order such that phase fluctuations are critical in the entire temperature region below T$_{c}$ . We have found that at least as far as the thermal fluctuations were concerned, the frequently used approach based on the conversion of this problem into a gauge theory turned out to be inadequate. The latter approach includes a gauge transformation of the fermion fields with a subsequent attempts to treat the problem as a gauge field theory one (as, for instance, in [2]). The difficulty comes from the fact that the re- sulting calculational scheme contains strong ultraviolet divergencies and hence requires knowledge about states located far from the Fermi surface. As an alternative we have suggested the direct perturbation expansion in the order parameter. This procedure contains only infrared divergencies and is therefore universal.\n\n∑ ∑ ∑ with the index i enumerating two subbands related by the vector Q . The sum in Eq. (2) is over small mo- menta and two subbands can be combined together (see\n\n∑ ∑ where k is a momentum vector in the Brillouin zone, and α is the spin index. The kinetic energy close to the ”hot spots” can be approximated as ∑ ∑ ∑\n\nWe consider a popular spin-fermion model in two- dimensions where electrons interact with a commensu- rate SDW [1]. The antiferromagnetic ordering open gaps at the points of the Fermi surface (FS) connected by the vector of anti-ferromagnetic fluctuation Q = ( π, π ), see Fig. 1. As a result the FS undergoes reconstruction into disconnected pockets. The Hamiltonian for quasiparti- cles located near two FS points connected by Q is ∑ ∑\n\nIn the present paper we apply the approach of [3] to cal- culate the spectral function in the presence of a fluctuat- ing commensurate Spin Density Wave (SDW). This prob- lem has a potential relevance to the problem of cuprates. There is a significant experimental evidence in favor of Fermi surface reconstruction taking place in the under- doped phase of the copper oxide superconductors (see, for example, [4],[5]). On the other hand, it is still un- clear whether one needs a real long range order to observe such reconstruction or a short range one will suffice. In the present paper we will address this question in the context of the spectral function. We consider only clas- sical (thermal) fluctuations of the order parameter. This is more than an academic excercise since thermally fluc- tuating SDW phase has been suggested to occupy a part of the cuprate phase diagram in the strongly underdoped regime [6].\n\n## II. DESCRIPTION OF THE MODEL AND THE RESULTS.\n\n$$cles located near two FS points connected by Q is H = ∑ k α ξ ( k ) ψ † k $_{α}$ψ$_{k}$$_{α}$ + J ∑ k S ψ † k + Q $_{α}$σ$_{αβ}$ ψ$_{k}$$_{β}$ , (1) where k is a momentum vector in the Brillouin zone, and$$\n\n$$spots” can be approximated as ∑ k α ξ ( k ) ψ † k $_{α}$ψ$_{k}$$_{α}$ ≈ ∑ i =1 , 2 ∑ k α v$_{i}$k ψ † i k $_{α}$ψ$_{i}$$_{k}$$_{α}$ (2) with the index i enumerating two subbands related by$$\n\narXiv:1001.0590v1 [cond-mat.str-el] 4 Jan 2010" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4590162258175167, + "doc_id": "2d62374b8b765fca25d945777a3f33aed233cd6e3d3d75bc54ac423af3f0989c", + "edit_distance": 0.736764705882353, + "f1_score": 0.9523809523809526, + "meteor": 0.5042093291766444, + "precision": 0.9701492537313433, + "pred_md": "form of the imaginary part.\n\nλ\n\nFIG. 17: Conductivities and ∆ W for a fixed λω sf . Top ω sf = 26 meV λ , = 1, ω o = 40 meV Z , o = 0 77 . Bottom ω sf = 2 6 . meV λ , = 10, ω o = 13 5 . meV Z , o = 1 22. . The zero crossing for ∆ W is not affected by a change in λ because it is determined only by λω sf . We set ∆ = 30 meV .\n\nFIG. 17: Conductivities and ∆ W for a fixed λω sf . Top ω sf = 26 meV λ , = 1, ω o = 40 meV Z , o = 0 77 . Bottom ω sf = 2 6 . meV λ , = 10, ω o = 13 5 . meV Z , o = 1 22. . The zero crossing for ∆ W is not affected by a change in λ because it is determined only by λω sf . We set ∆ = 30 meV .\n\nFIG. 18: The behavior of Kubo sums in the CB model. Note that the spectral weight in the NS is always larger than in the SCS. We set ω sf = 26 meV λ , = 1, and ∆ = 30 meV .\n\nFIG. 18: The behavior of Kubo sums in the CB model. Note that the spectral weight in the NS is always larger than in the SCS. We set ω sf = 26 meV λ , = 1, and ∆ = 30 meV .\n\nWe performed the same calculations of conductivities and optical integrals as in the previous three cases. The results are summarized in Figs. 17 - 22. Fig 17 shows conductivities in the NS and the SCS for two couplings λ = 1 and λ = 10 (keeping λω sf constant). Other parameters Z o and ω o are calculated according to the discussion after Eq 21. for ω sf = 26 meV , λ = 1, we find ω o = 40 meV , Z o = 0 77. . And for ω sf = 2 6 . meV , λ = 10, we find ω o = 13 5 . meV , Z o = 1 22. . Note that the conductivity in the SCS starts at 2∆ + ω o (i.e. the resonance energy\n\n12\n\nFIG. 19: The evolution of the optical integrals in the NS and the SCS in the CB model. Note that about ∼ 75% of the spectral weight is recovered up to 1 eV . We set ω sf = 26 meV λ , = 1, and ∆ = 30 meV .\n\nFIG. 19: The evolution of the optical integrals in the NS and the SCS in the CB model. Note that about ∼ 75% of the spectral weight is recovered up to 1 eV . We set ω sf = 26 meV λ , = 1, and ∆ = 30 meV .\n\n1\n\nFIG. 20: ∆ W (in meV) for λ = 1(top) and λ = 10(bottom). We used ω sf = 26 meV/λ and ∆ = 30 meV . The zero crossing is not affected because we keep λω sf constant. The notable difference is the widening of the dip at a larger λ .\n\nFIG. 20: ∆ W (in meV) for λ = 1(top) and λ = 10(bottom). We used ω sf = 26 meV/λ and ∆ = 30 meV . The zero crossing is not affected because we keep λω sf constant. The notable difference is the widening of the dip at a larger λ .", + "recall": 0.935251798561151, + "true_md": "12\n\nform of the imaginary part.\n\nFIG. 17: Conductivities and Δ W for a fixed λω$_{sf}$ . Top – ω$_{sf}$ = 26 meV , λ = 1, ω o = 40 meV , Z o = 0 . 77 Bottom – ω$_{sf}$ = 2 . 6 meV , λ = 10, ω o = 13 . 5 meV , Z o = 1 . 22. The zero crossing for Δ W is not affected by a change in λ because it is determined only by λω$_{sf}$ . We set Δ = 30 meV .\n\nFIG. 19: The evolution of the optical integrals in the NS and the SCS in the CB model. Note that about ∼ 75% of the spectral weight is recovered up to 1 eV . We set ω$_{sf}$ = 26 meV , λ = 1, and Δ = 30 meV .\n\nFIG. 18: The behavior of Kubo sums in the CB model. Note that the spectral weight in the NS is always larger than in the SCS. We set ω$_{sf}$ = 26 meV , λ = 1, and Δ = 30 meV .\n\nFIG. 20: Δ W (in meV) for λ = 1(top) and λ = 10(bottom). We used ω$_{sf}$ = 26 meV/λ and Δ = 30 meV . The zero crossing is not affected because we keep λω$_{sf}$ constant. The notable difference is the widening of the dip at a larger λ .\n\nWe performed the same calculations of conductivities and optical integrals as in the previous three cases. The results are summarized in Figs. 17 - 22. Fig 17 shows con- ductivities in the NS and the SCS for two couplings λ = 1 and λ = 10 (keeping λω$_{sf}$ constant). Other parameters Z$_{o}$ and ω$_{o}$ are calculated according to the discussion after Eq 21. for ω$_{sf}$ = 26 meV , λ = 1, we find ω$_{o}$ = 40 meV , Z$_{o}$ = 0 . 77. And for ω$_{sf}$ = 2 . 6 meV , λ = 10, we find ω$_{o}$ = 13 . 5 meV , Z$_{o}$ = 1 . 22. Note that the conductivity in the SCS starts at 2Δ + ω$_{o}$ (i.e. the resonance energy" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6389093972570368, + "doc_id": "3ce5f15d8ce847c86c33f8b316d458201183c51b1b2169f93c998b6960cf5f0e", + "edit_distance": 0.5320566194837635, + "f1_score": 0.8733233979135618, + "meteor": 0.5942846024455355, + "precision": 0.9361022364217252, + "pred_md": "to achieve objective 2 by continuing outward using the Maxwell equations. However, these functions do not have completeness properties, item 1. And there is no smoothing, item 5, to overcome the amplification of noise due to numerical differentiation.\n\nIn the case of midplane fitting, one approach would be to attempt to employ expressions that relate the onaxis gradients to midplane data and its derivatives. For example, in the case of midplane symmetry, there are the relations\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nBy repeatedly differentiating these relations with respect to z , one can obtain the C [ n ] m,s ( z ) for n > 0. In general, the determination of C [ n ] m,s ( z ) requires the computation of m + n -1 derivatives. Although this approach achieves objective 2, since all relevant quantities are subsequently computed in terms of on-axis gradients, in the case where data is available only at grid points it presupposes the ability to compute very high-order derivatives by high-order numerical differentiation. This is generally impossible, due to the high noise sensitivity associated with high-order numerical differentiation, because there is no intrinsic smoothing, item 5.\n\nAnother approach is to use an analytic functional form, with free parameters, that is known to satisfy the the 3dimensional Laplace equation for all parameter values. These parameters can be adjusted so that the field derived from this representation well approximates the field at various grid points. (These grid points could be in the midplane, but could be out of the midplane as well.) This representation can then be repeatedly differentiated to provide the required field derivatives. However, commonly this fitting procedure has no known completeness/convergence property, item 1. In some cases Fourier series representations with known completeness properties are used. But with Fourier series representations, an artificial periodicity is imposed in the transverse horizontal direction. As a result, the Fourier coefficients for the field expansions, call them a n , can fall off at best as (1 /n 2 )[4]. Correspondingly, the Fourier coeficients in the associated expansion for ψ fall off at best as (1 /n 3 ). As a result, repeated differentiation produces nonconvergent series, and there is no analyticity, item 3. Whatever representation is used, there is again no intrinsic smoothing to overcome the amplification of noise due to numerical differentiation.\n\n4\n\n## A. Use of Field Data on Surface of Circular Cylinder\n\nAll three-dimensional electromagnetic codes calculate all three components of the field on some threedimensional grid. Also, such data is in principle available from actual field measurements. In this subsection we will describe how to compute the on-axis gradients from such field data using the surface of a circular cylinder [5]. Once these gradients are known, we may use (11) and (12) to compute the associated scalar and vector potentials.\n\nConsider a circular cylinder of radius R , centered on the z -axis, fitting within the bore of the beam-line element in question, and extending beyond the fringefield regions at the ends of the beam-line element. The beam-line element could be any straight element such as a solenoid, quadrupole, sextupole, octupole, etc., or it could be wiggler with little or no net bending. See Fig. 1, which illustrates the case of a wiggler.\n\nFIG. 1: A circular cylinder of radius R , centered on the z -axis, fitting within the bore of a beam-line element, in this case a wiggler, and extending beyond the fringe-field regions at the ends of the beam-line element.\n\nFIG. 1: A circular cylinder of radius R , centered on the z -axis, fitting within the bore of a beam-line element, in this case a wiggler, and extending beyond the fringe-field regions at the ends of the beam-line element.\n\nSuppose the magnetic field B ( x, y, z ) = B ( ρ, φ, z ) is given on a grid, and this data is interpolated onto the surface of the cylinder using values at the grid points near the surface. Next, from the values on the surface, compute B ρ ( R,φ,z ), the component of B ( ρ, φ, z ) normal to the surface. The major remaining task is to compute the on-axis gradients from a knowledge of B ρ ( R,φ,z ). See Fig. 2. At this point we note that the functions exp( ikz ) sin( mφ ) and exp( ikz ) cos( mφ ) form a complete set over the surface of the circular cylinder.\n\nLet ˜ B ρ ( R,φ,k ) be the Fourier transform of B ρ ( R,φ,z ) given by the integral\n\n\n\nBecause B decays rapidly in the fringe field region, B ρ ( R,φ,z ) is absolutely integrable along the z -axis, and", + "recall": 0.8184357541899442, + "true_md": "to achieve objective 2 by continuing outward using the Maxwell equations. However, these functions do not have completeness properties, item 1. And there is no smooth- ing, item 5, to overcome the amplification of noise due to numerical differentiation.\n\nIn the case of midplane fitting, one approach would be to attempt to employ expressions that relate the on- axis gradients to midplane data and its derivatives. For example, in the case of midplane symmetry, there are the relations\n\nBy repeatedly differentiating these relations with respect to z , one can obtain the C [ n ] $_{m,s}$( z ) for n > 0. In gen- eral, the determination of C [ n ] $_{m,s}$( z ) requires the computa- tion of m + n − 1 derivatives. Although this approach achieves objective 2, since all relevant quantities are sub- sequently computed in terms of on-axis gradients, in the case where data is available only at grid points it presup- poses the ability to compute very high-order derivatives by high-order numerical differentiation. This is generally impossible, due to the high noise sensitivity associated with high-order numerical differentiation, because there is no intrinsic smoothing, item 5.\n\nAnother approach is to use an analytic functional form, with free parameters, that is known to satisfy the the 3- dimensional Laplace equation for all parameter values. These parameters can be adjusted so that the field de- rived from this representation well approximates the field at various grid points. (These grid points could be in the midplane, but could be out of the midplane as well.) This representation can then be repeatedly differenti- ated to provide the required field derivatives. However, commonly this fitting procedure has no known complete- ness/convergence property, item 1. In some cases Fourier series representations with known completeness proper- ties are used. But with Fourier series representations, an artificial periodicity is imposed in the transverse hor- izontal direction. As a result, the Fourier coefficients for the field expansions, call them a$_{n}$ , can fall off at best as (1 /n $^{2}$)[4]. Correspondingly, the Fourier coeficients in the associated expansion for ψ fall off at best as (1 /n $^{3}$). As a result, repeated differentiation produces nonconvergent series, and there is no analyticity, item 3. Whatever rep- resentation is used, there is again no intrinsic smoothing to overcome the amplification of noise due to numerical differentiation.\n\nSuppose the magnetic field B ( x, y, z ) = B ( ρ, φ, z ) is given on a grid, and this data is interpolated onto the surface of the cylinder using values at the grid points near the surface. Next, from the values on the surface, compute B$_{ρ}$ ( R, φ, z ), the component of B ( ρ, φ, z ) normal to the surface. The major remaining task is to compute the on-axis gradients from a knowledge of B$_{ρ}$ ( R, φ, z ). See Fig. 2. At this point we note that the functions exp( ikz ) sin( mφ ) and exp( ikz ) cos( mφ ) form a complete set over the surface of the circular cylinder. ˜\n\nset over the surface of the circular cylinder. Let ˜ B$_{ρ}$ ( R, φ, k ) be the Fourier transform of B$_{ρ}$ ( R, φ, z ) given by the integral\n\nBecause B decays rapidly in the fringe field region, B$_{ρ}$ ( R, φ, z ) is absolutely integrable along the z -axis, and\n\nConsider a circular cylinder of radius R , centered on the z -axis, fitting within the bore of the beam-line el- ement in question, and extending beyond the fringe- field regions at the ends of the beam-line element. The beam-line element could be any straight element such as a solenoid, quadrupole, sextupole, octupole, etc., or it could be wiggler with little or no net bending. See Fig. 1, which illustrates the case of a wiggler.\n\nAll three-dimensional electromagnetic codes calcu- late all three components of the field on some three- dimensional grid. Also, such data is in principle avail- able from actual field measurements. In this subsection we will describe how to compute the on-axis gradients from such field data using the surface of a circular cylin- der [5]. Once these gradients are known, we may use (11) and (12) to compute the associated scalar and vector po- tentials.\n\n4\n\n## A. Use of Field Data on Surface of Circular Cylinder\n\n$$C [0] $_{m,c}$( z ) = 0 , (15a)$$\n\n$$C [0] 1 $_{,s}$( z ) = B$_{y}$ ( x = 0 , y = 0 , z ) , (15b)$$\n\n$$C [0] 2 $_{,s}$( z ) = 1 2 ∂B$_{y}$ ∂x ∣ ∣ (0 , 0 ,z ) , (15c)$$\n\n$$C [0] 3 $_{,s}$( z ) = 1 6 ∂ $^{2}$B$_{y}$ ∂x 2 ∣ ∣ (0 , 0 ,z ) + 1 24 ∂ $^{2}$B$_{y}$ ∂z 2 ∣ ∣ (0 , 0 ,z ) , etc . (15d)$$\n\nFIG. 1: A circular cylinder of radius R , centered on the z - axis, fitting within the bore of a beam-line element, in this case a wiggler, and extending beyond the fringe-field regions at the ends of the beam-line element.\n\n$$˜ B$_{ρ}$ ( R, φ, k ) = 1 2 π ∫ ∞ −∞ dz e − $^{ikz}$B$_{ρ}$ ( R, φ, z ) . (16)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6932012404411475, + "doc_id": "d16852fc5804c6057e9371577e9e531946471775b0d7eebcf6684ac0af5e24ab", + "edit_distance": 0.9204946996466431, + "f1_score": 0.8932038834951458, + "meteor": 0.5913742622198493, + "precision": 0.9139072847682119, + "pred_md": "FIG. 1. (Color online) Photocurrent density J Ph vs. applied voltage of a typical P3HT:PCBM solar cells with Ca/Al cathode under 1 sun. The point of optimal symmetry (POS) is indicated by the blue circle. The voltage-dependent, symmetric shape of J Ph is shifted by a constant offset to more negative values. Note that the density of recorded data points is higher between 0 V and 1 V applied voltage. The inset shows the current flowing under pulsed illumination, with an increase in the applied voltage every millisecond.\n\nFIG. 1. (Color online) Photocurrent density J Ph vs. applied voltage of a typical P3HT:PCBM solar cells with Ca/Al cathode under 1 sun. The point of optimal symmetry (POS) is indicated by the blue circle. The voltage-dependent, symmetric shape of J Ph is shifted by a constant offset to more negative values. Note that the density of recorded data points is higher between 0 V and 1 V applied voltage. The inset shows the current flowing under pulsed illumination, with an increase in the applied voltage every millisecond.\n\n## II. EXPERIMENTAL\n\nAll samples investigated were spin-coated from solution of a 1:1 weight ratio of P3HT and PCBM in chlorobenzene, onto indium tin oxide/glass substrates coated with poly(3,4ethylenedioxythiophene):poly(styrenesulfonate). After an annealing step at 140 · C, metal contacts were applied by thermal evaporation; either Ca (3 nm) followed by Al (110 nm) or only Ag (120 nm). All fabrication and characterization took place in a nitrogen atmosphere glovebox. The cells with Ca/Al cathode had fill-factors (FF) of about 60 % and PCE of 2-3 %, as determined with a Xe-lamp, adjusted to simulate standard testing conditions (STC). 10\n\nThe photocurrent measurements were performed based on the setup proposed by Ooi et al. 5 , using a white 10 W LED for pulsed illumination. The pulse duration was set to 0.5 ms at a duty cycle of 50 %, giving the cell ample time to reach steady-state after switching the light on/off. The illumination level was equivalent to one sun, based on comparison of the short-cuircuit current ( J SC) reached with the LED to the J SC reached under simulated STC. The active layer thickness was determined with a Veeco Dektak 150 profilometer.\n\nFor the capacitance-voltage (CV) measurements we applied a 5 kHz AC voltage with an amplitude of 40 mV to our cells and performed a DC bias sweep. It was carried out under nitrogen atmosphere and without any incident light to the device to prevent distortions due to charge carrier generation. Data acquisition was carried out with an Agilent E4980A LCR-meter in parallel RC circuit mode. The rea-\n\n2\n\nsonability of this working mode has been proven by preceding impedance measurements that showed a clear semicircle (with a negligible offset impedance of about 10 W , corresponding to the series resistance Rs ) in Cole-Cole representation for our cells. Since we have Schottky-like contacts at the metalsemiconductor interfaces of our devices, the value of V CV was determined by the intercept of a linear fit of the Mott-Schottky plot.\n\nAll presented simulations were done solving the one dimensional differential equation system of Poisson's equation and the continuity equations for electron and holes in a numerical iterative approach, 11,12 implicitly assuming a band-like transport. A 100 nm thick bulk-heterojunction solar cell is calculated at a temperature of T = 300 K containing electrons and holes with equal mobilities of µn = µp = 10 -4 cm 2 /Vs. 13 For the active material, the effective medium approach is used, leading to effective electrical bandgap of EG = 1 1 eV be-. tween the donor HOMO (highest occupied molecular orbital) and the acceptor LUMO (lowest unoccupied molecular orbital) level and an effective dielectric constant of e r = 3 4. . 13 The effective charge carrier densities of LUMO and HOMOdescribing the spatial charge carrier densities of electrons n x ( ) and holes p x ( ) by Fermi-Dirac statistics-were set to Nc = Nv = 10 20 cm -3 . The interfaces towards the electrodes are assumed to possess injection barriers of 0.1 eV without any surface recombination. 14\n\nIllumination is taken into account by a homogenous charge carrier generation rate G over the whole device. This simplification avoids band bending due to local differences of the charge carrier densities caused by optical interference inside the sample. We use Langevin theory to describe bimolecular charge carrier recombination of free polarons to the ground state. 15 The combination of charge carrier generation and recombination leads to the following net generation rate:\n\n\n\nwith the elementary charge q , the dielectric constant e 0, the Boltzmann constant kB and the intrinsic charge carrier density ni = √ NcNv exp ( qEG / 2 kBT ) .\n\nThe result of this system are spatially resolved values for the electrical potential and electron and hole densities in form of quasi-Fermi potentials. In order to create a band structure, the potentials have to be transformed into an energy level. Since experimental values of device work functions are not available, the electron conducting contact (here aluminum) is set to a typical value of -4.25 eV , 16 which determines the absolute value of all other potentials.\n\nIn Figure 2 the resulting band structures are presented in the dark and under illumination for two important bias voltages. First, a voltage resulting in flat bands-and therefore zero electric field E , being the spatial derivative of the potentialin the middle of the sample, and second the built-in voltage for comparison.", + "recall": 0.8734177215189873, + "true_md": "2\n\nsonability of this working mode has been proven by preceding impedance measurements that showed a clear semicircle (with a negligible offset impedance of about 10 $_{W}$, corresponding to the series resistance R$_{s}$ ) in Cole–Cole representation for our cells. Since we have Schottky-like contacts at the metal– semiconductor interfaces of our devices, the value of V$_{CV}$ was determined by the intercept of a linear fit of the Mott–Schottky plot.\n\nAll presented simulations were done solving the one dimen- sional differential equation system of Poisson‘s equation and the continuity equations for electron and holes in a numerical iterative approach, 11,12 implicitly assuming a band-like trans- port. A 100 nm thick bulk-heterojunction solar cell is calcu- lated at a temperature of T = 300 K containing electrons and holes with equal mobilities of µ$_{n}$ = µ$_{p}$ = 10 − 4 cm$^{2}$/Vs. 13 For the active material, the effective medium approach is used, leading to effective electrical bandgap of E$_{G}$ = 1 . 1 eV be- tween the donor HOMO (highest occupied molecular orbital) and the acceptor LUMO (lowest unoccupied molecular or- bital) level and an effective dielectric constant of e$_{r}$ = 3 . 4. 13 The effective charge carrier densities of LUMO and HOMO— describing the spatial charge carrier densities of electrons n ( x ) and holes p ( x ) by Fermi-Dirac statistics—were set to N$_{c}$ = N$_{v}$ = 10 20 cm − $^{3}$. The interfaces towards the electrodes are assumed to possess injection barriers of 0.1 eV without any surface recombination. 14\n\nIllumination is taken into account by a homogenous charge carrier generation rate G over the whole device. This simpli- fication avoids band bending due to local differences of the charge carrier densities caused by optical interference inside the sample. We use Langevin theory to describe bimolecular charge carrier recombination of free polarons to the ground state. 15 The combination of charge carrier generation and re- combination leads to the following net generation rate:\n\nAll samples investigated were spin-coated from solution of a 1:1 weight ratio of P3HT and PCBM in chlorobenzene, onto indium tin oxide/glass substrates coated with poly(3,4- ethylenedioxythiophene):poly(styrenesulfonate). After an an- nealing step at 140 $^{◦}$C, metal contacts were applied by ther- mal evaporation; either Ca (3 nm) followed by Al (110 nm) or only Ag (120 nm). All fabrication and characterization took place in a nitrogen atmosphere glovebox. The cells with Ca/Al cathode had fill-factors (FF) of about 60 % and PCE of 2–3 %, as determined with a Xe-lamp, adjusted to simulate standard testing conditions (STC). 10\n\nwith the elementary charge q , the dielectric constant$_{e}$$\\_{0}$, the Boltzmann constant k$\\_{B}$ and the intrinsic charge carrier density n$\\_{i}$ = √ N$\\_{c}$N$\\_{v}$ exp ( qE$\\_{G}$ / 2 k$\\_{B}$T ) .\n\nThe result of this system are spatially resolved values for the electrical potential and electron and hole densities in form of quasi-Fermi potentials. In order to create a band structure, the potentials have to be transformed into an energy level. Since experimental values of device work functions are not available, the electron conducting contact (here aluminum) is set to a typical value of -4.25 eV, 16 which determines the ab- solute value of all other potentials.\n\nIn Figure 2 the resulting band structures are presented in the dark and under illumination for two important bias voltages. First, a voltage resulting in flat bands—and therefore zero electric field E , being the spatial derivative of the potential— in the middle of the sample, and second the built-in voltage for comparison.\n\nFor the capacitance–voltage (CV) measurements we ap- plied a 5 kHz AC voltage with an amplitude of 40 mV to our cells and performed a DC bias sweep. It was carried out under nitrogen atmosphere and without any incident light to the device to prevent distortions due to charge carrier gen- eration. Data acquisition was carried out with an Agilent E4980A LCR-meter in parallel RC circuit mode. The rea-\n\nThe photocurrent measurements were performed based on the setup proposed by Ooi et al.$^{5}$, using a white 10 W LED for pulsed illumination. The pulse duration was set to 0.5 ms at a duty cycle of 50 %, giving the cell ample time to reach steady-state after switching the light on/off. The illumination level was equivalent to one sun, based on comparison of the short-cuircuit current ( J$_{SC}$ ) reached with the LED to the J$_{SC}$ reached under simulated STC. The active layer thickness was determined with a Veeco Dektak 150 profilometer.\n\n## II. EXPERIMENTAL\n\n$$U ( x ) = G − q ( µ$_{n}$ + µ$_{p}$ ) e 0 e$_{r}$ $^{(}$np − n 2 i ) (1)$$\n\nFIG. 1. (Color online) Photocurrent density J$_{Ph}$ vs. applied volt- age of a typical P3HT:PCBM solar cells with Ca/Al cathode under 1 sun. The point of optimal symmetry (POS) is indicated by the blue circle. The voltage-dependent, symmetric shape of J$_{Ph}$ is shifted by a constant offset to more negative values. Note that the density of recorded data points is higher between 0 V and 1 V applied voltage. The inset shows the current flowing under pulsed illumination, with an increase in the applied voltage every millisecond." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7496565034015262, + "doc_id": "85a59d211fa6f1628289ee0f546f521131edad2a1f3eba0de86cc9f726925e75", + "edit_distance": 0.6232813932172319, + "f1_score": 0.9402597402597401, + "meteor": 0.7669986943889601, + "precision": 0.9731182795698925, + "pred_md": "5\n\nFigure 4: Numerical results for a 2D simulation with size equal to 16 × 16, λ = 0 3, . D 0 = 1, α = 0 01, . κ = 0 001 and . ρ 0 = 10. Times corresponding to the snapshots are (in simulation units, from left to right): 5, 12, 19.6 and 50.6.\n\nFigure 4: Numerical results for a 2D simulation with size equal to 16 × 16, λ = 0 3, . D 0 = 1, α = 0 01, . κ = 0 001 and . ρ 0 = 10. Times corresponding to the snapshots are (in simulation units, from left to right): 5, 12, 19.6 and 50.6.\n\nFigure 5: Plot of the characteristic domain size, L t ( ) as a function of time for a system in the inhomogeneous phase, with initially random density fluctuations around ρ 0 . Parameters were: α = 0 01, . λ = 0 27, . κ = 0 001, while the system . size was 20 × 20. The solid line corresponds to a single run, while the dashed line is an average over 6 runs. The steps in the single run curve correspond to evaporation-condensation events, highlighted by black squares in the snapshots shown in the figure (before and after one of the steps respectively, arrows indicate positions on the plot corresponding to the two snapshots).\n\nFigure 5: Plot of the characteristic domain size, L t ( ) as a function of time for a system in the inhomogeneous phase, with initially random density fluctuations around ρ 0 . Parameters were: α = 0 01, . λ = 0 27, . κ = 0 001, while the system . size was 20 × 20. The solid line corresponds to a single run, while the dashed line is an average over 6 runs. The steps in the single run curve correspond to evaporation-condensation events, highlighted by black squares in the snapshots shown in the figure (before and after one of the steps respectively, arrows indicate positions on the plot corresponding to the two snapshots).\n\nselves, that is not degraded over time [3, 4]. The chemoattractant distribution should become more and more uniform so that these interactions decay to zero as time proceeds. In our framework this is analagous to decreasing Φ, which will turn any initially unstable state into a homogeneous one, and can thus explain that the patterns observed experimentally fade with time (whereas in our simulations Φ remains constant and the pattern are stable indefinitely). E. coli in a semi-solid medium also exhibits droplet patterns of high symmetry. In our framework, such patterns result from a continuous transition, close to the supercritical line.\n\nThe growth of bacterial colonies of S. typhimurium starting from a small inoculum of bacterial cells in semisolid agarleads to quite specific (transient but long-lived) patterns, with the bacteria accumulating in concentric rings that can subsequently fragment into a pattern of dots [5, 6]. Once again, although these patterns are believed to stem from a chemotactic mechanism [6], we find they can arise in principle without one, so long as our two basic ingredients of density-suppressed motility and logistic growth are both present. Indeed, initializing\n\nour simulations with a single small droplet of high density ρ , we find that a similarly patterned bacterial colony structure develops. First, the bacteria spread radially (through a Fisher-like wave), forming an unstructured lawn with the highest density at the center. This background density increases logistically until the onset of instability via our generic phase-separation mechanism; with circular symmetry, the instability causes concentric rings of high bacterial density to successively develop that are very stable in time (Figs. 6c and 6d). The patterns observed at later times again depend on the position of the parameters in the ( R, Φ) plane. If we fix a value of R , e.g. 100, larger values of Φ in the unstable region lead to rings being very stable. For smaller values of Φ, on the other hand, effectively corresponding to weaker interactions between the bacteria, we observe that rings initially form but rapidly destabilize through a secondary modulation of the bacterial density along them. This eventually breaks the rings into a series of drops. The inner rings destabilize first, and the system evolves eventually to the same steady state as found starting from a uniform density, composed of drops with well defined characteristic size and separation. All this phenomenology is strikingly reminiscent of the dynamics observed by Woodward et al [5] for S. typhimirium , where rings are stable at large concentrations of potassium succinate (a 'stimulant' which promotes pattern formation), but break up into drops at smaller ones. Our model shows a similar morphological change when decreasing Φ, i.e. the strength of the interactions.\n\nDifferent views are possible concerning the ability of our generic model to reproduce the observed chemotactic patterns of E. coli and S. typhimurium [6]. One possibility is that Eq. (1), with the interpretation we have given for it, actually does embody the important physics of pattern formation in these organisms. Indeed it is well accepted that bacteria in the high density concentric rings are essentially non-motile [27]. The precise mechanism leading to this observation is not well understood [6], but it is possible that the chemotactic mechanism mainly acts to switch off motility at high density. If so, by focussing solely on this aspect (with a correspondingly vast reduction in the parameter space from that of explicit chemotactic models [5, 6]) our model might capture the physics of these chemotactic patterns in a highly economical way. Interestingly, our model is essentially local, whereas chemotaxis in principle mediates", + "recall": 0.9095477386934674, + "true_md": "5\n\nFigure 4: Numerical results for a 2D simulation with size equal to 16 × 16, λ = 0 . 3, D$_{0}$ = 1, α = 0 . 01, κ = 0 . 001 and ρ$_{0}$ = 10. Times corresponding to the snapshots are (in simulation units, from left to right): 5, 12, 19.6 and 50.6.\n\nFigure 5: Plot of the characteristic domain size, L ( t ) as a function of time for a system in the inhomogeneous phase, with initially random density fluctuations around ρ$_{0}$ . Param- eters were: α = 0 . 01, λ = 0 . 27, κ = 0 . 001, while the system size was 20 × 20. The solid line corresponds to a single run, while the dashed line is an average over 6 runs. The steps in the single run curve correspond to evaporation-condensation events, highlighted by black squares in the snapshots shown in the figure (before and after one of the steps respectively, arrows indicate positions on the plot corresponding to the two snapshots).\n\nour simulations with a single small droplet of high den- sity ρ , we find that a similarly patterned bacterial colony structure develops. First, the bacteria spread radially (through a Fisher-like wave), forming an unstructured lawn with the highest density at the center. This back- ground density increases logistically until the onset of instability via our generic phase-separation mechanism; with circular symmetry, the instability causes concentric rings of high bacterial density to successively develop that are very stable in time (Figs. 6c and 6d). The patterns observed at later times again depend on the position of the parameters in the ( R, Φ) plane. If we fix a value of R , e.g. 100, larger values of Φ in the unstable region lead to rings being very stable. For smaller values of Φ, on the other hand, effectively corresponding to weaker interactions between the bacteria, we observe that rings initially form but rapidly destabilize through a secondary modulation of the bacterial density along them. This eventually breaks the rings into a series of drops. The inner rings destabilize first, and the system evolves even- tually to the same steady state as found starting from a uniform density, composed of drops with well defined characteristic size and separation. All this phenomenol- ogy is strikingly reminiscent of the dynamics observed by Woodward et al [5] for S. typhimirium , where rings are stable at large concentrations of potassium succinate (a ‘stimulant’ which promotes pattern formation), but break up into drops at smaller ones. Our model shows a similar morphological change when decreasing Φ, i.e. the strength of the interactions.\n\nselves, that is not degraded over time [3, 4]. The chemoattractant distribution should become more and more uniform so that these interactions decay to zero as time proceeds. In our framework this is analagous to decreasing Φ, which will turn any initially unsta- ble state into a homogeneous one, and can thus explain that the patterns observed experimentally fade with time (whereas in our simulations Φ remains constant and the pattern are stable indefinitely). E. coli in a semi-solid medium also exhibits droplet patterns of high symmetry. In our framework, such patterns result from a continuous transition, close to the supercritical line.\n\nDifferent views are possible concerning the ability of our generic model to reproduce the observed chemotac- tic patterns of E. coli and S. typhimurium [6]. One pos- sibility is that Eq. (1), with the interpretation we have given for it, actually does embody the important physics of pattern formation in these organisms. Indeed it is well accepted that bacteria in the high density concen- tric rings are essentially non-motile [27]. The precise mechanism leading to this observation is not well under- stood [6], but it is possible that the chemotactic mecha- nism mainly acts to switch off motility at high density. If so, by focussing solely on this aspect (with a correspond- ingly vast reduction in the parameter space from that of explicit chemotactic models [5, 6]) our model might capture the physics of these chemotactic patterns in a highly economical way. Interestingly, our model is es- sentially local, whereas chemotaxis in principle mediates\n\nThe growth of bacterial colonies of S. typhimurium starting from a small inoculum of bacterial cells in semi- solid agarleads to quite specific (transient but long-lived) patterns, with the bacteria accumulating in concentric rings that can subsequently fragment into a pattern of dots [5, 6]. Once again, although these patterns are be- lieved to stem from a chemotactic mechanism [6], we find they can arise in principle without one, so long as our two basic ingredients of density-suppressed motility and logistic growth are both present. Indeed, initializing" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.816194904701234, + "doc_id": "ec05fac86d75a4f2b0814f3f5954c7c6ffb5d4a94a8e4e921ff9d867f35ea846", + "edit_distance": 0.143796992481203, + "f1_score": 0.9056603773584905, + "meteor": 0.904365622254545, + "precision": 0.9176470588235294, + "pred_md": "Fig. 3. FER results on the n = 155 , R = 0 4 . , Tanner code\n\nFig. 3. FER results on the n = 155 , R = 0 4 . , Tanner code\n\nFig. 4. FER results on the n = 768 , R = 0 75 . , Quasicyclic code\n\nFig. 4. FER results on the n = 768 , R = 0 75 . , Quasicyclic code\n\ndecoder guarantees correction of all error patterns up to 5 errors. An interesting point to note is that the highly complex linear programming (LP) decoding fails to correct all 5-errors on the Tanner code, whereas the 3-bit decoder is able to, which illustrates the power of multilevel decoding.\n\n## VI. DISCUSSION AND CONCLUSIONS\n\nMultilevel decoding was established as a powerful decoding technique for LDPC codes. From our concluding example, we highlighted the importance of the isolation assumption as a crucial strategy for deriving good rules. Also from the results, it is evident that there is a certain aspect of universality to these decoders; the same 3-bit decoder performs well on a variety of codes. This suggests that deriving good rules based on trapping sets appears to take the structure of the local neighborhood into local computations of messages, which is a tiny step closer in our pursuit to approach maximum-likelihood decoding. Our future work includes deriving bounds and relating the isolation theorem with guaranteed error-correction capability.\n\n## ACKNOWLEDGMENT\n\nThis work was funded by NSF under the grants IHCS0725403, CCF-0634969, CCF-0830245.\n\nFig. 5. FER results on the n = 4085 , R = 0 82 . , MacKay code\n\nFig. 5. FER results on the n = 4085 , R = 0 82 . , MacKay code\n\n## REFERENCES\n\n- [1] S. K. Planjery, D. Declercq, S. K. Chilappagari, and B. Vasic, 'Multilevel decoders surpassing belief propagation on the binary symmetric channel,' in Proc. Int. Symp. On Inform. Theory (ISIT 2010) .\n- [2] R. G. Gallager, Low Density Parity Check Codes . Cambridge, MA: M.I.T. Press, 1963.\n- [3] T. Richardson and R. Urbanke, 'Capacity of low-density parity-check codes under message-passing decoding,' IEEE Trans. Inform. Theory , vol 47, pp. 599-618, Feb. 2001.\n- [4] J. Chen, A. Dholakia, E. Eleftheriou, M. Fossorier, and X.-Y. Hu, 'Reduced-complexity decoding of LDPC codes,' IEEE Trans. Commun. , vol. 53, no. 8, pp. 1288-1299, Aug. 2005.\n- [5] J. K. Lee and J. Thorpe, 'Memory-efficient decoding of LDPC codes,' in Proc. Int. Symp. on Inform. Theory (ISIT 2005) , Adelaide, Australia, pp. 459-463., Sept. 2005.\n- [6] B. Smith, F. R. Kschischang and W. Yu, 'Low-density parity-check codes for discretized min-sum decoding,' in Proc. 23rd Biennial Symp. on Commun. , pp. 14-17, 2006.\n- [7] T. Richardson, 'Error floors of LDPC codes,' in Proc. 41st Annual Allerton Conf. on Commun., Control and Computing , 2003.\n- [8] S. K. Chilappagari, S. Sankaranarayanan, and B. Vasic, 'Error floors of LDPC codes on the binary symmetric channel,' in Proc. IEEE Int. Conf. on Commun. (ICC 06) , vol. 3, Istanbul, Turkey, pp. 1089-1094, 2006.\n- [9] S. K. Chilappagari, A. R. Krishnan, and B. Vasic, 'LDPC codes which can correct three errors under iterative decoding,' in Proc. IEEE Inform. on Theory Workshop , pp. 406-410, May 2008.\n- [10] Y. Wang, J. S. Yedidia, and S. C. Draper, 'Multi-stage decoding of LDPC codes,' in Proc. IEEE Int. Symp. on Inform. Theory (ISIT 09) , Seoul, Korea, pp. 2151-2155, July 2009.\n- [11] Z. Zhang, L. Dolecek, B. Nikolic, V. Anantharam, and M. Wainwright, 'Lowering LDPC error floors by postprocessing,' in IEEE Global Telecommunications Conf. (GLOBECOM 08) , New Orleans, LA, pp. 1-6, Dec. 2008.\n- [12] B. Vasic, S. K. Chilappagari, D. V. Nguyen, and S. K. Planjery, 'Trapping set ontology,' Proc. 47th Annual Allerton Conf. on Commun., Control, and Computing , Sept. 2009.\n- [13] M. Ivkovic, S. K. Chilappagari, and B. Vasic, 'Eliminating trapping sets in low-density parity-check codes by using Tanner graph covers,' IEEE Trans. Inform. Theory , vol. 54, no. 8, pp. 3763-3768, 2008.\n- [14] L. Sassatelli, S. K. Chilappagari, B. Vasic, and D. Declercq, 'Two-bit message passing decoders for LDPC codes over the binary symmetric channel,' in Proc. IEEE Int. Symp. on Inform. Theory (ISIT 09) , Seoul, Korea, pp. 2156-2160, July 2009.\n- [15] S. K. Chilappagari and B. Vasic, 'Error correction capability of columnweight-three LDPC codes,' IEEE Trans. Inform. Theory , vol. 55, no. 5, pp. 2055-2061, May 2009.\n- [16] B. J. Frey, R. Koetter, and A. Vardy, 'Signal-space characterization of iterative decoding,' IEEE Trans. Inform. Theory , vol. 47, no. 2, pp. 766781, Feb. 2001.\n- [17] 'Error Floors of LDPC Codes.' [Online]. Available: http://www.ece. arizona.edu/ ∼ vasiclab/Projects/CodingTheory/ErrorFloorHome.html", + "recall": 0.8939828080229226, + "true_md": "Fig. 5. FER results on the n = 4085 , R = 0 . 82 , MacKay code\n\nFig. 4. FER results on the n = 768 , R = 0 . 75 , Quasicyclic code\n\nFig. 3. FER results on the n = 155 , R = 0 . 4 , Tanner code\n\ndecoder guarantees correction of all error patterns up to 5 errors. An interesting point to note is that the highly complex linear programming (LP) decoding fails to correct all 5-errors on the Tanner code, whereas the 3-bit decoder is able to, which illustrates the power of multilevel decoding.\n\nMultilevel decoding was established as a powerful decoding technique for LDPC codes. From our concluding example, we highlighted the importance of the isolation assumption as a crucial strategy for deriving good rules. Also from the results, it is evident that there is a certain aspect of universality to these decoders; the same 3-bit decoder performs well on a variety of codes. This suggests that deriving good rules based on trapping sets appears to take the structure of the local neighborhood into local computations of messages, which is a tiny step closer in our pursuit to approach maximum-likelihood decoding. Our future work includes deriving bounds and relating the isolation theorem with guaranteed error-correction capability.\n\nThis work was funded by NSF under the grants IHCS- 0725403, CCF-0634969, CCF-0830245.\n\n## VI. DISCUSSION AND CONCLUSIONS\n\n## ACKNOWLEDGMENT\n\n## REFERENCES\n\n- [1] S. K. Planjery, D. Declercq, S. K. Chilappagari, and B. Vasic, “Mul- tilevel decoders surpassing belief propagation on the binary symmetric channel,” in Proc. Int. Symp. On Inform. Theory (ISIT 2010) .\n\n- [2] R. G. Gallager, Low Density Parity Check Codes . Cambridge, MA: M.I.T. Press, 1963.\n\n- [3] T. Richardson and R. Urbanke, “Capacity of low-density parity-check codes under message-passing decoding,” IEEE Trans. Inform. Theory , vol 47, pp. 599–618, Feb. 2001.\n\n- [4] J. Chen, A. Dholakia, E. Eleftheriou, M. Fossorier, and X.-Y. Hu, “Reduced-complexity decoding of LDPC codes,” IEEE Trans. Commun. , vol. 53, no. 8, pp. 1288–1299, Aug. 2005.\n\n- [5] J. K. Lee and J. Thorpe, “Memory-efficient decoding of LDPC codes,” in Proc. Int. Symp. on Inform. Theory (ISIT 2005) , Adelaide, Australia, pp. 459–463., Sept. 2005.\n\n- [6] B. Smith, F. R. Kschischang and W. Yu, “Low-density parity-check codes for discretized min-sum decoding,” in Proc. 23rd Biennial Symp. on Commun. , pp. 14–17, 2006.\n\n- [7] T. Richardson, “Error floors of LDPC codes,” in Proc. 41st Annual Allerton Conf. on Commun., Control and Computing , 2003.\n\n- [8] S. K. Chilappagari, S. Sankaranarayanan, and B. Vasic, “Error floors of LDPC codes on the binary symmetric channel,” in Proc. IEEE Int. Conf. on Commun. (ICC 06) , vol. 3, Istanbul, Turkey, pp. 1089–1094, 2006.\n\n- [9] S. K. Chilappagari, A. R. Krishnan, and B. Vasic, “LDPC codes which can correct three errors under iterative decoding,” in Proc. IEEE Inform. on Theory Workshop , pp. 406–410, May 2008.\n\n- [10] Y. Wang, J. S. Yedidia, and S. C. Draper, “Multi-stage decoding of LDPC codes,” in Proc. IEEE Int. Symp. on Inform. Theory (ISIT 09) , Seoul, Korea, pp. 2151–2155, July 2009.\n\n- [11] Z. Zhang, L. Dolecek, B. Nikolic, V. Anantharam, and M. Wainwright, “Lowering LDPC error floors by postprocessing,” in IEEE Global Telecommunications Conf. (GLOBECOM 08) , New Orleans, LA, pp. 1–6, Dec. 2008.\n\n- [12] B. Vasic, S. K. Chilappagari, D. V. Nguyen, and S. K. Planjery, “Trapping set ontology,” Proc. 47th Annual Allerton Conf. on Commun., Control, and Computing , Sept. 2009.\n\n- [13] M. Ivkovic, S. K. Chilappagari, and B. Vasic, “Eliminating trapping sets in low-density parity-check codes by using Tanner graph covers,” IEEE Trans. Inform. Theory , vol. 54, no. 8, pp. 3763–3768, 2008.\n\n- [14] L. Sassatelli, S. K. Chilappagari, B. Vasic, and D. Declercq, “Two-bit message passing decoders for LDPC codes over the binary symmetric channel,” in Proc. IEEE Int. Symp. on Inform. Theory (ISIT 09) , Seoul, Korea, pp. 2156–2160, July 2009.\n\n- [15] S. K. Chilappagari and B. Vasic, “Error correction capability of column- weight-three LDPC codes,” IEEE Trans. Inform. Theory , vol. 55, no. 5, pp. 2055–2061, May 2009.\n\n- [16] B. J. Frey, R. Koetter, and A. Vardy, “Signal-space characterization of iterative decoding,” IEEE Trans. Inform. Theory , vol. 47, no. 2, pp. 766– 781, Feb. 2001.\n\n- [17] “Error Floors of LDPC Codes.” [Online]. Available: http://www.ece. arizona.edu/ $^{∼}$vasiclab/Projects/CodingTheory/ErrorFloorHome.html" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8570918175859528, + "doc_id": "33d4efac6035f253457ac8fe546332e7f95f3472b3aca477234d92decdc67587", + "edit_distance": 0.40336134453781514, + "f1_score": 0.9244712990936554, + "meteor": 0.9100554700725532, + "precision": 0.9622641509433962, + "pred_md": "arXiv:1001.0788v3 [quant-ph] 23 Jun 2010\n\n## The EPR correlation in Kerr-Newman spacetime\n\nJackson Levi Said 1 and Kristian Zarb Adami 1, 2\n\n1 Physics Department, University of Malta, Msida, Malta 2 Physics Department, University of Oxford, Oxford, OX1 3RH, United Kingdom\n\n(Dated: 29th November 2009)\n\nThe EPR correlation has become an integral part of quantum communications as has general relativity in classical communication theory, however when combined an apparent deterioration is observed for spin states. We consider appropriate changes in directions of measurement to exploit full EPR entanglement for a pair of particles and show that it can be deduced only up to the outer even horizon of a Kerr-Newman black hole, even in the case of freely falling observer.\n\nPACS numbers: 97.60.Lf.-s\n\n## I. INTRODUCTION\n\nFor some of the founders of quantum mechanics one of the troubling parts was the spooky action-at-a-distance. Originally this was thought up by Einstein-Podolsky-Rosen (EPR) in an attempt to challenge certain aspects of quantum theory at the time. Contrary to its original design it is now the cornerstone of modern mainstream quantum physics, from cryptography to quantum computation, thus it is important to understand as many of the properties of quantum communications as possible. In particular it is of importance to fully understand the effect of spacetime curvature on EPR states. This is completely different from classical information transport. In this scenario the space between observer and emitter does not have an effect on the transmission which means that only local spacetime effects matter when making measurements on transmissions.\n\nIn this paper, we apply the Terashima and Ueda [1] approach to the spacetime background of a Kerr-Newman black hole. In general relativity the spin of a particle becomes deformed in all but the Minkowski spacetime. We present a method to extract the complete EPR correlation of two particles in a Bell state in Kerr-Newman geometry, ignoring helicity of infalling particles. These particles are defined locally and so suffer a precession of their spin component due an acceleration by an external force and the difference in the local inertial frame at different points about the given geometry. Taking these differences to arise from a continuous succession of local Lorentz transformations (LLT), the spin component can be calcu-\n\nlated since it precesses in accord with the Wigner rotation. It is therefore not a trivial task to describe the motion of a particle using quantum mechanics near a Kerr-Newman black hole because the Poincar' group does not act intuitively e in this region.\n\nThis paper is organized as follows, in Sec. II we derive the spin precession in the Kerr-Newman background for an observer at infinity. Then in Sec. III we consider the EPR correlation for a pair of fully entangled particles. In an attempt to remove the coordinate singularities from the derived angle we then calculate the spin precession for an infalling observer in Sec. IV. In Sec. V we discuss Bell's inequality for the observers at infinity and the infalling observer. Finally in Sec. VI we summarize our results.\n\n## II. KERR-NEWMAN DISTORTION\n\nThe most general vacuum solution of Einstein's field equations for black holes is the KerrNewman metric, any further complications requires one to consider hairy black holes. In this paper we take the Minkowski signature to be η = diag( -, + + +) and use geometric , , units ( G = 1 = c ). Latin letters are run over the four inertial labels (0,1,2,3) and Greek letters over the four general coordinate labels. Also repeated indices are to be summed. Then the metric for the Kerr-Newman spacetime in BoyerLindquist coordinates ( t, r, θ, φ ) for an observer at infinity is given by", + "recall": 0.8895348837209303, + "true_md": "# The EPR correlation in Kerr-Newman spacetime\n\nJackson Levi Said 1 and Kristian Zarb Adami 1, 2\n\n$^{1}$Physics Department, University of Malta, Msida, Malta\n\n$^{2}$Physics Department, University of Oxford, Oxford, OX1 3RH, United Kingdom\n\n(Dated: 29th November 2009)\n\nThe EPR correlation has become an integral part of quantum communications as has general relativity in classical communication theory, however when combined an apparent deterioration is observed for spin states. We consider appropriate changes in directions of measurement to exploit full EPR entanglement for a pair of particles and show that it can be deduced only up to the outer even horizon of a Kerr-Newman black hole, even in the case of freely falling observer.\n\nPACS numbers: 97.60.Lf.-s\n\nFor some of the founders of quantum mechan- ics one of the troubling parts was the spooky action-at-a-distance. Originally this was thought up by Einstein-Podolsky-Rosen (EPR) in an at- tempt to challenge certain aspects of quantum theory at the time. Contrary to its original de- sign it is now the cornerstone of modern main- stream quantum physics, from cryptography to quantum computation, thus it is important to understand as many of the properties of quan- tum communications as possible. In particular it is of importance to fully understand the ef- fect of spacetime curvature on EPR states. This is completely different from classical information transport. In this scenario the space between ob- server and emitter does not have an effect on the transmission which means that only local space- time effects matter when making measurements on transmissions.\n\nIn this paper, we apply the Terashima and Ueda [1] approach to the spacetime background of a Kerr-Newman black hole. In general relativity the spin of a particle becomes deformed in all but the Minkowski spacetime. We present a method to extract the complete EPR correlation of two particles in a Bell state in Kerr-Newman geome- try, ignoring helicity of infalling particles. These particles are defined locally and so suffer a preces- sion of their spin component due an acceleration by an external force and the difference in the local inertial frame at different points about the given geometry. Taking these differences to arise from a continuous succession of local Lorentz transfor- mations (LLT), the spin component can be calcu-\n\nThe most general vacuum solution of Einstein’s field equations for black holes is the Kerr- Newman metric, any further complications re- quires one to consider hairy black holes. In this paper we take the Minkowski signature to be η = diag( − , + , + , +) and use geometric units ( G = 1 = c ). Latin letters are run over the four inertial labels (0,1,2,3) and Greek letters over the four general coordinate labels. Also repeated indices are to be summed. Then the metric for the Kerr-Newman spacetime in Boyer- Lindquist coordinates ( t, r, θ, φ ) for an observer at infinity is given by\n\nThis paper is organized as follows, in Sec. II we derive the spin precession in the Kerr-Newman background for an observer at infinity. Then in Sec. III we consider the EPR correlation for a pair of fully entangled particles. In an attempt to remove the coordinate singularities from the derived angle we then calculate the spin preces- sion for an infalling observer in Sec. IV. In Sec. V we discuss Bell’s inequality for the observers at infinity and the infalling observer. Finally in Sec. VI we summarize our results.\n\nlated since it precesses in accord with the Wigner rotation. It is therefore not a trivial task to de- scribe the motion of a particle using quantum mechanics near a Kerr-Newman black hole be- cause the Poincar´ e group does not act intuitively in this region.\n\n## I. INTRODUCTION\n\n## II. KERR-NEWMAN DISTORTION\n\narXiv:1001.0788v3 [quant-ph] 23 Jun 2010" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6330988216793141, + "doc_id": "e165c05befc94250ac38ff6354eea07743b79ff2ab68660e6c6a03951673b05b", + "edit_distance": 0.6940406976744186, + "f1_score": 0.9498746867167921, + "meteor": 0.5617436104890451, + "precision": 0.9818652849740933, + "pred_md": "FIG. 10: (colors online) Equilibrium probability distribution of the energy for the thickness n = 8 for some temperatures around T N (8), (a) , and T C (8), (b) , respectively.\n\nFIG. 10: (colors online) Equilibrium probability distribution of the energy for the thickness n = 8 for some temperatures around T N (8), (a) , and T C (8), (b) , respectively.\n\nopposite magnetization. We can thus confidently assert that, regardless of the underlying lattice structure, by decreasing the number of the out-of-plane interactions, for thicknesses close to the helical bulk pitch, the block\n\n- 1 Frustrated spin Systems , edited by H. T. Diep (World Scientific, 2004).\n- 2 H. Kawamura, J. Phys.: Cond. Matt. 10 , 4707 (1998).\n- 3 T. Kimura et al. , Nature (London) 426 , 55 (2003).\n- 4 F. Cinti et al. , Phys. Rev. Lett. 100 , 057203 (2008).\n- 5 J.H. Park, S. Onoda, N. Nagaosa, and J. H. Han, Phys. Rev. Lett. 101 , 167202 (2008), and references therein.\n- 6 S. W. Cheong and M. Mostovoy, Nature Materials (London) 6 , 13 (2007).\n- 7 Minhyea Lee, W. Kang, Y. Onose, Y. Tokura, and N. P. Ong, Phys. Rev. Lett. 102 , 186601 (2009)\n- 8 P. Pedrazzini et al. , Phys. Rev. Lett. 98 , 047204 (2007).\n- 9 H. Kawamura and M. S. Li, Phys. Rev. Lett. 87 , 187204 (2001).\n- 10 P. J. Jensen, and A. R. Mackintosh, Rere Earth Magnetism (Structure and Excitations) , Clarendon Press, Oxford (1991).\n- 11 S. Konings, C. Schuessler-Langeheine, H. Ott, E. Weschke, E. Schierle, J. B. Goedkoop, arXiv 0707.2765v2\n- 12 P.J. Jensen, and K.H. Bennemann, Surface Science Reports 61 , 129 (2006).\n- 13 E. Weschke, et al. , Phys. Rev. Lett. 93 , 157204 (2004).\n- 14 F. Cinti, A. Cuccoli, and A. Rettori, Phys. Rev. B 78 , 020402(R) (2008).\n- 15 F. Cinti, A. Cuccoli, and A. Rettori, Phys. Rev. B 79 ,\n\n7\n\nphase is replaced by a quasi -FM configuration in the intermediate temperature range T N ( n ) < T < T C ( n ) .\n\nAs a final issue we address the problem of the order of the transitions observed at T N ( n ) and T C ( n ), respectively. In particular, we focus our attention to the thickness ranges where the chiral order parameter is relevant, i.e. regions i ) and ii ) as defined at the beginning of this Section. In Fig. 10 the equilibrium probability distribution of the energy for temperatures around T N (8) (Fig. 10a) and T C (8) (Fig. 10b) is plotted: for both temperatures, no double peak structure is observed, so that we have no direct indication for a first order transition even if, according to precedent studies of Loison and Diep 17,18 , the presence of a first-order transition at T N ( n ), cannot be completely excluded, as it could reveal itself only when the lateral dimension L are much larger than the largest correlation length. The same conclusion about the order of transition is reached for any other investigated film thickness, as the energy probability distribution shape does not qualitatively change. This findings agree with the results we got in previous MC simulations discussed in Ref. 15, so that we may conclude that the order of the observed transitions is not affected by the range of interactions.\n\n134420 (2009).\n\n- 16 J. Bohr D. Gibbs, J. D. Axe, D. E. Moncton, K. L. D'Amico, C. F. Majkrzak, J. Kwo, M. Hong, C. L. Chien, and J. Jensen, Physica B 159 , 93 (1989).\n- 17 H. T. Diep, Phys. Rev. B 39 , 397 (1989).\n- 18 D. Loison, Physica A 275 , 207 (2000).\n- 19 N. Metropolis, et al. , J. Chem. Phys. 21 , 1087 (1953).\n- 20 F. R. Brown and T. J. Woch, Phys. Rev. Lett. 58 , 2394 (1987).\n- 21 D. P. Landau, and K. Binder, A Guide to Monte Carlo Simulation in Statistical Physics , Cambridge University Press, Cambridge (2000).\n- 22 M. E.J. Newman, and G. T. Barkema, Monte Carlo Methods in Statistical Physics , Clarendon Press, Oxford (1999).\n- 23 B. Efron, The Annals of Statistics 7 , 1 (1979).\n- 24 P. M. Chaikin, T. C. Lubensky Principles of condensed matter physics , Cambridge University Press, New York (1995).\n- 25 K. Binder, Z. Phys. B 43 , 119 (1981). K. Binder, Phys. Rev. Lett. 47 , 693 (1981).\n- 26 Such observable has been obtained from instantaneous evaluation of the structure factor during the stochastic process, and subsequently statistically analyzed as all the other macroscopic quantities.", + "recall": 0.9199029126213593, + "true_md": "7\n\nphase is replaced by a quasi -FM configuration in the in- termediate temperature range T$_{N}$ ( n ) < T < T$_{C}$ ( n ) .\n\nAs a final issue we address the problem of the order of the transitions observed at T$_{N}$ ( n ) and T$_{C}$ ( n ), respec- tively. In particular, we focus our attention to the thick- ness ranges where the chiral order parameter is relevant, i.e. regions i ) and ii ) as defined at the beginning of this Section. In Fig. 10 the equilibrium probability dis- tribution of the energy for temperatures around T$_{N}$ (8) (Fig. 10a) and T$_{C}$ (8) (Fig. 10b) is plotted: for both temperatures, no double peak structure is observed, so that we have no direct indication for a first order tran- sition even if, according to precedent studies of Loison and Diep $^{17,18}$, the presence of a first-order transition at T$_{N}$ ( n ), cannot be completely excluded, as it could reveal itself only when the lateral dimension L are much larger than the largest correlation length. The same conclusion about the order of transition is reached for any other in- vestigated film thickness, as the energy probability distri- bution shape does not qualitatively change. This findings agree with the results we got in previous MC simulations discussed in Ref. 15, so that we may conclude that the order of the observed transitions is not affected by the range of interactions.\n\nopposite magnetization. We can thus confidently assert that, regardless of the underlying lattice structure, by decreasing the number of the out-of-plane interactions, for thicknesses close to the helical bulk pitch, the block\n\nFIG. 10: (colors online) Equilibrium probability distribution of the energy for the thickness n = 8 for some temperatures around T$_{N}$ (8), (a) , and T$_{C}$ (8), (b) , respectively.\n\n134420 (2009).\n\n- 1 Frustrated spin Systems , edited by H. T. Diep (World Sci- entific, 2004). 2\n\n- entific, 2004). 2 H. Kawamura, J. Phys.: Cond. Matt. 10 , 4707 (1998). 3\n\n- H. Kawamura, J. Phys.: Cond. Matt. 10 , 4707 (1998). 3 T. Kimura et al. , Nature (London) 426 , 55 (2003). 4\n\n- T. Kimura et al. , Nature (London) 426 , 55 (2003). 4 F. Cinti et al. , Phys. Rev. Lett. 100 , 057203 (2008). 5\n\n- F. Cinti et al. , Phys. Rev. Lett. 100 , 057203 (2008). 5 J.H. Park, S. Onoda, N. Nagaosa, and J. H. Han, Phys. Rev. Lett. 101 , 167202 (2008), and references therein. 6\n\n- Rev. Lett. 101 , 167202 (2008), and references therein. 6 S. W. Cheong and M. Mostovoy, Nature Materials (Lon- don) 6 , 13 (2007). 7\n\n- don) 6 , 13 (2007). 7 Minhyea Lee, W. Kang, Y. Onose, Y. Tokura, and N. P. Ong, Phys. Rev. Lett. 102 , 186601 (2009) 8\n\n- Ong, Phys. Rev. Lett. 102 , 186601 (2009) 8 P. Pedrazzini et al. , Phys. Rev. Lett. 98 , 047204 (2007). 9\n\n- P. Pedrazzini et al. , Phys. Rev. Lett. 98 , 047204 (2007). 9 H. Kawamura and M. S. Li, Phys. Rev. Lett. 87 , 187204 (2001). 10\n\n- (2001). 10 P. J. Jensen, and A. R. Mackintosh, Rere Earth Mag- netism (Structure and Excitations) , Clarendon Press, Ox- ford (1991). 11\n\n- ford (1991). 11 S. Konings, C. Schuessler-Langeheine, H. Ott, E. Weschke, E. Schierle, J. B. Goedkoop, arXiv 0707.2765v2 12\n\n- E. Schierle, J. B. Goedkoop, arXiv 0707.2765v2 12 P.J. Jensen, and K.H. Bennemann, Surface Science Re- ports 61 , 129 (2006). 13\n\n- ports 61 , 129 (2006). 13 E. Weschke, et al. , Phys. Rev. Lett. 93 , 157204 (2004). 14\n\n- E. Weschke, et al. , Phys. Rev. Lett. 93 , 157204 (2004). 14 F. Cinti, A. Cuccoli, and A. Rettori, Phys. Rev. B 78 , 020402(R) (2008). 15\n\n- 020402(R) (2008). 15 F. Cinti, A. Cuccoli, and A. Rettori, Phys. Rev. B 79 ,\n\n- Rev. Lett. 47 , 693 (1981). 26 Such observable has been obtained from instantaneous evaluation of the structure factor during the stochastic process, and subsequently statistically analyzed as all the other macroscopic quantities.\n\n- (1995). 25 K. Binder, Z. Phys. B 43 , 119 (1981). K. Binder, Phys. Rev. Lett. 47 , 693 (1981). 26\n\n- 134420 (2009). 16 J. Bohr D. Gibbs, J. D. Axe, D. E. Moncton, K. L. D’Amico, C. F. Majkrzak, J. Kwo, M. Hong, C. L. Chien, and J. Jensen, Physica B 159 , 93 (1989). 17\n\n- and J. Jensen, Physica B 159 , 93 (1989). 17 H. T. Diep, Phys. Rev. B 39 , 397 (1989). 18\n\n- H. T. Diep, Phys. Rev. B 39 , 397 (1989). 18 D. Loison, Physica A 275 , 207 (2000). 19\n\n- D. Loison, Physica A 275 , 207 (2000). 19 N. Metropolis, et al. , J. Chem. Phys. 21 , 1087 (1953). 20\n\n- N. Metropolis, et al. , J. Chem. Phys. 21 , 1087 (1953). 20 F. R. Brown and T. J. Woch, Phys. Rev. Lett. 58 , 2394 (1987). 21\n\n- (1987). 21 D. P. Landau, and K. Binder, A Guide to Monte Carlo Simulation in Statistical Physics , Cambridge University Press, Cambridge (2000). 22\n\n- Press, Cambridge (2000). 22 M. E.J. Newman, and G. T. Barkema, Monte Carlo Meth- ods in Statistical Physics , Clarendon Press, Oxford (1999). 23\n\n- ods in Statistical Physics , Clarendon Press, Oxford (1999). 23 B. Efron, The Annals of Statistics 7 , 1 (1979). 24\n\n- B. Efron, The Annals of Statistics 7 , 1 (1979). 24 P. M. Chaikin, T. C. Lubensky Principles of condensed matter physics , Cambridge University Press, New York (1995). 25" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7670559072227298, + "doc_id": "4e701652f4b266cf722c2fd8eba8e5622707ab172c457317ef8719bdce3d1d53", + "edit_distance": 0.3109815354713314, + "f1_score": 0.9278642149929279, + "meteor": 0.7637843636456084, + "precision": 0.9590643274853801, + "pred_md": "Electron surfaces. In the bottom panels of Fig. 4, the squarish electron surface (with k z variation and resulting holes, shown in the lower two panels of Fig. 4) that cuts the aforementioned hole surface is pictured, and substantiates the discussion provided just above. In addition, there are simple electron ellipsoids centered along the Γ-M lines. It is curious that in a band structure that is for the most part strongly 2D, all the FSs have a rather definite three-dimensional character. Although the bands show little dispersion along Γ-Z, the bands just above the the Fermi level are quite different depending on whether k z = 0 or k z = π . In particular, the lowest band along R-A is rather flat, but the lowest conduction band along X-M has a dispersion of nearly 2 eV. Similar comparisons can be made for the bands along Γ-X and Z-R. The k z dispersion is not nearly as strong near k x = k y = 0, which is clear from both the band structure and the FS.\n\nShort discussion. It was noted in the Introduction that the NaAlSi structure is the same as the Fe-pnictide '111' structure. Moreover, in both compounds, the relevant bands involve only the (Si-Al-Si or As-Fe-As) trilayer. The top view of the fan-blade surfaces have characteristics in common with those of some of the Fe pnictides, 27,28 all of which have this same trilayer. The similarity is that the top view of the fan blades (if one ignores the diamond-shaped cutout at the intersection, centered at Γ) appears to show intersecting FSs, neither of which has the square symmetry of the lattice.\n\nFIG. 4: (Color online.) Views from the xy -plane (left) and top (right) of the FSs of NaAlSi, centered at Γ. The blue (dark) surfaces enclose holes and the yellow (light) surfaces enclose electrons.\n\nFIG. 4: (Color online.) Views from the xy -plane (left) and top (right) of the FSs of NaAlSi, centered at Γ. The blue (dark) surfaces enclose holes and the yellow (light) surfaces enclose electrons.\n\n5\n\nSuch occurrence of intersecting FSs, each with lower symmetry than the lattice, has been analyzed for LaFeAsO (a '1111' compound) by Yaresko et al. 29 A symmetry of the Fe As 2 2 (also Al 2 Si 2 ) substructure is a non-primitive translation connecting Fe atoms (respectively, Al atoms) followed by z -reflection. This operation leads to symmetries that allow k z = 0 bands to be unfolded into a larger Brillouin zone (that is, a 'smaller unit cell' having only one Fe atom) which un folds the band structure and the intersecting FSs. The NaAlSi FSs appear to have this similar crossing (albeit interrupted by the free-electron bands), and the highly anisotropic dispersion is due to distinct (but symmetry-related) hopping along each of the crystal axes. In this respect NaAlSi may clarify the electronic structure of the pnictides: by analogy, there are separate bands that disperse more strongly along the (1 1) direc-, tion or the (1 , -1) direction, and give rise to the intersecting, symmetry-related surfaces. In NaAlSi the bands are much more anisotropic in the plane (approaching one-dimensional), making such character much clearer. A difference that complicates the analogy is that in the pnictides the bands near ε F are derived from the Fe atoms, which comprise the center layer of the trilayer, whereas in NaAlSi the bands under discussion are derived from the Si atoms, which comprise the two outer layers.\n\n## D. Wannier functions\n\nPictured in Fig. 5 are symmetry-projected Wannier functions (WFs) projected onto Si 3 p orbitals. The extension of the WFs shows considerable involvement from nearby Al and Si atoms, and in addition have some density extending into the Na layers. The p x WF consists of an atomic p x function, with its density shifted downward by the bonding contribution of Al sp 3 hybrid orbitals. Beyond the p x lobes the nearest Si atoms form a bonding lobe that connects to the 'small' side of the Al sp 3 function. The large p x lobes and the extra contribution from nearby Si atoms are responsible for the largest hopping amplitudes shown in Table I, although there is some phase cancellation between the p x lobe and the lobe lying beyond the nodal surface.\n\nThe p z WF has one lobe extended well into the Na layer; this is responsible for the largest hoppings along b ∗ in Table I, and they create the large dispersion in the p z bands seen in Fig. 5(c). Again, the Al atoms contribute with an sp hybrid orbital, although it appears to be more sp 2 -like than sp 3 -like. There is also a 'ring' structure below the Al layer, where an sp hybrid orbital from the Si atoms forms a bonding combination, but it is antibonding with the p z func-", + "recall": 0.8986301369863013, + "true_md": "Electron surfaces. In the bottom panels of Fig. 4, the squarish electron surface (with k$_{z}$ variation and resulting holes, shown in the lower two panels of Fig. 4) that cuts the aforementioned hole sur- face is pictured, and substantiates the discussion provided just above. In addition, there are simple electron ellipsoids centered along the Γ-M lines. It is curious that in a band structure that is for the most part strongly 2D, all the FSs have a rather definite three-dimensional character. Although the bands show little dispersion along Γ-Z, the bands just above the the Fermi level are quite different de- pending on whether k$_{z}$ = 0 or k$_{z}$ = π . In particular, the lowest band along R-A is rather flat, but the lowest conduction band along X-M has a dispersion of nearly 2 eV. Similar comparisons can be made for the bands along Γ-X and Z-R. The k$_{z}$ dispersion is not nearly as strong near k$_{x}$ = k$_{y}$ = 0, which is clear from both the band structure and the FS.\n\nShort discussion. It was noted in the Introduc- tion that the NaAlSi structure is the same as the Fe-pnictide “111” structure. Moreover, in both com- pounds, the relevant bands involve only the (Si-Al-Si or As-Fe-As) trilayer. The top view of the fan-blade surfaces have characteristics in common with those of some of the Fe pnictides, 27,28 all of which have this same trilayer. The similarity is that the top view of the fan blades (if one ignores the diamond-shaped cutout at the intersection, centered at Γ) appears to show intersecting FSs, neither of which has the square symmetry of the lattice.\n\nSuch occurrence of intersecting FSs, each with lower symmetry than the lattice, has been analyzed for LaFeAsO (a “1111” compound) by Yaresko et al. 29 A symmetry of the Fe$_{2}$As$_{2}$ (also Al$_{2}$Si$_{2}$) sub- structure is a non-primitive translation connecting Fe atoms (respectively, Al atoms) followed by z - reflection. This operation leads to symmetries that allow k$_{z}$ = 0 bands to be unfolded into a larger Brillouin zone (that is, a “smaller unit cell” having only one Fe atom) which un folds the band structure and the intersecting FSs. The NaAlSi FSs appear to have this similar crossing (albeit interrupted by the free-electron bands), and the highly anisotropic dispersion is due to distinct (but symmetry-related) hopping along each of the crystal axes. In this re- spect NaAlSi may clarify the electronic structure of the pnictides: by analogy, there are separate bands that disperse more strongly along the (1 , 1) direc- tion or the (1 , − 1) direction, and give rise to the intersecting, symmetry-related surfaces. In NaAlSi the bands are much more anisotropic in the plane (approaching one-dimensional), making such char- acter much clearer. A difference that complicates the analogy is that in the pnictides the bands near ε$_{F}$ are derived from the Fe atoms, which comprise the center layer of the trilayer, whereas in NaAlSi the bands under discussion are derived from the Si atoms, which comprise the two outer layers.\n\nPictured in Fig. 5 are symmetry-projected Wan- nier functions (WFs) projected onto Si 3 p orbitals. The extension of the WFs shows considerable in- volvement from nearby Al and Si atoms, and in ad- dition have some density extending into the Na lay- ers. The p$_{x}$ WF consists of an atomic p$_{x}$ function, with its density shifted downward by the bonding contribution of Al sp 3 hybrid orbitals. Beyond the p$_{x}$ lobes the nearest Si atoms form a bonding lobe that connects to the “small” side of the Al sp 3 func- tion. The large p$_{x}$ lobes and the extra contribution from nearby Si atoms are responsible for the largest hopping amplitudes shown in Table I, although there is some phase cancellation between the p$_{x}$ lobe and the lobe lying beyond the nodal surface.\n\nThe p$_{z}$ WF has one lobe extended well into the Na layer; this is responsible for the largest hoppings along b ∗ in Table I, and they create the large disper- sion in the p$_{z}$ bands seen in Fig. 5(c). Again, the Al atoms contribute with an sp hybrid orbital, although it appears to be more sp $^{2}$-like than sp $^{3}$-like. There is also a “ring” structure below the Al layer, where an sp hybrid orbital from the Si atoms forms a bonding combination, but it is antibonding with the p$_{z}$ func-\n\nFIG. 4: (Color online.) Views from the xy -plane (left) and top (right) of the FSs of NaAlSi, centered at Γ. The blue (dark) surfaces enclose holes and the yellow (light) surfaces enclose electrons.\n\n5\n\n## D. Wannier functions" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5116066303705732, + "doc_id": "a482b0d8c0732152b03b8958349c0adcb0806b01a398f74209ebca7e6258b4f4", + "edit_distance": 0.6837672281776417, + "f1_score": 0.8689839572192514, + "meteor": 0.515328009719546, + "precision": 0.9285714285714286, + "pred_md": "## V. CONCLUSIONS\n\nThe confining potential close to the edge of a 2D electron gas together with a nonzero current along this edge induces a nonzero spin polarization that is localized within a few Fermi wavelengths from the edge. To characterize this effect quantitatively we have derived a simple analytical formula for the spin polarization per unit length of the edge. Interestingly, the spin polarization is independent of the height of the confining potential as well as the electronic density of the 2DEG. Furthermore, using numerical calculations we have also showed that this result is independent on other possible modifications of the shape of the confining potential: the spatial extent of the confining potential and the partial selfconsistency of the confining potential with respect to charge neutrality of the edge.\n\n## Acknowledgments\n\nThe authors wish to acknowledge fruitful discussions with J. T'bik and L. Kiˇ c' ınov'. P.B. would like to thank Rex God by o a for many stimulating discussions. This research has been supported by the Slovak grant agency VEGA (project No. 1/0452/09) and the NANOQUANTA EU Network of Excellence (NMP4-CT-2004-500198).\n\n## VI. APPENDIX A\n\nThe calculation of the spin-dependent phase-shift follows the usual textbook treatment of the wave-function matching method in 1D problems. For the separated x -dependent factor of the eigenstate we need to solve the 1D Schrodinger equation\n\n\n\nwhere the ' + ' sign is for σ = ↑ spin and the ' -' sign for σ = ↓ spin. We are only interested in the solution well below the vacuum, i.e. e < ∆ V for which we demand asymptotic forms\n\n\n\n\n\nThe reflection amplitude ( r q , σ ( k ) ) and the coefficient t q , σ ( κ ) are then found from the continuity of φ q , σ e ( x ) and its derivative at x = 0 with the result\n\n\n\n\n\nThe sought phase shift is obtained from the reflection amplitude re q , σ = | r q , σ ( k ) | e i θ q , σ k ,\n\n\n\n6\n\nFIG. 5: The shifted Fermi sphere (left) and the two-Fermi radii (right) occupations in 2DEG. The occupied states are shown as filled areas, have both identical current density and electronic density but differ in higher moments of k .\n\nFIG. 5: The shifted Fermi sphere (left) and the two-Fermi radii (right) occupations in 2DEG. The occupied states are shown as filled areas, have both identical current density and electronic density but differ in higher moments of k .\n\nExpanding the last result in powers of α E to 3 rd oder we obtain the expression Eq. 5.\n\n## VII. APPENDIX B\n\nWe have stated that the result for the spin-polarization, Eq. 14, is independent of the considered non-equilibrium occupations of electronic states to the first order in the the spinorbit coupling α E . This is true as long as the current density in the system is the same for all of these considered occupations. Let us consider two simple models of occupations: (1) the 'two-Fermi radii model' (2FR), frequently used within the coherent transport with the occupancies dictated by the left and right macroscopic electrodes with Fermi momenta k R F and k L F respectively 32 attached to the sample at its ends (Fig. 5, right), and (2) the shifted Fermi distribution function (ShF), used within the main text (Fig. 5, left) From this one immediately sees that the contribution to the spin polarization that is linear in α E in Eq. 11, and therefore also linear in the momentum ky (= q ) , will be independent of the particular form of the occupations as long as the zero-th and the first moments are identical.\n\nApart from this, the 2FR and ShF occupations represent two different situations: the former is suited for very short ballistic systems and it directly facilitates interpretation of the results in terms of the difference in electro-chemical potentials of the electrodes, ∆µ = ( 1 / 2 ) ( ( k L F ) 2 -( k R F ) 2 ) . The latter is related to the current density inside the sample through\n\n\n\nwhere the occupation factor, n kx ( , ky ) = 2 (spin degeneracy in the unperturbed system) for the occupied states shown in Fig. 5 and n kx ( , ky ) = 0 otherwise. Eq. 25 gives the linear expansion in the applied bias ∆µ . No such simple connection to the applied bias voltage can be made for the ShF occupation. On the other hand, ShF is suitable for longer samples, where electrons' scattering leads to partial equilibration of the distribution function 30 . This is then characterized with the drift", + "recall": 0.8165829145728644, + "true_md": "6\n\n## V. CONCLUSIONS\n\n## Acknowledgments\n\n## VII. APPENDIX B\n\n## VI. APPENDIX A\n\nThe confining potential close to the edge of a 2D electron gas together with a nonzero current along this edge induces a nonzero spin polarization that is localized within a few Fermi wavelengths from the edge. To characterize this effect quan- titatively we have derived a simple analytical formula for the spin polarization per unit length of the edge. Interestingly, the spin polarization is independent of the height of the confini ng potential as well as the electronic density of the 2DEG. Fur- thermore, using numerical calculations we have also showed that this result is independent on other possible modificati ons of the shape of the confining potential: the spatial extent ofthe confining potential and the partial selfconsistency of the c on- fining potential with respect to charge neutrality of the edg e.\n\nExpanding the last result in powers of α E to 3 rd oder we obtain the expression Eq. 5.\n\nThe authors wish to acknowledge fruitful discussions with J. T´obik and L. Kiˇc´ınov´a. P.B. would like to thank Rex God by for many stimulating discussions. This research has been supported by the Slovak grant agency VEGA (project No. 1/0452/09) and the NANOQUANTA EU Network of Excel- lence (NMP4-CT-2004-500198).\n\nWe have stated that the result for the spin-polarization, Eq. 14, is independent of the considered non-equilibrium oc- cupations of electronic states to the first order in the the sp in- orbit coupling α $_{E}$. This is true as long as the current density in the system is the same for all of these considered occupa- tions. Let us consider two simple models of occupations: (1) the “two-Fermi radii model” (2FR), frequently used within t he coherent transport with the occupancies dictated by the left and right macroscopic electrodes with Fermi momenta k R F and k L F respectively 32 attached to the sample at its ends (Fig. 5, right), and (2) the shifted Fermi distribution function (ShF), used within the main text (Fig. 5, left) From this one immedi- ately sees that the contribution to the spin polarization that is linear in α E in Eq. 11, and therefore also linear in the momen- tum k$_{y}$ (= q ) , will be independent of the particular form of the occupations as long as the zero-th and the first moments are identical.\n\nApart from this, the 2FR and ShF occupations represent two different situations: the former is suited for very short ballistic systems and it directly facilitates interpretation of the results in terms of the difference in electro-chemical potentials of the electrodes, Δµ = ( 1 / 2 ) ( k L $_{F}$) $^{2}$− ( k R $_{F}$) $^{2}$) . The latter is related to the current density inside the sample through\n\nThe calculation of the spin-dependent phase-shift follows the usual textbook treatment of the wave-function matching method in 1D problems. For the separated x − dependent fac- tor of the eigenstate we need to solve the 1D Schr¨odinger equation\n\nwhere the ‘ + ’ sign is for σ = ↑ spin and the ’ − ’ sign for σ = ↓ spin. We are only interested in the solution well below the vacuum, i.e. e < Δ V for which we demand asymptotic forms\n\nThe reflection amplitude ( r q , σ ( k ) ) and the coefficient t q , σ ( κ ) are then found from the continuity of φ q , σ e ( x ) and its derivative at x = 0 with the result\n\nThe sought phase shift is obtained from the reflection ampli- tude r q , σ e = | r q , σ ( k ) | e i θ q , σ k ,\n\n$$r q , σ ( k ) = − ± 2 α $_{E}$q Δ V + κ + ik 2 α $_{E}$q Δ V + κ − ik (21) , 2 ik$$\n\n$$− t q , σ ( κ ) = − 2 ik ± 2 α $_{E}$q Δ V + κ + ik . (22)$$\n\n$$θ q , σ k = π + 2atan k ± 2 α $_{E}$q Δ V + κ . (23)$$\n\n$$j = ∫ dk$_{x}$dk$_{y}$ 4 π 2 n ( k$_{x}$ , k$_{y}$ ) k$_{y}$ = 1 3 π 2 ( k R $_{F}$) $^{3}$− ( k L $_{F}$) $^{3}$) (24) ≈ 1 π 2 √ 2 E$_{F}$ Δµ , (25)$$\n\n$$φ q , σ e ( x ) = t q , σ ( κ ) e κ $^{x}$, x < 0 , κ = √ 2 ( Δ V − e ) (19) φ q , σ e ( x ) = e − $^{ikx}$+ r q , σ ( k ) e $^{ikx}$, x > 0 , k $_{=}$√$_{2}$$_{e}$ (20)$$\n\n$$($_{−}$ 1 2 d 2 dx 2 + Δ V θ ( − x ) ± α $_{E}$q Δ V δ ( x ) φ q , σ e ( x ) = e φ q , σ e ( x ) , (18)$$\n\nFIG. 5: The shifted Fermi sphere (left) and the two-Fermi radii (right) occupations in 2DEG. The occupied states are shown as filled areas, have both identical current density and electronic density but differ in higher moments of k .\n\nwhere the occupation factor, n ( k$_{x}$ , k$_{y}$ ) = 2 (spin degeneracy in the unperturbed system) for the occupied states shown in Fig. 5 and n ( k$_{x}$ , k$_{y}$ ) = 0 otherwise. Eq. 25 gives the linear ex- pansion in the applied bias Δµ . No such simple connection to the applied bias voltage can be made for the ShF occupation. On the other hand, ShF is suitable for longer samples, where electrons’ scattering leads to partial equilibration of the dis- tribution function$^{30}$. This is then characterized with the drift" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.668576697363864, + "doc_id": "9854d14487d16128b599dea5199bf25ee041951f3068ae9134aeaefb371c8e1e", + "edit_distance": 0.5910931174089069, + "f1_score": 0.9136163982430455, + "meteor": 0.6980926887078313, + "precision": 0.9512195121951219, + "pred_md": "arXiv:1001.0111v1 [cond-mat.soft] 31 Dec 2009\n\n## Breakdown of The Excess Entropy Scaling for the Systems with Thermodynamic Anomalies\n\nYu. D. Fomin, N. V. Gribova, and V. N. Ryzhov Institute for High Pressure Physics, Russian Academy of Sciences, Troitsk 142190, Moscow Region, Russia (Dated: October 31, 2018)\n\nThis articles presents a simulation study of the applicability of the Rosenfeld entropy scaling to the systems which can not be approximated by effective hard spheres. Three systems are studied: Herzian spheres, Gauss Core Model and soft repulsive shoulder potential. These systems demonstrate the diffusion anomalies at low temperatures: the diffusion increases with increasing density or pressure. It is shown that for the first two systems which belong to the class of bounded potentials the Rosenfeld scaling formula is valid only in the infinite temperature limit where there are no anomalies. For the soft repulsive shoulder the scaling formula is valid already at sufficiently low temperatures, however, out of the anomaly range.\n\nPACS numbers: 61.20.Gy, 61.20.Ne, 64.60.Kw\n\n## I. INTRODUCTION\n\nIt is well known that some liquids (for example, water, silica, silicon, carbon, and phosphorus) show anomalous behavior in the vicinity of their freezing lines [1-18]. The water phase diagrams have regions where a thermal expansion coefficient is negative (density anomaly), a selfdiffusivity increases upon pressuring (diffusion anomaly), and the structural order of the system decreases upon compression (structural anomaly) [6, 7]. The regions where these anomalies take place form nested domains in the density-temperature [6] (or pressure-temperature [7]) planes: the density anomaly region is inside the diffusion anomaly domain, and both of these anomalous regions are inside the broader structurally anomalous region. It is natural to relate this kind of behavior with the orientational anisotropy of the potentials, however, there are a number of studies which demonstrate the waterlike anomalies in fluids that interact through spherically symmetric potentials [19-31, 33-45].\n\nIt was shown [17, 18] that the thermodynamic and kinetic anomalies may be linked through excess entropy. In particular, in Refs. 17, 18 the authors propose that entropy scaling relations developed by Rosenfeld [46, 47] can be used to describe the the regions of diffusivity anomaly.\n\nRosenfeld based his arguments on the approximations of liquid by an effective hard spheres system. In this approach the kinetic coefficients are expressed in reduced units based on the mean length related to density of the system d = ρ -1 / 3 and thermal velocity v th = ( k B T/m ) 1 / 2 . The reduced diffusion coefficient D ∗ , viscosity η ∗ and thermal conductivity κ ∗ are written in the form\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nRosenfeld suggested that the reduced transport coefficients can be connected to the excess entropy of the system S ex = ( S -S id ) / Nk ( B ) through the formula\n\n\n\nwhere X is the transport coefficient, and a X and b X are constants which depend on the studying property [47]. Interestingly the coefficients a and b show extremely weak dependence on the material and can be considered as universal.\n\nAnother expression for relating diffusion coefficient to the excess entropy was suggested by Dzugutov [49]. In this approach the natural parameters of the system were chosen to be the particle diameter σ and the Enskog collision frequency Γ E = 4 σ g σ ρ 2 ( ) √ πk B T m , where g σ ( ) is the value of radial distribution function at contact. In case of continuous potentials the value of σ corresponds to the distance of the first maximum of radial distribution function. Defining the reduced diffusion coefficient as D ∗ D = D Γ E σ 2 . Dzugutov suggested the following formula for it\n\n\n\nwhere s 2 is a pair contribution to the excess entropy [49]. It was shown that this relation holds for many simple liquids. At the same time this equation is not strictly valid for liquid metals. In the work [50] it was shown that in this case it is necessary to replace the pair entropy s 2", + "recall": 0.8788732394366198, + "true_md": "Yu. D. Fomin, N. V. Gribova, and V. N. Ryzhov\n\nInstitute for High Pressure Physics, Russian Academy of Sciences, Troitsk 142190, Moscow Region, Russia\n\n(Dated: October 31, 2018)\n\n# Breakdown of The Excess Entropy Scaling for the Systems with Thermodynamic Anomalies\n\nThis articles presents a simulation study of the applicability of the Rosenfeld entropy scaling to the systems which can not be approximated by effective hard spheres. Three systems are studied: Herzian spheres, Gauss Core Model and soft repulsive shoulder potential. These systems demon- strate the diffusion anomalies at low temperatures: the diffusion increases with increasing density or pressure. It is shown that for the first two systems which belong to the class of bounded poten- tials the Rosenfeld scaling formula is valid only in the infinite temperature limit where there are no anomalies. For the soft repulsive shoulder the scaling formula is valid already at sufficiently low temperatures, however, out of the anomaly range.\n\nPACS numbers: 61.20.Gy, 61.20.Ne, 64.60.Kw\n\nIt is well known that some liquids (for example, water, silica, silicon, carbon, and phosphorus) show anomalous behavior in the vicinity of their freezing lines [1–18]. The water phase diagrams have regions where a thermal ex- pansion coefficient is negative (density anomaly), a self- diffusivity increases upon pressuring (diffusion anomaly), and the structural order of the system decreases upon compression (structural anomaly) [6, 7]. The regions where these anomalies take place form nested domains in the density-temperature [6] (or pressure-temperature [7]) planes: the density anomaly region is inside the dif- fusion anomaly domain, and both of these anomalous regions are inside the broader structurally anomalous re- gion. It is natural to relate this kind of behavior with the orientational anisotropy of the potentials, however, there are a number of studies which demonstrate the water- like anomalies in fluids that interact through spherically symmetric potentials [19–31, 33–45].\n\nRosenfeld suggested that the reduced transport coef- ficients can be connected to the excess entropy of the system S$_{ex}$ = ( S − S$_{id}$ ) / ( Nk$_{B}$ ) through the formula\n\nwhere X is the transport coefficient, and a$_{X}$ and b$_{X}$ are constants which depend on the studying property [47]. Interestingly the coefficients a and b show extremely weak dependence on the material and can be considered as universal.\n\nAnother expression for relating diffusion coefficient to the excess entropy was suggested by Dzugutov [49]. In this approach the natural parameters of the system were chosen to be the particle diameter σ and the Enskog col- lision frequency Γ$_{E}$ = 4 σ $^{2}$g ( σ ) ρ √ πk B T m , where g ( σ ) is the value of radial distribution function at contact. In case of continuous potentials the value of σ corresponds to the distance of the first maximum of radial distribution function. Defining the reduced diffusion coefficient as D ∗ D = D Γ$_{E}$ σ $_{2}$. Dzugutov suggested the following formula for it\n\nIt was shown [17, 18] that the thermodynamic and ki- netic anomalies may be linked through excess entropy. In particular, in Refs. 17, 18 the authors propose that en- tropy scaling relations developed by Rosenfeld [46, 47] can be used to describe the the regions of diffusivity anomaly.\n\nRosenfeld based his arguments on the approximations of liquid by an effective hard spheres system. In this approach the kinetic coefficients are expressed in re- duced units based on the mean length related to den- sity of the system d = ρ − 1 / 3 and thermal velocity v$_{th}$ = ( k$_{B}$T/m ) 1 / $^{2}$. The reduced diffusion coefficient D ∗ , vis- cosity η ∗ and thermal conductivity κ ∗ are written in the form\n\nwhere s 2 is a pair contribution to the excess entropy [49]. It was shown that this relation holds for many sim- ple liquids. At the same time this equation is not strictly valid for liquid metals. In the work [50] it was shown that in this case it is necessary to replace the pair entropy s 2\n\n$$D ∗ D = 0 . 049 e $^{s$_{2}$}$, (5)$$\n\n$$D ∗ = D ρ 1 / 3 ( k$_{B}$T/m ) 1 / 3 (1)$$\n\n$$X = a$_{X}$ · e b X S ex , (4)$$\n\n$$κ ∗ = κ ρ − 2 / 3 k$_{B}$ ( k$_{B}$T/m ) 1 / 2 (3)$$\n\n$$η ∗ = η ρ − 2 / 3 ( mk$_{B}$T ) 1 / 2 (2)$$\n\narXiv:1001.0111v1 [cond-mat.soft] 31 Dec 2009\n\n## I. INTRODUCTION" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8617545101075653, + "doc_id": "c758e2ecbe26f2bce97a163c9f39bd597bd69e49b0b847aeb78f5ee7796ce189", + "edit_distance": 0.3406478578892372, + "f1_score": 0.8913649025069637, + "meteor": 0.8764658592788953, + "precision": 0.9329446064139941, + "pred_md": "arXiv:1001.1732v2 [quant-ph] 9 Apr 2010\n\n## Trade-off capacities of the quantum Hadamard channels\n\nKamil Br' adler, Patrick Hayden, Dave Touchette, and Mark M. Wilde School of Computer Science, McGill University, Montreal, Qu'bec, H3A 2A7, Canada e\n\n(Dated: November 10, 2018)\n\nCoding theorems in quantum Shannon theory express the ultimate rates at which a sender can transmit information over a noisy quantum channel. More often than not, the known formulas expressing these transmission rates are intractable, requiring an optimization over an infinite number of uses of the channel. Researchers have rarely found quantum channels with a tractable classical or quantum capacity, but when such a finding occurs, it demonstrates a complete understanding of that channel's capabilities for transmitting classical or quantum information. Here, we show that the three-dimensional capacity region for entanglement-assisted transmission of classical and quantum information is tractable for the Hadamard class of channels. Examples of Hadamard channels include generalized dephasing channels, cloning channels, and the Unruh channel. The generalized dephasing channels and the cloning channels are natural processes that occur in quantum systems through the loss of quantum coherence or stimulated emission, respectively. The Unruh channel is a noisy process that occurs in relativistic quantum information theory as a result of the Unruh effect and bears a strong relationship to the cloning channels. We give exact formulas for the entanglement-assisted classical and quantum communication capacity regions of these channels. The coding strategy for each of these examples is superior to a na¨ ıve time-sharing strategy, and we introduce a measure to determine this improvement.\n\nPACS numbers: 03.67.Hk, 03.67.Pp, 04.62.+v\n\nKeywords: quantum Shannon theory, trading resources, entanglement-assisted classical and quantum communication, Hadamard channel, cloning channel, Unruh channel\n\n## I. INTRODUCTION\n\nOne of the aims of quantum Shannon theory is to characterize the ultimate limits on the transmission of information over a noisy quantum channel. Holevo, Schumacher, and Westmoreland contributed the first seminal result in this direction by providing a lower bound for the ultimate limit of a noisy quantum channel to transmit classical information [1, 2], a result now known as the HSW coding theorem. Lloyd, Shor, and Devetak then contributed increasingly rigorous proofs of the quantum channel coding theorem [3-5], now known as the LSD coding theorem, that provides a lower bound on the ultimate limit for a noisy quantum channel to transmit quantum information. Other expository proofs appeared later, providing insight into the nature of quantum coding [6-10]. Bennett et al . [11] and Barnum et al . [12] also showed that the capacity of a quantum channel for transmitting quantum information is the same as that channel's capacity for generating shared entanglement between sender and receiver. These three results form the core of the dynamic, single-resource quantum Shannon theory, where a sender exploits a noisy quantum channel to establish a single noiseless resource, namely, classical communication, quantum communication, or shared entanglement, with a receiver.\n\nA formula for the capacity of a channel gives a 'singleletter' characterization if the computation of the capacity requires an optimization over only a single use of the channel, and the formula gives a 'multi-letter' characterization otherwise. A single-letter characterization implies that the computation of the capacity is tractable for a fixed input dimension of the channel, whereas a\n\nmulti-letter characterization typically requires an optimization over an infinite number of uses of the channel and is therefore intractable in this case. This 'singleletterization' issue does not play a central role in classical information theory for the most basic task of communication over a noisy classical channel, because singleletterization occurs naturally in Shannon's original analysis for classical, memoryless channels [13]. But this issue plays a prominent role in the domain of quantum Shannon theory even for the most basic communication tasks. Our knowledge so far indicates that the computation of the classical capacity is intractable in the general case [14-17], with the same seeming to hold generally for the quantum capacity [18, 19]. These results underscore our incomplete understanding of the nature of quantum information, but they also have the surprising and 'uniquely quantum' respective consequences that the strong correlations present in entangled uses of a quantum channel boost the classical capacity and that the degeneracy property of quantum codes can enhance the quantum capacity.\n\nThus, in hindsight, we might now say that any channel with a single-letter capacity formula is a 'rare gem' in quantum Shannon theory, given that the known formulas for capacities generally give multi-letter characterizations. In fact, researchers once conjectured that the HSW formula for the classical capacity would generally give a single-letter characterization [20, 21], until the recent result of Hastings [14]. Researchers have found several examples of these gems for the classical capacity: the identity channel [22], unital qubit channels [23], erasure channels [24], Hadamard channels [25], entanglement-breaking channels [26], depolarizing chan-", + "recall": 0.8533333333333334, + "true_md": "# Trade-off capacities of the quantum Hadamard channels\n\nKamil Br´ adler, Patrick Hayden, Dave Touchette, and Mark M. Wilde\n\nSchool of Computer Science, McGill University, Montreal, Qu´ebec, H3A 2A7, Canada\n\n(Dated: November 10, 2018)\n\nCoding theorems in quantum Shannon theory express the ultimate rates at which a sender can transmit information over a noisy quantum channel. More often than not, the known formulas expressing these transmission rates are intractable, requiring an optimization over an infinite number of uses of the channel. Researchers have rarely found quantum channels with a tractable classical or quantum capacity, but when such a finding occurs, it demonstrates a complete understanding of that channel’s capabilities for transmitting classical or quantum information. Here, we show that the three-dimensional capacity region for entanglement-assisted transmission of classical and quantum information is tractable for the Hadamard class of channels. Examples of Hadamard channels include generalized dephasing channels, cloning channels, and the Unruh channel. The generalized dephasing channels and the cloning channels are natural processes that occur in quantum systems through the loss of quantum coherence or stimulated emission, respectively. The Unruh channel is a noisy process that occurs in relativistic quantum information theory as a result of the Unruh effect and bears a strong relationship to the cloning channels. We give exact formulas for the entanglement-assisted classical and quantum communication capacity regions of these channels. The coding strategy for each of these examples is superior to a na¨ıve time-sharing strategy, and we introduce a measure to determine this improvement.\n\nPACS numbers: 03.67.Hk, 03.67.Pp, 04.62.+v Keywords: quantum Shannon theory, trading resources, entanglement-assisted classical and quantum com- munication, Hadamard channel, cloning channel, Unruh channel\n\nOne of the aims of quantum Shannon theory is to char- acterize the ultimate limits on the transmission of infor- mation over a noisy quantum channel. Holevo, Schu- macher, and Westmoreland contributed the first seminal result in this direction by providing a lower bound for the ultimate limit of a noisy quantum channel to transmit classical information [1, 2], a result now known as the HSW coding theorem. Lloyd, Shor, and Devetak then contributed increasingly rigorous proofs of the quantum channel coding theorem [3–5], now known as the LSD coding theorem, that provides a lower bound on the ul- timate limit for a noisy quantum channel to transmit quantum information. Other expository proofs appeared later, providing insight into the nature of quantum cod- ing [6–10]. Bennett et al . [11] and Barnum et al . [12] also showed that the capacity of a quantum channel for transmitting quantum information is the same as that channel’s capacity for generating shared entanglement between sender and receiver. These three results form the core of the dynamic, single-resource quantum Shannon theory, where a sender exploits a noisy quantum channel to establish a single noiseless resource, namely, classical communication, quantum communication, or shared en- tanglement, with a receiver.\n\nA formula for the capacity of a channel gives a “single- letter” characterization if the computation of the capac- ity requires an optimization over only a single use of the channel, and the formula gives a “multi-letter” charac- terization otherwise. A single-letter characterization im- plies that the computation of the capacity is tractable for a fixed input dimension of the channel, whereas a\n\nThus, in hindsight, we might now say that any chan- nel with a single-letter capacity formula is a “rare gem” in quantum Shannon theory, given that the known for- mulas for capacities generally give multi-letter charac- terizations. In fact, researchers once conjectured that the HSW formula for the classical capacity would gen- erally give a single-letter characterization [20, 21], un- til the recent result of Hastings [14]. Researchers have found several examples of these gems for the classical capacity: the identity channel [22], unital qubit chan- nels [23], erasure channels [24], Hadamard channels [25], entanglement-breaking channels [26], depolarizing chan-\n\nmulti-letter characterization typically requires an opti- mization over an infinite number of uses of the channel and is therefore intractable in this case. This “single- letterization” issue does not play a central role in clas- sical information theory for the most basic task of com- munication over a noisy classical channel, because single- letterization occurs naturally in Shannon’s original anal- ysis for classical, memoryless channels [13]. But this is- sue plays a prominent role in the domain of quantum Shannon theory even for the most basic communication tasks. Our knowledge so far indicates that the computa- tion of the classical capacity is intractable in the general case [14–17], with the same seeming to hold generally for the quantum capacity [18, 19]. These results un- derscore our incomplete understanding of the nature of quantum information, but they also have the surprising and “uniquely quantum” respective consequences that the strong correlations present in entangled uses of a quantum channel boost the classical capacity and that the degeneracy property of quantum codes can enhance the quantum capacity.\n\n## I. INTRODUCTION\n\narXiv:1001.1732v2 [quant-ph] 9 Apr 2010" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.3000182639984352, + "doc_id": "9833c242fe1fe03aa6497eb989d2b95c20073ae44be13cbc7940f6fccf8bbe02", + "edit_distance": 0.7896505376344086, + "f1_score": 0.8907849829351535, + "meteor": 0.3678865895973364, + "precision": 0.9321428571428572, + "pred_md": "III. QUANTUM DEPHASING CHANNEL\n\n## A. The Model\n\nFIG. 1: Communication protocol: a qubit passes through an Ising spin-star channel. This is repeated in parallel over many identical such channels.\n\nFIG. 1: Communication protocol: a qubit passes through an Ising spin-star channel. This is repeated in parallel over many identical such channels.\n\nWe consider the case of an exactly solvable spin star system of N + 1 localized spin1 2 particles as shown in Fig. 1. The system input state ρ S (0) is carried by the central (system) spin. This spin interacts with N noncentral spins comprising the bath. The bath spins do not interact with each other directly. The interaction between the system spin and bath is given by the Ising Hamiltonian\n\n\n\nwhere we work in glyph[planckover2pi1] = 1 units, g n ∈ -[ 1 1] , are dimensionless real-valued coupling constants, and α > 0 is the coupling strength having the dimension of frequency. The system and bath Hamiltonians are given by\n\n\n\n\n\nThe frequencies ω 0 and Ω n are restricted to the interval [ -1 1] , , in frequency units. Initially, the total system is assumed to be in the product state\n\n\n\nwith the bath in the Gibbs thermal state at inverse temperature β = 1 ( / kT ) given by\n\n\n\nSince ρ B commutes with H I the bath state is stationary throughout the dynamics: ρ B ( ) = t ρ B . The state of the system qubit is obtained by performing a partial trace over the bath Hilbert space\n\n\n\nwhere U t ( ) = exp[ -it ( H S + H I + H B )] . The analytical solution of this model was worked out in detail in Ref. [38], and we present a brief summary next.\n\n3\n\n## B. Exact Solution\n\nAt any given time t , the state of the system qubit ρ S ( ) t can be written in the Kraus representation as [58],\n\n\n\nwhere the Kraus operators satisfy the completeness relation ∑ i,j K K † ij ij = I S . After a transformation to the interaction picture defined by H S + H B , these operators can be expressed as\n\n\n\nwhere we have introduced the spectral decomposition ρ B = ∑ i λ i | i 〉〈 | i of the initial bath state. For the Gibbs thermal state chosen here the eigenbasis states {| 〉} i are N -fold tensor products of the σ z eigenstates, which gives\n\n\n\nwhere E i = 1 2 ∑ N n =1 Ω ( n -1) i n is the energy of each bath eigenstate | i 〉 ( i = i 1 , i 2 , . . . , i N is the binary expansion of the integer i , where i ∈ [0 , . . . , 2 N -1] ) and Z = ∑ i exp( -βE i ) is the partition function. Therefore, the Kraus operators are\n\n\n\nwith λ i = exp( -βE i ) /Z , and ˜ E i given by\n\n\n\nwhere β n = tanh( -1 2 β Ω ) n . The CPTP map ρ S (0) E → ρ S ( ) t with the Kraus operators given by Eq. (18), represents a quantum dephasing channel, since the Kraus operators are diagonal in the reference basis {| 0 〉 , | 1 〉} ∈ H S (eigenstates of σ z with eigenvalues ± 1 ) of the system. Moreover, as it corresponds to a non-Markovian model [38], E represents a quantum dephasing channel with memory. We now determine the information transmission capacities of this channel.\n\n## IV. CAPACITIES OF QUANTUM DEPHASING CHANNEL\n\n## A. Classical Capacity\n\nDephasing channels have the characteristic property of transmitting states of a preferential orthonormal basis without introducing any error [2]. These basis states can be used to encode classical information, which makes these channels noiseless for the transmission of classical information [28]. Superpositions of the basis states will decohere, however, therefore", + "recall": 0.8529411764705882, + "true_md": "3\n\n## B. Exact Solution\n\n## III. QUANTUM DEPHASING CHANNEL\n\n## A. The Model\n\nAt any given time t , the state of the system qubit ρ$_{S}$ ( t ) can be written in the Kraus representation as [58],\n\nwhere the Kraus operators satisfy the completeness relation ∑ i,j K † $_{ij}$K$_{ij}$ = I$_{S}$ . After a transformation to the interaction picture defined by H$_{S}$ + H$_{B}$ , these operators can be expressed as\n\nwhere we have introduced the spectral decomposition ρ$_{B}$ = ∑ i λ$_{i}$ | i 〉〈 i | of the initial bath state. For the Gibbs thermal state chosen here the eigenbasis states {| i 〉} are N -fold tensor products of the σ z eigenstates, which gives\n\nWe consider the case of an exactly solvable spin star sys- tem of N + 1 localized spin- 1 2 particles as shown in Fig. 1. The system input state ρ$_{S}$ (0) is carried by the central (system) spin. This spin interacts with N noncentral spins comprising the bath. The bath spins do not interact with each other di- rectly. The interaction between the system spin and bath is given by the Ising Hamiltonian\n\n$$ρ$_{S}$ ( t ) = E ( ρ$_{S}$ (0)) = ∑ i,j K$_{ij}$ρ$_{S}$ (0) K † $_{ij}$, (15)$$\n\n$$K$_{ij}$ = $^{√}$λ$_{i}$ 〈 j | exp( − iH$_{I}$t ) | i 〉 , (16)$$\n\n$$ρ$_{B}$ = ∑ i exp( − βE$_{i}$ ) Z | i 〉〈 i | , (17)$$\n\nFIG. 1: Communication protocol: a qubit passes through an Ising spin-star channel. This is repeated in parallel over many identical such channels.\n\nwhere E$_{i}$ = 1 2 ∑ N n $_{=1}$Ω$_{n}$ ( − 1) i$_{n}$ is the energy of each bath eigenstate | i 〉 ( i = i$_{1}$, i$_{2}$, . . . , i$_{N}$ is the binary expansion of the integer i , where i ∈ [0 , . . . , 2 $^{N}$− 1] ) and Z = $^{∑}$$\\_{i}$exp( − βE$\\_{i}$ ) is the partition function. Therefore, the Kraus operators are\n\nwhere we work in$_{ℏ}$ = 1 units, g$_{n}$ ∈ [ − 1 , 1] are dimensionless real-valued coupling constants, and α > 0 is the coupling strength having the dimension of frequency. The system and bath Hamiltonians are given by\n\nwith λ$_{i}$ = exp( − βE$_{i}$ ) /Z , and ˜ E$_{i}$ given by\n\n$$K$_{ij}$ = $^{√}$λ$_{i}$ exp( − itα ˜ E$_{i}$σ $^{z}$) δ$_{ij}$, (18)$$\n\n$$H$_{I}$ = ασ$_{z}$ ⊗ N ∑ n =1 g$_{n}$σ z $_{n}$, (9)$$\n\n$$˜ E$_{i}$ = N ∑ n =1 g$_{n}$ ( − 1) i$_{n}$ − Tr { ∑ n g$_{n}$σ z $_{n}$ρ$_{B}$ } , = N ∑ n =1 g$_{n}$ [( − 1) i$_{n}$ − β$_{n}$ ] , (19)$$\n\n$$H$_{S}$ = 1 2 ω$_{0}$σ $^{z}$, (10)$$\n\n$$H$_{B}$ = 1 2 N ∑ n =1 Ω$_{n}$ σ z $_{n}$. (11)$$\n\n$$ρ (0) = ρ$_{S}$ (0) ⊗ ρ$_{B}$, (12)$$\n\n$$ρ$_{B}$ = exp( − βH$_{B}$ ) / Tr [exp( − βH$_{B}$ )] . (13)$$\n\n$$ρ$_{S}$ ( t ) = Tr$_{B}$ { U ( t ) ρ (0) U $^{†}$( t )) } , (14)$$\n\nwhere β$_{n}$ = tanh( − 1 $_{2}$β Ω$_{n}$) . The CPTP map ρ$_{S}$ (0) E → ρ$_{S}$ ( t ) with the Kraus operators given by Eq. (18), represents a quan- tum dephasing channel, since the Kraus operators are diagonal in the reference basis {| 0 〉 , | 1 〉} ∈ H$_{S}$ (eigenstates of σ z with eigenvalues ± 1 ) of the system. Moreover, as it corresponds to a non-Markovian model [38], E represents a quantum dephas- ing channel with memory. We now determine the information transmission capacities of this channel.\n\nThe frequencies ω$_{0}$ and Ω$_{n}$ are restricted to the interval [ − 1 , 1] , in frequency units. Initially, the total system is as- sumed to be in the product state\n\nwith the bath in the Gibbs thermal state at inverse temperature β = 1 / ( kT ) given by\n\nSince ρ$_{B}$ commutes with H$_{I}$ the bath state is stationary throughout the dynamics: ρ$_{B}$ ( t ) = ρ$_{B}$ . The state of the sys- tem qubit is obtained by performing a partial trace over the bath Hilbert space\n\nwhere U ( t ) = exp[ − it ( H$_{S}$ + H$_{I}$ + H$_{B}$ )] . The analytical solution of this model was worked out in detail in Ref. [38], and we present a brief summary next.\n\nDephasing channels have the characteristic property of transmitting states of a preferential orthonormal basis without introducing any error [2]. These basis states can be used to en- code classical information, which makes these channels noise- less for the transmission of classical information [28]. Super- positions of the basis states will decohere, however, therefore\n\n## IV. CAPACITIES OF QUANTUM DEPHASING CHANNEL\n\n## A. Classical Capacity" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.98193538149033, + "doc_id": "bfa6cea4c8fe7256b1adf8dcd2d7d4a5ba395e0f848b9bc9a62ce429a4516350", + "edit_distance": 0.6622516556291391, + "f1_score": 0.9777777777777776, + "meteor": 0.602879338988997, + "precision": 0.9877551020408163, + "pred_md": "- [2] A. Galindo and M. A. Martin-Delgado, Rev. Mod. Phys. 74 , 347 (2002).\n- [3] J. R. Petta, A.C. Johnson, C.M. Marcus, M.P. Hanson, A.C. Gossard, Phys. Rev. Lett. 93 , 186802 (2004).\n- [4] D. Loss, D.P. DiVincenzo, Phys. Rev. A 57 , 120 (1998); G. Burkard, D. Loss, D.P. DiVincenzo, Phys. Rev. B 59 , 2070 (1999).\n- [5] W. A. Coish and D. Loss, Phys. Rev. B 72 , 125337 (2005); C. Deng and X. Hu, Phys. Rev. B 73 , 241303(R) (2006); ibid . 74 , 129902 (2006); W. Yao, R.-B. Liu, and L. J. Sham, Phys. Rev. B 74 , 195301 (2006); L. Cywinski, W.M. Witzel, S. DasSarma, Phys. Rev. Lett. 102 , 057601 (2009); ibid . Phys. Rev. B 79 , 245314 (2009).\n- [6] W. A. Coish, and J. Baugh, Phys. Status Solidi B, 246 , 2203 (2009).\n- [7] D. G. Cory et al. , Phys. Rev. Lett. 81 , 2152 (1998); M. A. Nielsen et al. , Nature 396 , 55 (1998).\n- [8] B. E. Kane, Nature 393 , 133 (1998).\n- [9] S. Mackowski, T. Gurung, T. A. Nguyen, H. E. Jackson, L. M. Smith, G. Karczewski, and J. Kossut, Applied Phys. Lett. 84 , 3337 (2004); L. Besombes, Y. Leger, L. Maingault, D. Ferrand, H. Mariette, J. Cibert, Phys. Rev. Lett. 93, 207403 (2004); Phys. Rev. B 71 , 161307(R) (2005); C. Gould et al. , Phys. Rev. Lett. 97 , 017202 (2006); C. Le Gall et al. , Phys. Rev. Lett. 102 , 127402 (2009); Y. Leger, L. Besombes, J. Fernandez-Rossier, L. Maingault, H. Mariette, Phys. Rev. Lett. 97 , 107401 (2006); Y. Leger, L. Besombes, L. Maingault, D. Ferrand, H. Mariette, Phys. Rev. Lett. 95 , 047403 (2005);\n\n5\n\n- M. Goryca et al. Phys. Rev. Lett. 102 , 046408 (2009); Phys. Rev. Lett. 103 , 087401 (2009).\n- [10] J. Fernandez-Rossier and L. Brey, Phys. Rev. Lett. 93 , 117201 (2004); A. O. Govorov, Phys. Rev. B 72, 075359 (2005); F. Qu and P. Hawrylak, Phys. Rev. Lett. 96 , 157201 (2006); R. M. Abolfath, A. Petukhov, I. Zutic, Phys. Rev. Lett. 101 , 207202 (2008); R. M. Abolfath, P. Hawrylak, I. Zutic, Phys. Rev. Lett. 98 , 207203 (2007); New Journal of Physics 9 , 353 (2007); R. M. Abolfath, Phys. Rev. B 80 , 165332 (2009).\n- [11] R. M. Abolfath, Phys. Rev. B 80 , 165332 (2009).\n- [12] Z. Nussinov, M. F. Crommie, and A. V. Balatsky, Phys. Rev. B 68 , 085402 (2003).\n- [13] L. D. Landau, and E. M. Lifshitz, Quantum Mechanics: Non-Relativistic Theory (Pergamon, Oxford, 2003).\n- [14] M.A. Ruderman and C. Kittel, Phys. Rev. 96 , 99 (1954); T. Kasuya, Prog. Theor. Phys. 16 , 45 (1956); K. Yosida, Phys. Rev. 106 , 893 (1957).\n- [15] I. A. Merkulov, Al. L. Efros, M. Rosen, Phys. Rev. B 65 205309 (2002).\n- [16] V. V. Dobrovitski, H. A. De Raedt, Phys. Rev. E 67 , 056702 (2003); W. Zhang at al. , J. Phys. Cond. Matt. 19 , 083202 (2007).\n- [17] A. Melikidze, V. V. Dobrovitski, H. A. De Raedt, M. I. Katsnelson, and B. N. Harmon, Phys. Rev. B 70 , 014435 (2004).\n- [18] Tomasz Dietl, in Handbook on Semiconductors Elsevier, Amsterdam, 1994, Chap. 17.", + "recall": 0.968, + "true_md": "M. Goryca et al. Phys. Rev. Lett. 102 , 046408 (2009); Phys. Rev. Lett. 103 , 087401 (2009).\n\n5\n\n- [10] J. Fernandez-Rossier and L. Brey, Phys. Rev. Lett. 93 , 117201 (2004); A. O. Govorov, Phys. Rev. B 72, 075359 (2005); F. Qu and P. Hawrylak, Phys. Rev. Lett. 96 , 157201 (2006); R. M. Abolfath, A. Petukhov, I. Zutic, Phys. Rev. Lett. 101 , 207202 (2008); R. M. Abolfath, P. Hawrylak, I. Zutic, Phys. Rev. Lett. 98 , 207203 (2007); New Journal of Physics 9 , 353 (2007); R. M. Abolfath, Phys. Rev. B 80 , 165332 (2009).\n\n- [11] R. M. Abolfath, Phys. Rev. B 80 , 165332 (2009).\n\n- [12] Z. Nussinov, M. F. Crommie, and A. V. Balatsky, Phys. Rev. B 68 , 085402 (2003).\n\n- [13] L. D. Landau, and E. M. Lifshitz, Quantum Mechanics: Non-Relativistic Theory (Pergamon, Oxford, 2003).\n\n- [14] M.A. Ruderman and C. Kittel, Phys. Rev. 96 , 99 (1954); T. Kasuya, Prog. Theor. Phys. 16 , 45 (1956); K. Yosida, Phys. Rev. 106 , 893 (1957).\n\n- [15] I. A. Merkulov, Al. L. Efros, M. Rosen, Phys. Rev. B 65 205309 (2002).\n\n- [16] V. V. Dobrovitski, H. A. De Raedt, Phys. Rev. E 67 , 056702 (2003); W. Zhang at al. , J. Phys. Cond. Matt. 19 , 083202 (2007).\n\n- [17] A. Melikidze, V. V. Dobrovitski, H. A. De Raedt, M. I. Katsnelson, and B. N. Harmon, Phys. Rev. B 70 , 014435 (2004).\n\n- [18] Tomasz Dietl, in Handbook on Semiconductors Elsevier, Amsterdam, 1994, Chap. 17.\n\n- [9] S. Mackowski, T. Gurung, T. A. Nguyen, H. E. Jack- son, L. M. Smith, G. Karczewski, and J. Kossut, Ap- plied Phys. Lett. 84 , 3337 (2004); L. Besombes, Y. Leger, L. Maingault, D. Ferrand, H. Mariette, J. Cibert, Phys. Rev. Lett. 93, 207403 (2004); Phys. Rev. B 71 , 161307(R) (2005); C. Gould et al. , Phys. Rev. Lett. 97 , 017202 (2006); C. Le Gall et al. , Phys. Rev. Lett. 102 , 127402 (2009); Y. Leger, L. Besombes, J. Fernandez-Rossier, L. Maingault, H. Mariette, Phys. Rev. Lett. 97 , 107401 (2006); Y. Leger, L. Besombes, L. Maingault, D. Fer- rand, H. Mariette, Phys. Rev. Lett. 95 , 047403 (2005);\n\n- [8] B. E. Kane, Nature 393 , 133 (1998).\n\n- [7] D. G. Cory et al. , Phys. Rev. Lett. 81 , 2152 (1998); M. A. Nielsen et al. , Nature 396 , 55 (1998).\n\n- [6] W. A. Coish, and J. Baugh, Phys. Status Solidi B, 246 , 2203 (2009).\n\n- [5] W. A. Coish and D. Loss, Phys. Rev. B 72 , 125337 (2005); C. Deng and X. Hu, Phys. Rev. B 73 , 241303(R) (2006); ibid . 74 , 129902 (2006); W. Yao, R.-B. Liu, and L. J. Sham, Phys. Rev. B 74 , 195301 (2006); L. Cywin- ski, W.M. Witzel, S. DasSarma, Phys. Rev. Lett. 102 , 057601 (2009); ibid . Phys. Rev. B 79 , 245314 (2009).\n\n- [4] D. Loss, D.P. DiVincenzo, Phys. Rev. A 57 , 120 (1998); G. Burkard, D. Loss, D.P. DiVincenzo, Phys. Rev. B 59 , 2070 (1999).\n\n- [3] J. R. Petta, A.C. Johnson, C.M. Marcus, M.P. Hanson, A.C. Gossard, Phys. Rev. Lett. 93 , 186802 (2004).\n\n- [2] A. Galindo and M. A. Martin-Delgado, Rev. Mod. Phys. 74 , 347 (2002)." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6138432575999777, + "doc_id": "5cda25ba81a9f989f2aedc5113f0efa103dcb3893e7ea5bc031b5cc50894d467", + "edit_distance": 0.699288256227758, + "f1_score": 0.9602272727272727, + "meteor": 0.5490076340186777, + "precision": 0.9712643678160919, + "pred_md": "using the isolation theorem.\n\nRemark: The above corollary validates decoding on isolated subgraphs that are induced by trapping sets and this property is useful for deriving good update rules. Note that the number of iterations required for a subgraph to satisfy the isolation assumption in order to converge becomes an important parameter. Also the notion of critical number can now be extended for multilevel decoders as well.\n\n## IV. 3-BIT DECODERS FOR 3-LEFT-REGULAR LDPC CODES\n\nWe provide two particularly good 3-bit decoders: a 7-level LT decoder, and a 5-level NLT decoder for 3-left-regular LDPC codes. These were derived by considering a systemtatic hierarchy of trapping sets called trapping set ontology [12], and using the approach described in the previous section. Some important criteria to be considered in the derivation of the rules are increase in critical number and convergence in fewer iterations. Due to space constraints, we do not give details of deriving good rules in this paper but we shall demonstrate how multilevel decoders can correct certain error patterns uncorrectable by even floating-point algorithms.\n\nThe function Φ v can be uniquely defined by setting constraints on the magnitudes and thresholds. We shall use this approach to define the decoders.\n\nFor the 7-level LT decoder, the constraints that uniquely define the decoder are L 1 < C < 2 L 1 , L 2 = 2 L 1 + C , L 3 = 2 L 2 + C , and T 1 = L 1 , T 2 = L 2 , T 3 = L 3 .\n\nFor the 5-level NLT decoder, the constraints that specify the decoder are C = L 1 , L 2 = 3 L 1 , T 1 = L 1 , T 2 = L 2 , and the channel weight function used to compute ω c is given by\n\n\n\n\n\nAs an example, we now illustrate how a 3-error pattern on a n = 786 , R = 0 75 . quasicyclic code [17] that was uncorrectable by min-sum decoder, is correctable by the 7level LT decoder.\n\nExample 2: Let H be the subgraph induced by the (9,5) trapping set which contains a (6,2) and has three degree-one checks as shown in Fig. 2. Consider the 3-error pattern shown in the figure where · denotes an initially wrong variable node.\n\nFig. 2. Subgraph induced by (9,5) trapping set that contains a (6,2)\n\nFig. 2. Subgraph induced by (9,5) trapping set that contains a (6,2)\n\nUnder the isolation assumption, let us analyze the decoding of 7-level LT decoder on the subgraph with the help of the isolation theorem. Let m k ( v , i :) denote all outgoing messages of node v i in the first half of k th iteration and let m k (: , v i )\n\ndenote all incoming messages to node v i from checks in the second half of k th iteration. We will show only messages passed by certain crucial nodes in each iteration. Assume that all messages are initially zero.\n\nIn first half of iteration 1, all outgoing messages are ± L 1 , i,e, m v , 1 ( i :) = ( -L , 1 -L , 1 -L 1 ) for i ∈ { 1 2 3 , , } and m v , 1 ( i :) = ( L , L , L 1 1 1 ) for i / ∈ { 1 2 3 , , } . In the second half, check nodes send their messages by the isolation assumption. Then m 1 (: , v i ) = ( -L , 1 -L , 1 -L 1 ) for i ∈ { 4 5 , } .\n\nIn the first half of iteration 2, because Φ ( v L , L , 1 1 -C) = 0 , and Φ ( v -L , 1 -L , 1 C) = 0 , this update rule helps prevent nodes v 4 and v 5 from sending wrong messages. Then m v , 2 ( i : ) = 0 for i ∈ { 1 to 5 } . Check nodes send their messages in the second half and m 2 (: , v i ) = (0 , 0 , L 1 ) for i ∈ { 1 2 , } .\n\nFinally in the first half of iteration 3, nodes v 1 and v 2 are the only nodes that can send wrong messages. But because Φ (0 v , L 1 , -C) = 0 , the nodes send zero instead, and the decoder converges at the end of iteration 3.\n\nRemark: From the above example, we see that certain outputs of Φ v were crucial for preventing propagation of wrong messages and convergence within 3 iterations. Whereas the min-sum decoder requires 4 iterations under the isolation assumption to converge on the same 3-error pattern. Now if subgraph H contained in G satisfies the isolation assumption for only 3 iterations, then min-sum is not guaranteed to correct three errors. For the quasicyclic code, this particular 3-error pattern on such a subgraph fails to be corrected by min-sum but is corrected by 7-level LT decoder. In fact, 7-level LT decoder corrects all 3-error patterns on the code.\n\nAlthough we considered error patterns that failed to decode by the min-sum in example 2, the same analysis can be carried out on error patterns that failed to decode by BP as well. The rules can be derived to correct such patterns in a similar fashion by ensuring convergence in fewest number of iterations under the isolation assumption. For example, the 7-level LT decoder did not fail for any 4-error patterns on the same quasicyclic code whereas the BP and min-sum decoders failed in the region of simulation in Fig. 4.\n\n## V. NUMERICAL RESULTS\n\nSimulations for frame error rate (FER) were carried out on three different codes: 1) n = 155 , R = 0 4 . , Tanner code, 2) n = 768 , R = 0 75 . , Quasicyclic code with d min = 12 , and 3) a n = 4085 , R = 0 82 . , MacKay code. The codes were chosen to cover a broad spectrum of LDPC codes in order to validate our approach. The Tanner code is well-understood and has been analyzed for many different decoders. The high-rate quasicyclic code was chosen since the error floor problem is much more challenging for high-rate codes. A MacKay code was chosen as an example of a high-rate random code. Fig. 3, Fig. 4, and Fig. 5 show the simulation results. The maximum number of iterations used was 100 for all decoders. Structures of these three codes can be found in [17].\n\nFor all three codes, the 3-bit decoders significantly outperform BP in the error floor region. Notice the difference in slopes in the FER curves. For the Tanner code, the 5-NLT", + "recall": 0.949438202247191, + "true_md": "denote all incoming messages to node v$_{i}$ from checks in the second half of k th iteration. We will show only messages passed by certain crucial nodes in each iteration. Assume that all messages are initially zero.\n\nRemark: The above corollary validates decoding on isolated subgraphs that are induced by trapping sets and this property is useful for deriving good update rules. Note that the number of iterations required for a subgraph to satisfy the isolation assumption in order to converge becomes an important param- eter. Also the notion of critical number can now be extended for multilevel decoders as well.\n\nWe provide two particularly good 3-bit decoders: a 7-level LT decoder, and a 5-level NLT decoder for 3-left-regular LDPC codes. These were derived by considering a systemtatic hierarchy of trapping sets called trapping set ontology [12], and using the approach described in the previous section. Some important criteria to be considered in the derivation of the rules are increase in critical number and convergence in fewer iterations. Due to space constraints, we do not give details of deriving good rules in this paper but we shall demonstrate how multilevel decoders can correct certain error patterns uncorrectable by even floating-point algorithms.\n\nIn first half of iteration 1, all outgoing messages are ± L$_{1}$ , i,e, m$_{1}$ ( v$_{i}$, :) = ( − L$_{1}$, − L$_{1}$, − L$_{1}$ ) for i ∈ { 1 , 2 , 3 } and m$_{1}$ ( v$_{i}$, :) = ( L$_{1}$, L$_{1}$, L$_{1}$ ) for i / ∈ { 1 , 2 , 3 } . In the second half, check nodes send their messages by the isolation assumption. Then m$_{1}$ (: , v$_{i}$ ) = ( − L$_{1}$, − L$_{1}$, − L$_{1}$ ) for i ∈ { 4 , 5 } .\n\nIn the first half of iteration 2, because Φ$_{v}$( L$_{1}$, L$_{1}$, − C) = 0 , and Φ$_{v}$( − L$_{1}$, − L$_{1}$, C) = 0 , this update rule helps prevent nodes v$_{4}$ and v$_{5}$ from sending wrong messages. Then m$_{2}$ ( v$_{i}$, : ) = 0 for i ∈ { 1 to 5 } . Check nodes send their messages in the second half and m$_{2}$ (: , v$_{i}$ ) = (0 , 0 , L$_{1}$ ) for i ∈ { 1 , 2 } .\n\nFinally in the first half of iteration 3, nodes v$_{1}$ and v$_{2}$ are the only nodes that can send wrong messages. But because Φ$_{v}$(0 , L$_{1}$, − C) = 0 , the nodes send zero instead, and the decoder converges at the end of iteration 3.\n\nRemark: From the above example, we see that certain outputs of Φ$_{v}$ were crucial for preventing propagation of wrong messages and convergence within 3 iterations. Whereas the min-sum decoder requires 4 iterations under the isolation assumption to converge on the same 3-error pattern. Now if subgraph H contained in G satisfies the isolation assumption for only 3 iterations, then min-sum is not guaranteed to correct three errors. For the quasicyclic code, this particular 3-error pattern on such a subgraph fails to be corrected by min-sum but is corrected by 7-level LT decoder. In fact, 7-level LT decoder corrects all 3-error patterns on the code.\n\nAlthough we considered error patterns that failed to decode by the min-sum in example 2, the same analysis can be carried out on error patterns that failed to decode by BP as well. The rules can be derived to correct such patterns in a similar fashion by ensuring convergence in fewest number of iterations under the isolation assumption. For example, the 7-level LT decoder did not fail for any 4-error patterns on the same quasicyclic code whereas the BP and min-sum decoders failed in the region of simulation in Fig. 4.\n\nThe function Φ$_{v}$ can be uniquely defined by setting con- straints on the magnitudes and thresholds. We shall use this approach to define the decoders.\n\nFor the 7-level LT decoder, the constraints that uniquely define the decoder are L$_{1}$ < C < 2 L$_{1}$ , L$_{2}$ = 2 L$_{1}$ + C , L$_{3}$ = 2 L$_{2}$ + C , and T$_{1}$ = L$_{1}$ , T$_{2}$ = L$_{2}$ , T$_{3}$ = L$_{3}$ .\n\nFor the 5-level NLT decoder, the constraints that specify the decoder are C = L$_{1}$ , L$_{2}$ = 3 L$_{1}$ , T$_{1}$ = L$_{1}$ , T$_{2}$ = L$_{2}$ , and the channel weight function used to compute ω$_{c}$ is given by\n\nAs an example, we now illustrate how a 3-error pattern on a n = 786 , R = 0 . 75 quasicyclic code [17] that was uncorrectable by min-sum decoder, is correctable by the 7- level LT decoder.\n\nExample 2: Let H be the subgraph induced by the (9,5) trapping set which contains a (6,2) and has three degree-one checks as shown in Fig. 2. Consider the 3-error pattern shown in the figure where • denotes an initially wrong variable node.\n\nSimulations for frame error rate (FER) were carried out on three different codes: 1) n = 155 , R = 0 . 4 , Tanner code, 2) n = 768 , R = 0 . 75 , Quasicyclic code with d$_{min}$ = 12 , and 3) a n = 4085 , R = 0 . 82 , MacKay code. The codes were chosen to cover a broad spectrum of LDPC codes in order to validate our approach. The Tanner code is well-understood and has been analyzed for many different decoders. The high-rate quasicyclic code was chosen since the error floor problem is much more challenging for high-rate codes. A MacKay code was chosen as an example of a high-rate random code. Fig. 3, Fig. 4, and Fig. 5 show the simulation results. The maximum number of iterations used was 100 for all decoders. Structures of these three codes can be found in [17].\n\nFor all three codes, the 3-bit decoders significantly outper- form BP in the error floor region. Notice the difference in slopes in the FER curves. For the Tanner code, the 5-NLT\n\nUnder the isolation assumption, let us analyze the decoding of 7-level LT decoder on the subgraph with the help of the isolation theorem. Let m$_{k}$ ( v$_{i}$, :) denote all outgoing messages of node v$_{i}$ in the first half of k th iteration and let m$_{k}$ (: , v$_{i}$ )\n\nFig. 2. Subgraph induced by (9,5) trapping set that contains a (6,2)\n\n## V. NUMERICAL RESULTS\n\n## IV. 3-BIT DECODERS FOR 3-LEFT-REGULAR LDPC CODES\n\nusing the isolation theorem.\n\n$$ω$_{c}$ = Ω( m$_{1}$, m$_{2}$ ) = 1 − $^{(}$sign( m$_{1}$ ) ⊕ sign( m$_{2}$ ) $^{)}$· δ ( | m$_{1}$ | + | m$_{2}$ | − 2 L$_{2}$ ) .$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7808266076520657, + "doc_id": "666bad313c965cc77ecd60f4cb694172ff91b0da2794def6859401f742cb8ba6", + "edit_distance": 0.5876651982378854, + "f1_score": 0.926892950391645, + "meteor": 0.7851300096455874, + "precision": 0.9673024523160763, + "pred_md": "arXiv:1001.2313v2 [cond-mat.mes-hall] 28 Jul 2010\n\n## Performance engineering of semiconductor spin qubit systems\n\nRamin M. Abolfath 1 2 , , Thomas Brabec 1\n\n1 University of Ottawa, Physics Department 150 Louis Pasteur, Ottawa, ON, K1N 6N5, Canada 2 School of Natural Sciences and Mathematics, University of Texas at Dallas, Richardson, TX 75080 (Dated: November 23, 2018)\n\nThe performance of a quantum computation system is investigated, with qubits represented by magnetic impurities in coupled quantum dots filled with two electrons. Magnetic impurities are electrically manipulated by electrons. The dominant noise source is the electron mediated indirect coupling between magnetic impurities and host spin bath. As a result of the electron mediated coupling, both noise properties and the time needed for elementary gate operations, depend on controllable system parameters, such as size and geometry of the quantum dot, and external electric and magnetic fields. We find that the maximum number of quantum operations per coherence time for magnetic impurities increases as electron spin singlet triplet energy gap decreases. The advantage of magnetic impurities over electrons for weak coupling and large magnetic fields will be illustrated.\n\nPACS numbers: 75.50.-y,75.50.Pp,85.75.-d\n\nSemiconductor nanostructures [1] are a promising host material for the realization of quantum computers [2] because of the well developed production technologies and because of the potential for scaling to multi qubit systems. The greatest bottleneck for realizing semiconductor quantum devices is the high degree of noise present in the host material.\n\nRecently substantial progress has been made in the experimental demonstration of electron spin coded qubits in lateral double QDs [3], first theoretically proposed by Loss and DiVincenzo [4]. This system exhibits promising properties for quantum information processing, as it can be controlled electrically like charge qubits, however offers the longer decoherence times of spin qubits. Nevertheless, dephasing in spin coded qubits due to nuclear hyperfine interaction still presents the major hurdle for realizing a scalable quantum computer [5, 6].\n\nAnother seminal idea of realizing quantum computation in semiconductors is by the use of a hybrid qubit, first proposed by Kane in a 31 P doped silicon host [2, 7, 8]. In silicon, 31 P is a positive dopant that is transformed into a positively charged nucleus and a loosely bound valence electron. Whereas, the qubit is represented by the nuclear spin of 31 P, electric gate operations on the electron are used for manipulation and diagnostics of the qubit. The technological implementation of this system is more challenging, mostly as a result of the significantly smaller dimensions of the qubits.\n\nWe suggest and analyze here a qubit that is a mixture of the spin coded [4] and of the hybrid qubits [7, 8] discussed above. The proposed device consists of a QD containing electrons and a neutral dopant acting as a magnetic impurity (MI). Similar to the original hybrid qubit, the MI represents the qubit, and the electrons are used for manipulating the qubit. The use of MIs alone for spin-based quantum devices and its noise spectroscopy has been investigated recently [9, 10, 12]. Here, we confine our analysis to MIs with zero nuclear spin,\n\n[e.g., 56 Fe/ 160 Gd doped in II-VI/IV-VI materials], to exclude coupling between spins of the electron and nucleus of the MI. As shown in Fig.1, the MI is localized in space and its direct interaction with the host spin bath is negligible. Therefore, the decoherence of the qubit is determined by the electron mediated coupling of the MI to the spin bath.\n\nOur configuration has two advantages over the original qubit systems. First, it allows greater design flexibility, in particular with regard to the size of the confining potential. This will facilitate the actual technological realization of a hybrid qubit. Second, MI-electron coupling and electron mediated MI-spin bath coupling show particular dependence on the electron spin singlet triplet energy gap ∆ , that allows forming stable qubit over a range of QD e confining potentials, and the external electric and magnetic fields. This system corresponds to the electron spin coded qubit system investigated in Ref. [4] and makes a comparison possible. The performance of our quantum computing setup is measured by the maximum number of operations N i = τ /T i i with i = e, m for electrons and MI qubits, respectively. Here, τ is the coherence time and T is the time required for an elementary gate operation. In this work we illustrate that the quantum performance of the spin coded qubit based on MIs increases by the external electric and magnetic fields. This is in contrast to the electron spin coded qubit that its performance is suppressed rapidly by the inter-dot coupling.\n\nWe represent the QD system by the Hamiltonian H = H e + H m + H n + H in , which contains electrons ( H e ), MIs ( H m ), host semiconductor nuclei ( H n ), and their interactions ( H in ). In our model we consider e-MI and e-n interaction, i.e. H in = H em + H en . The direct interaction between MI electrons and semiconductor host nuclei are neglected, as d- and f-electrons are highly localized in space. Further, our analysis is confined to MIs with zero nuclear magnetic moment, which do not interact with the MI electrons. As a result, dipole-dipole interaction", + "recall": 0.8897243107769424, + "true_md": "# Performance engineering of semiconductor spin qubit systems\n\nRamin M. Abolfath 1 , $^{2}$, Thomas Brabec1\n\n$^{1}$University of Ottawa, Physics Department 150 Louis Pasteur, Ottawa, ON, K1N 6N5, Canada\n\n$^{2}$School of Natural Sciences and Mathematics, University of Texas at Dallas, Richardson, TX 75080\n\n(Dated: November 23, 2018)\n\nThe performance of a quantum computation system is investigated, with qubits represented by magnetic impurities in coupled quantum dots filled with two electrons. Magnetic impurities are electrically manipulated by electrons. The dominant noise source is the electron mediated indirect coupling between magnetic impurities and host spin bath. As a result of the electron mediated coupling, both noise properties and the time needed for elementary gate operations, depend on controllable system parameters, such as size and geometry of the quantum dot, and external electric and magnetic fields. We find that the maximum number of quantum operations per coherence time for magnetic impurities increases as electron spin singlet triplet energy gap decreases. The advantage of magnetic impurities over electrons for weak coupling and large magnetic fields will be illustrated.\n\nPACS numbers: 75.50.-y,75.50.Pp,85.75.-d\n\nSemiconductor nanostructures [1] are a promising host material for the realization of quantum computers [2] be- cause of the well developed production technologies and because of the potential for scaling to multi qubit sys- tems. The greatest bottleneck for realizing semiconduc- tor quantum devices is the high degree of noise present in the host material.\n\n[e.g., $^{56}$Fe/$^{160}$Gd doped in II-VI/IV-VI materials], to ex- clude coupling between spins of the electron and nucleus of the MI. As shown in Fig.1, the MI is localized in space and its direct interaction with the host spin bath is neg- ligible. Therefore, the decoherence of the qubit is deter- mined by the electron mediated coupling of the MI to the spin bath.\n\nRecently substantial progress has been made in the ex- perimental demonstration of electron spin coded qubits in lateral double QDs [3], first theoretically proposed by Loss and DiVincenzo [4]. This system exhibits promis- ing properties for quantum information processing, as it can be controlled electrically like charge qubits, however offers the longer decoherence times of spin qubits. Nev- ertheless, dephasing in spin coded qubits due to nuclear hyperfine interaction still presents the major hurdle for realizing a scalable quantum computer [5, 6].\n\nOur configuration has two advantages over the original qubit systems. First, it allows greater design flexibility, in particular with regard to the size of the confining poten- tial. This will facilitate the actual technological realiza- tion of a hybrid qubit. Second, MI-electron coupling and electron mediated MI-spin bath coupling show particular dependence on the electron spin singlet triplet energy gap Δ$_{e}$, that allows forming stable qubit over a range of QD confining potentials, and the external electric and mag- netic fields. This system corresponds to the electron spin coded qubit system investigated in Ref. [4] and makes a comparison possible. The performance of our quantum computing setup is measured by the maximum number of operations N$_{i}$ = τ$_{i}$/T$_{i}$ with i = e,m for electrons and MI qubits, respectively. Here, τ is the coherence time and T is the time required for an elementary gate operation.\n\nIn this work we illustrate that the quantum performance of the spin coded qubit based on MIs increases by the external electric and magnetic fields. This is in contrast to the electron spin coded qubit that its performance is suppressed rapidly by the inter-dot coupling.\n\nAnother seminal idea of realizing quantum computa- tion in semiconductors is by the use of a hybrid qubit, first proposed by Kane in a $^{31}$P doped silicon host [2, 7, 8]. In silicon, $^{31}$P is a positive dopant that is trans- formed into a positively charged nucleus and a loosely bound valence electron. Whereas, the qubit is repre- sented by the nuclear spin of $^{31}$P, electric gate operations on the electron are used for manipulation and diagnos- tics of the qubit. The technological implementation of this system is more challenging, mostly as a result of the significantly smaller dimensions of the qubits.\n\nWe suggest and analyze here a qubit that is a mix- ture of the spin coded [4] and of the hybrid qubits [7, 8] discussed above. The proposed device consists of a QD containing electrons and a neutral dopant acting as a magnetic impurity (MI). Similar to the original hybrid qubit, the MI represents the qubit, and the electrons are used for manipulating the qubit. The use of MIs alone for spin-based quantum devices and its noise spec- troscopy has been investigated recently [9, 10, 12]. Here, we confine our analysis to MIs with zero nuclear spin,\n\nWe represent the QD system by the Hamiltonian H = H$_{e}$ + H$_{m}$ + H$_{n}$ + H$_{in}$ , which contains electrons ( H$_{e}$ ), MIs ( H$_{m}$ ), host semiconductor nuclei ( H$_{n}$ ), and their inter- actions ( H$_{in}$ ). In our model we consider e-MI and e-n interaction, i.e. H$_{in}$ = H$_{em}$ + H$_{en}$ . The direct interac- tion between MI electrons and semiconductor host nuclei are neglected, as d- and f-electrons are highly localized in space. Further, our analysis is confined to MIs with zero nuclear magnetic moment, which do not interact with the MI electrons. As a result, dipole-dipole interaction\n\narXiv:1001.2313v2 [cond-mat.mes-hall] 28 Jul 2010" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6843397307736231, + "doc_id": "e1d133a6cf63cbf824cf25059e4c9434b8d521358fab7b0792a7ba85245fab5a", + "edit_distance": 0.8353941267387944, + "f1_score": 0.9110840438489646, + "meteor": 0.5413621370897153, + "precision": 0.9540816326530612, + "pred_md": "## APPENDIX\n\nMaryLie/IMPACT is a hybrid code that utilizes Lie-algebraic methods for computing and manipulating charged-particle transfer maps through 5 th order, while space-charge effects are treated using Particle-in-Cell methods [11]. We made use of its Lie algebraic capabilities. In the Lie algebraic approach, maps are computed and manipulated in Lie algebraic form. Each map describes the transformation of the full six-dimensional phase-space coordinates of a particle as it passes through a given beam-line element. Because of the symplectic nature of Hamiltonian motion, through aberrations of order ( n -1) such a map has the Lie representation\n\n\n\nwhere R 2 describes the linear part of the map, and each f j is a homogeneous polynomial of degree j describing the nonlinear part of the map [4, 12].\n\nThe linear map R 2 and the Lie generators f j are determined by solving the equation of motion\n\n\n\nwhere\n\n\n\nis the charged-particle Hamiltonian expressed in terms of deviation variables about the design orbit and expanded in a homogeneous polynomial series. The deviation variable Hamiltonian H is determined in turn by the Hamiltonian K for which path length is the independent variable. In Cartesian coordinates and with z taken as the independent variable, K is given by the relation\n\n\n\nHere Φ and A are the electric scalar and magnetic vector potentials, respectively.\n\nWe conclude that (in the case of no electric fields, Φ = 0) what is needed are Taylor expansions for the\n\n[1] F. B. Hildebrand, Introduction to Numerical Analysis (Dover Books, 1987), 2nd ed., section 3.3, p. 85. He writes 'In particular, numerical differentiation should be avoided wherever possible · · · '.\n\n[2] D. Abell, Phys. Rev. ST Accel. Beams 9 , 052001 (2006).\n\n[3] C. E. Mitchell, Ph.D. thesis, University of Maryland, College Park (2007), http://www.physics.umd.edu/dsat .\n\n[4] A. J. Dragt, Lie Methods for Nonlinear Dynamics with Applications to Accelerator Physics (University of Maryland, 2009), http://www.physics.umd.edu/dsat .\n\n[5] M. Venturini and A. Dragt, Nucl. Inst. and Meth. A 427 , 387 (1999).\n\n18\n\ncomponents of A in the deviation variables x and y . In the straight-element case these Taylor expansions can be found using the circular cylinder harmonic based expansion (12). Suppose, for example, we wish to retain in the expansion of the Hamiltonian H appearing in (64) homogeneous polynomials through degree 8. That is what is required to compute transfer maps through 7 th order. If the design orbit lies on the z axis, as will be the case for any straight multipole such as a solenoid, quadrupole, sextupole, octupole, etc., this expansion is straightforward because in this case the Cartesian coordinates x, y are already deviation variables. We see from (65) that we must retain homogeneous polynomials in the variables x, y through degree 7 in the expansions of A x and A y , and homogeneous polynomials in the variables x, y through degree 8 in the expansion of A z . Inspection of (12) shows that for the cases m = 0 or m odd we then need the C [ n ] m,α ( z ) with ( m + ) n ≤ 7. For the cases of even m we need the C [ n ] m,α ( z ) with ( m + n ) ≤ 8.\n\nIn the case of a wiggler, the design orbit oscillates around the z axis. See Fig. 25. Now the requirement that the Hamiltonian H appearing in (64) be an expansion in deviation variables about the design orbit is more involved: The components of A must be expanded about the design orbit. As they stand in (12), they are expanded about the z axis. If we are to retain terms in H through degree 8 when a re-expansion is made about the design orbit, then coefficients C [ n ] m,α beyond those listed in the previous paragraph must in principle be included in the calculation. We say that higher-degree terms produce lower-degree terms due to feed down . However, the effect of feed down is small if the oscillations are of small amplitude, as they are for the proposed ILC wiggler. In this example we have found that the approximation of retaining only the terms in A x , A y , and A z through degree 8 produces changes in the design orbit and the transfer map about the design orbit that are comparable to or smaller than the errors found in the benchmark studies of Section IV. We also remark that this feed-down problem does not arise when the general geometry methods to be described in Part II are employed.\n\n[6] P. Morse and H. Feshbach, Methods of Theoretical Physics , vol. 1 & 2 (McGraw-Hill Book Company, Inc., 1953).\n\n[7] E. Weisstein, Mathworld -a Wolfram web resource , http://mathworld.wolfram.com/ EllipticCylindricalCoordinates.html .\n\n- [8] N. W. McLachlan, Theory and Application of Mathieu Functions (Dover Publications, Inc., 1964).\n- [9] N. Phinney, N. Toge, and N. Walker, eds., International Linear Collider Reference Design Report, Volume 3: Accelerator (International Committe for Future Accelerators, 2007), http://www.linearcollider.org/ .", + "recall": 0.8717948717948718, + "true_md": "## APPENDIX\n\ncomponents of A in the deviation variables x and y . In the straight-element case these Taylor expansions can be found using the circular cylinder harmonic based expan- sion (12). Suppose, for example, we wish to retain in the expansion of the Hamiltonian H appearing in (64) homo- geneous polynomials through degree 8. That is what is required to compute transfer maps through 7 th order. If the design orbit lies on the z axis, as will be the case for any straight multipole such as a solenoid, quadrupole, sextupole, octupole, etc., this expansion is straightfor- ward because in this case the Cartesian coordinates x,y are already deviation variables. We see from (65) that we must retain homogeneous polynomials in the vari- ables x,y through degree 7 in the expansions of A$_{x}$ and A$_{y}$ , and homogeneous polynomials in the variables x,y through degree 8 in the expansion of A$_{z}$ . Inspection of (12) shows that for the cases m = 0 or m odd we then need the C [ n ] $_{m,α}$( z ) with ( m + n ) ≤ 7. For the cases of even m we need the C [ n ] $_{m,α}$( z ) with ( m + n ) ≤ 8.\n\nMaryLie/IMPACT is a hybrid code that utilizes Lie-algebraic methods for computing and manipulating charged-particle transfer maps through 5 th order, while space-charge effects are treated using Particle-in-Cell methods [11]. We made use of its Lie algebraic capa- bilities. In the Lie algebraic approach, maps are com- puted and manipulated in Lie algebraic form. Each map describes the transformation of the full six-dimensional phase-space coordinates of a particle as it passes through a given beam-line element. Because of the symplectic na- ture of Hamiltonian motion, through aberrations of order ( n − 1) such a map has the Lie representation\n\nwhere R$_{2}$ describes the linear part of the map, and each f$_{j}$ is a homogeneous polynomial of degree j describing the nonlinear part of the map [4, 12].\n\nThe linear map R$_{2}$ and the Lie generators f$_{j}$ are de- termined by solving the equation of motion\n\nwhere\n\nis the charged-particle Hamiltonian expressed in terms of deviation variables about the design orbit and expanded in a homogeneous polynomial series. The deviation vari- able Hamiltonian H is determined in turn by the Hamil- tonian K for which path length is the independent vari- able. In Cartesian coordinates and with z taken as the independent variable, K is given by the relation\n\nIn the case of a wiggler, the design orbit oscillates around the z axis. See Fig. 25. Now the requirement that the Hamiltonian H appearing in (64) be an expan- sion in deviation variables about the design orbit is more involved: The components of A must be expanded about the design orbit. As they stand in (12), they are ex- panded about the z axis. If we are to retain terms in H through degree 8 when a re-expansion is made about the design orbit, then coefficients C [ n ] m,α beyond those listed in the previous paragraph must in principle be included in the calculation. We say that higher-degree terms pro- duce lower-degree terms due to feed down . However, the effect of feed down is small if the oscillations are of small amplitude, as they are for the proposed ILC wiggler. In this example we have found that the approximation of re- taining only the terms in A$_{x}$ , A$_{y}$ , and A$_{z}$ through degree 8 produces changes in the design orbit and the transfer map about the design orbit that are comparable to or smaller than the errors found in the benchmark studies of Section IV. We also remark that this feed-down prob- lem does not arise when the general geometry methods to be described in Part II are employed.\n\nHere Φ and A are the electric scalar and magnetic vector potentials, respectively.\n\nWe conclude that (in the case of no electric fields, Φ = 0) what is needed are Taylor expansions for the\n\n$$M = R$_{2}$ exp(: f$_{3}$ :) exp(: f$_{4}$ :) · · · exp(: f$_{n}$ :) (62)$$\n\n$$˙ M = M : − H : (63)$$\n\n$$H = H$_{2}$ + H$_{3}$ + H$_{4}$ + · · · (64)$$\n\n18\n\n- [9] N. Phinney, N. Toge, and N. Walker, eds., International Linear Collider Reference Design Report, Volume 3: Ac- celerator (International Committe for Future Accelera- tors, 2007), http://www.linearcollider.org/ .\n\n- [8] N. W. McLachlan, Theory and Application of Mathieu Functions (Dover Publications, Inc., 1964).\n\n- [7] E. Weisstein, Mathworld - a Wolfram web resource , http://mathworld.wolfram.com/ EllipticCylindricalCoordinates.html .\n\n- [6] P. Morse and H. Feshbach, Methods of Theoretical Physics , vol. 1 & 2 (McGraw-Hill Book Company, Inc., 1953).\n\n- [5] M. Venturini and A. Dragt, Nucl. Inst. and Meth. A 427 , 387 (1999).\n\n- [4] A. J. Dragt, Lie Methods for Nonlinear Dynamics with Applications to Accelerator Physics (University of Mary- land, 2009), http://www.physics.umd.edu/dsat .\n\n- [3] C. E. Mitchell, Ph.D. thesis, University of Maryland, Col- lege Park (2007), http://www.physics.umd.edu/dsat .\n\n- [2] D. Abell, Phys. Rev. ST Accel. Beams 9 , 052001 (2006).\n\n- [1] F. B. Hildebrand, Introduction to Numerical Analysis (Dover Books, 1987), 2nd ed., section 3.3, p. 85. He writes “In particular, numerical differentiation should be avoided wherever possible · · · ”.\n\n$$K = − [( p$_{t}$ + q Φ) $^{2}$/c2 − m $^{2}$c2 − ( p$_{x}$ − qA$_{x}$ ) 2 − ( p$_{y}$ − qA$_{y}$ ) $^{2}$]1 / 2 − qA$_{z}$. (65)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.00982507497174517, + "doc_id": "67204ef85dd2c9203d28632b519144521087f8bb5922dc1cc809debc8b7eb270", + "edit_distance": 0.9021065675340768, + "f1_score": 0.7392739273927393, + "meteor": 0.144264653567812, + "precision": 0.9333333333333333, + "pred_md": "14\n\n- 6. The exact R ij symmetry can be adapted to\n\n\n\nwith\n\n\n\n- 7. The integrated Ward identity is now linearly broken as follows\n\n\n\n## 3. The counterterm\n\nWe again translate all the identities into identities for the counterterm Σ (2) c GZ\n\n## 1. The linearized Slavnov-Taylor identity:\n\n\n\nwith B (2) the nilpotent linearized Slavnov-Taylor operator,\n\n\n\n2. The U f ( ) invariance\n\n\n\n3. The Landau gauge condition\n\n\n\n- 4. The antighost equation\n\n\n\n5. The linearly broken local constraints\n\n\n\nand\n\n\n\n6. The exact R ij symmetry\n\n\n\n7. Finally, the integrated Ward identity becomes\n\n\n\nNow we can write down the most general counterterm Σ (2) c GZ of d = 4, which obeys the linearized Slavnov-Taylor identity, has ghost number zero, and vanishing Q f number,\n\n\n\nNotice that the part in a and b parameters is exactly the same as in the previous Appendix A, see equation (A35). We shall now impose all the constraints induced by the Ward identities. We keep in mind that the argument concerning the broken ghost Ward identity still holds. Also, the 4 constraints (B19) invoke the counterterm to be independent of the sources U ' , V ' , M ' and N ' . Ultimately,", + "recall": 0.6120218579234973, + "true_md": "14\n\n- 5. The linearly broken local constraints\n\n- 6. The exact R$_{ij}$ symmetry can be adapted to\n\n- 7. The integrated Ward identity is now linearly broken as follows\n\n- 6. The exact R$_{ij}$ symmetry\n\n- 7. Finally, the integrated Ward identity becomes\n\n- 2. The U ( f ) invariance\n\n- 3. The Landau gauge condition\n\n- 4. The antighost equation\n\n$$∫ d $^{4}$x ( c $_{a}$δ Σ (2) c GZ δω a i + ω a i δ Σ (2) c GZ δc a + U ′ ai µ δ Σ (2) c GZ δK a µ ) = 0 . (B21)$$\n\n$$R$_{ij}$ Σ (2) c GZ = 0 . (B20)$$\n\n$$∫ d $^{4}$x ( c $_{a}$δ Σ (2) GZ δω a i + ω a i δ Σ (2) GZ δc a + U ′ ai µ δ Σ (2) GZ δK a µ ) = U ai µ ∂$_{µ}$c a − U ′ ai µ ∂$_{µ}$c a . (B13)$$\n\n$$δ Σ (2) c GZ δM ai µ = 0 , δ Σ (2) c GZ δN ai µ = 0 , δ Σ (2) c GZ δU ai µ = 0 , δ Σ (2) c GZ δV ai µ = 0 . (B19)$$\n\n$$( δ δϕ a i + ∂$_{µ}$ δ δM ai µ + ∂$_{µ}$ δ δM ′ ai µ + gf$_{abc}$T bi µ δ δK ci µ ) × Σ (2) c GZ = 0 , ( δ δω a i + ∂$_{µ}$ δ δN ai µ + + ∂$_{µ}$ δ δN ′ ai µ − gf $^{abc}$ωb i δ δb c ) × Σ (2) c GZ = 0 , (B18)$$\n\n$$R$_{ij}$ Σ (2) GZ = 0 , (B11)$$\n\n$$R$_{ij}$ = ∫ d $^{4}$x ( ϕ a i δ δω a j − ω a j δ δϕ a i + V ai µ δ δN ai µ + V ′ ai µ δ δN ′ aj µ − U aj µ δ δM ai µ − U ′ ai µ δ δM ′ ai µ + T ai µ δ δR aj µ ) . (B12)$$\n\nand\n\nwith\n\nWe again translate all the identities into identities for the counterterm Σ (2) c GZ\n\nNow we can write down the most general counterterm Σ (2) c GZ of d = 4, which obeys the linearized Slavnov-Taylor identity, has ghost number zero, and vanishing Q$_{f}$ num- ber,\n\nwith B (2) the nilpotent linearized Slavnov-Taylor operator,\n\n- 1. The linearized Slavnov-Taylor identity:\n\n## 3. The counterterm\n\n$$B $^{(2)}$Σ (2) c GZ = 0 , (B14)$$\n\n$$Σ (2) c GZ = a$_{0}$S$_{YM}$ + B (2) ∫ d $^{d}$x {[ a$_{1}$K a $_{µ}$A a $_{µ}$+ a$_{2}$∂$_{µ}$c $^{a}$Aa $_{µ}$+ a$_{3}$L $^{a}$ca + a$_{4}$U ai µ ∂$_{µ}$ϕ a i + a$_{5}$V ai µ ∂$_{µ}$ω a i + a$_{6}$ ω a i ∂ $^{2}$ϕ a i + a$_{7}$U ai µ V ai µ + a$_{8}$gf $^{abc}$U ai µ ϕ b $_{i}$A c µ + a$_{9}$gf $^{abc}$V ai µ ω b $_{i}$A c µ + a$_{10}$gf $^{abc}$ωa i A c µ ∂$_{µ}$ϕ b i + a$_{11}$ gf $^{abc}$ωa $_{i}$( ∂$_{µ}$A c $_{µ}$) ϕ b i + b$_{1}$R ai µ U ai µ + b$_{2}$T ai µ M ai µ + b$_{3}$gf$_{abc}$R ai µ ω b $_{i}$A c µ + b$_{4}$gf$_{abc}$T ai µ ϕ b $_{i}$A c $_{µ}$+ b$_{5}$R ai µ ∂ω a i + b$_{6}$T ai µ ∂ϕ a i + a ′ $_{4}$U ′ ai µ ∂$_{µ}$ϕ a i + a ′ 5 V ′ ai µ ∂$_{µ}$ω a i + a ′ $_{6}$ω ′ a i ∂ $^{2}$ϕ a i + a ′ 7 U ′ ai µ V ′ ai µ + a ′ $_{8}$gf $^{abc}$U ′ ai µ ϕ b $_{i}$A c µ + a ′ 9 gf $^{abc}$V ′ ai µ ω b $_{i}$A c µ + a ′ 10 gf $^{abc}$ωa i A c µ ∂$_{µ}$ϕ b i + a ′ 11 gf $^{abc}$ωa $_{i}$( ∂$_{µ}$A c $_{µ}$) ϕ b i ]} .$$\n\n$$B (2) = ∫ d $^{4}$x ( δ Σ (2) GZ δK a µ δ δA a µ + δ Σ (2) GZ δA a µ δ δK a µ + δ Σ (2) GZ δL a δ δc a + δ Σ (2) GZ δc a δ δL a + b a δ δc a + ϕ a i δ δω a i + ω a i δ δϕ a i + M ai µ δ δU ai µ + N ai µ δ δV ai µ + M ′ ai µ δ δU ′ ai µ + N ′ ai µ δ δV ′ ai µ + R ai µ δ δT ai µ ) .$$\n\n$$U$_{ij}$ Σ (2) c GZ = 0 . (B15)$$\n\n$$δ Σ (2) c GZ δb a = 0 . (B16)$$\n\n$$δ Σ (2) c GZ δc a + ∂$_{µ}$ δ Σ (2) c GZ δK a µ = 0 . (B17)$$\n\nNotice that the part in a and b parameters is exactly the same as in the previous Appendix A, see equation (A35).\n\nWe shall now impose all the constraints induced by the Ward identities. We keep in mind that the argument con- cerning the broken ghost Ward identity still holds. Also, the 4 constraints (B19) invoke the counterterm to be in- dependent of the sources U $^{′}$, V $^{′}$, M ′ and N $^{′}$. Ultimately," + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8610960817525175, + "doc_id": "9040b0ab0dcc0beaf3d69cd1a77b8abfa2b2f169f604da0399e9925b6fcaad83", + "edit_distance": 0.23147208121827412, + "f1_score": 0.8962566844919787, + "meteor": 0.9099588348727443, + "precision": 0.933184855233853, + "pred_md": "arXiv:1001.0057v1 [q-bio.PE] 4 Jan 2010\n\n,\n\n## Arrested phase separation in reproducing bacteria: a generic route to pattern formation?\n\nM. E. Cates, 1 D. Marenduzzo, 1 I. Pagonabarraga, 2 and J. Tailleur 1\n\n1 SUPA, School of Physics and Astronomy, University of Edinburgh, Mayfield Road, Edinburgh EH9 3JZ, UK 2 Departament de F' ısica Fonamental, Universitat de Barcelona - Carrer Mart' ı Franqu's 1, 08028-Barcelona, Spain e (Dated: October 26, 2018)\n\nWe present a generic mechanism by which reproducing microorganisms, with a diffusivity that depends on the local population density, can form stable patterns. It is known that a decrease of swimming speed with density can promote separation into bulk phases of two coexisting densities; this is opposed by the logistic law for birth and death which allows only a single uniform density to be stable. The result of this contest is an arrested nonequilibrium phase separation in which dense droplets or rings become separated by less dense regions, with a characteristic steady-state length scale. Cell division mainly occurs in the dilute regions and cell death in the dense ones, with a continuous flux between these sustained by the diffusivity gradient. We formulate a mathematical model of this in a case involving run-and-tumble bacteria, and make connections with a wider class of mechanisms for density-dependent motility. No chemotaxis is assumed in the model, yet it predicts the formation of patterns strikingly similar to those believed to result from chemotactic behavior.\n\nMicrobial and cellular colonies are among the simplest examples of self-assembly in living organisms. In nature, bacteria are often found in concentrated biofilms, mats or other colony types, which can grow into spectacular patterns visible under the microscope [1, 2]. Also in the laboratory, bacteria such as E. coli and S. typhimirium form regular geometric patterns when they reproduce and grow on a Petri dish containing a gel such as agar. These patterns range from simple concentric rings to elaborate ordered or amorphous arrangements of dots [3-6]. Their formation results from collective behaviour driven by interactions between the bacteria, such as chemotactic aggregation [6], competition for food [8] or changes in phenotypes according to density [11]. The question as to whether general mechanisms lie behind this diversity of microscopic pathways to patterning remains open.\n\nUnlike the self-assembly of colloidal particles, pattern formation in motile microorganisms and other living matter is typically driven by non-equilibrium rather than thermodynamic forces. Indeed, the dynamics of both dilute and concentrated bacterial fluids is already known to be vastly different from that of a suspensions of Brownian particles. For instance, suspensions of active, selfpropelled particles, have been predicted to exhibit giant density fluctuations [12, 13], which have been observed experimentally [14]. Similarly, an initially uniform suspension of self-propelled particles performing a 'run-and-tumble' motion like E. coli has recently been shown theoretically to separate into a bacteria-rich and a bacteria-poor phase, provided that the swimming speed decreases sufficiently rapidly with density [15]. This is akin to what happens in the spinodal decomposition of binary immiscible fluids, but has no counterpart in a system of Brownian particles interacting solely by densitydependent diffusivity. (The latter obey the fluctuationdissipation theorem, ensuring that the equilibrium state\n\nis diffusivity-independent.) Other non-equilibrium effects, such as ratchet physics, have also been observed and used either to rectify the density of bacteria [16-18] or to extract work from bacterial assemblies [19].\n\nSome aspects of bacterial patterning show features common to other nonequilibrium systems, and a crucial task is to identify the key ingredients that control their development. In many equilibrium and nonequilibrium phase transitions an initial instability creates density inhomogeneities; these coarsen, leading eventually to macroscopic phase separation [20]. The situation observed in bacterial assemblies often differs from this; long-lived patterns emerge with fixed characteristic length scales, suggesting that any underlying phase separation is somehow arrested. The strong diversity of biological functions met in experiments has led to an equally diverse range of proposed phenomenological models [57, 9-11] to account for such effects. Most of them rely on the coupling of bacteria with external fields (food, chemoattractant, stimulant, etc.), and many involve a large number of parameters due to the complexity of the specific situation of interest. The most common mechanism used to explain the bacterial patterns is chemotaxis [6]: the propensity of bacteria to swim up/down gradients of chemoattractants/repellants. This explanation is so well established in the literature for at least two organisms ( E. coli and S. typhimuridium [6]) that observation of similar patterns in other species might defensibly be taken as evidence for a chemotactic phenotype.\n\nHere we identify a very general mechanism that can lead to pattern formation in bacterial colonies and which may encompass a large class of experimental situations. This mechanism involves a density-dependent motility, giving rise to a phase separation which is then arrested, on a well defined characteristic length scale, by the birth and death dynamics of bacteria. For definiteness we will work this through for a particular model of bacte-", + "recall": 0.8621399176954733, + "true_md": ",\n\n# Arrested phase separation in reproducing bacteria: a generic route to pattern formation?\n\nM. E. Cates, 1 D. Marenduzzo, 1 I. Pagonabarraga, 2 and J. Tailleur 1\n\n$^{1}$SUPA, School of Physics and Astronomy, University of Edinburgh, Mayfield Road, Edinburgh EH9 3JZ, UK\n\n$^{2}$Departament de F´ısica Fonamental, Universitat de Barcelona - Carrer Mart´ı Franqu´ es 1, 08028-Barcelona, Spain\n\n(Dated: October 26, 2018)\n\nWe present a generic mechanism by which reproducing microorganisms, with a diffusivity that depends on the local population density, can form stable patterns. It is known that a decrease of swimming speed with density can promote separation into bulk phases of two coexisting densities; this is opposed by the logistic law for birth and death which allows only a single uniform density to be stable. The result of this contest is an arrested nonequilibrium phase separation in which dense droplets or rings become separated by less dense regions, with a characteristic steady-state length scale. Cell division mainly occurs in the dilute regions and cell death in the dense ones, with a continuous flux between these sustained by the diffusivity gradient. We formulate a mathematical model of this in a case involving run-and-tumble bacteria, and make connections with a wider class of mechanisms for density-dependent motility. No chemotaxis is assumed in the model, yet it predicts the formation of patterns strikingly similar to those believed to result from chemotactic behavior.\n\nMicrobial and cellular colonies are among the simplest examples of self-assembly in living organisms. In na- ture, bacteria are often found in concentrated biofilms, mats or other colony types, which can grow into spectac- ular patterns visible under the microscope [1, 2]. Also in the laboratory, bacteria such as E. coli and S. ty- phimirium form regular geometric patterns when they reproduce and grow on a Petri dish containing a gel such as agar. These patterns range from simple concentric rings to elaborate ordered or amorphous arrangements of dots [3–6]. Their formation results from collective be- haviour driven by interactions between the bacteria, such as chemotactic aggregation [6], competition for food [8] or changes in phenotypes according to density [11]. The question as to whether general mechanisms lie behind this diversity of microscopic pathways to patterning re- mains open.\n\nUnlike the self-assembly of colloidal particles, pattern formation in motile microorganisms and other living mat- ter is typically driven by non-equilibrium rather than thermodynamic forces. Indeed, the dynamics of both di- lute and concentrated bacterial fluids is already known to be vastly different from that of a suspensions of Brow- nian particles. For instance, suspensions of active, self- propelled particles, have been predicted to exhibit gi- ant density fluctuations [12, 13], which have been ob- served experimentally [14]. Similarly, an initially uni- form suspension of self-propelled particles performing a “run-and-tumble” motion like E. coli has recently been shown theoretically to separate into a bacteria-rich and a bacteria-poor phase, provided that the swimming speed decreases sufficiently rapidly with density [15]. This is akin to what happens in the spinodal decomposition of binary immiscible fluids, but has no counterpart in a sys- tem of Brownian particles interacting solely by density- dependent diffusivity. (The latter obey the fluctuation- dissipation theorem, ensuring that the equilibrium state\n\nHere we identify a very general mechanism that can lead to pattern formation in bacterial colonies and which may encompass a large class of experimental situations. This mechanism involves a density-dependent motility, giving rise to a phase separation which is then arrested, on a well defined characteristic length scale, by the birth and death dynamics of bacteria. For definiteness we will work this through for a particular model of bacte-\n\nSome aspects of bacterial patterning show features common to other nonequilibrium systems, and a cru- cial task is to identify the key ingredients that control their development. In many equilibrium and nonequi- librium phase transitions an initial instability creates density inhomogeneities; these coarsen, leading eventu- ally to macroscopic phase separation [20]. The situa- tion observed in bacterial assemblies often differs from this; long-lived patterns emerge with fixed characteristic length scales, suggesting that any underlying phase sep- aration is somehow arrested. The strong diversity of bio- logical functions met in experiments has led to an equally diverse range of proposed phenomenological models [5– 7, 9–11] to account for such effects. Most of them rely on the coupling of bacteria with external fields (food, chemoattractant, stimulant, etc.), and many involve a large number of parameters due to the complexity of the specific situation of interest. The most common mech- anism used to explain the bacterial patterns is chemo- taxis [6]: the propensity of bacteria to swim up/down gradients of chemoattractants/repellants. This explana- tion is so well established in the literature for at least two organisms ( E. coli and S. typhimuridium [6]) that obser- vation of similar patterns in other species might defensi- bly be taken as evidence for a chemotactic phenotype.\n\nis diffusivity-independent.) Other non-equilibrium ef- fects, such as ratchet physics, have also been observed and used either to rectify the density of bacteria [16–18] or to extract work from bacterial assemblies [19].\n\narXiv:1001.0057v1 [q-bio.PE] 4 Jan 2010" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7538504925204115, + "doc_id": "6d81f8e0f44b2427da30f59854f21bac5ad700719a55802415c0fcae95d340e8", + "edit_distance": 0.7124060150375939, + "f1_score": 0.8794701986754966, + "meteor": 0.6903036429614121, + "precision": 0.9273743016759777, + "pred_md": "decomposition of the correlation function into two vectors; one parallel ( π ) to the line-of-sight and the other perpendicular ( σ ) to the line-of-sight. On small scales, any incoherent velocities of galaxies within a single dark matter halo (or cluster) will just add to the cosmological Hubble flow thus causing the famous 'Fingers-of-God' (FoG) effect which stretches the 2-D correlation function preferentially in line-of-sight ( π ) direction. These distortions depend on the inner dynamics and structure of halos and therefore, any cosmological information is difficult to distinguish from the halo properties. However, on large scales (outside individual dark matter halos), the peculiar velocities become coherent and follow the linear motion of the matter thus providing crucial information on the formation of large-scale structure [22].\n\nIn this paper, we compare predictions for ξ s ( π, σ ) to observations based on the C4 cluster catalogue [23] from the Sloan Digital Sky Survey (SDSS) [24]. Using the Kaiser formulation [22], a theoretical model for ξ s ( π, σ ) is fit to the measured 2-D correlation function in configuration-space, with the ξ s parameterised by a shape dependent part and a coherent evolution component. We also propose that the 1-D linear velocity dispersion ( v p ) is a interesting quantity to report when measuring redshift-space distortions, and complementary to traditional quantities like β , f or fσ 8 discussed recently [1113], as it is independent of both bias and the normalisation method. Therefore, the measured v p provides an unbiased tracer of the evolution of structure formation.\n\n## II. STATISTICAL DETERMINATION OF PECULIAR VELOCITY\n\nThe redshift-space two-point correlation function of mass tracers ( ξ s ( σ, π )) is an anisotropic function [22]. On small scales, it is elongated in the π -direction by the 'Fingers-of-God' effect, while on large scales, the gravitational infall into overdense regions preferentially compresses the correlation function in the σ direction. Therefore, peculiar velocities can be statistically measured by analyzing the observed anisotropic pattern of ξ s ( σ, π ) in both the linear and non-linear regimes.\n\nξ s ( σ, π ) is derived from the convolution of ξ r ( ) with a probability distribution function of peculiar velocities along the line of sight, which is usually called the streaming model [25]. Even with the simplest form of a Gaussian probability distribution, the streaming model describes the suppression effect on ξ s ( σ, π ) on small scales.\n\nIn the linear regime, the density fluctuations and peculiar velocity are coherently evolved through the continuity equation, which is known as the Kaiser limit. Thus the known correlation function of ξ r ( ) from the linear perturbation theory developed by gravitational instability is uniquely transformed into ξ s ( σ, π ) [26-30].\n\nThe large scale limit of the streaming model is consistent with the Kaiser limit [22], when both the density and peculiar velocity fields are treated as statistical quan-\n\n2\n\nFIG. 1: ∆ ξ ∗ l ( r ) for various CMB experiments priors. In the upper panel, we show the change in ξ ∗ l ( r ) for variations in ω m . In the lower panel, we show the change in ξ ∗ l ( r ) as a function of n S . The thick black curves are based on WMAP priors, while the thin blue curves are for Planck prior. On the y-axis, we focus on the range of scales probed by recent and planned reshift-space distortion measurements.\n\nFIG. 1: ∆ ξ ∗ l ( r ) for various CMB experiments priors. In the upper panel, we show the change in ξ ∗ l ( r ) for variations in ω m . In the lower panel, we show the change in ξ ∗ l ( r ) as a function of n S . The thick black curves are based on WMAP priors, while the thin blue curves are for Planck prior. On the y-axis, we focus on the range of scales probed by recent and planned reshift-space distortion measurements.\n\ntities [31]. This consistency test was developed further to show that, even in the Kaiser limit, the description of ξ s ( σ, π ) in linear theory can be modified due to the correlation between the 'squashing' (in the σ direction) and dispersion effects (in the π direction) [32]. With the assumption of a Gaussian pair-wise velocity distribution function, the dispersion effect smears into the Kaiser limit description of ξ s ( σ, π ) at around the percent level which for our present work can be ignored. Thus we adopt the Kaiser limit for the description of ξ s ( σ, π ) in linear regime while considering dispersion effect as a systematic uncertainty. We introduce below a new parameterisation of ξ s ( σ, π ) in terms of the cosmological parameters and construct a method to measure the mean velocity dispersion v p in a model independent way.\n\n## A. Model independent parameterisation of power spectra\n\nThe discovery of cosmic acceleration has prompted rapid progress in theoretical cosmological research and prompted many authors to propose modification to the law of gravity beyond our solar system. For example, some theories based upon General Relativity can be modified by screening (or anti-screening) the mass of gravitationally bound objects [3], while others include a nontrivial dark energy component (e.g. interacting dark energy [33, 34], or clumping dark energy [35]) thus breaking the dynamical relations between density fluctuations", + "recall": 0.836272040302267, + "true_md": "2\n\nFIG. 1: Δ ξ ∗ l ( r ) for various CMB experiments priors. In the upper panel, we show the change in ξ ∗ l ( r ) for variations in ω$_{m}$ . In the lower panel, we show the change in ξ ∗ l ( r ) as a function of n$_{S}$ . The thick black curves are based on WMAP priors, while the thin blue curves are for Planck prior. On the y-axis, we focus on the range of scales probed by recent and planned reshift–space distortion mea- surements.\n\ndecomposition of the correlation function into two vec- tors; one parallel ( π ) to the line–of–sight and the other perpendicular ( σ ) to the line–of–sight. On small scales, any incoherent velocities of galaxies within a single dark matter halo (or cluster) will just add to the cosmological Hubble flow thus causing the famous “Fingers-of-God” (FoG) effect which stretches the 2-D correlation function preferentially in line-of-sight ( π ) direction. These dis- tortions depend on the inner dynamics and structure of halos and therefore, any cosmological information is dif- ficult to distinguish from the halo properties. However, on large scales (outside individual dark matter halos), the peculiar velocities become coherent and follow the linear motion of the matter thus providing crucial information on the formation of large-scale structure [22].\n\nIn this paper, we compare predictions for ξ$_{s}$ ( π, σ ) to observations based on the C4 cluster catalogue [23] from the Sloan Digital Sky Survey (SDSS) [24]. Us- ing the Kaiser formulation [22], a theoretical model for ξ$_{s}$ ( π, σ ) is fit to the measured 2-D correlation function in configuration–space, with the ξ$_{s}$ parameterised by a shape dependent part and a coherent evolution compo- nent. We also propose that the 1-D linear velocity disper- sion ( v$_{p}$ ) is a interesting quantity to report when measur- ing redshift–space distortions, and complementary to tra- ditional quantities like β , f or f σ 8 discussed recently [11– 13], as it is independent of both bias and the normalisa- tion method. Therefore, the measured v$_{p}$ provides an unbiased tracer of the evolution of structure formation.\n\ntities [31]. This consistency test was developed further to show that, even in the Kaiser limit, the description of ξ$_{s}$ ( σ, π ) in linear theory can be modified due to the correlation between the ”squashing” (in the σ direction) and dispersion effects (in the π direction) [32]. With the assumption of a Gaussian pair-wise velocity distribu- tion function, the dispersion effect smears into the Kaiser limit description of ξ$_{s}$ ( σ, π ) at around the percent level which for our present work can be ignored. Thus we adopt the Kaiser limit for the description of ξ$_{s}$ ( σ, π ) in linear regime while considering dispersion effect as a sys- tematic uncertainty. We introduce below a new param- eterisation of ξ$_{s}$ ( σ, π ) in terms of the cosmological pa- rameters and construct a method to measure the mean velocity dispersion v$_{p}$ in a model independent way.\n\n## II. STATISTICAL DETERMINATION OF PECULIAR VELOCITY\n\n## A. Model independent parameterisation of power spectra\n\nThe redshift–space two-point correlation function of mass tracers ( ξ$_{s}$ ( σ, π )) is an anisotropic function [22]. On small scales, it is elongated in the π -direction by the “Fingers-of-God” effect, while on large scales, the gravi- tational infall into overdense regions preferentially com- presses the correlation function in the σ direction. There- fore, peculiar velocities can be statistically measured by analyzing the observed anisotropic pattern of ξ$_{s}$ ( σ, π ) in both the linear and non-linear regimes.\n\nξ$_{s}$ ( σ, π ) is derived from the convolution of ξ ( r ) with a probability distribution function of peculiar velocities along the line of sight, which is usually called the stream- ing model [25]. Even with the simplest form of a Gaussian probability distribution, the streaming model describes the suppression effect on ξ$_{s}$ ( σ, π ) on small scales.\n\nIn the linear regime, the density fluctuations and pe- culiar velocity are coherently evolved through the conti- nuity equation, which is known as the Kaiser limit. Thus the known correlation function of ξ ( r ) from the linear perturbation theory developed by gravitational instabil- ity is uniquely transformed into ξ$_{s}$ ( σ, π ) [26–30].\n\nThe large scale limit of the streaming model is con- sistent with the Kaiser limit [22], when both the density and peculiar velocity fields are treated as statistical quan-\n\nThe discovery of cosmic acceleration has prompted rapid progress in theoretical cosmological research and prompted many authors to propose modification to the law of gravity beyond our solar system. For example, some theories based upon General Relativity can be mod- ified by screening (or anti-screening) the mass of gravi- tationally bound objects [3], while others include a non- trivial dark energy component (e.g. interacting dark en- ergy [33, 34], or clumping dark energy [35]) thus break- ing the dynamical relations between density fluctuations" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.47792186223226457, + "doc_id": "7ccae5369db7a0ea14386a5a6fb2b9fdc51ed2a93913b251630bb98b790158a3", + "edit_distance": 0.5203761755485894, + "f1_score": 0.9677419354838711, + "meteor": 0.8610643795411733, + "precision": 0.989010989010989, + "pred_md": "17\n\nFIG. 5: (Color online) The LDOS (left) and the spectral content of the fluctuations (right) of N = 500 bosons with u = 4, for Zero, Pi, Edge, and TwinFock preparations (top to bottom). The horizontal axes are E -E x and ω/ω J . The lines in the LDOS figures are based on a semiclassical analysis (see text), while the circles are from the exact quantum calculation. Note that due to the mirror symmetry of the Zero preparation the expected frequency should approach 2 ω J , while for the Pi preparation it is bounded from below by 2 ω x (both frequencies are indicted by vertical dashed lines). Note also the outstanding difference between the spectral support of Zero and Pi preparations compared with continuous-like support in the case of Edge and Fock preparations.\n\nFIG. 5: (Color online) The LDOS (left) and the spectral content of the fluctuations (right) of N = 500 bosons with u = 4, for Zero, Pi, Edge, and TwinFock preparations (top to bottom). The horizontal axes are E -E x and ω/ω J . The lines in the LDOS figures are based on a semiclassical analysis (see text), while the circles are from the exact quantum calculation. Note that due to the mirror symmetry of the Zero preparation the expected frequency should approach 2 ω J , while for the Pi preparation it is bounded from below by 2 ω x (both frequencies are indicted by vertical dashed lines). Note also the outstanding difference between the spectral support of Zero and Pi preparations compared with continuous-like support in the case of Edge and Fock preparations.", + "recall": 0.9473684210526315, + "true_md": "17\n\nFIG. 5: (Color online) The LDOS (left) and the spectral content of the fluctuations (right) of N = 500 bosons with u = 4, for Zero, Pi, Edge, and TwinFock preparations (top to bottom). The horizontal axes are E − E x and ω/ω$_{J}$ . The lines in the LDOS figures are based on a semiclassical analysis (see text), while the circles are from the exact quantum calculation. Note that due to the mirror symmetry of the Zero preparation the expected frequency should approach 2 ω$_{J}$ , while for the Pi preparation it is bounded from below by 2 ω x (both frequencies are indicted by vertical dashed lines). Note also the outstanding difference between the spectral support of Zero and Pi preparations compared with continuous-like support in the case of Edge and Fock preparations." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8647252050509381, + "doc_id": "a1133e375539cd83d8458d13bc1fdc6406f1246817ce48ad25299d6e4fa4fd5b", + "edit_distance": 0.6375502008032129, + "f1_score": 0.9218573046432618, + "meteor": 0.8391843758099862, + "precision": 0.9553990610328639, + "pred_md": "arXiv:1001.1855v1 [astro-ph.HE] 12 Jan 2010\n\n2009 Fermi Symposium, Washington, D.C., Nov. 2-5\n\n1\n\n## Detection of High-Energy Gamma-Ray Emission from the Globular Cluster 47 Tucanae with Fermi\n\nN.A. Webb, J. Knodlseder\n\nUniversit' de Toulouse, UPS, CESR, 9 Avenue du Colonel Roche, F-31028 Toulouse Cedex 9, France e on behalf of the Fermi Large Area Telescope Collaboration\n\nGlobular clusters are known to harbour a significant population of neutron star X-ray binaries that could be responsible for delaying the inevitable core collapse of these dense clusters. As a result, their progeny, namely millisecond pulsars, are also present in large numbers. Following the confirmation using the Fermi Gamma-ray Space Telescope that millisecond pulsars are indeed gamma-ray emitters, we report on the detection of the Galactic globular cluster 47 Tuc with the Fermi Large Area Telescope. This is the first detection of a Galactic globular cluster in the gammaray domain. The gamma-ray spectrum is consistent with gamma-ray emission from a population of millisecond pulsars. The observed gamma-ray luminosity implies an upper limit of 60 millisecond pulsars present in 47 Tucanae.\n\n## I. INTRODUCTION\n\nWith their typical ages of ∼ 10 10 years, globular clusters form the most ancient constituents of our Galaxy. They are seen throughout the electromagnetic spectrum, from radio waves to X-ray energies, revealing their various stellar components. As an example, X-ray observations have shown that globular clusters contain considerably more close binary systems per unit mass than the Galactic disc [1]; this finding is interpreted as a result of frequent stellar encounters in their dense stellar cores [2]. This scenario is strengthened by the observation that the number of low-mass X-ray binary systems containing neutron stars is directly correlated with the stellar encounter rate [3, 4]. These close binary systems may provide a source of internal energy stabilizing the cluster against the inevitable core collapse [5]. Another consequence of this scenario is the presence of many millisecond pulsars (MSPs, also known as recycled pulsars); these are pulsars that were spun up to millisecond periods by mass accretion from a low-mass X-ray binary companion [6].\n\nThe only domain in which globular clusters have so far eluded detection is gamma rays. Recent observations with the Large Area Telescope (LAT) onboard the Fermi Gamma-ray Space Telescope have revealed gamma-ray pulsations from eight MSPs, establishing these objects as a class of high-energy gamma-ray sources [7, 8]. Most of the MSPs detected in gamma rays are within a distance of only a few hundred parsecs of the Sun, which implies that MSPs are rather faint objects with isotropic gamma-ray luminosities that generally do not exceed 10 33 ergs s -1 [8]. Placed at a distance of a few kiloparsecs (the distance to the nearest globular clusters), it is unlikely, although not impossible, that individual MSPs are being detected in gamma rays. Globular clusters, however, may contain tens to several hundreds of MSPs [9], and their cumulative magnetospheric emission is probably the first signature that would be picked out in gamma\n\neConf C091122\n\nrays.\n\n47 Tucanae (NGC 104) is one of the most promising candidates for high-energy gamma-ray emission because of the large number of known MSPs in the cluster and its relative proximity (4 kpc) [10]. So far, 23 MSPs have been detected in 47 Tuc through radio and/or X-ray observations, and the total population is estimated to be between 30 and 60 [9, 11, 12], although claims in the past reached up to 200 [13].\n\n## II. DATA ANALYSIS\n\nWe have observed 47 Tuc with the LAT telescope aboard Fermi. Our data amount to 194.3 days of continuous sky survey observations over the period August 8th 2008 - April 3rd 2009 during which a total exposure of ∼ 2 × 10 10 cm 2 s (at 1 GeV) has been obtained for 47 Tuc. Events for the data taking period satisfying the standard low-background event selection ( Diffuse events [14]) and coming from zenith angles < 105 · (to greatly reduce the contribution from Earth albedo gamma rays) were used. To further reduce the effect of Earth albedo backgrounds, the time intervals when the Earth was appreciably within the field of view (specifically, when the center of the field of view was more than 47 · from the zenith) were excluded from this analysis, and all events taken when the spacecraft was within the South Atlantic Anomaly were also excluded. The data analysis presented in this paper has been performed using the LAT Science Tools package, which is available from the Fermi Science Support Center, using P6 V3 post-launch instrument response functions (IRFs). These take into account pile-up and accidental coincidence effects in the detector subsystems that are not considered in the definition of the pre- launch IRFs. Using a maximum likelihood model fitting procedure we determine the position of the gamma-ray source to be ( α 2000 = 0 h 24 . m 3, δ 2000 = -72 03 · . m 8) with a 95% confidence error radius of 4.2'. Systematic uncertainties in the po-", + "recall": 0.8905908096280087, + "true_md": "1\n\n2009 Fermi Symposium, Washington, D.C., Nov. 2-5\n\n# Detection of High-Energy Gamma-Ray Emission from the Globular Cluster 47 Tucanae with Fermi\n\nN.A. Webb, J. Kn¨ odlseder Universit´e de Toulouse, UPS, CESR, 9 Avenue du Colonel Roche, F-31028 Toulouse Cedex 9, France on behalf of the Fermi Large Area Telescope Collaboration\n\nGlobular clusters are known to harbour a significant population of neutron star X-ray binaries that could be responsible for delaying the inevitable core collapse of these dense clusters. As a result, their progeny, namely millisecond pulsars, are also present in large numbers. Following the confirmation using the Fermi Gamma-ray Space Telescope that millisecond pulsars are indeed gamma-ray emitters, we report on the detection of the Galactic globular cluster 47 Tuc with the Fermi Large Area Telescope. This is the first detection of a Galactic globular cluster in the gamma- ray domain. The gamma-ray spectrum is consistent with gamma-ray emission from a population of millisecond pulsars. The observed gamma-ray luminosity implies an upper limit of 60 millisecond pulsars present in 47 Tucanae.\n\nrays.\n\n47 Tucanae (NGC 104) is one of the most promis- ing candidates for high-energy gamma-ray emission because of the large number of known MSPs in the cluster and its relative proximity (4 kpc) [10]. So far, 23 MSPs have been detected in 47 Tuc through radio and/or X-ray observations, and the total population is estimated to be between 30 and 60 [9, 11, 12], al- though claims in the past reached up to 200 [13].\n\nWith their typical ages of ∼ 10 10 years, globular clusters form the most ancient constituents of our Galaxy. They are seen throughout the electromag- netic spectrum, from radio waves to X-ray energies, revealing their various stellar components. As an ex- ample, X-ray observations have shown that globular clusters contain considerably more close binary sys- tems per unit mass than the Galactic disc [1]; this finding is interpreted as a result of frequent stellar en- counters in their dense stellar cores [2]. This scenario is strengthened by the observation that the number of low-mass X-ray binary systems containing neutron stars is directly correlated with the stellar encounter rate [3, 4]. These close binary systems may provide a source of internal energy stabilizing the cluster against the inevitable core collapse [5]. Another consequence of this scenario is the presence of many millisecond pulsars (MSPs, also known as recycled pulsars); these are pulsars that were spun up to millisecond periods by mass accretion from a low-mass X-ray binary com- panion [6].\n\nWe have observed 47 Tuc with the LAT telescope aboard Fermi. Our data amount to 194.3 days of con- tinuous sky survey observations over the period Au- gust 8th 2008 - April 3rd 2009 during which a total exposure of ∼ 2 × 10 10 cm 2 s (at 1 GeV) has been obtained for 47 Tuc. Events for the data taking pe- riod satisfying the standard low-background event se- lection ( Diffuse events [14]) and coming from zenith angles < 105 ◦ (to greatly reduce the contribution from Earth albedo gamma rays) were used. To further re- duce the effect of Earth albedo backgrounds, the time intervals when the Earth was appreciably within the field of view (specifically, when the center of the field of view was more than 47 ◦ from the zenith) were ex- cluded from this analysis, and all events taken when the spacecraft was within the South Atlantic Anomaly were also excluded. The data analysis presented in this paper has been performed using the LAT Sci- ence Tools package, which is available from the Fermi Science Support Center, using P6 V3 post-launch in- strument response functions (IRFs). These take into account pile-up and accidental coincidence effects in the detector subsystems that are not considered in the definition of the pre- launch IRFs. Using a maxi- mum likelihood model fitting procedure we determine the position of the gamma-ray source to be ( α 2000 = 0 $^{h}$24 . $^{m}$3, δ 2000 = -72 $^{◦}$03 . $^{m}$8) with a 95% confidence er- ror radius of 4.2’. Systematic uncertainties in the po-\n\nThe only domain in which globular clusters have so far eluded detection is gamma rays. Recent observa- tions with the Large Area Telescope (LAT) onboard the Fermi Gamma-ray Space Telescope have revealed gamma-ray pulsations from eight MSPs, establishing these objects as a class of high-energy gamma-ray sources [7, 8]. Most of the MSPs detected in gamma rays are within a distance of only a few hundred par- secs of the Sun, which implies that MSPs are rather faint objects with isotropic gamma-ray luminosities that generally do not exceed 10 33 ergs s − 1 [8]. Placed at a distance of a few kiloparsecs (the distance to the nearest globular clusters), it is unlikely, although not impossible, that individual MSPs are being detected in gamma rays. Globular clusters, however, may con- tain tens to several hundreds of MSPs [9], and their cumulative magnetospheric emission is probably the first signature that would be picked out in gamma\n\narXiv:1001.1855v1 [astro-ph.HE] 12 Jan 2010\n\n## I. INTRODUCTION\n\n## II. DATA ANALYSIS\n\neConf C091122" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.12946414366723866, + "doc_id": "ef8e7bb788752de667777c85f98efe33732460beda7d6de962e47e7de1a8c749", + "edit_distance": 0.8245243128964059, + "f1_score": 0.8819444444444446, + "meteor": 0.2429228066882892, + "precision": 0.9584905660377359, + "pred_md": "with V ' . Taking the inverse of this matrix yields\n\n\n\nAs in the previous section we have that\n\n\n\nWe can do the same for the other operator. Only some care has to be taken as the source V ' ai µ couples to a sum of two operators ( gf akb A ϕ k µ b i -gf abc D bd µ c d ω c i ). We therefore have to subtract the operator coupled to the source R ai µ , namely\n\n\n\nWe can thus conclude that the operators gf akb A ϕ k b i and gf akb A ϕ k b i are not multiplicatively renormalizable and mix with the operators ∂ µ ϕ a i and ∂ ϕ µ a i , respectively. Therefore, one should keep in mind that the limit θ → 0 has to be taken as the final step, and that it can only be taken at the local level. Furthermore, the mixing we have found tells us that one should always leave the covariant derivative of a field 'in one piece'. As a consequence, much care has to be taken at the nonlocal level when deriving all kinds of results, as we shall now explain in the next section.\n\n## V. THE KUGO-OJIMA GREEN FUNCTION(S) AND THE LINK WITH THE HORIZON CONDITION\n\nAs explained in [33], there exists a close link between the Gribov-Zwanziger formalism and the Kugo-Ojima analysis of gauge theories. An important role in the Kugo-Ojima work is played by the parameter u (0), which is the zero momentum limit of the function u p ( 2 ), which can be extracted from\n\n\n\nIn order to have a finite quantity u p ( 2 ), the previous Green function should of course be renormalizable. In the case of pure Yang-Mills theories, one can indeed prove\n\n7\n\nthis, but this was achieved by also using anti-BRST invariance. We refer to the literature [34, 35] for details. In the presence of the restriction to the Gribov region Ω, we even lack the concept of the anti-BRST symmetry as far as we know. We shall therefore present a slightly different argument here. Using the correspondence (30), we may also write\n\n\n\nfrom which the renormalizability immediately follows, see equation (42). If one wishes to introduce bare quantities, one can write down\n\n\n\nbut this is just a formal relation. It nevertheless teaches us that one cannot simply speak about the (multiplicative) renormalization of u p ( 2 ) in terms of a bare Kugo-Ojima function u 0 ( p 2 ).\n\nAs a corollary, using the identification (38), we derive the following correspondence between the horizon function and the Kugo-Ojima parameter u (0),\n\n\n\nwhich hereby rigourously proves the relation which was one of the starting points of the paper [33].\n\nIn [29], it was shown that one can parametrize the ghost propagator, defined as follows\n\n\n\nin terms of[45]\n\n\n\nThis relation was also discussed in [4, 8-10, 26, 36]. Using this relation, one can again derive a formal correspondence between bare and finite quantities,\n\n\n\nbut as already noticed in [36], it does not allow to separately speak about (1 + u p ( 2 )) 0 and w 0 ( p 2 ).", + "recall": 0.8167202572347267, + "true_md": "7\n\nthis, but this was achieved by also using anti-BRST in- variance. We refer to the literature [34, 35] for details. In the presence of the restriction to the Gribov region Ω, we even lack the concept of the anti-BRST symmetry as far as we know. We shall therefore present a slightly different argument here. Using the correspondence (30), we may also write\n\nwith V $^{′}$. Taking the inverse of this matrix yields\n\nWe can do the same for the other operator. Only some care has to be taken as the source V ′ ai µ couples to a sum of two operators ( gf$_{akb}$A k $_{µ}$ϕ b i − gf$_{abc}$D bd µ c $^{d}$ω c $_{i}$). We therefore have to subtract the operator coupled to the source R ai µ , namely\n\nAs in the previous section we have that\n\nfrom which the renormalizability immediately follows, see equation (42). If one wishes to introduce bare quantities, one can write down\n\nbut this is just a formal relation. It nevertheless teaches us that one cannot simply speak about the (multiplicative) renormalization of u ( p $^{2}$) in terms of a bare Kugo-Ojima function u$_{0}$ ( p $^{2}$).\n\nAs a corollary, using the identification (38), we de- rive the following correspondence between the horizon function and the Kugo-Ojima parameter u (0),\n\nWe can thus conclude that the operators gf$_{akb}$A $^{k}$ϕb i and gf$_{akb}$A $^{k}$ϕ b i are not multiplicatively renormalizable and mix with the operators ∂$_{µ}$ϕ a i and ∂$_{µ}$ϕ a $_{i}$, respectively. Therefore, one should keep in mind that the limit θ → 0 has to be taken as the final step, and that it can only be taken at the local level. Furthermore, the mixing we have found tells us that one should always leave the covariant derivative of a field “in one piece”. As a consequence, much care has to be taken at the nonlocal level when de- riving all kinds of results, as we shall now explain in the next section.\n\nAs explained in [33], there exists a close link between the Gribov-Zwanziger formalism and the Kugo-Ojima analysis of gauge theories. An important role in the Kugo-Ojima work is played by the parameter u (0), which is the zero momentum limit of the function u ( p $^{2}$), which can be extracted from\n\nThis relation was also discussed in [4, 8–10, 26, 36]. Us- ing this relation, one can again derive a formal correspon- dence between bare and finite quantities,\n\n$$G ( p $^{2}$) = 1 p $^{2}$(1 + u ( p $^{2}$) + w ( p $^{2}$)) . (61)$$\n\n$$− 〈 h$_{3}$ 〉 = ( N 2 − 1) [( d − 1) u (0) − 1] , (59)$$\n\n$$− 1 N$_{c}$ ∫ d $^{d}$xeipx 〈 D ad µ ω ds λ ( x ) D be ν ω es λ (0) 〉$_{0}$ = δ ab [( δ$_{µν}$ − p$_{µ}$p$_{ν}$ p 2 ) u ( p $^{2}$) − p$_{µ}$p$_{ν}$ p 2 ] 0 ⇔ − Z − 1 c N$_{c}$ ∫ d $^{d}$xeipx 〈 D ad µ ω ds λ ( x ) D be ν ω es λ (0) 〉 = Z − 1 c δ ab [( δ$_{µν}$ − p$_{µ}$p$_{ν}$ p 2 ) u ( p $^{2}$) − p$_{µ}$p$_{ν}$ p 2 ] 0 , (58)$$\n\n$$( gf$_{akb}$A k $_{µ}$ϕ b $_{i}$)$_{0}$ = ( gf$_{akb}$A k $_{µ}$ϕ b i − gf$_{abc}$D bd µ c $^{d}$ωc $_{i}$)$_{0}$ − ( − gf$_{abc}$D bd µ c $^{d}$ωc $_{i}$)$_{0}$ = a$_{1}$ ( ∂$_{µ}$ϕ a $_{i}$) + Z − 1 / 2 g Z − 1 / 4 A ( gf $^{akb}$Ak $_{µ}$ϕ b i − gf$_{abc}$D bd µ c $^{d}$ωc $_{i}$) − Z 1 / 2 g Z 1 / 4 A ( − gf$_{abc}$D bd µ c $^{d}$ωc $_{i}$) = a$_{1}$ ( ∂$_{µ}$ϕ a $_{i}$) + Z − 1 / 2 g Z − 1 / 4 A ( gf $^{akb}$Ak $_{µ}$ϕ b $_{i}$) . (55)$$\n\n$$[1 + u ( p $^{2}$) + w ( p $^{2}$)]$_{0}$ = Z − 1 c [1 + u ( p $^{2}$) + w ( p $^{2}$)] . (62)$$\n\n$$∫ d $^{d}$xeipx 〈 D ad µ c $^{d}$( x ) D be ν c $^{e}$(0) 〉 = δ ab [( δ$_{µν}$ − p$_{µ}$p$_{ν}$ p 2 ) u ( p $^{2}$) − p$_{µ}$p$_{ν}$ p 2 ] . (56)$$\n\nwhich hereby rigourously proves the relation which was one of the starting points of the paper [33].\n\nIn [29], it was shown that one can parametrize the ghost propagator, defined as follows\n\nbut as already noticed in [36], it does not allow to separately speak about (1 + u ( p $^{2}$))$_{0}$ and w$_{0}$ ( p $^{2}$).\n\nIn order to have a finite quantity u ( p $^{2}$), the previous Green function should of course be renormalizable. In the case of pure Yang-Mills theories, one can indeed prove\n\n$$− 1 N$_{c}$ ∫ d $^{d}$x e ipx 〈 D ad µ ω ds λ ( x ) D be ν ω es λ (0) 〉 = δ ab [( δ$_{µν}$ − p$_{µ}$p$_{ν}$ p 2 ) u ( p $^{2}$) − p$_{µ}$p$_{ν}$ p 2 ] , (57)$$\n\n$$[ M M ′ ] = [ Z − 1 / 2 g Z − 1 / 4 A a$_{1}$ 0 Z 1 / 2 g Z 1 / 4 A ] [ M$_{0}$ M ′ 0 ] , [ V V ′ ] = [ Z − 1 / 2 g Z − 1 / 4 A a$_{1}$ 0 Z 1 / 2 g Z 1 / 4 A ] [ V$_{0}$ V ′ 0 ] . (53)$$\n\n$$( gf $^{akb}$Ak $_{µ}$ϕ b $_{i}$)$_{0}$ = a$_{1}$ ( ∂$_{µ}$ϕ a $_{i}$) + Z − 1 / 2 g Z − 1 / 4 A ( gf $^{akb}$Ak $_{µ}$ϕ b $_{i}$) . (54)$$\n\n## V. THE KUGO-OJIMA GREEN FUNCTION(S) AND THE LINK WITH THE HORIZON CONDITION\n\n〈 in terms of[45]\n\n$$〈 c $^{a}$( − p ) c $^{b}$( p ) 〉 = δ $^{ab}$G ( p $^{2}$) , (60) in terms of[45]$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.48436897057492023, + "doc_id": "5eceed162168639d5350f1a72380777bb649fc9aeac6cb41381280cc17d5f107", + "edit_distance": 0.6714697406340058, + "f1_score": 0.9400000000000001, + "meteor": 0.5281363271455307, + "precision": 0.9648093841642229, + "pred_md": "set is the minimal number of variable nodes that have to be initially in error for the decoder to end up in the trapping set. Note that these definitions are for the case of BSC. Also in analysis of decoders in this paper, it is implicitly assumed that the all-zero codeword is transmitted. This is a valid assumption since we consider only symmetric decoders, as explained in [3]. Readers can refer to the work of Chilappagari et al. [8], [12] for more details on these notions.\n\n## III. MULTILEVEL DECODERS: GENERAL FRAMEWORK\n\nMultilevel decoders are a new class of quantized messagepassing decoders for LDPC codes. For this class, a decoder F is defined as a 4-tuple given by F = ( M Y , , Φ v , Φ ) c . The message set M consists of all the levels under which the messages are confined to and is defined as M = { 0 , ± L i : 1 ≤ i ≤ M } , where L i ∈ R + and L i > L j for any i > j . The set Y denotes the set of possible values called channel values , that are computed by the decoder based on the vector r received from the channel. For the case of BSC, Y is defined as Y = {± C } , and for each variable node v i in G , the channel value y i ∈ Y is determined by y i = ( -1) r i C . Φ v : Y × M d v -1 → M denotes the update rule used at a variable node with degree d v , which is a simple map derived using knowledge of trapping sets. Φ : c M d c -1 →M denote the check node map for a check node with degree d c . We shall restrict ourselves to d v -left-regular codes where the same map is used at every variable node. Also the update rules we consider are time-invariant rules, i.e., they do not change from iteration to iteration.\n\nRemark: In this paper, by the term 'trapping sets', we mean trapping sets that are known for message-passing decoders such as Gallager-A/B and/or BP decoders.\n\n## A. Update rules\n\nIn this paper, we consider the check node update function Φ c to be\n\n\n\nwhere sgn denotes the standard signum function.\n\nRemark: Φ c defined in this manner corresponds exactly to the check node update rule of the min-sum algorithm.\n\nBased on the definition of Φ v , we propose two subclasses of multilevel decoders: linear-threshold decoders and non-linearthreshold decoders.\n\nLinear-threshold (LT) decoders: For these decoders, the function Φ v determines its output by taking a sum of its inputs and comparing with a set of thresholds. A threshold set T = { T , T 1 2 , · · · , T M } where T i ∈ R + , is defined in a way such that for any T , T p q ∈ T , T p > T q if p > q . The function Φ v is defined as\n\n\n\nwhere Q is the quantization function defined as\n\n\n\nwhere i = 1 2 , , . . . , M and T M +1 = ∞ .\n\nRemark: Note that although one might consider these decoders as special instances of a quantized min-sum decoder, the messages are still not beliefs. Also particular message sets and threshold sets for Φ v are defined using knowledge of trapping sets which will be discussed later.\n\nNon-linear-threshold (NLT) decoders: For these decoders, the function Φ v determines its output by taking the sum of its incoming messages and a weighted channel value, and then comparing with a set of thresholds. The weight ω c assigned to the channel value y i is computed using a symmetric nonlinear function Ω : M d v -1 →{ 0 1 , } .\n\n\n\nRemark: Due to the nonlinearity, Φ v can output different outgoing messages for any two distinct sets of incoming messages even though the sum of them is the same. Hence these decoders are different from quantized min-sum decoders or any other existing quantized message-passing decoders.\n\nIt is evident from the expressions for Φ v and Φ c , that the rules are symmetric for both LT and NLT decoders.\n\n## B. Isolation assumption\n\nWe now introduce a key concept called isolation assumption that enables us to analyze decoding on isolated subgraphs induced by trapping sets of a code. Analyzing decoders on isolated subgraphs is a crucial strategy required for deriving update rules. It is important to note that this is different from the independence assumption considered by Gallager [2]. Before we delve into this, we first provide some motivation for the need of defining such a concept.\n\nThe design of multilevel decoders is based on the knowledge of trapping sets for existing decoders. Given a list of trapping sets, the aim is to design a variable node update rule that guarantees correction of all of them. Consider the subgraph of a trapping set contained in the Tanner graph with some nodes initially in error. In order to verify whether a given rule succeeds on a trapping set, it is necessary not only to know the subgraph induced by the trapping set, but also the neighborhood of the induced subgraph and messages coming from this neighborhood. Since this neighborhood can be different for different Tanner graphs, the design of multilevel decoders becomes very complex. Therefore, to facilitate the design process, we work under the assumption that the messages to the nodes of the trapping set from the nodes outside the induced subgraph of the trapping set are known. We call this assumption the isolation assumption to signify the fact that the trapping set can be considered in isolation from the rest of the graph and can be analyzed as an independent entity.", + "recall": 0.9164345403899722, + "true_md": "where Q is the quantization function defined as\n\nset is the minimal number of variable nodes that have to be initially in error for the decoder to end up in the trapping set. Note that these definitions are for the case of BSC. Also in analysis of decoders in this paper, it is implicitly assumed that the all-zero codeword is transmitted. This is a valid assumption since we consider only symmetric decoders, as explained in [3]. Readers can refer to the work of Chilappagari et al. [8], [12] for more details on these notions.\n\nwhere i = 1 , 2 , . . . , M and T$_{M}$$\\_{+1}$ = ∞ .\n\nRemark: Note that although one might consider these de- coders as special instances of a quantized min-sum decoder, the messages are still not beliefs. Also particular message sets and threshold sets for Φ$_{v}$ are defined using knowledge of trapping sets which will be discussed later.\n\nNon-linear-threshold (NLT) decoders: For these decoders, the function Φ$_{v}$ determines its output by taking the sum of its incoming messages and a weighted channel value, and then comparing with a set of thresholds. The weight ω$_{c}$ assigned to the channel value y$_{i}$ is computed using a symmetric non- linear function Ω : M d$_{v}$ − 1 → { 0 , 1 } .\n\nMultilevel decoders are a new class of quantized message- passing decoders for LDPC codes. For this class, a decoder F is defined as a 4-tuple given by F = ( M , Y , Φ$_{v}$ , Φ$_{c}$) . The message set M consists of all the levels under which the messages are confined to and is defined as M = { 0 , ± L$_{i}$ : 1 ≤ i ≤ M } , where L$_{i}$ ∈ R + and L$_{i}$ > L$_{j}$ for any i > j . The set Y denotes the set of possible values called channel values , that are computed by the decoder based on the vector r received from the channel. For the case of BSC, Y is defined as Y = {± C } , and for each variable node v$_{i}$ in G , the channel value y$_{i}$ ∈ Y is determined by y$_{i}$ = ( − 1) $^{r$\\_{i}$}$C . Φ$_{v}$ : Y × M d$_{v}$ − 1 → M denotes the update rule used at a variable node with degree d$_{v}$ , which is a simple map derived using knowledge of trapping sets. Φ$_{c}$ : M d$_{c}$ − 1 → M denote the check node map for a check node with degree d$_{c}$ . We shall restrict ourselves to d$_{v}$ -left-regular codes where the same map is used at every variable node. Also the update rules we consider are time-invariant rules, i.e., they do not change from iteration to iteration.\n\nRemark: Due to the nonlinearity, Φ$_{v}$ can output different outgoing messages for any two distinct sets of incoming messages even though the sum of them is the same. Hence these decoders are different from quantized min-sum decoders or any other existing quantized message-passing decoders.\n\nIt is evident from the expressions for Φ$_{v}$ and Φ$_{c}$ , that the rules are symmetric for both LT and NLT decoders.\n\nWe now introduce a key concept called isolation assumption that enables us to analyze decoding on isolated subgraphs induced by trapping sets of a code. Analyzing decoders on isolated subgraphs is a crucial strategy required for deriving update rules. It is important to note that this is different from the independence assumption considered by Gallager [2]. Before we delve into this, we first provide some motivation for the need of defining such a concept.\n\nRemark: In this paper, by the term “trapping sets”, we mean trapping sets that are known for message-passing decoders such as Gallager-A/B and/or BP decoders.\n\nIn this paper, we consider the check node update function Φ$_{c}$ to be\n\nwhere sgn denotes the standard signum function.\n\nRemark: Φ$_{c}$ defined in this manner corresponds exactly to the check node update rule of the min-sum algorithm.\n\nBased on the definition of Φ$_{v}$ , we propose two subclasses of multilevel decoders: linear-threshold decoders and non-linear- threshold decoders.\n\nLinear-threshold (LT) decoders: For these decoders, the function Φ$_{v}$ determines its output by taking a sum of its inputs and comparing with a set of thresholds. A threshold set T = { T$_{1}$, T$_{2}$, · · · , T$_{M}$ } where T$_{i}$ ∈ R $^{+}$, is defined in a way such that for any T$_{p}$, T$_{q}$ ∈ T , T$_{p}$ > T$_{q}$ if p > q . The function Φ$_{v}$ is defined as\n\nThe design of multilevel decoders is based on the knowledge of trapping sets for existing decoders. Given a list of trapping sets, the aim is to design a variable node update rule that guarantees correction of all of them. Consider the subgraph of a trapping set contained in the Tanner graph with some nodes initially in error. In order to verify whether a given rule succeeds on a trapping set, it is necessary not only to know the subgraph induced by the trapping set, but also the neigh- borhood of the induced subgraph and messages coming from this neighborhood. Since this neighborhood can be different for different Tanner graphs, the design of multilevel decoders becomes very complex. Therefore, to facilitate the design process, we work under the assumption that the messages to the nodes of the trapping set from the nodes outside the induced subgraph of the trapping set are known. We call this assumption the isolation assumption to signify the fact that the trapping set can be considered in isolation from the rest of the graph and can be analyzed as an independent entity.\n\n$$Φ$_{c}$( m$_{1}$, . . . , m$_{d}$$_{c}$$_{−}$$_{1}$ ) =   d$_{c}$ − 1 ∏ j =1 sgn ( m$_{j}$ )$^{}$  min j ∈{ 1 ,...,d$_{c}$ − 1 $_{}}$( | m$_{j}$ | )$$\n\n$$Φ$_{v}$( m$_{1}$, m$_{2}$, · · · , m$_{d}$$_{v}$$_{−}$$_{1}$, y$_{i}$ ) = Q$^{}$  d$_{v}$ − 1 ∑ j =1 m$_{j}$ + y$_{i}$$^{}$ $$\n\n$$Φ$_{v}$( m$_{1}$, m$_{2}$, · · · , m$_{d}$$_{v}$$_{−}$$_{1}$, y$_{i}$ ) = Q$^{}$  d$_{v}$ − 1 ∑ j =1 m$_{j}$ + ω$_{c}$ · y$_{i}$$^{}$ $_{}$.$$\n\n## B. Isolation assumption\n\n## A. Update rules\n\n## III. MULTILEVEL DECODERS: GENERAL FRAMEWORK\n\nQ ( x ) = { L$_{i}$ , T$_{i}$ ≤ x < T$_{i}$$\\_{+1}$ − L$\\_{i}$ , − T$\\_{i}$$_{+1}$ < x ≤ − T$_{i}$ 0, otherwise" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9117943678484268, + "doc_id": "424a3edfe3305c35ca2f6fec16ff26e9ad7e6246ab98910f801c7a4efa1a698c", + "edit_distance": 0.6060606060606061, + "f1_score": 0.936868686868687, + "meteor": 0.9329239818168141, + "precision": 0.9636363636363636, + "pred_md": "FIG. 5: (Color online) RDF obtained from MC simulations (diamond), BIMSA3 (solid line), and MSA-fit (dot dashed) at two concentrations.\n\nFIG. 5: (Color online) RDF obtained from MC simulations (diamond), BIMSA3 (solid line), and MSA-fit (dot dashed) at two concentrations.\n\nThe RDF obtained within BIMSA3 are compared with the MC and MSA-fit results in Fig. 5. Our BIMSA3 model accounts for the strong molecular peak of the CIP and provides the correct distances of minimal approach; whereas the naive MSA-fit procedure ignores the former and gives poor estimates for the latter. At larger separations, the BIMSA3 results do not reproduce the oscillations observed in the MC simulations, but the corresponding energy oscillations in the effective potentials are less than k B T . In addition, the perturbation term\n\n- [1] W. G. McMillan and J. E. Mayer, J. Chem. Phys. 13 , 276 (1945).\n- [2] J. M. G. Barthel, H. Krienke, and W. Kunz, Physical Chemistry of Electrolyte Solutions (Springer, 1998).\n- [3] L. Blum, in Theoretical Chemistry: Advances and Perspectives , edited by H. Eyring and D. Henderson (Academic Press, 1980), vol. 5, pp. 1-66.\n- [4] L. Blum and O. Bernard, J. Stat. Phys. 79 , 569 (1995).\n- [5] J.-F. Dufrˆche et al., J. Phys. Chem. B e 109 , 9873 (2005).\n- [6] P. Jungwirth and D. J. Tobias, Chem. Rev. 106 , 1259 (2006).\n- [7] W. Kunz, P. LoNostro, and B. W. Ninham, Curr. Opin. Colloid Interface Sci. 9 , 1 (2004).\n- [8] B. Hess, C. Holm, and N. van der Vegt, Phys. Rev. Lett. 96 , 147801 (2006).\n- [9] I. Kalcher and J. Dzubiella, J. Chem. Phys. 130 , 134507 (2009).\n- [10] S. Gavryushov and P. Linse, J. Phys. Chem. B 110 , 10878 (2006)\n- [11] A. P. Lyubartsev and A. Laaksonen, Phys. Rev. E 52 , 3730 (1995).\n\n4\n\nof the BIMSA3 appears to be negligible compared to the reference term for concentrations less than 1 mol l -1 . The perturbation can then be omitted to obtain a fully analytical theory, determined by the hard sphere diameters and the pair fraction given by LPT; with the free energy and the RDF given in terms of the BIMSA and MSA solutions, as described above. While the procedure we have followed uses two different approximations for the reference and perturbation terms (MSA vs BIMSA), these are known to be accurate for the systems under consideration and do not appear to be inconsistent with each other.\n\nTo conclude, we have combined MD simulations with LPT to construct simple models of electrolyte solutions which account for the molecular nature of the solvent. The final result is fully analytical and it yields the thermodynamic and structural properties of the solution, in agreement with the original molecular description. The methodology can in principle be adapted to any molecular description of the system (MD simulations involving interaction potentials accounting for polarization effects or Car-Parrinello MD simulations for example) as long as the ion-ion RDF are known. It can also be generalized to study interfaces. The method appears to be a promising approach toward the description of the specific effects of ions, especially for complex systems whose modeling requires an analytic solution.\n\nThe authors are particularly grateful to Werner Kunz for fruitful discussions.\n\n- [12] D. Horinek and R. R. Netz, Phys. Rev. Lett. 99 , 226104 (2007).\n- [13] M. Lund, P. Jungwirth, and C. E. Woodward, Phys. Rev. Lett. 100 , 258105 (2008).\n- [14] S. Van Damme et al., J. Phys. Chem. B 113 , 3105 (2009).\n- [15] J.-P. Hansen and I. R. McDonald, Theory of Simple Liquids (Academic Press, 1986).\n- [16] J. C. Rasaiah and R. M. Lynden-Bell, Philos. Trans. R. Soc. London, Ser. A 359 , 1545 (2001).\n- [17] A. P. Lyubartsev and S. Marcelja, Phys. Rev. E 65 , 041202 (2002).\n- [18] V. M. M. Lobo, Electrolyte Solutions, Data on Thermodynamic and Transport Properties , vol. I-II (Coimbra Editora, Lisbon, Portugal, 1984).\n- [19] G. Ciccotti, P. Turq, and F. Lantelme, Chem. Phys. 88 , 333 (1984).\n- [20] J.-F. Dufrˆ eche, T. O. White, and J.-P. Hansen, Mol. Phys. 101 , 1741 (2003).\n- [21] The average contact distance between a symmetric dumbbell and an infinite plane at β = 0.", + "recall": 0.9115479115479116, + "true_md": "4\n\nFIG. 5: (Color online) RDF obtained from MC simulations (diamond), BIMSA3 (solid line), and MSA-fit (dot dashed) at two concentrations.\n\nThe RDF obtained within BIMSA3 are compared with the MC and MSA-fit results in Fig. 5. Our BIMSA3 model accounts for the strong molecular peak of the CIP and provides the correct distances of minimal approach; whereas the naive MSA-fit procedure ignores the former and gives poor estimates for the latter. At larger sep- arations, the BIMSA3 results do not reproduce the os- cillations observed in the MC simulations, but the cor- responding energy oscillations in the effective potentials are less than k$_{B}$T . In addition, the perturbation term\n\nof the BIMSA3 appears to be negligible compared to the $_{reference term for concentrations less than 1 mol l}$− $^{1}$. The perturbation can then be omitted to obtain a fully ana- lytical theory, determined by the hard sphere diameters and the pair fraction given by LPT; with the free energy and the RDF given in terms of the BIMSA and MSA so- lutions, as described above. While the procedure we have followed uses two different approximations for the refer- ence and perturbation terms (MSA vs BIMSA), these are known to be accurate for the systems under consideration and do not appear to be inconsistent with each other.\n\nTo conclude, we have combined MD simulations with LPT to construct simple models of electrolyte solutions which account for the molecular nature of the solvent. The final result is fully analytical and it yields the ther- modynamic and structural properties of the solution, in agreement with the original molecular description. The methodology can in principle be adapted to any molecu- lar description of the system (MD simulations involving interaction potentials accounting for polarization effects or Car-Parrinello MD simulations for example) as long as the ion-ion RDF are known. It can also be generalized to study interfaces. The method appears to be a promis- ing approach toward the description of the specific effects of ions, especially for complex systems whose modeling requires an analytic solution.\n\nThe authors are particularly grateful to Werner Kunz for fruitful discussions.\n\n- [1] W. G. McMillan and J. E. Mayer, J. Chem. Phys. 13 , 276 (1945).\n\n- [2] J. M. G. Barthel, H. Krienke, and W. Kunz, Physical Chemistry of Electrolyte Solutions (Springer, 1998).\n\n- [3] L. Blum, in Theoretical Chemistry: Advances and Per- spectives , edited by H. Eyring and D. Henderson (Aca- demic Press, 1980), vol. 5, pp. 1–66.\n\n- [4] L. Blum and O. Bernard, J. Stat. Phys. 79 , 569 (1995).\n\n- [5] J.-F. Dufrˆeche et al., J. Phys. Chem. B 109 , 9873 (2005).\n\n- [6] P. Jungwirth and D. J. Tobias, Chem. Rev. 106 , 1259 (2006).\n\n- [7] W. Kunz, P. LoNostro, and B. W. Ninham, Curr. Opin. Colloid Interface Sci. 9 , 1 (2004).\n\n- [8] B. Hess, C. Holm, and N. van der Vegt, Phys. Rev. Lett. 96 , 147801 (2006).\n\n- [9] I. Kalcher and J. Dzubiella, J. Chem. Phys. 130 , 134507 (2009).\n\n- [10] S. Gavryushov and P. Linse, J. Phys. Chem. B 110 , 10878 (2006)\n\n- [11] A. P. Lyubartsev and A. Laaksonen, Phys. Rev. E 52 , 3730 (1995).\n\n- [12] D. Horinek and R. R. Netz, Phys. Rev. Lett. 99 , 226104 (2007).\n\n- [13] M. Lund, P. Jungwirth, and C. E. Woodward, Phys. Rev. Lett. 100 , 258105 (2008).\n\n- [14] S. Van Damme et al., J. Phys. Chem. B 113 , 3105 (2009).\n\n- [15] J.-P. Hansen and I. R. McDonald, Theory of Simple Liq- uids (Academic Press, 1986).\n\n- [16] J. C. Rasaiah and R. M. Lynden-Bell, Philos. Trans. R. Soc. London, Ser. A 359 , 1545 (2001).\n\n- [17] A. P. Lyubartsev and S. Marcelja, Phys. Rev. E 65 , 041202 (2002).\n\n- [18] V. M. M. Lobo, Electrolyte Solutions, Data on Thermo- dynamic and Transport Properties , vol. I-II (Coimbra Ed- itora, Lisbon, Portugal, 1984).\n\n- [19] G. Ciccotti, P. Turq, and F. Lantelme, Chem. Phys. 88 , 333 (1984).\n\n- [20] J.-F. Dufrˆeche, T. O. White, and J.-P. Hansen, Mol. Phys. 101 , 1741 (2003).\n\n- [21] The average contact distance between a symmetric dumbbell and an infinite plane at β = 0." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.12547919959836937, + "doc_id": "2a8838505424e4ce337431021ec9d3294b71fc95de5b52b5f1dba3d59ad937ba", + "edit_distance": 0.851063829787234, + "f1_score": 0.7774798927613942, + "meteor": 0.25343723792926004, + "precision": 0.9539473684210527, + "pred_md": "6. The exact R ij symmetry reads\n\n\n\nwith\n\n\n\n7. The integrated Ward identity is given by\n\n\n\nHere we should add that due to the presence of the sources T ai µ and R ai µ , the ghost Ward identity [41] is broken, and we are unable to restore this identity. For the standard Yang-Mills theory, this identity has the following form\n\n\n\nwith\n\n\n\nand\n\n\n\na linear breaking. However, it shall turn out that this is not a problem for the renormalization procedure being undertaken.\n\n## 3. The counterterm\n\nThe next step in the algebraic renormalization is to translate all these symmetries into constraints on the counterterm Σ c GZ , which is an integrated polynomial in the fields and sources of dimension four and with ghost number zero. The classical action Σ ' GZ changes under quantum corrections according to\n\n\n\nwhereby h is the perturbation parameter. Demanding that the perturbed action (Σ ' GZ + Σ h c GZ ) fulfills the same set of Ward identities obeyed by Σ ' GZ , see [41], it follows that the counterterm Σ c GZ is constrained by the following identities.\n\n## 1. The linearized Slavnov-Taylor identity yields\n\n\n\n11\n\nwith B the nilpotent linearized Slavnov-Taylor operator,\n\n\n\nand\n\n\n\n2. The U f ( ) invariance reads\n\n\n\n3. The Landau gauge condition\n\n\n\n4. The antighost equation\n\n\n\n5. The linearly broken local constraints yield\n\n\n\n\n\n6. The exact R ij symmetry reads\n\n\n\nwith R ij given in (A19).\n\n7. Finally, the integrated Ward identity becomes\n\n\n\nNow we can write down the most general counterterm Σ c GZ of d = 4, which obeys the linearized Slavnov-Taylor", + "recall": 0.6561085972850679, + "true_md": "with B the nilpotent linearized Slavnov-Taylor op- erator,\n\nHere we should add that due to the presence of the sources T ai µ and R ai µ , the ghost Ward identity [41] is bro- ken, and we are unable to restore this identity. For the standard Yang-Mills theory, this identity has the follow- ing form\n\n( ) a linear breaking. However, it shall turn out that this is not a problem for the renormalization procedure being undertaken.\n\nThe next step in the algebraic renormalization is to translate all these symmetries into constraints on the counterterm Σ c $_{GZ}$, which is an integrated polynomial in the fields and sources of dimension four and with ghost number zero. The classical action Σ ′ GZ changes under quantum corrections according to\n\nwhereby h is the perturbation parameter. Demanding that the perturbed action (Σ $^{′}$$\\_{GZ}$+ h Σ c $\\_{GZ}$) fulfills the same set of Ward identities obeyed by Σ $^{′}$$_{GZ}$, see [41], it follows that the counterterm Σ c GZ is constrained by the following identities.\n\nNow we can write down the most general counterterm Σ c GZ of d = 4, which obeys the linearized Slavnov-Taylor\n\nand\n\nwith\n\n11\n\n$$B = ∫ d $^{4}$x ( δ Σ ′ GZ δK a µ δ δA a µ + δ Σ ′ GZ δA a µ δ δK a µ + δ Σ ′ GZ δL a δ δc a + δ Σ ′ GZ δc a δ δL a + b a δ δc a + ϕ a i δ δω a i + ω a i δ δϕ a i + M ai µ δ δU ai µ + N ai µ δ δV ai µ + R ai µ δ δT ai µ ) , (A26)$$\n\n$$R$_{ij}$ = ∫ d $^{4}$x ( ϕ a i δ δω a j − ω a j δ δϕ a i + V ai µ δ δN aj µ − U aj µ δ δM ai µ + T ai µ δ δR aj µ ) . (A19)$$\n\n$$∫ d $^{4}$x ( c a δ Σ ′ GZ δω a i + ω a i δ Σ ′ GZ δc a + U ai µ δ Σ ′ GZ δK a µ ) = 0 . (A20)$$\n\n$$B 2 = 0 . (A27)$$\n\n$$U$_{ij}$ Σ c GZ = 0 . (A28)$$\n\n$$δ Σ c GZ δb a = 0 . (A29)$$\n\n$$δ Σ c GZ δc a + ∂$_{µ}$ δ Σ c GZ δK a µ = 0 . (A30)$$\n\n$$G $^{a}$( S$_{YM}$ + S$_{gf}$ ) = Δ a $_{cl}$, (A21)$$\n\n$$G a = ∫ d $^{d}$x ( δ δc a + gf $^{abc}$cb δ δb c ) , (A22)$$\n\n$$Δ a cl = g ∫ d $^{4}$xf abc ( K b $_{µ}$A c µ − L $^{b}$cc ) , (A23) a linear breaking. However, it shall turn out that this is$$\n\n$$( δ δϕ a i + ∂$_{µ}$ δ δM ai µ + ∂$_{µ}$ δ δM ai µ + gf$_{abc}$T bi µ δ δK ci µ ) Σ c GZ = 0 , (A31)$$\n\nwith\n\nand\n\n$$( δ δω a i + ∂$_{µ}$ δ δN ai µ − gf $^{abc}$ωb i δ δb c ) Σ c GZ = 0 . (A32)$$\n\n$$R$_{ij}$ Σ c GZ = 0 , (A33)$$\n\n$$∫ d $^{4}$x ( c a δ Σ c GZ δω a i + ω a i δ Σ c GZ δc a + U ai µ δ Σ c GZ δK a µ ) = 0 . (A34)$$\n\n$$Σ ′ GZ → Σ ′ GZ + h Σ c $_{GZ}$, (A24)$$\n\n$$B Σ c GZ = 0 , (A25)$$\n\nwith R$_{ij}$ given in (A19).\n\n- 6. The exact R$_{ij}$ symmetry reads\n\n- 7. Finally, the integrated Ward identity becomes\n\n- 1. The linearized Slavnov-Taylor identity yields\n\n- 5. The linearly broken local constraints yield\n\n- 4. The antighost equation\n\n- 3. The Landau gauge condition\n\n- 2. The U ( f ) invariance reads\n\n- 7. The integrated Ward identity is given by\n\n## 3. The counterterm\n\n- 6. The exact R$_{ij}$ symmetry reads\n\n$$R$_{ij}$ Σ ′ GZ = 0 , (A18)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.511999834636388, + "doc_id": "348b2aa98f36e4c03df26fff4314c4a51139639235a34c626fd97496f6bc89fd", + "edit_distance": 0.6213450292397661, + "f1_score": 0.9226006191950465, + "meteor": 0.7295535581014821, + "precision": 0.9612903225806452, + "pred_md": "FIG. 15: The quantity ˜ b 1 ,s ( R,k ) computed from uniform random noise (61) using a circular cylinder with R = 2 cm.\n\nFIG. 15: The quantity ˜ b 1 ,s ( R,k ) computed from uniform random noise (61) using a circular cylinder with R = 2 cm.\n\nFIG. 16: The kernel k m -1 /I ' m ( kR ) as a function of k for the case m = 1 and R = 2 cm.\n\nFIG. 16: The kernel k m -1 /I ' m ( kR ) as a function of k for the case m = 1 and R = 2 cm.\n\nFIG. 17: The product k m -1 ˜ b m,s ( R,k /I ) ' m appearing in (22), as computed from uniform random noise (61) with m = 1 and R = 2 cm.\n\nFIG. 17: The product k m -1 ˜ b m,s ( R,k /I ) ' m appearing in (22), as computed from uniform random noise (61) with m = 1 and R = 2 cm.\n\nk\n\n14\n\nFIG. 18: The kernels k m r β m ( k / ) Se ( ' r U, q ) for the case m = 1 and r = 1 3 5 7 9 11, as a function of , , , , , k , with q and k related by (40c).\n\nFIG. 18: The kernels k m r β m ( k / ) Se ( ' r U, q ) for the case m = 1 and r = 1 3 5 7 9 11, as a function of , , , , , k , with q and k related by (40c).\n\nFIG. 19: The function C [6] 1 ,c as computed from a mesh containing random noise (61) at each mesh point. Damping of this noise illustrates the effect of smoothing. (Solid line) Result obtained using a circular cylinder with R = 2 cm. (Dashed line) Result obtained using an elliptical cylinder with semiminor axis of 2 cm and a semimajor axis of 4 cm.\n\nFIG. 19: The function C [6] 1 ,c as computed from a mesh containing random noise (61) at each mesh point. Damping of this noise illustrates the effect of smoothing. (Solid line) Result obtained using a circular cylinder with R = 2 cm. (Dashed line) Result obtained using an elliptical cylinder with semiminor axis of 2 cm and a semimajor axis of 4 cm.\n\n3-dimensional finite element modeling code OPERA-3d for the field components B x , B y , and B z on a mesh of spacing 0 4 . × 0 2 . × 0 2 cm in a volume 10 4 . . × 5 2 . × 480 cm, extending beyond the fringe-field region. The field components are provided to a precision of 0.1 G relative to a peak field of 16.7 kG. An elliptic cylinder with semimajor axis 4 4 cm and semiminor axis 2 4 cm was . . placed in the domain of the data, and the field on the elliptic cylinder boundary was constructed using bicubic interpolation. See Figs. 3 and 5.\n\nThe interior field was computed using the on-axis gradients through terms of degree 6 in x, y over the domain of the original data. This solution for the interior field was then compared to the original data at each grid point. Fig. 21 displays the vertical field B y off-axis at", + "recall": 0.8869047619047619, + "true_md": "FIG. 18: The kernels k $^{m}$βr$_{m}$( k ) / Se $^{′}$$\\_{r}$( U, q ) for the case m = 1 and r = 1 , 3 , 5 , 7 , 9 , 11, as a function of k , with q and k related by (40c).\n\nFIG. 15: The quantity ˜ b$_{1}$$\\_{,s}$ ( R, k ) computed from uniform random noise (61) using a circular cylinder with R = 2 cm.\n\nFIG. 19: The function C [6] 1 ,c as computed from a mesh contain- ing random noise (61) at each mesh point. Damping of this noise illustrates the effect of smoothing. (Solid line) Result obtained using a circular cylinder with R = 2 cm. (Dashed line) Result obtained using an elliptical cylinder with semimi- nor axis of 2 cm and a semimajor axis of 4 cm.\n\nFIG. 16: The kernel k m − $^{1}$/I ′ $_{m}$( kR ) as a function of k for the case m = 1 and R = 2 cm.\n\nFIG. 17: The product k m − 1 ˜ b$_{m,s}$ ( R, k ) /I ′ m appearing in (22), as computed from uniform random noise (61) with m = 1 and R = 2 cm.\n\n3-dimensional finite element modeling code OPERA-3d for the field components B$_{x}$ , B$_{y}$ , and B$_{z}$ on a mesh of spacing 0 . 4 × 0 . 2 × 0 . 2 cm in a volume 10 . 4 × 5 . 2 × 480 cm, extending beyond the fringe-field region. The field components are provided to a precision of 0.1 G rela- tive to a peak field of 16.7 kG. An elliptic cylinder with semimajor axis 4 . 4 cm and semiminor axis 2 . 4 cm was placed in the domain of the data, and the field on the elliptic cylinder boundary was constructed using bicubic interpolation. See Figs. 3 and 5.\n\nThe interior field was computed using the on-axis gra- dients through terms of degree 6 in x, y over the do- main of the original data. This solution for the interior field was then compared to the original data at each grid point. Fig. 21 displays the vertical field B$_{y}$ off-axis at\n\n14" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.30108326109055417, + "doc_id": "2b14f68ad4c84613041b6c33cc3355d4142f384987787fb156a4debb1c34de8d", + "edit_distance": 0.6862601028655401, + "f1_score": 0.8385899814471243, + "meteor": 0.3810325441434254, + "precision": 0.9338842975206612, + "pred_md": "dephasing channels are noisy for quantum information. For the dephasing channel E under consideration the preferential orthonormal basis is {| 0 〉 , | 1 〉} ⊗ M ∈ H ⊗ M S , for M parallel uses of the channel, i.e., M classical bits can be transmitted noiselessly over M copies of the channel.\n\n## B. Quantum Capacity\n\nConsider the communication system shown in Fig. 1. Quantum information is encoded into the system spin via a unitary transformation. The system spin is then transmitted to the receiver, over the spin-star channel. In general, one must perform the maximization of the coherent information I c over the n -fold tensor product Hilbert space H ⊗ n S . However, Devetak and Shor recently established dephasing channels as degradable channels [51]. Therefore the single channel-use formula Q = Q 1 applies, and the maximization as in Eq. (5) over the larger Hilbert space is avoided. Moreover, Arrigo et al. [28] showed that for dephasing channels the coherent information I c is maximized by separable input states diagonalized in the reference basis. Therefore, we set the initial state of the system spin as\n\n\n\nInitially, the system spin ρ S (0) is coupled to a reference system R such that the total system SR is pure. The reference system does not undergo any dynamical evolution; it is introduced as a mathematical device to purify the initial state of the system spin. The joint initial state of the total system SR is given by the maximally entangled state\n\n\n\nDephasing channels are unital channels, i.e., E ( I ) = I , therefore the state of system spin is unaltered after interacting with the Ising bath\n\n\n\nHowever, the total system SR decoheres as a result of the interaction and is mapped to a mixed state, whose diagonal elements ('populations') are unaffected, but whose off-diagonal elements ('coherences') are:\n\n\n\nThe quantum capacity Q of the dephasing channel is now obtained by using Eq. (5), making use of the single channel-use\n\n4\n\nformula Q = Q 1 and the fact that the coherent information is maximized by our chosen initial state ρ S (0) :\n\n\n\nThis yields:\n\n\n\nwhere χ 1 = χ 2 = 0 and\n\n\n\nare the eigenvalues of the state ρ SR ( ) t , and where\n\n\n\nNext we calculate the entanglement-assisted capacities of the dephasing channel.\n\n## C. Entanglement-Assisted Capacities\n\nThe communication protocol of entanglement-assisted capacities can also be described using Fig. 1. Prior to the communication the sender and receiver share a maximally entangled state given by Eq. (21). The first qubit of the entangled pair belongs to the sender: ρ S (0) = Tr R ( Φ | 〉〈 Φ ) = | I/ 2 , and interacts with the bath. Unlike the quantum capacity protocol, the second qubit is not a mathematical device and corresponds to the qubit in possession of the receiver prior to the communication. Therefore, it is again considered to have been transmitted over the identity channel.\n\nNow note that in our case, since S ρ ( S ) = 1 and Q = Q 1 , it follows from Eqs. (5) and (7) that the quantum capacity is related to the entanglement-assisted classical capacity via the simple formula\n\n\n\nwhile the entanglement-assisted quantum capacity is\n\n\n\nNext, we are interested in the classical capacity assisted by limited entanglement. Consider the situation when instead of", + "recall": 0.7609427609427609, + "true_md": "4\n\nformula Q = Q$_{1}$ and the fact that the coherent information is maximized by our chosen initial state ρ$_{S}$ (0) :\n\ndephasing channels are noisy for quantum information. For the dephasing channel E under consideration the preferential orthonormal basis is {| 0 〉 , | 1 〉} ⊗ M ∈ H ⊗ M S , for M parallel uses of the channel, i.e., M classical bits can be transmitted noiselessly over M copies of the channel.\n\n$$Q = Q$_{1}$ = max ρ$_{S}$ ∈H$_{S}$ S [ E ( ρ$_{S}$ )] − S [( E ⊗ I )( | Φ 〉〈 Φ | )] = S [ E ( I/ 2)] − S [( E ⊗ I )( 1 √ 2 ( | 00 〉 + | 11 〉 ) 1 √ 2 ( 〈 00 | + 〈 11 | ))] = S [ I/ 2] − S [ ρ$_{SR}$ ( t )] . (24)$$\n\n$$Q ( t ) = 1 + 4 ∑ k =1 χ$_{k}$ log$_{2}$ χ$_{k}$, (25)$$\n\n$$χ$_{3}$ = 1 2 [1 + 1 Z | Π$_{N}$ | ] , χ$_{4}$ = 1 2 [1 − 1 Z | Π$_{N}$ | ] ,$$\n\nThis yields:\n\nwhere χ$_{1}$ = χ$_{2}$ = 0 and\n\n## B. Quantum Capacity\n\nConsider the communication system shown in Fig. 1. Quantum information is encoded into the system spin via a unitary transformation. The system spin is then transmitted to the receiver, over the spin-star channel. In general, one must perform the maximization of the coherent information I$_{c}$ over the n -fold tensor product Hilbert space H ⊗ n S . However, Devetak and Shor recently established dephasing channels as degradable channels [51]. Therefore the single channel-use formula Q = Q$_{1}$ applies, and the maximization as in Eq. (5) over the larger Hilbert space is avoided. Moreover, Arrigo et al. [28] showed that for dephasing channels the coherent information I$_{c}$ is maximized by separable input states diag- onalized in the reference basis. Therefore, we set the initial state of the system spin as\n\nare the eigenvalues of the state ρ$_{SR}$ ( t ) , and where\n\nInitially, the system spin ρ$_{S}$ (0) is coupled to a reference sys- tem R such that the total system SR is pure. The reference system does not undergo any dynamical evolution; it is intro- duced as a mathematical device to purify the initial state of the system spin. The joint initial state of the total system SR is given by the maximally entangled state\n\n$$Π$_{N}$( t ) = 2 $^{N}$− 1 ∑ i =0 e − ∑ N n $_{=1}$( 1 $_{2}$β Ω$_{n}$+2 iαtg$_{n}$ )( − 1) i $^{n}$. (26)$$\n\n$$ρ$_{S}$ (0) = 1 2 ( | 0 〉〈 0 | + | 1 〉〈 1 | ) = I 2 . (20)$$\n\n$$| Φ 〉 = 1 √ 2 ( | 00 〉 + | 11 〉 ) . (21)$$\n\nNext we calculate the entanglement-assisted capacities of the dephasing channel.\n\nThe communication protocol of entanglement-assisted ca- pacities can also be described using Fig. 1. Prior to the com- munication the sender and receiver share a maximally entan- gled state given by Eq. (21). The first qubit of the entangled pair belongs to the sender: ρ$_{S}$ (0) = Tr$_{R}$( | Φ 〉〈 Φ | ) = I/ 2 , and interacts with the bath. Unlike the quantum capacity proto- col, the second qubit is not a mathematical device and corre- sponds to the qubit in possession of the receiver prior to the communication. Therefore, it is again considered to have been transmitted over the identity channel.\n\nDephasing channels are unital channels, i.e., E ( I ) = I , there- fore the state of system spin is unaltered after interacting with the Ising bath\n\nHowever, the total system SR decoheres as a result of the in- teraction and is mapped to a mixed state, whose diagonal ele- ments (“populations”) are unaffected, but whose off-diagonal elements (“coherences”) are:\n\nNow note that in our case, since S ( ρ$_{S}$ ) = 1 and Q = Q$_{1}$ , it follows from Eqs. (5) and (7) that the quantum capacity is related to the entanglement-assisted classical capacity via the simple formula\n\n## C. Entanglement-Assisted Capacities\n\n$$ρ$_{S}$ ( t ) = ρ$_{S}$ (0) = I 2 . (22)$$\n\n$$C$_{E}$ = 1 + Q = 2 + 4 ∑ i =1 χ$_{i}$ log$_{2}$ χ$_{i}$, (27)$$\n\n$$Q$_{E}$ = C$_{E}$ 2 = 1 + 1 2 4 ∑ i =1 χ$_{i}$ log$_{2}$ χ$_{i}$. (28)$$\n\n$$ρ$_{SR}$ ( t ) = ( E ⊗ I )( | Φ 〉〈 Φ | ) = ∑ i,j ( K$_{ij}$ ⊗ I )( | Φ 〉〈 Φ | )( K † ij ⊗ I ) , = 1 2 ( | 00 〉〈 00 | + | 11 〉〈 11 | ) + 1 2 ∑ i λ$_{i}$ ( e − 2 iαt$_{˜}$ $^{E$_{i}$}$| 00 〉〈 11 | + e +2 iαt$_{˜}$ $^{E$_{i}$}$| 11 〉〈 00 | ) . (23)$$\n\nwhile the entanglement-assisted quantum capacity is\n\nNext, we are interested in the classical capacity assisted by limited entanglement. Consider the situation when instead of\n\nThe quantum capacity Q of the dephasing channel is now ob- tained by using Eq. (5), making use of the single channel-use" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8478534362356027, + "doc_id": "6f7a40c3161a4c11a95fe377ffbbbcc048cf23bff4dc9bfcc84d7f772fbe06ed", + "edit_distance": 0.1106679960119641, + "f1_score": 0.8755129958960329, + "meteor": 0.9184029555934565, + "precision": 0.9169054441260746, + "pred_md": "arXiv:1001.0964v1 [quant-ph] 6 Jan 2010\n\n## Spectral singularities in a non-Hermitian Friedrichs-Fano-Anderson model\n\nStefano Longhi\n\nDipartimento di Fisica and Istituto di Fotonica e Nanotecnologie del CNR,\n\nPolitecnico di Milano, Piazza L. da Vinci 32, I-20133 Milan, Italy\n\nSpectral singularities are predicted to occur in a non-Hermitian extension of the Friedrichs-FanoAnderson model describing the decay of a discrete state | a 〉 coupled to a continuum of modes. A physical realization of the model, based on electronic or photonic transport in a semi-infinite tightbinding lattice with an imaginary impurity site at the lattice boundary, is proposed. The occurrence of the spectral singularities is shown to correspond either to a diverging reflection probability (for an amplifying impurity) or to a vanishing reflection probability (for an absorbing impurity) from the lattice boundary. In the former case, the spectral singularity of the resolvent is also responsible for the non-decay of state | a 〉 into the continuum, in spite of the absence of bound states.\n\nPACS numbers: 73.23.Ad , 03.65.Nk , 73.23.-b, 42.25.Bs\n\n## I. INTRODUCTION.\n\nOver the last decade, a great attention has been devoted to investigate the properties of non-Hermitian physical systems. In particular, it has been shown that the framework of quantum mechanics can be extended by relaxing the common constraint of Hermiticity for the underlying Hamiltonian H (see, for instance, [1-3] and references therein), provided that H has a real energy spectrum and is diagonalizable. In this case, after a proper change of the inner product (metric) of the Hilbert space, the non-Hermitian Hamiltonian H may be used to define a unitary quantum system [3]. Examples of such systems include non-Hermitian Hamiltonians with parity-time ( PT ) symmetry [4], in which the reality of the energy spectrum (bound as well as radiation states) below a symmetry-breaking transition has been proved for several complex potentials [1]. Unfortunately, non-Hermitian Hamiltonians possessing a real-valued energy spectrum may fail to be diagonalizable because of the occurrence of exceptional points in the point spectrum [5, 6], or of spectral singularities in the continuous part of the energy spectrum [7-9]. Exceptional points refer to the coalescence of two or more discrete eigenvalues together with their eigenvectors; their physical relevance has been investigated in several works, and different physical realizations have been proposed and experimentally demonstrated [10]. On the other hand, spectral singularities refer to divergences of the resolvent operator G z ( ) = ( z -H ) -1 belonging to the continuous spectrum of H , i.e. which do not correspond to square-integrable eigenfunctions. As opposed to exceptional points, spectral singularities have received less attention from physicists and have been mainly viewed as a curious mathematical property of certain non-Hermitian operators [79]. The physical meaning and relevance of spectral singularities have been highlighted solely quite recently, notably by A. Mostafazadeh[11] (see also [8, 9, 12, 13]) in the framework of wave scattering by complex potentials [14]. Mostafazadeh showed that spectral singularities of a non-Hermitian Hamiltonian with a complex potential\n\ncorrespond to divergences of reflection and transmission coefficients of scattered states, i.e. to resonances with vanishing spectral width. He also investigated in details the appearance of spectral singularities in an electromagnetic realization of a non-Hermitian Hamiltonian with PT symmetry based on a waveguide filled by an atomic gas [11, 15], following an earlier proposal by Ruschhaupt and coworkers [16].\n\nIt is the aim of this work to investigate the onset of spectral singularities in a non-Hermitian extension of the famous Friedrichs-Fano-Anderson (FFA) model [1719], which generally describes the decay of a discrete state coupled to a continuum of modes. The FFA model is encountered in different areas of physics, ranging from atomic physics [20-22] to quantum electrodynamics [23, 24] and condensed-matter physics [25-29]. The FFA model has been studied in the quantum theory of non-integrable systems [30] and used to describe unstable quantum systems, quantum mechanical decay and quantum Zeno dynamics [31, 32]. Simple models of single-particle electronic or photonic transport in tightbinding lattices can be also described by means of FFA Hamiltonians [25-29, 33-38]. In this work it is shown in particular that spectral singularities can be observed in photonic or electronic transport in semi-infinite tightbinding lattices with an imaginary impurity site at the lattice boundary, leading to either a diverging or a vanishing wave reflection from the lattice boundary.\n\nThe paper is organized as follows. In Sec.II we introduce a non-Hermitian extension of the FFA model, and derive the conditions for the appearance of spectral singularities. In particular, it is shown by direct calculations that the appearance of divergences of the resolvent operator G z ( ) on the branch cut correspond to the nondiagonalizability of the FFA Hamiltonian. In Sec.III we present an example of non-Hermitian FFA model showing spectral singularities, which provides a simple model of electron or photonic transport in a semi-infinite tightbinding lattice with a boundary impurity site. It is shown that spectral singularities in this model correspond to either a vanishing or a diverging reflection probability from the lattice boundary. Finally, in Sec.IV the main conclu-", + "recall": 0.837696335078534, + "true_md": "# Spectral singularities in a non-Hermitian Friedrichs-Fano-Anderson model\n\nStefano Longhi\n\nDipartimento di Fisica and Istituto di Fotonica e Nanotecnologie del CNR, Politecnico di Milano, Piazza L. da Vinci 32, I-20133 Milan, Italy\n\nSpectral singularities are predicted to occur in a non-Hermitian extension of the Friedrichs-Fano- Anderson model describing the decay of a discrete state | a 〉 coupled to a continuum of modes. A physical realization of the model, based on electronic or photonic transport in a semi-infinite tight- binding lattice with an imaginary impurity site at the lattice boundary, is proposed. The occurrence of the spectral singularities is shown to correspond either to a diverging reflection probability (for an amplifying impurity) or to a vanishing reflection probability (for an absorbing impurity) from the lattice boundary. In the former case, the spectral singularity of the resolvent is also responsible for the non-decay of state | a 〉 into the continuum, in spite of the absence of bound states.\n\nPACS numbers: 73.23.Ad , 03.65.Nk , 73.23.-b, 42.25.Bs\n\nOver the last decade, a great attention has been de- voted to investigate the properties of non-Hermitian physical systems. In particular, it has been shown that the framework of quantum mechanics can be extended by relaxing the common constraint of Hermiticity for the underlying Hamiltonian H (see, for instance, [1–3] and references therein), provided that H has a real en- ergy spectrum and is diagonalizable. In this case, af- ter a proper change of the inner product (metric) of the Hilbert space, the non-Hermitian Hamiltonian H may be used to define a unitary quantum system [3]. Exam- ples of such systems include non-Hermitian Hamiltonians with parity-time ( PT ) symmetry [4], in which the real- ity of the energy spectrum (bound as well as radiation states) below a symmetry-breaking transition has been proved for several complex potentials [1]. Unfortunately, non-Hermitian Hamiltonians possessing a real-valued en- ergy spectrum may fail to be diagonalizable because of the occurrence of exceptional points in the point spec- trum [5, 6], or of spectral singularities in the continuous part of the energy spectrum [7–9]. Exceptional points refer to the coalescence of two or more discrete eigenval- ues together with their eigenvectors; their physical rele- vance has been investigated in several works, and differ- ent physical realizations have been proposed and experi- mentally demonstrated [10]. On the other hand, spectral singularities refer to divergences of the resolvent operator G ( z ) = ( z − H ) − 1 belonging to the continuous spectrum of H , i.e. which do not correspond to square-integrable eigenfunctions. As opposed to exceptional points, spec- tral singularities have received less attention from physi- cists and have been mainly viewed as a curious mathe- matical property of certain non-Hermitian operators [7– 9]. The physical meaning and relevance of spectral sin- gularities have been highlighted solely quite recently, no- tably by A. Mostafazadeh[11] (see also [8, 9, 12, 13]) in the framework of wave scattering by complex potentials [14]. Mostafazadeh showed that spectral singularities of a non-Hermitian Hamiltonian with a complex potential\n\ncorrespond to divergences of reflection and transmission coefficients of scattered states, i.e. to resonances with vanishing spectral width. He also investigated in details the appearance of spectral singularities in an electromag- netic realization of a non-Hermitian Hamiltonian with PT symmetry based on a waveguide filled by an atomic gas [11, 15], following an earlier proposal by Ruschhaupt and coworkers [16].\n\nIt is the aim of this work to investigate the onset of spectral singularities in a non-Hermitian extension of the famous Friedrichs-Fano-Anderson (FFA) model [17– 19], which generally describes the decay of a discrete state coupled to a continuum of modes. The FFA model is encountered in different areas of physics, rang- ing from atomic physics [20–22] to quantum electrody- namics [23, 24] and condensed-matter physics [25–29]. The FFA model has been studied in the quantum the- ory of non-integrable systems [30] and used to describe unstable quantum systems, quantum mechanical decay and quantum Zeno dynamics [31, 32]. Simple models of single-particle electronic or photonic transport in tight- binding lattices can be also described by means of FFA Hamiltonians [25–29, 33–38]. In this work it is shown in particular that spectral singularities can be observed in photonic or electronic transport in semi-infinite tight- binding lattices with an imaginary impurity site at the lattice boundary, leading to either a diverging or a van- ishing wave reflection from the lattice boundary.\n\nThe paper is organized as follows. In Sec.II we intro- duce a non-Hermitian extension of the FFA model, and derive the conditions for the appearance of spectral sin- gularities. In particular, it is shown by direct calcula- tions that the appearance of divergences of the resolvent operator G ( z ) on the branch cut correspond to the non- diagonalizability of the FFA Hamiltonian. In Sec.III we present an example of non-Hermitian FFA model show- ing spectral singularities, which provides a simple model of electron or photonic transport in a semi-infinite tight- binding lattice with a boundary impurity site. It is shown that spectral singularities in this model correspond to ei- ther a vanishing or a diverging reflection probability from the lattice boundary. Finally, in Sec.IV the main conclu-\n\narXiv:1001.0964v1 [quant-ph] 6 Jan 2010\n\n## I. INTRODUCTION." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.09128628925699263, + "doc_id": "35a30a0b7113d4ce0b38ee2dc549d6b1925295b4ac82ea6e60b2da459bc57310", + "edit_distance": 0.8481764206955047, + "f1_score": 0.9158415841584159, + "meteor": 0.26538055977957703, + "precision": 0.9487179487179487, + "pred_md": "form\n\n\n\nwhere J ' is the derivative of Heisenberg coupling J cluster between two spins /lscript and m with respect to their distance r /lscriptm , J ' = d J cluster / d r /lscriptm ; Q E 1 2 , are the generalized coordinates of these two modes; and the functions f E 1 2 , are\n\n\n\nAccording to TABLE I we have f E 1 = -( √ 3 / 2) τ x and f E 2 = ( √ 3 2) / τ y . Then the coupling becomes\n\n\n\nThe spin-lattice(SL) Hamiltonian on a single cluster j is [equation (1.8) in Ref. 35 ],\n\n\n\nwhere k > 0 is the elastic constant for these phonon modes, J ' is the spin-lattice coupling constant, Q E 1 j and Q E 2 j are the generalized coordinates of the Q E 1 and Q E 2 distortion modes of cluster j , H cluster j is (2). As already noted in Ref. 35 , this model does not really break the pseudo-spin rotation symmetry of a single cluster.\n\nNow we put two clusters j and k together, and include a perturbation λH perturbation to the optical phonon Hamiltonian,\n\n\n\nwhere λ (in fact λ/k ) is the expansion parameter.\n\nConsider the perturbation H perturbation = Q E 1 j · Q E 1 k , which means a coupling between the Q E 1 distortion modes of the two tetrahedra. Integrate out the optical phonons, at lowest non-trivial order, it produces a term (3 J ' 2 λ / ) (4 k 2 ) τ x j · τ x k . This can be seen by minimizing separately the two cluster Hamiltonians with respect to Q E 1 , which gives Q E 1 = ( √ 3 J ' ) / (2 k τ ) x , then plug this into the perturbation term. Thus we have produced the J x term in the Kitaev model with J x = -(3 J ' 2 λ / ) (4 k 2 ).\n\nThe τ z j · τ z k coupling is more difficult to get. We treat it as -τ x j τ y j · τ x k τ y k . By the above reasoning, we need an anharmonic coupling H perturbation = Q E 1 j Q E 2 j · Q E 1 k Q E 2 k . It will produce at lowest non-trivial order (9 J ' 4 λ / ) (16 k 4 ) τ x j τ y j · τ x k τ y k . Thus we have J z = (9 J ' 4 λ / ) (16 k 4 ).\n\nSimilarly the perturbation H perturbation = Q E 2 j · Q E 2 k will generate (3 J ' 2 λ / ) (4 k 2 ) τ y j · τ y k at lowest non-trivial order. So we can make J y = -(3 J ' 2 λ / ) (4 k 2 ).\n\nFinally we have made up a spin-lattice model H SL , which involves only S /lscript · S m interaction for physical spins,\n\n\n\nwhere Q E 1 j is the generalized coordinate for the Q E 1 mode on cluster j , and Q E 1 k , Q E 2 j , Q E 2 k are similarly defined; λ x,y = -(4 J x,y k 2 ) / (3 J ' 2 ) and λ z = (16 J k z 4 ) / (9 J ' 4 ); the single cluster spin-lattice Hamiltonian H cluster , SL is (13).\n\nCollect the results above we have the spin-lattice Hamiltonian H SL explicitly written as,\n\n\n\nThe single cluster spin-lattice Hamiltonian [first three lines in (14)] is quite natural. However we need some\n\nharmonic(on x - and y -links of honeycomb lattice) and anharmonic coupling (on z -links) between optical phonon\n\n6", + "recall": 0.8851674641148325, + "true_md": "6\n\nform\n\nwhere J ′ is the derivative of Heisenberg coupling J$_{cluster}$ between two spins ℓ and m with respect to their distance r$_{ℓm}$ , J ′ = d J$_{cluster}$/ d r$_{ℓm}$ ; Q E 1 , 2 are the generalized coor- dinates of these two modes; and the functions f E 1 , 2 are\n\nwhere λ (in fact λ/k ) is the expansion parameter.\n\nConsider the perturbation H$_{perturbation}$ = Q E 1 j · Q E 1 $_{k}$, which means a coupling between the Q E 1 distortion modes of the two tetrahedra. Integrate out the optical phonons, at lowest non-trivial order, it produces a term (3 J $^{$^{′}$2}$λ ) / (4 k $^{2}$) τ x j · τ x $_{k}$. This can be seen by minimizing separately the two cluster Hamiltonians with respect to Q E 1 , which gives Q E 1 $_{= (}$√$_{3}$$\\_{J}$ $^{′}$) / (2 k ) τ $^{x}$, then plug this into the perturbation term. Thus we have produced the J$\\_{x}$ term in the Kitaev model with J$\\_{x}$ = − (3 J $^{$^{′}$2}$λ ) / (4 k $^{2}$). Similarly the perturbation H$\\_{perturbation}$ = Q E · Q E\n\n− Similarly the perturbation H$_{perturbation}$ = Q E 2 j · Q E 2 k will generate (3 J $^{$^{′}$2}$λ ) / (4 k $^{2}$) τ y j · τ y k at lowest non-trivial order. So we can make J$_{y}$ = − (3 J $^{$^{′}$2}$λ ) / (4 k $^{2}$). The τ z · τ z coupling is more difficult to get. We\n\n− The τ z j · τ z k coupling is more difficult to get. We treat it as − τ x j τ y j · τ x $_{k}$τ y $_{k}$. By the above reasoning, we need an anharmonic coupling H$_{perturbation}$ = Q E 1 $_{j}$Q E 2 j · Q E 1 $_{k}$Q E 2 $_{k}$. It will produce at lowest non-trivial or- der (9 J $^{$^{′}$4}$λ ) / (16 k $^{4}$) τ x j τ y j · τ x $_{k}$τ y $_{k}$. Thus we have J$_{z}$ = (9 J $^{$^{′}$4}$λ ) / (16 k $^{4}$).\n\nFinally we have made up a spin-lattice model H$_{SL}$ , which involves only S$_{ℓ}$ · S$_{m}$ interaction for physical spins,\n\n$$J $^{′}$( Q E 1 f E 1 + Q E 2 f E 2 )$$\n\n$$$_{(}$√$_{3}$$_{/}$$_{2)}$$_{J}$ $^{′}$( − Q E 1 τ x + Q E 2 τ $^{y}$) (12)$$\n\n− · − · According to TABLE I we have f E 1 = − $_{(}$√$_{3}$$\\_{/}$$_{2)}$$\\_{τ}$ x and f E 2 $\\_{= (}$√$\\_{3}$$_{/}$$\\_{2)}$$_{τ}$ $^{y}$. Then the coupling becomes\n\n$$f E 2 = (1 / 2)( S$_{2}$ · S$_{4}$ + S$_{1}$ · S$_{3}$ − S$_{1}$ · S$_{4}$ − S$_{2}$ · S$_{3}$ ) , f E 1 = √ 1 / 12( S$_{1}$ · S$_{4}$ + S$_{2}$ · S$_{3}$ + S$_{2}$ · S$_{4}$ + S$_{1}$ · S$_{3}$ − 2 S$_{1}$ · S$_{2}$ − 2 S$_{3}$ · S$_{4}$ ) . $_{(}$√$_{3}$$_{/}$$_{2)}$$_{τ}$$$\n\n$$H$_{cluster}$ j, SL = H$_{cluster}$ j + k 2 ( Q E 1 $_{j}$) 2 + k 2 ( Q E 2 $_{j}$) 2 − √$_{3}$ 2 J $^{′}$( Q E 1 $_{j}$τ x j − Q E 2 $_{j}$τ y j ) , (13)$$\n\n$$H$_{SL}$ = ∑ cluster H$_{cluster}$$_{,}$ SL + ∑ x $^{−}$links λ$_{x}$ Q E 1 j · Q E 1 k + ∑ y $^{−}$links λ$_{y}$ Q E 2 j · Q E 2 k + ∑ z $^{−}$links λ$_{z}$ Q E 1 $_{j}$Q E 2 j · Q E 1 $_{k}$Q E 2 k$$\n\n$$H$_{jk,}$$_{SL}$ = H$_{cluster}$ j, SL + H$_{cluster}$ k, SL + λ H$_{perturbation}$ [ Q E 1 $_{j}$, Q E 2 $_{j}$, Q E 1 $_{k}$, Q E 2 $_{k}$]$$\n\n$$H$_{SL}$ = ∑ cluster j [ ( J$_{cluster}$/ 2)( S$_{j}$$_{1}$ + S$_{j}$$_{2}$ + S$_{j}$$_{3}$ + S$_{j}$$_{4}$ ) 2 + k 2 ( Q E 1 $_{j}$) 2 + k 2 ( Q E 2 $_{j}$) 2 + J ′ ( Q E 1 j S$_{j}$$_{1}$ · S$_{j}$$_{4}$ + S$_{j}$$_{2}$ · S$_{j}$$_{3}$ + S$_{j}$$_{2}$ · S$_{j}$$_{4}$ + S$_{j}$$_{1}$ · S$_{j}$$_{3}$ − 2 S$_{j}$$_{1}$ · S$_{j}$$_{2}$ − 2 S$_{j}$$_{3}$ · S$_{j}$$_{4}$ √$_{12}$ + Q E 2 j S$_{j}$$_{2}$ · S$_{j}$$_{4}$ + S$_{j}$$_{1}$ · S$_{j}$$_{3}$ − S$_{j}$$_{1}$ · S$_{j}$$_{4}$ − S$_{j}$$_{2}$ · S$_{j}$$_{3}$ 2 )] − ∑ x $^{−}$links 4 J$_{x}$k 2 3 J $^{′}$2 Q E 1 j · Q E 1 k − ∑ y $^{−}$links 4 J$_{y}$k 2 3 J $^{′}$2 Q E 2 j · Q E 2 k + ∑ z $^{−}$links 16 J$_{z}$k 4 9 J $^{′}$4 Q E 1 $_{j}$Q E 2 j · Q E 1 $_{k}$Q E 2 k (14)$$\n\nThe spin-lattice(SL) Hamiltonian on a single cluster j is [equation (1.8) in Ref. $^{35}$],\n\nwhere k > 0 is the elastic constant for these phonon modes, J ′ is the spin-lattice coupling constant, Q E 1 j and Q E 2 j are the generalized coordinates of the Q E 1 and Q E 2 distortion modes of cluster j , H$_{cluster}$ j is (2). As al- ready noted in Ref. $^{35}$, this model does not really break the pseudo-spin rotation symmetry of a single cluster.\n\nNow we put two clusters j and k together, and in- clude a perturbation λ H$_{perturbation}$ to the optical phonon Hamiltonian,\n\nwhere Q E 1 j is the generalized coordinate for the Q E 1 mode on cluster j , and Q E 1 $_{k}$, Q E 2 $_{j}$, Q E 2 k are similarly defined; λ$_{x,y}$ = − (4 J$_{x,y}$k $^{2}$) / (3 J $^{$^{′}$2}$) and λ$_{z}$ = (16 J$_{z}$k $^{4}$) / (9 J $^{$^{′}$4}$); the single cluster spin-lattice Hamiltonian H$_{cluster}$$\\_{,}$ SL is (13).\n\nCollect the results above we have the spin-lattice Hamiltonian H$_{SL}$ explicitly written as,\n\nThe single cluster spin-lattice Hamiltonian [first three lines in (14)] is quite natural. However we need some\n\nharmonic(on x - and y -links of honeycomb lattice) and an- harmonic coupling (on z -links) between optical phonon" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4321072627235475, + "doc_id": "1c24a122226ab2d339a3692433ecd4e472008d0f0256299b77a6f68ed1a38d5e", + "edit_distance": 0.7056810403832992, + "f1_score": 0.9107142857142856, + "meteor": 0.5116078416273926, + "precision": 0.9622641509433962, + "pred_md": "ω ∼ k y . As this region is separated from the mass shell, instead of the self-energy it is more convenient to study the Green function itself. It is also convenient to discuss the amputated propagator, ¯ Σ ( ω k ) = G ω ( k ) [ G (0) ω ( k ) ] -2 . To the second order in J , ¯ Σ ( ω k ) is given by Eq. (12), and is singular at ω = k y . At the next, fourth order, the correction (see App. B) has stronger singularity\n\n\n\nIn what follows we resum the most singular terms in the expansion of Σ to all orders in ¯ J . For n ≥ 2 we introduce new variables,\n\n\n\nand integrating over y i s variables we write the correction of order (2 n ) to the amputated Green function as\n\n\n\nwhere the remaining integrals\n\n\n\nare convergent at the upper limit, and can be evaluated as\n\n\n\nAs a result we obtain for the singular part\n\n\n\nFor n = 1 the last expression reduces to the second order corrections, Eq. (12). The sum of singular contributions Eq. (33) yields the result of Eq. (9).\n\n## V. CONCLUSIONS\n\nFirst we would like to make a remark about the easy axis anisotropy regime where the phase transition is in the Ising model universality class. From our calculations it is easy to see that as far as the singular terms are concerned, the results remain unchanged provided one considers only one particular value for the scaling dimension: d = 1 8. / This is despite the fact that multipoint correlation functions of the Ising model order parameter fields are more complicated than (19). However, the\n\n5\n\nsingularities are determined by more simple correlators, namely by the diagrams where pairs of the operators are very close to each other (see Fig. 3) resulting in a fusion of two order parameter fields. In the Ising model such fusion generates the energy density operator and in the XY-model it generates the gradient of φ field. Both operators have the same multi-point correlation functions.\n\nNow we can discuss the results. They are well illustrated by Figs. 1,4. The region of applicability of our calculations involves the energy scale T K = J Ja ( ) d/ d ( -1) . The result at the mass shell is valid for | k y | > T K and the result at the shadow mass shell holds at | k x | > T K . With increasing temperature the spectral weight is transferred towards the bare Fermi surface and the shadow band feature quickly fades away as is clearly seen on figure (4) where the darker areas correspond to large values of the spectral density.\n\nAlthough our model does not include all the features ascribed to the cuprates, the results obtained may serve as a good qualitative guide to the problem. For instance, we see that critical thermal fluctuations give rise to the characteristic linear temperature dependence ∼ T of the spectral peak width. This is an indication that such fluctuations are responsible of this feature in the cuprates. Our results demonstrate that with the rise of temperature the renormalized mass shell identified as the maximum intensity line in Fig. 4 approaches the bare Fermi surface, while the peak becomes rather incoherent. The backside of the Fermi pockets fades away so that the pockets now look like arcs. These effects are qualitatively similar to that of the quantum fluctuations studied in Ref. [6] though the intensity of quantum fluctuations is regulated not by temperature, but by the interactions.\n\nIn summary, we have presented systematic study of the thermal fluctuations effects in two-dimensional system of electrons in interaction with SDW order parameter. In particular the spectral density has been found to be strongly sensitive to these fluctuations. Fluctuations tend to restore the non-interacting Fermi surface topology thus overriding the effects of the SDW order.\n\n## Acknowledgments\n\nWe are grateful to A. Chubukov for encouraging discussions and interest to the work. We acknowledge support by the US DOE under contract number DE-AC0298 CH 10886. This research was also supported as part of the Center for Emerging Superconductivity funded by the U.S. Department of Energy, Office of Science. M. Khodas acknowledges support from BNL LDRD grant 08-002.\n\n## Appendix A: Perturbation theory at the mass shell.\n\nIn the present appendix we evaluate the most singular corrections to the self-energy at the mass shell, ω ∼ k x .", + "recall": 0.864406779661017, + "true_md": "ω ∼ k$_{y}$ . As this region is separated from the mass shell, instead of the self-energy it is more convenient to study the Green function itself. It is also convenient to discuss the amputated propagator, ¯ Σ$_{ω}$( k ) = G$_{ω}$ ( k ) [ G (0) ω ( k ) ] − $^{2}$. To the second order in J , ¯ Σ$_{ω}$( k ) is given by Eq. (12), and is singular at ω = k$_{y}$ . At the next, fourth order, the correction (see App. B) has stronger singularity\n\nIn what follows we resum the most singular terms in the expansion of ¯ Σ to all orders in J . For n ≥ 2 we introduce new variables,\n\nand integrating over y$_{i}$ s variables we write the correction of order (2 n ) to the amputated Green function as\n\nwhere the remaining integrals\n\nare convergent at the upper limit, and can be evaluated as\n\nAs a result we obtain for the singular part\n\nFor n = 1 the last expression reduces to the second order corrections, Eq. (12). The sum of singular contributions Eq. (33) yields the result of Eq. (9).\n\nFirst we would like to make a remark about the easy axis anisotropy regime where the phase transition is in the Ising model universality class. From our calculations it is easy to see that as far as the singular terms are concerned, the results remain unchanged provided one considers only one particular value for the scaling dimen- sion: d = 1 / 8. This is despite the fact that multipoint correlation functions of the Ising model order parame- ter fields are more complicated than (19). However, the\n\nIn the present appendix we evaluate the most singular corrections to the self-energy at the mass shell, ω ∼ k$_{x}$ .\n\nWe are grateful to A. Chubukov for encouraging dis- cussions and interest to the work. We acknowledge sup- port by the US DOE under contract number DE-AC02- 98 CH 10886. This research was also supported as part of the Center for Emerging Superconductivity funded by the U.S. Department of Energy, Office of Science. M. Khodas acknowledges support from BNL LDRD grant 08-002.\n\nAlthough our model does not include all the features ascribed to the cuprates, the results obtained may serve as a good qualitative guide to the problem. For instance, we see that critical thermal fluctuations give rise to the characteristic linear temperature dependence ∼ T of the spectral peak width. This is an indication that such fluc- tuations are responsible of this feature in the cuprates. Our results demonstrate that with the rise of temperature the renormalized mass shell identified as the maximum intensity line in Fig. 4 approaches the bare Fermi surface, while the peak becomes rather incoherent. The back- side of the Fermi pockets fades away so that the pockets now look like arcs. These effects are qualitatively simi- lar to that of the quantum fluctuations studied in Ref. [6] though the intensity of quantum fluctuations is regulated not by temperature, but by the interactions.\n\nIn summary, we have presented systematic study of the thermal fluctuations effects in two-dimensional sys- tem of electrons in interaction with SDW order param- eter. In particular the spectral density has been found to be strongly sensitive to these fluctuations. Fluctua- tions tend to restore the non-interacting Fermi surface topology thus overriding the effects of the SDW order.\n\nNow we can discuss the results. They are well illus- trated by Figs. 1,4. The region of applicability of our calculations involves the energy scale T$_{K}$ = J ( Ja ) d/ ( d − $^{1)}$. The result at the mass shell is valid for | k$_{y}$ | > T$_{K}$ and the result at the shadow mass shell holds at | k$_{x}$ | > T$_{K}$ . With increasing temperature the spectral weight is transferred towards the bare Fermi surface and the shadow band fea- ture quickly fades away as is clearly seen on figure (4) where the darker areas correspond to large values of the spectral density.\n\nsingularities are determined by more simple correlators, namely by the diagrams where pairs of the operators are very close to each other (see Fig. 3) resulting in a fusion of two order parameter fields. In the Ising model such fusion generates the energy density operator and in the XY-model it generates the gradient of φ field. Both op- erators have the same multi-point correlation functions.\n\n5\n\n$$¯ Σ (4) ≈ i( Ja $^{d}$) $^{4}$Γ(1 − 2 d )Γ(2 − 2 d ) ( − i( ω − k$_{x}$ )) 3 − 4 d α 2 − 2 d . (28)$$\n\n$$Y ξ$_{1}$ = x$_{1}$ − 0 , Y ξ$_{2}$ = x$_{2}$ − x$_{1}$ , . . . . . . , Y ξ$_{n}$$_{−}$$_{1}$ = X − x$_{n}$$_{−}$$_{2}$ , (29)$$\n\n$$¯ Σ (2 n ) = ( − i) 2 n − $^{1}$( Ja $^{d}$) 2 n ( − i( ω − k$_{x}$ )) 2 n (1 − d ) − 1 × Γ[2 n (1 − d ) − 1] ( n − 1)! ¯ I$_{n}$ ( α ) , (30)$$\n\n$$¯ I$_{n}$ ( α )=$^{n}$$^{−}$$^{1}$ ∏ i =1 ∫ ∞ 0 dξ$_{i}$ ξ − 2 d 1 · · · ξ − 2 d n − 1 ( α − $^{1}$+ ξ$_{1}$ + . . . + ξ$_{n}$$_{−}$$_{1}$ ) 2 n (1 − d ) − 1 (31)$$\n\n$$¯ I$_{n}$ ( α ) = α n − 2 $_{d}$Γ n − $^{1}$(1 − 2 d )Γ( n − 2 d ) Γ(2 n (1 − d ) − 1) . (32)$$\n\n$$¯ Σ (2 n ) = i( − i Ja $^{d}$) 2 $^{n}$αn − 2 $^{d}$Γn − $^{1}$(1 − 2 d )Γ( n − 2 d ) ( n − 1)!( − i( ω − k$_{x}$ )) 2 n (1 − d ) − 1 . (33)$$\n\n## Acknowledgments\n\n## V. CONCLUSIONS\n\n## Appendix A: Perturbation theory at the mass shell." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6089826327580732, + "doc_id": "f3dbc7cb87c9e48138d76d0cd1476d5653572dc7ce368994cbfc9243cdb1d89e", + "edit_distance": 0.7543424317617866, + "f1_score": 0.910569105691057, + "meteor": 0.4701828943045231, + "precision": 0.9427609427609428, + "pred_md": "neously the two conditions\n\n\n\n\n\nPhysically, the condition R → ∞ implies the existence of an outgoing wave in the lattice that is sustained by the amplifying complex potential at the impurity site. Such a divergence of R k ( ) is the signature of a spectral singularity of H . In fact, taking into account that the energy of incident/reflected waves is E 0 = -2 κ 0 cos k 0 , it can be easily shown that Eq.(73) is equivalent to Eq.(55), whereas Eq.(72) is equivalent to Eq.(54) with the upper (positive) sign on the right hand side. Therefore, for an amplifying impurity site [Im( E a ) > 0], the condition R → ∞ is equivalent to the appearance of a spectral singularity. This equivalence extends, to our scattering problem on a truncated lattice, the general result shown by Mostafazadeh [9], suggesting to interpret spectral singularities of a non-Hermitian Hamiltonian as resonances with vanishing width. However, for an absorbing potential energy at the impurity site, i.e. for Im( E a ) < 0, our lattice model indicates that the appearance of spectral singularities has a different physical interpretation. In fact, for Im( E a ) < 0 the reflection probability R k ( ) is bounded from above and smaller than one, which prevents R k ( ) to diverge. However, in this case R k ( ) can vanish at wave numbers k = k 0 (with 0 ≤ k 0 ≤ π ) that satisfy simultaneously the two conditions [see Eq.(71)]\n\n\n\n\n\nNote that Eq.(75) is equivalent to Eq.(55), whereas Eq.(74) is equivalent to Eq.(54) with the lower (negative) sign on the right hand side. Therefore, for an absorbing impurity site [Im( E a ) < 0], the appearance of a spectral singularity is equivalent to the vanishing of the reflection probability R : an ingoing plane wave with wave number k 0 is fully absorbed by the impurity site at the lattice edge. An an example, Fig.4 shows the behavior of R k ( ) for an amplifying [Fig.4(a)] and for an absorbing [Fig.4(b)] impurity site for Re( E a ) = 0 and κ /κ a 0 = 1. The different curves in the figures refer to different values of Im( E a ) /κ 0 . Note that, at the value of Im( E a ) /κ 0 corresponding to the appearance of the spectral singularity, a divergence and a zero in the R k ( ) curve are observed in Figs.4(a) and 4(b), respectively. Figure 5 shows the behavior of R k ( ) as in Fig.4, but for Re( E a ) = 0 and κ /κ a 0 = √ 2. In this case there are two spectral singularities at energies given by Eq.(57), which explain the two peaks [Fig.5(a)] or dips [Fig.5(b)] in the reflectance curve R k ( ). By increasing | Im( E a ) | /κ 0 , the two peaks (or dips) get closer each other, until they coalesce at | Im( E a ) | /κ 0 = 2 (curve 3 [50]).\n\nFigures 6 and 7 show two examples of wave packet reflection from the lattice boundary for an amplifying (Fig.6) and an absorbing (Fig.7) impurity site. The figures show a snapshot of | c n ( ) t | as obtained by numerical analysis of Eqs.(65-67) assuming at t = 0 a broad\n\n10\n\nFIG. 6: (color online) Wave packet reflection in a semi-infinite lattice with an amplifying impurity site for κ 0 = κ a = 1, Re( E a ) = 0 and Im( E a ) = 1. The initial wave packet is Gaussian- shaped, with peak amplitude | c n (0) | = 1 at n = n 0 = 30, width ∆ n = 12 and momentum k = 3 π/ 10 in (a), and k = π/ 2 in (b) (corresponding to the spectral singularity energy E 0 = 0). In (b)the incident wave packet, indicated by an arrow, is not visible owing to the large amplification of the reflected wave.\n\nFIG. 6: (color online) Wave packet reflection in a semi-infinite lattice with an amplifying impurity site for κ 0 = κ a = 1, Re( E a ) = 0 and Im( E a ) = 1. The initial wave packet is Gaussian- shaped, with peak amplitude | c n (0) | = 1 at n = n 0 = 30, width ∆ n = 12 and momentum k = 3 π/ 10 in (a), and k = π/ 2 in (b) (corresponding to the spectral singularity energy E 0 = 0). In (b)the incident wave packet, indicated by an arrow, is not visible owing to the large amplification of the reflected wave.\n\nFIG. 7: (color online) Same as Fig.6, but for an absorbing impurity site Im( E a ) = -1 (other parameters as in Fig.6).\n\nFIG. 7: (color online) Same as Fig.6, but for an absorbing impurity site Im( E a ) = -1 (other parameters as in Fig.6).\n\nGaussian distribution of site occupation amplitudes, i.e. c n (0) = exp[ -( n -n 0 ) 2 / ∆ n 2 -ikn ], where ∆ n is the wave packet width, k the mean wave packet momentum, and n 0 /greatermuch ∆ n the wave packet center of mass. The large (diverging) amplification of the reflected wave packet in Fig.6(b), and the almost absence of wave packet reflection in Fig.7(b), are clearly visible when the energy E = -2 κ 0 cos k of the incoming wave packet attains the spectral singularity point E 0 = 0.\n\nThe interplay between spectral singularities and decay dynamics, discussed in Sec.II.D, is exemplified in Figs.8 and 9. The system of Eqs.(65-67) has been numerically integrated with the initial condition c a (0) = 1 and c n (0) = 1. Note that, in the photonic realization of the semi-infinite lattice model of Ref.[37], such an initial condition simply corresponds to initial excitation of the boundary waveguide. The behavior of the site occupation probability P t ( ) = | c a ( ) t | 2 for an amplifying and for an absorbing impurity site is depicted in Figs.8 and 9, respectively. Note that, according to the gen-", + "recall": 0.8805031446540881, + "true_md": "10\n\nFIG. 6: (color online) Wave packet reflection in a semi-infinite lattice with an amplifying impurity site for κ 0 = κ$_{a}$ = 1, Re( E$_{a}$ ) = 0 and Im( E$_{a}$ ) = 1. The initial wave packet is Gaussian- shaped, with peak amplitude | c$_{n}$ (0) | = 1 at n = n 0 = 30, width Δ n = 12 and momentum k = 3 π/ 10 in (a), and k = π/ 2 in (b) (corresponding to the spectral singularity energy E 0 = 0). In (b)the incident wave packet, indicated by an arrow, is not visible owing to the large amplification of the reflected wave.\n\nneously the two conditions\n\n− Physically, the condition R → ∞ implies the existence of an outgoing wave in the lattice that is sustained by the amplifying complex potential at the impurity site. Such a divergence of R ( k ) is the signature of a spectral singularity of H . In fact, taking into account that the energy of incident/reflected waves is E 0 = − 2 κ$_{0}$ cos k$_{0}$ , it can be easily shown that Eq.(73) is equivalent to Eq.(55), whereas Eq.(72) is equivalent to Eq.(54) with the upper (positive) sign on the right hand side. Therefore, for an amplifying impurity site [Im( E$_{a}$ ) > 0], the condition R → ∞ is equivalent to the appearance of a spectral singularity. This equivalence extends, to our scattering problem on a truncated lattice, the general result shown by Mostafazadeh [9], suggesting to interpret spectral sin- gularities of a non-Hermitian Hamiltonian as resonances with vanishing width. However, for an absorbing poten- tial energy at the impurity site, i.e. for Im( E$_{a}$ ) < 0, our lattice model indicates that the appearance of spectral singularities has a different physical interpretation. In fact, for Im( E$_{a}$ ) < 0 the reflection probability R ( k ) is bounded from above and smaller than one, which pre- vents R ( k ) to diverge. However, in this case R ( k ) can vanish at wave numbers k = k$_{0}$ (with 0 ≤ k$_{0}$ ≤ π ) that satisfy simultaneously the two conditions [see Eq.(71)]\n\n$$κ 2 $_{a}$sin k$_{0}$ = κ$_{0}$ Im( E$_{a}$ ) (72)$$\n\n$$( κ 2 a − 2 κ 2 $_{0}$) cos k$_{0}$ = κ$_{o}$ Re( E$_{a}$ ) . (73) Physically, the condition R → ∞ implies the existence$$\n\n$$κ 2 $_{a}$sin k$_{0}$ = − κ$_{0}$ Im( E$_{a}$ ) (74) κ 2 $_{0}$) cos k$_{0}$ = κ$_{o}$ Re( E$_{a}$ ) . (75)$$\n\n$$− ( κ 2 a − 2 κ 2 $_{0}$) cos k$_{0}$ = κ$_{o}$ Re( E$_{a}$ ) . (75) Note that Eq.(75) is equivalent to Eq.(55), whereas$$\n\nFIG. 7: (color online) Same as Fig.6, but for an absorbing impurity site Im( E$_{a}$ ) = − 1 (other parameters as in Fig.6).\n\nGaussian distribution of site occupation amplitudes, i.e. c$_{n}$ (0) = exp[ − ( n − n$_{0}$ ) $^{2}$/ Δ n 2 − ikn ], where Δ n is the wave packet width, k the mean wave packet momen- tum, and n$_{0}$ ≫ Δ n the wave packet center of mass. The large (diverging) amplification of the reflected wave packet in Fig.6(b), and the almost absence of wave packet reflection in Fig.7(b), are clearly visible when the energy E = − 2 κ$_{0}$ cos k of the incoming wave packet attains the spectral singularity point E 0 = 0.\n\nThe interplay between spectral singularities and de- cay dynamics, discussed in Sec.II.D, is exemplified in Figs.8 and 9. The system of Eqs.(65-67) has been nu- merically integrated with the initial condition c$_{a}$ (0) = 1 and c$_{n}$ (0) = 1. Note that, in the photonic realization of the semi-infinite lattice model of Ref.[37], such an ini- tial condition simply corresponds to initial excitation of the boundary waveguide. The behavior of the site oc- cupation probability P ( t ) = | c$_{a}$ ( t ) | 2 for an amplifying and for an absorbing impurity site is depicted in Figs.8 and 9, respectively. Note that, according to the gen-\n\n| | Figures 6 and 7 show two examples of wave packet reflection from the lattice boundary for an amplifying (Fig.6) and an absorbing (Fig.7) impurity site. The fig- ures show a snapshot of | c$_{n}$ ( t ) | as obtained by numer- ical analysis of Eqs.(65-67) assuming at t = 0 a broad\n\n− Note that Eq.(75) is equivalent to Eq.(55), whereas Eq.(74) is equivalent to Eq.(54) with the lower (nega- tive) sign on the right hand side. Therefore, for an ab- sorbing impurity site [Im( E$_{a}$ ) < 0], the appearance of a spectral singularity is equivalent to the vanishing of the reflection probability R : an ingoing plane wave with wave number k$_{0}$ is fully absorbed by the impurity site at the lattice edge. An an example, Fig.4 shows the behavior of R ( k ) for an amplifying [Fig.4(a)] and for an absorbing [Fig.4(b)] impurity site for Re( E$_{a}$ ) = 0 and κ$_{a}$/κ$_{0}$ = 1. The different curves in the figures refer to different values of Im( E$_{a}$ ) /κ$_{0}$ . Note that, at the value of Im( E$_{a}$ ) /κ$_{0}$ cor- responding to the appearance of the spectral singularity, a divergence and a zero in the R ( k ) curve are observed in Figs.4(a) and 4(b), respectively. Figure 5 shows the behavior of R ( k ) as in Fig.4, but for Re( E$_{a}$ ) = 0 and κ$_{a}$/κ$_{0}$ = √$_{2. In this case there are two spectral singu-}$ larities at energies given by Eq.(57), which explain the two peaks [Fig.5(a)] or dips [Fig.5(b)] in the reflectance curve R ( k ). By increasing | Im( E$_{a}$ ) | /κ$_{0}$ , the two peaks (or dips) get closer each other, until they coalesce at | Im( E$_{a}$ ) | /κ$_{0}$ = 2 (curve 3 [50]). Figures 6 and 7 show two examples of wave packet" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9695378849206435, + "doc_id": "9e70870362b96a026e516a8f9ba87ca1f72c9b785da0e9b268127dbc3f46126b", + "edit_distance": 0.37613751263902934, + "f1_score": 0.9633333333333334, + "meteor": 0.9017014661120201, + "precision": 0.9697986577181208, + "pred_md": "- [3] G. Dvali, G. Gabadadze, and M. Porrati, Physics Letters B 485 , 208 (2000), hep-ph/0005016.\n- [4] S. M. Carroll, A. de Felice, V. Duvvuri, D. A. Easson, M. Trodden, and M. S. Turner, Phys. Rev. D 71 , 063513 (2005), astro-ph/0410031.\n- [5] Y.-S. Song, Phys. Rev. D71 , 024026 (2005), astroph/0407489.\n- [6] M. Ishak, A. Upadhye, and D. N. Spergel, ArXiv Astrophysics e-prints (2005), astro-ph/0507184.\n- [7] L. Knox, Y.-S. Song, and J. A. Tyson, Phys. Rev. D 74 , 023512 (2006).\n- [8] E. V. Linder, Phys. Rev. D 72 , 043529 (2005), astroph/0507263.\n- [9] B. Jain and P. Zhang, Phys. Rev. D78 , 063503 (2008), 0709.2375.\n- [10] A. J. Albrecht et al. (2009), 0901.0721.\n- [11] Y. Wang, JCAP 0805 , 021 (2008), 0710.3885.\n- [12] L. Guzzo et al., Nature 451 , 541 (2008), 0802.1944.\n- [13] Y.-S. Song and W. J. Percival, ArXiv e-prints (2008), 0807.0810.\n- [14] M. White, Y.-S. Song, and W. J. Percival (2008), 0810.1518.\n- [15] Y.-S. Song and K. Koyama (2008), 0802.3897.\n- [16] Y.-S. Song and O. Dore, JCAP 0903 , 025 (2009).\n- [17] D. Sarkar, H. A. Feldman, and R. Watkins, MNRAS 375 , 691 (2007), arXiv:astro-ph/0607426.\n- [18] R. Watkins, H. A. Feldman, and M. J. Hudson (2008), 0809.4041.\n- [19] A. Kashlinsky, F. Atrio-Barandela, D. Kocevski, and H. Ebeling (2008), 0809.3734.\n- [20] A. Kashlinsky, F. Atrio-Barandela, H. Ebeling, A. Edge, and D. Kocevski (2009), 0910.4958.\n- [21] N. Afshordi, G. Geshnizjani, and J. Khoury (2008), 0812.2244.\n- [22] N. Kaiser, Mon. Not. Roy. Astron. Soc. 227 , 1 (1987).\n- [23] C. J. Miller, R. C. Nichol, D. Reichart, R. H. Wechsler, A. E. Evrard, J. Annis, T. A. McKay, N. A. Bahcall, M. Bernardi, H. Boehringer, et al., AJL 130 , 968 (2005),\n\n8\n\n- arXiv:astro-ph/0503713.\n- [24] D. G. York et al. (SDSS), Astron. J. 120 , 1579 (2000), astro-ph/0006396.\n- [25] M. Davis and P. J. E. Peebles, Astrophys. J. 267 , 465 (1982).\n- [26] P. B. Lilje and G. Efstathiou, MNRAS 236 , 851 (1989).\n- [27] C. McGill, MNRAS 242 , 428 (1990).\n- [28] O. Lahav, P. B. Lilje, J. R. Primack, and M. J. Rees, MNRAS 251 , 128 (1991).\n- [29] A. J. S. Hamilton, ApJL 385 , L5 (1992).\n- [30] K. B. Fisher, C. A. Scharf, and O. Lahav, MNRAS 266 , 219 (1994), arXiv:astro-ph/9309027.\n- [31] K. B. Fisher, Astrophys. J. 448 , 494 (1995), arXiv:astroph/9412081.\n- [32] R. Scoccimarro, Phys. Rev. D70 , 083007 (2004), astroph/0407214.\n- [33] L. Amendola, Phys. Rev. D62 , 043511 (2000), astroph/9908023.\n- [34] K. Koyama, R. Maartens, and Y.-S. Song (2009), 0907.2126.\n- [35] M. Kunz and D. Sapone, Phys. Rev. Lett. 98 , 121301 (2007), astro-ph/0612452.\n- [36] E. Komatsu et al. (WMAP), Astrophys. J. Suppl. 180 , 330 (2009), 0803.0547.\n- [37] M. Kaplinghat, L. Knox, and Y.-S. Song, Phys. Rev. Lett. 91 , 241301 (2003), astro-ph/0303344.\n- [38] J. K. Adelman-McCarthy, M. A. Ageros, S. S. Allam, u K. S. J. Anderson, S. F. Anderson, J. Annis, N. A. Bahcall, C. A. L. Bailer-Jones, I. K. Baldry, J. C. Barentine, et al., ApJs 172 , 634 (2007), 0707.3380.\n- [39] R. Scranton, D. Johnston, S. Dodelson, J. A. Frieman, A. Connolly, D. J. Eisenstein, J. E. Gunn, L. Hui, B. Jain, S. Kent, et al., Astrophys. J. 579 , 48 (2002), arXiv:astroph/0107416.\n- [40] R. Lupton, Statistics in theory and practice (1993).\n- [41] Y.-S. Song, W. Hu, and I. Sawicki, Phys. Rev. D75 , 044004 (2007), astro-ph/0610532.", + "recall": 0.956953642384106, + "true_md": "8\n\narXiv:astro-ph/0503713.\n\n- [3] G. Dvali, G. Gabadadze, and M. Porrati, Physics Letters B 485 , 208 (2000), hep-ph/0005016.\n\n- [4] S. M. Carroll, A. de Felice, V. Duvvuri, D. A. Easson, M. Trodden, and M. S. Turner, Phys. Rev. D 71 , 063513 (2005), astro-ph/0410031.\n\n- [5] Y.-S. Song, Phys. Rev. D71 , 024026 (2005), astro- ph/0407489.\n\n- [6] M. Ishak, A. Upadhye, and D. N. Spergel, ArXiv Astro- physics e-prints (2005), astro-ph/0507184.\n\n- [7] L. Knox, Y.-S. Song, and J. A. Tyson, Phys. Rev. D 74 , 023512 (2006).\n\n- [8] E. V. Linder, Phys. Rev. D 72 , 043529 (2005), astro- ph/0507263.\n\n- [9] B. Jain and P. Zhang, Phys. Rev. D78 , 063503 (2008), 0709.2375.\n\n- [10] A. J. Albrecht et al. (2009), 0901.0721.\n\n- [11] Y. Wang, JCAP 0805 , 021 (2008), 0710.3885.\n\n- [12] L. Guzzo et al., Nature 451 , 541 (2008), 0802.1944.\n\n- [13] Y.-S. Song and W. J. Percival, ArXiv e-prints (2008), 0807.0810.\n\n- [14] M. White, Y.-S. Song, and W. J. Percival (2008), 0810.1518.\n\n- [15] Y.-S. Song and K. Koyama (2008), 0802.3897.\n\n- [16] Y.-S. Song and O. Dore, JCAP 0903 , 025 (2009).\n\n- [17] D. Sarkar, H. A. Feldman, and R. Watkins, MNRAS 375 , 691 (2007), arXiv:astro-ph/0607426.\n\n- [18] R. Watkins, H. A. Feldman, and M. J. Hudson (2008), 0809.4041.\n\n- [19] A. Kashlinsky, F. Atrio-Barandela, D. Kocevski, and H. Ebeling (2008), 0809.3734.\n\n- [20] A. Kashlinsky, F. Atrio-Barandela, H. Ebeling, A. Edge, and D. Kocevski (2009), 0910.4958.\n\n- [21] N. Afshordi, G. Geshnizjani, and J. Khoury (2008), 0812.2244.\n\n- [22] N. Kaiser, Mon. Not. Roy. Astron. Soc. 227 , 1 (1987).\n\n- [23] C. J. Miller, R. C. Nichol, D. Reichart, R. H. Wechsler, A. E. Evrard, J. Annis, T. A. McKay, N. A. Bahcall, M. Bernardi, H. Boehringer, et al., AJL 130 , 968 (2005),\n\n- [41] Y.-S. Song, W. Hu, and I. Sawicki, Phys. Rev. D75 , 044004 (2007), astro-ph/0610532.\n\n- [40] R. Lupton, Statistics in theory and practice (1993).\n\n- [39] R. Scranton, D. Johnston, S. Dodelson, J. A. Frieman, A. Connolly, D. J. Eisenstein, J. E. Gunn, L. Hui, B. Jain, S. Kent, et al., Astrophys. J. 579 , 48 (2002), arXiv:astro- ph/0107416.\n\n- [38] J. K. Adelman-McCarthy, M. A. Ag¨ ueros, S. S. Allam, K. S. J. Anderson, S. F. Anderson, J. Annis, N. A. Bah- call, C. A. L. Bailer-Jones, I. K. Baldry, J. C. Barentine, et al., ApJs 172 , 634 (2007), 0707.3380.\n\n- [37] M. Kaplinghat, L. Knox, and Y.-S. Song, Phys. Rev. Lett. 91 , 241301 (2003), astro-ph/0303344.\n\n- [36] E. Komatsu et al. (WMAP), Astrophys. J. Suppl. 180 , 330 (2009), 0803.0547.\n\n- [35] M. Kunz and D. Sapone, Phys. Rev. Lett. 98 , 121301 (2007), astro-ph/0612452.\n\n- [34] K. Koyama, R. Maartens, and Y.-S. Song (2009), 0907.2126.\n\n- [33] L. Amendola, Phys. Rev. D62 , 043511 (2000), astro- ph/9908023.\n\n- [32] R. Scoccimarro, Phys. Rev. D70 , 083007 (2004), astro- ph/0407214.\n\n- [31] K. B. Fisher, Astrophys. J. 448 , 494 (1995), arXiv:astro- ph/9412081.\n\n- [30] K. B. Fisher, C. A. Scharf, and O. Lahav, MNRAS 266 , 219 (1994), arXiv:astro-ph/9309027.\n\n- [29] A. J. S. Hamilton, ApJL 385 , L5 (1992).\n\n- [24] D. G. York et al. (SDSS), Astron. J. 120 , 1579 (2000), astro-ph/0006396.\n\n- [25] M. Davis and P. J. E. Peebles, Astrophys. J. 267 , 465 (1982).\n\n- [26] P. B. Lilje and G. Efstathiou, MNRAS 236 , 851 (1989).\n\n- [27] C. McGill, MNRAS 242 , 428 (1990).\n\n- [28] O. Lahav, P. B. Lilje, J. R. Primack, and M. J. Rees, MNRAS 251 , 128 (1991)." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7859679722111309, + "doc_id": "bcfbbfcf3ce33367c06b0497ead2726391ce9eda4c3a4b1b070bc3d470d2e478", + "edit_distance": 0.7419354838709677, + "f1_score": 0.9015151515151515, + "meteor": 0.7150780766261666, + "precision": 0.937007874015748, + "pred_md": "Another note to take is that it is not necessary to have such a highly symmetric cluster Hamiltonian (2). The mappings to pseudo-spin-1/2 should work as long as the ground states of the cluster Hamiltonian are the two-fold degenerate singlets. One generalization, which conforms the symmetry of the lattice in FIG. 2, is to have\n\n\n\nwith J cluster > 0 and 0 < r < 3. However this is not convenient for later discussions and will not be used.\n\nWe briefly describe some of the properties of (8). Its low energy states are entirely in the space that each of the clusters is a physical spin singlet (called cluster singlet subspace hereafter). Therefore physical spin correlations are strictly confined within each cluster. The excitations carrying physical spin are gapped, and their dynamics are 'trivial' in the sense that they do not move from one cluster to another. But there are non-trivial low energy physical spin singlet excitations, described by the pseudospins defined above. The correlations of the pseudo-spins can be mapped to correlations of their corresponding physical spin observables (the inverse mappings are not unique, c.f. TABLE I). For example τ x,y correlations become certain dimer-dimer correlations, τ z correlation becomes chirality-chirality correlation, or four-dimer correlation. It will be interesting to see the corresponding picture of the exotic excitations in the Kitaev model, e.g. the Majorana fermion and the Ising vortex. However this will be deferred to future studies.\n\nIt is tempting to call this as an exactly solved spin liquid with spin gap ( ∼ J cluster ), an extremely short-range resonating valence bond(RVB) state, from a model with spin rotation and time reversal symmetry. However it should be noted that the unit cell of this model contains an even number of spin-1/2 moments (so does the original Kitaev model) which does not satisfy the stringent definition of spin liquid requiring odd number of electrons per unit cell. Several parent Hamiltonians of spin liquids have already been constructed. See for example, Ref. 24-27 .\n\n## IV. GENERATE THE HIGH ORDER PHYSICAL SPIN INTERACTIONS BY PERTURBATIVE EXPANSION.\n\nOne major drawback of the present construction is that it involves high order interactions of physical spins[see (8) and (9)], thus is 'unnatural'. In this Section we will make compromises between exact solvability and naturalness. We consider two clusters j and k and try to generate the J x,y,z interactions in (7) from perturbation series expansion of more natural(lower order) physical spin interactions. Two different approaches for this purpose will be laid out in the following two Subsections. In Subsection IV A we will consider the two clusters as two tetrahedra, and couple the spin system to certain optical phonons, further coupling between the phonon modes\n\n5\n\nFIG. 3: Illustration of the tetragonal to orthorhombic Q E 1 (top) and Q E 2 (bottom) distortion modes. (a) Perspective view of the tetrahedron. 1 , . . . , 4 label the spins. Arrows indicate the motion of each spin under the distortion mode. (b) Top view of (a). (c)(d) Side view of (a).\n\nFIG. 3: Illustration of the tetragonal to orthorhombic Q E 1 (top) and Q E 2 (bottom) distortion modes. (a) Perspective view of the tetrahedron. 1 , . . . , 4 label the spins. Arrows indicate the motion of each spin under the distortion mode. (b) Top view of (a). (c)(d) Side view of (a).\n\nof the two clusters can generate at lowest order the desired high order spin interactions. In Subsection IV B we will introduce certain magnetic, e.g. Heisenberg-type, interactions between physical spins of different clusters, at lowest order(second order) of perturbation theory the desired high order spin interactions can be achieved. These approaches involve truncation errors in the perturbation series, thus the mapping to low energy effect Hamiltonian will no longer be exact. However the error introduced may be controlled by small expansion parameters. In this Section we denote the physical spins on cluster j ( k ) as j 1 , . . . , j 4 ( k 1 , . . . , k 4), and denote pseudo-spins on cluster j ( k ) as /vector τ j ( /vector τ k ).\n\n## A. Generate the High Order Terms by Coupling to Optical Phonon.\n\nIn this Subsection we regard each four-spin cluster as a tetrahedron, and consider possible optical phonon modes(distortions) and their couplings to the spin system. The basic idea is that the intra-cluster Heisenberg coupling J cluster can linearly depend on the distance between physical spins. Therefore certain distortions of the tetrahedron couple to certain linear combinations of S /lscript · S m . Integrating out phonon modes will then generate high order spin interactions. This idea has been extensively studied and applied to several magnetic materials 28-34 . More details can be found in a recent review by Tchernyshyov and Chern 35 . And we will frequently use their notations. In this Subsection we will use the representation (5) for τ z .\n\nConsider first a single tetrahedron with four spins 1 , . . . , 4. The general distortions of this tetrahedron can be classified by their symmetry (see for example Ref. 35 ). Only two tetragonal to orthorhombic distortion modes, Q E 1 and Q E 2 (illustrated in FIG. 3), couple to the pseudospins defined in Section II. A complete analysis of all modes is given in Appendix A. The coupling is of the", + "recall": 0.8686131386861314, + "true_md": "5\n\nFIG. 3: Illustration of the tetragonal to orthorhombic Q E 1 (top) and Q E 2 (bottom) distortion modes. (a) Perspective view of the tetrahedron. 1 , . . . , 4 label the spins. Arrows in- dicate the motion of each spin under the distortion mode. (b) Top view of (a). (c)(d) Side view of (a).\n\n$$H$_{cluster}$ = ( J$_{cluster}$/ 2)( r · S$_{1}$ + S$_{2}$ + S$_{3}$ + S$_{4}$ ) 2 (11)$$\n\n## IV. GENERATE THE HIGH ORDER PHYSICAL SPIN INTERACTIONS BY PERTURBATIVE EXPANSION.\n\n## A. Generate the High Order Terms by Coupling to Optical Phonon.\n\nAnother note to take is that it is not necessary to have such a highly symmetric cluster Hamiltonian (2). The mappings to pseudo-spin-1/2 should work as long as the ground states of the cluster Hamiltonian are the two-fold degenerate singlets. One generalization, which conforms the symmetry of the lattice in FIG. 2, is to have\n\nwith J$_{cluster}$ > 0 and 0 < r < 3. However this is not convenient for later discussions and will not be used.\n\nWe briefly describe some of the properties of (8). Its low energy states are entirely in the space that each of the clusters is a physical spin singlet (called cluster singlet subspace hereafter). Therefore physical spin correlations are strictly confined within each cluster. The excitations carrying physical spin are gapped, and their dynamics are ‘trivial’ in the sense that they do not move from one cluster to another. But there are non-trivial low energy physical spin singlet excitations, described by the pseudo- spins defined above. The correlations of the pseudo-spins can be mapped to correlations of their corresponding physical spin observables (the inverse mappings are not unique, c.f. TABLE I). For example τ x,y correlations become certain dimer-dimer correlations, τ z correlation becomes chirality-chirality correlation, or four-dimer cor- relation. It will be interesting to see the corresponding picture of the exotic excitations in the Kitaev model, e.g. the Majorana fermion and the Ising vortex. However this will be deferred to future studies.\n\nof the two clusters can generate at lowest order the de- sired high order spin interactions. In Subsection IV B we will introduce certain magnetic, e.g. Heisenberg-type, in- teractions between physical spins of different clusters, at lowest order(second order) of perturbation theory the de- sired high order spin interactions can be achieved. These approaches involve truncation errors in the perturbation series, thus the mapping to low energy effect Hamilto- nian will no longer be exact. However the error intro- duced may be controlled by small expansion parameters. In this Section we denote the physical spins on cluster j ( k ) as j 1 , . . . , j 4 ( k 1 , . . . , k 4), and denote pseudo-spins on cluster j ( k ) as ⃗ τ$_{j}$ ( ⃗ τ$_{k}$ ).\n\nIt is tempting to call this as an exactly solved spin liq- uid with spin gap ( ∼ J$_{cluster}$ ), an extremely short-range resonating valence bond(RVB) state, from a model with spin rotation and time reversal symmetry. However it should be noted that the unit cell of this model contains an even number of spin-1/2 moments (so does the orig- inal Kitaev model) which does not satisfy the stringent definition of spin liquid requiring odd number of elec- trons per unit cell. Several parent Hamiltonians of spin liquids have already been constructed. See for example, Ref. $^{24–27}$.\n\nIn this Subsection we regard each four-spin cluster as a tetrahedron, and consider possible optical phonon modes(distortions) and their couplings to the spin sys- tem. The basic idea is that the intra-cluster Heisen- berg coupling J$_{cluster}$ can linearly depend on the dis- tance between physical spins. Therefore certain distor- tions of the tetrahedron couple to certain linear combi- nations of S$_{ℓ}$ · S$_{m}$ . Integrating out phonon modes will then generate high order spin interactions. This idea has been extensively studied and applied to several magnetic materials $^{28–34}$. More details can be found in a recent review by Tchernyshyov and Chern $^{35}$. And we will fre- quently use their notations. In this Subsection we will use the representation (5) for τ $^{z}$.\n\nOne major drawback of the present construction is that it involves high order interactions of physical spins[see (8) and (9)], thus is ‘unnatural’. In this Section we will make compromises between exact solvability and natu- ralness. We consider two clusters j and k and try to generate the J$_{x,y,z}$ interactions in (7) from perturbation series expansion of more natural(lower order) physical spin interactions. Two different approaches for this pur- pose will be laid out in the following two Subsections. In Subsection IV A we will consider the two clusters as two tetrahedra, and couple the spin system to certain opti- cal phonons, further coupling between the phonon modes\n\nConsider first a single tetrahedron with four spins 1 , . . . , 4. The general distortions of this tetrahedron can be classified by their symmetry (see for example Ref. $^{35}$). Only two tetragonal to orthorhombic distortion modes, Q E 1 and Q E 2 (illustrated in FIG. 3), couple to the pseudo- spins defined in Section II. A complete analysis of all modes is given in Appendix A. The coupling is of the" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.38111737936252366, + "doc_id": "a5ee2bc33fc560d6be05e86001a39e3b53ffeba6e1ced0e36ae3dc6ba5dc4ddb", + "edit_distance": 0.7385486361296963, + "f1_score": 0.882183908045977, + "meteor": 0.39382132738544456, + "precision": 0.9274924471299094, + "pred_md": "and its environment or bath, followed by a partial trace Tr B over the bath, if and only if system and bath start from a purely classically correlated initial state [49], such as a product state:\n\n↦\n\n\n\nHere ρ B is the initial state of the bath. The conjugate ˜ E of a quantum channel E is defined as [50],\n\n\n\nA quantum channel is called degradable if it can be degraded to its conjugate, that is, there exists a CPTP map T such that ˜ E = T · E [51]. We shall make use of degradable channels later on in this work.\n\nUnlike classical channels at least four capacities are associated with quantum channels depending on the type of information transmitted (classical or quantum), protocols allowed, and auxiliary resources used [5]. We are interested in the classical capacity C , quantum capacity Q , and entanglementassisted capacities C E , Q E = C / E 2 and C lim E of a quantum dephasing channel.\n\nLet S ρ ( ) = -Tr[ ρ log 2 ρ ] denote the von Neumann entropy. The maximum amount of classical information reliably transmitted over a quantum channel is given by its classical capacity C [6, 7],\n\n\n\n\n\nIt depends on the largest set of orthogonal input states distinguishable during the transmission and not on the ability of a channel E to preserve phases of different superpositions. C is the Holevo information χ [52] maximized over all possible input ensembles ρ S = ∑ i p ρ i S,i , where { p i } is a probability distribution and { ρ S,i } a set of quantum states ('quantum alphabet' belonging to the n -fold tensor product of system Hilbert spaces H S ), in the limit n →∞ of parallel or successive channel uses. The limit can be avoided when the Holevo information is additive over channel uses, in which case the optimal ensembles which achieve the maximum in Eq. (3) are separable with respect to the n uses and C coincides with C n n for all n , and in particular with C 1 . Hastings recently provided counterexamples to the additivity of the minimum output entropy [53], which implies by a result of Shor that the classical capacity is not always additive [54].\n\nThe quantum capacity Q is the maximum amount of quantum information transmitted by a quantum channel per channel use [8, 14, 20],\n\n\n\n\n\nFor a given number of channel uses n , it depends on the dimension of the largest Hilbert subspace of H ⊗ n S that does not\n\n2\n\ndecohere during transmission. The quantum capacity Q is the coherent information I c [7], maximized over all possible input states. In Eq. (5), | Φ 〉 ∈ H S ⊗ H R is a purification of ρ S obtained by appending a reference Hilbert space H R to the system Hilbert space H S . The limit n → ∞ is necessary as I c is super-additive [11], which makes the evaluation of Q difficult. However, for degradable channels the coherent information I c reduces to the conditional entropy, which is subadditive and concave, from which it follows that for these channels Q = Q 1 (single-channel use) [51]. This is an important simplification, which enables the explicit calculation of Q in a variety of interesting cases.\n\nEntanglement is a useful resource in quantum information transmission. For example, it can be used to enhance the performance of quantum error correcting codes [55], to enhance quantum channel capacities by sharing entanglement between sender and receiver prior to communication [56], or by encoding information into entangled states when making successive uses of the same channel [23-27, 29, 30]. If the sender and receiver share unlimited prior entanglement, the maximum amount of classical information reliably transmitted over the quantum channel is given by its entanglement-assisted classical capacity C E [12, 13, 15]. This quantity is obtained by maximization of the quantum mutual information for single channel use, which yields\n\n\n\nHere | Φ 〉 ∈ H S ⊗H R is the shared entangled state, which is also a purification of the input state ρ S ∈ H S . The amount of pure-state entanglement consumed by this communication protocol is S ρ ( S ) ebits per channel use, where ρ S maximizes Eq. (7). In contrast to the classical and quantum capacities, C E is additive [15]. The entanglement-assisted quantum capacity is given by Q E = C / E 2 , and can be attained by superdense coding [56], and quantum teleportation [57].\n\nShor has given a trade-off curve showing the classical capacity as a function of the amount of entanglement shared by the sender and receiver [18]. The end points of this curve are given by the classical capacity C and the entanglementassisted classical capacity C E . If the amount of entanglement available P is less than S ρ ( S ) , then the classical capacity assisted by limited entanglement is given by\n\n\n\nsubject to ∑ i p S ρ i ( S,i ) ≤ P . Here the maximization is over the probabilistic ensemble { ρ S,i , p i } where ρ S,i ∈ H S , ∑ i p i = 1 , p i ≥ 0 , and as above the shared entangled states | Φ i 〉 are purifications of ρ S,i . The capacity C lim E reduces to the classical capacity C given by Eq. (3) for P = 0 , as the constraint ∑ i p S ρ i ( S,i ) ≤ P implies that ρ S,i must then all be pure states. For sufficiently large P it gives the entanglementassisted classical capacity C E . The proof of additivity of C lim E is an open problem.", + "recall": 0.8410958904109589, + "true_md": "2\n\ndecohere during transmission. The quantum capacity Q is the coherent information I$_{c}$ [7], maximized over all possible in- put states. In Eq. (5), | Φ 〉 ∈ H$_{S}$ ⊗ H$_{R}$ is a purification of ρ$_{S}$ obtained by appending a reference Hilbert space H$_{R}$ to the system Hilbert space H$_{S}$ . The limit n → ∞ is neces- sary as I$_{c}$ is super-additive [11], which makes the evaluation of Q difficult. However, for degradable channels the coherent information I$_{c}$ reduces to the conditional entropy, which is subadditive and concave, from which it follows that for these channels Q = Q$_{1}$ (single-channel use) [51]. This is an im- portant simplification, which enables the explicit calculation of Q in a variety of interesting cases.\n\nand its environment or bath, followed by a partial trace Tr$_{B}$ over the bath, if and only if system and bath start from a purely classically correlated initial state [49], such as a product state:\n\nHere ρ$_{B}$ is the initial state of the bath. The conjugate ˜ E of a quantum channel E is defined as [50],\n\nA quantum channel is called degradable if it can be degraded to its conjugate, that is, there exists a CPTP map T such that ˜ E = T ◦ E [51]. We shall make use of degradable channels later on in this work.\n\n$$ρ$_{S}$ ↦→ E ( ρ$_{S}$ ) = Tr$_{B}$ [ U ( ρ$_{S}$ ⊗ ρ$_{B}$ ) U $^{†}$] . (1)$$\n\n$$˜ E ( ρ$_{B}$ ) = Tr$_{S}$ [ U ( ρ$_{S}$ ⊗ ρ$_{B}$ ) U $^{†}$] . (2)$$\n\nEntanglement is a useful resource in quantum information transmission. For example, it can be used to enhance the per- formance of quantum error correcting codes [55], to enhance quantum channel capacities by sharing entanglement between sender and receiver prior to communication [56], or by encod- ing information into entangled states when making successive uses of the same channel [23–27, 29, 30]. If the sender and receiver share unlimited prior entanglement, the maximum amount of classical information reliably transmitted over the quantum channel is given by its entanglement-assisted clas- sical capacity C$_{E}$ [12, 13, 15]. This quantity is obtained by maximization of the quantum mutual information for single channel use, which yields\n\nUnlike classical channels at least four capacities are asso- ciated with quantum channels depending on the type of infor- mation transmitted (classical or quantum), protocols allowed, and auxiliary resources used [5]. We are interested in the classical capacity C , quantum capacity Q , and entanglement- assisted capacities C$_{E}$ , Q$_{E}$ = C$_{E}$/ 2 and C lim E of a quantum dephasing channel.\n\nLet S ( ρ ) = − Tr[ ρ log$_{2}$ ρ ] denote the von Neumann en- tropy. The maximum amount of classical information reliably transmitted over a quantum channel is given by its classical capacity C [6, 7],\n\nHere | Φ 〉 ∈ H$_{S}$ ⊗ H$_{R}$ is the shared entangled state, which is also a purification of the input state ρ$_{S}$ ∈ H$_{S}$ . The amount of pure-state entanglement consumed by this communication protocol is S ( ρ$_{S}$ ) ebits per channel use, where ρ$_{S}$ maximizes Eq. (7). In contrast to the classical and quantum capacities, C$_{E}$ is additive [15]. The entanglement-assisted quantum ca- pacity is given by Q$_{E}$ = C$_{E}$/ 2 , and can be attained by super- dense coding [56], and quantum teleportation [57].\n\nShor has given a trade-off curve showing the classical ca- pacity as a function of the amount of entanglement shared by the sender and receiver [18]. The end points of this curve are given by the classical capacity C and the entanglement- assisted classical capacity C$_{E}$ . If the amount of entanglement available P is less than S ( ρ$_{S}$ ) , then the classical capacity as- sisted by limited entanglement is given by\n\nIt depends on the largest set of orthogonal input states distin- guishable during the transmission and not on the ability of a channel E to preserve phases of different superpositions. C is the Holevo information χ [52] maximized over all possible input ensembles ρ$_{S}$ = $^{∑}$$\\_{i}$p$\\_{i}$ ρ$\\_{S,i}$ , where { p$\\_{i}$ } is a probabil- ity distribution and { ρ$\\_{S,i}$ } a set of quantum states (“quantum alphabet” belonging to the n -fold tensor product of system Hilbert spaces H$\\_{S}$ ), in the limit n → ∞ of parallel or succes- sive channel uses. The limit can be avoided when the Holevo information is additive over channel uses, in which case the optimal ensembles which achieve the maximum in Eq. (3) are separable with respect to the n uses and C coincides with C$\\_{n}$ n for all n , and in particular with C$\\_{1}$ . Hastings recently provided counterexamples to the additivity of the minimum output en- tropy [53], which implies by a result of Shor that the classical capacity is not always additive [54].\n\nThe quantum capacity Q is the maximum amount of quan- tum information transmitted by a quantum channel per chan- nel use [8, 14, 20],\n\n$$C$_{E}$ = max ρ$_{S}$ $_{∈H$_{S}$}${ S ( ρ$_{S}$ )+ S [ E ( ρ$_{S}$ )] − S [( E ⊗I )( | Φ 〉〈 Φ | )] } . (7)$$\n\n$$C = lim n →∞ C$_{n}$ n , C$_{n}$ = max p$_{i}$,ρ$_{S,i}$ ∈H ⊗ n S χ (3)$$\n\n$$χ = S [ E ⊗ $^{n}$( ρ$_{S}$ )] − ∑ i p$_{i}$S [ E ⊗ $^{n}$( ρ$_{S,i}$ )] . (4)$$\n\n$$C lim E = max { ρ$_{S,i}$,p$_{i}$ } ∑ i p$_{i}$S ( ρ$_{S,i}$ ) + S [ E ( ∑ i p$_{i}$ρ$_{S,i}$ )] − ∑ i p$_{i}$S [( E ⊗ I )( | Φ$_{i}$ 〉〈 Φ$_{i}$ | )] , (8)$$\n\n$$Q = lim n →∞ Q$_{n}$ n , Q$_{n}$ = max ρ$_{S}$ ∈H ⊗ n S I$_{c}$ (5)$$\n\n$$I$_{c}$ = S [ E ⊗ $^{n}$( ρ$_{S}$ )] − S [( E ⊗ n ⊗ I )( | Φ 〉〈 Φ | )] . (6)$$\n\nsubject to $^{∑}$$\\_{i}$p$\\_{i}$ S ( ρ$\\_{S,i}$ ) ≤ P . Here the maximization is over the probabilistic ensemble { ρ$\\_{S,i}$, p$\\_{i}$ } where ρ$\\_{S,i}$ ∈ H$\\_{S}$ , $^{∑}$$_{i}$p$_{i}$ = 1 , p$_{i}$ ≥ 0 , and as above the shared entangled states | Φ$_{i}$ 〉 are purifications of ρ$_{S,i}$ . The capacity C lim E reduces to the classical capacity C given by Eq. (3) for P = 0 , as the con- straint $^{∑}$$\\_{i}$p$\\_{i}$ S ( ρ$\\_{S,i}$ ) ≤ P implies that ρ$\\_{S,i}$ must then all be pure states. For sufficiently large P it gives the entanglement- assisted classical capacity C$\\_{E}$ . The proof of additivity of C lim E is an open problem.\n\nFor a given number of channel uses n , it depends on the di- mension of the largest Hilbert subspace of H ⊗ n S that does not" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5475740219284823, + "doc_id": "8ecf4e2c7a3efd5c22a9bd4328eb30c0bf27f0326e57c80bfe6b89ab8ea4ffc2", + "edit_distance": 0.5294592413236481, + "f1_score": 0.8796992481203008, + "meteor": 0.6139880307427287, + "precision": 0.9212598425196851, + "pred_md": "arXiv:1001.2602v1 [quant-ph] 15 Jan 2010\n\n## Engineering directed excitonic energy transfer\n\nAlejandro Perdomo, Leslie Vogt, Ali Najmaie, and Alan Aspuru-Guzik Department of Chemistry and Chemical Biology, Harvard University, 12 Oxford Street, 02138, Cambridge, MA\n\nWe provide an intuitive platform for engineering exciton transfer dynamics. We show that careful consideration of the spectral density, which describes the system-bath interaction, leads to opportunities to engineer the transfer of an exciton. Since excitons in nanostructures are proposed for use in quantum information processing and artificial photosynthetic designs, our approach paves the way for engineering a wide range of desired exciton dynamics. We carefully describe the validity of the model and use experimentally relevant material parameters to show counter-intuitive examples of a directed exciton transfer in a linear chain of quantum dots.\n\nThe widely-applied Frster theory for energy transfer o links experimental results to estimates of system information, particularly in biological and nanoscale applications [1, 2]. The usefulness of this theory is partly due to the simple expression of the kinetic rate constants as a product of electronic coupling and a spectral overlap factor which captures the complexity of the environment. Forster theory describes transport in the incoherent limit, but a complementary and more elaborate approach, such as Redfield theory, is often required to describe energy transfer. However, the information essential to understanding the dynamics is buried within the structure of the equations. In this letter, we employ a quantum kinetic rate approach to distill the information contained in equations into a simple, yet instructive, formula. We use this approach to design directed exciton transfer mediated by an environment.\n\nExcitonic energy transfer (EET) has been studied in systems as varied as quantum dot (QD) nanostructures [3, 4], polymer chains [5], and photosynthetic complexes [6, 7]. Many applications of EET would benefit from controlling exciton dynamics. Perfect state transfer, as studied in the quantum computing community, is achievable in certain engineered systems, but only at particular times during coherent evolution [8]. Recent works have shown that environment-induced decoherence can alter exciton dynamics [9-11], although controlling the transfer direction has only been achieved using external potentials [12]. Our paper builds upon the idea of engineering exciton transfer by designing appropriate system-bath interactions [13, 14]. We show that it is possible to design experimentally realizable systems where the environment can be used to direct the flow of energy.\n\nThe Hamiltonian used in our simulation aims to capture dynamics in a single-exciton manifold [15] interacting with an environment,\n\n\n\nwith\n\nmophores), with excitation energy E n for each site and inter-site coupling J mn . The environment is described by a phonon bath,\n\n\n\nwhere b † q ( b q ) is the creation (destruction) operator for a phonon with wavevector q . The system-bath interaction is assumed to be linear,\n\n\n\nwhere g n q describes the site-specific coupling of electronic and vibrational degrees of freedom. We ignore the offdiagonal terms in the above equation, which correspond to phonon-induced modulations of the inter-site coupling, J mn [15]. While fluctuations of the gap give rise to the diagonal electron-phonon coupling considered here [16], the inter-site couplings are usually one or two orders of magnitude smaller than the excitation gap and are therefore kept constant. In general, the validity of this approximation is still an open question and its applicability varies from system to system.\n\nTo describe the excitonic quantum dynamics we use Redfield theory [17-19], which is a reduced density matrix approach in the regime of weak system-bath coupling. The formalism involves second-order perturbation theory in the system-bath interaction, ˆ H sb . This method assumes the Markov approximation, no initial correlations between system and bath degrees of freedom, and a thermalized bath. We avoid the frequently employed secular approximation (Bloch equations) [15, 19]; it is important to note that for systems where the time scale | ω ab -ω cd | -1 is comparable or larger than the characteristic decoherence time, the coherence to population transfers contribute considerably to the dynamics of the system and must therefore be included.\n\nThe equation of motion for the density operator ˆ( ) ρ t in the excitonic energy basis representation, ˆ H s | e a 〉 = /epsilon1 a | e a 〉 , is given by [17-19],\n\n\n\n/negationslash\n\n\n\nThis representation is in the site basis {| s n 〉} of localized excitations on each of N sites, (e.g. QDs or chro-", + "recall": 0.841726618705036, + "true_md": "# Engineering directed excitonic energy transfer\n\nAlejandro Perdomo, Leslie Vogt, Ali Najmaie, and Alan Aspuru-Guzik\n\nDepartment of Chemistry and Chemical Biology, Harvard University, 12 Oxford Street, 02138, Cambridge, MA\n\nWe provide an intuitive platform for engineering exciton transfer dynamics. We show that careful consideration of the spectral density, which describes the system-bath interaction, leads to opportu- nities to engineer the transfer of an exciton. Since excitons in nanostructures are proposed for use in quantum information processing and artificial photosynthetic designs, our approach paves the way for engineering a wide range of desired exciton dynamics. We carefully describe the validity of the model and use experimentally relevant material parameters to show counter-intuitive examples of a directed exciton transfer in a linear chain of quantum dots.\n\nThe widely-applied F¨ orster theory for energy transfer links experimental results to estimates of system infor- mation, particularly in biological and nanoscale appli- cations [1, 2]. The usefulness of this theory is partly due to the simple expression of the kinetic rate constants as a product of electronic coupling and a spectral over- lap factor which captures the complexity of the environ- ment. F¨ orster theory describes transport in the inco- herent limit, but a complementary and more elaborate approach, such as Redfield theory, is often required to describe energy transfer. However, the information es- sential to understanding the dynamics is buried within the structure of the equations. In this letter, we employ a quantum kinetic rate approach to distill the informa- tion contained in equations into a simple, yet instructive, formula. We use this approach to design directed exciton transfer mediated by an environment.\n\nExcitonic energy transfer (EET) has been studied in systems as varied as quantum dot (QD) nanostructures [3, 4], polymer chains [5], and photosynthetic complexes [6, 7]. Many applications of EET would benefit from controlling exciton dynamics. Perfect state transfer, as studied in the quantum computing community, is achiev- able in certain engineered systems, but only at particular times during coherent evolution [8]. Recent works have shown that environment-induced decoherence can alter exciton dynamics [9–11], although controlling the trans- fer direction has only been achieved using external poten- tials [12]. Our paper builds upon the idea of engineering exciton transfer by designing appropriate system-bath in- teractions [13, 14]. We show that it is possible to design experimentally realizable systems where the environment can be used to direct the flow of energy.\n\nThe Hamiltonian used in our simulation aims to cap- ture dynamics in a single-exciton manifold [15] interact- ing with an environment,\n\nwith\n\nThis representation is in the site basis {| s$_{n}$ 〉} of local- ized excitations on each of N sites, (e.g. QDs or chro-\n\nThe equation of motion for the density operator ˆ ρ ( t ) in the excitonic energy basis representation, ˆ H$_{s}$ | e$_{a}$ 〉 = ϵ$_{a}$ | e$_{a}$ 〉 , is given by [17–19],\n\nTo describe the excitonic quantum dynamics we use Redfield theory [17–19], which is a reduced density ma- trix approach in the regime of weak system-bath cou- pling. The formalism involves second-order perturbation theory in the system-bath interaction, ˆ H$_{sb}$ . This method assumes the Markov approximation, no initial correla- tions between system and bath degrees of freedom, and a thermalized bath. We avoid the frequently employed secular approximation (Bloch equations) [15, 19]; it is important to note that for systems where the time scale | ω$_{ab}$ − ω$_{cd}$ | − 1 is comparable or larger than the charac- teristic decoherence time, the coherence to population transfers contribute considerably to the dynamics of the system and must therefore be included.\n\nwhere g n q describes the site-specific coupling of electronic and vibrational degrees of freedom. We ignore the off- diagonal terms in the above equation, which correspond to phonon-induced modulations of the inter-site coupling, J$_{mn}$ [15]. While fluctuations of the gap give rise to the di- agonal electron-phonon coupling considered here [16], the inter-site couplings are usually one or two orders of mag- nitude smaller than the excitation gap and are therefore kept constant. In general, the validity of this approxima- tion is still an open question and its applicability varies from system to system.\n\nwhere b † q ( b$_{q}$ ) is the creation (destruction) operator for a phonon with wavevector q . The system-bath interaction is assumed to be linear,\n\nmophores), with excitation energy E$_{n}$ for each site and inter-site coupling J$_{mn}$ . The environment is described by a phonon bath,\n\n$$ˆ H$_{b}$ = ∑ q ℏ ω$_{q}$ ( b † $_{q}$b$_{q}$ + 1 / 2) , (3)$$\n\n$$ˆ H$_{sb}$ = N ∑ n =1 | s$_{n}$ 〉 〈 s$_{n}$ | ∑ q ℏ ω$_{q}$ ( g n $_{q}$b † q + ( g n $_{q}$) $^{∗}$b$_{q}$ ) . (4)$$\n\n$$ˆ H = ˆ H$_{s}$ + ˆ H$_{b}$ + ˆ H$_{sb}$ (1)$$\n\n$$ˆ H$_{s}$ = N ∑ n =1 E$_{n}$ | s$_{n}$ 〉 〈 s$_{n}$ | + ∑ n ̸ = m J$_{mn}$ | s$_{m}$ 〉 〈 s$_{n}$ | . (2)$$\n\n$$d ρ$_{ab}$ ( t ) d t = − iω$_{ab}$ρ$_{ab}$ ( t ) + ∑ cd R$_{ab,cd}$ρ$_{cd}$ ( t ) , (5)$$\n\narXiv:1001.2602v1 [quant-ph] 15 Jan 2010" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7426451958255869, + "doc_id": "436d23e6070a88171345d96e5fe3bdd99ac6104b420e604e0fab191b44d75beb", + "edit_distance": 0.7914645974781765, + "f1_score": 0.9215406562054207, + "meteor": 0.6500174216206049, + "precision": 0.9641791044776119, + "pred_md": "FIG. 1: The honeycomb lattice for the Kitaev model. Filled and open circles indicate two sublattices. x, y, z label the links along three different directions used in (1).\n\nFIG. 1: The honeycomb lattice for the Kitaev model. Filled and open circles indicate two sublattices. x, y, z label the links along three different directions used in (1).\n\nderived as well. There have been several proposals to open the fermion gap for the non-Abelian phase without spoiling exact solvability 4,6 . And many generalizations to other(even 3D) lattices have been developed in the last few years 10-16 . All these efforts have significantly enriched our knowledge of exactly solvable models and quantum phases of matter.\n\nHowever, in the original Kitaev model and its later generalizations in the form of spin models, spin rotation symmetry is explicitly broken. This makes them harder to realize in solid state systems. There are many proposals to realized the Kitaev model in more controllable situations, e.g. in cold atom optical lattices 17,18 , or in superconducting circuits 19 . But it is still desirable for theoretical curiosity and practical purposes to realize the Kitaev-type models in spin rotation invariant systems.\n\nIn this paper we realize the Kitaev honeycomb lattice model as the low energy Hamiltonian for a spin rotation invariant system. The trick is not to use the physical spin as the spin in the Kitaev model, instead the spin-1/2 in Kitaev model is from some emergent two-fold degenerate low energy states in the elementary unit of physical system. This type of idea has been explored recently by Jackeli and Khaliullin 20 , in which the spin-1/2 in the Kitaev model is the low energy Kramers doublet created by strong spin-orbit coupling of t 2 g orbitals. In the model presented below, the Hilbert space of spin-1/2 in the Kitaev model is actually the two dimensional spin singlet sector of four antiferromagnetically coupled spin-1/2 moments, and the role of spin-1/2 operators(Pauli matrices) in the Kitaev model is replaced by certain combinations of S j · S k [or the spin-chirality S j · ( S k × S /lscript )] between the four spins.\n\nOne major drawback of the model to be presented is that it contains high order spin interactions(involves up to six or eight spins), thus is still unnatural. However it opens the possibility to realize exotic (exactly solvable) models from spin-1/2 Hamiltonian with spin rotation invariant interactions. We will discuss two possible routes to reduce this artificialness through controlled perturbative expansions, by coupling to optical phonons or by magnetic couplings between the elementary units.\n\nThe outline of this paper is as follows. In Section II we will lay out the pseudo-spin-1/2 construction. In Sec-\n\n2\n\nFIG. 2: Left: the physical spin lattice for the model (8). The dash circles are honeycomb lattice sites, each of which is actually a cluster of four physical spins. The dash straight lines are honeycomb lattice bonds, with their type x, y, z labeled. The interaction between clusters connected by x, y, z bonds are the J x,y,z terms in (8) or (9) respectively. Note this is not the 3-12 lattice used in Ref. 9,10 . Right: enlarged picture of the clusters with the four physical spins labeled as 1 , . . . , 4. Thick solid bonds within one cluster have large antiferromagnetic Heisenberg coupling J cluster .\n\nFIG. 2: Left: the physical spin lattice for the model (8). The dash circles are honeycomb lattice sites, each of which is actually a cluster of four physical spins. The dash straight lines are honeycomb lattice bonds, with their type x, y, z labeled. The interaction between clusters connected by x, y, z bonds are the J x,y,z terms in (8) or (9) respectively. Note this is not the 3-12 lattice used in Ref. 9,10 . Right: enlarged picture of the clusters with the four physical spins labeled as 1 , . . . , 4. Thick solid bonds within one cluster have large antiferromagnetic Heisenberg coupling J cluster .\n\ntion III the Kitaev model will be explicitly constructed using this formalism, and some properties of this construction will be discussed. In Section IV we will discuss two possible ways to generate the high order spin interactions involved in the construction of Section III by perturbative expansions. Conclusions and outlook will be summarized in Section V.\n\n## II. FORMULATION OF THE PSEUDO-SPIN-1/2 FROM FOUR-SPIN CLUSTER.\n\nIn this Section we will construct the pseudo-spin-1/2 from a cluster of four physical spins, and map the physical spin operators to pseudo-spin operators. The mapping constructed here will be used in later Sections to construct the effective Kitaev model. In this Section we will work entirely within the four-spin cluster, all unspecified physical spin subscripts take values 1 , . . . , 4.\n\nConsider a cluster of four spin-1/2 moments(called physical spins hereafter), labeled by S 1 ,..., 4 , antiferromagnetically coupled to each other (see the right bottom part of FIG. 2). The Hamiltonian within the cluster(up to a constant) is simply the Heisenberg antiferromagnetic(AFM) interactions,\n\n\n\nThe energy levels should be apparent from this form: one group of spin-2 quintets with energy 3 J cluster , three groups of spin-1 triplets with energy J cluster , and two spin singlets with energy zero. We will consider large positive", + "recall": 0.8825136612021858, + "true_md": "FIG. 1: The honeycomb lattice for the Kitaev model. Filled and open circles indicate two sublattices. x, y, z label the links along three different directions used in (1).\n\nFIG. 2: Left: the physical spin lattice for the model (8). The dash circles are honeycomb lattice sites, each of which is ac- tually a cluster of four physical spins. The dash straight lines are honeycomb lattice bonds, with their type x, y, z labeled. The interaction between clusters connected by x, y, z bonds are the J x,y,z terms in (8) or (9) respectively. Note this is not the 3-12 lattice used in Ref. $^{9,10}$. Right: enlarged picture of the clusters with the four physical spins labeled as 1 , . . . , 4. Thick solid bonds within one cluster have large antiferromag- netic Heisenberg coupling J cluster .\n\n2\n\nderived as well. There have been several proposals to open the fermion gap for the non-Abelian phase without spoiling exact solvability $^{4,6}$. And many generalizations to other(even 3D) lattices have been developed in the last few years $^{10–16}$. All these efforts have significantly enriched our knowledge of exactly solvable models and quantum phases of matter.\n\nHowever, in the original Kitaev model and its later generalizations in the form of spin models, spin rotation symmetry is explicitly broken. This makes them harder to realize in solid state systems. There are many pro- posals to realized the Kitaev model in more controllable situations, e.g. in cold atom optical lattices $^{17,18}$, or in superconducting circuits $^{19}$. But it is still desirable for theoretical curiosity and practical purposes to realize the Kitaev-type models in spin rotation invariant systems.\n\ntion III the Kitaev model will be explicitly constructed using this formalism, and some properties of this con- struction will be discussed. In Section IV we will discuss two possible ways to generate the high order spin in- teractions involved in the construction of Section III by perturbative expansions. Conclusions and outlook will be summarized in Section V.\n\nIn this paper we realize the Kitaev honeycomb lattice model as the low energy Hamiltonian for a spin rotation invariant system. The trick is not to use the physical spin as the spin in the Kitaev model, instead the spin-1/2 in Kitaev model is from some emergent two-fold degener- ate low energy states in the elementary unit of physical system. This type of idea has been explored recently by Jackeli and Khaliullin $^{20}$, in which the spin-1/2 in the Ki- taev model is the low energy Kramers doublet created by strong spin-orbit coupling of t$_{2}$$\\_{g}$ orbitals. In the model presented below, the Hilbert space of spin-1/2 in the Ki- taev model is actually the two dimensional spin singlet sector of four antiferromagnetically coupled spin-1/2 mo- ments, and the role of spin-1/2 operators(Pauli matrices) in the Kitaev model is replaced by certain combinations of S$\\_{j}$ · S$\\_{k}$ [or the spin-chirality S$\\_{j}$ · ( S$\\_{k}$ × S$\\_{ℓ}$ )] between the four spins.\n\nIn this Section we will construct the pseudo-spin-1/2 from a cluster of four physical spins, and map the phys- ical spin operators to pseudo-spin operators. The map- ping constructed here will be used in later Sections to construct the effective Kitaev model. In this Section we will work entirely within the four-spin cluster, all unspec- ified physical spin subscripts take values 1 , . . . , 4.\n\n## II. FORMULATION OF THE PSEUDO-SPIN-1/2 FROM FOUR-SPIN CLUSTER.\n\nOne major drawback of the model to be presented is that it contains high order spin interactions(involves up to six or eight spins), thus is still unnatural. However it opens the possibility to realize exotic (exactly solvable) models from spin-1/2 Hamiltonian with spin rotation in- variant interactions. We will discuss two possible routes to reduce this artificialness through controlled perturba- tive expansions, by coupling to optical phonons or by magnetic couplings between the elementary units.\n\nThe outline of this paper is as follows. In Section II we will lay out the pseudo-spin-1/2 construction. In Sec-\n\nConsider a cluster of four spin-1/2 moments(called physical spins hereafter), labeled by S$_{1}$$\\_{,...,}$$_{4}$ , antiferro- magnetically coupled to each other (see the right bot- tom part of FIG. 2). The Hamiltonian within the clus- ter(up to a constant) is simply the Heisenberg antiferro- magnetic(AFM) interactions,\n\nThe energy levels should be apparent from this form: one group of spin-2 quintets with energy 3 J$_{cluster}$ , three groups of spin-1 triplets with energy J$_{cluster}$ , and two spin singlets with energy zero. We will consider large positive\n\n$$H$_{cluster}$ = ( J$_{cluster}$/ 2) ( S$_{1}$ + S$_{2}$ + S$_{3}$ + S$_{4}$ ) 2 (2)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6032789642767806, + "doc_id": "9cdd19acfcb76bee4def2b6cb4c9fbbb94c42753d90801aadf39d3b52fc8599b", + "edit_distance": 0.8034433285509326, + "f1_score": 0.8756218905472637, + "meteor": 0.47205821771127476, + "precision": 0.9134948096885813, + "pred_md": "sions are outlined.\n\n## II. SPECTRAL SINGULARITIES IN A NON-HERMITIAN FRIEDRICHS-FANO-ANDERSON MODEL\n\n## A. The model\n\nThe standard FFA model describes the interaction of a discrete state | a 〉 , of energy E a , with a continuous set of states | k 〉 with energy E k ( ) (see, for instance, [22, 24-26, 29, 36]). Here | a 〉 and | k 〉 represent a complete set of Dirac states in the Hilbert space which satisfy the orthonormal conditions 〈 a a | 〉 = 1, 〈 a k | 〉 = 0 and 〈 k ' | k 〉 = δ k ( -k ' ). The Hamiltonian of the full system can be written as H = H 0 + V , where\n\n\n\nis the Hamiltonian of the non-interacting discrete and continuous states, and\n\n\n\nis the (self-adjoint) interaction term, described by the spectral coupling function v k ( ). Typically, we assume that the energy E k ( ) of continuous states spans the interval E 1 < E < E 2 (eventually E 2 = ∞ ), and E k ( ) is a monotonic function (either increasing or decreasing) of k , i.e. we assume that there are not energy degeneracies of continuous states. The state vector of the system | ψ 〉 evolves according to the Schrdinger equation (with o /planckover2pi1 = 1)\n\n\n\nNote that, provided that the energies E a and E k ( ) are real-valued, the Hamiltonian H is Hermitian. The spectrum of H can be determined by either analyzing the singularities of the resolvent G z ( ) = ( z -H ) -1 , or by projecting the eigenvalue equation H ψ | 〉 = E ψ | 〉 on the basis {| a , 〉 | k 〉} . As is well known, the continuous spectrum of H is E 1 < E < E 2 , i.e. the same as that of H 0 , whereas the point spectrum can be either empty or composed by a number of discrete eigenvalues, either outside or embedded into the continuous spectrum (see, for instance, [22, 39, 40]).\n\nWe now relax the Hermiticity condition of the FFA model by allowing the 'energy' E a of the discrete state | a 〉 to be complex valued. However, we will assume that the spectrum of H remains real-valued in spite of the nonHermiticity of H . The condition for the spectrum of H to remain real-valued will be discussed below in Sec.II.B and corresponds to the absence of bound states, i.e. to an empty point spectrum. This means that a non-Hermitian\n\n2\n\nFFA Hamiltonian has a real-valued energy spectrum if and only if its spectrum is purely continuous. We are interested here to determine, if any, the appearance of spectral singularities of H , which would prevent H to be diagonalizable. This problem can be addressed in two ways: (i) by the determination of the resolvent G z ( ), and (ii) by a direct diagonalization of H following the original procedure by Fano [18], extended to account for the non-Hermitian nature of H . In the former case, a spectral singularity at E = E 0 , embedded in the continuous spectrum ( E , E 1 2 ), is revealed as a divergence of the Green function G ( x, y ; z ) = 〈 x G z y | ( ) 〉 in a neighborhood of z = E 0 , divergence which does not corresponds to a bound state embedded in the continuum [9]. In the latter case, a spectral singularity at E = E 0 occurs when 〈E † 0 |E 0 〉 = 0, where |E 0 〉 and |E † 0 〉 are the eigenfunctions of H and of its adjoint H † , respectively, corresponding to the eigenvalue E 0 [9].\n\n## B. Spectral singularities: the resolvent approach\n\nFor a given complex number z , the resolvent operator G z ( ) of the Hamiltonian H is defined as\n\n\n\ni.e. G z ( )( z -H ) = ( z -H G z ) ( ) = I , where I is the identity operator. The knowledge of the resolvent of H , for any z , is equivalent to the knowledge of the set of eigenfunctions and eigenvalues of H . In particular, the singularities of G z ( ) in the complex plane define the spectrum of H : an eigenvalue E belonging to the point spectrum of H is a pole of G z ( ), whereas the branch cut of G z ( ) determines the continuous part of the spectrum of H . The Hamiltonian H is said to have a spectral singularity at E = E 0 , where E 0 belongs to the continuous spectrum of H , if the function\n\n\n\nis unbounded in the neighborhood of z = E 0 , and E 0 does not belong to the point spectrum of H , i.e. it does not corresponds to a bound state embedded in the continuum [9]. In the previous equation, | χ 〉 and | ϕ 〉 are two assigned functions of the Hilbert space; in particular, for | χ 〉 = | x 〉 and | ϕ 〉 = | y 〉 one obtains the coordinate representation of the resolvent G , i.e. the Green function G ( x, y ; z ) = 〈 x G z y | ( ) 〉 . An interesting property of the FFA Hamiltonian is the possibility to calculate the resolvent in a closed form. The procedure to calculate G z ( ) is well known for the Hermitian case (see, for instance, [26]), and can be extended mutatis mutandis to the non-Hermitian FFA model considered in this work. As detailed in the Appendix A, the matrix elements of the resolvent G z ( ) on the complete basis {| a , 〉 | k 〉} read explicitly", + "recall": 0.8407643312101911, + "true_md": "2\n\nFFA Hamiltonian has a real-valued energy spectrum if and only if its spectrum is purely continuous. We are interested here to determine, if any, the appearance of spectral singularities of H , which would prevent H to be diagonalizable. This problem can be addressed in two ways: (i) by the determination of the resolvent G ( z ), and (ii) by a direct diagonalization of H following the original procedure by Fano [18], extended to account for the non-Hermitian nature of H . In the former case, a spectral singularity at E = E $_{0}$, embedded in the continu- ous spectrum ( E$_{1}$,E$_{2}$ ), is revealed as a divergence of the Green function G ( x,y ; z ) = 〈 x | G ( z ) y 〉 in a neighborhood of z = E $_{0}$, divergence which does not corresponds to a bound state embedded in the continuum [9]. In the lat- ter case, a spectral singularity at E = E 0 occurs when 〈E † 0 |E 0 〉 = 0, where |E 0 〉 and |E † 0 〉 are the eigenfunctions of H and of its adjoint H $^{†}$, respectively, corresponding to the eigenvalue E 0 [9].\n\nThe standard FFA model describes the interaction of a discrete state | a 〉 , of energy E$_{a}$ , with a continuous set of states | k 〉 with energy E ( k ) (see, for instance, [22, 24–26, 29, 36]). Here | a 〉 and | k 〉 represent a com- plete set of Dirac states in the Hilbert space which sat- isfy the orthonormal conditions 〈 a | a 〉 = 1, 〈 a | k 〉 = 0 and 〈 k $^{′}$| k 〉 = δ ( k − k $^{′}$). The Hamiltonian of the full system can be written as H = H$_{0}$ + V , where\n\nsions are outlined.\n\n## A. The model\n\n## II. SPECTRAL SINGULARITIES IN A NON-HERMITIAN FRIEDRICHS-FANO-ANDERSON MODEL\n\n$$H$_{0}$ = E$_{a}$ | a 〉〈 a | + ∫ dk E ( k ) | k 〉〈 k | (1)$$\n\n$$V = ∫ dk [ v ( k ) | a 〉〈 k | + v $^{∗}$( k ) | k 〉〈 a | ] (2)$$\n\n## B. Spectral singularities: the resolvent approach\n\nis the Hamiltonian of the non-interacting discrete and continuous states, and\n\nis the (self-adjoint) interaction term, described by the spectral coupling function v ( k ). Typically, we assume that the energy E ( k ) of continuous states spans the in- terval E$_{1}$ < E < E$_{2}$ (eventually E$_{2}$ = ∞ ), and E ( k ) is a monotonic function (either increasing or decreasing) of k , i.e. we assume that there are not energy degenera- cies of continuous states. The state vector of the system | ψ 〉 evolves according to the Schr¨ odinger equation (with ℏ = 1)\n\nFor a given complex number z , the resolvent operator G ( z ) of the Hamiltonian H is defined as\n\ni.e. G ( z )( z − H ) = ( z − H ) G ( z ) = I , where I is the iden- tity operator. The knowledge of the resolvent of H , for any z , is equivalent to the knowledge of the set of eigen- functions and eigenvalues of H . In particular, the singu- larities of G ( z ) in the complex plane define the spectrum of H : an eigenvalue E belonging to the point spectrum of H is a pole of G ( z ), whereas the branch cut of G ( z ) de- termines the continuous part of the spectrum of H . The Hamiltonian H is said to have a spectral singularity at E = E $_{0}$, where E 0 belongs to the continuous spectrum of H , if the function\n\n$$G ( z ) = ( z − H ) − $^{1}$, (4)$$\n\n$$G $_{χ,ϕ}$( z ) = 〈 χ | G ( z ) ϕ 〉 (5)$$\n\n$$i ∂ | ψ 〉 ∂t = H | ψ 〉 . (3)$$\n\nis unbounded in the neighborhood of z = E $_{0}$, and E 0 does not belong to the point spectrum of H , i.e. it does not corresponds to a bound state embedded in the con- tinuum [9]. In the previous equation, | χ 〉 and | ϕ 〉 are two assigned functions of the Hilbert space; in particular, for | χ 〉 = | x 〉 and | ϕ 〉 = | y 〉 one obtains the coordinate representation of the resolvent G , i.e. the Green func- tion G ( x,y ; z ) = 〈 x | G ( z ) y 〉 . An interesting property of the FFA Hamiltonian is the possibility to calculate the resolvent in a closed form. The procedure to calculate G ( z ) is well known for the Hermitian case (see, for in- stance, [26]), and can be extended mutatis mutandis to the non-Hermitian FFA model considered in this work. As detailed in the Appendix A, the matrix elements of the resolvent G ( z ) on the complete basis {| a 〉 , | k 〉} read explicitly\n\nNote that, provided that the energies E$_{a}$ and E ( k ) are real-valued, the Hamiltonian H is Hermitian. The spec- trum of H can be determined by either analyzing the singularities of the resolvent G ( z ) = ( z − H ) − $^{1}$, or by projecting the eigenvalue equation H | ψ 〉 = E | ψ 〉 on the basis {| a 〉 , | k 〉} . As is well known, the continuous spec- trum of H is E$_{1}$ < E < E$_{2}$ , i.e. the same as that of H$_{0}$ , whereas the point spectrum can be either empty or com- posed by a number of discrete eigenvalues, either outside or embedded into the continuous spectrum (see, for in- stance, [22, 39, 40]).\n\nWe now relax the Hermiticity condition of the FFA model by allowing the ’energy’ E$_{a}$ of the discrete state | a 〉 to be complex valued. However, we will assume that the spectrum of H remains real-valued in spite of the non- Hermiticity of H . The condition for the spectrum of H to remain real-valued will be discussed below in Sec.II.B and corresponds to the absence of bound states, i.e. to an empty point spectrum. This means that a non-Hermitian" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5196127591212251, + "doc_id": "4e7e5a0ce9cd657fb015d6bd07bca6afc0653bae69535ebc8b0853c830eafd9e", + "edit_distance": 0.7613924050632911, + "f1_score": 0.9083870967741936, + "meteor": 0.5007138100189781, + "precision": 0.9411764705882353, + "pred_md": "D e can be negative although D is not. This holds for a much wider class of nonequilibrium models than the one studied here; we return to this point at the end of the paper.\n\nFor the choice of v ρ ( ) made in our simulations, we have D e = D ρ ( )[1 -ρλ/ 2] and the flat profile will thus become unstable for ρ 0 above 2 /λ . We have confirmed this numerically, and find that upon increasing ρ 0 , the uniform state becomes (linearly) unstable, evolving in a 1D geometry into a series of 'bands' of high bacterial density separated by low density regions. Depending on the parameters, this transition can be continuous (supercritical), with the onset of a harmonic profile whose amplitude grows smoothly with ρ 0 , or discontinuous (subcritical) with strongly anharmonic profiles (see Fig. 1).\n\nFigure 1: Growth of the instability in the supercritical (left) and subcritical cases (right). The three lines correspond to three successive times. A small perturbation around ρ 0 (red line) growth toward harmonic or anharmonic patterns in the supercritical or subcritical case, respectively. Left : Supercritical case ( α = κ = 0 01, . λ = 0 02, . ρ 0 = 15, D 0 = 1, times: 10 , 2 10 , 3 10 ). 4 Right : Subcritical case ( α = κ = 0 005, . λ = 0 02, . ρ 0 = 11, D 0 = 1, times: 3 10 , 3 . 2 . 10 , 10 3 5 )\n\nFigure 1: Growth of the instability in the supercritical (left) and subcritical cases (right). The three lines correspond to three successive times. A small perturbation around ρ 0 (red line) growth toward harmonic or anharmonic patterns in the supercritical or subcritical case, respectively. Left : Supercritical case ( α = κ = 0 01, . λ = 0 02, . ρ 0 = 15, D 0 = 1, times: 10 , 2 10 , 3 10 ). 4 Right : Subcritical case ( α = κ = 0 005, . λ = 0 02, . ρ 0 = 11, D 0 = 1, times: 3 10 , 3 . 2 . 10 , 10 3 5 )\n\nThe transition to pattern formation arising from Eq. (1) is a fully nonequilibrium one: it is not possible to write down an effective thermodynamic free energy which would lead to this equation of motion. Nonetheless, it is possible to understand why the birth/death process effectively arrests the spinodal decomposition induced by the density-dependent swim speed. The latter tends to separate the system into high and low density domains with densities either side of ρ 0 . (Without the logistic term, these would coarsen with time.) Bacteria thus tend to be born in the low density regions and to die in the high density regions. To maintain a steady state, they have to travel from one to the other: balancing the birth/death terms by the diffusion-drift transport flux between the domains then sets a typical scale beyond which domain coarsening can no longer progress. Were any domain to become much larger, the density at its centre would soon regress towards ρ 0 , re-triggering the spinodal instability locally. (This is closely reminiscent of what happens in a thermodynamic phase separation when the supersaturation is continuously ramped [25].)\n\nTo better understand the onset of the instability, let us linearize Eq. (1) around ρ ( r ) = ρ 0 and work in Fourier space. Defining ρ ( r ) = ρ 0 + ∑ q δρ q exp( i q · r ) yields:\n\n\n\n3\n\nFigure 2: Three plots of Λ q ( q ) for |D e ( ρ 0 ) | / √ ακ = 1; 2; 3. At the transition, only one critical mode q = q c is unstable.\n\nFigure 2: Three plots of Λ q ( q ) for |D e ( ρ 0 ) | / √ ακ = 1; 2; 3. At the transition, only one critical mode q = q c is unstable.\n\nThe flat profile ρ = ρ 0 is thus stable if Λ q ≤ 0 for all q and is unstable otherwise. From the expression for D e ( ρ 0 ), Eq. (2), one sees that instability occurs if\n\n\n\nAt the onset of the instability only one mode is unstable, with wavevector q c = √ 2 α/ |D e ( ρ 0 ) , | as can be seen in Figure 2. The first condition in Eq. (4), Φ ≥ 1, is equivalent to the requirement that D e < 0 given previously. From the dispersion relation, Eq. (3), we see that the resulting destabilization is balanced by the stabilizing actions of bacterial reproduction and the surface tension at large and small wavelength, respectively. The unstable modes thus lie within a band q 1 < q < q 2 where q 1 glyph[similarequal] q α ≡ √ α/ |D e ( ρ 0 ) | and q 2 glyph[similarequal] q κ ≡ √ |D e ( ρ 0 ) | /κ set the wavelengths below and above which the stabilizing effects of bacteria reproduction and the surface tension can compete with the destabilizing effect of the negative diffusivity, respectively. For unstable modes to exist, one needs q 1 ≤ q 2 ; restoring prefactors, this yields 2 q α ≤ q κ which is the second criterion in Eq. (4). This analysis is consistent with the view that phase separation is arrested by the birth/death dynamics, which stabilizes the long wavelength modes (Λ 0 = -α ), while the phenomenological tension parameter κ primarily fixes the interfacial structure of the domains, not their separation.\n\nWe now consider more closely the parameters controlling the transition to pattern formation. For definiteness, we address the specific case used for our simulations, D ρ ( ) = D (0) exp( -λρ ). To put Eq. (1) in dimensionless form, we define rescaled time, space and density as\n\n\n\nThe equation of motion now reads\n\n\n\nwhere R ≡ D / 0 √ ακ and Φ = λρ / 0 2 are the two remaining dimensionless control parameters. Meanwhile the conditions (4) for pattern formation become\n\n", + "recall": 0.8778054862842892, + "true_md": "3\n\nD$_{e}$ can be negative although D is not. This holds for a much wider class of nonequilibrium models than the one studied here; we return to this point at the end of the paper.\n\nFor the choice of v ( ρ ) made in our simulations, we have D$_{e}$ = D ( ρ )[1 − ρλ/ 2] and the flat profile will thus become unstable for ρ$_{0}$ above 2 /λ . We have confirmed this numerically, and find that upon increasing ρ$_{0}$ , the uniform state becomes (linearly) unstable, evolving in a 1D geometry into a series of “bands” of high bacterial density separated by low density regions. Depending on the parameters, this transition can be continuous (super- critical), with the onset of a harmonic profile whose am- plitude grows smoothly with ρ$_{0}$ , or discontinuous (sub- critical) with strongly anharmonic profiles (see Fig. 1).\n\nFigure 2: Three plots of Λ$_{q}$( q ) for |D$_{e}$ ( ρ$_{0}$ ) | / √ ακ = 1; 2; 3. At the transition, only one critical mode q = q$_{c}$ is unstable.\n\nThe flat profile ρ = ρ$_{0}$ is thus stable if Λ$_{q}$ ≤ 0 for all q and is unstable otherwise. From the expression for D$_{e}$ ( ρ$_{0}$ ), Eq. (2), one sees that instability occurs if\n\n$$Φ ≡ − ρ$_{0}$D $^{′}$( ρ$_{0}$ ) 2 D ( ρ$_{0}$ ) ≥ 1 and − D$_{e}$ ( ρ$_{0}$ ) √ ακ ≥ 2 (4)$$\n\nFigure 1: Growth of the instability in the supercritical (left) and subcritical cases (right). The three lines correspond to three successive times. A small perturbation around ρ$_{0}$ (red line) growth toward harmonic or anharmonic patterns in the supercritical or subcritical case, respectively. Left : Super- critical case ( α = κ = 0 . 01, λ = 0 . 02, ρ$_{0}$ = 15, D$_{0}$ = 1, times: 10 $^{2}$, 10$^{3}$, 10$^{4}$). Right : Subcritical case ( α = κ = 0 . 005, λ = 0 . 02, ρ$_{0}$ = 11, D$_{0}$ = 1, times: 3 . 10 $^{2}$, 3 . 10 $^{3}$, 10$^{5}$)\n\nAt the onset of the instability only one mode is unsta- ble, with wavevector q$_{c}$ = $^{√}$2 α/ |D$_{e}$ ( ρ$_{0}$ ) | , as can be seen in Figure 2. The first condition in Eq. (4), Φ ≥ 1, is equivalent to the requirement that D$_{e}$ < 0 given pre- viously. From the dispersion relation, Eq. (3), we see that the resulting destabilization is balanced by the sta- bilizing actions of bacterial reproduction and the surface tension at large and small wavelength, respectively. The unstable modes thus lie within a band q$_{1}$ < q < q$_{2}$ where q$_{1}$ ≃ q$_{α}$ ≡ $^{√}$α/ |D$_{e}$ ( ρ$_{0}$ ) | and q$_{2}$ ≃ q$_{κ}$ ≡ $^{√}$| D$_{e}$ ( ρ$_{0}$ ) | /κ set the wavelengths below and above which the stabilizing effects of bacteria reproduction and the surface tension can compete with the destabilizing effect of the negative diffusivity, respectively. For unstable modes to exist, one needs q$_{1}$ ≤ q$_{2}$ ; restoring prefactors, this yields 2 q$_{α}$ ≤ q$_{κ}$ which is the second criterion in Eq. (4). This analysis is consistent with the view that phase separation is arrested by the birth/death dynamics, which stabilizes the long wavelength modes (Λ$_{0}$ = − α ), while the phenomenolog- ical tension parameter κ primarily fixes the interfacial structure of the domains, not their separation.\n\nThe transition to pattern formation arising from Eq. (1) is a fully nonequilibrium one: it is not possible to write down an effective thermodynamic free energy which would lead to this equation of motion. Nonetheless, it is possible to understand why the birth/death process effec- tively arrests the spinodal decomposition induced by the density-dependent swim speed. The latter tends to sep- arate the system into high and low density domains with densities either side of ρ$_{0}$ . (Without the logistic term, these would coarsen with time.) Bacteria thus tend to be born in the low density regions and to die in the high density regions. To maintain a steady state, they have to travel from one to the other: balancing the birth/death terms by the diffusion-drift transport flux between the domains then sets a typical scale beyond which domain coarsening can no longer progress. Were any domain to become much larger, the density at its centre would soon regress towards ρ$_{0}$ , re-triggering the spinodal instability locally. (This is closely reminiscent of what happens in a thermodynamic phase separation when the supersatura- tion is continuously ramped [25].)\n\nWe now consider more closely the parameters control- ling the transition to pattern formation. For definite- ness, we address the specific case used for our simulations, D ( ρ ) = D (0) exp( − λρ ). To put Eq. (1) in dimensionless form, we define rescaled time, space and density as\n\nThe equation of motion now reads\n\n$$˜ t = αt ; ˜ r = ( α κ$^{)}$$^{1}$$^{/}$$^{4}$ r ; u = ρ ρ$_{0}$ (5)$$\n\n$$˙ u = ∇ · [ Re − 2Φ $^{u}$(1 − Φ u ) ∇ u ] + u (1 − u ) − ∇ $^{4}$u (6)$$\n\n$$Φ ≥ 1; R ≥ R$_{c}$ = 2 exp(2Φ) Φ − 1 (7)$$\n\n$$˙ δρ$_{q}$ = Λ$_{q}$ δ$_{q}$ ; Λ$_{q}$ = − α − q $^{2}$D$_{e}$ ( ρ$_{0}$ ) − κq 4 (3)$$\n\nwhere R ≡ D$_{0}$/ √ ακ and Φ = λρ$_{0}$/ 2 are the two re- maining dimensionless control parameters. Meanwhile the conditions (4) for pattern formation become\n\nTo better understand the onset of the instability, let us linearize Eq. (1) around ρ ( r ) = ρ$_{0}$ and work in Fourier space. Defining ρ ( r ) = ρ$_{0}$ + ∑ q δρ$_{q}$ exp( i q · r ) yields:" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.2198080602728914, + "doc_id": "2f2a06d08f5ad565d0f5e815f4ddf666365b2cff435cdaeb8850217e8a8efabf", + "edit_distance": 0.7927115987460815, + "f1_score": 0.9422492401215804, + "meteor": 0.28467519587866247, + "precision": 0.950920245398773, + "pred_md": "this term becomes\n\n\n\nAnother second order perturbation term r 2 λ 2 P jk S k 2 · ( S j 3 × S j 4 )(1 - P jk )[0 -H cluster j -H cluster k ] -1 (1 -P jk ) S k 2 · ( S j 3 × S j 4 ) P jk can be computed in the similar way and gives the result -( r 2 λ 2 ) / (32 J cluster ) · (2 -τ x j ).\n\nFor one of the cross term\n\n\n\nWe can use the previous argument for both cluster j and k , so (1 -P AB )[0 -H cluster j -H cluster k ] -1 (1 -P jk ) can be replace by c -number ( -2 J cluster ) -1 . This term becomes\n\n\n\nSpin rotation symmetry again helps to separate the terms for cluster j and k , and we get ( r λ 2 ) / (32 J cluster ) τ z τ z .\n\nThe other cross term r λ P jk S k 2 · ( S j 3 × S j 4 )(1 P jk )[0 -H cluster j -H cluster k ] -1 (1 - P jk ) S j 2 · ( S k 3 S k 4 ) P jk gives the same result.\n\n-· j k 2 -×\n\nIn summary the second order perturbation from λ [ S j 2 · ( S j 3 × S j 4 ) + r S k 2 · ( S j 3 × S j 4 )] is\n\n\n\n- 1 Alexei Kitaev, Ann. Phys. (N.Y.) 321 , 2 (2006).\n- 2 Xiao-Yong Feng, Guang-Ming Zhang, Tao Xiang, Phys. Rev. Lett. 98 , 087204 (2007).\n- 3 Han-Dong Chen, Zohar Nussinov, J. Phys. A: Math. Theor. 41 , 075001 (2008).\n- 4 Dung-Hai Lee, Guang-Ming Zhang, Tao Xiang, Phys. Rev. Lett. 99 , 196805 (2007).\n- 5 Yue Yu, Nucl. Phys. B 799 , 345 (2008).\n- 6 Yue Yu, Ziqiang Wang, Europhys. Lett. 84 , 57002 (2008).\n- 7 G. Kells, J. K. Slingerland, J. Vala, Phys. Rev. B 80 , 125415 (2009).\n- 8 Han-Dong Chen, B. Wang, S. Das Sarma, arXiv:0906.0017 (2009).\n- 9 K.P. Schmidt, S. Dusuel, and J. Vidal, Phys. Rev. Lett. 100 , 057208 (2008); J. Vidal, K.P. Schmidt, and S. Dusuel, Phys. Rev. B 78 , 245121 (2008); S. Dusuel, K.P. Schmidt, J. Vidal, and R.L. Zaffino, Phys. Rev. B 78 , 125102 (2008).\n- 10 Hong Yao, Steven A. Kivelson, Phys. Rev. Lett. 99 , 247203 (2007).\n- 11 S. Yang, D. L. Zhou, C. P. Sun, Phys. Rev. B 76 , 180404(R) (2007).\n- 12 Hong Yao, Shou-Cheng Zhang, Steven A. Kivelson, Phys. Rev. Lett. 102 , 217202 (2009).\n- 13 Zohar Nussinov, Gerardo Ortiz, Phys. Rev. B 79 , 214440\n\n10\n\nUsing this result we can choose the following perturbation on z -links,\n\n\n\nwith λ z = 4 √ | J z | J cluster , r = sgn( J z ) is the sign of J z . The last term on the right-hand-side is to cancel the nontrivial terms ( r 2 τ x j + τ x k ) λ / 2 z (32 J cluster ) from the second order perturbation of the first term. Up to second order perturbation this will produce -J τ z z j τ z k interactions.\n\nFinally we have been able to reduce the high order interactions to at most three spin terms, the Hamiltonian H magnetic is\n\n\n\nwhere H cluster j are given by (2), λ x,y,z H perturbation x,y,z are given above. Plug in relevant equations we get (16) in Subsection IV B.\n\n(2009).\n\n- 14 Congjun Wu, Daniel Arovas, Hsiang-Hsuan Hung, Phys. Rev. B 79 , 134427 (2009).\n- 15 Shinsei Ryu, Phys. Rev. B 79 , 075124 (2009).\n- 16 G. Baskaran, G. Santhosh, R. Shankar, arXiv:0908.1614 (2009).\n- 17 L.-M. Duan, E. Demler, M. D. Lukin, Phys. Rev. Lett. 91 , 090402 (2003).\n- 18 A. Micheli, G. K. Brennen, P. Zoller, Nature Physics 2 , 341 (2006).\n- 19 J. Q. You, Xiao-Feng Shi, Xuedong Hu, Franco Nori, Phys. Rev. B 81 , 014505 (2010).\n- 20 G. Jackeli, G. Khaliullin, Phys. Rev. Lett. 102 , 017205 (2009).\n- 21 A. B. Harris, A. J. Berlinsky, C. Bruder, J. Appl. Phys. 69 , 5200 (1991).\n- 22 K. A. Chao, J. Spa/suppress lek, A. M. Ole' s, Phys. Rev. B 18 , 3453 (1978).\n- 23 A. H. MacDonald, S. M. Girvin, D. Yoshioka, Phys. Rev. B 37 , 9753 (1988).\n- 24 J. T. Chayes, L. Chayes, S. A. Kivelson, Commun. Math. Phys. 123 , 53 (1989).\n- 25 C. D. Batista, S. A. Trugman, Phys. Rev. Lett. 93 , 217202 (2004).", + "recall": 0.9337349397590361, + "true_md": "10\n\nUsing this result we can choose the following pertur- bation on z -links,\n\nthis term becomes\n\n$$λ$_{z}$ H$_{perturbation}$$_{, z}$ = λ$_{z}$ [ S$_{j}$$_{2}$ · ( S$_{k}$$_{3}$ × S$_{k}$$_{4}$ ) + sgn( J$_{z}$ ) · S$_{k}$$_{2}$ · ( S$_{j}$$_{3}$ × S$_{j}$$_{4}$ )] − | J$_{z}$ | ( S$_{j}$$_{3}$ · S$_{j}$$_{4}$ + S$_{k}$$_{3}$ · S$_{k}$$_{4}$ )$$\n\n$$− λ 2 6 J$_{cluster}$ · (3 / 4)[3 / 16 + ( τ $^{x}$/ 2 − 1 / 4) $^{2}$] = − ( λ $^{2}$) / (32 J$_{cluster}$ ) · (2 − τ x $_{k}$) .$$\n\n$$r λ 2 P $_{jk}$S$_{j}$$_{2}$ · ( S$_{k}$$_{3}$ × S$_{k}$$_{4}$ )(1 − P $_{jk}$) × [0 − H$_{cluster}$ j − H$_{cluster}$ $_{k}$] $^{−}$1 (1 − P $_{jk}$) S$_{k}$$_{2}$ · ( S$_{j}$$_{3}$ × S$_{j}$$_{4}$ ) P jk$$\n\n$$H$_{magnetic}$ = ∑ j H$_{cluster}$ j + ∑ x $^{−}$links λ$_{x}$H$_{perturbation}$ x + ∑ y $^{−}$links λ$_{y}$H$_{perturbation}$ y + ∑ z $^{−}$links λ$_{z}$H$_{perturbation}$ z$$\n\n$$− r λ 2 2 J$_{cluster}$ P $_{jk}$[ S$_{j}$$_{2}$ · ( S$_{k}$$_{3}$ × S$_{k}$$_{4}$ )][ S$_{k}$$_{2}$ · ( S$_{j}$$_{3}$ × S$_{j}$$_{3}$ )] P $_{jk}$.$$\n\n$$− r λ 2 16 J$_{cluster}$ · τ z j τ z k + λ 2 32 J$_{cluster}$ ( τ x k + r 2 τ x j − 2 r 2 − 2) .$$\n\nAnother second order perturbation term r $^{2}$λ2 P $_{jk}$S$_{k}$$\\_{2}$ · ( S$\\_{j}$$_{3}$ × S$_{j}$$\\_{4}$ )(1 − P $\\_{jk}$)[0 − H$\\_{cluster}$ j − H$\\_{cluster}$ $\\_{k}$] $^{$^{−}$1}$(1 − P $\\_{jk}$) S$\\_{k}$$_{2}$ · ( S$_{j}$$\\_{3}$ × S$\\_{j}$$_{4}$ ) P jk can be computed in the similar way and gives the result − ( r 2 λ $^{2}$) / (32 J$_{cluster}$ ) · (2 − τ x j ). For one of the cross term\n\nwith λ$_{z}$ = 4 √ | $^{J$\\_{z}$}$|J$_{cluster}$ , r = sgn( J$_{z}$ ) is the sign of J$_{z}$ . The last term on the right-hand-side is to cancel the non- trivial terms ( r 2 τ x j + τ x $_{k}$) λ 2 $_{z}$/ (32 J$_{cluster}$ ) from the second order perturbation of the first term. Up to second order perturbation this will produce − J$_{z}$τ z j τ z k interactions.\n\nFinally we have been able to reduce the high order interactions to at most three spin terms, the Hamiltonian H$_{magnetic}$ is\n\nWe can use the previous argument for both cluster j and k , so (1 −P $_{AB}$)[0 − H$_{cluster}$ j − H$_{cluster}$ $_{k}$] $^{$^{−}$1}$(1 −P $_{jk}$) can be replace by c -number ( − 2 J$_{cluster}$ ) $^{$^{−}$1}$. This term becomes\n\nSpin rotation symmetry again helps to separate the terms for cluster j and k , and we get − ( r λ $^{2}$) / (32 J$_{cluster}$ ) · τ z j τ z $_{k}$. The other cross term r λ 2 P $_{jk}$S$_{k}$$\\_{2}$ · ( S$\\_{j}$$_{3}$ × S$_{j}$$\\_{4}$ )(1 −\n\n− · j The other cross term r λ 2 P $_{jk}$S$_{k}$$\\_{2}$ · ( S$\\_{j}$$_{3}$ × S$_{j}$$\\_{4}$ )(1 − P $\\_{jk}$)[0 − H$\\_{cluster}$ j − H$\\_{cluster}$ $\\_{k}$] $^{$^{−}$1}$(1 − P $\\_{jk}$) S$\\_{j}$$_{2}$ · ( S$_{k}$$\\_{3}$ × S$\\_{k}$$_{4}$ ) P jk gives the same result. In summary the second order perturbation from λ [ S$_{j}$$\\_{2}$ ·\n\nP jk In summary the second order perturbation from λ [ S$_{j}$$\\_{2}$ · ( S$\\_{j}$$_{3}$ × S$_{j}$$\\_{4}$ ) + r S$\\_{k}$$_{2}$ · ( S$_{j}$$\\_{3}$ × S$\\_{j}$$_{4}$ )] is\n\nwhere H$_{cluster}$ j are given by (2), λ$_{x,y,z}$ H$_{perturbation}$ x,y,z are given above. Plug in relevant equations we get (16) in Subsection IV B.\n\n(2009).\n\n- 1 Alexei Kitaev, Ann. Phys. (N.Y.) 321 , 2 (2006). 2\n\n- Alexei Kitaev, Ann. Phys. (N.Y.) 321 , 2 (2006). 2 Xiao-Yong Feng, Guang-Ming Zhang, Tao Xiang, Phys. Rev. Lett. 98 , 087204 (2007). 3\n\n- Rev. Lett. 98 , 087204 (2007). 3 Han-Dong Chen, Zohar Nussinov, J. Phys. A: Math. Theor. 41 , 075001 (2008). 4\n\n- Theor. 41 , 075001 (2008). 4 Dung-Hai Lee, Guang-Ming Zhang, Tao Xiang, Phys. Rev. Lett. 99 , 196805 (2007). 5\n\n- Lett. 99 , 196805 (2007). 5 Yue Yu, Nucl. Phys. B 799 , 345 (2008). 6\n\n- Yue Yu, Nucl. Phys. B 799 , 345 (2008). 6 Yue Yu, Ziqiang Wang, Europhys. Lett. 84 , 57002 (2008). 7\n\n- (2009). 14 Congjun Wu, Daniel Arovas, Hsiang-Hsuan Hung, Phys. Rev. B 79 , 134427 (2009). 15\n\n- Rev. B 79 , 134427 (2009). 15 Shinsei Ryu, Phys. Rev. B 79 , 075124 (2009). 16\n\n- Shinsei Ryu, Phys. Rev. B 79 , 075124 (2009). 16 G. Baskaran, G. Santhosh, R. Shankar, arXiv:0908.1614 (2009). 17\n\n- (2009). 17 L.-M. Duan, E. Demler, M. D. Lukin, Phys. Rev. Lett. 91 , 090402 (2003). 18\n\n- 090402 (2003). 18 A. Micheli, G. K. Brennen, P. Zoller, Nature Physics 2 , 341 (2006). 19\n\n- Yue Yu, Ziqiang Wang, Europhys. Lett. 84 , 57002 (2008). 7 G. Kells, J. K. Slingerland, J. Vala, Phys. Rev. B 80 , 125415 (2009). 8\n\n- 125415 (2009). 8 Han-Dong Chen, B. Wang, S. Das Sarma, arXiv:0906.0017 (2009). 9\n\n- 341 (2006). 19 J. Q. You, Xiao-Feng Shi, Xuedong Hu, Franco Nori, Phys. Rev. B 81 , 014505 (2010). 20\n\n- Rev. B 81 , 014505 (2010). 20 G. Jackeli, G. Khaliullin, Phys. Rev. Lett. 102 , 017205 (2009). 21\n\n- (2009). 9 K.P. Schmidt, S. Dusuel, and J. Vidal, Phys. Rev. Lett. 100 , 057208 (2008); J. Vidal, K.P. Schmidt, and S. Dusuel, Phys. Rev. B 78 , 245121 (2008); S. Dusuel, K.P. Schmidt, J. Vidal, and R.L. Zaffino, Phys. Rev. B 78 , 125102 (2008). 10\n\n- (2009). 21 A. B. Harris, A. J. Berlinsky, C. Bruder, J. Appl. Phys. 69 , 5200 (1991). 22\n\n- 69 , 5200 (1991). 22 K. A. Chao, J. SpaGLYPH<suppress>lek, A. M. Ole´s, Phys. Rev. B 18 , 3453 (1978). 23\n\n- J. Vidal, and R.L. Zaffino, Phys. Rev. B 78 , 125102 (2008). 10 Hong Yao, Steven A. Kivelson, Phys. Rev. Lett. 99 , 247203 (2007). 11\n\n- (1978). 23 A. H. MacDonald, S. M. Girvin, D. Yoshioka, Phys. Rev. B 37 , 9753 (1988). 24\n\n- B 37 , 9753 (1988). 24 J. T. Chayes, L. Chayes, S. A. Kivelson, Commun. Math. Phys. 123 , 53 (1989). 25\n\n- Phys. 123 , 53 (1989). 25 C. D. Batista, S. A. Trugman, Phys. Rev. Lett. 93 , 217202 (2004).\n\n- (2007). 11 S. Yang, D. L. Zhou, C. P. Sun, Phys. Rev. B 76 , 180404(R) (2007). 12\n\n- 180404(R) (2007). 12 Hong Yao, Shou-Cheng Zhang, Steven A. Kivelson, Phys. Rev. Lett. 102 , 217202 (2009). 13\n\n- Rev. Lett. 102 , 217202 (2009). 13 Zohar Nussinov, Gerardo Ortiz, Phys. Rev. B 79 , 214440" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.26931339170209845, + "doc_id": "d385911fca3067bfa2c94bdbc356f973c619a1e707e1d1c3f950948db707295e", + "edit_distance": 0.7518959913326111, + "f1_score": 0.8854961832061068, + "meteor": 0.32908330234067557, + "precision": 0.9508196721311475, + "pred_md": "Proof. This theorem follows from the results of Lemmas 2, 3, and 4 and Corollary 1 below.\n\nLemma 2 For any fixed λ ≥ 0 , the function in (21) leads to a point ( I ( X B ; ) ρ , I ( A BX 〉 ) ρ ) on the one-shot CQ trade-off curve in the sense of Theorem 2.\n\nProof. We argue by contradiction. Suppose that a particular state ρ XAB of the form in (15) maximizes (21). Suppose further that it does not lead to a point on the trade-off curve. That is, given the constraint Q = I ( A BX 〉 ) ρ , there is some other state σ XAB of the form in (15) such that I ( A BX 〉 ) σ = I ( A BX 〉 ) ρ = Q where C = I ( X B ; ) σ > I X B ( ; ) ρ . But this result implies the following inequality for all λ ≥ 0:\n\n\n\ncontradicting the fact that the state ρ XAB maximizes (21).\n\nLemma 3 We obtain all points on the one-shot CQ trade-off curve by considering λ ≥ 1 in the maximization in (21) because the maximization optimizes only the classical capacity for all λ such that 0 ≤ λ < 1 .\n\nProof. Consider a state ρ XABE of the form in (15). Suppose that we perform a von Neumann measurement of the system A , resulting in a classical variable Y , and let σ XYBE denote the resulting state. Then the following chain of inequalities holds for all λ such that 0 ≤ λ < 1:\n\n\n\nThe first equality follows from definitions and because the state ρ XABE on systems A B , , and E is pure when conditioned on the classical variable X . The second equality follows because the von Neumann measurement does not affect the systems involved in the entropic expressions. The inequality follows because 0 ≤ λ < 1 and conditioning reduces entropy. The third equality follows because the reduced state of σ XYBE on systems B and E is pure when conditioned on both X and Y . The last two equalities follow from algebra and the definition of the quantum mutual information.\n\nThus, it becomes clear that the maximization of the original quantity for 0 ≤ λ < 1 is always less than the\n\n10\n\nclassical capacity because I ( XY B ; ) σ ≤ max ρ I ( X B ; ). It then follows that the trade-off curve really starts when λ ≥ 1.\n\nWe remark that the above proof gives an alternate mathemathical justification for considering only λ ≥ 1 in the maximization than does the original operational reason given in Ref. [31].\n\nThe following lemma is the crucial one that leads to our main result in this section: the single-letterization of the CQ trade-off curve for Hadamard channels.\n\nLemma 4 The following additivity relation holds for a Hadamard channel N 1 and any other channel N 2 :\n\n\n\nProof. The inequality f λ ( N ⊗N 1 2 ) ≥ f λ ( N 1 ) + f λ ( N 2 ) trivially holds for all quantum channels, because the maximization on the RHS is a restriction of the maximization in the LHS to a tensor product of states of the form in (15). Therefore, we prove the non-trivial inequality f λ ( N ⊗N 1 2 ) ≤ f λ ( N 1 ) + f λ ( N 2 ) when N 1 is a Hadamard channel.\n\nSuppose that N A 1 → B 1 1 is a Hadamard channel and N A 2 → B 2 2 is any quantum channel with respective complementary channels ( N c 1 ) A 1 → E 1 and ( N c 2 ) A 2 → E 2 . Then N c 1 is entanglement-breaking because N 1 is a Hadamard channel. Therefore, there exists a degrading map D B 1 → E 1 because N c 1 is entanglement-breaking. The degrading map consists of a measurement with classical output on system Y followed by the preparation of a state on E 1 depending on the measurement outcome (as described in Section II C 2). We can therefore write D B 1 → E 1 = D Y → E 1 2 · D B 1 → Y 1 .\n\nLet\n\n\n\nwhere U j A j → B E j j is the isometric extension of N j . Suppose further that ρ is the state that maximizes f λ ( N ⊗ 1 N 2 ). Also, let σ ≡ D 1 ( ρ ) and note that this state is of the following form:\n\n\n\nThen the following inequalities hold for all λ ≥ 1:", + "recall": 0.8285714285714286, + "true_md": "10\n\nclassical capacity because I ( XY ; B )$_{σ}$ ≤ max$_{ρ}$ I ( X ; B ). It then follows that the trade-off curve really starts when λ ≥ 1.\n\nProof. This theorem follows from the results of Lem- mas 2, 3, and 4 and Corollary 1 below.\n\nLemma 2 For any fixed λ ≥ 0 , the function in (21) leads to a point ( I ( X ; B )$_{ρ}$ , I ( A 〉 BX )$_{ρ}$) on the one-shot CQ trade-off curve in the sense of Theorem 2.\n\nWe remark that the above proof gives an alternate mathemathical justification for considering only λ ≥ 1 in the maximization than does the original operational reason given in Ref. [31].\n\nThe following lemma is the crucial one that leads to our main result in this section: the single-letterization of the CQ trade-off curve for Hadamard channels.\n\nProof. We argue by contradiction. Suppose that a particular state ρ XAB of the form in (15) maximizes (21). Suppose further that it does not lead to a point on the trade-off curve. That is, given the constraint Q = I ( A 〉 BX )$_{ρ}$, there is some other state σ XAB of the form in (15) such that I ( A 〉 BX )$_{σ}$ = I ( A 〉 BX )$_{ρ}$ = Q where C = I ( X ; B )$_{σ}$ > I ( X ; B )$_{ρ}$. But this result implies the following inequality for all λ ≥ 0:\n\nLemma 4 The following additivity relation holds for a Hadamard channel N$_{1}$ and any other channel N$_{2}$ :\n\ncontradicting the fact that the state ρ XAB maximizes (21).\n\nProof. The inequality f$_{λ}$ ( N$_{1}$ ⊗ N$_{2}$ ) ≥ f$_{λ}$ ( N$_{1}$ ) + f$_{λ}$ ( N$_{2}$ ) trivially holds for all quantum channels, because the maximization on the RHS is a restriction of the max- imization in the LHS to a tensor product of states of the form in (15). Therefore, we prove the non-trivial in- equality f$_{λ}$ ( N$_{1}$ ⊗ N$_{2}$ ) ≤ f$_{λ}$ ( N$_{1}$ ) + f$_{λ}$ ( N$_{2}$ ) when N$_{1}$ is a Hadamard channel. →\n\nLemma 3 We obtain all points on the one-shot CQ trade-off curve by considering λ ≥ 1 in the maximiza- tion in (21) because the maximization optimizes only the classical capacity for all λ such that 0 ≤ λ < 1 .\n\nProof. Consider a state ρ XABE of the form in (15). Suppose that we perform a von Neumann measurement of the system A , resulting in a classical variable Y , and let σ XY BE denote the resulting state. Then the following chain of inequalities holds for all λ such that 0 ≤ λ < 1:\n\n$$f$_{λ}$ ( N$_{1}$ ⊗ N$_{2}$ ) = f$_{λ}$ ( N$_{1}$ ) + f$_{λ}$ ( N$_{2}$ ) .$$\n\n$$I ( X ; B )$_{σ}$ + λI ( A 〉 BX )$_{σ}$ > I ( X ; B )$_{ρ}$ + λI ( A 〉 BX )$_{ρ}$ ,$$\n\nHadamard channel. Suppose that N A$_{1}$ → B$_{1}$ 1 is a Hadamard channel and N A$_{2}$ → B$_{2}$ 2 is any quantum channel with respective com- plementary channels ( N c $_{1}$) A$_{1}$ → E$_{1}$ and ( N c $_{2}$) A$_{2}$ → $^{E$\\_{2}$}$. Then N c 1 is entanglement-breaking because N$_{1}$ is a Hadamard channel. Therefore, there exists a degrading map D B$_{1}$ → E$_{1}$ because N c 1 is entanglement-breaking. The de- grading map consists of a measurement with classical output on system Y followed by the preparation of a state on E$_{1}$ depending on the measurement outcome (as described in Section II C 2). We can therefore write D B$_{1}$ → E$_{1}$ = D Y → E$_{1}$ 2 ◦ D B$_{1}$ → Y 1 .\n\nLet\n\nwhere U$_{j}$ A$_{j}$ → B$_{j}$E$_{j}$ is the isometric extension of N$_{j}$ . Sup- pose further that ρ is the state that maximizes f$_{λ}$ ( N$_{1}$ ⊗ N$_{2}$ ). Also, let σ ≡ D$_{1}$ ( ρ ) and note that this state is of the following form:\n\nThe first equality follows from definitions and because the state ρ XABE on systems A , B , and E is pure when con- ditioned on the classical variable X . The second equality follows because the von Neumann measurement does not affect the systems involved in the entropic expressions. The inequality follows because 0 ≤ λ < 1 and condition- ing reduces entropy. The third equality follows because the reduced state of σ XY BE on systems B and E is pure when conditioned on both X and Y . The last two equali- ties follow from algebra and the definition of the quantum mutual information.\n\nThus, it becomes clear that the maximization of the original quantity for 0 ≤ λ < 1 is always less than the\n\nThen the following inequalities hold for all λ ≥ 1:\n\n$$ψ XAA$_{1}$A$_{2}$ ≡ ∑ x p$_{X}$ ( x ) | x 〉〈 x | X ⊗ | φ$_{x}$ 〉〈 φ$_{x}$ | AA$_{1}$$^{A$_{2}$}$, θ XAB$_{1}$E$_{1}$A$_{2}$ ≡ U$_{1}$ψU † $_{1}$, ρ XAB$_{1}$E$_{1}$B$_{2}$E$_{2}$ ≡ ( U$_{1}$ ⊗ U$_{2}$ ) ψ ( U$_{1}$ ⊗ U$_{2}$ ) $^{†}$, (22)$$\n\n$$σ XY AB$_{2}$E$_{1}$E$_{2}$ ≡ ∑ x p$_{X}$ ( x ) p$_{Y}$$_{|}$$_{X}$ ( y | x ) | x 〉〈 x | $^{X}$⊗ | y 〉〈 y | Y ⊗| φ$_{x,y}$ 〉〈 φ$_{x,y}$ | AB$_{2}$E$_{1}$$^{E$_{2}$}$.$$\n\n$$I ( X ; B )$_{ρ}$ + λI ( A 〉 BX )$_{ρ}$ = H ( B )$_{ρ}$ + ( λ − 1) H ( B | X )$_{ρ}$ − λH ( E | X )$_{ρ}$ = H ( B )$_{σ}$ + ( λ − 1) H ( B | X )$_{σ}$ − λH ( E | X )$_{σ}$ ≤ H ( B )$_{σ}$ + ( λ − 1) H ( B | XY )$_{σ}$ − λH ( E | XY )$_{σ}$ . = H ( B )$_{σ}$ + ( λ − 1) H ( B | XY )$_{σ}$ − λH ( B | XY )$_{σ}$ = H ( B )$_{σ}$ − H ( B | XY )$_{σ}$ = I ( XY ; B )$_{σ}$ .$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.34274928113350156, + "doc_id": "507c9c2e684a0b40f9bda970274e72a5eb1dd38cd52e5894f39fb5069b0ba10d", + "edit_distance": 0.7680288461538461, + "f1_score": 0.836619718309859, + "meteor": 0.419048933909821, + "precision": 0.9166666666666666, + "pred_md": "and peculiar velocity in the simplest dark energy models. These theoretical ideas motivate us to express various power spectra of the density field in a more convenient way to test such theories.\n\nWe assume a standard cosmology model for epochs earlier than the last scattering surface, and that the coherent evolution of structure formation from the last scattering surface to the present day is undetermined due to new physics relevant to the cosmic acceleration. Thus we divide the history of structure formation into two regimes; epochs before matter-radiation equality ( a eq ) and a later epoch of coherent evolution of unknown effect on structure formation from new physics.We can then express various power spectra of the density field splits into these two epochs, with the shape-dependent part determined by knowledge of our standard cosmology, and the coherent evolution part only affected by new physics. Mathematically, this is written as,\n\n\n\nwhere Φ denotes the curvature perturbation in the Newtonian gauge,\n\n\n\nand Θ m denotes the map of the re-scaled divergence of peculiar velocity θ m as Θ m = θ m /aH . These power spectra are then partitioned into a scale-dependent part ( D Φ ( k , D ) m ( k )) and a scale-independent (coherent evolution) component ( g Φ , g b , g Θ m ). We define here g b = b g δ m where b is the standard linear bias parameter between galaxy (or cluster) tracers and the underlying dark matter density.\n\nThe shape of the power spectra is determined before the epoch of matter-radiation equality. Under the paradigm of inflationary theory, initial fluctuations are stretched outside the horizon at different epochs which generates the tilt in the power spectrum. The predicted initial tilting is parameterised as a spectral index ( n S ) which is just the shape dependence due to the initial condition. When the initial fluctuations reach the coherent evolution epoch after matter-radiation equality, they experience a scale-dependent shift from the moment they re-enter the horizon to the equality epoch. Gravitational instability is governed by the interplay between radiative pressure resistance and gravitational infall. The different duration of modes during this period results in a secondary shape dependence on the power spectrum. This shape dependence is determined by the ratio between matter and radiation energy densities and sets the location of the matter-radiation equality in the time coordinate. As the radiation energy density is precisely measured by the CMB blackbody spectrum, these secondary shape dependences are parameterised by the matter energy density ω m = Ω m h 2 . Both of these parameters are now well-determined by CMB experiments.\n\n3\n\nThe shape factor of the perturbed metric power spectra D Φ ( k ) is defined as\n\n\n\nwhich is a dimensionless metric power spectra at a eq , where ∆ 2 ζ 0 ( k ) is the initial fluctuations in the comoving gauge and T Φ ( k ) is transfer function normalized at T Φ ( k → 0) = 1. The primordial shape ∆ 2 ζ 0 ( k ) depends on n S , as ∆ 2 ζ 0 ( k ) = A 2 S ( k/k p ) n S -1 , where A 2 S is the amplitude of the initial comoving fluctuations at the pivot scale, k p = 0 002Mpc . -1 . The intermediate shape factor T Φ ( k ) depends on ω m . The shape factor for matter fluctuations and peculiar velocities D m ( k ) are given by the conversion from D Φ ( k ) of,\n\n\n\nwhere H ∗ = 1 2997 Mpc / -1 .\n\nUnlike the shape part, the coherent evolution component, g Φ , g b and g Θ m are not generally parameterized by known standard cosmological parameters. We thus normalize these growth factors at a eq such that,\n\n\n\nInstead of determining growth factors using cosmological parameters, we measure these directly in a modelindependent way at the given redshift without referencing to any specific cosmic acceleration model and with the minimal assumption of coherent evolution of modes after a eq . Considering the uncertainty in the determination of A 2 S from the CMB anisotropy, which is degenerate with the optical depth of re-ionization, we combine both A 2 S and g X (where X denotes each component of Φ, b and Θ m ) with proper scaling for convenience as g ∗ X = g X A /A S ∗ S . Throughout this paper, we use A ∗ 2 S = 2 41 . × 10 -9 for the mean A 2 S value from the WMAP5 results. Our result on measuring the bulk flow motion is independent of our choice of an arbitrary constant A ∗ 2 S .\n\n## B. Correlation function in the configuration space\n\nIn the linear regime of the standard gravitational instability theory, the Kaiser effect (the observed squeezing of ξ s ( σ, π ) due to coherent infall around large-scale structures) can be written in configuration space as,\n\n", + "recall": 0.7694300518134715, + "true_md": "3\n\nand peculiar velocity in the simplest dark energy mod- els. These theoretical ideas motivate us to express various power spectra of the density field in a more convenient way to test such theories.\n\nWe assume a standard cosmology model for epochs ear- lier than the last scattering surface, and that the coherent evolution of structure formation from the last scattering surface to the present day is undetermined due to new physics relevant to the cosmic acceleration. Thus we di- vide the history of structure formation into two regimes; epochs before matter-radiation equality ( a$_{eq}$ ) and a later epoch of coherent evolution of unknown effect on struc- ture formation from new physics.We can then express various power spectra of the density field splits into these two epochs, with the shape-dependent part determined by knowledge of our standard cosmology, and the coher- ent evolution part only affected by new physics. Mathe- matically, this is written as,\n\nThe shape factor of the perturbed metric power spectra D Φ ( k ) is defined as\n\n$$D Φ ( k ) = 2 π 2 k 3 9 25 Δ 2 ζ $_{0}$( k ) T 2 $_{Φ}$( k ) (3)$$\n\nwhich is a dimensionless metric power spectra at a$_{eq}$ , where Δ 2 ζ $_{0}$( k ) is the initial fluctuations in the comov- ing gauge and T Φ ( k ) is transfer function normalized at T Φ ( k → 0) = 1. The primordial shape Δ 2 ζ $_{0}$( k ) depends on n$_{S}$ , as Δ 2 ζ $_{0}$( k ) = A 2 $_{S}$( k/k$_{p}$ ) n$_{S}$ − $^{1}$, where A 2 S is the am- plitude of the initial comoving fluctuations at the pivot scale, k$_{p}$ = 0 . 002Mpc − $^{1}$. The intermediate shape factor T Φ ( k ) depends on ω$_{m}$ . The shape factor for matter fluc- tuations and peculiar velocities D$_{m}$ ( k ) are given by the conversion from D Φ ( k ) of,\n\n$$D$_{m}$ ( k ) ≡ 4 9 k 4 H 4 $_{∗}$ω 2 m D Φ ( k ) , (4)$$\n\n$$g Φ ( a$_{eq}$ ) = 1 , g$_{δ}$$_{m}$ ( a$_{eq}$ ) = a$_{eq}$g Φ ( a$_{eq}$ ) , g Θ$_{m}$ ( a$_{eq}$ ) = $_{−}$dg$_{δ}$$_{m}$ ( a$_{eq}$ ) d ln a . (5)$$\n\nwhere H$_{∗}$ = 1 / 2997 Mpc − $^{1}$.\n\nUnlike the shape part, the coherent evolution compo- nent, g Φ , g$_{b}$ and g Θ$_{m}$ are not generally parameterized by known standard cosmological parameters. We thus normalize these growth factors at a$_{eq}$ such that,\n\nwhere Φ denotes the curvature perturbation in the New- tonian gauge,\n\n$$P ΦΦ ( k, a ) = D Φ ( k ) g 2 $_{Φ}$( a ) , P$_{bb}$ ( k, a ) = D$_{m}$ ( k ) g 2 $_{b}$( a ) , P Θ$_{m}$Θ$_{m}$ ( k, a ) = D$_{m}$ ( k ) g 2 $_{Θ$_{m}$}$( a ) , (1)$$\n\n$$ds 2 = − (1 + 2Ψ) dt 2 + a $^{2}$(1 + 2Φ) dx $^{2}$, (2)$$\n\nInstead of determining growth factors using cosmologi- cal parameters, we measure these directly in a model- independent way at the given redshift without referenc- ing to any specific cosmic acceleration model and with the minimal assumption of coherent evolution of modes after a$_{eq}$ . Considering the uncertainty in the determi- nation of A 2 S from the CMB anisotropy, which is degen- erate with the optical depth of re-ionization, we com- bine both A 2 S and g$_{X}$ (where X denotes each compo- nent of Φ, b and Θ$_{m}$) with proper scaling for conve- nience as g ∗ X = g$_{X}$A$_{S}$/A ∗ $_{S}$. Throughout this paper, we use A ∗ 2 S = 2 . 41 × 10 − 9 for the mean A 2 S value from the WMAP5 results. Our result on measuring the bulk flow motion is independent of our choice of an arbitrary con- stant A ∗ 2 S .\n\nand Θ$_{m}$ denotes the map of the re-scaled divergence of peculiar velocity θ$_{m}$ as Θ$_{m}$ = θ$_{m}$/aH . These power spectra are then partitioned into a scale–dependent part ( D Φ ( k ) , D$_{m}$ ( k )) and a scale-independent (coherent evolu- tion) component ( g Φ , g$_{b}$ , g Θ$_{m}$ ). We define here g$_{b}$ = b g$_{δ}$$\\_{m}$ where b is the standard linear bias parameter between galaxy (or cluster) tracers and the underlying dark mat- ter density.\n\nThe shape of the power spectra is determined be- fore the epoch of matter–radiation equality. Under the paradigm of inflationary theory, initial fluctuations are stretched outside the horizon at different epochs which generates the tilt in the power spectrum. The predicted initial tilting is parameterised as a spectral index ( n$_{S}$ ) which is just the shape dependence due to the initial condition. When the initial fluctuations reach the coher- ent evolution epoch after matter-radiation equality, they experience a scale-dependent shift from the moment they re-enter the horizon to the equality epoch. Gravitational instability is governed by the interplay between radiative pressure resistance and gravitational infall. The different duration of modes during this period results in a sec- ondary shape dependence on the power spectrum. This shape dependence is determined by the ratio between matter and radiation energy densities and sets the loca- tion of the matter-radiation equality in the time coordi- nate. As the radiation energy density is precisely mea- sured by the CMB blackbody spectrum, these secondary shape dependences are parameterised by the matter en- ergy density ω$_{m}$ = Ω$_{m}$ h $^{2}$. Both of these parameters are now well–determined by CMB experiments.\n\nIn the linear regime of the standard gravitational in- stability theory, the Kaiser effect (the observed squeezing of ξ$_{s}$ ( σ, π ) due to coherent infall around large–scale struc- tures) can be written in configuration space as,\n\n## B. Correlation function in the configuration space\n\n$$ξ$_{s}$ ( σ, π )( a ) = ( g ∗ 2 b + 1 3 g ∗ $_{b}$g ∗ Θ$_{m}$ + 1 5 g ∗ 2 Θ$_{m}$ ) ξ ∗ $_{0}$( r ) P$_{0}$ ( µ ) − 4 3 g ∗ $_{b}$g ∗ Θ$_{m}$ + 4 7 g ∗ 2 Θ$_{m}$ ) ξ ∗ $_{2}$( r ) P$_{2}$ ( µ ) + 8 35 g ∗ 2 $_{Θ$_{m}$}$ξ ∗ $_{4}$( r ) P$_{4}$ ( µ ) , (6)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8160600825178127, + "doc_id": "bc12b6e7ba5af68fe41b75e14756e5e77207a289f051a2d5defa7809a17cf7cc", + "edit_distance": 0.3372717508055854, + "f1_score": 0.9392133492252681, + "meteor": 0.8756760998781089, + "precision": 0.9728395061728395, + "pred_md": "arXiv:1001.0665v1 [cond-mat.supr-con] 5 Jan 2010\n\n## NaAlSi: a self-doped semimetallic superconductor with free electrons and covalent holes\n\nH. B. Rhee, S. Banerjee, E. R. Ylvisaker, and W. E. Pickett Department of Physics, University of California, Davis, CA 95616\n\n(Dated: November 12, 2018)\n\nThe layered ternary sp conductor NaAlSi, possessing the iron-pnictide '111' crystal structure, superconducts at 7 K. Using density functional methods, we show that this compound is an intrinsic (self-doped) low-carrier-density semimetal with a number of unusual features. Covalent Al-Si valence bands provide the holes, and free-electron-like Al 3 s bands, which propagate in the channel between the neighboring Si layers, dip just below the Fermi level to create the electron carriers. The Fermi level (and therefore the superconducting carriers) lies in a narrow and sharp peak within a pseudogap in the density of states. The small peak arises from valence bands which are nearly of pure Si, quasi-two-dimensional, flat, and coupled to Al conduction bands. Isostructural NaAlGe, which is not superconducting above 1.6 K, has almost exactly the same band structure except for one missing piece of small Fermi surface. Certain deformation potentials induced by Si and Na displacements along the c -axis are calculated and discussed. It seems likely that the mechanism of pairing is related to that of several other lightly doped two-dimensional nonmagnetic semiconductors (TiNCl, ZrNCl, HfNCl), which is not well understood but apparently not of phonon origin.\n\nPACS numbers:\n\n## I. INTRODUCTION\n\nThe discovery of new superconductors in unexpected materials brings the potential to understand something deeper, or perhaps something different, about the underlying properties that favor superconducting pairing. The discovery of high-temperature superconductivity (to 56 K so far) in Fe-pnictides 1 is a recent spectacular example, and is also an example of close relationships between magnetism and superconductivity, though the connections are still far from clear.\n\nNew superconductors where little or no magnetic effects are present are also arising, and these clearly involve different physics from the cuprate or Fe-pnictide high-temperature superconductors. Electron-doped MNCl, where M = Zr or Hf, becomes superconducting immediately upon undergoing the insulator-to-metal transition, 2-5 which, in the case of M = Hf, is higher than 25 K. The similarly layered, electron-doped, ionic insulator TiNCl superconducts up to 16 K. Magnetic behavior in these materials is at most subtle, amounting to an enhancement in Pauli susceptibility near the metal-toinsulator transition. 6\n\nIn this paper we address the ternary silicide NaAlSi (space group P4/nmm , Z = 2), another ionic and layered material that shows unexpected superconductivity, and does so in its native (without doping or pressure) stoichiometric state, at 7 K. 7 NaAlSi introduces new interest from several viewpoints. First, it is an sp electron superconductor, with a high T c for such materials at ambient pressure. Pb is an sp superconductor with\n\ncomparable T c (7.2 K) but with simple metallic bonding and heavy atoms, making it very different. Doped Si 8 and doped diamond 11 superconduct in the same range, and are of course very different classes of materials. A more relevant example is the pseudo-ternary compound Ba 1 -x K BiO x 3 (BKBO), which undergoes an insulator-to-metal transition for x ≈ 0 4, beyond which its . T c surpasses 30 K.[9,10]\n\nSecond, the Al-Si layered substructure is like that of the FeAs layer in the Fe-pnictide superconductors, raising the possibility of some connections between their electronic structures. In fact, NaAlSi has the same structure as the Fe-pnictide '111' compounds, with Al being tetrahedrally coordinated by Si (analogous to Fe being tetrahedrally coordinated by As). In spite of their structural similarities, these compounds have major differences; for example, the Fe pnictides are 3 d electron systems with magnetism, while NaAlSi is an sp electron system without magnetism.\n\nThird, NaAlSi is the isovalent sister (one row down in the periodic table for each atom) of LiBC. LiBC itself is (in a sense) isovalent and also isostructural to MgB ; however due to the B-C alternation around 2 the hexagon in the honeycomb-structure layer, LiBC is insulating rather than conducting. When holedoped while retaining the same structure, Li 1 -x BC has stronger electron-phonon coupling than does MgB . 2 12 While NaAlSi has a substantially different structure than LiBC, its isovalence and its combination of covalence with some ionic character is shared with LiBC.\n\nYet another closely related compound is CaAlSi, whose two different stacking polymorphs and par-", + "recall": 0.9078341013824884, + "true_md": "# NaAlSi: a self-doped semimetallic superconductor with free electrons and covalent holes\n\nH. B. Rhee, S. Banerjee, E. R. Ylvisaker, and W. E. Pickett Department of Physics, University of California, Davis, CA 95616\n\n(Dated: November 12, 2018)\n\nThe layered ternary sp conductor NaAlSi, possessing the iron-pnictide “111” crystal structure, superconducts at 7 K. Using density functional methods, we show that this compound is an intrinsic (self-doped) low-carrier-density semimetal with a number of unusual features. Covalent Al-Si valence bands provide the holes, and free-electron-like Al 3 s bands, which propagate in the channel between the neighboring Si layers, dip just below the Fermi level to create the electron carriers. The Fermi level (and therefore the superconducting carriers) lies in a narrow and sharp peak within a pseudogap in the density of states. The small peak arises from valence bands which are nearly of pure Si, quasi-two-dimensional, flat, and coupled to Al conduction bands. Isostructural NaAlGe, which is not superconducting above 1.6 K, has almost exactly the same band structure except for one missing piece of small Fermi surface. Certain deformation potentials induced by Si and Na displacements along the c -axis are calculated and discussed. It seems likely that the mechanism of pairing is related to that of several other lightly doped two-dimensional nonmagnetic semiconductors (TiNCl, ZrNCl, HfNCl), which is not well understood but apparently not of phonon origin.\n\nPACS numbers:\n\n## I. INTRODUCTION\n\nThe discovery of new superconductors in unex- pected materials brings the potential to understand something deeper, or perhaps something different, about the underlying properties that favor supercon- ducting pairing. The discovery of high-temperature superconductivity (to 56 K so far) in Fe-pnictides 1 is a recent spectacular example, and is also an ex- ample of close relationships between magnetism and superconductivity, though the connections are still far from clear.\n\nNew superconductors where little or no mag- netic effects are present are also arising, and these clearly involve different physics from the cuprate or Fe-pnictide high-temperature superconductors. Electron-doped MNCl, where M = Zr or Hf, becomes superconducting immediately upon undergoing the insulator-to-metal transition, 2–5 which, in the case of M = Hf, is higher than 25 K. The similarly lay- ered, electron-doped, ionic insulator TiNCl super- conducts up to 16 K. Magnetic behavior in these materials is at most subtle, amounting to an en- hancement in Pauli susceptibility near the metal-to- insulator transition. 6\n\nIn this paper we address the ternary silicide NaAlSi (space group P4/nmm , Z = 2), another ionic and layered material that shows unexpected superconductivity, and does so in its native (with- out doping or pressure) stoichiometric state, at 7 K. 7 NaAlSi introduces new interest from several viewpoints. First, it is an sp electron supercon- ductor, with a high T$_{c}$ for such materials at am- bient pressure. Pb is an sp superconductor with\n\nYet another closely related compound is CaAlSi, whose two different stacking polymorphs and par-\n\nThird, NaAlSi is the isovalent sister (one row down in the periodic table for each atom) of LiBC. LiBC itself is (in a sense) isovalent and also isostructural to MgB$_{2}$; however due to the B-C alternation around the hexagon in the honeycomb-structure layer, LiBC is insulating rather than conducting. When hole- doped while retaining the same structure, Li$_{1}$$\\_{−}$$_{x}$BC has stronger electron-phonon coupling than does MgB$_{2}$. 12 While NaAlSi has a substantially different structure than LiBC, its isovalence and its combina- tion of covalence with some ionic character is shared with LiBC.\n\nSecond, the Al-Si layered substructure is like that of the FeAs layer in the Fe-pnictide superconductors, raising the possibility of some connections between their electronic structures. In fact, NaAlSi has the same structure as the Fe-pnictide “111” compounds, with Al being tetrahedrally coordinated by Si (anal- ogous to Fe being tetrahedrally coordinated by As). In spite of their structural similarities, these com- pounds have major differences; for example, the Fe pnictides are 3 d electron systems with magnetism, while NaAlSi is an sp electron system without mag- netism.\n\ncomparable T$_{c}$ (7.2 K) but with simple metallic bonding and heavy atoms, making it very differ- ent. Doped Si 8 and doped diamond 11 superconduct in the same range, and are of course very different classes of materials. A more relevant example is the pseudo-ternary compound Ba$_{1}$$\\_{−}$$_{x}$K$_{x}$BiO$_{3}$ (BKBO), which undergoes an insulator-to-metal transition for x ≈ 0 . 4, beyond which its T$_{c}$ surpasses 30 K.[9,10]\n\narXiv:1001.0665v1 [cond-mat.supr-con] 5 Jan 2010" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.94002361851726, + "doc_id": "ca0bf8ceb00ac9b3e237a08f2a85934e21b3b99ce203b5e15c0a0824e59eb1a5", + "edit_distance": 0.04484304932735426, + "f1_score": 0.9352941176470588, + "meteor": 0.965605724934072, + "precision": 0.9636363636363636, + "pred_md": "6\n\n2009 Fermi Symposium, Washington, D.C., Nov. 2-5\n\n## References\n\n- [1] M. Sikora and G. Madejski, in American Institute of Physics Conference Series , edited by F. A. Aharonian and H. J. Volk (2001), vol. 558 of American Institute of Physics Conference Series , pp. 275-288.\n- [2] M. Sikora, in Blazar Demographics and Physics , edited by P. Padovani and C. M. Urry (2001), vol. 227 of Astronomical Society of the Pacific Conference Series , pp. 95-104.\n- [3] J. A. Stevens, S. J. Litchfield, E. I. Robson, D. H. Hughes, W. K. Gear, H. Terasranta, E. Valtaoja, and M. Tornikoski, ApJ 437 , 91 (1994).\n- [4] P. T. P. Ho, J. M. Moran, and K. Y. Lo, ApJl 616 , L1 (2004).\n- [5] M. A. Gurwell, A. B. Peck, S. R. Hostler, M. R. Darrah, and C. A. Katz, in From Z-Machines to ALMA: (Sub)Millimeter Spectroscopy of Galaxies , edited by A. J. Baker, J. Glenn, A. I. Harris,\n\neConf C091122\n\n- J. G. Mangum, and M. S. Yun (2007), vol. 375 of Astronomical Society of the Pacific Conference Series , p. 234.\n- [6] S. E. Healey, R. W. Romani, G. Cotter, P. F. Michelson, E. F. Schlafly, A. C. S. Readhead, P. Giommi, S. Chaty, I. A. Grenier, and L. C. Weintraub, ApJS 175 , 97 (2008).\n- [7] A. A. Abdo, M. Ackermann, M. Ajello, W. B. Atwood, M. Axelsson, L. Baldini, J. Ballet, G. Barbiellini, D. Bastieri, B. M. Baughman, et al., ApJ 700 , 597 (2009).\n- [8] T. Hovatta, E. Nieppola, M. Tornikoski, E. Valtaoja, M. F. Aller, and H. D. Aller, A&A 485 , 51 (2008).\n- [9] B. C. Kelly, J. Bechtold, and A. Siemiginowska, ApJ 698 , 895 (2009).\n- [10] M. Sikora, R. Moderski, and G. M. Madejski, ApJ 675 , 71 (2008).", + "recall": 0.9085714285714286, + "true_md": "6\n\n2009 Fermi Symposium, Washington, D.C., Nov. 2-5\n\n## References\n\n- [1] M. Sikora and G. Madejski, in American Insti- tute of Physics Conference Series , edited by F. A. Aharonian and H. J. V¨ olk (2001), vol. 558 of American Institute of Physics Conference Series , pp. 275–288.\n\n- [2] M. Sikora, in Blazar Demographics and Physics , edited by P. Padovani and C. M. Urry (2001), vol. 227 of Astronomical Society of the Pacific Con- ference Series , pp. 95–104.\n\n- [3] J. A. Stevens, S. J. Litchfield, E. I. Robson, D. H. Hughes, W. K. Gear, H. Terasranta, E. Valtaoja, and M. Tornikoski, ApJ 437 , 91 (1994).\n\n- [4] P. T. P. Ho, J. M. Moran, and K. Y. Lo, ApJl 616 , L1 (2004).\n\n- [5] M. A. Gurwell, A. B. Peck, S. R. Hostler, M. R. Darrah, and C. A. Katz, in From Z-Machines to ALMA: (Sub)Millimeter Spectroscopy of Galax- ies , edited by A. J. Baker, J. Glenn, A. I. Harris,\n\n- J. G. Mangum, and M. S. Yun (2007), vol. 375 of Astronomical Society of the Pacific Conference Series , p. 234.\n\n- [6] S. E. Healey, R. W. Romani, G. Cotter, P. F. Michelson, E. F. Schlafly, A. C. S. Readhead, P. Giommi, S. Chaty, I. A. Grenier, and L. C. Weintraub, ApJS 175 , 97 (2008).\n\n- [7] A. A. Abdo, M. Ackermann, M. Ajello, W. B. At- wood, M. Axelsson, L. Baldini, J. Ballet, G. Bar- biellini, D. Bastieri, B. M. Baughman, et al., ApJ 700 , 597 (2009).\n\n- [8] T. Hovatta, E. Nieppola, M. Tornikoski, E. Val- taoja, M. F. Aller, and H. D. Aller, A&A 485 , 51 (2008).\n\n- [9] B. C. Kelly, J. Bechtold, and A. Siemiginowska, ApJ 698 , 895 (2009).\n\n- [10] M. Sikora, R. Moderski, and G. M. Madejski, ApJ 675 , 71 (2008).\n\neConf C091122" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7122693676428604, + "doc_id": "125d1660adf132a58191d6a17bde3a16ca45b4a1728f1cc31900c1bfe4f0ef65", + "edit_distance": 0.5584415584415584, + "f1_score": 0.9219653179190751, + "meteor": 0.7353627073155946, + "precision": 0.9637462235649547, + "pred_md": "arXiv:1001.0266v2 [cond-mat.str-el] 4 May 2010\n\n## Realization of the Exactly Solvable Kitaev Honeycomb Lattice Model in a Spin Rotation Invariant System\n\nFa Wang 1\n\n1 Department of Physics, Massachusetts Institute of Technology, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA\n\nThe exactly solvable Kitaev honeycomb lattice model is realized as the low energy effect Hamiltonian of a spin-1/2 model with spin rotation and time-reversal symmetry. The mapping to low energy effective Hamiltonian is exact, without truncation errors in traditional perturbation series expansions. This model consists of a honeycomb lattice of clusters of four spin-1/2 moments, and contains short-range interactions up to six-spin(or eight-spin) terms. The spin in the Kitaev model is represented not as these spin-1/2 moments, but as pseudo-spin of the two-dimensional spin singlet sector of the four antiferromagnetically coupled spin-1/2 moments within each cluster. Spin correlations in the Kitaev model are mapped to dimer correlations or spin-chirality correlations in this model. This exact construction is quite general and can be used to make other interesting spin-1/2 models from spin rotation invariant Hamiltonians. We discuss two possible routes to generate the high order spin interactions from more natural couplings, which involves perturbative expansions thus breaks the exact mapping, although in a controlled manner.\n\nPACS numbers: 75.10.Jm, 75.10.Kt\n\n## Contents\n\n## I. Introduction.\n\n1\n\n- II. Formulation of the Pseudo-spin-1/2 from Four-spin Cluster.\n\n## III. Realization of the Kitaev Model.\n\n3\n\n- IV. Generate the High Order Physical Spin Interactions by Perturbative Expansion.\n- A. Generate the High Order Terms by Coupling to Optical Phonon.\n- B. Generate the High Order Terms by Magnetic Interactions between Clusters.\n\n## V. Conclusions.\n\n8\n\n## Acknowledgments\n\n8\n\n- A. Coupling between Distortions of a Tetrahedron and the Pseudo-spins\n- B. Derivation of the Terms Generated by Second Order Perturbation of Inter-cluster Magnetic Interactions\n\n8\n\n9\n\n\n\n## I. INTRODUCTION.\n\nKitaev's exactly solvable spin-1/2 honeycomb lattice model 1 (noted as the Kitaev model hereafter) has inspired great interest since its debut, due to its exact solvability, fractionalized excitations, and the potential\n\n5\n\n5\n\n7\n\n2\n\nto realize non-Abelian anyons. The model simply reads\n\n\n\nwhere τ x,y,z are Pauli matrices, and x, y, z -links are defined in FIG. 1. It was shown by Kitaev 1 that this spin1/2 model can be mapped to a model with one Majorana fermion per site coupled to Ising gauge fields on the links. And as the Ising gauge flux has no fluctuation, the model can be regarded as, under each gauge flux configuration, a free Majorana fermion problem. The ground state is achieved in the sector of zero gauge flux through each hexagon. The Majorana fermions in this sector have Dirac-like gapless dispersion resembling that of graphene, as long as | J x | , | J y | , and | J z | satisfy the triangular relation, sum of any two of them is greater than the third one . It was further proposed by Kitaev 1 1 that opening of fermion gap by magnetic field can give the Ising vortices non-Abelian anyonic statistics, because the Ising vortex will carry a zero-energy Majorana mode, although magnetic field destroys the exact solvability.\n\nGreat efforts have been invested to better understand the properties of the Kitaev model. For example, several groups have pointed out that the fractionalized Majorana fermion excitations may be understood from the more familiar Jordan-Wigner transformation of 1D spin systems 2,3 . The analogy between the non-Abelian Ising vortices and vortices in p + ip superconductors has been raised in serveral works 4-7 . Exact diagonalization has been used to study the Kitaev model on small lattices . 8 And perturbative expansion methods have been developed to study the gapped phases of the Kitaev-type models . 9\n\nMany generalizations of the Kitaev model have been", + "recall": 0.8836565096952909, + "true_md": "# Realization of the Exactly Solvable Kitaev Honeycomb Lattice Model in a Spin Rotation Invariant System\n\nThe exactly solvable Kitaev honeycomb lattice model is realized as the low energy effect Hamil- tonian of a spin-1/2 model with spin rotation and time-reversal symmetry. The mapping to low energy effective Hamiltonian is exact, without truncation errors in traditional perturbation series expansions. This model consists of a honeycomb lattice of clusters of four spin-1/2 moments, and contains short-range interactions up to six-spin(or eight-spin) terms. The spin in the Kitaev model is represented not as these spin-1/2 moments, but as pseudo-spin of the two-dimensional spin singlet sector of the four antiferromagnetically coupled spin-1/2 moments within each cluster. Spin corre- lations in the Kitaev model are mapped to dimer correlations or spin-chirality correlations in this model. This exact construction is quite general and can be used to make other interesting spin-1/2 models from spin rotation invariant Hamiltonians. We discuss two possible routes to generate the high order spin interactions from more natural couplings, which involves perturbative expansions thus breaks the exact mapping, although in a controlled manner.\n\n$^{1}$Department of Physics, Massachusetts Institute of Technology, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA\n\narXiv:1001.0266v2 [cond-mat.str-el] 4 May 2010\n\nPACS numbers: 75.10.Jm, 75.10.Kt\n\n## I. INTRODUCTION.\n\nKitaev’s exactly solvable spin-1/2 honeycomb lattice model 1 (noted as the Kitaev model hereafter) has in- spired great interest since its debut, due to its exact solvability, fractionalized excitations, and the potential\n\nMany generalizations of the Kitaev model have been\n\nGreat efforts have been invested to better understand the properties of the Kitaev model. For example, sev- eral groups have pointed out that the fractionalized Ma- jorana fermion excitations may be understood from the more familiar Jordan-Wigner transformation of 1D spin systems $^{2,3}$. The analogy between the non-Abelian Ising vortices and vortices in p + ip superconductors has been raised in serveral works $^{4–7}$. Exact diagonalization has been used to study the Kitaev model on small lattices $^{8}$. And perturbative expansion methods have been devel- oped to study the gapped phases of the Kitaev-type models $^{9}$.\n\nwhere τ x,y,z are Pauli matrices, and x, y, z -links are de- fined in FIG. 1. It was shown by Kitaev 1 that this spin- 1/2 model can be mapped to a model with one Majo- rana fermion per site coupled to Ising gauge fields on the links. And as the Ising gauge flux has no fluctuation, the model can be regarded as, under each gauge flux config- uration, a free Majorana fermion problem. The ground state is achieved in the sector of zero gauge flux through each hexagon. The Majorana fermions in this sector have Dirac-like gapless dispersion resembling that of graphene, as long as | J$_{x}$ | , | J$_{y}$ | , and | J$_{z}$ | satisfy the triangular rela- tion, sum of any two of them is greater than the third one $^{1}$. It was further proposed by Kitaev1 that opening of fermion gap by magnetic field can give the Ising vortices non-Abelian anyonic statistics, because the Ising vortex will carry a zero-energy Majorana mode, although mag- netic field destroys the exact solvability.\n\nto realize non-Abelian anyons. The model simply reads\n\n$$H$_{Kitaev}$ = − ∑ x $^{−}$links J$_{x}$τ x j τ x k − ∑ y $^{−}$links J$_{y}$τ y j τ y k − ∑ z $^{−}$links J$_{z}$τ z j τ z k (1)$$\n\n## Contents\n\nFa Wang 1\n\n- I. Introduction. 1\n\n- II. Formulation of the Pseudo-spin-1/2 from Four-spin Cluster. 2\n\n- III. Realization of the Kitaev Model. 3\n\n- IV. Generate the High Order Physical Spin Interactions by Perturbative Expansion. 5\n\n- A. Generate the High Order Terms by Coupling to Optical Phonon. 5\n\n- B. Generate the High Order Terms by Magnetic Interactions between Clusters. 7\n\n- V. Conclusions. 8\n\n- Acknowledgments 8\n\n- A. Coupling between Distortions of a Tetrahedron and the Pseudo-spins 8\n\n- B. Derivation of the Terms Generated by Second Order Perturbation of Inter-cluster Magnetic Interactions 9\n\n- References 10" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6718808589087166, + "doc_id": "5d57dca9f5ec3e83c96b76d36bb4948e36f4814cd364c82c68702b47cbfef2bc", + "edit_distance": 0.5394190871369294, + "f1_score": 0.9723320158102766, + "meteor": 0.5547165433592914, + "precision": 0.9609375, + "pred_md": "- 26 K. S. Raman, R. Moessner, S. L. Sondhi, Phys. Rev. B 72 , 064413 (2005).\n- 27 D. F. Schroeter, E. Kapit, R. Thomale, and M. Greiter, Phys. Rev. Lett. 99 , 097202 (2007); R. Thomale, E. Kapit, D. F. Schroeter, and M. Greiter, Phys. Rev. B 80 , 104406 (2009).\n- 28 O. Tchernyshyov, R. Moessner, S. L. Sondhi, Phys. Rev. Lett. 88 , 067203 (2002).\n- 29 F. Becca, F. Mila, Phys. Rev. Lett. 89 , 037204 (2002).\n- 30 K. Penc, N. Shannon, H. Shiba, Phys. Rev. Lett. 93 , 197203 (2004).\n- 31 C. Weber, F. Becca, F. Mila, Phys. Rev. B 72 , 024449 (2005).\n- 32 G.-W. Chern, C. J. Fennie, O. Tchernyshyov, Phys. Rev.\n\n11\n\n- B 74 , 060405(R) (2006).\n- 33 D. L. Bergman, R. Shindou, G. A. Fiete, L. Balents, Phys. Rev. B 74 , 134409 (2006).\n- 34 Fa Wang, Ashvin Vishwanath, Phys. Rev. Lett. 100 , 077201 (2008).\n- 35 O. Tchernyshyov, G.-W. Chern, arXiv:0907.1693 (2009).\n- 36 Y. Taguchi, Y. Oohara, H. Yoshizawa, N. Nagaosa, Y. Tokura, Science 291 , 2573 (2001).\n- 37 X. G. Wen, Frank Wilczek, A. Zee, Phys. Rev. B 39, 11413 (1989); X. G. Wen, Phys. Rev. B 40 , 7387 (1989).\n- 38 Dimitris I. Tsomokos, Juan Jos' e Garc' ıa-Ripoll, Nigel R. Cooper, Jiannis K. Pachos, Phys. Rev. A 77 , 012106 (2008).", + "recall": 0.984, + "true_md": "11\n\nB 74 , 060405(R) (2006).\n\n- 26 K. S. Raman, R. Moessner, S. L. Sondhi, Phys. Rev. B 72 , 064413 (2005). 27\n\n- 064413 (2005). 27 D. F. Schroeter, E. Kapit, R. Thomale, and M. Greiter, Phys. Rev. Lett. 99 , 097202 (2007); R. Thomale, E. Kapit, D. F. Schroeter, and M. Greiter, Phys. Rev. B 80 , 104406 (2009). 28\n\n- B 74 , 060405(R) (2006). 33 D. L. Bergman, R. Shindou, G. A. Fiete, L. Balents, Phys. Rev. B 74 , 134409 (2006). 34\n\n- Rev. B 74 , 134409 (2006). 34 Fa Wang, Ashvin Vishwanath, Phys. Rev. Lett. 100 , 077201 (2008). 35\n\n- 077201 (2008). 35 O. Tchernyshyov, G.-W. Chern, arXiv:0907.1693 (2009). 36\n\n- O. Tchernyshyov, G.-W. Chern, arXiv:0907.1693 (2009). 36 Y. Taguchi, Y. Oohara, H. Yoshizawa, N. Nagaosa, Y. Tokura, Science 291 , 2573 (2001). 37\n\n- Tokura, Science 291 , 2573 (2001). 37 X. G. Wen, Frank Wilczek, A. Zee, Phys. Rev. B 39, 11413 (1989); X. G. Wen, Phys. Rev. B 40 , 7387 (1989). 38\n\n- (2009). 28 O. Tchernyshyov, R. Moessner, S. L. Sondhi, Phys. Rev. Lett. 88 , 067203 (2002). 29\n\n- Lett. 88 , 067203 (2002). 29 F. Becca, F. Mila, Phys. Rev. Lett. 89 , 037204 (2002). 30\n\n- F. Becca, F. Mila, Phys. Rev. Lett. 89 , 037204 (2002). 30 K. Penc, N. Shannon, H. Shiba, Phys. Rev. Lett. 93 , 197203 (2004). 31\n\n- 197203 (2004). 31 C. Weber, F. Becca, F. Mila, Phys. Rev. B 72 , 024449 (2005). 32\n\n- (1989); X. G. Wen, Phys. Rev. B 40 , 7387 (1989). 38 Dimitris I. Tsomokos, Juan Jos´e Garc´ıa-Ripoll, Nigel R. Cooper, Jiannis K. Pachos, Phys. Rev. A 77 , 012106 (2008).\n\n- (2005). 32 G.-W. Chern, C. J. Fennie, O. Tchernyshyov, Phys. Rev." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8821271899911538, + "doc_id": "c8fb4ed14a2d19d5b3864ec879fabf1f618b95dec70a7c5ccc96b06cf8a9bbf3", + "edit_distance": 0.14450261780104712, + "f1_score": 0.9378531073446328, + "meteor": 0.9103200608608524, + "precision": 0.9595375722543352, + "pred_md": "4\n\nthat in this phase the magnetic susceptibility shows a Curie component but the value of the magnetic moment of the localized electrons is enhanced by the presence of the itinerant electrons. Indeed the Hund's coupling ferromagnetic correlation between the on-site spin in the different orbitals induces a local moment in the itinerant bands. The value of the total effective moment is thus larger than the simple one of the localized component and grows with J .\n\nIndeed this can be shown by very simple arguments using the effective model for the OSMP introduced in [17]. In this simplified picture of the OSMP one can show that the local magnetic susceptibility has the form\n\n\n\nwhere χ it is the local susceptibility of the itinerant part (still Pauli-like) and M it ( H ) is the magnetic moment induced by a local field H in the itinerant component.\n\nA detailed comparison between experimental results for the magnetic response and a more realistic calculation based on the combination of many-body approaches and realistic bandstructure is the natural extension of the present analysis. It is worth noting that through a similar comparison one could obtain an accurate estimate for an otherwise elusive quantity, the Hund's interaction J .\n\nIn this paper we have discussed the possibility of an orbital-selective Mott transition in a five-band model which is a backbone description of the electronic structure of the pnictides. We found a realization of the transition proposed in Ref. [6], where the OSMT is determined by the lifting of the orbital degeneracy due to a (reasonably small) crystal field splitting. The relevance of band-selective properties in multiband superconductivity has been indeed proposed in the context of the cuprates[18] and pnictides[19]\n\nAcknowledgements Weacknowledge financial support of MIUR PRIN 2007 Prot. 2007FW3MJX003\n\n## References\n\n- 1. Y. Kamihara et al. , J. Am Chem. Soc. 128 , 10012 ( 2006); ibid. 130 , 3296 (2008)\n- 2. A, Comanac, L. de' Medici, M. Capone, and A. J. Millis, Nat. Phys. 4 , 287 (2008)\n- 3. Q. Si, E. Abrahams, J. Dai, J. X. Zhu, arXiv:0901.4112v1\n- 4. Y. Sekiba, T. Sato, K. Nakayama, K. Terashima, P. Richard, J. H. Bowen, H. Ding, Y.-M. Xu, L. J. Li, G. H. Cao, Z.-A. Xu, T. Takahashi, arXiv:0812.4111; H. Ding, K. Nakayama, P. Richard, S. Souma, T. Sato, T. Takahashi, M. Neupane, Y.-M. Xu, Z.-H. Pan, A.V. Federov, Z. Wang, X. Dai, Z. Fang, G.F. Chen, J.L. Luo, N.L. Wang, arXiv:0812.0534\n- 5. T. Nomura, S. W. Kim, Y. Kamihara, M. Hirano, P. V. Sushko, K. Kato, M. Takata, A. L. Shluger, H. Hosono, Supercond. Sci. Technol. 21 , 125028 (2008)\n- 6. L. de' Medici, S.R.Hassan, M. Capone, X. Dai, (2008). Phys. Rev. Lett. 102 , 126401 (2009)\n- 7. P. Lu, Phys. Rev. B 49 , 5687 (1994)\n- 8. M.J. Rozenberg, Phys. Rev. B 55 , R4855 (1997)\n- 9. O. Gunnarsson, E. Koch, R. Martin, Phys. Rev. B 54 , R11026 (1996)\n- 10. O. Gunnarsson, E. Koch, R. Martin, Phys. Rev. B 56 , 1146 (1997)\n- 11. E. Koch, O. Gunnarsson, R.M. Martin, Phys. Rev. B 60 , 15714 (1999)\n- 12. S. Florens, A. Georges, G. Kotliar, O. Parcollet, Phys. Rev. B 66 , 205102 (2002)\n- 13. K. Haule, J. Shim, G. Kotliar, Phys. Rev. Lett. 100 , 226402 (2008)\n- 14. K. Haule, G. Kotliar, arXiv:0805.0722\n- 15. A. Georges, G. Kotliar, W. Krauth, M.J. Rozenberg, Rev. Mod. Phys. 68 , 13 (1996)\n- 16. T.Pruschke, R. Bulla, Eur. Phys. J. B 44 , 217 (2005)\n- 17. S. Biermann, L. de' Medici, A. Georges, Phys. Rev. Lett. 95 , 206401 (2005)\n- 18. N. Kristoffel, P. Rubin and T. Ord, J. Phys.: Conf. Ser. ¨ 108 012034; F. V. Kusmartsev and M. Saarela, Supercond. Sci. Technol. 22 , 014008 (2009)\n- 19. R. Caivano et. al. , Supercond. Sci. Technol. 22 , 014004 (2009)", + "recall": 0.9171270718232044, + "true_md": "4\n\nthat in this phase the magnetic susceptibility shows a Curie component but the value of the magnetic moment of the localized electrons is enhanced by the presence of the itinerant electrons. Indeed the Hund’s coupling fer- romagnetic correlation between the on-site spin in the different orbitals induces a local moment in the itiner- ant bands. The value of the total effective moment is thus larger than the simple one of the localized compo- nent and grows with J .\n\nIndeed this can be shown by very simple arguments using the effective model for the OSMP introduced in [17]. In this simplified picture of the OSMP one can show that the local magnetic susceptibility has the form\n\nwhere χ$_{it}$ is the local susceptibility of the itinerant part (still Pauli-like) and M$_{it}$ ( H ) is the magnetic moment induced by a local field H in the itinerant component.\n\nA detailed comparison between experimental results for the magnetic response and a more realistic calcula- tion based on the combination of many-body approaches and realistic bandstructure is the natural extension of the present analysis. It is worth noting that through a similar comparison one could obtain an accurate es- timate for an otherwise elusive quantity, the Hund’s interaction J .\n\n$$χ$_{loc}$ = χ$_{it}$ + ( M$_{it}$ [ J/ 2] + 1 $_{2}$) 2 T , (1)$$\n\nIn this paper we have discussed the possibility of an orbital-selective Mott transition in a five-band model which is a backbone description of the electronic struc- ture of the pnictides. We found a realization of the tran- sition proposed in Ref. [6], where the OSMT is deter- mined by the lifting of the orbital degeneracy due to a (reasonably small) crystal field splitting. The relevance of band-selective properties in multiband superconduc- tivity has been indeed proposed in the context of the cuprates[18] and pnictides[19]\n\nAcknowledgements We acknowledge financial support of MIUR PRIN 2007 Prot. 2007FW3MJX003\n\n## References\n\n- 1. Y. Kamihara et al. , J. Am Chem. Soc. 128 , 10012 ( 2006); ibid. 130 , 3296 (2008)\n\n- 2. A, Comanac, L. de’ Medici, M. Capone, and A. J. Millis, Nat. Phys. 4 , 287 (2008)\n\n- 3. Q. Si, E. Abrahams, J. Dai, J. X. Zhu, arXiv:0901.4112v1\n\n- 4. Y. Sekiba, T. Sato, K. Nakayama, K. Terashima, P. Richard, J. H. Bowen, H. Ding, Y.-M. Xu, L. J. Li, G. H. Cao, Z.-A. Xu, T. Takahashi, arXiv:0812.4111; H. Ding, K. Nakayama, P. Richard, S. Souma, T. Sato, T. Takahashi, M. Neupane, Y.-M. Xu, Z.-H. Pan, A.V. Federov, Z. Wang, X. Dai, Z. Fang, G.F. Chen, J.L. Luo, N.L. Wang, arXiv:0812.0534\n\n- 5. T. Nomura, S. W. Kim, Y. Kamihara, M. Hirano, P. V. Sushko, K. Kato, M. Takata, A. L. Shluger, H. Hosono, Supercond. Sci. Technol. 21 , 125028 (2008)\n\n- 6. L. de’ Medici, S.R.Hassan, M. Capone, X. Dai, (2008). Phys. Rev. Lett. 102 , 126401 (2009)\n\n- 7. P. Lu, Phys. Rev. B 49 , 5687 (1994)\n\n- 8. M.J. Rozenberg, Phys. Rev. B 55 , R4855 (1997)\n\n- 9. O. Gunnarsson, E. Koch, R. Martin, Phys. Rev. B 54 , R11026 (1996)\n\n- 10. O. Gunnarsson, E. Koch, R. Martin, Phys. Rev. B 56 , 1146 (1997)\n\n- 11. E. Koch, O. Gunnarsson, R.M. Martin, Phys. Rev. B 60 , 15714 (1999)\n\n- 12. S. Florens, A. Georges, G. Kotliar, O. Parcollet, Phys. Rev. B 66 , 205102 (2002)\n\n- 13. K. Haule, J. Shim, G. Kotliar, Phys. Rev. Lett. 100 , 226402 (2008)\n\n- 14. K. Haule, G. Kotliar, arXiv:0805.0722\n\n- 15. A. Georges, G. Kotliar, W. Krauth, M.J. Rozenberg, Rev. Mod. Phys. 68 , 13 (1996)\n\n- 16. T.Pruschke, R. Bulla, Eur. Phys. J. B 44 , 217 (2005)\n\n- 206401 (2005) 18. N. Kristoffel, P. Rubin and T. ¨ Ord, J. Phys.: Conf. Ser. 108 012034; F. V. Kusmartsev and M. Saarela, Supercond. Sci. Technol. 22 , 014008 (2009)\n\n- 17. S. Biermann, L. de’ Medici, A. Georges, Phys. Rev. Lett. 95 , 206401 (2005) ¨\n\n- 19. R. Caivano et. al. , Supercond. Sci. Technol. 22 , 014004 (2009)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7298529148378761, + "doc_id": "e96ebacf15ef1a66cc44b9ca63982aa77e1dfdfb5d5ae7c999113b52a3537b03", + "edit_distance": 0.6496212121212122, + "f1_score": 0.9509933774834436, + "meteor": 0.8233635588115165, + "precision": 0.9702702702702702, + "pred_md": "9\n\nFigure 7: We simulated equation (A1) for systems of size L = 400 with periodic boundary conditions, using several values of Φ (From left to right, top to bottom, Φ = 1 06; 1 07; 1 12; 1 2; 1 35; 1 5; 1 7; 1 95; 2 5). . . . . . . . . . The steady-state w x ( ) was then decomposed in Fourier series w x ( ) = a 0 + ∑ N/ 2 n a n cos(2 πnx/L ) + b n sin(2 πnx/L ), where N is the number of data points and the cut-off when n →∞ is given by the Nyquist frequency. The blue points correspond to the amplitude of the largest mode: w q = max n √ a 2 n + b 2 n . When the transition is continuous, we compare these points with the results of the amplitude equation w q = 2 √ ε A | | , where | A | is solution of (A18) (red lines) and the agreement is excellent. For Φ > . 1 58 or Φ < . 1 08, the transition is clearly discontinuous.\n\nFigure 7: We simulated equation (A1) for systems of size L = 400 with periodic boundary conditions, using several values of Φ (From left to right, top to bottom, Φ = 1 06; 1 07; 1 12; 1 2; 1 35; 1 5; 1 7; 1 95; 2 5). . . . . . . . . . The steady-state w x ( ) was then decomposed in Fourier series w x ( ) = a 0 + ∑ N/ 2 n a n cos(2 πnx/L ) + b n sin(2 πnx/L ), where N is the number of data points and the cut-off when n →∞ is given by the Nyquist frequency. The blue points correspond to the amplitude of the largest mode: w q = max n √ a 2 n + b 2 n . When the transition is continuous, we compare these points with the results of the amplitude equation w q = 2 √ ε A | | , where | A | is solution of (A18) (red lines) and the agreement is excellent. For Φ > . 1 58 or Φ < . 1 08, the transition is clearly discontinuous.\n\nPatterns Generated by Bacillus subtilis . J. theor. Biol. 188:177-185.\n\n- [9] Tyson R., Lubkin, S.R., Murray, J.D. (1999) A minimal mechanism for bacterial pattern formation. Proc. Roy. Soc. Lon. B 266:299-304.\n- [10] Brenner, M.P., Levitov, L.S., Budrene, E.O. (1998) Physical mechanisms for chemotactic pattern formation by bacteria. Biophys. J. 74:1677-1693.\n- [11] Espiov S.E., Shapiro J.A. (1998) Kinetic model of Proteus mirabilis swarm colony. J. Math. Biol. 36:249-268.\n- [12] Toner J., Tu Y.H., Ramaswamy S. (2005) Hydrodynamics and phases of flocks. Ann. Phys. (N.Y.) 318: 170-244.\n- [13] Ramaswamy S, Simha R.A., Toner J. (2003) Active nematics on a substrate: giant number fluctuations and long-time tails. Europhys. Lett. 62: 196-202.\n- [14] Narayan V., Ramaswamy S., Menon N. (2007) Longlived giant number fluctuations in a swarming granular nematic. Science 317: 105-108.\n- [15] Tailleur J, Cates M.E. (2008) Statistical mechanics of interacting run-and-tumble bacteria. Phys. Rev. Lett. 100: 218103.\n- [16] P. Galajda, J. Keymer, P. Chaikin, R. Austin (2008) J. Bacteriol. 189:8704-8707.\n- [17] P. Galajda et al. (2008) Funnel ratchets in biology at low Reynolds number: choanotaxis. J. Modern Optics 55:3413-3422. (2008)\n- [18] Tailleur J, Cates M-E (2009) Sedimentation, trapping,\n- and rectification of dilute bacteria. Europhys. Lett. 86 :60002.\n- [19] Angelani L, Di Leonardo R, Ruocco G (2009) SelfStarting Micromotors in a Bacterial Bath. Phs. Rev. Lett. 102:048104.\n- [20] Chaikin P.M., Lubenski T.C, Principles of condensed matter physics , Cambridge University Press, Cambridge (1995).\n- [21] Schnitzer M.J. (1993) Theory of continuum random walks and application to chemotaxis. Phys. Rev. E 48:2553-2568.\n- [22] Berg H.C., E. coli in Motion, Springer (2003).\n- [23] Dickman R. (1994) Numerical study of a field theory for directed percolation. Phys. Rev. E 50:4404-4409.\n- [24] Dornic I., Chate H., Munoz M.A. (2005) Integration of Langevin equations with multiplicative noise and the viability of field theories for absorbing phase transitions. Phys. Rev. Lett. 94: 100601.\n- [25] Cates M.E., Vollmer J., Wagner A., Vollmer D. (2002) Phase separation in binary fluid mixtures with continuously ramped temperature. Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc. A 361:793-804.\n- [26] P. Becherer, A.N. Morozov, W. van Saarloos, (2009) Probing a subcritical instability with an amplitude expansion: An exploration of how far one can get. Physica D 238:1827-1840.\n- [27] Mittal N., Budrene E.O., Brenner M.P., van Oudernaar-", + "recall": 0.9324675324675324, + "true_md": "9\n\nFigure 7: We simulated equation (A1) for systems of size L = 400 with periodic boundary conditions, using several values of Φ (From left to right, top to bottom, Φ = 1 . 06; 1 . 07; 1 . 12; 1 . 2; 1 . 35; 1 . 5; 1 . 7; 1 . 95; 2 . 5). The steady-state w ( x ) was then decomposed in Fourier series w ( x ) = a$_{0}$ + ∑ N/ 2 n a$_{n}$ cos(2 πnx/L ) + b$_{n}$ sin(2 πnx/L ), where N is the number of data points and the cut-off when n → ∞ is given by the Nyquist frequency. The blue points correspond to the amplitude of the largest mode: w$_{q}$ = max$_{n}$ √ a 2 n + b 2 $_{n}$. When the transition is continuous, we compare these points with the results of the amplitude equation w$_{q}$ = 2 √ ε | A | , where | A | is solution of (A18) (red lines) and the agreement is excellent. For Φ > 1 . 58 or Φ < 1 . 08, the transition is clearly discontinuous.\n\nand rectification of dilute bacteria. Europhys. Lett. 86 :60002.\n\n- [9] Tyson R., Lubkin, S.R., Murray, J.D. (1999) A minimal mechanism for bacterial pattern formation. Proc. Roy. Soc. Lon. B 266:299-304.\n\n- [19] Angelani L, Di Leonardo R, Ruocco G (2009) Self- Starting Micromotors in a Bacterial Bath. Phs. Rev. Lett. 102:048104.\n\n- [20] Chaikin P.M., Lubenski T.C, Principles of condensed matter physics , Cambridge University Press, Cambridge (1995).\n\n- [10] Brenner, M.P., Levitov, L.S., Budrene, E.O. (1998) Phys- ical mechanisms for chemotactic pattern formation by bacteria. Biophys. J. 74:1677-1693.\n\n- [11] Espiov S.E., Shapiro J.A. (1998) Kinetic model of Pro- teus mirabilis swarm colony. J. Math. Biol. 36:249-268.\n\n- [21] Schnitzer M.J. (1993) Theory of continuum random walks and application to chemotaxis. Phys. Rev. E 48:2553-2568.\n\n- [12] Toner J., Tu Y.H., Ramaswamy S. (2005) Hydrodynam- ics and phases of flocks. Ann. Phys. (N.Y.) 318: 170-244.\n\n- [13] Ramaswamy S, Simha R.A., Toner J. (2003) Active ne- matics on a substrate: giant number fluctuations and long-time tails. Europhys. Lett. 62: 196-202.\n\n- [22] Berg H.C., E. coli in Motion, Springer (2003).\n\n- [23] Dickman R. (1994) Numerical study of a field theory for directed percolation. Phys. Rev. E 50:4404-4409.\n\n- [24] Dornic I., Chate H., Munoz M.A. (2005) Integration of Langevin equations with multiplicative noise and the vi- ability of field theories for absorbing phase transitions. Phys. Rev. Lett. 94: 100601.\n\n- [25] Cates M.E., Vollmer J., Wagner A., Vollmer D. (2002) Phase separation in binary fluid mixtures with contin- uously ramped temperature. Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc. A 361:793-804.\n\n- [26] P. Becherer, A.N. Morozov, W. van Saarloos, (2009) Probing a subcritical instability with an amplitude ex- pansion: An exploration of how far one can get. Physica D 238:1827-1840.\n\n- [27] Mittal N., Budrene E.O., Brenner M.P., van Oudernaar-\n\n- [14] Narayan V., Ramaswamy S., Menon N. (2007) Long- lived giant number fluctuations in a swarming granular nematic. Science 317: 105-108.\n\n- [15] Tailleur J, Cates M.E. (2008) Statistical mechanics of in- teracting run-and-tumble bacteria. Phys. Rev. Lett. 100: 218103.\n\n- [16] P. Galajda, J. Keymer, P. Chaikin, R. Austin (2008) J. Bacteriol. 189:8704-8707.\n\n- [17] P. Galajda et al. (2008) Funnel ratchets in biology at low Reynolds number: choanotaxis. J. Modern Optics 55:3413-3422. (2008)\n\n- [18] Tailleur J, Cates M-E (2009) Sedimentation, trapping,\n\nPatterns Generated by Bacillus subtilis . J. theor. Biol. 188:177-185." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9147506613353573, + "doc_id": "e10396ba788319189fbc0dbd3bb1ce577a0cd4fefc538ecaa8462ab56ed7daab", + "edit_distance": 0.7558479532163743, + "f1_score": 0.9680000000000001, + "meteor": 0.7746480967817676, + "precision": 0.983739837398374, + "pred_md": "FIG. 3: The evolution of J 2 from the numerical (solid) and the approximate (dot-dashed) solutions.\n\nFIG. 3: The evolution of J 2 from the numerical (solid) and the approximate (dot-dashed) solutions.\n\n- [1] S. P. Mikheyev and A. Yu. Smirnov, Yad. Fiz. 42 , 1441 (1985); Sov. J. Nucl. Phys. 42 , 913 (1985); S. P. Mikheyev and A. Yu. Smirnov, Nuovo Cimento C 9 , 17 (1986); L. Wolfenstein, Phys. Rev. D 17 , 2369 (1978).\n- [2] V. Barger, K. Whisnant, S. Pakvasa, and R. J. N. Phillips, Phys. Rev. D 22 , 2718 (1980); H. W. Zaglauer and K. H. Schwarzer, Z. Phys. C 40 , 273 (1988); Zhizhong Xing, Phys. Lett. B 487 , 327 (2000); M. Freund, Phys. Rev. D 64 , 053003 (2001); T. Ohlsson and H. Snellman, J. Math. Phys. 41 , 2768 (2000), Erratumibid. 42 , 2345 (2001).\n- [3] T. K. Kuo and T.-H. Lee, Phys. Rev. D 71 , 093001 (2005).\n- [4] C. Jarlskog, Phys. Rev. Lett. 55 , 1039 (1985).\n- [5] P. F. Harrison, D. H. Perkins, and W. G. Scott, Phys. Lett. B 530 , 167 (2002).\n\n5\n\nvacuum satisfies x i 0 + y i 0 ∼ = 0, which happens to lie on the 'fixed surface' of the evolution equations, so that x i + y i ∼ = 0 for all A values. These solutions are summarized in Eq. (28), which exhibits the extraordinary simplicity of W as a function of A . These results are found to be quite accurate when we compare them to those obtained by numerical integration of the equations. It is hoped that they will be useful in assessing the matter effects in connection with the long baseline experiments, as well as efforts to determine CP-violation in the leptonic sector.\n\nS.H.C. is supported by the National Science Council of Taiwan, grant No. NSC 98-2112-M-182-001-MY2.\n\n- [6] Particle Data Group, Phys. Lett. B 592 , 130 (2004). Note that the phase angle ' δ ' is changed to ' φ ' in this paper.\n- [7] S. H. Chiu, T. K. Kuo, T.-H. Lee, and C. Xiong, Phys. Rev. D 79 , 013012 (2009).\n- [8] C. S. Lam, Phys. Lett. B 507 , 214 (2001); P. F. Harrison and W. G. Scott, Phys. Lett. B 547 , 219 (2002).\n- [9] P. F. Harrison and W. G. Scott, Phys. Lett. B 476 , 349 (2000); V. A. Naumov, Phys. Lett. B 323 , 351 (1994); K. Kimura, A. Takamura, and H. Yokomakura, Phys. Lett. B 537 , 86 (2002).\n- [10] T. K. Kuo and J. Pantaleone, Rev. Mod. Phys. 61 , 937 (1989).\n- [11] S. Toshev, Mod. Phys. Lett. A 6 , 455 (1991); P. I. Krastev and S. T. Petcov, Phys. Lett. B 205 , 84 (1988).", + "recall": 0.952755905511811, + "true_md": "FIG. 3: The evolution of J 2 from the numerical (solid) and the approximate (dot-dashed) solutions.\n\nvacuum satisfies x$_{i}$$\\_{0}$ + y$\\_{i}$$_{0}$ ∼ = 0, which happens to lie on the “fixed surface” of the evolution equations, so that x$_{i}$ + y$_{i}$ ∼ = 0 for all A values. These solutions are summarized in Eq. (28), which exhibits the extraordinary simplicity of W as a function of A . These results are found to be quite accurate when we compare them to those obtained by numerical integration of the equations. It is hoped that they will be useful in assessing the matter effects in connection with the long baseline experiments, as well as efforts to determine CP-violation in the leptonic sector.\n\nS.H.C. is supported by the National Science Council of Taiwan, grant No. NSC 98-2112-M-182-001-MY2.\n\n- [11] S. Toshev, Mod. Phys. Lett. A 6 , 455 (1991); P. I. Krastev and S. T. Petcov, Phys. Lett. B 205 , 84 (1988).\n\n- [10] T. K. Kuo and J. Pantaleone, Rev. Mod. Phys. 61 , 937 (1989).\n\n- [5] P. F. Harrison, D. H. Perkins, and W. G. Scott, Phys. Lett. B 530 , 167 (2002).\n\n- [4] C. Jarlskog, Phys. Rev. Lett. 55 , 1039 (1985).\n\n- [3] T. K. Kuo and T.-H. Lee, Phys. Rev. D 71 , 093001 (2005).\n\n- [2] V. Barger, K. Whisnant, S. Pakvasa, and R. J. N. Phillips, Phys. Rev. D 22 , 2718 (1980); H. W. Zaglauer and K. H. Schwarzer, Z. Phys. C 40 , 273 (1988); Zhi- zhong Xing, Phys. Lett. B 487 , 327 (2000); M. Freund, Phys. Rev. D 64 , 053003 (2001); T. Ohlsson and H. Snellman, J. Math. Phys. 41 , 2768 (2000), Erratum- ibid. 42 , 2345 (2001).\n\n- [1] S. P. Mikheyev and A. Yu. Smirnov, Yad. Fiz. 42 , 1441 (1985); Sov. J. Nucl. Phys. 42 , 913 (1985); S. P. Mikheyev and A. Yu. Smirnov, Nuovo Cimento C 9 , 17 (1986); L. Wolfenstein, Phys. Rev. D 17 , 2369 (1978).\n\n- [9] P. F. Harrison and W. G. Scott, Phys. Lett. B 476 , 349 (2000); V. A. Naumov, Phys. Lett. B 323 , 351 (1994); K. Kimura, A. Takamura, and H. Yokomakura, Phys. Lett. B 537 , 86 (2002).\n\n- [8] C. S. Lam, Phys. Lett. B 507 , 214 (2001); P. F. Harrison and W. G. Scott, Phys. Lett. B 547 , 219 (2002).\n\n- [7] S. H. Chiu, T. K. Kuo, T.-H. Lee, and C. Xiong, Phys. Rev. D 79 , 013012 (2009).\n\n- [6] Particle Data Group, Phys. Lett. B 592 , 130 (2004). Note that the phase angle “ δ ” is changed to “ φ ” in this paper.\n\n5" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6017561796451634, + "doc_id": "f36b23308e4b474e9157c970e48eb0d0d2316c7358ef7fcf045f815efe0c6048", + "edit_distance": 0.4669987546699875, + "f1_score": 0.9216710182767625, + "meteor": 0.7376155914068697, + "precision": 0.9566395663956639, + "pred_md": "modified MFLI models. It is interesting that this holds despite the fact that for large λ CB model displays the physics one apparently needs to reverse the sign of ∆ W K - the absence of the quasiparticle peak in the NS and its emergence in the SCS accompanied by the dip and the hump at larger energies. The absence of coherent quasiparticle in the NS at large λ is also apparent form Fig 21 where we show the normal state distribution functions for two different λ . For large λ the jump (which indicates the presence of quasiparticles) virtually disappears.\n\nOn a more careful look, we found that indifference of δW ω ( c ) to the increase of λ is merely the consequence of the fact that above we kept λω sf constant. Indeed, at small frequencies, fermionic self-energy in the NS is Σ ' = λω , Σ' = λ ω / λω 2 2 ( sf ), and both Σ ' and Σ '' increase with λ if we keep λω sf constant. But at frequencies larger than ω sf , which we actually probe by ∆ W ω ( c ), the selfenergy essentially depends only on λω sf , and increasing λ but keeping λω sf constant does not bring us closer to the physics associated with the recovery of electron coherence in the SCS. To detect this physics, we need to see how things evolve when we increase λω sf above the scale of ∆ , i.e., consider a truly strong coupling when not only λ /greatermuch 1 but also the normal state Σ NS ( ω ≥ ∆) >> ∆.\n\nTo address this issue, we took a larger λ for the same ω sf and re-did the calculation of the conductivities and optical integrals. The results for σ ω ( ) and ∆ W ω ( c ) are presented in Fig. 22. We found the same behavior as before, i.e., ∆ W K is negative. But we also found that the larger is the overall scale for the self-energy, the larger is a frequency of zero-crossing of ∆ W ω ( c ). In particular, for the same λ and ω sf that were used in Ref. 33 to fit the NS conductivity data, the zero crossing is at ∼ 0 8 . eV which is quite close to the bandwidth. This implies that at a truly strong coupling the frequency at which ∆ W ω ( c ) changes sign can well be larger than the bandwidth of 1 eV in which case ∆ W integrated up to the bandwidth does indeed remain positive. Such behavior would be consistent with Refs.8,9. we also see from Fig. 22 that ∆ W K becomes small at a truly strong coupling, and over a wide range of frequencies the behavior of ∆ W ω ( c ) is predominantly governed by ∆ f ( ω c ), i.e. by the cut-off term. 50 The implication is that, to first approximation, ∆ W K can be neglected and positive ∆ W w ( c ) integrated to a frequency where it is still positive is almost compensated by the integral over larger frequencies. This again would be consistent with the experimental data in Refs. 8,9.\n\nIt is also instructive to understand the interplay between the behavior of ∆ W ω ( c ) and the behavior of the difference of the kinetic energy between the SCS and the NS, δ KE . We computed the kinetic energy as a function of λω sf and present the results in Fig. 23 for λ = 1 and 10. For a relatively weak λ = 1 the behavior is clearly BCS likeδ KE > 0 and increases with increasing λω sf . However, at large λ = 10, we see that the kinetic energy begin decreasing at large λω sf and eventually changes sign. The behavior of δ KE at a truly strong coupling is\n\n14\n\nconsistent with earlier calculation of the kinetic energy for Ornstein-Zernike form of the spin susceptibility 43 .\n\nWe clearly see that the increase of the zero crossing frequency of ∆ W ω ( c ) at a truly strong coupling is correlated with the non-BCS behavior of δ KE . At the same time, the behavior of δW ω ( c ) is obviously not driven by the kinetic energy as eventually δW ω ( c ) changes sign and become negative. Rather, the increase in the frequency range where ∆ W ω ( c ) remains positive and non-BCS behavior of δ KE are two indications of the same effect that fermions are incoherent in the NS but acquire coherence in the SCS.\n\n## III. CONCLUSION\n\nIn this work we analyzed the behavior of optical integrals W ω ( c ) ∝ ∫ ω c o σ ω dω ( ) and Kubo sum rules in the normal and superconducting states of interacting fermionic systems on a lattice. Our key goal was to understand what sets the sign of ∆ W K = ∆ W ( ∞ ) between the normal and superconducting states and what is the behavior of W ω ( c ) and ∆ W ω ( c ) at finite ω c . In a weak coupling BCS superconductor, ∆ W ω ( c ) is positive at ω c < 2∆ due to a contribution from superfluid density, but becomes negative at larger ω c , and approach a negative value of ∆ W K . Our study was motivated by fascinating optical experiments on the cuprates 7-10 . In overdoped cuprates, there is clear indication 11 that ∆ W ω ( c ) becomes negative above a few ∆, consistent with BCS behavior. In underdoped cuprates, two groups argued 8,9 that ∆ W integrated up to the bandwidth remains positive, while the other group argued 10 that it is negative.\n\nThe reasoning why ∆ W K may potentially change sign at strong coupling involves the correlation between -W K and the kinetic energy. In the BCS limit, kinetic energy obviously increases in a SCS because of gap opening, hence -W K increases, and ∆ W K is negative. At strong coupling, there is a counter effect - fermions become more mobile in a SCS due to a smaller self-energy.\n\nWe considered four models: a BCS model with impurities, a model of fermions interacting with an Einstein boson, a phenomenological MFL model with impurities, and a model of fermions interacting with collective spin fluctuations. In all cases, we found that ∆ W K is negative, but how it evolves with ω c and how much of the sum rule is recovered by integrating up to the bandwidth depends on the model.\n\nThe result most relevant to the experiments on the cuprates is obtained for the spin fluctuation model. We found that at strong coupling, the zero-crossing of δW ω ( c ) occurs at a frequency which increases with the coupling strength and may become larger than the bandwidth at a truly strong coupling. Still, at even larger frequencies, ∆ W ω ( c ) is negative.", + "recall": 0.889168765743073, + "true_md": "14\n\nmodified MFLI models. It is interesting that this holds despite the fact that for large λ CB model displays the physics one apparently needs to reverse the sign of Δ W$_{K}$ – the absence of the quasiparticle peak in the NS and its emergence in the SCS accompanied by the dip and the hump at larger energies. The absence of coherent quasi- particle in the NS at large λ is also apparent form Fig 21 where we show the normal state distribution functions for two different λ . For large λ the jump (which indicates the presence of quasiparticles) virtually disappears.\n\nOn a more careful look, we found that indifference of δW ( ω$_{c}$ ) to the increase of λ is merely the consequence of the fact that above we kept λω$_{sf}$ constant. Indeed, at small frequencies, fermionic self-energy in the NS is Σ ′ = λω , Σ” = λ $^{2}$ω$^{2}$/ ( λω$_{sf}$ ), and both Σ ′ and Σ ′′ increase with λ if we keep λω$_{sf}$ constant. But at frequencies larger than ω$_{sf}$ , which we actually probe by Δ W ( ω$_{c}$ ), the self- energy essentially depends only on λω$_{sf}$ , and increasing λ but keeping λω$_{sf}$ constant does not bring us closer to the physics associated with the recovery of electron coherence in the SCS. To detect this physics, we need to see how things evolve when we increase λω$_{sf}$ above the scale of Δ , i.e., consider a truly strong coupling when not only λ ≫ 1 but also the normal state Σ$_{NS}$( ω ≥ Δ) >> Δ.\n\nTo address this issue, we took a larger λ for the same ω$_{sf}$ and re-did the calculation of the conductivities and optical integrals. The results for σ ( ω ) and Δ W ( ω$_{c}$ ) are presented in Fig. 22. We found the same behavior as be- fore, i.e., Δ W$_{K}$ is negative. But we also found that the larger is the overall scale for the self-energy, the larger is a frequency of zero-crossing of Δ W ( ω$_{c}$ ). In particular, for the same λ and ω$_{sf}$ that were used in Ref. 33 to fit the NS conductivity data, the zero crossing is at ∼ 0 . 8 eV which is quite close to the bandwidth. This implies that at a truly strong coupling the frequency at which Δ W ( ω$_{c}$ ) changes sign can well be larger than the bandwidth of 1 eV in which case Δ W integrated up to the bandwidth does indeed remain positive. Such behavior would be consistent with Refs.8,9. we also see from Fig. 22 that Δ W$_{K}$ becomes small at a truly strong coupling, and over a wide range of frequencies the behavior of Δ W ( ω$_{c}$ ) is predominantly governed by Δ f ( ω$_{c}$ ), i.e. by the cut-off term. 50 The implication is that, to first approximation, Δ W$_{K}$ can be neglected and positive Δ W ( w$_{c}$ ) integrated to a frequency where it is still positive is almost compen- sated by the integral over larger frequencies. This again would be consistent with the experimental data in Refs. 8,9.\n\nIt is also instructive to understand the interplay be- tween the behavior of Δ W ( ω$_{c}$ ) and the behavior of the difference of the kinetic energy between the SCS and the NS, δ$_{KE}$ . We computed the kinetic energy as a function of λω$_{sf}$ and present the results in Fig. 23 for λ = 1 and 10. For a relatively weak λ = 1 the behavior is clearly BCS like- δ$_{KE}$ > 0 and increases with increasing λω$_{sf}$ . However, at large λ = 10, we see that the kinetic energy begin decreasing at large λω$_{sf}$ and eventually changes sign. The behavior of δ$_{KE}$ at a truly strong coupling is\n\nThe result most relevant to the experiments on the cuprates is obtained for the spin fluctuation model. We found that at strong coupling, the zero-crossing of δW ( ω$_{c}$ ) occurs at a frequency which increases with the coupling strength and may become larger than the band- width at a truly strong coupling. Still, at even larger frequencies, Δ W ( ω$_{c}$ ) is negative.\n\nWe considered four models: a BCS model with impu- rities, a model of fermions interacting with an Einstein boson, a phenomenological MFL model with impurities, and a model of fermions interacting with collective spin fluctuations. In all cases, we found that Δ W$_{K}$ is neg- ative, but how it evolves with ω$_{c}$ and how much of the sum rule is recovered by integrating up to the bandwidth depends on the model.\n\nThe reasoning why Δ W$_{K}$ may potentially change sign at strong coupling involves the correlation between − W$_{K}$ and the kinetic energy. In the BCS limit, kinetic en- ergy obviously increases in a SCS because of gap opening, hence − W$_{K}$ increases, and Δ W$_{K}$ is negative. At strong coupling, there is a counter effect – fermions become more mobile in a SCS due to a smaller self-energy.\n\nIn this work we analyzed the behavior of optical in- tegrals W ( ω$_{c}$ ) ∝ ∫ ω$_{c}$ o σ ( ω ) dω and Kubo sum rules in the normal and superconducting states of interacting fermionic systems on a lattice. Our key goal was to understand what sets the sign of Δ W$_{K}$ = Δ W ( ∞ ) be- tween the normal and superconducting states and what is the behavior of W ( ω$_{c}$ ) and Δ W ( ω$_{c}$ ) at finite ω$_{c}$ . In a weak coupling BCS superconductor, Δ W ( ω$_{c}$ ) is positive at ω$_{c}$ < 2Δ due to a contribution from superfluid den- sity, but becomes negative at larger ω$_{c}$ , and approach a negative value of Δ W$_{K}$ . Our study was motivated by fas- cinating optical experiments on the cuprates $^{7–10}$. In over- doped cuprates, there is clear indication 11 that Δ W ( ω$_{c}$ ) becomes negative above a few Δ, consistent with BCS behavior. In underdoped cuprates, two groups argued 8,9 that Δ W integrated up to the bandwidth remains posi- tive, while the other group argued 10 that it is negative.\n\n## III. CONCLUSION\n\nWe clearly see that the increase of the zero crossing frequency of Δ W ( ω$_{c}$ ) at a truly strong coupling is cor- related with the non-BCS behavior of δ$_{KE}$ . At the same time, the behavior of δW ( ω$_{c}$ ) is obviously not driven by the kinetic energy as eventually δW ( ω$_{c}$ ) changes sign and become negative. Rather, the increase in the frequency range where Δ W ( ω$_{c}$ ) remains positive and non-BCS be- havior of δ$_{KE}$ are two indications of the same effect that fermions are incoherent in the NS but acquire coherence in the SCS.\n\nconsistent with earlier calculation of the kinetic energy for Ornstein-Zernike form of the spin susceptibility $^{43}$." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7022173735071731, + "doc_id": "4949bac548beb2f7796054b0b3e776d2290b0af2a23a65e11db127654eb01366", + "edit_distance": 0.26334519572953735, + "f1_score": 0.9584158415841584, + "meteor": 0.5846598163436562, + "precision": 0.9718875502008032, + "pred_md": "- 'Carbon Nanotubes Advanced Topics in the Synthesis, Structure, Properties and Applications', J. Ado, G. Dresselhaus, M. S. Dresselhaus (Eds.), Topics in Applied Physics, Vol. 111, 455-493 (2008), (Springer-Verlag, Berlin Heidelberg 2008).\n- 3 Ph. Avouris and J. Chen, Materials Today 10 , 46 (2006).\n- 4 T. Durkop, B. M. Kim, and M. S. Fuhrer, J. Phys. Condens. Matter. 16 , R553 (2004).\n- 5 A. Le Louarn, F. Kapche, J.-M. Bethoux, H. Happy, G. Dambrine, V. Derycke, P. Chenevier, N. Izard, M. F. Goffman, J.-P. Bourgoin, Appl. Phys. Lett. 90 , 233108 (2007).\n- 6 M.S. Arnold, A.A. Green, J.F. Hulvat, S.I. Stupp, M.C. Hersam, Nature Nanotech. 1 , 60 (2006).\n- 7 T. Fukao, S. Nakamura, H. Kataura and M. Shiraishi, Jpn. J. Appl. Phys. 45 , 6524 (2006).\n- 8 E.S. Snow, P.M. Campbell, M.G. Ancona, J.P. Novak, Appl. Phys. Lett. 86 , 033105 (2005).\n- 9 M.S. Strano, C.A. Dyke, M.L. Usrey, P.W. Barone, M.J. Allen, H.Shan, C.Kittrell, R.H. Hauge, J.M. Tour, R.E. Smalley, Science 301 , 1519 (2003).\n- 10 C. Menard-Moyon, N. Izard, E. Doris, C. Mioskowski, J. Am. Chem. Soc. 128 , 6552 (2006).\n- 11 Y. Maeda, S.. Kimura, M. Kanda, Y. Hirashima, T.\n\n4\n\n- Hasegawa, T. Wakahara, Y. Lian, T. Nakahodo, T. Tsuchiya, T. Akasaka, J. Lu, X. Zhang, Z. Gao, Y. Yu, S. Nagase, S. Kazaoui, N. Minami, T. Shimizu, H. Tokumoto, R. Saito, J. Am. Chem. Soc. 127 , 10287 (2005).\n- 12 M. Zheng, A. Jagota, M.S. Strano, A.P. Santos, P.Barone, S. Grace Chou, B.A. Diner, M.S. Dresselhaus, R.S. Mclean, G. Bibiana Onoa, G.G. Samsonidze, E.D. Semke, M. Usrey, and D.J. Walls, Science 302 , 1545 (2003).\n- 13 S. Kazaoui, N. Minami, B. Nalini, Y. Kim, N. Takada and Y. Hara, Appl. Phys. Lett. 87 , 211914 (2005).\n- 14 A. Nish, J-Y. Hwang, J. Doig, and R.J. Nicholas, Nature Nanotech. 2 , 640 (2007).\n- 15 F. Chen, B. Wang, Y. Chen, and L.-J. Li, Nano Lett. 7 , 3013 (2007).\n- 16 S. Scheinert and G. Paasch, Physics of organics semiconductors, W. Brtting (Edi.) (Wiley-VCH, Weinheim, 2005).\n- 17 A. Vijayaraghavan, S. Blatt, D. Weissenberger, M. OronCarl, F. Hennrich, D. Gerthsen, H. Hahn, R. Krupke, Nano Lett. 7 , 1556 (2007).\n- 18 T. Yasuda, K. Fujita, T. Tsutsui, Y. Geng, S. W. Culligan, and S. H. Chen, Chem. Phys. 17 , 264 (2005).", + "recall": 0.9453125, + "true_md": "4\n\n”Carbon Nanotubes Advanced Topics in the Synthesis, Structure, Properties and Applications”, J. Ado, G. Dres- selhaus, M. S. Dresselhaus (Eds.), Topics in Applied Physics, Vol. 111, 455-493 (2008), (Springer-Verlag, Berlin Heidelberg 2008).\n\n- Heidelberg 2008). 3 Ph. Avouris and J. Chen, Materials Today 10 , 46 (2006). 4\n\n- Ph. Avouris and J. Chen, Materials Today 10 , 46 (2006). 4 T. Durkop, B. M. Kim, and M. S. Fuhrer, J. Phys. Con- dens. Matter. 16 , R553 (2004). 5\n\n- dens. Matter. , R553 (2004). 5 A. Le Louarn, F. Kapche, J.-M. Bethoux, H. Happy, G. Dambrine, V. Derycke, P. Chenevier, N. Izard, M. F. Goff- man, J.-P. Bourgoin, Appl. Phys. Lett. 90 , 233108 (2007). 6\n\n- man, J.-P. Bourgoin, Appl. Phys. Lett. 90 , 233108 (2007). 6 M.S. Arnold, A.A. Green, J.F. Hulvat, S.I. Stupp, M.C. Hersam, Nature Nanotech. 1 , 60 (2006). 7\n\n- Hersam, Nature Nanotech. 1 , 60 (2006). 7 T. Fukao, S. Nakamura, H. Kataura and M. Shiraishi, Jpn. J. Appl. Phys. 45 , 6524 (2006). 8\n\n- J. Appl. Phys. , 6524 (2006). 8 E.S. Snow, P.M. Campbell, M.G. Ancona, J.P. Novak, Appl. Phys. Lett. 86 , 033105 (2005). 9\n\n- Appl. Phys. Lett. 86 , 033105 (2005). 9 M.S. Strano, C.A. Dyke, M.L. Usrey, P.W. Barone, M.J. Allen, H.Shan, C.Kittrell, R.H. Hauge, J.M. Tour, R.E. Smalley, Science 301 , 1519 (2003). 10\n\n- Smalley, Science , 1519 (2003). 10 C. Menard-Moyon, N. Izard, E. Doris, C. Mioskowski, J. Am. Chem. Soc. 128 , 6552 (2006). 11\n\n- Am. Chem. Soc. 128 , 6552 (2006). 11 Y. Maeda, S.. Kimura, M. Kanda, Y. Hirashima, T.\n\n- Hasegawa, T. Wakahara, Y. Lian, T. Nakahodo, T. Tsuchiya, T. Akasaka, J. Lu, X. Zhang, Z. Gao, Y. Yu, S. Nagase, S. Kazaoui, N. Minami, T. Shimizu, H. Toku- moto, R. Saito, J. Am. Chem. Soc. 127 , 10287 (2005).\n\n- moto, R. Saito, J. Am. Chem. Soc. , 10287 (2005). 12 M. Zheng, A. Jagota, M.S. Strano, A.P. Santos, P.Barone, S. Grace Chou, B.A. Diner, M.S. Dresselhaus, R.S. Mclean, G. Bibiana Onoa, G.G. Samsonidze, E.D. Semke, M. Usrey, and D.J. Walls, Science 302 , 1545 (2003). 13\n\n- and D.J. Walls, Science , 1545 (2003). 13 S. Kazaoui, N. Minami, B. Nalini, Y. Kim, N. Takada and Y. Hara, Appl. Phys. Lett. 87 , 211914 (2005). 14\n\n- Y. Hara, Appl. Phys. Lett. 87 , 211914 (2005). 14 A. Nish, J-Y. Hwang, J. Doig, and R.J. Nicholas, Nature Nanotech. 2 , 640 (2007). 15\n\n- Nanotech. 2 , 640 (2007). 15 F. Chen, B. Wang, Y. Chen, and L.-J. Li, Nano Lett. 7 , 3013 (2007). 16\n\n- 3013 (2007). 16 S. Scheinert and G. Paasch, Physics of organics semicon- ductors, W. Brtting (Edi.) (Wiley-VCH, Weinheim, 2005). 17\n\n- ductors, W. Brtting (Edi.) (Wiley-VCH, Weinheim, 2005). 17 A. Vijayaraghavan, S. Blatt, D. Weissenberger, M. Oron- Carl, F. Hennrich, D. Gerthsen, H. Hahn, R. Krupke, Nano Lett. 7 , 1556 (2007). 18\n\n- Lett. , 1556 (2007). 18 T. Yasuda, K. Fujita, T. Tsutsui, Y. Geng, S. W. Culligan, and S. H. Chen, Chem. Phys. 17 , 264 (2005)." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8409463002447678, + "doc_id": "49ac4eb4dfe39a519a4b5c2705f0e7995386937de82137a64f76fa565ba249da", + "edit_distance": 0.8604651162790697, + "f1_score": 0.9476190476190477, + "meteor": 0.742407736008601, + "precision": 0.9754901960784313, + "pred_md": "TABLE I: Design Orbit Specifications.\n\nTABLE II: Linear transfer map R 2 for the ILC damping ring wiggler.\n\nTABLE III: First few nonvanishing Lie generators f m for the ILC damping ring wiggler.\n\nmerically challenging problem whose results are known exactly, we have verified that surface methods have all the advantages claimed in the beginning of Section III. In particular, we demonstrated that errors of a few parts in 10 4 can be achieved for all on-axis gradients C [ n ] m,α ( z ) required to compute transfer maps through 7 th order, and that the results obtained were remarkably insensitive to noise. Moreover, these small errors can be further reduced if desired with the aid of a finer grid.\n\nSubsequently we applied surface methods to compute the interior field for the proposed ILC Damping Ring wigglers. Consistent with the accuracy displayed by the monopole-doublet benchmark results, excellent fits were demonstrated for interior fields. We also illustrated the computation of the design orbit and its associated transfer map based on surface methods.\n\nIn summary, the use of surface methods makes it possible, for the first time, to compute for straight beam-line elements realistic transfer maps for real magnets includ-\n\ning all fringe and high-order multipole field effects.\n\nIn many cases, however, we are interested in magnetic elements with significant sagitta, such as dipoles with large bending angles. In these cases, it is not possible in general to surround the design orbit with a cylindrical surface that lies interior to all iron or other magnetic sources. Part II of this paper will describe an alternative, but more computationally intensive, method suitable for general geometries including that of a bent box with straight ends. See Fig. 26. In this case we obtain simple, geometry-independent kernels for computing the interior vector potential and its derivatives. All the advantages demonstrated in this paper for surface methods will be retained.\n\n!\n\nFIG. 26: (Color) Illustration of a bent box with straight ends, used for computing a transfer map for bending dipoles with large sagitta. A design orbit is illustrated in red.\n\nFIG. 26: (Color) Illustration of a bent box with straight ends, used for computing a transfer map for bending dipoles with large sagitta. A design orbit is illustrated in red.\n\n17", + "recall": 0.9212962962962963, + "true_md": "17\n\nTABLE I: Design Orbit Specifications.\n\nTABLE II: Linear transfer map R$_{2}$ for the ILC damping ring wiggler.\n\nTABLE III: First few nonvanishing Lie generators f$_{m}$ for the ILC damping ring wiggler.\n\nFIG. 26: (Color) Illustration of a bent box with straight ends, used for computing a transfer map for bending dipoles with large sagitta. A design orbit is illustrated in red.\n\ning all fringe and high-order multipole field effects.\n\nIn many cases, however, we are interested in magnetic elements with significant sagitta, such as dipoles with large bending angles. In these cases, it is not possible in general to surround the design orbit with a cylindri- cal surface that lies interior to all iron or other magnetic sources. Part II of this paper will describe an alterna- tive, but more computationally intensive, method suit- able for general geometries including that of a bent box with straight ends. See Fig. 26. In this case we obtain simple, geometry-independent kernels for computing the interior vector potential and its derivatives. All the ad- vantages demonstrated in this paper for surface methods will be retained.\n\nmerically challenging problem whose results are known exactly, we have verified that surface methods have all the advantages claimed in the beginning of Section III. In particular, we demonstrated that errors of a few parts in 10 4 can be achieved for all on-axis gradients C [ n ] $_{m,α}$( z ) required to compute transfer maps through 7 th order, and that the results obtained were remarkably insensi- tive to noise. Moreover, these small errors can be further reduced if desired with the aid of a finer grid.\n\nSubsequently we applied surface methods to compute the interior field for the proposed ILC Damping Ring wigglers. Consistent with the accuracy displayed by the monopole-doublet benchmark results, excellent fits were demonstrated for interior fields. We also illustrated the computation of the design orbit and its associated trans- fer map based on surface methods.\n\nIn summary, the use of surface methods makes it pos- sible, for the first time, to compute for straight beam-line elements realistic transfer maps for real magnets includ-" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5694575214070587, + "doc_id": "58b21b7bcf7e72ef03e9cecb74e3be4c95ca8d337cc922429f85958801350543", + "edit_distance": 0.5376569037656904, + "f1_score": 0.9102564102564101, + "meteor": 0.8786222751131456, + "precision": 0.8711656441717791, + "pred_md": "Fig. 13 shows the diffusion coefficient scaling with the pair part of the excess entropy. As is seen from the figures\n\nFig. 13 shows the diffusion coefficient scaling with the pair part of the excess entropy. As is seen from the figures\n\n/s40/s98/s41\n\n/s49/s46/s48\n\n/s48/s46/s56\n\n/s48/s46/s54\n\n/s48/s46/s52\n\n/s103 /s40 /s114 /s41\n\n/s48\n\n/s50\n\n/s52\n\n/s54\n\n/s56\n\n/s114\n\nFIG. 7: Radial distribution functions of GCM for a set of isotherms at the density ρ = 0 5 (a) -. T = 0 04; 0 07 and 0 1; . . . (b) T = 0 5; 1 0 and 2 0. . . .\n\nof the entropies along two isotherms. One can see that both at high and low temperature the difference between excess entropy and pair contribution to it is rather large. This discrepancy is small at low densities, but greatly increases at the density about 0 4. . Note that this density corresponds to a character distance l ∼ 1 /ρ 1 / 3 /similarequal 1 35, . that is l /similarequal σ 1 . It allows to conclude that the interplay of the distances starts at this density and it is this interplay which makes the excess entropy and pair excess entropy difference to increase rapidly.\n\n/s32\n\n/s84/s61/s48/s46/s53\n\n/s32\n\n/s84/s61/s49/s46/s48\n\n/s32\n\n/s84/s61/s50/s46/s48\n\n7\n\nFIG. 8: Excess entropy of GCM for a set of isotherms. (a) T = 0 04; 0 07 and 0 1; (b) -. . . T = 0 5; 1 0 and 2 0. . . .\n\nFIG. 8: Excess entropy of GCM for a set of isotherms. (a) T = 0 04; 0 07 and 0 1; (b) -. . . T = 0 5; 1 0 and 2 0. . . .\n\neven at high temperatures the curve is not straight while at low temperatures the curve becomes very strange. Definitely the exponential relation between the diffusion coefficient and pair excess entropy is not valid.\n\nThe diffusion scaling with the full excess entropy is shown in the figure 14 (a) and (b). One can see from these pictures that the scaling rule works good for the temperatures T = 0 5 and . T = 0 4 but already for . T = 0 35 . the deviation from the linear behavior occurs. This deviation develops more as the temperature decreases. At T = 0 25 a self crossing loop occurs. . This loop even enlarges at lower temperatures. It is worth to note that the curve at low temperature T = 0 2 consists of two linear .", + "recall": 0.9530201342281879, + "true_md": "7\n\nFIG. 8: Excess entropy of GCM for a set of isotherms. (a) - T = 0 . 04; 0 . 07 and 0 . 1; (b) - T = 0 . 5; 1 . 0 and 2 . 0.\n\nFIG. 7: Radial distribution functions of GCM for a set of isotherms at the density ρ = 0 . 5 (a) - T = 0 . 04; 0 . 07 and 0 . 1; (b) - T = 0 . 5; 1 . 0 and 2 . 0.\n\neven at high temperatures the curve is not straight while at low temperatures the curve becomes very strange. Definitely the exponential relation between the diffusion coefficient and pair excess entropy is not valid.\n\nof the entropies along two isotherms. One can see that both at high and low temperature the difference between excess entropy and pair contribution to it is rather large. This discrepancy is small at low densities, but greatly increases at the density about 0 . 4. Note that this density corresponds to a character distance l ∼ 1 /ρ 1 / 3 ≃ 1 . 35, that is l ≃ σ 1 . It allows to conclude that the interplay of the distances starts at this density and it is this interplay which makes the excess entropy and pair excess entropy difference to increase rapidly.\n\nFig. 13 shows the diffusion coefficient scaling with the pair part of the excess entropy. As is seen from the figures\n\nThe diffusion scaling with the full excess entropy is shown in the figure 14 (a) and (b). One can see from these pictures that the scaling rule works good for the temper- atures T = 0 . 5 and T = 0 . 4 but already for T = 0 . 35 the deviation from the linear behavior occurs. This de- viation develops more as the temperature decreases. At T = 0 . 25 a self crossing loop occurs. This loop even en- larges at lower temperatures. It is worth to note that the curve at low temperature T = 0 . 2 consists of two linear" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.29945952314496965, + "doc_id": "5326d518c3eb1b27ed89c7609ee4ba5e22992ab8c92a4c5b1f45fd64d94d099c", + "edit_distance": 0.8396103896103896, + "f1_score": 0.8698884758364313, + "meteor": 0.32301896213311854, + "precision": 0.9176470588235294, + "pred_md": "FIG. 1: Schematics of two spin qubit unit in a DQD considered here. Each spin qubit is represented by a MI. Interaction between qubits is mediated by the two electrons; the electron MI coupling coefficient is denoted by J em . As interaction of MIs with nuclear spin bath is negligible, the dominant noise source is electron mediated coupling between MIs and nuclear spin bath; the electron nuclear spin bath coupling coefficient is given by A . The interaction strength between the MIs and between MI and nuclear spin bath depends on the singlettriplet electron energy gap ∆ , which can be controlled by e external electric gate voltage ( V g ), magnetic field ( B ), and shape/size of the DQD. This allows active noise engineering and optimization of the two qubit system.\n\nFIG. 1: Schematics of two spin qubit unit in a DQD considered here. Each spin qubit is represented by a MI. Interaction between qubits is mediated by the two electrons; the electron MI coupling coefficient is denoted by J em . As interaction of MIs with nuclear spin bath is negligible, the dominant noise source is electron mediated coupling between MIs and nuclear spin bath; the electron nuclear spin bath coupling coefficient is given by A . The interaction strength between the MIs and between MI and nuclear spin bath depends on the singlettriplet electron energy gap ∆ , which can be controlled by e external electric gate voltage ( V g ), magnetic field ( B ), and shape/size of the DQD. This allows active noise engineering and optimization of the two qubit system.\n\nbetween the nuclear spins of MI and host nuclei has no influence on our system.\n\nElectrons confined in quasi-two-dimensional quantum dots in a uniform perpendicular magnetic field can be described by the effective mass Hamiltonian\n\nglyph[negationslash]\n\n\n\nwhere T = 1 (2 / m ∗ ) ( (¯ h/i ) glyph[vector] ∇ +( e/c A glyph[vector] ) ( r ) ) 2 + V glyph[vector] ( r ) is the single electron Hamiltonian in an external magnetic field glyph[vector] B = Bz ˆ, perpendicular to the plane of the confining potential. Here ( glyph[vector] r ) = ( x, y, z ) describes the electron position, V glyph[vector] ( r ) denotes the quantum dots confining potential, and A glyph[vector] ( r ) = (1 / 2) glyph[vector] B × glyph[vector] r is the vector potential. Further, m ∗ is the conduction-electron effective mass, -e is the electron charge, and ε is the host semiconductor dielectric constant. Finally, Z i = (1 2) / g µ S e b zi B determines the Zeeman spin splitting, g e is the electron g-factor in host semiconductor, µ b refers to the Bohr magneton, and S zi represents the z -Pauli matrix of electron i .\n\nThe single particle eigenvalues ( glyph[epsilon1] ασ ) and eigenvectors\n\n2\n\n( ϕ ασ ) are calculated by discretizing T + Z in real space, and diagonalizing the resulting matrix. By using the creation (annihilation) operators c † ασ ( c ασ ) for an electron in a non-interacting single-particle (SP) state | α, σ 〉 , the Hamiltonian of an interacting system in second quantization can be written as\n\n\n\nwhere the first term represents the single particle Hamiltonian and V ασ,βσ ,µσ ,νσ ' ' = ∫ dglyph[vector] r ∫ d glyph[vector] r ϕ ' ∗ ασ ( glyph[vector] r ϕ ) ∗ βσ ' ( glyph[vector] r ' ) e 2 ε glyph[vector] | r -glyph[vector] r ' | ϕ µσ ' ( glyph[vector] r ' ) ϕ νσ ( glyph[vector] r ), is the two-body Coulomb matrix element.\n\nThe Hamiltonian for the MIs accounts for MI-MI direct exchange interaction and MI-Zeeman coupling,\n\n\n\nwhere J jj ' is the direct MI-MI antiferromagnetic (AFM) coupling, g m is the MI g-factor, and M zj is the zcomponent of the MI spin operator.\n\nThe nuclear-nuclear direct dipole interaction in the host semiconductor is neglected. The nuclear Hamiltonian is given by the Zeeman coupling term,\n\n\n\nwhere g n is the nuclear g-factor and I zl is the zcomponent of nuclear spin operator.\n\nThe e-MI exchange interaction is modeled by\n\n\n\nwith J em the exchange coupling between electron spin glyph[vector] S i at r i and impurity spin glyph[vector] M j located at the position R j [10]. In second quantization it can be written as\n\n\n\nwhere J αβ ( R j ) = J em ϕ ∗ α ( R j ) ϕ β ( R j ). Similarly, we describe the electron - nuclear spin bath hyperfine interaction by\n\n\n\nwith ˜ A l = (16 π/ 3) µ µ /I b l l the isotropic (Fermi contact) part of the electron-nucleus hyperfine interaction [6, 13,", + "recall": 0.8268551236749117, + "true_md": "( ϕ$_{ασ}$ ) are calculated by discretizing T + Z in real space, and diagonalizing the resulting matrix. By using the cre- ation (annihilation) operators c † ασ ( c$_{ασ}$ ) for an electron in a non-interacting single-particle (SP) state | α, σ 〉 , the Hamiltonian of an interacting system in second quanti- zation can be written as\n\n2\n\nwhere the first term represents the single particle Hamiltonian and V$_{ασ,βσ}$ $^{′}$,µσ $^{′}$,νσ = ∫ d⃗ r ∫ d ⃗ r $^{′}$ϕ ∗ $_{ασ}$( ⃗ r ) ϕ ∗ βσ ′ ( ⃗ r $^{′}$) e 2 ε | ⃗ r − ⃗ r ′ $_{|}$ϕ$_{µσ}$ ′ ( ⃗ r $^{′}$) ϕ$_{νσ}$ ( ⃗ r ), is the two-body Coulomb matrix element.\n\nThe Hamiltonian for the MIs accounts for MI-MI direct exchange interaction and MI-Zeeman coupling,\n\nFIG. 1: Schematics of two spin qubit unit in a DQD consid- ered here. Each spin qubit is represented by a MI. Interaction between qubits is mediated by the two electrons; the electron MI coupling coefficient is denoted by J$_{em}$ . As interaction of MIs with nuclear spin bath is negligible, the dominant noise source is electron mediated coupling between MIs and nuclear spin bath; the electron nuclear spin bath coupling coefficient is given by A . The interaction strength between the MIs and between MI and nuclear spin bath depends on the singlet- triplet electron energy gap Δ$_{e}$, which can be controlled by external electric gate voltage ( V$_{g}$ ), magnetic field ( B ), and shape/size of the DQD. This allows active noise engineering and optimization of the two qubit system.\n\nwhere J$_{jj}$ ′ is the direct MI-MI antiferromagnetic (AFM) coupling, g$_{m}$ is the MI g-factor, and M$_{zj}$ is the z- component of the MI spin operator.\n\nThe nuclear-nuclear direct dipole interaction in the host semiconductor is neglected. The nuclear Hamilto- nian is given by the Zeeman coupling term,\n\n$$H$_{e}$ = ∑ α ∑ σ ϵ$_{ασ}$c † $_{ασ}$c$_{ασ}$ + 1 2 ∑ αβµν ∑ σσ ′ V$_{ασ,βσ}$ $^{′}$,µσ ′ $_{,νσ}$c † $_{ασ}$c † βσ $_{′}$c$_{µσ}$ ′ c$_{νσ}$, (2)$$\n\n$$H$_{m}$ = M ∑ j,j $^{′}$=1 J$_{jj}$ ′ ⃗ M$_{j}$ · ⃗ M$_{j}$ ′ + ∑ j g$_{m}$µ$_{b}$M$_{zj}$B, (3)$$\n\n$$H$_{n}$ = L ∑ l =1 g$_{n}$µ$_{b}$I$_{zl}$B, (4)$$\n\n$$H$_{em}$ = − J$_{em}$ ∑ i,j ⃗ S$_{i}$ · ⃗ M$_{j}$δ ( r$_{i}$ − R$_{j}$ ) , (5)$$\n\n$$H$_{e}$ = N ∑ i =1 ( T$_{i}$ + Z$_{i}$ ) + e 2 2 ε ∑ i ̸ = j 1 | ⃗ r$_{i}$ − ⃗ r$_{j}$ | , (1)$$\n\n$$H$_{em}$ = − ∑ αβ ∑ I J$_{αβ}$ ( R$_{j}$ ) 2 [ M$_{zj}$ ( c † α $_{↑}$c$_{β}$$_{↑}$ − c † α $_{↓}$c$_{β}$$_{↓}$ ) + M + j c † α $_{↓}$c$_{β}$$_{↑}$ + M − j c † α $_{↑}$c$_{β}$$_{↓}$ ] , (6)$$\n\n$$H$_{en}$ = ∑ i,l ˜ A$_{l}$ ⃗ S$_{i}$ · ⃗ I$_{l}$δ ( r$_{i}$ − R$_{l}$ ) (7)$$\n\nwith ˜ A$_{l}$ = (16 π/ 3) µ$_{b}$µ$_{l}$/I$_{l}$ the isotropic (Fermi contact) part of the electron-nucleus hyperfine interaction [6, 13,\n\nwhere J$_{αβ}$ ( R$_{j}$ ) = J$_{em}$ϕ ∗ $_{α}$( R$_{j}$ ) ϕ$_{β}$ ( R$_{j}$ ). Similarly, we de- scribe the electron - nuclear spin bath hyperfine interac- tion by\n\nwith J$_{em}$ the exchange coupling between electron spin ⃗ S$_{i}$ at r$_{i}$ and impurity spin ⃗ M$_{j}$ located at the position R$_{j}$ [10]. In second quantization it can be written as\n\nThe e-MI exchange interaction is modeled by\n\nwhere g$_{n}$ is the nuclear g-factor and I$_{zl}$ is the z- component of nuclear spin operator.\n\nbetween the nuclear spins of MI and host nuclei has no influence on our system.\n\nElectrons confined in quasi-two-dimensional quantum dots in a uniform perpendicular magnetic field can be described by the effective mass Hamiltonian\n\nwhere T = 1 / (2 m $^{∗}$) $^{(}$(¯ h/i ) ⃗ ∇ + ( e/c ) A ( ⃗ r ) 2 + V ( ⃗ r ) is the single electron Hamiltonian in an external magnetic field ⃗ B = B ˆ z , perpendicular to the plane of the confining po- tential. Here ( ⃗ r ) = ( x, y, z ) describes the electron posi- tion, V ( ⃗ r ) denotes the quantum dots confining potential, and A ( ⃗ r ) = (1 / 2) ⃗ B × ⃗ r is the vector potential. Further, m ∗ is the conduction-electron effective mass, − e is the electron charge, and ε is the host semiconductor dielec- tric constant. Finally, Z$_{i}$ = (1 / 2) g$_{e}$µ$_{b}$S$_{zi}$B determines the Zeeman spin splitting, g$_{e}$ is the electron g-factor in host semiconductor, µ$_{b}$ refers to the Bohr magneton, and S$_{zi}$ represents the z -Pauli matrix of electron i .\n\nThe single particle eigenvalues ( ϵ$_{ασ}$ ) and eigenvectors" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4985616492902615, + "doc_id": "92330754d694921472fdbfc2bfe6def81d099e4d2d92d0d0c769a954d3b60096", + "edit_distance": 0.4972067039106145, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9100094870738619, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "FIG. 2: Site basis population probabilities for an excition starting on site 3 for case 1 (a) and case 2 (b) demonstrate the change in transfer dynamics obtained by scaling the Hamiltonian (simulation at 10 K). Dashed lines indicate site populations at thermal equilibrium. Energy basis coherences for case 1 (c) and case 2 (d) display characteristic oscillations and damping over the course of 1 ns, a typical recombination time in QD systems.\n\nFIG. 2: Site basis population probabilities for an excition starting on site 3 for case 1 (a) and case 2 (b) demonstrate the change in transfer dynamics obtained by scaling the Hamiltonian (simulation at 10 K). Dashed lines indicate site populations at thermal equilibrium. Energy basis coherences for case 1 (c) and case 2 (d) display characteristic oscillations and damping over the course of 1 ns, a typical recombination time in QD systems.\n\n6", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "FIG. 2: Site basis population probabilities for an excition starting on site 3 for case 1 (a) and case 2 (b) demonstrate the change in transfer dynamics obtained by scaling the Hamiltonian (simulation at 10 K). Dashed lines indicate site populations at thermal equilibrium. Energy basis coherences for case 1 (c) and case 2 (d) display characteristic oscillations and damping over the course of 1 ns, a typical recombination time in QD systems.\n\n6" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.02958024754734327, + "doc_id": "244e9db389dbc0e6fda7c12d8afae8ee82d0b6c59b87caba3486a677910921f0", + "edit_distance": 0.8446417247939125, + "f1_score": 0.7938461538461539, + "meteor": 0.1860855417336105, + "precision": 0.9148936170212766, + "pred_md": "0\n\n1\n\nχ\n\n(\n\nx\n\n4\n\n\n\n\n\nThe LLT is defined by Eq.(14), where m is taken to be the mass of the particle species under consideration. This is an infinitesimal LLT since λ ab = -λ ba . The LLT then turns out to have only four nonvanishing terms which can be separated in to two symmetries,\n\n\n\nThe explicit expressions are lengthy and so are represented graphically in Fig.(1) for some average parameters of a Kerr-Newman black hole.\n\nThis turns out to also be a boost along the 1-axis and a rotation about the 2-axis, as in Schwarzschild black hole case. With constant momentum p a ( x ) = ( m cosh ( ζ ) , 0 0 , , m sinh ( ζ )) pointing in the 3-axis, the change of the spin becomes a rotation as follows.\n\nAfter an infinitesimal proper time dτ , the particle moves in the 3-axis by an amount, δφ = u ϕ dτ . Over this the momentum in the local inertial frame transforms under the LLT, Λ a b ( x ) =\n\nδ a b + λ a b ( x dτ ) , which corresponds to a unitary operator that acts on the state of the particle. This operator changes the spin, in particular it acts like the unitary matrix U in\n\n\n\nas in [9], where W x ( ) = W (Λ( x , p ) ( x )) = L -1 (Λ ) Λ p L p ( ) is a local Wigner rotation. It follows that W a b ( x ) = W a b (Λ( x , p ) ( x )) = [ L -1 (Λ ) Λ p L p ( ) ] a b , with a standard Lorentz transform (LT) L a b ( p ) defined by,\n\n", + "recall": 0.7010869565217391, + "true_md": "4\n\n$$χ $^{0}$$_{1}$( x ) = χ $^{1}$$_{0}$( x ) = Δ a $^{4}$r$^{2}$(Δ − a $^{2}$) + a $^{2}$r$^{3}$(4 Mr ( M − r ) + 2 r 3 − Q $^{2}$( a 2 + 2 Mr − r $^{2}$) + Δ(2 M − r )) + r $^{6}$(Δ − a $^{2}$) [ $^{(}$2 a $^{2}$r2 + r 4 $^{)}$cosh( ζ ) $^{(}$Q 2 − Mr ) √ √ ( a 2 + r $^{2}$) 2 − a $^{2}$Δ $^{(}$( a 2 + r $^{2}$) 2 − a $^{2}$Δ $^{)}$( r ( r − 2 M ) + Q $^{2}$) + a $^{2}$( Q 2 − 2 Mr ) $_{2}$− 1 $^{(}$( a 2 + r $^{2}$) 2 − a $^{2}$Δ ) 3 / 2 [ a $^{(}$a 4 $^{(}$− $^{(}$r ( r − 3 M ) + Q 2 $^{))}$+ a 2 $^{(}$Q 2 $^{(}$a 2 + 3 Mr + Q 2 + r 2 $^{)}$+ r $^{(}$Δ( r − 3 M ) − r $^{(}$6 M 2 − 3 Mr + r 2 ) ) − Q 4 $^{)}$+ r 4 $^{(}$r ( r − 5 M ) + 3 Q 2 ) )    a cosh( ζ ) ( $^{(}$a 2 + r 2 ) 2 − a $^{2}$Δ ) $^{(}$2 Mr − Q 2 ) √ $^{(}$( a 2 + r $^{2}$) 2 − a $^{2}$Δ $^{)}$( r ( r − 2 M ) + Q $^{2}$) + a $^{2}$( Q 2 − 2 Mr ) 2 + sinh( ζ ) $^{(}$a 2 $^{(}$2 Mr − Q 2 + r 2 $^{)}$+ r 4 )    ] (15)$$\n\n$$χ $^{1}$$_{3}$( x ) = − χ $^{3}$$_{1}$( x ) √ Δ r 4 [ cosh( ζ )$^{}$  a $^{(}$2 Mr − Q 2 $^{) (}$2 a 2 $^{(}$Q 2 − Mr $^{)}$+ r 4 ) $^{√}$( a 2 + r $^{2}$) 2 − a $^{2}$δ + 2 a $^{(}$Mr − Q 2 )   √ √ ( a 2 + r $^{2}$) 2 − a $^{2}$Δ $^{(}$( a 2 + r $^{2}$) 2 − a $^{2}$δ $^{)}$( − 2 Mr + Q 2 + r $^{2}$) + a $^{2}$( Q 2 − 2 Mr ) 2 + sinh( ζ ) $^{(}$a 2 $^{(}$2 Mr − Q 2 + r 2 $^{)}$+ r 4 ) ] (16)$$\n\nThe LLT is defined by Eq.(14), where m is taken to be the mass of the particle species under con- sideration. This is an infinitesimal LLT since λ$_{ab}$ = − λ$_{ba}$ . The LLT then turns out to have only four nonvanishing terms which can be sepa- rated in to two symmetries,\n\nδ a b + λ $^{a}$$\\_{b}$( x ) dτ , which corresponds to a unitary operator that acts on the state of the particle. This operator changes the spin, in particular it acts like the unitary matrix U in\n\nThe explicit expressions are lengthy and so are represented graphically in Fig.(1) for some aver- age parameters of a Kerr-Newman black hole.\n\nThis turns out to also be a boost along the 1-axis and a rotation about the 2-axis, as in Schwarzschild black hole case. With constant momentum p $^{a}$( x ) = ( m cosh ( ζ ) , 0 , 0 , m sinh ( ζ )) pointing in the 3-axis, the change of the spin be- comes a rotation as follows.\n\nAfter an infinitesimal proper time dτ , the par- ticle moves in the 3-axis by an amount, δφ = u $^{ϕ}$dτ . Over this the momentum in the local in- ertial frame transforms under the LLT, Λ $^{a}$$\\_{b}$( x ) =\n\nas in [9], where W ( x ) = W (Λ ( x ) , p ( x )) = L − $^{1}$(Λ p ) Λ L ( p ) is a local Wigner rotation. It follows that W $^{a}$$\\_{b}$( x ) = W $^{a}$$_{b}$(Λ ( x ) , p ( x )) = $^{[}$L − $^{1}$(Λ p ) Λ L ( p ) ] $^{a}$$\\_{b}$, with a standard Lorentz transform (LT) L $^{a}$$_{b}$( p ) defined by,\n\n$$U (Λ ( x )) | p $^{a}$( x ) , σ ; x 〉 = ∑ σ ′ D (1 / 2) σ $^{′}$σ ( W ( x )) | Λ p $^{a}$( x ) , σ $^{′}$; x 〉 , (18)$$\n\n$$L $^{0}$$_{0}$( p ) = γ, L $^{0}$$_{i}$( p ) = L $^{i}$$_{0}$( p ) = p i m , L i k ( p ) = δ$_{ik}$ + ( γ − 1) p $^{i}$pk | − → p | $_{2}$, (19)$$\n\n$$λ $^{0}$$_{1}$( x ) = λ $^{1}$$_{0}$( x ) λ $^{1}$$_{3}$( x ) = − λ $^{3}$$_{1}$( x ) (17)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6870889140659263, + "doc_id": "b7ff1d146248a47a2e9e6cad4858e96938b29740da2498d239499862f179a105", + "edit_distance": 0.391304347826087, + "f1_score": 0.9172932330827068, + "meteor": 0.8515077279831264, + "precision": 0.953125, + "pred_md": "FIG. 6: (Color online) The figures plot (a) the relative gain G CQ for the CQ trade-off curve and (b) the relative gain G CE for the CE trade-off curve for the dephasing channel, the cloning channel, and the Unruh channel. The figures plot these relative gains as a function of the dephasing parameter p ∈ [0 , 1] for the p -dephasing qubit channel (bottom horizontal axis), as a function of the acceleration parameter z ∈ [0 , 1] for the Unruh channel (bottom horizontal axis), and as a function of the number of clones N for the 1 → N cloning channel (top horizontal axis). The plot on the left demonstrates that the relative gain G CQ for the cloning channels is best as N increases, while the Unruh channel features an improved relative gain over a dephasing channel for large accelerations. The plot on the right features different behavior-the relative gain G CE of the dephasing channel outperforms that for the Unruh channel if we consider the parameters p and z on equal footing, in spite of their drastically different physical interpretations.\n\nFIG. 6: (Color online) The figures plot (a) the relative gain G CQ for the CQ trade-off curve and (b) the relative gain G CE for the CE trade-off curve for the dephasing channel, the cloning channel, and the Unruh channel. The figures plot these relative gains as a function of the dephasing parameter p ∈ [0 , 1] for the p -dephasing qubit channel (bottom horizontal axis), as a function of the acceleration parameter z ∈ [0 , 1] for the Unruh channel (bottom horizontal axis), and as a function of the number of clones N for the 1 → N cloning channel (top horizontal axis). The plot on the left demonstrates that the relative gain G CQ for the cloning channels is best as N increases, while the Unruh channel features an improved relative gain over a dephasing channel for large accelerations. The plot on the right features different behavior-the relative gain G CE of the dephasing channel outperforms that for the Unruh channel if we consider the parameters p and z on equal footing, in spite of their drastically different physical interpretations.\n\nlikely that the technique for proving single-letterization would be completely different. The ideas exploited here are that Hadamard channels are degradable and have entanglement-breaking complementary channels, allowing us to generalize the Devetak-Shor proof technique in Appendix B of Ref. [31]. If other single-letter examples do exist, one should then determine if such a channel obtains an improvement over time-sharing and perhaps attempt to uncover a general method that determines if a channel obtains a gain over time-sharing.\n\nIt may be interesting to explore the static case, where two parties share a bipartite state and exploit this state and some noiseless resources to extract other noiseless resources. One might consider bipartite states that arise from Hadamard channels and attempt to single-letterize the static capacity region. Hsieh and Wilde found formulas for the triple trade-off static capacity region in Ref. [41], but the task of single-letterization for the static case is more difficult than that for the dynamic case because one must consider quantum instruments applied to many copies of the bipartite state.\n\nIt would also be interesting to consider versions of the Unruh channel other than the original definition in Ref. [35] and determine if the corresponding CQE capacity region can single-letterize (we refer to this channel as 'the' Unruh channel, but it may be more appropriate to consider it as 'an' Unruh channel). One can con-\n\nsider the CQE capacity region for a qudit Unruh channel by exploiting some of the insights in Ref. [67]. Finally, one might consider a trade-off capacity region for an Unruh channel that includes the resource of private quantum information, given that this noiseless resource appears in relativistic quantum information theory, or one could consider trading public classical information, private classical information, and secret key by exploiting the ideas in Refs. [68, 69].\n\n## Acknowledgments\n\nThe authors acknowledge useful discussions with MinHsiu Hsieh concerning the CQ and CE trade-off curves and the CQE capacity region. K. B. and P. H. acknowledge support from the Office of Naval Research under grant No. N000140811249. P. H. acknowledges support from the Canada Research Chairs program, CIFAR, FQRNT, MITACS, NSERC, QuantumWorks, and the Sloan Foundation. M. M. W. acknowledges support from the MDEIE (Qu' ebec) PSR-SIIRI international collaboration grant.\n\n18", + "recall": 0.8840579710144928, + "true_md": "18\n\nFIG. 6: (Color online) The figures plot (a) the relative gain G$_{CQ}$ for the CQ trade-off curve and (b) the relative gain G$_{CE}$ for the CE trade-off curve for the dephasing channel, the cloning channel, and the Unruh channel. The figures plot these relative gains as a function of the dephasing parameter p ∈ [0 , 1] for the p -dephasing qubit channel (bottom horizontal axis), as a function of the acceleration parameter z ∈ [0 , 1] for the Unruh channel (bottom horizontal axis), and as a function of the number of clones N for the 1 → N cloning channel (top horizontal axis). The plot on the left demonstrates that the relative gain G$_{CQ}$ for the cloning channels is best as N increases, while the Unruh channel features an improved relative gain over a dephasing channel for large accelerations. The plot on the right features different behavior—the relative gain G$_{CE}$ of the dephasing channel outperforms that for the Unruh channel if we consider the parameters p and z on equal footing, in spite of their drastically different physical interpretations.\n\nsider the CQE capacity region for a qudit Unruh channel by exploiting some of the insights in Ref. [67]. Finally, one might consider a trade-off capacity region for an Un- ruh channel that includes the resource of private quan- tum information, given that this noiseless resource ap- pears in relativistic quantum information theory, or one could consider trading public classical information, pri- vate classical information, and secret key by exploiting the ideas in Refs. [68, 69].\n\nlikely that the technique for proving single-letterization would be completely different. The ideas exploited here are that Hadamard channels are degradable and have entanglement-breaking complementary channels, allow- ing us to generalize the Devetak-Shor proof technique in Appendix B of Ref. [31]. If other single-letter examples do exist, one should then determine if such a channel obtains an improvement over time-sharing and perhaps attempt to uncover a general method that determines if a channel obtains a gain over time-sharing.\n\nIt may be interesting to explore the static case, where two parties share a bipartite state and exploit this state and some noiseless resources to extract other noiseless resources. One might consider bipartite states that arise from Hadamard channels and attempt to single-letterize the static capacity region. Hsieh and Wilde found for- mulas for the triple trade-off static capacity region in Ref. [41], but the task of single-letterization for the static case is more difficult than that for the dynamic case be- cause one must consider quantum instruments applied to many copies of the bipartite state.\n\nIt would also be interesting to consider versions of the Unruh channel other than the original definition in Ref. [35] and determine if the corresponding CQE capac- ity region can single-letterize (we refer to this channel as “the” Unruh channel, but it may be more appropriate to consider it as “an” Unruh channel). One can con-\n\nThe authors acknowledge useful discussions with Min- Hsiu Hsieh concerning the CQ and CE trade-off curves and the CQE capacity region. K. B. and P. H. ac- knowledge support from the Office of Naval Research under grant No. N000140811249. P. H. acknowledges support from the Canada Research Chairs program, CI- FAR, FQRNT, MITACS, NSERC, QuantumWorks, and the Sloan Foundation. M. M. W. acknowledges support from the MDEIE (Qu´ ebec) PSR-SIIRI international col- laboration grant.\n\n## Acknowledgments" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7884337970528122, + "doc_id": "1e674f9cff861907dadbb45b595f40ca0724332205613e42e629b8db8ebd0e80", + "edit_distance": 0.42534381139489197, + "f1_score": 0.9011264080100124, + "meteor": 0.8265501678892755, + "precision": 0.935064935064935, + "pred_md": "arXiv:1001.0720v1 [cond-mat.mes-hall] 5 Jan 2010\n\n## Edge-induced spin polarization in two-dimensional electron gas\n\nP. Bokes 1,2, ∗ and F. Horv' ath 1\n\n1 Department of Physics, Faculty of Electrical Engineering and Information Technology, Slovak University of Technology, Ilkoviˇ cova 3, 812 19 Bratislava, Slovak Republic 2 European Theoretical Spectroscopical Facility (ETSF, www.etsf.eu )\n\n(Dated: November 9, 2018)\n\nWe characterize the role of the spin-orbit coupling between electrons and the confining potential of the edge in nonequilibrium 2D homogeneous electronic gas. We derive a simple analytical result for the magnitude of the current induced spin polarization at the edge and prove that it is independent of the details of the confinement edge potential and the electronic density within realistic values of the parameters of the considered models. While the amplitude of the spin accumulation is comparable to the experimental values of extrinsic spin Hall effect in similar samples, the spatial extent of edge induced effect is restricted to the distances of the order of Fermi wavelength ( ∼ 10nm).\n\nPACS numbers: 72.25.-b; 85.75.-d; 73.63.Hs\n\n## I. INTRODUCTION\n\nOne of the exciting new discoveries in solid state physics in the last few years has been the experimental observation of the extrinsic spin Hall effect 1-4 in GaAs heterostructures. The mechanism of this effect relies on the spin-orbit coupling between the spin of electrons with the perturbing potential of impurities. Another example of similar coupling is the Rashba-Bytchkov interaction in asymmetrically doped GaAs quantum wells containing two-dimensional electron gas (2DEG) where the coupled potential comes from the internal electrostatic electric field induced by the structural asymmetry of the well. In modeling both of these situations, the atomic potential of the ideal bulk semiconductor enters only through the renormalization of the effective mass and the spin-orbit interaction strength.\n\nInterestingly, the Rashba-Bytchkov interaction has been also suggested as a source of spin Hall-like phenomenology 5 for a clean 2DEG. While the effect has been shown to disappear in extended 2D systems with arbitrarily weak disorder 6,7 , it is now known that finite size of the sample in combination with Rashba-Bytchkov coupling results in the transverse spin current and accumulation of opposite spin densities at the edges of the sample 8,9 . Furthermore, it has been found that boundaries might directly influence the spin polarization due to the Rashba-Bytchov coupling either in very wide 2D electronic systems with an edge 10-14 or narrow Rashba strips 15,16 . However, the physical origin of the latter is quite different from the former: whereas the bulk Rashba-Bytchkov effect arises from accelerations of electrons in the external electric field, the latter result from the reflection of electrons from the sample's boundary.\n\nMotivated by this development, it is natural to explore further alterations of the perfectly periodic bulk potential and its consequences on the spin polarization in the presence of the current. Several authors have considered such a situation in quantum wires with a parabolic confining potential 17-20 , wider strips with parabolic 21 or abrupt 22 confinement edge. These alterations in the potential landscape can be also viewed as the 'impurity' which leads to nonzero spin polarization in-\n\nduced by the flow of the electric current. Recently, experimental evidence of this effect of the in-plane field on spin polarization has been reported 23 . Further enhancement of this kind of spin-polarization has been suggested using a transport through chaotic quantum dot 24 or resonant tunable scattering center 25 .\n\nIn our previous work 22 we have compared the magnitude of the spin polarization induced by the latter mechanism with the one induced by the Rashba-Bytchkov coupling and scattering of the edge 10 . It turns out that for a typical 2DEG with an edge, it is about three orders of magnitude larger than the one caused by the edge and the Rashba-Bytchkov interaction. This substantial difference is mostly due to the fact that the parameter characterizing spin-orbit coupling appears in second order in the case of the Rashba-Bytchov-based mechanism 10 whereas for the edge-induced spin-orbit coupling it comes already in the first order.\n\nIn this paper we consider the edge of the 2DEG in Si doped GaAs quantum well, a system for which the spin Hall effect has been experimentally observed. This allows us to estimate the values of all the parameters entering and we can compare the importance of this edge-effect to the contribution of other mechanisms leading to current-induced spin polarization. The models considered here are reasonably realistic yet simple enough to be solved almost analytically. We derive a generally valid simple analytical formula for the induced number of electrons with un-compensated spin per unit length of the edge,\n\n\n\nwhere j is the electrical current density in the 2DEG, α E is the parameter giving the strength of the spin-orbit coupling 26 , and me and qe are the effective mass and the charge of electron respectively. Noticeably, this result is independent of the density of the 2DEG and the details of the edge potential as long as the electrons are confined within the sample.", + "recall": 0.8695652173913043, + "true_md": "# Edge-induced spin polarization in two-dimensional electron gas\n\nP. Bokes 1,2, ∗ and F. Horv´ath 1\n\n$^{1}$Department of Physics, Faculty of Electrical Engineering and Information Technology, Slovak University of Technology, Ilkoviˇcova 3, 812 19 Brat islava, Slovak Republic\n\n$^{2}$European Theoretical Spectroscopical Facility (ETSF, www.etsf.eu )\n\n(Dated: November 9, 2018)\n\nWe characterize the role of the spin-orbit coupling between electrons and the confining potential of the edge in nonequilibrium 2D homogeneous electronic gas. We derive a simple analytical result for the magnitude of the current induced spin polarization at the edge and prove that it is independent of the details of the confinement edge potential and the electronic density within realistic values of the parameters of the considered models. While the amplitude of the spin accumulation is comparable to the experimental values of extrinsic spin Hall effect in similar samples, the spatial extent of edge induced effect is restricted to the distances of the order of Fermi wavelength ( ∼ 10nm).\n\nPACS numbers: 72.25.-b; 85.75.-d; 73.63.Hs\n\nOne of the exciting new discoveries in solid state physics in the last few years has been the experimental observation of the extrinsic spin Hall effect$^{1–4}$in GaAs heterostructures. The mechanism of this effect relies on the spin-orbit cou- pling between the spin of electrons with the perturbing po- tential of impurities. Another example of similar coupling is the Rashba-Bytchkov interaction in asymmetrically doped GaAs quantum wells containing two-dimensional electron gas (2DEG) where the coupled potential comes from the internal electrostatic electric field induced by the structural asym metry of the well. In modeling both of these situations, the atomic potential of the ideal bulk semiconductor enters only through the renormalization of the effective mass and the spin-orbit interaction strength.\n\nInterestingly, the Rashba-Bytchkov interaction has been also suggested as a source of spin Hall-like phenomenology 5 for a clean 2DEG. While the effect has been shown to disap- pear in extended 2D systems with arbitrarily weak disorder$^{6,7}$, it is now known that finite size of the sample in combina- tion with Rashba-Bytchkov coupling results in the transverse spin current and accumulation of opposite spin densities at the edges of the sample$^{8,9}$. Furthermore, it has been found that boundaries might directly influence the spin polarization d ue to the Rashba-Bytchov coupling either in very wide 2D elec- tronic systems with an edge$^{10–14}$or narrow Rashba strips$^{15,16}$. However, the physical origin of the latter is quite different from the former: whereas the bulk Rashba-Bytchkov effect arises from accelerations of electrons in the external electric field, the latter result from the reflection of electrons from the sample’s boundary.\n\nMotivated by this development, it is natural to explore fur- ther alterations of the perfectly periodic bulk potential and its consequences on the spin polarization in the presence of the current. Several authors have considered such a situation in quantum wires with a parabolic confining potential 17–20 , wider strips with parabolic 21 or abrupt 22 confinement edge. These alterations in the potential landscape can be also viewed as the “impurity” which leads to nonzero spin polarization i n-\n\nwhere j is the electrical current density in the 2DEG, α E is the parameter giving the strength of the spin-orbit coupling$^{26}$, and m$_{e}$ and q$_{e}$ are the effective mass and the charge of elec- tron respectively. Noticeably, this result is independent of the density of the 2DEG and the details of the edge potential as long as the electrons are confined within the sample.\n\nIn this paper we consider the edge of the 2DEG in Si doped GaAs quantum well, a system for which the spin Hall effect has been experimentally observed. This allows us to estimate the values of all the parameters entering and we can compare the importance of this edge-effect to the contribution of other mechanisms leading to current-induced spin polarization. The models considered here are reasonably realistic yet simple enough to be solved almost analytically. We derive a gen- erally valid simple analytical formula for the induced number of electrons with un-compensated spin per unit length of the edge,\n\nIn our previous work 22 we have compared the magnitude of the spin polarization induced by the latter mechanism with the one induced by the Rashba-Bytchkov coupling and scat- tering of the edge$^{10}$. It turns out that for a typical 2DEG with an edge, it is about three orders of magnitude larger than the one caused by the edge and the Rashba-Bytchkov interaction. This substantial difference is mostly due to the fact that the pa- rameter characterizing spin-orbit coupling appears in second order in the case of the Rashba-Bytchov-based mechanism 10 whereas for the edge-induced spin-orbit coupling it comes al- ready in the first order.\n\nduced by the flow of the electric current. Recently, exper- imental evidence of this effect of the in-plane field on spin polarization has been reported$^{23}$. Further enhancement of this kind of spin-polarization has been suggested using a transport through chaotic quantum dot 24 or resonant tunable scattering center$^{25}$.\n\n## I. INTRODUCTION\n\narXiv:1001.0720v1[cond-mat.mes-hall]5 Jan 2010\n\n$$m$_{z}$ = − m$_{e}$ ¯ hq$_{e}$$^{α}$ E j , (1)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.2411536070810588, + "doc_id": "de9d941438a9ba3725bbf61a3204da5f973850a2a6094b2c872367a2bf88a730", + "edit_distance": 0.7737094837935174, + "f1_score": 0.89247311827957, + "meteor": 0.3621055990492206, + "precision": 0.950381679389313, + "pred_md": "\n\nThe first equality follows by definition and the assumption that ρ maximizes f λ ( N 1 ⊗ N 2 ). The second equality follows from entropic manipulations and the fact that H AB B ( 1 2 | X ) = H E E ( 1 2 | X ) for the state ρ . The first inequality follows from subadditivity of entropy and the chain rule [61]. The second inequality uses two applications of the monotonicity of conditional entropy with respect to quantum channels acting on the conditioned system. Specifically, H B ( 2 | B X 1 ) ρ ≤ H B ( 2 | Y X ) σ because of the existence of the map D 1 while H E ( 2 | Y X ) σ ≤ H E ( 2 | E X 1 ) ρ because of the existence of the map D 2 . The third equality follows because H E ( 1 | X ) ρ = H AA B ( 2 1 | X ) θ and H E ( 2 | Y X ) ρ = H AE B ( 1 2 | Y X ) σ . The final inequality follows because θ and σ are both states of the form in (15).\n\nCorollary 1 The one-shot CQ trade-off curve is equal to the regularized CQ trade-off curve when the noisy quantum channel N is a Hadamard channel:\n\n\n\nProof. We prove the result using induction on n . The base case for n = 1 is trivial. Suppose the result holds for n : f λ ( N ⊗ n ) = nf λ ( N ). The following chain of equalities then proves the inductive step:\n\n\n\nThe first equality follows by expanding the tensor product. The second critical equality follows from the application of Lemma 4 because N is a Hadamard channel. The final equality follows from the induction hypothesis.\n\nThere is one last point that we should address concerning the CQ trade-off curve. There is the possibility in this trade-off problem that the parameter λ does not parametrize all points on the trade-off curve, potentially leading to a gap in the trade-off curve. We address this concern in Appendix C by proving that one gets the entire trade-off curve by varying λ and taking the convex hull of the resulting points. A similar proof holds for the CE trade-off curve.\n\n## B. CE Trade-off Curve\n\nFor the CE region, we would like to maximize both the classical communication rate while minimizing the entanglement consumption rate, but we cannot have both be simultaneously optimal. Thus, we must trade between these resources. If we are willing to reduce the classical communication rate by a little, then the protocol does not require as much entanglement consumption.\n\nOur main theorem below states that the following function generates points on the CE trade-off curve:\n\n\n\nwhere the state ρ is of the form in (15) and 0 ≤ λ ≤ 1.\n\nTheorem 3 For 0 ≤ λ ≤ 1 , the function in (23) leads to a point\n\n\n\non the CE trade-off curve, provided ρ maximizes (23).\n\nProof. The proof of this theorem proceeds similarly to that of Theorem 2 in the previous section. It follows from the results of Lemmas 8 and 9 and Corollary 2 in Appendix B.\n\n## V. PARAMETRIZATION OF THE TRADE-OFF CURVES\n\nThe results in the previous section demonstrate that the CQE capacity region for all Hadamard channels single-letterizes. These results imply that we can actually compute the CQE capacity region for these channels, by the arguments in Section III C. In this section, we consider several instances of Hadamard channels and show how we can exactly characterize their corresponding CQE capacity region. We first consider the qubit dephasing channel and the 1 → N cloning channel, and then show how to apply the results for the 1 → N cloning channel to the Unruh channel.\n\n## A. Qubit Dephasing Channel\n\nThis section briefly recalls the parametrizations for the CQ and CE trade-off curves for a qubit dephasing chan-\n\n11", + "recall": 0.8412162162162162, + "true_md": "11\n\n$$f$_{λ}$ ( N$_{1}$ ⊗ N$_{2}$ ) = I ( X ; B$_{1}$B$_{2}$ )$_{ρ}$ + λI ( A 〉 B$_{1}$B$_{2}$X )$_{ρ}$ = H ( B$_{1}$B$_{2}$ )$_{ρ}$ + ( λ − 1) H ( B$_{1}$B$_{2}$ | X )$_{ρ}$ − λH ( E$_{1}$E$_{2}$ | X )$_{ρ}$ ≤ H ( B$_{1}$ )$_{ρ}$ + ( λ − 1) H ( B$_{1}$ | X )$_{ρ}$ − λH ( E$_{1}$ | X )$_{ρ}$ + H ( B$_{2}$ )$_{ρ}$ + ( λ − 1) H ( B$_{2}$ | B$_{1}$X )$_{ρ}$ − λH ( E$_{2}$ | E$_{1}$X )$_{ρ}$ ≤ H ( B$_{1}$ )$_{ρ}$ + ( λ − 1) H ( B$_{1}$ | X )$_{ρ}$ − λH ( E$_{1}$ | X )$_{ρ}$ + H ( B$_{2}$ )$_{σ}$ + ( λ − 1) H ( B$_{2}$ | Y X )$_{σ}$ − λH ( E$_{2}$ | Y X )$_{σ}$ = [ I ( X ; B$_{1}$ )$_{θ}$ + λI ( AA$_{2}$ 〉 B$_{1}$X )$_{θ}$] + [ I ( XY ; B$_{2}$ )$_{σ}$ + λI ( AE$_{1}$ 〉 B$_{2}$XY )$_{σ}$] ≤ f$_{λ}$ ( N$_{1}$ ) + f$_{λ}$ ( N$_{2}$ ) .$$\n\n## B. CE Trade-off Curve\n\nThe first equality follows by definition and the as- sumption that ρ maximizes f$_{λ}$ ( N$_{1}$ ⊗ N$_{2}$ ). The sec- ond equality follows from entropic manipulations and the fact that H ( AB$_{1}$B$_{2}$ | X ) = H ( E$_{1}$E$_{2}$ | X ) for the state ρ . The first inequality follows from subadditivity of entropy and the chain rule [61]. The second inequal- ity uses two applications of the monotonicity of condi- tional entropy with respect to quantum channels acting on the conditioned system. Specifically, H ( B$_{2}$ | B$_{1}$X )$_{ρ}$ ≤ H ( B$_{2}$ | Y X )$_{σ}$ because of the existence of the map D$_{1}$ while H ( E$_{2}$ | Y X )$_{σ}$ ≤ H ( E$_{2}$ | E$_{1}$X )$_{ρ}$ because of the ex- istence of the map D$_{2}$ . The third equality follows be- cause H ( E$_{1}$ | X )$_{ρ}$ = H ( AA$_{2}$B$_{1}$ | X )$_{θ}$ and H ( E$_{2}$ | Y X )$_{ρ}$ = H ( AE$_{1}$B$_{2}$ | Y X )$_{σ}$. The final inequality follows because θ and σ are both states of the form in (15).\n\nFor the CE region, we would like to maximize both the classical communication rate while minimizing the entanglement consumption rate, but we cannot have both be simultaneously optimal. Thus, we must trade between these resources. If we are willing to reduce the classical communication rate by a little, then the protocol does not require as much entanglement consumption.\n\nOur main theorem below states that the following func- tion generates points on the CE trade-off curve:\n\nwhere the state ρ is of the form in (15) and 0 ≤ λ ≤ 1.\n\nTheorem 3 For 0 ≤ λ ≤ 1 , the function in (23) leads to a point\n\nCorollary 1 The one-shot CQ trade-off curve is equal to the regularized CQ trade-off curve when the noisy quan- tum channel N is a Hadamard channel:\n\n$$g$_{λ}$ ( N ) ≡ max$_{ρ}$ I ( AX ; B )$_{ρ}$ − λH ( A | X )$_{ρ}$ , (23)$$\n\n$$( I ( AX ; B )$_{ρ}$ ,H ( A | X )$_{ρ}$)$$\n\n$$f$_{λ}$ $^{(}$N ⊗ n ) = nf$_{λ}$ ( N ) .$$\n\n$$f$_{λ}$ ( N ⊗ n $^{+1}$) = f$_{λ}$ ( N ⊗ N ⊗ $^{n}$) = f$_{λ}$ ( N ) + f$_{λ}$ ( N ⊗ $^{n}$) = f$_{λ}$ ( N ) + nf$_{λ}$ ( N ) .$$\n\non the CE trade-off curve, provided ρ maximizes (23).\n\nProof. The proof of this theorem proceeds similarly to that of Theorem 2 in the previous section. It follows from the results of Lemmas 8 and 9 and Corollary 2 in Appendix B.\n\nProof. We prove the result using induction on n . The base case for n = 1 is trivial. Suppose the result holds for n : f$_{λ}$ ( N ⊗ $^{n}$) = nf$_{λ}$ ( N ). The following chain of equalities then proves the inductive step:\n\nThe results in the previous section demonstrate that the CQE capacity region for all Hadamard channels single-letterizes. These results imply that we can actu- ally compute the CQE capacity region for these chan- nels, by the arguments in Section III C. In this section, we consider several instances of Hadamard channels and show how we can exactly characterize their correspond- ing CQE capacity region. We first consider the qubit dephasing channel and the 1 → N cloning channel, and then show how to apply the results for the 1 → N cloning channel to the Unruh channel.\n\nThere is one last point that we should address con- cerning the CQ trade-off curve. There is the possibility in this trade-off problem that the parameter λ does not parametrize all points on the trade-off curve, potentially leading to a gap in the trade-off curve. We address this concern in Appendix C by proving that one gets the en- tire trade-off curve by varying λ and taking the convex hull of the resulting points. A similar proof holds for the CE trade-off curve.\n\nThe first equality follows by expanding the tensor prod- uct. The second critical equality follows from the appli- cation of Lemma 4 because N is a Hadamard channel. The final equality follows from the induction hypothesis.\n\nThis section briefly recalls the parametrizations for the CQ and CE trade-off curves for a qubit dephasing chan-\n\n## A. Qubit Dephasing Channel\n\n## V. PARAMETRIZATION OF THE TRADE-OFF CURVES" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6057372564050916, + "doc_id": "982d9966f1b801bb228a7863099e7b38cbb100bb2212dcbbe782cc718159bb3e", + "edit_distance": 0.5889423076923077, + "f1_score": 0.8831615120274914, + "meteor": 0.586497305004158, + "precision": 0.921146953405018, + "pred_md": "2\n\n2009 Fermi Symposium, Washington, D.C., Nov. 2-5\n\nFigure 1: The SMA light curves for 3C 454.3. The open circles represent the 850 µ m observations, and the open triangles represent the 1mm observations.\n\nFigure 1: The SMA light curves for 3C 454.3. The open circles represent the 850 µ m observations, and the open triangles represent the 1mm observations.\n\nJ1751+096) which have conflicting classifications between Fermi and CGRaBS. Some blazars found in the calibrator list have been studied extensively (e.g., 3C 279 and 3C 454.3) but the SMA blazars have not been studied collectively.\n\nForty-four of the objects in our total blazar sample were detected by Fermi and can be found in the catalog of LAT Bright AGN Sources (LBAS) from Abdo et al. [7]. J0050-094 has no redshift in either the LBAS catalog or CGRaBS and is not included in our study. Of the 43 remaining sources, 14 are BL Lac objects and 29 are FSRQs, with 0 03 . ≤ z ≤ 2 19. .\n\nWe examined submillimeter light curves for all of the SMA blazars, with observations beginning in approximately 2003 (see Figure 1). Typically, the 1mm band is much more well-sampled in comparison to the 850m band, but visual inspection reveals that the regularity and quality of observations vary greatly from source to source. Many of the objects exhibit nonperiodic variability, either in the form of persistent, low-amplitude fluctuations or higher amplitude flaring behavior.\n\n## 2.1. Submillimeter Properties\n\nSubmillimeter Luminosities. Since we are primarily concerned with comparisons to Fermi observations, we note that only 129 of the SMA blazars (23 BL Lacs and 106 FSRQs) were observed by the SMA in either band during the three months August-October 2008. For these objects, submillimeter luminosities are calculated in the standard way:\n\n\n\nwhere D L is the luminosity distance, ν obs is the frequency of the observed band, and F obs is the average\n\neConf C091122\n\nFigure 2: Variability index for our sample (top: 1mm, bottom: 850 µ m), with FSRQs as the hatched distribution and BL Lacs as the solid distribution. There is no signicant difference in the class distributions in either band; the 'tail' to the left is populated by objects with errors larger than the intrinsic variability.\n\nFigure 2: Variability index for our sample (top: 1mm, bottom: 850 µ m), with FSRQs as the hatched distribution and BL Lacs as the solid distribution. There is no signicant difference in the class distributions in either band; the 'tail' to the left is populated by objects with errors larger than the intrinsic variability.\n\nflux (in erg cm -2 s -1 Hz -1 ) over the three month period. We adopt a lambda cold dark matter cosmology with values of H 0 = 71 km s -1 Mpc -1 , Ω M = 0 27, . and Λ = 0 73. .\n\nEnergy Spectral Indices. We derive submillimeter spectral energy indices from observations quasisimultaneous with the Fermi observations. To be consistent with the use of α γ , we define spectral energy index as νF ν = ν -α S and calculate α S from the average of the energy spectral indices over the corresponding three months. We only calculate α S for the 16 objects (8 BL Lacs and 35 FSRQs) with observations at both 1mm and 850 µ m during this time frame.\n\n## 3. VARIABILITY ANALYSIS\n\n## 3.1. Variability Index\n\nWe roughly characterize the level of variability of each source using the variability index from Hovatta et al. [8]:\n\n\n\nFigure 2 shows the distribution for the SMA blazars. Objects with V ≤ 0 are typically unsuitable for more", + "recall": 0.8481848184818482, + "true_md": "2\n\n2009 Fermi Symposium, Washington, D.C., Nov. 2-5\n\nFigure 1: The SMA light curves for 3C 454.3. The open circles represent the 850 µ m observations, and the open triangles represent the 1mm observations.\n\nJ1751+096) which have conflicting classifications be- tween Fermi and CGRaBS. Some blazars found in the calibrator list have been studied extensively (e.g., 3C 279 and 3C 454.3) but the SMA blazars have not been studied collectively.\n\nForty-four of the objects in our total blazar sample were detected by Fermi and can be found in the cata- log of LAT Bright AGN Sources (LBAS) from Abdo et al. [7]. J0050-094 has no redshift in either the LBAS catalog or CGRaBS and is not included in our study. Of the 43 remaining sources, 14 are BL Lac objects and 29 are FSRQs, with 0 . 03 ≤ z ≤ 2 . 19.\n\nWe examined submillimeter light curves for all of the SMA blazars, with observations beginning in ap- proximately 2003 (see Figure 1). Typically, the 1mm band is much more well-sampled in comparison to the 850m band, but visual inspection reveals that the reg- ularity and quality of observations vary greatly from source to source. Many of the objects exhibit non- periodic variability, either in the form of persistent, low-amplitude fluctuations or higher amplitude flar- ing behavior.\n\nSubmillimeter Luminosities. Since we are pri- marily concerned with comparisons to Fermi observa- tions, we note that only 129 of the SMA blazars (23 BL Lacs and 106 FSRQs) were observed by the SMA in either band during the three months August-October 2008. For these objects, submillimeter luminosities are calculated in the standard way:\n\nwhere D$_{L}$ is the luminosity distance, ν$_{obs}$ is the fre- quency of the observed band, and F$_{obs}$ is the average\n\neConf C091122\n\nFigure 2 shows the distribution for the SMA blazars. Objects with V ≤ 0 are typically unsuitable for more\n\nWe roughly characterize the level of variability of each source using the variability index from Hovatta et al. [8]:\n\nEnergy Spectral Indices. We derive submillime- ter spectral energy indices from observations quasi- simultaneous with the Fermi observations. To be con- sistent with the use of α$_{γ}$ , we define spectral energy in- dex as νF$_{ν}$ = ν − α$_{S}$ and calculate α$_{S}$ from the average of the energy spectral indices over the corresponding three months. We only calculate α$_{S}$ for the 16 objects (8 BL Lacs and 35 FSRQs) with observations at both 1mm and 850 µ m during this time frame.\n\nflux (in erg cm − 2 s − 1 Hz − $^{1}$) over the three month pe- riod. We adopt a lambda cold dark matter cosmology with values of H$_{0}$ = 71 km s − 1 Mpc − $^{1}$, Ω$_{M}$ = 0 . 27, and Λ = 0 . 73.\n\nFigure 2: Variability index for our sample (top: 1mm, bottom: 850 µ m), with FSRQs as the hatched distribution and BL Lacs as the solid distribution. There is no signicant difference in the class distributions in either band; the “tail” to the left is populated by objects with errors larger than the intrinsic variability.\n\n## 3. VARIABILITY ANALYSIS\n\n## 3.1. Variability Index\n\n## 2.1. Submillimeter Properties\n\n$$ν$_{e}$L$_{ν}$$_{e}$ = 4 πD 2 L ν$_{obs}$F$_{obs}$ 1 + z , (1)$$\n\n$$V = ( F$_{max}$ − σ$_{F}$$_{max}$ ) − ( F$_{min}$ + σ$_{F}$$_{min}$ ) ( F$_{max}$ − σ$_{F}$$_{max}$ ) + ( F$_{min}$ + σ$_{F}$$_{min}$ ) (2)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6258234976937684, + "doc_id": "81e2d78569103637e1226ea4450fa852b26fea70b655fca014133b61208a7b6a", + "edit_distance": 0.3801295896328294, + "f1_score": 0.9886792452830188, + "meteor": 0.9126659385788198, + "precision": 0.9924242424242424, + "pred_md": "FIG. 1: Diffusion coefficient of Herzian spheres for a set of isotherms. (a) T = 0 01; 0 02 and 0 03; . . . (b) T = 0 1; 0 2 . . and 0 3. . The inset of the figure (b) showes the high density behavior of diffusion coefficient.\n\nFIG. 1: Diffusion coefficient of Herzian spheres for a set of isotherms. (a) T = 0 01; 0 02 and 0 03; . . . (b) T = 0 1; 0 2 . . and 0 3. . The inset of the figure (b) showes the high density behavior of diffusion coefficient.\n\nrapidly disappears with increasing the temperature. Already at T = 0 03 this region is negligibly small. . Recall from the figures 1 and 3 that at low temperatures both diffusion and excess entropy behave non monotonically while at growing the temperature this effect disappears. This leads to the depression of the region 3 in the Fig. 4 (a).\n\nThe region 2 is rather stable. As one can see from the Fig. 4 (b) this region also becomes less developed with increasing the temperature, but it still preserves even for high temperatures. It makes the excess entropy scaling\n\n4\n\nFIG. 2: Radial distribution functions of Herzian spheres at ρ = 6 0 and a set of temperatures. . (a) T = 0 01; 0 02 and . . 0 03; (b) -. T = 0 1; 0 2 and 0 3. . . .\n\nFIG. 2: Radial distribution functions of Herzian spheres at ρ = 6 0 and a set of temperatures. . (a) T = 0 01; 0 02 and . . 0 03; (b) -. T = 0 1; 0 2 and 0 3. . . .\n\ncurve consisting from two parts of different slope and a cross region.\n\nFig. 5 summarizes all the results obtained for Herzian spheres system. Ten different isotherms are shown there. As one can see only at the temperature as high as 0 5 the . Rosenfeld linear relation between the logarithm of the reduced density and the excess entropy becomes valid. Remember that the melting temperature is of the order of 0 005, that is 100 times smaller. . It allows to say that the Rosenfeld relation for diffusion coefficient of Herzian spheres is valid only in the infinitely high temperature limit.", + "recall": 0.9849624060150376, + "true_md": "4\n\nFIG. 1: Diffusion coefficient of Herzian spheres for a set of isotherms. (a) - T = 0 . 01; 0 . 02 and 0 . 03; (b) - T = 0 . 1; 0 . 2 and 0 . 3. The inset of the figure (b) showes the high density behavior of diffusion coefficient.\n\nFIG. 2: Radial distribution functions of Herzian spheres at ρ = 6 . 0 and a set of temperatures. (a) - T = 0 . 01; 0 . 02 and 0 . 03; (b) - T = 0 . 1; 0 . 2 and 0 . 3.\n\nrapidly disappears with increasing the temperature. Al- ready at T = 0 . 03 this region is negligibly small. Recall from the figures 1 and 3 that at low temperatures both diffusion and excess entropy behave non monotonically while at growing the temperature this effect disappears. This leads to the depression of the region 3 in the Fig. 4 (a).\n\nThe region 2 is rather stable. As one can see from the Fig. 4 (b) this region also becomes less developed with increasing the temperature, but it still preserves even for high temperatures. It makes the excess entropy scaling\n\ncurve consisting from two parts of different slope and a cross region.\n\nFig. 5 summarizes all the results obtained for Herzian spheres system. Ten different isotherms are shown there. As one can see only at the temperature as high as 0 . 5 the Rosenfeld linear relation between the logarithm of the reduced density and the excess entropy becomes valid. Remember that the melting temperature is of the order of 0 . 005, that is 100 times smaller. It allows to say that the Rosenfeld relation for diffusion coefficient of Herzian spheres is valid only in the infinitely high temperature limit." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5944530089684289, + "doc_id": "3975bfc2b1567cb997282dc9db4d6b3454186d06372f6e69cfab825e6a19a254", + "edit_distance": 0.537467700258398, + "f1_score": 0.9249394673123487, + "meteor": 0.5612379742471735, + "precision": 0.9408866995073891, + "pred_md": "∆\n\nFIG. 6: Evolution of ∆ W in the presence of a lattice (solid line) compared with the case of no lattice(a constant DOS, dashed line) for clean and dirty limits. ∆ = 30 meV , Γ = 3 5 . meV (clean limit), Γ = 150 meV (dirty limit)\n\nFIG. 6: Evolution of ∆ W in the presence of a lattice (solid line) compared with the case of no lattice(a constant DOS, dashed line) for clean and dirty limits. ∆ = 30 meV , Γ = 3 5 . meV (clean limit), Γ = 150 meV (dirty limit)\n\n\n\nObserve that Σ '' ( ω ) is no-zero only for ω < -ω o -∆. Also, although it does not straightforwardly follow from Eq. 16, but real and imaginary parts of the self-energy do satisfy Σ ( ' ω ) = -Σ ( ' -ω ) and Σ '' ( ω ) = Σ '' ( -ω ).\n\nFig7 shows conductivities σ ω ( ) and Kubo sums W K as a function of the dimensionless coupling λ . We see that, like in the previous case, the Kubo sum in the NS is larger than that in the SCS. The difference ∆ W K is between 5 and 8 meV.\n\nFig 8 shows the evolution of the optical integrals. Here we see the difference with the BCSI model - only about 75% of the optical integral is recovered, both in the NS and SCS, when we integrate up to the bandwidth of 1 eV . The rest comes from higher frequencies.\n\nIn Fig 9 we plot ∆ W ω ( c ) as a function of ω c . We see the same behavior as in the BCSI model in a clean limit - ∆ W ω ( c ) is positive at small frequencies, crosses zero at some ω c , passes through a deep minimum at a larger frequency, and eventually saturates at a negative value at the largest w c . However, in distinction to BCSI model, ∆ W ω ( c ) keeps varying with ω c up a much larger scale and saturates only at around 0 8 . eV . In between the dip at 0 1 . eV and 0 8 . eV , the behavior of the optical integral is predominantly determined by the variation of the cut-off term ∆ f ( ω c ) as evidenced by a close similarity between the behavior of the actual ∆ W and ∆ W in the absence\n\n1\n\nFIG. 7: Top- conductivities in the NS and the SCS for the EB model. The conductivity in the NS vanishes below ω 0 because of no phase space for scattering. Bottom - Kubo sums as a function of coupling. Observe that W K in the SCS is below that in the NS. We set ω o = 40 meV , ∆=30 meV , λ = 5 .\n\nFIG. 7: Top- conductivities in the NS and the SCS for the EB model. The conductivity in the NS vanishes below ω 0 because of no phase space for scattering. Bottom - Kubo sums as a function of coupling. Observe that W K in the SCS is below that in the NS. We set ω o = 40 meV , ∆=30 meV , λ = 5 .\n\nFIG. 8: Evolution of the optical integrals in the EB model. Note that W (0) has a non zero value at T = 0 in the NS because the self-energy at small frequencies is purely real and linear in ω , hence the polarization bubble Π(0) = 0, as in an ideal Fermi gas. Parameters are the same as in fig. 7\n\nFIG. 8: Evolution of the optical integrals in the EB model. Note that W (0) has a non zero value at T = 0 in the NS because the self-energy at small frequencies is purely real and linear in ω , hence the polarization bubble Π(0) = 0, as in an ideal Fermi gas. Parameters are the same as in fig. 7\n\nc\n\n/negationslash\n\n7", + "recall": 0.9095238095238095, + "true_md": "7\n\nFIG. 6: Evolution of Δ W in the presence of a lattice (solid line) compared with the case of no lattice(a constant DOS, dashed line) for clean and dirty limits. Δ = 30 meV , Γ = 3 . 5 meV (clean limit), Γ = 150 meV (dirty limit)\n\nFIG. 7: Top- conductivities in the NS and the SCS for the EB model. The conductivity in the NS vanishes below ω 0 because of no phase space for scattering. Bottom - Kubo sums as a function of coupling. Observe that W K in the SCS is below that in the NS. We set ω o = 40 meV , Δ = 30 meV , λ = . 5\n\n√ (16) Observe that Σ ′′ ( ω ) is no-zero only for ω < − ω$_{o}$ − Δ. Also, although it does not straightforwardly follow from Eq. 16, but real and imaginary parts of the self-energy do satisfy Σ ′ ( ω ) = − Σ ′ ( − ω ) and Σ ′′ ( ω ) = Σ ′′ ( − ω ).\n\nFig7 shows conductivities σ ( ω ) and Kubo sums W$_{K}$ as a function of the dimensionless coupling λ . We see that, like in the previous case, the Kubo sum in the NS is larger than that in the SCS. The difference Δ W$_{K}$ is between 5 and 8 meV.\n\nFig 8 shows the evolution of the optical integrals. Here we see the difference with the BCSI model – only about 75% of the optical integral is recovered, both in the NS and SCS, when we integrate up to the bandwidth of 1 eV . The rest comes from higher frequencies.\n\nIn Fig 9 we plot Δ W ( ω$_{c}$ ) as a function of ω$_{c}$ . We see the same behavior as in the BCSI model in a clean limit – Δ W ( ω$_{c}$ ) is positive at small frequencies, crosses zero at some ω$_{c}$ , passes through a deep minimum at a larger frequency, and eventually saturates at a negative value at the largest w$_{c}$ . However, in distinction to BCSI model, Δ W ( ω$_{c}$ ) keeps varying with ω$_{c}$ up a much larger scale and saturates only at around 0 . 8 eV . In between the dip at 0 . 1 eV and 0 . 8 eV , the behavior of the optical integral is predominantly determined by the variation of the cut-off term Δ f ( ω$_{c}$ ) as evidenced by a close similarity between the behavior of the actual Δ W and Δ W in the absence\n\nFIG. 8: Evolution of the optical integrals in the EB model. Note that W (0) has a non zero value at T = 0 in the NS because the self-energy at small frequencies is purely real and linear in ω , hence the polarization bubble Π(0) ̸ = 0, as in an ideal Fermi gas. Parameters are the same as in fig. 7\n\n$$$_{Σ}$′$_{(}$$_{ω}$$_{) =}$ − 1 2 λ$_{n}$ω$_{o}$ Re ∫ $_{dω}$′ 1 ω 2 o − ω ′ 2 − iδ ω + ω ′ √ ( ω + ω ′ ) 2 − Δ 2 (16) Observe that Σ ′′ ( ω ) is no-zero only for ω < − ω$_{o}$ − Δ.$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.18793834754041092, + "doc_id": "8a69739fecc3bce80383827885697c381d9af180a34346e8c3766ec0be720067", + "edit_distance": 0.8140747176368376, + "f1_score": 0.8349514563106797, + "meteor": 0.277230722485529, + "precision": 0.9398907103825137, + "pred_md": "Contours of constant u , with u ∈ [0 , ∞ ], are nested ellipses with common foci located at ( x y ; ) = ( ± f ; 0). Contours of constant v , with v ∈ [0 , 2 π ], are hyperbolae. Together these contours form an orthogonal coordinate system. See Fig. 4. Data is to be interpolated onto the ellipse whose cross section is that of the elliptical cylinder of Fig. 3. See Fig. 5. EllipticCylindricalCoord\\_1000.gif (GIF Image, 475x412 pixels)\n\nFIG. 4: Elliptical coordinates showing contours of constant u and constant v [7]. The foci are at ( ± a, 0), and in our case a = f .\n\nFIG. 4: Elliptical coordinates showing contours of constant u and constant v [7]. The foci are at ( ± a, 0), and in our case a = f .\n\n1 of 1\n\n3/13/10 10:03 AM\n\nFIG. 5: A square or rectangular grid in the x y , plane for a fixed z value on the 3-dimensional grid. Values at data points near the ellipse are to be interpolated onto the ellipse.\n\nFIG. 5: A square or rectangular grid in the x y , plane for a fixed z value on the 3-dimensional grid. Values at data points near the ellipse are to be interpolated onto the ellipse.\n\nFor our work we will need the unit vector ˆ e u , the unit vector (outwardly) normal to the surface of the elliptical cylinder. Write\n\n\n\nThen, by definition, we have the result\n\n\n\n## 3. Mathieu Equations\n\nLet us seek to construct harmonic functions of the form\n\n\n\nwhere the functions P and Q are yet to be determined. Employing the Ansatz (33) in Laplace's equation and use of (32b) yields the requirement\n\n\n\nWe also observe that there is the trigonometric identity\n\n\n\nso that the requirement (34) can be rewritten in the form\n\n\n\n7\n\nIt is also convenient to employ the complex variables\n\n\n\nand\n\n\n\nIn these variables, the relations (24) can be written in the more compact form\n\n\n\nForm differentials of both sides of (28). Doing so gives the result\n\n\n\nand the complex conjugate result\n\n\n\nNow form the product of (29) and (30) to get the transverse line-element relation\n\n\n\nFrom this relation we infer the results\n\n\n\n", + "recall": 0.7510917030567685, + "true_md": "7\n\nContours of constant u , with u ∈ [0 , ∞ ], are nested el- lipses with common foci located at ( x ; y ) = ( ± f ; 0). Con- tours of constant v , with v ∈ [0 , 2 π ], are hyperbolae. Together these contours form an orthogonal coordinate system. See Fig. 4. Data is to be interpolated onto the ellipse whose cross section is that of the elliptical cylinder of Fig. 3. See Fig. 5. EllipticCylindricalCoord\\_1000.gif (GIF Image, 475x412 pixels)\n\nFIG. 4: Elliptical coordinates showing contours of constant u and constant v [7]. The foci are at ( ± a, 0), and in our case a = f .\n\nFIG. 5: A square or rectangular grid in the x , y plane for a fixed z value on the 3-dimensional grid. Values at data points near the ellipse are to be interpolated onto the ellipse.\n\nFor our work we will need the unit vector ˆ e$_{u}$ , the unit vector (outwardly) normal to the surface of the elliptical cylinder. Write\n\n$$r = x ˆ e$_{x}$ + y ˆ e$_{y}$ + z ˆ e$_{z}$ = f cosh( u ) cos( v ) ˆ e$_{x}$ + f sinh( u ) sin( v ) ˆ e$_{y}$ + z ˆ e$_{z}$ . (25)$$\n\nThen, by definition, we have the result\n\n$$ˆ e$_{u}$ = ( ∂ r /∂u ) / || ( ∂ r /∂u ) || = sinh( u ) cos( v ) ˆ e$_{x}$ + cosh( u ) sin( v ) ˆ e$_{y}$ [cosh $^{2}$( u ) − cos $^{2}$( v )] 1 / 2 . (26)$$\n\n$$[( ∂$_{u}$ ) 2 + ( ∂$_{v}$ ) $^{2}$][ P ( u ) Q ( v )] = (36) ( k $^{2}$f$^{2}$/ 4)[2 cosh(2 u ) − 2 cos(2 v )] P ( u ) Q ( v ) .$$\n\nso that the requirement (34) can be rewritten in the form\n\n$$cosh $^{2}$( u ) − cos $^{2}$( v ) = (1 / 2)[cosh(2 u ) − cos(2 v )] (35)$$\n\nWe also observe that there is the trigonometric identity\n\n$$[( ∂$_{u}$ ) 2 + ( ∂$_{v}$ ) $^{2}$][ P ( u ) Q ( v )] = k $^{2}$f$^{2}$[cosh$^{2}$( u ) − cos $^{2}$( v )] P ( u ) Q ( v ) . (34)$$\n\nwhere the functions P and Q are yet to be determined. Employing the Ansatz (33) in Laplace’s equation and use of (32b) yields the requirement\n\n$$ψ ∼ P ( u ) Q ( v ) exp( ikz ) (33)$$\n\nLet us seek to construct harmonic functions of the form\n\n## 3. Mathieu Equations\n\n$$∇ $^{2}$ψ = (1 /f $^{2}$)[cosh$^{2}$( u ) − cos $^{2}$( v )] − $^{1}$[( ∂$_{u}$ ) 2 + ( ∂$_{v}$ ) $^{2}$] ψ + ( ∂$_{z}$ ) $^{2}$ψ. (32b)$$\n\n$$B$_{u}$ = ˆ e$_{u}$ · B = ( ∇ ψ )$_{u}$ = (1 /f )[cosh $^{2}$( u ) − cos $^{2}$( v )] − 1 / $^{2}$( ∂ψ/∂u ) , (32a)$$\n\nFrom this relation we infer the results\n\n$$ds 2 ⊥ = dx 2 + dy 2 = f $^{2}$sinh( u + iv ) sinh( u − iv )( du 2 + dv $^{2}$) = f $^{2}$[cosh$^{2}$( u ) − cos $^{2}$( v )]( du 2 + dv $^{2}$) . (31)$$\n\nNow form the product of (29) and (30) to get the trans- verse line-element relation\n\n$$dx − idy = f sinh( ¯ w )( du − idv ) . (30)$$\n\nand the complex conjugate result\n\n$$dx + idy = f sinh( w )( du + idv ) (29)$$\n\nForm differentials of both sides of (28). Doing so gives the result\n\n$$ζ = f cosh( w ) . (28)$$\n\nIn these variables, the relations (24) can be written in the more compact form\n\n$$http://mathworld.wolfram.com/images/eps-gif/EllipticCylindricalCoord_1000.gif w = u + iv. (27b)$$\n\nand\n\n$$ζ = x + iy, (27a)$$\n\nIt is also convenient to employ the complex variables" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.35115402611568725, + "doc_id": "e0a3a05148d997feb13f036a4cb9893469fd1b04760166b74819c2f6cc856d87", + "edit_distance": 0.8405444822557122, + "f1_score": 0.9087779690189327, + "meteor": 0.32585681672168365, + "precision": 0.9395017793594306, + "pred_md": "## Appendix A: Matrix elements of the resolvent\n\nIn this Appendix we derive the expressions of the matrix elements G a,a ( z ) = 〈 a G z a | ( ) 〉 , G k,a ( z ) = 〈 k G z a | ( ) 〉 , G a,k ( z ) = 〈 a G z k | ( ) 〉 and G k,k ' ( z ) = 〈 k G z k | ( ) ' 〉 of the resolvent [Eqs.(6-9) given in the text]. From the identity G z ( )( z -H 0 -V ) = ( z -H 0 -V ) G z ( ) =\n\nI it follows that\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nTaking into account that\n\n\n\nand that ( z -H 0 ) | a 〉 = ( z -E a ) | a 〉 , ( z -H 0 ) | k 〉 = ( z -E k ( )) | k 〉 , Eqs.(A1) and (A2) take the form\n\n\n\n\n\nwhich can be solved for G a,a and G a,k , yielding Eqs.(6) and (7) given in the text. To calculate G k,a ( z ), we use Eq.(A3) and note that 〈 k | ( z -H 0 ) G z a ( ) 〉 = ( 〈 z ∗ -H † 0 ) k G z a | ( ) 〉 = ( z -E k ( )) G k,a ( z ) and 〈 k V G z a | ( ) 〉 = 〈 V k G z a | ( ) 〉 = v ∗ ( k ) G a,a ( z ). This yields ( z -E k ( )) G k,a ( z ) -v ∗ ( k ) G a,a ( z ) = 0, which can be solved for G k,a ( z ), yielding Eq.(8) given in the text. Finally, the matrix element G k,k ' ( z ) is obtained from Eq.(A4), which can be written in the form ( z -E k ( ' )) G k,k ' ( z ) -v k ( ' ) G k,a ( z ) = δ k ( -k ' ), i.e.\n\n\n\nSubstitution of Eq.(8) into Eq.(A8) finally yields Eq.(9) given in the text.\n\n## Appendix B: Conditions for a real-valued energy spectrum of the non-Hermitian Hamiltonian\n\nIn this Appendix we derive the necessary and sufficient conditions that ensure a real-valued energy spectrum for the non-Hermitian FFA Hamiltonian H introduced in Sec.III.A. As shown in Sec.II.B, this condition is equivalent to the vanishing of the point-spectrum of H , i.e. to the absence of bound states. The detailed calculations can be performed following two different, though equivalent, approaches. The first one starts from the representation of H in the {| a , 〉 | k 〉} basis (the Bloch basis), whereas the second approach uses a different decomposition of H , namely on the {| a , 〉 | n 〉} basis,\n\n12\n\nwhere | n 〉 are the Wannier states introduced in Sec.III.B (the Wannier basis). For the sake of completeness, we present the detailed calculations for both approaches.\n\n- 1. Bloch-basis representation of H . As shown in Sec.II.B, the absence of bound states of H requires that Eq.(18) does not admit of any solution in the complex z plane. Using the expression (50) of the self-energy Σ( z ), Eq.(18) takes the form\n\n\n\nWe can solve Eq.(B1) by introducing, in place of z , the new complex-valued variable µ defined by\n\n\n\nWithout loss of generality, we may assume Re( µ ) > 0. In fact, the function z µ ( ) defined by Eq.B(2) is invariant for the inversion µ → -µ , so that we may restrict our analysis to the case Re( µ ) > 0. With such a substitution, the square root on the right hand side of Eq.(B1) can be solved analytically, yielding ± 2 iκ 0 sinh µ . Some care should be taken when choosing the right determination (i.e. sign) of the square root [46]. For Re( µ ) > 0, one obtains\n\n\n\nAfter setting ξ = exp( µ ), from Eq.(B3) one obtains Eq.(52) given in the text once cosh µ and sinh µ are expressed in terms of the exponentials exp( ± µ ) = ξ ± 1 . Therefore, if the two roots ξ 1 2 , of Eq.(52) satisfy the condition | ξ 1 2 , | ≤ 1, Eq.(B3) does not have roots with Re( µ ) > 0, and hence H does not have bound states.\n\n- 2. Wannier-basis representation of H . In this approach, we use the tight-binding representation of the Hamiltonian H using the Wannier function basis [Eq.(63)]. Bound states of H correspond in this case to surface states localized near the edge of the truncated lattice of Fig.3. They can be directly determined by looking for a solution to Eqs.(65-67) of the form\n\n\n\n( n ≥ 1), where E is the energy of the surface state. The constants µ and A , as well as the dependence of E on µ , are readily determined by substituting Eq.(B4) into Eqs.(65-67). One obtains\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nfrom which the following second-order algebraic equations for ξ = exp( µ ) is readily obtained\n\n", + "recall": 0.88, + "true_md": "12\n\nwhere | n 〉 are the Wannier states introduced in Sec.III.B (the Wannier basis). For the sake of completeness, we present the detailed calculations for both approaches.\n\n1. Bloch-basis representation of H . As shown in Sec.II.B, the absence of bound states of H requires that Eq.(18) does not admit of any solution in the complex z plane. Using the expression (50) of the self-energy Σ( z ), Eq.(18) takes the form\n\nIn this Appendix we derive the expressions of the ma- trix elements G $_{a,a}$( z ) = 〈 a | G ( z ) a 〉 , G $_{k,a}$( z ) = 〈 k | G ( z ) a 〉 , G $_{a,k}$( z ) = 〈 a | ( z ) k 〉 and G k,k ′ ( z ) = 〈 k | G ( z ) k $^{′}$〉 of the re- solvent [Eqs.(6-9) given in the text]. From the identity G ( z )( z − H$_{0}$ − V ) = ( z − H$_{0}$ − V ) G ( z ) = I it follows that\n\n## Appendix A: Matrix elements of the resolvent\n\n$$( 1 − κ 2 a 2 κ 2 0 ) z − E$_{a}$ = − i κ 2 a 2 κ 2 0 √ 4 κ 2 0 − z $^{2}$. (B1) We can solve Eq.(B1) by introducing, in place of z , the$$\n\n$$〈 a | G ( z )( z − H$_{0}$ ) a 〉 − 〈 a | G ( z ) V a 〉 = 1 (A1) a G ( z )( z H$_{0}$ ) k a G ( z ) V k = 0 (A2) 〈 k | ( z − H$_{0}$ ) G ( z ) a 〉 − 〈 k | V G ( z ) a 〉 = 0 (A3) 〈 k | G ( z )( z − H$_{0}$ ) k $^{′}$〉 − 〈 k | G ( z ) V k $^{′}$〉 = δ ( k − k $^{′}$) . (A4)$$\n\n√ We can solve Eq.(B1) by introducing, in place of z , the new complex-valued variable µ defined by\n\nTaking into account that\n\nWithout loss of generality, we may assume Re( µ ) > 0. In fact, the function z ( µ ) defined by Eq.B(2) is invariant for the inversion µ → − µ , so that we may restrict our analysis to the case Re( µ ) > 0. With such a substitution, the square root on the right hand side of Eq.(B1) can be solved analytically, yielding ± 2 iκ$_{0}$ sinh µ . Some care should be taken when choosing the right determination (i.e. sign) of the square root [46]. For Re( µ ) > 0, one obtains\n\n$$z = − κ$_{0}$ [exp( µ ) + exp( − µ )] = − 2 κ$_{0}$ cosh µ. (B2)$$\n\n$$V | a 〉 = ∫ dkv $^{∗}$( k ) | k 〉 , V | k 〉 = v ( k ) | a 〉 (A5)$$\n\n$$∫ ( z − E ( k )) G $_{a,k}$( z ) − v ( k ) G $_{a,a}$( z ) = 0 (A7)$$\n\n$$( z − E$_{a}$ ) G $_{a,a}$( z ) − ∫ dkv $^{∗}$( k ) G a,k = 1 (A6) ( z − E ( k )) G $_{a,k}$( z ) − v ( k ) G $_{a,a}$( z ) = 0 (A7)$$\n\n$$2 ( 1 − κ 2 a 2 κ 2 0 ) cosh µ + E$_{a}$ κ$_{0}$ = − κ 2 a κ 2 0 sinh µ. (B3)$$\n\nAfter setting ξ = exp( µ ), from Eq.(B3) one obtains Eq.(52) given in the text once cosh µ and sinh µ are expressed in terms of the exponentials exp( ± µ ) = ξ ± $^{1}$. Therefore, if the two roots ξ$_{1}$$\\_{,}$$_{2}$ of Eq.(52) satisfy the condition | ξ$_{1}$$\\_{,}$$_{2}$ | ≤ 1, Eq.(B3) does not have roots with Re( µ ) > 0, and hence H does not have bound states.\n\n2. Wannier-basis representation of H . In this ap- proach, we use the tight-binding representation of the Hamiltonian H using the Wannier function basis [Eq.(63)]. Bound states of H correspond in this case to surface states localized near the edge of the truncated lattice of Fig.3. They can be directly determined by looking for a solution to Eqs.(65-67) of the form\n\n( n ≥ 1), where E is the energy of the surface state. The constants µ and A , as well as the dependence of E on µ , are readily determined by substituting Eq.(B4) into Eqs.(65-67). One obtains\n\n$$c$_{n}$ ( t ) = exp[ − µ ( n − 1) − iEt ] , c$_{a}$ ( t ) = A exp( − iEt ) (B4)$$\n\n$$E = − 2 κ$_{0}$ cosh µ (B5) E = κ$_{0}$ exp( − µ ) − κ$_{a}$A (B6)$$\n\n$$− − EA = − κ$_{a}$ + E$_{a}$A. (B7)$$\n\n$$− E = κ$_{0}$ exp( − µ ) − κ$_{a}$A EA = − κ$_{a}$ + E$_{a}$A.$$\n\n## Appendix B: Conditions for a real-valued energy spectrum of the non-Hermitian Hamiltonian\n\nfrom which the following second-order algebraic equa- tions for ξ = exp( µ ) is readily obtained\n\nSubstitution of Eq.(8) into Eq.(A8) finally yields Eq.(9) given in the text.\n\nwhich can be solved for G a,a and G $_{a,k}$, yielding Eqs.(6) and (7) given in the text. To calculate G $_{k,a}$( z ), we use Eq.(A3) and note that 〈 k | ( z − H$_{0}$ ) G ( z ) a 〉 = 〈 ( z ∗ − H † $_{0}$) k | G ( z ) a 〉 = ( z − E ( k )) G $_{k,a}$( z ) and 〈 k | V G ( z ) a 〉 = 〈 V k | G ( z ) a 〉 = v $^{∗}$( k ) G $_{a,a}$( z ). This yields ( z − E ( k )) G $_{k,a}$( z ) − v $^{∗}$( k ) G $_{a,a}$( z ) = 0, which can be solved for G $_{k,a}$( z ), yielding Eq.(8) given in the text. Finally, the ma- trix element G k,k ′ ( z ) is obtained from Eq.(A4), which can be written in the form ( z − E ( k $^{′}$)) G k,k ′ ( z ) − v ( k $^{′}$) G $_{k,a}$( z ) = δ ( k − k $^{′}$), i.e.\n\n$$G k,k ′ ( z ) = v ( k $^{′}$) G $_{k,a}$( z ) z − E ( k $^{′}$) + δ ( k − k $^{′}$) z − E ( k $^{′}$) . (A8)$$\n\nand that ( z − H$_{0}$ ) | a 〉 = ( z − E$_{a}$ ) | a 〉 , ( z − H$_{0}$ ) | k 〉 = ( z − E ( k )) | k 〉 , Eqs.(A1) and (A2) take the form\n\nIn this Appendix we derive the necessary and sufficient conditions that ensure a real-valued energy spectrum for the non-Hermitian FFA Hamiltonian H introduced in Sec.III.A. As shown in Sec.II.B, this condition is equivalent to the vanishing of the point-spectrum of H , i.e. to the absence of bound states. The detailed calculations can be performed following two different, though equivalent, approaches. The first one starts from the representation of H in the {| a 〉 , | k 〉} basis (the Bloch basis), whereas the second approach uses a different decomposition of H , namely on the {| a 〉 , | n 〉} basis,\n\n$$ξ 2 + E$_{a}$ κ$_{0}$ ξ + 1 − κ 2 a κ 2 0 = 0 (B8)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.871416647741779, + "doc_id": "d2cb4d79f119d3927c5446aba18278892c48af1e472d40803a2ec379c1d2f38f", + "edit_distance": 0.7325819672131147, + "f1_score": 0.910569105691057, + "meteor": 0.7928390514527313, + "precision": 0.9655172413793104, + "pred_md": "arXiv:1001.1447v2 [physics.acc-ph] 6 May 2010\n\n## Accurate transfer maps for realistic beamline elements: Part I, straight elements ∗\n\nChad E. Mitchell † and Alex J. Dragt ‡ Physics Department, University of Maryland, College Park, MD\n\n(Dated: October 23, 2018)\n\nThe behavior of orbits in charged-particle beam transport systems, including both linear and circular accelerators as well as final focus sections and spectrometers, can depend sensitively on nonlinear fringe-field and high-order-multipole effects in the various beam-line elements. The inclusion of these effects requires a detailed and realistic model of the interior and fringe fields, including their high spatial derivatives. A collection of surface fitting methods has been developed for extracting this information accurately from 3-dimensional field data on a grid, as provided by various 3-dimensional finite-element field codes. Based on these realistic field models, Lie or other methods may be used to compute accurate design orbits and accurate transfer maps about these orbits. Part I of this work presents a treatment of straight-axis magnetic elements, while Part II will treat bending dipoles with large sagitta. An exactly-soluble but numerically challenging model field is used to provide a rigorous collection of performance benchmarks.\n\n## I. INTRODUCTION\n\nFor the design of high-performance linear accelerators, synchrotrons, and storage and damping rings it is essential to have realistic electric and magnetic field information for the various beam-line elements in order to compute accurate design orbits and accurate high-order transfer maps about the design orbits. There are similar requirements for other charged-particle beam transport systems such as final focus sections, high-resolution spectrometers, and high-resolution electron microscopes.\n\nRealistic field data can be provided on a grid with the aid of various 3-dimensional finite element codes, sometimes spot checked against measured data. But the computation of high-order transfer maps based on this data appears to pose an insurmountable problem: the calculation of high-order transfer maps requires a knowledge of high derivatives of the field data. The direct calculation of high derivatives based only on grid data is intolerably sensitive to noise (due to truncation or round-off) in the grid data [1]. We will see that this problem can be solved by the use of surface methods. The effect of numerical noise can be overcome by fitting field data on a bounding surface far from the beam axis and continuing inward using the Maxwell equations. (We recall that interior fields are uniquely specified by their values on bounding surfaces.) While the process of differentiation serves to amplify the effect of numerical noise, the process of continuing inward using the Maxwell equations is smoothing . This smoothing is related to the fact that harmonic functions take their extrema on boundaries. When using surface methods, all fits are made on such boundaries. Therefore, if these fits are accurate, interior data\n\n∗ Work supported by U.S. Department of Energy Grant DE-FG0296ER40949.\n\n† Electronic address: cemitch@umd.edu\n\n‡ Electronic address: dragt@umd.edu\n\nbased on these fits will be even more accurate.\n\nIn this paper we will devote our attention to magnetic beam-line elements. Static electric beam-line elements, and static electric and magnetic beam-line elements such as velocity selectors (Wien filters), could be treated in a similar way. For a treatment of RF cavities, see [2].\n\nThere are two magnetic cases that it is convenient to handle separately: straight and curved. For straight magnetic elements such as solenoids, quadrupoles, sextupoles, octupoles, etc., and wigglers, it is convenient to employ cylindrical surfaces. For the case of curved magnetic elements, such as dipoles with large design-orbit sagitta, it is convenient to employ the surface of a bent box with straight ends. In all cases the bounding surface will surround the design orbit within the beam-line element and will extend into the fringe-field regions outside the beam-line element, thus taking into account all fringe-field effects as well as all effects within the body of the beam-line element.\n\nFor the case of straight beam-line elements it is convenient to describe the magnetic field in terms of a magnetic scalar potential ψ . Then, if one wishes to compute transfer maps in terms of canonical coordinates, one can proceed with the aid of an associated vector potential A computed from ψ . Alternatively, if one wishes to integrate noncanonical equations employing the magnetic field B , it can be obtained from the relation B = ∇ ψ .\n\nFor the case of curved beam-line elements it is convenient to work directly with the vector potential. Its use in the case of canonical coordinates is then immediate. If instead one wishes to integrate noncanonical equations employing the magnetic field B , it can be obtained from the relation B = ∇× A .\n\nIn this paper we will treat the case of straight beamline elements. For this purpose we will employ the surface of a (virtual) cylinder of uniform cross-section (circular, elliptical, or rectangular) surrounding the beam, and which lies within all iron or other magnetic sources. In these cases, a Green function can be determined for the geometry of the fitted domain as a series composed", + "recall": 0.8615384615384616, + "true_md": "# Accurate transfer maps for realistic beamline elements: Part I, straight elements ∗\n\nChad E. Mitchell † and Alex J. Dragt ‡\n\nPhysics Department, University of Maryland, College Park, MD\n\n(Dated: October 23, 2018)\n\nThe behavior of orbits in charged-particle beam transport systems, including both linear and circular accelerators as well as final focus sections and spectrometers, can depend sensitively on nonlinear fringe-field and high-order-multipole effects in the various beam-line elements. The inclu- sion of these effects requires a detailed and realistic model of the interior and fringe fields, including their high spatial derivatives. A collection of surface fitting methods has been developed for ex- tracting this information accurately from 3-dimensional field data on a grid, as provided by various 3-dimensional finite-element field codes. Based on these realistic field models, Lie or other methods may be used to compute accurate design orbits and accurate transfer maps about these orbits. Part I of this work presents a treatment of straight-axis magnetic elements, while Part II will treat bend- ing dipoles with large sagitta. An exactly-soluble but numerically challenging model field is used to provide a rigorous collection of performance benchmarks.\n\nbased on these fits will be even more accurate.\n\nIn this paper we will devote our attention to magnetic beam-line elements. Static electric beam-line elements, and static electric and magnetic beam-line elements such as velocity selectors (Wien filters), could be treated in a similar way. For a treatment of RF cavities, see [2].\n\nThere are two magnetic cases that it is convenient to handle separately: straight and curved. For straight magnetic elements such as solenoids, quadrupoles, sex- tupoles, octupoles, etc., and wigglers, it is convenient to employ cylindrical surfaces. For the case of curved mag- netic elements, such as dipoles with large design-orbit sagitta, it is convenient to employ the surface of a bent box with straight ends. In all cases the bounding sur- face will surround the design orbit within the beam-line element and will extend into the fringe-field regions out- side the beam-line element, thus taking into account all fringe-field effects as well as all effects within the body of the beam-line element.\n\nFor the case of straight beam-line elements it is con- venient to describe the magnetic field in terms of a mag- netic scalar potential ψ . Then, if one wishes to compute transfer maps in terms of canonical coordinates, one can proceed with the aid of an associated vector potential A computed from ψ . Alternatively, if one wishes to in- tegrate noncanonical equations employing the magnetic field B , it can be obtained from the relation B = ∇ ψ .\n\nFor the case of curved beam-line elements it is conve- nient to work directly with the vector potential. Its use in the case of canonical coordinates is then immediate. If instead one wishes to integrate noncanonical equations employing the magnetic field B , it can be obtained from the relation B = ∇ × A .\n\nIn this paper we will treat the case of straight beam- line elements. For this purpose we will employ the sur- face of a (virtual) cylinder of uniform cross-section (cir- cular, elliptical, or rectangular) surrounding the beam, and which lies within all iron or other magnetic sources. In these cases, a Green function can be determined for the geometry of the fitted domain as a series composed\n\n$^{∗}$Work supported by U.S. Department of Energy Grant DE-FG02- 96ER40949.\n\n$^{†}$Electronic address: cemitch@umd.edu\n\n$^{‡}$Electronic address: dragt@umd.edu\n\nRealistic field data can be provided on a grid with the aid of various 3-dimensional finite element codes, some- times spot checked against measured data. But the com- putation of high-order transfer maps based on this data appears to pose an insurmountable problem: the calcula- tion of high-order transfer maps requires a knowledge of high derivatives of the field data. The direct calculation of high derivatives based only on grid data is intolera- bly sensitive to noise (due to truncation or round-off) in the grid data [1]. We will see that this problem can be solved by the use of surface methods. The effect of nu- merical noise can be overcome by fitting field data on a bounding surface far from the beam axis and continu- ing inward using the Maxwell equations. (We recall that interior fields are uniquely specified by their values on bounding surfaces.) While the process of differentiation serves to amplify the effect of numerical noise, the pro- cess of continuing inward using the Maxwell equations is smoothing . This smoothing is related to the fact that har- monic functions take their extrema on boundaries. When using surface methods, all fits are made on such bound- aries. Therefore, if these fits are accurate, interior data\n\nFor the design of high-performance linear accelerators, synchrotrons, and storage and damping rings it is es- sential to have realistic electric and magnetic field infor- mation for the various beam-line elements in order to compute accurate design orbits and accurate high-order transfer maps about the design orbits. There are similar requirements for other charged-particle beam transport systems such as final focus sections, high-resolution spec- trometers, and high-resolution electron microscopes.\n\narXiv:1001.1447v2 [physics.acc-ph] 6 May 2010\n\n## I. INTRODUCTION" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.06970585915950246, + "doc_id": "3b88e3d6a7c6bfb68f70782163fee1bc5ffc3ff73972da56040e02c1e5503af4", + "edit_distance": 0.8799582463465553, + "f1_score": 0.8630136986301369, + "meteor": 0.21431106832446845, + "precision": 0.945, + "pred_md": "Looking at the following standard formula for Gaussian integration for bosonic fields\n\n\n\nwe observe that we can get rid of the inverse of the Faddeev-Popov operator in h 3 ( x ) by introducing new fields. For every index i , defined by . . . a i = . . . ac µ , we can write for h 3 ( x )\n\n\n\nwhereby we have introduced a pair of complex conjugate bosonic fields ( ϕ ac µ , ϕ ac µ ) = ( ϕ , ϕ a i a i ). We can then also lift the determinants det( -M ) into the exponential by introducing a pair of Grassmann fields ( ω ac µ , ω ac µ ) = ( ω , ω a i a i ). Making use of the standard Gaussian formula for Grassmann variables\n\n\n\nwhereby we set the sources J a ω and J b ω equal to zero, we obtain\n\n\n\nThe new localized action thus becomes\n\n\n\n3\n\nwith\n\n\n\nand with\n\n\n\nNotice that, as already remarked, the limit θ → 0, in equation (19) has been performed after localization. As one can see from (13), taking this limit is equivalent with setting γ 2 ( x ) equal to the constant γ 2 . As at the level of the action, total derivatives are always neglected, S ' γ becomes\n\n\n\nFrom this expression we can easily understand why certain doubts have arisen. Starting from the first horizon function h 1 ( x ) given in (7) and undertaking the same procedure, we would end up with exactly the same action S ' γ . This can be understood as we have neglected the total derivatives. In conclusion, although the local actions derived from h 1 ( x ) and h 3 ( x ) are the same, at the nonlocal level they are clearly different, which also follows from [8]. This is important when one is doing manipulations at the level of the nonlocal action as has been done in [8].\n\nLet us now translate the nonlocal horizon condition (11) into a local version [4]. The local action S GZ and the nonlocal action S YM + S gf + S h are related as follows,\n\n\n\nNext, we take the partial derivative of both sides with respect to γ 2 so we obtain,\n\n\n\nfor both horizon functions h 1 ( x ) and h 3 ( x ). We recall that 〈 ∂ µ ϕ aa 〉 = 0 and 〈 ∂ µ ϕ aa 〉 = 0, meaning that both horizon functions h 1 and h 3 give rise to the same local horizon condition. Using these expressions and assuming that γ = 0, we can rewrite the horizon condition (11)\n\n/negationslash\n\n", + "recall": 0.7941176470588235, + "true_md": "with\n\nand with\n\nLooking at the following standard formula for Gaussian integration for bosonic fields\n\n] we observe that we can get rid of the inverse of the Faddeev-Popov operator in h$_{3}$ ( x ) by introducing new fields. For every index i , defined by . . . a i = . . . ac µ , we can write for h$_{3}$ ( x )\n\nNotice that, as already remarked, the limit θ → 0, in equation (19) has been performed after localization. As one can see from (13), taking this limit is equivalent with setting γ $^{2}$( x ) equal to the constant γ $^{2}$. As at the level of the action, total derivatives are always neglected, S ′ γ becomes\n\n( ) From this expression we can easily understand why certain doubts have arisen. Starting from the first horizon function h$_{1}$ ( x ) given in (7) and undertaking the same procedure, we would end up with exactly the same action S ′ $_{γ}$. This can be understood as we have neglected the total derivatives. In conclusion, although the local actions derived from h$_{1}$ ( x ) and h$_{3}$ ( x ) are the same, at the nonlocal level they are clearly different, which also follows from [8]. This is important when one is doing manipulations at the level of the nonlocal action as has been done in [8].\n\nLet us now translate the nonlocal horizon condi- tion (11) into a local version [4]. The local action S$_{GZ}$ and the nonlocal action S$_{YM}$ + S$_{gf}$ + S$_{h}$ are related as follows,\n\nwhereby we have introduced a pair of complex conju- gate bosonic fields ( ϕ ac µ , ϕ ac µ ) = ( ϕ a $_{i}$, ϕ a $_{i}$). We can then also lift the determinants det( −M ) into the exponential by introducing a pair of Grassmann fields ( ω ac µ , ω ac µ ) = ( ω a $_{i}$, ω a i ). Making use of the standard Gaussian formula for Grassmann variables\n\nwhereby we set the sources J a ω and J b ω equal to zero, we obtain\n\nNext, we take the partial derivative of both sides with respect to γ 2 so we obtain,\n\nfor both horizon functions h$_{1}$ ( x ) and h$_{3}$ ( x ). We recall that 〈 ∂$_{µ}$ϕ $^{aa}$〉 = 0 and 〈 ∂$_{µ}$ϕ $^{aa}$〉 = 0, meaning that both horizon functions h$_{1}$ and h$_{3}$ give rise to the same local horizon condition. Using these expressions and assuming that γ ̸ = 0, we can rewrite the horizon condition (11)\n\n( The new localized action thus becomes\n\n$$∫ [d A ][d b ][d c ][d c ]e − ( S$_{YM}$ + S$_{gf}$ + S$_{h}$ ) = ∫ [d A ][d b ][d c ][d c ][d ϕ ][d ϕ ][d ω ][d ω ] e − S$_{GZ}$ .$$\n\n$$− 2 γ $^{2}$〈 h 〉 = 〈 gf $^{abc}$Aa $_{µ}$( ϕ bc µ + ϕ bc µ ) 〉 , (21)$$\n\n$$〈 gf $^{abc}$Aa $_{µ}$( ϕ bc µ + ϕ bc µ ) 〉 + 2 γ $^{2}$d ( N 2 − 1) = 0 . (22)$$\n\n$$S$_{GZ}$ = S ′ 0 + S ′ γ , (17)$$\n\n$$C (det A ) exp ( − ∫ d $^{d}$x d $^{d}$y Ja $_{ω}$( x )( A − $^{1}$) $^{ab}$( x, y ) J b $_{ω}$( y ) = ∫ [d ω ][d ω ] exp [∫ d $^{d}$x d $^{d}$y ω$^{a}$( x ) A $^{ab}$ω$^{b}$( y ) + ∫ d $^{4}$x ( J a $_{ω}$( x ) ω $^{a}$( x ) + ω $^{a}$( x ) J a $_{ω}$( x )) ] , (16)$$\n\n$$exp ( − ∫ d $^{d}$xh$_{3}$ ( x ) = d ( N $^{2}$+1) ∏ i =1 det( −M ) ∫ [d ϕ ][d ϕ ] exp lim θ → 0 [ ∫ d $^{d}$x ∫ d $^{d}$yϕa $_{i}$( x ) M $^{ab}$( x, y ) ϕ b $_{i}$( y ) + ∫ d $^{d}$x ( D a $_{i}$( x ) γ $^{2}$( x ) ϕ a $_{i}$( x ) + ( D a $_{i}$( x ) γ $^{2}$( x ) ϕ a $_{i}$( x ) ] ) , (15)$$\n\n$$S ′ γ = γ 2 ∫ d $^{d}$xgf $^{abc}$Aa µ ( ϕ bc µ + ϕ bc µ ) . (20) From this expression we can easily understand why$$\n\n$$S ′ 0 = S$_{YM}$ + S$_{gf}$ + ∫ d $^{d}$x ( ϕ ac µ ∂$_{ν}$D ab ν ϕ bc µ − ω ac µ ∂$_{ν}$D ab ν ω bc µ ) , (18) and with$$\n\n$$S ′ γ = − lim θ → 0 ∫ d $^{d}$x [( D ac µ ( x ) γ $^{2}$( x ) ϕ ac µ ( x ) + ( D ac µ ( x ) γ $^{2}$( x ) ϕ ac µ ( x ) ] = lim θ → 0 ∫ d $^{d}$x γ $^{2}$( x ) D ca µ ( ϕ ac µ ( x ) + ϕ ac µ ( x )) = γ 2 ∫ d $^{d}$x Dca µ ( ϕ ac µ ( x ) + ϕ ac µ ( x )) . (19)$$\n\n$$C det A − $^{1}$exp ∫ d $^{d}$x d $^{d}$y Ja $_{ϕ}$( x )( A − $^{1}$) $^{ab}$( x, y ) J b $_{ϕ}$( y ) = ∫ [d ϕ ][d ϕ ] exp [ ∫ d $^{d}$x d $^{d}$y − ϕ $^{a}$( x ) A $^{ab}$( x, y ) ϕ $^{b}$( y ) + ∫ d $^{4}$x ( ϕ $^{a}$Ja $_{ϕ}$( x ) + ϕ $^{a}$( x ) J a $_{ϕ}$( x )) ] , (14) we observe that we can get rid of the inverse of the$$\n\n3\n\n$$exp ( − ∫ d $^{d}$xh$_{3}$ ( x ) = d ( N $^{2}$+1) ∏ i =1 ∫ [d ω ][d ω ][d ϕ ][d ϕ ] exp [ ∫ d $^{d}$x ∫ d $^{d}$y ( ϕ a $_{i}$( x ) M $^{ab}$( x, y ) ϕ b $_{i}$( y ) − ω a $_{i}$( x ) M $^{ab}$( x, y ) ω b $_{i}$( y ) + lim θ → 0 ∫ d $^{d}$x ( D a i ( x ) γ $^{2}$( x ) ϕ a $_{i}$( x ) + ( D a i ( x ) γ $^{2}$( x ) ϕ a $_{i}$( x ) ] . The new localized action thus becomes$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.46203558001855477, + "doc_id": "6db76d0a7f8a485592f9836c705dc8efb6bac66c6184fd63d4b51238ac4b1548", + "edit_distance": 0.4250141482739106, + "f1_score": 0.8886255924170616, + "meteor": 0.5913199147273647, + "precision": 0.9398496240601504, + "pred_md": "with ρ ab ( ) t ≡ 〈 e a | ˆ( ) ρ t | e b 〉 and ω ab = ( /epsilon1 a -/epsilon1 b ) / /planckover2pi1 . The first term on the right hand side of Eq. 5 describes the fully coherent dynamics in the absence of ˆ H sb and the second term describes the irreversible dynamics from the interaction with the phonon bath.\n\nCorrelations in bath-fluctuations on different sites [20] are taken into account by using the relation g n q g m ∗ q = g m n q g ∗ q = g 2 q e -R mn /R corr , where R mn ≡ | R mn | is the distance between the sites and R corr is the phonon correlation length [21].\n\nUsing this relation for the electron-phonon couplings, the cross-correlation C mn ( ω ) can now be written as,\n\n\n\nwhere the frequency correlation function C ω ( ) = 2 π n ω [ ( )+1]( J ω ( ) -J ( -ω )), with n ω ( ) the Bose-Einstein distribution and the spectral density of the bath J ω ( ) = ∑ q | g q | 2 ω δ ω 2 q ( -ω q ), where δ ω ( ) is the Dirac delta function.\n\nFor the Hamiltonian specified in Eq. 1, the Redfield tensor elements are given by\n\n\n\nwhere δ ij is the Kronecker delta and\n\n\n\n\n\nwith P denoting the Cauchy principal value of the integral and U na = 〈 s n | e a 〉 the transformation matrix elements relating the site basis {| s n 〉} and the excitonic basis {| e a 〉} . Since | e a 〉 = ∑ n U na | s n 〉 , then | U na | 2 can be interpreted as the contribution of the n -th site to the a -th eigenstate of ˆ H s .\n\nHereafter, we will focus on QDs at low temperature (10 K) as our prototypical experimental realization. We neglect possible inversion asymmetry of the crystal, and therefore the contribution of the piezoelectric coupling, and focus instead on the deformation potential coupling. As shown by Calarco et al. [22], the spectral density describing this coupling (in the absence of an external electric field) is given by\n\n\n\nwhere, Θ( ω ) is the Heaviside step function. We use typical values for GaAs QDs for our numerical simulations [23, 24], giving η = ( D e -D h ) 2 4 π ρu 2 5 /planckover2pi1 = 0 035 ps . 2 and\n\n2\n\nω c = √ 2 u /l 2 2 = 1 41 ps . -1 , where D e ( D h ) is the deformation coupling potential for electron (hole), u the speed of sound within the quantum dot, ρ its mass density and l the ground state localization length, assumed to be the same for electron and holes. We also assume a correlation length, R corr , of 3 nm.\n\nUsing Eqns. 7-9, the population transfer rates, k ab , between the eigenstates a → b is given by,\n\n\n\nThis equation is central to our insight into designing excitonic transfer. Though derived for a different regime, the form of Eq. 11 is similar to the widely used rate equation in Forster theory (incoherent limit), k Forster ab ∝ J 2 ab I ab , where J is the electronic coupling, and I is the spectral overlap integral [25]. Both equations are a product of two terms: one dealing primarily with the description of the system ( ζ in this paper or J 2 for Frster theory), and ano other largely depending on and arising from the systembath interaction ( C ω ( ) in this paper or I for Frster theo ory). Frster theory has been applied in fluorescence reso onance energy transfer (FRET) to design chromophores for biosensing assays [2, 26, 27] and was recently verified experimentally for semiconductor QDs [28]. We use the simple structure of Eq. 11 to gain microscopic and experimentally relevant insight into engineering directed and optimized EET.\n\nWhile C ω ( ab ) depends on the overlap of system eigenenergies with the spectral properties of the phonon bath (e.g., lattice vibrations, solvent, protein environment, etc.), ζ depends on the transformation matrix U in Eq. 9, determined by the relative magnitude of electronic couplings with respect to site energies, site connectivity, and spatial correlation between sites. The aim is then to maximize (minimize) the product of these two factors in Eq. 11 to favor (suppress) the desired rates.\n\nTo illustrate the applicability of Eq. 11, we choose two three-site examples to highlight the importance of the phonon bath interaction to achieve directed EET. Since multiplying a system Hamiltonian by a scalar does not change the maximum exciton transfer probability in the coherent limit, the distances and site energies for the two cases are chosen so that the Hamiltonians are related by a multiplicative factor (3 5 ˆ . H 1 s = ˆ H 2 s ). As a consequence, the ζ values are roughly the same for cases 1 and 2 (Table I); slight differences are introduced by the bath correlation term in Eq. 9. In the cases chosen, the fully coherent evolution gives a maximum probability of finding an excitation of 5% (1%) for site 1(2). Therefore, any difference between the two examples is a result of interaction with the environment.\n\nIn contrast to the ζ factors, the C ω ( ab ) values for cases 1 and 2 at 10 K differ by at least one order of magnitude due the position of the transition frequencies with respect to the spectral density (Table I). Any changes to the system Hamiltonian can affect C ω ( ab ). In our examples, the scalar factor mentioned above changes the C ω ( ab ) such that the largest population transfer rate is switched", + "recall": 0.8426966292134831, + "true_md": "2\n\nwith ρ$_{ab}$ ( t ) ≡ 〈 e$_{a}$ | ˆ ρ ( t ) | e$_{b}$ 〉 and ω$_{ab}$ = ( ϵ$_{a}$ − ϵ$_{b}$ ) / ℏ . The first term on the right hand side of Eq. 5 describes the fully coherent dynamics in the absence of ˆ H$_{sb}$ and the second term describes the irreversible dynamics from the interaction with the phonon bath.\n\nCorrelations in bath-fluctuations on different sites [20] are taken into account by using the relation g n $_{q}$g m ∗ q = g m q g n ∗ q = g 2 $_{q}$e − R mn /R corr , where R$_{mn}$ ≡ | R$_{mn}$ | is the dis- tance between the sites and R$_{corr}$ is the phonon correla- tion length [21].\n\nUsing this relation for the electron-phonon couplings, the cross-correlation C$_{mn}$ ( ω ) can now be written as,\n\nwhere the frequency correlation function C ( ω ) = 2 π [ n ( ω )+1]( J ( ω ) − J ( − ω )), with n ( ω ) the Bose-Einstein distribution and the spectral density of the bath J ( ω ) = ∑ $_{q}$| g$_{q}$ | $^{2}$ω2 $_{q}$δ ( ω − ω$_{q}$ ), where δ ( ω ) is the Dirac delta func- tion. For the Hamiltonian specified in Eq. 1, the Redfield\n\n∑ For the Hamiltonian specified in Eq. 1, the Redfield tensor elements are given by\n\nwhere δ$_{ij}$ is the Kronecker delta and\n\nwith P denoting the Cauchy principal value of the in- tegral and U$_{na}$ = 〈 s$_{n}$ | e$_{a}$ 〉 the transformation matrix el- ements relating the site basis {| s$_{n}$ 〉} and the excitonic basis {| e$_{a}$ 〉} . Since | e$_{a}$ 〉 = ∑ n U$_{na}$ | s$_{n}$ 〉 , then | U$_{na}$ | 2 can be interpreted as the contribution of the n -th site to the a -th eigenstate of ˆ H$_{s}$ .\n\nHereafter, we will focus on QDs at low temperature (10 K) as our prototypical experimental realization. We neglect possible inversion asymmetry of the crystal, and therefore the contribution of the piezoelectric coupling, and focus instead on the deformation potential coupling. As shown by Calarco et al. [22], the spectral density describing this coupling (in the absence of an external electric field) is given by\n\nwhere, Θ( ω ) is the Heaviside step function. We use typical values for GaAs QDs for our numerical simula- tions [23, 24], giving η = ( D e − D h ) 2 4 π $^{2}$ρu$^{5}$ℏ = 0 . 035 ps 2 and\n\nω$_{c}$ = √ 2 u $^{2}$/l2 = 1 . 41 ps − $^{1}$, where D$_{e}$ ( D$_{h}$ ) is the de- formation coupling potential for electron (hole), u the speed of sound within the quantum dot, ρ its mass den- sity and l the ground state localization length, assumed to be the same for electron and holes. We also assume a correlation length, R$_{corr}$ , of 3 nm.\n\nUsing Eqns. 7-9, the population transfer rates, k$_{ab}$ , be- tween the eigenstates a → b is given by,\n\nThis equation is central to our insight into designing exci- tonic transfer. Though derived for a different regime, the form of Eq. 11 is similar to the widely used rate equation in F¨ orster theory (incoherent limit), k Forster ab ∝ J 2 $_{ab}$I$_{ab}$ , where J is the electronic coupling, and I is the spectral overlap integral [25]. Both equations are a product of two terms: one dealing primarily with the description of the system ( ζ in this paper or J 2 for F¨ orster theory), and an- other largely depending on and arising from the system- bath interaction ( C ( ω ) in this paper or I for F¨ orster the- ory). F¨ orster theory has been applied in fluorescence res- onance energy transfer (FRET) to design chromophores for biosensing assays [2, 26, 27] and was recently verified experimentally for semiconductor QDs [28]. We use the simple structure of Eq. 11 to gain microscopic and exper- imentally relevant insight into engineering directed and optimized EET.\n\nWhile C ( ω$_{ab}$ ) depends on the overlap of system eigenenergies with the spectral properties of the phonon bath (e.g., lattice vibrations, solvent, protein environ- ment, etc.), ζ depends on the transformation matrix U in Eq. 9, determined by the relative magnitude of electronic couplings with respect to site energies, site connectivity, and spatial correlation between sites. The aim is then to maximize (minimize) the product of these two factors in Eq. 11 to favor (suppress) the desired rates.\n\nTo illustrate the applicability of Eq. 11, we choose two three-site examples to highlight the importance of the phonon bath interaction to achieve directed EET. Since multiplying a system Hamiltonian by a scalar does not change the maximum exciton transfer probability in the coherent limit, the distances and site energies for the two cases are chosen so that the Hamiltonians are related by a multiplicative factor (3 . 5 ˆ H 1 s = ˆ H 2 $_{s}$). As a conse- quence, the ζ values are roughly the same for cases 1 and 2 (Table I); slight differences are introduced by the bath correlation term in Eq. 9. In the cases chosen, the fully coherent evolution gives a maximum probability of finding an excitation of 5% (1%) for site 1(2). Therefore, any difference between the two examples is a result of interaction with the environment.\n\nIn contrast to the ζ factors, the C ( ω$_{ab}$ ) values for cases 1 and 2 at 10 K differ by at least one order of magnitude due the position of the transition frequencies with respect to the spectral density (Table I). Any changes to the system Hamiltonian can affect C ( ω$_{ab}$ ). In our examples, the scalar factor mentioned above changes the C ( ω$_{ab}$ ) such that the largest population transfer rate is switched\n\n$$J ( ω ) = Θ( ω ) ηω $^{3}$e − ω $^{2}$/ω2 c , (10)$$\n\n$$Γ$_{ab,cd}$( ω$_{dc}$ ) = 1 2 ζ$_{ab,cd}$C ( ω$_{dc}$ ) + i 2 π ζ$_{ab,cd}$ P (∫ ∞ −∞ C ( ω ) ω$_{dc}$ − ω d ω ) , (8)$$\n\n$$ζ$_{ab,cd}$ = ∑ n,m ( U − $^{1}$)$_{an}$ U$_{nb}$ ( U − $^{1}$)$_{cm}$ U$_{md}$e − R mn /R corr , (9)$$\n\n$$R$_{ab,cd}$ = Γ$_{db,ac}$( ω$_{ca}$ ) + Γ ∗ $_{ca,bd}$( ω$_{db}$ ) − δ$_{bd}$ ∑ e Γ$_{ae,ec}$( ω$_{ce}$ ) − δ$_{ac}$ ∑ e Γ ∗ $_{be,ed}$( ω$_{de}$ ) , (7)$$\n\n$$C$_{mn}$ ( ω ) = e − R mn /R corr C ( ω ) , (6)$$\n\n$$k$_{ab}$ = R$_{bb,aa}$ = ζ$_{ab,ba}$C ( ω$_{ab}$ ) . (11)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.47581403224636026, + "doc_id": "7b782f1632aa485d2256080a19586f7f0e10f99ded330558a5f3e743153bacf1", + "edit_distance": 0.507177033492823, + "f1_score": 0.9536423841059603, + "meteor": 0.860902660762569, + "precision": 0.9863013698630136, + "pred_md": "FIG. 1: Two cases of a three-site system are considered. a) Scaled schematic of system spacing and energy levels with details of variable site energies ( E n ) and intersite Forster coupling strengths ( J mn ). For QDs with transition dipole moments aligned perpendicular to R mn , J mn = 100 meV /R 3 mn , with R mn in nanometers [30]. b) Frequency correlation function for a super-ohmic spectral density. Energy basis transition frequencies for case 1 ( 2 ) are indicated by solid (dashed) vertical lines.\n\nFIG. 1: Two cases of a three-site system are considered. a) Scaled schematic of system spacing and energy levels with details of variable site energies ( E n ) and intersite Forster coupling strengths ( J mn ). For QDs with transition dipole moments aligned perpendicular to R mn , J mn = 100 meV /R 3 mn , with R mn in nanometers [30]. b) Frequency correlation function for a super-ohmic spectral density. Energy basis transition frequencies for case 1 ( 2 ) are indicated by solid (dashed) vertical lines.\n\n5", + "recall": 0.9230769230769231, + "true_md": "FIG. 1: Two cases of a three-site system are considered. a) Scaled schematic of system spacing and energy levels with details of variable site energies ( E n ) and intersite F¨ orster coupling strengths ( J mn ). For QDs with transition dipole moments aligned perpendicular to R mn , J mn = 100 meV /R 3 $_{mn}$, with R mn in nanometers [30]. b) Frequency correlation function for a super-ohmic spectral density. Energy basis transition frequencies for case 1 ( 2 ) are indicated by solid (dashed) vertical lines.\n\n5" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5099613091574565, + "doc_id": "609cf3517d1eddd66fdafe88ca7e04fd849e6ce5c73677f3edf2f17c11ca07be", + "edit_distance": 0.7213254035683943, + "f1_score": 0.9060150375939849, + "meteor": 0.4889626306197806, + "precision": 0.9488188976377953, + "pred_md": "on the CE trade-off curve, contradicting the optimality of this trade-off curve.\n\nThe next surface to consider is that formed by combining the CQ trade-off curve with the 'inverse' of the entanglement distribution protocol. Recall that the entanglement distribution protocol exploits a noiseless qubit channel to establish a shared noiseless ebit. Let ( C CQ ( s 2 ) , Q CQ ( s 2 ) , 0) denote a parametrization of all points on the CQ trade-off curve with respect to some parameter s 2 ∈ [0 , 1 / 2], and recall that each point on the trade-off curve has corresponding entropic quantities of the form ( I ( X B ,I ; ) ( A BX , 〉 ) 0). Then the surface formed by combining the CQ trade-off curve with the inverse of entanglement distribution is\n\n\n\nThis surface also forms an outer bound for the capacity region. Were it not so, then one could combine points outside it with entanglement distribution to outperform points on the CQ trade-off curve, contradicting the optimality of this trade-off curve.\n\nThe final surface to consider is the following regularization of the plane that (17) specifies:\n\n\n\nfor all n ≥ 1, where\n\n\n\nand ρ is a state of the form in (15). Lemma 1 below states that h ( N ⊗ n ) actually single-letterizes for any quantum channel N :\n\n\n\nso that the computation of the boundary h ( N ⊗ n ) /n is tractable. Its proof is a consequence of the singleletterization of the entanglement-assisted classical capacity [37], but we provide it in Appendix A for completeness.\n\nLemma 1 The plane in (20) admits a single-letter characterization for any noisy quantum channel N :\n\n\n\nThe above three surfaces all form outer bounds on the CQE capacity region, but is it clear that we can achieve points along the boundaries? To answer this question, we should consider the intersection of the first and second surfaces, found by solving the following equation for Q and E :\n\n\n\nUsing the entropic expressions for the trade-off curves and solving the above equation gives that all points along\n\n9\n\nthe intersection have entropic quantities of the following form:\n\n\n\nRef. [40] constructed a protocol, dubbed the 'classicallyenhanced father protocol,' that can achieve the above rates for CQE communication. Thus, by combining this protocol with super-dense coding and entanglement distribution, we can achieve all points inside the first and second surfaces with entanglement consumption below a certain rate. Finally, by combining this protocol with super-dense coding, entanglement distribution, and the wasting of entanglement, we can achieve all points that lie inside all three surfaces, and thus we can achieve the full CQE capacity region. We summarize these results as the following theorem.\n\nTheorem 1 Suppose the CQ and CE trade-off curves of a quantum channel N single-letterize. Then the full CQE capacity region of N single-letterizes:\n\n\n\nWe apply the above theorem in the next section. We first show that both the CQ and CE trade-off curves single-letterize for all Hadamard channels, and it then follows that the full CQE capacity region single-letterizes for these channels.\n\n## IV. SINGLE-LETTERIZATION OF THE CQ AND CE TRADE-OFF CURVES FOR HADAMARD CHANNELS\n\n## A. CQ Trade-off Curve\n\nFor the CQ region, we would like to maximize both the classical and quantum communication rates, but we cannot have both be simultaneously optimal. Thus, we must trade between these resources. If we are willing to reduce the quantum communication rate by a little, then we can communicate more classical information and vice versa.\n\nOur main theorem below states and proves that the following function generates points on the CQ trade-off curve for Hadamard channels:\n\n\n\nwhere the state ρ is of the form in (15) and λ ≥ 1.\n\nTheorem 2 For any fixed λ ≥ 1 , the function in (21) leads to a point\n\n\n\non the CQ trade-off curve, provided ρ maximizes (21).", + "recall": 0.8669064748201439, + "true_md": "9\n\nthe intersection have entropic quantities of the following form:\n\non the CE trade-off curve, contradicting the optimality of this trade-off curve.\n\nThe next surface to consider is that formed by com- bining the CQ trade-off curve with the “inverse” of the entanglement distribution protocol. Recall that the entanglement distribution protocol exploits a noiseless qubit channel to establish a shared noiseless ebit. Let ( C$_{CQ}$ ( s$_{2}$ ) , Q$_{CQ}$ ( s$_{2}$ ) , 0) denote a parametrization of all points on the CQ trade-off curve with respect to some parameter s$_{2}$ ∈ [0 , 1 / 2], and recall that each point on the trade-off curve has corresponding entropic quantities of the form ( I ( X ; B ) , I ( A 〉 BX ) , 0). Then the surface formed by combining the CQ trade-off curve with the inverse of entanglement distribution is\n\nRef. [40] constructed a protocol, dubbed the “classically- enhanced father protocol,” that can achieve the above rates for CQE communication. Thus, by combining this protocol with super-dense coding and entanglement dis- tribution, we can achieve all points inside the first and second surfaces with entanglement consumption below a certain rate. Finally, by combining this protocol with super-dense coding, entanglement distribution, and the wasting of entanglement, we can achieve all points that lie inside all three surfaces, and thus we can achieve the full CQE capacity region. We summarize these results as the following theorem.\n\nThis surface also forms an outer bound for the capacity region. Were it not so, then one could combine points outside it with entanglement distribution to outperform points on the CQ trade-off curve, contradicting the opti- mality of this trade-off curve.\n\n$$( I ( X ; B ) , 1 2 I ( A ; B | X ) , 1 2 I ( A ; E | X )$^{)}$ .$$\n\n$${ ( C$_{CQ}$ ( s$_{2}$ ) , Q$_{CQ}$ ( s$_{2}$ ) + E, E ) : s$_{2}$ ∈ [0 , 1 / 2] , E ≥ 0 } .$$\n\n$$C + 2 Q ≤ 1 n h $^{(}$N ⊗ n $^{)}$, (20)$$\n\n$$C$_{CQE}$ ( N ) = C (1) $_{CQE}$( N ) .$$\n\n$$h $^{(}$N ⊗ n ) = nh ( N ) ,$$\n\n$$h ( N ) ≡ max$_{ρ}$ I ( AX ; B ) ,$$\n\nTheorem 1 Suppose the CQ and CE trade-off curves of a quantum channel N single-letterize. Then the full CQE capacity region of N single-letterizes:\n\nThe final surface to consider is the following regular- ization of the plane that (17) specifies:\n\nfor all n ≥ 1, where\n\nand ρ is a state of the form in (15). Lemma 1 below states that h ( N ⊗ $^{n}$) actually single-letterizes for any quantum channel N :\n\nWe apply the above theorem in the next section. We first show that both the CQ and CE trade-off curves single-letterize for all Hadamard channels, and it then follows that the full CQE capacity region single-letterizes for these channels.\n\nso that the computation of the boundary h ( N ⊗ $^{n}$) /n is tractable. Its proof is a consequence of the single- letterization of the entanglement-assisted classical capac- ity [37], but we provide it in Appendix A for complete- ness.\n\nFor the CQ region, we would like to maximize both the classical and quantum communication rates, but we cannot have both be simultaneously optimal. Thus, we must trade between these resources. If we are willing to reduce the quantum communication rate by a little, then we can communicate more classical information and vice versa.\n\nLemma 1 The plane in (20) admits a single-letter char- acterization for any noisy quantum channel N :\n\nOur main theorem below states and proves that the following function generates points on the CQ trade-off curve for Hadamard channels:\n\nThe above three surfaces all form outer bounds on the CQE capacity region, but is it clear that we can achieve points along the boundaries? To answer this question, we should consider the intersection of the first and second surfaces, found by solving the following equation for Q and E :\n\n## IV. SINGLE-LETTERIZATION OF THE CQ AND CE TRADE-OFF CURVES FOR HADAMARD CHANNELS\n\n## A. CQ Trade-off Curve\n\n$$f$_{λ}$ ( N ) ≡ max$_{ρ}$ I ( X ; B )$_{ρ}$ + λI ( A 〉 BX )$_{ρ}$ , (21)$$\n\n$$h $^{(}$N ⊗ n ) = nh ( N ) .$$\n\n$$( I ( X ; B )$_{ρ}$ , I ( A 〉 BX )$_{ρ}$)$$\n\n$$( C$_{CE}$ ( s$_{1}$ ) − 2 Q, Q, E$_{CE}$ ( s$_{1}$ ) − Q ) = ( C$_{CQ}$ ( s$_{2}$ ) , Q$_{CQ}$ ( s$_{2}$ ) + E, E ) .$$\n\nwhere the state ρ is of the form in (15) and λ ≥ 1.\n\nTheorem 2 For any fixed λ ≥ 1 , the function in (21) leads to a point\n\non the CQ trade-off curve, provided ρ maximizes (21).\n\nUsing the entropic expressions for the trade-off curves and solving the above equation gives that all points along" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.34341467695941874, + "doc_id": "f0acb0c88c9cd486db2fcf7c74c46deaf0b105ab567ba422c795a9dd0ff60b6c", + "edit_distance": 0.7603748326639893, + "f1_score": 0.8717948717948718, + "meteor": 0.32421698628460893, + "precision": 0.9289617486338798, + "pred_md": "FIG. 4: (color online) Probability of particle reflection R k ( ) for (a) an amplifying impurity site [Im( E a ) > 0], and (b) an absorbing impurity site [Im( E a ) < 0] for κ /κ a 0 = 1 and Re( E a ) = 0. Curves 1, 2 and 3 correspond to | Im( E a ) | /κ a = 1 3, 2/3 and 1, respectively. According to Eqs.(54) and (55), a / spectral singularity occurs at k = π/ 2 (i.e., E 0 = -2 κ 0 cos k = 0) for | Im( E a ) | /κ a = 1 (curve 3)\n\nFIG. 4: (color online) Probability of particle reflection R k ( ) for (a) an amplifying impurity site [Im( E a ) > 0], and (b) an absorbing impurity site [Im( E a ) < 0] for κ /κ a 0 = 1 and Re( E a ) = 0. Curves 1, 2 and 3 correspond to | Im( E a ) | /κ a = 1 3, 2/3 and 1, respectively. According to Eqs.(54) and (55), a / spectral singularity occurs at k = π/ 2 (i.e., E 0 = -2 κ 0 cos k = 0) for | Im( E a ) | /κ a = 1 (curve 3)\n\n.\n\nFIG. 5: (color online) Same as Fig.4, but for for κ /κ a 0 = √ 2 and Re( E a ) = 0. Curves 1, 2 and 3 correspond to | Im( E a ) | /κ a = 2 3, / 4/3 and 2, respectively. According to Eq.(57), there are two spectral singularities, corresponding to the energies E 0 = ± [4 κ 2 0 -Im ( 2 E a )] 1 / 2 , which coalesce at | Im( E a ) | /κ a = 2 (curve 3).\n\nFIG. 5: (color online) Same as Fig.4, but for for κ /κ a 0 = √ 2 and Re( E a ) = 0. Curves 1, 2 and 3 correspond to | Im( E a ) | /κ a = 2 3, / 4/3 and 2, respectively. According to Eq.(57), there are two spectral singularities, corresponding to the energies E 0 = ± [4 κ 2 0 -Im ( 2 E a )] 1 / 2 , which coalesce at | Im( E a ) | /κ a = 2 (curve 3).\n\nand\n\n\n\nis the spectral reflection coefficient (see, for instance, [37]). Note that c n ( ) t is given by the superposition of two traveling waves, a regressive wave exp[ -ikn -iE k t ( ) ] that propagates along decreasing values of n , and a progressive wave exp[ ikn -iE k t ( ) ] that propagates in the opposite direction, i.e. which is reflected from the lattice boundary [49]. The probability of reflection from the lattice boundary is given by\n\n\n\nIn the Hermitian limit (Im( E a ) = 0), one has R k ( ) = 1, i.e. the incident wave is completely reflected from the lattice boundary. This is merely a consequence of conservation of the particle probability in the scattering process. Conversely, for a complex-valued energy E a of the impurity site, one has R k ( ) ≤ 1 for Im( E a ) < 0, i.e. for an ab-\n\nrbing potential, and R k ( ) ≥ 1 for Im( E a ) > 0, i.e. for an amplifying potential. In particular, for Im( E a ) > 0 the reflection probability R k ( ) goes to infinity at wave numbers k = k 0 (with 0 ≤ k 0 ≤ π ) that satisfy simulta-\n\n9\n\nTo analyze the reflection properties of the lattice shown in Fig.3, let us expand the state vector | ψ t ( ) 〉 as\n\n\n\nwhere | c n ( ) t | 2 is the occupation probability of site | n 〉 and | c a ( ) t | 2 the occupation probability of the boundary impurity site | a 〉 . From Eqs.(3) and (63), it follows that the occupation amplitudes c n and c a satisfy the following coupled equations\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nPlane wave solutions to Eqs.(65-67) with wave number (momentum) k (0 ≤ k ≤ π ), corresponding to eigenstates of H with energy E k ( ) = -2 κ 0 cos k , are of the form c n ( ) = ¯ t c n ( k ) exp( -iE k t ( ) ), c a ( ) = ¯ ( t c a k ) exp( -iE k t ( ) ), where\n\n\n\n", + "recall": 0.821256038647343, + "true_md": "9\n\nTo analyze the reflection properties of the lattice shown in Fig.3, let us expand the state vector | ψ ( t ) 〉 as\n\nwhere | c$_{n}$ ( t ) | 2 is the occupation probability of site | n 〉 and | c$_{a}$ ( t ) | 2 the occupation probability of the boundary impurity site | a 〉 . From Eqs.(3) and (63), it follows that the occupation amplitudes c$_{n}$ and c$_{a}$ satisfy the following coupled equations\n\nPlane wave solutions to Eqs.(65-67) with wave number (momentum) k (0 ≤ k ≤ π ), corresponding to eigenstates of H with energy E ( k ) = − 2 κ$_{0}$ cos k , are of the form c$_{n}$ ( t ) = ¯ c$_{n}$ ( k ) exp( − iE ( k ) t ), c$_{a}$ ( t ) = ¯ c$_{a}$ ( k ) exp( − iE ( k ) t ), where\n\nFIG. 4: (color online) Probability of particle reflection R ( k ) for (a) an amplifying impurity site [Im( E$_{a}$ ) > 0], and (b) an absorbing impurity site [Im( E$_{a}$ ) < 0] for κ$_{a}$/κ 0 = 1 and Re( E$_{a}$ ) = 0. Curves 1, 2 and 3 correspond to | Im( E$_{a}$ ) | /κ$_{a}$ = 1 / 3, 2/3 and 1, respectively. According to Eqs.(54) and (55), a spectral singularity occurs at k = π/ 2 (i.e., E 0 = − 2 κ 0 cos k = 0) for | Im( E$_{a}$ ) | /κ$_{a}$ = 1 (curve 3) .\n\n$$| ψ ( t ) 〉 = c$_{a}$ ( t ) | a 〉 + ∞ ∑ n =1 c$_{n}$ ( t ) | n 〉 (64)$$\n\n$$i dc$_{n}$ dt = − κ$_{0}$ ( c$_{n}$$_{+1}$ + c$_{n}$$_{−}$$_{1}$ ) n ≥ 2 (65) dc$_{1}$$$\n\n$$− ≥ i dc$_{1}$ dt = − κ$_{0}$c$_{2}$ − κ$_{a}$c$_{a}$ (66) dc$_{a}$$$\n\n$$− − i dc$_{a}$ dt = − κ$_{a}$c$_{1}$ + E$_{a}$c$_{a}$. (67)$$\n\n$$¯ c$_{n}$ ( k ) = exp[ − ik ( n − 1)] + r ( k ) exp[ ik ( n − 1)] (68) ¯ c$_{a}$ ( k ) = κ$_{0}$ [exp( ik ) + r exp( − ik )] (69)$$\n\n$$− − − ¯ c$_{a}$ ( k ) = κ$_{0}$ κ$_{a}$ [exp( ik ) + r exp( − ik )] (69)$$\n\nand\n\n$$r ( k ) = − κ 2 a − κ 2 $_{0}$(2 cos k + E$_{a}$/κ$_{0}$ ) exp( ik ) κ 2 a κ 2 $_{0}$(2 cos k + E$_{a}$/κ$_{0}$ ) exp( − ik ) (70)$$\n\nis the spectral reflection coefficient (see, for instance, [37]). Note that c$_{n}$ ( t ) is given by the superposition of two traveling waves, a regressive wave exp[ − ikn − iE ( k ) t ] that propagates along decreasing values of n , and a pro- gressive wave exp[ ikn − iE ( k ) t ] that propagates in the opposite direction, i.e. which is reflected from the lat- tice boundary [49]. The probability of reflection from the lattice boundary is given by\n\nFIG. 5: (color online) Same as Fig.4, but for for κ$_{a}$/κ 0 = √$_{2 and Re(}$$\\_{E}$$_{a}$$\\_{) = 0.}$ Curves 1, 2 and 3 correspond to | Im( E$\\_{a}$ ) | /κ$\\_{a}$ = 2 / 3, 4/3 and 2, respectively. According to Eq.(57), there are two spectral singularities, corresponding to the energies E 0 = ± [4 κ 2 0 − Im $^{2}$( E$\\_{a}$ )] 1 / $^{2}$, which coalesce at | Im( E$\\_{a}$ ) | /κ$\\_{a}$ = 2 (curve 3).\n\n$$R ( k ) = | r ( k ) | 2 = [( κ 2 a − 2 κ 2 $_{0}$) cos k − κ$_{0}$ Re( E$_{a}$ )] 2 + [ κ 2 $_{a}$sin k + κ$_{0}$ Im( E$_{a}$ )] 2 [( κ 2 a 2 κ 2 $_{0}$) cos k κ$_{0}$ Re( E$_{a}$ )] 2 + [ κ 2 $_{a}$sin k − κ$_{0}$ Im( E$_{a}$ )] 2 (71)$$\n\nsorbing potential, and R ( k ) ≥ 1 for Im( E$_{a}$ ) > 0, i.e. for an amplifying potential. In particular, for Im( E$_{a}$ ) > 0 the reflection probability R ( k ) goes to infinity at wave numbers k = k$_{0}$ (with 0 ≤ k$_{0}$ ≤ π ) that satisfy simulta-\n\nIn the Hermitian limit (Im( E$_{a}$ ) = 0), one has R ( k ) = 1, i.e. the incident wave is completely reflected from the lat- tice boundary. This is merely a consequence of conserva- tion of the particle probability in the scattering process. Conversely, for a complex-valued energy E$_{a}$ of the impu- rity site, one has R ( k ) ≤ 1 for Im( E$_{a}$ ) < 0, i.e. for an ab-" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.22523647991604154, + "doc_id": "c181b0c14e126724c4df21a5a367cee7cb1ad996479d5f53ebce9822f7caa350", + "edit_distance": 0.760578468130691, + "f1_score": 0.8730769230769231, + "meteor": 0.27675218402435503, + "precision": 0.9458333333333333, + "pred_md": "Upon dividing both sides by PQ , (36) becomes\n\n\n\nfrom which it follows that\n\n\n\nTherefore, there is a common separation constant a such that\n\n\n\nand\n\n\n\nCorrespondingly, P and Q must satisfy the ordinary linear differential equations\n\n\n\n\n\nwhere\n\n\n\nEquation (40b) for Q is called the Mathieu equation, and Equation (40a) for P is called the modified Mathieu equation. For our purposes, we will need solutions Q v ( ) of (40b) that are periodic with period 2 π . Such solutions exist only for certain characteristic values of the separation constant a . These values are denoted a n ( q ) for n = 0 1 2 3 , , , , · · · and b n ( q ) for n = 1 2 3 , , , · · · . The solutions associated with the separation constants a = a n ( q ) are denoted ce n ( v, q ). They are even functions of v and, in the small q limit, are proportional to the functions cos( nv ). The solutions associated with the separation constants a = b n ( q ) are denoted se n ( v, q ). They are odd functions of v and, in the small q limit, are proportional to the functions sin( nv ). The functions ce n ( v, q ) and se n ( v, q ) form a complete orthogonal set over the interval v ∈ [0 , 2 π ] and are normalized so that\n\n\n\nWith regard to the solutions of the modified Mathieu equation, note that (40b) is transformed into (40a) under v → iu . As a result, corresponding (real-valued) solutions to (40a) are defined by Ce n ( u, q ) = ce n ( iu, q ) and Se n ( u, q ) = -i se m ( iu, q ). We refer the reader to [3, 4] and [8] for a detailed treatment of the Mathieu functions and their properties.\n\n8\n\n## 4. Elliptic Cylinder Harmonic Expansion and On-Axis Gradients\n\nThe stage is now set to describe the expansion of any harmonic function ψ in terms of Mathieu functions. The general harmonic function that is analytic in x and y near the origin can be written in the coordinates (24) in the form\n\n\n\nwhere the functions c n ( k ) and s n ( k ) are arbitrary. We will call (42) an elliptic cylinder harmonic expansion.\n\nTo exploit this expansion, suppose the magnetic field B ( x, y, z ) is interpolated onto the surface u = U of an elliptic cylinder using values at the grid points near the surface. See Fig. 5. Let us employ the notation B ( x, y, z ) = B ( u, v, z ) so that the magnetic field on the surface can be written as B ( U, v, z ). Next, from the values on the surface, compute B u ( U, v, z ), the component of B ( x, y, z ) normal to the surface. Our aim will be to determine the on-axis gradients from a knowledge of B u ( U, v, z ). At this point we note that the functions exp( ikz )se n ( v, q ) and exp( ikz )ce n ( v, q ) form a complete set over the surface of the elliptical cylinder.\n\nLet us begin by solving (32a) for ( ∂ψ/∂u ). We find, using (26), the result,\n\n\n\nWe see that the right side of (43) is a well-behaved function F u, v, z ( ) whose values are known for u = U ,\n\n\n\nMoreover, using the representation (42) in (43) and (44), we may also write\n\n\n\nNext multiply both sides of (45) by exp( -ik z ' ) and integrate over z . So doing gives the result\n\n", + "recall": 0.8107142857142857, + "true_md": "4. Elliptic Cylinder Harmonic Expansion and On-Axis Gradients\n\nThe stage is now set to describe the expansion of any harmonic function ψ in terms of Mathieu functions. The general harmonic function that is analytic in x and y near the origin can be written in the coordinates (24) in the form\n\nUpon dividing both sides by P Q , (36) becomes\n\nfrom which it follows that\n\nTherefore, there is a common separation constant a such that\n\nand\n\nCorrespondingly, P and Q must satisfy the ordinary lin- ear differential equations\n\nwhere\n\nwhere the functions c$_{n}$ ( k ) and s$_{n}$ ( k ) are arbitrary. We will call (42) an elliptic cylinder harmonic expansion.\n\nTo exploit this expansion, suppose the magnetic field B ( x, y, z ) is interpolated onto the surface u = U of an elliptic cylinder using values at the grid points near the surface. See Fig. 5. Let us employ the notation B ( x, y, z ) = B ( u, v, z ) so that the magnetic field on the surface can be written as B ( U, v, z ). Next, from the values on the surface, compute B$_{u}$ ( U, v, z ), the compo- nent of B ( x, y, z ) normal to the surface. Our aim will be to determine the on-axis gradients from a knowledge of B$_{u}$ ( U, v, z ). At this point we note that the functions exp( ikz )se$_{n}$( v, q ) and exp( ikz )ce$_{n}$( v, q ) form a complete set over the surface of the elliptical cylinder.\n\nLet us begin by solving (32a) for ( ∂ψ/∂u ). We find, using (26), the result,\n\nEquation (40b) for Q is called the Mathieu equation, and Equation (40a) for P is called the modified Mathieu equation. For our purposes, we will need solutions Q ( v ) of (40b) that are periodic with period 2 π . Such solutions exist only for certain characteristic values of the sepa- ration constant a . These values are denoted a$_{n}$ ( q ) for n = 0 , 1 , 2 , 3 , · · · and b$_{n}$ ( q ) for n = 1 , 2 , 3 , · · · . The solu- tions associated with the separation constants a = a$_{n}$ ( q ) are denoted ce$_{n}$( v, q ). They are even functions of v and, in the small q limit, are proportional to the functions cos( nv ). The solutions associated with the separation constants a = b$_{n}$ ( q ) are denoted se$_{n}$( v, q ). They are odd functions of v and, in the small q limit, are proportional to the functions sin( nv ). The functions ce$_{n}$( v, q ) and se$_{n}$( v, q ) form a complete orthogonal set over the interval v ∈ [0 , 2 π ] and are normalized so that\n\nWith regard to the solutions of the modified Mathieu equation, note that (40b) is transformed into (40a) under v → iu . As a result, corresponding (real-valued) solu- tions to (40a) are defined by Ce$_{n}$( u, q ) = ce$_{n}$( iu, q ) and Se$_{n}$( u, q ) = − i se$_{m}$( iu, q ). We refer the reader to [3, 4] and [8] for a detailed treatment of the Mathieu functions and their properties.\n\nNext multiply both sides of (45) by exp( − ik $^{′}$z ) and inte- grate over z . So doing gives the result\n\nMoreover, using the representation (42) in (43) and (44), we may also write\n\nWe see that the right side of (43) is a well-behaved func- tion F ( u, v, z ) whose values are known for u = U ,\n\n$$1 2 π ∫ ∞ −∞ dz e − $^{ikz}$F ( U, v, z ) = ∞ ∑ n =0 c$_{n}$ ( k )Ce ′ $_{n}$( U, q ) ce$_{n}$( v, q ) + ∞ ∑ n =1 s$_{n}$ ( k )Se ′ $_{n}$( U, q ) se$_{n}$( v, q ) . (46)$$\n\n$$∫ 2 π 0 dv ce$_{m}$( v, q ) ce$_{n}$( v, q ) = πδ$_{mn}$, (41a)$$\n\n$$∫ 2 π 0 dv se$_{m}$( v, q ) se$_{n}$( v, q ) = πδ$_{mn}$, (41b)$$\n\n$$∫ 2 π 0 dv ce$_{m}$( v, q ) se$_{n}$( v, q ) = 0 . (41c)$$\n\n$$F ( U, v, z ) = ∞ ∑ n =0 ∫ ∞ −∞ dk c$_{n}$ ( k ) e $^{ikz}$Ce ′ $_{n}$( U, q ) ce$_{n}$( v, q ) + ∞ ∑ n =1 ∫ ∞ −∞ dk s$_{n}$ ( k ) e $^{ikz}$Se ′ $_{n}$( U, q ) se$_{n}$( v, q ) . (45)$$\n\n$$F ( U, v, z ) = f (sinh U cos v ) B$_{x}$ ( U, v, z ) + f (cosh U sin v ) B$_{y}$ ( U, v, z ) . (44)$$\n\n$$( ∂ψ/∂u ) = f [cosh $^{2}$( u ) − cos $^{2}$( v )] 1 / $^{2}$B$_{u}$ (43) = f (sinh u cos v ) B$_{x}$ + f (cosh u sin v ) B$_{y}$.$$\n\n$$q = − k $^{2}$f$^{2}$/ 4 . (40c)$$\n\n$$d $^{2}$Q/dv2 + [ a − 2 q cos(2 v )] Q = 0 , (40b)$$\n\n$$d $^{2}$P/du2 − [ a − 2 q cosh(2 u )] P = 0 , (40a)$$\n\n$$− (1 /Q )( ∂$_{v}$ ) $^{2}$Q − ( k $^{2}$f$^{2}$/ 4)[2 cos(2 v )] = a. (39b)$$\n\n$$(1 /P )( ∂$_{u}$ ) $^{2}$P − ( k $^{2}$f$^{2}$/ 4)[2 cosh(2 u )] = a (39a)$$\n\n$$ψ ( u, v, z ) = ∞ ∑ n =0 ∫ ∞ −∞ dk c$_{n}$ ( k ) e $^{ikz}$Ce$_{n}$ ( u, q ) ce$_{n}$( v, q ) + ∞ ∑ n =1 ∫ ∞ −∞ dk s$_{n}$ ( k ) e $^{ikz}$Se$_{n}$ ( u, q ) se$_{n}$( v, q ) (42)$$\n\n$$(1 /P )( ∂$_{u}$ ) $^{2}$P − ( k $^{2}$f$^{2}$/ 4)[2 cosh(2 u )] = (38) − (1 /Q )( ∂$_{v}$ ) $^{2}$Q − ( k $^{2}$f$^{2}$/ 4)[2 cos(2 v )] .$$\n\n$$(1 /P )( ∂$_{u}$ ) $^{2}$P + (1 /Q )( ∂$_{v}$ ) $^{2}$Q = ( k $^{2}$f$^{2}$/ 4)[2 cosh(2 u ) − 2 cos(2 v )] , (37)$$\n\n8" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7113452691623262, + "doc_id": "242ee73514175b0e3a1bf968263fe7485bb637dc1f5b97c45b806bfbf6a5e9a7", + "edit_distance": 0.34444444444444444, + "f1_score": 0.8924050632911392, + "meteor": 0.807681862538742, + "precision": 0.9276315789473685, + "pred_md": "✄\n\n✝\n\n✂\n\nFIG. 2: (Color online): (a) and (b) display the transfer characteristic of an FET device made by spin-coating. (c) presents the histogram, I ON ( -©-) and Transconductance ( -/triangle -) versus Log 10 ( I ON /I OFF ) for sample S and M. Lines represent the linear fit\n\nFIG. 2: (Color online): (a) and (b) display the transfer characteristic of an FET device made by spin-coating. (c) presents the histogram, I ON ( -©-) and Transconductance ( -/triangle -) versus Log 10 ( I ON /I OFF ) for sample S and M. Lines represent the linear fit\n\nand homogenized by sonication (1 hour using a waterbath and 5 minutes using a tip sonicators). Then, this mixture was centrifugated for 5 ∼ 120 minutes using either a desktop centrifuge (angle rotor type) or an ultracentrifuge (swing rotor type). Next, the upper 80 % of the supernatant solution was collected. To recover only the SWNTs while washing out the PFO, the supernatant solution was filtered through 0.1 µ m Teflon filter and rinsed with toluene several time (until the characteristic optical absorption band of PFO at 385nm completely disappears from the filtrate). Finally, this filter was soaked in organic solvent (such as Toluene or N-Methyl-2-pyrrolidone (NMP)) and subjected to mild sonication. We shall focus on three types of SWNTs processable solutions centrifugated at 10000 g for 15 min (labeled L), 250000 g for 30 min (labeled M) and 250000 g for 60 min (labeled S), with all the other processing parameters identical. These samples were characterized by optical absorption, Raman and electrical measurements. To exclude residues of polymers and solvents, FET devices were annealed at 300-400 C for 1 hour in vacuum or · nitrogen. Note that the transmission electron microscopy (TEM) reveals significant amount of catalytic particles in sample L but no detectable traces in sample M and S.\n\nFigure 1a displays the optical absorption spectra of L, M and S samples in toluene. Sharp peaks in the range\n\n2\n\nFIG. 3: (Color online): (a) and (b) show the transfer characteristic of an FET device made by electrophoresis. (c) displays the AFM image of a s-SWNTs network. (d) shows I ON ( -© -) and Transconductance ( -/triangle ) versus Log 10 ( I ON /I OFF ).\n\nFIG. 3: (Color online): (a) and (b) show the transfer characteristic of an FET device made by electrophoresis. (c) displays the AFM image of a s-SWNTs network. (d) shows I ON ( -© -) and Transconductance ( -/triangle ) versus Log 10 ( I ON /I OFF ).\n\n1100-1400 and 600-900 nm, labeled S 11 and S 22 , corresponds to the first and to the second optical transitions in s-SWNTs, respectively. Whereas, less resolved peaks in the range 500-600 nm, labeled M 11 , are assigned to optical transitions from m-SWNTs. The intensity of these features as well as the absorption background decrease in the following sequence L, M and S. It is worth noticing that the optical absorption spectrum of sample S is dominated by S 11 and S 22 features (s-SWNTs) without detectable traces of M 11 peaks (m-SWNTs). To ascertain this result, the Raman spectra were recorded at 514.5 nm, which resonantly probes m-SWNTs. We observed that the Radial Breathing Mode (RBM) around 270 cm -1 (mSWNTs) normalized to the RBM mode around 190 cm -1 (s-SWNTs) decreases from L to M, and eventually vanishes in sample S (Fig. 1b). It is essential to corroborated those results by electrical measurements.\n\nThe electrical properties were investigated in field effect configuration. A few droplets of SWNTs solutions were spin-coated on Si/SiO 2 wafer, with pre-patterned drain and source electrodes (Cr/Au) and Si as a back gate electrode. Figure 1c present the drain current I D versus gate bias V G with drain-source bias V DS =-14 V. The sample S presents a sizable gate bias dependence characteristic of a p-type semiconductor behavior, whereas sample M exhibits a weaker gate effect and higher conductivity typical of metallic behavior. Similar results", + "recall": 0.8597560975609756, + "true_md": "2\n\nFIG. 3: (Color online): (a) and (b) show the transfer charac- teristic of an FET device made by electrophoresis. (c) displays the AFM image of a s-SWNTs network. (d) shows I ON ( − ○ − ) and Transconductance ( − △ − ) versus Log 10 ( I ON /I OFF ).\n\nFIG. 2: (Color online): (a) and (b) display the transfer char- acteristic of an FET device made by spin-coating. (c) presents the histogram, I ON ( − ○ − ) and Transconductance ( − △ − ) versus Log 10 ( I ON /I OFF ) for sample S and M. Lines represent the linear fit\n\nand homogenized by sonication (1 hour using a water- bath and 5 minutes using a tip sonicators). Then, this mixture was centrifugated for 5 ∼ 120 minutes using ei- ther a desktop centrifuge (angle rotor type) or an ultra- centrifuge (swing rotor type). Next, the upper 80 % of the supernatant solution was collected. To recover only the SWNTs while washing out the PFO, the super- natant solution was filtered through 0.1 µ m Teflon filter and rinsed with toluene several time (until the charac- teristic optical absorption band of PFO at 385nm com- pletely disappears from the filtrate). Finally, this fil- ter was soaked in organic solvent (such as Toluene or N-Methyl-2-pyrrolidone (NMP)) and subjected to mild sonication. We shall focus on three types of SWNTs pro- cessable solutions centrifugated at 10000 g for 15 min (la- beled L), 250000 g for 30 min (labeled M) and 250000 g for 60 min (labeled S), with all the other processing pa- rameters identical. These samples were characterized by optical absorption, Raman and electrical measurements. To exclude residues of polymers and solvents, FET de- vices were annealed at 300-400 ◦ C for 1 hour in vacuum or nitrogen. Note that the transmission electron microscopy (TEM) reveals significant amount of catalytic particles in sample L but no detectable traces in sample M and S.\n\nFigure 1a displays the optical absorption spectra of L, M and S samples in toluene. Sharp peaks in the range\n\n1100-1400 and 600-900 nm, labeled S$_{11}$ and S$_{22}$, corre- sponds to the first and to the second optical transitions in s-SWNTs, respectively. Whereas, less resolved peaks in the range 500-600 nm, labeled M$_{11}$, are assigned to op- tical transitions from m-SWNTs. The intensity of these features as well as the absorption background decrease in the following sequence L, M and S. It is worth notic- ing that the optical absorption spectrum of sample S is dominated by S$_{11}$ and S$_{22}$ features (s-SWNTs) without detectable traces of M$_{11}$ peaks (m-SWNTs). To ascertain this result, the Raman spectra were recorded at 514.5 nm, which resonantly probes m-SWNTs. We observed that the Radial Breathing Mode (RBM) around 270 cm $_{−}$1 (m- SWNTs) normalized to the RBM mode around 190 cm $_{−}$1 (s-SWNTs) decreases from L to M, and eventually van- ishes in sample S (Fig. 1b). It is essential to corroborated those results by electrical measurements.\n\nThe electrical properties were investigated in field ef- fect configuration. A few droplets of SWNTs solutions were spin-coated on Si/SiO$_{2}$ wafer, with pre-patterned drain and source electrodes (Cr/Au) and Si as a back gate electrode. Figure 1c present the drain current I$_{D}$ ver- sus gate bias V$_{G}$ with drain-source bias V$_{DS}$ =-14 V. The sample S presents a sizable gate bias dependence char- acteristic of a p-type semiconductor behavior, whereas sample M exhibits a weaker gate effect and higher con- ductivity typical of metallic behavior. Similar results" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5660841838456705, + "doc_id": "a81418c566234229af753366c2e49b67fd517263c4b5cbcaa25e0a554458da13", + "edit_distance": 0.743103448275862, + "f1_score": 0.8387096774193549, + "meteor": 0.4810935289441934, + "precision": 0.9182156133828996, + "pred_md": "where | + 〉 and |-〉 are the eigenstates of the Pauli X matrix and | + Y 〉 and |-Y 〉 are the eigenstates of the Pauli Y matrix. The representation of the complementary channel with unit rank Kraus operators explicitly demonstrates that it is entanglement-breaking (as first observed with a positive partial transpose argument in Ref. [30]), and the other arguments in Ref. [30] demonstrate that every 1 → N cloning channel is entanglementbreaking. Therefore, a 1 → N cloning channel is in the class of Hadamard channels.\n\n## 5. Unruh channels\n\nThe Unruh channel is a natural channel to consider in the context of quantum field theory [35]. The output of the Unruh channel is the quantum state detected by a uniformly accelerated observer when the input is a dualrail photonic qubit prepared by a Minkowski observer. The mathematical structure of the output of an Unruh channel N U is an infinite-dimensional block-diagonal density matrix, where the N th block is an instance of a 1 → N cloning channel:\n\n\n\nwhere\n\n\n\nthe 'acceleration parameter' z ∈ [0 , 1) is a strictly increasing function of acceleration, ∆ l -1 ≡ ( l -1) l/ 2, and S l is the output of a 1 → ( l -1) cloning channel. The complementary channel N c U is similar, with S l replaced by S c l , the complementary channel of a 1 → ( l -1) cloning channel.\n\n## III. REVIEW OF CAPACITY REGIONS\n\nWe review several trade-off capacity regions that have appeared in the quantum Shannon theory literature. We first review the Devetak-Shor result for the classicallyenhanced quantum (CQ) capacity region [31]. We then review Shor's results on the entanglement-assisted classical (CE) capacity region [39], followed by a review of the natural generalization to the triple trade-off region for entanglement-assisted classical and quantum (CQE) coding [40].\n\n## A. Classically-Enhanced Quantum Capacity Region\n\nConsider a protocol that exploits a noisy quantum channel N to transmit both classical and quantum information. The goal of such a protocol is to transmit as much of these resources as possible with vanishing error\n\n7\n\nprobability and fidelity approaching unity in the limit of a large number of uses of the channel N . More precisely, the protocol transmits one classical message from a set of M messages and an arbitrary quantum state of dimension K using a large number n uses of the quantum channel. The classical rate of transmission is C ≡ log( M ) n bits per channel use, and the quantum rate of transmission is Q ≡ log( K ) n qubits per channel use. If there is a scheme that transmits classical data at rate C with vanishing error probability and quantum data at rate Q with fidelity approaching unity in the limit of a large number of uses of the channel, we say that the rates C and Q form an achievable rate pair ( C, Q ).\n\nDevetak and Shor's main result in Ref. [31] is that all achievable rate pairs lie in the following classicallyenhanced quantum (CQ) capacity region of N :\n\n\n\nwhere Z is the closure of a set Z , and the 'one-shot' region C (1) ( N ) is as follows:\n\n\n\nThe 'one-shot, one-state' region C (1) CQ, ρ ( N ) is the set of all C, Q ≥ 0 such that\n\n\n\nwhere ρ is a classical-quantum state of the following form:\n\n\n\nthe states φ AA ' x are pure, and the dimension of the classical system is finite [31]. For general channels, the multiletter characterization in (14) is necessary, but for certain channels, such as erasure channels and generalized dephasing channels, the CQ capacity region admits a single-letter characterization [31]. In Section IVA, we show that the CQ region for all Hadamard channels admits a single-letter characterization.\n\n## B. Entanglement-Assisted Classical Capacity Region\n\nNow consider a protocol that exploits shared noiseless entanglement and a noisy quantum channel N to transmit classical information. The goal of such a protocol is to transmit as much classical information as possible with vanishing error probability while consuming as little entanglement as possible in the limit of a large number of uses of the channel N . More precisely, the protocol transmits one classical message from a set of M messages", + "recall": 0.771875, + "true_md": "7\n\nprobability and fidelity approaching unity in the limit of a large number of uses of the channel N . More precisely, the protocol transmits one classical message from a set of M messages and an arbitrary quantum state of di- mension K using a large number n uses of the quantum channel. The classical rate of transmission is C ≡ log( M ) n bits per channel use, and the quantum rate of transmis- sion is Q ≡ log( K ) n qubits per channel use. If there is a scheme that transmits classical data at rate C with van- ishing error probability and quantum data at rate Q with fidelity approaching unity in the limit of a large number of uses of the channel, we say that the rates C and Q form an achievable rate pair ( C, Q ).\n\nwhere | + 〉 and |−〉 are the eigenstates of the Pauli X matrix and | +$_{Y}$ 〉 and |−$_{Y}$ 〉 are the eigenstates of the Pauli Y matrix. The representation of the complemen- tary channel with unit rank Kraus operators explicitly demonstrates that it is entanglement-breaking (as first observed with a positive partial transpose argument in Ref. [30]), and the other arguments in Ref. [30] demon- strate that every 1 → N cloning channel is entanglement- breaking. Therefore, a 1 → N cloning channel is in the class of Hadamard channels.\n\nDevetak and Shor’s main result in Ref. [31] is that all achievable rate pairs lie in the following classically- enhanced quantum (CQ) capacity region of N :\n\nThe Unruh channel is a natural channel to consider in the context of quantum field theory [35]. The output of the Unruh channel is the quantum state detected by a uniformly accelerated observer when the input is a dual- rail photonic qubit prepared by a Minkowski observer. The mathematical structure of the output of an Un- ruh channel N$_{U}$ is an infinite-dimensional block-diagonal density matrix, where the N th block is an instance of a 1 → N cloning channel:\n\nwhere Z is the closure of a set Z , and the “one-shot” region C $^{(1)}$( N ) is as follows:\n\n## 5. Unruh channels\n\n$$C$_{CQ}$ ( N ) ≡ ∞ ⋃ k =1 1 k C (1) $_{CQ}$( N ⊗ $^{k}$) , (14)$$\n\n$$C (1) $_{CQ}$( N ) ≡ ⋃ ρ C (1) CQ, $_{ρ}$( N ) .$$\n\n$$N$_{U}$ ( σ ) ≡ ∞ ⊕ l =2 p$_{l}$ ( z ) S$_{l}$ ( σ ) , (13)$$\n\n$$p$_{l}$ ( z ) ≡ (1 − z ) $^{3}$z l − $^{2}$Δ$_{l}$$_{−}$$_{1}$ ,$$\n\n$$C ≤ I ( X ; B )$_{ρ}$ , Q ≤ I ( A 〉 BX )$_{ρ}$ ,$$\n\nThe “one-shot, one-state” region C (1) CQ, $_{ρ}$( N ) is the set of all C, Q ≥ 0 such that\n\nthe “acceleration parameter” z ∈ [0 , 1) is a strictly in- creasing function of acceleration, Δ$_{l}$$\\_{−}$$_{1}$ ≡ ( l − 1) l/ 2, and S$_{l}$ is the output of a 1 → ( l − 1) cloning channel. The complementary channel N c U is similar, with S$_{l}$ replaced by S c $_{l}$, the complementary channel of a 1 → ( l − 1) cloning channel.\n\nwhere\n\nwhere ρ is a classical-quantum state of the following form:\n\nthe states φ AA ′ x are pure, and the dimension of the classi- cal system is finite [31]. For general channels, the multi- letter characterization in (14) is necessary, but for cer- tain channels, such as erasure channels and generalized dephasing channels, the CQ capacity region admits a single-letter characterization [31]. In Section IV A, we show that the CQ region for all Hadamard channels ad- mits a single-letter characterization.\n\nWe review several trade-off capacity regions that have appeared in the quantum Shannon theory literature. We first review the Devetak-Shor result for the classically- enhanced quantum (CQ) capacity region [31]. We then review Shor’s results on the entanglement-assisted clas- sical (CE) capacity region [39], followed by a review of the natural generalization to the triple trade-off region for entanglement-assisted classical and quantum (CQE) coding [40].\n\n$$ρ XABE ≡ ∑ x p$_{X}$ ( x ) | x 〉 〈 x | X ⊗ U A $^{′}$→ BE N ( φ AA ′ x ) , (15)$$\n\n## B. Entanglement-Assisted Classical Capacity Region\n\n## III. REVIEW OF CAPACITY REGIONS\n\n## A. Classically-Enhanced Quantum Capacity Region\n\nNow consider a protocol that exploits shared noiseless entanglement and a noisy quantum channel N to trans- mit classical information. The goal of such a protocol is to transmit as much classical information as possible with vanishing error probability while consuming as little entanglement as possible in the limit of a large number of uses of the channel N . More precisely, the protocol transmits one classical message from a set of M messages\n\nConsider a protocol that exploits a noisy quantum channel N to transmit both classical and quantum in- formation. The goal of such a protocol is to transmit as much of these resources as possible with vanishing error" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.46996922423366055, + "doc_id": "19cd9c1a285994dad32a78a14528c5d6a90d9738fab646a93f048a811ee3f1fe", + "edit_distance": 0.7236024844720497, + "f1_score": 0.8778877887788779, + "meteor": 0.4676527903441598, + "precision": 0.9204152249134948, + "pred_md": "in relativistic quantum information theory [30, 33, 35], bearing connections to the process of black-hole stimulated emission [60]. The proof technique to determine the formulas for the cloning channel extends naturally to the formulas for the Unruh channel, by exploiting the insights of Br' adler in Ref. [30]. We also find that the coding strategy for each of these channels beats a simple time-sharing strategy, and we introduce a measure to compute the amount by which it beats a time-sharing strategy.\n\nWe structure this work as follows. Section II reviews the definitions of noisy quantum channels, classicalquantum states, information-theoretic quantities, and examples of noisy quantum channels that are relevant for our purposes here. Section III then reviews the capacity regions mentioned above, specifically, the classically-enhanced quantum (CQ) capacity region, the entanglement-assisted classical (CE) capacity region, and the entanglement-assisted classical and quantum (CQE) capacity region-we abbreviate a capacity region by the noiseless resources involved: classical communication (C), quantum communication (Q), or entanglement (E). We then present our main result in Section IV: the proof that the CQ and CE capacity regions of Hadamard channels admit a single-letter characterization. As first observed by Hsieh and Wilde [40], and perhaps surprisingly, the single-letterization of these two regions immediately implies the single-letterization of the CQE capacity region. Section V computes the CQE capacity region of the qubit dephasing channel, the 1 → N cloning channel, and the Unruh channel, and the next section plots the CQE regions. The final section measures the improvement of the optimal protocols over a time-sharing strategy. Finally, we conclude with some remaining observations and suggestions for future work.\n\n## II. DEFINITIONS AND NOTATION\n\n## A. Quantum Channels and Classical-Quantum States\n\nWe first review the notion of a noisy quantum channel, an isometric extension, and a classical-quantum state.\n\nA noisy quantum channel N is a completely-positive trace-preserving (CPTP) convex-linear map. It admits a Kraus representation [61], so that its action on a density operator σ is as follows:\n\n\n\nwhere the Kraus operators form a resolution of the identity: ∑ i N N † i i = I , ensuring that the map is tracepreserving. The notion of an isometric extension of a noisy quantum channel proves to be useful in quantum Shannon theory-the notion is similar to that of a purification of a density operator. Let U A ' → BE N denote an\n\n3\n\nisometric extension of the noisy map N , defined such that U † N U N = I and\n\n\n\nThe Kraus operators provide a straightforward method for constructing an isometric extension:\n\n\n\nwhere the set {| 〉 i E } is an orthonormal set of states. The following relation gives the conjugation of a density operator σ by the isometry U N :\n\n\n\nLet N c denote a complementary channel of N , unique up to isometries on the system E , whose action on σ is\n\n\n\nObserve that the following channel is a valid complementary channel for the channel in (1):\n\n\n\nA quantum channel is degradable [31, 32], a notion imported from classical information theory [62], if there exists a degrading channel D B → E that simulates the action of the complementary channel ( N c ) A ' → E so that\n\n\n\nSuppose that Alice possesses an ensemble { ( p X ( x , ρ ) A ' x ) } of quantum states where p X ( x ) is the probability density function for a random variable X and ρ A ' x is a density operator conditional on the realization x of random variable X . She can augment this ensemble by correlating a classical variable with each ρ A ' x . This procedure produces an augmented ensemble { ( p X ( x , x ) | 〉 〈 x | X ⊗ ρ A ' x ) } , where the states {| x 〉 X } form an orthonormal set. Taking the expectation over the augmented ensemble gives the following classical-quantum state:\n\n\n\nLet | φ x 〉 AA ' denote purifications of each ρ A ' x . The following state is also a classical-quantum state:\n\n\n\nSuppose that Alice transmits the A ' subsystem through a noisy quantum channel N A ' → B . The state output from", + "recall": 0.8391167192429022, + "true_md": "3\n\nisometric extension of the noisy map N , defined such that U † $_{N}$U$_{N}$ = I and\n\nin relativistic quantum information theory [30, 33, 35], bearing connections to the process of black-hole stimu- lated emission [60]. The proof technique to determine the formulas for the cloning channel extends naturally to the formulas for the Unruh channel, by exploiting the insights of Br´ adler in Ref. [30]. We also find that the coding strategy for each of these channels beats a sim- ple time-sharing strategy, and we introduce a measure to compute the amount by which it beats a time-sharing strategy.\n\nThe Kraus operators provide a straightforward method for constructing an isometric extension:\n\nwhere the set {| i 〉 $^{E}$} is an orthonormal set of states. The following relation gives the conjugation of a density op- erator σ by the isometry U$_{N}$ :\n\nLet N c denote a complementary channel of N , unique up to isometries on the system E , whose action on σ is\n\nObserve that the following channel is a valid complemen- tary channel for the channel in (1):\n\n$$N A $^{′}$→ $^{B}$( σ ) = Tr$_{E}$ { U$_{N}$ σU † N } .$$\n\n$$U A $^{′}$→ BE N = ∑ i N A $^{′}$→ B i ⊗ | i 〉 E ,$$\n\n$$U$_{N}$ σU † N = ∑ i,j ( N$_{i}$σN † $_{j}$) B ⊗ | i 〉 〈 j | E . (2)$$\n\n$$N $^{c}$( σ ) ≡ Tr$_{B}$ { U$_{N}$ σU † N } .$$\n\n$$N $^{c}$( σ ) = ∑ i,j Tr $^{{}$N$_{i}$ σN † j $^{}}$| i 〉 〈 j | E .$$\n\nWe structure this work as follows. Section II reviews the definitions of noisy quantum channels, classical- quantum states, information-theoretic quantities, and examples of noisy quantum channels that are rele- vant for our purposes here. Section III then reviews the capacity regions mentioned above, specifically, the classically-enhanced quantum (CQ) capacity region, the entanglement-assisted classical (CE) capacity region, and the entanglement-assisted classical and quantum (CQE) capacity region—we abbreviate a capacity region by the noiseless resources involved: classical communication (C), quantum communication (Q), or entanglement (E). We then present our main result in Section IV: the proof that the CQ and CE capacity regions of Hadamard channels admit a single-letter characterization. As first observed by Hsieh and Wilde [40], and perhaps surprisingly, the single-letterization of these two regions immediately im- plies the single-letterization of the CQE capacity region. Section V computes the CQE capacity region of the qubit dephasing channel, the 1 → N cloning channel, and the Unruh channel, and the next section plots the CQE re- gions. The final section measures the improvement of the optimal protocols over a time-sharing strategy. Fi- nally, we conclude with some remaining observations and suggestions for future work.\n\nA quantum channel is degradable [31, 32], a notion im- ported from classical information theory [62], if there ex- ists a degrading channel D B → E that simulates the action of the complementary channel ( N $^{c}$) A $^{′}$→ E so that\n\nSuppose that Alice possesses an ensemble { ( p$_{X}$ ( x ) , ρ A ′ x ) } of quantum states where p$_{X}$ ( x ) is the probability density function for a random variable X and ρ A ′ x is a density operator conditional on the realization x of random variable X . She can augment this ensemble by correlating a classical variable with each ρ A ′ x . This procedure produces an augmented ensemble { ( p$_{X}$ ( x ) , | x 〉 〈 x | X ⊗ ρ A ′ x ) } , where the states {| x 〉 $^{X}$} form an orthonormal set. Taking the expecta- tion over the augmented ensemble gives the following classical-quantum state:\n\nWe first review the notion of a noisy quantum channel, an isometric extension, and a classical-quantum state.\n\nA noisy quantum channel N is a completely-positive trace-preserving (CPTP) convex-linear map. It admits a Kraus representation [61], so that its action on a density operator σ is as follows:\n\nLet | φ$_{x}$ 〉 AA ′ denote purifications of each ρ A ′ x . The follow- ing state is also a classical-quantum state:\n\nwhere the Kraus operators form a resolution of the iden- tity: $^{∑}$$\\_{i}$N † $\\_{i}$N$\\_{i}$ = I , ensuring that the map is trace- preserving. The notion of an isometric extension of a noisy quantum channel proves to be useful in quantum Shannon theory—the notion is similar to that of a pu- rification of a density operator. Let U A $^{′}$→ BE N denote an\n\nSuppose that Alice transmits the A ′ subsystem through a noisy quantum channel N A $^{′}$→ $^{B}$. The state output from\n\n## II. DEFINITIONS AND NOTATION\n\n## A. Quantum Channels and Classical-Quantum States\n\n$$∀ σ D B → E ◦ N A $^{′}$→ $^{B}$( σ ) = ( N $^{c}$) A $^{′}$→ E ( σ ) .$$\n\n$$ρ XA ′ ≡ ∑ x p$_{X}$ ( x ) | x 〉〈 x | X ⊗ ρ A ′ x .$$\n\n$$ρ XAA ′ ≡ ∑ x p$_{X}$ ( x ) | x 〉〈 x | X ⊗ | φ$_{x}$ 〉〈 φ$_{x}$ | AA $^{′}$. (3)$$\n\n$$N ( σ ) = ∑ i N$_{i}$σN † $_{i}$, (1)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "96a41d1cdb105d255abdd02c76b91bd8f2196dab17ab3c90b3a82db48e6f6663", + "edit_distance": 0.7236024844720497, + "f1_score": 0.8778877887788779, + "meteor": 0.4676527903441598, + "precision": 0.9204152249134948, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.8391167192429022, + "true_md": "" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8657538144186181, + "doc_id": "782a1ae514a3e2b15668008fdaa49c8018e2275068e38075d1532e2731bd2f3a", + "edit_distance": 0.854632587859425, + "f1_score": 0.9258160237388723, + "meteor": 0.7527804676343121, + "precision": 0.9570552147239264, + "pred_md": "arXiv:1001.1098v1 [cond-mat.str-el] 7 Jan 2010\n\nNoname manuscript No. (will be inserted by the editor)\n\n## Genesis of coexisting itinerant and localized electrons in Iron Pnictides\n\nLuca de' Medici · Syed R. Hassan · Massimo Capone\n\nReceived: date / Accepted: date\n\nAbstract We show how the general features of the electronic structure of the Fe-based high-Tc superconductors are a natural setting for a selective localization of the conduction electrons to arise. Slave-spin and Dynamical mean-field calculations support this picture and allow for a comparison of the magnetic properties with experiments.\n\nKeywords Iron Pnictides · Orbital-selective Mott transition\n\nPACS 71.30.+h, 71.10.Fd, 71.27.+a\n\n## 1 Introduction\n\nSince 1986, each time a new 'high-temperature' superconductor has been discovered, it has been a natural temptation to compare the new materials to the cuprates, looking for unifying aspects which could shed light on the key mechanism for high-temperature superconductivity. This temptation is probably stronger then ever in the case of the iron-based 'pnictides', the second family of transition-metal-based superconductors with critical temperature exceeding 50K[1].\n\nL. de' Medici\n\nLaboratoire de Physique des Solides, Univ. Paris-Sud, CNRS, UMR 8502, F-91405 Orsay Cedex, France.\n\nTel.: +33-1-6915-4540\n\nFax: +33-1-6915-6086\n\nE-mail: demedici@lps.u-psud.fr\n\nS.R. Hassan\n\nThe Institute of Mathematical Sciences C.I.T. Cam- pus,Taramani, Chennai 600 113, India\n\nM. Capone\n\nSMC, CNR-INFM, and Universit` a di Roma 'La Sapienza', Piazzale Aldo Moro 2, I-00185 Roma, Italy and ISC-CNR, Via dei Taurini 19, I-00185 Roma, Italy\n\nThe two classes of materials share indeed several features among which we may quote the structure, which is quite similar, with FeAs layers playing a similar role of CuO planes, and the observation that in both cases superconductivity appears doping a magnetically ordered parent compound, and follows a dome behavior as a function of doping.\n\nAn important different lies in the nature of the parent compound. In the cuprates the half-filled system is an insulator which is usually considered a Mott insulator, testifying the central role of electron correlations (Even if it has been recently proposed that the degree of correlation can be smaller than usually believed[2]). The undoped pnictides are instead still metallic, despite the magnetic ordering, suggesting a weaker degree of electronic correlations. The actual strength of correlation in pnictides is lively debated: while there is no obvious reason to invoke correlation as the key player in the game as it happens in cuprates, it has been proposed that these compounds are actually close to a Mott transition[3].\n\nAnother peculiarity of pnictides is that, according to density-functional theory calculations, all the five d-bands of iron are relevant as opposed to the single copper band of the cuprates. Multiple bands crossing the Fermi level are confirmed by angular resolved photoemission. The relevance of multiband effects can solve the discrepancy between different estimates of the role of correlations. Indeed electron correlation can induce a much richer physics in multiband systems with respect to single band. In particular, different bands can be affected differently by correlations, and eventually one can have an orbital-selective Mott transition (OSMT), in which some bands become insulating and others are metallic. Signatures of an orbitalselective behavior have been detected by angle-resolved", + "recall": 0.896551724137931, + "true_md": "arXiv:1001.1098v1 [cond-mat.str-el] 7 Jan 2010\n\n# Genesis of coexisting itinerant and localized electrons in Iron Pnictides\n\nLuca de’ Medici · Syed R. Hassan · Massimo Capone\n\nReceived: date / Accepted: date\n\nThe two classes of materials share indeed several fea- tures among which we may quote the structure, which is quite similar, with FeAs layers playing a similar role of CuO planes, and the observation that in both cases su- perconductivity appears doping a magnetically ordered parent compound, and follows a dome behavior as a function of doping.\n\nAn important different lies in the nature of the par- ent compound. In the cuprates the half-filled system is an insulator which is usually considered a Mott insu- lator, testifying the central role of electron correlations (Even if it has been recently proposed that the degree of correlation can be smaller than usually believed[2]). The undoped pnictides are instead still metallic, de- spite the magnetic ordering, suggesting a weaker de- gree of electronic correlations. The actual strength of correlation in pnictides is lively debated: while there is no obvious reason to invoke correlation as the key player in the game as it happens in cuprates, it has been proposed that these compounds are actually close to a Mott transition[3].\n\nAnother peculiarity of pnictides is that, according to density-functional theory calculations, all the five d-bands of iron are relevant as opposed to the sin- gle copper band of the cuprates. Multiple bands cross- ing the Fermi level are confirmed by angular resolved photoemission. The relevance of multiband effects can solve the discrepancy between different estimates of the role of correlations. Indeed electron correlation can in- duce a much richer physics in multiband systems with respect to single band. In particular, different bands can be affected differently by correlations, and even- tually one can have an orbital-selective Mott transi- tion (OSMT), in which some bands become insulat- ing and others are metallic. Signatures of an orbital- selective behavior have been detected by angle-resolved\n\nSince 1986, each time a new ”high-temperature” su- perconductor has been discovered, it has been a nat- ural temptation to compare the new materials to the cuprates, looking for unifying aspects which could shed light on the key mechanism for high-temperature super- conductivity. This temptation is probably stronger then ever in the case of the iron-based ”pnictides”, the sec- ond family of transition-metal-based superconductors with critical temperature exceeding 50K[1].\n\nAbstract We show how the general features of the electronic structure of the Fe-based high-Tc supercon- ductors are a natural setting for a selective localiza- tion of the conduction electrons to arise. Slave-spin and Dynamical mean-field calculations support this picture and allow for a comparison of the magnetic properties with experiments.\n\nKeywords Iron Pnictides · Orbital-selective Mott transition\n\nPACS 71.30.+h, 71.10.Fd, 71.27.+a\n\n## 1 Introduction\n\nNoname manuscript No.\n\n(will be inserted by the editor)\n\nL. de’ Medici Laboratoire de Physique des Solides, Univ. Paris-Sud, CNRS, UMR 8502, F-91405 Orsay Cedex, France. Tel.: +33-1-6915-4540 Fax: +33-1-6915-6086 E-mail: demedici@lps.u-psud.fr\n\nS.R. Hassan The Institute of Mathematical Sciences C.I.T. Cam- pus,Taramani, Chennai 600 113, India\n\nM. Capone SMC, CNR-INFM, and Universit` a di Roma ”La Sapienza”, Piazzale Aldo Moro 2, I-00185 Roma, Italy and ISC-CNR, Via dei Taurini 19, I-00185 Roma, Italy" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.46494026538635536, + "doc_id": "f31f3b928291445a35adaa093c6e088e0902c8e36dee60ed3b5a95744400a4ec", + "edit_distance": 0.48598130841121495, + "f1_score": 0.8935532233883058, + "meteor": 0.5840759466072505, + "precision": 0.946031746031746, + "pred_md": "arXiv:1001.0382v3 [astro-ph.HE] 11 Sep 2011\n\n## The extension of radiative viscosity to superfluid matter ∗\n\nPI Chun-Mei , YANG Shu-Hua 1 2 ∗∗ , and ZHENG Xiao-Ping 2\n\n1 Department of Physics and Electronics, Hubei University of Education, Wuhan 430205, P.R.China 2 Institute of Astrophysics, Huazhong Normal University, Wuhan 430079, P.R.China, (Dated: Received: , Accepted:)\n\nThe radiative viscosity of superfluid npe matter is studied, and it is found that to the lowest order of δµ/T the ratio of radiative viscosity to bulk viscosity is the same as that of the normal matter.\n\nPACS: 97.60.Jd, 21.65.-f, 95.30.Cq\n\nAs one of the most important transport coefficients, bulk viscosities of simple npe matter, of hyperon matter and even of quark matter, both in normal and superfluid states, have been extensively studied [1-18], for more references see [19].\n\nIn fact, the mechanical energy of density perturbations is not only dissipated to heat via bulk viscosity, but also is radiated away via neutrinos, this was first pointed out by Finiz and Wolf in 1968[1]. However, the damping mechanism through neutrinos is ignored for several decades, until recently, Sa'd and Schaffner-Bielich [20] named this mechanism the radiative viscosity, and found it is 1.5 times larger than the bulk viscosity to all Urca processes in the lowest order of δµ/T , both in nuclear matter and quark matter. Yang et al. [21] studied non-linear effect of radiative viscosity of npe matter in neutron stars for both direct Urca process and modified Urca process, and found that non-linear effect will decrease the ratio of radiative viscosity to bulk viscosity from 1 5 to 0.5 (for . direct Urca process) and 0.375 (for modified Urca process); which means that for small oscillations of neutron star the large fraction of oscillation energy is emitted as neutrinos, but for large enough ones bulk viscous dissipation dominates.\n\nIt's well known that below certain critical temperature nucleons in neutron star matter will be in superfluid states. The bulk viscosity of superfluid nucleon matter have been studied [4, 5, 17], and it turns out that the superfluidity may strongly reduce bulk viscosity. This paper aims to study the radiative viscosity of superfluid nucleon matter, in other words, we will give the relationship between radiative viscosity and bulk viscosity in the superfluid case.\n\nBoth the bulk viscosity and the radiative viscosity of npe matter are related to direct Urca process ( n → p + + e ν e , p + e → n + ν e ) and modified Urca process ( n + N → p + N + e + ν e , p + N + e → n + N + ν e ) in different conditions. As shown by [22], the direct Urca process is allowed by the momentum conservation when p F n < p F p + p F e , and for pure npe matter where p F p = p F e , it\n\n∗ This research is supported by NFSC under Grants No. 11073008.\n\n∗∗ Email: ysh@phy.ccnu.edu.cn\n\nTelephone number: 13545359902, 13545119781\n\ncorresponds to n /n > p 1 / 9. This happens if the density is several times larger than the standard nuclear matter density ρ 0 = 2 8 . × 10 14 gcm -3 . In the following, we focus on the direct Urca process.\n\nLet us first recall the formulae of radiative viscosity of simple non-superfluid npe matter [7, 20]. Considering a periodic perturbation to the baryon number density\n\n\n\nIt will lead to a deviation from β -equilibrium characterized by\n\n\n\nwhere µ n , µ p and µ e are the chemical potentials of the neutrons, protons and electrons. δµ can be expressed in terms of the variations of two independent variables δn b and δX p ,\n\n\n\nwhere X p = n /n p b is the proton fraction and the coefficient functions C and B are given by\n\n\n\n\n\nTo the leading order, the net reaction rate and the increments of neutrino emissivity due to off-equilibrium could be written as\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nwhere[21, 23]", + "recall": 0.8465909090909091, + "true_md": "# The extension of radiative viscosity to superfluid matter ∗\n\nPI Chun-Mei $^{1}$, YANG Shu-Hua2 ∗∗ , and ZHENG Xiao-Ping 2\n\n1 Department of Physics and Electronics, Hubei University of Education, Wuhan 430205, P.R.China\n\n2 Institute of Astrophysics, Huazhong Normal University, Wuhan 430079, P.R.China,\n\n(Dated: Received: , Accepted:)\n\nThe radiative viscosity of superfluid npe matter is studied, and it is found that to the lowest or- der of δµ/T the ratio of radiative viscosity to bulk viscosity is the same as that of the normal matter.\n\nPACS: 97.60.Jd, 21.65.-f, 95.30.Cq\n\nAs one of the most important transport coefficients, bulk viscosities of simple npe matter, of hyperon matter and even of quark matter, both in normal and superfluid states, have been extensively studied [1–18], for more ref- erences see [19].\n\nIn fact, the mechanical energy of density perturbations is not only dissipated to heat via bulk viscosity, but also is radiated away via neutrinos, this was first pointed out by Finiz and Wolf in 1968[1]. However, the damping mech- anism through neutrinos is ignored for several decades, until recently, Sa’d and Schaffner-Bielich [20] named this mechanism the radiative viscosity, and found it is 1.5 times larger than the bulk viscosity to all Urca processes in the lowest order of δµ/T , both in nuclear matter and quark matter. Yang et al. [21] studied non-linear ef- fect of radiative viscosity of npe matter in neutron stars for both direct Urca process and modified Urca process, and found that non-linear effect will decrease the ratio of radiative viscosity to bulk viscosity from 1 . 5 to 0.5 (for direct Urca process) and 0.375 (for modified Urca pro- cess); which means that for small oscillations of neutron star the large fraction of oscillation energy is emitted as neutrinos, but for large enough ones bulk viscous dissi- pation dominates.\n\nIt’s well known that below certain critical tempera- ture nucleons in neutron star matter will be in superfluid states. The bulk viscosity of superfluid nucleon matter have been studied [4, 5, 17], and it turns out that the superfluidity may strongly reduce bulk viscosity. This paper aims to study the radiative viscosity of superfluid nucleon matter, in other words, we will give the relation- ship between radiative viscosity and bulk viscosity in the superfluid case.\n\nBoth the bulk viscosity and the radiative viscosity of npe matter are related to direct Urca process ( n → p + e + ν$_{e}$ , p + e → n + ν$_{e}$ ) and modified Urca process ( n + N → p + N + e + ν$_{e}$ , p + N + e → n + N + ν$_{e}$ ) in different conditions. As shown by [22], the direct Urca process is allowed by the momentum conservation when p$_{F}$$\\_{n}$ < p$\\_{F}$$_{p}$ + p$_{F}$$\\_{e}$ , and for pure npe matter where p$\\_{F}$$_{p}$ = p$_{F}$$\\_{e}$ , it\n\ncorresponds to n$_{p}$/n > 1 / 9. This happens if the density is several times larger than the standard nuclear matter density ρ 0 = 2 . 8 × 10 $^{14}$gcm − $^{3}$. In the following, we focus on the direct Urca process.\n\nLet us first recall the formulae of radiative viscosity of simple non-superfluid npe matter [7, 20]. Considering a periodic perturbation to the baryon number density\n\nIt will lead to a deviation from β -equilibrium character- ized by\n\nwhere µ$_{n}$ , µ$_{p}$ and µ$_{e}$ are the chemical potentials of the neutrons, protons and electrons. δµ can be expressed in terms of the variations of two independent variables δn$_{b}$ and δX$_{p}$ ,\n\nwhere X$_{p}$ = n$_{p}$/n$_{b}$ is the proton fraction and the coeffi- cient functions C and B are given by\n\nTo the leading order, the net reaction rate and the incre- ments of neutrino emissivity due to off-equilibrium could be written as\n\nwhere[21, 23]\n\n$$n$_{b}$ ( t ) = n$_{b}$ 0 + R e ( δn$_{b}$e $^{iωt}$) . (1)$$\n\n$$δµ = µ$_{p}$ + µ$_{e}$ − µ$_{n}$ = δµ$_{p}$ + δµ$_{e}$ − δµ$_{n}$, (2)$$\n\n$$δµ = C δn$_{b}$ n$_{b}$ + BδX$_{p}$, (3)$$\n\n$$C = n$_{p}$ ∂µ$_{p}$ ∂n$_{p}$ + n$_{e}$ ∂µ$_{e}$ ∂n$_{e}$ − n$_{n}$ ∂µ$_{n}$ ∂n$_{n}$ , (4)$$\n\n$$B = n$_{b}$ ( ∂µ$_{p}$ ∂n$_{p}$ + ∂µ$_{e}$ ∂n$_{e}$ + ∂µ$_{n}$ ∂n$_{n}$ ) . (5)$$\n\n$$Γ$_{ν}$ − Γ$_{ν}$ = − λ 0 ξ 2 δµ , (6)$$\n\n$$˙ E loss = S 0 ξ $^{2}$, (7)$$\n\n$$λ 0 = 714 457 ϵ ( T, 0) , (8)$$\n\n$$S 0 = 1071 457 ϵ ( T, 0) , (9)$$\n\n$^{∗}$This research is supported by NFSC under Grants No. 11073008.\n\n$^{∗∗}$Email: ysh@phy.ccnu.edu.cn Telephone number: 13545359902, 13545119781\n\narXiv:1001.0382v3 [astro-ph.HE] 11 Sep 2011" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5428154471945639, + "doc_id": "43097a11e3bf357a145b9f5477cddae80dad9f7f156adef76718f053f084c764", + "edit_distance": 0.5341463414634147, + "f1_score": 0.8820754716981132, + "meteor": 0.6218317609424916, + "precision": 0.9211822660098522, + "pred_md": "in a given band is compensated by an appropriate change of the spectral weight in other bands such that the total spectral weight, integrated over all bands, is conserved, as in Eq. (1). Still, non-conservation of the spectral weight within a given band is an interesting phenomenon as the degree of non-conservation is an indicator of relevant energy scales in the problem. Indeed, when relevant energy scales are much smaller than the Fermi energy, i.e., changes in the conductivity are confined to a near vicinity of a Fermi surface (FS), one can expand ε k near k F as ε k = v F ( k -k F ) + ( k -k F ) 2 / (2 m B ) + O k ( -k F ) 3 and obtain ∇ 2 /vector k x ε /vector k ≈ 1 /m B [this approximation is equivalent to approximating the density of states (DOS) by a constant]. Then W K becomes πne / 2 (2 m B ) which does not depend on temperature. The scale of the temperature dependence of W K is then an indicator how far in energy the changes in conductivity extend when, e.g., a system evolves from a normal metal to a superconductor. Because relevant energy scales increase with the interaction strength, the temperature dependence of W K is also an indirect indicator of whether a system is in a weak, intermediate, or strong coupling regime.\n\nIn a conventional BCS superconductor the only relevant scales are the superconducting gap ∆ and the impurity scattering rate Γ. Both are generally much smaller than the Fermi energy, so the optical integral should be almost T -independent, i.e., the spectral weight lost in a superconducting state at low frequencies because of gap opening is completely recovered by the zero-frequency δ -function. In a clean limit, the weight which goes into a δ -function is recovered within frequencies up to 4∆. This is the essence of FGT sum rule 2,3 . In a dirty limit, this scale is larger, O (Γ), but still W K is T -independent and there was no 'violation of sum rule'.\n\nThe issue of sum rule attracted substantial interest in the studies of high T c cuprates 5-18,21-26 in which pairing is without doubts a strong coupling phenomenon. From a theoretical perspective, the interest in this issue was originally triggered by a similarity between W K and the kinetic energy K = 2 ∑ ε /vector k n /vector k . 18-20 For a model with a simple tight binding cosine dispersion ε k ∝ (cos k x +cos k y ), d 2 ε /vector k d k 2 x ∼ -ε /vector k and W K = -K . For a more complex dispersion there is no exact relation between W K and K , but several groups argued 17,27,28 that W K can still be regarded as a good monitor for the changes in the kinetic energy. Now, in a BCS superconductor, kinetic energy increases below T c because n k extends to higher frequencies (see Fig.2). At strong coupling, K not necessary increases because of opposite trend associated with the fermionic self-energy: fermions are more mobile in the SCS due to less space for scattering at low energies than they are in the NS. Model calculations show that above some coupling strength, the kinetic energy decreases below T c 29 . While, as we said, there is no one-to-one correspondence between K and W K , it is still likely that, when K decreases, W K increases.\n\nAgood amount of experimental effort has been put into\n\n2\n\naddressing the issue of the optical sum rule in the c -axis 7 and in-plane conductivities 8-16 in overdoped, optimally doped, and underdoped cuprates. The experimental results demonstrated, above all, outstanding achievements of experimental abilities as these groups managed to detect the value of the optical integral with the accuracy of a fraction of a percent. The analysis of the change of the optical integral between normal and SCS is even more complex because one has to (i) extend NS data to T < T c and (ii) measure superfluid density with the same accuracy as the optical integral itself.\n\nThe analysis of the optical integral showed that in overdoped cuprates it definitely decreases below T c , in consistency with the expectations at weak coupling 11 . For underdoped cuprates, all experimental groups agree that a relative change of the optical integral below T c gets much smaller. There is no agreement yet about the sign of the change of the optical integral : Molegraaf et al. 8 and Santander-Syro et al. 9 argued that the optical integral increases below T c , while Boris et al. 10 argued that it decreases.\n\nTheoretical analysis of these results 21,22,25,28,30 added one more degree of complexity to the issue. It is tempting to analyze the temperature dependence of W K and relate it to the observed behavior of the optical integral, and some earlier works 25,28,30 followed this route. In the experiments, however, optical conductivity is integrated only up to a certain frequency ω c , and the quantity which is actually measured is\n\n\n\nThe Kubo formula, Eq. (3) is obtained assuming that the second part is negligible. This is not guaranteed, however, as typical ω c ∼ 1 -2 eV are comparable to the bandwidth.\n\nThe differential sum rule ∆ W is also a sum of two terms\n\n\n\nwhere ∆ W K is the variation of the r.h.s. of Eq. 3, and ∆ f ( ω c ) is the variation of the cutoff term. Because conductivity changes with T at all frequencies, ∆ f ( ω c ) also varies with temperature. It then becomes the issue whether the experimentally observed ∆ W ω ( c ) is predominantly due to 'intrinsic' ∆ W K , or to ∆ f ( ω c ). [A third possibility is non-applicability of the Kubo formula because of the close proximity of other bands, but we will not dwell on this.]\n\nFor the NS, previous works 21,22 on particular models for the cuprates indicated that the origin of the temperature dependence of W ω ( c ) is likely the T dependence of the cutoff term f ( ω c ). Specifically, Norman et. al. 22 approximated a fermionic DOS by a constant (in which", + "recall": 0.8461538461538461, + "true_md": "2\n\nin a given band is compensated by an appropriate change of the spectral weight in other bands such that the total spectral weight, integrated over all bands, is conserved, as in Eq. (1). Still, non-conservation of the spectral weight within a given band is an interesting phenomenon as the degree of non-conservation is an indicator of rele- vant energy scales in the problem. Indeed, when relevant energy scales are much smaller than the Fermi energy, i.e., changes in the conductivity are confined to a near vicinity of a Fermi surface (FS), one can expand ε$_{k}$ near k$_{F}$ as ε$_{k}$ = v$_{F}$ ( k − k$_{F}$ ) + ( k − k$_{F}$ ) $^{2}$/ (2 m$_{B}$ ) + O ( k − k$_{F}$ ) 3 and obtain ∇ 2 ⃗ $_{k$\\_{x}$}$ε$_{⃗}$ k ≈ 1 /m$_{B}$ [this approximation is equiv- alent to approximating the density of states (DOS) by a constant]. Then W$_{K}$ becomes πne $^{2}$/ (2 m$_{B}$ ) which does not depend on temperature. The scale of the tempera- ture dependence of W$_{K}$ is then an indicator how far in energy the changes in conductivity extend when, e.g., a system evolves from a normal metal to a superconductor. Because relevant energy scales increase with the interac- tion strength, the temperature dependence of W$_{K}$ is also an indirect indicator of whether a system is in a weak, intermediate, or strong coupling regime.\n\nIn a conventional BCS superconductor the only rele- vant scales are the superconducting gap Δ and the impu- rity scattering rate Γ. Both are generally much smaller than the Fermi energy, so the optical integral should be almost T -independent, i.e., the spectral weight lost in a superconducting state at low frequencies because of gap opening is completely recovered by the zero-frequency δ - function. In a clean limit, the weight which goes into a δ − function is recovered within frequencies up to 4Δ. This is the essence of FGT sum rule $^{2,3}$. In a dirty limit, this scale is larger, O (Γ), but still W$_{K}$ is T -independent and there was no “violation of sum rule”.\n\nThe issue of sum rule attracted substantial interest in the studies of high T$_{c}$ cuprates 5–18,21–26 in which pairing is without doubts a strong coupling phenomenon. From a theoretical perspective, the interest in this issue was orig- inally triggered by a similarity between W$_{K}$ and the ki- netic energy K = 2 ∑ ε$_{⃗}$ $_{k}$n$_{⃗}$$\\_{k}$. 18–20 For a model with a sim- ple tight binding cosine dispersion ε$\\_{k}$ ∝ (cos k$\\_{x}$ + cos k$\\_{y}$ ), d $^{2}$ε$\\_{⃗}$ k d k 2 x ∼ − ε$\\_{⃗}$ k and W$\\_{K}$ = − K . For a more complex dis- persion there is no exact relation between W$\\_{K}$ and K , but several groups argued 17,27,28 that W$\\_{K}$ can still be regarded as a good monitor for the changes in the kinetic energy. Now, in a BCS superconductor, kinetic energy increases below T$\\_{c}$ because n$\\_{k}$ extends to higher frequen- cies (see Fig.2). At strong coupling, K not necessary increases because of opposite trend associated with the fermionic self-energy: fermions are more mobile in the SCS due to less space for scattering at low energies than they are in the NS. Model calculations show that above some coupling strength, the kinetic energy decreases be- low T$\\_{c}$ $^{29}$. While, as we said, there is no one-to-one cor- respondence between K and W$\\_{K}$ , it is still likely that, when K decreases, W$\\_{K}$ increases.\n\nA good amount of experimental effort has been put into\n\nwhere Δ W$_{K}$ is the variation of the r.h.s. of Eq. 3, and Δ f ( ω$_{c}$ ) is the variation of the cutoff term. Because conductivity changes with T at all frequencies, Δ f ( ω$_{c}$ ) also varies with temperature. It then becomes the issue whether the experimentally observed Δ W ( ω$_{c}$ ) is predom- inantly due to “intrinsic” Δ W$_{K}$ , or to Δ f ( ω$_{c}$ ). [A third possibility is non-applicability of the Kubo formula be- cause of the close proximity of other bands, but we will not dwell on this.] 21,22\n\nnot dwell on this.] For the NS, previous works 21,22 on particular models for the cuprates indicated that the origin of the temper- ature dependence of W ( ω$_{c}$ ) is likely the T dependence of the cutoff term f ( ω$_{c}$ ). Specifically, Norman et. al. 22 approximated a fermionic DOS by a constant (in which\n\nThe differential sum rule Δ W is also a sum of two terms\n\nThe Kubo formula, Eq. (3) is obtained assuming that the second part is negligible. This is not guaranteed, however, as typical ω$_{c}$ ∼ 1 − 2 eV are comparable to the bandwidth.\n\nit decreases. Theoretical analysis of these results 21,22,25,28,30 added one more degree of complexity to the issue. It is tempt- ing to analyze the temperature dependence of W$_{K}$ and relate it to the observed behavior of the optical integral, and some earlier works 25,28,30 followed this route. In the experiments, however, optical conductivity is integrated only up to a certain frequency ω$_{c}$ , and the quantity which is actually measured is\n\nThe analysis of the optical integral showed that in over- doped cuprates it definitely decreases below T$_{c}$ , in con- sistency with the expectations at weak coupling $^{11}$. For underdoped cuprates, all experimental groups agree that a relative change of the optical integral below T$_{c}$ gets much smaller. There is no agreement yet about the sign of the change of the optical integral : Molegraaf et al. 8 and Santander-Syro et al. 9 argued that the optical inte- gral increases below T$_{c}$ , while Boris et al. 10 argued that it decreases. 21,22,25,28,30\n\naddressing the issue of the optical sum rule in the c − axis 7 and in-plane conductivities 8–16 in overdoped, optimally doped, and underdoped cuprates. The experimental re- sults demonstrated, above all, outstanding achievements of experimental abilities as these groups managed to de- tect the value of the optical integral with the accuracy of a fraction of a percent. The analysis of the change of the optical integral between normal and SCS is even more complex because one has to (i) extend NS data to T < T$_{c}$ and (ii) measure superfluid density with the same accuracy as the optical integral itself.\n\n$$W ( ω$_{c}$ ) = ∫ ω$_{c}$ 0 Re σ (Ω) d Ω = W$_{K}$ + f ( ω$_{c}$ ) f ( ω$_{c}$ ) = − ∫ $^{′}$∞′ ω$_{c}$ Re σ (Ω) d Ω (4)$$\n\n$$Δ W ( ω$_{c}$ ) = Δ W$_{K}$ + Δ f ( ω$_{c}$ ) (5)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.11678809968051364, + "doc_id": "6aa56bb22cdf759f65bc22f7286fe59fce7b8871f1ccd203c188fed86fe29c05", + "edit_distance": 0.9051813471502591, + "f1_score": 0.8617886178861788, + "meteor": 0.23568274970266237, + "precision": 0.9464285714285714, + "pred_md": "where r i = ( x , y i i -1 ), p i = ( x , y i i ), x 1 = y 0 = 0 (see Fig. 3) and the cumulant in the last line\n\n\n\nis expressed in terms of averages of the exponents of the phase fields:\n\n\n\nFIG. 3: (color online) Graphical representation of the selfenergy correction of the order 2 n in coupling constant, Eq. (16). Solid vertical and horizontal lines represent segments of a real space electron trajectory for (a) particle close to the mass shell, ω ≈ k x , (b) particle close to the shadow mass shell, ω ≈ k y . Incoming (blue) and outgoing (red) arrowed skew dashed lines represent exponential factors e i φ ( r i ) and e -i φ ( p j ) respectively.\n\nFIG. 3: (color online) Graphical representation of the selfenergy correction of the order 2 n in coupling constant, Eq. (16). Solid vertical and horizontal lines represent segments of a real space electron trajectory for (a) particle close to the mass shell, ω ≈ k x , (b) particle close to the shadow mass shell, ω ≈ k y . Incoming (blue) and outgoing (red) arrowed skew dashed lines represent exponential factors e i φ ( r i ) and e -i φ ( p j ) respectively.\n\nThe latter average with free energy, Eq. (6) is well known,\n\n\n\nwhere tilde over the product sign excludes i = . j\n\nIn what follows we sum up the most singular terms in expansion (16). Our solution is based on the physical idea that at the mass shell the horizontal segments in the staircase diagram in Fig. 3(a) are parametrically longer then the vertical ones. In other words, the mass shell singularity comes from the integration region y i /lessmuch x j . Accordingly, we introduce new variables ξ i ,\n\n\n\nand argue that the important domain of integration is ξ i /lessmuch 1. We expand the cumulant (17) in powers of ξ i s and retain the lowest power term to get the most singular contribution. It can be shown by inspection that this\n\n4\n\nexpansion gives\n\n\n\nWe substitute Eqs. (20) and (21) in Eq. (16), and perform integrations over x n . We now analyze the remaining integrations over ξ i s,\n\n\n\nwhere\n\n\n\nWe notice that for n = 2 3 the integral in Eq. (23) di-, verges at the upper limit. In this case the expansion in Eq. (21) is not justified. These values of n have to be treated separately, (see App. A for details). For n = 2 the most singular part is given in Eq. (13) and for n = 3 we obtain, (see App. A 2).\n\n\n\nFor n ≥ 3 the integral in Eq. (23) is\n\n\n\nThe contributions of the orders n ≥ 3 give\n\n\n\nwhere\n\n\n\nThe sum of contributions (12), (13), (24) and (26) yields the final result Eq. (7).\n\n## IV. GREEN FUNCTION AT THE SHADOW MASS SHELL, ω ∼ k y .\n\nIn this section we turn to the analysis of the behavior of the Green function at the 'shadow side' of the pocket,", + "recall": 0.7910447761194029, + "true_md": "where r$_{i}$ = ( x$_{i}$, y$_{i}$$\\_{−}$$_{1}$ ), p$_{i}$ = ( x$_{i}$, y$_{i}$ ), x$_{1}$ = y$_{0}$ = 0 (see Fig. 3) and the cumulant in the last line\n\nexpansion gives\n\nis expressed in terms of averages of the exponents of the phase fields:\n\nThe latter average with free energy, Eq. (6) is well known,\n\nwhere tilde over the product sign excludes i = j .\n\nIn what follows we sum up the most singular terms in expansion (16). Our solution is based on the physical idea that at the mass shell the horizontal segments in the staircase diagram in Fig. 3(a) are parametrically longer then the vertical ones. In other words, the mass shell singularity comes from the integration region y$_{i}$ ≪ x$_{j}$ . Accordingly, we introduce new variables ξ$_{i}$ ,\n\nand argue that the important domain of integration is ξ$_{i}$ ≪ 1. We expand the cumulant (17) in powers of ξ$_{i}$ s and retain the lowest power term to get the most singular contribution. It can be shown by inspection that this\n\nIn this section we turn to the analysis of the behavior of the Green function at the “shadow side” of the pocket,\n\nThe sum of contributions (12), (13), (24) and (26) yields the final result Eq. (7).\n\nwhere\n\nThe contributions of the orders n ≥ 3 give\n\nFor n ≥ 3 the integral in Eq. (23) is\n\nWe notice that for n = 2 , 3 the integral in Eq. (23) di- verges at the upper limit. In this case the expansion in Eq. (21) is not justified. These values of n have to be treated separately, (see App. A for details). For n = 2 the most singular part is given in Eq. (13) and for n = 3 we obtain, (see App. A 2).\n\nwhere\n\nWe substitute Eqs. (20) and (21) in Eq. (16), and per- form integrations over x$_{n}$ . We now analyze the remaining integrations over ξ$_{i}$ s,\n\n$$C (2 n ) ≈ a 2 dn n ∏ i =1 ( y$_{i}$ − y$_{i}$$_{−}$$_{1}$ ) − 2 d × [ [ x 2 n + ( y$_{n}$$_{−}$$_{1}$ − y$_{0}$ ) $^{2}$] $^{d}$[ x 2 n + ( y$_{n}$ − y$_{1}$ ) $^{2}$] d [ x 2 n + ( y$_{n}$ − y$_{0}$ ) $^{2}$] $^{d}$[ x 2 n + ( y$_{n}$$_{−}$$_{1}$ − y$_{1}$ ) $^{2}$] d − 1 ] ≈ − 2 da 2 $^{dn}$( x$_{n}$ ) $^{n}$ξ$_{1}$ ξ$_{n}$ n ∏ i =1 ξ − 2 d i . (21)$$\n\n$$C (2 n $^{)}$( r$_{1}$ , . . . , r$_{n}$ ; p$_{1}$ , . . . , p$_{n}$ ) = δ$_{1}$$_{,n}$ − n − 1 ∑ i =1 δ$_{1}$$_{,i}$δ$_{i}$$_{+1}$$_{,n}$ + . . . + ( − 1) $^{n}$δ$_{1}$$_{,}$$_{1}$ · · · δ$_{n,n}$ (17)$$\n\n$$δ$_{i,i}$$_{+}$$_{l}$ = 〈 e i φ ( r$_{i}$ )+ ... + i φ ( r$_{i}$$_{+}$$_{l}$ $^{)}$e − i φ ( p$_{i}$ ) − ... − i φ ( p$_{i}$$_{+}$$_{l}$ ) 〉 . (18)$$\n\n$$Σ (2 n ) =2 d ( − i) 2 n $^{+1}$( Ja $^{d}$) 2 $^{n}$Γ[ n (2 − 2 d ) − 1] ( n − 2)!( − i( ω − k$_{y}$ )) n (2 − 2 d ) − 1 I$_{n}$ ( α ) , (22)$$\n\n$$I$_{n}$ ( α )= ∫ ∞ 0 n ∏ i =1 dξ$_{i}$ ξ 1 − 2 d ξ − 2 d 2 · · · ξ − 2 d n − $_{1}$ξ 1 − 2 d n ( α + ξ$_{1}$ + ξ$_{2}$ + . . . + ξ$_{n}$ ) n (2 − 2 d ) − 1 . (23)$$\n\n$$Σ (6) = 2 d − i( Ja $^{d}$) $^{6}$Γ(1 − 2 d )Γ $^{2}$(2 − 2 d ) ( − i( ω − k$_{y}$ )) 5 − 6 d log α . (24)$$\n\n$$I$_{n}$ ( α ) = (1 − 2 d ) $^{2}$α3 − $_{n}$Γ$^{n}$(1 − 2 d )Γ( n − 3) Γ[ n (2 − 2 d ) − 1] . (25)$$\n\n$$∑ n ≥ 3 Σ (2 n ) = 2 dα − i( Ja $^{d}$) $^{4}$Γ$^{2}$(2 − 2 d ) ( − i( ω − k$_{y}$ )) 3 − 4 d log(1 + x ) 2 d − i( Ja $^{d}$) $^{6}$Γ(1 − 2 d )Γ $^{2}$(2 − 2 d ) ( − i( ω − k$_{y}$ )) 5 − 6 d [1 − log(1 + x )] , (26)$$\n\n$$x = α − $^{1}$( Ja $^{d}$) $^{2}$Γ(1 − 2 d ) ( − i( ω − k$_{y}$ )) (2 − 2 d ) . (27)$$\n\n$$δ$_{1}$$_{,n}$ = a 2 dn ( n − 2) { ˜ ∏ n i,j =1 | r$_{i}$ − r$_{j}$ | ˜ ∏ n i,j =1 | p$_{i}$ − p$_{j}$ | ∏ n i,j =1 | r$_{i}$ − p$_{j}$ | } 2 d , (19)$$\n\nFIG. 3: (color online) Graphical representation of the self- energy correction of the order 2 n in coupling constant, Eq. (16). Solid vertical and horizontal lines represent seg- ments of a real space electron trajectory for (a) particle close to the mass shell, ω ≈ k$_{x}$ , (b) particle close to the shadow mass shell, ω ≈ k$_{y}$ . Incoming (blue) and outgoing (red) ar- rowed skew dashed lines represent exponential factors e i φ ( r $_{i}$) and e − i φ ( p $_{j}$) respectively.\n\n4\n\n$$y$_{n}$ − y$_{n}$$_{−}$$_{1}$ = ξ$_{n}$x$_{n}$, . . . , y$_{1}$ − y$_{0}$ = ξ$_{1}$x$_{n}$ (20)$$\n\n## IV. GREEN FUNCTION AT THE SHADOW MASS SHELL, ω ∼ k$_{y}$ ." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6237561110050822, + "doc_id": "ebc066b36ce44b9da23c08afd3cfb039499a955a8e1927faffe943e3fdc73814", + "edit_distance": 0.3488372093023256, + "f1_score": 0.8866666666666668, + "meteor": 0.9321276535966248, + "precision": 0.83125, + "pred_md": "FIG. 13: The diffusion scaling with the pair contribution to the excess entropy at (a) high and (b) low temperatures for the soft repulsive shoulder system.\n\nFIG. 13: The diffusion scaling with the pair contribution to the excess entropy at (a) high and (b) low temperatures for the soft repulsive shoulder system.\n\n/s40/s98/s41\n\n/s48\n\n/s83\n\n/s101 /s120\n\n/s45/s49\n\n/s45/s50\n\n/s45/s51\n\n/s45/s52\n\n/s48/s46/s48\n\n/s48/s46/s49\n\n/s48/s46/s50\n\n/s48/s46/s51\n\n/s48/s46/s52\n\n/s48/s46/s53\n\n/s48/s46/s54\n\n/s48/s46/s55\n\n/s48/s46/s56\n\n/s48/s46/s57\n\nFIG. 12: Excess entropy and pair excess entropy for the soft repulsive shoulder system for (a) T = 0 5 and (b) . T = 0 2. .\n\n## CONCLUSIONS\n\nThis articles presents a simulation study of the applicability of the Rosenfeld entropy scaling to the systems with negative curvature and bounded potentials. It was shown that the excess entropy scaling can not be applied to such systems at low enough temperatures. Interestingly all of the systems considered here demonstrate anomalous diffusion behavior in some regions of temperatures and densities. It makes questionable if the Rosenfeld relation is applicable for the systems with diffusion anomaly. These results are in contradiction with the results of Refs. 17, 18. This contradiction may be attributed to the dif-\n\n/s32\n\n/s83\n\n/s32\n\n/s115\n\n/s50\n\n/s101/s120\n\n/s50\n\nferences of considered potentials and simulation methods, however, this question requires further investigation and will be a topic of a subsequent publication.\n\nOne can suppose that the excess entropy scaling is invalid for the systems with negative curvature potentials such as repulsive shoulder potential. A possible reason for this can be related to the fact that such systems are effectively quasibinary [41, 45]. As it was mentioned in the introduction, the original Rosenfeld idea was based on the connection of a liquid under investigation to the effective hard spheres liquid. At the same time liquids with negative curvature potentials may be approximated\n\n9", + "recall": 0.95, + "true_md": "9\n\nFIG. 12: Excess entropy and pair excess entropy for the soft repulsive shoulder system for (a) T = 0 . 5 and (b) T = 0 . 2.\n\nFIG. 13: The diffusion scaling with the pair contribution to the excess entropy at (a) high and (b) low temperatures for the soft repulsive shoulder system.\n\n## CONCLUSIONS\n\nferences of considered potentials and simulation methods, however, this question requires further investigation and will be a topic of a subsequent publication.\n\nThis articles presents a simulation study of the applica- bility of the Rosenfeld entropy scaling to the systems with negative curvature and bounded potentials. It was shown that the excess entropy scaling can not be applied to such systems at low enough temperatures. Interestingly all of the systems considered here demonstrate anomalous diffusion behavior in some regions of temperatures and densities. It makes questionable if the Rosenfeld rela- tion is applicable for the systems with diffusion anomaly. These results are in contradiction with the results of Refs. 17, 18. This contradiction may be attributed to the dif-\n\nOne can suppose that the excess entropy scaling is in- valid for the systems with negative curvature potentials such as repulsive shoulder potential. A possible reason for this can be related to the fact that such systems are effectively quasibinary [41, 45]. As it was mentioned in the introduction, the original Rosenfeld idea was based on the connection of a liquid under investigation to the effective hard spheres liquid. At the same time liquids with negative curvature potentials may be approximated" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6423899451637497, + "doc_id": "6ec8059a6057175cfab89374a4f7ad3805910c3543227a66b2f455cc687ae99d", + "edit_distance": 0.7393026941362916, + "f1_score": 0.9003984063745021, + "meteor": 0.5656392071749525, + "precision": 0.93646408839779, + "pred_md": "time average S x . For example, for the initial TwinFock preparation (Fig. 4d), it reproduces the universal Josephson-regime FringeVisibility of ∼ 1 / 3, resulting from the dynamical smearing of the Wigner distribution function throughout the linear sea region of phase-space [24].\n\nIn what follows we would like to determine the long time average S x and the power spectrum ˜ ( C ω ) = FT[ f ( )] of the temporal fluctuations t f ( ) = t S x ( ) t -S x . (FT denotes Fourier Transform). Characteristic powerspectra for the pertinent preparations are shown in the right panels of Fig. 5. We characterize the fluctuations by their typical frequency ω osc , by their spectral support (discrete or continuous-like), and by their RMS value:\n\n\n\nThe dependence of ω osc , and S x , and RMS[ S x ] on the dimensionless parameters ( u, N ) is illustrated in Figs. 78. It should be realized that the observed frequency of the S x ( ) t oscillations is in fact 2 ω osc due to the mirror symmetry of the observable.\n\n## VII. DYNAMICS (II) - FRINGE VISIBILITY IN THE JOSEPHSON REGIME\n\nIn the Fock regime, the FringeVisibility of an initial coherent ϕ preparation decays to zero: the initial Gaussian-like distribution located at ( θ = π/ , ϕ 2 ) is stretched along the equator, leading to increased relativephase uncertainty with fixed population-imbalance. This phase spreading process is known in the literature as 'phase diffusion' [14-17, 21]. By contrast, a TwinFock preparation is nearly an eigenstate of the BHH in this regime, and its zero FringeVisibility remains vanishingly small from the beginning.\n\nIn the Josephson regime the dynamics of the singleparticle coherence is more intricate. In this section we discuss the evolution of S ( ) t within the framework of the semiclassical approximation. As a first step, we disregard fluctuations and recurrences and address only the time-averaged dynamics. In particular, we determine the long-time average of the FringeVisibility, which for the TwinFock, Pi, and Zero preparations is given by S x ( ), t as noted after Eq. (55).\n\nNumerical results for the long-time average and for the RMS of the fluctuations as a function of u/N are presented in Fig. 8 and further discussed below. The main observations regrading the dynamics in the Josephson regime are:\n\n- · The TwinFock preparation of fully-separated condensates develops phase-locking at ϕ ∼ 0, with FringeVisibility S x ( ) t ≈ 1 / 3 [41].\n- · Starting from a SCS preparation, phase-diffusion becomes phase sensitive. The Zero preparation is\n\n7\n\nphase-locked, while the coherence of the Pi preparation is partially lost [22, 24, 52], exhibiting huge fluctuations.\n\n- · The Edge preparation exhibits distinct behavior, that neither resembles the Zero nor the Pi preparations, involving sign reversal of S x ( ). t\n\nIn the remaining part of this section we quantify these observations by finding the long-time average S x ( ) based t on simple phase-space considerations. In the Josephson regime, the value of S x ( ) t for a coherent preparation should be determined by the ratio between its ∆ n ≈ √ N/ 2 width and the width of the separatrix region ∆ n ≈ √ NK/U , i.e.\n\n\n\nThis ratio determines the long-time phase-space distribution of the evolving semiclassical cloud: In the case of a TwinFock preparation this cloud fills the entire sea region; in the 'Zero' case it is confined to an ellipse within the sea region; and in the 'Pi' case it stretches along the separatrix and therefore resembles a micro-canonical distribution. The projected phase-distribution P( ϕ ) is determined accordingly. Disregarding a global normalization factor we get\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nA few words are in order regarding the derivation of the above expressions. The Zero case preparation is represented by the Gaussian of Eq.(35) whose major axis is ∆ n ≈ ( N/ 2) 1 / 2 . This Gaussian evolves along the contour lines of the Hamiltonian H ( n, ϕ ) = Un 2 +( NK/ 2) cos( ϕ ). After sufficiently long time the evolving distribution still has the same ∆ n , but because of the spreading its other major axis, as determined by the equation U ∆ n 2 = ( NK/ 4)∆ ϕ 2 , becomes ∆ ϕ ≈ (2 U/K ) 1 / 2 leading to Eq.(58). The TwinFock preparation is represented by Eq.(36). After sufficiently long time the evolving distribution fills the whole sea H ( θ, ϕ ) < E x . The equation that describes this filled sea can be written as n < n x ( ϕ ), where\n\n\n\nThe projection of area under n < n x ( ϕ ) is simply P( ϕ ) ∝ n x ( ϕ ), leading to Eq.(60). The Pi case preparation is represented by the Gaussian that is located on the separatrix. After sufficiently long time the evolving distribution is stretched along n ∼ n x ( ϕ ), and looks like δ ( H ( θ, ϕ ) -E x ). If we neglected the finite width of this distribution we would obtain P( ϕ ) ∝ 1 /n x ( ϕ ), which is divergent at ϕ ∼ π . But if we take into account the", + "recall": 0.8670076726342711, + "true_md": "7\n\nphase-locked, while the coherence of the Pi prepa- ration is partially lost [22, 24, 52], exhibiting huge fluctuations.\n\ntime average S$_{x}$ . For example, for the initial Twin- Fock preparation (Fig. 4d), it reproduces the univer- sal Josephson-regime FringeVisibility of ∼ 1 / 3, resulting from the dynamical smearing of the Wigner distribution function throughout the linear sea region of phase-space [24].\n\nIn the remaining part of this section we quantify these observations by finding the long-time average S$_{x}$ ( t ) based on simple phase-space considerations. In the Joseph- son regime, the value of S$_{x}$ ( t ) for a coherent prepa- ration should be determined by the ratio between its Δ n ≈ √ N/ 2 width and the width of the separatrix re- gion Δ n ≈ √ NK/U , i.e. the semiclassical ratio = ( u/N ) 1 / 2 . (57)\n\nIn what follows we would like to determine the long time average S$_{x}$ and the power spectrum ˜ C ( ω ) = FT[ f ( t )] of the temporal fluctuations f ( t ) = S$_{x}$ ( t ) − S$_{x}$ . (FT denotes Fourier Transform). Characteristic power- spectra for the pertinent preparations are shown in the right panels of Fig. 5. We characterize the fluctuations by their typical frequency ω$_{osc}$ , by their spectral support (discrete or continuous-like), and by their RMS value:\n\nThe dependence of ω$_{osc}$ , and S$_{x}$ , and RMS[ S$_{x}$ ] on the dimensionless parameters ( u, N ) is illustrated in Figs. 7- 8. It should be realized that the observed frequency of the S$_{x}$ ( t ) oscillations is in fact 2 ω$_{osc}$ due to the mirror symmetry of the observable.\n\nThis ratio determines the long-time phase-space distribu- tion of the evolving semiclassical cloud: In the case of a TwinFock preparation this cloud fills the entire sea re- gion; in the ”Zero” case it is confined to an ellipse within the sea region; and in the ”Pi” case it stretches along the separatrix and therefore resembles a micro-canonical distribution. The projected phase-distribution P( ϕ ) is determined accordingly. Disregarding a global normal- ization factor we get\n\nIn the Fock regime, the FringeVisibility of an ini- tial coherent ϕ preparation decays to zero: the ini- tial Gaussian-like distribution located at ( θ = π/ 2 , ϕ ) is stretched along the equator, leading to increased relative- phase uncertainty with fixed population-imbalance. This phase spreading process is known in the literature as ‘phase diffusion’ [14–17, 21]. By contrast, a TwinFock preparation is nearly an eigenstate of the BHH in this regime, and its zero FringeVisibility remains vanishingly small from the beginning.\n\nA few words are in order regarding the derivation of the above expressions. The Zero case prepa- ration is represented by the Gaussian of Eq.(35) whose major axis is Δ n ≈ ( N/ 2) 1 / $^{2}$. This Gaussian evolves along the contour lines of the Hamiltonian H ( n, ϕ ) = Un 2 + ( NK/ 2) cos( ϕ ). After sufficiently long time the evolving distribution still has the same Δ n , but because of the spreading its other major axis, as determined by the equation U Δ n 2 = ( NK/ 4)Δ ϕ $^{2}$, be- comes Δ ϕ ≈ (2 U/K ) 1 / 2 leading to Eq.(58). The Twin- Fock preparation is represented by Eq.(36). After suffi- ciently long time the evolving distribution fills the whole sea H ( θ, ϕ ) < E$_{x}$ . The equation that describes this filled sea can be written as n < n$_{x}$ ( ϕ ), where\n\n$$n$_{x}$ ( ϕ ) = √ NK 2 U (1 + cos( ϕ )) . (61)$$\n\n## VII. DYNAMICS (II) - FRINGE VISIBILITY IN THE JOSEPHSON REGIME\n\n$$RMS[ S$_{x}$ ] = [ f ( t ) $^{2}$] 1 / 2 = [∫ ˜ C ( ω ) dω ] 1 / 2 , (56)$$\n\n- • The Edge preparation exhibits distinct behavior, that neither resembles the Zero nor the Pi prepa- rations, involving sign reversal of S$_{x}$ ( t ).\n\nIn the Josephson regime the dynamics of the single- particle coherence is more intricate. In this section we discuss the evolution of S ( t ) within the framework of the semiclassical approximation. As a first step, we dis- regard fluctuations and recurrences and address only the time-averaged dynamics. In particular, we determine the long-time average of the FringeVisibility, which for the TwinFock, Pi, and Zero preparations is given by S$_{x}$ ( t ), as noted after Eq. (55).\n\nNumerical results for the long-time average and for the RMS of the fluctuations as a function of u/N are pre- sented in Fig. 8 and further discussed below. The main observations regrading the dynamics in the Josephson regime are:\n\nThe projection of area under n < n$_{x}$ ( ϕ ) is simply P( ϕ ) ∝ n$_{x}$ ( ϕ ), leading to Eq.(60). The Pi case prepa- ration is represented by the Gaussian that is located on the separatrix. After sufficiently long time the evolv- ing distribution is stretched along n ∼ n$_{x}$ ( ϕ ), and looks like δ ( H ( θ, ϕ ) − E$_{x}$ ). If we neglected the finite width of this distribution we would obtain P( ϕ ) ∝ 1 /n$_{x}$ ( ϕ ), which is divergent at ϕ ∼ π . But if we take into account the\n\n- • The TwinFock preparation of fully-separated con- densates develops phase-locking at ϕ ∼ 0, with FringeVisibility S$_{x}$ ( t ) ≈ 1 / 3 [41].\n\n- • Starting from a SCS preparation, phase-diffusion becomes phase sensitive. The Zero preparation is" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5635072172910367, + "doc_id": "af4b3c82f4a33ec5b630d4c7307e3d877248b4c3460b12d0a08994b5cc139f06", + "edit_distance": 0.7565891472868217, + "f1_score": 0.9238578680203047, + "meteor": 0.6556468681969766, + "precision": 0.9238578680203046, + "pred_md": "Fit to Longitudinal Field Bz(z) Using Elliptical Cylinder at (x,y)=(0.4,0.2) cm\n\nFIG. 23: Fit to the proposed ILC wiggler longitudinal field versus z , where x = 0 4 cm, . y = 0 2 cm. The solid line is com-. puted using data on the surface of an elliptical cylinder with x max = 4 4 cm, . y max = 2 4 cm, using the polynomial series . for B obtained from (11) or (12). Dots represent numerical data provided by OPERA-3d.\n\nFIG. 23: Fit to the proposed ILC wiggler longitudinal field versus z , where x = 0 4 cm, . y = 0 2 cm. The solid line is com-. puted using data on the surface of an elliptical cylinder with x max = 4 4 cm, . y max = 2 4 cm, using the polynomial series . for B obtained from (11) or (12). Dots represent numerical data provided by OPERA-3d.\n\nFIG. 24: Difference (Gauss) between the vertical field B y of the proposed ILC wiggler and its fitted value across the midplane y = 0. Peak field is 16.7 kG.\n\nFIG. 24: Difference (Gauss) between the vertical field B y of the proposed ILC wiggler and its fitted value across the midplane y = 0. Peak field is 16.7 kG.\n\n## B. ILC Damping Ring Wiggler Design Orbit and Associated Transfer Map\n\nThe on-axis gradients computed for the ILC wiggler were then used in the code MaryLie/IMPACT to integrate, simultaneously, i) equations for the design orbit of a 5 GeV positron through the wiggler, ii) equations for the matrix elements of the linear part of the transfer map through the wiggler, and iii) equations for the coefficients of the generating polynomials f 3 , f 4 ,... appearing in the\n\nx (m)\n\n5 GeV Reference Orbit Through CESR-c Modified Wiggler\n\nz (m)\n\nz (m)\n\nFIG. 25: Design orbit for a 5 GeV positron through the proposed ILC wiggler. (Upper) Coordinate x (mm) along the length of the wiggler z (m). (Lower) Design orbit in the phase space defined by coordinates x (mm) and p x /p 0 .\n\nFIG. 25: Design orbit for a 5 GeV positron through the proposed ILC wiggler. (Upper) Coordinate x (mm) along the length of the wiggler z (m). (Lower) Design orbit in the phase space defined by coordinates x (mm) and p x /p 0 .\n\nLie factorization of the transfer map. Each generator of the symplectic transfer map M is computed in variables representing deviations from the design orbit. See the Appendix for a brief discussion of Lie methods.\n\nThe design orbit is displayed in Fig. 25, and Table I lists its initial and final conditions. Table II displays the matrix R 2 that describes the linear part of the transfer map in (62). Phase-space coordinates are arranged in the order ( x, p x , y, p y , τ, p τ ). The first few Lie generators f m of the nonlinear part of the transfer map are listed in Table III.\n\n## VII. CONCLUDING SUMMARY\n\nSurface methods provide a reliable and numerically robust technique for extracting transfer maps from numerical field data. By benchmarking them against a nu-\n\n16", + "recall": 0.9238578680203046, + "true_md": "FIG. 25: Design orbit for a 5 GeV positron through the prop osed ILC wiggler. (Upper) Coordinate x (mm) along the length of the wiggler z (m). (Lower) Design orbit in the phase space defined by coordinates x (mm) and p$_{x}$/p $^{0}$.\n\nFIG. 23: Fit to the proposed ILC wiggler longitudinal field versus z , where x = 0 . 4 cm, y = 0 . 2 cm. The solid line is com- puted using data on the surface of an elliptical cylinder with x$_{max}$ = 4 . 4 cm, y$_{max}$ = 2 . 4 cm, using the polynomial series for B obtained from (11) or (12). Dots represent numerical data provided by OPERA-3d.\n\nFIG. 24: Difference (Gauss) between the vertical field B$_{y}$ of the proposed ILC wiggler and its fitted value across the midplane y = 0. Peak field is 16.7 kG.\n\nLie factorization of the transfer map. Each generator of the symplectic transfer map M is computed in variables represen ting deviations from the design orbit. See the Appendix for a brief discussion of Lie methods.\n\nThe design orbit is displayed in Fig. 25, and Table I lists its initial and final conditions. Table II displays the matrix R$_{2}$ that describes the linear part of the transfer map in (62). Phase-space coordinates are arranged in the order ( x, p$_{x}$, y, p$_{y}$, τ, p$_{τ}$ ). The first few Lie generators f$_{m}$ of the nonlinear part of the transfer map are listed in Table III.\n\nSurface methods provide a reliable and numerically ro- bust technique for extracting transfer maps from numer- ical field data. By benchmarking them against a nu-\n\nThe on-axis gradients computed for the ILC wiggler were then used in the code MaryLie/IMPACT to inte- grate, simultaneously, i) equations for the design orbit of a 5 GeV positron through the wiggler, ii) equations for the matrix elements of the linear part of the transfer map through the wiggler, and iii) equations for the coefficients of the generating polynomials f$_{3}$ , f$_{4}$ ,... appearing in the\n\n## B. ILC Damping Ring Wiggler Design Orbit and Associated Transfer Map\n\n## VII. CONCLUDING SUMMARY\n\n16" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7929248034160199, + "doc_id": "206d97741c6ccb32764f6a8799e637c8fcf83f0bef446ef57bf2ddc448d7c1c5", + "edit_distance": 0.37388724035608306, + "f1_score": 0.8911651728553136, + "meteor": 0.7656405502757303, + "precision": 0.9329758713136729, + "pred_md": "arXiv:1001.0570v1 [hep-ph] 4 Jan 2010\n\n## Background magnetic field stabilizes QCD string against breaking\n\n## M. N. Chernodub ∗\n\nLaboratoire de Math' ematiques et Physique Th' eorique, Universit' Fran¸ois-Rabelais e c Tours, F' ed'ration e Denis Poisson - CNRS, Parc de Grandmont, 37200 Tours, France DMPA, University of Gent, Krijgslaan 281, S9, B-9000 Gent, Belgium (Dated: January 3, 2010)\n\nThe confinement of quarks in hadrons occurs due to formation of QCD string. At large separation between the quarks the QCD string breaks into pieces due to light quark-antiquark pair creation. We argue that there exist a critical background magnetic field eB /similarequal 16 m 2 π , above which the string breaking is impossible in the transverse directions with respect to the axis of the magnetic field. Thus, at strong enough magnetic field a new, asymmetrically confining phase may form. The effect - which can potentially be tested at LHC/ALICE experiment - leads to abundance of u -quark rich hadrons and to excess of radially excited mesons in the noncentral heavy-ion collisions compared to the central ones.\n\nPACS numbers: 25.75.-q,12.38.Aw\n\nMotivation. Noncentral heavy-ion collisions create intense magnetic fields with the magnitude of the order of the QCD scale. According to [1] the strength of the emerging magnetic field B may reach\n\n\n\nat the Relativistic Heavy Ion Collider (RHIC) and at the Large Hadron Collider (LHC). Here e = | e | is the absolute value of the electron charge.\n\nThere are various potentially observable QCD effects associated with the presence of the strong magnetic field background. One can mention a CP-odd generation of an electric current of quarks along the axis of the magnetic field ('the chiral magnetic effect') [2] and enhancement of the chiral symmetry breaking ('the magnetic catalysis') [3]. The latter is related to the fact that the background magnetic field makes the chiral condensate larger [4]. Acting through the chiral condensate, the magnetic field also shifts and strengthens the chiral transition [5].\n\nRecently, observation of certain signatures of the chiral magnetic effect was reported by the STAR collaboration at the RHIC experimental facility [6]. Some effects were also found in numerical simulations of lattice QCD. There exists numerical evidence in favor of existence of both the chiral magnetic effect [7] and the enhancement of the chiral symmetry breaking [8]. In addition, a chiral magnetization of the QCD vacuum - discussed first in Ref. [9] - was calculated numerically [10]. The lattice simulations have also revealed that due to CP-odd structure of the QCD vacuum the quark's magnetic dipole moment in a strong magnetic field gets a large CP-odd piece, the electric dipole moment [11].\n\nIn addition to the chiral properties, the background magnetic field should also be important for confining features of QCD despite the photons are not interacting with the gluons directly. A strong enough magnetic field affects the dynamics of the gluons through the in-\n\nfluence on the quarks, because the quarks are coupled to the both gauge fields [12]. And, indeed, thermodynamic arguments of Ref. [13] suggest that the background magnetic field should shift and weaken the confinementdeconfinement phase transition in the QCD vacuum. The confining and deconfining regions at zero temperature are separated by a smooth crossover which is located at [13]\n\n\n\nDue to the crossover nature of the transition, the difference between confining and deconfining regions is somewhat obscure. Therefore the confining interaction between the quarks may also be visible at the magnetic fields that are stronger than the crossover scale (2).\n\nAlthough in our paper we discuss QCD vacuum effects of the strong magnetic fields below the crossover scale (2), it is interesting to mention that at stronger magnetic fields, eB /greaterorsimilar 150 m 2 π an exotic condensation of the uu ¯ pairs should occur [14]. Effects induced by magnetic field at finite quark density are also dramatic. For example, at eB /greaterorsimilar 3 m 2 π a stack of parallel π 0 domain walls should become more favorable (from an energy-related point of view) than nuclear matter at the same density [15].\n\nConfinement and string breaking at B = 0. The quark confinement exists because the chromoelectric flux (in, say, a test quark-antiquark pair) is squeezed into a stringlike structure, the QCD string, due to nonperturbative vacuum effects. The QCD string has a nonzero tension σ , and therefore the energy of the long enough string is proportional to its length R ,\n\n\n\nIn a quarkless QCD (i.e., in Yang-Mills theory) the energy of the QCD string (3) rises infinitely with the separation between test quark and antiquark. Inevitably, the unboundedness of the potential leads to the quark confinement. However, in the real QCD the string breaks", + "recall": 0.8529411764705882, + "true_md": "# Background magnetic field stabilizes QCD string against breaking\n\nM. N. Chernodub ∗\n\nLaboratoire de Math´ ematiques et Physique Th´ eorique, Universit´ e Fran¸cois-Rabelais Tours, F´ ed´ eration Denis Poisson - CNRS, Parc de Grandmont, 37200 Tours, France DMPA, University of Gent, Krijgslaan 281, S9, B-9000 Gent, Belgium\n\n(Dated: January 3, 2010)\n\nThe confinement of quarks in hadrons occurs due to formation of QCD string. At large separation between the quarks the QCD string breaks into pieces due to light quark-antiquark pair creation. We argue that there exist a critical background magnetic field eB$_{≃}$ 16 m 2 π , above which the string breaking is impossible in the transverse directions with respect to the axis of the magnetic field. Thus, at strong enough magnetic field a new, asymmetrically confining phase may form. The effect – which can potentially be tested at LHC/ALICE experiment – leads to abundance of u -quark rich hadrons and to excess of radially excited mesons in the noncentral heavy-ion collisions compared to the central ones.\n\nPACS numbers: 25.75.-q,12.38.Aw\n\nMotivation. Noncentral heavy-ion collisions create intense magnetic fields with the magnitude of the order of the QCD scale. According to [1] the strength of the emerging magnetic field B may reach\n\nat the Relativistic Heavy Ion Collider (RHIC) and at the Large Hadron Collider (LHC). Here e = | e | is the absolute value of the electron charge.\n\nThere are various potentially observable QCD effects associated with the presence of the strong magnetic field background. One can mention a CP-odd generation of an electric current of quarks along the axis of the mag- netic field (“the chiral magnetic effect”) [2] and enhance- ment of the chiral symmetry breaking (“the magnetic catalysis”) [3]. The latter is related to the fact that the background magnetic field makes the chiral conden- sate larger [4]. Acting through the chiral condensate, the magnetic field also shifts and strengthens the chiral transition [5].\n\nRecently, observation of certain signatures of the chi- ral magnetic effect was reported by the STAR collabora- tion at the RHIC experimental facility [6]. Some effects were also found in numerical simulations of lattice QCD. There exists numerical evidence in favor of existence of both the chiral magnetic effect [7] and the enhancement of the chiral symmetry breaking [8]. In addition, a chi- ral magnetization of the QCD vacuum – discussed first in Ref. [9] – was calculated numerically [10]. The lattice simulations have also revealed that due to CP-odd struc- ture of the QCD vacuum the quark’s magnetic dipole moment in a strong magnetic field gets a large CP-odd piece, the electric dipole moment [11].\n\nIn addition to the chiral properties, the background magnetic field should also be important for confining features of QCD despite the photons are not interact- ing with the gluons directly. A strong enough magnetic field affects the dynamics of the gluons through the in-\n\nIn a quarkless QCD (i.e., in Yang-Mills theory) the en- ergy of the QCD string (3) rises infinitely with the sepa- ration between test quark and antiquark. Inevitably, the unboundedness of the potential leads to the quark con- finement. However, in the real QCD the string breaks\n\nConfinement and string breaking at B = 0. The quark confinement exists because the chromoelectric flux (in, say, a test quark-antiquark pair) is squeezed into a stringlike structure, the QCD string, due to nonpertur- bative vacuum effects. The QCD string has a nonzero tension σ , and therefore the energy of the long enough string is proportional to its length R ,\n\nAlthough in our paper we discuss QCD vacuum effects of the strong magnetic fields below the crossover scale (2), it is interesting to mention that at stronger magnetic fields, eB ≳ 150 m 2 π an exotic condensation of the u ¯ u pairs should occur [14]. Effects induced by magnetic field at finite quark density are also dramatic. For example, at eB ≳ 3 m 2 π a stack of parallel π 0 domain walls should become more favorable (from an energy-related point of view) than nuclear matter at the same density [15].\n\nDue to the crossover nature of the transition, the differ- ence between confining and deconfining regions is some- what obscure. Therefore the confining interaction be- tween the quarks may also be visible at the magnetic fields that are stronger than the crossover scale (2).\n\nfluence on the quarks, because the quarks are coupled to the both gauge fields [12]. And, indeed, thermody- namic arguments of Ref. [13] suggest that the background magnetic field should shift and weaken the confinement- deconfinement phase transition in the QCD vacuum. The confining and deconfining regions at zero temperature are separated by a smooth crossover which is located at [13]\n\n$$eB max RHIC ∼ m 2 $_{π}$, eB max LHC ∼ 15 m 2 π (1)$$\n\n$$eB$_{cross}$ [ T = 0] ∼ (700 MeV) 2 ∼ 25 m 2 $_{π}$. (2)$$\n\n$$V$_{str}$ ( R ) = σR , (3)$$\n\narXiv:1001.0570v1 [hep-ph] 4 Jan 2010" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7574539166986978, + "doc_id": "5510c6fcc0236ce31fefceff778a8d85319fac7532d602e5f89a9a19362e5125", + "edit_distance": 0.23597678916827852, + "f1_score": 0.9025844930417496, + "meteor": 0.8903100113778907, + "precision": 0.9497907949790795, + "pred_md": "2009 Fermi Symposium, Washington, D.C., Nov. 2-5\n\n5\n\nFigure 5: Ratio of γ -ray luminosity to submillimeter luminosity in the 1mm band. The location of an object in this plot should be directly correlated with its blazar 'state', with FSRQs occupying the upper right and BL Lacs the lower left. Flat-spectrum radio quasar 3C 454.3 is the object with the highest submillimeter luminosity in this plot.\n\nFigure 5: Ratio of γ -ray luminosity to submillimeter luminosity in the 1mm band. The location of an object in this plot should be directly correlated with its blazar 'state', with FSRQs occupying the upper right and BL Lacs the lower left. Flat-spectrum radio quasar 3C 454.3 is the object with the highest submillimeter luminosity in this plot.\n\n- · BL Lacs and FSRQs do not exhibit significant differences in amplitude of submillimeter variability or characteristic timescale, but our sample of BL Lacs may be dominated by highpeaked BL Lacs (HBLs), which exhibit observational similarities with FSRQs.\n- · Blazar submillimeter light curves are consistent with being produced by a single process that accounts for both high and low states, with characteristic timescales 10 < τ rest < 500 days.\n- · The blazars detected by Fermi have synchrotron peaks at higher frequencies, regardless of submillimeter luminosity.\n- · FSRQs exhibit higher ratios of γ -ray to submillimeter luminosity than BL Lacs (Figure 5), but all objects inhabit a region of parameter space suggesting transitions between states during flaring epochs.\n\nAs Fermi continues to observe fainter sources, the sample of objects for which we can perform this type of analysis will increase and provide better limits on our results. To understand the physical relevance of these results, however, it is important to be able to distinguish between the difference in variability between BL\n\neConf C091122\n\nLacs and FSRQs. One avenue for exploring this difference is to monitor changing submillimeter energy spectral index and the ratio of γ -ray to submillimeter luminosity as functions of time. The full meaning of the results of our autoregressive method is not yet clear, and will require better-sampled blazar light curves and the comparison between τ rest with physical timescales such as the synchrotron cooling timescale. These analyses would allow us to place constraints on the processes occurring near the base of the jet in blazars and further understand the intimate connection between them.\n\n## Acknowledgments\n\nThis work was supported in part by the NSF REU and DoD ASSURE programs under Grant no. 0754568 and by the Smithsonian Institution. Partial support was also provided by NASA contract NAS8-39073 and NASA grant NNX07AQ55G. We have made use of the SIMBAD database, operated at CDS, Strasbourg, France, and the NASA/IPAC Extragalactic Database (NED) which is operated by the JPL, Caltech, under contract with NASA.", + "recall": 0.8598484848484849, + "true_md": "2009 Fermi Symposium, Washington, D.C., Nov. 2-5\n\n5\n\nFigure 5: Ratio of γ -ray luminosity to submillimeter luminosity in the 1mm band. The location of an object in this plot should be directly correlated with its blazar “state”, with FSRQs occupying the upper right and BL Lacs the lower left. Flat-spectrum radio quasar 3C 454.3 is the object with the highest submillimeter luminosity in this plot.\n\n- • BL Lacs and FSRQs do not exhibit significant differences in amplitude of submillimeter vari- ability or characteristic timescale, but our sam- ple of BL Lacs may be dominated by high- peaked BL Lacs (HBLs), which exhibit obser- vational similarities with FSRQs.\n\n- • Blazar submillimeter light curves are consistent with being produced by a single process that ac- counts for both high and low states, with char- acteristic timescales 10 < τ$_{rest}$ < 500 days.\n\n- • The blazars detected by Fermi have synchrotron peaks at higher frequencies, regardless of sub- millimeter luminosity.\n\n- • FSRQs exhibit higher ratios of γ -ray to sub- millimeter luminosity than BL Lacs (Figure 5), but all objects inhabit a region of parameter space suggesting transitions between states dur- ing flaring epochs.\n\nAs Fermi continues to observe fainter sources, the sample of objects for which we can perform this type of analysis will increase and provide better limits on our results. To understand the physical relevance of these results, however, it is important to be able to distin- guish between the difference in variability between BL\n\nLacs and FSRQs. One avenue for exploring this dif- ference is to monitor changing submillimeter energy spectral index and the ratio of γ -ray to submillime- ter luminosity as functions of time. The full mean- ing of the results of our autoregressive method is not yet clear, and will require better-sampled blazar light curves and the comparison between τ$_{rest}$ with physical timescales such as the synchrotron cooling timescale. These analyses would allow us to place constraints on the processes occurring near the base of the jet in blazars and further understand the intimate connec- tion between them.\n\nThis work was supported in part by the NSF REU and DoD ASSURE programs under Grant no. 0754568 and by the Smithsonian Institution. Par- tial support was also provided by NASA contract NAS8-39073 and NASA grant NNX07AQ55G. We have made use of the SIMBAD database, operated at CDS, Strasbourg, France, and the NASA/IPAC Ex- tragalactic Database (NED) which is operated by the JPL, Caltech, under contract with NASA.\n\n## Acknowledgments\n\neConf C091122" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5940414581361659, + "doc_id": "4b05c0df25ac296df90dac25d6c357c366875c01ab2041d3cb1ebcc75c3b622f", + "edit_distance": 0.5709010339734121, + "f1_score": 0.8953974895397488, + "meteor": 0.49333889315057305, + "precision": 0.9413489736070382, + "pred_md": "within the meso- and nano-scopic quantum transport. It gives identical result for the first order expansion in terms of α E ; higher order terms in α E differ by a numerical prefactor but are negligibly small for any realistic situations.\n\nUsing the expression for the asymmetric spatial shift, Eq. 12, we find for the induced spin polarization linear in the drift momentum (and hence the current density)\n\n\n\nwhere kF = √ 2 EF is the Fermi momentum, n 2 D = EF / π is the density of the 2DEG. (See Fig. 5 for the explanation of the integration domain for k q , .) On the other hand, the current density is j = qdn 2 D so that we find the final result\n\n\n\nIn a typical situation, all except the first term of this expansion are negligibly small so that the resulting spin polarization is independent of the height of the confining potential ∆ V and, according to the numerical results presented in the following section, practically independent of other gentle modifications of the model so that the first term should be useful as a general estimate of the magnitude of the current induced spin polarization in heterostructures based on 2DEG. Expressing the first order result in the S.I. units we obtain the central result of our work, stated in the introduction in Eq. 1.\n\n## IV. EFFECTS OF THE FINITE SLOPE OF THE EDGE AND THE PARTIAL SELF-CONSISTENCY\n\nThe aim of this section is to explore the rigidity of the result in Eq. 1 with respect to changes in the model of the confining potential at the edge. We will first address the dependence of our result on finite slope of the edge potential on the distance d using the potential energy\n\n\n\nQualitatively we can expect this dependence to be similarly weak as the dependence on ∆ V obtained in the previous section (Eq. 14). The reason behind this is a mutual cancellation of two effects: (1) increasing ∆ V increases the strength of the SO coupling in the Hamiltonian and hence the spin polarization, (2) increasing ∆ V decreases the amplitude of the wavefunctions in the region of the nonzero gradient of the confining edge potential and hence its sensitivity to the SO coupling.\n\nTo characterize this dependence quantitatively we have evaluated the expression Eq. 7 numerically, where the spindependent contribution to the density, n k q , σ ( x ) , was obtained from the eigenfunctions of the effective 1D Hamiltonian containing the potential energy Eq. 15 and, according to Eq. 3,\n\n4\n\nFIG. 2: (Color online) The difference in spin densities (red-full) and the density (green-dashed) of electrons close to the edge of the sample (located at x = 0). The former, similarly to the density, exhibits Friedel-like oscillations. Its first dominant local minimum (at x ≈ 0 2) dominates the contribution to the nonzero spin-polarization . obtained by integrating the difference in spin densities over whole x axis. The inset demonstrates the extrapolation of this integration with respect to its upper limit, l , using a fit to a functional form ∼ A sin ( 2 kF l + ) φ / l .\n\nFIG. 2: (Color online) The difference in spin densities (red-full) and the density (green-dashed) of electrons close to the edge of the sample (located at x = 0). The former, similarly to the density, exhibits Friedel-like oscillations. Its first dominant local minimum (at x ≈ 0 2) dominates the contribution to the nonzero spin-polarization . obtained by integrating the difference in spin densities over whole x axis. The inset demonstrates the extrapolation of this integration with respect to its upper limit, l , using a fit to a functional form ∼ A sin ( 2 kF l + ) φ / l .\n\nfrom it derived spin-orbit potential energy. The eigenfunctions were obtained by matching the plane-waves in regions x < 0 and x > d with the Airy functions in the region of the potential energy with linear slope, 0 < x < d . The integration over k in Eq. 7 could be done analytically, whereas the integral over q was done numerically on the regular mesh with Nk points. We used model parameters that are typical for 2DEG created within GaAs quantum wells 2 , electronic density n = 0 985 corresponding to the Fermi energy . EF = 3 01, . the current density j = 0 1 and the value of the spin-orbit pa-. rameter α E = 5 53 . × 10 -4 .\n\nFor d = 0 we confirm our analytical results for abrupt step potential, Eq. 14. The difference between the spin-up and spin-down densities, shown in Fig. 2, exhibits Friedel-like oscillations with the first period having a pronounced negative amplitude giving the major contribution to the non-zero spin polarization. The proportion of this amplitude to the electron is ∼ 10 -4 for the current density j = 0 1. . Since the current density in the experimental situation is typically j = 0 1 . -0 01 (the amplitude scales linearly with the current . density for these values of j ), this value is comparable to the amplitude of the spin polarization in the extrinsic spin Hall effect 4 . Unfortunately, in contract to the extrinsic spin Hall effect, the nonzero spin-density is located only within few Fermi wavelengths away from the edge.\n\nIntegrating the difference in the spin densities along the whole x axis we obtain the spin-polarization per unit length of the sample. The numerical result of this integration naturally depends on the upper limit of the integration; a reliable result, is easily obtained extrapolating the upper limit to infinity (inset of Fig. 2). Using this methodology we find the numerical", + "recall": 0.8537234042553191, + "true_md": "within the meso- and nano-scopic quantum transport. It gives identical result for the first order expansion in terms of α $_{E}$; higher order terms in α E differ by a numerical prefactor but are negligibly small for any realistic situations.\n\nUsing the expression for the asymmetric spatial shift, Eq. 12, we find for the induced spin polarization linear in the drift momentum (and hence the current density)\n\nwhere k$_{F}$ $_{=}$√$_{2}$$\\_{E}$$_{F}$ is the Fermi momentum, n$_{2}$$\\_{D}$ = E$\\_{F}$ / π is the density of the 2DEG. (See Fig. 5 for the explanation of the integration domain for k , q .) On the other hand, the current density is j = q$\\_{d}$n$\\_{2}$$_{D}$ so that we find the final result\n\nIn a typical situation, all except the first term of this expan - sion are negligibly small so that the resulting spin polarization is independent of the height of the confining potential Δ V and, according to the numerical results presented in the following section, practically independent of other gentle modificat ions of the model so that the first term should be useful as a general estimate of the magnitude of the current induced spin polariza- tion in heterostructures based on 2DEG. Expressing the first order result in the S.I. units we obtain the central result of our work, stated in the introduction in Eq. 1.\n\nThe aim of this section is to explore the rigidity of the result in Eq. 1 with respect to changes in the model of the confining potential at the edge. We will first address the dependence of our result on finite slope of the edge potential on the distanc e d using the potential energy\n\n Qualitatively we can expect this dependence to be similarly weak as the dependence on Δ V obtained in the previous sec- tion (Eq. 14). The reason behind this is a mutual cancellation of two effects: (1) increasing Δ V increases the strength of the SO coupling in the Hamiltonian and hence the spin polariza- tion, (2) increasing Δ V decreases the amplitude of the wave- functions in the region of the nonzero gradient of the confini ng edge potential and hence its sensitivity to the SO coupling.\n\nTo characterize this dependence quantitatively we have evaluated the expression Eq. 7 numerically, where the spin- dependent contribution to the density, n k , q σ ( x ) , was obtained from the eigenfunctions of the effective 1D Hamiltonian con- taining the potential energy Eq. 15 and, according to Eq. 3,\n\nIntegrating the difference in the spin densities along the whole x axis we obtain the spin-polarization per unit length of the sample. The numerical result of this integration naturally depends on the upper limit of the integration; a reliable result, is easily obtained extrapolating the upper limit to infinity(in- set of Fig. 2). Using this methodology we find the numerical\n\n× For d = 0 we confirm our analytical results for abrupt step potential, Eq. 14. The difference between the spin-up and spin-down densities, shown in Fig. 2, exhibits Friedel-like oscillations with the first period having a pronounced nega- tive amplitude giving the major contribution to the non-zero spin polarization. The proportion of this amplitude to the electron is ∼ 10 − 4 for the current density j = 0 . 1. Since the current density in the experimental situation is typically j = 0 . 1 − 0 . 01 (the amplitude scales linearly with the current density for these values of j ), this value is comparable to the amplitude of the spin polarization in the extrinsic spin Hall effect$^{4}$. Unfortunately, in contract to the extrinsic spin Hall ef- fect, the nonzero spin-density is located only within few Fermi wavelengths away from the edge.\n\nfrom it derived spin-orbit potential energy. The eigenfunc- tions were obtained by matching the plane-waves in regions x < 0 and x > d with the Airy functions in the region of the potential energy with linear slope, 0 < x < d . The integration over k in Eq. 7 could be done analytically, whereas the inte- gral over q was done numerically on the regular mesh with N$_{k}$ points. We used model parameters that are typical for 2DEG created within GaAs quantum wells$^{2}$, electronic den- sity n = 0 . 985 corresponding to the Fermi energy E$_{F}$ = 3 . 01, the current density j = 0 . 1 and the value of the spin-orbit pa- rameter α E = 5 . 53 × 10 − $^{4}$. For d = 0 we confirm our analytical results for abrupt step\n\nFIG. 2: (Color online) The difference in spin densities (red-full) and the density (green-dashed) of electrons close to the edge of the sample (located at x = 0). The former, similarly to the density, ex- hibits Friedel-like oscillations. Its first dominant localminimum (at x ≈ 0 . 2) dominates the contribution to the nonzero spin-polarization obtained by integrating the difference in spin densities over whole x axis. The inset demonstrates the extrapolation of this integration with respect to its upper limit, l , using a fit to a functional form ∼ A sin ( 2 k$_{F}$l + φ ) / l .\n\n4\n\n$$m$_{z}$ = ∫ k$_{F}$ − k$_{F}$ dq 2 π ∫ √ 2 E$_{F}$ − q 2 0 dk π [ l q + q$_{d}$ a ] = ($_{−}$ α E − 3 α 3 E Δ VE$_{F}$ + 2 3$^{α}$$^{3}$ $_{E}$E 2 F ) q$_{d}$n$_{2}$$_{D}$ (13)$$\n\n$$m$_{z}$ = − α E j − 3 α 3 E Δ VE$_{F}$ j + 2 3$^{α}$$^{3}$ $_{E}$E 2 F j + O ( α 5 $_{E}$, j $^{3}$) (14)$$\n\n$$V$_{d}$ ( x ) =    Δ V x < 0 Δ V − ( Δ V / d ) x 0 < x < d 0 x > d (15) Qualitatively we can expect this dependence to be similarly$$\n\n## IV. EFFECTS OF THE FINITE SLOPE OF THE EDGE AND THE PARTIAL SELF-CONSISTENCY" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4696396134417917, + "doc_id": "8573375081469aeb52afccc244f51cbef027e06aad1281b741fa416fe6a6debd", + "edit_distance": 0.8297074268567142, + "f1_score": 0.8556149732620321, + "meteor": 0.44474186216394007, + "precision": 0.9195402298850575, + "pred_md": "FIG. 3: The 2-D two-point correlation function ( ξ s ( σ, π )) for the SDSS DR3 C4 cluster survey with a median redshift of ¯=0.1. The z contours have been slightly smoothed.\n\nFIG. 3: The 2-D two-point correlation function ( ξ s ( σ, π )) for the SDSS DR3 C4 cluster survey with a median redshift of ¯=0.1. The z contours have been slightly smoothed.\n\nIn this formula, there is a degeneracy between g ∗ b i and g ∗ Θ m i which cannot be solely broken by fitting ξ s ( σ, π ); instead we simultaneously fit for v i p and b i from the data and then marginalize over the bias to obtain v p (independent of b ) in that redshift bin. Therefore, if our statistical determination of the history of v i p can be combined with an independent measurement of bias, then v i p can be determined precisely. The scaled parameter g ∗ Θ m i depends on all shift factors; the primordial amplitude or the enhancement of D m due to varying ω m , as well as later time Θ m evolution. But the estimation of v p from g ∗ Θ m i is independent of the uncertainty in the overall shifting.\n\nIf the evolution of g ∗ Θ m is measured, it can be used to reconstruct other coherent growth factors. The coherent growth factor of Φ can be given using the Euler equation,\n\n\n\nwhere no anisotropy condition is used. If the Poisson equation is validated then the re-constructed g ∗ Φ can be used to derive g ∗ δ m using the relation g ∗ δ m = ag ∗ Φ . Then this estimated matter fluctuation evolution can be used to determine bias from the measured g ∗ b i as b = g ∗ b i /g ∗ δ m .\n\n## III. REDSHIFT-SPACE DISTORTIONS FROM CLUSTERS OF GALAXIES\n\nAs a demonstration of the parameterization discussed above, we present here a measurement of the redshiftspace 2-D two-point correlation function ( ξ s ( σ, π )) for clusters of galaxies selected from the SDSS. We use an updated version of the C4 cluster catalogue [23] based\n\nwhere,\n\n5\n\non Data Release 3 (DR3; [38]) of the SDSS. Briefly, the C4 catalogue identifies clusters in a seven-dimensional galaxy position and colour space (righ ascension, declination, redshift, u -g, g -r, r -i, i -z ) using the SDSS Main Galaxy spectroscopic sample. This method greatly reduces the twin problems of projection effects and redshift space distortions in identifying physically-bound galaxy groups. This catalogue is composed of ∼ 2000 clusters in the redshift range 0 02 . < z < 0 15. .\n\nThe estimation of the correlation function relies crucially on our ability to compare the clustering of the data to that of a random field. Thus any artificial structures in the data must be considered when constructing the random catalogue. These problems include incompleteness, such as the angular mask (e.g. survey boundaries, bright stars and dust extinction in our own galaxy), and the radial distribution where at large distances, the mean space density decreases as we approach the magnitude limit of the survey. We have constructed random samples which takes these issues into account, i.e., the angular positions are randomly sampled from a sphere to lie within the DR3 mask, while the redshifts are obtained from a smooth spline fit to the real C4 redshift distribution (which removes true large scale structures). The random samples are then made to be 50 times denser than the real data to avoid Poisson noise.\n\nIn Figure 3, we show our estimation of the ξ s ( σ, π ) binned into with 6 configuration-space bins up to 60 Mpc (one bin per 10Mpc). Separations of less than 10 Mpc are removed to reduce the FoG effect. Error on ξ s ( σ, π ) were derived using the jackknife method [39], which involves dividing the survey into N sub-sections with equal area (and thus volume) and then computing the mean and variance of ξ s ( σ, π ) from these N measurements of the correlation function with the i th region removed each time (where i = 1 ...N ).\n\nIn our analysis, we divided the whole C4 area into N = 30 sub-subsections and determine the variance from [40],\n\n\n\nwhere N jack is the number of jackknife samples used and r i represents a single bin in the σ -π configuration space. Then we compute\n\n\n\nand the normalised covariance matrix is estimated from [39],\n\n\n\n", + "recall": 0.8, + "true_md": "5\n\non Data Release 3 (DR3; [38]) of the SDSS. Briefly, the C4 catalogue identifies clusters in a seven-dimensional ga la xy position and colour space (righ ascension, declina- tio n , redshift, u − g, g − r, r − i, i − z ) using the SDSS Main Ga la xy spectroscopic sample. This method greatly re- du c es the twin problems of projection effects and redshift sp a ce distortions in identifying physically–bound galaxy gr o ups. This catalogue is composed of ∼ 2000 clusters in th e redshift range 0 . 02 < z < 0 . 15.\n\nT he estimation of the correlation function relies cru- cia lly on our ability to compare the clustering of the data to t hat of a random field. Thus any artificial structures in t he data must be considered when constructing the ra n dom catalogue. These problems include incomplete- ne s s , such as the angular mask (e.g. survey boundaries, br ig ht stars and dust extinction in our own galaxy), and th e radial distribution where at large distances, the mean sp a ce density decreases as we approach the magnitude lim it of the survey. We have constructed random sam- ples which takes these issues into account, i.e., the angu- lar positions are randomly sampled from a sphere to lie within the DR3 mask, while the redshifts are obtained from a smooth spline fit to the real C4 redshift distri- bution (which removes true large scale structures). The random samples are then made to be 50 times denser than the real data to avoid Poisson noise.\n\nIn Figure 3, we show our estimation of the ξ$_{s}$ ( σ, π ) binned into with 6 configuration–space bins up to 60 Mpc (one bin per 10Mpc). Separations of less than 10 Mpc are removed to reduce the FoG effect. Error on ξ$_{s}$ ( σ, π ) were derived using the jackknife method [39], which in- volves dividing the survey into N sub-sections with equal area (and thus volume) and then computing the mean and variance of ξ$_{s}$ ( σ, π ) from these N measurements of the correlation function with the i th region removed each time (where i = 1 ...N ).\n\nIn our analysis, we divided the whole C4 area into N = 30 sub-subsections and determine the variance from [40],\n\nIn this formula, there is a degeneracy between g ∗ b i and g ∗ Θ$_{m}$ i which cannot be solely broken by fitting ξ$_{s}$ ( σ, π ); instead we simultaneously fit for v i p and b i from the data and then marginalize over the bias to obtain v$_{p}$ (indepen- dent of b ) in that redshift bin. Therefore, if our statistical determination of the history of v i p can be combined with an independent measurement of bias, then v i p can be de- termined precisely. The scaled parameter g ∗ Θ$_{m}$ i depends on all shift factors; the primordial amplitude or the en- hancement of D$_{m}$ due to varying ω$_{m}$ , as well as later time Θ$_{m}$ evolution. But the estimation of v$_{p}$ from g ∗ Θ$_{m}$ i is independent of the uncertainty in the overall shifting. ∗\n\nis independent of the uncertainty in the overall shifting. If the evolution of g ∗ Θ$_{m}$ is measured, it can be used to reconstruct other coherent growth factors. The coherent growth factor of Φ can be given using the Euler equation,\n\nFIG. 3: The 2-D two–point correlation function ( ξ$_{s}$ ( σ, π )) for the SDSS DR3 C4 cluster survey with a median redshift of ¯ z =0.1. The contours have been slightly smoothed.\n\n$$g ∗ Φ = 2 3 aH H 2 $_{∗}$ω$_{m}$ ( g ∗ θ$_{m}$ + dg ∗ θ$_{m}$ d ln a ) , (9)$$\n\n$$σ 2 $_{ξ}$( r$_{i}$ ) = N$_{jack}$ − 1 N$_{jack}$ N$_{jack}$ ∑ k =1 [ ξ$_{k}$ ( r$_{i}$ ) − ξ ( r$_{i}$ )] $^{2}$, (10) where N$_{jack}$ is the number of jackknife samples used and$$\n\nwhere no anisotropy condition is used. If the Poisson equation is validated then the re-constructed g ∗ Φ can be used to derive g ∗ δ$_{m}$ using the relation g ∗ δ$_{m}$ = ag ∗ $_{Φ}$. Then this estimated matter fluctuation evolution can be used to determine bias from the measured g ∗ b i as b = g ∗ $_{b i}$/g ∗ $_{δ$\\_{m}$}$.\n\n∑ where N$_{jack}$ is the number of jackknife samples used and r$_{i}$ represents a single bin in the σ − π configuration space. Then we compute\n\n$$ξ ( r$_{i}$ ) = 1 N$_{jack}$ N$_{jack}$ ∑ k =1 ξ$_{k}$ ( r$_{i}$ ) , (11) normalised covariance matrix is estimated$$\n\n$$C$_{ij}$ = N$_{jack}$ − 1 N$_{jack}$ k = N$_{jack}$ ∑ k =1 Δ k $_{i}$Δ k $_{j}$, (12)$$\n\n$$Δ k i = ξ$_{k}$ ( r$_{i}$ ) − ξ ( r$_{i}$ ) σ$_{ξ}$ ( r$_{i}$ ) . (13)$$\n\n## III. REDSHIFT–SPACE DISTORTIONS FROM CLUSTERS OF GALAXIES\n\nAs a demonstration of the parameterization discussed above, we present here a measurement of the redshift– space 2-D two–point correlation function ( ξ$_{s}$ ( σ, π )) for clusters of galaxies selected from the SDSS. We use an updated version of the C4 cluster catalogue [23] based\n\nwhere,\n\n∑ and the normalised covariance matrix is estimated from [39]," + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5108069805828818, + "doc_id": "5df60f22e1226f573abb99773c2f13e0093812f31ab334ca1fb90a98b8b9059b", + "edit_distance": 0.4146341463414634, + "f1_score": 0.9284064665127021, + "meteor": 0.6447608539224574, + "precision": 0.9571428571428572, + "pred_md": "FIG. 1: Numerical (solid) and approximate (dot-dashed) solutions for (a) all D 3 ( A ), D 2 ( A ), and D 1 ( A ), and (b) the enlarged plot of D 2 ( A ) and D 1 ( A ) in 0 ≤ A/δ 0 ≤ 10.\n\nFIG. 1: Numerical (solid) and approximate (dot-dashed) solutions for (a) all D 3 ( A ), D 2 ( A ), and D 1 ( A ), and (b) the enlarged plot of D 2 ( A ) and D 1 ( A ) in 0 ≤ A/δ 0 ≤ 10.\n\nFIG. 2: The numerical (solid) and approximate (dot-dashed) solutions for x 1 ( A ), x 2 ( A ), and x 3 ( A ). Note that y i ( A ) /similarequal -x i ( A ).\n\nFIG. 2: The numerical (solid) and approximate (dot-dashed) solutions for x 1 ( A ), x 2 ( A ), and x 3 ( A ). Note that y i ( A ) /similarequal -x i ( A ).\n\nA = ( A , A , A , A 0 l i h , A d ):\n\n\n\n\n\nTogether, these matrices exhibit the remarkable simplicity of the PMNS matrix as A varies from 0 to ∞ . Note that all of the matrices have at least one zero, W 1 I = 0, implying x I = y I = 0. Also, they have equal elements in their second and third rows, W 2 i = W 3 i , so that w 1 i = 0 or x i + y i = 0. As a consequence, using the unitarity conditions, the W matrix is completely fixed by its elements in the first row, W 1 i . These elements, in turn, control dD /dA i , Eq. (15). Thus, the progression of W as a function of A can be read off from the plot of D A i ( ), which is given in Fig. 1.\n\nIt is straightforward to numerically integrate the evolution equations for ( x, y ). To do this we choose the initial values (in W 0 ) /epsilon1 = 0 17, . β = 0 02, corresponding to the . experimental bounds | V e 3 | 2 ≤ 0 03 [6] . and an assumed CP violation phase cos φ = 1 4. Also, / ξ = η = 0. In Fig. 2 the results are compared to the approximate solutions obtained earlier (Eqs. (24) and (27)). The agreements are quite good. The evolution of J 2 is shown in Fig. 3. Compared to its vacuum value, it is seen that, except for some enhancement near A = A l , J 2 tends to decrease with increasing A , as one would expect from Eq. (18).\n\nIn conclusion, in this work we derived the evolution equations for the neutrino parameters as a function of matter density. We found analytic, approximate, but simple solutions of these equations for values centered around the known neutrino parameters. This is possible because of two fortuitous circumstances: 1) the neutrino mass differences are widely separated, enabling one to use the two-flavor resonance approximation; 2) the mixing in\n\n4", + "recall": 0.9013452914798207, + "true_md": "FIG. 1: Numerical (solid) and approximate (dot-dashed) solutions for (a) all D 3 ( A ), D 2 ( A ), and D 1 ( A ), and (b) the enlarged plot of D 2 ( A ) and D 1 ( A ) in 0 ≤ A/δ 0 ≤ 10.\n\nFIG. 2: The numerical (solid) and approximate (dot-dashed) solutions for x 1 ( A ), x 2 ( A ), and x 3 ( A ). Note that y i ( A ) ≃ − x i ( A ).\n\n$$W$_{0}$ ∼ =    2 / 3 1 / 3 0 1 / 6 1 / 3 1 / 2 1 / 6 1 / 3 1 / 2    , W$_{l}$ ∼ =    1 / 2 1 / 2 0 1 / 4 1 / 4 1 / 2 1 / 4 1 / 4 1 / 2    , W$_{i}$ ∼ =    0 1 0 1 / 2 0 1 / 2 1 / 2 0 1 / 2    , W$_{h}$ ∼ =    0 1 / 2 1 / 2 1 / 2 1 / 4 1 / 4 1 / 2 1 / 4 1 / 4    , W$_{d}$ ∼ =    0 0 1 1 / 2 1 / 2 0 1 / 2 1 / 2 0    . (28)$$\n\nA = ( A$_{0}$, A$_{l}$, A$_{i}$, A$_{h}$, A$_{d}$ ):\n\nTogether, these matrices exhibit the remarkable simplic- ity of the PMNS matrix as A varies from 0 to ∞ . Note that all of the matrices have at least one zero, W$_{1}$$\\_{I}$ = 0, implying x$\\_{I}$ = y$\\_{I}$ = 0. Also, they have equal elements in their second and third rows, W$\\_{2}$$_{i}$ = W$_{3}$$\\_{i}$ , so that w$\\_{1}$$_{i}$ = 0 or x$_{i}$ + y$_{i}$ = 0. As a consequence, using the unitarity conditions, the W matrix is completely fixed by its el- ements in the first row, W$_{1}$$\\_{i}$ . These elements, in turn, control dD$\\_{i}$/dA , Eq. (15). Thus, the progression of W as a function of A can be read off from the plot of D$\\_{i}$ ( A ), which is given in Fig. 1.\n\nIt is straightforward to numerically integrate the evolu- tion equations for ( x, y ). To do this we choose the initial values (in W$_{0}$ ) ϵ = 0 . 17, β = 0 . 02, corresponding to the experimental bounds | V$_{e}$$\\_{3}$ | 2 ≤ 0 . 03 [6] and an assumed CP violation phase cos φ = 1 / 4. Also, ξ = η = 0. In Fig. 2 the results are compared to the approximate solutions obtained earlier (Eqs. (24) and (27)). The agreements are quite good. The evolution of J 2 is shown in Fig. 3. Compared to its vacuum value, it is seen that, except for some enhancement near A = A$\\_{l}$ , J 2 tends to decrease with increasing A , as one would expect from Eq. (18).\n\nIn conclusion, in this work we derived the evolution equations for the neutrino parameters as a function of matter density. We found analytic, approximate, but simple solutions of these equations for values centered around the known neutrino parameters. This is possible because of two fortuitous circumstances: 1) the neutrino mass differences are widely separated, enabling one to use the two-flavor resonance approximation; 2) the mixing in\n\n4" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4935106201496021, + "doc_id": "c3616c202d4d7678199f35051cb77e61b04f75d2e73bf1ea71be286eb931d2ef", + "edit_distance": 0.7914379802414928, + "f1_score": 0.9095890410958904, + "meteor": 0.4338931791090838, + "precision": 0.9485714285714286, + "pred_md": "Figure 1 plots both the CQ and CE trade-off curves for several p -dephasing qubit channels, where p varies from zero to one in increments of 1 / 10. The figure demonstrates that both classically-enhanced quantum coding and entanglement-assisted classical coding beat a timesharing strategy for any p such that 0 < p < 1.\n\nFigure 1 plots both the CQ and CE trade-off curves for several p -dephasing qubit channels, where p varies from zero to one in increments of 1 / 10. The figure demonstrates that both classically-enhanced quantum coding and entanglement-assisted classical coding beat a timesharing strategy for any p such that 0 < p < 1.\n\nFIG. 1: (Color online) Plot of (a) the CQ trade-off curve and (b) the CE trade-off curve for a p -dephasing qubit channel for p = 0, 0 1, 0 2, . . . , 0 9, 1. . . . The trade-off curves for p = 0 correspond to those of a noiseless qubit channel and are the rightmost trade-off curve in each plot. The trade-off curves for p = 1 correspond to those for a classical channel, and are the leftmost trade-off curves in each plot. Each trade-off curve between these two extremes beats a time-sharing strategy, but these two extremes do not beat time-sharing.\n\nFIG. 1: (Color online) Plot of (a) the CQ trade-off curve and (b) the CE trade-off curve for a p -dephasing qubit channel for p = 0, 0 1, 0 2, . . . , 0 9, 1. . . . The trade-off curves for p = 0 correspond to those of a noiseless qubit channel and are the rightmost trade-off curve in each plot. The trade-off curves for p = 1 correspond to those for a classical channel, and are the leftmost trade-off curves in each plot. Each trade-off curve between these two extremes beats a time-sharing strategy, but these two extremes do not beat time-sharing.\n\nnel. Devetak and Shor gave a particular parametrization for the CQ trade-off curve for the case of a qubit dephasing channel in Appendix B of Ref. [31], and Hsieh and Wilde followed by giving a parametrization for the CE trade-off curve for qubit dephasing channels [40]. For the purposes of completion and comparison, we recall these parametrizations below, and Appendices D and E of this paper provide full proofs of these assertions.\n\nTheorem 4 All points on the CQ trade-off curve for a p -dephasing qubit channel have the following form:\n\n\n\nand all points on the CE trade-off curve for a p -dephasing qubit channel have the following form:\n\n\n\nwhere µ ∈ [0 , 1 / 2] , H 2 is the binary entropy function, and\n\n\n\nWe do not plot the full CQE capacity region for the dephasing qubit channel but instead point the interested reader to Figure 4 of Ref. [40].\n\n## B. 1 → N Cloning Channels\n\nWe now compute exact expressions for the CQ and CE trade-off curves, plot them for several 1 → N cloning channels, and plot the CQE capacity region for a particular 1 → N cloning channel. The following theorem states these expressions, and the lemmas and subsequent calculation following it provide a proof.\n\nTheorem 5 All points on the CQ trade-off curve for a 1 → N cloning channel have the following form:\n\n\n\nand all points on the CE trade-off curve for a 1 → N cloning channel have the following form:\n\n\n\nwhere H is the entropy function H ( ) · ≡ -∑ i ( ) log ( ) · · ,\n\n\n\nLemma 5 An ensemble of the following form parametrizes all points on the CQ trade-off curve\n\n12", + "recall": 0.8736842105263158, + "true_md": "12\n\nnel. Devetak and Shor gave a particular parametrization for the CQ trade-off curve for the case of a qubit dephas- ing channel in Appendix B of Ref. [31], and Hsieh and Wilde followed by giving a parametrization for the CE trade-off curve for qubit dephasing channels [40]. For the purposes of completion and comparison, we recall these parametrizations below, and Appendices D and E of this paper provide full proofs of these assertions.\n\nWe now compute exact expressions for the CQ and CE trade-off curves, plot them for several 1 → N cloning channels, and plot the CQE capacity region for a par- ticular 1 → N cloning channel. The following theorem states these expressions, and the lemmas and subsequent calculation following it provide a proof.\n\nFIG. 1: (Color online) Plot of (a) the CQ trade-off curve and (b) the CE trade-off curve for a p -dephasing qubit channel for p = 0, 0 . 1, 0 . 2, . . . , 0 . 9, 1. The trade-off curves for p = 0 correspond to those of a noiseless qubit channel and are the rightmost trade-off curve in each plot. The trade-off curves for p = 1 correspond to those for a classical channel, and are the leftmost trade-off curves in each plot. Each trade-off curve between these two extremes beats a time-sharing strategy, but these two extremes do not beat time-sharing.\n\n## B. 1 → N Cloning Channels\n\nTheorem 5 All points on the CQ trade-off curve for a 1 → N cloning channel have the following form:\n\nTheorem 4 All points on the CQ trade-off curve for a p -dephasing qubit channel have the following form:\n\nand all points on the CE trade-off curve for a p -dephasing qubit channel have the following form:\n\nwhere µ ∈ [0 , 1 / 2] , H$_{2}$ is the binary entropy function, and\n\nwhere H is the entropy function H ( · ) ≡ − $^{∑}$$\\_{i}$( · ) log ( · ) ,\n\nFigure 1 plots both the CQ and CE trade-off curves for several p -dephasing qubit channels, where p varies from zero to one in increments of 1 / 10. The figure demon- strates that both classically-enhanced quantum coding and entanglement-assisted classical coding beat a time- sharing strategy for any p such that 0 < p < 1.\n\nWe do not plot the full CQE capacity region for the dephasing qubit channel but instead point the interested reader to Figure 4 of Ref. [40].\n\nLemma 5 An ensemble of the following form parametrizes all points on the CQ trade-off curve\n\n$$Δ$_{N}$ ≡ N ( N + 1) / 2 , λ$_{i}$ ( µ ) ≡ ( N − 2 i ) µ + i for 0 ≤ i ≤ N, η$_{i}$ ( µ ) ≡ ( N − 1 − 2 i ) µ + i + 1 for 0 ≤ i ≤ N − 1 , µ ∈ [0 , 1 / 2] .$$\n\n$$( log ( N + 1) + H$_{2}$ ( µ ) − H ( η$_{i}$ ( µ ) / Δ$_{N}$) , H$_{2}$ ( µ )$^{)}$ ,$$\n\n$$( log ( N + 1) − H$^{(}$ λ$_{i}$ ( µ ) Δ$_{N}$ ) , H$^{(}$ λ$_{i}$ ( µ ) Δ$_{N}$ ) − H$^{(}$ η$_{i}$ ( µ ) Δ$_{N}$ )) ,$$\n\n$$(1 − H$_{2}$ ( µ ) , H$_{2}$ ( µ ) − H$_{2}$ ( γ ( µ, p ))) ,$$\n\n$$(1 + H$_{2}$ ( µ ) − H$_{2}$ ( γ ( µ, p )) , H$_{2}$ ( µ )) ,$$\n\n$$γ ( µ, p ) ≡ 1 2 + 1 2$^{√}$ 1 − 16 · p 2$^{(}$ 1 − p 2$^{)}$ µ (1 − µ ) .$$\n\nand all points on the CE trade-off curve for a 1 → N cloning channel have the following form:" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.703898802285379, + "doc_id": "6e877f30a7743152e9f4e6f22c10b1ff55a3aa6fb6543095d6298f32b2934d47", + "edit_distance": 0.8359462486002239, + "f1_score": 0.9606837606837606, + "meteor": 0.5113931490655943, + "precision": 0.9689655172413794, + "pred_md": "Before we formally introduce this, we require the notion of computation tree and introduce some more notations.\n\nDefinition 1: [16] A computation tree corresponding to a message-passing decoder of the Tanner graph G is a tree that is constructed by choosing an arbitrary variable node in G as its root and then recursively adding edges and leaf nodes to the tree that correspond to the messages passed in the decoder up to a certain number of iterations. For each vertex that is added to the tree, the corresponding node update function in G is also copied.\n\nLet G be the Tanner graph of a 3-left-regular code. Let H be the induced subgraph of a trapping set ( a, b ) contained in G with variable node set P ⊆ V and check node set W ⊆ C . Let N ( u ) denote the set of neighbors of a node u . Let T k i ( G ) be the computation tree of graph G corresponding to a decoder F enumerated for k iterations with variable node v i ∈ V as its root. Let W ' ⊆ W denote the set of degree-one check nodes in the subgraph H . Let P ' ⊆ P denote the set of variable nodes in H where each variable node has at least one neighbor in W ' . During decoding on G , for a node v i ∈ P ' , let µ l denote the message that v i receives from its neighboring degree-one check node in H in the l th iteration.\n\nDefinition 2: A vertex w ∈ T k i ( G ) is said to be a descendant of a vertex u ∈ T k i ( G ) if there exists a path starting from vertex w to the root v i that traverses through vertex u . The set of all descendants of the vertex u in T k i ( G ) is denoted as D ( u ) . For a given vertex set U , D ( U ) (with some abuse of notation) denotes the set of descendants of all u ∈ U .\n\nDefinition 3: T k i ( H ) is called the computation tree of the subgraph H enumerated for k iterations for the decoder F , if ∀ c j ∈ W ' , µ l is given for all l ≤ k , and if the root node v i ∈ P requires only the messages computed by the nodes in H and µ l to compute its binary hard-decision value.\n\nDefinition 4 (Isolation assumption): The computation tree T k i ( G ) with the root v i ∈ P is said to be isolated if: (i) for any check node c j ∈ W ' that is in T k i ( G ) with v t ∈ P ' as its parent, D ( c j ) ∩ D N ( ( v t ) \\ c j ) = ∅ , and (ii) for any two check nodes c r , c s ∈ W \\ W ' that are also in T k i ( G ) , D ( c r ) ∩D ( c s ) ⊆ ( P ∪ W ) . If T k i ( G ) is isolated ∀ v i ∈ P , then the subgraph H is said to satisfy the isolation assumption in G for k iterations.\n\nRemark: The isolation assumption can still be satisfied even when there are nodes in H that appear multiple times in T k i ( G ) as long as these nodes are not descendants of the degree-one check nodes. Whereas Gallager's independence assumption will be violated if any node in H is repeated in T k i ( G ) . Hence, isolation assumption is a weaker condition than independence. For clarity, we illustrate with an example shown in Fig. 1.\n\nExample 1: Let us assume that the graph G of code C contains a subgraph H induced by a (6 , 2) trapping set. Fig. 1 shows the subgraph H , and the computation tree T 2 3 ( G ) of graph G with v 3 as its root enumerated for two iterations. The glyph[squaresolid] denotes a odd-degree check node. The solid lines represent connections within subgraph H and the dotted lines represent connections from the rest of the graph G outside the subgraph\n\nFig. 1. Subgraph H induced by (6,2) trapping set contained in G : (a) Tanner graph of H ; (b) computational tree T 2 3 ( G )\n\nFig. 1. Subgraph H induced by (6,2) trapping set contained in G : (a) Tanner graph of H ; (b) computational tree T 2 3 ( G )\n\nH . The isolation assumption is satisfied for two iterations if none of the descendants of the check nodes c 7 and c 8 appear as a descendant of check node c 9 (similar condition has to hold for c 10 ), and if the only common descendants of the degree-2 check nodes are nodes in H . But the independence assumption does not hold for two iterations.\n\nTheorem 1 (Isolation theorem): Let G = { V ∪ C, E } of a 3-left-regular code which contains a subgraph H = { P ∪ W,E ' } that is induced by a trapping set ( a, b ) . Let W ' ⊆ W denote the set of degree-one check nodes in H and let P ' ⊆ P denote the set of variable nodes in H where each has at least one neighbor in W ' . If r is input to decoder F from the BSC such that supp ( r ) ∈ P , and if H satisfies the isolation assumption in G for k iterations, then for each c j ∈ W ' , the message from c j to its neighbor in H in the l th iteration denoted by µ l , is determined as the output of Φ ( v µ l -1 , µ l -1 , C) ∀ l ≤ k .\n\nProof: This follows by looking at the computation tree T l i ( G ) where l ≤ k with any v i ∈ P ' as its root. Let the initial messages passed from a variable node be ± µ 0 ∈ M . Since supp ( r ) ∈ P , due to the isolation assumption, this means that all the variable nodes that are descendants to any c j ∈ W ' are initially correct. In the initial iteration, from the definition of Φ c , the outgoing message of check nodes that are descendants to c j is µ 0 . In the next iteration, the variable nodes connected to these check nodes receive µ 0 on all their edges due to the isolation assumption and send Φ ( v µ , µ 0 0 , C) as their outgoing messages. Due to the definition of Φ c , the check nodes connected to these nodes in T l i ( G ) send µ 1 which is simply Φ ( v µ , µ 0 0 , C) . This process inductively follows while traversing up the tree for l iterations. Moreover, computation of the hard-decision value for any node v i in H requires only messages from nodes in H in addition to µ l .\n\nRemark: Note that the isolation assumption and theorem can be restated for the min-sum decoder.\n\nCorollary 1: Consider the min-sum decoder for 3-leftregular LDPC codes with Y = {± } 1 . If subgraph H contained in G satisfies the isolation assumption for k iterations, and if all variable nodes outside H are initially correct, then µ l of the degree-one check node for the min-sum decoder is 2 µ l -1 +1 .\n\nCorollary 2: If H is a subgraph contained in G such that it satisfies the isolation assumption for k iterations, and if all variable nodes outside H are initially correct, then the computation tree T k i ( G ) with v i ∈ P is equivalent to T k i ( H ) , provided µ l for each degree-one check node in H is computed", + "recall": 0.9525423728813559, + "true_md": "Before we formally introduce this, we require the notion of computation tree and introduce some more notations.\n\nDefinition 1: [16] A computation tree corresponding to a message-passing decoder of the Tanner graph G is a tree that is constructed by choosing an arbitrary variable node in G as its root and then recursively adding edges and leaf nodes to the tree that correspond to the messages passed in the decoder up to a certain number of iterations. For each vertex that is added to the tree, the corresponding node update function in G is also copied.\n\nH . The isolation assumption is satisfied for two iterations if none of the descendants of the check nodes c$_{7}$ and c$_{8}$ appear as a descendant of check node c$_{9}$ (similar condition has to hold for c$_{10}$ ), and if the only common descendants of the degree-2 check nodes are nodes in H . But the independence assumption does not hold for two iterations.\n\nTheorem 1 (Isolation theorem): Let G = { V ∪ C,E } of a 3-left-regular code which contains a subgraph H = { P ∪ W,E $^{′}$} that is induced by a trapping set ( a,b ) . Let W ′ ⊆ W denote the set of degree-one check nodes in H and let P ′ ⊆ P denote the set of variable nodes in H where each has at least one neighbor in W $^{′}$. If r is input to decoder F from the BSC such that supp ( r ) ∈ P , and if H satisfies the isolation assumption in G for k iterations, then for each c$_{j}$ ∈ W $^{′}$, the message from c$_{j}$ to its neighbor in H in the l th iteration denoted by µ$_{l}$ , is determined as the output of Φ$_{v}$( µ$_{l}$$\\_{−}$$_{1}$,µ$_{l}$$\\_{−}$$_{1}$, C) ∀ l ≤ k .\n\nRemark: Note that the isolation assumption and theorem can be restated for the min-sum decoder.\n\nCorollary 1: Consider the min-sum decoder for 3-left- regular LDPC codes with Y = {± 1 } . If subgraph H contained in G satisfies the isolation assumption for k iterations, and if all variable nodes outside H are initially correct, then µ$_{l}$ of the degree-one check node for the min-sum decoder is 2 µ$_{l}$$\\_{−}$$_{1}$ + 1 .\n\nCorollary 2: If H is a subgraph contained in G such that it satisfies the isolation assumption for k iterations, and if all variable nodes outside H are initially correct, then the computation tree T k i ( G ) with v$_{i}$ ∈ P is equivalent to T k i ( H ) , provided µ$_{l}$ for each degree-one check node in H is computed\n\nProof: This follows by looking at the computation tree T l i ( G ) where l ≤ k with any v$_{i}$ ∈ P ′ as its root. Let the initial messages passed from a variable node be ± µ$_{0}$ ∈ M . Since supp ( r ) ∈ P , due to the isolation assumption, this means that all the variable nodes that are descendants to any c$_{j}$ ∈ W ′ are initially correct. In the initial iteration, from the definition of Φ$_{c}$ , the outgoing message of check nodes that are descendants to c$_{j}$ is µ$_{0}$ . In the next iteration, the variable nodes connected to these check nodes receive µ$_{0}$ on all their edges due to the isolation assumption and send Φ$_{v}$( µ$_{0}$,µ$_{0}$, C) as their outgoing messages. Due to the definition of Φ$_{c}$ , the check nodes connected to these nodes in T l i ( G ) send µ$_{1}$ which is simply Φ$_{v}$( µ$_{0}$,µ$_{0}$, C) . This process inductively follows while traversing up the tree for l iterations. Moreover, computation of the hard-decision value for any node v$_{i}$ in H requires only messages from nodes in H in addition to µ$_{l}$ .\n\nLet G be the Tanner graph of a 3-left-regular code. Let H be the induced subgraph of a trapping set ( a,b ) contained in G with variable node set P ⊆ V and check node set W ⊆ C . Let N ( u ) denote the set of neighbors of a node u . Let T k i ( G ) be the computation tree of graph G corresponding to a decoder F enumerated for k iterations with variable node v$_{i}$ ∈ V as its root. Let W ′ ⊆ W denote the set of degree-one check nodes in the subgraph H . Let P ′ ⊆ P denote the set of variable nodes in H where each variable node has at least one neighbor in W $^{′}$. During decoding on G , for a node v$_{i}$ ∈ P $^{′}$, let µ$_{l}$ denote the message that v$_{i}$ receives from its neighboring degree-one check node in H in the l th iteration.\n\nDefinition 2: A vertex w ∈ T k i ( G ) is said to be a descen- dant of a vertex u ∈ T k i ( G ) if there exists a path starting from vertex w to the root v$_{i}$ that traverses through vertex u . The set of all descendants of the vertex u in T k i ( G ) is denoted as D ( u ) . For a given vertex set U , D ( U ) (with some abuse of notation) denotes the set of descendants of all u ∈ U .\n\nDefinition 3: T k i ( H ) is called the computation tree of the subgraph H enumerated for k iterations for the decoder F , if ∀ c$_{j}$ ∈ W $^{′}$, µ$_{l}$ is given for all l ≤ k , and if the root node v$_{i}$ ∈ P requires only the messages computed by the nodes in H and µ$_{l}$ to compute its binary hard-decision value.\n\nDefinition 4 (Isolation assumption): The computation tree T k i ( G ) with the root v$_{i}$ ∈ P is said to be isolated if: (i) for any check node c$_{j}$ ∈ W ′ that is in T k i ( G ) with v$_{t}$ ∈ P ′ as its parent, D ( c$_{j}$ ) ∩ D ( N ( v$_{t}$ ) \\ c$_{j}$ ) =  , and (ii) for any two check nodes c$_{r}$,c$_{s}$ ∈ W \\ W ′ that are also in T k i ( G ) , D ( c$_{r}$ ) ∩ D ( c$_{s}$ ) ⊆ ( P ∪ W ) . If T k i ( G ) is isolated ∀ v$_{i}$ ∈ P , then the subgraph H is said to satisfy the isolation assumption in G for k iterations.\n\nRemark: The isolation assumption can still be satisfied even when there are nodes in H that appear multiple times in T k i ( G ) as long as these nodes are not descendants of the degree-one check nodes. Whereas Gallager’s independence assumption will be violated if any node in H is repeated in T k i ( G ) . Hence, isolation assumption is a weaker condition than independence. For clarity, we illustrate with an example shown in Fig. 1.\n\nExample 1: Let us assume that the graph G of code C contains a subgraph H induced by a (6 , 2) trapping set. Fig. 1 shows the subgraph H , and the computation tree T 2 3 ( G ) of graph G with v$_{3}$ as its root enumerated for two iterations. The ■ denotes a odd-degree check node. The solid lines represent connections within subgraph H and the dotted lines represent connections from the rest of the graph G outside the subgraph\n\nFig. 1. Subgraph H induced by (6,2) trapping set contained in G : (a) Tanner graph of H ; (b) computational tree T 2 3 ( G )" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.08817374899518683, + "doc_id": "b7cedc934f668ce553e719cc24c6877549b0fafbd57eb60a60108fcc2ecc8fd4", + "edit_distance": 0.8461538461538461, + "f1_score": 0.9074889867841408, + "meteor": 0.28690538581820724, + "precision": 0.9626168224299065, + "pred_md": "Plug in the expressions (4) and (6) into (7), the Hamil-\n\ntonian reads explicitly as\n\n\n\nWhile by the represenation (4) and (5), the Hamilto-\n\nnian becomes\n\n\n\nThis model, in terms of physical spins S , has full spin rotation symmetry and time-reversal symmetry. A pseudo-magnetic field term ∑ j /vector h · /vector τ j term can also be included under this mapping, however the resulting Kitaev model with magnetic field is not exactly solvable. It is quite curious that such a formidably looking Hamiltonian (8), with biquadratic and six-spin(or eight-spin) terms, has an exactly solvable low energy sector.\n\nWe emphasize that because the first intra-cluster term ∑ cluster H cluster commutes with the latter Kitaev terms independent of the representation used, the Kitaev model is realized as the exact low energy Hamiltonian of this model without truncation errors of perturbation theories, namely no ( | J x,y,z | /J cluster ) 2 or higher order terms will be generated under the projection to low energy cluster singlet space. This is unlike, for example, the t/U expansion of the half-filled Hubbard model 22,23 , where at lowest t 2 /U order the effective Hamiltonian is the Heisenberg model, but higher order terms ( t 4 /U 3 etc.) should in principle still be included in the low energy effective Hamiltonian for any finite t/U . Similar comparison can be made to the perturbative expansion studies of the Kitaev-type models by Vidal et al. 9 , where the low energy effective Hamiltonians were obtained in certian anisotropic (strong bond/triangle) limits. Although the spirit of this work, namely projection to low energy sector, is the same as all previous perturbative approaches to effective Hamiltonians.\n\nNote that the original Kitaev model (1) has threefold rotation symmetry around a honeycomb lattice site, combined with a three-fold rotation in pseudo-spin space (cyclic permutation of τ x , τ y , τ z ). This is not apparent in our model (8) in terms of physical spins, under the current representation of τ x,y,z . We can remedy this by using a different set of pseudo-spin Pauli matrices τ ' x,y,z in (7),\n\n\n\nWith proper representation choice, they have a symmetric form in terms of physical spins,\n\n\n\nSo the symmetry mentioned above can be realized by a three-fold rotation of the honeycomb lattice, with a cyclic permutation of S 2 , S 3 and S 4 in each cluster. This is in fact the three-fold rotation symmetry of the physical spin lattice illustrated in FIG. 2. However this more symmetric representation will not be used in later part of this paper.\n\n4", + "recall": 0.8583333333333333, + "true_md": "Plug in the expressions (4) and (6) into (7), the Hamil- tonian reads explicitly as\n\n4\n\n$$H = ∑ j ( J$_{cluster}$/ 2)( S$_{j}$$_{1}$ + S$_{j}$$_{2}$ + S$_{j}$$_{3}$ + S$_{j}$$_{4}$ ) 2 − ∑ z $^{−}$links J$_{z}$ (16 / 9)[ S$_{j}$$_{2}$ · ( S$_{j}$$_{3}$ × S$_{j}$$_{4}$ )][ S$_{k}$$_{2}$ · ( S$_{k}$$_{3}$ × S$_{k}$$_{4}$ )] − ∑ x $^{−}$links J$_{x}$ (2 S$_{j}$$_{1}$ · S$_{j}$$_{2}$ + 1 / 2)(2 S$_{k}$$_{1}$ · S$_{k}$$_{2}$ + 1 / 2) − ∑ y $^{−}$links J$_{y}$ (4 / 3)[ S$_{j}$$_{1}$ · ( S$_{j}$$_{3}$ − S$_{j}$$_{4}$ )][ S$_{k}$$_{1}$ · ( S$_{k}$$_{3}$ − S$_{k}$$_{4}$ )] (8)$$\n\nWhile by the represenation (4) and (5), the Hamilto- nian becomes\n\n$$H = ∑ j ( J$_{cluster}$/ 2)( S$_{j}$$_{1}$ + S$_{j}$$_{2}$ + S$_{j}$$_{3}$ + S$_{j}$$_{4}$ ) 2 − ∑ x $^{−}$links J$_{x}$ (2 S$_{j}$$_{1}$ · S$_{j}$$_{2}$ + 1 / 2)(2 S$_{k}$$_{1}$ · S$_{k}$$_{2}$ + 1 / 2) − ∑ y $^{−}$links J$_{y}$ (4 / 3)[ S$_{j}$$_{1}$ · ( S$_{j}$$_{3}$ − S$_{j}$$_{4}$ )][ S$_{k}$$_{1}$ · ( S$_{k}$$_{3}$ − S$_{k}$$_{4}$ )] − ∑ z $^{−}$links J$_{z}$ ( − 4 / 3)(2 S$_{j}$$_{3}$ · S$_{j}$$_{4}$ + 1 / 2)[ S$_{j}$$_{1}$ · ( S$_{j}$$_{3}$ − S$_{j}$$_{4}$ )](2 S$_{k}$$_{3}$ · S$_{k}$$_{4}$ + 1 / 2)[ S$_{k}$$_{1}$ · ( S$_{k}$$_{3}$ − S$_{k}$$_{4}$ )] (9)$$\n\n$$τ ′ x = √ 1 / 3 τ z + √ 2 / 3 τ $^{x}$, τ ′ y = 1 / 3 τ z − 1 / 6 τ x + √ 1 / 2 τ $^{y}$, τ ′ z = √ 1 / 3 τ z − √ 1 / 6 τ x − 1 / 2 τ y$$\n\n$$τ ′ x = − (4 / 3) S$_{2}$ · ( S$_{3}$ × S$_{4}$ ) + √ 2 / 3(2 S$_{1}$ · S$_{2}$ + 1 / 2) τ ′ y = − (4 / 3) S$_{3}$ · ( S$_{4}$ × S$_{2}$ ) + 2 / 3(2 S$_{1}$ · S$_{3}$ + 1 / 2) τ ′ z = − (4 / 3) S$_{4}$ · ( S$_{2}$ × S$_{3}$ ) + √ 2 / 3(2 S$_{1}$ · S$_{4}$ + 1 / 2) (10)$$\n\nThis model, in terms of physical spins S , has full spin rotation symmetry and time-reversal symmetry. A pseudo-magnetic field term ∑ $_{j}$⃗ h · ⃗ τ$_{j}$ term can also be included under this mapping, however the resulting Ki- taev model with magnetic field is not exactly solvable. It is quite curious that such a formidably looking Hamil- tonian (8), with biquadratic and six-spin(or eight-spin) terms, has an exactly solvable low energy sector.\n\nNote that the original Kitaev model (1) has three- fold rotation symmetry around a honeycomb lattice site, combined with a three-fold rotation in pseudo-spin space (cyclic permutation of τ $^{x}$, τ $^{y}$, τ $^{z}$). This is not apparent in our model (8) in terms of physical spins, under the current representation of τ $^{x,y,z}$. We can remedy this by using a different set of pseudo-spin Pauli matrices τ ′ x,y,z in (7),\n\nWith proper representation choice, they have a symmet- ric form in terms of physical spins,\n\nWe emphasize that because the first intra-cluster term ∑ cluster H$_{cluster}$ commutes with the latter Kitaev terms independent of the representation used, the Kitaev model is realized as the exact low energy Hamiltonian of this model without truncation errors of perturbation theories, namely no ( | J$_{x,y,z}$ | /J$_{cluster}$ ) 2 or higher order terms will be generated under the projection to low energy clus- ter singlet space. This is unlike, for example, the t/U expansion of the half-filled Hubbard model $^{22,23}$, where at lowest t $^{2}$/U order the effective Hamiltonian is the Heisenberg model, but higher order terms ( t $^{4}$/U 3 etc.) should in principle still be included in the low energy ef- fective Hamiltonian for any finite t/U . Similar compari- son can be made to the perturbative expansion studies of the Kitaev-type models by Vidal et al. $^{9}$, where the low energy effective Hamiltonians were obtained in certian anisotropic (strong bond/triangle) limits. Although the spirit of this work, namely projection to low energy sec- tor, is the same as all previous perturbative approaches to effective Hamiltonians.\n\nSo the symmetry mentioned above can be realized by a three-fold rotation of the honeycomb lattice, with a cyclic permutation of S$_{2}$ , S$_{3}$ and S$_{4}$ in each cluster. This is in fact the three-fold rotation symmetry of the physical spin lattice illustrated in FIG. 2. However this more symmet- ric representation will not be used in later part of this paper." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6734969107831701, + "doc_id": "3f14b16439727d54a02ad850817caaaac6e2603605488d11645ca9b50c51234e", + "edit_distance": 0.48075668623613826, + "f1_score": 0.8935128518971849, + "meteor": 0.679374724349385, + "precision": 0.9287531806615776, + "pred_md": "## II. THE MODEL OF THE EDGE AND SPIN-ORBIT COUPLING\n\nLet us consider a sample with 2DEG created within a GaAs-based quantum well. The electrical current in the plane of the 2DEG will be driven along the y direction. We will be interested in the physics close to one of the two edges of the sample along which the current flows. The coordinate in the direction perpendicular to the edge will be x , x > 0 corresponding to the region where the 2DEG is present (see Fig. 1).\n\nWe will describe the electronic states for electrons in the 2DEG within the effective mass approximation, treating the electrons as noninteracting quasiparticles. Qualitative changes in our results introduced within a self-consistent mean-field treatment will be studied afterwards. The length scale characterizing the electrons is given by their Fermi wavelength. It typically attains values 33 λ F = √ 2 π / n 2 D ∼ 2 5 . a B ∗ , where n 2 D is the two-dimensional electronic density and a B ∗ = 9 79nm is the effective Bohr radius in GaAs. Since . this is about two orders of magnitude larger than the interatomic distances, we can employ the effective mass theory and approximate the form of the confining potential with a simple functional form.\n\nIn our work will assume that the confining edge potential, V x ( ) , is independent of the coordinate y , directed along the edge. Within our analytical derivations we model V x ( ) as an abrupt step of height ∆ V , V x ( ) = V θ ( x ) = ∆ V θ ( -x ) , where θ ( x ) is the unit step function. The actual value of the step is much larger than the Fermi energy of the 2DEG. This is frequently used to set the potential step to infinity. However, here it is essential that the step is finite as the whole spin-orbit coupling is nonzero only in the region of the nonzero gradient of the confining potential. Since this value should be of the order of the work function of the electrons in the 2DEG, we fix this value to ∆ V = 2 7eV . ∼ 230Ha . One of the results of ∗ our work is the demonstration that the current induced spin polarization is rather independent of this value so that we do not need to be concerned with its precise numerical value, as long as it is large ( >> EF ) but finite value.\n\nOnce we establish the analytical result for this model of abrupt potential step, we will also consider more general forms: step with a linear slope on a distance d , Vd ( x ) (used in Fig. 1), and a partially self-consistent, density-dependent model with a small triangular-shaped dip, Vn ( x ) , close to the edge. In the absence of this dip, the decrease in the density to zero at the edge in the 2DEG results in a slight local depletion of electrons there. A small negative value of the depth of the dip, -V 0, that is found self-consistently results in a charge neutral edge which is the physically expected situation.\n\nThe essential part of our model is the spin-orbit (SO) coupling term in the electrons' Hamiltonian. In general, several different types of SO interactions can be similar in magnitude: the Rashba-Bytchkov, the Dresselhaus or the impurityinduced SO coupling. However, since they are all small perturbations to the effective Hamiltonian, we can consider them separably and superpose their outcomes in the sense of first order perturbation theory in terms of SO parameter appearing in the SO interaction. In our paper we will consider a special\n\n2\n\ncase of the impurity-induced SO coupling for the special case when the 'impurity' is the edge potential only. In general, the SO contribution to the Hamiltonian takes the form 27\n\n\n\nwhere α E characterizes the strength of the SO coupling, /vector σ are Pauli matrices, /vector k is the operator of electron's momentum and V x ( ) is the effective one-electron potential energy. Within our study the latter corresponds to various models of the edge potential: V θ ( x ) , Vd ( x ) or Vn ( x ) . The strength of the SO coupling in GaAs is known to be approximately α E ≈ 5 3 ˚ 2 . A = 5 53 . × 10 -4 a ∗ B which is 10 6 times larger than the strength of the SO coupling in vacuum 26 .\n\nWithin the framework of this model it is very easy to understand the origin of the current-induced spin polarization. The gradient of the potential energy is directed only in the x direction, the momentum is confined only within the xy plane so that the only nonzero component of the spin operator comes from its z component due to the mixed product form in Eq. 2. Specifically, the SO interaction is simply a spin-dependent potential\n\n\n\nwith a well defined quantum number for the projection of the spin in the z direction, σ z , attaining values ± 1, and q is the y component of the electron's momentum (Fig. 1). Hence, the spin-orbit term is a potential energy which, for states with positive momentum in the + y direction (the current), is smaller (larger) in the spatial region of negative derivative of the edge potential, V ' ( x ) < 0, for electrons with their spin down (up). Since close to x = 0 we have V ' ( x ) = -∆ V δ ( x ) < 0, we expect that close to the edge we will find majority of spin-down electrons. Of course, in equilibrium for zero total current density there will be equal number of electron with q > 0 and q < 0 so that in this special case zero total spin polarization will be observed.\n\n## III. SPIN POLARIZATION AND THE SPIN-DEPENDENT PHASE-SHIFT\n\nIn our previous work 22 , we have given estimates for the total induced spin per unit length of the edge using arguments based on wavepacket propagation. We considered a singleelectron wavepacket state, ψ q , σ k , ∆ k ( ) t , for a specific momentum in the y direction q , spin σ , with momentum k of uncertainty ∆ k ,\n\n\n\nwhere r q , σ ( k ) is the reflection amplitude of the eigenstate with energy E =( 1 / 2 )( k 2 + q 2 ) . For large negative times only the incoming part (moving from the right in the Fig. 1) of this", + "recall": 0.8608490566037735, + "true_md": "## II. THE MODEL OF THE EDGE AND SPIN-ORBIT COUPLING\n\n2\n\nLet us consider a sample with 2DEG created within a GaAs-based quantum well. The electrical current in the plane of the 2DEG will be driven along the y direction. We will be interested in the physics close to one of the two edges of the sample along which the current flows. The coordinate in the direction perpendicular to the edge will be x , x > 0 corre- sponding to the region where the 2DEG is present (see Fig. 1).\n\nWe will describe the electronic states for electrons in the 2DEG within the effective mass approximation, treat- ing the electrons as noninteracting quasiparticles. Qualita- tive changes in our results introduced within a self-consistent mean-field treatment will be studied afterwards. The length scale characterizing the electrons is given by their Fermi wavelength. It typically attains values 33 λ F = √ 2 π / n$_{2}$$\\_{D}$ ∼ 2 . 5 a ∗ $\\_{B}$, where n$\\_{2}$$_{D}$ is the two-dimensional electronic density and a ∗ B = 9 . 79nm is the effective Bohr radius in GaAs. Since this is about two orders of magnitude larger than the inter- atomic distances, we can employ the effective mass theory and approximate the form of the confining potential with a simple functional form.\n\nIn our work will assume that the confining edge potential, V ( x ) , is independent of the coordinate y , directed along the edge. Within our analytical derivations we model V ( x ) as an abrupt step of height Δ V , V ( x ) = V θ ( x ) = Δ V θ ( − x ) , where ( x ) is the unit step function. The actual value of the step\n\n− θ ( x ) is the unit step function. The actual value of the step is much larger than the Fermi energy of the 2DEG. This is frequently used to set the potential step to infinity. Howeve r, here it is essential that the step is finite as the whole spin-o rbit coupling is nonzero only in the region of the nonzero gradient of the confining potential. Since this value should be of the order of the work function of the electrons in the 2DEG, we fix this value to Δ V = 2 . 7eV ∼ 230Ha ∗ . One of the results of our work is the demonstration that the current induced spin polarization is rather independent of this value so that we do not need to be concerned with its precise numerical value, as long as it is large ( >> E$_{F}$ ) but finite value.\n\nOnce we establish the analytical result for this model of abrupt potential step, we will also consider more general forms: step with a linear slope on a distance d , V$_{d}$ ( x ) (used in Fig. 1), and a partially self-consistent, density-dependent model with a small triangular-shaped dip, V$_{n}$ ( x ) , close to the edge. In the absence of this dip, the decrease in the density to zero at the edge in the 2DEG results in a slight local deple- tion of electrons there. A small negative value of the depth of the dip, − V$_{0}$ , that is found self-consistently results in a charge neutral edge which is the physically expected situation.\n\nThe essential part of our model is the spin-orbit (SO) cou- pling term in the electrons’ Hamiltonian. In general, several different types of SO interactions can be similar in magni- tude: the Rashba-Bytchkov, the Dresselhaus or the impurity- induced SO coupling. However, since they are all small per- turbations to the effective Hamiltonian, we can consider them separably and superpose their outcomes in the sense of first order perturbation theory in terms of SO parameter appearing in the SO interaction. In our paper we will consider a special\n\nwhere r q , σ ( k ) is the reflection amplitude of the eigenstate with energy E = ( 1 / 2 )( k $^{2}$+ q $^{2}$) . For large negative times only the incoming part (moving from the right in the Fig. 1) of this\n\nIn our previous work$^{22}$, we have given estimates for the total induced spin per unit length of the edge using arguments based on wavepacket propagation. We considered a single- electron wavepacket state, ψ q , σ k , Δ $_{k}$( t ) , for a specific momentum in the y direction q , spin σ , with momentum k of uncertainty Δ k ,\n\nwith a well defined quantum number for the projection of the spin in the z direction, σ $_{z}$, attaining values ± 1, and q is the y component of the electron’s momentum (Fig. 1). Hence, the spin-orbit term is a potential energy which, for states with pos- itive momentum in the + y direction (the current), is smaller (larger) in the spatial region of negative derivative of the edge potential, V ′ ( x ) < 0, for electrons with their spin down (up). Since close to x = 0 we have V ′ ( x ) = − Δ V δ ( x ) < 0, we expect that close to the edge we will find majority of spin-down elec- trons. Of course, in equilibrium for zero total current density there will be equal number of electron with q > 0 and q < 0 so that in this special case zero total spin polarization will be observed.\n\nWithin the framework of this model it is very easy to under- stand the origin of the current-induced spin polarization. The gradient of the potential energy is directed only in the x direc- tion, the momentum is confined only within the xy plane so that the only nonzero component of the spin operator comes from its z component due to the mixed product form in Eq. 2. Specifically, the SO interaction is simply a spin-dependentpo- tential\n\nwhere α E characterizes the strength of the SO coupling, ⃗ σ are Pauli matrices, ⃗ k is the operator of electron’s momen- tum and V ( x ) is the effective one-electron potential energy. Within our study the latter corresponds to various models of the edge potential: V θ ( x ) , V$_{d}$ ( x ) or V$_{n}$ ( x ) . The strength of the SO coupling in GaAs is known to be approximately α E ≈ 5 . 3 ˚ A 2 = 5 . 53 × 10 − $^{4}$a ∗ B which is 10 6 times larger than the strength of the SO coupling in vacuum$^{26}$.\n\ncase of the impurity-induced SO coupling for the special case when the “impurity” is the edge potential only. In general, t he SO contribution to the Hamiltonian takes the form 27\n\n$$ˆ V SO = α $_{E}$⃗ σ · ( ⃗ k × ∇ V ( x ) , (2)$$\n\n$$ˆ V SO = − α E σ $_{z}$qV ′ ( x ) (3)$$\n\n$$ψ q , σ k , Δ $_{k}$( t ) = ∫ k + Δ k / 2 k − Δ k / 2 dk √$_{2}$ π Δ k ( e − $^{ikx}$+ r q , σ ( k ) e$^{ikx}$e iqy ) × e i ( k $^{2}$/ 2 + q $^{2}$/ 2 ) $^{t}$, (4)$$\n\n## III. SPIN POLARIZATION AND THE SPIN-DEPENDENT PHASE-SHIFT" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.09846677768889159, + "doc_id": "e51e669ce94a070e13a8d683a08e38f81971476ed2cfde85b2c8bd5acd999bb9", + "edit_distance": 0.7987012987012987, + "f1_score": 0.8973747016706443, + "meteor": 0.23527999938918748, + "precision": 0.9543147208121827, + "pred_md": "The states input to the quantum dephasing channel obtained from Eq. (29) are\n\n\n\ntherefore, for all ρ S,i\n\n\n\nThis results in the following expression for the first term in Eq. (8):\n\n\n\nwhere we have used the normalization ∑ 4 i =1 p i ( x , x 1 2 ) = 1 , ∀ x , x 1 2 . This yields the first term in Eq. (30).\n\nNext we calculate the second term in Eq. (8). The output state is\n\n\n\nwhere\n\n\n\n- [1] C. Bennett and P. Shor, IEEE Trans. Inf. Theory 44 , 2724 (1998).\n- [2] M. Nielsen and I. Chuang, Quantum Computation and Quantum Information (Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, England, 2000).\n- [3] T. M. Cover and J. A. Thomas, Elements of Information Theory (Wiley, New York, 1991).\n\n7\n\nSince this state is diagonal ('classical') it is invariant under the dephasing channel with Kraus operators given by Eq. (18). Therefore the eigenvalues of the output state (A5) are\n\n\n\nand\n\n\n\n\n\nwhich for all | Φ i 〉 has eigenvalues ω 1 = ω 2 = 0 and ω , ω 3 4 are given in Eq. (31). The third term in Eq. (8) is thus\n\n\n\nwhere, as for Eq. (A4), we have used the normalization ∑ 4 i =1 p i = 1 . This yields the third term in Eq. (30).\n\nThus, indeed only the second term in Eq. (8) depends on x , x 1 2 , and for a given value of θ , the classical capacity assisted by limited entanglement is maximized by maximizing Eq. (A8). The maximum is attained when the output state (A5) is fully mixed, i.e., when its eigenvalues υ 1 = υ 2 = 1 2 / . This occurs when x 1 = x 2 = π 4 , i.e., when we have an equiprobable ensemble of the states. This gives rise to the 1 in Eq. (30).\n\n- [4] C. Shannon, Bell Sys. Tech. J. 27 , 379 (1948).\n- [5] C. H. Bennett and P. W. Shor, Science 303 , 1784 (2004).\n- [6] P. Hausladen, R. Jozsa, B. Schumacher, M. Westmoreland, and W. K. Wootters, Phys. Rev. A 54 , 1869 (1996).\n- [7] B. Schumacher and M. D. Westmoreland, Phys. Rev. A 56 , 131 (1997).\n- [8] S. Lloyd, Phys. Rev. A 55 , 1613 (1997).", + "recall": 0.8468468468468469, + "true_md": "7\n\nSince this state is diagonal (“classical”) it is invariant under the dephasing channel with Kraus operators given by Eq. (18). Therefore the eigenvalues of the output state (A5) are\n\nThe states input to the quantum dephasing channel obtained from Eq. (29) are\n\ntherefore, for all ρ$_{S,i}$\n\nThis results in the following expression for the first term in Eq. (8):\n\ni i =1 Finally, we calculate the third term in Eq. (8):\n\n$$υ$_{1}$ = cos 2 θ cos 2 x$_{1}$ + sin 2 θ sin 2 x$_{1}$, υ$_{2}$ = cos 2 θ sin 2 x$_{1}$ + sin 2 θ cos 2 x$_{1}$, (A7)$$\n\n$$ρ$_{S,}$$_{1}$ = Tr$_{R}$ ( | Φ$_{1}$ 〉〈 Φ$_{1}$ | ) = cos 2 θ | 0 〉〈 0 | + sin 2 θ | 1 〉〈 1 | , ρ$_{S,}$$_{2}$ = Tr$_{R}$ ( | Φ$_{2}$ 〉〈 Φ$_{2}$ | ) = sin 2 θ | 0 〉〈 0 | + cos 2 θ | 1 〉〈 1 | , ρ$_{S,}$$_{3}$ = Tr$_{R}$ ( | Φ$_{3}$ 〉〈 Φ$_{3}$ | ) = cos 2 θ | 0 〉〈 0 | + sin 2 θ | 1 〉〈 1 | , ρ$_{S,}$$_{4}$ = Tr$_{R}$ ( | Φ$_{4}$ 〉〈 Φ$_{4}$ | ) = sin 2 θ | 0 〉〈 0 | + cos 2 θ | 1 〉〈 1 | , (A2)$$\n\n$$S ( ρ$_{S,i}$ ) = − [cos 2 θ log$_{2}$ cos 2 θ + sin 2 θ log$_{2}$ sin 2 θ ] . (A3)$$\n\n$$S [ E ( ∑ i p$_{i}$ ( x$_{1}$, x$_{2}$ ) ρ$_{S,i}$ )] = − 2 ∑ i =1 υ$_{i}$ log$_{2}$ υ$_{i}$. (A8) Finally, we calculate the third term in Eq. (8):$$\n\nand\n\nwhich for all | Φ$_{i}$ 〉 has eigenvalues ω$_{1}$ = ω$_{2}$ = 0 and ω$_{3}$, ω$_{4}$ are given in Eq. (31). The third term in Eq. (8) is thus\n\n$$( E ⊗ I )( | Φ$_{i}$ 〉〈 Φ$_{i}$ | ) = ∑ i,j ( K$_{ij}$ ⊗ I )( | Φ$_{i}$ 〉〈 Φ$_{i}$ | )( K † ij ⊗ I ) , (A9)$$\n\n$$∑ i p$_{i}$ ( x$_{1}$, x$_{2}$ ) S ( ρ$_{S,i}$ ) = − (cos 2 x$_{1}$ cos 2 x$_{2}$ + sin 2 x$_{1}$ cos 2 x$_{2}$ + cos 2 x$_{1}$ sin 2 x$_{2}$ + sin 2 x$_{1}$ sin 2 x$_{2}$ ) × [cos 2 θ log$_{2}$ cos 2 θ + sin 2 θ log$_{2}$ sin 2 θ ] , = − [cos 2 θ log$_{2}$ cos 2 θ + sin 2 θ log$_{2}$ sin 2 θ ] , (A4)$$\n\nwhere we have used the normalization ∑ 4 i =1 p$_{i}$ ( x$_{1}$, x$_{2}$ ) = 1 , ∀ x$_{1}$, x$_{2}$ . This yields the first term in Eq. (30).\n\nNext we calculate the second term in Eq. (8). The output state is\n\n$$∑ i p$_{i}$ ( x$_{1}$, x$_{2}$ ) S [( E ⊗ I )( | Φ$_{i}$ 〉〈 Φ$_{i}$ | )] = − 4 ∑ i =1 ω$_{i}$ log$_{2}$ ω$_{i}$, (A10)$$\n\n$$E ( ∑ i p$_{i}$ ( x$_{1}$, x$_{2}$ ) ρ$_{S,i}$ ) = ∑ i,j K$_{ij}$ ( ∑ i p$_{i}$ ( x$_{1}$, x$_{2}$ ) ρ$_{S,i}$ ) K † $_{ij}$, (A5)$$\n\n$$∑ i p$_{i}$ ( x$_{1}$, x$_{2}$ ) ρ$_{S,i}$ = [cos 2 θ (cos 2 x$_{1}$ cos 2 x$_{2}$ + cos 2 x$_{1}$ sin 2 x$_{2}$ ) + sin 2 θ (sin 2 x$_{1}$ sin 2 x$_{2}$ + sin 2 x$_{1}$ cos 2 x$_{2}$ )] | 0 〉〈 0 | + [cos 2 θ (sin 2 x$_{1}$ sin 2 x$_{2}$ + sin 2 x$_{1}$ cos 2 x$_{2}$ ) + sin 2 θ (cos 2 x$_{1}$ cos 2 x$_{2}$ + cos 2 x$_{1}$ sin 2 x$_{2}$ )] | 1 〉〈 1 | = (cos 2 θ cos 2 x$_{1}$ + sin 2 θ sin 2 x$_{1}$ ) | 0 〉〈 0 | + (cos 2 θ sin 2 x$_{1}$ + sin 2 θ cos 2 x$_{1}$ ) | 1 〉〈 1 | . (A6)$$\n\nwhere, as for Eq. (A4), we have used the normalization ∑ 4 i =1 p$_{i}$ = 1 . This yields the third term in Eq. (30).\n\nThus, indeed only the second term in Eq. (8) depends on x$_{1}$, x$_{2}$ , and for a given value of θ , the classical capacity as- sisted by limited entanglement is maximized by maximizing Eq. (A8). The maximum is attained when the output state (A5) is fully mixed, i.e., when its eigenvalues υ$_{1}$ = υ$_{2}$ = 1 / 2 . This occurs when x$_{1}$ = x$_{2}$ = π $_{4}$, i.e., when we have an equiprobable ensemble of the states. This gives rise to the 1 in Eq. (30).\n\nwhere\n\n- [4] C. Shannon, Bell Sys. Tech. J. 27 , 379 (1948).\n\n- [5] C. H. Bennett and P. W. Shor, Science 303 , 1784 (2004).\n\n- [6] P. Hausladen, R. Jozsa, B. Schumacher, M. Westmoreland, and W. K. Wootters, Phys. Rev. A 54 , 1869 (1996).\n\n- [7] B. Schumacher and M. D. Westmoreland, Phys. Rev. A 56 , 131 (1997).\n\n- [8] S. Lloyd, Phys. Rev. A 55 , 1613 (1997).\n\n- [1] C. Bennett and P. Shor, IEEE Trans. Inf. Theory 44 , 2724 (1998).\n\n- [2] M. Nielsen and I. Chuang, Quantum Computation and Quan- tum Information (Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, England, 2000).\n\n- [3] T. M. Cover and J. A. Thomas, Elements of Information Theory (Wiley, New York, 1991)." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7840064051539937, + "doc_id": "d43083aa9bbae10f3ca50ed05d74293d94bbfefa565d61d348fc64bf4b1ccc21", + "edit_distance": 0.7139852786540484, + "f1_score": 0.9222065063649222, + "meteor": 0.6775522967401577, + "precision": 0.9476744186046512, + "pred_md": "Fig. 4. Measured enhancements of the excitation and emission intensity for spheres with a radius of (a) R = 80 nm and (b) R = 150 nm. The solid lines indicate the linear regression of the data points and the dashed lines represent the expected regression for light that is optimally concentrated to the smallest possible spot.\n\nFig. 4. Measured enhancements of the excitation and emission intensity for spheres with a radius of (a) R = 80 nm and (b) R = 150 nm. The solid lines indicate the linear regression of the data points and the dashed lines represent the expected regression for light that is optimally concentrated to the smallest possible spot.\n\nis defined as the ratio between the peak intensity of the focus and the average diffusive background intensity. The diffusive background intensity is determined by averaging the intensity at the probe sphere over 100 random realizations of the incoming wave front. The emission intensity enhancement is defined as the total emission when a focus is created divided by the average emission during the reference measurement. In Fig. 4 we have plotted the measured enhancements for (a) R = 80 nm and (b) R = 150 nm probe spheres. For the same probe size the emission enhancements η em are proportional to η ex . The proportionality constant is clearly different for the two probe sizes. The number of control segments was varied to create a large spread in enhancements.\n\nWe now theoretically investigate the relation between η em and η ex . The emission power caused by a focused excitation field is proportional to the focus intensity integrated over the probe sphere volume. The reference emission power scales with the volume of the probe sphere. On the contrary, the excitation enhancement is independent of the probe volume and is determined by dividing the peak intensity of the focus by the reference speckle intensity. The ratio of the enhancements for a probe sphere with radius R C , R , is now given by\n\n\n\nwhere V is the volume of the probe sphere.\n\nAssuming that plane polarized light is optimally focussed to the smallest spot area [19] in the center of the probe, we numerically calculate the overlap integral in Eq. 1. From the calculations we find that C 80 = 0 77 . for the 80 nm spheres and C 150 = 0 43 for the 150 nm . spheres (dashed lines in Fig. 4). These values are in good agreement with the experimental values C 80 and C 150 that we find from the linear regression of the data points, C 80 = 0 72 . ± 0 07 and . C 150 = 0 50 . ± 0 07 (solid lines in . Fig. 4). This data therefore support the conclusion that the light is being optimally concentrated.\n\nIn conclusion, we have focused light onto fluorescent probes hidden by a strongly scattering layer of zinc oxide by spatially shaping the phase of a light beam. We studied the shape and dimensions of the created focus. We found that the focus is optimally concentrated to a focus whose area is for certain within 68% of the smallest focal area physically possible. A study of the intensity enhancements of both the fluorescence and excitation, performed on different probe sizes, supports the conclusion of optimal light concentration.\n\nThe authors thank Ivo Vellekoop and Willem Vos for support and valuable discussions. We thank Timmo van der Beek for help with the angular resolved transmission measurements. A. P. Mosk is supported by a VIDI grant from NWO.\n\n## References\n\n- 1. P. Sebbah, ' Waves and Imaging through Complex Media ,' (Kluwer Academic Publishers, 1999)\n- 2. A. Ishimaru, 'Limitation on image resolution imposed by a random medium,' Applied Optics 17, 348-352 (1978)\n- 3. D. Huang, E.A. Swanson, C.P. Lin, J.S. Schuman, W.G. Stinson, W. Chang, M.R. Hee, T. Flotte, K. Gregory, C.A. Puliafito, and J.G. Fujimoto, 'Optical coherence tomography,' Science 254, 1178-1180 (1991)\n- 4. J.M. Schmitt, 'Optical coherence tomography (OCT): a review,' IEEE Journal of Selected Topics in Quantum Electronics 5, 1205-1215 (1999)\n- 5. W. Denk, J.H. Strickler, and W.W. Webb, 'Two-photon laser scanning fluorescence microscopy,' Science 248, 73-76 (1990)\n- 6. F. Helmchen and W. Denk, 'Deep tissue two-photon microscopy,' Nature Methods 2, 932-940 (2005)\n- 7. E.N. Leith, and J. Upatnieks, 'Holographic Imagery Through Diffusing Media,' J. Opt. Soc. Am. 56, 523523 (1966)\n- 8. Z. Yaqoob, D. Psaltis, M.S. Feld, and C. Yang, 'Optical phase conjugation for turbidity suppression in biological samples,' Nature Photonics 2, 110-115 (2008)\n\n3", + "recall": 0.8980716253443526, + "true_md": "Fig. 4. Measured enhancements of the excitation and emission intensity for spheres with a radius of (a) R = 80 nm and (b) R = 150 nm. The solid lines indicate the linear regression of the data points and the dashed lines represent the expected regression for light that is optimally concentrated to the smallest possible spot.\n\nIn conclusion, we have focused light onto fluorescent probes hidden by a strongly scattering layer of zinc oxide by spatially shaping the phase of a light beam. We stud- ied the shape and dimensions of the created focus. We found that the focus is optimally concentrated to a fo- cus whose area is for certain within 68% of the smallest focal area physically possible. A study of the intensity enhancements of both the fluorescence and excitation, performed on different probe sizes, supports the conclu- sion of optimal light concentration.\n\nis defined as the ratio between the peak intensity of the focus and the average diffusive background intensity. The diffusive background intensity is determined by averag- ing the intensity at the probe sphere over 100 random realizations of the incoming wave front. The emission intensity enhancement is defined as the total emission when a focus is created divided by the average emis- sion during the reference measurement. In Fig. 4 we have plotted the measured enhancements for (a) R = 80 nm and (b) R = 150 nm probe spheres. For the same probe size the emission enhancements η em are proportional to η $^{ex}$. The proportionality constant is clearly different for the two probe sizes. The number of control segments was varied to create a large spread in enhancements.\n\nThe authors thank Ivo Vellekoop and Willem Vos for support and valuable discussions. We thank Timmo van der Beek for help with the angular resolved transmission measurements. A. P. Mosk is supported by a VIDI grant from NWO.\n\nWe now theoretically investigate the relation between η em and η $^{ex}$. The emission power caused by a focused ex- citation field is proportional to the focus intensity inte- grated over the probe sphere volume. The reference emis- sion power scales with the volume of the probe sphere. On the contrary, the excitation enhancement is indepen- dent of the probe volume and is determined by dividing the peak intensity of the focus by the reference speckle intensity. The ratio of the enhancements for a probe sphere with radius R , C$_{R}$ , is now given by\n\n## References\n\n- 1. P. Sebbah, “ Waves and Imaging through Complex Me- dia ,” (Kluwer Academic Publishers, 1999)\n\n- 2. A. Ishimaru, “Limitation on image resolution imposed by a random medium,” Applied Optics 17, 348–352 (1978)\n\n- 3. D. Huang, E.A. Swanson, C.P. Lin, J.S. Schuman, W.G. Stinson, W. Chang, M.R. Hee, T. Flotte, K. Gregory, C.A. Puliafito, and J.G. Fujimoto, “Optical coherence tomography,” Science 254, 1178-1180 (1991)\n\n- 4. J.M. Schmitt, “Optical coherence tomography (OCT): a review,” IEEE Journal of Selected Topics in Quantum Electronics 5, 1205-1215 (1999)\n\n- 5. W. Denk, J.H. Strickler, and W.W. Webb, “Two-photon laser scanning fluorescence microscopy,” Science 248, 73-76 (1990)\n\n- 6. F. Helmchen and W. Denk, “Deep tissue two-photon microscopy,” Nature Methods 2, 932-940 (2005)\n\n- 7. E.N. Leith, and J. Upatnieks, “Holographic Imagery Through Diffusing Media,” J. Opt. Soc. Am. 56, 523- 523 (1966)\n\n- 8. Z. Yaqoob, D. Psaltis, M.S. Feld, and C. Yang, “Optical phase conjugation for turbidity suppression in biological samples,” Nature Photonics 2, 110-115 (2008)\n\n3\n\n$$C$_{R}$ ≡ η em η ex = 1 V ∫$_{R}$ I I$_{peak}$ dV , (1)$$\n\nwhere V is the volume of the probe sphere.\n\nAssuming that plane polarized light is optimally fo- cussed to the smallest spot area [19] in the center of the probe, we numerically calculate the overlap integral in Eq. 1. From the calculations we find that C$_{80}$ = 0 . 77 for the 80 nm spheres and C$_{150}$ = 0 . 43 for the 150 nm spheres (dashed lines in Fig. 4). These values are in good agreement with the experimental values C$_{80}$ and C$_{150}$ that we find from the linear regression of the data points, C$_{80}$ = 0 . 72 ± 0 . 07 and C$_{150}$ = 0 . 50 ± 0 . 07 (solid lines in Fig. 4). This data therefore support the conclusion that the light is being optimally concentrated." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4064884599001473, + "doc_id": "c6c922fd6e9fd0e6ff2241d176eecd2e253ef963a942dba59ed068047274d827", + "edit_distance": 0.8417061611374408, + "f1_score": 0.896551724137931, + "meteor": 0.43793551987191576, + "precision": 0.9411764705882353, + "pred_md": "and\n\n\n\nand most importantly for this situation, the Thomas precession of the spin , i.e. [Eq.(23) Eq.(22)] for v << 1, remains\n\n\n\nwhere a ≡ | a r ( x ) | = c 2 sinh 2 ( ζ r ). In this limit the change in the local inertial frame is just a\n\nglyph[negationslash]\n\nglyph[negationslash]\n\n5\n\nFIG. 1: The infinitesimal LLT for a Kerr-Newman black hole with parameters M = 1000, a = 0 8 . M Q , = 0 2 . M and v = 0 3 0 5 0 7 and 0 9 for the black, thick, dashed and thick dashed lines respectively. . , . , . .\n\nFIG. 1: The infinitesimal LLT for a Kerr-Newman black hole with parameters M = 1000, a = 0 8 . M Q , = 0 2 . M and v = 0 3 0 5 0 7 and 0 9 for the black, thick, dashed and thick dashed lines respectively. . , . , . .\n\nwhere\n\n\n\nwhich turns out to be a rotation about the 2-axis though the angle ϑ 1 3 ( x ) = -ϑ 3 1 ( x ), as will be shown in Eq.(30). This is yet another tediously long equation, so we employ graphical techniques in Fig.(2) to illustrate that a singularity is evident at the event horizon r + . This is expected since an observer at infinity can not make measurements at and beyond an event horizon.\n\nglyph[negationslash]\n\nIt is important here to note that ϑ a b ( x ) = λ a b ( x ) = χ a b ( x ) = ϕ a b ( x ), where\n\n\n\nwhich is a trivial change in the local inertial frame. The former set of inequalities results from the boost part of λ a b ( x ), the acceleration and hence the force of the particle, and the curvature of the spacetime respectively.\n\nConsidering now the special case when M,a,Q → 0, the Minkowski spacetime is again recovered with\n\n1\n\n3\n\nχ\n\n(\n\nx\n\n) =\n\n-\n\nχ\n\n3\n\n1\n\n(\n\nx\n\n) =\n\nsinh(\n\nζ\n\n)\n\nr\n\n(22)\n\nrotation in the 2-axis through the angle χ 1 3 ( x ) and the change in spin is also a rotation about the 2-axis given by ϑ 1 3 ( x ). The difference between the latter two terms gives the spin precession in the low velocity limit per unit dt = dτ cosh ( ζ )\n\nFIG. 3: The EPR setup in the Kerr-Newman spacetime. Gray circles are the observers and the gray square is the EPR source.\n\nFIG. 3: The EPR setup in the Kerr-Newman spacetime. Gray circles are the observers and the gray square is the EPR source.\n\n## III. EPR CORRELATION\n\nWe now move on to the actual gedanken experiment of this paper. Two observers are considered at azimuthal angles ± Φ with r > r + and an EPR source generator at Φ = 0 as seen in Fig. (3). The observers and EPR source are static in the local inertial frame Eq.(3), i.e. they are relatively static. The EPR source generates a pair of maximally entangled particles at Φ = 0 which are sent in opposite directions with constant four momentum p a ± = ( m cosh ( ζ ) , 0 0 , , ± m sinh ( ζ )). The pure state can be described by the Bell state,\n\n", + "recall": 0.8559670781893004, + "true_md": "FIG. 1: The infinitesimal LLT for a Kerr-Newman black hole with parameters M = 1000, a = 0 . 8 M , Q = 0 . 2 M and v = 0 . 3 , 0 . 5 , 0 . 7 and 0 . 9 for the black, thick, dashed and thick dashed lines respectively.\n\nwhere\n\nwhich turns out to be a rotation about the 2-axis though the angle ϑ $^{1}$$\\_{3}$( x ) = − ϑ $^{3}$$_{1}$( x ), as will be shown in Eq.(30). This is yet another tediously long equation, so we employ graphical techniques in Fig.(2) to illustrate that a singularity is evi- dent at the event horizon r$_{+}$ . This is expected since an observer at infinity can not make mea- surements at and beyond an event horizon.\n\nIt is important here to note that ϑ $^{a}$$\\_{b}$( x ) ̸ = λ $^{a}$$_{b}$( x ) ̸ = χ $^{a}$$\\_{b}$( x ) ̸ = ϕ $^{a}$$_{b}$( x ), where\n\nwhich is a trivial change in the local inertial frame. The former set of inequalities results from the boost part of λ $^{a}$$\\_{b}$( x ), the acceleration and hence the force of the particle, and the curvature of the spacetime respectively.\n\nConsidering now the special case when M, a, Q → 0, the Minkowski spacetime is again recovered with\n\nand\n\nand most importantly for this situation, the Thomas precession of the spin , i.e. [Eq.(23) - Eq.(22)] for v << 1, remains\n\nwhere a ≡ | a $^{r}$( x ) | = c $^{2}$sinh$^{2}$( ζ $_{r}$). In this limit the change in the local inertial frame is just a\n\nWe now move on to the actual gedanken exper- iment of this paper. Two observers are consid- ered at azimuthal angles ± Φ with r > r$_{+}$ and an EPR source generator at Φ = 0 as seen in Fig. (3). The observers and EPR source are static in the local inertial frame Eq.(3), i.e. they are rel- atively static. The EPR source generates a pair of maximally entangled particles at Φ = 0 which are sent in opposite directions with constant four momentum p a ± = ( m cosh ( ζ ) , 0 , 0 , ± m sinh ( ζ )). The pure state can be described by the Bell state,\n\nrotation in the 2-axis through the angle χ $^{1}$$\\_{3}$( x ) and the change in spin is also a rotation about the 2-axis given by ϑ $^{1}$$_{3}$( x ). The difference between the latter two terms gives the spin precession in the low velocity limit per unit dt = dτ cosh ( ζ )\n\n$$γ = $^{√}$| − → p | 2 + m 2 m and i, k ∈ { 1 , 2 , 3 } (20)$$\n\n$$ϕ $^{1}$$_{3}$( x ) = − ϕ $^{3}$$_{1}$( x ) = u $^{ϕ}$( x ) (21)$$\n\n$$χ $^{1}$$_{3}$( x ) = − χ $^{3}$$_{1}$( x ) = sinh( ζ ) r (22)$$\n\n$$ϑ $^{1}$$_{3}$( x ) = − ϑ $^{3}$$_{1}$( x ) = cosh( ζ ) sinh( ζ ) r (23)$$\n\n$$$^{[}$ϑ $^{3}$$_{1}$( x ) − χ $^{3}$$_{1}$( x ) $^{]}$dτ ∼ − va 2 c $_{2}$dt (24) ≡ | a $^{r}$( x ) | = c $^{2}$sinh$^{2}$( ζ $_{r}$). In this limit$$\n\n$$1 √ 2 $^{[}$| p a $_{+}$, ↑ ; 0 〉 | p a $_{−}$, ↓ ; 0 〉 − | p a $_{+}$, ↓ ; 0 〉 | p a $_{−}$, ↑ ; 0 〉 $^{]}$, (25)$$\n\n## III. EPR CORRELATION\n\nFIG. 3: The EPR setup in the Kerr-Newman space- time. Gray circles are the observers and the gray square is the EPR source.\n\n5" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6111618801678212, + "doc_id": "c19d1766a19692af9585ac8e57e166a5bd3318017283379323bb8782917785dd", + "edit_distance": 0.7233606557377049, + "f1_score": 0.9703703703703703, + "meteor": 0.6785317788686958, + "precision": 0.9776119402985075, + "pred_md": "FIG. 3: Excess entropy along and a set of isotherms. (a) T = 0 01; 0 02 and 0 03; (b) -. . . T = 0 1; 0 2 and 0 3. . . .\n\nFIG. 3: Excess entropy along and a set of isotherms. (a) T = 0 01; 0 02 and 0 03; (b) -. . . T = 0 1; 0 2 and 0 3. . . .\n\n## Gaussian Core Model\n\nThe results for the GCM are qualitatively similar to the case of Herzian spheres. Because of this we do not explain them in detail. Fig. 6(a) and (b) shows the diffusion coefficient for the GCM system for a set of six isotherms. One can see that for low temperatures starting from the densities approximately 0 3 . the diffusion coefficient demonstrate anomalous growth with increase of the density. We expect that at higher densities the curve bends downward but in the present study we have not measured so high densities for this model. At high temperatures the diffusion monotonically decreases with\n\nFig. 9(a) - (b) demonstrates the Rosenfeld relation for the GCM for the same set of isotherms. Comparing to\n\nFig. 9(a) - (b) demonstrates the Rosenfeld relation for the GCM for the same set of isotherms. Comparing to\n\nFIG. 4: The dependence of reduced diffusion on the excess entropy (see formulas (1) and (4)) along some isotherms (a) -T = 0 01; 0 02 and 0 03; (b) -. . . T = 0 1; 0 2 and 0 3. . . .\n\nFIG. 4: The dependence of reduced diffusion on the excess entropy (see formulas (1) and (4)) along some isotherms (a) -T = 0 01; 0 02 and 0 03; (b) -. . . T = 0 1; 0 2 and 0 3. . . .\n\nincreasing the density.\n\nThe structure of the liquid rapidly decays with the temperature increase. This is shown in the Fig. 7(a) (b). One can see that at the temperature T = 1 0 . g r ( ) is equal to unity almost in the whole range of the distances r .\n\nLike the diffusion coefficient the excess entropy has a minimum at the low temperatures, but with increasing the temperature it becomes monotonically decreasing function of the density (Fig. 8(a) - (b)).\n\n5", + "recall": 0.9632352941176471, + "true_md": "5\n\nFIG. 4: The dependence of reduced diffusion on the excess entropy (see formulas (1) and (4)) along some isotherms (a) - T = 0 . 01; 0 . 02 and 0 . 03; (b) - T = 0 . 1; 0 . 2 and 0 . 3.\n\nFIG. 3: Excess entropy along and a set of isotherms. (a) - T = 0 . 01; 0 . 02 and 0 . 03; (b) - T = 0 . 1; 0 . 2 and 0 . 3.\n\n## Gaussian Core Model\n\nincreasing the density.\n\nThe structure of the liquid rapidly decays with the temperature increase. This is shown in the Fig. 7(a) - (b). One can see that at the temperature T = 1 . 0 g ( r ) is equal to unity almost in the whole range of the distances r .\n\nLike the diffusion coefficient the excess entropy has a minimum at the low temperatures, but with increas- ing the temperature it becomes monotonically decreasing function of the density (Fig. 8(a) - (b)).\n\nFig. 9(a) - (b) demonstrates the Rosenfeld relation for the GCM for the same set of isotherms. Comparing to\n\nThe results for the GCM are qualitatively similar to the case of Herzian spheres. Because of this we do not explain them in detail. Fig. 6(a) and (b) shows the dif- fusion coefficient for the GCM system for a set of six isotherms. One can see that for low temperatures start- ing from the densities approximately 0 . 3 the diffusion coefficient demonstrate anomalous growth with increase of the density. We expect that at higher densities the curve bends downward but in the present study we have not measured so high densities for this model. At high temperatures the diffusion monotonically decreases with" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.461214477859853, + "doc_id": "93fec96be4dd6f603301c99b6fd2aa4434ff616efb611b3104ac76e6383c8fc0", + "edit_distance": 0.7126839523475823, + "f1_score": 0.8635170603674541, + "meteor": 0.43782222597652437, + "precision": 0.8940217391304348, + "pred_md": "semiclassical quantization semi-analytically [24, 25, 4042] and acquire great insight on the ensuing dynamics of the corresponding Wigner distribution [43, 44]. In this work, we consider the Jopheson-regime dynamics of four different preparations, interpreting the results in terms of the semiclassical phase-space structure and its implications on the expansion of each of these initial states in terms of the semiclassical eigenstates. We first explore the phase-sensitivity of phase-diffusion in the Josephson regime [22, 24]. Then we study the buildup of coherence between two initially separated condensates [41], which is somewhat related to the phase-coherence oscillations observed in the sudden transition from the Mott insulator to the superfluid regime in optical lattices [45-47]. Then we compare two coherent preparations in the separatrix region of the classical phase space, finding substantial differences in their dynamics due to their different participation numbers.\n\nThe narrative of this work is as follows [a]: The twosite Bose-Hubbard model and its classical phase-space are presented in Section II. The semiclassical WKB quantization is carried out in Section III. In Section IV, we define the initial state preparations of interest and explain their phase-space representation. This is used in Section V to evaluate their expansion in the energy basis (the local density of states), which is the key for studying the dynamics in Sections VI to VIII. Both the time-averaged dynamics and the fluctuations of the Bloch vector are analyzed. In particular we observe in Section VIII that the fluctuations obeys a remarkable semiclassical scaling relation. Conclusions are given in Section X.\n\n## II. THE TWO-SITE BOSE-HUBBARD MODEL\n\nWe consider the Bose-Hubbard Hamiltonian for N bosons in a two-site system,\n\n\n\nwhere K is the hopping amplitude, U is the interaction, and E = E 2 -E 1 is the bias in the on-site potentials. We use boldface fonts to mark dynamical variables that are important for the semiclassical analysis, and use regular fonts for their values. The total number of particles n 1 + n 2 = N is conserved, hence the dimension of the pertinent Hilbert space is N = N +1. Defining\n\n\n\n\n\nand eliminating insignificant c -number terms, we can rewrite Eq. (1) as a spin Hamiltonian,\n\n\n\n2\n\nconserving the spin J 2 = j ( j + 1) with j = N/ 2. The BHH Hamiltonian thus has a spherical phase-space structure. In the absence of interaction ( U = 0) it describes simple spin precession with frequency Ω = ( K, 0 , E ).\n\nThe quantum evolution of the spin Hamiltonian (4) is given by the unitary operator exp( - H i t ). Its classical limit is obtained by treating ( J , J x y , J z ) as c -numbers, whose Poisson Brackets (PB) correspond to the SU(2) Lie algebra. The classical equations of motion for any dynamical variable A are derived from ˙ A = - H [ , A ] PB . Conservation of J 2 allows for one constraint on the noncanonical set of variables ( J , J x y , J z ).\n\nDue to the spherical phase-space geometry, it is natural to use the non-canonical conjugate variables ( ϕ θ , ),\n\n\n\n\n\nwhere [ J 2 1 ] / 2 is a constant of the motion. In the quantum mechanical Wigner picture treatment (see later sections) this constant is identified as [( j +1) ] j 1 / 2 , based on the derivation of section 2.3 of Ref. [44]. For large j we use [ J 2 1 ] / 2 ≈ N/ 2. With these new variables the Hamiltonian takes the form\n\n\n\nwhere the scaled parameters are\n\n\n\nThe structure of the underlying classical phase space is determined by the dimensionless parameters u and ε . For strong interactions u > 1 the phase space includes a figure-eight shaped separatrix (Fig. 1), provided | ε | < ε c , where [25, 48]\n\n\n\nThis separatrix splits phase space into three integrable regions: a 'sea' of Rabi-like trajectories and two interaction-dominated nonlinear 'islands'. For zero bias the separatrix is a symmetric 8 shaped figure that encloses the two islands, and the relevant energies are [49]\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nLooking at the phase-space structure as a function of u , the two islands emerge once u > 1. For u > 2, they encompass the North and the South poles, yielding macroscopic self-trapping [9], and for very large u /greatermuch 1 they cover most of the Northern and the Southern hemispheres respectively. Note that for u /greatermuch 1, the expression E + ≈ ( N/ 2) 2 U , reflects the cost of localizing all the particles in one site, compared to equally-populated sites.", + "recall": 0.8350253807106599, + "true_md": "2\n\nE The quantum evolution of the spin Hamiltonian (4) is given by the unitary operator exp( − i H t ). Its classical limit is obtained by treating ( J$_{x}$, J$_{y}$, J$_{z}$ ) as c -numbers, whose Poisson Brackets (PB) correspond to the SU(2) Lie algebra. The classical equations of motion for any dynamical variable A are derived from ˙ A = − [ H , A ]$_{PB}$. Conservation of J 2 allows for one constraint on the non- canonical set of variables ( J$_{x}$, J$_{y}$, J$_{z}$ ).\n\nDue to the spherical phase-space geometry, it is natural to use the non-canonical conjugate variables ( ϕ , θ ),\n\nsemiclassical quantization semi-analytically [24, 25, 40– 42] and acquire great insight on the ensuing dynamics of the corresponding Wigner distribution [43, 44]. In this work, we consider the Jopheson-regime dynamics of four different preparations, interpreting the results in terms of the semiclassical phase-space structure and its impli- cations on the expansion of each of these initial states in terms of the semiclassical eigenstates. We first explore the phase-sensitivity of phase-diffusion in the Josephson regime [22, 24]. Then we study the buildup of coherence between two initially separated condensates [41], which is somewhat related to the phase-coherence oscillations ob- served in the sudden transition from the Mott insulator to the superfluid regime in optical lattices [45–47]. Then we compare two coherent preparations in the separatrix region of the classical phase space, finding substantial differences in their dynamics due to their different par- ticipation numbers.\n\nThe narrative of this work is as follows [a]: The two- site Bose-Hubbard model and its classical phase-space are presented in Section II. The semiclassical WKB quantiza- tion is carried out in Section III. In Section IV, we define the initial state preparations of interest and explain their phase-space representation. This is used in Section V to evaluate their expansion in the energy basis (the local density of states), which is the key for studying the dy- namics in Sections VI to VIII. Both the time-averaged dynamics and the fluctuations of the Bloch vector are analyzed. In particular we observe in Section VIII that the fluctuations obeys a remarkable semiclassical scaling relation. Conclusions are given in Section X.\n\nwhere the scaled parameters are\n\nwhere [ J $^{2}$]1 / 2 is a constant of the motion. In the quantum mechanical Wigner picture treatment (see later sections) this constant is identified as [( j +1) j ] 1 / $^{2}$, based on the derivation of section 2.3 of Ref. [44]. For large j we use [ J $^{2}$]1 / 2 ≈ N/ 2. With these new variables the Hamilto- nian takes the form\n\nWe consider the Bose-Hubbard Hamiltonian for N bosons in a two-site system,\n\nThe structure of the underlying classical phase space is determined by the dimensionless parameters u and ε . For strong interactions u > 1 the phase space includes a figure-eight shaped separatrix (Fig. 1), provided | ε | < ε$_{c}$ , where [25, 48]\n\n( ) This separatrix splits phase space into three inte- grable regions: a ‘sea’ of Rabi-like trajectories and two interaction-dominated nonlinear ‘islands’. For zero bias the separatrix is a symmetric 8 shaped figure that en- closes the two islands, and the relevant energies are [49]\n\nwhere K is the hopping amplitude, U is the interaction, and E = E 2 − E 1 is the bias in the on-site potentials. We use boldface fonts to mark dynamical variables that are important for the semiclassical analysis, and use regu- lar fonts for their values. The total number of particles n$_{1}$ + n$_{2}$ = N is conserved, hence the dimension of the pertinent Hilbert space is N = N + 1. Defining\n\nLooking at the phase-space structure as a function of u , the two islands emerge once u > 1. For u > 2, they en- compass the North and the South poles, yielding macro- scopic self-trapping [9], and for very large u ≫ 1 they cover most of the Northern and the Southern hemi- spheres respectively. Note that for u ≫ 1, the expres- sion E$_{+}$ ≈ ( N/ 2) $^{2}$U , reflects the cost of localizing all the particles in one site, compared to equally-populated sites.\n\nand eliminating insignificant c -number terms, we can re- write Eq. (1) as a spin Hamiltonian,\n\n$$E$_{−}$ = − (1 / 2) NK = ground energy , (10) E$_{x}$ = +(1 / 2) NK = separatrix , (11)$$\n\n$$− E$_{x}$ = +(1 / 2) NK = separatrix , (11)$$\n\n$$E$_{+}$ = (1 / 4)[ u +(1 /u )] NK = top energy . (12)$$\n\n$$J$_{z}$ ≡ 1 2 ( n$_{1}$ − n$_{2}$ ) ≡ n , (2)$$\n\n$$J$_{+}$ ≡ ˆ a † $_{1}$ˆ a$_{2}$ (3)$$\n\n$$H = UJ 2 z − E J$_{z}$ − KJ$_{x}$, (4)$$\n\n$$H = ∑ i =1 , 2 [ E $_{i}$n$_{i}$ + U 2 n$_{i}$ ( n$_{i}$ − 1) ] − K 2 (ˆ a † $_{2}$ˆ a$_{1}$ + ˆ a † $_{1}$ˆ a$_{2}$ ) , (1)$$\n\n$$ε$_{c}$ = ( u 2 3 − 1 ) 3 2 . (9) splits phase space into three inte-$$\n\n$$u ≡ NU K , ε ≡ E K . (8)$$\n\n$$H ( θ , ϕ ) = NK 2 [ 1 2 u (cos θ ) 2 − ε cos θ − sin θ cos ϕ ] , (7)$$\n\n## II. THE TWO-SITE BOSE-HUBBARD MODEL\n\n$$J$_{z}$ ≡ [ J $^{2}$]1 / $^{2}$cos( θ ) (5) J$_{x}$ [ J $^{2}$]1 / $^{2}$sin( θ ) cos( ϕ ) (6)$$\n\n$$≡ J$_{x}$ [ J $^{2}$]1 / $^{2}$sin( θ ) cos( ϕ ) (6)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.901921891956688, + "doc_id": "bab3f09ebf83303211ad1adfff1ab47304ae9f49b587e28199aba63dabc3c6d2", + "edit_distance": 0.19367588932806323, + "f1_score": 0.956772334293948, + "meteor": 0.9537897157027757, + "precision": 0.9707602339181286, + "pred_md": "arXiv:1001.0955v2 [astro-ph.HE] 6 Jan 2010\n\n2009 Fermi Symposium, Washington, D.C., Nov. 2-5\n\n1\n\n## Observations of Soft Gamma Ray Sources > 100 keV Using Earth Occultation with GBM\n\nG.L. Case, M.L. Cherry, J. Rodi Physics & Astronomy, Louisiana State Univ., Baton Rouge, LA 70803, USA\n\nDept. of\n\n## A. Camero-Arranz\n\nFundaci'n Espa˜ola de Ciencia y Tecnolog' ıa (MICINN), C/Rosario Pino,14-16, 28020-Madrid, Spain o n\n\n## E. Beklen\n\nMiddle East Technical University (METU), 06531, Ankara, Turkey\n\nC. A. Wilson-Hodge\n\nNASA Marshall Space Flight Center, Huntsville, AL 35812\n\n## P. Jenke\n\nNASA Postdoctoral Program Fellow, NASA Marshall Space Flight Center, Huntsville, AL 35812\n\nP.N. Bhat, M.S. Briggs, V. Chaplin, V. Connaughton, R. Preece University of Alabama in Huntsville, Huntsville, AL 35899\n\n## M.H. Finger\n\nUSRA, National Space Science and Technology Center, Huntsville, AL 35899\n\nThe NaI and BGO detectors on the Gamma ray Burst Monitor (GBM) on Fermi are now being used for long term monitoring of the hard X-ray/low energy gamma ray sky. Using the Earth occultation technique demonstrated previously by the BATSE instrument on the Compton Gamma Ray Observatory, GBM produces multiband light curves and spectra for known sources and transient outbursts in the 8 keV - 1 MeV band with its NaI detectors and up to 40 MeV with its BGO. Coverage of the entire sky is obtained every two orbits, with sensitivity exceeding that of BATSE at energies below ∼ 25 keV and above ∼ 1 5 MeV. We describe the technique and present preliminary results . after the first ∼ 17 months of observations at energies above 100 keV. Seven sources are detected: the Crab, Cyg X-1, Swift J1753.5-0127, 1E 1740-29, Cen A, GRS 1915+105, and the transient source XTE J1752-223.\n\n## I. INTRODUCTION\n\nThe Gamma ray Burst Monitor (GBM) on Fermi is currently the only instrument in orbit providing nearly continuous full sky coverage in the hard X-ray/low energy gamma ray energy range. The Earth occultation technique, used very successfully on BATSE, has been adapted to GBM. An initial catalog of 64 sources is currently being monitored and continuously augmented. At energies above 100 keV, six steady sources (the Crab, Cyg X-1, Swift J1753.5-0127, 1E 1740-29, Cen A, GRS 1915+105) and one transient source (XTE J1752-223) have been detected in the first year of observation. We describe the instrument, outline the technique, and present light curves for the seven sources.\n\n## II. GBM AND THE EARTH OCCULTATION OBSERVATIONAL TECHNIQUE\n\nThe Gamma ray Burst Monitor is the secondary instrument onboard the Fermi satellite [1, 2]. It con-\n\neConf C091122\n\nsists of 12 NaI detectors 5 '' in diameter by 0.5 '' thick mounted on the corners of the spacecraft and oriented such that they view the entire sky not occulted by the Earth. GBM also contains 2 BGO detectors 5 '' in diameter by 5 '' thick located on opposite sides of the spacecraft. None of the GBM detectors have direct imaging capability.\n\nKnown sources of gamma ray emission can be monitored with non-imaging detectors using the Earth occultation technique, as was successfully demonstrated with BATSE [3, 4]. When a source of gamma rays is occulted by the Earth, the count rate measured by the detector will drop, producing a step-like feature. When the source reappears from behind the Earths limb, the count rate will increase, producing another step. The diameter of the Earth seen from Fermi is ∼ 140 , so roughly 30% of the sky is occulted by the · Earth at any one time. Coupled with the ± 35 · slewing of the pointing direction every orbit, this means that the entire sky is occulted every two orbits. With an altitude of 565 km, a period of 96 minutes, and an orbital inclination of 26 5 . · , individual occultation steps last for ∼ 10 seconds (Fig. 1).", + "recall": 0.9431818181818182, + "true_md": "2009 Fermi Symposium, Washington, D.C., Nov. 2-5\n\n1\n\n# Observations of Soft Gamma Ray Sources > 100 keV Using Earth Occultation with GBM\n\nG.L. Case, M.L. Cherry, J. Rodi\n\nDept. of Physics & Astronomy, Louisiana State Univ., Baton Rouge, LA 70803, USA\n\nA. Camero-Arranz\n\nFundaci´ on Espa˜ nola de Ciencia y Tecnolog´ıa (MICINN), C/Rosario Pino,14-16, 28020-Madrid, Spain\n\nE. Beklen\n\nMiddle East Technical University (METU), 06531, Ankara, Turkey\n\nC. A. Wilson-Hodge\n\nNASA Marshall Space Flight Center, Huntsville, AL 35812\n\nP. Jenke\n\nNASA Postdoctoral Program Fellow, NASA Marshall Space Flight Center, Huntsville, AL 35812\n\nP.N. Bhat, M.S. Briggs, V. Chaplin, V. Connaughton, R. Preece\n\nUniversity of Alabama in Huntsville, Huntsville, AL 35899\n\nM.H. Finger\n\nUSRA, National Space Science and Technology Center, Huntsville, AL 35899\n\nThe NaI and BGO detectors on the Gamma ray Burst Monitor (GBM) on Fermi are now being used for long term monitoring of the hard X-ray/low energy gamma ray sky. Using the Earth occultation technique demonstrated previously by the BATSE instrument on the Compton Gamma Ray Observatory, GBM produces multiband light curves and spectra for known sources and transient outbursts in the 8 keV - 1 MeV band with its NaI detectors and up to 40 MeV with its BGO. Coverage of the entire sky is obtained every two orbits, with sensitivity exceeding that of BATSE at energies below ∼ 25 keV and above ∼ 1 . 5 MeV. We describe the technique and present preliminary results after the first ∼ 17 months of observations at energies above 100 keV. Seven sources are detected: the Crab, Cyg X-1, Swift J1753.5-0127, 1E 1740-29, Cen A, GRS 1915+105, and the transient source XTE J1752-223.\n\nThe Gamma ray Burst Monitor (GBM) on Fermi is currently the only instrument in orbit providing nearly continuous full sky coverage in the hard X-ray/low energy gamma ray energy range. The Earth occul- tation technique, used very successfully on BATSE, has been adapted to GBM. An initial catalog of 64 sources is currently being monitored and continuously augmented. At energies above 100 keV, six steady sources (the Crab, Cyg X-1, Swift J1753.5-0127, 1E 1740-29, Cen A, GRS 1915+105) and one transient source (XTE J1752-223) have been detected in the first year of observation. We describe the instrument, outline the technique, and present light curves for the seven sources.\n\nsists of 12 NaI detectors 5 ′′ in diameter by 0.5 ′′ thick mounted on the corners of the spacecraft and oriented such that they view the entire sky not occulted by the Earth. GBM also contains 2 BGO detectors 5 ′′ in di- ameter by 5 ′′ thick located on opposite sides of the spacecraft. None of the GBM detectors have direct imaging capability.\n\nThe Gamma ray Burst Monitor is the secondary instrument onboard the Fermi satellite [1, 2]. It con-\n\nKnown sources of gamma ray emission can be mon- itored with non-imaging detectors using the Earth oc- cultation technique, as was successfully demonstrated with BATSE [3, 4]. When a source of gamma rays is occulted by the Earth, the count rate measured by the detector will drop, producing a step-like feature. When the source reappears from behind the Earths limb, the count rate will increase, producing another step. The diameter of the Earth seen from Fermi is ∼ 140 $^{◦}$, so roughly 30% of the sky is occulted by the Earth at any one time. Coupled with the ± 35 ◦ slew- ing of the pointing direction every orbit, this means that the entire sky is occulted every two orbits. With an altitude of 565 km, a period of 96 minutes, and an orbital inclination of 26 . 5 $^{◦}$, individual occultation steps last for ∼ 10 seconds (Fig. 1).\n\neConf C091122\n\n## II. GBM AND THE EARTH OCCULTATION OBSERVATIONAL TECHNIQUE\n\n## I. INTRODUCTION\n\narXiv:1001.0955v2 [astro-ph.HE] 6 Jan 2010" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5685863283470676, + "doc_id": "533376f007fd33d60edbb54d51b5f97c357f17fa66069603e85f7beeb915a7b0", + "edit_distance": 0.7682468021068473, + "f1_score": 0.9143610013175231, + "meteor": 0.4990525500968179, + "precision": 0.9638888888888889, + "pred_md": "whereas the Wigner function of an eigenstate is semiclassically approximated by a micro-canonical distribution:\n\n\n\nIn general none of the above listed initial states is an eigenstate of the BHH, but rather a superposition of BHH eigenstates. Consequently their Wigner function deforms over time (see e.g. Fig. 3) and the expectation values of observables become time dependent (see e.g.Fig. 4), as discussed in later sections.\n\n## V. THE INITIAL PREPARATION AND ITS EIGENSTATE EXPANSION - LOCAL DENSITY OF STATES\n\nHaving set the stage by defining the phase-space representation of eigenstates in Sect. III and of the initial conditions in Sect. IV, the evolution of any initial preparation is uniquely determined by its eigenstate expansion. Thus, in order to analyze the dynamics, we now evaluate the local density of states (LDOS) with respect to the preparation ψ of the system:\n\n\n\nIf ψ is mirror symmetric the above expression should be multiplied either by 0 or by 2 in the case of odd/even eigenstates. In Fig. 5, we plot the LDOS associated with Pi, Edge, Zero and TwinFock preparations. The applicability of semiclassical methods to calculate the LDOS has been numerically demonstrated for the case of a three site (trimer) model in [35]. By contrast, the simpler two site (dimer) model under consideration, offers an opportunity for deriving exact expressions by substituting Eqs. (35)(37) into Eq. (38) and evaluating the integrals under the appropriate approximations. For clarity, we summarize below the main results of this analytic evaluation, with the details given in App. D.\n\nConsider first the Pi and Edge preparations. The Wigner distributions of both lie on the separatrix and are hence concentrated around the energy E x . Yet, their line shapes are strikingly different: For an Edge preparation we have,\n\n\n\nfeaturing a dip at E ∼ E x . The calculation in the Pi case leads to\n\n\n\n(the exact expression can be found in App. D). This latter line shape features a peak at E ∼ E x , because the\n\n5\n\nBessel function compensates the logarithmic suppression by ω E ( ). Consequently, as seen below, the fluctuations associated with on-separatrix motion differ dramatically, depending on where the SCS wave-packet is launched.\n\nAnalytic results are obtained in App. D, also for the Zero and TwinFock preparations. In the latter case the result is:\n\n\n\nAs shown in Fig. 5, the above semiclassical expressions agree well with the exact numerical results.\n\nThe LDOS determines the spectral content of the dynamics. Consider first the characteristic oscillation frequency of dynamical variables. Away from the separatrix, it is given by the classical estimate ω osc ≈ ω E ( ). For example, for a Zero preparation, we have ω osc = ω J . While the classical frequency vanishes on the separtrix, we still obtain a finite result for near-separatrix preparations (Pi,Edge) because the wave-packet has a finite width, and because ω x provides a lower bound on ω osc . In any case the result becomes h dependent. To be specific, consider the Pi and the Edge preparations separately. In both cases the width of the wave-packet is ∆ n = √ N/ 2. In case of the Pi preparation it occupies an energy range ∆ E = U ∆ n 2 ∝ N , while in the Edge preparation case ∆ E = v n ∆ n ∝ N 1 / 2 , where v n ≈ ω J is identified as the velocity of the phase space points in this region. Using Eq. (29) we find\n\n\n\nwhere the additional factor of '2' applies to the Edge preparation: This factor is due to the different dependence of ∆ E on N in the two respective cases. On top we might have an additional factor of 2 due to mirror symmetry (see discussion of the dynamics at the end of the next section). Note that as u/N exceeds unity, the distinction between Pi, Zero, and Edge preparations blurs because the wave-packets becomes wider than the width of the separatrix region, until at the Fock regime, all three consist of the same island levels. Thus in this limit, we get for ω osc essentially the same result as in the (negligable K ) Fock regime: the width of the wave-packet is ∆ n = √ N/ 2, and the dispersion relation ω E ( ) = 2 Un gives the standard separated-condensates phase-diffusion frequency [17, 18],\n\n\n\nIt should be clear that, both, in Eq. (42) and in Eq. (43) u/N should be accompanied with a numerical prefactor that should be adjusted because the notion of 'width' is somewhat ill defined and in general depends on the precise details of the numerical procedure, which we discuss in the next section.", + "recall": 0.8696741854636592, + "true_md": "5\n\nBessel function compensates the logarithmic suppression by ω ( E ). Consequently, as seen below, the fluctuations associated with on-separatrix motion differ dramatically, depending on where the SCS wave-packet is launched.\n\nAnalytic results are obtained in App. D, also for the Zero and TwinFock preparations. In the latter case the result is:\n\nwhereas the Wigner function of an eigenstate is semiclas- sically approximated by a micro-canonical distribution:\n\nIn general none of the above listed initial states is an eigenstate of the BHH, but rather a superposition of BHH eigenstates. Consequently their Wigner function deforms over time (see e.g. Fig. 3) and the expectation values of observables become time dependent (see e.g.Fig. 4), as discussed in later sections.\n\nAs shown in Fig. 5, the above semiclassical expressions agree well with the exact numerical results.\n\n$$P( E ) ∝ ω ( E ) NK [ 1 − ( 2 E NK ) 2 ] − 1 / 2 . (41)$$\n\n$$ρ ( ν ) W ( n, ϕ ) ≈ ω ( E$_{ν}$ ) δ ( H ( ϕ, n ) − E$_{ν}$ ) . (37)$$\n\n## V. THE INITIAL PREPARATION AND ITS EIGENSTATE EXPANSION - LOCAL DENSITY OF STATES\n\nHaving set the stage by defining the phase-space rep- resentation of eigenstates in Sect. III and of the initial conditions in Sect. IV, the evolution of any initial prepa- ration is uniquely determined by its eigenstate expansion. Thus, in order to analyze the dynamics, we now evaluate the local density of states (LDOS) with respect to the preparation ψ of the system:\n\nThe LDOS determines the spectral content of the dy- namics. Consider first the characteristic oscillation fre- quency of dynamical variables. Away from the separa- trix, it is given by the classical estimate ω$_{osc}$ ≈ ω ( E ). For example, for a Zero preparation, we have ω$_{osc}$ = ω$_{J}$ . While the classical frequency vanishes on the separtrix, we still obtain a finite result for near-separatrix prepa- rations (Pi,Edge) because the wave-packet has a finite width, and because ω$_{x}$ provides a lower bound on ω$_{osc}$ . In any case the result becomes h dependent. To be specific, consider the Pi and the Edge preparations separately. In both cases the width of the wave-packet is Δ n = √ N/ 2. In case of the Pi preparation it occupies an energy range Δ E = U Δ n 2 ∝ N , while in the Edge preparation case Δ E = v$_{n}$ Δ n N 1 / $^{2}$, where v$_{n}$ ≈ ω$_{J}$ is identified as the velocity of the phase space points in this region. Using Eq. (29) we find\n\nIf ψ is mirror symmetric the above expression should be multiplied either by 0 or by 2 in the case of odd/even eigenstates. In Fig. 5, we plot the LDOS associated with Pi, Edge, Zero and TwinFock preparations. The applica- bility of semiclassical methods to calculate the LDOS has been numerically demonstrated for the case of a three site (trimer) model in [35]. By contrast, the simpler two site (dimer) model under consideration, offers an opportunity for deriving exact expressions by substituting Eqs. (35)- (37) into Eq. (38) and evaluating the integrals under the appropriate approximations. For clarity, we summarize below the main results of this analytic evaluation, with the details given in App. D.\n\nwhere the additional factor of “2” applies to the Edge preparation: This factor is due to the different depen- dence of Δ E on N in the two respective cases. On top we might have an additional factor of 2 due to mirror symmetry (see discussion of the dynamics at the end of the next section). Note that as u/N exceeds unity, the distinction between Pi, Zero, and Edge preparations blurs because the wave-packets becomes wider than the width of the separatrix region, until at the Fock regime, all three consist of the same island levels. Thus in this limit, we get for ω$_{osc}$ essentially the same result as in the (negligable K ) Fock regime: the width of the wave-packet is Δ n = √ N/ 2, and the dispersion relation ω ( E ) = 2 Un gives the standard separated-condensates phase-diffusion frequency [17, 18],\n\nConsider first the Pi and Edge preparations. The Wigner distributions of both lie on the separatrix and are hence concentrated around the energy E$_{x}$ . Yet, their line shapes are strikingly different: For an Edge prepa- ration we have,\n\n$$ω$_{osc}$ ≈ { 1 2 } × [ log ( N u )] − 1 ω$_{J}$, (42)$$\n\n$$P( E$_{ν}$ ) = |〈 E$_{ν}$ | ψ 〉| 2 = trace( ρ ( ν $^{)}$ρ( ψ $^{)}$) = ∫ ρ ( ν ) W (Ω) ρ ( ψ ) W (Ω) d Ω h . (38)$$\n\n$$P( E ) ∝ ω ( E ) ω$_{J}$ exp [ − 1 N ( E − E$_{x}$ ω$_{J}$ ) 2 ] , (39)$$\n\n$$ω$_{osc}$ ≈ ( u N ) 1 / $^{2}$ω$_{J}$ = $_{U}$√$_{N.}$ (43) It should be clear that, both, in Eq. (42) and in Eq. (43)$$\n\n$$P( E ) ∝ ω ( E ) ω$_{J}$ Bessel [ E − E$_{x}$ NU ] (40)$$\n\n( ) It should be clear that, both, in Eq. (42) and in Eq. (43) u/N should be accompanied with a numerical prefactor that should be adjusted because the notion of “width” is somewhat ill defined and in general depends on the pre- cise details of the numerical procedure, which we discuss in the next section.\n\nfeaturing a dip at E ∼ E$_{x}$ . The calculation in the Pi case leads to\n\n(the exact expression can be found in App. D). This latter line shape features a peak at E ∼ E$_{x}$ , because the" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9009321565306422, + "doc_id": "f85f8198758083dd31c3992f459239b6cb68bf66a115a861b836d1fffad688bf", + "edit_distance": 0.3602209944751381, + "f1_score": 0.9394736842105263, + "meteor": 0.9357341804205564, + "precision": 0.9727520435967303, + "pred_md": "arXiv:1001.0770v1 [astro-ph.HE] 5 Jan 2010\n\n2009 Fermi Symposium, Washington, D.C., Nov. 2-5\n\n1\n\n## VERITAS Observations of Blazars\n\nW. Benbow for the VERITAS Collaboration\n\nHarvard-Smithsonian Center for Astrophysics, F.L. Whipple Observatory, PO Box 6369, Amado, AZ 85645, USA\n\nThe VERITAS array of four 12-m diameter imaging atmospheric-Cherenkov telescopes in southern Arizona is used to study very high energy (VHE; E > 100 GeV) γ -ray emission from astrophysical objects. VERITAS is currently the most sensitive VHE γ -ray observatory in the world and one of the VERITAS collaboration's Key Science Projects (KSP) is the study of blazars. These active galactic nuclei (AGN) are the most numerous class of identified VHE sources, with ∼ 30 known to emit VHE photons. More than 70 AGN, almost all of which are blazars, have been observed with the VERITAS array since 2007, in most cases with the deepest-ever VHE exposure. These observations have resulted in the detection of VHE γ -rays from 16 AGN (15 blazars), including 8 for the first time at these energies. The VERITAS blazar KSP is summarized in this proceeding and selected results are presented.\n\n## 1. Introduction\n\nActive galactic nuclei are the most numerous class of identified VHE γ -ray sources. These objects emit non-thermal radiation across ∼ 20 orders of magnitude in energy and rank among the most powerful particle accelerators in the universe. A small fraction of AGN possess strong collimated outflows (jets) powered by accretion onto a supermassive black hole (SMBH). VHE γ -ray emission can be generated in these jets, likely in a compact region very near the SMBH event horizon. Blazars, a class of AGN with jets pointed along the line-of-sight to the observer, are of particular interest in the VHE regime. Approximately 30 blazars, primarily high-frequency-peaked BL Lacs (HBL), are identified as sources of VHE γ -rays, and some are spectacularly variable on time scales comparable to the light crossing time of their SMBH ( ∼ 2 min; [1]). VHE blazar studies probe the environment very near the central SMBH and address a wide range of physical phenomena, including the accretion and jet-formation processes. These studies also have cosmological implications, as VHE blazar data can be used to strongly constrain primordial radiation fields (see the extragalactic background light (EBL) constraints from, e.g., [2, 3]).\n\nVHE blazars have double-humped spectral energy distributions (SEDs), with one peak at UV/X-ray energies and another at GeV/TeV energies. The origin of the lower-energy peak is commonly explained as synchrotron emission from the relativistic electrons in the blazar jets. The origin of the higher-energy peak is controversial, but is widely believed to be the result of inverse-Compton scattering of seed photons off the same relativistic electrons. The origin of the seed photons in these leptonic scenarios could be the synchrotron photons themselves, or photons from an external source. Hadronic scenarios are also plausible explanations for the VHE emission, but generally are not favored.\n\nContemporaneous multi-wavelength (MWL) obser-\n\neConf C091122\n\nvations of VHE blazars, can measure both SED peaks and are crucial for extracting information from the observations of VHE blazars. They are used to constrain the size, magnetic field and Doppler factor of the emission region, as well as to determine the origin (leptonic or hadronic) of the VHE γ -rays. In leptonic scenarios, such MWL observations are used to measure the spectrum of high-energy electrons producing the emission, as well as to elucidate the nature of the seed photons. Additionally, an accurate measure of the cosmological EBL density requires accurate modeling of the blazar's intrinsic VHE emission that can only be performed with contemporaneous MWL observations.\n\n## 2. VERITAS\n\nVERITAS, a stereoscopic array of four 12-m atmospheric-Cherenkov telescopes located in Arizona, is used to study VHE γ -rays from a variety of astrophysical sources [4]. VERITAS began scientific observations with a partial array in September 2006 and has routinely observed with the full array since September 2007. The performance metrics of VERITAS include an energy threshold of ∼ 100 GeV, an energy resolution of ∼ 15%, an angular resolution of ∼ 0.1 · , and a sensitivity yielding a 5 σ detection of a 1% Crab Nebula flux object in < 30 hours . 1 VERITAS has an active maintenance program (e.g. frequent mirror recoating and alignment) to ensure its continued high performance over time, and an upgrade improving both the camera (higher quantum-efficiency PMTs) and the trigger system has been proposed to the funding agencies.\n\n1 A VERITAS telescope was relocated during Summer 2009, increasing the array's sensitivity by a factor ∼ 1.3.", + "recall": 0.9083969465648855, + "true_md": "2009 Fermi Symposium, Washington, D.C., Nov. 2-5\n\n1\n\n# VERITAS Observations of Blazars\n\nW. Benbow for the VERITAS Collaboration\n\nHarvard-Smithsonian Center for Astrophysics, F.L. Whipple Observatory, PO Box 6369, Amado, AZ 85645, USA\n\nThe VERITAS array of four 12-m diameter imaging atmospheric-Cherenkov telescopes in southern Arizona is used to study very high energy (VHE; E > 100 GeV) γ -ray emission from astrophysical objects. VERITAS is currently the most sensitive VHE γ -ray observatory in the world and one of the VERITAS collaboration’s Key Science Projects (KSP) is the study of blazars. These active galactic nuclei (AGN) are the most numerous class of identified VHE sources, with ∼ 30 known to emit VHE photons. More than 70 AGN, almost all of which are blazars, have been observed with the VERITAS array since 2007, in most cases with the deepest-ever VHE exposure. These observations have resulted in the detection of VHE γ -rays from 16 AGN (15 blazars), including 8 for the first time at these energies. The VERITAS blazar KSP is summarized in this proceeding and selected results are presented.\n\nActive galactic nuclei are the most numerous class of identified VHE γ -ray sources. These objects emit non-thermal radiation across ∼ 20 orders of magnitude in energy and rank among the most powerful particle accelerators in the universe. A small fraction of AGN possess strong collimated outflows (jets) powered by accretion onto a supermassive black hole (SMBH). VHE γ -ray emission can be generated in these jets, likely in a compact region very near the SMBH event horizon. Blazars, a class of AGN with jets pointed along the line-of-sight to the observer, are of par- ticular interest in the VHE regime. Approximately 30 blazars, primarily high-frequency-peaked BL Lacs (HBL), are identified as sources of VHE γ -rays, and some are spectacularly variable on time scales com- parable to the light crossing time of their SMBH ( ∼ 2 min; [1]). VHE blazar studies probe the environment very near the central SMBH and address a wide range of physical phenomena, including the accretion and jet-formation processes. These studies also have cos- mological implications, as VHE blazar data can be used to strongly constrain primordial radiation fields (see the extragalactic background light (EBL) con- straints from, e.g., [2, 3]).\n\nVHE blazars have double-humped spectral energy distributions (SEDs), with one peak at UV/X-ray en- ergies and another at GeV/TeV energies. The ori- gin of the lower-energy peak is commonly explained as synchrotron emission from the relativistic electrons in the blazar jets. The origin of the higher-energy peak is controversial, but is widely believed to be the result of inverse-Compton scattering of seed photons off the same relativistic electrons. The origin of the seed photons in these leptonic scenarios could be the synchrotron photons themselves, or photons from an external source. Hadronic scenarios are also plausible explanations for the VHE emission, but generally are not favored.\n\nContemporaneous multi-wavelength (MWL) obser-\n\nVERITAS, a stereoscopic array of four 12-m atmospheric-Cherenkov telescopes located in Arizona, is used to study VHE γ -rays from a variety of astro- physical sources [4]. VERITAS began scientific obser- vations with a partial array in September 2006 and has routinely observed with the full array since Septem- ber 2007. The performance metrics of VERITAS in- clude an energy threshold of ∼ 100 GeV, an energy resolution of ∼ 15%, an angular resolution of ∼ 0.1 ◦ , and a sensitivity yielding a 5 σ detection of a 1% Crab Nebula flux object in < 30 hours $^{1}$. VERITAS has an active maintenance program (e.g. frequent mirror re- coating and alignment) to ensure its continued high performance over time, and an upgrade improving both the camera (higher quantum-efficiency PMTs) and the trigger system has been proposed to the fund- ing agencies.\n\n$^{1}$A VERITAS telescope was relocated during Summer 2009, increasing the array’s sensitivity by a factor ∼ 1.3.\n\neConf C091122\n\narXiv:1001.0770v1 [astro-ph.HE] 5 Jan 2010\n\nvations of VHE blazars, can measure both SED peaks and are crucial for extracting information from the observations of VHE blazars. They are used to con- strain the size, magnetic field and Doppler factor of the emission region, as well as to determine the origin (leptonic or hadronic) of the VHE γ -rays. In leptonic scenarios, such MWL observations are used to mea- sure the spectrum of high-energy electrons producing the emission, as well as to elucidate the nature of the seed photons. Additionally, an accurate measure of the cosmological EBL density requires accurate mod- eling of the blazar’s intrinsic VHE emission that can only be performed with contemporaneous MWL ob- servations.\n\n## 2. VERITAS\n\n## 1. Introduction" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.872195570452336, + "doc_id": "e3d35787355c6f88ad536e3343a95899fa3b4024989e3e847af42f4c6708fb35", + "edit_distance": 0.4277251184834123, + "f1_score": 0.9190751445086706, + "meteor": 0.7750133018953026, + "precision": 0.9578313253012049, + "pred_md": "2009 Fermi Symposium, Washington, D.C., Nov. 2-5\n\n3\n\nTable I VERITAS AGN Detections. The only non-blazar object is the radio galaxy M 87. The blazars discovered at VHE by VERITAS are marked with a dagger.\n\n( ∼ 5.5 σ ; 3% Crab flux above 300 GeV; Γ VHE ∼ 2 7) . during VERITAS observations from December 2008 to March 2009. The initial announcement of the VHE discovery [19] led to its discovery above 1 GeV in the Fermi-LAT data using a special analysis. RBS0413, a relatively distant HBL (z=0.19), was observed for 16 h good-quality live time in 2008-09 . 2 These data resulted in the discovery of VHE gamma-rays ( > 270 γ , ∼ 6 σ ) at a flux ( > 200 GeV) of ∼ 2% of the Crab Nebula flux. The discovery [20] was announced simultaneously with the LAT MeV-GeV detection. The VHE and other MWL observations, including Fermi-LAT data, for each of these three sources will be the subject of a joint publication involving both the VERITAS and LAT collaborations.\n\n## 5.2. Discoveries Motivated by Fermi-LAT\n\nThe successful VHE discovery observations by VERITAS of three blazars was motivated primarily by results from the first year of LAT data taking. In particular, the VHE detections of PKS 1424+240 [21] and 1ES0502+675 [22] were the result of VERITAS observations triggered by the inclusion of these objects in the Fermi-LAT Bright AGN List [13]. The former is only the third IBL known to emit VHE gammarays, and the latter is the most distant BL Lac object\n\n2 RBS0413 was observed further by VERITAS in Fall 2009.\n\neConf C091122\n\n( z = 0 341) detected in the VHE band. . In addition, VERJ0521+211, likely associated with the radio-loud AGN RGBJ0521.8+2112, was detected by VERTAS in ∼ 4 h of observations in October 2009 [23]. These observations were motivated by its identification as a > 30 GeV γ -ray source in the public Fermi-LAT data. Its VHE flux is 5% of the Crab Nebula flux, placing it among the brightest VHE blazars detected in recent years. VERITAS later observed even brighter VHE flaring from VER J0521+211 in November 2009 [24], leading to deeper VHE observations.\n\n## 6. Blazars Upper Limits\n\nMore than 50 VHE blazar candidates were observed by VERITAS between September 2007 and June 2009. The total exposure on the 49 non-detected candidates is ∼ 305 h live time (average of 6.2 h per candidate). Approximately 55% of the total exposure is split amongst the 27 observed HBL. The remainder is divided amongst the 8 IBL (26%), 5 LBL (6%), and 9 FSRQ (13%). There are no clear indications of significant VHE γ -ray emission from any of these 49 blazars [25]. However, the observed significance distribution is clearly skewed towards positive values (see Figure 1). A stacking analysis performed on the entire data sample shows an overall excess of 430 γ -rays, corresponding to a statistical significance of 4.8 σ , observed from the directions of the candidate blazars. The IBL and HBL targets make up 96% of the observed excess. Observations of these objects also comprise ∼ 80% of the total exposure. An identical stacked analysis of all the extragalactic non-blazar targets observed, but not clearly detected ( > σ 5 ), by VERITAS does not show a significant excess ( ∼ 120 h exposure). The stacked excess persists using alternate methods for estimating the background at each blazar location, and with different event selection criteria (e.g. soft cuts optimized for sources with Γ VHE > 4). The distribution of VHE flux upper limits is shown in Figure 1. These 49 VHE flux upper limits are generally the most-constraining ever reported for these objects.\n\n## 7. Multi-wavelength Studies of VHE Blazars\n\nDuring the first three seasons of VERITAS observations, pre-planned extensive MWL campaigns were organized for three blazars 1ES 2344+514 (2007-08), 1ES 1218+304 (2008-09) and 1ES 0229+200 (200910 ongoing). In addition, numerous ToO MWLobservation campaigns were performed. These include campaigns for every blazar/AGN discovered by VERITAS, and all include Swift (XRT and UVOT) data. All MWL campaigns on the VHE blazars discovered", + "recall": 0.8833333333333333, + "true_md": "2009 Fermi Symposium, Washington, D.C., Nov. 2-5\n\n3\n\nTable I VERITAS AGN Detections. The only non-blazar object is the radio galaxy M 87. The blazars discovered at VHE by VERITAS are marked with a dagger.\n\n( z = 0 . 341) detected in the VHE band. In addition, VER J0521+211, likely associated with the radio-loud AGN RGB J0521.8+2112, was detected by VERTAS in ∼ 4 h of observations in October 2009 [23]. These observations were motivated by its identification as a > 30 GeV γ -ray source in the public Fermi-LAT data. Its VHE flux is 5% of the Crab Nebula flux, placing it among the brightest VHE blazars detected in recent years. VERITAS later observed even brighter VHE flaring from VER J0521+211 in November 2009 [24], leading to deeper VHE observations.\n\n( ∼ 5.5 σ ; 3% Crab flux above 300 GeV; Γ VHE ∼ 2 . 7) during VERITAS observations from December 2008 to March 2009. The initial announcement of the VHE discovery [19] led to its discovery above 1 GeV in the Fermi-LAT data using a special analysis. RBS 0413, a relatively distant HBL (z=0.19), was observed for 16 h good-quality live time in 2008-09 $^{2}$. These data resulted in the discovery of VHE gamma-rays ( > 270 γ , ∼ 6 σ ) at a flux ( > 200 GeV) of ∼ 2% of the Crab Neb- ula flux. The discovery [20] was announced simultane- ously with the LAT MeV-GeV detection. The VHE and other MWL observations, including Fermi-LAT data, for each of these three sources will be the sub- ject of a joint publication involving both the VERI- TAS and LAT collaborations.\n\nThe successful VHE discovery observations by VERITAS of three blazars was motivated primarily by results from the first year of LAT data taking. In particular, the VHE detections of PKS 1424+240 [21] and 1ES 0502+675 [22] were the result of VERITAS observations triggered by the inclusion of these objects in the Fermi-LAT Bright AGN List [13]. The former is only the third IBL known to emit VHE gamma- rays, and the latter is the most distant BL Lac object\n\nDuring the first three seasons of VERITAS obser- vations, pre-planned extensive MWL campaigns were organized for three blazars 1ES 2344+514 (2007-08), 1ES 1218+304 (2008-09) and 1ES 0229+200 (2009- 10 - ongoing). In addition, numerous ToO MWL- observation campaigns were performed. These include campaigns for every blazar/AGN discovered by VER- ITAS, and all include Swift (XRT and UVOT) data. All MWL campaigns on the VHE blazars discovered\n\nMore than 50 VHE blazar candidates were observed by VERITAS between September 2007 and June 2009. The total exposure on the 49 non-detected candi- dates is ∼ 305 h live time (average of 6.2 h per can- didate). Approximately 55% of the total exposure is split amongst the 27 observed HBL. The remainder is divided amongst the 8 IBL (26%), 5 LBL (6%), and 9 FSRQ (13%). There are no clear indications of signifi- cant VHE γ -ray emission from any of these 49 blazars [25]. However, the observed significance distribution is clearly skewed towards positive values (see Figure 1). A stacking analysis performed on the entire data sam- ple shows an overall excess of 430 γ -rays, correspond- ing to a statistical significance of 4.8 σ , observed from the directions of the candidate blazars. The IBL and HBL targets make up 96% of the observed excess. Ob- servations of these objects also comprise ∼ 80% of the total exposure. An identical stacked analysis of all the extragalactic non-blazar targets observed, but not clearly detected ( > 5 σ ), by VERITAS does not show a significant excess ( ∼ 120 h exposure). The stacked excess persists using alternate methods for estimating the background at each blazar location, and with dif- ferent event selection criteria (e.g. soft cuts optimized for sources with Γ VHE > 4). The distribution of VHE flux upper limits is shown in Figure 1. These 49 VHE flux upper limits are generally the most-constraining ever reported for these objects.\n\n## 6. Blazars Upper Limits\n\n## 7. Multi-wavelength Studies of VHE Blazars\n\n## 5.2. Discoveries Motivated by Fermi-LAT\n\neConf C091122\n\n$^{2}$RBS 0413 was observed further by VERITAS in Fall 2009." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.21484831360193707, + "doc_id": "c263f1d8a4aebc367bdc4227f9133fc8f5fba746b7558df5babedae7bb6963e8", + "edit_distance": 0.8241758241758241, + "f1_score": 0.8187919463087249, + "meteor": 0.2683113471275935, + "precision": 0.9014778325123153, + "pred_md": "channel is a Hadamard channel because its complementary channel is entanglement-breaking. In fact, the isometric extension in (10) of the generalized dephasing channel appears remarkably similar to the isometric extension in (8) of the Hadamard channel, with the exception that the states {| 〉 i A ' } of the generalized dephasing channel form an orthonormal basis.\n\nA completely dephasing channel ∆ commutes with a generalized dephasing channel N GD because\n\n\n\nThe property N c GD = N c GD · ∆ also holds for the complementary channel:\n\n\n\nThe simplest example of a generalized dephasing channel is a qubit dephasing channel. The action of the p -dephasing qubit channel is\n\n\n\nwhere ∆ in this case is\n\n\n\nand Z is the Pauli matrix σ Z . Hence an isometric extension U A ' → BE N of the qubit dephasing channel has the form:\n\n\n\nwhere I is the identity operator. Therefore, the following is a complementary channel N c of a qubit dephasing channel:\n\n\n\nand we observe that a bit flip on the input state does not change the eigenvalues of the resulting environment output state.\n\n## 4. Cloning Channels\n\nThe no-cloning theorem forbids the cloning of arbitrary quantum states [64]. However, nothing prevents one from performing approximate cloning provided the fidelity of cloning is not too high. A universal 1 → N cloner is a device that approximately copies the input with maximal copy fidelity independent of the input state [65]. We refer to such a device as a cloning channel [30, 33]. Such a\n\n6\n\ndecoherence process occurs naturally during stimulated emission [57-59].\n\nWe focus on 1 → N qubit cloning channels where a single qubit serves as the input, and the output is N identical approximate copies on N respective qubit systems. These universal cloners are unitarily covariant [66], in the sense that a unitary V on the input qubit maps to an irreducible representation R V of V on the output state:\n\n\n\nWe present the action of an isometric extension of a 1 → N cloning channel on a basis {| 0 〉 , | 1 〉} for a qubit input system A ' . Let | j 〉 B be an orthonormal basis of normalized completely symmetric states for the output system B that consists of N qubits:\n\n\n\nwhere | N -j, j 〉 B denotes a normalized state on an N -qubit system that is a uniform superposition of computational basis states with N -j 'zeros' and j 'ones.' Let | i 〉 E be an orthonormal basis for the environment E :\n\n\n\nwhere | N -i -1 , i 〉 E denotes a normalized state on an ( N -1)-qubit system that is a uniform superposition of computational basis states with N -i -1 'zeros' and i 'ones.' Then an isometric extension U A ' → BE N Cl of the 1 → N cloning channel N has the form:\n\n\n\nwhere ∆ N ≡ N N ( +1) / 2. A set of Kraus operators for the channel N Cl is as follows:\n\n\n\nand a set of Kraus operators for the complementary channel N c Cl is as follows:\n\n\n\nWe can rewrite the Kraus operators for the complementary channel of a 1 → 2 cloning channel as follows:\n\n", + "recall": 0.75, + "true_md": "6\n\ndecoherence process occurs naturally during stimulated emission [57–59].\n\nWe focus on 1 → N qubit cloning channels where a single qubit serves as the input, and the output is N identical approximate copies on N respective qubit sys- tems. These universal cloners are unitarily covariant [66], in the sense that a unitary V on the input qubit maps to an irreducible representation R$_{V}$ of V on the output state:\n\nchannel is a Hadamard channel because its complemen- tary channel is entanglement-breaking. In fact, the iso- metric extension in (10) of the generalized dephasing channel appears remarkably similar to the isometric ex- tension in (8) of the Hadamard channel, with the excep- tion that the states {| i 〉 A $^{′}$} of the generalized dephasing channel form an orthonormal basis.\n\nA completely dephasing channel Δ commutes with a generalized dephasing channel N$_{GD}$ because\n\nThe property N c GD = N c $_{GD}$◦ Δ also holds for the comple- mentary channel:\n\nWe present the action of an isometric extension of a 1 → N cloning channel on a basis {| 0 〉 , | 1 〉} for a qubit input system A $^{′}$. Let | j 〉 B be an orthonormal basis of normalized completely symmetric states for the output system B that consists of N qubits:\n\n$$N ( V ρV ) = R$_{V}$ N ( ρ ) R † $_{V}$.$$\n\n$$( N$_{GD}$ ◦ Δ)( σ ) = (Δ ◦ N$_{GD}$ )( σ ) = ∑ i 〈 i | σ | i 〉 A ′ | i 〉〈 i | $^{B}$.$$\n\n$$N c $_{GD}$( σ ) = ( N c GD ◦ Δ)( σ ) = ∑ i 〈 i | ρ | i 〉 A ′ | ϑ$_{i}$ 〉〈 ϑ$_{i}$ | $^{E}$.$$\n\n$${| j 〉 B ≡ | N − j, j 〉} N j $_{=0}$,$$\n\n$${| i 〉 E ≡ | N − i − 1 , i 〉} N − 1 i =0 ,$$\n\n$$N ( σ ) = (1 − p ) σ + p Δ ( σ ) , (11)$$\n\n$$Δ( σ ) = 1 2 ( σ + ZσZ ) ,$$\n\n$$U A $^{′}$→ BE N = √ 1 − p 2 I ⊗ | 0 〉 E +$^{√}$ p 2 Z ⊗ | 1 〉 $^{E}$,$$\n\n$$U A $^{′}$→ BE N$_{Cl}$ ≡ 1 √ Δ$_{N}$ N − 1 ∑ i =0 √ N − i | i 〉 $^{B}$〈 0 | A ′ ⊗ | i 〉 E + 1 √ Δ$_{N}$ N − 1 ∑ i =0 √ i + 1 | i + 1 〉 $^{B}$〈 1 | A ′ ⊗ | i 〉 $^{E}$, (12)$$\n\nwhere | N − j, j 〉 B denotes a normalized state on an N - qubit system that is a uniform superposition of compu- tational basis states with N − j “zeros” and j “ones.” Let | i 〉 E be an orthonormal basis for the environment E :\n\nThe simplest example of a generalized dephasing chan- nel is a qubit dephasing channel. The action of the p - dephasing qubit channel is\n\nwhere Δ in this case is\n\nand Z is the Pauli matrix σ$_{Z}$ . Hence an isometric ex- tension U A $^{′}$→ BE N of the qubit dephasing channel has the form:\n\nwhere | N − i − 1 , i 〉 E denotes a normalized state on an ( N − 1)-qubit system that is a uniform superposition of computational basis states with N − i − 1 “zeros” and i “ones.” Then an isometric extension U A $^{′}$→ BE N$_{Cl}$ of the 1 → N cloning channel N has the form:\n\nwhere I is the identity operator. Therefore, the follow- ing is a complementary channel N c of a qubit dephasing channel:\n\nwhere Δ$_{N}$ ≡ N ( N + 1) / 2. A set of Kraus operators for the channel N$_{Cl}$ is as follows:\n\nand we observe that a bit flip on the input state does not change the eigenvalues of the resulting environment output state.\n\nand a set of Kraus operators for the complementary chan- nel N c Cl is as follows:\n\n$${ 1 √ Δ$_{N}$ $_{(}$√ N − i | i 〉 $^{B}$〈 0 | A ′ + √ i + 1 | i + 1 〉 $^{B}$〈 1 | A $^{′}$) } N − 1 i =0 ,$$\n\n$$N $^{c}$( σ ) = p 2 | 0 〉 〈 0 | E + $^{(}$1 − p 2$^{)}$ | 1 〉 〈 1 | E +$^{√}$ $^{(}$1 − p 2$^{)}$ p 2 Tr { σZ } $^{(}$| 0 〉 〈 1 | E + | 1 〉 〈 0 | E $^{)}$,$$\n\n$$√ N | 0 〉 $^{E}$〈 0 | A ′ , $_{{}$√ N − i | i 〉 $^{E}$〈 0 | A ′ + √ i | i − 1 〉 $^{E}$〈 1 | A $^{′}$} N − 1 i =1 , √ N | N − 1 〉 $^{E}$〈 1 | A ′ .$$\n\n$$   √ 1 3 | + 〉 〈 + | , √ 1 3 |−〉 〈−| , √ 1 3 | 0 〉 〈 0 | , √ 1 3 | 1 〉 〈 1 | , √ 1 3 | +$_{Y}$ 〉 〈 +$_{Y}$ | σ$_{Z}$, √ 1 3 |−$_{Y}$ 〉 〈−$_{Y}$ | σ$_{Z}$    ,$$\n\nWe can rewrite the Kraus operators for the complemen- tary channel of a 1 → 2 cloning channel as follows:\n\nThe no-cloning theorem forbids the cloning of arbitrary quantum states [64]. However, nothing prevents one from performing approximate cloning provided the fidelity of cloning is not too high. A universal 1 → N cloner is a device that approximately copies the input with maximal copy fidelity independent of the input state [65]. We refer to such a device as a cloning channel [30, 33]. Such a\n\n## 4. Cloning Channels" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4295671119256582, + "doc_id": "96ce8d5146864f307eb0545484164276763d198b5cdccd0ca2fa878705fd2e4d", + "edit_distance": 0.7969865186360032, + "f1_score": 0.883629191321499, + "meteor": 0.40365661482123594, + "precision": 0.9531914893617022, + "pred_md": "The above expression vanishes when µ = 0. It coincides with the quantum capacity of a 1 → N cloning channel when µ = 1 2 (Equation 30 in Ref. [33]):\n\n\n\nWe now turn to the proof of the CE trade-off curve for the 1 → N cloning channel.\n\nLemma 6 An ensemble of the same form as in Lemma 5 parametrizes all points on the CE trade-off curve for a 1 → N cloning channel.\n\nProof. The proof of this lemma proceeds along similar lines as the proof of Lemma 5, using the same states and ideas concerning the cloning channel. We highlight the major differences by giving the following chain of inequalities that holds for all λ such that 0 ≤ λ < 1:\n\n\n\n\n\nWe do not provide justifications for the above chain of inequalities because it follows for similar reasons to the chain of inequalities in Lemma 5.\n\nProof of CE trade-off in Theorem 5. The proof follows by noting that I ( AX B ; ) = H A X ( | ) + H B ( ) -H E X ( | ), H A X ( | ) = H 2 ( µ ), and that we have already computed H B ( ) and H E X ( | ) in the proof of the CQ trade-off in Theorem 5.\n\nFigure 2 plots the CQ and CE trade-off curves for a 1 → N cloning channel, for N = 1, 2, 3, 5, 8, 12, and 24. The figure demonstrates that both classically-enhanced quantum coding and entanglement-assisted classical coding beat a time-sharing strategy for a cloning channel when N > 1.\n\nFigure 3 plots the full CQE capacity region for a 1 → 10 cloning channel. The figure demonstrates that the classically-enhanced father protocol, combined with entanglement distribution and super-dense coding beats a time-sharing strategy because the first two surfaces described in Section III C are strictly concave for the cloning channels when N > 1.\n\n## C. Unruh Channel\n\nWe now compute the trade-off curves for the Unruh channel, defined in (13). Capacity questions are directly\n\n15\n\nFIG. 3: (Color online) The figure plots the CQE capacity region for a 1 → 10 cloning channel. It features three distinct surfaces. The first is the flat vertical plane that arises from the bound R +2 Q ≤ log ( N +1 N ) +1, which is the entanglementassisted classical capacity of a 1 → N cloning channel. The plane extends infinitely upward because we can always achieve these rate triples simply by wasting entanglement. The second surface is that below and to the left of the plane, formed by combining the CE trade-off curve with the inverse of superdense coding, as described in Section III C. The final surface is that below and to the right of the plane, formed by combining the CQ trade-off curve with the inverse of entanglement distribution, as described in Section III C.\n\nFIG. 3: (Color online) The figure plots the CQE capacity region for a 1 → 10 cloning channel. It features three distinct surfaces. The first is the flat vertical plane that arises from the bound R +2 Q ≤ log ( N +1 N ) +1, which is the entanglementassisted classical capacity of a 1 → N cloning channel. The plane extends infinitely upward because we can always achieve these rate triples simply by wasting entanglement. The second surface is that below and to the left of the plane, formed by combining the CE trade-off curve with the inverse of superdense coding, as described in Section III C. The final surface is that below and to the right of the plane, formed by combining the CQ trade-off curve with the inverse of entanglement distribution, as described in Section III C.\n\nlinked to those of the cloning channel because the mathematical structure of the output of the Unruh channel is an infinite-dimensional block-diagonal density matrix, with each block containing an occurence of a 1 → N cloning channel. In fact, maximizing the rate of transmission is equivalent to maximizing it in each block. This observation gives us the following theorem, and its proof appears in Appendix F.\n\nTheorem 6 All points on the CQ trade-off curve for an Unruh channel have the following form:\n\n\n\nand all points on the CE trade-off curve for an Unruh channel have the following form:\n\n\n\nwhere\n\n", + "recall": 0.8235294117647058, + "true_md": "15\n\nThe above expression vanishes when µ = 0. It coincides with the quantum capacity of a 1 → N cloning channel when µ = 1 2 (Equation 30 in Ref. [33]):\n\nWe now turn to the proof of the CE trade-off curve for the 1 → N cloning channel.\n\nLemma 6 An ensemble of the same form as in Lemma 5 parametrizes all points on the CE trade-off curve for a 1 → N cloning channel.\n\nProof. The proof of this lemma proceeds along simi- lar lines as the proof of Lemma 5, using the same states and ideas concerning the cloning channel. We highlight the major differences by giving the following chain of in- equalities that holds for all λ such that 0 ≤ λ < 1:\n\n$$I ( A 〉 BX )$_{µ}$$_{=1}$$_{/}$$_{2}$ = log$^{(}$ N + 1 N ) .$$\n\nFIG. 3: (Color online) The figure plots the CQE capacity re- gion for a 1 → 10 cloning channel. It features three distinct surfaces. The first is the flat vertical plane that arises from the bound R +2 Q ≤ log ( N +1 N $^{)}$+1, which is the entanglement- assisted classical capacity of a 1 → N cloning channel. The plane extends infinitely upward because we can always achieve these rate triples simply by wasting entanglement. The sec- ond surface is that below and to the left of the plane, formed by combining the CE trade-off curve with the inverse of super- dense coding, as described in Section III C. The final surface is that below and to the right of the plane, formed by combin- ing the CQ trade-off curve with the inverse of entanglement distribution, as described in Section III C.\n\n$$I ( AX ; B )$_{ρ}$ − λH ( A | X )$_{ρ}$ = (1 − λ ) H ( A | X )$_{ρ}$ + H ( B )$_{ρ}$ − H ( E | X )$_{ρ}$ = H ( B )$_{ρ}$ + (1 − λ ) H ( A | XJ )$_{σ}$ − H ( E | XJ )$_{σ}$ ≤ H ( B )$_{σ}$ + (1 − λ ) H ( A | XJ )$_{σ}$ − H ( E | XJ )$_{σ}$ = log ( N + 1) + (1 − λ ) H ( A | XJ )$_{σ}$ − H ( E | XJ )$_{σ}$ = log ( N + 1) + ∑ x p$_{X}$ ( x ) $^{[}$(1 − λ ) H ( A )$_{ψ}$$_{x}$ − H ( E )$_{ψ}$$_{x}$ ] ≤ log ( N + 1) + max$_{x}$ $^{[}$(1 − λ ) H ( A )$_{ψ}$$_{x}$ − H ( E )$_{ψ}$$_{x}$ ] = log ( N + 1) + (1 − λ ) H ( A )$_{ψ}$$_{∗}$ x − H ( E )$_{ψ}$$_{∗}$ $_{x}$.$$\n\n$$( C$_{CQ}$ ( z,µ ) , Q$_{CQ}$ ( z,µ )) ,$$\n\n$$( C$_{CE}$ ( z,µ ) , E$_{CE}$ ( µ )) ,$$\n\nlinked to those of the cloning channel because the math- ematical structure of the output of the Unruh channel is an infinite-dimensional block-diagonal density matrix, with each block containing an occurence of a 1 → N cloning channel. In fact, maximizing the rate of trans- mission is equivalent to maximizing it in each block. This observation gives us the following theorem, and its proof appears in Appendix F.\n\nWe do not provide justifications for the above chain of inequalities because it follows for similar reasons to the chain of inequalities in Lemma 5.\n\nProof of CE trade-off in Theorem 5. The proof follows by noting that I ( AX ; B ) = H ( A | X ) + H ( B ) − H ( E | X ), H ( A | X ) = H$_{2}$ ( µ ), and that we have already computed H ( B ) and H ( E | X ) in the proof of the CQ trade-off in Theorem 5.\n\nFigure 2 plots the CQ and CE trade-off curves for a 1 → N cloning channel, for N = 1, 2, 3, 5, 8, 12, and 24. The figure demonstrates that both classically-enhanced quantum coding and entanglement-assisted classical cod- ing beat a time-sharing strategy for a cloning channel when N > 1.\n\nTheorem 6 All points on the CQ trade-off curve for an Unruh channel have the following form:\n\nand all points on the CE trade-off curve for an Unruh channel have the following form:\n\nFigure 3 plots the full CQE capacity region for a 1 → 10 cloning channel. The figure demonstrates that the classically-enhanced father protocol, combined with entanglement distribution and super-dense coding beats a time-sharing strategy because the first two surfaces described in Section III C are strictly concave for the cloning channels when N > 1.\n\nwhere\n\nWe now compute the trade-off curves for the Unruh channel, defined in (13). Capacity questions are directly\n\n## C. Unruh Channel\n\n$$C$_{CQ}$ ( z,µ ) ≡ 1 − ∞ ∑ l =2 p$_{l}$ ( z ) log ( l − 1) + ∞ ∑ l =2 p$_{l}$ ( z ) Δ$_{l}$$_{−}$$_{1}$ l − 1 ∑ i =0 λ ( l − 1) i ( µ ) log ( λ ( l − 1) i ( µ ) ) ,$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5519388554593084, + "doc_id": "84ca58f80e7e5e00f4d959a804bc84d1747c0570b2ed33a0a37274f317aff4a9", + "edit_distance": 0.6841243862520459, + "f1_score": 0.8926553672316383, + "meteor": 0.5159070110326199, + "precision": 0.9575757575757575, + "pred_md": "dependence of different samples during the measurement stage. For each temperature we have usually performed three independent simulations, each one containing at least 2 × 10 5 measurements, taken after discarding up to 5 × 10 4 Monte Carlo steps in order to assure thermal equilibration.\n\nIn the proximity of the critical region the multiple histogram (MH) technique was also employed 21 , as it allows us to estimate the physical observables of interest over a whole temperature range in a substantially continuous way by interpolating results obtained from sets of simulations performed at some different temperatures.\n\nFor all the quantities of interest, the average value and the error estimate were obtained by the bootstrap resampling method 22 given that, as pointed out in Ref. 23, for a large enough number of measurements, this method turns out to be more accurate than the usual blocking technique. In our implementation, we pick out randomly a sizable number of measurements (typically, between 1 and 1 × 10 3 for the single simulation, and between 1 and 5 × 10 4 for the MH technique), and iterate the re-sampling at least one hundred times.\n\nThe thermodynamic observables we have investigated include the FM order parameter for each plane l :\n\n\n\nwhich is related to the SO (2) symmetry breaking. At the same time, it turns out to be significant also the average order parameter of the film, defined as\n\n\n\nTurning to the helical order, which is the relevant quantity for the Z 2 × SO (2) symmetry, we can explore it along two different directions. The first one is by the introduction of the chirality order parameter 1,2\n\n\n\nwhere the sum refers to spins belonging to NN layers i and j , respectively, while Q z is the bulk helical pitch vector along the z direction. The second possibility is that of looking at the integral of the structure factor:\n\n\n\nwhere S /vector ( q ), with /vector q = (0 0 , , q z ), is the structure factor 24 (i.e. the Fourier transform of the spin correlation function) along the z-direction of the film, while the normalization factor K is the structure factor integral at T = 0. Although the use of the last observable can be seen as a suitable and elegant way to overcome the intrinsic difficulties met in defining a correct helical order parameter, free of any undue external bias (as the wave-vector Q z\n\n3\n\nFIG. 2: (color online) Specific heat c v per spin vs. temperature for thickness n = 16 (for lateral dimension, see the legend inside the figure). Inset: Maximum of c v vs. L obtained through MH technique. The continuum red line is a power law fit.\n\nFIG. 2: (color online) Specific heat c v per spin vs. temperature for thickness n = 16 (for lateral dimension, see the legend inside the figure). Inset: Maximum of c v vs. L obtained through MH technique. The continuum red line is a power law fit.\n\nentering the definition of κ in Eq. (4)), we remind that such quantity has generally to be managed with particular care, as discussed in details in Refs. 14,15 , where it was shown that the presence of block structures prevents us to unambiguously relate the evolution of S /vector ( q ) with the onset of helical order. However, for the specific case of the model under investigation such integrated quantity can still be considered a fairly significant order parameter, as no block structures emerge from the simulations (see below).\n\nIn order to get a clear picture of the critical region and to give an accurate estimate of the critical temperature, we look also at the following quantities\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nwhere β = 1 /k B T , and o is one of the relevant observables, i.e. m , M, κ, M l HM . In this paper, we shall mainly locate the critical temperature by looking at the intersection of the graphs of the Binder cumulant 25 , Eq. (9), as a function of T obtained at different L . For clarity reasons, we introduce also the following symbols: by T N ( n ) we will denote the helical/fan phase transition temperature for thickness n , T C ( n ) will instead indicate the ordering temperature of the sample as deduced by looking at the behaviour of the average order parameter (3), while T l C ( n ) will be the l -th plane transition temperature related to the order parameter defined in Eq. (2).", + "recall": 0.8359788359788359, + "true_md": "3\n\ndependence of different samples during the measurement stage. For each temperature we have usually performed three independent simulations, each one containing at least 2 × 10 5 measurements, taken after discarding up to 5 × 10 4 Monte Carlo steps in order to assure thermal equi- libration.\n\nIn the proximity of the critical region the multiple his- togram (MH) technique was also employed $^{21}$, as it allows us to estimate the physical observables of interest over a whole temperature range in a substantially continuous way by interpolating results obtained from sets of simu- lations performed at some different temperatures.\n\nFIG. 2: (color online) Specific heat c$_{v}$ per spin vs. temper- ature for thickness n = 16 (for lateral dimension, see the legend inside the figure). Inset: Maximum of c$_{v}$ vs. L ob- tained through MH technique. The continuum red line is a power law fit.\n\nFor all the quantities of interest, the average value and the error estimate were obtained by the bootstrap re- sampling method 22 given that, as pointed out in Ref. 23, for a large enough number of measurements, this method turns out to be more accurate than the usual blocking technique. In our implementation, we pick out randomly a sizable number of measurements (typically, between 1 and 1 × 10 3 for the single simulation, and between 1 and 5 × 10 4 for the MH technique), and iterate the re-sampling at least one hundred times.\n\nThe thermodynamic observables we have investigated include the FM order parameter for each plane l :\n\nentering the definition of κ in Eq. (4)), we remind that such quantity has generally to be managed with particu- lar care, as discussed in details in Refs. $^{14,15}$, where it was shown that the presence of block structures prevents us to unambiguously relate the evolution of S ( ⃗ q ) with the onset of helical order. However, for the specific case of the model under investigation such integrated quantity can still be considered a fairly significant order parame- ter, as no block structures emerge from the simulations (see below).\n\nwhich is related to the SO (2) symmetry breaking. At the same time, it turns out to be significant also the average order parameter of the film, defined as\n\nIn order to get a clear picture of the critical region and to give an accurate estimate of the critical temperature, we look also at the following quantities\n\nTurning to the helical order, which is the relevant quantity for the Z$_{2}$ × SO (2) symmetry, we can explore it along two different directions. The first one is by the introduction of the chirality order parameter 1,2\n\nwhere the sum refers to spins belonging to NN layers i and j , respectively, while Q$_{z}$ is the bulk helical pitch vector along the z direction. The second possibility is that of looking at the integral of the structure factor:\n\nwhere β = 1 /k$_{B}$T , and o is one of the relevant observ- ables, i.e. m$_{l}$, M, κ, M$_{HM}$ . In this paper, we shall mainly locate the critical temperature by looking at the intersec- tion of the graphs of the Binder cumulant $^{25}$, Eq. (9), as a function of T obtained at different L . For clarity reasons, we introduce also the following symbols: by T$_{N}$ ( n ) we will denote the helical/fan phase transition temperature for thickness n , T$_{C}$ ( n ) will instead indicate the order- ing temperature of the sample as deduced by looking at the behaviour of the average order parameter (3), while T l $_{C}$( n ) will be the l -th plane transition temperature re- lated to the order parameter defined in Eq. (2).\n\nwhere S ( ⃗ q ), with ⃗ q = (0 , 0 , q$_{z}$ ), is the structure factor 24 (i.e. the Fourier transform of the spin correlation func- tion) along the z-direction of the film, while the normal- ization factor K is the structure factor integral at T = 0. Although the use of the last observable can be seen as a suitable and elegant way to overcome the intrinsic diffi- culties met in defining a correct helical order parameter, free of any undue external bias (as the wave-vector Q$_{z}$\n\n$$c$_{v}$ = nL $^{2}$β2 ( 〈 e $^{2}$〉 − 〈 e 〉 $^{2}$) , (6) χ$_{o}$ = nL $^{2}$β 〈 o $^{2}$〉 − 〈 o 〉 , (7)$$\n\n$$( $^{2}$) χ$_{o}$ = nL $^{2}$β 〈 o $^{2}$〉 − 〈 o 〉 , (7)$$\n\n$$∂$_{β}$o = nL $^{2}$( 〈 oe 〉 − 〈 o 〉〈 e 〉 ) , (8)$$\n\n$$u$_{4}$ ( o ) = 1 − 〈 o $^{4}$〉 3 〈 o $^{2}$〉2 , (9)$$\n\n$$κ = 1 4( n − 1) L $^{2}$sin Q$_{z}$ ∑ 〈 ij 〉 [ S x i S y j − S y i S x j ] , (4)$$\n\n$$M$_{HM}$ = 1 K ∫ π 0 dq$_{z}$S ( ⃗ q ) (5)$$\n\n$$M = 1 n n ∑ l =1 m$_{l}$ . (3)$$\n\n$$m$_{l}$ = √ ( m x l ) 2 + ( m y l ) 2 , (2)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9279497539902547, + "doc_id": "9b199c7aa88dbb752ab6e7a8c49444fc34b612561137765e80a0eaa80f9db787", + "edit_distance": 0.36666666666666664, + "f1_score": 0.9583333333333334, + "meteor": 0.9020618556701031, + "precision": 0.9583333333333334, + "pred_md": "den, A. (2003) Motility of Escherichia coli in clusters formed by chemotactic aggregation. Proc. Natl. Acad.\n\nSci. USA 100:13259-13263.\n\n10", + "recall": 0.9583333333333334, + "true_md": "10\n\nSci. USA 100:13259-13263.\n\nden, A. (2003) Motility of Escherichia coli in clusters formed by chemotactic aggregation. Proc. Natl. Acad." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4237279906996585, + "doc_id": "a0dfeccfcf69bc58dec97da31b55999b535f23d05dd51089682335423bcf66af", + "edit_distance": 0.7806122448979592, + "f1_score": 0.9240506329113926, + "meteor": 0.560742797457015, + "precision": 0.954248366013072, + "pred_md": "FIG. 8: (Color online) Left: The long-time average of S x ( ) versus t u/N for N = 100 ( · ) , 500 ( /Box ) , and 1000 ( /diamondmath ) particles. The preparations are (upper to lower sets of data points): Zero (blue), TwinFock (black), Edge (magenta), and Pi (red). The symbols are used for the quantum results and the dashed lines are the semiclassical prediction for fourty particles. Note that the scaling holds only in the Josephson regime 1 /lessmuch u /lessmuch N 2 , and therefore, for a given u/N range, becomes better for large N . Right: The long time RMS of S x ( ) for the three coherent preparations (lower to upper sets): t Zero (blue), Edge (magenta), and Pi (red). The implied N 1 / 4 scaling based on Eq. (69)) is confirmed. In the inset, the RMS of S x ( ) for Edge ( t /triangle ) and Pi ( /triangleinv ) preparations is plotted versus N while u = 4 is fixed. The dashed lines are power-law fits that nicely agree with the predictions of Eq. (70).\n\nFIG. 8: (Color online) Left: The long-time average of S x ( ) versus t u/N for N = 100 ( · ) , 500 ( /Box ) , and 1000 ( /diamondmath ) particles. The preparations are (upper to lower sets of data points): Zero (blue), TwinFock (black), Edge (magenta), and Pi (red). The symbols are used for the quantum results and the dashed lines are the semiclassical prediction for fourty particles. Note that the scaling holds only in the Josephson regime 1 /lessmuch u /lessmuch N 2 , and therefore, for a given u/N range, becomes better for large N . Right: The long time RMS of S x ( ) for the three coherent preparations (lower to upper sets): t Zero (blue), Edge (magenta), and Pi (red). The implied N 1 / 4 scaling based on Eq. (69)) is confirmed. In the inset, the RMS of S x ( ) for Edge ( t /triangle ) and Pi ( /triangleinv ) preparations is plotted versus N while u = 4 is fixed. The dashed lines are power-law fits that nicely agree with the predictions of Eq. (70).\n\nFIG. 6: (Color online) The participation number M as determined from the LDOS for N = 100( ) 500 ( · , /Box ) , and 1000 ( /diamondmath ) particles. The left panel contains the Zero (lower set in blue) and Pi (upper set in red) preparations, while the Edge preparation is presented in the right panel. Note the different vertical scale. In the crudest approximation we expect in the Edge case M ∼ N 1 / 2 , while in the Pi case M /lessmuch N 1 / 2 as long as ( u/N ) /lessmuch 1\n\nFIG. 6: (Color online) The participation number M as determined from the LDOS for N = 100( ) 500 ( · , /Box ) , and 1000 ( /diamondmath ) particles. The left panel contains the Zero (lower set in blue) and Pi (upper set in red) preparations, while the Edge preparation is presented in the right panel. Note the different vertical scale. In the crudest approximation we expect in the Edge case M ∼ N 1 / 2 , while in the Pi case M /lessmuch N 1 / 2 as long as ( u/N ) /lessmuch 1\n\nFIG. 7: (Color online) The mean frequency of the S x ( ) t oscillations versus u/N for for N = 100( ) 500 ( · , /Box ) , and 1000 ( /diamondmath ) particles. The preparations are (upper to to lower sets of data points): Zero (blue), Edge (magenta), and Pi (red). The doubled Josephson frequency 2 ω J is marked by a dashed blue line. The theoretical predictions of Eq. (42), doubled due to mirror symmetry, are represented by red and magenta dashed lines, while Eq. (43) for u/N /greatermuch 1 is represented by black dash-double-dotted line (there is one fitting parameter as explained there).\n\nFIG. 7: (Color online) The mean frequency of the S x ( ) t oscillations versus u/N for for N = 100( ) 500 ( · , /Box ) , and 1000 ( /diamondmath ) particles. The preparations are (upper to to lower sets of data points): Zero (blue), Edge (magenta), and Pi (red). The doubled Josephson frequency 2 ω J is marked by a dashed blue line. The theoretical predictions of Eq. (42), doubled due to mirror symmetry, are represented by red and magenta dashed lines, while Eq. (43) for u/N /greatermuch 1 is represented by black dash-double-dotted line (there is one fitting parameter as explained there).\n\nu/N\n\n18", + "recall": 0.8957055214723927, + "true_md": "18\n\nFIG. 6: (Color online) The participation number M as determined from the LDOS for N = 100 ( ◦ ) , 500 ( GLYPH<Box> ) , and 1000 ( ⋄ ) particles. The left panel contains the Zero (lower set in blue) and Pi (upper set in red) preparations, while the Edge preparation is presented in the right panel. Note the different vertical scale. In the crudest approximation we expect in the Edge case M ∼ N 1 / $^{2}$, while in the Pi case M ≪ N 1 / 2 as long as ( u/N ) ≪ 1\n\nFIG. 7: (Color online) The mean frequency of the S$_{x}$ ( t ) oscillations versus u/N for for N = 100 ( ◦ ) , 500 ( GLYPH<Box> ) , and 1000 ( ⋄ ) particles. The preparations are (upper to to lower sets of data points): Zero (blue), Edge (magenta), and Pi (red). The doubled Josephson frequency 2 ω$_{J}$ is marked by a dashed blue line. The theoretical predictions of Eq. (42), doubled due to mirror symmetry, are represented by red and magenta dashed lines, while Eq. (43) for u/N ≫ 1 is represented by black dash-double-dotted line (there is one fitting parameter as explained there).\n\nFIG. 8: (Color online) Left: The long-time average of S$_{x}$ ( t ) versus u/N for N = 100 ( ◦ ) , 500 ( GLYPH<Box> ) , and 1000 ( ⋄ ) particles. The preparations are (upper to lower sets of data points): Zero (blue), TwinFock (black), Edge (magenta), and Pi (red). The symbols are used for the quantum results and the dashed lines are the semiclassical prediction for fourty particles. Note that the scaling holds only in the Josephson regime 1 ≪ u ≪ N $^{2}$, and therefore, for a given u/N range, becomes better for large N . Right: The long time RMS of S$_{x}$ ( t ) for the three coherent preparations (lower to upper sets): Zero (blue), Edge (magenta), and Pi (red). The implied N 1 / 4 scaling based on Eq. (69)) is confirmed. In the inset, the RMS of S$_{x}$ ( t ) for Edge ( △ ) and Pi ( ▽ ) preparations is plotted versus N while u = 4 is fixed. The dashed lines are power-law fits that nicely agree with the predictions of Eq. (70)." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5706688128694626, + "doc_id": "506eff018f4ef1f865992120c5ed79f56afa90cc88f445e2b87c1fdf90887e13", + "edit_distance": 0.7382920110192838, + "f1_score": 0.880952380952381, + "meteor": 0.47164636859591236, + "precision": 0.9384057971014492, + "pred_md": "using a large number n uses of the quantum channel and a maximally entangled state Φ T A T B of the form in (6) where the sender possesses the system T A , the receiver possesses the system T B , and D is the Schmidt rank of the entanglement. The classical rate of transmission is C ≡ log( M ) n bits per channel use, and the rate of entanglement consumption is E ≡ log( D ) n ebits per channel use. If there is a scheme that transmits classical data at rate C with vanishing error probability and consumes entanglement at rate E in the limit of a large number of uses of the channel, we say that the rates C and E form an achievable rate pair ( C, E ).\n\nShor's main result in Ref. [39] is that all achievable rate pairs lie in the following entanglement-assisted classical capacity region of N :\n\n\n\nwhere the 'one-shot' region C (1) CE ( N ) is a union of the 'one-shot, one-state' regions C (1) CE, ρ ( N ). The one-shot, one-state region C (1) CE, ρ ( N ) is the set of all C, E ≥ 0 such that\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nwhere ρ is again a state of the form in (15).\n\nHsieh and Wilde later gave a more refined 'trapezoidal' characterization of the one-shot, one-state region C (1) CE, ρ ( N ) [40], but the one-shot regions C (1) CE ( N ) resulting from both Shor's 'rectangular' characterization and Hsieh and Wilde's pentagonal characterization are equivalent, and the characterization above suffices for our purposes here.\n\nFor general channels, the multi-letter characterization in (16) is necessary, but for certain channels, such as the erasure channels and generalized dephasing channels, the CE capacity region admits a single-letter characterization as Ref. [40] stated and as we show in full detail here for the generalized dephasing channels. In fact, in Section IV B, we show that the CE region for all Hadamard channels, of which a generalized dephasing channel is an example, admits a single-letter characterization.\n\n## C. The Capacity Region for Entanglement-Assisted Transmission of Classical and Quantum Information\n\nThe natural generalization of the two scenarios we have just considered is entanglement-assisted classical and quantum (CQE) communication. The goal of such a protocol is to transmit as much classical information with vanishing error probability and quantum information with fidelity approaching unity while consuming as little entanglement as possible in the limit of a large number of uses of the channel N . More precisely, the protocol\n\n8\n\ntransmits one classical message from a set of M messages and an arbitrary quantum state of dimension K using a large number n uses of the quantum channel and a maximally entangled state Φ T A T B of dimension D . The classical rate of transmission is C ≡ log( M ) n bits per channel use, the quantum rate of transmission is Q ≡ log( K ) n qubits per channel use, and the rate of entanglement consumption is E ≡ log( D ) n ebits per channel use. If there is a scheme that transmits classical data, transmits quantum data, and consumes entanglement at respective rates C , Q , and E with vanishing error probability and fidelity approaching unity in the limit of a large number of uses of the channel, we say that the rates C , Q , and E form an achievable rate triple ( C, Q, E ).\n\nHsieh and Wilde's main result in Ref. [40] is that all achievable rate triples lie in the following CQE capacity region for the channel N :\n\n\n\nwhere the one-shot region C (1) CQE ( N ) is the union of the 'one-shot, one-state' regions C (1) CQE, ρ ( N ). The 'one-shot, one-state' region C (1) CQE, ρ ( N ) is the set of all C, Q, E ≥ 0 such that\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nOne of the observations in Ref. [40] is that there is a way to single-letterize the CQE capacity region provided one can show that both the CQ and CE trade-off curves single-letterize. We review these arguments briefly. Suppose that we have shown that both the CQ and CE tradeoff curves single-letterize. Then three surfaces specify the boundary of the CQE capacity region so that we can simplify the characterization in (17-19). The first surface to consider is that formed by combining the CE trade-off curve with the 'inverse' of the super-dense coding protocol. Recall that the super-dense coding protocol exploits a noiseless ebit and a noiseless qubit channel to transmit two classical bits [38]. Let ( C CE ( s 1 ) , 0 , E CE ( s 1 )) denote a parametrization of all points on the CE trade-off curve with respect to some parameter s 1 ∈ [0 , 1 2], and recall / that each point on the trade-off curve has corresponding entropic quantities of the form ( I ( AX B , ; ) 0 , H ( A X | )). Then the surface formed by combining the CE trade-off curve with the inverse of super-dense coding is\n\n\n\nThis surface forms an outer bound for the capacity region. Were it not so, then one could combine points outside it with super-dense coding to outperform points", + "recall": 0.8301282051282052, + "true_md": "8\n\ntransmits one classical message from a set of M messages and an arbitrary quantum state of dimension K using a large number n uses of the quantum channel and a maximally entangled state Φ T$_{A}$T$_{B}$ of dimension D . The classical rate of transmission is C ≡ log( M ) n bits per chan- nel use, the quantum rate of transmission is Q ≡ log( K ) n qubits per channel use, and the rate of entanglement con- sumption is E ≡ log( D ) n ebits per channel use. If there is a scheme that transmits classical data, transmits quantum data, and consumes entanglement at respective rates C , Q , and E with vanishing error probability and fidelity approaching unity in the limit of a large number of uses of the channel, we say that the rates C , Q , and E form an achievable rate triple ( C,Q,E ).\n\nusing a large number n uses of the quantum channel and a maximally entangled state Φ T$_{A}$T$_{B}$ of the form in (6) where the sender possesses the system T$_{A}$ , the receiver possesses the system T$_{B}$ , and D is the Schmidt rank of the entanglement. The classical rate of transmission is C ≡ log( M ) n bits per channel use, and the rate of entan- glement consumption is E ≡ log( D ) n ebits per channel use. If there is a scheme that transmits classical data at rate C with vanishing error probability and consumes entan- glement at rate E in the limit of a large number of uses of the channel, we say that the rates C and E form an achievable rate pair ( C,E ).\n\nShor’s main result in Ref. [39] is that all achievable rate pairs lie in the following entanglement-assisted classical capacity region of N :\n\nHsieh and Wilde’s main result in Ref. [40] is that all achievable rate triples lie in the following CQE capacity region for the channel N :\n\nwhere the “one-shot” region C (1) $_{CE}$( N ) is a union of the “one-shot, one-state” regions C (1) CE, $_{ρ}$( N ). The one-shot, one-state region C (1) CE, $_{ρ}$( N ) is the set of all C,E ≥ 0 such that\n\nwhere the one-shot region C (1) $_{CQE}$( N ) is the union of the “one-shot, one-state” regions C (1) CQE, $_{ρ}$( N ). The “one-shot, one-state” region C (1) CQE, $_{ρ}$( N ) is the set of all C,Q,E ≥ 0 such that\n\n$$C$_{CQE}$ ( N ) = ∞ ⋃ k =1 1 k C (1) $_{CQE}$( N ⊗ $^{k}$) ,$$\n\n$$C$_{CE}$ ( N ) = ∞ ⋃ k =1 1 k C (1) $_{CE}$( N ⊗ $^{k}$) , (16)$$\n\n$$C ≤ I ( AX ; B )$_{ρ}$ , E ≥ H ( A | X )$_{ρ}$ ,$$\n\n$$C + 2 Q ≤ I ( AX ; B )$_{ρ}$ , (17)$$\n\n$$Q ≤ I ( A 〉 BX )$_{ρ}$ + E, (18)$$\n\n$$C + Q ≤ I ( X ; B )$_{ρ}$ + I ( A 〉 BX )$_{ρ}$ + E. (19)$$\n\nwhere ρ is again a state of the form in (15).\n\nHsieh and Wilde later gave a more refined “trape- zoidal” characterization of the one-shot, one-state region C (1) CE, $_{ρ}$( N ) [40], but the one-shot regions C (1) $_{CE}$( N ) result- ing from both Shor’s “rectangular” characterization and Hsieh and Wilde’s pentagonal characterization are equiv- alent, and the characterization above suffices for our pur- poses here.\n\nOne of the observations in Ref. [40] is that there is a way to single-letterize the CQE capacity region provided one can show that both the CQ and CE trade-off curves single-letterize. We review these arguments briefly. Sup- pose that we have shown that both the CQ and CE trade- off curves single-letterize. Then three surfaces specify the boundary of the CQE capacity region so that we can simplify the characterization in (17-19). The first surface to consider is that formed by combining the CE trade-off curve with the “inverse” of the super-dense coding proto- col. Recall that the super-dense coding protocol exploits a noiseless ebit and a noiseless qubit channel to transmit two classical bits [38]. Let ( C$_{CE}$ ( s$_{1}$ ) , 0 ,E$_{CE}$ ( s$_{1}$ )) denote a parametrization of all points on the CE trade-off curve with respect to some parameter s$_{1}$ ∈ [0 , 1 / 2], and recall that each point on the trade-off curve has corresponding entropic quantities of the form ( I ( AX ; B ) , 0 ,H ( A | X )). Then the surface formed by combining the CE trade-off curve with the inverse of super-dense coding is\n\nFor general channels, the multi-letter characterization in (16) is necessary, but for certain channels, such as the erasure channels and generalized dephasing channels, the CE capacity region admits a single-letter characteriza- tion as Ref. [40] stated and as we show in full detail here for the generalized dephasing channels. In fact, in Sec- tion IV B, we show that the CE region for all Hadamard channels, of which a generalized dephasing channel is an example, admits a single-letter characterization.\n\nThe natural generalization of the two scenarios we have just considered is entanglement-assisted classical and quantum (CQE) communication. The goal of such a protocol is to transmit as much classical information with vanishing error probability and quantum informa- tion with fidelity approaching unity while consuming as little entanglement as possible in the limit of a large num- ber of uses of the channel N . More precisely, the protocol\n\nThis surface forms an outer bound for the capacity re- gion. Were it not so, then one could combine points outside it with super-dense coding to outperform points\n\n## C. The Capacity Region for Entanglement-Assisted Transmission of Classical and Quantum Information\n\n$${ ( C$_{CE}$ ( s$_{1}$ ) − 2 Q,Q,E$_{CE}$ ( s$_{1}$ ) − Q ) : s$_{1}$ ∈ [0 , 1 / 2] , 0 ≤ Q ≤ min { 1 $_{2}$C$_{CE}$ ( s$_{1}$ ) ,E$_{CE}$ ( s$_{1}$ ) } } .$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6045563949615576, + "doc_id": "f6d75798062b25245b314a881078ddb355821b7397f9abc57f1a05eec14c6ad4", + "edit_distance": 0.6983758700696056, + "f1_score": 0.9601677148846961, + "meteor": 0.7355757049546461, + "precision": 0.9828326180257511, + "pred_md": "17\n\nFIG. 4: (Color online) Plot of the CQ trade-off curve (a) and the CE trade-off curve (b) of an Unruh channel for z = 0, 0 2, . 0 4, 0 6, 0 8, and 0 95. . . . . The trade-off curves for z = 0 correspond to those for the noiseless qubit channel and are the rightmost trade-off curves in each plot. In both plots, proceeding left from the z = 0 curve, we obtain trade-off curves for z = 0 2, 0 4, . . 0 6, 0 8, and 0 95 and notice that they all beat a time-sharing strategy by a larger relative proportion as . . . z increases.\n\nFIG. 4: (Color online) Plot of the CQ trade-off curve (a) and the CE trade-off curve (b) of an Unruh channel for z = 0, 0 2, . 0 4, 0 6, 0 8, and 0 95. . . . . The trade-off curves for z = 0 correspond to those for the noiseless qubit channel and are the rightmost trade-off curves in each plot. In both plots, proceeding left from the z = 0 curve, we obtain trade-off curves for z = 0 2, 0 4, . . 0 6, 0 8, and 0 95 and notice that they all beat a time-sharing strategy by a larger relative proportion as . . . z increases.\n\nFIG. 5: (Color online) The figure plots the CQE capacity region for an Unruh channel with acceleration parameter z = 0 95. . It features three distinct surfaces. The first is the flat vertical plane that arises from the bound R +2 Q ≤ C EAC , where C EAC is the entanglement-assisted classical capacity of an Unruh channel. The plane extends infinitely upward because we can always achieve these rate triples simply by wasting entanglement. The second surface is that below and to the left of the plane, formed by combining the CE trade-off curve with the inverse of super-dense coding, as described in Section III C. The final surface is that below and to the right of the plane, formed by combining the CQ trade-off curve with the inverse of entanglement distribution, as described in Section III C.\n\nFIG. 5: (Color online) The figure plots the CQE capacity region for an Unruh channel with acceleration parameter z = 0 95. . It features three distinct surfaces. The first is the flat vertical plane that arises from the bound R +2 Q ≤ C EAC , where C EAC is the entanglement-assisted classical capacity of an Unruh channel. The plane extends infinitely upward because we can always achieve these rate triples simply by wasting entanglement. The second surface is that below and to the left of the plane, formed by combining the CE trade-off curve with the inverse of super-dense coding, as described in Section III C. The final surface is that below and to the right of the plane, formed by combining the CQ trade-off curve with the inverse of entanglement distribution, as described in Section III C.\n\ngeneralized dephasing channels and cloning channels, and we have computed exact formulas that specify their CQE capacity regions. Furthermore, we have obtained expressions for the CQE capacity region of an Unruh channel because of its close connection with the cloning channels. The classically-enhanced father protocol beats a simple time-sharing strategy for all of these channels, stressing the need for non-trivial coding techniques when trading multiple resources.\n\nIt is interesting to ponder the reason why a particular channel obtains an improvement over time-sharing. The relative improvements are most significant for the CQ trade-off, in which case the cloning and Unruh channels exhibit much more substantial gains than the dephasing channels. In retrospect, it is perhaps surprising that the dephasing channels exhibit any improvement at all. Since these channels can transmit classical data noiselessly, it would be natural to expect that any optimal strategy for sending classical bits would directly exploit this capability. For CQ trade-off coding, that would entail allocating some fraction of channel uses to noiseless classical data transmission and the rest to quantum, which is exactly the time-sharing strategy. The existence of a nontrivial CQ trade-off indicates that this strategy is actually not optimal. In contrast, the cloning and Unruh channels are incapable of sending classical data noiselessly when N > 1 or z > 0 so any communication strategy requires error correction with the attendant opportunity for nontrivial trade-off coding.\n\nSome future directions for this work are in order. It would be desirable to discover other channels for which the full CQE capacity region single-letterizes, but it is", + "recall": 0.9385245901639344, + "true_md": "17\n\nFIG. 4: (Color online) Plot of the CQ trade-off curve (a) and the CE trade-off curve (b) of an Unruh channel for z = 0, 0 . 2, 0 . 4, 0 . 6, 0 . 8, and 0 . 95. The trade-off curves for z = 0 correspond to those for the noiseless qubit channel and are the rightmost trade-off curves in each plot. In both plots, proceeding left from the z = 0 curve, we obtain trade-off curves for z = 0 . 2, 0 . 4, 0 . 6, 0 . 8, and 0 . 95 and notice that they all beat a time-sharing strategy by a larger relative proportion as z increases.\n\ngeneralized dephasing channels and cloning channels, and we have computed exact formulas that specify their CQE capacity regions. Furthermore, we have obtained expres- sions for the CQE capacity region of an Unruh channel because of its close connection with the cloning channels. The classically-enhanced father protocol beats a simple time-sharing strategy for all of these channels, stressing the need for non-trivial coding techniques when trading multiple resources.\n\nIt is interesting to ponder the reason why a particular channel obtains an improvement over time-sharing. The relative improvements are most significant for the CQ trade-off, in which case the cloning and Unruh channels exhibit much more substantial gains than the dephasing channels. In retrospect, it is perhaps surprising that the dephasing channels exhibit any improvement at all. Since these channels can transmit classical data noiselessly, it would be natural to expect that any optimal strategy for sending classical bits would directly exploit this capabil- ity. For CQ trade-off coding, that would entail allocating some fraction of channel uses to noiseless classical data transmission and the rest to quantum, which is exactly the time-sharing strategy. The existence of a nontrivial CQ trade-off indicates that this strategy is actually not optimal. In contrast, the cloning and Unruh channels are incapable of sending classical data noiselessly when N > 1 or z > 0 so any communication strategy requires error correction with the attendant opportunity for non- trivial trade-off coding.\n\nSome future directions for this work are in order. It would be desirable to discover other channels for which the full CQE capacity region single-letterizes, but it is\n\nFIG. 5: (Color online) The figure plots the CQE capac- ity region for an Unruh channel with acceleration parameter z = 0 . 95. It features three distinct surfaces. The first is the flat vertical plane that arises from the bound R +2 Q ≤ C$_{EAC}$ , where C$_{EAC}$ is the entanglement-assisted classical capacity of an Unruh channel. The plane extends infinitely upward be- cause we can always achieve these rate triples simply by wast- ing entanglement. The second surface is that below and to the left of the plane, formed by combining the CE trade-off curve with the inverse of super-dense coding, as described in Section III C. The final surface is that below and to the right of the plane, formed by combining the CQ trade-off curve with the inverse of entanglement distribution, as described in Section III C." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6339368581231326, + "doc_id": "9223416e99d72e3c6e4716810bf5fc7fd9ffcd6ec9f1eba8ebdbc7f001449893", + "edit_distance": 0.8249158249158249, + "f1_score": 0.8843930635838151, + "meteor": 0.501844700137933, + "precision": 0.9107142857142857, + "pred_md": "is ω E ( ) given by Eq. (18). In particular, the low energy levels have spacing ω J , while the high energy levels are doubly-degenerate with spacing ω + . In the vicinity of the separatrix we get\n\n\n\n∣ ∣ Using the WKB quantization condition, we find that the level spacing at the vicinity of the separatrix ( E ∼ E x ) is finite and given by the expression\n\n\n\nUsing an iterative procedure one finds that at the same level of approximation the near-separatrix energy levels are\n\n\n\n∣ ∣ where ν x = A E ( x ) /h . Fig. 1 demonstrates the accuracy of the WKB quantization, and of the above approximations.\n\n## IV. THE INITIAL PREPARATION AND ITS PHASE-SPACE REPRESENTATION - THE WIGNER FUNCTION\n\nOur approach for investigating the dynamics of various initial preparations relies on the Wigner-function formalism for spin variables, developed in Refs. [43, 44]. Each initial preparation is described as a Wigner distribution function over the spherical phase space. The dynamics is deduced from expanding the initial state in terms of the semiclassical eigenstates described in Sec III. In this section we specify the Wigner distribution for the preparations under study whereas the following section presents the eigenstate expansion of each of these four initial wavepackets, evaluated semiclassically.\n\nTo recap the phase-space approach to spin [43, 44], the Hilbert space of the BHH has the dimension N = 2 +1, j and the associated space of operators has the dimensionality N 2 . According to the Stratonovich-Wigner-Weyl correspondence (SWWC) [50], any observable A in this space, as well as the probability matrix of a spin ( j ) entity, can be represented by a real sphere (2 j ) function A W (Ω). The sphere (2 j ) is spanned by the Y /lscriptm (Ω) functions with /lscript ≤ 2 , j and the practical details regarding this formalism can be found in Refs. [43, 44]. The SWWC allows to do exact quantum calculation in a classical-like manner. A few examples for Wigner functions pertinent to this work, are displayed in Fig. 2. Expectation values are calculated as in classical statistical mechanics:\n\n\n\nIn particular the Wigner-Weyl representation of the identity operator is 1, and that of J x is as expected\n\n4\n\n[( j +1) ] j 1 / 2 sin( θ ) cos( ϕ ) [44]. We adopt the convention that ρ W is normalized with respect to the measure d Ω /h , allowing to handle on equal footing a cylindrical phase space upon the re-identification d Ω = dϕdn and h = 2 π .\n\nWithin this phase-space representation, the Fock states | n 〉 are represented by stripes along constant θ contours (see e.g. left panel of Fig. 2). The | n = N 〉 state (all particles in one site) is a Gaussian-like wave packet concentrated around the NorthPole. From this state, we can obtain a family of spin coherent states (SCS) | θ, ϕ 〉 via rotation.\n\nIn what follows, we explore the dynamics of the following experimentally-accessible preparations (see Fig. 2), the first being a Fock state, whereas the last three are spin coherent states:\n\n- · TwinFock preparation: The n =0 Fock preparation. Exactly half of the particles are in each side of the double well. The Wigner function is concentrated along the equator θ = π/ 2.\n- · Zero preparation: Coherent ( θ = π/ , ϕ 2 =0) preparation, located entirely in the (linear) sea region. Both sites are equally populated with definite 0 relative phase. The minimal wave-packet is centered at ( n = 0 , ϕ = 0).\n- · Pi preparation: Coherent ( θ = π/ , ϕ 2 = ) π onseparatrix preparation. The sites are equally populated with π relative phase. The minimal wavepacket is centered at ( n = 0 , ϕ = π ).\n\n/negationslash\n\n- · Edge preparation: Coherent ϕ = π on-separatrix preparation. The minimal wave-packet is centered on the separatrix but away from the saddle point on the ϕ =0 side.\n\nThe Wigner function of an SCS resembles a minimal Gaussian wave-packet, and it should satisfy\n\n\n\nThis requirement helps to determine the phase space spread without the need to use the lengthy algebra of Refs. [43, 44]. For the Fock coherent state | n = N 〉 , that is centered at the NorthPole ( θ = 0), one obtains:\n\n\n\nFor the coherent states centered around the Equator, it is more convenient to use ( ϕ, n ) coordinates, e.g. the ϕ = 0 coherent state is well approximated as,\n\n\n\nwith a = 1 / √ 2 N and b = √ N / 2. Shifted versions of these expressions describe the ϕ = π and the 'Edge' preparations. The Wigner function of a Fock state ψ = | n 〉 is semiclassically approximated as\n\n", + "recall": 0.8595505617977528, + "true_md": "4\n\n[( j +1) j ] 1 / $^{2}$sin( θ ) cos( ϕ ) [44]. We adopt the convention that ρ$_{W}$ is normalized with respect to the measure d Ω /h , allowing to handle on equal footing a cylindrical phase space upon the re-identification d Ω = dϕdn and h = 2 π .\n\nWithin this phase-space representation, the Fock states | n 〉 are represented by stripes along constant θ con- tours (see e.g. left panel of Fig. 2). The | n = N 〉 state (all particles in one site) is a Gaussian-like wave packet con- centrated around the NorthPole. From this state, we can obtain a family of spin coherent states (SCS) | θ, ϕ 〉 via rotation.\n\nis ω ( E ) given by Eq. (18). In particular, the low energy levels have spacing ω$_{J}$ , while the high energy levels are doubly-degenerate with spacing ω$_{+}$ . In the vicinity of the separatrix we get\n\nUsing the WKB quantization condition, we find that the level spacing at the vicinity of the separatrix ( E ∼ E$_{x}$ ) is finite and given by the expression\n\nIn what follows, we explore the dynamics of the follow- ing experimentally-accessible preparations (see Fig. 2), the first being a Fock state, whereas the last three are spin coherent states:\n\n- • TwinFock preparation: The n =0 Fock preparation. Exactly half of the particles are in each side of the double well. The Wigner function is concentrated along the equator θ = π/ 2.\n\n- • Zero preparation: Coherent ( θ = π/ 2 , ϕ =0) prepa- ration, located entirely in the (linear) sea region. Both sites are equally populated with definite 0 rel- ative phase. The minimal wave-packet is centered at ( n = 0 , ϕ = 0).\n\n- • Pi preparation: Coherent ( θ = π/ 2 , ϕ = π ) on- separatrix preparation. The sites are equally pop- ulated with π relative phase. The minimal wave- packet is centered at ( n = 0 , ϕ = π ).\n\n- • Edge preparation: Coherent ϕ ̸ = π on-separatrix preparation. The minimal wave-packet is centered on the separatrix but away from the saddle point on the ϕ =0 side.\n\nThe Wigner function of an SCS resembles a minimal Gaussian wave-packet, and it should satisfy\n\nOur approach for investigating the dynamics of various initial preparations relies on the Wigner-function formal- ism for spin variables, developed in Refs. [43, 44]. Each initial preparation is described as a Wigner distribution function over the spherical phase space. The dynam- ics is deduced from expanding the initial state in terms of the semiclassical eigenstates described in Sec III. In this section we specify the Wigner distribution for the preparations under study whereas the following section presents the eigenstate expansion of each of these four initial wavepackets, evaluated semiclassically.\n\n∫ ∫ This requirement helps to determine the phase space spread without the need to use the lengthy algebra of Refs. [43, 44]. For the Fock coherent state | n = N 〉 , that is centered at the NorthPole ( θ = 0), one obtains:\n\nTo recap the phase-space approach to spin [43, 44], the Hilbert space of the BHH has the dimension N = 2 j +1, and the associated space of operators has the dimension- ality N $^{2}$. According to the Stratonovich-Wigner-Weyl correspondence (SWWC) [50], any observable A in this space, as well as the probability matrix of a spin ( j ) entity, can be represented by a real sphere (2 j ) function A$_{W}$ (Ω). The sphere (2 j ) is spanned by the Y $^{ℓm}$(Ω) functions with ℓ ≤ 2 j , and the practical details regarding this formal- ism can be found in Refs. [43, 44]. The SWWC allows to do exact quantum calculation in a classical-like man- ner. A few examples for Wigner functions pertinent to this work, are displayed in Fig. 2. Expectation values are calculated as in classical statistical mechanics:\n\nFor the coherent states centered around the Equator, it is more convenient to use ( ϕ, n ) coordinates, e.g. the ϕ = 0 coherent state is well approximated as,\n\nIn particular the Wigner-Weyl representation of the identity operator is 1, and that of J$_{x}$ is as expected\n\n≈ ab with a = 1 $_{/}$√$_{2}$ N and b = √ N / 2. Shifted versions of these expressions describe the ϕ = π and the “Edge” preparations. The Wigner function of a Fock state ψ = | n 〉 is semiclassically approximated as\n\n$$∫ ρ$_{W}$ ( θ, ϕ ) d Ω h = ∫ [ ρ$_{W}$ ( θ, ϕ )] 2 d Ω h = 1 . (33) This requirement helps to determine the phase space$$\n\n$$ρ ( ψ ) W ( θ, ϕ ) ≈ 2e − N 2 θ 2 . (34)$$\n\n$$ρ ( ψ ) W ( n, ϕ ) ≈ 1 ab e − ϕ 2 2 a $_{2}$− n 2 2 b 2 , (35) $_{/}$√$_{2}$$$\n\n$$ρ ( ψ ) W ( n, ϕ ) ≈ δ ( n − n ) , (36)$$\n\n$$trace[ˆ ρ ˆ A ] = ∫ d Ω h ρ$_{W}$ (Ω) A$_{W}$ (Ω) (32)$$\n\n## IV. THE INITIAL PREPARATION AND ITS PHASE-SPACE REPRESENTATION - THE WIGNER FUNCTION\n\n$$ω ( E ) ≈ [ 1 π log ∣ NK E − E$_{x}$ ∣ ] − 1 ω$_{J}$. (29)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6866020042591792, + "doc_id": "707583d9e9527a5e68d132b90c6b607c3c2e667a4ad94fdb2f83988202d2b0ca", + "edit_distance": 0.7908496732026143, + "f1_score": 0.9017341040462428, + "meteor": 0.5759019441154815, + "precision": 0.9285714285714286, + "pred_md": "FIG. 5: Transition temperatures T N ( n ) and T C ( n ) vs. film thickness n .\n\nFIG. 5: Transition temperatures T N ( n ) and T C ( n ) vs. film thickness n .\n\nthe same is true for the crossing point of the Binder cumulant of the average magnetization M (not reported in figure), which is located at T C (8) = 133 3(3)K. These . data give a first rough indication that also for n = 8 all the planes of the sample are still ordering almost at the same temperature; such property has been observed for all the investigated thicknesses n below 16, so that T C ( n ) results quite n -independent (see also Fig. 5) .\n\nAlthough the layer subtraction does not seem to modify T C ( n ), the onset of helical arrangement is observed to shift at lower temperatures as n decreases. The chirality κ defined in Eq. (4) is reported in Fig 4b for n = 8. As the temperature decreases, around T ∼ 80K we can identify a finite-size behaviour of κ which, at variance with the previous one, can be easily recognized as typical of an effective phase transition. Such conclusion is confirmed by the analysis of the chiral susceptibility χ κ (Fig. 4c), which for the largest L has a maximum at T = 85K. Assuming that the order parameter (4) is the relevant one to single out the onset of the fan arrangement, we can get a more accurate estimate of T N (8) by looking at the Binder cumulant u 4 ( κ ), reported in Fig. 4d. By making use of the MH technique, we locate the crossing point at T N (8) = 92(2) K. Finally, it is worthwhile to observe as the specific heat does not show any anomaly at T N (8), being the entropy substantially removed at T C (8).\n\nThe scenario just outlined for n = 8 results to be correct in the thickness range 6 ≤ n /lessorsimilar 15, where a clear separation between T N ( n ) and T C ( n ) can be easily figured out. In such temperature window, the strong surface effects produce a quasi -FM set-up of the magnetic film structure along the z -direction. While leaving to the next Section a more detailed discussion of this regime, we report in Fig. 5 a plot of T N ( n ) and T C ( n ) vs. n for all the simulated thicknesses. The separation between the two critical temperatures is maximum for n = 6, where T N (6) = 38(4), that is T N (6) ∼ 1 3 T C (6). For films with less than six layers no fan order is observed, i.e. for n = 5 and below the chirality does not display any typical feature of fan ordering at any temperature below T C ( n ). As a representative quantity we finally look at the rotation\n\n5\n\nFIG. 6: Rotation angle ∆ ϕ l between magnetic moments on NN layers ( l + 1 , l ) at some low temperatures, for thickness n = 5 and n = 6, and lateral dimension L = 64.\n\nFIG. 6: Rotation angle ∆ ϕ l between magnetic moments on NN layers ( l + 1 , l ) at some low temperatures, for thickness n = 5 and n = 6, and lateral dimension L = 64.\n\nangle of the magnetization between nearest planes:\n\n\n\nwhere ( M ,M x l y l ) is the magnetic vector profile for each plane l . ∆ ϕ l is displayed in Fig. 6a and Fig. 6b, for n = 6 and n = 5, respectively. In Fig. 6a, a quite clear fan stabilization is observed when the temperature decreases, while in Fig. 6b, i.e. for n = 5, ∆ ϕ l keeps an almost temperature independent very small value; what's more, ∆ ϕ l seems to loose any temperature dependence as T = 0 is approached. We attribute the absence of fan arrangement for n ≤ 5 as simply due to the lack of 'bulk planes' inside the film, so that we are left with only a 2d trend at T C ( n ), i.e. at the temperature where the order parameters defined in Eqs. (2) and (3) show a critical behaviour.\n\n## IV. DISCUSSION AND CONCLUSION\n\nA possible framework to analyze the results presented in the previous Section is suggested by Fig. 5, where we can easily distinguish three significant regions: i ) high thickness, n /greaterorequalslant 16, where the films substantially display a bulk behaviour, with the single planes ordering temperature coinciding with the helical phase transition one; ii ) intermediate thickness, 6 ≤ n /lessorsimilar 15, where the temperature corresponding to the onset of in-plane order, T C ( n ), is still /similarequal T Ho N , but where the helical/fan arrangement stabilizes only below a finite temperature T N ( n ) < T C ( n ); iii ) low thickness,1 ≤ n ≤ 5, where T C ( n ) /lessorsimilar T Ho N but no fan phase is present at any temperature.\n\nThe observed behaviour in region iii ) can be reasonably attributed to the decreasing relevance of the contribution to the total energy of the system coming from the competitive interactions among NNN planes as the film thickness decreases; moreover, the thinness of the", + "recall": 0.8764044943820225, + "true_md": "5\n\nFIG. 6: Rotation angle Δ ϕ$_{l}$ between magnetic moments on NN layers ( l + 1 , l ) at some low temperatures, for thickness n = 5 and n = 6, and lateral dimension L = 64.\n\nFIG. 5: Transition temperatures T$_{N}$ ( n ) and T$_{C}$ ( n ) vs. film thickness n .\n\n$$Δ ϕ$_{l}$ = ϕ$_{l}$$_{+1}$ − ϕ$_{l}$ = arccos [ M x l M x l +1 + M y l M y l +1 ] (10) where ( M x , M y ) is the magnetic vector profile for each$$\n\n## IV. DISCUSSION AND CONCLUSION\n\nangle of the magnetization between nearest planes:\n\nthe same is true for the crossing point of the Binder cu- mulant of the average magnetization M (not reported in figure), which is located at T$_{C}$ (8) = 133 . 3(3) K. These data give a first rough indication that also for n = 8 all the planes of the sample are still ordering almost at the same temperature; such property has been observed for all the investigated thicknesses n below 16, so that T$_{C}$ ( n ) results quite n -independent (see also Fig. 5) .\n\n[ ] where ( M x l , M y l ) is the magnetic vector profile for each plane l . Δ ϕ$_{l}$ is displayed in Fig. 6a and Fig. 6b, for n = 6 and n = 5, respectively. In Fig. 6a, a quite clear fan stabilization is observed when the temperature de- creases, while in Fig. 6b, i.e. for n = 5, Δ ϕ$_{l}$ keeps an almost temperature independent very small value; what’s more, Δ ϕ$_{l}$ seems to loose any temperature dependence as T = 0 is approached. We attribute the absence of fan arrangement for n ≤ 5 as simply due to the lack of “bulk planes” inside the film, so that we are left with only a 2d trend at T$_{C}$ ( n ), i.e. at the temperature where the order parameters defined in Eqs. (2) and (3) show a critical behaviour.\n\nAlthough the layer subtraction does not seem to mod- ify T$_{C}$ ( n ), the onset of helical arrangement is observed to shift at lower temperatures as n decreases. The chirality κ defined in Eq. (4) is reported in Fig 4b for n = 8. As the temperature decreases, around T ∼ 80 K we can identify a finite-size behaviour of κ which, at variance with the previous one, can be easily recognized as typical of an effective phase transition. Such conclusion is confirmed by the analysis of the chiral susceptibility χ$_{κ}$ (Fig. 4c), which for the largest L has a maximum at T = 85 K. As- suming that the order parameter (4) is the relevant one to single out the onset of the fan arrangement, we can get a more accurate estimate of T$_{N}$ (8) by looking at the Binder cumulant u$_{4}$ ( κ ), reported in Fig. 4d. By making use of the MH technique, we locate the crossing point at T$_{N}$ (8) = 92(2) K. Finally, it is worthwhile to observe as the specific heat does not show any anomaly at T$_{N}$ (8), being the entropy substantially removed at T$_{C}$ (8).\n\nA possible framework to analyze the results presented in the previous Section is suggested by Fig. 5, where we can easily distinguish three significant regions: i ) high thickness, n ⩾ 16, where the films substantially display a bulk behaviour, with the single planes ordering tempera- ture coinciding with the helical phase transition one; ii ) intermediate thickness, 6 ≤ n ≲ 15, where the tempera- ture corresponding to the onset of in-plane order, T$_{C}$ ( n ), is still ≃ T Ho N , but where the helical/fan arrangement sta- bilizes only below a finite temperature T$_{N}$ ( n ) < T$_{C}$ ( n ); iii ) low thickness,1 ≤ n ≤ 5, where T$_{C}$ ( n ) ≲ T Ho N but no fan phase is present at any temperature.\n\nThe scenario just outlined for n = 8 results to be cor- rect in the thickness range 6 ≤ n ≲ 15, where a clear separation between T$_{N}$ ( n ) and T$_{C}$ ( n ) can be easily fig- ured out. In such temperature window, the strong sur- face effects produce a quasi -FM set-up of the magnetic film structure along the z -direction. While leaving to the next Section a more detailed discussion of this regime, we report in Fig. 5 a plot of T$_{N}$ ( n ) and T$_{C}$ ( n ) vs. n for all the simulated thicknesses. The separation between the two critical temperatures is maximum for n = 6, where T$_{N}$ (6) = 38(4), that is T$_{N}$ (6) ∼ 1 $_{3}$T$_{C}$ (6). For films with less than six layers no fan order is observed, i.e. for n = 5 and below the chirality does not display any typical fea- ture of fan ordering at any temperature below T$_{C}$ ( n ). As a representative quantity we finally look at the rotation\n\nThe observed behaviour in region iii ) can be reason- ably attributed to the decreasing relevance of the con- tribution to the total energy of the system coming from the competitive interactions among NNN planes as the film thickness decreases; moreover, the thinness of the" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5379855288854812, + "doc_id": "85d27fdcbd0b8b8354aabece0ddb25bd93dd2fe45685ffe1fdb11fc29ea00a34", + "edit_distance": 0.43214509068167606, + "f1_score": 0.9443651925820258, + "meteor": 0.5279256409931581, + "precision": 0.9678362573099415, + "pred_md": "momentum, qd , which gives the current density\n\n\n\nSince the samples we consider are typically longer than the electron's coherence length, we have used the ShF occupations within the main text. For completeness we give also the results for the 2FR case. The spin polarization per unit length of the sample to third order in α E is\n\n\n\n- ∗ Electronic address: peter.bokes@stuba.sk\n- 1 Y. K. Kato, R. C. Myers, A. C. Gossard, and D. D. Awschalom, Science 306 , 1910 (2004).\n- 2 V. Sih, R. C. Myers, Y. K. Kato, W. H. Lau, A. C. Gossard, and D. D. Awschalom, Nature Physics 1 , 31 (2005).\n- 3 J. Wunderlich, B. Kaestner, J. Sinova, and T. Jungwirth, Phys. Rev. Lett. 94 , 047204 (2005).\n- 4 V. Sih, Y . K. Kato, and D. D. Awschalom, Physics World Nov , 33 (2005).\n- 5 J. Sinova, D. Culcer, Q. Niu, N. A. Sinitsyn, T. Jungwirth, and A. H. MacDonald, Phys. Rev. Lett. 92 , 126603 (2004).\n- 6 J. I. Inoue, G. E. W. Bauer, and L. W. Molenkamp, Phys. Rev. B 70 , 041303(R) (2004).\n- 7 E. I. Rashba, Phys. Rev. B 70 , 201309(R) (2004).\n- 8 B. K. Nikolic, S. Souma, L. P. Zrbo, and J. Sinova, Phys. Rev. Lett. 95 , 046601 (2005).\n- 9 C. P. Moca and D. C. Marinescu, Phys. Rev. B 75 , 035325 (2006).\n- 10 V. A. Zyuzin, P. G. Silvestrov, and E. G. Mishchenko, Phys. Rev. Lett. 99 , 106601 (2007).\n- 11 A. Reynoso, G. Usaj, and C. A. Balseiro, Phys. Rev. B 73 , 115342 (2006).\n- 12 V. Teodorescu and R. Winkler, Phys. Rev. B 80 , 041311(R) (2009).\n- 13 E. B. Sonin, arXiv:0909.3156v1 [cond-mat.mes-hall] (2009).\n- 14 G. Usaj and C. A. Balseiro, EPL (Europhysics Letters) 72 , 631 (2005).\n- 15 J. Yao and Z. Q. Yang, Phys. Rev. B 73 , 033314 (2006).\n- 16 Z. Li and Z. Yang, Phys. Rev. B 77 , 205322 (2008).\n- 17 K. Hattori and H. Okamoto, Phys. Rev. B 74 , 155321 (2006).\n- 18 Y. Xing, Q. F. Sun, L. Tang, and J. P. Hu, Phys. Rev. B 74 , 155313 (2006).\n- 19 S. Bellucci and P. Onorato, Phys. Rev. B 73 , 045329 (2006).\n\n7\n\nwhich after expressing the applied bias in terms of the current density results in\n\n\n\nComparing the last equation with Eq. 14 we see that while the first order term is identical for both occupations, the higher orders differ by a numerical prefactor. Both of these are larger in the case of partially equilibrated shifted Fermi-like occupations.\n\n- 20 S. Bellucci and P. Onorato, Phys. Rev. B 75 , 235326 (2007).\n- 21 Y. Jiang and L. Hu, Phys. Rev. B 74 , 075302 (2006).\n- 22 P. Bokes, F. Corsetti, and R. W. Godby, Phys. Rev. Lett. 101 , 046402 (2008).\n- 23 P. Debray, J. Wan, S. M. S. Rahman, R. S. Newrock, M. Cahay, A. T. Ngo, S. E. Ulloa, S. T. Herbert, M. Muhammad, and M. Johnson, arXiv:0901.2185v1 [cond-mat.mes-hall] (2009).\n- 24 J. J. Krich and B. I. Halperin, Physical Review B (Condensed Matter and Materials Physics) 78 , 035338 (2008).\n- 25 T. Yokoyama and M. Eto, Physical Review B (Condensed Matter and Materials Physics) 80 , 125311 (2009).\n- 26 H. A. Engel, E. I. Rashba, and B. I. Halperin, Phys. Rev. Lett. 95 , 166605 (2005).\n- 27 R. Winkler, Spin-Orbit Coupling Effects in Two-Dimensional\n- Electron and Hole System (Springer, New York, 2003).\n- 28 P. Bokes and R. W. Godby, Phys. Rev. B 68 , 125414 (2003).\n- 29 P. Bokes, H. Mera, and R. W. Godby, Phys. Rev. B 72 , 165425 (2005).\n- 30 J. Rech, T. Micklitz, and K. A. Matveev, Phys. Rev. Lett. 102 , 116402 (2009).\n- 31 A. Liebsch, Electornic excitations at metal surfaces (Plenum Press, New York, 1997).\n- 32 H. Mera, P. Bokes, and R. W. Godby, Phys. Rev. B 72 , 085311 (2005).\n- 33 We will use effective atomic units; the distances are measured in multiplies of the effective Bohr radius, a B ∗ = ε r mef = 9 79nm, . energy in the effective Hartrees, Ha ∗ = mef ε 2 r Ha = 11 9meV, both . numerical values are given for GaAs where me ∗ = 0 067 . me and ε r = 12 4 are the effective mass of the electron and the relative . permittivity.", + "recall": 0.9220055710306406, + "true_md": "momentum, q$_{d}$ , which gives the current density\n\nwhich after expressing the applied bias in terms of the current density results in\n\nSince the samples we consider are typically longer than the electron’s coherence length, we have used the ShF occupa- tions within the main text. For completeness we give also the results for the 2FR case. The spin polarization per unit length of the sample to third order in α E is\n\nComparing the last equation with Eq. 14 we see that while the first order term is identical for both occupations, the highe r orders differ by a numerical prefactor. Both of these are larger in the case of partially equilibrated shifted Fermi-like occupa- tions.\n\n$$j = n$_{2}$$_{D}$q$_{d}$ = E$_{F}$ π q$_{d}$ . (26)$$\n\n$$m$_{z}$ = − α E j − 2 α 3 E Δ V 3 E$_{F}$ j + 4 α 3 E 45 E 2 F j . (28)$$\n\n7\n\n$$m$_{z}$ = − α E π 2 √ 2 E$_{F}$ Δµ − 2 α 3 E Δ V 3 π 2 E 3 / 2 F Δµ − 4 α 3 E 45 π $_{2}$E 5 / 2 F Δµ (27)$$\n\n∗ Electronic address: peter.bokes@stuba.sk 1\n\n- ∗ Electronic address: peter.bokes@stuba.sk 1 Y. K. Kato, R. C. Myers, A. C. Gossard, and D. D. Awschalom, Science 306 , 1910 (2004). 2\n\n- Science 306 , 1910 (2004). 2 V. Sih, R. C. Myers, Y. K. Kato, W. H. Lau, A. C. Gossard, and D. D. Awschalom, Nature Physics 1 , 31 (2005). 3\n\n- D. D. Awschalom, Nature Physics 1 , 31 (2005). 3 J. Wunderlich, B. Kaestner, J. Sinova, and T. Jungwirth, Phys. Rev. Lett. 94 , 047204 (2005). 4\n\n- Rev. Lett. 94 , 047204 (2005). 4 V. Sih, Y. K. Kato, and D. D. Awschalom, Physics World Nov , 33 (2005). 5\n\n- (2005). 5 J. Sinova, D. Culcer, Q. Niu, N. A. Sinitsyn, T. Jungwirth, and A. H. MacDonald, Phys. Rev. Lett. 92 , 126603 (2004). 6\n\n- A. H. MacDonald, Phys. Rev. Lett. 92 , 126603 (2004). 6 J. I. Inoue, G. E. W. Bauer, and L. W. Molenkamp, Phys. Rev. B 70 , 041303(R) (2004). 7\n\n- 70 , 041303(R) (2004). 7 E. I. Rashba, Phys. Rev. B 70 , 201309(R) (2004). 8\n\n- E. I. Rashba, Phys. Rev. B 70 , 201309(R) (2004). 8 B. K. Nikolic, S. Souma, L. P. Zrbo, and J. Sinova, Phys. Rev. Lett. 95 , 046601 (2005). 9\n\n- Lett. 95 , 046601 (2005). 9 C. P. Moca and D. C. Marinescu, Phys. Rev. B 75 , 035325 (2006). 10\n\n- C. P. Moca and D. C. Marinescu, Phys. Rev. B 75 , 035325 (2006). 10 V. A. Zyuzin, P. G. Silvestrov, and E. G. Mishchenko, Phys. Rev. Lett. 99 , 106601 (2007). 11\n\n- Lett. 99 , 106601 (2007). 11 A. Reynoso, G. Usaj, and C. A. Balseiro, Phys. Rev. B 73 , 115342 (2006). 12\n\n- (2006). 12 V. Teodorescu and R. Winkler, Phys. Rev. B 80 , 041311(R) (2009). 13\n\n- (2009). 13 E. B. Sonin, arXiv:0909.3156v1 [cond-mat.mes-hall] (2009). 14\n\n- E. B. Sonin, arXiv:0909.3156v1 [cond-mat.mes-hall] (2009). 14 G. Usaj and C. A. Balseiro, EPL (Europhysics Letters) 72 , 631 (2005). 15\n\n- (2005). 15 J. Yao and Z. Q. Yang, Phys. Rev. B 73 , 033314 (2006). 16\n\n- J. Yao and Z. Q. Yang, Phys. Rev. B 73 , 033314 (2006). 16 Z. Li and Z. Yang, Phys. Rev. B 77 , 205322 (2008). 17\n\n- Z. Li and Z. Yang, Phys. Rev. B 77 , 205322 (2008). 17 K. Hattori and H. Okamoto, Phys. Rev. B 74 , 155321 (2006). 18\n\n- K. Hattori and H. Okamoto, Phys. Rev. B 74 , 155321 (2006). 18 Y. Xing, Q. F. Sun, L. Tang, and J. P. Hu, Phys. Rev. B 74 , 155313 (2006). 19\n\n- (2006). 19 S. Bellucci and P. Onorato, Phys. Rev. B 73 , 045329 (2006).\n\n- 20 S. Bellucci and P. Onorato, Phys. Rev. B 75 , 235326 (2007). 21\n\n- S. Bellucci and P. Onorato, Phys. Rev. B 75 , 235326 (2007). 21 Y. Jiang and L. Hu, Phys. Rev. B 74 , 075302 (2006). 22\n\n- Y. Jiang and L. Hu, Phys. Rev. B 74 , 075302 (2006). 22 P. Bokes, F. Corsetti, and R. W. Godby, Phys. Rev. Lett. 101 , 046402 (2008). 23\n\n- 046402 (2008). 23 P. Debray, J. Wan, S. M. S. Rahman, R. S. Newrock, M. Cahay, A. T. Ngo, S. E. Ulloa, S. T. Herbert, M. Muhammad, and M. Johnson, arXiv:0901.2185v1 [cond-mat.mes-hall] (2009). 24\n\n- Johnson, arXiv:0901.2185v1 [cond-mat.mes-hall] (2009). 24 J. J. Krich and B. I. Halperin, Physical Review B (Condensed Matter and Materials Physics) 78 , 035338 (2008). 25\n\n- Matter and Materials Physics) 78 , 035338 (2008). 25 T. Yokoyama and M. Eto, Physical Review B (Condensed Matter and Materials Physics) 80 , 125311 (2009). 26\n\n- and Materials Physics) 80 , 125311 (2009). 26 H. A. Engel, E. I. Rashba, and B. I. Halperin, Phys. Rev. Lett. 95 , 166605 (2005). 27\n\n- 166605 (2005). 27 R. Winkler, Spin-Orbit Coupling Effects in Two-Dimensional Electron and Hole System (Springer, New York, 2003). 28\n\n- Electron and Hole System (Springer, New York, 2003). 28 P. Bokes and R. W. Godby, Phys. Rev. B 68 , 125414 (2003). 29\n\n- P. Bokes and R. W. Godby, Phys. Rev. B 68 , 125414 (2003). 29 P. Bokes, H. Mera, and R. W. Godby, Phys. Rev. B 72 , 165425 (2005). 30\n\n- (2005). 30 J. Rech, T. Micklitz, and K. A. Matveev, Phys. Rev. Lett. 102 , 116402 (2009). 31\n\n- 116402 (2009). 31 A. Liebsch, Electornic excitations at metal surfaces (Plenum Press, New York, 1997). 32\n\n- Press, New York, 1997). 32 H. Mera, P. Bokes, and R. W. Godby, Phys. Rev. B 72 , 085311 (2005). 33\n\n- (2005). 33 We will use effective atomic units; the distances are measured in multiplies of the effective Bohr radius, a ∗ $_{B}$= ε r m$_{ef}$ = 9 . 79nm, energy in the effective Hartrees, Ha ∗ = m$_{ef}$ ε 2 r Ha = 11 . 9meV, both numerical values are given for GaAs where m ∗ $_{e}$= 0 . 067 m$_{e}$ and ε $_{r}$= 12 . 4 are the effective mass of the electron and the relative permittivity." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4531818310714685, + "doc_id": "5e2ca33af550840422fbca37dabea19d52ad701da74cfff00bf4bba9e14e4748", + "edit_distance": 0.6503957783641161, + "f1_score": 0.8455988455988457, + "meteor": 0.4064164524313727, + "precision": 0.9099378881987578, + "pred_md": "FIG. 1: (Color online) The edge's confinement potential of depth ∆ V leads, via the SO coupling (Eq. 3) to attractive potential ( V SO , ↓ , in green) for electrons with spin down in the vicinity of the edge. The initially compensated spins of electrons approaching the edge becomes locally un-compensated due to the difference in the scattering shift l a .\n\nFIG. 1: (Color online) The edge's confinement potential of depth ∆ V leads, via the SO coupling (Eq. 3) to attractive potential ( V SO , ↓ , in green) for electrons with spin down in the vicinity of the edge. The initially compensated spins of electrons approaching the edge becomes locally un-compensated due to the difference in the scattering shift l a .\n\nwavepacket will give rise to nonzero contributions (the reflected part will be extremely small due to the quickly oscillating factors) and the wavepacket will be approaching the edge (Fig. 1, moving to the left). On the other hand, for large positive times only the reflected wave will give nonzero contribution. The position and form of the reflected wavepacket will depend on the spin of the incoming wavepacket since the reflection amplitude, r q , σ ( k ) will be different for the two possible spin orientations. Specifically, it is shown in the Appendix A that the reflection amplitude has the form r q , σ ( k ) = e i θ q , σ k\n\nwhere the phase shift up to 3rd order in α E is\n\n\n\nwhere κ = √ 2 ∆ V -k 2 . Assuming the width ∆ k of the wavepacket ψ q , σ k , ∆ k ( ) t small, one can easily find that the probability density of the reflected wavepackets with the phase-shift given by Eq. 5 for large times will take a form\n\n\n\nwhere x t ( ) = x + d θ q , σ / dk -kt , i.e. the maximum of the probability is at x = kt -d θ q , σ / dk . From this it is evident that the electron with spin down will be lagging behind that with spin up by a distance 2 l a = d θ q , ↑ / dk -d θ q , ↓ / dk (indicated for the reflected right-going wavepackets in Fig. 1). This behavior of the scattering of single electron in the wavepacket can be directly extended to many-electrons in view of the stroboscopic wavepacket basis 22 . Namely, the above wavepackets for times t m = + t 2 π m / ( k ∆ k ) , m = 0 , ± 1 , ± 2 , ... , where t is arbitrary moment of physical time, form orthogonal set of states which are all occupied with electrons. Hence the product of the length 2 l a times the number of electrons per area must give an estimate of the spin-polarization per unit length\n\n3\n\nof the edge, as given in our previous work. Here we will show that this physically motivated estimate is in fact a rigorous result that we formally prove in the following, directly using the eigenstates of the Hamiltonian of the studied system.\n\nThe spin polarization per unit length of the edge is given in terms of the spin-resolved density as\n\n\n\nwhere the integration in q and k goes over all the occupied eigenstates and n k q , σ ( x ) is the contribution to the density at position x y , from an occupied eigenstate\n\n\n\nSince the spatial shift l q , σ is very small (given by the strength of the SO interaction), we can approximate the expression for the spin density to the first order\n\n\n\n∣ where we have interchanged the differentiation in view of the functional dependence of the density, Eq. 8 on x and l q , σ . Hence, using Eq. 7 and Eq. 10 we obtain for the spin polarization\n\n\n\n\n\nwhere we have introduced the antisymmetric part of the spatial shift\n\n\n\nThe density at x = -∞ is exponentially small, where as the contribution in the bulk of the 2DEG is according to Eq. 8 equal to 2.\n\nIncluding higher order terms in Eq. 10 would result in appearance of contributions with higher spatial derivatives of the density at x = ± ∞ . There, however, is the density constant (either zero for x = -∞ or the homogeneous 2DEG value for x = + ∞ ) so that the expression for the spin polarization, Eq. 11 is correct also for large values of l q , σ in principle.\n\nTo complete the derivation we need to integrate over the occupied states. The simplest way is to assume that the nonequilibrium distribution is well described by a Fermi sphere with the radius (Fermi momentum) kF and the corresponding Fermi energy EF = k 2 F / 2 in 2D, shifted by a drift momentum qd in the + y direction. Such a model corresponds to the distribution function maximizing the information entropy for a fixed average energy, density and current 28,29 , and is also supported by Boltzmann-equation based analysis 30 . In the Appendix B we discuss the results obtained using the non-equilibrium model with two Fermi energies, conventional", + "recall": 0.7897574123989218, + "true_md": "of the edge, as given in our previous work. Here we will show that this physically motivated estimate is in fact a rigorous re- sult that we formally prove in the following, directly using the eigenstates of the Hamiltonian of the studied system.\n\nThe spin polarization per unit length of the edge is given in terms of the spin-resolved density as\n\n3\n\nFIG. 1: (Color online) The edge’s confinement potential of de pth Δ V leads, via the SO coupling (Eq. 3) to attractive potential ( V SO , ↓ , in green) for electrons with spin down in the vicinity of the edge. The initially compensated spins of electrons approaching the edge be- comes locally un-compensated due to the difference in the scattering shift l$^{a}$.\n\nwavepacket will give rise to nonzero contributions (the re- flected part will be extremely small due to the quickly oscill at- ing factors) and the wavepacket will be approaching the edge (Fig. 1, moving to the left). On the other hand, for large posi- tive times only the reflected wave will give nonzero contribu - tion. The position and form of the reflected wavepacket will depend on the spin of the incoming wavepacket since the re- flection amplitude, r q , σ ( k ) will be different for the two possi- ble spin orientations. Specifically, it is shown in the Appen dix A that the reflection amplitude has the form r q , σ ( k ) = e i θ q , σ k where the phase shift up to 3rd order in α E is\n\nwhere κ = √$_{2}$ Δ V − k $^{2}$. Assuming the width Δ k of the wavepacket ψ q , σ k , Δ $_{k}$( t ) small, one can easily find that the proba- bility density of the reflected wavepackets with the phase-s hift given by Eq. 5 for large times will take a form\n\nwhere x ( t ) = x + d θ q , σ / dk − kt , i.e. the maximum of the prob- ability is at x = kt − d θ q , σ / dk . From this it is evident that the electron with spin down will be lagging behind that with spin up by a distance 2 l a = d θ q , ↑ / dk − d θ q , ↓ / dk (indicated for the reflected right-going wavepackets in Fig. 1). This be - havior of the scattering of single electron in the wavepacket can be directly extended to many-electrons in view of the stro- boscopic wavepacket basis$^{22}$. Namely, the above wavepack- ets for times t$_{m}$ = t + 2 π m / ( k Δ k ) , m = 0 , ± 1 , ± 2 , ... , where t is arbitrary moment of physical time, form orthogonal set of states which are all occupied with electrons. Hence the prod- uct of the length 2 l a times the number of electrons per area must give an estimate of the spin-polarization per unit length\n\nTo complete the derivation we need to integrate over the occupied states. The simplest way is to assume that the non- equilibrium distribution is well described by a Fermi sphere with the radius (Fermi momentum) k$_{F}$ and the correspond- ing Fermi energy E$_{F}$ = k 2 $_{F}$/ 2 in 2D, shifted by a drift mo- mentum q$_{d}$ in the + y direction. Such a model corresponds to the distribution function maximizing the information en- tropy for a fixed average energy, density and current $^{28,29}$, and is also supported by Boltzmann-equation based analysis$^{30}$. In the Appendix B we discuss the results obtained using the non-equilibrium model with two Fermi energies, conventional\n\nIncluding higher order terms in Eq. 10 would result in ap- pearance of contributions with higher spatial derivatives of the density at x = ± ∞ . There, however, is the density con- stant (either zero for x = − ∞ or the homogeneous 2DEG value for x = + ∞ ) so that the expression for the spin polarization, Eq. 11 is correct also for large values of l q , σ in principle.\n\nThe density at x = − ∞ is exponentially small, where as the contribution in the bulk of the 2DEG is according to Eq. 8 equal to 2.\n\n∣$^{x}$$^{=+}$$^{∞}$ where we have introduced the antisymmetric part of the spa- tial shift\n\nwhere we have interchanged the differentiation in view of the functional dependence of the density, Eq. 8 on x and l q , σ . Hence, using Eq. 7 and Eq. 10 we obtain for the spin polariza- tion\n\n∣ ∣$^{2}$ (8) Since the spatial shift l q , σ is very small (given by the strength of the SO interaction), we can approximate the expression for the spin density to the first order\n\nwhere the integration in q and k goes over all the occupied eigenstates and n k , q σ ( x ) is the contribution to the density at po- sition x , y from an occupied eigenstate\n\n$$m$_{z}$ = ∫ + ∞ − ∞ dx ∫ dq 2 π ∫ dk 2 π ( n k , q ↑ ( x ) − n k , q ↓ ( x )) , (7)$$\n\n$$n k , q σ ( x ) = ∣ e iqy ( e − $^{ikx}$+ r q , σ ( k ) e ikx )∣ ∣ ∣$^{2}$ = 2 + 2 ℜ { e i ( 2 kx + kl q , σ ) } . (8) Since the spatial shift l q , σ is very small (given by the strength$$\n\n$$n k , q σ ( x ) = n k , q σ ( x ) ∣ l = $_{0}$+ d dl n k , q σ ( x ) ∣ l = 0 l q , σ , (9) = n k , q σ ( x ) ∣ l = $_{0}$+ 1 2 d dx n k , q σ ( x ) ∣ l = 0 l q , σ (10)$$\n\n$$m$_{z}$ = ∫ dq 2 π ∫ dk 2 π n k , q ↑ ( x ) ∣ ∣$^{x}$$^{=+}$$^{∞}$ x = − ∞ l q $_{a}$, (11) where we have introduced the antisymmetric part of the spa-$$\n\n$$l q a = θ q , ↑ − θ q , ↓ 2 k = − 2 α $_{E}$q − 4 α 3 $_{E}$q $^{3}$( Δ V − 2 3 k $^{2}$) . (12)$$\n\n$$θ q , ↑ / ↓ k = π + 2atan k κ ∓ 2 k α $_{E}$q + 2 k κ α 2 $_{E}$q 2 ∓ 4 α 3 $_{E}$q $^{3}$k ( Δ V − 2 3 k $^{2}$) , (5)$$\n\n$$| ψ q , σ k , Δ $_{k}$( t ) | 2 ≈ 1 π sin $^{2}$( x ( t ) Δ k / 2 ) x ( t ) 2 Δ k / 2 (6)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7994139381646911, + "doc_id": "aa5ddbeb5fbe69ee09442a9949a086348d29d9e353f361ff7e2ad16c77d2d017", + "edit_distance": 0.7128975265017667, + "f1_score": 0.9101796407185627, + "meteor": 0.7259562618890134, + "precision": 0.9359605911330049, + "pred_md": "arXiv:1001.2028v2 [cond-mat.quant-gas] 11 Jun 2010\n\nCreffield and Sols Reply: Benenti et al. [1] assert that in our Letter [2] we claimed that the ratchet current we observed for time-symmetric driving would persist indefinitely. Their assertion is false. In our Letter we clearly indicated that, in general, the ratchet currents would be transient, and indeed wrote that we estimated them only to be 'stable over time scales ... of the order of 50 driving periods'. Unfortunately Benenti et al. appear not to have read our paper with sufficient care to have noted our discussion of this point, since we did not claim, or even imply, that the ratchet currents would be of infinite duration.\n\nTo arrive at our estimate for the stability of the current, we used a technique developed in Ref. 3 to estimate the Ehrenfest time of the system. In our study we considered a completely coherent time evolution, and accordingly the current is given by a coherent sum\n\n\n\nwhere c n are expansion coefficients in the Floquet basis, /epsilon1 n are the quasienergies, | φ m ( ) t 〉 are the Floquet states, and p x is the standard momentum operator. It is important to note the off-diagonal interference terms exp[ it ( /epsilon1 n -/epsilon1 m )]. If the system were strongly chaotic, level repulsion would imply that the quasienergy separations are generally large, and so these interferences would rapidly average to zero. This yields the approximate formula given in Eq. 1 of Ref. 1, in which solely the diagonal terms of the current are retained, collapsing the coherent sum to an incoherent one. This strong chaoticity would correspond to a short Ehrenfest time, and so our analysis would similarly predict a short time scale for the stability of the ratchet current.\n\nWhen the quasienergy spectrum contains degeneracies the corresponding interference terms in Eq. 1 will not decay (for exact degeneracies), or will only decay extremely slowly (when the degeneracy is approximate). Although the analysis of Benenti et al. cannot describe this situation, our approach would simply yield a longer Ehrenfest time, indicating the enhanced stability of the current. Such a quasidegeneracy is actually present (see Fig. 1) in the numerical results presented in the Comment. For a value of the asymmetry parameter α = 0 32, a very nar-. row avoided crossing appears, producing the long-lived current plotted in the inset on Fig. 1 of Ref. 1. The conclusion of Benenti et al. that 'no asymptotic directed transport occurs for any value of K' is thus not generally correct it depends on the detailed form of the quasienergy spectrum.\n\nBenenti et al. correctly note that 'the stroboscopic current... remains finite forever'. We do not dispute this point, but it is irrelevant. This would be an issue only if we had attempted to deduce the time scale for the decay of the current by making a fit of the time-dependence of\n\n1\n\n/negationslash\n\nthe stroboscopically averaged current. As we emphasise above, this was not our procedure. Even making use of the continuous time-average proposed by Benenti et al. , in place of the more experimentally-relevant stroboscopic average plotted in Fig. 3 of Ref. 2, the conclusions of our Letter would be unaffected. In Fig. 2 we show the decay rates of the continuously-averaged current, which clearly show that even for time-symmetric driving, significant ratchet currents are produced over timescales that are very long in comparison to typical experimental observation times [4]. Although the interacting case ( g = 0) is not amenable to Floquet analysis, very similar results are numerically obtained for the values of nonlinearity considered in Fig. 3 of Ref. 2.\n\nBenenti et al. further attempt to support their case by considering the behavior of the harmonic oscillator. This example is trivial; it is not even periodically-driven. A more telling comparison would be with the phenomenon of dynamical localization [5]. Here a particle on a lattice, subjected to a driving potential, periodically expands and collapses when the parameters of the driving are adjusted to certain specific ratios. Viewed stroboscopically the particle appears to be frozen. The purely stroboscopic character of this phenomenon does not prevent it from being a genuine physical effect, as reflected in the name 'dynamical localization'.\n\nIn summary, in our Letter we never claimed that for time-symmetric driving a ratchet current would last forever (although in the present Reply we point out that it could be possible if exact quasienergy degeneracies existed). A stroboscopic simulation may indeed overestimate the decay time of the ratchet current. However, our decay estimate was based on general quantum chaos theory arguments. Moreover, even a continuously timeaveraged current may exhibit ratchet behavior for times longer than present experimental times. The conclusions of our Letter thus remain unaffected.\n\n## C.E. Creffield and F. Sols\n\nDpto de F' ısica de Materiales Universidad Complutense de Madrid E-28040 Madrid\n\nSpain\n\n- [1] G. Benenti, et al. , Phys. Rev. Lett. 104 , 228901 (2010).\n- [2] C.E. Creffield and F. Sols, Phys. Rev. Lett. 103 , 200601 (2009).\n- [3] J. Martin, B. Georgeot, and D L. Shepelyansky, Phys. Rev. Lett. 101 , 074102 (2008).", + "recall": 0.8857808857808858, + "true_md": "1\n\narXiv:1001.2028v2 [cond-mat.quant-gas] 11 Jun 2010\n\nCreffield and Sols Reply: Benenti et al. [1] assert that in our Letter [2] we claimed that the ratchet current we observed for time-symmetric driving would persist indef- initely. Their assertion is false. In our Letter we clearly indicated that, in general, the ratchet currents would be transient, and indeed wrote that we estimated them only to be “stable over time scales ... of the order of 50 driv- ing periods”. Unfortunately Benenti et al. appear not to have read our paper with sufficient care to have noted our discussion of this point, since we did not claim, or even imply, that the ratchet currents would be of infinite duration.\n\nthe stroboscopically averaged current. As we emphasise above, this was not our procedure. Even making use of the continuous time-average proposed by Benenti et al. , in place of the more experimentally-relevant stroboscopic average plotted in Fig. 3 of Ref. 2, the conclusions of our Letter would be unaffected. In Fig. 2 we show the decay rates of the continuously-averaged current, which clearly show that even for time-symmetric driving, significant ratchet currents are produced over timescales that are very long in comparison to typical experimental obser- vation times [4]. Although the interacting case ( g ̸ = 0) is not amenable to Floquet analysis, very similar results are numerically obtained for the values of nonlinearity considered in Fig. 3 of Ref. 2.\n\nTo arrive at our estimate for the stability of the cur- rent, we used a technique developed in Ref. 3 to esti- mate the Ehrenfest time of the system. In our study we considered a completely coherent time evolution, and accordingly the current is given by a coherent sum\n\nBenenti et al. further attempt to support their case by considering the behavior of the harmonic oscillator. This example is trivial; it is not even periodically-driven. A more telling comparison would be with the phenomenon of dynamical localization [5]. Here a particle on a lattice, subjected to a driving potential, periodically expands and collapses when the parameters of the driving are adjusted to certain specific ratios. Viewed stroboscopically the particle appears to be frozen. The purely stroboscopic character of this phenomenon does not prevent it from being a genuine physical effect, as reflected in the name “dynamical localization”.\n\nwhere c$_{n}$ are expansion coefficients in the Floquet ba- sis, ϵ$_{n}$ are the quasienergies, | φ$_{m}$ ( t ) 〉 are the Floquet states, and p$_{x}$ is the standard momentum operator. It is important to note the off-diagonal interference terms exp [ it ( ϵ$_{n}$ − ϵ$_{m}$ )]. If the system were strongly chaotic, level repulsion would imply that the quasienergy separa- tions are generally large, and so these interferences would rapidly average to zero. This yields the approximate for- mula given in Eq. 1 of Ref. 1, in which solely the diagonal terms of the current are retained, collapsing the coherent sum to an incoherent one. This strong chaoticity would correspond to a short Ehrenfest time, and so our analysis would similarly predict a short time scale for the stability of the ratchet current.\n\nIn summary, in our Letter we never claimed that for time-symmetric driving a ratchet current would last for- ever (although in the present Reply we point out that it could be possible if exact quasienergy degeneracies ex- isted). A stroboscopic simulation may indeed overesti- mate the decay time of the ratchet current. However, our decay estimate was based on general quantum chaos theory arguments. Moreover, even a continuously time- averaged current may exhibit ratchet behavior for times longer than present experimental times. The conclusions of our Letter thus remain unaffected.\n\nC.E. Creffield and F. Sols\n\nWhen the quasienergy spectrum contains degeneracies the corresponding interference terms in Eq. 1 will not de- cay (for exact degeneracies), or will only decay extremely slowly (when the degeneracy is approximate). Although the analysis of Benenti et al. cannot describe this situa- tion, our approach would simply yield a longer Ehrenfest time, indicating the enhanced stability of the current. Such a quasidegeneracy is actually present (see Fig. 1) in the numerical results presented in the Comment. For a value of the asymmetry parameter α = 0 . 32, a very nar- row avoided crossing appears, producing the long-lived current plotted in the inset on Fig. 1 of Ref. 1. The conclusion of Benenti et al. that “no asymptotic directed transport occurs for any value of K” is thus not gen- erally correct – it depends on the detailed form of the quasienergy spectrum.\n\nDpto de F´ısica de Materiales Universidad Complutense de Madrid E-28040 Madrid Spain\n\nBenenti et al. correctly note that “the stroboscopic current... remains finite forever”. We do not dispute this point, but it is irrelevant. This would be an issue only if we had attempted to deduce the time scale for the decay of the current by making a fit of the time-dependence of\n\n$$I ( t ) = ∑ m,n c ∗ $_{n}$c$_{m}$ e it ( ϵ n $_{−}$ϵ m ) ∫ 2 π 0 dx 〈 φ$_{n}$ ( t ) | p$_{x}$ | φ$_{m}$ ( t ) 〉 (1)$$\n\n- [1] G. Benenti, et al. , Phys. Rev. Lett. 104 , 228901 (2010).\n\n- [2] C.E. Creffield and F. Sols, Phys. Rev. Lett. 103 , 200601 (2009).\n\n- [3] J. Martin, B. Georgeot, and D L. Shepelyansky, Phys. Rev. Lett. 101 , 074102 (2008)." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.762487579527232, + "doc_id": "c191a8aceb557210c802338c31d7a693113417a22153e1353837b4a8b7a19b2f", + "edit_distance": 0.7327690447400241, + "f1_score": 0.9470338983050848, + "meteor": 0.5587620431231136, + "precision": 0.9717391304347827, + "pred_md": "samples 15 , the projected Mn 3 d magnetic moments are obtained as -1.4 µ B and +0.8 µ B per ion at remanence and 1000 Oe, respectively.\n\nThe difference between these values can be understood as being due to an interface layer which is strongly antiferromagnetically coupled to the Fe layer. At zero field, both the interfacial and bulk Mn are aligned antiparallel to the Fe layer. At high fields, the bulk of the (Ga,Mn)As layer away from the interface is re-oriented into the external field direction. However, the interfacial Mn remains antiparallel to the Fe layer and thus partially compensates the XMCD signal from the bulk of the (Ga,Mn)As. From the size of the remanent and 1000 Oe magnetic moments, it can be estimated that around 25-30% of the TEY XMCD signal can be ascribed to the interfacial Mn which is strongly coupled to the Fe moments.\n\nThe interfacial Mn moments are ascribed to the proximity polarization of the (Ga,Mn)As interface by the Fe layer, such as was shown previously by XMCD as well as ab initio theory . Evidence for this can be observed from 7 measurement of the Mn L 2 3 , XMCD signal at temperatures above the (Ga,Mn)As T C . Similar to the previous study , 7 we observe a small but not negligible signal at room temperature (Fig. 3), with opposite sign to the Fe L 2 3 , XMCD. Its spectral shape is characteristic of a localized electronic configuration close to d 5 , similar to bulk (Ga,Mn)As 7,9,15 but in contrast to Mn in more metallic environments such as Mn x Fe 1 -x 7 or MnAs 16 . A slight broadening is observed on the low energy side of the Mn L 3 peak, which may be due to the different screening induced by proximity to the Fe layer. Since the measured intensity is attenuated with distance z from the surface as I = I 0 exp( -z/λ TEY ), the thickness of the strongly coupled interface layer is estimated to be ∼ 0.7 nm or 2-3\n\n1 T. Jungwirth, W. A. Atkinson, B. H. Lee, and A. H. MacDonald, Phys. Rev. B 59 , 9818 (1999); P. Sankowski and P. Kacman, Phys. Rev. B 71 , 201303(R) (2005); A. D. Giddings, T. Jungwirth, and B. L. Gallagher, Phys. Rev. B 78 , 165312 (2008); K. Szalowski and T. Balcerzak, Phys. Rev. B 79 , 214430 (2009).\n\n- 2 J.-H. Chung, S. J. Chung, S. Lee, B. J. Kirby, J. A. Borchers, Y. J. Cho, X. Liu, and J. K. Furdyna, Phys. Rev. Lett. 101 , 237202 (2008).\n- 3 M. Wang, R. P. Campion, A. W. Rushforth, K. W. Edmonds, C. T. Foxon, and R. P. Campion, Appl. Phys. Lett. 93 , 132103 (2008).\n- 4 M. Zhu, M. J. Wilson, B. L. Sheu, P. Mitra, P. Schiffer, and N. Samarth, Appl. Phys. Lett. 91 , 192503 (2007); M. Zhu, M. J. Wilson, P. Mitra, P. Schiffer, and N. Samarth, Phys. Rev. B 78 , 195307 (2008).\n- 5 S. Mark, C. Gould, K. Pappert, J. Wenisch, K. Brunner, G. Schmidt, and L. W. Molenkamp, Phys. Rev. Lett. 103 , 017204 (2009).\n- 6 G. Wastlbauer and J.A.C. Bland, Adv. Phys. 54 , 137 (2005).\n- 7 F. Maccherozzi, M. Sperl, G. Panaccione, J. Minar, S.\n\n3\n\nmonolayers, assuming a uniform distribution of Mn ions and magnetic moments throughout the (Ga,Mn)As film. This is around a factor of three thinner than in Ref. 7 , which could be due to the lower Mn concentration or the different preparation method of the present samples.\n\nIn summary, we have demonstrated antiferromagnetic coupling between Fe and (Ga,Mn)As layers in bilayer structures. A markedly different coupling is observed for the bulk of the (Ga,Mn)As layer and for Mn moments in the near-interface region. A thickness-dependent exchange bias field is observed to affect the whole of the bulk (Ga,Mn)As layer, which aligns antiparallel to the Fe layer at low fields, and switches to parallel when the external field is large enough to overcome the bias field and the magnetocrystalline anisotropy fields. In contrast, the interfacial Mn moments remain aligned antiparallel to the Fe layer even at 20 kOe, the largest field studied, and are polarized at temperatures well above the T C of the bulk (Ga,Mn)As layer. The latter observation confirms the recently reported result of Ref. 7, in which the Fe/(Ga,Mn)As bilayers were produced by a different method but showed qualitatively similar behavior of the interfacial moments. Our results shed new light on the magnetic coupling in Fe/(Ga,Mn)As hybrid layers which are of potential interest for room temperature spintronics, and also offer a means of controlling the spin orientation in a FM semiconductor.\n\nWe acknowledge support from EU grants SemiSpinNet-215368 and NAMASTE-214499, and STFC studentship grant CMPC07100. The Advanced Light Source is supported by the U.S. Department of Energy under Contract No. DE-AC02-05CH11231. We thank Leigh Shelford for help during the Diamond beamtime.\n\n- Polesya, H. Ebert, U. Wurstbauer, M. Hochstrasser, G. Rossi, G. Woltersdorf, W. Wegscheider, and C. H. Back, Phys. Rev. Lett. 101 , 267201 (2008).\n- 8 R. P. Campion, K. W. Edmonds, L. X. Zhao, K. Y. Wang, C. T. Foxon, B. L. Gallagher, and C. R. Staddon, J. Crystal Growth 247 , 42 (2003).\n- 9 F. Maccherozzi, G. Panaccione, G. Rossi, M. Hochstrasser, M. Sperl, M. Reinwald, G. Woltersdorf, W. Wegscheider, and C. H. Back, Phys. Rev. B 74 , 104421 (2006).\n- 10 Ch. Binek, S. Polisetty, X. He and A. Berger, Phys. Rev. Lett. 96 , 067201 (2006).\n- 11 C. Won, Y.Z. Wu, E. Arenholz, J. Choi, J. Wu, and Z. Q. Qiu, Phys. Rev. Lett. 99 , 077203 (2007).\n- 12 J. Nogues and I. K. Schuller, J. Magn. Magn. Mater. 192 , 203 (1999).\n- 13 K. F. Eid, M. B. Stone, K. C. Ku, O. Maksimov, P. Schiffer, N. Samarth, T. C. Shih and C. J. Palmstrom, Appl. Phys. Lett. 85 , 1556 (2004).\n- 14 B. T. Thole, P. Carra, F. Sette, and G. van der Laan, Phys. Rev. Lett. 68 , 1943 (1992); P. Carra, B. T. Thole, M. Altarelli, and X. Wang, Phys. Rev. Lett. 70 , 694 (1993).\n- 15 T. Jungwirth, J. Masek, K. Y. Wang, K. W. Edmonds,", + "recall": 0.9235537190082644, + "true_md": "monolayers, assuming a uniform distribution of Mn ions and magnetic moments throughout the (Ga,Mn)As film. This is around a factor of three thinner than in Ref. $^{7}$, which could be due to the lower Mn concentration or the different preparation method of the present samples.\n\nsamples $^{15}$, the projected Mn 3 d magnetic moments are obtained as − 1.4 µ$_{B}$ and +0.8 µ$_{B}$ per ion at remanence and 1000 Oe, respectively.\n\n3\n\nThe difference between these values can be understood as being due to an interface layer which is strongly anti- ferromagnetically coupled to the Fe layer. At zero field, both the interfacial and bulk Mn are aligned antiparallel to the Fe layer. At high fields, the bulk of the (Ga,Mn)As layer away from the interface is re-oriented into the exter- nal field direction. However, the interfacial Mn remains antiparallel to the Fe layer and thus partially compen- sates the XMCD signal from the bulk of the (Ga,Mn)As. From the size of the remanent and 1000 Oe magnetic moments, it can be estimated that around 25-30% of the TEY XMCD signal can be ascribed to the interfacial Mn which is strongly coupled to the Fe moments.\n\nIn summary, we have demonstrated antiferromagnetic coupling between Fe and (Ga,Mn)As layers in bilayer structures. A markedly different coupling is observed for the bulk of the (Ga,Mn)As layer and for Mn moments in the near-interface region. A thickness-dependent ex- change bias field is observed to affect the whole of the bulk (Ga,Mn)As layer, which aligns antiparallel to the Fe layer at low fields, and switches to parallel when the external field is large enough to overcome the bias field and the magnetocrystalline anisotropy fields. In contrast, the interfacial Mn moments remain aligned antiparallel to the Fe layer even at 20 kOe, the largest field studied, and are polarized at temperatures well above the T$_{C}$ of the bulk (Ga,Mn)As layer. The latter observation con- firms the recently reported result of Ref. 7, in which the Fe/(Ga,Mn)As bilayers were produced by a different method but showed qualitatively similar behavior of the interfacial moments. Our results shed new light on the magnetic coupling in Fe/(Ga,Mn)As hybrid layers which are of potential interest for room temperature spintron- ics, and also offer a means of controlling the spin orien- tation in a FM semiconductor.\n\nThe interfacial Mn moments are ascribed to the prox- imity polarization of the (Ga,Mn)As interface by the Fe layer, such as was shown previously by XMCD as well as ab initio theory $^{7}$. Evidence for this can be observed from measurement of the Mn L$_{2}$$\\_{,}$$_{3}$ XMCD signal at tempera- tures above the (Ga,Mn)As T$_{C}$ . Similar to the previous study $^{7}$, we observe a small but not negligible signal at room temperature (Fig. 3), with opposite sign to the Fe L$_{2}$$\\_{,}$$_{3}$ XMCD. Its spectral shape is characteristic of a local- ized electronic configuration close to d $^{5}$, similar to bulk (Ga,Mn)As 7,9,15 but in contrast to Mn in more metallic environments such as Mn$_{x}$Fe$_{1}$$\\_{−}$$_{x}$ 7 or MnAs $^{16}$. A slight broadening is observed on the low energy side of the Mn L$_{3}$ peak, which may be due to the different screening in- duced by proximity to the Fe layer. Since the measured intensity is attenuated with distance z from the surface as I = I$_{0}$ exp( − z/λ$_{TEY}$ ), the thickness of the strongly coupled interface layer is estimated to be ∼ 0.7 nm or 2-3\n\nWe acknowledge support from EU grants SemiSpinNet-215368 and NAMASTE-214499, and STFC studentship grant CMPC07100. The Advanced Light Source is supported by the U.S. Department of Energy under Contract No. DE-AC02-05CH11231. We thank Leigh Shelford for help during the Diamond beamtime.\n\n- M. Altarelli, and X. Wang, Phys. Rev. Lett. , 694 (1993). 15 T. Jungwirth, J. Masek, K. Y. Wang, K. W. Edmonds,\n\n- Lett. , 1556 (2004). 14 B. T. Thole, P. Carra, F. Sette, and G. van der Laan, Phys. Rev. Lett. 68 , 1943 (1992); P. Carra, B. T. Thole, M. Altarelli, and X. Wang, Phys. Rev. Lett. 70 , 694 (1993). 15\n\n- 203 (1999). 13 K. F. Eid, M. B. Stone, K. C. Ku, O. Maksimov, P. Schiffer, N. Samarth, T. C. Shih and C. J. Palmstrom, Appl. Phys. Lett. 85 , 1556 (2004). 14\n\n- Qiu, Phys. Rev. Lett. , 077203 (2007). 12 J. Nogues and I. K. Schuller, J. Magn. Magn. Mater. 192 , 203 (1999). 13\n\n- Lett. , 067201 (2006). 11 C. Won, Y.Z. Wu, E. Arenholz, J. Choi, J. Wu, and Z. Q. Qiu, Phys. Rev. Lett. 99 , 077203 (2007). 12\n\n- and C. H. Back, Phys. Rev. B , 104421 (2006). 10 Ch. Binek, S. Polisetty, X. He and A. Berger, Phys. Rev. Lett. 96 , 067201 (2006). 11\n\n- tal Growth , 42 (2003). 9 F. Maccherozzi, G. Panaccione, G. Rossi, M. Hochstrasser, M. Sperl, M. Reinwald, G. Woltersdorf, W. Wegscheider, and C. H. Back, Phys. Rev. B 74 , 104421 (2006). 10\n\n- Phys. Rev. Lett. , 267201 (2008). 8 R. P. Campion, K. W. Edmonds, L. X. Zhao, K. Y. Wang, C. T. Foxon, B. L. Gallagher, and C. R. Staddon, J. Crys- tal Growth 247 , 42 (2003). 9\n\n- 1 T. Jungwirth, W. A. Atkinson, B. H. Lee, and A. H. Mac- Donald, Phys. Rev. B 59 , 9818 (1999); P. Sankowski and P. Kacman, Phys. Rev. B 71 , 201303(R) (2005); A. D. Giddings, T. Jungwirth, and B. L. Gallagher, Phys. Rev. B 78 , 165312 (2008); K. Szalowski and T. Balcerzak, Phys. Rev. B 79 , 214430 (2009). 2\n\n- Rev. B , 214430 (2009). 2 J.-H. Chung, S. J. Chung, S. Lee, B. J. Kirby, J. A. Borchers, Y. J. Cho, X. Liu, and J. K. Furdyna, Phys. Rev. Lett. 101 , 237202 (2008). 3\n\n- Rev. Lett. , 237202 (2008). 3 M. Wang, R. P. Campion, A. W. Rushforth, K. W. Ed- monds, C. T. Foxon, and R. P. Campion, Appl. Phys. Lett. 93 , 132103 (2008). 4\n\n- , 132103 (2008). 4 M. Zhu, M. J. Wilson, B. L. Sheu, P. Mitra, P. Schiffer, and N. Samarth, Appl. Phys. Lett. 91 , 192503 (2007); M. Zhu, M. J. Wilson, P. Mitra, P. Schiffer, and N. Samarth, Phys. Rev. B 78 , 195307 (2008). 5\n\n- Phys. Rev. B , 195307 (2008). 5 S. Mark, C. Gould, K. Pappert, J. Wenisch, K. Brunner, G. Schmidt, and L. W. Molenkamp, Phys. Rev. Lett. 103 , 017204 (2009). 6\n\n- 017204 (2009). 6 G. Wastlbauer and J.A.C. Bland, Adv. Phys. 54 , 137 (2005). 7\n\n- (2005). 7 F. Maccherozzi, M. Sperl, G. Panaccione, J. Minar, S.\n\nPolesya, H. Ebert, U. Wurstbauer, M. Hochstrasser, G. Rossi, G. Woltersdorf, W. Wegscheider, and C. H. Back, Phys. Rev. Lett. 101 , 267201 (2008)." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8367004162149331, + "doc_id": "f7fafbda63a4134485ef0546a2608eb096f9eb12f7886db2092e0ca289419e06", + "edit_distance": 0.6799637352674524, + "f1_score": 0.8904109589041096, + "meteor": 0.6968015195825049, + "precision": 0.9365994236311239, + "pred_md": "nels [27], transpose-depolarizing channels [28], shifted depolarizing channels [29], cloning channels [30], and the so-called 'Unruh' channel [30]. Researchers have found fewer such exemplary single-letter gems for the quantum capacity: erasure channels [24], degradable channels [31, 32], conjugate degradable channels [33], and amplitude damping channels [34]. We do not yet have a general method for determining whether a given channel's capacity admits a single-letter characterization using known formulas-the techniques for proving singleletterization of the above examples are all ad hoc , varying from case to case. Additionally, we can observe that it is an even rarer gem for a channel to admit a single-letter characterization for both the classical and quantum capacity. This 'single-letter overlap' occurs for erasure channels [24], generalized dephasing channels [31], cloning channels [30, 33], and the Unruh channel [30, 33, 35], but the reasons for single-letterization of the classical and quantum capacities have no obvious connection.\n\nAfter the early work in quantum Shannon theory, several researchers considered how different noiseless resources such as entanglement, classical communication, or quantum communication might trade off against one another together with a noisy channel. The first findings in this direction were those of Bennett et al . [36, 37], who showed that unlimited, shared, noiseless entanglement can boost the classical capacity of a noisy quantum channel, generalizing the super-dense coding effect [38]. Perhaps even more surprising was that the formula for the entanglement-assisted classical capacity gives a single-letter characterization, marking the first time that we could say there is a problem in quantum Shannon theory that we truly understand. Shor then refined this result by considering the classical capacity of a channel assisted by a finite amount of shared entanglement [39]. He calculated a trade-off curve that determines how a sender can optimally trade the consumption of noiseless entanglement with the generation of noiseless classical communication. This trade-off curve also bounds a rate region consisting of rates of entanglement consumption and generated classical communication. Unfortunately, the formulas for the rate region do not give a single-letter characterization in the general case.\n\nShor's result then inspired Devetak and Shor to consider a scenario where a sender exploits a noisy quantum channel to simultaneously transmit both noiseless classical and quantum information [31], a scenario later dubbed 'classically-enhanced quantum coding' [40, 41] after schemes formulated in the theory of quantum error correction [42, 43]. Devetak and Shor provided a multiletter characterization of the classically-enhanced quantum capacity region for general channels, but were able to show that both generalized dephasing channels and erasure channels admit single-letter capacity regions. We must emphasize that single-letterization of both the classical and quantum capacities of a noisy quantum channel does not immediately imply the single-letterization of the\n\n2\n\nclassically-enhanced quantum capacity region (though the latter does imply the former). That is, the proof that the region single-letterizes requires a different technique that has no obvious connection to the techniques used to prove the single-letterization of the individual capacities. The additional benefit of the Devetak-Shor classically-enhanced quantum coding scheme is that it beats a time-sharing strategy [72] for some channels.\n\nWe might say that the above scenarios are a part of the dynamic, double-resource quantum Shannon theory, where a sender can exploit a noisy quantum channel to generate two noiseless resources, or a sender can exploit a noisy quantum channel in addition to a noiseless resource to generate another noiseless resource. This theory culminated with the landmark work of Devetak et al . that provided a multi-letter characterization for virtually every permutation of two resources and a noisy quantum channel which one can consider [44, 45], but they neglected to search for channels with single-letter characterizations of the double-resource capacity regions. Other researchers concurrently considered how noiseless resources might trade off against each other in tasks outside of the dynamic, double-resource quantum Shannon theory, such as quantum compression [46-48], remote state preparation [49, 50], and hybrid quantum memories [51].\n\nThe next natural step in this line of inquiry was to consider the dynamic, triple-resource quantum Shannon theory. Hsieh and Wilde did so by providing a multiletter characterization of an entanglement-assisted quantum channel's ability to transmit both classical and quantum information [40, 41]. In addition, they found that the formulas for a generalized dephasing channel, an erasure channel, and the trivial completely depolarizing channel all give a single-letter triple trade-off capacity region (though they omitted the full proof for the generalized dephasing channels). Thus, these findings provided a complete understanding of the ultimate performance limits of any scheme for entanglement-assisted classical and quantum error correction [42, 43, 52-55], at least for the aforementioned channels. Ref. [40] also constructed a new protocol, dubbed the 'classically-enhanced father protocol,' that outperforms a time-sharing strategy for transmitting both classical and quantum information over an entanglement-assisted quantum channel.\n\nIn this paper, we contribute a class of 'single-letter gems' to the dynamic, triple-resource quantum Shannon theory. We provide single-letter formulas for the triple trade-off capacity region of the Hadamard class of channels. We then compute and plot examples of the triple trade-off regions for the generalized dephasing channels, the cloning channels, and the Unruh channel, all of which are members of the class of Hadamard channels. The generalized dephasing channel represents a natural mechanism for decoherence in physical systems such as superconducting qubits [56], the cloning channel represents a natural process that occurs during stimulated emission [57-59], and the Unruh channel arises", + "recall": 0.8485639686684073, + "true_md": "2\n\nclassically-enhanced quantum capacity region (though the latter does imply the former). That is, the proof that the region single-letterizes requires a different tech- nique that has no obvious connection to the techniques used to prove the single-letterization of the individual capacities. The additional benefit of the Devetak-Shor classically-enhanced quantum coding scheme is that it beats a time-sharing strategy [72] for some channels.\n\nnels [27], transpose-depolarizing channels [28], shifted de- polarizing channels [29], cloning channels [30], and the so-called “Unruh” channel [30]. Researchers have found fewer such exemplary single-letter gems for the quan- tum capacity: erasure channels [24], degradable chan- nels [31, 32], conjugate degradable channels [33], and amplitude damping channels [34]. We do not yet have a general method for determining whether a given chan- nel’s capacity admits a single-letter characterization us- ing known formulas—the techniques for proving single- letterization of the above examples are all ad hoc , vary- ing from case to case. Additionally, we can observe that it is an even rarer gem for a channel to admit a single-letter characterization for both the classical and quantum capacity. This “single-letter overlap” occurs for erasure channels [24], generalized dephasing chan- nels [31], cloning channels [30, 33], and the Unruh chan- nel [30, 33, 35], but the reasons for single-letterization of the classical and quantum capacities have no obvious connection.\n\nWe might say that the above scenarios are a part of the dynamic, double-resource quantum Shannon theory, where a sender can exploit a noisy quantum channel to generate two noiseless resources, or a sender can exploit a noisy quantum channel in addition to a noiseless re- source to generate another noiseless resource. This the- ory culminated with the landmark work of Devetak et al . that provided a multi-letter characterization for vir- tually every permutation of two resources and a noisy quantum channel which one can consider [44, 45], but they neglected to search for channels with single-letter characterizations of the double-resource capacity regions. Other researchers concurrently considered how noiseless resources might trade off against each other in tasks out- side of the dynamic, double-resource quantum Shannon theory, such as quantum compression [46–48], remote state preparation [49, 50], and hybrid quantum memo- ries [51].\n\nAfter the early work in quantum Shannon theory, sev- eral researchers considered how different noiseless re- sources such as entanglement, classical communication, or quantum communication might trade off against one another together with a noisy channel. The first find- ings in this direction were those of Bennett et al . [36, 37], who showed that unlimited, shared, noiseless entangle- ment can boost the classical capacity of a noisy quan- tum channel, generalizing the super-dense coding effect [38]. Perhaps even more surprising was that the formula for the entanglement-assisted classical capacity gives a single-letter characterization, marking the first time that we could say there is a problem in quantum Shannon theory that we truly understand. Shor then refined this result by considering the classical capacity of a channel assisted by a finite amount of shared entanglement [39]. He calculated a trade-off curve that determines how a sender can optimally trade the consumption of noiseless entanglement with the generation of noiseless classical communication. This trade-off curve also bounds a rate region consisting of rates of entanglement consumption and generated classical communication. Unfortunately, the formulas for the rate region do not give a single-letter characterization in the general case.\n\nThe next natural step in this line of inquiry was to consider the dynamic, triple-resource quantum Shannon theory. Hsieh and Wilde did so by providing a multi- letter characterization of an entanglement-assisted quan- tum channel’s ability to transmit both classical and quan- tum information [40, 41]. In addition, they found that the formulas for a generalized dephasing channel, an erasure channel, and the trivial completely depolarizing chan- nel all give a single-letter triple trade-off capacity region (though they omitted the full proof for the generalized de- phasing channels). Thus, these findings provided a com- plete understanding of the ultimate performance limits of any scheme for entanglement-assisted classical and quan- tum error correction [42, 43, 52–55], at least for the afore- mentioned channels. Ref. [40] also constructed a new protocol, dubbed the “classically-enhanced father proto- col,” that outperforms a time-sharing strategy for trans- mitting both classical and quantum information over an entanglement-assisted quantum channel.\n\nShor’s result then inspired Devetak and Shor to con- sider a scenario where a sender exploits a noisy quan- tum channel to simultaneously transmit both noiseless classical and quantum information [31], a scenario later dubbed “classically-enhanced quantum coding” [40, 41] after schemes formulated in the theory of quantum error correction [42, 43]. Devetak and Shor provided a multi- letter characterization of the classically-enhanced quan- tum capacity region for general channels, but were able to show that both generalized dephasing channels and erasure channels admit single-letter capacity regions. We must emphasize that single-letterization of both the clas- sical and quantum capacities of a noisy quantum channel does not immediately imply the single-letterization of the\n\nIn this paper, we contribute a class of “single-letter gems” to the dynamic, triple-resource quantum Shan- non theory. We provide single-letter formulas for the triple trade-off capacity region of the Hadamard class of channels. We then compute and plot examples of the triple trade-off regions for the generalized dephas- ing channels, the cloning channels, and the Unruh chan- nel, all of which are members of the class of Hadamard channels. The generalized dephasing channel represents a natural mechanism for decoherence in physical systems such as superconducting qubits [56], the cloning chan- nel represents a natural process that occurs during stim- ulated emission [57–59], and the Unruh channel arises" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5917286345564365, + "doc_id": "cee8d34029622d2b02edbcd8a5d1dfdd32f3a6e3e2065199cc097115b60a67d3", + "edit_distance": 0.4436917866215072, + "f1_score": 0.8924889543446245, + "meteor": 0.5962891832153586, + "precision": 0.9294478527607362, + "pred_md": "arXiv:1001.0602v2 [physics.class-ph] 20 Mar 2010\n\n## On the locus formed by the maximum heights of projectile motion with air resistance\n\n## H. Hern' andez-Salda˜a n ∗\n\nDepartamento de Ciencias B' asicas, Universidad Aut' onoma Metropolitana-Azcapotzalco, Av. San Pablo 180, M' exico 02200 D.F., Mexico. (Dated: May 5, 2018)\n\nWe present an analysis on the geometrical place formed by the set of maxima of the trajectories of a projectile launched in a media with linear drag. Such a place, the locus of apexes, is written in term of the Lambert W function in polar coordinates, confirming the special role played by this function in the problem. In order to characterize the locus, a study of its curvature is presented in two parameterizations, in terms of the launch angle and in the polar one. The angles of maximum curvature are compared with other important angles in the projectile problem. As an addendum, we find that the synchronous curve in this problem is a circle as in the drag-free case.\n\n## I. INTRODUCTION\n\nAn amazing characteristic of some old fashion problems is their endurement. The projectile motion is one of them. Being one of the main problems used to teach elementary physics, variations and not well known facts about it appear in the physics literature of the XXI century. A search in the web [1] or in the Science Citation Index gives an idea of this fact. Some of the recent studies deal with the problem of air resistance in the projectile motion and its pedagogical character made of it an excellent example to introduce the Lambert W function, a special function.[2] The Lambert W function is involved in many problems of interest for physicist and engineers, from the solution of the jet fuel problem to epidemics[2] or, even, Helium atom eigenfunctions.[3] One of those problems is the solution for the range R in the case that the air resistance has the from /vector f = -mb/vector v .[4, 5]\n\nIn this paper we analyze the not well known fact of the geometrical place formed by the maxima of all the projectile trajectories at launch angle α and in the presence of a drag force proportional to the velocity, we shall denote this locus as C m ( ε ). The resulting locus becomes a Lambert W function of the polar coordinate r θ ( ) departing from the origin. This problem raises as a natural continuation from the nice fact that in the drag-free case such a locus is an ellipse[6-8] with an universal eccentricity e = √ 3 2.[6] /\n\nThe paper is organized as follows. In section II, the set of maxima for projectile trajectories moving under in the presence of air resistance is presented. In section III we find a closed form, in polar coordinates, to express such a geometrical place, C m . In section IV we present a numerical calculation of the curvature of C m using the polar angle and the launch angle as parameterizations. Additionally, we demonstrate that the synchronous curve is a circle as in the drag-free case in section V. In section VI we conclude.\n\n∗ Electronic address: hhs@correo.azc.uam.mx\n\n## II. THE PROJECTILE PROBLEM WITH AIR RESISTANCE\n\nSeveral approximations in order to consider the air resistance exist in the literature, the simplest is the linear case. In such a case the force is given by\n\n\n\nwhere m is the mass of the projectile and b is the drag coefficient. The units of b are s -1 . The velocity components are labeled as /vector v = u ˆ ı + w ˆ , with u = dx/dt and w = dy/dt . The solutions for the position and velocity are obtained trough direct integration of Eq.(1) yielding\n\n\n\n\n\nfor the coordinates, and\n\n\n\n\n\nfor the speeds. We used the initial conditions x (0) = y (0) = 0 and u 0 = V 0 cos α and w 0 = V 0 sin α . Noticing that the terminal speed is g/b in the y axis.\n\nFor the same initial speed V 0 these solutions are function of the launch angle α and the locus formed by the apexes is obtained if time is eliminated between the solutions in time in Eqs. (2) and (3), giving the equation\n\n\n\nand considering the value at the maximum, via dy/dx = 0. The corresponding solution is\n\n\n\n", + "recall": 0.8583569405099151, + "true_md": "# On the locus formed by the maximum heights of projectile motion with air resistance\n\nH. Hern´ andez-Salda˜ na ∗\n\nDepartamento de Ciencias B´ asicas, Universidad Aut´ onoma Metropolitana-Azcapotzalco, Av. San Pablo 180, M´ exico 02200 D.F., Mexico.\n\n(Dated: May 5, 2018)\n\nWe present an analysis on the geometrical place formed by the set of maxima of the trajectories of a projectile launched in a media with linear drag. Such a place, the locus of apexes, is written in term of the Lambert W function in polar coordinates, confirming the special role played by this function in the problem. In order to characterize the locus, a study of its curvature is presented in two parameterizations, in terms of the launch angle and in the polar one. The angles of maximum curvature are compared with other important angles in the projectile problem. As an addendum, we find that the synchronous curve in this problem is a circle as in the drag-free case.\n\n## I. INTRODUCTION\n\n## II. THE PROJECTILE PROBLEM WITH AIR RESISTANCE\n\nAn amazing characteristic of some old fashion prob- lems is their endurement. The projectile motion is one of them. Being one of the main problems used to teach elementary physics, variations and not well known facts about it appear in the physics literature of the XXI cen- tury. A search in the web [1] or in the Science Citation Index gives an idea of this fact. Some of the recent studies deal with the problem of air resistance in the projectile motion and its pedagogical character made of it an ex- cellent example to introduce the Lambert W function, a special function.[2] The Lambert W function is involved in many problems of interest for physicist and engineers, from the solution of the jet fuel problem to epidemics[2] or, even, Helium atom eigenfunctions.[3] One of those problems is the solution for the range R in the case that the air resistance has the from ⃗ f = − mb⃗ v .[4, 5] In this paper we analyze the not well known fact of the\n\n− In this paper we analyze the not well known fact of the geometrical place formed by the maxima of all the projec- tile trajectories at launch angle α and in the presence of a drag force proportional to the velocity, we shall denote this locus as C $_{m}$( ε ). The resulting locus becomes a Lam- bert W function of the polar coordinate r ( θ ) departing from the origin. This problem raises as a natural contin- uation from the nice fact that in the drag-free case such a locus is an ellipse[6–8] with an universal eccentricity e = √$_{3}$$\\_{/}$$_{2.[6]}$\n\nThe paper is organized as follows. In section II, the set of maxima for projectile trajectories moving under in the presence of air resistance is presented. In section III we find a closed form, in polar coordinates, to express such a geometrical place, C $_{m}$. In section IV we present a numerical calculation of the curvature of C m using the polar angle and the launch angle as parameterizations. Additionally, we demonstrate that the synchronous curve is a circle as in the drag-free case in section V. In section VI we conclude.\n\nand considering the value at the maximum, via dy/dx = 0. The corresponding solution is\n\nfor the speeds. We used the initial conditions x (0) = y (0) = 0 and u$_{0}$ = V$_{0}$ cos α and w$_{0}$ = V$_{0}$ sin α . Noticing that the terminal speed is g/b in the y axis. For the same initial speed V$_{0}$ these solutions are func- tion of the launch angle α and the locus formed by the apexes is obtained if time is eliminated between the so- lutions in time in Eqs. (2) and (3), giving the equation\n\nSeveral approximations in order to consider the air re- sistance exist in the literature, the simplest is the linear case. In such a case the force is given by\n\nwhere m is the mass of the projectile and b is the drag coefficient. The units of b are s − $^{1}$. The velocity compo- nents are labeled as ⃗ v = u ˆı + w ˆ, with u = dx/dt and w = dy/dt . The solutions for the position and velocity are obtained trough direct integration of Eq.(1) yielding\n\n$$⃗ F = − mb⃗ v − mg ˆ , (1)$$\n\n$$x ( t ) = u 0 b $^{[1}$− $^{exp(}$− bt )] , (2)$$\n\n$$y ( t ) = w 0 + g/b b $^{[1}$− $^{exp(}$− bt $^{)]}$− gt/b, (3)$$\n\n$$u ( t ) = u$_{0}$ $^{exp(}$− bt ) , (4) w ( t ) = ( w$_{0}$ + g/b $^{) exp(}$− bt $^{)}$− g/b, (5)$$\n\nfor the coordinates, and\n\n$$y ( x ) = w$_{0}$ + g/b u$_{0}$ x − g b 2 ln ( $^{1}$− bx u$_{0}$ ) , (6)$$\n\n$$x$_{m}$ ρ = cos α sin α 1 1 + ε sin α , (7)$$\n\n$$ε $^{2}$y$_{m}$ ρ = ε sin α − ln(1 + ε sin α ) , (8)$$\n\n∗ Electronic address: hhs@correo.azc.uam.mx\n\narXiv:1001.0602v2 [physics.class-ph] 20 Mar 2010" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4966377886174248, + "doc_id": "668583239008dbbafa37a0fd9be923b3862abf9e67d372fb34d8bedb26a77635", + "edit_distance": 0.6750609260763607, + "f1_score": 0.8835227272727271, + "meteor": 0.5390551438850514, + "precision": 0.9311377245508982, + "pred_md": "13\n\nleading to\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nNote that without the Gaussian the result of the integral should be unity reflecting the proper normalization of the microcanonical state. The upper cutoff of the t integration reflects the finite size of phase space. The cutoff prevents the singularity in the limit /epsilon1 → 0. The Bessel function expression is obviously valid only outside of the cutoff-affected peak. The asymptotic behavior of the Bessel function is K 0 ( x ) ≈ exp( -x / ) √ 2 πx , and hence we get P( E ) ∼ exp[ -| | /epsilon1 / NU ( )] for /epsilon1 > 0 and P( E ) ∼ exp[ -| | /epsilon1 / K/ ( 4)] for /epsilon1 < 0. One observes that the tails of the LDOS for /epsilon1 < 0 reflect the relatively rapid decay of the Gaussian tails in the ϕ direction.\n\nFinally we point out that the calculation of the LDOS for the Edge and for the TwinFock preparations is much easier. In the former case the delta function of ρ ( ν ) ( n, ϕ ) merely replaces the n coordinate in ρ ( ψ ) ( n, ϕ ) by a constant proportional to E -E x , leading to a Gaussian for P( E ). Similarly for the TwinFock preparation:\n\n\n\nThe later expression should be calculated for ( NK/ 2) cos( ϕ ) = E leading to Eq.(41) in the main text.\n\n## Appendix E: Rabi-Josephson oscillations, MFT and semiclassical perspectives\n\n/negationslash\n\nMFT.For u = 0, the Hamiltonian (4) merely generates rotations in phase space. Consequently, coherent states remain Gaussian-like throughout their motion, resulting in Rabi oscillations of the population between the sites. This is the case where MFT gives exact results. For u = 0, MFT maintains the assumption that the system remains in a coherent state at any instant during its evolution and that propagation only serves to displace this Gaussian distribution on the Bloch sphere. Thus, MFT corresponds to the classical dynamics of a 'point' in phase space. In particular, this implies that the occupation statistics is binomial at any time.\n\nNonlinear effects cannot be neglected once the wavepacket is stretched along the phase-space energy contour lines. Then MFT no longer applies, but the semiclassical approximation still works well for the description of such squeezing. For example, by projecting the evolving semiclassical distribution onto n we obtain the number distribution P t ( n ) [25] whose line shape reflects the phase space structure, with caustics at the borders of forbidden regions (see Fig. 3).\n\nSemiclassics. -For u = 0, all trajectories have the same topology and frequency and a Gaussian-like wavepacket that is launched (say) at the NorthPole executes Rabi oscillation between the two wells. If u is non-zero\n\nbut small, then all the trajectories still have the same topology, but ω E ( ν ) is ν dependent. The anharmonic behavior is due to the spectral stretch ∆ ω osc . Accordingly, we distinguish between the harmonic stage ( t < 1 / ∆ ω osc ) and the anharmonic stage ( t > 1 / ∆ ω osc ) in the time evolution.\n\nFor u > 1, which we call 'the Josephson regime', a separatrix emerges and accordingly there are two types of stable coherent oscillations, depending on the initial population imbalance [9, 11]: Small oscillations around the ground state, lying in the bottom of the sea; and self-trapped oscillations around the top of either island.\n\nFor u > N 2 which we call 'the Fock regime', the area of the sea becomes less than a Planck cell, and therefore effectively disappears. Our main interest in this work is the unstable motion along the separatrix for 1 /lessmuch u /lessmuch N 2 [22-24]. Such motion emerges for the Pi and for the Edge preparations of Fig. 2.\n\nBeyond. -Quantum effects that are ignored by the semiclassical approximation are anharmonic beats, longtime recurrences, and the possibility of tunneling between the two islands. Associated with the recurrences are the long-time fluctuations, both in the occupation and in the FringeVisibility, as discussed in Section VIII.", + "recall": 0.8405405405405405, + "true_md": "13\n\nleading to\n\n$$P( E ) = ω ( E ) ∫ ∫ rdrdt 2 π 2 ω$_{0}$ δ ( r 2 − 1 ) 1 ab exp [ − (4 | ϵ | /NK ) (sinh( t )) 2 2 a 2 r 2 − ( | ϵ | /U ) (cosh( t )) 2 2 b 2 r 2 ] (D13) = 1 2 π ( ω ( E ) ω$_{0}$ ) ∫ | t | < 1 π ( ω ( E ) ω 0 ) dt 1 ab exp [ − (4 | ϵ | /NK ) (sinh( t )) 2 2 a 2 − ( | ϵ | /U ) (cosh( t )) 2 2 b 2 ] (D14) = 1 π ( ω ( E ) ω$_{0}$ ) ∫ | t | < 1 π ( ω ( E ) ω 0 ) dt exp [ ± ( 2 | ϵ | K − | ϵ | 2 NU ) − ( 2 | ϵ | K + | ϵ | 2 NU ) cosh(2 t ) ] (D15) = 1 π ( ω ( E ) ω$_{0}$ ) exp [ ± ( 2 K − 1 2 NU ) | ϵ | ] K$_{0}$ [( 2 K + 1 2 NU ) | ϵ | ] . (D16)$$\n\nNote that without the Gaussian the result of the integral should be unity reflecting the proper normalization of the microcanonical state. The upper cutoff of the t integration reflects the finite size of phase space. The cutoff prevents the singularity in the limit ϵ → 0. The Bessel function expression is obviously valid only outside of the cutoff-affected peak. The asymptotic behavior of the Bessel function is K$_{0}$ ( x ) ≈ exp( − x ) $_{/}$√$_{2}$$\\_{πx}$$_{, and hence we get}$ P( E ) ∼ exp[ −| ϵ | / ( NU )] for ϵ > 0 and P( E ) ∼ exp[ −| ϵ | / ( K/ 4)] for ϵ < 0. One observes that the tails of the LDOS for ϵ < 0 reflect the relatively rapid decay of the Gaussian tails in the ϕ direction.\n\nFinally we point out that the calculation of the LDOS for the Edge and for the TwinFock preparations is much easier. In the former case the delta function of ρ ( ν $^{)}$( n, ϕ ) merely replaces the n coordinate in ρ ( ψ $^{)}$( n, ϕ ) by a constant proportional to E − E$_{x}$ , leading to a Gaussian for P( E ). Similarly for the TwinFock preparation:\n\n$$P( E ) = ω ( E ) ∫ ∫ dϕdn 2 π δ ( Un 2 − NK 2 cos( ϕ ) − E ) δ ( n ) ∝ ω ( E ) ( NK/ 2) | sin( ϕ ) $_{|}$] E (D17)$$\n\nThe later expression should be calculated for ( NK/ 2) cos( ϕ ) = E leading to Eq.(41) in the main text.\n\n## Appendix E: Rabi-Josephson oscillations, MFT and semiclassical perspectives\n\nbut small, then all the trajectories still have the same topology, but ω ( E$_{ν}$ ) is ν dependent. The anharmonic be- havior is due to the spectral stretch Δ ω$_{osc}$ . Accordingly, we distinguish between the harmonic stage ( t < 1 / Δ ω$_{osc}$ ) and the anharmonic stage ( t > 1 / Δ ω$_{osc}$ ) in the time evo- lution.\n\nMFT.– For u = 0, the Hamiltonian (4) merely gen- erates rotations in phase space. Consequently, coherent states remain Gaussian-like throughout their motion, re- sulting in Rabi oscillations of the population between the sites. This is the case where MFT gives exact results. For u ̸ = 0, MFT maintains the assumption that the sys- tem remains in a coherent state at any instant during its evolution and that propagation only serves to displace this Gaussian distribution on the Bloch sphere. Thus, MFT corresponds to the classical dynamics of a “point” in phase space. In particular, this implies that the occu- pation statistics is binomial at any time.\n\nFor u > 1, which we call “the Josephson regime”, a separatrix emerges and accordingly there are two types of stable coherent oscillations, depending on the initial population imbalance [9, 11]: Small oscillations around the ground state, lying in the bottom of the sea; and self-trapped oscillations around the top of either island. 2\n\nself-trapped oscillations around the top of either island. For u > N 2 which we call “the Fock regime”, the area of the sea becomes less than a Planck cell, and therefore effectively disappears. Our main interest in this work is the unstable motion along the separatrix for 1 ≪ u ≪ N 2 [22–24]. Such motion emerges for the Pi and for the Edge preparations of Fig. 2.\n\nNonlinear effects cannot be neglected once the wave- packet is stretched along the phase-space energy contour lines. Then MFT no longer applies, but the semiclassi- cal approximation still works well for the description of such squeezing. For example, by projecting the evolving semiclassical distribution onto n we obtain the number distribution P$_{t}$ ( n ) [25] whose line shape reflects the phase space structure, with caustics at the borders of forbidden regions (see Fig. 3).\n\nBeyond. – Quantum effects that are ignored by the semiclassical approximation are anharmonic beats, long- time recurrences, and the possibility of tunneling between the two islands. Associated with the recurrences are the long-time fluctuations, both in the occupation and in the FringeVisibility, as discussed in Section VIII.\n\nSemiclassics. – For u = 0, all trajectories have the same topology and frequency and a Gaussian-like wave- packet that is launched (say) at the NorthPole executes Rabi oscillation between the two wells. If u is non-zero" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6647943230521368, + "doc_id": "f8467095ed2bfe0b858a0829d32b3a88cb83d937df93ebc8ad6f4ce16859a520", + "edit_distance": 0.31255686988171066, + "f1_score": 0.9805825242718447, + "meteor": 0.5195071871127621, + "precision": 0.9853658536585366, + "pred_md": "## Acknowledgements\n\nWe would like to thank M. Norman, Tom Timusk, Dmitri Basov, Chris Homes, Nicole Bontemps, Andres Santander-Syro, Ricardo Lobo, Dirk van der Marel, A. Boris, E. van Heumen, A. B. Kuzmenko, L. Benfato, and\n\n- 1 R. Kubo, J. Phys. Soc. Jpn 12 , 570(1957).\n- 2 R.A. Ferrrel and R.E. Glover, Phys. Rev. 109 , 1398 (1958).\n- 3 M. Tinkham and R.A. Ferrrel, Phys. Rev. Lett. 2 , 331 (1959), M. Tinkham, Introduction to Superconductivity (McGraw-Hill, New York, 1975).\n- 4 J. Hirsch, Physica C 199 , 305 (1992).\n- 5 D. N. Basov and T. Timusk, Rev. Mod. Phys. 77 , 721 (2005); A. V. Puchkov, D. N. Basov and T. Timusk, J. Phys. Cond. Matter 8 , 10049 (1996).\n- 6 C. M. Varma et al , Phys. Rev. Lett. 63 , 1996 (1989).\n- 7 D. N. Basov, S. I. Woods, A. S. Katz, E. J. Singley, R. C. Dynes, M. Xu, D. G. Hinks, C. C. Homes and M. Strongin, Science 283 , 49 (1999).\n- 8 H.J.A Molegraaf, C. Presura, D. van der Marel, P.H. Kess, M. Li, Science 295 , 2239 (2002); A. B. Kuzmenko, H. J. A. Molegraaf, F. Carbone and D. van der Marel, Phys. Rev. B 72 , 144503 (2005).\n- 9 A. F. Santander-Syro, R. P. S. M. Lobo, N. Bontemps, Z. Konstantinovic, Z. Z. Li and H. Raffy, Europhys. Lett. 62 , 568 (2003);\n- 10 A. V. Boris, N. N. Kovaleva, O. V. Dolgov, T. Holden, C. T. Lin, B. Keimer and C. Bernhard, Science 304 , 708 (2004).\n- 11 G. Deutscher, A. F. Santander-Syro and N. Bontemps, Phys. Rev. B 72 , 092504 (2005).\n- 12 F. Carbone, A. B. Kuzmenko, H. J. A. Molegraaf, E. van Heumen, V. Lukovac, F. Marsiglio, D. van der Marel, K. Haule, G. Kotliar, H. Berger, S. Courjault, P. H. Kes and M. Li, Phys. Rev. B 74 , 064510 (2006).\n- 13 C. C. Homes, S. V. Dordevic, D. A. Bonn, R. Liang and W. N. Hardy, Phys. Rev. B 69 , 024514 (2004).\n- 14 J. Hwang et al , Phys. Rev. B 73 , 014508 (2006).\n- 15 E. van Heumen, R. Lortz, A. B. Kuzmenko, F. Carbone, D. van der Marel, X. Zhao, G. Yu, Y. Cho, N. Barisic, M. Greven, C. C. Homes and S. V. Dordevic, Phys. Rev. B 75 , 054522 (2007).\n- 16 M. Ortolani, P. Calvani and S. Lupi, Phys. Rev. Lett. 94 , 067002 (2005).\n- 17 A.F. Santander-Syro, R.P.S.M. Lobo, and N. Bontemps, Phys. Rev. B 70 , 134504(2004), A. F. Santander-Syro, R. P. S. M. Lobo, N. Bontemps, Z. Konstantinovic, Z. Z. Li and H. Raffy, Europhys. Lett. 62 , 568 (2003).\n- 18 P. F. Maldague, Phys. Rev. B 16 2437 (1977); E. H. Kim, Phys. Rev. B 58 2452 (1998).\n- 19 J. Hirsch, Physica C, 201 , 347 (1992) and Ref 4.\n- 20 for a review see F. Marsiglio, J. Superconductivity and Novel Magnetism 22 , 269 (2009).\n- 21 F. Marsiglio, E. van Heumen, A. B. Kuzmenko, Phys. Rev. B 77 144510 (2008).\n- 22 M. R. Norman, A. V. Chubukov, E. van Heumen, A. B. Kuzmenko, and D. van der Marel, Phys. Rev. B 76 , 220509 (2007).\n- 23 J. E. Hirsch and F. Marsiglio, Physica C 331 , 150 (2000)\n\n15\n\n- F. Marsiglio for many discussions concerning the infrared conductivity and optical integrals and thank A. Boris, E. van Heumen, J. Hirsch, and F. Marsiglio for the comments on the manuscript. The work was supported by nsf-dmr 0906953.\n- and Phys. Rev. B 62 , 15131 (2000).\n- 24 A. Toschi, M. Capone, M. Ortolani, P. Calvani, S. Lupi and C. Castellani, Phys. Rev. Lett. 95 , 097002 (2005).\n- 25 F. Marsiglio, F. Carbone, A. Kuzmenko and D. van der Marel, Phys. Rev. B 74 , 174516 (2006).\n- 26 L. Benfatto, S. G. Sharapov, N. Andrenacci and H. Beck, Phys. Rev. B 71 , 104511 (2005).\n- 27 D. van der Marel, H.J.A. Molegraaf, C. Presura, and I. Santoso, Concepts in Electron Correlations, edited by A. Hewson and V. Zlatic (Kluwer, 2003)\n- 28 L. Benfatto, J.P. Carbotte and F. Marsiglio, Phys. Rev. B 74 , 155115 (2006)\n- 29 F. Marsiglio, Phys. Rev. B 73 , 064507(2006).\n- 30 M.R. Norman and C. P' epin, Phys. Rev. B 66 , 100506(R) (2002).\n- 31 J. Fink et al. , Phys. Rev. B 74 , 165102(R) (2006).\n- 32 M. Eschrig, Adv. Phys. 55 , 47-183 (2006)\n- 33 M.R. Norman and A.V. Chubukov, Phys. Rev. B 73 , 140501(R)(2006).\n- 34 A.E. Karakozov and E.G. Maksimov, cond-mat/0511185, A. E. Karakozov, E. G. Maksimov and O. V. Dolgov, Solid State Comm. 124 , 119 (2002); A. E. Karakozov and E. G. Maksimov, ibid. 139 , 80 (2006).\n- 35 see e.g., P. B. Allen, Phys. Rev. B 3 , 305 (1971); S. V. Shulga, O. V. Dolgov and E. G. Maksimov, Physica C 178 , 266 (1991).\n- 36 A. A. Abriskov and L. P. Gor'kov, JETP 35 , 1090 (1959), Sang Boo Nam, Phys. Rev. 156 , 470 (1967).\n- 37 Theory of superconductivity, Schrieffer, (W. A. Benjamin Inc., New York 1964).\n- 38 M.R. Norman, M. Randeria, H. Ding, and J.C. Campuzano, Phys. Rev. B 52 , 615 (1995).\n- 39 Z.X. Shen and D.S. Dessau, Phys. Rep. 253 , 1(1995), J. C. Campuzano, M. R. Norman, and M. Randeria, 'Superconductivity'(Vol-1), 923-992, Springer (2008).\n- 40 A. V. Chubukov, Ar. Abanov, and D. N. Basov, Phys. Rev. B 68 , 024504 (2003).\n- 41 T. Valla et al. , Phys. Rev. Lett 85 , 828(2000).\n- 42 Kaminski et al. , Phys. Rev. B 71 , 014517 (2005).\n- 43 Robert Haslinger and Andrey V. Chubukov, Phys. Rev. B 67 , 140504(2003).\n- 44 C. Castellani, C. DiCastro, and M. Grilli, Phys. Rev. Lett. 75 , 4650 (1995).\n- 45 Ar. Abanov, A. Chubukov, and J. Schmalian, Adv. Phys. 52 , 119 (2003).\n- 46 Dessau et al. , Phys. Rev. Lett 66 , 2160(1991), Norman et al , Phys. Rev. Lett. 79 , 3506(1997).\n- 47 M.R. Norman and H. Ding, Phys. Rev. B 57 , 11089(1998).\n- 48 C. Timm, D. Manske and K. H. Bennemann, Phys. Rev. B 66 , 094515(2002).\n- 49 A.V. Chubukov, M.R. Norman, Phys. Rev. B 70 , 174505(2004).\n- 50 In this respect, our results are consistent with the analysis", + "recall": 0.9758454106280193, + "true_md": "15\n\n## Acknowledgements\n\nWe would like to thank M. Norman, Tom Timusk, Dmitri Basov, Chris Homes, Nicole Bontemps, Andres Santander-Syro, Ricardo Lobo, Dirk van der Marel, A. Boris, E. van Heumen, A. B. Kuzmenko, L. Benfato, and\n\nF. Marsiglio for many discussions concerning the infrared conductivity and optical integrals and thank A. Boris, E. van Heumen, J. Hirsch, and F. Marsiglio for the com- ments on the manuscript. The work was supported by nsf-dmr 0906953.\n\n- 1 R. Kubo, J. Phys. Soc. Jpn 12 , 570(1957). 2\n\n- R. Kubo, J. Phys. Soc. Jpn 12 , 570(1957). 2 R.A. Ferrrel and R.E. Glover, Phys. Rev. 109 , 1398 (1958). 3\n\n- R.A. Ferrrel and R.E. Glover, Phys. Rev. 109 , 1398 (1958). 3 M. Tinkham and R.A. Ferrrel, Phys. Rev. Lett. 2 , 331 (1959), M. Tinkham, Introduction to Superconductivity (McGraw-Hill, New York, 1975). 4\n\n- (McGraw-Hill, New York, 1975). 4 J. Hirsch, Physica C 199 , 305 (1992). 5\n\n- J. Hirsch, Physica C 199 , 305 (1992). 5 D. N. Basov and T. Timusk, Rev. Mod. Phys. 77 , 721 (2005); A. V. Puchkov, D. N. Basov and T. Timusk, J. Phys. Cond. Matter 8 , 10049 (1996). 6\n\n- Phys. Cond. Matter 8 , 10049 (1996). 6 C. M. Varma et al , Phys. Rev. Lett. 63 , 1996 (1989). 7\n\n- C. M. Varma et al , Phys. Rev. Lett. 63 , 1996 (1989). 7 D. N. Basov, S. I. Woods, A. S. Katz, E. J. Singley, R. C. Dynes, M. Xu, D. G. Hinks, C. C. Homes and M. Strongin, Science 283 , 49 (1999). 8\n\n- Science 283 , 49 (1999). 8 H.J.A Molegraaf, C. Presura, D. van der Marel, P.H. Kess, M. Li, Science 295 , 2239 (2002); A. B. Kuzmenko, H. J. A. Molegraaf, F. Carbone and D. van der Marel, Phys. Rev. B 72 , 144503 (2005). 9\n\n- B 72 , 144503 (2005). 9 A. F. Santander-Syro, R. P. S. M. Lobo, N. Bontemps, Z. Konstantinovic, Z. Z. Li and H. Raffy, Europhys. Lett. 62 , 568 (2003); 10\n\n- 568 (2003); 10 A. V. Boris, N. N. Kovaleva, O. V. Dolgov, T. Holden, C. T. Lin, B. Keimer and C. Bernhard, Science 304 , 708 (2004). 11\n\n- (2004). 11 G. Deutscher, A. F. Santander-Syro and N. Bontemps, Phys. Rev. B 72 , 092504 (2005). 12\n\n- Phys. Rev. B 72 , 092504 (2005). 12 F. Carbone, A. B. Kuzmenko, H. J. A. Molegraaf, E. van Heumen, V. Lukovac, F. Marsiglio, D. van der Marel, K. Haule, G. Kotliar, H. Berger, S. Courjault, P. H. Kes and M. Li, Phys. Rev. B 74 , 064510 (2006). 13\n\n- M. Li, Phys. Rev. B 74 , 064510 (2006). 13 C. C. Homes, S. V. Dordevic, D. A. Bonn, R. Liang and W. N. Hardy, Phys. Rev. B 69 , 024514 (2004). 14\n\n- W. N. Hardy, Phys. Rev. B 69 , 024514 (2004). 14 J. Hwang et al , Phys. Rev. B 73 , 014508 (2006). 15\n\n- J. Hwang et al , Phys. Rev. B 73 , 014508 (2006). 15 E. van Heumen, R. Lortz, A. B. Kuzmenko, F. Carbone, D. van der Marel, X. Zhao, G. Yu, Y. Cho, N. Barisic, M. Greven, C. C. Homes and S. V. Dordevic, Phys. Rev. B 75 , 054522 (2007). 16\n\n- 75 , 054522 (2007). 16 M. Ortolani, P. Calvani and S. Lupi, Phys. Rev. Lett. 94 , 067002 (2005). 17\n\n- 067002 (2005). 17 A.F. Santander-Syro, R.P.S.M. Lobo, and N. Bontemps, Phys. Rev. B 70 , 134504(2004), A. F. Santander-Syro, R. P. S. M. Lobo, N. Bontemps, Z. Konstantinovic, Z. Z. Li and H. Raffy, Europhys. Lett. 62 , 568 (2003). 18\n\n- and H. Raffy, Europhys. Lett. 62 , 568 (2003). 18 P. F. Maldague, Phys. Rev. B 16 2437 (1977); E. H. Kim, Phys. Rev. B 58 2452 (1998). 19\n\n- Phys. Rev. B 58 2452 (1998). 19 J. Hirsch, Physica C, 201 , 347 (1992) and Ref 4. 20\n\n- J. Hirsch, Physica C, 201 , 347 (1992) and Ref 4. 20 for a review see F. Marsiglio, J. Superconductivity and Novel Magnetism 22 , 269 (2009). 21\n\n- Novel Magnetism 22 , 269 (2009). 21 F. Marsiglio, E. van Heumen, A. B. Kuzmenko, Phys. Rev. B 77 144510 (2008). 22\n\n- B 77 144510 (2008). 22 M. R. Norman, A. V. Chubukov, E. van Heumen, A. B. Kuzmenko, and D. van der Marel, Phys. Rev. B 76 , 220509 (2007). 23\n\n- (2007). 23 J. E. Hirsch and F. Marsiglio, Physica C 331 , 150 (2000)\n\n- and Phys. Rev. B 62 , 15131 (2000).\n\n- and Phys. Rev. B 62 , 15131 (2000). 24 A. Toschi, M. Capone, M. Ortolani, P. Calvani, S. Lupi and C. Castellani, Phys. Rev. Lett. 95 , 097002 (2005). 25\n\n- and C. Castellani, Phys. Rev. Lett. 95 , 097002 (2005). 25 F. Marsiglio, F. Carbone, A. Kuzmenko and D. van der Marel, Phys. Rev. B 74 , 174516 (2006). 26\n\n- Marel, Phys. Rev. B 74 , 174516 (2006). 26 L. Benfatto, S. G. Sharapov, N. Andrenacci and H. Beck, Phys. Rev. B 71 , 104511 (2005). 27\n\n- Phys. Rev. B 71 , 104511 (2005). 27 D. van der Marel, H.J.A. Molegraaf, C. Presura, and I. Santoso, Concepts in Electron Correlations, edited by A. Hewson and V. Zlatic (Kluwer, 2003) 28\n\n- Hewson and V. Zlatic (Kluwer, 2003) 28 L. Benfatto, J.P. Carbotte and F. Marsiglio, Phys. Rev. B 74 , 155115 (2006) 29\n\n- 74 , 155115 (2006) 29 F. Marsiglio, Phys. Rev. B 73 , 064507(2006). 30\n\n- F. Marsiglio, Phys. Rev. B 73 , 064507(2006). 30 M.R. Norman and C. P´epin, Phys. Rev. B 66 , 100506(R) (2002). 31\n\n- (2002). 31 J. Fink et al. , Phys. Rev. B 74 , 165102(R) (2006). 32\n\n- J. Fink et al. , Phys. Rev. B 74 , 165102(R) (2006). 32 M. Eschrig, Adv. Phys. 55 , 47-183 (2006) 33\n\n- M. Eschrig, Adv. Phys. 55 , 47-183 (2006) 33 M.R. Norman and A.V. Chubukov, Phys. Rev. B 73 , 140501(R)(2006). 34\n\n- 140501(R)(2006). 34 A.E. Karakozov and E.G. Maksimov, cond-mat/0511185, A. E. Karakozov, E. G. Maksimov and O. V. Dolgov, Solid State Comm. 124 , 119 (2002); A. E. Karakozov and E. G. Maksimov, ibid. 139 , 80 (2006). 35\n\n- Maksimov, ibid. 139 , 80 (2006). 35 see e.g., P. B. Allen, Phys. Rev. B 3 , 305 (1971); S. V. Shulga, O. V. Dolgov and E. G. Maksimov, Physica C 178 , 266 (1991). 36\n\n- 178 , 266 (1991). 36 A. A. Abriskov and L. P. Gor’kov, JETP 35 , 1090 (1959), Sang Boo Nam, Phys. Rev. 156 , 470 (1967). 37\n\n- Sang Boo Nam, Phys. Rev. 156 , 470 (1967). 37 Theory of superconductivity, Schrieffer, (W. A. Benjamin Inc., New York 1964). 38\n\n- Inc., New York 1964). 38 M.R. Norman, M. Randeria, H. Ding, and J.C. Cam- puzano, Phys. Rev. B 52 , 615 (1995). 39\n\n- puzano, Phys. Rev. B 52 , 615 (1995). 39 Z.X. Shen and D.S. Dessau, Phys. Rep. 253 , 1(1995), J. C. Campuzano, M. R. Norman, and M. Randeria, “Superconductivity”(Vol-1), 923-992, Springer (2008). 40\n\n- “Superconductivity”(Vol-1), 923-992, Springer (2008). 40 A. V. Chubukov, Ar. Abanov, and D. N. Basov, Phys. Rev. B 68 , 024504 (2003). 41\n\n- B 68 , 024504 (2003). 41 T. Valla et al. , Phys. Rev. Lett 85 , 828(2000). 42\n\n- T. Valla et al. , Phys. Rev. Lett 85 , 828(2000). 42 Kaminski et al. , Phys. Rev. B 71 , 014517 (2005). 43\n\n- Kaminski et al. , Phys. Rev. B 71 , 014517 (2005). 43 Robert Haslinger and Andrey V. Chubukov, Phys. Rev. B 67 , 140504(2003). 44\n\n- 67 , 140504(2003). 44 C. Castellani, C. DiCastro, and M. Grilli, Phys. Rev. Lett. 75 , 4650 (1995). 45\n\n- 75 , 4650 (1995). 45 Ar. Abanov, A. Chubukov, and J. Schmalian, Adv. Phys. 52 , 119 (2003). 46\n\n- 52 , 119 (2003). 46 Dessau et al. , Phys. Rev. Lett 66 , 2160(1991), Norman et al , Phys. Rev. Lett. 79 , 3506(1997). 47\n\n- al , Phys. Rev. Lett. 79 , 3506(1997). 47 M.R. Norman and H. Ding, Phys. Rev. B 57 , 11089(1998). 48\n\n- M.R. Norman and H. Ding, Phys. Rev. B 57 , 11089(1998). 48 C. Timm, D. Manske and K. H. Bennemann, Phys. Rev. B 66 , 094515(2002). 49\n\n- B 66 , 094515(2002). 49 A.V. Chubukov, M.R. Norman, Phys. Rev. B 70 , 174505(2004). 50\n\n- 174505(2004). 50 In this respect, our results are consistent with the analysis" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7589863366197855, + "doc_id": "16c89908563f4e9e882507576c1043be19912550d4b510d46696b1e909310122", + "edit_distance": 0.8403074295473953, + "f1_score": 0.92524682651622, + "meteor": 0.598652952732768, + "precision": 0.9618768328445748, + "pred_md": "FIG. 3: (color online) Binder cumulants at thickness n = 16, colors as in Fig. 2. (a) : Binder cumulant for the order parameter defined in Eq. (3). (b) : Binder cumulant extracted from the integral of the structure factor (see Sec. II). Inset: structure factor for L = 64 between T = 131 K (upper curve) and T = 140 K (lower), with 1 K temperature step.\n\nFIG. 3: (color online) Binder cumulants at thickness n = 16, colors as in Fig. 2. (a) : Binder cumulant for the order parameter defined in Eq. (3). (b) : Binder cumulant extracted from the integral of the structure factor (see Sec. II). Inset: structure factor for L = 64 between T = 131 K (upper curve) and T = 140 K (lower), with 1 K temperature step.\n\n## III. RESULTS\n\nThe results obtained by MC simulations of the model introduced in Sec. II will be presented starting from n = 16, i.e. the highest investigated film thickness which still displays a bulk-like behaviour. In Fig. 2 the specific heat for samples with n = 16 and lateral dimension L = 24 , 32 , 48 , 64 is shown. The location of the specific heat maximum shows a quite definite evolution toward the bulk transition temperature, T Ho N /similarequal 132K 10 (it is worthwhile to note that for this XY model the mean field theory predicts a critical temperature T Ho N,MF /similarequal 198K).\n\nThe intensity of the maximum of c v has been analyzed by the MH technique for the same lateral dimensions (see inset of Fig. 2): it clearly appears as it increases with L in a smooth way.\n\nThe Binder cumulant for the average order parameter defined in Eq. (3) was obtained close to the c v peak and is reported in Fig. 3a; its analysis leads to an estimate of the critical temperature of the sample (given by the location of the common crossing point of the different curves reported in the figure) of T C (16) = 133 2(5) This value can . be considered in a rather good agreement with the experimental ordering temperature of Holmium T Ho N , the relative difference being about 1%. Even such a mismatch between T Ho N and T C (16) could be completely eliminated by slightly adjusting the in-plane coupling constant J 0 , but, as discussed in Sec. II, we shall preserve the value reported in Refs. 13, and 12 in order to allow for a correct comparison with the results reported in those papers.\n\nThe development of the helical arrangement of magnetization along the film growth direction was investigated by looking at the integral of the structure factor S /vector ( q ) along the z -direction, i.e. by taking /vector q = (0 0 , , q z ), and making again use of the cumulant analysis in order to locate the helical transition temperature at T N (16) =\n\n4\n\nFIG. 4: (color online) Thermodynamic quantities obtained for thickness n = 8 in the temperature range 0-150 K. Colors and symbols as in Fig. 2. (a) : specific heat; (b) : chirality order parameter. (c) : susceptibility χ κ . (d) : Binder cumulant for κ .\n\nFIG. 4: (color online) Thermodynamic quantities obtained for thickness n = 8 in the temperature range 0-150 K. Colors and symbols as in Fig. 2. (a) : specific heat; (b) : chirality order parameter. (c) : susceptibility χ κ . (d) : Binder cumulant for κ .\n\n133 1(3)K . (see Fig. 3b). The crossing points of the Binder's cumulants of the helical order parameter immediately appear to be located, within the error bars, at the same temperature of those for the average magnetization previously discussed. In addition, it is worthwhile to observe that the peak evolution of S (0 , 0 , q z ), in particular close to T N (16) (inset of Fig. 3b), displays the typical behaviour expected for an helical structure. We can thus conclude that for n = 16, as it is commonly observed in bulk samples, the establishment of the in-plane order coincides with onset of the perpendicular helical arrangement at T N (16). However, due to helix distortion in the surface regions, the maximum of S (0 , 0 , q z ) stabilizes at values of q z sensibly smaller (e.g. Q z ( T N (16)) ≈ 16 , · and Q z ( T = 10 K ) ≈ 28 ) with respect to the bulk one · ( Q Ho z = 30 5 ). . ·\n\nThe MC simulations outcomes for n = 16 we just presented appear quite different with respect to those obtained at the same thickness for the model with six coupling constants along the z direction 14,15 . Indeed, for the J 1 -J 2 model here investigated, we observe that all layers order at the same temperature, and we do not find any hint of the block-phase, with inner disordered planes intercalated to antiparallel quasi -FM four-layer blocks, previously observed; sample MC runs we made using the same hcp lattice employed in Refs. 14,15 shows that the presence or absence of the block phase is not related to the lattice geometry, but it is a consequence of the interaction range only.\n\nWe now move to describe and discuss MC simulation data for thinner samples. A graphical synthesis of the results obtained for n = 8 in reported in Fig. 4a-d. The specific heat c v , shown in Figs. 4a, reveals very small finite-size effects, which, however, cannot be unambiguously detected for the largest lattice size ( L = 64), as they fall comfortably within the error range. Surprisingly, the specific heat maximum is located close to the bulk transition temperature as found for n = 16, and", + "recall": 0.8913043478260869, + "true_md": "4\n\nFIG. 4: (color online) Thermodynamic quantities obtained for thickness n = 8 in the temperature range 0-150 K. Colors and symbols as in Fig. 2. (a) : specific heat; (b) : chirality order parameter. (c) : susceptibility χ$_{κ}$ . (d) : Binder cumulant for κ .\n\nFIG. 3: (color online) Binder cumulants at thickness n = 16, colors as in Fig. 2. (a) : Binder cumulant for the order parameter defined in Eq. (3). (b) : Binder cumulant extracted from the integral of the structure factor (see Sec. II). Inset: structure factor for L = 64 between T = 131 K (upper curve) and T = 140 K (lower), with 1 K temperature step.\n\n133 . 1(3) K (see Fig. 3b). The crossing points of the Binder’s cumulants of the helical order parameter imme- diately appear to be located, within the error bars, at the same temperature of those for the average magnetization previously discussed. In addition, it is worthwhile to ob- serve that the peak evolution of S (0 , 0 , q$_{z}$ ), in particular close to T$_{N}$ (16) (inset of Fig. 3b), displays the typical behaviour expected for an helical structure. We can thus conclude that for n = 16, as it is commonly observed in bulk samples, the establishment of the in-plane order coincides with onset of the perpendicular helical arrange- ment at T$_{N}$ (16). However, due to helix distortion in the surface regions, the maximum of S (0 , 0 , q$_{z}$ ) stabilizes at values of q$_{z}$ sensibly smaller (e.g. Q$_{z}$ ( T$_{N}$ (16)) ≈ 16 $^{◦}$, and Q$_{z}$ ( T = 10 K ) ≈ 28 $^{◦}$) with respect to the bulk one ( Q Ho z = 30 . 5 $^{◦}$).\n\nThe results obtained by MC simulations of the model introduced in Sec. II will be presented starting from n = 16, i.e. the highest investigated film thickness which still displays a bulk-like behaviour. In Fig. 2 the spe- cific heat for samples with n = 16 and lateral dimension L = 24 , 32 , 48 , 64 is shown. The location of the specific heat maximum shows a quite definite evolution toward the bulk transition temperature, T Ho N ≃ 132 K 10 (it is worthwhile to note that for this XY model the mean field theory predicts a critical temperature T Ho N,MF ≃ 198 K). The intensity of the maximum of c$_{v}$ has been analyzed\n\nN,MF The intensity of the maximum of c$_{v}$ has been analyzed by the MH technique for the same lateral dimensions (see inset of Fig. 2): it clearly appears as it increases with L in a smooth way.\n\n## III. RESULTS\n\nThe MC simulations outcomes for n = 16 we just pre- sented appear quite different with respect to those ob- tained at the same thickness for the model with six cou- pling constants along the z direction $^{14,15}$. Indeed, for the J$_{1}$ - J$_{2}$ model here investigated, we observe that all layers order at the same temperature, and we do not find any hint of the block-phase, with inner disordered planes intercalated to antiparallel quasi -FM four-layer blocks, previously observed; sample MC runs we made using the same hcp lattice employed in Refs. 14,15 shows that the presence or absence of the block phase is not related to the lattice geometry, but it is a consequence of the inter- action range only.\n\nThe Binder cumulant for the average order parameter defined in Eq. (3) was obtained close to the c$_{v}$ peak and is reported in Fig. 3a; its analysis leads to an estimate of the critical temperature of the sample (given by the location of the common crossing point of the different curves re- ported in the figure) of T$_{C}$ (16) = 133 . 2(5) This value can be considered in a rather good agreement with the exper- imental ordering temperature of Holmium T Ho N , the rel- ative difference being about 1%. Even such a mismatch between T Ho N and T$_{C}$ (16) could be completely eliminated by slightly adjusting the in-plane coupling constant J$_{0}$ , but, as discussed in Sec. II, we shall preserve the value reported in Refs. 13, and 12 in order to allow for a correct comparison with the results reported in those papers.\n\nWe now move to describe and discuss MC simulation data for thinner samples. A graphical synthesis of the results obtained for n = 8 in reported in Fig. 4a-d. The specific heat c$_{v}$ , shown in Figs. 4a, reveals very small finite-size effects, which, however, cannot be unambigu- ously detected for the largest lattice size ( L = 64), as they fall comfortably within the error range. Surpris- ingly, the specific heat maximum is located close to the bulk transition temperature as found for n = 16, and\n\nThe development of the helical arrangement of magne- tization along the film growth direction was investigated by looking at the integral of the structure factor S ( ⃗ q ) along the z -direction, i.e. by taking ⃗ q = (0 , 0 , q$_{z}$ ), and making again use of the cumulant analysis in order to locate the helical transition temperature at T$_{N}$ (16) =" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.49885214978835113, + "doc_id": "5623124ee30f449fc123a5c4f2feb2dfae2a9fd9782711931d42413c41aa247d", + "edit_distance": 0.4976303317535545, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9098681888534248, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "5\n\nFIG. 2: Calculation of realistic design orbit z d and its associated realistic transfer map M based on data provided on a 3-dimensional grid for a real beam-line element. Only a few points on the 3-dimensional grid are shown. In this illustration, data from the 3-dimensional grid is interpolated onto the surface of a cylinder with circular cross section, and this surface data is then processed to compute the design orbit (trajectory) and the associated transfer map about the design orbit. The use of other surfaces is also possible, and may offer various advantages.\n\nFIG. 2: Calculation of realistic design orbit z d and its associated realistic transfer map M based on data provided on a 3-dimensional grid for a real beam-line element. Only a few points on the 3-dimensional grid are shown. In this illustration, data from the 3-dimensional grid is interpolated onto the surface of a cylinder with circular cross section, and this surface data is then processed to compute the design orbit (trajectory) and the associated transfer map about the design orbit. The use of other surfaces is also possible, and may offer various advantages.", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "5\n\nFIG. 2: Calculation of realistic design orbit z d and its associated realistic transfer map M based on data provided on a 3-dimensional grid for a real beam-line element. Only a few points on the 3-dimensional grid are shown. In this illustration, data from the 3-dimensional grid is interpolated onto the surface of a cylinder with circular cross section, and this surface data is then processed to compute the design orbit (trajectory) and the associated transfer map about the design orbit. The use of other surfaces is also possible, and may offer various advantages." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8368482566671839, + "doc_id": "b2873a05790c5c869a73cf2a4c3cfc8f71996a974f007940417c449d1a2d103a", + "edit_distance": 0.8105263157894737, + "f1_score": 0.8849557522123893, + "meteor": 0.7680176588689234, + "precision": 0.9090909090909091, + "pred_md": "- [10] J. Urban and G. Dugan, in Proceedings PAC 2005 (IEEE, 2005), p. 1880.\n- [11] R. D. Ryne et al, in Proceedings of the 2006 International Computational Accelerator Physics Conference, Chamonix, France (2006), pp. 157-159.\n\n19\n\n- [12] A. J. Dragt, in Handbook of Accelerator Physics and Engineering , edited by A. Chao and M. Tigner (World Scientific Publishing, 1999), pp. 78-84.", + "recall": 0.8620689655172413, + "true_md": "19\n\n- [12] A. J. Dragt, in Handbook of Accelerator Physics and En- gineering , edited by A. Chao and M. Tigner (World Sci- entific Publishing, 1999), pp. 78–84.\n\n- [10] J. Urban and G. Dugan, in Proceedings PAC 2005 (IEEE, 2005), p. 1880.\n\n- [11] R. D. Ryne et al, in Proceedings of the 2006 Inter- national Computational Accelerator Physics Conference, Chamonix, France (2006), pp. 157–159." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.3170398648018904, + "doc_id": "25e2b667f31a37c63e902dba7a36892b50cccc53ed24f82301042b8c577384da", + "edit_distance": 0.70509977827051, + "f1_score": 0.8874388254486133, + "meteor": 0.4435875627520508, + "precision": 0.9577464788732394, + "pred_md": "of known, orthogonal, and complete functions. In the case of bent-bore magnetic elements, such as dipoles with large sagitta, it is not possible to obtain a suitable Green function. New techniques have therefore been developed for treating cases of such general geometries, and these techniques will be presented in a subsequent paper.\n\nOur emphasis will be on the accurate representation of fields in terms of scalar and vector potentials. Once these representations are available, there are a variety of methods for computing the associated design orbits and transfer maps about these orbits. An Appendix summarizes how this can be done when canonical coordinates are employed and the associated Lie-algebraic structure is exploited.\n\nA brief outline of this paper is as follows: Section II reviews circular cylinder harmonic expansions and introduces a collection of functions, known as on-axis gradients , which uniquely characterize the magnetic scalar potential. It also describes how the vector potential can be obtained from the scalar potential. The on-axis gradients themselves are generally unspecified functions of z . In some simple cases they can be found analytically. However, in general they must be determined numerically. Section III describes how this can be done using known magnetic field values determined at points on some regular 3-dimensional grid. In Section IV, we treat an analytically soluble model problem, that of a magnetic monopole doublet, which is used to benchmark these methods. In Section V, we discuss the advantages of these surface-fitting methods that result from numerical smoothing. In Section VI, we use these methods to study a proposed ILC damping ring wiggler. The paper concludes with a summary and an Appendix. Further detail may be found in [3, 4].\n\n## II. CYLINDRICAL HARMONIC EXPANSIONS\n\n## A. Scalar Potential\n\nIn a current-free region the magnetic field B is curl free, and can therefore be described most simply in terms of a magnetic scalar potential ψ . Because B is also divergence free, ψ must obey the Laplace equation\n\n\n\nSince we wish to describe straight beam-line elements, it is convenient to work initially in circular cylindrical coordinates ρ , φ , and z with\n\n\n\nWe note for future use that (2) can be written in the form\n\n\n\nfrom which it follows that, for non-negative integers l and m ,\n\n\n\n2\n\n\n\n\n\nWe see that even powers of ρ and the combinations ρ m cos mφ and ρ m sin mφ are analytic (in fact, polynomial) functions of x and y .\n\nA general solution ψ satisfying the Laplace equation and analytic near the axis ρ = 0 takes the form\n\n\n\nNote that the term containing G 0 ,s ( k ) does not contribute to the above sum, and we may set G 0 ,s = 0 without loss of generality. By utilizing the Taylor series of the modified Bessel function I m , we may write ψ in the form of a circular cylinder harmonic (multipole) expansion:\n\n\n\nwhere for α = , s c ,\n\n\n\nThe functions C [ n ] m,α , known as on-axis gradients [3, 4], are defined by\n\n\n\nNote that\n\n\n\nWe will require an expansion of (6) in the transverse variables x and y . Define the polynomials\n\n\n\n\n\nfor integer l ≥ 0 and m ≥ 0. In Cartesian coordinates we then have:\n\n\n\nNote that each polynomial F l,m α is homogeneous of degree 2 l + m .", + "recall": 0.8267477203647416, + "true_md": "of known, orthogonal, and complete functions. In the case of bent-bore magnetic elements, such as dipoles with large sagitta, it is not possible to obtain a suitable Green function. New techniques have therefore been developed for treating cases of such general geometries, and these techniques will be presented in a subsequent paper.\n\nOur emphasis will be on the accurate representation of fields in terms of scalar and vector potentials. Once these representations are available, there are a variety of methods for computing the associated design orbits and transfer maps about these orbits. An Appendix summa- rizes how this can be done when canonical coordinates are employed and the associated Lie-algebraic structure is exploited.\n\nA brief outline of this paper is as follows: Section II reviews circular cylinder harmonic expansions and intro- duces a collection of functions, known as on-axis gra- dients , which uniquely characterize the magnetic scalar potential. It also describes how the vector potential can be obtained from the scalar potential. The on-axis gra- dients themselves are generally unspecified functions of z . In some simple cases they can be found analytically. However, in general they must be determined numeri- cally. Section III describes how this can be done us- ing known magnetic field values determined at points on some regular 3-dimensional grid. In Section IV, we treat an analytically soluble model problem, that of a magnetic monopole doublet, which is used to benchmark these methods. In Section V, we discuss the advantages of these surface-fitting methods that result from numer- ical smoothing. In Section VI, we use these methods to study a proposed ILC damping ring wiggler. The paper concludes with a summary and an Appendix. Further detail may be found in [3, 4].\n\nNote that the term containing G$_{0}$$\\_{,s}$ ( k ) does not con- tribute to the above sum, and we may set G$\\_{0}$$_{,s}$ = 0 with- out loss of generality. By utilizing the Taylor series of the modified Bessel function I$_{m}$ , we may write ψ in the form of a circular cylinder harmonic (multipole) expansion:\n\nwhere for α = s , c ,\n\nThe functions C [ n ] $_{m,α}$, known as on-axis gradients [3, 4], are defined by\n\nWe see that even powers of ρ and the combinations ρ $^{m}$cos mφ and ρ $^{m}$sin mφ are analytic (in fact, polyno- mial) functions of x and y .\n\nA general solution ψ satisfying the Laplace equation and analytic near the axis ρ = 0 takes the form\n\nNote that\n\nWe will require an expansion of (6) in the transverse variables x and y . Define the polynomials\n\nfor integer l ≥ 0 and m ≥ 0. In Cartesian coordinates we then have:\n\nNote that each polynomial F l,m α is homogeneous of degree 2 l + m .\n\nfrom which it follows that, for non-negative integers l and m ,\n\nWe note for future use that (2) can be written in the form\n\nSince we wish to describe straight beam-line elements, it is convenient to work initially in circular cylindrical coordinates ρ , φ , and z with\n\nIn a current-free region the magnetic field B is curl free, and can therefore be described most simply in terms of a magnetic scalar potential ψ . Because B is also di- vergence free, ψ must obey the Laplace equation\n\n2\n\n$$ρ $^{m}$cos mφ = R e [( x + iy ) $^{m}$] , (4b)$$\n\n$$ρ $^{m}$sin mφ = I m [( x + iy ) $^{m}$] . (4c)$$\n\n$$ψ ( ρ, φ, z ) = ∞ ∑ m =0 ∫ ∞ −∞ dk I$_{m}$ ( kρ ) e ikz [ G$_{m,s}$ ( k ) sin mφ + G$_{m,c}$ ( k ) cos mφ ] . (5)$$\n\n$$ψ ( ρ, φ, z ) = ∞ ∑ m =0 [ ψ$_{m,s}$ ( ρ, z ) sin mφ + ψ$_{m,c}$ ( ρ, z ) cos mφ ] , (6)$$\n\n$$ψ$_{m,α}$ ( ρ, z ) = ∞ ∑ l =0 ( − 1) $^{l}$m ! 2 $^{l}$l !( l + m )! C [2 l ] $_{m,α}$( z ) ρ 2 l + $^{m}$. (7)$$\n\n$$C [ n ] $_{m,α}$( z ) = i n 2 $^{m}$m ! ∫ ∞ −∞ dk e $^{ikz}$km + $^{n}$G$_{m,α}$ ( k ) . (8)$$\n\n$$C [ n ] $_{m,α}$( z ) = d $^{n}$C [0] $_{m,α}$( z ) /dz $^{n}$. (9)$$\n\n$$F l,m s = ( x 2 + y $^{2}$) $^{l}$I m ( x + iy ) $^{m}$, (10a)$$\n\n$$F l,m c = ( x 2 + y $^{2}$) $^{l}$R e ( x + iy ) $^{m}$, (10b)$$\n\n$$ψ ( x, y, z ) = ∞ ∑ l =0 ∞ ∑ m =0 ( − 1) $^{l}$m ! 2 $^{l}$l !( l + m )! $^{[}$C [2 l ] $_{m,s}$( z ) F l,m s ( x, y ) + C [2 l ] $_{m,c}$( z ) F l,m c ( x, y ) $^{]}$. (11)$$\n\n$$ρ 2 ℓ = ( x 2 + y $^{2}$) $^{ℓ}$, (4a)$$\n\n$$x + iy = ρe iφ (3)$$\n\n$$x = ρ cos φ, y = ρ sin φ. (2)$$\n\n$$∇ $^{2}$ψ = 0 . (1)$$\n\n## II. CYLINDRICAL HARMONIC EXPANSIONS\n\n## A. Scalar Potential" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6982392359530373, + "doc_id": "d4024ea6952a3ffb9a8cdb6163d3eeea038b8dbe44119e0280dc13ac4803402f", + "edit_distance": 0.3940345368916798, + "f1_score": 0.9165596919127085, + "meteor": 0.6901575019761836, + "precision": 0.952, + "pred_md": "arXiv:1001.0764v2 [cond-mat.str-el] 13 Jan 2010\n\n## Optical Integral and Sum Rule Violation\n\nSaurabh Maiti, Andrey V. Chubukov\n\nDepartment of Physics, University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wisconsin 53706, USA\n\n(Dated: November 9, 2018)\n\nThe purpose of this work is to investigate the role of the lattice in the optical Kubo sum rule in the cuprates. We compute conductivities, optical integrals W , and ∆ W between superconducting and normal states for 2-D systems with lattice dispersion typical of the cuprates for four different models - a dirty BCS model, a single Einstein boson model, a marginal Fermi liquid model, and a collective boson model with a feedback from superconductivity on a collective boson. The goal of the paper is two-fold. First, we analyze the dependence of W on the upper cut-off ( ω c ) placed on the optical integral because in experiments W is measured up to frequencies of order bandwidth. For a BCS model, the Kubo sum rule is almost fully reproduced at ω c equal to the bandwidth. But for other models only 70%-80% of Kubo sum rule is obtained up to this scale and even less so for ∆ W , implying that the Kubo sum rule has to be applied with caution. Second, we analyze the sign of ∆ W . In all models we studied ∆ W is positive at small ω c , then crosses zero and approaches a negative value at large ω c , i.e. the optical integral in a superconductor is smaller than in a normal state. The point of zero crossing, however, increases with the interaction strength and in a collective boson model becomes comparable to the bandwidth at strong coupling. We argue that this model exhibits the behavior consistent with that in the cuprates.\n\n## I. INTRODUCTION\n\nThe analysis of sum rules for optical conductivity has a long history. Kubo, in an extensive paper 1 in 1957, used a general formalism of a statistical theory of irreversible processes to investigate the behavior of the conductivity in electronic systems. For a system of interacting electrons, he derived the expression for the integral of the real part of a (complex) electric conductivity σ (Ω) and found that it is independent on the nature of the interactions and reduces to\n\n\n\nHere n is the density of the electrons in the system and m is the bare mass of the electron. This expression is exact provided that the integration extends truly up to infinity, and its derivation uses the obvious fact that at energies higher than the total bandwidth of a solid, electrons behave as free particles.\n\nThe independence of the r.h.s. of Eq. (1) on temperature and the state of a solid (e.g., a normal or a superconducting state - henceforth referred to as NS and SCS respectively) implies that, while the functional form of σ (Ω) changes with, e.g., temperature, the total spectral weight is conserved and only gets redistributed between different frequencies as temperature changes. This conservation of the total weight of σ (Ω) is generally called a sum rule.\n\nOne particular case, studied in detail for conventional superconductors, is the redistribution of the spectral weight between normal and superconducting states. This is known as Ferrel-Glover-Tinkham (FGT) sum rule: 2,3\n\n\n\nwhere n s is the superfluid density, and πn e / s 2 (2 m ) is\n\nthe spectral weight under the δ -functional piece of the conductivity in the superconducting state.\n\nIn practice, the integration up to an infinite frequency is hardly possible, and more relevant issue for practical applications is whether a sum rule is satisfied, at least approximately, for a situation when there is a single electron band which crosses the Fermi level and is well separated from other bands. Kubo considered this case in the same paper of 1957 and derived the expression for the 'band', or Kubo sum rule\n\n\n\nwhere n /vector k is the electronic distribution function and ε /vector k is the band dispersion. Prime in the upper limit of the integration has the practical implication that the upper limit is much larger than the bandwidth of a given band which crosses the Fermi level, but smaller than the frequencies of interband transitions. Interactions with external objects, e.g., phonons or impurities, and interactions between fermions are indirectly present in the distribution function which is expressed via the full fermionic Green's function as n /vector k = T ∑ m G /vector ( k, ω m ). For /epsilon1 k = k / 2 2 m , ∇ 2 /vector k x ε /vector k = 1 /m , W K = πne / 2 (2 m ), and Kubo sum rule reduces to Eq. (1). In general, however, ε /vector k is a lattice dispersion, and Eqs. (1) and (3) are different. Most important, W K in Eq. (3) generally depends on T and on the state of the system because of n /vector k . In this situation, the temperature evolution of the optical integral does not reduce to a simple redistribution of the spectral weight - the whole spectral weight inside the conduction band changes with T . This issue was first studied in detail by Hirsch 4 who introduced the now-frequently-used notation 'violation of the conductivity sum rule'.\n\nIn reality, as already pointed out by Hirsch, there is no true violation as the change of the total spectral weight", + "recall": 0.8836633663366337, + "true_md": "# Optical Integral and Sum Rule Violation\n\nSaurabh Maiti, Andrey V. Chubukov\n\nDepartment of Physics, University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wisconsin 53706, USA\n\n(Dated: November 9, 2018)\n\nThe purpose of this work is to investigate the role of the lattice in the optical Kubo sum rule in the cuprates. We compute conductivities, optical integrals W , and Δ W between superconducting and normal states for 2-D systems with lattice dispersion typical of the cuprates for four different models – a dirty BCS model, a single Einstein boson model, a marginal Fermi liquid model, and a collective boson model with a feedback from superconductivity on a collective boson. The goal of the paper is two-fold. First, we analyze the dependence of W on the upper cut-off ( ω c ) placed on the optical integral because in experiments W is measured up to frequencies of order bandwidth. For a BCS model, the Kubo sum rule is almost fully reproduced at ω c equal to the bandwidth. But for other models only 70%-80% of Kubo sum rule is obtained up to this scale and even less so for Δ W , implying that the Kubo sum rule has to be applied with caution. Second, we analyze the sign of Δ W . In all models we studied Δ W is positive at small ω c , then crosses zero and approaches a negative value at large ω c , i.e. the optical integral in a superconductor is smaller than in a normal state. The point of zero crossing, however, increases with the interaction strength and in a collective boson model becomes comparable to the bandwidth at strong coupling. We argue that this model exhibits the behavior consistent with that in the cuprates.\n\nThe analysis of sum rules for optical conductivity has a long history. Kubo, in an extensive paper 1 in 1957, used a general formalism of a statistical theory of irreversible processes to investigate the behavior of the conductivity in electronic systems. For a system of interacting elec- trons, he derived the expression for the integral of the real part of a (complex) electric conductivity σ (Ω) and found that it is independent on the nature of the interactions and reduces to\n\n∫ Here n is the density of the electrons in the system and m is the bare mass of the electron. This expression is exact provided that the integration extends truly up to infinity, and its derivation uses the obvious fact that at energies higher than the total bandwidth of a solid, elec- trons behave as free particles.\n\nThe independence of the r.h.s. of Eq. (1) on temper- ature and the state of a solid (e.g., a normal or a super- conducting state – henceforth referred to as NS and SCS respectively) implies that, while the functional form of σ (Ω) changes with, e.g., temperature, the total spectral weight is conserved and only gets redistributed between different frequencies as temperature changes. This con- servation of the total weight of σ (Ω) is generally called a sum rule.\n\nOne particular case, studied in detail for conventional superconductors, is the redistribution of the spectral weight between normal and superconducting states. This is known as Ferrel-Glover-Tinkham (FGT) sum rule: 2,3\n\nwhere n$_{s}$ is the superfluid density, and πn$_{s}$e $^{2}$/ (2 m ) is\n\nIn reality, as already pointed out by Hirsch, there is no true violation as the change of the total spectral weight\n\nwhere n$_{⃗}$ k is the electronic distribution function and ε$_{⃗}$ k is the band dispersion. Prime in the upper limit of the inte- gration has the practical implication that the upper limit is much larger than the bandwidth of a given band which crosses the Fermi level, but smaller than the frequencies of interband transitions. Interactions with external ob- jects, e.g., phonons or impurities, and interactions be- tween fermions are indirectly present in the distribution function which is expressed via the full fermionic Green’s function as n$_{⃗}$ k = T ∑ $_{m}$G ( ⃗ k, ω$_{m}$ ). For ϵ$_{k}$ = k $^{2}$/ 2 m , ∇ 2 ⃗ $_{k$\\_{x}$}$ε$_{⃗}$ k = 1 /m , W$_{K}$ = πne $^{2}$/ (2 m ), and Kubo sum rule reduces to Eq. (1). In general, however, ε$_{⃗}$ k is a lattice dispersion, and Eqs. (1) and (3) are different. Most im- portant, W$_{K}$ in Eq. (3) generally depends on T and on the state of the system because of n$_{⃗}$ $_{k}$. In this situation, the temperature evolution of the optical integral does not reduce to a simple redistribution of the spectral weight – the whole spectral weight inside the conduction band changes with T . This issue was first studied in detail by Hirsch 4 who introduced the now-frequently-used nota- tion “violation of the conductivity sum rule”.\n\nIn practice, the integration up to an infinite frequency is hardly possible, and more relevant issue for practical applications is whether a sum rule is satisfied, at least ap- proximately, for a situation when there is a single electron band which crosses the Fermi level and is well separated from other bands. Kubo considered this case in the same paper of 1957 and derived the expression for the “band”, or Kubo sum rule\n\nthe spectral weight under the δ -functional piece of the conductivity in the superconducting state.\n\narXiv:1001.0764v2 [cond-mat.str-el] 13 Jan 2010\n\n## I. INTRODUCTION\n\n$$∫ ∞ 0 Re σ (Ω) d Ω = π 2 ne 2 m (1) is the density of the electrons in the system and$$\n\n$$∫ ‘ ∞ ′ 0 Re σ (Ω) d Ω = W$_{K}$ = πe 2 2 N ∑ ⃗ k ∇ 2 ⃗ $_{k$_{x}$}$ε$_{⃗}$ $_{k}$n$_{⃗}$ k (3)$$\n\n$$∫ ∞ 0+ Re σ$_{NS}$ (Ω) = ∫ ∞ 0+ Re σ$_{sc}$ (Ω) + πn$_{s}$e 2 2 m (2)$$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9660523516844798, + "doc_id": "a1e5e515d5c812b303dab561095ccc7c54dd9a28c26f2b4d5b7a7c03d40928b9", + "edit_distance": 0.042042042042042045, + "f1_score": 0.996742671009772, + "meteor": 0.9910337770890341, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "h)\n\n- i) Zeitpunkt, bis zu dem die Bauleistungen beendet werden sollen oder Dauer des Bauleistungsauftrags; sofern möglich Zeitpunkt, zu dem die Bauleistungen begonnen werden sollen:\n- i) Baubeginn: 23.08.2021 Bauende: 26.11.2021\n- j) gegebenenfalls Angaben nach § 8 Abs. 2 Nr. 3 VOB/A zur Nichtzulassung von Nebenangeboten:\n- j) Nebenangebote sind nicht zugelassen\n- k) gegebenenfalls Angaben nach § 8 Absatz 2 Nummer 4 zur Nichtzulassung der Abgabe mehrerer Hauptangebote:\n- k) Mehrere Hauptangebote sind nicht zugelassen\n- l) Name und Anschrift, Telefon- und Faxnummer, Email-Adresse der Stelle, bei der die Vergabeunterlagen und zusätzliche Unterlagen angefordert und eingesehen werden können; bei Veröffentlichung der Auftragsbekanntmachung auf einem Internetportal die Angabe einer Internetadresse, unter der die Vergabeunterlagen unentgeltlich, uneingeschränkt, vollständig und direkt abgerufen werden können; § 11 Absatz 7 VOB/A bleibt unberührt\n- l) www.vergabe.bayern.de https://www.myorder.rib.de/public/informations\n- m) Gegebenenfalls Höhe und Bedingungen für die Zahlung des Betrags, der für die Unterlagen zu entrichten ist:\n\nm)\n\n- n) Bei Teilnahmeantrag: Frist für den Eingang der Anträge auf Teilnahme, Anschrift, an die diese Anträge zu richten sind, Tag, an dem die Aufforderungen zur Angebotsabgabe spätestens abgesandt werden:\n\nn)\n\n- o) Frist für den Eingang der Angebote und die Bindefrist:\n- o) 29.06.2021 11:00\n\n29.07.2021\n\n- p) Anschrift, an die die Angebote zu richten sind, gegebenenfalls auch Anschrift, an die Angebote elektronisch zu übermitteln sind:\n- p) Elektronische Angebote sind über www.vergabe.bayern.de abzugeben\n- q) Sprache, in der die Angebote abgefasst sein müssen:\n- q) Deutsch\n- r) Die Zuschlagskriterien, sofern diese nicht in den Vergabeunterlagen genannt werden, und gegebenenfalls deren Gewichtung:\n\nr)\n\nAdB - NL Südbayern - Anschreiben Bekanntmachung Inland - Bekanntmachung Ausschreibung National 01-21\n\nSeite 2", + "recall": 0.9935064935064936, + "true_md": "h)\n\n- i) Zeitpunkt, bis zu dem die Bauleistungen beendet werden sollen oder Dauer des Bauleistungsauftrags; sofern möglich Zeitpunkt, zu dem die Bauleistungen begonnen werden sollen: \n\n- i) Baubeginn: 23.08.2021 Bauende: 26.11.2021\n\n- j) gegebenenfalls Angaben nach § 8 Abs. 2 Nr. 3 VOB/A zur Nichtzulassung von Nebenangeboten: \n\n- j) Nebenangebote sind nicht zugelassen\n\n- k) gegebenenfalls Angaben nach § 8 Absatz 2 Nummer 4 zur Nichtzulassung der Abgabe mehrerer Hauptangebote: \n\n- k) Mehrere Hauptangebote sind nicht zugelassen\n\n- l) Name und Anschrift, Telefon- und Faxnummer, Email-Adresse der Stelle, bei der die Vergabeunterlagen und zusätzliche Unterlagen angefordert und eingesehen werden können; bei Veröffentlichung der Auftragsbekanntmachung auf einem Internetportal die Angabe einer Internetadresse, unter der die Vergabeunterlagen unentgeltlich, uneingeschränkt, vollständig und direkt abgerufen werden können; § 11 Absatz 7 VOB/A bleibt unberührt \n\n- l) www.vergabe.bayern.de https://www.myorder.rib.de/public/informations\n\n- m) Gegebenenfalls Höhe und Bedingungen für die Zahlung des Betrags, der für die Unterlagen zu entrichten ist: \n\n- n) Bei Teilnahmeantrag: Frist für den Eingang der Anträge auf Teilnahme, Anschrift, an die diese Anträge zu richten sind, Tag, an dem die Aufforderungen zur Angebotsabgabe spätestens abgesandt werden: \n\n- o) Frist für den Eingang der Angebote und die Bindefrist: \n\n- o) 29.06.2021 11:00 29.07.2021\n\n- p) Anschrift, an die die Angebote zu richten sind, gegebenenfalls auch Anschrift, an die Angebote elektronisch zu übermitteln sind:\n\n- p) Elektronische Angebote sind über www.vergabe.bayern.de abzugeben\n\n- q) Sprache, in der die Angebote abgefasst sein müssen: \n\n- q) Deutsch\n\n- r) Die Zuschlagskriterien, sofern diese nicht in den Vergabeunterlagen genannt werden, und gegebenenfalls deren Gewichtung: \n\nAdB – NL Südbayern – Anschreiben Bekanntmachung Inland - Bekanntmachung Ausschreibung National 01-21 Seite 2\n\nr)\n\nn)\n\nm)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8763948020798797, + "doc_id": "a32681fb259e09ab5d1aada72033cd4bf03ee8de7d7bc8beacea835c63ffea77", + "edit_distance": 0.21587301587301588, + "f1_score": 0.9968652037617556, + "meteor": 0.9007020895264191, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Bezeichnung der Bauleistung:\n\nA-01654-00\n\nH3.097 N Salzhalle SP Holledau\n\nA0165400007\n\nBAU-ELT\n\n(wie Aufforderung zur Angebotsabgabe)\n\n## Auftragsbekanntmachung National\n\n## Bekanntmachungstext\n\n(Der unter a) bis x) angegebene Text dient nur zur Erläuterung; er ist aus drucktechnischen Gründen in der Bekanntmachung nicht zu wiederholen)\n\n- a) Name, Anschrift, Telefon-, Telefaxnummer sowie Emailadresse des Auftraggebers (Vergabestelle):\n- a) Die Autobahn GmbH des Bundes - Niederlassung Südbayern\n\nSeidlstr. 7-11 Tel.: +49 8954552-3444\n\n80335 München Fax.: +49 8954552-3644\n\n- b) Gewähltes Vergabeverfahren:\n- b) Öffentliche Ausschreibung (VOB/A)\n- c) ggf. Auftragsvergabe auf elektronischem Wege und Verfahren der Ver- und Entschlüsselung:\n- c) elektronisch in Textform\n- d) Art des Auftrages:\n- d) Ausführung von Bauleistungen\n- e) Ort der Ausführung:\n- e) A 9 Stützpunkt Holledau 85283 Wolnzach\n- f) Art und Umfang der Leistung:\n- f) A 9 Salzhalle Stützpunkt Holledau: BAU-Elektroinstallation; Zusammenfassung (Grobmassen):\n-  1 Stk. Kleinwandlermessanlage,\n-  2 Stk. Unterverteilungsanlagen,\n-  1.700 m Kabel und Leitungen,\n-  420 m Verlegesysteme wie Installationskanäle und Installationsrohre,\n-  28 Stk. Schalt- und Installationsgeräte,\n-  32 Stk. LED Leuchten\n- g) Angaben über den Zweck der baulichen Anlage oder des Auftrages, wenn auch Planungsleistungen gefordert werden:\n\ng)\n\n- h) Falls der Auftrag in mehrere Lose aufgeteilt ist, Art und Umfang der einzelnen Lose und Möglichkeit, Angebote für ein, mehrere oder alle Lose einzureichen:\n\nAdB - NL Südbayern - Anschreiben Bekanntmachung Inland - Bekanntmachung Ausschreibung National 01-21\n\nSeite 1", + "recall": 0.99375, + "true_md": "Bezeichnung der Bauleistung: \n\n(wie Aufforderung zur Angebotsabgabe) \n\n# Auftragsbekanntmachung National\n\n## Bekanntmachungstext\n\n(Der unter a) bis x) angegebene Text dient nur zur Erläuterung; er ist aus drucktechnischen Gründen in der Bekanntmachung nicht zu wiederholen)\n\n- a) Name, Anschrift, Telefon-, Telefaxnummer sowie Emailadresse des Auftraggebers (Vergabestelle): \n\n- a) Die Autobahn GmbH des Bundes – Niederlassung Südbayern \n\n- b) Gewähltes Vergabeverfahren: \n\n- b) Öffentliche Ausschreibung (VOB/A)\n\n- c) ggf. Auftragsvergabe auf elektronischem Wege und Verfahren der Ver- und Entschlüsselung: \n\n- c) elektronisch in Textform\n\n- d) Art des Auftrages: \n\n- d) Ausführung von Bauleistungen\n\n- e) Ort der Ausführung: \n\n- e) A 9 Stützpunkt Holledau 85283 Wolnzach \n\n- f) Art und Umfang der Leistung: \n\n- f) A 9 Salzhalle Stützpunkt Holledau: BAU-Elektroinstallation; Zusammenfassung (Grobmassen): \n\n- A 9 Salzhalle Stützpunkt Holledau: BAU-Elektroinstallation; Zusammenfassung (Grobmassen):  1 Stk. Kleinwandlermessanlage,\n\n-  2 Stk. Unterverteilungsanlagen,\n\n-  1.700 m Kabel und Leitungen,\n\n-  420 m Verlegesysteme wie Installationskanäle und Installationsrohre,\n\n-  28 Stk. Schalt- und Installationsgeräte,\n\n-  32 Stk. LED Leuchten \n\n- g) Angaben über den Zweck der baulichen Anlage oder des Auftrages, wenn auch Planungsleistungen gefordert werden: \n\n- h) Falls der Auftrag in mehrere Lose aufgeteilt ist, Art und Umfang der einzelnen Lose und Möglichkeit, Angebote für ein, mehrere oder alle Lose einzureichen: \n\ng)\n\nSeidlstr. 7-11 80335 München\n\nTel.: +49 8954552-3444 Fax.: +49 8954552-3644 \n\nAdB – NL Südbayern – Anschreiben Bekanntmachung Inland - Bekanntmachung Ausschreibung National 01-21 Seite 1\n\nA-01654-00 \n\nA0165400007 \n\nH3.097 N Salzhalle SP Holledau \n\nBAU-ELT" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8594245707219046, + "doc_id": "30613b728f6dd7ec88b198b610b169f799b654bdf20ee94c88eeaa1215bf446a", + "edit_distance": 0.39603960396039606, + "f1_score": 0.9869451697127937, + "meteor": 0.7837806694646505, + "precision": 0.9895287958115183, + "pred_md": "- s) Datum, Uhrzeit und Ort des Eröffnungstermins sowie Angabe, welche Personen bei der Eröffnung der Angebote anwesend sein dürfen:\n- s) 29.06.2021, 11:05 Uhr\n- t) Gegebenenfalls geforderte Sicherheiten:\n\nt)\n\n- u) Wesentliche Finanzierungs- und Zahlungsbedingungen und/oder Hinweise auf die maßgeblichen Vorschriften, in denen sie enthalten sind:\n- u) gemäß VOB/B\n- v) Gegebenenfalls Rechtsform, die die Bietergemeinschaft, nach der Auftragsvergabe haben muss:\n- v) gesamtschuldnerisch haftend mit bevollmächtigtem Vertreter\n- w) Verlangte Nachweise für die Beurteilung der Eignung des Bewerbers oder Bieters:\n\n## w) Beurteilung der Eignung\n\nPräqualifizierte Unternehmen führen den Nachweis der Eignung durch den Eintrag in die Liste des Vereins für die Präqualifikation von Bauunternehmen e.V. (Präqualifikationsverzeichnis). Bei Einsatz von Nachunternehmen ist auf gesondertes Verlangen nachzuweisen, dass diese präqualifiziert sind oder die Voraussetzung für die Präqualifikation erfüllen.\n\nNicht präqualifizierte Unternehmen haben als vorläufigen Nachweis der Eignung mit dem Angebot das ausgefüllte Formblatt \"Eigenerklärung Eignung\" vorzulegen. Bei Einsatz von Nachunternehmen sind auf gesondertes Verlangen die Eigenerklärungen auch für diese abzugeben. Sind die Nachunternehmen präqualifiziert, reicht die Angabe der Nummer, unter der diese in der Liste des Vereins für die Präqualifikation von Bauunternehmen e.V. (Präqualifikationsverzeichnis) geführt werden.\n\nGelangt das Angebot in die engere Wahl, sind die Eigenerklärungen (auch die der Nachunternehmen) auf gesondertes Verlangen durch Vorlage der in der 'Eigenerklärung Eignung' genannten Bescheinigungen zuständiger Stellen zu bestätigen. Bescheinigungen, die nicht in deutscher Sprache abgefasst sind, ist eine Übersetzung in die deutsche Sprache beizufügen.\n\nDas Formblatt \"Eigenerklärung Eignung' liegt den Vergabeunterlagen bei.\n\nDarüber hinaus hat der Bieter zum Nachweis seiner Fachkunde folgende Angaben gemäß § 6a Abs.3 VOB/A:\n\n- x) Name und Anschrift der Stelle, an die sich der Bewerber oder Bieter zur Nachprüfung behaupteter Verstöße gegen Vergabebestimmungen wenden kann:\n- x) Die Autobahn GmbH des Bundes Zentrale - Geschäftsbereich Recht Friedrichstr. 71 10117 Berlin\n\nAdB - NL Südbayern - Anschreiben Bekanntmachung Inland - Bekanntmachung Ausschreibung National 01-21\n\nSeite 3", + "recall": 0.984375, + "true_md": "AdB – NL Südbayern – Anschreiben Bekanntmachung Inland - Bekanntmachung Ausschreibung National 01-21 \n\nSeite 3\n\n- s) Datum, Uhrzeit und Ort des Eröffnungstermins sowie Angabe, welche Personen bei der Eröffnung der Angebote anwesend sein dürfen: \n\n- s) 29.06.2021, 11:05 Uhr\n\n- t) Gegebenenfalls geforderte Sicherheiten: \n\n- u) Wesentliche Finanzierungs- und Zahlungsbedingungen und/oder Hinweise auf die maßgeblichen Vorschriften, in denen sie enthalten sind: \n\n- u) gemäß VOB/B \n\n- v) Gegebenenfalls Rechtsform, die die Bietergemeinschaft, nach der Auftragsvergabe haben muss: \n\n- v) gesamtschuldnerisch haftend mit bevollmächtigtem Vertreter\n\n- w) Verlangte Nachweise für die Beurteilung der Eignung des Bewerbers oder Bieters: \n\n- x) Name und Anschrift der Stelle, an die sich der Bewerber oder Bieter zur Nachprüfung behaupteter Verstöße gegen Vergabebestimmungen wenden kann: \n\nVoraussetzung für die Präqualifikation erfüllen. Nicht präqualifizierte Unternehmen haben als vorläufigen Nachweis der Eignung mit dem Angebot das ausgefüllte Formblatt \"Eigenerklärung Eignung\" vorzulegen. Bei Einsatz von Nachunternehmen sind auf gesondertes Verlangen die Eigenerklärungen auch für diese abzugeben. Sind die Nachunternehmen präqualifiziert, reicht die Angabe der Nummer, unter der diese in der Liste des Vereins für die Präqualifikation von Bauunternehmen e.V. (Präqualifikationsverzeichnis) geführt werden. Gelangt das Angebot in die engere Wahl, sind die Eigenerklärungen (auch die der Nachunternehmen) auf gesondertes Verlangen durch Vorlage der in der „Eigenerklärung Eignung“ genannten Bescheinigungen zuständiger Stellen zu bestätigen. Bescheinigungen, die nicht in deutscher Sprache abgefasst sind, ist eine Übersetzung in die deutsche Sprache beizufügen. \n\nDas Formblatt \"Eigenerklärung Eignung“ liegt den Vergabeunterlagen bei. \n\nDarüber hinaus hat der Bieter zum Nachweis seiner Fachkunde folgende Angaben gemäß § 6a Abs.3 VOB/A:\n\nt)\n\nw) Beurteilung der Eignung Präqualifizierte Unternehmen führen den Nachweis der Eignung durch den Eintrag in die Liste des Vereins für die Präqualifikation von Bauunternehmen e.V. (Präqualifikationsverzeichnis). Bei Einsatz von Nachunternehmen ist auf gesondertes Verlangen nachzuweisen, dass diese präqualifiziert sind oder die Voraussetzung für die Präqualifikation erfüllen. Nicht präqualifizierte Unternehmen haben als vorläufigen Nachweis der Eignung mit dem Angebot das \n\n## w) Beurteilung der Eignung Präqualifizierte Unternehmen\n\n- x) Die Autobahn GmbH des Bundes Zentrale – Geschäftsbereich Recht\n\nx) Die Autobahn GmbH des Bundes Zentrale – Geschäftsbereich Recht Friedrichstr. 71 10117 Berlin" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.3581906894847427, + "doc_id": "d19567f1e6f40c29554c32ff9a0c853005c9fd51bce0f6f93ff7b8886b4bf1b0", + "edit_distance": 0.7665505226480837, + "f1_score": 0.9609756097560976, + "meteor": 0.3354053657821433, + "precision": 0.9704433497536946, + "pred_md": "25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio\n\n(1) There shall be a Ntlo ya Dikgosi for Botswana which shall consist of not less than 33 nor more than 35 Members which shall be constituted as follows-\n\n- ( a ) one person from each of the following areas, which person for the time being performs the functions of the office of Kgosi in respect of such areas-\n- (i) Barolong Farms in the Southern District,\n- (ii) Chobe in the North West District,\n- (iii) Ga Malete in the South East District,\n- (iv) Ga Mmangwato in the Central District,\n- (v) Ghanzi District,\n- (vi) Goo Tawana in the North West District,\n- (vii) Kgalagadi District,\n- (viii) Kgatleng District,\n- (ix) Kweneng District,\n- (x) Ngwaketse in the Southern District,\n- (xi) North East District, and\n- (xii) Tlokweng in the South East District;\n- ( b ) five persons who shall be appointed by the President; and\n- ( c ) such number of persons, not being more than 20, as may be selected under section 78(4)( c ) of this Constitution.\n\n(2) Notwithstanding the provisions of subsection (1)( a ), the number of persons referred to in that subsection may, by virtue of section 78 (5), be less than 12, but not less than 10.\n\n- 78. Designation and selection of Members to Ntlo ya Dikgosi (1) Except for the areas of Ghanzi, Chobe, Kgalagadi and North East, the Members for the areas referred to in section 77(1)( a ) shall be designated to the Ntlo ya Dikgosi according to the established norms and practices of those areas.\n\n(2)The Members for the Ghanzi, Chobe, Kgalagadi and North-East areas referred to in section 77(1)( a ) shall be selected, from their own number, to the Ntlo ya Dikgosi by persons for the time being performing the functions of the office of Kgosi within each of those areas.\n\n(3) For the purpose of selecting the Members under section 77(1)( c ), there shall be 20 regions, as listed in the Second Schedule to this Constitution, the boundaries of which shall be defined by an Act of Parliament.\n\n(4) There shall be a Regional Electoral College for each region composed of paid Dikgosana from that region up to and including a Kgosi, which shall-\n\n- ( a ) when necessary, meet at a Kgotla or other suitable venue;\n- ( b ) be chaired by a senior government official appointed by the Minister responsible for local government; and\n- ( c ) select a Member to the Ntlo ya Dikgosi for that region by election or in such other manner as the Regional Electoral College may agree.\n\n(5) Notwithstanding the provisions of section 77(1)( a ) and subsections (2) and (4)( c ) of this section, the areas of Ghanzi and Kgalagadi shall each have the option of either selecting one Member under subsection (2) of this section or of each selecting two regional Members under subsection (4)( c ) of this section, but may not select Members under both subsections.\n\n## 79. Qualifications for membership of Ntlo ya Dikgosi\n\n(1) A person shall be qualified to be appointed under section 77(1)( b ) as a Member of the Ntlo ya Dikgosi if he or she-\n\n- ( a ) is a citizen of Botswana; and\n- ( b ) has attained the age of 21 years.\n\n(2) No person shall be qualified to be appointed, selected or designated as a Member of the Ntlo ya Dikgosi if he or she-\n\nCopyright Government of Botswana", + "recall": 0.9516908212560387, + "true_md": "25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n(1) There shall be a Ntlo ya Dikgosi for Botswana which shall consist of not less than 33 nor more than 35 Members which shall be constituted as follows — ( a ) one person from each of the following areas, which person for the time being performs \n\n78(4)( c ) of this Constitution. (2) Notwithstanding the provisions of subsection (1)( a ), the number of persons referred to in that subsection may, by virtue of section 78 (5), be less than 12, but not less than 10. 78. Designation and selection of Members to Ntlo ya Dikgosi (1) Except for the \n\nin that subsection may, by virtue of section 78 (5), be less than 12, but not less than 10. 78. Designation and selection of Members to Ntlo ya Dikgosi (1) Except for the areas of Ghanzi, Chobe, Kgalagadi and North East, the Members for the areas referred to in section 77(1)( a ) shall be designated to the Ntlo ya Dikgosi according to the established norms and practices of those areas. (2)The Members for the Ghanzi, Chobe, Kgalagadi and North -East areas referred to in \n\npractices of those areas. (2)The Members for the Ghanzi, Chobe, Kgalagadi and North -East areas referred to in section 77(1)( a ) shall be selected, from their own number, to the Ntlo ya Dikgosi by persons for the time being performing the functions of the office of Kgosi within each of those areas. (3) For the purpose of selecting the Members under section 77(1)( c ), there shall be 20 \n\nthe time being performing the functions of the office of Kgosi within each of those areas. (3) For the purpose of selecting the Members under section 77(1)( c ), there shall be 20 regions, as listed in the Second Schedule to this Constitution, the boundaries of which shall be defined by an Act of Parliament. (4) There shall be a Regional Electoral College for each region composed of paid \n\ndefined by an Act of Parliament. (4) There shall be a Regional Electoral College for each region composed of paid Dikgosana from that region up to and in cluding a Kgosi, which shall— ( a ) when necessary, meet at a Kgotla or other suitable venue;\n\nas the Regional Electoral College may agree. (5) Notwithstanding the provisions of section 77(1)( a ) and subsections (2) and (4)( c ) of this section, the areas of Ghanzi and Kgalagadi shall each have the option o f either selecting one Member under subsection (2) of this section or of each selecting two regional Members under subsection (4)( c ) of this section, but may not select Members under both subsections. 79. Qualifications for membership of Ntlo ya Dikgosi \n\n79. Qualifications for membership of Ntlo ya Dikgosi (1) A person shall be qualified to be appointed under section 77(1)( b ) as a Member of the Ntlo ya Dikgosi if he or she— ( a ) is a citizen of Botswana; and\n\n( b ) has attained the age of 21 years. (2) No person shall bequalified to be appointed, selected or designated as a Member of the Ntlo ya Dikgosi if he or she— \n\nCopyright Government of Botswana\n\n- Dikgosana from that region up to and in cluding a Kgosi, which shall— ( a ) when necessary, meet at a Kgotla or other suitable venue; ( b ) be chaired by a senior government official appointed by the Minister responsible for local \n\n- ( a ) when necessary, meet at a Kgotla or other suitable venue; ( b ) be chaired by a senior government official appointed by the Minister responsible for local government; and ( c ) select a Member to the Ntlo ya Dikgosi for that region by election or in such other manner \n\n- government; and ( c ) select a Member to the Ntlo ya Dikgosi for that region by election or in such other manner as the Regional Electoral College may agree. (5) Notwithstanding the provisions of section 77(1)( a ) and subsections (2) and (4)( c ) of \n\n- Ntlo ya Dikgosi if he or she— ( a ) is a citizen of Botswana; and ( b ) has attained the age of 21 years.\n\n- ( a ) is a citizen of Botswana; and ( b ) has attained the age of 21 years. (2) No person shall bequalified to be appointed, selected or designated as a Member of \n\n- nor more than 35 Members which shall be constituted as follows — ( a ) one person from each of the following areas, which person for the time being performs the functions of the office of Kgosi in respect of such areas - (i) Barolong Farms in the Southern District,\n\n- the functions of the office of Kgosi in respect of such areas (i) Barolong Farms in the Southern District, (ii) Chobe in the North West District,\n\n- (i) Barolong Farms in the Southern District, (ii) Chobe in the North West District, (iii) Ga Malete in the South East District,\n\n- (ii) Chobe in the North West District, (iii) Ga Malete in the South East District, (iv) Ga Mmangwato in the Central District,\n\n- (iii) Ga Malete in the South East District, (iv) Ga Mmangwato in the Central District, (v) Ghanzi District, \n\n- (iv) Ga Mmangwato in the Central District, (v) Ghanzi District, (vi) Goo Tawana in the North West District,\n\n- (v) Ghanzi District, (vi) Goo Tawana in the North West District, (vii) Kgalagadi District, \n\n- (vi) Goo Tawana in the North West District, (vii) Kgalagadi District, (viii) Kgatleng District, \n\n- (vii) Kgalagadi District, (viii) Kgatleng District, (ix) Kweneng District, \n\n- (viii) Kgatleng District, (ix) Kweneng District, (x) Ngwaketse in the Southern District,\n\n- (ix) Kweneng District, (x) Ngwaketse in the Southern District, (xi) North East District, and\n\n- (x) Ngwaketse in the Southern District, (xi) North East District, and (xii) Tlokweng in the South East District;\n\n- (xi) North East District, and (xii) Tlokweng in the South East District; ) five persons who shallbe appointed by the President; and\n\n- (xii) Tlokweng in the South East District; ( b ) five persons who shallbe appointed by the President; and ( c ) such number of persons, not being more than 20, as may be selected under section \n\n- ( b ) five persons who shallbe appointed by the President; and ( c ) such number of persons, not being more than 20, as may be selected under section 78(4)( c ) of this Constitution. (2) Notwithstanding the provisions of subsection (1)( a ), the number of persons referred to \n\n## subsection (4)( c ) of this section, but may not select Members under both subsections. 79. Qualifications for membership of Ntlo ya Dikgosi (1) A person shall be qualified to be appointed under section 77(1)(" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.39747347011330575, + "doc_id": "d1f64cdcae44ff248bbd12baa8d50c7e83b91906dd5705f81adbb2a34f66e05e", + "edit_distance": 0.6557223264540337, + "f1_score": 0.9680589680589681, + "meteor": 0.3534157233729565, + "precision": 0.9899497487437185, + "pred_md": "25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio\n\nAct 1, 1999,\n\nAct 2, 2002,\n\nAct 12, 2002,\n\nAct 9, 2005,\n\nS.I. 51, 2005,\n\nS.I. 91, 2006.\n\n[ Date of Commencement: 30th September, 1966 ]\n\n## CHAPTER I\n\nThe Republic (ss 1-2)\n\n## 1. Declaration of Republic\n\nBotswana is a sovereign Republic.\n\n## 2. Public Seal\n\nThe Public Seal of the Republic shall be such device as may be prescribed by or under an Act of Parliament.\n\n## CHAPTER II\n\n## Protection of Fundamental Rights and Freedoms of the Individual (ss 3-19) 3. Fundamental rights and freedoms of the individual\n\nWhereas every person in Botswana is entitled to the fundamental rights and freedoms of the individual, that is to say, the right, whatever his or her race, place of origin, political opinions, colour, creed or sex, but subject to respect for the rights and freedoms of others and for the public interest to each and all of the following, namely-\n\n- ( a ) life, liberty, security of the person and the protection of the law;\n- ( b ) freedom of conscience, of expression and of assembly and association; and\n- ( c ) protection for the privacy of his or her home and other property and from deprivation of property without compensation,\n\nthe provisions of this Chapter shall have effect for the purpose of affording protection to those rights and freedoms subject to such limitations of that protection as are contained in those provisions, being limitations designed to ensure that the enjoyment of the said rights and freedoms by any individual does not prejudice the rights and freedoms of others or the public interest.\n\n## 4. Protection of right to life\n\n(1) No person shall be deprived of his or her life intentionally save in execution of the sentence of a court in respect of an offence under the law in force in Botswana of which he or she has been convicted.\n\n(2) A person shall not be regarded as having been deprived of his or her life in contravention of subsection (1) of this section if he or she dies as the result of the use, to such extent and in such circumstances as are permitted by law, of such force as is reasonably justifiable-\n\n- ( a ) for the defence of any person from violence or for the defence of property;\n- ( b ) in order to effect a lawful arrest or to prevent the escape of a person lawfully detained;\n- ( c ) for the purpose of suppressing a riot, insurrection or mutiny; or\n- ( d ) in order to prevent the commission by that person of a criminal offence,\n\nor if he or she dies as the result of a lawful act of war.\n\n## 5. Protection of right to personal liberty\n\n(1) No person shall be deprived of his or her personal liberty save as may be authorized by law in any of the following cases, that is to say-\n\nCopyright Government of Botswana", + "recall": 0.9471153846153846, + "true_md": "25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\nAct 1, 1999, Act 2, 2002, Act 12, 2002, Act 9, 2005, S.I. 51, 2005, S.I. 91, 2006. \n\n[ Date of Commencement: 30th September, 1966 ] \n\nDeclaration of Republic Botswana is a sovereign Republic. Public Seal \n\n2. Public Seal The Public Seal of the Republic shall be such device as may be prescribed by or under an Act of Parliament. CHAPTER II \n\n3. Fundamental rights and freedoms of the individual Whereas every person in Botswana is entitled to the fundamental rights and f reedoms of the individual, that is to say, the right, whatever his or her race, place of origin, political opinions, colour, creed or sex, but subject to respect for the rights and freedoms of others and for the public interest to each and all of the follo wing, namely- ( a ) life, liberty, security of the person and the protection of the law;\n\nproperty without compensation, the provisions of this Chapter shall have effect for the purpose of affording protection to those rights and freedoms subject to such limitations of that protection as are contained in those provisions, being limitationsdesigned to ensure that the enjoyment of the said rights and freedoms by any individual does not prejudice the rights and freedoms of others or the public interest. 4. Protection of right to life \n\n4. Protection of right to life (1) No person shall be deprived of his or her life intentionally save in execution of the sentence of a court in respect of an offence under the law in force in Botswana of which he or she has been convicted. (2) A person shall not be regarded as having been deprived of his or her life in \n\nhas been convicted. (2) A person shall not be regarded as having been deprived of his or her life in contravention of subsection (1) of this section if he or she dies as the result of the use, to such extent and in such circumstances as are permitted by law, of such force as is reasonably justifiable- ( a ) for the defence of any person from violence or for the defe nce of property;\n\n( d ) in order to prevent the commission by that person of a criminal off or if he or she dies as the result of a lawful act of war. 5. Protection of right to personal liberty \n\n5. Protection of right to personal liberty (1) No person shall be deprived of his or her personal liberty save as may be authorized by law in any of the following cases, that is to say- \n\nCopyright Government of Botswana\n\n## or if he or she dies as the result of a lawful act of war. 5. Protection of right to personal liberty (1) No person shall be deprived of his or her personal liberty save as may be authorized by\n\n## interest. 4. Protection of right to life (1) No person shall be deprived of his or her\n\n## CHAPTER I The Republic (ss 1-2)\n\n## CHAPTER I The Republic (ss 1-2)\n\n## 1. Declaration of Republic Botswana is a sovereign Republic.\n\n## Botswana is a sovereign Republic. 2. Public Seal The Public Seal of the Republic shall be such device as may be prescribed by or\n\n## CHAPTER II Protection of Fundamental Rights and Freedoms of the Individual\n\n## CHAPTER II Protection of Fundamental Rights and Freedoms of the Individual (ss 3-19) Fundamental rights and freedoms of the individual\n\n## Protection of Fundamental Rights and Freedoms of the Individual 3. Fundamental rights and freedoms of the individual Whereas every person in Botswana is entitled to the fundamental rights and f\n\n- interest to each and all of the follo wing, namely- ( a ) life, liberty, security of the person and the protection of the law; ( b ) freedom of conscience, of expression and of assembly and association; and\n\n- ( a ) life, liberty, security of the person and the protection of the law; ( b ) freedom of conscience, of expression and of assembly and association; and ( c ) protection for the privacy of his or her home and other property and from deprivatio\n\n- ( b ) freedom of conscience, of expression and of assembly and association; and ( c ) protection for the privacy of his or her home and other property and from deprivatio n of property without compensation, the provisions of this Chapter shall have effect for the purpose of affording protection to those \n\n- justifiable- ( a ) for the defence of any person from violence or for the defe nce of property; ( b ) in order to effect a lawful arrest or to prevent the escape of a person lawfully detained;\n\n- ( a ) for the defence of any person from violence or for the defe nce of property; ( b ) in order to effect a lawful arrest or to prevent the escape of a person lawfully detained; ( c ) for the purpose of suppressing a riot, insurrection or mutiny; or\n\n- ( b ) in order to effect a lawful arrest or to prevent the escape of a person lawfully detained; ( c ) for the purpose of suppressing a riot, insurrection or mutiny; or ( d ) in order to prevent the commission by that person of a criminal off ence, \n\n- ( c ) for the purpose of suppressing a riot, insurrection or mutiny; or ( d ) in order to prevent the commission by that person of a criminal off ence, or if he or she dies as the result of a lawful act of war." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.38697562448016304, + "doc_id": "ef0d7bfb9b06f53f045e0f811e9bd893f8cbb32db9f65a28f3986dfee312c48c", + "edit_distance": 0.5888888888888889, + "f1_score": 0.9674796747967481, + "meteor": 0.37152263867256347, + "precision": 0.9834710743801653, + "pred_md": "25. Staff 26.\n\nClass-child ratio\n\npopulation census in Botswana) by the number of constituencies into which Botswana is divided under section 63 of this Constitution.\n\n- (4) The President shall as soon as practicable after the submission of the report of the Delimitation Commission, by Proclamation published in the Gazette , declare the boundaries of the constituencies as delimited by the Commission.\n- (5) A Proclamation made under subsection (4) of this section shall come into force at the next dissolution of the National Assembly after it is made.\n- (6) The Commission may by regulation or otherwise regulate its own procedure and may, subject to its rules of procedure, act notwithstanding any vacancy in its membership or the absence of any member and its proceedings shall not be invalidated by the presence or participation of any person not entitled to be present at or to participate in those proceedings:\n- Provided that any decision of the Commission shall require the concurrence of a majority of all its members.\n- (7) In the exercise of its functions under this section the Delimitation Commission shall not be subject to the direction or control of any other person or authority.\n- (8) A Delimitation Commission shall stand dissolved upon the date on which its report is delivered to the President.\n\n## 65A. Appointment of Independent Electoral Commission\n\n- (1) There shall be an Independent Electoral Commission which shall consist of-\n- ( a ) a Chairman who shall be a judge of the High Court appointed by the Judicial Service Commission;\n- ( b ) a legal practitioner appointed by the Judicial Service Commission; and\n- ( c ) five other persons who are fit, proper and impartial, appointed by the Judicial Service Commission from a list of persons recommended by the All Party Conference.\n- (2) Where the All Party Conference fail to agree on all or any number of persons referred to in subsection (1)( c ) of this section up to dissolution of Parliament, the Judicial Service Commission shall appoint such person or persons as are necessary to fill any vacancy.\n- (3) For the purposes of this section, \"All Party Conference\" means a meeting of all registered political parties convened from time to time by the Minister.\n- (4) The first appointments of the Chairman and the Members of the Commission shall be made not later than 31st January, 1999, and thereafter subsequent appointments shall be made at the last dissolution of every two successive lives of Parliament.\n- (5) The Chairman and the members of the Commission shall hold office for a period of two successive lives of Parliament.\n- (6) A person shall not be qualified to be appointed as a member of the Independent Electoral Commission if-\n- ( a ) he or she has been declared insolvent or adjudged or otherwise declared bankrupt under any law in force in any part of the Commonwealth and has not been discharged, or has made a composition with his or her creditors and has not paid his or her debts in full; or\n- ( b ) he or she has been convicted of any offence involving dishonesty in any country.\n- (7) A person appointed a member of the Commission shall not enter upon the duties of the\n- office of Commissioner until he or she has taken and subscribed the oath of allegiance and such oath for the due execution of his or her office as may be prescribed by an Act of Parliament.\n- (8) The Commission shall regulate its own procedure and proceedings.\n- (9) The Chairman shall preside over all proceedings, and in his or her absence, the legal practitioner referred to in subsection (1)( b ) shall preside over the proceedings.\n- (10) The quorum shall be four members, one of whom shall be the Chairman or the said legal practitioner.\n\nCopyright Government of Botswana", + "recall": 0.952, + "true_md": "25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\npopulation census in Botswana) by the number of constituencies into which Botswana is divided under section 63 of this Constitution. (4) The President shall as soon as practicable after the submission of the report of the \n\nunder section 63 of this Constitution. (4) The President shall as soon as practicable after the submission of the report of the Delimitation Commission, by Proclamation published in the Gazette , declare the boundaries of the constituencies as delimited by the Commission. (5) A Proclamation made under subsection (4) of this section shall come into force at the \n\nthe constituencies as delimited by the Commission. (5) A Proclamation made under subsection (4) of this section shall come into force at the next dissolution of the National Assembly after it is made. (6) The Commission may by regulation or otherwise regulate its own procedure and may, \n\nnext dissolution of the National Assembly after it is made. (6) The Commission may by regulation or otherwise regulate its own procedure and may, subject to its rules of procedure, act notwithstanding any vacancy in its membership or the absence of any member an d its proceedings shall not be invalidated by the presence or participation of any person not entitled to be present at or to participate in those proceedings: Provided that any decision of the Commission shall require the concurrence of a majority \n\nparticipation of any person not entitled to be present at or to participate in those proceedings: Provided that any decision of the Commission shall require the concurrence of a majority of all its members. (7) In the exercise of its functions under this section the Delimitation Commission shall not \n\nof all its members. (7) In the exercise of its functions under this section the Delimitation Commission shall not be subject to the direction or control of any other person or authority. (8) A Delimitation Commission shall stand dissolved upon the date on which its report is \n\nbe subject to the direction or control of any other person or authority. (8) A Delimitation Commission shall stand dissolved upon the date on which its report is delivered to the President. 65A. Appointment of Independent Electoral Commission \n\n65A. Appointment of Independent Electoral Commission (1) There shall be an Independent Electoral Commission which shall consist of - a Chairman who shall be a judge of theHigh Court appointed by the Judicial Service \n\nCommission from a list of per sons recommended by the All Party Conference. (2) Where the All Party Conference fail to agree on all or any number of persons referred to in subsection (1)( c ) of this section up to dissolution of Parliament, the Judicial Service Commission shall appointsuch person or persons as are necessary to fill any vacancy. (3) For the purposes of this section, \"All Party Conference\" means a meeting of all \n\nCommission shall appointsuch person or persons as are necessary to fill any vacancy. (3) For the purposes of this section, \"All Party Conference\" means a meeting of all registered political parties convened from time to time by the Minister. (4) The first appointments of the Ch airman and the Members of the Commission shall be \n\nregistered political parties convened from time to time by the Minister. (4) The first appointments of the Ch airman and the Members of the Commission shall be made not later than 31st January, 1999, and thereafter subsequent appointments shall be made at the last dissolution of every two successive lives of Parliament. (5) The Chairman and the members of the Com mission shall hold office for a period of two \n\nat the last dissolution of every two successive lives of Parliament. (5) The Chairman and the members of the Com mission shall hold office for a period of two successive lives of Parliament. (6) A person shall not be qualified to be appointed as a member of the Independent \n\nsuccessive lives of Parliament. (6) A person shall not be qualified to be appointed as a member of the Independent Electoral Commission if- ( a ) he or she has been declared insolvent or adjudged or otherwise d eclared bankrupt under \n\n( b ) he or she has been convicted of any offence involvin g dishonesty in any country. (7) A person appointed a member of the Commission shall not enter upon the duties of the office of Commissioner until he or she has taken and subscribed the oath of allegiance and such oath for the due execution of his or her office as may be prescribed by an Act of Parliament. (8) The Commission shall regulate its own procedure and proceedings.\n\noath for the due execution of his or her office as may be prescribed by an Act of Parliament. (8) The Commission shall regulate its own procedure and proceedings. (9) The Chairman shall preside over all proceedings, and in his or her absence, the legal \n\n(8) The Commission shall regulate its own procedure and proceedings. (9) The Chairman shall preside over all proceedings, and in his or her absence, the legal practitioner referred to in subsection (1) ( b ) shall preside over the proceedings. (10) The quorum shall be four members, one of whom shall be the Chairman or the said \n\npractitioner referred to in subsection (1) ( b ) shall preside over the proceedings. (10) The quorum shall be four members, one of whom shall be the Chairman or the said legal practitioner. \n\nCopyright Government of Botswana\n\n- (1) There shall be an Independent Electoral Commission which shall consist of - ( a ) a Chairman who shall be a judge of theHigh Court appointed by the Judicial Service Commission; ( b ) a legal practitioner appointed by the Judicial Service Commission; and \n\n- Commission; ( b ) a legal practitioner appointed by the Judicial Service Commission; and ( c ) five other persons who are fit, proper and impartial, appointed by the Judicial Service \n\n- ( b ) a legal practitioner appointed by the Judicial Service Commission; and ( c ) five other persons who are fit, proper and impartial, appointed by the Judicial Service Commission from a list of per sons recommended by the All Party Conference. (2) Where the All Party Conference fail to agree on all or any number of persons referred \n\n- Electoral Commission if- ( a ) he or she has been declared insolvent or adjudged or otherwise d eclared bankrupt under any law in force in any part of the Commonwealth and has not been discharged, or has made a composition with his or her creditors and has not paid his or her debts in full; or ( b ) he or she has been convicted of any offence involvin g dishonesty in any country.\n\n- made a composition with his or her creditors and has not paid his or her debts in full; or ( b ) he or she has been convicted of any offence involvin g dishonesty in any country. (7) A person appointed a member of the Commission shall not enter upon the duties of the \n\n## delivered to the President. 65A. Appointment of Independent Electoral Commission (1) There shall be an Independent Electoral Commission which shall consist of" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.45036937030509183, + "doc_id": "7b10cfb67016f813ca53b733e20e35def6c2904673266589acf0d30c9128fc8a", + "edit_distance": 0.5580808080808081, + "f1_score": 0.9624060150375939, + "meteor": 0.44172790673009715, + "precision": 0.9896907216494846, + "pred_md": "25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio\n\nProvided that a person appointed under this subsection shall cease to perform the functions of the office of Vice-President-\n\n- (i) if his or her appointment is revoked by the Vice-President;\n- (ii) if he or she ceases to be a Member of the Assembly otherwise than by reason of a dissolution of Parliament; or\n\n(iii)\n\nif the Vice-President ceases to perform the functions of the office of President.\n\n(6) In this section references to Members of the Assembly shall, in the event of Parliament being dissolved, be construed as references to those persons who immediately before the dissolution were Members of the Assembly.\n\n## 40. Salary and allowances of President\n\n- (1) The President shall receive such salary and allowances as may be prescribed by resolution of the National Assembly, which shall be a charge on the general revenues of the Republic.\n- (2) The salary and allowances of the President shall not be altered to his or her disadvantage during his or her period of office.\n- (3) A person who has held the office of President shall receive such pension or, upon the expiration of his or her term of office, such gratuity as may be prescribed by resolution of the National Assembly, which shall be a charge on the Consolidated Fund.\n\n## 41. Protection of President in respect of legal proceedings\n\n- (1) Whilst any person holds or performs the functions of the office of President no criminal proceedings shall be instituted or continued against him or her in respect of anything done or omitted to be done by him or her either in his or her official capacity or in his or her private capacity and no civil proceedings shall be instituted or continued in respect of which relief is claimed against him or her in respect of anything done or omitted to be done in his or her private capacity.\n- (2) Where provision is made by law limiting the time within which proceedings of any description may be brought against any person, the term of any person in the office of President shall not be taken into account in calculating any period of time prescribed by that law which determines whether any such proceedings as are mentioned in subsection (1) of this section may be brought against that person.\n\n## PART II\n\n## The Cabinet (ss 42-46)\n\n## 42. Ministers and Assistant Ministers\n\n- (1) There shall be such offices of Minister of the Government (not exceeding six or such other number as Parliament may from time to time provide) as may be established by Parliament or, subject to the provisions of any Act of Parliament, by the President.\n- (2) There shall be such offices of Assistant Minister (not exceeding three or such number as Parliament may from time to time provide) as may be established by Parliament or, subject to the provisions of any Act of Parliament, by the President.\n- (3) Appointments to the office of Minister or Assistant Minister shall be made by the President from among Members of the National Assembly:\n\nProvided that-\n\n- (i) not more than four persons may be appointed as Minister or Assistant Minister from amongst persons who are not Members of the Assembly but are qualified for election as such; and\n- (ii) if occasion arises for making an appointment to the office of a Minister or an Assistant Minister while Parliament is dissolved a person who was a Member of the Assembly before the dissolution may be appointed as a Minister or an Assistant Minister.\n\n## 43. Tenure of office of Ministers and Assistant Ministers\n\nThe office of any Minister or Assistant Minister shall become vacant-\n\nCopyright Government of Botswana", + "recall": 0.9365853658536586, + "true_md": "- 25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n- 25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n- Provided that- (i) not more than four persons may be appointed as Minister or Assistant Minister from amongst persons who arenot Members of the Assembly but are qualified for election as such; and (ii) if occasion arises for making an appointment to the office of a Minister or an Assistant \n\n- such; and (ii) if occasion arises for making an appointment to the office of a Minister or an Assistant Minister while Parliament is dissolved a person who was a Member of the Assembly beforethe dissolution may be appointed as a Minister or an Assistant Minister. 43. Tenure of office of Ministers and Assistant Ministers \n\n## PART II The Cabinet (ss 42-46)\n\n## PART II The Cabinet (ss 42-46) Ministers and Assistant Ministers\n\n## The Cabinet 42. Ministers and Assistant Ministers (1) There shall be such offices of Minister of the Government (not exceeding six or such\n\n## beforethe dissolution may be appointed as a Minister or an Assistant Minister. 43. Tenure of office of Ministers and Assistant Ministers The office of any Minister or Assistant Minister shall become vacant\n\n## National Assembly, which shall be a charge on the Consolidated Fund. 41. Protection of Pre sident in respect of legal proceedings (1) Whilst any person holds or performs the functions of the office of President no criminal\n\n## dissolution were Members of the Assembly. 40. Salary and allowances of President (1) The President shall receive such salary and allowances as may be prescribed by\n\n- functions of the office of Vice -President- (i) if his or her appointment is revoked by the Vice -President; (ii) if he or she ceases to be a Member of the Assembly otherwise \n\n- (i) if his or her appointment is revoked by the Vice -President; (ii) if he or she ceases to be a Member of the Assembly otherwise than by reason of a dissolution of Parliament; or (iii) if the Vice-President ceases to perform the functions of the office of President.\n\n- dissolution of Parliament; or (iii) if the Vice-President ceases to perform the functions of the office of President. (6) In this section references to Members of the Assembly shall, in the event of Parliament \n\nProvided that a person appointed under this subsection shall cease to perform the functions of the office of Vice -President- (i) if his or her appointment is revoked by the Vice -President; \n\n(iii) if the Vice-President ceases to perform the functions of the office of President. (6) In this section references to Members of the Assembly shall, in the event of Parliament being dissolved, be construed as references to those persons who immediately before the dissolution were Members of the Assembly. 40. Salary and allowances of President \n\n40. Salary and allowances of President (1) The President shall receive such salary and allowances as may be prescribed by resolution of the National Assembly, which shall be a charge on the general revenues of the Republic. (2) The salary and allowances of the President shall not be altered to his or her \n\nRepublic. (2) The salary and allowances of the President shall not be altered to his or her disadvantage during his or her period of office. (3) A person who has held the off ice of President shall receive such pension or, upon the \n\ndisadvantage during his or her period of office. (3) A person who has held the off ice of President shall receive such pension or, upon the expiration of his or her term of office, such gratuity as may be prescribed by resolution of the National Assembly, which shall be a charge on the Consolidated Fund. 41. Protection of Pre sident in respect of legal proceedings\n\n41. Protection of Pre sident in respect of legal proceedings (1) Whilst any person holds or performs the functions of the office of President no criminal proceedings shall be instituted or continued against him or her in respect of anything done or omitted to be done by him or her either in his or her official capacity or in his or her private capacity and no civil proceedings shall be instituted or continued in respect of which relief is claimed against him or her in respect of anything done or omitted to be done in his or he r private capacity. (2) Where provision is made by law limiting the time within which proceedings of any \n\nagainst him or her in respect of anything done or omitted to be done in his or he r private capacity. (2) Where provision is made by law limiting the time within which proceedings of any description may be brought against any person, the term of any person in the office of President shall not be taken into account in calculating any pe riod of time prescribed by that law which determines whether any such proceedings as are mentioned in subsection (1) of this section may be brought against that person. PART II \n\n42. Ministers and Assistant Ministers (1) There shall be such offices of Minister of the Government (not exceeding six or such other number as Parliament may from time to time provide) as may be established by Parliament or, subject to the provisions of any Act of Parliament, by the President. (2) There shall be such offices of Assistant Minister (not exceeding three or such number \n\nor, subject to the provisions of any Act of Parliament, by the President. (2) There shall be such offices of Assistant Minister (not exceeding three or such number as Parliament may from time to time provide) as may be established by Parliament or, subject to the provisions of any Act of Parliament, by the President. (3) Appointments to the office of Minister or Assistant Minister shall be made by the \n\nthe provisions of any Act of Parliament, by the President. (3) Appointments to the office of Minister or Assistant Minister shall be made by the President from among Members of the National Assembly: Provided that- \n\nPresident from among Members of the National Assembly: Provided that- not more than four persons may be appointed as Minister or Assistant Minister from \n\nTenure of office of Ministers and Assistant Ministers The office of any Minister or Assistant Minister shall become vacant - \n\nCopyright Government of Botswana" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4481943460339772, + "doc_id": "48c954187257869e7c70af5fd39769a79dc4c0db0d26d5985b1063c4ec8ba9fc", + "edit_distance": 0.6170212765957447, + "f1_score": 0.9724770642201834, + "meteor": 0.38146189529969143, + "precision": 0.9769585253456221, + "pred_md": "25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio\n\n(11) All issues shall be decided by the decision of the majority of the members present and voting.\n\n(12) The Commission shall be responsible for-\n\n- ( a ) the conduct and supervision of elections of the Elected Members of the National Assembly and members of a local authority, and conduct of a referendum;\n- ( b ) giving instructions and directions to the Secretary of the Commission appointed under section 66 in regard to the exercise of his or her functions under the electoral law prescribed by an Act of Parliament;\n- ( c ) ensuring that elections are conducted efficiently, properly, freely and fairly; and\n- ( d ) performing such other functions as may be prescribed by an Act of Parliament.\n\n(13) The Commission shall on the completion of any election conducted by it, submit a report on the exercise of its functions under the preceding provisions of this section to the Minister for the time being responsible for matters relating to such elections, and that Minister shall, not later than seven days after the National Assembly first meets after he or she has received the report, lay it before the National Assembly.\n\n## 66. Appointment of Secretary to Independent Electoral Commission\n\n(1) There shall be a Secretary to the Independent Electoral Commission referred to in section 65A (in this section referred to as \"the Secretary\").\n\n- (2) The Secretary shall be appointed by the President.\n- (3) The functions of the Secretary shall, subject to the directions and supervision of the Independent Electoral Commission, be to exercise general supervision over the registration of voters for elections of-\n- ( a ) the Elected Members of the National Assembly; and\n- ( b ) the members of any local authority,\n\nand over the conduct of such elections.\n\n(4) A person shall not be qualified to be appointed as Secretary to the Independent\n\n## Electoral Commission if-\n\n- ( a ) he or she is not a citizen of Botswana;\n- ( b ) he or she has been declared insolvent or adjudged or otherwise declared bankrupt under any law in force in any part of the Commonwealth and has not been discharged, or has made a composition with his or her creditors and has not paid his or her debts in full; or\n- ( c ) he or she has been convicted of any offence involving dishonesty in any country.\n- (5) A person shall not enter upon the duties of the office of Secretary until he or she has taken and subscribed to the oath of allegiance and such oath for the due execution of his or her office as may be prescribed by an Act of Parliament.\n- (6) For the purposes of the exercise of his or her functions under subsection (3) of this section, the Secretary may give such directions as he or she considers necessary or expedient to any registering officer, presiding officer or returning officer relating to the exercise by that officer of his or her functions under any law regulating the registration of voters or the conduct of elections, and any officer to whom directions are given under this subsection shall comply with those directions.\n- (7) Subject to the provisions of this section, a person holding office as Secretary shall vacate that office on attaining the age of 65 years or such other age as may be prescribed by an Act of Parliament.\n- (8) A holder of the office of Secretary may be removed from office only for inability to perform the functions of his or her office (whether arising from infirmity of body or mind or from any other cause) or for misbehaviour, and shall not be so removed except in accordance with the provisions of this section.\n\nCopyright Government of Botswana", + "recall": 0.9680365296803652, + "true_md": "- 25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n- 25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n(11) All issues shall be decided by the decision of the majority of the members present and voting. (12) The Commission shall be responsible for - \n\nvoting. (12) The Commission shall be responsible for - the conduct and supervision of elections of the Elected Members of the National \n\n( d ) performingsuch other functions as may be prescribed by an Act of Parliament. (13) The Commission shall on the completion of any election conducted by it, submit a report on the exercise of its functions under the preceding provisions of this section to the Minister for the time being responsible for matters relating to such elections, and that Minister shall, not later than seven days after the National Assembly first meets after he or she has received the report, lay it before the National Assembly. 66. Appointment of Secretary to Independent Electoral Commission\n\n66. Appointment of Secretary to Independent Electoral Commission (1) There shall be a Secretary to the Independent Electoral Commission referred to in section 65A (in this section referred to as \"the Secretary\"). (2) The Secretary shall beappointed by the President. \n\nsection 65A (in this section referred to as \"the Secretary\"). (2) The Secretary shall beappointed by the President. (3) The functions of the Secretary shall, subject to the directions and supervision of the \n\n(2) The Secretary shall beappointed by the President. (3) The functions of the Secretary shall, subject to the directions and supervision of the Independent Electoral Commission, be to exercise general supervision over the registration of voters for elections of - ( a ) the Elected Members of the National Assembly; and \n\n( a ) the Elected Members of the National Assembly; and ( b ) the members of any local authority, and over the conduct of such elections. (4) A person shall not be qualified to be appointed as Secretary to the Independent \n\nvoters for elections of - ( a ) the Elected Members of the National Assembly; and ( b ) the members of any local authority, \n\nand over the conduct of such elections. (4) A person shall not be qualified to be appointed as Secretary to the Independent Electoral Commission if- ( a ) he or she is not acitizen of Botswana;\n\n( c ) he or she has been convicted of any offence involving dishonesty in any country. (5) A person shall not enter upon the duties of the office of Secretary until he or she has taken and subscribed to the oath ofallegiance and such oath for the due execution of his or her office as may be prescribed by an Act of Parliament. (6) For the purposes of the exercise of his or her functions under subsection (3) of this \n\noffice as may be prescribed by an Act of Parliament. (6) For the purposes of the exercise of his or her functions under subsection (3) of this section, the Secretary may give such directions as he or she considers necessary or expedient to any registering officer, presiding officer or returning officer relating to the exercise by that officer of his or her functions under any law regulating the registration of voters or the conduct of elections, and any officer to whom directions are given under this subsection shall comply with those directions. (7) Subject to the provisions of this section, a person holding office as Secretary shall \n\ndirections. (7) Subject to the provisions of this section, a person holding office as Secretary shall vacate that office on attaining the age of 65 years or such o ther age as may be prescribed by an Act of Parliament. (8) A holder of the office of Secretary may be removed from office only for inability to \n\nAct of Parliament. (8) A holder of the office of Secretary may be removed from office only for inability to perform the functions of his or her office (whether arising from infirmity of body or mind or from any other cause) or for misbehaviour, and shall not be so removed except in accordance with the provisions of this section. \n\n- (12) The Commission shall be responsible for - ( a ) the conduct and supervision of elections of the Elected Members of the National Assembly and members of a local authority, and conduct of a referendum; ( b ) giving instructions and directions to the Secretary of t he Commission appointed under \n\n- Assembly and members of a local authority, and conduct of a referendum; ( b ) giving instructions and directions to the Secretary of t he Commission appointed under section 66 in regard to the exercise of his or her functions under the electoral law prescribed by an Act of Parliament; ( c ) ensuring that elections are conducted efficiently, properly, freely and fairly; and\n\n- prescribed by an Act of Parliament; ( c ) ensuring that elections are conducted efficiently, properly, freely and fairly; and ( d ) performingsuch other functions as may be prescribed by an Act of Parliament.\n\n- ( c ) ensuring that elections are conducted efficiently, properly, freely and fairly; and ( d ) performingsuch other functions as may be prescribed by an Act of Parliament. (13) The Commission shall on the completion of any election conducted by it, submit a \n\n- Electoral Commission if- ( a ) he or she is not acitizen of Botswana; ( b ) he or she has been declared insolvent or adjudged or otherwise declared bankrupt under \n\n- ( a ) he or she is not acitizen of Botswana; ( b ) he or she has been declared insolvent or adjudged or otherwise declared bankrupt under any law in force in any part of the Commonwealth and has not been discharged, or has made a composition with his or her creditors and has not paid his or her debts in full; or ( c ) he or she has been convicted of any offence involving dishonesty in any country.\n\n- made a composition with his or her creditors and has not paid his or her debts in full; or ( c ) he or she has been convicted of any offence involving dishonesty in any country. (5) A person shall not enter upon the duties of the office of Secretary until he or she has \n\n## report, lay it before the National Assembly. 66. Appointment of Secretary to Independent Electoral Commission (1) There shall be a Secretary to the Independent Electoral Commission referred to in\n\nCopyright Government of Botswana" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4664873800064942, + "doc_id": "af0874df4a3f4af40c0ca9fedf8ca502ff63371102329e0a50881e35f9cb30aa", + "edit_distance": 0.4369873228933632, + "f1_score": 0.9580573951434878, + "meteor": 0.3941326014970264, + "precision": 0.9863636363636363, + "pred_md": "25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio\n\n- (10) No provision of this Constitution that any person or authority shall not be subject to the direction or control of any other person or authority in the exercise of any functions under this Constitution shall be construed as precluding a court of law from exercising jurisdiction in relation to any question whether that person or authority has performed those functions in accordance with this Constitution or any other law.\n- (11) Where any power is conferred by this Constitution to make any Act, order, regulation or rule, or to give any direction or instruction, the power shall be construed as including the power, exercisable in like manner to amend or revoke any such Act, order, regulation, rule, direction or instruction.\n- (12) Any reference in this Constitution to a law made before 30th September, 1966 shall be construed as a reference to that law as it had effect on 29th September, 1966.\n- (13) The Interpretation Act, 1889 shall apply, with the necessary adaptations, for the purpose of interpreting this Constitution and otherwise in relation thereto as it applies for the purpose of interpreting and in relation to Acts of the Parliament of the United Kingdom.\n\n## FIRST SCHEDULE TO THE CONSTITUTION ( Section 58(2)(b) ) ELECTION OF SPECIALLY ELECTED MEMBERS OF THE NATIONAL ASSEMBLY\n\n- 1. (1) In this Schedule-\n- \"by-election\" means an election to fill a vacancy among the Specially Elected Members occurring otherwise than upon a dissolution of Parliament;\n- \"general election\" means an election to fill the vacancies among the Specially Elected Members occurring upon a dissolution of Parliament;\n- \"the Speaker\" means the Speaker of the National Assembly; and\n\n\"prescribed\" means prescribed by rules made under paragraph 2 of this Schedule.\n\n- (2) At any time when the office of Speaker is vacant or the holder of that office is unable by reason of absence or illness to exercise the functions vested in him or her by this Schedule those functions may be exercised by the Deputy Speaker of the National Assembly or, if there is no Deputy Speaker or the Deputy Speaker is unable by reason of absence or illness to exercise those functions, by such Member of the Assembly (not being the President or Vice-President or a Minister or Assistant Minister) as the Assembly may elect for that purpose.\n- 2. Subject to the provisions of this Schedule the National Assembly may make rules for the election of its Specially Elected Members.\n- 3. Elections of Specially Elected Members shall be conducted by the Speaker and, subject to the provisions of this Schedule and of any rules made under paragraph 2 thereof, shall be conducted in such manner as he or she may direct.\n- 4. (1) The President shall nominate four candidates for election in the case of a general election and he or she shall nominate one candidate for election in the case of a by-election.\n- (2) The names of the four candidates or, as the case may be, the name of the one candidate nominated for election by the President under the foregoing subparagraph shall be presented to the National Assembly in such manner as may be prescribed, and any Elected Member of the Assembly (other than the President if he or she is an Elected Member) shall thereupon be entitled to nominate four candidates for election in the case of a general election and one candidate for election in the case of a by-election.\n- (3) A list of the candidates nominated for election by the President and the Elected Members of the National Assembly under the foregoing provisions of this paragraph shall be prepared, and each Elected Member of the Assembly shall be entitled to vote-\n- ( a ) in the case of a general election, for four candidates; and\n- ( b ) in the case of a by-election, for one candidate,\n\non the list so constituted.\n\n- (4) The vote of every Elected Member of the National Assembly shall be given by ballot in such a manner as not to disclose how he or she has voted.\n- (5) An Elected Member of the National Assembly shall not cast more than one vote for any one candidate.\n\nCopyright Government of Botswana", + "recall": 0.9313304721030042, + "true_md": "25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n(10) No provision of this Constitution that any person or authority shall not be subject to the direction or control of any other person or a uthority in the exercise of any functions under this Constitution shall be construed as precluding a court of law from exercising jurisdiction in relation to any question whether that person or authority has performed those functions in accordance with this Constitution or any other law. (11) Where any power is conferred by this Constitution to make any Act, order, regulation \n\nwith this Constitution or any other law. (11) Where any power is conferred by this Constitution to make any Act, order, regulation or rule, or to give any direction or instruction, the power shall be construed as including the power, exercisable in like manner toamend or revoke any such Act, order, regulation, rule, direction or instruction. (12) Any reference in this Constitution to a law made before 30th September, 1966 shall \n\ninstruction. (12) Any reference in this Constitution to a law made before 30th September, 1966 shall be construed as a reference to that law as it had effect on 29th September, 1966. (13) The Interpretation Act, 1889 shall apply, with the necessary adaptations, for the \n\nbe construed as a reference to that law as it had effect on 29th September, 1966. (13) The Interpretation Act, 1889 shall apply, with the necessary adaptations, for the purpose of interpreting this Constitution and otherwise in relation thereto as it applies for the purpose of interpreting and in relation to Acts of the Parliament of the United Kingdom. FIRST SCHEDULE TO THE CONSTITUTION ( Section 58(2)(b) ) \n\n1. (1) In this Schedule- \"by-election\" means an election to fill a vacancy a\n\n1. (1) In this Schedule- \"by-election\" means an election to fill a vacancy a mong the Specially Elected Members occurring otherwise than upon a dissolution of Parliament; \"general election\" means an election to fill the vacancies among the Specially Elected Members \n\notherwise than upon a dissolution of Parliament; \"general election\" means an election to fill the vacancies among the Specially Elected Members occurring upon a dissolution of Parliament; \"the Speaker\" means the Speaker of the National Assembly; and\n\noccurring upon a dissolution of Parliament; \"the Speaker\" means the Speaker of the National Assembly; and \"prescribed\" means prescribed by rules made under paragraph 2 of this Schedule.\n\n\"the Speaker\" means the Speaker of the National Assembly; and \"prescribed\" means prescribed by rules made under paragraph 2 of this Schedule. (2) At any time when the office of Speaker is vacant or the holder of that office is unable by reason of \n\n\"prescribed\" means prescribed by rules made under paragraph 2 of this Schedule. (2) At any time when the office of Speaker is vacant or the holder of that office is unable by reason of absence or illness to exerci se the functions vested in him or her by this Schedule those functions may be exercised by the Deputy Speaker of the National Assembly or, if there is no Deputy Speaker or the Deputy Speaker is unable by reason of absence or illness to exercise those funct ions, by such Member of the Assembly (not being the President or Vice -President or a Minister or Assistant Minister) as the Assembly may elect for that purpose. 2. Subject to the provisions of this Schedule the National Assembly may make rules for the elec tion of its \n\nmay elect for that purpose. 2. Subject to the provisions of this Schedule the National Assembly may make rules for the elec tion of its Specially Elected Members. 3. Elections of Specially Elected Members shall be conducted by the Speaker and, subject to the provisions \n\nSpecially Elected Members. 3. Elections of Specially Elected Members shall be conducted by the Speaker and, subject to the provisions of this Schedule and of any rules made under paragraph 2 thereof, shall be conducted in such manner as he or she may direct. 4. (1) The President shall nominate four candidates for election in the case of a general election and he or \n\nhe or she may direct. 4. (1) The President shall nominate four candidates for election in the case of a general election and he or she shall nominate one candidate for election in the case of a by -election. (2) The names of the four candidates or, as the case m ay be, the name of the one candidate nominated \n\nshe shall nominate one candidate for election in the case of a by -election. (2) The names of the four candidates or, as the case m ay be, the name of the one candidate nominated for election by the President under the foregoing subparagraph shall be presented to the National Assembly in such manner as may be prescribed, and any Elected Member of the Assembly (other than the President if he or she is an Elected Member) shall thereupon be entitled to nominate four candidates for election in the case of a general election and one candidate for election in the case of a by -election. (3) A list of the candidates nominated for election by t he President and the Elected Members of the \n\ncase of a general election and one candidate for election in the case of a by -election. (3) A list of the candidates nominated for election by t he President and the Elected Members of the National Assembly under the foregoing provisions of this paragraph shall be prepared, and each Elected Member of the Assembly shall be entitled to vote - ( a ) in the case of a general election, for four candidates ; and \n\n( b ) in the case of a by-election, for one candidate, on the list so constituted. (4) The vote of every Elected Member of the National Assembly shall be given by ballot in such a manner \n\non the list so constituted. (4) The vote of every Elected Member of the National Assembly shall be given by ballot in such a manner as not to disclose how he or she has voted. (5) An ElectedMember of the National Assembly shall not cast more than one vote for any one \n\nas not to disclose how he or she has voted. (5) An ElectedMember of the National Assembly shall not cast more than one vote for any one candidate. \n\n- Member of the Assembly shall be entitled to vote - ( a ) in the case of a general election, for four candidates ; and ( b ) in the case of a by-election, for one candidate,\n\n- ( a ) in the case of a general election, for four candidates ( b ) in the case of a by-election, for one candidate, on the list so constituted. \n\nCopyright Government of Botswana\n\n## purpose of interpreting and in relation to Acts of the Parliament of the United Kingdom. FIRST SCHEDULE TO THE CONSTITUTION ( Section 58(2)(b) ) ELECTION OF SPECIALLY ELECTED MEMBERS OF THE NATIONAL ASSEMBLY In this Schedule-" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.48406661100591447, + "doc_id": "be15cbf6856f1d30373579a3a8535d9806759e8f0380b8f34097a130c3b7753f", + "edit_distance": 0.5556492411467117, + "f1_score": 0.9454545454545457, + "meteor": 0.4464347583402898, + "precision": 0.9719626168224299, + "pred_md": "25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio\n\n- (1) Any person other than a member of the Botswana Police Force or the Prison Service who has been removed from office or subjected to any other punishment by the exercise of any powers conferred on any person under the provisions of section 110 of this Constitution may appeal to the Public Service Commission who may dismiss such appeal or allow it wholly or in part.\n- (2) Subject to the provisions of subsection (3) every decision of the Public Service Commission under the provisions of this section shall be final.\n- (3) Notwithstanding anything contained in subsection (2) if the Public Service Commission dismisses an appeal or allows it in part only the person who appealed may appeal to the President.\n- (4) If any person appeals to the President in accordance with the provisions of subsection (3) of this section the President shall either dismiss the appeal or shall order that it be heard by a tribunal appointed by the President, the Chairman of which shall be a person who holds or has held high judicial office or is qualified to be appointed as a judge of the High Court.\n- (5) If the President appoints a tribunal to hear an appeal in accordance with subsection (4) of this section the tribunal shall hear the appeal and shall advise the President whether or not the appeal should be allowed either wholly or in part, and the President shall act in accordance with that advice.\n\n## 112. Powers of President in relation to certain public offices\n\n- (1) The power to appoint a person to hold or act in offices to which this section applies and to remove from office and to exercise disciplinary control over persons holding or acting in such offices shall, subject to the provisions of sections 113 and 114 of this Constitution, vest in the President.\n- (2) The offices to which this section applies are-\n- ( a ) Ambassador, High Commissioner or other principal representative of Botswana in any other country or accredited to any international organisation;\n- ( b ) Secretary to the Cabinet;\n- ( c ) Attorney-General;\n- ( c A) Director of Public Prosecutions;\n- ( d ) Permanent Secretary;\n- ( e ) Commissioner of Police; and\n- ( ) f any other superscale office (other than an office to which this Constitution makes specific provision for appointment or an office to which appointment is made under the provisions of section 104 of this Constitution) which may be prescribed by Act of Parliament.\n\n## 113. Tenure of office of Director of Public Prosecutions (1) Subject to the provisions\n\n- of this section, a person appointed as Director of Public Prosecutions shall hold office for a 5 year renewable term or until he or she attains the age of 60 years, whichever is the earlier.\n- (2) A person holding the office of Director of Public Prosecutions may be removed from office only for inability to perform the functions of his or her office (whether arising from infirmity of body or mind or any other cause) or for misbehaviour or for incompetence and shall not be so removed except in accordance with the provisions of this section.\n- (3) If the President considers that the question of removing a person holding the office of Director of Public Prosecutions from office ought to be investigated then-\n- ( a ) he or she shall appoint a tribunal which shall consist of a Chairman and not less than two other members, who hold or have held high judicial office; and\n- ( b ) the tribunal shall enquire into the matter and report on the facts thereof to the President and advise the President whether the person holding the office of Director of Public Prosecutions ought to be removed from office under this section for inability as aforesaid or for misbehaviour or for incompetence.\n\nCopyright Government of Botswana", + "recall": 0.9203539823008849, + "true_md": "25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n(1) Any person other than a member of the Botswana Police Force or the Prison Service who has been removed from office or subjected to any other punishment by the exercise of any powers conferred on any person under the provisions of section 110 of this Constitution may appeal to the Public Service Commission who may dismiss such appeal or allow it wholly or in part. (2) Subject to the provisions of subsection (3) every de cision of the Public Service \n\npart. (2) Subject to the provisions of subsection (3) every de cision of the Public Service Commission under the provisions of this section shall be final. (3) Notwithstanding anything contained in subsection (2) if the Public Service Commission \n\nCommission under the provisions of this section shall be final. (3) Notwithstanding anything contained in subsection (2) if the Public Service Commission dismisses an appeal or allows it in part only the person who appealed ma y appeal to the President. (4) If any person appeals to the President in accordance with the provisions of subsection \n\nPresident. (4) If any person appeals to the President in accordance with the provisions of subsection (3) of this section the President shall either dismiss the appeal or shall order that it be heard by a tribunal appointed by the Presiden t, the Chairman of which shall be a person who holds or has held high judicial office or is qualified to be appointed as a judge of the High Court. (5) If the President appoints a tribunal to hear an appeal in accordance with subsection (4) \n\nheld high judicial office or is qualified to be appointed as a judge of the High Court. (5) If the President appoints a tribunal to hear an appeal in accordance with subsection (4) of this section the tribunal shall hear the appeal and shall advise the President whether or not the appeal should be allowed either wholly or in part, and the President shall act in accordance with that advice. 112. Powers of President in relation to certa in public offices\n\n112. Powers of President in relation to certa in public offices (1) The power to appoint a person to hold or act in offices to which this section applies and to remove from office and to exercise disciplinary control over persons holding or acting in such offices shall, subject to the provisions of sections 113 and 114 of this Constitution, vest in the President. (2) The offices to which this section applies are - \n\nPresident. (2) The offices to which this section applies are - Ambassador, High Commissioner or other principal representative of Botswana in any \n\nof section 104 of this Constitution) which may be prescribed by Act of Parliament. 113. Tenure of office of Director of Public Prosecutions (1) Subject to the provisions of this section, a person appointed as Director of Public Prosecutions shall hold office for a 5 year renewable term or until he or she attains the age of 60 years, whichever is the earlier. (2) A person holding the office of Director of Public Prosecutions may be removed from \n\nrenewable term or until he or she attains the age of 60 years, whichever is the earlier. (2) A person holding the office of Director of Public Prosecutions may be removed from office only for inability to perform the functions of his or her office (whether arising from infirm ity of body or mind or any other cause) or for misbehaviour or for incompetence and shall not be so removed except in accordance with the provisions of this section. (3) If the President considers that the question of removing a perso n holding the office of \n\nremoved except in accordance with the provisions of this section. (3) If the President considers that the question of removing a perso n holding the office of Director of Public Prosecutions from office ought to be investigated then - ( a ) he or she shall appoint a tribunal which shall consist of a Chairman and not less than two \n\nCopyright Government of Botswana\n\n- (2) The offices to which this section applies are - ( a ) Ambassador, High Commissioner or other principal representative of Botswana in any other country or accredited to any international o rganisation; ( b ) Secretary to the Cabinet;\n\n- other country or accredited to any international o ( b ) Secretary to the Cabinet; ( c ) Attorney-General; \n\n- ( b ) Secretary to the Cabinet; ( c ) Attorney-General; ( c A) Director of Public Prosecutions;\n\n- ( c ) Attorney-General; ( c A) Director of Public Prosecutions; ( d ) Permanent Secretary;\n\n- ( c A) Director of Public Prosecutions; ( d ) Permanent Secretary; ( e ) Commissioner of Police; and \n\n- ( d ) Permanent Secretary; ( e ) Commissioner of Police; and ( f ) any other superscale office (other than an office to which this Const\n\n- ( e ) Commissioner of Police; and ( f ) any other superscale office (other than an office to which this Const itution makes specific provision for appointment or an office to which appointment is made under the provisions of section 104 of this Constitution) which may be prescribed by Act of Parliament. 113. Tenure of office of Director of Public Prosecutions (1) Subject to the provisions \n\n## that advice. 112. Powers of President in relation to certa in public offices (1) The power to appoint a person to hold or act in offices to which this section applies and\n\n- Director of Public Prosecutions from office ought to be investigated then - ( a ) he or she shall appoint a tribunal which shall consist of a Chairman and not less than two other members, who hold or have held high judicial office; an d ( b ) the tribunal shall enquire into the matter and report on the facts thereof to the President \n\n- other members, who hold or have held high judicial office; an d ( b ) the tribunal shall enquire into the matter and report on the facts thereof to the President and advise the President whether the person holding the office of Director of Public Prosecutions ought to be removed from offic e under this section for inability as aforesaid or for misbehaviour or for incompetence." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.47193516258603746, + "doc_id": "b006c9dee1ede61adbbfd916e0d0461ec6cf935be7b91a3ff6b1d70df277c2b6", + "edit_distance": 0.44089732528041414, + "f1_score": 0.9674418604651162, + "meteor": 0.4052349939778983, + "precision": 0.985781990521327, + "pred_md": "25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio\n\n## CHAPTER IX Miscellaneous (ss 125-127)\n\n## 125. Resignations\n\n(1) Any person who is appointed or elected to any office established by this Constitution may resign from that office by writing under his or her hand addressed to the person or authority by whom he or she was appointed or elected:\n\nProvided that in the case of a person who holds office as President his or her resignation from that office shall be addressed to the Chief Justice, in the case of a person who holds office as Speaker or Deputy Speaker of the National Assembly his or her resignation from that office shall be addressed to the Assembly, in the case of an Elected or Specially Elected Member of the Assembly his or her resignation shall be addressed to the Speaker, and in the case of a Member of the Ntlo ya Dikgosi his or her resignation from that office shall be addressed to the Chairman of the Ntlo ya Dikgosi .\n\n- (2) The resignation of any person from any office established by this Constitution shall take effect on the date or at the time indicated in the writing signifying the resignation or, if no such date or time is so indicated, at the time the writing is received by the person or authority to whom it is addressed or by any person authorized by that person or authority to receive it.\n\n## 126. Reappointments and concurrent appointments\n\n- (1) Where any person has vacated any office established by this Constitution, he or she may, if qualified, again be appointed or elected to hold that office in accordance with the provisions of this Constitution.\n- (2) Where a power is conferred by this Constitution upon any person to make any appointment to any office, a person may be appointed to that office notwithstanding that some other person may be holding that office, when that other person is on leave of absence pending the relinquishment of the office; and where two or more persons are holding the same office by reason of an appointment made in pursuance of this subsection, then, for the purposes of any function conferred upon the holder of that office, the person last appointed shall be deemed to be the sole holder of the office.\n\n## 127. Interpretation\n\n- (1) In this Constitution unless the context otherwise requires-\n- \"the Assembly\" means the National Assembly;\n\n\"Botswana\" means the territory that, on 29th September, 1966, was comprised in the former Protectorate of Bechuanaland;\n\n\"financial year\" means the period of 12 months ending on 31st March in any year or on such other day as Parliament may prescribe;\n\n- \"the Gazette \" means the Botswana Government Gazette ;\n\n\"high judicial office\" means the office of a judge of a court of unlimited jurisdiction in civil and criminal matters in Botswana, a Commonwealth country or in any country outside the Commonwealth that may be prescribed by Parliament or the office of judge of a court having jurisdiction in appeals from such a court;\n\n- ''Kgosana'' (pl. Dikgosana) means Headman;\n- ''Kgosi'' (pl. Dikgosi) means Chief or Sub-Chief as defined in the Bogosi Act;\n- \"oath\" includes affirmation;\n- \"the oath of allegiance\" means such oath of allegiance as may be prescribed by law;\n\n\"public office\" means, subject to the provisions of subsections (2) and (3) of this section, an office of emolument in the public service;\n\n- \"public officer\" means a person holding or acting in any public office;\n- \"the public service\" means the civil service of the Government;\n\nCopyright Government of Botswana", + "recall": 0.9497716894977168, + "true_md": "25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n125. Resignations (1) Any person who is appointed or elected to any office established by this Constitution may resign from that office by writing under his or her hand addressed to the person or authority by whom he or she was appointed or elected: Provided that in the case of a person who holds office as President his or her resignation \n\nby whom he or she was appointed or elected: Provided that in the case of a person who holds office as President his or her resignation from that office shall be addressed to the Chief Justice, in the case of a person w ho holds office as Speaker or Deputy Speaker of the National Assembly his or her resignation from that office shall be addressed to the Assembly, in the case of an Elected or Specially Elected Member of the Assembly his or her resignation shall be addresse d to the Speaker, and in the case of a Member of the Ntlo ya Dikgosi his or her resignation from that office shall be addressed to the Chairman of the Ntlo ya Dikgosi . (2) The resignation of any person from any office established by this Constitution shall \n\nthe Ntlo ya Dikgosi . (2) The resignation of any person from any office established by this Constitution shall take effect on the date or at the time indicated in the writing signifying the resignation or, if no such date or time is so indicated, at the time the writing is received by the person or authority to whom it is addressed or by any person authorized by that person or authority to receive it. 126. Reappointments and concurrent appointments \n\n126. Reappointments and concurrent appointments (1) Where any person has vacated any office established by this Constitution, he or she may, if qualified, again be appointed or elected to hold that office in accordance with the provisions of this Constitution. (2) Where a power is conferred by this Constitution upon any person to make any \n\nprovisions of this Constitution. (2) Where a power is conferred by this Constitution upon any person to make any appointment to any office, a person may be appointed to that office notwithstanding that some other person maybe holding that office, when that other person is on leave of absence pending the relinquishment of the office; and where two or more persons are holding the same office by reason of an appointment made in pursuance of this subsection, then, for the purpos es of any function conferred upon the holder of that office, the person last appointed shall be deemed to be the sole holder of the office. 127. Interpretation \n\n127. Interpretation (1) In this Constitution unless the context otherwise requires - \"the Assembly\" means the National Assembly; \n\n(1) In this Constitution unless the context otherwise requires \"the Assembly\" means the National Assembly; \"Botswana\" means the territory that, on 29th September, 1966, was comprised in the \n\n\"the Assembly\" means the National Assembly; \"Botswana\" means the territory that, on 29th September, 1966, was comprised in the former Protectorate of Bechuanaland; \"financial year\" means the period of 12 months ending on 31st March in any year or on \n\nformer Protectorate of Bechuanaland; \"financial year\" means the period of 12 months ending on 31st March in any year or on such other day as Parliament may prescribe; \"the Gazette \" means the Botswana GovernmentGazette ; \n\nsuch other day as Parliament may prescribe; \"the Gazette \" means the Botswana GovernmentGazette ; \"high judicial office\" means the office of a judge of a court of unlimited jurisdiction in civil \n\n\"the Gazette \" means the Botswana GovernmentGazette ; \"high judicial office\" means the office of a judge of a court of unlimited jurisdiction in civil and criminal matters in Botswana, a Commonwealth country or in any country outsid e the Commonwealth that may be prescribed by Parliament or the office of judge of a court having jurisdiction in appeals from such a court; ''Kgosana'' (pl. Dikgosana) means Headman; \n\njurisdiction in appeals from such a court; ''Kgosana'' (pl. Dikgosana) means Headman; ''Kgosi'' (pl. Dikgosi) means Chief or Sub-Chief as defined in the\n\n''Kgosana'' (pl. Dikgosana) means Headman; ''Kgosi'' (pl. Dikgosi) means Chief or Sub-Chief as defined in the Bogosi Act; \"oath\" includes affirmation;\n\n''Kgosi'' (pl. Dikgosi) means Chief or Sub-Chief as defined in the \"oath\" includes affirmation; \"the oath of allegiance\" means such oath of allegiance as may be prescribed by law;\n\n\"oath\" includes affirmation; \"the oath of allegiance\" means such oath of allegiance as may be prescribed by law; \"public office\" means, subject to the provisions of subsections (2) and (3) of this section, \n\n\"the oath of allegiance\" means such oath of allegiance as may be prescribed by law; \"public office\" means, subject to the provisions of subsections (2) and (3) of this section, an office of emolument in the public service; \"public officer\" means a person holding or acting in any public office;\n\nan office of emolument in the public service; \"public officer\" means a person holding or acting in any public office; \"the public service\" means the civil service of the Government;\n\n\"public officer\" means a person holding or acting in any public office; \"the public service\" means the civil service of the Government;\n\nCopyright Government of Botswana\n\n## the sole holder of the office. 127. Interpretation (1) In this Constitution unless the context otherwise requires\n\n## it is addressed or by any person authorized by that person or authority to receive it. 126. Reappointments and concurrent appointments (1) Where any person has vacated any office established by this Constitution, he or she\n\n## 125. Resignations (1) Any person who is appointed or elected to any office established by this Constitution\n\n## CHAPTER IX Miscellaneous (ss 125-127)\n\n## CHAPTER IX Miscellaneous (ss 125-127)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4160066139200305, + "doc_id": "bc57bf2e1f6ed904973d8c23a37954c075aa3e4fc79a4ee6925c08138fafc60e", + "edit_distance": 0.6111963190184049, + "f1_score": 0.9649122807017544, + "meteor": 0.43469045364605774, + "precision": 0.9865470852017937, + "pred_md": "25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio\n\n- (2) Where any question is referred to the High Court in pursuance of this section, the High Court shall give its decision upon the question and the court in which the question arose shall, subject to any appeal, dispose of the case in accordance with that decision.\n\n## 106. Appeal to Court of Appeal\n\nAn appeal shall lie as of right to the Court of Appeal from any decision of the High Court which involves the interpretation of this Constitution, other than a decision of the High Court under section 69(1) of this Constitution:\n\nProvided that no appeal shall lie from a determination of the High Court under this section dismissing an application on the ground that it is frivolous or vexatious.\n\n## PART V\n\n## Judicial Committee (s 107: repealed)\n\n- 107. [The Judicial Committee was abolished by the Judicial Committee (Abolition of Appeals) Act, 1973, and with effect from 5th October, 1973, no appeal lies to the Judicial Committee.]\n\n## CHAPTER VII\n\n## The Public Service (ss 108-116)\n\n## 108. Power to specify qualifications for certain offices\n\nSubject to the provisions of this Constitution and of any Act of Parliament, power to specify the qualifications and disqualifications for holding such public offices as he or she may constitute shall vest in the President.\n\n## 109. Public Service Commission\n\n(1) There shall be a Public Service Commission for Botswana which shall consist of a Chairman and not less than two nor more than four other members.\n\n- (2) The members of the Public Service Commission shall be appointed by the President.\n- (3) A person shall not be qualified for appointment as a member of the Public Service Commission if he or she is a Member of the National Assembly or a public officer, or is or has within the two years immediately preceding his or her appointment been actively engaged in politics.\n- (4) For the purposes of this section a person shall be deemed to be or to have been actively engaged in politics in circumstances in which he or she would be deemed to be or to have been so engaged for the purposes of section 64(4)( b ) of this Constitution.\n- (5) Subject to the provisions of this section, the office of a member of the Public Service Commission shall become vacant-\n- ( a ) at the expiration of three years from the date of his or her appointment;\n- ( b ) if any circumstances arise that, if he or she were not a member of the Commission, would cause him or her to be disqualified for appointment as such; or\n- ( c ) if he or she is removed from office in accordance with the provisions of subsection (6) of this section.\n\n(6) Subject to subsection (7) of this section a member of the Public Service Commission may be removed from office by the President for inability to discharge the functions of his or her office (whether arising from infirmity of body or mind or any other cause) or for misbehaviour.\n\n(7) If the President considers that the question of removing a member of the Public Service Commission under subsection (6) of this section ought to be investigated, then-\n\n- ( a ) the President shall appoint a tribunal which shall consist of a Chairman and not less than two other members selected by the Chief Justice from among persons who hold or have held high judicial office; and\n- ( b ) the tribunal shall enquire into the matter and report on the facts thereof to the President and recommend to him or her whether the member ought to be removed under subsection (6) of this section, and the President shall act in accordance with that recommendation.\n\nCopyright Government of Botswana", + "recall": 0.944206008583691, + "true_md": "25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n(2) Where any question is referred to the High Court in pursuance of this section, the High Court shall give its decision upon the question and the court in which the question arose shall, subject to any appeal, dispose of the case in accordance with that deci sion. 106. Appeal to Court of Appeal \n\n106. Appeal to Court of Appeal An appeal shall lie as of right to the Court of Appeal from any decision of the High Court which involves the interpretation of this Constitution, other than a decision of the High Court under section 69(1) of this Constitution: Provided that no appeal shall lie from a determination of the High Court under this section \n\nsection 69(1) of this Constitution: Provided that no appeal shall lie from a determination of the High Court under this section dismissing an application on the ground that it is frivolous or vexatious. PART V \n\n108. Power to specify qualifications for certain offices Subject to the provisions of this Constitution and of any Act of Parliament, power to specify the qualifications and disqualifications for holding such public offices as he or she may constitute shall vest in thePresident. 109. Public Service Commission\n\n109. Public Service Commission (1) There shall be a Public Service Commission for Botswana which shall consist of a Chairman and not less than two nor more than four other members. (2) The members of the Public Service Commissio n shall be appointed by the President.\n\nChairman and not less than two nor more than four other members. (2) The members of the Public Service Commissio n shall be appointed by the President. (3) A person shall not be qualified for appointment as a member of the Public Service \n\n(2) The members of the Public Service Commissio n shall be appointed by the President. (3) A person shall not be qualified for appointment as a member of the Public Service Commission if he or she is a Member of the National Assembly or a public officer, or is or has within the two years immediately pr eceding his or her appointment been actively engaged in politics. (4) For the purposes of this section a person shall be deemed to be or to have been \n\npolitics. (4) For the purposes of this section a person shall be deemed to be or to have been actively engaged in politics in circumstances in which he or she would be deemed to be or to have been so engaged for the purposes of section 64(4)( b ) of this Constitution. (5) Subject to the provisions of this section, the office of a member of the Public Service \n\nbeen so engaged for the purposes of section 64(4)( b ) of this Constitution. (5) Subject to the provisions of this section, the office of a member of the Public Service Commission shall become vacant- ( a ) at the expiration of three years from the date of his or h er appointment; \n\nthis section. (6) Subject to subsection (7) of this section a member of the Public Service Commission may be removed from office by the President for inability to d ischarge the functions of his or her office (whether arising from infirmity of body or mind or any other cause) or for misbehaviour. (7) If the President considers that the question of removing a member of the Public \n\noffice (whether arising from infirmity of body or mind or any other cause) or for misbehaviour. (7) If the President considers that the question of removing a member of the Public Service Commission under subsection (6 ) of this section ought to be investigated, then - ( a ) the President shall appoint a tribunal which shall consist of a Chairman and not less than \n\n## subject to any appeal, dispose of the case in accordance with that deci 106. Appeal to Court of Appeal An appeal shall lie as of right to the Court of Appeal from any decision of the High Court\n\n## dismissing an application on the ground that it is frivolous or vexatious. PART V Judicial Committee (s 107: repealed)\n\n## PART V Judicial Committee (s 107: repealed) [The Judicial Committee was abolished by the Judicial Committee (Abolition of Appeals)\n\n## Act, 1973, and with effect from 5th October, 1973, no appeal lies to the Judicial Committee.] CHAPTER VII The Public Service (ss 108-116)\n\n## CHAPTER VII The Public Service (ss 108-116) 108. Power to specify qualifications for certain offices\n\n## The Public Service (ss 108-116) 108. Power to specify qualifications for certain offices Subject to the provisions of this Constitution and of any Act of Parliament, power to specify\n\n## shall vest in thePresident. 109. Public Service Commission (1) There shall be a Public Service Commission for Botswana which shall consist of a\n\n- Judicial Committee (s 107: repealed) 107. [The Judicial Committee was abolished by the Judicial Committee (Abolition of Appeals) Act, 1973, and with effect from 5th October, 1973, no appeal lies to the Judicial Committee.] CHAPTER VII \n\n- Commission shall become vacant- ( a ) at the expiration of three years from the date of his or h er appointment; ( b ) if any circumstances arise that, if he or she were not a member of the Commission, \n\n- ( a ) at the expiration of three years from the date of his or h er appointment; ( b ) if any circumstances arise that, if he or she were not a member of the Commission, would cause him or her to be disqualified for appointment as such; or ( c ) if he or she is removed from office in accordance with the provisions of subsection (6) of \n\n- would cause him or her to be disqualified for appointment as such; or ( c ) if he or she is removed from office in accordance with the provisions of subsection (6) of this section. (6) Subject to subsection (7) of this section a member of the Public Service Commission \n\n- Service Commission under subsection (6 ) of this section ought to be investigated, then - ( a ) the President shall appoint a tribunal which shall consist of a Chairman and not less than two other members selected by the Chief Justice from among persons who hold or have held high judicial office;and ( b ) the tribunal shall enquire into the matter and report on the facts thereof to the President \n\n- held high judicial office;and ( b ) the tribunal shall enquire into the matter and report on the facts thereof to the President and recommend to him or her whether the member ought to be removed under subsection (6) of this section, and the President shall act in accordance with th at recommendation. \n\nCopyright Government of Botswana" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5282633931972368, + "doc_id": "6b3dabab2451021cc9e488d1dfc9ad4c53c772f15548cfe8b84db3690d801610", + "edit_distance": 0.6454849498327759, + "f1_score": 0.9671179883945841, + "meteor": 0.4256322280305313, + "precision": 0.9881422924901185, + "pred_md": "25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio\n\n- (2) Any restriction on a person's freedom of movement that is involved in his or her lawful detention shall not be held to be inconsistent with or in contravention of this section.\n- (3) Nothing contained in or done under the authority of any law shall be held to be inconsistent with or in contravention of this section to the extent that the law in question makes provision-\n- ( a ) for the imposition of restrictions that are reasonably required in the interests of defence, public safety, public order, public morality or public health or the imposition of restrictions on the acquisition or use by any person of land or other property in Botswana and except so far as that provision or, as the case may be, the thing done under the authority thereof, is shown not to be reasonably justifiable in a democratic society;\n- ( b ) for the imposition of restrictions on the freedom of movement of any person who is not a citizen of Botswana;\n- ( c ) ........\n- ( d ) for the imposition of restrictions upon the movement or residence within Botswana of public officers; or\n- ( e ) for the removal of a person from Botswana to be tried outside Botswana for a criminal offence or to undergo imprisonment in some other country in execution of the sentence of a court in respect of a criminal offence under the law in force in Botswana of which he or she has been convicted.\n- (4) If any person whose freedom of movement has been restricted by order under such a provision as is referred to in subsection (3)( a ) of this section (other than a restriction which is applicable to persons generally or to general classes of persons) so requests at any time during the period of that restriction not earlier than six months after the order was made or six months after he or she last made such request, as the case may be, his or her case shall be reviewed by an independent and impartial tribunal presided over by a person, qualified to be enrolled as an advocate in Botswana, appointed by the Chief Justice.\n- (5) On any review by a tribunal in pursuance of this section of the case of a person whose freedom of movement has been restricted, the tribunal may make recommendations, concerning the necessity or expediency of continuing the restriction to the authority by which it was ordered but, unless it is otherwise provided by law, that authority shall not be obliged to act in accordance with any such recommendations.\n\n## 15. Protection from discrimination on the grounds of race, etc.\n\n- (1) Subject to the provisions of subsections (4), (5) and (7) of this section, no law shall make any provision that is discriminatory either of itself or in its effect.\n- (2) Subject to the provisions of subsections (6), (7) and (8) of this section, no person shall be treated in a discriminatory manner by any person acting by virtue of any written law or in the performance of the functions of any public office or any public authority.\n- (3) In this section, the expression \"discriminatory\" means affording different treatment to different persons, attributable wholly or mainly to their respective descriptions by race, tribe, place of origin, political opinions, colour, creed or sex whereby persons of one such description are subjected to disabilities or restrictions to which persons of another such description are not made subject or are accorded privileges or advantages which are not accorded to persons of another such description.\n- (4) Subsection (1) of this section shall not apply to any law so far as that law makes provision-\n- ( a ) for the appropriation of public revenues or other public funds;\n- ( b ) with respect to persons who are not citizens of Botswana;\n- ( c ) with respect to adoption, marriage, divorce, burial, devolution of property on death or other matters of personal law;\n\nCopyright Government of Botswana", + "recall": 0.946969696969697, + "true_md": "Copyright Government of Botswana\n\n25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n(2) Any restriction on a person's freedom of movement that is involved in his or her lawful detention shall not be held to be inc onsistent with or in contravention of this section. (3) Nothing contained in or done under the authority of any law shall be held to be \n\ndetention shall not be held to be inc onsistent with or in contravention of this section. (3) Nothing contained in or done under the authority of any law shall be held to be inconsistent with or in contravention of this section to the extent that the law in question makes provision- ( a ) forthe imposition of restrictions that are reasonably required in the interests of defence, \n\nor she has been convicted. (4) If any person whose freedom of move ment has been restricted by order under such a provision as is referred to in subsection (3)( a ) of this section (other than a restriction which is applicable to persons generally or to general classes of persons) so requests at any time during the period of that restriction not earlier than six months after the order was made or six months after he or she last made such request, as the case may be, his or her case shall be reviewed by an independent and impartial tribunal presided over by a person, qualifie d to be enrolled as an advocate in Botswana, appointed by the Chief Justice. (5) On any review by a tribunal in pursuance of this section of the case of a person whose \n\nadvocate in Botswana, appointed by the Chief Justice. (5) On any review by a tribunal in pursuance of this section of the case of a person whose freedom of movement has been restricted, the tribunal may make recommendations, concern ing the necessity or expediency of continuing the restriction to the authority by which it was ordered but, unless it is otherwise provided by law, that authority shall not be obliged to act in accordance with any such recommendations. 15. Protection from discrimination on the grounds of race, etc. \n\n15. Protection from discrimination on the grounds of race, etc. (1) Subject to the provisions of subsections (4), (5) and (7) of this section, no law shall make any provision that is discriminatory either of itself or in its effect. (2) Subject to the provisio ns of subsections (6), (7) and (8) of this section, no person shall \n\nmake any provision that is discriminatory either of itself or in its effect. (2) Subject to the provisio ns of subsections (6), (7) and (8) of this section, no person shall be treated in a discriminatory manner by any person acting by virtue of any written law or in the performance of the functions of any public office or any public authority. (3) In this section, the expression \"discriminatory\" means affording different treatment to \n\nperformance of the functions of any public office or any public authority. (3) In this section, the expression \"discriminatory\" means affording different treatment to different persons, attributable wholly or mainly to their respective descriptions by race, tribe, place of origin, political opinions, colour, cree d or sex whereby persons of one such description are subjected to disabilities or restrictions to which persons of another such description are not made subject or are accorded privileges or advantages which are not accorded to persons of another such description. (4) Subsection (1) of this section shall not apply to any law so far as that law makes \n\nsuch description. (4) Subsection (1) of this section shall not apply to any law so far as that law makes provision- ( a ) for the appropriation of public revenues or other public funds;\n\n- provision- ( a ) forthe imposition of restrictions that are reasonably required in the interests of defence, public safety, public order, public morality or public health or the imposition of restrictions on the acquisition or use by any person of land or other property in Bo tswana and except so far as that provision or, as the case may be, the thing done under the authority thereof, is shown not to be reasonably justifiable in a democratic society; ( b ) for the imposition of restrictions on the freedom of movement of any pers on who is not a \n\n- thereof, is shown not to be reasonably justifiable in a democratic society; ( b ) for the imposition of restrictions on the freedom of movement of any pers on who is not a citizen of Botswana; ( c ) ........ \n\n- citizen of Botswana; ( c ) ........ ( d ) for the imposition of restrictions upon the movement or residence within Botswana of \n\n- ( c ) ........ ( d ) for the imposition of restrictions upon the movement or residence within Botswana of public officers; or ( e ) for the removal of a person from Botswana to be tried outside Botswana for a criminal \n\n- public officers; or ( e ) for the removal of a person from Botswana to be tried outside Botswana for a criminal offence or to undergo imprisonment in some other country in execution of the sentence of a court in respect of a criminal offence under the law in force in Botswana of which he or she has been convicted. (4) If any person whose freedom of move ment has been restricted by order under such a \n\n- provision- ( a ) for the appropriation of public revenues or other public funds; ( b ) with respect to persons who are not citizens of Botswana;\n\n- ( a ) for the appropriation of public revenues or other public funds; ( b ) with respect to persons who are not citizens of Botswana; ( c ) with respect to adoption, marriage, divorce, burial, devolution of property on death or \n\n- ( b ) with respect to persons who are not citizens of Botswana; ( c ) with respect to adoption, marriage, divorce, burial, devolution of property on death or other matters of personal law;\n\n## with any such recommendations. 15. Protection from discrimination on the grounds of race, etc. (1) Subject to the provisions of subsections (4), (5) and (7) of this section, no law shall" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.381920608873402, + "doc_id": "f477e75f0808e7d2d69478fea11c187e91dc495cb306424f6dca9983b17582a7", + "edit_distance": 0.8420221169036335, + "f1_score": 0.9576059850374063, + "meteor": 0.34098057397548875, + "precision": 0.9846153846153847, + "pred_md": "25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio\n\n- ( a ) in the case of a Minister or Assistant Minister appointed from among the Members of the National Assembly, or in the case of a Minister or Assistant Minister appointed from among persons who are not Members of the Assembly who becomes a Member of the Assembly before the expiration of four months from the date of his or her appointment-\n- (i) if he or she ceases to be a Member of the National Assembly otherwise than by reason of a dissolution of the National Assembly; or\n- (ii) if, at the first sitting of the Assembly after a general election, he or she is not a Member of the Assembly;\n- ( b ) in the case of a Minister or Assistant Minister appointed from among persons who are not Members of the Assembly, if before the expiration of four months from the date of his or her appointment-\n- (i) circumstances arise (other than a dissolution of the Assembly) that, if he or she were such a Member, would cause him or her to vacate his or her seat in the Assembly; or\n- (ii)\n- he or she does not become a Member of the Assembly;\n- ( c ) if the holder of the office is removed from office by the President;\n- ( d ) upon the assumption by any person of the office of President.\n\n## 44. Cabinet\n\n(1) There shall be a Cabinet which shall consist of the President, Vice-President and the Ministers.\n\n- (2) There shall preside at meetings of the Cabinet-\n- ( a ) the President;\n- ( b ) in the absence of the President, the Vice-President; or\n- ( c ) in the absence of the President and the Vice-President, such Minister as the President may designate.\n- (3) The Cabinet may act notwithstanding any vacancy in its membership.\n\n## 45. Oaths to be taken by Ministers and Assistant Ministers\n\nThe Vice-President, a Minister or an Assistant Minister shall not enter upon the duties of his or her office unless he or she has taken and subscribed the oath of allegiance and such oath for the due execution of his or her office as may be prescribed by Parliament.\n\n## 46. Secretary to the Cabinet\n\n- (1) There shall be a Secretary to the Cabinet whose office shall be a public office.\n- (2) The Secretary to the Cabinet shall have charge of the Cabinet Office and shall be responsible, in accordance with such instructions as may be given to him or her by the President, for arranging the business for, and keeping the minutes of, the Cabinet, for conveying decisions of the Cabinet to the appropriate person or authority, and shall have such other functions as the President may from time to time direct.\n\n## PART III\n\n## Executive Functions (ss 47-56)\n\n## 47. Functions of President\n\n- (1) The executive power of Botswana shall vest in the President and, subject to the provisions of this Constitution, shall be exercised by him or her either directly or through officers subordinate to him or her.\n- (2) In the exercise of any function conferred upon him or her by this Constitution or any other law the President shall, unless it is otherwise provided, act in his or her own deliberate judgment and shall not be obliged to follow the advice tendered by any other person or authority.\n- (3) Nothing in this section shall prevent Parliament from conferring functions on persons or authorities other than the President.\n\n## 48. Command of armed forces\n\nCopyright Government of Botswana", + "recall": 0.9320388349514563, + "true_md": "25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n44. Cabinet (1) There shall be a Cabinet which shall consist of the President, Vice -President and the Ministers. (2) There shall preside at meetings of the Cabinet - \n\nMinisters. (2) There shall preside at meetings of the Cabinet - the President; \n\nmay designate. (3) The Cabinet may actnotwithstanding any vacancy in its membership. Oaths to be taken by Ministers and Assistant Ministers \n\n45. Oaths to be taken by Ministers and Assistant Ministers The Vice-President, a Minister or an Assistant Minister shall not enter upon the duties of his or her office unless he or she has taken and subscribed the oath of allegiance and such oath for the due execution of his or her office as may be prescribed by Parliament. 46. Secretary to the Cabinet\n\nSecretary to the Cabinet (1) There shall be a Secretary to the Cabinet whose office shall be a public offic e. (2) The Secretary to the Cabinet shall have charge of the Cabinet Office and shall be \n\n(1) There shall be a Secretary to the Cabinet whose office shall be a public offic e. (2) The Secretary to the Cabinet shall have charge of the Cabinet Office and shall be responsible, in accordance with such instructions as may be given to him or her by the President, for arranging the business for, and keeping the minutes of, the Cabi net, for conveying decisions of the Cabinet to the appropriate person or authority, and shall have such other functions as the President may from time to time direct. PART III \n\n47. Functions of President (1) The executive power of Botswana shall vest in the President and, subject to the provisions of this Constitution, shall be exercised by him or her either directly or through officers subordinate to him or her. (2) In the exercise of any function conferred upon him or her by this Constitution or any \n\nsubordinate to him or her. (2) In the exercise of any function conferred upon him or her by this Constitution or any other law the President shall, unless it is otherwise provided, act in his or her own deliberate judgment and shall not be obliged to follow the advice tendered by any other person or authority. (3) Nothing in thissection shall prevent Parliament from conferring functions on persons or \n\njudgment and shall not be obliged to follow the advice tendered by any other person or authority. (3) Nothing in thissection shall prevent Parliament from conferring functions on persons or authorities other than the President. 48. Command of armed forces\n\n## authorities other than the President. 48. Command of armed forces\n\n## PART III Executive Functions\n\n## PART III Executive Functions (ss 47-56) Functions of President\n\n## Executive Functions 47. Functions of President (1) The executive power of Botswana shall vest in the President and, subject to the\n\n## for the due execution of his or her office as may be prescribed by Parliament. 46. Secretary to the Cabinet (1) There shall be a Secretary to the Cabinet whose office shall be a public offic\n\n## (3) The Cabinet may actnotwithstanding any vacancy in its membership. 45. Oaths to be taken by Ministers and Assistant Ministers The Vice-President, a Minister or an Assistant Minister shall not enter upon the duties of\n\n- ( a ) in the case of a Minister or Assist ant Minister appointed from among the Members of the National Assembly, or in the case of a Minister or Assistant Minister appointed from among persons who are not Members of the Assembly who becomes a Member of the Assembly before the expiration of four m onths from the date of his or her appointment - (i) if he or she ceases to be a Member of the National Assembly otherwise than by \n\n- Assembly before the expiration of four m onths from the date of his or her appointment - (i) if he or she ceases to be a Member of the National Assembly otherwise than by reason of a dissolution of the National Assembly; or (ii) if, at the first sitting of the Assembly after a general election , he or she is not a \n\n- reason of a dissolution of the National Assembly; or (ii) if, at the first sitting of the Assembly after a general election , he or she is not a Member of the Assembly; ) in the case of a Minister or Assistant Minister appointed from among persons who are not \n\n- Member of the Assembly; ( b ) in the case of a Minister or Assistant Minister appointed from among persons who are not Members of the Assembly, if before the expiration of four months from the date of his or her appointment- (i) circumstances arise (other than a dissolution of the Assembly) that, if he or she were \n\n- her appointment- (i) circumstances arise (other than a dissolution of the Assembly) that, if he or she were such a Member, would cause him or her to vacate his or her seat in the Assembly; or (ii) he or she does not become a Member of the Assembly;\n\n- such a Member, would cause him or her to vacate his or her seat in the Assembly; or (ii) he or she does not become a Member of the Assembly; if the holder of theoffice is removed from office by the President;\n\n- (ii) he or she does not become a Member of the Assembly; ( c ) if the holder of theoffice is removed from office by the President; ( d ) upon the assumption by any person of the office of President. \n\n- ( c ) if the holder of theoffice is removed from office by the President; ( d ) upon the assumption by any person of the office of President. 44. Cabinet\n\n- (2) There shall preside at meetings of the Cabinet ( a ) the President; ( b ) in the absence of the President, the Vice\n\n- ( a ) the President; ( b ) in the absence of the President, the Vice -President; or ( c ) in the absence of the President and the Vice -President, such Minister as the President \n\n- ( b ) in the absence of the President, the Vice -President; or ( c ) in the absence of the President and the Vice -President, such Minister as the President may designate. (3) The Cabinet may actnotwithstanding any vacancy in its membership.\n\n## ( d ) upon the assumption by any person of the office of President. 44. Cabinet (1) There shall be a Cabinet which shall consist of the President, Vice\n\nCopyright Government of Botswana" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5437113134110574, + "doc_id": "2da52da3deed8bc62f0838c61f2c515c37810f657719d895c4969f0465dd92a9", + "edit_distance": 0.6574162679425838, + "f1_score": 0.9751243781094527, + "meteor": 0.48988749879312904, + "precision": 0.98989898989899, + "pred_md": "25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio\n\nand information without interference (whether the communication be to the public generally or to any person or class of persons) and freedom from interference with his or her correspondence.\n\n(2) Nothing contained in or done under the authority of any law shall be held to be inconsistent with or in contravention of this section to the extent that the law in question makes provision-\n\n- ( a ) that is reasonably required in the interests of defence, public safety, public order, public morality or public health; or\n- ( b ) that is reasonably required for the purpose of protecting the reputations, rights and freedoms of other persons or the private lives of persons concerned in legal proceedings, preventing the disclosure of information received in confidence, maintaining the authority and independence of the courts, regulating educational institutions in the interests of persons receiving instruction therein, or regulating the technical administration or the technical operation of telephony, telegraphy, posts, wireless, broadcasting or television; or\n- ( c ) that imposes restrictions upon public officers, employees of local government bodies, or teachers,\n\nand except so far as that provision or, as the case may be, the thing done under the authority thereof is shown not to be reasonably justifiable in a democratic society.\n\n## 13. Protection of freedom of assembly and association\n\n(1) Except with his or her own consent, no person shall be hindered in the enjoyment of his or her freedom of assembly and association, that is to say, his or her right to assemble freely and associate with other persons and in particular to form or belong to trade unions or other associations for the protection of his or her interests.\n\n(2) Nothing contained in or done under the authority of any law shall be held to be inconsistent with or in contravention of this section to the extent that the law in question makes provision-\n\n- ( a ) that is reasonably required in the interests of defence, public safety, public order, public morality or public health;\n- ( b ) that is reasonably required for the purpose of protecting the rights or freedoms of other persons;\n- ( c ) that imposes restrictions upon public officers, employees of local government bodies, or teachers; or\n- ( d ) for the registration of trade unions and associations of trade unions in a register established by or under any law, and for imposing reasonable conditions relating to the requirements for entry on such a register (including conditions as to the minimum number of persons necessary to constitute a trade union qualified for registration, or of members necessary to constitute an association of trade unions qualified for registration) and conditions whereby registration may be refused on the grounds that any other trade union already registered, or association of trade unions already registered, as the case may be, is sufficiently representative of the whole or of a substantial proportion of the interests in respect of which registration of a trade union or association of trade unions is sought,\n\nand except so far as that provision or, as the case may be, the thing done under the authority thereof is shown not to be reasonably justifiable in a democratic society.\n\n## 14. Protection of freedom of movement\n\n(1) No person shall be deprived of his or her freedom of movement, and for the purposes of this section the said freedom means the right to move freely throughout Botswana, the right to reside in any part of Botswana, the right to enter Botswana and immunity from expulsion from Botswana.\n\nCopyright Government of Botswana", + "recall": 0.9607843137254902, + "true_md": "- 25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n- 25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\nand information without interference (whether the communication be to the public generally or to any person or class of persons) and free dom from interference with his or her correspondence. (2) Nothing contained in or done under the authority of any law shall be held to be \n\nany person or class of persons) and free dom from interference with his or her correspondence. (2) Nothing contained in or done under the authority of any law shall be held to be inconsistent with or in contravention of this section to the extent that the law in question makes provision- ( a ) that is reasonably required in the interests of defence, public safety, public order, public \n\nteachers, and except so far as that provision or, as the case may be, the thing done under the authority thereof is shown not to be reasonably justifiable in a democratic society. 13. Protection of freedom of assembly and association \n\n13. Protection of freedom of assembly and association (1) Except with his or her own consent, no person shall be hindered in the enjoyment of his or her freedom of assembly and association, that is to say, his or her right to assemble freely and associate with other persons and in particular to form or belong to trade unions or other associations for the protection of his or her interests. (2) Nothing contained in or done under the authority of any law shall be held to be \n\nassociations for the protection of his or her interests. (2) Nothing contained in or done under the authority of any law shall be held to be inconsistent with or in contravention of this section to the extent that the law in question makes provision- ( a ) that is reasonably required in the interests of defence, public safety, public order, public \n\nsought, and except so far as that provision or, as the case may be, the thing done under the authority thereof is shown not to be reasona bly justifiable in a democratic society. 14. Protection of freedom of movement \n\n14. Protection of freedom of movement (1) No person shall be deprived of his or her freedom of movement, and for the purposes of this section the said freedom means the right to move freely throughout Botswana, the right to reside in any part of Botswana, the right to enter Botswana and immunity from expulsion from Botswana. \n\n## thereof is shown not to be reasona bly justifiable in a democratic society. 14. Protection of freedom of movement (1) No person shall be deprived of his or her freedom of movement, and for the purposes\n\n## thereof is shown not to be reasonably justifiable in a democratic society. 13. Protection of freedom of assembly and association (1) Except with his or her own consent, no person shall be hindered in the enjoyment of his\n\n- provision- ( a ) that is reasonably required in the interests of defence, public safety, public order, public morality or public health; or ( b ) that is reasonably required for the purpose of protecting the reputations, rights and \n\n- morality or public health; or ( b ) that is reasonably required for the purpose of protecting the reputations, rights and freedoms of other persons or the private l ives of persons concerned in legal proceedings, preventing the disclosure of information received in confidence, maintaining the authority and independence of the courts, regulating educational institutions in the interests of persons receiving instruction therein, or regulating the technical administration or the technical operation of telephony, telegraphy, posts, wireless, broadcasting or television; or ( c ) that imposes restrictions upon public officers, employees of local government bodies, or \n\n- wireless, broadcasting or television; or ( c ) that imposes restrictions upon public officers, employees of local government bodies, or teachers, and except so far as that provision or, as the case may be, the thing done under the authority \n\n- provision- ( a ) that is reasonably required in the interests of defence, public safety, public order, public morality or public health; ( b ) that is reasonably required for the purpose of protecting the rights or freedoms of other \n\n- morality or public health; ( b ) that is reasonably required for the purpose of protecting the rights or freedoms of other persons; ( c ) that imposes restrictions upon public officers, employees of local government bodies, or \n\n- persons; ( c ) that imposes restrictions upon public officers, employees of local government bodies, or teachers; or ( d ) for the registration of trade unions and associations of trade unions in a register \n\n- teachers; or ( d ) for the registration of trade unions and associations of trade unions in a register established by or under any law, and for imposing reasonable conditions relating to the requirements for entry on such a register (including conditions as to the minimum number of persons necessary to constitute a trade union qualified for registration, or of members necessary to constitute an association of trade unions qualified for registration) and conditions whereby registration may be refused on the grounds that any other trade union already registered, or association of trade unions already registered, as the case may be, is sufficiently representative of the whole or of a substa ntial proportion of the interests in respect of which registration of a trade union or association of trade unions is sought, and except so far as that provision or, as the case may be, the thing done under the authority \n\nCopyright Government of Botswana" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5171444200009123, + "doc_id": "94832c3dd52a5592d87362bc496d9994063e2642f10c4b81c95ec75b94cdb3fa", + "edit_distance": 0.677846425419241, + "f1_score": 0.9603960396039606, + "meteor": 0.4432207360525987, + "precision": 0.9847715736040609, + "pred_md": "25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio\n\nor been revoked to continue to act as such a judge for such period as may be necessary to enable him or her to deliver judgment or to do any other thing in relation to proceedings that were commenced before him or her previously thereto.\n\n## 101. Tenure of office of judges of Court of Appeal\n\n(1) Subject to the provisions of this section, a person holding the office of a judge of the Court of Appeal shall vacate that office on attaining the age of 70 years or such other age as may be prescribed by Parliament:\n\nProvided that-\n\n- (i) the President, acting in accordance with the advice of the Judicial Service Commission, may permit a judge who has attained that age to continue in office for such period as may be necessary to enable him or her to deliver judgment or to do any other thing in relation to proceedings that were commenced before him or her before he or she attained that age;\n- (ii) a person may be appointed as President of the Court of Appeal or as a Justice of Appeal for a fixed period of three years notwithstanding that he or she has attained the age referred to in this subsection or that he or she will before the expiry of his or her appointment have attained that age; and\n- (iii) the appointment as President of the Court of Appeal or as Justice of Appeal serving for a fixed period under paragraph (ii) above shall not affect the date at which he or she is due to retire.\n\n(2) A judge of the Court of Appeal may be removed from office only for inability to perform the functions of his or her office (whether arising from infirmity of body or mind or from any other cause) or for misbehaviour, and shall not be so removed except in accordance with the provisions of this section.\n\n(3) If the President considers that the question of removing a judge of the Court of Appeal under this section ought to be investigated then-\n\n- ( a ) he or she shall appoint a tribunal which shall consist of a Chairman and not less than two other members, who hold or have held high judicial office;\n- ( b ) the tribunal shall enquire into the matter and report on the facts thereof to the President and advise the President whether the judge ought to be removed from office under this section for inability as aforesaid or for misbehaviour.\n\n(4) Where a tribunal, appointed under subsection (3) of this section, advises the President that a judge of the Court of Appeal ought to be removed from office for inability as aforesaid or for misbehaviour, the President shall remove such judge from office.\n\n(5) If the question of removing a judge of the Court of Appeal from office has been referred to a tribunal under subsection (3) of this section, the President may suspend the judge from performing the functions of his or her office, and any such suspension may at any time be revoked by the President and shall in any case cease to have effect if the tribunal advises the President that the judge ought not to be removed from office.\n\n## 102. Oaths to be taken by judges of Court of Appeal\n\nA judge of the Court of Appeal shall not enter upon the duties of his or her office unless he or she has taken and subscribed such oath for the due execution of his or her office as may be prescribed by Parliament.\n\n## PART III\n\n## Judicial Service Commission (ss 103-104)\n\n## 103. Composition and procedure\n\n(1) There shall be a Judicial Service Commission for Botswana which shall consist of-\n\n- ( a ) the Chief Justice who shall be Chairman;\n\nCopyright Government of Botswana", + "recall": 0.9371980676328503, + "true_md": "or been revoked to continue to act as such a judge for such period as may be necessary to enable him or her to deliver judgment or to do any other thing in relation to proceedings that were commenced before him or her previously thereto. 101. Tenure of office of judges of Court of Appeal \n\n## commenced before him or her previously thereto. 101. Tenure of office of judges of Court of Appeal (1) Subject to the provisions of this section, a person holding the office of a judge of the\n\n101. Tenure of office of judges of Court of Appeal (1) Subject to the provisions of this section, a person holding the office of a judge of the Court of Appeal shall vacate that office on attaining the age of 70 years or such other age as may be prescribed by Parliament: Provided that- \n\nbe prescribed by Parliament: Provided that- the President, acting in accordance with the advice of the Judicial Service Commission, \n\nto retire. (2) A judge of the Court of Appeal may be removed from office only for inability to perform the functionsof his or her office (whether arising from infirmity of body or mind or from any other cause) or for misbehaviour, and shall not be so removed except in accordance with the provisions of this section. (3) If the President considers that the question of r emoving a judge of the Court of Appeal \n\nof this section. (3) If the President considers that the question of r emoving a judge of the Court of Appeal under this section ought to be investigated then - ( a ) he or she shall appoint a tribunal which shall consist of a Chairman and not less than two \n\nsection for inability as aforesaid or for misbehaviour. (4) Where a tribunal, appoin ted under subsection (3) of this section, advises the President that a judge of the Court of Appeal ought to be removed from office for inability as aforesaid or for misbehaviour, the President shall remove such judge from office. (5) If the question of r emoving a judge of the Court of Appeal from office has been referred \n\nmisbehaviour, the President shall remove such judge from office. (5) If the question of r emoving a judge of the Court of Appeal from office has been referred to a tribunal under subsection (3) of this section, the President may suspend the judge from performing the functions of his or her office, and any such suspension may at any time be revo ked by the President and shall in any case cease to have effect if the tribunal advises the President that the judge ought not to be removed from office. 102. Oaths to be taken by judges of Court of Appeal \n\n102. Oaths to be taken by judges of Court of Appeal A judge of the Court of Appeal shal l not enter upon the duties of his or her office unless he or she has taken and subscribed such oath for the due execution of his or her office as may be prescribed by Parliament. PART III \n\n- Provided that- (i) the President, acting in accordance with the advice of the Judicial Service Commission, may permit a judge who has attained that age to continue in office for such period as may be necessary to enable himor her to deliver judgment or to do any other thing in relation to proceedings that were commenced before him or her before he or she attained that age; (ii) a person may be appointed as President of the Court of Appeal or as a Justice of Appeal \n\n- age; (ii) a person may be appointed as President of the Court of Appeal or as a Justice of Appeal for a fixed period of three years notwithstanding that he or she has attained the age referred to in this subsection or that he or she will before the expiry of his or her appointment have attained that age; and (iii) the appointment as President of the Court o f Appeal or as Justice of Appeal serving for a \n\n- appointment have attained that age; and (iii) the appointment as President of the Court o f Appeal or as Justice of Appeal serving for a fixed period under paragraph (ii) above shall not affect the date at which he or she is due to retire. (2) A judge of the Court of Appeal may be removed from office only for inability to perform \n\n- under this section ought to be investigated then - ( a ) he or she shall appoint a tribunal which shall consist of a Chairman and not less than two other members, who hold or have held high judicial office; ( b ) the tribunal shall enquire into the matter and report on the facts thereof to the President \n\n- other members, who hold or have held high judicial office; ( b ) the tribunal shall enquire into the matter and report on the facts thereof to the President and advise the President whether the judge ought to be removed from office under this section for inability as aforesaid or for misbehaviour. (4) Where a tribunal, appoin ted under subsection (3) of this section, advises the President \n\n- (1) There shall be a Judicial Service Commission for Botswana which shall consist of ( a ) the Chief Justice who shall be Chairman;\n\n103. Composition and procedure (1) There shall be a Judicial Service Commission for Botswana which shall consist of - the Chief Justice who shall be Chairman;\n\n## that the judge ought not to be removed from office. 102. Oaths to be taken by judges of Court of Appeal A judge of the Court of Appeal shal l not enter upon the duties of his or her office unless he\n\n## PART III Judicial Service Commission\n\n## PART III Judicial Service Commission (ss 103-104) 103. Composition and procedure\n\n## Judicial Service Commission 103. Composition and procedure (1) There shall be a Judicial Service Commission for Botswana which shall consist of\n\nCopyright Government of Botswana\n\n25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4984748799788856, + "doc_id": "91150b04d8a2412f31c20e9d1eeb33033a6a09ab2e73515326a106fa5b657e87", + "edit_distance": 0.5679324894514768, + "f1_score": 0.981981981981982, + "meteor": 0.40844080000500593, + "precision": 0.9954337899543378, + "pred_md": "25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio\n\nthe Judicial Service Commission shall, as soon as practicable thereafter, appoint a Delimitation Commission.\n\n- (3) The Chairman of a Delimitation Commission shall be selected from among persons who hold or have held high judicial office.\n- (4) No person shall be qualified to be appointed as Chairman or member of a Delimitation Commission who-\n- ( a ) is a Member of the National Assembly;\n- ( b ) is or has been within the preceding five years actively engaged in politics; or\n\n(\n\nc\n\n)\n\nis a public officer.\n\n(5) A person shall be deemed to be actively engaged in politics or to have been so engaged during the relevant period if-\n\n- ( a ) he or she is, or was at any time during that period, a Member of the National Assembly;\n- ( b ) he or she is, or was at any time during that period, nominated as a candidate for election to the National Assembly; or\n- ( c ) he or she is, or was at any time during that period, the holder of an office in any political organization that sponsors or supports, or has at any time sponsored or supported, a candidate for election as a Member of the National Assembly:\n\nProvided that no person shall be disqualified from holding the office of Chairman or member of a Delimitation Commission by reason only of the fact that he or she has been the Speaker of the National Assembly if he or she was elected to that office from amongst persons who were not Members of the National Assembly.\n\n- (6) The office of Chairman or other member of the Delimitation Commission shall become vacant if circumstances arise that, were he or she not Chairman or member of the Delimitation Commission, would disqualify him or her for appointment as such.\n- (7) If, after the appointment of the Delimitation Commission and before the Commission has submitted its report under section 65, the office of Chairman or any other member of the Commission falls vacant or the holder of the office becomes unable for any reason to discharge his or her functions as a member of the Commission, the Judicial Service Commission may, subject to the provisions of subsections (3) to (5) of this section, appoint another person to be a member of the Commission:\n\nProvided that a member appointed under this section because of the inability of some other member to discharge his or her functions shall cease to be a member of the Commission when, in the opinion of the Judicial Service Commission, that other member is able to resume his or her functions as a member of the Commission.\n\n## 65. Report of Commission\n\n- (1) Whenever a Delimitation Commission has been appointed the Commission shall as soon as practicable submit to the President a report which shall state whether any alteration is necessary to the boundaries of the constituencies in order to give effect to subsection (2) of this section or in consequence of any alteration in the number of seats of Elected Members in the National Assembly and where any alteration is necessary shall include a list of the constituencies delimited by the Commission and a description of the boundaries of those constituencies.\n- (2) The boundaries of each constituency shall be such that the number of inhabitants thereof is as nearly equal to the population quota as is reasonably practicable:\n\nProvided that the number of inhabitants of a constituency may be greater or less than the population quota in order to take account of natural community of interest, means of communication, geographical features, density of population, and the boundaries of Tribal Territories and administrative districts.\n\n(3) In this section \"population quota\" means the number obtained by dividing the number of inhabitants of Botswana (as ascertained by reference to the latest comprehensive national\n\nCopyright Government of Botswana", + "recall": 0.9688888888888889, + "true_md": "the Judicial Service Commission shall, as soon as practicable thereafter, appoint a Delimitation Commission. (3) The Chairman of a Delimitation Commission shall be selected from among persons \n\nCommission. (3) The Chairman of a Delimitation Commission shall be selected from among persons who hold or have held high judicial office. (4) No person shall be qualified to be appointed as Chairman or member of a Delimitation \n\nwho hold or have held high judicial office. (4) No person shall be qualified to be appointed as Chairman or member of a Delimitation Commission who- ( a ) is a Member of the National Assembly;\n\n( c ) is a public officer. (5) A person shall be deemed to be actively engaged in politics or to have been so engaged during therelevant period if- ( a ) he or she is, or was at any time during that period, a Member of the National Assembly;\n\ncandidate for election as a Member of the National Assembly: Provided that no person shal l be disqualified from holding the office of Chairman or member of a Delimitation Commission by reason only of the fact that he or she has been the Speaker of the National Assembly if he or she was elected to that office from amongst persons who were not Members of the National Assembly. (6) The office of Chairman or other member of the Delimitation Commission shall become \n\nwho were not Members of the National Assembly. (6) The office of Chairman or other member of the Delimitation Commission shall become vacant if circumstances arise that, were he or she not Chairman or member of the Delimitation Commission, would disqualify him or herfor appointment as such. (7) If, after the appointment of the Delimitation Commission and before the Commission \n\nCommission, would disqualify him or herfor appointment as such. (7) If, after the appointment of the Delimitation Commission and before the Commission has submitted its report under section 65, the office of Chairman or any other member of the Commission falls vacant or the holder of the offic e becomes unable for any reason to discharge his or her functions as a member of the Commission, the Judicial Service Commission may, subject to the provisions of subsections (3) to (5) of this section, appoint another person to be a member of the Commission: Provided that a member appointed under this section because of the inability of some \n\nmember of the Commission: Provided that a member appointed under this section because of the inability of some other member to discharge his or her functions shall cease to be a member of the Commission when, in the opinion of the Judicial Service Commission, that other member is able to resume his or her functions as a member of the Commission. 65. Report of Commission \n\n65. Report of Commission (1) Whenever a Delimitation Commission has been appointed the Commission shall as soon as practicable submit to the President a report which shall state whether any alteration is necessary to the boundaries of the constituencies in order to give effect to subsection (2) of this section or in consequence of any alteration in the number of seats of Elected Members in the National Assembly and where an y alteration is necessary shall include a list of the constituencies delimited by the Commission and a description of the boundaries of those constituencies. (2) The boundaries of each constituency shall be such that the number of inhabitants \n\ndelimited by the Commission and a description of the boundaries of those constituencies. (2) The boundaries of each constituency shall be such that the number of inhabitants thereof is as nearly equal to the population quota as is reasonably practicable: Provided that the number of inhabitants of a constituency may be greater or less than the \n\nthereof is as nearly equal to the population quota as is reasonably practicable: Provided that the number of inhabitants of a constituency may be greater or less than the population quota in order to take account of natural community of interest, means of communication, geographical features, density of population, and the boundaries of Tribal Territories and administrative districts. (3) In this section \"population quota\" means the number obtained by dividing the number \n\nTerritories and administrative districts. (3) In this section \"population quota\" means the number obtained by dividing the number of inhabitants of Botswana (as ascertained by reference to the latest comprehensive national \n\nCopyright Government of Botswana\n\n## or her functions as a member of the Commission. 65. Report of Commission (1) Whenever a Delimitation Commission has been appointed the Commission shall as\n\n- Commission who- ( a ) is a Member of the National Assembly; ( b ) is or has been within the preceding five years actively engaged in politics; or\n\n- ( a ) is a Member of the National Assembly; ( b ) is or has been within the preceding five years actively engaged in politics; or ( c ) is a public officer. \n\n- ( b ) is or has been within the preceding five years actively engaged in politics; or ( c ) is a public officer. (5) A person shall be deemed to be actively engaged in politics or to have been so \n\n- engaged during therelevant period if- ( a ) he or she is, or was at any time during that period, a Member of the National Assembly; ( b ) he or she is, or was at any time during that period, nominated as a candidate for election \n\n- ( a ) he or she is, or was at any time during that period, a Member of the National Assembly; ( b ) he or she is, or was at any time during that period, nominated as a candidate for election to the National Assembly; or ( c ) he or she is,or was at any time during that period, the holder of an office in any political \n\n- to the National Assembly; or ( c ) he or she is,or was at any time during that period, the holder of an office in any political organization that sponsors or supports, or has at any time sponsored or supported, a candidate for election as a Member of the National Assembly: Provided that no person shal l be disqualified from holding the office of Chairman or \n\n25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4804844438269502, + "doc_id": "a7fb9b88eb1d029ca4b8090c6403b0963556a789bd8efdca8f46adc71cece589", + "edit_distance": 0.7761194029850746, + "f1_score": 0.9473684210526315, + "meteor": 0.3869417802399398, + "precision": 0.96, + "pred_md": "25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio\n\n(3) For the purposes of this section, the expression \"forced labour\" does not include-\n\n- ( a ) any labour required in consequence of the sentence or order of a court;\n- ( b ) labour required of any person while he or she is lawfully detained that, though not required in consequence of the sentence or order of a court, is reasonably necessary in the interests of hygiene or for the maintenance of the place at which he or she is detained;\n- ( c ) any labour required of a member of a disciplined force in pursuance of his or her duties as such or, in the case of a person who has conscientious objections to service as a member of a naval, military or air force, any labour that that person is required by law to perform in place of such service;\n- ( d ) any labour required during any period of public emergency or in the event of any other emergency or calamity that threatens the life and well-being of the community, to the extent that the requiring of such labour is reasonably justifiable in the circumstances of any situation arising or existing during that period or as a result of that other emergency or calamity, for the purpose of dealing with that situation; or\n- ( e ) any labour reasonably required as part of reasonable and normal communal or other civic obligations.\n\n## 7. Protection from inhuman treatment\n\n(1) No person shall be subjected to torture or to inhuman or degrading punishment or other treatment.\n\n- (2) Nothing contained in or done under the authority of any law shall be held to be inconsistent with or in contravention of this section to the extent that the law in question authorizes the infliction of any description of punishment that was lawful in the country immediately before the coming into operation of this Constitution.\n\n## 8. Protection from deprivation of property\n\n(1) No property of any description shall be compulsorily taken possession of, and no interest in or right over property of any description shall be compulsorily acquired, except where the following conditions are satisfied, that is to say-\n\n- ( a ) the taking of possession or acquisition is necessary or expedient-\n- (i) in the interests of defence, public safety, public order, public morality, public health, town and country planning or land settlement;\n- (ii) in order to secure the development or utilization of that, or other, property for a purpose beneficial to the community; or\n- (iii) in order to secure the development or utilization of the mineral resources of Botswana; and\n- ( b ) provision is made by a law applicable to that taking of possession or acquisition-\n- (i) for the prompt payment of adequate compensation; and\n- (ii) securing to any person having an interest in or right over the property a right of access to the High Court, either direct or on appeal from any other authority, for the determination of his or her interest or right, the legality of the taking of possession or acquisition of the property, interest or right, and the amount of any compensation to which he or she is entitled, and for the purpose of obtaining prompt payment of that compensation.\n\n(2) No person who is entitled to compensation under this section shall be prevented from remitting, within a reasonable time after he or she has received any amount of that compensation, the whole of that amount (free from any deduction, charge or tax made or levied in respect of its remission) to any country of his or her choice outside Botswana.\n\nCopyright Government of Botswana", + "recall": 0.935064935064935, + "true_md": "25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\nCopyright Government of Botswana\n\n## civic obligations. 7. Protection from inhuman treatment (1) No person shall be subjected to torture or to inhuman or degrading punishment or\n\n## the coming into operation of this Constitution. 8. Protection from deprivation of property (1) No property of any description shall be compulsorily taken possession of, and no\n\n(3) For the purposes of this section, the expression \"forced labour\" does not include - any labour required in consequence of the sentence or order of a court;\n\n7. Protection from inhuman treatment (1) No person shall be subjected to torture or to inhuman or degrading punishment or other treatment. (2) Nothing contained in or done under the authority of any law shall be held to be \n\nother treatment. (2) Nothing contained in or done under the authority of any law shall be held to be inconsistent with or in contravention of this section to the extent that the law in question authorizes the infliction of any description of punishment that was lawful in the country immediately before the coming into operation of this Constitution. 8. Protection from deprivation of property \n\n8. Protection from deprivation of property (1) No property of any description shall be compulsorily taken possession of, and no interest in or right over property of any description shall be compulsorily acquired, except where the following conditions aresatisfied, that is to say - ( a ) the taking of possession or acquisition is necessary or expedient - \n\ncompensation. (2) No person who is entitled to compensation under this section shall be prevented from remitting, within a reasonable time after he or she has received any amount of that compensation, the whole of that amount (free from any deduction, charge or tax made or levied in respect of its remission) to any country of his or her choice outside Botswana.\n\n- the taking of possession or acquisition is necessary or expedient - (i) in the interests of defence, public safety, public order, public morality, public health, town and country planning or land settlement; (ii) in order to secure the development or utilization of that, or other, property for a \n\n- town and country planning or land settlement; (ii) in order to secure the development or utilization of that, or other, property for a purpose beneficial to the community; or (iii) in order to secure the development or utilization of the mineral resources of \n\n- purpose beneficial to the community; or (iii) in order to secure the development or utilization of the mineral resources of Botswana; and ) provision is made by a law app licable to that taking of possession or acquisition - \n\n- provision is made by a law app licable to that taking of possession or acquisition (i) for the prompt payment of adequate compensation; and (ii) securing to any person having an interest in or right over the property a right of \n\n- (i) for the prompt payment of adequate compensation; and (ii) securing to any person having an interest in or right over the property a right of access to the High Court, either direct or on appeal f rom any other authority, for the determination of his or her interest or right, the legality of the taking of possession or acquisition of the property, interest or right, and the amount of any compensation to which he or she is entitled, and for the purpo se of obtaining prompt payment of that compensation. (2) No person who is entitled to compensation under this section shall be prevented from \n\n- (3) For the purposes of this section, the expression \"forced labour\" does not include ( a ) any labour required in consequence of the sentence or order of a court; ( b ) labour required of any person while he or she is lawfully detained that, though not \n\n- ( a ) any labour required in consequence of the sentence or order of a court; ( b ) labour required of any person while he or she is lawfully detained that, though not required in consequence of the sentence or order of a court, is reasonably necessary in the interests of hygiene or for the maintenance of the place at which he or she is detained; ( c ) any labour required of a member of a disciplined for ce in pursuance of his or her duties \n\n- detained; ( c ) any labour required of a member of a disciplined for ce in pursuance of his or her duties as such or, in the case of a person who has conscientious objections to service as a member of a naval, military or air force, any labour that that person is required by law to perform in place of such service; ( d ) any labour required during any period of public emergency or in the event of any other \n\n- perform in place of such service; ( d ) any labour required during any period of public emergency or in the event of any other emergency or calamity that threatens the life and well -being of the community, to the extent that the requiring of such labour is reasonably justifiable in the circumstance s of any situation arising or existing during that period or as a result of that other emergency or calamity, for the purpose of dealing with that situation; or ( e ) any labour reasonably required as part of reasonable and normal communal or other \n\n- the following conditions aresatisfied, that is to say - ( a ) the taking of possession or acquisition is necessary or expedient - (i) in the interests of defence, public safety, public order, public morality, public health, \n\n- Botswana; and ( b ) provision is made by a law app licable to that taking of possession or acquisition - (i) for the prompt payment of adequate compensation; and\n\n- or calamity, for the purpose of dealing with that situation; or ( e ) any labour reasonably required as part of reasonable and normal communal or other civic obligations. Protection from inhuman treatment" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4084689891818293, + "doc_id": "6b1724a44603912c3225d35ff3d5615e5651491425b3465063b9565b601df98e", + "edit_distance": 0.5275665399239544, + "f1_score": 0.9605911330049263, + "meteor": 0.42480404883551653, + "precision": 0.9798994974874372, + "pred_md": "25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio\n\nquestion to the High Court unless, in his or her opinion, the raising of the question is merely frivolous or vexatious.\n\n- (4) Parliament may confer upon the High Court such powers in addition to those conferred by this section as may appear to be necessary or desirable for the purpose of enabling that court more effectively to exercise the jurisdiction conferred upon it by this section.\n- (5) Rules of court making provision with respect to the practice and procedure of the High Court for the purposes of this section may be made by the person or authority for the time being having power to make rules of court with respect to the practice and procedure of that court generally.\n\n## 19. Interpretation and savings\n\n- (1) In this Chapter, unless the context otherwise requires-\n\n\"court\" means any court of law having jurisdiction in Botswana other than a court established by a disciplinary law, and in sections 4 and 6 of this Constitution a court established by a disciplinary law;\n\n- \"disciplinary law\" means a law regulating the discipline of any disciplined force;\n\n\"disciplined force\"\n\nmeans-\n\n- ( a ) a naval, military or air force;\n- ( b ) a police force; or\n- ( c ) a prison service;\n\n\"legal representative\" means a person entitled to practise in Botswana as an advocate or attorney;\n\n- \"member\" , in relation to a disciplined force, includes any person who, under the law regulating the discipline of that force, is subject to that discipline.\n- (2) In relation to any person who is a member of a disciplined force raised under an Act of Parliament, nothing contained in or done under the authority of the disciplinary law of that force shall be held to be inconsistent with or in contravention of any of the provisions of this Chapter other than sections 4, 6 and 7.\n\n(3) In relation to any person who is a member of a disciplined force raised otherwise than as aforesaid and lawfully present in Botswana, nothing contained in or done under the authority of the disciplinary law of that force shall be held to be inconsistent with or in contravention of any of the provisions of this Chapter.\n\n## CHAPTER III (ss 20-29: repealed)\n\nCitizenship\n\n## 20 to 29 inclusive. [ Repealed. ]\n\n[ Chapter III, sections 20 to 29 repealed, and the provisions are incorporated in Cap. 01:01 .]\n\n## CHAPTER IV\n\nThe Executive (ss 30-56)\n\n## PART I\n\nThe President and the Vice-President (ss 30-41)\n\n## 30. Office of President\n\nThere shall be a President of the Republic of Botswana who shall be the Head of State.\n\n## 31. First President\n\n(1) The first President shall be the person who immediately before 30th September, 1966 holds the office of Prime Minister under the Constitution.\n\n- (2) The first President shall be deemed to have assumed office at the coming into operation of this Constitution.\n\n## 32. Election of President after dissolution of Parliament\n\nCopyright Government of Botswana", + "recall": 0.9420289855072463, + "true_md": "- 25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n- 25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n- \"disciplined force\" means- ( a ) a naval, military or air force; ( b ) a police force; or\n\n- ( a ) a naval, military or air force; ( b ) a police force; or ( c ) a prison service; \n\n- ( b ) a police force; or ( c ) a prison service; \"legal representative\"\n\nquestion to the High Court unless, in his or her opinion, th e raising of the question is merely frivolous or vexatious. (4) Parliament may confer upon the High Court such powers in addition to those conferred \n\nfrivolous or vexatious. (4) Parliament may confer upon the High Court such powers in addition to those conferred by this section as may appear to be necessary or desirable for the purpose of enabling that court more effectively to exercise the jurisdiction conferred upon it by this section. (5) Rules of court making provision with respect to the practice and procedure of the High \n\nmore effectively to exercise the jurisdiction conferred upon it by this section. (5) Rules of court making provision with respect to the practice and procedure of the High Court for the purposes of this section may be made by the person or authority for the time being having power to make rules of court with respect to the practice and procedure of that court generally. 19. Interpretation and savings\n\n19. Interpretation and savings (1) In this Chapter, unless the context otherwise requires - \"court\" means any court of law having j urisdiction in Botswana other than a court established by a disciplinary law, and in sections 4 and 6 of this Constitution a court established by a disciplinary law; \"disciplinary law\" means a law regulating the discipline of any disciplined force;\n\nby a disciplinary law; \"disciplinary law\" means a law regulating the discipline of any disciplined force; \"disciplined force\" means- \n\n\"disciplinary law\" means a law regulating the discipline of any disciplined force; \"disciplined force\" means- a naval, military or air force;\n\n( c ) a prison service; \"legal representative\" means a person entitled to practise in Botswana as an advocate or attorney; \"member\" , in relation to a disciplined force, inc ludes any person who, under the law \n\nor attorney; \"member\" , in relation to a disciplined force, inc ludes any person who, under the law regulating the discipline of that force, is subject to that discipline. (2) In relation to any person who is a member of a disciplined force raised under an Act of \n\nregulating the discipline of that force, is subject to that discipline. (2) In relation to any person who is a member of a disciplined force raised under an Act of Parliament, nothing contained in or done under the authority of the disciplinary law of that force shall be held to be inconsistent with or in contravention of any of the provisions of this Chapter other than sections 4, 6 and 7. (3) In relation to any person who is a member of a disciplined force raised otherwise than \n\nother than sections 4, 6 and 7. (3) In relation to any person who is a member of a disciplined force raised otherwise than as aforesaid and lawfully present in Botswana, nothing contained in or done under the authority of the disciplinary law of that force shall be held to be inconsistent with or in contravention of any of the provisions of this Chapter. CHAPTERIII \n\n20 to 29 inclusive. [ Repealed. ] [ Chapter III, sections 20 to 29 repealed, and the provisions are incorporated in Cap. 01:01 .] CHAPTER IV \n\nOffice of President There shall be a President of the Republic of Botswana who shall be the Head of State. First President\n\n31. First President (1) The first President shall be the person who immediately before 30th Septembe r, 1966 holds the office of Prime Minister under the Constitution. (2) The first President shall be deemed to have assumed office at the coming into \n\nholds the office of Prime Minister under the Constitution. (2) The first President shall be deemed to have assumed office at the coming into operation of this Constitution. 32. Election of President after dissolution of Parliament \n\n## CHAPTERIII Citizenship (ss 20-29: repealed)\n\n## CHAPTERIII Citizenship (ss 20-29: repealed) Repealed. ]\n\n## Citizenship 20 to 29 inclusive. [ Repealed. ] [ Chapter III, sections 20 to 29 repealed, and the provisions are incorporated in Cap. 01:01\n\n## Chapter III, sections 20 to 29 repealed, and the provisions are incorporated in Cap. 01:01 CHAPTER IV The Executive (ss 30-56)\n\n## CHAPTER IV The Executive (ss 30-56) PART I\n\n## The Executive (ss 30-56) PART I The President and the Vice -President\n\n## PART I The President and the Vice -President (ss 30-41) Office of President\n\n## The President and the Vice 30. Office of President There shall be a President of the Republic of Botswana who shall be the Head of State.\n\n## There shall be a President of the Republic of Botswana who shall be the Head of State. 31. First President (1) The first President shall be the person who immediately before 30th Septembe\n\n## operation of this Constitution. 32. Election of President after dissolution of Parliament\n\nCopyright Government of Botswana\n\n## generally. 19. Interpretation and savings (1) In this Chapter, unless the context otherwise requires" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5888020910425458, + "doc_id": "f6bed3c65da7fb8630292cff661032398914811bcb9e322f48aa0a3737b391dd", + "edit_distance": 0.6800341296928327, + "f1_score": 0.9725274725274725, + "meteor": 0.42808787376897334, + "precision": 0.9943820224719101, + "pred_md": "25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio\n\n- (1) The President of the Court of Appeal shall, unless that office is held ex-officio by the Chief Justice, be appointed by the President.\n- (2) The Justices of Appeal, if any, shall be appointed by the President, acting in accordance with the advice of the Judicial Service Commission.\n- (3) A person shall not be qualified to be appointed as a judge of the Court of Appeal unless-\n- ( a ) he or she holds, or has held office as, a judge of a court having unlimited jurisdiction in civil and criminal matters in Botswana, in a Commonwealth country or in any country outside the Commonwealth that may be prescribed by Parliament or a court having jurisdiction in appeals from such a court; or\n- ( b ) he or she is qualified to practise as an advocate or attorney in such a court and has been qualified for not less than ten years to practise as an advocate or attorney in such a court; or\n- ( c ) he or she is qualified to practise as an advocate or attorney and he or she has had experience in the teaching of law in a recognised university for not less than ten years.\n\n(4) In computing, for the purposes of subsection (3) of this section, the period during which any person has been qualified to practise as an advocate or attorney any period during which he or she has held judicial office after becoming so qualified shall be included.\n\n- (5) If the office of President of the Court of Appeal is vacant or if the President of the Court of Appeal is for any reason unable to perform the functions of his or her office, then, until a person has been appointed to and has assumed the functions of that office or until the President of the Court of Appeal has resumed those functions, as the case may be, those functions shall be performed by such one of the other judges of the Court of Appeal or such other person qualified for appointment as a judge of the Court of Appeal as the President may appoint for that purpose:\n\nProvided that-\n\n- (i) a person may be appointed under this subsection notwithstanding that he or she has attained the age of 70 years or such other age as may be prescribed for the purposes of section 101 of this Constitution;\n- (ii) a person appointed under this subsection, who is not a judge of the Court of Appeal, may, notwithstanding the assumption or resumption of the functions of the office of President of the Court of Appeal by the holder of that office, continue to act as a judge of the Court of Appeal for so long thereafter and to such extent as may be necessary to enable him or her to deliver judgment or to do any other thing in relation to proceedings that were commenced before him or her previously thereto.\n- (6) If the office of a Justice of Appeal is vacant or if any Justice of Appeal is appointed to act as Chief Justice or President of the Court of Appeal or is for any reason unable to perform the functions of his or her office, the President, acting in accordance with the advice of the Judicial Service Commission, may appoint a person qualified for appointment as a Justice of Appeal to act as a Justice of Appeal:\n\nProvided that a person may be so appointed notwithstanding that he or she has attained the age of 70 years or such other age as may be prescribed for the purposes of section 101 of this Constitution.\n\n(7) Any person appointed under subsection (6) of this section to act as a Justice of Appeal, shall subject to the provisions of section 101(4) and (5) of this Constitution, continue to act for the period of his or her appointment or, if no such period is specified, until his or her appointment is revoked by the President, acting in accordance with the advice of the Judicial Service Commission:\n\nProvided that the President, acting in accordance with the advice of the Judicial Service Commission, may permit a person whose appointment to act as a Justice of Appeal has expired\n\nCopyright Government of Botswana", + "recall": 0.9516129032258065, + "true_md": "25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n(1) The President of the Court of Appeal shall, unless that office is held ex-officio by the Chief Justice, be appointed by thePresident. (2) The Justices of Appeal, if any, shall be appointed by the President, acting in \n\nChief Justice, be appointed by thePresident. (2) The Justices of Appeal, if any, shall be appointed by the President, acting in accordance with the advice of the Judicial Service Commission. (3) A person shall not be qualified to be appointed as a judge of the Court of Appeal \n\naccordance with the advice of the Judicial Service Commission. (3) A person shall not be qualified to be appointed as a judge of the Court of Appeal unless- ( a ) he or she holds, or has held office as, a judge of a court having unlimited jurisdiction in \n\nexperience in the teaching of law in a recognised university for not less than ten years. (4) In computing, for the purposes of subsection (3) of this section, the period during which any person has been qualified to practise as an advocate or attorney any period during which he or she has held judicial office after becoming so qualified shall be included. (5) If the office of President of the Court of Appeal is vacant or if the President of the Court \n\nor she has held judicial office after becoming so qualified shall be included. (5) If the office of President of the Court of Appeal is vacant or if the President of the Court of Appeal is for any reason unable to perform the functions of his or her office, then, until a person has been appointed to and has assumed thefunctions of that office or until the President of the Court of Appeal has resumed those functions, as the case may be, those functions shall be performed by such one of the other judges of the Court of Appeal or such other person qualified for appointmentas a judge of the Court of Appeal as the President may appoint for that purpose: Provided that- \n\nfor appointmentas a judge of the Court of Appeal as the President may appoint for that purpose: Provided that- a person may be appointed under this subsection notwithstanding that he or she has \n\nthat were commenced before him or her previously thereto. (6) If the office of a Justice of Appeal is vacant or if any Justice of Appeal is appointed to act as Chief Justice or President of the Court of Appeal or is for any reason unable to perform the functions of his or her office, the President, acting in accordance with the advice of the Judicial Service Commission, may appoint a person qualified for appointment as a Justice of Appeal to act as a Justice of Appeal: Provided thata person may be so appointed notwithstanding that he or she has attained \n\nas a Justice of Appeal: Provided thata person may be so appointed notwithstanding that he or she has attained the age of 70 years or such other age as may be prescribed for the purposes of section 101 of this Constitution. (7) Any person appointed under subsection (6) of this section to act as a Justice of Appeal, \n\nConstitution. (7) Any person appointed under subsection (6) of this section to act as a Justice of Appeal, shall subject to the provisions of section 101(4) and (5) of this Constitution, continue to act for the period of his or her appointment or, if no such period is specified, until his or her appointment is revoked by the President,acting in accordance with the advice of the Judicial Service Commission: Provided that the President, acting in accordance with the advice of the Judicial Service \n\nCommission: Provided that the President, acting in accordance with the advice of the Judicial Service Commission, may permit a person whose appointment to act as a Justice of Appeal has expired \n\n- unless- ( a ) he or she holds, or has held office as, a judge of a court having unlimited jurisdiction in civil and criminal matters in Botswana, in a Commonwealth country or in any country outside the Commonwealth that may be prescribed by Parliament or a court havin g jurisdiction in appeals from such a court; or ( b ) he or she is qualified to practise as an advocate or attorney in such a court and has been \n\n- jurisdiction in appeals from such a court; or ( b ) he or she is qualified to practise as an advocate or attorney in such a court and has been qualified for not less than ten years to practise as an advocate or attorney in such a court ; or \n\n- or ( c ) he or she is qualified to practise as an advocate or attorney and he or she has had experience in the teaching of law in a recognised university for not less than ten years. (4) In computing, for the purposes of subsection (3) of this section, the period during which \n\nqualified for not less than ten years to practise as an advocate or attorney in such a court or he or she is qualified to practise as an advocate or attorney and he or she has had \n\n- Provided that- (i) a person may be appointed under this subsection notwithstanding that he or she has attained the age of 70 years or such other age as may be prescribed for the purposes of section 101 of this Constitution; (ii) a person appointed under this subsection, who is not a judge of the Court of Appeal, \n\n- section 101 of this Constitution; (ii) a person appointed under this subsection, who is not a judge of the Court of Appeal, may, notwithstanding the assumption or resumption of the functions of the office of Presidentof the Court of Appeal by the holder of that office, continue to act as a judge of the Court of Appeal for so long thereafter and to such extent as may be necessary to enable him or her to deliver judgment or to do any other thing in relation to proceedin gs that were commenced before him or her previously thereto. (6) If the office of a Justice of Appeal is vacant or if any Justice of Appeal is appointed to \n\nCopyright Government of Botswana" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5412732715606565, + "doc_id": "821e66c46daa735462b8c7bde0ee7090bdd590acd274a93f6c485621e51ed3b1", + "edit_distance": 0.40394973070017953, + "f1_score": 0.9658314350797266, + "meteor": 0.45588351829188606, + "precision": 0.9906542056074766, + "pred_md": "25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio\n\nthe new National Assembly shall meet on such day (not being more than 14 days after the result of the election is ascertained or, as the case may be, the declaration that no candidate has been elected) as the Speaker shall appoint, and shall elect a person to the office of President in such manner as is prescribed by section 35(5) of this Constitution and subject thereto by or under an Act of Parliament. Such an election shall take place before the election of the Specially Elected Members of the National Assembly.\n\n- (7) A person elected to the office of President under this section shall assume that office on the day upon which he or she is declared elected.\n- (8) Without prejudice to the provisions of section 92 of this Constitution, an Elected Member of the National Assembly may, in the event of there being one or more successful election petitions following a general election, move, at the first sitting of the Assembly after the resultant by-elections have been decided and the Members thereby elected have taken their seats, that the President does not enjoy the support of the majority of the Elected Members of the Assembly; and in the voting on that question the Specially Elected Members of the Assembly shall have no vote. If it appears as a result of the voting on that question that the President does not enjoy the support of a majority of the elected Members of the Assembly, the office of President shall become vacant.\n- (9) Any Elected Member of the Assembly may give notice to the President that he or she intends to move in the Assembly a motion under subsection (8) and notwithstanding any other provision of this Constitution the President shall not after receipt of any such notice be empowered to dissolve Parliament before the conclusion of the sitting of the Assembly mentioned in the said subsection (8).\n- (10) If the office of President becomes vacant in accordance with subsection (8) of this section the seats of the Specially Elected Members of the Assembly shall also become vacant, and the election of a person to the office of President shall take place before the election of the Specially Elected Members.\n- (11) In this section-\n\n\"Parliamentary candidate\" means a candidate in the Parliamentary election;\n\n\"the Parliamentary election\" means the general election to elect those Members of the National Assembly who are referred to in section 58(2)( a ) of this Constitution following any dissolution of Parliament;\n\n\"Presidential candidate\" means a candidate for the office of President;\n\n\"the returning officer\" means the returning officer specified in section 38 of this Constitution.\n\n## 33. Qualification for election as President\n\n(1) A person shall be qualified for election as President if, and shall not be qualified unless, he or she-\n\n- ( a ) is a citizen of Botswana by birth or descent;\n- ( b ) has attained the age of 30 years; and\n- ( c ) is qualified to be elected as a Member of the National Assembly. (2) Notwithstanding any other law to the contrary, for the purposes of this section and section 39-\n- ( a ) the term \"citizen by birth\" shall be understood to include only those persons who became citizens of Botswana prior to the amendment of the law relating to citizenship by the Citizenship Act;\n- ( b ) any person who, although his or her father was a citizen of Botswana at the time of that person's birth, had, by virtue of his or her having been born outside Botswana, to be registered as a citizen of Botswana, under the law relating to citizenship in force at that time, shall be regarded as a citizen by descent.\n\nCopyright Government of Botswana", + "recall": 0.9422222222222222, + "true_md": "- 25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n- 25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\nthe new National Assembly shall meet on such day (not being more than 14 days after the result of the election is ascertaine d or, as the case may be, the declaration that no candidate has been elected) as the Speaker shall appoint, and shall elect a person to the office of President in such manner as is prescribed by section 35(5) of this Constitution and subject thereto by or under an Act of Parliament. Such an election shall take place before the election of the Specially Elected Members of the National Assembly. (7) A person elected to the office of President under this section shall assume that office \n\nMembers of the National Assembly. (7) A person elected to the office of President under this section shall assume that office on the day upon which he or she is declared elected. (8) Without prejudice to the provisions of section 92 of this Constitution, an Elected \n\non the day upon which he or she is declared elected. (8) Without prejudice to the provisions of section 92 of this Constitution, an Elected Member of the National Assembly may, in the event of there being one or more successful election petitions following a general election, move, at the first sitting of the Assembly after the resultant by-elections have been decided and the Members thereby elected have taken their seats, that the President does not enjoy the support of the majority of the Elected Members of the Assembly; and in the voting on that question the Specially Elected Members of the Assembly shall have no vote. If it appears as a result of the voting on that question that the President does not enjoy the support of a majority of the elected Members of the Assembly, th e office of President shall become vacant. (9) Any Elected Member of the Assembly may give notice to the President that he or she \n\nshall become vacant. (9) Any Elected Member of the Assembly may give notice to the President that he or she intends to move in the Assembly a motion under subsection (8) and notwithstanding any other provision of this Constitutionthe President shall not after receipt of any such notice be empowered to dissolve Parliament before the conclusion of the sitting of the Assembly mentioned in the said subsection (8). (10) If the office of President becomes vacant in accordance with subse ction (8) of this \n\nin the said subsection (8). (10) If the office of President becomes vacant in accordance with subse ction (8) of this section the seats of the Specially Elected Members of the Assembly shall also become vacant, and the election of a person to the office of President shall take place before the election of the Specially Elected Members. (11) In this section- \n\nSpecially Elected Members. (11) In this section- \"Parliamentary candidate\" means a candidate in the Parliamentary election;\n\n(11) In this section- \"Parliamentary candidate\" means a candidate in the Parliamentary election; \"the Parliamentary election\" means the general election to elect those Members of the \n\n\"Parliamentary candidate\" means a candidate in the Parliamentary election; \"the Parliamentary election\" means the general election to elect those Members of the National Assembly who are referred to in section 58(2)( a ) of this Constitution followingany dissolution of Parliament; \"Presidential candidate\" means a candidate for the office of President;\n\ndissolution of Parliament; \"Presidential candidate\" means a candidate for the office of President; \"the returning officer\" means the returning officer specified in section 38 of this \n\n\"Presidential candidate\" means a candidate for the office of President; \"the returning officer\" means the returning officer specified in section 38 of this Constitution. 33. Qualification for election as Presi dent\n\n33. Qualification for election as Presi dent (1) A person shall be qualified for election as President if, and shall not be qualified unless, he or she- ( a ) is a citizen of Botswana by birth or descent;\n\n## Constitution. 33. Qualification for election as Presi dent (1) A person shall be qualified for election as President if, and shall not be qualified unless,\n\n- he or she- ( a ) is a citizen of Botswana by birth or descent; ( b ) has attained the age of 30 years; and\n\n- ( b ) has attained the age of 30 years; and ( c ) is qualified to be elected as a Member ofthe National Assembly. (2) Notwithstanding any other law to the contrary, for the purposes of this section and \n\n( c ) is qualified to be elected as a Member ofthe National Assembly. (2) Notwithstanding any other law to the contrary, for the purposes of this section and section 39- ( a ) the term \"citizen by birth\" shall be understood to include only those persons who became \n\n- Citizenship Act; ( b ) any person who, although his or her father was a citizen of Botswana at the time of that person's birth, had, by virtue of his or her having been born outside Botswana, to be registered as a citizen of Botswana, under the law relating to citizenship in force at that time, shall be regarded as a citizen by descent.\n\n- ( a ) is a citizen of Botswana by birth or descent; ( b ) has attained the age of 30 years; and ( c ) is qualified to be elected as a Member ofthe National Assembly. \n\nCopyright Government of Botswana\n\n- section 39- ( a ) the term \"citizen by birth\" shall be understood to include only those persons who became citizens of Botswana prior to the amen dment of the law relating to citizenship by the Citizenship Act; ( b ) any person who, although his or her father was a citizen of Botswana at the time of that" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.21342700612828794, + "doc_id": "d6e5ffc2702f0b698d46f82374ffc85031ec1dca81fbc74c5d71bbe2dddd9156", + "edit_distance": 0.6136890951276102, + "f1_score": 0.9751552795031055, + "meteor": 0.32658965882747587, + "precision": 0.9936708860759493, + "pred_md": "25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio\n\n## CONSTITUTION OF BOTSWANA\n\n## ARRANGEMENT OF SECTIONS CHAPTER I\n\n## The Republic\n\n- 1. Declaration of Republic\n- 2. Public Seal\n\n## CHAPTER II\n\nProtection of Fundamental Rights and Freedoms of the Individual\n\n- 3. Fundamental rights and freedoms of the individual\n- 4. Protection of right to life\n- 5. Protection of right to personal liberty\n- 6. Protection from slavery and forced labour\n- 7. Protection from inhuman treatment\n- 8. Protection from deprivation of property\n- 9. Protection for privacy of home and other property\n- 10. Provisions to secure protection of law\n- 11. Protection of freedom of conscience\n- 12. Protection of freedom of expression\n- 13. Protection of freedom of assembly and association\n- 14. Protection of freedom of movement\n- 15. Protection from discrimination on the grounds of race, etc.\n- 16. Derogation from fundamental rights and freedoms\n- 17. Declarations relating to emergencies\n- 18. Enforcement of protective provisions\n- 19. Interpretation and savings\n\n## CHAPTER III\n\nCitizenship\n\n## 20 to 29. [ Repealed and incorporated in Cap. 01:01 .]\n\n## CHAPTER IV The Executive PART I\n\n## The President and the Vice-President\n\n- 30. Office of President\n- 31. First President\n- 32. Election of President after dissolution of Parliament\n- 33. Qualification for election as President\n- 34. Tenure of office of President\n- 35. Vacancy in office of President\n- 36. Discharge of functions of President during absence, illness, etc.\n- 37. Oath of President\n- 38. Returning officer at elections of President\n- 39. Vice-President\n- 40. Salary and allowances of President\n- 41. Protection of President in respect of legal proceedings\n\n## PART II\n\n## The Cabinet\n\n- 42. Ministers and Assistant Ministers\n- 43. Tenure of office of Ministers and Assistant Ministers\n- 44. Cabinet\n\nCopyright Government of Botswana", + "recall": 0.9573170731707317, + "true_md": "# CONSTITUTION OF BOTSWANA ARRANGEMENT OF SECTIONS\n\n25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n## CONSTITUTION OF BOTSWANA ARRANGEMENT OF SECTIONS CHAPTER I\n\n## ARRANGEMENT OF SECTIONS CHAPTER I The Republic\n\n## CHAPTER III Citizenship Repealed and incorporated in Cap. 01:01\n\n## PART II The Cabinet Ministers and Assistant Ministers\n\nCopyright Government of Botswana\n\n- 1. Declaration of Republic 2. Public Seal \n\n- 1. Declaration of Republic 2. Public Seal \n\n## CHAPTER II Protection of Fundamental Rights and Freedoms of the Individual Fundamental rights and freedoms of the individual\n\n- Protection of Fundamental Rights and Freedoms of the Individual 3. Fundamental rights and freedoms of the individual 4. Protection of right to life\n\n- 3. Fundamental rights and freedoms of the individual 4. Protection of right to life 5. Protection of right to personal liberty\n\n- 4. Protection of right to life 5. Protection of right to personal liberty 6. Protection from slavery and forced labour\n\n- 5. Protection of right to personal liberty 6. Protection from slavery and forced labour 7. Protection from inhuman treatment\n\n- 6. Protection from slavery and forced labour 7. Protection from inhuman treatment 8. Protection from deprivation of property\n\n- 7. Protection from inhuman treatment 8. Protection from deprivation of property 9. Protection for privacy of home and other proper\n\n- 8. Protection from deprivation of property 9. Protection for privacy of home and other proper ty 10. Provisions to secure protection of law\n\n- 9. Protection for privacy of home and other proper 10. Provisions to secure protection of law 11. Protection of freedom of conscience\n\n- 10. Provisions to secure protection of law 11. Protection of freedom of conscience 12. Protection of freedom of expression\n\n- 11. Protection of freedom of conscience 12. Protection of freedom of expression 13. Protection of freedom of assembly and association\n\n- 12. Protection of freedom of expression 13. Protection of freedom of assembly and association 14. Protection of freedom of movement\n\n- 13. Protection of freedom of assembly and association 14. Protection of freedom of movement 15. Protection from discriminati on on the grounds of race, etc.\n\n- 15. Protection from discriminati on on the grounds of race, etc. 16. Derogation from fundamental rights and freedoms 17. Declarations relating to emergencies\n\n- 14. Protection of freedom of movement 15. Protection from discriminati on on the grounds of race, etc. 16. Derogation from fundamental rights and freedoms\n\n- 16. Derogation from fundamental rights and freedoms 17. Declarations relating to emergencies 18. Enforcement of protective provisions\n\n- 17. Declarations relating to emergencies 18. Enforcement of protective provisions 19. Interpretation and savings\n\n- 18. Enforcement of protective provisions 19. Interpretation and savings\n\n- Citizenship 20 to 29. [ Repealed and incorporated in Cap. 01:01 .] \n\n- The President and the Vice 30. Office of President 31. First President \n\n## CHAPTER IV The Executive PART I\n\n## The Executive PART I The President and the Vice -President Office of President\n\n- 30. Office of President 31. First President 32. Election of President after dissolution of Parliament\n\n- 31. First President 32. Election of President after dissolution of Parliament 33. Qualification for election as President\n\n- 32. Election of President after dissolution of Parliament 33. Qualification for election as President 34. Tenure of office of President\n\n- 33. Qualification for election as President 34. Tenure of office of President 35. Vacancy in office of President\n\n- 34. Tenure of office of President 35. Vacancy in office of President 36. Discharge of functions of President during absence, illness, etc.\n\n- 35. Vacancy in office of President 36. Discharge of functions of President during absence, illness, etc. 37. Oath of President \n\n- 36. Discharge of functions of President during absence, illness, etc. 37. Oath of President 38. Returning officer at elections of President\n\n- 37. Oath of President 38. Returning officer at elections of President 39. Vice-President \n\n- 38. Returning officer at elections of President 39. Vice-President 40. Salary and allowances of Pres\n\n- 39. Vice-President 40. Salary and allowances of Pres ident 41. Protection of President in respect of legal proceedings\n\n- 40. Salary and allowances of Pres ident 41. Protection of President in respect of legal proceedings\n\n- The Cabinet 42. Ministers and Assistant Ministers 43. Tenure of office of Ministers and Assistant Ministers\n\n- 42. Ministers and Assistant Ministers 43. Tenure of office of Ministers and Assistant Ministers 44. Cabinet \n\n- 43. Tenure of office of Ministers and Assistant Ministers 44. Cabinet" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4205849879933633, + "doc_id": "b6de6ee156053d81996d52c840dd99771b6426efd998bfa16d7e6ab9084640b5", + "edit_distance": 0.667680608365019, + "f1_score": 0.9634146341463414, + "meteor": 0.3850757021703046, + "precision": 0.9793388429752066, + "pred_md": "25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio\n\nSubject to the provisions of section 62 of this Constitution, a person shall be qualified to be elected as a Member of the National Assembly if, and shall not be qualified to be so elected unless-\n\n- ( a ) he or she is a citizen of Botswana;\n- ( b ) he or she has attained the age of 18 years;\n- ( c ) he or she is qualified for registration as a voter for the purposes of the election of the Elected Members of the National Assembly and is so registered; and\n- ( d ) he or she is able to speak, and, unless incapacitated by blindness or other physical cause, to read English well enough to take an active part in the proceedings of the Assembly.\n\n## 62. Disqualifications for membership of National Assembly\n\n- (1) No person shall be qualified to be elected as a Member of the National Assembly who-\n- ( a ) is, by virtue of his or her own act, under any acknowledgement of allegiance, obedience or adherence to a foreign power or state;\n- ( b ) has been declared insolvent or adjudged or otherwise declared bankrupt under any law for the time being in force in Botswana and has not been discharged, or has made a composition with his or her creditors and has not paid his or her debts in full;\n- ( c ) is certified to be insane or otherwise adjudged or declared to be of unsound mind under any law for the time being in force in Botswana;\n- ( d ) is a Member of the Ntlo ya Dikgosi ;\n- ( e ) subject to such exceptions as may be prescribed by Parliament, holds any public office, or is acting in any public office by virtue of a contract of service expressed to continue for a period exceeding six months;\n- ( ) f is under sentence of death imposed on him or her by a court in any part of the Commonwealth, or is under a sentence of imprisonment (by whatever name called) exceeding six months imposed on him or her by such a court or substituted by competent authority for some other sentence imposed on him or her by such a court;\n- ( g ) holds, or is acting in, any office the functions of which involve any responsibility for, or in connection with, the conduct of any elections to the Assembly or the compilation or revision of any electoral register for the purposes of such elections.\n\n(2) Parliament may provide that a person shall not be qualified for election to the National Assembly for such period (not exceeding five years) as may be prescribed if he or she is convicted of any such offence connected with elections to the Assembly as may be prescribed.\n\n- (3) For the purposes of this section two or more terms of imprisonment that are required to be served consecutively shall be regarded as a single term of imprisonment for the aggregate period of those terms, and no account shall be taken of a sentence of imprisonment imposed as an alternative to or in default of the payment of a fine.\n\n## 63. Constituencies\n\nBotswana shall be divided into as many constituencies as there are Elected Members of the National Assembly and each of those constituencies shall return one Member to the National Assembly.\n\n## 64. Delimitation Commission\n\n(1) The Judicial Service Commission shall, not later than 1st March, 1969, and thereafter at intervals of not less than five nor more than 10 years, appoint a Delimitation Commission consisting of a Chairman and not more than four other members.\n\n(2) Notwithstanding the provisions of subsection (1) of this section, at any time when-\n\n- ( a ) Parliament has made provision altering the number of seats of Elected Members in the National Assembly; or\n- ( b ) a comprehensive national population census is held in Botswana,\n\nCopyright Government of Botswana", + "recall": 0.948, + "true_md": "25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\nSubject to the provisions of section 62 of this Constitution, a person shall be qualified to be elected as a Member of the National Assembly if, and shall not be qualif ied to be so elected unless- ( a ) he or she is a citizen of Botswana;\n\nDisqualifications for membership of National Assembly (1) No person shall be qualified to be elected as a Member of the National Assembly who - is, by virtue of his or her own act, under any acknowledgement of allegiance, obedience \n\nrevision of any electoral regis ter for the purposes of such elections. (2) Parliament may provide that a person shall not be qualified for election to the National Assembly for such period (not exceeding five years) as may be prescribed if he or she is convicted of any such offence con nected with elections to the Assembly as may be prescribed. (3) For the purposes of this section two or more terms of imprisonment that are required to \n\nconvicted of any such offence con nected with elections to the Assembly as may be prescribed. (3) For the purposes of this section two or more terms of imprisonment that are required to be served consecutively shall be regarded as a single term of imprisonment for the aggregate period ofthose terms, and no account shall be taken of a sentence of imprisonment imposed as an alternative to or in default of the payment of a fine. 63. Constituencies\n\n63. Constituencies Botswana shall be divided into as many constituencies as there are Elected Member s of the National Assembly and each of those constituencies shall return one Member to the National Assembly. 64. Delimitation Commission\n\n64. Delimitation Commission (1) The Judicial Service Commission shall, not later than 1st March, 1969, and thereafter at intervals of not less than five nor more than 10 years, appoint a Delimitation Commission consisting of a Chairman and not more than four other members. (2) Notwithstanding the provisions of subsection (1) of this section, at any time when - \n\nconsisting of a Chairman and not more than four other members. (2) Notwithstanding the provisions of subsection (1) of this section, at any time when - Parliament has made provision altering the number of seats of Elected Members in the \n\n- unless- ( a ) he or she is a citizen of Botswana; ( b ) he or she has attained the age of 18 years;\n\n- ( a ) he or she is a citizen of Botswana; ( b ) he or she has attained the age of 18 years; ( c ) he or she is qualified for registration as a voter for the purposes of the election of the \n\n- ( b ) he or she has attained the age of 18 years; ( c ) he or she is qualified for registration as a voter for the purposes of the election of the Elected Members of theNational Assembly and is so registered; and ( d ) he or she is able to speak, and, unless incapacitated by blindness or other physical \n\n- Elected Members of theNational Assembly and is so registered; and ( d ) he or she is able to speak, and, unless incapacitated by blindness or other physical cause, to read English well enough to take an active part in the proceedings of the Assembly. 62. Disqualifications for membership of National Assembly \n\n- (1) No person shall be qualified to be elected as a Member of the National Assembly who - ( a ) is, by virtue of his or her own act, under any acknowledgement of allegiance, obedience or adherence to a foreign powe r or state; ( b ) has been declared insolvent or adjudged or otherwise declared bankrupt under any law \n\n- or adherence to a foreign powe r or state; ( b ) has been declared insolvent or adjudged or otherwise declared bankrupt under any law for the time being in force in Botswana and has not been discharged, or has made a composition with his or her creditors and has not paid his or her debts in full; ( c ) is certified to be insane or otherwise adjudged or declared to be of unsound mind under \n\n- composition with his or her creditors and has not paid his or her debts in full; ( c ) is certified to be insane or otherwise adjudged or declared to be of unsound mind under any law for the time being in force in Botswana; ( d ) is a Member of the Ntlo ya Dikgosi ; \n\n- any law for the time being in force in Botswana; ( d ) is a Member of the Ntlo ya Dikgosi ; ( e ) subject to such exceptions as may be prescribed by Parliament, holds any public office, \n\n- ( d ) is a Member of the Ntlo ya Dikgosi ; ( e ) subject to such exceptions as may be prescribed by Parliament, holds any public office, or is acting in any public office by virtue of a contract of service expressed to continue for a period exceeding six months; ( f ) is under sentence of death imposed on him or her by a court in any part of the \n\n- a period exceeding six months; ( f ) is under sentence of death imposed on him or her by a court in any part of the Commonwealth, or is under a sentence of imprisonment (by whatever name called) exceeding six months imposed on him or her by such a court or substituted by competent authority for some other sentence imposed on him or her by such a court; ( g ) holds, or is acting in, any office the functions of which involve any responsibility for, or in \n\n- authority for some other sentence imposed on him or her by such a court; ( g ) holds, or is acting in, any office the functions of which involve any responsibility for, or in connection with, the conduct of any elections to the Assembly or the compilation or revision of any electoral regis ter for the purposes of such elections. (2) Parliament may provide that a person shall not be qualified for election to the National \n\n- (2) Notwithstanding the provisions of subsection (1) of this section, at any time when - ( a ) Parliament has made provision altering the number of seats of Elected Members in the National Assembly; or ( b ) a comprehensive national population census is held in Botswana,\n\n- National Assembly; or ( b ) a comprehensive national population census is held in Botswana,\n\n## Assembly. 64. Delimitation Commission (1) The Judicial Service Commission shall, not later than 1st March, 1969, and thereafter\n\n## an alternative to or in default of the payment of a fine. 63. Constituencies Botswana shall be divided into as many constituencies as there are Elected Member\n\n## Assembly. 62. Disqualifications for membership of National Assembly (1) No person shall be qualified to be elected as a Member of the National Assembly who\n\nCopyright Government of Botswana" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5554812976791506, + "doc_id": "2b1d3454016b14652ede6bad2ca2177c606cccdd1efb17e8458310d48e57450b", + "edit_distance": 0.3656093489148581, + "f1_score": 0.9864253393665158, + "meteor": 0.44185442844504375, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio\n\n- (8) A member of the Public Service Commission shall not be removed from office except in accordance with the provisions of this section.\n- (9) If the office of Chairman of the Public Service Commission is vacant or if the person holding that office is for any reason unable to perform the functions of his or her office, then, until a person has been appointed to and has assumed the functions of that office or until the person holding that office has resumed those functions, as the case may be, those functions shall be performed by such one of the other members of the Commission as may be designated in that behalf by the President.\n- (10) If at any time there are less than two members of the Public Service Commission besides the Chairman or if any such member is appointed to act as Chairman or is for any reason unable to perform the functions of his or her office, the President may appoint a person who is qualified for appointment as a member of the Commission to act as a member, and any person so appointed shall, subject to the provisions of subsection (5)( b ) of this section, continue to act until the office in which he or she is acting is filled, or as the case may be, until the holder thereof resumes his or her functions or until his or her appointment to act is revoked by the President.\n- (11) Except as provided in subsection (13) of this section the Public Service Commission shall not be subject to the direction or control of any other person or authority in the exercise of its functions under this Constitution.\n- (12) A member of the Commission shall not enter upon the duties of his or her office until he or she has taken and subscribed the oath of allegiance and such oath for the due execution of his or her office as may be prescribed by Parliament.\n- (13) Provision may be made by or under an Act of Parliament prescribing the procedure of the Commission and, subject thereto, the Commission may regulate its own procedure.\n- (14) Except as may be otherwise provided in its rules or procedure, the Commission may act notwithstanding any vacancy in its membership or the absence of any member and its proceedings shall not be invalidated by the presence or participation of any person not entitled to be present at or to participate in those proceedings.\n- (15) Any decision of the Commission shall require the concurrence of a majority of all the members thereof.\n- (16) A member of the Commission shall not, during the tenure of his or her office or during the three years immediately following such tenure, be eligible for appointment to any public office other than that of Ambassador, High Commissioner or other principal representative of Botswana in any other country or accredited to any international organization.\n\n## 110. Appointment, etc., of public officers\n\n- (1) Subject to the provisions of this section and of sections 111, 113 and 114 of this Constitution, power to appoint persons to hold or to act in any office in the public service, to exercise disciplinary control over persons holding or acting in such offices and to remove from such offices shall vest in such person or persons as may be prescribed by Act of Parliament.\n- (2) The provisions of this section shall not apply in relation to the following offices, that is to\n- say-\n- ( a ) the office of judge of the Court of Appeal or of the High Court;\n- ( b ) any office to which section 104 or 112 of the Constitution applies.\n- (3) Before any person or persons as may have been prescribed under the provisions of subsection (1) exercise power to appoint to or to act in any public office any person who holds or is acting in any office the power to make appointments to which is vested by this Constitution in the President acting in accordance with the advice of the Judicial Service Commission such person shall consult with the Judicial Service Commission.\n\n## 111. Appeals to President\n\nCopyright Government of Botswana", + "recall": 0.9732142857142857, + "true_md": "- 25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n- 25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n(8) A member of the Public Service Commission shall not be removed from office except in accordance with the provisions of this section. (9) If the office of Chairman of the Public Service Commission is vacant or if the person \n\naccordance with the provisions of this section. (9) If the office of Chairman of the Public Service Commission is vacant or if the person holding that office is for any reason unable to perform the functions of his or her office, then, until a person has been appointed to and has assumed the functions of that office or until the person holding that office has resumed those functions, as the case may be, those functions shall be performed by such one of the other members of the Commission as may be designated in that behalf by the President. (10) If at any time there are less than two members of the Public Service Commission \n\nbehalf by the President. (10) If at any time there are less than two members of the Public Service Commission besides the Chairman or if any such member is appointed to act as Chairman or is for any reason unable to perform the functions of his or her office, the President may appoint a person who is qualified for appointment as a member of the Commission to act as a member, and any perso n so appointed shall, subject to the provisions of subsection (5)( b ) of this section, continue to act until the office in which he or she is acting is filled, or as the case may be, until the holder thereof resumes his or her functions or until his or her appointment to act is revoked by the President. (11) Except as provided in subsection (13) of this section the Public Service Commission \n\nresumes his or her functions or until his or her appointment to act is revoked by the President. (11) Except as provided in subsection (13) of this section the Public Service Commission shall not be subject to the direction or control of any other person or authority in the exercise of its functions under this Constitution. (12) A member of the Commission shall not enter upon the duties of his or her office until \n\nfunctions under this Constitution. (12) A member of the Commission shall not enter upon the duties of his or her office until he or she has taken and subscribed the oath of allegiance and such oath for the due execution of his or her office as may be prescribed by Par liament. (13) Provision may be made by or under an Act of Parliament prescribing the procedure of \n\nhis or her office as may be prescribed by Par liament. (13) Provision may be made by or under an Act of Parliament prescribing the procedure of the Commission and, subject thereto, the Commission may regulate its own procedure. (14) Except as may be otherwise provided in its rules or procedure, the Commission may \n\nthe Commission and, subject thereto, the Commission may regulate its own procedure. (14) Except as may be otherwise provided in its rules or procedure, the Commission may act notwithstanding any vacancy in its membership or the absence of any member and its proceedings shall not be invalidated by the presence or participation of any person not entitled to be present at or to participate in those proceedings. (15) Any decision of the Commission shall require the concurrence of a majority of all the \n\nbe present at or to participate in those proceedings. (15) Any decision of the Commission shall require the concurrence of a majority of all the members thereof. (16) A member of the Commission shall not, during the tenure of his or her office or during \n\nmembers thereof. (16) A member of the Commission shall not, during the tenure of his or her office or during the three years immediately following such tenure, be eligible for appointment to any public office other than that of Ambassador, High Commissioner or other principal representative of Botswana in any other country or accredited to any international organization. 110. Appointment, etc., of public officers \n\n110. Appointment, etc., of public officers (1) Subject to the provisions of this section and of sections 111, 113 and 114 of this Constitution, power to appoint persons to hold or to act in any office in the public service, to exercise disciplinary control over persons holding or actin g in such offices and to remove from such offices shall vest in such person or persons as may be prescribed by Act of Parliament. (2) The provisions of this section shall not apply in relation to the following offices, that is to \n\nsuch offices shall vest in such person or persons as may be prescribed by Act of Parliament. (2) The provisions of this section shall not apply in relation to the following offices, that is to say- ( a ) the office of judge of the Court of Appeal or of the High Court;\n\n( b ) any office to which section 104 or 112 of the Constitution applies. (3) Before any person or persons as may have been prescribed under the provisions of subsection (1) exercise power to appoint to or to act in any public office any person who holds or is acting in any office the power to make appointments to which is vested by this Constitution in the President acting in accordance with the advice of the Judicial Service Commission such person shall consult with the Judicial Service Commission. 111. Appeals to President\n\n- say- ( a ) the office of judge of the Court of Appeal or of the High Court; ( b ) any office to which section 104 or 112 of the Constitution applies.\n\n- ( a ) the office of judge of the Court of Appeal or of the High Court; ( b ) any office to which section 104 or 112 of the Constitution applies. (3) Before any person or persons as may have been prescribed under the provisions of \n\n## in any other country or accredited to any international organization. 110. Appointment, etc., of public officers (1) Subject to the provisions of this section and of sections 111, 113 and 114 of this\n\n## person shall consult with the Judicial Service Commission. 111. Appeals to President\n\nCopyright Government of Botswana" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.40697762219160705, + "doc_id": "cd3ee6f862b754d14cffc2a983dbae654cf1c87b3f80efb01a98f0ba4548b8a3", + "edit_distance": 0.5547054322876818, + "f1_score": 0.9505494505494507, + "meteor": 0.340180335862077, + "precision": 0.9829545454545454, + "pred_md": "25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio\n\n- (1) The supreme command of the armed forces of the Republic shall vest in the President and he or she shall hold the office of Commander in Chief.\n- (2) The powers conferred on the President by subsection (1) of this section shall include-\n- ( a ) the power to determine the operational use of the armed forces;\n- ( b ) the power to appoint members of the armed forces, to make appointments on promotion to any office in the armed forces and to dismiss any member of the armed forces.\n- (3) The President may, by directions in writing and subject to such conditions as he or she may think fit, delegate to any member of the armed forces any of the powers mentioned in subsection (2) of this section.\n- (4) Parliament may regulate the exercise of the powers conferred by or under this section. 49. Functions of Vice-President\n\nThe Vice-President shall be the principal assistant of the President in the discharge of his or her executive functions and shall be responsible, under the directions of the President, for such business of the government of Botswana (including the administration of any department of Government) as the President may assign to him or her.\n\n## 50. Functions of Cabinet Ministers and Assistant Ministers\n\n- (1) The Cabinet shall be responsible for advising the President with respect to the policy of the Government and with respect to such other matters as may be referred to it by the President and shall, subject to the provisions of this Constitution, be responsible to the National Assembly for all things done by or under the authority of the President, Vice-President or any Minister in the execution of his or her office.\n- (2) The President shall, so far as practicable and subject to the provisions of this Constitution, consult the Cabinet on matters of policy and the exercise of his or her functions.\n- (3) The obligation of the President to consult his or her Cabinet and for the Cabinet to accept responsibility under this section shall not apply to the exercise by the President of his or her powers in relation to the appointment or removal of the Vice-President, Ministers and Assistant Ministers, the dissolution of Parliament, the Prerogative of Mercy, the assignment of responsibility to the Vice-President or any Minister and the specification of the functions of an Assistant Minister.\n- (4) A Minister shall be responsible, under the direction of the President, for such business of the government of Botswana (including the administration of any department of Government) as the President may assign to him or her.\n- (5) An Assistant Minister shall-\n- ( a ) assist the President or the Vice-President in the discharge of such of the functions of the office of President or Vice-President as the President may specify; or\n- ( b ) assist such Minister in the discharge of the functions assigned to him or her under subsection (4) of this section as the President may specify.\n\n## 51. Attorney-General\n\n- (1) There shall be an Attorney-General appointed by the President whose office shall be a public office.\n- (2) A person shall not be qualified to be appointed to the Office of Attorney-General unless he or she is qualified to be appointed to the Office of a Judge of the High Court.\n- (3) The Attorney-General shall be the principal legal adviser to the Government.\n- (4) A person holding the Office of Attorney-General shall vacate his or her office when he or she attains the age of 60 years or such other age as may be prescribed by Parliament. 51A. Director of Public Prosecutions\n- (1) There shall be a Director of Public Prosecutions appointed by the President whose office shall be a public office and who shall be subject to the administrative supervision of the Attorney-General.\n\nCopyright Government of Botswana", + "recall": 0.9202127659574468, + "true_md": "25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n(1) The supreme command of the armed forces of the Republic shall vest in the President and he or she shall hold the office of Commander in Chief. (2) The powers conferred on the President by subsection (1) of this section shall include - \n\nand he or she shall hold the office of Commander in Chief. (2) The powers conferred on the President by subsection (1) of this section shall include - the power to determine the operational use of the armed forces;\n\nto any office in the armed forces and to dismiss any member of the armed forces. (3) The President may, by directions in writing and subject to such conditions as he or she may think fit, delegate to any member of the armed forces any of the powers mentioned in subsection (2) of this section. (4) Parliament may regulate the exercise of the powers conferred by or under this section.\n\nsubsection (2) of this section. (4) Parliament may regulate the exercise of the powers conferred by or under this section. Functions of Vice-President\n\n49. Functions of Vice-President The Vice-President shall be the principalassistant of the President in the discharge of his or her executive functions and shall be responsible, under the directions of the President, for such business of the government of Botswana (including the administration of any department of Government) as the President may assign to him or her. 50. Functions of Cabinet Ministers and Assistant Ministers \n\n50. Functions of Cabinet Ministers and Assistant Ministers (1) The Cabinet shall be responsible for advising the President with respect to the policy of the Government and with respect to such other m atters as may be referred to it by the President and shall, subject to the provisions of this Constitution, be responsible to the National Assembly for all things done by or under the authority of the President, Vice -President or any Minister in the execution of his or her office. (2) The President shall, so far as practicable and subject to the provisions of this \n\nexecution of his or her office. (2) The President shall, so far as practicable and subject to the provisions of this Constitution, consult the Cabinet on matters of policy and the exercise of his or her functions. (3) The obligation of the President to consult his or her Cabinet and for the Cabinet to \n\nConstitution, consult the Cabinet on matters of policy and the exercise of his or her functions. (3) The obligation of the President to consult his or her Cabinet and for the Cabinet to accept responsibility under this section shall not apply to the exercise by the President of his or her powers in relation to the appointment or removal of the Vice -President, Ministers and Assistant Ministers, th e dissolution of Parliament, the Prerogative of Mercy, the assignment of responsibility to the Vice -President or any Minister and the specification of the functions of an Assistant Minister. (4) A Minister shall be responsible, under the direction of the President, for such business \n\nAssistant Minister. (4) A Minister shall be responsible, under the direction of the President, for such business of the government of Botswana (including the administration of any department of Government) as the President may assign to him or her. (5) An Assistant Minister shall - \n\nas the President may assign to him or her. (5) An Assistant Minister shall - assist the President or the Vice\n\n51. Attorney-General (1) There shall be an Attorney -General appointed by the President whose office shall be a public office. (2) A person shall not be qualified to be appointed to the Office of Attorney -General unless \n\npublic office. (2) A person shall not be qualified to be appointed to the Office of Attorney -General unless he or she is qualified to be appointed to the Office of a Judge of the High Court. (3) The Attorney -General shall be the principal legal adviser to the Government.\n\nhe or she is qualified to be appointed to the Office of a Judge of the High Court. (3) The Attorney -General shall be the principal legal adviser to the Government. (4) A person holding the Office of Attorney -General shall vacate his or her office when he\n\n(3) The Attorney -General shall be the principal legal adviser to the Government. (4) A person holding the Office of Attorney -General shall vacate his or her office when he or she attains the age of 60 years or such other age as may be prescribed by Parliament. 51A. Director of Public Prosecutions\n\n51A. Director of Public Prosecutions (1) There shall be a Director of Public Prosecutions appointed by the President whose office shallbe a public office and who shall be subject to the administrative supervision of the Attorney-General. \n\n## (4) Parliament may regulate the exercise of the powers conferred by or under this section. 49. Functions of Vice-President The Vice-President shall be the principalassistant of the President in the discharge of his\n\n## Government) as the President may assign to him or her. 50. Functions of Cabinet Ministers and Assistant Ministers (1) The Cabinet shall be responsible for advising the President with respect to the policy of\n\n## subsection (4) of this section as the President may spec 51. Attorney-General (1) There shall be an Attorney\n\n## or she attains the age of 60 years or such other age as may be prescribed by Parliament. 51A. Director of Public Prosecutions (1) There shall be a Director of Public Prosecutions appointed by the President whose\n\n- (2) The powers conferred on the President by subsection (1) of this section shall include ( a ) the power to determine the operational use of the armed forces; ( b ) the power to appoint members of the armed forc es, to make appointments on promotion \n\n- ( a ) the power to determine the operational use of the armed forces; ( b ) the power to appoint members of the armed forc es, to make appointments on promotion to any office in the armed forces and to dismiss any member of the armed forces. (3) The President may, by directions in writing and subject to such conditions as he or she \n\n- (5) An Assistant Minister shall - ( a ) assist the President or the Vice -President in the discharge of such of the functions of the office of President or Vice -President as the President may specify; or ( b ) assist such Minister in the discharge of the functions assigned to him or her under \n\n- office of President or Vice -President as the President may specify; or ( b ) assist such Minister in the discharge of the functions assigned to him or her under subsection (4) of this section as the President may spec ify. 51. Attorney-General\n\nCopyright Government of Botswana" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5299118107853524, + "doc_id": "7a6b3a3bf1ebbee37ab0e1a90408ad9483fc06cdbddd452daf4a9497f6cf53e2", + "edit_distance": 0.6916802610114192, + "f1_score": 0.9728395061728394, + "meteor": 0.42767054639844704, + "precision": 0.9949494949494949, + "pred_md": "25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio\n\n(9) If the President considers that the question of removing the Secretary ought to be investigated then-\n\n- ( a ) he or she shall appoint a tribunal which shall consist of a Chairman and not less than two members who hold or have held high judicial office;\n- ( b ) the tribunal shall enquire into and report on the facts thereof to the President and advise the President whether the Secretary ought to be removed from office under this section for inability to perform the functions of his or her office or for misbehaviour.\n\n(10) Where a tribunal appointed under subsection (9) advises the President that the Secretary ought to be removed for inability to perform the functions of his or her office or for misbehaviour, the President shall remove him or her from office.\n\n- (11) If the question of removing the Secretary from office has been referred to a tribunal under subsection (9) of this section, the President may suspend him or her from performing the functions of his or her office, and any such suspension may at any time be revoked by the President and shall cease to have effect if the tribunal advises the President that the Secretary ought not to be removed from office.\n\n## 67. The franchise\n\n- (1) A person who-\n- ( a ) is a citizen of Botswana or of any other country to which this section is applied by Parliament;\n- ( b ) has attained the age of 18 years; and\n- ( c ) has either resided in Botswana for a continuous period of at least 12 months immediately preceding the date on which he or she applies for registration as a voter or was born in Botswana and is domiciled in Botswana on the date on which he or she applies for registration as a voter,\n\nshall, unless he or she is disqualified for registration as a voter under any law, be entitled, upon his or her making application in that behalf at such time and in such manner as may be prescribed by any law, to be registered as a voter for the purposes of elections of Elected Members of the National Assembly, and no other person may be so registered.\n\n(2) A person who has not continuously resided in Botswana for the period mentioned in paragraph ( c ) of subsection (1) of this section but has during the whole period retained his or her residence (or if he or she has more than one residence, his or her principal residence) in Botswana and has been absent therefrom for some temporary purpose only shall be deemed for the purposes of the said paragraph ( c ) to have been resident in Botswana during such absence.\n\n- (3) A person shall be entitled to be registered as a voter-\n- ( a ) in the constituency in which he or she has his or her residence, or if he or she has more than one residence in Botswana in the constituency in which he or she has his or her principal residence; or\n- ( b ) in the case of a person who does not have a residence in Botswana but is able to register in person, in the constituency in which he or she last resided, or in which he or she was born; or\n- ( c ) in the case of a person who is not resident in Botswana and is unable to register in person, at such place as may be prescribed by Parliament and registration at such place shall be treated as registration in the constituency in which he or she last resided, or in which he or she was born in Botswana.\n- (4) A person shall be entitled to be registered as a voter in one constituency only.\n- (5) Every person who is registered in any constituency as a voter for the purposes of elections of the Elected Members of the National Assembly shall, unless he or she is disqualified by Parliament from voting in such elections on the grounds of his or her having been convicted of an offence in connection with the elections or on the grounds of his or her having been reported\n\nCopyright Government of Botswana", + "recall": 0.9516908212560387, + "true_md": "## ought not to be removedfrom office. 67. The franchise (1) A person who-\n\n- 25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n- 25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n- (1) A person who- ( a ) is a citizen of Botswana or of any other country to which this section is applied by Parliament; ( b ) has attained the age of 18 years; and\n\n- Parliament; ( b ) has attained the age of 18 years; and ( c ) has either resided in Botswana for a continuous period of at least 12 months immediately \n\n- ( b ) has attained the age of 18 years; and ( c ) has either resided in Botswana for a continuous period of at least 12 months immediately preceding the date on which he or she applies for registration as a voter or was born in Botswana and is domiciled in Botswana on the date on which he or she applies for registration as a voter, shall, unless he or she is disqualified for registration as a voter under any law, be entitled, upon \n\n- (3) A person shall be entitled to be registered as a voter - ( a ) in the constituency in which he or she has his or her residence, or if he or she has more than one residence in Botswana in the constituency in which he or she has his or her principal residence; or ( b ) in the case of a person who does not have a residence in Botswana but is able to register \n\n- principal residence; or ( b ) in the case of a person who does not have a residence in Botswana but is able to register in person, in the constituency in which he or she last resided, or in which he or she was born; or ( c ) in the case of a person who is not resident in Botswana and is unable to register in \n\n- born; or ( c ) in the case of a person who is not resident in Botswana and is unable to register in person, at such place as may be prescribed by Parliament and registrati on at such place shall be treated as registration in the constituency in which he or she last resided, or in which he or she was born in Botswana. (4) A person shall be entitled to be registered as a voter in one constituency only.\n\n(9) If the President considers that the question of removing the Secretary ought to be investigated then- ( a ) he or she shall appoint a tribu nal which shall consist of a Chairman and not less than two \n\nfor inability to perform the functions of his or her office or for misbehaviour. (10) Where a tribunal appointed under subsection (9) advises the President that the Secretary ought to be removed for inability to per form the functions of his or her office or for misbehaviour, the President shall remove him or her from office. (11) If the question of removing the Secretary from office has been referred to a tribunal \n\nmisbehaviour, the President shall remove him or her from office. (11) If the question of removing the Secretary from office has been referred to a tribunal under subsection (9) of this section, the President may suspend him or her from performing the functions of his or her office, and any such suspension may at any time be revoked by the President and shall cease to have effect if the tribunal advises the President that the Secretary ought not to be removedfrom office. 67. The franchise \n\nThe franchise (1) A person who- is a citizen of Botswana or of any other country to which this section is applied by \n\nregistration as a voter, shall, unless he or she is disqualified for registration as a voter under any law, be entitled, upon his or her making application in that behalf at such time and in such manner as may be prescribed by any law, to be registered as a voter for the purp oses of elections of Elected Members of the National Assembly, and no other person may be so registered. (2) A person who has not continuously resided in Botswana for the period mentioned in \n\nNational Assembly, and no other person may be so registered. (2) A person who has not continuously resided in Botswana for the period mentioned in paragraph ( c ) of subsection (1) of this section but has during the whole period retained his or her residence (or if he or she has more than one residence, his or her principal residence) in Botswana and has been absent therefrom for some temporary purpose only shall be deemed for the purposes of the said paragraph ( c ) to have been resident in Botswana during such absence. (3) A person shall be entitled to be registered as a voter - \n\nthe purposes of the said paragraph ( c ) to have been resident in Botswana during such absence. (3) A person shall be entitled to be registered as a voter - in the constituency in which he or she has his or her residence, or if he or she has \n\nwhich he or she was born in Botswana. (4) A person shall be entitled to be registered as a voter in one constituency only. (5) Every person who i s registered in any constituency as a voter for the purposes of \n\n(4) A person shall be entitled to be registered as a voter in one constituency only. (5) Every person who i s registered in any constituency as a voter for the purposes of elections of the Elected Members of the National Assembly shall, unless he or she is disqualified by Parliament from voting in such elections on the grounds of his or her having been convicted of an offence in connection with the elections or on the grounds of his or her having been reported \n\nCopyright Government of Botswana\n\n- investigated then- ( a ) he or she shall appoint a tribu nal which shall consist of a Chairman and not less than two members who hold or have held high judicial office; ( b ) the tribunal shall enquire into and report on the facts thereof to the President and advise \n\n- members who hold or have held high judicial office; ( b ) the tribunal shall enquire into and report on the facts thereof to the President and advise the President whether the Secretary ought to be removed from office under this section for inability to perform the functions of his or her office or for misbehaviour. (10) Where a tribunal appointed under subsection (9) advises the President that the" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6029569636412135, + "doc_id": "06e169b5e5ee0dc44d1a971f7b2175bfa4f47d0b24e7445f8f20c8c779f904cb", + "edit_distance": 0.45217391304347826, + "f1_score": 0.8972431077694235, + "meteor": 0.5531923702278294, + "precision": 0.8483412322274881, + "pred_md": "25. Staff\n\n26. Class-child ratio\n\n- 5. (1) The Speaker shall cause elections of Specially Elected Members to be held-\n- ( a ) in the case of a general election, as soon as practicable after the holding of a general election of the Elected Members of the National Assembly and before the Assembly first meets after that general election; and\n- ( b ) in the case of a by-election, as soon as practicable after a vacancy has occurred among the Specially Elected Members.\n- (2) A meeting of the Elected Members of the National Assembly that is held for the purpose of a general election shall be summoned by the Speaker.\n- (3) No other business than the holding of a general election may be transacted at any meeting of the Elected Members of the National Assembly summoned under subparagraph (2) of this paragraph and such a meeting shall not be regarded as a meeting of the Assembly for the purposes of any other provision of this Constitution.\n- 6. When the votes have been cast, whether at a general election or at a by-election, a list shall be prepared showing the persons for whom votes have been cast in order according to the number of votes received by each of them, the person or persons who received the highest number of votes being placed first and those who received any lower number of votes being placed in descending order.\n- 7. In the case of a general election, and subject to the provisions of paragraph 9 of this Schedule, those persons shall be deemed to have been elected as Specially Elected Members who stand in the first and each succeeding place on the list until the number of persons to be elected as Specially Elected Members has been completed.\n- 8. In the case of a by-election, and subject to the provisions of paragraph 10 of this Schedule, the person who stands in the first place on the list shall be deemed to have been elected.\n- 9. Where, by reason of an equality of votes between them, the number of candidates in any place on the list who would otherwise be deemed to have been elected under paragraph 7 of this Schedule exceeds the number of persons remaining to be elected as Specially Elected Members after the persons in the preceding places have been elected, none of the candidates in that place or in any succeeding place shall be deemed to have been elected and a further election shall be held to fill the vacancies still remaining among the Specially Elected Members; and the provisions of this Schedule shall apply in relation to that further election as if it were a general election where the total number of Specially Elected Members was equal to the number of vacancies still remaining to be filled.\n- 10. Where, in a by-election, two or more candidates equally receive the highest number of votes, no candidates shall be deemed to have been elected and a further by-election shall be held, in accordance with the provisions of this Schedule, at which only those candidates who received the highest number of votes in the original by-election may again stand as candidates.\n\n## SECOND SCHEDULE TO THE CONSTITUTION DIVISION OF DISTRICTS INTO REGIONS FOR THE\n\n## PURPOSE OF SELECTING MEMBERS OF NTLO YA DIKGOSI\n\nTHE CENTRAL DISTRICT\n\n- (1) Bobirwa Region\n- (2) Boteti region\n\n(3) Mahalapye Region\n\n- (4) Serowe Region\n\n(5) Tonota Region\n\n- (6) Tswapong Region\n\n(7) Tutume Region\n\nTHE GHANZI\n\nDISTRICT\n\n(8) Ghanzi East Region\n\n- (9) GhanziWest Region\n\nTHE KGALAGADI\n\nDISTRICT\n\n- (10) Kgalagadi North Region\n\n(11) Kgalagadi South Region\n\nTHE KWENENG\n\nDISTRICT\n\n(12) Letlhakeng Region\n\n(13) Molepolole Region\n\n(14) Thamaga Region\n\nTHE NORTH\n\n- (15) Maun Region\n\nCopyright Government of Botswana", + "recall": 0.9521276595744681, + "true_md": "Copyright Government of Botswana\n\n- (1) The Speaker shall cause elections of Specially Elected Members to be held - ( a ) in the case of a general election, as soon as practicable after the holding of a general election of the Elected Members of the National Assembly and before the Assembly first meets after that general election; and ( b ) in the case of a by-election, as soon as practicable after a vacancy has occurred among the \n\n- general election; and ( b ) in the case of a by-election, as soon as practicable after a vacancy has occurred among the Specially Elected Members. (2) A meeting of the Elected Members of the National Assembly that is held for the purpose of a general \n\n5. (1) The Speaker shall cause elections of Specially Elected Members to be held - ( a ) in the case of a general election, as soon as practicable after the holding of a\n\nSpecially Elected Members. (2) A meeting of the Elected Members of the National Assembly that is held for the purpose of a general election shall be summoned by the Speaker. (3) No other business than the holding of a general election may be transacted at any meeting of the \n\nelection shall be summoned by the Speaker. (3) No other business than the holding of a general election may be transacted at any meeting of the Elected Members of the National Assembly summoned under subparagraph (2) of this paragraph and such a meeting shall not be regarded as a meeting of the Assembly for the purposes of any other provision of this Constitution. 6. When the votes have been cast, wh ether at a general election or at a by -election, a list shall be prepared \n\nConstitution. 6. When the votes have been cast, wh ether at a general election or at a by -election, a list shall be prepared showing the persons for whom votes have been cast in order according to the number of votes received by each of them, the person or persons who received the highest number of votes b eing placed first and those who received any lower number of votes being placed in descending order. 7. In the case of a general election, and subject to the provisions of paragraph 9 of this Schedule, those \n\nwho received any lower number of votes being placed in descending order. 7. In the case of a general election, and subject to the provisions of paragraph 9 of this Schedule, those persons shall be deemed to have been elected asSpecially Elected Members who stand in the first and each succeeding place on the list until the number of persons to be elected as Specially Elected Members has been completed. 8. In the case of a by-election, and subject to the provisions of paragraph 10 of this Schedule, the person \n\nhas been completed. 8. In the case of a by-election, and subject to the provisions of paragraph 10 of this Schedule, the person who stands in the first place on the list shall be deemed to have been elected. 9. Where, by reason of an equality of votes between them, the number of candidates in any place on the list \n\nwho stands in the first place on the list shall be deemed to have been elected. 9. Where, by reason of an equality of votes between them, the number of candidates in any place on the list who would otherwise be deemed to have been elected under paragraph 7 of this Schedule exceeds the number of persons remaining to be elected as Specially Elected Members after the persons in the preceding places have been elected, none of the candidates in that place or in any succeeding place shall be deemed to have been elected and a further election shall be held to fill the vacancies still remaining among the Specially Elected Members; and the provisions of this Schedule shall apply in relation to that further election as if it were a genera l election where the total number of Specially Elected Members was equal to the number of vacancies still remaining to be filled. 10. Where, in a by-election, two or more candidates equally receive the highest number of votes, no \n\nequal to the number of vacancies still remaining to be filled. 10. Where, in a by-election, two or more candidates equally receive the highest number of votes, no candidates shall be deemedto have been elected and a further by -election shall be held, in accordance with the provisions of this Schedule, at which only those candidates who received the highest number of votes in the original by-election may again stand as candidates. SECOND SCHEDULE TO THE CONSTITUTIONDIVISION OF DISTRICTS INTO REGIONS \n\n## votes in the original by-election may again stand as candidates. SECOND SCHEDULE TO THE CONSTITUTIONDIVISION OF DISTRICTS INTO REGIONS FOR THE PURPOSE OF SELECTING MEMBERS OF NTLO YA DIKGOSI THE CENTRAL (1) Bobirwa Region\n\n- 25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n- 25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6666815451925868, + "doc_id": "5b0067f3768fc212dc2a5357850626c711032ee8efd5eabfdb5d1a85009d5ab6", + "edit_distance": 0.6043613707165109, + "f1_score": 0.9612403100775194, + "meteor": 0.46737215942434207, + "precision": 0.9789473684210527, + "pred_md": "25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio\n\n- (1) Whenever Parliament is dissolved an election shall be held to the office of President in such manner as is prescribed by this section and, subject thereto, by or under an Act of Parliament.\n- (2) Nominations in the election of a President shall be delivered to the returning officer on such day and at such time as may be prescribed by or under any law for the time being in force in Botswana; the nomination of a candidate in an election of a President shall not be valid unless it is supported, in such manner as may be prescribed by or under an Act of Parliament, by not less than 1000 persons registered as voters for the purpose of elections to the Assembly.\n- (3) The following provisions shall then apply-\n- ( a ) a person nominated as a Parliamentary candidate may, at the time of his or her nomination and subject to the provisions of paragraph ( b ), declare in such manner as may be prescribed by or under an Act of Parliament which of the candidates in the election of President he or she supports, but the nomination of a Parliamentary candidate shall be valid notwithstanding that the nomination paper does not contain such a declaration;\n- ( b ) such a declaration shall not be made in relation to any Presidential candidate unless that candidate has signified, in such manner as may be prescribed by or under an Act of Parliament, his or her consent to the making of a declaration in his or her favour by that Parliamentary candidate;\n- ( c ) where the Parliamentary election is contested in any constituency a poll shall be taken in that constituency at which the votes shall be given by ballot, and for the purposes of that poll any Parliamentary candidate who declared support in accordance with paragraph ( a ) for a particular Presidential candidate shall use the same voting colour and symbol, if any, as may have been allocated under any law for the time being in force in Botswana to that Presidential candidate for the purposes of the Presidential election;\n- ( d ) the returning officer shall declare to be elected as President any candidate for whom support has been declared in accordance with paragraph ( a ) above by not less than such number of persons elected as Members of the National Assembly in the Parliamentary election as corresponds to more than half the total number of seats for Elected Members in the Assembly, and if there is no such person the returning officer shall declare that no candidate has been elected.\n- (4) Parliament may make provision whereby the time for nominating Presidential candidates may be extended in the event of there being no qualified candidate nominated at the expiration of the time for the delivery of such nominations.\n- (5) Where, at the expiration of the time for the delivery of nominations in the election of a President, more than one qualified candidate is validly nominated and any of those candidates dies before the commencement of the poll in the Parliamentary election, the poll in the Parliamentary election shall be countermanded, fresh nominations of Parliamentary candidates shall take place in every constituency and a fresh election of a President shall be held in accordance with the foregoing provisions of this section.\n\n## (6) Where-\n\n- ( a ) any candidate in an election of a President dies during the period commencing with the taking of the poll in the Parliamentary election and ending when the result of the election has been ascertained and that candidate would, but for his or her death, have been entitled to have been declared elected as President under subsection (3) of this section; or\n- ( b ) the returning officer declares in accordance with the provisions of subsection (3)( d ) of this section that no candidate has been elected,\n\nCopyright Government of Botswana", + "recall": 0.9441624365482234, + "true_md": "- 25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n- 25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n- (3) The following provisions shall then apply - ( a ) a person nominated as a Parliamentary candidate ma y, at the time of his or her nomination and subject to the provisions of paragraph ( b ), declare in such manner as may be prescribed by or under an Act of Parliament which of the candidates in the election of President he or she supports, but the nomination of a Parliamentary candidate shall be valid notwithstanding that the nomination paper does not contain such a declaration; ( b ) such a declaration shall not be made in relation to any Presidential candidate unless that \n\n- a declaration; ( b ) such a declaration shall not be made in relation to any Presidential candidate unless that candidate has signified, in such manner as may be prescribed by or under an Act of Parliament, his or her consent to the making of a declaration in his or her favour by that Parliamentary candidate; ( c ) where the Parliamentary election is contested in any constituency a poll shall be taken in \n\n- Parliamentary candidate; ( c ) where the Parliamentary election is contested in any constituency a poll shall be taken in that constituency at which the votes shall be given by ballot, and for the purposes of that poll any Parliamentary candidate who declared support in accordance with paragraph ( a ) for a particular Presidential candidate shall use the same voting colour a nd symbol, if any, as may have been allocated under any law for the time being in force in Botswana to that Presidential candidate for the purposes of the Presidential election; ( d ) the returning officer shall declare to be elected as President any candidate for whom \n\n- that Presidential candidate for the purposes of the Presidential election; ( d ) the returning officer shall declare to be elected as President any candidate for whom support has been declared in accordance with paragraph ( a ) above by not less than such number of persons elected as Members of the National Assembly in the Parliamentary election as corresponds to more than half the total number of seats for Elected Members in the Assembly, and if there is no such person the returning officer shall declare that no candidate has been elected. (4) Parliament may make provision whereby the time for nominating Presidential \n\n- (6) Where- ( a ) any candidate in an election of a President dies during the period commencing with the taking of the poll in the Parliamentary election and ending when the result of the election has been ascertained and that candidate would, but for his or her death, have been entitled to have been declared elected as President under subsection (3) of this section; or ( b ) the returning officer declares in accordance with the provisions of subsection (3)( d ) of \n\n- or ( b ) the returning officer declares in accordance with the provisions of subsection (3)( d ) of this section that no candidate has been elected,\n\ncandidate has been elected. (4) Parliament may make provision whereby the time for nominating Presidential candidates may be extended in the e vent of there being no qualified candidate nominated at the expiration of the time for the delivery of such nominations. (5) Where, at the expiration of the time for the delivery of nominations in the election of a \n\nexpiration of the time for the delivery of such nominations. (5) Where, at the expiration of the time for the delivery of nominations in the election of a President, more than one qualified candi date is validly nominated and any of those candidates dies before the commencement of the poll in the Parliamentary election, the poll in the Parliamentary election shall be countermanded, fresh nominations of Parliamentary candidates shall take place in every constituency and a fresh election of a President shall be held in accordance with the foregoing provisions of this section. (6) Where- \n\naccordance with the foregoing provisions of this section. (6) Where- any candidate in an election of a President dies during the period commencing with the \n\n(1) Whenever Parliament is dissolved an election shall be held to the office of President in such manner as is prescribed by this section and, subject thereto, by or under an Act of Parliament. (2) Nominations in the election of a President shall be deliver ed to the returning officer on \n\nParliament. (2) Nominations in the election of a President shall be deliver ed to the returning officer on such day and at such time as may be prescribed by or under any law for the time being in force in Botswana; the nomination of a candidate in an election of a President shall not be valid unless it is supported, in such manneras may be prescribed by or under an Act of Parliament, by not less than 1000 persons registered as voters for the purpose of elections to the Assembly. (3) The following provisions shall then apply - \n\nthan 1000 persons registered as voters for the purpose of elections to the Assembly. (3) The following provisions shall then apply - a person nominated as a Parliamentary candidate ma\n\nCopyright Government of Botswana" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.40156229851122055, + "doc_id": "ee63c44cd6963896e21a6fecf5240a67df28573203bc22213839cb91d3d9f584", + "edit_distance": 0.687211093990755, + "f1_score": 0.9655172413793105, + "meteor": 0.3895782533364212, + "precision": 0.9859154929577465, + "pred_md": "25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio\n\n- ( a ) 57 Elected Members who shall be elected in accordance with the provisions of this Constitution and subject thereto in accordance with the provisions of any Act of Parliament; and\n- ( b ) four Specially Elected Members who shall be elected in accordance with the First Schedule to this Constitution and subject thereto in accordance with the provisions of any Act of Parliament.\n\n(3) If a person who is not a member of the National Assembly is elected to the office of Speaker of the National Assembly, that person shall, by virtue of holding that office, be a member of the Assembly in addition to the members referred to in subsections (1) and (2) of this section.\n\n## 59. Speaker\n\n- (1) There shall be a Speaker of the National Assembly who shall be elected by the Members of the Assembly from among persons who are Members of the Assembly or from among persons who are not Members of the Assembly.\n- (2) The President, the Vice-President, a Minister, an Assistant Minister or a public officer shall not be qualified to be elected as Speaker.\n- (3) The Speaker shall vacate his or her office-\n- ( a ) if, having been elected from among the Members of the National Assembly, he or she ceases to be a Member of the Assembly otherwise than by reason of a dissolution of Parliament or if he or she is required by virtue of section 68(2) to (3) of this Constitution, to cease to perform his or her functions as a Member of the Assembly;\n- ( b ) if any circumstances arise that, if he or she were not Speaker, would disqualify him for election as such;\n- ( c ) when the Assembly first sits after any dissolution of Parliament; or\n- ( d ) if he or she is removed from office by a resolution of the Assembly supported by the votes of not less than two-thirds of all the Members thereof.\n\n(4) No business shall be transacted in the National Assembly (other than an election to the office of Speaker) at any time when the office of Speaker is vacant.\n\n## 60. Deputy Speaker\n\n- (1) There shall be a Deputy Speaker of the National Assembly who shall be elected from among the persons who are Members of the Assembly other than the President, the Vice-President, Ministers or Assistant Ministers.\n- (2) The Members of the National Assembly shall elect a person to the office of Deputy Speaker when the Assembly first sits after any dissolution and, if the office becomes vacant otherwise than by reason of the dissolution of the Assembly, at the first sitting of the Assembly after the office becomes vacant.\n- (3) The Deputy Speaker shall vacate his or her office-\n- ( a ) if he or she ceases to be a Member of the National Assembly, otherwise than by reason of a dissolution of Parliament;\n- ( b ) if any circumstances arise that, if he or she were not Deputy Speaker, would disqualify him or her for election as such;\n- ( c ) if he or she is required, by virtue of section 68(2) to (3) of this Constitution, to cease to perform his or her functions as a Member of the Assembly;\n- ( d ) if he or she is elected as Speaker;\n- ( e ) if he or she is removed from office by a resolution of the Assembly supported by the votes of not less than two-thirds of all the Members of the Assembly; or\n- ( ) f when the Assembly first sits after any dissolution of Parliament.\n- 61. Qualifications for election to National Assembly\n\nCopyright Government of Botswana", + "recall": 0.9459459459459459, + "true_md": "25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\nany Act of Parliament. (3) If a person who is not a member of the National Assembly is elected to the office of Speaker of the National Assembly, that person shall, by virtue of holding that office, be a member of the Assembly in addition to the members referred to in subsections (1) and (2) of this section. 59. Speaker\n\n59. Speaker (1) There shall be a Speaker of the National Assembly who shall be elected by the Members of the Assembly from among persons who are Members of the Assembly or from among persons who are not Members of the Assembly. (2) The President, the Vice-President, a Minister, an Assistant Minister or a public officer \n\namong persons who are not Members of the Assembly. (2) The President, the Vice-President, a Minister, an Assistant Minister or a public officer shall not be qualified to be elected as Speaker. (3) The Speaker shall vacate his or her office - \n\nshall not be qualified to be elected as Speaker. (3) The Speaker shall vacate his or her office - if, having been elected from among the Members of the National \n\nvotes of not less than two -thirds of all the Members thereof. (4) No business shall be transacted in the National Assembly (other than an election to the office of Speaker) at any time when the office of Speaker is vacant. 60. Deputy Speaker\n\n60. Deputy Speaker (1) There shall be a Deputy Speaker of the National Assembly who shall be elected from among the persons who are Members of the Assembly other than the President, the Vice-President, Ministers or Assistant Ministers. (2) The Members of the National Assembly shall elect a person to the office of Deputy \n\nVice-President, Ministers or Assistant Ministers. (2) The Members of the National Assembly shall elect a person to the office of Deputy Speaker when the Assembly first sits after any dissolution and, if the office becomes vacant otherwise than by reason of the dissolution of the Assembly, at the first sitting of the Assembly after the office becomes vacant. (3) The Deputy Speaker shall vacate his or her office - \n\nafter the office becomes vacant. (3) The Deputy Speaker shall vacate his or her office - if he or she ceases to be a Member of the National Assembly, otherwise than by reason \n\nvotes of not less than two -thirds of all the Members of the Assembly; or ( f ) when the Assembly first sits after any dissolu tion of Parliament. 61. Qualifications for election to National Assembly \n\n## ( f ) when the Assembly first sits after any dissolu tion of Parliament. 61. Qualifications for election to National Assembly\n\n## office of Speaker) at any time when the office of Speaker is vacant. 60. Deputy Speaker (1) There shall be a Deputy Speaker of the National Assembly who shall be elected from\n\n## of the Assembly in addition to the members referred to in subsections (1) and (2) of this 59. Speaker (1) There shall be a Speaker of the National Assembly who shall be elected by the\n\n- ( a ) 57 Elected Members who shall be elected in accordance with the provisions of this Constitution and subject thereto in accordance with the pro visions of any Act of Parliament; and ( b ) four Specially Elected Members who shall be elected in accordance with the First \n\n- Parliament; and ( b ) four Specially Elected Members who shall be elected in accordance with the First Schedule to this Constitution and subject thereto in accordance with the provisions of any Act of Parliament. (3) If a person who is not a member of the National Assembly is elected to the office of \n\n- (3) The Speaker shall vacate his or her office - ( a ) if, having been elected from among the Members of the National Assembly, he or she ceases to be a Member of the Assembly otherwise than by reason of a dissolution of Parliament or if he or she is required by virtue of section 68(2) to (3) of this Constitution, to cease to perform his or her functions as a Member of th e Assembly; ( b ) if any circumstances arise that, if he or she were not Speaker, would disqualify him for \n\n- to cease to perform his or her functions as a Member of th e Assembly; ( b ) if any circumstances arise that, if he or she were not Speaker, would disqualify him for election as such; ( c ) when the Assembly first sits after any dissolution of Parliament; or\n\n- election as such; ( c ) when the Assembly first sits after any dissolution of Parliament; or ( d ) if he or she is removed from office by a resolution o f the Assembly supported by the \n\n- ( c ) when the Assembly first sits after any dissolution of Parliament; or ( d ) if he or she is removed from office by a resolution o f the Assembly supported by the votes of not less than two -thirds of all the Members thereof. (4) No business shall be transacted in the National Assembly (other than an election to the \n\n- (3) The Deputy Speaker shall vacate his or her office - ( a ) if he or she ceases to be a Member of the National Assembly, otherwise than by reason of a dissolution of Parliament; ( b ) if any circumstances arise that, if he or she were not Deputy Speaker, would disqualify \n\n- of a dissolution of Parliament; ( b ) if any circumstances arise that, if he or she were not Deputy Speaker, would disqualify him or her for election as such; ( c ) if he or she is required, by virtue of section 68(2) to (3) of this Constitution, to cease to \n\n- him or her for election as such; ( c ) if he or she is required, by virtue of section 68(2) to (3) of this Constitution, to cease to perform his or her functions as a Member of the Assembly; ( d ) if he or she is elected as Speaker;\n\n- perform his or her functions as a Member of the Assembly; ( d ) if he or she is elected as Speaker; ( e ) if he or she is removed from office by a resolution of the Assembly supported by the \n\n- ( d ) if he or she is elected as Speaker; ( e ) if he or she is removed from office by a resolution of the Assembly supported by the votes of not less than two -thirds of all the Members of the Assembly; or ( f ) when the Assembly first sits after any dissolu tion of Parliament. \n\nCopyright Government of Botswana" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4131722374266156, + "doc_id": "1861e2c21fd2ef226712b57067a90a388a1ecf045e2e387bd04dbce4673414af", + "edit_distance": 0.5260162601626016, + "f1_score": 0.9545454545454545, + "meteor": 0.38537268599278046, + "precision": 0.9767441860465116, + "pred_md": "25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio\n\n- ( b ) the President of the Court of Appeal (not being the Chief Justice or the most Senior Justice of the Court of Appeal);\n- ( c ) the Attorney-General;\n- ( d ) the Chairman of the Public Service Commission;\n- ( e ) a member of the Law Society nominated by the Law Society; and\n- ( ) f a person of intergrity and experience not being a legal practitioner appointed by the President.\n\n(2) A member nominated under paragraph ( e ) or appointed under paragraph ( ) of f subsection (1) shall hold office for a period of two years, but shall be eligible for re-nomination or re-appointment, as the case may be, for another term of office for two years:\n\n## Provided that-\n\n- (i) a member nominated under paragraph ( e ) may be removed from office by the rest of the members of the Commission acting together only for inability of the member to discharge the functions of his or her office whether arising from infirmity of mind or body or any other cause or for gross misbehaviour; or\n- (ii) a member appointed under paragraph ( ) may be removed from office by the President f only for inability of the member to discharge the functions of his or her office whether arising from infirmity of mind or body or any other cause or for gross misbehaviour.\n\n(3) A member of the Commission shall not enter upon the duties of his or her office until he or she has taken and subscribed such oath for the due execution of his or her office as may be prescribed by Parliament.\n\n- (4) The Judicial Service Commission shall not be subject to the direction or control of any other person or authority in the exercise of its functions under this Constitution.\n- (5) The Commission may regulate its own procedure and, subject to that procedure, may act notwithstanding any vacancy in its membership or the absence of any member and its proceedings shall not be invalidated by the presence or participation of any person not entitled to be present at or to participate in those proceedings.\n- (6) The decisions of the Commission shall be by the vote of a majority of the members present, and in the event of an equality of votes, the Chairman shall have a casting vote. 104. Appointment, etc., of judicial officers\n- (1) Power to appoint persons to hold or act in offices to which this section applies, to exercise disciplinary control over persons holding or acting in such offices and to remove such persons from office shall vest in the President acting in accordance with the advice of the Judicial Service Commission.\n- (2) The offices to which this section applies are-\n- ( a ) the office of Registrar of the Court of Appeal and High Court;\n- ( b ) all offices of magistrate;\n- ( c ) such other offices of President or member of any court or connected with any court as may be prescribed by or under an Act of Parliament.\n\n(3) In this section references to a court do not include references to a court martial.\n\n## PART IV\n\nInterpretation of the Constitution (ss 105-106)\n\n## 105. Reference to High Court of cases involving interpretation of Constitution\n\n(1) Where any question as to the interpretation of this Constitution arises in any proceedings in any subordinate court and the court is of the opinion that the question involves a substantial question of law, the court may, and shall, if any party to the proceedings so requests, refer the question to the High Court.\n\nCopyright Government of Botswana", + "recall": 0.9333333333333333, + "true_md": "- 25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n- 25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n- ( b ) the President of the Court of Appeal (not being the Chief Justice or the most Senior Justice of the Court of Appeal); ( c ) the Attorney-General; \n\n- Justice of the Court of Appeal); ( c ) the Attorney-General; ( d ) the Chairman of the Public Service Commission;\n\n- ( c ) the Attorney-General; ( d ) the Chairman of the Public Service Commission; ( e ) a member of the Law Society nominated by the Law Society; and\n\n- ( d ) the Chairman of the Public Service Commission; ( e ) a member of the Law Society nominated by the Law Society; and ( f ) a person of intergrity and experience not being a legal practitioner appointed by the \n\n- Provided that- (i) a member nominated under paragraph ( e ) may be removed from office by the rest of the members of the Commission acting together only for inability of the member to discha rge the functions of his or her office whether arising from infirmity of mind or body or any other cause or for gross misbehaviour; or (ii) a member appointed under paragraph ( f ) may be removed from office by the President \n\n- other cause or for gross misbehaviour; or (ii) a member appointed under paragraph ( f ) may be removed from office by the President only for inability of the memberto discharge the functions of his or her office whether arising from infirmity of mind or body or any other cause or for gross misbehaviour. (3) A member of the Commission shall not enter upon the duties of his or her office until he \n\n- ( e ) a member of the Law Society nominated by the Law Society; and ( f ) a person of intergrity and experience not being a legal practitioner appointed by the President. (2) A member nominated under paragraph ( e ) or appointed under paragraph ( f ) of \n\nPresident. (2) A member nominated under paragraph ( e ) or appointed under paragraph ( f ) of subsection (1) shall hold office for a period of two years, but shall be eligible for re -nomination or re-appointment, as the case may be, for another term of office for two years: Provided that- \n\nre-appointment, as the case may be, for another term of office for two years: Provided that- a member nominated under paragraph (\n\narising from infirmity of mind or body or any other cause or for gross misbehaviour. (3) A member of the Commission shall not enter upon the duties of his or her office until he or she has taken andsubscribed such oath for the due execution of his or her office as may be prescribed by Parliament. (4) The Judicial Service Commission shall not be subject to the direction or control of any \n\nprescribed by Parliament. (4) The Judicial Service Commission shall not be subject to the direction or control of any other person or authority in the exercise of its functions und er this Constitution. (5) The Commission may regulate its own procedure and, subject to that procedure, may \n\nother person or authority in the exercise of its functions und er this Constitution. (5) The Commission may regulate its own procedure and, subject to that procedure, may act notwithstanding any vacancy in its membership or the absence of any member and its proceedings shall not be invalidated bythe presence or participation of any person not entitled to be present at or to participate in those proceedings. (6) The decisions of the Commission shall be by the vote of a majority of the members \n\nbe present at or to participate in those proceedings. (6) The decisions of the Commission shall be by the vote of a majority of the members present, and in the event of an equ ality of votes, the Chairman shall have a casting vote. 104. Appointment, etc., of judicial officers \n\n104. Appointment, etc., of judicial officers (1) Power to appoint persons to hold or act in offices to which this section applies, to exercise disciplinary control over persons holding or acting in such offices and to remove such persons from office shall vest in the President acting in accordance with the advice of the Judicial Service Commission. (2) The offices to which this section applies are - \n\n- (2) The offices to which this section applies are - ( a ) the office of Registrar of the Co urt of Appeal and High Court; ( b ) all offices of magistrate;\n\n- ( a ) the office of Registrar of the Co ( b ) all offices of magistrate; ( c ) such other offices of President or member of any court or connected with any court as \n\n- ( b ) all offices of magistrate; ( c ) such other offices of President or member of any court or connected with any court as may be prescribed by or under an Act of Parliament. (3) In this section references to a court do not i nclude references to a court martial.\n\n## In this section references to a court do not i PART IV Interpretation of the Constitution\n\n## PART IV Interpretation of the Constitution (ss 105-106) 105. Reference to High Court of cases involving interpretation of Constitution\n\n## Interpretation of the Constitution (ss 105-106) 105. Reference to High Court of cases involving interpretation of Constitution (1) Where any question as to the interpretation of this Constitution arises in any\n\n105. Reference to High Court of cases involving interpretation of Constitution (1) Where any question as to the interpretation of this Constitution arises in any proceedings in any subordinate court and the court is of the opinion that the question involves a substantial question of law, the court may, and shall, if any party to the proceedings so requests, refer the question to the High Court.\n\n## present, and in the event of an equ ality of votes, the Chairman shall have a casting vote. 104. Appointment, etc., of judicial officers (1) Power to appoint persons to hold or act in offices to which this section applies, to\n\nCopyright Government of Botswana\n\n- Service Commission. (2) The offices to which this section applies are - the office of Registrar of the Co urt of Appeal and High Court;\n\n- may be prescribed by or under an Act of Parliament. (3) In this section references to a court do not i nclude references to a court martial. PART IV" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5375835080733932, + "doc_id": "d723aabc1ce2816813c5f07609474e0f7f7bf74fe40043d50e9d8788712038f9", + "edit_distance": 0.7049873203719358, + "f1_score": 0.9540816326530615, + "meteor": 0.4198659686276441, + "precision": 0.9739583333333334, + "pred_md": "25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio\n\n- ( g ) only one ballot shall be taken at any sitting of the Assembly, and the Speaker may adjourn the meeting at which a second or subsequent ballot is to be taken for such number of days (in addition to the days on which and to which the meeting is adjourned), not being more than two, as he or she thinks fit;\n- ( h ) if there is no candidate duly nominated for the first ballot in accordance with paragraph ( b ) or if after the number of ballots permitted under paragraph ( ) have been taken no f candidate has been declared elected Parliament shall stand dissolved or, in the case of a Presidential election held in accordance with section 32(6) of this Constitution, the foregoing general election shall be void.\n- (6) No business other than the election of a President shall be transacted at a meeting of the National Assembly under subsection (4) of this section or under section 32(6) of this Constitution and such a meeting or any sitting thereof shall not be regarded as a meeting or sitting of the Assembly for the purposes of any other provision of this Constitution.\n- (7) At any time when the office of Speaker is vacant or the holder of that office is unable by reason of absence or illness to exercise the functions vested in him or her by this section and section 32(6) of this Constitution, those functions may be exercised by the Deputy Speaker of the National Assembly or, if there is no Deputy Speaker or the Deputy Speaker is unable by reason of absence or illness to exercise those functions, by such member of the Assembly (not being the President or Vice-President or a Minister or Assistant Minister) as the Assembly may elect for that purpose.\n\n## 36. Discharge of functions of President during absence, illness, etc.\n\n- (1) Whenever the President is absent from Botswana or considers it desirable to do so by reason of illness or any other cause he or she may, by directions in writing, authorize-\n- ( a ) the Vice-President; or\n- ( b ) during any period when there is no Vice-President or the Vice-President is absent from Botswana or is, by reason of physical or mental infirmity, unable to perform the functions of his or her office, some other Minister,\n\nto discharge such of the functions of the office of President as he or she may specify, and the Vice-President or other Minister may discharge those functions until his or her authority is revoked by the President.\n\n(2) If the President is incapable by reason of physical or mental infirmity of discharging the functions of his or her office and the infirmity is of such a nature that the President is unable to authorize another person under this section to perform those functions-\n\n- ( a ) the Vice-President; or\n- ( b ) during any period when there is no Vice-President or the Vice-President is absent from Botswana or the Vice-President is, by reason of physical or mental infirmity, unable to perform the functions of his or her office, such Minister as the Cabinet shall appoint, shall perform the functions of the office of President.\n- (3) A person performing the functions of the office of President under this section shall not exercise the power of the President to revoke the appointment of the Vice-President or to dissolve Parliament.\n- (4) A person performing the functions of the office of President by virtue of subsection (2) of this section shall cease to perform those functions if he or she is notified by the President that the President is about to resume those functions.\n- (5) For the purposes of this section, a certificate of the Chief Justice that-\n- ( a ) the President is incapable by reason of physical or mental infirmity of discharging the functions of his or her office and the infirmity is of such a nature that the President is unable to authorize another person under this section to perform the functions of his or her office; or\n\nCopyright Government of Botswana", + "recall": 0.935, + "true_md": "25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\nforegoing general election shall be void. (6) No business other than the election of a President shall be transacted at a meeting of the National Assembly under subsection (4) of this section or under section 32(6) of this Constitution and such a meeting or any sitting thereof shall not be regarded as a meeting or sitting of the Assembly for the purposes of any other provision of this Constitution. (7) At any time when the office of Speaker is vacant or the holder of that office is unable by \n\nof the Assembly for the purposes of any other provision of this Constitution. (7) At any time when the office of Speaker is vacant or the holder of that office is unable by reason of absence or illness to exercise the functions vested in him or her by this section and section 32(6) of this Constitution, those functions may be exercised by the Deputy Speaker of the National Assembly or, if there is no Deputy Spea ker or the Deputy Speaker is unable by reason of absence or illness to exercise those functions, by such member of the Assembly (not being the President or Vice-President or a Minister or Assistant Minister) as the Assembly may elect for that purpose. 36. Discharge of functions of President during absence, illness, etc. \n\n36. Discharge of functions of President during absence, illness, etc. (1) Whenever the President is absent from Botswana or considers it desirable to do so by reason of illness or any other cause he or she may, by directions in writing, authoriz e- ( a ) the Vice-President; or \n\nof his or her office, some other Minister, to discharge such of the functions of the office of President as he or she may specify, and the Vice-President or other Minister may discharge those functions until his or her authority is revoked by the President. (2) If the President is incapable byreason of physical or mental infirmity of discharging the \n\nby the President. (2) If the President is incapable byreason of physical or mental infirmity of discharging the functions of his or her office and the infirmity is of such a nature that the President is unable to authorize another person under this section to perform those functions - ( a ) the Vice-President;or \n\nperform the functions of his or her office, such Minister as the Cabinet shall perform the functions of the office of President. (3) A person performing the functions of the office of President under this section shall not \n\nshall perform the functions of the office of President. (3) A person performing the functions of the office of President under this section shall not exercise the power of the President to revoke the appointment of the Vice -President or todissolve Parliament. (4) A person performing the functions of the office of President by virtue of subsection (2) \n\nParliament. (4) A person performing the functions of the office of President by virtue of subsection (2) of this section shall cease to perform those functions if he or she is notified by the President that the President is about to resume those functions. (5) For the purposes of this section, a certificate of the Chief Justice that - \n\nthe President is about to resume those functions. (5) For the purposes of this section, a certificate of the Chief Justice that - the President is incapable by reason of physical or mental infirmity of discharging the \n\nCopyright Government of Botswana\n\n- ( g ) only one ballot shall be taken at any sitting of the Assembly, and the Speaker may adjourn the meeting at which a second orsubsequent ballot is to be taken for such number of days (in addition to the days on which and to which the meeting is adjourned), not being more than two, as he or she thinks fit; ( h ) if there is no candidate duly nominated for the first ballot in accord ance with paragraph \n\n- not being more than two, as he or she thinks fit; ( h ) if there is no candidate duly nominated for the first ballot in accord ance with paragraph ( b ) or if after the number of ballots permitted under paragraph ( f ) have been taken no candidate has been declared elected Parliament shall stand dissolved or, in the case of a Presidential election held in accordance with section 32(6) of this Constitution, the foregoing general election shall be void. (6) No business other than the election of a President shall be transacted at a meeting of \n\n- reason of illness or any other cause he or she may, by directions in writing, authoriz ( a ) the Vice-President; or ( b ) during any period when there is no Vice\n\n- ( a ) the Vice-President; or ( b ) during any period when there is no Vice -President or the Vice -President is absent from Botswana or is, by reason of physical or mental infirmity, unable to perform the functions of his or her office, some other Minister, to discharge such of the functions of the office of President as he or she may specify, and the \n\n- authorize another person under this section to perform those functions ( a ) the Vice-President;or ( b ) during any period when there is no Vice\n\n- ( a ) the Vice-President;or ( b ) during any period when there is no Vice -President or the Vice -President is absent from Botswana or the Vice -President is, by reason of physical or mental infirmity, unable to perform the functions of his or her office, such Minister as the Cabinet shall appoint, shall perform the functions of the office of President.\n\n- (5) For the purposes of this section, a certificate of the Chief Justice that - ( a ) the President is incapable by reason of physical or mental infirmity of discharging the functions of his or her office and the infirmity is of such a nature tha t the President is unable to authorize another person under this section to perform the functions of his or her office; or\n\n## purpose. 36. Discharge of functions of President during absence, illness, etc. (1) Whenever the President is absent from Botswana or considers it desirable to do so by" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4654824976011892, + "doc_id": "37fa45986db7a6be6cf8cada522d6ea68ed9ce476e9db46daeb1d5a83406afdd", + "edit_distance": 0.53, + "f1_score": 0.954337899543379, + "meteor": 0.39835353545635255, + "precision": 0.990521327014218, + "pred_md": "25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio\n\n- ( a ) Chapter II; sections 30 to 44 inclusive, 47 to 51 inclusive, and 56; sections 77 to 79 inclusive and section 85; Chapter VII; or sections 117 to 120 inclusive and section 127 in its application to any of the provisions mentioned in this paragraph;\n- ( b ) sections 57, 63 to 66 inclusive, 86 to 89 inclusive, 90(2) and (3), 91(2), (3), (4) and (5), and 92; Chapter VI; and section 127 in its application to any of the provisions mentioned in this paragraph,\n\na Bill for an Act of Parliament under this section shall not be passed by the National Assembly unless-\n\n- (i) the final voting on the Bill in the Assembly takes place not less than three months after the previous voting thereon in the Assembly; and\n- (ii) at such final voting the Bill is supported by the votes of not less than two-thirds of all the Members of the Assembly.\n\n(4) In so far as it alters any of the provisions mentioned in subsection (3)( b ) of this section no Bill shall be presented to the President for his or her assent unless after its passage by the Assembly it has been submitted to the electors qualified to vote in the election of the Elected Members of the National Assembly, and, on a vote taken in such manner as Parliament may prescribe, the majority of the electors voting have approved the Bill.\n\n(5) In this section-\n\n- ( a ) references to any provision of this Constitution include references to any provision of a law that alters that provision; and\n- ( b ) references to the alteration of any provision of this Constitution include references to the amendment, modification or re-enactment, with or without modification, of that provision, the suspension or repeal of that provision and the making of a different provision in lieu thereof.\n\n## PART V\n\n## Summoning, Prorogation and Dissolution (ss 90-93)\n\n## 90. Sessions of Parliament\n\n- (1) Each session of Parliament shall be held at such place within Botswana and shall commence at such time as the President may appoint.\n- (2) There shall be a session of Parliament at least once in every year so that a period of six months shall not intervene between the last sitting of Parliament in one session and the first sitting thereof in the next session.\n- (3) Whenever Parliament is dissolved a general election of the Elected Members of the Assembly shall be held within 60 days of the date of the dissolution and a session of Parliament shall be appointed to commence within 30 days of the date of that general election.\n\n## 91. Prorogation and dissolution of Parliament\n\n- (1) The President may at any time prorogue Parliament.\n- (2) Subject to the provisions of this Constitution, the President may at any time dissolve Parliament.\n- (3) Subject to the provisions of subsection (4) of this section, Parliament, unless sooner dissolved, shall continue for five years from the date of the first sitting of the National Assembly after any dissolution and shall then stand dissolved.\n- (4) At any time when Botswana is at war, Parliament may from time to time extend the period of five years specified in subsection (3) of this section for not more than 12 months at a time:\n- Provided that the life of Parliament shall not be extended under this subsection for more than five years.\n- (5) If, after a dissolution of Parliament and before the holding of the general election of the Elected Members of the National Assembly, the President considers that, owing to the existence\n\nCopyright Government of Botswana", + "recall": 0.920704845814978, + "true_md": "- 25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n- 25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n- ( a ) Chapter II; sections 30 to 44 inclusive, 47 to 51 inclusive, and 56; sections 77 to 79 inclusive and section 85; Chapter VII; or section s 117 to 120 inclusive and section 127 in its application to any of the provisions mentioned in this paragraph; ( b ) sections 57, 63 to 66 inclusive, 86 to 89 inclusive, 90(2) and (3), 91(2), (3), (4) and (5), \n\n- its application to any of the provisions mentioned in this paragraph; ( b ) sections 57, 63 to 66 inclusive, 86 to 89 inclusive, 90(2) and (3), 91(2), (3), (4) and (5), and 92; Chapter VI; and section 127 in itsapplication to any of the provisions mentioned in this paragraph, a Bill for an Act of Parliament under this section shall not be passed by the National Assembly \n\n- unless- (i) the final voting on the Bill in the Assembly takes place not less than three mont hs after the previous voting thereon in the Assembly; and (ii) at such final voting the Bill is supported by the votes of not less than two -thirds of all the \n\n- the previous voting thereon in the Assembly; and (ii) at such final voting the Bill is supported by the votes of not less than two -thirds of all the Members of the Assembly. (4) In so far as it alters any of the provisions mentioned in subsectio n (3)( b ) of this section \n\n- (5) In this section- ( a ) references to any provision of this Constitution include references to any provision of a law that altersthat provision; and ( b ) references to the alteration of any provision of this Constitution include references to the \n\n- law that altersthat provision; and ( b ) references to the alteration of any provision of this Constitution include references to the amendment, modification or re -enactment, with or without modification, of that provision, the suspension or repeal of that provision and t he making of a different provision in lieu thereof. PART V \n\nin this paragraph, a Bill for an Act of Parliament under this section shall not be passed by the National Assembly unless- (i) the final voting on the Bill in the Assembly takes place not less than three mont hs after \n\nMembers of the Assembly. (4) In so far as it alters any of the provisions mentioned in subsectio n (3)( b ) of this section no Bill shall be presented to the President for his or her assent unless after its passage by the Assembly it has been submitted to the electors qualified to vote in the election of the Elected Members of the National Assembly, and , on a vote taken in such manner as Parliament may prescribe, the majority of the electors voting have approved the Bill. (5) In this section- \n\nprescribe, the majority of the electors voting have approved the Bill. (5) In this section- references to any provision of this Constitution include references to any provision of a \n\n90. Sessions of Parliament (1) Each session of Parliament shall be held at such place within Botswana and shall commence at such timeas the President may appoint. (2) There shall be a session of Parliament at least once in every year so that a period of six \n\ncommence at such timeas the President may appoint. (2) There shall be a session of Parliament at least once in every year so that a period of six months shall not intervene between the last sitting of Parliament in one session and the first sitting thereof in the next sessio n. (3) Whenever Parliament is dissolved a general election of the Elected Members of the \n\nthereof in the next sessio n. (3) Whenever Parliament is dissolved a general election of the Elected Members of the Assembly shall be held within 60 days of the date of the dissolution and a session of Parliament shall be appointed to commence within 30 days of the date of that gen eral election. 91. Prorogation and dissolution of Parliament \n\nProrogation and dissolution of Parliament (1) The President may at any time prorogue Parliament. (2) Subject to the provisions of this Constitution, the President may at any time dissolve \n\n(1) The President may at any time prorogue Parliament. (2) Subject to the provisions of this Constitution, the President may at any time dissolve Parliament. (3) Subject to the provisions of subsection (4) of this section, Parliament, unless sooner \n\nParliament. (3) Subject to the provisions of subsection (4) of this section, Parliament, unless sooner dissolved, shall continue for five years from the date of the first sitting of the National Assembly after any dissolution and shall then stand dissolved. (4) At any time when Botswana is at war, Parliament may from time to time extend the \n\nafter any dissolution and shall then stand dissolved. (4) At any time when Botswana is at war, Parliament may from time to time extend the period of five years specified in subsection (3) of this section for not more than 12 months at a time: Provided that the life of Parliament shall not be extended under this subsection for more \n\ntime: Provided that the life of Parliament shall not be extended under this subsection for more than five years. (5) If, after a dissolution of Parliament and before the holding of the general election of the \n\nthan five years. (5) If, after a dissolution of Parliament and before the holding of the general election of the Elected Members of the National Assembly, the President considers that, owing to the existence \n\n## shall be appointed to commence within 30 days of the date of that gen 91. Prorogation and dissolution of Parliament (1) The President may at any time prorogue Parliament.\n\n## Summoning, Prorogation and Dissolution 90. Sessions of Parliament (1) Each session of Parliament shall be held at such place within Botswana and shall\n\n## PART V Summoning, Prorogation and Dissolution\n\n## PART V Summoning, Prorogation and Dissolution (ss 90-93) Sessions of Parliament\n\nCopyright Government of Botswana" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4338825727191575, + "doc_id": "29678fe34b3593240acdb78fa3f948768da1565ed1390f9d6dab770ffa260cf7", + "edit_distance": 0.5823076923076923, + "f1_score": 0.9600000000000002, + "meteor": 0.4574921455745468, + "precision": 0.9855072463768116, + "pred_md": "25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio\n\nto enable him or her to deliver judgment or to do any other thing in relation to proceedings that were commenced before him or her previously thereto.\n\n## 97. Tenure of office of judges of High Court\n\n(1) Subject to the provisions of this section, a person holding the office of a judge of the High Court shall vacate that office on attaining the age of 70 years or such other age as may be prescribed by Parliament:\n\nProvided that the President, acting in accordance with the advice of the Judicial Service Commission, may permit a judge who has attained that age to continue in office for such period as may be necessary to enable him or her to deliver judgment or to do any other thing in relation to proceedings that were commenced before him or her before he or she attained that age.\n\n(2) A judge of the High Court may be removed from office only for inability to perform the functions of his or her office (whether arising from infirmity of body or mind or from any other cause) or for misbehaviour, and shall not be so removed except in accordance with the provisions of this section.\n\n(3) If the President considers that the question of removing a judge of the High Court under this section ought to be investigated then-\n\n- ( a ) he or she shall appoint a tribunal which shall consist of a Chairman and not less than two other members, who hold or have held high judicial office;\n- ( b ) the tribunal shall enquire into the matter and report on the facts thereof to the President and advise the President whether the judge ought to be removed from office under this section for inability as aforesaid or for misbehaviour.\n\n(4) Where a tribunal appointed under subsection (3) of this section advises the President that a judge of the High Court ought to be removed from office for inability as aforesaid or for misbehaviour, the President shall remove such judge from office.\n\n(5) If the question of removing a judge of the High Court from office has been referred to a tribunal under subsection (3) of this section, the President may suspend the judge from performing the functions of his or her office, and any such suspension may at any time be revoked by the President and shall in any case cease to have effect if the tribunal advises the President that the judge ought not to be removed from office.\n\n## 98. Oaths to be taken by judges of High Court\n\nA judge of the High Court shall not enter upon the duties of his or her office unless he or she has taken and subscribed such oath for the due execution of his or her office as may be prescribed by Parliament.\n\n## PART II\n\n## Court of Appeal (ss 99-102)\n\n## 99. Composition and jurisdiction\n\n(1) There shall be a Court of Appeal for Botswana which shall have such jurisdiction and powers as may be conferred on it by this Constitution or any other law.\n\n(2) The judges of the Court of Appeal shall be-\n\n- ( a ) the President of the Court of Appeal;\n- ( b ) such number, if any, of Justices of Appeal as may be prescribed by Parliament; and\n- ( c ) the Chief Justice and the other judges of the High Court:\n\nProvided that Parliament may make provision for the office of President of the Court of Appeal to be held by the Chief Justice ex-officio.\n\n(3) The office of a Justice of Appeal shall not be abolished while there is a substantive holder thereof.\n\n(4) The Court of Appeal shall be a superior court of record and save as otherwise provided by Parliament shall have all the powers of such a court.\n\n## 100. Appointment of judges of Court of Appeal\n\nCopyright Government of Botswana", + "recall": 0.9357798165137615, + "true_md": "- 25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n- 25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n- under this section ought to be investigated then - ( a ) he or she shall appoint a tribunal which shall consist of a Chairman and not less than two other members, who hold or have held high judicial office; ( b ) the tribunal shall enquire into the matter and report on the facts thereof to the President \n\n- other members, who hold or have held high judicial office; ( b ) the tribunal shall enquire into the matter and report on the facts thereof to the President and advise the President whether the judge ought to be removed from office under this section for inability as aforesaid or for misbehavi our. (4) Where a tribunal appointed under subsection (3) of this section advises the President \n\n- powers as may be conferred on it by this Constitution or any other law. (2) The judges of the Court of Appeal shall be - the President of the Cou rt of Appeal; \n\n- (2) The judges of the Court of Appeal shall be ( a ) the President of the Cou rt of Appeal; ( b ) such number, if any, of Justices of Appeal as may be prescribed by Parliament; and\n\n- ( a ) the President of the Cou rt of Appeal; ( b ) such number, if any, of Justices of Appeal as may be prescribed by Parliament; and ( c ) the Chief Justice and the other judges of the High Court:\n\n- ( b ) such number, if any, of Justices of Appeal as may be prescribed by Parliament; and ( c ) the Chief Justice and the other judges of the High Court: Provided that Parliament may make provision for the office of President o\n\n## were commenced before him or her previously thereto. 97. Tenure of office of judges of High Court (1) Subject to the provisions of this section, a person holding the office of a judge of the\n\n## that the judge ought not to be removed from office. 98. Oaths to be taken by judges of High Court A judge of the HighCourt shall not enter upon the duties of his or her office unless he or\n\n## PART II Court of Appeal (ss 99-102)\n\n## PART II Court of Appeal (ss 99-102) Composition and jurisdiction\n\n## Court of Appeal 99. Composition and jurisdiction (1) There shall be a Court of Appeal for Botswana which shall have such jurisdiction and\n\n## by Parliament shall have all the powers of such a court. 100. Appointment of judges of Court of Appeal\n\nto enable him or her to deliver judgment or to do any other thing in relation to proceedings that were commenced before him or her previously thereto. 97. Tenure of office of judges of High Court \n\n97. Tenure of office of judges of High Court (1) Subject to the provisions of this section, a person holding the office of a judge of the High Court shall vacate that office on attaining the age of 70 years or such other age as may be prescribed by Parliament: Provided that the President, acting in accordance with the advice of the Judicial Service \n\nprescribed by Parliament: Provided that the President, acting in accordance with the advice of the Judicial Service Commission, may permit a judge who has attained that age to continue in office for such per iod as may be necessary to enable him or her to deliver judgment or to do any other thing in relation to proceedings that were commenced before him or her before he or she attained that age. (2) A judge of the High Court may be removed from office only fo r inability to perform the \n\nproceedings that were commenced before him or her before he or she attained that age. (2) A judge of the High Court may be removed from office only fo r inability to perform the functions of his or her office (whether arising from infirmity of body or mind or from any other cause) or for misbehaviour, and shall not be so removed except in accordance with the provisions of this section. (3) If the President considers that the question of removing a judge of the High Court \n\nof this section. (3) If the President considers that the question of removing a judge of the High Court under this section ought to be investigated then - ( a ) he or she shall appoint a tribunal which shall consist of a Chairman and not less than two \n\nsection for inability as aforesaid or for misbehavi our. (4) Where a tribunal appointed under subsection (3) of this section advises the President that a judge of the High Court ought to be removed from office for inability as aforesaid or for misbehaviour, the President shall remove such judge from office . (5) If the question of removing a judge of the High Court from office has been referred to a \n\nmisbehaviour, the President shall remove such judge from office . (5) If the question of removing a judge of the High Court from office has been referred to a tribunal under subsection (3) of this section, the President may suspend the judge from performing the functions of his or her office, and any such suspension m ay at any time be revoked by the President and shall in any case cease to have effect if the tribunal advises the President that the judge ought not to be removed from office. 98. Oaths to be taken by judges of High Court \n\n98. Oaths to be taken by judges of High Court A judge of the HighCourt shall not enter upon the duties of his or her office unless he or she has taken and subscribed such oath for the due execution of his or her office as may be prescribed by Parliament. PART II \n\n99. Composition and jurisdiction (1) There shall be a Court of Appeal for Botswana which shall have such jurisdiction and powers as may be conferred on it by this Constitution or any other law. (2) The judges of the Court of Appeal shall be - \n\n( c ) the Chief Justice and the other judges of the High Court: Provided that Parliament may make provision for the office of President o f the Court of Appeal to be held by the Chief Justice ex-officio. (3) The office of a Justice of Appeal shall not be abolished while there is a substantive \n\nAppeal to be held by the Chief Justice ex-officio. (3) The office of a Justice of Appeal shall not be abolished while there is a substantive holder thereof. (4) The Court of Appeal shall be a superior court of record and save as otherwise provided \n\nholder thereof. (4) The Court of Appeal shall be a superior court of record and save as otherwise provided by Parliament shall have all the powers of such a court. 100. Appointment of judges of Court of Appeal \n\nCopyright Government of Botswana" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.47701996961743576, + "doc_id": "c09a961bc3e64e86edb1779413e280c25c6fd737d56e240bcba2b3246482f4ee", + "edit_distance": 0.61531279178338, + "f1_score": 0.9523809523809523, + "meteor": 0.3847307473472209, + "precision": 0.9844559585492227, + "pred_md": "25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio\n\n- (2) A person shall not be qualified to be appointed to the Office of Director of Public Prosecutions unless he or she is qualified to be appointed to the Office of a Judge of the High Court.\n- (3) The Director of Public Prosecutions shall have power in any case in which he or she considers it desirable to do so-\n- ( a ) to institute and undertake criminal proceedings against any person before any court (other than a court martial) in respect of any offence alleged to have been committed by that person;\n- ( b ) to take over and continue any such criminal proceedings that have been instituted or undertaken by any other person or authority; and\n- ( c ) to discontinue, at any stage before judgment is delivered, any such criminal proceedings instituted or undertaken by himself or herself or any other person or authority.\n- (4) The powers of the Director of Public Prosecutions under subsection (3) may be exercised by him or her in person or by officers subordinate to him or her acting in accordance with his or her general or special authority.\n- (5) For the purposes of this section any appeal from any judgment in any criminal proceedings before any court, or any case stated or question of law reserved for the purpose of any such proceedings, to any other court shall be deemed to be part of those proceedings:\n\nProvided that the power conferred on the Director of Public Prosecutions by subsection (3)( c ) of this section shall not be exercised in relation to any appeal by a person convicted in any criminal proceedings or to any case stated or question of law reserved at the instance of such person.\n\n- (6) In the exercise of the functions vested in him or her by subsection (3) of this section the Director of Public Prosecutions shall not be subject to the direction or control of any other person or authority:\n\nProvided that-\n\n- ( a ) where any other person or authority has instituted criminal proceedings, nothing in this subsection shall prevent the withdrawal of those proceedings by or at the instance of that person or authority, and with the leave of the court; and\n- ( b ) before exercising his or her powers in relation to cases considered by the Attorney-General to be of national importance, the Director of Public Prosecutions shall consult the Attorney-General.\n\n## 52. Permanent Secretaries\n\nWhere any Minister has been charged with responsibility for any department of Government, he or she shall exercise general direction and control over that department and, subject to such direction and control, the department shall be under the supervision of a Permanent Secretary whose office shall be a public office.\n\n## 53. Prerogative of Mercy\n\nThe President may-\n\n- ( a ) grant to any person convicted of any offence a pardon, either free or subject to lawful conditions;\n- ( b ) grant to any person a respite, either indefinite or for a specified period, of the execution of any punishment imposed on that person for any offence;\n- ( c ) substitute a less severe form of punishment for any punishment imposed on any person for any offence; and\n- ( d ) remit the whole or part of any punishment imposed on any person for any offence or of any penalty or forfeiture otherwise due to the Government on account of any offence.\n- 54. Advisory Committee on Prerogative of Mercy\n\nCopyright Government of Botswana", + "recall": 0.9223300970873787, + "true_md": "25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n(2) A person shall not be qualified to be appointed to the Office of Director of Public Prosecutions unless he or she is qualified to be appointed to th e Office of a Judge of the High Court. (3) The Director of Public Prosecutions shall have power in any case in which he or she \n\nCourt. (3) The Director of Public Prosecutions shall have power in any case in which he or she considers it desirable to do so - ( a ) to institute and undertake criminal proceedings against any person before any court \n\ninstituted or undertaken by himself or herself or any other person or authority. (4) The powers of the Director of Public Prosecutions under subsection (3) may be exercised by him or her in person or by officers subordinate to him or her acting in accordance with his or her general or special authority. (5) For the purposes of this section any appeal from any judgment in any criminal \n\nwith his or her general or special authority. (5) For the purposes of this section any appeal from any judgment in any criminal proceedings before any court, or a ny case stated or question of law reserved for the purpose of any such proceedings, to any other court shall be deemed to be part of those proceedings: Provided that the power conferred on the Director of Public Prosecutions by subsection \n\nany such proceedings, to any other court shall be deemed to be part of those proceedings: Provided that the power conferred on the Director of Public Prosecutions by subsection (3)( c ) of this section shall not be exercised in relation to any appeal by a person convicted in any criminal proceedings or to any case stated or question of law reserved at the instance of such person. (6) In the exercise of the functions vested in him or her by subsection (3) of this section the \n\nperson. (6) In the exercise of the functions vested in him or her by subsection (3) of this section the Director of Public Prosecutions shall not be subject to the direction or control of any other person or authority: Provided that- \n\nor authority: Provided that- where any other person o\n\n52. Permanent Secretaries Where any Minister has been charged with responsibility for any department of Government, he or she shall exercise general direction and control over that department and, subject to such direction and control, the department shall be under the supervision of a Permanent Secretary whose office shall be a public offi ce. 53. Prerogative of Mercy\n\nPrerogative of Mercy The President may- grant to any person convicted of any offence a pardon, either free or subject to lawful \n\n## any penalty or forfeiture otherwise due to the Government on account of any offence. 54. Advisory Committee on Prerogative of Mercy\n\n## Permanent Secretary whose office shall be a public offi 53. Prerogative of Mercy The President may-\n\n## consult the Attorney -General. 52. Permanent Secretaries Where any Minister has been charged with responsibility for\n\n- Provided that- ( a ) where any other person o r authority has instituted criminal proceedings, nothing in this subsection shall prevent the withdrawal of those proceedings by or at the instance of that person or authority, and with the leave of the court; and ( b ) before exercising his or her powers i n relation to cases considered by the \n\n- person or authority, and with the leave of the court; and ( b ) before exercising his or her powers i n relation to cases considered by the Attorney-General to be of national importance, the Director of Public Prosecutions shall consult the Attorney -General. 52. Permanent Secretaries\n\n- The President may- ( a ) grant to any person convicted of any offence a pardon, either free or subject to lawful conditions; ( b ) grant to any person a respite, either indefinite or for a specified period, of the ex ecution of \n\n- conditions; ( b ) grant to any person a respite, either indefinite or for a specified period, of the ex ecution of any punishment imposed on that person for any offence; ( c ) substitute a less severe form of punishment for any punishment imposed on any person \n\n- any punishment imposed on that person for any offence; ( c ) substitute a less severe form of punishment for any punishment imposed on any person for any offence; and ( d ) remit the whole or part of any punishment imposed on any person for any of fence or of \n\n- for any offence; and ( d ) remit the whole or part of any punishment imposed on any person for any of fence or of any penalty or forfeiture otherwise due to the Government on account of any offence. 54. Advisory Committee on Prerogative of Mercy \n\nCopyright Government of Botswana\n\n- considers it desirable to do so - ( a ) to institute and undertake criminal proceedings against any person before any court (otherthan a court martial) in respect of any offence alleged to have been committed by that person; ( b ) to take over and continue any such criminal proceedings that have been instituted or \n\n- that person; ( b ) to take over and continue any such criminal proceedings that have been instituted or undertaken by any other person or authority; and ( c ) to discontinue, at any stage before judgment is delivered, any such criminal proceedings \n\n- undertaken by any other person or authority; and ( c ) to discontinue, at any stage before judgment is delivered, any such criminal proceedings instituted or undertaken by himself or herself or any other person or authority. (4) The powers of the Director of Public Prosecutions under subsection (3) may be" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4755801029157652, + "doc_id": "9b2220f663beb0ddc278935177c5ac3375c2af0869acbff40362a147193732a0", + "edit_distance": 0.4233128834355828, + "f1_score": 0.9635974304068521, + "meteor": 0.385989156179898, + "precision": 0.9911894273127754, + "pred_md": "25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio\n\nmonths from the beginning of that financial year or the coming into operation of the Appropriation Act, whichever is the earlier.\n\n## 121. Contingencies Fund\n\n- (1) Parliament may make provision for the establishment of a Contingencies Fund and for authorizing the President, if satisfied that there has arisen an urgent and unforeseen need for expenditure for which no other provision exists, to make advances from that Fund to meet that need.\n- (2) Where any advance is made from the Contingencies Fund, a supplementary estimate shall be laid before the National Assembly as soon as possible for the purpose of replacing the amount so advanced.\n\n## 122. Remuneration of certain officers\n\n- (1) There shall be paid to the holders of the offices to which this section applies such salaries and such allowances as may be prescribed by Parliament.\n- (2) The salaries and any allowances payable to the holders of the offices to which this section applies shall be a charge on the Consolidated Fund.\n- (3) The salary payable to the holder of any office to which this section applies and his or her terms of office, other than allowances, shall not be altered to his or her disadvantage after his or her appointment.\n- (4) Where a person's salary or terms of office depend upon his or her option, the salary or terms for which he or she opts shall, for the purposes of subsection (3) of this section, be deemed to be more advantageous to him or her than any others for which he or she might have opted.\n- (5) This section applies to the offices of judge of the Court of Appeal, judge of the High Court, member of the Public Service Commission, member of the Judicial Service Commission, member of the Delimitation Commission, Auditor-General, Director of Public Prosecutions and Attorney-General.\n\n## 123. Public debt\n\n- (1) There shall be charged on the Consolidated Fund all debt charges for which Botswana is liable.\n- (2) For the purposes of this section debt charges include interest, sinking fund charges, the repayment or amortization of debt, and all expenditure in connection with the raising of loans on the security of the revenues or the Consolidated Fund of the former Protectorate of Bechuanaland or Botswana, and the service and redemption of debt thereby created.\n\n## 124. Auditor-General\n\n- (1) There shall be an Auditor-General, whose office shall be a public office.\n- (2) The public accounts of Botswana and of all officers, courts and authorities of the Government of Botswana shall be audited and reported on by the Auditor-General and for that purpose the Auditor-General or any person authorized by him or her in that behalf shall have access to all books, records, reports and other documents relating to those accounts:\n\nProvided that, if it is so provided by Parliament in the case of any body corporate directly established by law, the accounts of that body corporate shall be audited and reported on by such person as may be specified by or under that law.\n\n- (3) The Auditor-General shall submit his or her reports to the Minister responsible for finance, who shall cause them to be laid before the National Assembly.\n- (4) The Auditor-General shall perform such other duties and exercise such other powers in relation to the accounts of the Government or the accounts of other public authorities or other bodies as may be prescribed by or under any Act of Parliament.\n- (5) In the exercise of his or her functions the Auditor-General shall not be subject to the direction or control of any other person or authority.\n\nCopyright Government of Botswana", + "recall": 0.9375, + "true_md": "25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\nmonths from the beginning of that financial year or the coming into operation of the Appropriation Act, whichever is the earlier. 121. Contingencies Fund\n\n121. Contingencies Fund (1) Parliament may make provision for the establishment of a Contingencies Fund and for authorizing the President, if satisfied that there has arisen an urgent and unforeseen need for expenditure for which no other provision exists, to make advances from that Fund to meet that need. (2) Where any advance is made f rom the Contingencies Fund, a supplementary estimate \n\nneed. (2) Where any advance is made f rom the Contingencies Fund, a supplementary estimate shall be laid before the National Assembly as soon as possible for the purpose of replacing the amount so advanced. 122. Remuneration of certain officers \n\nsalaries and such allowances as may be prescribed by Parliament. (2) The salaries and any allowances payable to the holders of the offices to which this section applies shall be a charge on the Consol idated Fund. (3) The salary payable to the holder of any office to which this section applies and his or \n\n122. Remuneration of certain officers (1) There shall be paid to the hol ders of the offices to which this section applies such salaries and such allowances as may be prescribed by Parliament. (2) The salaries and any allowances payable to the holders of the offices to which this \n\nsection applies shall be a charge on the Consol idated Fund. (3) The salary payable to the holder of any office to which this section applies and his or her terms of office, other than allowances, shall not be altered to his or her disadvantage after his or her appointment. (4) Where a person's salaryor terms of office depend upon his or her option, the salary or \n\nor her appointment. (4) Where a person's salaryor terms of office depend upon his or her option, the salary or terms for which he or she opts shall, for the purposes of subsection (3) of this section, be deemed to be more advantageous to him or her than any others for which he or she might have opted. (5) This section applies to the offices of judge of the Court of Appeal, judge of the High \n\nto be more advantageous to him or her than any others for which he or she might have opted. (5) This section applies to the offices of judge of the Court of Appeal, judge of the High Court, member of the Public Service Commission, member of the Judicial Service Commission, member of the Delimitation Commission, Auditor -General, Director of Public Prosecutions and Attorney-General. 123. Public debt\n\n123. Public debt (1) There shall be charged on the Consolidated Fund all debt charges for which Botswana is liable. (2) For the purposes of this section debt charges include interest, sinking fund charges, \n\nis liable. (2) For the purposes of this section debt charges include interest, sinking fund charges, the repayment or amortization of debt, and all expenditure in connection with the raising of loans on the security of the revenues or the Consolidated Fund of the former Protectorate of Bechuanaland or Botswana, and the service and re demption of debt thereby created. 124. Auditor-General\n\n124. Auditor-General (1) There shall be an Auditor -General, whose office shall be a public office. (2) The public accounts of Botswana and of all officers, courts and authorities of the \n\n(1) There shall be an Auditor -General, whose office shall be a public office. (2) The public accounts of Botswana and of all officers, courts and authorities of the Government of Botswa na shall be audited and reported on by the Auditor -General and for that purpose the Auditor-General or any person authorized by him or her in that behalf shall have access to all books, records, reports and other documents relating to those accounts: Provided that, if it is so provided by Parliament in the case of any body corporate directly \n\naccess to all books, records, reports and other documents relating to those accounts: Provided that, if it is so provided by Parliament in the case of any body corporate directly established by law, the accounts of that body corporate shall be audited and reported on by such person as may be specified by or under that law. (3) The Auditor-General shall submit his or her reports to the Minister responsible for \n\nperson as may be specified by or under that law. (3) The Auditor-General shall submit his or her reports to the Minister responsible for finance, who shall cause them to be laid before the National Assembly. (4) The Auditor-General shall perform such other duties and exercise such other powers in \n\nfinance, who shall cause them to be laid before the National Assembly. (4) The Auditor-General shall perform such other duties and exercise such other powers in relation to the accounts o f the Government or the accounts of other public authorities or other bodies as may be prescribed by or under any Act of Parliament. (5) In the exercise of his or her functions the Auditor -General shall not be subject to the \n\nbodies as may be prescribed by or under any Act of Parliament. (5) In the exercise of his or her functions the Auditor -General shall not be subject to the direction or control of any ot her person or authority.\n\n## Bechuanaland or Botswana, and the service and re 124. Auditor-General (1) There shall be an Auditor\n\n## Attorney-General. 123. Public debt (1) There shall be charged on the Consolidated Fund all debt charges for which Botswana\n\n## Act, whichever is the earlier. 121. Contingencies Fund (1) Parliament may make provision for the establishment of a\n\n## amount so advanced. 122. Remuneration of certain officers (1) There shall be paid to the hol ders of the offices to which this section applies such\n\nCopyright Government of Botswana" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5237076586482151, + "doc_id": "94b029749352500bd3d3605aef4254914a37d46c95787ee6bab2da69c6dd2f1e", + "edit_distance": 0.5564924114671164, + "f1_score": 0.959090909090909, + "meteor": 0.44634583830621694, + "precision": 0.9768518518518519, + "pred_md": "25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio\n\nguilty of such an offence by the court trying an election petition or on the grounds of his or her being in lawful custody at the date of the election, be entitled so to vote in that constituency in accordance with the provisions made by or under a law in that behalf; and no other person may so vote.\n\n## 68. Tenure of office of Members\n\n(1) The seat of an Elected Member or a Specially Elected Member of the National Assembly shall become vacant-\n\n- ( a ) upon the dissolution of Parliament;\n- ( b ) if he or she is absent from the sittings of the Assembly for such period and in such circumstances as may be prescribed in the rules of procedure of the Assembly;\n- ( c ) subject to the provisions of subsections (2) to (3) of this section, if any circumstances arise that, if he or she were not a Member of the Assembly, would cause him or her to be disqualified for election thereto.\n\n(2) If circumstances such as are referred to in paragraph ( c ) of the preceding subsection arise in relation to a Member of the Assembly by virtue of the fact that he or she is declared insolvent, adjudged to be of unsound mind, sentenced to death or imprisonment, or convicted of an election offence and it is open to the Member to appeal against the decision (either with the leave of the court or other authority or without such leave), he or she shall forthwith cease to perform his or her functions as a Member of the Assembly but, subject to the next following subsection, he or she shall not vacate his or her seat until the expiration of a period of 30 days thereafter:\n\nProvided that the Speaker may, at the request of the Member, from time to time extend that period for further periods of 30 days to enable the Member to pursue an appeal against the decision, so, however, that extensions of time exceeding in the aggregate 150 days shall not be given without the approval of the Assembly signified by resolution.\n\n(3) If, on the determination of any appeal, such circumstances continue to exist and no further appeal is open to the Member of the Assembly, or if, by reason of the expiration of any period for entering an appeal or notice thereof or the refusal of leave to appeal or for any other reason, it ceases to be open to the Member to appeal, he or she shall forthwith vacate his or her seat.\n\n- (4) If at any time before the Member of the Assembly vacates his or her seat such circumstances as aforesaid cease to exist, his or her seat shall not become vacant by reason of those circumstances, and he or she may resume the performance of his or her functions as a Member of the Assembly.\n\n## 69. Determination of questions as to membership of National Assembly\n\n- (1) The High Court shall have jurisdiction to hear and determine any question whether-\n- ( a ) any person has been validly elected as an Elected Member of the National Assembly or the seat of any such Member has become vacant;\n- ( b ) any person has been validly elected as Speaker of the Assembly or, having been so elected, has vacated the office of Speaker.\n\n(2) Any question whether any person has been validly elected as a Specially Elected Member of the National Assembly or whether the seat of any such Member has become vacant shall be determined by the Speaker.\n\n- (3) Parliament may make provision with respect to-\n- ( a ) the persons who may apply to the High Court for the determination of any question under this section;\n- ( b ) the circumstances and manner in which the conditions upon which any such application may be made; and\n- ( c ) the powers, practice and procedure of the High Court in relation to any such application.\n\nCopyright Government of Botswana", + "recall": 0.9419642857142857, + "true_md": "guilty of such an offence by the court trying an election petition or on the grounds of his or her being in lawful custody at the date of the election, be entitled so to vote in that constituency in accordance with the provisions made by or under a law in that behalf; and no other person may so vote. 68. Tenure of office of Members \n\n68. Tenure of office of Members (1) The seat of an Elected Member or a Specially Elected Member of the National Assembly shall become vacant - ( a ) upon the dissolution of Parliament;\n\ndisqualified for election thereto. (2) If circumstances such as are ref erred to in paragraph ( c ) of the preceding subsection arise in relation to a Member of the Assembly by virtue of the fact that he or she is declared insolvent, adjudged to be of unsound mind, sentenced to death or imprisonment, or convicted of an election offence and it is open to the Member to appeal against the decision (either with the leave of the court or other authority or without such leave), he or she shall forthwith cease to perform his or her functions as a Member of the Assembly but, subject to t he next following subsection, he or she shall not vacate his or her seat until the expiration of a period of 30 days thereafter: Provided that the Speaker may, at the request of the Member, from time to time extend \n\nthereafter: Provided that the Speaker may, at the request of the Member, from time to time extend that period for further periods of 30 da ys to enable the Member to pursue an appeal against the decision, so, however, that extensions of time exceeding in the aggregate 150 days shall not be given without the approval of the Assembly signified by resolution. (3) If, on the determination of anyappeal, such circumstances continue to exist and no \n\ngiven without the approval of the Assembly signified by resolution. (3) If, on the determination of anyappeal, such circumstances continue to exist and no further appeal is open to the Member of the Assembly, or if, by reason of the expiration of any period for entering an appeal or notice thereof or the refusal of leave to appeal or for any other reason,it ceases to be open to the Member to appeal, he or she shall forthwith vacate his or her seat. (4) If at any time before the Member of the Assembly vacates his or her seat such \n\nseat. (4) If at any time before the Member of the Assembly vacates his or her seat such circumstances as aforesaid cease to exist, his or her seat shall not become v acant by reason of those circumstances, and he or she may resume the performance of his or her functions as a Member of the Assembly. 69. Determination of questions as to membership of National Assembly \n\nDetermination of questions as to membership of National Assembly (1) The High Court shall have jurisdict ion to hear and determine any question whether - any person has been validly elected as an Elected Member of the National Assembly or \n\nelected, has vacated the office of Speaker. (2) Any question whether any person has been validly elected as a Specially Elected Member of the National Assembly or whether the seat of any such Member has become vacant shall be determined bythe Speaker. (3) Parliament may make provision with respect to - \n\nshall be determined bythe Speaker. (3) Parliament may make provision with respect to - the persons who may apply to the High Court for the determination of any question under \n\n## Member of the Assembly. 69. Determination of questions as to membership of National Assembly (1) The High Court shall have jurisdict ion to hear and determine any question whether\n\n## vote. 68. Tenure of office of Members (1) The seat of an Elected Member or a Specially Elected Member\n\n- Assembly shall become vacant - ( a ) upon the dissolution of Parliament; ( b ) if he or she is absent from the sittings of the Assembly for such period and in such \n\n- ( a ) upon the dissolution of Parliament; ( b ) if he or she is absent from the sittings of the Assembly for such period and in such circumstances as may be prescribed in the rules of procedure of the Assembly; ( c ) subject to the provisions of subsections (2) to (3) of this section, if any circumstances \n\n- circumstances as may be prescribed in the rules of procedure of the Assembly; ( c ) subject to the provisions of subsections (2) to (3) of this section, if any circumstances arise that, if he or she were not a Member of the Assembly, would cause him or her to be disqualified for election thereto. (2) If circumstances such as are ref erred to in paragraph ( c ) of the preceding subsection \n\n- (1) The High Court shall have jurisdict ion to hear and determine any question whether - ( a ) any person has been validly elected as an Elected Member of the National Assembly or the seat of any such Member has become vacant; ( b ) any person has been validly elected as Speaker of the Assembly or, having been so \n\n- the seat of any such Member has become vacant; ( b ) any person has been validly elected as Speaker of the Assembly or, having been so elected, has vacated the office of Speaker. (2) Any question whether any person has been validly elected as a Specially Elected \n\n- (3) Parliament may make provision with respect to - ( a ) the persons who may apply to the High Court for the determination of any question under this section; ( b ) the circumstances and manner in which the conditions upon which any such appli cation \n\n- this section; ( b ) the circumstances and manner in which the conditions upon which any such appli cation may be made; and ( c ) the powers, practice and procedure of the High Court in relation to any such application.\n\n- may be made; and ( c ) the powers, practice and procedure of the High Court in relation to any such application.\n\nCopyright Government of Botswana\n\n25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.04508107829202408, + "doc_id": "aab71170796bb39686ee0b7ef86754eaa8a04a58beae16b19ac6c84daf78dd05", + "edit_distance": 0.8728323699421965, + "f1_score": 0.8224299065420562, + "meteor": 0.16266462838419962, + "precision": 0.9565217391304348, + "pred_md": "25. Staff\n\n## 26. Class-child ratio\n\n| 82. 83. | Tenure of office of Members of Ntlo ya Dikgosi Rules of Procedure of Ntlo ya Dikgosi may transact business notwithstanding vacancies |\n|------------|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|\n| 84. | Ntlo ya Dikgosi |\n| 85. | Functions of Ntlo ya Dikgosi |\n| 86. 87. | Powers of Parliament Legislative powers |\n| 88. | Mode of exercising legislative powers |\n| 89. | Introduction of Bills Alteration of Constitution |\n| | PART V |\n| | Summoning, Prorogation and Dissolution Sessions of Parliament Prorogation and dissolution of Parliament |\n| 90. 91. | Vote of no confidence in the Government Sittings of National Assembly |\n| 92. | |\n| 93. | PART VI |\n| | Interpretation of the Constitution Reference to High Court of cases involving interpretation of Constitution Appeal to Court of Appeal |\n| 104. | Appointment, etc., of judicial officers |\n| | PART IV |\n| 105. | |\n| 106. | PART V |\n| | Judicial Committee |\n| 107. | |\n| | [ .] |\n| | Repealed |\n\nCopyright Government of Botswana", + "recall": 0.7213114754098361, + "true_md": "25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\nCopyright Government of Botswana\n\n- 82. Tenure of office of Members of Ntlo ya Dikgosi 83. Rules of Procedure of Ntlo ya Dikgosi\n\n- 82. Tenure of office of Members of Ntlo ya Dikgosi 83. Rules of Procedure of Ntlo ya Dikgosi 84. Ntlo ya Dikgosi may transact business notwithstanding vacancies\n\n- 83. Rules of Procedure of Ntlo ya Dikgosi 84. Ntlo ya Dikgosi may transact business notwithstanding vacancies 85. Functions of Ntlo ya Dikgosi\n\n- 84. Ntlo ya Dikgosi may transact business notwithstanding vacancies 85. Functions of Ntlo ya Dikgosi\n\n- 86. Legislative powers 87. Mode of exercising legislative powers\n\n- 86. Legislative powers 87. Mode of exercising legislative powers 88. Introduction of Bills \n\n- 87. Mode of exercising legislative powers 88. Introduction of Bills 89. Alteration of Constitution\n\n- 88. Introduction of Bills 89. Alteration of Constitution\n\n- Summoning, Prorogation and Dissolution 90. Sessions of Parliament 91. Prorogation and dissolution of Parliament\n\n- 90. Sessions of Parliament 91. Prorogation and dissolution of Parliament 92. Vote of no confidence in the Government\n\n- 91. Prorogation and dissolution of Parliament 92. Vote of no confidence in the Government 93. Sittings of National Assembly\n\n- 92. Vote of no confidence in the Government 93. Sittings of National Assembly\n\n- Interpretation 94. Votes of two-thirds of the Assembly\n\n- The High Court 95. Jurisdiction and composition 96. Appointment of judges of HighCourt \n\n- 95. Jurisdiction and composition 96. Appointment of judges of HighCourt 97. Tenure of office of judges of High Court\n\n- 96. Appointment of judges of HighCourt 97. Tenure of office of judges of High Court 98. Oaths to be taken by judges of High Court\n\n- 97. Tenure of office of judges of High Court 98. Oaths to be taken by judges of High Court\n\n- Court of Appeal 99. Composition and jurisdiction 100. Appointment of judges of Court of Appeal\n\n- 99. Composition and jurisdiction 100. Appointment of judges of Court of Appeal 101. Tenure of office of judges of Court of Appeal\n\n- 100. Appointment of judges of Court of Appeal 101. Tenure of office of judges of Court of Appeal 102. Oaths to be taken by judges of Court of Appeal\n\n- 101. Tenure of office of judges of Court of Appeal 102. Oaths to be taken by judges of Court of Appeal\n\n- 103. Composition and procedure 104. Appointment, etc., of judicial officers\n\n- 105. Reference to High Court of cases inv 106. Appeal to Court of Appeal\n\n- Interpretation of the Constitution 105. Reference to High Court of cases inv olving interpretation of Constitution 106. Appeal to Court of Appeal\n\n- 107. [ Repealed .] \n\n## PART V Judicial Committee\n\n## PART V Judicial Committee\n\n## PART IV Interpretation of the Constitution\n\n## PART IV Interpretation of the Constitution Reference to High Court of cases inv olving interpretation of Constitution\n\n## PART III Judicial Service Commission\n\n## PART III Judicial Service Commission Composition and procedure\n\n- Judicial Service Commission 103. Composition and procedure 104. Appointment, etc., of judicial officers\n\n## PART II Court of Appeal\n\n## PART II Court of Appeal Composition and jurisdiction\n\n## CHAPTER VI The Judicature\n\n## CHAPTER VI The Judicature PART I\n\n## The Judicature PART I The High Court\n\n## PART I The High Court Jurisdiction and composition\n\n## PART VI Interpretation\n\n## PART VI Interpretation Votes of two-thirds of the Assembly\n\n## PART V Summoning, Prorogation and Dissolution\n\n## PART V Summoning, Prorogation and Dissolution Sessions of Parliament\n\n## PART IV Powers of Parliament\n\n## PART IV Powers of Parliament" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.44613284644164963, + "doc_id": "cb09b4374acb48b5700402caa8a4b314396329d1ba654cdef173108e8f73dc07", + "edit_distance": 0.6533742331288344, + "f1_score": 0.9582417582417583, + "meteor": 0.3693822877725106, + "precision": 0.9775784753363229, + "pred_md": "25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio\n\n- ( a ) in execution of the sentence or order of a court, whether established for Botswana or some other country, in respect of a criminal offence of which he or she has been convicted;\n- ( b ) in execution of the order of a court of record punishing him or her for contempt of that or another court;\n- ( c ) in execution of the order of a court made to secure the fulfilment of any obligation imposed on him or her by law;\n- ( d ) for the purpose of bringing him or her before a court in execution of the order of a court;\n- upon reasonable suspicion of his or her having committed, or being about to commit, a\n- ( e ) criminal offence under the law in force in Botswana;\n- ( ) f under the order of a court or with the consent of his or her parent or guardian, for his or her education or welfare during any period ending not later than the date when he or she attains the age of 18 years;\n- ( g ) for the purpose of preventing the spread of an infectious or contagious disease;\n- ( h ) in the case of a person who is, or is reasonably suspected to be, of unsound mind, addicted to drugs or alcohol, or a vagrant, for the purpose of his or her care or treatment or the protection of the community;\n- ( ) i for the purpose of preventing the unlawful entry of that person into Botswana, or for the purpose of effecting the expulsion, extradition or other lawful removal of that person from Botswana, or for the purpose of restricting that person while he or she is being conveyed through Botswana in the course of his or her extradition or removal as a convicted prisoner from one country to another;\n- ( ) j to such extent as may be necessary in the execution of a lawful order requiring that person to remain within a specified area within Botswana or prohibiting him or her from being within such an area, or to such extent as may be reasonably justifiable for the taking of proceedings against that person relating to the making of any such order, or to such extent as may be reasonably justifiable for restraining that person during any visit that he or she is permitted to make to any part of Botswana in which, in consequence of any such order, his or her presence would otherwise be unlawful; or\n- ( k ) for the purpose of ensuring the safety of aircraft in flight.\n\n(2) Any person who is arrested or detained shall be informed as soon as reasonably practicable, in a language that he or she understands, of the reasons for his or her arrest or detention.\n\n- (3) Any person who is arrested or detained-\n- ( a ) for the purpose of bringing him or her before a court in execution of the order of a court; or\n- ( b ) upon reasonable suspicion of his or her having committed, or being about to commit, a criminal offence under the law in force in Botswana,\n\nand who is not released, shall be brought as soon as is reasonably practicable before a court; and if any person arrested or detained as mentioned in paragraph ( b ) of this subsection is not tried within a reasonable time, then, without prejudice to any further proceedings that may be brought against him or her, he or she shall be released either unconditionally or upon reasonable conditions, including in particular such conditions as are reasonably necessary to ensure that he or she appears at a later date for trial or for proceedings preliminary to trial.\n\n- (4) Any person who is unlawfully arrested or detained by any other person shall be entitled to compensation therefor from that other person.\n\n## 6. Protection from slavery and forced labour\n\n- (1) No person shall be held in slavery or servitude.\n- (2) No person shall be required to perform forced labour.\n\nCopyright Government of Botswana", + "recall": 0.9396551724137931, + "true_md": "25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n( k ) for the purpose of ensuring the safety of aircraft in flight. (2) Any person who is arrested or detained shall be in formed as soon as reasonably practicable, in a language that he or she understands, of the reasons for his or her arrest or detention. (3) Any person who is arrested or detained - \n\ndetention. (3) Any person who is arrested or detained - for the purpose of bringing him or her before a court in execution of t\n\ncriminal offence under the law in force in Botswana, and who is not released, shall be brought as soon as is reasonably practicable before a court; and if any person arrested or detained as mentioned in paragraph ( b ) of this subsection is not tried within a reasonable time, then, without prejudice to any further proceedings that may be brought against him or her, he or she shall be released eit her unconditionally or upon reasonable conditions, including in particular such conditions as are reasonably necessary to ensure that he or she appears at a later date for trial or for proceedings preliminary to trial. (4) Any person who is unlawfully arr ested or detained by any other person shall be entitled \n\nor she appears at a later date for trial or for proceedings preliminary to trial. (4) Any person who is unlawfully arr ested or detained by any other person shall be entitled to compensation therefor from that other person. 6. Protection from slavery and forced labour \n\nProtection from slavery and forced labour (1) No person shall be held in slavery or servitude. (2) No person shall be required to per form forced labour.\n\n(1) No person shall be held in slavery or servitude. (2) No person shall be required to per form forced labour.\n\n## to compensation therefor from that other person. 6. Protection from slavery and forced labour (1) No person shall be held in slavery or servitude.\n\n- ( a ) in execution of the sentence or order of a court, whether established for Botswana or some other country, in respect of a criminal offence of which he or she has been convicted; ( b ) in execution of the order of a court of record punishing hi m or her for contempt of that or \n\n- convicted; ( b ) in execution of the order of a court of record punishing hi m or her for contempt of that or another court; ( c ) in execution of the order of a court made to secure the fulfilment of any obligation \n\n- another court; ( c ) in execution of the order of a court made to secure the fulfilment of any obligation imposed on him or her by law; ( d ) for the purpose of bringing him or her before a court in execution of the order of a court; \n\n- imposed on him or her by law; ( d ) for the purpose of bringing him or her before a court in execution of the order of a court; ( e ) upon reasonable suspicion of his or her having committed, or being about to commit, a \n\n- ( d ) for the purpose of bringing him or her before a court in execution of the order of a court; ( e ) upon reasonable suspicion of his or her having committed, or being about to commit, a criminal offence under the law in force in Botswana; ( f ) under the order of a court or with the consent of his or her parent or guardian, for his or \n\n- criminal offence under the law in force in Botswana; ( f ) under the order of a court or with the consent of his or her parent or guardian, for his or her education or welfare during any period ending not later than the date when he or she attains the age of 18 years; ( g ) for the purpose of preventing the spread of an infectious or contagious disease;\n\n- attains the age of 18 years; ( g ) for the purpose of preventing the spread of an infectious or contagious disease; ( h ) in the case of a person who is, or is reasonably su spected to be, of unsound mind, \n\n- ( g ) for the purpose of preventing the spread of an infectious or contagious disease; ( h ) in the case of a person who is, or is reasonably su spected to be, of unsound mind, addicted to drugs or alcohol, or a vagrant, for the purpose of his or her care or treatment or the protection of the community; ( i ) for the purpose of preventing the unlawful entry of that person into Botswana, or for the \n\n- or the protection of the community; ( i ) for the purpose of preventing the unlawful entry of that person into Botswana, or for the purpose of effecting the expulsion, extradition or other lawful removal of that person from Botswana, or for the purpose of restricting that person while he or she is being conveyed through Botswana in the course of his or her extradition or removal as a co nvicted prisoner from one country to another; ( j ) to such extent as may be necessary in the execution of a lawful order requiring that \n\n- prisoner from one country to another; ( j ) to such extent as may be necessary in the execution of a lawful order requiring that person to remain within a specified area within Botswana or prohibiting him or her from being within such an area, or tosuch extent as may be reasonably justifiable for the taking of proceedings against that person relating to the making of any such order, or to such extent as may be reasonably justifiable for restraining that person during any visit that he or she is permitted to make to any part of Botswana in which, in consequence of any such order, his or her presence would otherwise be unlawful; or ( k ) for the purpose of ensuring the safety of aircraft in flight.\n\n- any such order, his or her presence would otherwise be unlawful; or ( k ) for the purpose of ensuring the safety of aircraft in flight. (2) Any person who is arrested or detained shall be in formed as soon as reasonably \n\n- (3) Any person who is arrested or detained - ( a ) for the purpose of bringing him or her before a court in execution of t he order of a court; or \n\n- or ( b ) upon reasonable suspicion of his or her having committed, or being about to commit, a criminal offence under the law in force in Botswana, and who is not released, shall be brought as soon as is reasonably practicable before a court; and \n\nfor the purpose of bringing him or her before a court in execution of t or upon reasonable suspicion of his or her having committed, or being about to commit, a \n\nCopyright Government of Botswana" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5229040542224674, + "doc_id": "44a92bb46159973db49011ee52c54594be1c73b561113a9b23c0e4005b335065", + "edit_distance": 0.49124270225187655, + "f1_score": 0.9519230769230769, + "meteor": 0.4237539055122429, + "precision": 0.9801980198019802, + "pred_md": "25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio\n\n- (4) All pensions benefits shall (except to the extent to which under any law providing for the funding of pensions benefits they are a charge on a fund established by that law and have been duly paid out of that fund to the person or authority to whom payment is due) be a charge on the Consolidated Fund.\n- (5) In this section \"pensions benefits\" means any pensions, compensation, gratuities or other like allowances for persons in respect of their service as public officers or as members of the armed forces or for the widows, children, dependants or personal representatives of such persons in respect of such service.\n- (6) References in this section to the law with respect to pensions benefits include (without prejudice to their generality) references to the law regulating the circumstances in which such benefits may be granted or in which the grant of such benefits may be refused, the law regulating the circumstances in which any such benefits that have been granted may be withheld, reduced in amount or suspended and the law regulating the amount of any such benefits.\n- (7) In this section references to service as a public officer include references to service as a public officer of the former Protectorate of Bechuanaland.\n\n## 116. Power of Commissions in relation to pensions, etc.\n\n- (1) Where under any law any person or authority has a discretion-\n- ( a ) to decide whether or not any pensions benefits shall be granted; or\n- ( b ) to withhold, reduce in amount or suspend any such benefits that have been granted, those benefits shall be granted and may not be withheld, reduced in amount or suspended unless the appropriate Commission concurs in the refusal to grant the benefits or, as the case may be, in the decision to withhold them, reduce them in amount or suspend them.\n- (2) Where the amount of any pensions benefits that may be granted to any person is not fixed by law, the amount of the benefits to be granted to him or her shall be the greatest amount for which he or she is eligible unless the appropriate Commission concurs in his or her being granted benefits of a smaller amount.\n- (3) The appropriate Commission shall not concur under subsection (1) or subsection (2) of this section in action taken on the ground that any person who holds or has held the office of a judge of the Court of Appeal or of the High Court or the Auditor-General or Director of Prosecutions has been guilty of misbehaviour unless he or she has been removed from office by reason of such misbehaviour.\n- (4) In this section \"the appropriate Commission\" means-\n- ( a ) in the case of benefits for which any person may be eligible in respect of the service in the public service of a person who, immediately before he or she ceased to be a public officer, was subject to the disciplinary control of the Judicial Service Commission or that have been granted in respect of such service, the Judicial Service Commission;\n- ( b ) in any other case, the Public Service Commission.\n- (5) In this section \"pensions benefits\" means any pensions, compensation, gratuities or other like allowances for persons in respect of their service as public officers (including service as public officers of the former Protectorate of Bechuanaland) or for the widows, children, dependants or personal representatives of such persons in respect of such service.\n\n## CHAPTER VIII (ss 117-124)\n\n## Finance\n\n## 117. Consolidated Fund\n\nAll revenues or other moneys raised or received for the purposes of the Government of Botswana (not being revenues or other moneys that are payable by or under any law into some other fund established for a specific purpose or that may by or under any law be retained by the department of Government that received them for the purposes of defraying the expenses of that department) shall be paid into and form one Consolidated Fund.\n\nCopyright Government of Botswana", + "recall": 0.9252336448598131, + "true_md": "- 25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n- 25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n(4) All pensions benefits shall (except to the extent to which under any law providing for the funding of pensions benefits they are a charge on a fund established by that law and have been duly paid out of that fund to the person or authority to whom payment is due) be a charge on the Consolidated Fund. (5) In this section \"pensions benefits\" means any pensions, compensation, gratuities or \n\nthe Consolidated Fund. (5) In this section \"pensions benefits\" means any pensions, compensation, gratuities or other like allowances for persons in respect of their service as public officers or as members of the armed forces or for t he widows, children, dependants or personal representatives of such persons in respect of such service. (6) References in this section to the law with respect to pensions benefits include (without \n\nin respect of such service. (6) References in this section to the law with respect to pensions benefits include (without prejudice to their generality) references to the law regul ating the circumstances in which such benefits may be granted or in which the grant of such benefits may be refused, the law regulating the circumstances in which any such benefits that have been granted may be withheld, reduced in amount or suspended and the law regulating the amount of any such benefits. (7) In this section references to service as a public officer include references to service as \n\namount or suspended and the law regulating the amount of any such benefits. (7) In this section references to service as a public officer include references to service as a public officer of the former Protectorate of Bechuanaland. 116. Power of Commissions in relation to pensions, etc. \n\n116. Power of Commissions in relation to pensions, etc. (1) Where under any law any person or authority has a discretion - to decide whether or not any pensions benefits shall be granted; or\n\n( b ) to withhold, reduce in amount or suspend any such benefits that have been granted, those benefits shall be granted and may not be withheld, reduced in amount or suspended unless the appropriate Commission concurs in the refusal to grant the benefits or, as the case may be, in the decision to withhold them, reducethem in amount or suspend them. (2) Where the amount of any pensions benefits that may be granted to any person is not \n\nthe decision to withhold them, reducethem in amount or suspend them. (2) Where the amount of any pensions benefits that may be granted to any person is not fixed by law, the amount of the benefits to be granted to him or her shall be the greatest amount for which he or she is eligible unlessthe appropriate Commission concurs in his or her being granted benefits of a smaller amount. (3) The appropriate Commission shall not concur under subsection (1) or subsection (2) of \n\ngranted benefits of a smaller amount. (3) The appropriate Commission shall not concur under subsection (1) or subsection (2) of this section in action taken on the ground that any p erson who holds or has held the office of a judge of the Court of Appeal or of the High Court or the Auditor -General or Director of Prosecutions has been guilty of misbehaviour unless he or she has been removed from office by reason of such misbehaviour. (4) In this section \"the appropriate Commission\" means - \n\nreason of such misbehaviour. (4) In this section \"the appropriate Commission\" means - in the case of benefits for which any person may be eligible in respect of the service in \n\n( b ) in any other case, the Public Service Commission. (5) In this section \"pensions benefits\" meansany pensions, compensation, gratuities or other like allowances for persons in respect of their service as public officers (including service as public officers of the former Protectorate of Bechuanaland) or for the widows, children, dependants or personalrepresentatives of such persons in respect of such service. CHAPTER VIII \n\n117. Consolidated Fund All revenues or other moneys raised or received for the purposes of the Government of Botswana (not being revenues or othe r moneys that are payable by or under any law into some other fund established for a specific purpose or that may by or under any law be retained by the department of Government that received them for the purposes of defraying the expenses of that department) shall be paid into and form one Consolidated Fund.\n\n## 117. Consolidated Fund All revenues or other moneys raised or received for the purposes of the Government of\n\n## CHAPTER VIII Finance (ss 117-124)\n\n## dependants or personalrepresentatives of such persons in respect of such service. CHAPTER VIII Finance (ss 117-124)\n\n## a public officer of the former Protectorate of Bechuanaland. 116. Power of Commissions in relation to pensions, etc. (1) Where under any law any person or authority has a discretion\n\n- (1) Where under any law any person or authority has a discretion - ( a ) to decide whether or not any pensions benefits shall be granted; or ( b ) to withhold, reduce in amount or suspend any such benefits that have been granted, \n\n- ( a ) to decide whether or not any pensions benefits shall be granted; or ( b ) to withhold, reduce in amount or suspend any such benefits that have been granted, those benefits shall be granted and may not be withheld, reduced in amount or suspended unless \n\n- (4) In this section \"the appropriate Commission\" means - ( a ) in the case of benefits for which any person may be eligible in respect of the service in the public service of a person who, immediately before he or she ceased to be a public officer, was subje ct to the disciplinary control of the Judicial Service Commission or that have been granted in respect of such service, the Judicial Service Commission; ( b ) in any other case, the Public Service Commission.\n\n- have been granted in respect of such service, the Judicial Service Commission; ( b ) in any other case, the Public Service Commission. (5) In this section \"pensions benefits\" meansany pensions, compensation, gratuities or \n\nCopyright Government of Botswana" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.13733410286722234, + "doc_id": "dff1315f628320977adabbc5dc80a8ceec07a91517d108ae812ac7246bfbbcc6", + "edit_distance": 0.7393939393939394, + "f1_score": 0.9611307420494699, + "meteor": 0.26920270968342813, + "precision": 0.9645390070921985, + "pred_md": "25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio\n\n| 45. 46. | Oaths to be taken by Ministers and Assistant Ministers Secretary to the Cabinet |\n|------------|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|\n| | PART III |\n| | Executive Functions |\n| 47. | Functions of President |\n| 48. | Command of armed forces |\n| 49. | Functions of Vice-President |\n| 50. | Functions of Cabinet Ministers and Assistant Ministers |\n| 51. | Attorney-General |\n| 51A. | Director of Public Prosecutions |\n| 52. | Permanent Secretaries |\n| 53. | Prerogative of Mercy |\n| 54. | Advisory Committee on Prerogative of Mercy |\n| 55. | Functions of Advisory Committee on Prerogative of Mercy |\n| 56. | Constitution of offices |\n| | CHAPTER V |\n| | Parliament |\n| | PART I Composition |\n| 57. | Parliament |\n| 58. | Composition of National Assembly |\n| 59. | Speaker |\n| 60. | Deputy Speaker |\n| 61. | Qualifications for election to National Assembly |\n| 62. | Disqualifications for membership of National Assembly |\n| 63. | |\n| 64. | Constituencies Delimitation Commission |\n| 65. 65A. | Report of Commission Appointment of Independent Electoral Commission |\n| 66. | Appointment of Secretary to Independent Electoral Commission |\n| 67. | The franchise |\n| 68. | Tenure of office of members |\n| 69. | Determination of questions as to membership of National Assembly |\n| | Clerk of the Assembly |\n| 70. | |\n| | PART II |\n| 71. | General Provisions Relating to Procedure in National Assembly Oaths to be taken by Speaker and Members |\n| 72. | Presiding in Assembly |\n| 73. | Quorum in Assembly |\n| 74. | Voting in Assembly |\n| 75. | Unqualified persons sitting or voting |\n| 76. | Regulation of procedure in Assembly |\n| | PART III Ntlo ya Dikgosi |\n| 77. | Establishment and composition of Ntlo ya Dikgosi |\n| 78. | Designation for Member to Ntlo ya Dikgosi |\n| 79. | Qualifications for Members of Ntlo ya Dikgosi |\n| 80. | Oath of allegiance |\n| 81. | Secretary to Ntlo ya Dikgosi |\n\nCopyright Government of Botswana", + "recall": 0.9577464788732394, + "true_md": "25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n## PART III Executive Functions\n\n## PART III Executive Functions\n\n## CHAPTER V Parliament\n\n## CHAPTER V Parliament PART I\n\n## Parliament PART I Composition\n\n## PART I Composition\n\n## PART II General Provisions Relating to Procedure in National Assembly\n\n## PART II General Provisions Relating to Procedure in National Assembly Oaths to be taken by Speaker and Members\n\n## PART III Ntlo ya Dikgosi\n\n## PART III Ntlo ya Dikgosi Establishment and composition of Ntlo ya Dikgosi\n\n- 45. Oaths to be taken by Ministers and Assistant Ministe rs 46. Secretary to the Cabinet\n\n- 45. Oaths to be taken by Ministers and Assistant Ministe 46. Secretary to the Cabinet\n\n- 47. Functions of President 48. Command of armed forces\n\n- 47. Functions of President 48. Command of armed forces 49. Functions of Vice-President \n\n- 48. Command of armed forces 49. Functions of Vice-President 50. Functions of Cabinet Ministers and Assistant Ministers\n\n- 49. Functions of Vice-President 50. Functions of Cabinet Ministers and Assistant Ministers 51. Attorney-General \n\n- 50. Functions of Cabinet Ministers and Assistant Ministers 51. Attorney-General 51A. Director ofPublic Prosecutions \n\n- 51. Attorney-General 51A. Director ofPublic Prosecutions 52. Permanent Secretaries\n\n- 51A. Director ofPublic Prosecutions 52. Permanent Secretaries 53. Prerogative of Mercy\n\n- 52. Permanent Secretaries 53. Prerogative of Mercy 54. Advisory Committee on Prerogative of Mercy\n\n- 53. Prerogative of Mercy 54. Advisory Committee on Prerogative of Mercy 55. Functions of Advisory Committee on Prerogative of Mercy\n\n- 54. Advisory Committee on Prerogative of Mercy 55. Functions of Advisory Committee on Prerogative of Mercy 56. Constitution of offices\n\n- 55. Functions of Advisory Committee on Prerogative of Mercy 56. Constitution of offices\n\n- 57. Parliament 58. Composition of National Assembly\n\n- 57. Parliament 58. Composition of National Assembly 59. Speaker \n\n- 58. Composition of National Assembly 59. Speaker 60. Deputy Speaker \n\n- 59. Speaker 60. Deputy Speaker 61. Qualifications for election to National Assembly\n\n- 60. Deputy Speaker 61. Qualifications for election to National Assembly 62. Disqualifications for membership of National Assembly\n\n- 61. Qualifications for election to National Assembly 62. Disqualifications for membership of National Assembly 63. Constituencies \n\n- 62. Disqualifications for membership of National Assembly 63. Constituencies 64. Delimitation Commission \n\n- 63. Constituencies 64. Delimitation Commission 65. Reportof Commission \n\n- 64. Delimitation Commission 65. Reportof Commission 65A. Appointment of Independent Electoral Commission\n\n- 65. Reportof Commission 65A. Appointment of Independent Electoral Commission 66. Appointment of Secretary to Independent Electoral Commission\n\n- 65A. Appointment of Independent Electoral Commission 66. Appointment of Secretary to Independent Electoral Commission 67. The franchise \n\n- 66. Appointment of Secretary to Independent Electoral Commission 67. The franchise 68. Tenure of office of members\n\n- 67. The franchise 68. Tenure of office of members 69. Determination of questions as to membership of National Assembly\n\n- 68. Tenure of office of members 69. Determination of questions as to membership of National Assembly 70. Clerk of the Assembly\n\n- 69. Determination of questions as to membership of National Assembly 70. Clerk of the Assembly\n\n- General Provisions Relating to Procedure in National Assembly 71. Oaths to be taken by Speaker and Members 72. Presiding in Assembly \n\n- 71. Oaths to be taken by Speaker and Members 72. Presiding in Assembly 73. Quorum in Assembly \n\n- 72. Presiding in Assembly 73. Quorum in Assembly 74. Voting in Assembly \n\n- 73. Quorum in Assembly 74. Voting in Assembly 75. Unqualified persons sitting or \n\n- 74. Voting in Assembly 75. Unqualified persons sitting or voting 76. Regulation of procedure in Assembly\n\n- 75. Unqualified persons sitting or voting 76. Regulation of procedure in Assembly\n\n- Ntlo ya Dikgosi 77. Establishment and composition of Ntlo ya Dikgosi 78. Designation for Member to Ntlo ya Dikgosi\n\n- 77. Establishment and composition of Ntlo ya Dikgosi 78. Designation for Member to Ntlo ya Dikgosi 79. Qualifications for Members of Ntlo ya Dikgosi\n\n- 78. Designation for Member to Ntlo ya Dikgosi 79. Qualifications for Members of Ntlo ya Dikgosi 80. Oath of allegiance \n\n- 79. Qualifications for Members of 80. Oath of allegiance 81. Secretary to Ntlo ya Dikgosi\n\n- 80. Oath of allegiance 81. Secretary to Ntlo ya Dikgosi\n\nCopyright Government of Botswana" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5555618424445397, + "doc_id": "49694972e915534296d328c8f56932e3d1f86336f936d267bab69c03872e64ca", + "edit_distance": 0.5981996726677578, + "f1_score": 0.9629629629629631, + "meteor": 0.4664933023498371, + "precision": 0.9822222222222222, + "pred_md": "25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio\n\n- ( d ) for the application in the case of members of a particular race, community or tribe of customary law with respect to any matter whether to the exclusion of any law in respect to that matter which is applicable in the case of other persons or not; or\n- ( e ) whereby persons of any such description as is mentioned in subsection (3) of this section may be subjected to any disability or restriction or may be accorded any privilege or advantage which, having regard to its nature and to special circumstances pertaining to those persons or to persons of any other such description, is reasonably justifiable in a democratic society.\n- (5) Nothing contained in any law shall be held to be inconsistent with or in contravention of subsection (1) of this section to the extent that it makes reasonable provision with respect to qualifications for service as a public officer or as a member of a disciplined force or for the service of a local government authority or a body corporate established directly by any law.\n- (6) Subsection (2) of this section shall not apply to anything which is expressly or by necessary implication authorized to be done by any such provision of law as is referred to in subsection (4) or (5) of this section.\n- (7) Nothing contained in or done under the authority of any law shall be held to be inconsistent with or in contravention of this section to the extent that the law in question makes provision whereby persons of any such description as is mentioned in subsection (3) of this section may be subjected to any restriction on the rights and freedoms guaranteed by sections 9, 11, 12, 13 and 14 of this Constitution, being such a restriction as is authorized by section 9(2), 11(5), 12(2) 13(2), or 14(3), as the case may be.\n- (8) Nothing in subsection (2) of this section shall affect any discretion relating to the institution, conduct or discontinuance of civil or criminal proceedings in any court that is vested in any person by or under this Constitution or any other law.\n- (9) Nothing contained in or done under the authority of any law shall be held to be inconsistent with the provisions of this section-\n- ( a ) if that law was in force immediately before the coming into operation of this Constitution and has continued in force at all times since the coming into operation of this Constitution; or\n- ( b ) to the extent that the law repeals and re-enacts any provision which has been contained in any written law at all times since immediately before the coming into operation of this Constitution.\n\n## 16. Derogation from fundamental rights and freedoms\n\n- (1) Nothing contained in or done under the authority of any law shall be held to be inconsistent with or in contravention of section 5 or 15 of this Constitution to the extent that the law authorizes the taking during any period when Botswana is at war or any period when a declaration under section 17 of this Constitution is in force, of measures that are reasonably justifiable for the purpose of dealing with the situation that exists during that period.\n- (2) Where a person is detained by virtue of such an authorization as is referred to in subsection (1) of this section the following provisions shall apply-\n- ( a ) he or she shall, as soon as reasonably practicable and in any case not more than five days after the commencement of his or her detention, be furnished with a statement in writing in a language that he or she understands specifying in detail the grounds upon which he or she is detained;\n- ( b ) not more than 14 days after the commencement of his or her detention, a notification shall be published in the Gazette stating that he or she has been detained and giving particulars of the provision of law under which his or her detention is authorized;\n- ( c ) not more than one month after the commencement of his or her detention and thereafter during his or her detention at intervals of not more than six months, his or her case shall\n\nCopyright Government of Botswana", + "recall": 0.9444444444444444, + "true_md": "- 25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n- 25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n- ( d ) for the application in the case of members of a particular race, community or tribe of customary law with respect to any matter whether to the exclusion of any law in respect to that matter which is applicable in the case of other persons or not; or ( e ) whereby persons of any such description as is mentioned in subsection (3) of this section \n\n- to that matter which is applicable in the case of other persons or not; or ( e ) whereby persons of any such description as is mentioned in subsection (3) of this section may be subjected to any disability or restriction or m ay be accorded any privilege or advantage which, having regard to its nature and to special circumstances pertaining to those persons or to persons of any other such description, is reasonably justifiable in a democratic society. (5) Nothing contained in any law shall be held to be inconsistent with or in contravention of \n\n- inconsistent with the provisions of this section - ( a ) if that law was in force immediately before the coming into operation of this Constitution and has continued in force at all times since the coming into operation of this Constitution; or ( b ) to the extent that the law repeals and re -enacts any provision which has been contained \n\n- Constitution; or ( b ) to the extent that the law repeals and re -enacts any provision which has been contained in any written lawat all times since immediately before the coming into operation of this Constitution. 16. Derogation from fundamental rights and freedoms \n\n- subsection (1) of this section the following provisions shall apply - ( a ) he or she shall, as soon as reasonably practicable and in any case not more than five days after the commencement of his or her detention, be furnished with a statement in writing in a language that he or she understands specifying in detail the grou nds upon which he or she is detained; ( b ) not more than 14 days after the commencement of his or her detention, a notification \n\n- which he or she is detained; ( b ) not more than 14 days after the commencement of his or her detention, a notification shall be published in the Gazette stating that he or she has been detained and giving particulars of the provision of law under which his or her detention is authorized; ( c ) not more than one month after the commencement of his or her detention and thereafter \n\n- particulars of the provision of law under which his or her detention is authorized; ( c ) not more than one month after the commencement of his or her detention and thereafter during his or her detention at intervals of not more than six months, his or her case shall \n\ndemocratic society. (5) Nothing contained in any law shall be held to be inconsistent with or in contravention of subsection (1) of this section to the extent that it makes reasonable provision with respect to qualifications for service as a public officer or as a member of a disciplined force or for the service of a local government authority or a body corporate established directly by any law. (6) Subsection (2) of this section shall not apply to anything which is expressly or by \n\nof a local government authority or a body corporate established directly by any law. (6) Subsection (2) of this section shall not apply to anything which is expressly or by necessary implication authorized to be done by any such provision of law as is referred to in subsection (4) or (5) of this section. (7) Nothing contained in or done under the authority of any law shall be held to be \n\nsubsection (4) or (5) of this section. (7) Nothing contained in or done under the authority of any law shall be held to be inconsistent with or in contravention of this section to the extent that the law in question makes provision whereby persons of any such description as is mentioned in subsection (3) of this section may be subjected to any restriction on the rights and freedoms guaranteed by sections 9, 11, 12, 13 and 14 of this Constitution, being such a restriction as is auth orized by section 9(2), 11(5), 12(2) 13(2), or 14(3), as the case may be. (8) Nothing in subsection (2) of this section shall affect any discretion relating to the \n\n11(5), 12(2) 13(2), or 14(3), as the case may be. (8) Nothing in subsection (2) of this section shall affect any discretion relating to the institution, conduct or discontinuance of civil or criminal proceedings in any court that i s vested in any person by or under this Constitution or any other law. (9) Nothing contained in or done under the authority of any law shall be held to be \n\nany person by or under this Constitution or any other law. (9) Nothing contained in or done under the authority of any law shall be held to be inconsistent with the provisions of this section - ( a ) if that law was in force immediately before the coming into operation of this Constitution \n\n16. Derogation from fundamental rights and freedoms (1) Nothing contained in or done under the authority of any law shall be held to be inconsistent with or in contravention of section 5 or 15 of this Constitution to the extent that the law authorizes the taking during any period when Botswana is at war or any period when a declaration under section 17 of this Constitution is in force, of measures that are r easonably justifiable for the purpose of dealing with the situation that exists during that period. (2) Where a person is detained by virtue of such an authorization as is referred to in \n\npurpose of dealing with the situation that exists during that period. (2) Where a person is detained by virtue of such an authorization as is referred to in subsection (1) of this section the following provisions shall apply - ( a ) he or she shall, as soon as reasonably practicable and in any case not more than five \n\n## Constitution. 16. Derogation from fundamental rights and freedoms (1) Nothing contained in or done under the authority of any law shall be held to be\n\nCopyright Government of Botswana" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5019598762636235, + "doc_id": "f9320cc46f8ad26e95c821403515f9cdde4bc1dc8278577eacf38346efde3991", + "edit_distance": 0.5592377796188898, + "f1_score": 0.9513742071881607, + "meteor": 0.3954754664524, + "precision": 0.974025974025974, + "pred_md": "25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio\n\nbe reviewed by an independent and impartial tribunal established by law and presided over by a person, qualified to be enrolled as an advocate in Botswana, appointed by the Chief Justice; and\n\n- ( d ) he or she shall be afforded reasonable facilities to consult and instruct, at his or her own expense, a legal representative and he or she and any such legal representative shall be permitted to make written or oral representations or both to the tribunal appointed for the review of his or her case.\n- (3) On any review by a tribunal in pursuance of this section of the case of a detained person, the tribunal may make recommendations, concerning the necessity or expediency of continuing his or her detention, to the authority by which it was ordered but, unless it is otherwise provided by law, that authority shall not be obliged to act in accordance with any such recommendations.\n\n## 17. Declarations relating to emergencies\n\n- (1) The President may at any time, by Proclamation published in the Gazette , declare that a state of public emergency exists.\n- (2) A declaration under subsection (1) of this section, if not sooner revoked, shall cease to have effect-\n- ( a ) in the case of a declaration made when Parliament is sitting or has been summoned to meet within seven days, at the expiration of a period of seven days beginning with the date of publication of the declaration; or\n- ( b ) in any other case, at the expiration of a period of 21 days beginning with the date of publication of the declaration,\n\nunless before the expiration of that period, it is approved by a resolution passed by the National Assembly, supported by the votes of a majority of all the voting members of the Assembly.\n\n- (3) Subject to the provisions of subsection (4) of this section, a declaration approved by a resolution of the National Assembly under subsection (2) of this section shall continue in force until the expiration of a period of six months beginning with the date of its being so approved or until such earlier date as may be specified in the resolution:\n\nProvided that the National Assembly may, by resolution, supported by the votes of a majority of all the voting members of the Assembly, extend its approval of the declaration for periods of not more than six months at a time.\n\n- (4) The National Assembly may by resolution at any time revoke a declaration approved by the Assembly under this section.\n\n## 18. Enforcement of protective provisions\n\n(1) Subject to the provisions of subsection (5) of this section, if any person alleges that any of the provisions of sections 3 to 16 (inclusive) of this Constitution has been, is being or is likely to be contravened in relation to him or her, then, without prejudice to any other action with respect to the same matter which is lawfully available, that person may apply to the High Court for redress.\n\n- (2) The High Court shall have original jurisdiction-\n- ( a ) to hear and determine any application made by any person in pursuance of subsection (1) of this section; or\n- ( b ) to determine any question arising in the case of any person which is referred to it in pursuance of subsection (3) of this section,\n\nand may make such orders, issue such writs and give such direction as it may consider appropriate for the purpose of enforcing or securing the enforcement of any of the provisions of sections 3 to 16 (inclusive) of this Constitution.\n\n- (3) If in any proceedings in any subordinate court any question arises as to the contravention of any of the provisions of sections 3 to 16 (inclusive) of this Constitution, the person presiding in that court may, and shall if any party to the proceedings so requests, refer the\n\nCopyright Government of Botswana", + "recall": 0.9297520661157025, + "true_md": "25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\nbe reviewed by an independent a nd impartial tribunal established by law and presided over by a person, qualified to be enrolled as an advocate in Botswana, appointed by the Chief Justice; and he or she shall be afforded reasonable facilities to consult and instruct, at his or her o wn \n\nreview of his or her case. (3) On any review by a tribunal in pursuance of this section of the case of a detained person, the tribunal may make recommendations, concerning the necessity or expediency of continuing his or her detention, to the authority by which it was ordered but, unless it is otherwise provided by law, thatauthority shall not be obliged to act in accordance with any such recommendations. 17. Declarations relating to emergencies\n\n17. Declarations relating to emergencies (1) The President may at any time, by Proclamation published in the Gazette , declare that a state of public emergencyexists. (2) A declaration under subsection (1) of this section, if not sooner revoked, shall cease to \n\na state of public emergencyexists. (2) A declaration under subsection (1) of this section, if not sooner revoked, shall cease to have effect- ( a ) in the case of a declaration made when Parliament is sitting or has been summoned to \n\npublication of the declaration, unless before the expiration of that period, it is approved by a resolution passed by the National Assembly, supported by the votes of a majority of all the voting members of the Assembly. (3) Subject to the provisions of subsection (4) of this section, a declaration approved by a \n\nAssembly, supported by the votes of a majority of all the voting members of the Assembly. (3) Subject to the provisions of subsection (4) of this section, a declaration approved by a resolution of the Nation al Assembly under subsection (2) of this section shall continue in force until the expiration of a period of six months beginning with the date of its being so approved or until such earlier date as may be specified in the resolution: Provided that the National Assembly may, by resolution, supported by the votes of a \n\nuntil such earlier date as may be specified in the resolution: Provided that the National Assembly may, by resolution, supported by the votes of a majority of all the voting members of the Assembly, extend its approval of the declaration for periods of not more than six months at a time. (4) The National Assembly may by resolution at an y time revoke a declaration approved \n\nperiods of not more than six months at a time. (4) The National Assembly may by resolution at an y time revoke a declaration approved by the Assembly under this section. 18. Enforcement of protective provisions \n\n18. Enforcement of protective provisions (1) Subject to the provisions of subsection (5) of this section, if any person alleges that any of the provisions of sections 3 to 16 (inclusive) of this Constitution has been, is being or is likely to be contravened in relation to him or her, then, withou t prejudice to any other action with respect to the same matter which is lawfully available, that person may apply to the High Court for redress. (2) The High Court shall have original jurisdiction - \n\nthe same matter which is lawfully available, that person may apply to the High Court for redress. (2) The High Court shall have original jurisdiction - to hear and determine any application made by any p\n\npursuance of subsection (3) of this section, and may make such orders, issue such writs and give such direc tion as it may consider appropriate for the purpose of enforcing or securing the enforcement of any of the provisions of sections 3 to 16 (inclusive) of this Constitution. (3) If in any proceedings in any subordinate court any question arises as to the \n\nsections 3 to 16 (inclusive) of this Constitution. (3) If in any proceedings in any subordinate court any question arises as to the contravention of any of the provisions of sections 3 to 16 (inclusive) of this Constitution, the person presiding in that court may, and shall if any party to the proceedings so requests, refer the \n\nCopyright Government of Botswana\n\n- Chief Justice; and ( d ) he or she shall be afforded reasonable facilities to consult and instruct, at his or her o wn expense, a legal representative and he or she and any such legal representative shall be permitted to make written or oral representations or both to the tribunal appointed for the review of his or her case. (3) On any review by a tribunal in pursuance of this section of the case of a detained \n\n- have effect- ( a ) in the case of a declaration made when Parliament is sitting or has been summoned to meet within seven days, at the expiration of a per iod of seven days beginning with the date of publication of the declaration; or ( b ) in any other case, at the expiration of a period of 21 days beginning with the date of \n\n- date of publication of the declaration; or ( b ) in any other case, at the expiration of a period of 21 days beginning with the date of publication of the declaration, unless before the expiration of that period, it is approved by a resolution passed by the National \n\n- (2) The High Court shall have original jurisdiction - ( a ) to hear and determine any application made by any p erson in pursuance of subsection (1) of this section; or ( b ) to determine any question arising in the case of any person which is referred to it in \n\n- (1) of this section; or ( b ) to determine any question arising in the case of any person which is referred to it in pursuance of subsection (3) of this section, and may make such orders, issue such writs and give such direc tion as it may consider \n\n## by the Assembly under this section. 18. Enforcement of protective provisions (1) Subject to the provisions of subsection (5) of this section, if any person alleges that any\n\n## recommendations. 17. Declarations relating to emergencies (1) The President may at any time, by Proclamation published in the" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.26433293428421695, + "doc_id": "d3b8ea127fae5a72c7335a79841609520313788e58a1ea29ad7cfcfceb7dc71b", + "edit_distance": 0.6444444444444445, + "f1_score": 0.9642857142857141, + "meteor": 0.44332517640350666, + "precision": 0.9310344827586207, + "pred_md": "## 25. Staff\n\n26. Class-child ratio\n\nWEST DISTRICT\n\n- (16) Ngami Region\n\nTHE SOUTHERN DISTRICT\n\nCopyright Government of Botswana\n\n- (17) Okavango Region\n- (18) Kanye Region\n- (19) Moshupa Region\n- (20) NgwaketseWest Region.", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n(16) Ngami Region (17) Okavango Region \n\n(16) Ngami Region (17) Okavango Region (18) Kanye Region \n\n(17) Okavango Region (18) Kanye Region (19) Moshupa Region \n\n(18) Kanye Region (19) Moshupa Region (20) NgwaketseWest Region. \n\n(19) Moshupa Region (20) NgwaketseWest Region. \n\nWEST DISTRICT\n\nTHE SOUTHERN DISTRICT\n\nCopyright Government of Botswana" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4650516167031284, + "doc_id": "2f4a287a5c16a8fc9d267de604deb603768d82cb1aa3464399b3cdd1c091cd81", + "edit_distance": 0.5394032134659525, + "f1_score": 0.979591836734694, + "meteor": 0.43314219702755935, + "precision": 0.9917355371900827, + "pred_md": "25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio\n\nquestion makes provision for the compulsory taking of possession in the public interest of any property, or the compulsory acquisition in the public interest in or right over property, where that property, interest or right is held by a body corporate established by law for public purposes in which no moneys have been invested other than moneys provided by Parliament.\n\n## 9. Protection for privacy of home and other property\n\n(1) Except with his or her own consent, no person shall be subjected to the search of his or her person or his or her property or the entry by others on his or her premises.\n\n(2) Nothing contained in or done under the authority of any law shall be held to be inconsistent with or in contravention of this section to the extent that the law in question makes provision-\n\n- ( a ) that is reasonably required in the interests of defence, public safety, public order, public morality, public health, town and country planning, the development and utilization of mineral resources, for the purpose of any census or in order to secure the development or utilization of any property for a purpose beneficial to the community;\n- ( b ) that is reasonably required for the purpose of protecting the rights or freedoms of other persons;\n- ( c ) that authorizes an officer or agent of the Government of Botswana, a local government authority or a body corporate established by law for a public purpose to enter on the premises of any person in order to inspect those premises or anything thereon for the purpose of any tax, rate or duty or in order to carry out work connected with any property that is lawfully on those premises and that belongs to that Government, authority or body corporate, as the case may be; or\n- ( d ) that authorizes, for the purpose of enforcing the judgment or order of a court in any civil proceedings, the search of any person or property by order of a court or entry upon any premises by such order,\n\nand except so far as that provision or, as the case may be, anything done under the authority thereof is shown not to be reasonably justifiable in a democratic society.\n\n## 10. Provisions to secure protection of law\n\n(1) If any person is charged with a criminal offence, then, unless the charge is withdrawn, the case shall be afforded a fair hearing within a reasonable time by an independent and impartial court established or recognized by law.\n\n(2) Every person who is charged with a criminal offence-\n\n- ( a ) shall be presumed to be innocent until he or she is proved or has pleaded guilty;\n- ( b ) shall be informed as soon as reasonably practicable, in a language that he or she understands and in detail, of the nature of the offence charged;\n- ( c ) shall be given adequate time and facilities for the preparation of his or her defence;\n- ( d ) shall be permitted to defend himself or herself before the court in person or, at his or her own expense, by a legal representative of his or her own choice;\n- ( e ) shall be afforded facilities to examine in person or by his or her legal representative the witnesses called by the prosecution before the court, and to obtain the attendance and carry out the examination of witnesses to testify on his or her behalf before the court on the same conditions as those applying to witnesses called by the prosecution; and\n- ( ) f shall be permitted to have without payment the assistance of an interpreter if he or she cannot understand the language used at the trial of the charge,\n\nand except with his or her own consent the trial shall not take place in his or her absence unless he or she so conducts himself or herself as to render the continuance of the proceedings in his or her presence impracticable and the court has ordered him or her to be removed and the trial to proceed in his or her absence.\n\nCopyright Government of Botswana", + "recall": 0.967741935483871, + "true_md": "- 25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n- 25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\nquestion makes provision for the compulsory taking of possession in the pu blic interest of any property, or the compulsory acquisition in the public interest in or right over property, where that property, interest or right is held by a body corporate established by law for public purposes in which no moneys have been invested o ther than moneys provided by Parliament. 9. Protection for privacy of home and other property \n\n9. Protection for privacy of home and other property (1) Except with his or her own consent, no person shall be subjected to the search of his or her person or his or her property or the entry by other s on his or her premises. (2) Nothing contained in or done under the authority of any law shall be held to be \n\nher person or his or her property or the entry by other s on his or her premises. (2) Nothing contained in or done under the authority of any law shall be held to be inconsistent with or in contravention of this section to the extent that the law in question makes provision- ( a ) that is reasonably required inthe interests of defence, public safety, public order, public \n\npremises by such order, and except so far as that provision or, as the case may be, anything done under the authority thereof is shown not to be reasonably justifiable in a democratic society. 10. Provisions to secure protection of law \n\n10. Provisions to secure protection of law (1) If any person is charged with a criminal offence, then, unless the charge is withdrawn, the case shall be afforded a fair hearing within a reasonable time by an independent and impartial court established or recognized by law. (2) Every person who is charged with a criminal offence - \n\ncannot understand the language used at the trial of the charge, and except with his or her own consent the trial shall not take place in his or her absence unless he or she so conducts himself or herself as to render the continuance of the proceedings in his or her presence impracticable and the court has ordered him or her to be removed and the trial to proceed in his or her absence.\n\n## thereof is shown not to be reasonably justifiable in a democratic society. 10. Provisions to secure protection of law (1) If any person is charged with a criminal offence, then, unless the charge is withdrawn,\n\n## which no moneys have been invested o ther than moneys provided by Parliament. 9. Protection for privacy of home and other property (1) Except with his or her own consent, no person shall be subjected to the search of his or\n\n- provision- ( a ) that is reasonably required inthe interests of defence, public safety, public order, public morality, public health, town and country planning, the development and utilization of mineral resources, for the purpose of any census or in order to secure the development or utilization of any property for a purpose beneficial to the community; ( b ) that is reasonably required for the purpose of protecting the rights or freedoms of other \n\n- or utilization of any property for a purpose beneficial to the community; ( b ) that is reasonably required for the purpose of protecting the rights or freedoms of other persons; ( c ) that authorizes an officer or agent of the Government of Botswana, a local government \n\n- persons; ( c ) that authorizes an officer or agent of the Government of Botswana, a local government authority or a body corporate established by law for a public purpose to enter on the premises of any person in order to inspect those premises or anything thereon for the purpose of any tax, rate or duty or in order to carry out work connected with any property that is lawfully on those premises and that belongs to that Government, authority or body corporate, as the case may be; or ( d ) that authorizes, for the purpose of enforcing the judgment or order of a court in any civil \n\n- corporate, as the case may be; or ( d ) that authorizes, for the purpose of enforcing the judgment or order of a court in any civil proceedings, the search of any per son or property by order of a court or entry upon any premises by such order, and except so far as that provision or, as the case may be, anything done under the authority \n\n- (2) Every person who is charged with a criminal offence - ( a ) shall be presumed to be innocent until he or she is proved or has pleaded guilty; ( b ) shall be informed as soon as reasonably practicable, in a language that he or she \n\n- ( a ) shall be presumed to be innocent until he or she is proved or has pleaded guilty; ( b ) shall be informed as soon as reasonably practicable, in a language that he or she understands and in detail, of the nature of the offence charged; ( c ) shall be given adequate time and facilities for the preparation of his or her defence;\n\n- understands and in detail, of the nature of the offence charged; ( c ) shall be given adequate time and facilities for the preparation of his or her defence; ( d ) shall be permitted to defend himself or herself before the court in person or, at his or her \n\n- ( c ) shall be given adequate time and facilities for the preparation of his or her defence; ( d ) shall be permitted to defend himself or herself before the court in person or, at his or her own expense, by a legal representative of his or her own choice; ( e ) shall be afforded facilities to examine in person or by his or her legal representative the \n\n- own expense, by a legal representative of his or her own choice; ( e ) shall be afforded facilities to examine in person or by his or her legal representative the witnesses called by the prosecution before the court, and to obtain the attendance and carry out the examination of witnesses to testify on his or her behalf before the court on the same conditions as those applying to witnesses called by the prosecution; and ( f ) shall be permitted to have without payment the assistance of an interpreter if he or she \n\n- the same conditions as those applying to witnesses called by the prosecution; and ( f ) shall be permitted to have without payment the assistance of an interpreter if he or she cannot understand the language used at the trial of the charge, and except with his or her own consent the trial shall not take place in his or her absence unless \n\nCopyright Government of Botswana\n\ncourt established or recognized by law. (2) Every person who is charged with a criminal offence - shall be presumed to be innocent until he or she is proved or has pleaded guilty;" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5349597433171744, + "doc_id": "4664be880f1b330bc07486435e95bbcf528fb905d6ffdd2a8d2d37dd10741cc1", + "edit_distance": 0.37703513281919454, + "f1_score": 0.952991452991453, + "meteor": 0.500353533974334, + "precision": 0.9737991266375546, + "pred_md": "25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio\n\n- (3) When a person is tried for any criminal offence, the accused person or any person authorized by him or her in that behalf shall, if he or she so requires and subject to payment of such reasonable fee as may be prescribed by law, be given within a reasonable time after judgment a copy for the use of the accused person of any record of the proceedings made by or on behalf of the court.\n- (4) No person shall be held to be guilty of a criminal offence on account of any act or omission that did not, at the time it took place, constitute such an offence, and no penalty shall be imposed for any criminal offence that is severer in degree or description than the maximum penalty that might have been imposed for that offence at the time when it was committed.\n- (5) No person who shows that he or she has been tried by a competent court for a criminal offence and either convicted or acquitted shall again be tried for that offence or for any other criminal offence of which he or she could have been convicted at the trial for that offence, save upon the order of a superior court in the course of appeal or review proceedings relating to the conviction or acquittal.\n- (6) No person shall be tried for a criminal offence if he or she shows that he or she has been pardoned for that offence.\n- (7) No person who is tried for a criminal offence shall be compelled to give evidence at the trial.\n- (8) No person shall be convicted of a criminal offence unless that offence is defined and the penalty therefor is prescribed in a written law:\n- Provided that nothing in this subsection shall prevent a court of record from punishing any person for contempt of itself notwithstanding that the act or omission constituting the contempt is not defined in a written law and the penalty therefor is not so prescribed.\n- (9) Any court or other adjudicating authority prescribed by law for the determination of the existence or extent of any civil right or obligation shall be established or recognized by law and shall be independent and impartial; and where proceedings for such a determination are instituted by any person before such a court or other adjudicating authority, the case shall be given a fair hearing within a reasonable time.\n- (10) Except with the agreement of all the parties thereto, all proceedings of every court and proceedings for the determination of the existence or extent of any civil right or obligation before any other adjudicating authority, including the announcement of the decision of the court or other authority, shall be held in public.\n- (11) Nothing in subsection (10) shall prevent the court or other adjudicating authority from excluding from the proceedings persons other than the parties thereto and their legal representatives to such extent as the court or other authority-\n- ( a ) may consider necessary or expedient in circumstances where publicity would prejudice the interests of justice or in interlocutory proceedings; or\n- ( b ) may be empowered by law to do so in the interests of defence, public safety, public order, public morality, the welfare of persons under the age of 18 years or the protection of the private lives of persons concerned in the proceedings.\n\n(12) Nothing contained in or done under the authority of any law shall be held to be inconsistent with or in contravention of-\n\n- ( a ) subsection (2)( a ) of this section to the extent that the law in question imposes upon any person charged with a criminal offence the burden of proving particular facts;\n- ( b ) subsection (2)( d ) or (2)( e ) of this section to the extent that the law in question prohibits legal representation before a subordinate court in proceedings for an offence under customary law (being proceedings against any person who, under that law, is subject to that law);\n\nCopyright Government of Botswana", + "recall": 0.9330543933054394, + "true_md": "- 25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n- 25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n(3) When a person is tried for any criminal offence, the accused person or any person authorized by him or her in thatbehalf shall, if he or she so requires and subject to payment of such reasonable fee as may be prescribed by law, be given within a reasonable time after judgment a copy for the use of the accused person of any record of the proceedings made by or on behalf of the court. (4) No person shall be held to be guilty of a criminal offence on account of any act or \n\non behalf of the court. (4) No person shall be held to be guilty of a criminal offence on account of any act or omission that did not, at the time it took place, constitute such an offence, and no penalty shall be imposed for any criminal offence that is severer in degree or description than the maximum penalty that might have been imposed for that offence at the time when it was committed. (5) No person who shows that he or she has been tried by a competent court for a criminal \n\npenalty that might have been imposed for that offence at the time when it was committed. (5) No person who shows that he or she has been tried by a competent court for a criminal offence and either convicted or ac quitted shall again be tried for that offence or for any other criminal offence of which he or she could have been convicted at the trial for that offence, save upon the order of a superior court in the course of appeal or review proceedings relating to th e conviction or acquittal. (6) No person shall be tried for a criminal offence if he or she shows that he or she has \n\nconviction or acquittal. (6) No person shall be tried for a criminal offence if he or she shows that he or she has been pardoned for that offence. (7) No person who is tried for a criminal offence shall be compelled to give evidence at the \n\nbeen pardoned for that offence. (7) No person who is tried for a criminal offence shall be compelled to give evidence at the trial. (8) No person shall be convicted of a criminal offence unless that offence is defined and \n\ntrial. (8) No person shall be convicted of a criminal offence unless that offence is defined and the penalty therefor is prescribed in a written law: Provided that nothing in this subsection shall prevent a court of record from punishing any \n\nthe penalty therefor is prescribed in a written law: Provided that nothing in this subsection shall prevent a court of record from punishing any person for contempt ofitself notwithstanding that the act or omission constituting the contempt is not defined in a written law and the penalty therefor is not so prescribed. (9) Any court or other adjudicating authority prescribed by law for the determination of the \n\nnot defined in a written law and the penalty therefor is not so prescribed. (9) Any court or other adjudicating authority prescribed by law for the determination of the existenceor extent of any civil right or obligation shall be established or recognized by law and shall be independent and impartial; and where proceedings for such a determination are instituted by any person before such a court or other adjudicating authority, t he case shall be given a fair hearing within a reasonable time. (10) Except with the agreement of all the parties thereto, all proceedings of every court \n\nhearing within a reasonable time. (10) Except with the agreement of all the parties thereto, all proceedings of every court and proceedings for the determination of the existence or extent of any civil right or obligation before any other adjudicating authority, including the announcement of the decision of the court or other authority, shall be held in public. (11) Nothing in subsection (10) shall prevent the court or other adjudicating authority from \n\nother authority, shall be held in public. (11) Nothing in subsection (10) shall prevent the court or other adjudicating authority from excluding from the proc eedings persons other than the parties thereto and their legal representatives to such extent as the court or other authority - ( a ) may consider necessary or expedient in circumstances where publicity would prejudice \n\nof the private lives of persons concerned in the proce edings. (12) Nothing contained in or done under the authority of any law shall be held to be inconsistent with or in contravention of - ( a ) subsection (2)( a ) of this section to the extent that the law in question imposes upon any \n\n- representatives to such extent as the court or other authority - ( a ) may consider necessary or expedient in circumstances where publicity would prejudice the interests of justice or in interloc utory proceedings; or ( b ) may be empowered by law to do so in the interests of defence, public safety, public \n\n- the interests of justice or in interloc utory proceedings; or ( b ) may be empowered by law to do so in the interests of defence, public safety, public order, public morality, the welfare of persons under the age of 18 years or the protection of the private lives of persons concerned in the proce edings. (12) Nothing contained in or done under the authority of any law shall be held to be \n\n- inconsistent with or in contravention of - ( a ) subsection (2)( a ) of this section to the extent that the law in question imposes upon any person charged with a cri minal offence the burden of proving particular facts; ( b ) subsection (2)( d ) or (2)( e ) of this section to the extent that the law in question prohibits \n\n- person charged with a cri minal offence the burden of proving particular facts; ( b ) subsection (2)( d ) or (2)( e ) of this section to the extent that the law in question prohibits legal representation before a subordinate court in proceedings for an offence under customary law (beingproceedings against any person who, under that law, is subject to that law); \n\nCopyright Government of Botswana" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.44076208492790026, + "doc_id": "162a6414bee78225ac2b72619226b616ed33e89d83eec414eb7809d726c38443", + "edit_distance": 0.5185185185185185, + "f1_score": 0.9736842105263158, + "meteor": 0.4495911157950748, + "precision": 0.9946236559139785, + "pred_md": "25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio\n\n- (1) There shall be an Advisory Committee on the Prerogative of Mercy which shall consist\n\nof-\n\n- ( a ) the Vice-President or a Minister appointed by the President by instrument in writing under his or her hand;\n- ( b ) the Attorney-General; and\n- ( c ) a person qualified to practise in Botswana as a medical practitioner, appointed by the President by instrument in writing under his or her hand.\n\n(2) A member of the Committee appointed under subsection (1)( a ) or ( c ) of this section shall hold his or her seat thereon for such period as may be specified in the instrument by which he or she was appointed:\n\nProvided that his or her seat shall become vacant-\n\n- (i) in the case of a person who, at the date of his or her appointment, was the Vice-President or a Minister, if he or she ceases to be the Vice-President or a Minister; or\n- (ii) if the President, by instrument in writing under his or her hand, so directs.\n- (3) The Committee shall not be summoned except by the authority of the President who shall, as far as is practicable, attend and preside at all meetings of the Committee, and, in the absence of the President, the member of the Committee appointed under subsection (1)( a ) of this section shall preside.\n- (4) The Committee may act notwithstanding any vacancy in its membership and its proceedings shall not be invalidated by the presence or participation of any person not entitled to be present at or to participate in those proceedings.\n- (5) Subject to the provisions of this section, the Committee may regulate its own procedure.\n\n## 55. Functions of Advisory Committee on Prerogative of Mercy\n\n(1) Where any person has been sentenced to death for any offence, the President shall cause a written report of the case from the trial judge, together with such other information derived from the record of the case or elsewhere as he or she may require, to be considered at a meeting of the Advisory Committee on the Prerogative of Mercy; and after obtaining the advice of the Committee he or she shall decide whether to exercise any of his or her powers under section 53 of this Constitution.\n\n- (2) The President may consult with the Committee before deciding whether to exercise any of his or her powers under the said section 53 in any case not falling within subsection (1) of this section.\n\n## 56. Constitution of offices\n\nSubject to the provisions of this Constitution and of any Act of Parliament, the powers of constituting and abolishing offices for Botswana shall vest in the President.\n\nCHAPTER V Parliament (ss 57-94) PART I Composition (ss 57-70)\n\n## 57. Parliament\n\nThere shall be a Parliament of Botswana which shall consist of the President and a National Assembly.\n\n## 58. Composition of National Assembly\n\n- (1) The President shall be ex-officio a member of the National Assembly, and shall be entitled to speak and to vote in all proceedings of the National Assembly.\n- (2) In addition to the President the National Assembly shall consist of-\n\nCopyright Government of Botswana", + "recall": 0.9536082474226805, + "true_md": "- 25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n- 25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n- ( b ) the Attorney-General; and ( c ) a person qualified to practise in Botswana as a medical practitioner, appointed by the President by instrument i n writing under his or her hand. (2) A member of the Committee appointed under subsection (1)( a ) or ( c ) of this section \n\n- under his or her hand; ( b ) the Attorney-General; and ( c ) a person qualified to practise in Botswana as a medical practitioner, appointed by the \n\n- of- ( a ) the Vice-President or a Minister appointed by the President by instrument in writing under his or her hand; ( b ) the Attorney-General; and \n\n- Provided that his or her seat shall become vacant - (i) in the case of a person who, at the date of his or her appointment, was the Vice-President or a Minister, if he or she ceases to be the Vice -President or a Minister; or (ii) if the President, by instrument in w riting under his or her hand, so directs.\n\n- Vice-President or a Minister, if he or she ceases to be the Vice -President or a Minister; or (ii) if the President, by instrument in w riting under his or her hand, so directs. (3) The Committee shall not be summoned except by the authority of the President who \n\n(1) There shall be an Advisory Committee on the Prerogative of Mercy which shall consist of- ( a ) the Vice-President or a Minister appointed by the President by instrument in writing \n\nPresident by instrument i n writing under his or her hand. (2) A member of the Committee appointed under subsection (1)( a ) or ( c ) of this section shall hold his or her seat thereon for such period as may be specified in the instrument by which he or she was appointed: Provided that his or her seat shall become vacant - \n\nhe or she was appointed: Provided that his or her seat shall become vacant - in the case of a person who, at the date of his or her appointment, was the \n\n(ii) if the President, by instrument in w riting under his or her hand, so directs. (3) The Committee shall not be summoned except by the authority of the President who shall, as far as is practicable, attend and preside at all meetings of the Committee, and, in the absence of the President, themember of the Committee appointed under subsection (1)( a ) of this section shall preside. (4) The Committee may act notwithstanding any vacancy in its membership and its \n\nsection shall preside. (4) The Committee may act notwithstanding any vacancy in its membership and its proceedings shall not be invalidated by the presence or participation of any person no t entitled to be present at or to participate in those proceedings. (5) Subject to the provisions of this section, the Committee may regulate its own \n\nbe present at or to participate in those proceedings. (5) Subject to the provisions of this section, the Committee may regulate its own procedure. 55. Functions of Advisory Committee on Prerogative of Mercy \n\n## procedure. 55. Functions of Advisory Committee on Prerogative of Mercy (1) Where any person has been sentenced to death for any offence, the President shall\n\n55. Functions of Advisory Committee on Prerogative of Mercy (1) Where any person has been sentenced to death for any offence, the President shall cause a written report of the case from the trial judge, together with such other information derived from the record of the case or elsewhere as he or she may require, to be considered at a meeting of the Advisory Committee on the Prerogative of Mercy; and after obtaining the advice of the Committee he or she shall decide whether to exercise any of his or her powers under section 53 of this Constitution. (2) The President may consult with the Committee before deciding whether to exercise \n\nthis Constitution. (2) The President may consult with the Committee before deciding whether to exercise any of his or her powers under the said section 53 in any case not falling within subsection (1) of this section. 56. Constitution of offices\n\n## this section. 56. Constitution of offices Subject to the provisions of this Constitution and\n\n## constituting and abolishing offices for Botswana shall vest in the President. CHAPTER V Parliament (ss 57-94)\n\n## CHAPTER V Parliament (ss 57-94) PART I\n\n## Parliament (ss 57-94) PART I Composition (ss 57-70)\n\n## PART I Composition (ss 57-70)\n\n## 57. Parliament There shall be a Parliament of Botswana which\n\n56. Constitution of offices Subject to the provisions of this Constitution and of any Act of Parliament, the powers of constituting and abolishing offices for Botswana shall vest in the President. CHAPTER V \n\n57. Parliament There shall be a Parliament of Botswana which shall consist of the President and a National Assembly. 58. Composition of National Assembly \n\n## National Assembly. 58. Composition of National Assembly (1) The President shall be ex-officio a member of the National Assembly, and shall be\n\n58. Composition of National Assembly (1) The President shall be ex-officio a member of the National Assembly, and shall be entitled to speak and to vote in all proceedings of the National Assembly. (2) In addition to the President the National Assembly shall consist of - \n\nCopyright Government of Botswana\n\nentitled to speak and to vote in all proceedings of the National Assembly. (2) In addition to the President the National Assembly shall consist of -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5635278229972898, + "doc_id": "2c1c15831215655687bf02f1bdb282dcaf74d359c5caf4c4e209fd41787da5df", + "edit_distance": 0.7193548387096774, + "f1_score": 0.9417721518987342, + "meteor": 0.4164574387155493, + "precision": 0.9946524064171123, + "pred_md": "25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio\n\n- (2) The other judges of the High Court shall be appointed by the President, acting in accordance with the advice of the Judicial Service Commission.\n- (3) A person shall not be qualified to be appointed as a judge of the High Court unless-\n- ( a ) he or she holds, or has held office, as a judge of a court having unlimited jurisdiction in civil and criminal matters in Botswana, in a Commonwealth country or in any country outside the Commonwealth that may be prescribed by Parliament or a court having jurisdiction in appeals from such a court; or\n- ( b ) he or she is qualified to practise as an advocate or attorney in such a court and has been qualified for not less than ten years to practise as an advocate or attorney in such a court;\n- ( c ) he or she is qualified to practise as an advocate or attorney and he or she has had the experience in the teaching of law in a recognised university for not less than ten years; or\n- ( d ) he or she is a Chief Magistrate who has held that office for not less than five years.\n\n(4) In computing, for the purposes of subsection (3) of this section, the period during which any person has been qualified to practise as an advocate or attorney any period during which he or she has held judicial office after becoming so qualified shall be included.\n\n- (5) If the office of Chief Justice is vacant or if the Chief Justice is for any reason unable to perform the functions of his or her office, then, until a person has been appointed to and has assumed the functions of that office or until the Chief Justice has resumed those functions, as the case may be, those functions shall be performed by such one of the judges of the High Court or such other person qualified for appointment as a judge of the High Court as the President may appoint for that purpose:\n\nProvided that-\n\n- (i) a person may be appointed under this subsection notwithstanding that he or she has attained the age of 70 years or such other age as may be prescribed for the purposes of section 97 of this Constitution;\n- (ii) a person appointed under this subsection, who is not a judge of the High Court, may, notwithstanding the assumption or resumption of the functions of the office of Chief Justice by the holder of that office, continue to act as a judge of the High Court for so long thereafter and to such extent as may be necessary to enable him or her to deliver judgment or to do any other thing in relation to proceedings that were commenced before him or her previously thereto.\n\n(6) If the office of any judge of the High Court is vacant, or if any such judge is appointed to act as Chief Justice, or is for any reason unable to perform the functions of his or her office, or if the President, acting after consultation with the Chief Justice, is satisfied that the state of business in the High Court requires that the number of judges of the court should be temporarily increased, the President, acting in accordance with the advice of the Judicial Service Commission, may appoint a person qualified for appointment as a judge of the High Court to act as a judge of that court:\n\nProvided that a person may be so appointed notwithstanding that he or she has attained the age of 70 years or such other age as may be prescribed for the purposes of section 88 of this Constitution.\n\n- (7) Any person appointed under subsection (6) of this section to act as a judge of the High Court shall, subject to the provisions of section 97(4) and (5) of this Constitution, continue to act for the period of his or her appointment or, if no such period is specified, until his or her appointment is revoked by the President, acting in accordance with the advice of the Judicial Service Commission:\n\nProvided that the President, acting in accordance with the advice of the Judicial Service Commission, may permit a person whose appointment to act as a judge of the High Court has expired or been revoked to continue to act as such a judge for such period as may be necessary\n\nCopyright Government of Botswana", + "recall": 0.8942307692307693, + "true_md": "- 25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n- 25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n(2) The other judges of the High Court shall be appointed by the President, acting in accordance with the advice of the Judicial Service Commission. (3) A person shall not be qualifie d to be appointed as a judge of the High Court unless - \n\naccordance with the advice of the Judicial Service Commission. (3) A person shall not be qualifie d to be appointed as a judge of the High Court unless - he or she holds, or has held office, as a judge of a court having unlimited jurisdiction in \n\n( d ) he or she is a Chief Magistrate who has held that office for not less than five years. (4) In computing, for the purposes of subsection (3) of this section, the period during which any person has been qualified t o practise as an advocate or attorney any period during which he or she has held judicial office after becoming so qualified shall be included. (5) If the office of Chief Justice is vacant or if the Chief Justice is for any reason u nable to \n\nor she has held judicial office after becoming so qualified shall be included. (5) If the office of Chief Justice is vacant or if the Chief Justice is for any reason u nable to perform the functions of his or her office, then, until a person has been appointed to and has assumed the functions of that office or until the Chief Justice has resumed those functions, as the case may be, those functions shall be performed by s uch one of the judges of the High Court or such other person qualified for appointment as a judge of the High Court as the President may appoint for that purpose: Provided that- \n\nappoint for that purpose: Provided that- a person may be appointed under this subsection notw\n\nhim or her previously thereto. (6) If the office of any judge of the High Court is vacant, or if any such judge is appointed to act as Chief Justice, or is for any reason unable to perform the functions of his or her office, or if the President, acting after consultation with the Chief Justice, is satisfied that the state of business in the High Court requires that the number of judg es of the court should be temporarily increased, the President, acting in accordance with the advice of the Judicial Service Commission, may appoint a person qualified for appointment as a judge of the High Court to act as a judge of that court: Provided that a person may be so appointed notwithstanding that he or she has attained \n\ncourt: Provided that a person may be so appointed notwithstanding that he or she has attained the age of 70 years or such other age as may be prescribed for the purposes of section 88 of this Constitution. (7) Any person appointedunder subsection (6) of this section to act as a judge of the High \n\nConstitution. (7) Any person appointedunder subsection (6) of this section to act as a judge of the High Court shall, subject to the provisions of section 97(4) and (5) of this Constitution, continue to act for the period of his or her appointment or, if no such period is specified, until his or her appointment is revoked by the President, acting in accordance with the advice of the Judicial Service Commission: Provided that the President, acting in accordance with the advice of the Judicial Service \n\nService Commission: Provided that the President, acting in accordance with the advice of the Judicial Service Commission, may permit a person whose appoin tment to act as a judge of the High Court has expired or been revoked to continue to act as such a judge for such period as may be necessary \n\n- (3) A person shall not be qualifie d to be appointed as a judge of the High Court unless - ( a ) he or she holds, or has held office, as a judge of a court having unlimited jurisdiction in civil and criminal matters in Botswana, in a Commonwealth country or in any country outside theCommonwealth that may be prescribed by Parliament or a court having jurisdiction in appeals from such a court; or ( b ) he or she is qualified to practise as an advocate or attorney in such a court and has been \n\n- jurisdiction in appeals from such a court; or ( b ) he or she is qualified to practise as an advocate or attorney in such a court and has been qualified for not less tha n ten years to practise as an advocate or attorney in such a court; ( c ) he or she is qualified to practise as an advocate or attorney and he or she has had the \n\n- qualified for not less tha n ten years to practise as an advocate or attorney in such a court; ( c ) he or she is qualified to practise as an advocate or attorney and he or she has had the experience in the teaching of law in a recognised university for not less t han ten years; or ( d ) he or she is a Chief Magistrate who has held that office for not less than five years.\n\n- experience in the teaching of law in a recognised university for not less t han ten years; or ( d ) he or she is a Chief Magistrate who has held that office for not less than five years. (4) In computing, for the purposes of subsection (3) of this section, the period during which \n\n- Provided that- (i) a person may be appointed under this subsection notw ithstanding that he or she has attained the age of 70 years or such other age as may be prescribed for the purposes of section 97 of this Constitution; (ii) a person appointed under this subsection, who is not a judge of the High C ourt, may, \n\n- section 97 of this Constitution; (ii) a person appointed under this subsection, who is not a judge of the High C ourt, may, notwithstanding the assumption or resumption of the functions of the office of Chief Justice by the holder of that office, continue to act as a judge of the High Court for so long thereafter and to such extent as may be necessary to enable him o r her to deliver judgment or to do any other thing in relation to proceedings that were commenced before him or her previously thereto. (6) If the office of any judge of the High Court is vacant, or if any such judge is appointed to \n\nCopyright Government of Botswana" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4550606441146288, + "doc_id": "62a3e68960caca9b0b714e5c573eec6340bbdf111cb9fbe759c0e0741815ec83", + "edit_distance": 0.586038961038961, + "f1_score": 0.9803063457330417, + "meteor": 0.4349699968432859, + "precision": 0.9955555555555555, + "pred_md": "25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio\n\n- ( a ) is, by virtue of his or her own act, under any acknowledgement of allegiance, obedience or adherence to a foreign power or state;\n- ( b ) has been declared insolvent or adjudged or otherwise declared bankrupt under any law in force in any part of the Commonwealth or any country with a comparable legal system and has not been discharged, or has made a composition with his or her creditors and has not paid his or her debts in full;\n- ( c ) is certified insane or otherwise adjudged or declared to be of unsound mind under any law for the time being in force in Botswana;\n- ( d ) subject to such exceptions as may be prescribed by Parliament, holds any public office, or is acting in any public office by virtue of a contract of service expressed to continue for a period exceeding six months;\n- ( e ) is under sentence of death imposed on him or her by a court in any part of the Commonwealth or any country with a comparable legal system, or is under a sentence of imprisonment (by whatever name called) exceeding six months imposed on him or her by such a court or substituted by a competent authority for some other sentence imposed on him or her by such a court;\n- ( ) f holds, or is acting in,any office the functions of which involve any responsibility for, or in connection with, the conduct of any elections to the National Assembly or the compilation or revision of any electoral register for the purposes of such elections; or\n- ( g ) is disqualified for election to the National Assembly by virtue of provision made in pursuance of section 62 (2) of this Constitution.\n\n(3) For the purposes of this section, two or more terms of imprisonment that are required to be served consecutively shall be regarded as a single term of imprisonment for the aggregate period of those terms, and no account shall be taken of a sentence of imprisonment imposed as an alternative to or in default of the payment of a fine.\n\n- (4) A Member of the Ntlo ya Dikgosi shall not, while he or she is such a Member, participate in party politics, but active participation in politics prior to being a Member of the Ntlo ya Dikgosi shall not bar any person from being such a Member.\n\n## 80. Oath of allegiance\n\nEvery Member of the Ntlo ya Dikgosi shall, before taking his or her seat therein, take and subscribe before the Ntlo ya Dikgosi the oath of allegiance.\n\n## 81. Secretary to Ntlo ya Dikgosi\n\nThere shall be a Secretary to the Ntlo ya Dikgosi whose office shall be an office in the public service.\n\n## 82. Tenure of office of Members of Ntlo ya Dikgosi\n\nshall vacate his or her seat in the Ntlo ya Dikgosi\n\n- (1) A Member of the Ntlo ya Dikgosi -\n- ( a ) upon expiration of a period of five years from the date upon which he or she takes the oath of allegiance under section 80 of this Constitution;\n- ( b ) if, having been designated or selected to the Ntlo ya Dikgosi as such, he or she ceases to be a person for the time being performing the functions of the office of Kgosi ;\n- ( c ) if he or she ceases to be qualified for membership of the Ntlo ya Dikgosi in terms of section 79;\n- ( d ) if he or she participates in party politics; or\n- ( e ) upon the dissolution of Parliament,\n\nwhichever occurs first.\n\n(2) A member of the Ntlo ya Dikgosi shall be eligible for reselection, redesignation or reappointment, as the case may be, to the Ntlo ya Dikgosi .\n\n83. Rules of Procedure of Ntlo ya Dikgosi\n\nCopyright Government of Botswana", + "recall": 0.9655172413793104, + "true_md": "- 25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n- 25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n- ( a ) is, by virtue of his or her own act, under any acknowledgement of allegiance, obedience or adherence to a foreign power or state; ( b ) has been declaredinsolvent or adjudged or otherwise declared bankrupt under any law \n\n- or adherence to a foreign power or state; ( b ) has been declaredinsolvent or adjudged or otherwise declared bankrupt under any law in force in any part of the Commonwealth or any country with a comparable legal system and has not been discharged, or has made a composition with his or her creditors and has not paid hisor her debts in full; ( c ) is certified insane or otherwise adjudged or declared to be of unsound mind under any \n\n- has not paid hisor her debts in full; ( c ) is certified insane or otherwise adjudged or declared to be of unsound mind under any law for the time being in force in Botswana; ( d ) subject to such exceptions as may be prescribed by Parliament, holds any public office, \n\n- law for the time being in force in Botswana; ( d ) subject to such exceptions as may be prescribed by Parliament, holds any public office, or is acting in any public office by virtue of a contract of service expressed to continue for a period exceeding six months; ( e ) is under sentence of death imposed on him or her by a court in any part of the \n\n- a period exceeding six months; ( e ) is under sentence of death imposed on him or her by a court in any part of the Commonwealth or any country with a comparable lega l system, or is under a sentence of imprisonment (by whatever name called) exceeding six months imposed on him or her by such a court or substituted by a competent authority for some other sentence imposed on him or her by such a court; ( f ) holds, or is acting in,any office the functions of which involve any responsibility for, or in \n\n- on him or her by such a court; ( f ) holds, or is acting in,any office the functions of which involve any responsibility for, or in connection with, the conduct of any elections to the National Assembly or the compilation or revision of any electoral register for the purposes of such elections; or ( g ) is disqualified for election to the National Assembly by virtue of provision made in \n\n- or revision of any electoral register for the purposes of such elections; or ( g ) is disqualified for election to the National Assembly by virtue of provision made in pursuance of section 62 (2) of this Constitution. (3) For the purposes of this section, two or more terms of imprisonment that are required to \n\n- shall vacate his or her seat in the Ntlo ya Dikgosi — ( a ) upon expiration of a period of five years from the date upon which he or she takes the oath of allegiance under section 80 of this Constitution; ( b ) if, having been designated or selected to the Ntlo ya Dikgosi as such, he or she ceases to \n\n- oath of allegiance under section 80 of this Constitution; ( b ) if, having been designated or selected to the Ntlo ya Dikgosi as such, he or she ceases to be a person for the time being performing the functions o f the office of Kgosi ; ( c ) if he or she ceases to be qualified for membership of the Ntlo ya Dikgosi in terms of \n\n- be a person for the time being performing the functions o f the office of Kgosi ; ( c ) if he or she ceases to be qualified for membership of the Ntlo ya Dikgosi in terms of section 79; ( d ) if he or she participates in party politics; or\n\n- section 79; ( d ) if he or she participates in party politics; or ( e ) upon the dissolution of Parliament,\n\n- ( d ) if he or she participates in party politics; or ( e ) upon the dissolution of Parliament, whichever occurs first.\n\npursuance of section 62 (2) of this Constitution. (3) For the purposes of this section, two or more terms of imprisonment that are required to be served consecutively shallbe regarded as a single term of imprisonment for the aggregate period of those terms, and no account shall be taken of a sentence of imprisonment imposed as an alternative to or in default of the payment of a fine. (4) A Member of the Ntlo ya Dikgosi shall not, while he or she is such a Member, \n\nan alternative to or in default of the payment of a fine. (4) A Member of the Ntlo ya Dikgosi shall not, while he or she is such a Member, participate in party politics, but active participation in politics prior to being a Member of the Ntlo ya Dikgosi shall not bar any person from being such a Member. 80. Oath of allegiance \n\n80. Oath of allegiance Every Memberof the Ntlo ya Dikgosi shall, before taking his or her seat therein, take and subscribe before the Ntlo ya Dikgosi the oath of allegiance. 81. Secretary to Ntlo ya Dikgosi\n\n## Dikgosi shall not bar any person from being such a Member. 80. Oath of allegiance Every Memberof the\n\n( e ) upon the dissolution of Parliament, whichever occurs first. (2) A member of the \n\nwhichever occurs first. (2) A member of the Ntlo ya Dikgosi shall be eligible for reselection, redesignation or reappointment, as the case may be, to the Ntlo ya Dikgosi . 83. Rules of Procedure of Ntlo ya Dikgosi\n\n## reappointment, as the case may be, to the Ntlo ya Dikgosi 83. Rules of Procedure of Ntlo ya Dikgosi\n\n## subscribe before the Ntlo ya Dikgosi the oath of allegiance. 81. Secretary to Ntlo ya Dikgosi There shall be a Secretary to the\n\n81. Secretary to Ntlo ya Dikgosi There shall be a Secretary to the Ntlo ya Dikgosi whose office shallbe an office in the public service. 82. Tenure of office of Members of Ntlo ya Dikgosi (1) A Member of the Ntlo ya Dikgosi\n\nCopyright Government of Botswana\n\npublic service. 82. Tenure of office of Members of Ntlo ya Dikgosi (1) A Member of the Ntlo ya Dikgosi shall vacate his or her seat in the Ntlo ya Dikgosi — ( a ) upon expiration of a period of five years from the date upon which he or she takes the" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.3755089991352298, + "doc_id": "c6bdc57f3d31deda7ac6d85c841bb25c264419db8564454b3dc100bd9ee2c748", + "edit_distance": 0.5901386748844376, + "f1_score": 0.9528795811518326, + "meteor": 0.33476636042938923, + "precision": 0.978494623655914, + "pred_md": "25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio\n\n- ( b ) the Vice-President is by reason of physical or mental infirmity unable to discharge the functions of his or her office,\n\nshall, in respect of any period for which it is in force, be conclusive and shall not be questioned in any court:\n\nProvided that any such certificate as is referred to in paragraph ( a ) of this subsection shall cease to have effect if the President notifies any person under subsection (4) of this section that he or she is about to resume the functions of the office of President.\n\n## 37. Oath of President\n\nA person assuming the office of President shall, before entering upon the duties of that office, take and subscribe such oaths as may be prescribed by Parliament.\n\n## 38. Returning officer at elections of President\n\n(1) The Chief Justice shall be the returning officer for the purposes of elections to the office of President.\n\n(2) Any question which may arise as to whether-\n\n- ( a ) any provision of this Constitution or any law relating to the election of a President under section 32 or 35 of this Constitution has been complied with; or\n- ( b ) any person has been validly elected as President under those sections,\n\nshall be referred to and determined by the returning officer whose decision shall not be questioned in any court.\n\n## 39. Vice President\n\n(1) There shall be a Vice-President who shall be appointed by the President from among the Elected Members of the National Assembly who are citizens of Botswana by birth or descent, which appointment shall be endorsed by the said Elected Members.\n\n(2) The Vice-President shall continue in office until a person elected at the next election of President under section 32 or 35 of this Constitution assumes office:\n\nProvided that the office of Vice-President shall become vacant-\n\n- (i) if the appointment of the holder of the office is revoked by the President; or\n- (ii) if the holder of the office ceases to be a Member of the National Assembly for any other reason than a dissolution of Parliament.\n\n(3) The Vice-President shall not enter upon the duties of his or her office unless he or she has taken and subscribed the oath of allegiance and such oath for the due execution of his or her office as may be prescribed by Parliament.\n\n(4) If the Vice-President is absent from Botswana or is incapable by reason of illness or any other cause of discharging the functions of his or her office, the President may appoint a person, from among the Members of the Assembly, to perform the functions of the office of Vice-President and any person so appointed may discharge those functions accordingly:\n\nProvided that a person appointed under this subsection shall cease to perform the functions of the office of Vice-President-\n\n- (i) if his or her appointment is revoked by the President;\n- (ii) if he or she ceases to be a Member of the Assembly otherwise than by reason of a dissolution of Parliament;\n- (iii) upon the assumption by any person of the office of President; or\n- (iv) upon the President giving him or her notice that the Vice-President is about to resume his or her functions.\n\n(5) Where the Vice-President is performing the functions of the office of President in accordance with section 35 or 36 of this Constitution he or she may appoint a person, from among the Members of the Assembly, to perform the functions of the office of Vice-President and any person so appointed may discharge those functions accordingly:\n\nCopyright Government of Botswana", + "recall": 0.9285714285714286, + "true_md": "25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\nfunctions of his or her office, shall, in respect of any period for which it is in force, be conclusive and shall not be questioned in any court: Provided that any such certificate as is referred to in paragraph ( a ) of this subsection shall \n\nany court: Provided that any such certificate as is referred to in paragraph ( a ) of this subsection shall cease to have effect if the President notifies any pe rson under subsection (4) of this section that he or she is about to resume the functions of the office of President. 37. Oath of President \n\n37. Oath of President A person assuming the office of President shall, before entering upon the duties of that office, take and subscribe such oaths as may be prescribed by Parliament. 38. Returning officer at elections of President \n\n38. Returning officer at elections of President (1) The Chief Justice shall be the returning officer for the purposes of elections to the office of President. (2) Any question which may arise as to whether - \n\nof President. (2) Any question which may arise as to whether - any provision of this Constitution or any law relating to the election of a President under \n\n( b ) any person has been validly elected as President under those s ections, shall be referred to and determined by the returning officer whose decision shall not be questioned in any court. 39. Vice President\n\n39. Vice President (1) There shall be a Vice-President who shall be appointed by the President from among the Elected Members of the National Assembly who are citizens of Botswana by birth or descent, which appointment shall be endorsed by the said Elected Members. (2) The Vice-President shall continue in office until a person elected at the next electi on of \n\nwhich appointment shall be endorsed by the said Elected Members. (2) The Vice-President shall continue in office until a person elected at the next electi on of President under section 32 or 35 of this Constitution assumes office: Provided that the office of Vice -President shall become vacant - \n\nPresident under section 32 or 35 of this Constitution assumes office: Provided that the office of Vice -President shall become vacant - if the appointment of the holder of the office is revoked by the President; or\n\nreason than a dissolution of Parliament. (3) The Vice-President shall not enter upon the duties of his or her office unless he or she has taken and subscribed the oath of allegiance and such oath for the due execution of his or her office as may be prescribed by Parliament. (4) If the Vice-President is absent from Botswana or is incapable by reason of illness or \n\noffice as may be prescribed by Parliament. (4) If the Vice-President is absent from Botswana or is incapable by reason of illness or any other cause of discharging the functions of his or her office, the President may appoint a person, from among the Members of the Assembly, to perform the functions of the office of Vice-President and any person so appointed may discharge those functions accordingly: Provided that a person appointed under this subsection shall ceas e to perform the \n\nVice-President and any person so appointed may discharge those functions accordingly: Provided that a person appointed under this subsection shall ceas e to perform the functions of the office of Vice -President- (i) if his or her appointment is revoked by the President;\n\nor her functions. (5) Where the Vice-President is performing the functions of the office of President in accordance with section 35 or 36 of this Constitution he or she may appoint a person, from among the Members of the Assembly, to perform the functions of the office of Vice -President and any person so appointed may discharge those functions accordingly:\n\n- ( b ) the Vice-President is by reason of physical or mental infirmity unable to discharge the functions of his or her office, shall, in respect of any period for which it is in force, be conclusive and shall not be questioned in \n\n- (2) Any question which may arise as to whether - ( a ) any provision of this Constitution or any law relating to the election of a President under section 32 or 35 of this Constitution has been complied with; or ( b ) any person has been validly elected as President under those s ections, \n\n- section 32 or 35 of this Constitution has been complied with; or ( b ) any person has been validly elected as President under those s ections, shall be referred to and determined by the returning officer whose decision shall not be \n\n- Provided that the office of Vice -President shall become vacant - (i) if the appointment of the holder of the office is revoked by the President; or (ii) if the holder of the offi ce ceases to be a Member of the National Assembly for any other \n\n- (i) if the appointment of the holder of the office is revoked by the President; or (ii) if the holder of the offi ce ceases to be a Member of the National Assembly for any other reason than a dissolution of Parliament. (3) The Vice-President shall not enter upon the duties of his or her office unless he or she \n\n- functions of the office of Vice -President- (i) if his or her appointment is revoked by the President; (ii) if he or she ceases to be a Member of the Assembly otherwise than by reason of a \n\n- (i) if his or her appointment is revoked by the President; (ii) if he or she ceases to be a Member of the Assembly otherwise than by reason of a dissolution of Parliament; (iii) upon the assumption by any person of the office of President; or\n\n- dissolution of Parliament; (iii) upon the assumption by any person of the office of President; or (iv) upon the President giving him or her notice that the Vice -President is about to resume his \n\n- (iii) upon the assumption by any person of the office of President; or (iv) upon the President giving him or her notice that the Vice -President is about to resume his or her functions. (5) Where the Vice-President is performing the functions of the office of President in \n\nCopyright Government of Botswana\n\n## questioned in any court. 39. Vice President (1) There shall be a Vice-President who shall be appointed by the President from\n\n## office, take and subscribe such oaths as may be prescribed by Parliament. 38. Returning officer at elections of President (1) The Chief Justice shall be the returning officer for the purposes of elections to the office\n\n## he or she is about to resume the functions of the office of President. 37. Oath of President A person assuming the office of President shall, before entering upon the duties of that" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5359062141589955, + "doc_id": "ce584f2aeb45f7f75d1ae76d9c528ae416369ac3203390d3940266c2fef2ec9a", + "edit_distance": 0.7021103896103896, + "f1_score": 0.9646569646569647, + "meteor": 0.42867288507912027, + "precision": 0.9872340425531915, + "pred_md": "25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio\n\n- ( c ) subsection (2)( c ) of this section to the extent that the law in question imposes reasonable conditions that must be satisfied if witnesses called to testify on behalf of an accused person are to be paid their expenses out of public funds;\n- ( d ) subsection (5) of this section to the extent that the law in question authorizes a court to try a member of a disciplined force for a criminal offence notwithstanding any trial and conviction or acquittal of that member under the disciplinary law of that force, so, however, that any court so trying such a member and convicting him or her shall in sentencing him or her to any punishment take into account any punishment awarded him or her under that disciplinary law;\n- ( e ) subsection (8) of this section to the extent that the law in question authorizes a court to convict a person of a criminal offence under any customary law to which, by virtue of that law, such person is subject.\n- (13) In the case of any person who is held in lawful detention, the provisions of subsection (1), subsection (2)( d ) and ( e ) and subsection (3) of this section shall not apply in relation to his or her trial for a criminal offence under the law regulating the discipline of persons held in such detention.\n- (14) In this section \"criminal offence\" means a criminal offence under the law in force in Botswana.\n\n## 11. Protection of freedom of conscience\n\n- (1) Except with his or her own consent, no person shall be hindered in the enjoyment of his or her freedom of conscience, and for the purposes of this section the said freedom includes freedom of thought and of religion, freedom to change his or her religion or belief, and freedom, either alone or in community with others, and both in public and in private, to manifest and propagate his or her religion or belief in worship, teaching, practice and observance.\n- (2) Every religious community shall be entitled, at its own expense, to establish and maintain places of education and to manage any place of education which it wholly maintains; and no such community shall be prevented from providing religious instruction for persons of that community in the course of any education provided at any place of education which it wholly maintains or in the course of any education which it otherwise provides.\n- (3) Except with his or her own consent (or, if he or she is a minor, the consent of his or her guardian) no person attending any place of education shall be required to receive religious instruction or to take part in or attend any religious ceremony or observance if that instruction, ceremony or observance relates to a religion other than his or her own.\n- (4) No person shall be compelled to take any oath which is contrary to his or her religion or belief or to take any oath in a manner which is contrary to his or her religion or belief.\n- (5) Nothing contained in or done under the authority of any law shall be held to be inconsistent with or in contravention of this section to the extent that the law in question makes provision which is reasonably required-\n- ( a ) in the interests of defence, public safety, public order, public morality or public health; or\n- ( b ) for the purpose of protecting the rights and freedoms of other persons, including the right to observe and practise any religion without the unsolicited intervention of members of any other religion,\n\nand except so far as that provision or, as the case may be, the thing done under the authority thereof is shown not to be reasonably justifiable in a democratic society.\n\n## 12. Protection of freedom of expression\n\n(1) Except with his or her own consent, no person shall be hindered in the enjoyment of his or her freedom of expression, that is to say, freedom to hold opinions without interference, freedom to receive ideas and information without interference, freedom to communicate ideas\n\nCopyright Government of Botswana", + "recall": 0.943089430894309, + "true_md": "25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\nlaw, such person is subject. (13) In the case of any person who is held in lawful detention, the provisions of subsection (1), subsection (2)( d ) and ( e ) and subsection (3) of this section shall not apply in relation to his or her trial for a criminal offence under the law regulating the discip line of persons held in such detention. (14) In this section \"criminal offence\" means a criminal offence under the law in force in \n\ndetention. (14) In this section \"criminal offence\" means a criminal offence under the law in force in Botswana. 11. Protection of freedom of conscience \n\n11. Protection of freedom of conscience (1) Except with his or her own consent, no person shall be hindered in the enjoyment of his or her freedom of conscience, and for the purposes of this section the said freedom includes freedom of thought and of religion, freedom to change his or her religion or belief, and freedom, either alone or in community wit h others, and both in public and in private, to manifest and propagate his or her religion or belief in worship, teaching, practice and observance. (2) Every religious community shall be entitled, at its own expense, to establish and \n\npropagate his or her religion or belief in worship, teaching, practice and observance. (2) Every religious community shall be entitled, at its own expense, to establish and maintain places of education and to manage any place of education which it wholly maintains; and no such community shall be prevented from providing religious instruction for persons of that community in the course of any education provided at any place of education which it w holly maintains or in the course of any education which it otherwise provides. (3) Except with his or her own consent (or, if he or she is a minor, the consent of his or her \n\nmaintains or in the course of any education which it otherwise provides. (3) Except with his or her own consent (or, if he or she is a minor, the consent of his or her guardian) no person attending any place of education shall be required to receive religious instruction or to take part in or attend any religious ceremony or observance if that instruction, ceremony or observance relates to a religion other than his or her own. (4) No person shall be compelled to take any oath which is contrary to hi s or her religion or \n\nceremony or observance relates to a religion other than his or her own. (4) No person shall be compelled to take any oath which is contrary to hi s or her religion or belief or to take any oath in a manner which is contrary to his or her religion or belief. (5) Nothing contained in or done under the authority of any law shall be held to be \n\nbelief or to take any oath in a manner which is contrary to his or her religion or belief. (5) Nothing contained in or done under the authority of any law shall be held to be inconsistent with or in contravention of this section to th e extent that the law in question makes provision which is reasonably required - ( a ) in the interests of defence, public safety, public order, public morality or public health; or\n\nany other religion, and except so far as that provision or, as the case may be, the thing done under the authority thereof is shown not to be reaso nably justifiable in a democratic society. 12. Protection of freedom of expression \n\n12. Protection of freedom of expression (1) Except with his or her own consent, no person shall be hindered in the enjoyment of his or her freedom of expression, that is to say, freedom to hold opin ions without interference, freedom to receive ideas and information without interference, freedom to communicate ideas \n\n- provision which is reasonably required - ( a ) in the interests of defence, public safety, public order, public morality or public health; or ( b ) for the purpose of protecting the rights and freedoms of other persons, including the right \n\n- ( a ) in the interests of defence, public safety, public order, public morality or public health; or ( b ) for the purpose of protecting the rights and freedoms of other persons, including the right to observe and practise any religion without the unsolicited intervention of members of any other religion, and except so far as that provision or, as the case may be, the thing done under the authority \n\n- ( c ) subsection (2)( c ) of this section to the extent that the law in question imposes reasonable conditions that must be satisfied if witnesses called to testify on behalf of an accused person are to be paid their expenses out of public funds; ( d ) subsection (5) of this section to the extent that the law in question authorizes a court to \n\n- person are to be paid their expenses out of public funds; ( d ) subsection (5) of this section to the extent that the law in question authorizes a court to try a member of a disciplined force for a criminal offence notwithstanding any trial and conviction or acquittal of that member under the disciplinary law of that force, so, however, that any court so trying such a member and convicting him or her shall in sentencing him or her to any punishment take into account any punishment awarded him or herunder that disciplinary law; ( e ) subsection (8) of this section to the extent that the law in question authorizes a court to \n\n- or herunder that disciplinary law; ( e ) subsection (8) of this section to the extent that the law in question authorizes a court to convict a person of a criminal offence under any customary law to which, by virtue of that law, such person is subject. (13) In the case of any person who is held in lawful detention, the provisions of subsection \n\n## Botswana. 11. Protection of freedom of conscience (1) Except with his or her own consent, no person shall be\n\n## thereof is shown not to be reaso nably justifiable in a democratic society. 12. Protection of freedom of expression (1) Except with his or her own consent, no person shall be hindered in the enjoyment of his\n\nCopyright Government of Botswana" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.37774898459105244, + "doc_id": "8057dc5f18325a68be659527aa93048a062811b050302554440c750432fab2cc", + "edit_distance": 0.522887323943662, + "f1_score": 0.971830985915493, + "meteor": 0.5007691696890975, + "precision": 0.9857142857142858, + "pred_md": "## 25. Staff\n\n## 26. Class-child ratio\n\nCopyright Government of Botswana\n\n## CHAPTER VII\n\n## The Public Service\n\n- 108. Power to specify qualifications for certain offices\n- 109. Public Service Commission\n- 110. Appointment, etc., of public officers\n- 111. Appeals to President\n- 112. Powers of President in relation to certain public offices\n- 113. Tenure of office of Director of Public Prosecutions\n- 114. Tenure of office of Auditor-General\n- 115. Pensions laws and protection of pensions rights\n- 116. Power of Commissions in relation to pensions, etc.\n\n## CHAPTER VIII\n\n## Finance\n\n- 117. Consolidated Fund\n- 118. Withdrawals from Consolidated Fund or other public funds\n- 119. Authorization of expenditure\n- 120. Authorization of expenditure in advance of appropriation\n- 121. Contingencies Fund\n- 122. Remuneration of certain officers\n- 123. Public debt\n- 124. Auditor-General\n\n## CHAPTER IX\n\nMiscellaneous\n\n- 125. Resignations\n- 126. Reappointments and concurrent appointments\n- 127. Interpretation\n\nFirst Schedule - Election of Specially Elected Members of the National Assembly Second Schedule - Division of Districts into regions for the purpose of selecting Members of Ntlo ya Dikgosi\n\nL.N. 83, 1966,\n\nAct 30, 1969,\n\nAct 43, 1969,\n\nAct 25, 1970,\n\nAct 28, 1972,\n\nAct 24, 1973,\n\nAct 28, 1978,\n\nS.I. 25, 1980,\n\nAct 32, 1982,\n\nAct 1, 1983,\n\nAct 22, 1987,\n\nS.I. 37, 1991,\n\nAct 27, 1992,\n\nS.I. 51, 1993,\n\nS.I. 119, 1993,\n\nAct 16, 1997,\n\nAct 18, 1997,", + "recall": 0.9583333333333334, + "true_md": "- 25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n- 25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n- The Public Service 108. Power to specify qualifications for certain offices 109. Public Service Commission \n\n- 108. Power to specify qualifications for certain offices 109. Public Service Commission 110. Appointment, etc., of public officers\n\n- 109. Public Service Commission 110. Appointment, etc., of public officers 111. Appeals to President \n\n- 110. Appointment, etc., of public officers 111. Appeals to President 112. Powers of President in relation to certain public offices\n\n- 111. Appeals to President 112. Powers of President in relation to certain public offices 113. Tenure of office of Director of Public Prosecutions\n\n- 112. Powers of President in relation to certain public offices 113. Tenure of office of Director of Public Prosecutions 114. Tenure of office of Auditor -General \n\n- 113. Tenure of office of Director of Public Prosecutions 114. Tenure of office of Auditor -General 115. Pensions laws and protection ofpensions rights \n\n- 114. Tenure of office of Auditor -General 115. Pensions laws and protection ofpensions rights 116. Power of Commissions in relation to pensions, etc.\n\n- 115. Pensions laws and protection ofpensions rights 116. Power of Commissions in relation to pensions, etc.\n\n- 117. Consolidated Fund 118. Withdrawals from Consolidated Fund or other public funds\n\n- 117. Consolidated Fund 118. Withdrawals from Consolidated Fund or other public funds 119. Authorization of expenditure\n\n- 118. Withdrawals from Consolidated Fund or other public funds 119. Authorization of expenditure 120. Authorization of expenditure in a\n\n- 119. Authorization of expenditure 120. Authorization of expenditure in a dvance of appropriation 121. Contingencies Fund \n\n- 120. Authorization of expenditure in a 121. Contingencies Fund 122. Remuneration of certain officers\n\n- 121. Contingencies Fund 122. Remuneration of certain officers 123. Public debt \n\n- 122. Remuneration of certain officers 123. Public debt 124. Auditor-General \n\n- 123. Public debt 124. Auditor-General \n\n- 125. Resignations 126. Reappointments and concurrent appointments\n\n- 125. Resignations 126. Reappointments and concurrent appointments 127. Interpretation \n\n- 126. Reappointments and concurrent appointments 127. Interpretation \n\nFirst Schedule - Election of Specially Elected Members of the National Assembly Second Schedule - Division of Districts into regions for the purpose of selecting Members of Ntlo ya Dikgosi\n\nL.N. 83, 1966, Act 30, 1969, Act 43, 1969, Act 25, 1970, Act 28, 1972, Act24, 1973, Act 28, 1978, S.I. 25, 1980, Act 32, 1982, Act 1, 1983, Act 22, 1987, S.I. 37, 1991, Act 27, 1992, S.I. 51, 1993, S.I. 119, 1993, Act 16, 1997, Act 18, 1997, \n\nCopyright Government of Botswana\n\n## CHAPTER VII The Public Service\n\n## CHAPTER VII The Public Service Power to specify qualifications for certain offices\n\n## CHAPTER VIII Finance\n\n## CHAPTER VIII Finance\n\n## CHAPTER IX Miscellaneous\n\n## CHAPTER IX Miscellaneous" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4728920416158737, + "doc_id": "582841d567288b0c1d708644dc427b41171214e6af299399ca0a4e4965b4c00e", + "edit_distance": 0.4356120826709062, + "f1_score": 0.9891540130151845, + "meteor": 0.4554556869688432, + "precision": 0.9956331877729258, + "pred_md": "25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio\n\nSubject to the provisions of this Constitution, the Ntlo ya Dikgosi may, subject to the approval of the President, make rules regulating its own procedure and in particular, and without prejudice to the generality of the foregoing power, make rules for all or any of the following matter-\n\n- ( a ) the appointment or election and tenure of office of a Chairman of the Ntlo ya Dikgosi ;\n- ( b ) the time and place at which the Ntlo ya Dikgosi shall meet;\n- ( c ) the manner in which the views of the Ntlo ya Dikgosi shall be recorded and, if necessary, expressed to a Minister, the National Assembly, or to any other person or body;\n- ( d ) the regulation and orderly conduct of the proceedings of the Ntlo ya Dikgosi ;\n\n## ( e ) ...... 84. Ntlo ya Dikgosi may transact business notwithstanding vacancies\n\nThe Ntlo ya Dikgosi shall not be disqualified for the transaction of business by reason of any vacancy among the Members thereof including any vacancy not filled when the Ntlo ya Dikgosi is first constituted or is reconstituted at any time; and any proceedings therein shall be valid notwithstanding that some person who was not entitled to do so sat or voted in the Ntlo ya Dikgosi or otherwise took part in the proceedings.\n\n## 85. Functions of Ntlo ya Dikgosi\n\n- (1) The Ntlo ya Dikgosi shall consider the copy of any Bill which has been referred to it under the provisions of section 88(2) of this Constitution and the Ntlo ya Dikgosi shall be entitled to submit resolutions thereon to the National Assembly.\n- (2) Any resolution which has been submitted to the National Assembly in accordance with the last foregoing subsection shall forthwith be laid before the Assembly by the Clerk of the Assembly.\n- (3) Any Minister who is responsible for a Bill such as is referred to in subsection (1) of this section, or his or her representative, may attend the proceedings of the Ntlo ya Dikgosi when the copy of the Bill is being considered.\n- (4) Any Minister may consult the Ntlo ya Dikgosi in respect of any matter on which he or she desires to obtain the opinion of the Ntlo ya Dikgosi , and for that purpose the Minister or his or her representative may attend the proceedings of the Ntlo ya Dikgosi .\n- (5) The Ntlo ya Dikgosi shall be entitled to discuss any matter within the executive or legislative authority of Botswana of which it considers it is desirable to take cognizance in the interests of the tribes and tribal organizations it represents and to make representations thereon to the President, or to send messages thereon to the National Assembly.\n- (6) A person attending the proceedings of the Ntlo ya Dikgosi by virtue of the provisions of subsection (3) or (4) of this section shall be entitled to take part in the proceedings of the Ntlo ya Dikgosi relating to the matter in respect of which he or she attends as if he or she were a Member of the Ntlo ya Dikgosi :\n\nProvided that he or she shall not be entitled to vote in the Ntlo ya Dikgosi .\n\n## PART IV\n\n## Powers of Parliament (ss 86-89)\n\n## 86. Legislative powers\n\nSubject to the provisions of this Constitution, Parliament shall have power to make laws for the peace, order and good government of Botswana.\n\n## 87. Mode of exercising legislative powers\n\n(1) Subject to the provisions of section 89(4) of this Constitution the power of Parliament to make laws shall be exercised by Bills passed by the National Assembly, after reference in the cases specified in section 88(2) of this Constitution to the Ntlo ya Dikgosi , and assented to by the President.\n\n- (2) When a Bill is presented to the President for assent he or she shall either assent or withhold his or her assent.\n\nCopyright Government of Botswana", + "recall": 0.9827586206896551, + "true_md": "- 25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n- 25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\nSubject to the provisions of this Constitution, the Ntlo ya Dikgosi may, subject to the approval of the President, make rules regulating its own procedure and in particular, and without prejudice to the generality of the foregoing power, make rules for all or any of the following matter - ( a ) the appointment or election and tenure of office of a Chairman of the Ntlo ya Dikgosi ; \n\n- prejudice to the generality of the foregoing power, make rules for all or any of the following matter ( a ) the appointment or election and tenure of office of a Chairman of the Ntlo ya Dikgosi ; ( b ) the time and place at which the Ntlo ya Dikgosi shall meet; \n\n- ( a ) the appointment or election and tenure of office of a Chairman of the ( b ) the time and place at which the Ntlo ya Dikgosi shall meet; ( c ) the manner in which the views of the Ntlo ya Dikgosi shall be recorded and, if necessary, \n\n- ( b ) the time and place at which the Ntlo ya Dikgosi shall meet; ( c ) the manner in which the views of the Ntlo ya Dikgosi shall be recorded and, if necessary, expressed to a Minister, the National Assembly, or to any other person or body; ( d ) the regulation and orderly conduct of the proceedings of the Ntlo ya Dikgosi ; \n\n- expressed to a Minister, the National Assembly, or to any other person or body; ( d ) the regulation and orderly conduct of the proceedings of the Ntlo ya Dikgosi ; ( e ) ...... 84. Ntlo ya Dikgosi may transact business notwithstanding vacancies \n\n## ( d ) the regulation and orderly conduct of the proceedings of the Ntlo ya Dikgosi ; ( e ) ...... 84. Ntlo ya Dikgosi may transact business notwithstanding vacancies The Ntlo ya Dikgosi shall not be disqualified for the transaction of business by reason of\n\n## Dikgosi or otherwise took part in the proceedings. 85. Functions of Ntlo ya Dikgosi (1) The Ntlo ya Dikgosi shall consider the copy of any Bill which has been referred to it\n\n( e ) ...... 84. Ntlo ya Dikgosi may transact business notwithstanding vacancies The Ntlo ya Dikgosi shall not be disqualified for the transaction of business by reason of any vacancy among the Members thereof including any vacancy not filled when the Ntlo ya Dikgosi is first constituted or is reconstituted at any time; and any proceedings therein shall be valid notwithstanding that some person who was not entitled to do so sat or voted in the Ntlo ya Dikgosi or otherwise took part in the proceedings. 85. Functions of Ntlo ya Dikgosi\n\n85. Functions of Ntlo ya Dikgosi (1) The Ntlo ya Dikgosi shall consider the copy of any Bill which has been referred to it under the provisions of section 88(2) of this Constitution and the Ntlo ya Dikgosi shall be entitled to submit resolutions thereon to the National Assembly. (2) Any resolution which has been submitted to the National Assembly in accordance with \n\nto submit resolutions thereon to the National Assembly. (2) Any resolution which has been submitted to the National Assembly in accordance with the last foregoing subsection shall forthwith be laid before the Assembly by the Clerk of the Assembly. (3) Any Minister who is responsible for a Bill such as is refe rred to in subsection (1) of this \n\nAssembly. (3) Any Minister who is responsible for a Bill such as is refe rred to in subsection (1) of this section, or his or her representative, may attend the proceedings of the Ntlo ya Dikgosi when the copy of the Bill is being considered. (4) Any Minister may consult the Ntlo ya Dikgosi in respect of any matter on which he or \n\ncopy of the Bill is being considered. (4) Any Minister may consult the Ntlo ya Dikgosi in respect of any matter on which he or she desires to obtain the opinion of the Ntlo ya Dikgosi , and for that purpose the Minister or his or her representative may attend the proceedings of the Ntlo ya Dikgosi . (5) The Ntlo ya Dikgosi shall be entitled to discuss any matter within the executive or \n\nher representative may attend the proceedings of the Ntlo ya Dikgosi . (5) The Ntlo ya Dikgosi shall be entitled to discuss any matter within the executive or legislative authority of Botswana of which it considers it is desirable to take cognizance in the interests of the tribes and tribal organizations it represents and to make representations thereon to the President, or to send messages thereon to the National Assembly. (6) A person attending the proceedings of the Ntlo ya Dikgosi by virtue of the provisions of \n\nto the President, or to send messages thereon to the National Assembly. (6) A person attending the proceedings of the Ntlo ya Dikgosi by virtue of the provisions of subsection (3) or (4) of this section shall be entitled to take part in the proceedings of the Ntlo ya Dikgosi relating to the matter inrespect of which he or she attends as if he or she were a Member of the Ntlo ya Dikgosi : Provided that he or she shall not be entitled to vote in the Ntlo ya Dikgosi . \n\nNtlo ya Dikgosi : Provided that he or she shall not be entitled to vote in the Ntlo ya Dikgosi . PART IV \n\n86. Legislative powers Subject tothe provisions of this Constitution, Parliament shall have power to make laws for the peace, order and good government of Botswana. 87. Mode of exercising legislative powers \n\n87. Mode of exercising legislative powers (1) Subject to the provisions of section 89(4) of this Constitution the power of Parliament to make laws shall be exercised by Bills passed by the National Assembly, after reference in the cases specified in section 88(2) of this Constitution to the Ntlo ya Dikgosi , and assented to by the President. (2) When a Bill is presented to the President for assent he or she shall either assent or \n\nPresident. (2) When a Bill is presented to the President for assent he or she shall either assent or withhold his or her assent.\n\n## Provided that he or she shall not be entitled to vote in the PART IV Powers of Parliament\n\n## PART IV Powers of Parliament (ss 86-89)\n\n## 86. Legislative powers Subject tothe provisions of this Constitution, Parliament shall have power to make laws\n\n## for the peace, order and good government of Botswana. 87. Mode of exercising legislative powers (1) Subject to the provisions of section 89(4) of this Constitution\n\nCopyright Government of Botswana" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4620824302938381, + "doc_id": "eb588c8a08496e82ca4752b048e6b3e9e6834152132301ce22bfa4c419ffeb78", + "edit_distance": 0.5850340136054422, + "f1_score": 0.9666666666666666, + "meteor": 0.4052650152949429, + "precision": 0.9854368932038835, + "pred_md": "25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio\n\n## 70. Clerk of the Assembly\n\n(1) There shall be a Clerk of the National Assembly and an Assistant Clerk of the National Assembly and their offices shall be offices in the public service.\n\n(2) There shall be such other offices in the department of the Clerk of the Assembly as may be prescribed by resolution of the National Assembly and such offices shall be offices in the public service.\n\n## PART II\n\n## General Provisions Relating to Procedure in National Assembly (ss 71-76) 71. Oaths to be taken by Speaker and Members\n\nThe Speaker, before assuming the duties of his or her office, and every Member of the National Assembly before taking his or her seat therein, shall take and subscribe before the Assembly the oath of allegiance.\n\n## 72. Presiding in Assembly\n\nThere shall preside at any sitting of the National Assembly-\n\n- ( a ) the Speaker;\n- ( b ) in the absence of the Speaker, the Deputy Speaker; or\n- ( c ) in the absence of the Speaker and the Deputy Speaker, such Member of the Assembly (not being the President or Vice-President or a Minister or Assistant Minister) as the Assembly may elect for that sitting.\n\n## 73. Quorum in Assembly\n\nIf objection is taken by any Member of the National Assembly present that there are present in the Assembly (besides the person presiding) less than one third of the Members of the Assembly and, after such interval as may be prescribed in the rules of procedure of the Assembly, the person presiding ascertains that the number of Members present is less than one third, he or she shall thereupon adjourn the Assembly.\n\n## 74. Voting in Assembly\n\n(1) Save as otherwise provided in this Constitution, any question proposed for decision in the National Assembly shall be determined by a majority of the votes of the Members present and voting.\n\n(2) ...\n\n- (3) The person presiding in the National Assembly shall have neither an original vote nor a casting vote and if upon any question before the Assembly the votes are equally divided the motion shall be lost.\n\n## 75. Unqualified persons sitting or voting\n\nAny person who sits or votes in the National Assembly knowing or having reasonable grounds for knowing that he or she is not entitled to do so shall be liable to a penalty not exceeding P50 or such other sum as may be prescribed by Parliament for each day on which he or she so sits or votes in the Assembly, which shall be recoverable by action in the High Court at the suit of the Attorney-General.\n\n## 76. Regulation of procedure in Assembly\n\n(1) Subject to the provisions of this Constitution, the National Assembly may regulate its own procedure.\n\n(2) The National Assembly may act notwithstanding any vacancy in its membership (including any vacancy not filled when the Assembly first meets after any dissolution) and the presence or participation of any person not entitled to be present or to participate in the proceedings of the Assembly shall not invalidate those proceedings.\n\n## PART III\n\nNtlo ya Dikgosi (ss 77-85)\n\n## 77. Establishment and composition of Ntlo ya Dikgosi\n\nCopyright Government of Botswana", + "recall": 0.9485981308411215, + "true_md": "25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n70. Clerk of the Assembly (1) There shall be a Clerk of the National Assembly and an Assistant Clerk of the National Assembly and their offices shall be offices in the public service. (2) There shall be such other offices in the department of the Clerk of the Assembly as \n\nAssembly and their offices shall be offices in the public service. (2) There shall be such other offices in the department of the Clerk of the Assembly as may be prescribed by resolution of the National Assembly and such offices shall be offices in the public service. PART II \n\n71. Oaths to be taken by Speaker and Members The Speaker, before assuming the duties of his or her office, and every Member of the National Assembly before taking his or her seat therein, shall take and subscribe before the Assembly the oath of allegiance. 72. Presiding in Assembly\n\nPresiding in Assembly There shall preside at any sitting of the National Assembly - the Speaker; \n\n73. Quorum in Assembly If objection is taken by any Member of the National Assembly present that there are present in the Assembly (besides the person presiding) less than one third of the Members of the Assembly and, aftersuch interval as may be prescribed in the rules of procedure of the Assembly, the person presiding ascertains that the number of Members present is less than one third, he or she shall thereupon adjourn the Assembly. 74. Voting in Assembly\n\n74. Voting in Assembly (1) Save as otherwise provided in this Constitution, any question proposed for decision in the National Assembly shall be determined by a majority of the votes of the Members present and voting. (2) ... \n\nvoting. (2) ... (3) The person presiding in the Nat\n\n(2) ... (3) The person presiding in the Nat ional Assembly shall have neither an original vote nor a casting vote and if upon any question before the Assembly the votes are equally divided the motion shall be lost. 75. Unqualified persons sitting or voting \n\n75. Unqualified persons sitting or voting Any person who sits or votes in the National Assembly knowing or having reasonable grounds for knowing that he or she is not entitled to do so shall be liable to a penalty not exceeding P50 or such other sum as may be prescribed by Parliament for each day on which he or she so sits orvotes in the Assembly, which shall be recoverable by action in the High Court at the suit of the Attorney -General. 76. Regulation of procedure in Assembly \n\n76. Regulation of procedure in Assembly (1) Subject to the provisions of this Constitution, the National Assembly may regulate its own procedure. (2) The National Assembly may act notwithstanding any vacancy in its membership \n\nown procedure. (2) The National Assembly may act notwithstanding any vacancy in its membership (including any vacancy not filled when the Assembly first meets after any dissolution) and the presence or participation of any person not entitled to be p resent or to participate in the proceedings of the Assembly shall not invalidate those proceedings. PART III \n\n## proceedings of the Assembly shall not invalidate those proceedings. PART III Ntlo ya Dikgosi (ss 77-85)\n\n## PART III Ntlo ya Dikgosi (ss 77-85) Establishment and composition of Ntlo ya Dikgosi\n\n## Ntlo ya Dikgosi (ss 77-85) 77. Establishment and composition of Ntlo ya Dikgosi\n\n## the suit of the Attorney -General. 76. Regulation of procedure in Assembly (1) Subject to the provisions of this Constitution, the National Assembly may regulate\n\n## motion shall be lost. 75. Unqualified persons sitting or voting Any person who sits or votes in the National Assembly knowing or having reasonable\n\n## she shall thereupon adjourn the Assembly. 74. Voting in Assembly (1) Save as otherwise provided in this Constitution, any question proposed for decision in\n\n## Assembly may elect for that sitting. 73. Quorum in Assembly If objection is taken by any Member of the National Assembly present that there are\n\n## Assembly the oath of allegiance. 72. Presiding in Assembly There shall preside at any sitting of the National Assembly\n\n## PART II General Provisions Relating to Procedure in National Assembly\n\n## General Provisions Relating to Procedure in National Assembly 71. Oaths to be taken by Speaker and Members The Speaker, before assuming the duties of his or her office, and every Member of the\n\n## PART II General Provisions Relating to Procedure in National Assembly (ss 71-76) Oaths to be taken by Speaker and Members\n\n## 70. Clerk of the Assembly (1) There shall be a Clerk of the National Assembly and an Assistant Clerk of the National\n\n- There shall preside at any sitting of the National Assembly ( a ) the Speaker; ( b ) in the absence of theSpeaker, the Deputy Speaker; or\n\n- ( a ) the Speaker; ( b ) in the absence of theSpeaker, the Deputy Speaker; or ( c ) in the absence of the Speaker and the Deputy Speaker, such Member of the Assembly \n\n- ( b ) in the absence of theSpeaker, the Deputy Speaker; or ( c ) in the absence of the Speaker and the Deputy Speaker, such Member of the Assembly (not being the President or Vice -President or a Minister or Assistant Minister) as the Assembly may elect for that sitting. 73. Quorum in Assembly\n\nCopyright Government of Botswana" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4738205861326541, + "doc_id": "35ca0ac4c4970446e42f8ed9ceea08bdf4dd522732cc7f87d4dde6b0f8583b03", + "edit_distance": 0.46872166817769717, + "f1_score": 0.9864253393665158, + "meteor": 0.3924877097140182, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio\n\nof a state of war or of a state of emergency in Botswana or any part thereof, it is necessary to recall Parliament, the President may summon the Parliament that has been dissolved to meet and that Parliament shall be deemed to be the Parliament for the time being, but the general election of the Elected Members of the National Assembly shall proceed and the Parliament that has been recalled shall, if not sooner dissolved, again stand dissolved on the day before the day on which the election is held.\n\n## 92. Vote of no confidence in the Government\n\nIf the National Assembly at any time passes a resolution supported by a majority of all the Members of the Assembly who are entitled to vote declaring that it has no confidence in the Government of Botswana, Parliament shall stand dissolved on the fourth day following the day on which such resolution was passed, unless the President earlier resigns his or her office or dissolves Parliament.\n\n## 93. Sittings of National Assembly\n\n- (1) The President may at any time summon a meeting of the National Assembly.\n- (2) Subject to the provisions of this Constitution, the sittings of the National Assembly in any session of Parliament after the commencement of that session shall be commenced at such times and on such days as the Assembly shall appoint.\n\n## PART VI\n\n## Interpretation (s 94)\n\n94. Votes of two-thirds of the Assembly Any reference in this Constitution to the votes of two-thirds of the Members of the Assembly shall be construed as a reference to the votes of two-thirds of the Members of the Assembly excluding the person presiding.\n\n## CHAPTER VI\n\nThe Judicature (ss 95-107)\n\nPART I\n\nThe High Court (ss 95-98)\n\n## 95. Jurisdiction and composition\n\n- (1) There shall be for Botswana a High Court which shall have unlimited original jurisdiction to hear and determine any civil or criminal proceedings under any law and such other jurisdiction and powers as may be conferred on it by this Constitution or any other law.\n- (2) The judges of the High Court shall be the Chief Justice and such number of other judges of the Court as may be prescribed by Parliament:\n\nProvided that the office of a judge of the High Court shall not be abolished while there is a substantive holder thereof.\n\n- (3) The High Court shall be a superior court of record and, save as otherwise provided by Parliament, shall have all the powers of such a court.\n- (4) The High Court shall sit in such places as the Chief Justice may appoint.\n- (5) The High Court shall have jurisdiction to supervise any civil or criminal proceedings before any subordinate court or any court martial and may make such orders, issue such writs and give such directions as it may consider appropriate for the purpose of ensuring that justice is duly administered by any such court.\n- (6) The Chief Justice may make rules with respect to the practice and procedure of the High Court in relation to the jurisdiction and powers conferred on it by subsection (5) of this section.\n- (7) The Chief Justice may appoint a Rules of Court Advisory Committee to assist him or her in reviewing and overhauling the rules made under subsection (6) and to advise on proposals to update and amend such rules.\n\n## 96. Appointment of judges of High Court\n\n- (1) The Chief Justice shall be appointed by the President.\n\nCopyright Government of Botswana", + "recall": 0.9732142857142857, + "true_md": "- 25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n- 25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\nof a state of war or of a state of emergency in Botsw ana or any part thereof, it is necessary to recall Parliament, the President may summon the Parliament that has been dissolved to meet and that Parliament shall be deemed to be the Parliament for the time being, but the general election of the Elected Members of the National Assembly shall proceed and the Parliament that has been recalled shall, if not sooner dissolved, again stand dissolved on the day before the day on which the election is held. 92. Vote of no confidence in the Government \n\n92. Vote of no confidence in the Government If the National Assembly at any time passes a resolution supported by a majority of all the Members of the Assembly who are entitled to vote declaring that it has no confidence in the Government of Botswana, Parliament shall stand dissolved on the fourth day following the day on which such resolution was passed, unless the President earlier resigns his or her office or dissolves Parliament. 93. Sittings of National Assembly \n\n(1) The President may at any time summon a meeting of the National Assembly. (2) Subject to the provisions of this Constitution, the sittings of the National Assembly in any session of Parliament after the commencement of that session shall be commenced at such times and on such days as the Assembly shall appoint. PART VI \n\nInterpretation (s 94) 94. Votes of two-thirds of the Assembly Any reference in this Constitution to the votes of two-thirds of the Members of the Assembly shall be construed as a reference to the votes of two-thirds of theMembers of the Assembly excluding the person presiding. CHAPTER VI \n\n95. Jurisdiction and composition (1) There shall be for Botswana a High Court which shall have unlimited original jurisdiction to hear and determine any civil or criminal proceedings under any law and such other jurisdiction and powers as may be conferred on it by this Constitution or any other law. (2) The judges of the High Court shall be theChief Justice and such number of other \n\njurisdiction and powers as may be conferred on it by this Constitution or any other law. (2) The judges of the High Court shall be theChief Justice and such number of other judges of the Court as may be prescribed by Parliament: Provided that the office of a judge of the High Court shall not be abolished while there is a \n\njudges of the Court as may be prescribed by Parliament: Provided that the office of a judge of the High Court shall not be abolished while there is a substantive holder thereof. (3) The High Court shall be a superior court of record and, save as otherwise provided by \n\nsubstantive holder thereof. (3) The High Court shall be a superior court of record and, save as otherwise provided by Parliament, shall have all the powers of such a court. (4) The High Court shall sit in such places as the Chief Justice may appoint.\n\n(4) The High Court shall sit in such places as the Chief Justice may appoint. (5) The High Court shall have jurisdictionto supervise any civil or criminal proceedings before any subordinate court or any court martial and may make such orders, issue such writs and give such directions as it may consider appropriate for the purpose of ensuring that justice is duly administered by any such court. (6) The Chief Justice may make rules with respect to the practice and procedure of the \n\nduly administered by any such court. (6) The Chief Justice may make rules with respect to the practice and procedure of the High Court in relation to the jurisdiction and powers conferred on it by subsection (5) of this section. (7) The Chief Justicemay appoint a Rules of Court Advisory Committee to assist him or \n\nsection. (7) The Chief Justicemay appoint a Rules of Court Advisory Committee to assist him or her in reviewing and overhauling the rules made under subsection (6) and to advise on proposals to update and amend such rules. 96. Appointment of judges of High Court \n\n## to update and amend such rules. 96. Appointment of judges of High Court (1) The Chief Justice shall be appointed by the President.\n\n## The High Court 95. Jurisdiction and composition (1) There shall be for Botswana a High Court which shall have unlimited original\n\n## PART I The High Court (ss 95-98) Jurisdiction and composition\n\n## The Judicature (ss 95-107) PART I The High Court (ss 95-98)\n\n## CHAPTER VI The Judicature (ss 95-107) PART I\n\n## of two-thirds of theMembers of the Assembly excluding the person presiding. CHAPTER VI The Judicature (ss 95-107)\n\n## times and on such days as the Assembly shall appoint. PART VI Interpretation (s 94)\n\n## PART VI Interpretation (s 94) Votes of two-thirds of the Assembly Any reference in this Constitution to the\n\n## dissolves Parliament. 93. Sittings of National Assembly (1) The President may at any time summon a meeting of the National\n\n## the election is held. 92. Vote of no confidence in the Government If the National Assembly at any time passes a resolution supported by a majority of all the\n\nSittings of National Assembly (1) The President may at any time summon a meeting of the National Assembly. (2) Subject to the provisions of this Constitution, the sittings of the National Assembly in \n\n- Appointment of judges of High Court (1) The Chief Justice shall be appointed by the President.\n\nCopyright Government of Botswana\n\nParliament, shall have all the powers of such a court. (4) The High Court shall sit in such places as the Chief Justice may appoint. (5) The High Court shall have jurisdictionto supervise any civil or criminal proceedings" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4575160586899312, + "doc_id": "4d40f7520fbe7db39da28c7fac5afcd4900aa08612258e272569d2acaff3ede8", + "edit_distance": 0.4615981380915438, + "f1_score": 0.9635974304068523, + "meteor": 0.43346921060094457, + "precision": 0.9698275862068966, + "pred_md": "25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio\n\n- (3) Subsection (1)( b )(i) of this section shall be deemed to be satisfied in relation to any Law applicable to the taking of possession of minerals or the acquisition of rights to minerals if that law makes provision for the payment at reasonable intervals of adequate royalties.\n- (4) Nothing contained in or done under the authority of any law shall be held to be inconsistent with or in contravention of subsection (2) of this section to the extent that the law in question authorizes-\n- ( a ) the attachment, by order of a court, of any amount of compensation to which a person is entitled in satisfaction of the judgment of a court or pending the determination of civil proceedings to which he or she is a party; or\n- ( b ) the imposition of reasonable restrictions on the manner in which any amount of compensation is to be remitted.\n\n(5) Nothing contained in or done under the authority of any law shall be held to be inconsistent with or in contravention of subsection (1) of this section-\n\n- ( a ) to the extent that the law in question makes provision for the taking of possession or acquisition of any property-\n- (i) in satisfaction of any tax, rate or due;\n- (ii) by way of penalty for breach of the law whether under civil process or after conviction of a criminal offence under the law in force in Botswana;\n- (iii) as an incident of a lease, tenancy, mortgage, charge, bill of sale, pledge or contract;\n- (iv) in the execution of judgments or orders of a court in proceedings for the determination of civil rights or obligations;\n- (v) in circumstances where it is reasonably necessary to do so because the property is in a dangerous state or injurious to the health of human beings, animals or plants;\n- (vi) in consequence of any law with respect to the limitation of actions; or\n- (vii) for so long only as may be necessary for the purposes of any examination, investigation, trial or inquiry or, in the case of land, for the purposes of the carrying out thereon of work of soil conservation or the conservation of other natural resources or work relating to agricultural development or improvement (being work relating to such development or improvement that the owner or occupier of the land has been required, and has without reasonable excuse refused or failed, to carry out),\n\nand except so far as that provision or, as the case may be, the thing done under the authority thereof is shown not to be reasonably justifiable in a democratic society; or\n\n- ( b ) to the extent that the law in question makes provision for the taking of possession or acquisition of-\n- (i) enemy property;\n- (ii) property of a deceased person, a person of unsound mind, a person who has not attained the age of 21 years, a prodigal, or a person who is absent from Botswana, for the purpose of its administration for the benefit of the persons entitled to the beneficial interest therein;\n- (iii) property of a person declared to be insolvent or a body corporate in liquidation, for the purpose of its administration for the benefit of the creditors of the insolvent or body corporate and, subject thereto, for the benefit of other persons entitled to the beneficial interest in the property; or\n- (iv) property subject to a trust, for the purpose of vesting the property in persons appointed as trustees under the instrument creating the trust or by a court, or by order of a court, for the purpose of giving effect to the trust.\n\n(6) Nothing contained in or done under the authority of any law shall be held to be inconsistent with or in contravention of subsection (1) of this section to the extent that the law in\n\nCopyright Government of Botswana", + "recall": 0.9574468085106383, + "true_md": "- 25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n- 25. Staff 26. Class-child ratio \n\n(3) Subsection (1)( b )(i) of this section shall be deemed to be satisfied in relation to any Lawapplicable to the taking of possession of minerals or the acquisition of rights to minerals if that law makes provision for the payment at reasonable intervals of adequate royalties. (4) Nothing contained in or done under the authority of any law shall be held to be \n\nlaw makes provision for the payment at reasonable intervals of adequate royalties. (4) Nothing contained in or done under the authority of any law shall be held to be inconsistent with or in contravention of subsection (2) of this section to the extent that the law in question authorizes- ( a ) the attachment, by order of a court, of any amount of compensation to which a person is \n\ncompensation is to be remitted. (5) Nothing contained in or done under the authority of any law shall be held to be inconsistent with or in contravention of subsection (1) of this section - ( a ) to the extent that the law in question makes provision for the taking of possession or \n\nout), and except so far as that provision or, as the case may be, the thing done under the authority thereof is show n not to be reasonably justifiable in a democratic society; or to the extent that the law in question makes provision for the taking of possession or \n\norder of a court, for the purpose of giving effect to the trust. (6) Nothing contained in or done under the authority of any law shall be held to be inconsistent with or in contravention of subsection (1) of this section to the extent that the law in \n\n- question authorizes- ( a ) the attachment, by order of a court, of any amount of compensation to which a person is entitled in satisfaction ofthe judgment of a court or pending the determination of civil proceedings to which he or she is a party; or ( b ) the imposition of reasonable restrictions on the manner in which any amount of \n\n- proceedings to which he or she is a party; or ( b ) the imposition of reasonable restrictions on the manner in which any amount of compensation is to be remitted. (5) Nothing contained in or done under the authority of any law shall be held to be \n\n- inconsistent with or in contravention of subsection (1) of this section - ( a ) to the extent that the law in question makes provision for the taking of possession or acquisition of any property - (i) in satisfaction of any tax, rate or due;\n\n- acquisition of any property - (i) in satisfaction of any tax, rate or due; (ii) by way of penalty for breach of the law whether under civil process or after \n\n- (i) in satisfaction of any tax, rate or due; (ii) by way of penalty for breach of the law whether under civil process or after conviction of a criminal offence under the law in force in Botswana; (iii) as an incident of a lease, tenancy, mortgage, charge, bil l of sale, pledge or contract;\n\n- conviction of a criminal offence under the law in force in Botswana; (iii) as an incident of a lease, tenancy, mortgage, charge, bil l of sale, pledge or contract; (iv) in the execution of judgments or orders of a court in proceedings for the \n\n- (iii) as an incident of a lease, tenancy, mortgage, charge, bil l of sale, pledge or contract; (iv) in the execution of judgments or orders of a court in proceedings for the determination of civil rights or obligations; (v) in circumstances where it is reasonably necessary to do so because the property is \n\n- determination of civil rights or obligations; (v) in circumstances where it is reasonably necessary to do so because the property is in a dangerous state or injurious to the health of human beings, animals or plants; (vi) in consequence of any law with respect to the limitation of actions; or\n\n- in a dangerous state or injurious to the health of human beings, animals or plants; (vi) in consequence of any law with respect to the limitation of actions; or (vii) for so long only as may be necessary for the purposes of any examination, \n\n- (vi) in consequence of any law with respect to the limitation of actions; or (vii) for so long only as may be necessary for the purposes of any examination, investigation, trialor inquiry or, in the case of land, for the purposes of the carrying out thereon of work of soil conservation or the conservation of other natural resources or work relating to agricultural development or improvement (being work relating to such developme nt or improvement that the owner or occupier of the land has been required, and has without reasonable excuse refused or failed, to carry out), and except so far as that provision or, as the case may be, the thing done under the \n\n- authority thereof is show n not to be reasonably justifiable in a democratic society; or ( b ) to the extent that the law in question makes provision for the taking of possession or acquisition of- (i) enemy property; \n\n- acquisition of- (i) enemy property; (ii) property of a deceased person, a person of unsound mind,\n\n- (i) enemy property; (ii) property of a deceased person, a person of unsound mind, a person who has not attained the age of 21 years, a prodigal, or a person who is absent from Botswana, for the purpose of its administration for the benefit of the persons entitled to the beneficial interest therein; (iii) property of a person declared to be insolvent or a body corporate in liquidation, for \n\n- beneficial interest therein; (iii) property of a person declared to be insolvent or a body corporate in liquidation, for the purpose of its administration for the benefit of the creditors of the insolvent or body corporate and, subject thereto, for the benefit of other persons entitled to the beneficial interest in theproperty; or (iv) property subject to a trust, for the purpose of vesting the property in persons \n\n- beneficial interest in theproperty; or (iv) property subject to a trust, for the purpose of vesting the property in persons appointed as trustees under the instrument creating the trust or by a court, or by order of a court, for the purpose of giving effect to the trust. (6) Nothing contained in or done under the authority of any law shall be held to be \n\nCopyright Government of Botswana" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8428937331368233, + "doc_id": "dfabeaeb686bdce74303998123069d5608f4f62bc28f6f45af98b5e89cfb57b6", + "edit_distance": 0.13157894736842105, + "f1_score": 0.8611111111111113, + "meteor": 0.8669107341356146, + "precision": 0.8611111111111112, + "pred_md": "第六十八条 网络运营者违反本法第四十七条规定，对法律、行政法规禁止发布或 者传输的信息未停止传输、采取消除等处置措施、保存有关记录的，由有关主管部门责令 改正，给予警告，没收违法所得；拒不改正或者情节严重的，处十万元以上五十万元以下 罚款，并可以责令暂停相关业务、停业整顿、关闭网站、吊销相关业务许可证或者吊销营 业执照，对直接负责的主管人员和其他直接责任人员处-万元以上十万元以下罚款。\n\n电子信息发送服务提供者、应用软件下载服务提供者，不履行本法第四十八条第二款 规定的安全管理义务的，依照前款规定处罚。\n\n第六十九条 网络运营者违反本法规定，有下列行为之-的，由有关主管部门责令 改正；拒不改正或者情节严重的，处五万元以上五十万元以下罚款，对直接负责的主管人 员和其他直接责任人员，处-万元以上十万元以下罚款：\n\n（-）不按照有关部门的要求对法律、行政法规禁止发布或者传输的信息，采取停止 传输、消除等处置措施的；\n\n（二）拒绝、阻碍有关部门依法实施的监督检查的；\n\n（三）拒不向公安机关、国家安全机关提供技术支持和协助的。\n\n第七十条 发布或者传输本法第十二条第二款和其他法律、行政法规禁止发布或者 传输的信息的，依照有关法律、行政法规的规定处罚。\n\n第七十-条 有本法规定的违法行为的，依照有关法律、行政法规的规定记入信用 档案，并予以公示。\n\n第七十二条 国家机关政务网络的运营者不履行本法规定的网络安全保护义务的， 由其上级机关或者有关机关责令改正；对直接负责的主管人员和其他直接责任人员依法给 予处分。\n\n第七十三条 网信部门和有关部门违反本法第三十条规定，将在履行网络安全保护 职责中获取的信息用于其他用途的，对直接负责的主管人员和其他直接责任人员依法给予 处分。\n\nSource: http://www.npc.gov.cn/npc/xinwen/2016-11/07/content\\_2001605.htm Accessed: 28-March\\_2018", + "recall": 0.8611111111111112, + "true_md": "第六十八条 网络运营者违反本法第四十七条规定，对法律、行政法规禁止发布或 者传输的信息未停止传输、采取消除等处置措施、保存有关记录的，由有关主管部门责令 改正，给予警告，没收违法所得；拒不改正或者情节严重的，处十万元以上五十万元以下 罚款，并可以责令暂停相关业务、停业整顿、关闭网站、吊销相关业务许可证或者吊销营 业执照，对直接负责的主管人员和其他直接责任人员处一万元以上十万元以下罚款。\n\n电子信息发送服务提供者、应用软件下载服务提供者，不履行本法第四十八条第二款 规定的安全管理义务的，依照前款规定处罚。\n\n第六十九条 网络运营者违反本法规定，有下列行为之一的，由有关主管部门责令 改正；拒不改正或者情节严重的，处五万元以上五十万元以下罚款，对直接负责的主管人 员和其他直接责任人员，处一万元以上十万元以下罚款：\n\n（一）不按照有关部门的要求对法律、行政法规禁止发布或者传输的信息，采取停止 传输、消除等处置措施的；\n\n（二）拒绝、阻碍有关部门依法实施的监督检查的；\n\n（三）拒不向公安机关、国家安全机关提供技术支持和协助的。\n\n第七十条 发布或者传输本法第十二条第二款和其他法律、行政法规禁止发布或者 传输的信息的，依照有关法律、行政法规的规定处罚。\n\n第七十一条 有本法规定的违法行为的，依照有关法律、行政法规的规定记入信用 档案，并予以公示。\n\n第七十二条 国家机关政务网络的运营者不履行本法规定的网络安全保护义务的， 由其上级机关或者有关机关责令改正；对直接负责的主管人员和其他直接责任人员依法给 予处分。\n\n第七十三条 网信部门和有关部门违反本法第三十条规定，将在履行网络安全保护 职责中获取的信息用于其他用途的，对直接负责的主管人员和其他直接责任人员依法给予 处分。\n\nSource: http://www.npc.gov.cn/npc/xinwen/2016-11/07/content\\_2001605.htm Accessed: 28-March\\_2018" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7673001546700425, + "doc_id": "80dc2751902944c7608fdbbc60af8e588893c92cfaf5d6e4852a942e020f93bd", + "edit_distance": 0.45652173913043476, + "f1_score": 0.8831168831168832, + "meteor": 0.8483544402026394, + "precision": 0.8717948717948718, + "pred_md": "国家支持创新网络安全管理方式，运用网络新技术，提升网络安全保护水平。\n\n第十九条 各级人民政府及其有关部门应当组织开展经常性的网络安全宣传教育， 并指导、督促有关单位做好网络安全宣传教育工作。\n\n大众传播媒介应当有针对性地面向社会进行网络安全宣传教育。\n\n第二十条 国家支持企业和高等学校、职业学校等教育培训机构开展网络安全相关 教育与培训，采取多种方式培养网络安全人才，促进网络安全人才交流。\n\n## 第三章 网络运行安全\n\n第-节 -般规定\n\n第二十-条 国家实行网络安全等级保护制度。网络运营者应当按照网络安全等级 保护制度的要求，履行下列安全保护义务，保障网络免受干扰、破坏或者未经授权的访问， 防止网络数据泄露或者被窃取、篡改：\n\n- （-）制定内部安全管理制度和操作规程，确定网络安全负责人，落实网络安全保护 责任；\n- （二）采取防范计算机病毒和网络攻击、网络侵入等危害网络安全行为的技术措施；\n- （三）采取监测、记录网络运行状态、网络安全事件的技术措施，并按照规定留存相 关的网络日志不少于六个月；\n- （四）采取数据分类、重要数据备份和加密等措施；\n- （五）法律、行政法规规定的其他义务。\n\n第二十二条 网络产品、服务应当符合相关国家标准的强制性要求。网络产品、服 务的提供者不得设置恶意程序；发现其网络产品、服务存在安全缺陷、漏洞等风险时，应 当立即采取补救措施，按照规定及时告知用户并向有关主管部门报告。\n\n网络产品、服务的提供者应当为其产品、服务持续提供安全维护；在规定或者当事人 约定的期限内，不得终止提供安全维护。\n\n网络产品、服务具有收集用户信息功能的，其提供者应当向用户明示并取得同意；涉 及用户个人信息的，还应当遵守本法和有关法律、行政法规关于个人信息保护的规定。\n\nSource: http://www.npc.gov.cn/npc/xinwen/2016-11/07/content\\_2001605.htm Accessed: 28-March\\_2018", + "recall": 0.8947368421052632, + "true_md": "国家支持创新网络安全管理方式，运用网络新技术，提升网络安全保护水平。\n\n第十九条 各级人民政府及其有关部门应当组织开展经常性的网络安全宣传教育， 并指导、督促有关单位做好网络安全宣传教育工作。\n\n大众传播媒介应当有针对性地面向社会进行网络安全宣传教育。\n\n第二十条 国家支持企业和高等学校、职业学校等教育培训机构开展网络安全相关 教育与培训，采取多种方式培养网络安全人才，促进网络安全人才交流。\n\n第二十一条 国家实行网络安全等级保护制度。网络运营者应当按照网络安全等级 保护制度的要求，履行下列安全保护义务，保障网络免受干扰、破坏或者未经授权的访问， 防止网络数据泄露或者被窃取、篡改：\n\n（一）制定内部安全管理制度和操作规程，确定网络安全负责人，落实网络安全保护 责任；\n\n（二）采取防范计算机病毒和网络攻击、网络侵入等危害网络安全行为的技术措施；\n\n（三）采取监测、记录网络运行状态、网络安全事件的技术措施，并按照规定留存相 关的网络日志不少于六个月；\n\n（四）采取数据分类、重要数据备份和加密等措施；\n\n（五）法律、行政法规规定的其他义务。\n\n第二十二条 网络产品、服务应当符合相关国家标准的强制性要求。网络产品、服 务的提供者不得设置恶意程序；发现其网络产品、服务存在安全缺陷、漏洞等风险时，应 当立即采取补救措施，按照规定及时告知用户并向有关主管部门报告。\n\n网络产品、服务的提供者应当为其产品、服务持续提供安全维护；在规定或者当事人 约定的期限内，不得终止提供安全维护。\n\n网络产品、服务具有收集用户信息功能的，其提供者应当向用户明示并取得同意；涉 及用户个人信息的，还应当遵守本法和有关法律、行政法规关于个人信息保护的规定。\n\nSource: http://www.npc.gov.cn/npc/xinwen/2016-11/07/content\\_2001605.htm Accessed: 28-March\\_2018\n\n## 第三章 网络运行安全\n\n## 第一节 一般规定" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8804558665705027, + "doc_id": "a33cf84c6e025405cd4f9cf9d7cf89e92e5363bf78bfa76144694c4463ae158d", + "edit_distance": 0.2619047619047619, + "f1_score": 0.9230769230769231, + "meteor": 0.9275930622084468, + "precision": 0.9230769230769231, + "pred_md": "第四十九条 网络运营者应当建立网络信息安全投诉、举报制度，公布投诉、举报 方式等信息，及时受理并处理有关网络信息安全的投诉和举报。\n\n网络运营者对网信部门和有关部门依法实施的监督检查，应当予以配合。\n\n第五十条 国家网信部门和有关部门依法履行网络信息安全监督管理职责，发现法 律、行政法规禁止发布或者传输的信息的，应当要求网络运营者停止传输，采取消除等处 置措施，保存有关记录；对来源于中华人民共和国境外的上述信息，应当通知有关机构采 取技术措施和其他必要措施阻断传播。\n\n## 第五章 监测预警与应急处置\n\n第五十-条 国家建立网络安全监测预警和信息通报制度。国家网信部门应当统筹 协调有关部门加强网络安全信息收集、分析和通报工作，按照规定统-发布网络安全监测 预警信息。\n\n第五十二条 负责关键信息基础设施安全保护工作的部门，应当建立健全本行业、 本领域的网络安全监测预警和信息通报制度，并按照规定报送网络安全监测预警信息。\n\n第五十三条 国家网信部门协调有关部门建立健全网络安全风险评估和应急工作机 制，制定网络安全事件应急预案，并定期组织演练。\n\n负责关键信息基础设施安全保护工作的部门应当制定本行业、本领域的网络安全事件 应急预案，并定期组织演练。\n\n网络安全事件应急预案应当按照事件发生后的危害程度、影响范围等因素对网络安全 事件进行分级，并规定相应的应急处置措施。\n\n第五十四条 网络安全事件发生的风险增大时，省级以上人民政府有关部门应当按 照规定的权限和程序，并根据网络安全风险的特点和可能造成的危害，采取下列措施：\n\n（-）要求有关部门、机构和人员及时收集、报告有关信息，加强对网络安全风险的 监测；\n\n（二）组织有关部门、机构和专业人员，对网络安全风险信息进行分析评估，预测事 件发生的可能性、影响范围和危害程度；\n\nSource: http://www.npc.gov.cn/npc/xinwen/2016-11/07/content\\_2001605.htm Accessed: 28-March\\_2018", + "recall": 0.9230769230769231, + "true_md": "第四十九条 网络运营者应当建立网络信息安全投诉、举报制度，公布投诉、举报 方式等信息，及时受理并处理有关网络信息安全的投诉和举报。\n\n网络运营者对网信部门和有关部门依法实施的监督检查，应当予以配合。\n\n第五十条 国家网信部门和有关部门依法履行网络信息安全监督管理职责，发现法 律、行政法规禁止发布或者传输的信息的，应当要求网络运营者停止传输，采取消除等处 置措施，保存有关记录；对来源于中华人民共和国境外的上述信息，应当通知有关机构采 取技术措施和其他必要措施阻断传播。\n\n第五十一条 国家建立网络安全监测预警和信息通报制度。国家网信部门应当统筹 协调有关部门加强网络安全信息收集、分析和通报工作，按照规定统一发布网络安全监测 预警信息。\n\n第五十二条 负责关键信息基础设施安全保护工作的部门，应当建立健全本行业、 本领域的网络安全监测预警和信息通报制度，并按照规定报送网络安全监测预警信息。\n\n第五十三条 国家网信部门协调有关部门建立健全网络安全风险评估和应急工作机 制，制定网络安全事件应急预案，并定期组织演练。\n\n负责关键信息基础设施安全保护工作的部门应当制定本行业、本领域的网络安全事件 应急预案，并定期组织演练。\n\n网络安全事件应急预案应当按照事件发生后的危害程度、影响范围等因素对网络安全 事件进行分级，并规定相应的应急处置措施。\n\n第五十四条 网络安全事件发生的风险增大时，省级以上人民政府有关部门应当按 照规定的权限和程序，并根据网络安全风险的特点和可能造成的危害，采取下列措施：\n\n（一）要求有关部门、机构和人员及时收集、报告有关信息，加强对网络安全风险的 监测；\n\n（二）组织有关部门、机构和专业人员，对网络安全风险信息进行分析评估，预测事 件发生的可能性、影响范围和危害程度；\n\nSource: http://www.npc.gov.cn/npc/xinwen/2016-11/07/content\\_2001605.htm Accessed: 28-March\\_2018\n\n## 第五章 监测预警与应急处置" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "778319113217901d8dd84bf6e13d9a28f59fbb46732e8ad5ed1cf852132167af", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999921875, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "第四十二条 网络运营者不得泄露、篡改、毁损其收集的个人信息；未经被收集者 同意，不得向他人提供个人信息。但是，经过处理无法识别特定个人且不能复原的除外。\n\n网络运营者应当采取技术措施和其他必要措施，确保其收集的个人信息安全，防止信 息泄露、毁损、丢失。在发生或者可能发生个人信息泄露、毁损、丢失的情况时，应当立 即采取补救措施，按照规定及时告知用户并向有关主管部门报告。\n\n第四十三条 个人发现网络运营者违反法律、行政法规的规定或者双方的约定收集、 使用其个人信息的，有权要求网络运营者删除其个人信息；发现网络运营者收集、存储的 其个人信息有错误的，有权要求网络运营者予以更正。网络运营者应当采取措施予以删除 或者更正。\n\n第四十四条 任何个人和组织不得窃取或者以其他非法方式获取个人信息，不得非 法出售或者非法向他人提供个人信息。\n\n第四十五条 依法负有网络安全监督管理职责的部门及其工作人员，必须对在履行 职责中知悉的个人信息、隐私和商业秘密严格保密，不得泄露、出售或者非法向他人提供。\n\n第四十六条 任何个人和组织应当对其使用网络的行为负责，不得设立用于实施诈 骗，传授犯罪方法，制作或者销售违禁物品、管制物品等违法犯罪活动的网站、通讯群组， 不得利用网络发布涉及实施诈骗，制作或者销售违禁物品、管制物品以及其他违法犯罪活 动的信息。\n\n第四十七条 网络运营者应当加强对其用户发布的信息的管理，发现法律、行政法 规禁止发布或者传输的信息的，应当立即停止传输该信息，采取消除等处置措施，防止信 息扩散，保存有关记录，并向有关主管部门报告。\n\n第四十八条 任何个人和组织发送的电子信息、提供的应用软件，不得设置恶意程 序，不得含有法律、行政法规禁止发布或者传输的信息。\n\n电子信息发送服务提供者和应用软件下载服务提供者，应当履行安全管理义务，知道 其用户有前款规定行为的，应当停止提供服务，采取消除等处置措施，保存有关记录，并 向有关主管部门报告。\n\nSource: http://www.npc.gov.cn/npc/xinwen/2016-11/07/content\\_2001605.htm Accessed: 28-March\\_2018", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "第四十二条 网络运营者不得泄露、篡改、毁损其收集的个人信息；未经被收集者 同意，不得向他人提供个人信息。但是，经过处理无法识别特定个人且不能复原的除外。\n\n网络运营者应当采取技术措施和其他必要措施，确保其收集的个人信息安全，防止信 息泄露、毁损、丢失。在发生或者可能发生个人信息泄露、毁损、丢失的情况时，应当立 即采取补救措施，按照规定及时告知用户并向有关主管部门报告。\n\n第四十三条 个人发现网络运营者违反法律、行政法规的规定或者双方的约定收集、 使用其个人信息的，有权要求网络运营者删除其个人信息；发现网络运营者收集、存储的 其个人信息有错误的，有权要求网络运营者予以更正。网络运营者应当采取措施予以删除 或者更正。\n\n第四十四条 任何个人和组织不得窃取或者以其他非法方式获取个人信息，不得非 法出售或者非法向他人提供个人信息。\n\n第四十五条 依法负有网络安全监督管理职责的部门及其工作人员，必须对在履行 职责中知悉的个人信息、隐私和商业秘密严格保密，不得泄露、出售或者非法向他人提供。\n\n第四十六条 任何个人和组织应当对其使用网络的行为负责，不得设立用于实施诈 骗，传授犯罪方法，制作或者销售违禁物品、管制物品等违法犯罪活动的网站、通讯群组， 不得利用网络发布涉及实施诈骗，制作或者销售违禁物品、管制物品以及其他违法犯罪活 动的信息。\n\n第四十七条 网络运营者应当加强对其用户发布的信息的管理，发现法律、行政法 规禁止发布或者传输的信息的，应当立即停止传输该信息，采取消除等处置措施，防止信 息扩散，保存有关记录，并向有关主管部门报告。\n\n第四十八条 任何个人和组织发送的电子信息、提供的应用软件，不得设置恶意程 序，不得含有法律、行政法规禁止发布或者传输的信息。\n\n电子信息发送服务提供者和应用软件下载服务提供者，应当履行安全管理义务，知道 其用户有前款规定行为的，应当停止提供服务，采取消除等处置措施，保存有关记录，并 向有关主管部门报告。\n\nSource: http://www.npc.gov.cn/npc/xinwen/2016-11/07/content\\_2001605.htm Accessed: 28-March\\_2018" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7624216090787037, + "doc_id": "7ccc6f43d3b9ecfe984081175f64105a2d2512afc308b8d3ceb28ce9e93a154c", + "edit_distance": 0.23684210526315788, + "f1_score": 0.782608695652174, + "meteor": 0.7975574986368504, + "precision": 0.7714285714285715, + "pred_md": "（-）设置恶意程序的；\n\n（二）对其产品、服务存在的安全缺陷、漏洞等风险未立即采取补救措施，或者未按 照规定及时告知用户并向有关主管部门报告的；\n\n## （三）擅自终止为其产品、服务提供安全维护的。\n\n第六十-条 网络运营者违反本法第二十四条第-款规定，未要求用户提供真实身 份信息，或者对不提供真实身份信息的用户提供相关服务的，由有关主管部门责令改正； 拒不改正或者情节严重的，处五万元以上五十万元以下罚款，并可以由有关主管部门责令 暂停相关业务、停业整顿、关闭网站、吊销相关业务许可证或者吊销营业执照，对直接负 责的主管人员和其他直接责任人员处-万元以上十万元以下罚款。\n\n第六十二条 违反本法第二十六条规定，开展网络安全认证、检测、风险评估等活 动，或者向社会发布系统漏洞、计算机病毒、网络攻击、网络侵入等网络安全信息的，由 有关主管部门责令改正，给予警告；拒不改正或者情节严重的，处-万元以上十万元以下 罚款，并可以由有关主管部门责令暂停相关业务、停业整顿、关闭网站、吊销相关业务许 可证或者吊销营业执照，对直接负责的主管人员和其他直接责任人员处五千元以上五万元 以下罚款。\n\n第六十三条 违反本法第二十七条规定，从事危害网络安全的活动，或者提供专门 用于从事危害网络安全活动的程序、工具，或者为他人从事危害网络安全的活动提供技术 支持、广告推广、支付结算等帮助，尚不构成犯罪的，由公安机关没收违法所得，处五日 以下拘留，可以并处五万元以上五十万元以下罚款；情节较重的，处五日以上十五日以下 拘留，可以并处十万元以上-百万元以下罚款。\n\n单位有前款行为的，由公安机关没收违法所得，处十万元以上-百万元以下罚款，并 对直接负责的主管人员和其他直接责任人员依照前款规定处罚。\n\n违反本法第二十七条规定，受到治安管理处罚的人员，五年内不得从事网络安全管理 和网络运营关键岗位的工作；受到刑事处罚的人员，终身不得从事网络安全管理和网络运 营关键岗位的工作。\n\nSource: http://www.npc.gov.cn/npc/xinwen/2016-11/07/content\\_2001605.htm Accessed: 28-March\\_2018", + "recall": 0.7941176470588235, + "true_md": "（一）设置恶意程序的；\n\n（二）对其产品、服务存在的安全缺陷、漏洞等风险未立即采取补救措施，或者未按 照规定及时告知用户并向有关主管部门报告的；\n\n（三）擅自终止为其产品、服务提供安全维护的。\n\n第六十一条 网络运营者违反本法第二十四条第一款规定，未要求用户提供真实身 份信息，或者对不提供真实身份信息的用户提供相关服务的，由有关主管部门责令改正； 拒不改正或者情节严重的，处五万元以上五十万元以下罚款，并可以由有关主管部门责令 暂停相关业务、停业整顿、关闭网站、吊销相关业务许可证或者吊销营业执照，对直接负 责的主管人员和其他直接责任人员处一万元以上十万元以下罚款。\n\n第六十二条 违反本法第二十六条规定，开展网络安全认证、检测、风险评估等活 动，或者向社会发布系统漏洞、计算机病毒、网络攻击、网络侵入等网络安全信息的，由 有关主管部门责令改正，给予警告；拒不改正或者情节严重的，处一万元以上十万元以下 罚款，并可以由有关主管部门责令暂停相关业务、停业整顿、关闭网站、吊销相关业务许 可证或者吊销营业执照，对直接负责的主管人员和其他直接责任人员处五千元以上五万元 以下罚款。\n\n第六十三条 违反本法第二十七条规定，从事危害网络安全的活动，或者提供专门 用于从事危害网络安全活动的程序、工具，或者为他人从事危害网络安全的活动提供技术 支持、广告推广、支付结算等帮助，尚不构成犯罪的，由公安机关没收违法所得，处五日 以下拘留，可以并处五万元以上五十万元以下罚款；情节较重的，处五日以上十五日以下 拘留，可以并处十万元以上一百万元以下罚款。\n\n单位有前款行为的，由公安机关没收违法所得，处十万元以上一百万元以下罚款，并 对直接负责的主管人员和其他直接责任人员依照前款规定处罚。\n\n违反本法第二十七条规定，受到治安管理处罚的人员，五年内不得从事网络安全管理 和网络运营关键岗位的工作；受到刑事处罚的人员，终身不得从事网络安全管理和网络运 营关键岗位的工作。\n\nSource: http://www.npc.gov.cn/npc/xinwen/2016-11/07/content\\_2001605.htm Accessed: 28-March\\_2018" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9413303578440204, + "doc_id": "b8d1f0eaea4192591165e7dde905eff484aaad1fa1a26be9e8b7ff578b880fc7", + "edit_distance": 0.4146341463414634, + "f1_score": 0.9743589743589742, + "meteor": 0.9754039634146341, + "precision": 0.9743589743589743, + "pred_md": "第五条 国家采取措施，监测、防御、处置来源于中华人民共和国境内外的网络安 全风险和威胁，保护关键信息基础设施免受攻击、侵入、干扰和破坏，依法惩治网络违法 犯罪活动，维护网络空间安全和秩序。\n\n第六条 国家倡导诚实守信、健康文明的网络行为，推动传播社会主义核心价值观， 采取措施提高全社会的网络安全意识和水平，形成全社会共同参与促进网络安全的良好环 境。\n\n第七条 国家积极开展网络空间治理、网络技术研发和标准制定、打击网络违法犯 罪等方面的国际交流与合作，推动构建和平、安全、开放、合作的网络空间，建立多边、 民主、透明的网络治理体系。\n\n第八条 国家网信部门负责统筹协调网络安全工作和相关监督管理工作。国务院电 信主管部门、公安部门和其他有关机关依照本法和有关法律、行政法规的规定，在各自职 责范围内负责网络安全保护和监督管理工作。\n\n县级以上地方人民政府有关部门的网络安全保护和监督管理职责，按照国家有关规定 确定。\n\n第九条 网络运营者开展经营和服务活动，必须遵守法律、行政法规，尊重社会公 德，遵守商业道德，诚实信用，履行网络安全保护义务，接受政府和社会的监督，承担社 会责任。\n\n第十条 建设、运营网络或者通过网络提供服务，应当依照法律、行政法规的规定 和国家标准的强制性要求，采取技术措施和其他必要措施，保障网络安全、稳定运行，有 效应对网络安全事件，防范网络违法犯罪活动，维护网络数据的完整性、保密性和可用性。\n\n第十-条 网络相关行业组织按照章程，加强行业自律，制定网络安全行为规范， 指导会员加强网络安全保护，提高网络安全保护水平，促进行业健康发展。\n\n第十二条 国家保护公民、法人和其他组织依法使用网络的权利，促进网络接入普 及，提升网络服务水平，为社会提供安全、便利的网络服务，保障网络信息依法有序自由 流动。\n\nSource: http://www.npc.gov.cn/npc/xinwen/2016-11/07/content\\_2001605.htm Accessed: 28-March\\_2018", + "recall": 0.9743589743589743, + "true_md": "Source: http://www.npc.gov.cn/npc/xinwen/2016-11/07/content\\_2001605.htm Accessed: 28-March\\_2018\n\n第五条 国家采取措施，监测、防御、处置来源于中华人民共和国境内外的网络安 全风险和威胁，保护关键信息基础设施免受攻击、侵入、干扰和破坏，依法惩治网络违法 犯罪活动，维护网络空间安全和秩序。\n\n第六条 国家倡导诚实守信、健康文明的网络行为，推动传播社会主义核心价值观， 采取措施提高全社会的网络安全意识和水平，形成全社会共同参与促进网络安全的良好环 境。\n\n第七条 国家积极开展网络空间治理、网络技术研发和标准制定、打击网络违法犯 罪等方面的国际交流与合作，推动构建和平、安全、开放、合作的网络空间，建立多边、 民主、透明的网络治理体系。\n\n第八条 国家网信部门负责统筹协调网络安全工作和相关监督管理工作。国务院电 信主管部门、公安部门和其他有关机关依照本法和有关法律、行政法规的规定，在各自职 责范围内负责网络安全保护和监督管理工作。\n\n县级以上地方人民政府有关部门的网络安全保护和监督管理职责，按照国家有关规定 确定。\n\n第九条 网络运营者开展经营和服务活动，必须遵守法律、行政法规，尊重社会公 德，遵守商业道德，诚实信用，履行网络安全保护义务，接受政府和社会的监督，承担社 会责任。\n\n第十条 建设、运营网络或者通过网络提供服务，应当依照法律、行政法规的规定 和国家标准的强制性要求，采取技术措施和其他必要措施，保障网络安全、稳定运行，有 效应对网络安全事件，防范网络违法犯罪活动，维护网络数据的完整性、保密性和可用性。\n\n第十一条 网络相关行业组织按照章程，加强行业自律，制定网络安全行为规范， 指导会员加强网络安全保护，提高网络安全保护水平，促进行业健康发展。\n\n第十二条 国家保护公民、法人和其他组织依法使用网络的权利，促进网络接入普 及，提升网络服务水平，为社会提供安全、便利的网络服务，保障网络信息依法有序自由 流动。" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7347120998819068, + "doc_id": "9592bf47e367efb42b799c58445f75a25b2b3faf8da4e7c2b5baaed96c17ecd0", + "edit_distance": 0.3409090909090909, + "f1_score": 0.9066666666666666, + "meteor": 0.9068012352732717, + "precision": 0.8947368421052632, + "pred_md": "第三十七条 关键信息基础设施的运营者在中华人民共和国境内运营中收集和产生 的个人信息和重要数据应当在境内存储。因业务需要，确需向境外提供的，应当按照国家 网信部门会同国务院有关部门制定的办法进行安全评估；法律、行政法规另有规定的，依 照其规定。\n\n第三十八条 关键信息基础设施的运营者应当自行或者委托网络安全服务机构对其 网络的安全性和可能存在的风险每年至少进行-次检测评估，并将检测评估情况和改进措 施报送相关负责关键信息基础设施安全保护工作的部门。\n\n第三十九条 国家网信部门应当统筹协调有关部门对关键信息基础设施的安全保护 采取下列措施：\n\n- （-）对关键信息基础设施的安全风险进行抽查检测，提出改进措施，必要时可以委 托网络安全服务机构对网络存在的安全风险进行检测评估；\n- （二）定期组织关键信息基础设施的运营者进行网络安全应急演练，提高应对网络安 全事件的水平和协同配合能力；\n- （三）促进有关部门、关键信息基础设施的运营者以及有关研究机构、网络安全服务 机构等之间的网络安全信息共享；\n- （四）对网络安全事件的应急处置与网络功能的恢复等，提供技术支持和协助。\n\n## 第四章 网络信息安全\n\n第四十条 网络运营者应当对其收集的用户信息严格保密，并建立健全用户信息保 护制度。\n\n第四十-条 网络运营者收集、使用个人信息，应当遵循合法、正当、必要的原则， 公开收集、使用规则，明示收集、使用信息的目的、方式和范围，并经被收集者同意。\n\n网络运营者不得收集与其提供的服务无关的个人信息，不得违反法律、行政法规的规 定和双方的约定收集、使用个人信息，并应当依照法律、行政法规的规定和与用户的约定， 处理其保存的个人信息。\n\nSource: http://www.npc.gov.cn/npc/xinwen/2016-11/07/content\\_2001605.htm Accessed: 28-March\\_2018", + "recall": 0.918918918918919, + "true_md": "第三十七条 关键信息基础设施的运营者在中华人民共和国境内运营中收集和产生 的个人信息和重要数据应当在境内存储。因业务需要，确需向境外提供的，应当按照国家 网信部门会同国务院有关部门制定的办法进行安全评估；法律、行政法规另有规定的，依 照其规定。\n\n第三十八条 关键信息基础设施的运营者应当自行或者委托网络安全服务机构对其 网络的安全性和可能存在的风险每年至少进行一次检测评估，并将检测评估情况和改进措 施报送相关负责关键信息基础设施安全保护工作的部门。\n\n第三十九条 国家网信部门应当统筹协调有关部门对关键信息基础设施的安全保护 采取下列措施：\n\n（一）对关键信息基础设施的安全风险进行抽查检测，提出改进措施，必要时可以委 托网络安全服务机构对网络存在的安全风险进行检测评估；\n\n（二）定期组织关键信息基础设施的运营者进行网络安全应急演练，提高应对网络安 全事件的水平和协同配合能力；\n\n（三）促进有关部门、关键信息基础设施的运营者以及有关研究机构、网络安全服务 机构等之间的网络安全信息共享；\n\n（四）对网络安全事件的应急处置与网络功能的恢复等，提供技术支持和协助。\n\n第四十条 网络运营者应当对其收集的用户信息严格保密，并建立健全用户信息保 护制度。\n\n第四十一条 网络运营者收集、使用个人信息，应当遵循合法、正当、必要的原则， 公开收集、使用规则，明示收集、使用信息的目的、方式和范围，并经被收集者同意。\n\n网络运营者不得收集与其提供的服务无关的个人信息，不得违反法律、行政法规的规 定和双方的约定收集、使用个人信息，并应当依照法律、行政法规的规定和与用户的约定， 处理其保存的个人信息。\n\n## 第四章 网络信息安全\n\nSource: http://www.npc.gov.cn/npc/xinwen/2016-11/07/content\\_2001605.htm Accessed: 28-March\\_2018" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7940978635424073, + "doc_id": "c222705dbe82ddaf229742ac5e75d4431971544e968e653d1c434f1fdd524ccd", + "edit_distance": 0.35714285714285715, + "f1_score": 0.8205128205128205, + "meteor": 0.8283576287657922, + "precision": 0.8205128205128205, + "pred_md": "（三）向社会发布网络安全风险预警，发布避免、减轻危害的措施。\n\n第五十五条 发生网络安全事件，应当立即启动网络安全事件应急预案，对网络安 全事件进行调查和评估，要求网络运营者采取技术措施和其他必要措施，消除安全隐患， 防止危害扩大，并及时向社会发布与公众有关的警示信息。\n\n第五十六条 省级以上人民政府有关部门在履行网络安全监督管理职责中，发现网 络存在较大安全风险或者发生安全事件的，可以按照规定的权限和程序对该网络的运营者 的法定代表人或者主要负责人进行约谈。网络运营者应当按照要求采取措施，进行整改， 消除隐患。\n\n第五十七条 因网络安全事件，发生突发事件或者生产安全事故的，应当依照《中 华人民共和国突发事件应对法》、《中华人民共和国安全生产法》等有关法律、行政法规 的规定处置。\n\n第五十八条 因维护国家安全和社会公共秩序，处置重大突发社会安全事件的需要， 经国务院决定或者批准，可以在特定区域对网络通信采取限制等临时措施。\n\n## 第六章 法律责任\n\n第五十九条 网络运营者不履行本法第二十-条、第二十五条规定的网络安全保护 义务的，由有关主管部门责令改正，给予警告；拒不改正或者导致危害网络安全等后果的， 处-万元以上十万元以下罚款，对直接负责的主管人员处五千元以上五万元以下罚款。\n\n关键信息基础设施的运营者不履行本法第三十三条、第三十四条、第三十六条、第三 十八条规定的网络安全保护义务的，由有关主管部门责令改正，给予警告；拒不改正或者 导致危害网络安全等后果的，处十万元以上-百万元以下罚款，对直接负责的主管人员处 -万元以上十万元以下罚款。\n\n第六十条 违反本法第二十二条第-款、第二款和第四十八条第-款规定，有下列 行为之-的，由有关主管部门责令改正，给予警告；拒不改正或者导致危害网络安全等后 果的，处五万元以上五十万元以下罚款，对直接负责的主管人员处-万元以上十万元以下 罚款：\n\nSource: http://www.npc.gov.cn/npc/xinwen/2016-11/07/content\\_2001605.htm Accessed: 28-March\\_2018", + "recall": 0.8205128205128205, + "true_md": "（三）向社会发布网络安全风险预警，发布避免、减轻危害的措施。\n\n第五十五条 发生网络安全事件，应当立即启动网络安全事件应急预案，对网络安 全事件进行调查和评估，要求网络运营者采取技术措施和其他必要措施，消除安全隐患， 防止危害扩大，并及时向社会发布与公众有关的警示信息。\n\n第五十六条 省级以上人民政府有关部门在履行网络安全监督管理职责中，发现网 络存在较大安全风险或者发生安全事件的，可以按照规定的权限和程序对该网络的运营者 的法定代表人或者主要负责人进行约谈。网络运营者应当按照要求采取措施，进行整改， 消除隐患。\n\n第五十七条 因网络安全事件，发生突发事件或者生产安全事故的，应当依照《中 华人民共和国突发事件应对法》、《中华人民共和国安全生产法》等有关法律、行政法规 的规定处置。\n\n第五十八条 因维护国家安全和社会公共秩序，处置重大突发社会安全事件的需要， 经国务院决定或者批准，可以在特定区域对网络通信采取限制等临时措施。\n\n第五十九条 网络运营者不履行本法第二十一条、第二十五条规定的网络安全保护 义务的，由有关主管部门责令改正，给予警告；拒不改正或者导致危害网络安全等后果的， 处一万元以上十万元以下罚款，对直接负责的主管人员处五千元以上五万元以下罚款。\n\n关键信息基础设施的运营者不履行本法第三十三条、第三十四条、第三十六条、第三 十八条规定的网络安全保护义务的，由有关主管部门责令改正，给予警告；拒不改正或者 导致危害网络安全等后果的，处十万元以上一百万元以下罚款，对直接负责的主管人员处 一万元以上十万元以下罚款。\n\n第六十条 违反本法第二十二条第一款、第二款和第四十八条第一款规定，有下列 行为之一的，由有关主管部门责令改正，给予警告；拒不改正或者导致危害网络安全等后 果的，处五万元以上五十万元以下罚款，对直接负责的主管人员处一万元以上十万元以下 罚款：\n\n## 第六章 法律责任\n\nSource: http://www.npc.gov.cn/npc/xinwen/2016-11/07/content\\_2001605.htm Accessed: 28-March\\_2018" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7566211523814398, + "doc_id": "3683ba4c83cf8024336881e8bf34a67eb76c3da0e3fef598b54886e52a468a25", + "edit_distance": 0.3111111111111111, + "f1_score": 0.875, + "meteor": 0.8452286746205665, + "precision": 0.875, + "pred_md": "第三十条 网信部门和有关部门在履行网络安全保护职责中获取的信息，只能用于 维护网络安全的需要，不得用于其他用途。\n\n第二节 关键信息基础设施的运行安全\n\n第三十-条 国家对公共通信和信息服务、能源、交通、水利、金融、公共服务、 电子政务等重要行业和领域，以及其他-旦遭到破坏、丧失功能或者数据泄露，可能严重 危害国家安全、国计民生、公共利益的关键信息基础设施，在网络安全等级保护制度的基 础上，实行重点保护。关键信息基础设施的具体范围和安全保护办法由国务院制定。\n\n国家鼓励关键信息基础设施以外的网络运营者自愿参与关键信息基础设施保护体系。\n\n第三十二条 按照国务院规定的职责分工，负责关键信息基础设施安全保护工作的 部门分别编制并组织实施本行业、本领域的关键信息基础设施安全规划，指导和监督关键 信息基础设施运行安全保护工作。\n\n第三十三条 建设关键信息基础设施应当确保其具有支持业务稳定、持续运行的性 能，并保证安全技术措施同步规划、同步建设、同步使用。\n\n第三十四条 除本法第二十-条的规定外，关键信息基础设施的运营者还应当履行 下列安全保护义务：\n\n（-）设置专门安全管理机构和安全管理负责人，并对该负责人和关键岗位的人员进 行安全背景审查；\n\n- （二）定期对从业人员进行网络安全教育、技术培训和技能考核；\n- （三）对重要系统和数据库进行容灾备份；\n- （四）制定网络安全事件应急预案，并定期进行演练；\n- （五）法律、行政法规规定的其他义务。\n\n第三十五条 关键信息基础设施的运营者采购网络产品和服务，可能影响国家安 全的，应当通过国家网信部门会同国务院有关部门组织的国家安全审查。\n\n第三十六条 关键信息基础设施的运营者采购网络产品和服务，应当按照规定与提 供者签订安全保密协议，明确安全和保密义务与责任。\n\nSource: http://www.npc.gov.cn/npc/xinwen/2016-11/07/content\\_2001605.htm Accessed: 28-March\\_2018", + "recall": 0.875, + "true_md": "第三十条 网信部门和有关部门在履行网络安全保护职责中获取的信息，只能用于 维护网络安全的需要，不得用于其他用途。\n\n第三十一条 国家对公共通信和信息服务、能源、交通、水利、金融、公共服务、 电子政务等重要行业和领域，以及其他一旦遭到破坏、丧失功能或者数据泄露，可能严重 危害国家安全、国计民生、公共利益的关键信息基础设施，在网络安全等级保护制度的基 础上，实行重点保护。关键信息基础设施的具体范围和安全保护办法由国务院制定。\n\n国家鼓励关键信息基础设施以外的网络运营者自愿参与关键信息基础设施保护体系。\n\n第三十二条 按照国务院规定的职责分工，负责关键信息基础设施安全保护工作的 部门分别编制并组织实施本行业、本领域的关键信息基础设施安全规划，指导和监督关键 信息基础设施运行安全保护工作。\n\n第三十三条 建设关键信息基础设施应当确保其具有支持业务稳定、持续运行的性 能，并保证安全技术措施同步规划、同步建设、同步使用。\n\n## 第二节 关键信息基础设施的运行安全\n\n第三十四条 除本法第二十一条的规定外，关键信息基础设施的运营者还应当履行 下列安全保护义务：\n\n（一）设置专门安全管理机构和安全管理负责人，并对该负责人和关键岗位的人员进 行安全背景审查；\n\n（二）定期对从业人员进行网络安全教育、技术培训和技能考核；\n\n（三）对重要系统和数据库进行容灾备份；\n\n（四）制定网络安全事件应急预案，并定期进行演练；\n\n（五）法律、行政法规规定的其他义务。\n\n第三十五条 关键信息基础设施的运营者采购网络产品和服务，可能影响国家安 全的，应当通过国家网信部门会同国务院有关部门组织的国家安全审查。\n\n第三十六条 关键信息基础设施的运营者采购网络产品和服务，应当按照规定与提 供者签订安全保密协议，明确安全和保密义务与责任。\n\nSource: http://www.npc.gov.cn/npc/xinwen/2016-11/07/content\\_2001605.htm Accessed: 28-March\\_2018" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9237867819679595, + "doc_id": "5c5d5148609e4c40cf30e2c3f178a1fb249605753357ca7d9083be91ddad2508", + "edit_distance": 0.21428571428571427, + "f1_score": 0.9743589743589742, + "meteor": 0.9757372312399082, + "precision": 0.9743589743589743, + "pred_md": "任何个人和组织使用网络应当遵守宪法法律，遵守公共秩序，尊重社会公德，不得危 害网络安全，不得利用网络从事危害国家安全、荣誉和利益，煽动颠覆国家政权、推翻社 会主义制度，煽动分裂国家、破坏国家统-，宣扬恐怖主义、极端主义，宣扬民族仇恨、 民族歧视，传播暴力、淫秽色情信息，编造、传播虚假信息扰乱经济秩序和社会秩序，以 及侵害他人名誉、隐私、知识产权和其他合法权益等活动。\n\n第十三条 国家支持研究开发有利于未成年人健康成长的网络产品和服务，依法惩 治利用网络从事危害未成年人身心健康的活动，为未成年人提供安全、健康的网络环境。\n\n第十四条 任何个人和组织有权对危害网络安全的行为向网信、电信、公安等部门 举报。收到举报的部门应当及时依法作出处理；不属于本部门职责的，应当及时移送有权 处理的部门。\n\n有关部门应当对举报人的相关信息予以保密，保护举报人的合法权益。\n\n## 第二章 网络安全支持与促进\n\n第十五条 国家建立和完善网络安全标准体系。国务院标准化行政主管部门和国务 院其他有关部门根据各自的职责，组织制定并适时修订有关网络安全管理以及网络产品、 服务和运行安全的国家标准、行业标准。\n\n国家支持企业、研究机构、高等学校、网络相关行业组织参与网络安全国家标准、行 业标准的制定。\n\n第十六条 国务院和省、自治区、直辖市人民政府应当统筹规划，加大投入，扶持 重点网络安全技术产业和项目，支持网络安全技术的研究开发和应用，推广安全可信的网 络产品和服务，保护网络技术知识产权，支持企业、研究机构和高等学校等参与国家网络 安全技术创新项目。\n\n第十七条 国家推进网络安全社会化服务体系建设，鼓励有关企业、机构开展网络 安全认证、检测和风险评估等安全服务。\n\n第十八条 国家鼓励开发网络数据安全保护和利用技术，促进公共数据资源开放， 推动技术创新和经济社会发展。\n\nSource: http://www.npc.gov.cn/npc/xinwen/2016-11/07/content\\_2001605.htm Accessed: 28-March\\_2018", + "recall": 0.9743589743589743, + "true_md": "任何个人和组织使用网络应当遵守宪法法律，遵守公共秩序，尊重社会公德，不得危 害网络安全，不得利用网络从事危害国家安全、荣誉和利益，煽动颠覆国家政权、推翻社 会主义制度，煽动分裂国家、破坏国家统一，宣扬恐怖主义、极端主义，宣扬民族仇恨、 民族歧视，传播暴力、淫秽色情信息，编造、传播虚假信息扰乱经济秩序和社会秩序，以 及侵害他人名誉、隐私、知识产权和其他合法权益等活动。\n\n第十三条 国家支持研究开发有利于未成年人健康成长的网络产品和服务，依法惩 治利用网络从事危害未成年人身心健康的活动，为未成年人提供安全、健康的网络环境。\n\n第十四条 任何个人和组织有权对危害网络安全的行为向网信、电信、公安等部门 举报。收到举报的部门应当及时依法作出处理；不属于本部门职责的，应当及时移送有权 处理的部门。\n\n有关部门应当对举报人的相关信息予以保密，保护举报人的合法权益。\n\n第十五条 国家建立和完善网络安全标准体系。国务院标准化行政主管部门和国务 院其他有关部门根据各自的职责，组织制定并适时修订有关网络安全管理以及网络产品、 服务和运行安全的国家标准、行业标准。\n\n国家支持企业、研究机构、高等学校、网络相关行业组织参与网络安全国家标准、行 业标准的制定。\n\n第十六条 国务院和省、自治区、直辖市人民政府应当统筹规划，加大投入，扶持 重点网络安全技术产业和项目，支持网络安全技术的研究开发和应用，推广安全可信的网 络产品和服务，保护网络技术知识产权，支持企业、研究机构和高等学校等参与国家网络 安全技术创新项目。\n\n第十七条 国家推进网络安全社会化服务体系建设，鼓励有关企业、机构开展网络 安全认证、检测和风险评估等安全服务。\n\n第十八条 国家鼓励开发网络数据安全保护和利用技术，促进公共数据资源开放， 推动技术创新和经济社会发展。\n\nSource: http://www.npc.gov.cn/npc/xinwen/2016-11/07/content\\_2001605.htm Accessed: 28-March\\_2018\n\n## 第二章 网络安全支持与促进" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.766078667187954, + "doc_id": "44173ee2d452b91862f8e5efcd09b5379094fa6ae171208a59b362aafc022aa5", + "edit_distance": 0.15, + "f1_score": 0.9649122807017544, + "meteor": 0.868298878302029, + "precision": 0.9649122807017544, + "pred_md": "## 中华人民共和国网络安全法\n\n（ 2016 年 11 月 7 日第十二届全国人民代表大会常务委员会第二十四次会议通过）\n\n浏览字号： 大 中 小来源： 中国人大网 2016 年 11 月 7 日 17:31:34\n\n## 目 录\n\n第一章\n\n总\n\n则\n\n第二章 网络安全支持与促进\n\n第三章\n\n网络运行安全\n\n第一节\n\n一般规定\n\n第二节\n\n关键信息基础设施的运行安全\n\n第四章\n\n网络信息安全\n\n第五章\n\n监测预警与应急处置\n\n第六章\n\n法律责任\n\n第七章\n\n附 则\n\n## 第-章 总 则\n\n第-条 为了保障网络安全，维护网络空间主权和国家安全、社会公共利益，保护 公民、法人和其他组织的合法权益，促进经济社会信息化健康发展，制定本法。\n\n第二条 在中华人民共和国境内建设、运营、维护和使用网络，以及网络安全的监 督管理，适用本法。\n\n第三条 国家坚持网络安全与信息化发展并重，遵循积极利用、科学发展、依法管 理、确保安全的方针，推进网络基础设施建设和互联互通，鼓励网络技术创新和应用，支 持培养网络安全人才，建立健全网络安全保障体系，提高网络安全保护能力。\n\n第四条 国家制定并不断完善网络安全战略，明确保障网络安全的基本要求和主要 目标，提出重点领域的网络安全政策、工作任务和措施。\n\nSource: http://www.npc.gov.cn/npc/xinwen/2016-11/07/content\\_2001605.htm Accessed: 28-March\\_2018", + "recall": 0.9649122807017544, + "true_md": "# 中华人民共和国网络安全法\n\n（ 2016 年 11 月 7 日第十二届全国人民代表大会常务委员会第二十四次会议通过）\n\n浏览字号： 大 中 小来源： 中国人大网 2016 年 11 月 7 日 17:31:34 \n\n## 目 录\n\n- 第一章 总 则\n\n- 第二章 网络安全支持与促进\n\n- 第三章 网络运行安全\n\n- 第一节 一般规定\n\n- 第二节 关键信息基础设施的运行安全\n\n- 第四章 网络信息安全\n\n- 第五章 监测预警与应急处置\n\n- 第六章 法律责任\n\n- 第七章 附 则\n\n## 第一章 总 则\n\n第一条 为了保障网络安全，维护网络空间主权和国家安全、社会公共利益，保护 公民、法人和其他组织的合法权益，促进经济社会信息化健康发展，制定本法。\n\n第二条 在中华人民共和国境内建设、运营、维护和使用网络，以及网络安全的监 督管理，适用本法。\n\n第三条 国家坚持网络安全与信息化发展并重，遵循积极利用、科学发展、依法管 理、确保安全的方针，推进网络基础设施建设和互联互通，鼓励网络技术创新和应用，支 持培养网络安全人才，建立健全网络安全保障体系，提高网络安全保护能力。\n\n第四条 国家制定并不断完善网络安全战略，明确保障网络安全的基本要求和主要 目标，提出重点领域的网络安全政策、工作任务和措施。\n\nSource: http://www.npc.gov.cn/npc/xinwen/2016-11/07/content\\_2001605.htm Accessed: 28-March\\_2018" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7502078386116189, + "doc_id": "4616427e89d54d5138fa2374c36fcb90c15424dbc750b3f5be6b835f1a519383", + "edit_distance": 0.24324324324324326, + "f1_score": 0.7428571428571429, + "meteor": 0.7530336458907886, + "precision": 0.7428571428571429, + "pred_md": "第六十四条 网络运营者、网络产品或者服务的提供者违反本法第二十二条第三款、 第四十-条至第四十三条规定，侵害个人信息依法得到保护的权利的，由有关主管部门责 令改正，可以根据情节单处或者并处警告、没收违法所得、处违法所得-倍以上十倍以下 罚款，没有违法所得的，处-百万元以下罚款，对直接负责的主管人员和其他直接责任人 员处-万元以上十万元以下罚款；情节严重的，并可以责令暂停相关业务、停业整顿、关 闭网站、吊销相关业务许可证或者吊销营业执照。\n\n违反本法第四十四条规定，窃取或者以其他非法方式获取、非法出售或者非法向他人 提供个人信息，尚不构成犯罪的，由公安机关没收违法所得，并处违法所得-倍以上十倍 以下罚款，没有违法所得的，处-百万元以下罚款。\n\n第六十五条 关键信息基础设施的运营者违反本法第三十五条规定，使用未经安全 审查或者安全审查未通过的网络产品或者服务的，由有关主管部门责令停止使用，处采购 金额-倍以上十倍以下罚款；对直接负责的主管人员和其他直接责任人员处-万元以上十 万元以下罚款。\n\n第六十六条 关键信息基础设施的运营者违反本法第三十七条规定，在境外存储网 络数据，或者向境外提供网络数据的，由有关主管部门责令改正，给予警告，没收违法所 得，处五万元以上五十万元以下罚款，并可以责令暂停相关业务、停业整顿、关闭网站、 吊销相关业务许可证或者吊销营业执照；对直接负责的主管人员和其他直接责任人员处- 万元以上十万元以下罚款。\n\n第六十七条 违反本法第四十六条规定，设立用于实施违法犯罪活动的网站、通讯 群组，或者利用网络发布涉及实施违法犯罪活动的信息，尚不构成犯罪的，由公安机关处 五日以下拘留，可以并处-万元以上十万元以下罚款；情节较重的，处五日以上十五日以 下拘留，可以并处五万元以上五十万元以下罚款。关闭用于实施违法犯罪活动的网站、通 讯群组。\n\n单位有前款行为的，由公安机关处十万元以上五十万元以下罚款，并对直接负责的主 管人员和其他直接责任人员依照前款规定处罚。\n\nSource: http://www.npc.gov.cn/npc/xinwen/2016-11/07/content\\_2001605.htm Accessed: 28-March\\_2018", + "recall": 0.7428571428571429, + "true_md": "第六十四条 网络运营者、网络产品或者服务的提供者违反本法第二十二条第三款、 第四十一条至第四十三条规定，侵害个人信息依法得到保护的权利的，由有关主管部门责 令改正，可以根据情节单处或者并处警告、没收违法所得、处违法所得一倍以上十倍以下 罚款，没有违法所得的，处一百万元以下罚款，对直接负责的主管人员和其他直接责任人 员处一万元以上十万元以下罚款；情节严重的，并可以责令暂停相关业务、停业整顿、关 闭网站、吊销相关业务许可证或者吊销营业执照。\n\n违反本法第四十四条规定，窃取或者以其他非法方式获取、非法出售或者非法向他人 提供个人信息，尚不构成犯罪的，由公安机关没收违法所得，并处违法所得一倍以上十倍 以下罚款，没有违法所得的，处一百万元以下罚款。\n\n第六十五条 关键信息基础设施的运营者违反本法第三十五条规定，使用未经安全 审查或者安全审查未通过的网络产品或者服务的，由有关主管部门责令停止使用，处采购 金额一倍以上十倍以下罚款；对直接负责的主管人员和其他直接责任人员处一万元以上十 万元以下罚款。\n\n第六十六条 关键信息基础设施的运营者违反本法第三十七条规定，在境外存储网 络数据，或者向境外提供网络数据的，由有关主管部门责令改正，给予警告，没收违法所 得，处五万元以上五十万元以下罚款，并可以责令暂停相关业务、停业整顿、关闭网站、 吊销相关业务许可证或者吊销营业执照；对直接负责的主管人员和其他直接责任人员处一 万元以上十万元以下罚款。\n\n第六十七条 违反本法第四十六条规定，设立用于实施违法犯罪活动的网站、通讯 群组，或者利用网络发布涉及实施违法犯罪活动的信息，尚不构成犯罪的，由公安机关处 五日以下拘留，可以并处一万元以上十万元以下罚款；情节较重的，处五日以上十五日以 下拘留，可以并处五万元以上五十万元以下罚款。关闭用于实施违法犯罪活动的网站、通 讯群组。\n\n单位有前款行为的，由公安机关处十万元以上五十万元以下罚款，并对直接负责的主 管人员和其他直接责任人员依照前款规定处罚。\n\nSource: http://www.npc.gov.cn/npc/xinwen/2016-11/07/content\\_2001605.htm Accessed: 28-March\\_2018" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6729884791546353, + "doc_id": "2542b094a5da8b58a678d7a8bb7c90bfd3b53edbab58a351d6623b98e3d6181f", + "edit_distance": 0.31647940074906367, + "f1_score": 0.8238341968911918, + "meteor": 0.9479485317820897, + "precision": 0.7066666666666667, + "pred_md": "the tenderer to deliver the services to ECHA under the Framework Contract.\n\n- · T 2.2 : ISO 27001:2013 or equivalent (specify): covering all systems, premises, procedures and practices related to the tasks and services that require remote access to ECHA IT systems by the tenderer, as described in the Technical Specifications.\n\nBasis for assessment\n\nThis criterion applies individually to all entities involved in the delivery and service provision for this contract.\n\n## Evidence\n\nTenderers shall provide evidence in the form of copy(ies) of certificate(s), accompanied by information about the certificate, or any equivalent evidence, using the forms provided in Annex 10 and Annex 11.\n\nThe respective certifications or equivalent must be valid at the time of submitting the tender for this procurement procedure, and shall remain valid during the whole period of implementation of the framework contract, in case of contract award.\n\n→ All of the above specified evidence of technical and professional capacity must be provided with the tender.\n\n## 3.2.4. Professional conflicting interest\n\nAs per point 20.6 of Annex 1 to the EU Financial Regulation, economic operators must not be subject to conflicting interests that may negatively affect the contract performance. 'Professional conflicting interest(s)' is a situation in which the contractor's previous or ongoing professional activities affect its capacity to implement the FWC or to perform a specific contract to an appropriate quality standard.\n\nIn the context of the services in scope of this FWC and the tasks to be performed across Lot 1 and Lot 2, this can apply, for instance, for tasks entrusted to the contractor under Lot 1, such as peer review, quality assurance and control activities on work being carried out by the contractor under Lot 2, or for any other consultancy service for which the nature of the tasks to be performed creates a situation of conflict of interest that may negatively affect the performance of the contractor under any of the lots.\n\nDuring the implementation of the FWC a contractor who receives a request for offer must provide all relevant information enabling the Contracting Authority to assess whether the signature of a specific contract would entail such a professional conflicting interest between the service requested and a previous or on-going work carried out by the same contractor (or subcontractor) or related parties.\n\nIf the conclusion is that such a professional conflicting interest would indeed exist, the contractor must decline to submit an offer.\n\nIf the contractor submits an offer without declaring a professional conflicting interest, the contracting authority may nevertheless itself assess the situation on the basis of the information provided by the contractor, and/or on the basis of any information available to it. In this case, the Contracting Authority may inform the contractor that the offer cannot be accepted and, activate the cascade mechanism (where applicable) or exclude the offer from further assessment under the re-opening of competition.\n\n27", + "recall": 0.9875776397515528, + "true_md": "## → All of the above specified evidence of technical and professional capacity must be provided with the tender.\n\n## 3.2.4. Professional conflicting interest\n\nAs per point 20.6 of Annex 1 to the EU Financial Regulation, economic operators must not be subject to conflicting interests that may negatively affect the contract performance. ‘Professional conflicting interest(s)’ is a situation in which the contractor’s previous or ongoing professional activities affect its capacity to implement the FWC or to perform a specific contract to an appropriate quality standard.\n\nIn the context of the services in scope of this FWC and the tasks to be performed across Lot 1 and Lot 2, this can apply, for instance, for tasks entrusted to the contractor under Lot 1, such as peer review, quality assurance and control activities on work being carried out by the contractor under Lot 2, or for any other consultancy service for which the nature of the tasks to be performed creates a situation of conflict of interest that may negatively affect the performance of the contractor under any of the lots.\n\nDuring the implementation of the FWC a contractor who receives a request for offer must provide all relevant information enabling the Contracting Authority to assess whether the signature of a specific contract would entail such a professional conflicting interest between the service requested and a previous or on-going work carried out by the same contractor (or subcontractor) or related parties.\n\nIf the conclusion is that such a professional conflicting interest would indeed exist, the contractor must decline to submit an offer.\n\nIf the contractor submits an offer without declaring a professional conflicting interest, the contracting authority may nevertheless itself assess the situation on the basis of the information provided by the contractor, and/or on the basis of any information available to it. In this case, the Contracting Authority may inform the contractor that the offer cannot be accepted and, activate the cascade mechanism (where applicable) or exclude the offer from further assessment under the re-opening of competition.\n\n27" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9433341104123202, + "doc_id": "5f0d31e0c6e5b4b12d7ce22ef59aa501d82c75cc4dbc0eb0d6f288c350dac2ba", + "edit_distance": 0.6394557823129252, + "f1_score": 0.9878542510121456, + "meteor": 0.8172447270082819, + "precision": 0.991869918699187, + "pred_md": "## 7 TENDERER'S DECLARATION(S)\n\nAs part of their tender, each legal entity identified under point 1 of this form, including every consortium member, as well as each capacity-providing entity and each subcontractor providing more than 10% of the supplies, must submit a signed declaration using this format, together with the declaration of honour on exclusion and selection criteria (Annex 1) (insert Form a.14). The declaration may be in original or in copy. If copies are submitted the originals must be dispatched to the contracting authority upon request.\n\nIn response to your letter of invitation to tender for the above contract,\n\n- we, the undersigned, hereby declare that:\n- 1 We have examined and accept in full the content of the dossier for invitation to tender No <……………………………….> of <date>. We hereby accept its provisions in their entirety, without reservation or restriction.\n- 2 We offer to deliver, in accordance with the terms of the tender dossier and the conditions and time limits laid down, without reserve or restriction:\n- Lot 1: < description of supplies with indication of quantities and origin >\n\nLot 2:\n\n- < description of supplies with indication of quantities and origin >\n- Lot 3: < description of supplies with indication of quantities and origin\n- >\n- Lot 4: < description of supplies with indication of quantities and origin >\n- 3 The price of our tender excluding spare parts and consumables, if applicable (excluding the discounts described under point 4) is:\n- 4 We will grant a discount of [<…>%], or [<…………..>] [in the event of our being awarded lot … and lot … ………].\n- 5 This tender is valid for a period of 90 days from the final date for submission of tenders.\n- 6 If our tender is accepted, we undertake to provide a performance guarantee as required by Article 11 of the special conditions.\n- 7 Our firm/company [and our subcontractors] has/have the following nationality:\n- Lot 1: <insert price and currency>\n\nLot 2: <insert price and currency>\n\n- Lot 3: <insert price and currency>\n- Lot 4: <insert price and currency>\n\n<\n\n……………………………………………………………………\n\n>\n\n- 8 We are making this tender in our own right [as member in the consortium led by [< name of the leader >] [ourselves]*. We confirm that we are not tendering for the same contract in any other form. [We confirm, as a member in the consortium, that all members are jointly and severally liable by law for the execution of the contract, that the lead member is authorised to bind, and receive instructions for and on behalf of, each member, that the execution of the contract, including payments, is the responsibility of the lead member, and that all members in the joint venture/consortium are bound to remain in the joint venture/consortium for the entire period of the contract's execution]. [We confirm, as capacity-providing entity to be jointly and severally bound in respect of the obligations under the contract, including for any recoverable amount.]\n- 9 In the event that our tender is successful, we undertake, if required, to provide the proof usual under the law of the country in which we are effectively established that we do not fall into any of the exclusion situations. The date on the evidence or documents provided will be no earlier than 1 year before the date of submission of the tender and, in addition,\n\nAugust 2020 c4\\_l\\_tenderform\\_en.doc\n\nPage 4 of 9", + "recall": 0.9838709677419355, + "true_md": "## 7 TENDERER’S DECLARATION(S)\n\nIn response to your letter of invitation to tender for the above contract, \n\nwe, the undersigned, hereby declare that: \n\n- 1 We have examined and accept in full the content of the dossier for invitation to tender No <……………………………….> of < date >. We hereby accept its provisions in their entirety, without reservation or restriction. \n\n- 2 We offer to deliver, in accordance with the terms of the tender dossier and the conditions and time limits laid down, without reserve or restriction: \n\n- 3 The price of our tender excluding spare parts and consumables, if applicable ( excluding the discounts described under point 4) i s: \n\n- 4 We will grant a discount of [< … >%], or [< ………….. >] [in the event of our being awarded lot … and lot … ………]. \n\n- 5 This tender is valid for a period of 90 days from the final date for submission of tenders. \n\n- 6 If our tender is accepted, we undertake to provide a performance guarantee as required by Article 11 of the special conditions. \n\n- 7 Our firm/company [ and our subcontractors] has/have the following nationality: \n\n- 8 We are making this tender in our own right [as member in the consortium led by [ < name of the leader >] [ ourselves ]*. We confirm that we are not tendering for the same contract in any other form. [ We confirm, as a member in the consortium, that all members are jointly and severally liable by law for the execution of the contract, that the lead member is authorised to bind, and receive instructions for and on behalf of, each member, that the execution of the contract, including payments, is the responsibility of the lead member, and that all members in the joint venture/consortium are bound to remain in the joint venture/consortium for the entire period of the contract’s execution]. [We confirm, as capacity-providing entity to be jointly and severally bound in respect of the obligations under the contract, including for any recoverable amount.] \n\n- 9 In the event that our tender is successful, we undertake, if required, to provide the proof usual under the law of the country in which we are effectively established that we do not fall into any of the exclusion situations. The date on the evidence or documents provided will be no earlier than 1 year before the date of submission of the tender and, in addition, \n\n< …………………………………………………………………… > \n\nLot 1: < insert price and currency > \n\nLot 2: < insert price and currency > \n\nLot 3: < insert price and currency > \n\nLot 4: < insert price and currency > \n\nLot 4: < description of supplies with indication of quantities and origin >\n\nLot 3: < description of supplies with indication of quantities and origin >\n\nLot 2: < description of supplies with indication of quantities and origin >\n\nLot 1: < description of supplies with indication of quantities and origin >\n\nAugust 2020 c4\\_l\\_tenderform\\_en.doc \n\nPage 4 of 9 \n\nAs part of their tender, each legal entity identified under point 1 of this form, including every consortium member, as well as each capacity-providing entity and each subcontractor providing more than 10% of the supplies, must submit a signed declaration using this format, together with the declaration of honour on exclusion and selection criteria (Annex 1) (i nsert Form a.14) . The declaration may be in original or in copy. If copies are submitted the originals must be dispatched to the contracting authority upon request." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8983222303007922, + "doc_id": "1049d918dace6807e3735b66ef0212821b7c4946c69894f598830f7781793fa8", + "edit_distance": 0.3087248322147651, + "f1_score": 0.9764150943396227, + "meteor": 0.9346503359625741, + "precision": 0.981042654028436, + "pred_md": "General Administrative and Submission Clauses\n\npresentation. Tenderers will not be permitted to modify the terms and conditions of their tender during their presentation or at any other time after the tender has been submitted to the EIB.\n\n## 4. Content and Submission of Tenders\n\n## 4.1. Language of the tender\n\nUnless otherwise provided in the 'Terms of Reference' tenders must be submitted in either in English or in French, since both are working languages of EIB. Any third-party certificates or documents (if required) whose original language is not English or French must be submitted in its original language together with an English or French translation.\n\n## 4.2. Content of the tender\n\nThe structure and content of the tender shall comply with the requirements set out in point 2 of the 'Terms of Reference'.\n\nDocumentation submitted must be recent, valid and not more than 12 (twelve) months old (unless otherwise permitted). Where documents would become obsolete during the procurement process, the EIB reserves the right to request such document again.\n\n## 4.3. Packaging the tender (in case of e-Submission, please refer to point 4.5 and Appendix I)\n\nTenders must be submitted using the double envelope system (i.e. three inner envelopes inside one outer envelope) in order to guarantee the confidentiality and integrity of data.\n\nInner Envelopes :\n\nTenders must be submitted enclosed in three sealed envelopes according to their content ( ' Envelope I - Administrative information ' , ' Envelope II - Technical proposal ' and ' Envelope III - Financial proposal' ).\n\nEach of these three inner envelopes must be sealed and bear a label identifying the envelope number, the name of the Tenderer and the Tender Reference.\n\nThe information contained in each inner envelope must be presented as one paper original and one electronic copy.\n\n- N.B. Electronic copies shall be provided in searchable OCR PDF format identical to the paper version and may be in the form of either CD/DVDs or USB devices but MUST NOT be password protected. In case of discrepancies between the paper and electronic versions, the paper version shall prevail.\n\n## Outer Envelope:\n\nThe three sealed inner envelopes shall be inserted in one sealed outer envelope which shall be marked as follows:\n\nTENDER- NOT TO BE OPENED BY INTERNAL MAIL DEPARTMENT\n\nTender Ref. No................................\n\nTender Title: ...................................\n\nName of the Tenderer ................................ :\n\nLast updated: June 2020\n\nPage 7 of 21", + "recall": 0.971830985915493, + "true_md": "General Administrative and Submission Clauses\n\nLast updated: June 2020\n\nPage 7 of 21 \n\n## 4. Content and Submission of Tenders\n\n## 4.1. Language of the tender\n\n## 4.2. Content of the tender\n\n## 4.3. Packaging the tender (in case of e-Submission, please refer to point 4.5 and Appendix I)\n\npresentation. Tenderers will not be permitted to modify the terms and conditions of their tender during their presentation or at any other time after the tender has been submitted to the EIB. \n\nUnless otherwise provided in the `Terms of Reference` tenders must be submitted in either in English or in French, since both are working languages of EIB. Any third-party certificates or documents (if required) whose original language is not English or French must be submitted in its original language together with an English or French translation. \n\nThe structure and content of the tender shall comply with the requirements set out in point 2 of the `Terms of Reference`. \n\nDocumentation submitted must be recent, valid and not more than 12 (twelve) months old (unless otherwise permitted). Where documents would become obsolete during the procurement process, the EIB reserves the right to request such document again. \n\nTenders must be submitted using the double envelope system (i.e. three inner envelopes inside one outer envelope) in order to guarantee the confidentiality and integrity of data.\n\nTenders must be submitted enclosed in three sealed envelopes according to their content ( ‘ Envelope I – Administrative information ’ , ‘ Envelope II – Technical proposal ’ and ‘ Envelope III – Financial proposal’ ). \n\nInner Envelopes : \n\nEach of these three inner envelopes must be sealed and bear a label identifying the envelope number, the name of the Tenderer and the Tender Reference.\n\nThe information contained in each inner envelope must be presented as one paper original and one electronic copy. \n\nN.B. Electronic copies shall be provided in searchable OCR PDF format identical to the paper version and may be in the form of either CD/DVDs or USB devices but MUST NOT be password protected. In case of discrepancies between the paper and electronic versions, the paper version shall prevail. \n\nOuter Envelope: \n\nThe three sealed inner envelopes shall be inserted in one sealed outer envelope which shall be marked as follows: \n\nTENDER– NOT TO BE OPENED BY INTERNAL MAIL DEPARTMENT\n\nTender Ref. No................................ \n\nTender Title: ................................... \n\nName of the Tenderer : ................................" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.37764856166892763, + "doc_id": "72346666890677f699172fac1ba855bc6baa8a6de9447876b8c1d0ef55ed2da6", + "edit_distance": 0.7513227513227513, + "f1_score": 0.6503067484662577, + "meteor": 0.8015827816718588, + "precision": 0.5047619047619047, + "pred_md": "- 2) Copies of the profit and loss accounts for the last two years for which accounts have been closed from each concerned involved entity.\n\nIf, for any valid reason, an economic operator is unable to provide the copies of the profit and loss accounts, it may prove its economic and financial capacity by any other document, which the Contracting Authority considers appropriate. The contracting authority must at least be notified of the reason and its justification.\n\nThe Contracting Authority reserves the right to request any other document enabling it to verify the economic operator's economic and financial capacity.\n\n→ All of the above specified evidence of economic and financial capacity must be provided with the tender.\n\n## 3.2.3. Technical and professional capacity\n\nTenderers must comply with the following selection criteria in order to prove that they have the necessary technical and professional capacity to perform the contract.\n\n## LOT 1\n\n15 Specific contracts under a framework contract, direct contracts (i.e. not under a framework contract) or subcontracts.\n\n20", + "recall": 0.9137931034482759, + "true_md": "15 Specific contracts under a framework contract, direct contracts (i.e. not under a framework contract) or sub- contracts.\n\n20\n\n## LOT 1\n\n## 3.2.3. Technical and professional capacity\n\n$_{→}$ All of the above specified evidence of economic and financial capacity must be provided with the tender. \n\nTenderers must comply with the following selection criteria in order to prove that they have the necessary technical and professional capacity to perform the contract." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.052992767432486876, + "doc_id": "bb85889b3c1664716efc4399945afbe60b674cec151db2dc2c98cd3d1786c2e5", + "edit_distance": 0.7674418604651163, + "f1_score": 0.46808510638297873, + "meteor": 0.28195488721804507, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Supplément 1 à l'Appendice 2 de l'Annexe VII\n\n90\n\nANNEX VII\n\nFR", + "recall": 0.3055555555555556, + "true_md": "Supplément 1 à l'Appendice 2 de l'Annexe VII\n\nNe jamais rejoindre les parkings \n\nNe jamais utiliser les ascenseurs \n\nDescendre jusqu'au niveau d'évacuation \n\nPorte de secours \n\nSens du chemin d'évacuation\n\nSirènes d'évacuation \n\nSUIVEZ TOUJOURS LES INSTRUCTIONS DONNÉES PAR HAUT-PARLEURS! \n\n90 FR \n\nANNEX VII" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.18133014878207243, + "doc_id": "8cbb80629318a8b93318d6d30a1dcea3486b34fd557dfc61ce8b02008babd093", + "edit_distance": 0.8191489361702128, + "f1_score": 0.4050632911392405, + "meteor": 0.5155844506920415, + "precision": 0.25806451612903225, + "pred_md": "Vaccine Effectiveness, Burden and Impact Studies (VEBIS) of COVID-19 and Influenza - Tender Specifications ECDC/2021/12924\n\nTask 5: Evaluation of the ECDC hospital network\n\nThe contractor is expected to evaluate how the ECDC hospital network is fit for the objectives of the SARI surveillance and for the vaccine effectiveness studies (e.g. to monitor mainly incidence and trends of severe acute respiratory infections and to provide unbiased estimates of vaccine effectiveness) and provide a comprehensive report on the evaluation, including recommendations for further improvement of the network.", + "recall": 0.9411764705882353, + "true_md": "Vaccine Effectiveness, Burden and Impact Studies (VEBIS) of COVID-19 and Influenza – Tender Specifications ECDC/2021/12924" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9726997478638175, + "doc_id": "e34aba34a5587ab3f965c0b2ccc5d41f7f0b37240f1c6cbe4f5c393d44b0310e", + "edit_distance": 0.12043795620437957, + "f1_score": 0.9930394431554522, + "meteor": 0.9865950116919392, + "precision": 0.9953488372093023, + "pred_md": "EC - FWC services Dec 2018\n\nContract no: [complete]\n\nIn the case of joint tenders, the contracting authority may terminate the FWC or a specific contract with each member of the group separately on the basis of points (d), (e), (g), (m) and (n) of Article II.18.1, under the conditions set out in Article II.11.2.\n\n## II.19. INVOICES, VALUE ADDED TAX AND E-INVOICING\n\n## II.19.1. Invoices and value added tax\n\nInvoices must contain the contractor's (or leader's in the case of a joint tender) identification data, the amount, the currency and the date, as well as the FWC reference and reference to the specific contract .\n\nInvoices must indicate the place of taxation of the contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) for value added tax (VAT) purposes and must specify separately amounts not including VAT and amounts including VAT.\n\nThe contracting authority is exempt from all taxes and duties, including VAT, in accordance with Articles 3 and 4 of the Protocol 7 of the Treaty on the Functioning of the European Union on the privileges and immunities of the European Union.\n\nThe contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) must complete the necessary formalities with the relevant authorities to ensure that the supplies and services required for implementation of the FWC are exempt from taxes and duties, including VAT.\n\n## II.19.2. E-invoicing\n\nIf provided for in the special conditions, the contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) submits invoices in electronic format if the conditions regarding electronic signature specified by Directive 2006/112/EC on VAT are fulfilled, i.e. using a qualified electronic signature or through electronic data interchange.\n\nReception of invoices by standard format (pdf) or email is not accepted.\n\n## II.20. PRICE REVISION\n\nIf a price revision index is provided in Article I.5.2, this Article applies to it.\n\nPrices are fixed and not subject to revision during the first year of the FWC.\n\nAt the beginning of the second and every following year of the FWC, each price may be revised upwards or downwards at the request of one of the parties.\n\nA party may request a price revision in writing no later than three months before the anniversary date of entry into force of the FWC. The other party must acknowledge the request within 14 days of receipt.\n\nAt the anniversary date, the contracting authority must communicate the final index for the month in which the request was received, or failing that, the last provisional index available for that month. The contractor establishes the new price on this basis and communicates it as soon as possible to the contracting authority for verification.\n\nThe contracting authority purchases on the basis of the prices in force at the date on which the specific contract enters into force.\n\nThe price revision is calculated using the following formula:\n\n30", + "recall": 0.9907407407407407, + "true_md": "EC - FWC services Dec 2018 \n\nContract no: [complete] \n\nIn the case of joint tenders, the contracting authority may terminate the FWC or a specific contract with each member of the group separately on the basis of points (d), (e), (g), (m) and (n) of Article II.18.1, under the conditions set out in Article II.11.2. \n\nInvoices must contain the contractor’s (or leader’s in the case of a joint tender) identification data, the amount, the currency and the date, as well as the FWC reference and reference to the specific contract .\n\nInvoices must indicate the place of taxation of the contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) for value added tax (VAT) purposes and must specify separately amounts not including VAT and amounts including VAT. \n\nThe contracting authority is exempt from all taxes and duties, including VAT, in accordance with Articles 3 and 4 of the Protocol 7 of the Treaty on the Functioning of the European Union on the privileges and immunities of the European Union. \n\nThe contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) must complete the necessary formalities with the relevant authorities to ensure that the supplies and services required for implementation of the FWC are exempt from taxes and duties, including VAT. \n\nIf provided for in the special conditions, the contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) submits invoices in electronic format if the conditions regarding electronic signature specified by Directive 2006/112/EC on VAT are fulfilled, i.e. using a qualified electronic signature or through electronic data interchange.\n\nReception of invoices by standard format (pdf) or email is not accepted. \n\nIf a price revision index is provided in Article I.5.2, this Article applies to it.\n\nPrices are fixed and not subject to revision during the first year of the FWC. \n\nAt the beginning of the second and every following year of the FWC, each price may be revised upwards or downwards at the request of one of the parties. \n\nA party may request a price revision in writing no later than three months before the anniversary date of entry into force of the FWC. The other party must acknowledge the request within 14 days of receipt.\n\nAt the anniversary date, the contracting authority must communicate the final index for the month in which the request was received, or failing that, the last provisional index available for that month. The contractor establishes the new price on this basis and communicates it as soon as possible to the contracting authority for verification.\n\nThe contracting authority purchases on the basis of the prices in force at the date on which the specific contract enters into force.\n\nThe price revision is calculated using the following formula: \n\n30\n\n## II.20. PRICE REVISION\n\n## II.19.2. E-invoicing\n\n## II.19.1. Invoices and value added tax\n\n## II.19. INVOICES, VALUE ADDED TAX AND E-INVOICING" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.43033053289922507, + "doc_id": "9d6d19efbdee6c9e31f2a9cf69e646915bc0e62ebdfe8c1053bc459d460212c0", + "edit_distance": 0.49732620320855614, + "f1_score": 0.9902439024390244, + "meteor": 0.49696352729530713, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Appendice 5 de l'Annexe VII\n\n## CONSIGNES DE SECURITE A RESPECTER OBLIGATOIREMENT\n\n## AVANT LES TRAVAUX:\n\nPrendre toutes les dispositions appropriées à la nature du travail à effectuer, en particulier pour les travaux comportant un risque d'incendie ou d'explosion:\n\n- 1. Appeler le Service Incendie (CDI), tél.: 9100 / 9200, pour l'informer du début des travaux.\n- 2. Vérifier que le matériel de travail est en parfait état de fonctionnement.\n- 3. Eloigner, protéger ou couvrir de matériaux incombustibles ou ignifugés tout ce qui est combustible ou inflammable (dans un rayon suffisant autour du lieu de travail).\n- 4. Boucher les ouvertures, interstices, fissures à l'aide de sable, bâches ignifugées, etc.\n- 5. S'assurer du dégazage effectif si le travail doit être effectué sur un volume creux.\n- 6. Si le travail doit être effectué sur des conduites métalliques, dégager le parcours de ces conduites de tout objet combustible ou inflammable .\n- 7. Disposer, à portée immédiate de l'emplacement des travaux, d'un extincteur approprié au risque fourni par l'entreprise.\n\n## PENDANT LES TRAVAUX:\n\n- 1. Surveiller attentivement les points de chute des projections incandescentes.\n- 2. Ne déposer les objets chauffés que sur des supports ne craignant pas la chaleur et ne risquant pas de la propager.\n- 3. Ne pas accrocher le chalumeau sur le manodétendeur (lorsqu'il est en marche), à proximité immédiate des bouteilles et ne pas le poser au sol.\n\n## APRES LES TRAVAUX:\n\n- 1. Inspecter soigneusement le lieu de travail , les locaux adjacents et tout local ayant pu être atteint par les projections incandescentes ou par la chaleur diffusée.\n- 2. Maintenir une surveillance rigoureuse pendant le temps nécessaire après la cessation du travail.\n- 3. Lorsque l'opération est réalisée dans un endroit sans surveillance, l'exécutant des travaux devra s'assurer, avant de quitter les lieux , qu'il n'existe plus de risque de propagation d'incendie .\n- 4. Appeler le Service Incendie (CDI), tél.: 9100 / 9200, pour l'informer de la fin des travaux et, si nécessaire, recommander une attention particulière au personnel chargé des rondes ultérieures.\n\n## CETTE AUTORISATION DOIT ETRE PRESENTEE A CHAQUE DEMANDE DU SERVICE INCENDIE\n\n97\n\nANNEXE VII\n\nFR", + "recall": 0.9806763285024155, + "true_md": "Appendice 5 de l'Annexe VII \n\n## CONSIGNES DE SECURITE A RESPECTER OBLIGATOIREMENT\n\n## AVANT LES TRAVAUX:\n\nPrendre toutes les dispositions appropriées à la nature du travail à effectuer, en particulier pour les travaux comportant un risque d'incendie ou d'explosion: \n\n$^{ }$CETTE AUTORISATION DOIT ETRE PRESENTEE A CHAQUE DEMANDE DU SERVICE INCENDIE \n\n## APRES LES TRAVAUX:\n\n## PENDANT LES TRAVAUX:\n\n- 1. Appeler le Service Incendie (CDI), tél.: 9100 / 9200, pour l'informer du début des travaux. 2. Vérifier que le matériel de travail est en parfait état de fonctionnement. \n\n- 1. Appeler le Service Incendie (CDI), tél.: 9100 / 9200, pour l'informer du début des travaux. 2. Vérifier que le matériel de travail est en parfait état de fonctionnement. 3. Eloigner, protéger ou couvrir de matériaux incombustibles ou ignifugés tout ce qui est \n\n- 2. Vérifier que le matériel de travail est en parfait état de fonctionnement. 3. Eloigner, protéger ou couvrir de matériaux incombustibles ou ignifugés tout ce qui est combustible ou inflammable (dans un rayon suffisant autour du lieu de travail). 4. Boucher les ouvertures, interstices, fissures à l'aide de sable, bâches ignifugées, etc.\n\n- combustible ou inflammable (dans un rayon suffisant autour du lieu de travail). 4. Boucher les ouvertures, interstices, fissures à l'aide de sable, bâches ignifugées, etc. 5. S'assurer du dégazage effectif si le travail doit être effectué sur un volume creux. \n\n- 4. Boucher les ouvertures, interstices, fissures à l'aide de sable, bâches ignifugées, etc. 5. S'assurer du dégazage effectif si le travail doit être effectué sur un volume creux. 6. Si le travail doit être effectué sur des conduites métalliques, dégager le parcours de ces \n\n- 5. S'assurer du dégazage effectif si le travail doit être effectué sur un volume creux. 6. Si le travail doit être effectué sur des conduites métalliques, dégager le parcours de ces conduites de tout objet combustible ou inflammable . 7. Disposer, à portée immédiate de l'emplacement des travaux, d'un extincteur approprié \n\n- conduites de tout objet combustible ou inflammable . 7. Disposer, à portée immédiate de l'emplacement des travaux, d'un extincteur approprié au risque fourni par l'entreprise. \n\n- 1. Surveiller attentivement les points de chute des projections incandescentes. 2. Ne déposer les objets chauffés que sur des supports ne craignant pas la chaleur et ne \n\n- 1. Surveiller attentivement les points de chute des projections incandescentes. 2. Ne déposer les objets chauffés que sur des supports ne craignant pas la chaleur et ne risquant pas de la propager. 3. Ne pas accrocher le chalumeau sur le manodétendeur (lorsqu'il est en marche), à \n\n- risquant pas de la propager. 3. Ne pas accrocher le chalumeau sur le manodétendeur (lorsqu'il est en marche), à proximité immédiate des bouteilles et ne pas le poser au sol. \n\n- 1. Inspecter soigneusement le lieu de travail , les locaux adjacents et tout local ayant pu être atteint par les projections incandescentes ou par la chaleur diffusée. 2. Maintenir une surveillance rigoureuse pendant le temps nécessaire après la cessation du \n\n- être atteint par les projections incandescentes ou par la chaleur diffusée. 2. Maintenir une surveillance rigoureuse pendant le temps nécessaire après la cessation du travail. 3. Lorsque l'opération est réalisée dans un endroit sans surveillance, l'exécutant des travaux \n\n- travail. 3. Lorsque l'opération est réalisée dans un endroit sans surveillance, l'exécutant des travaux devra s'assurer, avant de quitter les lieux , qu'il n'existe plus de risque de propagation d'incendie . 4. Appeler le Service Incendie (CDI), tél.: 9100 / 9200, pour l'informer de la fin des travaux \n\n- d'incendie . 4. Appeler le Service Incendie (CDI), tél.: 9100 / 9200, pour l'informer de la fin des travaux et, si nécessaire, recommander une attention particulière au personnel chargé des rondes ultérieures. \n\n97 FR \n\nANNEXE VII" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9865455217999006, + "doc_id": "afb4008acabfb46722f95f133c7a792137261a6b9d8e64e6b6151b3d2d34554a", + "edit_distance": 0.019374068554396422, + "f1_score": 0.9918367346938776, + "meteor": 0.9956276923287991, + "precision": 0.9918367346938776, + "pred_md": "fins de la présente disposition, les termes «réutilisation» et «document» ont la signification qui leur est donnée par la décision de la Commission du 12 décembre 2011 relative à la réutilisation des documents de la Commission (2011/833/UE).\n\nTous les droits préexistants font l'objet de licences accordées à l'Union dès la livraison des résultats et leur approbation par le pouvoir adjudicateur.\n\nL'octroi à l'Union de licences sur les droits préexistants au titre du CC est valable pour le monde entier et pour la durée de la protection des droits de propriété intellectuelle.\n\nLe paiement du prix indiqué dans les bons de commande est réputé inclure également toutes les rémunérations dues au contractant au titre de l'octroi à l'Union de licences sur les droits préexistants , notamment toutes les formes d'exploitation et d'utilisation des résultats .\n\nLorsque l' exécution du CC requiert l'utilisation par le contractant d'un matériel préexistant appartenant au pouvoir adjudicateur, ce dernier peut demander au contractant de signer un accord de licence adéquat. Cette utilisation par le contractant n'entraîne aucun transfert de droits au contractant et se limite aux besoins du CC.\n\n## II.13.3 Droits exclusifs\n\nL'Union acquiert les droits exclusifs suivants:\n\n- a) reproduction: le droit d'autoriser ou d'interdire la reproduction directe ou indirecte, provisoire ou permanente, des résultats par quelque moyen (mécanique, numérique ou autre) et sous quelque forme que ce soit, en tout ou en partie;\n- b) communication au public: le droit exclusif d'autoriser ou d'interdire toute présentation, représentation ou communication au public, par fil ou sans fil, y compris la mise à la disposition du public des résultats de manière que chacun puisse y avoir accès de l'endroit et au moment qu'il choisit individuellement; ce droit comprend également la communication et la diffusion par câble ou par satellite;\n- c) distribution: le droit exclusif d'autoriser ou d'interdire toute forme de distribution au public, par la vente ou autrement, des résultats ou des copies de ceux-ci;\n- d) location: le droit exclusif d'autoriser ou d'interdire la location ou le prêt des résultats ou des copies de ceux-ci;\n- e) adaptation: le droit exclusif d'autoriser ou d'interdire toute modification des résultats ;\n- f) traduction: le droit exclusif d'autoriser ou d'interdire la traduction, l'adaptation, l'arrangement ou la création d'œuvres dérivées sur la base des résultats , et toute autre altération des résultats , sous réserve du respect des droits moraux des auteurs, le cas échéant;\n- g) lorsque les résultats constituent ou contiennent une base de données: le droit exclusif d'autoriser ou d'interdire l'extraction de tout ou partie substantielle du contenu de la base de données vers un autre support, par quelque moyen et sous quelque forme que ce soit; et le droit exclusif d'autoriser ou d'interdire la réutilisation de tout ou partie substantielle du contenu de la base de données par la distribution de copies, par la location, par des formes de transmission en ligne ou autres;\n- h) lorsque les résultats constituent ou contiennent un objet brevetable: le droit d'enregistrer cet objet comme brevet et d'exploiter ce brevet au maximum;\n- i) lorsque les résultats constituent ou contiennent des logos ou un objet qui pourraient être enregistrés comme marque: le droit d'enregistrer ce logo ou cet objet comme marque, de l'exploiter et de l'utiliser;\n- j) lorsque les résultats constituent ou contiennent un savoir-faire: le droit d'utiliser ce savoir -faire autant que nécessaire pour utiliser au maximum les résultats prévus par le CC, et le droit de le mettre à la disposition des contractants ou sous-traitants agissant au nom du pouvoir adjudicateur, sous réserve de la signature d'un engagement de confidentialité adéquat le cas échéant;\n\n22\n\nFR", + "recall": 0.9918367346938776, + "true_md": "fins de la présente disposition, les termes «réutilisation» et «document» ont la signification qui leur est donnée par la décision de la Commission du 12 décembre 2011 relative à la réutilisation des documents de la Commission (2011/833/UE). \n\nTous les droits préexistants font l'objet de licences accordées à l'Union dès la livraison des résultats et leur approbation par le pouvoir adjudicateur. \n\nL'octroi à l'Union de licences sur les droits préexistants au titre du CC est valable pour le monde entier et pour la durée de la protection des droits de propriété intellectuelle. \n\nLe paiement du prix indiqué dans les bons de commande est réputé inclure également toutes les rémunérations dues au contractant au titre de l'octroi à l'Union de licences sur les droits préexistants , notamment toutes les formes d'exploitation et d'utilisation des résultats . \n\nLorsque l' exécution du CC requiert l'utilisation par le contractant d'un matériel préexistant appartenant au pouvoir adjudicateur, ce dernier peut demander au contractant de signer un accord de licence adéquat. Cette utilisation par le contractant n'entraîne aucun transfert de droits au contractant et se limite aux besoins du CC. \n\nL'Union acquiert les droits exclusifs suivants: \n\n- a) reproduction: le droit d'autoriser ou d'interdire la reproduction directe ou indirecte, provisoire ou permanente, des résultats par quelque moyen (mécanique, numérique ou autre) et sous quelque forme que ce soit, en tout ou en partie; \n\n- b) communication au public: le droit exclusif d'autoriser ou d'interdire toute présentation, représentation ou communication au public, par fil ou sans fil, y compris la mise à la disposition du public des résultats de manière que chacun puisse y avoir accès de l'endroit et au moment qu'il choisit individuellement; ce droit comprend également la communication et la diffusion par câble ou par satellite; \n\n- c) distribution: le droit exclusif d'autoriser ou d'interdire toute forme de distribution au public, par la vente ou autrement, des résultats ou des copies de ceux-ci; \n\n- d) location: le droit exclusif d'autoriser ou d'interdire la location ou le prêt des résultats ou des copies de ceux-ci; \n\n- e) adaptation: le droit exclusif d'autoriser ou d'interdire toute modification des résultats ; \n\n- f) traduction: le droit exclusif d'autoriser ou d'interdire la traduction, l'adaptation, l'arrangement ou la création d'œuvres dérivées sur la base des résultats , et toute autre altération des résultats , sous réserve du respect des droits moraux des auteurs, le cas échéant; \n\n- g) lorsque les résultats constituent ou contiennent une base de données: le droit exclusif d'autoriser ou d'interdire l'extraction de tout ou partie substantielle du contenu de la base de données vers un autre support, par quelque moyen et sous quelque forme que ce soit; et le droit exclusif d'autoriser ou d'interdire la réutilisation de tout ou partie substantielle du contenu de la base de données par la distribution de copies, par la location, par des formes de transmission en ligne ou autres; \n\n- h) lorsque les résultats constituent ou contiennent un objet brevetable: le droit d'enregistrer cet objet comme brevet et d'exploiter ce brevet au maximum; \n\n- i) lorsque les résultats constituent ou contiennent des logos ou un objet qui pourraient être enregistrés comme marque: le droit d'enregistrer ce logo ou cet objet comme marque, de l'exploiter et de l'utiliser; \n\n- j) lorsque les résultats constituent ou contiennent un savoir‑faire: le droit d'utiliser ce savoir - faire autant que nécessaire pour utiliser au maximum les résultats prévus par le CC, et le droit de le mettre à la disposition des contractants ou sous-traitants agissant au nom du pouvoir adjudicateur, sous réserve de la signature d'un engagement de confidentialité adéquat le cas échéant; \n\n22 FR\n\n## II.13.3 Droits exclusifs" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.46896996564446847, + "doc_id": "635abff01c161f720cd2c87ac07c82f15c268c6375be67cf3b327c7e5406f066", + "edit_distance": 0.7554585152838428, + "f1_score": 0.9952830188679244, + "meteor": 0.4371307475391665, + "precision": 0.9952830188679245, + "pred_md": "la prévention de l'incendie ou l'évacuation. Il s'agit en l'occurrence, et entre autres, des installations ou matériaux suivants :\n\nportes coupe-feu\n\n- · installations de désenfumage\n- · détecteurs d'incendie\n- · haut-parleurs\n- · sirènes\n- · dispositifs de lutte contre l'incendie (bouches d'incendie, pompes...)\n- · compartiments et cloisons (murs coupe-feu, clapets coupe-feu, matériel RF et RO)\n- · liaisons radio, téléphoniques, par interphone et radiomessagerie, si une interruption temporaire ou de longue durée de la communication est possible\n- · protection des entrées si la possibilité existe que les accès ou les sorties soient temporairement ou pour une longue durée hors d'usage pour les interventions ou l'évacuation.\n- · dispositif d'ouverture des portes\n- 4.2.2 Une autorisation de travail doit également être demandée au UP pour l'exécution de tout type de travaux (entretien, renouvellement, réparation, nouvelle installation, …) qui, par leur nature, donnent lieu à des risques élevés. Il s'agit entre autres de:\n- · travaux dans les lieux confinés\n- · travaux à plus de 2 mètres de hauteur\n- · utilisation de produits dangereux\n- · travaux aux installations électriques sous-tension\n- · travaux influents sur la circulation des personnes et le transport\n- · travaux sur échafaudage\n- · travaux sur des conduites\n- · travaux de levage\n- · travaux sur les toits des bâtiments du CUE ….\n- 4.2.3 La demande doit être faite au moyen du document \"Autorisation de travail / permis de feu\" et suivant la procédure décrite en Supplément 3 . L'entreprise tient compte des observations formulées et limitera au maximum la durée des travaux. Dans certains cas, il peut être demandé que les travaux soient programmés à un autre moment ou temporairement interrompus.\n- 4.2.4 Après l'exécution des travaux, l'entreprise contrôle le fonctionnement des installations dans le cadre de la lutte contre l'incendie. Cette opération se déroule en concertation avec l'UP. À l'issue de ce contrôle, et si le résultat est positif, les travaux sont considérés comme terminés. Lorsque la fin des travaux a été signalée, plus aucune opération ne peut être exécutée aux installations de lutte contre l'incendie sans nouvelle autorisation.\n\n## 5. AMÉNAGEMENT DU CHANTIER\n\n## 5.1 Organisation\n\n- 5.1.1 Le chantier est organisé en concertation avec le gestionnaire de projet du CUE ou l'UP.\n\nANNEX VII\n\n72\n\nFR", + "recall": 0.9952830188679245, + "true_md": "la prévention de l'incendie ou l'évacuation. Il s'agit en l'occurrence, et entre autres, des installations ou matériaux suivants : portes coupe-feu \n\ninstallations ou matériaux suivants : portes coupe-feu • installations de désenfumage \n\n- 5.1.1 Le chantier est organisé en concertation avec le gestionnaire de projet du CUE ou l'UP. \n\n- 4.2.4 Après l'exécution des travaux, l'entreprise contrôle le fonctionnement des installations dans le cadre de la lutte contre l'incendie. Cette opération se déroule en concertation avec l'UP. À l'issue de ce contrôle, et si le résultat est positif, les travaux sont considérés comme terminés. Lorsque la fin des travaux a été signalée, plus aucune opération ne peut être exécutée aux installations de lutte contre l'incendie sans nouvelle autorisation. \n\n- 4.2.3 La demande doit être faite au moyen du document \"Autorisation de travail / permis de feu\" et suivant la procédure décrite en Supplément 3 . L'entreprise tient compte des observations formulées et limitera au maximum la durée des travaux. Dans certains cas, il peut être demandé que les travaux soient programmés à un autre moment ou temporairement interrompus. \n\n- 4.2.2 Une autorisation de travail doit également être demandée au UP pour l'exécution de tout type de travaux (entretien, renouvellement, réparation, nouvelle installation, …) qui, par leur nature, donnent lieu à des risques élevés. Il s'agit entre autres de: • travaux dans les lieux confinés \n\n- nature, donnent lieu à des risques élevés. Il s'agit entre autres de: • travaux dans les lieux confinés • travaux à plus de 2 mètres de hauteur \n\n- • travaux dans les lieux confinés • travaux à plus de 2 mètres de hauteur • utilisation de produits dangereux \n\n- • travaux à plus de 2 mètres de hauteur • utilisation de produits dangereux • travaux aux installations électriques sous-tension \n\n- • utilisation de produits dangereux • travaux aux installations électriques sous-tension • travaux influents sur la circulation des personnes et le transport \n\n- • travaux aux installations électriques sous-tension • travaux influents sur la circulation des personnes et le transport • travaux sur échafaudage\n\n- • travaux influents sur la circulation des personnes et le transport • travaux sur échafaudage • travaux sur des conduites \n\n- • travaux sur échafaudage • travaux sur des conduites • travaux de levage\n\n- • travaux sur des conduites • travaux de levage • travaux sur les toits des bâtiments du CUE …. \n\n- • travaux de levage • travaux sur les toits des bâtiments du CUE …. \n\n- portes coupe-feu • installations de désenfumage • détecteurs d'incendie \n\n- • installations de désenfumage • détecteurs d'incendie • haut-parleurs \n\n- • détecteurs d'incendie • haut-parleurs • sirènes \n\n- • haut-parleurs • sirènes • dispositifs de lutte contre l'incendie (bouches d'incendie, pompes...) \n\n- • sirènes • dispositifs de lutte contre l'incendie (bouches d'incendie, pompes...) • compartiments et cloisons (murs coupe-feu, clapets coupe-feu, matériel RF et RO) \n\n- • dispositifs de lutte contre l'incendie (bouches d'incendie, pompes...) • compartiments et cloisons (murs coupe-feu, clapets coupe-feu, matériel RF et RO) • liaisons radio, téléphoniques, par interphone et radiomessagerie, si une interruption \n\n- • compartiments et cloisons (murs coupe-feu, clapets coupe-feu, matériel RF et RO) • liaisons radio, téléphoniques, par interphone et radiomessagerie, si une interruption temporaire ou de longue durée de la communication est possible • protection des entrées si la possibilité existe que les accès ou les sorties soient \n\n- temporaire ou de longue durée de la communication est possible • protection des entrées si la possibilité existe que les accès ou les sorties soient temporairement ou pour une longue durée hors d'usage pour les interventions ou l'évacuation. • dispositif d'ouverture des portes \n\n- l'évacuation. • dispositif d'ouverture des portes \n\n72 FR \n\nANNEX VII \n\n## 5. AMÉNAGEMENT DU CHANTIER\n\n## 5.1 Organisation" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9893506877055152, + "doc_id": "af27ed0cc7696da30a320bf914f55d3c69b7958e39fb5b7b79f3230f2839a0fd", + "edit_distance": 0.3083969465648855, + "f1_score": 0.9960629921259843, + "meteor": 0.9321677127936264, + "precision": 0.9960629921259843, + "pred_md": "Le contractant aide le responsable du traitement à satisfaire aux obligations qui lui incombent en vertu des articles 33 à 41 du règlement (UE) 2018/1725, à savoir:\n\n- a) garantir le respect de ses obligations en matière de protection des données en ce qui concerne la sécurité du traitement et la confidentialité des communications électroniques et des annuaires d'utilisateurs;\n- b) notifier au Contrôleur européen de la protection des données toute violation de données à caractère personnel;\n- c) communiquer une violation de données à caractère personnel à la personne concernée dans les meilleurs délais, le cas échéant;\n- d) effectuer des analyses d'impact relatives à la protection des données et des consultations préalables dans la mesure nécessaire.\n\nLe contractant tient un registre contenant toutes les opérations de traitement de données effectuées pour le compte du responsable du traitement, les transferts de données à caractère personnel, les violations de la sécurité, les suites données aux demandes soumises par des personnes dont les données à caractère personnel ont été traitées en vue d'exercer leurs droits et les demandes d'accès aux données à caractère personnel par des tiers.\n\nLe pouvoir adjudicateur est soumis au protocole nº 7 sur les privilèges et immunités de l'Union européenne figurant dans le traité sur le fonctionnement de l'Union européenne, notamment en ce qui concerne l'inviolabilité des archives (y compris la localisation physique des données et des services comme prévu à l'article I.9.2) et la sécurité des données, ce qui comprend les données à caractère personnel détenues pour le compte du pouvoir adjudicateur dans les locaux du contractant ou du sous-traitant.\n\nLe contractant informe sans délai le pouvoir adjudicateur de toute demande juridiquement contraignante de divulgation des données à caractère personnel traitées pour le compte du pouvoir adjudicateur qui lui est adressée par une autorité publique nationale, y compris une autorité d'un pays tiers. Le contractant n'est pas autorisé à accorder cet accès sans l'autorisation écrite préalable du pouvoir adjudicateur.\n\nLa durée du traitement des données à caractère personnel par le contractant n'excédera pas la période indiquée à l'article II.22.2. À l'issue de cette période, le contractant doit, selon le choix du responsable du traitement, restituer dans les meilleurs délais et dans un format arrêté d'un commun accord toutes les données à caractère personnel traitées pour le compte du responsable du traitement, ainsi que les copies de ces données, ou détruire de manière effective toutes les données à caractère personnel à moins que le droit de l'Union ou le droit national n'exige de les conserver plus longtemps.\n\nAux fins de l'article II.10, si tout ou partie du traitement des données à caractère personnel est soustraité à un tiers, le contractant transmet par écrit à ces parties, y compris aux sous-traitants, les obligations visées aux articles I.9.2 et II.9.2. À la demande du pouvoir adjudicateur, le contractant doit fournir un document attestant de cet engagement.\n\n## II.10 SOUS-TRAITANCE\n\n- II.10.1 Le contractant ne peut sous-traiter ni confier l'exécution du CC à des tiers autres que ceux déjà mentionnés dans son offre sans autorisation écrite préalable du pouvoir adjudicateur.\n- II.10.2 Même si le pouvoir adjudicateur autorise la sous-traitance, le contractant reste lié par ses obligations contractuelles et est le seul responsable de l' exécution du CC .\n- II.10.3 Le contractant doit veiller à ce que le contrat de sous-traitance ne porte pas atteinte aux droits du pouvoir adjudicateur en vertu du CC, et notamment ceux visés aux articles II.8, II.13 et II.22.\n- II.10.4 Le pouvoir adjudicateur peut demander au contractant de remplacer un sous-traitant se trouvant dans une des situations visées aux points d) et e) de l'article II.18.1.\n\n20\n\nFR", + "recall": 0.9960629921259843, + "true_md": "Le contractant aide le responsable du traitement à satisfaire aux obligations qui lui incombent en vertu des articles 33 à 41 du règlement (UE) 2018/1725, à savoir: \n\nLe contractant tient un registre contenant toutes les opérations de traitement de données effectuées pour le compte du responsable du traitement, les transferts de données à caractère personnel, les violations de la sécurité, les suites données aux demandes soumises par des personnes dont les données à caractère personnel ont été traitées en vue d'exercer leurs droits et les demandes d'accès aux données à caractère personnel par des tiers. \n\nLe pouvoir adjudicateur est soumis au protocole nº 7 sur les privilèges et immunités de l'Union européenne figurant dans le traité sur le fonctionnement de l'Union européenne, notamment en ce qui concerne l'inviolabilité des archives (y compris la localisation physique des données et des services comme prévu à l'article I.9.2) et la sécurité des données, ce qui comprend les données à caractère personnel détenues pour le compte du pouvoir adjudicateur dans les locaux du contractant ou du sous-traitant. \n\nLe contractant informe sans délai le pouvoir adjudicateur de toute demande juridiquement contraignante de divulgation des données à caractère personnel traitées pour le compte du pouvoir adjudicateur qui lui est adressée par une autorité publique nationale, y compris une autorité d'un pays tiers. Le contractant n'est pas autorisé à accorder cet accès sans l'autorisation écrite préalable du pouvoir adjudicateur. \n\nLa durée du traitement des données à caractère personnel par le contractant n'excédera pas la période indiquée à l'article II.22.2. À l'issue de cette période, le contractant doit, selon le choix du responsable du traitement, restituer dans les meilleurs délais et dans un format arrêté d'un commun accord toutes les données à caractère personnel traitées pour le compte du responsable du traitement, ainsi que les copies de ces données, ou détruire de manière effective toutes les données à caractère personnel à moins que le droit de l'Union ou le droit national n'exige de les conserver plus longtemps. \n\nAux fins de l'article II.10, si tout ou partie du traitement des données à caractère personnel est sous- traité à un tiers, le contractant transmet par écrit à ces parties, y compris aux sous-traitants, les obligations visées aux articles I.9.2 et II.9.2. À la demande du pouvoir adjudicateur, le contractant doit fournir un document attestant de cet engagement. \n\n## II.10 SOUS-TRAITANCE\n\n- a) garantir le respect de ses obligations en matière de protection des données en ce qui concerne la sécurité du traitement et la confidentialité des communications électroniques et des annuaires d'utilisateurs; \n\n- b) notifier au Contrôleur européen de la protection des données toute violation de données à caractère personnel; \n\n- c) communiquer une violation de données à caractère personnel à la personne concernée dans les meilleurs délais, le cas échéant; \n\n- d) effectuer des analyses d'impact relatives à la protection des données et des consultations préalables dans la mesure nécessaire. \n\n- II.10.1 Le contractant ne peut sous-traiter ni confier l'exécution du CC à des tiers autres que ceux déjà mentionnés dans son offre sans autorisation écrite préalable du pouvoir adjudicateur. \n\n- II.10.2 Même si le pouvoir adjudicateur autorise la sous-traitance, le contractant reste lié par ses obligations contractuelles et est le seul responsable de l' exécution du CC . \n\n- II.10.3 Le contractant doit veiller à ce que le contrat de sous-traitance ne porte pas atteinte aux droits du pouvoir adjudicateur en vertu du CC, et notamment ceux visés aux articles II.8, II.13 et II.22. \n\n- II.10.4 Le pouvoir adjudicateur peut demander au contractant de remplacer un sous-traitant se trouvant dans une des situations visées aux points d) et e) de l'article II.18.1. \n\n20 FR" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0034915148638626136, + "doc_id": "acdbbb87bda91abbb08dbf8f73bfbf24aede8359850e0091e76a80201861e4ed", + "edit_distance": 0.9808306709265175, + "f1_score": 0.1931034482758621, + "meteor": 0.274201239866476, + "precision": 0.1076923076923077, + "pred_md": "Contract number: [ complete ]\n\nContract conditions of December 2015\n\nTABLE OF CONTENT\n\nTABLE OF CONTENT\n\n| CONTRACT FOR SUPPLIES ............................................................................................. 1 |\n|------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|\n| Table of content .................................................................................................................... 3 |\n| I Special Conditions ............................................................................................................. 6 |\n| I.1. Order of priority of provisions ................................................................................... 6 |\n| I.2. Subject matter............................................................................................................. 6 |\n| I.3. Entry into force and duration ..................................................................................... 6 |\n| I.4. Price ........................................................................................................................... 6 |\n| I.4.1. Maximum price of the contract ........................................................................... 6 |\n| I.4.2. Price revision index ............................................................................................. 7 |\n| I.5. Payment arrangements ............................................................................................... 7 |\n| I.5.1. Pre-financing ....................................................................................................... 7 |\n| I.5.2. Interim payment .................................................................................................. 7 |\n| I.5.3. Payment of the balance ....................................................................................... 7 |\n| I.6. Guarantees .................................................................................................................. 8 |\n| I.6.1. Performance guarantee ........................................................................................ 8 |\n| I.6.2. Retention money guarantee ................................................................................. 8 |\n| I.7. Bank account .............................................................................................................. 8 |\n| I.8. Communication details .............................................................................................. 8 |\n| I.9. data controller............................................................................................................. 9 |\n| I.10. termination by either party ....................................................................................... 9 |\n| I.11. Applicable law and settlement of disputes ............................................................... 9 |\n| I.12. Other Specific Condition ......................................................................................... 9 |\n| II General Conditions for the supplies contract .................................................................. 11 |\n| II.1. Definitions .............................................................................................................. 11 |\n| II.2. Roles and responsibilities in the event of a joint tender ......................................... 12 |\n\n3", + "recall": 0.9333333333333333, + "true_md": "Contract conditions of December 2015 \n\nContract number: [ complete ] \n\n## TABLE OF CONTENT\n\n3" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8546293566140911, + "doc_id": "c38f6b4ce319900dc2aa226112fa5a720becd83d20b1760800ad15f36cb5c442", + "edit_distance": 0.10823529411764705, + "f1_score": 0.9603960396039604, + "meteor": 0.9148350841063826, + "precision": 0.9603960396039604, + "pred_md": "## 2 CONTACT PERSON (for this tender)\n\nName\n\nAddress\n\nTelephone\n\nFax\n\nE-mail\n\n## 3 ECONOMIC AND FINANCIAL CAPACITY 3\n\nPlease complete the following table of financial data based on your annual accounts and your latest 4 projections. If annual closed accounts are not yet available for the current year or past year, please provide your latest estimates in the columns marked with **. Figures in all columns must be calculated on the same basis to allow a direct, year-on-year comparison to be made (or, if the basis has changed, an explanation of the change must be provided as a footnote to the table). Any clarification or explanation which is judged necessary may also be provided.\n\n3 Natural persons have to prove their capacity in accordance with the selection criteria and by the appropriate means.\n\n4 If this application is submitted by a consortium, the data in the table above must be the sum of the data in the corresponding tables in the declarations provided by the consortium members - see point 7 of this tender form. Consolidated data are not requested for financial ratios.\n\n5 Last year=last accounting year for which the entity's accounts have been closed.\n\n6 Amounts entered in the 'Average' column must be the mathematical average of the amounts entered in the three preceding columns of the same row.\n\n7 The gross inflow of economic benefits (cash, receivables, other assets) arising from the ordinary operating activities of the enterprise (such as sales of goods, sales of services, interest, royalties, and dividends) during the year.\n\n8 A balance sheet account that represents the value of all assets that are reasonably expected to be converted into cash within one year in the normal course of business. Current assets include cash, accounts receivable, inventory, marketable securities, prepaid expenses and other liquid assets that can be readily converted to cash.\n\n9 A company's debts or obligations that are due within one year. Current liabilities appear on the company's balance sheet and include short term debt, accounts payable, accrued liabilities and other debts.\n\nAugust 2020 c4l\\_tenderform\\_en.doc\n\nPage 2 of 9", + "recall": 0.9603960396039604, + "true_md": "## 2 CONTACT PERSON (for this tender)\n\n## 3 ECONOMIC AND FINANCIAL CAPACITY$^{3}$\n\nPlease complete the following table of financial data 4 based on your annual accounts and your latest projections. If annual closed accounts are not yet available for the current year or past year, please provide your latest estimates in the columns marked with **. Figures in all columns must be calculated on the same basis to allow a direct, year-on-year comparison to be made (or, if the basis has changed, an explanation of the change must be provided as a footnote to the table). Any clarification or explanation which is judged necessary may also be provided. \n\n$^{3}$ Natural persons have to prove their capacity in accordance with the selection criteria and by the appropriate means. \n\n$^{4}$ If this application is submitted by a consortium, the data in the table above must be the sum of the data in the corresponding tables in the declarations provided by the consortium members — see point 7 of this tender form. Consolidated data are not requested for financial ratios. \n\n$^{5}$ Last year=last accounting year for which the entity's accounts have been closed. \n\n$^{6}$ Amounts entered in the ‘Average’ column must be the mathematical average of the amounts entered in the three preceding columns of the same row. \n\n$^{7}$ The gross inflow of economic benefits (cash, receivables, other assets) arising from the ordinary operating activities of the enterprise (such as sales of goods, sales of services, interest, royalties, and dividends) during the year. \n\n8 A balance sheet account that represents the value of all assets that are reasonably expected to be converted into cash within one year in the normal course of business. Current assets include cash, accounts receivable, inventory, marketable securities, prepaid expenses and other liquid assets that can be readily converted to cash.\n\n$^{9}$ A company's debts or obligations that are due within one year. Current liabilities appear on the company's balance sheet and include short term debt, accounts payable, accrued liabilities and other debts. \n\nAugust 2020 c4l\\_tenderform\\_en.doc \n\nPage 2 of 9" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7700981257669405, + "doc_id": "59478c312dd074f854bc7cd28841476573cdd2fc712567ee0148ee93f131d569", + "edit_distance": 0.2722117202268431, + "f1_score": 0.9685863874345548, + "meteor": 0.798769453022407, + "precision": 0.9635416666666666, + "pred_md": "Contract number: [ complete ]\n\nContract conditions of December 2015\n\nThe contractor must be liable to the contracting authority for any lack of conformity which exists at the time the supplies are verified.\n\nIn case of lack of conformity, without prejudice to Article II.14 on liquidated damages applicable to the total price of the supplies concerned, the contracting authority is entitled:\n\n- (a) either to have the supplies brought into conformity, free of charge, by repair or replacement;\n- (b) or to have an appropriate reduction made in the price.\n\nAny repair or replacement must be completed within a reasonable time and without any significant inconvenience to the contracting authority, taking account of the nature of the supplies and the purpose for which they are required by the contracting authority.\n\nThe term 'free of charge' in paragraph (b) refers to the costs incurred to bring the supplies into conformity, particularly the cost of postage, labour and materials.\n\n## II.4.12 Assembly\n\nIf required by the tender specifications, the contractor must assemble the supplies delivered within a period of one month unless otherwise specified in the special conditions.\n\nAny lack of conformity resulting from incorrect installation of the supplies must be deemed to be equivalent to lack of conformity of the supplies if installation forms part of the contract and the supplies were installed by the contractor or under its responsibility. This applies equally if the product was to be installed by the contracting authority and was incorrectly installed owing to a shortcoming in the installation instructions.\n\n## II.4.13 Services provided to supplies\n\nIf required by the tender specifications, services to supplies must be provided accordingly.\n\n## II.4.14 General provisions concerning supplies\n\n## (a) Packaging\n\nThe supplies must be packaged in strong boxes or crates or in any other way that ensures that the contents remain intact and prevents damage or deterioration. Packaging, pallets, etc., including contents, must not weigh more than 500 kg.\n\nUnless otherwise specified in the special conditions or in the tender specifications, pallets must be considered as one-way packaging and must not be returned. Each box must be clearly labelled with the following information:\n\n- -name of contracting authority and address for delivery;\n- -name of contractor;\n- -description of contents;\n- -date of delivery;\n- -number and date of specific contract;\n- -EC code number of article.\n\n## (b) Guarantee\n\n15", + "recall": 0.9736842105263158, + "true_md": "Contract number: [ complete ] \n\nContract conditions of December 2015 \n\nThe contractor must be liable to the contracting authority for any lack of conformity which exists at the time the supplies are verified. \n\nIn case of lack of conformity, without prejudice to Article II.14 on liquidated damages applicable to the total price of the supplies concerned, the contracting authority is entitled: \n\n- (a) either to have the supplies brought into conformity, free of charge, by repair or replacement; (b) or to have an appropriate reduction made in the price. \n\n- replacement; (b) or to have an appropriate reduction made in the price. \n\nAny repair or replacement must be completed within a reasonable time and without any significant inconvenience to the contracting authority, taking account of the nature of the supplies and the purpose for which they are required by the contracting authority. \n\nThe term ‘free of charge’ in paragraph (b) refers to the costs incurred to bring the supplies into conformity, particularly the cost of postage, labour and materials. \n\n## II.4.12 Assembly\n\n## II.4.13 Services provided to supplies\n\n## II.4.14 General provisions concerning supplies\n\nIf required by the tender specifications, the contractor must assemble the supplies delivered within a period of one month unless otherwise specified in the special conditions. \n\nAny lack of conformity resulting from incorrect installation of the supplies must be deemed to be equivalent to lack of conformity of the supplies if installation forms part of the contract and the supplies were installed by the contractor or under its responsibility. This applies equally if the product was to be installed by the contracting authority and was incorrectly installed owing to a shortcoming in the installation instructions. \n\nIf required by the tender specifications, services to supplies must be provided accordingly. \n\nThe supplies must be packaged in strong boxes or crates or in any other way that ensures that the contents remain intact and prevents damage or deterioration. Packaging, pallets, etc., including contents, must not weigh more than 500 kg. \n\nUnless otherwise specified in the special conditions or in the tender specifications, pallets must be considered as one-way packaging and must not be returned. Each box must be clearly labelled with the following information: \n\n- - number and date of specific contract; - EC code number of article. \n\n- - date of delivery; - number and date of specific contract; - EC code number of article. \n\n- - description of contents; - date of delivery; - number and date of specific contract; \n\n- - name of contractor; - description of contents; - date of delivery; \n\n- - name of contracting authority and address for delivery; - name of contractor; - description of contents; \n\n- - name of contracting authority and address for delivery; - name of contractor; \n\n- (a) Packaging \n\n- (b) Guarantee \n\n15" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8547296265476347, + "doc_id": "ac3645fe705347a7c6c1b6c1d64301c06bdeaa0e9f1c82f23f69f2fad46a1243", + "edit_distance": 0.2864321608040201, + "f1_score": 0.9641025641025642, + "meteor": 0.8142929661273565, + "precision": 0.9690721649484536, + "pred_md": "Contract number: [ complete ]\n\n.\n\n## EUROPEAN COMMISSION\n\nDIRECTORATE-GENERAL FOR ENERGY\n\nDirectorate E - Euratom Safeguards The Director\n\n## CONTRACT FOR SUPPLIES\n\n## NUMBER - [ complete ]\n\nThe European Atomic Energy Community ('the Community'), represented by the European Commission ('the contracting authority'), represented for the purposes of signing this framework contract by Mr Stephan Lechner, Director in the Directorate-General for Energy, Directorate E-Euratom Safeguards,\n\non the one part, and\n\n[ Full official name ]\n\n[ Official legal form ]\n\n[ Statutory registration number or ID or passport number ]\n\n[ Full official address ]\n\n[ VAT registration number ]\n\n[appointed as the leader of the group by the members of the group that submitted the joint tender]\n\n([collectively] 'the contractor'), represented for the purposes of the signature of this contract by [ forename, surname, function of legal representative and name of company in the case of a joint tender],\n\non the other part,\n\n1\n\nContract conditions of December 2015\n\nRef. Ares(2018)4258098 - 16/08/2018", + "recall": 0.9591836734693877, + "true_md": "Contract conditions of December 2015 Ref. Ares(2018)4258098 - 16/08/2018\n\nContract number: [ complete ] \n\nThe European Atomic Energy Community (‘the Community’), represented by the European Commission (‘the contracting authority’), represented for the purposes of signing this framework contract by Mr Stephan Lechner, Director in the Directorate-General for Energy, Directorate E-Euratom Safeguards,\n\non the one part, and \n\n[ Full official name ]\n\n[ Official legal form ] \n\n[ Statutory registration number or ID or passport number ]\n\n[ Full official address ]\n\n[ VAT registration number ] \n\n[appointed as the leader of the group by the members of the group that submitted the joint tender ] \n\n ([ collectively ] ‘the contractor’), represented for the purposes of the signature of this contract by [ forename, surname, function of legal representative and name of company in the case of a joint tender],\n\non the other part, \n\nEUROPEAN COMMISSION DIRECTORATE-GENERAL FOR ENERGY \n\nDirectorate E- Euratom Safeguards The Director\n\n# CONTRACT FOR SUPPLIES\n\nNUMBER – [ complete ]\n\n1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9711711571598713, + "doc_id": "2e070b6dcf4c2de7ccd2b26511a7c4ceac994e1dcc5a27928e3fe27031f0d6ff", + "edit_distance": 0.10880829015544041, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9994842943239982, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Contract number: [ complete ]\n\nContract conditions of December 2015\n\n- II.10.3 The contractor must ensure that the subcontract does not affect the rights of the contracting authority under this contract, particularly those under Article II.8 and II.24.\n- II.10.4 The contracting authority may request the contractor to replace a subcontractor found to be in a situation provided for in points (d) and (e) of Article II.17.1.\n\n## II.11. AMENDMENTS\n\n- II.11.1 Any amendment to the contract must be made in writing before all contractual obligations have been fulfilled.\n- II.11.2 Any amendment must not make changes to the contract that might alter the initial conditions of the procurement procedure or result in unequal treatment of tenderers.\n\n## II.12. ASSIGNMENT\n\n- II.9.1 The contractor must not assign any of the rights and obligations arising from the contract, including claims for payments or factoring, without prior written authorisation from the contracting authority. In such cases, the contractor must provide the contracting authority with the identity of the intended assignee.\n- II.9.2 Any right or obligation assigned by the contractor without authorisation is not enforceable against the contracting authority.\n\n## II.13. FORCE MAJEURE\n\n- II.13.1 If a party is affected by force majeure, it must immediately notify the other party, stating the nature of the circumstances, their likely duration and foreseeable effects.\n- II.10.3 A party is not liable for any delay or failure to perform its obligations under the contract if that delay or failure is a result of force majeure . If the contractor is unable to fulfil its contractual obligations owing to force majeure , it has the right to remuneration only for the supplies actually delivered and which obtain a certificate of conformity.\n- II.13.3 The parties must take all necessary measures to limit any damage due to force majeure .\n\n## II.14. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES\n\n## II.14.1. Delay in delivery\n\nIf the contractor fails to perform its contractual obligations within the applicable time limits set in this contract, the contracting authority may claim liquidated damages for each day of delay using the following formula:\n\n0.3 x (V/d)\n\nwhere\n\n22", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Contract conditions of December 2015 \n\nContract number: [ complete ] \n\n- II.10.3 The contractor must ensure that the subcontract does not affect the rights of the contracting authority under this contract, particularly those under Article II.8 and II.24. \n\n- II.10.4 The contracting authority may request the contractor to replace a subcontractor found to be in a situation provided for in points (d) and (e) of Article II.17.1. \n\n- II.11.1 Any amendment to the contract must be made in writing before all contractual obligations have been fulfilled.\n\n- II.11.2 Any amendment must not make changes to the contract that might alter the initial conditions of the procurement procedure or result in unequal treatment of tenderers. \n\n- II.9.1 The contractor must not assign any of the rights and obligations arising from the contract, including claims for payments or factoring, without prior written authorisation from the contracting authority. In such cases, the contractor must provide the contracting authority with the identity of the intended assignee. \n\n- II.9.2 Any right or obligation assigned by the contractor without authorisation is not enforceable against the contracting authority. \n\n- II.13.1 If a party is affected by force majeure, it must immediately notify the other party, stating the nature of the circumstances, their likely duration and foreseeable effects. \n\n- II.10.3 A party is not liable for any delay or failure to perform its obligations under the contract if that delay or failure is a result of force majeure . If the contractor is unable to fulfil its contractual obligations owing to force majeure , it has the right to remuneration only for the supplies actually delivered and which obtain a certificate of conformity. \n\n- II.13.3 The parties must take all necessary measures to limit any damage due to force majeure . \n\n## II.11. AMENDMENTS\n\n## II.12. ASSIGNMENT\n\n## II.13. FORCE MAJEURE\n\n## II.14. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES\n\n## II.14.1. Delay in delivery\n\nIf the contractor fails to perform its contractual obligations within the applicable time limits set in this contract, the contracting authority may claim liquidated damages for each day of delay using the following formula:\n\n0.3 x (V/d)\n\nwhere \n\n22" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7849348016933321, + "doc_id": "36dcbf2f22538d58f32e13947d855f412710d2580f7eed8b76b0c570467fbc53", + "edit_distance": 0.6767068273092369, + "f1_score": 0.990033222591362, + "meteor": 0.6743672276475123, + "precision": 0.9933333333333333, + "pred_md": "EC - FWC services Dec 2018\n\nContract no: [complete]\n\nIf the contractor submits observations, the contracting authority, taking into account the relevant observations, must notify the contractor:\n\n- a) of the withdrawal of its intention to reduce payment; or\n- b) of its final decision to reduce payment and the corresponding amount.\n\n## II.16.3. Claims and liability\n\nAny reduction in price does not affect the contractor's actual or potential liability or the contracting authority's rights under Article II.18.\n\n## II.17. SUSPENSION OF THE IMPLEMENTATION OF THE FWC\n\n## II.17.1. Suspension by the contractor\n\nIf the contractor is affected by force majeure , it may suspend the provision of the services under a specific contract .\n\nThe contractor must immediately notify the contracting authority of the suspension. The notification must include a description of the force majeure and state when the contractor expects to resume the provision of services.\n\nThe contractor must notify the contracting authority as soon as it is able to resume performance of the specific contract , unless the contracting authority has already terminated the FWC or the specific contract.\n\n## II.17.2. Suspension by the contracting authority\n\nThe contracting authority may suspend the implementation of the FWC or performance of a specific contract or any part of it:\n\n- a) if the procedure for awarding the FWC or a specific contract or the implementation of the FWC proves to have been subject to irregularities, fraud or breach of obligations ;\n- b) in order to verify whether the presumed irregularities, fraud or breach of obligations have actually occurred.\n\nThe contracting authority must formally notify the contractor of the suspension and the reasons for it. Suspension takes effect on the date of formal notification , or at a later date if the formal notification so provides.\n\nThe contracting authority must notify the contractor as soon as the verification is completed whether:\n\n- a) it is lifting the suspension; or\n- b) it intends to terminate the FWC or a specific contract under Article II.18.1(f) or (j).\n\nThe contractor is not entitled to compensation for suspension of any part of the FWC or a specific contract.\n\nThe contracting authority may in addition suspend the time allowed for payments in accordance with Article II.21.7.\n\n27", + "recall": 0.9867549668874173, + "true_md": "EC - FWC services Dec 2018 \n\nContract no: [complete] \n\nIf the contractor submits observations, the contracting authority, taking into account the relevant observations, must notify the contractor:\n\nAny reduction in price does not affect the contractor’s actual or potential liability or the contracting authority’s rights under Article II.18. \n\nIf the contractor is affected by force majeure , it may suspend the provision of the services under a specific contract . \n\nThe contractor must immediately notify the contracting authority of the suspension. The notification must include a description of the force majeure and state when the contractor expects to resume the provision of services. \n\nThe contractor must notify the contracting authority as soon as it is able to resume performance of the specific contract , unless the contracting authority has already terminated the FWC or the specific contract. \n\nThe contracting authority may suspend the implementation of the FWC or performance of a specific contract or any part of it: \n\nThe contracting authority must formally notify the contractor of the suspension and the reasons for it. Suspension takes effect on the date of formal notification , or at a later date if the formal notification so provides.\n\nThe contracting authority must notify the contractor as soon as the verification is completed whether: \n\nThe contractor is not entitled to compensation for suspension of any part of the FWC or a specific contract. \n\nThe contracting authority may in addition suspend the time allowed for payments in accordance with Article II.21.7. \n\n27\n\n- a) it is lifting the suspension; or b) it intends to terminate the FWC or a \n\n- a) it is lifting the suspension; or b) it intends to terminate the FWC or a specific contract under Article II.18.1(f) or (j). \n\n- a) if the procedure for awarding the FWC or a specific contract or the implementation of the FWC proves to have been subject to irregularities, fraud or breach of obligations ; b) in order to verify whether the presumed irregularities, fraud or breach of obligations have\n\n- proves to have been subject to irregularities, fraud or breach of obligations ; b) in order to verify whether the presumed irregularities, fraud or breach of obligations have actually occurred.\n\n- a) of the withdrawal of its intention to reduce payment; or b) of its final decision to reduce payment and the corresponding amount.\n\n- a) of the withdrawal of its intention to reduce payment; or b) of its final decision to reduce payment and the corresponding amount.\n\n## II.16.3. Claims and liability\n\n## II.17. SUSPENSION OF THE IMPLEMENTATION OF THE FWC\n\n## II.17.1. Suspension by the contractor\n\n## II.17.2. Suspension by the contracting authority" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8961690170602538, + "doc_id": "f5db1562f44c0bca3a3a667f58cb73fcba7a308b5c0533734be1ec612b1b953e", + "edit_distance": 0.2937595129375951, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.8340015149792377, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "EC - FWC services Dec 2018\n\nContract no: [complete]\n\nobligations without requiring that the contracting authority has recourse against the principal debtor (the contractor).\n\nThe contractor bears the cost of providing such guarantee.\n\nPre-financing guarantees must remain in force until the pre-financing is cleared against interim payments or payment of the balance. Where the payment of the balance takes the form of a debit note, the pre-financing guarantee must remain in force for three months after the debit note is sent to the contractor. The contracting authority must release the guarantee within the following month.\n\nPerformance guarantees cover compliance with substantial contractual obligations until the contracting authority has given its final approval for the service. The performance guarantee must not exceed 10 % of the total price of the specific contract . The contracting authority must release the guarantee fully after final approval of the service, as provided for in the specific contract .\n\nRetention money guarantees cover full delivery of the service in accordance with the specific contract including during the contract liability period and until its final approval by the contracting authority. The retention money guarantee must not exceed 10 % of the total price of the specific contract . The contracting authority must release the guarantee after the expiry of the contract liability period as provided for in the specific contract .\n\nThe contracting authority must not request a retention money guarantee for a specific contract where it has requested a performance guarantee.\n\n## II.21.6. Interim payments and payment of the balance\n\nThe contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) must send an invoice for interim payment, as provided for in Article I.6 or in the tender specifications or in the specific contract .\n\nThe contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) must send an invoice for payment of the balance within 60 days of the end of the period of provision of the services, as provided for in Article I.6, in the tender specifications or in the specific contract .\n\nPayment of the invoice and approval of documents does not imply recognition of the regularity, authenticity, completeness and correctness of the declarations and information they contain.\n\nPayment of the balance may take the form of recovery.\n\n## II.21.7. Suspension of the time allowed for payment\n\nThe contracting authority may suspend the payment periods specified in Article I.6 at any time by notifying the contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) that its invoice cannot be processed. The reasons the contracting authority may cite for not being able to process an invoice are:\n\n- a) because it does not comply with the FWC;\n- b) because the contractor has not produced the appropriate documents or deliverables; or\n- c) because the contracting authority has observations on the documents or deliverables submitted with the invoice.\n\nThe contracting authority must notify the contractor (or leader in the case of joint tender) as soon as possible of any such suspension, giving the reasons for it. In cases b) and c) referred above, the contracting authority shall notify the contractor (or leader in case of a joint tender) the time limits to submit additional information or corrections or a new version of the documents or deliverables if the contracting authority requires it.\n\n32", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "EC - FWC services Dec 2018 \n\nContract no: [complete] \n\nobligations without requiring that the contracting authority has recourse against the principal debtor (the contractor). \n\nThe contractor bears the cost of providing such guarantee. \n\nPre-financing guarantees must remain in force until the pre-financing is cleared against interim payments or payment of the balance. Where the payment of the balance takes the form of a debit note, the pre-financing guarantee must remain in force for three months after the debit note is sent to the contractor. The contracting authority must release the guarantee within the following month.\n\nPerformance guarantees cover compliance with substantial contractual obligations until the contracting authority has given its final approval for the service. The performance guarantee must not exceed 10 % of the total price of the specific contract . The contracting authority must release the guarantee fully after final approval of the service, as provided for in the specific contract .\n\nRetention money guarantees cover full delivery of the service in accordance with the specific contract including during the contract liability period and until its final approval by the contracting authority. The retention money guarantee must not exceed 10 % of the total price of the specific contract . The contracting authority must release the guarantee after the expiry of the contract liability period as provided for in the specific contract . \n\nThe contracting authority must not request a retention money guarantee for a specific contract where it has requested a performance guarantee.\n\nThe contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) must send an invoice for interim payment, as provided for in Article I.6 or in the tender specifications or in the specific contract .\n\nThe contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) must send an invoice for payment of the balance within 60 days of the end of the period of provision of the services, as provided for in Article I.6, in the tender specifications or in the specific contract .\n\nPayment of the invoice and approval of documents does not imply recognition of the regularity, authenticity, completeness and correctness of the declarations and information they contain.\n\nPayment of the balance may take the form of recovery.\n\nThe contracting authority may suspend the payment periods specified in Article I.6 at any time by notifying the contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) that its invoice cannot be processed. The reasons the contracting authority may cite for not being able to process an invoice are: \n\nThe contracting authority must notify the contractor (or leader in the case of joint tender) as soon as possible of any such suspension, giving the reasons for it. In cases b) and c) referred above, the contracting authority shall notify the contractor (or leader in case of a joint tender) the time limits to submit additional information or corrections or a new version of the documents or deliverables if the contracting authority requires it. \n\n- a) because it does not comply with the FWC; b) because the contractor has not produced the appropriate documents or deliverables; or\n\n- a) because it does not comply with the FWC; b) because the contractor has not produced the appropriate documents or deliverables; or c) because the contracting authority has observations on the documents or deliverables submitted \n\n- b) because the contractor has not produced the appropriate documents or deliverables; or c) because the contracting authority has observations on the documents or deliverables submitted with the invoice.\n\n32\n\n## II.21.7. Suspension of the time allowed for payment\n\n## II.21.6. Interim payments and payment of the balance" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8358681615333138, + "doc_id": "12cf7ec5292faae87ee4d2f5bd86a0471c0938698ab20bd6da037dbdd45e6192", + "edit_distance": 0.8669438669438669, + "f1_score": 0.993103448275862, + "meteor": 0.7007554224031811, + "precision": 0.9908256880733946, + "pred_md": "## 8.5 Etiquetage du produit\n\n- 8.5.1 Tous les produits présents sur le site doivent être munis d'une étiquette réglementaire (identification de la substance - type de risques - mesures de prévention premiers soins) et ce quelle que soit la quantité.\n- 8.5.2 Si, pour une raison quelconque, un produit est transvasé dans un autre contenant, l'étiquetage d'origine doit suivre dans sa globalité.\n\n## 8.6 Stockage du produit\n\n- 8.6.1 Il y a lieu de conserver les produits dangereux exclusivement dans des emballages/récipients prévus à cet effet (jamais dans des bouteilles pour boissons).\n- 8.6.2 Les liquides inflammables utilisés par le personnel de l'entreprise doivent être stockés dans des récipients adéquats, dûment étiquetés suivant les spécifications réglementaires.\n- 8.6.3 L'entreprise doit veiller à respecter les consignes qui lui sont transmises en matière de localisation de stockage des produits et en matière de quantité stockée.\n- 8.6.4 La quantité stockée sur le lieu de travail doit être limitée (quantité pour une journée de travail).\n- 8.6.5 Séparer les produits \"acides\" et les produits \"basiques\".\n\n## 8.7 Utilisation du produit\n\n- L'entreprise doit rappeler régulièrement à son personnel de lire attentivement les consignes reprises au sein des fiches de sécurité:\n- -Si les recommandations font allusion à des protections individuelles, elles doivent être suivies impérativement !\n- - Toujours utiliser des récipients étiquetés.\n- -Lors de la mise en service de nouveaux flacons ou récipients, s'assurer de leur étiquetage ou y appliquer l'étiquette adéquate.\n\n## 8.8 Produit dangereux et coordination\n\n- 8.8.1 Lorsque sont exécutés des travaux qui occasionnent la libération de vapeurs, de gaz ou de poussières dangereuses et incommodantes, il convient d'en faire mention dans le plan SSE. En concertation avec le CSS, le gestionnaire de projet du CUE et l'UP, il y a lieu de définir des mesures qui permettent d'évacuer efficacement les vapeurs, les gaz ou les poussières.\n- 8.8.2 S'il n'est pas possible d'exécuter les travaux sans provoquer certaines nuisances, les travaux seront programmés en concertation avec le CSS, le gestionnaire de projet du CUE ou l'UP de manière à réduire au strict minimum la nuisance pour les personnes présentes dans les bâtiments du CUE. Ces travaux ne peuvent en aucun cas être exécutés sans la concertation nécessaire avec le gestionnaire de projet ou l'UP du CUE.\n\n81\n\nANNEX VII\n\nFR", + "recall": 0.9953917050691244, + "true_md": "## 8.5 Etiquetage du produit\n\n## 8.6 Stockage du produit\n\n81 FR \n\nANNEX VII \n\n- 8.8.2 S'il n'est pas possible d'exécuter les travaux sans provoquer certaines nuisances, les travaux seront programmés en concertation avec le CSS, le gestionnaire de projet du CUE ou l'UP de manière à réduire au strict minimum la nuisance pour les personnes présentes dans les bâtiments du CUE. Ces travaux ne peuvent en aucun cas être exécutés sans la concertation nécessaire avec le gestionnaire de projet ou l'UP du CUE. \n\n- 8.8.1 Lorsque sont exécutés des travaux qui occasionnent la libération de vapeurs, de gaz ou de poussières dangereuses et incommodantes, il convient d'en faire mention dans le plan SSE. En concertation avec le CSS, le gestionnaire de projet du CUE et l'UP, il y a lieu de définir des mesures qui permettent d'évacuer efficacement les vapeurs, les gaz ou les poussières. \n\n- - Toujours utiliser des récipients étiquetés. - Lors de la mise en service de nouveaux flacons ou récipients, s'assurer de leur étiquetage ou y appliquer l'étiquette adéquate. \n\n- suivies impérativement ! - Toujours utiliser des récipients étiquetés. - Lors de la mise en service de nouveaux flacons ou récipients, s'assurer de leur \n\n- reprises au sein des fiches de sécurité: - Si les recommandations font allusion à des protections individuelles, elles doivent être suivies impérativement ! - Toujours utiliser des récipients étiquetés. \n\n## 8.7 Utilisation du produit\n\n## 8.8 Produit dangereux et coordination\n\nL'entreprise doit rappeler régulièrement à son personnel de lire attentivement les consignes reprises au sein des fiches de sécurité: - Si les recommandations font allusion à des protections individuelles, elles doivent être \n\n- 8.5.1 Tous les produits présents sur le site doivent être munis d'une étiquette réglementaire (identification de la substance - type de risques - mesures de prévention premiers soins) et ce quelle que soit la quantité. \n\n- 8.5.2 Si, pour une raison quelconque, un produit est transvasé dans un autre contenant, l'étiquetage d'origine doit suivre dans sa globalité. \n\n- 8.6.1 Il y a lieu de conserver les produits dangereux exclusivement dans des emballages/récipients prévus à cet effet (jamais dans des bouteilles pour boissons). \n\n- 8.6.2 Les liquides inflammables utilisés par le personnel de l'entreprise doivent être stockés dans des récipients adéquats, dûment étiquetés suivant les spécifications réglementaires. \n\n- 8.6.3 L'entreprise doit veiller à respecter les consignes qui lui sont transmises en matière de localisation de stockage des produits et en matière de quantité stockée. \n\n- 8.6.4 La quantité stockée sur le lieu de travail doit être limitée (quantité pour une journée de travail). \n\n- 8.6.5 Séparer les produits \"acides\" et les produits \"basiques\"." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.003756193044094092, + "doc_id": "fd1b95714056813b4055ac400c301516d0a363645086b211a03b1ae4ef79a4d9", + "edit_distance": 0.96875, + "f1_score": 0.21374045801526717, + "meteor": 0.23834708099267585, + "precision": 0.11965811965811966, + "pred_md": "General Administrative and Submission Clauses\n\n| 7. | Conditions regarding joint tenders, subcontracting and reliance on the capacity of other entities 12 |\n|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|\n| 7.1. Joint tenders general ....................................................................................................................................................... 12 | 7.1. Joint tenders general ....................................................................................................................................................... 12 |\n| 7.1.1. | Documentation and information to be provided ....................................................................................... 12 |\n| 7.1.2. | Assessment of joint tenders ................................................................................................................................ 13 |\n| 7.1.3. | Joint tender during the contract implementation ..................................................................................... 13 |\n| 7.2. Subcontracting general ................................................................................................................................................... 13 | 7.2. Subcontracting general ................................................................................................................................................... 13 |\n| 7.2.1. | Documentation and information to be provided ....................................................................................... 14 |\n| 7.2.2. | Assessment of subcontractors ........................................................................................................................... 14 |\n| 7.2.3. | Subcontracting during the contract implementation ............................................................................... 14 |\n| | 7.3. Reliance on the capacities of other entities ........................................................................................................... 14 |\n| 8. | Award of the contract ...................................................................................................................................................... 15 |\n| 9. | Signature of the contract with the successful Tenderer ................................................................................... 15 |\n| | 9.1. Standstill Period ................................................................................................................................................................ 15 |\n| | 9.2. Exclusion criteria documentation .............................................................................................................................. 15 |\n| | 9.3. Additional administrative documentation ............................................................................................................. 16 |\n| 10. | Privacy Statement ............................................................................................................................................................. 17 |\n| 11. | Miscellaneous ..................................................................................................................................................................... 17 |\n| 12. | Contacts and complaints ................................................................................................................................................ 18 |\n| I. | How to Submit your Tender in e-Submission ....................................................................................................... 19 |\n| II. | Information to be submitted ........................................................................................................................................ 20 |\n\nLast updated: June 2020\n\nPage 3 of 21", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "General Administrative and Submission Clauses\n\nLast updated: June 2020\n\nPage 3 of 21" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9091882620450171, + "doc_id": "14654fbc59c74412a4251f06820ab30b096722f9cc41e15103024d10f5693503", + "edit_distance": 0.3351063829787234, + "f1_score": 0.9910313901345292, + "meteor": 0.9300933199050266, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "unique identifier in the above register. Instructions on how to create a PIC can be found on this page. Economic operators already registered in the Participant Register shall reuse their existing PICs when preparing tenders in e-Submission.\n\nA tender received after the time-limit for receipt of tenders will be rejected. The submission receipt provided by e-Submission with the official date and time of receipt of the submission (timestamp) constitutes proof of compliance with the time-limit for receipt of tenders . 4\n\nTenderers must ensure that their submitted tenders contain all the information and documents required by the contracting authority at the time of submission as set out in the procurement documents.\n\nThe following documents shall be dated and signed, either by hand or by applying a qualified or an advanced electronic signature based on a qualified certificate, by an authorised representative of the signatory:\n\n-  Declaration(s) on Honour on exclusion and selection criteria (template available in the tender specifications).\n-  The submission report (a document generated by e-Submission and listing all the documents included in the tender, to be signed by the tenderer or the group leader in case of a joint tender).\n\nWhen the Declaration(s) on Honour and/or the submission report are signed by hand, a scanned copy must be attached to the tender in e-Submission.\n\nAfter submitting a tender, but before the deadline for receipt of tenders, a tenderer may definitively withdraw its tender 5 , or withdraw it and replace it with a new one . A withdrawal receipt will be 6 provided by e-Submission as proof of withdrawal.\n\nAll costs incurred for the preparation and submission of tenders are to be borne by the tenderers and will not be reimbursed.\n\n## 2. Legal effects of the invitation to tender and submission of a tender.\n\nThis invitation to tender is in no way binding on the contracting authority. The contracting authority's contractual obligation commences only when the contract with the successful tenderer is signed by both parties.\n\nUp to the signature of the contract the contracting authority may cancel the procurement procedure without tenderers being entitled to claim any compensation. Any such decision must be substantiated and tenderers notified.\n\n4 If no submission receipt is received in reasonable time after submission, please contact the e-Submission Helpdesk (see contact details in the above referred e-Submission Quick Guide) as soon as possible.\n\n5 A submitted tender can be withdrawn directly in the \"Procurement/My Submission(s)\" area in the F&T Portal. For detailed instructions on how to withdraw a tender please consult the above referred e-Submission Quick Guide.\n\n6 To submit a new version, the tenderer must create a new tender in e-Submission and include all the information and documents required in the procurement documents with the submission of a tender, even if some of them have already been included in the replaced tender.\n\nPage 2 of 5", + "recall": 0.9822222222222222, + "true_md": "unique identifier in the above register. Instructions on how to create a PIC can be found on this page. Economic operators already registered in the Participant Register shall reuse their existing PICs when preparing tenders in e-Submission. \n\nA tender received after the time-limit for receipt of tenders will be rejected. The submission receipt provided by e-Submission with the official date and time of receipt of the submission (timestamp) constitutes proof of compliance with the time-limit for receipt of tenders$^{4}$.\n\nTenderers must ensure that their submitted tenders contain all the information and documents required by the contracting authority at the time of submission as set out in the procurement documents. \n\nThe following documents shall be dated and signed, either by hand or by applying a qualified or an advanced electronic signature based on a qualified certificate, by an authorised representative of the signatory:\n\nWhen the Declaration(s) on Honour and/or the submission report are signed by hand, a scanned copy must be attached to the tender in e-Submission. \n\nAfter submitting a tender, but before the deadline for receipt of tenders, a tenderer may definitively withdraw its tender$^{5}$, or withdraw it and replace it with a new one$^{6}$. A withdrawal receipt will be provided by e-Submission as proof of withdrawal.\n\nAll costs incurred for the preparation and submission of tenders are to be borne by the tenderers and will not be reimbursed.\n\nThis invitation to tender is in no way binding on the contracting authority. The contracting authority's contractual obligation commences only when the contract with the successful tenderer is signed by both parties. \n\nUp to the signature of the contract the contracting authority may cancel the procurement procedure without tenderers being entitled to claim any compensation. Any such decision must be substantiated and tenderers notified. \n\n## 2. Legal effects of the invitation to tender and submission of a tender.\n\n-  Declaration(s) on Honour on exclusion and selection criteria (template available in the tender specifications). \n\n-  The submission report (a document generated by e-Submission and listing all the documents included in the tender, to be signed by the tenderer or the group leader in case of a joint tender). \n\n$^{4}$ If no submission receipt is received in reasonable time after submission, please contact the e-Submission Helpdesk (see contact details in the above referred e-Submission Quick Guide) as soon as possible. \n\n$^{5}$ A submitted tender can be withdrawn directly in the \"Procurement/My Submission(s)\" area in the F&T Portal. For detailed instructions on how to withdraw a tender please consult the above referred e-Submission Quick Guide. \n\n$^{6}$ To submit a new version, the tenderer must create a new tender in e-Submission and include all the information and documents required in the procurement documents with the submission of a tender, even if some of them have already been included in the replaced tender. \n\nPage 2 of 5" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7879563939842373, + "doc_id": "933d94e8a4ff48d23307b989dd16f1a05ada8db3716dc0725fa56c6b659956f5", + "edit_distance": 0.4063157894736842, + "f1_score": 0.9720101781170483, + "meteor": 0.7188405045451269, + "precision": 0.9744897959183674, + "pred_md": "## 1.4.2 Minimum requirements of the service\n\nThe conditions described in this section constitute minimum requirements so that the services delivered under the FWC fulfil the use for which they are intended by the Contracting Authority , in accordance with Art.166.2 and Art. 167.1.a of the general EU Financial Regulation and Point 17.1 of its Annex 1. Tenders must meet the minimum requirements to be compliant. Non-compliant tenders will be rejected.\n\nPlease note that the below represent minimum requirements for all the work areas in this FWC:\n\n## Language of the services\n\nThe service provider shall provide all services in English.\n\n## Territory for accessing non-public information\n\nAll service delivery facilities from which non-public information of the contracting authority is accessed must be located within European Union Member States in EU territory . The contractor shall ensure that non-public information of the Contracting Authority can never be accessed from outside this territory.\n\n## Compliance with legislation\n\nThe tender, and contract implementation in case of award, must be in compliance with the applicable data protection (GDPR), environmental, social and labour law obligations established by Union law, national legislation, collective agreements or the international environmental social and labour conventions listed in Annex X to the EU Public Procurement Directive 1 .\n\n## Compliance with ECHA policy POL0016 'IT Contractors' Remote Access'\n\nThe contractor must comply with the security requirements of ECHA's policy for IT Contractors' remote access, as described in Annex 12 to the 'Technical Specifications' .\n\n## PLEASE NOTE:\n\n- ◻ Tenderers must provide their service in the context of a request for offer only in case they (including all subcontractors, if applicable) are not in a situation of professional conflicting interests which may negatively affect the performance of the specific contract.\n- ◻ Tenderers must maintain at all times during the lifetime of the framework contract staff availability and capacity to carry out the activities under the contract and in compliance with the selection criteria .\n- ◻ Tenderers must accept without any reservations or restrictions to provide the services described in Annex 1 ' Technical Specifications '.\n\n1 Directive 2014/24/EU of the European Parliament and of the Council of 26 February 2014 on Public Procurement.\n\n6", + "recall": 0.9695431472081218, + "true_md": "The conditions described in this section constitute minimum requirements so that the services delivered under the FWC fulfil the use for which they are intended by the Contracting Authority , in accordance with Art.166.2 and Art. 167.1.a of the general EU Financial Regulation and Point 17.1 of its Annex 1. Tenders must meet the minimum requirements to be compliant. Non-compliant tenders will be rejected.\n\nPlease note that the below represent minimum requirements for all the work areas in this FWC:\n\nLanguage of the services The service provider shall provide all services in English.\n\nTerritory for accessing non-public information All service delivery facilities from which non-public information of the contracting authority is accessed must be located within European Union Member States in EU territory . The contractor shall ensure that non-public information of the Contracting Authority can never be accessed from outside this territory. \n\nCompliance with legislation The tender, and contract implementation in case of award, must be in compliance with the applicable data protection (GDPR), environmental, social and labour law obligations established by Union law, national legislation, collective agreements or the international environmental social and labour conventions listed in Annex X to the EU Public Procurement Directive 1 . \n\nCompliance with ECHA policy POL- 0016 “IT Contractors’ Remote Access” The contractor must comply with the security requirements of ECHA’s policy for IT Contractors’ remote access, as described in Annex 12 to the “Technical Specifications” . \n\n1 Directive 2014/24/EU of the European Parliament and of the Council of 26 February 2014 on Public Procurement. \n\n6\n\n- ◻ Tenderers must accept without any reservations or restrictions to provide the services described in Annex 1 “ Technical Specifications ”.\n\n- ◻ Tenderers must maintain at all times during the lifetime of the framework contract staff availability and capacity to carry out the activities under the contract and in compliance with the selection criteria .\n\n- ◻ Tenderers must provide their service in the context of a request for offer only in case they (including all subcontractors, if applicable) are not in a situation of professional conflicting interests which may negatively affect the performance of the specific contract. \n\n## PLEASE NOTE:\n\n## 1.4.2 Minimum requirements of the service\n\n## Language of the services The service provider shall provide all services\n\n## Territory for accessing non-public information All service delivery facilities from which non-public information of the contracting authority\n\n## Compliance with legislation The tender, and contract implementation in case of award, must be\n\n## Compliance with ECHA policy POL- 0016 “IT Contractors’ Remote Access” The contractor must comply with the security requirements of ECHA’s policy" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8447094745066164, + "doc_id": "182e546599e2b619e8cb47c6a756855e3abae252d8dbe22cc5bbb7fea18dfaec", + "edit_distance": 0.3778501628664495, + "f1_score": 0.9649122807017544, + "meteor": 0.8048205204501724, + "precision": 0.9880239520958084, + "pred_md": "ANNEX VII\n\nAppendice 2 de l'Annexe VII\n\n- · accordez une attention particulière aux personnes à mobilité réduite (voir point 2.6).\n\nEn fonction des circonstances, il pourrait vous être demandé par haut-parleur de ne pas sortir du bâtiment mais de vous déplacer vers une zone déterminée à l'intérieur, éloignée de la zone sinistrée.\n\nLa procédure à suivre est décrite dans la Communication au Personnel \"Invacuation\" (CP 43/18) . Vous entendrez dans ce cas un signal sonore court suivi par des instructions orales stipulant ce qu'il faut faire et où aller.\n\nComposez le 02 281 2000 pour signaler tout danger ou problème urgent pendant l'évacuation.\n\n## 2.3 Chemin d'évacuation\n\nL'itinéraire à suivre est le chemin le plus court pour quitter le bâtiment. Ce chemin est souvent différent de celui que vous empruntez normalement. Il part de l'endroit où vous vous trouvez, emprunte l'escalier de secours le plus proche et rejoint le niveau d'évacuation pour vous permettre d'évacuer le bâtiment en toute sécurité 20 .\n\nLes chemins d'évacuation sont clairement indiqués par des pictogrammes spécifiques:\n\nAu niveau des plinthes, des flèches fluorescentes vous aident à trouver la sortie de secours la plus proche.\n\nIl est important de suivre les signaux les plus proches, car ils permettent de répartir les flux de personnes.\n\n20 Au bâtiment Europa, dans les escaliers B2 et D1 (identification reprise sur les portes), le chemin d'évacuation mène vers le niveau -1 (S01) pour ensuite rejoindre le niveau R00 vers l'extérieur.\n\n87\n\nFR", + "recall": 0.9428571428571428, + "true_md": "20 Au bâtiment Europa, dans les escaliers B2 et D1 (identification reprise sur les portes), le chemin d'évacuation mène vers le niveau -1 (S01) pour ensuite rejoindre le niveau R00 vers l'extérieur. \n\n87 FR \n\nANNEX VII \n\nEn fonction des circonstances, il pourrait vous être demandé par haut-parleur de ne pas sortir du bâtiment mais de vous déplacer vers une zone déterminée à l'intérieur, éloignée de la zone sinistrée.\n\nLa procédure à suivre est décrite dans la Communication au Personnel \"Invacuation\" (CP 43/18) . Vous entendrez dans ce cas un signal sonore court suivi par des instructions orales stipulant ce qu'il faut faire et où aller. Composez le 02 281 2000 pour signaler tout danger ou problème urgent pendant l'évacuation. \n\nqu'il faut faire et où aller. Composez le 02 281 2000 pour signaler tout danger ou problème urgent pendant l'évacuation. \n\nL’itinéraire à suivre est le chemin le plus court pour quitter le bâtiment. Ce chemin est souvent différent de celui que vous empruntez normalement. Il part de l'endroit où vous vous trouvez, emprunte l'escalier de secours le plus proche et rejoint le niveau d’évacuation pour vous permettre d'évacuer le bâtiment en toute sécurité $^{20}$. \n\nLes chemins d’évacuation sont clairement indiqués par des pictogrammes spécifiques:\n\nAu niveau des plinthes, des flèches fluorescentes vous aident à trouver la sortie de secours la plus proche.\n\nIl est important de suivre les signaux les plus proches, car ils permettent de répartir les flux de personnes. \n\n## 2.3 Chemin d’évacuation\n\nAppendice 2 de l'Annexe VII \n\n- • accordez une attention particulière aux personnes à mobilité réduite (voir point 2.6)." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9205482850766644, + "doc_id": "30efafcddc6c0b9e7a222a3fb31b5aebc85a9c67c511b88faae7be07cebfeb7d", + "edit_distance": 0.6831275720164609, + "f1_score": 0.9836065573770493, + "meteor": 0.8572591282316021, + "precision": 0.9813084112149533, + "pred_md": "General Administrative and Submission Clauses\n\nin point 9.1 above, EIB shall not sign the above threshold contract with the successful Tenderer until a standstill period of 10 (ten) calendar days has elapsed, running from the day after the simultaneous dispatch by email of the notification to Tenderers (those rejected and the successful one).\n\n## 9.3. Additional administrative documentation\n\nThe successful Tenderer shall in addition complete EIB's Vendor Information Form (VIF), which will be supplied by EIB together with the award notification, and provide all information required therein. Unless issued electronically via the Supplier Portal (not available at the time this version of the 'General Administrative and Submission Clauses' is published), the VIF shall be submitted as follows:\n\n-  VIF filled in in Excel, and\n-  the signed, stamped and dated VIF in image file or .pdf, as a scan of the original document signed [a certified digital signature is acceptable, but a photographic image of the hand signature copy-pasted on the document is not: if not digital, the signature should be made by hand (the document should be printed, hand signed and then scanned to pdf or image format)].\n\nThe VIF must be accompanied by two supporting documents:\n\n- i. a bank account statement, and\n- ii. an extract of corporate registration.\n\nAd i) a recent bank account identification statement, also known as bank information form (not older than 6 months) confirming the bank details for the bank account(s) specified in the VIF:\n\n-  Account holder name\n-  Account number (IBAN)\n-  Name of the bank\n-  BIC/SWIFT code for the intermediary bank, if used\n\nThis statement can take various forms (e.g. it is known as relevé d'identité bancaire , or RIB in French speaking countries), and in fact any form that clearly links the vendor to the bank (account) is acceptable, provided it is issued by the bank and duly signed, such as:\n\n-  Extract of the bank account\n-  Written confirmation issued by the bank\n-  Bank account contract\n\nThe bank account identification statement is to be signed, stamped and dated by the successful Tenderer's legal representative who signs the VIF or by a representative of the successful Tenderer's bank.\n\n## Format:\n\n-  Image file or .pdf, as a scan of the original document signed, stamped and dated (amounts of balances and movements mentioned on the bank statements may for privacy reasons be masked);\n\nLast updated: June 2020\n\nPage 16 of 21", + "recall": 0.9859154929577465, + "true_md": "General Administrative and Submission Clauses\n\nin point 9.1 above, EIB shall not sign the above threshold contract with the successful Tenderer until a standstill period of 10 (ten) calendar days has elapsed, running from the day after the simultaneous dispatch by email of the notification to Tenderers (those rejected and the successful one).\n\nThe successful Tenderer shall in addition complete EIB’s Vendor Information Form (VIF), which will be supplied by EIB together with the award notification, and provide all information required therein. Unless issued electronically via the Supplier Portal (not available at the time this version of the ’General Administrative and Submission Clauses’ is published), the VIF shall be submitted as follows: \n\nThe VIF must be accompanied by two supporting documents: \n\nAd i) a recent bank account identification statement, also known as bank information form (not older than 6 months) confirming the bank details for the bank account(s) specified in the VIF: \n\nThis statement can take various forms (e.g. it is known as relevé d’identité bancaire , or RIB in French speaking countries), and in fact any form that clearly links the vendor to the bank (account) is acceptable, provided it is issued by the bank and duly signed, such as: \n\nThe bank account identification statement is to be signed, stamped and dated by the successful Tenderer’s legal representative who signs the VIF or by a representative of the successful Tenderer’s bank.\n\nFormat:\n\n-  Image file or .pdf, as a scan of the original document signed, stamped and dated (amounts of balances and movements mentioned on the bank statements may for privacy reasons be masked);\n\n-  Bank account contract \n\n-  Written confirmation issued by the bank \n\n-  Extract of the bank account \n\n-  BIC/SWIFT code for the intermediary bank, if used \n\n-  Name of the bank\n\n-  Account number (IBAN) \n\n-  Account holder name \n\n- ii. an extract of corporate registration. \n\n- i. a bank account statement, and \n\n-  the signed, stamped and dated VIF in image file or .pdf, as a scan of the original document signed [a certified digital signature is acceptable, but a photographic image of the hand signature copy-pasted on the document is not: if not digital, the signature should be made by hand (the document should be printed, hand signed and then scanned to pdf or image format)]. \n\n-  VIF filled in in Excel, and \n\n## 9.3. Additional administrative documentation\n\nLast updated: June 2020\n\nPage 16 of 21" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9316919391263765, + "doc_id": "1d0ba97da7edca431bcde8c5f88b8f216c0e4ef9efd2ec098994142d707ac1a2", + "edit_distance": 0.12416851441241686, + "f1_score": 0.9485714285714285, + "meteor": 0.9557737200750835, + "precision": 0.9540229885057471, + "pred_md": "Contract number: [ complete ]\n\n## I.4.2. Price revision index\n\nPrice revision is not applicable to this contract.\n\n## I.5. PAYMENT ARRANGEMENTS\n\n## I.5.1. Pre-financing\n\nPre-financing is not applicable to this contract.\n\n## I.5.2. Interim payment\n\nInterim payment is not applicable to this contract.\n\n## I.5.3. Payment of the balance\n\n- 1. The contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) may claim the payment of the balance in accordance with Article II.20.6.\n\nThe contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) must send an invoice in paper format for payment of the balance due under the contract, as provided for in the tender specifications.\n\n- 2. The contracting authority must approve the submitted documents or deliverables and pay within 60 days from receipt of the invoice.\n- 3. If the contracting authority has observations to make, it must send them to the contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) and suspend the time limit for payment in accordance with Article II.20.7.\n\nThe contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) has 20 days to submit additional information or corrections or a new version of the documents if the contracting authority requires it.\n\n- 4. The contracting authority must give its approval and pay within the remainder of the time-limit indicated in point (2.) unless it rejects partially or fully the submitted documents or deliverables.\n\n***\n\n[Option: for contractors for which VAT is due in Belgium: In Belgium the provisions of the contract constitute a request for VAT exemption No 450, Article 42, paragraph 3.3 of the VAT code (circular 2/1978), provided the contractor includes the following statement in the invoice(s): 'Exonération de la TVA, Article 42, paragraphe 3.3 du code de la TVA (circulaire 2/1978)' or an equivalent statement in the Dutch or German language.]\n\n## [Option: for contractors for which VAT is due in Luxembourg]\n\n[In Luxembourg, the contractor must include the following statement in the invoices: 'Commande destinée à l'usage officiel de l'Union européenne. Exonération de la TVA Article 43 § 1 k 2ième tiret de la loi modifiée du 12.02.79.' In case of intra-Community purchases, the statement to be included in the invoices is: 'For the official use of the\n\n7\n\nContract conditions of December 2015", + "recall": 0.9431818181818182, + "true_md": "Contract conditions of December 2015 \n\nContract number: [ complete ] \n\n## I.4.2. Price revision index\n\nPrice revision is not applicable to this contract. \n\n## I.5. PAYMENT ARRANGEMENTS\n\n## I.5.1. Pre-financing\n\nPre-financing is not applicable to this contract. \n\n## I.5.2. Interim payment\n\nInterim payment is not applicable to this contract. \n\n## I.5.3. Payment of the balance\n\n1. The contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) may claim the payment of the balance in accordance with Article II.20.6.\n\nThe contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) must send an invoice in paper format for payment of the balance due under the contract, as provided for in the tender specifications. \n\n2. The contracting authority must approve the submitted documents or deliverables and pay within 60 days from receipt of the invoice. \n\n3. If the contracting authority has observations to make, it must send them to the contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) and suspend the time limit for payment in accordance with Article II.20.7.\n\nThe contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) has 20 days to submit additional information or corrections or a new version of the documents if the contracting authority requires it.\n\n4. The contracting authority must give its approval and pay within the remainder of the time-limit indicated in point (2.) unless it rejects partially or fully the submitted documents or deliverables. \n\n*** \n\n [Option: for contractors for which VAT is due in Belgium: In Belgium the provisions of the contract constitute a request for VAT exemption No 450, Article 42, paragraph 3.3 of the VAT code (circular 2/1978), provided the contractor includes the following statement in the invoice(s): “Exonération de la TVA, Article 42, paragraphe 3.3 du code de la TVA (circulaire 2/1978)” or an equivalent statement in the Dutch or German language.] \n\n[In Luxembourg, the contractor must include the following statement in the invoices: ‘Commande destinée à l’usage officiel de l’Union européenne. Exonération de la TVA Article 43 § 1 k 2ième tiret de la loi modifiée du 12.02.79.’ In case of intra-Community purchases, the statement to be included in the invoices is: ‘For the official use of the \n\n## [Option: for contractors for which VAT is due in Luxembourg]\n\n7" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9353183593200106, + "doc_id": "aa48d178976ee6db40bdca49187b41f47778af77069432a976450786e7bddcde", + "edit_distance": 0.27450980392156865, + "f1_score": 0.9957627118644069, + "meteor": 0.8019208929271959, + "precision": 0.9957627118644068, + "pred_md": "## 4.4 Confidentiality of tenders: what information and under what conditions can be disclosed?\n\nOnce the Contracting Authority has opened a tender, it becomes its property and shall be treated confidentially, subject to the following:\n\n- · For the purposes of evaluating the tender and, if applicable, implementing the contract, performing audits, benchmarking, etc., the Contracting Authority is entitled to make available (any part of) the tender to its staff and the staff of other Union institutions, agencies and bodies, as well to other persons and entities working for the Contracting Authority or cooperating with it, including contractors or subcontractors and their staff provided that they are bound by an obligation of confidentiality.\n- · After the signature of the award decision tenderers whose tenders were received in accordance with the submission modalities, who have access to procurement, who are not found to be in an exclusion situation referred to in Article 136(1) of the FR, who are not rejected under Article 141 of the FR, whose tenders are not found to be incompliant with the procurement documents, and who make a request in writing will be notified of the name of the tenderer to whom the contract is awarded, the characteristics and relative advantages of the successful tender and the price of the offer and/or contract value. The Contracting Authority may decide to withhold certain information that it assesses as being confidential, in particular where its release would prejudice the legitimate commercial interests of economic operators or might distort fair competition between them. Such information may include, without being limited to, confidential aspects of tenders such as unit prices included in the financial offer, technical or trade secrets 21 .\n- · The Contracting Authority may disclose the submitted tender in the context of a request for public access to documents, or in other cases where the applicable law requires its disclosure. Unless there is an overriding public interest in disclosure 22 , the Contracting Authority may refuse to provide full access to the submitted tender, redacting the parts (if any) that contain confidential information, the disclosure of which would undermine the protection of commercial interests of the tenderer, including intellectual property.\n-  The Contracting Authority will disregard general statements that the whole tender or substantial parts of it contain confidential information. Tenderers need to mark clearly the information they consider confidential and explain why it may not be disclosed. The Contracting Authority reserves the right to make its own assessment of the confidential nature of any information contained in the tender.\n\n21 For the definition of trade secrets please see Article 2 (1) of DIRECTIVE (EU) 2016/943 on the protection of undisclosed know-how and business information (trade secrets) against their unlawful acquisition, use and disclosure.\n\n22 See Article 4 (2) of the REGULATION (EC) No 1049/2001 regarding public access to European Parliament, Council and Commission documents.\n\n46", + "recall": 0.9957627118644068, + "true_md": "## 4.4 Confidentiality of tenders: what information and under what conditions can be disclosed?\n\nOnce the Contracting Authority has opened a tender, it becomes its property and shall be treated confidentially, subject to the following: \n\n The Contracting Authority will disregard general statements that the whole tender or substantial parts of it contain confidential information. Tenderers need to mark clearly the information they consider confidential and explain why it may not be disclosed. The Contracting Authority reserves the right to make its own assessment of the confidential nature of any information contained in the tender.\n\n- • For the purposes of evaluating the tender and, if applicable, implementing the contract, performing audits, benchmarking, etc., the Contracting Authority is entitled to make available (any part of) the tender to its staff and the staff of other Union institutions, agencies and bodies, as well to other persons and entities working for the Contracting Authority or cooperating with it, including contractors or subcontractors and their staff provided that they are bound by an obligation of confidentiality. \n\n- • After the signature of the award decision tenderers whose tenders were received in accordance with the submission modalities, who have access to procurement, who are not found to be in an exclusion situation referred to in Article 136(1) of the FR, who are not rejected under Article 141 of the FR, whose tenders are not found to be incompliant with the procurement documents, and who make a request in writing will be notified of the name of the tenderer to whom the contract is awarded, the characteristics and relative advantages of the successful tender and the price of the offer and/or contract value. The Contracting Authority may decide to withhold certain information that it assesses as being confidential, in particular where its release would prejudice the legitimate commercial interests of economic operators or might distort fair competition between them. Such information may include, without being limited to, confidential aspects of tenders such as unit prices included in the financial offer, technical or trade secrets 21 .\n\n- • The Contracting Authority may disclose the submitted tender in the context of a request for public access to documents, or in other cases where the applicable law requires its disclosure. Unless there is an overriding public interest in disclosure 22 , the Contracting Authority may refuse to provide full access to the submitted tender, redacting the parts (if any) that contain confidential information, the disclosure of which would undermine the protection of commercial interests of the tenderer, including intellectual property.\n\n21 For the definition of trade secrets please see Article 2 (1) of DIRECTIVE (EU) 2016/943 on the protection of undisclosed know-how and business information (trade secrets) against their unlawful acquisition, use and disclosure. 22 See Article 4 (2) of the REGULATION (EC) No 1049/2001 regarding public access to European Parliament, \n\ndisclosure. 22 See Article 4 (2) of the REGULATION (EC) No 1049/2001 regarding public access to European Parliament, Council and Commission documents.\n\n46" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7422840157151522, + "doc_id": "22390bae2f18370f308ddf626a935c6c758b8de2f1d45951fc9c244565ec14b9", + "edit_distance": 0.3333333333333333, + "f1_score": 0.8846153846153845, + "meteor": 0.8416901408450704, + "precision": 0.9583333333333334, + "pred_md": "## LOT 4: 3D PRINTER\n\n4 DDP (Delivered Duty Paid) - Incoterms 2020 International Chamber of Commerce http://www.iccwbo.org/incoterms/\n\nAugust 2020 c4g\\_annexivfinoffer\\_en.doc\n\nPage 4 of 4", + "recall": 0.8214285714285714, + "true_md": "## LOT 4: 3D PRINTER\n\n$^{4}$ DDP (Delivered Duty Paid) — Incoterms 2020 International Chamber of Commerce http://www.iccwbo.org/incoterms/ \n\nPage 4 of 4 \n\nAugust 2020 c4g\\_annexivfinoffer\\_en.doc" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6897570294015545, + "doc_id": "a3157b0fa99835e31ab2ead51fbfa1adf42bc6090b7d77aed0379ff98f94fd93", + "edit_distance": 0.8285714285714286, + "f1_score": 0.9347826086956521, + "meteor": 0.8634729129088197, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## CHANGES No. 1 to the TENDER DOSSIER\n\n## Publication Ref: NEAR/ANK/2020/EA-OP/0056\n\nSubject: Supply of Equipment for Final Stop Before Climbing the Ladder: Mantar Cultivation and Technology Commercialization Center\n\n## ANNEX-II+III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS LOT 7 - EDM EQUIPMENT\n\n## Instead of;\n\n## Read;\n\n## Instead of;\n\nRead;\n\nPage I of2", + "recall": 0.8775510204081632, + "true_md": "Ref. Ares(2021)107577 - 06/01/2021\n\n# CHANGES No. 1 to the TENDER DOSSIER\n\nInstead of;\n\nRead;\n\nInstead of;\n\nRead;\n\nPage I of2\n\n## ANNEX-II+III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS\n\n## LOT 7 - EDM EQUIPMENT\n\n## Publication Ref: NEAR/ANK/2020/EA-OP/0056\n\n## Subject: Supply of Equipment for Final Stop Before Climbing the Ladder: Mantar Cultivation and Technology Commercialization Center" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6663582270701742, + "doc_id": "e185fe1ca7c48e1813e2f2df32f6197737df1148d2798d0fc2be7c4e765ac308", + "edit_distance": 0.625, + "f1_score": 0.9454545454545454, + "meteor": 0.9172587948450017, + "precision": 0.9629629629629629, + "pred_md": "## European Chemicals Agency\n\n## Call for tenders ECHA/2020/666\n\nFramework Contract for IT Services covering ECHA's Bespoke Applications Sourcing Tiers\n\n2 LOTs\n\nOpen Procurement procedure\n\nTender Specifications\n\n1", + "recall": 0.9285714285714286, + "true_md": "# European Chemicals Agency\n\n# 2 LOTs\n\n1\n\nOpen Procurement procedure\n\nTender Specifications \n\n# Call for tenders ECHA/2020/666\n\n# Framework Contract for IT Services covering ECHA’s Bespoke Applications Sourcing Tiers" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9166448963682279, + "doc_id": "832827d9b35b4e6b33c9b9265db0ca1a762283bbd0d6effd84af7f78fc801c7f", + "edit_distance": 0.4745762711864407, + "f1_score": 0.9754768392370574, + "meteor": 0.8955955310685026, + "precision": 0.988950276243094, + "pred_md": "EC - FWC services Dec 2018\n\nContract no: [complete]\n\n## I.4.2. Period of provision of the services\n\nThe period for the provision of the services starts to run from the date on which the specific contract is signed by the last party.\n\n## I.4.3. Implementation of single FWC\n\nThe contracting authority orders services by sending the contractor a specific contract by e-mail.\n\nWithin [ complete ] working days, the contractor must either:\n\n- - send back to the contracting authority the specific contract duly signed and dated; or\n- - send an explanation of why it cannot accept the order.\n\nIf the contractor repeatedly refuses to sign the specific contracts or repeatedly fails to send them back on time, the contractor may be considered in breach of its obligations under this FWC as set out in Article II.18.1 (c).\n\n## I.5. PRICES\n\n## I.5.1. Maximum amount of the FWC and maximum prices\n\nThe maximum amount covering all purchases under this FWC , including all renewals] is EUR [ amount in figures and in words ]. However, this does not bind the contracting authority to purchase for the maximum amount.\n\nThe maximum prices of the services are as listed in Annex II.\n\n## I.5.2. Price revision index\n\nPrice revision is determined by the formula set out in Article II.20 and using the trend in the harmonised indices of consumer prices (HICP) MUICP 1 published at: https://ec.europa.eu/eurostat/web/hicp/data/database under HICP (2015 = 100) - monthly data (index) (prc\\_hicp\\_midx).]\n\n## I.5.3. Reimbursement of expenses\n\nReimbursement of expenses is not applicable to this FWC.\n\n## I.6. PAYMENT ARRANGEMENTS\n\n## I.6.1. Pre-financing\n\nLot 2: Pre-financing is not applicable to this FWC.\n\nLots 1 and 3: When the nature of services provided can justify it (e.g. exhibitions, events requiring prebooking) and following signature of the specific contract by the last party and its receipt by the contracting authority, the contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) may claim a pre-financing\n\n1 Euro area (19 countries)': for contracts expressed in euro (as a general rule);\n\n5", + "recall": 0.9623655913978495, + "true_md": "Contract no: [complete] \n\nEC - FWC services Dec 2018 \n\nThe period for the provision of the services starts to run from the date on which the specific contract is signed by the last party. \n\nThe contracting authority orders services by sending the contractor a specific contract by e-mail.\n\nWithin [ complete ] working days, the contractor must either: \n\nIf the contractor repeatedly refuses to sign the specific contracts or repeatedly fails to send them back on time, the contractor may be considered in breach of its obligations under this FWC as set out in Article II.18.1 (c). \n\nThe maximum amount covering all purchases under this FWC , including all renewals] is EUR [ amount in figures and in words ]. However, this does not bind the contracting authority to purchase for the maximum amount. \n\nThe maximum prices of the services are as listed in Annex II. \n\nPrice revision is determined by the formula set out in Article II.20 and using the trend in the harmonised indices of consumer prices (HICP) MUICP 1 published at: https://ec.europa.eu/eurostat/web/hicp/data/database under HICP (2015 = 100) - monthly data (index) (prc\\_hicp\\_midx).]\n\nReimbursement of expenses is not applicable to this FWC. \n\nLot 2: Pre-financing is not applicable to this FWC. \n\nLots 1 and 3: When the nature of services provided can justify it (e.g. exhibitions, events requiring pre- booking) and following signature of the specific contract by the last party and its receipt by the contracting authority, the contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) may claim a pre-financing \n\n## I.4.2. Period of provision of the services\n\n## I.4.3. Implementation of single FWC\n\n## I.5. PRICES\n\n## I.5.1. Maximum amount of the FWC and maximum prices\n\n## I.5.2. Price revision index\n\n## I.5.3. Reimbursement of expenses\n\n## I.6. PAYMENT ARRANGEMENTS\n\n## I.6.1. Pre-financing\n\n$^{1}$ Euro area (19 countries)’: for contracts expressed in euro (as a general rule); \n\n5\n\n- - send an explanation of why it cannot accept the order.\n\n- - send back to the contracting authority the specific contract duly signed and dated; or" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7400828044922853, + "doc_id": "f4118d2bc334935c34bd8214f6d9980b39d0e43ba81b145a7ecb0033bc2ca127", + "edit_distance": 0.5, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9847412109375, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "ANNEX VII\n\nAppendice 4 de l'Annexe VII\n\n## Évacuation et invacuation - RESUMÉ\n\n95\n\nFR", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Appendice 4 de l'Annexe VII \n\n95 FR \n\nANNEX VII \n\n## Évacuation et invacuation - RESUMÉ" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.2123065715208498, + "doc_id": "9d2ca46b2093837de2d804798eeed02488edc454a21da4ca9d450b95c2bb1f10", + "edit_distance": 0.7737556561085973, + "f1_score": 0.5412844036697247, + "meteor": 0.7209776496034608, + "precision": 0.38064516129032255, + "pred_md": "- a. Engagement of IT experts corresponding to the relevant IT profiles listed in Annex 11 of the Technical Specifications and amounting to minimum 2000 person-days.\n- b. The work related to each referenced contract must have been performed during a continued period of minimum 6 months, during the timeframe from 23/11/2016 to 08/01/2021 and must have resulted in a major release deployed to production.\n- c. Minimum 2 referenced contracts must have been performed in DevOps mode.\n- d. Minimum 2 referenced contract must have been performed with applied cheminformatics techniques for chemical searching and clustering with tailor-made, complex visualisation such as graphs comprising several thousand nodes and edges.\n- e. Minimum 1 referenced contract must have been performed after/upon takeover of a production grade information system from a third party(ies) and resulting in a seamless transitioning of development activities.\n- 4. Minimum volumes for each referenced contract for Information systems takeover:\n- a. Engagement of IT experts corresponding to the relevant IT profiles listed in Annex 11 of the Technical Specifications.\n- b. The work related to each referenced contract must have been performed during a continued period of maximum 6 months, during the timeframe from 23/11/2016 to 08/01/2021 and must have resulted in the full takeover of a production grade information systems from a third party(ies).\n- c. Systems with over 500 registered users 18 ;\n- 5. Minimum volumes for referenced contract for Information systems operations:\n- a. Each referenced contract must have the engagement of IT experts corresponding to the relevant IT profiles listed in Annex 11 of the Technical Specifications and amounting to minimum 2000 man-days.\n- b. The work related to referenced contract must have been performed during a continued period of minimum 2 years, during the timeframe from 23/11/2016 to 08/01/2021 .\n- c. Minimum 2 referenced contracts must have been performed in DevOps mode.\n\n18 Registered user relates to a user having access to the system, implemented in frame of the referenced contract, where the user was identified with a unique identifier and a password, e.g. employees using the developed system, freelancers working for an institution and using the system as uniquely identified person, extranet users, etc. Registered user is not someone using the system, e.g. someone browsing a website or a guest in an online shop cannot be understood in the contract reference as a valid user fulfilling this requirement.\n\n24", + "recall": 0.9365079365079365, + "true_md": "$^{18}$ Registered user relates to a user having access to the system, implemented in frame of the referenced contract, where the user was identified with a unique identifier and a password, e.g. employees using the developed system, freelancers working for an institution and using the system as uniquely identified person, extranet users, etc. Registered user is not someone using the system, e.g. someone browsing a website or a guest in an online shop cannot be understood in the contract reference as a valid user fulfilling this requirement.\n\n24" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9097638375206408, + "doc_id": "2fb0d72e3e4754515ec9fcb85b3d0a2c40e1d2936702118a860e359974b6567c", + "edit_distance": 0.10054844606946983, + "f1_score": 0.9607390300230947, + "meteor": 0.9521646208628969, + "precision": 0.9674418604651163, + "pred_md": "General Administrative and Submission Clauses\n\n## 3.1. Requests for clarification before the submission deadline\n\nShould the Tenderers discover any discrepancies in the Procurement Documents or be in any doubt as to their meaning, or require additional information and/or clarifications, they should contact EIB according to the following procedure.\n\nSuch contact shall be made exclusively via the eTendering platform at the link indicated in the Contract notice, section I, 'Electronic access to information'. Requests not submitted via the eTendering platform will not be considered. The eTendering platform contains a 'Questions & Answers' section permitting Tenderers to send questions within the deadline specified in point 1.4 in the 'Terms of Reference' and consult EIB's responses. The EIB will publish its replies on this platform at least 6 (six) calendar days before the deadline for submission of tenders.\n\nOnly in case of procurement procedures without publication of a contract notice, any request for additional information should be addressed in writing to CS-procurement@eib.org also within the deadline specified in point 1.4 of the 'Terms of Reference'.\n\nRequests may be submitted no later than the deadline indicated in point 1.4 in the 'Terms of Reference'. Tenderers shall note that EIB is not bound to reply to requests for additional clarifications made less than 5 (five) working days before the deadline for dispatching tenders.\n\nAll clarification questions and answers shall form an inseparable part of the Procurement Documents.\n\n## 3.2. Amendments to the Procurement Documents\n\nAt any time prior to the deadline for dispatching tenders, EIB may modify the Procurement Documents by amendment. N.B. In case of procurement procedures without publication of a contract notice the EIB may modify the Procurement Documents also thereafter.\n\nIn order to allow Tenderers reasonable time in which to take the amendment into account in preparing their tenders, EIB, at its discretion, may extend the deadline for dispatching tenders.\n\n- N.B. The amendments will be made available electronically on the section of the relevant call for tenders in the e-Tendering platform no later than 6 (six) calendar days before the deadline for submission of tenders.\n\nIt is the Tenderer's sole responsibility to check for updates and modifications during the tendering period.\n\nOnly in case of procurement procedures without publication of a contract notice, amendments will be issued electronically to all parties.\n\nAll amendments shall form an inseparable part of the Procurement Documents.\n\n## 3.3. Site visits\n\nIf the 'Terms of Reference' provide for an (obligatory) site visit, the meeting point is on the specified date and time at the reception desk of the EKI/WKI building located at 98/100 Boulevard Konrad Adenauer L-2950 Luxembourg. Tenderers are to confirm their participation by email to CSprocurement@eib.org.\n\nSummaries of the main elements of any oral communications with Tenderers during the site visit shall be made available as an amendment in accordance with point 3.2 above.\n\nLast updated: June 2020\n\nPage 5 of 21", + "recall": 0.9541284403669725, + "true_md": "General Administrative and Submission Clauses\n\n## 3.1. Requests for clarification before the submission deadline\n\n## 3.2. Amendments to the Procurement Documents\n\n## 3.3. Site visits\n\nShould the Tenderers discover any discrepancies in the Procurement Documents or be in any doubt as to their meaning, or require additional information and/or clarifications, they should contact EIB according to the following procedure.\n\nSuch contact shall be made exclusively via the eTendering platform at the link indicated in the Contract notice, section I, “Electronic access to information”. Requests not submitted via the eTendering platform will not be considered. The eTendering platform contains a ‘Questions & Answers’ section permitting Tenderers to send questions within the deadline specified in point 1.4 in the ‘Terms of Reference’ and consult EIB’s responses. The EIB will publish its replies on this platform at least 6 (six) calendar days before the deadline for submission of tenders.\n\nOnly in case of procurement procedures without publication of a contract notice, any request for additional information should be addressed in writing to CS-procurement@eib.org also within the deadline specified in point 1.4 of the `Terms of Reference`.\n\nRequests may be submitted no later than the deadline indicated in point 1.4 in the `Terms of Reference`. Tenderers shall note that EIB is not bound to reply to requests for additional clarifications made less than 5 (five) working days before the deadline for dispatching tenders. \n\nAll clarification questions and answers shall form an inseparable part of the Procurement Documents. \n\nAt any time prior to the deadline for dispatching tenders, EIB may modify the Procurement Documents by amendment. N.B. In case of procurement procedures without publication of a contract notice the EIB may modify the Procurement Documents also thereafter.\n\nIn order to allow Tenderers reasonable time in which to take the amendment into account in preparing their tenders, EIB, at its discretion, may extend the deadline for dispatching tenders. \n\nN.B. The amendments will be made available electronically on the section of the relevant call for tenders in the e-Tendering platform no later than 6 (six) calendar days before the deadline for submission of tenders.\n\nIt is the Tenderer’s sole responsibility to check for updates and modifications during the tendering period. \n\nOnly in case of procurement procedures without publication of a contract notice, amendments will be issued electronically to all parties. \n\nAll amendments shall form an inseparable part of the Procurement Documents. \n\nIf the `Terms of Reference` provide for an (obligatory) site visit, the meeting point is on the specified date and time at the reception desk of the EKI/WKI building located at 98/100 Boulevard Konrad Adenauer L-2950 Luxembourg. Tenderers are to confirm their participation by email to CS- procurement@eib.org. \n\nSummaries of the main elements of any oral communications with Tenderers during the site visit shall be made available as an amendment in accordance with point 3.2 above. \n\nLast updated: June 2020\n\nPage 5 of 21" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "e34804c973ecbacc67416895bad3b14686c11191fa091deda8d1a538053d2525", + "edit_distance": 0.10054844606946983, + "f1_score": 0.9607390300230947, + "meteor": 0.9521646208628969, + "precision": 0.9674418604651163, + "pred_md": "Yes - Active", + "recall": 0.9541284403669725, + "true_md": "" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8170371535719657, + "doc_id": "2d8f99a213ae764ba0ca4949f93dd6b13a7824304b3c03b7a9c536141274cd3f", + "edit_distance": 0.14634146341463414, + "f1_score": 0.90625, + "meteor": 0.8635525321239607, + "precision": 0.9666666666666667, + "pred_md": "## LOT 3: PROTOTYPING & VISUAL PROCESSING EQUIPMENT\n\n3 DDP (Delivered Duty Paid) - Incoterms 2020 International Chamber of Commerce http://www.iccwbo.org/incoterms/\n\nAugust 2020 c4g\\_annexivfinoffer\\_en.doc\n\nPage 3 of 4", + "recall": 0.8529411764705882, + "true_md": "## LOT 3: PROTOTYPING & VISUAL PROCESSING EQUIPMENT\n\n$^{3}$ DDP (Delivered Duty Paid) — Incoterms 2020 International Chamber of Commerce http://www.iccwbo.org/incoterms/ \n\nAugust 2020 c4g\\_annexivfinoffer\\_en.doc \n\nPage 3 of 4" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9886530778736273, + "doc_id": "65892781a929e87b610e022bce9de1f1d359170fc5ff2d84b55d90676be6026a", + "edit_distance": 0.039761431411530816, + "f1_score": 0.9822784810126582, + "meteor": 0.9927151754440426, + "precision": 0.9797979797979798, + "pred_md": "attestation de contrôle avant mise en service ainsi que de contrôle périodique tous les trois mois par un organisme agréé (SECT).\n\n- 7.5.2. Il convient de remettre une copie des homologations au CSS ou au gestionnaire de projet du CUE avant de commencer à se servir de ces engins. À défaut, le CSS ou l'UP a le droit d'interdire l'utilisation des engins.\n- 7.5.3. En cas d'utilisation de plusieurs engins de levage dont les flèches se chevauchent, il y a lieu d'établir, en concertation avec le CSS ou le gestionnaire de projet du CUE, une procédure d'utilisation et de communication.\n- 7.5.4. Les conducteurs d'engins de levage doivent fournir la preuve de leur aptitude à se servir de ces engins (formation, expérience, ...). A cet effet, ils confirment leur aptitude sur la copie de l'homologation qu'ils signent et qui est remise au CSS ou, à défaut, au gestionnaire de projet du CUE.\n- 7.5.5. Lors des manœuvres de manutention, la zone de travail doit être balisée.\n- 7.5.6. Lors d'utilisation d'un élévateur, de nacelles ou de nacelles à ciseaux, un harnais de sécurité (conforme) doit être porté.\n- 7.5.7. Pour tout travail de levage, une autorisation de travail doit être demandée au UP.\n- 7.5.8. Lors des travaux de manutention avec un élévateur à fourches, une protection collective (ceinture ou barrière de sécurité) doit être présente et en bon état de fonctionnement dans l'engin. Le Klaxon de recul doit rester activé (AR 04/05/1999).\n- 7.5.9. En cas de travaux de levage, la zone de travail doit être balisée. Un plan d'implantation doit être fourni au CSS ou au gestionnaire de projet du CUE et au UP (plan d'accès, zone de circulation, zone d'emplacement des matériaux, indication des chemins de secours, etc…).\n- 7.6 Pour des travaux dans des zones explosives, les outils doivent être \"Ex\" (antidéflagrant). Toute mesure préventive doit être prise afin d'éviter des explosions.\n\n## 7.7 Excavatrices\n\n- 7.7.1. Les conducteurs d'excavatrices doivent apporter la preuve écrite de leur aptitude à se servir de ces engins (formation, expérience...). Les protections d'origine des machines ne peuvent jamais être enlevées ou mises hors service.\n- 7.7.2. En cas des travaux d'excavation, la zone de travail doit être balisée et doit être munie de garde-corps. Toute mesure préventive doit être prise pour éviter le risque de glissement de terrain. Un plan d'implantation doit être fourni au CSS et au gestionnaire de projet du CUE ou au UP (plan d'accès, zone de circulation, zone d'emplacement des matériaux, l'indication des chemins de secours, etc…).\n\n76\n\nANNEX VII\n\nFR", + "recall": 0.9847715736040609, + "true_md": "attestation de contrôle avant mise en service ainsi que de contrôle périodique tous les trois mois par un organisme agréé (SECT). \n\n76 FR \n\nANNEX VII \n\n- 7.5.2.Il convient de remettre une copie des homologations au CSS ou au gestionnaire de projet du CUE avant de commencer à se servir de ces engins. À défaut, le CSS ou l'UP a le droit d'interdire l'utilisation des engins.\n\n- 7.5.3.En cas d'utilisation de plusieurs engins de levage dont les flèches se chevauchent, il y a lieu d'établir, en concertation avec le CSS ou le gestionnaire de projet du CUE, une procédure d'utilisation et de communication. \n\n- 7.5.4.Les conducteurs d'engins de levage doivent fournir la preuve de leur aptitude à se servir de ces engins (formation, expérience, ...). A cet effet, ils confirment leur aptitude sur la copie de l'homologation qu'ils signent et qui est remise au CSS ou, à défaut, au gestionnaire de projet du CUE. \n\n- 7.5.5. Lors des manœuvres de manutention, la zone de travail doit être balisée. \n\n- 7.5.6. Lors d'utilisation d'un élévateur, de nacelles ou de nacelles à ciseaux, un harnais de sécurité (conforme) doit être porté. \n\n- 7.5.7. Pour tout travail de levage, une autorisation de travail doit être demandée au UP. \n\n- 7.5.8. Lors des travaux de manutention avec un élévateur à fourches, une protection collective (ceinture ou barrière de sécurité) doit être présente et en bon état de fonctionnement dans l'engin. Le Klaxon de recul doit rester activé (AR 04/05/1999). \n\n- 7.5.9. En cas de travaux de levage, la zone de travail doit être balisée. Un plan d'implantation doit être fourni au CSS ou au gestionnaire de projet du CUE et au UP (plan d'accès, zone de circulation, zone d'emplacement des matériaux, indication des chemins de secours, etc…). \n\n- 7.6 Pour des travaux dans des zones explosives, les outils doivent être \"Ex\" (antidéflagrant). Toute mesure préventive doit être prise afin d'éviter des explosions. \n\n- 7.7.1. Les conducteurs d'excavatrices doivent apporter la preuve écrite de leur aptitude à se servir de ces engins (formation, expérience...). Les protections d'origine des machines ne peuvent jamais être enlevées ou mises hors service. \n\n- 7.7.2. En cas des travaux d'excavation, la zone de travail doit être balisée et doit être munie de garde-corps. Toute mesure préventive doit être prise pour éviter le risque de glissement de terrain. Un plan d'implantation doit être fourni au CSS et au gestionnaire de projet du CUE ou au UP (plan d'accès, zone de circulation, zone d'emplacement des matériaux, l'indication des chemins de secours, etc…). \n\n## 7.7 Excavatrices" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8725129388059689, + "doc_id": "4c5dedc0b74edb7465f7fe97129a83fe403531bdbfec6a17962fe6d25c15f92b", + "edit_distance": 0.05555555555555555, + "f1_score": 0.9411764705882353, + "meteor": 0.943675509419454, + "precision": 0.9411764705882353, + "pred_md": "Vaccine Effectiveness, Burden and Impact Studies (VEBIS) of COVID-19 and Influenza - Tender Specifications ECDC/2021/12924", + "recall": 0.9411764705882353, + "true_md": "Vaccine Effectiveness, Burden and Impact Studies (VEBIS) of COVID-19 and Influenza – Tender Specifications ECDC/2021/12924" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9882048076029648, + "doc_id": "acf2b9d312890fd931e0522158c2fed4278ca8a256122e79ac28c814086f3ba7", + "edit_distance": 0.05460750853242321, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9994438844279224, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## 2. GENERAL INFORMATION ON TENDERING\n\n## 2.1 Legal basis: what are the rules?\n\nThe present call for tenders is governed by the Financial Regulation of the European Chemicals Agency (ECHA), which refers to the provisions of Regulation (EU, Euratom) 2018/1046 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 18 July 2018 on the financial rules applicable to the general budget of the Union (the Financial Regulation) 4 .\n\nThe Contracting Authority has chosen to award the FWC resulting from this call for tenders through an open procedure pursuant to Article 164(1) (a) of the Financial Regulation. In an open procedure any interested economic operator (any natural or legal person who offers the relevant services, and that has access to the procurement in accordance with section 2.2 ), may submit a tender.\n\n## 2.2 Rules on access to procurement: who may submit a tender?\n\nParticipation in this call for tenders is open on equal terms to all natural and legal persons coming within the scope of the Treaties, as well as to international organizations.\n\nIt is also open to all natural and legal persons established in a third country which has a special agreement with the European Union in the field of public procurement on the conditions laid down in that agreement. This procedure is, however, not covered by the Government Procurement Agreement (GPA).\n\n##  For tenderers established in the United Kingdom:\n\nPlease be aware that following the entry into force of the EU-UK Withdrawal Agreement 5 on 1 February 2020 and in particular Articles 127(6), 137 and 138, the references to natural or legal persons residing or established in a Member State of the European Union are to be understood as including natural or legal persons residing or established in the United Kingdom. UK residents and entities are therefore eligible to participate under this call for tenders until the end of the transition period established by the EU-UK Withdrawal Agreement (i.e. 31 December 2020). Following the end of the transition period, UK residents and entities will be considered natural and legal persons established in a third country. In this regard, tenderers shall be aware of the minimum requirements defined in section I.4.2 if relying on other entities established in UK.\n\nECHA may terminate the framework contract, or specific contracts signed therein, with UK economic operators, based on the provisions of the framework contract; when the given\n\n4 Regulation (EU, Euratom) 2018/1046 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 18 July 2018 on the financial rules applicable to the general budget of the Union, amending Regulations (EU) No 1296/2013, (EU) No 1301/2013, (EU) No 1303/2013, (EU) No 1304/2013, (EU) No 1309/2013, (EU) No 1316/2013, (EU) No 223/2014, (EU) No 283/2014, and Decision No 541/2014/EU and repealing Regulation (EU, Euratom) No 966/2012 (OJ L 193 of 30.07.2018, p.1).\n\n5 Agreement on the withdrawal of the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Northern Ireland from the European Union and the European Atomic Energy Community\n\n11", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## 2. GENERAL INFORMATION ON TENDERING\n\n## 2.1 Legal basis: what are the rules?\n\n## 2.2 Rules on access to procurement: who may submit a tender?\n\nThe present call for tenders is governed by the Financial Regulation of the European Chemicals Agency (ECHA), which refers to the provisions of Regulation (EU, Euratom) 2018/1046 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 18 July 2018 on the financial rules applicable to the general budget of the Union (the Financial Regulation) 4 . \n\nThe Contracting Authority has chosen to award the FWC resulting from this call for tenders through an open procedure pursuant to Article 164(1) (a) of the Financial Regulation. In an open procedure any interested economic operator (any natural or legal person who offers the relevant services, and that has access to the procurement in accordance with section 2.2 ), may submit a tender. \n\nParticipation in this call for tenders is open on equal terms to all natural and legal persons coming within the scope of the Treaties, as well as to international organizations.\n\nIt is also open to all natural and legal persons established in a third country which has a special agreement with the European Union in the field of public procurement on the conditions laid down in that agreement. This procedure is, however, not covered by the Government Procurement Agreement (GPA). \n\n For tenderers established in the United Kingdom:\n\nPlease be aware that following the entry into force of the EU-UK Withdrawal Agreement 5 on 1 February 2020 and in particular Articles 127(6), 137 and 138, the references to natural or legal persons residing or established in a Member State of the European Union are to be understood as including natural or legal persons residing or established in the United Kingdom. UK residents and entities are therefore eligible to participate under this call for tenders until the end of the transition period established by the EU-UK Withdrawal Agreement (i.e. 31 December 2020). Following the end of the transition period, UK residents and entities will be considered natural and legal persons established in a third country. In this regard, tenderers shall be aware of the minimum requirements defined in section I.4.2 if relying on other entities established in UK. \n\nECHA may terminate the framework contract, or specific contracts signed therein, with UK economic operators, based on the provisions of the framework contract; when the given \n\n4 Regulation (EU, Euratom) 2018/1046 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 18 July 2018 on the financial rules applicable to the general budget of the Union, amending Regulations (EU) No 1296/2013, (EU) No 1301/2013, (EU) No 1303/2013, (EU) No 1304/2013, (EU) No 1309/2013, (EU) No 1316/2013, (EU) No 223/2014, (EU) No 283/2014, and Decision No 541/2014/EU and repealing Regulation (EU, Euratom) No 966/2012 (OJ L 193 of 30.07.2018, p.1). \n\n5 Agreement on the withdrawal of the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Northern Ireland from the European Union and the European Atomic Energy Community\n\n11" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "bcfc706cb80853e2a24b27c42c31ffb640bacf14ba747fcb8b4be987944aff38", + "edit_distance": 0.9971751412429378, + "f1_score": 0.011494252873563218, + "meteor": 0.013774104683195594, + "precision": 0.005780346820809248, + "pred_md": "- b. Each referenced contract must have been performed during the timeframe from 23/11/2016 to 08/01/2021 and resulting in an accepted final Report/Study.\n- c. All following domains must be covered by at least one referenced contract, and each referenced contract must cover at least two of the following domains:\n- - IT consultancy for high level design, analysis, architecture and integration in the field of Regulatory Science\n- - Business model tools, or optimisation, or dynamic analytics, or semantic technologies or applied science and implementations\n- - Interoperability between components of highly-distributed Information Systems and analysis of e-Government Services\n- - Secured digital exchange of data and documents between public administrations and/or businesses in a cross-border context\n- - Data Science, or Big Data, or Data analytics\n- - Cloud & Collaboration -Development or integration of collaboration platforms making use of a combination of on premises, hybrid or Cloud technologies\n- 4. Minimum volumes for each referenced contract for Information systems development:\n- a. Engagement of IT experts corresponding to the relevant IT profiles listed in Annex 11 of the Technical Specifications.\n- b. The work related to the referenced contracts must have been performed during a continued period of maximum 6 months, during the timeframe from 23/11/2016 to 08/01/2021 and must have resulted in the production of a pilot, prototype or Minimum Viable Product.\n- c. Each of the contract references must cover at least 2 of the following minimum requirements, and each minimum requirement must be fulfilled by at least one contract reference:\n- -Overall value of the referenced contract of at least 500 000 EUR for the whole duration;\n- -Resulting in a release of a production system that has been maintained and supported during minimum 1 year;\n- -Services provided on the basis of a Service Level Agreement (including, among others, service levels, performance indicators for monitoring performance and a compensatory system for underperformance) or equivalent;\n\n21", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "21" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9178491602113178, + "doc_id": "dde4d4fd1dd91757be5137a37292b29b075bad3fb3faf9568c8d700b917a0562", + "edit_distance": 0.1109375, + "f1_score": 0.9587073608617597, + "meteor": 0.9344622660782587, + "precision": 0.956989247311828, + "pred_md": "EC - FWC services Dec 2018\n\nContract no: [complete]\n\n## II. GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR THE FRAMEWORK CONTRACT FOR SERVICES\n\n## II.1. DEFINITIONS\n\nFor the purpose of this FWC, the following definitions (indicated in italics in the text) apply:\n\n'Back office' : the internal system(s) used by the parties to process electronic invoices;\n\n'Breach of obligations': failure by the contractor to fulfil one or more of its contractual obligations;\n\n'Confidential information or document' : any information or document received by either party from the other or accessed by either party in the context of the implementation of the FWC , that any of the parties has identified in writing as confidential. It may not include information that is publicly available;\n\n'Conflict of interest' : a situation where the impartial and objective implementation of the FWC by the contractor is compromised for reasons involving family, emotional life, political or national affinity, economic interest, any other direct or indirect personal interest, or any other shared interest with the contracting authority or any third party related to the subject matter of the FWC;\n\n'Creator' : means any natural person who contributes to the production of the result ;\n\n'EDI message' (electronic data interchange): a message created and exchanged through the electronic transfer, from computer to computer, of commercial and administrative data using an agreed standard;\n\n'e-PRIOR' : the service-oriented communication platform that provides a series of web services and allows the exchange of standardised electronic messages and documents between the parties. This is done either through web services, with a machine-to-machine connection between the parties' back office systems ( EDI messages ), or through a web application (the s upplier portal ). The Platform may be used to exchange electronic documents (e-documents) such as electronic requests for services, electronic specific contracts , electronic acceptance of services and electronic invoices between the parties;\n\n'Force majeure' : any unforeseeable, exceptional situation or event beyond the control of the parties that prevents either of them from fulfilling any of their obligations under the FWC. The situation or event must not be attributable to error or negligence on the part of the parties or on the part of the subcontractors and must prove to be inevitable despite their exercising due diligence. Defaults of service, defects in equipment or material or delays in making them available, labour disputes, strikes and financial difficulties may not be invoked as force majeure , unless they stem directly from a relevant case of force majeure ;\n\n'Formal notification' (or 'formally notify'): form of communication between the parties made in writing by mail or email, which provides the sender with compelling evidence that the message was delivered to the specified recipient;\n\n'Fraud': an act or omission committed in order to make an unlawful gain for the perpetrator or another by causing a loss to the Union's financial interests, and relating to: i) the use or presentation of false, incorrect or incomplete statements or documents, which has as its effect the misappropriation or wrongful retention of funds or assets from the Union budget; ii)the non-disclosure of information in violation of a specific obligation with the same effect; or iii) the misapplication of such funds or assets for purposes other than those for which they were originally granted, which damages the Union's financial interests;\n\n12", + "recall": 0.960431654676259, + "true_md": "EC - FWC services Dec 2018 \n\nContract no: [complete] \n\nFor the purpose of this FWC, the following definitions (indicated in italics in the text) apply: \n\n‘Back office’ : the internal system(s) used by the parties to process electronic invoices; \n\n‘Breach of obligations’: failure by the contractor to fulfil one or more of its contractual obligations; \n\n‘Confidential information or document’ : any information or document received by either party from the other or accessed by either party in the context of the implementation of the FWC , that any of the parties has identified in writing as confidential. It may not include information that is publicly available; \n\n‘Conflict of interest’ : a situation where the impartial and objective implementation of the FWC by the contractor is compromised for reasons involving family, emotional life, political or national affinity, economic interest, any other direct or indirect personal interest, or any other shared interest with the contracting authority or any third party related to the subject matter of the FWC; \n\n‘Creator’ : means any natural person who contributes to the production of the result ; \n\n‘EDI message’ (electronic data interchange): a message created and exchanged through the electronic transfer, from computer to computer, of commercial and administrative data using an agreed standard; \n\n‘e-PRIOR’ : the service-oriented communication platform that provides a series of web services and allows the exchange of standardised electronic messages and documents between the parties. This is done either through web services, with a machine-to-machine connection between the parties’ back office systems ( EDI messages ), or through a web application (the s upplier portal ). The Platform may be used to exchange electronic documents (e-documents) such as electronic requests for services, electronic specific contracts , electronic acceptance of services and electronic invoices between the parties;\n\n‘Force majeure’ : any unforeseeable, exceptional situation or event beyond the control of the parties that prevents either of them from fulfilling any of their obligations under the FWC. The situation or event must not be attributable to error or negligence on the part of the parties or on the part of the subcontractors and must prove to be inevitable despite their exercising due diligence. Defaults of service, defects in equipment or material or delays in making them available, labour disputes, strikes and financial difficulties may not be invoked as force majeure , unless they stem directly from a relevant case of force majeure ;\n\n‘Formal notification’ (or ‘formally notify’): form of communication between the parties made in writing by mail or email, which provides the sender with compelling evidence that the message was delivered to the specified recipient;\n\n‘Fraud’: an act or omission committed in order to make an unlawful gain for the perpetrator or another by causing a loss to the Union’s financial interests, and relating to: i) the use or presentation of false, incorrect or incomplete statements or documents, which has as its effect the misappropriation or wrongful retention of funds or assets from the Union budget; ii)the non-disclosure of information in violation of a specific obligation with the same effect; or iii) the misapplication of such funds or assets for purposes other than those for which they were originally granted, which damages the Union’s financial interests;\n\n12\n\n## II.1. DEFINITIONS\n\n## II. GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR THE FRAMEWORK CONTRACT FOR SERVICES" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9821056259515402, + "doc_id": "280b717b4155f317253e14ec9144de8f855c5a462a411571ed6220483396e3df", + "edit_distance": 0.14016172506738545, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9922427907183304, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "- h) si le contractant se trouve dans une situation qui pourrait constituer un conflit d'intérêts ou un intérêt à caractère professionnel contradictoire visé à l'article II.7;\n- i) lorsqu'un changement juridique, financier, technique, d'organisation ou de contrôle dans la situation du contractant est susceptible d'influer de manière substantielle sur l' exécution du CC ou de modifier de manière substantielle les conditions dans lesquelles le CC a initialement été attribué ou lorsqu'un changement relatif aux situations d'exclusion énumérées à l'article 136 du règlement (UE) 2018/1046 remet en cause la décision d'attribution du contrat;\n- j) en cas de force majeure , si la reprise de l'exécution est impossible ou si un changement nécessaire au CC ou à un bon de commande signifierait que le cahier des charges n'est plus respecté ou donnerait lieu à une inégalité de traitement entre soumissionnaires;\n- k) si les besoins du pouvoir adjudicateur évoluent et si de nouveaux services ne sont plus nécessaires en vertu du CC; dans ces cas, les bons de commande en cours ne sont pas remis en cause;\n- l) si, à la suite de la résiliation du CC conclu avec un ou plusieurs des contractants, le CC multiple avec remise en concurrence ne comporte plus la concurrence minimale requise;\n- m) si le contractant ne respecte pas les obligations en matière de protection des données découlant de l'article II.9.2;\n- n) si le contractant ne respecte pas les obligations applicables en matière de protection des données découlant du règlement (UE) 2016/679.\n\n## II.18.2 Motifs de résiliation par le contractant\n\nLe contractant peut résilier le CC ou un bon de commande si le pouvoir adjudicateur ne respecte pas ses obligations, notamment l'obligation de fournir au contractant les informations nécessaires à l' exécution du CC ou d'un bon de commande prévue dans le cahier des charges.\n\n## II.18.3 Procédure de résiliation\n\nUne partie doit notifier formellement à l'autre partie son intention de résilier le CC ou un bon de commande en précisant les motifs de la résiliation.\n\nL'autre partie dispose d'un délai de 30 jours à compter de la date de réception pour faire part de ses observations, y compris les mesures qu'elle a prises pour assurer la continuité du respect de ses obligations contractuelles. À défaut, la décision de résiliation devient exécutoire le jour suivant l'expiration du délai de présentation des observations.\n\nSi l'autre partie présente des observations, la partie souhaitant résilier doit lui notifier formellement le retrait de son intention de résilier ou sa décision finale de résiliation.\n\nDans les cas visés à l'article II.18.1, points a) à d), g) à i), k) à n), et à l'article II.18.2, la date à laquelle la résiliation prend effet doit être précisée dans la notification formelle .\n\nDans les cas visés à l'article II.18.1, points e), f) et j), la résiliation est effective le jour suivant la date à laquelle le contractant a reçu notification de la résiliation.\n\nEn outre, à la demande du pouvoir adjudicateur et indépendamment des motifs de résiliation, le contractant doit fournir toute l'assistance nécessaire, y compris les informations, documents et dossiers, afin de permettre au pouvoir adjudicateur d'achever ou de continuer les services, ou de les transférer à un nouveau contractant ou en interne, sans interruption ou effet négatif sur la qualité ou la continuité des services. Les parties peuvent convenir d'établir un plan de transition précisant les modalités de l'assistance du contractant, à moins qu'un tel plan ne soit déjà détaillé dans les autres documents contractuels ou dans le cahier des charges. Le contractant doit fournir cette assistance sans frais supplémentaires, sauf s'il peut démontrer que cette assistance nécessite des ressources ou moyens supplémentaires substantiels, auquel cas il doit fournir une estimation des frais engagés et les parties négocieront un arrangement de bonne foi.\n\n## II.18.4 Effets de la résiliation\n\nLe contractant est responsable des dommages subis par le pouvoir adjudicateur à la suite de la résiliation du CC ou d'un bon de commande , y compris le coût de désignation d'un autre contractant\n\n28\n\nFR", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "- h) si le contractant se trouve dans une situation qui pourrait constituer un conflit d'intérêts ou un intérêt à caractère professionnel contradictoire visé à l'article II.7; \n\n- i) lorsqu'un changement juridique, financier, technique, d'organisation ou de contrôle dans la situation du contractant est susceptible d'influer de manière substantielle sur l' exécution du CC ou de modifier de manière substantielle les conditions dans lesquelles le CC a initialement été attribué ou lorsqu'un changement relatif aux situations d'exclusion énumérées à l'article 136 du règlement (UE) 2018/1046 remet en cause la décision d'attribution du contrat; \n\n- j) en cas de force majeure , si la reprise de l'exécution est impossible ou si un changement nécessaire au CC ou à un bon de commande signifierait que le cahier des charges n'est plus respecté ou donnerait lieu à une inégalité de traitement entre soumissionnaires; \n\n- k) si les besoins du pouvoir adjudicateur évoluent et si de nouveaux services ne sont plus nécessaires en vertu du CC; dans ces cas, les bons de commande en cours ne sont pas remis en cause; \n\n- l) si, à la suite de la résiliation du CC conclu avec un ou plusieurs des contractants, le CC multiple avec remise en concurrence ne comporte plus la concurrence minimale requise; \n\n- m) si le contractant ne respecte pas les obligations en matière de protection des données découlant de l'article II.9.2; \n\n- n) si le contractant ne respecte pas les obligations applicables en matière de protection des données découlant du règlement (UE) 2016/679. \n\nLe contractant peut résilier le CC ou un bon de commande si le pouvoir adjudicateur ne respecte pas ses obligations, notamment l'obligation de fournir au contractant les informations nécessaires à l' exécution du CC ou d'un bon de commande prévue dans le cahier des charges. \n\nUne partie doit notifier formellement à l'autre partie son intention de résilier le CC ou un bon de commande en précisant les motifs de la résiliation. \n\nL'autre partie dispose d'un délai de 30 jours à compter de la date de réception pour faire part de ses observations, y compris les mesures qu'elle a prises pour assurer la continuité du respect de ses obligations contractuelles. À défaut, la décision de résiliation devient exécutoire le jour suivant l'expiration du délai de présentation des observations. \n\nDans les cas visés à l'article II.18.1, points a) à d), g) à i), k) à n), et à l'article II.18.2, la date à laquelle la résiliation prend effet doit être précisée dans la notification formelle . \n\nDans les cas visés à l'article II.18.1, points e), f) et j), la résiliation est effective le jour suivant la date à laquelle le contractant a reçu notification de la résiliation. \n\nSi l'autre partie présente des observations, la partie souhaitant résilier doit lui notifier formellement le retrait de son intention de résilier ou sa décision finale de résiliation. \n\nEn outre, à la demande du pouvoir adjudicateur et indépendamment des motifs de résiliation, le contractant doit fournir toute l'assistance nécessaire, y compris les informations, documents et dossiers, afin de permettre au pouvoir adjudicateur d'achever ou de continuer les services, ou de les transférer à un nouveau contractant ou en interne, sans interruption ou effet négatif sur la qualité ou la continuité des services. Les parties peuvent convenir d'établir un plan de transition précisant les modalités de l'assistance du contractant, à moins qu'un tel plan ne soit déjà détaillé dans les autres documents contractuels ou dans le cahier des charges. Le contractant doit fournir cette assistance sans frais supplémentaires, sauf s'il peut démontrer que cette assistance nécessite des ressources ou moyens supplémentaires substantiels, auquel cas il doit fournir une estimation des frais engagés et les parties négocieront un arrangement de bonne foi. \n\nLe contractant est responsable des dommages subis par le pouvoir adjudicateur à la suite de la résiliation du CC ou d'un bon de commande , y compris le coût de désignation d'un autre contractant \n\n## II.18.4 Effets de la résiliation\n\n## II.18.3 Procédure de résiliation\n\n## II.18.2 Motifs de résiliation par le contractant\n\n28 FR\n\n28 FR" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9003130857339168, + "doc_id": "897f11637447c85dc787678d97428a7733736b7da11e65fadbeb92c3f11239ca", + "edit_distance": 0.22475106685633, + "f1_score": 0.9814432989690722, + "meteor": 0.8631992865367502, + "precision": 0.9916666666666667, + "pred_md": "ANNEX 7 of part C of the tender dossier\n\n<To be completed on paper bearing the letterhead of the financial institution>\n\n## PRE-FINANCING GUARANTEE FORM\n\nFor the attention of: The European Investment Bank (EIB) 98-100 boulevard Konrad Adenauer L-2950 Luxembourg\n\nSubject:\n\nGuarantee No<…>\n\nFinancing Guarantee for the repayment of pre-financing payable under contract < TA Contract number and title > (please quote number and title in all correspondence)\n\nWe, the undersigned, <name and address of financial institution> hereby irrevocably and unconditionally declare that we guarantee as primary obligor, and not merely as a surety, on behalf of <name and address of the Contractor>, hereinafter referred to as 'the Consultant\", the payment on first demand to the European Investment Bank (EIB) of < amount of the pre-financing > ( in number and in word ) corresponding to the pre-financing as mentioned in [for TA outside EU: Article 7 of the Special Conditions of the contract] [for TA inside EU: Article 5 of the Contract for provision of services] concluded between the [for TA outside EU: Consultant] [for TA inside EU: Service Provider] and the EIB, hereinafter referred to as 'the Contract '.\n\nPayment shall be made without objection or legal proceedings of any kind, upon receipt of your first written claim (sent by registered letter with confirmation or receipt) stating that the [for TA outside EU: Consultant] [for TA inside EU: Service Provider] has not repaid the pre-financing on request or that the Contract has been terminated. We shall not delay the payment, nor shall we oppose it for any reason whatsoever. We shall inform you in writing as soon as payment has been made.\n\nWe accept notably that no amendment to the terms of the Contract can release us from our obligation under this guarantee. We waive the right to be informed of any change, addition or amendment of the Contract. We note that the guarantee will be released [for TA outside EU: in accordance with Article 30 of the General Conditions] [for TA inside EU: after the final payment has been made.] [ and in any case at the latest on ……..(at the expiry of 18 months after the period of implementation of the tasks )] 1 .\n\nThe law applicable to this guarantee shall be that of Grand Duchy of Luxembourg. Any dispute arising out of or in connection with this guarantee shall be referred to the courts of Luxembourg.\n\nThis guarantee will come into force and will take effect on receipt of the pre-financing payment in the account designated by the [for TA outside EU: Consultant] [for TA inside EU: Service Provider] to receive payments.\n\nName: ……………………………\n\nName: ……………………………\n\nPosition: …………………\n\nPosition: …………………\n\nSignature 2 : ……………..\n\nSignature : …………….. 2\n\nDate: <Date>\n\nDate: <Date>\n\n1 This mention has to be inserted only where required, for example where the law applicable to the guarantee imposes a precise expiry date or where the guarantor can justify that he is unable to provide such a guarantee without expiry date.\n\n2 The name(s) and position(s) of the persons signing on behalf of the guarantor must be shown in printed characters.\n\nPage 1 of 1", + "recall": 0.9714285714285714, + "true_md": "<To be completed on paper bearing the letterhead of the financial institution> \n\n# PRE-FINANCING GUARANTEE FORM\n\nFor the attention of: The European Investment Bank (EIB) 98-100 boulevard Konrad Adenauer L-2950 Luxembourg \n\nWe, the undersigned, < name and address of financial institution> hereby irrevocably and unconditionally declare that we guarantee as primary obligor, and not merely as a surety, on behalf of < name and address of the Contractor >, hereinafter referred to as “the Consultant\", the payment on first demand to the European Investment Bank (EIB) of < amount of the pre-financing > ( in number and in word ) corresponding to the pre-financing as mentioned in [for TA outside EU: Article 7 of the Special Conditions of the contract] [for TA inside EU: Article 5 of the Contract for provision of services ] concluded between the [for TA outside EU: Consultant ] [for TA inside EU: Service Provider ] and the EIB, hereinafter referred to as “the Contract ”. \n\nPayment shall be made without objection or legal proceedings of any kind, upon receipt of your first written claim (sent by registered letter with confirmation or receipt) stating that the [for TA outside EU: Consultant ] [for TA inside EU: Service Provider ] has not repaid the pre-financing on request or that the Contract has been terminated. We shall not delay the payment, nor shall we oppose it for any reason whatsoever. We shall inform you in writing as soon as payment has been made.\n\nWe accept notably that no amendment to the terms of the Contract can release us from our obligation under this guarantee. We waive the right to be informed of any change, addition or amendment of the Contract. We note that the guarantee will be released [for TA outside EU: in accordance with Article 30 of the General Conditions ] [for TA inside EU: after the final payment has been made. ] [ and in any case at the latest on ……..(at the expiry of 18 months after the period of implementation of the tasks )] 1 . \n\nThe law applicable to this guarantee shall be that of Grand Duchy of Luxembourg. Any dispute arising out of or in connection with this guarantee shall be referred to the courts of Luxembourg. \n\nThis guarantee will come into force and will take effect on receipt of the pre-financing payment in the account designated by the [for TA outside EU: Consultant ] [for TA inside EU: Service Provider ] to receive payments. \n\nName: …………………………… Position: ………………… \n\nName: …………………………… Position: ………………… \n\nName: …………………………… Position: ………………… \n\nName: …………………………… Position: ………………… \n\nSignature $^{2}$: …………….. Date: < Date > \n\nSignature $^{2}$: …………….. Date: < Date > \n\nSignature 2 : …………….. Date: < Date >\n\nSignature : …………….. Date: < Date >\n\n1 This mention has to be inserted only where required, for example where the law applicable to the guarantee imposes a precise expiry date or where the guarantor can justify that he is unable to provide such a guarantee without expiry date. \n\n2 The name(s) and position(s) of the persons signing on behalf of the guarantor must be shown in printed characters. \n\nPage 1 of 1 \n\nANNEX 7 of part C of the tender dossier \n\n- Subject: Guarantee No< … > Financing Guarantee for the repayment of pre-financing payable under contract < TA Contract number and title > (please quote number and title in all correspondence)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7684600990020624, + "doc_id": "12209b2848266f3397747a516d29f71656be0827a5eafb3531f4f482c930b02c", + "edit_distance": 0.20164609053497942, + "f1_score": 0.9553571428571429, + "meteor": 0.8287144471283772, + "precision": 0.9727272727272728, + "pred_md": "General Administrative and Submission Clauses\n\n## II. Information to be submitted\n\nTenderers must ensure that their tenders submitted via e-Submission contain all the information and documents required by the EIB at the time of submission as set out in the 'Terms of Reference' including:\n\nN.B. The following documents shall be dated and signed, either by hand or by applying an advanced electronic signature based on a qualified certificate, by an authorised representative of the signatory:\n\n-  Declaration(s) on honour ( Form 5 of the 'Administrative Forms for EIB Tenders'), in case of a joint tender to be signed by the authorised representatives of each member of the Group;\n-  The tender report (a document generated by e-Submission and listing all the documents included in the tender, to be signed by the tenderer or the group leader in case of a joint tender);\n-  If applicable, the group member/subcontractor declarations ( Form 3 and/or Form 4 of the 'Administrative Forms for EIB Tenders'), to be signed by the respective consortium member or subcontractor.\n\nLast updated: June 2020\n\nPage 20 of 21", + "recall": 0.9385964912280702, + "true_md": "General Administrative and Submission Clauses\n\n## II. Information to be submitted\n\nTenderers must ensure that their tenders submitted via e-Submission contain all the information and documents required by the EIB at the time of submission as set out in the ‘Terms of Reference’ including: \n\nN.B. The following documents shall be dated and signed, either by hand or by applying an advanced electronic signature based on a qualified certificate, by an authorised representative of the signatory:\n\n-  Declaration(s) on honour ( Form 5 of the ‘Administrative Forms for EIB Tenders’), in case of a joint tender to be signed by the authorised representatives of each member of the Group;$_{ }$ \n\n- a joint tender to be signed by the authorised representatives of each member of the Group;$_{ }$  The tender report (a document generated by e-Submission and listing all the documents included in the tender, to be signed by the tenderer or the group leader in case of a joint tender); \n\n- tender);  If applicable, the group member/subcontractor declarations ( Form 3 and/or Form 4 of the ‘Administrative Forms for EIB Tenders’), to be signed by the respective consortium member or subcontractor.\n\nPage 20 of 21 \n\nLast updated: June 2020" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9942399259503686, + "doc_id": "2230406cd48f955919b9030881016fe46020b83827e3dee1c7c1e9a629e2aa43", + "edit_distance": 0.02459016393442623, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.999999883835266, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "EC - FWC services Dec 2018\n\nContract no: [complete]\n\n## II.10. SUBCONTRACTING\n\n- II.10.1 The contractor must not subcontract and have the FWC implemented by third parties beyond the third parties already mentioned in its tender without prior written authorisation from the contracting authority.\n- II.10.2 Even if the contracting authority authorises subcontracting, the contractor remains bound by its contractual obligations and is solely responsible for the implementation of the FWC .\n- II.10.3 The contractor must ensure that the subcontract does not affect the rights of the contracting authority under this FWC, particularly those under Articles II.8, II.13 and II.24.\n- II.10.4 The contracting authority may request the contractor to replace a subcontractor found to be in a situation provided for in points (d) and (e) of Article II.18.1.\n\n## II.11. AMENDMENTS\n\n- II.11.1 Any amendment to the FWC or a specific contract must be made in writing before all contractual obligations have been fulfilled. A specific contract does not constitute an amendment to the FWC.\n- II.11.2 Any amendment must not make changes to the FWC or a specific contract that might alter the initial conditions of the procurement procedure or result in unequal treatment of tenderers or contractors.\n\n## II.12. ASSIGNMENT\n\n- II.12.1 The contractor must not assign any of the rights and obligations arising from the FWC, including claims for payments or factoring, without prior written authorisation from the contracting authority. In such cases, the contractor must provide the contracting authority with the identity of the intended assignee.\n- II.12.2 Any right or obligation assigned by the contractor without authorisation is not enforceable against the contracting authority.\n\n## II.13. INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS\n\n## II.13.1. Ownership of the rights in the results\n\nThe Union acquires irrevocably worldwide ownership of the results and of all intellectual property rights on the newly created materials produced specifically for the Union under the FWC and incorporated in the results , without prejudice however to the rules applying to pre-existing rights on pre-existing materials , as per Article II.13.2.\n\nThe intellectual property rights so acquired include any rights, such as copyright and other intellectual or industrial property rights, to any of the results and in all technological solutions and information created or produced by the contractor or by its subcontractor in implementation of the FWC . The contracting authority may exploit and use the acquired rights as stipulated in this FWC. The Union acquires all the rights as from the moment the contractor has created the results .\n\nThe payment of the price includes any fees payable to the contractor about the acquisition of ownership of rights by the Union including for all modes of exploitation and of use of the results .\n\n21", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Contract no: [complete] \n\nEC - FWC services Dec 2018 \n\n## II.10. SUBCONTRACTING\n\n- II.10.1 The contractor must not subcontract and have the FWC implemented by third parties beyond the third parties already mentioned in its tender without prior written authorisation from the contracting authority. \n\n- II.10.2 Even if the contracting authority authorises subcontracting, the contractor remains bound by its contractual obligations and is solely responsible for the implementation of the FWC . \n\n- II.10.3 The contractor must ensure that the subcontract does not affect the rights of the contracting authority under this FWC, particularly those under Articles II.8, II.13 and II.24. \n\n- II.10.4 The contracting authority may request the contractor to replace a subcontractor found to be in a situation provided for in points (d) and (e) of Article II.18.1.\n\n## II.11. AMENDMENTS\n\n- II.11.1 Any amendment to the FWC or a specific contract must be made in writing before all contractual obligations have been fulfilled. A specific contract does not constitute an amendment to the FWC. \n\n- II.11.2 Any amendment must not make changes to the FWC or a specific contract that might alter the initial conditions of the procurement procedure or result in unequal treatment of tenderers or contractors. \n\n## II.12. ASSIGNMENT\n\n- II.12.1 The contractor must not assign any of the rights and obligations arising from the FWC, including claims for payments or factoring, without prior written authorisation from the contracting authority. In such cases, the contractor must provide the contracting authority with the identity of the intended assignee.\n\n- II.12.2 Any right or obligation assigned by the contractor without authorisation is not enforceable against the contracting authority. \n\n## II.13. INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS\n\n## II.13.1. Ownership of the rights in the results\n\nThe Union acquires irrevocably worldwide ownership of the results and of all intellectual property rights on the newly created materials produced specifically for the Union under the FWC and incorporated in the results , without prejudice however to the rules applying to pre-existing rights on pre-existing materials , as per Article II.13.2. \n\nThe intellectual property rights so acquired include any rights, such as copyright and other intellectual or industrial property rights, to any of the results and in all technological solutions and information created or produced by the contractor or by its subcontractor in implementation of the FWC . The contracting authority may exploit and use the acquired rights as stipulated in this FWC. The Union acquires all the rights as from the moment the contractor has created the results . \n\nThe payment of the price includes any fees payable to the contractor about the acquisition of ownership of rights by the Union including for all modes of exploitation and of use of the results . \n\n21" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8509323396135002, + "doc_id": "21c1373123ba08a6d81d2ea35d4dbfb916838c18f19f93e498dedc8608b85f2e", + "edit_distance": 0.2, + "f1_score": 0.9527272727272728, + "meteor": 0.9137749096385541, + "precision": 0.916083916083916, + "pred_md": "Date:\n\nDate:\n\nDate:\n\nAA-000799-002\\_TACONT\n\nPage 7 of 7\n\n- d) ensure that personal data processed on behalf of third parties can be processed only in the manner prescribed by the Contracting Authority;\n- e) ensure that, during communication of personal data and transport of storage media, the data cannot be read, copied or erased without authorisation;\n- f) design its organisational structure in such a way that it meets data protection requirements. '\n- 11.3.16 The Contracting Authority shall not be liable towards the Consultant for any act or omission of the Promoter or for the failure of the Promoter to comply with its obligations set out in the Cooperation Agreement. Any such act, omission or failure shall not be interpreted as giving the right to the Consultant to terminate the Contract under the provisions of Article 37 of the General Conditions.\n- 11.3.17 The Consultant will be an independent Contractor and nothing in the Contract will render him a worker, an employee or a partner of the Contracting Authority.\n\n11.4 In addition following derogations from the General Conditions shall apply:\n\n- 11.4.1 Article 40.3 is not applicable.\n\nSigned in English in three (3) originals, (each page of which has been initialled by a representative of each Party), two (2) originals being for the Contracting Authority and one (1) original being for the Consultant.\n\nSigned for and on behalf of EUROPEAN INVESTMENT BANK\n\nSigned for and on behalf of [the consortium led and represented by] THE CONSULTANT", + "recall": 0.9924242424242424, + "true_md": "- d) ensure that personal data processed on behalf of third parties can be processed only in the manner prescribed by the Contracting Authority; \n\n- e) ensure that, during communication of personal data and transport of storage media, the data cannot be read, copied or erased without authorisation; \n\n- f) design its organisational structure in such a way that it meets data protection requirements. ” 11.3.16 The Contracting Authority shall not be liable towards the Consultant for any act or \n\nrequirements. ” 11.3.16 The Contracting Authority shall not be liable towards the Consultant for any act or omission of the Promoter or for the failure of the Promoter to comply with its obligations set out in the Cooperation Agreement. Any such act, omission or failure shall not be interpreted as giving the right to the Consultant to terminate the Contract under the provisions of Article 37 of the General Conditions. \n\n11.3.17 The Consultant will be an independent Contractor and nothing in the Contract will render him a worker, an employee or a partner of the Contracting Authority. \n\n11.4 In addition following derogations from the General Conditions shall apply: \n\n11.4.1 Article 40.3 is not applicable. \n\nSigned in English in three (3) originals, (each page of which has been initialled by a representative of each Party), two (2) originals being for the Contracting Authority and one (1) original being for the Consultant. \n\nPage 7 of 7 \n\nAA-000799-002\\_TACONT" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7891469188413199, + "doc_id": "0231b7eb4f021317c3795fab0c930b3b116cba194b81b240551232cad447b4b2", + "edit_distance": 0.3925925925925926, + "f1_score": 0.9367088607594937, + "meteor": 0.9730134877113573, + "precision": 0.8809523809523809, + "pred_md": "Europol Reference: R/C1/1503 ICT Racks Annex D - Overview of Components\n\nDocument:\n\nAnnex 2.1 - Overview of Components\n\nTender reference number:\n\n2104/C1/D\n\nTitle:\n\nICT racks, cabling and other infrastructure elements\n\n## Instructions\n\nThe Overview of Components document gives the brand, type, functionality and characteristics of the components used in the ICT racks. The document also gives references to the active components that will be tested in the Conformity test as per the Technical Specifications section 7.6. and Annex 2.2. When a component fails it needs to be replaced with a device with equivalent characteristics that can be managed from the existing management platform.\n\nThe tenderer is requested to review the list and use it as an information and reference document for his tender.", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "The Overview of Components document gives the brand, type, functionality and characteristics of the components used in the ICT racks. The document also gives references to the active components that will be tested in the Conformity test as per the Technical Specifications section 7.6. and Annex 2.2. When a component fails it needs to be replaced with a device with equivalent characteristics that can be managed from the existing management platform.\n\nThe tenderer is requested to review the list and use it as an information and reference document for his tender. \n\n## Instructions\n\nEuropol Reference: R/C1/1503 ICT Racks Annex D - Overview of Components" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9907836700641189, + "doc_id": "503ed0d835c55fca9ffd298b6eeec2bbf1d63746024cd6b1115dff1f2dd21af6", + "edit_distance": 0.016129032258064516, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999994878054089, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Tous les occupants d'un véhicule, et pas seulement le conducteur, doivent présenter au garde de sécurité leur badge standard. Les passagers sans badge standard se verront refuser l'accès à l'entrée du parking et devront accéder au bâtiment par une entrée piétonne où ils devront se soumettre à un contrôle électronique de sécurité.\n\nLe contractant doit informer les membres de son personnel que les véhicules qu'ils utilisent peuvent faire l'objet de vérifications de sécurité lorsqu'ils entrent dans les locaux du Secrétariat ou en sortent et que le personnel de sécurité a le droit de confisquer temporairement des objets prohibés constituant un risque pour la sécurité.\n\nL'occupation des emplacements de parking obéit au principe du \"premier arrivé, premier servi\".\n\nTous les véhicules et passagers font l'objet de contrôles de sécurité supplémentaires à l'entrée du parking du JL lors des événements spécifiques, notamment les sommets européens.\n\nLe code de la route belge est d'application pour la circulation sur les voiries internes du site et dans les parkings. Les véhicules circulant dans les parkings doivent avoir les phares allumés. Les véhicules stationnés doivent être fermés à clé et les moteurs doivent être éteints.\n\nDans les parkings, la hauteur est généralement limitée à 2,05 m. Les conducteurs souhaitant entrer dans un parking avec un véhicule plus haut doivent au préalable consulter le bureau Gestion des accès du Secrétariat.\n\nLes personnes à mobilité réduite peuvent demander l'attribution d'une place de parking réservée via le secrétariat de l'unité Prévention du Secrétariat (safety.unit@consilium.europa.eu). Cette procédure est également valable pour les personnes dont la mobilité est temporairement réduite.\n\nLes accidents doivent faire l'objet d'un constat d'accident (\"rapport d'incident\" disponible auprès de la direction Prévention et sécurité) entre les parties impliquées. Toute personne dont le véhicule cause un dommage aux biens du pouvoir adjudicateur est tenue de supporter les coûts de la réparation. Elle doit en informer la direction Prévention et sécurité et remplir un constat d'accident destiné aux compagnies d'assurance. Le Secrétariat décline toute responsabilité pour tout préjudice, résultant en particulier d'un accident, d'un vol ou de dommages, survenant dans le parking, quelles qu'en soient la raison et la cause.\n\n## CTCF\n\nLe pouvoir adjudicateur utilise, dans une partie de ses locaux, un système de vidéoprotection en vue d'assurer la sécurité de son personnel, de ses visiteurs, de ses bâtiments, de ses biens et de ses informations, ainsi que pour des raisons logistiques. On trouvera plus de renseignements sur les systèmes vidéo du pouvoir adjudicateur dans la \"politique du Secrétariat général du Conseil relative à l'utilisation de systèmes vidéo\", qui a été approuvée par le Secrétaire général le 16 juin 2011 et qui figure sur le site internet du Conseil à l'adresse\n\nhttp://www.consilium.europa.eu/media/29321/video-fr.pdf.\n\n46\n\nFR\n\nANNEX VI", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Tous les occupants d'un véhicule, et pas seulement le conducteur, doivent présenter au garde de sécurité leur badge standard. Les passagers sans badge standard se verront refuser l'accès à l'entrée du parking et devront accéder au bâtiment par une entrée piétonne où ils devront se soumettre à un contrôle électronique de sécurité. \n\nLe contractant doit informer les membres de son personnel que les véhicules qu'ils utilisent peuvent faire l'objet de vérifications de sécurité lorsqu'ils entrent dans les locaux du Secrétariat ou en sortent et que le personnel de sécurité a le droit de confisquer temporairement des objets prohibés constituant un risque pour la sécurité. \n\nL'occupation des emplacements de parking obéit au principe du \"premier arrivé, premier servi\". \n\nTous les véhicules et passagers font l'objet de contrôles de sécurité supplémentaires à l'entrée du parking du JL lors des événements spécifiques, notamment les sommets européens. \n\nLe code de la route belge est d'application pour la circulation sur les voiries internes du site et dans les parkings. Les véhicules circulant dans les parkings doivent avoir les phares allumés. Les véhicules stationnés doivent être fermés à clé et les moteurs doivent être éteints. \n\nDans les parkings, la hauteur est généralement limitée à 2,05 m. Les conducteurs souhaitant entrer dans un parking avec un véhicule plus haut doivent au préalable consulter le bureau Gestion des accès du Secrétariat. \n\nLes personnes à mobilité réduite peuvent demander l'attribution d'une place de parking réservée via le secrétariat de l'unité Prévention du Secrétariat (safety.unit@consilium.europa.eu). Cette procédure est également valable pour les personnes dont la mobilité est temporairement réduite. \n\nLes accidents doivent faire l'objet d'un constat d'accident (\"rapport d'incident\" disponible auprès de la direction Prévention et sécurité) entre les parties impliquées. Toute personne dont le véhicule cause un dommage aux biens du pouvoir adjudicateur est tenue de supporter les coûts de la réparation. Elle doit en informer la direction Prévention et sécurité et remplir un constat d'accident destiné aux compagnies d'assurance. Le Secrétariat décline toute responsabilité pour tout préjudice, résultant en particulier d'un accident, d'un vol ou de dommages, survenant dans le parking, quelles qu'en soient la raison et la cause. \n\nLe pouvoir adjudicateur utilise, dans une partie de ses locaux, un système de vidéoprotection en vue d'assurer la sécurité de son personnel, de ses visiteurs, de ses bâtiments, de ses biens et de ses informations, ainsi que pour des raisons logistiques. On trouvera plus de renseignements sur les systèmes vidéo du pouvoir adjudicateur dans la \"politique du Secrétariat général du Conseil relative à l'utilisation de systèmes vidéo\", qui a été approuvée par le Secrétaire général le 16 juin 2011 et qui figure sur le site internet du Conseil à l'adresse \n\nhttp://www.consilium.europa.eu/media/29321/video-fr.pdf.\n\n## CTCF\n\nANNEX VI \n\n46 FR" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8287990243155258, + "doc_id": "22cb7b4d31c4fb2ac62a6678d796f836d3490baaa8a18412f7a06aaa463c672f", + "edit_distance": 0.1760797342192691, + "f1_score": 0.9918256130790191, + "meteor": 0.7243443020644325, + "precision": 0.994535519125683, + "pred_md": "Contract number: [ complete ]\n\nContract conditions of December 2015\n\ncontract. It must also take out supplementary insurance as reasonably required by standard practice in the industry. Upon request, the contractor must provide evidence of insurance coverage to the contracting authority.\n\n- II.6.3 The contractor is liable for any loss or damage caused to the contracting authority during or as a consequence of performance of the contract, including in the event of subcontracting, but only to an amount not exceeding three times the total amount of the contract. However, if the damage or loss is caused by the gross negligence or wilful misconduct of the contractor or of its personnel or subcontractors, the contractor is liable for the whole amount of the damage or loss.\n- II.6.4 If a third party brings any action against the contracting authority in connection with the performance of the contract , the contractor must assist the contracting authority in the legal proceedings, including by intervening in support of the contracting authority upon request.\n- If the contracting authority's liability towards the third party is established and that such liability is caused by the contractor during or as a consequence of the performance of the contract , Article II.6.3 applies.\n- II.6.5 If the contractor is composed of two or more economic operators (i.e. who submitted a joint tender), they are all jointly and severally liable to the contracting authority for the performance of the contract .\n- II.6.6 The contracting authority is not liable for any loss or damage caused to the contractor during or as a consequence of performance of the contract , unless the loss or damage was caused by wilful misconduct or gross negligence of the contracting authority.\n\n## II.7. CONFLICT OF INTERESTS AND PROFESSIONAL CONFLICTING INTERESTS\n\n- II.7.1 The contractor must take all the necessary measures to prevent any situation of conflict of interest or professional conflicting interest .\n- II.7.2 The contractor must notify the contracting authority in writing as soon as possible of any situation that could constitute a conflict of interest or a professional conflicting interest during the performance of the contract . The contractor must immediately take action to rectify the situation.\n\nThe contracting authority may do any of the following:\n\n- (a) verify that the contractor's action is appropriate;\n- (b) require the contractor to take further action within a specified deadline;\n- II.7.3 The contractor must pass on all the relevant obligations in writing to:\n- (a) its personnel ;\n- (b) any natural person with the power to represent it or take decisions on its behalf;\n- (c) third parties involved in the performance of the contract , including subcontractors.\n\nThe contractor must also ensure that the persons referred to above are not placed in a situation which could give rise to conflicts of interest.\n\n19", + "recall": 0.9891304347826086, + "true_md": "Contract number: [ complete ] \n\nContract conditions of December 2015 \n\ncontract. It must also take out supplementary insurance as reasonably required by standard practice in the industry. Upon request, the contractor must provide evidence of insurance coverage to the contracting authority. \n\n- II.6.3 The contractor is liable for any loss or damage caused to the contracting authority during or as a consequence of performance of the contract, including in the event of subcontracting, but only to an amount not exceeding three times the total amount of the contract. However, if the damage or loss is caused by the gross negligence or wilful misconduct of the contractor or of its personnel or subcontractors, the contractor is liable for the whole amount of the damage or loss. \n\n- II.6.4 If a third party brings any action against the contracting authority in connection with the performance of the contract , the contractor must assist the contracting authority in the legal proceedings, including by intervening in support of the contracting authority upon request. \n\nIf the contracting authority’s liability towards the third party is established and that such liability is caused by the contractor during or as a consequence of the performance of the contract , Article II.6.3 applies.\n\n- II.6.5 If the contractor is composed of two or more economic operators (i.e. who submitted a joint tender), they are all jointly and severally liable to the contracting authority for the performance of the contract . \n\n- II.6.6 The contracting authority is not liable for any loss or damage caused to the contractor during or as a consequence of performance of the contract , unless the loss or damage was caused by wilful misconduct or gross negligence of the contracting authority. \n\n## II.7. CONFLICT OF INTERESTS AND PROFESSIONAL CONFLICTING INTERESTS\n\n- II.7.1 The contractor must take all the necessary measures to prevent any situation of conflict of interest or professional conflicting interest .\n\n- II.7.2 The contractor must notify the contracting authority in writing as soon as possible of any situation that could constitute a conflict of interest or a professional conflicting interest during the performance of the contract . The contractor must immediately take action to rectify the situation.\n\nThe contracting authority may do any of the following: \n\n- (a) verify that the contractor’s action is appropriate; (b) require the contractor to take further action within a specified deadline;\n\n- (a) verify that the contractor’s action is appropriate; (b) require the contractor to take further action within a specified deadline;\n\n- (a) its personnel ; (b) any natural person with the power to represent it or take decisions on its behalf;\n\n- (a) its personnel ; (b) any natural person with the power to represent it or take decisions on its behalf; (c) third parties involved in the performance of the contract , including subcontractors.\n\n- (b) any natural person with the power to represent it or take decisions on its behalf; (c) third parties involved in the performance of the contract , including subcontractors.\n\nII.7.3 The contractor must pass on all the relevant obligations in writing to: \n\nThe contractor must also ensure that the persons referred to above are not placed in a situation which could give rise to conflicts of interest.\n\n19" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7397889408035618, + "doc_id": "5d697e7c25b0bc27971f16ada688c6a4705cc2b005bc94e3b41c6ce0ebba1620", + "edit_distance": 0.556910569105691, + "f1_score": 0.9631336405529954, + "meteor": 0.5906705935537578, + "precision": 0.9587155963302753, + "pred_md": "- · a merger or takeover of a member of the group (universal succession), provided that the new entity has access to procurement (see section 2.2 ) and is not in an exclusion situation, or\n- · exclusion or rejection of a member by the Contracting Authority where the member has no access to procurement, is in an exclusion situation or does not meet a relevant selection criterion.\n\nIn either case the selection criteria must be still fulfilled by the group and the terms of the originally submitted tender may not be altered substantially, i.e. all the tasks assigned to the excluded/rejected entity must be taken over by the group, the change must not make the tender non-compliant with the Tender Specifications, and the evaluation of award criteria of the originally submitted tender may not be modified.\n\n## 2.4.2. Subcontracting\n\nSubcontracting is the situation where the contractor enters into legal commitments with other economic operators which will perform part of the contract on its behalf. The contractor retains full liability towards the Contracting Authority for performance of the contract as a whole.\n\nThe following shall not be considered subcontracting:\n\n- a) Use of workers posted to the contractor by another company owned by the same group and established in a Member State ('intra -group posting' as defined by Article 1, 3, (b) of Directive 96/71/EC concerning the posting of workers in the framework of the provision of services).\n- b) Use of workers hired out to the contractor by a temporary employment undertaking or placement agency established in a Member State ('hiring out of workers' as defined by Article 1, 3, (c) of Directive 96/71/EC concerning the posting of workers in the framework of the provision of services).\n- c) Use of workers temporarily transferred to the contractor from an undertaking established outside the territory of a Member State and that belongs to the same group ('intra corporate -transfer' as defined by Article 3, (b) of Directive 2014/66/EU on the conditions of entry and residence of third-country nationals in the framework of an intra-corporate transfer) .\n- d) Use of staff without employment contract ('self -employed persons working for the contractor ') to perform substantially the same tasks as the staff with employment contract ('employees'), without the tasks of the self -employed persons being particular well-defined parts of the contract.\n- e) Use of suppliers and/or transporters by the contractor, in order to perform the contract at the place of performance, unless the economic activities of the suppliers and/or the transporting services are within the subject of this call for tenders (see section 1.4 ).\n- f) Performance of part of the contract by members of an EEIG (European Economic Interest Grouping), when the EEIG is itself a contractor or a group member.\n\nThe persons mentioned in points a), b), c) and d) above will be considered as 'personnel' of the contractor as defined in the FWC.\n\nAll contractual tasks may be subcontracted unless the Technical Specifications ' ' in Annex 1 expressly reserve the execution of certain critical tasks to the sole tenderer itself, or in case of a joint tender, to a member of the group.\n\n14", + "recall": 0.9675925925925926, + "true_md": "- • a merger or takeover of a member of the group (universal succession), provided that the new entity has access to procurement (see section 2.2 ) and is not in an exclusion situation, or • exclusion or rejection of a member by the Contracting Authority where the member \n\n- situation, or • exclusion or rejection of a member by the Contracting Authority where the member has no access to procurement, is in an exclusion situation or does not meet a relevant selection criterion.\n\n- a) Use of workers posted to the contractor by another company owned by the same group and established in a Member State (“intra - group posting” as defined by Article 1, 3, (b) of Directive 96/71/EC concerning the posting of workers in the framework of the provision of services). b) Use of workers hired out to the contractor by a temporary employment undertaking \n\n- framework of the provision of services). b) Use of workers hired out to the contractor by a temporary employment undertaking or placement agency established in a Member State (“hiring out of workers” as defined by Article 1, 3, (c) of Directive 96/71/EC concerning the posting of workers in the framework of the provision of services). c) Use of workers temporarily transferred to the contractor from an undertaking \n\n- in the framework of the provision of services). c) Use of workers temporarily transferred to the contractor from an undertaking established outside the territory of a Member State and that belongs to the same group (“intra - corporate transfer” as defined by Article 3, (b) of Directive 2014/66/EU on the conditions of entry and residence of third-country nationals in the framework of an intra-corporate transfer) . d) Use of staff without employment contract (“self -employed persons working for the \n\n- the framework of an intra-corporate transfer) . d) Use of staff without employment contract (“self -employed persons working for the contractor ”) to perform substantially the same tasks as the staff with employment contract (“employees”), without the tasks of the self -employed persons being particular well-defined parts of the contract. e) Use of suppliers and/or transporters by the contractor, in order to perform the \n\n- particular well-defined parts of the contract. e) Use of suppliers and/or transporters by the contractor, in order to perform the contract at the place of performance, unless the economic activities of the suppliers and/or the transporting services are within the subject of this call for tenders (see section 1.4 ). f) Performance of part of the contract by members of an EEIG (European Economic \n\n- section 1.4 ). f) Performance of part of the contract by members of an EEIG (European Economic Interest Grouping), when the EEIG is itself a contractor or a group member. \n\nThe persons mentioned in points a), b), c) and d) above will be considered as “personnel” of the contractor as defined in the FWC. \n\nAll contractual tasks may be subcontracted unless the “ Technical Specifications ” in Annex 1 expressly reserve the execution of certain critical tasks to the sole tenderer itself, or in case of a joint tender, to a member of the group. \n\n14\n\nThe following shall not be considered subcontracting:\n\nSubcontracting is the situation where the contractor enters into legal commitments with other economic operators which will perform part of the contract on its behalf. The contractor retains full liability towards the Contracting Authority for performance of the contract as a whole.\n\nIn either case the selection criteria must be still fulfilled by the group and the terms of the originally submitted tender may not be altered substantially, i.e. all the tasks assigned to the excluded/rejected entity must be taken over by the group, the change must not make the tender non-compliant with the Tender Specifications, and the evaluation of award criteria of the originally submitted tender may not be modified. \n\n## 2.4.2. Subcontracting" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.06554588793941911, + "doc_id": "4b559a463e9a631a3a48caea9366351fd735d4e75df1405b43f4101d217d28ef", + "edit_distance": 0.9184210526315789, + "f1_score": 0.24107142857142858, + "meteor": 0.4340478422992216, + "precision": 0.14136125654450263, + "pred_md": "- d. Minimum 1 referenced contract must have been performed upon takeover of a production grade information system from a third party(ies) and resulting in a seamless transitioning of operations activities.\n- 6. Each of the contract references must cover at least 2 of the following minimum requirements, and each minimum requirement must be fulfilled by at least one contract reference:\n- -Overall value of the contract of at least 1 million EUR for the whole duration;\n- -Client was an institution/company with over 500 staff members in total;\n- -Services were performed on the basis of a Service Level Agreement (including, among others, service levels, performance indicators for monitoring performance and a compensatory system for underperformance) or equivalent;\n- 7. All referenced contracts as a whole shall cover the elements listed below as indicated 19 :\n- a. Implementation of ITIL practices (or equivalent) supported by the use of professional ticketing and knowledge management tools (e.g. Remedy) -minimum 3 references\n- b. Software Development Life Cycle tools supporting Agile and DevOps (e.g. Microsoft Azure DevOps, Git, chef, Nexus, Jenkins, etc.) -minimum 3 references\n- c. Angular, NodeJS, OSGI, Java EE or equivalent Java or JavaScript technologies -minimum 3 references\n- d. Automated software testing methodology and integrated tooling (e.g. Microsoft Azure DevOps) -minimum 3 references\n- e. Oracle Data Integrator or equivalent ETL tools -minimum 2 reference\n- f. SAP Business Objects or equivalent business intelligence tools (e.g. Power BI etc.) -minimum 2 reference\n- g. Apache Hadoop, Spark, Hive, Python or equivalent data processing technologies -minimum 2 references\n- h. Apache Kafka or equivalent stream processing technology -minimum 1 reference\n- i. ElasticSearch, LogStash, Kibana, Grafana or equivalent -minimum 2 references\n- j. Docker, Docker Swarm, Kubernetes or equivalent -minimum 1 reference\n\n19 Wherever for a bullet point a list is given and, in absence of further specifications, the ',' separating each item of the list shall be intended as 'or'.\n\n25", + "recall": 0.8181818181818182, + "true_md": "$^{19}$ Wherever for a bullet point a list is given and, in absence of further specifications, the “,” separating each item of the list shall be intended as “or”. \n\n25" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.984666245960754, + "doc_id": "22c7eafff545adc599159c8ca449eae1dd951bc271ecb28f30854dd4dcb7374f", + "edit_distance": 0.05595408895265423, + "f1_score": 0.9966329966329968, + "meteor": 0.9985421410801592, + "precision": 0.9966329966329966, + "pred_md": "Ces preuves peuvent notamment concerner les droits liés aux éléments suivants: parties d'autres documents, images, graphiques, polices, tableaux, données, logiciels, inventions techniques, savoir-faire, outils de développement informatique, routines, sous -routines ou autres programmes (\"technologies préexistantes\"), concepts, maquettes, installations ou œuvres d'art, données, sources, documents préexistants ou toute autre partie d'origine externe.\n\nCes preuves doivent comprendre, le cas échéant:\n\n- a) les nom et numéro de version du logiciel;\n- b) l'identification complète de l'œuvre et de l'auteur, du développeur, du créateur , du traducteur, de la personne saisissant les données, du graphiste, de l'éditeur, du réviseur, du photographe, du producteur;\n- c) une copie de la licence d'exploitation du produit ou de l'accord octroyant les droits en question au contractant ou une référence à cette licence;\n- d) une copie de l'accord ou un extrait du contrat de travail octroyant les droits en question au contractant lorsque des parties du résultat ont été créées par son personnel ;\n- e) le texte de l'avis d'exclusion de responsabilité, le cas échéant.\n\nLa fourniture des preuves ne libère pas le contractant de ses responsabilités s'il apparaît qu'il ne possède pas les droits nécessaires, quels que soient le moment où ces faits ont été révélés et la (les) personne(s) qui les a (ont) révélés.\n\nLe contractant garantit également qu'il dispose des droits ou des pouvoirs nécessaires pour procéder à la cession et qu'il a effectué tous les paiements ou vérifié qu'ils ont été effectués, y compris des redevances dues aux sociétés de gestion collective, relatifs aux résultats finals.\n\n## II.13.6 Citation d'œuvres dans les résultats\n\nDans les résultats , le contractant signale clairement toute citation d'œuvres existantes. La référence complète doit comprendre, selon le cas: le nom de l'auteur, le titre de l'œuvre, la date et le lieu de publication, la date de création, l'adresse de publication sur l'internet, le numéro, le volume et toute autre information permettant que l'origine soit déterminée aisément.\n\n## II.13.7 Droits moraux des auteurs\n\nPar la livraison des résultats , le contractant garantit que les auteurs ne s'opposeront pas aux actions suivantes en vertu de leurs droits moraux au titre du droit d'auteur:\n\n- a) la mention ou non de leur nom lors de la présentation des résultats au public;\n- b) la divulgation ou non des résultats après leur livraison dans leur version finale au pouvoir adjudicateur;\n- c) l'adaptation des résultats , à condition que cette adaptation se fasse d'une manière non préjudiciable à l'honneur ou à la réputation de l' auteur .\n\nS'il existe des droits moraux sur des parties des résultats protégés par un droit d'auteur, le contractant doit obtenir le consentement des auteurs en ce qui concerne l'octroi des droits moraux pertinents, ou la renonciation à ceux-ci, conformément aux dispositions juridiques applicables et être prêt à fournir les pièces justificatives sur demande.\n\n## II.13.8 Droits à l'image et enregistrements sonores\n\nSi des personnes physiques apparaissent dans un résultat ou que leur voix ou autre élément privé est enregistré de manière reconnaissable, le contractant doit obtenir une déclaration dans laquelle ces personnes (ou celles investies de l'autorité parentale s'il s'agit de mineurs) autorisent l'exploitation prévue de leur image, de leur voix ou élément privé et présenter une copie de cette autorisation au pouvoir adjudicateur à la demande de ce dernier. Le contractant doit prendre les mesures nécessaires pour obtenir ce consentement conformément aux dispositions juridiques applicables.\n\n## II.13.9 Déclaration concernant le droit d'auteur pour les droits préexistants\n\nSi le contractant conserve des droits préexistants sur des parties du résultat , il convient d'insérer une référence à cet effet en cas d'utilisation du résultat telle que la prévoit l'article I.10.1, à l'aide de\n\n24\n\nFR", + "recall": 0.9966329966329966, + "true_md": "Ces preuves peuvent notamment concerner les droits liés aux éléments suivants: parties d'autres documents, images, graphiques, polices, tableaux, données, logiciels, inventions techniques, savoir‑faire, outils de développement informatique, routines, sous -routines ou autres programmes (\"technologies préexistantes\"), concepts, maquettes, installations ou œuvres d'art, données, sources, documents préexistants ou toute autre partie d'origine externe. \n\nCes preuves doivent comprendre, le cas échéant: \n\n- a) les nom et numéro de version du logiciel; \n\n- b) l'identification complète de l'œuvre et de l'auteur, du développeur, du créateur , du traducteur, de la personne saisissant les données, du graphiste, de l'éditeur, du réviseur, du photographe, du producteur; \n\n- c) une copie de la licence d'exploitation du produit ou de l'accord octroyant les droits en question au contractant ou une référence à cette licence; \n\n- d) une copie de l'accord ou un extrait du contrat de travail octroyant les droits en question au contractant lorsque des parties du résultat ont été créées par son personnel ; \n\n- e) le texte de l'avis d'exclusion de responsabilité, le cas échéant. \n\nLa fourniture des preuves ne libère pas le contractant de ses responsabilités s'il apparaît qu'il ne possède pas les droits nécessaires, quels que soient le moment où ces faits ont été révélés et la (les) personne(s) qui les a (ont) révélés. \n\nLe contractant garantit également qu'il dispose des droits ou des pouvoirs nécessaires pour procéder à la cession et qu'il a effectué tous les paiements ou vérifié qu'ils ont été effectués, y compris des redevances dues aux sociétés de gestion collective, relatifs aux résultats finals. \n\n## II.13.6 Citation d'œuvres dans les résultats\n\n## II.13.7 Droits moraux des auteurs\n\nDans les résultats , le contractant signale clairement toute citation d'œuvres existantes. La référence complète doit comprendre, selon le cas: le nom de l'auteur, le titre de l'œuvre, la date et le lieu de publication, la date de création, l'adresse de publication sur l'internet, le numéro, le volume et toute autre information permettant que l'origine soit déterminée aisément. \n\nPar la livraison des résultats , le contractant garantit que les auteurs ne s'opposeront pas aux actions suivantes en vertu de leurs droits moraux au titre du droit d'auteur: \n\n- a) la mention ou non de leur nom lors de la présentation des résultats au public; \n\n- b) la divulgation ou non des résultats après leur livraison dans leur version finale au pouvoir adjudicateur; \n\n- c) l'adaptation des résultats , à condition que cette adaptation se fasse d'une manière non préjudiciable à l'honneur ou à la réputation de l' auteur . \n\nS'il existe des droits moraux sur des parties des résultats protégés par un droit d'auteur, le contractant doit obtenir le consentement des auteurs en ce qui concerne l'octroi des droits moraux pertinents, ou la renonciation à ceux-ci, conformément aux dispositions juridiques applicables et être prêt à fournir les pièces justificatives sur demande. \n\n## II.13.8 Droits à l'image et enregistrements sonores\n\n## II.13.9 Déclaration concernant le droit d'auteur pour les droits préexistants\n\nSi des personnes physiques apparaissent dans un résultat ou que leur voix ou autre élément privé est enregistré de manière reconnaissable, le contractant doit obtenir une déclaration dans laquelle ces personnes (ou celles investies de l'autorité parentale s'il s'agit de mineurs) autorisent l'exploitation prévue de leur image, de leur voix ou élément privé et présenter une copie de cette autorisation au pouvoir adjudicateur à la demande de ce dernier. Le contractant doit prendre les mesures nécessaires pour obtenir ce consentement conformément aux dispositions juridiques applicables. \n\nSi le contractant conserve des droits préexistants sur des parties du résultat , il convient d'insérer une référence à cet effet en cas d'utilisation du résultat telle que la prévoit l'article I.10.1, à l'aide de \n\n24 FR" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7736397702670564, + "doc_id": "d93ea2054140324d443e3dd868d0a7a0326a33c3e79b78f9ec6abc252207918c", + "edit_distance": 0.686046511627907, + "f1_score": 0.9775784753363229, + "meteor": 0.5675974416503591, + "precision": 0.9775784753363229, + "pred_md": "General Administrative and Submission Clauses\n\n## Appendix I:\n\n(NB: Only applicable in case the Terms of Reference declare the use of e-Submission mandatory)\n\n## e-Submission application guide\n\nYou must submit your tender electronically via the e-Submission application available from the eTendering website (please refer to the link stated in the table in point 1.2 of the 'Terms of Reference') before the time limit for receipt of tenders. Tenders submitted in any other way (e.g. e-mail or by letter) will be disregarded.\n\nThe e-Submission application allows economic operators to respond to calls for tenders by preparing their tenders electronically in a structured and secured way, and submitting their tenders electronically. The e-Tendering is the starting point for launching the e-Submission application.\n\nMake sure you submit your tender on time: you are advised to start completing your tender early. To avoid any complications with regard to late receipt/non-receipt of tenders within the deadline, please ensure that you submit your tender several hours before the deadline . A tender received after the deadline indicated in the procurement documents will be rejected.\n\n## I. How to Submit your Tender in e-Submission\n\nYou can access the e-Submission 3 application via the corresponding call for tender in TED eTendering, as specified point 1.2 of the 'Terms of Reference'.\n\nIn order to submit a tender using e-Submission, tenderers (each member of a group) will need to register in the European Commission's Participant Register, an online register of organisations participating in EU calls for tenders or proposals. On registering, each organisation obtains a Participant Identification Code (PIC, 9-digit-number) which acts as its unique identifier in the above register. Instructions on how to create a PIC can be found in the PIC-management Quick Guide for Economic Operators. Tenderers already registered in the Participant Register shall reuse their existing PICs when preparing tenders in e-Submission.\n\nThe time-limit for receipt of tenders is indicated point 1.4 of the 'Terms of Reference'.\n\nA tender received after the time-limit for receipt of tenders will be rejected. The tender reception confirmation provided by e-Submission with the official date and time of receipt of the tender (timestamp) constitutes proof of compliance with the time-limit for receipt of tenders.\n\nPlease note that you are responsible to ensure that your full tender reaches the destination in due time.\n\n3 For detailed instructions on how to submit your tender, download the Quick Guide for Economic Operators (pdf document), for which an EU Login is required, where you will find:\n\n Technical requirements to use e-Submission,\n\n-  Step-by-step guide to help you submit your tender,\n-  Test call for tenders,\n-  Important advices and information, and\n-  How to get technical support\n\nLast updated: June 2020\n\nPage 19 of 21", + "recall": 0.9775784753363229, + "true_md": "General Administrative and Submission Clauses\n\n## Appendix I: (NB: Only applicable in case the Terms of Reference declare the use of e-Submission mandatory)\n\n## e-Submission application guide\n\n## I. How to Submit your Tender in e-Submission\n\nImportant advices and information, and  How to get technical support \n\nTest call for tenders, Important advices and information, and How to get technical support \n\nStep-by-step guide to help you submit your tender,  Test call for tenders, Important advices and information, and \n\nTechnical requirements to use e-Submission, Step-by-step guide to help you submit your tender, Test call for tenders, \n\nan EU Login is required, where you will find:  Technical requirements to use e-Submission, Step-by-step guide to help you submit your tender, \n\n3 For detailed instructions on how to submit your tender, download the Quick Guide for Economic Operators (pdf document), for which an EU Login is required, where you will find:  Technical requirements to use e-Submission, \n\nLast updated: June 2020\n\nPage 19 of 21 \n\nPlease note that you are responsible to ensure that your full tender reaches the destination in due time.\n\nA tender received after the time-limit for receipt of tenders will be rejected. The tender reception confirmation provided by e-Submission with the official date and time of receipt of the tender (timestamp) constitutes proof of compliance with the time-limit for receipt of tenders.\n\nThe time-limit for receipt of tenders is indicated point 1.4 of the ‘Terms of Reference’.\n\nIn order to submit a tender using e-Submission, tenderers (each member of a group) will need to register in the European Commission’s Participant Register, an online register of organisations participating in EU calls for tenders or proposals. On registering, each organisation obtains a Participant Identification Code (PIC, 9-digit-number) which acts as its unique identifier in the above register. Instructions on how to create a PIC can be found in the PIC-management Quick Guide for Economic Operators. Tenderers already registered in the Participant Register shall reuse their existing PICs when preparing tenders in e-Submission.\n\nYou can access the e-Submission 3 application via the corresponding call for tender in TED e- Tendering, as specified point 1.2 of the ‘Terms of Reference’. \n\nMake sure you submit your tender on time: you are advised to start completing your tender early. To avoid any complications with regard to late receipt/non-receipt of tenders within the deadline, please ensure that you submit your tender several hours before the deadline . A tender received after the deadline indicated in the procurement documents will be rejected.\n\nThe e-Submission application allows economic operators to respond to calls for tenders by preparing their tenders electronically in a structured and secured way, and submitting their tenders electronically. The e-Tendering is the starting point for launching the e-Submission application. \n\nYou must submit your tender electronically via the e-Submission application available from the e- Tendering website (please refer to the link stated in the table in point 1.2 of the ‘Terms of Reference’) before the time limit for receipt of tenders. Tenders submitted in any other way (e.g. e-mail or by letter) will be disregarded.\n\nAppendix I: (NB: Only applicable in case the Terms of Reference declare the use of e-Submission mandatory)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9496864618511062, + "doc_id": "304961061fedba8fddfe7b67952a8db24d1ab99e6d8b9255a4bd65e9ce727574", + "edit_distance": 0.8692052980132451, + "f1_score": 0.9822485207100592, + "meteor": 0.6667991151158499, + "precision": 0.9803149606299213, + "pred_md": "General Administrative and Submission Clauses\n\n## 8. Award of the contract\n\nAs soon as possible after an award decision has been made by the Bank, all Tenderers will be informed by email of the result of the evaluation. Tenderers who have submitted admissible tenders (not in one of the situations described in point 6 (exclusion, conflict of interest), meeting the selection criteria and whose tender is in conformity with the requirements set out in Procurement Documents without being irregular or unacceptable or unsuitable) may request the characteristics and relative advantages of the tender selected and the name of the successful Tenderer(s).\n\nIt is the Tenderer's responsibility to provide a valid email address together with their contact details and to check this email regularly.\n\n## 9. Signature of the contract with the successful Tenderer\n\n## 9.1. Standstill Period\n\nIn case of published procurement procedures, the EIB shall not conclude the contract with the successful Tenderer until a standstill period of 15 (fifteen) calendar days (paper notifications) or 10 (ten) calendar days (notification by electronic means) has elapsed. The standstill period shall run from the day after the simultaneous dispatch of the notifications to successful and unsuccessful Tenderers.\n\nIf necessary, the EIB may suspend the conclusion of the contract for additional examination if this is justified by the requests or comments made by an unsuccessful or aggrieved Tenderers or by any other relevant information received. The requests, comments or information must be received during the standstill period. In case of suspension all the Tenderers shall be informed with 3 (three) working days following the suspension decision.\n\n## 9.2. Exclusion criteria documentation\n\nThe successful Tenderer to whom EIB intends to award the contract will have to provide within a short time limit defined by EIB and preceding the signature of the contract the documentation ( original documents ) listed in point IV [Evidence upon request] of the 'Declaration on honour on exclusion criteria and selection criteria and on absence of conflict of interest' (to be found in Form 5 of the 'Administrative forms for EIB tenders')..\n\n- N.B. This does not apply to two-step procedures (such as restricted, competitive procedure with negotiation, competitive dialogue) where exclusion criteria documentation has already been provided in the context of the request to participate.\n\nIf the Tenderer is a legal person, information on the natural persons with power of representation, decision making or control over the legal person shall be provided only upon request by the EIB.\n\nPlease note that the signature of the contract between EIB and the successful Tenderer will be conditional upon provision of the original certificates/documents from the successful Tenderer.\n\nIMPORTANT NOTICE: As the time limit for submitting the above-mentioned documentation is in general 15 (fifteen) calendar days from the notification of the contract award, we strongly recommend that the Tenderer starts gathering the requested documents (especially in case of joint offer/subcontracting, including the relevant documents for Group members/subcontractors as soon as possible in order to have the documents ready to be sent to EIB in case it is awarded the contract). This will allow reducing the time line to sign the awarded contract with EIB. However, as mentioned\n\nLast updated: June 2020\n\nPage 15 of 21", + "recall": 0.9841897233201581, + "true_md": "General Administrative and Submission Clauses\n\n## 8. Award of the contract\n\n## 9. Signature of the contract with the successful Tenderer\n\n## 9.1. Standstill Period\n\n## 9.2. Exclusion criteria documentation\n\nIMPORTANT NOTICE: As the time limit for submitting the above-mentioned documentation is in general 15 (fifteen) calendar days from the notification of the contract award, we strongly recommend that the Tenderer starts gathering the requested documents (especially in case of joint offer/subcontracting, including the relevant documents for Group members/subcontractors as soon as possible in order to have the documents ready to be sent to EIB in case it is awarded the contract). This will allow reducing the time line to sign the awarded contract with EIB. However, as mentioned \n\nPlease note that the signature of the contract between EIB and the successful Tenderer will be conditional upon provision of the original certificates/documents from the successful Tenderer. \n\nIf the Tenderer is a legal person, information on the natural persons with power of representation, decision making or control over the legal person shall be provided only upon request by the EIB. \n\nN.B. This does not apply to two-step procedures (such as restricted, competitive procedure with negotiation, competitive dialogue) where exclusion criteria documentation has already been provided in the context of the request to participate.\n\nThe successful Tenderer to whom EIB intends to award the contract will have to provide within a short time limit defined by EIB and preceding the signature of the contract the documentation ( original documents ) listed in point IV [Evidence upon request] of the ‘Declaration on honour on exclusion criteria and selection criteria and on absence of conflict of interest’ (to be found in Form 5 of the `Administrative forms for EIB tenders`)..\n\nIf necessary, the EIB may suspend the conclusion of the contract for additional examination if this is justified by the requests or comments made by an unsuccessful or aggrieved Tenderers or by any other relevant information received. The requests, comments or information must be received during the standstill period. In case of suspension all the Tenderers shall be informed with 3 (three) working days following the suspension decision. \n\nIn case of published procurement procedures, the EIB shall not conclude the contract with the successful Tenderer until a standstill period of 15 (fifteen) calendar days (paper notifications) or 10 (ten) calendar days (notification by electronic means) has elapsed. The standstill period shall run from the day after the simultaneous dispatch of the notifications to successful and unsuccessful Tenderers. \n\nIt is the Tenderer’s responsibility to provide a valid email address together with their contact details and to check this email regularly.\n\nAs soon as possible after an award decision has been made by the Bank, all Tenderers will be informed by email of the result of the evaluation. Tenderers who have submitted admissible tenders (not in one of the situations described in point 6 (exclusion, conflict of interest), meeting the selection criteria and whose tender is in conformity with the requirements set out in Procurement Documents without being irregular or unacceptable or unsuitable) may request the characteristics and relative advantages of the tender selected and the name of the successful Tenderer(s).\n\nLast updated: June 2020\n\nPage 15 of 21" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8926969953384568, + "doc_id": "f312227ffcd4d78ded0873d533622ca5307cedcf2dcb12b601fa5c304c446ff1", + "edit_distance": 0.08928571428571429, + "f1_score": 0.9523809523809523, + "meteor": 0.9188912095486489, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "23 A document that the Contracting authority can access on a national database free of charge does not need to be submitted if the Contracting authority is provided with the exact internet link and, if applicable, the necessary identification data to retrieve the document.\n\nPage 49 of 53", + "recall": 0.9090909090909091, + "true_md": "$^{23}$ A document that the Contracting authority can access on a national database free of charge does not need to be submitted if the Contracting authority is provided with the exact internet link and, if applicable, the necessary identification data to retrieve the document. \n\nPage 49 of 53" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4647802820076305, + "doc_id": "6b15399cf7fbca58446b1cae33f583b796964a6df3be725e6acbbd96c1c8090a", + "edit_distance": 0.4753521126760563, + "f1_score": 0.9471458773784356, + "meteor": 0.42288314584510917, + "precision": 0.9491525423728814, + "pred_md": "- 7.9.2. L'accès aux surfaces de travail se fait au moyen (de cages) d'escaliers ou d'échelles attachées.\n- 7.9.3. Avant la mise en service, et au moins une fois par semaine, l'échafaudage est vérifié par une personne compétente de l'entreprise. Ses conclusions sont consignées dans un registre, qui doit pouvoir être produit à la demande du CSS, du gestionnaire de projet du CUE ou du Conseiller en prévention. Un label de ce contrôle doit se trouver sur l'échafaudage. Les défauts constatés sont à réparer.\n- 7.9.4. Pour les échafaudages de plus de 8 mètres de haut ou pour les échafaudages exposés à des forces exceptionnelles, les calculs nécessaires doivent être produits au CSS ou au gestionnaire de projet du CUE.\n- 7.9.5. En aucun cas, un échafaudage ne peut être partiellement démonté et laissé dans un état qui en permet la réutilisation, sauf si la partie restante répond encore aux prescriptions en la matière.\n- 7.9.6. Les échafaudages sur roues doivent être pourvus d'un frein en bon état. La largeur de l'échafaudage doit être égale à au moins 1/3 de la hauteur de travail. Des stabilisateurs latéraux peuvent être utilisés pour augmenter la largeur. L'accès à l'échafaudage se fait par l'intérieur.\n- 7.9.7. Une formation spécifique et appropriée des travailleurs à l'utilisation d'un échafaudage est obligatoire.\n\n## 7.10 Travail en hauteur par des nacelles\n\n- Les mesures suivantes doivent être prises (conformément à l'Arrêté Royal du 31 août 2005):\n- · Commande par une personne formée.\n- · L'opérateur est soumis à un contrôle médical, plus particulièrement pour les risques médicaux liés à l'exécution d'une fonction de sécurité et au travail en hauteur.\n- · La nacelle suspendue est utilisée conformément aux instructions et directives.\n- · La zone de travail doit être délimitée au niveau du sol afin de protéger les tiers contre la chute d'objets.\n- · Contrôle visuel du chariot et de la nacelle par l'utilisateur chaque jour avant tout travail.\n- · Analyse des documents de contrôle obligatoire (4x/an).\n- · Veiller à mesurer la vitesse du vent en permanence en se référant à la procédure conditions de travail en hauteur.\n- · Disposer d'un moyen de communication (GSM, Talkie Walkie, etc…) pour avertir les secours en cas d'incident et/ou accident.\n- · Toujours travailler à deux.\n- · Porter un harnais de sécurité.\n- · Balisage de la zone de travail au niveau du sol.\n- · Préparation du matériel (produits, EPI et accessoires)\n- · Placement du harnais de sécurité contrôlé annuellement par un SECT.\n- · Entrée dans la nacelle en position parking, en veillant à accrocher le harnais via le dispositif anti-chute à la nacelle.\n- · S'assurer que le matériel est arrimé.\n\n78\n\nFR\n\nANNEX VII", + "recall": 0.9451476793248945, + "true_md": "- 7.9.2.L'accès aux surfaces de travail se fait au moyen (de cages) d'escaliers ou d'échelles attachées. \n\n- 7.9.3.Avant la mise en service, et au moins une fois par semaine, l'échafaudage est vérifié par une personne compétente de l'entreprise. Ses conclusions sont consignées dans un registre, qui doit pouvoir être produit à la demande du CSS, du gestionnaire de projet du CUE ou du Conseiller en prévention. Un label de ce contrôle doit se trouver sur l'échafaudage. Les défauts constatés sont à réparer. \n\n- 7.9.4.Pour les échafaudages de plus de 8 mètres de haut ou pour les échafaudages exposés à des forces exceptionnelles, les calculs nécessaires doivent être produits au CSS ou au gestionnaire de projet du CUE.\n\n- 7.9.5.En aucun cas, un échafaudage ne peut être partiellement démonté et laissé dans un état qui en permet la réutilisation, sauf si la partie restante répond encore aux prescriptions en la matière. \n\n- 7.9.6.Les échafaudages sur roues doivent être pourvus d'un frein en bon état. La largeur de l'échafaudage doit être égale à au moins 1/3 de la hauteur de travail. Des stabilisateurs latéraux peuvent être utilisés pour augmenter la largeur. L'accès à l'échafaudage se fait par l'intérieur. \n\n- 7.9.7. Une formation spécifique et appropriée des travailleurs à l'utilisation d'un échafaudage est obligatoire. \n\n- Les mesures suivantes doivent être prises (conformément à l'Arrêté Royal du 31 août 2005): • Commande par une personne formée. • L'opérateur est soumis à un contrôle médical, plus particulièrement pour les risques \n\n- • Commande par une personne formée. • L'opérateur est soumis à un contrôle médical, plus particulièrement pour les risques médicaux liés à l'exécution d'une fonction de sécurité et au travail en hauteur. • La nacelle suspendue est utilisée conformément aux instructions et directives. \n\n- médicaux liés à l'exécution d'une fonction de sécurité et au travail en hauteur. • La nacelle suspendue est utilisée conformément aux instructions et directives. • La zone de travail doit être délimitée au niveau du sol afin de protéger les tiers contre la \n\n- • La nacelle suspendue est utilisée conformément aux instructions et directives. • La zone de travail doit être délimitée au niveau du sol afin de protéger les tiers contre la chute d'objets. • Contrôle visuel du chariot et de la nacelle par l’utilisateur chaque jour avant tout travail. \n\n- chute d'objets. • Contrôle visuel du chariot et de la nacelle par l’utilisateur chaque jour avant tout travail. • Analyse des documents de contrôle obligatoire (4x/an). \n\n- • Contrôle visuel du chariot et de la nacelle par l’utilisateur chaque jour avant tout travail. • Analyse des documents de contrôle obligatoire (4x/an). • Veiller à mesurer la vitesse du vent en permanence en se référant à la procédure \n\n- • Analyse des documents de contrôle obligatoire (4x/an). • Veiller à mesurer la vitesse du vent en permanence en se référant à la procédure conditions de travail en hauteur. • Disposer d’un moyen de communication (GSM, Talkie Walkie, etc…) pour avertir les \n\n- conditions de travail en hauteur. • Disposer d’un moyen de communication (GSM, Talkie Walkie, etc…) pour avertir les secours en cas d’incident et/ou accident. • Toujours travailler à deux. \n\n- secours en cas d’incident et/ou accident. • Toujours travailler à deux. • Porter un harnais de sécurité. \n\n- • Toujours travailler à deux. • Porter un harnais de sécurité. • Balisage de la zone de travail au niveau du sol. \n\n- • Porter un harnais de sécurité. • Balisage de la zone de travail au niveau du sol. • Préparation du matériel (produits, EPI et accessoires) \n\n- • Balisage de la zone de travail au niveau du sol. • Préparation du matériel (produits, EPI et accessoires) • Placement du harnais de sécurité contrôlé annuellement par un SECT. \n\n- • Préparation du matériel (produits, EPI et accessoires) • Placement du harnais de sécurité contrôlé annuellement par un SECT. • Entrée dans la nacelle en position parking, en veillant à accrocher le harnais via le \n\n- • Placement du harnais de sécurité contrôlé annuellement par un SECT. • Entrée dans la nacelle en position parking, en veillant à accrocher le harnais via le dispositif anti-chute à la nacelle. • S’assurer que le matériel est arrimé. \n\n- dispositif anti-chute à la nacelle. • S’assurer que le matériel est arrimé. \n\n78 FR \n\nANNEX VII \n\n## 7.10 Travail en hauteur par des nacelles\n\nLes mesures suivantes doivent être prises (conformément à l'Arrêté Royal du 31 août 2005): • Commande par une personne formée." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9155832458468052, + "doc_id": "7093af6c95599e0cbe2e53018734788caab077b6e8b5a295684d2cc385b83705", + "edit_distance": 0.1696969696969697, + "f1_score": 0.9794050343249426, + "meteor": 0.9612385727927412, + "precision": 0.981651376146789, + "pred_md": "General Administrative and Submission Clauses\n\nTenderers may request a copy of the opening record by email to cs-procurement@eib.org.\n\n## 6. Tender evaluation\n\n## 6.1. Evaluation Committee\n\nEIB will appoint an evaluation committee of at least 3 (three) persons guaranteeing the absence of conflict of interest under guarantee of impartiality and confidentiality. Outside experts may be appointed to assist the committee as observers provided it is ensured these experts have no conflicts of interest.\n\nN.B. The evaluation procedure is confidential. The deliberations of the evaluation committee are held in closed session and its recommendations are collective. The members of the evaluation committee are bound to confidentiality.\n\n## 6.2. Tender Evaluation Session\n\nTenders complying with the formal opening requirements checked during the opening session are evaluated in three stages by the evaluation committee.\n\nThe evaluation committee first checks if the Tenderer is in one of the exclusion situations preventing him to participate in the procurement procedure.\n\nThe evaluation committee then checks the capacity of the Tenderer to perform the contract against the selection criteria. If one of the relevant criteria is not met, its tender will not be further evaluated.\n\nAfterwards, each member of the evaluation committee evaluates the technical and financial proposals and awards a score against the pre-defined award criteria.\n\nIn case of joint offers submitted by consortia and in case of subcontracting, the exclusion, selection and award criteria are assessed in compliance with the terms and conditions specified in point 7 below.\n\n## 6.3. Exclusion criteria and conflict of interest\n\nThe EIB shall exclude an economic operator from participation in a procurement procedure under the conditions described in point V [Exclusion Effect] of the 'Declaration on honour on exclusion criteria and selection criteria and on absence of conflict of interest' (to be found in Form 5 of the 'Administrative forms for EIB tenders').\n\n## Document to be provided:\n\nTenderers and, if applicable, group members and subcontractors shall provide a dated and duly signed declaration on honour ( Form 5 ). In addition, the latter two shall provide group and subcontracting declarations as per Forms 3 and 4 of the 'Administrative forms for EIB tenders' (if applicable).\n\n## 6.4. Selection criteria\n\nDocumentation concerning selection criteria see point 1.7 of the 'Terms of Reference' must specifically relate to the Tenderer, i.e. to the economic operator or group submitting a tender in the context of this procurement procedure.\n\nIf the Tenderer relies on other entities to meet the selection criteria, a written undertaking on the part of those entities must be provided. This must confirm that the entity will place the resources\n\nLast updated: June 2020\n\nPage 11 of 21", + "recall": 0.9771689497716894, + "true_md": "General Administrative and Submission Clauses\n\nTenderers may request a copy of the opening record by email to cs-procurement@eib.org.\n\nEIB will appoint an evaluation committee of at least 3 (three) persons guaranteeing the absence of conflict of interest under guarantee of impartiality and confidentiality. Outside experts may be appointed to assist the committee as observers provided it is ensured these experts have no conflicts of interest. \n\nN.B. The evaluation procedure is confidential. The deliberations of the evaluation committee are held in closed session and its recommendations are collective. The members of the evaluation committee are bound to confidentiality. \n\nTenders complying with the formal opening requirements checked during the opening session are evaluated in three stages by the evaluation committee. \n\nThe evaluation committee first checks if the Tenderer is in one of the exclusion situations preventing him to participate in the procurement procedure. \n\nThe evaluation committee then checks the capacity of the Tenderer to perform the contract against the selection criteria. If one of the relevant criteria is not met, its tender will not be further evaluated. \n\nAfterwards, each member of the evaluation committee evaluates the technical and financial proposals and awards a score against the pre-defined award criteria.\n\nIn case of joint offers submitted by consortia and in case of subcontracting, the exclusion, selection and award criteria are assessed in compliance with the terms and conditions specified in point 7 below.\n\nThe EIB shall exclude an economic operator from participation in a procurement procedure under the conditions described in point V [Exclusion Effect] of the ‘Declaration on honour on exclusion criteria and selection criteria and on absence of conflict of interest’ (to be found in Form 5 of the `Administrative forms for EIB tenders`).\n\nDocument to be provided:\n\nTenderers and, if applicable, group members and subcontractors shall provide a dated and duly signed declaration on honour ( Form 5 ). In addition, the latter two shall provide group and subcontracting declarations as per Forms 3 and 4 of the `Administrative forms for EIB tenders` (if applicable). \n\nDocumentation concerning selection criteria see point 1.7 of the `Terms of Reference` must specifically relate to the Tenderer, i.e. to the economic operator or group submitting a tender in the context of this procurement procedure. \n\nIf the Tenderer relies on other entities to meet the selection criteria, a written undertaking on the part of those entities must be provided. This must confirm that the entity will place the resources \n\nLast updated: June 2020\n\n## 6.4. Selection criteria\n\n## 6.3. Exclusion criteria and conflict of interest\n\n## 6.2. Tender Evaluation Session\n\n## 6.1. Evaluation Committee\n\n## 6. Tender evaluation\n\nPage 11 of 21" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.45072916214549824, + "doc_id": "08c346afa921399cb3e8fb923933802b4e5b122e4564f565c4529c3428cb0ff2", + "edit_distance": 0.5900216919739696, + "f1_score": 0.9921259842519685, + "meteor": 0.4742941012346791, + "precision": 0.9921259842519685, + "pred_md": "Appendice 4 de l'Annexe VII\n\nJL/LEX\n\nJL/LEX\n\nEB\n\n## 6. Invacuation des délégués et des visiteurs\n\nSi vous assistez à une réunion avec des délégués ou si vous accueillez des visiteurs, vous devez les prendre en charge lors d'une invacuation:\n\n- · fermez la/les fenêtre(s) et porte(s) du local\n- · invitez les délégués ou les visiteurs à suivre avec vous le chemin d'invacuation le plus proche\n- · accompagnez les délégués ou les visiteurs vers le lieu sûr en tenant compte des consignes d'invacuation.\n\nSi une personne à mobilité réduite (PMR) que vous ne pouvez pas aider à invacuer (blessure, mobilité réduite…) est présente, vous devez:\n\n- · appeler le (+32 2 281) 2000 depuis la pièce où vous vous trouvez avec elle\n- · communiquer le nom de la personne et la localisation (bâtiment, niveau, couloir, numéro de la pièce)\n- · expliquer pourquoi cette personne n'est pas en mesure d'invacuer\n- · suivre les instructions données\n\n## 7. En cas de difficulté personnelle\n\nEn cas d'impossibilité d'invacuer de manière autonome (en raison d'une blessure ou d'une mobilité réduite…), vous devez:\n\n- · rester dans votre bureau ou entrer dans un bureau et fermer la porte et les fenêtres\n- · téléphoner au n° (+32 2 281) 2000\n- · communiquer votre nom et l'adresse du bureau (bâtiment, niveau, couloir, numéro du bureau)\n- · expliquer pourquoi vous n'êtes pas en mesure d'invacuer sans assistance\n- · suivre les instructions données\n\nANNEX VII\n\n94\n\nFR", + "recall": 0.9921259842519685, + "true_md": "Appendice 4 de l'Annexe VII \n\n94 FR \n\nANNEX VII \n\n## 6. Invacuation des délégués et des visiteurs\n\n## 7. En cas de difficulté personnelle\n\nEn cas d'impossibilité d'invacuer de manière autonome (en raison d'une blessure ou d'une mobilité réduite…), vous devez: \n\nSi vous assistez à une réunion avec des délégués ou si vous accueillez des visiteurs, vous devez les prendre en charge lors d'une invacuation: \n\n- • fermez la/les fenêtre(s) et porte(s) du local • invitez les délégués ou les visiteurs à suivre avec vous le chemin d'invacuation le plus \n\n- • fermez la/les fenêtre(s) et porte(s) du local • invitez les délégués ou les visiteurs à suivre avec vous le chemin d'invacuation le plus proche • accompagnez les délégués ou les visiteurs vers le lieu sûr en tenant compte des \n\n- proche • accompagnez les délégués ou les visiteurs vers le lieu sûr en tenant compte des consignes d'invacuation. \n\n- • appeler le (+32 2 281) 2000 depuis la pièce où vous vous trouvez avec elle • communiquer le nom de la personne et la localisation (bâtiment, \n\n- elle • communiquer le nom de la personne et la localisation (bâtiment, niveau, couloir, numéro de la pièce) • expliquer pourquoi cette personne n'est pas en mesure d'invacuer \n\n- niveau, couloir, numéro de la pièce) • expliquer pourquoi cette personne n'est pas en mesure d'invacuer • suivre les instructions données \n\n- • expliquer pourquoi cette personne n'est pas en mesure d'invacuer • suivre les instructions données \n\n- • rester dans votre bureau ou entrer dans un bureau et fermer la porte et les fenêtres • téléphoner au n° (+32 2 281) 2000\n\n- • rester dans votre bureau ou entrer dans un bureau et fermer la porte et les fenêtres • téléphoner au n° (+32 2 281) 2000 • communiquer votre nom et l'adresse du bureau (bâtiment, niveau, couloir, numéro du \n\n- • téléphoner au n° (+32 2 281) 2000 • communiquer votre nom et l'adresse du bureau (bâtiment, niveau, couloir, numéro du bureau) • expliquer pourquoi vous n'êtes pas en mesure d'invacuer sans assistance \n\n- bureau) • expliquer pourquoi vous n'êtes pas en mesure d'invacuer sans assistance • suivre les instructions données\n\n- • expliquer pourquoi vous n'êtes pas en mesure d'invacuer sans assistance • suivre les instructions données\n\nSi une personne à mobilité réduite (PMR) que vous ne pouvez pas aider à invacuer (blessure, mobilité réduite…) est présente, vous devez: \n\nEB\n\nJL/LEX" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "ff5c99ec039099a6da52977f98180b847f51378892af85007c9d737c5e97d304", + "edit_distance": 0.9926470588235294, + "f1_score": 0.05154639175257732, + "meteor": 0.050067294751009433, + "precision": 0.026595744680851064, + "pred_md": "Table des matières\n\nTable des matières\n\n| I. CONDITIONS PARTICULIÈRES ......................................................................... 5 | I. CONDITIONS PARTICULIÈRES ......................................................................... 5 | I. CONDITIONS PARTICULIÈRES ......................................................................... 5 |\n|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|\n| I.1 | ORDRE DE PRIORITÉ DES DISPOSITIONS ........................................................... 5 | |\n| I.2 | OBJET | ................................................................................................................ 5 |\n| I.3 | ENTRÉE EN VIGUEUR ET DURÉE DU CC | ........................................................... 5 |\n| I.4 | DÉSIGNATION DU CONTRACTANT ET EXÉCUTION DU CC ................................ 5 | |\n| I.5 | PRIX | .................................................................................................................. 6 |\n| I.6 | MODALITÉS DE PAIEMENT | ............................................................................... 6 |\n| I.7 | COMPTE BANCAIRE | .......................................................................................... 7 |\n| I.8 | MODALITÉS DE COMMUNICATION | ................................................................... 7 |\n| I.9 | TRAITEMENT DES DONNÉES À CARACTÈRE PERSONNEL | ................................. 8 |\n| I.10 | EXPLOITATION DES RÉSULTATS DU CC | ........................................................... 9 |\n| I.11 | RÉSILIATION PAR LES PARTIES | ...................................................................... 10 |\n| I.12 | SERVICES FOURNIS DANS LES LOCAUX DU POUVOIR ADJUDICATEUR | ........... 10 |\n| I.13 | AUTRES CONDITIONS PARTICULIÈRES ........................................................... 10 | |\n| II. | CONDITIONS GÉNÉRALES DU CONTRAT-CADRE DE SERVICES ........ 12 | |\n| II.1 | DÉFINITIONS | ................................................................................................... 12 |\n| II.2 | RÔLES ET RESPONSABILITÉS DANS LE CAS D'UNE OFFRE CONJOINTE DIVISIBILITÉ ................................................................................................... 13 | .......... 13 |\n| II.4 | FOURNITURE DES SERVICES ........................................................................... 14 | |\n| II.3 | II.5 COMMUNICATION ENTRE LES PARTIES | .......................................................... 15 |\n| II.6 | RESPONSABILITÉ | |\n| II.7 | CONFLITS D'INTÉRÊTS ET INTÉRÊTS À CARACTÈRE CONTRADICTOIRES ......................................................................................... 17 | ............................................................................................ 17 PROFESSIONNEL |\n| II.8 | CONFIDENTIALITÉ .......................................................................................... 18 | |\n| II.9 | TRAITEMENT DES DONNÉES À CARACTÈRE PERSONNEL ............................... 18 | |\n| II.10 | SOUS-TRAITANCE ............................................................................................ 20 | |\n| II.11 | AVENANTS | ....................................................................................................... 21 |\n| II.12 | CESSION | .......................................................................................................... 21 |\n| II.13 | DROITS DE PROPRIÉTÉ INTELLECTUELLE | ..................................................... 21 |\n| II.14 | FORCE MAJEURE | ............................................................................................. 25 |\n| II.15 | DOMMAGES-INTÉRÊTS | ................................................................................... 25 |\n| II.16 | RÉDUCTION DES PRIX | ..................................................................................... 26 |\n| II.17 | SUSPENSION DE L'EXÉCUTION DU CC | ............................................................ 26 |\n| II.18 | RÉSILIATION DU CC | |\n| II.19 | ....................................................................................... 27 FACTURES, TAXE SUR LA VALEUR AJOUTÉE ET FACTURATION ÉLETRONIQUE II.20 PAIEMENTS ET GARANTIES ............................................................................. 29 | 29 |\n| II.21 | RECOUVREMENT | ............................................................................................ 32 |\n| II.22 | CONTRÔLES ET AUDITS | .................................................................................. 32 |\n| II.23 | APPLICABILITÉ DES RÈGLES INTERNES | AU |\n| | DU POUVOIR ADJUDICATEUR PERSONNEL DU CONTRACTANT ...................................................................... 33 | |\n\n3\n\nFR", + "recall": 0.8333333333333334, + "true_md": "## Table des matières\n\n3 FR" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.957245550972266, + "doc_id": "99ab5c249406890382fc9e103bd9b01bae2960146872e1be19a4ad9eefa7dd54", + "edit_distance": 0.4699738903394256, + "f1_score": 0.9917355371900827, + "meteor": 0.962183218583088, + "precision": 0.994475138121547, + "pred_md": "## Price (Financial Offer)\n\nThe financial offer for the specific contract must be based on the prices per unit as provided in the Contractor's offer in Annex II to the FWC ( ref. also to Annex 12 Price Catalogue of the Tender Specifications). As per Article I.5.1 of the FWC, prices listed in Annex II are maximum; thus, lower prices can be offered.\n\n## Ranking of proposal\n\nThe specific contract will be awarded to the most economically advantageous tender on the basis of the formula below. The formula will be applied only for offers meeting the minimum quality thresholds as set above. Tenders reaching the minimum quality thresholds will be scored 0 . For any additional quality point, the scoring will be as follows:\n\nScore tender X =\n\n{[((SUM of ALL Quality Award Criteria points)-60)/40] x 60 quality points} + [(Lowest Total Price/ Total Price of tender X) x (40 price points)]\n\nNOTE: Where the Total Price of tender X is higher than 3 times the Lowest Total Price, tender X will be given 0 price points.\n\n## 5. Assignment\n\nAfter completion of the evaluation as described above, the Contracting Authority for the specific assignment will inform the FWC contractors on its decision on the outcome of the evaluation.\n\nIt is noted that, a FWC contractor will be considered unable to deliver a specific assignment under the following circumstances:\n\n- o If no offer is received from the FWC contractor within the given deadline.\n- o If the contractor is not able to provide the proposed team at the required level of expertise.\n- o If the offer is rejected for failure to comply with the requirements defined in the specific request for services and/or with the FWC.\n- o In case of conflict of interest involving the FWC contractor (in the case of a consortium, this condition applies for all its members).\n\nAccordingly, the Contracting Authority may decide to award the specific contract to the next best ranked FWC contractor.\n\n41", + "recall": 0.989010989010989, + "true_md": "## Price (Financial Offer)\n\n## Ranking of proposal\n\nThe financial offer for the specific contract must be based on the prices per unit as provided in the Contractor’s offer in Annex II to the FWC ( ref. also to Annex 12 Price Catalogue of the Tender Specifications). As per Article I.5.1 of the FWC, prices listed in Annex II are maximum; thus, lower prices can be offered. \n\nThe specific contract will be awarded to the most economically advantageous tender on the basis of the formula below. The formula will be applied only for offers meeting the minimum quality thresholds as set above. Tenders reaching the minimum quality thresholds will be scored 0 . For any additional quality point, the scoring will be as follows: \n\nNOTE: Where the Total Price of tender X is higher than 3 times the Lowest Total Price, tender X will be given 0 price points. \n\nAfter completion of the evaluation as described above, the Contracting Authority for the specific assignment will inform the FWC contractors on its decision on the outcome of the evaluation.\n\nIt is noted that, a FWC contractor will be considered unable to deliver a specific assignment under the following circumstances:\n\nAccordingly, the Contracting Authority may decide to award the specific contract to the next best ranked FWC contractor. \n\n41\n\n- o In case of conflict of interest involving the FWC contractor (in the case of a consortium, this condition applies for all its members).\n\n- o If the offer is rejected for failure to comply with the requirements defined in the specific request for services and/or with the FWC.\n\n- o If the contractor is not able to provide the proposed team at the required level of expertise.\n\n- o If no offer is received from the FWC contractor within the given deadline.\n\nScore tender X = \n\n{[((SUM of ALL Quality Award Criteria points)-60)/40] x 60 quality points} + [(Lowest Total Price/ Total Price of tender X) x (40 price points)] \n\n## 5. Assignment" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9769432610508898, + "doc_id": "ab7652088c1d86b1fcf191f07c7802e1261d17f1903c32de7a495e0c66ed5b2d", + "edit_distance": 0.031496062992125984, + "f1_score": 0.9930069930069932, + "meteor": 0.9888396082721941, + "precision": 0.9953271028037384, + "pred_md": "Contract number: [ complete ]\n\nContract conditions of December 2015\n\nThe contractor must take all appropriate measures to minimise costs, prevent damage and cancel or reduce its commitments.\n\nWithin 60 days of the date of termination, the contractor must submit any report and any invoice required for supplies that were provided before the date of termination.\n\nIn the case of joint tenders, the contracting authority may terminate the contract with each member of the group separately on the basis of points (d), (e) or (g) of Article II.17.1, under the conditions set out in Article II.11.2.\n\n## II.18. INVOICES, VALUE ADDED TAX AND E-INVOICING\n\n## II.18.1. Invoices and value added tax\n\nInvoices must contain the contractor's (or leader's in the case of a joint tender) identification data, the amount, the currency and the date, as well as the contract reference.\n\nInvoices must indicate the place of taxation of the contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) for value added tax (VAT) purposes and must specify separately amounts not including VAT and amounts including VAT.\n\nThe contracting authority is exempt from all taxes and duties, including VAT, in accordance with Articles 3 and 4 of the Protocol on the privileges and immunities of the European Union.\n\nThe contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) must complete the necessary formalities with the relevant authorities to ensure that the supplies and services required for performance of the contract are exempt from taxes and duties, including VAT.\n\n## II.18.2. E-invoicing\n\nIf provided for in the special conditions, the contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) submits invoices in electronic format if the conditions regarding electronic signature specified by Directive 2006/112/EC on VAT are fulfilled, i.e. using a qualified electronic signature or through electronic data interchange.\n\nReception of invoices by standard format (pdf) or email is not accepted.\n\n## II.19. PRICE REVISION\n\nIf a price revision index is provided in Article I.4.2, this Article applies to it.\n\nPrices are fixed and not subject to revision during the first year of the contract.\n\nAt the beginning of the second and every following year of the contract, each price may be revised upwards or downwards at the request of one of the parties.\n\nA party may request a price revision in writing no later than three months before the anniversary date of entry into force of the contract. The other party must acknowledge the request within 14 days of receipt.\n\nAt the anniversary date, the contracting authority must communicate the final index for the month in which the request was received, or failing that, the last provisional index\n\n27", + "recall": 0.9906976744186047, + "true_md": "Contract number: [ complete ] \n\nContract conditions of December 2015 \n\nThe contractor must take all appropriate measures to minimise costs, prevent damage and cancel or reduce its commitments.\n\nWithin 60 days of the date of termination, the contractor must submit any report and any invoice required for supplies that were provided before the date of termination.\n\nIn the case of joint tenders, the contracting authority may terminate the contract with each member of the group separately on the basis of points (d), (e) or (g) of Article II.17.1, under the conditions set out in Article II.11.2. \n\n## II.18. INVOICES, VALUE ADDED TAX AND E-INVOICING\n\n## II.18.1. Invoices and value added tax\n\nInvoices must contain the contractor’s (or leader’s in the case of a joint tender) identification data, the amount, the currency and the date, as well as the contract reference. \n\nInvoices must indicate the place of taxation of the contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) for value added tax (VAT) purposes and must specify separately amounts not including VAT and amounts including VAT. \n\nThe contracting authority is exempt from all taxes and duties, including VAT, in accordance with Articles 3 and 4 of the Protocol on the privileges and immunities of the European Union. \n\nThe contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) must complete the necessary formalities with the relevant authorities to ensure that the supplies and services required for performance of the contract are exempt from taxes and duties, including VAT. \n\nIf provided for in the special conditions, the contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) submits invoices in electronic format if the conditions regarding electronic signature specified by Directive 2006/112/EC on VAT are fulfilled, i.e. using a qualified electronic signature or through electronic data interchange.\n\n## II.18.2. E-invoicing\n\nReception of invoices by standard format (pdf) or email is not accepted.\n\n## II.19. PRICE REVISION\n\nIf a price revision index is provided in Article I.4.2, this Article applies to it.\n\nPrices are fixed and not subject to revision during the first year of the contract. \n\nAt the beginning of the second and every following year of the contract, each price may be revised upwards or downwards at the request of one of the parties. \n\nA party may request a price revision in writing no later than three months before the anniversary date of entry into force of the contract. The other party must acknowledge the request within 14 days of receipt.\n\n27 At the anniversary date, the contracting authority must communicate the final index for the month in which the request was received, or failing that, the last provisional index \n\n27 or" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9330719634251967, + "doc_id": "966b2b361e3ea0cc7ac49fb02746a6a1f8b10ddc146c3ee916f3ad30593f8d31", + "edit_distance": 0.3494809688581315, + "f1_score": 0.9859154929577465, + "meteor": 0.9280679423536566, + "precision": 0.9879032258064516, + "pred_md": "General Administrative and Submission Clauses\n\nIn order to ensure punctual hand delivery, the Tenderer is strongly advised to take into account the eventual waiting time for the actual handover of its tender to the EIB's reception desk in charge of taking delivery. EIB may not be held liable for any delays incurred by the Tenderer when in EIB's premises; the Tenderer alone is responsible for ensuring that its tender is delivered on time.\n\n## 4.5. Electronic submission of tenders (e-Submission)\n\nThe EIB may at its own discretion require Tenderers to submit their tenders electronically via: https://etendering.ted.europa.eu/ by stating so in point 1.2 of the 'Terms of Reference'. In such case, the provisions set in the foregoing points 4.3 to 4.4.2 shall be superseded by those stated in Appendix I to these General Administrative and Submission Clauses.\n\n## 4.6. Implications of submitting a tender\n\nAll documents submitted by the Tenderer shall automatically become the property of EIB and are deemed confidential.\n\nTenders shall be submitted strictly in accordance with the conditions set out in the 'Terms of Reference' and its annexes. If any other conditions are attached to or referred to in the Tenderer's tender, the Tenderer should declare that such conditions are entirely withdrawn.\n\nExcept in the case of e-Submission (see point 4.5 and Appendix 1), tenders must be drawn up on paper as well as an electronic version clearly marked with the name of the Tenderer and EIB's reference number. Paper version and electronic version shall be identical. In case of discrepancies the Tenderer's statement made in the paper version shall prevail.\n\nThe period of validity of the tender, during which the Tenderer may not modify the terms of the tender in any respect, must be at least 6 (six) months following the deadline for dispatching tenders. The successful Tenderer must maintain its offer for a further 4 (four) months from the date of the written notification of EIB's intention to award it the contract.\n\nBy submitting a tender in response to this call for tenders, the Tenderers:\n\n-  accept all terms and conditions of the Procurement Documents, including the EIB Model Contract;\n-  waive their own terms of business;\n-  confirm that they have had the opportunity to gauge the scope and quality of the services/supplies/works required, as well as identify any possible difficulties;\n-  cannot invoke any error, inaccuracy or omission in their tender to call the contract into question or to attempt to have it amended;\n-  in case Tenderers submit documents of general interest in the context of a procurement procedure, such documents will form an integral part of the tender;\n-  must not pass on documents relating to a procurement procedure to third parties, except where the EIB has given its prior authorisation;\n-  must not modify any of the Procurement Documents provided by EIB in the context of a procurement procedure, as they are solely made available to Tenderers to insert the required information.\n\nEIB reserves the right:\n\nLast updated: June 2020\n\nPage 9 of 21", + "recall": 0.9839357429718876, + "true_md": "General Administrative and Submission Clauses\n\nIn order to ensure punctual hand delivery, the Tenderer is strongly advised to take into account the eventual waiting time for the actual handover of its tender to the EIB’s reception desk in charge of taking delivery. EIB may not be held liable for any delays incurred by the Tenderer when in EIB’s premises; the Tenderer alone is responsible for ensuring that its tender is delivered on time.\n\nThe EIB may at its own discretion require Tenderers to submit their tenders electronically via: https://etendering.ted.europa.eu/ by stating so in point 1.2 of the `Terms of Reference`. In such case, the provisions set in the foregoing points 4.3 to 4.4.2 shall be superseded by those stated in Appendix I to these General Administrative and Submission Clauses. \n\nAll documents submitted by the Tenderer shall automatically become the property of EIB and are deemed confidential. \n\nTenders shall be submitted strictly in accordance with the conditions set out in the `Terms of Reference` and its annexes. If any other conditions are attached to or referred to in the Tenderer’s tender, the Tenderer should declare that such conditions are entirely withdrawn.\n\nExcept in the case of e-Submission (see point 4.5 and Appendix 1), tenders must be drawn up on paper as well as an electronic version clearly marked with the name of the Tenderer and EIB’s reference number. Paper version and electronic version shall be identical. In case of discrepancies the Tenderer’s statement made in the paper version shall prevail.\n\nThe period of validity of the tender, during which the Tenderer may not modify the terms of the tender in any respect, must be at least 6 (six) months following the deadline for dispatching tenders. The successful Tenderer must maintain its offer for a further 4 (four) months from the date of the written notification of EIB’s intention to award it the contract. \n\nBy submitting a tender in response to this call for tenders, the Tenderers: \n\nEIB reserves the right: \n\nLast updated: June 2020\n\nPage 9 of 21 \n\n-  must not modify any of the Procurement Documents provided by EIB in the context of a procurement procedure, as they are solely made available to Tenderers to insert the required information.\n\n-  must not pass on documents relating to a procurement procedure to third parties, except where the EIB has given its prior authorisation; \n\n-  in case Tenderers submit documents of general interest in the context of a procurement procedure, such documents will form an integral part of the tender; \n\n-  cannot invoke any error, inaccuracy or omission in their tender to call the contract into question or to attempt to have it amended; \n\n-  confirm that they have had the opportunity to gauge the scope and quality of the services/supplies/works required, as well as identify any possible difficulties; \n\n-  waive their own terms of business; \n\n-  accept all terms and conditions of the Procurement Documents, including the EIB Model Contract; \n\n## 4.5. Electronic submission of tenders (e-Submission)\n\n## 4.6. Implications of submitting a tender" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8177582329432352, + "doc_id": "1ef5c5ad8c469884ddfd3dfa34800efcbe31e197161b1437b4c6741f77c1eea4", + "edit_distance": 0.15815485996705106, + "f1_score": 0.9857142857142859, + "meteor": 0.7405193832805723, + "precision": 0.9857142857142858, + "pred_md": "Honour need to be provided whenever requested and where this is necessary to ensure the proper conduct of the procedure within a deadline given by the contracting authority 12 .\n\nSection 6 specifies which of the involved entities participating in a tender need to provide the Declaration on Honour and, when requested by the Contracting Authority, the supporting evidence.\n\nPlease note that a request for evidence in no way implies that the tenderer has been successful.\n\nTenderers established to be in an exclusion situation in accordance with Article 136 or any other situation listed in Article 141(1) of the Financial Regulation, will be rejected.\n\n## 3.2. Selection criteria\n\nThe objective of the selection criteria is to assess whether the tenderer has the legal, regulatory, economic, financial, technical and professional capacity to perform the contract.\n\nThe selection criteria for this call for tenders, including the minimum levels of capacity, the basis for assessment and the evidence required, are specified in the following subsections.\n\nTenders submitted by tenderers not meeting the minimum levels of capacity will be rejected.\n\nWhen bidding for the two lots the Tenderer is to be aware that, to be awarded more than one lot, they must demonstrate the aggregated financial and economic, professional and technical capacity defined in the selection criteria for the two lots together. The Contracting Authority will therefore verify, before awarding the two lots to the same Tenderer, whether the Tenderer sufficiently meets the aggregated capacity required by the selection criteria for the given contracts. Should the Tenderer not be able to meet the cumulative capacity required in the selection criteria for all contracts for which they are bidding, the Tenderer is requested to express in the Tender their order of preference in view of potential contract award. In such a case, the Contracting Authority will decide on the award of the lots following the order of preference expressed by the Tenderer.\n\nWhen submitting its tender each tenderer shall declare on honour that it fulfils the selection criteria for the call for tenders. The model Declaration on Honour available in Annex 03 'Declaration on honour - Exclusion and Selection criteria' shall be used for this purpose.\n\n12 The obligation to provide the supporting evidence will be waived in the following situations:\n\n-if the same documents have already been provided in a previous award procedure of the ECHA, have been issued no more than one year before the date of their request by the Contracting authority and are still valid at that date;\n\n-if such evidence can be accessed by the Contracting Authority on a national database free of charge, in which case the economic operator shall provide the Contracting Authority with the internet address of the database and, if needed, the necessary identification data to retrieve the document;\n\n-if there is a material impossibility to provide such evidence.\n\n18", + "recall": 0.9857142857142858, + "true_md": "Honour need to be provided whenever requested and where this is necessary to ensure the proper conduct of the procedure within a deadline given by the contracting authority 12 .\n\nSection 6 specifies which of the involved entities participating in a tender need to provide the Declaration on Honour and, when requested by the Contracting Authority, the supporting evidence. \n\nPlease note that a request for evidence in no way implies that the tenderer has been successful. \n\nTenderers established to be in an exclusion situation in accordance with Article 136 or any other situation listed in Article 141(1) of the Financial Regulation, will be rejected. \n\n## 3.2. Selection criteria\n\nThe objective of the selection criteria is to assess whether the tenderer has the legal, regulatory, economic, financial, technical and professional capacity to perform the contract.\n\nThe selection criteria for this call for tenders, including the minimum levels of capacity, the basis for assessment and the evidence required, are specified in the following subsections. \n\nTenders submitted by tenderers not meeting the minimum levels of capacity will be rejected.\n\nWhen bidding for the two lots the Tenderer is to be aware that, to be awarded more than one lot, they must demonstrate the aggregated financial and economic, professional and technical capacity defined in the selection criteria for the two lots together. The Contracting Authority will therefore verify, before awarding the two lots to the same Tenderer, whether the Tenderer sufficiently meets the aggregated capacity required by the selection criteria for the given contracts. Should the Tenderer not be able to meet the cumulative capacity required in the selection criteria for all contracts for which they are bidding, the Tenderer is requested to express in the Tender their order of preference in view of potential contract award. In such a case, the Contracting Authority will decide on the award of the lots following the order of preference expressed by the Tenderer. \n\nWhen submitting its tender each tenderer shall declare on honour that it fulfils the selection criteria for the call for tenders. The model Declaration on Honour available in Annex 03 “Declaration on honour – Exclusion and Selection criteria” shall be used for this purpose.\n\n12 The obligation to provide the supporting evidence will be waived in the following situations: if the same documents have already been provided in a previous award procedure of the ECHA, have \n\n The obligation to provide the supporting evidence will be waived in the following situations: - if the same documents have already been provided in a previous award procedure of the ECHA, have been issued no more than one year before the date of their request by the Contracting authority and are still valid at that date; if such evidence can be accessed by the Contracting Authority on a national database free of charge, in \n\nare still valid at that date; - if such evidence can be accessed by the Contracting Authority on a national database free of charge, in which case the economic operator shall provide the Contracting Authority with the internet address of the database and, if needed, the necessary identification data to retrieve the document; if there is a material impossibility to provide such evidence. \n\nthe database and, if needed, the necessary identification data to retrieve the document; - if there is a material impossibility to provide such evidence. \n\n18" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "5bfefca1a91d10a3bf9f18e8eeafc92c535139f2a8700a447674311728135e22", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9921875, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Page 50 of 53", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Page 50 of 53" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "d400ffc9a273a51700331d41cf0c087d93eb0a59c187361f53b93101e04e8e24", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9921875, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.19520439863811787, + "doc_id": "5912a799a3069b519f2ebee14270be91adeb1c2d45cdf9141bcbb22840be4ac5", + "edit_distance": 0.8068181818181818, + "f1_score": 0.36363636363636365, + "meteor": 0.5279584775086505, + "precision": 0.22535211267605634, + "pred_md": "Vaccine Effectiveness, Burden and Impact Studies (VEBIS) of COVID-19 and Influenza - Tender Specifications ECDC/2021/12924\n\nTask 6: Training and capacity building\n\nCapacity building is considered an essential part of this lot. The contractor shall ensure that by the end of the project all sites will build enough capacity to be able to independently implement the protocols, validate data and contribute to the ECDC Hospital network activities and aims.\n\nDeliverable (DL)\n\nDescription\n\nEstimated frequency/ Volume\n\nFile / form at type", + "recall": 0.9411764705882353, + "true_md": "Vaccine Effectiveness, Burden and Impact Studies (VEBIS) of COVID-19 and Influenza – Tender Specifications ECDC/2021/12924" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "9c1ea06320c0aa7ee8723b7e3d69494343909c7b55d4396fbd71042c4feb8b47", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999999932512688, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Contract number: [ complete ]\n\nContract conditions of December 2015\n\n- II.9.3 The contractor has right of recourse at any time to the European Data Protection Supervisor.\n- II.9.4 If the contract requires the contractor to process any personal data, the contractor may act only under the supervision of the data controller, in particular with regard to the purposes of the processing, the categories of data that may be processed, the recipients of the data and the means by which the data subject may exercise its rights.\n- II.9.5 The contractor must grant personnel access to the data to the extent strictly necessary for the performance, management and monitoring of the contract.\n- II.9.6 The contractor must adopt appropriate technical and organisational security measures giving due regard to the risks inherent in the processing and to the nature of the personal data concerned in order to:\n- (a) prevent any unauthorised person from gaining access to computer systems processing personal data, and especially:\n- (i) unauthorised reading, copying, alteration or removal of storage media;\n- (ii) unauthorised data inputting, as well as any unauthorised disclosure, alteration or erasure of stored personal data;\n- (iii) unauthorised use of data-processing systems by means of data transmission facilities;\n- (b) ensure that authorised users of a data-processing system can access only the personal data to which their access right refers;\n- (c) record which personal data have been communicated, when and to whom;\n- (d) ensure that personal data being processed on behalf of third parties can be processed only in the manner prescribed by the contracting authority;\n- (e) ensure that, during communication of personal data and transport of storage media, the data cannot be read, copied or erased without authorisation;\n- (f) design its organisational structure in such a way that it meets data protection requirements.\n\n## II.10. SUBCONTRACTING\n\n- II.10.1 The contractor must not subcontract and have the contract performed by third parties beyond the third parties already mentioned in its tender without prior written authorisation from the contracting authority.\n- II.10.2 Even if the contracting authority authorises subcontracting, the contractor remains bound by its contractual obligations and is solely responsible for the performance of this contract.\n\n21", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Contract number: [ complete ] \n\nContract conditions of December 2015 \n\n- II.9.3 The contractor has right of recourse at any time to the European Data Protection Supervisor. \n\n- II.9.4 If the contract requires the contractor to process any personal data, the contractor may act only under the supervision of the data controller, in particular with regard to the purposes of the processing, the categories of data that may be processed, the recipients of the data and the means by which the data subject may exercise its rights. \n\n- II.9.5 The contractor must grant personnel access to the data to the extent strictly necessary for the performance, management and monitoring of the contract. \n\n- II.9.6 The contractor must adopt appropriate technical and organisational security measures giving due regard to the risks inherent in the processing and to the nature of the personal data concerned in order to: \n\n- (a) prevent any unauthorised person from gaining access to computer systems processing personal data, and especially: \n\n- (i) unauthorised reading, copying, alteration or removal of storage media; \n\n- (ii) unauthorised data inputting, as well as any unauthorised disclosure, alteration or erasure of stored personal data; \n\n- (iii) unauthorised use of data-processing systems by means of data transmission facilities; \n\n- (b) ensure that authorised users of a data-processing system can access only the personal data to which their access right refers; \n\n- (c) record which personal data have been communicated, when and to whom; \n\n- (d) ensure that personal data being processed on behalf of third parties can be processed only in the manner prescribed by the contracting authority; \n\n- (e) ensure that, during communication of personal data and transport of storage media, the data cannot be read, copied or erased without authorisation; \n\n- (f) design its organisational structure in such a way that it meets data protection requirements. \n\n## II.10. SUBCONTRACTING\n\n- II.10.1 The contractor must not subcontract and have the contract performed by third parties beyond the third parties already mentioned in its tender without prior written authorisation from the contracting authority. \n\n- II.10.2 Even if the contracting authority authorises subcontracting, the contractor remains bound by its contractual obligations and is solely responsible for the performance of this contract.\n\n21" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9465407473227, + "doc_id": "149e13c5815db5231b357d5cd2691e9d0460155f05399e6c5da72ec4be34a967", + "edit_distance": 0.07957559681697612, + "f1_score": 0.9834254143646409, + "meteor": 0.9700567449084295, + "precision": 0.994413407821229, + "pred_md": "The tenderer's personal data may be registered in the Early Detection and Exclusion System (EDES) if the tenderer is in one of the situations mentioned in Article 136 of the Financial Regulation . For 9 more information, see the privacy statement:\n\nhttp://ec.europa.eu/budget/explained/management/protecting/protect\\_en.cfm.\n\n## 5. Means of redress.\n\nTenderers may submit any observations concerning the procurement procedure to the contracting authority using the contact details under Heading I.1 of the contract notice. If tenderers believe that there is maladministration, they may lodge a complaint to the European Ombudsman within two years of the date from which they become aware of the facts which form the basis for the complaint (see https://www.ombudsman.europa.eu).\n\nWithin two months of notification of the outcome of the procedure ( award decision ), tenderers may launch an action for its annulment. Any request tenderers may make and any reply from the contracting authority, or any complaint for maladministration, will have neither the purpose nor the effect of suspending the time-limit for launching an action for annulment nor open a new period for launching an action for annulment. The body responsible for hearing annulment procedures is indicated under Heading VI.4.1 of the contract notice.\n\nYours faithfully,\n\nJuhan Lepassaar, Executive Director (e-signed)\n\nAnnexes to the invitation to tender:\n\nAnnex I - Tender specifications and annexes (all three Lots) Annex II - Draft contract and annexes\n\n9 Regulation (EU, Euratom) 2018/1046 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 18 July 2018 on the financial rules applicable to the general budget of the Union, amending Regulations (EU) No 1296/2013, (EU) No 1301/2013, (EU) No 1303/2013, (EU) No 1304/2013, (EU) No 1309/2013, (EU) No 1316/2013, (EU) No 223/2014, (EU) No 283/2014, and Decision No 541/2014/EU and repealing Regulation (EU, Euratom) No 966/2012 (OJ L 193 of 30.07.2018, p.1).\n\nPage 5 of 5", + "recall": 0.9726775956284153, + "true_md": "The tenderer's personal data may be registered in the Early Detection and Exclusion System (EDES) if the tenderer is in one of the situations mentioned in Article 136 of the Financial Regulation$^{9}$. For more information, see the privacy statement: \n\nhttp://ec.europa.eu/budget/explained/management/protecting/protect\\_en.cfm. \n\nTenderers may submit any observations concerning the procurement procedure to the contracting authority using the contact details under Heading I.1 of the contract notice. If tenderers believe that there is maladministration, they may lodge a complaint to the European Ombudsman within two years of the date from which they become aware of the facts which form the basis for the complaint (see https://www.ombudsman.europa.eu).\n\nWithin two months of notification of the outcome of the procedure ( award decision ), tenderers may launch an action for its annulment. Any request tenderers may make and any reply from the contracting authority, or any complaint for maladministration, will have neither the purpose nor the effect of suspending the time-limit for launching an action for annulment nor open a new period for launching an action for annulment. The body responsible for hearing annulment procedures is indicated under Heading VI.4.1 of the contract notice.\n\nYours faithfully, \n\nJuhan Lepassaar, Executive Director \n\n(e-signed) \n\nAnnexes to the invitation to tender: \n\nAnnex I – Tender specifications and annexes (all three Lots) Annex II – Draft contract and annexes\n\n## 5. Means of redress.\n\n$^{9}$ Regulation (EU, Euratom) 2018/1046 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 18 July 2018 on the financial rules applicable to the general budget of the Union, amending Regulations (EU) No 1296/2013, (EU) No 1301/2013, (EU) No 1303/2013, (EU) No 1304/2013, (EU) No 1309/2013, (EU) No 1316/2013, (EU) No 223/2014, (EU) No 283/2014, and Decision No 541/2014/EU and repealing Regulation (EU, Euratom) No 966/2012 (OJ L 193 of 30.07.2018, p.1). \n\nPage 5 of 5" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9251533383046586, + "doc_id": "f80f080c514f8bf0f50b2449e28dfd7e86d197cebc213a6245cf859823a2bf0f", + "edit_distance": 0.36046511627906974, + "f1_score": 0.9685230024213073, + "meteor": 0.9035781916630434, + "precision": 0.966183574879227, + "pred_md": "General Administrative and Submission Clauses\n\nnecessary for the performance of the contract at the disposal of the Tenderer for the period of the contract.\n\nIn case of a joint offer submitted by a group or in the case of subcontracting, the Tenderer shall provide the information and documentation listed below in point 7 .\n\n## 6.5. Evidence concerning exclusion and selection criteria\n\nUpon request and within the time limit set by the EIB, the successful Tenderer shall submit the original certificates/documents to EIB for conformity check prior to the signature of the contract. For further details please refer to point 9 .\n\nThe obligation to submit supporting evidence concerning exclusion criteria does not apply to international organisations.\n\n## 7. Conditions regarding joint tenders, subcontracting and reliance on the capacity of other entities\n\n## 7.1. Joint tenders general\n\nGroups of economic operators, including consortia and temporary associations (the 'Groups') are authorised to submit tenders ('Joint tenders'). In this case, each member of the Group shall fulfil the requirements and accept the terms and conditions set out in these 'General Administrative and Submission Clauses', the 'Terms of Reference', the Model Contract and the applicable General Terms and Conditions of EIB as well as all the relevant annexes.\n\nThe members of the Group shall designate one member as Group Leader with full authority to bind the Group and each of its members. The Group Leader shall act as a single point of contact with EIB in connection with the present procurement procedure.\n\nWhile Groups are not required to have a specific legal form in order to submit a tender, the Group selected may be required to adopt a given legal form after it has been awarded the contract and before the contract is signed, if this change is necessary for the proper performance of the contract.\n\n## 7.1.1. Documentation and information to be provided\n\nIn the section of the tender related to the Tenderer's exclusion and selection criteria situation, the Group shall clearly specify the role and tasks of each member of the Group (see Form 2 ).\n\nIn addition, each member of the Group must provide the following:\n\n-  documentation related to its exclusion situation;\n-  documentation related to its technical and professional capacity (documentation to be provided by each member of the Group to the extent of its respective share of tasks);\n-  documentation related to its economic and financial capacity;\n-  documentation related to its legal capacity;\n-  a letter of intent, designating the Group Leader and ensuring the proper execution of the respective share of tasks if the Group is awarded the contract by using the declaration contained in Form 3 of 'Administrative forms for EIB tenders'.\n\nLast updated: June 2020\n\nPage 12 of 21", + "recall": 0.970873786407767, + "true_md": "General Administrative and Submission Clauses\n\nnecessary for the performance of the contract at the disposal of the Tenderer for the period of the contract. \n\nIn case of a joint offer submitted by a group or in the case of subcontracting, the Tenderer shall provide the information and documentation listed below in point 7 . \n\nUpon request and within the time limit set by the EIB, the successful Tenderer shall submit the original certificates/documents to EIB for conformity check prior to the signature of the contract. For further details please refer to point 9 . \n\nThe obligation to submit supporting evidence concerning exclusion criteria does not apply to international organisations.\n\nGroups of economic operators, including consortia and temporary associations (the “Groups”) are authorised to submit tenders (“Joint tenders”). In this case, each member of the Group shall fulfil the requirements and accept the terms and conditions set out in these ‘General Administrative and Submission Clauses’, the `Terms of Reference`, the Model Contract and the applicable General Terms and Conditions of EIB as well as all the relevant annexes. \n\nThe members of the Group shall designate one member as Group Leader with full authority to bind the Group and each of its members. The Group Leader shall act as a single point of contact with EIB in connection with the present procurement procedure.\n\nWhile Groups are not required to have a specific legal form in order to submit a tender, the Group selected may be required to adopt a given legal form after it has been awarded the contract and before the contract is signed, if this change is necessary for the proper performance of the contract.\n\nIn the section of the tender related to the Tenderer’s exclusion and selection criteria situation, the Group shall clearly specify the role and tasks of each member of the Group (see Form 2 ).\n\nIn addition, each member of the Group must provide the following: \n\nLast updated: June 2020\n\nPage 12 of 21 \n\n-  a letter of intent, designating the Group Leader and ensuring the proper execution of the respective share of tasks if the Group is awarded the contract by using the declaration contained in Form 3 of ‘Administrative forms for EIB tenders’. \n\n-  documentation related to its legal capacity; \n\n-  documentation related to its economic and financial capacity; \n\n-  documentation related to its technical and professional capacity (documentation to be provided by each member of the Group to the extent of its respective share of tasks); \n\n-  documentation related to its exclusion situation; \n\n## 7.1.1. Documentation and information to be provided\n\n## 7.1. Joint tenders general\n\n## 7. Conditions regarding joint tenders, subcontracting and reliance on the capacity of other entities\n\n## 6.5. Evidence concerning exclusion and selection criteria" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9709002928566846, + "doc_id": "20151333147b859858f3f3c77d9c5d73c035f1b6758ac91ad3b054b5455b634f", + "edit_distance": 0.08791208791208792, + "f1_score": 0.9933481152993348, + "meteor": 0.9964273062501228, + "precision": 0.9955555555555555, + "pred_md": "II.23.2 Le code de conduite du pouvoir adjudicateur en matière de harcèlement sexuel s'applique également au personnel employé par le contractant et, le cas échéant, par les sous-traitants de celui-ci, pour autant que ce personnel travaille sur le site du pouvoir adjudicateur. Les personnes concernées ont le droit de consulter une personne de confiance nommée au sein du pouvoir adjudicateur.\n\n## II.24 POLITIQUE ENVIRONNEMENTALE\n\nSi le cahier des charges contient une annexe concernant la politique environnementale du pouvoir adjudicateur, le contractant est tenu de la respecter et d'en informer son personnel et ses soustraitants.\n\n## II.25 SÉCURITÉ\n\nSi le contractant, son personnel ou ses sous-traitants ne respectent pas les règles énoncées à l'annexe VI, le pouvoir adjudicateur peut, sans préjudice de l'indemnisation que le contractant lui devrait, résilier avec effet immédiat le bon de commande concerné en cours en procédant à une notification formelle du contractant. Dans ce cas, le pouvoir adjudicateur ne doit au contractant ni indemnisation ni remboursement de frais liés à la résiliation.\n\n## II.26 LOI APPLICABLE ET RÈGLEMENT DES LITIGES\n\nII.26.1 Le CC est régi par le droit de l'Union, complété, si nécessaire, par le droit civil belge.\n\n## II.26.2 Médiation\n\nSans préjudice de l'article II.26.3, en cas de litige entre les parties résultant de l'interprétation ou de l'application du CC et ne pouvant être réglé à l'amiable, les parties peuvent convenir de soumettre le litige à la médiation.\n\nSi une partie au litige notifie par écrit à l'autre partie son désir d'engager une médiation et que l'autre partie accepte par écrit, les parties doivent désigner conjointement un médiateur mutuellement acceptable dans un délai de deux semaines à compter de la date de l'accord écrit susvisé. Si les parties ne sont pas en mesure de s'entendre sur la désignation d'un médiateur dans le délai indiqué, toute partie pourra saisir le président du Tribunal de première instance de Bruxelles aux fins de la désignation d'un médiateur.\n\nLa proposition écrite du médiateur ou ses conclusions écrites constatant qu'aucune proposition ne peut être formulée doivent être présentées dans un délai de deux mois à compter de la date de l'accord écrit de l'autre partie en vue d'engager la médiation. La proposition du médiateur ou ses conclusions ne lient pas les parties, qui se réservent le droit de porter le litige devant les tribunaux, conformément à l'article II.26.3.\n\nDans les deux semaines qui suivent la date de notification de la proposition par le médiateur, les\n\nparties peuvent conclure un accord écrit, dûment signé par les deux parties, fondé sur la proposition.\n\nLes parties conviennent en outre de répartir à parts égales les coûts de médiation exposés par le médiateur, lesquels ne peuvent comprendre les autres frais éventuellement exposés par l'une des parties en liaison avec la médiation.\n\n## II.26.3 Règlement des litiges\n\nTout litige entre les parties résultant de l'interprétation ou de l'application du CC ou d'un bon de commande relevant du CC, qui ne peut être réglé à l'amiable, est porté devant les tribunaux de Bruxelles (Belgique).\n\n34\n\nFR", + "recall": 0.9911504424778761, + "true_md": "II.23.2 Le code de conduite du pouvoir adjudicateur en matière de harcèlement sexuel s'applique également au personnel employé par le contractant et, le cas échéant, par les sous-traitants de celui-ci, pour autant que ce personnel travaille sur le site du pouvoir adjudicateur. Les personnes concernées ont le droit de consulter une personne de confiance nommée au sein du pouvoir adjudicateur. \n\n## II.24 POLITIQUE ENVIRONNEMENTALE\n\n## II.25 SÉCURITÉ\n\n## II.26 LOI APPLICABLE ET RÈGLEMENT DES LITIGES\n\n## II.26.2 Médiation\n\n## II.26.3 Règlement des litiges\n\nSi le cahier des charges contient une annexe concernant la politique environnementale du pouvoir adjudicateur, le contractant est tenu de la respecter et d'en informer son personnel et ses sous- traitants. \n\nSi le contractant, son personnel ou ses sous-traitants ne respectent pas les règles énoncées à l'annexe VI, le pouvoir adjudicateur peut, sans préjudice de l'indemnisation que le contractant lui devrait, résilier avec effet immédiat le bon de commande concerné en cours en procédant à une notification formelle du contractant. Dans ce cas, le pouvoir adjudicateur ne doit au contractant ni indemnisation ni remboursement de frais liés à la résiliation. \n\nII.26.1 Le CC est régi par le droit de l'Union, complété, si nécessaire, par le droit civil belge.\n\nSans préjudice de l'article II.26.3, en cas de litige entre les parties résultant de l'interprétation ou de l'application du CC et ne pouvant être réglé à l'amiable, les parties peuvent convenir de soumettre le litige à la médiation. \n\nSi une partie au litige notifie par écrit à l'autre partie son désir d'engager une médiation et que l'autre partie accepte par écrit, les parties doivent désigner conjointement un médiateur mutuellement acceptable dans un délai de deux semaines à compter de la date de l'accord écrit susvisé. Si les parties ne sont pas en mesure de s'entendre sur la désignation d'un médiateur dans le délai indiqué, toute partie pourra saisir le président du Tribunal de première instance de Bruxelles aux fins de la désignation d'un médiateur. \n\nLa proposition écrite du médiateur ou ses conclusions écrites constatant qu'aucune proposition ne peut être formulée doivent être présentées dans un délai de deux mois à compter de la date de l'accord écrit de l'autre partie en vue d'engager la médiation. La proposition du médiateur ou ses conclusions ne lient pas les parties, qui se réservent le droit de porter le litige devant les tribunaux, conformément à l'article II.26.3. \n\nDans les deux semaines qui suivent la date de notification de la proposition par le médiateur, les parties peuvent conclure un accord écrit, dûment signé par les deux parties, fondé sur la proposition. \n\nLes parties conviennent en outre de répartir à parts égales les coûts de médiation exposés par le médiateur, lesquels ne peuvent comprendre les autres frais éventuellement exposés par l'une des parties en liaison avec la médiation. \n\nTout litige entre les parties résultant de l'interprétation ou de l'application du CC ou d'un bon de commande relevant du CC, qui ne peut être réglé à l'amiable, est porté devant les tribunaux de Bruxelles (Belgique). \n\n34 FR" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9356188040342492, + "doc_id": "dec5646ffeb4c2c9ea00d7cc0e82ff2dd884674f45d1d15fba7cf68b633815c9", + "edit_distance": 0.2591792656587473, + "f1_score": 0.9690140845070422, + "meteor": 0.9571602905845848, + "precision": 0.9885057471264368, + "pred_md": "- · Always for specific contracts of value </= 200.000 €\n- · Optional, based on the Contracting Authority 's internal decision for the service need in question, for contracts of value >200.000 € <= 5 00.000 €\n\nIn case of unavailability of the first contractor, e.g. having failed the deadlines, having proposed unsuitable consultants, or having conflict of interest (see section 3.2.4), etc., the second best ranked framework contractor will be approached, and so forth.\n\nThe cascade process will terminate either with the award of the assignment in question to one of the contractors, or with the failure to award the assignment to any contractor. In the event of failure the Contracting Authority will withdraw the request, or redefine the assignment and start the procedure based on a new request with the first ranked contractor. Once the Contracting Authority agrees to the offer of a contractor the specific contract will be signed.\n\nThe process of implementation of the FWC in cascade is set out in Article I.4.3 of the Draft Framework Contract.\n\n## B) Reopening competition:\n\n- · Optional, based on the Contracting Authority 's internal decision for the service need in question, for contracts of value >200.000 € <= 5 00.000 €\n- · Always for contracts of value > 500.000 €\n\nSubject to the provision on conflict of interest (see section 3.2.4), the reopening of competition will entail the following phases: All framework contractors will be invited to submit an offer. The Contracting Authority will evaluate the received offers and rank them based on the award criteria stipulated in part 3.6 of these Tender Specifications. The Contracting Authority will sign a specific contract with the winner of the reopened competition.\n\nThe process of implementation of the FWC via reopening of competition is set out in Article I.4.3 of the Draft Framework Contract.\n\nNote on extension orders : a specific contract awarded to a FWC contractor under reopening of competition can be extended with the same contractor, either via amendments and/or via new specific contracts for optional services and/or phases when originally foreseen in the request for offer, and at the same conditions of the initial specific contract 2 .\n\nFor additional services that have become necessary and are brought by circumstances not initially foreseen (e.g. increase in the scope of the tasks mandated, additional funds\n\n2 The relevant provisions of the Framework Contract on price indexation applies.\n\n8", + "recall": 0.9502762430939227, + "true_md": "- • Always for specific contracts of value </= 200.000 €\n\n- • Optional, based on the Contracting Authority ’s internal decision for the service need in question, for contracts of value >200.000 € <= 5 00.000 €\n\n- • Optional, based on the Contracting Authority ’s internal decision for the service need in question, for contracts of value >200.000 € <= 5 00.000 €\n\n- • Always for contracts of value > 500.000 €\n\nIn case of unavailability of the first contractor, e.g. having failed the deadlines, having proposed unsuitable consultants, or having conflict of interest (see section 3.2.4), etc., the second best ranked framework contractor will be approached, and so forth.\n\nThe cascade process will terminate either with the award of the assignment in question to one of the contractors, or with the failure to award the assignment to any contractor. In the event of failure the Contracting Authority will withdraw the request, or redefine the assignment and start the procedure based on a new request with the first ranked contractor. Once the Contracting Authority agrees to the offer of a contractor the specific contract will be signed.\n\nThe process of implementation of the FWC in cascade is set out in Article I.4.3 of the Draft Framework Contract.\n\nSubject to the provision on conflict of interest (see section 3.2.4), the reopening of competition will entail the following phases: All framework contractors will be invited to submit an offer. The Contracting Authority will evaluate the received offers and rank them based on the award criteria stipulated in part 3.6 of these Tender Specifications. The Contracting Authority will sign a specific contract with the winner of the reopened competition.\n\nThe process of implementation of the FWC via reopening of competition is set out in Article I.4.3 of the Draft Framework Contract.\n\nNote on extension orders : a specific contract awarded to a FWC contractor under re- opening of competition can be extended with the same contractor, either via amendments and/or via new specific contracts for optional services and/or phases when originally foreseen in the request for offer, and at the same conditions of the initial specific contract 2 .\n\nFor additional services that have become necessary and are brought by circumstances not initially foreseen (e.g. increase in the scope of the tasks mandated, additional funds \n\n$^{2}$ The relevant provisions of the Framework Contract on price indexation applies.\n\n8\n\n## B) Reopening competition:" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9640252709420214, + "doc_id": "a60395ec8d0204c10ca6867fec9bea2a4217ff9865abca9a304cffaeb485a91f", + "edit_distance": 0.4489795918367347, + "f1_score": 0.9941520467836258, + "meteor": 0.957789788936806, + "precision": 0.9941520467836257, + "pred_md": "all FWC contractors, not later than 2 working days prior the offer submission deadline. If the Contracting Authority considers necessary, it may extend the submission deadline. In such a situation, all FWC contractors will be informed simultaneously about its decision.\n\nThe offer shall be presented in a clear and structured format. The offer must be valid for 3 months. During the re-opening of competition process, the tender specifications of the Request Form may not change (e.g. the type of services or deliverables must remain the same).\n\nUnless specified differently in the request for offer, offers must also include:\n\n- o Information about subcontracting;\n- o CVs of the staff deployed;\n- o A financial breakdown (by types of tasks as well as by staff categories) and the total price for the requested services;\n- o An indication whether the tenderer identifies a potential conflict of interest and how it intends to deal with it.\n\nConcerning the composition of the team, the Contracting Authority reserves the right to request replacements of staff considered not in line with the areas of expertise outlined in the request for service or with the requirements established for the profiles in the FWC. Conditions for replacement of resources are detailed in section 6.2.1 of the Annex 1 -Technical Specifications.\n\n## 4. Evaluation of offers\n\nThe Contracting Authority will evaluate the offers submitted by the FWC contractors within a reasonable time from the receipt of the offers (in general not less than 15 working days).\n\nThe specific contracts shall be awarded to the most economically advantageous tender. The following award criteria (AW) will be applied for the award of a specific contract:\n\n## Quality (Technical Assessment)\n\nFor all reopening to competition the following quality criteria will apply, and can be detailed at the level of the specific requests for offer:\n\n39", + "recall": 0.9941520467836257, + "true_md": "all FWC contractors, not later than 2 working days prior the offer submission deadline. If the Contracting Authority considers necessary, it may extend the submission deadline. In such a situation, all FWC contractors will be informed simultaneously about its decision.\n\nThe offer shall be presented in a clear and structured format. The offer must be valid for 3 months. During the re-opening of competition process, the tender specifications of the Request Form may not change (e.g. the type of services or deliverables must remain the same). \n\nUnless specified differently in the request for offer, offers must also include:\n\nConcerning the composition of the team, the Contracting Authority reserves the right to request replacements of staff considered not in line with the areas of expertise outlined in the request for service or with the requirements established for the profiles in the FWC. Conditions for replacement of resources are detailed in section 6.2.1 of the Annex 1 – Technical Specifications.\n\nThe Contracting Authority will evaluate the offers submitted by the FWC contractors within a reasonable time from the receipt of the offers (in general not less than 15 working days).\n\nThe specific contracts shall be awarded to the most economically advantageous tender. The following award criteria (AW) will be applied for the award of a specific contract:\n\nFor all reopening to competition the following quality criteria will apply, and can be detailed at the level of the specific requests for offer: \n\n39\n\n## Quality (Technical Assessment)\n\n## 4. Evaluation of offers\n\n- o Information about subcontracting;\n\n- o CVs of the staff deployed; \n\n- o A financial breakdown (by types of tasks as well as by staff categories) and the total price for the requested services;\n\n- o An indication whether the tenderer identifies a potential conflict of interest and how it intends to deal with it." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.05638344657118254, + "doc_id": "46ebf7333638b67ce68bac8e6649d7a2b53701ca9a5bc80a27c29efd3ba7ae04", + "edit_distance": 0.9390243902439024, + "f1_score": 0.19000000000000003, + "meteor": 0.3974943949208244, + "precision": 0.10555555555555556, + "pred_md": "Tenderers who fail to provide a description, or who only provide generic content, which does not specifically describe the relevance of the contract reference with regard to the minimum level of capacity detailed above, will be considered as not having the technical and professional capacity to perform the contract.\n\nThe references must concern at least 3 different clients. Departments, divisions, directorates, and other entities of a same body (including the same EU Institution) will be regarded as the same client. Each EU Institution (including an EU agency) is considered a different client. Under a framework contract (or framework contracts) with different specific contracts, a specific contract (alone or in combination with other specific contracts) can be used only once (i.e. it will be considered as a single reference). In case of a joint tender, the same reference contract cannot be submitted as a separate contract reference by different economic operators for the same tender.\n\nThe Contracting Authority may request statements issued by the clients , public or private, as supporting documents for each contract reference. These documents should be ready to be provided within five working days of the Contracting Authority 's request. The contact persons for the customers indicated in the contract reference form may be contacted in the context of this call for tenders to crosscheck the validity of the information provided as evidence.\n\n## LOT 2\n\n## Criterion T1\n\nCapacity to deliver on projects similar in scope and complexity as required under this Framework Contract\n\n## Minimum level of capacity\n\n- 1. The tenderers must have worked on at least 10 contracts 17 with at least 3 different clients over the last 4 years (i.e. 23/11/2016 -08/01/2021 ).\n- 2. The 10 contract references must cover the provision of Grow and Run services in the following domains:\n- -Information systems development -minimum 5 references;\n- -Information systems takeover -minimum 2 references;\n- -Information systems operations (including, support, maintenance and application management) -minimum 3 reference.\n- 3. Minimum volumes for each referenced contract for Information systems development:\n\n17 Specific contracts under a framework contract, direct contracts (i.e. not under a framework contract) or subcontracts.\n\n23", + "recall": 0.95, + "true_md": "## LOT 2\n\n17 Specific contracts under a framework contract, direct contracts (i.e. not under a framework contract) or sub- contracts.\n\n23" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9752926282249308, + "doc_id": "ef64bd0ccf1913ddee4f135b40df327b44bb6c74071e9f3155c770d9fd32111d", + "edit_distance": 0.1678832116788321, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9909277333761642, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "pour fournir ou achever les services, sauf si les dommages sont le résultat d'une résiliation conformément à l'article II.18.1, point j), k) ou l), ou à l'article II.18.2. Le pouvoir adjudicateur peut exiger l'indemnisation de ces dommages.\n\nLe contractant n'a pas droit à une indemnisation des pertes résultant de la résiliation du CC ou d'un bon de commande , y compris la perte de bénéfices attendus, à moins que cette perte n'ait été causée par la situation visée à l'article II.18.2.\n\nLe contractant doit prendre toutes mesures nécessaires pour réduire les coûts au minimum, pour éviter les dommages et pour annuler ou réduire ses engagements.\n\nLe contractant dispose d'un délai de 60 jours à compter de la date de résiliation pour présenter les rapports, éléments livrables ou résultats ainsi que les factures requis pour les services fournis avant la date de résiliation.\n\nEn cas d'offre conjointe, le pouvoir adjudicateur peut résilier le CC ou un bon de commande conclu avec chaque membre du groupement séparément en vertu de l'article II.18.1, points d), e), g), m) et n) dans les conditions fixées à l'article II.11.2.\n\n## II.19 FACTURES, TAXE SUR LA VALEUR AJOUTÉE ET FACTURATION ÉLETRONIQUE\n\n## II.19.1. Factures et taxe sur la valeur ajoutée\n\nSur les factures doivent figurer l'identité du contractant (ou du chef de file dans le cas d'une offre conjointe), le montant et la date, ainsi que la référence du CC et celle du bon de commande .\n\nLes factures doivent indiquer le lieu d'assujettissement à la taxe sur la valeur ajoutée (TVA) du contractant (ou chef de file dans le cas d'une offre conjointe) et doivent mentionner séparément les montants hors TVA et les montants TVA comprise.\n\nLe pouvoir adjudicateur est exonéré de tous droits et taxes, notamment de la TVA, en application des dispositions des articles 3 et 4 du protocole nº 7 sur les privilèges et immunités de l'Union européenne figurant dans le traité sur le fonctionnement de l'Union européenne.\n\nLe contractant (ou chef de file dans le cas d'une offre conjointe) doit effectuer les démarches nécessaires auprès des autorités compétentes afin de s'assurer de l'exemption des droits et taxes, notamment de la TVA, pour les fournitures et services nécessaires à l' exécution du CC .\n\n## II.19.2. Facturation électronique\n\nLe contractant (ou chef de file dans le cas d'une offre conjointe) présente des factures sous format électronique si les conditions concernant la signature électronique énoncées par la directive 2006/112/CE sur la TVA sont satisfaites, à savoir si une signature électronique qualifiée ou l'échange de données informatisé sont utilisés.\n\nLa réception des factures au format standard (pdf) ou par courrier électronique n'est pas acceptée.\n\n## II.20 PAIEMENTS ET GARANTIES\n\n## II.20.1 Date du paiement\n\nLes paiements sont réputés effectués à la date de débit du compte du pouvoir adjudicateur.\n\n## II.20.2 Monnaie\n\nLes paiements sont exécutés en euros, sauf si l'article I.7 prévoit une autre monnaie.\n\n29\n\nFR", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "pour fournir ou achever les services, sauf si les dommages sont le résultat d'une résiliation conformément à l'article II.18.1, point j), k) ou l), ou à l'article II.18.2. Le pouvoir adjudicateur peut exiger l'indemnisation de ces dommages.\n\nLe contractant n'a pas droit à une indemnisation des pertes résultant de la résiliation du CC ou d'un bon de commande , y compris la perte de bénéfices attendus, à moins que cette perte n'ait été causée par la situation visée à l'article II.18.2. \n\nLe contractant doit prendre toutes mesures nécessaires pour réduire les coûts au minimum, pour éviter les dommages et pour annuler ou réduire ses engagements. \n\nLe contractant dispose d'un délai de 60 jours à compter de la date de résiliation pour présenter les rapports, éléments livrables ou résultats ainsi que les factures requis pour les services fournis avant la date de résiliation. \n\nEn cas d'offre conjointe, le pouvoir adjudicateur peut résilier le CC ou un bon de commande conclu avec chaque membre du groupement séparément en vertu de l'article II.18.1, points d), e), g), m) et n) dans les conditions fixées à l'article II.11.2. \n\nSur les factures doivent figurer l'identité du contractant (ou du chef de file dans le cas d'une offre conjointe), le montant et la date, ainsi que la référence du CC et celle du bon de commande . \n\nLes factures doivent indiquer le lieu d'assujettissement à la taxe sur la valeur ajoutée (TVA) du contractant (ou chef de file dans le cas d'une offre conjointe) et doivent mentionner séparément les montants hors TVA et les montants TVA comprise. \n\nLe pouvoir adjudicateur est exonéré de tous droits et taxes, notamment de la TVA, en application des dispositions des articles 3 et 4 du protocole nº 7 sur les privilèges et immunités de l'Union européenne figurant dans le traité sur le fonctionnement de l'Union européenne. \n\nLe contractant (ou chef de file dans le cas d'une offre conjointe) doit effectuer les démarches nécessaires auprès des autorités compétentes afin de s'assurer de l'exemption des droits et taxes, notamment de la TVA, pour les fournitures et services nécessaires à l' exécution du CC . \n\nLe contractant (ou chef de file dans le cas d'une offre conjointe) présente des factures sous format électronique si les conditions concernant la signature électronique énoncées par la directive 2006/112/CE sur la TVA sont satisfaites, à savoir si une signature électronique qualifiée ou l'échange de données informatisé sont utilisés. \n\nLa réception des factures au format standard (pdf) ou par courrier électronique n'est pas acceptée. \n\nLes paiements sont réputés effectués à la date de débit du compte du pouvoir adjudicateur. \n\nLes paiements sont exécutés en euros, sauf si l'article I.7 prévoit une autre monnaie. \n\n## II.20.2 Monnaie\n\n## II.20.1 Date du paiement\n\n## II.20 PAIEMENTS ET GARANTIES\n\n## II.19.2. Facturation électronique\n\n## II.19.1. Factures et taxe sur la valeur ajoutée\n\n## II.19 FACTURES, TAXE SUR LA VALEUR AJOUTÉE ET FACTURATION ÉLETRONIQUE\n\n29 FR" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8725129388059689, + "doc_id": "8a79e12d8274df039d4391ed259695e2c03a3b8b76001df093191470df75e3eb", + "edit_distance": 0.05555555555555555, + "f1_score": 0.9411764705882353, + "meteor": 0.943675509419454, + "precision": 0.9411764705882353, + "pred_md": "Vaccine Effectiveness, Burden and Impact Studies (VEBIS) of COVID-19 and Influenza - Tender Specifications ECDC/2021/12924", + "recall": 0.9411764705882353, + "true_md": "Vaccine Effectiveness, Burden and Impact Studies (VEBIS) of COVID-19 and Influenza – Tender Specifications ECDC/2021/12924" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9866297588900815, + "doc_id": "a4558e16f9b12f99b1016edbba3f251c0057369d8c0376652ef1aa33c5f3f21c", + "edit_distance": 0.03497942386831276, + "f1_score": 0.9936034115138592, + "meteor": 0.9964667494648376, + "precision": 0.9914893617021276, + "pred_md": "- 6.3. Les tableaux doivent toujours rester fermés à clé. Les raccordements ne peuvent se faire qu'avec des prises adaptées. Toutes les liaisons (prises, interrupteurs, câbles) doivent être adaptées à une utilisation en milieu humide (minimum IP44).\n- 6.4. Toute entreprise doit s'assurer de la nature du système de mise à la terre qui est utilisé pour l'installation électrique. En fonction du système utilisé, il convient de prendre les mesures nécessaires de protection contre les contacts indirects.\n- 6.5. Les câbles et les rallonges électriques doivent toujours être suspendus et/ou protégés contre une éventuelle dégradation et doivent être adaptés en fonction de la puissance. L'isolation des câbles et rallonges doit être en parfait état.\n- 6.6. Chaque entreprise assure elle-même l'éclairage de ses postes de travail. Cet éclairage doit être mis en place conformément à la législation en vigueur. Il doit être suffisant pour écarter d'éventuels risques. En concertation avec le CSS ou le gestionnaire de projet du CUE, un éclairage de sécurité et de secours est mis en place.\n- 6.7. Seules les personnes qui possèdent une attestation BA4/BA5 peuvent intervenir au niveau des tableaux électriques. Une preuve de cette attestation pour chaque personne doit être fournie au UP.\n- 6.8. Tout travail sur une installation électrique doit se faire hors tension, le cas échéant, toutes les mesures préventives nécessaires doivent être prises.\n\n## 7. OUTILLAGE ET ÉQUIPEMENT\n\n- 7.1 Seul le matériel électrique conforme à la législation du pays hôte (RGPT - Code - RGIE) Règlement Général pour la Protection au Travail, Code sur le Bien-être au travail ainsi qu'au Règlement Général sur les Installations Électriques peut être raccordé aux tableaux prévus à cet effet.\n- 7.2 Toutes les machines sont pourvues d'un marquage CE.\n- 7.3 Chaque entreprise est tenue de marquer ses outils de manière qu'ils soient aisément identifiables, afin d'éviter toute confusion et de décourager le vol.\n- 7.4 On choisira les outils les plus adaptés au travail à effectuer. Les outils doivent être bien entretenus et régulièrement approuvés par une personne compétente de manière à ce que leur utilisation n'entraîne pas de risques pour la sécurité et la santé. Chaque entreprise fournit les modes d'emploi nécessaires, de même que les instructions en matière de sécurité et de santé. Ces documents doivent être produits à la demande du CSS, du gestionnaire de projet du CUE ou du conseiller en prévention du CUE.\n\n## 7.5 Engins de levage\n\n- 7.5.1. Tous les engins et accessoires de levage, de même que les excavatrices utilisées pour lever des charges, introduits sur le chantier doivent être pourvus d'un marquage CE et d'une\n\n75\n\nANNEX VII\n\nFR", + "recall": 0.9957264957264957, + "true_md": "- 6.3. Les tableaux doivent toujours rester fermés à clé. Les raccordements ne peuvent se faire qu'avec des prises adaptées. Toutes les liaisons (prises, interrupteurs, câbles) doivent être adaptées à une utilisation en milieu humide (minimum IP44). \n\n- 6.4. Toute entreprise doit s'assurer de la nature du système de mise à la terre qui est utilisé pour l'installation électrique. En fonction du système utilisé, il convient de prendre les mesures nécessaires de protection contre les contacts indirects. \n\n- 6.5. Les câbles et les rallonges électriques doivent toujours être suspendus et/ou protégés contre une éventuelle dégradation et doivent être adaptés en fonction de la puissance. L'isolation des câbles et rallonges doit être en parfait état. \n\n- 6.6. Chaque entreprise assure elle-même l'éclairage de ses postes de travail. Cet éclairage doit être mis en place conformément à la législation en vigueur. Il doit être suffisant pour écarter d'éventuels risques. En concertation avec le CSS ou le gestionnaire de projet du CUE, un éclairage de sécurité et de secours est mis en place. \n\n- 6.7. Seules les personnes qui possèdent une attestation BA4/BA5 peuvent intervenir au niveau des tableaux électriques. Une preuve de cette attestation pour chaque personne doit être fournie au UP. \n\n- 6.8. Tout travail sur une installation électrique doit se faire hors tension, le cas échéant, toutes les mesures préventives nécessaires doivent être prises.\n\n- 7.1 Seul le matériel électrique conforme à la législation du pays hôte (RGPT - Code - RGIE) Règlement Général pour la Protection au Travail, Code sur le Bien-être au travail ainsi qu'au Règlement Général sur les Installations Électriques peut être raccordé aux tableaux prévus à cet effet. \n\n- 7.2 Toutes les machines sont pourvues d'un marquage CE. \n\n- 7.3 Chaque entreprise est tenue de marquer ses outils de manière qu'ils soient aisément identifiables, afin d'éviter toute confusion et de décourager le vol. \n\n- 7.4 On choisira les outils les plus adaptés au travail à effectuer. Les outils doivent être bien entretenus et régulièrement approuvés par une personne compétente de manière à ce que leur utilisation n'entraîne pas de risques pour la sécurité et la santé. Chaque entreprise fournit les modes d'emploi nécessaires, de même que les instructions en matière de sécurité et de santé. Ces documents doivent être produits à la demande du CSS, du gestionnaire de projet du CUE ou du conseiller en prévention du CUE. \n\n## 7.5 Engins de levage\n\n## 7. OUTILLAGE ET ÉQUIPEMENT\n\n- 7.5.1.Tous les engins et accessoires de levage, de même que les excavatrices utilisées pour lever des charges, introduits sur le chantier doivent être pourvus d'un marquage CE et d'une \n\nANNEX VII \n\n75 FR" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.059105488647678624, + "doc_id": "09c8b37c129442315f20049cfb99c1e0e81caa9da172286f570c966571ed9c47", + "edit_distance": 0.8709677419354839, + "f1_score": 0.5, + "meteor": 0.6112803158488439, + "precision": 0.3333333333333333, + "pred_md": "Contract number: [ complete ]\n\nContract conditions of December 2015\n\n## SIGNATURES\n\nFor the contractor,\n\n[ Company name/forename/surname/position ]\n\nSignature[s]: \\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\n\nFor the contracting authority,\n\nStephan Lechner, Director\n\nSignatures:\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\n\nDone at [ place ], [ date ]\n\nDone at Luxembourg, [ date ]\n\nIn duplicate in English.\n\n10", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "10 \n\nContract conditions of December 2015 \n\nContract number: [ complete ] \n\n## SIGNATURES" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7413356225958522, + "doc_id": "c169d0e4372f5c7ebe8f787ac2e1f2c4bb3fd7953bf75179bbc5f2d830cc1a29", + "edit_distance": 0.5706018518518519, + "f1_score": 0.9895178197064989, + "meteor": 0.6664977000566188, + "precision": 0.9915966386554622, + "pred_md": "EC - FWC services Dec 2018\n\nContract no: [complete]\n\n## II.13.2. Licensing rights on pre-existing materials\n\nUnless provided otherwise in the special conditions, the Union does not acquire ownership of preexisting rights under this FWC.\n\nThe contractor licenses the pre-existing rights on a royalty-free, non-exclusive and irrevocable basis to the Union, which may use the pre-existing materials for all the modes of exploitation set out in this FWC or in specific contracts . Unless otherwise agreed, the licence is non-transferable and cannot be sublicensed, except as provided hereafter:\n\n- a) the pre-existing rights can be sub-licensed by the contracting authority to persons and entities working for it or cooperating with it, including contractors and subcontractors, whether legal or natural persons, but only for the purpose of their mission for the Union;\n- b) if the result is a \"document\" such as a report or a study, and it is meant to be published, the existence of pre-existing materials in the result may not prevent the publication of the document, its translation or its \"reuse\", it being understood however that the \"reuse\" may only be made of the result as a whole and not of the pre-existing materials taken separately from the result ; for the sake of this provision, \"reuse\" and \"document\" have the meaning given by the Commission Decision of 12 December 2011 on the reuse of Commission documents (2011/833/EU).\n\nAll pre-existing rights are licensed to the Union from the moment the results are delivered and approved by the contracting authority.\n\nThe licensing of pre-existing rights to the Union under this FWC covers all territories worldwide and is valid for the duration of intellectual property rights protection.\n\nThe payment of the price as set out in the specific contracts is deemed to also include any fees payable to the contractor in relation to the licensing of pre-existing rights to the Union, including for all forms of exploitation and of use of the results .\n\nWhere implementation of the FWC requires that the contractor uses pre-existing materials belonging to the contracting authority, the contracting authority may request that the contractor signs an adequate licence agreement. Such use by the contractor will not entail any transfer of rights to the contractor and is limited to the needs of this FWC.\n\n## II.13.3. Exclusive rights\n\nThe Union acquires the following exclusive rights:\n\n- a) reproduction: the right to authorise or prohibit direct or indirect, temporary or permanent reproduction of the results by any means (mechanical, digital or other) and in any form, in whole or in part;\n- b) communication to the public: the exclusive right to authorise or prohibit any display, performance or communication to the public, by wire or wireless means, including the making available to the public of the results in such a way that members of the public may access them from a place and at a time individually chosen by them; this also includes the communication on Internet and broadcasting by cable or by satellite;\n- c) distribution: the exclusive right to authorise or prohibit any form of distribution of results or copies of the results to the public, by sale or otherwise;\n- d) rental: the exclusive right to authorise or prohibit rental or lending of the results or of copies of the results ;\n- e) adaptation: the exclusive right to authorise or prohibit any modification of the results ;\n- f) translation: the exclusive right to authorise or prohibit any translation, adaptation, arrangement, creation of derivative works based on the results , and any other alteration of the results , subject to the respect of moral rights of authors, where applicable;\n\n22", + "recall": 0.9874476987447699, + "true_md": "Contract no: [complete] \n\nEC - FWC services Dec 2018 \n\n## II.13.2. Licensing rights on pre-existing materials\n\nUnless provided otherwise in the special conditions, the Union does not acquire ownership of pre- existing rights under this FWC.\n\nThe contractor licenses the pre-existing rights on a royalty-free, non-exclusive and irrevocable basis to the Union, which may use the pre-existing materials for all the modes of exploitation set out in this FWC or in specific contracts . Unless otherwise agreed, the licence is non-transferable and cannot be sub- licensed, except as provided hereafter: \n\nAll pre-existing rights are licensed to the Union from the moment the results are delivered and approved by the contracting authority.\n\nThe licensing of pre-existing rights to the Union under this FWC covers all territories worldwide and is valid for the duration of intellectual property rights protection. \n\nThe payment of the price as set out in the specific contracts is deemed to also include any fees payable to the contractor in relation to the licensing of pre-existing rights to the Union, including for all forms of exploitation and of use of the results . \n\nWhere implementation of the FWC requires that the contractor uses pre-existing materials belonging to the contracting authority, the contracting authority may request that the contractor signs an adequate licence agreement. Such use by the contractor will not entail any transfer of rights to the contractor and is limited to the needs of this FWC. \n\nThe Union acquires the following exclusive rights:\n\n- a) the pre-existing rights can be sub-licensed by the contracting authority to persons and entities working for it or cooperating with it, including contractors and subcontractors, whether legal or natural persons, but only for the purpose of their mission for the Union; b) if the result is a \"document\" such as a report or a study, and it is meant to be published, the \n\n- natural persons, but only for the purpose of their mission for the Union; b) if the result is a \"document\" such as a report or a study, and it is meant to be published, the existence of pre-existing materials in the result may not prevent the publication of the document, its translation or its \"reuse\", it being understood however that the \"reuse\" may only be made of the result as a whole and not of the pre-existing materials taken separately from the result ; for the sake of this provision, \"reuse\" and \"document\" have the meaning given by the Commission Decision of 12 December 2011 on the reuse of Commission documents (2011/833/EU). \n\n- a) reproduction: the right to authorise or prohibit direct or indirect, temporary or permanent reproduction of the results by any means (mechanical, digital or other) and in any form, in whole or in part; b) communication to the public: the exclusive right to authorise or prohibit any display, performance \n\n- or in part; b) communication to the public: the exclusive right to authorise or prohibit any display, performance or communication to the public, by wire or wireless means, including the making available to the public of the results in such a way that members of the public may access them from a place and at a time individually chosen by them; this also includes the communication on Internet and broadcasting by cable or by satellite; c) distribution: the exclusive right to authorise or prohibit any form of distribution of results or copies \n\n- broadcasting by cable or by satellite; c) distribution: the exclusive right to authorise or prohibit any form of distribution of results or copies of the results to the public, by sale or otherwise; d) rental: the exclusive right to authorise or prohibit rental or lending of the results or of copies of \n\n- of the results to the public, by sale or otherwise; d) rental: the exclusive right to authorise or prohibit rental or lending of the results or of copies of the results ; e) adaptation: the exclusive right to authorise or prohibit any modification of the results ;\n\n- the results ; e) adaptation: the exclusive right to authorise or prohibit any modification of the results ; f) translation: the exclusive right to authorise or prohibit any translation, adaptation, arrangement, \n\n- e) adaptation: the exclusive right to authorise or prohibit any modification of the results ; f) translation: the exclusive right to authorise or prohibit any translation, adaptation, arrangement, creation of derivative works based on the results , and any other alteration of the results , subject to the respect of moral rights of authors, where applicable; \n\n22\n\n## II.13.3. Exclusive rights" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7679855101597952, + "doc_id": "e6ea3087306101df837501d4abf3810276aa3de7e29f5b1c1fdd9583bd77c141", + "edit_distance": 0.325, + "f1_score": 0.9503239740820735, + "meteor": 0.7720095718352245, + "precision": 0.9565217391304348, + "pred_md": "General Administrative and Submission Clauses\n\nThe provisions set out hereunder shall fully apply to one-step procedures such as (i) open and (ii) negotiated procedures without publication (above and below the publication thresholds). For twostep procedures such as (i) restricted, (ii) competitive procedure with negotiation, (iii) competitive dialogue necessary deviations to these 'General administrative and submission clauses' will be stated in the 'Terms of Reference'.\n\n## 1. Foreword\n\n'Public procurement' means the purchasing of works, supplies and services by public bodies at either national or Union level.\n\nEU public procurement plays an important part in the single market and is governed by rules intended to remove barriers and open up markets in a non-discriminatory and competitive way, by applying the following principles: (i) transparency, (ii) proportionality (iii) equal treatment, (iv) nondiscrimination.\n\nThe objective of public procurement is to increase the choice of potential contractors to public bodies, thereby allowing the contracting authority to obtain the most economically advantageous tender, while at the same time developing market opportunities for companies.\n\nEven though EU public procurement law does not directly apply to the EIB, its Management Committee decided in July 2004 that the EIB, when procuring services, supplies or works for internal purposes, should follow the provisions of EU law on public procurement (namely, at that time, Procurement Directive 2004/18/EC) insofar as they are compatible with the Bank's functioning and the tasks and activities assigned to it by the EU Treaties.\n\nThis commitment to EU public procurement law was renewed by the EIB when Directive 2014/24/EU entered into effect.\n\nAt institutional level the provisions that govern EIB's procurement for corporate purposes are laid down in the Corporate and Technical Assistance Procurement Guide (available at http://www.eib.org/infocentre/publications/all/guide-for-procurement-of-services-supplies-andworks-by-the-eib-for-its-own-account.htm).\n\n## 2. Procurement Documents\n\nThe documents applicable to this procedure (the 'Procurement Documents') shall comprise the following in order of priority:\n\n- (i) Terms of Reference, with its appendices;\n- (ii) Model Contract, with its appendices;\n- (iii) Contract Notice or Invitation Letter;\n- (iv) Administrative forms for EIB Tenders; and\n- (v) General Administrative and Submission Clauses.\n\n## 3. Communication between EIB and Tenderers\n\nDuring a procurement procedure, communications between EIB and each economic operator that has submitted a tender (a 'Tenderer') may only take place in exceptional circumstances, under the following conditions:\n\nLast updated: June 2020\n\nPage 4 of 21", + "recall": 0.944206008583691, + "true_md": "General Administrative and Submission Clauses\n\nThe provisions set out hereunder shall fully apply to one-step procedures such as (i) open and (ii) negotiated procedures without publication (above and below the publication thresholds). For two- step procedures such as (i) restricted, (ii) competitive procedure with negotiation, (iii) competitive dialogue necessary deviations to these ‘General administrative and submission clauses’ will be stated in the ‘Terms of Reference’.\n\n“Public procurement” means the purchasing of works, supplies and services by public bodies at either national or Union level.\n\nEU public procurement plays an important part in the single market and is governed by rules intended to remove barriers and open up markets in a non-discriminatory and competitive way, by applying the following principles: (i) transparency, (ii) proportionality (iii) equal treatment, (iv) non- discrimination.\n\nThe objective of public procurement is to increase the choice of potential contractors to public bodies, thereby allowing the contracting authority to obtain the most economically advantageous tender, while at the same time developing market opportunities for companies.\n\nEven though EU public procurement law does not directly apply to the EIB, its Management Committee decided in July 2004 that the EIB, when procuring services, supplies or works for internal purposes, should follow the provisions of EU law on public procurement (namely, at that time, Procurement Directive 2004/18/EC) insofar as they are compatible with the Bank’s functioning and the tasks and activities assigned to it by the EU Treaties.\n\nThis commitment to EU public procurement law was renewed by the EIB when Directive 2014/24/EU entered into effect.\n\nAt institutional level the provisions that govern EIB’s procurement for corporate purposes are laid down in the Corporate and Technical Assistance Procurement Guide (available at http://www.eib.org/infocentre/publications/all/guide-for-procurement-of-services-supplies-and- works-by-the-eib-for-its-own-account.htm).\n\nThe documents applicable to this procedure (the “Procurement Documents”) shall comprise the following in order of priority: \n\nDuring a procurement procedure, communications between EIB and each economic operator that has submitted a tender (a “Tenderer”) may only take place in exceptional circumstances, under the following conditions: \n\n## 3. Communication between EIB and Tenderers\n\n## 2. Procurement Documents\n\n## 1. Foreword\n\n- (iv) Administrative forms for EIB Tenders; and (v) General Administrative and Submission Clauses. \n\n- (iii) Contract Notice or Invitation Letter; (iv) Administrative forms for EIB Tenders; and (v) General Administrative and Submission Clauses. \n\n- (ii) Model Contract, with its appendices; (iii) Contract Notice or Invitation Letter; (iv) Administrative forms for EIB Tenders; and \n\n- (i) Terms of Reference, with its appendices; (ii) Model Contract, with its appendices; (iii) Contract Notice or Invitation Letter; \n\n- (i) Terms of Reference, with its appendices; (ii) Model Contract, with its appendices; \n\nLast updated: June 2020\n\nPage 4 of 21" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8443729209568729, + "doc_id": "876bcc3aaffa05fa6e3bfb39935ec92955dbfa280bfa7b4ad52bfd9f3b6ce452", + "edit_distance": 0.518348623853211, + "f1_score": 0.9677419354838711, + "meteor": 0.8827037758938634, + "precision": 0.9798994974874372, + "pred_md": "contracts are financed with funds that belong to a Multiannual Financial Framework (MFF) of ECHA subsequent to the MFF 2014-2020.\n\nThe rules on access to procurement do not apply to subcontractors. Subcontracting may not be used with the intent to circumvent the rules on access to procurement.\n\nTo enable the Contracting Authority to verify the access, each tenderer must indicate its country of establishment (and in case of joint tender -the country of establishment of each group member) and must present the supporting evidence indicated below. The same document(s) could be used to prove country/-ies of establishment and the delegation(s) of the authorisation to sign as described in section 4.3 .\n\n## Tenderer identification documentation\n\nTo identify themselves tenderers must fill in and submit in their tender the three (3) following forms:\n\n- 1. Tenderer's Administrative Data form 6 , to be completed with the names of all the economic operators involved in the tender clearly indicating the role of each one.\n\n## 2. Legal Entity Form 7\n\nAll tenderers must provide their legal entity form signed by their legal representative. The above form must be accompanied by the evidence as indicated in the form\n\n- · In case of a joint tender all economic operators shall provide the legal entity form and related evidence;\n- · Subcontractors are only obliged to provide the legal entity form without the evidence.\n\n## 3. Bank Account Form 8\n\nThe Bank Account form shall be duly filled in and signed by an authorised representative of the tenderer, or Group leader, and their banker.\n\n## 2.3 Registration in the Participant Register: why register?\n\nAny economic operator willing to submit a tender for this call for tenders must be registered in the Participant Register - an online register of organizations and natural persons participating in European Commission's calls for tenders or proposals (participants).\n\nOn registering each participant obtains a Participant Identification Code (PIC, 9-digit number) which acts as its unique identifier in the Participant Register. A participant needs to register only once -the information provided can be further updated or re-used by the participant in other European Chemicals Agency's calls for tenders.\n\n6 Annex 13 'Tenderer' s Administrative Data Form'\n\n7 https://ec.europa.eu/info/publications/legal-entities\\_en\n\n8 https://ec.europa.eu/info/publications/financial-identification\\_en\n\n12", + "recall": 0.9558823529411765, + "true_md": "contracts are financed with funds that belong to a Multiannual Financial Framework (MFF) of ECHA subsequent to the MFF 2014-2020.\n\nThe rules on access to procurement do not apply to subcontractors. Subcontracting may not be used with the intent to circumvent the rules on access to procurement. \n\nTo enable the Contracting Authority to verify the access, each tenderer must indicate its country of establishment (and in case of joint tender – the country of establishment of each group member) and must present the supporting evidence indicated below. The same document(s) could be used to prove country/-ies of establishment and the delegation(s) of the authorisation to sign as described in section 4.3 .\n\nTo identify themselves tenderers must fill in and submit in their tender the three (3) following forms:\n\nAll tenderers must provide their legal entity form signed by their legal representative. The above form must be accompanied by the evidence as indicated in the form\n\nThe Bank Account form shall be duly filled in and signed by an authorised representative of the tenderer, or Group leader, and their banker. \n\nAny economic operator willing to submit a tender for this call for tenders must be registered in the Participant Register - an online register of organizations and natural persons participating in European Commission's calls for tenders or proposals (participants).\n\nOn registering each participant obtains a Participant Identification Code (PIC, 9-digit number) which acts as its unique identifier in the Participant Register. A participant needs to register only once – the information provided can be further updated or re-used by the participant in other European Chemicals Agency's calls for tenders.\n\n6 Annex 13 “Tenderer’ s Administrative Data Form”\n\n7 https://ec.europa.eu/info/publications/legal-entities\\_en 8 https://ec.europa.eu/info/publications/financial-identification\\_en\n\nhttps://ec.europa.eu/info/publications/legal-entities\\_en 8 https://ec.europa.eu/info/publications/financial-identification\\_en\n\n12\n\n## 2.3 Registration in the Participant Register: why register?\n\n## 2. Legal Entity Form 7\n\n- • In case of a joint tender all economic operators shall provide the legal entity form and related evidence;\n\n- • Subcontractors are only obliged to provide the legal entity form without the evidence.\n\n## 3. Bank Account Form $^{8}$\n\n## Tenderer identification documentation\n\n1. Tenderer’s Administrative Data form 6 , to be completed with the names of all the economic operators involved in the tender clearly indicating the role of each one." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9488622152345755, + "doc_id": "55d12dcf64769993586f9155561cec9418e6b1712190cc697d5e251c1e15eefe", + "edit_distance": 0.13390928725701945, + "f1_score": 0.9832134292565947, + "meteor": 0.9613821765040431, + "precision": 0.9951456310679612, + "pred_md": "- - announcement of the tenders received: the names of the tenderers (all members in the case of a joint tender) will be announced;\n- - ( only if applicable to this procurement procedure) - announcement of the total price of each tender (in case of lots the total price of each tender submitted for the lot(s) for which the award method is lowest price).\n\nTenderers not present at the opening session may send an information request to procurement@enisa.europa.eu if they wish to be provided with the information announced during the public opening.\n\nOnce the contracting authority has opened the tenders, they shall become its property and will be treated confidentially.\n\n## 3.3 Evaluation phase (after the opening of tenders)\n\nExcept in duly justified cases, tenderers who have failed to submit evidence or to make statements as required in the procurement documents, shall be contacted by the contracting authority to provide the missing information or clarify supporting documents.\n\nThe contracting authority may correct obvious clerical errors in the tender after confirmation of the correction by the tenderer. Such information, clarification or confirmation shall not substantially change the tender.\n\n## 3.4 Award phase\n\nTenderers will be notified of the outcome of this procurement procedure by e-mail. The notification will be sent to the e-mail address provided in the e-Submission application for the tenderer (group leader in case of a joint tender) under the section Contact Info . The same e-mail address will be used by the contracting authority for all other communications with the tenderer. It is the tenderer's responsibility to provide a valid e-mail address and to check it regularly.\n\n## 4. Data protection.\n\nIf processing a reply to the invitation to tender involves the recording and processing of personal data (such as name, address and CV), such data will be processed pursuant to Regulation (EU) 2018/1725 8 of 23 October 2018 on the protection of natural persons with regard to the processing of personal data by the Union institutions, bodies, offices and agencies and on the free movement of such data, and repealing Regulation (EC) No 45/2001 and Decision No 1247/2002/EC. Unless indicated otherwise, any personal data will be processed solely for evaluation purposes under the call for tender by the Executive Director. Details concerning the processing of personal data are available in the privacy statement at:\n\nhttp://www.enisa.europa.eu/procurement/repository-of-files/privacy-statement-enisa-procurementprocedures\n\n8 OJ L 295, 21.11.2018, p. 39\n\nPage 4 of 5", + "recall": 0.9715639810426541, + "true_md": "- announcement of the tenders received: the names of the tenderers (all members in the case of a joint tender) will be announced; \n\n- ( only if applicable to this procurement procedure) - announcement of the total price of each tender (in case of lots the total price of each tender submitted for the lot(s) for which the award method is lowest price).\n\nTenderers not present at the opening session may send an information request to procurement@enisa.europa.eu if they wish to be provided with the information announced during the public opening. \n\nOnce the contracting authority has opened the tenders, they shall become its property and will be treated confidentially. \n\nExcept in duly justified cases, tenderers who have failed to submit evidence or to make statements as required in the procurement documents, shall be contacted by the contracting authority to provide the missing information or clarify supporting documents.\n\nThe contracting authority may correct obvious clerical errors in the tender after confirmation of the correction by the tenderer. Such information, clarification or confirmation shall not substantially change the tender. \n\nTenderers will be notified of the outcome of this procurement procedure by e-mail. The notification will be sent to the e-mail address provided in the e-Submission application for the tenderer (group leader in case of a joint tender) under the section Contact Info . The same e-mail address will be used by the contracting authority for all other communications with the tenderer. It is the tenderer's responsibility to provide a valid e-mail address and to check it regularly. \n\nIf processing a reply to the invitation to tender involves the recording and processing of personal data (such as name, address and CV), such data will be processed pursuant to Regulation (EU) 2018/1725$^{8}$ of 23 October 2018 on the protection of natural persons with regard to the processing of personal data by the Union institutions, bodies, offices and agencies and on the free movement of such data, and repealing Regulation (EC) No 45/2001 and Decision No 1247/2002/EC. Unless indicated otherwise, any personal data will be processed solely for evaluation purposes under the call for tender by the Executive Director. Details concerning the processing of personal data are available in the privacy statement at: \n\nhttp://www.enisa.europa.eu/procurement/repository-of-files/privacy-statement-enisa-procurement- procedures \n\n$^{8}$ OJ L 295, 21.11.2018, p. 39\n\nPage 4 of 5\n\n## 4. Data protection.\n\n## 3.4 Award phase\n\n## 3.3 Evaluation phase (after the opening of tenders)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9321194903909676, + "doc_id": "c31252d817690a0f167680eac29d913e6fa780fffc569647dc370142db172def", + "edit_distance": 0.15010141987829614, + "f1_score": 0.9923664122137404, + "meteor": 0.9796422206533422, + "precision": 0.9948979591836735, + "pred_md": "Contract number: [ complete ]\n\nContract conditions of December 2015\n\n- (b) it intends to terminate the contract under Article II.17.1(f) or (j).\n\nThe contractor is not entitled to compensation for suspension of any part of the contract.\n\n## II.17. TERMINATION OF THE CONTRACT\n\n## II.17.1. Grounds for termination by the contracting authority\n\nThe contracting authority may terminate the contract in the following circumstances:\n\n- (a) if provision of the supplies under the contract has not actually started within 15 days of the scheduled date and the contracting authority considers the new date proposed, if any, unacceptable, taking into account Article II.11.2;\n- (b) if the contractor is unable, through its own fault, to obtain any permit or licence required for performance of the contract ;\n- (c) if the contractor does not perform the contract in accordance with the tender specifications or is in breach of another substantial contractual obligation.\n- (d) if the contractor or any person that assumes unlimited liability for the debts of the contractor is in one of the situations provided for in points (a) and (b) of Article 106(1) of the Financial Regulation ;\n- (e) if the contractor or any related person is subject to any of the situations provided for in points (c) to (f) of Article 106(1) or to Article 106(2) of the Financial Regulation.\n- (f) if the procedure for awarding the contract or the performance of the contract prove to have been subject to substantial errors, irregularities or fraud ;\n- (g) if the contractor does not comply with applicable obligations under environmental, social and labour law established by Union and Community law, national law, collective agreements or by the international environmental, social and labour law provisions listed in Annex X to Directive 2014/24/EU;\n- (h) if the contractor is in a situation that could constitute a conflict of interest or a professional conflicting interest as referred to in Article II.7;\n- (i) if a change to the contractor's legal, financial, technical, organisational or ownership situation is likely to substantially affect the performance of the contract or substantially modify the conditions under which the contract was initially awarded;\n- (j) in the event of force majeure , where either resuming implementation is impossible or the necessary ensuing amendments to the contract would mean that the tender specifications are no longer fulfilled or result in unequal treatment of tenderers or contractors;\n\n## II.17.2. Grounds for termination by the contractor\n\nThe contractor may terminate the contract if:\n\n25", + "recall": 0.9898477157360406, + "true_md": "Contract conditions of December 2015 \n\nContract number: [ complete ] \n\n## II.17. TERMINATION OF THE CONTRACT\n\n## II.17.1. Grounds for termination by the contracting authority\n\n## II.17.2. Grounds for termination by the contractor\n\n- (b) it intends to terminate the contract under Article II.17.1(f) or (j). \n\nThe contractor is not entitled to compensation for suspension of any part of the contract. \n\nThe contracting authority may terminate the contract in the following circumstances: \n\n(a) if provision of the supplies under the contract has not actually started within 15 days of the scheduled date and the contracting authority considers the new date proposed, if any, unacceptable, taking into account Article II.11.2; \n\n(b) if the contractor is unable, through its own fault, to obtain any permit or licence required for performance of the contract ; \n\n(c) if the contractor does not perform the contract in accordance with the tender specifications or is in breach of another substantial contractual obligation.\n\n(d) if the contractor or any person that assumes unlimited liability for the debts of the contractor is in one of the situations provided for in points (a) and (b) of Article 106(1) of the Financial Regulation ; \n\n(e) if the contractor or any related person is subject to any of the situations provided for in points (c) to (f) of Article 106(1) or to Article 106(2) of the Financial Regulation. \n\n(f) if the procedure for awarding the contract or the performance of the contract prove to have been subject to substantial errors, irregularities or fraud ; \n\n(g) if the contractor does not comply with applicable obligations under environmental, social and labour law established by Union and Community law, national law, collective agreements or by the international environmental, social and labour law provisions listed in Annex X to Directive 2014/24/EU;\n\n(h) if the contractor is in a situation that could constitute a conflict of interest or a professional conflicting interest as referred to in Article II.7;\n\n(i) if a change to the contractor’s legal, financial, technical, organisational or ownership situation is likely to substantially affect the performance of the contract or substantially modify the conditions under which the contract was initially awarded; \n\n- (j) in the event of force majeure , where either resuming implementation is impossible or the necessary ensuing amendments to the contract would mean that the tender specifications are no longer fulfilled or result in unequal treatment of tenderers or contractors; \n\nThe contractor may terminate the contract if:\n\n25" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9685014239796211, + "doc_id": "4b2f398dccaf92120d5669e16064cc58807740f4e8e3727548ff50024f3670c1", + "edit_distance": 0.3365539452495974, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9069763759706728, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Toutefois, lorsque les intérêts calculés sont d'un montant inférieur ou égal à 200 EUR, ils ne sont versés au contractant (ou chef de file dans le cas d'une offre conjointe) que sur demande présentée dans les deux mois qui suivent la réception du paiement tardif.\n\n## II.21 RECOUVREMENT\n\nII.21.1 Si un montant doit faire l'objet d'un recouvrement aux termes du CC, le contractant doit reverser ledit montant au pouvoir adjudicateur.\n\n## II.21.2 Procédure de recouvrement\n\nAvant de procéder au recouvrement, le pouvoir adjudicateur doit notifier formellement au contractant son intention de recouvrer le montant concerné, en précisant le montant dû et les motifs du recouvrement et en invitant le contractant à faire part de ses observations dans un délai de 30 jours à compter de la réception de la notification.\n\nSi aucune observation n'a été présentée ou si, malgré les observations présentées, le pouvoir adjudicateur décide de poursuivre la procédure de recouvrement, il doit confirmer ce recouvrement en notifiant formellement une note de débit au contractant, précisant la date de paiement. Le contractant doit payer le montant conformément aux dispositions de la note de débit.\n\nSi le contractant n'a toujours pas effectué le paiement à la date d'échéance, le pouvoir adjudicateur peut, après en avoir informé le contractant par écrit, recouvrer les montants dus:\n\n- a) par compensation avec des sommes que l'Union doit au contractant;\n- b) par mobilisation de la garantie financière si le contractant a remis une telle garantie au pouvoir adjudicateur;\n- c) par une action en justice.\n\n## II.21.3 Intérêts de retard\n\nSi le contractant n'honore pas l'obligation d'acquitter le montant dû à la date d'échéance fixée par le pouvoir adjudicateur dans la note de débit, la somme due est majorée d'intérêts au taux indiqué à l'article II.20.8. Les intérêts de retard porteront sur la période comprise entre le jour qui suit la date d'exigibilité du paiement et la date à laquelle le pouvoir adjudicateur obtient le paiement intégral de la somme due.\n\nTout paiement partiel s'impute d'abord sur les frais et intérêts de retard et ensuite sur le principal.\n\n## II.21.4 Règles en matière de recouvrement dans le cas d'une offre conjointe\n\nSi le contrat est signé par un groupement (offre conjointe), ce groupement est conjointement et solidairement responsable en vertu des conditions énoncées à l'article II.6 (Responsabilité). Le pouvoir adjudicateur réclame d'abord la totalité du montant au chef de file.\n\nSi le chef de file n'a toujours pas effectué l'intégralité du paiement à la date d'échéance et si le montant dû ne peut être compensé ou ne peut être compensé que partiellement conformément à l'article II.21.2, point a), le pouvoir adjudicateur peut réclamer le montant restant dû à un ou plusieurs autres membres du groupement en leur notifiant à chacun une note de débit conformément aux dispositions de l'article II.21.2.\n\n## II.22 CONTRÔLES ET AUDITS\n\nII.22.1 Le pouvoir adjudicateur et l'Office européen de lutte antifraude (OLAF) peuvent procéder à un contrôle ou exiger un audit de l' exécution du CC . Ces contrôles et audits peuvent être effectués par le personnel de l'OLAF ou par tout autre organisme externe mandaté par ce dernier à cet effet.\n\nCes contrôles et audits peuvent être lancés à tout moment durant la fourniture des services et jusqu'à cinq ans à compter du paiement du solde du dernier bon de commande émis au titre du CC.\n\n32\n\nFR", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Toutefois, lorsque les intérêts calculés sont d'un montant inférieur ou égal à 200 EUR, ils ne sont versés au contractant (ou chef de file dans le cas d'une offre conjointe) que sur demande présentée dans les deux mois qui suivent la réception du paiement tardif. \n\nAvant de procéder au recouvrement, le pouvoir adjudicateur doit notifier formellement au contractant son intention de recouvrer le montant concerné, en précisant le montant dû et les motifs du recouvrement et en invitant le contractant à faire part de ses observations dans un délai de 30 jours à compter de la réception de la notification. \n\nSi aucune observation n'a été présentée ou si, malgré les observations présentées, le pouvoir adjudicateur décide de poursuivre la procédure de recouvrement, il doit confirmer ce recouvrement en notifiant formellement une note de débit au contractant, précisant la date de paiement. Le contractant doit payer le montant conformément aux dispositions de la note de débit. \n\nSi le contractant n'a toujours pas effectué le paiement à la date d'échéance, le pouvoir adjudicateur peut, après en avoir informé le contractant par écrit, recouvrer les montants dus: \n\nSi le contractant n'honore pas l'obligation d'acquitter le montant dû à la date d'échéance fixée par le pouvoir adjudicateur dans la note de débit, la somme due est majorée d'intérêts au taux indiqué à l'article II.20.8. Les intérêts de retard porteront sur la période comprise entre le jour qui suit la date d'exigibilité du paiement et la date à laquelle le pouvoir adjudicateur obtient le paiement intégral de la somme due. \n\nTout paiement partiel s'impute d'abord sur les frais et intérêts de retard et ensuite sur le principal. \n\nSi le contrat est signé par un groupement (offre conjointe), ce groupement est conjointement et solidairement responsable en vertu des conditions énoncées à l'article II.6 (Responsabilité). Le pouvoir adjudicateur réclame d'abord la totalité du montant au chef de file. \n\nSi le chef de file n'a toujours pas effectué l'intégralité du paiement à la date d'échéance et si le montant dû ne peut être compensé ou ne peut être compensé que partiellement conformément à l'article II.21.2, point a), le pouvoir adjudicateur peut réclamer le montant restant dû à un ou plusieurs autres membres du groupement en leur notifiant à chacun une note de débit conformément aux dispositions de l'article II.21.2. \n\n- II.22.1 Le pouvoir adjudicateur et l'Office européen de lutte antifraude (OLAF) peuvent procéder à un contrôle ou exiger un audit de l' exécution du CC . Ces contrôles et audits peuvent être effectués par le personnel de l'OLAF ou par tout autre organisme externe mandaté par ce dernier à cet effet. \n\n- II.21.1 Si un montant doit faire l'objet d'un recouvrement aux termes du CC, le contractant doit reverser ledit montant au pouvoir adjudicateur. \n\n- a) par compensation avec des sommes que l'Union doit au contractant; \n\n- b) par mobilisation de la garantie financière si le contractant a remis une telle garantie au pouvoir adjudicateur; \n\n- c) par une action en justice. \n\nCes contrôles et audits peuvent être lancés à tout moment durant la fourniture des services et jusqu'à cinq ans à compter du paiement du solde du dernier bon de commande émis au titre du CC. \n\n## II.22 CONTRÔLES ET AUDITS\n\n## II.21.4 Règles en matière de recouvrement dans le cas d'une offre conjointe\n\n## II.21.3 Intérêts de retard\n\n## II.21.2 Procédure de recouvrement\n\n## II.21 RECOUVREMENT\n\n32 FR" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0026748197286120675, + "doc_id": "e25ee953b6d2932ea3af460f494c54cb6950c942e994055a34d0f7f4fc9d7305", + "edit_distance": 0.9828767123287672, + "f1_score": 0.13973799126637554, + "meteor": 0.18829591152815017, + "precision": 0.07547169811320754, + "pred_md": "EC - FWC services Dec 2018\n\nContract no: [complete]\n\nTABLE OF CONTENT\n\nTABLE OF CONTENT\n\n| FRAMEWORK CONTRACT FOR SERVICES ............................................................................... 1 |\n|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|\n| TABLE OF CONTENT ................................................................................................................... 2 |\n| I. SPECIAL CONDITIONS ............................................................................................................. 4 |\n| I.1. ORDER OF PRIORITY OF PROVISIONS ...................................................................... 4 |\n| I.2. SUBJECT MATTER ........................................................................................................ 4 |\n| I.3. ENTRY INTO FORCE AND DURATION OF THE FWC .................................................. 4 |\n| I.4. APPOINTMENT OF THE CONTRACTOR AND IMPLEMENTATION OF THE FWC ...... 4 |\n| I.5. PRICES ........................................................................................................................... 5 |\n| I.6. PAYMENT ARRANGEMENTS ........................................................................................ 5 |\n| I.7. BANK ACCOUNT ............................................................................................................ 7 |\n| I.8. COMMUNICATION DETAILS ......................................................................................... 7 |\n| I.9. PROCESSING OF PERSONAL DATA ............................................................................ 8 |\n| I.9.1 Processing of personal data by the contracting authority .............................................. 8 |\n| I.9.2 Processing of personal data by the contractor ............................................................... 8 I.10. EXPLOITATION OF THE RESULTS OF THE FWC ...................................................... 9 |\n| I.10.1. Detailed list of modes of exploitation of the results ..................................................... 9 |\n| I.11. TERMINATION BY EITHER PARTY ........................................................................... 10 |\n| I.12. APPLICABLE LAW AND SETTLEMENT OF DISPUTES ............................................ 10 |\n| I.13. OTHER SPECIAL CONDITIONS ................................................................................ 11 |\n| II. GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR THE FRAMEWORK CONTRACT FOR SERVICES ........... 12 |\n| II.1. DEFINITIONS .............................................................................................................. 12 |\n| II.3. SEVERABILITY ............................................................................................................ 14 |\n| II.4. PROVISION OF SERVICES ........................................................................................ 14 |\n| II.5. COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE PARTIES ........................................................... 15 |\n| II.6. LIABILITY ..................................................................................................................... 17 |\n| II.7. CONFLICT OF INTEREST AND PROFESSIONAL CONFLICTING INTERESTS ........ 18 II.8. CONFIDENTIALITY ..................................................................................................... 18 |\n| II.9. PROCESSING OF PERSONAL DATA ......................................................................... 19 |\n| II.10. SUBCONTRACTING .................................................................................................. 21 II.11. AMENDMENTS .......................................................................................................... 21 |\n| II.12. ASSIGNMENT ........................................................................................................... 21 |\n| II.13. INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS ...................................................................... 21 II.14. FORCE MAJEURE ..................................................................................................... 25 |\n| II.15. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES ........................................................................................... 25 |\n| II.16. REDUCTION IN PRICE ............................................................................................. 26 |\n| II.17. SUSPENSION OF THE IMPLEMENTATION OF THE FWC ...................................... 27 |\n| II.18. TERMINATION OF THE FWC ................................................................................... 28 |\n| II.19. INVOICES, VALUE ADDED TAX AND E-INVOICING ................................................ 30 II.20. PRICE REVISION ...................................................................................................... 30 II.21. PAYMENTS AND GUARANTEES .............................................................................. 31 |\n| II.22. REIMBURSEMENTS ................................................................................................. 33 II.23. RECOVERY ............................................................................................................... 34 |\n\n2", + "recall": 0.9411764705882353, + "true_md": "Contract no: [complete] \n\nEC - FWC services Dec 2018 \n\n## TABLE OF CONTENT\n\n2" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.924109200733613, + "doc_id": "7cf7c391904a17563093f2f3341dc2b5bf89172acf4d15da7a107559ca898c87", + "edit_distance": 0.284375, + "f1_score": 0.9809358752166376, + "meteor": 0.8871446933409214, + "precision": 0.9929824561403509, + "pred_md": "son tour l'accord de tout autre auteur ou autre détenteur de droit et doit répondre au pouvoir adjudicateur dans un délai d'un mois en communiquant son accord, ainsi que toute suggestion de modifications, à titre gratuit. Le contractant ne peut refuser les modifications envisagées que si un auteur peut démontrer que celles-ci portent atteinte à son honneur ou à sa réputation, violant ainsi ses droits moraux.\n\nLes modes d'exploitation peuvent être définis de manière plus détaillée dans le bon de commande .\n\nLa liste ci-dessus s'ajoute à tous droits appartenant déjà à l'Union sur la base des exceptions figurant dans la législation applicable, comme l'exception au droit d'auteur pour assurer le bon déroulement et le compte rendu approprié des procédures administratives, dans les cas où ces exceptions s'appliquent.\n\n## I.11 RÉSILIATION PAR LES PARTIES\n\nChaque partie peut résilier le CC ou le CC et les bons de commande en envoyant une notification formelle à l'autre partie avec préavis écrit de neuf (9) mois.\n\nEn cas de résiliation du CC ou d'un bon de commande :\n\n- a) aucune partie n'a droit à une quelconque indemnisation;\n- b) le contractant n'a droit qu'au paiement des services et/ou des travaux fournis avant la prise d'effet de la résiliation.\n\nLes deuxième, troisième et quatrième alinéas de l'article II.18.4 sont applicables.\n\n## I.12 SERVICES FOURNIS DANS LES LOCAUX DU POUVOIR ADJUDICATEUR\n\nL'accès aux locaux du pouvoir adjudicateur est autorisé uniquement sous réserve du respect des règles prévues à l'annexe VI.\n\n## I.13 AUTRES CONDITIONS PARTICULIÈRES\n\n## I.13.1 DOMMAGES ET INTÉRÊTS\n\n- 1. L'article II.15.1 et II.15.2 ne sont pas applicables au présent contrat. En revanche, les dommages-intérêts d'application en cas de retard d'exécution sont prévus au SLA en Annexe III du présent contrat-cadre, et ce, indépendamment du droit du Secrétariat de résilier le contrat. Cette pénalité est cumulative et ne suspend pas l'application des conditions visées au point I.13.2. ciaprès.\n- 2. Dans un délai de quinze jours à compter de la réception de la notification formelle adressée par le Secrétariat, le contractant peut soumettre, par notification formelle, des arguments contre cette décision. En l'absence de réaction de sa part ou de retrait par écrit de la décision par le Secrétariat dans un délai de quinze jours à compter de la réception desdits arguments, la décision imposant le paiement des dommages-intérêts devient exécutoire. Le montant des dommages-intérêts seront déduits du montant de la facture suivante par le biais d'une note de crédit émise par le contractant. A tout moment, le Secrétariat se réserve le droit d'émettre une note de débit au cas où le contractant ne produirait pas les notes de crédit attendues. L'application d'indemnités forfaitaires ne soustrait pas le soumissionnaire à ses obligations contractuelles.\n\n## I.13.2 RÉDUCTION DES PRIX\n\nLes articles II.16.1 et II.16.2 ne sont pas applicables au présent contrat et remplacés par\n\n- 1. Si le contractant ne fournit pas les services conformément au CC ou au bon de commande (\"obligations inexécutées\"), ou s'il ne fournit pas les services conformément aux normes de qualité attendues prévues dans le cahier des charges (\"livraison de faible qualité\"), le pouvoir adjudicateur peut réduire ou recouvrer les paiements de manière proportionnelle à la gravité des obligations inexécutées ou de la livraison de faible qualité.\n\nNotamment dans les cas suivants où le contractant est considéré en défaut d'exécution du contrat:\n\n10\n\nFR", + "recall": 0.9691780821917808, + "true_md": "son tour l'accord de tout autre auteur ou autre détenteur de droit et doit répondre au pouvoir adjudicateur dans un délai d'un mois en communiquant son accord, ainsi que toute suggestion de modifications, à titre gratuit. Le contractant ne peut refuser les modifications envisagées que si un auteur peut démontrer que celles-ci portent atteinte à son honneur ou à sa réputation, violant ainsi ses droits moraux. \n\nLes modes d'exploitation peuvent être définis de manière plus détaillée dans le bon de commande . La liste ci-dessus s'ajoute à tous droits appartenant déjà à l'Union sur la base des exceptions figurant dans la législation applicable, comme l'exception au droit d'auteur pour assurer le bon déroulement et le compte rendu approprié des procédures administratives, dans les cas où ces exceptions s'appliquent. \n\nChaque partie peut résilier le CC ou le CC et les bons de commande en envoyant une notification formelle à l'autre partie avec préavis écrit de neuf (9) mois. En cas de résiliation du CC ou d'un bon de commande : \n\nLes deuxième, troisième et quatrième alinéas de l'article II.18.4 sont applicables. \n\nL'accès aux locaux du pouvoir adjudicateur est autorisé uniquement sous réserve du respect des règles prévues à l'annexe VI. \n\n1. L'article II.15.1 et II.15.2 ne sont pas applicables au présent contrat. En revanche, les dommages-intérêts d'application en cas de retard d'exécution sont prévus au SLA en Annexe III du présent contrat-cadre, et ce, indépendamment du droit du Secrétariat de résilier le contrat. Cette pénalité est cumulative et ne suspend pas l'application des conditions visées au point I.13.2. ci- après. 2. Dans un délai de quinze jours à compter de la réception de la notification formelle adressée \n\naprès. 2. Dans un délai de quinze jours à compter de la réception de la notification formelle adressée par le Secrétariat, le contractant peut soumettre, par notification formelle, des arguments contre cette décision. En l'absence de réaction de sa part ou de retrait par écrit de la décision par le Secrétariat dans un délai de quinze jours à compter de la réception desdits arguments, la décision imposant le paiement des dommages-intérêts devient exécutoire. Le montant des dommages-intérêts seront déduits du montant de la facture suivante par le biais d'une note de crédit émise par le contractant. A tout moment, le Secrétariat se réserve le droit d'émettre une note de débit au cas où le contractant ne produirait pas les notes de crédit attendues. L’application d'indemnités forfaitaires ne soustrait pas le soumissionnaire à ses obligations contractuelles. \n\nLes articles II.16.1 et II.16.2 ne sont pas applicables au présent contrat et remplacés par \n\n1. Si le contractant ne fournit pas les services conformément au CC ou au bon de commande (\"obligations inexécutées\"), ou s'il ne fournit pas les services conformément aux normes de qualité attendues prévues dans le cahier des charges (\"livraison de faible qualité\"), le pouvoir adjudicateur peut réduire ou recouvrer les paiements de manière proportionnelle à la gravité des obligations inexécutées ou de la livraison de faible qualité. \n\nNotamment dans les cas suivants où le contractant est considéré en défaut d'exécution du contrat: \n\n10 FR\n\n## $^{ }$I.13.2 RÉDUCTION DES PRIX\n\n## I.13.1 DOMMAGES ET INTÉRÊTS\n\n## I.13 AUTRES CONDITIONS PARTICULIÈRES\n\n## I.12 SERVICES FOURNIS DANS LES LOCAUX DU POUVOIR ADJUDICATEUR\n\n## I.11 RÉSILIATION PAR LES PARTIES\n\n- a) aucune partie n'a droit à une quelconque indemnisation; \n\n- b) le contractant n'a droit qu'au paiement des services et/ou des travaux fournis avant la prise d'effet de la résiliation." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9588106237066834, + "doc_id": "75223af1657ce262c9fe1b758e12eedbe24fc136d783456668df524473ab87e7", + "edit_distance": 0.6961805555555556, + "f1_score": 0.9896907216494847, + "meteor": 0.8464232771408299, + "precision": 0.9917355371900827, + "pred_md": "## II.11 AVENANTS\n\n- II.11.1 Tout avenant au CC ou à un bon de commande doit être établi par écrit avant l'exécution de toute obligation contractuelle. Un bon de commande ne peut constituer un avenant au CC.\n- II.11.2 Un avenant ne doit apporter aucune modification au CC ou à un bon de commande qui pourrait altérer les conditions initiales de la procédure de passation de marchés ou donner lieu à une inégalité de traitement entre soumissionnaires ou contractants.\n\n## II.12 CESSION\n\n- II.12.1 Le contractant ne peut céder les droits et obligations, y compris les créances et l'affacturage, découlant du CC sans l'autorisation préalable écrite du pouvoir adjudicateur. En pareils cas, le contractant doit communiquer au pouvoir adjudicateur l'identité de l'ayant droit.\n- II.12.2 Aucun droit ou obligation cédé par le contractant sans autorisation n'est opposable au pouvoir adjudicateur.\n\n## II.13 DROITS DE PROPRIÉTÉ INTELLECTUELLE\n\n## II.13.1 Propriété des droits des résultats\n\nL'Union acquiert irrévocablement et partout dans le monde la propriété des résultats et de tous les droits de propriété intellectuelle sur le matériel nouvellement créé produit spécifiquement pour l'Union en vertu du CC et inclus dans les résultats , sans préjudice, toutefois, des règles applicables aux droits préexistants sur le matériel préexistant , comme prévu à l'article II.13.2.\n\nLes droits de propriété intellectuelle ainsi acquis comprennent tous les droits, par exemple le droit d'auteur ou d'autres droits de propriété intellectuelle ou industrielle, sur les résultats et toutes les solutions technologiques et informations créées ou produites par le contractant ou son sous-traitant dans le cadre de l' exécution du CC . Le pouvoir adjudicateur peut exploiter et utiliser les droits acquis comme indiqué dans le présent CC. L'Union acquiert tous les droits dès le moment où le contractant a créé les résultats .\n\nLe paiement du prix inclut toutes les rémunérations dues au contractant relatives à l'acquisition de la propriété des droits par l'Union, notamment toutes les formes d'exploitation et d'utilisation des résultats .\n\n## II.13.2 Droits de licence sur le matériel préexistant\n\nSauf disposition contraire dans les conditions particulières, l'Union n'acquiert pas la propriété des droits préexistants dans le cadre du CC.\n\nLe contractant accorde une licence libre de redevance, non exclusive et irrévocable sur les droits préexistants à l'Union, qui peut utiliser le matériel préexistant selon tous les modes d'exploitation prévus dans le présent CC ou dans les bons de commande . Sauf accord contraire, la licence n'est pas transférable et ne peut faire l'objet d'une sous-licence, sous réserve des dispositions ci-après:\n\n- a) les droits préexistants peuvent faire l'objet d'une sous-licence octroyée par le pouvoir adjudicateur aux personnes et entités travaillant pour lui ou collaborant avec lui, dont les contractants et sous-traitants (personnes morales ou physiques), mais uniquement aux fins de leur mission pour l'Union;\n\nb) si le résultat est un «document», comme un rapport ou une étude, qui est destiné à être publié, l'existence d'un matériel préexistant dans le résultat ne peut empêcher la publication, la traduction ou la «réutilisation» du document, étant entendu, toutefois, que la «réutilisation» ne peut être faite que du résultat dans son ensemble et non du matériel préexistant pris séparément du résultat ; aux\n\n21\n\nFR", + "recall": 0.9876543209876543, + "true_md": "## II.11 AVENANTS\n\n- II.11.1 Tout avenant au CC ou à un bon de commande doit être établi par écrit avant l'exécution de toute obligation contractuelle. Un ne peut constituer un avenant au CC. \n\n- II.11.2 Un avenant ne doit apporter aucune modification au CC ou à un bon de commande qui pourrait altérer les conditions initiales de la procédure de passation de marchés ou donner lieu à une inégalité de traitement entre soumissionnaires ou contractants. \n\n- II.12.1 Le contractant ne peut céder les droits et obligations, y compris les créances et l'affacturage, découlant du CC sans l'autorisation préalable écrite du pouvoir adjudicateur. En pareils cas, le contractant doit communiquer au pouvoir adjudicateur l'identité de l'ayant droit. \n\n- II.12.2 Aucun droit ou obligation cédé par le contractant sans autorisation n'est opposable au pouvoir adjudicateur. \n\nb) si le résultat est un «document», comme un rapport ou une étude, qui est destiné à être publié, l’existence d’un matériel préexistant dans le résultat ne peut empêcher la publication, la traduction ou la «réutilisation» du document, étant entendu, toutefois, que la «réutilisation» ne peut être faite que du résultat dans son ensemble et non du matériel préexistant pris séparément du résultat ; aux \n\na) les droits préexistants peuvent faire l'objet d'une sous-licence octroyée par le pouvoir adjudicateur aux personnes et entités travaillant pour lui ou collaborant avec lui, dont les contractants et sous-traitants (personnes morales ou physiques), mais uniquement aux fins de leur mission pour l'Union; \n\nLe contractant accorde une licence libre de redevance, non exclusive et irrévocable sur les droits préexistants à l'Union, qui peut utiliser le matériel préexistant selon tous les modes d'exploitation prévus dans le présent CC ou dans les bons de commande . Sauf accord contraire, la licence n'est pas transférable et ne peut faire l'objet d'une sous-licence, sous réserve des dispositions ci-après: \n\nSauf disposition contraire dans les conditions particulières, l'Union n'acquiert pas la propriété des droits préexistants dans le cadre du CC. \n\nLe paiement du prix inclut toutes les rémunérations dues au contractant relatives à l'acquisition de la propriété des droits par l'Union, notamment toutes les formes d'exploitation et d'utilisation des résultats . \n\nLes droits de propriété intellectuelle ainsi acquis comprennent tous les droits, par exemple le droit d'auteur ou d'autres droits de propriété intellectuelle ou industrielle, sur les résultats et toutes les solutions technologiques et informations créées ou produites par le contractant ou son sous-traitant dans le cadre de l' exécution du CC . Le pouvoir adjudicateur peut exploiter et utiliser les droits acquis comme indiqué dans le présent CC. L'Union acquiert tous les droits dès le moment où le contractant a créé les résultats . \n\nL'Union acquiert irrévocablement et partout dans le monde la propriété des résultats et de tous les droits de propriété intellectuelle sur le matériel nouvellement créé produit spécifiquement pour l'Union en vertu du CC et inclus dans les résultats , sans préjudice, toutefois, des règles applicables aux droits préexistants sur le matériel préexistant , comme prévu à l'article II.13.2. \n\n## II.13 DROITS DE PROPRIÉTÉ INTELLECTUELLE\n\n## II.13.1 Propriété des droits des résultats\n\n## II.12 CESSION\n\n## II.13.2 Droits de licence sur le matériel préexistant\n\n21 FR" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.35438891775718334, + "doc_id": "0c5268546d95f0a372743b7f27eff8803433e9ea6e377c98bd224f92b380b270", + "edit_distance": 0.5856622114216282, + "f1_score": 0.9683257918552036, + "meteor": 0.43074212212623847, + "precision": 0.9683257918552036, + "pred_md": "ANNEX VII\n\nAppendice 2 de l'Annexe VII\n\nEn fonction des circonstances, des instructions différentes pourront vous être données . Elles seront annoncées par les moyens disponibles (haut-parleurs, stewards d'évacuation, agents du Bureau de Sécurité et de l'unité Prévention ou agents de gardiennage).\n\nIl est par conséquent essentiel d'écouter et d'appliquer les instructions diffusées par haut-parleur ou par tout autre moyen.\n\nUn lieu de rassemblement particulier pourra être indiqué dans le cas où un incident rendrait impossible le retour au bâtiment d'affection. Un accord dans ce sens a notamment été passé avec le Parlement européen.\n\nLe cas échéant, signalez les personnes manquantes ou toute information utile:\n\n- · soit aux stewards d'évacuation, reconnaissables à leur gilet fluorescent de couleur jaune et\n- qui pourront aussi établir les contacts nécessaires au cas où vous auriez besoin d'aide\n- · soit en appelant le 02 281 2000 .\n\nParce qu'il est important de pouvoir identifier les personnes présentes après l'évacuation, chaque service ou unité établira des instructions internes décrivant les actions à mener a priori par leur personnel après avoir évacué leur bâtiment.\n\nCes instructions devraient inclure notamment:\n\n- · un lieu de rendez-vous éloigné du bâtiment et à rejoindre après dispersion le cas échéant\n- · l'organisation et les dispositions relatives à la communication et l'information internes au service ou à l'unité.\n\nElles devront toutefois être adaptées aux circonstances pour ne pas exposer le personnel à un danger extérieur au bâtiment.\n\n## 2.2 Déroulement de l'évacuation\n\nDès que la sirène d'évacuation retentit ou que l'ordre d'évacuer est donné par haut-parleur, respectez les consignes suivantes:\n\n- · restez toujours calme\n- · arrêtez toutes vos activités\n- · arrêtez les appareils chauffants\n- · fermez les fenêtres\n- · sortez du local et fermez la porte derrière vous\n- · suivez le chemin d'évacuation le plus proche et:\n- -fermez les portes après votre passage\n- -restez le plus près possible du sol en cas de dégagement de fumée important\n- -ne vous dirigez pas vers les sous-sols (parking) sauf instructions contraires\n- -n'utilisez jamais les ascenseurs\n- -ne revenez jamais sur vos pas ou dans votre bureau pour prendre vos affaires personnelles\n- · suivez scrupuleusement les consignes données par:\n- -les personnes de l'unité Prévention (identifiables par leurs vestes de couleur rouge et jaune)\n- -les stewards d'évacuation (vestes de couleur jaune)\n- -les agents de sécurité (vestes de couleur jaune et bleue)\n\n86\n\nFR", + "recall": 0.9683257918552036, + "true_md": "Appendice 2 de l'Annexe VII \n\nEn fonction des circonstances, des instructions différentes pourront vous être données . Elles seront annoncées par les moyens disponibles (haut-parleurs, stewards d'évacuation, agents du Bureau de Sécurité et de l'unité Prévention ou agents de gardiennage). \n\nIl est par conséquent essentiel d'écouter et d'appliquer les instructions diffusées par haut-parleur ou par tout autre moyen.\n\nUn lieu de rassemblement particulier pourra être indiqué dans le cas où un incident rendrait impossible le retour au bâtiment d'affection. Un accord dans ce sens a notamment été passé avec le Parlement européen. \n\n• soit en appelant le 02 281 2000 . Parce qu'il est important de pouvoir identifier les personnes présentes après l'évacuation, chaque service ou unité établira des instructions internes décrivant les actions à mener a priori par leur personnel après avoir évacué leur bâtiment. \n\nCes instructions devraient inclure notamment: • un lieu de rendez-vous éloigné du bâtiment et à rejoindre après dispersion le cas échéant \n\nElles devront toutefois être adaptées aux circonstances pour ne pas exposer le personnel à un danger extérieur au bâtiment.\n\n## 2.2 Déroulement de l'évacuation\n\n- Le cas échéant, signalez les personnes manquantes ou toute information utile: • soit aux stewards d’évacuation, reconnaissables à leur gilet fluorescent de couleur jaune et qui pourront aussi établir les contacts nécessaires au cas où vous auriez besoin d’aide • soit en appelant le 02 281 2000 . \n\n- qui pourront aussi établir les contacts nécessaires au cas où vous auriez besoin d’aide • soit en appelant le 02 281 2000 . Parce qu'il est important de pouvoir identifier les personnes présentes après l'évacuation, chaque \n\n- Ces instructions devraient inclure notamment: • un lieu de rendez-vous éloigné du bâtiment et à rejoindre après dispersion le cas échéant • l'organisation et les dispositions relatives à la communication et l'information internes au \n\n- • un lieu de rendez-vous éloigné du bâtiment et à rejoindre après dispersion le cas échéant • l'organisation et les dispositions relatives à la communication et l'information internes au service ou à l'unité.\n\n- respectez les consignes suivantes: • restez toujours calme • arrêtez toutes vos activités \n\n- • restez toujours calme • arrêtez toutes vos activités • arrêtez les appareils chauffants \n\n- • arrêtez toutes vos activités • arrêtez les appareils chauffants • fermez les fenêtres \n\nDès que la sirène d'évacuation retentit ou que l'ordre d'évacuer est donné par haut-parleur, respectez les consignes suivantes: • restez toujours calme \n\nLe cas échéant, signalez les personnes manquantes ou toute information utile: • soit aux stewards d’évacuation, reconnaissables à leur gilet fluorescent de couleur jaune et \n\n- • arrêtez les appareils chauffants • fermez les fenêtres • sortez du local et fermez la porte derrière vous \n\n- • fermez les fenêtres • sortez du local et fermez la porte derrière vous • suivez le chemin d’évacuation le plus proche et: \n\n- • sortez du local et fermez la porte derrière vous • suivez le chemin d’évacuation le plus proche et: fermez les portes après votre passage \n\n- • suivez le chemin d’évacuation le plus proche et: − fermez les portes après votre passage − restez le plus près possible du sol en cas de dégagement de fumée important \n\n- − fermez les portes après votre passage − restez le plus près possible du sol en cas de dégagement de fumée important − ne vous dirigez pas vers les sous-sols (parking) sauf instructions contraires \n\n- − restez le plus près possible du sol en cas de dégagement de fumée important − ne vous dirigez pas vers les sous-sols (parking) sauf instructions contraires − n'utilisez jamais les ascenseurs\n\n- − ne vous dirigez pas vers les sous-sols (parking) sauf instructions contraires − n'utilisez jamais les ascenseurs − ne revenez jamais sur vos pas ou dans votre bureau pour prendre vos affaires\n\n- − n'utilisez jamais les ascenseurs − ne revenez jamais sur vos pas ou dans votre bureau pour prendre vos affaires personnelles • suivez scrupuleusement les consignes données par: \n\n- personnelles • suivez scrupuleusement les consignes données par: les personnes de l'unité Prévention (identifiables par leurs vestes de couleur rouge \n\n- • suivez scrupuleusement les consignes données par: − les personnes de l'unité Prévention (identifiables par leurs vestes de couleur rouge et jaune) − les stewards d'évacuation (vestes de couleur jaune) \n\n- et jaune) − les stewards d'évacuation (vestes de couleur jaune) − les agents de sécurité (vestes de couleur jaune et bleue) \n\n- − les stewards d'évacuation (vestes de couleur jaune) − les agents de sécurité (vestes de couleur jaune et bleue) \n\nANNEX VII \n\n86 FR" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8899376452793993, + "doc_id": "1cbfaa47da606d6af43d2ddb0e4efd8547df87291b1ed185cd20fe7ee98b03bb", + "edit_distance": 0.11724137931034483, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9121523847799611, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Contract number: [ complete ]\n\nContract conditions of December 2015\n\ncannot be processed. The reasons the contracting authority may cite for not being able to process an invoice are:\n\n- (a) because it does not comply with the contract;\n- (b) because the contractor has not produced the appropriate supplies or documents or\n- (c) because the contracting authority has observations on the supplies or documents submitted with the invoice.\n\nThe contracting authority must notify the contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) as soon as possible of any such suspension, giving the reasons for it.\n\nSuspension takes effect on the date the contracting authority sends the notification . The remaining payment period resumes from the date on which the requested information or revised documents are received or the necessary further verification, including on-the-spot checks, is carried out. Where the suspension period exceeds two months, the contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) may request the contracting authority to justify the continued suspension.\n\nWhere the payment periods have been suspended following rejection of a document referred to in the first paragraph of this Article and the new document produced is also rejected, the contracting authority reserves the right to terminate the contract in accordance with Article II.17.1(c) .\n\n## II.20.8. Interest on late payment\n\nOn expiry of the payment periods specified in Article I.6, , the contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) is entitled to interest on late payment at the rate applied by the European Central Bank for its main refinancing operations in euros (the reference rate), plus eight points. The reference rate is the rate in force, as published in the C series of the Official Journal of the European Union on the first day of the month in which the payment period ends.\n\nSuspension of the payment period as provided for in Article II.20.7 is not considered as a giving rise to late payment.\n\nInterest on late payment covers the period running from the day following the due date for payment up to and including the date of actual payment as defined in Article II.20.1.\n\nHowever, when the calculated interest is EUR 200 or less, it must be paid to the contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) only if requests it within two months of receiving late payment.\n\n## II.21. RECOVERY\n\nII.21.1. If an amount is to be recovered under the terms of the contract, the contractor must repay the contracting authority the amount in question.\n\n## II.21.2. Recovery procedure\n\nBefore recovery, the contracting authority must formally notify the contractor of its intention to recover the amount it claims, specifying the amount due and the reasons for recovery and inviting the contractor to make any observations within 30 days of receipt.\n\n30", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Contract number: [ complete ] \n\nContract conditions of December 2015 \n\ncannot be processed. The reasons the contracting authority may cite for not being able to process an invoice are: \n\n- (a) because it does not comply with the contract; (b) because the contractor has not produced the appropriate supplies or documents or\n\n- (a) because it does not comply with the contract; (b) because the contractor has not produced the appropriate supplies or documents or (c) because the contracting authority has observations on the supplies or documents \n\n- (b) because the contractor has not produced the appropriate supplies or documents or (c) because the contracting authority has observations on the supplies or documents submitted with the invoice.\n\nThe contracting authority must notify the contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) as soon as possible of any such suspension, giving the reasons for it. \n\nSuspension takes effect on the date the contracting authority sends the notification . The remaining payment period resumes from the date on which the requested information or revised documents are received or the necessary further verification, including on-the-spot checks, is carried out. Where the suspension period exceeds two months, the contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) may request the contracting authority to justify the continued suspension.\n\nWhere the payment periods have been suspended following rejection of a document referred to in the first paragraph of this Article and the new document produced is also rejected, the contracting authority reserves the right to terminate the contract in accordance with Article II.17.1(c) . \n\n## II.20.8. Interest on late payment\n\nOn expiry of the payment periods specified in Article I.6, , the contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) is entitled to interest on late payment at the rate applied by the European Central Bank for its main refinancing operations in euros (the reference rate), plus eight points. The reference rate is the rate in force, as published in the C series of the Official Journal of the European Union on the first day of the month in which the payment period ends.\n\nSuspension of the payment period as provided for in Article II.20.7 is not considered as a giving rise to late payment. \n\nInterest on late payment covers the period running from the day following the due date for payment up to and including the date of actual payment as defined in Article II.20.1. \n\nHowever, when the calculated interest is EUR 200 or less, it must be paid to the contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) only if requests it within two months of receiving late payment.\n\n## II.21. RECOVERY\n\n## II.21.2. Recovery procedure\n\nII.21.1. If an amount is to be recovered under the terms of the contract, the contractor must repay the contracting authority the amount in question. \n\nBefore recovery, the contracting authority must formally notify the contractor of its intention to recover the amount it claims, specifying the amount due and the reasons for recovery and inviting the contractor to make any observations within 30 days of receipt. \n\n30" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8768891422493789, + "doc_id": "b018655709f9bfc51b6582ac90af7e178eb4a890a68b58f72fffc499ef6a8e3f", + "edit_distance": 0.36770428015564205, + "f1_score": 0.9814323607427056, + "meteor": 0.8242654289614982, + "precision": 0.9788359788359788, + "pred_md": "EC - FWC services Dec 2018\n\nContract no: [complete]\n\nd is the duration specified in the relevant specific contract for delivery of the relevant purchase or deliverable or result or, failing that, the period between the date specified in Article I.4.2 and the date of delivery or performance specified in the relevant specific contract , expressed in days.\n\nLiquidated damages may be imposed together with a reduction in price under the conditions laid down in Article II.16.\n\n## II.15.2. Procedure\n\nThe contracting authority must formally notify the contractor of its intention to apply liquidated damages and the corresponding calculated amount.\n\nThe contractor has 30 days following the date of receipt to submit observations. Failing that, the decision becomes enforceable the day after the time limit for submitting observations has elapsed.\n\nIf the contractor submits observations, the contracting authority, taking into account the relevant observations, must notify the contractor:\n\n- a) of the withdrawal of its intention to apply liquidated damages; or\n- b) of its final decision to apply liquidated damages and the corresponding amount.\n\n## II.15.3. Nature of liquidated damages\n\nThe parties expressly acknowledge and agree that any amount payable under this Article is not a penalty and represents a reasonable estimate of fair compensation for the damage incurred due to failure to provide the services within the applicable time limits set out in this FWC.\n\n## II.15.4. Claims and liability\n\nAny claim for liquidated damages does not affect the contractor's actual or potential liability or the contracting authority's rights under Article II.18.\n\n## II.16. REDUCTION IN PRICE\n\n## II.16.1. Quality standards\n\nIf the contractor fails to provide the service in accordance with the FWC or a specific contract ('unperformed obligations') or if it fails to provide the service in accordance with the expected quality levels specified in the tender specifications ('low quality delivery'), the contracting authority may reduce or recover payments proportionally to the seriousness of the unperformed obligations or low quality delivery. This includes in particular cases where the contracting authority cannot approve a result , report or deliverable as defined in Article I.6 after the contractor has submitted the required additional information, correction or new version.\n\nA reduction in price may be imposed together with liquidated damages under the conditions of Article II.15.\n\n## II.16.2. Procedure\n\nThe contracting authority must formally notify the contractor of its intention to reduce payment and the corresponding calculated amount.\n\nThe contractor has 30 days following the date of receipt to submit observations. Failing that, the decision becomes enforceable the day after the time limit for submitting observations has elapsed.\n\n26", + "recall": 0.9840425531914894, + "true_md": "Contract no: [complete] \n\nEC - FWC services Dec 2018 \n\nd is the duration specified in the relevant specific contract for delivery of the relevant purchase or deliverable or result or, failing that, the period between the date specified in Article I.4.2 and the date of delivery or performance specified in the relevant specific contract , expressed in days. \n\nLiquidated damages may be imposed together with a reduction in price under the conditions laid down in Article II.16. \n\nThe contracting authority must formally notify the contractor of its intention to apply liquidated damages and the corresponding calculated amount.\n\nThe contractor has 30 days following the date of receipt to submit observations. Failing that, the decision becomes enforceable the day after the time limit for submitting observations has elapsed.\n\nIf the contractor submits observations, the contracting authority, taking into account the relevant observations, must notify the contractor:\n\nThe parties expressly acknowledge and agree that any amount payable under this Article is not a penalty and represents a reasonable estimate of fair compensation for the damage incurred due to failure to provide the services within the applicable time limits set out in this FWC. \n\nAny claim for liquidated damages does not affect the contractor’s actual or potential liability or the contracting authority’s rights under Article II.18. \n\nIf the contractor fails to provide the service in accordance with the FWC or a specific contract (‘unperformed obligations’) or if it fails to provide the service in accordance with the expected quality levels specified in the tender specifications (‘low quality delivery’), the contracting authority may reduce or recover payments proportionally to the seriousness of the unperformed obligations or low quality delivery. This includes in particular cases where the contracting authority cannot approve a result , report or deliverable as defined in Article I.6 after the contractor has submitted the required additional information, correction or new version.\n\nA reduction in price may be imposed together with liquidated damages under the conditions of Article II.15. \n\nThe contracting authority must formally notify the contractor of its intention to reduce payment and the corresponding calculated amount.\n\nThe contractor has 30 days following the date of receipt to submit observations. Failing that, the decision becomes enforceable the day after the time limit for submitting observations has elapsed.\n\n26\n\n## II.16.2. Procedure\n\n## II.16. REDUCTION IN PRICE\n\n## II.16.1. Quality standards\n\n## II.15.4. Claims and liability\n\n## II.15.3. Nature of liquidated damages\n\n## II.15.2. Procedure\n\n- a) of the withdrawal of its intention to apply liquidated damages; or b) of its final decision to apply liquidated damages and the corresponding amount.\n\n- a) of the withdrawal of its intention to apply liquidated damages; or b) of its final decision to apply liquidated damages and the corresponding amount." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.003772702778332168, + "doc_id": "faa159436590b6e86264cef330bf4d8c52756e360943bc13000bfec1559209b4", + "edit_distance": 0.9637462235649547, + "f1_score": 0.15068493150684933, + "meteor": 0.24621931156669202, + "precision": 0.08148148148148149, + "pred_md": "Contract number: [ complete ]\n\nContract conditions of December 2015\n\n| II.3. Severability ............................................................................................................. 12 |\n|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|\n| II.4. Delivery of supplies ................................................................................................ 12 |\n| II.5. Communication between the parties ....................................................................... 16 |\n| II.5.1. Form and means of communication ................................................................ 16 |\n| II.5.2. Date of communications by mail and email .................................................... 16 |\n| II.5.3. Submission of e-documents via e-PRIOR ....................................................... 17 |\n| II.5.4. Validity and date of e-documents .................................................................... 17 |\n| II.5.5. Authorised persons in e-PRIOR ...................................................................... 18 |\n| II.6. Liability ................................................................................................................... 18 |\n| II.7. Conflict of interests and professional conflicting interests ..................................... 19 |\n| II.8. Confidentiality ........................................................................................................ 20 |\n| II.9. Processing of personal data ..................................................................................... 20 |\n| II.10. Subcontracting ...................................................................................................... 21 |\n| II.11. Amendments ......................................................................................................... 22 |\n| II.12. Assignment ........................................................................................................... 22 |\n| II.13. Force majeure ....................................................................................................... 22 |\n| II.14. Liquidated damages .............................................................................................. 22 |\n| II.14.1. Delay in delivery ............................................................................................ 22 |\n| II.14.2. Procedure ....................................................................................................... 23 |\n| II.14.3. Nature of liquidated damages ........................................................................ 23 |\n| II.15. reduction in price .................................................................................................. 23 |\n| II.15.1. Quality standards ........................................................................................... 23 |\n| II.15.2. Procedure ....................................................................................................... 24 |\n| II.15.3. Claims and liability ........................................................................................ 24 |\n| II.16. Suspension of the performance of the contract ..................................................... 24 |\n| II.16.1. Suspension by the contractor ......................................................................... 24 |\n| II.16.2. Suspension by the contracting authority ........................................................ 24 |\n\n4", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Contract number: [ complete ] \n\nContract conditions of December 2015 \n\n4" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.28611754284726865, + "doc_id": "1f372387cbea824df70e50b462e07e9e3a42e069c41bc4179f2b547a4692a19d", + "edit_distance": 0.5764075067024129, + "f1_score": 0.943089430894309, + "meteor": 0.36384362262487757, + "precision": 0.9547325102880658, + "pred_md": "- · Quand le travail est terminé, remettre la nacelle dans l'emplacement prévu à cet effet sur le toit en position parking.\n- · Dans le cas où des lignes de vie sont présentes sur le toit, veiller à s'arrimer pour atteindre les accès au bâtiment.\n- · Signalez les travaux et le déplacement de l'engin.\n\n## 7.11 Travail en hauteur par un élévateur à nacelle\n\nLes mesures suivantes doivent être prises (conformément à l'Arrêté Royal du 31 août 2005):\n\n- · Commande par une personne formée et titulaire d'une attestation en cours de validité pour l'utilisation d'élévateurs à nacelle.\n- · L'opérateur est soumis à un contrôle médical, plus particulièrement pour les risques médicaux liés à l'exécution d'une fonction de sécurité et au travail en hauteur.\n- · L'élévateur est utilisé conformément aux instructions et directives telles que figurant dans le manuel d'utilisation de l'appareil.\n- · L'élévateur doit contenir les fiches d'instructions relatives à l'utilisation de la nacelle.\n- · La zone de travail doit être délimitée par un balisage afin de protéger les tiers contre la chute d'objets.\n- · Contrôle visuel de l'engin élévateur par l'utilisateur et/ou l'opérateur chaque jour avant tout travail.\n- · Analyse des documents de contrôle obligatoire (4x/an) et entretien du véhicule.\n- · Veiller à mesurer la vitesse du vent en permanence en se référant à la procédure \"conditions de travail en hauteur\".\n- · Disposer d'un moyen de communication (GSM, Talkie Walkie, etc…) pour avertir les secours en cas d'incident et/ou accident.\n- · Porter un harnais de sécurité en ordre de contrôle.\n- · Balisage de la zone de travail à l'aide de cônes et/ou ruban.\n- · Préparation du matériel (produits, EPI et accessoires).\n- · Placement du harnais de sécurité contrôlé annuellement par un SECT.\n- · Mise en position de l'engin et stabilisation à l'aide des béquilles qui devront être posées mais sorties du côté où la nacelle est levée.\n- · Monter dans le camion en veillant à ne pas se hâter pour ne pas tomber.\n- · S'assurer que la plate-forme n'est pas glissante, et y marcher en toute sécurité.\n- · Entrée dans la nacelle, en veillant à accrocher le harnais via un dispositif anti-chute à la nacelle.\n- · S'assurer que le matériel est arrimé.\n- · Signalez les travaux et le déplacement de l'engin.\n\n## 8. UTILISATION DE PRODUITS DANGEREUX\n\n## 8.1 Généralités\n\nDans le cadre de votre éventuelle mission au sein de l'institution, il est probable que vous soyez amenés à stocker et manipuler des produits dits \"dangereux\".\n\nRappelons que \"substance aux propriétés dangereuses\" est une expression qui englobe toute une série de produits, qu'ils soient inflammables, nocifs pour la santé ou encore nuisibles pour l'environnement.\n\n79\n\nANNEX VII\n\nFR", + "recall": 0.9317269076305221, + "true_md": "- • Quand le travail est terminé, remettre la nacelle dans l’emplacement prévu à cet effet sur le toit en position parking. • Dans le cas où des lignes de vie sont présentes sur le toit, veiller à s’arrimer pour \n\n- sur le toit en position parking. • Dans le cas où des lignes de vie sont présentes sur le toit, veiller à s’arrimer pour atteindre les accès au bâtiment. • Signalez les travaux et le déplacement de l'engin. \n\n- atteindre les accès au bâtiment. • Signalez les travaux et le déplacement de l'engin. \n\n## 7.11 Travail en hauteur par un élévateur à nacelle\n\nLes mesures suivantes doivent être prises (conformément à l'Arrêté Royal du 31 août 2005): • Commande par une personne formée et titulaire d'une attestation en cours de validité \n\n- Les mesures suivantes doivent être prises (conformément à l'Arrêté Royal du 31 août 2005): • Commande par une personne formée et titulaire d'une attestation en cours de validité pour l'utilisation d'élévateurs à nacelle. • L'opérateur est soumis à un contrôle médical, plus particulièrement pour les risques \n\n- pour l'utilisation d'élévateurs à nacelle. • L'opérateur est soumis à un contrôle médical, plus particulièrement pour les risques médicaux liés à l'exécution d'une fonction de sécurité et au travail en hauteur. • L'élévateur est utilisé conformément aux instructions et directives telles que figurant \n\n- médicaux liés à l'exécution d'une fonction de sécurité et au travail en hauteur. • L'élévateur est utilisé conformément aux instructions et directives telles que figurant dans le manuel d'utilisation de l'appareil. • L’élévateur doit contenir les fiches d’instructions relatives à l’utilisation de la nacelle. \n\n- dans le manuel d'utilisation de l'appareil. • L’élévateur doit contenir les fiches d’instructions relatives à l’utilisation de la nacelle. • La zone de travail doit être délimitée par un balisage afin de protéger les tiers contre la \n\n- • L’élévateur doit contenir les fiches d’instructions relatives à l’utilisation de la nacelle. • La zone de travail doit être délimitée par un balisage afin de protéger les tiers contre la chute d'objets. • Contrôle visuel de l’engin élévateur par l’utilisateur et/ou l’opérateur chaque jour avant \n\n- chute d'objets. • Contrôle visuel de l’engin élévateur par l’utilisateur et/ou l’opérateur chaque jour avant tout travail. • Analyse des documents de contrôle obligatoire (4x/an) et entretien du véhicule. \n\n- tout travail. • Analyse des documents de contrôle obligatoire (4x/an) et entretien du véhicule. • Veiller à mesurer la vitesse du vent en permanence en se référant à la procédure \n\n- • Analyse des documents de contrôle obligatoire (4x/an) et entretien du véhicule. • Veiller à mesurer la vitesse du vent en permanence en se référant à la procédure \"conditions de travail en hauteur\". • Disposer d’un moyen de communication (GSM, Talkie Walkie, etc…) pour avertir les \n\n- \"conditions de travail en hauteur\". Disposer d’un moyen de communication (GSM, Talkie Walkie, etc…) pour avertir les secours en cas d’incident et/ou accident. Porter un harnais de sécurité en ordre de contrôle. \n\n- secours en cas d’incident et/ou accident. • Porter un harnais de sécurité en ordre de contrôle. • Balisage de la zone de travail à l’aide de cônes et/ou ruban. \n\n- • Porter un harnais de sécurité en ordre de contrôle. • Balisage de la zone de travail à l’aide de cônes et/ou ruban. • Préparation du matériel (produits, EPI et accessoires). \n\n- • Balisage de la zone de travail à l’aide de cônes et/ou ruban. • Préparation du matériel (produits, EPI et accessoires). • Placement du harnais de sécurité contrôlé annuellement par un SECT. \n\n- • Préparation du matériel (produits, EPI et accessoires). • Placement du harnais de sécurité contrôlé annuellement par un SECT. • Mise en position de l’engin et stabilisation à l’aide des béquilles qui devront être posées \n\n- • Placement du harnais de sécurité contrôlé annuellement par un SECT. • Mise en position de l’engin et stabilisation à l’aide des béquilles qui devront être posées mais sorties du côté où la nacelle est levée. • Monter dans le camion en veillant à ne pas se hâter pour ne pas tomber. \n\n- mais sorties du côté où la nacelle est levée. • Monter dans le camion en veillant à ne pas se hâter pour ne pas tomber. • S’assurer que la plate-forme n’est pas glissante, et y marcher en toute sécurité. \n\n- • Monter dans le camion en veillant à ne pas se hâter pour ne pas tomber. • S’assurer que la plate-forme n’est pas glissante, et y marcher en toute sécurité. • Entrée dans la nacelle, en veillant à accrocher le harnais via un dispositif anti-chute à la \n\n- • S’assurer que la plate-forme n’est pas glissante, et y marcher en toute sécurité. • Entrée dans la nacelle, en veillant à accrocher le harnais via un dispositif anti-chute à la nacelle. • S’assurer que le matériel est arrimé. \n\n- nacelle. • S’assurer que le matériel est arrimé. • Signalez les travaux et le déplacement de l'engin. \n\n- • S’assurer que le matériel est arrimé. • Signalez les travaux et le déplacement de l'engin. \n\n## 8. UTILISATION DE PRODUITS DANGEREUX\n\n## 8.1 Généralités\n\nDans le cadre de votre éventuelle mission au sein de l'institution, il est probable que vous soyez amenés à stocker et manipuler des produits dits \"dangereux\". Rappelons que \"substance aux propriétés dangereuses\" est une expression qui englobe \n\nsoyez amenés à stocker et manipuler des produits dits \"dangereux\". Rappelons que \"substance aux propriétés dangereuses\" est une expression qui englobe toute une série de produits, qu'ils soient inflammables, nocifs pour la santé ou encore nuisibles pour l'environnement. \n\nANNEX VII \n\n79 FR" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9860824277510035, + "doc_id": "c38841eb8cd97e72e8774e1413967e7c213c35f847b113fb5148451146a58005", + "edit_distance": 0.04862236628849271, + "f1_score": 0.992840095465394, + "meteor": 0.9962462831536182, + "precision": 0.9952153110047847, + "pred_md": "EC - FWC services Dec 2018\n\nContract no: [complete]\n\n## II.18.2. Grounds for termination by the contractor\n\nThe contractor may terminate the FWC or any on-going specific contract if the contracting authority fails to comply with its obligations, in particular the obligation to provide the information needed for the contractor to implement the FWC or to perform a specific contract as provided for in the tender specifications.\n\n## II.18.3. Procedure for termination\n\nA party must formally notify the other party of its intention to terminate the FWC or a specific contract and the grounds for termination.\n\nThe other party has 30 days following the date of receipt to submit observations, including the measures it has taken or will take to continue fulfilling its contractual obligations. Failing that, the decision to terminate becomes enforceable the day after the time limit for submitting observations has elapsed.\n\nIf the other party submits observations, the party intending to terminate must formally notify it either of the withdrawal of its intention to terminate or of its final decision to terminate.\n\nIn the cases referred to in points (a) to (d), (g) to (i), (k) to(n) of Article II.18.1 and in Article II.18.2, the date on which the termination takes effect must be specified in the formal notification .\n\nIn the cases referred to in points (e), (f) and (j) of Article II.18.1, the termination takes effect on the day following the date on which the contractor receives notification of termination.\n\nIn addition, at the request of the contracting authority and regardless of the grounds for termination, the contractor must provide all necessary assistance, including information, documents and files, to allow the contracting authority to complete, continue or transfer the services to a new contractor or internally, without interruption or adverse effect on the quality or continuity of the services. The parties may agree to draw up a transition plan detailing the contractor's assistance unless such plan is already detailed in other contractual documents or in the tender specifications. The contractor must provide such assistance at no additional cost, except if it can demonstrate that it requires substantial additional resources or means, in which case it must provide an estimate of the costs involved and the parties will negotiate an arrangement in good faith.\n\n## II.18.4. Effects of termination\n\nThe contractor is liable for damage incurred by the contracting authority as a result of the termination of the FWC or a specific contract including the additional cost of appointing and contracting another contractor to provide or complete the services, except if the damage is a result of a termination in accordance with Article II.18.1(j), (k) or (l) or Article II.18.2. The contracting authority may claim compensation for such damage.\n\nThe contractor is not entitled to compensation for any loss resulting from the termination of the FWC or a specific contract , including loss of anticipated profits, unless the loss was caused by the situation specified in Article II.18.2.\n\nThe contractor must take all appropriate measures to minimise costs, prevent damage and cancel or reduce its commitments.\n\nWithin 60 days of the date of termination, the contractor must submit any report, deliverable or result and any invoice required for services that were provided before the date of termination.\n\n29", + "recall": 0.9904761904761905, + "true_md": "EC - FWC services Dec 2018 \n\nContract no: [complete] \n\n## II.18.2. Grounds for termination by the contractor\n\n## II.18.3. Procedure for termination\n\n## II.18.4. Effects of termination\n\nThe contractor may terminate the FWC or any on-going specific contract if the contracting authority fails to comply with its obligations, in particular the obligation to provide the information needed for the contractor to implement the FWC or to perform a specific contract as provided for in the tender specifications. \n\nA party must formally notify the other party of its intention to terminate the FWC or a specific contract and the grounds for termination.\n\nThe other party has 30 days following the date of receipt to submit observations, including the measures it has taken or will take to continue fulfilling its contractual obligations. Failing that, the decision to terminate becomes enforceable the day after the time limit for submitting observations has elapsed.\n\nIf the other party submits observations, the party intending to terminate must formally notify it either of the withdrawal of its intention to terminate or of its final decision to terminate.\n\nIn the cases referred to in points (a) to (d), (g) to (i), (k) to(n) of Article II.18.1 and in Article II.18.2, the date on which the termination takes effect must be specified in the formal notification . \n\nIn the cases referred to in points (e), (f) and (j) of Article II.18.1, the termination takes effect on the day following the date on which the contractor receives notification of termination.\n\nIn addition, at the request of the contracting authority and regardless of the grounds for termination, the contractor must provide all necessary assistance, including information, documents and files, to allow the contracting authority to complete, continue or transfer the services to a new contractor or internally, without interruption or adverse effect on the quality or continuity of the services. The parties may agree to draw up a transition plan detailing the contractor’s assistance unless such plan is already detailed in other contractual documents or in the tender specifications. The contractor must provide such assistance at no additional cost, except if it can demonstrate that it requires substantial additional resources or means, in which case it must provide an estimate of the costs involved and the parties will negotiate an arrangement in good faith. \n\nThe contractor is liable for damage incurred by the contracting authority as a result of the termination of the FWC or a specific contract including the additional cost of appointing and contracting another contractor to provide or complete the services, except if the damage is a result of a termination in accordance with Article II.18.1(j), (k) or (l) or Article II.18.2. The contracting authority may claim compensation for such damage. \n\nThe contractor is not entitled to compensation for any loss resulting from the termination of the FWC or a specific contract , including loss of anticipated profits, unless the loss was caused by the situation specified in Article II.18.2.\n\nThe contractor must take all appropriate measures to minimise costs, prevent damage and cancel or reduce its commitments.\n\nWithin 60 days of the date of termination, the contractor must submit any report, deliverable or result and any invoice required for services that were provided before the date of termination.\n\n29" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9835040603910953, + "doc_id": "36d18d49bf3efeee57b771a8cd1e25aa54018fa9f7f498f68ff18652b1fc3c3c", + "edit_distance": 0.8789625360230547, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.702999547467199, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Signature: \\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\n\nFait à [ lieu ], le [ date ]\n\nSignature:\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\n\nFait à [ lieu ], le [ date ]\n\nen deux exemplaires en français.\n\n## II. CONDITIONS GÉNÉRALES DU CONTRAT-CADRE DE SERVICES\n\n## II.1 DÉFINITIONS\n\nAux fins du CC, les définitions suivantes (des termes indiqués en italique dans le texte) sont applicables:\n\n\"auteur\" : toute personne physique qui contribue à la production du résultat ;\n\n\" back office \": le(s) système(s) interne(s) utilisé(s) par les parties pour traiter les factures électroniques;\n\n\"bon de commande\" : forme simplifiée de contrat par lequel le pouvoir adjudicateur commande des services au titre du CC;\n\n\"conflit d'intérêts\" : situation dans laquelle l' exécution impartiale et objective du CC par le contractant est compromise pour des motifs familiaux, affectifs, d'affinité politique ou nationale, d'intérêt économique ou pour tout autre motif de communauté d'intérêt avec le pouvoir adjudicateur ou un tiers en rapport avec l'objet du CC;\n\n\"demande de services\" : document produit par le pouvoir adjudicateur demandant aux contractants d'un CC multiple de fournir une offre spécifique de services dont les conditions ne sont pas entièrement définies dans le CC;\n\n\"document de contrôle des interfaces\" : document d'orientation qui énonce les spécifications techniques, les normes de messagerie, les normes de sécurité, les règles syntaxiques et sémantiques, etc. pour faciliter la connexion de machine à machine. Ce document est mis à jour régulièrement;\n\n\"droit préexistant\" : tout droit de propriété industrielle et intellectuelle sur un matériel préexistant ; il peut s'agir d'un droit de propriété, d'un droit de licence et/ou d'un droit d'utilisation appartenant au contractant, à l' auteur , au pouvoir adjudicateur ainsi qu'à tout tiers;\n\n\" e-PRIOR\" : plateforme de communication axée sur le service, qui fournit une série de services web et permet l'échange de messages et de documents électroniques normalisés entre les parties; Cet échange se fait au moyen de services web, avec une connexion de machine à machine entre les systèmes de back office des parties ( messages EDI ), ou au moyen d'une application web (le portail fournisseurs ). La plateforme peut être utilisée pour l'échange, entre les parties, de documents électroniques tels que les factures électroniques;\n\n\"exécution d'un bon de commande\" : exécution de tâches et prestation par le contractant des services achetés pour le pouvoir adjudicateur;\n\n\"exécution du CC\" : l'achat de services envisagé dans le CC par la signature et l' exécution de bons\n\nde commande ;\n\n\"faute professionnelle grave\" : violation des dispositions législatives ou réglementaires applicables ou des normes de déontologie de la profession à laquelle appartient un contractant ou une personne liée, y compris toute conduite donnant lieu à une exploitation ou des abus sexuels ou autres, ou toute conduite fautive du contractant ou d'une personne liée qui a une incidence sur sa crédibilité professionnelle, dès lors que cette conduite dénote une intention fautive ou une négligence grave;\n\n\"force majeure\" : toute situation ou tout événement imprévisible et exceptionnel, indépendant de la volonté des parties, qui empêche l'une d'entre elles d'exécuter une ou plusieurs de ses obligations découlant du CC. La situation ou l'événement ne doit pas être imputable à la faute ou à la négligence de l'une des parties ou d'un sous-traitant, et doit se révéler inévitable en dépit de toute la diligence employée. Une défaillance dans une prestation, le défaut des équipements, du matériel ou des matériaux ou leur mise à disposition tardive, les conflits de travail, les grèves et les difficultés financières ne peuvent être invoqués comme cas de force majeure , sauf si cette situation est la conséquence directe d'un cas de force majeure établi;\n\n12\n\nFR", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "\"force majeure\" : toute situation ou tout événement imprévisible et exceptionnel, indépendant de la volonté des parties, qui empêche l'une d'entre elles d'exécuter une ou plusieurs de ses obligations découlant du CC. La situation ou l'événement ne doit pas être imputable à la faute ou à la négligence de l'une des parties ou d'un sous-traitant, et doit se révéler inévitable en dépit de toute la diligence employée. Une défaillance dans une prestation, le défaut des équipements, du matériel ou des matériaux ou leur mise à disposition tardive, les conflits de travail, les grèves et les difficultés financières ne peuvent être invoqués comme cas de force majeure , sauf si cette situation est la conséquence directe d'un cas de force majeure établi; \n\n\"faute professionnelle grave\" : violation des dispositions législatives ou réglementaires applicables ou des normes de déontologie de la profession à laquelle appartient un contractant ou une personne liée, y compris toute conduite donnant lieu à une exploitation ou des abus sexuels ou autres, ou toute conduite fautive du contractant ou d'une personne liée qui a une incidence sur sa crédibilité professionnelle, dès lors que cette conduite dénote une intention fautive ou une négligence grave; \n\n\"exécution du CC\" : l'achat de services envisagé dans le CC par la signature et l' exécution de bons de commande ; \n\n\"exécution d'un bon de commande\" : exécution de tâches et prestation par le contractant des services achetés pour le pouvoir adjudicateur; \n\n\" e-PRIOR\" : plateforme de communication axée sur le service, qui fournit une série de services web et permet l'échange de messages et de documents électroniques normalisés entre les parties; Cet échange se fait au moyen de services web, avec une connexion de machine à machine entre les systèmes de back office des parties ( messages EDI ), ou au moyen d'une application web (le portail fournisseurs ). La plateforme peut être utilisée pour l'échange, entre les parties, de documents électroniques tels que les factures électroniques; \n\n\"droit préexistant\" : tout droit de propriété industrielle et intellectuelle sur un matériel préexistant ; il peut s'agir d'un droit de propriété, d'un droit de licence et/ou d'un droit d'utilisation appartenant au contractant, à l' auteur , au pouvoir adjudicateur ainsi qu'à tout tiers; \n\n\"document de contrôle des interfaces\" : document d'orientation qui énonce les spécifications techniques, les normes de messagerie, les normes de sécurité, les règles syntaxiques et sémantiques, etc. pour faciliter la connexion de machine à machine. Ce document est mis à jour régulièrement; \n\n\"demande de services\" : document produit par le pouvoir adjudicateur demandant aux contractants d'un CC multiple de fournir une offre spécifique de services dont les conditions ne sont pas entièrement définies dans le CC; \n\n\"conflit d'intérêts\" : situation dans laquelle l' exécution impartiale et objective du CC par le contractant est compromise pour des motifs familiaux, affectifs, d'affinité politique ou nationale, d'intérêt économique ou pour tout autre motif de communauté d'intérêt avec le pouvoir adjudicateur ou un tiers en rapport avec l'objet du CC; \n\n\"bon de commande\" : forme simplifiée de contrat par lequel le pouvoir adjudicateur commande des services au titre du CC; \n\n\" back office \": le(s) système(s) interne(s) utilisé(s) par les parties pour traiter les factures électroniques; \n\n\"auteur\" : toute personne physique qui contribue à la production du résultat ; \n\nAux fins du CC, les définitions suivantes (des termes indiqués en italique dans le texte) sont applicables: \n\nSignature: \\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_ \n\nSignature:\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_ \n\nFait à [ lieu ], le [ date ] \n\nFait à [ lieu ], le [ date ] \n\nen deux exemplaires en français. \n\n## II. CONDITIONS GÉNÉRALES DU CONTRAT-CADRE DE SERVICES\n\n## II.1 DÉFINITIONS\n\n12 FR\n\n12 FR" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9676571401021553, + "doc_id": "aa8318df5623cad35c22fffe692afd849f29db1117b7fa4acae1a8c0f3647e0c", + "edit_distance": 0.17718940936863545, + "f1_score": 0.9975903614457832, + "meteor": 0.977023639490483, + "precision": 0.9951923076923077, + "pred_md": "## 3.6 Award (ranking of tenders)\n\nThe tenders in each lot shall be ranked according to the highest scoring in accordance with the formula below.\n\nThis formula will be applied only for offers meeting the minimum quality thresholds as set above. Tenders reaching the minimum quality thresholds will be scored 0 . For any additional quality point, the scoring will be as follows:\n\nScore tender X =\n\n{[((SUM of ALL Quality Award Criteria points)-60)/40] x 60 quality points} + [(Lowest Total Price/ Total Price of tender X) x (40 price points)]\n\nNOTE: where the Total Price of tender X is higher than 3 times the Lowest Total Price, tender X will be given 0 price points.\n\n-  The Contract shall be awarded to the first three ranked tenderers in each lot, which comply with the Tender Specifications, have access to this procurement, are not in an exclusion situation and fulfil with the selection criteria.\n\nThe ranking will determine the sequence in which the contractors will be offered specific contracts during the implementation of the FWC in each lot .\n\n## 3.7 Award of Specific Contracts in Lot 1 reopening of competition\n\nThe procedure to sign a specific contract will include the following steps:\n\n## 1. Request for offer\n\nExcept in the case of a conflict of interests (see section 3.2.4), each request for offer must be sent to all FWC contractors simultaneously. The request will include tender specifications that set out the specific tasks to be performed, an outline of the specific timetable for the individual assignment, volumes and the duration of the tasks. The request will also include information on the contract award criteria to be applied to the offers, as mentioned in point 4 below.\n\n## 2. Acceptance of the request for offer by the FWC contractors/Availability\n\nUnless specified differently, within 5 working days from the date of the request for offer, the FWC contractors shall inform the Contracting Authority in written form (e.g. by e-mail) whether or not they have the capacity to carry out the services required and whether or not they will submit an offer.\n\n## 3. Offer by the FWC contractor\n\nWithin the time limit specified in the request for offer (in general not less than 15 working days) the FWC contractors shall submit an offer for the required tasks by e-mail only.\n\nUp to 5 working days before the offer submission deadline, the FWC contractors are entitled to send questions before the deadline exclusively to [ FWC666 ]@echa.europa.eu. The answer to any questions will be simultaneously sent by the Contracting Authority to\n\n38", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## 3.6 Award (ranking of tenders)\n\n## 3.7 Award of Specific Contracts in Lot 1 reopening of competition\n\n## 1. Request for offer\n\n## 2. Acceptance of the request for offer by the FWC contractors/Availability\n\n## 3. Offer by the FWC contractor\n\nThe tenders in each lot shall be ranked according to the highest scoring in accordance with the formula below. \n\nThis formula will be applied only for offers meeting the minimum quality thresholds as set above. Tenders reaching the minimum quality thresholds will be scored 0 . For any additional quality point, the scoring will be as follows: \n\nScore tender X = \n\n{[((SUM of ALL Quality Award Criteria points)-60)/40] x 60 quality points} + [(Lowest Total Price/ Total Price of tender X) x (40 price points)]\n\nNOTE: where the Total Price of tender X is higher than 3 times the Lowest Total Price, tender X will be given 0 price points. \n\n The Contract shall be awarded to the first three ranked tenderers in each lot, which comply with the Tender Specifications, have access to this procurement, are not in an exclusion situation and fulfil with the selection criteria. \n\nThe ranking will determine the sequence in which the contractors will be offered specific contracts during the implementation of the FWC in each lot . \n\nThe procedure to sign a specific contract will include the following steps:\n\nExcept in the case of a conflict of interests (see section 3.2.4), each request for offer must be sent to all FWC contractors simultaneously. The request will include tender specifications that set out the specific tasks to be performed, an outline of the specific timetable for the individual assignment, volumes and the duration of the tasks. The request will also include information on the contract award criteria to be applied to the offers, as mentioned in point 4 below.\n\nUnless specified differently, within 5 working days from the date of the request for offer, the FWC contractors shall inform the Contracting Authority in written form (e.g. by e-mail) whether or not they have the capacity to carry out the services required and whether or not they will submit an offer. \n\nWithin the time limit specified in the request for offer (in general not less than 15 working days) the FWC contractors shall submit an offer for the required tasks by e-mail only. \n\nUp to 5 working days before the offer submission deadline, the FWC contractors are entitled to send questions before the deadline exclusively to [ FWC666 ]@echa.europa.eu. The answer to any questions will be simultaneously sent by the Contracting Authority to \n\n38" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9321158296083423, + "doc_id": "d474df0058b3d8b81426c8fede94edf81d62d47b8c4aea60489a20ee8b5cfe7b", + "edit_distance": 0.79073756432247, + "f1_score": 0.9835294117647059, + "meteor": 0.6625160139784384, + "precision": 0.9858490566037735, + "pred_md": "General Administrative and Submission Clauses\n\n## 7.1.2. Assessment of joint tenders\n\nJoint tenders submitted by Groups will be assessed as follows:\n\n-  the exclusion criteria and the selection criteria for the legal capacity will be assessed in relation to each member of the Group individually.\n-  The selection criteria for the economic and financial capacity such as overall turnover or turnover with respect to the specific tender will be assessed on a consolidated assessment for all members of the Group together.\n\nThe selection criteria for the technical and professional capacity will be assessed in relation to the combined capacities of all members of the Group, as a whole.\n\n-  The award criteria will be assessed in relation to the tender.\n\nSince all members of the Group are jointly and severally liable towards EIB for the performance of the contract, statements included in the joint offer saying, for instance:\n\n-  that each member of the Group will be responsible only for a specific part of the contract, or\n-  that a separate contract should be signed with each member of the Group if the joint offer is successful,\n\nare incompatible with the principle of joint and several liability.\n\nEIB will disregard any such statement contained in a Joint tender, and it reserves the right to reject such tenders without further evaluation, on the grounds that they do not comply with the Procurement Documents.\n\nN.B. The Bank will require that the Tenderer replaces a member of the Group which does not meet a relevant selection criteria or in respect of which there are grounds for exclusion. Any proposed replacement will be assessed under the same conditions. Should the composition of the Group change at any point during the procurement procedure the offer may be rejected.\n\n## 7.1.3. Joint tender during the contract implementation\n\nAll members of the Group shall be jointly and severally liable towards EIB for the performance of the contract, they shall comply with the Terms and Conditions of the Contract and ensure the proper execution of their respective share of the services.\n\nThe Group Leader - duly authorised by the other members of the Group - will be entitled to sign any contractual documents; it shall act as a single point of contact with EIB in connection with the services to be provided under the contract; it shall co-ordinate the provision of the services by the Group members to EIB; it shall guarantee a proper administration of the contract. Subject to the provisions of the contract, the Bank shall make payments to the Group Leader only, and against invoices submitted by the Group leader only.\n\nThe composition of the Group and the allocation of tasks among the members of the Group shall not be altered without prior written information to EIB.\n\n## 7.2. Subcontracting general\n\nThe Tenderer may subcontract part of the tasks specified in the 'Terms of Reference' to other economic operators, as long as the supplies and/or services and/or works are provided in accordance with the 'Terms of Reference'.\n\nIn case of subcontracting the Tenderer shall clearly state in the section of the tender related to the tenderer's exclusion situation and capacity:\n\nLast updated: June 2020\n\nPage 13 of 21", + "recall": 0.9812206572769953, + "true_md": "General Administrative and Submission Clauses\n\n## 7.1.2. Assessment of joint tenders\n\n## 7.1.3. Joint tender during the contract implementation\n\n## 7.2. Subcontracting general\n\nIn case of subcontracting the Tenderer shall clearly state in the section of the tender related to the tenderer’s exclusion situation and capacity: \n\nThe Tenderer may subcontract part of the tasks specified in the `Terms of Reference` to other economic operators, as long as the supplies and/or services and/or works are provided in accordance with the `Terms of Reference`.\n\nThe composition of the Group and the allocation of tasks among the members of the Group shall not be altered without prior written information to EIB. \n\nThe Group Leader – duly authorised by the other members of the Group – will be entitled to sign any contractual documents; it shall act as a single point of contact with EIB in connection with the services to be provided under the contract; it shall co-ordinate the provision of the services by the Group members to EIB; it shall guarantee a proper administration of the contract. Subject to the provisions of the contract, the Bank shall make payments to the Group Leader only, and against invoices submitted by the Group leader only. \n\nAll members of the Group shall be jointly and severally liable towards EIB for the performance of the contract, they shall comply with the Terms and Conditions of the Contract and ensure the proper execution of their respective share of the services.\n\nN.B. The Bank will require that the Tenderer replaces a member of the Group which does not meet a relevant selection criteria or in respect of which there are grounds for exclusion. Any proposed replacement will be assessed under the same conditions. Should the composition of the Group change at any point during the procurement procedure the offer may be rejected. \n\nEIB will disregard any such statement contained in a Joint tender, and it reserves the right to reject such tenders without further evaluation, on the grounds that they do not comply with the Procurement Documents. \n\nare incompatible with the principle of joint and several liability.\n\nSince all members of the Group are jointly and severally liable towards EIB for the performance of the contract, statements included in the joint offer saying, for instance: \n\nJoint tenders submitted by Groups will be assessed as follows: \n\n-  The award criteria will be assessed in relation to the tender. \n\n-  The selection criteria for the economic and financial capacity such as overall turnover or turnover with respect to the specific tender will be assessed on a consolidated assessment for all members of the Group together. \n\n-  the exclusion criteria and the selection criteria for the legal capacity will be assessed in relation to each member of the Group individually. \n\n-  that each member of the Group will be responsible only for a specific part of the contract, or \n\n-  that a separate contract should be signed with each member of the Group if the joint offer is successful,\n\nThe selection criteria for the technical and professional capacity will be assessed in relation to the combined capacities of all members of the Group, as a whole. \n\nLast updated: June 2020\n\nPage 13 of 21" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9756262894132417, + "doc_id": "b3a4a1af1d3aec084ece3d88e10086a2934da645a7232d130cb5def7e7dcf295", + "edit_distance": 0.7678916827852998, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.7578544591868206, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## 3.4. Accidents de travail, incidents ou dégâts matériels\n\n- 3.4.1 Chaque accident de travail, incident ou dégât matériel doit être immédiatement signalé au gestionnaire de projet et au UP du CUE.\n- 3.4.2 Chaque accident de travail, incident ou dégât matériel donne lieu à l'établissement d'un rapport par le service de prévention de l'entreprise dont provient la victime. Une copie est transmise dans les 5 jours au gestionnaire de projet du CUE et au UP du CUE. Si ce délai ne peut être respecté en raison d'un manque de données ou pour d'autres motifs, il y a lieu de le signaler.\n- 3.4.3 L'entreprise est tenue de respecter les dispositions prescrites par la loi en ce qui concerne les accidents de travail.\n\n## 4. TRAVAUX A RISQUES\n\n## 4.1. Travaux comportant un risque d'incendie\n\n- 4.1.1 Avant le début de travaux à flamme nue ou pour des travaux qui d'une manière ou d'une autre peuvent comporter un danger d'incendie ou d'explosion, une \"autorisation de travail / permis feu\" doit être soumise au UP. Ce document (voir appendice 5) peut être obtenu auprès du service \"Gérance technique\" (bureau SG 04 FG 11 - tél. 02/281.74.14). La procédure à suivre pour l'utilisation de ce document est précisée également en appendice 5.\n- 4.1.2 En cas de travaux qui, du fait de la production de quantités importantes de poussières ou de fumées, peuvent endommager ou encrasser les détecteurs d'incendie, ces derniers doivent être protégés par l'entreprise exécutante ou, en cas de travaux de longue durée ou de grande ampleur, démontés par l'entreprise responsable de leur entretien. Si l'entrepreneur doit procéder à la protection des détecteurs, une autorisation doit être demandée au UP. En aucun cas, l'entreprise ne peut démonter ou recouvrir un détecteur de sa propre initiative sans autorisation préalable de l'entreprise d'entretien de ces installations. De même, pour chaque intervention sur les sirènes ou boutons poussoirs, l'entreprise responsable pour l'entretien de ces installations doit être consultée.\n- 4.1.3 À la fin des travaux pour lesquels une autorisation pour travaux présentant un danger d'incendie a été délivrée, l'entreprise s'assure que tout danger d'incendie ou d'explosion est écarté. Toutes les protections des détecteurs sont enlevées. Au besoin, la firme chargée d'entretenir l'installation de détection est informée de la fin des travaux afin de lui permettre de remettre l'installation dans son état normal. Le CDI doit être informé de la fin des travaux.\n- 4.1.4. Lorsque la fin des travaux a été signalée, plus aucune opération pouvant comporter un risque d'incendie ou d'explosion ne peut être exécutée sans nouvelle autorisation.\n\n## 4.2 Autres travaux\n\n- 4.2.1 Une autorisation de travail doit être demandée au UP pour l'exécution de travaux aux installations qui, d'une manière ou d'une autre, interviennent dans la lutte contre l'incendie,\n\n71\n\nANNEX VII\n\nFR", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## 3.4. Accidents de travail, incidents ou dégâts matériels\n\n## 4. TRAVAUX A RISQUES\n\n## 4.1. Travaux comportant un risque d'incendie\n\n## 4.2 Autres travaux\n\n71 FR \n\nANNEX VII \n\n- 4.2.1 Une autorisation de travail doit être demandée au UP pour l'exécution de travaux aux installations qui, d'une manière ou d'une autre, interviennent dans la lutte contre l'incendie, \n\n- 4.1.4. Lorsque la fin des travaux a été signalée, plus aucune opération pouvant comporter un risque d'incendie ou d'explosion ne peut être exécutée sans nouvelle autorisation. \n\n- 4.1.3 À la fin des travaux pour lesquels une autorisation pour travaux présentant un danger d'incendie a été délivrée, l'entreprise s'assure que tout danger d'incendie ou d'explosion est écarté. Toutes les protections des détecteurs sont enlevées. Au besoin, la firme chargée d'entretenir l'installation de détection est informée de la fin des travaux afin de lui permettre de remettre l'installation dans son état normal. Le CDI doit être informé de la fin des travaux. \n\n- 4.1.2 En cas de travaux qui, du fait de la production de quantités importantes de poussières ou de fumées, peuvent endommager ou encrasser les détecteurs d'incendie, ces derniers doivent être protégés par l'entreprise exécutante ou, en cas de travaux de longue durée ou de grande ampleur, démontés par l'entreprise responsable de leur entretien. Si l'entrepreneur doit procéder à la protection des détecteurs, une autorisation doit être demandée au UP. En aucun cas, l'entreprise ne peut démonter ou recouvrir un détecteur de sa propre initiative sans autorisation préalable de l'entreprise d'entretien de ces installations. De même, pour chaque intervention sur les sirènes ou boutons poussoirs, l'entreprise responsable pour l'entretien de ces installations doit être consultée. \n\n- 4.1.1 Avant le début de travaux à flamme nue ou pour des travaux qui d'une manière ou d'une autre peuvent comporter un danger d'incendie ou d'explosion, une \"autorisation de travail / permis feu\" doit être soumise au UP. Ce document (voir appendice 5) peut être obtenu auprès du service \"Gérance technique\" (bureau SG 04 FG 11 - tél. 02/281.74.14). La procédure à suivre pour l'utilisation de ce document est précisée également en appendice 5. \n\n- 3.4.3 L'entreprise est tenue de respecter les dispositions prescrites par la loi en ce qui concerne les accidents de travail. \n\n- 3.4.2 Chaque accident de travail, incident ou dégât matériel donne lieu à l'établissement d'un rapport par le service de prévention de l'entreprise dont provient la victime. Une copie est transmise dans les 5 jours au gestionnaire de projet du CUE et au UP du CUE. Si ce délai ne peut être respecté en raison d'un manque de données ou pour d'autres motifs, il y a lieu de le signaler. \n\n- 3.4.1 Chaque accident de travail, incident ou dégât matériel doit être immédiatement signalé au gestionnaire de projet et au UP du CUE." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.907391280684608, + "doc_id": "000961776c38df64596fd7c67de142ea2f5aa8aa49bed53af85ad3c8b47bc627", + "edit_distance": 0.05851063829787234, + "f1_score": 0.935672514619883, + "meteor": 0.9567901234567903, + "precision": 0.9523809523809523, + "pred_md": "EC - FWC services Dec 2018\n\nContract no: [complete]\n\n## Declaration on the list of pre-existing rights\n\n- I, [ insert name of the authorised representative of the contractor ] representing [ insert name of the contractor ] ('the contractor'), party to the [framework] [specific] contract [ insert title and number ]\n\n[ option 1: warrant that the results are free of rights or claims from creators or from any third parties for any use the contracting authority may envisage and declare that the results do not contain any preexisting rights to the results or parts of the results or to pre-existing materials as defined in the abovementioned contract.]\n\n[ option 2: warrant that the results and the pre-existing material incorporated in the results are free of rights or claims from creators or from any third parties for any use the contracting authority may envisage and declare that the results contain the following pre-existing rights:]\n\n## Please fill in the table - one line per pre-existing right\n\n39", + "recall": 0.9195402298850575, + "true_md": "EC - FWC services Dec 2018 \n\nContract no: [complete] \n\n## Declaration on the list of pre-existing rights\n\nI, [ insert name of the authorised representative of the contractor ] representing [ insert name of the contractor ] (‘the contractor’), party to the [framework] [specific] contract [ insert title and number ]\n\n[ option 1: warrant that the results are free of rights or claims from creators or from any third parties for any use the contracting authority may envisage and declare that the results do not contain any pre- existing rights to the results or parts of the results or to pre-existing materials as defined in the above- mentioned contract.]\n\n[ option 2: warrant that the results and the pre-existing material incorporated in the results are free of rights or claims from creators or from any third parties for any use the contracting authority may envisage and declare that the results contain the following pre-existing rights:]\n\nPlease fill in the table – one line per pre-existing right\n\n39" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8868734272327256, + "doc_id": "bbd9df4698d7f5161cadb4316590947620aae47f4ddd6aa43ca53b2ba7c64752", + "edit_distance": 0.5646067415730337, + "f1_score": 0.9493087557603687, + "meteor": 0.9360830868752251, + "precision": 0.9537037037037037, + "pred_md": "## AWARD CRITERIA LOT 1\n\n## AW 01 -OVERALL MANAGEMENT OF THE SERVICES\n\n## Reference: [insert] Max size: 15 pages Max: 20 points Min: 12 points\n\nWith reference to the service requirements as defined in the Technical Specifications (i.e. the objectives, activities and deliverables), elaborate a proposal supporting the service delivery under the following Work Packages (WP) reflecting future operational scenarios:\n\n- · [WP1] Governance\n- · [WP2] IT Enterprise Architecture, strategy and Security\n- · Section 7 Quality requirements\n\n## AW 02 -WORKING IN A MULTI-PARTY FWC\n\n## Reference: [insert] Max size: 25 pages Max: 30 points Min: 18 points\n\nWith reference to the service requirements as defined in the Technical Specifications (i.e. the objectives, activities and deliverables), elaborate a proposal supporting the service delivery under the following sequences of Work Packages (WP) reflecting future operational scenarios:\n\n- · Sequence 1: [WP5] Transform → [WP4] Handover\n- · Sequence 2: [WP6] Run → [WP3] Takeover\n\n## AW 03 -MANAGING INNOVATION TRHOUGH TRANSFORMATION\n\n## Reference: [insert] Max size: 25 pages Max: 30 points Min: 18 points\n\nWith reference to the service requirements as defined in the Technical Specifications (i.e. the objectives, activities and deliverables), elaborate a proposal supporting the service delivery under the following Work Packages (WP) reflecting future operational scenarios:\n\n- -[WP2] IT Enterprise Architecture, strategy and Security\n- -[WP5] Transform\n\n## AW 04 -EFFECTIVE MANAGEMENT OF HUMAN CAPITAL\n\n## Reference: [insert] Max size: 15 pages Max: 20 points Min: 12 points\n\nWith reference to the service requirements as defined in the Technical Specifications, elaborate a proposal in relation with the activities and objectives detailed under the following sections reflecting future operational scenarios:\n\n32", + "recall": 0.944954128440367, + "true_md": "## AWARD CRITERIA LOT 1\n\n## AW 01 – OVERALL MANAGEMENT OF THE SERVICES\n\n## AW 02 – WORKING IN A MULTI-PARTY FWC\n\n## AW 03 – MANAGING INNOVATION TRHOUGH TRANSFORMATION\n\n## AW 04 – EFFECTIVE MANAGEMENT OF HUMAN CAPITAL\n\nReference: [insert]\n\nMax size: 15 pages \n\nMax: 20 points \n\nMin: 12 points \n\nWith reference to the service requirements as defined in the Technical Specifications (i.e. the objectives, activities and deliverables), elaborate a proposal supporting the service delivery under the following Work Packages (WP) reflecting future operational scenarios: \n\nReference: [insert]\n\nMax size: 25 pages \n\nMax: 30 points \n\nMin: 18 points \n\nWith reference to the service requirements as defined in the Technical Specifications (i.e. the objectives, activities and deliverables), elaborate a proposal supporting the service delivery under the following sequences of Work Packages (WP) reflecting future operational scenarios: \n\nReference: [insert]\n\nMax size: 25 pages \n\nMax: 30 points \n\nMin: 18 points \n\nWith reference to the service requirements as defined in the Technical Specifications (i.e. the objectives, activities and deliverables), elaborate a proposal supporting the service delivery under the following Work Packages (WP) reflecting future operational scenarios: \n\nReference: [insert]\n\nMax size: 15 pages \n\nMax: 20 points \n\nMin: 12 points \n\nWith reference to the service requirements as defined in the Technical Specifications, elaborate a proposal in relation with the activities and objectives detailed under the following sections reflecting future operational scenarios: \n\n- • [WP1] Governance \n\n- • [WP2] IT Enterprise Architecture, strategy and Security \n\n- • Section 7 Quality requirements\n\n- • Sequence 1: [WP5] Transform → [WP4] Handover \n\n- • Sequence 2: [WP6] Run → [WP3] Takeover\n\n- - [WP2] IT Enterprise Architecture, strategy and Security \n\n- - [WP5] Transform \n\n32" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9401293251948597, + "doc_id": "8e027627d9d93189389d62cfe14b5ccfbada0d0d8d7aa64332d8a5a4d5760045", + "edit_distance": 0.3824130879345603, + "f1_score": 0.9877149877149877, + "meteor": 0.9638628747598014, + "precision": 0.9852941176470589, + "pred_md": "General Administrative and Submission Clauses\n\n-  to award the contract to the Tenderer(s) of its choice, in accordance with the criteria set out in the Procurement Documents, or not to award it to any Tenderer, or in case of lots, to award the lots to different Tenderers or to cancel certain lots;\n-  to decline without further comment any tender that does not accept its Model Contract and the General Terms and Conditions of EIB applicable;\n-  to reject all tenders whose financial offers are above the estimated contract value as indicated in the Procurement Documents;\n-  to cancel the procurement procedure without notice and reject all tenders at any time prior to the contract signature, without thereby incurring any liability to the affected economic operators;\n-  EIB will not be responsible for, or pay for, expenses or losses that may be incurred by the Tenderer in the preparation of its tender and/or during the tender evaluation period.\n\nTenderers shall only participate to EIB's procurement procedures on the understanding that they would not be entitled to any form of compensation, in particular should the EIB decide to discontinue the procurement procedure before a contract is signed.\n\nIn case Tenderers would like to raise objections or ask questions about the Procurement Documents they should comply with the procedure indicated in point 3 above.\n\n## 5. Opening of Tenders\n\n## 5.1. Opening session\n\nTenders are opened in a non-public opening session by an opening board, whose members are appointed by EIB under guarantee of impartiality and confidentiality.\n\n## 5.2. Formal opening requirements\n\nThe main aim of the opening session is to check whether the tenders received are compliant with the following formal requirements:\n\n-  the tender was not dispatched later than the dispatch deadline;\n-  the package containing the tender is sealed, in order to guarantee the confidentiality and integrity of data;\n-  the tender contains information and documentation on the Tenderer's exclusion situation and legal capacity (if applicable), a technical proposal and a financial proposal;\n-  the technical proposal and the financial proposal are signed;\n-  the tender is submitted in the number of required copies.\n\nIf tenders are not compliant with any of the above requirements they may be rejected.\n\nN.B. Tenderers are expected to submit complete tenders, corresponding to all requirements set out in the tender documentation item by item.\n\n## 5.3. Opening record\n\nThe non-public opening session will take place at EIB's premises on the date and time indicated in point 1.4 in the 'Terms of Reference'.\n\nLast updated: June 2020\n\nPage 10 of 21", + "recall": 0.9901477832512315, + "true_md": "General Administrative and Submission Clauses\n\n-  to award the contract to the Tenderer(s) of its choice, in accordance with the criteria set out in the Procurement Documents, or not to award it to any Tenderer, or in case of lots, to award the lots to different Tenderers or to cancel certain lots; \n\n-  to decline without further comment any tender that does not accept its Model Contract and the General Terms and Conditions of EIB applicable; \n\n-  to reject all tenders whose financial offers are above the estimated contract value as indicated in the Procurement Documents;\n\n-  to cancel the procurement procedure without notice and reject all tenders at any time prior to the contract signature, without thereby incurring any liability to the affected economic operators; \n\n-  EIB will not be responsible for, or pay for, expenses or losses that may be incurred by the Tenderer in the preparation of its tender and/or during the tender evaluation period. \n\nTenderers shall only participate to EIB’s procurement procedures on the understanding that they would not be entitled to any form of compensation, in particular should the EIB decide to discontinue the procurement procedure before a contract is signed.\n\nIn case Tenderers would like to raise objections or ask questions about the Procurement Documents they should comply with the procedure indicated in point 3 above. \n\nTenders are opened in a non-public opening session by an opening board, whose members are appointed by EIB under guarantee of impartiality and confidentiality. \n\nThe main aim of the opening session is to check whether the tenders received are compliant with the following formal requirements: \n\nIf tenders are not compliant with any of the above requirements they may be rejected. \n\nN.B. Tenderers are expected to submit complete tenders, corresponding to all requirements set out in the tender documentation item by item. \n\nThe non-public opening session will take place at EIB’s premises on the date and time indicated in point 1.4 in the `Terms of Reference`.\n\n## 5.3. Opening record\n\n## 5.2. Formal opening requirements\n\n## 5.1. Opening session\n\n## 5. Opening of Tenders\n\n-  the tender is submitted in the number of required copies. \n\n-  the technical proposal and the financial proposal are signed;\n\n-  the tender contains information and documentation on the Tenderer’s exclusion situation and legal capacity (if applicable), a technical proposal and a financial proposal; \n\n-  the package containing the tender is sealed, in order to guarantee the confidentiality and integrity of data; \n\n-  the tender was not dispatched later than the dispatch deadline; \n\nLast updated: June 2020\n\nPage 10 of 21" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8013986157023941, + "doc_id": "49b870652b28051c2c7f262f9ae15d3d2dee81ac279f344de2e55819d105cec7", + "edit_distance": 0.5087108013937283, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.7822801225555823, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Contract number: [ complete ]\n\nContract conditions of December 2015\n\nThe supplies must be guaranteed against all defects in manufacture or materials for two years from the date of delivery, unless provision is made for a longer period in the tender specifications.\n\nThe contractor must guarantee that any permits and licences required for manufacturing and selling the supplies have been obtained.\n\nThe contractor must replace at its own expense, within a reasonable time limit to be determined by agreement between the parties, any items which become damaged or defective in the course of normal use during the guarantee period.\n\nThe contractor is responsible for any conformity defect which exists at the time of delivery, even if this defect does not appear until a later date.\n\nThe contractor is also responsible for any conformity defect which occurs after delivery and is ascribable to non-compliance with its obligations, including failure to provide a guarantee that, for a certain period, supplies used for the purposes for which they are normally used or for a specific purpose will preserve their qualities or characteristics as specified.\n\nIf part of an item is replaced, the replacement part must be guaranteed under the same terms and conditions for a further period of the same duration as that specified above.\n\nIf a defect is found to originate in a systematic flaw in design, the contractor must replace or modify all identical parts incorporated in the other supplies that are part of the order, even though they may not have been the cause of any incident. In this case, the guarantee period must be extended as stated above.\n\n## II.5. COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE PARTIES\n\n## II.5.1. Form and means of communication\n\nAny communication of information, notices or documents under the contract must:\n\n- (a) be made in writing in paper or electronic format in the language of the contract;\n- (b) bear the contract number;\n- (c) be made using the relevant communication details set out in Article I.8; and\n- (d) be sent by mail, email or, for the documents specified in the special conditions, via e-PRIOR .\n\nIf a party requests written confirmation of an e-mail within a reasonable time, the other party must provide an original signed paper version of the communication as soon as possible.\n\nThe parties agree that any communication made by email has full legal effect and is admissible as evidence in judicial proceedings.\n\n## II.5.2. Date of communications by mail and email\n\nAny communication is deemed to have been made when the receiving party receives it, unless this contract refers to the date when the communication was sent.\n\n16", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Contract conditions of December 2015 \n\nContract number: [ complete ] \n\n## II.5. COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE PARTIES\n\n## II.5.1. Form and means of communication\n\n## II.5.2. Date of communications by mail and email\n\n- (a) be made in writing in paper or electronic format in the language of the contract; (b) bear the contract number; \n\n- (a) be made in writing in paper or electronic format in the language of the contract; (b) bear the contract number; (c) be made using the relevant communication details set out in Article I.8; and \n\n- (b) bear the contract number; (c) be made using the relevant communication details set out in Article I.8; and (d) be sent by mail, email or, for the documents specified in the special conditions, via \n\n- (c) be made using the relevant communication details set out in Article I.8; and (d) be sent by mail, email or, for the documents specified in the special conditions, via e-PRIOR .\n\nThe supplies must be guaranteed against all defects in manufacture or materials for two years from the date of delivery, unless provision is made for a longer period in the tender specifications. \n\nThe contractor must guarantee that any permits and licences required for manufacturing and selling the supplies have been obtained. \n\nThe contractor must replace at its own expense, within a reasonable time limit to be determined by agreement between the parties, any items which become damaged or defective in the course of normal use during the guarantee period. \n\nThe contractor is responsible for any conformity defect which exists at the time of delivery, even if this defect does not appear until a later date. \n\nThe contractor is also responsible for any conformity defect which occurs after delivery and is ascribable to non-compliance with its obligations, including failure to provide a guarantee that, for a certain period, supplies used for the purposes for which they are normally used or for a specific purpose will preserve their qualities or characteristics as specified. \n\nIf part of an item is replaced, the replacement part must be guaranteed under the same terms and conditions for a further period of the same duration as that specified above. \n\nIf a defect is found to originate in a systematic flaw in design, the contractor must replace or modify all identical parts incorporated in the other supplies that are part of the order, even though they may not have been the cause of any incident. In this case, the guarantee period must be extended as stated above. \n\nAny communication of information, notices or documents under the contract must: \n\nIf a party requests written confirmation of an e-mail within a reasonable time, the other party must provide an original signed paper version of the communication as soon as possible. \n\nThe parties agree that any communication made by email has full legal effect and is admissible as evidence in judicial proceedings. \n\nAny communication is deemed to have been made when the receiving party receives it, unless this contract refers to the date when the communication was sent. \n\n16" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "fa4df2666b2538ed5862a551209bf4ada7c0b27ced3474040d91c4b1b52b20cf", + "edit_distance": 0.9967948717948718, + "f1_score": 0.01904761904761905, + "meteor": 0.015576323987538943, + "precision": 0.009615384615384616, + "pred_md": "| | 3.2. Selection criteria ........................................................................................ 18 |\n|--------------------------------|------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|\n| | 3.3. Compliance with the minimum requirements of the Tender specifications .............................................................................................. 28 |\n| | 3.4 Award criteria ............................................................................................... 28 |\n| AWARD CRITERIA LOT 1 | ................................................................................. 32 |\n| AWARD CRITERIA LOT 2 | ................................................................................. 33 |\n| 3.5 Financial Award Criterion | ......................................................................... 37 |\n| 3.6 Award (ranking of tenders) | .................................................................... 38 |\n| | 3.7 Award of Specific Contracts in Lot 1 reopening of competition |\n| | 4. FORM AND CONTENT OF THE TENDER ......................................................... 43 |\n| | 4.1. Form of the tender: how to submit the tender? ........................... 43 |\n| 4.2 | Content of the tender: what documents to submit with the tender? .......................................................................................................... 43 |\n| 4.3 | Signature policy: how can documents be signed? ...................... 45 |\n| 4.4 | Confidentiality of tenders: what information and under what conditions can be disclosed? ................................................................ 46 |\n| 5 ANNEXES | ................................................................................................................ 47 |\n| 5.2 | TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION ............................................................ 47 |\n| 5.3 | CONTRACTUAL DOCUMENTATION ..................................................... 47 |\n| 5.4 | PROCUREMENT DOCUMENTATION .................................................... 47 |\n\n3", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "3" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.822264335212982, + "doc_id": "829670eb59a4c1b7500d9136479857dc6de508ffbd53e5de7e25beea9fbb84eb", + "edit_distance": 0.17088607594936708, + "f1_score": 0.972972972972973, + "meteor": 0.8881883618939729, + "precision": 0.9782608695652174, + "pred_md": "For the award criterion 5 (Lot 2) the offer shall detail the aspects described therein for the scenario.\n\nWith regard to the above, for each award criterion the offer will be assessed on the basis of their applicability and operational relevance taking into account the services in scope of FWC666. Offers will also be assessed in terms of coverage of the activities in scope of FWC666, coherence with the objectives and overall consistency of the offer in ensuring successful delivery of the service.\n\n## NOTE:\n\n- · Any reliance on ECHA's resources/ processes (including third parties) shall be clearly identified;\n- · Statements, assumptions and/or conditions that lead to an unclear or ambiguous commitment to delivering the services as offered, may result in low scoring.\n\n31", + "recall": 0.967741935483871, + "true_md": "For the award criterion 5 (Lot 2) the offer shall detail the aspects described therein for the scenario. \n\nWith regard to the above, for each award criterion the offer will be assessed on the basis of their applicability and operational relevance taking into account the services in scope of FWC666. Offers will also be assessed in terms of coverage of the activities in scope of FWC666, coherence with the objectives and overall consistency of the offer in ensuring successful delivery of the service.\n\n- • Any reliance on ECHA’s resources/ processes (including third parties) shall be clearly identified; • Statements, assumptions and/or conditions that lead to an unclear or ambiguous \n\n- identified; • Statements, assumptions and/or conditions that lead to an unclear or ambiguous commitment to delivering the services as offered, may result in low scoring. \n\n## NOTE:\n\n31" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.918754534997161, + "doc_id": "59f59177fa63709b97cd272a99d1eb57912c131be363cc54bf6215dc7e0140e4", + "edit_distance": 0.16984402079722705, + "f1_score": 0.961451247165533, + "meteor": 0.9597254831171614, + "precision": 0.9769585253456221, + "pred_md": "- 1. Dans le cas exceptionnel de certains travaux spécifiques, le contractant pourra transmettre pour paiement intermédiaire une facture équivalant à un pourcentage du prix total indiqué dans le bon de commande correspondant. Pour ces cas particuliers, la facturation intermédiaire sera expressément définie dans le bon de commande concerné conformément à l'article II.20.6.Le contractant (ou chef de file dans le cas d'une offre conjointe) doit envoyer une facture via e-PRIOR pour demander le paiement intermédiaire conformément aux dispositions du cahier des charges, accompagnées d'un procès-verbal de réception provisoire ou d'un état d'avancement des travaux dans lequel sera fixé le montant accepté à la facturation.\n- 2. Le pouvoir adjudicateur doit approuver tout document ou élément livrable présenté et effectuer le paiement dans un délai de 30 jours à compter de la réception de la facture.\n- 3. Le pouvoir adjudicateur peut suspendre le délai de paiement visé au point 2., conformément à l'article II.20.7. Une fois la suspension levée, le pouvoir adjudicateur donne son approbation et effectue le paiement dans le délai restant indiqué au point 2., à moins qu'il ne rejette partiellement ou entièrement les documents ou éléments livrables présentés.\n\n## I.6.3 Paiement du solde\n\n- 1. Le contractant (ou chef de file dans le cas d'une offre conjointe) peut demander le paiement du solde conformément à l'article II.20.6.\n\nLe contractant (ou chef de file dans le cas d'une offre conjointe) doit envoyer une facture via ePRIOR pour demander le paiement du solde dû au titre d'un bon de commande , accompagnée d'un rapport ou de tout autre document, conformément aux dispositions du cahier des charges.\n\n- 2. Le pouvoir adjudicateur doit approuver les documents ou éléments livrables présentés et effectuer le paiement dans un délai de 30 jours à compter de la réception de la facture.\n- 3. Le pouvoir adjudicateur peut suspendre le délai de paiement visé au point 2., conformément à l'article II.20.7. Une fois la suspension levée, le pouvoir adjudicateur donne son approbation et effectue le paiement dans le délai restant indiqué au point 2., à moins qu'il ne rejette partiellement ou entièrement les documents ou éléments livrables présentés.\n- 4. Conformément au point IX.4 de l'annexe II, le Contractant établira mensuellement les notes de crédit relatives aux bons de commandes pour lesquels des points d'indemnités sont applicables.\n\n## I.6.4 Garantie de bonne fin\n\nLa garantie de bonne fin n'est pas applicable au CC.\n\n## I.6.5 Retenue de garantie\n\nLa retenue de garantie n'est pas applicable au CC.\n\n## I.7 COMPTE BANCAIRE\n\nLes paiements doivent être effectués sur le compte bancaire du contractant (ou du chef de file en cas d'offre conjointe), libellé en euros, identifié comme suit:\n\nNom de la banque:\n\nAdresse complète de l'agence bancaire:\n\nNom précis du titulaire du compte:\n\nNuméro de compte complet, y compris les codes bancaires:\n\n[Code IBAN 2 :]\n\n## I.8 MODALITÉS DE COMMUNICATION\n\nAux fins du CC, les communications doivent être envoyées aux adresses suivantes:\n\nPouvoir adjudicateur:\n\nConseil de l'Union européenne\n\n2\n\nCode BIC ou SWIFT pour les pays qui n'ont pas de code IBAN.\n\n7\n\nFR", + "recall": 0.9464285714285714, + "true_md": "1. Dans le cas exceptionnel de certains travaux spécifiques, le contractant pourra transmettre pour paiement intermédiaire une facture équivalant à un pourcentage du prix total indiqué dans le bon de commande correspondant. Pour ces cas particuliers, la facturation intermédiaire sera expressément définie dans le bon de commande concerné conformément à l'article II.20.6.Le contractant (ou chef de file dans le cas d'une offre conjointe) doit envoyer une facture via e-PRIOR pour demander le paiement intermédiaire conformément aux dispositions du cahier des charges, accompagnées d'un procès-verbal de réception provisoire ou d’un état d’avancement des travaux dans lequel sera fixé le montant accepté à la facturation. \n\n2. Le pouvoir adjudicateur doit approuver tout document ou élément livrable présenté et effectuer le paiement dans un délai de 30 jours à compter de la réception de la facture. \n\n3. Le pouvoir adjudicateur peut suspendre le délai de paiement visé au point 2., conformément à l'article II.20.7. Une fois la suspension levée, le pouvoir adjudicateur donne son approbation et effectue le paiement dans le délai restant indiqué au point 2., à moins qu'il ne rejette partiellement ou entièrement les documents ou éléments livrables présentés. \n\n1. Le contractant (ou chef de file dans le cas d'une offre conjointe) peut demander le paiement du solde conformément à l'article II.20.6. \n\nLe contractant (ou chef de file dans le cas d'une offre conjointe) doit envoyer une facture via e- PRIOR pour demander le paiement du solde dû au titre d'un bon de commande , accompagnée d’un rapport ou de tout autre document, conformément aux dispositions du cahier des charges. \n\n2. Le pouvoir adjudicateur doit approuver les documents ou éléments livrables présentés et effectuer le paiement dans un délai de 30 jours à compter de la réception de la facture. \n\n3. Le pouvoir adjudicateur peut suspendre le délai de paiement visé au point 2., conformément à l'article II.20.7. Une fois la suspension levée, le pouvoir adjudicateur donne son approbation et effectue le paiement dans le délai restant indiqué au point 2., à moins qu'il ne rejette partiellement ou entièrement les documents ou éléments livrables présentés. \n\n4. Conformément au point IX.4 de l’annexe II, le Contractant établira mensuellement les notes de crédit relatives aux bons de commandes pour lesquels des points d’indemnités sont applicables.\n\nLa garantie de bonne fin n'est pas applicable au CC. \n\nLa retenue de garantie n'est pas applicable au CC. \n\nLes paiements doivent être effectués sur le compte bancaire du contractant (ou du chef de file en cas d'offre conjointe), libellé en euros, identifié comme suit: \n\nAux fins du CC, les communications doivent être envoyées aux adresses suivantes: \n\nPouvoir adjudicateur: \n\nConseil de l'Union européenne \n\nNom de la banque: \n\nAdresse complète de l'agence bancaire: \n\nNom précis du titulaire du compte: \n\nNuméro de compte complet, y compris les codes bancaires: \n\n[Code IBAN$^{2}$:] \n\n## I.8 MODALITÉS DE COMMUNICATION\n\n## I.7 COMPTE BANCAIRE\n\n## I.6.5 Retenue de garantie\n\n## I.6.4 Garantie de bonne fin\n\n## I.6.3 Paiement du solde\n\n2 Code BIC ou SWIFT pour les pays qui n'ont pas de code IBAN. \n\n7 FR" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8696943784492265, + "doc_id": "eb9ea0391f9d1faf3be8b6cf731bbfedae7c619b0bd8f0e23d7fb55ab3485105", + "edit_distance": 0.8, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9973203125, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Formulaire:\n\ncopie pour le service incendie\n\ncopie pour le service immeubles\n\ncopie pour l'exécutant\n\nsafety.unit@consilium.europa.eu / tel. 02 281 54 00 / fax 02 281 88 30\n\nANNEXE VII\n\nAppendice 5 de l'Annexe VII\n\n98\n\nFR", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Appendice 5 de l'Annexe VII \n\nsafety.unit@consilium.europa.eu / tel. 02 281 54 00 / fax 02 281 88 30 \n\n98 FR \n\nANNEXE VII \n\nFormulaire: \n\ncopie pour le service incendie copie pour le service immeubles copie pour l'exécutant" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9710053134828398, + "doc_id": "a5778f4eb078bf886252cdc9f81067ecd7ca1c126aaf9f19f70e6c4de4b7cb3a", + "edit_distance": 0.8408104196816208, + "f1_score": 0.9917012448132781, + "meteor": 0.8004044522639616, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Le pouvoir adjudicateur peut suspendre l' exécution de tout ou partie du CC ou de tout ou partie du bon de commande :\n\n- a) si la procédure d'attribution du CC ou d'un bon de commande ou l' exécution du CC se révèle entachée d' irrégularités , de fraude ou d'une violation d'obligations ;\n- b) pour vérifier si le soupçon d' irrégularités , de fraude ou de violation d'obligations est fondé.\n\nLe pouvoir adjudicateur doit notifier formellement la suspension au contractant. La suspension prend effet à la date de la notification formelle , ou à une date ultérieure si la notification formelle le prévoit ainsi.\n\nLe pouvoir adjudicateur doit notifier au contractant dès que la vérification est achevée:\n\n- a) sa décision de lever la suspension; ou\n- b) son intention de résilier le CC ou un bon de commande au titre de l'article II.18.1, point f) ou j).\n\nLe contractant ne peut exiger d'indemnisation en cas de suspension d'une partie quelconque du CC ou d'un bon de commande .\n\nLe pouvoir adjudicateur peut en outre suspendre le délai de paiement conformément à l'article II.20.7.\n\n## II.18 RÉSILIATION DU CC\n\n## II.18.1 Motifs de résiliation par le pouvoir adjudicateur\n\nLe pouvoir adjudicateur peut résilier le CC ou un bon de commande dans les cas suivants:\n\n- a) si la fourniture des services prévue dans un bon de commande en cours n'a pas effectivement débuté dans les quinze jours suivant la date prévue à cet effet, et si la nouvelle date proposée, le cas échéant, est considérée comme inacceptable par le pouvoir adjudicateur, compte tenu de l'article II.11.2;\n- b) si le contractant ne peut, par sa propre faute, obtenir un permis ou une autorisation nécessaire à l' exécution du CC ;\n- c) si le contractant n'exécute pas le CC ou le bon de commande conformément au cahier des charges ou à la demande de services , ou s'il ne remplit pas une autre obligation contractuelle substantielle, ou s'il refuse à plusieurs reprises de signer des bons de commande . La résiliation d'au moins trois bons de command e dans ces circonstances constitue également un motif de résiliation du CC;\n- d) si le contractant ou toute personne qui répond indéfiniment des dettes du contractant se trouve dans l'une des situations visées à l'article 136, paragraphe 1, points a) et b), du règlement financier 8 ;\n- e) si le contractant ou toute personne liée se trouve dans l'une des situations visées à l'article 136, paragraphe 1, points c) à h), ou à l'article 136, paragraphe 2, du règlement financier;\n- f) si la procédure d'attribution du CC ou l' exécution du CC se révèle entachée d'irrégularités , de fraude ou d'une violation d'obligations ;\n- g) si le contractant ne respecte pas les obligations applicables en vertu de la législation environnementale et sociale et de la législation du travail établies par le droit de l'Union, le droit national et les conventions collectives ou par les dispositions législatives internationales dans le domaine environnemental et social et dans le domaine du travail énumérées à l'annexe X de la directive 2014/24/UE;\n\n8 Règlement (UE, Euratom) 2018/1046 du Parlement européen et du Conseil du 18 juillet 2018 relatif aux règles financières applicables au budget général de l'Union, modifiant les règlements (UE) nº 1296/2013, (UE) nº 1301/2013, (UE) nº 1303/2013, (UE) nº 1304/2013, (UE) nº 1309/2013, (UE) nº 1316/2013, (UE) nº 223/2014, (UE) nº 283/2014 et la décision nº 541/2014/UE, et abrogeant le règlement (UE, Euratom) nº 966/2012 (JO L 193 du 30.7.2018, p. 1).\n\n27\n\nFR", + "recall": 0.9835390946502057, + "true_md": "Le pouvoir adjudicateur peut suspendre l' exécution de tout ou partie du CC ou de tout ou partie du bon de commande : \n\nLe pouvoir adjudicateur doit notifier au contractant dès que la vérification est achevée: \n\nLe pouvoir adjudicateur doit notifier formellement la suspension au contractant. La suspension prend effet à la date de la notification formelle , ou à une date ultérieure si la notification formelle le prévoit ainsi. \n\nLe contractant ne peut exiger d'indemnisation en cas de suspension d'une partie quelconque du CC ou d'un bon de commande . \n\nLe pouvoir adjudicateur peut en outre suspendre le délai de paiement conformément à l'article II.20.7. \n\nLe pouvoir adjudicateur peut résilier le CC ou un bon de commande dans les cas suivants: \n\n27 8 Règlement (UE, Euratom) 2018/1046 du Parlement européen et du Conseil du 18 juillet 2018 relatif aux règles financières applicables au budget général de l'Union, modifiant les règlements (UE) nº 1296/2013, (UE) nº 1301/2013, (UE) nº 1303/2013, (UE) nº 1304/2013, (UE) nº 1309/2013, (UE) nº 1316/2013, (UE) nº 223/2014, (UE) nº 283/2014 et la décision nº 541/2014/UE, et abrogeant le règlement (UE, Euratom) nº 966/2012 (JO L 193 du 30.7.2018, p. 1). \n\n27 FR\n\n- g) si le contractant ne respecte pas les obligations applicables en vertu de la législation environnementale et sociale et de la législation du travail établies par le droit de l'Union, le droit national et les conventions collectives ou par les dispositions législatives internationales dans le domaine environnemental et social et dans le domaine du travail énumérées à l'annexe X de la directive 2014/24/UE; \n\n- f) si la procédure d'attribution du CC ou l' exécution du CC se révèle entachée d'irrégularités , de fraude ou d'une violation d'obligations ; \n\n- e) si le contractant ou toute personne liée se trouve dans l'une des situations visées à l'article 136, paragraphe 1, points c) à h), ou à l'article 136, paragraphe 2, du règlement financier; \n\n- d) si le contractant ou toute personne qui répond indéfiniment des dettes du contractant se trouve dans l'une des situations visées à l'article 136, paragraphe 1, points a) et b), du règlement financier$^{8}$; \n\n- c) si le contractant n'exécute pas le CC ou le bon de commande conformément au cahier des charges ou à la demande de services , ou s'il ne remplit pas une autre obligation contractuelle substantielle, ou s'il refuse à plusieurs reprises de signer des bons de commande . La résiliation d'au moins trois bons de command e dans ces circonstances constitue également un motif de résiliation du CC; \n\n- b) si le contractant ne peut, par sa propre faute, obtenir un permis ou une autorisation nécessaire à l' exécution du CC ; \n\n- a) si la fourniture des services prévue dans un bon de commande en cours n'a pas effectivement débuté dans les quinze jours suivant la date prévue à cet effet, et si la nouvelle date proposée, le cas échéant, est considérée comme inacceptable par le pouvoir adjudicateur, compte tenu de l'article II.11.2; \n\n- a) sa décision de lever la suspension; ou \n\n- b) son intention de résilier le CC ou un bon de commande au titre de l'article II.18.1, point f) ou j). \n\n- a) si la procédure d'attribution du CC ou d'un bon de commande ou l' exécution du CC se révèle entachée d' irrégularités , de fraude ou d'une violation d'obligations ; \n\n- b) pour vérifier si le soupçon d' irrégularités , de fraude ou de violation d'obligations est fondé. \n\n## II.18 RÉSILIATION DU CC\n\n## II.18.1 Motifs de résiliation par le pouvoir adjudicateur" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "20b1b94994d3eede1d17976ada9d35775ba26eb2f27c74124d2f0ccf783b57b1", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9921875, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Page 51 of 53", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Page 51 of 53" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9696257131514646, + "doc_id": "fa7dd7cdc5be2be749e744147bdc5cae983a94fade4735ca2525b62db10671e5", + "edit_distance": 0.12395309882747069, + "f1_score": 0.991111111111111, + "meteor": 0.9734049386989293, + "precision": 0.9911111111111112, + "pred_md": "Within three years following the signature of the FWC, the Contracting Authority may offer an amendment to procure additional services from the Contractor(s) up to a maximum of 50 % of the initial FWC ceiling . If so, the Contracting Authority will use the negotiated procedure under point 11.1.e of Annex 1 to Regulation (EU, Euratom) 2018/1046 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 18 July 2018 on the financial rules applicable to the general budget of the Union .\n\nThese services will consist in the repetition of similar services entrusted to the contractor(s) and will be awarded under the same conditions of the initial contract and to the extent needed by the Contracting Authority to fulfil the objective of the FWC within the overall duration of the contract. The additional services will be awarded in case the existing or new IT systems require additional projects and services, or require to be adapted to the needs of the EU legislation on chemicals, ECHA's mandate and new tasks as assigned relating to the scope of this FWC.\n\n## 1.8 Duration of the contract: how long do we plan to use the contract?\n\nThe FWC resulting from the award of this call for tenders will be concluded for:\n\n- Lot 1: at most 72 months -6 years (2+2+2) with specific contracts being valid for a maximum of 6 (six) months after the expiry of the FWC. The details of the initial contract duration and possible renewals are set out in Article I.3 of the draft Framework Contract.\n- Lot 2: at most 72 months -6 years (2+2+2), plus two (2) optional years with specific contracts being valid for a maximum of 6 (six) months after the expiry of the FWC. The details of the initial contract duration and possible renewals are set out in Article I.3 of the draft Framework Contract.\n\n## 1.9 Electronic exchange system: can exchanges under the contract be automated?\n\nFor all exchanges with the contractor during the implementation of the FWC as well as for future possible subsequent proceedings for the purposes of EDES (European Union's Early Detection and Exclusion System) the contracting authority may use an electronic exchange system meeting the requirements of Article 148 of Regulation (EU, Euratom) 2018/1046 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 18 July 2018 on the financial rules applicable to the general budget of the Union. At the request of the Contracting Authority the use of such a system shall become mandatory for the contractor(s) at no additional cost for the contracting authority.\n\nIndependently of the above, ECHA is currently setting up a bespoke electronic exchange system that may be introduced during the foreseen duration of the FWC. Accordingly, this internally designed solution may be used for all exchanges with recipients, including the entering into legal commitments (i.e. specific contracts) and any amendments thereto under the FWC.\n\nBy submitting an offer for this call for tenders, the contractor agrees to carry out such electronic exchanges via the system provided by ECHA. Details on the specifications, access, terms and conditions of use will be provided in advance. No extra costs are foreseen for the use of the system.\n\n10", + "recall": 0.9911111111111112, + "true_md": "Within three years following the signature of the FWC, the Contracting Authority may offer an amendment to procure additional services from the Contractor(s) up to a maximum of 50 % of the initial FWC ceiling . If so, the Contracting Authority will use the negotiated procedure under point 11.1.e of Annex 1 to Regulation (EU, Euratom) 2018/1046 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 18 July 2018 on the financial rules applicable to the general budget of the Union . \n\nThese services will consist in the repetition of similar services entrusted to the contractor(s) and will be awarded under the same conditions of the initial contract and to the extent needed by the Contracting Authority to fulfil the objective of the FWC within the overall duration of the contract. The additional services will be awarded in case the existing or new IT systems require additional projects and services, or require to be adapted to the needs of the EU legislation on chemicals, ECHA’s mandate and new tasks as assigned relating to the scope of this FWC. \n\nThe FWC resulting from the award of this call for tenders will be concluded for: \n\nLot 1: at most 72 months – 6 years (2+2+2) with specific contracts being valid for a maximum of 6 (six) months after the expiry of the FWC. The details of the initial contract duration and possible renewals are set out in Article I.3 of the draft Framework Contract. \n\nLot 2: at most 72 months – 6 years (2+2+2), plus two (2) optional years with specific contracts being valid for a maximum of 6 (six) months after the expiry of the FWC. The details of the initial contract duration and possible renewals are set out in Article I.3 of the draft Framework Contract. \n\nFor all exchanges with the contractor during the implementation of the FWC as well as for future possible subsequent proceedings for the purposes of EDES (European Union's Early Detection and Exclusion System) the contracting authority may use an electronic exchange system meeting the requirements of Article 148 of Regulation (EU, Euratom) 2018/1046 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 18 July 2018 on the financial rules applicable to the general budget of the Union. At the request of the Contracting Authority the use of such a system shall become mandatory for the contractor(s) at no additional cost for the contracting authority.\n\nIndependently of the above, ECHA is currently setting up a bespoke electronic exchange system that may be introduced during the foreseen duration of the FWC. Accordingly, this internally designed solution may be used for all exchanges with recipients, including the entering into legal commitments (i.e. specific contracts) and any amendments thereto under the FWC.\n\nBy submitting an offer for this call for tenders, the contractor agrees to carry out such electronic exchanges via the system provided by ECHA. Details on the specifications, access, terms and conditions of use will be provided in advance. No extra costs are foreseen for the use of the system. \n\n10\n\n## 1.9 Electronic exchange system: can exchanges under the contract be automated?\n\n## 1.8 Duration of the contract: how long do we plan to use the contract?" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8514812320693185, + "doc_id": "747a04e560c3aeef69a87051c37f25fcea8c6e5d6081abd43732a4d6dd068a1b", + "edit_distance": 0.24605678233438485, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.88251576976481, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "ANNEX VII\n\nAppendice 4 de l'Annexe VII\n\n## 3. INVACUATION PARTIELLE\n\nDans la plupart des scénarios, la menace ne concernera qu'une partie d'un bâtiment et les autres parties resteront sûres.\n\nDans ce cas, il sera procédé à une invacuation partielle et seules certaines personnes seront directement concernées par l'invacuation. Il leur sera demandé de quitter l'endroit où elles se trouvent pour se rendre dans une autre partie du bâtiment. Dans ce cas de figure, il n'y a pas de lieu sécurisé prédéfini et des instructions vous indiqueront où vous rendre.\n\nSi vous en recevez l'instruction, veuillez vous tenir éloigné des fenêtres. Des instructions vous feront savoir à quel moment vous pouvez reprendre vos activités en toute sécurité.\n\n## 4. INVACUATION TOTALE\n\nSi la situation est plus grave, une invacuation totale pourra être déclenchée et il sera demandé à toutes les personnes présentes de se diriger vers un lieu situé dans le parking en sous-sol du bâtiment concerné, lorsque le parking s'avère être le seul endroit constituant un abri adéquat, par exemple si des informations laissent supposer que la menace se situe tout autour d'un bâtiment.\n\n## 4.1 Lieux sécurisés\n\nEn cas d'invacuation totale, les lieux sûrs sont les suivants:\n\n1.\n\nComme il importe de pouvoir identifier les personnes présentes dans le lieu sécurisé, les membres du personnel devraient si possible rejoindre d'autres membres de leur unité.\n\n## 4.2 Chemins d'invacuation vers les lieux sûrs\n\nLes chemins d'invacuation vers les lieux sûrs dans les parkings sont indiqués par des pictogrammes spécifiques, illustrés ci-dessous:\n\n92\n\nFR", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Appendice 4 de l'Annexe VII \n\n## 3. INVACUATION PARTIELLE\n\nDans la plupart des scénarios, la menace ne concernera qu'une partie d'un bâtiment et les autres parties resteront sûres. Dans ce cas, il sera procédé à une invacuation partielle et seules certaines personnes seront \n\nparties resteront sûres. Dans ce cas, il sera procédé à une invacuation partielle et seules certaines personnes seront directement concernées par l'invacuation. Il leur sera demandé de quitter l'endroit où elles se trouvent pour se rendre dans une autre partie du bâtiment. Dans ce cas de figure, il n'y a pas de lieu sécurisé prédéfini et des instructions vous indiqueront où vous rendre. \n\nSi vous en recevez l'instruction, veuillez vous tenir éloigné des fenêtres. Des instructions vous feront savoir à quel moment vous pouvez reprendre vos activités en toute sécurité.\n\nSi la situation est plus grave, une invacuation totale pourra être déclenchée et il sera demandé à toutes les personnes présentes de se diriger vers un lieu situé dans le parking en sous-sol du bâtiment concerné, lorsque le parking s'avère être le seul endroit constituant un abri adéquat, par exemple si des informations laissent supposer que la menace se situe tout autour d'un bâtiment. \n\nEn cas d'invacuation totale, les lieux sûrs sont les suivants: 1.\n\nComme il importe de pouvoir identifier les personnes présentes dans le lieu sécurisé, les membres du personnel devraient si possible rejoindre d'autres membres de leur unité. \n\nLes chemins d'invacuation vers les lieux sûrs dans les parkings sont indiqués par des pictogrammes spécifiques, illustrés ci-dessous: \n\nANNEX VII \n\n92 FR \n\nEn cas d'invacuation totale, les lieux sûrs sont les suivants: 1.\n\n## 4. INVACUATION TOTALE\n\n## 4.1 Lieux sécurisés\n\n## 4.2 Chemins d'invacuation vers les lieux sûrs" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7598356856515925, + "doc_id": "640947997c30fc0a448c5917c8eeb5a3cbe5370efc4982f2533e1b105d7ccc6f", + "edit_distance": 0.2, + "f1_score": 0.9333333333333333, + "meteor": 0.9746570121951219, + "precision": 0.875, + "pred_md": "## Instead of;\n\nRead;\n\nPage 2 of2", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Instead of;\n\nRead;\n\nPage 2 of2" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8795640423114095, + "doc_id": "27bbb542d8305b8f7d674f54995f2f2c7f085cb787bf54ceffb1fd5dbb29311b", + "edit_distance": 0.09314586994727592, + "f1_score": 0.9201680672268907, + "meteor": 0.9093710097362318, + "precision": 0.9279661016949152, + "pred_md": "EC - FWC services Dec 2018\n\nContract no: [complete]\n\n'Grave professional misconduct': a violation of applicable laws or regulations or ethical standards of the profession to which a contractor or a related person belongs, including any conduct leading to sexual or other exploitation or abuse, or any wrongful conduct of the contractor or a related person which has an impact on its professional credibility where such conduct denotes wrongful intent or gross negligence;\n\n'Implementation of the FWC' : the purchase of services envisaged in the FWC through the signature and performance of specific contracts ;\n\n'Interface control document' : the guideline document which lays down the technical specifications, message standards, security standards, checks of syntax and semantics, etc. to facilitate machine-tomachine connection. This document is updated on a regular basis;\n\n'Irregularity' : any infringement of a provision of Union law resulting from an act or omission by an economic operator, which has, or would have, the effect of prejudicing the Union's budget;\n\n'Notification' (or 'notify'): form of communication between the parties made in writing including by electronic means;\n\n'Order form' : a simplified form of specific contract by which the contracting authority orders services under this FWC;\n\n'Performance of a specific contract' : the execution of tasks and delivery of the purchased services by the contractor to the contracting authority;\n\n'Personnel' : persons employed directly or indirectly or contracted by the contractor to implement the FWC;\n\n'Pre-existing material' : any material, document, technology or know-how which exists prior to the contractor using it for the production of a result in the implementation of the FWC ;\n\n'Pre-existing right' : any industrial and intellectual property right on pre-existing material ; it may consist in a right of ownership, a licence right and/or right of use belonging to the contractor, the creator , the contracting authority as well as to any other third parties;\n\n'Professional conflicting interest' : a situation in which the contractor's previous or ongoing professional activities affect its capacity to implement the FWC or to perform a specific contract to an appropriate quality standard;\n\n'Related person' : any natural or legal person who is a member of the administrative, management or supervisory body of the contractor or who has powers of representation, decision or control with regard to the contractor;\n\n'Request for services' : a document from the contracting authority requesting that the contractors in a multiple FWC with re-opening of competition provide a specific tender for services whose terms are not entirely defined under the FWC;\n\n'Result' : any intended outcome of the implementation of the FWC , whatever its form or nature. A result may be further defined in this FWC as a deliverable. A result may, in addition to newly created materials produced specifically for the contracting authority by the contractor or at its request, also include preexisting materials ;\n\n'Specific contract' : a contract implementing the FWC and specifying details of a service to be provided;\n\n13", + "recall": 0.9125, + "true_md": "EC - FWC services Dec 2018 \n\nContract no: [complete] \n\n'Grave professional misconduct': a violation of applicable laws or regulations or ethical standards of the profession to which a contractor or a related person belongs, including any conduct leading to sexual or other exploitation or abuse, or any wrongful conduct of the contractor or a related person which has an impact on its professional credibility where such conduct denotes wrongful intent or gross negligence; \n\n‘Implementation of the FWC’ : the purchase of services envisaged in the FWC through the signature and performance of specific contracts ; \n\n‘Interface control document’ : the guideline document which lays down the technical specifications, message standards, security standards, checks of syntax and semantics, etc. to facilitate machine-to- machine connection. This document is updated on a regular basis;\n\n‘Irregularity’ : any infringement of a provision of Union law resulting from an act or omission by an economic operator, which has, or would have, the effect of prejudicing the Union’s budget; \n\n‘Notification’ (or ‘notify’): form of communication between the parties made in writing including by electronic means;\n\n‘Order form’ : a simplified form of specific contract by which the contracting authority orders services under this FWC; \n\n‘Performance of a specific contract’ : the execution of tasks and delivery of the purchased services by the contractor to the contracting authority;\n\n‘Personnel’ : persons employed directly or indirectly or contracted by the contractor to implement the FWC; \n\n‘Pre-existing material’ : any material, document, technology or know-how which exists prior to the contractor using it for the production of a result in the implementation of the FWC ;\n\n‘Pre-existing right’ : any industrial and intellectual property right on pre-existing material ; it may consist in a right of ownership, a licence right and/or right of use belonging to the contractor, the creator , the contracting authority as well as to any other third parties; \n\n‘Professional conflicting interest’ : a situation in which the contractor’s previous or ongoing professional activities affect its capacity to implement the FWC or to perform a specific contract to an appropriate quality standard;\n\n‘Related person’ : any natural or legal person who is a member of the administrative, management or supervisory body of the contractor or who has powers of representation, decision or control with regard to the contractor;\n\n‘Request for services’ : a document from the contracting authority requesting that the contractors in a multiple FWC with re-opening of competition provide a specific tender for services whose terms are not entirely defined under the FWC;\n\n‘Result’ : any intended outcome of the implementation of the FWC , whatever its form or nature. A result may be further defined in this FWC as a deliverable. A result may, in addition to newly created materials produced specifically for the contracting authority by the contractor or at its request, also include pre- existing materials ;\n\n‘Specific contract’ : a contract implementing the FWC and specifying details of a service to be provided; \n\n13" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.40807361739706716, + "doc_id": "b4d4c1acb2de4960a5a542029ad447fbf1139798a1310fa4cb13e9f47830713e", + "edit_distance": 0.5622317596566524, + "f1_score": 0.9944134078212289, + "meteor": 0.4728515797911485, + "precision": 0.994413407821229, + "pred_md": "ANNEX VII\n\nAppendice 2 de l'Annexe VII\n\nDans les zones sécurisées du bâtiment Europa , certains de ces boutons poussoirs sont temporisés (délai maximum de 30 secondes). Leur activation déclenche un message vocal qui vous avertit que votre demande a été prise en compte.\n\nLa porte sera déverrouillée à la fin de la temporisation et vous pourrez alors sortir en poussant sur la barre anti-panique ou la poignée.\n\n.\n\n## 2.5 Évacuation des délégués et des visiteurs\n\nSi vous assistez à une réunion avec des délégués ou si vous accueillez des visiteurs, vous devez les prendre en charge lors d'une évacuation:\n\n- · invitez-les à vous suivre et donnez-leur la consigne de se disperser une fois sortis du bâtiment Justus Lipsius, ou de se rendre à l'atrium du Justus Lipsius une fois sortis des bâtiments Europa ou Lex\n- · indiquez-leur le chemin d'évacuation le plus proche\n- · fermez la/les fenêtre(s) et porte(s) du local\n- · accompagnez vos visiteurs en tenant compte des consignes d'évacuation.\n\n## 2.6 Évacuation des personnes à mobilité réduite\n\nSi une personne à mobilité réduite (PMR) que vous ne pouvez pas aider à évacuer (blessure, mobilité réduite, …) est présente, vous devez:\n\n- · appeler le 02 281 2000 depuis le local où vous vous trouvez avec elle\n- · communiquer le nom de la personne et sa localisation (bâtiment, niveau, aile, numéro)\n\n- · expliquer pourquoi cette personne n'est pas en mesure d'évacuer\n- · l'inviter à rester dans le local pour attendre les secours ou suivre les instructions données, porte fermée\n- · évacuer\n\n## 2.7 En cas de difficulté personnelle\n\nEn cas d'impossibilité d'évacuer de manière autonome (blessure, mobilité réduite, …), vous devez:\n\n- · rester dans votre bureau ou entrer dans un bureau et fermer la porte\n- · téléphoner au 02 281 2000\n- · communiquer votre nom et l'adresse du bureau (bâtiment, niveau, aile, numéro)\n- · communiquer la raison qui vous empêche d'évacuer\n- · attendre à cet endroit ou suivre les instructions données.\n\n\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\n\n89\n\nFR", + "recall": 0.994413407821229, + "true_md": "Appendice 2 de l'Annexe VII \n\nDans les zones sécurisées du bâtiment Europa , certains de ces boutons poussoirs sont temporisés (délai maximum de 30 secondes). Leur activation déclenche un message vocal qui vous avertit que votre demande a été prise en compte. La porte sera déverrouillée à la fin de la temporisation et vous pourrez alors sortir en poussant sur \n\nvotre demande a été prise en compte. La porte sera déverrouillée à la fin de la temporisation et vous pourrez alors sortir en poussant sur la barre anti-panique ou la poignée. \n\nSi vous assistez à une réunion avec des délégués ou si vous accueillez des visiteurs, vous devez les prendre en charge lors d'une évacuation: • invitez-les à vous suivre et donnez-leur la consigne de se disperser une fois \n\n## 2.5 Évacuation des délégués et des visiteurs\n\n## • accompagnez vos visiteurs en tenant compte des consignes d'évacuation. 2.6 Évacuation des personnes à mobilité réduite\n\n## 2.7 En cas de difficulté personnelle\n\nEn cas d'impossibilité d'évacuer de manière autonome (blessure, mobilité réduite, …), vous devez: • rester dans votre bureau ou entrer dans un bureau et fermer la porte \n\nSi une personne à mobilité réduite (PMR) que vous ne pouvez pas aider à évacuer (blessure, mobilité réduite, …) est présente, vous devez: • appeler le 02 281 2000 depuis le local où vous vous trouvez avec \n\n- prendre en charge lors d'une évacuation: • invitez-les à vous suivre et donnez-leur la consigne de se disperser une fois sortis du bâtiment Justus Lipsius, ou de se rendre à l'atrium du Justus Lipsius une fois sortis des bâtiments Europa ou Lex • indiquez-leur le chemin d'évacuation le plus proche \n\n- une fois sortis des bâtiments Europa ou Lex • indiquez-leur le chemin d'évacuation le plus proche • fermez la/les fenêtre(s) et porte(s) du local \n\n- • indiquez-leur le chemin d'évacuation le plus proche • fermez la/les fenêtre(s) et porte(s) du local • accompagnez vos visiteurs en tenant compte des consignes d'évacuation. \n\n- • fermez la/les fenêtre(s) et porte(s) du local • accompagnez vos visiteurs en tenant compte des consignes d'évacuation. Évacuation des personnes à mobilité réduite \n\n- mobilité réduite, …) est présente, vous devez: • appeler le 02 281 2000 depuis le local où vous vous trouvez avec elle • communiquer le nom de la personne et sa localisation (bâtiment, \n\n- elle • communiquer le nom de la personne et sa localisation (bâtiment, niveau, aile, numéro) • expliquer pourquoi cette personne n'est pas en mesure d'évacuer \n\n- niveau, aile, numéro) • expliquer pourquoi cette personne n'est pas en mesure d'évacuer • l'inviter à rester dans le local pour attendre les secours ou suivre les \n\n- • expliquer pourquoi cette personne n'est pas en mesure d'évacuer • l'inviter à rester dans le local pour attendre les secours ou suivre les instructions données, porte fermée • évacuer \n\n- instructions données, porte fermée • évacuer \n\n- En cas d'impossibilité d'évacuer de manière autonome (blessure, mobilité réduite, …), vous devez: • rester dans votre bureau ou entrer dans un bureau et fermer la porte • téléphoner au 02 281 2000\n\n- • rester dans votre bureau ou entrer dans un bureau et fermer la porte • téléphoner au 02 281 2000 • communiquer votre nom et l'adresse du bureau (bâtiment, niveau, aile, \n\n- • téléphoner au 02 281 2000 • communiquer votre nom et l'adresse du bureau (bâtiment, niveau, aile, numéro) • communiquer la raison qui vous empêche d'évacuer \n\n- numéro) • communiquer la raison qui vous empêche d'évacuer • attendre à cet endroit ou suivre les instructions données. \n\n- • communiquer la raison qui vous empêche d'évacuer • attendre à cet endroit ou suivre les instructions données. \\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_ \n\n89 FR \n\nANNEX VII" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9848710788910099, + "doc_id": "37df0ce8b7a4449b678cc69709cabb0692a2cf44f493f58c32667070bd87ce33", + "edit_distance": 0.20512820512820512, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9492542614172483, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## II.20.6 Paiements intermédiaires et paiement du solde\n\nLe contractant (ou chef de file dans le cas d'une offre conjointe) doit présenter une facture pour demander le paiement intermédiaire, comme le prévoit l'article I.6, le cahier des charges ou le bon de commande .\n\nLe contractant (ou chef de file dans le cas d'une offre conjointe) doit présenter une facture pour demander le paiement du solde dans les 60 jours suivant la fin de la période de fourniture des services, comme le prévoit l'article I.6, le cahier des charges ou le bon de commande .\n\nLe paiement de la facture et l'approbation des documents n'emportent reconnaissance ni de leur régularité, ni du caractère authentique, complet ou exact des déclarations et informations qui y sont contenues.\n\nLe paiement du solde peut prendre la forme d'un recouvrement.\n\n## II.20.7 Suspension du délai de paiement\n\nLe pouvoir adjudicateur peut suspendre à tout moment les délais de paiement visés à l'article I.6 en notifiant au contractant (ou chef de file dans le cas d'une offre conjointe) que sa facture ne peut être traitée. Les motifs que le pouvoir adjudicateur peut invoquer pour justifier son incapacité à traiter une facture sont les suivants:\n\n- a) la facture n'est pas conforme aux dispositions du CC;\n- b) le contractant n'a pas produit les documents ou éléments livrables appropriés; ou\n- c) le pouvoir adjudicateur a des observations à formuler sur les documents ou éléments livrables présentés avec la facture.\n\nLe pouvoir adjudicateur doit notifier une telle suspension au contractant (ou chef de file dans le cas d'une offre conjointe) dès que possible, en la motivant. Dans les cas b) et c) susmentionnés, le pouvoir adjudicateur notifie au contractant (ou au chef de file dans le cas d'une offre conjointe) les délais pour présenter des informations supplémentaires, des corrections ou une nouvelle version des documents ou des éléments livrables à la demande du pouvoir adjudicateur.\n\nLa suspension prend effet à la date d'envoi de la notification par le pouvoir adjudicateur. Le délai de paiement restant reprend à compter de la date de réception des informations demandées ou des documents révisés ou de la réalisation des vérifications complémentaires requises, notamment des contrôles sur place. Si la période de suspension est supérieure à deux mois, le contractant (ou chef de file dans le cas d'une offre conjointe) peut demander au pouvoir adjudicateur de motiver le maintien de la suspension.\n\nLorsque les délais de paiement ont été suspendus à la suite du refus d'un document visé au premier alinéa du présent article et que le nouveau document produit est également refusé, le pouvoir adjudicateur se réserve le droit de résilier le bon de commande conformément à l'article II.18.1, point c).\n\n## II.20.8 Intérêts de retard\n\nÀ l'expiration des délais de paiement visés à l'article I.6, le contractant (ou chef de file dans le cas d'une offre conjointe) est en droit d'obtenir des intérêts de retard au taux appliqué par la Banque centrale européenne à ses opérations principales de refinancement en euros (taux de référence), majoré de huit points. Le taux de référence est le taux en vigueur le premier jour du mois au cours duquel le délai de paiement prend fin, tel que publié au Journal officiel de l'Union européenne , série C.\n\nLa suspension du délai de paiement conformément à l'article II.20.7 ne peut être considérée comme donnant lieu à un retard de paiement.\n\nLes intérêts de retard portent sur la période comprise entre le jour qui suit la date d'exigibilité du paiement et, au plus tard, la date du paiement telle que définie à l'article II.20.1.\n\n31\n\nFR", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## II.20.6 Paiements intermédiaires et paiement du solde\n\nLe contractant (ou chef de file dans le cas d'une offre conjointe) doit présenter une facture pour demander le paiement intermédiaire, comme le prévoit l'article I.6, le cahier des charges ou le bon de commande . \n\nLe contractant (ou chef de file dans le cas d'une offre conjointe) doit présenter une facture pour demander le paiement du solde dans les 60 jours suivant la fin de la période de fourniture des services, comme le prévoit l'article I.6, le cahier des charges ou le bon de commande . \n\nLe paiement de la facture et l'approbation des documents n'emportent reconnaissance ni de leur régularité, ni du caractère authentique, complet ou exact des déclarations et informations qui y sont contenues. \n\nLe paiement du solde peut prendre la forme d'un recouvrement. \n\nLe pouvoir adjudicateur peut suspendre à tout moment les délais de paiement visés à l'article I.6 en notifiant au contractant (ou chef de file dans le cas d'une offre conjointe) que sa facture ne peut être traitée. Les motifs que le pouvoir adjudicateur peut invoquer pour justifier son incapacité à traiter une facture sont les suivants: \n\nLe pouvoir adjudicateur doit notifier une telle suspension au contractant (ou chef de file dans le cas d'une offre conjointe) dès que possible, en la motivant. Dans les cas b) et c) susmentionnés, le pouvoir adjudicateur notifie au contractant (ou au chef de file dans le cas d'une offre conjointe) les délais pour présenter des informations supplémentaires, des corrections ou une nouvelle version des documents ou des éléments livrables à la demande du pouvoir adjudicateur. \n\nLa suspension prend effet à la date d'envoi de la notification par le pouvoir adjudicateur. Le délai de paiement restant reprend à compter de la date de réception des informations demandées ou des documents révisés ou de la réalisation des vérifications complémentaires requises, notamment des contrôles sur place. Si la période de suspension est supérieure à deux mois, le contractant (ou chef de file dans le cas d'une offre conjointe) peut demander au pouvoir adjudicateur de motiver le maintien de la suspension. \n\nLorsque les délais de paiement ont été suspendus à la suite du refus d'un document visé au premier alinéa du présent article et que le nouveau document produit est également refusé, le pouvoir adjudicateur se réserve le droit de résilier le bon de commande conformément à l'article II.18.1, point c). \n\nÀ l'expiration des délais de paiement visés à l'article I.6, le contractant (ou chef de file dans le cas d'une offre conjointe) est en droit d'obtenir des intérêts de retard au taux appliqué par la Banque centrale européenne à ses opérations principales de refinancement en euros (taux de référence), majoré de huit points. Le taux de référence est le taux en vigueur le premier jour du mois au cours duquel le délai de paiement prend fin, tel que publié au Journal officiel de l'Union européenne , série C. \n\nLa suspension du délai de paiement conformément à l'article II.20.7 ne peut être considérée comme donnant lieu à un retard de paiement. \n\nLes intérêts de retard portent sur la période comprise entre le jour qui suit la date d'exigibilité du paiement et, au plus tard, la date du paiement telle que définie à l'article II.20.1. \n\n## II.20.8 Intérêts de retard\n\n## II.20.7 Suspension du délai de paiement\n\n- a) la facture n'est pas conforme aux dispositions du CC; \n\n- b) le contractant n'a pas produit les documents ou éléments livrables appropriés; ou \n\n- c) le pouvoir adjudicateur a des observations à formuler sur les documents ou éléments livrables présentés avec la facture. \n\n31 FR\n\n31 FR" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "19da8b1a44806b7d91e66e1525fc26f0e5fce783a27860e960ccadf1bd09d979", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999375, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## 6 LIST OF DOCUMENTS TO BE SUBMITTED WITH THE TENDER OR DURING THE PROCEDURE\n\nPage 48 of 53", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## 6 LIST OF DOCUMENTS TO BE SUBMITTED WITH THE TENDER OR DURING THE PROCEDURE\n\nPage 48 of 53" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8018953318426518, + "doc_id": "302d3d2a135c2f590a98ffd85a33c85e02eeb16650aef2dd74bd59159836337f", + "edit_distance": 0.7722772277227723, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.6450992141039023, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "EC - FWC services Dec 2018\n\nContract no: [complete]\n\n- c) the daily subsistence allowance takes the form of a flat-rate payment to cover all subsistence expenses, including meals, local transport including transport to and from the airport or station, insurance and sundries;\n- d) the daily subsistence allowance is reimbursed at the flat rates specified in Article I.5.3;\n- e) accommodation is reimbursed on receipt of supporting documents proving the necessary overnight stay at the destination, up to the flat-rate ceilings specified in Article I.5.3.\n- II.22.5 The contracting authority reimburses the cost of shipment of equipment or unaccompanied luggage if it has given its prior written approval for the expense.\n\n## II.23. RECOVERY\n\n- II.23.1 If an amount is to be recovered under the terms of the FWC, the contractor must repay the contracting authority the amount in question.\n\n## II.23.2. Recovery procedure\n\nBefore recovery, the contracting authority must formally notify the contractor of its intention to recover the amount it claims, specifying the amount due and the reasons for recovery and inviting the contractor to make any observations within 30 days of receipt.\n\nIf no observations have been submitted or if, despite the observations submitted, the contracting authority decides to pursue the recovery procedure, it must confirm recovery by formally notifying a debit note to the contractor, specifying the date of payment. The contractor must pay in accordance with the provisions specified in the debit note.\n\nIf the contractor does not pay by the due date, the contracting authority may, after informing the contractor in writing, recover the amounts due:\n\n- a) by offsetting them against any amounts owed to the contractor by the Union or by the European Atomic Energy Community or by an executive agency when it implements the Union budget;\n- b) by calling in a financial guarantee if the contractor has submitted one to the contracting authority;\n- c) by taking legal action.\n\n## II.23.3. Interest on late payment\n\nIf the contractor does not honour the obligation to pay the amount due by the date set by the contracting authority in the debit note, the amount due bears interest at the rate indicated in Article II.21.8. Interest on late payments will cover the period starting on the day after the due date for payment and ending on the date when the contracting authority receives the full amount owed.\n\nAny partial payment is first entered against charges and interest on late payment and then against the principal amount.\n\n## II.23.4. Recovery rules in the case of joint tender\n\nIf the contract is signed by a group (joint tender), the group is jointly and severally liable under the conditions set out in Article II.6 (liability). The contracting authority shall send the debit note first to the leader of the group.\n\nIf the leader does not pay by the due date the whole amount, and if the amount due cannot be offset or can only be offset partially in accordance with Article II.23.2 (a), then the contracting authority may claim the amount still due to any other member or members of the group by respectively notifying them with a debit note in conformity with the provisions laid down in Article II.23.2.\n\n34", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "EC - FWC services Dec 2018 \n\nContract no: [complete] \n\n## II.23. RECOVERY\n\n## II.23.2. Recovery procedure\n\n## II.23.3. Interest on late payment\n\n## II.23.4. Recovery rules in the case of joint tender\n\nBefore recovery, the contracting authority must formally notify the contractor of its intention to recover the amount it claims, specifying the amount due and the reasons for recovery and inviting the contractor to make any observations within 30 days of receipt. \n\nIf no observations have been submitted or if, despite the observations submitted, the contracting authority decides to pursue the recovery procedure, it must confirm recovery by formally notifying a debit note to the contractor, specifying the date of payment. The contractor must pay in accordance with the provisions specified in the debit note. \n\nIf the contractor does not pay by the due date, the contracting authority may, after informing the contractor in writing, recover the amounts due: \n\nIf the contractor does not honour the obligation to pay the amount due by the date set by the contracting authority in the debit note, the amount due bears interest at the rate indicated in Article II.21.8. Interest on late payments will cover the period starting on the day after the due date for payment and ending on the date when the contracting authority receives the full amount owed.\n\nAny partial payment is first entered against charges and interest on late payment and then against the principal amount. \n\nIf the contract is signed by a group (joint tender), the group is jointly and severally liable under the conditions set out in Article II.6 (liability). The contracting authority shall send the debit note first to the leader of the group.\n\nIf the leader does not pay by the due date the whole amount, and if the amount due cannot be offset or can only be offset partially in accordance with Article II.23.2 (a), then the contracting authority may claim the amount still due to any other member or members of the group by respectively notifying them with a debit note in conformity with the provisions laid down in Article II.23.2.\n\n34\n\n- c) the daily subsistence allowance takes the form of a flat-rate payment to cover all subsistence expenses, including meals, local transport including transport to and from the airport or station, insurance and sundries; d) the daily subsistence allowance is reimbursed at the flat rates specified in Article I.5.3;\n\n- insurance and sundries; d) the daily subsistence allowance is reimbursed at the flat rates specified in Article I.5.3; e) accommodation is reimbursed on receipt of supporting documents proving the necessary \n\n- d) the daily subsistence allowance is reimbursed at the flat rates specified in Article I.5.3; e) accommodation is reimbursed on receipt of supporting documents proving the necessary overnight stay at the destination, up to the flat-rate ceilings specified in Article I.5.3.\n\n- II.22.5 The contracting authority reimburses the cost of shipment of equipment or unaccompanied luggage if it has given its prior written approval for the expense. \n\n- II.23.1 If an amount is to be recovered under the terms of the FWC, the contractor must repay the contracting authority the amount in question.\n\n- a) by offsetting them against any amounts owed to the contractor by the Union or by the European Atomic Energy Community or by an executive agency when it implements the Union budget; b) by calling in a financial guarantee if the contractor has submitted one to the contracting authority;\n\n- Atomic Energy Community or by an executive agency when it implements the Union budget; b) by calling in a financial guarantee if the contractor has submitted one to the contracting authority; c) by taking legal action.\n\n- b) by calling in a financial guarantee if the contractor has submitted one to the contracting authority; c) by taking legal action." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7835177547063802, + "doc_id": "cdbee03d6bd90e3703cbd42aab07c7dcbc72a54452b5aad5f5c53ae43e5c1051", + "edit_distance": 0.240620957309185, + "f1_score": 0.988, + "meteor": 0.6997620389995024, + "precision": 0.988, + "pred_md": "EC - FWC services Dec 2018\n\nContract no: [complete]\n\nTo that effect, the contractor must establish a list of all pre-existing rights to the results of this FWC or parts thereof, including identification of the rights' owners. If there are no pre-existing rights to the results , the contractor must provide a declaration to that effect. The contractor must provide this list or declaration to the contracting authority together with the invoice for payment of the balance at the latest .\n\n## II.13.5. Evidence of granting of pre-existing rights\n\nUpon request by the contracting authority, the contractor must, in addition to the list mentioned under Article II.13.4., provide evidence that it has the ownership or the right to use all the listed pre-existing rights , except for the rights owned or licensed by the Union. The contracting authority may request this evidence even after the end of this FWC.\n\nThis provision also applies to image rights and sound recordings.\n\nThis evidence may refer, for example, to rights to: parts of other documents, images, graphs, sounds, music, tables, data, software, technical inventions, know-how, IT development tools, routines, subroutines or other programs ('background technology'), concepts, designs, installations or pieces of art, data, source or background materials or any other parts of external origin.\n\nThis evidence must include, as appropriate:\n\n- a) the name and version number of a software product;\n- b) the full identification of the work and its author, developer, creator , translator, data entry person, graphic designer, publisher, editor, photographer, producer;\n- c) a copy of the licence to use the product or of the agreement granting the relevant rights to the contractor or a reference to this licence;\n- d) a copy of the agreement or extract from the employment contract granting the relevant rights to the contractor where parts of the results were created by its personnel ;\n- e) the text of the disclaimer notice if any.\n\nProvision of evidence does not release the contractor from its responsibilities if it is found that it does not hold the necessary rights, regardless of when and by whom this fact is revealed.\n\nThe contractor also warrants that it possesses the relevant rights or powers to execute the transfer and that it has paid or has verified payment of all due fees including fees due to collecting societies, related to the final results .\n\n## II.13.6. Quotation of works in the result\n\nIn the result, the contractor must clearly point out all quotations of existing works. The complete reference should include as appropriate, the following: name of the author, title of the work, date and place of publication, date of creation, address of publication on the internet, number, volume and other information that allows the origin to be easily identified.\n\n## II.13.7. Moral rights of creators\n\nBy delivering the results , the contractor warrants that the creators will not object to the following on the basis of their moral rights under copyright:\n\n- a) that their names be mentioned or not mentioned when the results are presented to the public; that the results be divulged or not after they have been delivered in their final version to the contracting authority;\n- (b) that the results be adapted, provided that this is done in a manner which is not prejudicial to the creator 's honour or reputation.\n\n24", + "recall": 0.988, + "true_md": "EC - FWC services Dec 2018 \n\nTo that effect, the contractor must establish a list of all pre-existing rights to the results of this FWC or parts thereof, including identification of the rights’ owners. If there are no pre-existing rights to the results , the contractor must provide a declaration to that effect. The contractor must provide this list or declaration to the contracting authority together with the invoice for payment of the balance at the latest .\n\nUpon request by the contracting authority, the contractor must, in addition to the list mentioned under Article II.13.4., provide evidence that it has the ownership or the right to use all the listed pre-existing rights , except for the rights owned or licensed by the Union. The contracting authority may request this evidence even after the end of this FWC. \n\n## II.13.5. Evidence of granting of pre-existing rights\n\nThis provision also applies to image rights and sound recordings. \n\nThis evidence may refer, for example, to rights to: parts of other documents, images, graphs, sounds, music, tables, data, software, technical inventions, know-how, IT development tools, routines, subroutines or other programs (‘background technology’), concepts, designs, installations or pieces of art, data, source or background materials or any other parts of external origin. \n\nThis evidence must include, as appropriate:\n\n- a) the name and version number of a software product; b) the full identification of the work and its author, developer, \n\n- a) the name and version number of a software product; b) the full identification of the work and its author, developer, creator , translator, data entry person, graphic designer, publisher, editor, photographer, producer; c) a copy of the licence to use the product or of the agreement granting the relevant rights to the \n\n- graphic designer, publisher, editor, photographer, producer; c) a copy of the licence to use the product or of the agreement granting the relevant rights to the contractor or a reference to this licence; d) a copy of the agreement or extract from the employment contract granting the relevant rights to \n\n- contractor or a reference to this licence; d) a copy of the agreement or extract from the employment contract granting the relevant rights to the contractor where parts of the results were created by its personnel ; e) the text of the disclaimer notice if any. \n\n- the contractor where parts of the results e) the text of the disclaimer notice if any. \n\nProvision of evidence does not release the contractor from its responsibilities if it is found that it does not hold the necessary rights, regardless of when and by whom this fact is revealed.\n\nThe contractor also warrants that it possesses the relevant rights or powers to execute the transfer and that it has paid or has verified payment of all due fees including fees due to collecting societies, related to the final results . \n\nIn the result, the contractor must clearly point out all quotations of existing works. The complete reference should include as appropriate, the following: name of the author, title of the work, date and place of publication, date of creation, address of publication on the internet, number, volume and other information that allows the origin to be easily identified. \n\n## II.13.6. Quotation of works in the result\n\n## II.13.7. Moral rights of creators\n\nBy delivering the results , the contractor warrants that the creators will not object to the following on the basis of their moral rights under copyright:\n\n- a) that their names be mentioned or not mentioned when the results are presented to the public; that the results be divulged or not after they have been delivered in their final version to the contracting authority; (b) that the results be adapted, provided that this is done in a manner which is not prejudicial to the \n\n- contracting authority; (b) that the results be adapted, provided that this is done in a manner which is not prejudicial to the creator ’s honour or reputation.\n\n24\n\nContract no: [complete]" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7206210826584158, + "doc_id": "f4a4e417fd6b94440eaecc34b4e3704e6380a8d50ec8a475b0934edcd04c4772", + "edit_distance": 0.7648953301127214, + "f1_score": 0.960698689956332, + "meteor": 0.5690327342025032, + "precision": 0.9606986899563319, + "pred_md": "For reasons of transparency and equal treatment, tenders that do not use the Price Catalogue annexed to this document will not be evaluated. Failure to complete the Price Catalogue or changing the Price Catalogue in any way that would influence the result of the financial evaluation will lead to disqualification.\n\nBy submitting a tender, tenderers declare that:\n\n- -They read, accepted and complied with the important guidelines regarding the financial evaluation provided in the tender specifications, and those related to the inputs in the Price Catalogue.\n- -They did not fill in any additional information, comment or condition in any cell that is not marked for tenderers' input, and that they did not manipulate the formulas of the Price Catalogue.\n- -Their financial offer includes all the costs arising from the technical aspects of the procurement documents and does not constitute an 'abnormally low tender' in the sense of Article 23 of Annex I to the EU general Financial Regulation.\n- -Their financial offer is compliant with the national legislation of the countries in which the services are to be carried out in respect of the remuneration of staff, contributions to the social security schemes and compliance with occupational safety and health standards.\n\n## 4.3 Signature policy: how can documents be signed?\n\nWhere a document needs to be signed, the signature must be hand-written. For handwritten signatures see section 1 of the Invitation to tender .\n\nAll documents must be signed by the signatories (when they are individuals) or by their duly authorised representatives.\n\nFor the following documents, when signed by representatives, tenderers must provide evidence for the delegation of the authorisation to sign:\n\n- -The Tender report;\n- -The Declaration on Honour of the tenderer (in case of joint tender -the Declarations on Honour of all group members);\n- -(If applicable -in the case of joint tender) the power(s) of attorney drawn up using the model attached in Annex 04 'Power of Attorney' ).\n\nThe delegation of the authorisation to sign on behalf of the signatories (including, in the case of proxy(-ies), the chain of authorisations) must be evidenced by appropriate written evidence (copy of the notice of appointment of the persons authorised to represent the legal entity in signing contracts (together or alone), or a copy of the publication of such appointment if the legislation which applies to signatory requires such publication or a power of attorney). A document that the Contracting Authority can access on a national database free of charge does not need to be submitted if the Contracting authority is provided with the exact internet link and, if applicable, the necessary identification data to retrieve the document.\n\n45", + "recall": 0.9606986899563319, + "true_md": "For reasons of transparency and equal treatment, tenders that do not use the Price Catalogue annexed to this document will not be evaluated. Failure to complete the Price Catalogue or changing the Price Catalogue in any way that would influence the result of the financial evaluation will lead to disqualification. \n\nBy submitting a tender, tenderers declare that: \n\nWhere a document needs to be signed, the signature must be hand-written. For hand- written signatures see section 1 of the Invitation to tender . \n\nAll documents must be signed by the signatories (when they are individuals) or by their duly authorised representatives. \n\nFor the following documents, when signed by representatives, tenderers must provide evidence for the delegation of the authorisation to sign: \n\nThe delegation of the authorisation to sign on behalf of the signatories (including, in the case of proxy(-ies), the chain of authorisations) must be evidenced by appropriate written evidence (copy of the notice of appointment of the persons authorised to represent the legal entity in signing contracts (together or alone), or a copy of the publication of such appointment if the legislation which applies to signatory requires such publication or a power of attorney). A document that the Contracting Authority can access on a national database free of charge does not need to be submitted if the Contracting authority is provided with the exact internet link and, if applicable, the necessary identification data to retrieve the document. \n\n45\n\n- - The Tender report; The Declaration on Honour of the tenderer (in case of joint tender \n\n- - The Tender report; - The Declaration on Honour of the tenderer (in case of joint tender – the Declarations on Honour of all group members); (If applicable – in the case of joint tender) the power(s) of attorney drawn up using \n\n- on Honour of all group members); - (If applicable – in the case of joint tender) the power(s) of attorney drawn up using the model attached in Annex 04 “Power of Attorney” ). \n\n- - They read, accepted and complied with the important guidelines regarding the financial evaluation provided in the tender specifications, and those related to the inputs in the Price Catalogue. They did not fill in any additional information, comment or condition in any cell that is \n\n- Price Catalogue. - They did not fill in any additional information, comment or condition in any cell that is not marked for tenderers’ input, and that they did not manipulate the formulas of the Price Catalogue. Their financial offer includes all the costs arising from the technical aspects of the \n\n- Price Catalogue. - Their financial offer includes all the costs arising from the technical aspects of the procurement documents and does not constitute an “abnormally low tender” in the sense of Article 23 of Annex I to the EU general Financial Regulation. Their financial offer is compliant with the national legislation of the countries in which \n\n- sense of Article 23 of Annex I to the EU general Financial Regulation. - Their financial offer is compliant with the national legislation of the countries in which the services are to be carried out in respect of the remuneration of staff, contributions to the social security schemes and compliance with occupational safety and health standards. \n\n## 4.3 Signature policy: how can documents be signed?" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8838518345971782, + "doc_id": "4d95ca8aaf95e4751a78473dba17e0aaeb523c5bbab5fb5329eb9531ca379024", + "edit_distance": 0.60625, + "f1_score": 0.9698996655518395, + "meteor": 0.9042389620081394, + "precision": 0.9797297297297297, + "pred_md": "3.2\n\nEC - FWC services Dec 2018\n\nContract no: [complete]\n\n[Reimbursement of expenses is not applicable to this specific contract .] [Within the maximum amount, up to EUR [ amount in figures and in words ] is earmarked for expenses, which must be reimbursed in accordance with the FWC].\n\n[For Contractors established in Spain, the order forms shall include the following provision: 'Direct VAT exoneration (BOE 07/02/1997, nº33 pages 3917 to 3919'.] and Article 4 of the Seat Agreement between the Kingdom of Spain and the European Agency for Safety and Health at Work (BOE 16/05/2014, nº119 pages 38049 to 38055)].\n\n## ARTICLE 4 COMMUNICATION DETAILS\n\nFor the purpose of this specific contract , communications must be sent to the following addresses:\n\nContracting authority:\n\nEuropean Agency for Safety and Health at Work [ Name Surname ] [Unit [ complete ]] Santiago de Compostela, 12 - 5 th floor E-48003 Bilbao SPAIN E-mail: information@osha.europa.eu\n\nContractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender):\n\n[ Full name ] [ Function ] [ Company name ] [ Full official address ] E-mail: [ complete ]\n\n## ARTICLE 5 PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE\n\nPerformance guarantee is not applicable to this specific contract .\n\n## ARTICLE 6 RETENTION MONEY GUARANTEE\n\nRetention money guarantee is not applicable to this specific contract .\n\n## Annexes\n\nRequest for service Contractor's specific tender of [ insert date ]\n\n## Signatures\n\nFor the contractor,\n\n[ Company name forename/surname/function / ]\n\nsignature: Done at [ place ], [ date ]\n\nFor the contracting authority,\n\n[ forename/surname/function ]\n\nsignature:\n\nDone at [ place ], [ date ]\n\nIn duplicate in English.\n\n38", + "recall": 0.9602649006622517, + "true_md": "Contract no: [complete] \n\n[For Contractors established in Spain, the order forms shall include the following provision: “Direct VAT exoneration (BOE 07/02/1997, nº33 pages 3917 to 3919”.] and Article 4 of the Seat Agreement between the Kingdom of Spain and the European Agency for Safety and Health at Work (BOE 16/05/2014, nº119 pages 38049 to 38055)]. \n\nFor the purpose of this specific contract , communications must be sent to the following addresses: \n\nRequest for service Contractor’s specific tender of [ insert date ] \n\n- 3.2 [Reimbursement of expenses is not applicable to this specific contract .] [Within the maximum amount, up to EUR [ amount in figures and in words ] is earmarked for expenses, which must be reimbursed in accordance with the FWC]. \n\nContracting authority: \n\nEuropean Agency for Safety and Health at Work [ Name Surname ] [Unit [ complete ]] Santiago de Compostela, 12 – 5 th floor E-48003 Bilbao SPAIN E-mail: information@osha.europa.eu \n\nContractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender): \n\n[ Full name ] [ Function ] [ Company name ] [ Full official address ] E-mail: [ complete ] \n\nPerformance guarantee is not applicable to this specific contract . \n\nRetention money guarantee is not applicable to this specific contract . \n\nFor the contractor, [ Company name / forename/surname/function ] \n\nsignature: Done at [ place ], [ date ] \n\nIn duplicate in English. \n\nFor the contracting authority, [ forename/surname/function ] \n\nsignature: Done at [ place ], [ date ] \n\n38\n\n## Signatures\n\n## Annexes\n\n## ARTICLE 6 RETENTION MONEY GUARANTEE\n\n## ARTICLE 5 PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE\n\n## ARTICLE 4 COMMUNICATION DETAILS\n\nEC - FWC services Dec 2018" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9824559436971981, + "doc_id": "f64b2d1e357d4c91a2eb524bc4376530c8dc69e611c05a59643359e8a9776040", + "edit_distance": 0.8252427184466019, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.7955789633916689, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "- envoyé lorsque le statut est \"reçu\", tel qu'indiqué dans le document de contrôle des interfaces .\n- 5. Lorsqu'il utilise le portail fournisseurs , le contractant (ou chef de file dans le cas d'une offre conjointe) peut télécharger le message PDF ou XML pour chaque document électronique pendant un an après la soumission. Après cette période, les copies des documents électroniques ne sont plus disponibles pour un téléchargement automatique à partir du portail fournisseurs .\n\n## II.6 RESPONSABILITÉ\n\n- II.6.1 Le pouvoir adjudicateur ne peut être tenu pour responsable des dommages ou pertes causés par le contractant, y compris les dommages ou pertes causés à des tiers à l'occasion ou par le fait de l' exécution du CC .\n- II.6.2 Si la législation applicable le requiert, le contractant doit souscrire une police d'assurance couvrant les risques et dommages ou pertes relatifs à l' exécution du CC . Il doit également souscrire les assurances complémentaires qui sont d'usage dans son secteur d'activité. À la demande du pouvoir adjudicateur, le contractant doit lui fournir la preuve de la couverture d'assurance.\n- II.6.3 Le contractant est responsable des pertes ou dommages causés au pouvoir adjudicateur à l'occasion ou par le fait de l' exécution du CC , y compris dans le cadre de la sous- traitance, cette responsabilité étant toutefois limitée à un montant ne dépassant pas trois fois la valeur totale du bon de commande correspondant. Cependant, si le dommage ou la perte est imputable à une faute grave ou une faute intentionnelle du contractant, de son personnel ou de ses sous-traitants, le contractant est responsable du montant total du dommage ou de la perte.\n- II.6.4 Si un tiers intente une action contre le pouvoir adjudicateur en relation avec l' exécution du CC , y compris toute action pour violation supposée de droits de propriété intellectuelle, le contractant doit prêter assistance au pouvoir adjudicateur lors de la procédure judiciaire, notamment en intervenant à l'appui du pouvoir adjudicateur à la demande de ce dernier.\n- Si la responsabilité du pouvoir adjudicateur envers le tiers est établie et que cette responsabilité est causée par le contractant à l'occasion ou par le fait de l' exécution du CC , l'article II.6.3 est applicable.\n- II.6.5 Si le contractant se compose d'au moins deux opérateurs économiques (ayant présenté une offre conjointe), ceux-ci sont conjointement et solidairement responsables de l' exécution du CC à l'égard du pouvoir adjudicateur.\n- II.6.6 Le pouvoir adjudicateur n'est pas responsable des pertes ou dommages subis par le contractant à l'occasion ou par le fait de l' exécution du CC , à moins que cette perte ou ce dommage n'ait été causé par une faute intentionnelle ou une faute grave de la part du pouvoir adjudicateur.\n\n## II.7 CONFLITS D'INTÉRÊTS ET INTÉRÊTS À CARACTÈRE PROFESSIONNEL CONTRADICTOIRES\n\n- II.7.1 Le contractant doit prendre toutes les mesures nécessaires pour prévenir toute situation de conflit d'intérêts ou d'intérêts à caractère professionnel contradictoires .\n- II.7.2 Le contractant doit notifier par écrit au pouvoir adjudicateur le plus rapidement possible toute situation qui pourrait constituer un conflit d'intérêts ou un intérêt à caractère professionnel contradictoire durant l' exécution du CC . Le contractant doit prendre immédiatement les mesures nécessaires pour remédier à cette situation.\n\nLe pouvoir adjudicateur peut effectuer les actions suivantes:\n\n- a) vérifier que les mesures du contractant sont appropriées;\n- b) exiger que le contractant prenne des mesures supplémentaires dans un délai imparti;\n\n17\n\nFR", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "envoyé lorsque le statut est \"reçu\", tel qu'indiqué dans le document de contrôle des interfaces . \n\nLe pouvoir adjudicateur peut effectuer les actions suivantes: \n\n- a) vérifier que les mesures du contractant sont appropriées; \n\n- b) exiger que le contractant prenne des mesures supplémentaires dans un délai imparti; \n\n- II.7.2 Le contractant doit notifier par écrit au pouvoir adjudicateur le plus rapidement possible toute situation qui pourrait constituer un conflit d'intérêts ou un intérêt à caractère professionnel contradictoire durant l' exécution du CC . Le contractant doit prendre immédiatement les mesures nécessaires pour remédier à cette situation. \n\n- II.7.1 Le contractant doit prendre toutes les mesures nécessaires pour prévenir toute situation de conflit d'intérêts ou d'intérêts à caractère professionnel contradictoires . \n\n- II.6.6 Le pouvoir adjudicateur n'est pas responsable des pertes ou dommages subis par le contractant à l'occasion ou par le fait de l' exécution du CC , à moins que cette perte ou ce dommage n'ait été causé par une faute intentionnelle ou une faute grave de la part du pouvoir adjudicateur. \n\n- II.6.5 Si le contractant se compose d'au moins deux opérateurs économiques (ayant présenté une offre conjointe), ceux-ci sont conjointement et solidairement responsables de l' exécution du CC à l'égard du pouvoir adjudicateur. \n\n- II.6.4 Si un tiers intente une action contre le pouvoir adjudicateur en relation avec l' exécution du CC , y compris toute action pour violation supposée de droits de propriété intellectuelle, le contractant doit prêter assistance au pouvoir adjudicateur lors de la procédure judiciaire, notamment en intervenant à l'appui du pouvoir adjudicateur à la demande de ce dernier. \n\n- II.6.3 Le contractant est responsable des pertes ou dommages causés au pouvoir adjudicateur à l'occasion ou par le fait de l' exécution du CC , y compris dans le cadre de la sous- traitance, cette responsabilité étant toutefois limitée à un montant ne dépassant pas trois fois la valeur totale du bon de commande correspondant. Cependant, si le dommage ou la perte est imputable à une faute grave ou une faute intentionnelle du contractant, de son personnel ou de ses sous-traitants, le contractant est responsable du montant total du dommage ou de la perte. \n\n- II.6.2 Si la législation applicable le requiert, le contractant doit souscrire une police d'assurance couvrant les risques et dommages ou pertes relatifs à l' exécution du CC . Il doit également souscrire les assurances complémentaires qui sont d'usage dans son secteur d'activité. À la demande du pouvoir adjudicateur, le contractant doit lui fournir la preuve de la couverture d'assurance. \n\n- II.6.1 Le pouvoir adjudicateur ne peut être tenu pour responsable des dommages ou pertes causés par le contractant, y compris les dommages ou pertes causés à des tiers à l'occasion ou par le fait de l' exécution du CC . \n\n- 5. Lorsqu'il utilise le portail fournisseurs , le contractant (ou chef de file dans le cas d'une offre conjointe) peut télécharger le message PDF ou XML pour chaque document électronique pendant un an après la soumission. Après cette période, les copies des documents électroniques ne sont plus disponibles pour un téléchargement automatique à partir du portail fournisseurs . \n\n## II.6 RESPONSABILITÉ\n\n## II.7 CONFLITS D'INTÉRÊTS ET INTÉRÊTS À CARACTÈRE PROFESSIONNEL CONTRADICTOIRES\n\n17 FR\n\nSi la responsabilité du pouvoir adjudicateur envers le tiers est établie et que cette responsabilité est causée par le contractant à l'occasion ou par le fait de l' exécution du CC , l'article II.6.3 est applicable." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9315780034337637, + "doc_id": "06eefd4068bca28e1b0e39a1b5e582a0e1b5641f0f69297bcd70c665e44aba71", + "edit_distance": 0.3929889298892989, + "f1_score": 0.9909909909909909, + "meteor": 0.7782120248090441, + "precision": 0.9939759036144579, + "pred_md": "Contract number: [ complete ]\n\nContract conditions of December 2015\n\nIf, as provided for in Article I.6, a financial guarantee is required for the payment of prefinancing, as performance guarantee or as retention guarantee, it must fulfil the following conditions:\n\n- (a) the financial guarantee is provided by a bank or a financial institution approved by the contracting authority or, at the request of the contractor and with the agreement of the contracting authority, by a third party;\n- (b) the guarantor stands as first-call guarantor and does not require the contracting authority to have recourse against the principal debtor (the contractor).\n\nThe contractor bears the cost of providing such guarantee.\n\nPre-financing guarantees must remain in force until the pre-financing is cleared against interim payments or payment of the balance. Where the payment of the balance takes the form of a debit note, the pre-financing guarantee must remain in force for three months after the debit note is sent to the contractor. The contracting authority must release the guarantee within the following month.\n\nPerformance guarantees cover compliance with substantial contractual obligations until the contracting authority has given its final approval for the supply. The performance guarantee must not exceed 10 % of the total price of the contract. The contracting authority must release the guarantee fully after final approval of the supply, as provided for in the contract.\n\nRetention money guarantees cover full delivery of the supply in accordance with the contract including during the contract liability period and until its final approval by the contracting authority. The retention money guarantee must not exceed 10 % of the total price of the contract. The contracting authority must release the guarantee after the expiry of the contract liability period as provided for in the contract.\n\nThe contracting authority must not request a retention money guarantee where it has requested a performance guarantee.\n\n## II.20.6. Interim payments and payment of the balance\n\nThe contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) must send an invoice for interim payment, as provided for in Article I.5 or in the tender specifications.\n\nThe contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) must send an invoice for payment of the balance within 60 days of the end of the period of provision of the supplies, as provided for in Article I.5 or in the tender specifications.\n\nPayment of the invoice and approval of documents does not imply recognition of the regularity, authenticity, completeness and correctness of the declarations and information they contain.\n\nPayment of the balance may take the form of recovery.\n\n## II.20.7. Suspension of the time allowed for payment\n\nThe contracting authority may suspend the payment periods specified in Article I.6 at any time by notifying the contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) that its invoice\n\n29", + "recall": 0.9880239520958084, + "true_md": "Contract number: [ complete ] \n\nContract conditions of December 2015 \n\nIf, as provided for in Article I.6, a financial guarantee is required for the payment of pre- financing, as performance guarantee or as retention guarantee, it must fulfil the following conditions: \n\nThe contractor bears the cost of providing such guarantee. \n\nPre-financing guarantees must remain in force until the pre-financing is cleared against interim payments or payment of the balance. Where the payment of the balance takes the form of a debit note, the pre-financing guarantee must remain in force for three months after the debit note is sent to the contractor. The contracting authority must release the guarantee within the following month.\n\nPerformance guarantees cover compliance with substantial contractual obligations until the contracting authority has given its final approval for the supply. The performance guarantee must not exceed 10 % of the total price of the contract. The contracting authority must release the guarantee fully after final approval of the supply, as provided for in the contract.\n\nRetention money guarantees cover full delivery of the supply in accordance with the contract including during the contract liability period and until its final approval by the contracting authority. The retention money guarantee must not exceed 10 % of the total price of the contract. The contracting authority must release the guarantee after the expiry of the contract liability period as provided for in the contract. \n\nThe contracting authority must not request a retention money guarantee where it has requested a performance guarantee.\n\nThe contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) must send an invoice for interim payment, as provided for in Article I.5 or in the tender specifications.\n\nThe contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) must send an invoice for payment of the balance within 60 days of the end of the period of provision of the supplies, as provided for in Article I.5 or in the tender specifications.\n\nPayment of the invoice and approval of documents does not imply recognition of the regularity, authenticity, completeness and correctness of the declarations and information they contain.\n\nPayment of the balance may take the form of recovery.\n\nThe contracting authority may suspend the payment periods specified in Article I.6 at any time by notifying the contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) that its invoice \n\n29 \n\n## II.20.7. Suspension of the time allowed for payment\n\n## II.20.6. Interim payments and payment of the balance\n\n- (a) the financial guarantee is provided by a bank or a financial institution approved by the contracting authority or, at the request of the contractor and with the agreement of the contracting authority, by a third party; (b) the guarantor stands as first-call guarantor and does not require the contracting \n\n- contracting authority, by a third party; (b) the guarantor stands as first-call guarantor and does not require the contracting authority to have recourse against the principal debtor (the contractor)." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7056589270100407, + "doc_id": "02dd05b31ce6793f3ac64fde05c79770b339caa9ffdf11333f2f424d3eb8eeaf", + "edit_distance": 0.3651026392961877, + "f1_score": 0.9931662870159453, + "meteor": 0.7137641459877037, + "precision": 0.9954337899543378, + "pred_md": "EC - FWC services Dec 2018\n\nContract no: [complete]\n\n- II.4.6 The contractor must not present itself as a representative of the contracting authority and must inform third parties that it is not part of the European public service.\n- II.4.7 The contractor is responsible for the personnel who carry out the services and exercises its authority over its personnel without interference by the contracting authority. The contractor must inform its personnel that:\n- a) they may not accept any direct instructions from the contracting authority; and\n- b) their participation in providing the services does not result in any employment or contractual relationship with the contracting authority.\n- II.4.8 The contractor must ensure that the personnel implementing the FWC and any future replacement personnel possess the professional qualifications and experience required to provide the services, as the case may be on the basis of the selection criteria set out in the tender specifications.\n- II.4.9 At the contracting authority's reasoned request, the contractor must replace any member of personnel who:\n- a) does not have the expertise required to provide the services; or\n- b) has caused disruption at the premises of the contracting authority.\n- The contractor bears the cost of replacing its personnel and is responsible for any delay in providing the services resulting from the replacement of personnel .\n- II.4.10 The contractor must record and report to the contracting authority any problem that affects its ability to provide the services. The report must describe the problem, state when it started and what action the contractor is taking to resolve it.\n- II.4.11 The contractor must immediately inform the contracting authority of any changes in the exclusion situations as declared, according to Article 137 (1) of Regulation (EU) 2018/1046.\n\n## II.5. COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE PARTIES\n\n## II.5.1. Form and means of communication\n\nAny communication of information, notices or documents under the FWC must:\n\n- a) be made in writing in paper or electronic format in the language of the contract;\n- b) bear the FWC number and, if applicable, the specific contract number;\n- c) be made using the relevant communication details set out in Article I.8; and\n- d) be sent by mail, email or, for the documents specified in the special conditions, via e-PRIOR\n\n.\n\nIf a party requests written confirmation of an e-mail within a reasonable time, the other party must provide an original signed paper version of the communication as soon as possible.\n\nThe parties agree that any communication made by email has full legal effect and is admissible as evidence in judicial proceedings.\n\n## II.5.2. Date of communications by mail and email\n\nAny communication is deemed to have been made when the receiving party receives it, unless this FWC contract refers to the date when the communication was sent.\n\n15", + "recall": 0.990909090909091, + "true_md": "Contract no: [complete] \n\nEC - FWC services Dec 2018 \n\n- II.4.6 The contractor must not present itself as a representative of the contracting authority and must inform third parties that it is not part of the European public service. \n\n- II.4.7 The contractor is responsible for the personnel who carry out the services and exercises its authority over its personnel without interference by the contracting authority. The contractor must inform its personnel that: \n\n- a) they may not accept any direct instructions from the contracting authority; and b) their participation in providing the services does not result in any employment or contractual \n\n- a) they may not accept any direct instructions from the contracting authority; and b) their participation in providing the services does not result in any employment or contractual relationship with the contracting authority. \n\n- II.4.8 The contractor must ensure that the personnel implementing the FWC and any future replacement personnel possess the professional qualifications and experience required to provide the services, as the case may be on the basis of the selection criteria set out in the tender specifications. \n\n- II.4.9 At the contracting authority’s reasoned request, the contractor must replace any member of personnel who: \n\n- a) does not have the expertise required to provide the services; or b) has caused disruption at the premises of the contracting authority. \n\n- a) does not have the expertise required to provide the services; or b) has caused disruption at the premises of the contracting authority. \n\n- II.4.10 The contractor must record and report to the contracting authority any problem that affects its ability to provide the services. The report must describe the problem, state when it started and what action the contractor is taking to resolve it. \n\nThe contractor bears the cost of replacing its personnel and is responsible for any delay in providing the services resulting from the replacement of personnel . \n\nAny communication of information, notices or documents under the FWC must: \n\n## II.5. COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE PARTIES\n\n## II.5.1. Form and means of communication\n\n- II.4.11 The contractor must immediately inform the contracting authority of any changes in the exclusion situations as declared, according to Article 137 (1) of Regulation (EU) 2018/1046. \n\n- a) be made in writing in paper or electronic format in the language of the contract; b) bear the FWC number and, if applicable, the specific contract number; \n\n- b) bear the FWC number and, if applicable, the specific contract number; c) be made using the relevant communication details set out in Article I.8; and d) be sent by mail, email or, for the documents specified in the special conditions, via \n\n- a) be made in writing in paper or electronic format in the language of the contract; b) bear the FWC number and, if applicable, the specific contract number; c) be made using the relevant communication details set out in Article I.8; and \n\n- c) be made using the relevant communication details set out in Article I.8; and d) be sent by mail, email or, for the documents specified in the special conditions, via e-PRIOR .\n\n## II.5.2. Date of communications by mail and email\n\nIf a party requests written confirmation of an e-mail within a reasonable time, the other party must provide an original signed paper version of the communication as soon as possible. \n\nThe parties agree that any communication made by email has full legal effect and is admissible as evidence in judicial proceedings. \n\nAny communication is deemed to have been made when the receiving party receives it, unless this FWC contract refers to the date when the communication was sent. \n\n15" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9532342724166286, + "doc_id": "0d12dd959c362823a6ce2c5b150ffc8819cab8bab223b6480c213231f4cd2c34", + "edit_distance": 0.23374613003095976, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9494262314411469, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "pour fournir les services, en fonction des critères de sélection énoncés dans le cahier des charges.\n\n- II.4.9.1 À la demande motivée du pouvoir adjudicateur, le contractant doit remplacer tout membre du personnel qui:\n- a) ne possède pas l'expertise requise pour fournir les services; ou\n- b) a causé des perturbations dans les locaux du pouvoir adjudicateur.\n\nLe contractant supporte les coûts de remplacement de son personnel et est responsable de tout retard dans la fourniture des services résultant du remplacement du personnel .\n\n- II.4.9.2 Si le personnel du contractant travaille dans les bâtiments du pouvoir adjudicateur, le contractant est tenu de remplacer immédiatement et sans indemnité toute personne considérée \"persona non grata\" par le pouvoir adjudicateur. Le contractant est responsable de tout retard dans l'exécution des tâches qui lui sont confiées imputable à un remplacement de personnel opéré conformément au présent paragraphe.\n- II.4.10 Le contractant doit enregistrer et signaler au pouvoir adjudicateur tout problème altérant sa capacité à fournir les services. Le rapport doit décrire le problème, indiquer la date à laquelle il est apparu et les mesures prises par le contractant pour le résoudre.\n- II.4.11 Le contractant doit informer sans délai le pouvoir adjudicateur de toute modification de la situation d'exclusion déclarée, conformément à l'article 137, paragraphe 1, du règlement (UE) 2018/1046.\n\n## II.5 COMMUNICATION ENTRE LES PARTIES\n\n## II.5.1 Forme et moyens de communication\n\nToute communication d'informations, d'avis ou de documents au titre du CC doit:\n\n- a) être établie par écrit sur support papier ou sous forme électronique dans la langue du contrat;\n- b) porter le numéro du CC et, le cas échéant, le numéro du bon de commande ;\n- c) être établie selon les modalités de communication indiquées à l'article I.8; et\n- d) être envoyée par courrier postal ou courrier électronique ou, pour les documents visés dans les conditions particulières, via e-PRIOR .\n\nSi une partie demande la confirmation écrite d'un courrier électronique dans un délai raisonnable, l'autre partie doit fournir le plus rapidement possible une version originale signée, sur support papier, de la communication.\n\nLes parties conviennent que toute communication faite par courrier électronique produit tous ses effets juridiques et est recevable comme élément de preuve dans des procédures judiciaires.\n\n## II.5.2 Date des communications par courrier postal et par courrier électronique\n\nToute communication est réputée effectuée au moment de sa réception par la partie destinataire, sauf si le CC renvoie à la date à laquelle la communication a été envoyée.\n\nTout courrier électronique est réputé reçu par la partie destinataire le jour de son envoi, pour autant qu'il soit adressé à l'adresse électronique mentionnée à l'article I.8. L'expéditeur doit être en mesure de prouver la date d'envoi. Si l'expéditeur reçoit une notification d'échec de remise, il doit tout mettre en œuvre pour faire en sorte que l'autre partie reçoive effectivement la communication par courrier électronique ou par courrier postal. Dans ce cas, l'expéditeur n'est pas considéré comme ayant manqué ou contrevenu à son obligation d'envoyer la communication dans un délai spécifique.\n\nLe courrier postal envoyé au pouvoir adjudicateur est réputé reçu par celui-ci à la date de son enregistrement par le service responsable visé à l'article I.8.\n\nLes notifications formelles sont réputées reçues par le destinataire à la date de réception indiquée dans la preuve reçue par l'expéditeur selon laquelle le message a été transmis au destinataire spécifique.\n\n## II.5.3. Présentation de documents électroniques via e-PRIOR\n\n15\n\nFR", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "pour fournir les services, en fonction des critères de sélection énoncés dans le cahier des charges. \n\n- II.4.9.1 À la demande motivée du pouvoir adjudicateur, le contractant doit remplacer tout membre du personnel qui: \n\n- a) ne possède pas l'expertise requise pour fournir les services; ou \n\n- b) a causé des perturbations dans les locaux du pouvoir adjudicateur. \n\n- II.4.9.2 Si le personnel du contractant travaille dans les bâtiments du pouvoir adjudicateur, le contractant est tenu de remplacer immédiatement et sans indemnité toute personne considérée \"persona non grata\" par le pouvoir adjudicateur. Le contractant est responsable de tout retard dans l'exécution des tâches qui lui sont confiées imputable à un remplacement de personnel opéré conformément au présent paragraphe. \n\n- II.4.10 Le contractant doit enregistrer et signaler au pouvoir adjudicateur tout problème altérant sa capacité à fournir les services. Le rapport doit décrire le problème, indiquer la date à laquelle il est apparu et les mesures prises par le contractant pour le résoudre. \n\n- II.4.11 Le contractant doit informer sans délai le pouvoir adjudicateur de toute modification de la situation d'exclusion déclarée, conformément à l'article 137, paragraphe 1, du règlement (UE) 2018/1046. \n\nsituation d'exclusion déclarée, conformément à l'article 137, paragraphe 1, du règlement (UE) 2018/1046. \n\nLe contractant supporte les coûts de remplacement de son personnel et est responsable de tout retard dans la fourniture des services résultant du remplacement du personnel . \n\n## II.5 COMMUNICATION ENTRE LES PARTIES\n\n## II.5.1 Forme et moyens de communication\n\n## II.5.3. Présentation de documents électroniques via e-PRIOR\n\n## II.5.2 Date des communications par courrier postal et par courrier électronique\n\nToute communication d'informations, d'avis ou de documents au titre du CC doit: \n\n- a) être établie par écrit sur support papier ou sous forme électronique dans la langue du contrat; \n\n- c) être établie selon les modalités de communication indiquées à l'article I.8; et \n\n- b) porter le numéro du CC et, le cas échéant, le numéro du bon de commande ; \n\n- d) être envoyée par courrier postal ou courrier électronique ou, pour les documents visés dans les conditions particulières, via e-PRIOR . \n\nSi une partie demande la confirmation écrite d'un courrier électronique dans un délai raisonnable, l'autre partie doit fournir le plus rapidement possible une version originale signée, sur support papier, de la communication. \n\nLes parties conviennent que toute communication faite par courrier électronique produit tous ses effets juridiques et est recevable comme élément de preuve dans des procédures judiciaires. \n\nToute communication est réputée effectuée au moment de sa réception par la partie destinataire, sauf si le CC renvoie à la date à laquelle la communication a été envoyée. \n\nTout courrier électronique est réputé reçu par la partie destinataire le jour de son envoi, pour autant qu'il soit adressé à l'adresse électronique mentionnée à l'article I.8. L'expéditeur doit être en mesure de prouver la date d'envoi. Si l'expéditeur reçoit une notification d'échec de remise, il doit tout mettre en œuvre pour faire en sorte que l'autre partie reçoive effectivement la communication par courrier électronique ou par courrier postal. Dans ce cas, l'expéditeur n'est pas considéré comme ayant manqué ou contrevenu à son obligation d'envoyer la communication dans un délai spécifique. \n\nLe courrier postal envoyé au pouvoir adjudicateur est réputé reçu par celui-ci à la date de son enregistrement par le service responsable visé à l'article I.8.\n\nLes notifications formelles sont réputées reçues par le destinataire à la date de réception indiquée dans la preuve reçue par l'expéditeur selon laquelle le message a été transmis au destinataire spécifique. \n\n15 FR" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.958379103886293, + "doc_id": "c0990dda6a59c1452d831c9407ad636d61c01386244abface30fd724eadc0e49", + "edit_distance": 0.19553072625698323, + "f1_score": 0.9950738916256158, + "meteor": 0.9924386962493496, + "precision": 0.9901960784313726, + "pred_md": "## services for which these capacities are required (i.e. the latter will assume the role of subcontractors).\n\n-  Relying on the capacities of other entities is only necessary when the capacity of the tenderer is not sufficient to fulfil the required minimum levels of capacity. Abstract commitments that other entities will put resources at the disposal of the tenderer will be disregarded.\n\n## 2.5. Tender submission: how many tenders may an economic operator submit?\n\nEconomic operators may submit one tender. In case an economic operator submits more than one tender (as sole tenderer and/or as a joint tenderer in a group of tenderers) without withdrawing any of them, as foreseen in the Invitation to Tender, only the latest tender submitted before the time limit for receipt of tenders will be considered. In case of omissions in the latest submission, tenderers will not be able to refer to earlier submissions and may be rejected if mandatory information is missing.\n\n16", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "services for which these capacities are required (i.e. the latter will assume the role of subcontractors). \n\n Relying on the capacities of other entities is only necessary when the capacity of the tenderer is not sufficient to fulfil the required minimum levels of capacity. Abstract commitments that other entities will put resources at the disposal of the tenderer will be disregarded. \n\nEconomic operators may submit one tender. In case an economic operator submits more than one tender (as sole tenderer and/or as a joint tenderer in a group of tenderers) without withdrawing any of them, as foreseen in the Invitation to Tender, only the latest tender submitted before the time limit for receipt of tenders will be considered. In case of omissions in the latest submission, tenderers will not be able to refer to earlier submissions and may be rejected if mandatory information is missing. \n\n## 2.5. Tender submission: how many tenders may an economic operator submit?\n\n16" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9171606620777162, + "doc_id": "ad64bc451a934ee2877b6ddcc20819a7864d168e845b9231c8ec54d1b99c37ab", + "edit_distance": 0.7597955706984668, + "f1_score": 0.9955555555555554, + "meteor": 0.7627031797759232, + "precision": 0.9955555555555555, + "pred_md": "EC - FWC services Dec 2018\n\nContract no: [complete]\n\n- (f) rights to authorise or license the modes of exploitation set out in any of the points (a) to (e) to third parties, provided however that this does not apply to pre-existing rights and pre-existing materials , if they are only licensed to the Union, except as foreseen by Article II.13.2.;\n- (g) other adaptations which the parties may later agree; in such case, the following rules apply: the contracting authority must consult the contractor. If necessary, the contractor must in turn seek the agreement of any creator or other right holder and must reply to the contracting authority within one month by providing its agreement, including any suggestions of modifications, free of charge. The contractor may refuse the intended modification only if a creator can demonstrate that the intended modification may harm his/her honour or reputation, thereby violating his/her moral rights.\n\nThe modes of exploitation may be defined in more details in the specific contract .\n\nThe list above is in addition to whatever rights already accrue to the Union on the basis of existing exceptions in the applicable legislation, such as the copyright exception to ensure the proper performance or reporting of administrative proceedings, in cases where such exceptions apply.\n\n## I.10.2. Licence or transfer of pre-existing rights\n\n[All pre-existing rights incorporated in the results , if any, are licensed to the Union as set out in Article II.13.2.]\n\n- [By derogation to Article II.13.2, the Union acquires fully and irrevocably all pre-existing rights incorporated in the results , if any [except for the following rights [ insert exceptions ] [unless provided otherwise in a specific contract ].]\n\n## I.10.3. Provision of list of pre-existing rights and documentary evidence\n\nThe contractor must provide the contracting authority with a list of pre-existing rights as set out in Article II.13.4 together with the invoice for payment of the balance at the latest.\n\nIn addition, the contractor must provide the contracting authority with relevant and exhaustive evidence of the acquisition of all the necessary pre-existing rights together with a presentation of relevant result . To this effect, the contractor must provide [a statement in accordance with Annex [ insert reference ]] [the relevant evidence listed in Article II.13.5 as appropriate or, failing that, third parties' statements in accordance with Annex [ insert reference ]].\n\n## I.11. TERMINATION BY EITHER PARTY\n\nEither party may terminate the FWC and/or the FWC and specific contracts by sending formal notification to the other party with three months written notice.\n\nIf the FWC or a specific contract is terminated:\n\n- a) neither party is entitled to compensation;\n- b) the contractor is entitled to payment only for the services provided before termination takes effect.\n\nThe second, third and fourth paragraphs of Article II.18.4 apply.\n\n## I.12. APPLICABLE LAW AND SETTLEMENT OF DISPUTES\n\nI.12.1 The FWC is governed by Union law, complemented, where necessary, by the law of Spain.\n\n10", + "recall": 0.9955555555555555, + "true_md": "EC - FWC services Dec 2018 \n\nContract no: [complete] \n\nThe modes of exploitation may be defined in more details in the specific contract .\n\nThe list above is in addition to whatever rights already accrue to the Union on the basis of existing exceptions in the applicable legislation, such as the copyright exception to ensure the proper performance or reporting of administrative proceedings, in cases where such exceptions apply. \n\n[All pre-existing rights incorporated in the results , if any, are licensed to the Union as set out in Article II.13.2.] \n\n[By derogation to Article II.13.2, the Union acquires fully and irrevocably all pre-existing rights incorporated in the results , if any [except for the following rights [ insert exceptions ] [unless provided otherwise in a specific contract ].] \n\nThe contractor must provide the contracting authority with a list of pre-existing rights as set out in Article II.13.4 together with the invoice for payment of the balance at the latest.\n\nIn addition, the contractor must provide the contracting authority with relevant and exhaustive evidence of the acquisition of all the necessary pre-existing rights together with a presentation of relevant result . To this effect, the contractor must provide [a statement in accordance with Annex [ insert reference ]] [the relevant evidence listed in Article II.13.5 as appropriate or, failing that, third parties’ statements in accordance with Annex [ insert reference ]].\n\nEither party may terminate the FWC and/or the FWC and specific contracts by sending formal notification to the other party with three months written notice.\n\nIf the FWC or a specific contract is terminated: \n\nThe second, third and fourth paragraphs of Article II.18.4 apply.\n\n- (f) rights to authorise or license the modes of exploitation set out in any of the points (a) to (e) to third parties, provided however that this does not apply to pre-existing rights and pre-existing materials , if they are only licensed to the Union, except as foreseen by Article II.13.2.;\n\n- (g) other adaptations which the parties may later agree; in such case, the following rules apply: the contracting authority must consult the contractor. If necessary, the contractor must in turn seek the agreement of any creator or other right holder and must reply to the contracting authority within one month by providing its agreement, including any suggestions of modifications, free of charge. The contractor may refuse the intended modification only if a creator can demonstrate that the intended modification may harm his/her honour or reputation, thereby violating his/her moral rights. \n\n- a) neither party is entitled to compensation; b) the contractor is entitled to payment only for the services provided before termination takes \n\n- a) neither party is entitled to compensation; b) the contractor is entitled to payment only for the services provided before termination takes effect.\n\n- I.12.1 The FWC is governed by Union law, complemented, where necessary, by the law of Spain. \n\n10\n\n## I.10.2. Licence or transfer of pre-existing rights\n\n## I.10.3. Provision of list of pre-existing rights and documentary evidence\n\n## I.11. TERMINATION BY EITHER PARTY\n\n## I.12. APPLICABLE LAW AND SETTLEMENT OF DISPUTES" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9230724532113861, + "doc_id": "e7945e7d1d417a0225b4a3382a0b8b9c4cc3888269911a67d8cac221923a2f24", + "edit_distance": 0.7169373549883991, + "f1_score": 0.9813953488372094, + "meteor": 0.882549880949841, + "precision": 0.985981308411215, + "pred_md": "## AW 04 -EFFECTIVE MANAGEMENT OF HUMAN CAPITAL\n\nReference:\n\n[insert]\n\nMax size: 15 pages\n\nMax: 15 points\n\nMin: 9 points\n\nWith reference to the service requirements as defined in the Technical Specifications, elaborate a proposal in relation with the activities and objectives detailed under the following sections reflecting future operational scenarios:\n\n- · Section 5 Resources\n- · Section 6.2.1 Core and extended teams\n\n## AW 05 - SCENARIO\n\nReference:\n\n[insert]\n\nMax size: 10 pages\n\nMax: 20 points\n\nMin: 12 points\n\n## Background\n\nAs part of the Data Management platform suite of services and products, ECHA has developed a Data Integration (and provisioning) Platform (DIP), a Scientific Data Analysis Platform (SDAP), and the Text Analytics (TA) text mining/searching tool.\n\n- · The DIP provides an integrated view representing the single point of truth for multiple data areas. The data is provisioned consuming systems, such as the ECHA dissemination web site, and feeds the Enterprise Data Warehouse for Business Intelligence and reporting purposes.\n- · The Scientific Data Analysis Platform (SDAP), is an advanced analytics platform serving specialised analytical operations on the physicochemical, fate, and (eco)toxicological data submitted to EC HA, in support of the agency's regulatory scientific activities.\n- · The Text Analytics application facilities searching across all available scientific dossier information, enabling analysis of this content in support of evaluation, risk management and screening activities, and dealing with requests from MSCAs\n\nFor further details on the above please see Annex 2a - Products in scope, section 2. Data Platform, for further details.\n\nThe above platforms/applications require, to a large extent, access to the same scientific and administrative data, and whilst some data is integrated and provisioned only once (via the DIP) other data is currently sourced and ingested on a per system basis, through separate processes.\n\n## Scope\n\nIn the context of extending the capabilities of the ECHA Data Platform (GROW), the scope of this request is to enrich the data processing and analytics capabilities to meet additional regulatory requirements, by introducing an additional source of scientific data\n\nThis additional data source provides information on chemical substances, covering both administrative information and chemical substance data, and consists of the following sections:\n\n34", + "recall": 0.9768518518518519, + "true_md": "## AW 04 – EFFECTIVE MANAGEMENT OF HUMAN CAPITAL\n\n## AW 05 - SCENARIO\n\n## Scope\n\nReference: [insert]\n\nMax size: 15 pages \n\nMax: 15 points \n\nMin: 9 points \n\nWith reference to the service requirements as defined in the Technical Specifications, elaborate a proposal in relation with the activities and objectives detailed under the following sections reflecting future operational scenarios: \n\nReference: [insert]\n\nMax size: 10 pages \n\nMax: 20 points \n\nMin: 12 points \n\nAs part of the Data Management platform suite of services and products, ECHA has developed a Data Integration (and provisioning) Platform (DIP), a Scientific Data Analysis Platform (SDAP), and the Text Analytics (TA) text mining/searching tool. \n\nFor further details on the above please see Annex 2a - Products in scope, section 2. Data Platform, for further details. \n\nThe above platforms/applications require, to a large extent, access to the same scientific and administrative data, and whilst some data is integrated and provisioned only once (via the DIP) other data is currently sourced and ingested on a per system basis, through separate processes. \n\nIn the context of extending the capabilities of the ECHA Data Platform (GROW), the scope of this request is to enrich the data processing and analytics capabilities to meet additional regulatory requirements, by introducing an additional source of scientific data \n\nThis additional data source provides information on chemical substances, covering both administrative information and chemical substance data, and consists of the following sections: \n\n34\n\n- • The DIP provides an integrated view representing the single point of truth for multiple data areas. The data is provisioned consuming systems, such as the ECHA dissemination web site, and feeds the Enterprise Data Warehouse for Business Intelligence and reporting purposes. \n\n- • The Scientific Data Analysis Platform (SDAP), is an advanced analytics platform serving specialised analytical operations on the physicochemical, fate, and (eco)toxicological data submitted to EC HA, in support of the agency’s regulatory scientific activities. \n\n- • The Text Analytics application facilities searching across all available scientific dossier information, enabling analysis of this content in support of evaluation, risk management and screening activities, and dealing with requests from MSCAs\n\n- • Section 6.2.1 Core and extended teams \n\n- • Section 5 Resources\n\n## Background" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.909274368972377, + "doc_id": "08933ee82e195fd6da7a82a2eb8c1cac01cd159663dd6770ae64fd8a4f4c7e3e", + "edit_distance": 0.8305084745762712, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.6920784833482319, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## 5.3 Protections\n\n## 5.3.I. PROTECTIONS INDIVIDUELLES .\n\n- 5.3.I.1 Toute personne se trouvant sur le chantier est tenue de porter des protections individuelles, conformément à la législation en vigueur et en fonction de l'analyse de risque faite par l'entrepreneur;\n- 5.3.I.2 Toute entreprise doit, à ses frais, mettre des protections individuelles à la disposition de son personnel et/ou des visiteurs. Elle doit également veiller, d'une part, à ce que ces protections soient utilisées et, d'autre part, à ce qu'elles soient entretenues et remplacées en temps voulu.\n- 5.3.I.3 Les travailleurs doivent utiliser correctement les protections individuelles, conformément à la formation et aux instructions qu'ils ont reçues, et les ranger après usage.\n- 5.3.I.4 Pour des travaux dans le parking, une chasuble fluorescente doit être portée.\n\n## 5.3. II. PROTECTIONS COLLECTIVES\n\n- 5.3.II.1. Pour éviter les accidents de travail, toute entreprise prévoira, en cas de besoin, des protections collectives. Le choix en sera déterminé suivant les principes de prévention (Loi sur le bien-être, chapitre II, art. 5). La préférence sera donnée aux protections collectives plutôt qu'aux protections individuelles.\n- 5.3.II.2. Le placement et/ou l'enlèvement des protections collectives se fait en concertation avec le CSS et le gestionnaire de projet du CUE Les protections collectives placées ne peuvent jamais être enlevées sans que des protections de remplacement ou des protections définitives soient installées.\n\n## 5.4 Environnement\n\n- 5.4.1 L'incinération de déchets sur le chantier est strictement interdite.\n- 5.4.2 L'enlèvement des déchets et/ou des emballages se fait en concertation avec le CSS et le gestionnaire de projet du CUE, conformément à la législation en vigueur en matière d'environnement et aux prescriptions relatives au traitement des emballages.\n\n## 6. INSTALLATION ÉLECTRIQUE\n\n- 6.1. L'installation électrique est réalisée conformément aux normes en vigueur et au règlement général sur les installations électriques (RGIE).\n- 6.2. Au moment de sa mise en service, l'installation du chantier sera approuvée par un organisme agréé/service externe de contrôle technique (SECT). Tout défaut doit immédiatement être signalé au CSS ou au gestionnaire de projet du CUE.\n\n74\n\nANNEX VII\n\nFR", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## 5.3 Protections\n\n## 5.3.I. PROTECTIONS INDIVIDUELLES .\n\n## 5.3. II. PROTECTIONS COLLECTIVES\n\n## 5.4 Environnement\n\n## 6. INSTALLATION ÉLECTRIQUE\n\n74 FR \n\nANNEX VII \n\n- 6.2. Au moment de sa mise en service, l'installation du chantier sera approuvée par un organisme agréé/service externe de contrôle technique (SECT). Tout défaut doit immédiatement être signalé au CSS ou au gestionnaire de projet du CUE. \n\n- 6.1. L'installation électrique est réalisée conformément aux normes en vigueur et au règlement général sur les installations électriques (RGIE). \n\n- 5.4.2 L'enlèvement des déchets et/ou des emballages se fait en concertation avec le CSS et le gestionnaire de projet du CUE, conformément à la législation en vigueur en matière d'environnement et aux prescriptions relatives au traitement des emballages. \n\n- 5.4.1 L'incinération de déchets sur le chantier est strictement interdite. \n\n- 5.3.II.2. Le placement et/ou l'enlèvement des protections collectives se fait en concertation avec le CSS et le gestionnaire de projet du CUE Les protections collectives placées ne peuvent jamais être enlevées sans que des protections de remplacement ou des protections définitives soient installées. \n\n- 5.3.II.1. Pour éviter les accidents de travail, toute entreprise prévoira, en cas de besoin, des protections collectives. Le choix en sera déterminé suivant les principes de prévention (Loi sur le bien-être, chapitre II, art. 5). La préférence sera donnée aux protections collectives plutôt qu'aux protections individuelles. \n\n- 5.3.I.3 Les travailleurs doivent utiliser correctement les protections individuelles, conformément à la formation et aux instructions qu'ils ont reçues, et les ranger après usage. \n\n- 5.3.I.4 Pour des travaux dans le parking, une chasuble fluorescente doit être portée. \n\n- risque faite par l'entrepreneur; 5.3.I.2 Toute entreprise doit, à ses frais, mettre des protections individuelles à la disposition de son personnel et/ou des visiteurs. Elle doit également veiller, d'une part, à ce que ces protections soient utilisées et, d'autre part, à ce qu'elles soient entretenues et remplacées en temps voulu. \n\n- 5.3.I.1 Toute personne se trouvant sur le chantier est tenue de porter des protections individuelles, conformément à la législation en vigueur et en fonction de l'analyse de risque faite par l'entrepreneur; 5.3.I.2 Toute entreprise doit, à ses frais, mettre des protections individuelles à la disposition" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9350052576479091, + "doc_id": "96a32a39c30d621b278f91d0c957521aaaf8faba80c8d21dd13411a2f6f8dc6a", + "edit_distance": 0.35933806146572106, + "f1_score": 0.9809264305177112, + "meteor": 0.9326481027366278, + "precision": 0.9782608695652174, + "pred_md": "Contract number: [ complete ]\n\nContract conditions of December 2015\n\nV is the price of the relevant purchase or supply;\n\nd is the duration specified in the contract for delivery of the relevant purchase or supply or, failing that, the duration of performance of the contract specified in Article I.3 expressed in days.\n\nLiquidated damages may be imposed together with a reduction in price under the conditions laid down in Article II.15.\n\n## II.14.2. Procedure\n\nThe contracting authority must formally notify the contractor of its intention to apply liquidated damages and the corresponding calculated amount.\n\nThe contractor has 30 days following the date of receipt to submit observations. Failing that, the decision becomes enforceable the day after the time limit for submitting observations has elapsed.\n\nIf the contractor submits observations, the contracting authority, taking into account the relevant observations, must notify the contractor:\n\n- (a) of the withdrawal of its intention to apply liquidated damages; or\n- (b) of its final decision to apply liquidated damages and the corresponding amount.\n\n## II.14.3. Nature of liquidated damages\n\nThe parties expressly acknowledge and agree that any amount payable under this Article is not a penalty and represents a reasonable estimate of fair compensation for the damage incurred due to failure to provide the supplies within the applicable time limits set out in this contract.\n\n## II.14.4. Claims and liability\n\nAny claim for liquidated damages does not affect the contractor's actual or potential liability or the contracting authority's rights under Article II.17.\n\n## II.15. REDUCTION IN PRICE\n\n## II.15.1. Quality standards\n\nIf the contractor fails to deliver the supply in accordance with the contract ('unperformed obligations') or if it fails to deliver the supply in accordance with the expected quality levels specified in the tender specifications ('low quality delivery'), the contracting authority may reduce or recover payments proportionally to the seriousness of the unperformed obligations or low quality delivery. This includes in particular cases where the contracting authority cannot approve a document or deliver a certificate of conformity for supply as defined in Article I.5 after the contractor has submitted the required additional information, correction or new version.\n\nA reduction in price may be imposed together with liquidated damages under the conditions of Article II.14.\n\n23", + "recall": 0.9836065573770492, + "true_md": "Contract conditions of December 2015 \n\nContract number: [ complete ] \n\nV is the price of the relevant purchase or supply; \n\nd is the duration specified in the contract for delivery of the relevant purchase or supply or, failing that, the duration of performance of the contract specified in Article I.3 expressed in days. \n\nLiquidated damages may be imposed together with a reduction in price under the conditions laid down in Article II.15. \n\nThe contracting authority must formally notify the contractor of its intention to apply liquidated damages and the corresponding calculated amount.\n\nThe contractor has 30 days following the date of receipt to submit observations. Failing that, the decision becomes enforceable the day after the time limit for submitting observations has elapsed.\n\nIf the contractor submits observations, the contracting authority, taking into account the relevant observations, must notify the contractor:\n\nThe parties expressly acknowledge and agree that any amount payable under this Article is not a penalty and represents a reasonable estimate of fair compensation for the damage incurred due to failure to provide the supplies within the applicable time limits set out in this contract. \n\nAny claim for liquidated damages does not affect the contractor’s actual or potential liability or the contracting authority’s rights under Article II.17. \n\nIf the contractor fails to deliver the supply in accordance with the contract (‘unperformed obligations’) or if it fails to deliver the supply in accordance with the expected quality levels specified in the tender specifications (‘low quality delivery’), the contracting authority may reduce or recover payments proportionally to the seriousness of the unperformed obligations or low quality delivery. This includes in particular cases where the contracting authority cannot approve a document or deliver a certificate of conformity for supply as defined in Article I.5 after the contractor has submitted the required additional information, correction or new version.\n\nA reduction in price may be imposed together with liquidated damages under the conditions of Article II.14. \n\n23 \n\n## II.15.1. Quality standards\n\n## II.15. REDUCTION IN PRICE\n\n## II.14.4. Claims and liability\n\n## II.14.3. Nature of liquidated damages\n\n- (a) of the withdrawal of its intention to apply liquidated damages; or\n\n- (b) of its final decision to apply liquidated damages and the corresponding amount.\n\n## II.14.2. Procedure" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8400852869150445, + "doc_id": "1e938f00f1fce5ddbd241cb3131ddf343cffe96a2f501ee6c50b76bec937793e", + "edit_distance": 0.24528301886792453, + "f1_score": 0.9832935560859187, + "meteor": 0.8822613990641841, + "precision": 0.9809523809523809, + "pred_md": "## I.10 EXPLOITATION DES RÉSULTATS DU CC\n\n## I.10.1 Liste détaillée des modes d'exploitation des résultats\n\nConformément à l'article II.13.1 par lequel l'Union acquiert la propriété des résultats définis dans le CC, y compris le cahier des charges, ceux-ci peuvent être utilisés pour l'un des modes d'exploitation suivants:\n\n- a) exploitation à des fins internes:\n- · divulgation auprès du personnel du pouvoir adjudicateur;\n- · divulgation auprès des personnes et des organismes qui travaillent pour le pouvoir adjudicateur ou collaborent avec lui, dont les contractants et sous-traitants (personnes morales ou physiques);\n- · divulgation après des autres institutions, des agences et des organismes de l'Union ainsi que des institutions des États membres;\n- · installation, chargement, traitement;\n- · arrangement, compilation, assemblage, extraction;\n- · copie, reproduction en tout ou en partie et en un nombre illimité d'exemplaires;]\n- b) modifications apportées par le pouvoir adjudicateur ou par un tiers au nom du pouvoir adjudicateur, notamment:\n- · réalisation d'une version raccourcie ou abrégée;\n- · résumé;\n- · modification du contenu, des dimensions;\n- · modification technique du contenu (correction nécessaire d'erreurs techniques), ajout de nouvelles parties ou fonctionnalités, modification des fonctionnalités, fourniture aux tiers d'informations supplémentaires sur le résultat (par exemple, code source) en vue de modifications;\n- · ajout de nouveaux éléments, paragraphes, titres, chapeaux, caractères gras, légendes, tables des matières, sommaires, graphiques, sous-titres, éléments sonores;\n- · ajout de métadonnées, aux fins de l'exploration de textes et de données; ajout d'informations sur le régime des droits; ajout de mesures technologiques de protection;\n- · adaptation sous forme sonore, adaptation sous forme de présentation, d'animation, de série de pictogrammes, de diaporama, de présentation publique;\n- · sélection d'extraits ou division en parties;\n- · intégration, y compris en les rognant et en les coupant, des resultats ou parties de résultats dans d'autres œuvres, par exemple sur des sites ou des pages internet;\n- · traduction, insertion de sous-titres, doublage dans différentes versions linguistiques:\n- -anglais, français, allemand;\n- -toutes les langues officielles de l'Union européenne;\n- -langues en usage dans l'Union européenne;\n- -langues des pays candidats;\n- c) autres adaptations dont les parties pourraient convenir ultérieurement. Dans ce cas, le pouvoir adjudicateur doit consulter le contractant. Si nécessaire, ce dernier doit demander à\n\n9\n\nFR", + "recall": 0.9856459330143541, + "true_md": "## I.10 EXPLOITATION DES RÉSULTATS DU CC\n\n## I.10.1 Liste détaillée des modes d'exploitation des résultats\n\nConformément à l'article II.13.1 par lequel l'Union acquiert la propriété des résultats définis dans le CC, y compris le cahier des charges, ceux-ci peuvent être utilisés pour l'un des modes d'exploitation suivants: \n\na) exploitation à des fins internes: \n\nb) modifications apportées par le pouvoir adjudicateur ou par un tiers au nom du pouvoir adjudicateur, notamment: \n\n9 c) autres adaptations dont les parties pourraient convenir ultérieurement. Dans ce cas, le pouvoir adjudicateur doit consulter le contractant. Si nécessaire, ce dernier doit demander à \n\n- • divulgation auprès du personnel du pouvoir adjudicateur; \n\n- • divulgation auprès des personnes et des organismes qui travaillent pour le pouvoir adjudicateur ou collaborent avec lui, dont les contractants et sous-traitants (personnes morales ou physiques); \n\n- • divulgation après des autres institutions, des agences et des organismes de l'Union ainsi que des institutions des États membres; \n\n- • installation, chargement, traitement; \n\n- • arrangement, compilation, assemblage, extraction; \n\n- • copie, reproduction en tout ou en partie et en un nombre illimité d'exemplaires;] \n\n- • réalisation d'une version raccourcie ou abrégée; \n\n- • résumé; \n\n- • modification du contenu, des dimensions; \n\n- • modification technique du contenu (correction nécessaire d'erreurs techniques), ajout de nouvelles parties ou fonctionnalités, modification des fonctionnalités, fourniture aux tiers d'informations supplémentaires sur le résultat (par exemple, code source) en vue de modifications; \n\n- • ajout de nouveaux éléments, paragraphes, titres, chapeaux, caractères gras, légendes, tables des matières, sommaires, graphiques, sous-titres, éléments sonores; \n\n- • ajout de métadonnées, aux fins de l'exploration de textes et de données; ajout d'informations sur le régime des droits; ajout de mesures technologiques de protection; \n\n- • adaptation sous forme sonore, adaptation sous forme de présentation, d'animation, de série de pictogrammes, de diaporama, de présentation publique; \n\n- • sélection d'extraits ou division en parties; \n\n- • intégration, y compris en les rognant et en les coupant, des resultats ou parties de résultats dans d'autres œuvres, par exemple sur des sites ou des pages internet; \n\n- • traduction, insertion de sous-titres, doublage dans différentes versions linguistiques: \n\n- - anglais, français, allemand; \n\n- - toutes les langues officielles de l'Union européenne; \n\n- - langues en usage dans l'Union européenne; \n\n- - langues des pays candidats; \n\n9 FR pouvoir adjudicateur doit consulter le contractant. Si nécessaire, ce dernier doit demander à" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9723927627311465, + "doc_id": "2f9bb1263fa8884f7397a85c9a9bf9c86e5b44656dba14919d6e354739778436", + "edit_distance": 0.20460358056265984, + "f1_score": 0.9813333333333333, + "meteor": 0.9791350106792396, + "precision": 0.983957219251337, + "pred_md": "Contract number: [ complete ]\n\nContract conditions of December 2015\n\n- II.22.3. The contractor must grant the contracting authority's staff and outside personnel authorised by the contracting authority the appropriate right of access to sites and premises where the contract is performed and to all the information, including information in electronic format, needed to conduct such checks and audits. The contractor must ensure that the information is readily available at the moment of the check or audit and, if so requested, that information is handed over in an appropriate form.\n- II.22.4. On the basis of the findings made during the audit, a provisional report is drawn up. The contracting authority or its authorised representative must send it to the contractor, who has 30 days following the date of receipt to submit observations. The contractor must receive the final report within 60 days following the expiry of that deadline to submit observations.\n- On the basis of the final audit findings, the contracting authority may recover all or part of the payments made in accordance with Article II.21 and may take any other measure which it considers necessary.\n- II.22.5. In accordance with Council Regulation (Euratom, EC) No 2185/96 of 11 November 1996 concerning on-the-spot checks and inspection carried out by the Commission in order to protect the European Communities' financial interests against fraud and other irregularities and Regulation (EC) No 883/2013 of the European Parliament and the Council of 11 September 2013 concerning investigation conducted by the European Anti-Fraud Office, the European AntiFraud Office may carry out investigations, including on-the-spot checks and inspections, to establish whether there has been fraud , corruption or any other illegal activity under the contract affecting the financial interests of the Union and the Community. Findings arising from an investigation may lead to criminal prosecution under national law.\n\nThe investigations may be carried out at any moment during the performance of the contract and up to five years starting from the payment of the balance.\n\n- II.22.6 The Court of Auditors has the same rights as the contracting authority, particularly right of access, for the purpose of checks and audits.\n\n32", + "recall": 0.9787234042553191, + "true_md": "Contract number: [ complete ] \n\nContract conditions of December 2015 \n\n- II.22.3. The contractor must grant the contracting authority’s staff and outside personnel authorised by the contracting authority the appropriate right of access to sites and premises where the contract is performed and to all the information, including information in electronic format, needed to conduct such checks and audits. The contractor must ensure that the information is readily available at the moment of the check or audit and, if so requested, that information is handed over in an appropriate form.\n\n- II.22.4. On the basis of the findings made during the audit, a provisional report is drawn up. The contracting authority or its authorised representative must send it to the contractor, who has 30 days following the date of receipt to submit observations. The contractor must receive the final report within 60 days following the expiry of that deadline to submit observations. \n\n- II.22.5. In accordance with Council Regulation (Euratom, EC) No 2185/96 of 11 November 1996 concerning on-the-spot checks and inspection carried out by the Commission in order to protect the European Communities’ financial interests against fraud and other irregularities and Regulation (EC) No 883/2013 of the European Parliament and the Council of 11 September 2013 concerning investigation conducted by the European Anti-Fraud Office, the European Anti- Fraud Office may carry out investigations, including on-the-spot checks and inspections, to establish whether there has been fraud , corruption or any other illegal activity under the contract affecting the financial interests of the Union and the Community. Findings arising from an investigation may lead to criminal prosecution under national law. \n\nOn the basis of the final audit findings, the contracting authority may recover all or part of the payments made in accordance with Article II.21 and may take any other measure which it considers necessary. \n\nThe investigations may be carried out at any moment during the performance of the contract and up to five years starting from the payment of the balance. \n\n- II.22.6 The Court of Auditors has the same rights as the contracting authority, particularly right of access, for the purpose of checks and audits. \n\n32" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9706658070205232, + "doc_id": "085ee74cc7f02f8e648cdbd14cdfae74bc9686ed1a424166a1b8d258fc41e74b", + "edit_distance": 0.11324786324786325, + "f1_score": 0.9454545454545454, + "meteor": 0.9506928800716672, + "precision": 0.9435483870967742, + "pred_md": "## 7.8 Travail en hauteur au moyen d'échelles\n\n- 7.8.1. «Les échelles ne peuvent être utilisées comme postes de travail en hauteur que dans les circonstances où l'utilisation d'autres équipements de travail plus sûrs ne se justifie pas en raison du faible niveau de risque et en raison, soit de la courte durée d'utilisation, soit des caractéristiques existantes du site que l'employeur ne peut pas modifier». S'il n'y a pas d'autre moyen, l'utilisation d'une échelle est autorisée.\n- 7.8.2 Les échelles doivent être pourvues d'un numéro et inscrites dans un registre dans lequel le préposé consigne ses contrôles. Ce registre doit être à la disposition du CSS, du gestionnaire de projet du CUE ou du conseiller en prévention.\n- 7.8.3 Les échelles doivent toujours être en bon état (ne pas être endommagées et être stables) et être équipées de dispositifs antidérapants appropriés. Elles sont placées sur un sol ferme et sont toujours attachées. Elles possèdent le label VGS.\n- 7.8.4. Les échelles non approuvées, non numérotées ou défectueuses seront immédiatement retirées du chantier de manière à ne plus pouvoir y être utilisées.\n- 7.8.5. Une échelle doit toujours dépasser d'au moins 1 mètre le niveau le plus élevé de manière qu'on puisse facilement y accéder ou en descendre.\n- 7.8.6. En principe, une échelle n'est utilisée que pour se déplacer entre deux niveaux situés à des hauteurs différentes. On s'abstiendra, si possible, de travailler sur une échelle. Exceptionnellement, on peut effectuer certains travaux à partir de l'échelle à condition d'utiliser des dispositifs anti-chute appropriés.\n- 7.8.7. Une bonne échelle pourvue des meilleurs dispositifs de protection n'offre jamais de garantie absolue contre les accidents. Les instructions concernant l'utilisation des échelles doivent être données aux utilisateurs, leur être répétées et être tenues à jour.\n- 7.8.8. Les échelles doivent être contrôlées tous les trois mois par une personne compétente de l'entreprise.\n- 7.8.9. Si le risque de chute est supérieur à deux mètres, un deuxième travailleur s'assurera de stabiliser l'échelle. Le port d'un casque de sécurité est obligatoire.\n- 7.8.10. Le lieu de travail doit être signalé.\n\n## 7.9 Travail en hauteur par des échafaudages\n\n- 7.9.1. À partir de 2 mètres de haut, tout échafaudage doit être pourvu de soutiens, intermédiaires et de plinthes. La surface de travail doit être d'un seul tenant, c'est-à-dire sans interstices dangereux entre les planches et le soutien, et être suffisamment stable compte tenu des charges prévisibles. Tout échafaudage doit de préférence être solidement ancré au bâtiment.\n\n77\n\nANNEX VII\n\nFR", + "recall": 0.9473684210526315, + "true_md": "## 7.8 Travail en hauteur au moyen d'échelles\n\n- 7.8.1. «Les échelles ne peuvent être utilisées comme postes de travail en hauteur que dans les circonstances où l’utilisation d’autres équipements de travail plus sûrs ne se justifie pas en raison du faible niveau de risque et en raison, soit de la courte durée d’utilisation, soit des caractéristiques existantes du site que l’employeur ne peut pas modifier». S'il n'y a pas d'autre moyen, l'utilisation d'une échelle est autorisée. \n\n- 7.8.2 Les échelles doivent être pourvues d'un numéro et inscrites dans un registre dans lequel le préposé consigne ses contrôles. Ce registre doit être à la disposition du CSS, du gestionnaire de projet du CUE ou du conseiller en prévention. \n\n- 7.8.3 Les échelles doivent toujours être en bon état (ne pas être endommagées et être stables) et être équipées de dispositifs antidérapants appropriés. Elles sont placées sur un sol ferme et sont toujours attachées. Elles possèdent le label VGS. \n\n- 7.8.4.Les échelles non approuvées, non numérotées ou défectueuses seront immédiatement retirées du chantier de manière à ne plus pouvoir y être utilisées. \n\n- 7.8.5.Une échelle doit toujours dépasser d'au moins 1 mètre le niveau le plus élevé de manière qu'on puisse facilement y accéder ou en descendre. \n\n- 7.8.6.En principe, une échelle n'est utilisée que pour se déplacer entre deux niveaux situés à des hauteurs différentes. On s'abstiendra, si possible, de travailler sur une échelle. Exceptionnellement, on peut effectuer certains travaux à partir de l'échelle à condition d'utiliser des dispositifs anti-chute appropriés. \n\n- 7.8.7.Une bonne échelle pourvue des meilleurs dispositifs de protection n'offre jamais de garantie absolue contre les accidents. Les instructions concernant l'utilisation des échelles doivent être données aux utilisateurs, leur être répétées et être tenues à jour. \n\n- 7.8.8.Les échelles doivent être contrôlées tous les trois mois par une personne compétente de l'entreprise. \n\n- 7.8.9.Si le risque de chute est supérieur à deux mètres, un deuxième travailleur s'assurera de stabiliser l'échelle. Le port d'un casque de sécurité est obligatoire. \n\n- 7.8.10. Le lieu de travail doit être signalé. \n\n- 7.9.1.À partir de 2 mètres de haut, tout échafaudage doit être pourvu de soutiens, intermédiaires et de plinthes. La surface de travail doit être d'un seul tenant, c'est-à-dire sans interstices dangereux entre les planches et le soutien, et être suffisamment stable compte tenu des charges prévisibles. Tout échafaudage doit de préférence être solidement ancré au bâtiment. \n\n## 7.9 Travail en hauteur par des échafaudages\n\n77 FR \n\nANNEX VII" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.37768449913341945, + "doc_id": "59c68f2d9fa7e76e0dc46448103c869b9d62aaf40a66e6d0dff6fcf6a3998363", + "edit_distance": 0.8857142857142857, + "f1_score": 0.5263157894736842, + "meteor": 0.8236208236208237, + "precision": 0.35714285714285715, + "pred_md": "Contract title :\n\nLot\n\n2\n\n-\n\nConstruction\n\nof\n\nGiresun\n\nWastewater\n\nCollection System\n\nChairperson's name\n\nChairperson's signature\n\nDate\n\nAugust 2020\n\nPage 2 of 2\n\nVol1\\_section5\\_d4l\\_admingrid\\_en.doc\n\n## ADMINISTRATIVE COMPLIANCE GRID\n\nPublication reference :\n\nNEAR/ANK/2021/EA-OP/0084", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## ADMINISTRATIVE COMPLIANCE GRID\n\nPage 2 of 2\n\nAugust 2020 Vol1\\_section5\\_d4l\\_admingrid\\_en.doc" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9592653722821205, + "doc_id": "754785e18f019d1582950bb6beec34d9f35497fa294d907df51312bbfbf9829e", + "edit_distance": 0.10948905109489052, + "f1_score": 0.9819004524886878, + "meteor": 0.9728998293931269, + "precision": 0.9908675799086758, + "pred_md": "- 2.4 Les parties exécutant des travaux s'engagent à être présentes aux éventuelles réunions de coordination (périodiques) tenues par le gestionnaire de projet du CUE et/ou le conseiller en prévention du UP.\n- 2.5 Toute entreprise à laquelle un travail est confié est tenue de désigner un responsable de la sécurité sur le lieu de travail.\n- 2.6 Toute entreprise veillera à ce que les travailleurs possèdent la formation, l'expérience professionnelle et l'aptitude physique requises pour exécuter les tâches qui leur sont confiées, et utilisent le matériel nécessaire de manière parfaitement sûre. À la demande du gestionnaire de projet du CUE ou du UP, elle produira les pièces probantes nécessaires.\n- 2.7 Les membres du personnel des entreprises ne circuleront que dans les zones et accès vers les lieux de travail prévus pour eux.\n- 2.8 Toute situation et/ou opération présentant un danger sera immédiatement signalée au gestionnaire de projet du CUE ou au UP.\n- 2.9 Toute entreprise dressera un inventaire des outils, matériaux et procédures qu'elle utilisera, les fera analyser en vue de déceler les risques éventuels qu'ils présentent et veillera à ce qu'ils satisfassent aux prescriptions du présent règlement.\n- 2.10 Toute entreprise veillera à ce que l'entreprise à laquelle elle confie des travaux en soustraitance satisfasse aux prescriptions concernant la coordination des questions de SSE.\n- 2.11 La consommation de boissons alcoolisées est strictement interdite sur les lieux de travail.\n\n## 3. INCENDIE, EVACUATION ET PREMIERS SOINS\n\n## 3.1 Lutte contre l'incendie\n\n- 3.1.1 Chaque entreprise prévoit les moyens efficaces, en qualité et quantité suffisantes, permettant de lutter contre tout début d'incendie. Le dispositif d'extinction sera adapté aux risques inhérents aux activités et son utilisation connue des éventuels utilisateurs.\n- 3.1.2 L'emplacement des dispositifs d'extinction est choisi en fonction du risque et indiqué au moyen de la signalisation prescrite par la loi.\n- 3.1.3 Le personnel de l'entreprise doit avoir reçu une formation adéquate sur l'utilisation des moyens d'extinction.\n- 3.1.4 Tout début d'incendie, aussi limité soit-il, est signalé selon la procédure d'urgence décrite en appendice 1.\n- 3.1.4 Il est strictement interdit de fumer dans l'enceinte des bâtiments du CUE, sauf aux lieux prévus à cet effet (cabines fumeurs ou à l'extérieur).\n\n69\n\nANNEX VII\n\nFR", + "recall": 0.9730941704035875, + "true_md": "- 2.4 Les parties exécutant des travaux s'engagent à être présentes aux éventuelles réunions de coordination (périodiques) tenues par le gestionnaire de projet du CUE et/ou le conseiller en prévention du UP. \n\n- 2.5 Toute entreprise à laquelle un travail est confié est tenue de désigner un responsable de la sécurité sur le lieu de travail. \n\n- 2.6 Toute entreprise veillera à ce que les travailleurs possèdent la formation, l'expérience professionnelle et l'aptitude physique requises pour exécuter les tâches qui leur sont confiées, et utilisent le matériel nécessaire de manière parfaitement sûre. À la demande du gestionnaire de projet du CUE ou du UP, elle produira les pièces probantes nécessaires. \n\n- 2.7 Les membres du personnel des entreprises ne circuleront que dans les zones et accès vers les lieux de travail prévus pour eux. \n\n- 2.8 Toute situation et/ou opération présentant un danger sera immédiatement signalée au gestionnaire de projet du CUE ou au UP. \n\n- 2.9 Toute entreprise dressera un inventaire des outils, matériaux et procédures qu'elle utilisera, les fera analyser en vue de déceler les risques éventuels qu'ils présentent et veillera à ce qu'ils satisfassent aux prescriptions du présent règlement. \n\n- 2.10 Toute entreprise veillera à ce que l'entreprise à laquelle elle confie des travaux en sous- traitance satisfasse aux prescriptions concernant la coordination des questions de SSE. \n\n- 2.11 La consommation de boissons alcoolisées est strictement interdite sur les lieux de travail. \n\n- 3.1.1 Chaque entreprise prévoit les moyens efficaces, en qualité et quantité suffisantes, permettant de lutter contre tout début d'incendie. Le dispositif d'extinction sera adapté aux risques inhérents aux activités et son utilisation connue des éventuels utilisateurs. \n\n- 3.1.2 L'emplacement des dispositifs d'extinction est choisi en fonction du risque et indiqué au moyen de la signalisation prescrite par la loi. \n\n- 3.1.3 Le personnel de l’entreprise doit avoir reçu une formation adéquate sur l’utilisation des moyens d’extinction. \n\n- 3.1.4 Tout début d'incendie, aussi limité soit-il, est signalé selon la procédure d'urgence décrite en appendice 1. \n\n- 3.1.4 Il est strictement interdit de fumer dans l'enceinte des bâtiments du CUE, sauf aux lieux prévus à cet effet (cabines fumeurs ou à l'extérieur). \n\nANNEX VII \n\n69 FR \n\n## 3. INCENDIE, EVACUATION ET PREMIERS SOINS\n\n## 3.1 Lutte contre l'incendie" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.045036884997381996, + "doc_id": "d3c55d4cc3a338c767d162ecd29889f09a683b3902714fdde9fa7e774fa8226a", + "edit_distance": 0.8686868686868687, + "f1_score": 0.6341463414634146, + "meteor": 0.598153626999781, + "precision": 0.4642857142857143, + "pred_md": "## Contract no: [complete]\n\nEC - FWC services Dec 2018\n\n| II.24. CHECKS AND AUDITS .............................................................................................. 35 |\n|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|\n| SPECIFIC CONTRACT ............................................................................................................... 37 |\n\n3", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Contract no: [complete] \n\nEC - FWC services Dec 2018 \n\n3" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9362041055769688, + "doc_id": "b2dedeb8b95fda4196185909b450168f5721f1f4e0066dbe677e53db143c6bf4", + "edit_distance": 0.4462616822429907, + "f1_score": 0.9884393063583816, + "meteor": 0.9015910804039997, + "precision": 0.9884393063583815, + "pred_md": "Contract no: [complete]\n\n## SPECIFIC CONTRACT\n\n## No [ complete ]\n\n## implementing framework contract No [ complete ]\n\n- 1. The European Agency for Safety and Health at Work ('the contracting authority'), represented for the purposes of signing this specific contract by [ forename, surname, function, department of authorising officer ],\n\nand\n\n2. [ Full official name ] [ Official legal form ] [ Statutory registration number or ID or passport number ] [ Full official address ] [ VAT registration number ]\n\n[appointed as leader of the group by the members of the group that submitted the joint tender]\n\n([collectively] \"the contractor\"), represented for the purposes of signing this specific contract by [ forename, surname and function of legal representative ,]\n\n## HAVE AGREED\n\n## ARTICLE 1 SUBJECT MATTER\n\n- 1.1 This specific contract implements framework contract (FWC) No [ complete ], [lot [ complete ]] signed by the parties on [ complete date . ]\n- 1.2 In accordance with the provisions set out in the FWC and in this specific contract and [its][their] annex[es], which form an integral part of it, the contractor must provide the [following services:] [services specified in Annex [ complete . ] ]\n\n## ARTICLE 2 ENTRY INTO FORCE AND DURATION\n\n- 2.1 This specific contract enters into force [on the date on which the last party signs it] [on [ insert date ] if both parties have already signed it].\n- 2.2 The provision of the services starts from [the date of entry into force of this specific contract ] [ insert date ].\n- 2.3 The provision of the services must not exceed [ complete ] [ days] [months . The parties may ] extend the duration by written agreement before it elapses and before expiry of the FWC.\n\n## ARTICLE 3 PRICE\n\n- 3.1 The price payable under this specific contract excluding reimbursement of expenses is EUR [ amount in figures and in words ].\n\n[The maximum amount covering all services to be provided under this specific contract including reimbursement of expenses and excluding price revision is EUR [ amount in figures and in words ].]\n\n37\n\nEC - FWC services Dec 2018", + "recall": 0.9884393063583815, + "true_md": "Contract no: [complete] \n\n1. The European Agency for Safety and Health at Work (‘the contracting authority’), represented for the purposes of signing this specific contract by [ forename, surname, function, department of authorising officer ], \n\nand \n\n2. [ Full official name ] [ Official legal form ] [ Statutory registration number or ID or passport number ] [ Full official address ] [ VAT registration number ] \n\n[appointed as leader of the group by the members of the group that submitted the joint tender] \n\n ([collectively] \"the contractor\"), represented for the purposes of signing this specific contract by [ forename, surname and function of legal representative ,] \n\n[The maximum amount covering all services to be provided under this specific contract including reimbursement of expenses and excluding price revision is EUR [ amount in figures and in words ].] \n\n3.1 The price payable under this specific contract excluding reimbursement of expenses is EUR [ amount in figures and in words ]. \n\n## SPECIFIC CONTRACT\n\n## No [ complete ]\n\n## implementing framework contract No [ complete ]\n\n## HAVE AGREED\n\n## ARTICLE 1 SUBJECT MATTER\n\n## ARTICLE 2 ENTRY INTO FORCE AND DURATION\n\n## ARTICLE 3 PRICE\n\n- 1.1 This specific contract implements framework contract (FWC) No [ complete ], [lot [ complete ]] signed by the parties on [ complete date ] .\n\n- 1.2 In accordance with the provisions set out in the FWC and in this specific contract and [its][their] annex[es], which form an integral part of it, the contractor must provide the [following services:] [services specified in Annex [ complete ] . ] \n\n- 2.1 This specific contract enters into force [on the date on which the last party signs it] [on [ insert date ] if both parties have already signed it]. \n\n- 2.2 The provision of the services starts from [the date of entry into force of this specific contract ] [ insert date ].\n\n- 2.3 The provision of the services must not exceed [ complete ] [ days] [months ] . The parties may extend the duration by written agreement before it elapses and before expiry of the FWC.\n\n37\n\nEC - FWC services Dec 2018" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6876814591834794, + "doc_id": "4d8a9aa1cb4a706d963be86c94fc9af385327b3a958c67869a682db6ee69ec5c", + "edit_distance": 0.7445544554455445, + "f1_score": 0.9768786127167629, + "meteor": 0.5639627036707104, + "precision": 0.9825581395348837, + "pred_md": "EC - FWC services Dec 2018\n\nContract no: [complete]\n\n## FRAMEWORK CONTRACT FOR SERVICES\n\nNUMBER -[ complete ]\n\nThis model of Framework Contract will be adapted for each lot as appropriate\n\n- 1. The European Agency for Safety and Health at Work ('the contracting authority'), represented for the purposes of signing this framework contract by [ forename, surname, function, department of authorising officer ],\n\nof the one part and\n\n- 2. [ Full official name ] [ Official legal form ]\n\n[ Statutory registration number or ID or passport number ]\n\n[ Full official address ]\n\n[ VAT registration number ]\n\n[appointed as the leader of the group by the members of the group that submitted the joint tender]\n\n([collectively] 'the contractor'), represented for the purposes of the signature of this framework contract by [ forename, surname, function of legal representative and name of company in the case of a joint tender ],\n\non the other part,\n\n## HAVE AGREED\n\nto the special conditions, the general conditions for framework contracts for services and the following annexes:\n\nAnnex I -\n\nTender specifications (reference No [ complete ] of [ insert date ])\n\nAnnex II -\n\nContractor's tender (reference No [ complete ] of [ insert date ])\n\nAnnex III -\n\nModel for for specific contract\n\nAnnex IV -\n\nDeclaration on the list of pre-existing rights\n\nwhich form an integral part of this framework contract ('the FWC').\n\nThis FWC sets out:\n\n- 1. the procedure by which the contracting authority may order services from the contractor;\n- 2. the provisions that apply to any specific contract which the contracting authority and the contractor may conclude under this FWC; and\n- 3. the obligations of the parties during and after the duration of this FWC.\n\nAll documents issued by the contractor (end-user agreements, general terms and conditions, etc.) except its tender are held inapplicable, unless explicitly mentioned in the special conditions of this FWC. In all circumstances, in the event of contradiction between this FWC and documents issued by the contractor, this FWC prevails, regardless of any provision to the contrary in the contractor's documents.\n\n1", + "recall": 0.9712643678160919, + "true_md": "EC - FWC services Dec 2018 \n\nContract no: [complete] \n\n- 1. The European Agency for Safety and Health at Work (‘the contracting authority’), represented for the purposes of signing this framework contract by [ forename, surname, function, department of authorising officer ], \n\nof the one part and \n\n## HAVE AGREED\n\nto the special conditions, the general conditions for framework contracts for services and the following annexes: \n\n- Annex I – Tender specifications (reference No [ complete ] of [ insert date ]) \n\n- Annex II – Contractor’s tender (reference No [ complete ] of [ insert date ]) \n\n- Annex III – Model for for specific contract\n\n- Annex IV – Declaration on the list of pre-existing rights \n\n- 1. the procedure by which the contracting authority may order services from the contractor; 2. the provisions that apply to any specific contract which the contracting authority and the \n\n- 1. the procedure by which the contracting authority may order services from the contractor; 2. the provisions that apply to any specific contract which the contracting authority and the contractor may conclude under this FWC; and 3. the obligations of the parties during and after the duration of this FWC. \n\n- contractor may conclude under this FWC; and 3. the obligations of the parties during and after the duration of this FWC. \n\nAll documents issued by the contractor (end-user agreements, general terms and conditions, etc.) except its tender are held inapplicable, unless explicitly mentioned in the special conditions of this FWC. In all circumstances, in the event of contradiction between this FWC and documents issued by the \n\nexcept its tender are held inapplicable, unless explicitly mentioned in the special conditions of this FWC. In all circumstances, in the event of contradiction between this FWC and documents issued by the contractor, this FWC prevails, regardless of any provision to the contrary in the contractor’s documents. \n\n1\n\nThis FWC sets out: \n\nwhich form an integral part of this framework contract (‘the FWC’). \n\non the other part, \n\n([collectively] ‘the contractor’), represented for the purposes of the signature of this framework contract by [ forename, surname, function of legal representative and name of company in the case of a joint tender ], \n\n2. [ Full official name ] [ Official legal form ] [ Statutory registration number or ID or passport number ] [ Full official address ] [ VAT registration number ] [appointed as the leader of the group by the members of the group that submitted the joint tender] \n\n# FRAMEWORK CONTRACT FOR SERVICES\n\nNUMBER — [ complete ] \n\n## This model of Framework Contract will be adapted for each lot as appropriate" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9835085345268407, + "doc_id": "08f788a441bca17f6d5d79931a3b77cb5a9148289d8d3b8f0748944eaef7c419", + "edit_distance": 0.408355795148248, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9670199842273174, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "- k) lorsque les résultats sont des documents:\n- i) le droit d'autoriser la réutilisation des documents conformément à la décision de la Commission du 12 décembre 2011 relative à la réutilisation des documents de la Commission (2011/833/UE), dans la mesure où cette décision est applicable et où les documents relèvent de son champ d'application et ne sont pas exclus par l'une de ses dispositions; aux fins de la présente disposition, les termes \"réutilisation\" et \"document\" ont la signification qui leur est donnée par cette décision;\n- ii) le droit de stocker et d'archiver les résultats conformément aux règles de gestion des documents applicables au pouvoir adjudicateur, y compris la numérisation ou la conversion du format à des fins de conservation ou de nouvelle utilisation;\n- l) lorsque les résultats constituent ou comprennent un logiciel, y compris le code source, le code objet et, le cas échéant, de la documentation, du matériel préparatoire et des manuels, en plus des autres droits mentionnés dans le présent article:\n- i) les droits de l'utilisateur final, pour tous les usages, par l'Union ou les sous-traitants, qui résultent du CC et de l'intention des parties;\n- ii) le droit de recevoir tant le code source que le code objet;\n- m) le droit d'octroyer à des tiers des licences pour tous droits exclusifs ou modes d'exploitation énoncés dans le présent CC; toutefois, pour le matériel préexistant dont la licence est uniquement octroyée à l'Union, le droit d'accorder des sous-licences ne s'applique pas, sauf dans les deux cas prévus par l'article II.13.2;\n- (n) dans la mesure où le contractant peut invoquer des droits moraux, le droit du pouvoir adjudicateur, sauf disposition contraire prévue dans le présent CC, de publier les résultats avec ou sans mention du nom de l' auteur (des auteurs ), et le droit de décider de la divulgation et de la publication des résultats , et du moment de cette divulgation et publication.\n\nLe contractant garantit que les droits exclusifs et les modes d'exploitation peuvent être exercés par l'Union sur toutes les parties des résultats , qu'elles soient créées par le contractant ou qu'elles consistent en du matériel préexistant .\n\nLorsque du matériel préexistant est inséré dans les résultats , le pouvoir adjudicateur peut accepter des restrictions raisonnables ayant une incidence sur la liste ci-dessus, à condition que ledit matériel soit facilement identifiable et dissociable du reste, qu'il ne corresponde pas aux éléments substantiels des résultats et que, en cas de besoin, des solutions de remplacement satisfaisantes existent, sans engendrer de frais supplémentaire pour le pouvoir adjudicateur. Dans ce cas, avant de faire ce choix, le contractant doit en informer le pouvoir adjudicateur, ce dernier ayant le droit de s'y opposer.\n\n## II.13.4 Identification des droits préexistants\n\nLorsqu'il livre les résultats , le contractant doit garantir que ceux-ci ainsi que le matériel préexistant incorporé dans les résultats sont libres de droits et de revendications de la part des auteurs et des tiers pour toutes les exploitations envisagées par le pouvoir adjudicateur dans les limites fixées dans le CC, et que tous les droits préexistants nécessaires ont été obtenus ou octroyés sous licence.\n\nÀ cet effet, le contractant doit établir une liste de tous les droits préexistants sur les résultats du CC ou sur des parties de ceux-ci, y compris l'identification des titulaires de droits. S'il n'existe aucun droit préexistant sur les résultats , le contractant doit fournir une déclaration à cet effet. Le contractant doit communiquer cette liste ou déclaration au pouvoir adjudicateur au plus tard avec la facture présentée pour le paiement du solde.\n\n## II.13.5 Preuve de l'octroi des droits préexistants\n\nÀ la demande du pouvoir adjudicateur, le contractant doit démontrer qu'il détient la propriété ou les droits d'exploitation de tous les droits préexistants énumérés, sauf en ce qui concerne les droits détenus par l'Union ou pour lesquels cette dernière octroie des licences. Le pouvoir adjudicateur peut demander ces preuves même après l'expiration du CC.\n\nCette disposition s'applique également aux droits à l'image et aux enregistrements sonores.\n\n23\n\nFR", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "- k) lorsque les résultats sont des documents: \n\n- i) le droit d'autoriser la réutilisation des documents conformément à la décision de la Commission du 12 décembre 2011 relative à la réutilisation des documents de la Commission (2011/833/UE), dans la mesure où cette décision est applicable et où les documents relèvent de son champ d'application et ne sont pas exclus par l'une de ses dispositions; aux fins de la présente disposition, les termes \"réutilisation\" et \"document\" ont la signification qui leur est donnée par cette décision; \n\n- ii) le droit de stocker et d'archiver les résultats conformément aux règles de gestion des documents applicables au pouvoir adjudicateur, y compris la numérisation ou la conversion du format à des fins de conservation ou de nouvelle utilisation; \n\n- l) lorsque les résultats constituent ou comprennent un logiciel, y compris le code source, le code objet et, le cas échéant, de la documentation, du matériel préparatoire et des manuels, en plus des autres droits mentionnés dans le présent article: \n\n- i) les droits de l'utilisateur final, pour tous les usages, par l'Union ou les sous-traitants, qui résultent du CC et de l'intention des parties; \n\n- ii) le droit de recevoir tant le code source que le code objet; \n\n- m) le droit d'octroyer à des tiers des licences pour tous droits exclusifs ou modes d'exploitation énoncés dans le présent CC; toutefois, pour le matériel préexistant dont la licence est uniquement octroyée à l'Union, le droit d'accorder des sous-licences ne s'applique pas, sauf dans les deux cas prévus par l'article II.13.2; \n\n- (n) dans la mesure où le contractant peut invoquer des droits moraux, le droit du pouvoir adjudicateur, sauf disposition contraire prévue dans le présent CC, de publier les résultats avec ou sans mention du nom de l' auteur (des auteurs ), et le droit de décider de la divulgation et de la publication des résultats , et du moment de cette divulgation et publication. \n\n## II.13.4 Identification des droits préexistants\n\n## II.13.5 Preuve de l'octroi des droits préexistants\n\nCette disposition s'applique également aux droits à l'image et aux enregistrements sonores. \n\nÀ la demande du pouvoir adjudicateur, le contractant doit démontrer qu'il détient la propriété ou les droits d'exploitation de tous les droits préexistants énumérés, sauf en ce qui concerne les droits détenus par l'Union ou pour lesquels cette dernière octroie des licences. Le pouvoir adjudicateur peut demander ces preuves même après l'expiration du CC. \n\nÀ cet effet, le contractant doit établir une liste de tous les droits préexistants sur les résultats du CC ou sur des parties de ceux-ci, y compris l'identification des titulaires de droits. S'il n'existe aucun droit préexistant sur les résultats , le contractant doit fournir une déclaration à cet effet. Le contractant doit communiquer cette liste ou déclaration au pouvoir adjudicateur au plus tard avec la facture présentée pour le paiement du solde. \n\nLorsqu'il livre les résultats , le contractant doit garantir que ceux-ci ainsi que le matériel préexistant incorporé dans les sont libres de droits et de revendications de la part des auteurs et des tiers pour toutes les exploitations envisagées par le pouvoir adjudicateur dans les limites fixées dans le CC, et que tous les droits préexistants nécessaires ont été obtenus ou octroyés sous licence. \n\nLorsque du matériel préexistant est inséré dans les résultats , le pouvoir adjudicateur peut accepter des restrictions raisonnables ayant une incidence sur la liste ci-dessus, à condition que ledit matériel soit facilement identifiable et dissociable du reste, qu'il ne corresponde pas aux éléments substantiels des résultats et que, en cas de besoin, des solutions de remplacement satisfaisantes existent, sans engendrer de frais supplémentaire pour le pouvoir adjudicateur. Dans ce cas, avant de faire ce choix, le contractant doit en informer le pouvoir adjudicateur, ce dernier ayant le droit de s'y opposer. \n\nLe contractant garantit que les droits exclusifs et les modes d'exploitation peuvent être exercés par l'Union sur toutes les parties des résultats , qu'elles soient créées par le contractant ou qu'elles consistent en du matériel préexistant . \n\n23 FR" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7185640954589151, + "doc_id": "fe5c5ad86cf9262771ffa83ff4856e6a01007383bb6a97ce2d470149b1c8e556", + "edit_distance": 0.2783171521035599, + "f1_score": 0.984375, + "meteor": 0.6634254181141069, + "precision": 0.9882352941176471, + "pred_md": "EC - FWC services Dec 2018\n\nContract no: [complete]\n\nE-mail is deemed to have been received by the receiving party on the day of dispatch of that e-mail, provided that it is sent to the e-mail address indicated in Article I.8. The sending party must be able to prove the date of dispatch. In the event that the sending party receives a non-delivery report, it must make every effort to ensure that the other party actually receives the communication by email or mail. In such a case, the sending party is not held in breach of its obligation to send such communication within a specified deadline.\n\nMail sent to the contracting authority is deemed to have been received by the contracting authority on the date on which the department responsible referred to in Article I.8 registers it.\n\nFormal notifications are considered to have been received by the receiving party on the date of receipt indicated in the proof received by the sending party that the message was delivered to the specified recipient.\n\n## II.5.3. Submission of e-documents via e-PRIOR\n\n- 1. If provided for in the special conditions, the exchange of electronic documents (e-documents) such as requests for services, specific contracts and invoices between the parties is automated through the use of the e-PRIOR platform. This platform provides two possibilities for such exchanges: either through web services (machine-to-machine connection) or through a web application (the supplier portal ).\n- 2. The contracting authority takes the necessary measures to implement and maintain electronic systems that enable the supplier portal to be used effectively.\n- 3. In the case of machine-to-machine connection, a direct connection is established between the parties' back offices . In this case, the parties take the measures necessary on their side to implement and maintain electronic systems that enable the machine-to-machine connection to be used effectively. The electronic systems are specified in the interface control document . The contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) must take the necessary technical measures to set up a machine-to-machine connection and at its own cost.\n- 4. If communication via the supplier portal or via the web services (machine-to-machine connection) is hindered by factors beyond the control of one party, it must notify the other immediately and the parties must take the necessary measures to restore this communication.\n- 5. If it is impossible to restore the communication within two working days, one party must notify the other that alternative means of communication specified in Article II.5.1 will be used until the supplier portal or the machine-to-machine connection is restored.\n- 6. When a change in the interface control document requires adaptations, the contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) has up to six months from receipt of the notification to implement this change. This period can be shortened by mutual agreement of the parties. This period does not apply to urgent measures required by the security policy of the contracting authority to ensure integrity, confidentiality and non-repudiation of information and the availability of ePRIOR , which must be applied immediately.\n\n## II.5.4. Validity and date of e-documents\n\n- 1. The parties agree that any e-document, including related attachments exchanged via e-PRIOR :\n- a) is considered as equivalent to a paper document;\n- b) is deemed to be the original of the document;\n- c) is legally binding on the parties once an e-PRIOR authorised person has performed the 'sign' action in e-PRIOR and has full legal effect; and\n- d) constitutes evidence of the information contained in it and is admissible as evidence in judicial proceedings.\n- 2. The parties expressly waive any rights to contest the validity of such a document solely on the grounds that communications between the parties occurred through e-PRIOR or that the document has been signed through e-PRIOR . If a direct connection is established between the\n\n16", + "recall": 0.980544747081712, + "true_md": "Contract no: [complete] \n\nE-mail is deemed to have been received by the receiving party on the day of dispatch of that e-mail, provided that it is sent to the e-mail address indicated in Article I.8. The sending party must be able to prove the date of dispatch. In the event that the sending party receives a non-delivery report, it must make every effort to ensure that the other party actually receives the communication by email or mail. In such a case, the sending party is not held in breach of its obligation to send such communication within a specified deadline. \n\nMail sent to the contracting authority is deemed to have been received by the contracting authority on the date on which the department responsible referred to in Article I.8 registers it.\n\nFormal notifications are considered to have been received by the receiving party on the date of receipt indicated in the proof received by the sending party that the message was delivered to the specified recipient.\n\n## II.5.3. Submission of e-documents via e-PRIOR\n\n- 1. If provided for in the special conditions, the exchange of electronic documents (e-documents) such as requests for services, specific contracts and invoices between the parties is automated through the use of the e-PRIOR platform. This platform provides two possibilities for such exchanges: either through web services (machine-to-machine connection) or through a web application (the supplier portal ). 2. The contracting authority takes the necessary measures to implement and maintain electronic \n\n- application (the supplier portal ). 2. The contracting authority takes the necessary measures to implement and maintain electronic systems that enable the supplier portal to be used effectively. 3. In the case of machine-to-machine connection, a direct connection is established between the \n\n- systems that enable the supplier portal to be used effectively. 3. In the case of machine-to-machine connection, a direct connection is established between the parties’ back offices . In this case, the parties take the measures necessary on their side to implement and maintain electronic systems that enable the machine-to-machine connection to be used effectively. The electronic systems are specified in the interface control document . The contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) must take the necessary technical measures to set up a machine-to-machine connection and at its own cost. 4. If communication via the supplier portal or via the web services (machine-to-machine \n\n- to set up a machine-to-machine connection and at its own cost. 4. If communication via the supplier portal or via the web services (machine-to-machine connection) is hindered by factors beyond the control of one party, it must notify the other immediately and the parties must take the necessary measures to restore this communication. 5. If it is impossible to restore the communication within two working days, one party must notify\n\n- immediately and the parties must take the necessary measures to restore this communication. 5. If it is impossible to restore the communication within two working days, one party must notify the other that alternative means of communication specified in Article II.5.1 will be used until the supplier portal or the machine-to-machine connection is restored. 6. When a change in the interface control document requires adaptations, the contractor (or leader \n\n- supplier portal or the machine-to-machine connection is restored. 6. When a change in the interface control document requires adaptations, the contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) has up to six months from receipt of the notification to implement this change. This period can be shortened by mutual agreement of the parties. This period does not apply to urgent measures required by the security policy of the contracting authority to ensure integrity, confidentiality and non-repudiation of information and the availability of e- PRIOR , which must be applied immediately.\n\n- a) is considered as equivalent to a paper document; b) is deemed to be the original of the document; \n\n- a) is considered as equivalent to a paper document; b) is deemed to be the original of the document; c) is legally binding on the parties once an e-PRIOR\n\n- b) is deemed to be the original of the document; c) is legally binding on the parties once an e-PRIOR authorised person has performed the ‘sign’ action in e-PRIOR and has full legal effect; and d) constitutes evidence of the information contained in it and is admissible as evidence in \n\n- 1. The parties agree that any e-document, including related attachments exchanged via e-PRIOR : \n\n- ‘sign’ action in e-PRIOR and has full legal effect; and d) constitutes evidence of the information contained in it and is admissible as evidence in judicial proceedings.\n\n- 2. The parties expressly waive any rights to contest the validity of such a document solely on the grounds that communications between the parties occurred through e-PRIOR or that the document has been signed through e-PRIOR . If a direct connection is established between the \n\n16\n\n## II.5.4. Validity and date of e-documents\n\nEC - FWC services Dec 2018" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.95613957205349, + "doc_id": "8b3782c6d414d6e99e9229e062d355eb8ea6347bb07157dface7701e5672b3bf", + "edit_distance": 0.3380530973451327, + "f1_score": 0.9922077922077922, + "meteor": 0.9156525604945932, + "precision": 0.9947916666666666, + "pred_md": "## II.20.3 Conversion\n\nLa conversion entre l'euro et une autre monnaie par le pouvoir adjudicateur se fait au cours journalier de l'euro publié au Journal officiel de l'Union européenne ou, à défaut, au taux de change comptable mensuel établi par la Commission européenne et publié sur le site internet indiqué cidessous, applicable le jour de l'établissement de l'ordre de paiement.\n\nLa conversion entre l'euro et une autre monnaie par le contractant se fait au taux de change comptable mensuel établi par la Commission européenne et publié sur le site internet indiqué cidessous, applicable à la date de la facture.\n\nhttp://ec.europa.eu/budget/contracts\\_grants/info\\_contracts/inforeuro/inforeuro\\_en.cfm\n\n## II.20.4 Frais de virement\n\nLes frais de virement sont répartis comme suit:\n\n- a) les frais d'émission facturés par la banque du pouvoir adjudicateur sont à la charge de ce dernier;\n- b) les frais de réception facturés par la banque du contractant sont à la charge de ce dernier;\n- c) les frais liés à un virement supplémentaire imputable à l'une des parties sont à la charge de celle-ci.\n\n## II.20.5 Garanties de préfinancement, garanties de bonne fin et retenues de garantie\n\nSi, conformément à l'article I.6, une garantie financière est exigée pour le versement d'un préfinancement, ou à titre de garantie de bonne fin ou de retenue de garantie, les conditions suivantes doivent être remplies:\n\n- a) la garantie financière est fournie par une banque ou un établissement financier agréé par le pouvoir adjudicateur ou, à la demande du contractant et avec l'accord du pouvoir adjudicateur, par un tiers;\n- b) le garant intervient en qualité de garant à première demande et n'exige pas que le pouvoir adjudicateur poursuive le débiteur principal (le contractant).\n\nLes frais occasionnés par la fourniture de cette garantie sont à la charge du contractant.\n\nLes garanties de préfinancement doivent rester en vigueur jusqu'à l'apurement du préfinancement par déduction des paiements intermédiaires ou du paiement du solde. Lorsque ce dernier prend la forme d'une note de débit, la garantie de préfinancement doit rester en vigueur pendant les trois mois qui suivent l'envoi de la note de débit au contractant. Le pouvoir adjudicateur doit libérer la garantie dans le mois qui suit.\n\nLes garanties de bonne fin couvrent le respect des obligations contractuelles substantielles jusqu'à l'approbation définitive des services par le pouvoir adjudicateur. La garantie de bonne fin ne doit pas dépasser 10 % du prix total du bon de commande . Le pouvoir adjudicateur doit libérer la garantie dans son intégralité après l'approbation définitive des services , comme le prévoit le bon de commande .\n\nLes retenues de garantie couvrent la totalité de la fourniture des services conformément au bon de commande , notamment durant le délai de responsabilité et jusqu'à son approbation définitive par le pouvoir adjudicateur. La retenue de garantie ne doit pas dépasser 10 % du prix total du bon de commande . Le pouvoir adjudicateur doit libérer la garantie après l'expiration du délai de responsabilité comme le prévoit le bon de commande .\n\nLe pouvoir adjudicateur ne peut demander une retenue de garantie pour un bon de commande lorsqu'il a demandé une garantie de bonne fin.\n\n30\n\nFR", + "recall": 0.9896373056994818, + "true_md": "La conversion entre l'euro et une autre monnaie par le pouvoir adjudicateur se fait au cours journalier de l'euro publié au Journal officiel de l'Union européenne ou, à défaut, au taux de change comptable mensuel établi par la Commission européenne et publié sur le site internet indiqué ci- dessous, applicable le jour de l'établissement de l'ordre de paiement. \n\nLa conversion entre l'euro et une autre monnaie par le contractant se fait au taux de change comptable mensuel établi par la Commission européenne et publié sur le site internet indiqué ci- dessous, applicable à la date de la facture. \n\nhttp://ec.europa.eu/budget/contracts\\_grants/info\\_contracts/inforeuro/inforeuro\\_en.cfm \n\nLes frais de virement sont répartis comme suit: \n\na) les frais d'émission facturés par la banque du pouvoir adjudicateur sont à la charge de ce dernier; \n\nb) les frais de réception facturés par la banque du contractant sont à la charge de ce dernier; \n\nc) les frais liés à un virement supplémentaire imputable à l'une des parties sont à la charge de celle-ci. \n\nSi, conformément à l'article I.6, une garantie financière est exigée pour le versement d'un préfinancement, ou à titre de garantie de bonne fin ou de retenue de garantie, les conditions suivantes doivent être remplies: \n\nLes frais occasionnés par la fourniture de cette garantie sont à la charge du contractant. \n\nLes garanties de préfinancement doivent rester en vigueur jusqu'à l'apurement du préfinancement par déduction des paiements intermédiaires ou du paiement du solde. Lorsque ce dernier prend la forme d'une note de débit, la garantie de préfinancement doit rester en vigueur pendant les trois mois qui suivent l'envoi de la note de débit au contractant. Le pouvoir adjudicateur doit libérer la garantie dans le mois qui suit. \n\nLes garanties de bonne fin couvrent le respect des obligations contractuelles substantielles jusqu'à l'approbation définitive des services par le pouvoir adjudicateur. La garantie de bonne fin ne doit pas dépasser 10 % du prix total du bon de commande . Le pouvoir adjudicateur doit libérer la garantie dans son intégralité après l'approbation définitive des services , comme le prévoit le bon de commande . \n\nLes retenues de garantie couvrent la totalité de la fourniture des services conformément au bon de commande , notamment durant le délai de responsabilité et jusqu'à son approbation définitive par le pouvoir adjudicateur. La retenue de garantie ne doit pas dépasser 10 % du prix total du bon de commande . Le pouvoir adjudicateur doit libérer la garantie après l'expiration du délai de responsabilité comme le prévoit le bon de commande . \n\nLe pouvoir adjudicateur ne peut demander une retenue de garantie pour un bon de commande lorsqu'il a demandé une garantie de bonne fin. \n\n- b) le garant intervient en qualité de garant à première demande et n'exige pas que le pouvoir adjudicateur poursuive le débiteur principal (le contractant). \n\n- a) la garantie financière est fournie par une banque ou un établissement financier agréé par le pouvoir adjudicateur ou, à la demande du contractant et avec l'accord du pouvoir adjudicateur, par un tiers; \n\n## II.20.3 Conversion\n\n## II.20.4 Frais de virement\n\n## II.20.5 Garanties de préfinancement, garanties de bonne fin et retenues de garantie\n\n30 FR" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.37280234030274423, + "doc_id": "fcff4bd12bd0f21b4501ce6015dfe8b6f42f5b6a100f950d801f0aaf16071b00", + "edit_distance": 0.8529411764705882, + "f1_score": 0.45833333333333337, + "meteor": 0.5016606163590022, + "precision": 0.39285714285714285, + "pred_md": "Contract title :\n\n## ADMINISTRATIVE COMPLIANCE GRID\n\nLot 1 -Construction\n\nof\n\nGiresun\n\nWastewater\n\nTreatment Plant\n\nChairperson's name\n\nChairperson's signature\n\nDate\n\nAugust 2020\n\nPage 1 of 2\n\nVol1\\_section5\\_d4l\\_admingrid\\_en.doc\n\nPublication reference :\n\nNEAR/ANK/2021/EA-OP/0084", + "recall": 0.55, + "true_md": "Ref. Ares(2021)2862163 - 29/04/2021\n\nAugust 2020 Vol1\\_section5\\_d4l\\_admingrid\\_en.doc \n\nPage 1 of 2\n\n# ADMINISTRATIVE COMPLIANCE GRID" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9595298721277854, + "doc_id": "313c28ae782cda3df97eb8fd46cd753bae6caeeec4e5cfd8bbc25b21febe3484", + "edit_distance": 0.2402464065708419, + "f1_score": 0.9879518072289156, + "meteor": 0.9844934048841021, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "available etc.), the Contracting Authority reserves the right to increase the price up to 50% of the initial specific contract value (and extensions orders as specified above) 3 .\n\nIn Lot 2 the procedure will result in the conclusion of multiple framework contracts (FWC) in cascade.\n\n## Cascade mechanism:\n\nThe FWC will be concluded in the form of separate, but identical, contracts with a maximum number of 3 (three) contractors provided that there are enough tenderers that have access to the procurement, are not excluded, satisfy the selection and award criteria, and comply with the Tender Specifications.\n\nThe tenders deemed admissible as a result of the evaluation will be ranked in descending order to establish a list of contractors and a sequence in which they will be offered specific contracts during the implementation of the FWC.\n\nWithout prejudice to section 7 of the Service Level Agreement (annex 16 to the Technical Specifications), in case of unavailability of the first contractor (e.g. having failed the deadlines, having proposed unsuitable consultants, having conflict of interest (see section 3.2.4), etc.), the second best ranked framework contractor will be approached, and so forth.\n\nThe cascade process will terminate either with the award of the assignment in question to one of the contractors, or with the failure to award the assignment to any contractor. In the event of failure, the Contracting Authority will withdraw the request, or redefine the assignment and start the procedure based on a new request with the first ranked contractor. Once the Contracting Authority agrees to the offer of a contractor the specific contract will be signed.\n\nThe process of implementation of the FWC in cascade is set out in Article I.4.3 of the Draft Framework Contract.\n\n## 1.7 Volume and value of the contract: how much do we plan to buy?\n\nThe maximum value of the FWC shall be:\n\nLot 1: EUR 15 000 000 over its potential duration of 6 years.\n\nLot 2: EUR 61 000 000 over its potential duration of 6 + 2 years.\n\nThis is an indicative estimate of the volumes to be ordered over the whole duration of the FWC. These volumes are estimates only and there is no commitment as to the exact quantities to be ordered. The actual volumes will depend on the quantities which the contracting authority will order through specific contracts. In any case the FWC ceiling, i.e. the maximum amount to be spent under the FWC, shall not be exceeded.\n\n3 As provided for in Article 172.3 of the EU Financial Regulation\n\n9", + "recall": 0.9761904761904762, + "true_md": "available etc.), the Contracting Authority reserves the right to increase the price up to 50% of the initial specific contract value (and extensions orders as specified above) 3 .\n\nIn Lot 2 the procedure will result in the conclusion of multiple framework contracts (FWC) in cascade. \n\nThe FWC will be concluded in the form of separate, but identical, contracts with a maximum number of 3 (three) contractors provided that there are enough tenderers that have access to the procurement, are not excluded, satisfy the selection and award criteria, and comply with the Tender Specifications.\n\nThe tenders deemed admissible as a result of the evaluation will be ranked in descending order to establish a list of contractors and a sequence in which they will be offered specific contracts during the implementation of the FWC. \n\nWithout prejudice to section 7 of the Service Level Agreement (annex 16 to the Technical Specifications), in case of unavailability of the first contractor (e.g. having failed the deadlines, having proposed unsuitable consultants, having conflict of interest (see section 3.2.4), etc.), the second best ranked framework contractor will be approached, and so forth.\n\nThe cascade process will terminate either with the award of the assignment in question to one of the contractors, or with the failure to award the assignment to any contractor. In the event of failure, the Contracting Authority will withdraw the request, or redefine the assignment and start the procedure based on a new request with the first ranked contractor. Once the Contracting Authority agrees to the offer of a contractor the specific contract will be signed.\n\nThe process of implementation of the FWC in cascade is set out in Article I.4.3 of the Draft Framework Contract.\n\nThe maximum value of the FWC shall be: \n\nThis is an indicative estimate of the volumes to be ordered over the whole duration of the FWC. These volumes are estimates only and there is no commitment as to the exact quantities to be ordered. The actual volumes will depend on the quantities which the contracting authority will order through specific contracts. In any case the FWC ceiling, i.e. the maximum amount to be spent under the FWC, shall not be exceeded. \n\n$^{3}$ As provided for in Article 172.3 of the EU Financial Regulation\n\n9\n\n## 1.7 Volume and value of the contract: how much do we plan to buy?\n\n## Cascade mechanism:\n\n- Lot 1: EUR 15 000 000 over its potential duration of 6 years.\n\n- Lot 2: EUR 61 000 000 over its potential duration of 6 + 2 years." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.808970942586217, + "doc_id": "eaf28e2a92c47e9682d6ce8c5500b69a66bfed5ca09458c6732b10c4c0c1f682", + "edit_distance": 0.2525458248472505, + "f1_score": 0.9814323607427056, + "meteor": 0.8159185179440315, + "precision": 0.9946236559139785, + "pred_md": "Contract number: [ complete ]\n\nContract conditions of December 2015\n\nlaw, national law and collective agreements or by the international environmental, social and labour law provisions listed in Annex X to Directive 2014/24/EU . 3\n\n- II.4.2 All periods specified in the contract are calculated in calendar days, unless otherwise specified.\n- II.4.3 The contractor must not present itself as a representative of the contracting authority and must inform third parties that it is not part of the European public service.\n- II.4.4 The contractor is responsible for the personnel who perform the contract and exercises its authority over its personnel without interference by the contracting authority. The contractor must inform its personnel that:\n- (a) they may not accept any direct instructions from the contracting authority; and\n- (b) their participation in providing the supplies does not result in any employment or contractual relationship with the contracting authority.\n- II.4.5 The contractor must ensure that the personnel performing the contract and any future replacement personnel possess the professional qualifications and experience required to provide the supplies, as the case may be on the basis of the selection criteria set out in the tender specifications.\n- II.4.6 At the contracting authority's reasoned request, the contractor must replace any member of personnel who:\n- (a) does not have the expertise required to provide the supplies; or\n- (b) has caused disruption at the premises of the contracting authority.\n\nThe contractor bears the cost of replacing its personnel and is responsible for any delay in providing the supplies resulting from the replacement of personnel .\n\n- II.4.7 The contractor must record and report to the contracting authority any problem that affects its ability to deliver the supplies. The report must describe the problem, state when it started and what action the contractor is taking to resolve it.\n\n## II.4.8 Delivery\n\n## (a) Time allowed for delivery\n\nThe time allowed for delivery is calculated in accordance with Article I.3.\n\n## (b) Date, time and place of delivery\n\nThe Commission must be notified in writing of the exact date of delivery within the period indicated in Article I.3. All deliveries must be made at the agreed place of delivery during the hours indicated in Article I.3.\n\n3 OJ L 94 of 28.03.2014, p. 65\n\n13", + "recall": 0.9685863874345549, + "true_md": "Contract number: [ complete ] \n\nContract conditions of December 2015 \n\nlaw, national law and collective agreements or by the international environmental, social and labour law provisions listed in Annex X to Directive 2014/24/EU $^{3}$. \n\n- II.4.2 All periods specified in the contract are calculated in calendar days, unless otherwise specified.\n\n- II.4.3 The contractor must not present itself as a representative of the contracting authority and must inform third parties that it is not part of the European public service. \n\n- II.4.4 The contractor is responsible for the personnel who perform the contract and exercises its authority over its personnel without interference by the contracting authority. The contractor must inform its personnel that: \n\n- (a) they may not accept any direct instructions from the contracting authority; and (b) their participation in providing the supplies does not result in any employment or \n\n- (a) they may not accept any direct instructions from the contracting authority; and (b) their participation in providing the supplies does not result in any employment or contractual relationship with the contracting authority. \n\n- II.4.5 The contractor must ensure that the personnel performing the contract and any future replacement personnel possess the professional qualifications and experience required to provide the supplies, as the case may be on the basis of the selection criteria set out in the tender specifications. \n\n- II.4.6 At the contracting authority’s reasoned request, the contractor must replace any member of personnel who: \n\n- (a) does not have the expertise required to provide the supplies; or (b) has caused disruption at the premises of the contracting authority. \n\n- (a) does not have the expertise required to provide the supplies; or (b) has caused disruption at the premises of the contracting authority. \n\n- II.4.7 The contractor must record and report to the contracting authority any problem that affects its ability to deliver the supplies. The report must describe the problem, state when it started and what action the contractor is taking to resolve it. \n\n- (b) Date, time and place of delivery \n\n- (a) Time allowed for delivery \n\n## II.4.8 Delivery\n\nThe contractor bears the cost of replacing its personnel and is responsible for any delay in providing the supplies resulting from the replacement of personnel . \n\nThe time allowed for delivery is calculated in accordance with Article I.3. \n\nThe Commission must be notified in writing of the exact date of delivery within the period indicated in Article I.3. All deliveries must be made at the agreed place of delivery during the hours indicated in Article I.3. \n\n$^{3}$ OJ L 94 of 28.03.2014, p. 65 \n\n13" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8577455380180317, + "doc_id": "b275726cad76f0f0d07436251e06f43908cdf0579946251125031d8e61dacd7a", + "edit_distance": 0.8095238095238095, + "f1_score": 0.9869451697127937, + "meteor": 0.7651402079014428, + "precision": 0.9895287958115183, + "pred_md": "Contract number: [ complete ]\n\nContract conditions of December 2015\n\n## I SPECIAL CONDITIONS\n\n## I.1. ORDER OF PRIORITY OF PROVISIONS\n\nIf there is any conflict between different provisions in this contract, the following rules must be applied:\n\n- (a) The provisions set out in the special conditions take precedence over those in the other parts of the contract.\n- (b) The provisions set out in the general conditions take precedence over those in the other annexes.\n- (c) The provisions set out in the tender specifications (Annex I) take precedence over those in the tender (Annex II).\n\n## I.2. SUBJECT MATTER\n\nThe subject matter of the contract is the manufacturing, assembling, delivering and support of a Passive Gamma Emission Tomography System (hereinafter referred to as 'PGET') to be used for verification of spent fuel assemblies from Light-Water Reactors.\n\n## I.3. ENTRY INTO FORCE AND DURATION\n\n- I.3.1 The contract enters into force on the date on which the last party signs it.\n- I.3.2 The performance of the contract cannot start before its entry into force.\n- I.3.3 The duration of the performance of the contract must not exceed [max 12 (could be less cfr award criteria n°1] months. Performance of the contract starts from the date of entry into force of the contract.\n- The period of performance of the contract may be extended only with the express written agreement of the parties before the expiration of such period.\n- I.3.4 The supplies must be delivered at the acceptance test location as defined under point 2.5.5 in the tender specifications (Annex I).\n\nThe delivery will be done to the attention of:\n\nStefano.VACCARO@ec.europa.eu Alice.TOMANIN@ec.europa.eu.\n\nThe contractor must notify the contracting authority of the exact date of delivery at least 15 days in advance. Deliveries may be made on any working day during normal working hours, at the agreed place of delivery.\n\n## I.4. PRICE\n\n## I.4.1. Maximum price of the contract\n\nThe maximum price covering all purchases under the contract is EUR [ amount in figures and in words ].\n\n6", + "recall": 0.984375, + "true_md": "Contract number: [ complete ] \n\nContract conditions of December 2015 \n\n## I SPECIAL CONDITIONS\n\n## I.1. ORDER OF PRIORITY OF PROVISIONS\n\n## I.2. SUBJECT MATTER\n\n## I.4. PRICE\n\n## I.4.1. Maximum price of the contract\n\n## I.3. ENTRY INTO FORCE AND DURATION\n\n- I.3.1 The contract enters into force on the date on which the last party signs it. \n\n- I.3.2 The performance of the contract cannot start before its entry into force. \n\n- I.3.3 The duration of the performance of the contract must not exceed [ max 12 (could be less cfr award criteria n°1] months. Performance of the contract starts from the date of entry into force of the contract.\n\n- I.3.4 The supplies must be delivered at the acceptance test location as defined under point 2.5.5 in the tender specifications (Annex I). \n\nIf there is any conflict between different provisions in this contract, the following rules must be applied: \n\nThe contractor must notify the contracting authority of the exact date of delivery at least 15 days in advance. Deliveries may be made on any working day during normal working hours, at the agreed place of delivery. \n\nThe maximum price covering all purchases under the contract is EUR [ amount in figures and in words ]. \n\nThe delivery will be done to the attention of: Stefano.VACCARO@ec.europa.eu Alice.TOMANIN@ec.europa.eu. \n\nThe subject matter of the contract is the manufacturing, assembling, delivering and support of a Passive Gamma Emission Tomography System (hereinafter referred to as “PGET”) to be used for verification of spent fuel assemblies from Light-Water Reactors. \n\nThe period of performance of the contract may be extended only with the express written agreement of the parties before the expiration of such period. \n\n- (a) The provisions set out in the special conditions take precedence over those in the other parts of the contract. (b) The provisions set out in the general conditions take precedence over those in the \n\n- other parts of the contract. (b) The provisions set out in the general conditions take precedence over those in the other annexes. (c) The provisions set out in the tender specifications (Annex I) take precedence over \n\n- other annexes. (c) The provisions set out in the tender specifications (Annex I) take precedence over those in the tender (Annex II). \n\n6" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8468053764480294, + "doc_id": "8f6821dc8bd42373ca221c4add6db4e11baaf85196ad08593be172419b0a9c2d", + "edit_distance": 0.34108527131782945, + "f1_score": 0.9621212121212122, + "meteor": 0.9556160100342105, + "precision": 0.9769230769230769, + "pred_md": "Contract number: [ complete ]\n\nContract conditions of December 2015\n\nEuropean Union. VAT Exemption / European Union/ Article 151 of Council Directive 2006/112/EC.']\n\n## I.6. GUARANTEES\n\nGuarantees are not applicable to this contract.\n\n## I.6.1. Performance guarantee\n\nPerformance guarantee is not applicable to this contract.\n\n## I.6.2. Retention money guarantee\n\nRetention money guarantee is not applicable to this contract.\n\n## I.7. BANK ACCOUNT\n\nPayments must be made to the contractor's (or leader's in the case of a joint tender) bank account denominated in [euro] [ insert local currency where the receiving country does not allow transactions in EUR , ] identified as follows:\n\nName of bank: Full address of branch: Exact denomination of account holder: Full account number including bank codes: [IBAN 1 code:]\n\n## I.8. COMMUNICATION DETAILS\n\nFor the purpose of this contract, communications must be sent to the following addresses:\n\nContracting authority:\n\nEuropean Commission\n\nDG: 01:Resource management and support Luxembourg\n\nDirectorate-General for Energy 001:Financial management 1, rue Henri M. Schnadt L-2530 Luxembourg\n\nContractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender):\n\n[ Full name ] [ Function ] [ Company name ] [ Full official address ] Email: [ complete ]\n\n1 BIC or SWIFT code for countries with no IBAN code.\n\n8", + "recall": 0.9477611940298507, + "true_md": "Contract number: [ complete ] \n\nContract conditions of December 2015 \n\nEuropean Union. VAT Exemption / European Union/ Article 151 of Council Directive 2006/112/EC.’] \n\n## I.6. GUARANTEES\n\n## I.6.2. Retention money guarantee\n\n## I.7. BANK ACCOUNT\n\n## I.6.1. Performance guarantee\n\nGuarantees are not applicable to this contract. \n\nRetention money guarantee is not applicable to this contract. \n\nPerformance guarantee is not applicable to this contract. \n\nPayments must be made to the contractor’s (or leader’s in the case of a joint tender) bank account denominated in [euro] [ insert local currency where the receiving country does not allow transactions in EUR ] , identified as follows: \n\nName of bank: Full address of branch: Exact denomination of account holder: Full account number including bank codes: [ IBAN$^{1}$ code :] \n\nFor the purpose of this contract, communications must be sent to the following addresses: \n\nContracting authority: \n\nEuropean Commission Directorate-General for Energy DG: 01:Resource management and support Luxembourg 001:Financial management 1, rue Henri M. Schnadt L-2530 Luxembourg \n\n[ Full name ] [ Function ] [ Company name ] [ Full official address ] Email: [ complete ] \n\nContractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender): \n\n1 BIC or SWIFT code for countries with no IBAN code. \n\n8 \n\n## I.8. COMMUNICATION DETAILS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.014163323777227182, + "doc_id": "819e228257f140de7378bf10f4dca630891a983ec1f8542b4477618285114776", + "edit_distance": 0.9833333333333333, + "f1_score": 0.06185567010309278, + "meteor": 0.1583142784552846, + "precision": 0.031914893617021274, + "pred_md": "- k. Master Data Management (bespoke or commercial solution) -minimum 1 reference\n- l. BPMN, UML (or equivalent) -minimum 3 references\n- m. RUP, Prince2 or equivalent waterfall methodology -minimum 2 references\n- n. Agile/Scaled Agile Framework -minimum 3 references\n\nA consolidated assessment of the tenderer as a whole (including, if applicable, all members of a joint tender and/or other entities on which the tenderer relies to fulfil this selection criterion) will be carried out.\n\nTenderers must provide minimum 10 (and in any case no more than 20) contract references . Evidence must be provided in the form of a filled-in contract reference per project. For each contract reference the use of the templates provided in Annex 09 to this document is mandatory. Only references submitted on these forms will be considered.\n\nTenderers who fail to provide a description, or who only provide generic content, which does not specifically describe the relevance of the contract reference with regard to the minimum level of capacity detailed above, will be considered as not having the technical and professional capacity to perform the contract.\n\nThe references must concern at least 3 different clients. Departments, divisions, directorates, and other entities of a same body (including the same EU Institution) will be regarded as the same client. Each EU Institution (including an EU agency) is considered a different client. Under a framework contract (or framework contracts) with different specific contracts, a specific contract (alone or in combination with other specific contracts) can be used only once (i.e. it will be considered as a single reference). In case of a joint tender, the same reference contract cannot be submitted as a separate contract reference by different economic operators for the same tender.\n\nThe Contracting Authority may request statements issued by the clients , public or private, as supporting documents for each contract reference. These documents should be ready to be provided within five working days of the Contracting Authority 's request. The contact persons for the customers indicated in the contract reference form may be contacted in the context of this call for tenders to crosscheck the validity of the information provided as evidence.\n\n## LOT 1 and LOT 2\n\n26\n\n## Basis for assessment\n\n## Evidence", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "26\n\n## LOT 1 and LOT 2" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7226568811456053, + "doc_id": "1824f33a452a4e752682408010c23def7ce67d76243fbcd6d5273c3cbb2074a1", + "edit_distance": 0.8695652173913043, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9859044957672393, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Contract no: [complete]\n\n## ANNEX III\n\n-  Model for specific contract\n\nEC - FWC services Dec 2018\n\n36", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "36\n\n-  Model for specific contract\n\nContract no: [complete] \n\nEC - FWC services Dec 2018 \n\n## ANNEX III" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8492860885340995, + "doc_id": "bbdff9fa5b1dfbe94dd29976cbf5761261ca7a1c5d39da62cb1bbff80c598a64", + "edit_distance": 0.7285714285714285, + "f1_score": 0.9727272727272729, + "meteor": 0.8233807197934081, + "precision": 0.981651376146789, + "pred_md": "TRAVAUX (Points d'indemnité appliqués par travail et par jour de retard dépassant le seuil)\n\n## DÉLAIS D'INTERVENTION ET DÉPANNAGE\n\n(Voir point 2.6 des spécifications techniques)\n\nEn cas de défaillance du contractant pour toute autre raison que les cas de force majeure, le Secrétariat se réserve le droit d'appliquer des dommages-intérêts de 100 € lors de tout dépassement des délais d'intervention et/ou de dépannage prévus au paragraphe II point 2.6 repris dans le tableau ci-dessous. Ces dommages-intérêts seront majorés de 100 € par tranche de dépassement de 20% du délai d'intervention.\n\nPar exemple, pour une intervention pendant les heures ouvrées sur une installation de criticité 3 (délai d'intervention = 60 min.), si le contractant commence à intervenir sur site après 90 min. la pénalité sera de 100 € (indemnité forfaitaire pour dépassement des 60 min. prévues) + 2 x 100 € (2 x 12 min. (= 20% de 60 min. de retard) soit 300 €.\n\n## CONTRÔLES\n\n39\n\nANNEXE III\n\nFR", + "recall": 0.963963963963964, + "true_md": "## TRAVAUX (Points d’indemnité appliqués par travail et par jour de retard dépassant le seuil)\n\nTRAVAUX (Points d’indemnité appliqués par travail et par jour de retard dépassant le seuil) \n\n(Voir point 2.6 des spécifications techniques) \n\n## DÉLAIS D’INTERVENTION ET DÉPANNAGE\n\nPar exemple, pour une intervention pendant les heures ouvrées sur une installation de criticité 3 (délai d'intervention = 60 min.), si le contractant commence à intervenir sur site après 90 min. la pénalité sera de 100 € (indemnité forfaitaire pour dépassement des 60 min. prévues) + 2 x 100 € (2 x 12 min. (= 20% de 60 min. de retard) soit 300 €. \n\n## CONTRÔLES\n\n39 FR\n\nANNEXE III \n\nEn cas de défaillance du contractant pour toute autre raison que les cas de force majeure, le Secrétariat se réserve le droit d'appliquer des dommages-intérêts de 100 € lors de tout dépassement des délais d'intervention et/ou de dépannage prévus au paragraphe II point 2.6 repris dans le tableau ci-dessous. Ces dommages-intérêts seront majorés de 100 € par tranche de dépassement de 20% du délai d'intervention." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6495925413054809, + "doc_id": "8ee09a9185e491ce202d0d3dbc3ea9469b1ab46e8208abc76aeca6481c3b2d7a", + "edit_distance": 0.3865546218487395, + "f1_score": 0.992084432717678, + "meteor": 0.5773742999740937, + "precision": 0.9947089947089947, + "pred_md": "EC - FWC services Dec 2018\n\nContract no: [complete]\n\n- II.6.6 The contracting authority is not liable for any loss or damage caused to the contractor during or as a consequence of implementation of the FWC , unless the loss or damage was caused by wilful misconduct or gross negligence of the contracting authority.\n\n## II.7. CONFLICT OF INTEREST AND PROFESSIONAL CONFLICTING INTERESTS\n\n- II.7.1 The contractor must take all the necessary measures to prevent any situation of conflict of interest or professional conflicting interest .\n- II.7.2 The contractor must notify the contracting authority in writing as soon as possible of any situation that could constitute a conflict of interest or a professional conflicting interest during the implementation of the FWC . The contractor must immediately take action to rectify the situation.\n\nThe contracting authority may do any of the following:\n\n- a) verify that the contractor's action is appropriate;\n- b) require the contractor to take further action within a specified deadline;\n- c) decide not to award a specific contract to the contractor.\n- II.7.3 The contractor must pass on all the relevant obligations in writing to:\n- a) its personnel ;\n- b) any natural person with the power to represent it or take decisions on its behalf;\n- c) third parties involved in the implementation of the FWC , including subcontractors.\n\nThe contractor must also ensure that the persons referred to above are not placed in a situation which could give rise to conflicts of interest.\n\n## II.8. CONFIDENTIALITY\n\n- II.8.1. The contracting authority and the contractor must treat with confidentiality any information or documents, in any format, disclosed in writing or orally, relating to the implementation of the FWC and identified in writing as confidential.\n\n## II.8.2. Each party must:\n\n- a) not use confidential information or documents for any purpose other than to perform its obligations under the FWC or a specific contract without the prior written agreement of the other party;\n- b) ensure the protection of such confidential information or documents with the same level of protection as its own confidential information or documents and in any case with due diligence;\n- c) not disclose, directly or indirectly, confidential information or documents to third parties without the prior written agreement of the other party.\n- II.8.3 The confidentiality obligations set out in this Article are binding on the contracting authority and the contractor during the implementation of the FWC and for as long as the information or documents remain confidential unless:\n- a) the disclosing party agrees to release the receiving party from the confidentiality obligation earlier;\n- b) the confidential information or documents become public through other means than a breach of the confidentiality obligation;\n- c) the applicable law requires the disclosure of the confidential information or documents .\n\n18", + "recall": 0.9894736842105263, + "true_md": "Contract no: [complete] \n\nThe contracting authority may do any of the following: \n\nThe contractor must also ensure that the persons referred to above are not placed in a situation which could give rise to conflicts of interest.\n\n- II.6.6 The contracting authority is not liable for any loss or damage caused to the contractor during or as a consequence of implementation of the FWC , unless the loss or damage was caused by wilful misconduct or gross negligence of the contracting authority. \n\n- II.7.1 The contractor must take all the necessary measures to prevent any situation of conflict of interest or professional conflicting interest .\n\n- II.7.2 The contractor must notify the contracting authority in writing as soon as possible of any situation that could constitute a conflict of interest or a professional conflicting interest during the implementation of the FWC . The contractor must immediately take action to rectify the situation.\n\n- a) verify that the contractor’s action is appropriate; b) require the contractor to take further action within a specified deadline;\n\n- a) verify that the contractor’s action is appropriate; b) require the contractor to take further action within a specified deadline; c) decide not to award a specific contract to the contractor.\n\n- b) require the contractor to take further action within a specified deadline; c) decide not to award a specific contract to the contractor.\n\n- II.7.3 The contractor must pass on all the relevant obligations in writing to: \n\n- a) its personnel ; b) any natural person with the power to represent it or take decisions on its behalf;\n\n- a) its personnel ; b) any natural person with the power to represent it or take decisions on its behalf; c) third parties involved in the implementation of the FWC , including subcontractors.\n\n- b) any natural person with the power to represent it or take decisions on its behalf; c) third parties involved in the implementation of the FWC , including subcontractors.\n\n- II.8.1. The contracting authority and the contractor must treat with confidentiality any information or documents, in any format, disclosed in writing or orally, relating to the implementation of the FWC and identified in writing as confidential. \n\n- II.8.2. Each party must: \n\n- a) not use confidential information or documents for any purpose other than to perform its obligations under the FWC or a specific contract without the prior written agreement of the other party; b) ensure the protection of such confidential information or documents with the same level of \n\n- party; b) ensure the protection of such confidential information or documents with the same level of protection as its own confidential information or documents and in any case with due diligence; c) not disclose, directly or indirectly, confidential information or documents to third parties without \n\n- protection as its own confidential information or documents and in any case with due diligence; c) not disclose, directly or indirectly, confidential information or documents to third parties without the prior written agreement of the other party. \n\n- II.8.3 The confidentiality obligations set out in this Article are binding on the contracting authority and the contractor during the implementation of the FWC and for as long as the information or documents remain confidential unless:\n\n- a) the disclosing party agrees to release the receiving party from the confidentiality obligation earlier; b) the confidential information or documents become public through other means than a breach of \n\n- earlier; b) the confidential information or documents become public through other means than a breach of the confidentiality obligation; c) the applicable law requires the disclosure of the confidential information or documents .\n\n- the confidentiality obligation; c) the applicable law requires the disclosure of the confidential information or documents .\n\n18\n\n## II.8. CONFIDENTIALITY\n\n## II.7. CONFLICT OF INTEREST AND PROFESSIONAL CONFLICTING INTERESTS\n\nEC - FWC services Dec 2018" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8725129388059689, + "doc_id": "8a2e2aecd66fb6d6506dd4d70b9efbc6bbba2da19dc6cb724ad8b2e3e06b2741", + "edit_distance": 0.05555555555555555, + "f1_score": 0.9411764705882353, + "meteor": 0.943675509419454, + "precision": 0.9411764705882353, + "pred_md": "Vaccine Effectiveness, Burden and Impact Studies (VEBIS) of COVID-19 and Influenza - Tender Specifications ECDC/2021/12924", + "recall": 0.9411764705882353, + "true_md": "Vaccine Effectiveness, Burden and Impact Studies (VEBIS) of COVID-19 and Influenza – Tender Specifications ECDC/2021/12924" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9298573222826011, + "doc_id": "27d9c5470425ae5ba557f1f22835bceb2e16602980d0514c371e19176ee548e1", + "edit_distance": 0.6530612244897959, + "f1_score": 0.9853658536585366, + "meteor": 0.928925923986202, + "precision": 0.9901960784313726, + "pred_md": "## PROJET DE\n\n## CONTRAT-CADRE DE SERVICES\n\nN° de contrat: UCA 21-013\n\nNuméro interne: 1600000XXX\n\n1 . L'UNION EUROPÉENNE, représentée par le Secrétariat général du Conseil (ci-après \"le pouvoir adjudicateur ou le SGC\"), représenté en vue de la signature du présent contrat-cadre par M./Mme. XXXX, Directeur ORG.3,\n\nd'une part, et\n\n- 2. [ nom officiel complet ]\n\n[ Forme juridique officielle ]\n\n[ Numéro d'enregistrement légal ou numéro de carte d'identité ou de passeport ] [ Adresse officielle complète ]\n\n[ Nº du registre de la TVA ]\n\n[désigné(e) comme chef de file du groupement par les membres du groupement qui a présenté l'offre conjointe]\n\n[ En cas d'offre conjointe, reproduire ces données pour chaque contractant et poursuivre la numérotation ]\n\n([ci-après collectivement] \"le contractant\"), représenté(e)(s) en vue de la signature du présent contrat-cadre par [ prénom, nom et fonction du représentant légal et nom de l'entreprise en cas d'offre conjointe ],\n\nd'autre part,\n\n1\n\nFR", + "recall": 0.9805825242718447, + "true_md": "Conseil de l'Union européenne Secrétariat général \n\n2. [ nom officiel complet ] [ Forme juridique officielle ] [ Numéro d'enregistrement légal ou numéro de carte d'identité ou de passeport ] [ Adresse officielle complète ] [ Nº du registre de la TVA ] [désigné(e) comme chef de file du groupement par les membres du groupement qui a présenté l'offre conjointe] \n\n[ En cas d'offre conjointe, reproduire ces données pour chaque contractant et poursuivre la numérotation ] \n\n1 FR\n\nN° de contrat: UCA 21-013 \n\nNuméro interne: 1600000XXX \n\n# PROJET DE\n\n# CONTRAT-CADRE DE SERVICES\n\n1 . L'UNION EUROPÉENNE, représentée par le Secrétariat général du Conseil (ci-après \"le pouvoir adjudicateur ou le SGC\"), représenté en vue de la signature du présent contrat-cadre par M./Mme. XXXX, Directeur ORG.3, d'une part, et \n\n([ci-après collectivement] \"le contractant\"), représenté(e)(s) en vue de la signature du présent contrat-cadre par [ prénom, nom et fonction du représentant légal et nom de l'entreprise en cas d'offre conjointe ], d'autre part," + }, + { + "bleu": 0.193093770754812, + "doc_id": "58716a911644389bd51514d5729e3b834ca35474edfa33ead4611c76604b93f0", + "edit_distance": 0.8111111111111111, + "f1_score": 0.4444444444444444, + "meteor": 0.555967485033229, + "precision": 0.2909090909090909, + "pred_md": "Vaccine Effectiveness, Burden and Impact Studies (VEBIS) of COVID-19 and Influenza - Tender Specifications ECDC/2021/12924\n\nTask 4: Summarize findings related to surveillance and to studies\n\nThe contractor will summarize findings related to the studies, which include delivering reports on the results of the vaccine effectiveness studies, the annual report on the results from the SARI surveillance, the annual report on vaccine effectiveness results, as well as draft manuscripts, presentations and brief summaries on topics related to the ECDC hospital network.", + "recall": 0.9411764705882353, + "true_md": "Vaccine Effectiveness, Burden and Impact Studies (VEBIS) of COVID-19 and Influenza – Tender Specifications ECDC/2021/12924" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9587365925518061, + "doc_id": "d842c64fde27f335cc9900d3202b65792224561d1dfc56544bc7e0d3c06f42cb", + "edit_distance": 0.03773584905660377, + "f1_score": 0.9740259740259741, + "meteor": 0.9800154420707552, + "precision": 0.974025974025974, + "pred_md": "## [If this declaration is being completed by a consortium member:\n\nThe following table contains our financial data as included in the consortium's tender form. These data are based on our annual closed accounts and our latest projections. Estimated figures (i.e. those not included in annual closed accounts) are given in italics. Figures in all columns have been provided on the same basis to allow a direct, year-on-year comparison to be made <except as explained in the footnote to the table>.\n\nAugust 2020 c4l\\_tenderform\\_en.doc\n\nPage 6 of 9", + "recall": 0.974025974025974, + "true_md": "[If this declaration is being completed by a consortium member: \n\nThe following table contains our financial data as included in the consortium’s tender form. These data are based on our annual closed accounts and our latest projections. Estimated figures (i.e. those not included in annual closed accounts) are given in italics. Figures in all columns have been provided on the same basis to allow a direct, year-on-year comparison to be made < except as explained in the footnote to the table>.\n\nAugust 2020 c4l\\_tenderform\\_en.doc \n\nPage 6 of 9" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7362857814367635, + "doc_id": "fd7335980c2c7ba7f54e3ac3e2818b900a8fa63b659f48df8b7c1f074f11231f", + "edit_distance": 0.7292069632495164, + "f1_score": 0.978723404255319, + "meteor": 0.6048042466199945, + "precision": 0.9938271604938271, + "pred_md": "where:\n\nPr = revised price;\n\nPo = price in the tender;\n\nIo = index for the month in which the FWC enters into force;\n\nIr = index for the month in which the request to revise prices is received.\n\n## II.21. PAYMENTS AND GUARANTEES\n\n## II.21.1. Date of payment\n\nThe date of payment is deemed to be the date on which the contracting authority's account is debited.\n\n## II.21.2. Currency\n\nPayments are made in euros, unless another currency is provided for in Article I.7.\n\n## II.21.3. Conversion\n\nThe contracting authority makes any conversion between the euro and another currency at the daily euro exchange rate published in the Official Journal of the European Union, or failing that, at the monthly accounting exchange rate, as established by the European Commission and published on the website indicated below, applicable on the day when it issues the payment order.\n\nThe contractor makes any conversion between the euro and another currency at the monthly accounting exchange rate, established by the Commission and published on the website indicated below, applicable on the date of the invoice.\n\nhttp://ec.europa.eu/budget/contracts\\_grants/info\\_contracts/inforeuro/inforeuro\\_en.cfm\n\n## II.21.4. Costs of transfer\n\nThe costs of the transfer are borne as follows:\n\n- a) the contracting authority bears the costs of dispatch charged by its bank;\n- b) the contractor bears the costs of receipt charged by its bank;\n- c) the party causing repetition of the transfer bears the costs for repeated transfer.\n\n## II.21.5. Pre-financing, performance and money retention guarantees\n\nIf, as provided for in Article I.6 a financial guarantee is required for the payment of pre-financing, as , performance guarantee or as retention money guarantee, it must fulfil the following conditions:\n\n- a) the financial guarantee is provided by a bank or a financial institution approved by the contracting authority or, at the request of the contractor and with the agreement of the contracting authority, by a third party; and\n- b) the guarantee shall have the effect of making the bank or financial institution or the third party provide irrevocable collateral security, or stand as first-call guarantor of the contractor's\n\n31\n\n## Contract no: [complete]\n\nEC - FWC services Dec 2018", + "recall": 0.9640718562874252, + "true_md": "Contract no: [complete] \n\nThe date of payment is deemed to be the date on which the contracting authority’s account is debited. \n\nPayments are made in euros, unless another currency is provided for in Article I.7.\n\nThe contracting authority makes any conversion between the euro and another currency at the daily euro exchange rate published in the Official Journal of the European Union, or failing that, at the monthly accounting exchange rate, as established by the European Commission and published on the website indicated below, applicable on the day when it issues the payment order.\n\nThe contractor makes any conversion between the euro and another currency at the monthly accounting exchange rate, established by the Commission and published on the website indicated below, applicable on the date of the invoice. \n\nhttp://ec.europa.eu/budget/contracts\\_grants/info\\_contracts/inforeuro/inforeuro\\_en.cfm\n\nThe costs of the transfer are borne as follows: \n\nIf, as provided for in Article I.6 , a financial guarantee is required for the payment of pre-financing, as performance guarantee or as retention money guarantee, it must fulfil the following conditions:\n\n- a) the financial guarantee is provided by a bank or a financial institution approved by the contracting authority or, at the request of the contractor and with the agreement of the contracting authority, by a third party; and b) the guarantee shall have the effect of making the bank or financial institution or the third party \n\n- contracting authority, by a third party; and b) the guarantee shall have the effect of making the bank or financial institution or the third party provide irrevocable collateral security, or stand as first-call guarantor of the contractor’s \n\n- a) the contracting authority bears the costs of dispatch charged by its bank; b) the contractor bears the costs of receipt charged by its bank; \n\n- a) the contracting authority bears the costs of dispatch charged by its bank; b) the contractor bears the costs of receipt charged by its bank; c) the party causing repetition of the transfer bears the costs for repeated transfer. \n\n- b) the contractor bears the costs of receipt charged by its bank; c) the party causing repetition of the transfer bears the costs for repeated transfer. \n\n## II.21.5. Pre-financing, performance and money retention guarantees\n\n## II.21.4. Costs of transfer\n\n## II.21.3. Conversion\n\n## II.21.2. Currency\n\n## II.21.1. Date of payment\n\n## II.21. PAYMENTS AND GUARANTEES\n\nEC - FWC services Dec 2018 \n\n31\n\n$$Ir Pr = Po x ( — ) Io where:$$\n\n- Io where: Pr = revised price; Po = price in the tender; Io = index for the month in which the FWC enters into force; Ir = index for the month in which the request to revise prices is received." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9950567966221641, + "doc_id": "e2618c543bec8b1e084c9dde32fcf840f670b597dcc3c4898ea7797cd95a83e2", + "edit_distance": 0.002036659877800407, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9997956880681474, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "we will provide a statement that our situation has not altered in the period which has elapsed since the evidence in question was drawn up.\n\nWe also undertake, if required, to provide evidence of financial and economic standing and technical and professional capacity according to the selection criteria for this call for tender specified in the additional information about the contract notice. The documentary proofs required are listed in Section 2.6.11. of the practical guide.\n\nWe also understand that if we fail to provide the proof/evidence required, within 15 calendar days after receiving the notification of award, or if the information provided is proved false, the award may be considered null and void.\n\n- 10 We agree to abide by the ethics clauses in Clause 24 of the instructions to tenderers and, in particular, have no conflict of interests or any equivalent relation which may distort competition with other tenderers or other parties in the tender procedure at the time of the submission of this application.\n- We confirm that we, including all consortium members, if any, and subcontractors are not in the lists of EU restrictive measures (www.sanctionsmap.eu) and we understand that our tender may be rejected, if proved the contrary.\n- 11 We will inform the contracting authority immediately if there is any change in the above circumstances at any stage during the implementation of the tasks. We also fully recognise and accept that any inaccurate or incomplete information deliberately provided in this application may result in our exclusion from this and other contracts funded by the EU/EDF.\n- 12 We note that the contracting authority is not bound to proceed with this invitation to tender and that it reserves the right to award only part of the contract. It will incur no liability towards us should it do so.\n- 13 We fully recognise and accept that if the above-mentioned persons participate in spite of being in any of the situations listed in Section 2.6.10.1.1. of the practical guide or if the declarations or information provided prove to be false, they may be subject to rejection from this procedure and to administrative sanctions in the form of exclusion and financial penalties up to 10 % of the total estimated value of the contract being awarded and that this information may be published on the Commission website in accordance with the Financial Regulation in force.\n- 14 We are aware that, for the purposes of safeguarding the EU's financial interests, our personal data may be transferred to internal audit services, to the early detection and exclusion system, to the European Court of Auditors, to the Financial Irregularities Panel or to the European Anti-Fraud Office.\n\n[* Delete as applicable]\n\nAugust 2020 c4l\\_tenderform\\_en.doc\n\nPage 5 of 9", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "we will provide a statement that our situation has not altered in the period which has elapsed since the evidence in question was drawn up. \n\nWe also undertake, if required, to provide evidence of financial and economic standing and technical and professional capacity according to the selection criteria for this call for tender specified in the additional information about the contract notice. The documentary proofs required are listed in Section 2.6.11. of the practical guide. \n\nWe also understand that if we fail to provide the proof/evidence required, within 15 calendar days after receiving the notification of award, or if the information provided is proved false, the award may be considered null and void. \n\n- 10 We agree to abide by the ethics clauses in Clause 24 of the instructions to tenderers and, in particular, have no conflict of interests or any equivalent relation which may distort competition with other tenderers or other parties in the tender procedure at the time of the submission of this application. \n\nWe confirm that we, including all consortium members, if any, and subcontractors are not in the lists of EU restrictive measures (www.sanctionsmap.eu) and we understand that our tender may be rejected, if proved the contrary. \n\n- 11 We will inform the contracting authority immediately if there is any change in the above circumstances at any stage during the implementation of the tasks. We also fully recognise and accept that any inaccurate or incomplete information deliberately provided in this application may result in our exclusion from this and other contracts funded by the EU/EDF. \n\n- 12 We note that the contracting authority is not bound to proceed with this invitation to tender and that it reserves the right to award only part of the contract. It will incur no liability towards us should it do so. \n\n- 13 We fully recognise and accept that if the above-mentioned persons participate in spite of being in any of the situations listed in Section 2.6.10.1.1. of the practical guide or if the declarations or information provided prove to be false, they may be subject to rejection from this procedure and to administrative sanctions in the form of exclusion and financial penalties up to 10 % of the total estimated value of the contract being awarded and that this information may be published on the Commission website in accordance with the Financial Regulation in force. \n\n- 14 We are aware that, for the purposes of safeguarding the EU's financial interests, our personal data may be transferred to internal audit services, to the early detection and exclusion system, to the European Court of Auditors, to the Financial Irregularities Panel or to the European Anti-Fraud Office. \n\n[* Delete as applicable]\n\nAugust 2020 c4l\\_tenderform\\_en.doc \n\nPage 5 of 9" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7580200557466953, + "doc_id": "0212d997de678b2fd6b45b0e7822ad8fe201c372ff7eb4cf8044761eed5c3ee6", + "edit_distance": 0.47619047619047616, + "f1_score": 0.9677419354838711, + "meteor": 0.987635618651893, + "precision": 0.9375, + "pred_md": "ANNEXE II\n\n## ANNEXE II\n\nSpécifications techniques (référence nº [ compléter ] du [ date ])\n\n37\n\nFR", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Spécifications techniques (référence nº [ compléter ] du [ date ]) \n\n37 FR\n\nANNEXE II \n\nANNEXE II" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7466038447292335, + "doc_id": "b21a69f9c0619fff6698fd6815a4808b2c16c7b054c71d1cdfa6a000c93e54ff", + "edit_distance": 0.1761006289308176, + "f1_score": 0.9651162790697675, + "meteor": 0.8493446496685635, + "precision": 0.9880952380952381, + "pred_md": "## 4 STAFF RESOURCES\n\nPlease provide the following personnel statistics for the current year and the two previous years 10 .\n\n10 If this tender is submitted by a consortium, the data in the table above must be the sum of the data in the corresponding tables in the declarations provided by the consortium members - see point 7 of this tender form. Consolidated data are not requested for financial ratios.\n\n11 Corresponding to the relevant specialisms identified in point 5 below.\n\n12 Staff directly employed by the tenderer on a permanent basis (i.e. under indefinite contracts).\n\n13 Other staff not directly employed by the tenderer on a permanent basis (i.e. under fixed-term contracts).\n\nAugust 2020\n\nPage 1 of 9\n\nc4l\\_tenderform\\_en.doc", + "recall": 0.9431818181818182, + "true_md": "## 4 STAFF RESOURCES\n\nPlease provide the following personnel statistics for the current year and the two previous years$^{10}$. \n\n$^{10}$ If this tender is submitted by a consortium, the data in the table above must be the sum of the data in the corresponding tables in the declarations provided by the consortium members — see point 7 of this tender form. Consolidated data are not requested for financial ratios. \n\n$^{11}$ Corresponding to the relevant specialisms identified in point 5 below. \n\n$^{12}$ Staff directly employed by the tenderer on a permanent basis (i.e. under indefinite contracts). \n\n$^{13}$ Other staff not directly employed by the tenderer on a permanent basis (i.e. under fixed-term contracts). \n\nAugust 2020 c4l\\_tenderform\\_en.doc \n\nPage 1 of 9" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8597416303266827, + "doc_id": "8d0ae4fd188c9dda4e4322f78bae88f538fcaceb45bef674ee64376f0e622a80", + "edit_distance": 0.6310904872389791, + "f1_score": 0.9627659574468085, + "meteor": 0.7804528351123098, + "precision": 0.9627659574468085, + "pred_md": "## 4. FORM AND CONTENT OF THE TENDER\n\n## 4.1. Form of the tender: how to submit the tender?\n\nTenders are to be submitted via the e-Submission application according to the instructions laid down in the Invitation to tender letter and the e-Submission Quick Guide.\n\n-  Make sure you prepare and submit your electronic tender in e-Submission early enough to ensure it is received within the deadline specified under Heading IV.2.2 of the contract notice. A tender received after this deadline will be rejected.\n\n## 4.2 Content of the tender: what documents to submit with the tender?\n\nThe documents to be submitted with the tender in e-Submission are listed in section 6\n\nThe following requirements apply to the technical and financial offer (to be uploaded as Technical tender and Financial tender in e-Submission):\n\n- · Technical offer.\n- a) The technical proposal of the Tenderer shall be in free format and in accordance with the page limitation instructions provided . The technical offer must provide all the information needed to assess the compliance with section 1.4 of these specifications, the Annex 1 Technical ' Specifications ' and the award criteria.\n- b) The Minimum Requirements Checklist in Annex 14 'Minimum requirements checklist' must also be submitted in the technical offer.\n- · Financial offer.\n\nA complete financial offer, including the breakdown of the price needs to be uploaded. For this purpose, the Price Catalogue in Annex 12 'Price Catalogue' shall be completed, duly signed and uploaded in e-Submission.\n\nAs part of the financial offer, tenderers must submit:\n\n- - an electronic version of the Price Catalogue in the original electronic format (Microsoft Excel or equivalent);\n- - a scanned copy of the entire Price Catalogue with all its worksheets;\n\nIn case of doubt between the original electronic format and the scanned version of the financial model, the latter will prevail.\n\nEach tenderer's financial offer must be completely unambiguous and unconditional. Tenders which contain statements preventing an accurate and complete comparison of the t enders (e.g. 'To be discussed', 'Depending on x', etc.) or referring to external circumstances (such as an already existing but separate contract) will be disqualified.\n\n43", + "recall": 0.9627659574468085, + "true_md": "## 4. FORM AND CONTENT OF THE TENDER\n\n## 4.1. Form of the tender: how to submit the tender?\n\n## 4.2 Content of the tender: what documents to submit with the tender?\n\nTenders are to be submitted via the e-Submission application according to the instructions laid down in the Invitation to tender letter and the e-Submission Quick Guide. \n\n Make sure you prepare and submit your electronic tender in e-Submission early enough to ensure it is received within the deadline specified under Heading IV.2.2 of the contract notice. A tender received after this deadline will be rejected.\n\nThe documents to be submitted with the tender in e-Submission are listed in section 6\n\nThe following requirements apply to the technical and financial offer (to be uploaded as Technical tender and Financial tender in e-Submission): \n\nA complete financial offer, including the breakdown of the price needs to be uploaded. For this purpose, the Price Catalogue in Annex 12 “Price Catalogue” shall be completed, duly signed and uploaded in e-Submission.\n\nAs part of the financial offer, tenderers must submit: \n\n - an electronic version of the Price Catalogue in the original electronic format (Microsoft Excel or equivalent);\n\nIn case of doubt between the original electronic format and the scanned version of the financial model, the latter will prevail.\n\n- a scanned copy of the entire Price Catalogue with all its worksheets;\n\nEach tenderer’s financial offer must be completely unambiguous and unconditional. Tenders which contain statements preventing an accurate and complete comparison of the t enders (e.g. “To be discussed”, “Depending on x”, etc.) or referring to external circumstances (such as an already existing but separate contract) will be disqualified.\n\n43\n\n- • Technical offer. \n\n- a) The technical proposal of the Tenderer shall be in free format and in accordance with the page limitation instructions provided . The technical offer must provide all the information needed to assess the compliance with section 1.4 of these specifications, the Annex 1 “ Technical Specifications ” and the award criteria. b) The Minimum Requirements Checklist in Annex 14 “Minimum requirements \n\n- Specifications ” and the award criteria. b) The Minimum Requirements Checklist in Annex 14 “Minimum requirements checklist” must also be submitted in the technical offer.\n\n- • Financial offer." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7765621618370488, + "doc_id": "769f976fd36e01887360c34a6ccb55f403340b264429b2127792db95e501b879", + "edit_distance": 0.7032569360675512, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.6360748402113744, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "EC - FWC services Dec 2018\n\nContract no: [complete]\n\n- d) a process for regularly testing, assessing and evaluating the effectiveness of technical and organisational measures for ensuring the security of the processing;\n- e) measures to protect personal data from accidental or unlawful destruction, loss, alteration, unauthorised disclosure of or access to personal data transmitted, stored or otherwise processed.\n\nThe contractor shall notify relevant personal data breaches to the controller without undue delay and at the latest within 48 hours after the contractor becomes aware of the breach. In such cases, the contractor shall provide the controller with at least the following information:\n\n- a) nature of the personal data breach including where possible, the categories and approximate number of data subjects concerned and the categories and approximate number of personal data records concerned;\n- b) likely consequences of the breach;\n- c) measures taken or proposed to be taken to address the breach, including, where appropriate, measures to mitigate its possible adverse effects.\n\nThe contractor shall immediately inform the data controller if, in its opinion, an instruction infringes Regulation (EU) 2018/1725, Regulation (EU) 2016/679, or other Union or Member State data protection provisions as referred to in the tender specifications.\n\nThe contractor shall assist the controller for the fulfilment of its obligations pursuant to Article 33 to 41 under Regulation (EU) 2018/1725 to:\n\n- a) ensure compliance with its data protection obligations regarding the security of the processing, and the confidentiality of electronic communications and directories of users;\n- b) notify a personal data breach to the European Data Protection Supervisor;\n- c) communicate a personal data breach without undue delay to the data subject, where applicable;\n- d) carry out data protection impact assessments and prior consultations as necessary.\n\nThe contractor shall maintain a record of all data processing operations carried on behalf of the controller, transfers of personal data, security breaches, responses to requests for exercising rights of people whose personal data is processed and requests for access to personal data by third parties.\n\nThe contracting authority is subject to Protocol 7 of the Treaty on the Functioning of the European Union on the privileges and immunities of the European Union, particularly as regards the inviolability of archives (including the physical location of data and services as set out in Article I.9.2) and data security, which includes personal data held on behalf of the contracting authority in the premises of the contractor or subcontractor.\n\nThe contractor shall notify the contracting authority without delay of any legally binding request for disclosure of the personal data processed on behalf of the contracting authority made by any national public authority, including an authority from a third country. The contractor may not give such access without the prior written authorisation of the contracting authority.\n\nThe duration of processing of personal data by the contractor will not exceed the period referred to in Article II.24.2. Upon expiry of this period, the contractor shall, at the choice of the controller, return, without any undue delay in a commonly agreed format, all personal data processed on behalf of the controller and the copies thereof or shall effectively delete all personal data unless Union or national law requires a longer storage of personal data.\n\nFor the purpose of Article II.10, if part or all of the processing of personal data is subcontracted to a third party, the contractor shall pass on the obligations referred to in Articles I.9.2 and II.9.2 in writing to those parties, including subcontractors. At the request of the contracting authority, the contractor shall provide a document providing evidence of this commitment.\n\n20", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Contract no: [complete] \n\nThe contractor shall notify relevant personal data breaches to the controller without undue delay and at the latest within 48 hours after the contractor becomes aware of the breach. In such cases, the contractor shall provide the controller with at least the following information: \n\nThe contractor shall immediately inform the data controller if, in its opinion, an instruction infringes Regulation (EU) 2018/1725, Regulation (EU) 2016/679, or other Union or Member State data protection provisions as referred to in the tender specifications. \n\nThe contractor shall assist the controller for the fulfilment of its obligations pursuant to Article 33 to 41 under Regulation (EU) 2018/1725 to: \n\nThe contractor shall maintain a record of all data processing operations carried on behalf of the controller, transfers of personal data, security breaches, responses to requests for exercising rights of people whose personal data is processed and requests for access to personal data by third parties. \n\nThe contracting authority is subject to Protocol 7 of the Treaty on the Functioning of the European Union on the privileges and immunities of the European Union, particularly as regards the inviolability of archives (including the physical location of data and services as set out in Article I.9.2) and data security, which includes personal data held on behalf of the contracting authority in the premises of the contractor or subcontractor. \n\nThe contractor shall notify the contracting authority without delay of any legally binding request for disclosure of the personal data processed on behalf of the contracting authority made by any national public authority, including an authority from a third country. The contractor may not give such access without the prior written authorisation of the contracting authority. \n\nThe duration of processing of personal data by the contractor will not exceed the period referred to in Article II.24.2. Upon expiry of this period, the contractor shall, at the choice of the controller, return, without any undue delay in a commonly agreed format, all personal data processed on behalf of the controller and the copies thereof or shall effectively delete all personal data unless Union or national law requires a longer storage of personal data.\n\nFor the purpose of Article II.10, if part or all of the processing of personal data is subcontracted to a third party, the contractor shall pass on the obligations referred to in Articles I.9.2 and II.9.2 in writing to those parties, including subcontractors. At the request of the contracting authority, the contractor shall provide a document providing evidence of this commitment. \n\n20\n\nEC - FWC services Dec 2018 \n\n- d) a process for regularly testing, assessing and evaluating the effectiveness of technical and organisational measures for ensuring the security of the processing; e) measures to protect personal data from accidental or unlawful destruction, loss, alteration, \n\n- organisational measures for ensuring the security of the processing; e) measures to protect personal data from accidental or unlawful destruction, loss, alteration, unauthorised disclosure of or access to personal data transmitted, stored or otherwise processed. \n\n- a) nature of the personal data breach including where possible, the categories and approximate number of data subjects concerned and the categories and approximate number of personal data records concerned; b) likely consequences of the breach; \n\n- data records concerned; b) likely consequences of the breach; c) measures taken or proposed to be taken to address the breach, including, where appropriate, \n\n- b) likely consequences of the breach; c) measures taken or proposed to be taken to address the breach, including, where appropriate, measures to mitigate its possible adverse effects. \n\n- a) ensure compliance with its data protection obligations regarding the security of the processing, and the confidentiality of electronic communications and directories of users; b) notify a personal data breach to the European Data Protection Supervisor; \n\n- and the confidentiality of electronic communications and directories of users; b) notify a personal data breach to the European Data Protection Supervisor; c) communicate a personal data breach without undue delay to the data subject, where applicable; \n\n- b) notify a personal data breach to the European Data Protection Supervisor; c) communicate a personal data breach without undue delay to the data subject, where applicable; d) carry out data protection impact assessments and prior consultations as necessary. \n\n- c) communicate a personal data breach without undue delay to the data subject, where applicable; d) carry out data protection impact assessments and prior consultations as necessary." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8651935186354246, + "doc_id": "30c85cbcc59bed6be59a6e992c7995da4a4524b24a107e681e9700e04fcca4bd", + "edit_distance": 0.6299694189602446, + "f1_score": 0.9646017699115044, + "meteor": 0.8902195342844497, + "precision": 0.9646017699115044, + "pred_md": "- -Section 5 Resources\n- -Section 6.2.1 Core and extended teams\n\n## AWARD CRITERIA LOT 2\n\n## AW 01 -OVERALL MANAGEMENT OF THE SERVICES\n\n## Reference: [insert] Max size: 15 pages Max: 15 points Min: 9 points\n\nWith reference to the service requirements as defined in the Technical Specifications (i.e. the objectives, activities and deliverables), elaborate a proposal supporting the service delivery under the following Work Packages (WP) reflecting future operational scenarios:\n\n- · [WP1] Governance\n- · Section 7 Quality requirements\n\n## AW 02 - WORKING IN A MULTI-PARTY FWC\n\n## Reference: [insert] Max size: 25 pages Max: 20 points Min: 12 points\n\nWith reference to the service requirements as defined in the Technical Specifications (i.e. the objectives, activities and deliverables), elaborate a proposal supporting the service delivery under the following sequences of Work Packages (WP) reflecting future operational scenarios:\n\n- · Sequence 1: [WP3] Takeover → [WP6] Run\n- · Sequence 2: [WP3] Takeover → [WP7] Grow → [WP6] Run\n- · Sequence 3: [WP6] Run → [WP4] Handover\n\n## AW 03 -EFFICIENCY IN MAINTAINING AND FURTHER DEVELOPING A PORTFOLIO OF ESTABLISHED IT PRODUCTS\n\n## Reference: [insert] Max size: 25 pages Max: 30 points Min: 18 points\n\nWith reference to the service requirements as defined in the Technical Specifications (i.e. the objectives, activities and deliverables), elaborate a proposal supporting the service delivery under the following Work Packages (WP) reflecting future operational scenarios:\n\n- · [WP2] IT Enterprise Architecture, strategy and Security\n- · [WP6] Run\n- · [WP7] Grow\n\n33", + "recall": 0.9646017699115044, + "true_md": "- - Section 5 Resources \n\n- - Section 6.2.1 Core and extended teams \n\n- • [WP1] Governance \n\n- • Section 7 Quality requirements\n\n- • Sequence 1: [WP3] Takeover → [WP6] Run \n\n- • Sequence 2: [WP3] Takeover → [WP7] Grow → [WP6] Run \n\n- • Sequence 3: [WP6] Run → [WP4] Handover\n\n- • [WP2] IT Enterprise Architecture, strategy and Security \n\n- • [WP6] Run \n\n- • [WP7] Grow \n\n33\n\n## AWARD CRITERIA LOT 2\n\n## AW 01 – OVERALL MANAGEMENT OF THE SERVICES\n\n## AW 02 - WORKING IN A MULTI-PARTY FWC\n\n## AW 03 – EFFICIENCY IN MAINTAINING AND FURTHER DEVELOPING A PORTFOLIO OF ESTABLISHED IT PRODUCTS\n\nReference: [insert]\n\nMax size: 15 pages \n\nMax: 15 points \n\nMin: 9 points \n\nWith reference to the service requirements as defined in the Technical Specifications (i.e. the objectives, activities and deliverables), elaborate a proposal supporting the service delivery under the following Work Packages (WP) reflecting future operational scenarios: \n\nReference: [insert]\n\nMax size: 25 pages \n\nMax: 20 points \n\nMin: 12 points \n\nWith reference to the service requirements as defined in the Technical Specifications (i.e. the objectives, activities and deliverables), elaborate a proposal supporting the service delivery under the following sequences of Work Packages (WP) reflecting future operational scenarios: \n\nReference: [insert]\n\nMax size: 25 pages \n\nMax: 30 points \n\nMin: 18 points \n\nWith reference to the service requirements as defined in the Technical Specifications (i.e. the objectives, activities and deliverables), elaborate a proposal supporting the service delivery under the following Work Packages (WP) reflecting future operational scenarios:" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9014696060359736, + "doc_id": "92bab8f01ce90419435812bf6aa39d79b3d03ae433c3f9e5586c26d700563d1c", + "edit_distance": 0.11813643926788686, + "f1_score": 0.9583333333333334, + "meteor": 0.9159209865257139, + "precision": 0.9547169811320755, + "pred_md": "Contract number: [ complete ]\n\nContract conditions of December 2015\n\n## II GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR THE SUPPLIES CONTRACT II.1. DEFINITIONS\n\nFor the purpose of this contract, the following definitions (indicated in italics in the text) apply:\n\n- 'Back office' : the internal system(s) used by the parties to process electronic invoices;\n- 'Confidential information or document' : any information or document received by either party from the other or accessed by either party in the context of the performance of the contract , that any of the parties has identified in writing as confidential. It may not include information that is publicly available;\n- 'Conflict of interest' : a situation where the impartial and objective performance of the contract by the contractor is compromised for reasons involving family, emotional life, political or national affinity, economic interest, or any other shared interest with the contracting authority or any third party related to the subject matter of the contract;\n- 'EDI message' (electronic data interchange): a message created and exchanged through the electronic transfer, from computer to computer, of commercial and administrative data using an agreed standard;\n- 'e-PRIOR' : the service-oriented communication platform that provides a series of web services and allows the exchange of standardised electronic messages and documents between the parties. This is done either through web services, with a machine-to-machine connection between the parties' back office systems ( EDI messages ), or through a web application (the s upplier portal ). The Platform may be used to exchange electronic documents (e-documents) such as electronic requests for supplies , electronic specific contracts, and electronic delivery of the certificate of conformity or electronic invoices between the parties. Technical specifications (i.e. the interface control document ), details on access and user manuals are available at the following website: http://ec.europa.eu/dgs/informatics/supplier\\_portal/documentation/documentation\\_en.htm\n- 'Force majeure' : any unforeseeable, exceptional situation or event beyond the control of the parties that prevents either of them from fulfilling any of their obligations under the contract. The situation or event must not be attributable to error or negligence on the part of the parties or on the part of the subcontractors and must prove to be inevitable despite their exercising due diligence. Defaults, defects in equipment or material or delays in making them available, labour disputes, strikes and financial difficulties may not be invoked as force majeure , unless they stem directly from a relevant case of force majeure ;\n- 'Formal notification' (or 'formally notify'): form of communication between the parties made in writing by mail or email, which provides the sender with compelling evidence that the message was delivered to the specified recipient;\n- 'Fraud': any intentional act or omission affecting the Union's and Community's financial interests relating to the use or presentation of false, incorrect or incomplete statements or documents or to non-disclosure of information in violation of a specific obligation;\n- 'Interface control document' : the guideline document which lays down the technical specifications, message standards, security standards, checks of syntax and semantics, etc. to facilitate machine-to-machine connection. This document is updated on a regular basis;\n\n11", + "recall": 0.9619771863117871, + "true_md": "Contract number: [ complete ] \n\nContract conditions of December 2015 \n\nFor the purpose of this contract, the following definitions (indicated in italics in the text) apply: \n\n‘Back office’ : the internal system(s) used by the parties to process electronic invoices;\n\n‘Confidential information or document’ : any information or document received by either party from the other or accessed by either party in the context of the performance of the contract , that any of the parties has identified in writing as confidential. It may not include information that is publicly available; \n\n‘Conflict of interest’ : a situation where the impartial and objective performance of the contract by the contractor is compromised for reasons involving family, emotional life, political or national affinity, economic interest, or any other shared interest with the contracting authority or any third party related to the subject matter of the contract; \n\n‘EDI message’ (electronic data interchange): a message created and exchanged through the electronic transfer, from computer to computer, of commercial and administrative data using an agreed standard; \n\n‘e-PRIOR’ : the service-oriented communication platform that provides a series of web services and allows the exchange of standardised electronic messages and documents between the parties. This is done either through web services, with a machine-to-machine connection between the parties’ back office systems ( EDI messages ), or through a web application (the s upplier portal ). The Platform may be used to exchange electronic documents (e-documents) such as electronic requests for supplies , electronic specific contracts, and electronic delivery of the certificate of conformity or electronic invoices between the parties. Technical specifications (i.e. the interface control document ), details on access and user manuals are available at the following website: http://ec.europa.eu/dgs/informatics/supplier\\_portal/documentation/documentation\\_en.htm\n\n‘Force majeure’ : any unforeseeable, exceptional situation or event beyond the control of the parties that prevents either of them from fulfilling any of their obligations under the contract. The situation or event must not be attributable to error or negligence on the part of the parties or on the part of the subcontractors and must prove to be inevitable despite their exercising due diligence. Defaults, defects in equipment or material or delays in making them available, labour disputes, strikes and financial difficulties may not be invoked as force majeure , unless they stem directly from a relevant case of force majeure ;\n\n‘Formal notification’ (or ‘formally notify’): form of communication between the parties made in writing by mail or email, which provides the sender with compelling evidence that the message was delivered to the specified recipient;\n\n‘Fraud’: any intentional act or omission affecting the Union’s and Community’s financial interests relating to the use or presentation of false, incorrect or incomplete statements or documents or to non-disclosure of information in violation of a specific obligation;\n\n‘Interface control document’ : the guideline document which lays down the technical specifications, message standards, security standards, checks of syntax and semantics, etc. to facilitate machine-to-machine connection. This document is updated on a regular basis;\n\n11 \n\n## II GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR THE SUPPLIES CONTRACT II.1. DEFINITIONS\n\n## II GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR THE SUPPLIES CONTRACT II.1. DEFINITIONS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9156734455633441, + "doc_id": "648a395d45b05d90d731b056945ffd499a93e8dae59310042ef8f6cb039fbd4b", + "edit_distance": 0.4364937388193202, + "f1_score": 0.9718875502008032, + "meteor": 0.9096752530310156, + "precision": 0.9958847736625515, + "pred_md": "## D. TENDER FORM FOR A SUPPLY CONTRACT\n\nPublication reference: EuropeAid/140639/IH/SUP/TR\n\nTitle of contract: Supply of Equipment for Advanced Prototype Station (APS)\n\nA: <Name and address of contracting authority >.\n\nOne signed form must be supplied (for each lot, if the tender procedure is divided into lots), together with the number of copies specified in the instructions to tenderers . The form must include a signed declaration using the annexed format from each legal entity making the application. Any additional documentation (brochure, letter, etc.) sent with the form will not be taken into consideration. Applications being submitted by a consortium (i.e. either a permanent, legally-established grouping or a grouping which has been constituted informally for a specific tender procedure) must follow the instructions applicable to the consortium leader and its members. The attachments to this submission form (i.e. declarations, statements, proofs) may be in original or copy. If copies are submitted, the originals must be dispatched to the contracting authority upon request. For economical and ecological reasons, we strongly recommend that you submit your files on paper-based materials (no plastic folder or divider). We also suggest you use double-sided print-outs as much as possible.\n\nAn economic operator may, where appropriate and for a particular contract, rely on the capacities of other entities, regardless of the legal nature of the links which it has with them. It must in that case prove to the contracting authority that it will have at its disposal the resources necessary for the performance of the contract by producing a commitment on the part of those entities to place those resources at its disposal. Such entities, for instance the parent company of the economic operator, must respect the same rules of eligibility and notably that of nationality, as the economic operator, as well as the relevant selection criteria. With regard to technical and professional criteria, an economic operator may only rely on the capacities of other entities where the latter will supply the supplies or perform the works or services for which these capacities are required. With regard to economic and financial criteria, the entities upon whose capacity the tenderer relies, become jointly and severally liable for the performance of the contract.\n\n## 1 SUBMITTED BY\n\n1 Country in which the legal entity is registered.\n\n2 Add/delete additional lines for members as appropriate. Note that a subcontractor is not considered to be a member for the purposes of this tender procedure. Subsequently, the data of the subcontractor must not appear in the data related to the economic, financial and professional capacity. If this tender is being submitted by an individual tenderer, the name of the tenderer should be entered as ' leader ' (and all other lines should be deleted).\n\nAugust 2020 c4l\\_tenderform\\_en.doc\n\nPage 1 of 9", + "recall": 0.9490196078431372, + "true_md": "Ref. Ares(2020)5475650 - 14/10/2020\n\n# D. TENDER FORM FOR A SUPPLY CONTRACT\n\n## Publication reference: EuropeAid/140639/IH/SUP/TR\n\n## Title of contract: Supply of Equipment for Advanced Prototype Station (APS)\n\n< Place and date > \n\nA: < Name and address of contracting authority >. \n\nOne signed form must be supplied (for each lot, if the tender procedure is divided into lots), together with the number of copies specified in the instructions to tenderers . The form must include a signed declaration using the annexed format from each legal entity making the application. Any additional documentation (brochure, letter, etc.) sent with the form will not be taken into consideration. Applications being submitted by a consortium (i.e. either a permanent, legally-established grouping or a grouping which has been constituted informally for a specific tender procedure) must follow the instructions applicable to the consortium leader and its members. The attachments to this submission form (i.e. declarations, statements, proofs) may be in original or copy. If copies are submitted, the originals must be dispatched to the contracting authority upon request. For economical and ecological reasons, we strongly recommend that you submit your files on paper-based materials (no plastic folder or divider). We also suggest you use double-sided print-outs as much as possible. \n\n$^{1}$ Country in which the legal entity is registered. \n\n$^{2}$ Add/delete additional lines for members as appropriate. Note that a subcontractor is not considered to be a member for the purposes of this tender procedure. Subsequently, the data of the subcontractor must not appear in the data related to the economic, financial and professional capacity. If this tender is being submitted by an individual tenderer, the name of the tenderer should be entered as ‘ leader ’ (and all other lines should be deleted). \n\nAugust 2020 c4l\\_tenderform\\_en.doc \n\nPage 1 of 9 \n\n## 1 SUBMITTED BY\n\nAn economic operator may, where appropriate and for a particular contract, rely on the capacities of other entities, regardless of the legal nature of the links which it has with them. It must in that case prove to the contracting authority that it will have at its disposal the resources necessary for the performance of the contract by producing a commitment on the part of those entities to place those resources at its disposal. Such entities, for instance the parent company of the economic operator, must respect the same rules of eligibility and notably that of nationality, as the economic operator, as well as the relevant selection criteria. With regard to technical and professional criteria, an economic operator may only rely on the capacities of other entities where the latter will supply the supplies or perform the works or services for which these capacities are required. With regard to economic and financial criteria, the entities upon whose capacity the tenderer relies, become jointly and severally liable for the performance of the contract." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9315216377775224, + "doc_id": "1ef6219d1421279a9b648737d3413314bb6e0b8a83414e6567c2c44077d1cb5c", + "edit_distance": 0.044444444444444446, + "f1_score": 0.9569377990430623, + "meteor": 0.9565703374520456, + "precision": 0.9615384615384616, + "pred_md": "platform. Any direct user access is granted solely for management and maintenance of the data store, and appropriate monitoring and auditing of user and systems access to the data store should be in place\n\n- · The solution proposed shall be compatible with the technology stack of the ECHA Data Platform, ensuring the solution can seamlessly integrate with existing components\n- · The estimated number of person-days for this request shall not exceed 500\n- · The duration of the assignment shall not exceed 6 months\n\n## Assessment questionnaire\n\nThe tenderer is requested to prepare an architecture to implement a common data store addressing the above requirements.\n\nThe tenderer must provide a proposal on the concrete measures and proposed solution addressing the question, as per the table below.\n\nThe proposed solution should not be a generic description of what may be possible. As such, replies must be focused on addressing the scenario specifics and tenderers shall avoid for instance inserting extracts of 'context -free' generic documentation.\n\n36", + "recall": 0.9523809523809523, + "true_md": "platform. Any direct user access is granted solely for management and maintenance of the data store, and appropriate monitoring and auditing of user and systems access to the data store should be in place \n\n- • The solution proposed shall be compatible with the technology stack of the ECHA Data Platform, ensuring the solution can seamlessly integrate with existing components \n\n- • The estimated number of person-days for this request shall not exceed 500 \n\n- • The duration of the assignment shall not exceed 6 months \n\n## Assessment questionnaire\n\nThe tenderer is requested to prepare an architecture to implement a common data store addressing the above requirements. The tenderer must provide a proposal on the concrete measures and proposed solution addressing the question, as per the table below. The proposed solution should not be a generic description of what may be possible. As such, replies must be focused on addressing the scenario specifics and tenderers shall avoid for instance inserting extracts of ‘context - free’ generic documentation.\n\n36" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9452070153579548, + "doc_id": "807cbd78434cac98cfba916e9eb10f1ffe07f4a3a2bafe963b057c1c74701ce6", + "edit_distance": 0.3947858472998138, + "f1_score": 0.9831932773109244, + "meteor": 0.9631776822488198, + "precision": 0.9873417721518988, + "pred_md": "EC - FWC services Dec 2018\n\nContract no: [complete]\n\nIf moral rights on parts of the results protected by copyright may exist, the contractor must obtain the consent of creators regarding the granting or waiver of the relevant moral rights in accordance with the applicable legal provisions and be ready to provide documentary evidence upon request.\n\n## II.13.8. Image rights and sound recordings\n\nIf natural persons appear in a result or their voice or any other private element is recorded in a recognisable manner, the contractor must obtain a statement by these persons (or, in the case of minors, by the persons exercising parental authority) giving their permission for the described use of their image, voice or private element and, on request, submit a copy of the permission to the contracting authority. The contractor must take the necessary measures to obtain such consent in accordance with the applicable legal provisions.\n\n## II.13.9. Copyright notice for pre-existing rights\n\nWhen the contractor retains pre-existing rights on parts of the results , reference must be inserted to that effect when the result is used as set out in Article I.10.1, with the following disclaimer: '© - year European Union. All rights reserved. Certain parts are licensed under conditions to the EU', or with any other equivalent disclaimer as the contracting authority may consider best appropriate, or as the parties may agree on a case-by-case basis. This does not apply where inserting such reference would be impossible, notably for practical reasons .\n\n## II.13.10. Visibility of Union funding and disclaimer\n\nWhen making use of the results , the contractor must declare that they have been produced under a contract with the Union and that the opinions expressed are those of the contractor only and do not represent the contracting authority's official position. The contracting authority may waive this obligation in writing or provide the text of the disclaimer.\n\n## II.14. FORCE MAJEURE\n\nII.14.1 If a party is affected by force majeure , it must immediately notify the other party, stating the nature of the circumstances, their likely duration and foreseeable effects.\n\n- II.14.2 A party is not liable for any delay or failure to perform its obligations under the FWC if that\n\ndelay or failure is a result of force majeure . If the contractor is unable to fulfil its contractual obligations owing to force majeure , it has the right to remuneration only for the services actually provided.\n\nII.14.3 The parties must take all necessary measures to limit any damage due to force majeure .\n\n## II.15. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES\n\n## II.15.1. Delay in delivery\n\nIf the contractor fails to perform its contractual obligations within the applicable time limits set out in this FWC, the contracting authority may claim liquidated damages for each day of delay using the following formula:\n\n0.3 x ( V/d )\n\nwhere:\n\nV is the price of the relevant purchase or deliverable or result ;\n\n25", + "recall": 0.9790794979079498, + "true_md": "Contract no: [complete] \n\nIf moral rights on parts of the results protected by copyright may exist, the contractor must obtain the consent of creators regarding the granting or waiver of the relevant moral rights in accordance with the applicable legal provisions and be ready to provide documentary evidence upon request.\n\nIf natural persons appear in a result or their voice or any other private element is recorded in a recognisable manner, the contractor must obtain a statement by these persons (or, in the case of minors, by the persons exercising parental authority) giving their permission for the described use of their image, voice or private element and, on request, submit a copy of the permission to the contracting authority. The contractor must take the necessary measures to obtain such consent in accordance with the applicable legal provisions.\n\nWhen the contractor retains pre-existing rights on parts of the results , reference must be inserted to that effect when the result is used as set out in Article I.10.1, with the following disclaimer: ‘© — year — European Union. All rights reserved. Certain parts are licensed under conditions to the EU’, or with any other equivalent disclaimer as the contracting authority may consider best appropriate, or as the parties may agree on a case-by-case basis. This does not apply where inserting such reference would be impossible, notably for practical reasons . \n\nWhen making use of the results , the contractor must declare that they have been produced under a contract with the Union and that the opinions expressed are those of the contractor only and do not represent the contracting authority’s official position. The contracting authority may waive this obligation in writing or provide the text of the disclaimer.\n\nIf the contractor fails to perform its contractual obligations within the applicable time limits set out in this FWC, the contracting authority may claim liquidated damages for each day of delay using the following formula:\n\n0.3 x ( V/d )\n\nwhere:\n\nV is the price of the relevant purchase or deliverable or result ; \n\n25\n\n## II.13.8. Image rights and sound recordings\n\n## II.13.9. Copyright notice for pre-existing rights\n\n## II.13.10. Visibility of Union funding and disclaimer\n\n## II.14. FORCE MAJEURE\n\n## II.15. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES\n\n## II.15.1. Delay in delivery\n\n- II.14.1 If a party is affected by force majeure , it must immediately notify the other party, stating the nature of the circumstances, their likely duration and foreseeable effects. \n\n- II.14.2 A party is not liable for any delay or failure to perform its obligations under the FWC if that delay or failure is a result of force majeure . If the contractor is unable to fulfil its contractual obligations owing to force majeure , it has the right to remuneration only for the services actually provided. \n\n- II.14.3 The parties must take all necessary measures to limit any damage due to force majeure . \n\nEC - FWC services Dec 2018" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9727515411764275, + "doc_id": "a9a7ce2566572f7d12657c87cd750c266cfb7dfdd588c33ee938b00a84d2c894", + "edit_distance": 0.10619469026548672, + "f1_score": 0.9906542056074765, + "meteor": 0.9679984437202664, + "precision": 0.99375, + "pred_md": "## TOTAL\n\nAnnexes par ordre de priorité (le cas échéant):\n\nInformations complémentaires (le cas échéant):\n\nLieu de livraison (le cas échéant):\n\nDate de livraison (le cas échéant):\n\nDate de début et date de fin (le cas échéant):\n\nLes factures mentionnent le numéro du présent bon de commande et doivent être envoyées à l'adresse suivante:\n\nConseil de l'Union européenne, Unité Comptabilité, rue de la Loi 175, 1048-Bruxelles, au moyen du module \"facturation électronique\" de la plateforme e-PRIOR 10 .\n\nSauf indication contraire, la facture n'est recevable que si le contractant renvoie une copie signée du présent bon de commande.\n\nTaxe sur la valeur ajoutée : la fourniture de biens et la prestation de services destinés à l'Union européenne pour son usage officiel sont exonérées de la taxe sur la valeur ajoutée (TVA). La mention suivante doit figurer sur la facture envoyée par le contractant à l'Union européenne:\n\nPour la Belgique: \"Exonération de la TVA - article 42,§3, 3° du Code de la TVA\" (lorsque le montant atteint 124 EUR par transaction hors taxe sur la valeur ajoutée). En Belgique, l'utilisation du présent bon de commande vaut présentation d'une demande d'exonération de la TVA n° 450.\n\nPour les autres États membres de l'UE: \"Exonération de la TVA - Union européenne - article 151 de la directive 2006/112/CE relative à la taxe sur la valeur ajoutée\".\n\nEn signant ci-après, les deux parties déclarent accepter l'ensemble du présent bon de commande ainsi que le contenu et l'ordre de priorité des annexes énumérées ci-dessus, qui font partie intégrante du présent bon de commande.\n\nSignature du Secrétariat général\n\nNom:\n\nSignature du contractant\n\nNom:\n\nNuméro du bon de commande:\n\n10 Pour la soumission de factures électroniques voir http://www.consilium.europa.eu/media/29530/eprior-supplier-portal-for-e-invoicing-2017.pdf\n\n36\n\nANNEXE I\n\nFR", + "recall": 0.9875776397515528, + "true_md": "36 10 Pour la soumission de factures électroniques voir http://www.consilium.europa.eu/media/29530/e- prior-supplier-portal-for-e-invoicing-2017.pdf \n\n36 FR\n\nANNEXE I \n\n## TOTAL\n\nAnnexes par ordre de priorité (le cas échéant): \n\nInformations complémentaires (le cas échéant):\n\nLieu de livraison (le cas échéant): \n\nDate de livraison (le cas échéant):\n\nDate de début et date de fin (le cas échéant): \n\nLes factures mentionnent le numéro du présent bon de commande et doivent être envoyées à l'adresse suivante: \n\nConseil de l'Union européenne, Unité Comptabilité, rue de la Loi 175, 1048-Bruxelles, au moyen du module \"facturation électronique\" de la plateforme e-PRIOR 10 . \n\nSauf indication contraire, la facture n'est recevable que si le contractant renvoie une copie signée du présent bon de commande. \n\nTaxe sur la valeur ajoutée : la fourniture de biens et la prestation de services destinés à l'Union européenne pour son usage officiel sont exonérées de la taxe sur la valeur ajoutée (TVA). La mention suivante doit figurer sur la facture envoyée par le contractant à l'Union européenne: \n\nPour la Belgique: \"Exonération de la TVA - article 42,§3, 3° du Code de la TVA\" (lorsque le montant atteint 124 EUR par transaction hors taxe sur la valeur ajoutée). En Belgique, l'utilisation du présent bon de commande vaut présentation d'une demande d'exonération de la TVA n° 450. \n\nPour les autres États membres de l'UE: \"Exonération de la TVA - Union européenne - article 151 de la directive 2006/112/CE relative à la taxe sur la valeur ajoutée\". \n\nEn signant ci-après, les deux parties déclarent accepter l'ensemble du présent bon de commande ainsi que le contenu et l'ordre de priorité des annexes énumérées ci-dessus, qui font partie intégrante du présent bon de commande. \n\nSignature du Secrétariat général \n\nNom: \n\nNuméro du bon de commande: \n\nNom: \n\nSignature du contractant" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.005399687996333717, + "doc_id": "64d2584276761a2d2b4060fbd39d10fbb674e4405def325d3d23bbb147d2914e", + "edit_distance": 0.9568345323741008, + "f1_score": 0.18965517241379312, + "meteor": 0.28002662636729997, + "precision": 0.10476190476190476, + "pred_md": "Contract number: [ complete ]\n\nContract conditions of December 2015\n\n| II.17. Termination of the contract................................................................................... 25 |\n|------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|\n| II.17.1. Grounds for termination by the contracting authority ................................... 25 |\n| II.17.2. Grounds for termination by the contractor .................................................... 25 |\n| II.17.3. Procedure for termination .............................................................................. 26 |\n| II.17.4. Effects of termination .................................................................................... 26 |\n| II.18. Invoices, value added tax and e-invoicing ............................................................ 27 |\n| II.18.1. Invoices and value added tax ......................................................................... 27 |\n| II.18.2. E-invoicing .................................................................................................... 27 |\n| II.19. Price revision ........................................................................................................ 27 |\n| II.20. payments and guaranties ....................................................................................... 28 |\n| II.20.1. Date of payment ............................................................................................. 28 |\n| II.20.2. Currency ........................................................................................................ 28 |\n| II.20.3. Conversion ..................................................................................................... 28 |\n| II.20.4. Costs of transfer ............................................................................................. 28 |\n| II.20.5. Pre-financing, performance and money retention guarantees ....................... 28 |\n| II.20.6. Interim payments and payment of the balance .............................................. 29 |\n| II.20.7. Suspension of the time allowed for payment ................................................. 29 |\n| II.20.8. Interest on late payment ................................................................................. 30 |\n| II.21. Recovery ............................................................................................................... 30 |\n| II.22. Checks and audits ................................................................................................. 31 |\n\n5", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Contract number: [ complete ] \n\nContract conditions of December 2015 \n\n5" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9145954928779003, + "doc_id": "5fd0f9160064bd0b5873822ad534f75ee031703ff5e6f545b9b3020e8964cef4", + "edit_distance": 0.7962962962962963, + "f1_score": 0.9786324786324787, + "meteor": 0.8106496054264225, + "precision": 0.9786324786324786, + "pred_md": "General Administrative and Submission Clauses\n\n-  An image of the signature copy-pasted on the document is not acceptable, the signature should be made by hand (the document should be printed, hand signed and then scanned to pdf or image format).\n- Ad ii) a copy of the corporate registration document (e.g. extract from the national register of companies, Official Gazette, etc.) or other proof of establishment (formation) issued by a national authority shall also be attached the VIF.\n- N.B.: Only applicable if the registration document supplied by the Tenderer as a proof of its legal capacity is not showing the below listed information (see point 6.4 below in conjunction with point 1.7.3 of the 'Terms of Reference').\n\nThe registration document shall, as a minimum, include the following information:\n\n-  official registered name;\n-  official registered address (seat/Head Office);\n-  alternative addresses, if any;\n-  name and title of legal representative(s);\n-  registration number;\n-  VAT number (if available on the same document).\n\n## Format:\n\n-  Image file or pdf, as a scan of the document issued by the relevant registration authority.\n\nPlease note that the provision of the additional administrative documentation is necessary in order to prepare the contract as well as to authorise payments.\n\n## 10. Privacy Statement\n\nDuring a Public Procurement procedure the EIB may get access to certain personal data (information related to an identified or identifiable natural person). EIB's Privacy statement, available at https://www.eib.org/en/privacy/procurement.htm, provides information about the collection and use of personal data in the context of procurement procedures.\n\n## 11. Miscellaneous\n\nWhere the 'Terms of Reference' refers to 'Tenderer' it shall be considered as 'Service Provider' after signature of the service contracts and as 'Contractor' after signature of the works contracts.\n\nProduct names and trademarks : whenever the technical specifications mention a specific product name or trademark and a sufficiently precise and fully intelligible description is not possible, such mention should be understood as referring to that product or its equivalent, unless otherwise provided for in the Terms of Reference.\n\nOnce the contract has entered into force, the prices indicated in the financial proposal of the successful Tenderer may only be revised under the conditions laid down in the contract.\n\nPlease be aware that after the UK's withdrawal from the EU, the rules of access to EU procurement procedures of economic operators established in third countries will apply to candidates or tenderers\n\nLast updated: June 2020\n\nPage 17 of 21", + "recall": 0.9786324786324786, + "true_md": "General Administrative and Submission Clauses\n\n-  An image of the signature copy-pasted on the document is not acceptable, the signature should be made by hand (the document should be printed, hand signed and then scanned to pdf or image format). \n\n-  official registered name; \n\n-  official registered address (seat/Head Office); \n\n-  alternative addresses, if any; \n\n-  name and title of legal representative(s); \n\n-  registration number; \n\n-  VAT number (if available on the same document). \n\n-  Image file or pdf, as a scan of the document issued by the relevant registration authority. \n\n## 10. Privacy Statement\n\n## 11. Miscellaneous\n\nLast updated: June 2020\n\nPage 17 of 21 \n\nPlease be aware that after the UK's withdrawal from the EU, the rules of access to EU procurement procedures of economic operators established in third countries will apply to candidates or tenderers \n\nOnce the contract has entered into force, the prices indicated in the financial proposal of the successful Tenderer may only be revised under the conditions laid down in the contract.\n\nProduct names and trademarks : whenever the technical specifications mention a specific product name or trademark and a sufficiently precise and fully intelligible description is not possible, such mention should be understood as referring to that product or its equivalent, unless otherwise provided for in the Terms of Reference. \n\nWhere the `Terms of Reference` refers to ‘Tenderer’ it shall be considered as ‘Service Provider’ after signature of the service contracts and as ‘Contractor’ after signature of the works contracts. \n\nDuring a Public Procurement procedure the EIB may get access to certain personal data (information related to an identified or identifiable natural person). EIB’s Privacy statement, available at https://www.eib.org/en/privacy/procurement.htm, provides information about the collection and use of personal data in the context of procurement procedures.\n\nPlease note that the provision of the additional administrative documentation is necessary in order to prepare the contract as well as to authorise payments. \n\nFormat:\n\nThe registration document shall, as a minimum, include the following information: \n\nAd ii) a copy of the corporate registration document (e.g. extract from the national register of companies, Official Gazette, etc.) or other proof of establishment (formation) issued by a national authority shall also be attached the VIF.\n\nN.B.: Only applicable if the registration document supplied by the Tenderer as a proof of its legal capacity is not showing the below listed information (see point 6.4 below in conjunction with point 1.7.3 of the ‘Terms of Reference’)." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9460610901906888, + "doc_id": "993ab80630c4ba8f05eb8ab6360de5ddb7068aede8198ad6349f521b79c69253", + "edit_distance": 0.8894348894348895, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.8813170318703102, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Contract no: [complete]\n\n## I. SPECIAL CONDITIONS\n\n## I.1. ORDER OF PRIORITY OF PROVISIONS\n\nIf there is any conflict between different provisions in this FWC, the following rules must be applied:\n\n- (a) The provisions set out in the special conditions take precedence over those in the other parts of the FWC.\n- (b) The provisions set out in the general conditions take precedence over those in the order form and specific contract (Annex III)\n- (c) The provisions set out in the order form and specific contract (Annex III) take precedence over those in the other annexes.\n- (d) The provisions set out in the tender specifications (Annex I) take precedence over those in the tender (Annex II).\n- (e) The provisions set out in the FWC take precedence over those in the specific contracts .\n\nAny reference to specific contracts applies also to order forms .\n\n## I.2. SUBJECT MATTER\n\nThe subject matter of the FWC is [ short description of subject ].\n\n## I.3. ENTRY INTO FORCE AND DURATION OF THE FWC\n\n- I.3.1 The FWC enters into force on the date on which the last party signs it.\n- I.3.2 The implementation of the FWC cannot start before its entry into force.\n- I.3.3 The FWC is concluded for a period of twelve months with effect from the date of its entry into force.\n- I.3.4 The parties must sign any specific contract before the FWC expires.\n\nThe FWC continues to apply to such specific contracts after its expiry. The services relating to such specific contracts must be performed no later than six months after the expiry of the FWC.\n\n## I.3.5 Renewal of the FWC\n\nThe FWC is renewed automatically three times for twelve months each, unless one of the parties receives formal notification to the contrary at least three months before the end of the ongoing duration. Renewal does not change or postpone any existing obligations.\n\n## I.4. APPOINTMENT OF THE CONTRACTOR AND IMPLEMENTATION OF THE FWC\n\n## I.4.1. Appointment of the contractor\n\nThe contracting authority appoints the contractor for a single FWC.\n\nEC - FWC services Dec 2018\n\n4", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Contract no: [complete] \n\nEC - FWC services Dec 2018 \n\nIf there is any conflict between different provisions in this FWC, the following rules must be applied: \n\nAny reference to specific contracts applies also to order forms .\n\nThe subject matter of the FWC is [ short description of subject ]. \n\nThe FWC continues to apply to such specific contracts after its expiry. The services relating to such specific contracts must be performed no later than six months after the expiry of the FWC.\n\nThe FWC is renewed automatically three times for twelve months each, unless one of the parties receives formal notification to the contrary at least three months before the end of the ongoing duration. Renewal does not change or postpone any existing obligations. \n\nThe contracting authority appoints the contractor for a single FWC. \n\n4\n\n## I.4. APPOINTMENT OF THE CONTRACTOR AND IMPLEMENTATION OF THE FWC\n\n## I.4.1. Appointment of the contractor\n\n## I.3.5 Renewal of the FWC\n\n## I.3. ENTRY INTO FORCE AND DURATION OF THE FWC\n\n## I.2. SUBJECT MATTER\n\n## I.1. ORDER OF PRIORITY OF PROVISIONS\n\n## I. SPECIAL CONDITIONS\n\n- (a) The provisions set out in the special conditions take precedence over those in the other parts of the FWC.\n\n- (b) The provisions set out in the general conditions take precedence over those in the order form and specific contract (Annex III) \n\n- (c) The provisions set out in the order form and specific contract (Annex III) take precedence over those in the other annexes.\n\n- (d) The provisions set out in the tender specifications (Annex I) take precedence over those in the tender (Annex II). \n\n- (e) The provisions set out in the FWC take precedence over those in the specific contracts .\n\n- I.3.1 The FWC enters into force on the date on which the last party signs it. \n\n- I.3.2 The implementation of the FWC cannot start before its entry into force.\n\n- I.3.3 The FWC is concluded for a period of twelve months with effect from the date of its entry into force.\n\n- I.3.4 The parties must sign any specific contract before the FWC expires." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.938806142054137, + "doc_id": "15c80231fc09092c422a1e2672aca2bc8163ddc64cf45df9cf48861140daba20", + "edit_distance": 0.19908466819221968, + "f1_score": 0.9773299748110832, + "meteor": 0.9785209132226039, + "precision": 0.9847715736040609, + "pred_md": "Secrétariat général\n\n[insérer le nom de l'unité et le nom de l'ordonnateur compétent]\n\nRue de la Loi 175\n\n1048 Bruxelles, Belgique\n\nCourriel: [ boîte fonctionnelle ]\n\nContractant (ou chef de file dans le cas d'une offre conjointe):\n\n[ Nom complet ]\n\n[ Fonction ]\n\n[ Dénomination sociale ]\n\n[ Adresse officielle complète ]\n\nCourriel: [ compléter\n\n]\n\nLes parties doivent s'informer mutuellement de tout changement de ces coordonnées.\n\n## I.9 TRAITEMENT DES DONNÉES À CARACTÈRE PERSONNEL\n\n## I.9.1 Traitement des données à caractère personnel par le pouvoir adjudicateur\n\nAux fins de l'article II.9.1,\n\n- a) le responsable du traitement des données sont:\n- · le Directeur de la Prévention et de la Sécurité ;\n- b) l'avis relatif à la protection des données est disponible à l'adresse suivante:\n\nhttps://www.consilium.europa.eu/en/general-secretariat/corporate-policies/data-protection/search/.\n\n## I.9.2 Traitement des données à caractère personnel par le contractant\n\nAux fins de l'article II.9.2,\n\n- a) l'objet et la finalité du traitement des données à caractère personnel par le contractant sont l'enregistrement et la gestion des demandes d'interventions dans un système de gestion informatisé;\n- b) la localisation des données à caractère personnel traitées par le contractant et l'accès à ces données doivent répondre aux exigences suivantes:\n- i. les données à caractère personnel doivent être traitées exclusivement sur le territoire de l'Union européenne et de l'Espace économique européen et ne quitteront pas ce territoire;\n- ii. les données doivent être conservées exclusivement dans des centres de données situés sur le territoire de l'Union européenne et de l'Espace économique européen;\n- iii. aucun accès n'est accordé à ces données en dehors de l'Union européenne et de l'Espace économique européen;\n- iv. le contractant n'est pas autorisé à modifier le lieu du traitement des données sans l'autorisation écrite préalable du pouvoir adjudicateur;\n- v. tout transfert de données à caractère personnel au titre du CC vers des pays tiers ou des organisations internationales doit satisfaire pleinement aux exigences du chapitre V du règlement (UE) 2018/1725 . 3\n\n3 Règlement (UE) 2018/1725 du Parlement européen et du Conseil du 23 octobre 2018 relatif à la protection des personnes physiques à l'égard du traitement des données à caractère personnel par les institutions, organes et organismes de l'Union et à la libre circulation de ces données, et abrogeant le règlement (CE) n° 45/2001 et la décision n° 1247/2002/CE, JO L 295 du 21.11.2018, p. 39.\n\n8\n\nFR", + "recall": 0.97, + "true_md": "Secrétariat général [insérer le nom de l'unité et le nom de l'ordonnateur compétent] Rue de la Loi 175 1048 Bruxelles, Belgique Courriel: [ boîte fonctionnelle ] \n\nContractant (ou chef de file dans le cas d'une offre conjointe): \n\n[ Nom complet ] [ Fonction ] [ Dénomination sociale ] [ Adresse officielle complète ] Courriel: [ compléter ] \n\nLes parties doivent s'informer mutuellement de tout changement de ces coordonnées. \n\n## I.9 TRAITEMENT DES DONNÉES À CARACTÈRE PERSONNEL\n\n## I.9.1 Traitement des données à caractère personnel par le pouvoir adjudicateur\n\nAux fins de l'article II.9.1, \n\n- a) le responsable du traitement des données sont: • le Directeur de la Prévention et de la Sécurité ; \n\n- b) l'avis relatif à la protection des données est disponible à l'adresse suivante: https://www.consilium.europa.eu/en/general-secretariat/corporate-policies/data-protection/search/. \n\n## I.9.2 Traitement des données à caractère personnel par le contractant\n\nAux fins de l'article II.9.2, \n\na) l'objet et la finalité du traitement des données à caractère personnel par le contractant sont l’enregistrement et la gestion des demandes d’interventions dans un système de gestion informatisé; \n\nb) la localisation des données à caractère personnel traitées par le contractant et l'accès à ces données doivent répondre aux exigences suivantes: \n\ni. les données à caractère personnel doivent être traitées exclusivement sur le territoire de l'Union européenne et de l'Espace économique européen et ne quitteront pas ce territoire; \n\nii. les données doivent être conservées exclusivement dans des centres de données situés sur le territoire de l'Union européenne et de l'Espace économique européen; \n\niii. aucun accès n'est accordé à ces données en dehors de l'Union européenne et de l'Espace économique européen; \n\niv. le contractant n'est pas autorisé à modifier le lieu du traitement des données sans l'autorisation écrite préalable du pouvoir adjudicateur;\n\n8 3 Règlement (UE) 2018/1725 du Parlement européen et du Conseil du 23 octobre 2018 relatif à la protection des personnes physiques à l'égard du traitement des données à caractère personnel par les institutions, organes et organismes de l'Union et à la libre circulation de ces données, et abrogeant le règlement (CE) n° 45/2001 et la décision n° 1247/2002/CE, JO L 295 du 21.11.2018, p. 39 . \n\n8 FR\n\nv. tout transfert de données à caractère personnel au titre du CC vers des pays tiers ou des organisations internationales doit satisfaire pleinement aux exigences du chapitre V du règlement (UE) 2018/1725 3 ." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7786372145196564, + "doc_id": "6081617bcbcaf11aaca1bcc3715eec2f647a834e8f20123d713fea6be80a7a8f", + "edit_distance": 0.21711568938193343, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.677514050640465, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Contract number: [ complete ]\n\nContract conditions of December 2015\n\nThe contractor must bear all costs and risks involved in delivering the supplies to the place of delivery.\n\n## (c) Consignment note\n\nEach delivery must be accompanied by a consignment note in duplicate, duly signed and dated by the contractor or its carrier, giving the contract number and particulars of the supplies delivered. One copy of the consignment note must be countersigned by the contracting authority and returned to the contractor or to its carrier.\n\n## II.4.9 Certificate of conformity\n\nSignature of the consignment note by the contracting authority, as provided for in point (c) of Article II.4.10 is simply an acknowledgment of the fact that that the delivery took place and in no way implies conformity of the supplies with the contract.\n\nConformity of the supplies delivered must be evidenced by the signature of a certificate to this effect by the contracting authority no later than one month after the date of delivery, unless otherwise specified in the special conditions or in the tender specifications.\n\nConformity must be declared only where the conditions laid down in the contract are satisfied and the supplies conform to the tender specifications.\n\n- If, for reasons attributable to the contractor, the contracting authority is unable to accept the supplies, the contractor must be notified in writing at the latest by the deadline for conformity.\n\n## II.4.10 Conformity of the supplies delivered with the contract\n\nThe supplies delivered by the contractor to the contracting authority must be in conformity in quantity, quality, price and packaging with the contract.\n\nThe supplies delivered must:\n\n- (a) correspond to the description given in the tender specifications and possess the characteristics of the supplies provided by the contractor to the contracting authority as a sample or model;\n- (b) be fit for any specific purpose required of them by the contracting authority and made known to the contractor at the time of conclusion of this contract and accepted by the contractor;\n- (c) be fit for the purposes for which supplies of the same type are normally used;\n- (d) demonstrate the high quality standards and performance which are normal in supplies of the same type and which the contracting authority can reasonably expect, given the nature of the supplies and taking into account any public statements on the specific characteristics of the supplies made by the contractor, the producer or its representative, particularly in advertising or on labelling; in accordance with the state of the art in the industry and the provisions of this contract, in particular the tender specifications and the terms of its tender.\n- (e) be packaged according to the usual method for supplies of the same type or, failing this, in a way designed to preserve and protect them.\n\n## II.4.11 Remedy\n\n14", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Contract number: [ complete ] \n\nContract conditions of December 2015 \n\nThe contractor must bear all costs and risks involved in delivering the supplies to the place of delivery. \n\n- (c) Consignment note \n\n## II.4.9 Certificate of conformity\n\n## II.4.11 Remedy\n\nEach delivery must be accompanied by a consignment note in duplicate, duly signed and dated by the contractor or its carrier, giving the contract number and particulars of the supplies delivered. One copy of the consignment note must be countersigned by the contracting authority and returned to the contractor or to its carrier. \n\nSignature of the consignment note by the contracting authority, as provided for in point (c) of Article II.4.10 is simply an acknowledgment of the fact that that the delivery took place and in no way implies conformity of the supplies with the contract. \n\nConformity of the supplies delivered must be evidenced by the signature of a certificate to this effect by the contracting authority no later than one month after the date of delivery, unless otherwise specified in the special conditions or in the tender specifications. \n\nConformity must be declared only where the conditions laid down in the contract are satisfied and the supplies conform to the tender specifications. \n\nIf, for reasons attributable to the contractor, the contracting authority is unable to accept the supplies, the contractor must be notified in writing at the latest by the deadline for conformity. \n\n## II.4.10 Conformity of the supplies delivered with the contract\n\nThe supplies delivered by the contractor to the contracting authority must be in conformity in quantity, quality, price and packaging with the contract. \n\nThe supplies delivered must: \n\n- (a) correspond to the description given in the tender specifications and possess the characteristics of the supplies provided by the contractor to the contracting authority as a sample or model; (b) be fit for any specific purpose required of them by the contracting authority and \n\n- authority as a sample or model; (b) be fit for any specific purpose required of them by the contracting authority and made known to the contractor at the time of conclusion of this contract and accepted by the contractor; (c) be fit for the purposes for which supplies of the same type are normally used; \n\n- accepted by the contractor; (c) be fit for the purposes for which supplies of the same type are normally used; (d) demonstrate the high quality standards and performance which are normal in \n\n- (c) be fit for the purposes for which supplies of the same type are normally used; (d) demonstrate the high quality standards and performance which are normal in supplies of the same type and which the contracting authority can reasonably expect, given the nature of the supplies and taking into account any public statements on the specific characteristics of the supplies made by the contractor, the producer or its representative, particularly in advertising or on labelling; in accordance with the state of the art in the industry and the provisions of this contract, in particular the tender specifications and the terms of its tender. (e) be packaged according to the usual method for supplies of the same type or, failing \n\n- contract, in particular the tender specifications and the terms of its tender. (e) be packaged according to the usual method for supplies of the same type or, failing this, in a way designed to preserve and protect them. \n\n14" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "515a61af8b663effd1120bcc1bc3b0a684234194a51ac57d957a8f71c65a4f06", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9996243425995492, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## EUOSHA/2021/OP/F/SE/0142\n\n## Links that may be useful\n\n3", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## EUOSHA/2021/OP/F/SE/0142\n\n## Links that may be useful\n\n3" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9894645512204937, + "doc_id": "9e2a98079eb120e2514a4e8bb6e1e70b65e881604dc805f9dbf6f46743c98b82", + "edit_distance": 0.04831932773109244, + "f1_score": 0.9868995633187772, + "meteor": 0.9919062537148863, + "precision": 0.9868995633187773, + "pred_md": "- 5.1.2. Le chantier est signalé, isolé et protégé de manière à ce que les personnes qui y sont étrangères ne puissent en principe pas y accéder. Il est interdit de remplacer un cylindre.\n- 5.1.3 L'entreprise veille à ce que l'aménagement du chantier ne mette pas en péril l'évacuation des zones adjacentes. En cas de doute, il convient de demander l'avis du CSS ou du gestionnaire de projet du CUE et du UP.\n- 5.1.4 Au besoin, l'entreprise installe les moyens nécessaires de protection contre l'incendie. L'emplacement, la nature et le nombre de ces dispositifs sont déterminés en concertation avec l'UP.\n- 5.1.5. Au besoin, une signalisation temporaire est mise en place afin de permettre une évacuation aisée du chantier. Tous les risques résiduels sont dûment signalés.\n- 5.1.6. L'utilisation des installations sanitaires, des vestiaires, des réfectoires, des bureaux du chantier et des aires de stockage se fait en concertation avec le gestionnaire de projet du CUE et/ou l'UP. L'entreprise est tenue d'entretenir les locaux qui lui sont attribués. Les repas ne peuvent être pris qu'aux endroits prévus à cet effet.\n- 5.1.7 L'utilisation des installations du chantier doit se faire en concertation entre les différentes entreprises présentes. Les procédures qui mentionnent les mesures de sécurité à prendre sont transmises par écrit aux différents utilisateurs et signées pour réception.\n\n## 5.2 Ordre et propreté\n\n- 5.2.1 Chaque entreprise doit nettoyer au moins une fois par jour ses postes de travail et évacuer les déchets. Le CSS, le gestionnaire de projet du CUE ou l'UP peut, sans avertissement préalable, faire débarrasser et nettoyer par des tiers les postes de travail, aux frais de l'entreprise qui ne remplit pas ses obligations.\n- 5.2.2 Les chemins, passages et escaliers doivent en tout temps demeurer au maximum libres d'obstacles et d'entraves. Le passage ne peut être entravé par des câbles ou des tubes. Si les câbles ou tubes croisent le passage, ils doivent être rendus bien visibles et protégés.\n- 5.2.3 Afin d'éviter tout risque de glissade, de trébuchage ou autres, les matériaux doivent être entreposés de manière ordonnée et stable dans les zones prévues, en concertation avec le CSS, le gestionnaire de projet du CUE et l'UP; ils doivent être protégés contre les agents atmosphériques.\n- 5.2.4 Les moyens de secours et les moyens de lutte contre l'incendie doivent toujours être libres d'accès.\n- 5.2.5 Au cas où des passages de paroi, de mur ou de cloison coupe-feu (RF) sont effectués par des câbles, des tubes ou des conduites, il est impératif d'assurer l'obturation RF.\n\n73\n\nANNEX VII\n\nFR", + "recall": 0.9868995633187773, + "true_md": "- 5.1.2.Le chantier est signalé, isolé et protégé de manière à ce que les personnes qui y sont étrangères ne puissent en principe pas y accéder. Il est interdit de remplacer un cylindre. \n\n- 5.1.3 L'entreprise veille à ce que l'aménagement du chantier ne mette pas en péril l'évacuation des zones adjacentes. En cas de doute, il convient de demander l'avis du CSS ou du gestionnaire de projet du CUE et du UP. \n\n- 5.1.4 Au besoin, l'entreprise installe les moyens nécessaires de protection contre l'incendie. L'emplacement, la nature et le nombre de ces dispositifs sont déterminés en concertation avec l'UP. \n\n- 5.1.5.Au besoin, une signalisation temporaire est mise en place afin de permettre une évacuation aisée du chantier. Tous les risques résiduels sont dûment signalés. \n\n- 5.1.6.L'utilisation des installations sanitaires, des vestiaires, des réfectoires, des bureaux du chantier et des aires de stockage se fait en concertation avec le gestionnaire de projet du CUE et/ou l'UP. L'entreprise est tenue d'entretenir les locaux qui lui sont attribués. Les repas ne peuvent être pris qu'aux endroits prévus à cet effet. \n\n- 5.1.7 L'utilisation des installations du chantier doit se faire en concertation entre les différentes entreprises présentes. Les procédures qui mentionnent les mesures de sécurité à prendre sont transmises par écrit aux différents utilisateurs et signées pour réception. \n\n- 5.2.1 Chaque entreprise doit nettoyer au moins une fois par jour ses postes de travail et évacuer les déchets. Le CSS, le gestionnaire de projet du CUE ou l'UP peut, sans avertissement préalable, faire débarrasser et nettoyer par des tiers les postes de travail, aux frais de l'entreprise qui ne remplit pas ses obligations. \n\n- 5.2.2 Les chemins, passages et escaliers doivent en tout temps demeurer au maximum libres d'obstacles et d'entraves. Le passage ne peut être entravé par des câbles ou des tubes. Si les câbles ou tubes croisent le passage, ils doivent être rendus bien visibles et protégés. \n\n- 5.2.3 Afin d'éviter tout risque de glissade, de trébuchage ou autres, les matériaux doivent être entreposés de manière ordonnée et stable dans les zones prévues, en concertation avec le CSS, le gestionnaire de projet du CUE et l'UP; ils doivent être protégés contre les agents atmosphériques. \n\n- 5.2.4 Les moyens de secours et les moyens de lutte contre l'incendie doivent toujours être libres d'accès. \n\n- 5.2.5 Au cas où des passages de paroi, de mur ou de cloison coupe-feu (RF) sont effectués par des câbles, des tubes ou des conduites, il est impératif d'assurer l'obturation RF. \n\n## 5.2 Ordre et propreté\n\n73 FR \n\nANNEX VII" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.807926679200523, + "doc_id": "a115a4c1424fce2abc68c3077a3e79a98d44e30170d417337b440a871632bf82", + "edit_distance": 0.4672131147540984, + "f1_score": 0.9831460674157302, + "meteor": 0.7400974735352752, + "precision": 0.9943181818181818, + "pred_md": "General Administrative and Submission Clauses\n\nWhen the declaration(s) on honour, Group member/subcontractor declarations and/or the tender report are signed by hand, a scanned copy must be attached to the tender in e-Submission. The handsigned originals must be sent by letter at the latest on the first working day following the electronic submission of tender to EIB's postal/e-mail address indicated in point 4.4 . Only the originals of the declaration on honour, the tender report and (if applicable) the Group member/subcontractor declarations are to be sent by letter, no other documents.\n\nAfter submitting a tender, but before the deadline for receipt of tenders, a Tenderer may definitively withdraw its tender, or withdraw it and replace it with a new one 4 . In these cases the Tenderer must send a withdrawal/replacement notification, clearly specifying the call for tender reference and the e-Submission ID of the tender 5 being withdrawn/replaced. The notification must be dated, signed by the Tenderer or the Group leader in case of a joint tender and sent as follows:\n\n-  if signed using an advanced electronic signature based on a qualified certificate: by e-mail sent before the deadline for receipt of tenders to the EIB's e-mail address indicated in point 3.1 above;\n-  if signed by hand: by letter, with an advanced scanned copy by e-mail, both sent before the deadline for receipt of tenders to the EIB's postal/e-mail address indicated in points 3.1 and 3.3 .\n\nAll costs incurred for the preparation and submission of tenders are to be borne by the Tenderers and will not be reimbursed.\n\nTo submit a new version, the tenderer must create a new tender in e-Submission and include all the information and documents required in the procurement documents with the submission of a tender, even if some of them have already been included in the replaced tender. Should there be more than one tender from one and the same tenderer in e-Submission, the EIB will take only the most recently submitted\n\nThe e-Submission ID of the tender can be found on the left-hand side of the screen of the tender in e-Submission as well as in the tender\n\n4 tender into consideration for evaluation. All previous submissions will be disregarded. 5 reception confirmation.\n\nLast updated: June 2020\n\nPage 21 of 21", + "recall": 0.9722222222222222, + "true_md": "General Administrative and Submission Clauses\n\nWhen the declaration(s) on honour, Group member/subcontractor declarations and/or the tender report are signed by hand, a scanned copy must be attached to the tender in e-Submission. The hand- signed originals must be sent by letter at the latest on the first working day following the electronic submission of tender to EIB's postal/e-mail address indicated in point 4.4 . Only the originals of the declaration on honour, the tender report and (if applicable) the Group member/subcontractor declarations are to be sent by letter, no other documents. \n\nAfter submitting a tender, but before the deadline for receipt of tenders, a Tenderer may definitively withdraw its tender, or withdraw it and replace it with a new one$^{4}$. In these cases the Tenderer must send a withdrawal/replacement notification, clearly specifying the call for tender reference and the e-Submission ID of the tender$^{5}$ being withdrawn/replaced. The notification must be dated, signed by the Tenderer or the Group leader in case of a joint tender and sent as follows: \n\nAll costs incurred for the preparation and submission of tenders are to be borne by the Tenderers and will not be reimbursed. \n\n$^{4}$ To submit a new version, the tenderer must create a new tender in e-Submission and include all the information and documents required in the procurement documents with the submission of a tender, even if some of them have already been included in the replaced tender. Should there be more than one tender from one and the same tenderer in e-Submission, the EIB will take only the most recently submitted tender into consideration for evaluation. All previous submissions will be disregarded. $^{5}$ The e-Submission ID of the tender can be found on the left-hand side of the screen of the tender in e-Submission as well as in the tender \n\ntender into consideration for evaluation. All previous submissions will be disregarded. $^{5}$ The e-Submission ID of the tender can be found on the left-hand side of the screen of the tender in e-Submission as well as in the tender reception confirmation. \n\nLast updated: June 2020\n\nPage 21 of 21 \n\n- 3.1 above;  if signed by hand: by letter, with an advanced scanned copy by e-mail, both sent before the deadline for receipt of tenders to the EIB's postal/e-mail address indicated in points 3.1 and 3.3 . \n\n-  if signed using an advanced electronic signature based on a qualified certificate: by e-mail sent before the deadline for receipt of tenders to the EIB's e-mail address indicated in point 3.1 above; " + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9390915091777811, + "doc_id": "cbe8be78423cc227f6dfb42fb4a872806dc509aa9d85782bef8655971b1aaa51", + "edit_distance": 0.06845238095238096, + "f1_score": 0.9663608562691132, + "meteor": 0.9842932778652039, + "precision": 0.9634146341463414, + "pred_md": "TOTAL\n\n100\n\n60\n\n## LOT 2\n\nTenders scoring less than the minimum points awarded for a single AW, will be excluded from the rest of the assessment procedure.\n\n## GENERAL GUIDELINES\n\nThe evaluation will concentrate on the elements of the tender specifically responding to the requirements outlined in Annex 1 ' Technical Specifications ' , which the tenderer must first carefully read and understand.\n\nFurthermore, the tender will become part of the FWC. Therefore, the tender documents need to be fully comprehensive, but concise, unambiguous and easy to interpret.\n\nThe Evaluation Committee appointed by the Contracting Authority for this procedure shall assess the quality of the services offered against the announced award criteria.\n\nThe proposal of the tenderer must elaborate on all points of the award criteria. Mere repetition or reformulation of the Specifications, without providing added value, will result in a low score. The Evaluation Committee will allocate more points to reward the areas of the tender that add value beyond mere adherence to the requirements .\n\nNOTE: No CVs need to be submitted in the tender. No references to individual consultants/staff members, or to past experience of the tenderer in ECHA's contracts, will be taken into consideration by the Evaluation Committee in the assessment of the award criteria.\n\n## Tender presentation\n\nWhen presenting the information in the tender, tenderers shall follow the below guidelines:\n\n- · Tenderers are asked to provide documents that are specifically relevant to this call for tenders, and not documentation for general purpose or marketing materials. Tenders should not contain information that is irrelevant to the award criteria, or text that is too generic and not customised for this call for Tenders in a comprehensive and concise manner: failure to follow this guidance in the tender will be taken into account negatively by the Evaluation Committee in its scoring.\n\n29", + "recall": 0.9693251533742331, + "true_md": "## LOT 2\n\n## GENERAL GUIDELINES\n\n## Tender presentation\n\nTenders scoring less than the minimum points awarded for a single AW, will be excluded from the rest of the assessment procedure.\n\nThe evaluation will concentrate on the elements of the tender specifically responding to the requirements outlined in Annex 1 “ Technical Specifications ” , which the tenderer must first carefully read and understand. \n\nFurthermore, the tender will become part of the FWC. Therefore, the tender documents need to be fully comprehensive, but concise, unambiguous and easy to interpret. \n\nThe Evaluation Committee appointed by the Contracting Authority for this procedure shall assess the quality of the services offered against the announced award criteria.\n\nThe proposal of the tenderer must elaborate on all points of the award criteria. Mere repetition or reformulation of the Specifications, without providing added value, will result in a low score. The Evaluation Committee will allocate more points to reward the areas of the tender that add value beyond mere adherence to the requirements .\n\nNOTE: No CVs need to be submitted in the tender. No references to individual consultants/staff members, or to past experience of the tenderer in ECHA’s contracts, will be taken into consideration by the Evaluation Committee in the assessment of the award criteria. \n\nWhen presenting the information in the tender, tenderers shall follow the below guidelines: \n\n- • Tenderers are asked to provide documents that are specifically relevant to this call for tenders, and not documentation for general purpose or marketing materials. Tenders should not contain information that is irrelevant to the award criteria, or text that is too generic and not customised for this call for Tenders in a comprehensive and concise manner: failure to follow this guidance in the tender will be taken into account negatively by the Evaluation Committee in its scoring. \n\n29" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8743446113754916, + "doc_id": "819a5ac9bad3a21c5a7fc066425295ba82d4ab448a7abfbad77647fb4e2f974c", + "edit_distance": 0.2665441176470588, + "f1_score": 0.9813084112149534, + "meteor": 0.8849527065497368, + "precision": 0.9767441860465116, + "pred_md": "## 1. SCOPE AND DESCRIPTION OF THE PROCUREMENT\n\n## 1.1 Contracting authority: who is the buyer?\n\nThis call for tenders is inter-institutional. The following EU institutions, agencies and bodies (hereafter the participating entities) will participate as contracting authorities to the framework contract(s) resulting from this call for tenders:\n\nThe lead contracting authority is the European Chemicals Agency in Helsinki (ECHA) acting as an agent for the participating entities for the purposes of this call for tenders and the resulting framework contract(s). ECHA will publish the call for tenders, organise the evaluation, sign and manage the framework contract(s) (including any amendments thereto) on behalf of all participating entities.\n\nThe European Commission, assisted by its Directorate General Environment (DG ENV) , is a participating entity in Lot 2 . Yet, the list of participating entities may be extended to include any other institution, agency or body created on the basis of the Treaties or secondary Union law after the launch of this procedure.\n\nEach of the participating entities may avail itself of the resulting framework contract(s) autonomously by concluding specific contracts with the contractor(s). References to the Contracting Authority in these Tender Specifications and their annexes shall be understood, depending on the context, as referring to one of the following: -the European Chemicals Agency acting in its capacity as lead contracting authority; -all the participating entities, in relation to their collective rights and obligations with the contractor(s), as one of the parties to the framework contract(s); -any of the participating entities acting in its own capacity, in particular for matters related to the conclusion, execution or termination of specific contracts with the contractor(s).\n\n## 1.2 Subject: what is this call for tenders about?\n\nThe subject of this call for tenders is the establishment of a Framework Contract (FWC) for IT services that will support the development and maintenance activities of Scientific IT tools supporting the regulatory processes currently entrusted to ECHA, without preclusion of those that shall or are in the process of being entrusted to ECHA, on the basis of the following legislation:\n\n- · The REACH, CLP Regulations and the Biocides Regulation, the PIC Regulations;\n- · The POP Regu lation;\n- · Waste, Drinking Water, Tobacco, Electronics, Directives;\n\nIn addition to the above, having regard to the evolving/expanding legislative context in which ECHA's operates, new tasks entrusted to ECHA and stemming from existing or new piece of legislation, new initiatives (e.g. Drinking Water Directive), cooperation with other organisation etc. will also be supported.\n\n4", + "recall": 0.9859154929577465, + "true_md": "## 1. SCOPE AND DESCRIPTION OF THE PROCUREMENT\n\n## 1.1 Contracting authority: who is the buyer?\n\n## 1.2 Subject: what is this call for tenders about?\n\n- • The REACH, CLP Regulations and the Biocides Regulation, the PIC Regulations; • The POP Regu lation;\n\n- • The REACH, CLP Regulations and the Biocides Regulation, the PIC Regulations; • The POP Regu lation; • Waste, Drinking Water, Tobacco, Electronics, Directives;\n\n- • The POP Regu lation; • Waste, Drinking Water, Tobacco, Electronics, Directives;\n\nThis call for tenders is inter-institutional. The following EU institutions, agencies and bodies (hereafter the participating entities) will participate as contracting authorities to the framework contract(s) resulting from this call for tenders:\n\nThe lead contracting authority is the European Chemicals Agency in Helsinki (ECHA) acting as an agent for the participating entities for the purposes of this call for tenders and the resulting framework contract(s). ECHA will publish the call for tenders, organise the evaluation, sign and manage the framework contract(s) (including any amendments thereto) on behalf of all participating entities.\n\nThe European Commission, assisted by its Directorate General Environment (DG ENV) , is a participating entity in Lot 2 . Yet, the list of participating entities may be extended to include any other institution, agency or body created on the basis of the Treaties or secondary Union law after the launch of this procedure.\n\nEach of the participating entities may avail itself of the resulting framework contract(s) autonomously by concluding specific contracts with the contractor(s). References to the Contracting Authority in these Tender Specifications and their annexes shall be understood, depending on the context, as referring to one of the following: – the European Chemicals Agency acting in its capacity as lead contracting authority; – all the participating entities, in relation to their collective rights and obligations with the contractor(s), as one of the parties to the framework contract(s); – any of the participating entities acting in its own capacity, in particular for matters related to the conclusion, execution or termination of specific contracts with the contractor(s). \n\nThe subject of this call for tenders is the establishment of a Framework Contract (FWC) for IT services that will support the development and maintenance activities of Scientific IT tools supporting the regulatory processes currently entrusted to ECHA, without preclusion of those that shall or are in the process of being entrusted to ECHA, on the basis of the following legislation:\n\nIn addition to the above, having regard to the evolving/expanding legislative context in which ECHA’s operates, new tasks entrusted to ECHA and stemming from existing or new piece of legislation, new initiatives (e.g. Drinking Water Directive), cooperation with other organisation etc. will also be supported. \n\n4" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.21137790059844372, + "doc_id": "ef58dd96bb7e796e96f6fa5b5026cd6615b3950552e67d63ffd952f7668f8bd3", + "edit_distance": 0.7875, + "f1_score": 0.4050632911392405, + "meteor": 0.650361748977666, + "precision": 0.25806451612903225, + "pred_md": "Vaccine Effectiveness, Burden and Impact Studies (VEBIS) of COVID-19 and Influenza - Tender Specifications ECDC/2021/12924\n\n## Task 7: Additional studies\n\nOver the course of the project the contractor will perform additional studies which may derive from additional sources of data than those collected routinely within the ECDC Hospital network. Such studies can include studies to validate the results obtained through the routine SARI surveillance/vaccine effectiveness studies, burden of disease or impact studies.", + "recall": 0.9411764705882353, + "true_md": "Vaccine Effectiveness, Burden and Impact Studies (VEBIS) of COVID-19 and Influenza – Tender Specifications ECDC/2021/12924" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9037414865702011, + "doc_id": "ed79e2896d9d4abecf304edc4090c1d02dadd44635d8c3570eb4afcae453a5e1", + "edit_distance": 0.2789473684210526, + "f1_score": 0.9859154929577465, + "meteor": 0.9483658267106567, + "precision": 0.9905660377358491, + "pred_md": "EC - FWC services Dec 2018\n\nContract no: [complete]\n\nI.12.2 The courts of Bilbao have exclusive jurisdiction over any dispute regarding the interpretation, application or validity of the FWC.\n\n## I.13. OTHER SPECIAL CONDITIONS\n\nAll references to ' Back Office ', ' EDI message ', ' e-PRIOR ' and ' Supplier portal ' have been removed from the Special Conditions given that the European Agency for Safety and Health at Work does not yet have a similar system in place and therefore, they are not applicable.\n\nArticles II.5.3 Submission of e-documents via e-PRIOR , II.5.4 Validity and date of e-documents, II.5.5 Authorised persons in e-PRIOR and Article II.19.2 E-invoicing of the General Conditions are not applicable to the European Agency for Safety and Health at Work\n\n## SIGNATURES\n\nFor the contractor,\n\n[ Company name forename/surname/position / ]\n\nSignature: \\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\n\nDone at [ place ], [ date ]\n\nIn duplicate in English.\n\nFor the contracting authority,\n\n[ forename/surname/position ]\n\nSignature: \\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\n\nDone at [ place ], [ date ]\n\n11", + "recall": 0.9813084112149533, + "true_md": "Contract no: [complete] \n\nEC - FWC services Dec 2018 \n\n- I.12.2 The courts of Bilbao have exclusive jurisdiction over any dispute regarding the interpretation, application or validity of the FWC. \n\n## I.13. OTHER SPECIAL CONDITIONS\n\nAll references to “ Back Office ”, “ EDI message ”, “ e-PRIOR ” and “ Supplier portal ” have been removed from the Special Conditions given that the European Agency for Safety and Health at Work does not yet have a similar system in place and therefore, they are not applicable. \n\nArticles II.5.3 Submission of e-documents via e-PRIOR , II.5.4 Validity and date of e-documents, II.5.5 Authorised persons in e-PRIOR and Article II.19.2 E-invoicing of the General Conditions are not applicable to the European Agency for Safety and Health at Work \n\nFor the contracting authority, [ forename/surname/position ]\n\nSignature: \\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_ Done at [ place ], [ date ] \n\nSignature: \\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_ Done at [ place ], [ date ] In duplicate in English. \n\nFor the contractor, [ Company name / forename/surname/position ] \n\n## SIGNATURES\n\n11" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.06136701726949569, + "doc_id": "b98f035464decbcab80e442306d7a1485facef5fa011b5d3ccb207e003f1fe44", + "edit_distance": 0.9226932668329177, + "f1_score": 0.23175965665236056, + "meteor": 0.4223469376929525, + "precision": 0.135, + "pred_md": "- 5. All referenced contracts as a whole shall cover the elements listed below as indicated 16 :\n- a. Angular, NodeJS, OSGI, Java EE or equivalent Java or JavaScript technologies -minimum 2 references\n- b. Oracle Data Integrator or equivalent ETL tools -minimum 2 reference\n- c. SAP Business Objects or equivalent business intelligence tools (e.g. Power BI etc.) -minimum 2 reference\n- d. Apache Hadoop, Spark, Hive, Python or equivalent data processing technologies -minimum 2 references\n- e. Apache Kafka or equivalent stream processing technology -minimum 1 reference\n- f. ElasticSearch, LogStash, Kibana, Grafana, Splunk or equivalent -minimum 2 references\n- g. Docker, Docker Swarm, Kubernetes or equivalent -minimum 2 references\n- h. Master Data Management (bespoke or commercial solution) -minimum 2 references\n- i. Software Development Life Cycle tools supporting Agile and DevOps (e.g. Microsoft Azure DevOps, Git, chef, Nexus, Jenkins, etc.) -minimum 2 references\n- j. BPMN, UML or equivalent -minimum 2 references\n- k. RUP, Prince2 or equivalent waterfall methodology -minimum 2 references\n- l. Agile/Scaled Agile Framework minimum 2 references\n- m. Automated software testing methodology and integrated tooling (e.g. Microsoft Azure DevOps) -minimum 2 references\n- n. Implementation of ITIL practices (or equivalent) supported by the use of professional ticketing and knowledge management tools (e.g. Remedy) -minimum 2 references\n\nA consolidated assessment of the tenderer as a whole (including, if applicable, all members of a joint tender and/or other entities on which the tenderer relies to fulfil this selection criterion) will be carried out.\n\nTenderers must provide minimum 10 (and in any case no more than 20) contract references . Evidence must be provided in the form of a filled-in contract reference per project. For each contract reference the use of the templates provided in Annex 09 to this document is mandatory. Only references submitted on these forms will be considered.\n\n## Basis for assessment\n\n## Evidence\n\n16 Wherever for a bullet point a list is given and, in absence of further specifications, the ',' separating each item of the list shall be intended as 'or'.\n\n22", + "recall": 0.8181818181818182, + "true_md": "$^{16}$ Wherever for a bullet point a list is given and, in absence of further specifications, the “,” separating each item of the list shall be intended as “or”. \n\n22" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8398489518011305, + "doc_id": "62f7bbbea25f37ec6ebf490b8942acdbafc890f513cf9a288f432abcb31cbc01", + "edit_distance": 0.8389830508474576, + "f1_score": 0.995983935742972, + "meteor": 0.8705576352694977, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## SONT CONVENU(E)S\n\ndes conditions particulières , des conditions générales des contrats-cadres de services et des annexes suivantes:\n\nAnnexe I - Modèle de bon de commande\n\nAnnexe II - Spécifications techniques\n\nAnnexe III - Service Level Agreement\n\nAnnexe IV - Offre technique du contractant\n\nAnnexe V - Offre financière du contractant\n\nAnnexe VI - Accès pour le personnel du contractant\n\nAnnexe VII - Règles et consignes en matière de prévention\n\nqui font partie intégrante du présent contrat-cadre (ci-après \"le CC\").\n\n## Le CC prévoit:\n\n- 1. la procédure par laquelle le pouvoir adjudicateur peut commander des services et/ou des travaux au contractant;\n- 2. les dispositions applicables à tout bon de commande que le pouvoir adjudicateur et le contractant peuvent signer dans le cadre du CC; et\n- 3. les obligations des parties pendant et après la durée du CC.\n\nAucun document produit par le contractant (accords d'utilisation finale, conditions générales, etc.), à l'exception de son offre, n'est applicable, sauf mention contraire explicite dans les conditions particulières du CC. En toutes circonstances, en cas de contradiction entre le CC et les documents produits par le contractant, le CC fait foi, indépendamment des dispositions contraires figurant dans les documents du contractant.\n\n2\n\nFR", + "recall": 0.992, + "true_md": "## SONT CONVENU(E)S\n\ndes conditions particulières , des conditions générales des contrats-cadres de services et des annexes suivantes: \n\nqui font partie intégrante du présent contrat-cadre (ci-après \"le CC\"). \n\nLe CC prévoit: \n\nAucun document produit par le contractant (accords d'utilisation finale, conditions générales, etc.), à l'exception de son offre, n'est applicable, sauf mention contraire explicite dans les conditions particulières du CC. En toutes circonstances, en cas de contradiction entre le CC et les documents produits par le contractant, le CC fait foi, indépendamment des dispositions contraires figurant dans les documents du contractant. \n\n2 FR\n\n- Annexe I – Modèle de bon de commande \n\n- Annexe II – Spécifications techniques \n\n- Annexe III – Service Level Agreement \n\n- Annexe IV – Offre technique du contractant \n\n- Annexe V – Offre financière du contractant \n\n- Annexe VI – Accès pour le personnel du contractant \n\n- Annexe VII – Règles et consignes en matière de prévention \n\n- 1. la procédure par laquelle le pouvoir adjudicateur peut commander des services et/ou des travaux au contractant; \n\n- 2. les dispositions applicables à tout bon de commande que le pouvoir adjudicateur et le contractant peuvent signer dans le cadre du CC; et \n\n- 3. les obligations des parties pendant et après la durée du CC." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7253813148056757, + "doc_id": "c8faa6c05b82b6ee03c178aa5d9e8981de0e34b35cd25520830df4ba996800e1", + "edit_distance": 0.2644230769230769, + "f1_score": 0.9953051643192488, + "meteor": 0.8012233109317762, + "precision": 0.9906542056074766, + "pred_md": "## 8.9 Récipients sous pression\n\n- 8.9.1 La manipulation des récipients sous pression (bouteilles à gaz ou autres) doit se faire avec une grande vigilance. Les bouteilles de gaz vides doivent être évacuées de la zone de travail et des bâtiments (en attendant leur évacuation, les bouteilles doivent être entreposées en position horizontale).\n- 8.9.2 Le stockage des bouteilles pleines doit se faire verticalement et protégé contre les chutes (chaîne ou autre moyen solide) et à l'abri du soleil ou toute source de chaleur. Les connexions, les vannes et le col sont en bon état. Après avoir utilisé une bouteille de gaz, il faut vérifier si la vanne est bien fermée.\n\n-------------------------\n\n## APPENDICES:\n\n- 1. Procedures d'urgence\n- 2. Procedure d'évacuation\n- 3. Procedures d'invacuation\n- 4. Evacuation et Invacuation - Resumé\n- 5. Autorisation de travail / Permis feu\n\nANNEX VII\n\n82\n\nFR", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## 8.9 Récipients sous pression\n\n## APPENDICES:\n\n- 8.9.1 La manipulation des récipients sous pression (bouteilles à gaz ou autres) doit se faire avec une grande vigilance. Les bouteilles de gaz vides doivent être évacuées de la zone de travail et des bâtiments (en attendant leur évacuation, les bouteilles doivent être entreposées en position horizontale). \n\n- 8.9.2 Le stockage des bouteilles pleines doit se faire verticalement et protégé contre les chutes (chaîne ou autre moyen solide) et à l'abri du soleil ou toute source de chaleur. Les connexions, les vannes et le col sont en bon état. Après avoir utilisé une bouteille de gaz, il faut vérifier si la vanne est bien fermée. \n\n- 1. Procedures d'urgence 2. Procedure d'évacuation \n\n- 1. Procedures d'urgence 2. Procedure d'évacuation 3. Procedures d'invacuation \n\n- 2. Procedure d'évacuation 3. Procedures d'invacuation 4. Evacuation et Invacuation - Resumé \n\n- 3. Procedures d'invacuation 4. Evacuation et Invacuation - Resumé 5. Autorisation de travail / Permis feu \n\n- 4. Evacuation et Invacuation - Resumé 5. Autorisation de travail / Permis feu \n\n82 FR \n\nANNEX VII" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0036469968622107546, + "doc_id": "08d3c1c78cdcdf1fb34bad7033bfd469200a874329d74eaa644131edaa6eda28", + "edit_distance": 0.9751861042183623, + "f1_score": 0.20987654320987656, + "meteor": 0.33872281338869686, + "precision": 0.11724137931034483, + "pred_md": "## Table of Contents\n\nTable of Contents\n\nTable of Contents\n\n| 1. Foreword ................................................................................................................................................................................. 4 |\n|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|\n| 2. Procurement Documents .................................................................................................................................................. 4 |\n| 3. Communication between EIB and Tenderers .......................................................................................................... 4 |\n| 3.1. Requests for clarification before the submission deadline ................................................................................ 5 |\n| 3.2. Amendments to the Procurement Documents ........................................................................................................ 5 |\n| 3.3. Site visits .................................................................................................................................................................................. 5 |\n| 3.4. Physical or virtual data rooms........................................................................................................................................ 6 |\n| 3.5. Clarification following the submission of tenders ................................................................................................. 6 |\n| 3.6. Presentations ......................................................................................................................................................................... 6 |\n| 4. Content and Submission of Tenders ............................................................................................................................ 7 |\n| 4.1. Language of the tender ...................................................................................................................................................... 7 |\n| 4.2. Content of the tender ......................................................................................................................................................... 7 |\n| 4.3. Packaging the tender (in case of e-Submission, please refer to point 4.5 and Appendix I) ....................... 7 |\n| 4.4. Receipt of the tender .......................................................................................................................................................... 8 |\n| 4.4.1. Proof of dispatch for registered mail and courier service ......................................................................... 8 |\n| 4.4.2. Proof of dispatch for hand delivery .................................................................................................................... 8 |\n| 4.5. Electronic submission of tenders (e-Submission) ................................................................................................. 9 |\n| 4.6. Implications of submitting a tender ............................................................................................................................. 9 |\n| 5. Opening of Tenders .......................................................................................................................................................... 10 |\n| 5.1. Opening session ................................................................................................................................................................. 10 |\n| 5.2. Formal opening requirements ..................................................................................................................................... 10 |\n| 5.3. Opening record .................................................................................................................................................................. 10 |\n| 6. Tender evaluation ............................................................................................................................................................. 11 |\n| 6.1. Evaluation Committee..................................................................................................................................................... 11 |\n| 6.2. Tender Evaluation Session ............................................................................................................................................ 11 |\n| 6.3. Exclusion criteria and conflict of interest ............................................................................................................... 11 |\n\nLast updated: June 2020\n\nPage 2 of 21\n\nGeneral Administrative and Submission Clauses", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "General Administrative and Submission Clauses\n\n## Table of Contents\n\n## Table of Contents\n\nPage 2 of 21 \n\nLast updated: June 2020" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.97086473122757, + "doc_id": "ac0b5d83ab1be2e9d96bdd7b2adae37004c25b6d54ce5e1e4e62e998a37849a5", + "edit_distance": 0.038181818181818185, + "f1_score": 0.9862385321100917, + "meteor": 0.9837609357524596, + "precision": 0.9862385321100917, + "pred_md": "## 2.4 Ways to submit a tender: how can economic operators organise themselves to submit a tender?\n\nEconomic operators can submit a tender either as a sole tenderer or as a group of tenderers. In either case subcontracting is permitted.\n\nIn order to fulfil the selection criteria, as set out in section 3.2, the tenderer can rely on the capacities of subcontractors or other entities (that are not subcontractors).\n\nThe role of each entity involved in a tender (hereafter referred to as 'the involved entity') must be clearly specified in the e-Submission application: i) sole tenderer, ii) group leader of a group of tenderers, iii) member of a group of tenderers, or iv) subcontractor. For an entity on whose capacities the tenderer relies to fulfil the selection criteria (that is not a subcontractor), this role is defined in the commitment letter ( Annex 07 ). This applies also where the involved entities belong to the same economic group.\n\nIn particular, the tenderer must provide a detailed overview of all companies involved in the tender; clearly describing how the work will be distributed (share and exact distribution of responsibilities) and explaining from which location the different services will be delivered.\n\n## 2.4.1. Joint tenders\n\nA joint tender is a situation where a tender is submitted by a group (with or without legal form) of economic operators regardless of the link they have between them. The group as a whole is considered a tenderer 9 .\n\nAll members of the group assume joint and several liability towards the Contracting Authority for the performance of the contract as a whole.\n\nGroup members must appoint a Group Leader and a single point of contact authorised to act on their behalf in connection with the submission of the tender and all relevant questions, clarification requests, notifications, etc., that may be received during the evaluation, award and until the contact signature. The model power of attorney attached in Annex 04 'Power of Attorney' is to be used.\n\nThe joint tender must clearly indicate the role and tasks of each member and of the Group Leader who will act as the Contracting Authority 's contact point for the contract's administrative or financial aspects and operational management. The Group Leader will have full authority to bind the group and each of its members during contract execution. If the joint tender is successful, the Contracting Authority shall sign the contract with the Group Leader, authorized by the other members to sign the contract on their behalf via power of attorney drawn up in the model attached in Annex 04 'Power of Attorney' .\n\nChanges in the composition of the group during the procurement procedure (after the submission deadline and before contract signature) shall lead to rejection of the tender except in case of:\n\n9 References to tenderer or tenderers in this document shall be understood as covering both sole tenderers and groups of economic operators submitting a joint tender.\n\n13", + "recall": 0.9862385321100917, + "true_md": "## 2.4 Ways to submit a tender: how can economic operators organise themselves to submit a tender?\n\nEconomic operators can submit a tender either as a sole tenderer or as a group of tenderers. In either case subcontracting is permitted.\n\nIn order to fulfil the selection criteria, as set out in section 3.2, the tenderer can rely on the capacities of subcontractors or other entities (that are not subcontractors). \n\nThe role of each entity involved in a tender (hereafter referred to as “the involved entity”) must be clearly specified in the e-Submission application: i) sole tenderer, ii) group leader of a group of tenderers, iii) member of a group of tenderers, or iv) subcontractor. For an entity on whose capacities the tenderer relies to fulfil the selection criteria (that is not a subcontractor), this role is defined in the commitment letter ( Annex 07 ). This applies also where the involved entities belong to the same economic group. \n\nIn particular, the tenderer must provide a detailed overview of all companies involved in the tender; clearly describing how the work will be distributed (share and exact distribution of responsibilities) and explaining from which location the different services will be delivered. \n\nA joint tender is a situation where a tender is submitted by a group (with or without legal form) of economic operators regardless of the link they have between them. The group as a whole is considered a tenderer 9 .\n\nAll members of the group assume joint and several liability towards the Contracting Authority for the performance of the contract as a whole.\n\nGroup members must appoint a Group Leader and a single point of contact authorised to act on their behalf in connection with the submission of the tender and all relevant questions, clarification requests, notifications, etc., that may be received during the evaluation, award and until the contact signature. The model power of attorney attached in Annex 04 “Power of Attorney” is to be used. \n\nThe joint tender must clearly indicate the role and tasks of each member and of the Group Leader who will act as the Contracting Authority 's contact point for the contract's administrative or financial aspects and operational management. The Group Leader will have full authority to bind the group and each of its members during contract execution. If the joint tender is successful, the Contracting Authority shall sign the contract with the Group Leader, authorized by the other members to sign the contract on their behalf via power of attorney drawn up in the model attached in Annex 04 “Power of Attorney” . \n\nChanges in the composition of the group during the procurement procedure (after the submission deadline and before contract signature) shall lead to rejection of the tender except in case of: \n\n9 References to tenderer or tenderers in this document shall be understood as covering both sole tenderers and groups of economic operators submitting a joint tender.\n\n13\n\n## 2.4.1. Joint tenders" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8818384922902159, + "doc_id": "575de0d4d776f2ffb0b322a337a21b8cd1bd0a5ae94f0787c9fc96a46f60f72b", + "edit_distance": 0.415929203539823, + "f1_score": 0.9895287958115182, + "meteor": 0.8436397447135717, + "precision": 0.9947368421052631, + "pred_md": "EC - FWC services Dec 2018\n\nContract no: [complete]\n\n## I.6.3. Payment of the balance\n\n- 1. The contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) may claim the payment of the balance in accordance with Article II.21.6.\n\nThe contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) must send an invoice for payment of the balance due under a specific contract, as provided for in the tender specifications and accompanied by the following:\n\n-  a list of all pre-existing rights to the results or parts of the results or a declaration stating that there are no such pre-existing rights, as provided for in Article II.13.4 (Annex IV);\n-  relevant progress report or deliverable result, as stated in the specific contract.\n- 2. The contracting authority must approve the submitted documents or deliverables and pay within 60 days from receipt of the invoice.\n- 3. If the contracting authority has observations to make, it must send them to the contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) and suspend the time limit for payment in accordance with Article II.21.7.\n\nThe contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) has fifteen days to submit additional information or corrections or a new version of the documents if the contracting authority requires it.\n\n- 4. The contracting authority must give its approval and pay within the remainder of the time-limit indicated in point (2.) unless it rejects partially or fully the submitted documents or deliverables.\n\n## I.6.4. Performance guarantee\n\nPerformance guarantee is not applicable to this FWC.\n\n## I.6.5. Retention money guarantee\n\nRetention money guarantee is not applicable to this FWC.\n\n## I.7. BANK ACCOUNT\n\nPayments must be made to the contractor's (or leader's in the case of a joint tender) bank account denominated in euro, identified as follows:\n\nName of bank: Full address of branch: Exact denomination of account holder: Full account number including bank codes: IBAN code:\n\n## I.8. COMMUNICATION DETAILS\n\nFor the purpose of this FWC, communications must be sent to the following addresses:\n\nContracting authority:\n\nEuropean Agency for Safety and Health at Work\n\nCommunication and Promotion Unit\n\nSantiago de Compostela, 12 - 5th floor\n\nE-48003 Bilbao\n\nSPAIN\n\nE-mail: information@osha.europa.eu\n\n7", + "recall": 0.984375, + "true_md": "EC - FWC services Dec 2018 \n\nContract no: [complete] \n\n## I.6.3. Payment of the balance\n\n## I.6.4. Performance guarantee\n\n## I.6.5. Retention money guarantee\n\n## I.7. BANK ACCOUNT\n\n## I.8. COMMUNICATION DETAILS\n\n1. The contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) may claim the payment of the balance in accordance with Article II.21.6. \n\nThe contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) must send an invoice for payment of the balance due under a specific contract, as provided for in the tender specifications and accompanied by the following: \n\n2. The contracting authority must approve the submitted documents or deliverables and pay within 60 days from receipt of the invoice.\n\n3. If the contracting authority has observations to make, it must send them to the contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) and suspend the time limit for payment in accordance with Article II.21.7. The contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) has fifteen days to submit additional information or corrections or a new version of the documents if the contracting authority requires it. \n\n4. The contracting authority must give its approval and pay within the remainder of the time-limit indicated in point (2.) unless it rejects partially or fully the submitted documents or deliverables.\n\nPerformance guarantee is not applicable to this FWC. \n\nRetention money guarantee is not applicable to this FWC. \n\nPayments must be made to the contractor’s (or leader’s in the case of a joint tender) bank account denominated in euro, identified as follows: \n\nName of bank: Full address of branch: Exact denomination of account holder: Full account number including bank codes: IBAN code: \n\nFor the purpose of this FWC, communications must be sent to the following addresses: \n\nContracting authority: European Agency for Safety and Health at Work Communication and Promotion Unit Santiago de Compostela, 12 – 5th floor E-48003 Bilbao SPAIN E-mail: information@osha.europa.eu \n\n- following:  a list of all pre-existing rights to the results or parts of the results or a declaration stating that there are no such pre-existing rights, as provided for in Article II.13.4 (Annex IV); \n\n- there are no such pre-existing rights, as provided for in Article II.13.4 (Annex IV);  relevant progress report or deliverable result, as stated in the specific contract. \n\n7" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8725129388059689, + "doc_id": "0c2d01f16f7e8fabb59a55e9e77a1f473c3f1ad26c93af66d36573fac3045738", + "edit_distance": 0.05555555555555555, + "f1_score": 0.9411764705882353, + "meteor": 0.943675509419454, + "precision": 0.9411764705882353, + "pred_md": "Vaccine Effectiveness, Burden and Impact Studies (VEBIS) of COVID-19 and Influenza - Tender Specifications ECDC/2021/12924", + "recall": 0.9411764705882353, + "true_md": "Vaccine Effectiveness, Burden and Impact Studies (VEBIS) of COVID-19 and Influenza – Tender Specifications ECDC/2021/12924" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.07158335999040069, + "doc_id": "82b46ef0eaa3ed19d336be277e899a4cac8e8a79126cd629b69f475475d9c432", + "edit_distance": 0.9300411522633745, + "f1_score": 0.21476510067114093, + "meteor": 0.3459353240206759, + "precision": 0.12121212121212122, + "pred_md": "Vaccine Effectiveness, Burden and Impact Studies (VEBIS) of COVID-19 and Influenza - Tender Specifications ECDC/2021/12924\n\nintended use. The detection of pathogens should be performed by\n\nmolecular methods, such as polymerase chain reaction.\n\n- · In addition, the contractor should ensure that all participating laboratories, performing the molecular and serology diagnostics, are producing comparable results and are taking part to a standardisation assessment, which will be agreed with ECDC.\n\nThe contractor will update the report based on a previous version provided by\n\nECDC. The report will describe all the participating study sites. The report will\n\ninclude the full list of participating sites with a named focal point, each study\n\nsite type and size, status of COVID-19 vaccination campaign. Standard\n\ntemplate to be used across sites.\n\nDL 1.2.2. Update of ECDC\n\nreport describing new\n\nand previous\n\nparticipating study sites,\n\nwith standard template\n\nacross study sites\n\nTask 3: Implementation of surveillance activities and of the studies\n\nThe contractor is expected to support the countries/study sites in aiming to implement all objectives of the ECDC Hospital network, which may be subject to revision by ECDC over the course of the framework contract, progressively or concomitantly depending on the countries/study sites characteristics. The contractor is expected to work in close collaboration with the study sites.\n\nEvery two years\n\nWord - ECDC\n\ntemplate\n\nPower point", + "recall": 0.9411764705882353, + "true_md": "Vaccine Effectiveness, Burden and Impact Studies (VEBIS) of COVID-19 and Influenza – Tender Specifications ECDC/2021/12924" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9547846266118576, + "doc_id": "9eeb1b2974cf4416046fb027b1b33aead814de8e104c43f31208bdea10b78514", + "edit_distance": 0.47304582210242585, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.8232118988728574, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "CC s'adresse au responsable du traitement des données. Il lui est également possible de s'adresser au délégué à la protection des données relevant du responsable du traitement des données.\n\nLes personnes concernées ont le droit d'introduire à tout moment une réclamation auprès du Contrôleur européen de la protection des données.\n\nDes renseignements détaillés concernant le traitement des données à caractère personnel figurent dans l'avis relatif à la protection des données visé à l'article I.9.\n\n## II.9.2 Traitement des données à caractère personnel par le contractant\n\nLe traitement de données à caractère personnel par le contractant doit satisfaire aux exigences du règlement (UE) 2018/1725 et s'effectuer uniquement aux fins définies par le responsable du traitement.\n\nLe contractant aide le responsable du traitement à satisfaire à l'obligation qui lui incombe de donner suite aux demandes d'exercer leurs droits émanant de personnes dont les données à caractère personnel sont traitées dans le cadre du présent CC, comme prévu au chapitre III (articles 14 à 25) du règlement (UE) 2018/1725. Le contractant doit informer sans délai le responsable du traitement de ces demandes.\n\nLe contractant ne peut agir que conformément aux instructions écrites et documentées et sous la supervision du responsable du traitement, notamment en ce qui concerne les finalités du traitement, les catégories de données pouvant être traitées, les destinataires des données et les moyens par lesquels la personne concernée peut exercer ses droits.\n\nLe contractant donne à son personnel l'accès aux données dans la mesure strictement nécessaire à la mise en œuvre, à la gestion et au suivi du CC. Le contractant doit veiller à ce que le personnel autorisé à traiter les données à caractère personnel s'engage à respecter la confidentialité ou soit soumis à une obligation légale de confidentialité conformément aux dispositions de l'article II.8.\n\nLe contractant doit adopter des mesures de sécurité d'ordre technique et organisationnel appropriées, eu égard aux risques inhérents au traitement et à la nature, à la portée, au contexte et aux finalités du traitement, offrant notamment, selon les besoins:\n\n- a) la pseudonymisation et le chiffrement des données à caractère personnel;\n- b) des moyens permettant de garantir la confidentialité, l'intégrité, la disponibilité et la résilience constantes des systèmes et des services de traitement;\n- c) des moyens permettant de rétablir la disponibilité des données à caractère personnel et l'accès à celles-ci dans des délais appropriés en cas d'incident physique ou technique;\n- d) une procédure visant à tester, à analyser et à évaluer régulièrement l'efficacité des mesures techniques et organisationnelles pour assurer la sécurité du traitement;\n- e) des mesures visant à protéger les données à caractère personnel contre la destruction, la perte, l'altération, la divulgation non autorisée de données à caractère personnel transmises, conservées ou traitées d'une autre manière, ou l'accès non autorisé à de telles données, d'origine accidentelle ou illicite.\n\nDans les meilleurs délais, et au plus tard dans les 48 heures après en avoir eu connaissance, le contractant notifie au responsable du traitement les violations pertinentes de données à caractère personnel. Dans ce cas, le contractant communique au moins les informations suivantes au responsable du traitement:\n\n- a) la nature de la violation de données à caractère personnel y compris, si possible, les catégories et le nombre approximatif de personnes concernées par la violation et les catégories et le nombre approximatif d'enregistrements de données à caractère personnel concernés;\n- b) les conséquences probables de la violation;\n- c) les mesures prises ou proposées pour remédier à la violation, y compris, s'il y a lieu, les mesures destinées à en atténuer les éventuelles conséquences négatives.\n\nLe contractant informe immédiatement le responsable du traitement des données si, selon lui, une instruction constitue une violation du règlement (UE) 2018/1725, du règlement (UE) 2016/679 ou d'autres dispositions du droit de l'Union ou du droit des États membres relatives à la protection des données comme prévu au cahier des charges.\n\n19\n\nFR", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "CC s'adresse au responsable du traitement des données. Il lui est également possible de s'adresser au délégué à la protection des données relevant du responsable du traitement des données. \n\nLes personnes concernées ont le droit d'introduire à tout moment une réclamation auprès du Contrôleur européen de la protection des données. \n\nDes renseignements détaillés concernant le traitement des données à caractère personnel figurent dans l'avis relatif à la protection des données visé à l'article I.9. \n\nII.9.2 Traitement des données à caractère personnel par le contractant Le traitement de données à caractère personnel par le contractant doit satisfaire aux exigences du règlement (UE) 2018/1725 et s'effectuer uniquement aux fins définies par le responsable du traitement. \n\nLe contractant aide le responsable du traitement à satisfaire à l'obligation qui lui incombe de donner suite aux demandes d'exercer leurs droits émanant de personnes dont les données à caractère personnel sont traitées dans le cadre du présent CC, comme prévu au chapitre III (articles 14 à 25) du règlement (UE) 2018/1725. Le contractant doit informer sans délai le responsable du traitement de ces demandes. \n\nLe contractant ne peut agir que conformément aux instructions écrites et documentées et sous la supervision du responsable du traitement, notamment en ce qui concerne les finalités du traitement, les catégories de données pouvant être traitées, les destinataires des données et les moyens par lesquels la personne concernée peut exercer ses droits. \n\nLe contractant donne à son personnel l'accès aux données dans la mesure strictement nécessaire à la mise en œuvre, à la gestion et au suivi du CC. Le contractant doit veiller à ce que le personnel autorisé à traiter les données à caractère personnel s'engage à respecter la confidentialité ou soit soumis à une obligation légale de confidentialité conformément aux dispositions de l'article II.8. \n\nLe contractant doit adopter des mesures de sécurité d'ordre technique et organisationnel appropriées, eu égard aux risques inhérents au traitement et à la nature, à la portée, au contexte et aux finalités du traitement, offrant notamment, selon les besoins: \n\nDans les meilleurs délais, et au plus tard dans les 48 heures après en avoir eu connaissance, le contractant notifie au responsable du traitement les violations pertinentes de données à caractère personnel. Dans ce cas, le contractant communique au moins les informations suivantes au responsable du traitement: \n\nLe contractant informe immédiatement le responsable du traitement des données si, selon lui, une instruction constitue une violation du règlement (UE) 2018/1725, du règlement (UE) 2016/679 ou d'autres dispositions du droit de l'Union ou du droit des États membres relatives à la protection des données comme prévu au cahier des charges. \n\n19 FR\n\n- a) la nature de la violation de données à caractère personnel y compris, si possible, les catégories et le nombre approximatif de personnes concernées par la violation et les catégories et le nombre approximatif d'enregistrements de données à caractère personnel concernés; \n\n- b) les conséquences probables de la violation; \n\n- c) les mesures prises ou proposées pour remédier à la violation, y compris, s'il y a lieu, les mesures destinées à en atténuer les éventuelles conséquences négatives. \n\n- a) la pseudonymisation et le chiffrement des données à caractère personnel; \n\n- b) des moyens permettant de garantir la confidentialité, l'intégrité, la disponibilité et la résilience constantes des systèmes et des services de traitement; \n\n- c) des moyens permettant de rétablir la disponibilité des données à caractère personnel et l'accès à celles-ci dans des délais appropriés en cas d'incident physique ou technique; \n\n- d) une procédure visant à tester, à analyser et à évaluer régulièrement l'efficacité des mesures techniques et organisationnelles pour assurer la sécurité du traitement; \n\n- e) des mesures visant à protéger les données à caractère personnel contre la destruction, la perte, l'altération, la divulgation non autorisée de données à caractère personnel transmises, conservées ou traitées d'une autre manière, ou l'accès non autorisé à de telles données, d'origine accidentelle ou illicite. \n\n## II.9.2 Traitement des données à caractère personnel par le contractant Le traitement de données à caractère personnel par le contractant doit satisfaire aux exigences du" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8091067115702212, + "doc_id": "95c1b6f7c6e8d10d447c9e75d431088639e4beeea31ae6638d10d0bc02d7f150", + "edit_distance": 0.14285714285714285, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.981329690346084, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## General Administrative and Submission Clauses", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "# General Administrative and Submission Clauses" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "5b9c87b53f31cc7275f9378583d351859a0f5899e3afaac6e0b51e25a89140eb", + "edit_distance": 0.14285714285714285, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.981329690346084, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8919160427535916, + "doc_id": "13a1c43f949ba144d6239926f199e3e743902060aae985d8c3bc710523f80805", + "edit_distance": 0.6074380165289256, + "f1_score": 0.9833887043189369, + "meteor": 0.9153909805544064, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Contract number: [ complete ]\n\nContract conditions of December 2015\n\n## I.9. DATA CONTROLLER\n\nFor the purpose of Article II.9, the data controller is the Director of the Shared Resource Directorate MOVE/ENER.\n\n## I.10. TERMINATION BY EITHER PARTY\n\nEither party may, terminate the contract by sending formal notification to the other party with one month written notice.\n\nIf the contract is terminated:\n\n- (a) neither party is entitled to compensation;\n- (b) the contractor is entitled to payment only for the supplies delivered before termination takes effect.\n\nThe second, third and fourth paragraphs of Article II.17.4 apply.\n\n## I.11. APPLICABLE LAW AND SETTLEMENT OF DISPUTES\n\n- I.11.1 The contract is governed by Union and Community law, complemented, where necessary, by the law of Luxembourg\n- I.11.2 The courts of Luxembourg have exclusive jurisdiction over any dispute regarding the interpretation, application or validity of the contract.\n\n## I.12. OTHER SPECIFIC CONDITION\n\n- I.12.1 By derogation to Article II.4.14(b) §1, the supplies must be guaranteed against all defects in manufacture or materials for (between 25 and 60 - award criteria N°4) months from the date of delivery 2\n\n2 This Article will be inserted only if the warranty offered exceeds the 24 months (minimum requirement)\n\n9", + "recall": 0.9673202614379085, + "true_md": "Contract conditions of December 2015 \n\nContract number: [ complete ] \n\n## I.9. DATA CONTROLLER\n\n## I.10. TERMINATION BY EITHER PARTY\n\n## I.11. APPLICABLE LAW AND SETTLEMENT OF DISPUTES\n\n## I.12. OTHER SPECIFIC CONDITION\n\nFor the purpose of Article II.9, the data controller is the Director of the Shared Resource Directorate MOVE/ENER.\n\nEither party may, terminate the contract by sending formal notification to the other party with one month written notice.\n\nIf the contract is terminated:\n\n(a) neither party is entitled to compensation; \n\n(b) the contractor is entitled to payment only for the supplies delivered before termination takes effect.\n\nThe second, third and fourth paragraphs of Article II.17.4 apply. \n\n$^{2}$ This Article will be inserted only if the warranty offered exceeds the 24 months (minimum requirement) \n\n9 \n\n- I.12.1 By derogation to Article II.4.14(b) §1, the supplies must be guaranteed against all defects in manufacture or materials for ( between 25 and 60 – award criteria N°4) months from the date of delivery 2\n\n- I.11.2 The courts of Luxembourg have exclusive jurisdiction over any dispute regarding the interpretation, application or validity of the contract. \n\n- I.11.1 The contract is governed by Union and Community law, complemented, where necessary, by the law of Luxembourg" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6808910225779541, + "doc_id": "01a48e8e2e1ce5f3c701372197c3fc8d4b968f5ec2201776dc6bae62d43a0541", + "edit_distance": 0.41983122362869196, + "f1_score": 0.8746355685131195, + "meteor": 0.9389133688214062, + "precision": 0.7853403141361257, + "pred_md": "The Consultant will carry out the Services on the terms and conditions set out in this Contract, which comprises, in order of precedence, these special conditions (the \" Special Conditions \") and the following annexes:\n\nAnnex I:\n\nGeneral Conditions for service contracts financed by the European Union (the ' General Conditions ')\n\nAnnex II:\n\nTerms of reference [ if the case, please add any or all of the following: ] including clarifications before the deadline for submission of tenders (the ' Terms of Reference ')\n\nAnnex III:\n\nOrganisation and methodology [ if the case, please add the following: ] including clarifications from the tenderer provided during tender evaluation\n\nAnnex IV:\n\nKey experts\n\nAnnex V:\n\nBudget breakdown\n\nAnnex VI: Forms and other relevant documents\n\nAnnex VII: Report of factual findings and terms of reference for an expenditure verification\n\nIn case of any contradiction between the above documents, their provisions shall be applied according to the above order of precedence, starting with the Special Conditions.\n\n## (3) Contract value\n\nThis Contract, established in Euro, is a fee-based contract . Based on the maximum fees, incidental expenditure and expenditure verification provision defined in Annex V, the maximum contract value is EUR < amount > (amount in letters) ('Maximum Contract Value') .\n\n## (4) Commencement Date\n\nThe date for commencing the implementation of the Services shall be the date of signature of this Contract by the last of the Parties (the ' Commencement Date ').\n\n## (5) Period of implementation\n\nThe period of implementation of the tasks identified in Annexes II & III is < number > months from the Commencement Date.\n\n## (6) Reporting\n\nThe Consultant shall submit progress reports as specified in the Terms of Reference.\n\n## (7) Payments and bank account\n\n- 7.1 Payments will be made in Euro in accordance with Article 29 of the General Conditions into the bank account notified by the Consultant to the Contracting Authority in accordance with Articles 7.8 and 20.7 of the General Conditions.\n- 7.2 The payments will be made according to the following schedule, subject to the provisions of Articles 26 to 33 of the General Conditions:\n\n7 The consultant is not required to ask for pre-financing.\n\nMaximum of 30 % of the Maximum Contract Value if the implementation period is 24 months or less, and 20 % of the Maximum Contract Value if the implementation period is more than 24 months.\n\nAA-000799-002\\_TACONT\n\nPage 2 of 7", + "recall": 0.9868421052631579, + "true_md": "The Consultant will carry out the Services on the terms and conditions set out in this Contract, which comprises, in order of precedence, these special conditions (the \" Special Conditions \") and the following annexes: \n\nIn case of any contradiction between the above documents, their provisions shall be applied according to the above order of precedence, starting with the Special Conditions. \n\nThis Contract, established in Euro, is a fee-based contract . Based on the maximum fees, incidental expenditure and expenditure verification provision defined in Annex V, the maximum contract value is EUR < amount > (amount in letters (“Maximum Contract Value”) . \n\nThe date for commencing the implementation of the Services shall be the date of signature of this Contract by the last of the Parties (the “ Commencement Date ”). \n\nThe period of implementation of the tasks identified in Annexes II & III is < number > months from the Commencement Date. \n\nThe Consultant shall submit progress reports as specified in the Terms of Reference. \n\n- 7.1 Payments will be made in Euro in accordance with Article 29 of the General Conditions into the bank account notified by the Consultant to the Contracting Authority in accordance with Articles 7.8 and 20.7 of the General Conditions. \n\n- 7.2 The payments will be made according to the following schedule, subject to the provisions of Articles 26 to 33 of the General Conditions: \n\n## (7) Payments and bank account\n\n## (6) Reporting\n\n## (5) Period of implementation\n\n## (4) Commencement Date\n\n## (3) Contract value\n\n7 The consultant is not required to ask for pre-financing. Maximum of 30 % of the Maximum Contract Value if the implementation period is 24 months or less, and 20 % of the Maximum Contract Value if the implementation period is more than 24 months. \n\nPage 2 of 7 \n\nAA-000799-002\\_TACONT" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9464785368894414, + "doc_id": "1607946df2a4c1a1997d7e235620333a44930cb253f7aebc7863f8f38b7d10f7", + "edit_distance": 0.3441441441441441, + "f1_score": 0.9846938775510203, + "meteor": 0.9153054122891592, + "precision": 0.9846938775510204, + "pred_md": "General Administrative and Submission Clauses\n\n-  which tasks it intends to subcontract and clearly indicate the roles, activities and responsibilities of the subcontractor(s),\n-  specify the volume or proportion of the activities likely to be subcontracted.\n\n## 7.2.1. Documentation and information to be provided\n\nIn point 1.9.2 of 'Terms of Reference', the EIB has set requirements which evidence and extent of documentation and information is to be provided by subcontractors.\n\n## 7.2.2. Assessment of subcontractors\n\nIn case of subcontracting, the tender will be assessed as follows:\n\n-  the exclusion criteria and the selection criteria for the legal capacity will be assessed in relation to each proposed subcontractor individually;\n-  the selection criteria for the economic and financial capacity will be assessed on a consolidated assessment - tenderer plus subcontractor(s) - depending on the extent to which the subcontractor(s) will put their resources at the disposal of the tenderer for the performance of the contract;\n\nthe selection criteria for the technical and professional capacity will be assessed in relation to the combined capacities of the tenderer and the subcontractor(s), as a whole, depending on the extent to which the subcontractor(s) will put their resources at the disposal of the tenderer for the performance of the contract.\n\nWhere a Tenderer is relying on the capacity of subcontractor(s) to meet the selection criteria, such entities must (i) be proposed to perform those services for which these capacities are required and (ii) submit a letter of undertaking in the tender to that effect (see, point 6.4 above).\n\n-  The award criteria will be assessed in relation to the tender.\n\nN.B. If a subcontractor does not fulfil one of the exclusion criteria, the Tenderer may be excluded.\n\n## 7.2.3. Subcontracting during the contract implementation\n\nOnce the contract has entered into force, the successful Tenderer shall retain full liability towards EIB for the performance of the contract as a whole. EIB will not have any direct legal commitment with the subcontractor(s).\n\nDuring the execution of the contract, the contractor will need EIB's express authorisation to replace a subcontractor with another subcontractor and/or to subcontract tasks for which subcontracting was not envisaged in the original tender, in compliance with the provisions on subcontracting foreseen in the General Terms and Conditions.\n\n## 7.3. Reliance on the capacities of other entities\n\nWith regard to the selection criteria (i) economic and financial capacity and (ii) technical and professional capacity, Tenderers may, where appropriate for a particular contract, rely on the capacities of other entities, regardless of the legal nature of the links which it has with them. Where a Tenderer wants to rely on the capacities of other entities, it shall provide proof that it has at its disposal the resources necessary, for example by producing a written commitment by those entities to that effect.\n\nLast updated: June 2020\n\nPage 14 of 21", + "recall": 0.9846938775510204, + "true_md": "General Administrative and Submission Clauses\n\n-  which tasks it intends to subcontract and clearly indicate the roles, activities and responsibilities of the subcontractor(s),\n\n-  specify the volume or proportion of the activities likely to be subcontracted. \n\n-  the exclusion criteria and the selection criteria for the legal capacity will be assessed in relation to each proposed subcontractor individually; \n\n-  the selection criteria for the economic and financial capacity will be assessed on a consolidated assessment – tenderer plus subcontractor(s) – depending on the extent to which the subcontractor(s) will put their resources at the disposal of the tenderer for the performance of the contract; \n\n-  The award criteria will be assessed in relation to the tender. \n\nIn point 1.9.2 of ‘Terms of Reference’, the EIB has set requirements which evidence and extent of documentation and information is to be provided by subcontractors.\n\nIn case of subcontracting, the tender will be assessed as follows: \n\nthe selection criteria for the technical and professional capacity will be assessed in relation to the combined capacities of the tenderer and the subcontractor(s), as a whole, depending on the extent to which the subcontractor(s) will put their resources at the disposal of the tenderer for the performance of the contract. \n\nWhere a Tenderer is relying on the capacity of subcontractor(s) to meet the selection criteria, such entities must (i) be proposed to perform those services for which these capacities are required and (ii) submit a letter of undertaking in the tender to that effect (see, point 6.4 above). \n\nN.B. If a subcontractor does not fulfil one of the exclusion criteria, the Tenderer may be excluded.\n\nOnce the contract has entered into force, the successful Tenderer shall retain full liability towards EIB for the performance of the contract as a whole. EIB will not have any direct legal commitment with the subcontractor(s). \n\nDuring the execution of the contract, the contractor will need EIB’s express authorisation to replace a subcontractor with another subcontractor and/or to subcontract tasks for which subcontracting was not envisaged in the original tender, in compliance with the provisions on subcontracting foreseen in the General Terms and Conditions. \n\nWith regard to the selection criteria (i) economic and financial capacity and (ii) technical and professional capacity, Tenderers may, where appropriate for a particular contract, rely on the capacities of other entities, regardless of the legal nature of the links which it has with them. Where a Tenderer wants to rely on the capacities of other entities, it shall provide proof that it has at its disposal the resources necessary, for example by producing a written commitment by those entities to that effect.\n\n## 7.3. Reliance on the capacities of other entities\n\n## 7.2.3. Subcontracting during the contract implementation\n\n## 7.2.2. Assessment of subcontractors\n\n## 7.2.1. Documentation and information to be provided\n\nLast updated: June 2020\n\nPage 14 of 21" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9361024444643181, + "doc_id": "518e04d48f0028a4dd08452ca1d419a27df844a6e20226785f833969a2cb5afe", + "edit_distance": 0.3583180987202925, + "f1_score": 0.9802371541501975, + "meteor": 0.9411681715006549, + "precision": 0.9802371541501976, + "pred_md": "- · Please note that pricing information must not be included in the replies to the technical evaluation questions and supporting documents.\n- · By submitting a tender, tenderers are committing themselves to providing the services in full adherence to the Tender Specifications and their annexes. Therefore, any aspect of the tender that does not adhere to the requirements of the Tender Specifications and their annexes will not be taken into account during the FWC execution, for the provisions of the Tender Specifications take precedence. In any case, aspects showing lack of adherence will negatively impact the evaluation of the tender.\n- · Any aspect of the tender is contractually binding.\n- · Responses must be clear, precise and specific to the question, as well as coherent, with no contradictions and avoiding unnecessary repetitions. If the tenderer makes references to other sections elsewhere in their tender, the tenderer shall use their best judgement to ensure that references are pertinent and precise.\n- · The maximum number of pages 20 in the tender documentation per award criterion is defined in the table below in the respective column. No additional annexes will be taken into consideration during the evaluation. This length limit includes the Table of Content and any diagrams. Any page above these limits will not be taken into account for the assessment.\n- · Verdana font-size minimum 10, with page margins of minimum 2 cm.\n\n## Quality of the Tender\n\nTenderers shall present/structure their offer as they see best fit to address the service requirements as defined in the Technical Specifications and, provided that they respect the above tender presentation rules and what follows.\n\nIn order to assess the added value of an offer by contrast to the mere adherence to the requirements as already defined in the Technical Specifications, the offer shall detail, for the award criteria 1 to 4 (for both Lots) , the following aspects:\n\n- -What are we doing to achieve the objectives: derive from the above and elaborate on the fulfilment of a number of Critical Success Factors (CSFs) that represent the areas in which successful delivery is essential to achieve the objectives/ deliverables of the services in scope;\n- -How do we manage the events that may affect the achievement of the objectives: for each CSF draft a RAID (Risk, Assumption, Issues and Dependencies) assessment elaborating on the implications of how identified risks may impact performance; thus, hindering the successful achievement of the envisaged objectives/deliverables. Proposed mitigating/contingency measures shall be part of the RAID assessment;\n- -How do we know that we are achieving the objectives : propose metrics (Specific Quality Indicators -SQIs) to monitor and assess the achievement of the CSFs thus enabling an accurate measurement of performance when delivering services. Proposed SQIs shall become integral part of the relevant section in the SLA (refer to Annex 16) ;\n\n20 Please note that one [1] page means \"a single side of A4 paper'.\n\n30", + "recall": 0.9802371541501976, + "true_md": "- • Please note that pricing information must not be included in the replies to the technical evaluation questions and supporting documents. \n\n- • By submitting a tender, tenderers are committing themselves to providing the services in full adherence to the Tender Specifications and their annexes. Therefore, any aspect of the tender that does not adhere to the requirements of the Tender Specifications and their annexes will not be taken into account during the FWC execution, for the provisions of the Tender Specifications take precedence. In any case, aspects showing lack of adherence will negatively impact the evaluation of the tender.\n\n- • Any aspect of the tender is contractually binding.\n\n- • Responses must be clear, precise and specific to the question, as well as coherent, with no contradictions and avoiding unnecessary repetitions. If the tenderer makes references to other sections elsewhere in their tender, the tenderer shall use their best judgement to ensure that references are pertinent and precise. \n\n- • The maximum number of pages 20 in the tender documentation per award criterion is defined in the table below in the respective column. No additional annexes will be taken into consideration during the evaluation. This length limit includes the Table of Content and any diagrams. Any page above these limits will not be taken into account for the assessment.\n\n- • Verdana font-size minimum 10, with page margins of minimum 2 cm. \n\n- - What are we doing to achieve the objectives: derive from the above and elaborate on the fulfilment of a number of Critical Success Factors (CSFs) that represent the areas in which successful delivery is essential to achieve the objectives/ deliverables of the services in scope;\n\n- - How do we manage the events that may affect the achievement of the objectives: for each CSF draft a RAID (Risk, Assumption, Issues and Dependencies) assessment elaborating on the implications of how identified risks may impact performance; thus, hindering the successful achievement of the envisaged objectives/deliverables. Proposed mitigating/contingency measures shall be part of the RAID assessment;\n\n- - How do we know that we are achieving the objectives : propose metrics (Specific Quality Indicators – SQIs) to monitor and assess the achievement of the CSFs thus enabling an accurate measurement of performance when delivering services. Proposed SQIs shall become integral part of the relevant section in the SLA (refer to Annex 16) ;\n\n20 Please note that one [1] page means \"a single side of A4 paper”.\n\n30\n\nIn order to assess the added value of an offer by contrast to the mere adherence to the requirements as already defined in the Technical Specifications, the offer shall detail, for the award criteria 1 to 4 (for both Lots) , the following aspects: \n\nTenderers shall present/structure their offer as they see best fit to address the service requirements as defined in the Technical Specifications and, provided that they respect the above tender presentation rules and what follows. \n\n## Quality of the Tender" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "f1a7d4bf7e565c46fb9ba610d718eae24318a6d4e550c53eec80956d2ba800f2", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9921875, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## EUOSHA/2021/OP/F/SE/0142\n\n2", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## EUOSHA/2021/OP/F/SE/0142\n\n2" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8725129388059689, + "doc_id": "33816de63d222ba3adb7d29dbcb4af184457c571b9c80940998a93915317c2cf", + "edit_distance": 0.05555555555555555, + "f1_score": 0.9411764705882353, + "meteor": 0.943675509419454, + "precision": 0.9411764705882353, + "pred_md": "Vaccine Effectiveness, Burden and Impact Studies (VEBIS) of COVID-19 and Influenza - Tender Specifications ECDC/2021/12924", + "recall": 0.9411764705882353, + "true_md": "Vaccine Effectiveness, Burden and Impact Studies (VEBIS) of COVID-19 and Influenza – Tender Specifications ECDC/2021/12924" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7919147063859479, + "doc_id": "23534575a7b62df4f9d81364763c34ef55f866b67df11fae8479b4419ae7d058", + "edit_distance": 0.2066115702479339, + "f1_score": 0.9632653061224491, + "meteor": 0.8023681606529468, + "precision": 0.9752066115702479, + "pred_md": "ANNEXE III\n\n## Service Level Agreement(s)\n\n- 1. Pendant toute la durée du contrat les prestations du Contractant seront évaluées par le Secrétariat sur base du niveau de service minimum (Service Level Agreement).\n- 2. Le contractant établira un rapport mensuel récapitulant le niveau de SLA convenu ainsi que le niveau réellement atteint. Si le contractant n'atteint pas les niveaux requis dans ses obligations contractuelles; il calculera dans son rapport mensuel, pour chaque point de SLA décrit au cahier des charges, le nombre de points d'indemnités à appliquer et le montant financier correspondant.\n- 3. Les dommages-intérêts sont définies comme suit sachant qu'ils seront triplés pendant la période de 6 mois précédant la fin du contrat ou sur la période du dernier bon de commande excédant la date de fin de contrat.:\n\n## Valeur du point d'indemnité : 75 euros / point\n\n## REPORTING (Points d'indemnité appliqués par jour supplémentaire)\n\n## ENTRETIEN PRÉVENTIF ET CORRECTIF\n\n(Points d'indemnité appliqués par Ordre de travail et par jour de retard dépassant le seuil)\n\n38\n\nANNEXE III\n\nFR", + "recall": 0.9516129032258065, + "true_md": "ANNEXE III \n\n## Service Level Agreement(s)\n\n- 1. Pendant toute la durée du contrat les prestations du Contractant seront évaluées par le Secrétariat sur base du niveau de service minimum (Service Level Agreement).\n\n- 2. Le contractant établira un rapport mensuel récapitulant le niveau de SLA convenu ainsi que le niveau réellement atteint. Si le contractant n'atteint pas les niveaux requis dans ses obligations contractuelles; il calculera dans son rapport mensuel, pour chaque point de SLA décrit au cahier des charges, le nombre de points d’indemnités à appliquer et le montant financier correspondant.\n\n- 3. Les dommages-intérêts sont définies comme suit sachant qu’ils seront triplés pendant la période de 6 mois précédant la fin du contrat ou sur la période du dernier bon de commande excédant la date de fin de contrat.: \n\n## Valeur du point d’indemnité : 75 euros / point\n\n## REPORTING (Points d’indemnité appliqués par jour supplémentaire)\n\nREPORTING (Points d’indemnité appliqués par jour supplémentaire) \n\n## ENTRETIEN PRÉVENTIF ET CORRECTIF (Points d’indemnité appliqués par Ordre de travail et par jour de retard dépassant le seuil)\n\nENTRETIEN PRÉVENTIF ET CORRECTIF (Points d’indemnité appliqués par Ordre de travail et par jour de retard dépassant le seuil) \n\nANNEXE III \n\n38 FR" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.16066302642685318, + "doc_id": "32c256faca724f4053c4ad8d571ba665019eadff883342ada80751b4b02c33a0", + "edit_distance": 0.7011494252873564, + "f1_score": 0.8654970760233919, + "meteor": 0.6908394484584472, + "precision": 0.8, + "pred_md": "Appendice 2 de l'Annexe VII\n\n## PROCÉDURE D'EVACUATION\n\n| 1. ALARME ..................................................................................................................................................... 4 | |\n|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|\n| 2. EVACUATION ............................................................................................................................................. 4 | 2. EVACUATION ............................................................................................................................................. 4 |\n| 2.1 Procédure ............................................................................................................................................. 4 | |\n| 2.2 Déroulement de l'évacuation ............................................................................................................... 5 | |\n| 2.3 Chemin d'évacuation ............................................................................................................................ 6 | |\n| 2.4 Portes d'évacuation .............................................................................................................................. 7 | |\n| 2.5 Évacuation des délégués et des visiteurs ............................................................................................. 8 | |\n| 2.6 Évacuation des personnes à mobilité réduite ...................................................................................... 8 | |\n| 2.7 En cas de difficulté personnelle............................................................................................................ 9 | |\n\nÉvacuer, c'est quitter une zone de danger de la manière la plus rapide et la plus sûre possible. Il est fondamental de ne pas céder à la panique et de savoir comment réagir. Pour ces raisons, il est important de connaître le chemin d'évacuation par rapport à son lieu de travail habituel et de connaître les procédures d'évacuation.\n\n## 1. ALARME\n\nL'alarme est l'ordre d'évacuation du bâtiment. Elle est donnée par les sirènes d'évacuation ou par haut-parleurs. Les sirènes peuvent être précédées d'une annonce par haut-parleurs. Toutes les personnes présentes doivent alors quitter le bâtiment.\n\n## 2. ÉVACUATION\n\n## 2.1 Procédure\n\nEn raison du contexte sécuritaire à Bruxelles et tant que le niveau d'alerte restera moyen ou élevé (niveau jaune et au-dessus), les rassemblements de larges groupes de personnes dans les espaces ouverts seront à éviter .\n\nL'endroit où vous devez vous rendre après avoir évacué un bâtiment ne dépend pas de l'endroit où vous travaillez habituellement mais de l'endroit où vous vous trouvez précisément au moment où l'alarme est donnée. Il est défini de manière à vous éloigner de la zone sinistrée et à éviter d'entraver le passage des services de secours.\n\nUne fois sorti du bâtiment, le personnel évacué devra, sauf instructions contraires:\n\n- - pour le bâtiment Justus Lipsius: se disperser ;\n- - pour les bâtiments Europa et Lex: se rendre à l'atrium du Justus Lipsius .\n\n85\n\nANNEX VII\n\nFR", + "recall": 0.9426751592356688, + "true_md": "Appendice 2 de l'Annexe VII \n\n## PROCÉDURE D’EVACUATION\n\nÉvacuer, c'est quitter une zone de danger de la manière la plus rapide et la plus sûre possible. Il est fondamental de ne pas céder à la panique et de savoir comment réagir. Pour ces raisons, il est important de connaître le chemin d'évacuation par rapport à son lieu de travail habituel et de connaître les procédures d'évacuation. 1. ALARME \n\nL’alarme est l'ordre d'évacuation du bâtiment. Elle est donnée par les sirènes d'évacuation ou par haut-parleurs. Les sirènes peuvent être précédées d’une annonce par haut-parleurs. Toutes les personnes présentes doivent alors quitter le bâtiment. 2. ÉVACUATION \n\n2.1 Procédure En raison du contexte sécuritaire à Bruxelles et tant que le niveau d'alerte restera moyen ou élevé (niveau jaune et au-dessus), les rassemblements de larges groupes de personnes dans les espaces ouverts seront à éviter . \n\nL'endroit où vous devez vous rendre après avoir évacué un bâtiment ne dépend pas de l'endroit où vous travaillez habituellement mais de l'endroit où vous vous trouvez précisément au moment où l'alarme est donnée. Il est défini de manière à vous éloigner de la zone sinistrée et à éviter d'entraver le passage des services de secours. \n\nUne fois sorti du bâtiment, le personnel évacué devra, sauf instructions contraires: - pour le bâtiment Justus Lipsius: se disperser ; \n\nUne fois sorti du bâtiment, le personnel évacué devra, sauf instructions contraires: - pour le bâtiment Justus Lipsius: se disperser ; - pour les bâtiments Europa et Lex: se rendre à l'atrium du Justus Lipsius\n\n## connaître les procédures d'évacuation. 1. ALARME\n\n## personnes présentes doivent alors quitter le bâtiment. 2. ÉVACUATION\n\n## 2.1 Procédure En raison du contexte sécuritaire à Bruxelles et tant que le niveau d'alerte restera moyen ou élevé\n\n- pour le bâtiment Justus Lipsius: se disperser ; - pour les bâtiments Europa et Lex: se rendre à l'atrium du Justus Lipsius . Bâtiment Action a priori \n\n85 FR \n\n85 FR \n\nANNEX VII" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8725129388059689, + "doc_id": "95cc33fd6fc6b1f879441cd86903eba1bee1234f7cb7dc38df04fdb889577a48", + "edit_distance": 0.05555555555555555, + "f1_score": 0.9411764705882353, + "meteor": 0.943675509419454, + "precision": 0.9411764705882353, + "pred_md": "Vaccine Effectiveness, Burden and Impact Studies (VEBIS) of COVID-19 and Influenza - Tender Specifications ECDC/2021/12924", + "recall": 0.9411764705882353, + "true_md": "Vaccine Effectiveness, Burden and Impact Studies (VEBIS) of COVID-19 and Influenza – Tender Specifications ECDC/2021/12924" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.2904523789688326, + "doc_id": "6650b2db773cb8e1f6518870c1c9efc2efca12dc4ddecf8d20312bf46a29179e", + "edit_distance": 0.7017543859649122, + "f1_score": 0.5079365079365079, + "meteor": 0.7358076187767613, + "precision": 0.34782608695652173, + "pred_md": "Vaccine Effectiveness, Burden and Impact Studies (VEBIS) of COVID-19 and Influenza - Tender Specifications ECDC/2021/12924\n\nTask 2: Identification and development of the ECDC hospital network\n\nThe contractor will be responsible to assess the feasibility of new countries/study sites to join the ECDC hospital network and provide an update report on progress made.", + "recall": 0.9411764705882353, + "true_md": "Vaccine Effectiveness, Burden and Impact Studies (VEBIS) of COVID-19 and Influenza – Tender Specifications ECDC/2021/12924" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.93067191796818, + "doc_id": "f8076c6e294384f5005df35ff456f4554765d0e2ede33c3c1b54b68746775233", + "edit_distance": 0.3541666666666667, + "f1_score": 0.9909090909090907, + "meteor": 0.9603696694802399, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Appendice 2 de l'Annexe VII\n\nLes portes d'évacuation sont soit de couleur verte (Justus Lipsius, Lex) soit à dominante verte (Europa).\n\nLes portes de couleur rouge ou à dominante rouge ne doivent en aucun cas être empruntées pour évacuer .\n\nAu bâtiment Justus Lipsius, les portes d'évacuation sont entourées de ruban fluorescent.\n\n## Justus Lipsius / Lex Europa Justus Lipsius / Lex\n\nEuropa\n\nEuropa\n\nSi un tourniquet se présente sur le chemin d'évacuation, ne l'empruntez pas et utilisez la porte d'évacuation située juste à côté.\n\nDans tous les bâtiments , une porte située sur un chemin d'évacuation pourrait être verrouillée en temps normal pour des raisons de sécurité. Cette porte verrouillée est toujours associée à un bouton vert situé à proximité immédiate et est automatiquement déverrouillée dès qu'un ordre d'évacuation est donné.\n\nEn cas d'urgence ou lors d'un exercice d'évacuation, vous pouvez débloquer vous-même cette porte en appuyant sur le bouton poussoir vert: celle-ci sera alors déverrouillée et vous pourrez sortir en poussant sur la barre anti-panique ou la poignée.\n\nANNEX VII\n\n88\n\nFR", + "recall": 0.9819819819819819, + "true_md": "Appendice 2 de l'Annexe VII \n\n## 2.4 Portes d'évacuation\n\nLes portes d'évacuation sont soit de couleur verte (Justus Lipsius, Lex) soit à dominante verte (Europa).\n\nAu bâtiment Justus Lipsius, les portes d'évacuation sont entourées de ruban fluorescent.\n\nSi un tourniquet se présente sur le chemin d'évacuation, ne l'empruntez pas et utilisez la porte d'évacuation située juste à côté. \n\nDans tous les bâtiments , une porte située sur un chemin d'évacuation pourrait être verrouillée en temps normal pour des raisons de sécurité. Cette porte verrouillée est toujours associée à un bouton vert situé à proximité immédiate et est automatiquement déverrouillée dès qu'un ordre d'évacuation est donné.\n\nEn cas d'urgence ou lors d'un exercice d'évacuation, vous pouvez débloquer vous-même cette porte en appuyant sur le bouton poussoir vert: celle-ci sera alors déverrouillée et vous pourrez sortir en poussant sur la barre anti-panique ou la poignée. \n\n88 FR \n\nANNEX VII \n\nLes portes de couleur rouge ou à dominante rouge ne doivent en aucun cas être empruntées pour évacuer . \n\nJustus Lipsius / Lex\n\nEuropa\n\nJustus Lipsius / Lex\n\nEuropa" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6935925403891187, + "doc_id": "1ff34092517480d69281d57c5c0f40ce63723cad0b6fb31d8b22860d8cc1460a", + "edit_distance": 0.23516483516483516, + "f1_score": 0.978723404255319, + "meteor": 0.6844933989768415, + "precision": 0.9757575757575757, + "pred_md": "The assessment of whether a tenderer fulfils the selection criteria will be done on the basis of the submitted evidence.\n\nThe subsections below specify which selection criteria evidence must be provided with the tender 13 . The evidence must be provided in accordance with the applicable basis for assessment of each criterion: in case of a consolidated assessment -only by the involved entities who contribute to the fulfilment of the criterion, and in case of individual assessment -by each involved entity to whom the criterion applies individually.\n\n## 3.2.1. Legal and regulatory capacity\n\nTenderers must prove that they have legal capacity to perform the contract and the regulatory capacity to pursue the professional activity necessary to carry out the work subject to this call for tenders.\n\nThe legal and regulatory capacity shall be proven by the evidence listed below:\n\n- · Proof of enrolment in a relevant trade or professional register to be submitted in the tender.\n\n## 3.2.2. Economic and financial capacity\n\nTenderers must comply with the following selection criteria in order to prove that they have the necessary economic and financial capacity to perform the contract.\n\n## LOT 1 and LOT 2\n\n13 The obligation to provide the supporting evidence will be waived in the following situations:\n\n-if the same documents have already been provided in a previous award procedure of the ECHA, have been issued no more than one year before the date of their request by the Contracting Authority and are still valid at that date;\n\n-if such evidence can be accessed by the Contracting Authority on a national database free of charge, in which case the economic operator shall provide the Contracting Authority with the internet address of the database and, if needed, the necessary identification data to retrieve the document.\n\n14 In case of candidates from outside the Eurozone, the amount of turnovers shall be calculated using exchange rates for December of the relevant financial year as published in the Official Journal of the EU: http://ec.europa.eu/budget/contracts\\_grants/info\\_contracts/inforeuro/inforeuro\\_en.cfm\n\n19", + "recall": 0.9817073170731707, + "true_md": "The assessment of whether a tenderer fulfils the selection criteria will be done on the basis of the submitted evidence.\n\nThe subsections below specify which selection criteria evidence must be provided with the tender 13 . The evidence must be provided in accordance with the applicable basis for assessment of each criterion: in case of a consolidated assessment – only by the involved entities who contribute to the fulfilment of the criterion, and in case of individual assessment – by each involved entity to whom the criterion applies individually. \n\n## 3.2.1. Legal and regulatory capacity\n\nTenderers must prove that they have legal capacity to perform the contract and the regulatory capacity to pursue the professional activity necessary to carry out the work subject to this call for tenders.\n\nThe legal and regulatory capacity shall be proven by the evidence listed below: \n\n- • Proof of enrolment in a relevant trade or professional register to be submitted in the tender. \n\n## 3.2.2. Economic and financial capacity\n\nTenderers must comply with the following selection criteria in order to prove that they have the necessary economic and financial capacity to perform the contract.\n\n## LOT 1 and LOT 2\n\n13 The obligation to provide the supporting evidence will be waived in the following situations: if the same documents have already been provided in a previous award procedure of the ECHA, have \n\n The obligation to provide the supporting evidence will be waived in the following situations: - if the same documents have already been provided in a previous award procedure of the ECHA, have been issued no more than one year before the date of their request by the Contracting Authority and are still valid at that date; -\n\nare still valid at that date; - if such evidence can be accessed by the Contracting Authority on a national database free of charge, in which case the economic operator shall provide the with the internet address of the database and, if needed, the necessary identification data to retrieve the document. In case of candidates from outside the Eurozone, the amount of turnovers shall be calculated using exchange \n\nthe database and, if needed, the necessary identification data to retrieve the document. 14 In case of candidates from outside the Eurozone, the amount of turnovers shall be calculated using exchange rates for December of the relevant financial year as published in the Official Journal of the EU: http://ec.europa.eu/budget/contracts\\_grants/info\\_contracts/inforeuro/inforeuro\\_en.cfm \n\nrates for December of the relevant financial year as published in the Official Journal of the EU: http://ec.europa.eu/budget/contracts\\_grants/info\\_contracts/inforeuro/inforeuro\\_en.cfm \n\n19" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "55eb3257bdafc97772abaa97637aa6e94bf4cb20375a66834b422ce280e350ec", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999980003759293, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## 6. Specific Contract\n\nA specific contract will be drawn up in accordance with the template outlined in Annex III to the FWC. Within 2 working days of a specific contract being sent by the Contracting Authority to the contractor for its signature, the contractor shall return it to the Contracting Authority , duly signed and dated.\n\n42", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## 6. Specific Contract\n\nA specific contract will be drawn up in accordance with the template outlined in Annex III to the FWC. Within 2 working days of a specific contract being sent by the Contracting Authority to the contractor for its signature, the contractor shall return it to the Contracting Authority , duly signed and dated. \n\n42" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9447127400095404, + "doc_id": "d19ef647b371a826a6459eaa1147c4056bf703c9b11c11558cf1b4aaf9324ccf", + "edit_distance": 0.46632124352331605, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9657090630940887, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "ANNEX VII\n\nAppendice 4 de l'Annexe VII\n\nLes membres du personnel peuvent emprunter d'autres chemins qu'ils connaissent mieux pour gagner les lieux sécurisés. Il convient cependant de souligner que suivre l'un des chemins d'invacuation indiqués permettra de répartir entre les différents chemins le flux des personnes concernées par l'invacuation du bâtiment.\n\nExemple\n\nEn cas d'invacuation vers le niveau 04 du parking, vous pouvez suivre ce pictogramme.\n\n## 4.3 Chemins à éviter\n\nSachez qu'il n'est pas possible d'emprunter certains escaliers de secours car ils vous conduiraient immédiatement à l'extérieur du bâtiment, ce qu'il convient d'éviter. Les chemins que vous ne pouvez pas utiliser sont indiqués comme suit:\n\nEn cas d'invacuation vers le parking au niveau 04, n'empruntez pas cet escalier.\n\n## 5. Portes d'invacuation\n\nSi les portes rouges ne peuvent pas être empruntées en cas d'évacuation, la couleur des portes n'a aucune importance lors d'une invacuation: les portes vertes et les portes rouges peuvent être empruntées en cas d'invacuation .\n\nPour trouver votre chemin, suivez les pictogrammes d'invacuation et ignorez la couleur des portes.\n\n93\n\nFR", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Appendice 4 de l'Annexe VII \n\nLes membres du personnel peuvent emprunter d'autres chemins qu'ils connaissent mieux pour gagner les lieux sécurisés. Il convient cependant de souligner que suivre l'un des chemins d'invacuation indiqués permettra de répartir entre les différents chemins le flux des personnes concernées par l'invacuation du bâtiment. \n\nExemple \n\nSachez qu'il n'est pas possible d'emprunter certains escaliers de secours car ils vous conduiraient immédiatement à l'extérieur du bâtiment, ce qu'il convient d'éviter. Les chemins que vous ne pouvez pas utiliser sont indiqués comme suit: \n\nSi les portes rouges ne peuvent pas être empruntées en cas d'évacuation, la couleur des portes n'a aucune importance lors d'une invacuation: les portes vertes et les portes rouges peuvent être empruntées en cas d'invacuation .\n\nPour trouver votre chemin, suivez les pictogrammes d'invacuation et ignorez la couleur des portes. \n\n## 4.3 Chemins à éviter\n\n## 5. Portes d'invacuation\n\nEn cas d'invacuation vers le parking au niveau 04, n'empruntez pas cet escalier. \n\nEn cas d'invacuation vers le niveau 04 du parking, vous pouvez suivre ce pictogramme. \n\n93 FR \n\nANNEX VII" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8457194374750168, + "doc_id": "34667f34d1c44e7fd69a808beb05478a472f53c458ef70724547d91bc90fb869", + "edit_distance": 0.11214953271028037, + "f1_score": 0.9733333333333333, + "meteor": 0.9149223846297303, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## 6 EXPERIENCE\n\nPlease complete a table using the format below to summarise the major relevant supplies carried out over the past 3 years 15 by the legal entity or entities making this tender. The number of references to be provided must not exceed 15 for the entire tender\n\n15 In the case of framework contracts (without contractual value), only specific contracts corresponding to assignments implemented under such framework contracts will be considered.\n\n16 Amounts actually paid, without the effect of inflation.\n\nAugust 2020\n\nPage 3 of 9\n\nc4\\_l\\_tenderform\\_en.doc", + "recall": 0.948051948051948, + "true_md": "## 6 EXPERIENCE\n\nPlease complete a table using the format below to summarise the major relevant supplies carried out over the past 3 years$^{15}$ by the legal entity or entities making this tender. The number of references to be provided must not exceed 15 for the entire tender \n\n15 In the case of framework contracts (without contractual value), only specific contracts corresponding to assignments implemented under such framework contracts will be considered. \n\n$^{16}$ Amounts actually paid, without the effect of inflation. \n\nAugust 2020 c4\\_l\\_tenderform\\_en.doc \n\nPage 3 of 9" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.653260519428019, + "doc_id": "c21ae1ba4e0e9e257620aaf2aea31158606bedd12e8ba7f6078f8786f53f2c82", + "edit_distance": 0.49514563106796117, + "f1_score": 0.9458128078817734, + "meteor": 0.8030879264018594, + "precision": 0.96, + "pred_md": "## 5 ANNEXES\n\nThe Annexes constitutes an integral part of the specifications of the procurement procedure and consists of the following documents:\n\n## 5.2 TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION\n\n- · Annex 1 - Technical Specifications (and its annexes)\n\n## 5.3 CONTRACTUAL DOCUMENTATION\n\n- · Annex 2 - Draft Framework Contract (and its annexes)\n\n## 5.4 PROCUREMENT DOCUMENTATION\n\n## ELIGIBILITY\n\n- · Annex 3 - Declaration on honour -Exclusion and Selection criteria\n- · Annex 4 - Power of Attorney\n- · Annex 5 - List of identified subcontractors\n- · Annex 6 - Commitment letter by an identified subcontractor\n- · Annex 7 - Commitment letter by an entity on whose capacities is being relied\n\n## SELECTION CRITERIA\n\n- · Annex 8 - Financial and Economic Capacity Overview Form\n- · Annex 9 - References\\_Selection criterion T1 ' '\n- · Annex 10 - ISO 9001\\_Selection criterion T2 ' '\n- · Annex 11 - ISO 27001\\_Selection criterion T2 ' '\n\n## AWARD CRITERIA\n\n- · Annex 12 - Price Catalogue\n\n## OTHER ANNEXES\n\n- · Annex 13 - Tenderer's Administrative Data Form\n- · Annex 14 - Minimum requirements checklist\n\n47", + "recall": 0.9320388349514563, + "true_md": "## 5 ANNEXES\n\n## 5.2 TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION\n\n## 5.3 CONTRACTUAL DOCUMENTATION\n\n## 5.4 PROCUREMENT DOCUMENTATION\n\n## ELIGIBILITY\n\n## SELECTION CRITERIA\n\n## AWARD CRITERIA\n\n## OTHER ANNEXES\n\n47\n\n- • Annex 1 - Technical Specifications (and its annexes) \n\n- • Annex 2 - Draft Framework Contract (and its annexes) \n\n- • Annex 3 - Declaration on honour – Exclusion and Selection criteria \n\n- • Annex 4 - Power of Attorney \n\n- • Annex 5 - List of identified subcontractors \n\n- • Annex 6 - Commitment letter by an identified subcontractor \n\n- • Annex 7 - Commitment letter by an entity on whose capacities is being relied \n\n- • Annex 8 - Financial and Economic Capacity Overview Form \n\n- • Annex 9 - “ References\\_Selection criterion T1 ”\n\n- • Annex 10 - “ ISO 9001\\_Selection criterion T2 ”\n\n- • Annex 11 - “ ISO 27001\\_Selection criterion T2 ”\n\n- • Annex 12 - Price Catalogue \n\n- • Annex 13 – Tenderer’s Administrative Data Form \n\n- • Annex 14 - Minimum requirements checklist \n\nThe Annexes constitutes an integral part of the specifications of the procurement procedure and consists of the following documents:" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8803447552843761, + "doc_id": "a281f6507ee45fee5bf3326231824c8db05582618688c11ef043e614308fb6e3", + "edit_distance": 0.16124260355029585, + "f1_score": 0.9853479853479853, + "meteor": 0.8819929832824331, + "precision": 0.9889705882352942, + "pred_md": "EC - FWC services Dec 2018\n\nContract no: [complete]\n\n'Supplier portal' : the e-PRIOR portal, which allows the contractor to exchange electronic business documents, such as invoices, through a graphical user interface.\n\n## II.2. ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES IN THE EVENT OF A JOINT TENDER\n\nIn the event of a joint tender submitted by a group of economic operators and where the group does not have legal personality or legal capacity, one member of the group is appointed as leader of the group.\n\n## II.3. SEVERABILITY\n\nEach provision of this FWC is severable and distinct from the others. If a provision is or becomes illegal, invalid or unenforceable to any extent, it must be severed from the remainder of the FWC. This does not affect the legality, validity or enforceability of any other provisions of the FWC, which continue in full force and effect. The illegal, invalid or unenforceable provision must be replaced by a legal, valid and enforceable substitute provision which corresponds as closely as possible with the actual intent of the parties under the illegal, invalid or unenforceable provision. The replacement of such a provision must be made in accordance with Article II.11. The FWC must be interpreted as if it had contained the substitute provision as from its entry into force.\n\n## II.4. PROVISION OF SERVICES\n\n- II.4.1 Signature of the FWC does not guarantee any actual purchase. The contracting authority is bound only by specific contract s implementing the FWC.\n- II.4.2 The contractor must provide services of high quality standards, in accordance with the state of the art in the industry and the provisions of this FWC, in particular the tender specifications and the terms of its tender. Where the Union has the right to make modifications to the result s, they must be delivered in a format and with the necessary information which effectively allow such modifications to be made in a convenient manner.\n- II.4.3 The contractor must comply with the minimum requirements provided for in the tender specifications. This includes compliance with applicable obligations under environmental, social and labour law established by Union law, national law and collective agreements or by the international environmental, social and labour law provisions listed in Annex X to Directive 2014/24/EU 4 , compliance with data protection obligations resulting from Regulation (EU) 2016/679 5 and Regulation (EU) 2018/1725 6 .\n- II.4.4 The contractor must obtain any permit or licence required in the State where the services are to be provided.\n- II.4.5 All periods specified in the FWC are calculated in calendar days, unless otherwise specified.\n\n4 OJ L 94 of 28.03.2014, p. 65\n\n5 Regulation (EU) 2016/679 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 27 April 2016 on the protection of natural persons with regard to the processing of personal data and on the free movement of such data, and repealing Directive 95/46/EC, OJ L 119, 4.5.2016, p. 1, https://eur-lex.europa.eu/legalcontent/EN/TXT/?uri=uriserv:OJ.L\\_.2016.119.01.0001.01.ENG\n\n6 Regulation (EU) 2018/1725 of 23 October 2018 on the protection of natural persons with regard to the processing of personal data by the Union institutions, bodies, offices and agencies and on the free movement of such data, and repealing Regulation (EC) No 45/2001 and Decision No 1247/2002/EC, OJ L 295/39, 21.11.2018, https://eur-lex.europa.eu/legal-content/EN/TXT/PDF/?uri=CELEX:32018R1725&from=EN\n\n14", + "recall": 0.9817518248175182, + "true_md": "Contract no: [complete] \n\nEC - FWC services Dec 2018 \n\n ‘Supplier portal’ : the e-PRIOR portal, which allows the contractor to exchange electronic business documents, such as invoices, through a graphical user interface. \n\nIn the event of a joint tender submitted by a group of economic operators and where the group does not have legal personality or legal capacity, one member of the group is appointed as leader of the group.\n\nEach provision of this FWC is severable and distinct from the others. If a provision is or becomes illegal, invalid or unenforceable to any extent, it must be severed from the remainder of the FWC. This does not affect the legality, validity or enforceability of any other provisions of the FWC, which continue in full force and effect. The illegal, invalid or unenforceable provision must be replaced by a legal, valid and enforceable substitute provision which corresponds as closely as possible with the actual intent of the parties under the illegal, invalid or unenforceable provision. The replacement of such a provision must be made in accordance with Article II.11. The FWC must be interpreted as if it had contained the substitute provision as from its entry into force. \n\n## II.2. ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES IN THE EVENT OF A JOINT TENDER\n\n## II.3. SEVERABILITY\n\n## II.4. PROVISION OF SERVICES\n\n- II.4.1 Signature of the FWC does not guarantee any actual purchase. The contracting authority is bound only by specific contract s implementing the FWC. \n\n- II.4.2 The contractor must provide services of high quality standards, in accordance with the state of the art in the industry and the provisions of this FWC, in particular the tender specifications and the terms of its tender. Where the Union has the right to make modifications to the result s, they must be delivered in a format and with the necessary information which effectively allow such modifications to be made in a convenient manner.\n\n- II.4.3 The contractor must comply with the minimum requirements provided for in the tender specifications. This includes compliance with applicable obligations under environmental, social and labour law established by Union law, national law and collective agreements or by the international environmental, social and labour law provisions listed in Annex X to Directive 2014/24/EU 4 , compliance with data protection obligations resulting from Regulation (EU) 2016/679 5 and Regulation (EU) 2018/1725 6 . \n\n- II.4.4 The contractor must obtain any permit or licence required in the State where the services are to be provided. \n\n- II.4.5 All periods specified in the FWC are calculated in calendar days, unless otherwise specified.\n\n4 OJ L 94 of 28.03.2014, p. 65 5 Regulation (EU) 2016/679 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 27 April 2016 on the protection of \n\nOJ L 94 of 28.03.2014, p. 65 5 Regulation (EU) 2016/679 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 27 April 2016 on the protection of natural persons with regard to the processing of personal data and on the free movement of such data, and repealing Directive 95/46/EC, OJ L 119, 4.5.2016, p. 1, https://eur-lex.europa.eu/legal- content/EN/TXT/?uri=uriserv:OJ.L\\_.2016.119.01.0001.01.ENG 6 Regulation (EU) 2018/1725 of 23 October 2018 on the protection of natural persons with regard to the \n\ncontent/EN/TXT/?uri=uriserv:OJ.L\\_.2016.119.01.0001.01.ENG 6 Regulation (EU) 2018/1725 of 23 October 2018 on the protection of natural persons with regard to the processing of personal data by the Union institutions, bodies, offices and agencies and on the free movement of such data, and repealing Regulation (EC) No 45/2001 and Decision No 1247/2002/EC, OJ L 295/39, 21.11.2018, https://eur-lex.europa.eu/legal-content/EN/TXT/PDF/?uri=CELEX:32018R1725&from=EN \n\n14" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8329827752507104, + "doc_id": "67e06fd4c99c50b5c3263165eb85f4021aeb4f46c228cdc24b6a8a5e9a2a5d5b", + "edit_distance": 0.4114713216957606, + "f1_score": 0.9763779527559056, + "meteor": 0.8495766620515905, + "precision": 0.9763779527559056, + "pred_md": "EC - FWC services Dec 2018\n\nContract no: [complete]\n\nparties' back offices to allow electronic transfer of documents, the parties agree that an edocument, sent as mentioned in the interface control document , qualifies as an EDI message .\n\n- 3. If the e-document is dispatched through the supplier portal , it is deemed to have been legally issued or sent when the contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) is able to successfully submit the e-document without any error messages. The generated PDF and XML document for the e-document are considered as a proof of receipt by the contracting authority.\n- 4. In the event that an e-document is dispatched using a direct connection established between the parties' back offices , the e-document is deemed to have been legally issued or sent when its status is 'received' as defined in the interface control document .\n- 5. When using the supplier portal , the contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) can download the PDF or XML message for each e-document for one year after submission. After this period, copies of the e-documents are no longer available for automatic download from the supplier portal .\n\n## II.5.5. Authorised persons in e-PRIOR\n\nThe contractor submits a request for each person who needs to be assigned the role of 'user' in ePRIOR . These persons are identified by means of the European Communication Authentication Service (ECAS) and authorised to access and perform actions in e-PRIOR within the permissions of the user roles that the contracting authority has assigned to them.\n\nUser roles enabling these e-PRIOR authorised persons to sign legally binding documents such as specific tenders or specific contracts are granted only upon submission of supporting documents proving that the authorised person is empowered to act as a legal representative of the contractor.\n\n## II.6. LIABILITY\n\n- II.6.1 The contracting authority is not liable for any damage or loss caused by the contractor, including any damage or loss to third parties during or as a consequence of implementation of the FWC .\n- II.6.2 If required by the relevant applicable legislation, the contractor must take out an insurance policy against risks and damage or loss relating to the implementation of the FWC . It must also take out supplementary insurance as reasonably required by standard practice in the industry. Upon request, the contractor must provide evidence of insurance coverage to the contracting authority.\n- II.6.3 The contractor is liable for any loss or damage caused to the contracting authority during or as a consequence of implementation of the FWC , including in the event of subcontracting, but only up to an amount not exceeding three times the total amount of the relevant specific contract . However, if the damage or loss is caused by the gross negligence or wilful misconduct of the contractor or of its personnel or subcontractors, as well as in the case of an action brought against the contracting authority by a third party for breach of its intellectual property rights, the contractor is liable for the whole amount of the damage or loss.\n- II.6.4 If a third party brings any action against the contracting authority in connection with the implementation of the FWC , including any action for alleged breach of intellectual property rights, the contractor must assist the contracting authority in the legal proceedings, including by intervening in support of the contracting authority upon request. If the contracting authority's liability towards the third party is established and that such liability is caused by the contractor during or as a consequence of the implementation of the FWC , Article II.6.3 applies.\n- II.6.5 If the contractor is composed of two or more economic operators (i.e. who submitted a joint tender), they are all jointly and severally liable to the contracting authority for the implementation of the FWC .\n\n17", + "recall": 0.9763779527559056, + "true_md": "Contract no: [complete] \n\nEC - FWC services Dec 2018 \n\nparties’ back offices to allow electronic transfer of documents, the parties agree that an e- document, sent as mentioned in the interface control document , qualifies as an EDI message . If the e-document is dispatched through the supplier portal , it is deemed to have been legally \n\nThe contractor submits a request for each person who needs to be assigned the role of ‘user’ in e- PRIOR . These persons are identified by means of the European Communication Authentication Service (ECAS) and authorised to access and perform actions in e-PRIOR within the permissions of the user roles that the contracting authority has assigned to them. \n\nUser roles enabling these e-PRIOR authorised persons to sign legally binding documents such as specific tenders or specific contracts are granted only upon submission of supporting documents proving that the authorised person is empowered to act as a legal representative of the contractor.\n\n- document, sent as mentioned in the interface control document , qualifies as an EDI message . 3. If the e-document is dispatched through the supplier portal , it is deemed to have been legally issued or sent when the contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) is able to successfully submit the e-document without any error messages. The generated PDF and XML document for the e-document are considered as a proof of receipt by the contracting authority. 4. In the event that an e-document is dispatched using a direct connection established between \n\n- for the e-document are considered as a proof of receipt by the contracting authority. 4. In the event that an e-document is dispatched using a direct connection established between the parties’ back offices , the e-document is deemed to have been legally issued or sent when its status is ‘received’ as defined in the interface control document . 5. When using the supplier portal , the contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) can \n\n- its status is ‘received’ as defined in the interface control document . 5. When using the supplier portal , the contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) can download the PDF or XML message for each e-document for one year after submission. After this period, copies of the e-documents are no longer available for automatic download from the supplier portal .\n\n## II.5.5. Authorised persons in e-PRIOR\n\n## II.6. LIABILITY\n\n- II.6.1 The contracting authority is not liable for any damage or loss caused by the contractor, including any damage or loss to third parties during or as a consequence of implementation of the FWC .\n\n- II.6.2 If required by the relevant applicable legislation, the contractor must take out an insurance policy against risks and damage or loss relating to the implementation of the FWC . It must also take out supplementary insurance as reasonably required by standard practice in the industry. Upon request, the contractor must provide evidence of insurance coverage to the contracting authority. \n\n- II.6.3 The contractor is liable for any loss or damage caused to the contracting authority during or as a consequence of implementation of the FWC , including in the event of subcontracting, but only up to an amount not exceeding three times the total amount of the relevant specific contract . However, if the damage or loss is caused by the gross negligence or wilful misconduct of the contractor or of its personnel or subcontractors, as well as in the case of an action brought against the contracting authority by a third party for breach of its intellectual property rights, the contractor is liable for the whole amount of the damage or loss. \n\n- II.6.4 If a third party brings any action against the contracting authority in connection with the implementation of the FWC , including any action for alleged breach of intellectual property rights, the contractor must assist the contracting authority in the legal proceedings, including by intervening in support of the contracting authority upon request. If the contracting authority’s liability towards the third party is established and that such liability is caused by the contractor during or as a consequence of the implementation of the FWC , Article II.6.3 applies.\n\n- II.6.5 If the contractor is composed of two or more economic operators (i.e. who submitted a joint tender), they are all jointly and severally liable to the contracting authority for the implementation of the FWC . \n\n17" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9637952158989996, + "doc_id": "2c92c4703ef30c93801e6bc50607354269e6f8ec41065cc8eb86430a784547bc", + "edit_distance": 0.19710144927536233, + "f1_score": 0.9910447761194029, + "meteor": 0.9773555482711347, + "precision": 0.9940119760479041, + "pred_md": "In case the contractor failed to notify the contracting authority about the existence of the professional conflicting interests before the signature of the specific contract and it is discovered during the specific contract performance or in case the professional conflicting interest occurred during the specific contract performance, the Contracting Authority may terminate the specific contract pursuant to Article II.17.1.(h) of the Draft Framework Contract.\n\n## 3.3. Compliance with the minimum requirements of the Tender specifications\n\nBy submitting a tender, a tenderer commits without any reservations or restrictions to perform the contract in full compliance with the terms and conditions of the procurement documents for this call for tenders.\n\nParticular attention is drawn to the minimum requirements specified in section 1.4.2 of these Tender Specifications and to the fact that tenders must comply with applicable data protection (GDPR), environmental, social and labour law obligations established by Union law, national legislation, collective agreements or the international environmental, social and labour conventions listed in Annex X to Directive 2014/24/EU.\n\nA checklist of minimum requirements can be found in Annex 14 ' Minimum Requirements Checklist ' . This checklist shall be filled in and signed by the tenderer and has to be submitted as part of the tender.\n\nThe initial verification of compliance of tenders with the minimum requirements specified in the procurement documents will be done on the basis of the submitted declarations in the check-list.\n\nThe minimum requirements shall be observed throughout the entire duration of the contract. Compliance with these requirements is mandatory and cannot be subject to any assumptions, limitations, conditions, or reservations on the part of a tenderer.\n\n Tenders that are not compliant with the applicable minimum requirements shall be rejected.\n\n## 3.4 Award criteria\n\nThis section describes the assessment basis for each Award Criterion (AW) and provides detailed instructions for the tenderers to prepare their offers.\n\n## LOT 1\n\n28", + "recall": 0.9880952380952381, + "true_md": "In case the contractor failed to notify the contracting authority about the existence of the professional conflicting interests before the signature of the specific contract and it is discovered during the specific contract performance or in case the professional conflicting interest occurred during the specific contract performance, the Contracting Authority may terminate the specific contract pursuant to Article II.17.1.(h) of the Draft Framework Contract. \n\nBy submitting a tender, a tenderer commits without any reservations or restrictions to perform the contract in full compliance with the terms and conditions of the procurement documents for this call for tenders.\n\nParticular attention is drawn to the minimum requirements specified in section 1.4.2 of these Tender Specifications and to the fact that tenders must comply with applicable data protection (GDPR), environmental, social and labour law obligations established by Union law, national legislation, collective agreements or the international environmental, social and labour conventions listed in Annex X to Directive 2014/24/EU. \n\nA checklist of minimum requirements can be found in Annex 14 “ Minimum Requirements Checklist ” . This checklist shall be filled in and signed by the tenderer and has to be submitted as part of the tender.\n\nThe initial verification of compliance of tenders with the minimum requirements specified in the procurement documents will be done on the basis of the submitted declarations in the check-list. \n\nThe minimum requirements shall be observed throughout the entire duration of the contract. Compliance with these requirements is mandatory and cannot be subject to any assumptions, limitations, conditions, or reservations on the part of a tenderer.\n\nThis section describes the assessment basis for each Award Criterion (AW) and provides detailed instructions for the tenderers to prepare their offers.\n\n## 3.4 Award criteria\n\n## LOT 1\n\n28\n\n## 3.3. Compliance with the minimum requirements of the Tender specifications\n\n Tenders that are not compliant with the applicable minimum requirements shall be rejected." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9708577374444574, + "doc_id": "40a9524f479fab291205ab337b8396ec129a6210cc2c5c00947bccca3263634f", + "edit_distance": 0.059674502712477394, + "f1_score": 0.9851485148514852, + "meteor": 0.9912752954478392, + "precision": 0.9851485148514851, + "pred_md": "Contract number: [ complete ]\n\nContract conditions of December 2015\n\nE-mail is deemed to have been received by the receiving party on the day of dispatch of that e-mail, provided that it is sent to the e-mail address indicated in Article I.8. The sending party must be able to prove the date of dispatch. In the event that the sending party receives a non-delivery report, it must make every effort to ensure that the other party actually receives the communication by email or mail. In such a case, the sending party is not held in breach of its obligation to send such communication within a specified deadline.\n\nMail sent to the contracting authority is deemed to have been received by the contracting authority on the date on which the department responsible referred to in Article I.8 registers it.\n\nFormal notifications are considered to have been received by the receiving party on the date of receipt indicated in the proof received by the sending party that the message was delivered to the specified recipient.\n\n## II.5.3. Submission of e-documents via e-PRIOR\n\nIf provided for in the special conditions, the exchange of electronic documents (edocuments) such as invoices between the parties is automated through the use of the ePRIOR platform. This platform provides two possibilities for such exchanges: either through web services (machine-to-machine connection) or through a web application (the supplier portal ).\n\nThe contracting authority takes the necessary measures to implement and maintain electronic systems that enable the supplier portal to be used effectively.\n\nIn the case of machine-to-machine connection, a direct connection is established between the parties' back offices . In this case, the parties take the measures necessary on their side to implement and maintain electronic systems that enable the machine-to-machine connection to be used effectively. The electronic systems are specified in the interface control document . The contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) must take the necessary technical measures to set up a machine-to-machine connection and at its own cost.\n\nIf communication via the supplier portal or via the web services (machine-to-machine connection) is hindered by factors beyond the control of one party, it must notify the other immediately and the parties must take the necessary measures to restore this communication.\n\nIf it is impossible to restore the communication within two working days, one party must notify the other that alternative means of communication specified in Article II.5.1 will be used until the supplier portal or the machine-to-machine connection is restored.\n\nWhen a change in the interface control document requires adaptations, the contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) has up to six months from receipt of the notification to implement this change. This period can be shortened by mutual agreement of the parties. This period does not apply to urgent measures required by the security policy of the contracting authority to ensure integrity, confidentiality and non-repudiation of information and the availability of e-PRIOR , which must be applied immediately.\n\n## II.5.4. Validity and date of e-documents\n\n17", + "recall": 0.9851485148514851, + "true_md": "Contract conditions of December 2015 \n\nContract number: [ complete ] \n\nE-mail is deemed to have been received by the receiving party on the day of dispatch of that e-mail, provided that it is sent to the e-mail address indicated in Article I.8. The sending party must be able to prove the date of dispatch. In the event that the sending party receives a non-delivery report, it must make every effort to ensure that the other party actually receives the communication by email or mail. In such a case, the sending party is not held in breach of its obligation to send such communication within a specified deadline. \n\nMail sent to the contracting authority is deemed to have been received by the contracting authority on the date on which the department responsible referred to in Article I.8 registers it. \n\nFormal notifications are considered to have been received by the receiving party on the date of receipt indicated in the proof received by the sending party that the message was delivered to the specified recipient.\n\nIf provided for in the special conditions, the exchange of electronic documents (e- documents) such as invoices between the parties is automated through the use of the e- PRIOR platform. This platform provides two possibilities for such exchanges: either through web services (machine-to-machine connection) or through a web application (the supplier portal ).\n\n## II.5.3. Submission of e-documents via e-PRIOR\n\nThe contracting authority takes the necessary measures to implement and maintain electronic systems that enable the supplier portal to be used effectively.\n\nIn the case of machine-to-machine connection, a direct connection is established between the parties’ back offices . In this case, the parties take the measures necessary on their side to implement and maintain electronic systems that enable the machine-to-machine connection to be used effectively. The electronic systems are specified in the interface control document . The contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) must take the necessary technical measures to set up a machine-to-machine connection and at its own cost. \n\nIf communication via the supplier portal or via the web services (machine-to-machine connection) is hindered by factors beyond the control of one party, it must notify the other immediately and the parties must take the necessary measures to restore this communication.\n\nIf it is impossible to restore the communication within two working days, one party must notify the other that alternative means of communication specified in Article II.5.1 will be used until the supplier portal or the machine-to-machine connection is restored.\n\nWhen a change in the interface control document requires adaptations, the contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) has up to six months from receipt of the notification to implement this change. This period can be shortened by mutual agreement of the parties. This period does not apply to urgent measures required by the security policy of the contracting authority to ensure integrity, confidentiality and non-repudiation of information and the availability of e-PRIOR , which must be applied immediately.\n\n## II.5.4. Validity and date of e-documents\n\n17" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7753141599374305, + "doc_id": "70cf2c034fc6f7e0b309eff3c78248fe6ef1b1fba300ddb156d33b90dbe26173", + "edit_distance": 0.34532374100719426, + "f1_score": 0.9947826086956522, + "meteor": 0.6687126361361387, + "precision": 0.9965156794425087, + "pred_md": "ANNEXE VI\n\n## ACCÈS POUR LE PERSONNEL DU CONTRACTANT\n\n## I. Un badge standard d'accès aux locaux du Secrétariat pour le personnel du contractant\n\n- 1. Toute personne qui demande à accéder aux locaux du pouvoir adjudicateur (ci-après dénommé le \"Secrétariat\") doit d'abord être accréditée par le bureau Gestion des accès. L'accréditation est le processus d'octroi de l'accès approprié au(x) bâtiment(s) du Secrétariat une fois qu'il a été confirmé que la personne en question est autorisée à entrer.\n- 2. Le contractant doit communiquer les noms des personnes qui ont besoin d'un badge standard à l'adresse mentionnée à l'article I.8. Pour chaque personne ayant besoin d'un badge standard, le contractant doit présenter, dans les plus brefs délais après la signature du CC, les documents justificatifs suivants:\n- i) un extrait de casier judiciaire émis au cours des deux derniers mois 13 ;\n- ii) une pièce d'identité, à savoir un document avec photo, tel qu'une carte d'identité nationale ou un passeport. D'autres documents, comme une carte de crédit ou un permis de conduire, ne seront pas acceptés comme pièces d'identité;\n- iii) tout autre document requis en vertu de la législation nationale à des fins de vérification de sécurité, comme prévu au point 4.\n- 3. Si l'extrait de casier judiciaire et la pièce d'identité mentionnés au point 2 sont acceptés par le Secrétariat, un badge standard est délivré pour une période maximale d'un an (et est ensuite renouvelé si nécessaire).\n- L'extrait de casier judiciaire doit être présenté au Secrétariat tous les deux ans, sur demande.\n- 4. Tout membre du personnel du contractant ayant la nationalité belge ou ayant sa résidence en Belgique 14 qui demande un accès permanent aux locaux du Secrétariat doit faire l'objet d'une vérification de sécurité effectuée par l'Autorité nationale de sécurité de Belgique, qui délivrera un avis de sécurité 15 . Par conséquent le contractant doit présenter un formulaire de consentement 16 , signé par la personne qui a besoin du badge standard. Si la personne obtient un avis de sécurité positif, elle conservera le badge standard qui lui a déjà été attribué. Toutefois, en cas de réponse négative, le badge standard sera révoqué par le Secrétariat et la personne ne pourra pas entrer dans le bâtiment.\n\nVeuillez noter que pour l'Autorité nationale de sécurité de Belgique et le Secrétariat, la validité de l'avis de sécurité est de cinq ans au maximum . Pour en savoir plus sur la demande d'avis de sécurité, veuillez consulter le site suivant: https://www.nvoans.be/fr/administrations-publiques/autres-verifications-desecurite/demander-un-avis-de-securite.\n\n13 \"Extrait de casier judiciaire\" (FR)/\"uittreksel strafregister\" (NL) pour la Belgique, ou document équivalent pour tout autre État membre.\n\n14 Il convient de noter que les travailleurs étrangers en Belgique sont tenus de respecter la loi du 15 décembre 1980 sur l'accès au territoire, le séjour, l'établissement et l'éloignement des étrangers et de suivre les procédures définies pour les ressortissants de l'UE et les ressortissants de pays tiers. De plus amples informations sont disponibles sur le site web de l'Office des étrangers à l'adresse suivante:\n\nhttps://dofi.ibz.be/sites/dvzoe/FR/Guidedesprocedures/Pages/default.aspx\n\nLes travailleurs transfrontaliers qui résident en France, aux Pays-Bas, au Luxembourg ou en Allemagne et qui travaillent en Belgique doivent fournir une annexe 15 pour obtenir un avis de sécurité.\n\n15 Le terme français \"avis de sécurité\" a été traduit en anglais par \"Security Advice\" dans des documents publiés par le gouvernement belge; voir par exemple le site web suivant: https://www.nvoans.be/en/public-administrations/other-security-checks/asking-security-advice.\n\n16 Le formulaire est disponible en FR et en NL et peut être obtenu auprès du Secrétariat. Une version EN est disponible à titre d'information uniquement.\n\n43\n\nANNEX VI\n\nFR", + "recall": 0.9930555555555556, + "true_md": "## ACCÈS POUR LE PERSONNEL DU CONTRACTANT\n\n## I. Un badge standard d'accès aux locaux du Secrétariat pour le personnel du contractant\n\n- 1. Toute personne qui demande à accéder aux locaux du pouvoir adjudicateur (ci-après dénommé le \"Secrétariat\") doit d'abord être accréditée par le bureau Gestion des accès. L'accréditation est le processus d'octroi de l'accès approprié au(x) bâtiment(s) du Secrétariat une fois qu'il a été confirmé que la personne en question est autorisée à entrer. \n\n- 2. Le contractant doit communiquer les noms des personnes qui ont besoin d'un badge standard à l'adresse mentionnée à l'article I.8. Pour chaque personne ayant besoin d'un badge standard, le contractant doit présenter, dans les plus brefs délais après la signature du CC, les documents justificatifs suivants: \n\n- i) un extrait de casier judiciaire émis au cours des deux derniers mois 13 ; ii) une pièce d'identité, à savoir un document avec photo, tel qu'une carte d'identité \n\n- i) un extrait de casier judiciaire émis au cours des deux derniers mois ; ii) une pièce d'identité, à savoir un document avec photo, tel qu'une carte d'identité nationale ou un passeport. D'autres documents, comme une carte de crédit ou un permis de conduire, ne seront pas acceptés comme pièces d'identité; iii) tout autre document requis en vertu de la législation nationale à des fins de vérification \n\n- de conduire, ne seront pas acceptés comme pièces d'identité; iii) tout autre document requis en vertu de la législation nationale à des fins de vérification de sécurité, comme prévu au point 4. \n\n- 3. Si l'extrait de casier judiciaire et la pièce d'identité mentionnés au point 2 sont acceptés par le Secrétariat, un badge standard est délivré pour une période maximale d'un an (et est ensuite renouvelé si nécessaire). \n\n- 4. Tout membre du personnel du contractant ayant la nationalité belge ou ayant sa résidence en Belgique 14 qui demande un accès permanent aux locaux du Secrétariat doit faire l'objet d'une vérification de sécurité effectuée par l'Autorité nationale de sécurité de Belgique, qui délivrera un avis de sécurité 15 . Par conséquent le contractant doit présenter un formulaire de consentement 16 , signé par la personne qui a besoin du badge standard. Si la personne obtient un avis de sécurité positif, elle conservera le badge standard qui lui a déjà été attribué. Toutefois, en cas de réponse négative, le badge standard sera révoqué par le Secrétariat et la personne ne pourra pas entrer dans le bâtiment. \n\n13 \"Extrait de casier judiciaire\" (FR)/\"uittreksel strafregister\" (NL) pour la Belgique, ou document équivalent pour tout autre État membre. 14 Il convient de noter que les travailleurs étrangers en Belgique sont tenus de respecter la loi du 15 décembre 1980 sur \n\nautre État membre. 14 Il convient de noter que les travailleurs étrangers en Belgique sont tenus de respecter la loi du 15 décembre 1980 sur l'accès au territoire, le séjour, l'établissement et l'éloignement des étrangers et de suivre les procédures définies pour les ressortissants de l'UE et les ressortissants de pays tiers. De plus amples informations sont disponibles sur le site web de l'Office des étrangers à l'adresse suivante: https://dofi.ibz.be/sites/dvzoe/FR/Guidedesprocedures/Pages/default.aspx Les travailleurs transfrontaliers qui résident en France, aux Pays-Bas, au Luxembourg ou en Allemagne et qui travaillent en Belgique doivent fournir une annexe 15 pour obtenir un avis de sécurité. 15 Le terme français \"avis de sécurité\" a été traduit en anglais par \"Security Advice\" dans des documents publiés par le \n\ntravaillent en Belgique doivent fournir une annexe 15 pour obtenir un avis de sécurité. 15 Le terme français \"avis de sécurité\" a été traduit en anglais par \"Security Advice\" dans des documents publiés par le gouvernement belge; voir par exemple le site web suivant: https://www.nvoans.be/en/public-administrations/other-security-checks/asking-security-advice. 16 Le formulaire est disponible en FR et en NL et peut être obtenu auprès du Secrétariat. Une version EN est disponible \n\n43 https://www.nvoans.be/en/public-administrations/other-security-checks/asking-security-advice. 16 Le formulaire est disponible en FR et en NL et peut être obtenu auprès du Secrétariat. Une version EN est disponible à titre d'information uniquement. \n\n43 FR \n\nANNEX VI \n\nVeuillez noter que pour l'Autorité nationale de sécurité de Belgique et le Secrétariat, la validité de l'avis de sécurité est de cinq ans au maximum . Pour en savoir plus sur la demande d'avis de sécurité, veuillez consulter le site suivant: https://www.nvoans.be/fr/administrations-publiques/autres-verifications-de- securite/demander-un-avis-de-securite.\n\nL'extrait de casier judiciaire doit être présenté au Secrétariat tous les deux ans, sur demande. \n\n## ANNEXE VI" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.941859105344307, + "doc_id": "ae41aab15d120c58e67db20beacfdbcfc6e01f7f02ce7b9914c442b630359530", + "edit_distance": 0.17336683417085427, + "f1_score": 0.981029810298103, + "meteor": 0.9710341333433501, + "precision": 0.9836956521739131, + "pred_md": "## 1.3 Lots: is this call for tenders divided into lots?\n\nThis call for tenders is divided into two lots:\n\nLot 1: Primary channel for TRANSFORM initiatives, primarily covering IT services on project-based activities for the construction of new products and other specialised services.\n\nLot 2: Primary channel for RUN and GROW initiatives, primarily covering IT services on project-based activities covering the enhancement of existing products and delivery of established services such as keeping the products up and running, address changes, fixes and user support activities.\n\nTenders may be submitted for both lots. Each lot will be assessed independently of the other lot. Tenders which cover only part of one lot or are declared as being conditional on the award of the other lot are not permitted.\n\nEconomic operators may submit only one tender per lot (as sole tenderer and/or as part of a group of tenderers as defined in section 2.4 below).\n\n## 1.4 Description: what do we want to buy through this call for tenders?\n\nThe scope of the call for tenders covers services for existing and new IT systems of ECHA, as follows:\n\nThe services that are the subject of this call for tenders, the specific requirements concerning their performance, as well as the minimum service levels required and the applicable liquidated damages in case of their non-fulfilment are described in detail in the 'Technical Specifications' in Annex 1 and the Service Level Agreement (Annex 16 to the Technical Specifications).\n\nVariants (alternatives to the model solution described in the 'Technical Specifications' in Annex 1) are not allowed. The Contracting Authority will disregard any variants described in a tender.\n\n## Product names and trademarks\n\nWith the exception of ECHA's specific tools in scope of this framework contract, as described in the Technical Specifications (Annex 1), whenever the tender documentation mentions a specific product name or trademark and a sufficiently precise and fully intelligible description is not possible, such mention should be understood as referring to that product or its equivalent.\n\n## 1.4.1 Background and objectives\n\nPlease refer to section 1 of Annex 1 'Technical S pecifications' .\n\n5", + "recall": 0.9783783783783784, + "true_md": "## 1.3 Lots: is this call for tenders divided into lots?\n\nThis call for tenders is divided into two lots: \n\nLot 1: Primary channel for TRANSFORM initiatives, primarily covering IT services on project-based activities for the construction of new products and other specialised services. \n\nLot 2: Primary channel for RUN and GROW initiatives, primarily covering IT services on project-based activities covering the enhancement of existing products and delivery of established services such as keeping the products up and running, address changes, fixes and user support activities. \n\nTenders may be submitted for both lots. Each lot will be assessed independently of the other lot. Tenders which cover only part of one lot or are declared as being conditional on the award of the other lot are not permitted. \n\nEconomic operators may submit only one tender per lot (as sole tenderer and/or as part of a group of tenderers as defined in section 2.4 below). \n\nThe scope of the call for tenders covers services for existing and new IT systems of ECHA, as follows: \n\nThe services that are the subject of this call for tenders, the specific requirements concerning their performance, as well as the minimum service levels required and the applicable liquidated damages in case of their non-fulfilment are described in detail in the “Technical Specifications” in Annex 1 and the Service Level Agreement (Annex 16 to the Technical Specifications). \n\nVariants (alternatives to the model solution described in the “Technical Specifications” in Annex 1) are not allowed. The Contracting Authority will disregard any variants described in a tender.\n\nWith the exception of ECHA’s specific tools in scope of this framework contract, as described in the Technical Specifications (Annex 1), whenever the tender documentation mentions a specific product name or trademark and a sufficiently precise and fully intelligible description is not possible, such mention should be understood as referring to that product or its equivalent.\n\nPlease refer to section 1 of Annex 1 “Technical S pecifications” . \n\n5\n\n## 1.4.1 Background and objectives\n\n## Product names and trademarks\n\n## 1.4 Description: what do we want to buy through this call for tenders?" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8246863630208854, + "doc_id": "9b44263559fa42c1ce6a8feaa577ce534d7f5b3e82e350f96df2c6e51e3ae827", + "edit_distance": 0.3387096774193548, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.8330660376460868, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Appendice 4 de l'Annexe VII\n\n## PROCÉDURES D'INVACUATION\n\nCommunication au Personnel - CP 43/18 - 28 Juin 2018\n\nInvacuer, c'est quitter un lieu à risque de la manière la plus rapide et la plus sûre possible pour se rendre dans un lieu sûr situé à l'intérieur du même bâtiment.\n\nIl n'existe pas de procédure établie étant donné que chaque invacuation sera adaptée à l'évènement qui la provoque. En fonction de la situation, la totalité ou seulement une partie d'un bâtiment peut être concernée par la procédure.\n\nIl est dès lors absolument essentiel d'écouter d'abord attentivement les instructions diffusées par haut-parleur ou par tout autre moyen avant d'entreprendre quelqu'action que ce soit. Ces instructions vous indiqueront ce qu'il faut faire et où aller.\n\n## 1. ALARME\n\nL'ordre d'invacuation sera donné par haut-parleur. D'ordinaire, une brève alarme sonore précédera l'annonce vocale.\n\nVeuillez garder votre calme et écouter attentivement les instructions vous indiquant ce qu'il faut faire et où aller - elles peuvent être diffusées par haut-parleur, par des membres du personnel de l'Unité Prévention (reconnaissables à leur veste de couleur rouge et jaune), par des stewards d'évacuation (vestes jaunes), des agents de sécurité (vestes de couleur jaune et bleue) ou des agents de prévention et de sécurité.\n\nAccordez une attention particulière aux personnes à mobilité réduite.\n\nPour signaler tout danger ou problème urgent pendant l'invacuation, composez le (+32 2 281) 2000 .\n\n## 2. LIEUX SÛRS\n\nDans toute invacuation, le lieu sûr vers lequel vous serez dirigé dépendra:\n\n- - de l'endroit où vous vous trouvez au moment où l'alarme est donnée\n- - de la cause de la décision d'invacuer et\n- - du nombre de personnes à déplacer.\n\nVous serez informé de ce que vous devez faire et de l'emplacement exact du lieu sécurisé. Dans un premier temps, on vous demandera peut-être de rester dans votre bureau et d'attendre.\n\nPour votre sécurité personnelle, n'essayez pas de quitter le bâtiment. En fonction de la menace, une ou plusieurs entrées du bâtiment peuvent être condamnées.\n\n91\n\nANNEX VII\n\nFR", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Appendice 4 de l'Annexe VII \n\n## PROCÉDURES D'INVACUATION\n\n## Communication au Personnel - CP 43/18 - 28 Juin 2018\n\nInvacuer, c'est quitter un lieu à risque de la manière la plus rapide et la plus sûre possible pour se rendre dans un lieu sûr situé à l'intérieur du même bâtiment. \n\nIl n'existe pas de procédure établie étant donné que chaque invacuation sera adaptée à l'évènement qui la provoque. En fonction de la situation, la totalité ou seulement une partie d'un bâtiment peut être concernée par la procédure. \n\nIl est dès lors absolument essentiel d'écouter d'abord attentivement les instructions diffusées par haut-parleur ou par tout autre moyen avant d'entreprendre quelqu'action que ce soit. Ces instructions vous indiqueront ce qu'il faut faire et où aller.\n\nL'ordre d'invacuation sera donné par haut-parleur. D'ordinaire, une brève alarme sonore précédera l'annonce vocale. \n\nVeuillez garder votre calme et écouter attentivement les instructions vous indiquant ce qu'il faut faire et où aller - elles peuvent être diffusées par haut-parleur, par des membres du personnel de l'Unité Prévention (reconnaissables à leur veste de couleur rouge et jaune), par des stewards d'évacuation (vestes jaunes), des agents de sécurité (vestes de couleur jaune et bleue) ou des agents de prévention et de sécurité. Accordez une attention particulière aux personnes à mobilité réduite. \n\nagents de prévention et de sécurité. Accordez une attention particulière aux personnes à mobilité réduite. \n\nPour signaler tout danger ou problème urgent pendant l'invacuation, composez le (+32 2 281) 2000 . \n\nDans toute invacuation, le lieu sûr vers lequel vous serez dirigé dépendra: \n\nVous serez informé de ce que vous devez faire et de l'emplacement exact du lieu sécurisé. Dans un premier temps, on vous demandera peut-être de rester dans votre bureau et d'attendre. \n\nPour votre sécurité personnelle, n'essayez pas de quitter le bâtiment. En fonction de la menace, une ou plusieurs entrées du bâtiment peuvent être condamnées. \n\n- - de l'endroit où vous vous trouvez au moment où l'alarme est donnée - de la cause de la décision d'invacuer et \n\n- - de l'endroit où vous vous trouvez au moment où l'alarme est donnée - de la cause de la décision d'invacuer et - du nombre de personnes à déplacer. \n\n- - de la cause de la décision d'invacuer et - du nombre de personnes à déplacer. \n\n91 FR \n\nANNEX VII \n\n## 2. LIEUX SÛRS\n\n## 1. ALARME" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.891305645914478, + "doc_id": "dc8eb2e231f166ab0b59cf1dcfe5c1737d249549fdaa1cf168023e0618f950e0", + "edit_distance": 0.8739770867430442, + "f1_score": 0.9799554565701558, + "meteor": 0.6687599166604941, + "precision": 0.9865470852017937, + "pred_md": "De plus amples informations sur le traitement des données à caractère personnel par le Secrétariat dans le cadre des avis sont disponibles à l'adresse suivante: https://www.consilium.europa.eu/fr/general-secretariat/corporate-policies/dataprotection/search/?reference=261R00.\n\n- 5. Si le personnel du contractant doit entrer dans des zones sécurisées du Secrétariat, il doit être en possession de l'autorisation préalable délivrée par le service du Secrétariat chargé de la zone sécurisée concernée ainsi que d'une habilitation de sécurité en cours de validité. Voir également le lien suivant: https://www.nvoans.be/fr/informations-generales/habilitations-desecurite.\n\n## II. Badge d'accès événementiel pour le personnel du contractant\n\n- 1. Afin d'assurer la sécurité publique de certains événements, notamment les sommets européens ou d'autres événements de haut niveau, les autorités belges compétentes effectuent une vérification de sécurité et délivrent ensuite une attestation de sécurité.\n- 2. Le personnel du contractant qui a besoin d'avoir accès au périmètre de sécurité d'un événement spécifique doit être en possession d'un badge d'accès événementiel spécifique. Ces badges donnent accès à certaines zones pendant la durée limitée de cet événement.\n- 3. Avant de se voir accorder un badge d'accès événementiel, chaque membre du personnel du contractant ayant sa résidence en Belgique et ayant besoin d'avoir accès à un événement spécifique doit faire l'objet d'une vérification de sécurité pour recevoir l'attestation de sécurité mentionnée au point 1. En conséquence, le contractant doit présenter au Secrétariat un formulaire de consentement 17 signé par la personne concernée. Le Secrétariat transmet le formulaire de consentement signé aux autorités belges. L'attestation de sécurité qu'elles délivrent est valable pour une année civile 18 .\n\nPour de plus amples informations, voir:\n\nhttps://www.nvoans.be/fr/administrations-publiques/autres-verifications-desecurite/demander-une-attestation-de-securite.\n\nTout membre du personnel du contractant vivant en dehors de la Belgique et ayant besoin d'un badge d'accès événementiel spécifique doit se soumettre à des contrôles de sécurité effectués par la présidence du Conseil de l'UE avant le début de la période semestrielle de chaque présidence 19 . Le contrôle de sécurité est valable pendant six mois.\n\nSi la personne concernée obtient une attestation de sécurité positive, elle se verra accorder le badge d'accès événementiel. Toutefois, en cas de réponse négative, le Secrétariat ne délivrera pas le badge d'accès événementiel.\n\n- 4. Si un membre du personnel du contractant, en possession d'un badge standard, reçoit une attestation de sécurité négative ou si le résultat du contrôle de sécurité le concernant est négatif, non seulement il se verra refuser l'octroi d'un badge d'accès événementiel, mais son badge standard sera en outre révoqué. Le badge standard devra être immédiatement restitué au bureau Gestion des accès du Secrétariat.\n\nDe plus amples informations sur le traitement des données à caractère personnel par le Secrétariat dans le cadre de l'accréditation pour les sommets sont disponibles à l'adresse suivante:\n\nhttps://www.consilium.europa.eu/fr/general-secretariat/corporate-policies/dataprotection/search/?reference=060R00\n\n17 Le formulaire est disponible en FR, NL et EN et peut être obtenu auprès du Secrétariat.\n\n18 Du 1 er janvier au 31 décembre.\n\n19 Chaque présidence du Conseil de l'UE a une durée qui s'étend soit du 1 er janvier au 30 juin, soit du 1 er juillet au 31 décembre.\n\n44\n\nANNEX VI\n\nFR", + "recall": 0.9734513274336283, + "true_md": "De plus amples informations sur le traitement des données à caractère personnel par le Secrétariat dans le cadre des avis sont disponibles à l'adresse suivante: https://www.consilium.europa.eu/fr/general-secretariat/corporate-policies/data- protection/search/?reference=261R00. \n\nPour de plus amples informations, voir: \n\nhttps://www.nvoans.be/fr/administrations-publiques/autres-verifications-de- securite/demander-une-attestation-de-securite. \n\nTout membre du personnel du contractant vivant en dehors de la Belgique et ayant besoin d'un badge d'accès événementiel spécifique doit se soumettre à des contrôles de sécurité effectués par la présidence du Conseil de l'UE avant le début de la période semestrielle de chaque présidence 19 . Le contrôle de sécurité est valable pendant six mois.\n\nSi la personne concernée obtient une attestation de sécurité positive, elle se verra accorder le badge d'accès événementiel. Toutefois, en cas de réponse négative, le Secrétariat ne délivrera pas le badge d'accès événementiel. \n\nDe plus amples informations sur le traitement des données à caractère personnel par le Secrétariat dans le cadre de l'accréditation pour les sommets sont disponibles à l'adresse suivante: \n\nhttps://www.consilium.europa.eu/fr/general-secretariat/corporate-policies/data- protection/search/?reference=060R00 \n\n17 Le formulaire est disponible en FR, NL et EN et peut être obtenu auprès du Secrétariat. 18 Du 1 er janvier au 31 décembre. \n\nLe formulaire est disponible en FR, NL et EN et peut être obtenu auprès du Secrétariat. 18 Du 1 er janvier au 31 décembre. 19 Chaque présidence du Conseil de l'UE a une durée qui s'étend soit du 1\n\n44 Du 1 janvier au 31 décembre. 19 Chaque présidence du Conseil de l'UE a une durée qui s'étend soit du 1 er janvier au 30 juin, soit du 1 er juillet au 31 décembre. \n\n44 FR \n\nANNEX VI \n\n- 4. Si un membre du personnel du contractant, en possession d'un badge standard, reçoit une attestation de sécurité négative ou si le résultat du contrôle de sécurité le concernant est négatif, non seulement il se verra refuser l'octroi d'un badge d'accès événementiel, mais son badge standard sera en outre révoqué. Le badge standard devra être immédiatement restitué au bureau Gestion des accès du Secrétariat. \n\n- 3. Avant de se voir accorder un badge d'accès événementiel, chaque membre du personnel du contractant ayant sa résidence en Belgique et ayant besoin d'avoir accès à un événement spécifique doit faire l'objet d'une vérification de sécurité pour recevoir l'attestation de sécurité mentionnée au point 1. En conséquence, le contractant doit présenter au Secrétariat un formulaire de consentement 17 signé par la personne concernée. Le Secrétariat transmet le formulaire de consentement signé aux autorités belges. L'attestation de sécurité qu'elles délivrent est valable pour une année civile 18 . \n\n- 2. Le personnel du contractant qui a besoin d'avoir accès au périmètre de sécurité d'un événement spécifique doit être en possession d'un badge d'accès événementiel spécifique. Ces badges donnent accès à certaines zones pendant la durée limitée de cet événement. \n\n- 1. Afin d'assurer la sécurité publique de certains événements, notamment les sommets européens ou d'autres événements de haut niveau, les autorités belges compétentes effectuent une vérification de sécurité et délivrent ensuite une attestation de sécurité. \n\n- 5. Si le personnel du contractant doit entrer dans des zones sécurisées du Secrétariat, il doit être en possession de l'autorisation préalable délivrée par le service du Secrétariat chargé de la zone sécurisée concernée ainsi que d'une habilitation de sécurité en cours de validité. Voir également le lien suivant: https://www.nvoans.be/fr/informations-generales/habilitations-de- securite. \n\n## II. Badge d'accès événementiel pour le personnel du contractant" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.991678063457412, + "doc_id": "7df83d899a53b726e66f4c8dec6286d915216fd4b67116be9c5075bb55c8f438", + "edit_distance": 0.04419889502762431, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999710779948062, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "\"fraude\" : acte ou omission en vue, pour son auteur ou une autre personne, de réaliser un gain illicite en causant un préjudice aux intérêts financiers de l'Union, et relatif: i) à l'utilisation ou à la présentation de déclarations ou de documents faux, inexacts ou incomplets, ayant pour effet le détournement ou la rétention indue de fonds ou d'avoirs provenant du budget de l'Union, ii) à la non-communication d'une information en violation d'une obligation spécifique, ayant le même effet, ou iii) au détournement de tels fonds ou avoirs à des fins autres que celles pour lesquelles ils ont été initialement accordés, qui porte atteinte aux intérêts financiers de l'Union;\n\n\"information ou document confidentiel\" : toute information ou tout document reçu par chaque partie de la part de l'autre partie, ou auquel chaque partie a accès dans le cadre de l' exécution du CC , que l'une d'entre elles a désigné par écrit comme étant confidentiel. Les informations et documents confidentiels ne comprennent pas d'informations accessibles au public;\n\n\"intérêts à caractère professionnel contradictoires\" : situation dans laquelle les activités professionnelles précédentes ou actuelles du contractant portent atteinte à sa capacité d'exécuter le CC ou le bon de commande selon une norme de qualité appropriée;\n\n\"irrégularité\" : toute violation d'une disposition du droit de l'Union résultant d'un acte ou d'une omission d'un opérateur économique qui a ou aurait pour effet de porter préjudice au budget de l'Union;\n\n\"matériel préexistant \": tout matériel, document, technologie ou savoir-faire qui existe avant son utilisation par le contractant pour la production d'un résultat dans le cadre de l' exécution du CC ;\n\n\"message EDI\" (échange de données informatisé): message créé et échangé par transfert électronique, d'ordinateur à ordinateur, de données commerciales et administratives au moyen d'une norme convenue;\n\n\"notification\" (ou \"notifier\"): forme de communication entre les parties établie par écrit, y compris par voie électronique;\n\n\"notification formelle\" (ou \"notifier formellement\"): forme de communication entre les parties établie par écrit par courrier postal ou par courrier électronique, qui fournit à l'expéditeur la preuve irréfutable que le message a été livré au destinataire spécifié;\n\n\"personne liée\" : toute personne ayant le pouvoir de représenter le contractant ou de prendre des décisions en son nom;\n\n\"personnel\" : personnes employées directement ou indirectement par le contractant, ou ayant conclu un contrat avec celui-ci, pour exécuter le CC;\n\n\"portail fournisseurs\" : portail e-PRIOR , qui permet au contractant d'échanger des documents commerciaux sur support électronique, tels que les factures, au moyen d'une interface utilisateur graphique;\n\n\"résultat\" : tout produit escompté de l' exécution du CC , quelle que soit sa forme ou sa nature, livré et approuvé en tout ou en partie par le pouvoir adjudicateur. Un résultat peut également être défini dans le CC comme un élément livrable. Un résultat peut, en plus du matériel produit par le contractant ou à sa demande, inclure également du matériel préexistant ;\n\n\"violations d'obligations\" : non-exécution, par le contractant, d'une ou de plusieurs de ses obligations contractuelles.\n\n## II.2 RÔLES ET RESPONSABILITÉS DANS LE CAS D'UNE OFFRE CONJOINTE\n\nEn cas d'offre conjointe présentée par un groupement d'opérateurs économiques, et si le groupement n'est pas doté de la personnalité juridique ou de la capacité juridique, un de ses membres est désigné comme chef de file.\n\n## II.3 DIVISIBILITÉ\n\nChaque disposition du CC est dissociable et distincte des autres. Si une disposition est ou devient illégale, invalide ou inapplicable dans une certaine mesure, elle doit être dissociée du reste du CC. Cela ne porte pas atteinte à la légalité, à la validité ou à l'applicabilité des autres dispositions du CC, qui restent pleinement en vigueur. La disposition illégale, invalide ou inapplicable doit être remplacée par une disposition de substitution légale, valide et applicable, qui correspond autant que\n\n13\n\nFR", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "\"fraude\" : acte ou omission en vue, pour son auteur ou une autre personne, de réaliser un gain illicite en causant un préjudice aux intérêts financiers de l'Union, et relatif: i) à l'utilisation ou à la présentation de déclarations ou de documents faux, inexacts ou incomplets, ayant pour effet le détournement ou la rétention indue de fonds ou d'avoirs provenant du budget de l'Union, ii) à la non-communication d'une information en violation d'une obligation spécifique, ayant le même effet, ou iii) au détournement de tels fonds ou avoirs à des fins autres que celles pour lesquelles ils ont été initialement accordés, qui porte atteinte aux intérêts financiers de l'Union; \n\n\"information ou document confidentiel\" : toute information ou tout document reçu par chaque partie de la part de l'autre partie, ou auquel chaque partie a accès dans le cadre de l' exécution du CC , que l'une d'entre elles a désigné par écrit comme étant confidentiel. Les informations et documents confidentiels ne comprennent pas d'informations accessibles au public; \n\n\"intérêts à caractère professionnel contradictoires\" : situation dans laquelle les activités professionnelles précédentes ou actuelles du contractant portent atteinte à sa capacité d'exécuter le CC ou le bon de commande selon une norme de qualité appropriée; \n\n\"irrégularité\" : toute violation d'une disposition du droit de l'Union résultant d'un acte ou d'une omission d'un opérateur économique qui a ou aurait pour effet de porter préjudice au budget de l'Union; \n\n\"matériel préexistant \": tout matériel, document, technologie ou savoir-faire qui existe avant son utilisation par le contractant pour la production d'un résultat dans le cadre de l' exécution du CC ; \n\n\"message EDI\" (échange de données informatisé): message créé et échangé par transfert électronique, d'ordinateur à ordinateur, de données commerciales et administratives au moyen d'une norme convenue; \n\n\"notification\" (ou \"notifier\"): forme de communication entre les parties établie par écrit, y compris par voie électronique; \n\n\"notification formelle\" (ou \"notifier formellement\"): forme de communication entre les parties établie par écrit par courrier postal ou par courrier électronique, qui fournit à l'expéditeur la preuve irréfutable que le message a été livré au destinataire spécifié; \n\n\"personne liée\" : toute personne ayant le pouvoir de représenter le contractant ou de prendre des décisions en son nom; \n\n\"personnel\" : personnes employées directement ou indirectement par le contractant, ou ayant conclu un contrat avec celui-ci, pour exécuter le CC; \n\n\"portail fournisseurs\" : portail e-PRIOR , qui permet au contractant d'échanger des documents commerciaux sur support électronique, tels que les factures, au moyen d'une interface utilisateur graphique; \n\n\"résultat\" : tout produit escompté de l' exécution du CC , quelle que soit sa forme ou sa nature, livré et approuvé en tout ou en partie par le pouvoir adjudicateur. Un résultat peut également être défini dans le CC comme un élément livrable. Un résultat peut, en plus du matériel produit par le contractant ou à sa demande, inclure également du matériel préexistant ; \n\n\"violations d'obligations\" : non-exécution, par le contractant, d'une ou de plusieurs de ses obligations contractuelles. \n\nEn cas d'offre conjointe présentée par un groupement d'opérateurs économiques, et si le groupement n'est pas doté de la personnalité juridique ou de la capacité juridique, un de ses membres est désigné comme chef de file. \n\nChaque disposition du CC est dissociable et distincte des autres. Si une disposition est ou devient illégale, invalide ou inapplicable dans une certaine mesure, elle doit être dissociée du reste du CC. Cela ne porte pas atteinte à la légalité, à la validité ou à l'applicabilité des autres dispositions du CC, qui restent pleinement en vigueur. La disposition illégale, invalide ou inapplicable doit être remplacée par une disposition de substitution légale, valide et applicable, qui correspond autant que \n\n13 FR\n\n## II.3 DIVISIBILITÉ\n\n## II.2 RÔLES ET RESPONSABILITÉS DANS LE CAS D'UNE OFFRE CONJOINTE" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9366057133225054, + "doc_id": "5f9484d8d6f2739a3874110d7636d31f2080a6850635984e87d5fb959a0f55fa", + "edit_distance": 0.3257676902536716, + "f1_score": 0.9704347826086955, + "meteor": 0.9150133718733657, + "precision": 0.9721254355400697, + "pred_md": "- 11.3.1 The following paragraph is added to Article 4 of the General Conditions: '4.9 Without prejudice to the right of the Contracting Authority to terminate the Contract in accordance with its provisions, the Contracting Authority may request the Consultant to replace a subcontractor found to have been engaged in conduct bringing the Contracting Authority into disrepute, including a Sanction Event (as defined in Article 8.9 of the General Conditions) with another subcontractor of equal or greater quality. Failure by the Consultant to replace the subcontractor shall constitute a breach of this Contract for the purpose of Article 34 of the General Conditions.'\n- 11.3.2 In relation to Article 6 of the General Conditions 'Assistance with local regulations', the term 'the Contracting Authority of the beneficiary country' shall be read as referring to the Promoter, as identified in the Recitals to this Contract.\n- 11.3.3 The following paragraph shall be added to Article 8 of the General Conditions: ' 8.9 The Consultant undertakes not to breach, nor cause the Contracting Authority to breach, any sanctions or restrictive measures imposed or administered by a competent body or official institution or agency (each a 'Sanction') and shall inform the Contracting Authority in writing as soon as possible of any 'Sanction Event', that is where:\n- (a) the Consultant, its staff, subcontractors and their staff, and any other persons acting on behalf of the Consultant in the performance of the Services, or any entity or person which directly or indirectly owns or controls or directs the Consultant, or which the Consultant acts on behalf of, breaches, or becomes in breach of or the target of, a Sanction; or\n- (b) a country or territory (including their government) in which any of the entities or persons referred to in point (a) above are located or resident in, or organised or incorporated under, becomes the target of a Sanction.\n\nThe Consultant shall ensure that it maintains appropriate internal controls and safeguards designed to prevent the violation of any Sanction.\n\nThe Parties acknowledge and agree that all Sanction-related undertakings are only sought and given to the extent that to do so is permissible pursuant to any applicable anti-boycott rule of the European Union, such as Regulation (EC) 2271/96 of 22 November 1996 protecting against the effects of the extra-territorial application of legislation adopted by a third country, and actions based thereon or resulting therefrom (OJ L 309, 29.11.1996, p.1) as amended from time to time. '\n\n- 11.3.4 The following paragraph shall be added to Article 12 of the General Conditions: '12.6 At its own expense, the Consultant shall indemnify, protect and defend the Contracting Authority, its agents and employees, from and against all actions, claims, losses or damage (including any fines or penalties imposed on the Contracting Authority) arising out of the Consultant's breach of its legal and/or contractual obligations in respect of Sanctions and personal data protection.'\n- 11.3.5 In relation to Article 13.2, 13.3 and 13.4 of the General Conditions, the Consultant shall ensure that all the insurance policies effected under these provisions shall contain a waiver of subrogation rights, in favour of the Contracting Authority.\n- 11.3.6 Article 13.3 of the General Conditions shall read as follows: 'Within 20 days of signing the Contract, the Consultant shall take out, unless it already has such a policy, and maintain, a full indemnity insurance policy, for a sum up to the higher of the maximum amount foreseen by the legislation of the beneficiary country and headquarters, and covering, during the period of implementation of the tasks, the following aspects:\n- (a) The Consultant's liability in respect of sickness or industrial accident affecting its employees, including the cost of repatriation on health grounds;\n- (b) Loss of, or damage to, the Contracting Authority's equipment, if any, used by the Consultant, its agents or employees, to perform the Contract;\n\nAA-000799-002\\_TACONT\n\nPage 4 of 7", + "recall": 0.96875, + "true_md": "- 11.3.1 The following paragraph is added to Article 4 of the General Conditions: “4.9 Without prejudice to the right of the Contracting Authority to terminate the Contract in accordance with its provisions, the Contracting Authority may request the Consultant to replace a subcontractor found to have been engaged in conduct bringing the Contracting Authority into disrepute, including a Sanction Event (as defined in Article 8.9 of the General Conditions) with another subcontractor of equal or greater quality. Failure by the Consultant to replace the subcontractor shall constitute a breach of this Contract for the purpose of Article 34 of the General Conditions.” \n\n- 11.3.2 In relation to Article 6 of the General Conditions “Assistance with local regulations”, the term “the Contracting Authority of the beneficiary country” shall be read as referring to the Promoter, as identified in the Recitals to this Contract. \n\n- 11.3.3 The following paragraph shall be added to Article 8 of the General Conditions: “ 8.9 The Consultant undertakes not to breach, nor cause the Contracting Authority to breach, any sanctions or restrictive measures imposed or administered by a competent body or official institution or agency (each a “Sanction”) and shall inform the Contracting Authority in writing as soon as possible of any “Sanction Event”, that is where: \n\n- (a) the Consultant, its staff, subcontractors and their staff, and any other persons acting on behalf of the Consultant in the performance of the Services, or any entity or person which directly or indirectly owns or controls or directs the Consultant, or which the Consultant acts on behalf of, breaches, or becomes in breach of or the target of, a Sanction; or \n\n- (b) a country or territory (including their government) in which any of the entities or persons referred to in point (a) above are located or resident in, or organised or incorporated under, becomes the target of a Sanction. \n\n- 11.3.4 The following paragraph shall be added to Article 12 of the General Conditions: “12.6 At its own expense, the Consultant shall indemnify, protect and defend the Contracting Authority, its agents and employees, from and against all actions, claims, losses or damage (including any fines or penalties imposed on the Contracting Authority) arising out of the Consultant’s breach of its legal and/or contractual obligations in respect of Sanctions and personal data protection.” \n\n- 11.3.5 In relation to Article 13.2, 13.3 and 13.4 of the General Conditions, the Consultant shall ensure that all the insurance policies effected under these provisions shall contain a waiver of subrogation rights, in favour of the Contracting Authority. \n\n- 11.3.6 Article 13.3 of the General Conditions shall read as follows: “Within 20 days of signing the Contract, the Consultant shall take out, unless it already has such a policy, and maintain, a full indemnity insurance policy, for a sum up to the higher of the maximum amount foreseen by the legislation of the beneficiary country and headquarters, and covering, during the period of implementation of the tasks, the following aspects: \n\n- (a) The Consultant’s liability in respect of sickness or industrial accident affecting its employees, including the cost of repatriation on health grounds; \n\n- (b) Loss of, or damage to, the Contracting Authority’s equipment, if any, used by the Consultant, its agents or employees, to perform the Contract; \n\nPage 4 of 7 \n\nAA-000799-002\\_TACONT \n\nThe Parties acknowledge and agree that all Sanction-related undertakings are only sought and given to the extent that to do so is permissible pursuant to any applicable anti-boycott rule of the European Union, such as Regulation (EC) 2271/96 of 22 November 1996 protecting against the effects of the extra-territorial application of legislation adopted by a third country, and actions based thereon or resulting therefrom (OJ L 309, 29.11.1996, p.1) as amended from time to time. ” \n\nThe Consultant shall ensure that it maintains appropriate internal controls and safeguards designed to prevent the violation of any Sanction." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6696279370564308, + "doc_id": "244daa7f0c3856a48c54f032517cf579a4d06c2ad894ef7fb09b3dbf124cad83", + "edit_distance": 0.2911275415896488, + "f1_score": 0.9925650557620818, + "meteor": 0.7021112853838939, + "precision": 0.9925650557620818, + "pred_md": "EC - FWC services Dec 2018\n\nContract no: [complete]\n\n- g) where the results are or include a database: the exclusive right to authorise or prohibit the extraction of all or a substantial part of the contents of the database to another medium by any means or in any form; and the exclusive right to authorise or prohibit the re-utilization of all or a substantial part of the contents of the database by the distribution of copies, by renting, by online or other forms of transmission;\n- h) where the results are or include a patentable subject-matter: the right to register them as a patent and to further exploit such patent to the fullest extent;\n- i) where the results are or include logos or subject-matter which could be registered as a trademark: the right to register such logo or subject-matter as a trademark and to further exploit and use it;\n- j) where the results are or include know-how: the right to use such know-how as is necessary to make use of the results to the full extent provided for by this FWC, and the right to make it available to contractors or subcontractors acting on behalf of the contracting authority, subject to their signing of adequate confidentiality undertakings where necessary;\n- k) where the results are documents:\n- i. the right to authorise the reuse of the documents in conformity with the Commission Decision of 12 December 2011 on the reuse of Commission documents (2011/833/EU), to the extent it is applicable and the documents fall within its scope and are not excluded by any of its provisions; for the sake of this provision, \"reuse\" and \"document\" have the meaning given to them by this Decision;\n- ii. the right to store and archive the results in line with the document management rules applicable to the contracting authority, including digitisation or converting the format for preservation or new use purposes;\n- l) where the results are or incorporate software, including source code, object code and, where relevant, documentation, preparatory materials and manuals, in addition to the other rights mentioned in this Article:\n- i. end-user rights, for all uses by the Union or by subcontractors which result from this FWC and from the intention of the parties;\n- ii. the rights to receive both the source code and the object code;\n- m) the right to license to third parties any of the exclusive rights or of the modes of exploitation set out in this FWC; however, for pre-existing materials which are only licensed to the Union, the right to sub-license does not apply, except in the two cases foreseen by Article II.13.2.;\n- n) to the extent that the contractor may invoke moral rights, the right for the contracting authority, except where otherwise provided in this FWC, to publish the results with or without mentioning the creator (s)' name(s), and the right to decide when and whether the results may be disclosed and published.\n\nThe contractor warrants that the exclusive rights and the modes of exploitation may be exercised by the Union on all parts of the results , be it via a transfer of ownership of the rights, on those parts which were specifically created by the contractor, or via a licence of the pre-existing rights , on those parts consisting of pre-existing materials .\n\nWhere pre-existing materials are inserted in the results , the contracting authority may accept reasonable restrictions impacting on the above list, provided that the said materials are easily identifiable and separable from the rest, that they do not correspond to substantial elements of the results , and that, should the need arise, satisfactory replacement solutions exist, at no additional costs to the contracting authority. In such case, the contractor will have to clearly inform the contracting authority before making such choice and the contracting authority has the right to refuse it.\n\n## II.13.4. Identification of pre-existing rights\n\nWhen delivering the results , the contractor must warrant that, for any use that the contracting authority may envisage within the limits set in this FWC, the newly created parts and the pre-existing material incorporated in the results are free of claims from creators or from any third parties and all the necessary pre-existing rights have been obtained or licensed.\n\n23", + "recall": 0.9925650557620818, + "true_md": "Contract no: [complete] \n\nEC - FWC services Dec 2018 \n\n- g) where the results are or include a database: the exclusive right to authorise or prohibit the extraction of all or a substantial part of the contents of the database to another medium by any means or in any form; and the exclusive right to authorise or prohibit the re-utilization of all or a substantial part of the contents of the database by the distribution of copies, by renting, by on- line or other forms of transmission; h) where the results are or include a patentable subject-matter: the right to register them as a \n\n- line or other forms of transmission; h) where the results are or include a patentable subject-matter: the right to register them as a patent and to further exploit such patent to the fullest extent; i) where the results are or include logos or subject-matter which could be registered as a \n\n- patent and to further exploit such patent to the fullest extent; i) where the results are or include logos or subject-matter which could be registered as a trademark: the right to register such logo or subject-matter as a trademark and to further exploit and use it; j) where the results are or include know-how: the right to use such know-how as is necessary to \n\n- and use it; j) where the results are or include know-how: the right to use such know-how as is necessary to make use of the results to the full extent provided for by this FWC, and the right to make it available to contractors or subcontractors acting on behalf of the contracting authority, subject to their signing of adequate confidentiality undertakings where necessary; k) where the results are documents: \n\n- to their signing of adequate confidentiality undertakings where necessary; k) where the results are documents: i. the right to authorise the reuse of the documents in conformity with the Commission \n\n- where the results are documents: i. the right to authorise the reuse of the documents in conformity with the Commission Decision of 12 December 2011 on the reuse of Commission documents (2011/833/EU), to the extent it is applicable and the documents fall within its scope and are not excluded by any of its provisions; for the sake of this provision, \"reuse\" and \"document\" have the meaning given to them by this Decision; ii. the right to store and archive the results in line with the document management rules \n\n- meaning given to them by this Decision; ii. the right to store and archive the results in line with the document management rules applicable to the contracting authority, including digitisation or converting the format for preservation or new use purposes; where the results are or incorporate software, including source code, object code and, where \n\n- preservation or new use purposes; l) where the results are or incorporate software, including source code, object code and, where relevant, documentation, preparatory materials and manuals, in addition to the other rights mentioned in this Article: i. end-user rights, for all uses by the Union or by subcontractors which result from this FWC \n\n- mentioned in this Article: i. end-user rights, for all uses by the Union or by subcontractors which result from this FWC and from the intention of the parties; ii. the rights to receive both the source code and the object code; \n\n- and from the intention of the parties; ii. the rights to receive both the source code and the object code; the right to license to third parties any of the exclusive rights or of the modes of exploitation set \n\n- ii. the rights to receive both the source code and the object code; m) the right to license to third parties any of the exclusive rights or of the modes of exploitation set out in this FWC; however, for pre-existing materials which are only licensed to the Union, the right to sub-license does not apply, except in the two cases foreseen by Article II.13.2.; n) to the extent that the contractor may invoke moral rights, the right for the contracting authority, \n\n- right to sub-license does not apply, except in the two cases foreseen by Article II.13.2.; n) to the extent that the contractor may invoke moral rights, the right for the contracting authority, except where otherwise provided in this FWC, to publish the results with or without mentioning the creator (s)’ name(s), and the right to decide when and whether the results may be disclosed and published. \n\nThe contractor warrants that the exclusive rights and the modes of exploitation may be exercised by the Union on all parts of the results , be it via a transfer of ownership of the rights, on those parts which were specifically created by the contractor, or via a licence of the pre-existing rights , on those parts consisting of pre-existing materials . \n\nWhere pre-existing materials are inserted in the results , the contracting authority may accept reasonable restrictions impacting on the above list, provided that the said materials are easily identifiable and separable from the rest, that they do not correspond to substantial elements of the results , and that, should the need arise, satisfactory replacement solutions exist, at no additional costs to the contracting authority. In such case, the contractor will have to clearly inform the contracting authority before making such choice and the contracting authority has the right to refuse it. \n\nWhen delivering the results , the contractor must warrant that, for any use that the contracting authority may envisage within the limits set in this FWC, the newly created parts and the pre-existing material incorporated in the results are free of claims from creators or from any third parties and all the necessary pre-existing rights have been obtained or licensed.\n\n## II.13.4. Identification of pre-existing rights\n\n23" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "8fc58c6061fbe35188ea9e7591894af0d153593a5ba407fe31198cd2ec581bea", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999993578943043, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Offers scoring less than 60% in the points awarded for a single criterion [or less than 60% for the single sub-criterion (where applied)] will be excluded from the rest of the assessment procedure.\n\nNOTE on sub-criteria : the Contracting Authority may define sub-criteria under the above AW in the request for offer and evaluate the FWC contractors' offers with those sub-criteria as presented below. The points of those sub-criteria will be specified at the level of the specific requests for offer.\n\n40", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Offers scoring less than 60% in the points awarded for a single criterion [or less than 60% for the single sub-criterion (where applied)] will be excluded from the rest of the assessment procedure.\n\nNOTE on sub-criteria : the Contracting Authority may define sub-criteria under the above AW in the request for offer and evaluate the FWC contractors' offers with those sub-criteria as presented below. The points of those sub-criteria will be specified at the level of the specific requests for offer. \n\n40" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7924823249083182, + "doc_id": "a332341da4e19deffb229d87d283d6b9b8f70b6e7c400e8f6cd94fa1d7756cf3", + "edit_distance": 0.46503496503496505, + "f1_score": 0.9708029197080292, + "meteor": 0.9375756737114551, + "precision": 0.9708029197080292, + "pred_md": "·\n\nANNEXE VII\n\nAppendice 5 de l'Annexe VII\n\n## AUTORISATION DE TRAVAIL / PERMIS DE FEU\n\n## A suivre dans l'ordre chronologique\n\n- 1. Le chef d'équipe ou l'opérateur se présente avec le document, ou l'envoie par voie électronique, UP (bâtiment JL - local 00 CG 08 - tél. 5400) au moins 24 heures à l'avance , pour signature par un conseiller en prévention.\n- 2. a) Tous les jours des travaux, avertir ou se présenter avant l'exécution pour examiner, le cas échéant, la nécessité de mettre hors service une partie des installations de lutte et de protection contre l'incendie:\n- - pour le Justus Lipsius et le Lex : au Centre Dispatching Incendie (CDI) (bâtiment JL - 10 CD 15 , tél. 9100/9200)\n- -pour la Crèche : à la Crèche/ loge gardiennage Brabançonne, tél. 1810\n- b) Avant le début des travaux, vérifier et s'assurer que les précautions mentionnées au dos du formulaire et que les mesures préventives suite à l'analyse de risque soient respectées.\n- 3. a) Après les travaux, effectuer les mesures mentionnées au dos du formulaire.\n- b) Informer quotidiennement le Service Incendie de la fin des travaux, pour la remise en fonctionnement normal des installations de lutte et de protection contre l'incendie:\n- -pour le Justus Lipsius et le Lex: au Centre Dispatching Incendie (CDI) (bâtiment JL - 10 CD 15, tél. 9100/9200)\n- -pour la Crèche : à la Crèche/ loge gardiennage Brabançonne, tél. 1810\n\n\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\n\n99\n\nFR", + "recall": 0.9708029197080292, + "true_md": "## AUTORISATION DE TRAVAIL / PERMIS DE FEU\n\nAppendice 5 de l'Annexe VII \n\nA suivre dans l'ordre chronologique \n\n- 1. Le chef d'équipe ou l'opérateur se présente avec le document, ou l'envoie par voie électronique, UP (bâtiment JL - local 00 CG 08 - tél. 5400) au moins 24 heures à l'avance , pour signature par un conseiller en prévention.\n\n- 2. a) Tous les jours des travaux, avertir ou se présenter avant l'exécution pour examiner, le cas échéant, la nécessité de mettre hors service une partie des installations de lutte et de protection contre l'incendie: \n\n- b) Avant le début des travaux, vérifier et s'assurer que les précautions mentionnées au dos du formulaire et que les mesures préventives suite à l’analyse de risque soient respectées.\n\n- b) Informer quotidiennement le Service Incendie de la fin des travaux, pour la remise en fonctionnement normal des installations de lutte et de protection contre l'incendie: \n\n- 3. a) Après les travaux, effectuer les mesures mentionnées au dos du formulaire. \n\n- - pour le Justus Lipsius et le Lex: au Centre Dispatching Incendie (CDI) (bâtiment JL - 10 CD 15, tél. 9100/9200) \n\n- - pour la Crèche : à la Crèche/ loge gardiennage Brabançonne, tél. 1810 \n\n•\n\n99 FR \n\nANNEXE VII \n\n- - pour le Justus Lipsius et le Lex : au Centre Dispatching Incendie (CDI) (bâtiment JL - 10 CD 15 , tél. 9100/9200) \n\n- - pour la Crèche : à la Crèche/ loge gardiennage Brabançonne, tél. 1810" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5755432907277431, + "doc_id": "901d82e4340c8e2c954262ad619fa43496943236d44c1443e053d1c839c72361", + "edit_distance": 0.5171480144404332, + "f1_score": 0.9890510948905109, + "meteor": 0.4931741340044057, + "precision": 0.9926739926739927, + "pred_md": "Contract no: [complete]\n\n## II.18. TERMINATION OF THE FWC\n\n## II.18.1. Grounds for termination by the contracting authority\n\nThe contracting authority may terminate the FWC or any on-going specific contract in the following circumstances:\n\n- a) if provision of the services under an on-going specific contract has not actually started within 15 days of the scheduled date and the contracting authority considers that the new date proposed, if any, is unacceptable, taking into account Article II.11.2;\n- b) if the contractor is unable, through its own fault, to obtain any permit or licence required for implementation of the FWC ;\n- c) if the contractor does not implement the FWC or perform the specific contract in accordance with the tender specifications or request for service or is in breach of another substantial contractual obligation or repeatedly refuses to sign specific contracts . Termination of three or more specific contracts in these circumstances also constitutes grounds for termination of the FWC;\n- d) if the contractor or any person that assumes unlimited liability for the debts of the contractor is in one of the situations provided for in points (a) and (b) of Article 136(1) of the Financial Regulation 7 ;\n- e) if the contractor or any related person is in one of the situations provided for in points (c) to (h) of Article 136(1) or to Article 136(2) of the Financial Regulation;\n- f) if the procedure for awarding the FWC or the implementation of the FWC prove to have been subject to irregularities, fraud or breach of obligations ;\n- g) if the contractor does not comply with applicable obligations under environmental, social and labour law established by Union law, national law, collective agreements or by the international environmental, social and labour law provisions listed in Annex X to Directive 2014/24/EU;\n- h) if the contractor is in a situation that could constitute a conflict of interest or a professional conflicting interest as referred to in Article II.7;\n- i) if a change to the contractor's legal, financial, technical, organisational or ownership situation is likely to substantially affect the implementation of the FWC or substantially modify the conditions under which the FWC was initially awarded or a change regarding the exclusion situations listed in Article 136 of Regulation (EU) 2018/1046 that calls into question the decision to award the contract;\n- j) in the event of force majeure , where either resuming implementation is impossible or the necessary ensuing amendments to the FWC or a specific contract would mean that the tender specifications are no longer fulfilled or result in unequal treatment of tenderers or contractors;\n- k) if the needs of the contracting authority change and it no longer requires new services under the FWC; in such cases ongoing specific contracts remain unaffected;\n- l) if the termination of the FWC with one or more of the contractors means that the multiple FWC with reopening of competition no longer has the minimum required level of competition;\n- m) if the contractor is in breach of the data protection obligations resulting from Article II.9.2;\n- n) if the contractor does not comply with the applicable data protection obligations resulting from Regulation (EU)2016/679.\n\n7 Regulation (EU, Euratom) 2018/1046 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 18 July 2018 on the financial rules applicable to the general budget of the Union, amending Regulations (EU) No 1296/2013, (EU) No 1301/2013, (EU) No 1303/2013, (EU) No 1304/2013, (EU) No 1309/2013, (EU) No 1316/2013, (EU) No 223/2014, (EU) No 283/2014, and Decision No 541/2014/EU and repealing Regulation (EU, Euratom) No 966/2012, OJ L 193 of 30.7.2018, p.1 https://eur-lex.europa.eu/legalcontent/EN/TXT/?qid=1544791836334&uri=CELEX:32018R1046\n\n28\n\nEC - FWC services Dec 2018", + "recall": 0.9854545454545455, + "true_md": "Contract no: [complete] \n\nThe contracting authority may terminate the FWC or any on-going specific contract in the following circumstances: \n\n7 Regulation (EU, Euratom) 2018/1046 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 18 July 2018 on the financial rules applicable to the general budget of the Union, amending Regulations (EU) No 1296/2013, (EU) No 1301/2013, (EU) No 1303/2013, (EU) No 1304/2013, (EU) No 1309/2013, (EU) No 1316/2013, (EU) No 223/2014, (EU) No 283/2014, and Decision No 541/2014/EU and repealing Regulation (EU, Euratom) No 966/2012, OJ L 193 of 30.7.2018, p.1 https://eur-lex.europa.eu/legal- content/EN/TXT/?qid=1544791836334&uri=CELEX:32018R1046 \n\n28\n\n- a) if provision of the services under an on-going specific contract has not actually started within 15 days of the scheduled date and the contracting authority considers that the new date proposed, if any, is unacceptable, taking into account Article II.11.2; b) if the contractor is unable, through its own fault, to obtain any permit or licence required for \n\n- if any, is unacceptable, taking into account Article II.11.2; b) if the contractor is unable, through its own fault, to obtain any permit or licence required for implementation of the FWC ; c) if the contractor does not implement the FWC or perform the specific contract in accordance \n\n- implementation of the FWC ; c) if the contractor does not implement the FWC or perform the specific contract in accordance with the tender specifications or request for service or is in breach of another substantial contractual obligation or repeatedly refuses to sign specific contracts . Termination of three or more specific contracts in these circumstances also constitutes grounds for termination of the FWC; d) if the contractor or any person that assumes unlimited liability for the debts of the contractor is \n\n- FWC; d) if the contractor or any person that assumes unlimited liability for the debts of the contractor is in one of the situations provided for in points (a) and (b) of Article 136(1) of the Financial Regulation 7 ; e) if the contractor or any related person is in one of the situations provided for in points (c) to (h) \n\n- Regulation ; e) if the contractor or any related person is in one of the situations provided for in points (c) to (h) of Article 136(1) or to Article 136(2) of the Financial Regulation; f) if the procedure for awarding the FWC or the implementation of the FWC prove to have been \n\n- of Article 136(1) or to Article 136(2) of the Financial Regulation; f) if the procedure for awarding the FWC or the implementation of the FWC prove to have been subject to irregularities, fraud or breach of obligations ; g) if the contractor does not comply with applicable obligations under environmental, social and \n\n- subject to irregularities, fraud or breach of obligations ; g) if the contractor does not comply with applicable obligations under environmental, social and labour law established by Union law, national law, collective agreements or by the international environmental, social and labour law provisions listed in Annex X to Directive 2014/24/EU; h) if the contractor is in a situation that could constitute a conflict of interest or a professional \n\n- environmental, social and labour law provisions listed in Annex X to Directive 2014/24/EU; h) if the contractor is in a situation that could constitute a conflict of interest or a professional conflicting interest as referred to in Article II.7; i) if a change to the contractor’s legal, financial, technical, organisational or ownership situation is \n\n- conflicting interest as referred to in Article II.7; i) if a change to the contractor’s legal, financial, technical, organisational or ownership situation is likely to substantially affect the implementation of the FWC or substantially modify the conditions under which the FWC was initially awarded or a change regarding the exclusion situations listed in Article 136 of Regulation (EU) 2018/1046 that calls into question the decision to award the contract; j) in the event of force majeure , where either resuming implementation is impossible or the \n\n- contract; j) in the event of force majeure , where either resuming implementation is impossible or the necessary ensuing amendments to the FWC or a specific contract would mean that the tender specifications are no longer fulfilled or result in unequal treatment of tenderers or contractors; k) if the needs of the contracting authority change and it no longer requires new services under \n\n- specifications are no longer fulfilled or result in unequal treatment of tenderers or contractors; k) if the needs of the contracting authority change and it no longer requires new services under the FWC; in such cases ongoing specific contracts remain unaffected; l) if the termination of the FWC with one or more of the contractors means that the multiple FWC \n\n- the FWC; in such cases ongoing specific contracts remain unaffected; l) if the termination of the FWC with one or more of the contractors means that the multiple FWC with reopening of competition no longer has the minimum required level of competition; m) if the contractor is in breach of the data protection obligations resulting from Article II.9.2;\n\n- with reopening of competition no longer has the minimum required level of competition; m) if the contractor is in breach of the data protection obligations resulting from Article II.9.2; n) if the contractor does not comply with the applicable data protection obligations resulting from \n\n- m) if the contractor is in breach of the data protection obligations resulting from Article II.9.2; n) if the contractor does not comply with the applicable data protection obligations resulting from Regulation (EU)2016/679. \n\n## II.18. TERMINATION OF THE FWC\n\n## II.18.1. Grounds for termination by the contracting authority\n\nEC - FWC services Dec 2018" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7746152571362065, + "doc_id": "6b269b180074b6989d3b1380c3fe5476a6b7e946e03454eeab8369e4ec7082af", + "edit_distance": 0.5277777777777778, + "f1_score": 0.8888888888888888, + "meteor": 0.7377308294209702, + "precision": 0.96, + "pred_md": "## LOT 2: MANIFACTURING EQUIPMENT\n\n2 DDP (Delivered Duty Paid) - Incoterms 2020 International Chamber of Commerce http://www.iccwbo.org/incoterms/\n\nAugust 2020 c4g\\_annexivfinoffer\\_en.doc\n\nPage 2 of 4", + "recall": 0.8275862068965517, + "true_md": "August 2020 c4g\\_annexivfinoffer\\_en.doc \n\nPage 2 of 4 \n\n$^{2}$ DDP (Delivered Duty Paid) — Incoterms 2020 International Chamber of Commerce http://www.iccwbo.org/incoterms/ \n\n## LOT 2: MANIFACTURING EQUIPMENT" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9339621664905282, + "doc_id": "bd452c9d0249220d33d7f777c386e578ebdbf0220432a3f4c7ddc3ed45bc3827", + "edit_distance": 0.14734774066797643, + "f1_score": 0.9840546697038725, + "meteor": 0.9465038436278872, + "precision": 0.9953917050691244, + "pred_md": "The validity period of the tender, during which tenderers may not modify the terms of their tenders in any respect, is indicated under Heading IV.2.6 of the contract notice.\n\nSubmission of a tender implies acceptance of all the terms and conditions set out in the procurement documents and, where appropriate, waiver of the tenderer's own general or specific terms and conditions. The submitted tender is binding on the tenderer to whom the contract is awarded for the duration of the contract.\n\n## 3. Contacts during the procurement procedure.\n\nContacts between the contracting authority and tenderers are prohibited throughout the procedure save in exceptional circumstances and under the following conditions only:\n\n## 3.1 Submission phase (before the time-limit for receipt of tenders)\n\nUpon request, the contracting authority may provide additional information solely for the purpose of clarifying the procurement documents.\n\nAny request for additional information must be made in writing only through the above TED eTendering website in the \"Questions & answers\" tab, by clicking \"Create a question\" (registration on TED e-Tendering is required to be able to create and submit a question).\n\nThe contracting authority is not bound to reply to requests for additional information received less than six working 7 days before the time-limit for receipt of tenders.\n\nThe contracting authority may, on its own initiative, inform interested parties of any error, inaccuracy, omission or any other type of clerical error in the text of the procurement documents.\n\nAny additional information will be published on the above TED e-Tendering website. The website will be updated regularly and it is the economic operator's responsibility to check for updates and modifications during the submission period 1 .\n\n## 3.2 Opening of tenders\n\nTenders will be opened in public at the time and place indicated under Heading IV.2.7 of the contract notice. A maximum of one representative per tender may attend the opening session. For organisational and security reasons the tenderer must provide the full name, date of birth, nationality and ID or passport number of the representative at least two working days in advance to: procurement@enisa.europa.eu. The representative will be required to present the submission receipt generated by e-Submission and to sign an attendance sheet. The contracting authority reserves the right to refuse access to its premises if the above information or the submission receipt are not provided as required.\n\nThe public part of the opening session will be strictly limited to the following aspects:\n\n- - verification that each tender has been submitted in accordance with the submission requirements of the call for tender;\n\n7 Working days at the contracting authority's location indicated under Heading I.1 of the contract notice.\n\nPage 3 of 5", + "recall": 0.972972972972973, + "true_md": "The validity period of the tender, during which tenderers may not modify the terms of their tenders in any respect, is indicated under Heading IV.2.6 of the contract notice.\n\nSubmission of a tender implies acceptance of all the terms and conditions set out in the procurement documents and, where appropriate, waiver of the tenderer's own general or specific terms and conditions. The submitted tender is binding on the tenderer to whom the contract is awarded for the duration of the contract. \n\nContacts between the contracting authority and tenderers are prohibited throughout the procedure save in exceptional circumstances and under the following conditions only: \n\nUpon request, the contracting authority may provide additional information solely for the purpose of clarifying the procurement documents. \n\nAny request for additional information must be made in writing only through the above TED e- Tendering website in the \"Questions & answers\" tab, by clicking \"Create a question\" (registration on TED e-Tendering is required to be able to create and submit a question). \n\nThe contracting authority is not bound to reply to requests for additional information received less than six working$^{7}$ days before the time-limit for receipt of tenders.\n\nThe contracting authority may, on its own initiative, inform interested parties of any error, inaccuracy, omission or any other type of clerical error in the text of the procurement documents. \n\nAny additional information will be published on the above TED e-Tendering website. The website will be updated regularly and it is the economic operator's responsibility to check for updates and modifications during the submission period$^{1}$.\n\nTenders will be opened in public at the time and place indicated under Heading IV.2.7 of the contract notice. A maximum of one representative per tender may attend the opening session. For organisational and security reasons the tenderer must provide the full name, date of birth, nationality and ID or passport number of the representative at least two working days in advance to: procurement@enisa.europa.eu. The representative will be required to present the submission receipt generated by e-Submission and to sign an attendance sheet. The contracting authority reserves the right to refuse access to its premises if the above information or the submission receipt are not provided as required.\n\nThe public part of the opening session will be strictly limited to the following aspects: \n\n- verification that each tender has been submitted in accordance with the submission requirements of the call for tender; \n\n$^{7}$ Working days at the contracting authority's location indicated under Heading I.1 of the contract notice. \n\nPage 3 of 5\n\n## 3.2 Opening of tenders\n\n## 3.1 Submission phase (before the time-limit for receipt of tenders)\n\n## 3. Contacts during the procurement procedure." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6972467077338597, + "doc_id": "1e18f9b25788714298016e62a6a9129b69dbf627aeb0d6683d731a9baa955414", + "edit_distance": 0.38271604938271603, + "f1_score": 0.9056603773584907, + "meteor": 0.7933374434697187, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "ANNEX IV: Budget breakdown ( Model financial offer )\n\nPage No 1 [o f… ]\n\nPUBLICATION REFERENCE: EuropeAid/140639/IH/SUP/TR NAME OF TENDERER: < name >\n\n## LOT 1: LABORATORY EQUIPMENT\n\n1 DDP (Delivered Duty Paid) - Incoterms 2020 International Chamber of Commerce http://www.iccwbo.org/incoterms/\n\nAugust 2020 c4g\\_annexivfinoffer\\_en.doc\n\nPage 1 of 4", + "recall": 0.8275862068965517, + "true_md": "Ref. Ares(2020)5475650 - 14/10/2020\n\n## ANNEX IV: Budget breakdown ( Model financial offer )\n\n## PUBLICATION REFERENCE: EuropeAid/140639/IH/SUP/TR NAME OF TENDERER: < name >\n\n## LOT 1: LABORATORY EQUIPMENT\n\nPage No 1 [o f… ]\n\n$^{1}$ DDP (Delivered Duty Paid) — Incoterms 2020 International Chamber of Commerce http://www.iccwbo.org/incoterms/ \n\nAugust 2020 c4g\\_annexivfinoffer\\_en.doc \n\nPage 1 of 4" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6768398101125699, + "doc_id": "389a6db78f8f1e5ca27bd89dabe18e7a3e23d4bffd4e9111f0edf894a1a03d0f", + "edit_distance": 0.4698581560283688, + "f1_score": 0.9892473118279569, + "meteor": 0.6348736872079757, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "EC - FWC services Dec 2018\n\nContract no: [complete]\n\n## Contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender):\n\n[Full name]\n\n[Function]\n\n[Company name]\n\n[Full official address]\n\nE-mail: [complete]\n\nBy derogation from this Article, different contact details for the contracting authority or the contractor may be provided in specific contracts.\n\n## I.9. PROCESSING OF PERSONAL DATA\n\n## I.9.1 Processing of personal data by the contracting authority\n\nFor the purpose of Article II.9.1,\n\n- a) the data controller is the Head of Resource and Service Centre at the European Agency for Safety and Health at Work;\n- b) the privacy statement is available at https://osha.europa.eu/en/about-eu-osha/procurement.\n\n## I.9.2 Processing of personal data by the contractor\n\nFor the purpose of Article II.9.2,\n\n- a) the subject matter and purpose of the processing of personal data by the contractor are [provide a short and concise description of the subject matter and purpose];\n- b) the localisation of and access to the personal data processed by the contractor shall comply with the following 2 :\n- i. the personal data shall only be processed within the territory of the European Union and the European Economic Area and will not leave that territory;\n- ii. the data shall only be held in data centres located with the territory of the European Union and the European Economic Area;\n- iii. the contractor may not change the location of data processing without the prior written authorisation of the contracting authority;\n- iv. any transfer of personal data under the FWC to third countries or international organisations shall fully comply with the requirements laid down in Chapter V of Regulation (EU)2018/1725 3 .\n\n2 This clause must be adapted with care on the basis of a risk assessment related to the processing of personal data for the relevant contract.\n\n3 Regulation (EU) 2018/1725 of 23 October 2018 on the protection of natural persons with regard to the processing of personal data by the Union institutions, bodies, offices and agencies and on the free movement of such data, and repealing Regulation (EC) No 45/2001 and Decision No 1247/2002/EC, OJ L 295/39, 21.11.2018, https://eur-lex.europa.eu/legal-content/EN/TXT/PDF/?uri=CELEX:32018R1725&from=EN\n\n8", + "recall": 0.9787234042553191, + "true_md": "EC - FWC services Dec 2018 \n\nContract no: [complete] \n\nBy derogation from this Article, different contact details for the contracting authority or the contractor may be provided in specific contracts.\n\nFor the purpose of Article II.9.1,\n\nFor the purpose of Article II.9.2, \n\n- a) the data controller is the Head of Resource and Service Centre at the European Agency for Safety and Health at Work; b) the privacy statement is available at https://osha.europa.eu/en/about-eu-osha/procurement. \n\n- Safety and Health at Work; b) the privacy statement is available at https://osha.europa.eu/en/about-eu-osha/procurement. \n\n- a) the subject matter and purpose of the processing of personal data by the contractor are [provide a short and concise description of the subject matter and purpose]; b) the localisation of and access to the personal data processed by the contractor shall comply \n\n- a short and concise description of the subject matter and purpose]; b) the localisation of and access to the personal data processed by the contractor shall comply with the following 2 : i. the personal data shall only be processed within the territory of the European Union \n\n- with the following : i. the personal data shall only be processed within the territory of the European Union and the European Economic Area and will not leave that territory; ii. the data shall only be held in data centres located with the territory of the European \n\n- and the European Economic Area and will not leave that territory; ii. the data shall only be held in data centres located with the territory of the European Union and the European Economic Area; iii. the contractor may not change the location of data processing without the prior written \n\n- Union and the European Economic Area; iii. the contractor may not change the location of data processing without the prior written authorisation of the contracting authority; iv. any transfer of personal data under the FWC to third countries or international \n\n- authorisation of the contracting authority; iv. any transfer of personal data under the FWC to third countries or international organisations shall fully comply with the requirements laid down in Chapter V of Regulation (EU)2018/1725 3 . \n\n$^{2 }$ This clause must be adapted with care on the basis of a risk assessment related to the processing of personal data for the relevant contract. \n\n3 Regulation (EU) 2018/1725 of 23 October 2018 on the protection of natural persons with regard to the processing of personal data by the Union institutions, bodies, offices and agencies and on the free movement of such data, and repealing Regulation (EC) No 45/2001 and Decision No 1247/2002/EC, OJ L 295/39, 21.11.2018, https://eur-lex.europa.eu/legal-content/EN/TXT/PDF/?uri=CELEX:32018R1725&from=EN \n\n8\n\n## I.9.2 Processing of personal data by the contractor\n\n## I.9. PROCESSING OF PERSONAL DATA\n\n## I.9.1 Processing of personal data by the contracting authority\n\nContractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender): \n\n[Full name] \n\n[Function] \n\n[Company name] \n\n[Full official address] \n\nE-mail: [complete]" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.895144184245712, + "doc_id": "ead36d31f9ba11f88651ec6b03c509d0cc7e5f9c3815d22d3702242447cbc7d8", + "edit_distance": 0.24029850746268658, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.780092457665215, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "EC - FWC services Dec 2018\n\nContract no: [complete]\n\npayment of 20 % of the price referred to in the relevant specific contract. The contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) must send the contracting authority an invoice for the pre-financing payment.\n\nThe contracting authority must pay the pre-financing within 30 days of receiving the invoice.\n\nA clearing of the pre-financing will be done with the (first) interim payment or the balance payment, as applicable. By derogation of this article, other clearing conditions may be established in the specific contract if considered necessary by the nature of the services.\n\n## I.6.2. Interim payments\n\n- 1. Different options are opened, depending on the amount and duration of the specific contracts:\n\nOption 1: No interim payment for specific contracts of less than EUR 25,000.\n\nOption 2: One interim payment for specific contracts having a value equal or bigger than EUR 25,000 and a duration of less than six months:\n\nThe contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) may claim an interim payment of up to 80% of the price referred to in the relevant specific contract in accordance with Article II.21.6.\n\nThe contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) must send an invoice for the interim payment as provided for in the tender specifications, accompanied by the following:\n\n-  relevant progress report or deliverable result, as stated in the specific contract;\n\nOption 3 : two interim payments for specific contracts having a value equal or bigger than EUR 25,000 and a duration of six months or more.\n\nThe contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) may claim a first interim payment of up to 40% of the price referred to in the relevant specific contract in accordance with Article II.21.6.\n\nThe contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) must send an invoice for the first interim payment as provided for in the tender specifications, accompanied by the following:\n\n-  relevant progress report or deliverable result, as stated in the specific contract;\n- The contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) may claim a second interim payment of up to 40% of the price referred to in the relevant specific contract in accordance with Article II.21.6. The contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) must send an invoice for the second interim\n- payment as provided for in the tender specifications, accompanied by the following:\n-  relevant progress report or deliverable result, as stated in the specific contract.\n- 2. The contracting authority must approve any submitted documents or deliverables and pay within 60 days from receipt of the invoice.\n- 3. If the contracting authority has observations to make, it must send them to the contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) and suspend the time limit for payment in accordance with Article II.21.7. The contractor (or leader in case of a joint tender) has fifteen days to submit additional information or corrections or a new version of the documents if the contracting authority requires it.\n- 4. The contracting authority must give its approval and pay within the remainder of the time-limit indicated in point (2.) unless it rejects partially or fully the submitted documents or deliverables.\n\n6", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "EC - FWC services Dec 2018 \n\nContract no: [complete] \n\npayment of 20 % of the price referred to in the relevant specific contract. The contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) must send the contracting authority an invoice for the pre-financing payment. \n\nThe contracting authority must pay the pre-financing within 30 days of receiving the invoice. \n\nA clearing of the pre-financing will be done with the (first) interim payment or the balance payment, as applicable. By derogation of this article, other clearing conditions may be established in the specific contract if considered necessary by the nature of the services.\n\n1. Different options are opened, depending on the amount and duration of the specific contracts:\n\nOption 1: No interim payment for specific contracts of less than EUR 25,000.\n\nOption 2: One interim payment for specific contracts having a value equal or bigger than EUR 25,000 and a duration of less than six months:\n\nThe contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) may claim an interim payment of up to 80% of the price referred to in the relevant specific contract in accordance with Article II.21.6. \n\nThe contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) must send an invoice for the interim payment as provided for in the tender specifications, accompanied by the following: \n\nOption 3 : two interim payments for specific contracts having a value equal or bigger than EUR 25,000 and a duration of six months or more.\n\nThe contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) may claim a first interim payment of up to 40% of the price referred to in the relevant specific contract in accordance with Article II.21.6. \n\nThe contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) must send an invoice for the first interim payment as provided for in the tender specifications, accompanied by the following:\n\n The contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) may claim a second interim payment of up to 40% of the price referred to in the relevant specific contract in accordance with Article II.21.6. \n\nThe contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) must send an invoice for the second interim payment as provided for in the tender specifications, accompanied by the following: \n\n2. The contracting authority must approve any submitted documents or deliverables and pay within 60 days from receipt of the invoice. \n\n3. If the contracting authority has observations to make, it must send them to the contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) and suspend the time limit for payment in accordance with Article II.21.7. The contractor (or leader in case of a joint tender) has fifteen days to submit additional information or corrections or a new version of the documents if the contracting authority requires it.\n\n4. The contracting authority must give its approval and pay within the remainder of the time-limit indicated in point (2.) unless it rejects partially or fully the submitted documents or deliverables.\n\n6\n\n- payment as provided for in the tender specifications, accompanied by the following:  relevant progress report or deliverable result, as stated in the specific contract.\n\n-  relevant progress report or deliverable result, as stated in the specific contract; The contractor (or leader in the case of a joint tender) may claim a second interim payment of up to 40% \n\n- provided for in the tender specifications, accompanied by the following:  relevant progress report or deliverable result, as stated in the specific contract; \n\n## I.6.2. Interim payments" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9309571538857904, + "doc_id": "904b2eb7f637e02343986069b27b52d7691c74087d8993b579643d33bf88cbc4", + "edit_distance": 0.21786833855799373, + "f1_score": 0.9893617021276596, + "meteor": 0.9137671691373608, + "precision": 0.9789473684210527, + "pred_md": "La procédure d'audit commence à la date de réception de la lettre correspondante envoyée par le pouvoir adjudicateur. Les audits se déroulent en toute confidentialité.\n\n- II.22.2 Le contractant doit conserver l'ensemble des documents originaux sur tout support approprié, y compris sur support numérique lorsque celui-ci est autorisé par la législation nationale, pendant une période de cinq ans à compter de la date de paiement du solde du dernier bon de commande émis au titre du CC.\n- II.22.3 Le contractant doit accorder au personnel du pouvoir adjudicateur et aux personnes extérieures mandatées par ce dernier un droit d'accès approprié aux sites et aux locaux où le CC est exécuté, ainsi qu'à toutes les informations nécessaires, y compris sous format électronique, pour mener à bien ces contrôles et audits. Le contractant doit veiller à la disponibilité immédiate des informations au moment du contrôle ou de l'audit et, en cas de demande en ce sens, à leur transmission sous une forme appropriée.\n- II.22.4 Sur la base des constatations faites lors de l'audit, un rapport provisoire est établi. Le pouvoir adjudicateur ou son mandataire doit l'envoyer au contractant, qui dispose de 30 jours à compter de la date de réception pour formuler des observations. Le contractant doit recevoir le rapport final dans un délai de 60 jours à compter de l'expiration du délai de présentation des observations.\n\nSur la base des constatations finales issues de l'audit, le pouvoir adjudicateur peut procéder au recouvrement total ou partiel des paiements effectués conformément à l'article II.21 et prendre toute autre mesure qu'il estime nécessaire.\n\n- II.22.5 En vertu du règlement (Euratom, CE) nº 2185/96 du Conseil du 11 novembre 1996 relatif aux contrôles et vérifications sur place effectués par la Commission pour la protection des intérêts financiers des Communautés européennes contre les fraudes et autres irrégularités et du règlement (UE, Euratom) nº 883/2013 du Parlement européen et du Conseil du 11 septembre 2013 relatif aux enquêtes effectuées par l'Office européen de lutte antifraude, l'OLAF peut effectuer des enquêtes, y compris des contrôles et des vérifications sur place, afin d'établir s'il y a eu fraude , corruption ou autre activité illégale dans le cadre du contrat portant atteinte aux intérêts financiers de l'Union. Les constatations qui ressortent d'une enquête peuvent entraîner des poursuites judiciaires au titre de la législation nationale.\n\nLes enquêtes peuvent être réalisées à tout moment durant la fourniture des services et jusqu'à cinq ans à compter du paiement du solde du dernier bon de commande émis au titre du CC.\n\n- II.22.6 La Cour des comptes, le Parquet européen institué par le règlement (UE) 2017/1939 du Conseil et, en ce qui concerne le traitement de données à caractère personnel, le 9 Contrôleur européen de la protection des données disposent des mêmes droits que le pouvoir adjudicateur, notamment du droit d'accès, aux fins de contrôle, d'audit et d'enquête.\n\n## II.23 APPLICABILITÉ DES RÈGLES INTERNES DU POUVOIR ADJUDICATEUR AU PERSONNEL DU CONTRACTANT\n\n- II.23.1 Les règles internes applicables au personnel du pouvoir adjudicateur (concernant notamment l'hygiène, la sécurité, la sûreté et les urgences, la consommation de tabac et d'alcool, l'accès aux bâtiments du pouvoir adjudicateur et la circulation dans les parkings) s'appliquent également au personnel employé par le contractant et, le cas échéant, par les sous-traitants de celui-ci, pour autant que ce personnel travaille sur le site du pouvoir adjudicateur.\n\n9 Règlement (UE) 2017/1939 du Conseil du 12 octobre 2017 mettant en œuvre une coopération renforcée concernant la création du Parquet européen.\n\n33\n\nFR", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "La procédure d'audit commence à la date de réception de la lettre correspondante envoyée par le pouvoir adjudicateur. Les audits se déroulent en toute confidentialité. \n\n- II.22.2 Le contractant doit conserver l'ensemble des documents originaux sur tout support approprié, y compris sur support numérique lorsque celui-ci est autorisé par la législation nationale, pendant une période de cinq ans à compter de la date de paiement du solde du dernier bon de commande émis au titre du CC. \n\n- II.22.3 Le contractant doit accorder au personnel du pouvoir adjudicateur et aux personnes extérieures mandatées par ce dernier un droit d'accès approprié aux sites et aux locaux où le CC est exécuté, ainsi qu'à toutes les informations nécessaires, y compris sous format électronique, pour mener à bien ces contrôles et audits. Le contractant doit veiller à la disponibilité immédiate des informations au moment du contrôle ou de l'audit et, en cas de demande en ce sens, à leur transmission sous une forme appropriée. \n\n- II.22.4 Sur la base des constatations faites lors de l'audit, un rapport provisoire est établi. Le pouvoir adjudicateur ou son mandataire doit l'envoyer au contractant, qui dispose de 30 jours à compter de la date de réception pour formuler des observations. Le contractant doit recevoir le rapport final dans un délai de 60 jours à compter de l'expiration du délai de présentation des observations. \n\n- II.22.5 En vertu du règlement (Euratom, CE) nº 2185/96 du Conseil du 11 novembre 1996 relatif aux contrôles et vérifications sur place effectués par la Commission pour la protection des intérêts financiers des Communautés européennes contre les fraudes et autres irrégularités et du règlement (UE, Euratom) nº 883/2013 du Parlement européen et du Conseil du 11 septembre 2013 relatif aux enquêtes effectuées par l'Office européen de lutte antifraude, l'OLAF peut effectuer des enquêtes, y compris des contrôles et des vérifications sur place, afin d'établir s'il y a eu fraude , corruption ou autre activité illégale dans le cadre du contrat portant atteinte aux intérêts financiers de l'Union. Les constatations qui ressortent d'une enquête peuvent entraîner des poursuites judiciaires au titre de la législation nationale. \n\n- II.22.6 La Cour des comptes, le Parquet européen institué par le règlement (UE) 2017/1939 du Conseil 9 et, en ce qui concerne le traitement de données à caractère personnel, le Contrôleur européen de la protection des données disposent des mêmes droits que le pouvoir adjudicateur, notamment du droit d'accès, aux fins de contrôle, d'audit et d'enquête. \n\n- II.23.1 Les règles internes applicables au personnel du pouvoir adjudicateur (concernant notamment l'hygiène, la sécurité, la sûreté et les urgences, la consommation de tabac et d'alcool, l'accès aux bâtiments du pouvoir adjudicateur et la circulation dans les parkings) s'appliquent également au personnel employé par le contractant et, le cas échéant, par les sous-traitants de celui-ci, pour autant que ce personnel travaille sur le site du pouvoir adjudicateur. \n\n33 9 Règlement (UE) 2017/1939 du Conseil du 12 octobre 2017 mettant en œuvre une coopération renforcée concernant la création du Parquet européen.\n\n33 FR\n\n## II.23 APPLICABILITÉ DES RÈGLES INTERNES DU POUVOIR ADJUDICATEUR AU PERSONNEL DU CONTRACTANT\n\nSur la base des constatations finales issues de l'audit, le pouvoir adjudicateur peut procéder au recouvrement total ou partiel des paiements effectués conformément à l'article II.21 et prendre toute autre mesure qu'il estime nécessaire." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9567265712996399, + "doc_id": "887f99a1fc46d3dc61d8d4e25d030a569041fd613f527d04f01df65de5cbaec7", + "edit_distance": 0.44336569579288027, + "f1_score": 0.9875000000000002, + "meteor": 0.8892517902529821, + "precision": 0.9875, + "pred_md": "EC - FWC services Dec 2018\n\nContract no: [complete]\n\n## II.24. CHECKS AND AUDITS\n\n- II.24.1 The contracting authority and the European Anti-Fraud Office may check or require an audit on the implementation of the FWC . This may be carried out either by OLAF's own staff or by any outside body authorised to do so on its behalf.\n\nSuch checks and audits may be initiated at any moment during the provision of the services and up to five years starting from the payment of the balance of the last specific contract issued under this FWC.\n\nThe audit procedure is initiated on the date of receipt of the relevant letter sent by the contracting authority. Audits are carried out on a confidential basis.\n\n- II.24.2 The contractor must keep all original documents stored on any appropriate medium, including digitised originals if authorised under national law, for a period of five years starting from the payment of the balance of the last specific contract issued under this FWC.\n- II.24.3 The contractor must grant the contracting authority's staff and outside personnel authorised by the contracting authority the appropriate right of access to sites and premises where the FWC is implemented and to all the information, including information in electronic format, needed to conduct such checks and audits. The contractor must ensure that the information is readily available at the moment of the check or audit and, if so requested, that information is handed over in an appropriate format.\n- II.24.4 On the basis of the findings made during the audit, a provisional report is drawn up. The contracting authority or its authorised representative must send it to the contractor, who has 30 days following the date of receipt to submit observations. The contractor must receive the final report within 60 days following the expiry of the deadline to submit observations.\n\nOn the basis of the final audit findings, the contracting authority may recover all or part of the payments made in accordance with Article II.23 and may take any other measures which it considers necessary.\n\nII.24.5\n\n- In accordance with Council Regulation (Euratom, EC) No 2185/96 of 11 November 1996 concerning on-the-spot checks and inspection carried out by the Commission in order to protect the European Communities' financial interests against fraud and other irregularities and Regulation (EU, Euratom) No 883/2013 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 11 September 2013 concerning investigations conducted by the European Anti-Fraud Office, the European Anti-Fraud Office may carry out investigations, including on the spot checks and inspections, to establish whether there has been fraud , corruption or any other illegal activity under the contract affecting the financial interests of the Union. Findings arising from an investigation may lead to criminal prosecution under national law.\n\nThe investigations may be carried out at any moment during the provision of the services and up to five years starting from the payment of the balance of the last specific contract issued under this FWC.\n\n- II.24.6 The Court of Auditors and the European Public Prosecutor's Office established by Council Regulation (EU) 2017/1939 8 ('the EPPO') have the same rights as the contracting authority, particularly right of access, for the purpose of checks, audits and investigations.\n\n8 Council Regulation (EU) 2017/1939 of 12 October 2017 implementing enhanced cooperation on the establishment of the European Public Prosecutor's Office\n\n35", + "recall": 0.9875, + "true_md": "Contract no: [complete] \n\nEC - FWC services Dec 2018 \n\n## II.24. CHECKS AND AUDITS\n\n- II.24.1 The contracting authority and the European Anti-Fraud Office may check or require an audit on the implementation of the FWC . This may be carried out either by OLAF’s own staff or by any outside body authorised to do so on its behalf.\n\n- II.24.2 The contractor must keep all original documents stored on any appropriate medium, including digitised originals if authorised under national law, for a period of five years starting from the payment of the balance of the last specific contract issued under this FWC.\n\n- II.24.3 The contractor must grant the contracting authority’s staff and outside personnel authorised by the contracting authority the appropriate right of access to sites and premises where the FWC is implemented and to all the information, including information in electronic format, needed to conduct such checks and audits. The contractor must ensure that the information is readily available at the moment of the check or audit and, if so requested, that information is handed over in an appropriate format.\n\n- II.24.4 On the basis of the findings made during the audit, a provisional report is drawn up. The contracting authority or its authorised representative must send it to the contractor, who has 30 days following the date of receipt to submit observations. The contractor must receive the final report within 60 days following the expiry of the deadline to submit observations. \n\n- II.24.5 In accordance with Council Regulation (Euratom, EC) No 2185/96 of 11 November 1996 concerning on-the-spot checks and inspection carried out by the Commission in order to protect the European Communities’ financial interests against fraud and other irregularities and Regulation (EU, Euratom) No 883/2013 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 11 September 2013 concerning investigations conducted by the European Anti-Fraud Office, the European Anti-Fraud Office may carry out investigations, including on the spot checks and inspections, to establish whether there has been fraud , corruption or any other illegal activity under the contract affecting the financial interests of the Union. Findings arising from an investigation may lead to criminal prosecution under national law.\n\n- II.24.6 The Court of Auditors and the European Public Prosecutor’s Office established by Council Regulation (EU) 2017/1939 8 (‘the EPPO’) have the same rights as the contracting authority, particularly right of access, for the purpose of checks, audits and investigations.\n\nSuch checks and audits may be initiated at any moment during the provision of the services and up to five years starting from the payment of the balance of the last specific contract issued under this FWC.\n\nThe audit procedure is initiated on the date of receipt of the relevant letter sent by the contracting authority. Audits are carried out on a confidential basis. \n\nOn the basis of the final audit findings, the contracting authority may recover all or part of the payments made in accordance with Article II.23 and may take any other measures which it considers necessary. \n\nThe investigations may be carried out at any moment during the provision of the services and up to five years starting from the payment of the balance of the last specific contract issued under this FWC. \n\n8 Council Regulation (EU) 2017/1939 of 12 October 2017 implementing enhanced cooperation on the establishment of the European Public Prosecutor’s Office \n\n35" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "7275dab6741cc238ec27f359b1c16386ddcfde1442a7461a1b6d60f383b7d47a", + "edit_distance": 0.981651376146789, + "f1_score": 0.17391304347826086, + "meteor": 0.14763779527559057, + "precision": 0.09523809523809523, + "pred_md": "| II.24 POLITIQUE ENVIRONNEMENTALE | .................................................................. 34 |\n|-----------------------------------------------|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|\n| II.25 SÉCURITÉ | ........................................................................................................ 34 |\n| II.26 LOI APPLICABLE ET RÈGLEMENT DES LITIGES | .............................................. 34 |\n\n4\n\nFR", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "4 FR" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9886644991932828, + "doc_id": "ff39d0e90653870fde5bb979c6ea044d3625342379c8cd5b48b8a759a17d494b", + "edit_distance": 0.029574861367837338, + "f1_score": 0.9924050632911392, + "meteor": 0.9957651234271655, + "precision": 0.9949238578680203, + "pred_md": "Contract number: [ complete ]\n\nContract conditions of December 2015\n\n- (a) it has evidence that the contracting authority has committed substantial errors, irregularities or fraud in the procedure for awarding the contract or the performance of the contract;\n- (b) the contracting authority fails to comply with its obligations, in particular the obligation to provide the information needed for the contractor to perform the contract as provided for in the tender specifications.\n\n## II.17.3. Procedure for termination\n\nA party must formally notify the other party of its intention to terminate the contract and the grounds for termination.\n\nThe other party has 30 days following the date of receipt to submit observations, including the measures it has taken to continue fulfilling its contractual obligations. Failing that, the decision to terminate becomes enforceable the day after the time limit for submitting observations has elapsed.\n\nIf the other party submits observations, the party intending to terminate must formally notify it either of the withdrawal of its intention to terminate or of its final decision to terminate.\n\nIn the cases referred to in points (a) to (d) and (g) to (i) of Article II.17.1 and in Article II.17.2, the date on which the termination takes effect must be specified in the formal notification .\n\nIn the cases referred to in points (e), (f) and (j) of Article II.17.1, the termination takes effect on the day following the date on which the contractor receives notification of termination.\n\nIn addition, at the request of the contracting authority and regardless of the grounds for termination, the contractor must provide all necessary assistance, including information, documents and files, to allow the contracting authority to complete, continue or transfer the delivery of the supplies to a new contractor or internally, without interruption or adverse effect on the quality or continuity of the delivery of the supplies. The parties may agree to draw up a transition plan detailing the contractor's assistance unless such plan is already detailed in other contractual documents or in the tender specifications. The contractor must provide such assistance at no additional cost, except if it can demonstrate that it requires substantial additional resources or means, in which case it must provide an estimate of the costs involved and the parties will negotiate an arrangement in good faith.\n\n## II.17.4. Effects of termination\n\nThe contractor is liable for damage incurred by the contracting authority as a result of the termination of the contract including the cost of appointing another contractor to provide or complete the supplies, unless the damage was caused by the situation specified in Article II.17.1 (j) or in Article II.17.2. The contracting authority may claim compensation for such damage.\n\nThe contractor is not entitled to compensation for any loss resulting from the termination of the contract, including loss of anticipated profits, unless the loss was caused by the situation specified in Article II.17.2.\n\n26", + "recall": 0.98989898989899, + "true_md": "Contract number: [ complete ] \n\nContract conditions of December 2015 \n\n- (a) it has evidence that the contracting authority has committed substantial errors, irregularities or fraud in the procedure for awarding the contract or the performance of the contract;\n\n- (b) the contracting authority fails to comply with its obligations, in particular the obligation to provide the information needed for the contractor to perform the contract as provided for in the tender specifications.\n\n## II.17.3. Procedure for termination\n\n## II.17.4. Effects of termination\n\nA party must formally notify the other party of its intention to terminate the contract and the grounds for termination.\n\nThe other party has 30 days following the date of receipt to submit observations, including the measures it has taken to continue fulfilling its contractual obligations. Failing that, the decision to terminate becomes enforceable the day after the time limit for submitting observations has elapsed.\n\nIf the other party submits observations, the party intending to terminate must formally notify it either of the withdrawal of its intention to terminate or of its final decision to terminate.\n\nIn the cases referred to in points (a) to (d) and (g) to (i) of Article II.17.1 and in Article II.17.2, the date on which the termination takes effect must be specified in the formal notification . \n\nIn the cases referred to in points (e), (f) and (j) of Article II.17.1, the termination takes effect on the day following the date on which the contractor receives notification of termination.\n\nIn addition, at the request of the contracting authority and regardless of the grounds for termination, the contractor must provide all necessary assistance, including information, documents and files, to allow the contracting authority to complete, continue or transfer the delivery of the supplies to a new contractor or internally, without interruption or adverse effect on the quality or continuity of the delivery of the supplies. The parties may agree to draw up a transition plan detailing the contractor’s assistance unless such plan is already detailed in other contractual documents or in the tender specifications. The contractor must provide such assistance at no additional cost, except if it can demonstrate that it requires substantial additional resources or means, in which case it must provide an estimate of the costs involved and the parties will negotiate an arrangement in good faith. \n\nThe contractor is liable for damage incurred by the contracting authority as a result of the termination of the contract including the cost of appointing another contractor to provide or complete the supplies, unless the damage was caused by the situation specified in Article II.17.1 (j) or in Article II.17.2. The contracting authority may claim compensation for such damage.\n\nThe contractor is not entitled to compensation for any loss resulting from the termination of the contract, including loss of anticipated profits, unless the loss was caused by the situation specified in Article II.17.2.\n\n26" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9437669015934508, + "doc_id": "1fd221edf4f83c4b558d27132c917a40df3d92069e3cc69d8415dcec553a678a", + "edit_distance": 0.8684627575277337, + "f1_score": 0.9844961240310077, + "meteor": 0.7553363930817962, + "precision": 0.9883268482490273, + "pred_md": "General Administrative and Submission Clauses\n\n## 3.4. Physical or virtual data rooms\n\nThe 'Terms of Reference', point 1.2 may provide for a physical or virtual data room, if required by the subject matter of the procurement, subject to the Tenderer's prior signature of confidentiality and non-disclosure agreements.\n\n- a) Where a physical data room is used, it will be made available to Tenderers to facilitate access to information that is not publicly available and that Tenderers may find useful for preparing the technical and financial offer. Depending on the sensitivity of the information provided the access of attendees per Tenderer will be restricted to the number indicated in point 1.2 of the 'Terms of Reference'. The access of third parties (for example subcontractors) is prohibited. Attendees will not be permitted to take copies in any form of the data made available to them.\n- b) Where a virtual data room is used, it will be made available upon specific request by the Tenderer to access all existing and necessary technical or confidential data that Tenderers may find useful for preparing the technical and financial offer. The virtual data room is the computerized online platform and will be accessible to the Tenderers who register online and sign the Undertaking of confidentiality and Non-disclosure. Once the Tenderer has signed such Undertaking of confidentiality and Non-disclosure and sent back to the following address CS-procurement@eib.org the Tenderer will be provided by return with a link and granted access to the virtual data room. The information in the virtual data room is provided to the Tenderer solely and exclusively for the purpose of preparing a Tender. The information cannot be used totally or partially, directly or indirectly, for any other purpose, unless the EIB gives its prior written authorisation. The Tenderers are not authorised to copy, print or distribute none of the documents/data/drawings or any other information from virtual data room.\n\n## 3.5. Clarification following the submission of tenders\n\nWhere information or documentation contained in a tender is or appears to be incomplete or erroneous or where specific documents are missing, EIB may request the Tenderer concerned to submit, supplement, clarify or complete the relevant information or documentation within an appropriate lime limit. EIB shall ensure that such requests are made in full compliance with the principles of equal treatment and transparency.\n\nWithout prejudice to the preceding paragraph, if, after the deadline for submission of tenders, a clarification is needed by EIB or if obvious clerical errors in the tender need to be corrected, EIB may contact the Tenderer concerned, although such contacts may not lead to any alterations of the terms of the submitted tender.\n\nOnly in the case of a negotiated procedure, competitive dialogue or competitive procedure with negotiation as well as in procurement procedures below the Directive threshold (as regularly updated), the EIB may negotiate with all the tenderers the offers they have submitted, in order to adapt them to the requirements set out in the contract notice, 'Terms of Reference' or any additional document in order to find the tender offering best value for money. During negotiations equal treatment of all Tenderers will be ensured.\n\n## 3.6. Presentations\n\nIf foreseen in the 'Terms of Reference' and in accordance with the objective criteria defined therein, Tenderers having passed the exclusion and selection stage, may be invited to make an oral\n\nLast updated: June 2020\n\nPage 6 of 21", + "recall": 0.9806949806949807, + "true_md": "General Administrative and Submission Clauses\n\n## 3.4. Physical or virtual data rooms\n\n## 3.5. Clarification following the submission of tenders\n\n## 3.6. Presentations\n\nThe `Terms of Reference`, point 1.2 may provide for a physical or virtual data room, if required by the subject matter of the procurement, subject to the Tenderer’s prior signature of confidentiality and non-disclosure agreements. \n\nWhere information or documentation contained in a tender is or appears to be incomplete or erroneous or where specific documents are missing, EIB may request the Tenderer concerned to submit, supplement, clarify or complete the relevant information or documentation within an appropriate lime limit. EIB shall ensure that such requests are made in full compliance with the principles of equal treatment and transparency. \n\nWithout prejudice to the preceding paragraph, if, after the deadline for submission of tenders, a clarification is needed by EIB or if obvious clerical errors in the tender need to be corrected, EIB may contact the Tenderer concerned, although such contacts may not lead to any alterations of the terms of the submitted tender. \n\nOnly in the case of a negotiated procedure, competitive dialogue or competitive procedure with negotiation as well as in procurement procedures below the Directive threshold (as regularly updated), the EIB may negotiate with all the tenderers the offers they have submitted, in order to adapt them to the requirements set out in the contract notice, `Terms of Reference` or any additional document in order to find the tender offering best value for money. During negotiations equal treatment of all Tenderers will be ensured. \n\nIf foreseen in the ‘Terms of Reference’ and in accordance with the objective criteria defined therein, Tenderers having passed the exclusion and selection stage, may be invited to make an oral \n\n- a) Where a physical data room is used, it will be made available to Tenderers to facilitate access to information that is not publicly available and that Tenderers may find useful for preparing the technical and financial offer. Depending on the sensitivity of the information provided the access of attendees per Tenderer will be restricted to the number indicated in point 1.2 of the `Terms of Reference`. The access of third parties (for example subcontractors) is prohibited. Attendees will not be permitted to take copies in any form of the data made available to them.\n\n- b) Where a virtual data room is used, it will be made available upon specific request by the Tenderer to access all existing and necessary technical or confidential data that Tenderers may find useful for preparing the technical and financial offer. The virtual data room is the computerized online platform and will be accessible to the Tenderers who register online and sign the Undertaking of confidentiality and Non-disclosure. Once the Tenderer has signed such Undertaking of confidentiality and Non-disclosure and sent back to the following address CS-procurement@eib.org the Tenderer will be provided by return with a link and granted access to the virtual data room. The information in the virtual data room is provided to the Tenderer solely and exclusively for the purpose of preparing a Tender. The information cannot be used totally or partially, directly or indirectly, for any other purpose, unless the EIB gives its prior written authorisation. The Tenderers are not authorised to copy, print or distribute none of the documents/data/drawings or any other information from virtual data room. \n\nLast updated: June 2020\n\nPage 6 of 21" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8975064246385654, + "doc_id": "a59cc931dad74d3a93f32ef1da9334c0568a6b26dfe25afc50599def13b2e911", + "edit_distance": 0.6757990867579908, + "f1_score": 0.9927272727272728, + "meteor": 0.6945722633398477, + "precision": 0.9927272727272727, + "pred_md": "It is the responsibility of each tenderer to ensure that the total amount of the tender inserted in the relevant field of the e-Submission application corresponds to the amount indicated in the uploaded financial offer. In case of discrepancies, only the amount indicated in the financial offer will be taken into account. The financial offer shall be:\n\n- · expressed in euro.cents. Tenderers from countries outside the euro zone have to quote their prices in euro as well. The price quoted may not be revised in line with exchange rate movements. It is for the tenderer to bear the risks or the benefits deriving from any variation.\n- · quoted free of all duties, taxes and other charges, i.e. also free of VAT. The tenderer may indicate the amount of VAT but it must be shown separately.\n\n The European Union Institutions are exempt from such charges in the EU under Articles 3 and 4 of the Protocol on the Privileges and Immunities of the European Union of 8 April 1965 annexed to the Treaty on the Functioning of the European Union. Exemption is granted to the Commission by the governments of the Member States, either through refunds upon presentation of documentary evidence or by direct exemption.\n\nFor those countries where national legislation provides an exemption by means of a reimbursement, the amount of VAT must be shown separately. In case of doubt about the applicable VAT system, it is the tenderer's responsibility to contact his or her national authorities to clarify the way in which the European Union is exempt from VAT.\n\n- · Inclusive of all costs and expenses directly and indirectly connected with the services to be delivered under the FWC. No further costs will be paid by the contracting authority for travel expenses, missions, trainings, financial costs, or any other costs which the contractor may incur in the process of implementation of any specific contract at the normal places of delivery listed in Section 1.5 above, except if the specific service requirements indicate that any such costs may be invoiced separately, in accordance with Article I.5.3 of the draft FWC.\n\nThe price structure document as referred to in Section 3.5 may be required by the Contracting Authority. Such price structure document shall explain in detail how tenderers have established their prices for the service. The price structure document should cover at least the following elements:\n\n- i. the expenditure foreseen for staff (HR cost), with breakdown of cost demonstrating compliance of the prices with the laws of the country in which the services are to be performed, for minimum levels of staff remuneration, contributions to the social security, occupational safety and health standards, and/or other applicable schemes and standards;\n- ii. all other elements that have been taken into account to formulate the financial offer and that cover all the non-HR costs arising from the technical aspects of the tender (including, but not limited to: reporting requirements, training, recruitment and replacement of staff with the appropriate qualification level, travelling arrangements -if applicable, FWC management, the potential liquidated damages/compensations foreseen in the service level agreement and/or other risk factors, company overheads, profit margin, etc.).\n\nThe provisions on price revisions are provided in the Draft FWC.\n\nThe prices provided in the Price Catalogue will become part of Annex II to the FWC.\n\n44", + "recall": 0.9927272727272727, + "true_md": "It is the responsibility of each tenderer to ensure that the total amount of the tender inserted in the relevant field of the e-Submission application corresponds to the amount indicated in the uploaded financial offer. In case of discrepancies, only the amount indicated in the financial offer will be taken into account. The financial offer shall be: \n\n The European Union Institutions are exempt from such charges in the EU under Articles 3 and 4 of the Protocol on the Privileges and Immunities of the European Union of 8 April 1965 annexed to the Treaty on the Functioning of the European Union. Exemption is granted to the Commission by the governments of the Member States, either through refunds upon presentation of documentary evidence or by direct exemption.\n\nFor those countries where national legislation provides an exemption by means of a reimbursement, the amount of VAT must be shown separately. In case of doubt about the applicable VAT system, it is the tenderer's responsibility to contact his or her national authorities to clarify the way in which the European Union is exempt from VAT. \n\nThe price structure document as referred to in Section 3.5 may be required by the Contracting Authority. Such price structure document shall explain in detail how tenderers have established their prices for the service. The price structure document should cover at least the following elements:\n\nThe provisions on price revisions are provided in the Draft FWC.\n\nThe prices provided in the Price Catalogue will become part of Annex II to the FWC. \n\n44\n\n- i. the expenditure foreseen for staff (HR cost), with breakdown of cost demonstrating compliance of the prices with the laws of the country in which the services are to be performed, for minimum levels of staff remuneration, contributions to the social security, occupational safety and health standards, and/or other applicable schemes and standards; ii. all other elements that have been taken into account to formulate the financial offer \n\n- and standards; ii. all other elements that have been taken into account to formulate the financial offer and that cover all the non-HR costs arising from the technical aspects of the tender (including, but not limited to: reporting requirements, training, recruitment and replacement of staff with the appropriate qualification level, travelling arrangements – if applicable, FWC management, the potential liquidated damages/compensations foreseen in the service level agreement and/or other risk factors, company overheads, profit margin, etc.).\n\n- • Inclusive of all costs and expenses directly and indirectly connected with the services to be delivered under the FWC. No further costs will be paid by the contracting authority for travel expenses, missions, trainings, financial costs, or any other costs which the contractor may incur in the process of implementation of any specific contract at the normal places of delivery listed in Section 1.5 above, except if the specific service requirements indicate that any such costs may be invoiced separately, in accordance with Article I.5.3 of the draft FWC.\n\n- • expressed in euro.cents. Tenderers from countries outside the euro zone have to quote their prices in euro as well. The price quoted may not be revised in line with exchange rate movements. It is for the tenderer to bear the risks or the benefits deriving from any variation. • quoted free of all duties, taxes and other charges, i.e. also free of VAT. The tenderer \n\n- deriving from any variation. • quoted free of all duties, taxes and other charges, i.e. also free of VAT. The tenderer may indicate the amount of VAT but it must be shown separately." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.737305595119753, + "doc_id": "aaa98c2148469abf87737d6f3a056f62b0bcbe61e70ae5a81c08ae42e1f76e07", + "edit_distance": 0.4777777777777778, + "f1_score": 0.9666666666666668, + "meteor": 0.8041688539463924, + "precision": 0.9830508474576272, + "pred_md": "Appendice 1 de l'Annexe VII\n\n## PROCÉDURES D'URGENCE\n\nCommunication au Personnel - CP 90/18 - 14 Décembre 2018\n\nPour signaler un danger quelconque, un incendie, une inondation ou un problème médical urgent, il faut toujours avertir le 2000\n\n## 1. LES MOYENS D'ALERTE\n\nLes moyens disponibles pour avertir le Centre de Sécurité du Secrétariat Général (CdS) sont les suivants:\n\n83\n\nANNEX VII\n\nFR", + "recall": 0.9508196721311475, + "true_md": "Appendice 1 de l'Annexe VII \n\n## Pour signaler un danger quelconque, un incendie, une inondation ou un problème médical urgent, il faut toujours avertir le 2000\n\n## 1. LES MOYENS D'ALERTE\n\nLes moyens disponibles pour avertir le Centre de Sécurité du Secrétariat Général (CdS) sont les suivants: \n\n83 FR \n\nANNEX VII \n\n## PROCÉDURES D’URGENCE Communication au Personnel - CP 90/18 - 14 Décembre 2018\n\nPROCÉDURES D’URGENCE Communication au Personnel - CP 90/18 - 14 Décembre 2018" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.92306346442559, + "doc_id": "84255fdfff6e4f715c679189a0ab2242eaec4090916556dcd1fec64ba2523130", + "edit_distance": 0.04918032786885246, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9850757161101988, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "ANNEXE V\n\nOffre financière du contractant (référence nº [ compléter ] du [ date ]) 12\n\n12 Veuillez insérer le contenu de l'offre financière. Si l'offre financière est trop volumineuse, veuillez inclure une référence claire et sans ambiguïté à cette offre, qui mentionne sa date de réception par le Secrétariat.\n\n42\n\nANNEXE V\n\nFR", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "ANNEXE V \n\nOffre financière du contractant (référence nº [ compléter ] du [ date ]) 12\n\n42 12 Veuillez insérer le contenu de l'offre financière. Si l'offre financière est trop volumineuse, veuillez inclure une référence claire et sans ambiguïté à cette offre, qui mentionne sa date de réception par le Secrétariat. \n\n42 FR \n\nANNEXE V" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7855353227467218, + "doc_id": "d7f8af7c1f26a00f38de5bb1697493956bac307c232e3145f1a6842077747b80", + "edit_distance": 0.27790973871733965, + "f1_score": 0.9681528662420382, + "meteor": 0.781544837601967, + "precision": 0.9620253164556962, + "pred_md": "Contract number: [ complete ]\n\nContract conditions of December 2015\n\navailable for that month. The contractor establishes the new price on this basis and communicates it as soon as possible to the contracting authority for verification.\n\nThe price revision is calculated using the following formula:\n\n\n\nPr = Po x ( - ) Io where: Pr = revised price; Po = price in the tender; Io = index for the month in which the contract enters into force;\n\nIr = index for the month in which the request to revise prices is received.\n\n## II.20. PAYMENTS AND GUARANTIES\n\n## II.20.1. Date of payment\n\nPayments are deemed to be effected on the date when they are debited to the contracting authority's account.\n\n## II.20.2. Currency\n\nPayments are made in euros or in the currency provided for in Article I.7.\n\n## II.20.3. Conversion\n\nThe contracting authority makes any conversion between the euro and another currency at the daily euro exchange rate published in the Official Journal of the European Union, or failing that, at the monthly accounting exchange rate, as established by the European Commission and published on the website indicated below, applicable on the day when it issues the payment order.\n\nThe contractor makes any conversion between the euro and another currency at the monthly accounting exchange rate, established by the Commission and published on the website indicated below, applicable on the date of the invoice.\n\nhttp://ec.europa.eu/budget/contracts\\_grants/info\\_contracts/inforeuro/inforeuro\\_en.cfm\n\n## II.20.4. Costs of transfer\n\nThe costs of the transfer are borne as follows:\n\n- (a) the contracting authority bears the costs of dispatch charged by its bank,\n- (b) the contractor bears the cost of receipt charged by its bank,\n- (c) the party causing repetition of the transfer bears the costs for repeated transfer.\n\n## II.20.5. Pre-financing, performance and money retention guarantees\n\n28", + "recall": 0.9743589743589743, + "true_md": "Contract number: [ complete ] \n\nContract conditions of December 2015 \n\navailable for that month. The contractor establishes the new price on this basis and communicates it as soon as possible to the contracting authority for verification.\n\nThe price revision is calculated using the following formula: \n\n$$Ir Pr = Po x ( — ) Io where: Pr = revised price; $$\n\nwhere: \n\nPr = revised price; \n\nPo = price in the tender; \n\nIo = index for the month in which the contract enters into force; \n\nIr = index for the month in which the request to revise prices is received. \n\n## II.20. PAYMENTS AND GUARANTIES\n\n## II.20.1. Date of payment\n\nPayments are deemed to be effected on the date when they are debited to the contracting authority’s account. \n\nPayments are made in euros or in the currency provided for in Article I.7.\n\n## II.20.2. Currency\n\n## II.20.3. Conversion\n\n## II.20.4. Costs of transfer\n\n## II.20.5. Pre-financing, performance and money retention guarantees\n\nThe contracting authority makes any conversion between the euro and another currency at the daily euro exchange rate published in the Official Journal of the European Union, or failing that, at the monthly accounting exchange rate, as established by the European Commission and published on the website indicated below, applicable on the day when it issues the payment order.\n\nThe contractor makes any conversion between the euro and another currency at the monthly accounting exchange rate, established by the Commission and published on the website indicated below, applicable on the date of the invoice. \n\nhttp://ec.europa.eu/budget/contracts\\_grants/info\\_contracts/inforeuro/inforeuro\\_en.cfm\n\nThe costs of the transfer are borne as follows: \n\n- (a) the contracting authority bears the costs of dispatch charged by its bank, (b) the contractor bears the cost of receipt charged by its bank, \n\n- (a) the contracting authority bears the costs of dispatch charged by its bank, (b) the contractor bears the cost of receipt charged by its bank, (c) the party causing repetition of the transfer bears the costs for repeated transfer. \n\n- (b) the contractor bears the cost of receipt charged by its bank, (c) the party causing repetition of the transfer bears the costs for repeated transfer. \n\n28" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9054282315484912, + "doc_id": "f4c7342fd507383da5233387c05f7160680250ac0ce125972da58113a4427b23", + "edit_distance": 0.1144578313253012, + "f1_score": 0.9487750556792873, + "meteor": 0.9339938221605364, + "precision": 0.9508928571428571, + "pred_md": "Contract number: [ complete ]\n\nContract conditions of December 2015\n\n'Irregularity' : any infringement of a provision of Union and Community law resulting from an act or omission by an economic operator, which has, or would have, the effect of prejudicing the Union's budget.\n\n- 'Notification' (or 'notify'): form of communication between the parties made in writing including by electronic means;\n- 'Performance of the contract' : the execution of tasks and delivery of the purchased supplies by the contractor to the contracting authority;\n- 'Personnel' : persons employed directly or indirectly or contracted by the contractor to perform the contract;\n- 'Professional conflicting interest' : a situation in which the contractor's previous or ongoing professional activities affect its capacity to perform the contract to an appropriate quality standard.\n- 'Related person' : any person who has the power to represent the contractor or to take decisions on its behalf;\n\n'Substantial error' : any infringement of a contract provision resulting from an act or omission, which causes or might cause a loss to the Union's budget.\n\n'Supplier portal' : the e-PRIOR portal, which allows the contractor to exchange electronic business documents, such as invoices, through a graphical user interface; its main features can be found in the supplier portal overview document available on: http://ec.europa.eu/dgs/informatics/supplier\\_portal/doc/um\\_supplier\\_portal\\_overview.pdf\n\n## II.2. ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES IN THE EVENT OF A JOINT TENDER\n\nIn the event of a joint tender submitted by a group of economic operators and where the group does not have legal personality or legal capacity, one member of the group is appointed as leader of the group.\n\n## II.3. SEVERABILITY\n\nEach provision of this contract is severable and distinct from the others. If a provision is or becomes illegal, invalid or unenforceable to any extent, it must be severed from the remainder of the contract. This does not affect the legality, validity or enforceability of any other provisions of the contract, which continue in full force and effect. The illegal, invalid or unenforceable provision must be replaced by a legal, valid and enforceable substitute provision which corresponds as closely as possible with the actual intent of the parties under the illegal, invalid or unenforceable provision. The replacement of such a provision must be made in accordance with Article II.11. The contract must be interpreted as if it had contained the substitute provision as from its entry into force.\n\n## II.4. DELIVERY OF SUPPLIES\n\n- II.4.1 The contractor must comply with the minimum requirements provided for in the tender specifications. This includes compliance with applicable obligations under environmental, social and labour law established by Union and Community\n\n12", + "recall": 0.9466666666666667, + "true_md": "Contract number: [ complete ] \n\nContract conditions of December 2015 \n\n‘Irregularity’ : any infringement of a provision of Union and Community law resulting from an act or omission by an economic operator, which has, or would have, the effect of prejudicing the Union’s budget. \n\n‘Notification’ (or ‘notify’): form of communication between the parties made in writing including by electronic means;\n\n‘Performance of the contract’ : the execution of tasks and delivery of the purchased supplies by the contractor to the contracting authority;\n\n‘Personnel’ : persons employed directly or indirectly or contracted by the contractor to perform the contract; \n\n‘Professional conflicting interest’ : a situation in which the contractor’s previous or ongoing professional activities affect its capacity to perform the contract to an appropriate quality standard.\n\n‘Related person’ : any person who has the power to represent the contractor or to take decisions on its behalf;\n\n‘Substantial error’ : any infringement of a contract provision resulting from an act or omission, which causes or might cause a loss to the Union’s budget. \n\n‘Supplier portal’ : the e-PRIOR portal, which allows the contractor to exchange electronic business documents, such as invoices, through a graphical user interface; its main features can be found in the supplier portal overview document available on: http://ec.europa.eu/dgs/informatics/supplier\\_portal/doc/um\\_supplier\\_portal\\_overview.pdf\n\n## II.2. ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES IN THE EVENT OF A JOINT TENDER\n\n## II.3. SEVERABILITY\n\n## II.4. DELIVERY OF SUPPLIES\n\nIn the event of a joint tender submitted by a group of economic operators and where the group does not have legal personality or legal capacity, one member of the group is appointed as leader of the group.\n\nEach provision of this contract is severable and distinct from the others. If a provision is or becomes illegal, invalid or unenforceable to any extent, it must be severed from the remainder of the contract. This does not affect the legality, validity or enforceability of any other provisions of the contract, which continue in full force and effect. The illegal, invalid or unenforceable provision must be replaced by a legal, valid and enforceable substitute provision which corresponds as closely as possible with the actual intent of the parties under the illegal, invalid or unenforceable provision. The replacement of such a provision must be made in accordance with Article II.11. The contract must be interpreted as if it had contained the substitute provision as from its entry into force. \n\n- II.4.1 The contractor must comply with the minimum requirements provided for in the tender specifications. This includes compliance with applicable obligations under environmental, social and labour law established by Union and Community\n\n12" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8245324167712056, + "doc_id": "835c0e8db6e1f88b5750e41845decbe2e1f981a653673f19c06012b8bc5a39cb", + "edit_distance": 0.8447653429602888, + "f1_score": 0.9936102236421726, + "meteor": 0.6291187518772955, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "possible à l'intention réelle des parties qui sous-tend la disposition illégale, invalide ou inapplicable. Le remplacement de cette disposition doit se faire conformément à l'article II.11. Le CC doit être interprété comme s'il contenait la disposition de substitution depuis son entrée en vigueur.\n\n## II.4 FOURNITURE DES SERVICES\n\n- II.4.1 La signature du CC ne garantit pas d'achat réel. Le pouvoir adjudicateur n'est lié que par les bons de commande exécutant le CC.\n- II.4.2 Le contractant doit fournir des services répondant à des normes de qualité élevées, conformément à l'état de la technique dans le secteur concerné et aux dispositions du CC, et plus particulièrement au cahier des charges et aux conditions de son offre. Lorsque l'Union est en droit d'apporter des modifications aux résultats, ceux-ci doivent être livrés dans un format et accompagnés des informations nécessaires qui permettent effectivement d'apporter de telles modifications d'une manière pratique.\n- II.4.3.1 Le contractant doit satisfaire aux exigences minimales prévues dans le cahier des charges. Cela comprend le respect des obligations applicables en vertu de la législation environnementale et sociale et de la législation du travail établies par le droit de l'Union, le droit national et les conventions collectives ou par les dispositions législatives internationales dans le domaine environnemental et social et dans le domaine du travail énumérées à l'annexe X de la directive 2014/24/UE , ainsi que le respect des obligations en 4 matière de protection des données découlant des règlements (UE) 2016/679 et (UE) 5 2018/1725 . 6\n- II.4.3.2 Le contractant est seul responsable en ce qui concerne le respect de toutes les obligations légales qui lui sont applicables, notamment celles émanant du droit fiscal et des dispositions du droit du travail relatives à la sécurité.\n- II.4.3.3 Les contractants qui sont des personnes physiques sont tenus d'apporter la preuve de leur statut d'indépendant. À cette fin, ils doivent fournir les pièces relatives à leur couverture par la sécurité sociale et à leur assujettissement à la taxe sur la valeur ajoutée (TVA).\n- II.4.4 C'est au seul contractant qu'il incombe de prendre les mesures nécessaires pour obtenir tout permis ou toute licence nécessaires à l' exécution du CC en vertu du droit belge.\n- II.4.5 Sauf indication contraire, tous les délais stipulés dans le CC sont calculés en jours civils . 7\n- II.4.6 Le contractant ne doit pas se présenter comme un représentant du pouvoir adjudicateur et doit informer les tiers qu'il ne fait pas partie de la fonction publique européenne.\n- II.4.7 Le contractant est responsable du personnel qui exécute les services et exerce son autorité sur son personnel sans interférence du pouvoir adjudicateur. Le contractant doit informer son personnel :\n- a) qu'il ne peut accepter d'instructions directes de la part du pouvoir adjudicateur; et\n- b) que sa participation à la fourniture des services ne débouche pas sur un emploi auprès du pouvoir adjudicateur ou sur une relation contractuelle avec ce dernier.\n- II.4.8 Le contractant doit veiller à ce que le personnel exécutant le CC ainsi que le personnel de remplacement futur possèdent les qualifications et l'expérience professionnelles requises\n\n4 JO L 94 du 28.3.2014, p. 65.\n\n5 Règlement (UE) 2016/679 du Parlement européen et du Conseil du 27 avril 2016 relatif à la protection des personnes physiques à l'égard du traitement des données à caractère personnel et à la libre circulation de ces données, et abrogeant la directive 95/46/CE, JO L 119 du 4.5.2016, p. 1.\n\n6 Règlement (UE) 2018/1725 du Parlement européen et du Conseil du 23 octobre 2018 relatif à la protection des personnes physiques à l'égard du traitement des données à caractère personnel par les institutions, organes et organismes de l'Union et à la libre circulation de ces données, et abrogeant le règlement (CE) n° 45/2001 et la décision n° 1247/2002/CE, JO L 295 du 21.11.2018, p. 39.\n\n7 Si l'indication des délais se fait en jours ouvrables, veuillez tenir compte de la différence entre le calendrier des institutions européennes et le calendrier national.\n\n14\n\nFR", + "recall": 0.9873015873015873, + "true_md": "possible à l'intention réelle des parties qui sous-tend la disposition illégale, invalide ou inapplicable. Le remplacement de cette disposition doit se faire conformément à l'article II.11. Le CC doit être interprété comme s'il contenait la disposition de substitution depuis son entrée en vigueur. \n\n4 JO L 94 du 28.3.2014, p. 65. 5 Règlement (UE) 2016/679 du Parlement européen et du Conseil du 27 avril 2016 relatif à la protection des \n\nJO L 94 du 28.3.2014, p. 65. 5 Règlement (UE) 2016/679 du Parlement européen et du Conseil du 27 avril 2016 relatif à la protection des personnes physiques à l'égard du traitement des données à caractère personnel et à la libre circulation de ces données, et abrogeant la directive 95/46/CE, JO L 119 du 4.5.2016, p. 1. 6 Règlement (UE) 2018/1725 du Parlement européen et du Conseil du 23 octobre 2018 relatif à la protection des \n\ndonnées, et abrogeant la directive 95/46/CE, JO L 119 du 4.5.2016, p. 1. 6 Règlement (UE) 2018/1725 du Parlement européen et du Conseil du 23 octobre 2018 relatif à la protection des personnes physiques à l'égard du traitement des données à caractère personnel par les institutions, organes et organismes de l'Union et à la libre circulation de ces données, et abrogeant le règlement (CE) n° 45/2001 et la décision n° 1247/2002/CE, JO L 295 du 21.11.2018, p. 39. 7 Si l'indication des délais se fait en jours ouvrables, veuillez tenir compte de la différence entre le calendrier des \n\n14 décision n° 1247/2002/CE, JO L 295 du 21.11.2018, p. 39. 7 Si l'indication des délais se fait en jours ouvrables, veuillez tenir compte de la différence entre le calendrier des institutions européennes et le calendrier national. \n\n14 FR\n\n- II.4.8 Le contractant doit veiller à ce que le personnel exécutant le CC ainsi que le personnel de remplacement futur possèdent les qualifications et l'expérience professionnelles requises \n\n- a) qu'il ne peut accepter d'instructions directes de la part du pouvoir adjudicateur; et \n\n- b) que sa participation à la fourniture des services ne débouche pas sur un emploi auprès du pouvoir adjudicateur ou sur une relation contractuelle avec ce dernier. \n\n- II.4.7 Le contractant est responsable du personnel qui exécute les services et exerce son autorité sur son personnel sans interférence du pouvoir adjudicateur. Le contractant doit informer son : \n\n- II.4.6 Le contractant ne doit pas se présenter comme un représentant du pouvoir adjudicateur et doit informer les tiers qu'il ne fait pas partie de la fonction publique européenne.\n\n- II.4.5 Sauf indication contraire, tous les délais stipulés dans le CC sont calculés en jours civils$^{7}$. \n\n- II.4.4 C'est au seul contractant qu'il incombe de prendre les mesures nécessaires pour obtenir tout permis ou toute licence nécessaires à l' exécution du CC en vertu du droit belge. \n\n- II.4.3.3 Les contractants qui sont des personnes physiques sont tenus d'apporter la preuve de leur statut d'indépendant. À cette fin, ils doivent fournir les pièces relatives à leur couverture par la sécurité sociale et à leur assujettissement à la taxe sur la valeur ajoutée (TVA). \n\n- II.4.3.2 Le contractant est seul responsable en ce qui concerne le respect de toutes les obligations légales qui lui sont applicables, notamment celles émanant du droit fiscal et des dispositions du droit du travail relatives à la sécurité. \n\n- II.4.3.1 Le contractant doit satisfaire aux exigences minimales prévues dans le cahier des charges. Cela comprend le respect des obligations applicables en vertu de la législation environnementale et sociale et de la législation du travail établies par le droit de l'Union, le droit national et les conventions collectives ou par les dispositions législatives internationales dans le domaine environnemental et social et dans le domaine du travail énumérées à l'annexe X de la directive 2014/24/UE$^{4}$, ainsi que le respect des obligations en matière de protection des données découlant des règlements (UE) 2016/679 5 et (UE) 2018/1725 6 . \n\n- II.4.2 Le contractant doit fournir des services répondant à des normes de qualité élevées, conformément à l'état de la technique dans le secteur concerné et aux dispositions du CC, et plus particulièrement au cahier des charges et aux conditions de son offre. Lorsque l'Union est en droit d'apporter des modifications aux résultats, ceux-ci doivent être livrés dans un format et accompagnés des informations nécessaires qui permettent effectivement d'apporter de telles modifications d'une manière pratique.\n\n- II.4.1 La signature du CC ne garantit pas d'achat réel. Le pouvoir adjudicateur n'est lié que par les bons de commande exécutant le CC. \n\n## II.4 FOURNITURE DES SERVICES" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.013293776229703711, + "doc_id": "ae3a38054085eb76ed684ba1465080c63e02256f37caaf1499509444a7ab96e5", + "edit_distance": 0.9767441860465116, + "f1_score": 0.10526315789473684, + "meteor": 0.1908052884615385, + "precision": 0.05555555555555555, + "pred_md": "Evidence of technical and professional capacity T2.1\n\n(see section 3.2.3)\n\nThe documents must be provided\n\nonly by the involved entities\n\nwho contribute to reaching the minimum capacity level\n\nfor criterion T2\n\nWith the tender\n\nin e-Submission\n\nWith the Group leader or the sole tenderer under 'Parties' → 'Identification tenderer'\n\n→ 'Attachments' →\n\n'Technical and professional capacity' (Annex 10 ISO 9001 ' \\_Selection criterion\n\nT2 ) '\n\nEvidence of technical and professional capacity T2.2\n\n(see section 3.2.3)\n\nThe documents must be provided\n\nonly by the involved entities\n\nwho contribute to reaching the minimum capacity level\n\nfor criterion T3\n\nWith the tender\n\nin e-Submission\n\nWith the Group leader or the sole tenderer under 'Parties' → 'Identification tenderer'\n\n→ 'Attachments' →\n\n'Technical and professional capacity' (Annex 11 ISO 27001 '\\_Selection criterion T2')\n\n## 2) Tender data.\n\nFailure to upload the following documents in eSubmission will lead to rejection of the tender.\n\nPage 52 of 53", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Page 52 of 53" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8803638011917302, + "doc_id": "def10975ab8711a366289c0a766ca96ab8149138b704bbb8da779dfd5d9eee28", + "edit_distance": 0.13765182186234817, + "f1_score": 0.9826989619377162, + "meteor": 0.9051349916347213, + "precision": 0.9861111111111112, + "pred_md": "General Administrative and Submission Clauses\n\nfrom the UK depending on the outcome of the negotiations. In case such access is not provided by legal provisions in force candidates or tenderers from the UK could be rejected from the procurement procedure.\n\n## 12. Contacts and complaints\n\nIf you require further information on calls for tenders or related matters, please contact us at:\n\n## European Investment Bank\n\nCorporate Services Procurement and Purchasing Division 98-100 boulevard Konrad Adenauer L-2950 LUXEMBOURG E-mail: CS-procurement@eib.org\n\nIn the event that the EIB commits an instance of maladministration (e.g. it has failed to act in accordance with its established policies, standards and procedures, or to respect the principles of good administration), a complaint to the EIB Group Complaints Mechanism may be lodged (see https://www.eib.org/en/about/accountability/complaints/index.htm) within one year from the date when the alleged action, decision or omission by the Bank could be reasonably known by the complainant. If unhappy with the outcome, complainants can seek a review of the EIB Group's reply to the complaint by the European Ombudsman (see https://www.ombudsman.europa.eu).\n\nThe court responsible for hearing appeal procedures shall be the European Court of Justice.\n\nLast updated: June 2020\n\nPage 18 of 21", + "recall": 0.9793103448275862, + "true_md": "General Administrative and Submission Clauses\n\nfrom the UK depending on the outcome of the negotiations. In case such access is not provided by legal provisions in force candidates or tenderers from the UK could be rejected from the procurement procedure. \n\nIf you require further information on calls for tenders or related matters, please contact us at: European Investment Bank \n\nIf you require further information on calls for tenders or related matters, please contact us at: European Investment Bank Corporate Services Procurement and Purchasing Division 98-100 boulevard Konrad Adenauer L-2950 LUXEMBOURG E-mail: CS- procurement@eib.org\n\nIn the event that the EIB commits an instance of maladministration (e.g. it has failed to act in accordance with its established policies, standards and procedures, or to respect the principles of good administration), a complaint to the EIB Group Complaints Mechanism may be lodged (see https://www.eib.org/en/about/accountability/complaints/index.htm) within one year from the date when the alleged action, decision or omission by the Bank could be reasonably known by the complainant. If unhappy with the outcome, complainants can seek a review of the EIB Group’s reply to the complaint by the European Ombudsman (see https://www.ombudsman.europa.eu). \n\nThe court responsible for hearing appeal procedures shall be the European Court of Justice.\n\n## 12. Contacts and complaints\n\nLast updated: June 2020\n\nPage 18 of 21" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6595888272520996, + "doc_id": "fec5a7420d7a6f12b60dc2ca5bdd15e25bf2221b000997f8e919bc89cd65d3d2", + "edit_distance": 0.2983425414364641, + "f1_score": 0.9936305732484076, + "meteor": 0.7025251153016192, + "precision": 0.9873417721518988, + "pred_md": "11\n\nANNEXE IV\n\nOffre technique du contractant (référence nº [ compléter ] du [ date ]) 11\n\nVeuillez insérer le contenu de l'offre technique. Si l'offre technique est trop volumineuse, veuillez inclure une référence claire et sans ambiguïté en mentionnant la date de réception par le Secrétariat. Veuillez également inclure le contenu de tout document supplémentaire soumis par le contractant en vue de clarifier l'offre initiale. Exemple :\n\n1. 1. Offre technique telle que soumise par le contractant le 26/09/2019\n\nRéférence TCYIR\\_2019\\_027-00\n\nDate 16/09/2019\n\nversion finale conservée dans les locaux du Secrétariat, résultant de la procédure négociée\n\n- 2. Lettre du contractant en date du 21/10/2019 clarifiant la page 40 numéro 30 de l'offre technique du contractant.\n\n41\n\nANNEXE IV\n\nFR", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "ANNEXE IV \n\nOffre technique du contractant (référence nº [ compléter ] du [ date ]) 11\n\n11 Veuillez insérer le contenu de l'offre technique. Si l'offre technique est trop volumineuse, veuillez inclure une référence claire et sans ambiguïté en mentionnant la date de réception par le Secrétariat. Veuillez également inclure le contenu de tout document supplémentaire soumis par le contractant en vue de clarifier l'offre initiale. Exemple : 1. 1. Offre technique telle que soumise par le contractant le 26/09/2019 \n\nExemple : 1. 1. Offre technique telle que soumise par le contractant le 26/09/2019 Référence TCYIR\\_2019\\_027-00 Date 16/09/2019 version finale conservée dans les locaux du Secrétariat, résultant de la procédure négociée 2. Lettre du contractant en date du 21/10/2019 clarifiant la page 40 numéro 30 de l'offre technique du \n\n41 version finale conservée dans les locaux du Secrétariat, résultant de la procédure négociée 2. Lettre du contractant en date du 21/10/2019 clarifiant la page 40 numéro 30 de l'offre technique du contractant.\n\n41 FR\n\nANNEXE IV" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9877295427655877, + "doc_id": "8964892e3aa19c655b0a3dac01b55feed2feb82c62efa07ac31521d64dbcd5fd", + "edit_distance": 0.04852320675105485, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9996764163649289, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Contract number: [ complete ]\n\nContract conditions of December 2015\n\n## II.8. CONFIDENTIALITY\n\n- II.8.1 The contracting authority and the contractor must treat with confidentiality any information or documents, in any format, disclosed in writing or orally relating to the performance of the contract and identified in writing as confidential.\n- II.8.2 Each party must:\n- (a) not use confidential information or documents for any purpose other than to perform its obligations under the contract without the prior written agreement of the other party;\n- (b) ensure the protection of such confidential information or documents with the same level of protection as its own confidential information or documents, and in any case with due diligence;\n- (c) not disclose directly or indirectly confidential information or documents to third parties without the prior written agreement of the other party.\n- II.8.3 The confidentiality obligation set out in this Article are binding on the contracting authority and the contractor during the performance of the contract and for as long as the information or documents remain confidential unless:\n- (a) the disclosing party agrees to release the receiving party from the confidentiality obligation earlier;\n- (b) the confidential information or documents become public through other means than in breach of the confidentiality obligation\n- (c) the applicable law requires the disclosure of the confidential information or documents .\n- II.8.4 The contractor must obtain from any natural person with the power to represent it or take decisions on its behalf, as well as from third parties involved in the performance of the contract, a commitment that they will comply with this Article .At the request of the contracting authority, the contractor must provide a document providing evidence of this commitment.\n\n## II.9. PROCESSING OF PERSONAL DATA\n\n- II.9.1 Any personal data included in the contract must be processed in accordance with Regulation (EC) No 45/2001 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 18 December 2000 on the protection of individuals with regard to the processing of personal data by the Community institutions and bodies and on the free movement of such data. Such data must be processed by the data controller solely for the purposes of the performance, management and monitoring of the contract. This does not affect its possible transmission to the bodies entrusted with monitoring or inspection tasks in application of the Community and Union law.\n- II.9.2 The contractor has the right to access its personal data and the right to rectify any such data. The contractor should address any queries concerning the processing of its personal data to the data controller.\n\n20", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Contract conditions of December 2015 \n\nContract number: [ complete ] \n\n## II.8. CONFIDENTIALITY\n\n## II.9. PROCESSING OF PERSONAL DATA\n\n- II.8.1 The contracting authority and the contractor must treat with confidentiality any information or documents, in any format, disclosed in writing or orally relating to the performance of the contract and identified in writing as confidential.\n\n- II.8.2 Each party must:\n\n- (a) not use confidential information or documents for any purpose other than to perform its obligations under the contract without the prior written agreement of the other party;\n\n- (b) ensure the protection of such confidential information or documents with the same level of protection as its own confidential information or documents, and in any case with due diligence;\n\n- (c) not disclose directly or indirectly confidential information or documents to third parties without the prior written agreement of the other party. \n\n- II.8.3 The confidentiality obligation set out in this Article are binding on the contracting authority and the contractor during the performance of the contract and for as long as the information or documents remain confidential unless:\n\n- (a) the disclosing party agrees to release the receiving party from the confidentiality obligation earlier;\n\n- (b) the confidential information or documents become public through other means than in breach of the confidentiality obligation\n\n- (c) the applicable law requires the disclosure of the confidential information or documents .\n\n- II.8.4 The contractor must obtain from any natural person with the power to represent it or take decisions on its behalf, as well as from third parties involved in the performance of the contract, a commitment that they will comply with this Article .At the request of the contracting authority, the contractor must provide a document providing evidence of this commitment.\n\n- II.9.1 Any personal data included in the contract must be processed in accordance with Regulation (EC) No 45/2001 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 18 December 2000 on the protection of individuals with regard to the processing of personal data by the Community institutions and bodies and on the free movement of such data. Such data must be processed by the data controller solely for the purposes of the performance, management and monitoring of the contract. This does not affect its possible transmission to the bodies entrusted with monitoring or inspection tasks in application of the Community and Union law.\n\n- II.9.2 The contractor has the right to access its personal data and the right to rectify any such data. The contractor should address any queries concerning the processing of its personal data to the data controller.\n\n20" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9420677517969344, + "doc_id": "c191a7dc3e72af490baf3be1a339b986298c107189b03fd85238924d27d11acb", + "edit_distance": 0.26577437858508607, + "f1_score": 0.985200845665962, + "meteor": 0.8660284425013504, + "precision": 0.9748953974895398, + "pred_md": "Dans un délai de 5 jours ouvrables, le contractant doit:\n\n- a) renvoyer le bon de commande signé et daté au pouvoir adjudicateur sur support papier ou par courrier électronique; ou\n- b) communiquer les raisons pour lesquelles il ne peut accepter la commande.\n\nSi le contractant refuse à plusieurs reprises de signer les bons de commande ou s'il omet à plusieurs reprises de les renvoyer dans le délai imparti, il peut être considéré comme violant ses obligations en vertu du CC comme indiqué à l'article II.18.1, point c).\n\n## I.5 PRIX\n\n## I.5.1 Montant maximal du CC et prix maximaux\n\nLe montant maximal couvrant tous les achats effectués dans le cadre du CC, y compris toutes les reconductions, est de [ montant en chiffres et en lettres ] EUR. Cependant, la fixation de ce montant ne représente pas un engagement de la part du pouvoir adjudicateur à payer le montant maximal pour l'achat.\n\nLes prix maximaux des services sont ceux repris à l'annexe V.\n\n## I.5.2 Révision des prix\n\nLes prix sont fermes et non révisables pendant la première année du CC.\n\nAu début de la deuxième année du CC et de chaque année qui suit, chaque prix peut être révisé à la hausse ou à la baisse sur demande d'une des parties.\n\nUne partie peut demander une révision des prix par écrit au plus tard trois mois avant la date anniversaire de l'entrée en vigueur du CC. L'autre partie doit accuser réception de la demande dans un délai de 14 jours à compter de la réception de celle-ci.\n\nÀ la date anniversaire, le pouvoir adjudicateur doit communiquer l'indice final du mois de réception de la demande ou, à défaut, le dernier indice provisoire disponible pour ce mois. Le contractant établit le nouveau prix sur cette base et le communique dès que possible au pouvoir adjudicateur pour vérification.\n\nLe pouvoir adjudicateur achète aux prix en vigueur à la date de signature des bons de commande . Ces prix ne sont pas révisables.\n\nLa révision des prix est déterminée par l'évolution des indices des prix à la consommation harmonisés (IPCH) \"Zone euro (19 pays)\" publiés par Eurostat sur http://ec.europa.eu/eurostat/web/hicp/data/database, sous IPCH (2015 = 100) - données mensuelles (index) (prc\\_hicp\\_midx). L'indice d'application pourrait être actualisé par Eurostat durant la vie de ce contrat.\n\nLa révision des prix est calculée au moyen de la formule suivante:\n\n\n\n```\nPr = Po x ( - ) Io où: Pr = prix révisé; Po = prix de l'offre; Io = indice du mois d'entrée en vigueur du CC; Ir = indice du mois de réception de la demande de révision des prix.\n```\n\n## I.6 MODALITÉS DE PAIEMENT\n\n## I.6.1 Préfinancement\n\nLe préfinancement n'est pas applicable au CC.\n\n## I.6.2 Paiement intermédiaire\n\n6\n\nFR", + "recall": 0.9957264957264957, + "true_md": "Dans un délai de 5 jours ouvrables, le contractant doit: \n\nSi le contractant refuse à plusieurs reprises de signer les bons de commande ou s'il omet à plusieurs reprises de les renvoyer dans le délai imparti, il peut être considéré comme violant ses obligations en vertu du CC comme indiqué à l'article II.18.1, point c). \n\nLe montant maximal couvrant tous les achats effectués dans le cadre du CC, y compris toutes les reconductions, est de [ montant en chiffres et en lettres ] EUR. Cependant, la fixation de ce montant ne représente pas un engagement de la part du pouvoir adjudicateur à payer le montant maximal pour l'achat. \n\nLes prix maximaux des services sont ceux repris à l'annexe V. \n\nLes prix sont fermes et non révisables pendant la première année du CC. \n\nAu début de la deuxième année du CC et de chaque année qui suit, chaque prix peut être révisé à la hausse ou à la baisse sur demande d'une des parties. \n\nUne partie peut demander une révision des prix par écrit au plus tard trois mois avant la date anniversaire de l'entrée en vigueur du CC. L'autre partie doit accuser réception de la demande dans un délai de 14 jours à compter de la réception de celle-ci. \n\nÀ la date anniversaire, le pouvoir adjudicateur doit communiquer l'indice final du mois de réception de la demande ou, à défaut, le dernier indice provisoire disponible pour ce mois. Le contractant établit le nouveau prix sur cette base et le communique dès que possible au pouvoir adjudicateur pour vérification. \n\nLe pouvoir adjudicateur achète aux prix en vigueur à la date de signature des bons de commande . Ces prix ne sont pas révisables. \n\nLa révision des prix est déterminée par l'évolution des indices des prix à la consommation harmonisés (IPCH) \"Zone euro (19 pays)\" publiés par Eurostat sur http://ec.europa.eu/eurostat/web/hicp/data/database, sous IPCH (2015 = 100) - données mensuelles (index) (prc\\_hicp\\_midx). L'indice d'application pourrait être actualisé par Eurostat durant la vie de ce contrat. \n\nLa révision des prix est calculée au moyen de la formule suivante: \n\nIr \n\nPr = Po x ( — ) \n\nIo \n\noù: Pr = prix révisé; \n\nPo = prix de l'offre; \n\nIo = indice du mois d'entrée en vigueur du CC; \n\nIr = indice du mois de réception de la demande de révision des prix. \n\nLe préfinancement n'est pas applicable au CC. \n\n6 FR\n\n## I.6.2 Paiement intermédiaire\n\n## I.6.1 Préfinancement\n\n## I.6 MODALITÉS DE PAIEMENT\n\n## I.5.2 Révision des prix\n\n## I.5.1 Montant maximal du CC et prix maximaux\n\n## I.5 PRIX\n\n- a) renvoyer le bon de commande signé et daté au pouvoir adjudicateur sur support papier ou par courrier électronique; ou \n\n- b) communiquer les raisons pour lesquelles il ne peut accepter la commande." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9366450964405816, + "doc_id": "a890da053fe1a97c39c4c434e65f4939233ca0d76f125e280f9aab8847d5d7a5", + "edit_distance": 0.039492242595204514, + "f1_score": 0.9759704251386323, + "meteor": 0.9727361929700967, + "precision": 0.9814126394052045, + "pred_md": "- (c) Civil liability in the event of accidents caused to third parties or to the Contracting Authority and any employee of that Authority, arising out of the performance of the Contract by the Consultant, its agents or employees;\n- (d) Accidental death or permanent disability resulting from bodily injury incurred by any person in connection with the performance of the Contract by the Consultant, its agents or employees.'\n- 11.3.7 In relation to Article 19.1 of the General Conditions, the 'implementation period' shall be read as referring to any specific period of time mentioned in the Contract within which certain tasks / activities have to be performed and/or certain outputs have to be produced.\n- 11.3.8 In relation to Article 19 of the General Conditions, paragraph 19.2 shall be amended to: 'The daily rate for liquidated damages will be 0.05% of the Maximum Contract Value'.\n- 11.3.9 Within the framework of Article 24.2 of the General Conditions, the person authorised by the Contracting Authority to approve the Consultant's timesheets on a monthly basis is the Promoter. For the services delivered off-site, the timesheets must be countersigned by the Consultant's designated Project Director / TA Coordinator.\n- 11.3.10 The following paragraph shall be added to Article 28 of the General Conditions: ' 28.5 If the expenditure verification report submitted by the external auditor does not comply with the model provided in Annex VII to the Contract in terms of verifications to be performed and level of assurance to be provided, the Contracting Authority reserves the right to refuse the payment of the expenditure covered by that report until a full verification of the supporting documents is carried out by the Contracting Authority itself. In any and all such cases, the Contracting Authority shall not make any payments for the costs of the expenditure verification. '\n- 11.3.11 In relation Article 34 of the General Conditions, the Contracting Authority's liability will be limited to wilful misconduct or gross negligence.\n- 11.3.12 Article 35 of the General Conditions shall read as follows:\n- ' 35.1 Without prejudice to the right of the Contracting Authority to terminate the Contract under Article 36, the Contracting Authority may at any time suspend the Contract or any part thereof (including the payments), in particular where it considers such suspension in the interest of the project or where there are suspected or established errors, irregularities or fraud committed by the Consultant in the performance of another contract funded by the general budget of the European Union, by EDF or by the Contracting Authority which are likely to affect the performance of the present Contract. Suspension shall take effect on the day that the Consultant receives written notice from the Contracting Authority, or at a later date when the notice so provides.\n- 35.2 The Contracting Authority shall suspend the payments and/or the execution of the Contract:\n- (a) where the award procedure or the performance of the Contract is vitiated by substantial errors or irregularities, or by suspected or proven fraud. In addition, where such errors, irregularities or fraud are attributable to the Consultant, the Contracting Authority may refuse to make further payments or may proceed to recover amounts already paid, in proportion to the seriousness of the errors, irregularities or fraud;\n- (b) where the Contracting Authority is obliged to do so pursuant to (i) a request by the providers of the funding for the Contract, or (ii) the provisions of the contracting arrangements between the Contracting Authority and the providers of the funding or the Contract, as these are identified in the Special Conditions or the Terms of Reference;\n- (c) a Sanction Event.\n- 35.3 During the period of suspension, the Consultant shall take such protective measures as may be necessary to mitigate any loss and submit, for the written approval\n\nAA-000799-002\\_TACONT\n\nPage 5 of 7", + "recall": 0.9705882352941176, + "true_md": "- (c) Civil liability in the event of accidents caused to third parties or to the Contracting Authority and any employee of that Authority, arising out of the performance of the Contract by the Consultant, its agents or employees; \n\n- (d) Accidental death or permanent disability resulting from bodily injury incurred by any person in connection with the performance of the Contract by the Consultant, its agents or employees.” \n\n- 11.3.7 In relation to Article 19.1 of the General Conditions, the “implementation period” shall be read as referring to any specific period of time mentioned in the Contract within which certain tasks / activities have to be performed and/or certain outputs have to be produced. \n\n- 11.3.8 In relation to Article 19 of the General Conditions, paragraph 19.2 shall be amended to: “The daily rate for liquidated damages will be 0.05% of the Maximum Contract Value”. \n\n- 11.3.9 Within the framework of Article 24.2 of the General Conditions, the person authorised by the Contracting Authority to approve the Consultant’s timesheets on a monthly basis is the Promoter. For the services delivered off-site, the timesheets must be counter- signed by the Consultant’s designated Project Director / TA Coordinator. \n\n- 11.3.10 The following paragraph shall be added to Article 28 of the General Conditions: “ 28.5 If the expenditure verification report submitted by the external auditor does not comply with the model provided in Annex VII to the Contract in terms of verifications to be performed and level of assurance to be provided, the Contracting Authority reserves the right to refuse the payment of the expenditure covered by that report until a full verification of the supporting documents is carried out by the Contracting Authority itself. In any and all such cases, the Contracting Authority shall not make any payments for the costs of the expenditure verification. ”\n\n- 11.3.11 In relation Article 34 of the General Conditions, the Contracting Authority’s liability will be limited to wilful misconduct or gross negligence. \n\n- 11.3.12 Article 35 of the General Conditions shall read as follows:\n\n“ 35.1 Without prejudice to the right of the Contracting Authority to terminate the Contract under Article 36, the Contracting Authority may at any time suspend the Contract or any part thereof (including the payments), in particular where it considers such suspension in the interest of the project or where there are suspected or established errors, irregularities or fraud committed by the Consultant in the performance of another contract funded by the general budget of the European Union, by EDF or by the Contracting Authority which are likely to affect the performance of the present Contract. Suspension shall take effect on the day that the Consultant receives written notice from the Contracting Authority, or at a later date when the notice so provides.\n\n35.2 The Contracting Authority shall suspend the payments and/or the execution of the Contract: \n\n(a) where the award procedure or the performance of the Contract is vitiated by substantial errors or irregularities, or by suspected or proven fraud. In addition, where such errors, irregularities or fraud are attributable to the Consultant, the Contracting Authority may refuse to make further payments or may proceed to recover amounts already paid, in proportion to the seriousness of the errors, irregularities or fraud; \n\n(b) where the Contracting Authority is obliged to do so pursuant to (i) a request by the providers of the funding for the Contract, or (ii) the provisions of the contracting arrangements between the Contracting Authority and the providers of the funding or the Contract, as these are identified in the Special Conditions or the Terms of Reference; \n\n(c) a Sanction Event. \n\n35.3 During the period of suspension, the Consultant shall take such protective measures as may be necessary to mitigate any loss and submit, for the written approval \n\nPage 5 of 7 \n\nAA-000799-002\\_TACONT" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0475537132325672, + "doc_id": "c8dfeb5d390f53fb179ebad983ac143af2dedd32d2e4fac7405f025a13bd10d4", + "edit_distance": 0.9270833333333334, + "f1_score": 0.24615384615384617, + "meteor": 0.45560500105954654, + "precision": 0.14035087719298245, + "pred_md": "ANNEXE I\n\nANNEXE I\n\n## Modèle de bon de commande\n\nUnion européenne Secrétariat général du Conseil rue de la Loi 175 B-1048 Bruxelles\n\n## DG/Unité REQUÉRANTE\n\nCorrespondant:\n\nTél.:\n\nTélécopieur:\n\nCourriel:\n\nBON DE COMMANDE N°\n\n## CONTRACTANT\n\nResponsable Vente /Personne de contact:\n\nDate:\n\n## DESCRIPTION DES FOURNITURES OU SERVICES\n\nTotal (EUR)\n\nRéférence de l'offre du contractant:\n\nDate de l'offre du contractant:\n\nRÉFÉRENCE DU CONTRAT-CADRE:\n\nDESCRIPTION DES FOURNITURES OU\n\nSERVICES\n\nUnité\n\nQuantité\n\nPrix (EUR)\n\nTotal (EUR)\n\n35\n\nFR", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "ANNEXE I \n\nModèle de bon de commande \n\n35 FR\n\nANNEXE I" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.912387485420926, + "doc_id": "f31ee88d9b82e03f90256fa9a22e6ec323f8549a584232b3d6f6220acf30eddb", + "edit_distance": 0.1896551724137931, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.8704700633934075, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "- c) décider de ne pas attribuer un bon de commande au contractant.\n- II.7.3 Le contractant doit répercuter par écrit toutes les obligations pertinentes auprès:\n- a) des membres de son personnel ;\n- b) de toute personne physique ayant le pouvoir de le représenter ou de prendre des décisions en son nom;\n- c) des tiers participant à l' exécution du CC , y compris les sous-traitants.\n\nLe contractant doit également veiller à ce que les personnes visées ci-dessus ne se trouvent pas dans une situation pouvant donner lieu à un conflit d'intérêts .\n\n## II.8 CONFIDENTIALITÉ\n\n- II.8.1 Le pouvoir adjudicateur et le contractant doivent traiter de manière confidentielle toute information ou tout document, sous quelque forme que ce soit, divulgué par écrit ou oralement, qui est lié à l' exécution du CC et désigné par écrit comme étant confidentiel.\n\n## II.8.2 Chaque partie a l'obligation:\n\n- a) de ne pas utiliser d' informations ou de documents confidentiels à des fins autres que le respect des obligations qui lui incombent en vertu du CC ou du bon de commande sans l'accord préalable écrit de l'autre partie;\n- b) d'assurer la protection de ces informations ou documents confidentiels en garantissant le même niveau de protection que pour ses propres informations ou documents confidentiels , et dans tous les cas avec toute la diligence nécessaire;\n- c) de ne pas divulguer, directement ou indirectement, des informations ou documents confidentiels à des tiers sans l'accord préalable écrit de l'autre partie.\n- II.8.3 Les obligations de confidentialité prévues au présent article sont contraignantes pour le pouvoir adjudicateur et le contractant pendant l' exécution du CC et tant que les informations ou les documents restent confidentiels, sauf si:\n- a) la partie concernée accepte de libérer plus tôt l'autre partie de l'obligation de confidentialité;\n- b) les informations ou les documents confidentiels deviennent publics par d'autres moyens qu'une violation de l'obligation de confidentialité;\n- c) la législation applicable exige la divulgation des informations ou documents confidentiels .\n- II.8.4 Le contractant doit obtenir de toute personne physique ayant le pouvoir de le représenter ou de prendre des décisions en son nom, ainsi que des tiers participant à l' exécution du CC , l'engagement qu'ils se conformeront au présent article. À la demande du pouvoir adjudicateur, le contractant doit fournir un document attestant de cet engagement.\n\n## II.9 TRAITEMENT DES DONNÉES À CARACTÈRE PERSONNEL\n\n## II.9.1 Traitement des données à caractère personnel par le pouvoir adjudicateur\n\nLes données à caractère personnel figurant dans le CC ou associées à celui-ci, y compris celles relatives à son exécution, doivent être traitées conformément au règlement (UE) 2018/1725. Ces données ne doivent être traitées par le responsable du traitement des données qu'aux fins de l'exécution, de la gestion et du suivi du contrat.\n\nLe contractant ou toute autre personne dont les données à caractère personnel sont traitées par le responsable du traitement des données dans le cadre du présent CC possède des droits spécifiques en tant que personne concernée en vertu du chapitre III (articles 14 à 25) du règlement (UE) 2018/1725, et notamment le droit d'accéder à ses données à caractère personnel, de les rectifier ou de les supprimer, le droit de limiter le traitement de ces données ou, le cas échéant, de s'y opposer ou le droit à la portabilité des données.\n\nPour toute question concernant le traitement de ses données à caractère personnel, le contractant ou toute autre personne dont les données à caractère personnel sont traitées dans le cadre du présent\n\n18\n\nFR", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "- c) décider de ne pas attribuer un bon de commande au contractant. \n\n- II.7.3 Le contractant doit répercuter par écrit toutes les obligations pertinentes auprès: \n\n- a) des membres de son personnel ; \n\n- b) de toute personne physique ayant le pouvoir de le représenter ou de prendre des décisions en son nom; \n\n- c) des tiers participant à l' exécution du CC , y compris les sous-traitants. \n\n- II.8.1 Le pouvoir adjudicateur et le contractant doivent traiter de manière confidentielle toute information ou tout document, sous quelque forme que ce soit, divulgué par écrit ou oralement, qui est lié à l' exécution du CC et désigné par écrit comme étant confidentiel. \n\n- II.8.2 Chaque partie a l'obligation: \n\n- a) de ne pas utiliser d' informations ou de documents confidentiels à des fins autres que le respect des obligations qui lui incombent en vertu du CC ou du bon de commande sans l'accord préalable écrit de l'autre partie; \n\n- b) d'assurer la protection de ces informations ou documents confidentiels en garantissant le même niveau de protection que pour ses propres informations ou documents confidentiels , et dans tous les cas avec toute la diligence nécessaire; \n\n- c) de ne pas divulguer, directement ou indirectement, des informations ou documents confidentiels à des tiers sans l'accord préalable écrit de l'autre partie. \n\n- II.8.3 Les obligations de confidentialité prévues au présent article sont contraignantes pour le pouvoir adjudicateur et le contractant pendant l' exécution du CC et tant que les informations ou les documents restent confidentiels, sauf si: \n\n- a) la partie concernée accepte de libérer plus tôt l'autre partie de l'obligation de confidentialité; \n\n- b) les informations ou les documents confidentiels deviennent publics par d'autres moyens qu'une violation de l'obligation de confidentialité; \n\n- c) la législation applicable exige la divulgation des informations ou documents confidentiels . \n\n- II.8.4 Le contractant doit obtenir de toute personne physique ayant le pouvoir de le représenter ou de prendre des décisions en son nom, ainsi que des tiers participant à l' exécution du CC , l'engagement qu'ils se conformeront au présent article. À la demande du pouvoir adjudicateur, le contractant doit fournir un document attestant de cet engagement. \n\nII.9.1 Traitement des données à caractère personnel par le pouvoir adjudicateur Les données à caractère personnel figurant dans le CC ou associées à celui-ci, y compris celles relatives à son exécution, doivent être traitées conformément au règlement (UE) 2018/1725. Ces données ne doivent être traitées par le responsable du traitement des données qu'aux fins de l'exécution, de la gestion et du suivi du contrat. \n\nLe contractant ou toute autre personne dont les données à caractère personnel sont traitées par le responsable du traitement des données dans le cadre du présent CC possède des droits spécifiques en tant que personne concernée en vertu du chapitre III (articles 14 à 25) du règlement (UE) 2018/1725, et notamment le droit d'accéder à ses données à caractère personnel, de les rectifier ou de les supprimer, le droit de limiter le traitement de ces données ou, le cas échéant, de s'y opposer ou le droit à la portabilité des données. \n\nPour toute question concernant le traitement de ses données à caractère personnel, le contractant ou toute autre personne dont les données à caractère personnel sont traitées dans le cadre du présent \n\n18 FR\n\nLe contractant doit également veiller à ce que les personnes visées ci-dessus ne se trouvent pas dans une situation pouvant donner lieu à un conflit d'intérêts . \n\n## II.8 CONFIDENTIALITÉ\n\n## II.9 TRAITEMENT DES DONNÉES À CARACTÈRE PERSONNEL II.9.1 Traitement des données à caractère personnel par le pouvoir adjudicateur\n\n## II.9 TRAITEMENT DES DONNÉES À CARACTÈRE PERSONNEL II.9.1 Traitement des données à caractère personnel par le pouvoir adjudicateur Les données à caractère personnel figurant dans le CC ou associées à celui-ci, y compris celles" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9736513860098451, + "doc_id": "fce1a12f9a7537fa9175baefab657e081021e96a3ad5968db3ff786f498216f4", + "edit_distance": 0.09576427255985268, + "f1_score": 0.9980353634577603, + "meteor": 0.9958213576962525, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "la mention d'exclusion de responsabilité suivante: \"© - année - Union européenne. Tous droits réservés. Certaines parties font l'objet d'une licence sous conditions à l'UE\", ou autre clause équivalente que le pouvoir adjudicateur considère appropriée, ou dont les parties ont convenu au cas par cas. Cette disposition ne s'applique pas lorsque l'insertion d'une telle référence serait impossible, notamment pour des raisons pratiques.\n\n## II.13.10 Visibilité du financement de l'Union et exclusion de responsabilité\n\nLors de l'exploitation des résultats , le contractant doit déclarer qu'ils ont été produits au titre d'un contrat avec l'Union et que les points de vue qui y sont exposés reflètent exclusivement l'opinion du contractant et ne constituent pas une prise de position formelle du pouvoir adjudicateur. Le pouvoir adjudicateur peut renoncer à cette obligation par écrit ou fournir le texte de la clause d'exclusion de responsabilité.\n\n## II.14 FORCE MAJEURE\n\n- II.14.1 Si une partie est confrontée à un cas de force majeure , elle doit immédiatement le notifier à l'autre partie, en précisant la nature, la durée probable et les effets prévisibles de ces circonstances.\n- II.14.2 Une partie n'est pas responsable des retards dans l'exécution de ses obligations au titre du CC ou du non-respect de ces obligations si ce retard ou non-respect est le résultat d'un cas de force majeure . Si le contractant est empêché, par un cas de force majeure , de remplir ses obligations contractuelles, son droit au paiement de la rémunération se limite aux services effectivement fournis.\n- II.14.3 Les parties doivent prendre toutes mesures nécessaires pour limiter les éventuels dommages qui résulteraient d'un cas de force majeure.\n\n## II.15 DOMMAGES-INTÉRÊTS\n\n## II.15.1 Livraison tardive\n\nSi le contractant n'exécute pas ses obligations contractuelles dans le délai fixé par le CC, le pouvoir adjudicateur peut lui imposer le paiement de dommages-intérêts pour chaque jour de retard, calculés selon la formule suivante:\n\n0.3 x ( V/d )\n\noù:\n\nV est le prix de l'achat, de l'élément livrable ou du résultat concerné;\n\nd est la durée mentionnée dans le bon de commande correspondant pour la livraison de l'achat, de l'élément livrable ou du résultat concerné ou, à défaut, la période comprise entre la date visée à l'article I.4.2 et la date de livraison ou d'exécution stipulée dans le bon de commande correspondant, exprimée en jours.\n\nDes dommages-intérêts peuvent être imposés avec une réduction des prix conformément aux conditions énoncées à l'article II.16.\n\n## II.15.2 Procédure\n\nLe pouvoir adjudicateur doit notifier formellement au contractant son intention d'appliquer des dommages-intérêts et le montant calculé correspondant.\n\nLe contractant fait part de ses observations dans les trente jours qui suivent la date de réception. À défaut, la décision devient exécutoire le jour suivant l'expiration du délai de présentation des observations.\n\nSi le contractant présente des observations, le pouvoir adjudicateur doit lui notifier , en tenant compte desdites observations:\n\n- a) le retrait de son intention d'appliquer des dommages-intérêts; ou\n- b) sa décision finale d'appliquer des dommages-intérêts et le montant correspondant.\n\n25\n\nFR", + "recall": 0.996078431372549, + "true_md": "la mention d'exclusion de responsabilité suivante: \"© — année — Union européenne. Tous droits réservés. Certaines parties font l'objet d'une licence sous conditions à l'UE\", ou autre clause équivalente que le pouvoir adjudicateur considère appropriée, ou dont les parties ont convenu au cas par cas. Cette disposition ne s'applique pas lorsque l'insertion d'une telle référence serait impossible, notamment pour des raisons pratiques. \n\nLors de l'exploitation des résultats , le contractant doit déclarer qu'ils ont été produits au titre d'un contrat avec l'Union et que les points de vue qui y sont exposés reflètent exclusivement l'opinion du contractant et ne constituent pas une prise de position formelle du pouvoir adjudicateur. Le pouvoir adjudicateur peut renoncer à cette obligation par écrit ou fournir le texte de la clause d'exclusion de responsabilité. \n\n## II.13.10 Visibilité du financement de l'Union et exclusion de responsabilité\n\n## II.14 FORCE MAJEURE\n\n- II.14.1 Si une partie est confrontée à un cas de force majeure , elle doit immédiatement le notifier à l'autre partie, en précisant la nature, la durée probable et les effets prévisibles de ces circonstances. \n\n- II.14.2 Une partie n'est pas responsable des retards dans l'exécution de ses obligations au titre du CC ou du non-respect de ces obligations si ce retard ou non-respect est le résultat d'un cas de force majeure . Si le contractant est empêché, par un cas de force majeure , de remplir ses obligations contractuelles, son droit au paiement de la rémunération se limite aux services effectivement fournis. \n\n- II.14.3 Les parties doivent prendre toutes mesures nécessaires pour limiter les éventuels dommages qui résulteraient d'un cas de force majeure. \n\nSi le contractant n'exécute pas ses obligations contractuelles dans le délai fixé par le CC, le pouvoir adjudicateur peut lui imposer le paiement de dommages-intérêts pour chaque jour de retard, calculés selon la formule suivante: \n\n0.3 x ( V/d ) \n\noù: \n\nV est le prix de l'achat, de l'élément livrable ou du résultat concerné; \n\nd est la durée mentionnée dans le bon de commande correspondant pour la livraison de l'achat, de l'élément livrable ou du résultat concerné ou, à défaut, la période comprise entre la date visée à l'article I.4.2 et la date de livraison ou d'exécution stipulée dans le bon de commande correspondant, exprimée en jours. \n\nDes dommages-intérêts peuvent être imposés avec une réduction des prix conformément aux conditions énoncées à l'article II.16. \n\nLe pouvoir adjudicateur doit notifier formellement au contractant son intention d'appliquer des dommages-intérêts et le montant calculé correspondant. \n\nLe contractant fait part de ses observations dans les trente jours qui suivent la date de réception. À défaut, la décision devient exécutoire le jour suivant l'expiration du délai de présentation des observations. \n\nSi le contractant présente des observations, le pouvoir adjudicateur doit lui notifier , en tenant compte desdites observations: \n\n## II.15.2 Procédure\n\n## II.15 DOMMAGES-INTÉRÊTS\n\n## II.15.1 Livraison tardive\n\n- a) le retrait de son intention d'appliquer des dommages-intérêts; ou \n\n- b) sa décision finale d'appliquer des dommages-intérêts et le montant correspondant. \n\n25 FR" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.832907570183448, + "doc_id": "00ce1361fadad2fa289d02632f9e2379da0144a58670a551561a68c94c909854", + "edit_distance": 0.375, + "f1_score": 0.9845360824742267, + "meteor": 0.8761819272843014, + "precision": 0.9896373056994818, + "pred_md": "The objective of the award criteria is to evaluate the tenders with a view to choosing the most economically advantageous tender.\n\nTenders will be evaluated on the basis of the following:\n\n- 1.\n\n## Quality: 60 points\n\nThe quality of the tender will be evaluated based on the above qualitative award criteria for the respective Lot.\n\n- 2. Price: 40 points\n\nThe price considered for evaluation will be the total price of the tender, covering all the requirements set out in the Tender Specifications, for the respective Lot.\n\nThe same will apply for the assessment of tenders under reopening of competition in LOT 1.\n\n## 3.5 Financial Award Criterion\n\nTenderers shall complete the Financial Offer Form in Annex 12 ' Price Catalogue' .\n\nThe combination of prices/costs in the tenderer's financial offer shall include, account for and cover all costs that the tenderer may charge to ECHA in return for delivery of services under this FWC. It is the responsibility of the tenderer to ensure that all costs are incorporated into the Price Catalogue section.\n\nTenderers shall submit their prices as follows:\n\n- 1. Price catalogue for profiles (both LOTs)\n- 2. Price catalogue for basic RUN activities (only LOT 2)\n- 3. Price catalogue for application management (only LOT 2)\n\nThe total price resulting from the sum of the total price of each price item above (as applicable per LOT) will be used for financial assessment purpose only.\n\nPlease note that all values and descriptions in the Price Catalogue that indicate the quantity or distribution of services that ECHA currently expects to request are approximate and tentative. ECHA does not undertake any commitment to place orders that reflect these values or descriptions.\n\nThe price offer from the winning tenderer will be annexed to the FWC and forms basis for the prices to be used in the context of specific contracts.\n\n## Detection of abnormally low tenders\n\nTenderers must be aware of Article 23 of Annex I to the Financial Regulation on abnormally low tenders. In order to make a consistency check of each tenderer's financial offer towards the level of service required, tenderers may be requested to provide a price structure document explaining in detail their pricing methodology. For further details, see Section 4.2 below.\n\n37", + "recall": 0.9794871794871794, + "true_md": "The objective of the award criteria is to evaluate the tenders with a view to choosing the most economically advantageous tender. \n\nTenders will be evaluated on the basis of the following: \n\nThe quality of the tender will be evaluated based on the above qualitative award criteria for the respective Lot. \n\nThe price considered for evaluation will be the total price of the tender, covering all the requirements set out in the Tender Specifications, for the respective Lot. \n\nThe same will apply for the assessment of tenders under reopening of competition in LOT 1. \n\nTenderers shall complete the Financial Offer Form in Annex 12 “ Price Catalogue” .\n\nThe combination of prices/costs in the tenderer’s financial offer shall include, account for and cover all costs that the tenderer may charge to ECHA in return for delivery of services under this FWC. It is the responsibility of the tenderer to ensure that all costs are incorporated into the Price Catalogue section.\n\n Tenderers shall submit their prices as follows:\n\nThe total price resulting from the sum of the total price of each price item above (as applicable per LOT) will be used for financial assessment purpose only.\n\nPlease note that all values and descriptions in the Price Catalogue that indicate the quantity or distribution of services that ECHA currently expects to request are approximate and tentative. ECHA does not undertake any commitment to place orders that reflect these values or descriptions.\n\nThe price offer from the winning tenderer will be annexed to the FWC and forms basis for the prices to be used in the context of specific contracts.\n\nDetection of abnormally low tenders\n\nTenderers must be aware of Article 23 of Annex I to the Financial Regulation on abnormally low tenders. In order to make a consistency check of each tenderer’s financial offer towards the level of service required, tenderers may be requested to provide a price structure document explaining in detail their pricing methodology. For further details, see Section 4.2 below. \n\n37\n\n## 3.5 Financial Award Criterion\n\n- 1. Quality: 60 points\n\n- 2. Price: 40 points\n\n- 1. Price catalogue for profiles (both LOTs) 2. Price catalogue for basic RUN activities (only LOT 2) \n\n- 1. Price catalogue for profiles (both LOTs) 2. Price catalogue for basic RUN activities (only LOT 2) 3. Price catalogue for application management (only LOT 2) \n\n- 2. Price catalogue for basic RUN activities (only LOT 2) 3. Price catalogue for application management (only LOT 2)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9348232960581301, + "doc_id": "b3c7dc1264e1b6650812992fe24740e249cbf57c3f095427384bd44fa45610e6", + "edit_distance": 0.7265469061876247, + "f1_score": 0.9903381642512077, + "meteor": 0.8447828714332911, + "precision": 0.9951456310679612, + "pred_md": "The actual amounts payable after the first pre-financing payment will vary. They must be based on the Consultant's invoice accompanied by an interim progress report and an expenditure verification report subject to approval of those reports in accordance with Article 27 in the General Conditions.\n\nThe aggregate amount of the advance and interim invoices issued by the Consultant to the Contracting Authority shall not exceed 90% of the Maximum Contract Value. Should an invoice be issued for an amount exceeding 90% of the Maximum Contract Value, the Contracting Authority shall only pay outstanding amount due up to 90% of the Maximum Contract Value.\n\n- 7.3 Unless otherwise permitted under the terms of the Sanction (as defined in Article 8 of the General Conditions), the Contracting Authority shall not make, nor shall the Consultant request, any payments under this Contract as of the date of a Sanction Event (as defined in Article 8 of the General Conditions), irrespective of whether the payment concerns delivery of Services predating the Sanction Event. For the avoidance of doubt, payments so extinguished shall not be recoverable.\n\n## (8) Contact addresses\n\nAny written communication relating to this Contract between the Contracting Authority and the Consultant must state the Contract title and identification number, and must be sent by post, fax, e-mail or by hand to the addresses identified in accordance with Articles 5.3 and 7.8 of the General Conditions.\n\n## (9) Law and language of the Contract\n\n- 9.1 This Contract and any dispute or claim arising out or in connection with it shall be governed by the laws of the Grand Duchy of Luxembourg.\n- 9.2 The Courts of the city of Luxembourg shall have exclusive jurisdiction to settle any dispute or claims arising out of the Contract.\n- 9.3 The language of the Contract and of all written communications between the Consultant and the Contracting Authority shall be English.\n\n## (10) Tax and customs arrangements\n\nNo duties, levies or taxes, including VAT, which may be payable in the beneficiary country/countries will be charged to the Contracting Authority.\n\n## (11) Other specific conditions applying to the Contract\n\n- 11.1 Any subcontracting must be done in accordance with Article 4 of the General Conditions.\n- 11.2 The Consultant must take the necessary measures to ensure the visibility of the funding source of the Contract. Such measures must be in accordance with the applicable rules on visibility, as specified in Annex II - Terms of Reference.\n- 11.3 The following provisions shall amend or supplement the General Conditions:\n\n9 Balance of first pre-financing payment and forecast balance\n\n10 10% of the maximum contract value\n\nAA-000799-002\\_TACONT\n\nPage 3 of 7", + "recall": 0.9855769230769231, + "true_md": "The actual amounts payable after the first pre-financing payment will vary. They must be based on the Consultant’s invoice accompanied by an interim progress report and an expenditure verification report subject to approval of those reports in accordance with Article 27 in the General Conditions. \n\nThe aggregate amount of the advance and interim invoices issued by the Consultant to the Contracting Authority shall not exceed 90% of the Maximum Contract Value. Should an invoice be issued for an amount exceeding 90% of the Maximum Contract Value, the Contracting Authority shall only pay outstanding amount due up to 90% of the Maximum Contract Value.\n\nAny written communication relating to this Contract between the Contracting Authority and the Consultant must state the Contract title and identification number, and must be sent by post, fax, e-mail or by hand to the addresses identified in accordance with Articles 5.3 and 7.8 of the General Conditions. \n\nNo duties, levies or taxes, including VAT, which may be payable in the beneficiary country/countries will be charged to the Contracting Authority.\n\nBalance of first pre-financing payment and forecast balance 10 10% of the maximum contract value \n\n9 Balance of first pre-financing payment and forecast balance 10\n\nPage 3 of 7 \n\nAA-000799-002\\_TACONT \n\n- 11.3 The following provisions shall amend or supplement the General Conditions: \n\n- 11.2 The Consultant must take the necessary measures to ensure the visibility of the funding source of the Contract. Such measures must be in accordance with the applicable rules on visibility, as specified in Annex II – Terms of Reference. \n\n- 11.1 Any subcontracting must be done in accordance with Article 4 of the General Conditions. \n\n## (11) Other specific conditions applying to the Contract\n\n## (10) Tax and customs arrangements\n\n## (9) Law and language of the Contract\n\n## (8) Contact addresses\n\n- 7.3 Unless otherwise permitted under the terms of the Sanction (as defined in Article 8 of the General Conditions), the Contracting Authority shall not make, nor shall the Consultant request, any payments under this Contract as of the date of a Sanction Event (as defined in Article 8 of the General Conditions), irrespective of whether the payment concerns delivery of Services predating the Sanction Event. For the avoidance of doubt, payments so extinguished shall not be recoverable.\n\n- 9.1 This Contract and any dispute or claim arising out or in connection with it shall be governed by the laws of the Grand Duchy of Luxembourg. \n\n- 9.2 The Courts of the city of Luxembourg shall have exclusive jurisdiction to settle any dispute or claims arising out of the Contract. \n\n- 9.3 The language of the Contract and of all written communications between the Consultant and the Contracting Authority shall be English." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9425232354844361, + "doc_id": "1187d3cc2b09163c33349b335d13f0907e2e4c1ea2de1f16b9878f50d6f05311", + "edit_distance": 0.17142857142857143, + "f1_score": 0.9900497512437813, + "meteor": 0.9810800191730605, + "precision": 0.995, + "pred_md": "## 1.4.3 Services\n\nPlease refer to sections 3 and 4 of Annex 1 ' Technical Specifications for a detailed ' description of the requested services and to section 6.3 for the acceptance procedures.\n\n## 1.5 Place of performance: where will the contract be performed?\n\nThe services will be performed at the contractor's premises and/or at ECHA's premises in Helsinki (for the exact location see section 9.3 of Annex 1 Technical Specifications ). ' '\n\n## 1.6 Nature of the contract: how will the contract be implemented?\n\nThe procedure will result in the conclusion of multiple Framework Contracts with several economic operators, as described below.\n\nA framework contract establishes a mechanism for future repetitive purchases by the Contracting Authority to be awarded in the form of specific contracts. The signature of a framework contract does not impose an obligation on the Contracting Authority to conclude specific contracts with a framework contractor.\n\nSpecific contracts shall be awarded on the basis of the terms laid down in the framework contract, refined or, in duly justified circumstances, supplemented to reflect the particular circumstances of the specific contract. The different types of specific contracts are set out in section 6 of Annex 1 Technical Specifications ' '.\n\nTenderers need to take full account of the full set of procurement documents, including the provisions of the draft framework contract and of the Service Level Agreement, as the procurement documents will define and govern the contractual relationship(s) to be established between the Contracting Authority and the successful tenderers. Special attention is to be paid to the provisions specifying the rights and obligations of the contractor, in particular those on payments, performance of the contract, confidentiality, and checks and audits.\n\nIn Lot 1 the procedure will result in the conclusion of multiple framework contracts (FWC) in cascade and with reopening of competition under certain circumstances.\n\nThe FWC will be concluded in the form of separate, but identical, contracts with a maximum number of 3 (three) contractors provided that there are enough tenderers that have access to the procurement, are not excluded, satisfy the selection and award criteria, and comply with the Tender Specifications.\n\nThe tenders deemed admissible as a result of the evaluation will be ranked in descending order to establish a list of contractors and a sequence in which they will be offered specific contracts during the implementation of the FWC. The modalities of implementation of the FWC will be as follows:\n\nThe cascade of contractors will be used for specific contracts. In certain below defined circumstances the 3 contractors will be invited to compete in a reopening of competition mode.\n\n## A) Cascade mechanism:\n\n7", + "recall": 0.9851485148514851, + "true_md": "## 1.4.3 Services\n\n## 1.5 Place of performance: where will the contract be performed?\n\n## 1.6 Nature of the contract: how will the contract be implemented?\n\n## A) Cascade mechanism:\n\nPlease refer to sections 3 and 4 of Annex 1 “ Technical Specifications ” for a detailed description of the requested services and to section 6.3 for the acceptance procedures. \n\nThe services will be performed at the contractor's premises and/or at ECHA’s premises in Helsinki (for the exact location see section 9.3 of Annex 1 “ Technical Specifications ” ). \n\nThe procedure will result in the conclusion of multiple Framework Contracts with several economic operators, as described below. \n\nA framework contract establishes a mechanism for future repetitive purchases by the Contracting Authority to be awarded in the form of specific contracts. The signature of a framework contract does not impose an obligation on the Contracting Authority to conclude specific contracts with a framework contractor.\n\nSpecific contracts shall be awarded on the basis of the terms laid down in the framework contract, refined or, in duly justified circumstances, supplemented to reflect the particular circumstances of the specific contract. The different types of specific contracts are set out in section 6 of Annex 1 “ Technical Specifications ”.\n\nTenderers need to take full account of the full set of procurement documents, including the provisions of the draft framework contract and of the Service Level Agreement, as the procurement documents will define and govern the contractual relationship(s) to be established between the Contracting Authority and the successful tenderers. Special attention is to be paid to the provisions specifying the rights and obligations of the contractor, in particular those on payments, performance of the contract, confidentiality, and checks and audits.\n\nIn Lot 1 the procedure will result in the conclusion of multiple framework contracts (FWC) in cascade and with reopening of competition under certain circumstances.\n\nThe FWC will be concluded in the form of separate, but identical, contracts with a maximum number of 3 (three) contractors provided that there are enough tenderers that have access to the procurement, are not excluded, satisfy the selection and award criteria, and comply with the Tender Specifications.\n\nThe tenders deemed admissible as a result of the evaluation will be ranked in descending order to establish a list of contractors and a sequence in which they will be offered specific contracts during the implementation of the FWC. The modalities of implementation of the FWC will be as follows: \n\nThe cascade of contractors will be used for specific contracts. In certain below defined circumstances the 3 contractors will be invited to compete in a reopening of competition mode.\n\n7" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8947303700785747, + "doc_id": "ef8db1fcfc2870e37e7694d3d98d0545a357289b9573e6a238285489f9a6ef84", + "edit_distance": 0.3056768558951965, + "f1_score": 0.9931662870159453, + "meteor": 0.7735084324212791, + "precision": 0.9954337899543378, + "pred_md": "EC - FWC services Dec 2018\n\nContract no: [complete]\n\nII.8.4 The contractor must obtain from any natural person with the power to represent it or take decisions on its behalf, as well as from third parties involved in the implementation of the FWC a commitment that they will comply with this Article. At the request of the contracting authority, the contractor must provide a document providing evidence of this commitment.\n\n## II.9. PROCESSING OF PERSONAL DATA\n\n## II.9.1 Processing of personal data by the contracting authority\n\nAny personal data included in or relating to the FWC, including its implementation, shall be processed in accordance with Regulation (EU) 2018/1725. Such data shall be processed solely for the purposes of the implementation, management and monitoring of the FWC by the data controller.\n\nThe contractor or any other person whose personal data is processed by the data controller in relation to this FWC has specific rights as a data subject under Chapter III (Articles 14-25) of Regulation (EU) 2018/1725, in particular the right to access, rectify or erase their personal data and the right to restrict or, where applicable, the right to object to processing or the right to data portability.\n\nShould the contractor or any other person whose personal data is processed in relation to this FWC have any queries concerning the processing of its personal data, it shall address itself to the data controller. They may also address themselves to the Data Protection Officer of the data controller. They have the right to lodge a complaint at any time to the European Data Protection Supervisor.\n\nDetails concerning the processing of personal data are available in the privacy statement referred to in Article I.9 .\n\n## II.9.2 Processing of personal data by the contractor\n\nThe processing of personal data by the contractor shall meet the requirements of Regulation (EU) 2018/1725 and be processed solely for the purposes set out by the controller.\n\nThe contractor shall assist the controller for the fulfilment of the controller's obligation to respond to requests for exercising rights of person whose personal data is processed in relation to this FWC as laid down in Chapter III (Articles 14-25) of Regulation (EU) No 2018/1725. The contractor shall inform without delay the controller about such requests.\n\nThe contractor may act only on documented written instructions and under the supervision of the controller, in particular with regard to the purposes of the processing, the categories of data that may be processed, the recipients of the data and the means by which the data subject may exercise its rights.\n\nThe contractor shall grant personnel access to the data to the extent strictly necessary for the implementation, management and monitoring of the FWC. The contractor must ensure that personnel authorised to process personal data has committed itself to confidentiality or is under appropriate statutory obligation of confidentiality in accordance with the provisions of Article II.8.\n\nThe contractor shall adopt appropriate technical and organisational security measures, giving due regard to the risks inherent in the processing and to the nature, scope, context and purposes of processing, in order to ensure, in particular, as appropriate:\n\n- a) the pseudonymisation and encryption of personal data;\n- b) the ability to ensure the ongoing confidentiality, integrity, availability and resilience of processing systems and services;\n- c) the ability to restore the availability and access to personal data in a timely manner in the event of a physical or technical incident;\n\n19", + "recall": 0.990909090909091, + "true_md": "Contract no: [complete] \n\nEC - FWC services Dec 2018 \n\n- II.8.4 The contractor must obtain from any natural person with the power to represent it or take decisions on its behalf, as well as from third parties involved in the implementation of the FWC a commitment that they will comply with this Article. At the request of the contracting authority, the contractor must provide a document providing evidence of this commitment. \n\n- II.9.1 Processing of personal data by the contracting authority\n\n- II.9.2 Processing of personal data by the contractor \n\n- a) the pseudonymisation and encryption of personal data; b) the ability to ensure the ongoing confidentiality, integrity, availability and resilience of \n\n- a) the pseudonymisation and encryption of personal data; b) the ability to ensure the ongoing confidentiality, integrity, availability and resilience of processing systems and services; c) the ability to restore the availability and access to personal data in a timely manner in the \n\n- processing systems and services; c) the ability to restore the availability and access to personal data in a timely manner in the event of a physical or technical incident; \n\nAny personal data included in or relating to the FWC, including its implementation, shall be processed in accordance with Regulation (EU) 2018/1725. Such data shall be processed solely for the purposes of the implementation, management and monitoring of the FWC by the data controller.\n\nThe contractor or any other person whose personal data is processed by the data controller in relation to this FWC has specific rights as a data subject under Chapter III (Articles 14-25) of Regulation (EU) 2018/1725, in particular the right to access, rectify or erase their personal data and the right to restrict or, where applicable, the right to object to processing or the right to data portability. \n\nShould the contractor or any other person whose personal data is processed in relation to this FWC have any queries concerning the processing of its personal data, it shall address itself to the data controller. They may also address themselves to the Data Protection Officer of the data controller. They have the right to lodge a complaint at any time to the European Data Protection Supervisor.\n\nDetails concerning the processing of personal data are available in the privacy statement referred to in Article I.9 . \n\nThe processing of personal data by the contractor shall meet the requirements of Regulation (EU) 2018/1725 and be processed solely for the purposes set out by the controller.\n\nThe contractor shall assist the controller for the fulfilment of the controller’s obligation to respond to requests for exercising rights of person whose personal data is processed in relation to this FWC as laid down in Chapter III (Articles 14-25) of Regulation (EU) No 2018/1725. The contractor shall inform without delay the controller about such requests. \n\nThe contractor may act only on documented written instructions and under the supervision of the controller, in particular with regard to the purposes of the processing, the categories of data that may be processed, the recipients of the data and the means by which the data subject may exercise its rights. \n\nThe contractor shall grant personnel access to the data to the extent strictly necessary for the implementation, management and monitoring of the FWC. The contractor must ensure that personnel authorised to process personal data has committed itself to confidentiality or is under appropriate statutory obligation of confidentiality in accordance with the provisions of Article II.8. \n\nThe contractor shall adopt appropriate technical and organisational security measures, giving due regard to the risks inherent in the processing and to the nature, scope, context and purposes of processing, in order to ensure, in particular, as appropriate: \n\n19\n\n## II.9. PROCESSING OF PERSONAL DATA" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9937921564023866, + "doc_id": "3d842f8de9b1d45c34a592d3d5ba8e721d17925e4b77636c92b1fefd4125adf7", + "edit_distance": 0.02911208151382824, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9997954448954862, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "- 1. L'échange de documents électroniques comme les factures entre les parties est automatisé au moyen de l'utilisation de la plateforme e-PRIOR. Cette plateforme prévoit deux possibilités d'échange: soit au moyen de services web (connexion de machine à machine), soit au moyen d'une application web (le portail fournisseurs ).\n- 2. Le pouvoir adjudicateur prend les mesures nécessaires pour mettre en œuvre et assurer la maintenance des systèmes électroniques qui permettent une utilisation efficace du portail fournisseurs .\n- 3. Dans le cas d'une connexion de machine à machine, une connexion directe est établie entre les back offices des parties. Dans ce cas, les parties prennent de leur côté les mesures nécessaires pour mettre en œuvre et assurer la maintenance des systèmes électroniques qui permettent une utilisation efficace de la connexion de machine à machine. Les systèmes électroniques sont spécifiés dans le document de contrôle des interfaces . Le contractant (ou chef de file dans le cas d'une offre conjointe) doit prendre les mesures d'ordre technique nécessaires pour établir une connexion de machine à machine, à ses propres frais.\n- 4. Si la communication via le portail fournisseurs ou via les services web (connexion de machine à machine) est empêchée par des facteurs indépendants de la volonté d'une des parties, celle-ci doit le notifier à l'autre immédiatement, et les parties doivent prendre les mesures nécessaires pour rétablir cette communication.\n- 5. S'il est impossible de rétablir la communication dans un délai de six jours ouvrables, l'une des parties doit notifier à l'autre que les autres moyens de communication visés à l'article II.5.1 seront utilisés jusqu'à ce que le portail fournisseurs ou la connexion de machine à machine soit rétabli.\n- 6. Lorsqu'une modification du document de contrôle des interfaces exige des adaptations, le contractant (ou chef de file dans le cas d'une offre conjointe) dispose d'un maximum de six mois à compter de la réception de la notification pour mettre en œuvre cette modification. Ce délai peut être raccourci d'un commun accord entre les parties. Ce délai ne s'applique pas aux mesures urgentes requises par la politique de sécurité du pouvoir adjudicateur visant à garantir l'intégrité, la confidentialité et la non-répudiation des informations ainsi que la disponibilité d' e-PRIOR , qui doivent être appliquées immédiatement.\n\n## II.5.4. Validité et date des documents électroniques\n\n- 1. Les parties conviennent que tout document électronique, y compris les pièces jointes, échangé via e-PRIOR:\n- a) est considéré comme équivalant à un document sur support papier;\n- b) est réputé être l'original du document;\n- c) est juridiquement contraignant pour les parties; et\n- d) constitue une preuve des informations qu'il contient et est recevable comme élément de preuve dans des procédures judiciaires.\n- 2. Les parties renoncent expressément à tout droit de contester la validité d'un tel document sur le seul motif que les communications entre les parties ont été effectuées via e-PRIOR. Si une connexion directe est établie entre les back offices des parties pour permettre le transfert électronique de documents, les parties conviennent qu'un document électronique, envoyé comme indiqué dans le document de contrôle des interfaces , est considéré comme un message EDI .\n- 3. Si le document électronique est envoyé via le portail fournisseurs , il est réputé avoir été légalement émis ou envoyé lorsque le contractant (ou chef de file dans le cas d'une offre conjointe) est en mesure de soumettre le document électronique avec succès sans message d'erreur. Les documents PDF et XML générés pour le document électronique sont considérés comme un accusé de réception par le pouvoir adjudicateur.\n- 4. Si un document électronique est envoyé au moyen d'une connexion directe établie entre les back offices des parties, ce document électronique est réputé avoir été légalement émis ou\n\n16\n\nFR", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "- 1. L'échange de documents électroniques comme les factures entre les parties est automatisé au moyen de l'utilisation de la plateforme e-PRIOR. Cette plateforme prévoit deux possibilités d'échange: soit au moyen de services web (connexion de machine à machine), soit au moyen d'une application web (le portail fournisseurs ). \n\n- 2. Le pouvoir adjudicateur prend les mesures nécessaires pour mettre en œuvre et assurer la maintenance des systèmes électroniques qui permettent une utilisation efficace du portail fournisseurs . \n\n- 3. Dans le cas d'une connexion de machine à machine, une connexion directe est établie entre les back offices des parties. Dans ce cas, les parties prennent de leur côté les mesures nécessaires pour mettre en œuvre et assurer la maintenance des systèmes électroniques qui permettent une utilisation efficace de la connexion de machine à machine. Les systèmes électroniques sont spécifiés dans le document de contrôle des interfaces . Le contractant (ou chef de file dans le cas d'une offre conjointe) doit prendre les mesures d'ordre technique nécessaires pour établir une connexion de machine à machine, à ses propres frais. \n\n- 4. Si la communication via le portail fournisseurs ou via les services web (connexion de machine à machine) est empêchée par des facteurs indépendants de la volonté d'une des parties, celle-ci doit le notifier à l'autre immédiatement, et les parties doivent prendre les mesures nécessaires pour rétablir cette communication. \n\n- 5. S'il est impossible de rétablir la communication dans un délai de six jours ouvrables, l'une des parties doit notifier à l'autre que les autres moyens de communication visés à l'article II.5.1 seront utilisés jusqu'à ce que le portail fournisseurs ou la connexion de machine à machine soit rétabli. \n\n- 6. Lorsqu'une modification du document de contrôle des interfaces exige des adaptations, le contractant (ou chef de file dans le cas d'une offre conjointe) dispose d'un maximum de six mois à compter de la réception de la notification pour mettre en œuvre cette modification. Ce délai peut être raccourci d'un commun accord entre les parties. Ce délai ne s'applique pas aux mesures urgentes requises par la politique de sécurité du pouvoir adjudicateur visant à garantir l'intégrité, la confidentialité et la non-répudiation des informations ainsi que la disponibilité d' e-PRIOR , qui doivent être appliquées immédiatement. \n\n- 1. Les parties conviennent que tout document électronique, y compris les pièces jointes, échangé via e-PRIOR: \n\n- a) est considéré comme équivalant à un document sur support papier; \n\n- b) est réputé être l'original du document; \n\n- c) est juridiquement contraignant pour les parties; et \n\n- d) constitue une preuve des informations qu'il contient et est recevable comme élément de preuve dans des procédures judiciaires. \n\n- 2. Les parties renoncent expressément à tout droit de contester la validité d'un tel document sur le seul motif que les communications entre les parties ont été effectuées via e-PRIOR. Si une connexion directe est établie entre les back offices des parties pour permettre le transfert électronique de documents, les parties conviennent qu'un document électronique, envoyé comme indiqué dans le document de contrôle des interfaces , est considéré comme un message EDI . \n\n- 3. Si le document électronique est envoyé via le portail fournisseurs , il est réputé avoir été légalement émis ou envoyé lorsque le contractant (ou chef de file dans le cas d'une offre conjointe) est en mesure de soumettre le document électronique avec succès sans message d'erreur. Les documents PDF et XML générés pour le document électronique sont considérés comme un accusé de réception par le pouvoir adjudicateur. \n\n- 4. Si un document électronique est envoyé au moyen d'une connexion directe établie entre les back offices des parties, ce document électronique est réputé avoir été légalement émis ou \n\n## II.5.4. Validité et date des documents électroniques\n\n16 FR" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.956124264082183, + "doc_id": "91e7b212a78d38c2860025faf644b6e20de9ac84681dd43814cc94a740bfbf83", + "edit_distance": 0.3923076923076923, + "f1_score": 0.9883720930232559, + "meteor": 0.9429305214737849, + "precision": 0.9883720930232558, + "pred_md": "Vaccine Effectiveness, Burden and Impact Studies (VEBIS) of COVID-19 and Influenza - Tender Specifications ECDC/2021/12924\n\n## Tasks and Deliverables, Lot 1\n\nFor the format, quality criteria of the deliverables, deliverables planned for publication and business continuity of the services please refer to section 2.1.5\n\n## Task 1: Lot Management\n\nThe contractor will be responsible for the coordination of the day-to-day activities of the lot, communication to ECDC and seek relevant approval; organization of technical and annual meetings; production of documents related to the overall lot activities implementation. The contractor will maintain a close communication with the selected study sites and will timely inform ECDC of any issue or challenge that may arise and propose possible solutions.", + "recall": 0.9883720930232558, + "true_md": "For the format, quality criteria of the deliverables, deliverables planned for publication and business continuity of the services please refer to section 2.1.5\n\n## Task 1: Lot Management\n\nThe contractor will be responsible for the coordination of the day-to-day activities of the lot, communication to ECDC and seek relevant approval; organization of technical and annual meetings; production of documents related to the overall lot activities implementation. The contractor will maintain a close communication with the selected study sites and will timely inform ECDC of any issue or challenge that may arise and propose possible solutions.\n\nVaccine Effectiveness, Burden and Impact Studies (VEBIS) of COVID-19 and Influenza – Tender Specifications ECDC/2021/12924 \n\n# Tasks and Deliverables, Lot 1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6837018525197129, + "doc_id": "596739405412d993d5ed12836bd132681a7d596416affb80d687748e8e4a9aaf", + "edit_distance": 0.760655737704918, + "f1_score": 0.9888641425389755, + "meteor": 0.571132661572193, + "precision": 0.9823008849557522, + "pred_md": "## 3.2. Évacuation\n\n- 3.2.1 En cas d'urgence, l'ordre d'évacuation est donné par des sirènes et/ou par une communication orale (haut-parleurs). L'ordre d'évacuation peut être donné pour un étage, pour une zone ou pour l'ensemble du bâtiment. Ces ordres doivent être suivis immédiatement .\n\n## En cas d'évacuation:\n\n- -les travaux sont arrêtés après sécurisation du chantier (les brûleurs et bouteilles de gaz doivent être fermés, les machines mises hors service, …);\n- - les fenêtres et les portes du local doivent être fermées après le passage;\n- -il convient de se rendre vers les sorties et les escaliers de secours les plus proches (voir pictogrammes en appendice 2). Pour les bâtiments JL et Lex, on empruntera à cet effet les portes vertes pour atteindre l'étage d'évacuation;\n- -on ne peut en aucun cas utiliser les ascenseurs, se rendre dans les parkings ou faire demi-tour;\n- -évacuer vers les lieux de rassemblement indiqués ci-après.\n\nChaque entreprise désigne un responsable pour l'évacuation. Cette personne contrôle, en cas d'évacuation, si tous les membres du personnel de l'entreprise et des sous-traitants travaillant pour elle ont quitté le bâtiment et sont présents au lieu de rassemblement préalablement désigné. Elle indique au responsable du UP le nombre de personnes évacuées et transmet les noms des membres du personnel éventuellement manquants.\n\nAprès l'évacuation, le travail ne peut être repris qu'après que le bâtiment ait été déclaré sûr et que l'accès à celui-ci ait été officiellement autorisé par le service de sécurité.\n\nChaque entreprise veille à ce que tout membre du personnel présent sur le chantier reçoive une copie de la procédure d'évacuation décrite à l'appendice 2.\n\nSi le chantier est dépourvu de haut-parleurs ou de sirènes, il convient de mettre au point une procédure d'évacuation et d'alerte en concertation avec le service de sécurité et l'UP.\n\n## 3.3. Premiers soins\n\n- 3.3.1 Tout incident doit être signalé au gestionnaire de projet du CUE et aux services compétents du CUE.\n- 3.3.2 Chaque entreprise prévoit le matériel de premiers soins nécessaire.\n- 3.3.3 Par tranche de 20 travailleurs employés sur le chantier, chaque entreprise doit déléguer une personne chargée de donner les premiers soins et qui a le brevet de secouriste.\n- 3.3.4 Au besoin, les entreprises peuvent faire appel au service médical du CUE. À cet effet, l'entreprise établit, en concertation avec le coordinateur sécurité/santé (CSS) ou le chef du chantier et les services compétents du CUE, une procédure de premiers soins.\n\n70\n\nANNEX VII\n\nFR", + "recall": 0.9955156950672646, + "true_md": "## 3.2. Évacuation\n\n## 3.3. Premiers soins\n\n- 3.3.4 Au besoin, les entreprises peuvent faire appel au service médical du CUE. À cet effet, l'entreprise établit, en concertation avec le coordinateur sécurité/santé (CSS) ou le chef du chantier et les services compétents du CUE, une procédure de premiers soins. \n\n- 3.3.3 Par tranche de 20 travailleurs employés sur le chantier, chaque entreprise doit déléguer une personne chargée de donner les premiers soins et qui a le brevet de secouriste. \n\n- 3.3.2 Chaque entreprise prévoit le matériel de premiers soins nécessaire. \n\n- 3.3.1 Tout incident doit être signalé au gestionnaire de projet du CUE et aux services compétents du CUE. \n\n- demi-tour; - évacuer vers les lieux de rassemblement indiqués ci-après. \n\n- les portes vertes pour atteindre l'étage d'évacuation; - on ne peut en aucun cas utiliser les ascenseurs, se rendre dans les parkings ou faire demi-tour; - évacuer vers les lieux de rassemblement indiqués ci-après. \n\n- - les fenêtres et les portes du local doivent être fermées après le passage; - il convient de se rendre vers les sorties et les escaliers de secours les plus proches (voir pictogrammes en appendice 2). Pour les bâtiments JL et Lex, on empruntera à cet effet les portes vertes pour atteindre l'étage d'évacuation; - on ne peut en aucun cas utiliser les ascenseurs, se rendre dans les parkings ou faire \n\n- doivent être fermés, les machines mises hors service, …); - les fenêtres et les portes du local doivent être fermées après le passage; - il convient de se rendre vers les sorties et les escaliers de secours les plus proches (voir \n\n- En cas d'évacuation: - les travaux sont arrêtés après sécurisation du chantier (les brûleurs et bouteilles de gaz doivent être fermés, les machines mises hors service, …); - les fenêtres et les portes du local doivent être fermées après le passage; \n\n- 3.2.1 En cas d'urgence, l'ordre d'évacuation est donné par des sirènes et/ou par une communication orale (haut-parleurs). L'ordre d'évacuation peut être donné pour un étage, pour une zone ou pour l'ensemble du bâtiment. Ces ordres doivent être suivis immédiatement . \n\nEn cas d'évacuation: - les travaux sont arrêtés après sécurisation du chantier (les brûleurs et bouteilles de gaz \n\nChaque entreprise désigne un responsable pour l'évacuation. Cette personne contrôle, en cas d'évacuation, si tous les membres du personnel de l'entreprise et des sous-traitants travaillant pour elle ont quitté le bâtiment et sont présents au lieu de rassemblement préalablement désigné. Elle indique au responsable du UP le nombre de personnes évacuées et transmet les noms des membres du personnel éventuellement manquants. \n\nAprès l'évacuation, le travail ne peut être repris qu'après que le bâtiment ait été déclaré sûr et que l'accès à celui-ci ait été officiellement autorisé par le service de sécurité. Chaque entreprise veille à ce que tout membre du personnel présent sur le chantier reçoive \n\net que l'accès à celui-ci ait été officiellement autorisé par le service de sécurité. Chaque entreprise veille à ce que tout membre du personnel présent sur le chantier reçoive une copie de la procédure d'évacuation décrite à l'appendice 2. \n\nSi le chantier est dépourvu de haut-parleurs ou de sirènes, il convient de mettre au point une procédure d'évacuation et d'alerte en concertation avec le service de sécurité et l'UP. \n\n70 FR \n\nANNEX VII" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.03537381423752931, + "doc_id": "ef9203befda9ac8452137274b72c902bc1f2bd19fe3a09282f6baeb7a21c2333", + "edit_distance": 0.9574468085106383, + "f1_score": 0.1875, + "meteor": 0.30547250747432736, + "precision": 0.10344827586206896, + "pred_md": "## 3) Tender report.\n\nOnce all information and documents have been encoded and uploaded in the e-Submission application and you consider that the tender is complete, the application will require you to download the Tender Report generated by the e-Submission application. It will have to be signed (hand signature or electronic signature) and uploaded, as explained in the eSubmission Quick Guide .\n\nTender report\n\n☒\n\n☒\n\nWith the tender\n\nin e-Submission\n\n'Tender report'\n\nUnder section 'Tender report'\n\nPage 53 of 53\n\nEND OF DOCUMENT", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "END OF DOCUMENT \n\nPage 53 of 53" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8870891354428948, + "doc_id": "36f49ef1c433eec49533e1e01e2db6cd5cb60d0aeaf500987ad01411d9fd8395", + "edit_distance": 0.24528301886792453, + "f1_score": 0.9565217391304348, + "meteor": 0.9491241189276247, + "precision": 0.9705882352941176, + "pred_md": "The following table contains our personnel statistics as included in the consortium's tender form:\n\nYours faithfully\n\nName and first name: <…………………………………………………………………>\n\nDuly authorised to sign this tender on behalf of:\n\n<\n\n……………………………………………………………………………………\n\n>\n\nPlace and date: <…………………………………………………………….………….>\n\nStamp of the firm/company:\n\nThis tender includes the following annexes:\n\n<Numbered list of annexes with titles>\n\nANNEX 1 - DECLARATION OF HONOUR ON EXCLUSION AND SELECTION CRITERIA\n\nInsert Form A.14\n\nAugust 2020 c4l\\_tenderform\\_en.doc\n\nPage 7 of 9", + "recall": 0.9428571428571428, + "true_md": "The following table contains our personnel statistics as included in the consortium’s tender form: \n\n## ANNEX 1 – DECLARATION OF HONOUR ON EXCLUSION AND SELECTION CRITERIA\n\nYours faithfully \n\nName and first name: < …………………………………………………………………> \n\nDuly authorised to sign this tender on behalf of: \n\n< …………………………………………………………………………………… >\n\nPlace and date: < …………………………………………………………….………….> \n\nStamp of the firm/company: \n\nThis tender includes the following annexes: \n\n<Numbered list of annexes with titles> \n\nInsert Form A.14 \n\nAugust 2020 c4l\\_tenderform\\_en.doc \n\nPage 7 of 9" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9508131306582851, + "doc_id": "9414ce7604561598eee35921a7430f75a7f23ea3ea27af35f4817f23cc5bf910", + "edit_distance": 0.925343811394892, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.8000550403982327, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## II.15.3 Nature des dommages-intérêts\n\nLes parties reconnaissent et conviennent expressément que toute somme payable au titre du présent article ne constitue pas une sanction et représente une estimation raisonnable de la juste compensation des dommages causés par la non-fourniture des services dans les délais applicables fixés dans le CC.\n\n## II.15.4 Réclamations et responsabilité\n\nLes réclamations de dommages-intérêts n'ont pas d'incidence sur la responsabilité réelle ou potentielle du contractant ou sur les droits du pouvoir adjudicateur en vertu de l'article II.18.\n\n## II.16 RÉDUCTION DES PRIX\n\n## II.16.1 Normes de qualité\n\nSi le contractant ne fournit pas les services conformément au CC ou au bon de commande (\"obligations inexécutées\"), ou s'il ne fournit pas les services conformément aux normes de qualité attendues prévues dans le cahier des charges (\"livraison de faible qualité\"), le pouvoir adjudicateur peut réduire ou recouvrer les paiements de manière proportionnelle à la gravité des obligations inexécutées ou de la livraison de faible qualité. Il s'agit en particulier des cas où le pouvoir adjudicateur ne peut approuver un résultat , rapport ou élément livrable tel que défini à l'article I.6 après présentation par le contractant des informations supplémentaires demandées, de corrections ou d'une nouvelle version.\n\nUne réduction des prix peut être imposée avec des dommages-intérêts dans les conditions de l'article II.15.\n\n## II.16.2 Procédure\n\nLe pouvoir adjudicateur doit notifier formellement au contractant son intention de réduire le paiement et le montant calculé correspondant.\n\nLe contractant fait part de ses observations dans les trente jours qui suivent la date de réception. À défaut, la décision devient exécutoire le jour suivant l'expiration du délai de présentation des observations.\n\nSi le contractant présente des observations, le pouvoir adjudicateur doit lui notifier , en tenant compte desdites observations:\n\n- a) le retrait de son intention de réduire le paiement; ou\n- b) sa décision finale de réduire le paiement et le montant correspondant.\n\n## II.16.3 Réclamations et responsabilité\n\nLes réductions de prix n'ont pas d'incidence sur la responsabilité réelle ou potentielle du contractant ou sur les droits du pouvoir adjudicateur en vertu de l'article II.18.\n\n## II.17 SUSPENSION DE L'EXÉCUTION DU CC\n\n## II.17.1 Suspension par le contractant\n\nSi le contractant est confronté à un cas de force majeure , il peut suspendre la fourniture des services dans le cadre d'un bon de commande .\n\nLe contractant doit immédiatement notifier la suspension au pouvoir adjudicateur. La notification doit comprendre une description du cas de force majeure et indiquer le moment auquel le contractant devrait reprendre la fourniture des services.\n\nDès qu'il est en mesure de reprendre l' exécution du bon de commande , le contractant doit en informer le pouvoir adjudicateur au moyen d'une notification , à moins que celui-ci n'ait déjà résilié le CC ou le bon de commande .\n\n## II.17.2 Suspension par le pouvoir adjudicateur\n\n26\n\nFR", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## II.15.3 Nature des dommages-intérêts\n\n## II.15.4 Réclamations et responsabilité\n\n## II.16 RÉDUCTION DES PRIX\n\n## II.16.1 Normes de qualité\n\n## II.16.2 Procédure\n\n## II.16.3 Réclamations et responsabilité\n\n## II.17.1 Suspension par le contractant\n\n## II.17 SUSPENSION DE L'EXÉCUTION DU CC\n\nDès qu'il est en mesure de reprendre l' exécution du bon de commande , le contractant doit en informer le pouvoir adjudicateur au moyen d'une notification , à moins que celui-ci n'ait déjà résilié le CC ou le bon de commande . \n\nLe contractant doit immédiatement notifier la suspension au pouvoir adjudicateur. La notification doit comprendre une description du cas de force majeure et indiquer le moment auquel le contractant devrait reprendre la fourniture des services. \n\n## II.17.2 Suspension par le pouvoir adjudicateur\n\nSi le contractant est confronté à un cas de force majeure , il peut suspendre la fourniture des services dans le cadre d'un bon de commande . \n\nLes réductions de prix n'ont pas d'incidence sur la responsabilité réelle ou potentielle du contractant ou sur les droits du pouvoir adjudicateur en vertu de l'article II.18. \n\nSi le contractant présente des observations, le pouvoir adjudicateur doit lui notifier , en tenant compte desdites observations: \n\nLe contractant fait part de ses observations dans les trente jours qui suivent la date de réception. À défaut, la décision devient exécutoire le jour suivant l'expiration du délai de présentation des observations. \n\nLe pouvoir adjudicateur doit notifier formellement au contractant son intention de réduire le paiement et le montant calculé correspondant. \n\nUne réduction des prix peut être imposée avec des dommages-intérêts dans les conditions de l'article II.15. \n\nSi le contractant ne fournit pas les services conformément au CC ou au bon de commande (\"obligations inexécutées\"), ou s'il ne fournit pas les services conformément aux normes de qualité attendues prévues dans le cahier des charges (\"livraison de faible qualité\"), le pouvoir adjudicateur peut réduire ou recouvrer les paiements de manière proportionnelle à la gravité des obligations inexécutées ou de la livraison de faible qualité. Il s'agit en particulier des cas où le pouvoir adjudicateur ne peut approuver un résultat , rapport ou élément livrable tel que défini à l'article I.6 après présentation par le contractant des informations supplémentaires demandées, de corrections ou d'une nouvelle version. \n\n26 FR\n\n- a) le retrait de son intention de réduire le paiement; ou \n\n- b) sa décision finale de réduire le paiement et le montant correspondant. \n\nLes parties reconnaissent et conviennent expressément que toute somme payable au titre du présent article ne constitue pas une sanction et représente une estimation raisonnable de la juste compensation des dommages causés par la non-fourniture des services dans les délais applicables fixés dans le CC. \n\nLes réclamations de dommages-intérêts n'ont pas d'incidence sur la responsabilité réelle ou potentielle du contractant ou sur les droits du pouvoir adjudicateur en vertu de l'article II.18." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9442846808676709, + "doc_id": "d3204d12b30ef9a2ffcdafd26b6060e9db455f955b7db8f6eb3140432b3e0736", + "edit_distance": 0.8877952755905512, + "f1_score": 0.9917355371900827, + "meteor": 0.8343062687463396, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## I. CONDITIONS PARTICULIÈRES\n\n## I.1 ORDRE DE PRIORITÉ DES DISPOSITIONS\n\nEn cas de conflit entre les différentes dispositions du CC, il convient d'appliquer l'ordre de priorité ci-après:\n\n- a) conditions particulières;\n- b) conditions générales;\n- c) bon de commande (annexe I);\n- d) spécifications techniques (annexe II);\n- e) Service Level Agreement (annexe III);\n- f) offre technique du contractant (annexe IV);\n- g) offre financière du contractant (annexe V);\n- h) accès pour le personnel du contractant (annexe VI);\n- i) règles et consignes en matière de prévention (annexe VII).\n\n## I.2 OBJET\n\nLe CC a pour objet les prestations de conduite, de maintenance préventive, corrective ainsi que les travaux d'adaptation relatifs aux installations techniques du bâtiment Crèche appartenant au Secrétariat général du Conseil de l'Union européenne selon les descriptions figurant à l'annexe II (ci-après dénommés \"les services\") conformément aux dispositions du présent contrat.\n\n## I.3 ENTRÉE EN VIGUEUR ET DURÉE DU CC\n\n- I.3.1 Le CC entre en vigueur à la date de sa signature par la dernière partie.\n- I.3.2 L' exécution du CC ne peut commencer avant son entrée en vigueur.\n- I.3.3 Le CC est conclu pour une durée de 24 mois à compter de la date de son entrée en vigueur.\n- I.3.4 Tout bon de commande doit être signé par les parties avant l'expiration du CC.\n\nAprès son expiration, le CC demeure en vigueur à l'égard de ces bons de commande . Les services ou les travaux sur lesquels portent ces bons de commande doivent être exécutés au plus tard six mois après l'expiration du CC.\n\n## I.3.5 Reconduction du CC\n\nLe CC est reconduit tacitement 2 fois, pour une période respective de 12 mois, sauf si l'une des parties reçoit une notification formelle contraire au moins trois mois avant la fin de la période en cours du CC. La reconduction ne modifie ni n'ajourne les obligations existantes.\n\n## I.4 DÉSIGNATION DU CONTRACTANT ET EXÉCUTION DU CC\n\n## I.4.1 Désignation du contractant\n\nLe pouvoir adjudicateur désigne un contractant pour un CC unique.\n\n## I.4.2 Période de prestation des services\n\nLa période de prestation des services ou des travaux commence à courir à la date indiquée dans le bon de commande .\n\n## I.4.3 Exécution du CC unique\n\nLe pouvoir adjudicateur commande des services et/ou des travaux en envoyant au contractant un bon de commande sur support papier ou courrier électronique . 1\n\n1 Les bons de commande dont la valeur contractuelle est supérieure à 15 000 EUR seront envoyés au contractant sur support papier par courrier postal et devront être renvoyés par celui-ci de la même façon.\n\n5\n\nFR", + "recall": 0.9836065573770492, + "true_md": "## I. CONDITIONS PARTICULIÈRES\n\n## I.1 ORDRE DE PRIORITÉ DES DISPOSITIONS\n\nEn cas de conflit entre les différentes dispositions du CC, il convient d'appliquer l'ordre de priorité ci-après: \n\nLe CC a pour objet les prestations de conduite, de maintenance préventive, corrective ainsi que les travaux d'adaptation relatifs aux installations techniques du bâtiment Crèche appartenant au Secrétariat général du Conseil de l'Union européenne selon les descriptions figurant à l'annexe II (ci-après dénommés \"les services\") conformément aux dispositions du présent contrat. \n\nAprès son expiration, le CC demeure en vigueur à l'égard de ces bons de commande . Les services ou les travaux sur lesquels portent ces bons de commande doivent être exécutés au plus tard six mois après l'expiration du CC. \n\nLe CC est reconduit tacitement 2 fois, pour une période respective de 12 mois, sauf si l'une des parties reçoit une notification formelle contraire au moins trois mois avant la fin de la période en cours du CC. La reconduction ne modifie ni n'ajourne les obligations existantes. \n\nLe pouvoir adjudicateur désigne un contractant pour un CC unique. \n\nLa période de prestation des services ou des travaux commence à courir à la date indiquée dans le bon de commande . \n\nLe pouvoir adjudicateur commande des services et/ou des travaux en envoyant au contractant un bon de commande sur support papier ou courrier électronique$^{1}$. \n\n## I.2 OBJET\n\n## I.3 ENTRÉE EN VIGUEUR ET DURÉE DU CC\n\n## I.3.5 Reconduction du CC\n\n## I.4 DÉSIGNATION DU CONTRACTANT ET EXÉCUTION DU CC\n\n## I.4.1 Désignation du contractant\n\n## I.4.2 Période de prestation des services\n\n## I.4.3 Exécution du CC unique\n\n5 1 Les bons de commande dont la valeur contractuelle est supérieure à 15 000 EUR seront envoyés au contractant sur support papier par courrier postal et devront être renvoyés par celui-ci de la même façon. \n\n- I.3.1 Le CC entre en vigueur à la date de sa signature par la dernière partie. \n\n- I.3.2 L' exécution du CC ne peut commencer avant son entrée en vigueur. \n\n- I.3.3 Le CC est conclu pour une durée de 24 mois à compter de la date de son entrée en vigueur. \n\n- I.3.4 Tout bon de commande doit être signé par les parties avant l'expiration du CC. \n\n- a) conditions particulières; \n\n- b) conditions générales; \n\n- c) bon de commande (annexe I); \n\n- d) spécifications techniques (annexe II); \n\n- e) Service Level Agreement (annexe III); \n\n- f) offre technique du contractant (annexe IV); \n\n- g) offre financière du contractant (annexe V); \n\n- h) accès pour le personnel du contractant (annexe VI); \n\n- i) règles et consignes en matière de prévention (annexe VII). \n\n5 FR" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7722807757293707, + "doc_id": "17292a4a3fff554d4e9b850eded86372af9b0c3f9c471fbe9fa4fb1bf279bb92", + "edit_distance": 0.5935334872979214, + "f1_score": 0.9624573378839589, + "meteor": 0.7647495406246463, + "precision": 0.9791666666666666, + "pred_md": "General Administrative and Submission Clauses\n\nAd\n\ndress of the Tenderer ............................ :\n\nDeadline for the receipt of tenders: xx/xx/201x\n\n## 4.4. Receipt of the tender\n\nTenders must be submitted no later than the date and time indicated in point 1.4 of the 'Terms of Reference' and can be sent by registered mail, courier service or hand delivery, to the following addresses.\n\nReceipt is understood as the time at which the Tenderer hands over the tender to the post office or courier service or in person to the EIB (hand delivery).\n\nBy registered mail to:\n\nEUROPEAN INVESTMENT BANK For the attention of CS-PROCUREMENT Ref.: xx-xxxx 1 Procurement and Purchasing Division 98-100 boulevard Konrad Adenauer L-2950 LUXEMBOURG\n\nBy hand delivery or courier service to:\n\nEUROPEAN INVESTMENT BANK For the attention of CS-PROCUREMENT Ref.: xx-xxxx 2 Procurement and Purchasing Division 98-100 boulevard Konrad Adenauer L-2950 LUXEMBOURG\n\nN.B. Tenders sent by other means (e.g. by e-mail or fax) or submitted later than the deadline indicated in point 1.4 in the 'Terms of Reference' will be rejected.\n\n## 4.4.1.\n\n## Proof of dispatch for registered mail and courier service\n\nThe Tenderer shall dispatch its tender to the postal or courier service by the deadline indicated in point 1.4 of the 'Terms of Reference' at the latest.\n\nAs a proof of dispatch, date and time of dispatch shall be clearly indicated in the outer envelope of the tender.\n\n## 4.4.2. Proof of dispatch for hand delivery\n\nThe Tenderer shall hand in its tender to EIB's reception desk, at the address indicated above in point 4.4, by the deadline indicated in point 1.4 in the 'Terms of Reference' at the latest.\n\nThe receipt dated and signed by the employee at the reception desk who receives the tender (reception desk open 24 hours a day) shall form the evidence of the tender having been handed in.\n\n1 The actual reference number of the procurement procedure in question is to be inserted.\n\n2 Same as footnote 1.\n\nLast updated: June 2020\n\nPage 8 of 21", + "recall": 0.9463087248322147, + "true_md": "General Administrative and Submission Clauses\n\nAd dress of the Tenderer : ............................ Deadline for the receipt of tenders: xx/xx/201x\n\n## 4.4. Receipt of the tender\n\nTenders must be submitted no later than the date and time indicated in point 1.4 of the `Terms of Reference` and can be sent by registered mail, courier service or hand delivery, to the following addresses. \n\nReceipt is understood as the time at which the Tenderer hands over the tender to the post office or courier service or in person to the EIB (hand delivery). \n\nBy registered mail to: \n\nThe Tenderer shall hand in its tender to EIB’s reception desk, at the address indicated above in point 4.4, by the deadline indicated in point 1.4 in the `Terms of Reference` at the latest. \n\nThe receipt dated and signed by the employee at the reception desk who receives the tender (reception desk open 24 hours a day) shall form the evidence of the tender having been handed in. \n\nThe Tenderer shall dispatch its tender to the postal or courier service by the deadline indicated in point 1.4 of the `Terms of Reference` at the latest. \n\nAs a proof of dispatch, date and time of dispatch shall be clearly indicated in the outer envelope of the tender. \n\nN.B. Tenders sent by other means (e.g. by e-mail or fax) or submitted later than the deadline indicated in point 1.4 in the `Terms of Reference` will be rejected. \n\n## 4.4.1. Proof of dispatch for registered mail and courier service\n\n## 4.4.2. Proof of dispatch for hand delivery\n\nBy hand delivery or courier service to: \n\nEUROPEAN INVESTMENT BANK For the attention of CS-PROCUREMENT Ref.: xx-xxxx$^{1}$ Procurement and Purchasing Division 98-100 boulevard Konrad Adenauer L-2950 LUXEMBOURG \n\nEUROPEAN INVESTMENT BANK For the attention of CS-PROCUREMENT Ref.: xx-xxxx$^{2}$ Procurement and Purchasing Division 98-100 boulevard Konrad Adenauer L-2950 LUXEMBOURG \n\n$^{1}$ The actual reference number of the procurement procedure in question is to be inserted. $^{2}$ Same as footnote 1.\n\n$^{1}$ The actual reference number of the procurement procedure in question is to be inserted. $^{2}$ Same as footnote 1.\n\nLast updated: June 2020\n\nPage 8 of 21" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.011631625035016234, + "doc_id": "587558a074858891bdf1d625a9e9fce4ea116ac61bd276d86a069697744b62a4", + "edit_distance": 0.9881305637982196, + "f1_score": 0.06956521739130435, + "meteor": 0.18341307814992028, + "precision": 0.036036036036036036, + "pred_md": "AUTORISATION DE TRAVAIL\n\nPERMIS DE FEU\n\nN°\n\n## Travaux commandés par\n\nEntreprise exécutante\n\nNature des travaux\n\nInfluences sur\n\nResponsable CUE:\n\nTél. ou GSM:\n\nFax:\n\nEntreprise générale/pilote: CO-/Sous-traitant final: Responsable des travaux:\n\nTél. ou GSM:\n\nFAX/E-mail:\n\nNouvelle installation\n\nAdaptation/rénov.\n\nRemplacement\n\nDépannage\n\nEntretien\n\nDémolition\n\nAutres:\n\nCompartimentage\n\nDétection\n\nExtinction\n\nautomatique\n\nHydrants; dévidoirs\n\nInstallation\n\nEvacuation\n\nSortie de secours\n\nVentilation\n\nAutres:\n\nEmplacement des travaux\n\nDateDébut le à h\n\nBâtiment\n\nEtage\n\nAile\n\nLocal\n\nAutres\n\nTypes de travail\n\nBrosser\n\nChauffer\n\nColler\n\nDécouper\n\nMarteler\n\nMeuler\n\nNettoyer\n\nPercer\n\nSouder\n\nAutres:\n\nFin le\n\nà\n\nh\n\n- Le présent permis de feu n'est valable que la date mentionnée ci-dessus\n\nEnergies utilisées\n\nAir\n\nEau\n\nElectricité\n\nGaz\n\nRéaction chimique\n\nAutres:\n\nDescription des travaux:\n\nMatières\n\nRisques\n\nBéton\n\nBois\n\nMétal\n\nPierre\n\nPlastique\n\nPlâtre\n\nProduit chimique\n\nAutres:\n\nBruit\n\nBrûlures\n\nChoc\n\nChutes\n\nChutes d'objet\n\nContact direct élec\n\nCourt circuit\n\nEffondrement\n\nElectrisation\n\nEtincelles\n\nExplosion\n\nIncendie\n\nIrritation\n\nInondation\n\nOdeurs\n\nPoussières\n\nAutres:\n\nMesures de prévention prises par l'entreprise chargée des travaux pour protéger les occupants et les installations du bâtiment:\n\nType local\n\nLocal technique\n\nCouloir\n\nBureau\n\nCuisine\n\nParking\n\nArchive\n\nConfiné\n\nAutres:\n\nLa présente autorisation est accordée par l'UP du CUE sous réserve de l'application stricte :\n\n1. des consignes de sécurité indiquées au verso\n\n2. d'avoir averti chaque jour le CDI (02/281 9100) avant le début et après la fin des travaux\n\n3. des mesures de prévention spécifiques:\n\nURGENCES  2000\n\nOU\n\n02 / 281 2000\n\nEntreprise exécutante\n\nFait le Par\n\nSignature\n\nEntreprise pilote\n\nFait le Par\n\nSignature\n\nAccord SPSS du CUE\n\nFait le Par\n\nSignature\n\nRemise en état fonctionnel des installations concernées par l'entreprise exécutante Fait le Par\n\nSignature\n\nMesures internes\n\nSurveillance permanente : oui / non Effectuée par :\n\nDétecteurs - Lignes - Boucles\n\nPO - Safety Suivi EDI\n\nFait le Par\n\nSignature\n\nService de Prévention Evaluation\n\nFait le Par\n\nSignature\n\nRondes préventives / fiche de contrôle\n\nHr\n\nPar\n\nDébut\n\nFin\n\n96\n\nANNEX VII\n\nFR\n\nAppendice 5 de l'Annexe VII", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Appendice 5 de l'Annexe VII \n\n96 FR \n\nANNEX VII" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.35425618269016834, + "doc_id": "61d267ff2a3a33c71c91c3e148d0e00699c0756873b4318f21e210af43a53eb3", + "edit_distance": 0.7288135593220338, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.4810663683057643, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## TABLE DES MATIÈRES\n\n- 1. Introduction\n- 2. Organisation de la coordination et de la prévention\n- 3. Incendie, évacuation et premiers soins\n- 4. Autorisations pour certains travaux\n- 5. Aménagement du chantier\n- 6. Installation électrique\n- 7. Outillage et équipement\n- 8. Produits dangereux\n\nLes dispositions et règles explicitées dans ce fascicule doivent être portées à la connaissance de toute entreprise ou autre personne intervenant dans l'élaboration ou l'exécution de travaux au sein de l'institution.\n\n67\n\nANNEX VII\n\nFR", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## TABLE DES MATIÈRES\n\nLes dispositions et règles explicitées dans ce fascicule doivent être portées à la connaissance de toute entreprise ou autre personne intervenant dans l'élaboration ou l'exécution de travaux au sein de l'institution. \n\n- 1. Introduction 2. Organisation de la coordination et de la prévention \n\n- 1. Introduction 2. Organisation de la coordination et de la prévention 3. Incendie, évacuation et premiers soins \n\n- 2. Organisation de la coordination et de la prévention 3. Incendie, évacuation et premiers soins 4. Autorisations pour certains travaux \n\n- 3. Incendie, évacuation et premiers soins 4. Autorisations pour certains travaux 5. Aménagement du chantier \n\n- 4. Autorisations pour certains travaux 5. Aménagement du chantier 6. Installation électrique \n\n- 5. Aménagement du chantier 6. Installation électrique 7. Outillage et équipement \n\n- 6. Installation électrique 7. Outillage et équipement 8. Produits dangereux \n\n- 7. Outillage et équipement 8. Produits dangereux \n\n67 FR \n\nANNEX VII" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "5ad1181be445f719c2d22d756324177abc72f62b83b0c5c98714db6f116df106", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9997724169321802, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## EUOSHA/2021/OP/F/SE/0142\n\n## Some other EU-OSHA websites and online tools\n\n4", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## EUOSHA/2021/OP/F/SE/0142\n\n## Some other EU-OSHA websites and online tools\n\n4" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7862598795342728, + "doc_id": "3211ed0ddaaaa6ead0ed030c5085cce8c3d72bfaebfa954a53e6c69d46f18833", + "edit_distance": 0.4142857142857143, + "f1_score": 0.990138067061144, + "meteor": 0.7254996396141995, + "precision": 0.996031746031746, + "pred_md": "- o lorsque les prestations ne sont pas complètement achevées dans le délai d'exécution prévu dans le bon de commande,\n- o à tout moment, lorsque les prestations ne sont pas poursuivies de telle manière qu'elles puissent être entièrement terminées dans le délai d'exécution prévu dans le bon de commande,\n- o lorsque le contractant ne suit pas les instructions écrites valablement donnés par le pouvoir adjudicateur.\n\nIl s'agit en particulier des cas où le pouvoir adjudicateur ne peut approuver un résultat , rapport ou élément livrable tel que défini à l'article I.6 après présentation par le contractant des informations supplémentaires demandées, de corrections ou d'une nouvelle version.\n\nUne réduction des prix peut être imposée avec des dommages-intérêts dans les conditions de l'article I.13.1.\n\n## 2. Procédure\n\nLe contractant est tenu de s'exécuter immédiatement. Si après 15 jours de la notification du ou des défauts d'exécution, aucune suite est donnée aux manquements par le contractant, le pouvoir adjudicateur doit notifier formellement au contractant son intention de réduire le paiement et le montant calculé correspondant et de confier les prestations à un tiers, aux frais, risques et périls du contractant défaillant.\n\nLe contractant fait part de ses observations dans les 15 jours qui suivent la date de réception. À défaut, la décision devient exécutoire le jour suivant l'expiration du délai de présentation des observations.\n\nSi le contractant présente des observations, le pouvoir adjudicateur doit lui notifier , en tenant compte desdites observations:\n\n- a) le retrait de son intention de réduire le paiement; ou\n- b) sa décision finale de réduire le paiement et le montant correspondant et le cas échéant de confier les prestations à un tiers.\n\n## I.13.3 INTERLOCUTEUR\n\nPour l'exécution du contrat, les personnes indiquées par le pouvoir adjudicateur par écrit sont les seuls interlocuteurs pour le contractant. Celui-ci n'acceptera aucune demande émanant d'une autre personne ou d'un autre service sans l'accord préalable des responsables indiqués dans les contrats spécifiques et/ou les bons de commande.\n\n## I.13.4. RESPONSABILITÉ DU CONTRACTANT\n\nLe contractant déclare parfaitement connaître, pour en avoir pris connaissance, toutes les règles administratives et techniques constituant le cahier des charges, ou s'y rattachant, et déclare accepter, sans exception ni réserve, toutes les prescriptions qui en résultent.\n\nLe contractant doit demander, en temps utile, les instructions écrites ou figurées, qui pourraient lui faire défaut. En aucun cas, il ne pourra invoquer l'absence d'ordres ou de renseignements pour justifier des retards, ou une exécution non conforme aux stipulations du cahier des charges.\n\n## I.13.5 NON-APPLICABILITÉ DE CERTAINES DISPOSITIONS DES CONDITIONS GÉNÉRALES\n\nConsidérant l'objet, la portée et les caractéristiques particulières du présent contrat, les dispositions suivantes des conditions générales ne sont pas d'application: II.15.1., II.15.2., II.16.1., II.16.2..\n\n## SIGNATURES\n\nPour le contractant,\n\n[ dénomination sociale/prénom/nom/fonction ]\n\nPour le pouvoir adjudicateur,\n\n[ prénom/nom/fonction ]\n\n11\n\nFR", + "recall": 0.984313725490196, + "true_md": "- o lorsque les prestations ne sont pas complètement achevées dans le délai d'exécution prévu dans le bon de commande, o à tout moment, lorsque les prestations ne sont pas poursuivies de telle manière qu'elles puissent \n\n- le bon de commande, o à tout moment, lorsque les prestations ne sont pas poursuivies de telle manière qu'elles puissent être entièrement terminées dans le délai d'exécution prévu dans le bon de commande, o lorsque le contractant ne suit pas les instructions écrites valablement donnés par le pouvoir \n\n- être entièrement terminées dans le délai d'exécution prévu dans le bon de commande, o lorsque le contractant ne suit pas les instructions écrites valablement donnés par le pouvoir adjudicateur.\n\n- a) le retrait de son intention de réduire le paiement; ou \n\n- b) sa décision finale de réduire le paiement et le montant correspondant et le cas échéant de confier les prestations à un tiers. \n\nConsidérant l'objet, la portée et les caractéristiques particulières du présent contrat, les dispositions suivantes des conditions générales ne sont pas d'application: II.15.1., II.15.2., II.16.1., II.16.2.. \n\n Il s'agit en particulier des cas où le pouvoir adjudicateur ne peut approuver un résultat , rapport ou élément livrable tel que défini à l'article I.6 après présentation par le contractant des informations supplémentaires demandées, de corrections ou d'une nouvelle version. \n\nUne réduction des prix peut être imposée avec des dommages-intérêts dans les conditions de l'article I.13.1. \n\n2. Procédure Le contractant est tenu de s'exécuter immédiatement. Si après 15 jours de la notification du ou des défauts d'exécution, aucune suite est donnée aux manquements par le contractant, le pouvoir adjudicateur doit notifier formellement au contractant son intention de réduire le paiement et le montant calculé correspondant et de confier les prestations à un tiers, aux frais, risques et périls du contractant défaillant. \n\nLe contractant fait part de ses observations dans les 15 jours qui suivent la date de réception. À défaut, la décision devient exécutoire le jour suivant l'expiration du délai de présentation des observations. \n\nSi le contractant présente des observations, le pouvoir adjudicateur doit lui notifier , en tenant compte desdites observations: \n\nPour l'exécution du contrat, les personnes indiquées par le pouvoir adjudicateur par écrit sont les seuls interlocuteurs pour le contractant. Celui-ci n’acceptera aucune demande émanant d’une autre personne ou d'un autre service sans l'accord préalable des responsables indiqués dans les contrats spécifiques et/ou les bons de commande. \n\nLe contractant déclare parfaitement connaître, pour en avoir pris connaissance, toutes les règles administratives et techniques constituant le cahier des charges, ou s'y rattachant, et déclare accepter, sans exception ni réserve, toutes les prescriptions qui en résultent. Le contractant doit demander, en temps utile, les instructions écrites ou figurées, qui pourraient lui \n\nsans exception ni réserve, toutes les prescriptions qui en résultent. Le contractant doit demander, en temps utile, les instructions écrites ou figurées, qui pourraient lui faire défaut. En aucun cas, il ne pourra invoquer l'absence d'ordres ou de renseignements pour justifier des retards, ou une exécution non conforme aux stipulations du cahier des charges. \n\n## SIGNATURES\n\n## I.13.5 NON-APPLICABILITÉ DE CERTAINES DISPOSITIONS DES CONDITIONS GÉNÉRALES\n\n## I.13.4. RESPONSABILITÉ DU CONTRACTANT\n\n## I.13.3 INTERLOCUTEUR\n\n## 2. Procédure Le contractant est tenu de s'exécuter immédiatement. Si après 15 jours de la notification du ou des\n\n11 FR\n\n11 FR\n\nPour le contractant, \n\nPour le pouvoir adjudicateur, \n\n[ prénom/nom/fonction ]\n\n[ dénomination sociale/prénom/nom/fonction ]" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9642447253266807, + "doc_id": "94b65b236172a804b3310a4710738da80c2874a8ae8dc2882b3052203aa03e18", + "edit_distance": 0.797979797979798, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.8397521102386996, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## 8.2 Responsabilités\n\nIl est de la responsabilité de la société de se soumettre à cette procédure et de faire en sorte que son personnel connaisse et applique les recommandations ci-dessous.\n\n## 8.3 Règles générales\n\n- 8.3.1 Procédure pour l'introduction d'un produit sur le site\n\nPour tout produit utilisé par l'entreprise, les responsables, délégués par leur entreprise, passeront en revue les fiches de données de sécurité (MSDS) avec leur conseiller en prévention et leur service médical (fiche MSDS, conformément à la législation belge et Directive Européenne 92/32/CE et 91/155/CE remplacée par la 2001/58/CE). Si ces derniers émettent un avis favorable, l'ensemble du dossier (avec avis) sera transmis au UP, et éventuellement au Service Médical du CUE, qui transmettront un rapport notifiant l'autorisation d'utiliser ce produit sur le site.\n\n- 8.3.2 Informations/formalités du personnel et du CUE\n- 8.3.2.1 L'entrepreneur a la responsabilité d'informer son personnel et le représentant du donneur d'ordre (personne de contact CUE) sur la manière d'utiliser ces substances chimiques et sur le type de protections individuelles à utiliser.\n- 8.3.2.2 Avant de transporter ou d'utiliser, sur le site, une substance/préparation chimique susceptible d'être dangereuse, il faudra s'assurer de bien connaître les risques qu'elle présente, ainsi que les premiers secours en cas de contact accidentel ou d'intoxication (voir la fiche toxicologique).\n- 8.3.2.3 Le cas échéant, la procédure d'autorisation de travail est d'application (voir point 4).\n- 8.3.3 Dossier général relatif aux produits utilisés\n\nLa personne ayant la responsabilité de la gestion journalière de l'entreprise sous-traitante sur notre site, tiendra à disposition un dossier complet à jour de tous les produits utilisés. Ce dossier reprendra, pour chacun d'eux, le lieu de stockage, les quantités habituellement stockées, les avis émanant de leur société et du CUE (voir § 1), la fiche technique ainsi que la fiche MSDS, conformément à la législation belge et aux Directives Européennes 91/55/CE et 92/32/CE.\n\n## 8.4 Déclaration de la première utilisation d'un nouveau produit\n\n- 8.4.1 Informer la personne de contact du CUE et l'UP.\n- 8.4.2 Introduire les informations de la nouvelle substance dans le dossier général des produits.\n\n80\n\nFR\n\nANNEX VII", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## 8.2 Responsabilités\n\n## 8.3 Règles générales\n\n## 8.4 Déclaration de la première utilisation d'un nouveau produit\n\n80 FR \n\nANNEX VII \n\n- 8.4.1 Informer la personne de contact du CUE et l'UP. \n\n- 8.4.2 Introduire les informations de la nouvelle substance dans le dossier général des produits.\n\n- 8.3.3 Dossier général relatif aux produits utilisés \n\n- 8.3.2.3 Le cas échéant, la procédure d'autorisation de travail est d'application (voir point 4). \n\n- 8.3.2.2 Avant de transporter ou d'utiliser, sur le site, une substance/préparation chimique susceptible d'être dangereuse, il faudra s'assurer de bien connaître les risques qu'elle présente, ainsi que les premiers secours en cas de contact accidentel ou d'intoxication (voir la fiche toxicologique).\n\n- 8.3.2.1 L'entrepreneur a la responsabilité d'informer son personnel et le représentant du donneur d'ordre (personne de contact CUE) sur la manière d'utiliser ces substances chimiques et sur le type de protections individuelles à utiliser. \n\n- 8.3.2 Informations/formalités du personnel et du CUE \n\n- 8.3.1 Procédure pour l'introduction d'un produit sur le site \n\nIl est de la responsabilité de la société de se soumettre à cette procédure et de faire en sorte que son personnel connaisse et applique les recommandations ci-dessous.\n\nPour tout produit utilisé par l'entreprise, les responsables, délégués par leur entreprise, passeront en revue les fiches de données de sécurité (MSDS) avec leur conseiller en prévention et leur service médical (fiche MSDS, conformément à la législation belge et Directive Européenne 92/32/CE et 91/155/CE remplacée par la 2001/58/CE). Si ces derniers émettent un avis favorable, l'ensemble du dossier (avec avis) sera transmis au UP, et éventuellement au Service Médical du CUE, qui transmettront un rapport notifiant l'autorisation d'utiliser ce produit sur le site. \n\nLa personne ayant la responsabilité de la gestion journalière de l'entreprise sous-traitante sur notre site, tiendra à disposition un dossier complet à jour de tous les produits utilisés. Ce dossier reprendra, pour chacun d'eux, le lieu de stockage, les quantités habituellement stockées, les avis émanant de leur société et du CUE (voir § 1), la fiche technique ainsi que la fiche MSDS, conformément à la législation belge et aux Directives Européennes 91/55/CE et 92/32/CE." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9071971841171415, + "doc_id": "3a09ce773527bcda465198827d1884bb719dbf16bc4af9fa3150bea28963725b", + "edit_distance": 0.4909090909090909, + "f1_score": 0.9926289926289926, + "meteor": 0.8017899665235322, + "precision": 0.9950738916256158, + "pred_md": "Contract number: [ complete ]\n\nContract conditions of December 2015\n\nIf no observations have been submitted or if, despite the observations submitted, the contracting authority decides to pursue the recovery procedure, it must confirm recovery by formally notifying a debit note to the contractor, specifying the date of payment. The contractor must pay in accordance with the provisions specified in the debit note.\n\nIf the contractor does not pay by the due date, the contracting authority may, after informing the contractor in writing, recover the amounts due:\n\n- (a) by offsetting them against any amounts owed to the contractor by the European Atomic Energy Community;\n- (b) by calling in a financial guarantee if the contractor has submitted one to the contracting authority;\n- (c) by taking legal action.\n\n## II.21.3 Interest on late payment\n\nIf the contractor does not honour the obligation to pay the amount due by the date set by the contracting authority in the debit note, the amount due bears interest at the rate indicated in Article II.20.8. Interest on late payments will cover the period starting on the day after the due date for payment and ending on the date when the contracting authority receives the full amount owed.\n\nAny partial payment is first entered against charges and interest on late payment and then against the principal amount.\n\n## II.21.4. Recovery rules in the case of joint tender\n\nIf the contract is signed by a group (joint tender), the group is jointly and severally liable under the conditions set out in Article II.6 (liability). The contracting authority first claims the full amount to the leader of the group.\n\nIf the leader does not pay by the due date and if the amount cannot be offset in accordance with Article II.21.2 (a), the contracting authority may claim the full amount to any other member of the group by notifying the debit note already sent to the leader under Article II.21.2.\n\n## II.22. CHECKS AND AUDITS\n\n- II.22.1. The contracting authority and the European Anti-Fraud Office may check or require an audit on the performance of the contract . This may be carried out either by OLAF's own staff or by any other outside body authorised to do so on their behalf.\n\nSuch checks and audits may be initiated at any moment during the provision of the supplies and to five years starting from the the payment of the balance.\n\nThe audit procedure is initiated on the date of receipt of the relevant letter sent by the contracting authority. Audits are carried out on a confidential basis.\n\nII.22.2. The contractor must keep all original documents stored on any appropriate medium, including digitised originals if authorised under national law, for a period of five years starting from the payment of the balance.\n\n31", + "recall": 0.9901960784313726, + "true_md": "Contract number: [ complete ] \n\nContract conditions of December 2015 \n\nIf no observations have been submitted or if, despite the observations submitted, the contracting authority decides to pursue the recovery procedure, it must confirm recovery by formally notifying a debit note to the contractor, specifying the date of payment. The contractor must pay in accordance with the provisions specified in the debit note. \n\nIf the contractor does not pay by the due date, the contracting authority may, after informing the contractor in writing, recover the amounts due: \n\nIf the contractor does not honour the obligation to pay the amount due by the date set by the contracting authority in the debit note, the amount due bears interest at the rate indicated in Article II.20.8. Interest on late payments will cover the period starting on the day after the due date for payment and ending on the date when the contracting authority receives the full amount owed. \n\nAny partial payment is first entered against charges and interest on late payment and then against the principal amount. \n\nIf the contract is signed by a group (joint tender), the group is jointly and severally liable under the conditions set out in Article II.6 (liability). The contracting authority first claims the full amount to the leader of the group.\n\nIf the leader does not pay by the due date and if the amount cannot be offset in accordance with Article II.21.2 (a), the contracting authority may claim the full amount to any other member of the group by notifying the debit note already sent to the leader under Article II.21.2. \n\nSuch checks and audits may be initiated at any moment during the provision of the supplies and to five years starting from the the payment of the balance.\n\nThe audit procedure is initiated on the date of receipt of the relevant letter sent by the contracting authority. Audits are carried out on a confidential basis. \n\n- II.22.2. The contractor must keep all original documents stored on any appropriate medium, including digitised originals if authorised under national law, for a period of five years starting from the payment of the balance.\n\n- II.22.1. The contracting authority and the European Anti-Fraud Office may check or require an audit on the performance of the contract . This may be carried out either by OLAF’s own staff or by any other outside body authorised to do so on their behalf.\n\n## II.22. CHECKS AND AUDITS\n\n## II.21.4. Recovery rules in the case of joint tender\n\n- (a) by offsetting them against any amounts owed to the contractor by the European Atomic Energy Community; (b) by calling in a financial guarantee if the contractor has submitted one to the \n\n- Atomic Energy Community; (b) by calling in a financial guarantee if the contractor has submitted one to the contracting authority; (c) by taking legal action.\n\n- contracting authority; (c) by taking legal action.\n\n## II.21.3 Interest on late payment\n\n31" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "b6bb5da6390bd0c8f70d737e9f581e0ebca0fd602862c0ce1103472b26ec384f", + "edit_distance": 0.9893899204244032, + "f1_score": 0.057971014492753624, + "meteor": 0.046403712296983764, + "precision": 0.03007518796992481, + "pred_md": "TABLE OF CONTENTS\n\nTABLE OF CONTENTS\n\n| 1. | SCOPE AND DESCRIPTION OF THE PROCUREMENT ............................... 4 |\n|------|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|\n| | 1.1 Contracting authority: who is the buyer? ........................................... 4 |\n| | 1.2 Subject: what is this call for tenders about? ..................................... 4 |\n| | 1.3 Lots: is this call for tenders divided into lots? .................................. 5 |\n| | 1.4 Description: what do we want to buy through this call for tenders? .......................................................................................................... 5 |\n| | 1.5 Place of performance: where will the contract be performed? ... 7 |\n| | 1.6 Nature of the contract: how will the contract be implemented? ........................................................................................................................... 7 |\n| | 1.7 Volume and value of the contract: how much do we plan to buy? ................................................................................................................. 9 |\n| | 1.8 Duration of the contract: how long do we plan to use the contract? ...................................................................................................... 10 |\n| | 1.9 Electronic exchange system: can exchanges under the contract be automated? ......................................................................... 10 |\n| 2. | GENERAL INFORMATION ON TENDERING ................................................ 11 |\n| | 2.1 Legal basis: what are the rules? ........................................................... 11 |\n| | 2.2 Rules on access to procurement: who may submit a tender? .. 11 |\n| | 2.3 Registration in the Participant Register: why register? ............... 12 |\n| | 2.4 Ways to submit a tender: how can economic operators organise themselves to submit a tender? ....................................... 13 |\n| 3. | EVALUATION AND AWARD .............................................................................. 17 |\n\n2", + "recall": 0.8, + "true_md": "## TABLE OF CONTENTS\n\n2" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8947255500034884, + "doc_id": "8105a9bba531e5bc9364204dd389146cf0a086e92a783f97ce203436ffcfc159", + "edit_distance": 0.1564245810055866, + "f1_score": 0.9604519774011301, + "meteor": 0.9498023015124613, + "precision": 0.9659090909090909, + "pred_md": "Contract number: [ complete ]\n\nContract conditions of December 2015\n\n## HAVE AGREED\n\nto the special conditions , the general conditions for supply contracts and the following annexes:\n\nAnnex I\n\nTender specifications (reference No [ complete ] of [ insert date ])\n\nAnnex II\n\nContractor's tender (reference No [ complete ] of [ insert date ])\n\n## [ Insert other annexes ]\n\nwhich form an integral part of this contract ('the contract').\n\nThis contract sets out the obligations of the parties during and after the duration of this contract.\n\nAll documents issued by the contractor (end-user agreements, general terms and conditions, etc.) except its tender are held inapplicable, unless explicitly mentioned in the special conditions of this contract. In all circumstances, in the event of contradiction between this contract and documents issued by the contractor, this contract prevails, regardless of any provision to the contrary in the contractor's documents.\n\n2", + "recall": 0.9550561797752809, + "true_md": "Contract conditions of December 2015 \n\nContract number: [ complete ] \n\n## HAVE AGREED\n\nto the special conditions , the general conditions for supply contracts and the following annexes: \n\n- Annex II Contractor’s tender (reference No [ complete ] of [ insert date ]) \n\n- Annex I Tender specifications (reference No [ complete ] of [ insert date ]) \n\n[ Insert other annexes ] \n\nwhich form an integral part of this contract (‘the contract’). \n\nThis contract sets out the obligations of the parties during and after the duration of this contract. \n\nAll documents issued by the contractor (end-user agreements, general terms and conditions, etc.) except its tender are held inapplicable, unless explicitly mentioned in the special conditions of this contract. In all circumstances, in the event of contradiction between this contract and documents issued by the contractor, this contract prevails, regardless of any provision to the contrary in the contractor’s documents. \n\n2" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "d87d58a4730abd08066cdb0e70cb28ad735fa5a740b17c75c4cb850d5e6fb41f", + "edit_distance": 0.1564245810055866, + "f1_score": 0.9604519774011301, + "meteor": 0.9498023015124613, + "precision": 0.9659090909090909, + "pred_md": "Document:\n\nAnnex 2.1 - Overview of\n\nComponents\n\nTender reference number:\n\n2104/C1/D\n\nTitle:\n\nICT racks, cabling and other infrastructure elements\n\n## Reference table used components Europol projects", + "recall": 0.9550561797752809, + "true_md": "" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.810327421683371, + "doc_id": "08727be8d421044d8f1345e79853a231baa211931b23b3128d2c232f9ccd707f", + "edit_distance": 0.17901234567901234, + "f1_score": 0.9473684210526317, + "meteor": 0.8577730775706874, + "precision": 0.9759036144578314, + "pred_md": "## 5 FIELDS OF SPECIALISATION\n\nPlease use the table below to indicate the specialisms relevant to this contract of each legal entity making this tender, by using the names of these specialisms as the row headings and the name of the legal entity as the column headings. Show the relevant specialism(s) of each legal entity by placing a tick (  ) in the box corresponding to those specialisms in which the legal entity has significant experience. [ Maximum 10 specialisms ]\n\n14 add/delete additional lines and/or rows as appropriate. If this tender is being submitted by an individual legal entity, the name of the legal entity should be entered as 'Leader' (and all other columns should be deleted).\n\nAugust 2020\n\nPage 2 of 9\n\nc4l\\_tenderform\\_en.doc", + "recall": 0.9204545454545454, + "true_md": "## 5 FIELDS OF SPECIALISATION Please use the table below to indicate the specialisms relevant to this contract\n\n5 FIELDS OF SPECIALISATION Please use the table below to indicate the specialisms relevant to this contract of each legal entity making this tender, by using the names of these specialisms as the row headings and the name of the legal entity as the column headings. Show the relevant specialism(s) of each legal entity by placing a tick (  ) in the box corresponding to those specialisms in which the legal entity has significant experience. [ Maximum 10 specialisms ] \n\n$^{14}$ add/delete additional lines and/or rows as appropriate. If this tender is being submitted by an individual legal entity, the name of the legal entity should be entered as ‘Leader’ (and all other columns should be deleted). \n\nPage 2 of 9 \n\nAugust 2020 c4l\\_tenderform\\_en.doc" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8924167823965192, + "doc_id": "2f820b59ff9f3652384d278751e1452e45f411a8a74afcfb35db91c7932489e8", + "edit_distance": 0.48807339449541287, + "f1_score": 0.9954751131221719, + "meteor": 0.8521646522004993, + "precision": 0.995475113122172, + "pred_md": "## 1. INTRODUCTION\n\n- 1.1. Les présentes règles, ainsi que les obligations qui en découlent, portent sur la coordination des questions de sécurité, de santé et d'environnement en rapport avec les travaux des entreprises extérieures (chapitre IV de la loi relative au bien-être des travailleurs lors de l'exécution de leur travail - Moniteur belge du 18.9.1996) et sur les chantiers temporaires et mobiles (section V de la même loi).\n- 1.2. L'A.R. du 25/01/2001 (M.B. du 07/02/2001) et ses modifications de l'A.R. du 19/01/2005 concernant les chantiers mobiles et temporaires est d'application.\n- 1.3. Les obligations qui découlent des dispositions du règlement général sur la protection du travail, du règlement général sur les installations électriques, de la Loi sur le Bien-être des travailleurs du 4 août 1996 et des dispositions concernant les permis d'environnement demeurent d'application.\n- 1.4. Toute entreprise qui, dans les bâtiments du Conseil de l'Union européenne (CUE), exécute ou fait exécuter des travaux, ainsi que tout agent présent sur le chantier, doit connaître les présentes règles et les respecter. Toute entreprise est chargée de transmettre ces informations à ses travailleurs ainsi qu'à ses sous-traitants et, au besoin, les leur expliquer.\n- 1.5. L'Unité Prévention (UP) ainsi que le Service Médical possèdent en tout temps le droit:\n- · de contrôler tous les endroits et tous les travaux;\n- · d'interdire l'utilisation de matériel, d'outils ou de méthodes qui ne présentent pas toutes les garanties de sécurité;\n- · si les entreprises exécutantes ne remplissent pas les obligations reprises dans le présent document, le CUE peut prendre lui-même les mesures en matière de bien-être des travailleurs; de même, si le CUE considère que l'exécution des travaux présente une dangerosité inacceptable, il peut faire arrêter ceux-ci sans préavis. Les travaux interrompus ne pourront reprendre qu'après une analyse approfondie des risques, établissant que ces derniers sont éliminés ou que les risques qui subsistent sont acceptés par les services concernés du CUE.\n\n## 2. ORGANISATION DE LA COORDINATION ET DE LA PRÉVENTION\n\n- 2.1 Le gestionnaire de projet du CUE assure la direction de la coordination des questions de sécurité, de santé et d'environnement (SSE) pour l'ensemble des travaux. Les accords conclus entre les différents employeurs en ce qui concerne la SSE doivent d'abord être approuvés par le gestionnaire de projet du CUE.\n- 2.2 Avant d'entamer les travaux, toute entreprise doit au préalable discuter de son plan SSE avec le gestionnaire de projet du CUE et l'UP.\n- 2.3 Au besoin, toute entreprise peut s'adresser au UP pour obtenir des informations complémentaires en ce qui concerne la coordination des questions de SSE.\n\n68\n\nANNEX VII\n\nFR", + "recall": 0.995475113122172, + "true_md": "## 1. INTRODUCTION\n\n- 1.1. Les présentes règles, ainsi que les obligations qui en découlent, portent sur la coordination des questions de sécurité, de santé et d'environnement en rapport avec les travaux des entreprises extérieures (chapitre IV de la loi relative au bien-être des travailleurs lors de l'exécution de leur travail - Moniteur belge du 18.9.1996) et sur les chantiers temporaires et mobiles (section V de la même loi). \n\n- 1.2. L'A.R. du 25/01/2001 (M.B. du 07/02/2001) et ses modifications de l'A.R. du 19/01/2005 concernant les chantiers mobiles et temporaires est d'application. \n\n- 1.3. Les obligations qui découlent des dispositions du règlement général sur la protection du travail, du règlement général sur les installations électriques, de la Loi sur le Bien-être des travailleurs du 4 août 1996 et des dispositions concernant les permis d'environnement demeurent d'application. \n\n- 1.4. Toute entreprise qui, dans les bâtiments du Conseil de l'Union européenne (CUE), exécute ou fait exécuter des travaux, ainsi que tout agent présent sur le chantier, doit connaître les présentes règles et les respecter. Toute entreprise est chargée de transmettre ces informations à ses travailleurs ainsi qu'à ses sous-traitants et, au besoin, les leur expliquer. \n\n- 1.5. L'Unité Prévention (UP) ainsi que le Service Médical possèdent en tout temps le droit: \n\n- 2.1 Le gestionnaire de projet du CUE assure la direction de la coordination des questions de sécurité, de santé et d'environnement (SSE) pour l'ensemble des travaux. Les accords conclus entre les différents employeurs en ce qui concerne la SSE doivent d'abord être approuvés par le gestionnaire de projet du CUE. \n\n- 2.2 Avant d'entamer les travaux, toute entreprise doit au préalable discuter de son plan SSE avec le gestionnaire de projet du CUE et l'UP. \n\n- 2.3 Au besoin, toute entreprise peut s'adresser au UP pour obtenir des informations complémentaires en ce qui concerne la coordination des questions de SSE. \n\n## 2. ORGANISATION DE LA COORDINATION ET DE LA PRÉVENTION\n\n- • de contrôler tous les endroits et tous les travaux; • d'interdire l'utilisation de matériel, d'outils ou de méthodes qui ne présentent pas \n\n- de contrôler tous les endroits et tous les travaux; • d'interdire l'utilisation de matériel, d'outils ou de méthodes qui ne présentent pas toutes les garanties de sécurité; • si les entreprises exécutantes ne remplissent pas les obligations reprises dans le \n\n- toutes les garanties de sécurité; • si les entreprises exécutantes ne remplissent pas les obligations reprises dans le présent document, le CUE peut prendre lui-même les mesures en matière de bien-être des travailleurs; de même, si le CUE considère que l'exécution des travaux présente une dangerosité inacceptable, il peut faire arrêter ceux-ci sans préavis. Les travaux interrompus ne pourront reprendre qu'après une analyse approfondie des risques, établissant que ces derniers sont éliminés ou que les risques qui subsistent sont acceptés par les services concernés du CUE. \n\n68 FR \n\n68 FR \n\nANNEX VII" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9066552214104989, + "doc_id": "bbc366d96414f2ceb718c52bce32c68e0d2fc774e9bc2ae791ed69df7a71fb4e", + "edit_distance": 0.1016949152542373, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9938130505997542, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "ANNEX VII\n\nANNEXE VII\n\n## REGLES ET CONSIGNES EN MATIERE DE PREVENTION\n\n## A L'ATTENTION DES ENTREPRISES EXTERIEURES TRAVAILLANT AU SEIN DE L'INSTITUTION\n\n## Unité Prévention (UP)\n\nTel. +32 (0)2 281 54 00 - Fax +32 (0)2 281 88 30\n\nEmail: safety.unit@consilium.europa.eu\n\n1\n\nFR", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "ANNEXE VII \n\n## REGLES ET CONSIGNES EN MATIERE DE PREVENTION\n\n## A L'ATTENTION DES ENTREPRISES EXTERIEURES TRAVAILLANT AU SEIN DE L'INSTITUTION\n\nUnité Prévention (UP) Tel. +32 (0)2 281 54 00 - Fax +32 (0)2 281 88 30 Email: safety.unit@consilium.europa.eu\n\nANNEX VII \n\n1 FR" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9626906450056539, + "doc_id": "b8fa8a1dbbb125760977f352fd18e7ce1beb552a1aab32c2c9caf6f3c973a6b9", + "edit_distance": 0.4808080808080808, + "f1_score": 0.9954954954954955, + "meteor": 0.9464799254880427, + "precision": 0.9954954954954955, + "pred_md": "- 1. A section that describes the party owning and/or using the chemical substance. This section includes administrative information about the company including company contacts, company site information and geographic locations. This section also includes information on the volumes of the substance in question, by tonnage. Some of these attributes are free text data types, but the information is structured.\n- 2. A section describing the substance itself. This section describes the substance/substance mixtures/compositions, by means of identifiers that correspond to international de facto standards, e.g. CAS Number, EC Number, IUPAC name, and molecular and structural formulae. Note that there could be multiple substances described e.g. in the case of a mixture or composition, in nested sections under section 2. Such subsections will have the same structure and format as the top-level section 2.\n- 3. A section providing information about the substance, that we describe as endpoints, meaning reports of physiochemical properties, examinations, or blood tests, research reports or similar, which are unstructured.\n\nThe new data source is volatile in the sense that it is subject to changes in data structure, content and meaning.\n\nThe current volume of the new data source is ~ 500GB, and is expected to grow moderately, by ~15% year on year over the next 10 years. There is an average record size of ~150KB, but this can vary significantly from a few tens of KB to several tens of MB depending on the number and type of endpoint data included.\n\nThe data source provides as a service, events that signal when the data has been updated, once every 1000 records.\n\n## Requirements\n\n- · The new data source is to be made available through a common data store, which will make the new data source available to the data processing systems, considering the specific, differing needs of each component listed in section Background above.\n- · Considering the volatile nature of the data source, the solution should be robust, configurable and extensible over time\n- · The common data store should employ mechanisms to minimise the impact of changes in the data source in terms of the need to refactor the consuming systems of the data platform\n- · The common data store should be able to accommodate additional data sources in the future, which may feature NoSQL, relational, unstructured data stores\n- · The common data store should collect appropriate metadata on the data source and include mechanisms to make this available to the consuming systems of the data platform\n- · The solution proposed should employ appropriate security mechanisms to ensure access to the source data is restricted to the consuming systems of the ECHA data\n\n35", + "recall": 0.9954954954954955, + "true_md": "- 1. A section that describes the party owning and/or using the chemical substance. This section includes administrative information about the company including company contacts, company site information and geographic locations. This section also includes information on the volumes of the substance in question, by tonnage. Some of these attributes are free text data types, but the information is structured. \n\n- 2. A section describing the substance itself. This section describes the substance/substance mixtures/compositions, by means of identifiers that correspond to international de facto standards, e.g. CAS Number, EC Number, IUPAC name, and molecular and structural formulae. Note that there could be multiple substances described e.g. in the case of a mixture or composition, in nested sections under section 2. Such subsections will have the same structure and format as the top-level section 2. \n\n- 3. A section providing information about the substance, that we describe as endpoints, meaning reports of physiochemical properties, examinations, or blood tests, research reports or similar, which are unstructured. \n\n- • The new data source is to be made available through a common data store, which will make the new data source available to the data processing systems, considering the specific, differing needs of each component listed in section Background above. \n\n- • Considering the volatile nature of the data source, the solution should be robust, configurable and extensible over time \n\n- • The common data store should employ mechanisms to minimise the impact of changes in the data source in terms of the need to refactor the consuming systems of the data platform \n\n- • The common data store should be able to accommodate additional data sources in the future, which may feature NoSQL, relational, unstructured data stores \n\n- • The common data store should collect appropriate metadata on the data source and include mechanisms to make this available to the consuming systems of the data platform \n\n- • The solution proposed should employ appropriate security mechanisms to ensure access to the source data is restricted to the consuming systems of the ECHA data \n\n35\n\n## Requirements\n\nThe new data source is volatile in the sense that it is subject to changes in data structure, content and meaning. \n\nThe current volume of the new data source is ~ 500GB, and is expected to grow moderately, by ~15% year on year over the next 10 years. There is an average record size of ~150KB, but this can vary significantly from a few tens of KB to several tens of MB depending on the number and type of endpoint data included. \n\nThe data source provides as a service, events that signal when the data has been updated, once every 1000 records." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8348928359808881, + "doc_id": "ccba8934a032d6eb61b7f71fd87c98e16e4f732a043e030bdd30b1141a8d7ac4", + "edit_distance": 0.5238095238095238, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9653916211293262, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## EUOSHA/2021/OP/F/SE/0142\n\n## List of EU-OSHA websites, social media accounts and e-tools\n\n## For main reference\n\n1", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "EUOSHA/2021/OP/F/SE/0142 \n\n## For main reference\n\n1 \n\n# List of EU-OSHA websites, social media accounts and e-tools" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "683d595f248631c007e6a7e00a1bd71078de9dab307634c865bb9bed81f7ff7f", + "edit_distance": 0.5238095238095238, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9653916211293262, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9424687956603028, + "doc_id": "bc9e4833c1f9a9c91f7ef6c1bb6452a06be2e33913b78d0f5c1de18dbb19f14e", + "edit_distance": 0.4387755102040816, + "f1_score": 0.9900990099009901, + "meteor": 0.8919943535390562, + "precision": 0.9933774834437086, + "pred_md": "Contract number: [ complete ]\n\nContract conditions of December 2015\n\n## II.15.2. Procedure\n\nThe contracting authority must formally notify the contractor of its intention to reduce payment and the corresponding calculated amount.\n\nThe contractor has 30 days following the date of receipt to submit observations. Failing that, the decision becomes enforceable the day after the time limit for submitting observations has elapsed.\n\nIf the contractor submits observations, the contracting authority, taking into account the relevant observations, must notify the contractor:\n\n- (a) of the withdrawal of its intention to reduce payment; or\n- (b) of its final decision to reduce payment and the corresponding amount.\n\n## II.15.3. Claims and liability\n\nAny reduction in price does not affect the contractor's actual or potential liability or the contracting authority's rights under Article II.17.\n\n## II.16. SUSPENSION OF THE PERFORMANCE OF THE CONTRACT\n\n## II.16.1. Suspension by the contractor\n\nIf the contractor is affected by force majeure, it may suspend the performance of the contract .\n\nThe contractor must immediately notify the contracting authority about the suspension. The notification must include a description of the force majeure and state when the contractor expects to resume the performance of the contract.\n\nThe contractor must notify the contracting authority as soon as it is able to resume performance of the contract, unless the contracting authority has already terminated the contract.\n\n## II.16.2. Suspension by the contracting authority\n\nThe contracting authority may suspend the performance of the contrac t or any part of it:\n\n- (a) if the procedure for awarding the contract or the performance of the contract proves to have been subject to substantial errors, irregularities or fraud ;\n- (b) in order to verify whether the presumed substantial errors, irregularities or fraud have actually occurred.\n\nThe contracting authority must formally notify the contractor of the suspension. Suspension takes effect on the day of formal notification , or at a later date if the formal notification so provides.\n\nThe contracting authority must notify the contractor as soon as possible whether:\n\n- (a) it is lifting the suspension; or\n\n24", + "recall": 0.9868421052631579, + "true_md": "Contract number: [ complete ] \n\nContract conditions of December 2015 \n\n## II.15.2. Procedure\n\n## II.15.3. Claims and liability\n\n## II.16.1. Suspension by the contractor\n\n## II.16. SUSPENSION OF THE PERFORMANCE OF THE CONTRACT\n\n## II.16.2. Suspension by the contracting authority\n\nThe contracting authority must formally notify the contractor of its intention to reduce payment and the corresponding calculated amount.\n\nThe contractor has 30 days following the date of receipt to submit observations. Failing that, the decision becomes enforceable the day after the time limit for submitting observations has elapsed.\n\nIf the contractor submits observations, the contracting authority, taking into account the relevant observations, must notify the contractor:\n\nAny reduction in price does not affect the contractor’s actual or potential liability or the contracting authority’s rights under Article II.17. \n\nIf the contractor is affected by force majeure, it may suspend the performance of the contract .\n\nThe contractor must immediately notify the contracting authority about the suspension. The notification must include a description of the force majeure and state when the contractor expects to resume the performance of the contract.\n\nThe contractor must notify the contracting authority as soon as it is able to resume performance of the contract, unless the contracting authority has already terminated the contract.\n\n(a) if the procedure for awarding the contract or the performance of the contract proves to have been subject to substantial errors, irregularities or fraud ;\n\nThe contracting authority may suspend the performance of the contrac t or any part of it: \n\n(b) in order to verify whether the presumed substantial errors, irregularities or fraud have actually occurred.\n\nThe contracting authority must formally notify the contractor of the suspension. Suspension takes effect on the day of formal notification , or at a later date if the formal notification so provides.\n\nThe contracting authority must notify the contractor as soon as possible whether: \n\n24 \n\n- (a) it is lifting the suspension; or \n\n- (a) of the withdrawal of its intention to reduce payment; or\n\n- (b) of its final decision to reduce payment and the corresponding amount." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9044516748183061, + "doc_id": "e5d28d650563176e9cf5b1fc27d9d6312005aef444e8a723460fc0e46eea053a", + "edit_distance": 0.21568627450980393, + "f1_score": 0.98989898989899, + "meteor": 0.9422332646334062, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "European Union Agency for Cybersecurity Vasilissis Sofias Str 1 151 24 Maroussi | Attiki | Greece Tel: +30 28 14 40 9711 Email: procurement@enisa.europa.eu\n\nwww.enisa.europa.eu\n\n## INVITATION TO TENDER\n\n## Title: Development & Support of Infrastructure & Services related to EU Cyber Crisis Cooperation\n\nLot 1: Development of Material for Exercises, Challenges and Trainings\n\nLot 2: Provision of infrastructure for Operational Cooperation and exercises\n\nLot 3: Audio-visual material development, Journalistic, Public Affairs and Back Office Support\n\nReference:\n\nENISA F-COD-20-T03\n\nProcurement procedure:\n\nOpen call for tender (with three (3) Lots)\n\nExpiry date and time:\n\n13 th March 2020 at 18:00 (CET) Central European time\n\nDear Madam/Sir,\n\nThe European Union Agency for Cybersecurity (ENISA) referred to below as the contracting authority, is planning to award the contract(s) resulting from the above procurement procedure. The procurement documents consist of the contract notice, this invitation letter, the draft contract(s) and tender specifications with their respective annexes. All documents are available at the following TED e-Tendering website 1 :\n\n## https://etendering.ted.europa.eu/cft/cft-display.html?cftId=5999\n\nEconomic operators interested in this contract are invited to submit a tender in one of the official languages of the European Union.\n\n## 1. Submission of tenders.\n\nTenders must be submitted exclusively via the electronic submission system (e-Submission) available from the above website and accessible on the Funding and Tenders Opportunities portal (F&T 2 portal) , Tenders submitted in any other way (e.g. e-mail or by letter) will be disregarded. 3\n\nIn order to submit a tender using e-Submission, economic operators (each member of the group in the case of a joint tender) will need to register in the European Commission's Participant Register an online register of organisations participating in EU calls for tenders or proposals. On registering each organisation obtains a Participant Identification Code (PIC, 9-digit number) which acts as its\n\n1 Subscription to the call for tender at the above link allows interested economic operators to receive e-mail notifications when new information or documents are published. Subscription is free of charge and does not involve any commitment to submit a tender.\n\n2 For detailed instructions on how to submit a tender please consult the e-Submission Quick Guide available at: https://webgate.ec.europa.eu/digit/opsys/esubmission/assets/documents/manual/quickGuide\\_en.pdf.\n\nThe supported browsers, file types, size of attachments and other system requirements can be consulted at: https://webgate.ec.europa.eu/fpfis/wikis/x/f6dqEg. In case of technical problems, please contact the e-Submission Helpdesk (see contact details in the e-Submission Quick Guide) as soon as possible.\n\n3 https://ec.europa.eu/info/funding-tenders/opportunities/portal/screen/home", + "recall": 0.98, + "true_md": "# INVITATION TO TENDER Title: Development & Support of Infrastructure & Services related to EU Cyber Crisis Cooperation Lot 1: Development of Material for Exercises, Challenges and Trainings Lot 2: Provision of infrastructure for Operational Cooperation and exercises Lot 3: Audio-visual material development, Journalistic, Public Affairs and Back Office Support\n\n- Reference: ENISA F-COD-20-T03\n\n- Procurement procedure: Open call for tender (with three (3) Lots) \n\n- Expiry date and time: 13$^{th}$ March 2020 at 18:00 (CET) Central European time\n\nDear Madam/Sir, \n\nThe European Union Agency for Cybersecurity (ENISA) referred to below as the contracting authority, is planning to award the contract(s) resulting from the above procurement procedure. The procurement documents consist of the contract notice, this invitation letter, the draft contract(s) and tender specifications with their respective annexes. All documents are available at the following TED e-Tendering website$^{1}$:\n\nhttps://etendering.ted.europa.eu/cft/cft-display.html?cftId=5999 \n\nEconomic operators interested in this contract are invited to submit a tender in one of the official languages of the European Union.\n\nTenders must be submitted exclusively via the electronic submission system (e-Submission) available from the above website 2 and accessible on the Funding and Tenders Opportunities portal (F&T portal)$^{3}$, Tenders submitted in any other way (e.g. e-mail or by letter) will be disregarded. \n\n## 1. Submission of tenders.\n\nIn order to submit a tender using e-Submission, economic operators (each member of the group in the case of a joint tender) will need to register in the European Commission's Participant Register - an online register of organisations participating in EU calls for tenders or proposals. On registering each organisation obtains a Participant Identification Code (PIC, 9-digit number) which acts as its \n\n$^{1}$ Subscription to the call for tender at the above link allows interested economic operators to receive e-mail notifications when new information or documents are published. Subscription is free of charge and does not involve any commitment to submit a tender.\n\n2 For detailed instructions on how to submit a tender please consult the e-Submission Quick Guide available at: https://webgate.ec.europa.eu/digit/opsys/esubmission/assets/documents/manual/quickGuide\\_en.pdf. \n\nThe supported browsers, file types, size of attachments and other system requirements can be consulted at: https://webgate.ec.europa.eu/fpfis/wikis/x/f6dqEg. In case of technical problems, please contact the e-Submission Helpdesk (see contact details in the e-Submission Quick Guide) as soon as possible. \n\n$^{3}$ https://ec.europa.eu/info/funding-tenders/opportunities/portal/screen/home \n\nEuropean Union Agency for Cybersecurity Vasilissis Sofias Str 1 151 24 Maroussi | Attiki | Greece Tel: +30 28 14 40 9711 Email: procurement@enisa.europa.eu www.enisa.europa.eu" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5847065326973129, + "doc_id": "673443329e7766e5a71c8f91616ae984149e74f926c5857b26bf235e7bcd6c3e", + "edit_distance": 0.3125, + "f1_score": 0.8571428571428572, + "meteor": 0.8108006890869598, + "precision": 0.9230769230769231, + "pred_md": "## PRÉVENTION (Points d'indemnité appliqués par infraction)\n\n40\n\nANNEXE III\n\nFR", + "recall": 0.8, + "true_md": "## PRÉVENTION (Points d’indemnité appliqués par infraction)\n\n40 FR\n\nANNEXE III" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6860966184273023, + "doc_id": "7399838f6b46b0b7922eb95e09cae67c1ed03290070262ed648ad012b2f26b37", + "edit_distance": 0.25326797385620914, + "f1_score": 0.9616368286445012, + "meteor": 0.7956824975091332, + "precision": 0.9791666666666666, + "pred_md": "## SERVICE CONTRACT NO AA-000799-002\n\n## FINANCED FROM NEIGHBOURHOOD INVESTMENT PLATFORM\n\n## MADE BETWEEN:\n\nThe European Investment Bank, having its head office at 100, Boulevard Konrad Adenauer, L-2950 Luxembourg, Grand Duchy of Luxembourg, (the ' Contracting Authority '),\n\nand\n\n[ Option 1 ]< full official name of the Consultant > < ISO country code >, < Legal status/title > , < 1 Official registration number > , < 2 Full official address >, < VAT number > 3 OR\n\n[ Option 2 ]the consortium composed of < full official name and ISO country code of each of the members of the consortium >, led and represented by < full official name of the Leader > < ISO country code >, < Legal status/title > , < 4 Official registration number > , < 5 Full official address >, < VAT number > , (the 6 ' Consultant ')\n\nWHEREAS:\n\n- A. By a finance contract dated 19 December 2016, the Contracting Authority made available to Ukraine a credit in amount of up to EUR 150,000,000 (one hundred and fifty million euros) (the ' Finance Contract ').\n- B. The Contracting Authority has concluded, on 7 February 2018, Cooperation Agreement with Public Joint Stock Company \"Ukrainian railways\" (JSC 'Ukrzaliznytsia') (the ' Promoter ') in relation to this technical assistance operation (the ' Cooperation Agreement ');\n- C. In connection with the Finance Contract and the Cooperation Agreement, the Contracting Authority and the Consultant have agreed to enter into this Service Contract (the ' Contract ') on the terms and conditions set out below.\n\n## SPECIAL CONDITIONS\n\n## (1) Subject\n\nThe subject of this Contract, with identification number AA-000799-002, and titled 'Technical Assistance to Ukrainian Railways to support the implementation of the Ukraine Railway Modernisation Project' , is the performance of the services as further described in Annex II (the 'Services') to be implemented in Ukraine.\n\n## (2) Structure of the Contract\n\n1 Where the contracting party is an individual.\n\n2 Where applicable. For individuals, mention their ID card or passport or equivalent document - number\n\n3 Except where the contracting party is not VAT registered.\n\n4 Where the contracting party is an individual.\n\n- 5 Where applicable. For individuals, mention their ID card or passport or equivalent document - number\n\n6 Except where the contracting party is not VAT registered.\n\nTACONT\n\nPage 1 of 7", + "recall": 0.9447236180904522, + "true_md": "# SERVICE CONTRACT NO AA-000799-002 FINANCED FROM NEIGHBOURHOOD INVESTMENT PLATFORM\n\nThe European Investment Bank, having its head office at 100, Boulevard Konrad Adenauer, L-2950 Luxembourg, Grand Duchy of Luxembourg, (the “ Contracting Authority ”), \n\nand\n\n[ Option 1 ]< full official name of the Consultant > < ISO country code >, < Legal status/title >$^{1}$, < Official registration number >$^{2}$, < Full official address >, < VAT number >$^{3}$ OR\n\n[ Option 2 ]the consortium composed of < full official name and ISO country code of each of the members of the consortium >, led and represented by < full official name of the Leader > < ISO country code >, < Legal status/title >$^{4}$, < Official registration number >$^{5}$, < Full official address >, < VAT number >$^{6}$, (the “ Consultant ”)\n\n## WHEREAS:\n\n## MADE BETWEEN:\n\n- A. By a finance contract dated 19 December 2016, the Contracting Authority made available to Ukraine a credit in amount of up to EUR 150,000,000 (one hundred and fifty million euros) (the “ Finance Contract ’). \n\n- B. The Contracting Authority has concluded, on 7 February 2018, Cooperation Agreement with Public Joint Stock Company \"Ukrainian railways\" (JSC “Ukrzaliznytsia”) (the “ Promoter ”) in relation to this technical assistance operation (the “ Cooperation Agreement ”); \n\n- C. In connection with the Finance Contract and the Cooperation Agreement, the Contracting Authority and the Consultant have agreed to enter into this Service Contract (the “ Contract ”) on the terms and conditions set out below. \n\n## SPECIAL CONDITIONS\n\n## (1) Subject\n\n## (2) Structure of the Contract\n\nThe subject of this Contract, with identification number AA-000799-002, and titled “Technical Assistance to Ukrainian Railways to support the implementation of the Ukraine Railway Modernisation Project” , is the performance of the services as further described in Annex II (the “Services”) to be implemented in Ukraine. \n\n1 Where the contracting party is an individual. 2\n\nWhere the contracting party is an individual. 2 Where applicable. For individuals, mention their ID card or passport or equivalent document - number 3\n\nWhere applicable. For individuals, mention their ID card or passport or equivalent document - number 3 Except where the contracting party is not VAT registered. 4\n\nExcept where the contracting party is not VAT registered. 4 Where the contracting party is an individual. 5\n\nWhere the contracting party is an individual. 5 Where applicable. For individuals, mention their ID card or passport or equivalent document - number 6\n\nWhere applicable. For individuals, mention their ID card or passport or equivalent document - number 6 Except where the contracting party is not VAT registered. \n\nPage 1 of 7 \n\nTACONT \n\nCC number" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7983399621725947, + "doc_id": "899304d935c7f11f486a32aad9dcfac57b42db49fc6ec1e1cd93a0207a2ac4af", + "edit_distance": 0.8472222222222222, + "f1_score": 0.9859154929577465, + "meteor": 0.666619807558866, + "precision": 0.9859154929577465, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS O&ROT-SO APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYl.NG\n\ninvitation for trouble of many sorts. The normal and emergency procedures applicable to each specific airplane will insure the proper operation of the equipment.\n\n- (3) Operating Limitatiom. The operation of the airplane and powerplant must be conducted within the established limitations. Failure to do so will invite failure or malfunction of the equipment and increase the operating cost or possibly cause an accident.\n- (4) Flight Characteristics. While all aircraft will have certain minimum requirements for flying qualities, the actual peculiarities and special features of specific airplanes will differ. These particular flight characteristics must be well known and understood by the pilot.\n- (5) Operating Data. The performance of each specific airplane defines its application to various uses and missions. The handbook operating data must be available at all times to properly plan and elnccate the flight of an aircraft. Constant reference to the operating data will insure safe and effective operation of the airplane.\n\nGreat time and effort are expended in the preparation of the flight handbook to provide the most exact information, data, and procedures. Diligent study and continuous UC of the flight handbook will ensure that the greatest effectiveness is achieved from the airplane while still operating within the inherent capabilities of the design.\n\n412\n\n1", + "recall": 0.9859154929577465, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS O&ROT-SO APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYl.NG \n\n(5) Operating Data. The performance of each specific airplane defines its application to various uses and missions. The handbook operating data must be available at all times to properly plan and elnccate the flight of an aircraft. Constant reference to the operating data will insure safe and effective operation of the airplane. Great time and effort are expended in the 1 \n\nof the airplane. Great time and effort are expended in the 1 preparation of the flight handbook to provide the most exact information, data, and pro- cedures. Diligent study and continuous UC of the flight handbook will ensure that the greatest effectiveness is achieved from the airplane while still operating within the inherent capabilities of the design. \n\ninvitation for trouble of many sorts. The normal and emergency procedures applicable to each specific airplane will insure the proper operation of the equipment. (3) Operating Limitatiom. The operation of \n\nproper operation of the equipment. (3) Operating Limitatiom. The operation of the airplane and powerplant must be conducted within the established limitations. Failure to do so will invite failure or malfunction of the equipment and increase the operating cost or possibly cause an accident. (4) Flight Characteristics. While all aircraft \n\nor possibly cause an accident. (4) Flight Characteristics. While all aircraft will have certain minimum requirements for flying qualities, the actual peculiarities and special features of specific airplanes will differ. These particular flight characteristics must be well known and understood by the pilot. \n\n412" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4200970045853849, + "doc_id": "69e8e2dbb460892742cc98e0015b4f7d6ca7af4e1a71a4874eee8e4a22d41ec4", + "edit_distance": 0.5384615384615384, + "f1_score": 0.8888888888888888, + "meteor": 0.8789386401326702, + "precision": 0.8, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS 00-ROT-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL\n\nNEUTRAL STATIC STABILITY\n\nNEUTRAL STATIC STABILITY\n\nFigure 4.3. Stability and Control/ability\n\nFigure 4.3. Stability and Control/ability\n\n248", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-ROT-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL \n\nFigure 4.3. Stability and Control/ability \n\n248" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5249325939883762, + "doc_id": "39102681ee049ded2bbe22b48935f4210bf80b2c0c164223cc3a9454092dbace", + "edit_distance": 0.39285714285714285, + "f1_score": 0.8, + "meteor": 0.7270072992700731, + "precision": 0.9, + "pred_md": "FAA Chart Users' Guide - VFR Symbology - Sectional and Terminal Area Charts\n\n## BOUNDARIES CULTURE (Continued)\n\n36", + "recall": 0.72, + "true_md": "36$^{Time Zones}$\n\nFAA Chart Users’ Guide - VFR Symbology - Sectional and Terminal Area Charts\n\n## CULTURE (Continued)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8611529558425222, + "doc_id": "0cc41f87459b50252ca87a91ab49c060231ea3b082751b6c01c1939fb2bef3f7", + "edit_distance": 0.4899328859060403, + "f1_score": 0.9505703422053231, + "meteor": 0.724102117490761, + "precision": 0.9803921568627451, + "pred_md": "of oscillation which coincide with the pilotcontrol system response lag. Also, the high 4 flight condition provides the aerodynamic capability for failing flight loads during the oscillation.\n\nIf a pilot induced oscillation is encountered the pilot must rely on the inherent dynamic stability of the airplane and immediately release the controls. If the unstable excitation is continued, dangerous oscillation amplitudes will develop in a very short time.\n\n## ROLL COUPLING\n\nThe appearance of ' inertia coupling' problems in modern airplanes was the natural result of the progressive change in aerodynamic and inertia characteristics to meet the demands of high speed flight. Inertia coupling problems were unexpected only when dynamic stability analyses did not adequately account for the rapid changes in aerodynamic and inertia characteristics of airplane configurations. The The term of ' intertia coupling' is somewhat misleading because the complete problem is one of aerodynamic as well as inertia coupling.\n\n' Coupling' results when some disturbance about one airplane axis causes a disturbance about another axis. An example of uncoupled motion is the disturbance provided an airplane when subjected to an elevator deflection. The resulting motion is restricted to pitching motion without disturbance in yaw or roll. An example of, coupled motion could be the disturbance provided an airplane when subjected to rudder deflection. The ensuing motion can be some combination of yawing and rolling motion. Hence, the rolling motion is coupled with the yawing motion to define the resulting motion. This sort of interaction results from aerodynamic characteristics and is termed ' aerodynamic coupling.'\n\nA separate type of coupling results from the inertia characteristics of the airplane conliguration. The inertia characteristics of the complete airplane can be divided into the roll, yaw,\n\n315\n\nNAVWEPS OO-SOT-80\n\n## STABILITY AND CONTROL\n\nand pitch inertia and each inertia is a measure of the resistance to rolling, yawing, or pitching acceleration of the airplane. The long,slender, high-density fuselage with short, thin wings produces a roll inertia which is quite small in comparison to the pitch and yaw inertia. These characteristics are typical of the modern airplane configuration. The more conventional low speed airplane may have a wingspan greater than the fuselage length. This type of configuration produces a relatively large roll inertia. A comparison of these configurations is shown in figure 4.34.\n\nInertia coupling can be illustrated by considering the mass of the airplane to be concentrated in two elements, one representing the mass ahead of the c.g. and one representing the mass behind the c.g. There are two principal axis systems to consider: (1) the aerodynamic, or wind axis is through the c.g. in the relative wind direction, and (2) the inertia axis is through the c.g. in the direction of the two element masses. This axis system is illustrated in figure 4.34.\n\nIf the airplane shown in figure 4.34 were in some flight condition where the inertia axis and the aerodynamic axis are alined, no inertia coupling would result from rolling motion. However, if the inertia axis is inclined to the aerodynamic axis, rotation about the aerodynamic axis will create centrifugal forces and cause a pitching moment. In this case, a rolling motion of the aircraft induces a pitching moment through the action of inertia forces. This is ' inertia coupling' and is illustrated by part B of figure 4.34.\n\nWhen the airplane is rotated about the inertia axis no inertia coupling will exist but aerodynamic coupling will be present. Part C of figure 4.34 shows the airplane after rolling 90' about the inertia axis. The inclination which was initially the angle of attack (a) is now the angle of sideslip (-6). Also the original zero sideslip has now become zero angle of attack. The sideslip induced by this 90° displacement will affect the roll rate", + "recall": 0.922509225092251, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OO-SOT-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL \n\nof oscillation which coincide with the pilot- control system response lag. Also, the high 4 flight condition provides the aerodynamic capability for failing flight loads during the oscillation. \n\nIf a pilot induced oscillation is encountered the pilot must rely on the inherent dynamic stability of the airplane and immediately release the controls. If the unstable excitation is continued, dangerous oscillation amplitudes will develop in a very short time. \n\n## ROLL COUPLING\n\nThe appearance of “inertia coupling” prob- lems in modern airplanes was the natural result of the progressive change in aerodynamic and inertia characteristics to meet the demands of high speed flight. Inertia coupling problems were unexpected only when dynamic stability analyses did not adequately account for the rapid changes in aerodynamic and inertia characteristics of airplane configurations. The The term of “intertia coupling” is somewhat misleading because the complete problem is one of aerodynamic as well as inertia coupling. “Coupling” \n\none of aerodynamic as well as inertia coupling. “Coupling” results when some disturbance about one airplane axis causes a disturbance about another axis. An example of uncoupled motion is the disturbance provided an airplane when subjected to an elevator deflection. The resulting motion is restricted to pitching motion without disturbance in yaw or roll. \n\nAn example of, coupled motion could be the disturbance provided an airplane when sub- jected to rudder deflection. The ensuing mo- tion can be some combination of yawing and rolling motion. Hence, the rolling motion is coupled with the yawing motion to define the resulting motion. This sort of interaction results from aerodynamic characteristics and is termed “aerodynamic coupling.” \n\nA separate type of coupling results from the inertia characteristics of the airplane conligura- tion. The inertia characteristics of the com- plete airplane can be divided into the roll, yaw, \n\n315 \n\nWhen the airplane is rotated about the inertia axis no inertia coupling will exist but aerodynamic coupling will be present. Part C of figure 4.34 shows the airplane after rolling 90” about the inertia axis. The inclination which was initially the angle of attack (a) is now the angle of sideslip (-6). Also the original zero sideslip has now become zero angle of attack. The sideslip induced by this 90° displacement will affect the roll rate \n\ntrated in figure 4.34. If the airplane shown in figure 4.34 were in some flight condition where the inertia axis and the aerodynamic axis are alined, no inertia coupling would result from rolling motion. \n\nHowever, if the inertia axis is inclined to the aerodynamic axis, rotation about the aero- dynamic axis will create centrifugal forces and cause a pitching moment. In this case, a rolling motion of the aircraft induces a pitch- ing moment through the action of inertia forces. This is “inertia coupling” and is illustrated by part B of figure 4.34. \n\nInertia coupling can be illustrated by con- sidering the mass of the airplane to be con- centrated in two elements, one representing the mass ahead of the c.g. and one representing the mass behind the c.g. There are two principal axis systems to consider: (1) the aerodynamic, or wind axis is through the c.g. in the relative wind direction, and (2) the inertia axis is through the c.g. in the direction of the two element masses. This axis system is illus- trated in figure 4.34. If the airplane shown in figure 4.34 were in \n\nand pitch inertia and each inertia is a measure of the resistance to rolling, yawing, or pitching acceleration of the airplane. The long,slender, high-density fuselage with short, thin wings produces a roll inertia which is quite small in comparison to the pitch and yaw inertia. These characteristics are typical of the modern \n\ncomparison to the pitch and yaw inertia. These characteristics are typical of the modern airplane configuration. The more conventional low speed airplane may have a wingspan greater than the fuselage length. This type of configuration produces a relatively large roll inertia. A comparison of these configurations is shown in figure 4.34." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9444978380166599, + "doc_id": "0d79c27da7d5f8252fa3458ac7cb96610694e2877167beefe33e073d8d326cc1", + "edit_distance": 0.03431372549019608, + "f1_score": 0.9723320158102766, + "meteor": 0.9764157778055931, + "precision": 0.984, + "pred_md": "## RADIO AIDS TO NAVIGATION\n\nAll IFR radio NAVAIDs that have been flight checked and are operational are shown on all IFR Enroute Charts. Very High Frequency/Ultrahigh Frequency (VHF/UHF) NAVAIDs, Very high frequency Omnidirectional Radio range (VORs), Tactical Air Navigation (TACANs) are shown in black, and Low Frequency/Medium Frequency (LF/MF) NAVAIDs, (Compass Locators and Aeronautical or Marine NDBs) are shown in brown.\n\nOn IFR Enroute Charts, information about NAVAIDs is boxed as illustrated below. To avoid duplication of data, when two or more NAVAIDs in a general area have the same name, the name is usually printed only once inside an identification box with the frequencies, TACAN channel numbers, identification letters, or Morse Code Identifications of the different NAVAIDs are shown in appropriate colors.\n\nNAVAIDs in a shutdown status have the frequency and channel number crosshatched. Use of the NAVAID status \"shutdown\" is only used when a facility has been decommissioned but cannot be published as such because of pending airspace actions.\n\n61\n\nFAA Chart Users' Guide - IFR Enroute Terms", + "recall": 0.9609375, + "true_md": "## RADIO AIDS TO NAVIGATION\n\nAll IFR radio NAVAIDs that have been flight checked and are operational are shown on all IFR Enroute Charts. Very High Frequency/Ultrahigh Frequency (VHF/UHF) NAVAIDs, Very high frequency Omnidirectional Radio range (VORs), Tactical Air Navigation (TACANs) are shown in black, and Low Frequency/Medium Frequency (LF/MF) NAVAIDs, (Compass Loca- tors and Aeronautical or Marine NDBs) are shown in brown.\n\nOn IFR Enroute Charts, information about NAVAIDs is boxed as illustrated below. To avoid duplication of data, when two or more NAVAIDs in a general area have the same name, the name is usually printed only once inside an identification box with the frequencies, TACAN channel numbers, identification letters, or Morse Code Identifications of the different NAVAIDs are shown in appropriate colors.\n\nNAVAIDs in a shutdown status have the frequency and channel number crosshatched. Use of the NAVAID status \"shut- down\" is only used when a facility has been decommissioned but cannot be published as such because of pending airspace actions.\n\nFAA Chart Users’ Guide - IFR Enroute Terms\n\n61" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7797020365546241, + "doc_id": "73e55385e5c7367bd99ffec3e4b1480698149a34beaab512b0b421ef1eebd42a", + "edit_distance": 0.6784140969162996, + "f1_score": 0.8905380333951761, + "meteor": 0.6245289466809129, + "precision": 0.9486166007905138, + "pred_md": "and fatigue damage. By minimizing the amount of total time spent at high power setting, greater overhaul life of the powerplant can be achieved. This should not imply that the-takeoff rating of the engine should not be used. Actually, the use of the full maximum power at takeoff will accumulate less total engine wear than a reduced power setting at the same RPM because of less time required to climb to a given altitude or to accelerate to a given speed.\n\nThe most severe rate of wear and fatigue damage occurs at high RPM and low MAP. High RPM produces high centrifugal loads and reciprocating iuertia loads. When the large reciprocating inertia loads are not cushioned by high compression pressures, critical resultant loads can be produced. Thus, operating time at maximum RPM and MAP must be held to a minimum and operation at marimum RPM and low MAP must be avoided.\n\n## AIRCRAFT PROPELLERS\n\n.The aircraft propeller functions to convert the powerplant shaft horsepower into propulsive horsepower. The basic principles of propulsion apply to the propeller in that thrust is produced by providing the airstream a momentum change. The propeller achieves high propulsive ef?iciency by processing a relatively large mass flow of air and imparting a relatively small velocity change. The momentum change created by propeller is shown by the illustration of figure 2.18.\n\nThe action of the propeller can be idealized by the assumption that the rotating propeller is simply an actuating disc. As shown in figure 2.18, the inflow approaching the propeller disc indicates converging streamlines with an increase in velocity and drop in pressure. The converging streamlines leaving the propeller disc indicate a drop in pressure and increase in velocity behind the propeller. The pressure change through the disc results from the distribution of thrust over the area of the propeller\n\n145\n\nwhere\n\nv,=propulsive efficiency T=thrust, lbs. V=fligkt velocity, knots IJ = velocity increment at the propeller disc, knots\n\nSince the final velocity, Vs, is the sum of total velocity change 2a and the initial velocity, V,, the propulsive efliciency rearranges to a form identical to that for the turbojet.\n\n\n\nSo, the same relationship exists as with the turbojet engine in that high efficiency is developed by producing thrust with the highest possible mass flow and smallest necessary velocity change.\n\nThe actual propeller must be evaluated in a more exact sense to appreciate the effect of nonuniform disc loading, propeller blade drag forces, interference flow between blades, etc. With these differences from the ideal Propeller,\n\n## NAVWEPS OO-EOT-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE\n\ndisc. In this idealized propeller disc, the pressure difference is uniformly distributed over the disc area but the actual case is rather different from this.\n\nThe final velocity of the propeller slipstream, V,, is achieved some distance behind the propeller. Because of the nature of the flow pattern produced by the propeller, one half of the total velocity change is produced as the flow reaches the propeller disc. If the complete velocity increase amounts to Za, the flow velocity has increased by the amount II at the propeller disc. The propulsive e$icien~, vp, of the ideal propeller could be expressed by the following relationship:\n\n\n\n\n\n", + "recall": 0.8391608391608392, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OO-EOT-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE \n\ndisc. In this idealized propeller disc, the pres- sure difference is uniformly distributed over the disc area but the actual case is rather different from this. The final velocity of the propeller slipstream, \n\nfrom this. The final velocity of the propeller slipstream, V,, is achieved some distance behind the pro- peller. Because of the nature of the flow pat- tern produced by the propeller, one half of the total velocity change is produced as the flow reaches the propeller disc. If the complete velocity increase amounts to Za, the flow veloc- ity has increased by the amount II at the pro- peller disc. The propulsive e$icien~, vp, of the ideal propeller could be expressed by the fol- lowing relationship: \n\nand fatigue damage. By minimizing the amount of total time spent at high power setting, greater overhaul life of the powerplant can be achieved. This should not imply that the-takeoff rating of the engine should not be used. Actually, the use of the full maximum power at takeoff will accumulate less total engine wear than a reduced power setting at the same RPM because of less time required to climb to a given altitude or to accelerate to a given speed. The most severe rate of wear and fatigue \n\ngiven speed. The most severe rate of wear and fatigue damage occurs at high RPM and low MAP. High RPM produces high centrifugal loads and reciprocating iuertia loads. When the large reciprocating inertia loads are not cush- ioned by high compression pressures, critical resultant loads can be produced. Thus, op- erating time at maximum RPM and MAP must be held to a minimum and operation at mari- mum RPM and low MAP must be avoided. \n\nwhere \n\nSince the final velocity, Vs, is the sum of total velocity change 2a and the initial velocity, V,, the propulsive efliciency rearranges to a form identical to that for the turbojet. \n\n.The aircraft propeller functions to convert the powerplant shaft horsepower into propul- sive horsepower. The basic principles of pro- pulsion apply to the propeller in that thrust is produced by providing the airstream a mo- mentum change. The propeller achieves high propulsive ef?iciency by processing a relatively large mass flow of air and imparting a rela- tively small velocity change. The momentum change created by propeller is shown by the illustration of figure 2.18. The action of the propeller can be idealized \n\n## AIRCRAFT PROPELLERS\n\n$$output power ?%I= . mput power TV ‘ I ’ = T(V+a) $$\n\n$$v,=propulsive efficiency T=thrust, lbs. V=fligkt velocity, knots IJ = velocity increment at the propeller disc, knots $$\n\n$$2 VP’ 1+ k 0 $$\n\nSo, the same relationship exists as with the turbojet engine in that high efficiency is de- veloped by producing thrust with the highest possible mass flow and smallest necessary velocity change. The actual propeller must be evaluated in a \n\nvelocity change. The actual propeller must be evaluated in a more exact sense to appreciate the effect of nonuniform disc loading, propeller blade drag forces, interference flow between blades, etc. With these differences from the ideal Propeller, \n\nillustration of figure 2.18. The action of the propeller can be idealized by the assumption that the rotating propeller is simply an actuating disc. As shown in fig- ure 2.18, the inflow approaching the propeller disc indicates converging streamlines with an increase in velocity and drop in pressure. The converging streamlines leaving the propeller disc indicate a drop in pressure and increase in velocity behind the propeller. The pressure change through the disc results from the distri- bution of thrust over the area of the propeller \n\n145" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.42446903911467765, + "doc_id": "1fb7271ade9c0f7f13933569eac3c2a9644ddab63b48b919ee290660b7e0e189", + "edit_distance": 0.6333333333333333, + "f1_score": 0.65, + "meteor": 0.5024649222601442, + "precision": 0.9285714285714286, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS 00-8OT-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS\n\nFigure 1.7. Streamline Pattern and Pressure Distribution\n\nFigure 1.7. Streamline Pattern and Pressure Distribution\n\n15", + "recall": 0.5, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-8OT-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS \n\nFigure 1.7. Streamline Pattern and Pressure Distribution \n\nPRESSURE DISTRIBUTION ON A SYMMETRICAL AIRFOIL AT ZERO LIFT \n\nPRESSURE DISTRIBUTION ON A 5v’ )ER \n\n15" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9367526814892688, + "doc_id": "46976cc16335d06a2a5cec6b05559d1c3030c4d0195dd86baaf97dfeefdb4df1", + "edit_distance": 0.1962025316455696, + "f1_score": 0.96875, + "meteor": 0.9732145727823578, + "precision": 0.96875, + "pred_md": "## Margin Identification Information\n\nThe margin identification at the top, bottom, and sides of the chart provides information about the airport location, proce -dure identification, and chart currency. The charts are organized by city first, then airport name and state, with the excep -tion of military charts, which are organized by airport name. Going from the top of the chart, reading from left to right, and going down the chart, Margin Identification Information is organized in the following way.\n\nThe hash marks along the top and bottom borders of military Instrument Approach Charts indicate that the procedure was designed using High Altitude criteria contained in FAA Order 8260.3. These procedures are designed to support high performance military aircraft operations and are not intended for civilian use.\n\n93\n\nFAA Chart Users' Guide - Terminal Procedures Publication (TPP) - Terms", + "recall": 0.96875, + "true_md": "FAA Chart Users’ Guide - Terminal Procedures Publication (TPP) - Terms\n\n## Margin Identification Information\n\nThe margin identification at the top, bottom, and sides of the chart provides information about the airport location, proce - dure identification, and chart currency. The charts are organized by city first, then airport name and state, with the excep tion of military charts, which are organized by airport name. Going from the top of the chart, reading from left to right, and going down the chart, Margin Identification Information is organized in the following way.\n\nThe hash marks along the top and bottom borders of military Instrument Approach Charts indicate that the procedure was designed using High Altitude criteria contained in FAA Order 8260.3. These procedures are designed to support high performance military aircraft operations and are not intended for civilian use.\n\n93" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8501661208674348, + "doc_id": "4c0e832a7ca2cce9882f4c42de914e85fb6db13e0ac21977720a70b304a30e74", + "edit_distance": 0.6512261580381471, + "f1_score": 0.9074733096085409, + "meteor": 0.7164017194870022, + "precision": 0.9550561797752809, + "pred_md": "the design service life with trouble-free operation. The following items describe the critical areas encountered during the operational use of the turbojet engine:\n\n(1) The limiting exhaust gag tcmpcra;wcs provide the most important restrictions to the operation of the turbojet engine. The turbine components are subject to centrifugal loads of rotation, i mpulse and reaction loads on the blades, and various vibratory loads which may be inherent with the design. When the turbine components are subject to this variety of stress in the presence of high temperature, two types of structural phenomena must be considered. when a part is subject to a certain stress at some high temperature, weep failure will take place after a period of time. Of course, an increase in .tcmperature or stress will increase the rate at which creep damage is accumulated and reduce the time required to cause failure. Another problem results when a part is subjected to a repeated or cyclic stress. F&&e failure will occur after a number of cycles of a varying stress. An increase in temperature or magnitude of cyclic stress will increase the rate of fatigue damage and reduce the number of cycles necessary to produce failure. It is important to note that both fatigue and creep damage are cumulative.\n\nA gross overstress or overtemperature of the turbine section will produce damage that is immediately apparent. However, the creep and fatigue damage accumulated through periods of less extreme' overstress or overtemperature is more subtle. If the turbine is sibject to repeated excessive temperatures, the greatly increased rate of creep and fatigue damage wiIl produce failure early within the anticipated service life.\n\nGenerally, the operations which produce the highest exhaust gas temperatures are starting, acceleration, and maximum thrust at high altitude. The time spent at these temperatures must be limited arbitrarily to prevent excessive accumulation of creep and fatigue. Any time spent at temperatures in\n\nNAVWEPS OO-SOT-RO AIR.PLANE PERFORMANCE\n\nexcess of the operational limits for these conditions will increase the possibility of early failure of the turbine components.\n\nWhile the turbine components are the most critically stressed high temperature elements they are not the only items. The combustion chamber components may be critical at low altitude where high combustion chamber pressures exist. Also, the airframe structure and equipment adjacent to the engine may be subject to quite high temperatures and require provision to prevent damage by excess time at high temperature.\n\n(2) The c~mprcs~or tall J or surge has the possibility of producing damaging temperatures in the turbine and combustion chamber or unusual transient loads in the compressor. While the stall-surge phenomenon is possible with the centrifugal compressor, the more common .occurrence is with the axial flow compressor. Figure 2.13 depicts the pressure distribution that may exist for steady state operation of the engine. In order to accelerate the engine to a greater speed, more fuel must be added to increase the turbine power above that required to operate the compressor.\n\nSuppose that the fuel flow is increased beyond the steady state requirement without a change in rotative speed. The increased combustion chamber pressure due to the greater fuel flow requires that the compressor discharge pressure be higher. For the instant before an engine speed change occurs, an increase in compressor discharge pressure will be accompanied by a decrease in compressor flow velocity. The equivalent effect is illustrated by the flow components onto the rotating compressor blade of figure 2.13. One component of velocity is due to rotation and this component remains unchanged for a given rotative velocity of the single blade. The axial flow velocity for steady state operation combines with rotational component to define a resultant velocity and direction. If the axial flow component is reduced, the resultant velocity and direction provide an increase in angle of\n\n125", + "recall": 0.864406779661017, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OO-SOT-RO AIR.PLANE PERFORMANCE \n\nexcess of the operational limits for these con- ditions will increase the possibility of early failure of the turbine components. \n\nthe design service life with trouble-free opera- tion. The following items describe the critical areas encountered during the operational use of the turbojet engine: (1) The limiting exhaust gag tcmpcra;wcs pro- \n\nWhile the turbine components are the most critically stressed high temperature elements they are not the only items. The combustion chamber components may be critical at low altitude where high combustion chamber pres- sures exist. Also, the airframe structure and equipment adjacent to the engine may be sub- ject to quite high temperatures and require provision to prevent damage by excess time at high temperature. \n\nof the turbojet engine: (1) The limiting exhaust gag tcmpcra;wcs pro- vide the most important restrictions to the op- eration of the turbojet engine. The turbine components are subject to centrifugal loads of rotation, impulse and reaction loads on the blades, and various vibratory loads which may be inherent with the design. When the turbine components are subject to this variety of stress in the presence of high temperature, two types of structural phenomena must be considered. when a part is subject to a certain stress at some high temperature, weep failure will take place after a period of time. Of course, an increase in .tcmperature or stress will increase the rate at which creep damage is accumulated and reduce the time required to cause failure. An- other problem results when a part is subjected to a repeated or cyclic stress. F&&e failure will occur after a number of cycles of a varying stress. An increase in temperature or magni- tude of cyclic stress will increase the rate of fatigue damage and reduce the number of cycles necessary to produce failure. It is important to note that both fatigue and creep damage are cumulative. \n\n(2) The c~mprcs~or Jtall or surge has the pos- sibility of producing damaging temperatures in the turbine and combustion chamber or un- usual transient loads in the compressor. While the stall-surge phenomenon is possible with the centrifugal compressor, the more common .occurrence is with the axial flow compressor. Figure 2.13 depicts the pressure distribution that may exist for steady state operation of the engine. In order to accelerate the engine to a greater speed, more fuel must be added to increase the turbine power above that required to operate the compressor. Suppose that the fuel flow is increased be- \n\nto operate the compressor. Suppose that the fuel flow is increased be- yond the steady state requirement without a change in rotative speed. The increased com- bustion chamber pressure due to the greater fuel flow requires that the compressor dis- charge pressure be higher. For the instant before an engine speed change occurs, an in- crease in compressor discharge pressure will be accompanied by a decrease in compressor flow velocity. The equivalent effect is illustrated by the flow components onto the rotating com- pressor blade of figure 2.13. One component of velocity is due to rotation and this compo- nent remains unchanged for a given rotative velocity of the single blade. The axial flow velocity for steady state operation combines with rotational component to define a result- ant velocity and direction. If the axial flow component is reduced, the resultant velocity and direction provide an increase in angle of \n\nA gross overstress or overtemperature of the turbine section will produce damage that is immediately apparent. However, the creep and fatigue damage accumulated through pe- riods of less extreme’ overstress or overtem- perature is more subtle. If the turbine is sibject to repeated excessive temperatures, the greatly increased rate of creep and fatigue damage wiIl produce failure early within the anticipated service life. \n\nGenerally, the operations which produce the highest exhaust gas temperatures are starting, acceleration, and maximum thrust at high altitude. The time spent at these temperatures must be limited arbitrarily to prevent excessive accumulation of creep and fatigue. Any time spent at temperatures in \n\n125" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "c38ce89e0da4902518973796326b04feb8f079ff2011e99ced85dbb2ec469016", + "edit_distance": 0.6512261580381471, + "f1_score": 0.9074733096085409, + "meteor": 0.7164017194870022, + "precision": 0.9550561797752809, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.864406779661017, + "true_md": "" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.26704237403686, + "doc_id": "00ea22c70ac0e22408c08fb52974d86cdafc7be150d363dd2a19e26531a426b3", + "edit_distance": 0.6578947368421053, + "f1_score": 0.7222222222222222, + "meteor": 0.8335560221416302, + "precision": 0.5652173913043478, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS OD-SOT-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS\n\n## EFFECT OF FLAPS\n\nI\n\nEFFECT OF WEIGHT ON STALL SPEED\n\nFigure 1.15. Flight at High Lift Conditions\n\nEFFECT OF WEIGHT ON STALL SPEEDFigure 1.15. Flight at High Lift Conditions\n\n34", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OD-SOT-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS \n\nFigure 1.15. Flight at High Lift Conditions \n\n34" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8431357994917333, + "doc_id": "bcf5877c9b8a7b692e200c69c8e0b1c4bdaa995ff082fb844d278cf7110bacdf", + "edit_distance": 0.787012987012987, + "f1_score": 0.8982725527831094, + "meteor": 0.6190808416004552, + "precision": 0.9322709163346613, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS 00401-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS\n\nthe pressure forces created on an aerodynamic surface can be studied in a simple form which at first neglects the effect of friction and viscosity of the airflow. The most appropriate means of visualizing the effect of airflow and the resulting aerodynamic pressures is to study the fluid flow within a closed tube.\n\nSuppose a stream of air is flowing through the tube shown in figure 1.2. The airflow at station 1 in the tube has a certain velocity, static pressure, and density. As the airstream approaches the constriction at station 2 certain changes must take place. Since the airflow is enclosed within the tube, the mass flow at any point along the tube must be the same and the velocity, pressure, or density must change to accommodate this continuity of flow.\n\nBERNOULLI' S EQUATION. A distinguishing feature of submnic airflow is that changes in pressure and velocity take place with sniall and negligible changes in density. For this reason the study of subsonic airflow can be simplified by neglecting the variation of density in the flow and assuming the flow to be incomprmiblc. Of course, at high flow speeds whjch approach the speed of sound, the flow must be considered as compressible and ' compressibility effects' taken into account. However, if the flow through the tube of figure 1.2 is considered subsonic, the density of the airstream is essentially constant at all stations along the length.\n\nIf the density of the flow remains constant, static pressure and velocity are the variable quantities. As the flow approaches the constriction of station 2 the velocity must increase to maintain the same mass flow. As the velocity increases the static pressure will decrease and the decrease in static pressure which accompanies the increase in velocity can be verified in two ways:\n\n(I) Newton' s l aws of motion state the requirement of an unbalanced force to produce an acceleration (velocity change). If the airstream experiences an increase in velocity approaching the constriction, there must\n\n6\n\n.'\n\nbe an unbalance of force to provide the acceleration. Since there is only air within the tube, the unbalance of force is provided by the static pressure at station 1 being greater than the static pressure at the constriction, station 2.\n\n(2) The total energy of the air stream in the tube is unchanged. However, the airstream energy may be in two forms. The airstream may have a potential energy which is related by the static pressure and a kimtic energy by virtue of mass and motion. As the total energy is unchanged, an increase in velocity (kinetic energy) will be accompanied by a decrease in static pressure (potential energy). This situation is analagous to a ball rolling along-a smooth surface. As the ball rolls downhill, the potential energy due to position is exchanged for kinetic energy of motion. If .frictionwere negligibie, the change of potential energy would equal the change in ki,netic energy. This- is also the case for the airflow within the tube.\n\nThe relationship of static pressure and velocity is maintained throughout the length of the tube. As the flow moves past the constriction toward station 3, the velocity decreases and the static pressure increases.\n\nThe Bernoulli equation for incompressible flow is most readily explained ,by accounting for the energy of the~airflow within the tube. As the airstream has no energy added or subtracted at any point, the sum of the potential +id kinetic energy must be constant. The kinetic energy of an object is found by:\n\n' KE. =%MV=\n\nwhere K;E. = kinetic energy, ft.-lbs.\n\nM = mass, slugs\n\nV' =velocity, ft./set.\n\nThe kinetic energy of a cubic foot of air is:\n\n\n\nwhere g= kinetic energy per cu. ft., psf p=air density, slugs per cu. ft. V=ait velocity, ft./set.", + "recall": 0.8666666666666667, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00401-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS \n\nbe an unbalance of force to provide the ac- celeration. Since there is only air within the tube, the unbalance of force is provided by the static pressure at station 1 being greater than the static pressure at the constriction, station 2. \n\nthe pressure forces created on an aerodynamic surface can be studied in a simple form which at first neglects the effect of friction and vis- cosity of the airflow. The most appropriate means of visualizing the effect of airflow and the resulting aerodynamic pressures is to study the fluid flow within a closed tube. \n\n(2) The total energy of the air stream in the tube is unchanged. However, the air- stream energy may be in two forms. The airstream may have a potential energy which is related by the static pressure and a kimtic energy by virtue of mass and motion. As the total energy is unchanged, an increase in velocity (kinetic energy) will be accompa- nied by a decrease in static pressure (poten- tial energy). This situation is analagous to a ball rolling along-a smooth surface. As the ball rolls downhill, the potential energy due to position is exchanged for kinetic energy of motion. If .friction- were negli- gibie, the change of potential energy would equal the change in ki,netic energy. This- is also the case for the airflow within the tube. The relationship of static pressure and veloc- \n\nSuppose a stream of air is flowing through the tube shown in figure 1.2. The airflow at station 1 in the tube has a certain velocity, static pressure, and density. As the airstream approaches the constriction at station 2 certain changes must take place. Since the airflow is enclosed within the tube, the mass flow at any point along the tube must be the same and the velocity, pressure, or density must change to accommodate this continuity of flow. \n\nBERNOULLI ’ S EQUATION. A distin- guishing feature of submnic airflow is that changes in pressure and velocity take place with sniall and negligible changes in density. For this reason the study of subsonic airflow can be simplified by neglecting the variation of density in the flow and assuming the flow to be incomprmiblc. Of course, at high flow speeds whjch approach the speed of sound, the flow must be considered as compressible and “compressibility effects” taken into account. However, if the flow through the tube of figure 1.2 is considered subsonic, the density of the airstream is essentially constant at all sta- tions along the length. \n\nity is maintained throughout the length of the tube. As the flow moves past the constriction toward station 3, the velocity decreases and the static pressure increases. \n\nThe Bernoulli equation for incompressible flow is most readily explained ,by accounting for the energy of the~airflow within the tube. As the airstream has no energy added or sub- tracted at any point, the sum of the potential +id kinetic energy must be constant. The kinetic energy of an object is found by: \n\n“KE. =%MV= \n\nwhere K;E. = kinetic energy, ft.-lbs. \n\nM = mass, slugs \n\nV ’ =velocity, ft./set. The kinetic energy of a cubic foot of air is: \n\nV ’ =velocity, ft./set. The kinetic energy of a cubic foot of air is: K&x,, \n\n$$The kinetic energy of a cubic foot of air is: K&x,, $$\n\nwhere g= kinetic energy per cu. ft., psf \n\np=air density, slugs per cu. ft. \n\nV=ait velocity, ft./set. \n\nIf the density of the flow remains constant, static pressure and velocity are the variable quantities. As the flow approaches the con- striction of station 2 the velocity must increase to maintain the same mass flow. As the velocity increases the static pressure will de- crease and the decrease in static pressure which accompanies the increase in velocity can be verified in two ways: \n\n(I) Newton ’ s laws of motion state the requirement of an unbalanced force to pro- duce an acceleration (velocity change). If the airstream experiences an increase in veloc- ity approaching the constriction, there must \n\n6" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.1302168676603291, + "doc_id": "adc10c34649c8f484a4a9f8e601bef5ade10c387853fe4f2931f7d90fc252ff3", + "edit_distance": 0.7875, + "f1_score": 0.5074626865671642, + "meteor": 0.6870370899939946, + "precision": 0.3469387755102041, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS DD-ROT-80 HIGH SPEE' D AERODYN,AMlCS\n\nEFFECT OF SWEEPBACK ON LOW SPEED LIFT CURVE\n\nFigure 3.15. Aerodynamic Effects Due to Sweepbach\n\nFigure 3.15. Aerodynamic Effects Due to Sweepbach\n\nEFFECT\n\nOF\n\nSWEEPBACK\n\nON YAW AND\n\nROLL\n\nMOMENTS\n\n/\n\nSWEPT WING AT ZERO SIDESLIP\n\nSWEPT WING AT ZERO SIDESLIP\n\nSWEPT WING IN A SIDESLIP TO THE RIGHT\n\nSWEPT WING IN LEVEL FLIGHT\n\nSWEPT WING IN A S IDESLIP TOWARD THE DOWN WING\n\n228\n\nYAW MOMENT", + "recall": 0.9444444444444444, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS DD-ROT-80 HIGH SPEE ’ D AERODYN,AMlCS \n\nFigure 3.15. Aerodynamic Effects Due to Sweepbach \n\n228" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8021771571761824, + "doc_id": "c2148a2acfdecf1294615d7c6ba77510a7186af9ab59d6c4f47a29f2bb81ce43", + "edit_distance": 0.7754491017964071, + "f1_score": 0.936768149882904, + "meteor": 0.6830566412933782, + "precision": 0.9523809523809523, + "pred_md": "the lift coefficient is doubled and the induced drag is four times 0.1 grsat. If the flight load factor is changed from one to five, the induced drag is twenty-five times as great. If all other factors are held constant to single out this effect, it could be stated that ' i nduced drag varies as the square of the lift'\n\n\n\nwhere\n\nDi,= induced drag corresponding to some original lift, L1 Di,= induced drag corresponding to some new lift, Lp\n\n(and q (or EAS), S, AR are constant)\n\nThis expression defines the effect of gross weight, maneuvers, and steep turns on the induced drag, e.g., 10 percent higher gross weight increases induced drag 21 percent, 4G maneuvers cause 16 times as much induced drag, a turn with 4s0 bank requires a load factor of 1.41 and this doubles the induced drag.\n\nEFFECT OF ALTITUDE. The effect of altitude on induced drag can be appreciated by holding all other factors constant. The general effect of altitude is expressed by:\n\nwhere\n\nDil= induced drag corresponding to some original altitude density ratio, 0,\n\nD&= induced drag corresponding to some new altitude density ratio, q\n\n\n\nThis relationship implies that induced drag would increase with altitude, e.g., a given airplane flying in level flight at a given TAS at 40,000 ft. (u=O.25) would have four times as much induced drag than when at sea level (u= 1.00). This effect results when the lower\n\nNAVWEPS 0040240 BASIC AERODYNAMICS\n\nair density requires a greater deflection of the airstream to produce the same lift. However, if the airplane is flown at the same EAS, the dynamic pressure will be the same and induced drag will not vary. In this case, the TAS would be higher at altitude to provide the same EAS.\n\nEFFECT OF SPEED. The general effect of speed on induced drag is unusual since low airspeeds are' associated with high lift coefficients and high lift coefficients create high induced drag coefficients. The immediate implication is that induced drag inmaw with decreasing ir a J@. If all other factors are held constant to single out the effect of airspeed, a rearrangement of the previous equations would predict that ' i nduced drag varies inversely as ,the square of the airspeed.'\n\nwhere\n\nDil= induced drag corresponding to some original speed, Vi\n\nDi,= induced drag corresponding to some new speed, Vs\n\n\n\nSuch an effect would imply that a given airplane in steady flight would incur one-fourth as great an induced drag at twice as great a speed or four times as great an induced drag at half the original speed. This variation may be illustrated by assuming that an airplane in steady level flight is slowed from 300 to 150 knots. The dynamic pressure at 1% knots is one-fourth the dynamic pressure at 300 knots and the wing must deflect the airstream four times as greatly to create the same lift. The same lift force is then slanted aft four times as greatly and the induced drag is four times as great.\n\nThe expressed variation of induced drag with speed points out that induced drag will be of", + "recall": 0.9216589861751152, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 0040240 BASIC AERODYNAMICS \n\nair density requires a greater deflection of the airstream to produce the same lift. However, if the airplane is flown at the same EAS, the dynamic pressure will be the same and induced drag will not vary. In this case, the TAS would be higher at altitude to provide the same EAS. EFFECT OF SPEED. \n\nsame EAS. EFFECT OF SPEED. The general effect of speed on induced drag is unusual since low air- speeds are ’ associated with high lift coefficients and high lift coefficients create high induced drag coefficients. The immediate implication is that induced drag inmaw with decreasing air J@. If all other factors are held constant to single out the effect of airspeed, a rearrange- ment of the previous equations would predict that “induced drag varies inversely as ,the square of the airspeed.” \n\nthe lift coefficient is doubled and the induced drag is four times 0.1 grsat. If the flight load factor is changed from one to five, the induced drag is twenty-five times as great. If all other factors are held constant to single out this effect, it could be stated that “induced drag varies as the square of the lift” \n\nwhere \n\n- Di,= induced drag corresponding to some original lift, L1 \n\n- Di,= induced drag corresponding to some new lift, Lp \n\n(and q (or EAS), S, AR are constant) This expression defines the effect of gross \n\n$$Di, ’ 0 L! Di,= L1 $$\n\n(and q (or EAS), S, AR are constant) This expression defines the effect of gross weight, maneuvers, and steep turns on the induced drag, e.g., 10 percent higher gross weight increases induced drag 21 percent, 4G maneuvers cause 16 times as much induced drag, a turn with 4s0 bank requires a load factor of 1.41 and this doubles the induced drag. EFFECT OF ALTITUDE. The effect of \n\ndrag. EFFECT OF ALTITUDE. The effect of altitude on induced drag can be appreciated by holding all other factors constant. The gen- eral effect of altitude is expressed by: \n\nwhere \n\n- Dil= induced drag corresponding to some orig- inal speed, Vi \n\n- Di,= induced drag corresponding to some new speed, Vs \n\n(and L, S, AR, ,J are constant) \n\nSuch an effect would imply that a given air- plane in steady flight would incur one-fourth as great an induced drag at twice as great a speed or four times as great an induced drag at half the original speed. This variation may be illustrated by assuming that an airplane in steady level flight is slowed from 300 to 150 knots. The dynamic pressure at 1% knots is one-fourth the dynamic pressure at 300 knots and the wing must deflect the airstream four times as greatly to create the same lift. The same lift force is then slanted aft four times as greatly and the induced drag is four times as great. \n\nwhere \n\n- Dil= induced drag corresponding to some orig- inal altitude density ratio, 0, \n\n- D&= induced drag corresponding to some new altitude density ratio, q \n\n(and L, S, AR, V are constant) \n\nThis relationship implies that induced drag would increase with altitude, e.g., a given airplane flying in level flight at a given TAS at 40,000 ft. (u=O.25) would have four times as much induced drag than when at sea level (u= 1.00). This effect results when the lower \n\nThe expressed variation of induced drag with speed points out that induced drag will be of" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8623503727833043, + "doc_id": "8a0d968131a69b13bc0f404ce76907c7d002083a45174a854e6913f6dc946a2b", + "edit_distance": 0.5976408912188729, + "f1_score": 0.9209138840070298, + "meteor": 0.7853850395074395, + "precision": 0.9632352941176471, + "pred_md": "dry hard surface runways will require particular techniques to obtain minimum landing distance. Generally, the technique involves lowering the nose wheel to the runway and retracting the flaps to increase the normal force on the braking surfaces. While the airplane drag is reduced, the greater normal force can provide greater braking friction force to compensate for the reduced drag and the net retarding force is increased.\n\nThe technique necessary for minimum landing distance can be altered~ to some extent in certain situations. For example, low aspect ratio airplanes with high longitudinal control power can create very high drag at the high speeds immediate to landing touchdown. If the landing gear configuration or flap or incidence setting precludes a large reduction of CL, the normal force on the braking surfaces and braking friction force capability are relatively small. Thus, in the initial high speed part of the landing roll, maximum deceleration would be obtained by creating the greatest possible aerodynamic drag. By the time the aircraft has slowed to 70 or 80 percent of the touchdown speed, aerodynamic drag decays but braking action will then be effective. Some form of this technique may be necessary to achieve minimum distance for some configurations when the coefficient of braking friction is low (wet, icy runway) and the braking friction force capability is reduced relative to airplane aerodynamic drag.\n\nA distinction should be made between the techniques for minimum landing distance and an ordinary landing roll with considerable excess runway .available. Minimum landing distance will be obtained from the landing speed by creating a continuous peak deceleration of the airplane. This condition usually requites extensive use of the brakes for maximum deceleration. On the other hand, an ordinary landing roll with considerable excess runway may allow extensive use of aerodynamic drag to minimize wear and tear on the tires and brakes. If aerodynamic drag is\n\n## NAVWEPS 00-ROT-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE\n\nsufficient to cause deceleration of the airplane it can be used in deference to the brakes in the early stages of the landing roll, i.e., brakes and tires suffer from continuous, hard use but airplane aerodynamic drag is free and does not wear out with use. The use of aerodynamic drag is applicable only for deceleration to 60 ot 70 percent of the touchdown speed. At speeds less than 60 to 70 percent of the touchdown speed, aerodynamic drag is so slight as to be of little use and braking must be utilized to produce continued deceleration of the airplane.\n\n1\n\nPowerplant thrust is not illustrated on figure 2.34 for there are so many possible variations. Since the objective during the landing toll is to decelerate, the powerplant thrust should be the smallest possible positive value or largest possible negative value. In the case of the turbojet aircraft, the idle thrust of the engine is nearly constant with speed throughout the landing roll. The idle thrust is of significant magnitude on cold days 1 because of the low compressor inlet air temperature and low density altitude. Unfortunately, such atmospheric conditions usually have the corollary of poor braking action because of ice or water on the runway. The thrust from a windmilling propeller with the engine at idle can produce large negative thrust early in the landing roll but the negative force decreases with speed. The .large negative thrust at high speed is valuable in adding to drag and braking friction to increase the net retarding force.\n\nVarious devices can be utilized to provide greater deceleration-of the airplane or to minimize the wear and teat on tires and brakes. ' The drag parachute can provide a large retatding force at high 4 and greatly increase the deceleration during the initial phase of landing toll. It should be noted that the contribution of the drag chute is important only during the high speed portion of the landing roll. For maximum effectiveness, the drag chute must be deployed immediately after the airplane is in contact with the runway. Reverse thrust of\n\n195\n\nRevised January 1965", + "recall": 0.8821548821548821, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-ROT-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE \n\nsufficient to cause deceleration of the airplane it can be used in deference to the brakes in the early stages of the landing roll, i.e., brakes and tires suffer from continuous, hard use but airplane aerodynamic drag is free and does not 1 wear out with use. The use of aerodynamic drag is applicable only for deceleration to 60 ot 70 percent of the touchdown speed. At speeds less than 60 to 70 percent of the touch- down speed, aerodynamic drag is so slight as to be of little use and braking must be utilized to produce continued deceleration of the airplane. Powerplant thrust is not illustrated on \n\ndry hard surface runways will require particular techniques to obtain minimum landing dis- tance. Generally, the technique involves low- ering the nose wheel to the runway and retract- ing the flaps to increase the normal force on the braking surfaces. While the airplane drag is reduced, the greater normal force can pro- vide greater braking friction force to com- pensate for the reduced drag and the net retard- ing force is increased. \n\nThe technique necessary for minimum land- ing distance can be altered~ to some extent in certain situations. For example, low aspect ratio airplanes with high longitudinal control power can create very high drag at the high speeds immediate to landing touchdown. If the landing gear configuration or flap or incidence setting precludes a large reduction of CL, the normal force on the braking surfaces and braking friction force capability are rela- tively small. Thus, in the initial high speed part of the landing roll, maximum deceleration would be obtained by creating the greatest possible aerodynamic drag. By the time the aircraft has slowed to 70 or 80 percent of the touchdown speed, aerodynamic drag decays but braking action will then be effective. Some form of this technique may be necessary to achieve minimum distance for some con- figurations when the coefficient of braking friction is low (wet, icy runway) and the braking friction force capability is reduced relative to airplane aerodynamic drag. A distinction should be made between the \n\nairplane. Powerplant thrust is not illustrated on figure 2.34 for there are so many possible variations. Since the objective during the landing toll is to decelerate, the powerplant thrust should be the smallest possible positive value or largest possible negative value. In the case of the turbojet aircraft, the idle thrust of the engine is nearly constant with speed throughout the landing roll. The idle thrust is of significant magnitude on cold days 1 because of the low compressor inlet air temper- ature and low density altitude. Unfortu- nately, such atmospheric conditions usually have the corollary of poor braking action be- cause of ice or water on the runway. The thrust from a windmilling propeller with the engine at idle can produce large negative thrust early in the landing roll but the negative force decreases with speed. The .large negative thrust at high speed is valuable in adding to drag and braking friction to increase the net retarding force. Various devices can be utilized to provide \n\nrelative to airplane aerodynamic drag. A distinction should be made between the techniques for minimum landing distance and an ordinary landing roll with considerable excess runway .available. Minimum landing distance will be obtained from the landing speed by creating a continuous peak decelera- tion of the airplane. This condition usually requites extensive use of the brakes for maxi- mum deceleration. On the other hand, an ordinary landing roll with considerable excess runway may allow extensive use of aero- dynamic drag to minimize wear and tear on the tires and brakes. If aerodynamic drag is \n\nretarding force. Various devices can be utilized to provide greater deceleration-of the airplane or to mini- mize the wear and teat on tires and brakes. ‘ The drag parachute can provide a large retatd- ing force at high 4 and greatly increase the de- celeration during the initial phase of landing toll. It should be noted that the contribution of the drag chute is important only during the high speed portion of the landing roll. For maximum effectiveness, the drag chute must be deployed immediately after the airplane is in contact with the runway. Reverse thrust of \n\n195 \n\nRevised January 1965" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9235112984819472, + "doc_id": "950c74e165448789c8b1f2532ba78fd4c13f79e5f0265bfc1c5450a68d5c3458", + "edit_distance": 0.36159600997506236, + "f1_score": 0.9662337662337662, + "meteor": 0.9665850401208907, + "precision": 0.9841269841269841, + "pred_md": "## Runway Declared Distance Information\n\nRunway declared distance information when available will be indicated by and is shown to the right of the airport elevation in the sketch box. Declared distances for a runway represent the maximum distances available and suitable for meeting takeoff and landing distance performance requirements.\n\n## Runway Lights\n\nNotes regarding approach lighting systems are shown at the bottom of the sketch box. Runway lights (HIRL) (MIRL) (LIRL) (TDZL)(TDZ/CL) shall be indicated by a note, e.g. HIRL Rwy 9-27.\n\nOther approach lighting is shown on the airport sketch as a symbol on the side of the runway where they are actually located. Symbols that are shown in negative indicate pilot-controlled lighting.\n\nRunway centerline lights (CL) are installed on some precision approach runways to facilitate landing under adverse visibility conditions. They are located along the runway centerline and are spaced at 50 foot intervals. Runways with CL are shown in a negative dot pattern through the middle of the solid runway as illustrated in the airport sketch to right.\n\nRunway centerline lights will be indicated by a note only when paired with TDZL, e.g., TDZ/CL Rwys 6 and 24.\n\n## Time/Distance Table\n\nWhen applicable, a Time/Distance Table is provided below the airport sketch. The table provides the distance and time that is required from the final approach fix to the missed approach point for select groundspeeds.\n\n## Base Information (Copter Approaches Only)\n\nBase Information, as required and necessary to identify the MAP area and in the vicinity of the landing area shall be provided. Information shall be limited to and depict significant visual landmark features at and surrounding the MAP area and the heliport/pad of intended landing.\n\n## AIRPORT DIAGRAMS\n\nAirport Diagrams are specifically designed to assist in the movement of ground traffic at locations with complex runway/ taxiway configurations. Airport Diagrams are not intended for use in approach and landing or departure operations. An airport diagram assists pilots in identifying their location on the airport, thus reducing requests for 'progressive taxi instructions' from controllers.\n\n115\n\nFAA Chart Users' Guide - Terminal Procedures Publication (TPP) - Terms", + "recall": 0.9489795918367347, + "true_md": "115\n\nFAA Chart Users’ Guide - Terminal Procedures Publication (TPP) - Terms\n\n## Runway Declared Distance Information\n\n## Runway Lights\n\n## Time/Distance Table\n\n## Base Information (Copter Approaches Only)\n\n## AIRPORT DIAGRAMS\n\nRunway declared distance information when available will be indicated by and is shown to the right of the airport elevation in the sketch box. Declared distances for a runway represent the maximum distances available and suitable for meeting takeoff and landing distance performance requirements.\n\nOther approach lighting is shown on the airport sketch as a symbol on the side of the runway where they are actually located. Symbols that are shown in negative indicate pilot-controlled lighting.\n\nNotes regarding approach lighting systems are shown at the bottom of the sketch box. Run- way lights (HIRL) (MIRL) (LIRL) (TDZL)(TDZ/CL) shall be indicated by a note, e.g. HIRL Rwy 9-27.\n\nRunway centerline lights (CL) are installed on some precision approach runways to facilitate landing under adverse visibility conditions. They are located along the runway centerline and are spaced at 50 foot intervals. Runways with CL are shown in a negative dot pattern through the middle of the solid runway as illustrated in the airport sketch to right.\n\nRunway centerline lights will be indicated by a note only when paired with TDZL, e.g., TDZ/CL Rwys 6 and 24.\n\nWhen applicable, a Time/Distance Table is provided below the airport sketch. The table provides the distance and time that is required from the final approach fix to the missed approach point for select groundspeeds.\n\nBase Information, as required and necessary to identify the MAP area and in the vicinity of the landing area shall be pro- vided. Information shall be limited to and depict significant visual landmark features at and surrounding the MAP area and the heliport/pad of intended landing.\n\nAirport Diagrams are specifically designed to assist in the movement of ground traffic at locations with complex runway/ taxiway configurations. Airport Diagrams are not intended for use in approach and landing or departure operations. An airport diagram assists pilots in identifying their location on the airport, thus reducing requests for “progressive taxi instruc- tions” from controllers." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4035118319685424, + "doc_id": "f746cc7de6dd3809845f6d0c881577f6b9282c91c866246fda77c8b0bcb7a535", + "edit_distance": 0.4827586206896552, + "f1_score": 0.7111111111111111, + "meteor": 0.8876066595409337, + "precision": 0.5714285714285714, + "pred_md": "FAA Chart Users' Guide - IFR Enroute Symbology\n\n## Airspace Information (Continued) FIXES\n\nNote: Not shown on joint Victor/RNAV or Jet/RNAV Routes.\n\n76", + "recall": 0.9411764705882353, + "true_md": "76\n\nFAA Chart Users’ Guide - IFR Enroute Symbology\n\n## Airspace Information (Continued) FIXES" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8359737517181024, + "doc_id": "df2ea53c47d557bd96667193f024dbf3fb74075fcf933fa1cd0766d065aa541f", + "edit_distance": 0.42105263157894735, + "f1_score": 0.96875, + "meteor": 0.9608915458844336, + "precision": 0.96875, + "pred_md": "## REFERENCES\n\nThere are several references available from the FAA to aid pilots and other interest parties to learn more about FAA Charts and other aspects of aviation.\n\n127\n\nFAA Chart Users' Guide - References", + "recall": 0.96875, + "true_md": "127\n\nFAA Chart Users’ Guide - References\n\nThere are several references available from the FAA to aid pilots and other interest parties to learn more about FAA Charts and other aspects of aviation.\n\n## REFERENCES" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.09569785711105071, + "doc_id": "67f9db184e7e43a4cd662f6d23fc372e9ba67a41dc897e7bed7fed18e75e2d19", + "edit_distance": 0.8545454545454545, + "f1_score": 0.37362637362637363, + "meteor": 0.5856508940731955, + "precision": 0.2328767123287671, + "pred_md": "## Navigational and Procedural Information (Continued)\n\n## ENLARGEMENT AREA\n\nLOW/HIGH ALTITUDE\n\n## LOW/HIGH ALTITUDE\n\n## TIME ZONE\n\nAll time is Coordinated Universal Time (UTC)\n\n## MATCH MARK\n\n## LOW/HIGH CHARTS\n\nDate Line\n\n## LOW/HIGH ALTITUDE\n\n## MORSE CODE\n\n## CULTURE\n\n## Boundaries\n\nInternational\n\nU.S./Russia Maritime Line\n\nHYDROGRAPHY\n\nSHORELINES\n\n## TOPOGRAPHY\n\n## TERRAIN\n\nArea Charts\n\n89\n\nDuring periods of Day -lights Savings Time (DT), effective hours will be one hour earlier than shown. All states observe DT ex -cept Arizona and Hawaii\n\nFAA Chart Users' Guide - IFR Enroute Symbology", + "recall": 0.9444444444444444, + "true_md": "## Navigational and Procedural Information (Continued)\n\nFAA Chart Users’ Guide - IFR Enroute Symbology\n\n89" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.411653491848595, + "doc_id": "bda1305a31e416c7da4ba49595a9f26058186d65dfa7c4216e56b3ac6b631b1a", + "edit_distance": 0.525, + "f1_score": 0.883720930232558, + "meteor": 0.8999487994118497, + "precision": 0.7916666666666666, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS OD-8OT-80 HIGH SPEEO AERODYNAMICS\n\n## INCOMPRESSIBLE (SUBSONIC)\n\nfigure 3.2. Comparison of Compressible and lncomprossible Flow Through a Closed Tube\n\nfigure 3.2. Comparison of Compressible and lncomprossible Flow Through a Closed Tube\n\n205", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OD-8OT-80 HIGH SPEEO AERODYNAMICS \n\nfigure 3.2. Comparison of Compressible and lncomprossible Flow Through a Closed Tube \n\n205" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.846159727767909, + "doc_id": "69a9a0c5486526a6021670510004278c8ab1c8b842a53183629b564dd839628e", + "edit_distance": 0.8176943699731903, + "f1_score": 0.9473684210526315, + "meteor": 0.6980085080762962, + "precision": 0.980544747081712, + "pred_md": "certain type of operation. Of course, the effect on service life of any particular load spectrum must be anticipated.\n\nOne exception to the arbitrary time standard for operation at high temperatures or sustained high powers is the case of the afterburner operation. When the cooling flow is only that necessary to prevent excessive temperatures for adjacent structure and equipment, sustained operation past a time limit may cause damage to these items.\n\nTHRUST AUGMENTATION. Many operating performance conditions may require that additional thrust be provided for short periods of time. Any means of augmenting the thrust of the turbojet engine must be accomplished without an increase in engine speed or maximum turbine section temperature. The various forms of afterburning or water injection allow the use of additional fuel to provide thrust augmentation without increase in engine speed or turbine temperature.\n\nThe aftsrbumer is a relatively simple means of thrust augmentation and the principal features are light weight and large thrust increase. A typical afterburner installation may add only 10 to 20 percent of the basic engine wei,ght but can provide a 40- to 60-percent increase in the static sea level thrust. The afterburner consists of an additional combustion area aft of the turbine section with an arrangement of fuel nozzles and flameholders. Because the local flow velocities in the afterburner are quite high, the flameholders are necessary to provide the turbulence to maintain combustion within the afterburner section. The turbojet engine operates with airflows greatly in excess of that chemically required to support combustion of engine fuel. This is necessary because of cooling requirements and turbine temperature limitations. Since only 15 to 30 percent of the engine airflow is used in the combustion chamber, the large excess air in the turbine discharge can support combustion of large amounts of additional fuel. Also, there are no highly stressed, rotating members in the\n\n129\n\nNAVWEPS OO-EOT-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE\n\nafterburner and very high temperatures can be tolerated. The combustion of fuel in the afterburner brings additional increase in temperature and volume and\\ adds considerable energy to the exhaust. gases producing increased jet velocity. The major components of the afterburner are illustrated in figure 2.14.\n\nOne necessary feature of the turbojet engine equipped with afterburner is a variable nozzle area. As the afterburner begins functioning, the exit nozzle area must increase to accommodate the increased combustion products. If the afterburner were to begin functioning without an increase in exit area, the mass flow through the engine would drop and the temperatures would increase rapidly. The nozzle area must be controlled to increase as afterburner combustion, begins. As a result, the engine mass flow is given a large increase in jet velocity with the corresponding increase in thrust. .,\n\nThe combustion of fuel in the afterburner takes place at low pressures and is relatively inefficient. This basic inefficiency of the low pressure combustion is given evidence by the large increase in specific fuel combustion. Generally, the use of afterburner at least will double the specihtfuel consumption. As an example, consider a turbojet engine capable of producing 10,000 lbs. of thrust which can develop 15,ooO lbs.. of thrust with the use of afterburner. Typical values for specific fuel consumption would. be c,= 1.05 for the basic engine or t,= 2.1 when the afterburner is in use. The fuel flow during operation would be as follows:\n\nfuel flow = (thrust) (specific fuel consumption) without afterburner, fuel flow=(10,000) (1.05) = 10,500 lbs./hr. with afterburner, fuel flow=(15,COO) (2.1) =31,500 lbs./hr.\n\nThe low efficiency of the afterburner is illustrated by the additional 21,CCO lbs./hr. of fuel flow to create the additional 5,ooO lbs. of", + "recall": 0.9163636363636364, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OO-EOT-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE \n\ncertain type of operation. Of course, the effect on service life of any particular load spectrum must be anticipated. \n\nafterburner and very high temperatures can be tolerated. The combustion of fuel in the after- burner brings additional increase in tempera- ture and volume and\\ adds considerable energy to the exhaust. gases producing increased jet velocity. The major components of the after- burner are illustrated in figure 2.14. One necessary feature of the turbojet engine \n\nOne exception to the arbitrary time standard for operation at high temperatures or sus- tained high powers is the case of the after- burner operation. When the cooling flow is only that necessary to prevent excessive tem- peratures for adjacent structure and equipment, sustained operation past a time limit may cause damage to these items. \n\nburner are illustrated in figure 2.14. One necessary feature of the turbojet engine equipped with afterburner is a variable nozzle area. As the afterburner begins functioning, the exit nozzle area must increase to accom- modate the increased combustion products. If the afterburner were to begin functioning without an increase in exit area, the mass flow through the engine would drop and the tem- peratures would increase rapidly. The nozzle area must be controlled to increase as after- burner combustion, begins. As a result, the engine mass flow is given a large increase in jet velocity with the corresponding increase in thrust. ., The combustion of fuel in the afterburner \n\nTHRUST AUGMENTATION. Many op- erating performance conditions may require that additional thrust be provided for short periods of time. Any means of augmenting the thrust of the turbojet engine must be ac- complished without an increase in engine speed or maximum turbine section temperature. The various forms of afterburning or water injection allow the use of additional fuel to provide thrust augmentation without increase in engine speed or turbine temperature. The aftsrbumer is a relatively simple means \n\nthrust. The combustion of fuel in the afterburner takes place at low pressures and is relatively inefficient. This basic inefficiency of the low pressure combustion is given evidence by the large increase in specific fuel combustion. Generally, the use of afterburner at least will double the specihtfuel consumption. As an example, consider a turbojet engine capable of producing 10,000 lbs. of thrust which can develop 15,ooO lbs.. of thrust with the use of afterburner. Typical values for specific fuel consumption would. be c,= 1.05 for the basic engine or t,= 2.1 when the afterburner is in use. The fuel flow during operation would be as follows: \n\nspeed or turbine temperature. The aftsrbumer is a relatively simple means of thrust augmentation and the principal fea- tures are light weight and large thrust increase. A typical afterburner installation may add only 10 to 20 percent of the basic engine wei,ght but can provide a 40- to 60-percent increase in the static sea level thrust. The afterburner con- sists of an additional combustion area aft of the turbine section with an arrangement of fuel nozzles and flameholders. Because the local flow velocities in the afterburner are quite high, the flameholders are necessary to provide the turbulence to maintain combustion within the afterburner section. The turbojet engine operates with airflows greatly in excess of that chemically required to support combus- tion of engine fuel. This is necessary because of cooling requirements and turbine tempera- ture limitations. Since only 15 to 30 percent of the engine airflow is used in the combustion chamber, the large excess air in the turbine discharge can support combustion of large amounts of additional fuel. Also, there are no highly stressed, rotating members in the \n\n=31,500 lbs./hr. The low efficiency of the afterburner is illus- trated by the additional 21,CCO lbs./hr. of fuel flow to create the additional 5,ooO lbs. of \n\nfuel flow = (thrust) (specific fuel consump- tion) without afterburner, fuel flow=(10,000) (1.05) = 10,500 lbs./hr. with afterburner, fuel flow=(15,COO) (2.1) =31,500 lbs./hr. The low efficiency of the afterburner is illus- \n\n129" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "619a2f61c79319cc65a7b1bcda96edb47dda9babdb07a43571d5896118c837f4", + "edit_distance": 0.8176943699731903, + "f1_score": 0.9473684210526315, + "meteor": 0.6980085080762962, + "precision": 0.980544747081712, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.9163636363636364, + "true_md": "" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5788391976335259, + "doc_id": "1de6952efadd5d01e97b60fe02112f5bc803cae05455ec344f83b7b97fbb81a9", + "edit_distance": 0.6111111111111112, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.8877931185623493, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS DD-80T-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL\n\n## TANDEM ROTOR LONGITUDINAL CONTROL\n\nTANDEM ROTOR DIRECTIONAL CONTROL\n\nFig&e 4.36. longitudinal and Directional Control\n\nFig&e 4.36. longitudinal and Directional Control\n\n322", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## NAVWEPS DD-80T-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL\n\nFig&e 4.36. longitudinal and Directional Control \n\nTANDEM ROTOR LONGITUDINAL CONTROL \n\nTANDEM ROTOR DIRECTIONAL CONTROL \n\n322" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7196315267102845, + "doc_id": "3c113bb1afeccf8bdb18a387df1ef730a0520576542d6757ffaaf6eba4646ba0", + "edit_distance": 0.15, + "f1_score": 0.9411764705882353, + "meteor": 0.9455678670360111, + "precision": 0.9411764705882353, + "pred_md": "## AIRSPACE INFORMATION (Continued)\n\n53\n\nFAA Chart Users' Guide - VFR Chart Symbology - Helicopter Charts", + "recall": 0.9411764705882353, + "true_md": "## AIRSPACE INFORMATION (Continued)\n\nFAA Chart Users’ Guide - VFR Chart Symbology - Helicopter Charts\n\n53" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.33263740412430215, + "doc_id": "7c5476db868b3e8318adcdcaca626fac21164ab63d1d4d7e853ae27673d0cec9", + "edit_distance": 0.6190476190476191, + "f1_score": 0.8064516129032259, + "meteor": 0.8700416392724085, + "precision": 0.6756756756756757, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS 00-BOT-80 HIGH SPEED AERODYNAMICS\n\n## CONE IN SUPERSONIC FLOW\n\nREF:LECTED OBLIOUE WAVES\n\nREF:LECTED OBLIOUE WAVES\n\nMODEL IN WIND TUNNEL WITH wows REFL\\Cmg FROM\n\nMODEL IN WIND TUNNEL WITH wows REFL\\Cmg FROM\n\nFigure 3.5. Three Dimensional and Reflected Shock Waves\n\nFigure 3.5. Three Dimensional and Reflected Shock Waves\n\n209\n\nRevised Januaty I%5", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-BOT-80 HIGH SPEED AERODYNAMICS \n\n## CONE IN SUPERSONIC FLOW\n\nFigure 3.5. Three Dimensional and Reflected Shock Waves \n\nRevised Januaty I%5 \n\n209" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8932400079496726, + "doc_id": "cc110f32f3d3790949fead5396f74e9cb6383bf6210b6e1b47f80f2022fe90e3", + "edit_distance": 0.6085825747724317, + "f1_score": 0.9433198380566803, + "meteor": 0.7640994617214111, + "precision": 0.9708333333333333, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS OD-ROT-80 APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS\n\n## TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYING\n\nspeed, the distance necessary to continue takeoff with one engine inoperative is equal to the stopping distance. The critical engine failure speed is generally referred to as the ' I' ,' speed and it is a function of the same factors which determine the takeoff performance, e.g., density altitude, gross weight, temperature, humidity, etc.\n\n(3) &t&l jield kngrh: The runway length necessary to accelerate with all engines operative to the critical engine failure speed (VJ then continue accelerating to the takeoff and initial climb speed (VJ with one engine inoperative and achieve safe takeoff or refuse takeoff. By this definition, critical field length describes the minimum length of runway necessary for safe operation of the multiengine airplane. Obviously, the critical field length is a function of the same factors affecting the takeoff distance of the airplane.\n\nThe conditions of Vi, V,, and critical field length are illustrated by figure 6.13. The first illustration of figure 6.13 depicts the case where the runway length is equal to the rritical jield kngth. In this case, the airplane could accelerate to Vi with all engines operative then either continue takeoff safely with one engine inoperative or refuse takeoff and decelerate to a stop on the remaining runway. For this condition, an engine failure occurring at lefs than I' , speed dictates that takeoff must be refused because inadequate distance remains to effect a safe takeoff at V, speed. However, at or below V, speed, adequate distance remains to bring the airplane to a stop. If engine failure occurs at some speed greater than Vi speed, takeoff should be continued because adequate distance remains to accelerate to V, speed and effect a safe takeoff with one engine inoperative. If engine failure occurs beyond Vi speed, inadequate distance remains to brake the airplane to a stop on the runway,\n\nThe second illustration of figure 6.13 depicts the case where the ranway length is 1~s than the titical field length. In this case, the term of ' V,' speed is not applicable because of\n\ninadequate distance and the refusal speed is less than the minimum speed necessary to continue a safe takeoff with one engine inoperative. If engine failure occurs below refusal speed, the takeoff must be refused and adequate distance remains to effect a stop on the runway. If engine failure occurs above refusal speed but below the minimum speed necessary to continue takeoff with one engine inoperative, an accident is inevitable. Within this range of speeds, the airplane cannot effect a safe takeoff at L' s with one engine inoperative or a safe stop on the remaining runway. For this reason, the pilot must properly plan the takeoff and insure that the runway available is equal to or greater than the critical field length. If the runway available is less than the critical field length, there must be sufficient justification for the particular operation because of the hazardous consequences of engine failure between the refusal speed and the minimum speed necessary to continue takeoff with one engine inoperative. Otherwise, the gross weight of the airplane should be reduced in attempt to decrease the critical field length to equal the available runway.\n\n## SONIC ' BOOMS'\n\nFrom the standpoint of public relations and the maintaining of friendly public support for Naval Aviation, great care must be taken to prevent sonic booms in populated areas. While the ordinary sonic boom does not carry any potential of physical damage, the disturbance must be avoided because of the undesirable annoyance and apprehension. As supersonic flight becomes more commonplace and an ordinary consequence of flying operations, the prevention of sonic booms in populated areas becomes a difficult and perplexing job.\n\nWhen the airplane is in supersonic flight, the local pressure and velocity changes on the airplane surfaces are coincident with the formation of shock waves. The pressure jump through the shock waves in the i mmediate vicinity of the airplane surfaces is determined", + "recall": 0.9173228346456693, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OD-ROT-80 APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYING \n\ninadequate distance and the refusal speed is less than the minimum speed necessary to continue a safe takeoff with one engine inoper- ative. If engine failure occurs below refusal speed, the takeoff must be refused and adequate distance remains to effect a stop on the runway. If engine failure occurs above refusal speed but below the minimum speed necessary to continue takeoff with one engine inoperative, an accident is inevitable. Within this range of speeds, the airplane cannot effect a safe takeoff at L ’ s with one engine inoperative or a safe stop on the remaining runway. For this reason, the pilot must properly plan the takeoff and insure that the runway available is equal to or greater than the critical field length. If the runway available is less than the critical field length, there must be sufficient justification for the particular operation be- cause of the hazardous consequences of engine failure between the refusal speed and the minimum speed necessary to continue takeoff with one engine inoperative. Otherwise, the gross weight of the airplane should be reduced in attempt to decrease the critical field length to equal the available runway. \n\nspeed, the distance necessary to continue take- off with one engine inoperative is equal to the stopping distance. The critical engine failure speed is generally referred to as the “I ’ ,” speed and it is a function of the same factors which determine the takeoff performance, e.g., density altitude, gross weight, temperature, humidity, etc. \n\n(3) &t&l jield kngrh: The runway length necessary to accelerate with all engines opera- tive to the critical engine failure speed (VJ then continue accelerating to the takeoff and initial climb speed (VJ with one engine inoperative and achieve safe takeoff or refuse takeoff. By this definition, critical field length describes the minimum length of run- way necessary for safe operation of the multi- engine airplane. Obviously, the critical field length is a function of the same factors affect- ing the takeoff distance of the airplane. The conditions of Vi, V,, and critical field \n\ning the takeoff distance of the airplane. The conditions of Vi, V,, and critical field length are illustrated by figure 6.13. The first illustration of figure 6.13 depicts the case where the runway length is equal to the rritical jield kngth. In this case, the airplane could accelerate to Vi with all engines opera- tive then either continue takeoff safely with one engine inoperative or refuse takeoff and decelerate to a stop on the remaining runway. For this condition, an engine failure occurring at lefs than I ’ , speed dictates that takeoff must be refused because inadequate distance remains to effect a safe takeoff at V, speed. However, at or below V, speed, adequate distance re- mains to bring the airplane to a stop. If engine failure occurs at some speed greater than Vi speed, takeoff should be continued because adequate distance remains to accelerate to V, speed and effect a safe takeoff with one engine inoperative. If engine failure occurs beyond Vi speed, inadequate distance remains to brake the airplane to a stop on the runway, \n\nThe second illustration of figure 6.13 depicts the case where the ranway length is 1~s than the titical field length. In this case, the term of “V,” speed is not applicable because of \n\nFrom the standpoint of public relations and the maintaining of friendly public support for Naval Aviation, great care must be taken to prevent sonic booms in populated areas. While the ordinary sonic boom does not carry any potential of physical damage, the disturb- ance must be avoided because of the undesirable annoyance and apprehension. As supersonic flight becomes more commonplace and an ordinary consequence of flying operations, the prevention of sonic booms in populated areas becomes a difficult and perplexing job. \n\nWhen the airplane is in supersonic flight, the local pressure and velocity changes on the airplane surfaces are coincident with the formation of shock waves. The pressure jump through the shock waves in the immediate vicinity of the airplane surfaces is determined \n\n## SONIC “BOOMS’" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6433175422776263, + "doc_id": "2b897263cd262e774f23cf39d6f73bb8d754a6e18594a897d6f31c5c3c1b91da", + "edit_distance": 0.36363636363636365, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9445670159955873, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS 00-8OT-80 HIGH SPEED AERODYNAMICS\n\nFigure 3.20. Various Types of Supersonic Mets\n\nFigure 3.20. Various Types of Supersonic Mets\n\n239", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-8OT-80 HIGH SPEED AERODYNAMICS \n\nFigure 3.20. Various Types of Supersonic Mets \n\n239" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8418659940535244, + "doc_id": "63f4a0f1a19ed2e64b02cfa31a51e1f79116dd66c4ad3ac571c00d67b091b6ad", + "edit_distance": 0.6400523560209425, + "f1_score": 0.8941176470588237, + "meteor": 0.7313770539065821, + "precision": 0.9421487603305785, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS OO-BOT-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL\n\nSince wing dihedral is so powerful in producing lateral stability it is taken as a common denominator of the lateral stability contribution of all other components. Generally, the contribution of wing position, flaps, power, etc., is expressed as an equivalent amount of ' effective dihedral' or ' dihedral effect.'\n\nThe contribution of the fadage alone is usually quite small depending on the location of the resultant aerodynamic side force on the fuselage. However, the effect of the wingfuselage-tail combination is significant since the vertical placement of the wing on the fuselage can greatly affect the stability of the combination. A wing located at the mid wing position will generally exhibit a dihedral effect no different from that of the wing alone. A l ow wing location on the fuselage may contribute an effect equivalent to 3' or 4' of negative dihedral while a high wing location may contribute a positive dihedral of 2' or 3' . The magnitude of dihedral effect contributed by vertical position of the wing is large and may necessitate a noticeable dihedral angle for the l ow wing configuration.\n\nThe contribution of wccpback to dihedral effect is important because of the nature of the contribution. As shown in figure 4.28, the swept wing in a sideslip has the wing into wind operating with an effective decrease in sweepback while the wing out of the wind is operating with an effective increase in sweepback. If the wing is at a positive lift coefficient, the wing into the wind has less sweep and an increase in lift and the wing out of the wind has more sweep and a decrease in lift. In this manner the swept back wing would contribute a positive dihedral effect and the swept forward wing would contribute a negative dihedral effect.\n\nThe unusual nature of the contribution of sweepback to dihedral effect is that the contribution is proportional to the wing lift coefficient as well as the angle of sweepback. It should be clear that the swept wing at zero lift will provide no roll due to sideslip since\n\n298\n\nthere is no wing lift to change. Thus, the dihedral effect due to sweepback is zero at zero lift and i ncreases directly with wing lift coefficient. When the demands of high speed flight require a large amount of sweepback, the resulting configuration may have an excessively high dihedral effect at low speeds (high CL) while the dihedral effect may be satisfactory in normal flight (low or medium C,).\n\nThe vertical tail of modern configurations can provide a sign&ant-and, at times, undesirable-contribution to the effective dihedral. If the vertical tail is large, the side force produced by sideslip may produce a noticeable rolling moment as well as the important yawing moment contribution. Such an effect is usually small for the conventional airplane configuration but the modern high speed airplane configuration i nduces this effect to a great magnitude. It is difficult then to obtain a large vertical tail contribution to directional stability without incurring an additional contribution to dihedral effect.\n\nThe amount of effective dihedral necessary to produce satisfactory flying qualities varies greatly with the type and purpose of the airplane. Generally, the effective dihedral should not be too great since high roll due to sideslip can create certain problems. Excessive dihedral effect can lead to ' Dutch roll,' difficult rudder coordination in rolling maneuvers, or place extreme demands for lateral control power during crosswind takeoff and landing. Of course, the effective dihedral should not be negative during the predominating conditions of flight, e.g., cruise, high speed, etc. If the airplane demonstrates satisfactory dihedral effect for these conditions of flight, certain exceptions can be considered when the airplane is in the takeoff and landing configuration. Since the effects of flaps and power are destablizing and reduce the dihedral effect, a certain amount of negative dihedral effect may be possible due to these sources.\n\nThe deflection of flaps causes the inboard sections of the wing to become relatively more", + "recall": 0.8507462686567164, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OO-BOT-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL \n\nSince wing dihedral is so powerful in pro- ducing lateral stability it is taken as a common denominator of the lateral stability contribu- tion of all other components. Generally, the contribution of wing position, flaps, power, etc., is expressed as an equivalent amount of “effective dihedral” or “dihedral effect.” \n\nthere is no wing lift to change. Thus, the dihedral effect due to sweepback is zero at zero lift and increases directly with wing lift coefficient. When the demands of high speed flight require a large amount of sweepback, the resulting configuration may have an excessive- ly high dihedral effect at low speeds (high CL) while the dihedral effect may be satisfactory in normal flight (low or medium C,). The vertical tail of modern configurations \n\nThe contribution of the fadage alone is usually quite small depending on the location of the resultant aerodynamic side force on the fuselage. However, the effect of the wing- fuselage-tail combination is significant since the vertical placement of the wing on the fuse- lage can greatly affect the stability of the com- bination. A wing located at the mid wing position will generally exhibit a dihedral effect no different from that of the wing alone. A low wing location on the fuselage may con- tribute an effect equivalent to 3’ or 4’ of nega- tive dihedral while a high wing location may contribute a positive dihedral of 2’ or 3 ’ . The magnitude of dihedral effect contributed by vertical position of the wing is large and may necessitate a noticeable dihedral angle for the low wing configuration. \n\nin normal flight (low or medium C,). The vertical tail of modern configurations can provide a sign&ant-and, at times, un- desirable-contribution to the effective dihe- dral. If the vertical tail is large, the side force produced by sideslip may produce a noticeable rolling moment as well as the important yaw- ing moment contribution. Such an effect is usually small for the conventional airplane configuration but the modern high speed airplane configuration induces this effect to a great magnitude. It is difficult then to obtain a large vertical tail contribution to directional stability without incurring an additional con- tribution to dihedral effect. \n\nThe contribution of wccpback to dihedral ef- fect is important because of the nature of the contribution. As shown in figure 4.28, the swept wing in a sideslip has the wing into wind operating with an effective decrease in sweepback while the wing out of the wind is operating with an effective increase in sweepback. If the wing is at a positive lift coefficient, the wing into the wind has less sweep and an increase in lift and the wing out of the wind has more sweep and a decrease in lift. In this manner the swept back wing would contribute a positive dihedral effect and the swept forward wing would contribute a negative dihedral effect. \n\nThe amount of effective dihedral necessary to produce satisfactory flying qualities varies greatly with the type and purpose of the air- plane. Generally, the effective dihedral should not be too great since high roll due to side- slip can create certain problems. Excessive dihedral effect can lead to “Dutch roll,” difficult rudder coordination in rolling maneu- vers, or place extreme demands for lateral control power during crosswind takeoff and landing. Of course, the effective dihedral should not be negative during the predominat- ing conditions of flight, e.g., cruise, high speed, etc. If the airplane demonstrates satis- factory dihedral effect for these conditions of flight, certain exceptions can be considered when the airplane is in the takeoff and landing configuration. Since the effects of flaps and power are destablizing and reduce the dihedral effect, a certain amount of negative dihedral effect may be possible due to these sources. \n\nThe unusual nature of the contribution of sweepback to dihedral effect is that the con- tribution is proportional to the wing lift coefficient as well as the angle of sweepback. It should be clear that the swept wing at zero lift will provide no roll due to sideslip since \n\nThe deflection of flaps causes the inboard sections of the wing to become relatively more \n\n298" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7888480975894254, + "doc_id": "11ebe9358858449579256c99e8c949e5ccb2adb45b01fcd25141bd9683a79a49", + "edit_distance": 0.8958333333333334, + "f1_score": 0.9761904761904762, + "meteor": 0.9289554096876415, + "precision": 0.9761904761904762, + "pred_md": "FAA Chart Users' Guide - Terminal Procedures Publication (TPP) - Terms\n\n## INSTRUMENT APPROACH PROCEDURE CHART\n\nThe IAPs (charts) are divided into various sections:\n\nMargin Identification Information Briefing Strip Information Planview\n\nProfile View Landing Minimums Airport Sketch\n\nMissed Approach Information\n\n92", + "recall": 0.9761904761904762, + "true_md": "The IAPs (charts) are divided into various sections:\n\nMargin Identification Information Briefing Strip Information Planview Missed Approach Information\n\nProfile View Landing Minimums Airport Sketch\n\n## INSTRUMENT APPROACH PROCEDURE CHART\n\n92\n\nFAA Chart Users’ Guide - Terminal Procedures Publication (TPP) - Terms" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4255976564088323, + "doc_id": "94f3d8587f517063ab0a6de735a73a22ad5d31bf36f0992d55e196134e3c04bb", + "edit_distance": 0.5, + "f1_score": 0.8695652173913044, + "meteor": 0.8799999999999999, + "precision": 0.7692307692307693, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS 00-8OT-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL\n\n## POSITIVE STATIC STABILITY\n\nFigure 4.1. Static Stability\n\nFigure 4.1. Static Stability", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-8OT-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL \n\nFigure 4.1. Static Stability" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.388172465412544, + "doc_id": "988c8bef7f7fc921798e61ad3caa9f8c467fa44c8a913e75a9463371be8fcefa", + "edit_distance": 0.42857142857142855, + "f1_score": 0.8571428571428571, + "meteor": 0.8012093726379441, + "precision": 0.8571428571428571, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS Do-Sd-eD ' ,G' SPEED AERODYNAMICS\n\nFigure 3.21. Aerodynamic Heating\n\nFigure 3.21. Aerodynamic Heating\n\n241", + "recall": 0.8571428571428571, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS Do-Sd-eD “,G” SPEED AERODYNAMICS \n\nFigure 3.21. Aerodynamic Heating \n\n241" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.847556775215456, + "doc_id": "2ca599dd05036144b9c989683514c920cd8488ed18aabab7c535cff469f59a62", + "edit_distance": 0.7200577200577201, + "f1_score": 0.9157088122605365, + "meteor": 0.7203283679294903, + "precision": 0.956, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS 00401-60 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE\n\ngreatly with altitude, the turbojet can tolerate less favorable (or more unfavorable) winds with increased altitude.\n\nIn some cases, large values of wind may cause a significant change in cruise velocity to maintain maximum ground nautical miles per lb. of fuel. As an example of an extreme condition, consider an airplane flying into a headwind which equals the cruise velocity. In this case, ' ' 9 increase in velocity would improve range.\n\nTo appreciate the changes in optimum speeds with various winds, refer to the illustration of figure 2.26. When zero wind conditions exist, a straight line from the origin tangent to the curve of fuel flow versus velocity will locate maximum range conditions. When a headwind condition exists, the speed for maximum ground range is located by a line tangent drawn from a velocity offset equal to the headwind velocity. This will locate maximum range at some higher velocity and fuel flow. Of course, the range will be less than when at zero wind conditions but the higher velocity and fuel flow will minimize the range loss due to the headwind. In a similar sense, a tailwind will reduce the cruise velocity to maximize the benefit of the tailwind.\n\nThe procedure of employing different cruise velocities to account for the effects of wind is necessary only at extreme values of wind velocity. It is necessary to consider the change in optimum cruise airspeed when the wind velocities exceed 25 percent of the zero wind cruise velocity.\n\n## ENDURANCE PERFORMANCE\n\nThe ability of the airplane to convert fuel energy into flying time is an important factor in flying operations. The ' specific endurance' of the airplane is defined as follows:\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\ni m\n\nThe specific endurance is simply the reciprocal of the fuel flow, hence maximum endurance conditions would be obtained at the lowest fuel flow required to hold the airplane in steady level flight. Obviously, minimum fuel flow will provide the maximum flying time from a given quantity of fuel. Generally, in subsonic performance, the speed at which maximum endurance is achieved is approximately 75 percent of the speed for maximum range.\n\nWhile many different factors can affect the specific endurance, the most important factors at the control of the pilot are the configuration and operating altitude. Of course, for maximum endurance conditions the airplane must be in the clean configuration and operated at the proper aerodynamic conditions.\n\nEFFECT OF ALTITUDE ON ENDURANCE, PROPELLER DRIVEN AIRPLANES. Since the fuel flow of the propeller driven airplane is proportional to power required, the propeller powered airplane will achieve maximum specific endurance when operated at minimum power required. The point of minimum power required is obtained at a specific value of lift coefficient for a particular airplane configuration and is essentially independent of weight or altitude. However, an increase in altitude will increase the value of the minimum power required as illustrated by figure 2.27. If the specific fuel consumption were not influenced by altitude or engine power, the specific endurance would be directly proportional to ji, e.g., the specific endurance at 22,000 ft. (a=O.498) would be approximately 70 percent of the value at sea level. This example is very nearly the case of the airplane with the reciprocat&g engine since specific fuel consumption and propeller efficiency are not directly affected by altitude. The obvious conclusion is that maximum endurance of the reciprocating engine airplane is obtained at the lowest practical altitude.\n\nThe variation with altitude of the maximum endurance of the turboprop airplane requires consideration of powerplant factors in addition", + "recall": 0.8786764705882353, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00401-60 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE \n\nThe specific endurance is simply the reciprocal of the fuel flow, hence maximum endurance conditions would be obtained at the lowest fuel flow required to hold the airplane in steady level flight. Obviously, minimum fuel flow will provide the maximum flying time from a given quantity of fuel. Generally, in subsonic performance, the speed at which maximum en- durance is achieved is approximately 75 per- cent of the speed for maximum range. \n\ngreatly with altitude, the turbojet can tolerate less favorable (or more unfavorable) winds with increased altitude. \n\nIn some cases, large values of wind may cause a significant change in cruise velocity to maintain maximum ground nautical miles per lb. of fuel. As an example of an extreme con- dition, consider an airplane flying into a head- wind which equals the cruise velocity. In this case, ““9 increase in velocity would improve range. \n\nWhile many different factors can affect the specific endurance, the most important factors at the control of the pilot are the configuration and operating altitude. Of course, for maxi- mum endurance conditions the airplane must be in the clean configuration and operated at the proper aerodynamic conditions. EFFECT OF ALTITUDE ON ENDUR- \n\nTo appreciate the changes in optimum speeds with various winds, refer to the illustration of figure 2.26. When zero wind conditions exist, a straight line from the origin tangent to the curve of fuel flow versus velocity will locate maximum range conditions. When a head- wind condition exists, the speed for maximum ground range is located by a line tangent drawn from a velocity offset equal to the headwind velocity. This will locate maximum range at some higher velocity and fuel flow. Of course, the range will be less than when at zero wind conditions but the higher velocity and fuel flow will minimize the range loss due to the head- wind. In a similar sense, a tailwind will re- duce the cruise velocity to maximize the benefit of the tailwind. \n\nthe proper aerodynamic conditions. EFFECT OF ALTITUDE ON ENDUR- ANCE, PROPELLER DRIVEN AIRPLANES. Since the fuel flow of the propeller driven air- plane is proportional to power required, the propeller powered airplane will achieve maxi- mum specific endurance when operated at mini- mum power required. The point of minimum power required is obtained at a specific value of lift coefficient for a particular airplane con- figuration and is essentially independent of weight or altitude. However, an increase in altitude will increase the value of the minimum power required as illustrated by figure 2.27. If the specific fuel consumption were not in- fluenced by altitude or engine power, the spe- cific endurance would be directly proportional to ji, e.g., the specific endurance at 22,000 ft. (a=O.498) would be approximately 70 percent of the value at sea level. This example is very nearly the case of the airplane with the recipro- cat&g engine since specific fuel consumption and propeller efficiency are not directly affected by altitude. The obvious conclusion is that maximum endurance of the reciprocating en- gine airplane is obtained at the lowest practical altitude. \n\nThe procedure of employing different cruise velocities to account for the effects of wind is necessary only at extreme values of wind velocity. It is necessary to consider the change in optimum cruise airspeed when the wind velocities exceed 25 percent of the zero wind cruise velocity. \n\nThe ability of the airplane to convert fuel energy into flying time is an important factor in flying operations. The “specific endurance” of the airplane is defined as follows: \n\nThe variation with altitude of the maximum endurance of the turboprop airplane requires consideration of powerplant factors in addition \n\n## ENDURANCE PERFORMANCE\n\n$$specific endurance==1 specific endurance= 1 fuel flow, Ibs. per hr. $$\n\nim" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7671894545181059, + "doc_id": "a5d96fcd197da5c9682688e2070842f5fb91cc79a096034302a5e745efa52db3", + "edit_distance": 0.828125, + "f1_score": 0.9116607773851588, + "meteor": 0.8045671871803124, + "precision": 0.8657718120805369, + "pred_md": "FAA Chart Users' Guide - VFR Terms and Symbols\n\n## MEF - Natural Terrain Feature or Natural Vertical Obstacle\n\nWhen a natural terrain feature or natural vertical obstacle (e.g. a tree) is the highest feature within the quadrangle:\n\n- 1. Determine the elevation of the feature.\n- 2. Add the possible vertical error of the source to the above figure (100' or 1/2 the contour interval when interval on source exceeds 200').\n- 3. Add a 200' allowance for uncharted natural or manmade obstacles. Chart specifications don't require the portrayal of obstacles below minimum height.\n- 4. Round the figure up to the next higher hundredfoot level.\n\n## Example:\n\nElevation of obstacle top (MSL) 13161\n\nPossible vertical error +100\n\nObstacle Allowance +200\n\nequals 13461\n\nRaise to the following 100' level 13500\n\nMaximum Elevation Figure (MEF)\n\nPilots should be aware that while the MEF is based on the best information available to the Specialist, the figures are not verified by field surveys. Also, users should consult the Aeronautical Information Services website to ensure that your chart has the latest MEF data available.\n\n## LAND FEATURES - MOUNTAIN PASSES\n\nMountain Pass symbol does not indicate a recommended route or direction of flight and pass elevation does not indicate a recommended clearnce altitude. Hazardous flight conditions may exist within and near mountain passes.\n\n14", + "recall": 0.9626865671641791, + "true_md": "14\n\nFAA Chart Users’ Guide - VFR Terms and Symbols\n\n## MEF - Natural Terrain Feature or Natural Vertical Obstacle\n\n## LAND FEATURES - MOUNTAIN PASSES\n\nMountain Pass symbol does not indicate a recommended route or direction of flight and pass elevation does not indicate a recommended clearnce altitude. Hazardous flight conditions may exist within and near mountain passes.\n\nPilots should be aware that while the MEF is based on the best information available to the Specialist, the figures are not verified by field surveys. Also, users should consult the Aeronautical Information Services website to ensure that your chart has the latest MEF data available.\n\n- 4. Round the figure up to the next higher hundred- foot level.\n\n- 2. Add the possible vertical error of the source to the above figure (100’ or 1/2 the contour interval when interval on source exceeds 200’). \n\n- 1. Determine the elevation of the feature. \n\nWhen a natural terrain feature or natural vertical obstacle (e.g. a tree) is the highest feature within the quadrangle:\n\n- 3. Add a 200’ allowance for uncharted natural or manmade obstacles. Chart specifications don’t require the portrayal of obstacles below minimum height." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4368262350510791, + "doc_id": "d5238cef3be5cb1337224c894778464cc00abaa46717281dc35ffd89a4371cbf", + "edit_distance": 0.7364341085271318, + "f1_score": 0.7164179104477613, + "meteor": 0.866813981847496, + "precision": 0.5647058823529412, + "pred_md": "FAA Chart Users' Guide - IFR Enroute Symbology\n\n## Airports (Continued)\n\n## LIGHTING CAPABILITY\n\nLighting Available\n\nPilot Controlled Lighting\n\nPart-time or on request\n\nNo lighting available\n\nAt private facilities- indicates no lighting\n\ninformation is available\n\n## RADIO AIDS TO NAVIGATION\n\n## NAVAIDS\n\nVOR\n\nVOR/DME TACAN\n\nDME\n\nNDB\n\n## NDB/DME\n\n## Reporting Function\n\nNon Compulsory Reporting or Off Airway\n\nCompulsory Reporting\n\nNote: VHF/UHF is depicted in Black. LF/MF is depicted in Brown. RNAV is depicted in Blue\n\n## Compass Roses\n\n## VHF/UHF\n\n## LF/MF\n\nCompass Roses are orientated to Magnetic North of the NAVAID which may not be adjusted to the charted isogonic values.\n\n## Compass Locator Beacon\n\n## LOW ALTITUDE\n\n70", + "recall": 0.9795918367346939, + "true_md": "70\n\nFAA Chart Users’ Guide - IFR Enroute Symbology\n\nCompass Roses are orientated to Magnetic North of the NAVAID which may not be adjusted to the charted isogonic values.\n\nNote: VHF/UHF is depicted in Black. LF/MF is depicted in Brown. RNAV is depicted in Blue\n\n## RADIO AIDS TO NAVIGATION\n\n## Compass Roses\n\n## Airports (Continued)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4874671560842625, + "doc_id": "e980d5c2cb84b050ef37350982169e5d4c6837652bf1a8bec3b2f3173f340e3e", + "edit_distance": 0.625, + "f1_score": 0.9677419354838711, + "meteor": 0.8440677966101695, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS OO-EOT-80\n\nHIGH SPEED AERODYNAMICS\n\nFigure 3.16. Stall Characteristics of Tapered Swept Wing\n\nFigure 3.16. Stall Characteristics of Tapered Swept Wing\n\n232", + "recall": 0.9375, + "true_md": "232 \n\nFigure 3.16. Stall Characteristics of Tapered Swept Wing \n\n## NAVWEPS OO-EOT-80 HIGH SPEED AERODYNAMICS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6606328636027614, + "doc_id": "02d9d721df0799607f79b825787d36c68a2a905f6169aa40effe80ae3ec012ff", + "edit_distance": 0.1, + "f1_score": 0.8999999999999999, + "meteor": 0.8950617283950617, + "precision": 0.9, + "pred_md": "FAA Chart Users' Guide - Table of Contents\n\n6", + "recall": 0.9, + "true_md": "FAA Chart Users’ Guide - Table of Contents\n\n6" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7128736748247595, + "doc_id": "d19f358533d4e1342ad1ecb7ca68a47caf91ba68adb4540ff533351214dc11c1", + "edit_distance": 0.3333333333333333, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9485714285714286, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS 00-801-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE\n\nFigure 2.26. Range Performance\n\nFigure 2.26. Range Performance\n\n169", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-801-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE \n\nFigure 2.26. Range Performance \n\n169" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7325510644096216, + "doc_id": "2e65387aeabea198609c12e6e794a7d55ae102d0dda5a4834d5e5f28ca4efdd4", + "edit_distance": 0.3, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9575062901873077, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS 00-801-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS\n\nFigure 1.22. Section Moment Characteristics\n\nFigure 1.22. Section Moment Characteristics\n\n50\n\nRevised January 1965", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-801-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS \n\nFigure 1.22. Section Moment Characteristics \n\n50 \n\nRevised January 1965" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8904049724427765, + "doc_id": "134585cfdf839267237fd3a271cb2b3f63f0a050dbff47ec18c8c1594dd94775", + "edit_distance": 0.48, + "f1_score": 0.9548387096774192, + "meteor": 0.8502436146070297, + "precision": 0.9801324503311258, + "pred_md": "the ship. When the airplane slows to subsonic, the shock wave travels out ahead of the airplane in a form which is somewhat spherical. Because there are density variations through the shock wave, the shock wave moving ahead of the airplane can cause aberrations in light waves and it may appear.to the pilot as if a large sheet of clear cellulose or plastic were in front of the airplane. In addition, the density variation and initial shape of the wave leaving the airplane may cause reflection of sunlight which would appear as a sudden, brilliant ' flash' to the pilot.\n\nOf course, the wave released by decelerating to subsonic speed can travel out ahead of the airplane and traverse a populated area to cause a sonic boom. The initial direction of the released wave will be the flight path of the airplane at the instant it decelerates to subsonic speed. To be sure, the released wave should not be aimed in the direction of a populated area, even if a considerable distance away. There are instances where a released wave has been of an audible magnitude as far as 30 to 40 miles ahead of the point of release. The released pressure wave will be of greatest intensity when created by a large, high drag configuration at low altitude. Since the wave intensity decreases rapidly with distance away from the source, the boom will be of strongest audibility near the point of release.\n\nIt should become apparent that sonic booms are a byproduct of supersonic aviation and, with supersonic flight becoming more commonplace, the problem is more perplexing. The potential of sonic booms is mostly of the audible nature and nuisance of the disturbance. The damage potential of the ordinary sonic boom is quite small and the principal effects are confined to structures which are extremely brittle, low strength, and have characteristic high residual stresses. In other words, only the extremes of pressure waves generated by airplanes in flight could possibly cause cracked plaster and window glass. Such materials\n\n## NAVWEPS OD-ROT-80 APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYING\n\nare quite prone to sharp dynamic stresses and, when .superimposed on the high residual stresses common to the products and building construction, slight but insignificant damage may result. Actually, the most objectionable feature of the sonic boom is the audibility and the anxiety or apprehension caused by the sharp, loud noise which resembles a blast.\n\nThe pressure jump through the shock waves in the immediate vicinity of the airplane is much greater than those common to the audible ' booms' at ground level. Thus, airplanes in close formation at supersonic speeds may encounter considerable interference between airplanes. In addition, to eliminate even the most remote possibility of structural damage, a high speed airplane should not make a supersonic pass close to a large airplane which may have low limit load factor and be prone to be easily disturbed or damaged by a strong pressure wave.\n\n## HELICOPTER PROBLEMS\n\nThe main difference between helicopter and an airplane is the main source of lift. The airplane derives its lift from a fixed airfoil surface while the helicopter derives lift from a rotating airfoil called the rotor. Hence, the aircraft will be classified as either ' fixedwing' or ' rotating wing.' The word ' helicopter' is derived from the Greek words meaning ' helical wing' or ' rotating wing. '\n\nLift generation, by a ' rotating wing' enables the helicopter to accomplish its unique mission of hovering motionless in the air, taking off and landing in a confined or restricted area, and autorotating to a safe landing following a power failure. Lift generation by ' rotating wing' ' is also responsible for some of the unusual problems the helicopter can encounter. Since the helicopter problems are due to particular nature of .the rotor aerodynamics, the basic flow conditions within the rotor must be considered in detail. For simplicity, the initial discussion will consider only the hovering rotor. Although the term hovering", + "recall": 0.9308176100628931, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OD-ROT-80 APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYING \n\n## HELICOPTER PROBLEMS\n\nthe ship. When the airplane slows to sub- sonic, the shock wave travels out ahead of the airplane in a form which is somewhat spheri- cal. Because there are density variations through the shock wave, the shock wave moving ahead of the airplane can cause aber- rations in light waves and it may appear.to the pilot as if a large sheet of clear cellulose or plastic were in front of the airplane. In addition, the density variation and initial shape of the wave leaving the airplane may cause reflection of sunlight which would appear as a sudden, brilliant “flash” to the pilot. Of course, the wave released by decelerating \n\npilot. Of course, the wave released by decelerating to subsonic speed can travel out ahead of the airplane and traverse a populated area to cause a sonic boom. The initial direction of the released wave will be the flight path of the airplane at the instant it decelerates to sub- sonic speed. To be sure, the released wave should not be aimed in the direction of a popu- lated area, even if a considerable distance away. There are instances where a released wave has been of an audible magnitude as far as 30 to 40 miles ahead of the point of release. The released pressure wave will be of greatest intensity when created by a large, high drag configuration at low altitude. Since the wave intensity decreases rapidly with distance away from the source, the boom will be of strongest audibility near the point of release. \n\nIt should become apparent that sonic booms are a byproduct of supersonic aviation and, with supersonic flight becoming more common- place, the problem is more perplexing. The potential of sonic booms is mostly of the audible nature and nuisance of the disturbance. The damage potential of the ordinary sonic boom is quite small and the principal effects are confined to structures which are extremely brittle, low strength, and have characteristic high residual stresses. In other words, only the extremes of pressure waves generated by airplanes in flight could possibly cause cracked plaster and window glass. Such materials \n\nLift generation, by a “rotating wing” enables the helicopter to accomplish its unique mission of hovering motionless in the air, taking off and landing in a confined or restricted area, and autorotating to a safe landing following a power failure. Lift generation by “rotating wing’ ’ is also responsible for some of the unusual problems the helicopter can encounter. Since the helicopter problems are due to par- ticular nature of .the rotor aerodynamics, the basic flow conditions within the rotor must be considered in detail. For simplicity, the initial discussion will consider only the hover- ing rotor. Although the term hovering \n\nThe main difference between helicopter and an airplane is the main source of lift. The airplane derives its lift from a fixed airfoil surface while the helicopter derives lift from a rotating airfoil called the rotor. Hence, the aircraft will be classified as either “fixed- wing” or “rotating wing.” The word “heli- copter” is derived from the Greek words meaning “helical wing” or “rotating wing. ” \n\nThe pressure jump through the shock waves in the immediate vicinity of the airplane is much greater than those common to the audible “booms” at ground level. Thus, airplanes in close formation at supersonic speeds may encounter considerable interference between airplanes. In addition, to eliminate even the most remote possibility of structural damage, a high speed airplane should not make a supersonic pass close to a large air- plane which may have low limit load factor and be prone to be easily disturbed or damaged by a strong pressure wave. \n\nare quite prone to sharp dynamic stresses and, when .superimposed on the high residual stresses common to the products and building construction, slight but insignificant damage may result. Actually, the most objectionable feature of the sonic boom is the audibility and the anxiety or apprehension caused by the sharp, loud noise which resembles a blast." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "3bf023e535bf3020c987f7443ed0ecb08c31b86d74d1b039bcef2b86819c1752", + "edit_distance": 0.48, + "f1_score": 0.9548387096774192, + "meteor": 0.8502436146070297, + "precision": 0.9801324503311258, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.9308176100628931, + "true_md": "ONllVU3dO Sd3MAVN \n\nH13N3US 08-108-00 \n\nSNOllVlIWll" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "743ccf44a277fe219cde864f8f473843af2941fbce166bf2967601f03e3a1670", + "edit_distance": 0.48, + "f1_score": 0.9548387096774192, + "meteor": 0.8502436146070297, + "precision": 0.9801324503311258, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.9308176100628931, + "true_md": "" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8555114513073778, + "doc_id": "71924a67d9e514834a75e1caad0737d8b6afeb22eccccadfd9c22618c796d634", + "edit_distance": 0.8981348637015782, + "f1_score": 0.9161793372319688, + "meteor": 0.6711596462233366, + "precision": 0.9362549800796812, + "pred_md": "The acceleration of the airplane at any instant during takeoff roll is a function of the net accelerating force and the airplane mass. From Newton' s second law of motion:\n\nor\n\nwhere\n\na=acceleration,~fr. per set Fnnet accelerating force, W=weight, lbs. g? gravitational accelerat =32.17 ft. per sec.* M= mass, slugb = WE\n\nThe riet aicelerating fdrce on ' the airplane, F,, is the net of thiust, T, drag, D, and rolling friction, F. Thus, the acceleration -at any instant during takeoff roll is:\n\n\n\nFigure 2.32 illustrates the typical variation of the various fbrces acting on the aircraft throughout the takeoff roll: If ' it is assumed that the aircraft is at essentially constant angle of attack during takeoff roll, CL and Co are constant and the forces of lift and drag vary as the square of the speed. For the case of uniformly accelerated motion, distance along the takeoff roll is proportional also to the square bf the velocity hence velocity squared and distance can be used almost synonomously. Thus, lift and drag will vary lint arly with dyriamic pressure (4) or P from the point of beginning takeoff roll. As the rolling friction coefficient -is esscnti&y unaffected by velocity, the rolling ftiction will vary as the normal force on the wheels. At zero velocity, the normal force on the wheels is equal to the airplane weight but, at takeoff velocity, the lift is equal to the weight and the normal force is zero. Hence, rolling friction decreases linearly with 4 or Vz from the beginning of takeoff roll and reaches zero at the point of takeoff.\n\n185\n\n## NAVWEPS 00-801-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE\n\nThe total retarding for& on the aircraft is the sum of drag and rolling friction (D+F) and, for the majority of configurations, this sum is nearly Constant or changes only slightly during the takeoff roll. The net accelerating force is then the difference between the powerplant thrust and the total retarding force,\n\n\n\nThe variation of the net accelerating force throughout the takeoff roll is shown in figure 2.32. The typical propeller airplane demonstrates a net accelerating force which decreases with velocity and the resulting acceleration is initially high but decreases throughout the takeoff roll. The typical jet airplane demonstrates a net accelerating force which is essentially constant throughout the takeoff roll. As a result, the takeoff performance of the typical turbojet airpiane will compare closely with the case for uniformly accelerated motion.\n\nThe pilot technique required to achieve peak acceleration throughout takeoff roll can vary considerably between airplane configurations. In some instances, maximum acceleration will be obtained by allowing the airplane to remain in the three-point attitude throughout the roll until the airplane simply reaches lift-equal-toweight and flies off the ground. Other airplanes may require the three-point attitude until the takeoff speed is reached then rotation to the takeoff angle of attack to become airborne. Still other configurations may require partial or complete rotation to the takeoff angle of attack prior to reaching the takeoff speed. In this case, the procedure may be necessary to provide a smaller retarding force (D+F) to achieve peak acceleration. Whenever any form of pitch rotation is necessary the pilot must provide the proper angle of attack since an excessive angle of attack will cause excessive drag and hinder (or possibly preclude) a successful takeoff. Also, irisufficient rotation may provide added rolling resistance or require that the airplane accelerate to some excessive speed prior to becoming airborne.\n\nRevised January 1965", + "recall": 0.8969465648854962, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-801-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE \n\nThe total retarding for& on the aircraft is the sum of drag and rolling friction (D+F) and, for the majority of configurations, this sum is nearly Constant or changes only slightly during the takeoff roll. The net accelerating force is then the difference between the power- plant thrust and the total retarding force, \n\nThe acceleration of the airplane at any instant during takeoff roll is a function of the net accelerating force and the airplane mass. From Newton ’ s second law of motion: \n\nor \n\nwhere a=acceleration,~fr. per set \n\nwhere a=acceleration,~fr. per set Fn- net accelerating force, W=weight, lbs. g? gravitational accelerat =32.17 ft. per sec.* M= mass, slugb = WE \n\nThe variation of the net accelerating force throughout the takeoff roll is shown in figure 2.32. The typical propeller airplane demon- strates a net accelerating force which decreases with velocity and the resulting acceleration is initially high but decreases throughout the takeoff roll. The typical jet airplane demon- strates a net accelerating force which is essen- tially constant throughout the takeoff roll. As a result, the takeoff performance of the typical turbojet airpiane will compare closely with the case for uniformly accelerated motion. The pilot technique required to achieve peak \n\nThe riet aicelerating fdrce on ‘ the airplane, F,, is the net of thiust, T, drag, D, and rolling friction, F. Thus, the acceleration -at any instant during takeoff roll is: \n\nwith the case for uniformly accelerated motion. The pilot technique required to achieve peak acceleration throughout takeoff roll can vary considerably between airplane configurations. In some instances, maximum acceleration will be obtained by allowing the airplane to remain in the three-point attitude throughout the roll until the airplane simply reaches lift-equal-to- weight and flies off the ground. Other air- planes may require the three-point attitude until the takeoff speed is reached then rotation to the takeoff angle of attack to become air- borne. Still other configurations may require partial or complete rotation to the takeoff angle of attack prior to reaching the takeoff speed. In this case, the procedure may be necessary to provide a smaller retarding force (D+F) to achieve peak acceleration. When- ever any form of pitch rotation is necessary the pilot must provide the proper angle of attack since an excessive angle of attack will cause excessive drag and hinder (or possibly pre- clude) a successful takeoff. Also, irisufficient rotation may provide added rolling resistance or require that the airplane accelerate to some excessive speed prior to becoming airborne. \n\nFigure 2.32 illustrates the typical variation of the various fbrces acting on the aircraft throughout the takeoff roll: If ‘ it is assumed that the aircraft is at essentially constant angle of attack during takeoff roll, CL and Co are constant and the forces of lift and drag vary as the square of the speed. For the case of uniformly accelerated motion, distance along the takeoff roll is proportional also to the square bf the velocity hence velocity squared and distance can be used almost synon- omously. Thus, lift and drag will vary lint arly with dyriamic pressure (4) or P from the point of beginning takeoff roll. As the rolling friction coefficient -is esscnti&y un- affected by velocity, the rolling ftiction will vary as the normal force on the wheels. At zero velocity, the normal force on the wheels is equal to the airplane weight but, at takeoff velocity, the lift is equal to the weight and the normal force is zero. Hence, rolling fric- tion decreases linearly with 4 or Vz from the beginning of takeoff roll and reaches zero at the point of takeoff. \n\nRevised January 1965 \n\n185 \n\n$$Fn=T-D-F $$\n\n$$a=&T-D-F) $$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5780599819850101, + "doc_id": "abdabfe7eb8b6a8d1e52bad5fcbf7f76d94a20e85855e5483b40c0dda4c4c1bb", + "edit_distance": 0.42857142857142855, + "f1_score": 0.9696969696969697, + "meteor": 0.9293241279069768, + "precision": 0.9411764705882353, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS 00-8OT-80 HIGH SPEED AERODYNAMICS\n\nFigure 3.4. Shock Waves Formed by Various Wedge Shapes\n\nFigure 3.4. Shock Waves Formed by Various Wedge Shapes\n\n208", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-8OT-80 HIGH SPEED AERODYNAMICS \n\nFigure 3.4. Shock Waves Formed by Various Wedge Shapes \n\n208" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.840660309184676, + "doc_id": "dbf12799fa215930a401653944b3d69b2fdfee4ec629742b45ce18708473cc5e", + "edit_distance": 0.6928783382789317, + "f1_score": 0.9192100538599641, + "meteor": 0.7730731096376378, + "precision": 0.9660377358490566, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS 00-801-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE\n\nthe centrifugal flow engine has relatively large acceleration margins and good acceleration characteristics result with the low rotational inertia. The axial flow compressor must operate relatively close to the stall-surge limit to obtain peak efficiency. Thus, the acceleration fuel flow boundary for the axial flow engine is set by these stall-surge limits which are more i mmediate to steady state conditions than turbine temperature limits. The fixed geometry axial flow engine encounters relatively small acceleration margins and, when compared to the centrifugal flow engine with larger acceleration margins and lower rotational inertia, has inferior acceleration characteristics. Certain variation of the axial flow engine such as variable nozzles, variable stator blades, multiple-spool compressors, etc., greatly improve the acceleration characteristics.\n\nA note of caution is appropriate at this point. If the main fuel control and governing apparatus should malfunction or become inoperative and an unmodulated secondary or emergency system be substitued, extreme care must be taken to avoid abrupt changes in throttle position. In such a case, very gradual movement of the throttle is necessary to accomplish changes in power setting without excessive turbine temperatures, compressor stall or surge, or flameout.\n\nThere are various instruments to relate irnr portant items of turbojet engine performance. Certain combinations of these instruments are capable of immediately relating the thrust output of the powerplant in a qualitative manner. It is difficult to provide an instrument or combination of instruments which immediately relate the thrust output in a ~arrantitativ~ manner. As a result, the pilot must rely on a combination of instrument readings and judge the output performance according to standard values particular to the powerplant. Some of the usual engine indicating instruments are as follows :\n\n(1) The tachometer provides indication of engine speed, N, by percent of the maximum\n\nRPM. Since the variation of thrust with RPM is quite powerful, the tachometer indication is a powerful reference.\n\n(2) The exhaust gas temperature gauge provides an important reference for engine operating limitations. While the temperature probe may be located downstream from the turbine (tailpipe or turbine discharge temperature) the instrument should provide an accurate reflection of temperatures upstream in the turbine section. The exhaust gas temperature relates the energy change accomplished by fuel addition.\n\n(3) The fuel flowmeter can provide a fair reflection of thrust output. and operating efficiency. Operation at high density altitude or high inlet air temperatures-reduces the output thrust and this effect is related by a reduction of fuel flow.\n\n(4) The' tailpipe total pressure (p+q in the tailpipe) can be correlated with the jet thrust for a given engine geometry and set of operating conditions. The output thrust can be related accurately with various combinations of compressor inlet total pressure, tailpipe total pressure, ambient pressure and temperature. Hence; pressure differential (Ap), pressure ratio, and ,tailpipe total pressure instruments can provide more accurate i mmediate indications of output thrust than combined indications of RPM and EGT. This is especially true with variable geometry or multiple spool engines.\n\nMany other specialized instruments furnish additional information for more detailed items of engine performance. Various additional engine information is realized from fuel pressure, nozzle positions, compressor inlet air temperature, etc.\n\n## TURBOJET OPERATING LIMITATIONS.\n\nThe operating characteristics of the turbojet engine provide various operating limitations which must be given due respect. Operation of the powerplant within the specified limitations is absolutely necessary in order to obtain", + "recall": 0.8767123287671232, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-801-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE \n\nRPM. Since the variation of thrust with RPM is quite powerful, the tachometer in- dication is a powerful reference. \n\nthe centrifugal flow engine has relatively large acceleration margins and good acceleration characteristics result with the low rotational inertia. The axial flow compressor must oper- ate relatively close to the stall-surge limit to obtain peak efficiency. Thus, the acceleration fuel flow boundary for the axial flow engine is set by these stall-surge limits which are more immediate to steady state conditions than tur- bine temperature limits. The fixed geometry axial flow engine encounters relatively small acceleration margins and, when compared to the centrifugal flow engine with larger accel- eration margins and lower rotational inertia, has inferior acceleration characteristics. Cer- tain variation of the axial flow engine such as variable nozzles, variable stator blades, multi- ple-spool compressors, etc., greatly improve the acceleration characteristics. A note of caution is appropriate at this \n\n(2) The exhaust gas temperature gauge provides an important reference for engine operating limitations. While the tempera- ture probe may be located downstream from the turbine (tailpipe or turbine discharge temperature) the instrument should provide an accurate reflection of temperatures up- stream in the turbine section. The exhaust gas temperature relates the energy change accomplished by fuel addition. \n\n(3) The fuel flowmeter can provide a fair reflection of thrust output. and operating efficiency. Operation at high density alti- tude or high inlet air temperatures-reduces the output thrust and this effect is related by a reduction of fuel flow. \n\n(4) The’ tailpipe total pressure (p+q in the tailpipe) can be correlated with the jet thrust for a given engine geometry and set of operating conditions. The output thrust can be related accurately with various com- binations of compressor inlet total pressure, tailpipe total pressure, ambient pressure and temperature. Hence; pressure differential (Ap), pressure ratio, and ,tailpipe total pres- sure instruments can provide more accurate immediate indications of output thrust than combined indications of RPM and EGT. This is especially true with variable geom- etry or multiple spool engines. \n\nthe acceleration characteristics. A note of caution is appropriate at this point. If the main fuel control and govern- ing apparatus should malfunction or become inoperative and an unmodulated secondary or emergency system be substitued, extreme care must be taken to avoid abrupt changes in throttle position. In such a case, very gradual movement of the throttle is necessary to ac- complish changes in power setting without excessive turbine temperatures, compressor stall or surge, or flameout. There are various instruments to relate irnr \n\nstall or surge, or flameout. There are various instruments to relate irnr portant items of turbojet engine performance. Certain combinations of these instruments are capable of immediately relating the thrust output of the powerplant in a qualitative man- ner. It is difficult to provide an instrument or combination of instruments which immedi- ately relate the thrust output in a ~arrantitativ~ manner. As a result, the pilot must rely on a combination of instrument readings and judge the output performance according to standard values particular to the powerplant. Some of the usual engine indicating instruments are as follows : \n\nMany other specialized instruments furnish additional information for more detailed items of engine performance. Various additional engine information is realized from fuel pres- sure, nozzle positions, compressor inlet air temperature, etc. \n\n(1) The tachometer provides indication of engine speed, N, by percent of the maximum \n\nThe operating characteristics of the turbojet engine provide various operating limitations which must be given due respect. Operation of the powerplant within the specified limita- tions is absolutely necessary in order to obtain \n\n## TURBOJET OPERATING LIMITATIONS." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9563179572081724, + "doc_id": "e3526d7f1db8e814862dd27543fb0241ac5d0460f1c3c1b2943a3053bbd2c315", + "edit_distance": 0.30250783699059564, + "f1_score": 0.9790940766550523, + "meteor": 0.9605082580680837, + "precision": 0.9859649122807017, + "pred_md": "Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR) Areas Relating to National Security are indicated with a broken blue line . A Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR) is a type of Notice to Airmen (NOTAM). A TFR defines an area where air travel is restricted due to a hazardous condition, a special event, or a general warning for the entire airspace. The text of the actual TFR contains the fine points of the restriction. It is important to note that only TFRs relating to National Secu -rity are charted.\n\nAir Defense Identification Zones (ADIZs) are symbolized using the ADIZ symbol: . As defined in Code of Federal Regulations 14 (CFR 14) Part 99, an ADIZ is an area in which the ready identification, location, and control of all aircraft is required in the interest of national security. ADIZ boundaries include Alaska, Hawaii, Guam, Canada and the Contiguous U.S.\n\nTerminal Radar Service Areas (TRSAs) are shown in their entirety, symbolized by a screened black outline of the entire area including the various sectors within the area .\n\nThe outer limit of the entire Terminal Radar Service Areas (TRSA) is a continuous screened black line. The various sectors within the TRSA are symbolized by narrower screened black lines.\n\nEach sector altitude is identified in solid black color by the MSL ceiling and floor values of the respective sector, elimi -nating the last two zeros. A leader line is used when the altitude values must be positioned outside the respective sectors because of charting space limitations. The TRSA name is shown near the north position of the TRSA as follows: . Associated frequencies are listed in a table on the chart border.\n\nMilitary Training Routes (MTRs) are shown on Sectionals and TACs. They are identified by the route designator: . Route designators are shown in solid black on the route centerline, positioned along the route for continuity. The designator IR or VR is not repeated when two or more routes are established over the same airspace, e.g., IR201-205-227. Routes numbered 001 to 099 are shown as IR1 or VR99, eliminating the initial zeros. Direction of flight along the route is indicated by small arrowheads adjacent to and in conjunction with each route designator.\n\nThe following note appears on Helicopters, Sectionals and TACs except for Hawaiian Islands which is different.\n\n## There are IFR (IR) and VFR (VR) routes as follows:\n\n## Route identification:\n\n- a. Routes at or below 1500' AGL (with no segment above 1500') are identified by four-digit numbers; e.g., VR1007, etc. These routes are generally developed for flight under Visual Flight Rules.\n- b. Routes above 1500' AGL (some segments of these routes may be below 1500') are identified by three or fewer digit numbers; e.g., IR21, VR302, etc. These routes are developed for flight under Instrument Flight Rules.\n\nMTRs can vary in width from 4 to 16 miles. Detailed route width information is available in the Flight Information Publication (FLIP) AP/1B (a Department of Defense publication), or through the 56 Day NASR Subscription from the National Flight Data Center (NFDC).\n\nSpecial Military Activity areas are indicated on Sectionals by a boxed note in black type. The note contains radio frequency information for obtaining area activity status.\n\n19\n\nFAA Chart Users Guide - VFR Terms and Symbols", + "recall": 0.972318339100346, + "true_md": "## There are IFR (IR) and VFR (VR) routes as follows:\n\nFAA Chart Users Guide - VFR Terms and Symbols\n\n19\n\nTemporary Flight Restriction (TFR) Areas Relating to National Security are indicated with a broken blue line . A Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR) is a type of Notice to Airmen (NOTAM). A TFR defines an area where air travel is restricted due to a hazardous condition, a special event, or a general warning for the entire airspace. The text of the actual TFR contains the fine points of the restriction. It is important to note that only TFRs relating to National Secu - rity are charted.\n\nAir Defense Identification Zones (ADIZs) are symbolized using the ADIZ symbol: . As defined in Code of Federal Regulations 14 (CFR 14) Part 99, an ADIZ is an area in which the ready identification, location, and control of all aircraft is required in the interest of national security. ADIZ boundaries include Alaska, Hawaii, Guam, Canada and the Contiguous U.S.\n\nTerminal Radar Service Areas (TRSAs) are shown in their entirety, symbolized by a screened black outline of the entire area including the various sectors within the area .\n\nThe outer limit of the entire Terminal Radar Service Areas (TRSA) is a continuous screened black line. The various sec- tors within the TRSA are symbolized by narrower screened black lines.\n\nEach sector altitude is identified in solid black color by the MSL ceiling and floor values of the respective sector, elimi - nating the last two zeros. A leader line is used when the altitude values must be positioned outside the respective sec- tors because of charting space limitations. The TRSA name is shown near the north position of the TRSA as follows: . Associated frequencies are listed in a table on the chart border.\n\nMilitary Training Routes (MTRs) are shown on Sectionals and TACs. They are identified by the route designator: . Route designators are shown in solid black on the route centerline, positioned along the route for continuity. The designator IR or VR is not repeated when two or more routes are established over the same airspace, e.g., IR201-205-227. Routes numbered 001 to 099 are shown as IR1 or VR99, eliminating the initial zeros. Direction of flight along the route is indicated by small arrowheads adjacent to and in conjunction with each route designator.\n\nThe following note appears on Helicopters, Sectionals and TACs except for Hawaiian Islands which is different.\n\nMTRs can vary in width from 4 to 16 miles. Detailed route width information is available in the Flight Information Publica- tion (FLIP) AP/1B (a Department of Defense publication), or through the 56 Day NASR Subscription from the National Flight Data Center (NFDC).\n\nSpecial Military Activity areas are indicated on Sectionals by a boxed note in black type. The note contains radio fre- quency information for obtaining area activity status.\n\n- b. Routes above 1500' AGL (some segments of these routes may be below 1500') are identified by three or fewer digit numbers; e.g., IR21, VR302, etc. These routes are developed for flight under Instrument Flight Rules.\n\n- a. Routes at or below 1500' AGL (with no segment above 1500') are identified by four-digit numbers; e.g., VR1007, etc. These routes are generally developed for flight under Visual Flight Rules.\n\n## Route identification:" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.911622755269259, + "doc_id": "292daed36c50c5653ce701b33a8d9ebc4768baf6131e1d539e06eb5712e21d53", + "edit_distance": 0.8294460641399417, + "f1_score": 0.9407894736842105, + "meteor": 0.7791694885601146, + "precision": 0.9694915254237289, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS 00-ROT-80 HIGH SPEED AERODYNAMICS\n\nand landing speeds usually will be accepted. While the reduction of lift curve slope may be an advantage for gust considerations, the reduced sensitivity to changes in angle of attack has certain undesirable effects in subsonic flight. The reduced wing lift curve slope tends to increase maximum lift angles of attack and complicate the problem of landing gear design and cockpit visibility. Also, the lower lift curve slope would reduce the contribution to stability of a given tail surface area.\n\n(3) The use of sweepback will reduce the effectiveness of trailing edge control surfaces and high lift devices. A typical example of this effect is the application of a single slotted flap over the inboard 60 percent span to both a straight wing and a wing with 35' sweepback. The flap applied to the straight wing produces an increase in maximum lift coefficient of approximately 50 percent. The same type flap applied to the swept wing produces an increase in maximum lift coefficient of approximately 20 percent. To produce some reasonable maximum lift coefficient one a swept wing may require unsweeping the flap hinge line, application of leading edge high lift devices such as slots or slats, and possibly boundary layer control.\n\n(4) As described previously, sweepback contributes to lateral stability by producing stable rolling moments with sideslip. The lateral stability contribution of sweepback varies with the amount of wing sweepback and wing lift coefficient-large sweepback and high lift coefficients producing large contribution to lateral stability. While stability is desirable, any excess of stability will reduce controllability. For the majority of airplane configurations, high lateral stability is neither necessary nor desirable, but adequate control in roll is absolutely necessary for good flying qualities. An excess of lateral stability from sweepback can aggravate ' Dutch roll' problems and produce\n\n134\n\nmarginal control during crosswind takeoff and landing where the aircraft must move in a controlled sideslip. Therefore, it is not unusual to find swept wing aircraft with negative dihedral and lateral control devices designed principally to meet cross wind takeoff and landing requirements.\n\n(5) The structural complexity and aeroelastic problems created by sweepback are of great importance. First, there is the effect shown in figure 3.17 that swept wing has a greater structural span than a straight wing of the same area and aspect ratio. This effect increases wing structural weight since greater bending and shear material must be distributed in the wing to produce the same design strength. An additional problem is created near the wing root and ' carrythrough' structure due to the large twisting loads and the tendency of the bending stress distribution to concentrate toward the trailing edge. Also shown in figure 3.17 is the influence of wing deflection on the spanwise lift distribution. Wing bending produces tip rotation which tends to unload the tip and move the center of pressure forward. Thus, the same effect which tends to allay divergence can make an undesirable contribution to longitudinal stability.\n\nEFFECT OF ASPECT RATIO AND TIP SHAPE. In addition to wing sweep, planform properties such as aspect ratio, and tip shape, can produce significant effects on the aerodynamic characteristics at high speeds. There is no particular effect of aspect ratio on critical Mach number at high or medium aspect ratios. The aspect ratio must be less than four or five to produce any apparent change in critical Mach number. This effect is shown for a typical 9 percent thick symmetrical airfoil in the graph of figure 3.18. Note that very low aspect ratios are required to cause a significant increase in critical Mach number. Very low aspect ratios create the extremes of three dimensional flow and subsequent increase in free stream speed to create", + "recall": 0.9137380191693291, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-ROT-80 HIGH SPEED AERODYNAMICS \n\nmarginal control during crosswind takeoff and landing where the aircraft must move in a controlled sideslip. Therefore, it is not unusual to find swept wing aircraft with negative dihedral and lateral control de- vices designed principally to meet cross wind takeoff and landing requirements. \n\nand landing speeds usually will be accepted. While the reduction of lift curve slope may be an advantage for gust considerations, the reduced sensitivity to changes in angle of attack has certain undesirable effects in subsonic flight. The reduced wing lift curve slope tends to increase maximum lift angles of attack and complicate the problem of landing gear design and cockpit visi- bility. Also, the lower lift curve slope would reduce the contribution to stability of a given tail surface area. \n\n(5) The structural complexity and aero- elastic problems created by sweepback are of great importance. First, there is the effect shown in figure 3.17 that swept wing has a greater structural span than a straight wing of the same area and aspect ratio. This effect increases wing structural weight since greater bending and shear material must be distributed in the wing to produce the same design strength. An additional problem is created near the wing root and “carry- through” structure due to the large twisting loads and the tendency of the bending stress distribution to concentrate toward the trail- ing edge. Also shown in figure 3.17 is the influence of wing deflection on the spanwise lift distribution. Wing bending produces tip rotation which tends to unload the tip and move the center of pressure forward. Thus, the same effect which tends to allay divergence can make an undesirable contri- bution to longitudinal stability. \n\n(3) The use of sweepback will reduce the effectiveness of trailing edge control surfaces and high lift devices. A typical example of this effect is the application of a single slotted flap over the inboard 60 percent span to both a straight wing and a wing with 35” sweepback. The flap applied to the straight wing produces an increase in maximum lift coefficient of approxi- mately 50 percent. The same type flap applied to the swept wing produces an increase in maximum lift coefficient of approximately 20 percent. To produce some reasonable maximum lift coefficient one a swept wing may require unsweeping the flap hinge line, application of leading edge high lift devices such as slots or slats, and possibly boundary layer control. \n\nEFFECT OF ASPECT RATIO AND TIP SHAPE. In addition to wing sweep, plan- form properties such as aspect ratio, and tip shape, can produce significant effects on the aerodynamic characteristics at high speeds. There is no particular effect of aspect ratio on critical Mach number at high or medium aspect ratios. The aspect ratio must be less than four or five to produce any apparent change in critical Mach number. This effect is shown for a typical 9 percent thick sym- metrical airfoil in the graph of figure 3.18. Note that very low aspect ratios are required to cause a significant increase in critical Mach number. Very low aspect ratios create the extremes of three dimensional flow and sub- sequent increase in free stream speed to create \n\n(4) As described previously, sweepback contributes to lateral stability by producing stable rolling moments with sideslip. The lateral stability contribution of sweepback varies with the amount of wing sweepback and wing lift coefficient-large sweepback and high lift coefficients producing large contribution to lateral stability. While sta- bility is desirable, any excess of stability will reduce controllability. For the majority of airplane configurations, high lateral sta- bility is neither necessary nor desirable, but adequate control in roll is absolutely neces- sary for good flying qualities. An excess of lateral stability from sweepback can aggra- vate “Dutch roll” problems and produce \n\n134" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.028718350152065218, + "doc_id": "efe5529bc6d0f77ce257c53ecaaf66cd7c6c6b9dd2288e070845cd17ee16561c", + "edit_distance": 0.9728813559322034, + "f1_score": 0.09803921568627452, + "meteor": 0.13503331218274114, + "precision": 0.05263157894736842, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS OO-801-8O TABLE OF CONTENTS\n\nTABLE OF CONTENTS\n\nTABLE OF CONTENTS\n\n| PREFACE.. ,., . | iii |\n|------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|-----------|\n| CHAPTER I: BASIC AERODYNAMICS | |\n| WING AND AIRFOIL FORCES | |\n| PROPERTIES OF THE ATMOSPHERE. Static pressure Temperature | 1 |\n| Density Viscosity Standard atmosphere Pressure altitude Density altitude BERNOULLI' S PRINCIPLE AND SUBSONIC AIRFLOW.. | 4 |\n| Bernoulli' s equation, | 6 |\n| Incompressible tlow Variation of static pressure nd velocity a Kinetic and porcntial energy of flow Static and dynamic prcssurc, 4 Factors affecting dynamic pressure Airspeed measurement.. | 9 |\n| Stagnation prcssurc Measurement of dynamic pressure Pitot and static sources Indicated airspeed | 14 |\n| DEVELOPMENT OF AERODYNAMIC FORCES.. Streamline pattern and pressure distribution. Generatioaoflift.......................................... | 14 |\n| Circulation Pressure distribution | 16 |\n| Airfoil terminology. Aerodynamic force coefficient . . Basic lift equation | |\n| Lift coefficient | ' ,: 2 3 |\n| Dynamic prcssurc and surface area | |\n\n'", + "recall": 0.7142857142857143, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OO-801-8O TABLE OF CONTENTS \n\n## TABLE OF CONTENTS\n\n”" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.24283216483861972, + "doc_id": "59a657e66431eb29f4a32397f10d32d895673f10f0cf90d8a4d7f82d8fbe27d8", + "edit_distance": 0.6410256410256411, + "f1_score": 0.6976744186046512, + "meteor": 0.7591916702216746, + "precision": 0.6, + "pred_md": "## PLANVIEW SYMBOLS\n\n## EC-1, 22 APR 2021 to 17 JUN 2021\n\n123\n\nEC-1, 22 APR 2021 to 17 JUN 2021\n\nFAA Chart Users' Guide - Terminal Procedures Publication (TPP) - Symbols", + "recall": 0.8333333333333334, + "true_md": "## PLANVIEW SYMBOLS\n\nFAA Chart Users’ Guide - T erminal Procedures Publication (TPP) - Symbols\n\n123" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.3411234949590642, + "doc_id": "d9a12ff4d9257423df2141760a76b6831a7aa70fe9b7438ad0eb6ac61b8c6b0d", + "edit_distance": 0.5121951219512195, + "f1_score": 0.723404255319149, + "meteor": 0.8116060950969233, + "precision": 0.6296296296296297, + "pred_md": "## APPROACH LIGHTING SYSTEM (Continued)\n\nEC-1, 22 APR 2021 to 17 JUN 2021\n\n121\n\nEC-1, 22 APR 2021 to 17 JUN 2021\n\nFAA Chart Users' Guide - Terminal Procedures Publication (TPP) - Symbols", + "recall": 0.85, + "true_md": "## APPROACH LIGHTING SYSTEM (Continued)\n\n121\n\nFAA Chart Users’ Guide - T erminal Procedures Publication (TPP) - Symbols" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9261203442029824, + "doc_id": "74cbd843ec871d38d0aced3c0c6127212a5486fccba57a61ab848a4911008211", + "edit_distance": 0.7528735632183908, + "f1_score": 0.9540229885057472, + "meteor": 0.8337639032275367, + "precision": 0.9651162790697675, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS OO-80T-80 OPERATING STRENGTH LIMITATIONS\n\nfigure 5.2. Effect of Vertical Gust\n\nfigure 5.2. Effect of Vertical Gust\n\ne.g., if in level flight before encountering the gust, a final load factor of 1.0+1.61=2.61 would result. As a general requirement all airplanes must be capable of withstanding an approximate effective f30 ft. per sec. gust when at maximum level flight speed for normal rated power. Such a gust intensity has relatively low frequency of occurrence in ordinary flying operations.\n\nThe equation for gust load increment provides a basis for appreciating many of the variables of flight. The gust load increment varies directly with the equivalent sharp edged gust velocity, KU, since this factor effects the change in angle of attack.' The highest reasonable gust velocity that may be anticipated is an actual vertical velocity, U, of 50 ft. per sec. This value is tempered by the fact that the airplane does not effectively encounter the full effect because of the response\n\nof the airplane and the gradient of the gust. A gust factor, K (usually on the order of 0.6), reduces the actual gust to the equivalent sharp edged gust velocity, KU.\n\nThe properties of the airplane exert a powerful influence on the gust increment. The lift curve slope, m, relates the sensitivity of the airplane to changes in angle of attack. An aircraft with a straight, high aspect ratio wing would have a high lift curve slope and would be quite sensitive to gusts. On the other hand, the low aspect ratio, swept wing airplane has a low lift curve slope and is comparatively less sensitive to turbulence. The apparent effect of wing loading, W/S, is at times misleading and is best understood by considering a particular airplane encountering a fixed gust condition at various gross weights. If the airplane encounters the gust at lower than ordinary gross weight, the accelerations", + "recall": 0.9431818181818182, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OO-80T-80 OPERATING STRENGTH LIMITATIONS \n\nfigure 5.2. Effect of Vertical Gust \n\nof the airplane and the gradient of the gust. A gust factor, K (usually on the order of 0.6), reduces the actual gust to the equivalent sharp edged gust velocity, KU. \n\ne.g., if in level flight before encountering the gust, a final load factor of 1.0+1.61=2.61 would result. As a general requirement all airplanes must be capable of withstanding an approximate effective f30 ft. per sec. gust when at maximum level flight speed for normal rated power. Such a gust intensity has rela- tively low frequency of occurrence in ordinary flying operations. \n\nThe properties of the airplane exert a power- ful influence on the gust increment. The lift curve slope, m, relates the sensitivity of the airplane to changes in angle of attack. An aircraft with a straight, high aspect ratio wing would have a high lift curve slope and would be quite sensitive to gusts. On the other hand, the low aspect ratio, swept wing airplane has a low lift curve slope and is com- paratively less sensitive to turbulence. The apparent effect of wing loading, W/S, is at times misleading and is best understood by considering a particular airplane encountering a fixed gust condition at various gross weights. If the airplane encounters the gust at lower than ordinary gross weight, the accelerations \n\nThe equation for gust load increment pro- vides a basis for appreciating many of the variables of flight. The gust load increment varies directly with the equivalent sharp edged gust velocity, KU, since this factor effects the change in angle of attack.’ The highest reasonable gust velocity that may be anticipated is an actual vertical velocity, U, of 50 ft. per sec. This value is tempered by the fact that the airplane does not effectively encounter the full effect because of the response" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.28035290116063705, + "doc_id": "31c6e5524b98346431d0cea2f205b78a677b0bbe3273d9fe58074a7e1329b119", + "edit_distance": 0.6052631578947368, + "f1_score": 0.7111111111111111, + "meteor": 0.7844536901071409, + "precision": 0.6153846153846154, + "pred_md": "FAA Chart Users' Guide - Terminal Procedures Publication (TPP) - Symbols\n\n## APPROACH LIGHTING SYSTEM\n\nEC-1, 22 APR 2021 to 17 JUN 2021\n\nEC-1, 22 APR 2021 to 17 JUN 2021\n\n120", + "recall": 0.8421052631578947, + "true_md": "FAA Chart Users’ Guide - T erminal Procedures Publication (TPP) - Symbols\n\n120\n\n## APPROACH LIGHTING SYSTEM" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5839394057503656, + "doc_id": "7ec25035e517e6f8422d68cfb2b1d985b4b876c9c87279f8423aab2148d1df8a", + "edit_distance": 0.4, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9323559670781892, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS 00-BOT-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL\n\nFigure 4.7. Effect of CM~~ C. G. Position and Mach Nimber\n\nFigure 4.7. Effect of CM~~ C. G. Position and Mach Nimber\n\n255", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-BOT-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL \n\nFigure 4.7. Effect of CM~~ C. G. Position and Mach Nimber \n\n255" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6059856413067048, + "doc_id": "5f080d80912ec7cef8e8cae1f53ab6c6865b40082f8793a48a72ecd11ce8726f", + "edit_distance": 0.3076923076923077, + "f1_score": 0.8999999999999999, + "meteor": 0.9567901234567902, + "precision": 0.8181818181818182, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS OeBOT-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS\n\nFROM NACA TN 2674\n\nFROM NACA TN 2674\n\nF;gure 1.33. Stall Patterns (sheet 2 of 8)\n\n79", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OeBOT-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS \n\nF;gure 1.33. Stall Patterns (sheet 2 of 8) \n\n79" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9017590477868551, + "doc_id": "424a8dc3f28b68b6d18e8ff1e62ad8210732665ffd43a19e2e786ad2dc5bebf1", + "edit_distance": 0.7047756874095513, + "f1_score": 0.9530434782608695, + "meteor": 0.8287367115838797, + "precision": 0.9681978798586572, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS 00-8OT-80 HIGH SPEED AERODYNAMICS\n\nslowed gradually through a series of very weak oblique shock waves to a speed just above sonic velocity. Then the subsequent normal shock to subsonic could be quite weak. Such a combination of the weakest possible waves would result in the least waste of energy and the highest pressure recovery. The efficiency of various types of diffusers is shown in figure 3.20 and illustrates this principle.\n\nAn obvious complication of the supersonic inlet is that the optimum shape is variable with inlet flow direction and Mach number. In other words, to derive highest efficiency and stability of operation, the geometry of the inlet would be different at each Mach number and angle of attack of flight. A typical supersonic military aircraft may experience large variations in angle of attack, sideslip angle, and flight Mach number during normal operation. These large variations in inlet flow conditions create certain important design considerations.\n\n- (1) The inlet should provide the highest practical efficiency. The ratio of recovered total pressure to airstream total pressure is an appropriate measure of this efficiency.\n- (2) The inlet should match the demands of the powerplant for airflow. The airflow captured by the inlet should match that necessary for engine operation.\n- (3) Operation of the inlet at flight conditions other than the design condition should not cause a noticeable loss of efficiency or excess drag. The operation of the inlet should be stable and not allow ' buzz' conditions (an oscillation of shock location possible during off-design operation).\n\nIn order to develop a good, stable inlet design, the performance at the design condition may be compromised. A large variation of inlet flow conditions may require special geometric features for the inlet surfaces or a completely variable geometry inlet design,\n\nSUPERSONIC CONFIGURATIONS. When all the various components of the supersonic\n\nairplane are developed, the most likely general configuration properties will beas follows:\n\n- (1) The wing will be of low aspect ratio, have noticeable taper, and have sweepback depending on the design speed range. The wing sections will be of low thickness ratio and require sharp leading edges.\n- (2) The fmelagc and naceller will be of high fineness ratio (long and slender). The supersonic pressure distribution may create significant lift and drag and require consideration of the stability contribution of these surfaces.\n- (3) The t&Z surfaces will be similar to the wing-low aspect ratio, tapered, swept and of thin section with sharp leading edge. The controls will be fully powered and irreversible with all movable surfaces the most likely configuration.\n- (4) In order to reduce interference drag in transonic and supersonic flight, the gross cross section of the aircraft may be ' area ruled' to approach that of some optimum high speed shape.\n\nOne of the most important qualities of high speed configurations will be the low speed flight characteristics. The low aspect ratio swept wing planform has the characteristic of high i nduced drag at low flight speeds. Steep turns, excessively low airspeeds, and steep, power-off approaches can then produce extremely high rates of descent during landing. Sweepback and low aspect ratio can cause severe deterioration ' of handling qualities at speeds below those recommended for takeoff and landing. On the other hand, thin, swept wings at high wing loading will have relatively high landing speeds. Any excess of this basically high airspeed can create an impossible requirement of brakes, tires, and arrest ing gear. These characteristics require that the pilot account for the variation of optimum speeds with weight changes and adhere to the procedures and techniques outlined in the flight handbook.", + "recall": 0.9383561643835616, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-8OT-80 HIGH SPEED AERODYNAMICS \n\nairplane are developed, the most likely general configuration properties will beas follows: \n\nslowed gradually through a series of very weak oblique shock waves to a speed just above sonic velocity. Then the subsequent normal shock to subsonic could be quite weak. Such a combination of the weakest possible waves would result in the least waste of energy and the highest pressure recovery. The ef- ficiency of various types of diffusers is shown in figure 3.20 and illustrates this principle. \n\n(1) The wing will be of low aspect ratio, have noticeable taper, and have sweepback depending on the design speed range. The wing sections will be of low thickness ratio and require sharp leading edges. \n\n(2) The fmelagc and naceller will be of high fineness ratio (long and slender). The supersonic pressure distribution may create significant lift and drag and require con- sideration of the stability contribution of these surfaces. \n\n(3) The t&Z surfaces will be similar to the wing-low aspect ratio, tapered, swept and of thin section with sharp leading edge. The controls will be fully powered and ir- reversible with all movable surfaces the most likely configuration. \n\n(4) In order to reduce interference drag in transonic and supersonic flight, the gross cross section of the aircraft may be “area ruled” to approach that of some optimum high speed shape. One of the most important qualities of high \n\nAn obvious complication of the supersonic inlet is that the optimum shape is variable with inlet flow direction and Mach number. In other words, to derive highest efficiency and stability of operation, the geometry of the inlet would be different at each Mach number and angle of attack of flight. A typical super- sonic military aircraft may experience large variations in angle of attack, sideslip angle, and flight Mach number during normal oper- ation. These large variations in inlet flow conditions create certain important design considerations. \n\n(1) The inlet should provide the highest practical efficiency. The ratio of recovered total pressure to airstream total pressure is an appropriate measure of this efficiency. \n\n(2) The inlet should match the demands of the powerplant for airflow. The airflow captured by the inlet should match that necessary for engine operation. \n\n(3) Operation of the inlet at flight condi- tions other than the design condition should not cause a noticeable loss of efficiency or excess drag. The operation of the inlet should be stable and not allow “buzz” conditions (an oscillation of shock location possible during off-design operation). \n\nhigh speed shape. One of the most important qualities of high speed configurations will be the low speed flight characteristics. The low aspect ratio swept wing planform has the characteristic of high induced drag at low flight speeds. Steep turns, excessively low airspeeds, and steep, power-off approaches can then produce extremely high rates of descent during landing. Sweepback and low aspect ratio can cause severe deterioration ‘ of handling qualities at speeds below those recommended for takeoff and landing. On the other hand, thin, swept wings at high wing loading will have rela- tively high landing speeds. Any excess of this basically high airspeed can create an im- possible requirement of brakes, tires, and arrest ing gear. These characteristics require that the pilot account for the variation of optimum speeds with weight changes and adhere to the procedures and techniques outlined in the flight handbook. \n\nIn order to develop a good, stable inlet design, the performance at the design condition may be compromised. A large variation of inlet flow conditions may require special geometric features for the inlet surfaces or a completely variable geometry inlet design, \n\nSUPERSONIC CONFIGURATIONS. When all the various components of the supersonic" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9819883387615491, + "doc_id": "078106e7467d4d2ca89f9d96bce4d5ee543320075e250ad9adbc1e29536cb858", + "edit_distance": 0.05405405405405406, + "f1_score": 0.9919571045576406, + "meteor": 0.9926696670455425, + "precision": 0.9946236559139785, + "pred_md": "FAA Chart Users' Guide - VFR Terms and Symbols\n\nAirports are plotted in their true geographic position unless the symbol conflicts with a NAVAID at the same location. In such cases, the airport symbol will be displaced, but the relationship between the airport and the NAVAID will be retained.\n\nAirports are identified by their designated name. Generic parts of long airport names (such as \"airport,\" \"field,\" or \"municipal\") and the first names of persons are commonly omitted unless they are needed to distinguish one airport from another with a similar name.\n\nThe figure at right illustrates the coded data that is provided along with the airport name.\n\nThe elevation of an airport is the highest point on the usable portion of the landing areas. Runway length is the length of the longest active runway, including displaced thresholds and excluding overruns. Runway length is shown to the nearest 100', using 70 as the rounding point; a runway 8070' in length is charted as 81, while a runway 8069' in length is charted as 80. If a seaplane base is collocated with an airport, there will be additional seaplane base water information listed for the elevation, lighting and runway.\n\nAirports with Control Towers (CT) and their related data are shown in blue. All other airports and their related data are shown in magenta. The symbol indicates that runway lights are on from dusk to dawn. indicates that the pilot must consult the Chart Supplement to determine runway lighting limitations, such as: available on request (by radio-call, letter, phone, etc), part-time lighting, or pilot/airport controlled lighting. Lighting codes refer to runway edge lights. The lighted runway may not be the longest runway available, and lights may not be illuminated along the full length of the runway. The Chart Supplement has a detailed description of airport and air navigation lighting aids for each airport. A dash represents no runway edge lights.\n\nThe symbol indicates the existence of a rotating or flashing airport beacon operating from dusk to dawn. The Aeronau -tical Information Manual (AIM) thoroughly explains the types and uses of airport lighting aids.\n\n16", + "recall": 0.9893048128342246, + "true_md": "Airports are plotted in their true geographic position unless the symbol conflicts with a NAVAID at the same location. In such cases, the airport symbol will be displaced, but the relationship between the airport and the NAVAID will be retained.\n\nAirports are identified by their designated name. Generic parts of long airport names (such as \"airport,\" \"field,\" or \"municipal\") and the first names of persons are commonly omitted unless they are needed to distinguish one airport from another with a similar name.\n\nThe figure at right illustrates the coded data that is provided along with the airport name.\n\nThe elevation of an airport is the highest point on the usable portion of the landing areas. Runway length is the length of the longest active runway, including displaced thresholds and excluding overruns. Runway length is shown to the nearest 100', using 70 as the rounding point; a runway 8070' in length is charted as 81, while a runway 8069' in length is charted as 80. If a seaplane base is collocated with an airport, there will be additional seaplane base water information listed for the elevation, lighting and runway.\n\nAirports with Control Towers (CT) and their related data are shown in blue. All other airports and their related data are shown in magenta. The symbol indicates that runway lights are on from dusk to dawn. indicates that the pilot must consult the Chart Supplement to determine runway lighting limitations, such as: available on request (by radio-call, letter, phone, etc), part-time lighting, or pilot/airport controlled lighting. Lighting codes refer to runway edge lights. The lighted runway may not be the longest runway available, and lights may not be illuminated along the full length of the runway. The Chart Supplement has a detailed description of airport and air navigation lighting aids for each airport. A dash represents no runway edge lights.\n\nThe symbol indicates the existence of a rotating or flashing airport beacon operating from dusk to dawn. The Aeronau - tical Information Manual (AIM) thoroughly explains the types and uses of airport lighting aids.\n\n16\n\nFAA Chart Users’ Guide - VFR Terms and Symbols" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.2190010904827053, + "doc_id": "c72f047e6d4708ee50139e95b93e20eaa746d5b9b0f5eba270de84f575e16f69", + "edit_distance": 0.717391304347826, + "f1_score": 0.6842105263157895, + "meteor": 0.7859295023051512, + "precision": 0.52, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS Oe8OT-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL\n\n## EFFECT OF RUDDER FLOAT ON STATIC DIRECTIONAL STABILITY\n\nEFFECT OF ANGLE OF ATTACK\n\nEFFECT OF ANGLE OF ATTACK\n\n## EFFECT OF MACH NUMBER\n\nFigure 4.24. Factors Affecting Direcfional Stability\n\nFigure 4.24. Factors Affecting Direcfional Stability\n\n289", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS Oe8OT-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL \n\nFigure 4.24. Factors Affecting Direcfional Stability \n\n289" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.352738103364239, + "doc_id": "9803962efe7c14242dc6ee805f821ea882355dc28341d43380efed2ceaab99d3", + "edit_distance": 0.6296296296296297, + "f1_score": 0.7017543859649124, + "meteor": 0.8542735042735043, + "precision": 0.5405405405405406, + "pred_md": "NAWWEPS 00-8OT-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS\n\n,-\n\n## WING UPPER SURFACE\n\nWING\n\nLOWER SURFACE\n\nTIP\n\nVORTEX\n\nVORTICES\n\nALONG\n\nTRAILING\n\nEDGE\n\nLOW\n\nPRESSURE-\n\nHIGH\n\nPRESSURE)\n\nFigure 1.29. Wing Three Dimensional Flow (sheet 1 of 2)\n\nFigure 1.29. Wing Three Dimensional Flow (sheet 1 of 2)\n\nRevised January 1965", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAWWEPS 00-8OT-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS \n\nFigure 1.29. Wing Three Dimensional Flow (sheet 1 of 2) \n\nRevised January 1965" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.453752671426829, + "doc_id": "8c65e8994181a660bffffa0dc41a13a943bbfdd40067ec2953d5b00b2b44f490", + "edit_distance": 0.47368421052631576, + "f1_score": 0.8333333333333334, + "meteor": 0.905045871559633, + "precision": 0.7142857142857143, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS 00-8OT-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL\n\nTYPES OF AERODYNAMIC BALANCE\n\nfigure 4.16. loiloring Control forces\n\nfigure 4.16. loiloring Control forces", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-8OT-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL \n\nfigure 4.16. loiloring Control forces" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.682118304637725, + "doc_id": "469802b5ca89cbbba322f231563423711eb6038ed051246918dc04d6e9546a4f", + "edit_distance": 0.2619047619047619, + "f1_score": 0.8985507246376813, + "meteor": 0.9008364820585385, + "precision": 0.8611111111111112, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS Oo-8OT-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS\n\nDOWNWASH FLOW FIELD 8EHlNO A SWEPT TAPERED WING ILLUSTRATED BY TUFT-GRID PHOTOGRAPHS 45' DELTA, AR=4.0,X=O\n\nFROM NACA TN 2674\n\nFROM NACA TN 2674\n\nFigure 1.33. Staff Patterns (sheet 4 of 81\n\n81", + "recall": 0.9393939393939394, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS Oo-8OT-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS \n\n## DOWNWASH FLOW FIELD 8EHlNO A SWEPT TAPERED WING ILLUSTRATED BY TUFT-GRID PHOTOGRAPHS 45’ DELTA, AR=4.0,X=O\n\nFigure 1.33. Staff Patterns (sheet 4 of 81 \n\n81" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8673661060319718, + "doc_id": "67a213017f813f856c703c4a9fdb2156d83b61bde115ed1e8f10a63d6f746725", + "edit_distance": 0.6116373477672531, + "f1_score": 0.901060070671378, + "meteor": 0.8140546968864617, + "precision": 0.940959409594096, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS 00-801-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE\n\nis subjected to the bending and torsion of the tangential impulse-reaction forces. The blade must wirhstand these stresses which are generally of a vibratory and cyclic nature while at high temperatures. The elevated temperatures at which the turbine must function produce extreme conditions for structural creep and fatigue considerations. Consequently, the engine speed and temperature operating limits demand very careful consideration. Excessive engine temperatures or speeds may produce damage which is immediately apparent. However, creep and fatigue damage is cumulative and even though damage may not be immediately apparent by visual inspection, proper inspection methods (other than visual) must be utilized and proper records kept regarding the occurrence.\n\nActually, the development of high temperature alloys for turbines is a critical factor in the develop,mcnt of high ei%ciciicy, high output aircraft gas turbines. The higher the temperatute of gases entering the turbine, the higher can be the temperature and pressure of the gases at discharge from the turbine with greater exhaust jet velocity and thrust.\n\nThe function of the t&pipe or exhaust no?& is to discharge the exhaust gases to the atmosphere at the highest possible velocity to produce the greatest momentum change and thrust. If a majority of the expansion occurs through the turbine section, there remains only to conduct the exhaust gases rearward with a minimum energy loss. However, if the turbine operates against a noticeable back pressure, the nozzle must convert the remaining pressure energy into exhaust gas velocity. Under ideal conditions, the nozzle would expand the flow to the ambient static pressure at the exhaust and the area distribution in the nozzle must provide these conditions. When the ratio af exhaust gas pressure to ambient pressure is relatively low and incapable of producing sonic flow, a converging nozzle provides the expansion. The exit area must be of proper size to bring about proper exit conditions. If the exit\n\narea is too large, incomplete expansion will take place; if the exit area is too small, an over expansion tendency results. The exit area can affect the upstream conditions and must be properly proportioned for overall performance.\n\nWhen the ratio of exhaust gas pressure to ambient pressure is greater than some critical due, sonic flow can exist and the nozzle will be choked or limited to some maximum flow. When supersonic exhaust gas velocities are required to produce the necessary momentum change, the expansion process will require the convergent-divergent nozzle illustrated in figure 2.9. With sui?icient pressure available the initial expansion in the converging portion is subsonic increasing to sonic velocity at the throat. Subsequent expansion in the divergent portion of the nozzle is supersonic and the result is the highest exit velocity for a given pressure ratio and mass flow. When the pressure ratio is very high the final exit diameter required to expand to ambient pressure may be very large but is practically. limited to the fuselage or nacelle afterbody diameter. If the exhaust gases exceed sonic velocity, as is porsible in a ramjet combustion chamber or afterburner section, only the divergent portion of the nozzle may be necessary.\n\nFigure 2.9 provides illustration of the function of the various engine components and the changes in static pressure, temperature, and velocity through the engine. The conditions at the inlet provide the initial properties of the engine airflow. The compressor section furnishes the compression pressure rise with a certain unavoidable but undesirable increase in temperature. High pressure air delivered to combustion chamber receives heat from the combustion of fuel and experiences a rise in temperature. The fuel flow is limited so that the turbine inlet temperature is within limits which can be tolerated by the turbine structure. The combustion takes place at relatively constant pressure and initially low velocity. Heat addition then causes large increases in gas volume and flow velocity.\n\n114", + "recall": 0.864406779661017, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-801-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE \n\nis subjected to the bending and torsion of the tangential impulse-reaction forces. The blade must wirhstand these stresses which are generally of a vibratory and cyclic nature while at high temperatures. The elevated temperatures at which the turbine must func- tion produce extreme conditions for struc- tural creep and fatigue considerations. Conse- quently, the engine speed and temperature op- erating limits demand very careful considera- tion. Excessive engine temperatures or speeds may produce damage which is immediately apparent. However, creep and fatigue damage is cumulative and even though damage may not be immediately apparent by visual inspec- tion, proper inspection methods (other than visual) must be utilized and proper records kept regarding the occurrence. \n\narea is too large, incomplete expansion will take place; if the exit area is too small, an over expansion tendency results. The exit area can affect the upstream conditions and must be properly proportioned for overall performance. \n\nWhen the ratio of exhaust gas pressure to ambient pressure is greater than some critical due, sonic flow can exist and the nozzle will be choked or limited to some maximum flow. When supersonic exhaust gas velocities are re- quired to produce the necessary momentum change, the expansion process will require the convergent-divergent nozzle illustrated in fig- ure 2.9. With sui?icient pressure available the initial expansion in the converging portion is subsonic increasing to sonic velocity at the throat. Subsequent expansion in the divergent portion of the nozzle is supersonic and the re- sult is the highest exit velocity for a given pressure ratio and mass flow. When the pres- sure ratio is very high the final exit diameter required to expand to ambient pressure may be very large but is practically. limited to the fuselage or nacelle afterbody diameter. If the exhaust gases exceed sonic velocity, as is porsi- ble in a ramjet combustion chamber or after- burner section, only the divergent portion of the nozzle may be necessary. Figure 2.9 provides illustration of the func- \n\nActually, the development of high tempera- ture alloys for turbines is a critical factor in the develop,mcnt of high ei%ciciicy, high output aircraft gas turbines. The higher the tem- peratute of gases entering the turbine, the higher can be the temperature and pressure of the gases at discharge from the turbine with greater exhaust jet velocity and thrust. \n\nThe function of the t&pipe or exhaust no?& is to discharge the exhaust gases to the atmos- phere at the highest possible velocity to pro- duce the greatest momentum change and thrust. If a majority of the expansion occurs through the turbine section, there remains only to con- duct the exhaust gases rearward with a mini- mum energy loss. However, if the turbine operates against a noticeable back pressure, the nozzle must convert the remaining pressure energy into exhaust gas velocity. Under ideal conditions, the nozzle would expand the flow to the ambient static pressure at the exhaust and the area distribution in the nozzle must provide these conditions. When the ratio af exhaust gas pressure to ambient pressure is relatively low and incapable of producing sonic flow, a converging nozzle provides the expan- sion. The exit area must be of proper size to bring about proper exit conditions. If the exit \n\nthe nozzle may be necessary. Figure 2.9 provides illustration of the func- tion of the various engine components and the changes in static pressure, temperature, and velocity through the engine. The conditions at the inlet provide the initial properties of the engine airflow. The compressor section fur- nishes the compression pressure rise with a certain unavoidable but undesirable increase in temperature. High pressure air delivered to combustion chamber receives heat from the combustion of fuel and experiences a rise in temperature. The fuel flow is limited so that the turbine inlet temperature is within limits which can be tolerated by the turbine structure. The combustion takes place at relatively con- stant pressure and initially low velocity. Heat addition then causes large increases in gas vol- ume and flow velocity. \n\n114" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.2215931581484118, + "doc_id": "20879981a77a9ddf6368aef0cda22b85ed1be3c2f20edc88e8f2973f4da435a6", + "edit_distance": 0.7605633802816901, + "f1_score": 0.5925925925925926, + "meteor": 0.7026229609490856, + "precision": 0.42105263157894735, + "pred_md": "## DEVELOPMENT OF BOUNDARY L~AYER\n\n## ON A SMOOTH FLAT PLATE\n\nfigure 7.24. Boundary Layer Charactorisfics\n\nfigure 7.24. Boundary Layer Charactorisfics\n\n## COMPARISON OF VELOCITY PROFILES FOR LAMINAR AND TURBULENT BOUNDARY LAYERS\n\n- -LOW THICKNESS\n- -GREATER THICKNESS\n- -LOW VELOCITIES NEXT TO SURFACE\n- -HIGHER VELOCITIES NEXT TO SURFACE\n- -GRADUAL VELOCITY CHANGE\n- -SHARP VELOCITY CHANGE\n- -LOW SKIN FRICTION\n- -HIGHER SKIN FRICTION", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## DEVELOPMENT OF BOUNDARY L~AYER ON A SMOOTH FLAT PLATE\n\nfigure 7.24. Boundary Layer Charactorisfics" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.1395270787123765, + "doc_id": "0150b1446780b07737676c6168925e37a9ca8c2058e97813aa846c2fe22f0de1", + "edit_distance": 0.9146919431279621, + "f1_score": 0.6181818181818182, + "meteor": 0.5566889644713058, + "precision": 0.4927536231884058, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS 00-801-80 TABLE OF CPNTENTS\n\n*am\n\n| PARASITE DRAG. | *am 87 |\n|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|--------------|\n| Sources of parasite drag. Parasite drag coefficient.. . . Parasite and induced drag. | 87 |\n| Airplane efficiency factor Equivalent parasite area Effect of configuration. Effect of altitude., Effectofspeed...................................................... | 91 ;: |\n| AIRPLANE TOTAL DRAG.. Drag variation with speed Induced and parasite drag | 92 |\n| Stall speed Minimum drag Specific performance conditions Compressibility drag rise CHAPTER 2. AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE | 96 |\n| Effect of gross weight. Effect of configuratmn. Effect of altitude. AVAILABLE THRUST AND POWER | |\n| REQUIRED THRUST AND POWER | |\n| DEFINITIONS. | |\n| Pan&e 14 ;n&Ced drw \\_ \\_.-\\_\\_.\\_ .\\_- \\_- \\_ Thrustandpowerrequir~~::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: | $6 97 |\n| VARIATION OF THRUST AND POWER REQUIRED | |\n| | 99 101 101 |\n| PRINCIPLES OF PROPULSION. Mass flow, velocity change, momentum change.. Newton' s laws, Wastedpower...............................:..................... | 104 104 |\n| | 104 |\n| Power available. | 104 106 |\n| Propulsion efficiency. TURBOJET ENGINES | 106 |\n| Operatingcycle.................................................... Function of the components. | 107 109 |\n| Inlet or diffuser Compressor Combustion chamber Turbine Exhaust nozzle operating | |\n| Thrust and power available Effect of velocity Effect of engine speed Specific fuel consumption Effect of altitude | |\n| Governing apparatus Steady state, acceleration, deceleration | |\n| Turbojet characteristics.. | 116 |\n| :\\_ | |\n\nviii", + "recall": 0.8292682926829268, + "true_md": "## CHAPTER 2. AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE\n\n## REQUIRED THRUST AND POWER\n\n## AVAILABLE THRUST AND POWER\n\n## TURBOJET ENGINES\n\n## VARIATION OF THRUST AND POWER REQUIRED\n\nDrag variation with speed Induced and parasite drag Stall speed Minimum drag Specific performance conditions Compressibility drag rise \n\nInlet or diffuser Compressor Combustion chamber Turbine Exhaust nozzle \n\nThrust and power available Effect of velocity Effect of engine speed Specific fuel consumption Effect of altitude Governing apparatus Steady state, acceleration, deceleration Instrumentation \n\nviii \n\nMi.li$z ’ .?1 p”‘““ite dr2g CxEciczt Airplane efficiency factor Equivalent parasite area \n\n## *am\n\nNAVWEPS 00-801-80 TABLE OF CPNTENTS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7539450423083841, + "doc_id": "f079b34486a2650c1a540186fd8d8af40191db364894d6c7d43179a51ad64091", + "edit_distance": 0.25, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.956456315244992, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS 00-6OT-80 APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYING\n\nFigure 6.2. Region of Reversed Command\n\nFigure 6.2. Region of Reversed Command\n\n354\n\nRevised January 1965", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-6OT-80 APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYING \n\nFigure 6.2. Region of Reversed Command \n\n354 \n\nRevised January 1965" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.906268160869153, + "doc_id": "a2f6a58f369af6b95aeef7c91ff20b0a8c2c27f81366c34efddb6ec3cc337144", + "edit_distance": 0.4716981132075472, + "f1_score": 0.927689594356261, + "meteor": 0.8561271046458029, + "precision": 0.9633699633699634, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS OD-8OT-80 APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYfNG\n\nan increase in lift coeflicient and reduction in thrust required. Hence, a ' floating' sensation may be experienced. Because of the reduced drag and power-off deceleration in ground effect, any excess speed at the point of flare may incur a considerable ' float' distance. As the airplane nears the point of touchdown on the approach, ground effect will be most realized at altitudes less than the wing span. An exact appreciation of the ground effect may be obtained during a PcZd approach with the mirror landing system furnishing an exact reference of the flight path. During the final phases of the field approach as the airplane nears the ground plane, a reduced power setting is necessary or the reduced thrust required would allow the airplane to climb above the desired glide path. During shipboard operations, ground effect will be delayed until the airplane passes the edge of the deck and the reduction in power setting that is common to field operations should not be encountered. Thus, a habit pattern should not be formed during field landings which would prove dangerous during carrier operations.\n\nAn additional factor to consider is the aerodynamic drag of the airplane during the landing roll. Because of the reduced induced drag when in ground effect, aerodynamic braking will be of greatest significance only when partial stalling of the wing can be accomplished. The reduced drag when in ground effect accounts for the fact that the brakes are the most effective source of deceleration for the majority of airplane configurations.\n\nDuring the takeoff pharc of flight ground effect produces some important relationships. Of course, the airplane leaving ground effect encounters just the reverse of the airplane entering ground effect, i.e., the airplane leaving ground effect will (1) require an increase in angle of attack to maintain the same lift coefficient, (2) experience an increase in induced drag and thrust required, (3) experience a decrease in stability and a nose-up change in\n\nmoment, and (4) usually a reduction in static source pressure and increase in indicated airspeed. These general effects should point out the possible danger in attempting takeoff prior to achieving the recommended takeoff speed. Due to the reduced drag in ground effect the airplane may seem capable of takeoff below the recommended speed. However, as the airplane rises out of ground effect with a deficiency of speed, the greater i nduced drag may produce marginal initial climb performance. In the extreme conditions such as high gross weight, high density altitude, and high temperature, a deficiency of airspeed at takeoff may permit the airplane to become airborne but be incapable of flying' out of ground effect. In this case, the airplane may become airborne initially with a deficiency of speed, but later settle back to the runway. It is imperative that no attempt be made to force the airplane to become airborne with a deficiency of speed; the recommended takeoff speed is necessary to provide adequate initial climb performance. In fact, ground effect can be used to advantage if no obstacles exist by using the reduced drag to improve initial acceleration.\n\nThe results of the airplane leaving ground effect can be most easily realized during the deck launch of a heavily loaded airplane. As the airplane moves forward and passes over the edge of the deck, whatever ground effect exists will be lost immediately. Thus, proper rotation of the airplane will be necessary to maintain the same lift coefficient and the increase in induced drag must be expected.\n\nThe rotor of the helicopter experiences a similar restraint of induced flow when in proximity to the ground plane. Since the induced rotor power required will predominate at low flight speeds, ground effect will produce a considerable effect on the power required at low speeds. During hovering and flight at low speeds, the elevation of the rotor above the ground plane will be an important factor determining the power required for flight.\n\n3882", + "recall": 0.8945578231292517, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OD-8OT-80 APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYfNG \n\nan increase in lift coeflicient and reduction in thrust required. Hence, a “floating” sensa- tion may be experienced. Because of the re- duced drag and power-off deceleration in ground effect, any excess speed at the point of flare may incur a considerable “float” distance. As the airplane nears the point of touchdown on the approach, ground effect will be most realized at altitudes less than the wing span. An exact appreciation of the ground effect may be obtained during a PcZd approach with the mirror landing system furnishing an exact reference of the flight path. During the final phases of the field approach as the airplane nears the ground plane, a reduced power setting is necessary or the reduced thrust re- quired would allow the airplane to climb above the desired glide path. During ship- board operations, ground effect will be delayed until the airplane passes the edge of the deck and the reduction in power setting that is common to field operations should not be encountered. Thus, a habit pattern should not be formed during field landings which would prove dangerous during carrier oper- ations. \n\nmoment, and (4) usually a reduction in static source pressure and increase in indicated air- speed. These general effects should point out the possible danger in attempting takeoff prior to achieving the recommended takeoff speed. Due to the reduced drag in ground effect the airplane may seem capable of takeoff below the recommended speed. However, as the airplane rises out of ground effect with a deficiency of speed, the greater induced drag may produce marginal initial climb perform- ance. In the extreme conditions such as high gross weight, high density altitude, and high temperature, a deficiency of airspeed at takeoff may permit the airplane to become airborne but be incapable of flying ’ out of ground effect. In this case, the airplane may become airborne initially with a deficiency of speed, but later settle back to the runway. It is imperative that no attempt be made to force the airplane to become airborne with a deficiency of speed; the recommended takeoff speed is necessary to provide adequate initial climb performance. In fact, ground effect can be used to advantage if no obstacles exist by using the reduced drag to improve initial acceleration. \n\nAn additional factor to consider is the aero- dynamic drag of the airplane during the land- ing roll. Because of the reduced induced drag when in ground effect, aerodynamic braking will be of greatest significance only when partial stalling of the wing can be accom- plished. The reduced drag when in ground effect accounts for the fact that the brakes are the most effective source of deceleration for the majority of airplane configurations. \n\nThe results of the airplane leaving ground effect can be most easily realized during the deck launch of a heavily loaded airplane. As the airplane moves forward and passes over the edge of the deck, whatever ground effect exists will be lost immediately. Thus, proper rota- tion of the airplane will be necessary to main- tain the same lift coefficient and the increase in induced drag must be expected. \n\nThe rotor of the helicopter experiences a similar restraint of induced flow when in prox- imity to the ground plane. Since the induced rotor power required will predominate at low flight speeds, ground effect will produce a con- siderable effect on the power required at low speeds. During hovering and flight at low speeds, the elevation of the rotor above the ground plane will be an important factor de- termining the power required for flight. \n\nDuring the takeoff pharc of flight ground effect produces some important relationships. Of course, the airplane leaving ground effect encounters just the reverse of the airplane entering ground effect, i.e., the airplane leaving ground effect will (1) require an increase in angle of attack to maintain the same lift coefficient, (2) experience an increase in in- duced drag and thrust required, (3) experience a decrease in stability and a nose-up change in \n\n3882" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6262844962765469, + "doc_id": "d8b62d868b46328fa9fd225e8b82c94711921d510a1109c26a8c835ed3e4206f", + "edit_distance": 0.3333333333333333, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9485714285714286, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS OO-BOT-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS\n\nfigure 1.20. Power Effects\n\nfigure 1.20. Power Effects\n\n46", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OO-BOT-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS \n\nfigure 1.20. Power Effects \n\n46" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.26584835766658776, + "doc_id": "07e2e635f1ccb9267f1a092e058417d0c9fb1148f56485adc0635ce39a01160a", + "edit_distance": 0.6428571428571429, + "f1_score": 0.6666666666666666, + "meteor": 0.8440677966101694, + "precision": 0.5, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS woT-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL\n\nFigure 4.33. Pitch-up\n\nFigure 4.33. Pitch-up\n\n312", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Figure 4.33. Pitch-up \n\n312" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9001351324035154, + "doc_id": "766a31624c79885e840ff3a6934d1ff2aa13821a660706b0d4cd9509304fc79e", + "edit_distance": 0.7588652482269503, + "f1_score": 0.9330855018587361, + "meteor": 0.7466242482808186, + "precision": 0.9691119691119691, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS oo-8oT-80 OPERATING STRENGTH LIMITATIONS\n\nof stress the plot of stress and strain is essentially a straight line, i.e., the material in this range is elastic. A stress applied in this range incurs no permanent deformation and the material returns to the original unstressed shape when the stress is released. At higher values of stress the plot of stress versus strain develops a distinct curvature in the strain direction and the material incurs disproportionate strains.\n\nHigh levels of stress applied co the part and then released produce a permanent deformation. Upon release of some high stress, the metal snaps back-but not all the way. The stress defining the limit of tolerable permanent strain is the ' yield stress' and stresses applied above this point produce objectionable permanent deformation. The very highest stress the material can withstand is the ' ultimate stress.' Noticeable permanent deformation usually occurs in this range, but the material does have the capability for withstanding one application of the ultimate stress.\n\nThe relationship between the stress-strain diagram and operating strength limits should be obvious. If the aircraft is subjected to a load greater than the limit, the yield stress may be exceeded and objectionable permanent deformation may result. If the aircraft is subject to a load greater than the ultimate, failure is imminent.\n\n## SERVICE LIFE\n\nThe various components of the aircraft and powerplant structure must be capable of operating without failure or excessive deformation throughout the intended service life. The repetition of various service loads can produce fatigue damage in the structure and special attention must be given to prevent fatigue failure within the service life, Also, the sustaining of various service loads can produce creep damage and special attention must ' be given to prevent excessive deformation or creep failure within the service life, This is a particular feature of components which are subjected to operation at high temperatures.\n\n328\n\nFATIGUE CONSIDERATIONS. The fatigue strength requirement is the consideration given the cumulative effect of repeated or cyclic !oads during service. While there is a vague relationship with the static strength, repeated cyclic loads produce a completely separate effect. If a cyclic, tensile stress is applied to a metal sample, the part is subject to a ' fatigue' type loading. After a period of time, the cyclic stressing will produce a minute crack at some critical location in the sample. With continued application of the varying stress, the crack will enlarge and propagate into the cross section. When the crack has progressed sufficiently, the remaining cross section is incapable of withstanding the i mposed stress and a sudden, final rupture occurs. In this fashion, a metal can be failed at stresses much lower than the static ultimate strength.\n\nOf course, the time necessary to produce fatigue failure is related to the magnitude of the cyclic stress. This relationship is typified by the graph of figure 5.1. The fatigue strength of a material can be demonstrated by a plot of cyclic stress versus cycles of stress required to produce fatigue failure. As might be expected, a very high stress level requires relatively few cycles to produce fatigue failure. Moderate stress levels require a fairly large number of cycles to produce failure and a very low stress may require nearly an infinite number of cycles to produce failure. The very certain implication is that the aircraft must be capable of withstanding the gamut of service loads without producing fatigue failure of the primary structure.\n\nFor each mission type of aircraft there is a probable spectrum of loads which the aircraft will encounter. That is, various loads will be encountered with a frequency particular to the mission profile. The fighter or attack type of aircraft usually experiences a predominance of maneuver loads while the transport or patrol type usually encounters a predominance of gust loads. Since fatigue damage", + "recall": 0.899641577060932, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS oo-8oT-80 OPERATING STRENGTH LIMITATIONS \n\nFATIGUE CONSIDERATIONS. The fa- tigue strength requirement is the considera- tion given the cumulative effect of repeated or cyclic !oads during service. While there is a vague relationship with the static strength, repeated cyclic loads produce a completely separate effect. If a cyclic, tensile stress is applied to a metal sample, the part is subject to a “fatigue” type loading. After a period of time, the cyclic stressing will produce a minute crack at some critical location in the sample. With continued application of the varying stress, the crack will enlarge and propagate into the cross section. When the crack has progressed sufficiently, the remaining cross section is incapable of withstanding the imposed stress and a sudden, final rupture occurs. In this fashion, a metal can be failed at stresses much lower than the static ultimate strength. \n\nof stress the plot of stress and strain is essen- tially a straight line, i.e., the material in this range is elastic. A stress applied in this range incurs no permanent deformation and the ma- terial returns to the original unstressed shape when the stress is released. At higher values of stress the plot of stress versus strain develops a distinct curvature in the strain direction and the material incurs disproportionate strains. \n\nHigh levels of stress applied co the part and then released produce a permanent deforma- tion. Upon release of some high stress, the metal snaps back-but not all the way. The stress defining the limit of tolerable permanent strain is the “yield stress” and stresses applied above this point produce objectionable per- manent deformation. The very highest stress the material can withstand is the “ultimate stress.” Noticeable permanent deformation usually occurs in this range, but the material does have the capability for withstanding one application of the ultimate stress. \n\nThe relationship between the stress-strain diagram and operating strength limits should be obvious. If the aircraft is subjected to a load greater than the limit, the yield stress may be exceeded and objectionable permanent deformation may result. If the aircraft is subject to a load greater than the ultimate, failure is imminent. \n\nOf course, the time necessary to produce fatigue failure is related to the magnitude of the cyclic stress. This relationship is typified by the graph of figure 5.1. The fatigue strength of a material can be demonstrated by a plot of cyclic stress versus cycles of stress required to produce fatigue failure. As might be expected, a very high stress level requires relatively few cycles to produce fatigue failure. Moderate stress levels require a fairly large number of cycles to produce failure and a very low stress may require nearly an infinite num- ber of cycles to produce failure. The very certain implication is that the aircraft must be capable of withstanding the gamut of service loads without producing fatigue failure of the primary structure. \n\nThe various components of the aircraft and powerplant structure must be capable of oper- ating without failure or excessive deformation throughout the intended service life. The repetition of various service loads can produce fatigue damage in the structure and special attention must be given to prevent fatigue failure within the service life, Also, the sus- taining of various service loads can produce creep damage and special attention must ‘ be given to prevent excessive deformation or creep failure within the service life, This is a particular feature of components which are subjected to operation at high temperatures. \n\nFor each mission type of aircraft there is a probable spectrum of loads which the air- craft will encounter. That is, various loads will be encountered with a frequency particular to the mission profile. The fighter or attack type of aircraft usually experiences a pre- dominance of maneuver loads while the trans- port or patrol type usually encounters a pre- dominance of gust loads. Since fatigue damage \n\n## SERVICE LIFE\n\n328" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "31ea320ad9c05ed044073228345b055b3e9a5596722c3a85d56ff2296d113f11", + "edit_distance": 0.7588652482269503, + "f1_score": 0.9330855018587361, + "meteor": 0.7466242482808186, + "precision": 0.9691119691119691, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.899641577060932, + "true_md": "" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.818696316002953, + "doc_id": "8760cc63a90e52fe6e7279e6160d003781c4c58c810ad51cecd4b81a034561df", + "edit_distance": 0.8090322580645162, + "f1_score": 0.9413988657844989, + "meteor": 0.6757752162282048, + "precision": 0.9764705882352941, + "pred_md": "## NAVWRPS DD-807-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL\n\ndestabilizing and the greatest contribution will occur at high power and low dynamic pressure as during a waveoff.\n\nAs in the case of longitudinal static stability, freeing the controls will reduce the effectiveness of the tail and alter the stability. While the rudder must be balanced to reduce control pedal forces, the rudder will tend to float or streamline and reduce the contribution of the vertical tail to static directional stability. The floating tendency is greatest at large angles of sideslip where large angles of attack for the vertical tail tend to decrease aerodynamic balante. Figure 4.24 illustrates the difference between rudder-fixed and rudder-free static directional stability.\n\nCRITICAL CONDITIONS. The most critical conditions of,staric directional stability are usually the combination of several separate effects. The combination which produces the most critical condition is much dependent upon the type and mission of the airplane. In addition, there exists a coupling of lateral and directional effects such that the required degree of static directional stability may be determined by some of these coupled conditions.\n\nCenter of gravity position has a relatively negligible effect on static directional stability. The usual range of c.g. position on any airplane is set by the Jinits of long&d&a/ stability and control. Within this limiting range of c.g. position, no significant changes take place in the contribution of the vertical tail, fuselage, nacelles, etc. Hence, the static directional stability is essentially unaffected by the variation of c.g. position within the longitudinal limits.\n\nWhen the airplane is at a high angle of a$tack a decrease in static directional stability can be anticipated. As shown by the second chart of figure 4.24, a high angle of attack reduces the stable slope of the curve of C,, versus 8, The decrease in static directional stability is due in great part to the reduction in the contribution of the vertica1 tail. At high angles of attack, the effectiveness of the vertical tail is reduced\n\nbecause of increase in the fuselage boundary layer at the vertical tail location. The decay of dir&ctional stability with angle of attack is most significant for the low aspect ratjo airplane with sweepback since this configuration requires such high angles of attack to achieve high lifr coefficients. Such decay in directional stability can have a profound effect on the response of the airplane to adverse yaw and spin characteristics.\n\nHigh Mach ntrmbers of supersonic flight reduce the contribution of the vertical tail to directional stability because of the reduction of lift cnrve slope with Mach number. The third chart of figure 4.24 illustrates the typical decay of directional stability with Mach number. To produce the required directional stability at high Mach numbers, a viziy large vertical tail area may be necessary. Ventral fins may be added as an additional contribution to directional stability but landing clearance requirements may limir their size or require the fins to be retractable.\n\nHence, the most critical demands of static directional stability will occur from some combination of the following effects:\n\n- (1) high angle of sideslip\n- (2) high power at low airspeed\n- (3) high angle of attack\n- (4) high Mach number\n\nThe propeller powered airplane may have such considerable power effects that the critical conditions may occur at low speed while the effect of high Mach numbers may produce the critical conditions for the typical supersonic airplane. In addition, the coupling of lateral and directional effects may require prescribed degrees of directional stability.\n\n## DIRECTIONAL CONTROL\n\nIn addition to directional stability, the airplane must have adequate directional control to coordinate turns, balance power effects, create sideslip, balance unsymmetrical power, etc. The principal source of directional control is the rudder and the rudder must be", + "recall": 0.9087591240875912, + "true_md": "NAVWRPS DD-807-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL \n\nbecause of increase in the fuselage boundary layer at the vertical tail location. The decay of dir&ctional stability with angle of attack is most significant for the low aspect ratjo air- plane with sweepback since this configuration requires such high angles of attack to achieve high lifr coefficients. Such decay in directional stability can have a profound effect on the re- sponse of the airplane to adverse yaw and spin characteristics. High Mach ntrmbers of supersonic flight reduce \n\ndestabilizing and the greatest contribution will occur at high power and low dynamic pressure as during a waveoff. As in the case of longitudinal static stability, \n\npressure as during a waveoff. As in the case of longitudinal static stability, freeing the controls will reduce the effective- ness of the tail and alter the stability. While the rudder must be balanced to reduce control pedal forces, the rudder will tend to float or streamline and reduce the contribution of the vertical tail to static directional stability. The floating tendency is greatest at large angles of sideslip where large angles of attack for the vertical tail tend to decrease aerodynamic bal- ante. Figure 4.24 illustrates the difference be- tween rudder-fixed and rudder-free static di- rectional stability. CRITICAL CONDITIONS. The most criti- \n\ncharacteristics. High Mach ntrmbers of supersonic flight reduce the contribution of the vertical tail to direc- tional stability because of the reduction of lift cnrve slope with Mach number. The third chart of figure 4.24 illustrates the typical decay of directional stability with Mach number. To produce the required directional stability at high Mach numbers, a viziy large vertical tail area may be necessary. Ventral fins may be added as an additional contribution to direc- tional stability but landing clearance require- ments may limir their size or require the fins to be retractable. \n\nrectional stability. CRITICAL CONDITIONS. The most criti- cal conditions of,staric directional stability are usually the combination of several separate effects. The combination which produces the most critical condition is much dependent upon the type and mission of the airplane. In addi- tion, there exists a coupling of lateral and di- rectional effects such that the required degree of static directional stability may be deter- mined by some of these coupled conditions. Center of gravity position has a relatively \n\nHence, the most critical demands of static directional stability will occur from some combination of the following effects: \n\nmined by some of these coupled conditions. Center of gravity position has a relatively negligible effect on static directional stability. The usual range of c.g. position on any air- plane is set by the Jinits of long&d&a/ stability and control. Within this limiting range of c.g. position, no significant changes take place in the contribution of the vertical tail, fuselage, nacelles, etc. Hence, the static directional stability is essentially unaffected by the varia- tion of c.g. position within the longitudinal limits. \n\nThe propeller powered airplane may have such considerable power effects that the critical conditions may occur at low speed while the effect of high Mach numbers may produce the critical conditions for the typical supersonic airplane. In addition, the coupling of lateral and directional effects may require prescribed degrees of directional stability. \n\n- (1) high angle of sideslip \n\n- (2) high power at low airspeed (3) high angle of attack \n\n- (2) high power at low airspeed (3) high angle of attack \n\n- (4) high Mach number \n\nIn addition to directional stability, the air- plane must have adequate directional control to coordinate turns, balance power effects, create sideslip, balance unsymmetrical power, etc. The principal source of directional con- trol is the rudder and the rudder must be \n\nWhen the airplane is at a high angle of a$tack a decrease in static directional stability can be anticipated. As shown by the second chart of figure 4.24, a high angle of attack reduces the stable slope of the curve of C,, versus 8, The decrease in static directional stability is due in great part to the reduction in the contribution of the vertica1 tail. At high angles of attack, the effectiveness of the vertical tail is reduced \n\n## DIRECTIONAL CONTROL" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7428452640658838, + "doc_id": "0d7fda07330dac4b4c40356822552b03846a4fa012718d4861edc63f8df9f7f9", + "edit_distance": 0.484472049689441, + "f1_score": 0.8768898488120951, + "meteor": 0.7357619029445689, + "precision": 0.9144144144144144, + "pred_md": "effect on takeoff distance and is approximated by the following relationship:\n\n2\n\n\n\nwhere\n\nSi= zero wind landing distance Sa=landing distance into a headwind I' , = headwind velocity Vi=landing ground velocity with zero wind or, simply, the landing airspeed\n\nAs a result of this relationship, a headwind which is 10 percent of the landing airspeed will reduce the landing distance 19 percent but a tailwind (or ' negative headwind) which is 10 percent of the landing speed will increase the landing distance 21 percent. Figure 2.33 illustrates this general effect.\n\nThe effect of anway slope on landing r distance is due to the component of weight along the inclined path of the airplane. The relationship is identical to the case of takeoff performance but the magnitude of the effect is not as great. While account must be made for the effect, the ordinary values of runway slope do not contribute a large effect on landing distance. For this reason, the selection of the landing runway will ordinarily favor the direction with a downslope and' headwind rather than an upslope and tailwind.\n\nThe effect of pressure altitude and ambient temperature is to define density altitude and its effect on landing performance. An increase in density altitude will increase the landing velocity but will not alter the net retarding force. If a given weight and configuration of airplane is taken to altitude above standard sea level, the airplane will still require the same 4 to provide lift equal to weight at the landing C,. Thus, the airplane at altitude will land at the same equivalent airspeed (EAS) as at sea level but, because of the reduced density, the true airspeed (TM) will be greater. The relationship between true airspeed and equivalent airspeed is as follows:\n\n## NAVWEPS OO-ROLRO AIRPlANE PERFORMANCE\n\n\n\nwhere\n\nTAS= true airspeed EAS= equivalent airspeed a=altitude density ratio\n\nSince the airplane lands at altitude with the same weight and dynamic pressure, the drag and braking friction throughout the landing toll have the same values as at sea level. As long as the condition is within the capability of the brakes, the net retarding force is unchanged and the acceleration is the same as with the landing at sea level.\n\nTo evaluate the effect of density altitude on landing distance, the following relationships are used :\n\nsince an increase in altitude does not alter acceleration, the effect would be due to the greater TAS\n\nwhere\n\nS1= standard sea level landing dis-\n\ntance Sa=Ianding distance at altitude\n\nc=altitude density ratio\n\nFrom this relationship, the minimum landing distance at 5,OCO t. f (u=O.8617) would be 16 percent greater than the minimum landing distance at sea level. The approximate increase in landing distance with altitude is approximately 3% percent for each 1,ooO ft. of altitude. Proper accounting of density altitude is necessary to accurately predict landing distance.\n\nThe effect of proper landing velocity is important when runway lengths and landing distances are critical. The landing speeds specified in the flight handbook ate generally the minimum safe speeds at which the airplane can be landed. Any attempt to land at below the", + "recall": 0.8423236514522822, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OO-ROLRO AIRPlANE PERFORMANCE \n\neffect on takeoff distance and is approximated by the following relationship: \n\n$$$2 v 2 ..-.= Sl c 1 13 $$\n\n$$TAS 1 E-33=5 $$\n\nwhere \n\nwhere \n\n- Si= zero wind landing distance \n\n- Sa=landing distance into a headwind \n\n- I ’ , = headwind velocity \n\n- Vi=landing ground velocity with zero wind or, simply, the landing airspeed \n\n- TAS= true airspeed \n\n- EAS= equivalent airspeed \n\n- a=altitude density ratio \n\nAs a result of this relationship, a headwind which is 10 percent of the landing airspeed will reduce the landing distance 19 percent but a tailwind (or ‘ negative headwind) which is 10 percent of the landing speed will increase the landing distance 21 percent. Figure 2.33 illus- trates this general effect. of \n\ntrates this general effect. The effect of ranway slope on landing distance is due to the component of weight along the inclined path of the airplane. The relation- ship is identical to the case of takeoff per- formance but the magnitude of the effect is not as great. While account must be made for the effect, the ordinary values of runway slope do not contribute a large effect on landing distance. For this reason, the selection of the landing runway will ordinarily favor the direc- tion with a downslope and ’ headwind rather than an upslope and tailwind. The effect of pressure altitude and ambient tem- \n\nthan an upslope and tailwind. The effect of pressure altitude and ambient tem- perature is to define density altitude and its effect on landing performance. An increase in dens- ity altitude will increase the landing velocity but will not alter the net retarding force. If a given weight and configuration of airplane is taken to altitude above standard sea level, the airplane will still require the same 4 to provide lift equal to weight at the landing C,. Thus, the airplane at altitude will land at the same equivalent airspeed (EAS) as at sea level but, because of the reduced density, the true airspeed (TM) will be greater. The relation- ship between true airspeed and equivalent air- speed is as follows: \n\nFrom this relationship, the minimum land- ing distance at 5,OCO ft. (u=O.8617) would be 16 percent greater than the minimum landing distance at sea level. The approximate increase in landing distance with altitude is approxi- mately 3% percent for each 1,ooO ft. of altitude. Proper accounting of density altitude is neces- sary to accurately predict landing distance. \n\nThe effect of proper landing velocity is impor- tant when runway lengths and landing dis- tances are critical. The landing speeds specified in the flight handbook ate generally the mini- mum safe speeds at which the airplane can be landed. Any attempt to land at below the \n\nwhere \n\nare used : since an increase in altitude does not alter acceleration, the effect would be due to the greater TAS \n\nTo evaluate the effect of density altitude on landing distance, the following relationships are used : since an increase in altitude does not alter \n\nSince the airplane lands at altitude with the same weight and dynamic pressure, the drag and braking friction throughout the landing toll have the same values as at sea level. As long as the condition is within the capability of the brakes, the net retarding force is un- changed and the acceleration is the same as with the landing at sea level. \n\n- S1= standard sea level landing dis- tance Sa=Ianding distance at altitude \n\n- tance Sa=Ianding distance at altitude \n\n- c=altitude density ratio" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8361180998986694, + "doc_id": "798c3017578421d496fb985abc8f1250ee1c5c0c21d3dfecd77fa8133d5c1961", + "edit_distance": 0.3526570048309179, + "f1_score": 0.9156976744186045, + "meteor": 0.849861558396838, + "precision": 0.9459459459459459, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS O&ROT-SO AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE\n\nspecific fuel consumption is not adversely affected as long as auto-lean or manual lean power can be used at the cruise power setting.\n\nOne operating characteristic of the reciprocating engine is distinctly different from that of the turbojet. Water vapor in the air will cause a significant reduction in output power of the reciprocating engine but a negligible loss of thrust for the turbojet engine. This basic difference exists because the reciprocating engine operates with a fixed displacement and all air processed is directly associated with the combustion process. If water vapor enters the induction system of the reciprocating engine, the amount of air available for combustion is reduced and, since most carburetors do not distinguish water vapor from air, an enrichment of the fuel-air ratio takes place. The maximum power output at takeoff requires fuel-air ratios richer than that for maximum -haezt re1m.e rn . ,, C,I+P- c. nnr:rLmm.c IL . . ..I1 *-IF--A-' -\\' W A....A b.IIA.cIIIIICI ' 1111 La&C place with subsequent loss of power. The turbojet operates with such great excess of air that the combustion process essentially is unaffected and the reduction of air mass flow is the principal consideration. As an example, extreme conditions which would produce high specific humidity may cause a 3 percent thrust loss for a turbojet but a 12 percent loss of BHP for a reciprocating engine. Proper accounting of the loss due to humidity is essential in the operation of the reciprocating engine.\n\nOPERATING LIMITATIONS. Reciprocating engines have achieved a great degree of refinement and development and are one of the most reliable of all types of aircraft powerplants. However, reliable operation of the reciprocating engine is obtained only by strict adherence to the specific operating limitations.\n\nThe most important operating limitations of the reciprocating engine are those provided to ensure that detonation and preignition do not take place. The pilot must ensure that proper fuel grades are used that limit MAP, BMEP, RPM, CAT, etc., are not exceeded. Since\n\nRevised January 1965\n\n144\n\nheavy detonation or preignition is common to the high airflow at maximum power, the most likely chance of detonation or preignition is at takeoff. In order to suppress detonation or allow greater power for takeoff, water injection is often used in the reciprocating engine. At high power' settings, the injection of the water-alcohol mixture can replace the excess fuel required to suppress detonation, and derichment provisions can reduce the fuel-air ratio toward the value for maximum heat release. Thus, an increase in power will be obtained by the better fuel-air ratio. In some instances, a higher manifold pressure can be 1 utilized to produce additional power. The injection fluid will require proportions of alcohol and water quite different from the injection fluid for jet engine thrust augmentation. Since derichment of the fuel-air ratio is desired, the anti-detonant injection (AOZ) will rr\\n+l;n ,Ir,.Le, :.. -.....^*;*:-r-^--..-.*--.:J..-l b' IICLIALI lC' ll' l111 yu' a' c' l' L~ L' pC' LuL Ic>luual P fluid from fouling the plumbing.\n\nWhen the fuel grades are altered during operation and the engine must be' operated on a next lower fuel grade, proper account must be made for the change in the operating limitations. This accounting must be made for the maximum power for takeoff and the maximum cruise power since both of these operating conditions are near the detonation envelope. In addition, when the higher grade of fuel again becomes available, the higher operating,limits cannot be used until it is sure chat no contamination exists from the lower grade fuel remaining in the tanks.\n\nSpark plug fouling can provide certain high as well as low limits of operating temperatures. When excessively low operating temperatures are encountered, rapid carbon fouling of the plugs will take place. On the other hand, excessively high operating temperatures will produce plug fouling from lead bromide deposits from the fuel additives.\n\nGenerally, the limited periods of time at various high power settings are set to minimize the accumulation of high rates of wear", + "recall": 0.8873239436619719, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS O&ROT-SO AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE \n\nspecific fuel consumption is not adversely affected as long as auto-lean or manual lean power can be used at the cruise power setting. One operating characteristic of the recipro- \n\npower can be used at the cruise power setting. One operating characteristic of the recipro- cating engine is distinctly different from that of the turbojet. Water vapor in the air will cause a significant reduction in output power of the reciprocating engine but a negligible loss of thrust for the turbojet engine. This basic difference exists because the reciprocating engine operates with a fixed displacement and all air processed is directly associated with the combustion process. If water vapor enters the induction system of the reciprocating engine, the amount of air available for combustion is reduced and, since most carburetors do not distinguish water vapor from air, an enrich- ment of the fuel-air ratio takes place. The maximum power output at takeoff requires fuel-air ratios richer than that for maximum -haezt re1m.e rn ,, C,I+P- nnr:rLmm.c . . ..I1 *-IF- --A-“-\\- “W . A....A c. b.IIA.cIIIIICIIL “1111 La&C place with subsequent loss of power. The turbojet operates with such great excess of air that the combustion process essentially is unaffected and the reduction of air mass flow is the principal consideration. As an example, extreme conditions which would produce high specific humidity may cause a 3 percent thrust loss for a turbojet but a 12 percent loss of BHP for a reciprocating engine. Proper accounting of the loss due to humidity is essential in the operation of the reciprocating engine. \n\nheavy detonation or preignition is common to the high airflow at maximum power, the most likely chance of detonation or preignition is at takeoff. In order to suppress detonation or allow greater power for takeoff, water injec- tion is often used in the reciprocating engine. At high power’settings, the injection of the water-alcohol mixture can replace the excess fuel required to suppress detonation, and de- richment provisions can reduce the fuel-air ratio toward the value for maximum heat re- lease. Thus, an increase in power will be ob- tained by the better fuel-air ratio. In some instances, a higher manifold pressure can be 1 utilized to produce additional power. The in- jection fluid will require proportions of alcohol and water quite different from the injection fluid for jet engine thrust augmentation. Since derichment of the fuel-air ratio is de- sired, the anti-detonant injection (AOZ) will rr\n+l;n ,Ir,.Le, :.. -.....^*;*:- r-^--..-.*--.:J..-l b”IICLIALI PlC”ll”l111 yu ‘ a”c ’ l ’ L~ L” pC”LuL Ic>luual fluid from fouling the plumbing. \n\nWhen the fuel grades are altered during oper- ation and the engine must be ’ operated on a next lower fuel grade, proper account must be made for the change in the operating limita- tions. This accounting must be made for the maximum power for takeoff and the maximum cruise power since both of these operating con- ditions are near the detonation envelope. In addition, when the higher grade of fuel again becomes available, the higher operating,limits cannot be used until it is sure chat no contamina- tion exists from the lower grade fuel remaining in the tanks. Spark plug fouling can provide certain high \n\nOPERATING LIMITATIONS. Recipro- cating engines have achieved a great degree of refinement and development and are one of the most reliable of all types of aircraft power- plants. However, reliable operation of the re- ciprocating engine is obtained only by strict adherence to the specific operating limitations. \n\nThe most important operating limitations of the reciprocating engine are those provided to ensure that detonation and preignition do not take place. The pilot must ensure that proper fuel grades are used that limit MAP, BMEP, RPM, CAT, etc., are not exceeded. Since \n\nin the tanks. Spark plug fouling can provide certain high as well as low limits of operating temperatures. When excessively low operating temperatures are encountered, rapid carbon fouling of the plugs will take place. On the other hand, excessively high operating temperatures will produce plug fouling from lead bromide de- posits from the fuel additives. \n\nGenerally, the limited periods of time at various high power settings are set to mini- mize the accumulation of high rates of wear \n\n144 \n\nRevised January 1965" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7929834650839436, + "doc_id": "4ab3128fea271a7765efb941a557a218026af3f4906987477e34b8afc3907a7f", + "edit_distance": 0.6585365853658537, + "f1_score": 0.9604519774011301, + "meteor": 0.9320256899170374, + "precision": 0.9770114942528736, + "pred_md": "## AIRSPACE INFORMATION (Continued)\n\nFlight Restricted Zone (FRZ) Relating To National Security\n\nExample: Washington DC\n\n## Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR) Relating To National Security\n\nExample: Washington DC\n\nAppropriate notes as required may be shown.\n\n## Special Use Airspace\n\nOnly the airspace effective below 18,000 feet MSL is shown.\n\nThe type of area shall be spelled out in large areas if space permits.\n\n## Air Defense Identification Zone (ADIZ)\n\nNote: Delimiting line not shown when it coincides with International Boundary, projection lines or other linear features.\n\n45\n\nFAA Chart Users' Guide - VFR Chart Symbology - Flyway Planning Chars", + "recall": 0.9444444444444444, + "true_md": "FAA Chart Users’ Guide - VFR Chart Symbology - Flyway Planning Chars\n\n45\n\n## Air Defense Identification Zone (ADIZ)\n\n## Special Use Airspace\n\n## Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR) Relating To National Security\n\n## Flight Restricted Zone (FRZ) Relating To National Se- curity\n\n## AIRSPACE INFORMATION (Continued)\n\nExample: Washington DC\n\nExample: Washington DC\n\nAppropriate notes as required may be shown.\n\nOnly the airspace effective below 18,000 feet MSL is shown.\n\nThe type of area shall be spelled out in large areas if space permits.\n\nNote: Delimiting line not shown when it coincides with International Bound- ary, projection lines or other linear features." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9124732790170624, + "doc_id": "078e4d7d345c8de0edd8138371107a9e7cdb26583ca5f8459a5be67a39937ade", + "edit_distance": 0.06860158311345646, + "f1_score": 0.9155206286836935, + "meteor": 0.931934982903975, + "precision": 0.9549180327868853, + "pred_md": "stances, the 4 at the tail is usually less and this reduces the efficiency of the tail.\n\nWhen the airplane is given a change in angle of attack, the horizontal tail does not experience the same change in angle of attack as the wing. Because of the increase in downwash behind, the wing, the horizontal tail will experience a smaller change in angle of attack, e.g., if a 10\" change in wing angle of attack causes a 4O increase in downwash at the horizontal tail, the horizontal tail experiences only a 6' change in angle of attack. In this manner, the downwash at the horizontal tail reduces the contribution to stability. Any factor which alters the rate of change of downwash at the horizontal tail will directly affect the tail contribution and airplane stability.\n\nPower effects can alter the downwash at the horizontal tail and affect the tail contribution. Also, the ~downwash at the tail is affected by the lift distribution on the wing and the flow condition ,on the fuselage. The low aspect ratio airplane requires large angles of attack to achieve high ,lift coefficients and this positions the fuselage at high angles of attack. The change in the wing downwash can be accompanied by crossflow separation vortices on the fuselage. It is possible that the net effect obviates or destabilizes the contribution of the horizontal tail and produces airplane instability.\n\nPOWER-OFF STABILITY. When the intrinsic stability of a configuration is of interest, power effects are neglected and the stability is considered by a buildup of the contributing~ components. Figure 4.10 illustrates a typical buildup of the components of a conventional airplane configuration. If the c.g. is arbitrarily set at 30 percent MAC, the contribution of the wing alone is destabilizing as indicated by the positive slope of CM versus C,. The combination of the wing and fuselage increases the instability. The contribution of the tail alone is highly stabilizing from the large negative slope of the curve. The contribution of the tail must be sufficiently\n\n## NAVWEPS OO-BOT-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL\n\nstabilizing so that the complete configuration will exhibit positive static stability at the anticipated c.g. locations. In addition, the tail and wing incidence must be set to provide a trim lift coefficient near the design condition.\n\nWhen the configuration of the airplane is fixed, a variation of c.g. position can cause large changes in the static stability. In the conventional airplane configuration, the large changes in stability with c.g. variation are primarily due to the large changes in the wing contribution. If the incidence of all surfaces remains fixed, the effect of c.g. position on static longitudinal stability is typified by the second chart of figure 4.10. As the cg. is gradually moved aft, the airplane static stability' decreases, then becomes neutral then unstable., The c.g. position which produces zero ,slope and neutral static stability is referred to asp he ~' neutral point.' t The neutral point may be imagined as the effective aerodynamic center of the entire airplane configuraration, i.e., with the c.g. at this position, all changes in net lift effectively occur at this point and no change in pitching moment results. The neutral point defines the most aft c.g. position without static instability.\n\nPOWER EFFECTS. The effects of power may cause significant changes in trim lift coefficient and static. longitudinal stability. Since the contribution to stability is evaluated by the change in moment coefficients, power effects will be most significant when the airplane operates at high power and low airspeeds such as the power approach or waveoff condition.\n\nThe effects of power are considered in two main categories. First, there are the direct effects resulting from the forces created by the propulsion unit. Next, there are the indirect effects of the slipstream and other associated flow which alter the forces and moments of the aerodynamic surfaces. The direct effects of power are illustrated in figure 4.11. The vertical location of the thrust line defines one of the direct contributions to stability. If the\n\n259", + "recall": 0.879245283018868, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OO-BOT-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL \n\nstances, the 4 at the tail is usually less and this reduces the efficiency of the tail. \n\nWhen the airplane is given a change in angle of attack, the horizontal tail does not expe- rience the same change in angle of attack as the wing. Because of the increase in down- wash behind, the wing, the horizontal tail will experience a smaller change in angle of attack, e.g., if a 10\" change in wing angle of attack causes a 4O increase in downwash at the hori- zontal tail, the horizontal tail experiences only a 6’ change in angle of attack. In this manner, the downwash at the horizontal tail reduces the contribution to stability. Any factor which alters the rate of change of down- wash at the horizontal tail will directly affect the tail contribution and airplane stability. \n\nPower effects can alter the downwash at the horizontal tail and affect the tail contribution. Also, the ~downwash at the tail is affected by the lift distribution on the wing and the flow condition ,on the fuselage. The low aspect ratio airplane requires large angles of attack to achieve high ,lift coefficients and this posi- tions the fuselage at high angles of attack. The change in the wing downwash can be accompanied by crossflow separation vortices on the fuselage. It is possible that the net effect obviates or destabilizes the contribu- tion of the horizontal tail and produces air- plane instability. \n\nPOWER-OFF STABILITY. When the in- trinsic stability of a configuration is of interest, power effects are neglected and the stability is considered by a buildup of the contributing~ components. Figure 4.10 illustrates a typical buildup of the components of a conventional airplane configuration. If the c.g. is arbi- trarily set at 30 percent MAC, the contribu- tion of the wing alone is destabilizing as indi- cated by the positive slope of CM versus C,. The combination of the wing and fuselage increases the instability. The contribution of the tail alone is highly stabilizing from the large negative slope of the curve. The contribution of the tail must be sufficiently \n\nstabilizing so that the complete configuration will exhibit positive static stability at the anticipated c.g. locations. In addition, the tail and wing incidence must be set to provide a trim lift coefficient near the design condition. \n\nWhen the configuration of the airplane is fixed, a variation of c.g. position can cause large changes in the static stability. In the conventional airplane configuration, the large changes in stability with c.g. variation are primarily due to the large changes in the wing contribution. If the incidence of all surfaces remains fixed, the effect of c.g. position on static longitudinal stability is typified by the second chart of figure 4.10. As the cg. is gradually moved aft, the airplane static sta- bility’ decreases, then becomes neutral then unstable., The c.g. position which produces zero ,slope and neutral static stability is re- ferred to asp the ~“neutral point.” The neutral point may be imagined as the effective aerody- namic center of the entire airplane configura- ration, i.e., with the c.g. at this position, all changes in net lift effectively occur at this point and no change in pitching moment results. The neutral point defines the most aft c.g. position without static instability. \n\nPOWER EFFECTS. The effects of power may cause significant changes in trim lift coefficient and static. longitudinal stability. Since the contribution to stability is evaluated by the change in moment coefficients, power effects will be most significant when the airplane operates at high power and low airspeeds such as the power approach or waveoff condition. \n\nThe effects of power are considered in two main categories. First, there are the direct effects resulting from the forces created by the propulsion unit. Next, there are the indirect effects of the slipstream and other associated flow which alter the forces and moments of the aerodynamic surfaces. The direct effects of power are illustrated in figure 4.11. The ver- tical location of the thrust line defines one of the direct contributions to stability. If the \n\n259" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7872172647389234, + "doc_id": "3f2334c24242195eb11a8470932796cd28cf170de0995ef89c353242968b615e", + "edit_distance": 0.59375, + "f1_score": 0.9054945054945054, + "meteor": 0.6799821738885466, + "precision": 0.9537037037037037, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEe3 OO-BOT-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS\n\npercent water vapor, argon, carbon dioxide, etc. For the majority of all aerodynamic considerations air is considered as a uniform mixture of these gases. The usual quantities used to define the properties of an air mass are as follows:\n\nSTATIC PRESSURE. The absolute static pressure of the air is a property of primary importance. The static pressure of the air at any altitude results from the mass of air supported above that level. At standard sea level conditions the static pressure of the air is 2,116 psf (or 14.7 psi, 29.92 in. Hg, etc.) and at 40,000 feet altitude this static pressure decreases to approximately 19 percent of the sea level value. The shorthand notation for the ambient static pressure is ' p' and the standard sea level static pressure is given the subscript ' a' for zero altitude, pa. A more usual reference in aerodynamics and performance is the proportion of the ambient sta~tic pressure and the standard sea level static pressure. This static pressure ratio is assigned the shorthand notation of 8 (delta).\n\nAltitude pressure ratio\n\n\n\nMany items of gas turbine engine performance are directly related to some parameter involving the altitude pressure ratio.\n\nTEMPERATURE. The absolute temperacure of the air is another important property. The ordinary temperature measurement by the Centigrade scale has a/datum at the freezing point of water but absolute zero temperature is obtained at a temperature of -273' Centigrade. Thus, the standard sea level tcmperature of 15' C. is an absolute temperature of 288'. This scale of absolute temperature using the Centigrade increments is the Kelvin scale, e.g., o K. The shorthand notation for the ambient air temperature is ' T' and the standard sea level air temperature of 288' K. is signified by Ta. The more usual reference is,\n\n2\n\nthe proportion of the ambient air temperature and the standard sea level air temperature. This temperature ratio is assigned the shorthand notation of 0 (theta).\n\nTemperature ratio\n\n## Ambient air temperature\n\n\n\nMany items of compressibility effects and jet engine performance involve consideration of the temperature ratio.\n\nDENSITY. The density of the air is a property of greatest importance in the study of aerodynamics. The density of air is simply the mass of air per~cubic foot of volume and is a direct measure of the quantity of matter in each cubic foot of air. Air at standard sea lcvcl conditions weighs 0.0765 pounds per cubic foot and has a density of 0.002378 slugs per cubic foot. At an altitude of 40,000 feet the air density is approximately 25 percent of the sea level value.\n\nThe shorthand notation used for air density is p (rho) and the standard sea level air density is then pO. In many parts of aerodynamics it is very convenient to consider the proportion of the ambient air density and standard sea level air density. This density ratio is assigned the shorthand notation of c (sigma).\n\n\n\nA general gas law defines the relationship of pressure temperature, and density when there is no change of state or heat transfer. Simply stated this would be ' density varies directly with pressure, inversely with temperature.' Using the properties previously defined,\n\n", + "recall": 0.8619246861924686, + "true_md": "NAVWEe3 OO-BOT-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS \n\nthe proportion of the ambient air temperature and the standard sea level air temperature. This temperature ratio is assigned the short- hand notation of 0 (theta). \n\nTemperature ratio \n\npercent water vapor, argon, carbon dioxide, etc. For the majority of all aerodynamic con- siderations air is considered as a uniform mixture of these gases. The usual quantities used to define the properties of an air mass are as follows: STATIC PRESSURE. The absolute static \n\nas follows: STATIC PRESSURE. The absolute static pressure of the air is a property of primary importance. The static pressure of the air at any altitude results from the mass of air supported above that level. At standard sea level conditions the static pressure of the air is 2,116 psf (or 14.7 psi, 29.92 in. Hg, etc.) and at 40,000 feet altitude this static pressure decreases to approximately 19 percent of the sea level value. The shorthand notation for the ambient static pressure is “p” and the standard sea level static pressure is given the subscript “a” for zero altitude, pa. A more usual reference in aerodynamics and perform- ance is the proportion of the ambient sta~tic pressure and the standard sea level static pressure. This static pressure ratio is assigned the shorthand notation of 8 (delta). \n\nMany items of compressibility effects and jet engine performance involve consideration of the temperature ratio. \n\nDENSITY. The density of the air is a prop- erty of greatest importance in the study of aerodynamics. The density of air is simply the mass of air per~cubic foot of volume and is a direct measure of the quantity of matter in each cubic foot of air. Air at standard sea lcvcl conditions weighs 0.0765 pounds per cubic foot and has a density of 0.002378 slugs per cubic foot. At an altitude of 40,000 feet the air density is approximately 25 percent of the sea level value. The shorthand notation used for air density \n\n$$Ambient air temperature =Standard sea level air temperature @=TITtl ,+273 288 $$\n\n$$6 = PIP0 $$\n\n$$a = PIP0 $$\n\nsea level value. The shorthand notation used for air density is p (rho) and the standard sea level air density is then pO. In many parts of aerodynamics it is very convenient to consider the proportion of the ambient air density and standard sea level air density. This density ratio is assigned the shorthand notation of c (sigma). \n\ndensity ratio= ambient air density standard sea level air density \n\nAltitude pressure ratio \n\nAmbient static pressure =Standard sea level static pressure \n\nMany items of gas turbine engine perform- ance are directly related to some parameter involving the altitude pressure ratio. \n\nTEMPERATURE. The absolute tempera- cure of the air is another important property. The ordinary temperature measurement by the Centigrade scale has a/datum at the freezing point of water but absolute zero temperature is obtained at a temperature of -273“ Centi- grade. Thus, the standard sea level tcmpera- ture of 15” C. is an absolute temperature of 288”. This scale of absolute temperature using the Centigrade increments is the Kelvin scale, e.g., o K. The shorthand notation for the ambient air temperature is “T” and the stand- ard sea level air temperature of 288’ K. is signified by Ta. The more usual reference is, \n\nA general gas law defines the relationship of pressure temperature, and density when there is no change of state or heat transfer. Simply stated this would be “density varies directly with pressure, inversely with temperature.” Using the properties previously defined, \n\ndensity ratio= Pressure rat ’ o. temperature rat10 \n\n2" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7699257961091471, + "doc_id": "1b256330a763fd4dcc3b5cc8032936af37feae0311215da0d2095bdec89b6fc1", + "edit_distance": 0.3316831683168317, + "f1_score": 0.9437229437229437, + "meteor": 0.8883790416929304, + "precision": 0.9083333333333333, + "pred_md": "MEFs over land and open water areas are used in areas containing man-made obstacles such as oil rigs.\n\nIn the determination of MEFs, the FAA uses extreme care to calculate the values based on the existing elevation data shown on source material. Aeronautical Information Specialists use the following procedure to calculate MEFs:\n\n## MEF - Man-made Obstacle\n\nWhen a man-made obstacle is more than 200' above the highest terrain within the quadrant:\n\n- 1. Determine the elevation of the top of the obstacle above MSL.\n- 2. Add the possible vertical error of the source material to the above figure (100' or 1/2 contour interval when inter -val on source exceeds 200'. U.S. Geological Survey Quadrangle Maps with contour intervals as small as 10' are normally used).\n- 3. Round the resultant figure up to the next higher hundred-foot level.\n\n## Example:\n\nElevation of obstacle top (MSL) 2649\n\nPossible obstacle error +100\n\nequals 2749\n\nRaise to the following 100' level 2800\n\nMaximum Elevation Figure (MEF)\n\n13\n\nFAA Chart Users' Guide - VFR Terms and Symbols", + "recall": 0.9819819819819819, + "true_md": "13\n\nFAA Chart Users’ Guide - VFR Terms and Symbols\n\nMEFs over land and open water areas are used in areas containing man-made obstacles such as oil rigs.\n\nIn the determination of MEFs, the FAA uses extreme care to calculate the values based on the existing elevation data shown on source material. Aeronautical Information Specialists use the following procedure to calculate MEFs:\n\nWhen a man-made obstacle is more than 200' above the highest terrain within the quadrant:\n\n## MEF - Man-made Obstacle\n\n- 1. Determine the elevation of the top of the obstacle above MSL. \n\n- 2. Add the possible vertical error of the source material to the above figure (100’ or 1/2 contour interval when inter - val on source exceeds 200’. U.S. Geological Survey Quadrangle Maps with contour intervals as small as 10’ are normally used). \n\n- 3. Round the resultant figure up to the next higher hundred-foot level.\n\n## Example:" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.2129764696972561, + "doc_id": "cb2142b85e6064d854c2c01dfa15aa94ee52572852e570521ec4f9c25adacf1a", + "edit_distance": 0.5454545454545454, + "f1_score": 0.625, + "meteor": 0.4653846153846154, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS GO-BOT-BO BASIC AERODYNAMlCS\n\n19", + "recall": 0.45454545454545453, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS GO-BOT-BO BASIC AERODYNAMlCS \n\nFigure 1.9. Airfoil Pressure Distribution \n\n19" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9250096038952035, + "doc_id": "fa02e59f230cc55be95527f720485b6b83745cd3268e43f139eb76fbdc684183", + "edit_distance": 0.7926023778071334, + "f1_score": 0.9315068493150683, + "meteor": 0.6782246318379224, + "precision": 0.9635627530364372, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS DD-807-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL\n\nof figure 4.7 illustrates the change of wing contribution possible between subsonic and supersonic flight. The large increase in static stability in supersonic flight can incur high trim drag or require great control effectiveness to prevent reduction in maneuverability.\n\nFUSELAGE AND NACELLES. In most cases, the contribution of the fuselage and nacelles is destabilizing. A symmetrical body of revolution in the flow field of a perfect fluid develops an unstable pitching moment when given an angle of attack. In fact, an increase in angle of attack produces an increase in the unstable pitching moment without the development of lift. Figure 4.8 illustrates the pressure distribution which creates this unstable moment on the body of revolution. In the actual case of real subsonic flow essentially the same effect is produced. An increase in angle of attack causes an increase in the unstable pitching moment but a negligible increase in lift.\n\nAn additional factor for consideration is the influence of the induced flow field of the wing. As illustrated in figure 4.8, the upwash ahead of the wing increases the destabilizing influence from the portions of the fuselage and nacelles ahead of the wing. The downwash behind the wing reduces the destabilizing influence from the portions of the fuselage and nacelles aft of the wing. Hence, the location of the fuselage and nacelles relative to the wing is important in determining the contribution to stability.\n\nThe body of revolution in supersonic flow can develop lift of a magnitude which cannot be neglected. When the body of revolution in supersonic flow is given an angle of attack, a pressure distribution typical of figure 4.8 is the result. Since the center of pressure is well forward, the body contributes a destabilizing influence. AS is usual with supersonic configurations, the fuselage and nacelles may be quite large in comparison with the wing area and the contribution to stability may be large. Interaction between the wing and fuselage and\n\nnacelles deserves consideration in several instances. Body upwash and variation of local Mach number can influence the wing lift while lift carryover and downwash can effect the fuselage and nacelles forces and moments.\n\nHORIZONTAL TAIL. The horizontal tail usually provides the greatest stabilizing influence of all the components of the airplane. To appreciate the contribution of the horizontal tail to stability, inspect figure 4.9. If the airplane is given a change in angle of attack, a change in tail lift will occur at the aerodynamic center of the tail. An increase in lift at the horizontal tail produces a negative moment about the airplane c.g. and tends to return the airplane to the trim condition. While the contribution of the horizontal tail to stability is large, the -magnitude of the contribution is dependent upon the change in tail lift and the lever arm of the surface. It is obvious that the horizontal tail will produce a stabilizing effect only when the surface is aft of the c.g. For this reason it would be inappropriate to refer to the forward surface of a canard (tail&St) configuration as a horizontal ' stabilizer.' In a logical sense, the horizontal ' stabilizer' must be aft of the c.g. andgenerally speaking-the farther aft, the greater the contribution to stability.\n\nMany factors influence the change in tail lift which occurs with a change in airplane angle of attack. The area of the horizontal tail has the obvious effect that a large surface would generate a large change in lift. In a similar manner, the change in tail lift would depend on the slope of the lift curve for the horizontal tail. Thus, aspect ratio, taper, sweepback, and Mach number would determine the sensitivity of the surface to changes in angle of attack. It should be appreciated that the flow at the horizontal tail is not of the same flow direction or dynamic pressure as the free stream. Due to the wing wake, fuselage boundary layer, and power effects, the q at the horizontal tail may be greatfy different from the 4 of the free stream. In most in-\n\n256", + "recall": 0.9015151515151515, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS DD-807-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL \n\nnacelles deserves consideration in several in- stances. Body upwash and variation of local Mach number can influence the wing lift while lift carryover and downwash can effect the fu- selage and nacelles forces and moments. \n\nof figure 4.7 illustrates the change of wing contribution possible between subsonic and supersonic flight. The large increase in static stability in supersonic flight can incur high trim drag or require great control effectiveness to prevent reduction in maneuverability. \n\nHORIZONTAL TAIL. The horizontal tail usually provides the greatest stabilizing influ- ence of all the components of the airplane. To appreciate the contribution of the horizontal tail to stability, inspect figure 4.9. If the air- plane is given a change in angle of attack, a change in tail lift will occur at the aerody- namic center of the tail. An increase in lift at the horizontal tail produces a negative moment about the airplane c.g. and tends to return the airplane to the trim condition. While the contribution of the horizontal tail to stability is large, the -magnitude of the contribution is dependent upon the change in tail lift and the lever arm of the surface. It is obvious that the horizontal tail will produce a stabilizing effect only when the surface is aft of the c.g. For this reason it would be inap- propriate to refer to the forward surface of a canard (tail&St) configuration as a horizontal “stabilizer.” In a logical sense, the horizontal “stabilizer” must be aft of the c.g. and- generally speaking-the farther aft, the greater the contribution to stability. \n\nFUSELAGE AND NACELLES. In most cases, the contribution of the fuselage and nacelles is destabilizing. A symmetrical body of revolution in the flow field of a perfect fluid develops an unstable pitching moment when given an angle of attack. In fact, an increase in angle of attack produces an increase in the unstable pitching moment without the devel- opment of lift. Figure 4.8 illustrates the pres- sure distribution which creates this unstable moment on the body of revolution. In the actual case of real subsonic flow essentially the same effect is produced. An increase in angle of attack causes an increase in the unstable pitching moment but a negligible increase in lift. \n\nAn additional factor for consideration is the influence of the induced flow field of the wing. As illustrated in figure 4.8, the upwash ahead of the wing increases the destabilizing influence from the portions of the fuselage and nacelles ahead of the wing. The downwash behind the wing reduces the destabilizing influence from the portions of the fuselage and nacelles aft of the wing. Hence, the location of the fuselage and nacelles relative to the wing is important in determining the contribution to stability. \n\nMany factors influence the change in tail lift which occurs with a change in airplane angle of attack. The area of the horizontal tail has the obvious effect that a large surface would generate a large change in lift. In a similar manner, the change in tail lift would depend on the slope of the lift curve for the horizontal tail. Thus, aspect ratio, taper, sweepback, and Mach number would deter- mine the sensitivity of the surface to changes in angle of attack. It should be appreciated that the flow at the horizontal tail is not of the same flow direction or dynamic pressure as the free stream. Due to the wing wake, fuse- lage boundary layer, and power effects, the q at the horizontal tail may be greatfy different from the 4 of the free stream. In most in- \n\nThe body of revolution in supersonic flow can develop lift of a magnitude which cannot be neglected. When the body of revolution in supersonic flow is given an angle of attack, a pressure distribution typical of figure 4.8 is the result. Since the center of pressure is well forward, the body contributes a destabilizing influence. AS is usual with supersonic con- figurations, the fuselage and nacelles may be quite large in comparison with the wing area and the contribution to stability may be large. Interaction between the wing and fuselage and \n\n256" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.29115752241330245, + "doc_id": "96277ed1bd078eeffd3a97b18782361ebfbb4312a77a83289da4eaf3e0871487", + "edit_distance": 0.6428571428571429, + "f1_score": 0.7894736842105263, + "meteor": 0.8394224733207784, + "precision": 0.6521739130434783, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS CID-8OT-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL\n\n## EFFECT OF DlilEDRAL\n\n## EFFECT OF SWEEPBACK\n\n## CONTRIBUTION OF VERTICAL TAIL\n\nFigure 4.28. Contribution of Components to Lateral Stability\n\nFigure 4.28. Contribution of Components to Lateral Stability\n\n297", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS CID-8OT-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL \n\nFigure 4.28. Contribution of Components to Lateral Stability \n\n297" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8819199071644472, + "doc_id": "f69fe868ce20fa842c5112d8089919106b87f7fe415386dd46b4490dc35bbea5", + "edit_distance": 0.5902306648575305, + "f1_score": 0.9116279069767442, + "meteor": 0.7773439915519319, + "precision": 0.9514563106796117, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS 00-801-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE\n\ndefine the maximum turning performance. The acrodynomic limir describes the minimum turn radius available to the airplane when operated at C,,,,. When the airplane is at the stall speed in level flight, all the lift is necessary to sustain the aircraft in flight and none is available to produce a steady turn. Hence, the turn radius at the stall speed is infinite. As speed is increased above the stall speed, the airplane at C,,, is able to develop lift greater than weight and produce a finite turn radius. For example, at a speed twice the stall speed, the airplane at CL,,,,= s able to develop a load i factor of four and utilize a bank angle of 75.5' (cos 75.~~ = 0.25). Continued increase in speed increases the load factor and bank angle which is available aerodynamically but, because of the increase in velocity and the basic effect on turn radius, the turn radius approaches an absolute minimum value. When C,,, is unaffected by velocity, the aerodynamic minimum turn radius approaches this absolute value which is a function of C,,,,,,,, W/S, and 6. Actually, the one common denominator of aerodynamic turning performance is the wing level stall speed.\n\nThe aerodynamic limit of turn radius requires that the increased velocity be utilized to produce increasing load factors and greater angles of bank. Obviously, very high speeds will require very high load factors and the absolute aerodynamic minimum turn radius will require an infinite load factor. Increasing speed above the stall speed will eventually produce the limit load factor and continued increase in speed above this point will require that load factor and bank angle be limited to prevent structural damage. When the load factor and bank angle are held constant at the structural limit, the turn radius varies as the square of the velocity and increases rapidly above the aerodynamic limit. The intersection of ' the aerodynamic limit and structural limit lines is the ' * maneuver speed.' The maneuver speed is the minimum speed necessary to develop aerodynamically the limit load factor\n\n180\n\nand it produces the minimum turn radius within aerodynamic and structural limitations. At speeds less than the maneuver speed, the limit load factor is not available aerodynamically and turning performance is aerodynamically limited. At speeds greater than the maneuver speed, CLand maximum aerodynamic load factor are not available and turning performance is structurally limited. When the stall speed and limit load factor are known for a particular configuration, the maneuver speed is related by the following expression:\n\nwhere V,=maneuver speed, knots V.=stall speed, knots n limit = limit load factor\n\nFor example, an airplane with a limit load factor of 4.0 would have a maneuver speed which is twice the stall speed.\n\nThe aerodynamic limit line of the first illustration of figure 2.30 is typical of an airplane with a CL, which is invariant with speed. While this is applicable for the majority of subsonic airplanes, considerable difference would be typical of the transonic or supersonic airplane at altitude. Compressibility effects and changes in longitudinal control power may produce a maximum available CL which varies with velocity and an aerodynamic turn radius which is not an absolute minimum at the maximum of velocity.\n\nThe second illustration of figure 2.30 describes the constant altitude turning performance of an airplane. When an airplane is at high ,altitude, the turning performance at the high speed end of the flight speed range is more usually thrust limited rather than structurally limited. In flight at constant altitude, the thrust must equal the drag to maintain equilibrium and, thus, the constant altitude turn radius is infinite at the maximum level flight speed. Any bank or turn at maximum level flight speed would incur additional drag and", + "recall": 0.875, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-801-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE \n\nand it produces the minimum turn radius within aerodynamic and structural limitations. At speeds less than the maneuver speed, the limit load factor is not available aerodynami- cally and turning performance is aerody- namically limited. At speeds greater than the maneuver speed, CL- and maximum aerodynamic load factor are not available and turning performance is structurally limited. When the stall speed and limit load factor are known for a particular configuration, the maneuver speed is related by the following expression: \n\ndefine the maximum turning performance. The acrodynomic limir describes the minimum turn radius available to the airplane when operated at C,,,,. When the airplane is at the stall speed in level flight, all the lift is neces- sary to sustain the aircraft in flight and none is available to produce a steady turn. Hence, the turn radius at the stall speed is infinite. As speed is increased above the stall speed, the airplane at C,,, is able to develop lift greater than weight and produce a finite turn radius. For example, at a speed twice the stall speed, the airplane at CL,,,,= is able to develop a load factor of four and utilize a bank angle of 75.5’ (cos 75.~~ = 0.25). Continued increase in speed increases the load factor and bank angle which is available aerodynamically but, be- cause of the increase in velocity and the basic effect on turn radius, the turn radius approaches an absolute minimum value. When C,,, is unaffected by velocity, the aerodynamic mini- mum turn radius approaches this absolute value which is a function of C,,,,,,,, W/S, and 6. Actually, the one common denominator of aerodynamic turning performance is the wing level stall speed. \n\nwhere V,=maneuver speed, knots \n\nwhere V,=maneuver speed, knots V.=stall speed, knots n limit = limit load factor \n\nFor example, an airplane with a limit load factor of 4.0 would have a maneuver speed which is twice the stall speed. The aerodynamic limit line of the first \n\nwhich is twice the stall speed. The aerodynamic limit line of the first illustration of figure 2.30 is typical of an air- plane with a CL, which is invariant with speed. While this is applicable for the ma- jority of subsonic airplanes, considerable differ- ence would be typical of the transonic or supersonic airplane at altitude. Compressi- bility effects and changes in longitudinal control power may produce a maximum avail- able CL which varies with velocity and an aerodynamic turn radius which is not an absolute minimum at the maximum of velocity. \n\nThe aerodynamic limit of turn radius requires that the increased velocity be utilized to pro- duce increasing load factors and greater angles of bank. Obviously, very high speeds will require very high load factors and the absolute aerodynamic minimum turn radius will require an infinite load factor. Increasing speed above the stall speed will eventually produce the limit load factor and continued increase in speed above this point will require that load factor and bank angle be limited to prevent structural damage. When the load factor and bank angle are held constant at the structural limit, the turn radius varies as the square of the velocity and increases rapidly above the aerodynamic limit. The intersection of ‘ the aerodynamic limit and structural limit lines is the ‘ *maneuver speed.” The maneuver speed is the minimum speed necessary to develop aerodynamically the limit load factor \n\nThe second illustration of figure 2.30 describes the constant altitude turning performance of an airplane. When an airplane is at high ,altitude, the turning performance at the high speed end of the flight speed range is more usually thrust limited rather than structurally limited. In flight at constant altitude, the thrust must equal the drag to maintain equilib- rium and, thus, the constant altitude turn radius is infinite at the maximum level flight speed. Any bank or turn at maximum level flight speed would incur additional drag and \n\n180" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "8f9d31f1b648bbadb69e7e2bc7fe95f2bd58e424f1a2efed35dbfa9fc237ff78", + "edit_distance": 0.5902306648575305, + "f1_score": 0.9116279069767442, + "meteor": 0.7773439915519319, + "precision": 0.9514563106796117, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.875, + "true_md": "" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5245322414712716, + "doc_id": "9091080a58c3d37ae84b82d327456b896b2fb20fc6fce5493a6b7262c4f8a1e8", + "edit_distance": 0.6818181818181818, + "f1_score": 0.9629629629629631, + "meteor": 0.8892767442850454, + "precision": 0.9285714285714286, + "pred_md": "## NAWWEPS 00-8OT-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL\n\nFigure 4.35. Rotor Forces and Moments\n\nFigure 4.35. Rotor Forces and Moments\n\n320", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Figure 4.35. Rotor Forces and Moments \n\n320 \n\nNAWWEPS 00-8OT-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.021227404618039684, + "doc_id": "7b163c144728647f6299af548562a0a1b38bb60a1751701ab56d42af67e6e77f", + "edit_distance": 0.9851851851851852, + "f1_score": 0.08275862068965519, + "meteor": 0.11135318324860811, + "precision": 0.04316546762589928, + "pred_md": "NAWEPS 00-801-8~ TABLE OF CONTENTS\n\n1132\n\n| RANGE PERFORMANCE. | :; |\n|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|------|\n| General range performance. | 158 |\n| Specific range, v&city, fuel flbw Specific endurance Cruise control and total range | |\n| Range, propeller driven airplanes. | 160 |\n| Aerodynamic conditions Effect of weight and altitude Reciprocating and turboprop airplanes | |\n| Aerodynamic conditions Effect of weight | 164 |\n| Range, turbojet airplanes. | |\n| and altitude Constant altitude and cruise-climb profiles | |\n| Effect of wind oh ' PY~C........,.................................... | 168 |\n| ENDURANCE PERFORMANCE. | 170 |\n| General endurance performance.. Spxific cndurancc, velocity, fuel flow | 170 |\n| | 170 |\n| Effect of altitude op endurance, | |\n| Propcllcr driven airplanes Turbojet aitplaocs | |\n| OFF-OPTIMUM RANGE AND ENDURANCE. | 172 |\n| Reciprocating powered airplane.. , | 172 |\n| Turboprop powered airplane, | 173 |\n| Turbojet powered airplane... . | 175 |\n| Relationships of turning flight. . . . | 176 |\n| Steady turn, bank angle and load factor Induced drag | 178 |\n| Tom radius and turn rate Effect of bank aaglc and velocity | |\n| Turning performance.. | |\n| Tactical performance, . | 178 |\n| Maximum lift FhZZF%3:~2:; pfOt' l~' CC | |\n| TAKEOFF AND LANDING PERFORMANCE.. | |\n| Relationships of accelerated motion. | 182 |\n| Acceleration, vclocit distance Uniform and nonum arm acceleration ,J | |\n| Takeoff | 164 |\n| Factors affecting takeo# performance. | 187 |\n| Effect of gross weight Rffcct of wind Effect of runway slope F' qxt takeoff vcloclty. | |\n| Accelerated motion Factors of technique | |\n| Forces acting on the airplane | |\n| performance.. . . . | |\n\nHandbook data\n\nY", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAWEPS 00-801-8~ TABLE OF CONTENTS \n\nY" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "42c0a1df53df29fb9f4544337f3ed577e1883b97813701461cb41166bd980096", + "edit_distance": 0.9851851851851852, + "f1_score": 0.08275862068965519, + "meteor": 0.11135318324860811, + "precision": 0.04316546762589928, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7827795034276637, + "doc_id": "6a9dec8f766cab492ef5cda90bea90775af02fa371c80537afb3aa8b67c002cc", + "edit_distance": 0.7764127764127764, + "f1_score": 0.9182156133828997, + "meteor": 0.6683837650258194, + "precision": 0.95, + "pred_md": "If the planform has curvature and the average chord is not easily determined, an alternate expression is:\n\n## AR = b2/.S\n\nThe aspect ratio is a fineness ratio of the wing and this quantity is very powerful in determing the aerodynamic characteristics and structural weight. Typical aspect ratios vary from 33 for a high performance sailplane to 3.5 for a jet fighter to 1.28 for a flying saucer.\n\n- (5) The raat chord, c,, is the chord at the wing centerline and the rip chord, c,, is measured at the tip.\n- (6) Considering the wing planform to have straight lines for the leading and trailing edges, the taper ratio, A (lambda), is the ratio of the tip chord to the root chord.\n\n## A=&\n\nThe taper ratio affects the lift distribution and the structural weight of the wing. A rectangular wing has a taper ratio of 1.0 while the pointed tip delta wing has a taper ratio of 0.0.\n\n- (7) The sweep angle, A (cap lambda), is usually measured as the angle between the line of 25 percent chords and a perpendicular to the root chord. The sweep of a wing causes definite changes in compressibility, maximum lift, and stall characteristics.\n- (8) The mean aerodynamic chord, MAC, is the chord drawn through the centroid (geographical center) of plan area. A rectangular wing of this chord and the same span would have identical pitching moment characteristics. The MAC is located on the reference axis of the airplane and is a primary reference for longitudinal stability considerations. Note that the MAC is not the average chord but is the chord through the centroid of area. As an example, the pointed-tip delta wing with a taper ratio of zero would have an average chord equal to one-half the\n\nNAVWEPS OO-BOT-BO BASIC AERODYNAMICS\n\nroot chord but an MAC equal to two-thirds ~' of the root chord.\n\nThe aspect ratio, taper ratio, and sweepback of a planform are the principal factors which determine the aerodynamic characteristics of a .wing. These same quantities also have a definite influence on the structural weight and stiffness of a wing.\n\nDEVELOPMENT OF LIFT BY A WING. In order to appreciate the effect of the planform on the aerodynamic characteristics, it is necessary to study the manner in which a wing produces lift.' Figure 1.29 illustrates the threedimensional flow pattern which results when the rectangular wing creates lift.\n\nJ.f a wing is producing lift, a pressure differential will exist between the upper and lower surfaces, i.e., for positive lift, the static pressure on the upper surface will be less than on the lower surface. At the tips of the wing, the existence of this pressure differential creates the spanwise flow components shown in figure 1.29: For the rectangular wing, the lateral flow developed at the tip is quite strong and a strong vortex is created at the tip. The lateral ' f l ow-and consequent vortex strength-reduces inboard from the tip until it is zero at the centerline.\n\nThe existence of the tip vortex is described by the drawings of figure 1.29. The rotational pressure flow combines with the local airstream flow to produce the resultant flow of the trailing vortex. Also, the downwash flow field behind a delta wing is illustrated by the photographs of figure 1.29. A tuft-grid is mounted aft of the wing to visualize the local flow direction by deflection of th,e tuft elements. This tuft-grid illustrates the existence of the tip vortices and the deflected airstream aft of the wing. Note that an increase in angle of attack increases lift and increases the flow deflection and strength of the tip vortices.\n\nFigure 1.30 illustrates the principal effect of the wing vortex system. The wing producing lift can be represented by a series of", + "recall": 0.8884892086330936, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OO-BOT-BO BASIC AERODYNAMICS \n\nroot chord but an MAC equal to two-thirds ~ ‘ of the root chord. The aspect ratio, taper ratio, and sweepback \n\nIf the planform has curvature and the aver- age chord is not easily determined, an alternate expression is: \n\n~ ‘ of the root chord. The aspect ratio, taper ratio, and sweepback of a planform are the principal factors which determine the aerodynamic characteristics of a .wing. These same quantities also have a defi- nite influence on the structural weight and stiff- ness of a wing. DEVELOPMENT OF LIFT BY A WING. \n\nThe aspect ratio is a fineness ratio of the wing and this quantity is very powerful in determing the aerodynamic characteristics and structural weight. Typical aspect ratios vary from 33 for a high performance sail- plane to 3.5 for a jet fighter to 1.28 for a flying saucer. (5) The raat chord, c,, is the chord at the \n\nflying saucer. (5) The raat chord, c,, is the chord at the wing centerline and the rip chord, c,, is measured at the tip. (6) Considering the wing planform to \n\n## ness of a wing. DEVELOPMENT OF LIFT BY A WING.\n\nIn order to appreciate the effect of the planform on the aerodynamic characteristics, it is neces- sary to study the manner in which a wing produces lift.’ Figure 1.29 illustrates the three- dimensional flow pattern which results when the rectangular wing creates lift. J.f a wing is producing lift, a pressure differ- \n\nmeasured at the tip. (6) Considering the wing planform to have straight lines for the leading and trail- ing edges, the taper ratio, A (lambda), is the ratio of the tip chord to the root chord. \n\nthe rectangular wing creates lift. J.f a wing is producing lift, a pressure differ- ential will exist between the upper and lower surfaces, i.e., for positive lift, the static pres- sure on the upper surface will be less than on the lower surface. At the tips of the wing, the existence of this pressure differential creates the spanwise flow components shown in figure 1.29: For the rectangular wing, the lateral flow developed at the tip is quite strong and a strong vortex is created at the tip. The lateral ‘ flow-and consequent vortex strength-reduces inboard from the tip until it is zero at the centerline. \n\nThe taper ratio affects the lift distribution and the structural weight of the wing. A rectangular wing has a taper ratio of 1.0 while the pointed tip delta wing has a taper ratio of 0.0. (7) The sweep angle, A (cap lambda), is \n\nratio of 0.0. (7) The sweep angle, A (cap lambda), is usually measured as the angle between the line of 25 percent chords and a perpendicular to the root chord. The sweep of a wing causes definite changes in compressibility, maximum lift, and stall characteristics. \n\nThe existence of the tip vortex is described by the drawings of figure 1.29. The rotational pressure flow combines with the local airstream flow to produce the resultant flow of the trailing vortex. Also, the downwash flow field behind a delta wing is illustrated by the photographs of figure 1.29. A tuft-grid is mounted aft of the wing to visualize the local flow direction by deflection of th,e tuft ele- ments. This tuft-grid illustrates the existence of the tip vortices and the deflected airstream aft of the wing. Note that an increase in angle of attack increases lift and increases the flow deflection and strength of the tip vortices. \n\n(8) The mean aerodynamic chord, MAC, is the chord drawn through the centroid (geographical center) of plan area. A rec- tangular wing of this chord and the same span would have identical pitching moment characteristics. The MAC is located on the reference axis of the airplane and is a primary reference for longitudinal stability considera- tions. Note that the MAC is not the average chord but is the chord through the centroid of area. As an example, the pointed-tip delta wing with a taper ratio of zero would have an average chord equal to one-half the \n\nFigure 1.30 illustrates the principal effect of the wing vortex system. The wing pro- ducing lift can be represented by a series of \n\n$$AR = b2/.S $$\n\n$$A=& $$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5986744307891794, + "doc_id": "f8bc068170cbc552e70e4d5ef75c05a10a80810e31f6004d6e59c15c83678948", + "edit_distance": 0.4090909090909091, + "f1_score": 0.9629629629629631, + "meteor": 0.9216295602571197, + "precision": 0.9285714285714286, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS DD-801-80 HIGH SPEED AERODYNAMICS\n\nFigure 3.72. High speed Section Characteristics\n\nFigure 3.72. High speed Section Characteristics\n\n224", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS DD-801-80 HIGH SPEED AERODYNAMICS \n\nFigure 3.72. High speed Section Characteristics \n\n224" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8855273183750542, + "doc_id": "3f951002c246f9c47b0f817c5d44b542e9961ef15a8a0a670475e5763467bc18", + "edit_distance": 0.8316546762589928, + "f1_score": 0.935672514619883, + "meteor": 0.6810116749810833, + "precision": 0.96, + "pred_md": "given to the airplane size. For geometrically similar airplanes, a certain deflection of the I!!. ailerons will produce a fixed value of zlr mdependent of the airplane size. However, the roll rate of the geometrically similar airplanes at a given speed will vary inversely with the span, b.\n\nIf\n\n\n\nThus, the smaller airplane will have an advantage in roll rate or in time to accelerate through a prescribed angle of roll. For example, a one-half scale airplane will develop twice the rate of roll of the full scale airplane. This relationship points to the favor of the small, short span airplane for achieving high roll performance.\n\nAn important variable affecting the rate of roll is the true airspeed or flight velocity, V. If a certain deflection of the ailerons creates a Pb specific value of -7 the rate of roll varies 2V directly with the true airspeed. Thus, if the roll helix angle is held constant, the rate of roll at a particular true airspeed will not be affected by altitude. The linear variation of roll rate with airspeed points out the fact that high roll rates will require high airspeeds. The low roll rates at low airspeeds are simply a consequence of the low flight speed and this condition may provide a critical lateral control requirement for satisfactory handling qualities.\n\nFigure 4.30 illustrates the typical rolling paformance of a low speed airplane. When the ailerons are at full deflection, the maximum roll helix angle is obtained. The rate of roll increases linearly with speed until the control forces increase to limit of pilot effort and full control deflection cannot be maintained. Past\n\n303\n\n## NAVWEPS OO-BOT-BO STABILIJY AND CONTROL\n\nthe critical speed, with some limited amount of force applied by the pilot (usually the limit of lateral force is assumed to be 30 lbs.), the Pb ailerons cannot be held at full deflection, ~~\n\ndrops, and rate of roll decreases. In this example, the rolling performance at high speeds is limited by the ability of the pilot to maintain full deflection of the controls. In an effort to reduce the aileron hinge moments and control forces, extensive application is made of aerodynamic balance and various tab devices. However, 100 percent aerodynamic balance is not always feasible or practical but a sufficient Pb must be maintained value of at high speeds. ZV\n\nRather than developing an extensive weight lifting program mandatory for all Naval Aviators, mechanical assistance in lateral control can be provided. If a power boost is provided for the lateral control system, the rolling performance of the airplane may be extended to higher speeds since pilot effort will not be a limiting factor. The effect of a power boost is denoted by the dashed line extensions of figure 4.30. A full powered, irreversible lateral control system is common for high speed airplanes. In the power operated system there is no immediate limit to the deflection of the control surfaces and none of the aberrations in hinge moments due to compressibility are fed back to the pilot. Control forces are provided by the stick centering lateral bungee or spring.\n\nA problem particular to the high speed is due to the interaction of aerodynamic forces and the elastic deflections of the wing in torsion. The deflection of ailerons creates twisting moments on the wing which can cause significant torsional deflections of the wing. At the low dynamic pressures of low flight speeds, the twisting moments and twisting deflections are too small to be of importance. However, at high dynamic pressures, the deflection of an aileron creates significant", + "recall": 0.9125475285171103, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OO-BOT-BO STABILIJY AND CONTROL \n\nthe critical speed, with some limited amount of force applied by the pilot (usually the limit of lateral force is assumed to be 30 lbs.), the Pb ailerons cannot be held at full deflection, ~~ drops, and rate of roll decreases. In this exam- ple, the rolling performance at high speeds is limited by the ability of the pilot to maintain full deflection of the controls. In an effort to reduce the aileron hinge moments and control forces, extensive application is made of aerody- namic balance and various tab devices. How- ever, 100 percent aerodynamic balance is not always feasible or practical but a sufficient Pb value of - must be maintained at high speeds. ZV Rather than developing an extensive weight \n\ngiven to the airplane size. For geometrically similar airplanes, a certain deflection of the I!!. ailerons will produce a fixed value of zlr mde- pendent of the airplane size. However, the roll rate of the geometrically similar airplanes at a given speed will vary inversely with the span, b. \n\nIf \n\nThus, the smaller airplane will have an ad- vantage in roll rate or in time to accelerate through a prescribed angle of roll. For ex- ample, a one-half scale airplane will develop twice the rate of roll of the full scale airplane. This relationship points to the favor of the small, short span airplane for achieving high roll performance. An important variable affecting the rate of \n\n$$Pb - ~-constant p=(constant) 7 ( ) $$\n\nZV Rather than developing an extensive weight lifting program mandatory for all Naval Aviators, mechanical assistance in lateral con- trol can be provided. If a power boost is provided for the lateral control system, the rolling performance of the airplane may be extended to higher speeds since pilot effort will not be a limiting factor. The effect of a power boost is denoted by the dashed line extensions of figure 4.30. A full powered, irreversible lateral control system is common for high speed airplanes. In the power oper- ated system there is no immediate limit to the deflection of the control surfaces and none of the aberrations in hinge moments due to com- pressibility are fed back to the pilot. Control forces are provided by the stick centering lateral bungee or spring. \n\nroll performance. An important variable affecting the rate of roll is the true airspeed or flight velocity, V. If a certain deflection of the ailerons creates a Pb specific value of -7 the rate of roll varies 2V directly with the true airspeed. Thus, if the roll helix angle is held constant, the rate of roll at a particular true airspeed will not be affected by altitude. The linear variation of roll rate with airspeed points out the fact that high roll rates will require high airspeeds. The low roll rates at low airspeeds are simply a consequence of the low flight speed and this condition may provide a critical lateral con- trol requirement for satisfactory handling qualities. \n\nA problem particular to the high speed is due to the interaction of aerodynamic forces and the elastic deflections of the wing in torsion. The deflection of ailerons creates twisting moments on the wing which can cause significant torsional deflections of the wing. At the low dynamic pressures of low flight speeds, the twisting moments and twisting deflections are too small to be of importance. However, at high dynamic pressures, the deflection of an aileron creates significant \n\nFigure 4.30 illustrates the typical rolling paformance of a low speed airplane. When the ailerons are at full deflection, the maximum roll helix angle is obtained. The rate of roll increases linearly with speed until the control forces increase to limit of pilot effort and full control deflection cannot be maintained. Past \n\n303" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4518010018049224, + "doc_id": "5a1fe71b7a76dce38d234f36e393da931c62fb67dc5a1d68d43770f29e58ee3f", + "edit_distance": 0.6666666666666666, + "f1_score": 0.9714285714285715, + "meteor": 0.8959322570433682, + "precision": 0.9444444444444444, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS 00-8oT-80\n\n## HIGH SPEED. AERODYNAMlCS\n\nFigure 3.8. Typical Supersonic Flow Patterns and Distribution of Pressure\n\nFigure 3.8. Typical Supersonic Flow Patterns and Distribution of Pressure\n\n214", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Figure 3.8. Typical Supersonic Flow Patterns and Distribution of Pressure \n\n214 \n\nNAVWEPS 00-8oT-80 HIGH SPEED. AERODYNAMlCS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5941114003420148, + "doc_id": "34d43393b37621f3285004ac80182c9e7cdedf63809d7dcfc691641953e2a8cd", + "edit_distance": 0.7019867549668874, + "f1_score": 0.9032258064516129, + "meteor": 0.9057988623380638, + "precision": 0.8316831683168316, + "pred_md": "## PLANVIEW\n\nThe planview of the IAP charts provides an overhead view of the entire instrument approach procedure.\n\nThe data on the planview is shown to scale, unless concentric rings, scale breaks or an inset have been used.\n\nApproach Segments\n\nHydrography\n\nNAVAIDs\n\nInternational Boundary\n\nRestrictive Airspeeds\n\nObstacles (Man-made, Terrain and Vegetation)\n\nRestrictive Altitudes\n\nSpecial Use Airspace\n\nHolding Patterns and Procedure Turns\n\nMinimum Safe Altitude\n\nAirports\n\nTerminal Arrival Areas\n\nRelief (Terrain Features)\n\nHelicopter (Copter) Procedures\n\n## Approach Segments\n\nThe planview includes a graphical depiction of procedure entry through missed approach.\n\nNE-3, 18 AUG 2016 to 15 SEP 2016\n\nNE-3, 18 AUG 2016 to 15 SEP 2016\n\nSample IAP Example\n\nLegend\n\nFeeder Route\n\nInitial Approach\n\nIntermediate Approach Final Approach Course Missed Approach\n\n99\n\nFAA Chart Users' Guide - Terminal Procedures Publication (TPP) - Terms", + "recall": 0.9882352941176471, + "true_md": "## PLANVIEW\n\n## Approach Segments\n\nThe planview of the IAP charts provides an overhead view of the entire instrument approach procedure.\n\nThe data on the planview is shown to scale, unless concentric rings, scale breaks or an inset have been used.\n\nThe planview includes a graphical depiction of procedure entry through missed approach.\n\nFAA Chart Users’ Guide - Terminal Procedures Publication (TPP) - Terms\n\n99\n\nHydrography International Boundary Obstacles (Man-made, Terrain and Vegetation) Special Use Airspace Minimum Safe Altitude Terminal Arrival Areas Helicopter (Copter) Procedures\n\nApproach Segments NAVAIDs Restrictive Airspeeds Restrictive Altitudes Holding Patterns and Procedure Turns Airports Relief (Terrain Features)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.840813542451811, + "doc_id": "42f2c6a54530f4ec2f9c9758270b33d0c0c49d8e8bd8426d8359de00c3ccdf27", + "edit_distance": 0.9020979020979021, + "f1_score": 0.9281767955801103, + "meteor": 0.7881765333516436, + "precision": 0.9438202247191011, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS 00-BOT-BO\n\nBASIC AERODYNAMICS\n\n## Chapter 1 BASIC AERODYNAMKS\n\nIn order to understand the characteristics of his aircraft and develop precision flying techniques, the Naval Aviator must be familiar with the fundamentals of aerodynamics. There are certain physical l aws which describe the behavior of airflow and define the various aerodynamic forces and moments acting on a surface. These principles of aerodynamics provide the foundations for good, precise flying techniques.\n\n## WING AND AIRFOIL FORCES\n\n## PROPERTIES OF THE ATMOSPHERE\n\nThe aerodynamic forces and moments acting on a surface are due in great part to the properties of the air mass in which the surface is operating.~ The composition, of the earth' s atmosphere by volume is approximately 78 percent. nitrogen, 21 percent oxygen, and 1", + "recall": 0.9130434782608695, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-BOT-BO BASIC AERODYNAMICS \n\n## Chapter 1\n\n## BASIC AERODYNAMKS\n\n## WING AND AIRFOIL FORCES\n\n## PROPERTIES OF THE ATMOSPHERE\n\nThe aerodynamic forces and moments acting on a surface are due in great part to the prop- erties of the air mass in which the surface is operating.~ The composition, of the earth ’ s atmosphere by volume is approximately 78 percent. nitrogen, 21 percent oxygen, and 1 \n\nIn order to understand the characteristics of his aircraft and develop precision flying tech- niques, the Naval Aviator must be familiar with the fundamentals of aerodynamics. There are certain physical laws which describe the behavior of airflow and define the various aerodynamic forces and moments acting on a surface. These principles of aerodynamics pro- vide the foundations for good, precise flying techniques." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6051139363357343, + "doc_id": "d71e37ca06e484d2d0709851755bdd94871b677a75b41e164b3e40214a6746b5", + "edit_distance": 0.3783783783783784, + "f1_score": 0.9777777777777777, + "meteor": 0.9423130558740587, + "precision": 0.9565217391304348, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS OO-ROT-RO APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYING\n\nFigure 6.16. Rotor Flow Conditions in Forward f/i&\n\nFigure 6.16. Rotor Flow Conditions in Forward f/i&\n\n403", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OO-ROT-RO APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYING \n\nFigure 6.16. Rotor Flow Conditions in Forward f/i& \n\n403" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8794210491778705, + "doc_id": "7fae58f6efb1f2c396b406de91810045d1e355ff1367355012bdca319b7d2008", + "edit_distance": 0.7682619647355163, + "f1_score": 0.937007874015748, + "meteor": 0.6762458549845001, + "precision": 0.9558232931726908, + "pred_md": "In order to obviate some of the problems of a deficiency of airspeed at takeoff, usual result can be an excess of airspeed at takeoff. The principal effect of an BXCBJS keoff air@pssd ta is the greater takeoff distance which results. The general effect is that each 1 percent excess takeoff velocity incurs approximately 2 percent additional takeoff distance. Thus, excess speed must be compared with the additional runway required to produce the higher speed. In addition, the aircraft tires may be subject to critical loads when the airplane is at very high rolling speeds and speeds in excess of a basically high takeoff speed may produce damage or failure of the tires.\n\nAs with the conditions of landing, excess velocity or deficiency of velocity at takeoff is undesirable. The proper takeoff speeds and angle of attack must be utilized to assure satisfactory takeoff performance.\n\n## GUSTS AND WIND SHEAR\n\nThe variation of wind velocity and direction throughout the atmosphere is important because of its effect on the aerodynamic forces and moments on an airplane. As the airplane traverses this variation of wind velocity and direction during flight, the changes in airflow direction and velocity create changes in the aerodynamic forces and moments and produce a response of the airplane. The variation of airflow velocity along a given direction exists with shear parallel to the flow direction. Hence, the velocity gradients are often referred to as the wind ' shear.'\n\nThe effect of the vertical gust has important effects on the airplane at high speed because of the possibility of damaging flight loads. The mechanism of vertical gust is illustrated in figure 6.5 where the vertical gust velocity is added vectorially to the flight velocity to produce some resultant velocity. The principal effect of the vertical gust is to produce a change in airplane angle of attack, e.g., a positive (up) gust causes an increase in angle of attack\n\n367\n\n## NAVWEPS DD-BOT-BD APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYING\n\nwhile a negative (down) gust causes a decrease in angle of attack. Of course, a change in angle of attack will effect a change in lift and, if some critical combination of high gust intensity and high flight speed is encountered, the change in lift may be large enough to cause structural damage.\n\nAt low flight speeds during approach, landing, and takeoff, the effect of the vertical gust is due to the same mechanism of the change in angle of attack. However, at these low flight speeds, the problem is one of possible incipient stalling and sinking rather than overstress. When the airplane is at high angle of attack, a further increase in angle of attack due to a gust may exceed the critical angle of attack and cause an incipient stalling of the airplane. Also, a decrease in angle of attack due to a gust will cause a loss of lift and allow the airplane to sink. For this reason, any deficiency of airspeed will be quite critical when operating in gusty conditions.\n\nThe effect of the hori<oonral ust differs from g the effect of the vertical gust in that the immediate effect is a change of airspeed rather than a change in angle of attack. In this sense, the horizontal gust is of little consequence in the major airplane airloads and strength limitations. Of greater significance is the response of the airplane to horizontal gusts and wind shear when operating at low flight speeds. The possible conditions in which an airplane may encounter horizontal gusts and wind shear are illustrated in figure 6.5. As the airplane traverses a shear of wind direction, a change in headwind component will exist. Also, a climbing or descending airplane may traverse a shear of wind velocity, i.e., a wind profile in which the wind velocity varies with altitude.\n\nThe response of an airplane is much dependent upon the airplane characteristics but certain basic effects are common to all aitplanes. Suppose that an airplane is established in steady, level flight with lift equal to weight, thrust equal to drag, and trimmedso", + "recall": 0.918918918918919, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS DD-BOT-BD APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYING \n\nwhile a negative (down) gust causes a de- crease in angle of attack. Of course, a change in angle of attack will effect a change in lift and, if some critical combination of high gust intensity and high flight speed is encountered, the change in lift may be large enough to cause structural damage. At low flight speeds during approach, land- \n\nIn order to obviate some of the problems of a deficiency of airspeed at takeoff, usual result can be an excess of airspeed at takeoff. The principal effect of an BXCBJS takeoff air@pssd is the greater takeoff distance which results. The general effect is that each 1 percent excess takeoff velocity incurs approximately 2 per- cent additional takeoff distance. Thus, excess speed must be compared with the additional runway required to produce the higher speed. In addition, the aircraft tires may be subject to critical loads when the airplane is at very high rolling speeds and speeds in excess of a basically high takeoff speed may produce damage or failure of the tires. \n\ncause structural damage. At low flight speeds during approach, land- ing, and takeoff, the effect of the vertical gust is due to the same mechanism of the change in angle of attack. However, at these low flight speeds, the problem is one of possible incipient stalling and sinking rather than overstress. When the airplane is at high angle of attack, a further increase in angle of attack due to a gust may exceed the critical angle of attack and cause an incipient stalling of the airplane. Also, a decrease in angle of attack due to a gust will cause a loss of lift and allow the airplane to sink. For this reason, any deficiency of airspeed will be quite critical when operating in gusty conditions. The effect of the hori<oonral gust differs from \n\nAs with the conditions of landing, excess velocity or deficiency of velocity at takeoff is undesirable. The proper takeoff speeds and angle of attack must be utilized to assure satisfactory takeoff performance. \n\ncritical when operating in gusty conditions. The effect of the hori<oonral gust differs from the effect of the vertical gust in that the im- mediate effect is a change of airspeed rather than a change in angle of attack. In this sense, the horizontal gust is of little conse- quence in the major airplane airloads and strength limitations. Of greater significance is the response of the airplane to horizontal gusts and wind shear when operating at low flight speeds. The possible conditions in which an airplane may encounter horizontal gusts and wind shear are illustrated in figure 6.5. As the airplane traverses a shear of wind direction, a change in headwind component will exist. Also, a climbing or descending airplane may traverse a shear of wind velocity, i.e., a wind profile in which the wind velocity varies with altitude. The response of an airplane is much de- \n\nThe variation of wind velocity and direction throughout the atmosphere is important be- cause of its effect on the aerodynamic forces and moments on an airplane. As the airplane traverses this variation of wind velocity and direction during flight, the changes in airflow direction and velocity create changes in the aerodynamic forces and moments and produce a response of the airplane. The variation of airflow velocity along a given direction exists with shear parallel to the flow direction. Hence, the velocity gradients are often re- ferred to as the wind “shear.” \n\nThe effect of the vertical gust has important effects on the airplane at high speed because of the possibility of damaging flight loads. The mechanism of vertical gust is illustrated in figure 6.5 where the vertical gust velocity is added vectorially to the flight velocity to produce some resultant velocity. The principal effect of the vertical gust is to produce a change in airplane angle of attack, e.g., a positive (up) gust causes an increase in angle of attack \n\nvaries with altitude. The response of an airplane is much de- pendent upon the airplane characteristics but certain basic effects are common to all ait- planes. Suppose that an airplane is estab- lished in steady, level flight with lift equal to weight, thrust equal to drag, and trimmedso \n\n367 \n\n## GUSTS AND WIND SHEAR" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5242262471786863, + "doc_id": "2422405b8ac6cb06230904a45c0c8383809472a1082f82c237f7051756e574e2", + "edit_distance": 0.5, + "f1_score": 0.8372093023255814, + "meteor": 0.6040743670886076, + "precision": 0.9473684210526315, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS 00-EOT-80 OPERATING STRENGTH LIMITATIONS\n\n## STATIC STRENGTH OF TYPICAL AIRCRAFT METAL\n\nEgu,e 5.1. Strength Chomctorirfics\n\nEgu,e 5.1. Strength Chomctorirfics\n\n327", + "recall": 0.75, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-EOT-80 OPERATING STRENGTH LIMITATIONS \n\nFATIGUE STRENGTH OF TYPICAL AIRCRAFT METAL \n\nEgu,e 5.1. Strength Chomctorirfics \n\nNUMBER OF APPLICATIONS TO CAUSE FATIGUE FAILURE \n\n327 \n\nSTATIC STRENGTH OF TYPICAL AIRCRAFT METAL" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9240686118084508, + "doc_id": "a91a09179b1bf192233a9386c4a5bf842550426d4941abae6a67916a970f7975", + "edit_distance": 0.591304347826087, + "f1_score": 0.9404990403071016, + "meteor": 0.8824832599561414, + "precision": 0.9683794466403162, + "pred_md": "center of gravity aft of the main wheels a balancing load on the tail wheel must be produced toward the center of turn. When the tail wheel is free to swivel, the equilibrium of the turn requires a control force opposite to the direction of turn-i.e.. control force instability. The inherent stability problem exists because the center of gravity is aft of the point where the main side forces are developed. This condition is analogous to the case of static longitudinal stability with the center of gravity aft of the neutral point.\n\nThe conventional tail wheel configuration has this basic instability or ground loop tendency which must be stabilized by the pilot. At high rolling speeds where aerodynamic forces are significant, the aerodynamic directional stability of the airplane resists the ground looping tendency. The most likely times for a ground loop exist when rolling speeds are not high enough to provide a contribution of the aerodyhamic forces. When the tail wheel is free to swivel or when the normal force on the tail wheel is small, lack of pilot attention can allow the ground loop to take place.\n\nThe tricycle landing gear configuration has an inherent stability d,ue to the relative position of the main wheels and the center of gravity. Centrifugal force produced by a turn is balanced by the side force on the main wheels and a side force on the nose wheel in the direction of turn. Note that the freeing the nose wheel to swivel produces moments which bring the aircraft out of the turn. Thus, the tricycle configuration has a basic stability which.is given evidence by control displacement and a wheel side force in the direction of turn. Because of the contrast in stability, the tricycle configuration is much less difficult to maneuver than the tail wheel configuration and does not provide an inherent ground loop tendency. However, a steerable nose wheel is usually necessary to provide satisfactory maneuvering capabilities.\n\n## NAVWEPS DD-BDT-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL\n\nThe bicycle configuration of landing gear has stability characteristics more like the automobile. If directional control is accomplished with the front wheels operated by power controls, no stability problem exists at low speeds. A problem can exist when the airplane is at high speeds because of a distribution of normal force being different from the ordinary static weight distribution. If the airplane is held onto the runway at speeds well above the normal takeoff and landing speeds, the front wheels carry a greater than ordinary amount of normal force and a tendency for instability exists. However, at these same high speeds the rudder is quite powerful and the condition is usually well within control.\n\nThe basically stable nature of the tricycle and bicycle landing gear configurations is best appreciated by the ease of control and ground maneuvering of the airplane. Operation of a conventional tail wheel configuration after considerable experience with tricycle cohfigurations requires careful consideration af the stability that must be furnished by the pilot during ground maneuvering.\n\n## SPINS AND PROBLEMS OP SPIN RECOVERY\n\nThe motion of an airplane in a spin can involve many complex aerodynamic and inertia forces and moments. However, there are certain fundamental relationships regarding spins and spin recoveries with which all aviators should be familiar. The spin differs from a spiral dive in that the spin always involves flight at high angle of attack while the spiral dive involves a spiral motion of the airplane at relatively low angle of attack.\n\nThe stall characteristics and stability of the airplane at high lift coefficients are important in the initial tendencies of the airplane. As previously mentioned, it is desirable to have the wing initiate stall at the root first rather than tip first. Such a stall pattern prevents the undesirable rolling moments at high lift coeGients, provides suitable stall", + "recall": 0.914179104477612, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS DD-BDT-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL \n\ncenter of gravity aft of the main wheels a bal- ancing load on the tail wheel must be produced toward the center of turn. When the tail wheel is free to swivel, the equilibrium of the turn requires a control force opposite to the direction of turn-i.e.. control force insta- bility. The inherent stability problem exists because the center of gravity is aft of the point where the main side forces are developed. This condition is analogous to the case of static longitudinal stability with the center of gravity aft of the neutral point. \n\nThe bicycle configuration of landing gear has stability characteristics more like the automobile. If directional control is ac- complished with the front wheels operated by power controls, no stability problem exists at low speeds. A problem can exist when the airplane is at high speeds because of a distribu- tion of normal force being different from the ordinary static weight distribution. If the airplane is held onto the runway at speeds well above the normal takeoff and landing speeds, the front wheels carry a greater than ordinary amount of normal force and a tend- ency for instability exists. However, at these same high speeds the rudder is quite powerful and the condition is usually well within control. \n\nThe conventional tail wheel configuration has this basic instability or ground loop tend- ency which must be stabilized by the pilot. At high rolling speeds where aerodynamic forces are significant, the aerodynamic direc- tional stability of the airplane resists the ground looping tendency. The most likely times for a ground loop exist when rolling speeds are not high enough to provide a con- tribution of the aerodyhamic forces. When the tail wheel is free to swivel or when the normal force on the tail wheel is small, lack of pilot attention can allow the ground loop to take place. \n\nThe basically stable nature of the tricycle and bicycle landing gear configurations is best appreciated by the ease of control and ground maneuvering of the airplane. Operation of a conventional tail wheel configuration after considerable experience with tricycle cohfigu- rations requires careful consideration af the stability that must be furnished by the pilot during ground maneuvering. \n\nThe tricycle landing gear configuration has an inherent stability d,ue to the relative posi- tion of the main wheels and the center of gravity. Centrifugal force produced by a turn is balanced by the side force on the main wheels and a side force on the nose wheel in the direction of turn. Note that the freeing the nose wheel to swivel produces moments which bring the aircraft out of the turn. Thus, the tricycle configuration has a basic stability which.is given evidence by control displace- ment and a wheel side force in the direction of turn. Because of the contrast in stability, the tricycle configuration is much less difficult to maneuver than the tail wheel configuration and does not provide an inherent ground loop tendency. However, a steerable nose wheel is usually necessary to provide satisfactory maneuvering capabilities. \n\nThe motion of an airplane in a spin can involve many complex aerodynamic and in- ertia forces and moments. However, there are certain fundamental relationships regarding spins and spin recoveries with which all aviators should be familiar. The spin differs from a spiral dive in that the spin always involves flight at high angle of attack while the spiral dive involves a spiral motion of the airplane at relatively low angle of attack. \n\nThe stall characteristics and stability of the airplane at high lift coefficients are im- portant in the initial tendencies of the airplane. As previously mentioned, it is desirable to have the wing initiate stall at the root first rather than tip first. Such a stall pattern prevents the undesirable rolling moments at high lift coeGients, provides suitable stall \n\n## SPINS AND PROBLEMS OP SPIN RECOVERY" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8593468257939278, + "doc_id": "1bdabd200d157031c4c533d9e471eedc61d46efaa04b5c3db7a3d3f996d280f6", + "edit_distance": 0.38114209827357237, + "f1_score": 0.9397163120567376, + "meteor": 0.7561941596234456, + "precision": 0.9636363636363636, + "pred_md": "large increase in drag and rearward shift of the airfoil aerodynamic center, compressibility effects on the helicopter increase the power tequired to maintain rotor RPM and cause rotor roughness, vibration, stick shake, and an undesirable structural twisting of the blade.\n\nSince compressibility effects become more severe at higher lift coefficients (higher blade angles of attack) and higher Mach numbers, the following operating conditions represent the most adverse conditions from the standpoint of compressibility:\n\n- 1. High airspeed\n- 2. High rotor RPM\n- 3. High gross weight\n- 4. High density altitude\n- 5. Low temperature-the speed of sound is proportional to the square root of the absolute temperature. Therefore, sonic velocity will be more easily obtained at low temperatures when the sonic speed is lower.\n- 6. Turbulent air-sharp gusts momentarily increase the blade angle of attack and thus lower the critical Mach number to the point where compressibility effects may be encountered on the blade.\n\nCompressibility effects will vanish by decreasing the blade pitch. The similarities in the critical conditions for retreating blade stall and compressibility should be noticed but one basic difference must be appreciatedcompressibility occurs at HIGH RPM while retreating blade stall occurs at LOW RPM. Recovery technique is identical for both with the exception of RPM control.\n\nAUTOROTATION CHARACTERISTICS. One of the unique characteristics of helicopters is their ability to take part of the energy of the airstream to keep the rotor turning and glide down to a landing with no power. Consideration of the rotor during a vertical autorotation will provide an understanding of why the rotor continues to rotate without power. During autorotation, the flow of air\n\n## NAVWEPS CID-ROT-R0 APP,LlCATlON OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYmING\n\nis upward through the rotor disc and there is a vertical velocity component equal to the rate of descent of the helicopter. In addition, there is a velocity component due to rotation of the rotor. The vector sum of these two velocities is the relative wind for the blade element. The forces resulting from the relative wind on each particular blade section will provide the reason why the rotor will continue to operate without power. First, consider, a blade element near the tip of the blade as illustrated in figure 6.17. At this point there is a lift force acting perpendicular to the relative wind and a drag force acting parallel to the relative wind through the aerodynamic center. Since the rotation of the rotor is affected only by forces acting in the plane of rotation, the important forces are components of the lift and drag force in the plane of rotation. In this low angle of attack high speed tip section, the net in-plane force is a drag force which would tend to retard the rotor. Next, consider a blade section at about the half-span position as illustrated in figure 6.17. In this case, the same forces are present, but the itiplane component of lift force is greater than the drag force and this results in a net thrust or forward force in the plane of rotation which tends to drive the rotor.\n\nDuring a steady autorotation, there is a balance of torque from the forces along the blade so that the RPM is maintained in equilibrium at some particular value. The region of the rotor disc where there is a net drag force on the blade is called the ' propeller region' and the region of the rotor disc where there is a net in-plane thrust force is called the ' autorotation region.' These regions are shown for vertical autorotation and forward speed (or normal) autorotation in figure 6.17. Forces acting on the rotor blades in forward flight autorotation are similar to those in vertical autorotation but the difference will consist mainly of shifts of the autorotation region to the left and the addition of reverse\n\n405", + "recall": 0.916955017301038, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS CID-ROT-R0 APP,LlCATlON OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYmING \n\nlarge increase in drag and rearward shift of the airfoil aerodynamic center, compressibility ef- fects on the helicopter increase the power te- quired to maintain rotor RPM and cause rotor roughness, vibration, stick shake, and an un- desirable structural twisting of the blade. \n\nSince compressibility effects become more severe at higher lift coefficients (higher blade angles of attack) and higher Mach numbers, the following operating conditions represent the most adverse conditions from the stand- point of compressibility: \n\nCompressibility effects will vanish by de- creasing the blade pitch. The similarities in the critical conditions for retreating blade stall and compressibility should be noticed but one basic difference must be appreciated- compressibility occurs at HIGH RPM while retreating blade stall occurs at LOW RPM. Recovery technique is identical for both with the exception of RPM control. AUTOROTATION CHARACTERISTICS. \n\n## the exception of RPM control. AUTOROTATION CHARACTERISTICS.\n\nOne of the unique characteristics of helicopters is their ability to take part of the energy of the airstream to keep the rotor turning and glide down to a landing with no power. Consideration of the rotor during a vertical autorotation will provide an understanding of why the rotor continues to rotate without power. During autorotation, the flow of air \n\nis upward through the rotor disc and there is a vertical velocity component equal to the rate of descent of the helicopter. In addition, there is a velocity component due to rotation of the rotor. The vector sum of these two velocities is the relative wind for the blade element. The forces resulting from the relative wind on each particular blade section will provide the reason why the rotor will continue to operate without power. First, consider, a blade element near the tip of the blade as illus- trated in figure 6.17. At this point there is a lift force acting perpendicular to the relative wind and a drag force acting parallel to the relative wind through the aerodynamic center. Since the rotation of the rotor is affected only by forces acting in the plane of rotation, the important forces are components of the lift and drag force in the plane of rotation. In this low angle of attack high speed tip section, the net in-plane force is a drag force which would tend to retard the rotor. Next, con- sider a blade section at about the half-span position as illustrated in figure 6.17. In this case, the same forces are present, but the iti- plane component of lift force is greater than the drag force and this results in a net thrust or forward force in the plane of rotation which tends to drive the rotor. During a steady autorotation, there is a \n\ntends to drive the rotor. During a steady autorotation, there is a balance of torque from the forces along the blade so that the RPM is maintained in equi- librium at some particular value. The region of the rotor disc where there is a net drag force on the blade is called the “propeller region” and the region of the rotor disc where there is a net in-plane thrust force is called the “autorotation region.” These regions are shown for vertical autorotation and forward speed (or normal) autorotation in figure 6.17. Forces acting on the rotor blades in forward flight autorotation are similar to those in vertical autorotation but the difference will consist mainly of shifts of the autorotation region to the left and the addition of reverse \n\n405 \n\n- 1. High airspeed \n\n- 2. High rotor RPM 3. High gross weight \n\n- 2. High rotor RPM 3. High gross weight 4. High density altitude \n\n- 3. High gross weight 4. High density altitude \n\n- 5. Low temperature-the speed of sound is proportional to the square root of the absolute temperature. Therefore, sonic velocity will be more easily obtained at low temperatures when the sonic speed is lower. \n\n- 6. Turbulent air-sharp gusts momen- tarily increase the blade angle of attack and thus lower the critical Mach number to the point where compressibility effects may be en- countered on the blade." + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "8b18957580f0187a6553a4bc525f4ced63c655f39506abea05ea7c20bbb81a0a", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.996, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "NAWWEPS 00-8OT-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS\n\n26", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAWWEPS 00-8OT-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS \n\n26" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.852877798256901, + "doc_id": "e6e982d975330677e6c1e749e47f12399e8b2b260dc06bcc1840a326985fc993", + "edit_distance": 0.47631241997439183, + "f1_score": 0.9450915141430947, + "meteor": 0.7360018933251442, + "precision": 0.9692832764505119, + "pred_md": "attack for the rotating blade with a subsequent increase in pressure rise. Of course, if the change in angle of attack or pressure rise is beyond some critical value, stall will occur. While the stall phenomenon of a series of rotating compressor blades differs from that of a single airfoil section in a free airstream, the cause and effect are essentially the same.\n\nIf an excessive pressure rise is required through the compressor, stall may occur with the attendant breakdown of stable, steady flow through the compressor. As stall occurs, the pressure rise drops and the compressor does not furnish discharge at a pressure equal to the combustion chamber pressure. As a result, a flow reversal or backfire takes place. If the stall is transient and intermittent, the indication will be the intermittent ' bang' as backfire and flow reversal take place. If the stall develops and becomes steady, strong vibration and a loud (and possibly expensive) roar develops from the continuous flow reversal. The increase in compressor power required tends to reduce RPM and the reduced airflow and increased fuel flow cause rapid, immediate rise in exhaust gas temperature. The possibility of damage is immediate with the steady stall and recovery must be accomplished quickly by reducing throttle setting, lowering the airplane angle of attack, and increasing airspeed. Generally, the compressor stall is caused by one or a combination of the following items:\n\n- (ti) A malfunctioning fuel control or governing apparatus is a common cause. Proper maintenance and adjustment is a necessity for stall-free operation. The malfunctioning is most usually apparent during engine acceleration.\n- (6) Poor inlet conditions are typical at high angles of attack and sideslip. These conditions reduce inlet airflow and create nonuniform flow conditions at the compressor face. Of course, these conditions are at the immediate control of the pilot.\n\n127\n\n## NAVWEPS 00-801-80 AIRMANE Pl?RFORMANCE\n\n(c) Very high altitude flight produces low compressor Reynolds numbers and an effect similar to that of airfoil sections. As a decrease to low Reynolds numbers reduces the section c&, very high altitudes reduce the maximum pressure ratio of the compressor. The reduced stall margins increase the likelihood of compressor stall.\n\nThus, the recovery from a compressor stall must entail reduction of throttle setting to reduce fuel flow, lowering angle of attack and sideslip and increasing airspeed to improve inlet condition, and reducing altitude if high altitude is a contributing factor.\n\n(3) While the j7ameout is a rare occurrence with modern engines, various malfunctions and operating conditions allow the flameout to remain a possibility. A uniform mixture of fuel and air will sustain combustion within a relatively wide range of fuel-air ratios. Combustion can be sustained with a fuel-air ratio as rich as one to five or as lean as one to twentyfive. Fuel air ratios outside these limits will not support combustion due to the deficiency of air or deficiency of fuel. The characteristics of the fuel nozzle and spray pattern as well as the governing apoaratus must insure that the nucleus of combt .,on is maintained throughout the range of engine operation.\n\nIf the rich limit of fuel-air ratio is exceeded in the combustion chamber, the flame will blow out. While this condition is a possibility the more usual cause of a flameout is exceeding the lean blowout limit. Any condition which produces some fuel-air ratio leaner than the lean limit of combustion will produce a flameout. Any interruption of the fuel supply could bring on this condition. Fuel system failure, fuel system icing, or prolonged unusual attitudes could starve the flows of fuel to the engine. It should be noted the majority of aviation fuels are capable of holding in solution a certain small amount of water. If the aircraft is refueled with relatively w&m fuel then flown to high altitude,", + "recall": 0.922077922077922, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-801-80 AIRMANE Pl?RFORMANCE \n\n(c) Very high altitude flight produces low compressor Reynolds numbers and an effect similar to that of airfoil sections. As a decrease to low Reynolds numbers reduces the section c&, very high altitudes reduce the maximum pressure ratio of the com- pressor. The reduced stall margins increase the likelihood of compressor stall. Thus, the recovery from a compressor stall \n\nattack for the rotating blade with a subsequent increase in pressure rise. Of course, if the change in angle of attack or pressure rise is beyond some critical value, stall will occur. While the stall phenomenon of a series of rotating compressor blades differs from that of a single airfoil section in a free airstream, the cause and effect are essentially the same. \n\nIf an excessive pressure rise is required through the compressor, stall may occur with the attendant breakdown of stable, steady flow through the compressor. As stall occurs, the pressure rise drops and the compressor does not furnish discharge at a pressure equal to the combustion chamber pressure. As a result, a flow reversal or backfire takes place. If the stall is transient and intermittent, the indica- tion will be the intermittent “bang” as back- fire and flow reversal take place. If the stall develops and becomes steady, strong vibration and a loud (and possibly expensive) roar develops from the continuous flow reversal. The increase in compressor power required tends to reduce RPM and the reduced airflow and increased fuel flow cause rapid, immediate rise in exhaust gas temperature. The pos- sibility of damage is immediate with the steady stall and recovery must be accomplished quickly by reducing throttle setting, lowering the airplane angle of attack, and increasing airspeed. Generally, the compressor stall is caused by one or a combination of the fol- lowing items: \n\nthe likelihood of compressor stall. Thus, the recovery from a compressor stall must entail reduction of throttle setting to reduce fuel flow, lowering angle of attack and sideslip and increasing airspeed to improve inlet condition, and reducing altitude if high altitude is a contributing factor. (3) While the j7ameout is a rare occurrence \n\naltitude is a contributing factor. (3) While the j7ameout is a rare occurrence with modern engines, various malfunctions and operating conditions allow the flameout to remain a possibility. A uniform mixture of fuel and air will sustain combustion within a relatively wide range of fuel-air ratios. Com- bustion can be sustained with a fuel-air ratio as rich as one to five or as lean as one to twenty- five. Fuel air ratios outside these limits will not support combustion due to the deficiency of air or deficiency of fuel. The characteristics of the fuel nozzle and spray pattern as well as the governing apoaratus must insure that the nucleus of combt .,on is maintained through- out the range of engine operation. If the rich limit of fuel-air ratio is exceeded \n\nout the range of engine operation. If the rich limit of fuel-air ratio is exceeded in the combustion chamber, the flame will blow out. While this condition is a pos- sibility the more usual cause of a flameout is exceeding the lean blowout limit. Any con- dition which produces some fuel-air ratio leaner than the lean limit of combustion will produce a flameout. Any interruption of the fuel supply could bring on this condition. Fuel system failure, fuel system icing, or pro- longed unusual attitudes could starve the flows of fuel to the engine. It should be noted the majority of aviation fuels are capable of holding in solution a certain small amount of water. If the aircraft is refueled with rela- tively w&m fuel then flown to high altitude, \n\n(ti) A malfunctioning fuel control or gov- erning apparatus is a common cause. Proper maintenance and adjustment is a necessity for stall-free operation. The malfunctioning is most usually apparent during engine acceleration. (6) Poor inlet conditions are typical at \n\nacceleration. (6) Poor inlet conditions are typical at high angles of attack and sideslip. These conditions reduce inlet airflow and create nonuniform flow conditions at the com- pressor face. Of course, these conditions are at the immediate control of the pilot. \n\n127" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.12394390365290237, + "doc_id": "c1cc01886671d37c445fdb28ae1d7aa0a731fc19d9b91c9d9f0446d3c1ef75f9", + "edit_distance": 0.8402777777777778, + "f1_score": 0.358974358974359, + "meteor": 0.6126339004410839, + "precision": 0.22105263157894736, + "pred_md": "## NAVIGATIONAL AND PROCEDURAL INFORMATION (Continued)\n\n## Airport Beacons\n\nHigh-intensity lights may operate part-time or by proximity activation.\n\n33\n\n## Marine Lights\n\nWith Characteristics of Light\n\n- * Marine Lights are white unless otherwise noted. Alternating lights are red and white unless otherwise noted.\n\n## Group Obstruction\n\nAbove 200' & below 1000' AGL\n\n(above 299' AGL in urban area)\n\n1000' and higher (AGL)\n\nAt least two in group\n\n1000' and higher (AGL)\n\nWind Turbines\n\n## Wind Turbine Farms\n\nWhen highest wind turbine is unverified, UC will be shown after MSL value.\n\nMaximum Elevation Figure (MEF)\n\n(see VFR Terms tab for explanation)\n\nFAA Chart Users' Guide - VFR Symbology - Sectional and Terminal Area Charts", + "recall": 0.9545454545454546, + "true_md": "## NAVIGATIONAL AND PROCEDURAL INFORMATION (Continued)\n\n33\n\nFAA Chart Users’ Guide - VFR Symbology - Sectional and Terminal Area Charts" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.3290385879986622, + "doc_id": "0b801b81b889e9b8132ee217ea8cbbf21b3620378b06adb1dbaa105579618e36", + "edit_distance": 0.8571428571428571, + "f1_score": 0.6666666666666666, + "meteor": 0.7431939718035975, + "precision": 0.5238095238095238, + "pred_md": "NAV' iiEPS Oo-801-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE\n\n## EFFECT OF ALTlTUOE ON MINIMUM POWER REO' D\n\nFigure 2.27. Endurance Performance\n\nFigure 2.27. Endurance Performance\n\n171", + "recall": 0.9166666666666666, + "true_md": "Figure 2.27. Endurance Performance \n\n171 \n\nNAV ’ iiEPS Oo-801-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.47241721088178906, + "doc_id": "552f3aa4c824db940200049099e2736be5af49d58f18c896c07611b4ccaf0bd5", + "edit_distance": 0.5, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.908956228956229, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Figure 3.7 1. Schlieren Photographs of Supersonic Flight (sheet 2 of 2)\n\nFigure 3.7 1. Schlieren Photographs of Supersonic Flight (sheet 2 of 2)", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Figure 3.7 1. Schlieren Photographs of Supersonic Flight (sheet 2 of 2)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8401679678179534, + "doc_id": "ce799a78b4222ed5fab870bcfe31a9f98f64a7c9ff6ad1d0027bc42dc0de9072", + "edit_distance": 0.7612551159618008, + "f1_score": 0.914782608695652, + "meteor": 0.6918180371170219, + "precision": 0.9598540145985401, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS 00-ROT-80 OPERATING STRENGTH LIMITitTIONS\n\ntwisting deformation will be great enough to nullify the effect on aileron deflection and the aileron effectiveness will-be zero. Since speeds above this point create rolling moments opposite to the direction controlled, this point is termed the ' aileron reversal speed.' Operation beyond the reversal speed would create an obvious control difficulty. Also, the extremely large twisting moments which produce loss of aileron effectiveness create large twisting moments capable of structural damage.\n\nIn order to prevent loss of aileron effectiveness at high airspeeds, the wing must have high torsional stiffness. This may be a feature difficult to accomplish in a wing of very thin section and may favor the use of inboard ailerons to reduce the twisted span length and effectively increase torsional stiffness. The use of spoilers for lateral control minimizes the twisting moments and alleviates the reversal problem.\n\nDivergcm is another phenomenon common to flight at high dynamic pressures. Like aileron reversal, it is an effect due to the interaction of aerodynamic forces and elastic deflections of the structure. However, it differs from aileron reversal in that it is a violent instability which produces immediate failure. Figure 5.5 illustrates the process of instability. If the surface is above the divergence speed, any disturbance precipitates this sequence. Any change in lift takes place at the aerodynamic center of the section. The change in lift ahead of the elastic axis produces a twisting moment and a consequent twisting deflection. The change in angle of attack creates greater lift at the ac., greater twisting deflection, more lift, etc., until failure occurs.\n\nAt low flight speeds where the dynamic pressure is low, the relationship between aerodynamic force buildup and torsional deflection is ' stable. However, the change in lift per angle of attack is proportional to ' vz but the structural torsional stiffness of the wing remains constant. This relationship implies that at some high speed, the aerodynamic force\n\n342\n\nbuildup may overpower the resisting torsional stiffness and ' divergence' will occur. The divergence speed of the surfaces must be sufficiently high that the airplane does not encounter this phenomenon within the normal operating envelope. Sweepback, short span, and high taper help raise the divergence speed.\n\nF/titter involves aerodynamic forces, inertia forces and the elastic properties of a surface. The distribution of mass and stiffness in a structure determine certain natural frequencies and modes of vibration. If the structure is subject to a forcing frequency near these natural frequencies, a resonant condition can result with an unstable oscillation. The aircraft is subject to many aerodynamic excitations while in operation and the aerodynamic forces at various speeds have characteristic properties for rate of change of force and moment. The aerodynamic forces may interact with the structure in a fashion which may excite or negatively damp the natural modes of the structure and allow flutter. Flutter must not occur within the normal flight operating envelope and the natural modes must be damped if possible or designed to occur beyond the limit speed. A' typical flutter mode is illus' trated in figure 5.5.\n\nSince the problem is one of high speed flight, it is generally desirable to have ' very high natural frequencies and flutter speeds well above the normal operating speeds. Any change of stiffness or mass distribution will alter the modes and frequencies and thus allow a change in the flutter speeds. If the aircraft is not properly maintained and excessive play and flexibility exist, flutter could occur at flight speeds below the limit airspeed.\n\nCompres&ility pmblems may define the limit airspeed for an airplane in terms of Mach number. The supersonic airplane may experience a great decay of stability at some high Mach number or encounter critical structural or engine inlet temperatures due to aerodynamic heating. The transonic airplane at an excessive", + "recall": 0.8737541528239202, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-ROT-80 OPERATING STRENGTH LIMITitTIONS \n\nbuildup may overpower the resisting torsional stiffness and “divergence” will occur. The divergence speed of the surfaces must be suf- ficiently high that the airplane does not en- counter this phenomenon within the normal operating envelope. Sweepback, short span, and high taper help raise the divergence speed. \n\ntwisting deformation will be great enough to nullify the effect on aileron deflection and the aileron effectiveness will-be zero. Since speeds above this point create rolling moments op- posite to the direction controlled, this point is termed the “aileron reversal speed.” Oper- ation beyond the reversal speed would create an obvious control difficulty. Also, the ex- tremely large twisting moments which produce loss of aileron effectiveness create large twist- ing moments capable of structural damage. In order to prevent loss of aileron effective- \n\nF/titter involves aerodynamic forces, inertia forces and the elastic properties of a surface. The distribution of mass and stiffness in a structure determine certain natural frequencies and modes of vibration. If the structure is sub- ject to a forcing frequency near these natural frequencies, a resonant condition can result with an unstable oscillation. The aircraft is subject to many aerodynamic excitations while in operation and the aerodynamic forces at various speeds have characteristic properties for rate of change of force and moment. The aerodynamic forces may interact with the structure in a fashion which may excite or negatively damp the natural modes of the structure and allow flutter. Flutter must not occur within the normal flight operating en- velope and the natural modes must be damped if possible or designed to occur beyond the limit speed. A ’ typical flutter mode is illus- ‘ trated in figure 5.5. \n\ning moments capable of structural damage. In order to prevent loss of aileron effective- ness at high airspeeds, the wing must have high torsional stiffness. This may be a feature difficult to accomplish in a wing of very thin section and may favor the use of inboard ailer- ons to reduce the twisted span length and effectively increase torsional stiffness. The use of spoilers for lateral control minimizes the twisting moments and alleviates the reversal problem. Divergcm is another phenomenon common \n\nproblem. Divergcm is another phenomenon common to flight at high dynamic pressures. Like aileron reversal, it is an effect due to the inter- action of aerodynamic forces and elastic deflec- tions of the structure. However, it differs from aileron reversal in that it is a violent instability which produces immediate failure. Figure 5.5 illustrates the process of instability. If the surface is above the divergence speed, any disturbance precipitates this sequence. Any change in lift takes place at the aerody- namic center of the section. The change in lift ahead of the elastic axis produces a twist- ing moment and a consequent twisting deflec- tion. The change in angle of attack creates greater lift at the ac., greater twisting deflec- tion, more lift, etc., until failure occurs. \n\nSince the problem is one of high speed flight, it is generally desirable to have ‘ very high natural frequencies and flutter speeds well above the normal operating speeds. Any change of stiffness or mass distribution will alter the modes and frequencies and thus allow a change in the flutter speeds. If the aircraft is not properly maintained and excessive play and flexibility exist, flutter could occur at flight speeds below the limit airspeed. \n\nCompres&ility pmblems may define the limit airspeed for an airplane in terms of Mach num- ber. The supersonic airplane may experience a great decay of stability at some high Mach number or encounter critical structural or engine inlet temperatures due to aerodynamic heating. The transonic airplane at an excessive \n\nAt low flight speeds where the dynamic pressure is low, the relationship between aero- dynamic force buildup and torsional deflection is ‘ stable. However, the change in lift per angle of attack is proportional to ‘ vz but the structural torsional stiffness of the wing re- mains constant. This relationship implies that at some high speed, the aerodynamic force \n\n342" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "8548e25e94edfe845137687795a17ba17c198a2cb27b36cb232b07c899dc0840", + "edit_distance": 0.7612551159618008, + "f1_score": 0.914782608695652, + "meteor": 0.6918180371170219, + "precision": 0.9598540145985401, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.8737541528239202, + "true_md": "" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "a8526f5b47169452002d6eb78af09f070d87dcd586ad53dee66c3ffa079e6775", + "edit_distance": 0.7612551159618008, + "f1_score": 0.914782608695652, + "meteor": 0.6918180371170219, + "precision": 0.9598540145985401, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.8737541528239202, + "true_md": "SNOIlVlIWll HlOM3US ONllVU3dO 08-108-00 Sd3MAVN" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8463545931441584, + "doc_id": "d0872a670f335163dbb57c4368d3a7185a7658d5dd334376a533c3359118071a", + "edit_distance": 0.6050870147255689, + "f1_score": 0.9060150375939849, + "meteor": 0.7386265901558786, + "precision": 0.9525691699604744, + "pred_md": "capable of producing sufhcient yawing moment for the critical conditions of flight.\n\nThe effect of rudder deflection is to produce a yawing moment coefficient according to control deflection and produce equilibrium at some angle of sideslip. For small deflections of the rudder, there is no change in stability but a change in equilibrium. Figure 4.25 shows the effect of rudder deflection on yawing moment coefficient curves with the change in equilibrium sideslip angle.\n\nIf the airplane exhibits static directional stability with rudder lixed, each angle of sideslip requires a particular deflection of the rudder to achieve equilibrium. Rudder-free directional stability will exist when the float angle of the rudder is less than the rudder deflection required for equilibrium. However at high angles of sideslip, the floating tendency of the rudder increases. This is illustrated by the second chart of figure 4.25 where the line of rudder float angle shows a sharp increase at large values of sideslip. If the floating angle of the rudder catches up with the required rudder angle, the, rudder pedal force will decrease to zero and rudder lock will occur. Sideslip angles beyond this point produce a floating angle greater than the required rudder deflection and the rudder tends to float to the limit of deflection.\n\nRudder lock is accompanied by a reversal of pedal force and rudder-free instability will exist. The dorsal fin is a useful addition in this case since it will improve the directional stability at high angles of sideslip. The resulting increase in stability requires larger deflections of the rudder to achieve equilibrium at high sideslip and the tendency for rudder lock is reduced.\n\nRudder-free directional stability is appreciated by the pilot as the rudder pedal force to maintain a given sideslip. If the rudder pedal force gradient is too low near zero sideslip, it will be difficult to maintain zero sideslip during various maneuvers. The airplane should\n\n291\n\nNAVWEPS 00-SOT-80 STABIUTY AND CONTROL\n\nhave a stable rudder pedal feel through the available range of sideslip.\n\nDIRECTIONAL CONTROL REQUIREMENTS. The control power of the rudder must be adequate to contend with the many unsymmetrical conditions of flight. Generally, there are five conditions of flight which provide the most criticalrequirements of di' rectional control power. The type and mission of the airplane will decide which of these conditions is most important.\n\nADVERSE YAW. When an airplane is rolled into a turn yawing moments are produced which require rudder deflection to maintain zero sideslip, i.e., coordinate the turn. The usual source of adverse yawing moment is illustrated in figure 4.26. When the airplane shown is subject to a roll to the left, the downgoing port wing will experience a new relative wind and an increase in angle of attack. The inclination of the lift vector produces a component force forward on the downgoing wing. The upgoing starboard wing has its lift inclined with a component force aft. The resulting yawing moment due to rolling motion is in a direction opposite to the roll and is hence ' adverse yaw.' The yaw due to roll is primarily a function of the wing lift coefficient and is greatest at high C,.\n\nIn addition to the yaw due to rolling motion there will be a yawing moment contribution due to control surface deflection. Conventional ailerons usually contribute an adverse yaw while spoilers may contribute a favorable or ' proverse' yaw. The high wing airplane with a large vertical tail may encounter an influence from inboard ailerons. Such a configuration may induce flow directions at the vertical tail to cause proverse yaw.\n\nSince adverse yaw will be greatest at high C, and full deflection of the ailerons, coordinating steep turns at low speed may produce a critical requirement for rudder control power.\n\nSPIN RECOVERY. In the majority of airplanes, the rudder is the principal control for spin recovery. Powerful control of sideslip at", + "recall": 0.8637992831541219, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-SOT-80 STABIUTY AND CONTROL \n\nhave a stable rudder pedal feel through the available range of sideslip. DIRECTIONAL CONTROL REQUIRE- \n\navailable range of sideslip. DIRECTIONAL CONTROL REQUIRE- MENTS. The control power of the rudder must be adequate to contend with the many unsymmetrical conditions of flight. Gener- ally, there are five conditions of flight which provide the most criticalrequirements of di- ‘ rectional control power. The type and mission of the airplane will decide which of these conditions is most important. \n\ncapable of producing sufhcient yawing moment for the critical conditions of flight. The effect of rudder deflection is to produce \n\nfor the critical conditions of flight. The effect of rudder deflection is to produce a yawing moment coefficient according to control deflection and produce equilibrium at some angle of sideslip. For small deflections of the rudder, there is no change in stability but a change in equilibrium. Figure 4.25 shows the effect of rudder deflection on yawing moment coefficient curves with the change in equilibrium sideslip angle. If the airplane exhibits static directional \n\nequilibrium sideslip angle. If the airplane exhibits static directional stability with rudder lixed, each angle of side- slip requires a particular deflection of the rudder to achieve equilibrium. Rudder-free directional stability will exist when the float angle of the rudder is less than the rudder deflection required for equilibrium. However at high angles of sideslip, the floating tend- ency of the rudder increases. This is illus- trated by the second chart of figure 4.25 where the line of rudder float angle shows a sharp increase at large values of sideslip. If the floating angle of the rudder catches up with the required rudder angle, the, rudder pedal force will decrease to zero and rudder lock will occur. Sideslip angles beyond this point pro- duce a floating angle greater than the required rudder deflection and the rudder tends to float to the limit of deflection. \n\nADVERSE YAW. When an airplane is rolled into a turn yawing moments are pro- duced which require rudder deflection to main- tain zero sideslip, i.e., coordinate the turn. The usual source of adverse yawing moment is illustrated in figure 4.26. When the airplane shown is subject to a roll to the left, the down- going port wing will experience a new relative wind and an increase in angle of attack. The inclination of the lift vector produces a com- ponent force forward on the downgoing wing. The upgoing starboard wing has its lift in- clined with a component force aft. The re- sulting yawing moment due to rolling motion is in a direction opposite to the roll and is hence “adverse yaw.” The yaw due to roll is primarily a function of the wing lift coefficient and is greatest at high C,. \n\nIn addition to the yaw due to rolling motion there will be a yawing moment contribution due to control surface deflection. Conventional ailerons usually contribute an adverse yaw while spoilers may contribute a favorable or “proverse” yaw. The high wing airplane with a large vertical tail may encounter an influence from inboard ailerons. Such a con- figuration may induce flow directions at the vertical tail to cause proverse yaw. \n\nRudder lock is accompanied by a reversal of pedal force and rudder-free instability will exist. The dorsal fin is a useful addition in this case since it will improve the directional stability at high angles of sideslip. The re- sulting increase in stability requires larger deflections of the rudder to achieve equilibrium at high sideslip and the tendency for rudder lock is reduced. \n\nSince adverse yaw will be greatest at high C, and full deflection of the ailerons, coordi- nating steep turns at low speed may produce a critical requirement for rudder control power. \n\nRudder-free directional stability is appre- ciated by the pilot as the rudder pedal force to maintain a given sideslip. If the rudder pedal force gradient is too low near zero sideslip, it will be difficult to maintain zero sideslip dur- ing various maneuvers. The airplane should \n\nSPIN RECOVERY. In the majority of air- planes, the rudder is the principal control for spin recovery. Powerful control of sideslip at \n\n291" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8224148955699454, + "doc_id": "d645150795550518efbc9e8fe8fcab59cde78b9971b60f4dd4b3432ce62e6971", + "edit_distance": 0.7249022164276402, + "f1_score": 0.916058394160584, + "meteor": 0.7128999344618169, + "precision": 0.9616858237547893, + "pred_md": "When the inlet ram and compressor pressure ratio is fixed, the principal factor affecting the specific fuel consumption is the inlet air temperature. When the inlet air temperature is lowered, a given heat addition can provide relatively greater changes in pressure or volume. As a result, a given thrust output requires less fuel flow and the specific fuel consumption, c,, is reduced. While the effect of altitude on specific fuel consumption does not compare with the effect on thrust output, the variation is large enough to strongly influence range and endurance conditions. Figure 2.11 illustrates a typical variation of specific fuel consumption with altitude. Generally, the specific fuel consumption decreases steadily with altitude until the tropopause is reached and the specific fuel consumption at this point is approximately 80 percent of the sea level value.\n\nAbove the tropopause the temperature is constant and altitudes slightly above the tropopause cause no further decrease in specific fuel consumption. Actually, altitudes much above the tropopause bring about a general deterioration of overall engine efficiency and the~spkific fuel consumption begins an increase with altitude. The extreme altitudes above the tropopause produce low combustion chamber pressures, low compressor Reynolds Numbers, low fuel flow, etc. which are notconduci,ve to high engine efficiency.\n\nBecause of the variation of c, with altitude, the majority of turbojet engines achieve maximum efficiency at or above 35,000 ft. For this reason, the turbojet airplane will find optimum range and endurance conditions at. or above 35,000 ft. provided the aircraft is not thrust or compressibility limited at these altitudes.\n\nThe governing apparatus of the turbojet engine consists primarily of the, items which control the flow of fuel to the engine. In addition, there may be included certain functions which operate variable nozzles, variable stator vanes, variable inlets, etc. Generally, the fuel control and associated items should regulate fuel\n\n121\n\nNAVWEPS 00-8OT-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE\n\nflow, nozzle area, etc. to provide engine performance scheduled by the throttle or power lever. These regulatory functions provided must account for variations in altitude, temperature, and flight velocity.\n\nOne principal governing factor which must be available is that a selected power setting (RPM) must be maintained throughout a wide range of flight conditions. Figure 2.12 illustrates the sariation of fuel flow with RPM for a turbojet operating at a particular set of flight conditions. Curve 1 depicts the variation with RPM of the fuel flow required for stabilized, ste,ady state operation of the engine. Each point along this curve 1 defines the fuel flow which is necessary to achieve equilibrium at a given RPM. The steady state fuel flow produces a turbine, power to equal the compressor power requirement at a particular RPM. The throttle position primarily commands .a given, engine speed and, as changes occur in the ambient pressure, temperature, and flight speed, the .steady state fuel flow will . vary. The governing' apparatus must account for these variations in flight conditions and maintain the power setting scheduled by throtrle position.\n\nIn addition to the maintenance of steady state operation, the fuel control and associated engine control itemsmust provide for the transient conditions of engine acceleration and deceleration. In order to accelerate the engine, the fuel control must supply a fuel flow greater than that required for steady state operation to ,produce a' turbine power greater than the compressor power requirement. However, the additional fuel flow to accelerate the engine must be controlled and regulated to prevent any one or combination of the following items:\n\n- (1) compressor stall or surge\n- (2) excessive turbine inlet temperature\n- (3) excessively rich fuel-air ratio which may not sustain combustion\n\nGenerally, the stall-surge and turbine temperature limits predominate to form an acceleration fuel flow boundary typified by curve", + "recall": 0.8745644599303136, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-8OT-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE \n\nflow, nozzle area, etc. to provide engine per- formance scheduled by the throttle or power lever. These regulatory functions provided must account for variations in altitude, tem- perature, and flight velocity. One principal governing factor which must \n\nWhen the inlet ram and compressor pressure ratio is fixed, the principal factor affecting the specific fuel consumption is the inlet air temp- erature. When the inlet air temperature is lowered, a given heat addition can provide relatively greater changes in pressure or vol- ume. As a result, a given thrust output requires less fuel flow and the specific fuel con- sumption, c,, is reduced. While the effect of altitude on specific fuel consumption does not compare with the effect on thrust output, the variation is large enough to strongly influence range and endurance conditions. Figure 2.11 illustrates a typical variation of specific fuel consumption with altitude. Generally, the specific fuel consumption decreases steadily with altitude until the tropopause is reached and the specific fuel consumption at this point is approximately 80 percent of the sea level value. Above the tropopause the temperature is con- \n\nperature, and flight velocity. One principal governing factor which must be available is that a selected power setting (RPM) must be maintained throughout a wide range of flight conditions. Figure 2.12 illus- trates the sariation of fuel flow with RPM for a turbojet operating at a particular set of flight conditions. Curve 1 depicts the varia- tion with RPM of the fuel flow required for stabilized, ste,ady state operation of the engine. Each point along this curve 1 defines the fuel flow which is necessary to achieve equilib- rium at a given RPM. The steady state fuel flow produces a turbine, power to equal the compressor power requirement at a particular RPM. The throttle position primarily com- mands .a given, engine speed and, as changes occur in the ambient pressure, temperature, and flight speed, the .steady state fuel flow will . vary. The governing’ apparatus must account for these variations in flight conditions and maintain the power setting scheduled by throtrle position. \n\nvalue. Above the tropopause the temperature is con- stant and altitudes slightly above the tropo- pause cause no further decrease in specific fuel consumption. Actually, altitudes much above the tropopause bring about a general deteriora- tion of overall engine efficiency and the~spkific fuel consumption begins an increase with altitude. The extreme altitudes above the tropopause produce low combustion chamber pressures, low compressor Reynolds Numbers, low fuel flow, etc. which are notconduci,ve to high engine efficiency. \n\nIn addition to the maintenance of steady state operation, the fuel control and associ- ated engine control itemsmust provide for the transient conditions of engine acceleration and deceleration. In order to accelerate the en- gine, the fuel control must supply a fuel flow greater than that required for steady state operation to ,produce a’ turbine power greater than the compressor power requirement. How- ever, the additional fuel flow to accelerate the engine must be controlled and regulated to prevent any one or combination of the follow- ing items: \n\nBecause of the variation of c, with altitude, the majority of turbojet engines achieve maxi- mum efficiency at or above 35,000 ft. For this reason, the turbojet airplane will find optimum range and endurance conditions at. or above 35,000 ft. provided the aircraft is not thrust or compressibility limited at these altitudes. \n\nThe governing apparatus of the turbojet engine consists primarily of the, items which control the flow of fuel to the engine. In addition, there may be included certain functions which operate variable nozzles, variable stator vanes, variable inlets, etc. Generally, the fuel con- trol and associated items should regulate fuel \n\nGenerally, the stall-surge and turbine tem- perature limits predominate to form an ac- celeration fuel flow boundary typified by curve \n\n- (1) compressor stall or surge (2) excessive turbine inlet temperature \n\n- (1) compressor stall or surge (2) excessive turbine inlet temperature (3) excessively rich fuel-air ratio which \n\n- (2) excessive turbine inlet temperature (3) excessively rich fuel-air ratio which may not sustain combustion \n\n121" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8622593203819878, + "doc_id": "c795805ea8235b9714a810318564f80254724f8ea9cfeb2e0ffc49570a6871e2", + "edit_distance": 0.7511244377811095, + "f1_score": 0.903954802259887, + "meteor": 0.7539324842599748, + "precision": 0.933852140077821, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS 00-8OT-80 AIRPLANE PERFORffANCE\n\nThe cffcct of nrnzuay slope on takeoff distance is due to the component of weight along the inclined path of the airplane. A runway slope of 1 percent would provide a force component along the path of the airplane which is 1 percent of the gross weight. Of course, an upslope would contribute a retarding force component while a downslope would contribute an accelerating force component. For the case of the upslope, the retarding force component adds to drag and rolling friction to reduce the net accelerating force. Ordinarily, a 1 percent runway slope can cause a 2' tO 4 percent change in takeoff distance depending on rhe airplane characrerisrics. The airplane with the high thrust-to-weight ratio is least affected while the airplane with the low thrustto-weight ratio is most affected because the slope force component causes a relatively greater change in the net accelerating force.\n\nThe effect of runway slope must be considered when predicting the takeoff distance but the effect is usually minor for the ordinary runway slopes and airplanes with moderate thrust-to-weight ratios. In fact, runway slope considerations are of great significance only when the runway slope is large and the airplane has an intrinsic low acceleration, i.e., low thrust-to-weight ratio. In the ordinary case, the selection of the takeoff runway will favor the direction with an upslope and headwind rather than the direction with a downslope and tailwind.\n\nThe effect of proper takeoff t&city is important when runway lengths and takeoff distances are critical. The takeoff speeds specified in the flight handbook are generally the minimum safe speeds at which the airplane can become airborne. Any attempt to take 05 below the recommended speed may mean that the aircraft may stall, be difficult to control, or have very low initial rate of climb. In some cases, an excessive angle of attack may not allow the airplane to climb out of ground effect. On the other hand, an excessive airspeed at takeoff may improve the initial rare of climb and\n\n' feel' of the airplane but will produce an undesirable increase in takeoff distance. Assuming that the acceleration is essentially unaffected, the takeoff distance varies as the square of the takeoff velocity,\n\n\n\nThus, 10 percent excess airspeed would increase the takeoff distance 21 percent. In most critical takeoff conditions, such an increase in takeoff distance would be prohibitive and the pilot must adhere to the recommended takeoff speeds.\n\nThe effect of prcs~wc titude al and ambient rcmpcraturc is to define primarily the density altitude and its effect on takeoff performance. While subsequent corrections are appropriate for the effect of temperature on certain items of powerplant performance, density altitude defines certain effects on takeoff performance. An increase in density altitude can produce a two-fold effect on takeoff performance: (I) increased takeoff velocity and (2) decreased thrust and reduced net accelerating force. If a given weight and configuration of airplane is taken to altitude above standard sea level, the airplane will still require the same dynamic pressure to become airborne at the takeoff lift coefficient. Thus, the airplane at altitude will take 05 at the same equivalent airspeed (EAS) as at sea level, but because of the reduced density, the true airspeed (TAS) will be greater. From basic aerodynamics, the relationship between true airspeed and equivalent airspeed is as follows:\n\n\n\nwhere\n\nTAS= true airspeed EAS= equivalent airspeed n=altitude density ratio 0 = Plpo\n\n190", + "recall": 0.8759124087591241, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-8OT-80 AIRPLANE PERFORffANCE \n\n“feel” of the airplane but will produce an un- desirable increase in takeoff distance. Assum- ing that the acceleration is essentially un- affected, the takeoff distance varies as the square of the takeoff velocity, \n\nThe cffcct of nrnzuay slope on takeoff distance is due to the component of weight along the inclined path of the airplane. A runway slope of 1 percent would provide a force com- ponent along the path of the airplane which is 1 percent of the gross weight. Of course, an upslope would contribute a retarding force component while a downslope would contri- bute an accelerating force component. For the case of the upslope, the retarding force component adds to drag and rolling friction to reduce the net accelerating force. Ordinarily, a 1 percent runway slope can cause a 2 ’ tO 4 percent change in takeoff distance depending on rhe airplane characrerisrics. The airplane with the high thrust-to-weight ratio is least affected while the airplane with the low thrust- to-weight ratio is most affected because the slope force component causes a relatively greater change in the net accelerating force. \n\nThus, 10 percent excess airspeed would increase the takeoff distance 21 percent. In most criti- cal takeoff conditions, such an increase in takeoff distance would be prohibitive and the pilot must adhere to the recommended takeoff speeds. The effect of prcs~wc altitude and ambient \n\nspeeds. The effect of prcs~wc altitude and ambient rcmpcraturc is to define primarily the density altitude and its effect on takeoff performance. While subsequent corrections are appropriate for the effect of temperature on certain items of powerplant performance, density altitude defines certain effects on takeoff performance. An increase in density altitude can produce a two-fold effect on takeoff performance: (I) in- creased takeoff velocity and (2) decreased thrust and reduced net accelerating force. If a given weight and configuration of airplane is taken to altitude above standard sea level, the airplane will still require the same dynamic pressure to become airborne at the takeoff lift coefficient. Thus, the airplane at altitude will take 05 at the same equivalent airspeed (EAS) as at sea level, but because of the reduced density, the true airspeed (TAS) will be greater. From basic aerodynamics, the rela- tionship between true airspeed and equivalent airspeed is as follows: \n\nThe effect of runway slope must be consid- ered when predicting the takeoff distance but the effect is usually minor for the ordinary run- way slopes and airplanes with moderate thrust-to-weight ratios. In fact, runway slope considerations are of great significance only when the runway slope is large and the airplane has an intrinsic low acceleration, i.e., low thrust-to-weight ratio. In the ordinary case, the selection of the takeoff runway will favor the direction with an upslope and headwind rather than the direction with a downslope and tailwind. \n\nThe effect of proper takeoff t&city is important when runway lengths and takeoff distances are critical. The takeoff speeds specified in the flight handbook are generally the minimum safe speeds at which the airplane can become airborne. Any attempt to take 05 below the recommended speed may mean that the air- craft may stall, be difficult to control, or have very low initial rate of climb. In some cases, an excessive angle of attack may not allow the airplane to climb out of ground effect. On the other hand, an excessive airspeed at takeoff may improve the initial rare of climb and \n\nwhere \n\nTAS= true airspeed \n\nEAS= equivalent airspeed \n\nn=altitude density ratio \n\n0 = Plpo \n\n$$TAS 1 EAS=F $$\n\n190 \n\n$$s* vz.2 -= - 0 J-1 v, $$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8915798153516132, + "doc_id": "26afb4bf40afaa924c33c5c9fb7fc4286965cfff2a9eeec3e41846659ed8a1f4", + "edit_distance": 0.4759556103575832, + "f1_score": 0.9192307692307693, + "meteor": 0.8043498012956543, + "precision": 0.9676113360323887, + "pred_md": "A large formation of ice on the leading edge of the wing can produce large changes in the local contours and severe local pressure gradients. The extreme surface roughness common to some forms of ice will cause high surface friction and a considerable reduction of boundary layer energy. As a result of these effects, the ice formation can produce considerable increase in drag and a large reduction in maximum lift coefficient. Thus, the ice formation will cause an increase in power required and stall speed. In addition, the added weight of the ice formation on the airplane will provide an undesirable effect. Because of the detrimental effects of ice formation, recommended anti-icing procedures must be followed to preserve the airplane performance.\n\nThe effect of frost is perhaps more subtle than the effect of ice formation on the aerodynamic characteristics of the wing. The accumulation of a hard coat of frost on the wing upper surface will provide a surface texture of considerable roughness. While the basic shape and aerodynamic contour is unchanged, the increase in surface roughness increases skinfriction and reduces the kinetic energy of the boundary layer. As a result, there will be an increase in drag but, of course, the magnitude of drag increase will not compare with the considerable increase due to a severe ice formation. The reduction of boundary layer kinetic energy will cause incipient stalling of the wing, i.e., separation will occur at angles of attack and lift coefficients lower than for the clean, smooth wing. While the reduction in C,,,, due to frost formation ordinarily is not as great as that due to ice formation, it is usually unexpected because it may be thought that large changes in the aerodynamic shape (such as due to ice) are necessary to reduce CL,az. However, the kinetic energy of the boundary layer is an important factor influencing separation of the airflow and this energy is reduced by an increase in surface roughness.\n\nThe general effects of ice and frost formation\n\n375\n\n## NAVWEPS OD-BOT-80 APP,LlCATlON OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYING\n\non the lift characteristics is typified by the illustration of figure 6.7.\n\nThe effect of ice or frost on takeoff and landing performance is of great importance. The effects are so detrimental to the landing and takeoff that no effort should be spared to keep the airplane as free as possible from any accumulation of ice or frost. If any ice remains on the airplane as the landing phase approaches it must be appreciated that the ice formation will have reduced CL,., and incurred an increase in stall speed. Thus, the landing speed will be greater. When this effect is coupled with the possibility of poor braking action during the landing roll, a critical situation can exist. It is obvious that .great effort must be made to prevent the accumulation of ice during flight.\n\nIn no circumstances should a formation of ice or frost be allowed to remain on the airplane wing surfaces prior to takeoff. The undesirable effects of ice are obvious but, as previously mentioned, the effects of frost are more subtle. If a heavy coat of hard frost exists on the wing upper surface, a typical reduction in CL,.. would cause a 5 to 10 percent increase in the airplane stall speed. Because of this magnitude of effect, the effect of frost on takeoff performance may not be realized until too late. The takeoff speed of an airplane is generally some speed 5 to 25 percent greater than the stall speed, hence the takeoff lift coefficient will be value from 90 to 65 percent of C1,,.., Thus, it is possible that the airplane with frost cannot become airborne at the specified takeoff speed because of premature stalling. Even if the airplane with frost were to become airborne at the specified takeoff speed, the airplane could have insufficient margin of airspeed above stall and turbulence, gusts, turning flight could produce incipient or con plete stalling of the airplane.\n\nThe increase in drag during takeoff roll due to frost or ice is not considerable and there will not be any significant effect on the initial acceleration during takeoff. Thus, the effect of frost or ice will be most apparent during the", + "recall": 0.8754578754578755, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OD-BOT-80 APP,LlCATlON OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYING \n\nA large formation of ice on the leading edge of the wing can produce large changes in the local contours and severe local pressure gra- dients. The extreme surface roughness common to some forms of ice will cause high surface friction and a considerable reduction of bound- ary layer energy. As a result of these effects, the ice formation can produce considerable in- crease in drag and a large reduction in maxi- mum lift coefficient. Thus, the ice formation will cause an increase in power required and stall speed. In addition, the added weight of the ice formation on the airplane will provide an undesirable effect. Because of the detri- mental effects of ice formation, recommended anti-icing procedures must be followed to preserve the airplane performance. The effect of frost is perhaps more subtle \n\non the lift characteristics is typified by the il- lustration of figure 6.7. \n\nThe effect of ice or frost on takeoff and land- ing performance is of great importance. The effects are so detrimental to the landing and takeoff that no effort should be spared to keep the airplane as free as possible from any ac- cumulation of ice or frost. If any ice remains on the airplane as the landing phase approaches it must be appreciated that the ice formation will have reduced CL,., and incurred an increase in stall speed. Thus, the landing speed will be greater. When this effect is coupled with the possibility of poor braking action during the landing roll, a critical situation can exist. It is obvious that .great effort must be made to prevent the accumulation of ice during flight. \n\npreserve the airplane performance. The effect of frost is perhaps more subtle than the effect of ice formation on the aero- dynamic characteristics of the wing. The ac- cumulation of a hard coat of frost on the wing upper surface will provide a surface texture of considerable roughness. While the basic shape and aerodynamic contour is unchanged, the increase in surface roughness increases skin- friction and reduces the kinetic energy of the boundary layer. As a result, there will be an increase in drag but, of course, the magnitude of drag increase will not compare with the considerable increase due to a severe ice forma- tion. The reduction of boundary layer kinetic energy will cause incipient stalling of the wing, i.e., separation will occur at angles of attack and lift coefficients lower than for the clean, smooth wing. While the reduction in C,,,, due to frost formation ordinarily is not as great as that due to ice formation, it is usually un- expected because it may be thought that large changes in the aerodynamic shape (such as due to ice) are necessary to reduce CL,az. How- ever, the kinetic energy of the boundary layer is an important factor influencing separation of the airflow and this energy is reduced by an increase in surface roughness. \n\nIn no circumstances should a formation of ice or frost be allowed to remain on the airplane wing surfaces prior to takeoff. The undesir- able effects of ice are obvious but, as previously mentioned, the effects of frost are more subtle. If a heavy coat of hard frost exists on the wing upper surface, a typical reduction in CL,.. would cause a 5 to 10 percent increase in the airplane stall speed. Because of this magnitude of effect, the effect of frost on takeoff per- formance may not be realized until too late. The takeoff speed of an airplane is generally some speed 5 to 25 percent greater than the stall speed, hence the takeoff lift coefficient will be value from 90 to 65 percent of C1,,.., Thus, it is possible that the airplane with frost cannot become airborne at the specified take- off speed because of premature stalling. Even if the airplane with frost were to become air- borne at the specified takeoff speed, the air- plane could have insufficient margin of air- speed above stall and turbulence, gusts, turning flight could produce incipient or con plete stalling of the airplane. \n\nThe increase in drag during takeoff roll due to frost or ice is not considerable and there will not be any significant effect on the initial acceleration during takeoff. Thus, the effect of frost or ice will be most apparent during the \n\nThe general effects of ice and frost formation \n\n375" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.1985517937811004, + "doc_id": "f9a4b169238ab0f0ae190c3dacc55c5e41f84af2f01dc4f9421e98c3c5a63a62", + "edit_distance": 0.7183098591549296, + "f1_score": 0.5217391304347826, + "meteor": 0.758846153846154, + "precision": 0.36, + "pred_md": "## RELIEF (Continued)\n\n## Quarries To Scale\n\nCraters\n\nUnsurveyed Areas\n\nLabel appropriately as required\n\nLevees And Eskers\n\n41\n\n## Rock Strata Outcrop\n\n## Strip Mines, Mine Dumps And Tailings\n\nTo Scale\n\nEscarpments, Bluffs, Cliffs, Depressions, Etc.\n\nUncontoured Areas\n\nLabel appropriately as required\n\nRELIEF DATA INCOMPLETE\n\nFAA Chart Users' Guide - VFR Symbology - Sectional and Terminal Area Charts", + "recall": 0.9473684210526315, + "true_md": "## RELIEF (Continued)\n\n41\n\nFAA Chart Users’ Guide - VFR Symbology - Sectional and Terminal Area Charts" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6855303107442261, + "doc_id": "0f5a25d60c56653ec4e1eaa83eeac6ddf7d14bed7b383dd6aac2e7b263508a92", + "edit_distance": 0.2962962962962963, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9444864154005428, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS DO-80T-80 APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYING\n\nFigure 6.7. Effect of ice and Frost\n\nFigure 6.7. Effect of ice and Frost\n\n374", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS DO-80T-80 APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYING \n\nFigure 6.7. Effect of ice and Frost \n\n374" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8891609851778963, + "doc_id": "54bf7430729a9c8929e54fd17aac937197a9f748edab3378b9ebaa0f849aac3f", + "edit_distance": 0.6027820710973725, + "f1_score": 0.906801007556675, + "meteor": 0.6868689132862549, + "precision": 0.9424083769633508, + "pred_md": "Thus, induced power required will vary with lift, aspect ratio, altitude, etc., in the same manner as the induced drag. The only difference will be the variation with speed. If all other factors remain constant, the induced power required varies inversely with velocity while induced' drag varies inversely with the square of the velocity.\n\nwhere Pri,=induced power required corresponding to some original speed, Vi I+;,= induced power required corresponding to\n\nsome different speed, V,\n\nFor example, if an airplane in steady level flight is operated at.twice as great a speed, the induced drag is one-fourth the original value but the induced power required is one-half the original value.\n\nThe parasite power required is a function of the parasite drag and velocity.\n\nwhere\n\nPr,=parasite power required, h.p. D,=paraSite drag, lbs. V= true airspeed, knots\n\nThus, parasite power required will vary with altitude and equivalent parasite area ( f) in the same manner as ' the parasite drag. However, the variation with speed will be different. If all other factors are constant, the parasite drag varies as the square of velocity but parasite power varies as the cube of velocity.\n\n\n\nwhere\n\nPrpl= parasite power required corresponding to some original speed, Vi\n\n97\n\n## NAVWEPS 00-8OT-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMAN:CE\n\nPrPs=parasite power required corresponding to some different speed, I' ,\n\nFor example, if an airplane in steady flight is operated at twice as great a speed, the parasite drag is four times as great but the parasite ~;;zr required is eight times the original\n\nFigure 2.1 presents the thrust required and power required for a specific airplane configuration and altitude. The curves of figure 2.1 are applicable for the following airplane data:\n\ngross weight,\n\nW= 15,000 Ibs.\n\nspan, b=40 ft.\n\nequivalent\n\nparasite area, f=7.2\n\nsq. ft.\n\nairplane efficiency factor, c= ,827\n\nsea level altitude,\n\nC= 1.000\n\ncompressibility corrections neglected\n\nThe curve of drag or thrust required versus velocity shows the variation of induced, parasite, and total drag. Induced drag predominates at low speeds. When the airplane is operated at maximum lift-drag ratio, (L/D)-, the total drag is at a minimum and the induced and parasite drags are equal. For the specific airplane of figure 2.1, (,L/D),, and minimum total drag are obtained at a speed of 160 knots.\n\nThe curve of power required versus velocity shows the variation of induced, parasite, and total power required. As before, induced power required predominates at low speeds and parasite power required predominates at high speeds and the induced and parasite power are equal at (L/D),,. However, the condition of (L/D&defines only the point of minimum drag and does not define the point of minimum pozver equired. r Ordinarily, the point of minimum power required will occur at a speed which is 76 percent of the speed for minimum drag and, in the case of the airplane configuration of figure 2.1, the speed for minimum power required would be 122 knots. The total drag at the speed for minimum power required is 15 percent higher than the drag at (L/D)but the minimum power required is 12 percent lower than the power required at (L/D)-.", + "recall": 0.8737864077669902, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-8OT-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMAN:CE \n\nPrPs=parasite power required corresponding to some different speed, I ’ , \n\nThus, induced power required will vary with lift, aspect ratio, altitude, etc., in the same manner as the induced drag. The only differ- ence will be the variation with speed. If all other factors remain constant, the induced power required varies inversely with velocity while induced’drag varies inversely with the square of the velocity. \n\nFor example, if an airplane in steady flight is operated at twice as great a speed, the parasite drag is four times as great but the parasite ~;;zr required is eight times the original \n\nFigure 2.1 presents the thrust required and power required for a specific airplane configu- ration and altitude. The curves of figure 2.1 are applicable for the following airplane data: \n\ngross weight, W= 15,000 Ibs. span, b=40 ft. equivalent parasite area, f=7.2 sq. ft. airplane efficiency factor, c= ,827 sea level altitude, C= 1.000 compressibility corrections neglected \n\nwhere \n\nPri,=induced power required corresponding to some original speed, Vi \n\nI+;,= induced power required corresponding to some different speed, V, \n\nFor example, if an airplane in steady level flight is operated at.twice as great a speed, the in- duced drag is one-fourth the original value but the induced power required is one-half the original value. The parasite power required is a function \n\nThe curve of drag or thrust required versus velocity shows the variation of induced, para- site, and total drag. Induced drag predomi- nates at low speeds. When the airplane is operated at maximum lift-drag ratio, (L/D)-, the total drag is at a minimum and the induced and parasite drags are equal. For the specific airplane of figure 2.1, (,L/D),, and minimum total drag are obtained at a speed of 160 knots. \n\noriginal value. The parasite power required is a function of the parasite drag and velocity. \n\nThe curve of power required versus velocity shows the variation of induced, parasite, and total power required. As before, induced power required predominates at low speeds and parasite power required predominates at high speeds and the induced and parasite power are equal at (L/D),,. However, the condition of (L/D&- defines only the point of minimum drag and does not define the point of minimum pozver required. Ordinarily, the point of mini- mum power required will occur at a speed which is 76 percent of the speed for minimum drag and, in the case of the airplane configura- tion of figure 2.1, the speed for minimum power required would be 122 knots. The total drag at the speed for minimum power required is 15 percent higher than the drag at (L/D)- but the minimum power required is 12 percent lower than the power required at (L/D)-. \n\nwhere \n\nPr,=parasite power required, h.p. D,=paraSite drag, lbs. V= true airspeed, knots \n\nThus, parasite power required will vary with altitude and equivalent parasite area ( f) in the same manner as ‘ the parasite drag. However, the variation with speed will be different. If all other factors are constant, the parasite drag varies as the square of velocity but parasite power varies as the cube of velocity. \n\nwhere \n\nPrpl= parasite power required corresponding to some original speed, Vi \n\n$$Pb% v* 3 -=(-I Ph VI $$\n\n97" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8699645574337714, + "doc_id": "4ad07ad8b775370ea7b5ae11349462c65015ec1fc7e317da65cf587895552010", + "edit_distance": 0.46445497630331756, + "f1_score": 0.9197396963123644, + "meteor": 0.7665111259707053, + "precision": 0.933920704845815, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS 00-601-60 HIGH SPEED AERODYNAMICS\n\nin pressure without apparent changes in density. Such a condition of airflow is analogous to the flow of water, hydraulic fluid, or any other incompressible fluid. However, at high flight speeds the pressure changes that take place are quite large and significant changes in air density occur. The study of airflow at high speeds must account for these changes 1 in air density and must consider that the 1 air is compressible and that there will be ' compressibility effects.'\n\nA factor of great importance in the study of high speed airflow is the speed of sound. The speed of sound is the rate at which small pressure disturbances will be propagated through the air and this propagation speed is solely a function of air temperature. The accompanying table illustrates the variation of the speed of sound in the standard atmosphere.\n\nTABLE 3-I. V.r;afIm < Altitude in the ,I T< -\n\n661.7\n\n6X6.7\n\nAs an object moves through the air mass, velocity and pressure changes occur which create pressure disturbances in the airflow surrounding the object. Of course, these pressure disturbances are propagated through the air at the speed of sound. If the object is travelling at low speed the pressure disturbances are propagated ahead of the object and the airflow immediately ahead of the object is influenced by the pressure field on the object. Actually, these pressure disturbances are transmitted in all directions and extend indefinitely in all\n\nRevised January 1965\n\ndirections. Evidence of this ' pressure warning' ' is seeii in the typical subsonic flow pattern of figure 3.1 where there is upwash and flow direction change well ahead of the leading edge. If the object is travelling at some ,speed above the speed of sound the airflow ahead of the object will not be influenced by the pressure field on the object since pres-sure disturbances cannot. be propagated ahead of the object. Thus, as the flight speed nears the speed of sound a compression wave will form at the leading edge and all changes in velocity and pressure will take place quite sharply and suddenly. The airflow, ahead of the object is not influenced until the air particles are suddenly forced out .of the way by the concentrated pressure wave set up by the object. Evidence of this phenomenon is seen in the typical supersonic flow pattern of figure 3.1.\n\nThe analogy of surface waves on the water may help clarify these phenomena. Since a surface wave is simply the propagation of a pressure disturbance, a ship moving at a speed much less than the wave speed will not form a ' bow wave.' As the. ship' s speed nears the wave pro$agation speed the bow wave will form and become stronger as speed is increased beyond the wave speed.\n\nAt this point it should become apparent that all compressibility effects depend upon the relationship of airspeed to the speed of sound. The term used to describe this relationship is the Mach number, M, and this term is the ratio of the true airspeed to the speed of sound. ,-I\n\n\n\n```\nwhere M=Mach number V= true airspeed, knots d= speed of sound, knots =a& aO=speed of sound at standard sea level conditions, 661 knots e= temperature ratio = T/T,\n```", + "recall": 0.905982905982906, + "true_md": "in pressure without apparent changes in den- sity. Such a condition of airflow is analogous to the flow of water, hydraulic fluid, or any other incompressible fluid. However, at high flight speeds the pressure changes that take place are quite large and significant changes in air density occur. The study of airflow at high speeds must account for these changes 1 in air density and must consider that the 1 air is compressible and that there will be “compressibility effects.” A factor of great importance in the study of high speed airflow is the speed of sound. The speed of sound is the rate at which small pressure disturbances will be propagated through the air and this propagation speed is solely a function of air temperature. The accompanying table illustrates the variation of the speed of sound in the standard atmosphere. \n\ndirections. Evidence of this “pressure warn- ing’ ’ is seeii in the typical subsonic flow pattern of figure 3.1 where there is upwash and flow direction change well ahead of the leading edge. If the object is travelling at some ,speed above the speed of sound the air- flow ahead of the object will not be influenced by the pressure field on the object since pres- -sure disturbances cannot. be propagated ahead of the object. Thus, as the flight speed nears the speed of sound a compression wave will form at the leading edge and all changes in velocity and pressure will take place quite sharply and suddenly. The airflow, ahead of the object is not influenced until the air par- ticles are suddenly forced out .of the way by the concentrated pressure wave set up by the object. Evidence of this phenomenon is seen in the typical supersonic flow pattern of figure 3.1. The analogy of surface waves on the water \n\nfigure 3.1. The analogy of surface waves on the water may help clarify these phenomena. Since a surface wave is simply the propagation of a pressure disturbance, a ship moving at a speed much less than the wave speed will not form a “bow wave.” As the. ship ’ s speed nears the wave pro$agation speed the bow wave will form and become stronger as speed is increased beyond the wave speed. \n\nAt this point it should become apparent that all compressibility effects depend upon the relationship of airspeed to the speed of sound. The term used to describe this rela- tionship is the Mach number, M, and this term is the ratio of the true airspeed to the speed of sound. ,-I M=; \n\nAs an object moves through the air mass, velocity and pressure changes occur which create pressure disturbances in the airflow sur- rounding the object. Of course, these pressure disturbances are propagated through the air at the speed of sound. If the object is travel- ling at low speed the pressure disturbances are propagated ahead of the object and the airflow immediately ahead of the object is influenced by the pressure field on the object. Actually, these pressure disturbances are transmitted in all directions and extend indefinitely in all \n\nwhere M=Mach number \n\nwhere M=Mach number V= true airspeed, knots d= speed of sound, knots =a& aO=speed of sound at standard sea level conditions, 661 knots e= temperature ratio = T/T, \n\nRevised January 1965 \n\nTABLE 3-I. V.r;afIm < Altitude in ,I T< the - \n\nNAVWEPS 00-601-60 HIGH SPEED AERODYNAMICS \n\n$$,-I M=; $$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6831536126063457, + "doc_id": "3b9e06b2d6548fff42b3815e5a9065c1dc01bf473273f48e8937fc022ef1de45", + "edit_distance": 0.6632653061224489, + "f1_score": 0.9251101321585902, + "meteor": 0.7871746831716353, + "precision": 0.9545454545454546, + "pred_md": "FAA Chart Users' Guide - VFR Symbology - Flyway Planning Charts\n\n## AIRSPACE INFORMATION\n\n## Class B Airspace\n\nAppropriate notes as required may be shown.\n\n(Mode C see FAR 91.215/AIM)\n\nAll mileages are nautical (NM).\n\nAll radials are magnetic.\n\nFloors extending 'upward and above' a certain altitude are preceded by a +. Operations at or below these altitudes are outside of the Class B Airspace.)\n\n## Class D Airspace\n\n(A minus sign in front of the figure used to indicate 'from surface to but not including...')\n\n## ALTITUDE IN HUNDREDS OF FEET MSL.\n\n## Special Airspace Areas\n\n## Special Flight Rules Area (SFRA) Relating to National Security\n\nExample: Washington DC\n\nAppropriate notes as required may be shown.\n\nNote: Delimiting line not shown when it coincides with International Boundary, projection lines or other linear features.\n\n## Class C Airspace\n\n44", + "recall": 0.8974358974358975, + "true_md": "FAA Chart Users’ Guide - VFR Symbology - Flyway Planning Charts\n\n44\n\n## AIRSPACE INFORMATION\n\nALTITUDE IN HUNDREDS OF FEET MSL.\n\n(A minus sign in front of the figure used to indicate “from surface to but not including...”)\n\nFloors extending “upward and above” a certain altitude are pre- ceded by a +. Operations at or below these altitudes are outside of the Class B Airspace.)\n\nAll radials are magnetic.\n\nAll mileages are nautical (NM).\n\n(Mode C see FAR 91.215/AIM)\n\nAppropriate notes as required may be shown.\n\n(Mode C see FAR 91.215/AIM)\n\nAppropriate notes as required may be shown.\n\nExample: Washington DC\n\nAppropriate notes as required may be shown.\n\nNote: Delimiting line not shown when it coincides with Internation- al Boundary, projection lines or other linear features.\n\n## Special Airspace Areas\n\n## Special Flight Rules Area (SFRA) Relating to National Security\n\n## Class D Airspace\n\n## Class E Surface (SFC) Airspace\n\n## Class C Airspace\n\n## Class B Airspace" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8770840526415411, + "doc_id": "dcbeca88e4638328e00238302fda3e78e3559573d5a1016a05ca922805cc0f9e", + "edit_distance": 0.5520195838433293, + "f1_score": 0.941908713692946, + "meteor": 0.7494406037084274, + "precision": 0.9742489270386266, + "pred_md": "in drag and there is a two-fold effect. A 50percent increase in weight produces an increase of 83.8 percent in the power required to maintain a specific CL. This is the result of a 50percent increase in thrust required coupled with a 22.5-percent increase in speed. The effect of a weight change on thrust required, power required, and airspeed at specific angles of attack and lift coefficients provides an important basis for various techniques of cruise and endurance conditions of flight.\n\n1 Figure 2.3 illustrates the effect on the curves of thrust and power required of a change in the equivalent parasite area,!, of the configuration. Since parasite drag predominates in the region of high flight speed, a change in f will produce the greatest change in thrust and power required at high speed. Since parasite drag is relatively small in the region of low speed flight, a change in f will produce relatively small changes in thrust and power required at low speeds. The principal effect of a change in equivalent parasite area of the configuration is to change the parasite drag at any given airspeed.\n\nThe curves of figure 2.3 depict the changes in the curves of thrust and power required due to a 50 percent increase in equivalent parasite area of the configuration. The minimum total drag is increased by an increase in f and the GWL is reduced. ' Also, the increase in f will increase the CL for (L/D)and require a reduction in speed at the new, but decreased, (L/D)-. The point of minimum power required occurs at a lower airspeed and the value of the minimum power required is increased slightly. Generally, the effect on the minimum power required is slight because the parasite drag is only 25 percent of the total at this specific condition of flight.\n\nAn increase in the equivalent parasite area of an airplane may he brought about by the deflection of flaps, extension of landing gear, extension of speed brakes, addition of external stores, etc. In such instances a decrease in the airplane efficiency factor, c, may accompany\n\n## NAVWEPS 00-501-50 AMPLANE PERFORMANCE\n\nan increase in f to account for the additional changes in parasite drag which may vary with C' .\n\nA change in altitude can produce significant changes in the curves of thrust and power required. The effects of altitude on these curves providea great part of the explanation of the effect of altitude on range and endurance. Figure 2.4 illustrates the effect of a change in altitude on the curves of thrust and power required for a specific airplane configuration and gross weight. As long as compressibility effects are negligible, the principal effect of increased altitude on the curve of thrust required is that specific aerodynamic conditions occur at higher true airspeeds. For example, the subject airplane at sea level has a minimum drag of 1,250 lbs. at 160 knots. The same airplane would incur the same drag at altitude if operated at the same cqthdcnt airsprcd of 160 knots. However, the equivalent airspeed of 160 knots at 22,000 ft. altitude would produce a true airspeed of 227 knots. Thus, an increase in altitude will cause the curve of thrust required to flatten out and move to the direction of higher velocity. Note that altitude alone will not alter the value of minimum drag.\n\nThe effect of altitude on the curve of power required can best be considered from the effect on true airspeed to achieve a specific aerodynamic condition. The sea level power required curve of figure 2.4 indicates that CW>mz occurs at 160 knots and requires 615 h.p. If this same airplane is operated at WD)ma at an altitude of 22,000 ft., the same drag is incurred at a higher velocity and requires a higher power. The increase in velocity to 227 knots accounts for the increase in power required to 872 hp. Actually, the various points on the curve of power required can be considered affected in this same fashion. At specific lift coefficients and angles of attack, a change in altitude will alter the true airspeed particular to these points and cause a change in power required because of the change in true airspeed. An increase in altitude will\n\n101\n\nRevised Januaty 1965", + "recall": 0.9116465863453815, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-501-50 AMPLANE PERFORMANCE \n\nan increase in f to account for the additional changes in parasite drag which may vary with C ‘ . A change in altitude can produce signifi- \n\nin drag and there is a two-fold effect. A 50- percent increase in weight produces an increase of 83.8 percent in the power required to main- tain a specific CL. This is the result of a 50- percent increase in thrust required coupled with a 22.5-percent increase in speed. The effect of a weight change on thrust required, power re- quired, and airspeed at specific angles of attack and lift coefficients provides an important basis for various techniques of cruise and endurance conditions of flight. \n\n1 Figure 2.3 illustrates the effect on the curves of thrust and power required of a change in the equivalent parasite area,!, of the configuration. Since parasite drag predominates in the region of high flight speed, a change in f will produce the greatest change in thrust and power re- quired at high speed. Since parasite drag is relatively small in the region of low speed flight, a change in f will produce relatively small changes in thrust and power required at low speeds. The principal effect of a change in equivalent parasite area of the configuration is to change the parasite drag at any given air- speed. The curves of figure 2.3 depict the changes in \n\nC ‘ . A change in altitude can produce signifi- cant changes in the curves of thrust and power required. The effects of altitude on these curves providea great part of the explanation of the effect of altitude on range and endurance. Figure 2.4 illustrates the effect of a change in altitude on the curves of thrust and power re- quired for a specific airplane configuration and gross weight. As long as compressibility effects are negligible, the principal effect of increased altitude on the curve of thrust re- quired is that specific aerodynamic conditions occur at higher true airspeeds. For example, the subject airplane at sea level has a minimum drag of 1,250 lbs. at 160 knots. The same airplane would incur the same drag at altitude if operated at the same cqthdcnt airsprcd of 160 knots. However, the equivalent airspeed of 160 knots at 22,000 ft. altitude would produce a true airspeed of 227 knots. Thus, an in- crease in altitude will cause the curve of thrust required to flatten out and move to the direc- tion of higher velocity. Note that altitude alone will not alter the value of minimum drag. \n\nspeed. The curves of figure 2.3 depict the changes in the curves of thrust and power required due to a 50 percent increase in equivalent parasite area of the configuration. The minimum total drag is increased by an increase in f and the GWL is reduced. ‘ Also, the increase in f will increase the CL for (L/D)- and require a reduction in speed at the new, but decreased, (L/D)-. The point of minimum power re- quired occurs at a lower airspeed and the value of the minimum power required is increased slightly. Generally, the effect on the mini- mum power required is slight because the para- site drag is only 25 percent of the total at this specific condition of flight. \n\nThe effect of altitude on the curve of power required can best be considered from the effect on true airspeed to achieve a specific aero- dynamic condition. The sea level power re- quired curve of figure 2.4 indicates that CW>mz occurs at 160 knots and requires 615 h.p. If this same airplane is operated at WD)ma at an altitude of 22,000 ft., the same drag is incurred at a higher velocity and re- quires a higher power. The increase in ve- locity to 227 knots accounts for the increase in power required to 872 hp. Actually, the various points on the curve of power required can be considered affected in this same fashion. At specific lift coefficients and angles of attack, a change in altitude will alter the true airspeed particular to these points and cause a change in power required because of the change in true airspeed. An increase in altitude will \n\nAn increase in the equivalent parasite area of an airplane may he brought about by the deflection of flaps, extension of landing gear, extension of speed brakes, addition of external stores, etc. In such instances a decrease in the airplane efficiency factor, c, may accompany \n\nRevised Januaty 1965 \n\n101" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8704279349213231, + "doc_id": "ad3416790e2f3533944f09eb353c4f8f7713af0ba0c254bb0b122a3a94b4592b", + "edit_distance": 0.8810975609756098, + "f1_score": 0.9139072847682119, + "meteor": 0.685272695433339, + "precision": 0.9452054794520548, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS 00-ROT-80 AIRPLANE PER,FORMANCE\n\n## REQUIRED THRUST AND POWER DEFINITIONS\n\nAll of the principal items of flight performance involve steady state flight conditions and equilibrium of the airplane. For the airplane to remain in steady level flight, equilibrium must be obtained by a lift equal to the airplane weight and a powerplant thrust equal to the airplane drag. Thus, the airplane drag defines the thrust required to maintain steady level flight.\n\nThe total drag of the airplane is the sum of the parasite and induced drags: Parasite drag is the sum of pressure and friction drag which is due to the basic configuration and, as defined, is independent of lift. Induced drag is the undesirable but unavoidable consequence of the development of lift. In the process of creating lift by the deflection of an airstream, the actuai iift is inclined and a coimponcn: of lift is incurred parallel to the flight path direction. This component of lift combines with any change in pressure and friction drag due to change in lift to form the i nduced drag. While the parasite drag predominates at high speed, induced drag predominates at low speed. Figure 2.1 illustrates the variation with speed of the induced, parasite, and total drag for a specific airplane configuration in steady level flight.\n\nThe power required for flight depends on the thrust required and the flight velocity. By definition, the propulsive horsepower required is related to thrust required and flight velocity by the following equation:\n\n\n\nwhere\n\nPr=power required, h.p. Tr= thrust required (total drag), Ibs.\n\nV= true airspeed, knots\n\nBy inspection of this relationship, it is apparent that each' pound of drag incurred at 325\n\n96\n\nknots requires one horsepower of propulsive power. However, each pound of drag at 650 knots requires two horsepower while each pound of drag at 162.5 knots requires one-half horsepower. The term ' power' implies work rate and, as such, will be a function of the speed at which a particular force is developed.\n\nDistinction between thrust required and pawcr required is necessary for several reasons. For the items of performance such as range and endurance, it is necessary to relate powerplant fuel flow with the propulsive requirement for steady IeveI flight. Some powerplants incur fuel flow rate according to output thrust while other powerplants incur fuel flow rate depending on output power. For example, the turbojet engine is principally. a thrust producing machine and fuel flow is most directly related to thrust output. The reciprocating engine is principally a power producing machine and fuei flow is most directiy reiated to power output. For these reasons the variation of thrust required wil1 be of greatest interest in the performance of the turbojet powered airplane while the variation of power required will be of greatest interest in the performance of the propeller powered airplane. Also, distinction between power and thrust required is necessary in the study of climb performance. During a steady climb, the rate of climb will depend on excess power while the angle of climb is a function of excess thrust.\n\nThe total power required for flight can be considered as the sum of induced and parasite effects similar to the total drag of the airplane. The induced power required is a function of the i nduced drag and velocity.\n\n\n\nwhere\n\nPri= i nduced power required, h.p.\n\nD<=induced drag, lbs. V= true airspeed, knots", + "recall": 0.8846153846153846, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-ROT-80 AIRPLANE PER,FORMANCE \n\n## REQUIRED THRUST AND POWER DEFINITIONS\n\nknots requires one horsepower of propulsive power. However, each pound of drag at 650 knots requires two horsepower while each pound of drag at 162.5 knots requires one-half horsepower. The term “power” implies work rate and, as such, will be a function of the speed at which a particular force is developed. \n\nAll of the principal items of flight perform- ance involve steady state flight conditions and equilibrium of the airplane. For the airplane to remain in steady level flight, equilibrium must be obtained by a lift equal to the air- plane weight and a powerplant thrust equal to the airplane drag. Thus, the airplane drag defines the thrust required to maintain steady level flight. \n\nDistinction between thrust required and pawcr required is necessary for several reasons. For the items of performance such as range and endurance, it is necessary to relate powerplant fuel flow with the propulsive requirement for steady IeveI flight. Some powerplants incur fuel flow rate according to output thrust while other powerplants incur fuel flow rate depend- ing on output power. For example, the turbo- jet engine is principally. a thrust producing machine and fuel flow is most directly related to thrust output. The reciprocating engine is principally a power producing machine and fuei flow is most directiy reiated to power output. For these reasons the variation of thrust required wil1 be of greatest interest in the performance of the turbojet powered air- plane while the variation of power required will be of greatest interest in the performance of the propeller powered airplane. Also, dis- tinction between power and thrust required is necessary in the study of climb performance. During a steady climb, the rate of climb will depend on excess power while the angle of climb is a function of excess thrust. \n\nThe total drag of the airplane is the sum of the parasite and induced drags: Parasite drag is the sum of pressure and friction drag which is due to the basic configuration and, as de- fined, is independent of lift. Induced drag is the undesirable but unavoidable consequence of the development of lift. In the process of creating lift by the deflection of an airstream, the actuai iift is inclined and a coimponcn: of lift is incurred parallel to the flight path direc- tion. This component of lift combines with any change in pressure and friction drag due to change in lift to form the induced drag. While the parasite drag predominates at high speed, induced drag predominates at low speed. Figure 2.1 illustrates the variation with speed of the induced, parasite, and total drag for a specific airplane configuration in steady level flight. \n\nThe total power required for flight can be considered as the sum of induced and parasite effects similar to the total drag of the airplane. The induced power required is a function of the induced drag and velocity. \n\nThe power required for flight depends on the thrust required and the flight velocity. By definition, the propulsive horsepower required is related to thrust required and flight velocity by the following equation: \n\n$$pr= Trv 3% $$\n\n$$p,,,!g $$\n\n- Pri= induced power required, h.p. \n\n- D<=induced drag, lbs. \n\n- V= true airspeed, knots \n\n- Pr=power required, h.p. \n\n- Tr= thrust required (total drag), Ibs. \n\n- V= true airspeed, knots \n\nwhere \n\nwhere \n\nBy inspection of this relationship, it is appar- ent that each ’ pound of drag incurred at 325 \n\n96" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7812745245561024, + "doc_id": "3b54a7810fd7e25319e46122e6b369740bcb2e16bf41873cefe13e8cb0c99c84", + "edit_distance": 0.2844638949671772, + "f1_score": 0.9138755980861244, + "meteor": 0.9204741493829296, + "precision": 0.8761467889908257, + "pred_md": "On procedures with both PBN elements and ground-based equipment requirements, the PBN requirements box will be listed first.\n\n## Notes Symbols\n\nSeveral different symbols may appear within the Notes Box:\n\nAn entry is published in the Takeoff Minimums, (Obstacle) Departure Procedures, and Diverse Vector Area (Radar Vectors) section of the TPP.\n\nNon-standard IFR alternate minimums exist. Refer to IFR Alternate Airport Minimums section of the TPP.\n\nAlternate minimums are not authorized due to unmonitored facility or absence of weather reporting service.\n\n- WAAS (Wide Area Augmentation System)\n- Cold Temperature Airport\n\nThe negative within a black square box symbol shown in the Notes section below any 'A' or 'T' Symbol indicates that outages of the WAAS (Wide Area Augmentation System) vertical guidance may occur daily at this location due to initial system limitations. WAAS NOTAMs for vertical outages are not provided for this approach. Use LNAV minima for flight planning at these locations, whether as a destination or alternate. For flight operations at these locations, when the WAAS avionics indicate that LNAV/VNAV or LPV service is available, then vertical guidance may be used to complete the approach using the displayed level of service. Should an outage occur during the procedure, reversion to LNAV minima may be required.\n\nWhen appears in the Notes section below all other symbols it indicates a cold temperature altitude correction is required at that airport when the reported temperature is at or below the published temperature. Advise ATC with altitude correction. Advising ATC with altitude corrections is not required in the final segment. See Aeronautical Information Manual (AIM), Chapter 7, for guidance and additional information. For a complete list of cold temperature airports, see https://aeronav.faa.gov/d-tpp/Cold\\_Temp\\_Airports.pdf.\n\nWhen 'ASR', 'PAR' or 'ASR/PAR' appear in the Note section immediately below the 'T' and 'A' symbols it indicates there are published Radar Instrument Approach Minimums. Where radar is approved for approach control service, it is used not only for radar approaches (Airport Surveillance Radar [ASR] and Precision Approach Radar [PAR]) but is also used to provide vectors in conjunction with published non-radar approaches based on radio NAVAIDs (ILS, VOR, NDB, TACAN). Radar vectors can provide course guidance and expedite traffic to the final approach course of any established IAP or to the traffic pattern for a visual approach.\n\n97\n\nFAA Chart Users' Guide - Terminal Procedures Publication (TPP) - Terms", + "recall": 0.955, + "true_md": "97\n\nFAA Chart Users’ Guide - Terminal Procedures Publication (TPP) - Terms\n\nOn procedures with both PBN elements and ground-based equipment requirements, the PBN requirements box will be listed first.\n\nSeveral different symbols may appear within the Notes Box:\n\nThe negative within a black square box symbol shown in the Notes section below any “A” or “T” Symbol indicates that outages of the WAAS (Wide Area Augmentation System) vertical guidance may occur daily at this location due to initial system limitations. WAAS NOTAMs for vertical outages are not provided for this approach. Use LNAV minima for flight planning at these locations, whether as a destination or alternate. For flight operations at these locations, when the WAAS avionics indicate that LNAV/VNAV or LPV service is available, then vertical guidance may be used to complete the ap- proach using the displayed level of service. Should an outage occur during the procedure, reversion to LNAV minima may be required.\n\nWhen appears in the Notes section below all other symbols it indicates a cold temperature altitude correction is required at that airport when the reported temperature is at or below the published temperature. Advise ATC with alti- tude correction. Advising ATC with altitude corrections is not required in the final segment. See Aeronautical Information Manual (AIM), Chapter 7, for guidance and additional information. For a complete list of cold temperature airports, see https://aeronav.faa.gov/d-tpp/Cold\\_Temp\\_Airports.pdf. \n\nWhen “ASR”, “PAR” or “ASR/PAR” appear in the Note section immediately below the “T” and “A” symbols it indicates there are published Radar Instrument Approach Minimums. Where radar is approved for approach control service, it is used not only for radar approaches (Airport Surveillance Radar [ASR] and Precision Approach Radar [PAR]) but is also used to provide vectors in conjunction with published non-radar approaches based on radio NAVAIDs (ILS, VOR, NDB, TACAN). Radar vectors can provide course guidance and expedite traffic to the final approach course of any established IAP or to the traffic pattern for a visual approach.\n\n## Notes Symbols" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.754506780835705, + "doc_id": "41f6c4796aaaf8f6e54e8ecb6ab9716d19c6ac98bea97d257b9e61ae70293e3c", + "edit_distance": 0.23076923076923078, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9703883495145632, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS OD-BOT-80 S-lABlLlTY AND CONTROL\n\n## EFFECT OF VERTICAL LOCATION OF THRUST LINE\n\nFigure 4.11. Direct Power Effects\n\nFigure 4.11. Direct Power Effects", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OD-BOT-80 S-lABlLlTY AND CONTROL \n\n## EFFECT OF VERTICAL LOCATION OF THRUST LINE\n\nFigure 4.11. Direct Power Effects" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7397865855641932, + "doc_id": "8d7db21ef9a41ac63875d3b248e783b86bd98a38071bdda36d3d989cb03ada02", + "edit_distance": 0.7185017026106697, + "f1_score": 0.9216417910447761, + "meteor": 0.5797512911379867, + "precision": 0.9536679536679536, + "pred_md": "and maintain it in the displaced position, a force must be supplied in rhe direction of displacement co balance the inherent tendency to return to equilibrium. This same stable tendency in an aircraft resists displacement from trim by pilot effort on the controls or atmospheric disturbances.\n\nThe effect of increased stability on controllabilicy is illustrated by rhe ball in a steeper trough. A greater force is required to ' control' the ball to the same lateral displacement when the stability is increased. In this manner, a large degree of stability tends to make the aircraft less controllable. It is necessary to achieve the proper balance between stability and tontrollability during rhe design of an aircraft because the ~ppcr limits of stability arc set by the lower 1imitJ of controllability.\n\nThe effect of reduced stability on .controllability is illustrated by the ball on a flat surface. When neutral static stability exists, the ball may be displaced from equilibrium and there is no stable tendency to return. A new point of equilibrium is obtained and no force is required to maintain the displacement. As the static stability approaches zero, controllability increases to infinity and the only resistance to displacement is a resistance to the motion of displacement-damping. For this reason, the lower Limits of stability may be Set by the upper limits of controllability. If the stability of the aircraft is too low, control deflections may create exaggerated displacements of the aircraft.\n\nThe effect of static instability. on controllability is illustrated by the ball on a hill. If the ball is displaced from equilibrium at the top of the hill, the initial tendency is for the ball td continue in the displaced direction. In order to ' control' ~the ball to some lateral displacement, a force must be applied oppo& to the direction of displacement. This effect would be appreciated during flight of an unstable aircraft by an unstable ' feel' of the aircraft. If the controls were deflected co in-\n\n249\n\n## NAVWEPS DD-8OT-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL\n\n&ease the angle of attack, the aircraft would be trimmed at the higher angle of attack by a push force to keep the aircraft from continuing in the displacement direction. Such control force reversal would evidence the aiiplane instability; the pilot would be supplying the stability by his attempt to maintain the equilibrium. An unstable aircraft can be flown if the instability is slight with a low rate of divergence. Quick reactions coupled with effective controls can allow the pilot to cope with some degree of static instability. Since such flight would require constant attention by the pilot, slight instability can be tolerated only in airships, helicopters, and certain minor motions of the airplane. However, the airplane in high speed flight will react rapidly to any disturbances and any instability would create unsafe conditions. Thus, it is necessary to provide some positive static stability to the major aircraft degrees of freedom.\n\n## AIRPLANE REFERENCE AXES\n\nIn order to visualize the forces and moments on the aircraft; it is necessary to establish a set of mutually perpendicular reference axes originating at the center of gravity. Figure 4.4 illustrates a conventional right hand axis system. The longitudinal or X axis is located in a plane of symmetry and is given a positive direction pointing into the wind. A moment about this axis is a rolling moment, L, and the positive direction for a positive rolling moment utilizes the right hand rule. The vertical or 2 axis also is in a plane of symmetry and is established positive downward. A moment about the vertical axis is a yawing moment, N, and a positive yawing moment would yaw the aircraft co the right (right hand rule). The lateral or Y axis is perpendicular to the plane of symmetry and is given a positive direction out the right side of the aircraft. A moment about the lateral axis is a pitching moment, M, and a positive pitching moment is in the noseup dlrection.", + "recall": 0.8916967509025271, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS DD-8OT-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL \n\nof stability arc set by the lower 1imitJ of controlla- &ease the angle of attack, the aircraft would be trimmed at the higher angle of attack by a push force to keep the aircraft from con- tinuing in the displacement direction. Such control force reversal would evidence the aii- plane instability; the pilot would be supply- ing the stability by his attempt to maintain the equilibrium. An unstable aircraft can be flown if the instability is slight with a low rate of divergence. Quick reactions coupled with effective controls can allow the pilot to cope with some degree of static instability. Since such flight would require constant at- tention by the pilot, slight instability can be tolerated only in airships, helicopters, and certain minor motions of the airplane. How- ever, the airplane in high speed flight will react rapidly to any disturbances and any in- stability would create unsafe conditions. Thus, it is necessary to provide some positive static stability to the major aircraft degrees of freedom. \n\nand maintain it in the displaced position, a force must be supplied in rhe direction of displacement co balance the inherent tendency to return to equilibrium. This same stable tendency in an aircraft resists displacement from trim by pilot effort on the controls or atmospheric disturbances. The effect of increased stability on con- \n\natmospheric disturbances. The effect of increased stability on con- trollabilicy is illustrated by rhe ball in a steeper trough. A greater force is required to “control” the ball to the same lateral dis- placement when the stability is increased. In this manner, a large degree of stability tends to make the aircraft less controllable. It is necessary to achieve the proper balance be- tween stability and tontrollability during rhe design of an aircraft because the ~ppcr limits of stability arc set by the lower 1imitJ of controlla- bility. ing the stability by his attempt to maintain the equilibrium. flown if the instability is slight with a low rate of divergence. Quick reactions coupled with effective controls can allow the pilot to cope with some degree of static instability. Since such flight would require constant at- tention by the pilot, slight instability can be tolerated only in airships, helicopters, and certain minor motions of the airplane. How- ever, the airplane in high speed flight will react rapidly to any disturbances and any in- stability would create unsafe it is necessary \n\nThe effect of reduced stability on .controlla- bility is illustrated by the ball on a flat surface. When neutral static stability exists, the ball may be displaced from equilibrium and there is no stable tendency to return. A new point of equilibrium is obtained and no force is required to maintain the displacement. As the static stability approaches zero, controlla- bility increases to infinity and the only resist- ance to displacement is a resistance to the motion of displacement-damping. For this reason, the lower Limits of stability may be Set by the upper limits of controllability. If the stability of the aircraft is too low, control deflections may create exaggerated displace- ments of the aircraft. The effect of static instability. on controlla- \n\nIn order to visualize the forces and moments on the aircraft; it is necessary to establish a set of mutually perpendicular reference axes originating at the center of gravity. Figure 4.4 illustrates a conventional right hand axis system. The longitudinal or X axis is located in a plane of symmetry and is given a positive direction pointing into the wind. A moment about this axis is a rolling moment, L, and the positive direction for a positive rolling moment utilizes the right hand rule. The vertical or 2 axis also is in a plane of symmetry and is estab- lished positive downward. A moment about the vertical axis is a yawing moment, N, and a positive yawing moment would yaw the air- craft co the right (right hand rule). The lateral or Y axis is perpendicular to the plane of symmetry and is given a positive direction out the right side of the aircraft. A moment about the lateral axis is a pitching moment, M, and a positive pitching moment is in the nose- up dlrection. \n\nments of the aircraft. The effect of static instability. on controlla- bility is illustrated by the ball on a hill. If the ball is displaced from equilibrium at the top of the hill, the initial tendency is for the ball td continue in the displaced direction. In order to “control”~the ball to some lateral displacement, a force must be applied oppo& to the direction of displacement. This effect would be appreciated during flight of an un- stable aircraft by an unstable “feel” of the air- craft. If the controls were deflected co in- \n\n## AIRPLANE REFERENCE AXES\n\n249" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8620313167238467, + "doc_id": "92410ced154ca819f2b1de98a2754e89d3ecf984165fdb9add3e27e18372fd4a", + "edit_distance": 0.8157894736842105, + "f1_score": 0.9230769230769229, + "meteor": 0.7115707608464132, + "precision": 0.9534883720930233, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS 00-801-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS\n\nrotation will be quite a ' curve ball artist' the golfer that cannot control the lateral motion of the club face striking the golf ball will impart an uncontrollable spin and have trouble with a ' hook' or ' slice.'\n\nWhile a rotating cylinder can produce a net lift from the circulatory flow, the method is relatively inefficient and only serves to point out the relationship between lift and circula-, tion. An airfoil is capable of producing lift with relatively high efficiency and the process is illustrated in figure 1.8. If a symmetrical airfoil is placed at zero angle of attack to the airstream, the streamline pattern and pressure distribution give evidence of zero lift. HOWever, if the airfoil is given a positive angle of attack, changes occur in the streamline pattern and pressure distribution similar to changes caused by the addition of circulation to the cylinder. The positive angle of attack causes increased velocity on the upper surface with an increase in upper surface suction while the decreased velocity on the lower surface causes a decrease in lower surface suction. Also, upwash is generated ahead of the airfoil, the forward stagnation point moves under the leading edge, and a downwash is evident aft of the airfoil. The pressure distribution 0' the airfoil now provides a net force perpendicular to the airstream-lift.\n\nThe generation of lift by an airfoil is dependent upon the airfoil being able to create circulation in the airstream and develop the lifting, pressure distribution on the surface. In all cases, the generated lift will be the net force caused by the distribution of pressure over the upper and lower surfaces of the airfoil. At low angles of attack, suction pressures usually will exist on both upper and lower surfaces. but the upper surface suction must be greater for positive lift. At high angles of attack near that for maximum lift, a positive pressure will exist on the lower surface but this will account for approximately one-third the net lift.\n\nThe effect of free stream density and velocity is a necessary consideration when studying the development of the various aerodynamic forces. Suppose that a particular shape of airfoil is fixed at a particular angle to the airstream. The relative velocity and pressure distribution will be determined by the shape of the airfoil and the angle to the airstream. The effect of varying the airfoil size, air density and airspeed is shown in figure 1.9. If the same airfoil shape is placed at the same angle to an airstream with twice as great a dynamic pressure the magnitude of the pressure distribution will be twice as great but the r&rive shape of the pressure distribution will be the same. With twice as great a pressure existing over the surface, all aerodynamic forces and moments will ~double. If a half-size airfoil ib placed at the same angle to the original airstream, the magnitude of the pressure distribution is the same as the origina! airfoi! and again the relative shape of the pressure distribution is identical. The same pressure acting on the half-size surface would reduce all aerodynamic forces to one-half that of the original. This similarity of flow patterns means that the stagnation point occurs at the same place, the peak suction pressure occurs at the same place, and the actual magnitude of the aerodynamic forces and moments depends upon the airstream dynamic pressure and the surface area. This concept is extremely important when attempting to separate and analyze the most important factors affecting the development of aerodynamic forces.\n\nAIRFOIL TERMINOLOGY. Since the shape of an airfoil and the inclination to the airstream are so important in determining the pressure distribution, it is necessary to properly define the airfoil terminology. Figure 1.10 shows a typical airfoil and illustrates the various items of airfoil terminology\n\n- (1) The chord line is a straight line connecting the leading and trailing edges of the airfoil.\n\n20", + "recall": 0.8945454545454545, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-801-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS \n\nThe effect of free stream density and velocity is a necessary consideration when studying the development of the various aerodynamic forces. Suppose that a particular shape of airfoil is fixed at a particular angle to the airstream. The relative velocity and pressure distribution will be determined by the shape of the airfoil and the angle to the airstream. The effect of varying the airfoil size, air density and air- speed is shown in figure 1.9. If the same air- foil shape is placed at the same angle to an airstream with twice as great a dynamic pres- sure the magnitude of the pressure distribution will be twice as great but the r&rive shape of the pressure distribution will be the same. With twice as great a pressure existing over the surface, all aerodynamic forces and mo- ments will ~double. If a half-size airfoil ib placed at the same angle to the original air- stream, the magnitude of the pressure distri- bution is the same as the origina! airfoi! and again the relative shape of the pressure dis- tribution is identical. The same pressure act- ing on the half-size surface would reduce all aerodynamic forces to one-half that of the original. This similarity of flow patterns means that the stagnation point occurs at the same place, the peak suction pressure occurs at the same place, and the actual magnitude of the aerodynamic forces and moments depends upon the airstream dynamic pressure and the surface area. This concept is extremely im- portant when attempting to separate and ana- lyze the most important factors affecting the development of aerodynamic forces. \n\nrotation will be quite a “curve ball artist” the golfer that cannot control the lateral mo- tion of the club face striking the golf ball will impart an uncontrollable spin and have trouble with a “hook” or “slice.” While a rotating cylinder can produce a net \n\nwith a “hook” or “slice.” While a rotating cylinder can produce a net lift from the circulatory flow, the method is relatively inefficient and only serves to point out the relationship between lift and circula-, tion. An airfoil is capable of producing lift with relatively high efficiency and the process is illustrated in figure 1.8. If a symmetrical airfoil is placed at zero angle of attack to the airstream, the streamline pattern and pressure distribution give evidence of zero lift. HOW- ever, if the airfoil is given a positive angle of attack, changes occur in the streamline pattern and pressure distribution similar to changes caused by the addition of circulation to the cylinder. The positive angle of attack causes increased velocity on the upper surface with an increase in upper surface suction while the decreased velocity on the lower surface causes a decrease in lower surface suction. Also, upwash is generated ahead of the airfoil, the forward stagnation point moves under the leading edge, and a downwash is evident aft of the airfoil. The pressure distribution 0” the airfoil now provides a net force perpendicu- lar to the airstream-lift. The generation of lift by an airfoil is depend- \n\nlar to the airstream-lift. The generation of lift by an airfoil is depend- ent upon the airfoil being able to create circu- lation in the airstream and develop the lifting, pressure distribution on the surface. In all cases, the generated lift will be the net force caused by the distribution of pressure over the upper and lower surfaces of the airfoil. At low angles of attack, suction pressures usually will exist on both upper and lower surfaces. but the upper surface suction must be greater for positive lift. At high angles of attack near that for maximum lift, a positive pressure will exist on the lower surface but this will account for approximately one-third the net lift. \n\nAIRFOIL TERMINOLOGY. Since the shape of an airfoil and the inclination to the airstream are so important in determining the pressure distribution, it is necessary to properly define the airfoil terminology. Figure 1.10 shows a typical airfoil and illustrates the various items of airfoil terminology \n\n(1) The chord line is a straight line connect- ing the leading and trailing edges of the airfoil. \n\n20" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6969755322810137, + "doc_id": "5fb335d53f739c08d54bb15496448c13eb7118742f2554558f15bf9a07b10b59", + "edit_distance": 0.8258859784283513, + "f1_score": 0.9866666666666666, + "meteor": 0.8176102771130406, + "precision": 0.9847908745247148, + "pred_md": "FAA Chart Users' Guide - Abbreviations\n\nH\n\nHAA - Height Above Airport\n\nHAR - High Altitude Redesign\n\nHAT - Height Above Touchdown\n\nHCH - Heliport Crossing Height\n\nHF - High Frequency\n\nHIRL - High Intensity Runway Lights\n\nHS - Hot Spot\n\n## I\n\nIAC - Interagency Air Committee\n\nIACC - Interagency Air Cartographic Committee\n\nIAF - Initial Approach Fix\n\nIAP - Instrument Approach Procedure\n\nICAO - International Civil Aviation Authority\n\nIDT - Identifier\n\nIF - Intermediate Fix\n\nIFR - Instrument Flight Rules\n\nILS - Instrument Landing System\n\nIMC - Instrument Meteorological Conditions\n\nINS - Inertial Navigation System\n\nIR - Instrument Route (Military)\n\nIRU - Inertial Reference Unit\n\n## J\n\nJO - Joint Order\n\n## K\n\nKIAS - Knots\n\n## L\n\nLAA - Local Airport Advisory\n\nLAAS - Local Area Augmentation System\n\nLAHSO - Land and Hold Short\n\nLDA - Landing Distance Available\n\nLDA - Localizer-type Directional Aid\n\nLdg - Landing\n\nLF - Low Frequency\n\nLIRL - Low Intensity Runway Lights\n\nLNAV - Lateral Navigation\n\nLOC - Localizer\n\nLOM - Locator Outer Marker\n\nLPV - Localizer Performance with Vertical Guidance\n\nLRRS - Long Range Radar Station\n\nLTP - Landing Threshold Point\n\n## M\n\n| MAA - Maximum Authorized Altitude |\n|-------------------------------------|\n| MAP - Missed Approach Point |\n| MCA - Minimum Crossing Altitude |\n| MCAS - Marine Corps Air Station |\n| MDA - Minimum Descent Altitude |\n| MDH - Minimum Descent Height |\n\n| MEA - Minimum Enroute Altitude |\n|--------------------------------------------------------------------|\n| MEF - Maximum Elevation Figure |\n| MF - Medium Frequency |\n| MIA - Minimum IFR Altitude |\n| MIRL - Medium Intensity Runway Lights |\n| MOA - Military Operations Areas |\n| MOCA - Minimum Obstruction Clearance Altitude |\n| MON - Minimum Operational Network |\n| MORA - Minimum Off-Route Altitude MRA - Minimum Reception Altitude |\n| MSA - Minimum Safe Altitude |\n| MSL - Mean Sea Level |\n| MTA - Minimum Turning Altitude |\n| MTR - Military Training Route |\n| MVA - Minimum Vector Altitude |\n\n## N\n\n| N - North |\n|-------------------------------------------------------------------|\n| N/A - Not Applicable |\n| NA - Not Authorized |\n| NAAS - Naval Auxiliary Air Station |\n| NAS - Naval Air Station |\n| NAS - National Airspace System |\n| NAV - Naval Air Facility NAVAID - Navigational Aid (Ground based) |\n| NDB - Non-Directional Radiobeacon |\n| NextGen - Next Generation Air Transportation System |\n| NFDC - National Flight Data Center |\n| NFPO - National Flight Procedures Office |\n| NM - Nautical Mile |\n| NOAA - National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration |\n| NO A/G - No Air-to-Ground Communication |\n| NOTAM - Notice to Airman |\n| NoPT - No Procedure Turn |\n| NTAP - Notices to Airman Publication |\n| NWS - National Weather Service |\n\n## O\n\nOAT - Outside Air Temperature\n\nOBS - Omni Bearing Selector\n\nOCA - Ocean Control Area\n\nOCS - Obstacle Clearance Surface\n\nODP - Obstacle Departure Procedure\n\nOM - Outer Marker\n\nOROCA - Off Route Obstruction Clearance Altitude\n\n## P\n\nPA - Precision Approach\n\nPAR - Precision Approach Radar\n\nPBN - Performance-Based Navigation\n\nPRM - Precision Runway Monitor\n\nPT - Procedure Turn\n\nPTP - Point-to-Point\n\nPvt - Private\n\n130", + "recall": 0.9885496183206107, + "true_md": "HAA - Height Above Airport HAR - High Altitude Redesign HAT - Height Above Touchdown HCH - Heliport Crossing Height HF - High Frequency HIRL - High Intensity Runway Lights HS - Hot Spot\n\nMEA - Minimum Enroute Altitude MEF - Maximum Elevation Figure MF - Medium Frequency MIA - Minimum IFR Altitude MIRL - Medium Intensity Runway Lights MOA - Military Operations Areas MOCA - Minimum Obstruction Clearance Altitude MON - Minimum Operational Network MORA - Minimum Off-Route Altitude MRA - Minimum Reception Altitude MSA - Minimum Safe Altitude MSL - Mean Sea Level MTA - Minimum Turning Altitude MTR - Military Training Route MVA - Minimum Vector Altitude\n\nIAC - Interagency Air Committee IACC - Interagency Air Cartographic Committee IAF - Initial Approach Fix IAP - Instrument Approach Procedure ICAO - International Civil Aviation Authority IDT - Identifier IF - Intermediate Fix IFR - Instrument Flight Rules ILS - Instrument Landing System IMC - Instrument Meteorological Conditions INS - Inertial Navigation System IR - Instrument Route (Military) IRU - Inertial Reference Unit\n\nN - North N/A - Not Applicable NA - Not Authorized NAAS - Naval Auxiliary Air Station NAS - Naval Air Station NAS - National Airspace System NAV - Naval Air Facility NAVAID - Navigational Aid (Ground based) NDB - Non-Directional Radiobeacon NextGen - Next Generation Air Transportation System NFDC - National Flight Data Center NFPO - National Flight Procedures Office NM - Nautical Mile NOAA - National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration NO A/G - No Air-to-Ground Communication NOTAM - Notice to Airman NoPT - No Procedure Turn NPA - Non-Precision Approach NTAP - Notices to Airman Publication NWS - National Weather Service\n\nJO - Joint Order\n\nKIAS - Knots\n\nLAA - Local Airport Advisory LAAS - Local Area Augmentation System LAHSO - Land and Hold Short LDA - Landing Distance Available LDA - Localizer-type Directional Aid Ldg - Landing LF - Low Frequency LIRL - Low Intensity Runway Lights LNAV - Lateral Navigation LOC - Localizer LOM - Locator Outer Marker LPV - Localizer Performance with Vertical Guidance LRRS - Long Range Radar Station LTP - Landing Threshold Point\n\nOAT - Outside Air Temperature OBS - Omni Bearing Selector OCA - Ocean Control Area OCS - Obstacle Clearance Surface ODP - Obstacle Departure Procedure OM - Outer Marker OROCA - Off Route Obstruction Clearance Altitude\n\nMAA - Maximum Authorized Altitude MAP - Missed Approach Point MCA - Minimum Crossing Altitude MCAS - Marine Corps Air Station MDA - Minimum Descent Altitude MDH - Minimum Descent Height\n\nPA - Precision Approach PAR - Precision Approach Radar PBN - Performance-Based Navigation PRM - Precision Runway Monitor PT - Procedure Turn PTP - Point-to-Point Pvt - Private\n\n130\n\n## P\n\n## M\n\n## O\n\nFAA Chart Users’ Guide - Abbreviations\n\n## K\n\n## J\n\n## L\n\n## N\n\n## I\n\n## H" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.45661409154608934, + "doc_id": "5ee4b7a5a689f6c63653bce12ce550b2b99bdf78f188c84cc75c2772f22dde71", + "edit_distance": 0.47368421052631576, + "f1_score": 0.8636363636363636, + "meteor": 0.9137614678899082, + "precision": 0.76, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS OD-BOT-80 APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYING\n\n## RUNWAY LENGTH EQUAL TO CRITICAL FIELD LENGTH\n\nFigure 6.13. Critical Field Len&\n\nFigure 6.13. Critical Field Len&\n\n395", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OD-BOT-80 APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYING \n\nFigure 6.13. Critical Field Len& \n\n395" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8913573366309746, + "doc_id": "3888c85203d0fe8fdc30d8fcb37af02ee2c9cfb22a466aee7569acb79594d30f", + "edit_distance": 0.7613636363636364, + "f1_score": 0.9380165289256199, + "meteor": 0.7962375769538252, + "precision": 0.9826839826839827, + "pred_md": "due to thc~ low combustion pressure and values of c, from 2.0 to 4.0 are typical with aftetburner operation.\n\nThe turbojet engine usually has a strong preference fot high RPM to produce low specific fuel consumption. Since the normal rated thrust condition is a particular design point for the engine, the minimum value of c, will occur at or near this range of RPM. The illustration of figure 2.10 shows a typical vatiation of c, with percent maximum RPM where values of RPM less than 80 to 85 percent produce a specific fuel consumption much greater than the minimum obtainable. This preference for high.RPM to obtain low values of C, is very pronounced in the fixed geometry engine. Turbojet engines with multispool compressors tend to be less sensitive in this respect and are more flexible in their operating characteristics. Whenever low values of cI ate necessary to obtain range or endurance, the preference of the turboiet engine for the design operating RPM can be a factor of great influence.\n\nAltitude is one factor which strongly affects the performance of the turbojet engine. An increase in altitude produces a decrease in density and pressure and, if below the tropopause, a decrease in temperature. If a typical nonaftcrbutning turbojet engine is operated at a constant RPM and true airspeed, the vatiation of thtust and specific fuel consumption with altitude can be approximated from figure 221. The variation of density in the standard atmosphere is shown by the values of density ratio at vatious altitudes. Typical values of the density ratio at specific altitudes are as follows:\n\n119\n\n## NAVWEPS 00-8OT-80 AtRPlANE PERFORMANCE\n\nIf the fixed geometry engine is operated at a constant V (TAS) in subsonic flight and constant N (RPM) the inlet velocity, inlet ram, and compressor pressure ratio are essentially constant with altitude. An increase in altitude then causes the engine air mass flow to decrease in a manner very nearly identical to the altitude density ratio. Of coutsc, this decrease in mass flow will produce a significant e&ct on the output thrust of the engine. Actually, the variation of thrust with altitude is not quite as severe as the density variation because favorable decreases in temperature occut. The decrease in inlet air temperature will provide a relatively greater combustion gas &ergy and allow a greater jet velocity. The increase in jet velocity somewhat offsets the decrease in mass flow. Of course, an increase in altitude provides lower temperatures below the tropopause. Above the tropopause, no further favorable decrease in temperature takes place so a more rapid variation of thrust will take place. The approximate variation of thrust with altitude is represented by figure 2.11 and some typical values at specific altitudes ate as follows :\n\nSince the change in density with altitude is quite rapid at low altitude turbojet takeoff petformance wil1 Abe greatly affected at high altitude. Also note that the thrust at 35,000 ft. is approximately 39 percent of the sea level value.\n\nThe thrust added by the afterburner of a turbojet engine is not affected so greatly by altitude as the basic engine thrust. The use of afterburner may provide a thrust increase of 50 percent at low altitude or as much as 100 percent at high altitude.", + "recall": 0.8972332015810277, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-8OT-80 AtRPlANE PERFORMANCE \n\ndue to thc~ low combustion pressure and values of c, from 2.0 to 4.0 are typical with aftet- burner operation. The turbojet engine usually has a strong \n\nIf the fixed geometry engine is operated at a constant V (TAS) in subsonic flight and con- stant N (RPM) the inlet velocity, inlet ram, and compressor pressure ratio are essentially constant with altitude. An increase in alti- tude then causes the engine air mass flow to decrease in a manner very nearly identical to the altitude density ratio. Of coutsc, this de- crease in mass flow will produce a significant e&ct on the output thrust of the engine. Actually, the variation of thrust with altitude is not quite as severe as the density variation because favorable decreases in temperature occut. The decrease in inlet air temperature will provide a relatively greater combustion gas &ergy and allow a greater jet velocity. The increase in jet velocity somewhat offsets the decrease in mass flow. Of course, an in- crease in altitude provides lower temperatures below the tropopause. Above the tropopause, no further favorable decrease in temperature takes place so a more rapid variation of thrust will take place. The approximate variation of thrust with altitude is represented by figure 2.11 and some typical values at specific alti- tudes ate as follows : \n\nburner operation. The turbojet engine usually has a strong preference fot high RPM to produce low specif- ic fuel consumption. Since the normal rated thrust condition is a particular design point for the engine, the minimum value of c, will occur at or near this range of RPM. The illustration of figure 2.10 shows a typical vati- ation of c, with percent maximum RPM where values of RPM less than 80 to 85 percent pro- duce a specific fuel consumption much greater than the minimum obtainable. This pref- erence for high.RPM to obtain low values of C, is very pronounced in the fixed geometry engine. Turbojet engines with multispool compressors tend to be less sensitive in this respect and are more flexible in their operating characteristics. Whenever low values of cI ate necessary to obtain range or endurance, the preference of the turboiet engine for the design operating RPM can be a factor of great influence. \n\nAltitude is one factor which strongly affects the performance of the turbojet engine. An increase in altitude produces a decrease in density and pressure and, if below the tropo- pause, a decrease in temperature. If a typical nonaftcrbutning turbojet engine is operated at a constant RPM and true airspeed, the vatia- tion of thtust and specific fuel consumption with altitude can be approximated from figure 221. The variation of density in the standard atmosphere is shown by the values of density ratio at vatious altitudes. Typical values of the density ratio at specific altitudes are as follows: \n\nSince the change in density with altitude is quite rapid at low altitude turbojet takeoff pet- formance wil1 Abe greatly affected at high alti- tude. Also note that the thrust at 35,000 ft. is approximately 39 percent of the sea level value. \n\nThe thrust added by the afterburner of a turbojet engine is not affected so greatly by altitude as the basic engine thrust. The use of afterburner may provide a thrust increase of 50 percent at low altitude or as much as 100 per- cent at high altitude. \n\n119" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7671015053697537, + "doc_id": "9939e27f92d92896aa297b1a179a657d21cc68fe61c791295473709ba7e2e677", + "edit_distance": 0.7828348504551366, + "f1_score": 0.9024856596558317, + "meteor": 0.6405940437133015, + "precision": 0.944, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS OO-EOT-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE\n\ncause the airplane to descend. However, as speed is reduced below the maximum level flight speed, parasite drag reduces and allows increased load factors and bank angles and reduced radius of turn, i.e., decreased parasite drag allows increased induced drag to accommodate turns within the maximum thrust available. Thus, the considerations of constant altitude will increase the minimum turn radius above the aerodynamic limit and define a particular airspeed for minimum turn radius.\n\nEach of the three limiting factors (aerodynamic, structural, and power) may combine to define the turning performance of an airPl ane. Generally, aerodynamic and structural limits predominate at low altitude while aerodynamic and power limits predominate at high altitude. The knowledge of this turning performance is particularly necessary for effective operation of fighter and interceptor types of airplanes.\n\n## TAKEOFF AND LANDING PERFORMANCE\n\nThe majority of pilot caused airplane accidents occur during the takeoff and landing phase of flight. Because of this fact, the Naval Aviator must be familiar with all the many variables which influence the takeoff and landing performance of an airplane and must strive for exacting, professional techniques of operation during these phases of flight.\n\nTakeoff and landing performance is a condition of accelerated motion, For instance, during takeoff the airplane starts at zero velocity and accelerates to the takeoff velocity to become airborne. During landing, the airplane touches down at the landing speed and decelerates (or accelerates negatively) to the zero velocity of the stop. In fact, the landing performance could be considered as a takeoff in reverse for purposes of study. In either case, takeoff or landing, the airplane is accelerated between zero velocity and the takeoff or landing velocity. The important factors of takeoff or landing performance are:\n\n- (1) The takeoff or landing velocity which will generally be a function of the stall\n\n182\n\nspeed or minimum flying speed, e.g., 15 percent above the stall speed.\n\n- (2) The accclcration during the takeoff or landing roll. The acceleration experienced by any object varies directly with the unbalance of force and inversely as the mass of the object.\n- (3) The takeoff or landing roll distance is a function of both the acceleration and velocity.\n\nIn the actual case, the takeoff and landing distance is related to velocity and acceleration in a .very complex fashion. The main source of the complexity is that the forces acting on the airplane during the takeoff or landing roll are ' difficult to define wit,h simple relationships. Since the acceleration is a function of these forces, the acceleration is difficult to define in a simple fashion and it is a principal variable affecting distance. However, some simplification can be made to study the basic relatiomhip of acceleration, velocity, and distance While the acceleration is not necessarily constant or uniform throughout the takeoff or landing roll, the assumption of uniformly accelerated motion will facilitate study of the principal variables. affecting takeoff and landing distance.\n\nFrom basic physics, the relationship of velocity, acceleration, and distance for uniformly accelerated motion is defined by the following equation:\n\n\n\nwhere S= acceleration distance, ft. V= final velocity, ft. per sec., after erating uniformly from zero velocity\n\naccela= acceleration, ft. per sec.*\n\nThis equation ' could relate the takeoff distance in terms of the takeoff velocity and acceleration when the airplane is accelerated uniformly from zero velocity to the final takeoff velocity. Also, this expression could relate the landing distance in terms of the landing velocity and deceleration when the airplane is accelerated (negatively) from the landing velocity to a complete stop. It is important to note that", + "recall": 0.8644688644688645, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OO-EOT-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE \n\nspeed or minimum flying speed, e.g., 15 per- cent above the stall speed. (2) The accclcration during the takeoff or \n\ncent above the stall speed. (2) The accclcration during the takeoff or landing roll. The acceleration experienced by any object varies directly with the un- balance of force and inversely as the mass of the object. (3) The takeoff or landing roll distance is \n\ncause the airplane to descend. However, as speed is reduced below the maximum level flight speed, parasite drag reduces and allows increased load factors and bank angles and reduced radius of turn, i.e., decreased parasite drag allows increased induced drag to accom- modate turns within the maximum thrust available. Thus, the considerations of con- stant altitude will increase the minimum turn radius above the aerodynamic limit and define a particular airspeed for minimum turn radius. \n\nthe object. (3) The takeoff or landing roll distance is a function of both the acceleration and velocity. \n\nIn the actual case, the takeoff and landing dis- tance is related to velocity and acceleration in a .very complex fashion. The main source of the complexity is that the forces acting on the airplane during the takeoff or landing roll are “difficult to define wit,h simple relationships. Since the acceleration is a function of these forces, the acceleration is difficult to define in a simple fashion and it is a principal variable affecting distance. However, some simplifica- tion can be made to study the basic relatiomhip of acceleration, velocity, and distance While the acceleration is not necessarily constant or uniform throughout the takeoff or landing roll, the assumption of uniformly acceler- ated motion will facilitate study of the princi- pal variables. affecting takeoff and landing distance. From basic physics, the relationship of \n\nEach of the three limiting factors (aero- dynamic, structural, and power) may combine to define the turning performance of an air- Pl ane. Generally, aerodynamic and structural limits predominate at low altitude while aero- dynamic and power limits predominate at high altitude. The knowledge of this turning per- formance is particularly necessary for effective operation of fighter and interceptor types of airplanes. \n\nThe majority of pilot caused airplane acci- dents occur during the takeoff and landing phase of flight. Because of this fact, the Naval Aviator must be familiar with all the many variables which influence the takeoff and landing performance of an airplane and must strive for exacting, professional techniques of operation during these phases of flight. \n\ndistance. From basic physics, the relationship of velocity, acceleration, and distance for uni- formly accelerated motion is defined by the following equation: \n\nwhere S= acceleration distance, ft. \n\n- where S= acceleration distance, ft. V= final velocity, ft. per sec., after accel- \n\n- S= acceleration distance, ft. V= final velocity, ft. per sec., after accel- erating uniformly from zero velocity a= acceleration, ft. per sec.* \n\n- erating uniformly from zero velocity a= acceleration, ft. per sec.* \n\nTakeoff and landing performance is a con- dition of accelerated motion, For instance, during takeoff the airplane starts at zero veloc- ity and accelerates to the takeoff velocity to become airborne. During landing, the air- plane touches down at the landing speed and decelerates (or accelerates negatively) to the zero velocity of the stop. In fact, the landing performance could be considered as a takeoff in reverse for purposes of study. In either case, takeoff or landing, the airplane is ac- celerated between zero velocity and the takeoff or landing velocity. The important factors of takeoff or landing performance are: \n\nThis equation ‘ could relate the takeoff distance in terms of the takeoff velocity and acceleration when the airplane is accelerated uniformly from zero velocity to the final takeoff velocity. Also, this expression could relate the landing distance in terms of the landing velocity and deceleration when the airplane is accelerated (negatively) from the landing velocity to a complete stop. It is important to note that \n\n(1) The takeoff or landing velocity which will generally be a function of the stall \n\n## TAKEOFF AND LANDING PERFORMANCE\n\n$$s=g $$\n\n182" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8827511664857948, + "doc_id": "051998ba256197d22da236ed3aac423f07148bb3f4fd563edfee904ee95626b8", + "edit_distance": 0.1908831908831909, + "f1_score": 0.9195402298850576, + "meteor": 0.7982625920903312, + "precision": 0.9803921568627451, + "pred_md": "to zero. When an aircraft is in equilibrium, there are no accelerations and the aircraft continues in a steady condition of flight. If the equilibrium is disturbed by a gust or deflection of the controls, the aircraft will experience acceleration due to unbalance of moment or force.\n\nThe static stability of a system is defined by the initial tendency to return to equilibrium conditions following some disturbance from equilibrium. If an object is disturbed from equilibrium and has the tendency to return to equilibrium, positive .rtatic Jtability exists. If the object has a tendency to continue in the direction of disturbance, negative static stability or static instability exists. An intermediate condition could occur where an object displaced from equilibrium remains in equilibrium in the displaced position. If the object subject to a disturbance has neither the tendency to return nor the tendency to continue in the displacement direction, ncutrnl Jtatic stability exists. These three categories of static stability are illustrated in figure 4.1. The ball in a trough illustrates the condition of positive static stability. If the ball is displaced from equilibrium at the bottom of the trough, the initial tendency of the ball is to return to the equilibrium condition. The ball may roll back and forth through the point of equilibrium but displacement to either side creates the initial tendency to return. The ball on a hill illustrates the condition of static instability. Displacement from equilibrium at the hilltop brings about the tendency for greater displacement. The ball on a flat, level surface illustrates the condition of neutral static stability. The ball encounters a new equilibrium at any point of displacement and has neither stable nor unstable tendencies.\n\nThe term ' static' is applied to this form of stability since the resulting motion is not considered. Only the tendency to return to 1. eqmlibrtum conditions is considered in static stability. The static longitudinal stability of an aircraft is appreciated by displacing the\n\n245\n\n## NAVWEPS 00-802-80 STABILITY ,AND CONTROL\n\naircraft from some trimmed angle of attack. If the aerodynamic pitching moments created by this displacement tend to return the aircraft to the equilibrium angle of attack the aircraft has positive static longitudinal stability.\n\n## DYNAMIC STABILITY\n\nWhile static stability is concerned with the tendency of a displaced body to return to equilibrium, dynamic stability is defined by the resulting motion with time. If an object is disturbed from equilibrium, the time history of the resulting motion indicates the dynamic stability of the system. In general, the system will demonstrate positive dynamic stability if the amplitude of motion decreases with time. The various condirions of possible dynamic behavior are illustrated by the time history diagrams of figure 4.2.\n\nThe nonoscillatory modes shown in figure 4.2 depict the time histories possible without cyclic motion. If the system is given an initial disturbance and the motion simply subsides without oscillation, the mode is termed ' subsidence' or ' deadbeat return.' Such a motion indicates positive static stability by the tendency to return to equilibrium and positive dynamic stability since the amplitude decreases with time. Chart B illustrates the mode of ' divergence' by a noncyclic increase of amplitude with time. The initial tendency to continue in the displacement direction is evidence of static instability and the increasing amplitude is proof of dynamic instability. Chart C illustrates the mode of pure neutral stability. If the original disturbance creates a displacement which remains constant thereafter, the lack of tendency for motion and the constant amplitude indicate neutral static and neutral dynamic stability.\n\nThe oscillatory modes of figure 4.2 depict the time histories possible with cyclic motion. One feature common to each of these modes is that positive static stability is demonstrated in the cyclic motion by tendency to return to", + "recall": 0.8658008658008658, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-802-80 STABILITY ,AND CONTROL \n\n## DYNAMIC STABILITY\n\n245 \n\nto zero. When an aircraft is in equilibrium, there are no accelerations and the aircraft continues in a steady condition of flight. If the equilibrium is disturbed by a gust or deflec- tion of the controls, the aircraft will experi- ence acceleration due to unbalance of moment or force. \n\nThe static stability of a system is defined by the initial tendency to return to equilibrium conditions following some disturbance from equilibrium. If an object is disturbed from equilibrium and has the tendency to return to equilibrium, positive .rtatic Jtability exists. If the object has a tendency to continue in the direction of disturbance, negative static stability or static instability exists. An intermediate condition could occur where an object dis- placed from equilibrium remains in equilibrium in the displaced position. If the object subject to a disturbance has neither the tendency to return nor the tendency to continue in the dis- placement direction, ncutrnl Jtatic stability ex- ists. These three categories of static stability are illustrated in figure 4.1. The ball in a trough illustrates the condition of positive static stability. If the ball is displaced from equilibrium at the bottom of the trough, the initial tendency of the ball is to return to the equilibrium condition. The ball may roll back and forth through the point of equilib- rium but displacement to either side creates the initial tendency to return. The ball on a hill illustrates the condition of static insta- bility. Displacement from equilibrium at the hilltop brings about the tendency for greater displacement. The ball on a flat, level surface illustrates the condition of neutral static sta- bility. The ball encounters a new equilibrium at any point of displacement and has neither stable nor unstable tendencies. \n\nThe term “static” is applied to this form of stability since the resulting motion is not considered. Only the tendency to return to 1. eqmlibrtum conditions is considered in static stability. The static longitudinal stability of an aircraft is appreciated by displacing the \n\ndynamic stability. The oscillatory modes of figure 4.2 depict the time histories possible with cyclic motion. One feature common to each of these modes is that positive static stability is demonstrated in the cyclic motion by tendency to return to \n\nWhile static stability is concerned with the tendency of a displaced body to return to equilibrium, dynamic stability is defined by the resulting motion with time. If an object is disturbed from equilibrium, the time history of the resulting motion indicates the dynamic stability of the system. In general, the system will demonstrate positive dynamic stability if the amplitude of motion decreases with time. The various condirions of possible dynamic behavior are illustrated by the time history diagrams of figure 4.2. \n\nThe nonoscillatory modes shown in figure 4.2 depict the time histories possible without cyclic motion. If the system is given an initial disturbance and the motion simply subsides without oscillation, the mode is termed “sub- sidence” or “deadbeat return.” Such a motion indicates positive static stability by the tend- ency to return to equilibrium and positive dy- namic stability since the amplitude decreases with time. Chart B illustrates the mode of “divergence” by a noncyclic increase of ampli- tude with time. The initial tendency to con- tinue in the displacement direction is evidence of static instability and the increasing ampli- tude is proof of dynamic instability. Chart C illustrates the mode of pure neutral stability. If the original disturbance creates a displace- ment which remains constant thereafter, the lack of tendency for motion and the constant amplitude indicate neutral static and neutral dynamic stability. The oscillatory modes of figure 4.2 depict the \n\naircraft from some trimmed angle of attack. If the aerodynamic pitching moments created by this displacement tend to return the air- craft to the equilibrium angle of attack the aircraft has positive static longitudinal stability." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8341160823720184, + "doc_id": "77ce1203ff8c3273234cba7304d8e7c43bff7d12c532dcbd54bba1687b36f304", + "edit_distance": 0.5863945578231292, + "f1_score": 0.8927875243664718, + "meteor": 0.8153024135188094, + "precision": 0.8875968992248062, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS Oe8OT-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS\n\nhigher angles of attack the drag coefficient is much greater and small changes in angle of attack cause significant changes in drag. As stall occurs, a large increase in drag takes place.\n\nA factor more important in airplane performance considerations is the lift-drag ratio, L/D. With the lift and drag data available for the airplane, the proportions of CL and CD can be calculated for each specific angle of attack. The resulting plot of lift-drag ratio with angle of attack shows that L/D increases to some maximum then decreases at the higher lift coefficients and angles of attack. Note that the maximum lift-drag ratio, (L/D),,,, occurs at one specific angle of attack and lift coefIicient. If the airplane is operated in steady flight at (L/D),,,, the total drag is at a mini: mum. Any angle of attack lower or higher than that for (L/D),,, reduces the lift-drag ratio and consequently increases -the total drag for a given airpiane iift.\n\nThe airplane depicted by the curves of Figure 1.13 has a maximum lift-drag ratio of 12.5 at an angle of attack of 6' . Suppose this airplane is operated in steady flight at a gross weight of 12,500 lbs. If flown at the airspeed and angle of attack corresponding to (L/D),.., the drag would be 1,000 lbs. Any higher or lower airspeed would produce a drag greater than 1,000 lbs. Of course, this same airplane could be operated at higher or lower gross weights and the same maximum lift-drag ratio of 12.5 could be obtained at the same angle of attack of 6' . However, a change' in gross weight would require a change in airspeed to support the new weight at the same lift coefficient and angle of attack.\n\nType airplane:\n\n(L/D) emz\n\nHigh performance ailplane. s\n\n25-40\n\nTypical patrol or transport..\n\n12-20\n\nHigh Performance omber. b\n\n2~25\n\nPropeller powered rainer.. t\n\n1~15\n\nJ et trainer..\n\n14-16\n\nTransonic fighter or attack..\n\nlo-13\n\nSupersonic fighter or attack.\n\n4-9 (subsonic)\n\n32\n\nRevised Januay 1965\n\nThe configuration of an airplane has a great effect on the lift-drag ratio. Typical values of (L/D),.. are listed for various types of airplanes. While the high performance sailplane may have. extremely high lift-drag ratios, such an aircraft has no real economic or tactical purpose. The supersonic fighter may have seemingly low lift-drag ratios in subsonic flight but the airplane configurations required for supersonic flight (and high [L/D]' * at high Mach numbers) precipitate this situation.\n\nMany important items of airplane performance are obtained in flight at (L/D),... Typical performance conditions which occur at (L/D),., are:\n\nmaximum endurance of jet powered airplanes maximum range of propeller driven airplanes maximum climb angle for jet powered airplanes maximum power-off glide range, jet or Prop\n\nThe most immediately interesting of these items is the power-off glide range of an airplane. By examining the forces acting on an airplane during a glide, it can be shown that the glide ratio is numerically equal to the lift-drag ratio. For example, if the airplane in a glide has an (L/D) of 15, each mile of altitude is traded for 15 miles of horizontal distance. Such a fact implies that the airplane should be flown at (L/D)to obtain the greatest glide distance.\n\nAn unbelievable feature of gliding performance is the effect of airplane gross weight. Since the maximum lift-drag ratio of a given airplane is an intrinsic property of the aerodynamic configuration, gross weight will not affect the gliding performance. If a typical jet trainer has an (L/@of 15, the aircraft 1 can obtain a maximum of 15 miles horizontal distance for each mile of altitude. This would be true of this particular airplane at any gross", + "recall": 0.8980392156862745, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS Oe8OT-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS \n\nThe configuration of an airplane has a great effect on the lift-drag ratio. Typical values of (L/D),.. are listed for various types of airplanes. While the high performance sail- plane may have. extremely high lift-drag ratios, such an aircraft has no real economic or tactical purpose. The supersonic fighter may have seemingly low lift-drag ratios in subsonic flight but the airplane configurations required for supersonic flight (and high [L/D] ‘ * at high Mach numbers) precipitate this situa- tion. \n\nhigher angles of attack the drag coefficient is much greater and small changes in angle of attack cause significant changes in drag. As stall occurs, a large increase in drag takes place. A factor more important in airplane per- \n\nplace. A factor more important in airplane per- formance considerations is the lift-drag ratio, L/D. With the lift and drag data available for the airplane, the proportions of CL and CD can be calculated for each specific angle of attack. The resulting plot of lift-drag ratio with angle of attack shows that L/D increases to some maximum then decreases at the higher lift coefficients and angles of attack. Note that the maximum lift-drag ratio, (L/D),,,, occurs at one specific angle of attack and lift coefIi- cient. If the airplane is operated in steady flight at (L/D),,,, the total drag is at a mini: mum. Any angle of attack lower or higher than that for (L/D),,, reduces the lift-drag ratio and consequently increases -the total drag for a given airpiane iift. The airplane depicted by the curves of Figure \n\nMany important items of airplane perform- ance are obtained in flight at (L/D),... Typi- cal performance conditions which occur at (L/D),., are: \n\n- maximum endurance of jet powered air- planes maximum range of propeller driven air- \n\n- planes maximum range of propeller driven air- planes maximum climb angle for jet powered air- \n\n- planes maximum climb angle for jet powered air- planes maximum power-off glide range, jet or \n\n- planes maximum power-off glide range, jet or Prop \n\ndrag for a given airpiane iift. The airplane depicted by the curves of Figure 1.13 has a maximum lift-drag ratio of 12.5 at an angle of attack of 6”. Suppose this airplane is operated in steady flight at a gross weight of 12,500 lbs. If flown at the airspeed and angle of attack corresponding to (L/D),.., the drag would be 1,000 lbs. Any higher or lower airspeed would produce a drag greater than 1,000 lbs. Of course, this same airplane could be operated at higher or lower gross weights and the same maximum lift-drag ratio of 12.5 could be obtained at the same angle of attack of 6”. However, a change’ in gross weight would require a change in airspeed to support the new weight at the same lift co- efficient and angle of attack. \n\nThe most immediately interesting of these items is the power-off glide range of an air- plane. By examining the forces acting on an airplane during a glide, it can be shown that the glide ratio is numerically equal to the lift-drag ratio. For example, if the airplane in a glide has an (L/D) of 15, each mile of alti- tude is traded for 15 miles of horizontal dis- tance. Such a fact implies that the airplane should be flown at (L/D)- to obtain the greatest glide distance. \n\nAn unbelievable feature of gliding perform- ance is the effect of airplane gross weight. Since the maximum lift-drag ratio of a given airplane is an intrinsic property of the aero- dynamic configuration, gross weight will not affect the gliding performance. If a typical jet trainer has an (L/@- of 15, the aircraft 1 can obtain a maximum of 15 miles horizontal distance for each mile of altitude. This would be true of this particular airplane at any gross \n\n32 \n\nRevised Januay 1965" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7302809961192788, + "doc_id": "d737cfeb123520e6fd5575066518cbb20e4fff57aa1244e8df5e66c375a9f6aa", + "edit_distance": 0.4791666666666667, + "f1_score": 0.8547008547008548, + "meteor": 0.7194772234100169, + "precision": 0.9090909090909091, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS OO-SOT-~O BASIC AERODYNAMICS\n\nquence of developing lift with a finite wing and is termed INDUCED DRAG, D+ Induced drag is separate from the drag due to form and friction and is due simply to the development of lift.\n\nBy inspection of the force diagram of figure 1.30, a relationship between induced drag, lift, and induced angle of attack is apparent. The i nduced drag coeficient, CDi, will vary directly with the wing lift coefficient, C,, and the induced angle of attack, as. The effective lift is the vertical component of the actual lift and, if the induced angle of attack is small, will be essentially the same as the actual lift. The J horizontal and vertical component of drag is insignificant under the same conditions. By a detailed study of the factors involved, the following relationships can be derived for a wing with an elliptical lift distribution:\n\n- (1) The induced drag equation follows the same form as applied to any other aerodynamic force.\n\n\n\nwhere\n\n\n\nS=wing area, sq. ft.\n\n(2) The induced drag coefficient can be derived as :\n\n\n\nor\n\nwhere\n\n\n\nC,= lift coefficient sin ai=natural sine of the induced angle of attack, Eli, degrees r=3.1416, constant AR= wing aspect ratio\n\nhWd Jonua~ 1965\n\n68\n\n(3) The i nduced angle of attack can be derived as:\n\n\n\n(NOTE: the derivation of these relationships may be found in any of the standard engineering aerodynamics textbooks.)\n\nThese relationships facilitate an understanding and appreciation of induced drag.\n\n\n\ndepends on the lift coefficient and aspect ratio. Flight at high lift conditions such as low speed or maneuvering flight will create high i nduced angles of attack while high speed, low lift flight will create very small induced angles .of attack. The inference is that high lift coeflicients require large downwash and result in large ,induced angles of attack. The effect of aspect ratio is significant since a very high aspect ratio would produce a negligible i nduced angle of attack. If the aspect ratio were infinite, the i nduced angle of attack would be zero and the aerodynamic characteristics of the wing would be identical with the airfoil section properties. On the other hand, if the wing aspect ratio is low, the induced angle of attack will be large and the low aspect ratio airplane must operate at high angles of attack at maximum lift. Essentially, the low aspect ratio wing affects a relatively small mass of air and consequently must provide a large deflection (downwash) to produce lift.\n\nEFFECT OF LIFT. The induced drag coe&cient ( C&l CDi=0.31E shows somewhat sim,I AR ilar effects of lift coefficient and aspect ratio. Because of the power of variation of induced drag coefficient with lift coefficient, high lift coeflicients provide very high i nduced drag and low lift coefficients very low induced drag. The direct effect of C, can be best appreciated by assuming an airplane is flying at a givenweight, altitude, and airspeed. If the airplane is maneuvered from steady level flight to a load factor of two,", + "recall": 0.8064516129032258, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OO-SOT-~O BASIC AERODYNAMICS \n\n(3) The induced angle of attack can be derived as: \n\nquence of developing lift with a finite wing and is termed INDUCED DRAG, D+ In- duced drag is separate from the drag due to form and friction and is due simply to the de- velopment of lift. By inspection of the force diagram of figure \n\nvelopment of lift. By inspection of the force diagram of figure 1.30, a relationship between induced drag, lift, and induced angle of attack is apparent. The induced drag coeficient, CDi, will vary directly with the wing lift coefficient, C,, and the in- duced angle of attack, as. The effective lift is the vertical component of the actual lift and, if the induced angle of attack is small, will be essentially the same as the actual lift. The J horizontal and vertical component of drag is insignificant under the same conditions. By a detailed study of the factors involved, the fol- lowing relationships can be derived for a wing with an elliptical lift distribution: \n\n(NOTE: the derivation of these relationships may be found in any of the standard engi- neering aerodynamics textbooks.) These relationships facilitate an understanding \n\nneering aerodynamics textbooks.) These relationships facilitate an understanding and appreciation of induced drag. \n\nThe induced angle of attack Eli= 18.~4$~ ( > depends on the lift coefficient and aspect ratio. Flight at high lift conditions such as low speed or maneuvering flight will create high induced angles of attack while high speed, low lift flight will create very small induced angles .of attack. The inference is that high lift coefli- cients require large downwash and result in large ,induced angles of attack. The effect of aspect ratio is significant since a very high aspect ratio would produce a negligible induced angle of attack. If the aspect ratio were in- finite, the induced angle of attack would be zero and the aerodynamic characteristics of the wing would be identical with the airfoil sec- tion properties. On the other hand, if the wing aspect ratio is low, the induced angle of attack will be large and the low aspect ratio airplane must operate at high angles of attack at maximum lift. Essentially, the low aspect ratio wing affects a relatively small mass of air and consequently must provide a large de- flection (downwash) to produce lift. \n\nEFFECT OF LIFT. The induced drag co- e&cient ( C&l CDi=0.31E - shows somewhat sim- ,I AR ilar effects of lift coefficient and aspect ratio. Because of the power of variation of induced drag coefficient with lift coefficient, high lift coefli- cients provide very high induced drag and low lift coefficients very low induced drag. The di- rect effect of C, can be best appreciated by assum- ing an airplane is flying at a givenweight, alti- tude, and airspeed. If the airplane is maneuvered from steady level flight to a load factor of two, \n\nwhere \n\nC,= lift coefficient sin ai=natural sine of the induced angle of attack, Eli, degrees r=3.1416, constant AR= wing aspect ratio \n\nor \n\n$$CD,-C, sin ai $$\n\n$$CD& c,P =0.318 -Jjj ( ) $$\n\n(1) The induced drag equation follows the same form as applied to any other aerody- namic force. \n\nwhere \n\nDi=CDigS \n\nDi=induced drag, lbs. 4= :Vymic pressures; psf =295 Cni= induced drag coefficient S=wing area, sq. ft. \n\n(2) The induced drag coefficient can be derived as : \n\n68 \n\nhWd Jonua~ 1965 \n\n$$a~= 18.24 & (degrees) ( ) $$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.10332864920414346, + "doc_id": "0f317b9d7fd1da129a6bba05f996573b46c31a9ba3330e89fe07df14d61c9be9", + "edit_distance": 0.8529411764705882, + "f1_score": 0.35714285714285715, + "meteor": 0.6357476145538429, + "precision": 0.22058823529411764, + "pred_md": "## HYDROGRAPHY\n\n## Open Water\n\nOpen/Inland Water\n\n## Lakes\n\nLabel as required.\n\n## Perennial\n\nWhen too numerous to show individual lakes, show representative pattern and descriptive note. Number indicates elevation.\n\n## Non-Perennial\n\n(dry, intermittent, etc.) Illustration includes small perennial lake.\n\n## Reservoirs\n\nNatural Shorelines\n\nMan-made Shorelines Label when necessary for clarity\n\nToo small to show to scale\n\nUnder Construction\n\n37\n\n## Inland Water\n\n## Shorelines\n\nDefinite\n\nFluctuating\n\nUnsurveyed Indefinite\n\nMan-made\n\nFAA Chart Users' Guide - VFR Symbology - Sectional and Terminal Area Charts", + "recall": 0.9375, + "true_md": "## HYDROGRAPHY\n\nFAA Chart Users’ Guide - VFR Symbology - Sectional and Terminal Area Charts\n\n37" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8656095626404054, + "doc_id": "e3ea144c72ac369b0673be461831487c8c4c85318d3f5ad374d39e91d9573f8d", + "edit_distance": 0.7937584803256446, + "f1_score": 0.927536231884058, + "meteor": 0.7458138749936841, + "precision": 0.973384030418251, + "pred_md": "employ an offset flapping hinge to increase the control effectiveness by creating a centrifugal force couple when the rotor is tilted. This is shown in figure 4.35.\n\nThe rotor is tilted by taking advantage of the gyroscopic effect of the rotor system. This effect causes a rotating mass which is disturbed about one axis to respond about another axis, as shown in figure 4.35. A forward tilt to the rotor is obtained by decreasing the pitch of the blade when at the starboard position and increasing the pitch of the blade when at the port position. The lateral dissymmetry of lift which results causes the rotor to tilt forward by the gyroscopic effect.\n\nA differential blade pitch change like this is called a cyclic.pitch change since each blade goes thr0ugh.a complete cycle of varying pitch angles as it completes one revolution of rotation about the hub. A cyclic pitch change is accomplished by the pilot by the use of the cyclic stick. The control arrangement is such that the rotor tilts in the same direction that the cyclic stick is deflected.\n\nA variation in rotor thrust is accomplished by increasing>sthe pitch of the blades simultaneously or collectively. This type of control action is called ' collective pitch' and is accomplished by the use of the collective pitch stick. In operation, the cyclic stick is analogous to the control stick of an airplane, and the collective stick is analogous to the throttle ~of an ,airplane.\n\nThere are several possibilities for longitudinal control of a tandem-rotor helicopter. A pitching moment can be produced by tilting both rotors by a cyclic pitch change in each rotor, by a differential collective pitch change that increases the thrust on one rotor and decreases it on the other, or by some combination of these methods. The two basic methods are illustrated in figure 4.36. Obviously, a change in fuselage attitude must accompany the differential collective method of longitudinal control.\n\n321\n\n## NAVWEPS DO-80T-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL\n\nAdequate pitch and lateral control effectiveness are easy to obtain in the typical helicopter and usually present no problems. The more usual problem is an excess of control effectiveness which results in an overly sensitive helicopter. The helicopter control specifications attempt to assure satisfactory control characteristics by requiring adequate margins of control travel and effectiveness without objectionable sensitivity.\n\nDirectional control in a single rotor helicopter is obtained by a tail rotor (antitorque rotor) since a conventional aerodynamic surface would not be effective at low speeds or hovering. The directional control requirements of the tail rotor on a typical shaft-driven helicopter are quite demanding since it must counteract the engine torque being supplied to the main rotor as well as provide directional control. Being a rotor in every respect, the tail rotor requires some of the engine power to generate its control forces. Unfortunately, the maximum demands of the tail rotor occur at conditions when engine power is also in great demand. The most critical condition is while hovering at maximum gross weight. The tail rotor effectiveness is determined by the rotor characteristics and the distance the tail rotor is behind the c.g. The control specifications require the helicopter to be able to turn in the most critical direction at some specified rate while hovering at maximum gross weight in a specified wind condition. Also, it is required that the helicopter have sufficient directional control to fly sideways up to 30 knots, an important requirement for plane guard duties.\n\nThe directional control requirements are easily met by a tip-driven helicopter since the directional control does not have to counter the engine torque.\n\nDirectional control of a tandem-rotor helicopter is accomplished by differential cyclic control of the main rotors. For a pedal turn to the starboard, the forward rotor is tilted to the starboard and the rear rotor is tilted to port, creating a turning moment as shown in", + "recall": 0.8858131487889274, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS DO-80T-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL \n\nAdequate pitch and lateral control effective- ness are easy to obtain in the typical helicopter and usually present no problems. The more usual problem is an excess of control effective- ness which results in an overly sensitive heli- copter. The helicopter control specifications attempt to assure satisfactory control charac- teristics by requiring adequate margins of con- trol travel and effectiveness without objection- able sensitivity. Directional control in a single rotor heli- \n\nemploy an offset flapping hinge to increase the control effectiveness by creating a centrifugal force couple when the rotor is tilted. This is shown in figure 4.35. The rotor is tilted by taking advantage of \n\nshown in figure 4.35. The rotor is tilted by taking advantage of the gyroscopic effect of the rotor system. This effect causes a rotating mass which is disturbed about one axis to respond about another axis, as shown in figure 4.35. A forward tilt to the rotor is obtained by decreasing the pitch of the blade when at the starboard position and in- creasing the pitch of the blade when at the port position. The lateral dissymmetry of lift which results causes the rotor to tilt for- ward by the gyroscopic effect. \n\nable sensitivity. Directional control in a single rotor heli- copter is obtained by a tail rotor (antitorque rotor) since a conventional aerodynamic sur- face would not be effective at low speeds or hovering. The directional control require- ments of the tail rotor on a typical shaft-driven helicopter are quite demanding since it must counteract the engine torque being supplied to the main rotor as well as provide directional control. Being a rotor in every respect, the tail rotor requires some of the engine power to generate its control forces. Unfortunately, the maximum demands of the tail rotor occur at conditions when engine power is also in great demand. The most critical condition is while hovering at maximum gross weight. The tail rotor effectiveness is determined by the rotor characteristics and the distance the tail rotor is behind the c.g. The control specifications require the helicopter to be able to turn in the most critical direction at some specified rate while hovering at maximum gross weight in a specified wind condition. Also, it is required that the helicopter have sufficient directional control to fly sideways up to 30 knots, an important requirement for plane guard duties. \n\nA differential blade pitch change like this is called a cyclic.pitch change since each blade goes thr0ugh.a complete cycle of varying pitch angles as it completes one revolution of rota- tion about the hub. A cyclic pitch change is accomplished by the pilot by the use of the cyclic stick. The control arrangement is such that the rotor tilts in the same direction that the cyclic stick is deflected. \n\nA variation in rotor thrust is accomplished by increasing>sthe pitch of the blades simul- taneously or collectively. This type of control action is called “collective pitch” and is ac- complished by the use of the collective pitch stick. In operation, the cyclic stick is an- alogous to the control stick of an airplane, and the collective stick is analogous to the throttle ~of an ,airplane. \n\nThe directional control requirements are easily met by a tip-driven helicopter since the directional control does not have to counter the engine torque. \n\nThere are several possibilities for longi- tudinal control of a tandem-rotor helicopter. A pitching moment can be produced by tilting both rotors by a cyclic pitch change in each rotor, by a differential collective pitch change that increases the thrust on one rotor and de- creases it on the other, or by some combination of these methods. The two basic methods are illustrated in figure 4.36. Obviously, a change in fuselage attitude must accompany the dif- ferential collective method of longitudinal control. \n\nDirectional control of a tandem-rotor heli- copter is accomplished by differential cyclic control of the main rotors. For a pedal turn to the starboard, the forward rotor is tilted to the starboard and the rear rotor is tilted to port, creating a turning moment as shown in \n\n321" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.007914074396923057, + "doc_id": "d27d66c82be9f1e2afef95359af626830e9b92a1c16fb95f7421ac938a7f011e", + "edit_distance": 0.9180327868852459, + "f1_score": 0.4444444444444444, + "meteor": 0.458279290964116, + "precision": 0.3, + "pred_md": "TABLE OF CONTENTS\n\nTABLE OF CONTENTS\n\n| AIRPORT DIAGRAM/AIRPORT SKETCH ..............................................................................122 |\n|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|\n| PLANVIEW SYMBOLS............................................................................................................123 |\n| PROFILE VIEW .......................................................................................................................125 |\n| COLD TEMPERATURE AIRPORTS........................................................................................126 |\n| REFERENCES .................................................................................................. 127 |\n| ABBREVIATIONS ............................................................................................. 129 |\n\n5\n\nFAA Chart Users' Guide - Table of Contents", + "recall": 0.8571428571428571, + "true_md": "## TABLE OF CONTENTS\n\nFAA Chart Users’ Guide - Table of Contents\n\n5" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.16281682368636857, + "doc_id": "db7e5e7a85cf54fd5c3dd4e24e893b659ffb1b526911eebcc2d9631a33b1302d", + "edit_distance": 0.8175182481751825, + "f1_score": 0.3928571428571428, + "meteor": 0.6345805960201848, + "precision": 0.24719101123595505, + "pred_md": "FAA Chart Users' Guide - VFR Symbology - Sectional and Terminal Area Charts\n\n## NAVIGATIONAL AND PROCEDURAL INFORMATION (Continued)\n\n## Chart Limits\n\nOutline on Sectional of Terminal Area Chart\n\nTAC\n\nOutline of Special Chart on Sectional and Terminal Area Chart\n\nOutline on Sectional of Inset Chart\n\n## CULTURE\n\n## Railroads\n\nSingle Track\n\nDouble Track\n\nMore Than Two Tracks\n\nElectric\n\nNon-operating, Abandoned or Under Construction\n\nRoads\n\nDual-Lane Divided Highway Category 1\n\nPrimary Category 2\n\nSecondary Category 2\n\nTrails\n\nCategory 3\n\n## Railroad Yards\n\nLimiting Track To Scale\n\nLocation Only\n\nRailroad Stations\n\nRailroad Sidings and Short Spurs\n\nRoad Markers\n\nInterstate Route No.\n\nU.S. Route No.\n\nAir Marked Identification Label\n\nRoad Names\n\nRoads Under Construction\n\nProvides symbolization for dismantled railroad when combined with label 'dismantled railroad.'\n\n34", + "recall": 0.9565217391304348, + "true_md": "34\n\nFAA Chart Users’ Guide - VFR Symbology - Sectional and Terminal Area Charts\n\n## NAVIGATIONAL AND PROCEDURAL INFORMATION (Continued)\n\n## Chart Limits" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8950216197118764, + "doc_id": "56c836571f3a76178977477c2157c43b5b64b6466538dcb330b9cabb02a32df0", + "edit_distance": 0.5148247978436657, + "f1_score": 0.9586466165413535, + "meteor": 0.7931434322447741, + "precision": 0.9845559845559846, + "pred_md": "flow and negative stall regions similar to the powered flight condition.\n\nAutorotation is essentially a stable flight condition. If external disturbances cause the rotor to slow down, the autorotation region of the disc automatically expands to restore the rotor speed to the original equilibrium condition. On the other hand, if an external disturbance causes the rotor to speed up, the propeller region automatically expands and tends to accelerate the rotor to the original equilibrium condition. Actually the stable autorotation condition will exist only when the autorotational speed is within certain limits. If the rotor speed is allowed to slow some excessive amount, then the rotor becomes unstable and the RPM will decrease even further unless the pilot immediately corrects the condition by proper control action.\n\nIn case of engine failure, the fixed-wing airplane will be glided at maximum lift-drag ratio to produce maximum glide distance. If minimum rate of descent is desired in power-off flight rather than maximum glide distance, the fixed-wing airplane will be flown at some lower airspeed. Actually, the minimum rate of descent will occur at minimum power required. The helicopter exhibits similar characteristics but ordinarily the best autorota~tion speed may be considered that speed that results in the minimum rate of descent rather than maximum glide distance. The aerodynamic condition of the rotor which produces minimum rate of descent is:\n\n## Maximum ratio of\n\n(Mean blade lift coetIicient)3' Mean blade drag coefficient\n\nIt is this ratio which determines the autorotation rate of descent. Figure 6.18 illustrates the variation of autorotation rate of descent with equivalent airspeed for a typical helicopter. Point A on this curve defines the point which produces autorotation with minimum rate of descent. Maximum glide distance\n\n## NAVWEPS OO-BOT-BO APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYl,NG\n\nduring autorotation descent would be obtained at the flight condition which produces the greatest proportion between airspeed and rate of descent. Thus, a straight line from the origin tangent to the curve will define the point for maximum autorotative glide distance. This corresponds to Point B of figure 6.18. If the helicopter is being glided at the speed for maximum glide distance, a decrease in airspeed would reduce the rate of descent but the glide distance would decrease. If the helicopter is being glided at the speed for minimum rate of descent, the rate of descent (steady state) can not be reduced but the glide distance can be increased by increasing the glide speed to that for maximum distance. Weight and wind affect the glide characteristics of a helicopter the same way an airplane is affected. Ideally, the helicopter autorotates at a higher equivalent airspeed at higher gross weight or when autorotating into a headwind.\n\nIn addition to aerodynamic forces which act on the rotor during autorotation, inertia forces are also important. These effects are usually associated with the pilot' s response time because the rate a pilot reacts to a power failure is quite critical. The time necessary to reduce collective pitch and enter autorotation becomes critical if the rotor inertia characteristics are such as to allow the rotor to slow down to a dangerous level before the pilot can react. With power on, the blade pitch is relatively high and the engine supplies enough torque to overcome the drag of the blades. At the instant of power failure the blades are at a high pitch with high drag. If there is no engine torque to maintain the RPM, the rotor will decelerate depending on the rotor torque and rotor inertia. If the rotor has high rotational energy the rotor will lose RPM less rapidly, giving the pilot more time to reduce collective pitch and enter autorotation. If the rotor has low rotational energy, the rotor will lose RPM rapidly and the pilot may not be able to react quickly enough to prevent a serious loss of rotor RPM. Once the collective pitch is at", + "recall": 0.9340659340659341, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OO-BOT-BO APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYl,NG \n\nflow and negative stall regions similar to the powered flight condition. \n\nAutorotation is essentially a stable flight condition. If external disturbances cause the rotor to slow down, the autorotation region of the disc automatically expands to restore the rotor speed to the original equilibrium condi- tion. On the other hand, if an external disturbance causes the rotor to speed up, the propeller region automatically expands and tends to accelerate the rotor to the original equilibrium condition. Actually the stable autorotation condition will exist only when the autorotational speed is within certain limits. If the rotor speed is allowed to slow some excessive amount, then the rotor becomes unstable and the RPM will decrease even further unless the pilot immediately corrects the condition by proper control action. In case of engine failure, the fixed-wing \n\nduring autorotation descent would be obtained at the flight condition which produces the greatest proportion between airspeed and rate of descent. Thus, a straight line from the origin tangent to the curve will define the point for maximum autorotative glide dis- tance. This corresponds to Point B of figure 6.18. If the helicopter is being glided at the speed for maximum glide distance, a decrease in airspeed would reduce the rate of descent but the glide distance would decrease. If the helicopter is being glided at the speed for minimum rate of descent, the rate of descent (steady state) can not be reduced but the glide distance can be increased by increasing the glide speed to that for maximum distance. Weight and wind affect the glide character- istics of a helicopter the same way an airplane is affected. Ideally, the helicopter autorotates at a higher equivalent airspeed at higher gross weight or when autorotating into a headwind. In addition to aerodynamic forces which act \n\nthe condition by proper control action. In case of engine failure, the fixed-wing airplane will be glided at maximum lift-drag ratio to produce maximum glide distance. If minimum rate of descent is desired in power-off flight rather than maximum glide distance, the fixed-wing airplane will be flown at some lower airspeed. Actually, the minimum rate of descent will occur at minimum power required. The helicopter exhibits similar char- acteristics but ordinarily the best autorota~tion speed may be considered that speed that results in the minimum rate of descent rather than maximum glide distance. The aerodynamic condition of the rotor which produces mini- mum rate of descent is: \n\nweight or when autorotating into a headwind. In addition to aerodynamic forces which act on the rotor during autorotation, inertia forces are also important. These effects are usually associated with the pilot ’ s response time be- cause the rate a pilot reacts to a power failure is quite critical. The time necessary to reduce collective pitch and enter autorotation be- comes critical if the rotor inertia characteristics are such as to allow the rotor to slow down to a dangerous level before the pilot can react. With power on, the blade pitch is relatively high and the engine supplies enough torque to overcome the drag of the blades. At the instant of power failure the blades are at a high pitch with high drag. If there is no engine torque to maintain the RPM, the rotor will decelerate depending on the rotor torque and rotor inertia. If the rotor has high rotational energy the rotor will lose RPM less rapidly, giving the pilot more time to reduce collective pitch and enter autorotation. If the rotor has low rotational energy, the rotor will lose RPM rapidly and the pilot may not be able to react quickly enough to prevent a serious loss of rotor RPM. Once the collective pitch is at \n\nIt is this ratio which determines the auto- rotation rate of descent. Figure 6.18 illus- trates the variation of autorotation rate of descent with equivalent airspeed for a typical helicopter. Point A on this curve defines the point which produces autorotation with mini- mum rate of descent. Maximum glide distance \n\nMaximum ratio of \n\n(Mean blade lift coetIicient)3” Mean blade drag coefficient" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8484983894516746, + "doc_id": "4fc59861d805dcd51b8afadc05a2681624e2c14d8ff607f1c4de25698be86d14", + "edit_distance": 0.5236768802228412, + "f1_score": 0.9112903225806452, + "meteor": 0.6929740918787347, + "precision": 0.9300411522633745, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS OO-SOT-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE\n\nThe forces acting on the airplane during a climb are shown by the illustration of figure 2.21. When the airplane is in steady flight with moderate angle of climb, the vertical component of lift is very nearly the same as the actual lift. Such climbing flight would exist with the lift very nearly equal to the weight. The net thrust of the powerplant may be inclined relative to the flight path but this effect will be neglectec! for the sake of simplicity. Note that the weight of the aircraft is vertical but a component of weight will act aft along the flight path.\n\nIf it is assumed that the aircraft is in a steady climb with essentially small inclination of the flight path, the summation of forces along the flight path resolves to the following:\n\nForces forward= Forces aft\n\nwhere\n\nT= thrust available, lbs.\n\nD= drag, lbs.\n\nW= weight, lbs.\n\nv=flight path inclination or angle ,of climb, degrees (' gamma' )\n\nThis basic relationship neglects some of the factors which may be of importance for airplanes of very high climb performance. For example, a more detailed consideration would account for the inclination of thrust from the flight path, lift not equal to weight, subsequent change of induced drag, etc. However, this basic relationship will define the principal factors affecting climb performance. With this relationship established by the condition of equilibrium, the following relationship exists to express the trigonometric sine of the climb angle, y:\n\n\n\nThis relationship simply states that, for a given weight airplane, the angle of climb (7)\n\ndepends on the difference between thrust and drag (T-D), or excess thrust. Of course, when the excess thrust is zero (T-D=0 or T=D), the inclination of, the flight path is zero-and the airplane is in steady, level flight. When the thrust is greater than the drag, the excess thrust will allow a climb angle depending on the value of excess thrust. Also, when the thrust is less than the drag. the deficiency of thrust will allow an angle ~of descent.\n\nThe most i mmediate interest in the climb angle performance involves obstacle clearance. The maximum angle of climb would occur where there exists the greatest difference betweenthrust available and thrust required, i.e., maximum (T-D). Figure 2.21 illustrates the climb angle performance with the curves of thrust available and thrust required versus velocity. The thrust required, or drag, curve is nss,~pued o be ppw=n*~r;.rP c ' I t nc CnmP +-+a! y.' ..I' ..&. ' ' IILL ' , y airplane configuration which could be powered by either a turbojet or propeller type powerplant. The thrust available curves included are for a characteristic propeller powerplant and jet powerplant operating at maximum output.\n\nThe thrust curves for the representative propeller aircraft show the typical propeller thrust which is high at low velocities and decreases with an. increase in velocity. For the propeiler powered airplane, the maximum excess thrust and angle of climb will occur at some speed just above the stall speed. Thus, if it is necessary to clear an obstacle after takeoff, the propeller powered airplane will attain maximum angle of climb at an airspeed conveniently close to-if not at-the takeoff speed.\n\nThe thrust curves for the representative jet aircraft show the typ~ical turbojet thrust which is very nearly constant ~with speed. If the thrust available is essentially constant with speed, the maximum excess thrust and angle of climb will occur where the thrust required\n\n152", + "recall": 0.8932806324110671, + "true_md": "152 \n\nNAVWEPS OO-SOT-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE \n\nThe forces acting on the airplane during a climb are shown by the illustration of figure 2.21. When the airplane is in steady flight with moderate angle of climb, the vertical component of lift is very nearly the same as the actual lift. Such climbing flight would exist with the lift very nearly equal to the weight. The net thrust of the powerplant may be in- clined relative to the flight path but this effect will be neglectec! for the sake of simplicity. Note that the weight of the aircraft is vertical but a component of weight will act aft along the flight path. If it is assumed that the aircraft is in a steady \n\nthe flight path. If it is assumed that the aircraft is in a steady climb with essentially small inclination of the flight path, the summation of forces along the flight path resolves to the following: \n\ndepends on the difference between thrust and drag (T-D), or excess thrust. Of course, when the excess thrust is zero (T-D=0 or T=D), the inclination of, the flight path is zero-and the airplane is in steady, level flight. When the thrust is greater than the drag, the excess thrust will allow a climb angle depend- ing on the value of excess thrust. Also, when the thrust is less than the drag. the deficiency of thrust will allow an angle ~of descent. The most immediate interest in the climb \n\nof thrust will allow an angle ~of descent. The most immediate interest in the climb angle performance involves obstacle clearance. The maximum angle of climb would occur where there exists the greatest difference be- tweenthrust available and thrust required, i.e., maximum (T-D). Figure 2.21 illustrates the climb angle performance with the curves of thrust available and thrust required versus velocity. The thrust required, or drag, curve is nss,~pued to be ppw=n*~r;.rP nc CnmP +-+a! y.“- ..I ‘ ..&. c “I ““IILL ‘ , y airplane configuration which could be powered by either a turbojet or propeller type power- plant. The thrust available curves included are for a characteristic propeller powerplant and jet powerplant operating at maximum output. The thrust curves for the representative pro- \n\noutput. The thrust curves for the representative pro- peller aircraft show the typical propeller thrust which is high at low velocities and decreases with an. increase in velocity. For the pro- peiler powered airplane, the maximum excess thrust and angle of climb will occur at some speed just above the stall speed. Thus, if it is necessary to clear an obstacle after takeoff, the propeller powered airplane will attain maximum angle of climb at an airspeed con- veniently close to-if not at-the takeoff speed. \n\nThe thrust curves for the representative jet aircraft show the typ~ical turbojet thrust which is very nearly constant ~with speed. If the thrust available is essentially constant with speed, the maximum excess thrust and angle of climb will occur where the thrust required \n\nThis basic relationship neglects some of the factors which may be of importance for air- planes of very high climb performance. For example, a more detailed consideration would account for the inclination of thrust from the flight path, lift not equal to weight, subse- quent change of induced drag, etc. However, this basic relationship will define the principal factors affecting climb performance. With this relationship established by the condition of equilibrium, the following relationship exists to express the trigonometric sine of the climb angle, y: \n\nwhere \n\nForces forward= Forces aft \n\nT= thrust available, lbs. D= drag, lbs. W= weight, lbs. v=flight path inclination or angle ,of climb, degrees (“gamma”) \n\nThis relationship simply states that, for a given weight airplane, the angle of climb (7) \n\n$$T-D sin y=- W $$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.799692145234429, + "doc_id": "5eed1ff3924600881147a2508cc41440cf24c32dd1a8775980f4d47e66ea8ad0", + "edit_distance": 0.7464183381088825, + "f1_score": 0.9065606361829025, + "meteor": 0.6506018778420486, + "precision": 0.9539748953974896, + "pred_md": "there is no unbalance of pitching, yawing, or rolling moment. If the airplane traverses a sharp wind shear equivalent to a horizontal gust, the resulting change in airspeed will disturb such an equilibrium. For example, if the airplane encounrers a sharp horizontal gust which reduces the airspeed 20percent,the new airspeed (80 percent of the original value) produces lift and drag at the same angle of attack which are 64 percent of the original value. The change in these aerodynamic forces would cause the airplane to accelerate in the direction of resultant unbalance of force. That is, the airplane would accelerate down and forward until a new equilibrium is achieved. In addition, there would be a change in pitching moment which would produce a response of the airplane in pitch.\n\nThe response of the airplane to a horizontal gust will differ according to the gust gradient and airplane characccristics. Gmcrally, if the airplane encounters a sharp wind shear which reduces the airspeed, the airplane tends to sink and incur a loss of altitude ' before equilibrium conditions are achieved. Similarly, if the airplane encounters a sharp wind shear which increases the airspeed, the airplane tends to float and incur a gain of altitude before equilibrium conditions are achieved.\n\nSignificant vertical and horizontal gusts may be due to the terrain or atmospheric conditions. The proximity' of an unstable front or thunderstorm activity' in the vicinity of the airfield is likely to create significant wind shear and gust activity at low altitude. During gusty conditions every effort must be made for precise control of airspeed and flight path and any changes due to gusts must be corrected by proper control action. Under extreme gusts conditions, it may be advisable to utilize approach, landing, and takeoff speeds slightly greater than normal to provide margin for adequate control.\n\n## POWER-OFF GLIDE PERFORMANCE\n\nThe gliding performance of an airplane is of special interest for the single-engine airplane\n\n369\n\n## NAVWEPS O&ROT-80 APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYING\n\nin the case of powerplant failure or malfunction. When a powerplant failure or malfunction occurs, it is usually of interest to obtain a gliding flight path which results in the minimum glide angle. The minimum glide angle will produce the greatest proportion of glide distance to altitude loss and will result in maximum glide range or minimum expenditure of altitude for a specific glide distance.\n\nGLIDE ANGLE AND LIFT-DRAG RATIO. In the study of climb performance, the forces acting on the airplane in a steady climb (or glide) produce the following relationship:\n\nwhere\n\n\n\nIn the case of power-off glide performance, the thrust, T, is zero and the relationship reduces to:\n\n\n\nBy this relationship it is evident that the minimum angle of glide-or minimum negative climb angle-is obtained at the aerodynamic conditions which incur the minimum total drag. Since the airplane lift is essentially equal to the weight, the minimum angle of glide will be obtained when the airplane is operated at maximum lift-drag ratio, (L/D)ma,. When the angle of glide is relatively small, the ratio of glide distance to glide altitude is numerically equal to the airplane lift-drag ratio.\n\n\n\n\n\nFigure 6.6 illustrates the forces acting on the airplane in a power-off glide. The equilibrium of the steady glide is obtained when the summation of forces in the vertical and horizontal directions is equal to zeta.", + "recall": 0.8636363636363636, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS O&ROT-80 APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYING \n\nin the case of powerplant failure or malfunc- tion. When a powerplant failure or malfunc- tion occurs, it is usually of interest to obtain a gliding flight path which results in the mini- mum glide angle. The minimum glide angle will produce the greatest proportion of glide distance to altitude loss and will result in maximum glide range or minimum expendi- ture of altitude for a specific glide distance. GLIDE ANGLE AND LIFT-DRAG RATIO. \n\nIn the study of climb performance, the forces acting on the airplane in a steady climb (or glide) produce the following relationship: \n\nthere is no unbalance of pitching, yawing, or rolling moment. If the airplane traverses a sharp wind shear equivalent to a horizontal gust, the resulting change in airspeed will disturb such an equilibrium. For example, if the airplane encounrers a sharp horizontal gust which reduces the airspeed 20percent,the new airspeed (80 percent of the original value) produces lift and drag at the same angle of attack which are 64 percent of the original value. The change in these aerodynamic forces would cause the airplane to accelerate in the direction of resultant unbalance of force. That is, the airplane would accelerate down and forward until a new equilibrium is achieved. In addition, there would be a change in pitching moment which would produce a response of the airplane in pitch. \n\n## ture of altitude for a specific glide distance. GLIDE ANGLE AND LIFT-DRAG RATIO.\n\nThe response of the airplane to a horizontal gust will differ according to the gust gradient and airplane characccristics. Gmcrally, if the airplane encounters a sharp wind shear which reduces the airspeed, the airplane tends to sink and incur a loss of altitude ‘ before equilibrium conditions are achieved. Similarly, if the airplane encounters a sharp wind shear which increases the airspeed, the airplane tends to float and incur a gain of altitude before equilib- rium conditions are achieved. \n\nIn the case of power-off glide performance, the thrust, T, is zero and the relationship reduces to: D \n\nwhere \n\nY=: angle of climb, degrees T-thrust, lbs. D-drag, lbs. W=: lbs. \n\nBy this relationship it is evident that the mini- mum angle of glide-or minimum negative climb angle-is obtained at the aerodynamic conditions which incur the minimum total drag. Since the airplane lift is essentially equal to the weight, the minimum angle of glide will be obtained when the airplane is operated at maximum lift-drag ratio, (L/D)ma,. When the angle of glide is relatively small, the ratio of glide distance to glide altitude is numeri- cally equal to the airplane lift-drag ratio. \n\nSignificant vertical and horizontal gusts may be due to the terrain or atmospheric conditions. The proximity ’ of an unstable front or thunder- storm activity ’ in the vicinity of the airfield is likely to create significant wind shear and gust activity at low altitude. During gusty condi- tions every effort must be made for precise con- trol of airspeed and flight path and any changes due to gusts must be corrected by proper con- trol action. Under extreme gusts conditions, it may be advisable to utilize approach, land- ing, and takeoff speeds slightly greater than normal to provide margin for adequate control. \n\nFigure 6.6 illustrates the forces acting on the airplane in a power-off glide. The equilibrium of the steady glide is obtained when the sum- mation of forces in the vertical and horizontal directions is equal to zeta. \n\nThe gliding performance of an airplane is of special interest for the single-engine airplane \n\n$$glide ratio= glide distance, ft. glide altitude, ft. glide ratio = (L/D) $$\n\n$$D sin y= -- W $$\n\n## POWER-OFF GLIDE PERFORMANCE\n\n369" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8816374243445608, + "doc_id": "25e6642b2b12aaf4a27d7628ab4e4b05170656f0ef0dd8fa6f6b2e80a4f55fa5", + "edit_distance": 0.08551724137931034, + "f1_score": 0.9171717171717171, + "meteor": 0.9289660240230299, + "precision": 0.9380165289256198, + "pred_md": "greatest importance at low speeds and practically insignificant in flight at high dynamic pressures. For example, a typical single engine jet airplane at low altitude and maximum level flight airspeed has an induced drag which is less than 1 pcrccont f the total o drag. However, this same airplane in steady flight just above the stall speed could have an induced drag which is approximately 75 pnrcnt of the total drag.\n\nEFFECT OF ASPECT RATIO. The effect of aspect ratio on the induced drag\n\nis the principal effect of the wing planform. The relationship for induced drag coefIicient emphasizes the need of a high aspect ratio for the airplane which is continually operated at high lift coefficients. In other words, airplane configurations designed to operate at high lift coefficients during the major portion of their flight (sailplanes, cargo, transport; patrol, and antisubmarine types) demand a high aspect ratio wing to minimize the induced drag. While the high aspect ratio wing will minimize induced drag, long, thin wings increase structural weight and have relatively poor stiffness characteristics. This fact will temper the preference for a very high aspect ratio. Airplane configurations which are developed for very high speed flight (esspecially supersonic flight) operate at relatively low lift coefficients and demand great aerodynamic cleanness. These configurations of airplanes do not have the same preference for high aspect ratio as the airplanes which operate continually at high lift coefficients. This usually results in the development of low aspect ratio planforms for these airplane configurations.\n\nThe effect of aspect ratio on the lift and drag characteristics is shown in figure 1.31 for wings of a basic 9 percent symmetrical section. The basic airfoil section properties are shown on these curves and these properties would be\n\n71\n\nNAVWEPS OD-SOT-BO BASIC AERODYNAMICS\n\ntypical only of a wing planform of extremely high (infinite) aspect ratio. When a wing of some finite aspect ratio is constructed of this basic section, the principal differences will be in the lift and drag characteristics-the moment characteristics remain essentially the same. The effect of decreasing aspect ratio on the lift curve is to increase the wing angle of attack necessary to produce a given lift coefficient. The difference between the wing angle of attack and the section angle of attack is the induced angle of attack, orit18.24 L AR'\n\nwhich increases with decreasing aspect ratio. The wing with the lower aspect ratio is less sensitive to changes in angle of attack and requires higher angles of attack for maximum lift. When the aspect ratio is very low (below 3 or 6) the induced angles of attack are not accurately predicted by the elementary equation for 01~ nd the graph of C, versus 01 evelops a d distinct curvature. This effect is especially true at high lift coefhcients where the lift curve for the very low aspect ratio wing is very shallow and CLand stall angle of attack are less sharply defined.\n\nThe effect of aspect ratio on wing drag char-. acteristics may be appreciated from inspection of figure 1.31. The basic section properties are shown as the drag characteristics of an infinite aspect ratio wing. When a planform of some finite aspect ratio is constructed, the wing drag coefficient is the rtlm of the induced drag coe&c,' cient, C,,=O.318 AR, and the section drag co-\n\nefhcient. Decreasing aspect ratio increases the wing drag coefficient at any lift coefficient since the induced drag coefficient varies inversely with aspect ratio. When the aspect ratio is very low, the induced drag varies greatly with lift and at high lift coefficients, the induced drag is very high and increases very rapidly with lift coefficient.\n\nWhile the effect of aspect ratio on lift curve slope and drag due to lift is an important relationship, it must be realized that design for", + "recall": 0.8972332015810277, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OD-SOT-BO BASIC AERODYNAMICS \n\ngreatest importance at low speeds and prac- tically insignificant in flight at high dynamic pressures. For example, a typical single en- gine jet airplane at low altitude and maximum level flight airspeed has an induced drag which is less than 1 pcrccont of the total drag. How- ever, this same airplane in steady flight just above the stall speed could have an induced drag which is approximately 75 pnrcnt of the total drag. EFFECT OF ASPECT RATIO. The effect \n\ntotal drag. EFFECT OF ASPECT RATIO. The effect of aspect ratio on the induced drag \n\nis the principal effect of the wing planform. The relationship for induced drag coefIicient emphasizes the need of a high aspect ratio for the airplane which is continually operated at high lift coefficients. In other words, airplane configurations designed to operate at high lift coefficients during the major portion of their flight (sailplanes, cargo, transport; patrol, and antisubmarine types) demand a high aspect ratio wing to minimize the induced drag. While the high aspect ratio wing will minimize induced drag, long, thin wings increase structural weight and have relatively poor stiffness characteristics. This fact will temper the preference for a very high aspect ratio. Airplane configurations which are developed for very high speed flight (es- specially supersonic flight) operate at relatively low lift coefficients and demand great aero- dynamic cleanness. These configurations of airplanes do not have the same preference for high aspect ratio as the airplanes which op- erate continually at high lift coefficients. This usually results in the development of low aspect ratio planforms for these airplane con- figurations. \n\nThe effect of aspect ratio on the lift and drag characteristics is shown in figure 1.31 for wings of a basic 9 percent symmetrical section. The basic airfoil section properties are shown on these curves and these properties would be \n\n71 \n\ntypical only of a wing planform of extremely high (infinite) aspect ratio. When a wing of some finite aspect ratio is constructed of this basic section, the principal differences will be in the lift and drag characteristics-the mo- ment characteristics remain essentially the same. The effect of decreasing aspect ratio on the lift curve is to increase the wing angle of attack necessary to produce a given lift co- efficient. The difference between the wing angle of attack and the section angle of attack \n\nis the induced angle of attack, orit18.24 L AR’ which increases with decreasing aspect ratio. \n\nAR’ which increases with decreasing aspect ratio. The wing with the lower aspect ratio is less sensitive to changes in angle of attack and re- quires higher angles of attack for maximum lift. When the aspect ratio is very low (below 3 or 6) the induced angles of attack are not accurately predicted by the elementary equa- tion for 01~ and the graph of C, versus 01 develops distinct curvature. This effect is especially true at high lift coefhcients where the lift curve for the very low aspect ratio wing is very shallow and CL- and stall angle of attack are less sharply defined. \n\nThe effect of aspect ratio on wing drag char-. acteristics may be appreciated from inspection of figure 1.31. The basic section properties are shown as the drag characteristics of an infinite aspect ratio wing. When a planform of some finite aspect ratio is constructed, the wing drag coefficient is the rtlm of the induced drag coe&- \n\nc,” cient, C,,=O.318 AR, and the section drag co- \n\nefhcient. Decreasing aspect ratio increases the wing drag coefficient at any lift coefficient since the induced drag coefficient varies inversely with aspect ratio. When the aspect ratio is very low, the induced drag varies greatly with lift and at high lift coefficients, the induced drag is very high and increases very rapidly with lift coefficient. \n\nWhile the effect of aspect ratio on lift curve slope and drag due to lift is an important re- lationship, it must be realized that design for" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.09400695323607489, + "doc_id": "c1cc3f27c9ef643cedb3c539c593fdbdc41110320e2e77a5191302ed980a9837", + "edit_distance": 0.9698492462311558, + "f1_score": 0.2956521739130435, + "meteor": 0.4406130268199234, + "precision": 0.17708333333333334, + "pred_md": "## AIRSPACE INFORMATION (Continued)\n\n## Airspace - U.S.\n\nClass A\n\nOpen Area (White)\n\nHigh Chart Only\n\nControlled Airspace\n\nThat airspace from 18,000' MSL to and including FL 600, including the airspace overflying the waters within 12 NM of the coast of the contiguous United States and Alaska and designated offshore areas, excluding Santa Barbara Island, Farallon Island, the airspace south of latitude 25° 04'00' N, the Alaska peninsula west of longitude 160°00'00' W, and the airspace less than 1,500' AGL.\n\nThat airspace from 18,000' MSL to and including FL 450, including Santa Barbara Island, Farallon Island, the Alaska peninsula west of longitude 160°00'00' W, and designated offshore areas.\n\n## Class B\n\n## Mode C Area\n\nA Solid Blue Outline\n\nLow Chart Only\n\nControlled\n\nAirspace\n\nThat airspace within 30 NM of the primary airports of Class B airspace and within 10 NM of designated airports. Mode-C transponder equipment is required. (See FAR 91.215) See Chart example above.\n\nExample:\n\n83\n\nFAA Chart Users' Guide - IFR Enroute Symbology", + "recall": 0.8947368421052632, + "true_md": "83\n\nFAA Chart Users’ Guide - IFR Enroute Symbology\n\n## AIRSPACE INFORMATION (Continued)\n\n## Airspace - U.S." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8367020835407314, + "doc_id": "dbf8150b85c06fa945bf2e5381caec2bd31bfbc72566932cb43b16dd6ecbf0f2", + "edit_distance": 0.5769745649263721, + "f1_score": 0.9271523178807948, + "meteor": 0.7559441969011682, + "precision": 0.9655172413793104, + "pred_md": "The range sf the reciprocating powered airplane can be augmented by the use of ground effect. When the airplane is close to the ground or water surface the reduction of induced drag increases the maximum lift-drag ratio and causes a corresponding increase in range. Of course, the airplane must be quite close to the surface to obtain a noticeable increase in (L/D),., and range. The difficulty in holding the airplane at the precise altitude without contacting the ground or water will preclude the use of ground effect during ordinary flying operations. The use of ground effect to extend range should be reserved as a final measure in case of emergency. Because of the very detrimental effect of low altitude on the range of the turbojet, ground effect will not be of a particular advantage in an attempt to augment range.\n\nThe most outstanding examples of the use of ground effect are shown in the cases of multiengine airplanes with some engines inoperative. When the power loss is quite severe, the airplane may not be capable of sustaining altitude and will descend. As ground effect is encountered, the reduced power required may allow the airplane to sustain flight at extremely low altitude with the remaining powerplants functioning. In ground effect, the reciprocating powered airplane will encounter a greater (L/D),, which occurs at a lower airspeed and power required and the increase in range may be quite important during emergency conditions.\n\n## INTERFERENCE BETWEEN AIRPLANES IN FLIGHT\n\nDuring formation flying and inflight refueling, airplanes in proximity to one another will produce a mutual interference of the flow patterns and alter the aerodynamic characteristics of each airplane. The principal effects of this interference must be appreciated since certain factors due to the mutual interference may enhance the possibility of a collision.\n\n383\n\n## NAVWEPS D&ROT-R0 APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC ' PROBLEMS OF FLYING\n\nOne example of interference between airplanes in flight is shown first in figure 6.10 with the effect of lateral separation of two airplanes flying in line abreast. A plane of symmetry would exist halfway between two identical airplanes and would furnish a boundary of flow across which there would be no lateral components of flow. As the two airplane wing tips are in proximity, the effect is to reduce the strength of the tip or trailing vortices and reduce the induced velocities in the vicinity of wing tip. Thus, each airplane will experience a local increase in the lift distribution as the tip vortices are reduced and a rolling moment is developed which tends to roll each airplane away from the other. This disturbance may provide the possibility of collision if other airplanes are in the vicinity and there is delay in control correction or overcontrol. If the wing tips are displaced in a fore-and-aft direction, the same effect exists but generally it is of a lower magnitude.\n\nThe magnitude of the interference effect due to lateral separation of the wing tips depends on the proximity of the wi.ig tips and the extent of induced Pov;. This implies that the interference v-r 1 e grealest when the tips are very close AL-L the airplanes are operating at high lift coefficients. An interesting ramification of this effect is that several airplanes in line abreast with the wing tips quite close will experience a reduction in induced drag.\n\nAn indirect form of interference can be encountered from the vortex system created by a preceding airplane along the intended flight path. The vortex sheet rolls up a considerable distance behind an airplane and creates considerable turbulence for any closely following airplane. This wake can prove troublesome if airplanes taking off and landing are not provided adequate separation. The rolled-up vortex sheet will be strongest when the preceding airplanes is large, high gross weight, and operating at high lift coefhcients. At times this turbulence may be falsely attributed to propwash or jetwash.", + "recall": 0.89171974522293, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS D&ROT-R0 APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC ‘ PROBLEMS OF FLYING \n\nThe range sf the reciprocating powered air- plane can be augmented by the use of ground effect. When the airplane is close to the ground or water surface the reduction of in- duced drag increases the maximum lift-drag ratio and causes a corresponding increase in range. Of course, the airplane must be quite close to the surface to obtain a noticeable in- crease in (L/D),., and range. The difficulty in holding the airplane at the precise altitude without contacting the ground or water will preclude the use of ground effect during ordi- nary flying operations. The use of ground effect to extend range should be reserved as a final measure in case of emergency. Because of the very detrimental effect of low altitude on the range of the turbojet, ground effect will not be of a particular advantage in an attempt to augment range. The most outstanding examples of the use \n\nOne example of interference between air- planes in flight is shown first in figure 6.10 with the effect of lateral separation of two airplanes flying in line abreast. A plane of symmetry would exist halfway between two identical air- planes and would furnish a boundary of flow across which there would be no lateral com- ponents of flow. As the two airplane wing tips are in proximity, the effect is to reduce the strength of the tip or trailing vortices and re- duce the induced velocities in the vicinity of wing tip. Thus, each airplane will experience a local increase in the lift distribution as the tip vortices are reduced and a rolling moment is developed which tends to roll each airplane away from the other. This disturbance may provide the possibility of collision if other air- planes are in the vicinity and there is delay in control correction or overcontrol. If the wing tips are displaced in a fore-and-aft direction, the same effect exists but generally it is of a lower magnitude. The magnitude of the interference effect due \n\nto augment range. The most outstanding examples of the use of ground effect are shown in the cases of multi- engine airplanes with some engines inoperative. When the power loss is quite severe, the air- plane may not be capable of sustaining altitude and will descend. As ground effect is en- countered, the reduced power required may allow the airplane to sustain flight at extremely low altitude with the remaining powerplants functioning. In ground effect, the recipro- cating powered airplane will encounter a greater (L/D),, which occurs at a lower air- speed and power required and the increase in range may be quite important during emer- gency conditions. \n\nlower magnitude. The magnitude of the interference effect due to lateral separation of the wing tips depends on the proximity of the wi.ig tips and the ex- tent of induced Pov;. This implies that the interference v-r 1 e grealest when the tips are very close AL-L the airplanes are operating at high lift coefficients. An interesting ramifi- cation of this effect is that several airplanes in line abreast with the wing tips quite close will experience a reduction in induced drag. \n\nAn indirect form of interference can be en- countered from the vortex system created by a preceding airplane along the intended flight path. The vortex sheet rolls up a considerable distance behind an airplane and creates consid- erable turbulence for any closely following air- plane. This wake can prove troublesome if air- planes taking off and landing are not provided adequate separation. The rolled-up vortex sheet will be strongest when the preceding air- planes is large, high gross weight, and operat- ing at high lift coefhcients. At times this tur- bulence may be falsely attributed to propwash or jetwash. \n\nDuring formation flying and inflight refuel- ing, airplanes in proximity to one another will produce a mutual interference of the flow pat- terns and alter the aerodynamic characteristics of each airplane. The principal effects of this interference must be appreciated since certain factors due to the mutual interference may enhance the possibility of a collision. \n\n## INTERFERENCE BETWEEN AIRPLANES IN FLIGHT\n\n383" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9015810046931353, + "doc_id": "3221cb93f98320e6a90a373b7b544391114862dab7f39527831f88cd8c0c2823", + "edit_distance": 0.5141242937853108, + "f1_score": 0.926923076923077, + "meteor": 0.8407897117503779, + "precision": 0.9678714859437751, + "pred_md": "warning, and preserves lateral control effectiveness at high angles of attack. Also, the airplane must maintain positive static longitudinal stability at high lift coe&ients and should demonstrate satisfactory stall recovery characteristics.\n\nIn order to visualize the principal effects of an airplane entering a spin, suppose the airplane is subjected to the rolling and yawing velocities shown in figure 4.32. The yawing velocity to the right tends to produce higher local velocities on the left wing than on the right wing. The rolling velocity tends to increase the angle of attack for the downgoing right wing (a,) and. decrease the angle of attack for the upgoing left wing (al). At airplane angles of attack below the stall this relationship produces roll due to yaw, damping in roll, etc., and some related motion of the airplane in unstalled flight. However, at angles of attack above the stall, important changes take place in the aerodynamic characteristics.\n\nFigure 4.32 illustrates the aerodynamic characteristics typical of a conventional airplane configuration, i.e., moderate or high aspect ratio and little-if any-sweepback. Ifs this airplane is provided a rolling displacement when at some angle of attack above the stall, the upgoing wing experiences a decrease in angle of attack with a corresponding increase in C, and decrease in C,,. In other words, the upgoing wing becomes less stalled. Similarly, the downgoing wing experiences an increase in angle of attack with a corresponding decrease in CL and increase in CD. Essentially, the downgoing wing becomes more stalled. Thus, the rolling motion is aided rather than resisted and a yawing moment is produced in the direction of roll. At angles of attack below stall the rolling motion is resisted by damping in roll and adverse yaw is usually present. At angles of attack above the stall, the damping in roll is negative and a rolling motion produces a rolling moment in the direction of the roll. This negative\n\n## NAVWEPS OO-BOY-BO STABIUTY AND CoMml\n\ndamping in roll is generally referred to as ' autorotation.'\n\nWhen the conventional airplane is stalk4 and some rolling-yawing displacement takes place, the resulting autotiotation rolling moments and yawing moments start the airplane into a self-sustaining rolling-yawing motion. The autorotation rolling and yawing tendencies of the airplane at high angles of attack are the principal prospin moments of the conventional airplane configuration and these tendencies accelerate the airplane into the spin until some limiting condition exists. The stabilized spin is not necessaray a simple steady vertical spiral but may involve some coupled unsteady oscillatory motion.\n\nAn important characteristic of the mote conventional airplane configuration is that the spin shows a predominating contribution of the autorotation tendency. Generally, the conventional configuration has a spin motion which is primarily rolling with moderate yaw. High directional stability is favorable since it will limit or minimize the yaw displacement of the spinning airplane.\n\nThe fundamental requirement of the spin is that the airplane be placed at an excessive angle of attack to produce the autorotation rolling and yawing tendencies. Generally speaking, the conventional airplane must be stalled .before a spin can take place. This relationship establishes a fundamental p&rciple of recovery-the airplane must be unstalled by decreasing the wing angle of attack. The most dfective procedure for the conventional configuration is to use opposite rudder to stop the sideslip, then lower the angle of attack with the elevators. With sufficient rudder power this procedure will produce a positive recovery with a minimum loss of altitude. Care should be taken during pullout from the ensuing dive to prevent excessive angle of attack and entry into another spin.\n\nIt should be appreciated that a spin is always a possible corollary of a stall and the selfsustaining motion of a spin will take place at", + "recall": 0.8892988929889298, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OO-BOY-BO STABIUTY AND CoMml \n\ndamping in roll is generally referred to as “autorotation.” \n\nwarning, and preserves lateral control effec- tiveness at high angles of attack. Also, the airplane must maintain positive static longi- tudinal stability at high lift coe&ients and should demonstrate satisfactory stall recovery characteristics. \n\nWhen the conventional airplane is stalk4 and some rolling-yawing displacement takes place, the resulting autotiotation rolling mo- ments and yawing moments start the airplane into a self-sustaining rolling-yawing motion. The autorotation rolling and yawing tenden- cies of the airplane at high angles of attack are the principal prospin moments of the conventional airplane configuration and these tendencies accelerate the airplane into the spin until some limiting condition exists. The stabilized spin is not necessaray a simple steady vertical spiral but may involve some coupled unsteady oscillatory motion. \n\nIn order to visualize the principal effects of an airplane entering a spin, suppose the air- plane is subjected to the rolling and yawing velocities shown in figure 4.32. The yawing velocity to the right tends to produce higher local velocities on the left wing than on the right wing. The rolling velocity tends to increase the angle of attack for the downgoing right wing (a,) and. decrease the angle of attack for the upgoing left wing (al). At airplane angles of attack below the stall this relationship produces roll due to yaw, damping in roll, etc., and some related motion of the airplane in unstalled flight. However, at angles of attack above the stall, important changes take place in the aerodynamic char- acteristics. Figure 4.32 illustrates the aerodynamic \n\nAn important characteristic of the mote conventional airplane configuration is that the spin shows a predominating contribution of the autorotation tendency. Generally, the conventional configuration has a spin motion which is primarily rolling with moderate yaw. High directional stability is favorable since it will limit or minimize the yaw displacement of the spinning airplane. \n\nacteristics. Figure 4.32 illustrates the aerodynamic characteristics typical of a conventional air- plane configuration, i.e., moderate or high aspect ratio and little-if any-sweepback. Ifs this airplane is provided a rolling displace- ment when at some angle of attack above the stall, the upgoing wing experiences a decrease in angle of attack with a correspond- ing increase in C, and decrease in C,,. In other words, the upgoing wing becomes less stalled. Similarly, the downgoing wing experiences an increase in angle of attack with a corre- sponding decrease in CL and increase in CD. Es- sentially, the downgoing wing becomes more stalled. Thus, the rolling motion is aided rather than resisted and a yawing moment is produced in the direction of roll. At angles of attack below stall the rolling motion is resisted by damping in roll and adverse yaw is usually present. At angles of attack above the stall, the damping in roll is negative and a rolling motion produces a rolling moment in the direction of the roll. This negative \n\nThe fundamental requirement of the spin is that the airplane be placed at an excessive angle of attack to produce the autorotation rolling and yawing tendencies. Generally speaking, the conventional airplane must be stalled .before a spin can take place. This relationship establishes a fundamental p&r- ciple of recovery-the airplane must be un- stalled by decreasing the wing angle of attack. The most dfective procedure for the conven- tional configuration is to use opposite rudder to stop the sideslip, then lower the angle of attack with the elevators. With sufficient rudder power this procedure will produce a positive recovery with a minimum loss of altitude. Care should be taken during pullout from the ensuing dive to prevent excessive angle of attack and entry into another spin. \n\nIt should be appreciated that a spin is always a possible corollary of a stall and the self- sustaining motion of a spin will take place at" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4676449106256526, + "doc_id": "2616a4734224e864b8f7b56e57125b073c02e633cdbcec312798aa763072344c", + "edit_distance": 0.5, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9088840153928911, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "figure 1.27. Effect of Reymafds Number on Section Ckacteristics of NACA 4412\n\nfigure 1.27. Effect of Reymafds Number on Section Ckacteristics of NACA 4412", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "figure 1.27. Effect of Reymafds Number on Section Ckacteristics of NACA 4412" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6341922683775969, + "doc_id": "f8bb3092863e7c407e3c8397163330aa8de1e40d481e10ee13ac1a81c7173c6e", + "edit_distance": 0.3333333333333333, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9347442680776015, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS DD-8OT-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL\n\nFigure 4.27. Static Lateral Stability\n\nFigure 4.27. Static Lateral Stability\n\n296", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS DD-8OT-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL \n\nFigure 4.27. Static Lateral Stability \n\n296" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.19329299625099786, + "doc_id": "27dc0572205545bfb3127a34fbd02b7e3abddd1d1ed89adef37573758c85fc5c", + "edit_distance": 0.8529411764705882, + "f1_score": 0.47619047619047616, + "meteor": 0.7319102353585113, + "precision": 0.3125, + "pred_md": "DOUBLE WEDGE SECTION\n\nDOUBLE WEDGE SECTION\n\nWAVE DRAG COEFFICIENT:\n\nLIFT COEFFICIENT:\n\nDRAG DUE .TO LIFT:\n\nLIFT CURVE SLOPE:\n\n## WHERE\n\n( +/c ) = AIRFOIL THICKNESS RATIO\n\na 2 ANGLE OF ATTACK (IN RADIANS)\n\nM\n\n= MACH NUMBER\n\nFigure 3.73. Approximate Equations for Supersonic Section Characteristics\n\n225\n\n## NAVWEPS 00-BOT-80 HIGH SPEED AERODYNAMICS\n\nCIRCULAR ARC SECTION\n\nCIRCULAR ARC SECTION", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-BOT-80 HIGH SPEED AERODYNAMICS \n\nFigure 3.73. Approximate Equations for Supersonic Section Characteristics \n\n225" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6734092296013665, + "doc_id": "9be748dd6b32b12876031a6b9e8b9869d3ee2aa2af8293b911eee2abe81205b7", + "edit_distance": 0.7743813682678311, + "f1_score": 0.8786610878661089, + "meteor": 0.5966706057558748, + "precision": 0.9333333333333333, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS 00-8OT-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE\n\nimportant-if not more important-as the increased stall speed in turning flight. It is important also that any turn be well coordinated to prevent the increased drag attendant to a sideslip.\n\nTURNING PERFORMANCE. The horizontal component of lift will equal the centrifugal force of steady, turning flight. This fact allows development of the following relationships of turning performance:\n\nturn radius\n\n\n\nwhere\n\n\n\nttrrn rate\n\n\n\nwhere\n\nROT=rate of turn, degrees per sec. $= bank angle, degrees v=velocity, knots, TAS\n\nThese relationships define the turn radius, I, and rate of turn, ROT, as functions of the two principal variables: bank angle, +, and velocity, I' (TAX). Thus, when the airplane is flown in the steady, coordinated turn at specific values of bank angle and velocity, the turn rate and turn radius are fixed and independent of the airplane type. As an example, an airplane in a steady, coordinated turn at a bank angle of 45' and a velocity of 250 knots (TAS) would have the following turn performance:\n\n\n\nand\n\n\n\n\n\nIf the airplane were to hold the same angle of bank at 500 knots (TAS), the turn radius would quadruple (r=22,200 ft.) and the turn rate would be one-half the original value (ROT=2.19 deg. per sec.).\n\nValues of turn radius and turn rate versus velocity are shown in figure 2.29 for various angles of bank and the corresponding load factors. The conditions are for the steady, coordinated turn at constant altitude but the results are applicable for climbing or descending flight when the angle of climb or descent is relatively small. While the effect of altitude on turning performance is not immediately apparent from these curves, the principal effect must be appreciated as an increased true airspeed (TAX) for a given equivalent airspeed (EAS).\n\nTACTICAL PERFORMANCE. Many tactical maneuvers require the use of the maximum turning capability of the airplane. The maximum turning capability of an airplane will be defined by three factors:\n\n- (1) Maximum lift capability. The combination of maximum lift coefIicient, C,,=, and wing loading, W/S, will define the ability of the airplane to develop aerodynamically the load factors of maneuvering flight.\n\n(2) Optrating ftrcngth limits will define the upper limits of maneuvering load factors which will not damage the primary structure of the airplane. These limits must not be exceeded in normal operations because of the possibility of structural damage or failure.\n\n(3) Thwt or power limits will define the ability of the airplane to turn at constant altitude. The limiting condition would allow increased load factor and induced drag until the drag equals the maximum thrust available from the powerplant. Such a case would produce the maximum turning capability for maintaining constant altitude.\n\nThe first illustration of figure 2.30 shows how the aerodynamic and structural limits\n\n178", + "recall": 0.8300395256916996, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-8OT-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE \n\nIf the airplane were to hold the same angle of bank at 500 knots (TAS), the turn radius would quadruple (r=22,200 ft.) and the turn rate would be one-half the original value (ROT=2.19 deg. per sec.). \n\nValues of turn radius and turn rate versus velocity are shown in figure 2.29 for various angles of bank and the corresponding load factors. The conditions are for the steady, coordinated turn at constant altitude but the results are applicable for climbing or descend- ing flight when the angle of climb or descent is relatively small. While the effect of alti- tude on turning performance is not immediately apparent from these curves, the principal effect must be appreciated as an increased true air- speed (TAX) for a given equivalent airspeed (EAS). TACTICAL PERFORMANCE. Many tac- \n\nimportant-if not more important-as the increased stall speed in turning flight. It is important also that any turn be well coordi- nated to prevent the increased drag attendant to a sideslip. TURNING PERFORMANCE. The hori- \n\nto a sideslip. TURNING PERFORMANCE. The hori- zontal component of lift will equal the centrif- ugal force of steady, turning flight. This fact allows development of the following relation- ships of turning performance: \n\nturn radius \n\nwhere r= turn radius, ft. \n\n$$P r= 11.26 tan 6 $$\n\n$$ROT= 1,091 tan rb V $$\n\n- where r= turn radius, ft. \n\n- ti = bank angle, degrees \n\n- I ’ = velocity, knots (TAX) \n\n- ROT=rate of turn, degrees per sec. $= bank angle, degrees \n\n- ROT=rate of turn, degrees per sec. $= bank angle, degrees \n\n- v=velocity, knots, TAS \n\nttrrn rate \n\nwhere \n\n(EAS). TACTICAL PERFORMANCE. Many tac- tical maneuvers require the use of the maxi- mum turning capability of the airplane. The maximum turning capability of an airplane will be defined by three factors: (1) Maximum lift capability. The combi- \n\nbe defined by three factors: (1) Maximum lift capability. The combi- nation of maximum lift coefIicient, C,,=, and wing loading, W/S, will define the ability of the airplane to develop aero- dynamically the load factors of maneuvering flight. \n\nThese relationships define the turn radius, I, and rate of turn, ROT, as functions of the two principal variables: bank angle, +, and velocity, I’ (TAX). Thus, when the airplane is flown in the steady, coordinated turn at specific values of bank angle and velocity, the turn rate and turn radius are fixed and independent of the airplane type. As an example, an air- plane in a steady, coordinated turn at a bank angle of 45’ and a velocity of 250 knots (TAS) would have the following turn performance: \n\n(2) Optrating ftrcngth limits will define the upper limits of maneuvering load factors which will not damage the primary struc- ture of the airplane. These limits must not be exceeded in normal operations because of the possibility of structural damage or failure. (3) Thwt or power limits will define the \n\nfailure. (3) Thwt or power limits will define the ability of the airplane to turn at constant altitude. The limiting condition would al- low increased load factor and induced drag until the drag equals the maximum thrust available from the powerplant. Such a case would produce the maximum turning capa- bility for maintaining constant altitude. \n\nThe first illustration of figure 2.30 shows how the aerodynamic and structural limits \n\nand \n\n$$= 5,550 ft. $$\n\n$$ROT=(I,091)(1.000) 250 $$\n\n$$-4.37 deg. per sec. $$\n\n178" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8636436611728504, + "doc_id": "a19e069011200f1d9d8dd1500c90044f17c6691f4c0c14e249e65d6567abaaf1", + "edit_distance": 0.6212121212121212, + "f1_score": 0.9251101321585902, + "meteor": 0.7595575204819631, + "precision": 0.9502262443438914, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS 00-8OT-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS\n\nvortex filaments which consist of the tip or trailing vortices coupled with the bound or line vortex. The tip vortices are coupled with the bound vortex when circulation is induced with lift. The effect of this vortex system is to create certain vertical velocity components in the vicinity of the wing. The illustration of these vertical velocities shows that ahead of the wing the bound vortex i nduces an upwash. Behind the wing, the coupled action of the bound vortex and the tip vortices induces a downwash. With the action of tip and bound vortices coupled, a final vertical velocity (220) is imparted to the airstream by the wing producing lift. This result is an inevitable consequence of a finite wing producing lift. The wing Producing lift applies the equal and opposite force to the airstream and deflects it downward. One of the important factors in this system is that a downward velocity is created at the aerodynamic center (w) which is one half the final downward velocity imparted to the airstream (2~).\n\nThe effect of the vertical velocities in the vicinity of the wing is best appreciated when they are added vectorially to the airstream velocity. The remote free stream well ahead of the wing is unaffected and its direction is opposite the flight path of the airplane. ' Aft of the wing, the vertical velocity (2~) adds to the airstream velocity to produce the downwash angle e (epsilon). At the aerodynamic center of the wing, the vertical,velocity (w) adds to the airstream velocity to produce a downward deflection of the airstream one-half that of the downwash angle. In other words, the wing producing lift by the deflection of an airstream incurs a downward slant co the wind in the immediate vicinity of the wing. Hence, the JeCtionJ f the wing operate in an average relao tive wind which is inclined downward one-half the final dowraw& angle. This is one important feature which distinguishes the aerodynamic properties of a wing from the aerodynamic properties of an airfoil section.\n\nThe induced velocities existing at the aerodynamic center of a finite wing create an aver-\n\n66\n\nage relative wind which is different from the remote free stream wind. Since the aerodynamic forces created by the airfoil sections of a wing depend upon the immediate airstream in which they operate, consideration must be given to the effect of the inclined average relative wind.\n\nTo create a certain lift coefficient with the airfoil section, a certain angle must exist between the airfoil chord line and the avcragc relative wind. This angle of attack is a,,, the section angle of attack. However, as this lift is developed on the wing, downwash is incurred and the average relative wind is inclined. Thus, the wing must be given some angle attack greater than the required section angle of attack to account for the inclination of the average relative wind. Since the wing must be given this additional angle of attack because of the induced flow, the angle between the average reiative wind arid tlie remote f i C C stream is termed the i nduced angle of attack, ai. From this influence, the wing angle of attack is the sum of the section and induced angles of attack.\n\na=ul)+a;\n\nwhere\n\na= wing angle of attack OLD= ection angle of attack s OI;= induced angle of attack\n\n## INDUCED DRAG\n\nAnother important influence of the induced flow is the orientation of the actual lift on a wing. Figure 1.30 illustrates the fact that the lift produced by the wing sections is perpendicular to the average relative wind. Since the average relative wind is inclined downward, the section lift is inclined aft, by the same amount-the i nduced angle of attack, ai. The lift and drag of a wing must continue to be referred perpendicular and parallel to the remote free stream ahead of the wing. In this respect, the lift on the wing has a component of force parallel to the remote free stream. This component of lift in the drag direction is the undesirable-but unavoidable-conse-", + "recall": 0.9012875536480687, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-8OT-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS \n\nage relative wind which is different from the remote free stream wind. Since the aerody- namic forces created by the airfoil sections of a wing depend upon the immediate airstream in which they operate, consideration must be given to the effect of the inclined average rela- tive wind. \n\nvortex filaments which consist of the tip or trailing vortices coupled with the bound or line vortex. The tip vortices are coupled with the bound vortex when circulation is induced with lift. The effect of this vortex system is to create certain vertical velocity components in the vicinity of the wing. The illustration of these vertical velocities shows that ahead of the wing the bound vortex induces an up- wash. Behind the wing, the coupled action of the bound vortex and the tip vortices in- duces a downwash. With the action of tip and bound vortices coupled, a final vertical velocity (220) is imparted to the airstream by the wing producing lift. This result is an inevitable consequence of a finite wing pro- ducing lift. The wing Producing lift applies the equal and opposite force to the airstream and deflects it downward. One of the impor- tant factors in this system is that a downward velocity is created at the aerodynamic center (w) which is one half the final downward velocity imparted to the airstream (2~). The effect of the vertical velocities in the \n\nTo create a certain lift coefficient with the airfoil section, a certain angle must exist be- tween the airfoil chord line and the avcragc relative wind. This angle of attack is a,,, the section angle of attack. However, as this lift is developed on the wing, downwash is in- curred and the average relative wind is in- clined. Thus, the wing must be given some angle attack greater than the required section angle of attack to account for the inclination of the average relative wind. Since the wing must be given this additional angle of attack because of the induced flow, the angle between the average reiative wind arid tlie remote fiCC stream is termed the induced angle of attack, ai. From this influence, the wing angle of attack is the sum of the section and induced angles of attack. \n\nvelocity imparted to the airstream (2~). The effect of the vertical velocities in the vicinity of the wing is best appreciated when they are added vectorially to the airstream velocity. The remote free stream well ahead of the wing is unaffected and its direction is opposite the flight path of the airplane. ‘ Aft of the wing, the vertical velocity (2~) adds to the airstream velocity to produce the down- wash angle e (epsilon). At the aerodynamic center of the wing, the vertical,velocity (w) adds to the airstream velocity to produce a downward deflection of the airstream one-half that of the downwash angle. In other words, the wing producing lift by the deflection of an airstream incurs a downward slant co the wind in the immediate vicinity of the wing. Hence, the JeCtionJ of the wing operate in an average rela- tive wind which is inclined downward one-half the final dowraw& angle. This is one important feature which distinguishes the aerodynamic properties of a wing from the aerodynamic properties of an airfoil section. The induced velocities existing at the aero- \n\nAnother important influence of the induced flow is the orientation of the actual lift on a wing. Figure 1.30 illustrates the fact that the lift produced by the wing sections is perpen- dicular to the average relative wind. Since the average relative wind is inclined down- ward, the section lift is inclined aft, by the same amount-the induced angle of attack, ai. The lift and drag of a wing must continue to be referred perpendicular and parallel to the remote free stream ahead of the wing. In this respect, the lift on the wing has a component of force parallel to the remote free stream. This component of lift in the drag direction is the undesirable-but unavoidable-conse- \n\na=ul)+a; where a= wing angle of attack OLD= section angle of attack OI;= induced angle of attack \n\nproperties of an airfoil section. The induced velocities existing at the aero- dynamic center of a finite wing create an aver- \n\n## INDUCED DRAG\n\n66" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8760398252604558, + "doc_id": "0bc403bb5c20fbf0700c28873065b51cc39dc963cb5689ef88d6b4275f02e8b6", + "edit_distance": 0.431758530183727, + "f1_score": 0.9090909090909091, + "meteor": 0.8230330755215508, + "precision": 0.9430604982206405, + "pred_md": "basic section. The effect of a fixed slot on\n\nthe lift characteristics is shown in figure 1.18. .UO~J ana' &Z~J can produce significant increases in cl, but the increased angle of attack for maximum lift can be a disadvantage. If slots were the only high lift device on the wing, the high take off and landing angles of attack may complicate the design of the landing gear. For this reason slots or slats are usually used in conjunction with flaps since the flaps provide reduction in the maximum lift angle of attack. The use of a slot has two important advantages: there is only a negligible change in the pitching moment due to the slot and no significant change in section drag at low angles of attack. In fact, the slotted section will have less drag than the basic section near the maximum lift angle for the basic section.\n\nThe slot-slat device finds great application in modern airplane configurations. The tailless airplane configuration can utilize only the high lift devices which have negligible effect on the pitching moments. The slot and slat are often used to increase the clin high speed flight when compressibility effects are considerable. The small change in twisting moment is a favorable feature for any high lift device to be used at high speed. Leading edge high lift devices are more effective on the highiy swept wing than trailing edge flaps since slats are quite powerful in controlling the flow pattern. Small amounts of local camber added to the leading edge as a high lift device is most effective on wings of very low thickness and sharp leading edges. Most usually the slope of the leading edge high lift device is used to control the spanwise lift distribution on the wing.\n\n' Boundary larcr control devices are additional means of increasing the maximum lift coe&cient of a section. The thin layer of airflow adjacent to the surface of an airfoil shows reduced local velocities from the effect of skin friction. When at high angles of attack this boundary layer on the upper surface tends to\n\n## NAVWEPS OO-BOT-RO BASIC AERODYNAMICS\n\nstagnate and come to a stop. If this happens the airflow will separate from the surface and stall occurs. Boundary layer control for high lift applications features various devices to maintain high velocity in the boundary layer to allay separation of the airflow. This control of the boundary layer kinetic energy can be accomplished in two ways. One method is the application of a suction through ports to draw off low energy boundary layer and replace it with high velocity air from outside the boundary layer. The effect of surface suction boundary layer control on lift characteristics is typified by figure 1.18. Increasing surface suction produces greater maximum lift coe5cients which occur at higher angles of attack. The effect is similar to that of a slot because the slot is essentially a boundary layer control device ducting high energy air to the upper surface.\n\nAnother method of boundary layer control is accomplished by injecting a high speed jet of air into the boundary layer. This method produces essentially the same results as the suction method and is the more practical installation. The suction type BLC requires the installation of a separate pump while the ' blown' BLC system can utilize the high pressure source of a jet engine compressor. The typical installation of a high pressure BU system would be the augmentation of a deflected flap. Since any boundary layer control tends to increase the angle of attack for maximum lift, it is important to combine the boundary layer control with flaps since the flap deflection tends to reduce the angIe of attack for maximum lift\n\nOPERATION OF HIGH LIFT DEVICES. The management of the high lift devices on an airplane is an important factor in flying operations. The devices which are actuated automatically-such as automatic slats and slotsare usually of little concern and cause little complication since relatively small changes in drag and pitching moments take place. However, the flaps must be properly managed by the pilot to take advantage of the capability", + "recall": 0.8774834437086093, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OO-BOT-RO BASIC AERODYNAMICS \n\nbasic section. The effect of a fixed slot on the lift characteristics is shown in figure 1.18. \n\n.UO~J ana’ &Z~J can produce significant in- creases in cl, but the increased angle of attack for maximum lift can be a disadvantage. If slots were the only high lift device on the wing, the high take off and landing angles of attack may complicate the design of the landing gear. For this reason slots or slats are usually used in conjunction with flaps since the flaps provide reduction in the maxi- mum lift angle of attack. The use of a slot has two important advantages: there is only a negligible change in the pitching moment due to the slot and no significant change in section drag at low angles of attack. In fact, the slotted section will have less drag than the basic section near the maximum lift angle for the basic section. \n\nThe slot-slat device finds great application in modern airplane configurations. The tail- less airplane configuration can utilize only the high lift devices which have negligible effect on the pitching moments. The slot and slat are often used to increase the cl- in high speed flight when compressibility effects are con- siderable. The small change in twisting mo- ment is a favorable feature for any high lift device to be used at high speed. Leading edge high lift devices are more effective on the highiy swept wing than trailing edge flaps since slats are quite powerful in controlling the flow pattern. Small amounts of local camber added to the leading edge as a high lift device is most effective on wings of very low thick- ness and sharp leading edges. Most usually the slope of the leading edge high lift device is used to control the spanwise lift distribution on the wing. \n\n‘ Boundary larcr control devices are additional means of increasing the maximum lift coe&- cient of a section. The thin layer of airflow adjacent to the surface of an airfoil shows re- duced local velocities from the effect of skin friction. When at high angles of attack this boundary layer on the upper surface tends to \n\nmaximum lift OPERATION OF HIGH LIFT DEVICES. The management of the high lift devices on an airplane is an important factor in flying opera- tions. The devices which are actuated auto- matically-such as automatic slats and slots- are usually of little concern and cause little complication since relatively small changes in drag and pitching moments take place. How- ever, the flaps must be properly managed by the pilot to take advantage of the capability \n\nAnother method of boundary layer control is accomplished by injecting a high speed jet of air into the boundary layer. This method produces essentially the same results as the suction method and is the more practical in- stallation. The suction type BLC requires the installation of a separate pump while the “blown” BLC system can utilize the high pres- sure source of a jet engine compressor. The typical installation of a high pressure BU system would be the augmentation of a de- flected flap. Since any boundary layer control tends to increase the angle of attack for maxi- mum lift, it is important to combine the bound- ary layer control with flaps since the flap de- flection tends to reduce the angIe of attack for maximum lift OPERATION OF HIGH LIFT DEVICES. \n\nstagnate and come to a stop. If this happens the airflow will separate from the surface and stall occurs. Boundary layer control for high lift applications features various devices to maintain high velocity in the boundary layer to allay separation of the airflow. This con- trol of the boundary layer kinetic energy can be accomplished in two ways. One method is the application of a suction through ports to draw off low energy boundary layer and replace it with high velocity air from outside the boundary layer. The effect of surface suction boundary layer control on lift characteristics is typified by figure 1.18. Increasing surface suction produces greater maximum lift coe5- cients which occur at higher angles of attack. The effect is similar to that of a slot because the slot is essentially a boundary layer control device ducting high energy air to the upper surface." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.411653491848595, + "doc_id": "8050a8fc75d6152fa7734af95a8d38e36913748e19431c637f3eb9e9ef85e1ac", + "edit_distance": 0.5833333333333334, + "f1_score": 0.8333333333333334, + "meteor": 0.8761533463287849, + "precision": 0.7142857142857143, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS 00-801-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE\n\n## NOZZLE TYPES\n\n## ENGINE OPERATING CONOITIONS\n\nFigure 2.9. Exhaust Nozzle Types and Engine Operating Conditions\n\nFigure 2.9. Exhaust Nozzle Types and Engine Operating Conditions\n\n115", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-801-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE \n\nFigure 2.9. Exhaust Nozzle Types and Engine Operating Conditions \n\n115" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.13964582386986632, + "doc_id": "fed7b10a89cb19560a287a3750f3070cfe4e7a027bacd05ae84c8337749d5d91", + "edit_distance": 0.84, + "f1_score": 0.4067796610169491, + "meteor": 0.590657255616272, + "precision": 0.2553191489361702, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS 00-SOT-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS\n\nFigure 1.28. Description of Wing Planform\n\nFigure 1.28. Description of Wing Planform\n\nS= WING AREA, SO. FT.\n\nb= SPAN, FT\n\nc = AVERAGE CHORD, FT\n\nAR = ASPECT RATIO\n\nAR = b/c\n\nAR= b:s\n\nCR = ROOT CHORO, FT\n\nCt = TIP CHORD, FT\n\nx = TAPER RATIO\n\nA= SWEEP ANGLE, DEGREES\n\nMAC : MEAN AERODYNAMIC CHORD, FT.\n\n61", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-SOT-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS \n\nFigure 1.28. Description of Wing Planform \n\n61" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.08858406814986938, + "doc_id": "e6959f9ab13e297589f9ba67a3d36ce720a7ad3234c223691fad39ed9b579f57", + "edit_distance": 0.963302752293578, + "f1_score": 0.3846153846153847, + "meteor": 0.5945849236641222, + "precision": 0.24193548387096775, + "pred_md": "## Airspace Information (Continued)\n\n## AIRSPACE - U.S.\n\n## CLASS G\n\nHigh and Low Chart\n\nUncontrolled Airspace\n\nScreened Brown Area\n\nLow Altitude\n\nThat portion of the airspace below 14,500' MSL that has not been designated as Class B, C, D or E Airspace.\n\nHigh Altitude\n\nThat portion of the airspace from 18,000' MSL and above that has not been designated as Class A airspace.\n\n## AIRSPACE - CANADIAN\n\nCLASS B\n\nLow Charts Only\n\nControlled Airspace\n\nScreened Brown Checkered Area\n\nControlled airspace above 12,500' MSL\n\n85\n\nExample:\n\nFAA Chart Users' Guide - IFR Enroute Symbology", + "recall": 0.9375, + "true_md": "85\n\nFAA Chart Users’ Guide - IFR Enroute Symbology\n\n## Airspace Information (Continued)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0023859207691407343, + "doc_id": "57f3993f2f4df12b8890a7c9859c56c590953b5b87e8552f6d524a5d72af5d29", + "edit_distance": 0.992090395480226, + "f1_score": 0.038314176245210725, + "meteor": 0.07297855851201242, + "precision": 0.01953125, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS 00-8OT-80 INDEX\n\n## INDEX\n\nP.W\n\n1\n\n9\n\n1\n\n6\n\n52\n\n| accelerated motion. .......................... | 182 |\n|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|------------|\n| adverseyaw ................................. | |\n| | 291 |\n| aerodynamic center. .......................... | 47 |\n| Aerodynamics, Basic, Chapter I. ............... | |\n| Aerodynamics, High Speed, Chapter III. ........ | 201 |\n| aeroelastic effects. ............................ ................................. | 330 |\n| afterburner. reversal. .............................. | 129 |\n| aileron | 339 |\n| airfoil | |\n| drag characteristics. ........................ | 33 |\n| lift characteristics. ......................... | 27 |\n| pitching moments. ......................... | 47 |\n| terminology. .............................. | 20 |\n| airspeed | |\n| calibrated. ................................ | 10 |\n| equivalent ................................. | 11 |\n| indicated .................................. | 10 |\n| mcasurcmcnt ............................... | |\n| primary control of airspeed. ................ | 27,350 |\n| fT' C ....................................... | 14 |\n| altitude | |\n| density altitude. ........................... | 4 |\n| pressure altitude. ........................... | 4 |\n| primary control of altitude. ............... | 154,352 |\n| angle of attack. .............................. | 22 |\n| angle of attack indicator. ..................... | 357 |\n| angleofbank ............................... | 37,176 |\n| angle of climb. .............................. | 152 |\n| Application of Aerodynamics to Specific lems of Flying, Chapter VI. ............... | Prob- 349 |\n| approach .................................... | 360 |\n| aspect ratio. ................................. | 61 |\n| asymmetrical Power, multi-engine airplane, | 294 |\n| atmosphere | |\n| properties ................................. | |\n| standard ................................... | 4 |\n| autorotation characteristics. ................... | 405 |\n| autorotative rolling. ....................... | 309,317 |\n| available thrust and power. ................... | 104 |\n| axis system, airplane reference. ................ | 249 |\n| Bernoulli equation. ............................ | |\n| bobweight .................................. | 273 |\n| boundarylayer ............................... | |\n| boundary layer control. ....................... | 43 |\n| brake mean effective pressure, BMEP. .......... | 137 |\n\n| ...................... | |\n|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|-------------|\n| brake horsepower, BHP. | 137 |\n| braking performance. .................. | ..... 387 |\n| braking technique. ......... .... ..... | 390 |\n| calibrated airspeed, CAS ....................... | 10 |\n| center of gravity limitations. ........... | 259,275 |\n| center of pressure. ............... ..... .................................. | ..... 47 |\n| circulation. | 16 |\n| climb angle. ................................. | 152 |\n| climb performance. ...... ..... ...... | .... 150 |\n| climb rate. .. ........................ | 154 |\n| components of the gas turbine. ................ | 109 |\n| compressible flow. .......................... | 204 |\n| compressibility ............................. | 201 |\n| compressor stall or surge. .. .... ...... | .... 125 |\n| control force stability. ........................ | 264 |\n| control of airspeed and altitude. ................ | 349 |\n| control, Stability and Control, Chapter IV. | ...... 243 |\n| control systems, longitudinal. ................. | 281 |\n| creep considerations. ......................... | 330 |\n| critical altitude. .......... .................. | 143 |\n| critical field length. ............ ............. | 396 |\n| critical Mach number. ........................ | 215 |\n| cumulative damage. ... ..... ...... | 328 |\n| cycle of operation | 106 |\n| gas turbineengine .......................... reciprocating engine. ....................... | 135 |\n| damping ..................................... | 247 |\n| density, density ratio. ........................ density altitude. .. .......................... | 2 |\n| .. | 4 |\n| detonation .:. ....................... | 140, 194 |\n| dihedral ..................................... | 295 |\n| directional control .. .......... ............. directional stability. | 290 |\n| ......................... | 284 |\n| divergence ................................ | 245, 342 |\n| downspring, ................................. downwash ................................... | 270 |\n| | 66 |\n| drag | |\n| coefficient. ........ ................. | 29 |\n| equation ................................... | 29 |\n| induced ................................... | 66 |\n| parasite. .. .. ..... ... ............. | 87 |\n| total ...................................... | 92 |\n| dynamic pressure. .... ... .... ............ dynamic stability., ... .... .... ... ....... | : 9 |\n| efficiency factor. | 245 |\n| ..... ... ...... .. ....... | 89 |\n\n414\n\n*IL*e", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-8OT-80 INDEX \n\n## INDEX\n\n414" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.605854760327212, + "doc_id": "8deb7ecc6b2d3b5170c0aa9b83c14c121db85bab70f889d6b124aaba420d9082", + "edit_distance": 0.4, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9368569958847737, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS 00-8OY-60\n\nHIGH SPEED AERODYNAMICS\n\nFigure 3.9. Transonic Flow Patterns (sheet 1 of 2)\n\nFigure 3.9. Transonic Flow Patterns (sheet 1 of 2)\n\n216", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-8OY-60 HIGH SPEED AERODYNAMICS \n\nFigure 3.9. Transonic Flow Patterns (sheet 1 of 2) \n\n216" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.796290720326835, + "doc_id": "be1710239f41591102a906883d8c432d5081162a8c490f89a6dfb7c809dbadac", + "edit_distance": 0.9146005509641874, + "f1_score": 0.8901408450704226, + "meteor": 0.7071354608791566, + "precision": 0.8586956521739131, + "pred_md": "## PITOT-STATIC SYSTEM\n\nNAVWEPS 00-807-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS\n\n## PITOT WITH SEPARATE STATIC SOURCE\n\nPRESSURE INDICATED BY GAUGE IS DIFFERENCE BETWEEN TOTAL AND STATIC PRESSURE, H-p= q\n\nPRESSURE INDICATED BY GAUGE IS DIFFERENCE BETWEEN TOTAL AND STATIC PRESSURE, H-p= q\n\nFigure. 1.5. Airspeed Measurement\n\ninstrument and errors due to position or location of the installation. The instrument error must be small by design of the equipment and is usually negligible in equjpment which is properly maintained and cared for. The position error of the installation must be small in the range of airspeeds involving critical performance conditions. Position errors are most usually confine,d to the static source in that the actual static pressure sensed at the static port may be different from the free airstream static pressure. When the .,aircraft is operated through a large range' of angles of attack, the static pressure distribution varies ' quite greatly and it becomes quite difficult to' minimize the static source error. In most instances a compensating group of static sources may be combined to reduce the position error. In order to appreciate the magnitude of this problem, at flight speed near 100 knots a\n\n0.05 psi position error is an airspeed error of 10 knots. A typical variation of airspeed system position error is illustrated in figure 1.6.\n\n(3) The equivalent airspeed (PAS) is the result of correcting the (CAS) for compressibility effects. At high flight speeds the stagnation pressure recovered in the pitot tube is not representative of the airstream dynamic pressure due to a magnification by compressibility. Compressibility of the airflow produces a stagnation pressure in the pitot which is greater than if the flow were incompressible. As a result, the airspeed indication is given an erroneous magnihcation. The standard airspeed indicator is calibrated to read correct when at standard sea level conditions and thus has a compressibility correction appropriate for these conditions. However, when the aircraft is operating above standard sea level altitude,\n\nRevised January 1965\n\n11", + "recall": 0.9239766081871345, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-807-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS \n\nFigure. 1.5. Airspeed Measurement \n\n0.05 psi position error is an airspeed error of 10 knots. A typical variation of air- speed system position error is illustrated in figure 1.6. (3) The equivalent airspeed (PAS) is the \n\nfigure 1.6. (3) The equivalent airspeed (PAS) is the result of correcting the (CAS) for compressi- bility effects. At high flight speeds the stagnation pressure recovered in the pitot tube is not representative of the airstream dynamic pressure due to a magnification by compressibility. Compressibility of the airflow produces a stagnation pressure in the pitot which is greater than if the flow were incompressible. As a result, the air- speed indication is given an erroneous mag- nihcation. The standard airspeed indicator is calibrated to read correct when at standard sea level conditions and thus has a com- pressibility correction appropriate for these conditions. However, when the aircraft is operating above standard sea level altitude, \n\ninstrument and errors due to position or lo- cation of the installation. The instrument error must be small by design of the equip- ment and is usually negligible in equjpment which is properly maintained and cared for. The position error of the installation must be small in the range of airspeeds involving critical performance conditions. Position errors are most usually confine,d to the static source in that the actual static pressure sensed at the static port may be different from the free airstream static pressure. When the .,aircraft is operated through a large range’ of angles of attack, the static pressure distribution varies ‘ quite greatly and it becomes quite difficult to ’ minimize the static source error. In most instances a compensating group of static sources may be combined to reduce the position error. In order to appreciate the magnitude of this problem, at flight speed near 100 knots a \n\n11" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.2877994798706735, + "doc_id": "39c29b93bdb301dd2a025b6094f2d1d5d2253b23b6a38c74ba550bc4acc36961", + "edit_distance": 0.8321167883211679, + "f1_score": 0.6055045871559633, + "meteor": 0.6445983810709839, + "precision": 0.4647887323943662, + "pred_md": "FAA Chart Users' Guide - IFR Enroute Symbology\n\n## AIRSPACE INFORMATION (Continued)\n\n## Enroute Chart Examples High Enroute Chart (Continued)\n\n## Reference Number\n\n## Description\n\nJet Route 149 available between 1100 - 0300Z MAA - 41,000' MEA - 31,000'\n\n## AIRSPACE BOUNDARIES\n\n## LOW / HIGH CHARTS\n\n## LOW / HIGH CHARTS\n\n## Air Route Traffic Control Center (ARTCC)\n\nARTCC Remoted Sites with discrete VHF and UHF frequencies\n\nAir Route Traffic Control Center (ARTCC) with Controller Pilot Data Link Communications (CPDLC)\n\n## LOW / HIGH CHARTS\n\nControl Areas (CTA)\n\n## Additional Control Areas\n\nLOW ALTITUDE\n\nHIGH ALTITUDE\n\n82\n\nNEW YORK OCEANIC CTA/FIR KZWY\n\nMIAMI OCEANIC CTA/FIR KZMA\n\nAdjoining CTA\n\nCONTROL 1419 H", + "recall": 0.868421052631579, + "true_md": "## AIRSPACE INFORMATION (Continued)\n\n## Description\n\n## Enroute Chart Examples High Enroute Chart (Continued)\n\n## Enroute Chart Examples High Enroute Chart (Continued)\n\n## Reference Number\n\n82\n\nFAA Chart Users’ Guide - IFR Enroute Symbology\n\n## Directional Jet Route with Time Restrictions, MAA and MEA\n\nJet Route 149 available between 1100 - 0300Z MAA - 41,000’ MEA - 31,000’" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8666325549648385, + "doc_id": "fc7c57a332dbe6f4929817437358ddc9795a62418a0c40e3bf89c87966e22353", + "edit_distance": 0.6536912751677852, + "f1_score": 0.9147609147609147, + "meteor": 0.7744719226131331, + "precision": 0.9565217391304348, + "pred_md": "crease in nose up attitude without the appropriate power change only controls the airplane to a lower speed.\n\n## REGION 0~ REVERSED COMMAND\n\nThe variation of power or thrust required with velocity defines the power settings necessary to maintain steady level flight at various airspeeds. To simplify the situation, a generality could be,assumed that the airplane configuration and. altitude define a variation of power setting required (jet thrust required or prop power required) versus velocity. This general variation of required power setting versus velocity is illustrated by' the first graph of figure 6.2. This curve illustrates the fact that at low speeds near the stall or minimum control speed the power setting required for steady level flight is quite high. However, at low speeds, ant increase in speed reduces the required power setting until some minimum value is reached.at the conditions for maximum endurance. Increased speed beyond the conditions for maximum endurance will then in&ease the power setting required for steady level flight.\n\nREGIONS OF NORMAL AND REVERSED COMMAND. This .typical variation of required power setting with speed allows a sort of terminology to be assigned to specific regimes of velocity. Speeds greater than the speed for maximum endurance require increasingly greater power settings to achieve steady, level flight. Since the normal command of flight assumes a higher power setting will achieve a greater speed, the regime of flight speeds greater than the speed for minimum required power setting is termed the ' region of normal command.' Obviously, parasite drag or parasite power predominates in this regime to produce the increased power setting required with increased velocity. Of course, the major items of airplane flight performance take place in the region of normal command.\n\nFlight speeds below the sperd for maximum endurance produce required power settings\n\n353\n\n## NAVWEPS DCI-ROT-RD APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYl,NG\n\nwhich increase with a decrease n speed. i Since the increase in required power setting with decreased velocity is contrary to the normal command of flight, the regime of flight speeds between the speed for minimum required power setting and, the stall speed (or minimum control speed) is termed the ' region of reversed command. ' In this regime of flight, a decrease in airspeed ' must be accompanied by an increased power setting in order to maintain steady flight. Obviously, induced drag or induced power required predominates in this regime to produce the increased power setting required with decreased velocity. One fact should be made clear about the region of reversed command: flight in the ' reversed' region of command does not imply that a decreased power setting will bring about a higher airspeed or an increased power setting will produce a lower airspeed. To be sure, the primary control of airspeed is not the power setting. Flight in the region of reversed command only implies that a higher airspeed will repire a lower power setting and a lower airspeed will require a higher power setting to hold altitude.\n\nBecause of the variation of required power setting throughout the range of flight speeds, it is possible that one particular power setting may be capable of achieving steady, level flight at two different, airspeeds. As shown on the first curve of figure 6.2, one given power setting would meet the power requirements and allow steady, level flight at both points 1 and 2. At speeds lower than point 2, a deficiency of power 1 would exist and a rate of descent would be incurred. Similarly, at speeds greater than point 1, a deficiency of power would exist and the 1 airplane would descend. The speed range between points 1 and 2 would provide an excess of power and climbing flight would be produccd\n\nFEATURES OF FLIGHT IN THE NORMAL AND REVERSED REGIONS OF COMMAND. The majority of all airplane flight is conducted in the region of normal command,\n\nRevised January 1965", + "recall": 0.8764940239043825, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS DCI-ROT-RD APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYl,NG \n\ncrease in nose up attitude without the appro- priate power change only controls the airplane to a lower speed. \n\nwhich increase with a decrease in speed. Since the increase in required power setting with decreased velocity is contrary to the normal command of flight, the regime of flight speeds between the speed for minimum required power setting and, the stall speed (or minimum control speed) is termed the “region of re- versed command. ” In this regime of flight, a decrease in airspeed ‘ must be accompanied by an increased power setting in order to main- tain steady flight. Obviously, induced drag or induced power required predominates in this regime to produce the increased power setting required with decreased velocity. One fact should be made clear about the region of reversed command: flight in the “reversed” region of command does not imply that a decreased power setting will bring about a higher airspeed or an increased power setting will produce a lower airspeed. To be sure, the primary control of airspeed is not the power setting. Flight in the region of re- versed command only implies that a higher airspeed will repire a lower power setting and a lower airspeed will require a higher power setting to hold altitude. Because of the variation of required power \n\nThe variation of power or thrust required with velocity defines the power settings neces- sary to maintain steady level flight at various airspeeds. To simplify the situation, a gener- ality could be,assumed that the airplane con- figuration and. altitude define a variation of power setting required (jet thrust required or prop power required) versus velocity. This general variation of required power setting versus velocity is illustrated by ’ the first graph of figure 6.2. This curve illustrates the fact that at low speeds near the stall or minimum control speed the power setting required for steady level flight is quite high. However, at low speeds, ant increase in speed reduces the required power setting until some minimum value is reached.at the conditions for maximum endurance. Increased speed beyond the con- ditions for maximum endurance will then in&ease the power setting required for steady level flight. REGIONS OF NORMAL AND REVERSED \n\nlevel flight. REGIONS OF NORMAL AND REVERSED COMMAND. This .typical variation of re- quired power setting with speed allows a sort of terminology to be assigned to specific regimes of velocity. Speeds greater than the speed for maximum endurance require increas- ingly greater power settings to achieve steady, level flight. Since the normal command of flight assumes a higher power setting will achieve a greater speed, the regime of flight speeds greater than the speed for minimum required power setting is termed the “region of normal command.” Obviously, parasite drag or parasite power predominates in this regime to produce the increased power setting required with increased velocity. Of course, the major items of airplane flight performance take place in the region of normal command. \n\nFlight speeds below the sperd for maximum endurance produce required power settings \n\nsetting to hold altitude. Because of the variation of required power setting throughout the range of flight speeds, it is possible that one particular power setting may be capable of achieving steady, level flight at two different, airspeeds. As shown on the first curve of figure 6.2, one given power setting would meet the power requirements and allow steady, level flight at both points 1 and 2. At speeds lower than point 2, a deficiency of power 1 would exist and a rate of descent would be in- curred. Similarly, at speeds greater than point 1, a deficiency of power would exist and the 1 airplane would descend. The speed range be- tween points 1 and 2 would provide an excess of power and climbing flight would be pro- duccd \n\nFEATURES OF FLIGHT IN THE NOR- MAL AND REVERSED REGIONS OF COM- MAND. The majority of all airplane flight is conducted in the region of normal command, \n\nRevised January 1965 \n\n353 \n\n## REGION 0~ REVERSED COMMAND" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8825561601036627, + "doc_id": "be937f8a01c8448bff46c16b6b4d62ff959f2b65753bcbe9dc6bfe00bafae9cd", + "edit_distance": 0.7688172043010753, + "f1_score": 0.9127516778523489, + "meteor": 0.7803417653390744, + "precision": 0.951048951048951, + "pred_md": "TABLE 3-P. Suprnonk Wave Charactwiltks\n\nTABLE 3-P. Suprnonk Wave Charactwiltks\n\n## SECTIONS IN SUPERSONIC FLOW\n\nIn order to appreciate the effect of these various wave forms on the aerodynamic characteristics in supersonic flow, inspect figure 3.8. Parts (a) and (b) show the wave pattern and resulting pressure distribution for a thin flat plate at a positive angle of attack. The airstream moving over the upper surface passes through an expansion wave at the leading edge and then an oblique shock wave at the trailing edge. Thus, a uniform suction pressure exists over the upper surface. The airstream moving underneath the flat plate passes through an oblique shock wave at the leading edge then an expansion wave at the trailing edge. This produces a uniform positive pressure on the underside of the section. This distribution of pressure on the surface will produce a net lift and incur a subsequent drag due co lift from the inclination of the resultant lift from a perpendicular co the free stream.\n\n213\n\nParts (c) and (d) of figure 3.8 show the wave pattern and resulting pressure distribution for a double wedge airfoil at zero lift. The airstream moving over the surface passes through an oblique shock, an expansion wave, and another oblique shock. The resulting pressure distribution on the surfaces produces no net lift, but the increased pressure on the forward half of the chord along with the decreased pressure on the aft half of the chord produces a ' wave' drag. This wave drag is caused by the components of pressure forces which are parallel to the free scream direction. The wave drag is in addition to the drag due to friction, separatien, lift, etc., and can be a very considerable part of the total drag at high supersonic speeds.\n\nParts (e) and (f) of figure 3.8 illustrate the wave pattern and resulting pressure distribution for the double wedge airfoil at a small positive angle of attack. The net pressure\n\nNAVWEPS 00-8OT-80 HIGH SPEED AERODYNAMICS\n\n-", + "recall": 0.8774193548387097, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-8OT-80 HIGH SPEED AERODYNAMICS \n\nTABLE 3-P. Suprnonk Wave Charactwiltks \n\n## SECTIONS IN SUPERSONIC FLOW\n\nParts (c) and (d) of figure 3.8 show the wave pattern and resulting pressure distribu- tion for a double wedge airfoil at zero lift. The airstream moving over the surface passes through an oblique shock, an expansion wave, and another oblique shock. The resulting pressure distribution on the surfaces produces no net lift, but the increased pressure on the forward half of the chord along with the de- creased pressure on the aft half of the chord produces a “wave” drag. This wave drag is caused by the components of pressure forces which are parallel to the free scream direction. The wave drag is in addition to the drag due to friction, separatien, lift, etc., and can be a very considerable part of the total drag at high supersonic speeds. \n\nIn order to appreciate the effect of these various wave forms on the aerodynamic char- acteristics in supersonic flow, inspect figure 3.8. Parts (a) and (b) show the wave pattern and resulting pressure distribution for a thin flat plate at a positive angle of attack. The air- stream moving over the upper surface passes through an expansion wave at the leading edge and then an oblique shock wave at the trailing edge. Thus, a uniform suction pressure exists over the upper surface. The airstream moving underneath the flat plate passes through an oblique shock wave at the leading edge then an expansion wave at the trailing edge. This pro- duces a uniform positive pressure on the under- side of the section. This distribution of pres- sure on the surface will produce a net lift and incur a subsequent drag due co lift from the in- clination of the resultant lift from a perpen- dicular co the free stream. \n\nParts (e) and (f) of figure 3.8 illustrate the wave pattern and resulting pressure distribu- tion for the double wedge airfoil at a small positive angle of attack. The net pressure \n\n213" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8260676402989918, + "doc_id": "1a89e84c0f1a1d0c841f8807c33e7e7216d615b9797444f3a220b8768636ff26", + "edit_distance": 0.49506346967559944, + "f1_score": 0.895910780669145, + "meteor": 0.7593691325749305, + "precision": 0.9305019305019305, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS DD4OT-80\n\n## APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYI' NG\n\npossibility of a refused takeoff before exceeding the refusal speed. To this end, the pilot must carefully evaluate airplane and powerplant performance and judge the acceleration of the airplane by the use of ' line speeds.' The accelerated motion of the airplane during takeoff roll will define certain relationships between velocity and distance when the acceleration of the airplane is normal. By comparison of predicted and actual speeds at various points along the runway, the pilot can evaluate the acceleration and assess the takeoff perfotmaxe.\n\nAn example of an acceleration profile is shown by the second illustration of figure 6.12, where the variation of velocity and distance is defined for the case of uniformly accelerated motion, i.e., constant acceleration. While the case of uniformly accelerated motion doesnot correspond exactly to the takeoff performance of all airplanes, it is sufficiently applicable to illustrate the principle of line speeds and acceleration checks. If the takeoff acceleration of the airplane were constant, the airplane would develop specific percentages of the takeoff speed at specific percentages of the takeoff distance. Representative values from figure 6.12 are as follows:\n\nPmmr , ' &Ofl 0\n\nPmmr of r' iko~\n\nPInmr 0, &off\n\nAs an example of this uniformly accelerated motion, the airplane upon reaching the halfway point of takeoff roll would have spent 70.7 percent of the total takeoff time and accelerated to 70.7 percent of the takeoff speed. If the airplane has not reached a specific speed at a specific distance, it is obvious that the acceleration is below the predicted value and the airplane surely will not achieve the takeoff speed in the specified takeoff distance. Therefore, properly computed line speeds at various\n\n394\n\npoints along the runway will allow the pilot to monitor the takeoff performance and recognize a deficiency of acceleration. Of course, a deficiency of acceleration must be recognized prior to reaching some point along the runway where takeoff cannot be safely achieved or refused\n\nThe fundamental principles of refusal speeds and line speeds are applicable equally well to single-engine and multiengine airplanes. However, in the case of the multiengine airplane additional consideration must be given to the decision to continue or refuse takeoff when engine failure occurs during the takeoff roll. IF failure of one engine occurs prior to reaching the-refusal speed, takeoff should be discontinued and the airplane brought to a stop on the remaining runway. If failure of one engine c~curs after exceeding the refusal speed, the airplane is committed to continue takeoff with the remaining engines operative or an unsafe refused take&. Sn some cases, the remaining runway may not be sufficient to allow acceleration to the takeoff speed and the airplane can neither takeoff or stop on the runway rcmainibg. To facilitate consideration of this problem, several specific defmitions are necessary.\n\n(1) Takeoff and initial climb speed: A speed, usually a fixed percentage above the stall speed, at which the airplane will become airborne and best clear obstacles immediately after takeoff. For a particular airplane in the takeoff configuration, this speed (in EAS or CM) is a function of gross weight but in no circumstances should it he less than the minimum directional control speed for the critical asymmetrical power condition. Generally, the takeoff and initial climb speed is referred to as the ' V,' speed.\n\n(2) Critical engine jaih~~ speed: A speed achieved during the takeoff roll at which failure of one engine will require the same distance to continue accelerating with the operative engines to accomplish safe takeoff or refuse takeoff and decelerate to a stop utilizing the airplane brakes. At critical engine failure", + "recall": 0.8637992831541219, + "true_md": "## NAVWEPS DD4OT-80 APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYI ’ NG\n\npossibility of a refused takeoff before exceed- ing the refusal speed. To this end, the pilot must carefully evaluate airplane and power- plant performance and judge the acceleration of the airplane by the use of “line speeds.” The accelerated motion of the airplane during takeoff roll will define certain relationships be- tween velocity and distance when the acceler- ation of the airplane is normal. By comparison of predicted and actual speeds at various points along the runway, the pilot can evaluate the acceleration and assess the takeoff perfotm- axe. \n\nAn example of an acceleration profile is shown by the second illustration of figure 6.12, where the variation of velocity and distance is defined for the case of uniformly accelerated motion, i.e., constant acceleration. While the case of uniformly accelerated motion doesnot correspond exactly to the takeoff performance of all airplanes, it is sufficiently applicable to illustrate the principle of line speeds and ac- celeration checks. If the takeoff acceleration of the airplane were constant, the airplane would develop specific percentages of the take- off speed at specific percentages of the takeoff distance. Representative values from figure 6.12 are as follows: \n\nAs an example of this uniformly accelerated motion, the airplane upon reaching the half- way point of takeoff roll would have spent 70.7 percent of the total takeoff time and ac- celerated to 70.7 percent of the takeoff speed. If the airplane has not reached a specific speed at a specific distance, it is obvious that the ac- celeration is below the predicted value and the airplane surely will not achieve the takeoff speed in the specified takeoff distance. There- fore, properly computed line speeds at various \n\nspeed. (2) Critical engine jaih~~ speed: A speed achieved during the takeoff roll at which fail- ure of one engine will require the same distance to continue accelerating with the operative en- gines to accomplish safe takeoff or refuse takeoff and decelerate to a stop utilizing the airplane brakes. At critical engine failure \n\nlem, several specific defmitions are necessary. (1) Takeoff and initial climb speed: A speed, usually a fixed percentage above the stall speed, at which the airplane will become airborne and best clear obstacles immediately after takeoff. For a particular airplane in the takeoff con- figuration, this speed (in EAS or CM) is a function of gross weight but in no circumstances should it he less than the minimum directional control speed for the critical asymmetrical power condition. Generally, the takeoff and initial climb speed is referred to as the “V,” speed. (2) Critical engine jaih~~ speed: A speed \n\nThe fundamental principles of refusal speeds and line speeds are applicable equally well to single-engine and multiengine airplanes. How- ever, in the case of the multiengine airplane additional consideration must be given to the decision to continue or refuse takeoff when engine failure occurs during the takeoff roll. IF failure of one engine occurs prior to reaching the-refusal speed, takeoff should be discon- tinued and the airplane brought to a stop on the remaining runway. If failure of one engine c~curs after exceeding the refusal speed, the airplane is committed to continue takeoff with the remaining engines operative or an unsafe refused take&. Sn some cases, the remaining runway may not be sufficient to allow acceler- ation to the takeoff speed and the airplane can neither takeoff or stop on the runway rcmain- ibg. To facilitate consideration of this prob- lem, several specific defmitions are necessary. (1) Takeoff and initial climb speed: A speed, \n\npoints along the runway will allow the pilot to monitor the takeoff performance and recog- nize a deficiency of acceleration. Of course, a deficiency of acceleration must be recognized prior to reaching some point along the runway where takeoff cannot be safely achieved or refused \n\n394" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6820453229133056, + "doc_id": "e335d60750b6291bba5ec4ae61c6bab5139b4eb08b4b2b34971d3074afdb2170", + "edit_distance": 0.3448275862068966, + "f1_score": 0.972972972972973, + "meteor": 0.9494459833795015, + "precision": 0.9473684210526315, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS 00-801-80 APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYING\n\nFigure 6.8. Engine Failure on Multi-engine Aircraft\n\nFigure 6.8. Engine Failure on Multi-engine Aircraft\n\n378", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-801-80 APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYING \n\nFigure 6.8. Engine Failure on Multi-engine Aircraft \n\n378" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8102738082362528, + "doc_id": "b28e662914211925e70471b3d871fd3bca3d8af39f68b6c50ca3ab196c6dc953", + "edit_distance": 0.8668032786885246, + "f1_score": 0.9680365296803654, + "meteor": 0.6714011225094609, + "precision": 0.954954954954955, + "pred_md": "## RADIO AIDS TO NAVIGATION\n\nOn VFR Charts, information about radio aids to navigation (NAVAID) are boxed, as illustrated. Duplication of data is\n\navoided. When two or more radio aids in a general area have the same name with different frequencies, Tactical Air Navigation (TACAN) channel numbers, or identification letters, and no misinterpretation can result, the name of the radio aid may be indicated only once within the identification box. Very High Frequency/Ultra High Frequency (VHF/UHF) NAVAID names and identification boxes (shown in blue) take precedence. Only\n\nthose items that differ (e.g., frequency, Morse Code) are repeated in the box in the appropriate color. The choice of separate or combined boxes is made in each case on the basis of economy of space and clear identification of the radio aids.\n\nA NAVAID that is physically located on an airport may not always be represented as a typical NAVAID symbol. A small open circle indicates the NAVAID location when collocated with an airport icon.\n\nThe type of NAVAID will be identified by: \"VOR,\" (VHF Omni-Directional Range) \"VORTAC\" (VOR Tactical Aircraft Control), \"VOR-DME,\" (VOR-Distance Measuring Equipment) or 'DME' (Distance Measuring Equipment) positioned on and breaking the top line of the NAVAID box.\n\nDMEs are shown without the compass rose.\n\n## AIRPORTS\n\nAirports in the following categories are charted as indicated (additional symbols are shown later in this Section). Public use airports:\n\nHard-surfaced runways greater than 8069' or some multiple runways less than 8069'\n\nHard-surfaced runways 1500' to 8069'\n\n- Other than hard-surfaced runways\n- Seaplane bases\n\n## Military airports:\n\nOther than hard-surfaced runways\n\nHard-surfaced runways are depicted the same as public-use airports.\n\nU.S. military airports are identified by abbreviations such as AAF (Army Air Field), AFB (Air Force Base), MCAS (Marine Corps Air Station), NAS (Naval Air Station), NAV (Naval Air Facility), NAAS (Naval Auxiliary Air Station), etc. Canadian military airports are identified by the abbreviation DND (Department of National Defense).\n\n## Fuel Available:\n\nFuel availability indicated by use of tick marks around the basic airport symbol. Consult Chart Supplement for details and availability.\n\nOther airports with or without fuel:\n\n15\n\nFAA Chart Users' Guide - VFR Terms and Symbols", + "recall": 0.9814814814814815, + "true_md": "15\n\nFAA Chart Users’ Guide - VFR Terms and Symbols\n\n## RADIO AIDS TO NAVIGATION\n\n## AIRPORTS\n\nAirports in the following categories are charted as indicated (additional symbols are shown later in this Section). Public use airports:\n\nMilitary airports:\n\nOther than hard-surfaced runways\n\nHard-surfaced runways are depicted the same as public-use airports.\n\nU.S. military airports are identified by abbreviations such as AAF (Army Air Field), AFB (Air Force Base), MCAS (Marine Corps Air Station), NAS (Naval Air Station), NAV (Naval Air Facility), NAAS (Naval Auxiliary Air Station), etc. Canadian military airports are identified by the abbreviation DND (Department of National Defense).\n\nFuel Available:\n\nFuel availability indicated by use of tick marks around the basic airport symbol. Consult Chart Supplement for details and availability.\n\nOther airports with or without fuel:\n\nDMEs are shown without the compass rose. \n\nThe type of NAVAID will be identified by: \"VOR,\" (VHF Omni-Directional Range) \"VORTAC\" (VOR Tactical Aircraft Control), \"VOR-DME,\" (VOR-Distance Measuring Equipment) or “DME” (Distance Measuring Equipment) positioned on and breaking the top line of the NAVAID box.\n\nA NAVAID that is physically located on an airport may not always be represented as a typical NAVAID symbol. A small open circle indicates the NAVAID location when collocated with an airport icon.\n\nand identification boxes (shown in blue) take precedence. Only those items that differ (e.g., frequency, Morse Code) are repeated in the box in the appropriate color. The choice of separate or combined boxes is made in each case on the basis of economy of space and clear identification of the radio aids.\n\nOn VFR Charts, information about radio aids to navigation (NAVAID) are boxed, as illustrated. Duplication of data is avoided. When two or more radio aids in a general area have the same name with different frequencies, Tactical Air Navigation (TACAN) channel numbers, or identification letters, and no misinterpretation can result, the name of the radio aid may be indicated only once within the identification box. Very High Frequency/Ultra High Frequency (VHF/UHF) NAVAID names and identification boxes (shown in blue) take precedence. Only those items that differ (e.g., frequency, Morse Code) are repeated in the box in the appropriate color. The choice of \n\nOn VFR Charts, information about radio aids to navigation (NAVAID) are boxed, as illustrated. Duplication of data is avoided. When two or more radio aids in a general area have the" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9132198052900233, + "doc_id": "a7e613b16cfd9dab0203386db61c7057499d3cd158674adb1a4e33a9bdddd43a", + "edit_distance": 0.8211382113821138, + "f1_score": 0.9605263157894738, + "meteor": 0.8936820560759273, + "precision": 0.9733333333333334, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS 00-801-80 OPERATING STRENGTH LIMITATIONS\n\n## Chapter 5\n\n## OPERATING STRENGTH LIMITATIONS\n\nThe weight of the structural components of an aircraft is an extremely important factor in the development of an efficient aircraft configuration. In no other field of mechanical design is there such necessary importance assigned to structural weight. The efficient aircraft and powerplant structure is the zenith of highly reined rknimum weight design. in\n\norder to obtain the required service life from his aircraft, the Naval Aviator must undetstand, appreciate, and observe the operating strength limitations. Failure to do so will incur excessive maintenance costs and a high incidence of failure during the service life of an aircraft.\n\n325", + "recall": 0.948051948051948, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-801-80 OPERATING STRENGTH LIMITATIONS \n\n## Chapter 5\n\n## OPERATING STRENGTH LIMITATIONS\n\norder to obtain the required service life from his aircraft, the Naval Aviator must undet- stand, appreciate, and observe the operating strength limitations. Failure to do so will incur excessive maintenance costs and a high incidence of failure during the service life of an aircraft. \n\nThe weight of the structural components of an aircraft is an extremely important factor in the development of an efficient aircraft con- figuration. In no other field of mechanical design is there such necessary importance assigned to structural weight. The efficient aircraft and powerplant structure is the zenith of highly reined rknimum weight design. in \n\n325" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8856813812043101, + "doc_id": "a84b5f6e95492dcdead06b1527c32c3547f93690d6d2f351a2e2e08f10c40e26", + "edit_distance": 0.16094986807387862, + "f1_score": 0.9579288025889968, + "meteor": 0.916928643305105, + "precision": 0.9866666666666667, + "pred_md": "51\n\nNAVWEPS D&801-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS\n\nFigure 1.23. Application to Stability\n\nFigure 1.23. Application to Stability\n\nAC. as a limit but as stall occurs, the drop in suction near the leading' edge cause the c.p. to move aft.\n\nOf course, if the airfoil has negative camber, or a strongly reflexed trailing edge, the moment about the aerodynamic center will be positive. In this case, the location of the aerodynamic center will be unchanged and will remain at the quarter-chord position.\n\nThe aerodynamic center is the point on the chord where the coefficients of moment are constant-the point where all changes in lift take place. The aerodynamic center is an cxtremely important aerodynamic reference point and the most direct application is to the longitudinal stability of an airplane. To simplify the problem assume that the airplane is a tailless or flying wing type. In order for this type airplane to have longitudinal stability, the center of gravity must be ahead of the\n\naerodynamic center. This very necessary feature can be visualized from the illustrations of figure 1.23.\n\nIf the two symmetrical airfoils are subject to an upgust, an increase in lift will take place at the 4.c. If the c.g. is ahead of the ax., the change in lift creates a nose down moment about the c.g. which tends to return the airfoil to the. equilibrium angle of attack. This stable, ' weathercocking' tendency to return to equilibrium is a very necessary feature in any airplane. If the c.g. is aft of the a.~., the change in lift due to the upgust takes place at the AC. and creates a nose up moment about the c.g. This nose up moment tends to displace the airplane farther from the equilibrium and is unstable-the airplane is similar to a ball balanced on a peak. Hence, to have a stable airplane, the c.g. must be located ahead of the airplane rl.c.", + "recall": 0.9308176100628931, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS D&801-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS \n\nFigure 1.23. Application to Stability \n\naerodynamic center. This very necessary fea- ture can be visualized from the illustrations of figure 1.23. If the two symmetrical airfoils are subject \n\nAC. as a limit but as stall occurs, the drop in suction near the leading’ edge cause the c.p. to move aft. Of course, if the airfoil has negative camber, \n\nmove aft. Of course, if the airfoil has negative camber, or a strongly reflexed trailing edge, the moment about the aerodynamic center will be positive. In this case, the location of the aerodynamic center will be unchanged and will remain at the quarter-chord position. \n\nThe aerodynamic center is the point on the chord where the coefficients of moment are constant-the point where all changes in lift take place. The aerodynamic center is an cx- tremely important aerodynamic reference point and the most direct application is to the longi- tudinal stability of an airplane. To simplify the problem assume that the airplane is a tailless or flying wing type. In order for this type airplane to have longitudinal stability, the center of gravity must be ahead of the \n\nfigure 1.23. If the two symmetrical airfoils are subject to an upgust, an increase in lift will take place at the 4.c. If the c.g. is ahead of the ax., the change in lift creates a nose down moment about the c.g. which tends to return the air- foil to the. equilibrium angle of attack. This stable, “weathercocking” tendency to return to equilibrium is a very necessary feature in any airplane. If the c.g. is aft of the a.~., the change in lift due to the upgust takes place at the AC. and creates a nose up moment about the c.g. This nose up moment tends to displace the airplane farther from the equilibrium and is unstable-the airplane is similar to a ball balanced on a peak. Hence, to have a stable airplane, the c.g. must be located ahead of the airplane rl.c. \n\n51" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "77592d5c347adf4db97efd5b3fa788628581efaa03c6b771345279b08286f3fe", + "edit_distance": 0.16094986807387862, + "f1_score": 0.9579288025889968, + "meteor": 0.916928643305105, + "precision": 0.9866666666666667, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.9308176100628931, + "true_md": "" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9632419339831323, + "doc_id": "a74d9afa0917badff0ef4f06cbfc5b12e6dbb265fbe715e33f1630b35e163bb6", + "edit_distance": 0.047345767575322814, + "f1_score": 0.9715302491103204, + "meteor": 0.9820804448468128, + "precision": 0.9820143884892086, + "pred_md": "Right traffic information is shown using the abbreviation 'RP' for right pattern, followed by the appropriate runway number(s) (RP 18). Special conditions or restrictions to the right pattern are indicated by the use of an asterisk (*RP) to direct the pilot to the Chart Supplement for special instructions and/or restrictions.\n\nThe type 'OBJECTIONABLE' associated with an airport symbol indicates that an objectionable airspace determination has been made for the airport per FAA JO 7400.2 Section 4, Airport Charting and Publication of Airport Data. Objectionable airspace determinations are based upon a number of factors including conflicting traffic patterns with another airport, hazardous runway conditions, or natural or man-made obstacles in close proximity to the landing area. FAA Regional Airports Offices are responsible for airspace determinations. Address any challenges to objectionable airspace determina -tions to your FAA Regional Airports Office.\n\n## AIRSPACE\n\n## CONTROLLED AIRSPACE\n\nControlled airspace consists of those areas where some or all aircraft may be subject to air traffic control, such as: Class A, Class B, Class C, Class D, Class E Surface (SFC) and Class E Airspace.\n\nClass A Airspace within the United States extends from 18,000' up to FL600. While visual charts do not depict Class A, it is important to note its existence.\n\nClass B Airspace is shown in abbreviated form on the Caribbean Charts (CAC) . The Sectional Aeronautical Chart (Sectional) and Terminal Area Chart (TAC) show Class B in greater detail. The MSL ceiling and floor alti -tudes of each sector are shown in solid blue figures with the last two zeros omitted. Floors extending \"upward from above\" a certain altitude are preceded by a (+). Operations at and below these altitudes are outside of Class B Airspace. Radials and arcs used to define Class B are prominently shown on TACs. Detailed rules and requirements associated with the particular Class B are shown. The name by which the Class B is shown as for example.\n\nClass C Airspace is shown in abbreviated form on Caribbean Charts (CAC). Sectionals and TACs show Class C in greater detail. The MSL ceiling and floor altitudes of each sector are shown in solid magenta figures with the last two zeros eliminated.\n\nThe figure at left identifies a sector that extends from the surface to the base of the Class B.\n\nClass C Airspace is identified by name:\n\nSeparate notes, enclosed in magenta boxes, give the approach control frequencies to be used by arriving VFR aircraft to establish two-way radio communication before entering the Class C (generally within 20 NM):\n\nClass C operating less than continuous is indicated by the following note:\n\nClass D Airspace is identified with a blue dashed line. Class D operating less than continuous is indicated by the follow -ing note:\n\nCeilings of Class D are shown as follows:\n\nA minus in front of the figure is used to indicate \"from surface to, but not including...\"\n\nClass E Surface (SFC) Airspace is symbolized with a magenta dashed line. Class E (SFC) operating less than continuous is indicated by the following note:\n\nClass E Airspace exists at 1200' AGL unless designated otherwise. The lateral and vertical vertical limits of all Class E, (up to, but not including 18,000') are shown by narrow bands of vignette on Sectionals and TACs.\n\nControlled airspace floors of 700' above the ground are defined by a magenta vignette; floors other than 700' that laterally abut uncontrolled airspace (Class G) are defined by a blue vignette; differing floors greater than 700' above the ground are annotated by a symbol\n\n17\n\nFAA Chart Users' Guide - VFR Terms and Symbols", + "recall": 0.9612676056338029, + "true_md": "Right traffic information is shown using the abbreviation 'RP' for right pattern, followed by the appropriate runway number(s) (RP 18). Special conditions or restrictions to the right pattern are indicated by the use of an asterisk (*RP) to direct the pilot to the Chart Supplement for special instructions and/or restrictions.\n\nThe type “OBJECTIONABLE” associated with an airport symbol indicates that an objectionable airspace determination has been made for the airport per FAA JO 7400.2 Section 4, Airport Charting and Publication of Airport Data. Objection- able airspace determinations are based upon a number of factors including conflicting traffic patterns with another airport, hazardous runway conditions, or natural or man-made obstacles in close proximity to the landing area. FAA Regional Airports Offices are responsible for airspace determinations. Address any challenges to objectionable airspace determina - tions to your FAA Regional Airports Office.\n\n## AIRSPACE\n\n## CONTROLLED AIRSPACE\n\nControlled airspace consists of those areas where some or all aircraft may be subject to air traffic control, such as: Class A, Class B, Class C, Class D, Class E Surface (SFC) and Class E Airspace.\n\nClass A Airspace within the United States extends from 18,000' up to FL600. While visual charts do not depict Class A, it is important to note its existence.\n\nClass B Airspace is shown in abbreviated form on the Caribbean Charts (CAC) . The Sectional Aeronautical Chart (Sectional) and Terminal Area Chart (TAC) show Class B in greater detail. The MSL ceiling and floor alti - tudes of each sector are shown in solid blue figures with the last two zeros omitted. Floors extending \"upward from above\" a certain altitude are preceded by a (+). Operations at and below these altitudes are outside of Class B Airspace. Radials and arcs used to define Class B are prominently shown on TACs. Detailed rules and requirements associated with the particular Class B are shown. The name by which the Class B is shown as for example.\n\nClass C Airspace is shown in abbreviated form on Caribbean Charts (CAC). Sectionals and TACs show Class C in greater detail. The MSL ceiling and floor altitudes of each sector are shown in solid magenta figures with the last two zeros eliminated.\n\nFAA Chart Users’ Guide - VFR Terms and Symbols\n\n The figure at left identifies a sector that extends from the surface to the base of the Class B.\n\nClass C Airspace is identified by name: \n\nSeparate notes, enclosed in magenta boxes, give the approach control frequencies to be used by arriving VFR aircraft to establish two-way radio communication before entering the Class C (generally within 20 NM): \n\nClass C operating less than continuous is indicated by the following note: \n\nClass D Airspace is identified with a blue dashed line. Class D operating less than continuous is indicated by the follow - ing note:\n\nCeilings of Class D are shown as follows: \n\nA minus in front of the figure is used to indicate \"from surface to, but not including...\"\n\nClass E Surface (SFC) Airspace is symbolized with a magenta dashed line. Class E (SFC) operating less than continu- ous is indicated by the following note:\n\nClass E Airspace exists at 1200' AGL unless designated otherwise. The lateral and vertical vertical limits of all Class E, (up to, but not including 18,000') are shown by narrow bands of vignette on Sectionals and TACs.\n\nControlled airspace floors of 700' above the ground are defined by a magenta vignette; floors other than 700' that laterally abut uncontrolled airspace (Class G) are defined by a blue vignette; differing floors greater than 700' above the ground are annotated by a symbol \n\n17" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8984297146569995, + "doc_id": "312621d1465cadad61338d4f0434fc8dbcc9fcd3e29630e83f773ea85fbcd276", + "edit_distance": 0.6326002587322122, + "f1_score": 0.9265536723163841, + "meteor": 0.793329673832206, + "precision": 0.9647058823529412, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS oo-80~-80 APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYl,NG\n\nIf the rotor could operate within a wide range of rotor speed, the efficiency and performance could be improved.\n\nWith the previous relationships established for the rotor in hovering flight, the effect of forward flight br rotor translation can be considered. With forward flight, a third velocity component, that tif the forward velocity of the helicopter, must be considered in determining the relative wind acting on each rotor blade element. Since the entire rotor moves with the helicopter, the velocity of air passing over each of the elements on the advancfng blade is increased by the forward speed of the helicopter and the velocity of the air passing over each element of the retreating blade is decreased by the same amount. This is shown in figure 6.16.\n\nIf the blade angles of attack on both advancing and retreating blades remained the same as in hovering flight, the higher velocity on the advancing blade would cause a dissymmetry of lift and the helicopter would tend to roll to the left. It was this effect that created great difficu!ty during many early helicopter and autogiro projects. Juan De La Cierva was the first to realize what caused this effect and he solved the problem by mounting his autogiro blades individually on flapping hinges, thus allowing a flapping action to automatically correct the dissymmetry of lift that resulted from forward flight. This is the method still used in an articulated rotor system today. The see-saw, or semi-rigid, rotor corrects the lift dissymmetry by rocking the entire hub and blades about a gimbal joint, By rocking the entire rotor system forward, the angle of attack on the advancing blade is reduced and the angle of attack on the retreating blade is increased. The rigid rotor must produce cyclic variation of the blade pitch mechanically as the blade rotates to eliminate the lift dissymmetry. Irrespective of the method used to correct the dissymmetry of lift, identical aerodynamic characteristics result. Thus, what is\n\nsaid about rotor aerodynamics is equally valid for all types of rotor systems.\n\nBy analyzing the velocity components acting on the rotor blade sections from the blade root to the tip on both advancing and retreating blades, a large variation of blade section angle of attack is found. Figure 6.16 illustrates a typical variation of the local blade angle of attack for various spanwise positions along the advancing and retreating blades of a rotor at high forward speed. There is a region of positive angles of attack resulting in positive lift over the entire advancing blade. Immediately next to the hub of the retreating blade there is an area of reversed flow where the velocity due to the forward motion of the helicopter is greater than the rearward velocity due to the blade rotation. The next area is a negative stall region where, although the flow is in the proper direction relative the blade, the angle of attack exceeds that for negative stall. Progressing out the retreating blade, the blade angle of attack becomes less negative, resulting in an area of negative lift. Then the blade angle becomes positive again, resulting in a positive lift region. The blade angle continues to increase, until near the tip of the retreating blade the positive stall angle of attack is exceeded, resulting in stalling of the tip section. This wide variation in blade section angles of attack results in a large variation in blade section lift and drag coefKcients. The overall lift force on the left and right sides of the rotor disc are equalized by cyclically varying the blade pitch as explained previously, but the drag variation is not eliminated. This drag variation causes a shaking force on the rotor system and contributes to the vibration of the helicopter.\n\nRETREATING BLADE STALL. Retreating blade stall results whenever the angle of attack of the blade exceeds the stall angle of attack of the blade section. This condition occurs in high speed flight at the tip of the retreating blade since, in order to develop the same lift as the advancing blade, the retreating", + "recall": 0.8913043478260869, + "true_md": "## NAVWEPS oo-80~-80 APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYl,NG\n\nsaid about rotor aerodynamics is equally valid for all types of rotor systems. By analyzing the velocity components acting \n\nIf the rotor could operate within a wide range of rotor speed, the efficiency and per- formance could be improved. \n\nWith the previous relationships established for the rotor in hovering flight, the effect of forward flight br rotor translation can be con- sidered. With forward flight, a third velocity component, that tif the forward velocity of the helicopter, must be considered in determining the relative wind acting on each rotor blade element. Since the entire rotor moves with the helicopter, the velocity of air passing over each of the elements on the advancfng blade is increased by the forward speed of the heli- copter and the velocity of the air passing over each element of the retreating blade is de- creased by the same amount. This is shown in figure 6.16. \n\nfor all types of rotor systems. By analyzing the velocity components acting on the rotor blade sections from the blade root to the tip on both advancing and retreat- ing blades, a large variation of blade section angle of attack is found. Figure 6.16 illus- trates a typical variation of the local blade angle of attack for various spanwise positions along the advancing and retreating blades of a rotor at high forward speed. There is a region of positive angles of attack resulting in positive lift over the entire advancing blade. Immediately next to the hub of the retreating blade there is an area of reversed flow where the velocity due to the forward motion of the helicopter is greater than the rearward velocity due to the blade rotation. The next area is a negative stall region where, although the flow is in the proper direction relative the blade, the angle of attack exceeds that for negative stall. Progressing out the retreating blade, the blade angle of attack becomes less negative, resulting in an area of negative lift. Then the blade angle becomes positive again, resulting in a positive lift region. The blade angle continues to increase, until near the tip of the retreating blade the positive stall angle of attack is exceeded, resulting in stalling of the tip section. This wide variation in blade section angles of attack results in a large variation in blade section lift and drag coefK- cients. The overall lift force on the left and right sides of the rotor disc are equalized by cyclically varying the blade pitch as explained previously, but the drag variation is not eliminated. This drag variation causes a shaking force on the rotor system and con- tributes to the vibration of the helicopter. \n\nIf the blade angles of attack on both advanc- ing and retreating blades remained the same as in hovering flight, the higher velocity on the advancing blade would cause a dissym- metry of lift and the helicopter would tend to roll to the left. It was this effect that created great difficu!ty during many early helicopter and autogiro projects. Juan De La Cierva was the first to realize what caused this effect and he solved the problem by mounting his auto- giro blades individually on flapping hinges, thus allowing a flapping action to automati- cally correct the dissymmetry of lift that re- sulted from forward flight. This is the method still used in an articulated rotor system today. The see-saw, or semi-rigid, rotor corrects the lift dissymmetry by rocking the entire hub and blades about a gimbal joint, By rocking the entire rotor system forward, the angle of at- tack on the advancing blade is reduced and the angle of attack on the retreating blade is increased. The rigid rotor must produce cyclic variation of the blade pitch mechanically as the blade rotates to eliminate the lift dissym- metry. Irrespective of the method used to correct the dissymmetry of lift, identical aero- dynamic characteristics result. Thus, what is \n\nRETREATING BLADE STALL. Retreat- ing blade stall results whenever the angle of attack of the blade exceeds the stall angle of attack of the blade section. This condition occurs in high speed flight at the tip of the retreating blade since, in order to develop the same lift as the advancing blade, the retreating" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9088666957768545, + "doc_id": "140dbae9cdd7e3c442542d355609441424b61306cc850f73bb661a9740b7345d", + "edit_distance": 0.5354558610709117, + "f1_score": 0.9428007889546353, + "meteor": 0.7824944710120828, + "precision": 0.9676113360323887, + "pred_md": "## BRAKING PERFORMANCE\n\nFor the majority of airplane configurations and runways conditions, the airplane brakes furnish the most powerful means of deceleration. While specific techniques of braking are required for specific situations, there are various fundamentals which are common to all conditions.\n\nSolid ftictim is the resistance to relative motion of two surfaces in contact. When relative motion exists between the surfaces, the resistance to relative motion is termed ' kinetic' or ' sliding' friction; when no relative motion exists between the surfaces, the resistance to the impending relative motion is termed ' static' friction. The minute discontinuities of the surfaces in contact are able to mate quite closely when relative motion impends rather than exists, so static friction will generally exceed kinetic friction. The magnitude of the friction force between two surfaces will depend in great part on the types of surfaces in contact and the magnitude of force pressing the surfaces together. A convenient method of relating the friction charactersitics of surfaces in contact is a proportion of the friction force to the normal (or perpendicular) force pressing the surfaces together. This proportion defines the coefficient of friction, ~1.\n\n\n\nwhere\n\np =coefFicient of friction (mu)\n\nF =friction force, Ibs.\n\nN = normal force, lbs.\n\nThe coefficient of friction of tires on a runway surface is a function of many factors. Runway surface condition, rubber composition, tread, inflation pressure, surface friction shearing stress, relative slip speed, etc., all are factors which affect the coefficient of friction. When the tire is rolling along the runway without the use of brakes, the friction force resulting is simple rolling resistance. The coefficient of\n\n387\n\n## NAVWEPS O&ROT-R0 APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYING\n\nrolling friction is of an approximate magnitude of 0.015 to 0.030 for dry, hard runway surface.\n\nThe application of brakes supplies a torque to the wheel which tends co retard wheel rotation. However, the initial application of brakes creates a braking torque but the initial retarding torque is balanced by the increase in friction force which produces a driving or rolling torque. Of course, when the braking torque is equal to the rolling torque, the wheel experiences no acceleration in rotation and the equilibrium of a constant rotational speed is maintained. Thus, the application of brake develops a retarding torque and causes an increase in friction force between the tire and runway surface. A common problem of braking technique is application of excessive brake pressure which creates a braking torque greater than the maximum possible rolling torque. In this case, the wheel loses rotational speed and decelerates until the wheel is stationary and the result is a locked wheel with the tire surface subject to a full slip condition.\n\nThe relationship of friction force, normal force, braking torque, and rolling torque is illustrated in figure 6.11.\n\nThe effect of slip velocity on the coefficient of friction is illustrated by the graph of figure 6.11. The conditions of zero slip corresponds to the rolling wheel without brake application while the condition of full, 100 percent slip corresponds to the locked wheel where the relative velocity between the tire surface and the runway equals the actual velocity. With the application of brakes, the coefficient of friction increases but incurs a small but measurable apparent slip. Continued increase in friction coefficient is obtained until some maximum is achieved then decreases as the slip increases and approaching the 100 percent slip condition. Actually, the peak value of coefficient of friction occurs at an incipient skid condition and the relative slip apparent at this point consists primarily of elastic shearing deflection of the tire structure.", + "recall": 0.9192307692307692, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS O&ROT-R0 APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYING \n\n## BRAKING PERFORMANCE\n\nFor the majority of airplane configurations and runways conditions, the airplane brakes furnish the most powerful means of deceler- ation. While specific techniques of braking are required for specific situations, there are various fundamentals which are common to all conditions. \n\nSolid ftictim is the resistance to relative motion of two surfaces in contact. When relative motion exists between the surfaces, the resistance to relative motion is termed “kinetic” or “sliding” friction; when no relative motion exists between the surfaces, the resistance to the impending relative mo- tion is termed “static” friction. The minute discontinuities of the surfaces in contact are able to mate quite closely when relative motion impends rather than exists, so static friction will generally exceed kinetic friction. The magnitude of the friction force between two surfaces will depend in great part on the types of surfaces in contact and the magnitude of force pressing the surfaces together. A convenient method of relating the friction charactersitics of surfaces in contact is a proportion of the friction force to the normal (or perpendicular) force pressing the surfaces together. This proportion defines the coeffi- cient of friction, ~1. \n\nwhere p =coefFicient of friction (mu) \n\nThe coefficient of friction of tires on a runway surface is a function of many factors. Runway surface condition, rubber composition, tread, inflation pressure, surface friction shearing stress, relative slip speed, etc., all are factors which affect the coefficient of friction. When the tire is rolling along the runway without the use of brakes, the friction force resulting is simple rolling resistance. The coefficient of \n\nThe effect of slip velocity on the coefficient of friction is illustrated by the graph of figure 6.11. The conditions of zero slip corresponds to the rolling wheel without brake application while the condition of full, 100 percent slip corresponds to the locked wheel where the relative velocity between the tire surface and the runway equals the actual velocity. With the application of brakes, the coefficient of friction increases but incurs a small but meas- urable apparent slip. Continued increase in friction coefficient is obtained until some max- imum is achieved then decreases as the slip increases and approaching the 100 percent slip condition. Actually, the peak value of co- efficient of friction occurs at an incipient skid condition and the relative slip apparent at this point consists primarily of elastic shearing deflection of the tire structure. \n\nThe relationship of friction force, normal force, braking torque, and rolling torque is illustrated in figure 6.11. \n\nrolling friction is of an approximate magnitude of 0.015 to 0.030 for dry, hard runway surface. \n\nThe application of brakes supplies a torque to the wheel which tends co retard wheel rota- tion. However, the initial application of brakes creates a braking torque but the initial retarding torque is balanced by the increase in friction force which produces a driving or rolling torque. Of course, when the braking torque is equal to the rolling torque, the wheel experiences no acceleration in rotation and the equilibrium of a constant rotational speed is maintained. Thus, the application of brake develops a retarding torque and causes an increase in friction force between the tire and runway surface. A common problem of brak- ing technique is application of excessive brake pressure which creates a braking torque greater than the maximum possible rolling torque. In this case, the wheel loses rotational speed and decelerates until the wheel is stationary and the result is a locked wheel with the tire surface subject to a full slip condition. \n\n387 \n\n$$,L= F/N $$\n\nwhere p =coefFicient of friction (mu) \n\nF =friction force, Ibs. \n\nN = normal force, lbs." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.666401148089856, + "doc_id": "aa9fc61d43ad87f0edd469557b01d42f1d9aa52151b11a251c11dd164dbc6fd5", + "edit_distance": 0.6274509803921569, + "f1_score": 0.8579545454545455, + "meteor": 0.6584814562936799, + "precision": 0.94375, + "pred_md": "The effect of density altitude on powerplant thrust depends much on the type of powerplant. An increase in altitude above standard sea level will bring an immediate decrease in power output for the unsupercharged or ground boosted reciprocating engine or the turbojet and turboprop engines. However, an increase in altitude above standard sea level will not cause a decrease in power output for the supercharged reciprocating engine until the altitude exceeds the critical altitude. For those powerplants which experience a decay in thrust with an increase in altitude, the effect on the net accelerating force and acceleration can be approximated by assuming a direct variation with density. Actually, this assumed variation would closely approximate the effect on airplanes with high thrust-to-weight ratios. This relationship would be as follows:\n\n\n\nwhere\n\nai, Fn, = acceleration and net accelerating force corresponding to sea level aa, Fn, = acceleration and net accelerating force corresponding to altitude ~=altitude density ratio\n\nIn order to evaluate the effect of these items on takeoff distance, the following relationships are used :\n\nif an increase in altitude does not alter acceleration, the principal effect would be due to the greater TAS\n\n\n\nwhere\n\nSi=standard sea level takeoff distance St= takeoff distance at altitude o-altitude density ratio\n\nif an increase in altitude reduces acceleration in addition to the increase in TAS, the\n\n191\n\n-\n\n## NAVWEPS 00-805-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE\n\ncombined effects would be approximated for the case of the airplane with high intrinsic acceleration by the following:\n\n\n\nwhere\n\nS,= standard sea level takeoff distance Ja= takeoff distance at altitude o=altitude density ratio\n\nAs a result of these relationships, it should. be appreciated that density altitude will affect takeoff performance in a fashion depending much on the powerplant type. The effect of density altitude on takeoff distance can be appreciated by the following comparison:\n\n-\n\n-\n\n-\n\nFrom the previous table, some approximate rules of thumb may be derived to illustrated the differences between the various airplane types. A 1,ooo-ft. increase in density altitude", + "recall": 0.7864583333333334, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-805-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE \n\ncombined effects would be approximated for the case of the airplane with high in- trinsic acceleration by the following: \n\nThe effect of density altitude on powerplant thrust depends much on the type of power- plant. An increase in altitude above standard sea level will bring an immediate decrease in power output for the unsupercharged or ground boosted reciprocating engine or the turbojet and turboprop engines. However, an increase in altitude above standard sea level will not cause a decrease in power output for the super- charged reciprocating engine until the altitude exceeds the critical altitude. For those power- plants which experience a decay in thrust with an increase in altitude, the effect on the net accelerating force and acceleration can be ap- proximated by assuming a direct variation with density. Actually, this assumed vari- ation would closely approximate the effect on airplanes with high thrust-to-weight ratios. This relationship would be as follows: \n\nwhere S,= standard sea level takeoff distance Ja= takeoff distance at altitude o=altitude density ratio \n\n$$g=(gyx(~) g=(i)x(;) s2 12 -= - 0 J-1 a $$\n\n$$a2 Fm P -=-=-En al Frill PO $$\n\nAs a result of these relationships, it should. be appreciated that density altitude will affect takeoff performance in a fashion depending much on the powerplant type. The effect of density altitude on takeoff distance can be appreciated by the following comparison: \n\nwhere ai, Fn, = acceleration and net accelerating \n\n- where ai, Fn, = acceleration and net accelerating force corresponding to sea level \n\n- aa, Fn, = acceleration and net accelerating force corresponding to altitude ~=altitude density ratio \n\n- force corresponding to altitude ~=altitude density ratio \n\nIn order to evaluate the effect of these items on takeoff distance, the following relationships are used : if an increase in altitude does not alter ac- \n\nare used : if an increase in altitude does not alter ac- celeration, the principal effect would be due to the greater TAS \n\nwhere \n\nif an increase in altitude reduces accelera- tion in addition to the increase in TAS, the \n\nFrom the previous table, some approximate rules of thumb may be derived to illustrated the differences between the various airplane types. A 1,ooo-ft. increase in density altitude \n\n- Si=standard sea level takeoff distance \n\n- St= takeoff distance at altitude o-altitude density ratio \n\n- St= takeoff distance at altitude o-altitude density ratio \n\n$$;=(g,yxe) f2 1 -=- $1 (T $$\n\n191" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.11294523723577912, + "doc_id": "07fed3ba17c6f9eae04afa39bda6610e8420f335e1e99c61ecd7bf427d3141e7", + "edit_distance": 0.9393939393939394, + "f1_score": 0.3333333333333333, + "meteor": 0.6020064591493163, + "precision": 0.20212765957446807, + "pred_md": "FAA Chart Users' Guide - VFR Symbology - Sectional and Terminal Area Charts\n\n## AIRSPACE INFORMATION (Continued)\n\n## Special Air Traffic Rules / Airport Patterns (FAR Part 93)\n\nAppropriate boxed note as required shown adjacent to area.\n\nInside the FAR Part 93 boundary area, the cross hatching is at a 45 degree angle. The hypsometric tint shall be masked within the area around the yellow city tint when applicable (should not be confused with white glacier tint).\n\n## Flight Restricted Zone (FRZ) Relating to National Security\n\n## Air Defense Identification Zone (ADIZ)\n\nNote: Delimiting line not shown when it coincides with International Boundary, projection lines or other linear features.\n\n30", + "recall": 0.95, + "true_md": "## AIRSPACE INFORMATION (Continued)\n\nFAA Chart Users’ Guide - VFR Symbology - Sectional and Terminal Area Charts\n\n30" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6383240325919926, + "doc_id": "37d2d9fa6160352d01870a3750190284047237573deb12011f701a9383d065ae", + "edit_distance": 0.25, + "f1_score": 0.8484848484848485, + "meteor": 0.966594982078853, + "precision": 0.7368421052631579, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS OO-ROT-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS\n\n## ICAO STANDARD ATMOSPHERE\n\n*GEOPOTENTIAL OF THE TROPOPAUSE\n\nFigure 1.7. Standard Altitude Table", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OO-ROT-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS \n\n## ICAO STANDARD ATMOSPHERE\n\nFigure 1.7. Standard Altitude Table" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8958817941280213, + "doc_id": "ab8934f2bbc8cae689084876a6645f520ef383cbc5f591e12aa2482b6c93ad5d", + "edit_distance": 0.3001345895020188, + "f1_score": 0.9273743016759776, + "meteor": 0.7592184954879808, + "precision": 0.9764705882352941, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS DD-BOT-BO APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYING\n\nBRAKING TECHNIQUE. It must be clearly distinguished that the techniques for minimum stop distance may differ greatly from the techniques required to minimize wear and tear on the tires and brakes. For the majority of airplane configurations, brakes will provide the most important source of deceleration for all but the most severe of icy runway conditions. Of course, aerodynamic drag is very durable and should be utilized to decelerate the airplane if the runway is long enough and the drag high enough. Aerodynamic drag will be of importance only for the initial 20 to 30 percent of speed reduction from the point of touchdown. At speeds less than 60 to 70 percent of the landing speed, aerodynamic drag is of little consequence and brakes will be the principal source of deceleration regardless of the runway surface. For the conditions of minimum landing distance, aerodynamic drag will be a principal source of deceleration only for the initial portion of landing roll for very high drag configurations on very poor runway conditions. These cases are quite limited so considerable importance must be assigned to proper use of the brakes to produce maximum effectiveness.\n\nIn order to provide the maximum possible retarding force, effort must be directed to produce the maximum normal force on the braking surfaces. (See figure 6.11.) The pilot will be able to influence the normal force on the braking surfaces during the initial part of the landing roll when dynamic pressure is large and aerodynamic forces and moments are of consequence. During this portion of the landing roll the pilot can control the airplane lift and the distribution of normal force to the landing gears.\n\nFirst to consider is that any positive lift will support a part of the airplane weight and reduce the normal force on the landing gear. Of course, for the purposes of braking friction, it would be to advantage to create negative lift but this is not the usual capability of the airplane with the tricycle landing gear. Since\n\n390\n\nthe airplane lift may be considerable immediately after landing, retraction of flaps or extension of spoilers immediately after touchdown will reduce the wing lift and increase the normal force on the landing gear. With the retraction of flaps, the reduced drag is more than compensated for by the increased braking friction force afforded by the increased normal force on the braking surfaces.\n\nA second possible factor to control braking effectiveness is the distribution of normal force to the landing gear surfaces. The nose wheel of the tricycle landing gear configuration usually has no brakes and any normal force distributed to this wheel is useful only for producing side force for control of the airplane. Under conditions of deceleration, the nosedown pitching moment created by the friction force and the inertia force tends to transfer a significant amount of normal force to nose wheel where it is unavailable to assist in creating friction force. For the instant after landing touchdown, the pilot may control this condition to some extent and regain or increase the normal force on the main wheels. After touchdown, the nose is lowered until the nose wheel contacts the runway then brakes are applied while the stick is eased back without lifting the nose wheel back off the runway. The effect is to minimize the normal force on the nose wheel and increase the normal force on braking surfaces. While the principal effect is to transfer normal force to the main wheels, there may be a significant increase in normal force due to a reduction in net lift, i.e., tail download is noticeable. This reduction in net lift tends to be particular to tailless or short coupled airplane configurations.\n\nThe combined effect of flap retraction and aft stickis a significant increase in braking friction force. Of course, the flaps should not be retracted while still airborne and aft stick should be used just enough without lifting the nosewheel off the runway. These techniques are to no avail if proper use of the", + "recall": 0.8829787234042553, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS DD-BOT-BO APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYING \n\nthe airplane lift may be considerable immedi- ately after landing, retraction of flaps or ex- tension of spoilers immediately after touch- down will reduce the wing lift and increase the normal force on the landing gear. With the retraction of flaps, the reduced drag is more than compensated for by the increased braking friction force afforded by the increased normal force on the braking surfaces. \n\nBRAKING TECHNIQUE. It must be clearly distinguished that the techniques for minimum stop distance may differ greatly from the techniques required to minimize wear and tear on the tires and brakes. For the majority of airplane configurations, brakes will provide the most important source of deceleration for all but the most severe of icy runway condi- tions. Of course, aerodynamic drag is very durable and should be utilized to decelerate the airplane if the runway is long enough and the drag high enough. Aerodynamic drag will be of importance only for the initial 20 to 30 per- cent of speed reduction from the point of touch- down. At speeds less than 60 to 70 percent of the landing speed, aerodynamic drag is of little consequence and brakes will be the principal source of deceleration regardless of the runway surface. For the conditions of minimum land- ing distance, aerodynamic drag will be a prin- cipal source of deceleration only for the initial portion of landing roll for very high drag con- figurations on very poor runway conditions. These cases are quite limited so considerable importance must be assigned to proper use of the brakes to produce maximum effectiveness. \n\nIn order to provide the maximum possible retarding force, effort must be directed to pro- duce the maximum normal force on the braking surfaces. (See figure 6.11.) The pilot will be able to influence the normal force on the brak- ing surfaces during the initial part of the land- ing roll when dynamic pressure is large and aerodynamic forces and moments are of conse- quence. During this portion of the landing roll the pilot can control the airplane lift and the distribution of normal force to the landing gears. \n\nFirst to consider is that any positive lift will support a part of the airplane weight and reduce the normal force on the landing gear. Of course, for the purposes of braking friction, it would be to advantage to create negative lift but this is not the usual capability of the air- plane with the tricycle landing gear. Since \n\nThe combined effect of flap retraction and aft stickis a significant increase in braking friction force. Of course, the flaps should not be retracted while still airborne and aft stick should be used just enough without lifting the nosewheel off the runway. These tech- niques are to no avail if proper use of the \n\nA second possible factor to control braking effectiveness is the distribution of normal force to the landing gear surfaces. The nose wheel of the tricycle landing gear configuration usu- ally has no brakes and any normal force dis- tributed to this wheel is useful only for pro- ducing side force for control of the airplane. Under conditions of deceleration, the nose- down pitching moment created by the friction force and the inertia force tends to transfer a significant amount of normal force to nose wheel where it is unavailable to assist in creating friction force. For the instant after landing touchdown, the pilot may control this condition to some extent and regain or increase the normal force on the main wheels. After touchdown, the nose is lowered until the nose wheel contacts the runway then brakes are applied while the stick is eased back with- out lifting the nose wheel back off the runway. The effect is to minimize the normal force on the nose wheel and increase the normal force on braking surfaces. While the principal effect is to transfer normal force to the main wheels, there may be a significant increase in normal force due to a reduction in net lift, i.e., tail download is noticeable. This reduction in net lift tends to be particular to tailless or short coupled airplane configurations. \n\n390" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8771334401430471, + "doc_id": "23e5bbca6a389e3e2adc752feeea137ca1419753f531ce05603bb500d5202dcb", + "edit_distance": 0.11044776119402985, + "f1_score": 0.9324324324324326, + "meteor": 0.8580974316439908, + "precision": 0.9672897196261683, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS 00401-80 APPLICATION OF AERODYNAlvllCS\n\n## TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYING\n\nachieve the takeoff speed in the specified distance. If it is apparent that the airplane is not accelerating normally or that the airplane or powerplant is not functioning properly, a decision must be made to refuse or continue takeoff. If the decision to refuse takeoff is made early in the takeoff roll, no problem exists because the airplane has not gained much speed and a large portion of runway distance is unused. However, at speeds near the takeoff speed, the airplane has used a large portion of the takeoff distance and the distance required to stop is appreciable. The problem which exists is to define the highest speed attained during takeoff acceleration from which the airplane may be decelerated to a stop on the runway length remaining, i.e., the ' refusal speed. ' '\n\nThe refusal speed will be a function of takeoff performance, stopping performance, and the length of available runway. The ideal situation would be to have a runway length which exceeds the total distance required to accelerate to the takeoff speed then decelerate from the takeoff speed. In this case, the refusal speed would exceed the takeoff speed and there would be little concern for the case of refused takeoff. While this may be the case for some instances, the usual case is that the runway length is less than the ' acceleratestop' distance and the refusal speed is less than the takeoff speed. A graphical representation of the refused takeoff condition is illustrated in figure 6.12 by a plot of velocity versus distance. At the beginning of the runway, the airplane starts accelerating and the variation of velocity and distance is defined by the takeoff acceleration profile. The deceleration profile describes the variation of velocity with distance where the airplane is brought to a stop at the end of the runway. The intersection of the acceleration and deceleration profiles then defines the refusal speed and the refusal distance along the runway. Of course, an allowance must be made for the time spent\n\nat the refusal speed as the power is reduced and braking action is initiated.\n\nDuring takeoff, the airplane could be accelerated to any speed up to the refusal speed, then decelerated to a stop on- the runway remaining. Once past the refusal speed, the airplane cannot be brought to a stop on the runway remaining and the airplane is committed to an unsafe stop. If takeoff is refused when above the refusal speed, the only hope is for assistance from the arresting gear, runway barrier, or an extensive overrun at the end of the runway. This fact points to the need for planning of the takeoff and the requirement to monitor the takeoff acceleration.\n\nIf the refusal speed data are not available, the following equations may be used to approximate the refusal speed and distance:\n\nwhere\n\nV,= refusal speed S,= refusal distance\n\nand for the appropriate takeoff configuration,\n\nV,*= takeoff speed\n\nS,,= takeoff distance\n\nV,= landing speed\n\nJ,=landing distance\n\nR. = runway length available\n\nThese approximate relationships do not account for the time spent at the refusal point and must not be used in lieu of accurate handbook data.\n\nIn the case of the single-engine airplane, the pilot must monitor the takeoff performance to recognize malfunctions or lack of adequate acceleration prior to reaching the refusal speed. Obviously, it is to advantage to recognize rhe\n\n3' 92", + "recall": 0.9, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00401-80 \n\n## APPLICATION OF AERODYNAlvllCS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYING\n\nachieve the takeoff speed in the specified dis- tance. If it is apparent that the airplane is not accelerating normally or that the airplane or powerplant is not functioning properly, a decision must be made to refuse or continue takeoff. If the decision to refuse takeoff is made early in the takeoff roll, no problem exists because the airplane has not gained much speed and a large portion of runway distance is unused. However, at speeds near the takeoff speed, the airplane has used a large portion of the takeoff distance and the distance required to stop is appreciable. The problem which exists is to define the highest speed attained during takeoff acceleration from which the airplane may be decelerated to a stop on the runway length remaining, i.e., the “refusal speed. ’ ’ The refusal speed will be a function of take- \n\nspeed. ’ ’ The refusal speed will be a function of take- off performance, stopping performance, and the length of available runway. The ideal situation would be to have a runway length which exceeds the total distance required to accelerate to the takeoff speed then decelerate from the takeoff speed. In this case, the refusal speed would exceed the takeoff speed and there would be little concern for the case of refused takeoff. While this may be the case for some instances, the usual case is that the runway length is less than the “accelerate- stop” distance and the refusal speed is less than the takeoff speed. A graphical representation of the refused takeoff condition is illustrated in figure 6.12 by a plot of velocity versus dis- tance. At the beginning of the runway, the airplane starts accelerating and the variation of velocity and distance is defined by the takeoff acceleration profile. The deceleration profile describes the variation of velocity with distance where the airplane is brought to a stop at the end of the runway. The inter- section of the acceleration and deceleration profiles then defines the refusal speed and the refusal distance along the runway. Of course, an allowance must be made for the time spent \n\nat the refusal speed as the power is reduced and braking action is initiated. \n\nDuring takeoff, the airplane could be accel- erated to any speed up to the refusal speed, then decelerated to a stop on- the runway remaining. Once past the refusal speed, the airplane cannot be brought to a stop on the runway remaining and the airplane is com- mitted to an unsafe stop. If takeoff is refused when above the refusal speed, the only hope is for assistance from the arresting gear, run- way barrier, or an extensive overrun at the end of the runway. This fact points to the need for planning of the takeoff and the require- ment to monitor the takeoff acceleration. \n\nIf the refusal speed data are not available, the following equations may be used to ap- proximate the refusal speed and distance: \n\nwhere \n\nand for the appropriate takeoff configuration, \n\nV,= refusal speed S,= refusal distance \n\nV,*= takeoff speed S,,= takeoff distance V,= landing speed J,=landing distance R. = runway length available \n\nThese approximate relationships do not ac- count for the time spent at the refusal point and must not be used in lieu of accurate handbook data. In the case of the single-engine airplane, the \n\ndata. In the case of the single-engine airplane, the pilot must monitor the takeoff performance to recognize malfunctions or lack of adequate ac- celeration prior to reaching the refusal speed. Obviously, it is to advantage to recognize rhe \n\n3 ’ 92" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6059856413067048, + "doc_id": "627543a56598c1c4de7cbd7e6ab963607675b33ba075a800b425404f97955b9a", + "edit_distance": 0.3076923076923077, + "f1_score": 0.8947368421052632, + "meteor": 0.9567901234567902, + "precision": 0.8095238095238095, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS OO-BOT-RD BASIC AERODYNAMICS\n\nFROM NACA TN 2674\n\nFROM NACA TN 2674\n\nFigure 1.19. Wing Three Dimensional Flow (sheet 2 of 2)\n\n65", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OO-BOT-RD BASIC AERODYNAMICS \n\nFigure 1.19. Wing Three Dimensional Flow (sheet 2 of 2) \n\n65" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7954369121903441, + "doc_id": "18015d1b06df0392c08cc8dc0e2d02d07e9d62e8aa5a4b396429ef4ee9cbe9bd", + "edit_distance": 0.19230769230769232, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9763223118704846, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS oo-8OT-80 APPUCATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYllNG\n\nFigure 6.14. Sonic Booms\n\nFigure 6.14. Sonic Booms\n\nRevised JonuaV 1965\n\n398", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## NAVWEPS oo-8OT-80 APPUCATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYllNG\n\nFigure 6.14. Sonic Booms \n\nRevised JonuaV 1965 \n\n398" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.3679682596057247, + "doc_id": "f5d8319c23b20dd303653d8e0c690f946240f9e25066bd6f6fb54c8dbb7cd001", + "edit_distance": 0.7692307692307693, + "f1_score": 0.8148148148148148, + "meteor": 0.8386776859504134, + "precision": 0.6875, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS 00-ROT-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL\n\n## CONTROL SYSTEM GEARING\n\nCONTROL\n\nSYSTEM STICK\n\nFORCE\n\nFigure 4.27. Longitudinal Control System\n\nFigure 4.27. Longitudinal Control System", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Figure 4.27. Longitudinal Control System \n\nNAVWEPS 00-ROT-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9263805704434919, + "doc_id": "f8acf0146e9d7af78e781427ebf8b57be54233c6fe3a18615172808736b11f2c", + "edit_distance": 0.11483253588516747, + "f1_score": 0.9746478873239436, + "meteor": 0.9750392767770527, + "precision": 0.9774011299435028, + "pred_md": "FAA Chart Users' Guide - Terminal Procedures Publication (TPP) - Terms\n\n## Top Margin Information:\n\nThe city and state with which the airport is associated is located on both the top and bottom margins.\n\nAt the center of the top margin is the FAA numbering system. This Approach and Landing (AL) number is followed by the organization responsible for the procedure in parentheses, e.g., AL-18 (FAA), AL-227 (USAF).\n\nThe procedure title is located on both the top and bottom margins. It is derived from the type of navigational facility that is providing the final approach course guidance. The title is abbreviated, e.g. ILS, RNAV, NDB, etc. For airports with parallel runways and simultaneous approach procedures, 'L', 'R' or 'C' follows the runway number to distinguish between left, right, and center runways.\n\nThe airport name is shown on both the top and bottom margins below the procedure title. The airport identifier is shown in parentheses following the airport name. Airports outside the contiguous United States will be shown with the FAA designated identifier followed by the ICAO location identifier.\n\nThe Date of Latest Revision is shown on the top margin above the procedure title. The Date of Latest Revision identifies the Julian date the chart was last revised for any reason. The first two digits indicate the year, the last three digits indicate the day of the year (001 to 365/6).\n\nYear|Day of Year\n\n## Side Margin Information:\n\nThe side margins show the volume identification, i.e. SW-3, followed by the current issue date and the next issue date, e.g. SW-3, 21 JUL 2016 to 15 SEP 2016.\n\n## Bottom Margin Information:\n\nThe FAA Procedure Amendment Number, located on the left bottom margin below the City, State, represents the most current amendment of a given procedure. The Procedure Amendment Effective Date represents the AIRAC cycle date on which the procedure amendment was incorporated into the chart. Updates to the amendment number and effective date represent procedural/criteria revisions to the charted procedure, e.g., course, fix, altitude, minima, etc.\n\n## Example: Original Procedure Date\n\n## Example: Amendment Procedure Date\n\n94", + "recall": 0.9719101123595506, + "true_md": "FAA Chart Users’ Guide - Terminal Procedures Publication (TPP) - Terms\n\n94\n\nThe city and state with which the airport is associated is located on both the top and bottom margins.\n\nAt the center of the top margin is the FAA numbering system. This Approach and Landing (AL) number is followed by the organization responsible for the procedure in parentheses, e.g., AL-18 (FAA), AL-227 (USAF).\n\nThe procedure title is located on both the top and bottom margins. It is derived from the type of navigational facility that is providing the final approach course guidance. The title is abbreviated, e.g. ILS, RNAV, NDB, etc. For airports with parallel runways and simultaneous approach procedures, “L”, “R” or “C” follows the runway number to distinguish between left, right, and center runways.\n\nThe airport name is shown on both the top and bottom margins below the procedure title. The airport identifier is shown in parentheses following the airport name. Airports outside the contiguous United States will be shown with the FAA desig- nated identifier followed by the ICAO location identifier.\n\nThe Date of Latest Revision is shown on the top margin above the procedure title. The Date of Latest Revision identifies the Julian date the chart was last revised for any reason. The first two digits indicate the year, the last three digits indicate the day of the year (001 to 365/6).\n\nThe side margins show the volume identification, i.e. SW-3, followed by the current issue date and the next issue date, e.g. SW-3, 21 JUL 2016 to 15 SEP 2016.\n\nThe FAA Procedure Amendment Number, located on the left bottom margin below the City, State, represents the most current amendment of a given procedure. The Procedure Amendment Effective Date represents the AIRAC cycle date on which the procedure amendment was incorporated into the chart. Updates to the amendment number and effective date represent procedural/criteria revisions to the charted procedure, e.g., course, fix, altitude, minima, etc.\n\n## Top Margin Information:\n\n## Side Margin Information:\n\n## Bottom Margin Information:\n\nExample: Amendment Procedure Date\n\nExample: Original Procedure Date" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8202331523266099, + "doc_id": "416b14a8f0c3d8d513879c0c5e646ca1d99f3c21642d17af0048c7f5b648f99b", + "edit_distance": 0.6817558299039781, + "f1_score": 0.8900709219858155, + "meteor": 0.6729714064143062, + "precision": 0.9296296296296296, + "pred_md": "The detonation properties of a fuel are determined by the basic molecular structure of the fuel and the various additives. The fuel detonation properties are generally specified by the antidetonation or antiknock qualities of an octane rating. Since the antiknock properties of a high quality fuel may depend on the mixture strength, provision must be made in. the rating of fuels. Thus, a fuel grade of IIS/ would relate a lean mixture antiknock rating of 115 and a rich mixture antiknock rating of 145. One of the most common operational causes of detonation is fuel contamination. An extremely small contamination of high octane fuel with jet fuel can cause a serious ,decrease in the antiknock rating. Also, the contamination of a high grade fuel with the next lower grade will cause a noticeable loss of antiknock quality.\n\nThe fuel metering requirements for an engine are illustrated by the third graph of figure 2.16 which is a plot of fuel-air ratio versus engine airflow. The carburetor must provide specific fuel-air ratios throughout the range of engine airflow to accommodate certain output power. Most modern engines equipped with automatic mixture control provide a scheduling of fuel-air ratio for automatic rich or automatic lean operation. The auto-rich scheduling usually provides a fuel-air ratio at or near the maximum heat release value for the middle range of airflows. However, at high airflows a power enrichment must be provided to suppress detonation. The auto-rich schedule generally will provide an approximate fuel-air ratio of 0.08 which increases to 0.10 or 0.11 at the airflow for takeoff power. In addition, the low airflow and mixture dilution that occurs in the idle power range requires enrichment for satisfactory operation.\n\nThe schedule of fuel-air ratios with an automatic lean fuel-air ratio will automatically provide maximum usable economy. If manual leaning procedures are applicable a lower fuelair ratio may be necessary for maximum possible efficiency. The maximum continuous\n\n141\n\nNAVWEPS 00-8OT-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE\n\ncruise power is the upper limit of power that can be utilized for this operation. Higher airflows and higher power wirhout a change in fuel-air ratio will intersect the knee of the detonation envelope.\n\nThe primary factor relating the efficiency of operation of the reciprocating engine is the brake specific fuel consumption, i WE%, or simply c.\n\nBrake suecific fuel consumution I\n\n\n\nTypical minimum values for c range from 0.4 to 0.6 lbs. per hr. per BHP and most aircraft powerplaots average 0.5. The turbocompound engine is generally the most efficient because of the power recovery turbines and can approach values of c=O.38 to 0.42. It should be noted that the minimum values of specific fuel consumption will be obtained only within the range of cruise power operation, 30 to 60 percent of the maximum power output. Generally, the conditions of minimum specific fuel consumption are achieved with auto-lean or manual lean scheduling of fuel-air ratios and high BMEP and low RPM. The low RPM is the usual requirement to minimize friction horsepower and improve output efficiency.\n\nThe effect of &it&c is to reduce the engine airflow and power output and supercharging is necessary to maintain high power output at high altitude. Since the basic engine is able to process air only by the basic volume displacement, the function of the supercharger is to compress the inlet air and provide a greater weight of air for the engine to process. Of course, shaft power is necessary to operate the engine driven supercharger and a temperature rise occurs through the supercharger compression. The effect of various forms of supercharging on altitude performance is illustrated in figure 2.17.\n\nThe unsupercharged-or naturally aspirated-engine has no means of providing a", + "recall": 0.8537414965986394, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-8OT-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE \n\ncruise power is the upper limit of power that can be utilized for this operation. Higher air- flows and higher power wirhout a change in fuel-air ratio will intersect the knee of the detonation envelope. \n\nThe primary factor relating the efficiency of operation of the reciprocating engine is the brake specific fuel consumption, iWE%, or simply c. \n\nBrake suecific fuel consumution I \n\nThe detonation properties of a fuel are de- termined by the basic molecular structure of the fuel and the various additives. The fuel detonation properties are generally specified by the antidetonation or antiknock qualities of an octane rating. Since the antiknock proper- ties of a high quality fuel may depend on the mixture strength, provision must be made in. the rating of fuels. Thus, a fuel grade of IIS/ would relate a lean mixture antiknock rating of 115 and a rich mixture antiknock rating of 145. One of the most common opera- tional causes of detonation is fuel contamina- tion. An extremely small contamination of high octane fuel with jet fuel can cause a serious ,decrease in the antiknock rating. Also, the contamination of a high grade fuel with the next lower grade will cause a noticeable loss of antiknock quality. The fuel metering requirements for an engine \n\nTypical minimum values for c range from 0.4 to 0.6 lbs. per hr. per BHP and most aircraft powerplaots average 0.5. The turbocompound engine is generally the most efficient because of the power recovery turbines and can ap- proach values of c=O.38 to 0.42. It should be noted that the minimum values of specific fuel consumption will be obtained only within the range of cruise power operation, 30 to 60 per- cent of the maximum power output. Gen- erally, the conditions of minimum specific fuel consumption are achieved with auto-lean or manual lean scheduling of fuel-air ratios and high BMEP and low RPM. The low RPM is the usual requirement to minimize friction horsepower and improve output efficiency. The effect of &it&c is to reduce the engine \n\nantiknock quality. The fuel metering requirements for an engine are illustrated by the third graph of figure 2.16 which is a plot of fuel-air ratio versus engine airflow. The carburetor must provide specific fuel-air ratios throughout the range of engine airflow to accommodate certain output power. Most modern engines equipped with auto- matic mixture control provide a scheduling of fuel-air ratio for automatic rich or automatic lean operation. The auto-rich scheduling usu- ally provides a fuel-air ratio at or near the maximum heat release value for the middle range of airflows. However, at high airflows a power enrichment must be provided to sup- press detonation. The auto-rich schedule gen- erally will provide an approximate fuel-air ratio of 0.08 which increases to 0.10 or 0.11 at the airflow for takeoff power. In addition, the low airflow and mixture dilution that oc- curs in the idle power range requires enrich- ment for satisfactory operation. \n\nhorsepower and improve output efficiency. The effect of &it&c is to reduce the engine airflow and power output and supercharging is necessary to maintain high power output at high altitude. Since the basic engine is able to process air only by the basic volume displacement, the function of the supercharger is to compress the inlet air and provide a greater weight of air for the engine to process. Of course, shaft power is necessary to operate the engine driven supercharger and a tempera- ture rise occurs through the supercharger com- pression. The effect of various forms of super- charging on altitude performance is illustrated in figure 2.17. \n\nThe unsupercharged-or naturally aspi- rated-engine has no means of providing a \n\nThe schedule of fuel-air ratios with an auto- matic lean fuel-air ratio will automatically provide maximum usable economy. If manual leaning procedures are applicable a lower fuel- air ratio may be necessary for maximum possi- ble efficiency. The maximum continuous \n\n$$I engine fuel flow = brake horsepower C= lbs. per hr. BHP $$\n\n141" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8571716115469517, + "doc_id": "4de896608b5adbf53a04f83def2c0e1fe22e3cb9e7f9435f98266e4e721997b7", + "edit_distance": 0.7804195804195804, + "f1_score": 0.9382239382239381, + "meteor": 0.6393219636514609, + "precision": 0.972, + "pred_md": "effective and these sections have a small spanwise moment arm. Therefore, the changes in wing lift due to sideslip occur closer inboard and the dihedral effect is reduced. The effect of power on dihedral effect is negligible for the jet airplane but considerable for the propeller driven airplane. The propeller slipstream at high power and low airspeed makes the inboard wing sections much more effective and reduces the dihedral effect. The reduction in dihedral effect is most critical when the flap and power effects are combined, e.g., the propeller driven airplane in the power approach or waveoff.\n\nWith certain exceptions during the conditions of landing and takeoff, the dihedral effect or lateral stability should be positive but light. The problems created by excessive dihedral effect are considerable and difficult to contend with. Lateral stability will be evident to a pilot by stick forces and displacements required to maintain sideslip. Positive stick force stability will be evident by stick forces required in the direction of the controlled sideslip.\n\n## LATERAL DYNAMIC EFFECTS\n\nPrevious discussion has separated the lateral and directional response of the airplane to sideslip. This separation is convenient for detailed study of each the airplane static lateral stability and the airplane static directional stability. However, when the airplane in free flight is placed in a sideslip, the lateral and directional response will be coupled, i.e., simultaneously the airplane produces rolling moment due to sideslip and yawing moment due to sideslip. Thus, the lateral dynamic motion of the airplane in free flight must consider the coupling or interaction of the lateral and directional effects.\n\nThe principal effects which determine the lateral dynamic characteristics of an airplane are :\n\n- (1) Rolling moment due to sideslip or dihedral effect (lateral stability).\n\n299\n\nNAVWEPS, OO-ROT-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL\n\n- (2) Yawing moment due to sideslip or static directional stability.\n- (3) Yawing moment due to rolling velocity or the adverse (or proverse) yaw.\n- (4) Rolling moment due to yawing velocity-a cross effect similar to (3). If the aircraft has a yawing motion to the right, the left wing will move forward faster and momentarily develop more lift than the right and cause a rolling moment to the right.\n- (3) Aerodynamic side force due to sideslip.\n- (6) Rolling moment due to rolling velocity or damping in roll.\n- (7) Yawing moment due yawing velocity or damping in yaw.\n- (8) The moments of inertia of the airplane about the roll and yaw axes. The complex interaction of these effects pro-\n\nduces three possible types of motion of the airplane: (a) a directional divergence, (b) a spiral divergence, and (c) an oscillatory mode termed Dutch roll.\n\nDirectional divergence is a condition which cannot be tolerated. If the reaction to a small initial sideslip is such as to create moments which tend to increase the sideslip, directional divergence will exist. The sideslip would increase until the airplane is broadside to the wind or structural failure occurs. Of course, increasing the static directional stability reduces the tendency for directional divergence.\n\nSpiral divergence will exist when the static directional stability is very large when compared with the dihedral effect. The character of spiral divergence is by no means violent, The airplane, when disturbed from the equilibrium of level flight, begins a slow spiral which gradually increases to a spiral dive. When a small sideslip is introduced, the strong directional stability tends to restore the nose into the wind while the relatively weak dihedral effect lags in restoring the airplane laterally, In the usual case, the rate of divergence in the", + "recall": 0.9067164179104478, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS, OO-ROT-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL \n\n(2) Yawing moment due to sideslip or static directional stability. \n\n(3) Yawing moment due to rolling veloc- ity or the adverse (or proverse) yaw. \n\n(4) Rolling moment due to yawing ve- locity-a cross effect similar to (3). If the aircraft has a yawing motion to the right, the left wing will move forward faster and momentarily develop more lift than the right and cause a rolling moment to the right. (3) Aerodynamic side force due to side- \n\neffective and these sections have a small spanwise moment arm. Therefore, the changes in wing lift due to sideslip occur closer in- board and the dihedral effect is reduced. The effect of power on dihedral effect is negligible for the jet airplane but considerable for the propeller driven airplane. The propeller slip- stream at high power and low airspeed makes the inboard wing sections much more effective and reduces the dihedral effect. The reduction in dihedral effect is most critical when the flap and power effects are combined, e.g., the propeller driven airplane in the power approach or waveoff. With certain exceptions during the condi- \n\nright. (3) Aerodynamic side force due to side- slip. \n\n(6) Rolling moment due to rolling ve- locity or damping in roll. \n\n(7) Yawing moment due yawing velocity or damping in yaw. \n\nor waveoff. With certain exceptions during the condi- tions of landing and takeoff, the dihedral effect or lateral stability should be positive but light. The problems created by excessive dihedral effect are considerable and difficult to contend with. Lateral stability will be evident to a pilot by stick forces and displace- ments required to maintain sideslip. Positive stick force stability will be evident by stick forces required in the direction of the controlled sideslip. \n\n(8) The moments of inertia of the air- plane about the roll and yaw axes. \n\nThe complex interaction of these effects pro- duces three possible types of motion of the airplane: (a) a directional divergence, (b) a spiral divergence, and (c) an oscillatory mode termed Dutch roll. \n\nDirectional divergence is a condition which cannot be tolerated. If the reaction to a small initial sideslip is such as to create moments which tend to increase the sideslip, directional divergence will exist. The sideslip would in- crease until the airplane is broadside to the wind or structural failure occurs. Of course, increasing the static directional stability re- duces the tendency for directional divergence. \n\nSpiral divergence will exist when the static directional stability is very large when com- pared with the dihedral effect. The character of spiral divergence is by no means violent, The airplane, when disturbed from the equilib- rium of level flight, begins a slow spiral which gradually increases to a spiral dive. When a small sideslip is introduced, the strong direc- tional stability tends to restore the nose into the wind while the relatively weak dihedral effect lags in restoring the airplane laterally, In the usual case, the rate of divergence in the \n\nPrevious discussion has separated the lateral and directional response of the airplane to sideslip. This separation is convenient for detailed study of each the airplane static lateral stability and the airplane static direc- tional stability. However, when the airplane in free flight is placed in a sideslip, the lateral and directional response will be coupled, i.e., simultaneously the airplane produces rolling moment due to sideslip and yawing moment due to sideslip. Thus, the lateral dynamic motion of the airplane in free flight must consider the coupling or interaction of the lateral and directional effects. \n\nThe principal effects which determine the lateral dynamic characteristics of an airplane are : (1) Rolling moment due to sideslip or \n\nare : (1) Rolling moment due to sideslip or dihedral effect (lateral stability). \n\n## LATERAL DYNAMIC EFFECTS\n\n299" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8452400621660624, + "doc_id": "bca5c7981e519c3620725f099bf7de514fb8b380642382d3a364dade30bd786c", + "edit_distance": 0.7148703956343793, + "f1_score": 0.9376114081996434, + "meteor": 0.7144534387020486, + "precision": 0.9704797047970479, + "pred_md": "Since the only control forces are those of the tab, this device makes possible the deflection of large surfaces with relatively small control forces.\n\nA variation of the basic servo tab layout is the sprirzg tab arrangement of figure 4.18. When the control horn is connected to the control surface by springs, the function of the tab is to provide a given portion of the required control forces. The spring tab arrangement can then function as a boost to reduce control forces. The servo tab and spring tab are usually applied to large or high speed subsonic airplanes to provide tolerable stick forces.\n\nThe spring Zoadcd tab of figure 4.18 cotisists of a free tab preloaded with a spring which furnishes a constant moment about the tab hinge line. When the airplane is at zero airspeed, the tab is rotated up to the limit of deflection. As airspeed is increased, the aerodynamic hinge moment on the tab will finally equal the spring torque and the tab will begin to streamline. The effect of this arrangement is to provide a constant hinge moment to the control system and contribute a constant push force requirement at speeds above the preload speed. Thus, the spring loaded tab can improve the stick force gradient in a manner similar to the downspring. Generally, the spring loaded tab may be more desirable because of greater effectiveness and the lack of undesirable control forces during ground operation.\n\nThe various tab devices have almost unlimited possibilities for tailoring control forces. However, these devices must receive proper care and maintenance in order to function properly. In addition, much care must be taken to ensure that no slop or play exists in the joints and fittings, otherwise destructive flutter may occur.\n\n## LONGITUDINAL CONTROL\n\nTo be satisfactory, an airplane must have adequate controllability as well as adequate\n\n275\n\n## NAVWEPS OtWOT-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL\n\nstability. Ati airplane with high static longitudinal stability will exhibit great resistance to displacement from equilibrium. Hence, the most critical conditions of controllability will occur when the airplane has high stability, i.e., the lower limits of controllability will set the upper limits of stability.\n\nThere are three principal conditions of fli~ght which provide the critical requirements of longitudinal control power. Any one or combination of these conditions can determine the longitudinal control power and set a limit to forward c.g. position.\n\nMANEUVERING CONTROL REQUIREMENT. The airplane should have sufficient longitudinal control power to attain the maximum usable lift coefficient or limit load factor during maneuvers. As shown in figure 4.19, forward movement of the c.g. increases the longiturjinal stability of an airplane and requires larger control deflections to produce changes in trim lift coefficient. For the example shown, the maximum effective deflection of the elevator is not capable of triming the airplane ' at C,,,, for c.g. positions ahead of 18 percent MAC.\n\nThis particular control requirement can be most critical for an airplane in supersonic flight. Supersonic flight is usually accom-. panied by large increases in static longltudinal stability and a reduction in the effectiveness of control surfaces. In order to cope with these trends, powerful all-movable surfaces must be used to attain limit load factor or maximum usable C, in supersonic flight. This requirement is so important that once satisfied, the supersonic configuration usually has sufficient longitudinal control power for all other conditions of flight.\n\nTAKEOFF CONTROL REQUIREMENT. At takeoff, the airplane must have sufficient control power to assume the takeoff attitude prior to reaching takeoff speed. Generally, for airplanes with tricycle landing gears, it is desirable to have at least sufficient control power to attain the takeoff attitude at 80", + "recall": 0.906896551724138, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OtWOT-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL \n\nstability. Ati airplane with high static longi- tudinal stability will exhibit great resistance to displacement from equilibrium. Hence, the most critical conditions of controllability will occur when the airplane has high sta- bility, i.e., the lower limits of controllability will set the upper limits of stability. There are three principal conditions of \n\nSince the only control forces are those of the tab, this device makes possible the deflection of large surfaces with relatively small control forces. A variation of the basic servo tab layout is \n\nforces. A variation of the basic servo tab layout is the sprirzg tab arrangement of figure 4.18. When the control horn is connected to the control surface by springs, the function of the tab is to provide a given portion of the required control forces. The spring tab arrangement can then function as a boost to reduce control forces. The servo tab and spring tab are usually applied to large or high speed subsonic airplanes to provide tolerable stick forces. The spring Zoadcd tab of figure 4.18 cotisists \n\nwill set the upper limits of stability. There are three principal conditions of fli~ght which provide the critical requirements of longitudinal control power. Any one or combination of these conditions can de- termine the longitudinal control power and set a limit to forward c.g. position. \n\nMANEUVERING CONTROL REQUIRE- MENT. The airplane should have sufficient longitudinal control power to attain the maxi- mum usable lift coefficient or limit load factor during maneuvers. As shown in figure 4.19, forward movement of the c.g. increases the longiturjinal stability of an airplane and requires larger control deflections to produce changes in trim lift coefficient. For the example shown, the maximum effective de- flection of the elevator is not capable of trim- ing the airplane ‘ at C,,,, for c.g. positions ahead of 18 percent MAC. This particular control requirement can be \n\nairplanes to provide tolerable stick forces. The spring Zoadcd tab of figure 4.18 cotisists of a free tab preloaded with a spring which furnishes a constant moment about the tab hinge line. When the airplane is at zero air- speed, the tab is rotated up to the limit of deflection. As airspeed is increased, the aero- dynamic hinge moment on the tab will finally equal the spring torque and the tab will begin to streamline. The effect of this arrangement is to provide a constant hinge moment to the control system and contribute a constant push force requirement at speeds above the preload speed. Thus, the spring loaded tab can im- prove the stick force gradient in a manner similar to the downspring. Generally, the spring loaded tab may be more desirable because of greater effectiveness and the lack of undesirable control forces during ground operation. \n\nahead of 18 percent MAC. This particular control requirement can be most critical for an airplane in supersonic flight. Supersonic flight is usually accom- . panied by large increases in static longltu- dinal stability and a reduction in the effective- ness of control surfaces. In order to cope with these trends, powerful all-movable surfaces must be used to attain limit load factor or maximum usable C, in supersonic flight. This requirement is so important that once satis- fied, the supersonic configuration usually has sufficient longitudinal control power for all other conditions of flight. \n\nThe various tab devices have almost un- limited possibilities for tailoring control forces. However, these devices must receive proper care and maintenance in order to function properly. In addition, much care must be taken to ensure that no slop or play exists in the joints and fittings, otherwise destructive flutter may occur. \n\nAt takeoff, the airplane must have sufficient control power to assume the takeoff attitude prior to reaching takeoff speed. Generally, for airplanes with tricycle landing gears, it is desirable to have at least sufficient control power to attain the takeoff attitude at 80 \n\nTo be satisfactory, an airplane must have adequate controllability as well as adequate \n\n## TAKEOFF CONTROL REQUIREMENT.\n\n## LONGITUDINAL CONTROL\n\n275" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.42264693762275024, + "doc_id": "f8fc75e4c2d49e821e32f49591760edfc31024f044514fa5cb2972e185f4914a", + "edit_distance": 0.5925925925925926, + "f1_score": 0.9655172413793105, + "meteor": 0.9136988128584766, + "precision": 0.9333333333333333, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS OO-SOT-80 S\n\nFtgure 7.33. Staff Patterns (sheet 6 of 8)\n\nFtgure 7.33. Staff Patterns (sheet 6 of 8)", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Ftgure 7.33. Staff Patterns (sheet 6 of 8) \n\nNAVWEPS OO-SOT-80 S" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.19935374321591173, + "doc_id": "76076c0ea5a8b7a30f36e63452bce1932c1ce0d682a3341cd8c415da9aa07388", + "edit_distance": 0.7721518987341772, + "f1_score": 0.5142857142857143, + "meteor": 0.7002074688796681, + "precision": 0.34615384615384615, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS 00-BOT-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE\n\n## COMPRESSOR STALL\n\nFigure 2.13. Effect of Compressor Stall ond Inlet Temperature on Engine Operation\n\nFigure 2.13. Effect of Compressor Stall ond Inlet Temperature on Engine Operation\n\nINCREASED\n\nBLADE\n\nANGLE\n\nVELOCITY\n\nCOMPONENT\n\nDUE TO ROTATION\n\n## EFFECT OF INLET TEMPERATURE\n\nROTATING\n\nCOMPRESSOR\n\n/\n\nTEMPERATURE\n\nEXHAUST\n\nCHANGE\n\nTEMPERATURE\n\nRISE\n\nTHROUGH\n\nCOMBUSTION\n\nCHAMBER\n\n--\n\nINLET\n\nCOMPRESSOR\n\nCOMBUSTION\n\nTURBINE\n\nEXHAUST\n\nCHAMBER\n\nNOZZLE\n\n126\n\n,STEADY\n\nSTATE\n\nAXIAL\n\nFLOW VEL .OCITY\n\n-REDUCED\n\nAXIAL\n\nFLOW\n\nVELOCITY", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-BOT-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE \n\nFigure 2.13. Effect of Compressor Stall ond Inlet Temperature on Engine Operation \n\n126" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8200077013711925, + "doc_id": "c295b3a8c2d9af81bc79e599c1aa0c4cb695e3ba24c0d1ff2b8a4e6209209137", + "edit_distance": 0.6854961832061068, + "f1_score": 0.8853932584269663, + "meteor": 0.6497322104397982, + "precision": 0.9380952380952381, + "pred_md": "of friction and the mechanical output is less than the available pressure energy. The power output from the engine will be determined by the magnitude and rate of the power impulses. In order to determine the power output of the reciprocating engine, a brake or load device is attached to the output shaft and the operating characteristics are determined. Hence, the term ' brake' horsepower, BHP, is used to denote the output power of the powerplant.\n\nFrom the physical definition of ' power' and the particular unit of ' horsepower' (1 h.p. = 33,ooO ft.-lbs. per min.), the brake horsepower can be expressed in the following form.\n\n\n\nor\n\n\n\nwhere\n\nBHP= brake horsepower\n\nT=output torque, ft.-lbs.\n\nN=output shaft speed, RPM\n\nIn this relationship, the output power is appreciated as some direct variable of torque, T, and RPM. Of course, the output torque is some function of the combustion gas pressure during the power stroke. Thus, it is helpful to consider the mean effective gas pressure during the power stroke, the ' brake mean effective pressure' or BMEP. With use of this term, the BHP can be expressed in the following form.\n\n\n\nwhere\n\nBHP= brake horsepower BMEP= brake mean effective pressure, psi D=engine displacement, cu. in. N= engine speed, RPM\n\nThe BMEP is not actual pressure within the cylinder, but an effective pressure representing the mean gas load acting on the piston during\n\n137\n\n## NAVWEPS 00401-30 AlRPlANE PERFORMANCE\n\nthe power stroke. As such, BMEP is a convenient index for a majority of items of reciprocating engine output, efficiency, and operating limitations.\n\nThe actual power output of any reciptocating engine is a direct function of the combination of engine torque and rotative speed. Thus, output brake horsepower can be related by the combination of BMEP and RPM or torque prc~surc and RPM. No other engine instruments can provide this immediate indication of output power.\n\nIf all other factors are constant, the engine power output is directly related to the engine airflow. Evidence of this fact could be appreciated from the equation for BHP in terms of BMEP.\n\n\n\nThis equation relates that, for a given BMEP, the BHP is determined by the product of engine RPM, N, and displacement, D. In a sense, the reciprocating engine could be considered primarily as an air pump with the pump capacity directly affecting the power output. Thus, any engine instrumems which relate factors affecting airflow can provide some indirect reflection of engine power. The pressure and temperature of the fuel-air mixture decide the density of the mixture entering the cylinder. The carburetor air temperature will provide the temperature of the inlet air at the carburetor. While this carburetor inlet air is not the same temperature as the air in the cylinder inlet manifold, the carburetor inlet temperature provides a stable indication independent of fuel flow and can be used as a standard of performance. Cylinder inlet manifold temperature is difficult to determine with the same degree of accuracy because of the normal variation of fuel-air mixture strength. The inlet manifold pressure provides an additional indication of the density of airflow entering the combustion chamber. The manifold absolute pressure, MAP, is affected by the carburetor", + "recall": 0.8382978723404255, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00401-30 AlRPlANE PERFORMANCE \n\nthe power stroke. As such, BMEP is a con- venient index for a majority of items of recip- rocating engine output, efficiency, and operat- ing limitations. \n\nof friction and the mechanical output is less than the available pressure energy. The power output from the engine will be determined by the magnitude and rate of the power impulses. In order to determine the power output of the reciprocating engine, a brake or load device is attached to the output shaft and the operating characteristics are determined. Hence, the term “brake” horsepower, BHP, is used to denote the output power of the powerplant. \n\nFrom the physical definition of “power” and the particular unit of “horsepower” (1 h.p. = 33,ooO ft.-lbs. per min.), the brake horsepower can be expressed in the following form. \n\nThe actual power output of any reciptocat- ing engine is a direct function of the combina- tion of engine torque and rotative speed. Thus, output brake horsepower can be related by the combination of BMEP and RPM or torque prc~surc and RPM. No other engine instruments can provide this immediate indi- cation of output power. \n\nIf all other factors are constant, the engine power output is directly related to the engine airflow. Evidence of this fact could be appre- ciated from the equation for BHP in terms of BMEP. \n\nor \n\nwhere BHP= brake horsepower \n\nwhere BHP= brake horsepower T=output torque, ft.-lbs. N=output shaft speed, RPM \n\nThis equation relates that, for a given BMEP, the BHP is determined by the product of en- gine RPM, N, and displacement, D. In a sense, the reciprocating engine could be con- sidered primarily as an air pump with the pump capacity directly affecting the power output. Thus, any engine instrumems which relate factors affecting airflow can provide some indirect reflection of engine power. The pres- sure and temperature of the fuel-air mixture decide the density of the mixture entering the cylinder. The carburetor air temperature will provide the temperature of the inlet air at the carburetor. While this carburetor inlet air is not the same temperature as the air in the cylinder inlet manifold, the carburetor inlet temperature provides a stable indication inde- pendent of fuel flow and can be used as a stand- ard of performance. Cylinder inlet manifold temperature is difficult to determine with the same degree of accuracy because of the normal variation of fuel-air mixture strength. The inlet manifold pressure provides an additional indication of the density of airflow entering the combustion chamber. The manifold absolute pressure, MAP, is affected by the carburetor \n\nBHP= brake horsepower BMEP= brake mean effective pressure, psi D=engine displacement, cu. in. N= engine speed, RPM \n\nwhere \n\nIn this relationship, the output power is ap- preciated as some direct variable of torque, T, and RPM. Of course, the output torque is some function of the combustion gas pressure during the power stroke. Thus, it is helpful to consider the mean effective gas pressure during the power stroke, the “brake mean effective pressure” or BMEP. With use of this term, the BHP can be expressed in the following form. \n\nThe BMEP is not actual pressure within the cylinder, but an effective pressure representing the mean gas load acting on the piston during \n\n137 \n\n$$BHP=@MEP)(D)(N) 792,m $$\n\n$$BHP=G $$\n\n$$TN BHP= 5255 $$\n\n$$BHP = @M.W(DXN) 792,000 $$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.892502280762009, + "doc_id": "50c5d8fdc9cc356d8e2634d999dd0c6231ca992d3dd26f49a31b4c6a928d642c", + "edit_distance": 0.7289719626168224, + "f1_score": 0.929460580912863, + "meteor": 0.7238145492070728, + "precision": 0.9572649572649573, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS 00-ROT-80 HIGH SPEED AERODYNAMICS\n\nlocal sonic flow. Actually, the extremely low aspect ratios required to produce high critical Mach number are not too practical. Generally, the advantage of low aspect ratio must be combined with sweepback and high speed airfoil sections.\n\nThe thin rectangular wing in supersonic flow illustrates several important facts. AS shown in figure 3.18, Mach cones form at the tips of the rectangular wing and affect t~he pressure distribution on the area within the cone. The vortex develops within the tip cone due to the pressure differenti,al and the resulting average pressure on the area within thecone is approximately one-half the pressure between the cones. Three-dimensional flow on the wing is then confined to the area within the tip cones, while the area between the cones experiences pure two-dimensional flow.\n\nIt is important to realize that the threedimensional flow on the rectangular wing in supersonic flight differs greatly from that of subsonic flight. A wing of finite aspect ratio in subsonic flight experiences a three-dimensional flow which includes the tip vortices, downwash behind the wing, upwash ahead of the wing, and local i nduced velocities along the span. Recall that the local induced velocities along the span of the wing would incline the section lift aft relative to the free stream and result in ' i nduced drag.' Such a flow condition cannot be directly correlated with the wing in supersonic flow, ~ The flow pattern for the rectangular wing of figure 3.18 demonstrates that the three-dimensional flow is confined to the tip, and pure two-dimensional flow exists on the wing area between the tip cones. If the wing tips were to be ' raked' outside the tip cones, the entire wing flow would correspond to the two-dimensional (or section) conditions.\n\nTherefore, for the wing in supersonic flow, no upwash exists ahead of the wing, threedimensional effects are confined to the tip cones, and no local i nduced velocities occur along the span between the tip cones. The\n\nsupersonic drag due to lift is a function of the section and angle of attack while the subsonic i nduced drag is a function of lift coefficient and aspect ratio. This comparison makes it obvious that supersonic flight does not demand the use of high aspect ratio planforms typical of low speed aircraft. In fact, low aspect ratios and high taper are favorable from the standpoint of structural considerations if very thin sections are used to minimize wave drag.\n\nIf sweepback is applied to the supersonic wing, the pressure distribution will be affected by the location of the Mach cone with respect to the leading edge. Figure 3.19 illustrates the pressure distribution for the delta wing planform in supersonic flight with the leading edge behind or ahead of the Mach cone. When the leading edge is behind the Mach cone the components of velocity perpendicular to the leading edge are still subsonic even though the free stream flow is supersonic and the resulting pressure distribution will greatly resemble the subsonic pressure distribution for such a planform. Tailoring the leading edge shape and camber can minimize the components of the high leading edge suction pressure which are inclined in the drag direction and the drag due to lift can be reduced. If the leading edge is ahead of the h4ach cone, the flow over this area will correspond to the two-dimensional supersonic flow and produce constant pressure for that portion of the surface between the leading edge and the Mach cone.\n\nCONTROL SURFACES. The design of control surfaces for transonic and supersonic flight involves many important considerations. This fact is illustrated by the typical transonic and supersonic flow patterns of figure 3.19. Trailing edge control surfaces can be affected adversely by the shock waves formed in flight above critical Mach number. If the airflow is separated by the shock wave the resulting buffet of the control surface can be very objectionable. In addition to the buffet of the surface, the change in the pressure distribution due to separation and the shock wave location can\n\n236", + "recall": 0.9032258064516129, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-ROT-80 HIGH SPEED AERODYNAMICS \n\nlocal sonic flow. Actually, the extremely low aspect ratios required to produce high critical Mach number are not too practical. Generally, the advantage of low aspect ratio must be combined with sweepback and high speed airfoil sections. \n\nsupersonic drag due to lift is a function of the section and angle of attack while the subsonic induced drag is a function of lift coefficient and aspect ratio. This comparison makes it obvious that supersonic flight does not demand the use of high aspect ratio planforms typical of low speed aircraft. In fact, low aspect ratios and high taper are favorable from the standpoint of structural considerations if very thin sections are used to minimize wave drag. \n\nThe thin rectangular wing in supersonic flow illustrates several important facts. AS shown in figure 3.18, Mach cones form at the tips of the rectangular wing and affect t~he pressure distribution on the area within the cone. The vortex develops within the tip cone due to the pressure differenti,al and the resulting average pressure on the area within thecone is approximately one-half the pressure between the cones. Three-dimensional flow on the wing is then confined to the area within the tip cones, while the area between the cones experiences pure two-dimensional flow. \n\nIf sweepback is applied to the supersonic wing, the pressure distribution will be affected by the location of the Mach cone with respect to the leading edge. Figure 3.19 illustrates the pressure distribution for the delta wing plan- form in supersonic flight with the leading edge behind or ahead of the Mach cone. When the leading edge is behind the Mach cone the com- ponents of velocity perpendicular to the leading edge are still subsonic even though the free stream flow is supersonic and the resulting pressure distribution will greatly resemble the subsonic pressure distribution for such a plan- form. Tailoring the leading edge shape and camber can minimize the components of the high leading edge suction pressure which are inclined in the drag direction and the drag due to lift can be reduced. If the leading edge is ahead of the h4ach cone, the flow over this area will correspond to the two-dimensional supersonic flow and produce constant pressure for that portion of the surface between the leading edge and the Mach cone. CONTROL SURFACES. The design of con- \n\nIt is important to realize that the three- dimensional flow on the rectangular wing in supersonic flight differs greatly from that of subsonic flight. A wing of finite aspect ratio in subsonic flight experiences a three-dimen- sional flow which includes the tip vortices, downwash behind the wing, upwash ahead of the wing, and local induced velocities along the span. Recall that the local induced veloc- ities along the span of the wing would incline the section lift aft relative to the free stream and result in “induced drag.” Such a flow condition cannot be directly correlated with the wing in supersonic flow, ~ The flow pattern for the rectangular wing of figure 3.18 dem- onstrates that the three-dimensional flow is confined to the tip, and pure two-dimensional flow exists on the wing area between the tip cones. If the wing tips were to be “raked” outside the tip cones, the entire wing flow would correspond to the two-dimensional (or section) conditions. \n\nleading edge and the Mach cone. CONTROL SURFACES. The design of con- trol surfaces for transonic and supersonic flight involves many important considerations. This fact is illustrated by the typical transonic and supersonic flow patterns of figure 3.19. Trail- ing edge control surfaces can be affected ad- versely by the shock waves formed in flight above critical Mach number. If the airflow is separated by the shock wave the resulting buffet of the control surface can be very objec- tionable. In addition to the buffet of the sur- face, the change in the pressure distribution due to separation and the shock wave location can \n\nTherefore, for the wing in supersonic flow, no upwash exists ahead of the wing, three- dimensional effects are confined to the tip cones, and no local induced velocities occur along the span between the tip cones. The \n\n236" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.907015899734911, + "doc_id": "9b98eb37d1991c4d06855386e0e531659d870e36b944d6299213f5ed4ba17563", + "edit_distance": 0.06481481481481481, + "f1_score": 0.9311740890688259, + "meteor": 0.9460742296027145, + "precision": 0.9583333333333334, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS 00-801-80 PREFACE\n\nThe majority of aircraft accidents are due to some type of error of the pilot. This fact has been true in the past and, unfortunately, most probably will be true in the future. Each Naval Aviator should strive to arm himself with knowledge, training, and exacting, professional attitudes and techniques. The fundamentals of aerodynamics as presented in this text will provide the knowledge and background for safe and effective flying operations. The flight handbooks for the aircraft will provide the particular techniques, procedures, and operating data which are necessary for each aircraft. Diligent study and continuous training are necessary to develop the professional skills and techniques for successful flying operations.\n\nThe author takes this opportunity to express appreciation to those who have assisted in the preparation of the manuscript. In particular, thanks are due to Mr. J. E. Fairchild for his assistance with the portions dealing with helicopter aerodynamics and roll coupling phenomena. Also, thanks are due to Mr. J. F. Detwiler and Mr. E. Dimitruk for their review of the text material.\n\nHUGH HARRISON HURT, Jr.\n\nAugust 1959 University of Southern California Los Angelesj Cnlif.\n\niv", + "recall": 0.905511811023622, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-801-80 PREFACE \n\nThe majority of aircraft accidents are due to some type of error of the pilot. This fact has been true in the past and, unfortunately, most probably will be true in the future. Each Naval Aviator should strive to arm himself with knowledge, training, and exacting, professional attitudes and techniques. The fundamentals of aerodynamics as pre- sented in this text will provide the knowledge and background for safe and effective flying operations. The flight handbooks for the air- craft will provide the particular techniques, procedures, and operating data which are necessary for each aircraft. Diligent study and continu- ous training are necessary to develop the professional skills and tech- niques for successful flying operations. \n\nThe author takes this opportunity to express appreciation to those who have assisted in the preparation of the manuscript. In particular, thanks are due to Mr. J. E. Fairchild for his assistance with the por- tions dealing with helicopter aerodynamics and roll coupling phenom- ena. Also, thanks are due to Mr. J. F. Detwiler and Mr. E. Dimitruk for their review of the text material. \n\nHUGH HARRISON HURT, Jr. \n\nAugust 1959 University of Southern California Los Angelesj Cnlif. \n\niv" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8307749535363412, + "doc_id": "e0769d9684e6d374e51d484dbe52190d0c6208a2b650d9214b30f0f28fcfb879", + "edit_distance": 0.5657708628005658, + "f1_score": 0.8979591836734693, + "meteor": 0.7612857731029026, + "precision": 0.9490196078431372, + "pred_md": "quilibrium conditions. However, the dynamic behavior may be stable, neutral, or unstable. Chart D illustrates the mode of a damped oscillation where the amplitude decreases with time. The reduction of amplitude with time indicates there is resistance to motion and that energy is being dissipated. The dissipation of energy-or ' damping' ' -is necessary to provide positive dynamic stability. If there is no damping in the system, the mode of chart E is the result, an undamped oscillation. Without damping, the oscillation continues with no reduction of amplitude with time. While such an oscillation indicates positive static stability, neutral dynamic stability exists. Positive damping is necessary to eliminate the continued oscillation. As an example, an automobile with worn shock absorbers (or ' dampers' ) lacks sufficient dynamic stability and the continued oscillatory motion is neither pleasant nor conducive to safe operation. In the same sense, the aircraft must have sufficient damping to, rapidly dissipate any oscillatory motion which would affect the operation of the aircraft. When natural aerodynamic damping cannot be obtained, a synthetic damping must be furnished to provide the necessary positive dynamic stability.\n\nChart F of figure 4.2 illustrates the mode of a divergent oscillation. This motion is statically stable since it tends to return to the equilibrium position. However, each subsequent return to equilibrium is with increasing. velocity such that amplitude continues to increase with time. Thus, dynamic instability exists. The divergent oscillation occurs when energy is supplied to the motion rather than dissipated by positive damping. The most outstanding illustration of the divergent oscillation occurs with the short period pitching oscillation of an aircraft. If a pilot unknowingly supplies control functions which are near the natural frequency of the airplane in pitch, energy is added to the system, negative damping exists, and the ' pilot induced oscillation' results.\n\n247\n\nNAVWEPS OO-ROT-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL\n\nIn any system, the existence of static stability does not necessarily guarantee the existence of dynamic stability. However, the existence of dynamic stability implies the existence of static stability.\n\nAny aircraft must demonstrate the required degrees of static and dynamic stability. If the aircraft were allowed to have static instability with a rapid rate of divergence, the aircraft would be very difficult-if not impossible-to fly. The degree of difficulty would compare closely with learning to ride a unicycle. In addition, positive dynamic stability is mandatory in certain areas to preclude objectionable continued oscillations of the aircraft.\n\n## TRIM AND CONTROLLABILITY\n\nAn aircraft is said to be trimmed if all moments in pitch, roll, and yaw are equal to zero. The establishment of equilibrium at various conditions of flight is the function of the controls and may be accomplished by pilot effort, trim tabs, or bias of a surface actuator.\n\nThe term ' controllability' refers to the ability of the aircraft to respond to control surface displacement and achieve the desired condition of flight. Adequate controllability must be available to perform takeoff and landing and accomplish the various maneuvers in flight. An important contradiction exists between stability and controllability since adequate controllability does not necessarily exist with adequate stability. In fact, a high degree of stability tends to reduce the controllability of the aircraft. The general relationship between static stability and controllability is illustrated by figure 4.3.\n\nFigure 4.3 illustrates various degrees of static stability by a ball placed on various surfaces. Positive static stability is shown by the ball in a trough; if the ball is displaced from equilibrium at the bottom of the trough, there is an initial tendency to return to equilibrium. If it is desired to ' control' the ball", + "recall": 0.852112676056338, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OO-ROT-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL \n\nIn any system, the existence of static sta- bility does not necessarily guarantee the existence of dynamic stability. However, the existence of dynamic stability implies the existence of static stability. Any aircraft must demonstrate the required \n\nquilibrium conditions. However, the dy- namic behavior may be stable, neutral, or un- stable. Chart D illustrates the mode of a damped oscillation where the amplitude de- creases with time. The reduction of amplitude with time indicates there is resistance to mo- tion and that energy is being dissipated. The dissipation of energy-or “damping ’‘ -is nec- essary to provide positive dynamic stability. If there is no damping in the system, the mode of chart E is the result, an undamped oscilla- tion. Without damping, the oscillation con- tinues with no reduction of amplitude with time. While such an oscillation indicates posi- tive static stability, neutral dynamic stability exists. Positive damping is necessary to elimi- nate the continued oscillation. As an example, an automobile with worn shock absorbers (or “dampers”) lacks sufficient dynamic stability and the continued oscillatory motion is neither pleasant nor conducive to safe operation. In the same sense, the aircraft must have sufficient damping to, rapidly dissipate any oscillatory motion which would affect the operation of the aircraft. When natural aerodynamic damp- ing cannot be obtained, a synthetic damping must be furnished to provide the necessary positive dynamic stability. \n\nthe existence of static stability. Any aircraft must demonstrate the required degrees of static and dynamic stability. If the aircraft were allowed to have static in- stability with a rapid rate of divergence, the aircraft would be very difficult-if not impos- sible-to fly. The degree of difficulty would compare closely with learning to ride a uni- cycle. In addition, positive dynamic stability is mandatory in certain areas to preclude objectionable continued oscillations of the aircraft. \n\nAn aircraft is said to be trimmed if all moments in pitch, roll, and yaw are equal to zero. The establishment of equilibrium at various conditions of flight is the function of the controls and may be accomplished by pilot effort, trim tabs, or bias of a surface actuator. \n\nThe term “controllability” refers to the ability of the aircraft to respond to control surface displacement and achieve the desired condition of flight. Adequate controllability must be available to perform takeoff and landing and accomplish the various maneuvers in flight. An important contradiction exists between stability and controllability since adequate controllability does not necessarily exist with adequate stability. In fact, a high degree of stability tends to reduce the controlla- bility of the aircraft. The general relation- ship between static stability and controlla- bility is illustrated by figure 4.3. \n\nChart F of figure 4.2 illustrates the mode of a divergent oscillation. This motion is stat- ically stable since it tends to return to the equilibrium position. However, each subse- quent return to equilibrium is with increasing. velocity such that amplitude continues to increase with time. Thus, dynamic insta- bility exists. The divergent oscillation occurs when energy is supplied to the motion rather than dissipated by positive damping. The most outstanding illustration of the divergent oscillation occurs with the short period pitch- ing oscillation of an aircraft. If a pilot un- knowingly supplies control functions which are near the natural frequency of the airplane in pitch, energy is added to the system, nega- tive damping exists, and the “pilot induced oscillation” results. \n\nFigure 4.3 illustrates various degrees of static stability by a ball placed on various surfaces. Positive static stability is shown by the ball in a trough; if the ball is displaced from equilibrium at the bottom of the trough, there is an initial tendency to return to equilib- rium. If it is desired to “control” the ball \n\n## TRIM AND CONTROLLABILITY\n\n247" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5163977794943222, + "doc_id": "e6b5d41a8c850e4c453ca55cb4e1e7ba96a27caa221ffa46603f5a5445d00926", + "edit_distance": 0.5, + "f1_score": 0.8275862068965518, + "meteor": 0.9019886363636364, + "precision": 0.7058823529411765, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS 00-807-80\n\nHIGH SPEED AERODYNAMICS\n\nFigure 3.7. Expansion Wove Formation\n\nFigure 3.7. Expansion Wove Formation\n\nAROUND A SMOOTti CORNER\n\n212", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-807-80 HIGH SPEED AERODYNAMICS \n\nFigure 3.7. Expansion Wove Formation \n\n212" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6218522253057099, + "doc_id": "c34f22da0488d2629e9ac6480affcb2d29d6486b7a2e3ae1cf335a8d29b7edb8", + "edit_distance": 0.3333333333333333, + "f1_score": 0.8888888888888888, + "meteor": 0.9514508928571429, + "precision": 0.8, + "pred_md": "NAWEPS oD-80~~0 BASIC AERODYNAMICS\n\nFROM NACA TN 2674\n\nFROM NACA TN 2674\n\nFiguse 1.33. Stall Patterns (sheet 3 of 8)\n\n80", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAWEPS oD-80~~0 BASIC AERODYNAMICS \n\nFiguse 1.33. Stall Patterns (sheet 3 of 8) \n\n80" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4342304922904051, + "doc_id": "c7ff22c063b324ff6dd854d2a0cd1e02730b6167c76223669bcefd7c9d2eb322", + "edit_distance": 0.5714285714285714, + "f1_score": 0.7777777777777779, + "meteor": 0.8813071895424838, + "precision": 0.6363636363636364, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS 00-801-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS\n\n## DENSITY ALTITUDE CHART +g&\n\nFigure 1.6. Airspeed Corrections (sheet 2 of 2)\n\nFigure 1.6. Airspeed Corrections (sheet 2 of 2)", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-801-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS \n\nFigure 1.6. Airspeed Corrections (sheet 2 of 2)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.867542753238589, + "doc_id": "c29a1c4cd2efa134fdd5c0c500713fbb6bc60c43f2739f710a8be365df6b3e1f", + "edit_distance": 0.541958041958042, + "f1_score": 0.9404388714733541, + "meteor": 0.8842237193593151, + "precision": 0.9202453987730062, + "pred_md": "FAA Chart Users' Guide - Terminal Procedures Publication (TPP) - Terms\n\n## No Primary NAVAID box:\n\nCircling Approach:\n\nSidestep Procedure:\n\n## Middle Briefing Strip\n\nThe middle briefing strip may contain information in up to three separate boxes, when available, in the following sequence from left to right:\n\nNOTES BOX\n\n## MISSED APPROACH PROCEDURE TEXT BOX\n\nAPPROACH LIGHTING SYSTEM\n\n- · Box 1: Notes Box: contains procedure notes, Equipment/Requirements Notes box and Takeoff, Alternate, RA -DAR, WAAS, and/or Cold Weather indicators (details provided below under Notes Box).\n- · Box 2: Approach Lighting System Box (when applicable): shows the approach lighting system name and charting icon. Multiple approach lighting systems may be shown for approaches that have straight-in minimums for parallel runways.\n- · Box 3: Missed Approach Procedure Text Box: The full textual description of the missed approach procedure is provided here.\n\n## Notes Box\n\n## Procedure Equipment Requirements Notes Box\n\nUsers will begin to see Performance-Based Navigation (PBN) Requirements and ground-based Equipment Requirements prominently displayed in separate, standardized notes boxes. For procedures with PBN elements, the PBN box will contain the procedure's navigation specification(s); and, if required: specific sensors or infrastructure needed for the naviga -tion solution; any additional or advanced functional requirements; the minimum Required Navigation Performance (RNP) value and any amplifying remarks. Items listed in this PBN box are REQUIRED. The separate Equipment Requirements Box will list ground-based equipment requirements.\n\n96", + "recall": 0.9615384615384616, + "true_md": "96\n\nFAA Chart Users’ Guide - Terminal Procedures Publication (TPP) - Terms\n\n## No Primary NAVAID box:\n\n## Circling Approach:\n\n## Sidestep Procedure:\n\n## Middle Briefing Strip\n\n- • Box 2: Approach Lighting System Box (when applicable): shows the approach lighting system name and charting icon. Multiple approach lighting systems may be shown for approaches that have straight-in minimums for parallel runways.\n\n- • Box 3: Missed Approach Procedure Text Box: The full textual description of the missed approach procedure is provided here.\n\n- • Box 1: Notes Box: contains procedure notes, Equipment/Requirements Notes box and Takeoff, Alternate, RA - DAR, WAAS, and/or Cold Weather indicators (details provided below under Notes Box). \n\n## Notes Box\n\n## Procedure Equipment Requirements Notes Box\n\nUsers will begin to see Performance-Based Navigation (PBN) Requirements and ground-based Equipment Requirements prominently displayed in separate, standardized notes boxes. For procedures with PBN elements, the PBN box will con- tain the procedure’s navigation specification(s); and, if required: specific sensors or infrastructure needed for the naviga - tion solution; any additional or advanced functional requirements; the minimum Required Navigation Performance (RNP) value and any amplifying remarks. Items listed in this PBN box are REQUIRED. The separate Equipment Requirements Box will list ground-based equipment requirements.\n\nThe middle briefing strip may contain information in up to three separate boxes, when available, in the following sequence from left to right:" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.2069426972673576, + "doc_id": "2facf961112e19c3b4df41a43b21b84cf49dd2a650a6ae2123aaebcefae7654e", + "edit_distance": 0.8493150684931506, + "f1_score": 0.6129032258064517, + "meteor": 0.749510034708156, + "precision": 0.4523809523809524, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS 00-BOT-BO BASIC AERODYMAAlllCS\n\nSURFACE TUFT PHOTOGRAPHS FOR A SWEPT, TAPERED WING 45O DELTA, AR=4.0. x=0\n\ni =0 DEGREES\n\ni =0 DEGREES\n\na = 12 DEGREES\n\na = 12 DEGREES\n\na = 8 DEGREES\n\na = 8 DEGREES\n\nB = 16 DEGREES\n\nB = 16 DEGREES\n\na = 20 DEGREES\n\na = 20 DEGREES\n\nFROM NACA TN 2674\n\nFigure 1.33. Stall Patterns (sheet 5 of 8' )", + "recall": 0.95, + "true_md": "FROM NACA TN 2674 \n\nFigure 1.33. Stall Patterns (sheet 5 of 8 ’ ) \n\nNAVWEPS 00-BOT-BO BASIC AERODYMAAlllCS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8509513967287899, + "doc_id": "d7cf2db73bc5a9a2758a154bf34bf26496da04e6338b0a2f5acdede5a67dd910", + "edit_distance": 0.45652173913043476, + "f1_score": 0.9219330855018589, + "meteor": 0.7539264608627576, + "precision": 0.9538461538461539, + "pred_md": "value, or, if reverse thrust is available, a maximum negative value for minimum landing distance. Lift and drag are produced as long as the airplane has speed and the values of lift and drag depend on dynamic pressure and angle of attack. Braking friction results when there is a normal force on the braking wheel surfaces and the friction force is the product of the normal force and the coe&cient of braking friction. The normal force on the braking surfaces is some part of the net of weight and lift, i.e., some other part of this net may be distributed to wheels which have no brakes. The maximum coefficient of braking friction is primarily a function of the runway surface condition (dry, wet, icy, etc.) and rather independent of the type of tire for ordinary conditions (dry, hard surface runway). However, the operating coefficient of braking friction is controlled by the pilot by the use of brakes.\n\nThe acceleration of the airplane during the landing roll is negative (deceleration) and will be considered to be in that sense. At any instant during the landing roll the acceleration is a function of the net retarding force and the airplane mass. From Newton' s second law of motion:\n\nB = Fr/M\n\nor\n\nwhere\n\na= acceleration, ft. per seca (negative) retarding force, lbs.\n\nFr=net g= gravitational acceleration, ft. per sec.' W=weight, lbs. M= mass, slugs = Wig\n\nThe net retarding force on the airplane, Fr, is the net of drag, D, braking friction, F, and thrust, T. Thus, the acceleration (negative) at any instant during the landing roll is :\n\n\n\n\n\n## NAVWEPS OO-EOT-RO AtRPtANE PERFORMANCE\n\nFigure 2.34 illustrates the typical variation of the various forces acting on the aircraft throughout the landing roll. If it is assumed that the aircraft is at essentially constant angle of attack from the point of touchdown, CL and CD are constant and the forces of lift and drag vary as the square of the velocity. Thus, lift and drag will decrease linearly with 4 or V' from the point of touchdown. If the braking coefficient is maintained at the maximum value, this maximum value of coefficient of friction is essentially constant with speed and the braking friction force will vary as the normal force on the braking surfaces. As the airplane nears a complete stop, the velocity and lift approach zero and the normal force on the wheels approaches the weight of the airplane. At this point, the braking friction force is at a maximum. Immediately after touchdown, the lift: is quite large and the normal force on the wheels is small. As a result, the braking friction force is small. A common error at this point is to apply excessive brake pressure without sufficient normal force on the wheels. This may develop a skid with a locked wheel and cause the tire to blow out so suddenly that judicious use of the brakes is necessary.\n\nThe coefficient of braking friction can reach peak values of 0.8 but ordinarily values near 0.5 are typical for the dry hard surface runway. Of course, a slick, icy runway can reduce the maximum braking friction coefficient to values as low as 0.2 or 0.1: If the entire weight of the airplane were the normal force on the braking surfaces, a coefficient of braking friction of 0.5 would produce a deceleration of %g, 16.1 ft. per sec.a Most airplanes in ground effect rarely produce lift-drag ratios lower than 3 or 4. If the lift of the airplane were equal to the weight, an L/D = 4 would produce a deceleration of xg, 8 ft. per sec.* By this comparison it should be apparent that friction braking offers the possibility of greater deceleration than airplane aerodynamic braking. To this end, the majority of airplanes operating from", + "recall": 0.8920863309352518, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OO-EOT-RO AtRPtANE PERFORMANCE \n\nvalue, or, if reverse thrust is available, a maxi- mum negative value for minimum landing dis- tance. Lift and drag are produced as long as the airplane has speed and the values of lift and drag depend on dynamic pressure and angle of attack. Braking friction results when there is a normal force on the braking wheel surfaces and the friction force is the product of the normal force and the coe&cient of braking friction. The normal force on the braking surfaces is some part of the net of weight and lift, i.e., some other part of this net may be distributed to wheels which have no brakes. The maximum coefficient of braking friction is primarily a function of the runway surface con- dition (dry, wet, icy, etc.) and rather inde- pendent of the type of tire for ordinary condi- tions (dry, hard surface runway). However, the operating coefficient of braking friction is controlled by the pilot by the use of brakes. The acceleration of the airplane during the \n\nFigure 2.34 illustrates the typical variation of the various forces acting on the aircraft throughout the landing roll. If it is assumed that the aircraft is at essentially constant angle of attack from the point of touchdown, CL and CD are constant and the forces of lift and drag vary as the square of the velocity. Thus, lift and drag will decrease linearly with 4 or V’ from the point of touchdown. If the braking coefficient is maintained at the maximum value, this maximum value of coefficient of friction is essentially constant with speed and the braking friction force will vary as the normal force on the braking surfaces. As the airplane nears a complete stop, the velocity and lift approach zero and the normal force on the wheels approaches the weight of the air- plane. At this point, the braking friction force is at a maximum. Immediately after touchdown, the lift: is quite large and the normal force on the wheels is small. As a re- sult, the braking friction force is small. A common error at this point is to apply exces- sive brake pressure without sufficient normal force on the wheels. This may develop a skid with a locked wheel and cause the tire to blow out so suddenly that judicious use of the brakes is necessary. The coefficient of braking friction can reach \n\ncontrolled by the pilot by the use of brakes. The acceleration of the airplane during the landing roll is negative (deceleration) and will be considered to be in that sense. At any in- stant during the landing roll the acceleration is a function of the net retarding force and the airplane mass. From Newton ’ s second law of motion: \n\nis necessary. The coefficient of braking friction can reach peak values of 0.8 but ordinarily values near 0.5 are typical for the dry hard surface runway. Of course, a slick, icy runway can reduce the maximum braking friction coefficient to values as low as 0.2 or 0.1: If the entire weight of the airplane were the normal force on the brak- ing surfaces, a coefficient of braking friction of 0.5 would produce a deceleration of %g, 16.1 ft. per sec.a Most airplanes in ground effect rarely produce lift-drag ratios lower than 3 or 4. If the lift of the airplane were equal to the weight, an L/D = 4 would produce a decelera- tion of xg, 8 ft. per sec.* By this comparison it should be apparent that friction braking offers the possibility of greater deceleration than airplane aerodynamic braking. To this end, the majority of airplanes operating from \n\nThe net retarding force on the airplane, Fr, is the net of drag, D, braking friction, F, and thrust, T. Thus, the acceleration (negative) at any instant during the landing roll is : \n\nwhere \n\nor \n\n$$B = Fr/M $$\n\n$$a=g 0+/W) $$\n\n$$a= acceleration, ft. per seca (negative) Fr=net retarding force, lbs. g= gravitational acceleration, ft. per sec.’ W=weight, lbs. M= mass, slugs = Wig $$\n\n$$d=$ (Df F--T) $$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4335347193582402, + "doc_id": "7af8b4c759dd1d278ac46f4b11d7f428b0a5f5f664ba8edb9b7152ea6f8b1c28", + "edit_distance": 0.4583333333333333, + "f1_score": 0.8888888888888888, + "meteor": 0.9203071887196275, + "precision": 0.8, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS GO-BOT-BO STABILITY AND CONTROL\n\nn\n\nf\n\nFigure 4.12. Indirect Power Effects.\n\nFigure 4.12. Indirect Power Effects.\n\n263", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS GO-BOT-BO STABILITY AND CONTROL \n\nFigure 4.12. Indirect Power Effects. \n\n263" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5489938756679379, + "doc_id": "b71391eece1627b3ca712fdb78b307e53e15edd9eddb784927c4d1aab9978b8f", + "edit_distance": 0.6842105263157895, + "f1_score": 0.9565217391304348, + "meteor": 0.8884297520661157, + "precision": 0.9166666666666666, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS 00-501-50 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE\n\nFigure 2.23. Geneml Range Performance\n\nFigure 2.23. Geneml Range Performance\n\n159", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Figure 2.23. Geneml Range Performance \n\n159 \n\nNAVWEPS 00-501-50 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6113693652761815, + "doc_id": "e491ed1fc8e787d3082a0b6b8c096ca97405137f9e90b916f257dcff19ff5106", + "edit_distance": 0.41935483870967744, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.932002814558946, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS 00-801-80 AIRPLANE PEkFORMANCE\n\nFigure 2.33. Approximate Effect of Wind Velocity on Takeoff or Landing Distance\n\nFigure 2.33. Approximate Effect of Wind Velocity on Takeoff or Landing Distance\n\n189", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-801-80 AIRPLANE PEkFORMANCE \n\nFigure 2.33. Approximate Effect of Wind Velocity on Takeoff or Landing Distance \n\n189" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5906871848918501, + "doc_id": "850e58bdee5c53da7495cbe8aeaaa896fedfac0183331a25a0fd0068e9deff9f", + "edit_distance": 0.4166666666666667, + "f1_score": 0.9655172413793105, + "meteor": 0.9319727891156462, + "precision": 0.9333333333333333, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS 00-8OT-80 HIGH SPEED AERODYNAMICS\n\nfigure 3.17. Structurd Complications Due to Sweephk\n\nfigure 3.17. Structurd Complications Due to Sweephk\n\n233", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-8OT-80 HIGH SPEED AERODYNAMICS \n\nfigure 3.17. Structurd Complications Due to Sweephk \n\n233" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8330102430183386, + "doc_id": "b7db3f7430da411eaae16c7731414796a99bf909f11833e6db8a39b96dcc8c9b", + "edit_distance": 0.6008771929824561, + "f1_score": 0.9216152019002374, + "meteor": 0.8142771917623302, + "precision": 0.9509803921568627, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS 00-801-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL\n\nhovering and large trim moments upon entering autorotation will limit the stabilizer size to a relatively small surface. Usually the horizontal stabilizer is used only to give the fuselage the desired moment characteristics.\n\nThe angle of attack stability of a tandemrotor helicopter is adversely affected by the downwash from the forward rotor reducing the angle of attack and thrust of the rear rotor. This reduction of thrust behind the cg. causes the helicopter to pitch up to a higher angle of attack, thereby adding to the angle of attack instability.\n\nAs in the airplane, several oscillatory modes of motion are characteristic of the dynamic stability of a helicopter. The phugoid is the most troublesome for the helicopter. The phugoid mode is unstable in the majority of helicopters which operate without the assistance of artificial stabilization devices. The dynamic instability of the helicopter is given evidence by the flying qualities specification for helicopters. These specifications essentially limit the rate of divergence of the dynamic oscillations for the ordinary helicopter. Although this dynamic instability can be controlled, it requires constant attention by the pilot and results in pilot fatigue. The elimination of the dynamic instability would contribute\n\n324\n\ngreatly to improving the flying qualities of the helicopter.\n\nThis dynamic instability characteristic is particularly important if the helicopter is expected to be used for instrument flight in all-weather operations. In fact, a seriously divergent phugoid mode would make instrument flight impractical. For this reason, the flying qualities specification requires that helicopters with an instrument capability exhibit varying degrees of stability or instability depending on the period of the oscillation. Long period oscillations (over 20 seconds) must not double in amplitude in less than 15 seconds whereas short period oscillations (under 10 seconds) must damp to half amplitude in two cycles.\n\nThe only immediate solution for the dynamic instability is an attitude stabilization system which is essentially an autopilot. Other solutions to the dynamic instability problem involve mechanical, aerodynamic, or electronic control feedback of pitch attitude, pitch velocity, normal acceleration, or angle of attack. The i mprovement of the helicopter' s stability is mandatory to fully utilize its unique capability. As more of the helicopter problems are analyzed and studied, the flying qualities of helicopters wiI1 improve and be comparable to the fixed wing aircraft.", + "recall": 0.8940092165898618, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-801-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL \n\ngreatly to improving the flying qualities of the helicopter. This dynamic instability characteristic is \n\nhovering and large trim moments upon entering autorotation will limit the stabilizer size to a relatively small surface. Usually the hori- zontal stabilizer is used only to give the fuse- lage the desired moment characteristics. The angle of attack stability of a tandem- \n\nthe helicopter. This dynamic instability characteristic is particularly important if the helicopter is expected to be used for instrument flight in all-weather operations. In fact, a seriously divergent phugoid mode would make instru- ment flight impractical. For this reason, the flying qualities specification requires that helicopters with an instrument capability exhibit varying degrees of stability or insta- bility depending on the period of the oscilla- tion. Long period oscillations (over 20 sec- onds) must not double in amplitude in less than 15 seconds whereas short period oscil- lations (under 10 seconds) must damp to half amplitude in two cycles. \n\nlage the desired moment characteristics. The angle of attack stability of a tandem- rotor helicopter is adversely affected by the downwash from the forward rotor reducing the angle of attack and thrust of the rear rotor. This reduction of thrust behind the cg. causes the helicopter to pitch up to a higher angle of attack, thereby adding to the angle of attack instability. \n\nAs in the airplane, several oscillatory modes of motion are characteristic of the dynamic stability of a helicopter. The phugoid is the most troublesome for the helicopter. The phugoid mode is unstable in the majority of helicopters which operate without the assist- ance of artificial stabilization devices. The dynamic instability of the helicopter is given evidence by the flying qualities specification for helicopters. These specifications essentially limit the rate of divergence of the dynamic oscil- lations for the ordinary helicopter. Although this dynamic instability can be controlled, it requires constant attention by the pilot and results in pilot fatigue. The elimination of the dynamic instability would contribute \n\nThe only immediate solution for the dynamic instability is an attitude stabilization system which is essentially an autopilot. Other solutions to the dynamic instability problem involve mechanical, aerodynamic, or elec- tronic control feedback of pitch attitude, pitch velocity, normal acceleration, or angle of attack. The improvement of the heli- copter ’ s stability is mandatory to fully utilize its unique capability. As more of the heli- copter problems are analyzed and studied, the flying qualities of helicopters wiI1 improve and be comparable to the fixed wing aircraft. \n\n324" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9162048830107471, + "doc_id": "bca7db21ae7ef608eaaea844ded91bd514e8e3ecc8fa2039b7712b6d9400903d", + "edit_distance": 0.5531088082901554, + "f1_score": 0.9525616698292221, + "meteor": 0.8152983070203769, + "precision": 0.98046875, + "pred_md": "is the primary reference in lateral stability as well as directional stability considerations. The yaw angle, #, is a primary reference for wind tunnel tests and time history motion of an airplane. From the definitions there is no direct relationship between @ and # for an airplane in free flight, e.g., an airplane flown through a 360° turn has yawed 360' but sideslip may have been zero throughout the entire turn. Since the airplane has no directional sense, static directional stability of the airplane is appreciated by response to sideslip.\n\nThe static directional stability of an airplane can be illustrated by a graph of yawing moment coe&cient, C., versus sideslip angle, 8, such as shown in figure 4.22. When the airplane is subject to a positive sideslip angle, static directional stability will be evident if a positive yawing moment coefficient results. Thus, when the relative wind comes from the right (+p), a yawing moment to the right (+C.) should be created which tends to weathercock the airplane and return the nose into the wind. Static directional stability will exist when the curve of C,, versus fi has a positive slope and the degree of stability will be a function of.the slope of this curve. If the curve has zero slope, there is no tendency to return to equilibrium and neutral static directional stability exists. When the curve of C. versus /3 has a negative slope, the yawing moments developed by sideslip tend to diverge rather than restore and static directional instability exists.\n\nThe final chart of figure 4.22 illustrates the fact that the instantaneous slope of the curve of C,, versus @ will describe the static directional stability of the airplane. At small angles of sideslip a strong positive slope depicts strong directional stability. Large angles of sideslip produce zero slope and neutral stability. At very high sideslip the negative slope of the curve indicates directional instability. This decay of directional stability with increased sideslip is not an unusual condition. However, directional instability should not occur at the angles of sideslip of ordinary flight conditions.\n\n## NAVWEPS 00-ROT-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL\n\nStatic directional stability must be in evidence for all the critical conditions of flight. Generally, good directional stability is a ftmdamental quality directly affecting the pilots' impression of an airplane.\n\nCONTRIBUTION OF THE AIRPLANE COMPONENTS. The static directional stability of the airplane is a result of contribution of each of the various airplane components. While the contribution of each component is somewhat dependent upon and related to other components, it is necessary to study each component separately.\n\nThe vertical tail is the primary source of directional stability for the airplane. As shown in figure 4.23, when the airplane is in a sideslip the vertical tail will experience a change in angle of attack. The change in lift-or side force-on the vertical tail creates a yawing moment about the center of gravity which tends to yaw the airplane into the relative wind. The magnitude of the vertical tail contribution to static directional stability then depends on the change in tail lift and the tail moment arm. Obviously, the tail moment arm is a powerful factor but essentially dictated by the major configuration properties of the airplane.\n\nWhen the location of the vertical tail is set,, the contribution of the surface to directional stability depends on its ability to produce changes in lift-or side force-with changes in sideslip. The surface area of the vertical tail is a powerful factor with the contribution of the vertical tail being a direct function of the area. When all other possibilities are exhausted, the required directional stability may be obtained by increases in tail area. However, increased surface area has the obvious disadvantage of increased drag.\n\nThe lift curve slope of the vertical tail relates how sensitive the surface is to changes in angle of attack. While it is desirable to have a high lift curve slope for the vertical surface, a high aspect ratio surface is not necessarily practical or desirable. The stall", + "recall": 0.9261992619926199, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-ROT-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL \n\nStatic directional stability must be in evi- dence for all the critical conditions of flight. Generally, good directional stability is a ftm- damental quality directly affecting the pilots’ impression of an airplane. CONTRIBUTION OF THE AIRPLANE \n\nimpression of an airplane. CONTRIBUTION OF THE AIRPLANE COMPONENTS. The static directional sta- bility of the airplane is a result of contribution of each of the various airplane components. While the contribution of each component is somewhat dependent upon and related to other components, it is necessary to study each component separately. \n\nis the primary reference in lateral stability as well as directional stability considerations. The yaw angle, #, is a primary reference for wind tunnel tests and time history motion of an airplane. From the definitions there is no direct relationship between @ and # for an airplane in free flight, e.g., an airplane flown through a 360° turn has yawed 360” but side- slip may have been zero throughout the entire turn. Since the airplane has no directional sense, static directional stability of the air- plane is appreciated by response to sideslip. \n\nThe static directional stability of an airplane can be illustrated by a graph of yawing moment coe&cient, C., versus sideslip angle, 8, such as shown in figure 4.22. When the airplane is subject to a positive sideslip angle, static direc- tional stability will be evident if a positive yawing moment coefficient results. Thus, when the relative wind comes from the right (+p), a yawing moment to the right (+C.) should be created which tends to weathercock the airplane and return the nose into the wind. Static directional stability will exist when the curve of C,, versus fi has a positive slope and the degree of stability will be a function of.the slope of this curve. If the curve has zero slope, there is no tendency to return to equilibrium and neutral static directional stability exists. When the curve of C. versus /3 has a negative slope, the yawing moments developed by side- slip tend to diverge rather than restore and static directional instability exists. \n\nThe vertical tail is the primary source of directional stability for the airplane. As shown in figure 4.23, when the airplane is in a sideslip the vertical tail will experience a change in angle of attack. The change in lift-or side force-on the vertical tail creates a yawing moment about the center of gravity which tends to yaw the airplane into the relative wind. The magnitude of the vertical tail contribution to static directional stability then depends on the change in tail lift and the tail moment arm. Obviously, the tail moment arm is a powerful factor but essentially dic- tated by the major configuration properties of the airplane. When the location of the vertical tail is set,, \n\nthe airplane. When the location of the vertical tail is set,, the contribution of the surface to directional stability depends on its ability to produce changes in lift-or side force-with changes in sideslip. The surface area of the vertical tail is a powerful factor with the contribution of the vertical tail being a direct function of the area. When all other possibilities are ex- hausted, the required directional stability may be obtained by increases in tail area. How- ever, increased surface area has the obvious disadvantage of increased drag. \n\nThe final chart of figure 4.22 illustrates the fact that the instantaneous slope of the curve of C,, versus @ will describe the static directional stability of the airplane. At small angles of sideslip a strong positive slope depicts strong directional stability. Large angles of sideslip produce zero slope and neutral stability. At very high sideslip the negative slope of the curve indicates directional instability. This decay of directional stability with increased sideslip is not an unusual condition. However, directional instability should not occur at the angles of sideslip of ordinary flight conditions. \n\nThe lift curve slope of the vertical tail relates how sensitive the surface is to changes in angle of attack. While it is desirable to have a high lift curve slope for the vertical surface, a high aspect ratio surface is not necessarily practical or desirable. The stall" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "fcf79cc2d82e95223ab4bcb6cc85d97c08940b894e342195e0f1f75d4dc85658", + "edit_distance": 0.375, + "f1_score": 0.875, + "meteor": 0.840561224489796, + "precision": 0.875, + "pred_md": "FAA Chart Users' Guide - References\n\n128", + "recall": 0.875, + "true_md": "128\n\nFAA Chart Users’ Guide - References" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5261352166307947, + "doc_id": "e686d9b6c95ea338c38abd9b90de4dcbb88f1615f3debb41b64c4003c4691074", + "edit_distance": 0.4482758620689655, + "f1_score": 0.9696969696969697, + "meteor": 0.9239523121387283, + "precision": 0.9411764705882353, + "pred_md": "## kAVWEPS OO-EOT-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE\n\nFigure 2.7 1. Approximate Eftect of Altitude on Engine Performance\n\nFigure 2.7 1. Approximate Eftect of Altitude on Engine Performance\n\n120", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "kAVWEPS OO-EOT-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE \n\nFigure 2.7 1. Approximate Eftect of Altitude on Engine Performance \n\n120" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.04003480339276933, + "doc_id": "8ca486e0e003dc2af7f2a7d550610fad55423a740a5b26aa6e4b81aff4258e68", + "edit_distance": 0.9427710843373494, + "f1_score": 0.22499999999999998, + "meteor": 0.31723784715529535, + "precision": 0.1267605633802817, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS OO-BOT-80\n\nTABLE OF CONTENTS\n\n## CHAPTER 5. OPERAilNG STRENGTH LIMITATIONS\n\n## GENERAL OEFlNlTlONS AND STRUCTURAL REQUlREMENTS\n\n| STATIC STRENGTH ..\\_.......... ~.~~~.~ ~..~ Limit load Factor of safety Material properties | |\n|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|----------|\n| SERVICE LIFE Pati Loa r spectrum attd cumulative e consideration damage Creep considerations | 328 |\n| AEROELASTIC EFFECTS. Stiffness and rigidity | 330 |\n| AIRCRAFT LOADS AND OPERATING LIMITATIONS | |\n| FLIGHT LOADS-MANEUVERS AND GUSTS. | 331 |\n| Loadfactor..................................................... Maneuvering .I | 331 331 |\n| load factors.. Maximum lift capability Effect of gross weight ^ . .\\_ ClllStlOadtacfors..............,................................. | 332 |\n| Gust load increment Effect of gust intensity and lift curve slope Effect of wing loading and altitude Effect of overstrea. | 334 |\n| THE V-n OR V-g DIAGRAM. Effect of weight, configuration;altihtde, Limit load factors Ultitnute load facvxs | 334 |\n| and symmetry of Ior-Ang Maximum lift capability Limit airspeed Operating env+pe Maneuver' speed and penetration of turbulence | |\n| EFFECT OF HIGH SPEED FLIGHT.. Critical gust Aileron reversal | 339 |\n| Divergence PIutter Compressibility problems LANDING AND GROUND LOADS. | |\n| Landing load factor Effect of touchdown rate of descent Effect of gross weight Ported landing on unprepared .surfaces | 343 |\n| EFFECT OF OVERSTRESS ON SERVICE Recognition of overstress' damage Importance of operating limitations LIFE | 344 |\n\nxiv", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OO-BOT-80 TABLE OF CONTENTS \n\n## CHAPTER 5. OPERAilNG STRENGTH LIMITATIONS GENERAL OEFlNlTlONS AND STRUCTURAL REQUlREMENTS\n\nxiv" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8142110713785881, + "doc_id": "d268436f4b214928caac801f6fe9663b27a0b2f15db0e6e09f07789259403f5a", + "edit_distance": 0.7672301690507152, + "f1_score": 0.8733944954128441, + "meteor": 0.6759130193025563, + "precision": 0.9260700389105059, + "pred_md": "From the previous analysis, it is apparent that the cruise altitude of the turbojet should be as high as possible within compressibility or thrust limits. Generally, the optimum altitude to begin cruise is the highest altitude at which the maximum continuous thrust can provide the optimum aerodynamic conditions. Of course, the optimum altitude is determined mainly by the gross weight at the begin of cruise. For the majority of turbojet airplanes this altitude will be at or above the tropopause for normal cruise configurations.\n\nMost turbojet airplanes which have rransonic or moderate supersonic performance will obtain maximum range with a high subsonic cruise. However, the airplane designed specifically for high supersonic performance will obtain maximum range with a supersonic cruise and subsonic operation will cause low lift-drag ratios, poor inlet and engine performance and redute the range capability.\n\nThe cruise control of the turbojet airplane is considerably ~different from that of the propeller driven airplane. Since the specific range is so greatly affected by altitude, the optimum altitude for begin of cruise should be attained as rapidly as is consistent with climb fuel requirements. The range-climb program varies considerably between airplanes and the performance section of the flight handbook will specify the appropriate procedure. The descent from cruise altitude will employ essentially the same feature, a rapid descent is necessary to minimize the time at low altitudes where specific' range is low and fuel flow is high for a given engine speed.\n\nDuring cruise flight of the turbojet airplane, the decrease of gross weight from expenditure of fuel can result in two types of cruise control. During a constant altitlrdc C&SC, a reduction in gross weight will require a reduction of airspeed and engine thrust ' to maintain the optimum lift coefhcient of subsonic cruise. While such a cruise may be necessary to conform to the flow of traffic, it constitutes a certain inefficiency of operation. If the airplane were\n\n167\n\n## NAVWEPS OO-BOT-RO AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE\n\nnot restrained to a particular altitude, maintaining the same lift coeAicient and engine speed would allow the airplane to climb as the gross weight decreases. Since altitude generally produces a beneficial effect on range, the climbing C&SC implies a more efficient flight path.\n\nThe cruising flight of the turbojet airplane will begin usually at or above the tropopause in order to provide optimum range conditions. If flight is conducted at (a/&)-, optimum range will be obtained at specific values of lift coefficient and drag coefficient. When the airplane is fixed at these values of CL and C, and the TAS is held constant, both lift and drag are directly proportional to the density ratio, (T. Also, above the tropopause, the thrust is proportional to .J when the TAS and RPM are constant. As a result, a reduction of gross weight by the expenditure of fuel would allow the airplane to climb but the airplane would remain in equilibrium because lift, drag, and thrust all vary in the same fashion. This relationship is illustrated by figure 2.26.\n\nThe relationship of lift, drag, and thrust is convenient for, in part, it justifies the condition of a constant velocity. Above the tropopause, rhe speed of sound is constant hence a constant velocity during the cruise-climb would produce a constant Mach number. In this case, the optimum values of (&,/CD), C, and C, do not vary during the climb since the Mach number is constant. The specific fuel consumption is initially constant above the tropopause but begins to increase at altitudes much above the tropopause. If the specific fuel consumption is assumed to be constant during the cruise-climb, the following relationships will apply:\n\n\n\n\n\nJR2-W, (cruise climb above tropopause, x-W9 constant M, c,)", + "recall": 0.8263888888888888, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OO-BOT-RO AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE \n\nnot restrained to a particular altitude, main- taining the same lift coeAicient and engine speed would allow the airplane to climb as the gross weight decreases. Since altitude gen- erally produces a beneficial effect on range, the climbing C&SC implies a more efficient flight path. \n\nFrom the previous analysis, it is apparent that the cruise altitude of the turbojet should be as high as possible within compressibility or thrust limits. Generally, the optimum alti- tude to begin cruise is the highest altitude at which the maximum continuous thrust can provide the optimum aerodynamic conditions. Of course, the optimum altitude is determined mainly by the gross weight at the begin of cruise. For the majority of turbojet airplanes this altitude will be at or above the tropopause for normal cruise configurations. \n\nThe cruising flight of the turbojet airplane will begin usually at or above the tropopause in order to provide optimum range conditions. If flight is conducted at (a/&)-, optimum range will be obtained at specific values of lift coefficient and drag coefficient. When the air- plane is fixed at these values of CL and C, and the TAS is held constant, both lift and drag are directly proportional to the density ratio, (T. Also, above the tropopause, the thrust is pro- portional to .J when the TAS and RPM are con- stant. As a result, a reduction of gross weight by the expenditure of fuel would allow the airplane to climb but the airplane would re- main in equilibrium because lift, drag, and thrust all vary in the same fashion. This re- lationship is illustrated by figure 2.26. The relationship of lift, drag, and thrust is \n\nMost turbojet airplanes which have rran- sonic or moderate supersonic performance will obtain maximum range with a high subsonic cruise. However, the airplane designed spe- cifically for high supersonic performance will obtain maximum range with a supersonic cruise and subsonic operation will cause low lift-drag ratios, poor inlet and engine perform- ance and redute the range capability. The cruise control of the turbojet airplane \n\nance and redute the range capability. The cruise control of the turbojet airplane is considerably ~different from that of the pro- peller driven airplane. Since the specific range is so greatly affected by altitude, the optimum altitude for begin of cruise should be attained as rapidly as is consistent with climb fuel re- quirements. The range-climb program varies considerably between airplanes and the per- formance section of the flight handbook will specify the appropriate procedure. The de- scent from cruise altitude will employ essen- tially the same feature, a rapid descent is necessary to minimize the time at low altitudes where specific’ range is low and fuel flow is high for a given engine speed. \n\nlationship is illustrated by figure 2.26. The relationship of lift, drag, and thrust is convenient for, in part, it justifies the condi- tion of a constant velocity. Above the tropo- pause, rhe speed of sound is constant hence a constant velocity during the cruise-climb would produce a constant Mach number. In this case, the optimum values of (&,/CD), C, and C, do not vary during the climb since the Mach number is constant. The specific fuel consumption is initially constant above the tropopause but begins to increase at altitudes much above the tropopause. If the specific fuel consumption is assumed to be constant during the cruise-climb, the following rela- tionships will apply: \n\nDuring cruise flight of the turbojet airplane, the decrease of gross weight from expenditure of fuel can result in two types of cruise control. During a constant altitlrdc C&SC, a reduction in gross weight will require a reduction of air- speed and engine thrust ‘ to maintain the opti- mum lift coefhcient of subsonic cruise. While such a cruise may be necessary to conform to the flow of traffic, it constitutes a certain in- efficiency of operation. If the airplane were \n\nV, M, CL and C, are constant 62 wz 61 w, FR 02 FFI ~1 JR2-W, (cruise climb above tropopause, x-W9 constant M, c,) \n\n167" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8814081007606795, + "doc_id": "0aab6f4cdc6cbf93dc537409f207fa8c42418665a26af50cf9a070819f899f36", + "edit_distance": 0.1036036036036036, + "f1_score": 0.9426987060998153, + "meteor": 0.9070215231105605, + "precision": 0.9659090909090909, + "pred_md": "(2) Sweepback will reduce the magnitude of change in the aerodynamic force coefficients due to compressibility. Any change in drag, lift, or moment coefbcients will be reduced by the use of sweepback. Various sweep angles applied to wings of moderate aspect ratio will produce these approximate effects in transonic flight.\n\n-\n\n-\n\nThese advantages of drag reduction and preservation of the transonic maximum lift coefficient are illustrated in figure 3.14.\n\nThus, the use of sweepback on a transonic aircraft will reduce and delay the drag rise and preserve the maneuverability of the aircraft in transonic flight. It should be noted that a small amount of sweepback produces very little benefit. If sweepback is to be used at all, at least 30' to 33' must be used to produce any significant benefit. Also note from figure 3.14 that the amount of sweepback required to d&y drag rise in supersonic flight is very large, e.g., more than 60° necessary at M=2.0. By comparison of the drag curves at high Mach numbers it will be appreciated that extremely high (and possibly impractical) sweepback is necessary to delay drag rise and that the lowest drag is abtained with zero sweepback. Therefore, the planform of a wing designed to operate continuously at high Mach numbers will tend to be very thin, low aspect ratio, and unswept. An immediate conclusion is that sweepback is a device of greatest application in the regime of transonic flight.\n\nA few of the less significant advantages of sweepback are as follows:\n\n229\n\n## NAVWEPS 00-801-80 HIGH SPEED AERODYNAMICS\n\n(1) The wing lift curve slope is reduced for a given aspect ratio. This is illustrated by the lift curve comparison of figure 3.15 for the straight and swept wing. Any reduction of lift curve slope implies the wing is less sensitive to changes in angle of attack. This is a beneficial effect only when the effect of gusts and turbulence is considered. Since the swept wing has the lower lift curve slope it will be less sensitive to gusts and experience less ' bump' due to gust for a given aspect ratio and wing loading. This is a consideration particular to the aircraft whose structural design shows a predominating effect of the gust spectrum, e.g., transport, cargo, and patrol\n\n- load types.\n\n(2) ' Divergence' of a surface is an aeroelastic problem which can occur at high dynamic pressures. Combined bending and twisting deflections interact with aerodynamic forces to produce sudden failure of the surface at high speeds. Sweep forward will aggravate this situation by ' l eading' the wing into the windstream and tends to lower the divergence speed. On the other hand, sweepback tends to stabilize the surface by ' trailing' and tends to raise the divergence speed. By this tendency, sweepback may be beneficial in preventing divergence within the anticipated speed range.\n\n(3) Sweepback contributes slightly to the static directional-or weathercock-stability of an aircraft. This effect may be appreciated by inspection of hgure 3.13 which shows the swept wing in a yaw or sideslip. The wing into the wind has less sweep and a slight increase in drag; the wing away from the wind has more sweep and less drag. The net effect of these force changes is to produce a yawing moment tending to retarn the nose into the relative wind. This directional stability contribution is usually small and of importance in tailless aircraft only.\n\nRevised January l %S", + "recall": 0.9205776173285198, + "true_md": "(2) Sweepback will reduce the magnitude of change in the aerodynamic force coeffi- cients due to compressibility. Any change in drag, lift, or moment coefbcients will be reduced by the use of sweepback. Various sweep angles applied to wings of moderate aspect ratio will produce these approximate effects in transonic flight. \n\nThese advantages of drag reduction and preser- vation of the transonic maximum lift coefficient are illustrated in figure 3.14. \n\nThus, the use of sweepback on a transonic aircraft will reduce and delay the drag rise and preserve the maneuverability of the aircraft in transonic flight. It should be noted that a small amount of sweepback produces very little benefit. If sweepback is to be used at all, at least 30’ to 33’ must be used to produce any significant benefit. Also note from figure 3.14 that the amount of sweepback required to d&y drag rise in supersonic flight is very large, e.g., more than 60° necessary at M=2.0. By comparison of the drag curves at high Mach numbers it will be appreciated that extremely high (and possibly impractical) sweepback is necessary to delay drag rise and that the lowest drag is abtained with zero sweepback. There- fore, the planform of a wing designed to operate continuously at high Mach numbers will tend to be very thin, low aspect ratio, and unswept. An immediate conclusion is that sweepback is a device of greatest application in the regime of transonic flight. A few of the less significant advantages of \n\ntransonic flight. A few of the less significant advantages of sweepback are as follows: \n\n(1) The wing lift curve slope is reduced for a given aspect ratio. This is illustrated by the lift curve comparison of figure 3.15 for the straight and swept wing. Any reduction of lift curve slope implies the wing is less sensitive to changes in angle of attack. This is a beneficial effect only when the effect of gusts and turbulence is con- sidered. Since the swept wing has the lower lift curve slope it will be less sensitive to gusts and experience less “bump” due to gust for a given aspect ratio and wing loading. This is a consideration particular to the aircraft whose structural design shows a predominating effect of the gust load spectrum, e.g., transport, cargo, and patrol types. (2) “Divergence” of a surface is an aero- \n\ntypes. (2) “Divergence” of a surface is an aero- elastic problem which can occur at high dynamic pressures. Combined bending and twisting deflections interact with aerody- namic forces to produce sudden failure of the surface at high speeds. Sweep forward will aggravate this situation by “leading” the wing into the windstream and tends to lower the divergence speed. On the other hand, sweepback tends to stabilize the surface by “trailing” and tends to raise the divergence speed. By this tendency, sweep- back may be beneficial in preventing di- vergence within the anticipated speed range. \n\n(3) Sweepback contributes slightly to the static directional-or weathercock-stability of an aircraft. This effect may be appre- ciated by inspection of hgure 3.13 which shows the swept wing in a yaw or sideslip. The wing into the wind has less sweep and a slight increase in drag; the wing away from the wind has more sweep and less drag. The net effect of these force changes is to produce a yawing moment tending to retarn the nose into the relative wind. This directional stability contribution is usually small and of importance in tailless aircraft only. \n\n229 \n\nRevised January l%S \n\nNAVWEPS 00-801-80 HIGH SPEED AERODYNAMICS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.876344885465368, + "doc_id": "327c8ff1e55a3c09c3b8f6fc26152017452e7d1a5b4516c71930b6739755ee88", + "edit_distance": 0.7408491947291361, + "f1_score": 0.9205175600739371, + "meteor": 0.776679535450022, + "precision": 0.950381679389313, + "pred_md": "limit is set by the minimum permissible controllability while the aft c.g. limit is set by the minimum permissible stability.\n\n## LONGITUDINAL DYNAMIC STABILITY.\n\nAll previous considerations of longitudinal stability have been concerned with the initial tendency of the airplane to return to equilibrium when subjected to a disturbance. The considerations of longitudinal dynamic stability ate concerned with time history response of the airplane to these disturbances, i.e., the variation of displacement amplitude with time following a disturbance. From previous delinition, dynamic stability will exist when the amplitude of motion decreases with time and dynamic instability will exist if the amplitude increases with time.\n\nOf course, the airplane must demonstrate positive dynamic stability for the major longitudinal motions. In addition, the airplane must demonstrate a certain degree of longitudinal stability by reducing the amplitude of motion at a certain rate. The requited degree of dynamic stability is usually specified by the time necessary for the amplitude to reduce to one-half the original value-the time to damp to half-amplitude.\n\nThe airplane in free flight has six degrees of freedom: rotation in roll, pitch, and yaw and translation in the horizontal, vertical, and lateral directions. In the case of longitudinal dynamic stability, the degrees of freedom can be limited to pitch rotation, vertical and horizontal translation. Since the airplane is usually symmetrical from port to starboard, there will be no necessity for consideration of coupling between longitudinal and lateraldirectional motions. Thus, the principal variables in the longitudinal motion of an airplane will be:\n\n- (1) The pitch attitude of the airplane.\n- (2) The angle of attack (which will differ from the pitch attitude by the inclination of the flightpath).\n- (3) The flight velocity.\n\nNAVWEPS DD-801-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL\n\n(4) The displacement or deflection of the elevator when the stick-free condition is considered.\n\nThe longitudinal dynamic stability of an airplane generally consists of three basic modes (or manners) of oscillation. While the longitudinal motion of the airplane may consist of a combination of these modes, the characteristics of each mode are sufficiently distinct that each oscillatory tendency may be studied separately.\n\nThe first mode of dynamic longitudinal stability consists of a very long period oscillation referred to as the phagoid. The phugoid or long period oscillation involves noticeable vatiations in pitch attitude, altitude, and airspeed but nearly constant angle of attack. Such an oscillation of the airplane could be considered as a gradual interchange of potential and kinetic energy about some equilibrium airspeed and altitude. Figure 4.20 illustrates the characteristic motion of the phugoid.\n\nThe period of oscillation in the phugoid is quite large, typical values being from 20 to 100 seconds. Since the pitching rate is quite low and only negligible changes in angle of attack take place, damping of the phugoid is weak and possibly negative. However, such weak or negative damping does not necessarily have any great consequence. Since the period of oscillation is so great, the pilot is easily able to counteract the oscillatory tendency by very slight and unnoticed control movements. In most cases, the necessary corrections ate so slight that the pilot may be completely unaware of the oscillatory tendency.\n\nDue to the nature of the phugoid, it is not necessary to make any specific aerodynamic provisions to contend with the oscillation. The inherent long period of the oscillation allows study to be directed to more important oscillatory tendencies. Similarly, the diffetences between the stick-fixed and stick-free phugoid are not of great importance.\n\nThe second ode of longitudinal m dynamic stability is a relatively short period motion that", + "recall": 0.8924731182795699, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS DD-801-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL \n\n(4) The displacement or deflection of the elevator when the stick-free condition is considered. The longitudinal dynamic stability of an \n\nlimit is set by the minimum permissible con- trollability while the aft c.g. limit is set by the minimum permissible stability. \n\nAll previous considerations of longitudinal stability have been concerned with the initial tendency of the airplane to return to equilib- rium when subjected to a disturbance. The considerations of longitudinal dynamic sta- bility ate concerned with time history response of the airplane to these disturbances, i.e., the variation of displacement amplitude with time following a disturbance. From previous deli- nition, dynamic stability will exist when the amplitude of motion decreases with time and dynamic instability will exist if the amplitude increases with time. \n\nconsidered. The longitudinal dynamic stability of an airplane generally consists of three basic modes (or manners) of oscillation. While the longi- tudinal motion of the airplane may consist of a combination of these modes, the characteristics of each mode are sufficiently distinct that each oscillatory tendency may be studied separately. \n\nThe first mode of dynamic longitudinal sta- bility consists of a very long period oscillation referred to as the phagoid. The phugoid or long period oscillation involves noticeable vatia- tions in pitch attitude, altitude, and airspeed but nearly constant angle of attack. Such an oscillation of the airplane could be considered as a gradual interchange of potential and kinetic energy about some equilibrium airspeed and altitude. Figure 4.20 illustrates the char- acteristic motion of the phugoid. \n\nOf course, the airplane must demonstrate positive dynamic stability for the major longi- tudinal motions. In addition, the airplane must demonstrate a certain degree of longitu- dinal stability by reducing the amplitude of motion at a certain rate. The requited degree of dynamic stability is usually specified by the time necessary for the amplitude to reduce to one-half the original value-the time to damp to half-amplitude. \n\n## LONGITUDINAL DYNAMIC STABILITY.\n\nThe period of oscillation in the phugoid is quite large, typical values being from 20 to 100 seconds. Since the pitching rate is quite low and only negligible changes in angle of attack take place, damping of the phugoid is weak and possibly negative. However, such weak or negative damping does not necessarily have any great consequence. Since the period of oscilla- tion is so great, the pilot is easily able to counteract the oscillatory tendency by very slight and unnoticed control movements. In most cases, the necessary corrections ate so slight that the pilot may be completely un- aware of the oscillatory tendency. \n\nThe airplane in free flight has six degrees of freedom: rotation in roll, pitch, and yaw and translation in the horizontal, vertical, and lateral directions. In the case of longitudinal dynamic stability, the degrees of freedom can be limited to pitch rotation, vertical and horizontal translation. Since the airplane is usually symmetrical from port to starboard, there will be no necessity for consideration of coupling between longitudinal and lateral- directional motions. Thus, the principal vari- ables in the longitudinal motion of an airplane will be: \n\nDue to the nature of the phugoid, it is not necessary to make any specific aerodynamic provisions to contend with the oscillation. The inherent long period of the oscillation al- lows study to be directed to more important oscillatory tendencies. Similarly, the diffet- ences between the stick-fixed and stick-free phugoid are not of great importance. \n\nThe second mode of longitudinal dynamic sta- bility is a relatively short period motion that \n\n(3) The flight velocity. \n\n(2) The angle of attack (which will differ from the pitch attitude by the inclination of the flight- path). \n\n(1) The pitch attitude of the airplane." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8756579764834546, + "doc_id": "8d9c47403058867165f7968a7f3e5a240f3b359fe410acf4d5a8e7779ee1dc87", + "edit_distance": 0.871523178807947, + "f1_score": 0.9442508710801393, + "meteor": 0.6878799605217323, + "precision": 0.9678571428571429, + "pred_md": "very high speed flight does not favor the use of high aspect ratio planforms. Low aspect ratio planforms have structural advantages and allow the use of thin, low drag sections for high speed flight. The aerodynamics of transonic and supersonic flight also favor short span, low aspect ratio surfaces. Thus, the modern configuration of airplane designed for high speed flight will have a low aspect ratio planform with characteristic aspect ratios of two to four. The most important impression that should result is that the typical modern configuration will have high angles of attack for maximum lift and very prodigious drag due to lift at low flight speeds. This fact is of importance to theNaval Aviator because the majority of pilotcaused accidents occur during this regime of flight-during takeoff, approach, and landing. Induced drag predominates in these regimes of flight.\n\nThe modern configuration of high speed airplane usually has a low aspect ratio planform with high wing loading. When wing sweepback is coupled with low aspect ratio, the wing lift curve has distinct curvature and is very flat at high angles of attack, i.e., at high CL, C, increases very slowly with an increase in 01. In addition, the drag curve shows extremely rapid rise at high lift coefficients since the drag due to lift is so very large. These effects produce flying qualities which are distinctly different from a more ' conventional' high aspect ratio airplane configuration.\n\nSome of the most important ramifications of the modern high speed configuration are:\n\n(1) During takeoff where the airplane must not be over-rotated to an excessive angle of attack. Any given airplane will have some fixed angle of attack (and CJ which produces the best takeoff performance and this angle of attack will not vary with weight, density altitude, or temperature. An excessive angle of attack produces additional i nduced drag and may have an undesirable effect on takeoff performance. Takeoff acceleration may be seriously reduced and a large increase in\n\n73\n\n## NAWEPS OO-BOT-BO BASIC AERODYNAMICS\n\ntakeoff distance may occur. Also, the initial climb performance may be marginal at an excessively low airspeed. There are modern configurations of airplanes of very low aspect ratio (plus sweepback) which-if overrotated during a high altitude, high gross weight takeoff-cannot fly out of ground effect. With the more conventional airplane configuration, an excess angle of attack produces a well defined stall. However, the modern airplane configuration at an excessive angle of attack has no sharply defined stall but developes an excessive amount of induced drag. To be sure that it will not go unsaid, an excessively low angle of attack on takeoff creates its own problems-excess takeoff speed and distance and critical tire loads.\n\n(2) During appra& where the pilot must exercise proper technique to control the flight path. ' Attitude plus power equals performance.' The modern high speed configuration at low speeds will have low liftdrag ratios due to the high i nduced drag 1 and can require relatively high power settings during the power approach. If the pilot interprets that his airplane is below the desired glide path, his first reaction rnu~t trot be to just ease the nose up. An increase in angle of attack without an increase in power will lower the airspeed and greatly increase the induced drag. Such a reaction could create a high rate of descent and lead to very undesirable consequences. The angle of attack indicator coupled with the mirror landing system provides reference to the pilot and emphasizes that during the steady approach ' angle of attack is the primary control of airspeed and power is the primary control of rate of climb or descent.' Steep turns during approach at low airspeed are always undesirable in any type of airplane because of the increased stall speed and i nduced drag. Steep turns at low airspeeds in a low aspect ratio airplane can create extremely high i nduced drag and can incur dangerous sink rates.\n\nRevised January 1965", + "recall": 0.9217687074829932, + "true_md": "NAWEPS OO-BOT-BO BASIC AERODYNAMICS \n\ntakeoff distance may occur. Also, the initial climb performance may be marginal at an excessively low airspeed. There are modern configurations of airplanes of very low aspect ratio (plus sweepback) which-if over- rotated during a high altitude, high gross weight takeoff-cannot fly out of ground effect. With the more conventional airplane configuration, an excess angle of attack pro- duces a well defined stall. However, the modern airplane configuration at an excessive angle of attack has no sharply defined stall but developes an excessive amount of induced drag. To be sure that it will not go unsaid, an excessively low angle of attack on takeoff creates its own problems-excess takeoff speed and distance and critical tire loads. \n\nvery high speed flight does not favor the use of high aspect ratio planforms. Low aspect ratio planforms have structural advantages and allow the use of thin, low drag sections for high speed flight. The aerodynamics of transonic and supersonic flight also favor short span, low aspect ratio surfaces. Thus, the modern con- figuration of airplane designed for high speed flight will have a low aspect ratio planform with characteristic aspect ratios of two to four. The most important impression that should result is that the typical modern configuration will have high angles of attack for maximum lift and very prodigious drag due to lift at low flight speeds. This fact is of importance to theNaval Aviator because the majority of pilot- caused accidents occur during this regime of flight-during takeoff, approach, and landing. Induced drag predominates in these regimes of flight. The modern configuration of high speed air- \n\n(2) During appra& where the pilot must exercise proper technique to control the flight path. “Attitude plus power equals performance.” The modern high speed con- figuration at low speeds will have low lift- drag ratios due to the high induced drag 1 and can require relatively high power set- tings during the power approach. If the pilot interprets that his airplane is below the desired glide path, his first reaction rnu~t trot be to just ease the nose up. An increase in angle of attack without an increase in power will lower the airspeed and greatly increase the induced drag. Such a reaction could create a high rate of descent and lead to very undesirable consequences. The an- gle of attack indicator coupled with the mirror landing system provides reference to the pilot and emphasizes that during the steady approach “angle of attack is the primary control of airspeed and power is the primary control of rate of climb or descent.” Steep turns during approach at low airspeed are always undesirable in any type of air- plane because of the increased stall speed and induced drag. Steep turns at low airspeeds in a low aspect ratio airplane can create extremely high induced drag and can incur dangerous sink rates. \n\nflight. The modern configuration of high speed air- plane usually has a low aspect ratio planform with high wing loading. When wing sweep- back is coupled with low aspect ratio, the wing lift curve has distinct curvature and is very flat at high angles of attack, i.e., at high CL, C, in- creases very slowly with an increase in 01. In addition, the drag curve shows extremely rapid rise at high lift coefficients since the drag due to lift is so very large. These effects produce flying qualities which are distinctly different from a more “conventional” high aspect ratio airplane configuration. \n\nSome of the most important ramifications of the modern high speed configuration are: (1) During takeoff where the airplane must \n\nthe modern high speed configuration are: (1) During takeoff where the airplane must not be over-rotated to an excessive angle of attack. Any given airplane will have some fixed angle of attack (and CJ which produces the best takeoff performance and this angle of attack will not vary with weight, density altitude, or temperature. An excessive angle of attack produces additional induced drag and may have an undesirable effect on takeoff performance. Takeoff acceleration may be seriously reduced and a large increase in \n\nRevised January 1965 \n\n73" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8621873745488365, + "doc_id": "21b2c0c4a123df1f8ca8f663438536799c01518ebe6e4d0858fdef2592ab1ae6", + "edit_distance": 0.13095238095238096, + "f1_score": 0.9184290030211482, + "meteor": 0.9094655702573473, + "precision": 0.9212121212121213, + "pred_md": "219\n\n## NAVWEPS OO-EOT-80 HIGH SPEED AERODYNAMICS\n\nFigure 3ilO. Compressibility Drag Rise\n\nFigure 3ilO. Compressibility Drag Rise\n\nht,MACH\n\nNUMBER\n\nshock wave formation, there will be a loss of lift and subsequent loss of downwash aft of the affected area. If the wings shock unevenly due to physical shape differences or sideslip, a rolling moment will be created in the direction of the initial loss of lift and contribute to control difficulty (' wing drop' ). If the shock i nduced separation occurs symmetrically near the wing root, a decrease in downwash behind this area is a corollary of the loss of lift. A decrease in downwash on the horizontal tail will create a diving moment and the aircraft will ' tuck under.' If these conditions occur on a swept wing. planform, the wing center of pressure shift contributes to the trim change-root shock first moves the wing center of pressure aft and adds to the diving moment; shock formation at the wing tips first moves the center of pressure forward and the resulting climbing moment and tail\n\ndownwash change can contribute to ' pitch up.'\n\nSince most of the dificulties of transonic flight are associated with shock wave induced flow separation, any means of delaying or alleviating the shock induced separation will improve the aerodynamic characteristics. An aircraft conhguration may utilize thin surfaces of low aspect ratio with sweepback to delay and reduce the magnitude of transonic force divergence. In addition, various methods of boundary layer control, high lift devices, vortex generators, etc., may be applied to improve transonic characteristics. For example, the application of vortex generators to a surface can produce higher local surface velocities and increase the kinetic energy of the boundary layer. Thus, a more severe pressure gradient (stronger shock wave) will be necessary to produce airflow separation.", + "recall": 0.9156626506024096, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OO-EOT-80 HIGH SPEED AERODYNAMICS \n\nFigure 3ilO. Compressibility Drag Rise \n\nshock wave formation, there will be a loss of lift and subsequent loss of downwash aft of the affected area. If the wings shock unevenly due to physical shape differences or sideslip, a rolling moment will be created in the direction of the initial loss of lift and con- tribute to control difficulty (“wing drop”). If the shock induced separation occurs sym- metrically near the wing root, a decrease in downwash behind this area is a corollary of the loss of lift. A decrease in downwash on the horizontal tail will create a diving moment and the aircraft will “tuck under.” If these conditions occur on a swept wing. planform, the wing center of pressure shift contributes to the trim change-root shock first moves the wing center of pressure aft and adds to the diving moment; shock formation at the wing tips first moves the center of pressure forward and the resulting climbing moment and tail \n\ndownwash change can contribute to “pitch up.” Since most of the dificulties of transonic \n\nup.” Since most of the dificulties of transonic flight are associated with shock wave induced flow separation, any means of delaying or alleviating the shock induced separation will improve the aerodynamic characteristics. An aircraft conhguration may utilize thin surfaces of low aspect ratio with sweepback to delay and reduce the magnitude of transonic force divergence. In addition, various methods of boundary layer control, high lift devices, vortex generators, etc., may be applied to improve transonic characteristics. For exam- ple, the application of vortex generators to a surface can produce higher local surface veloci- ties and increase the kinetic energy of the boundary layer. Thus, a more severe pressure gradient (stronger shock wave) will be neces- sary to produce airflow separation. \n\n219" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0009355872227565548, + "doc_id": "3f33fbf741fe3ee967f387ea1f19cf4b3788a1b8ac65f913a8d4daad7b54f300", + "edit_distance": 0.9960552268244576, + "f1_score": 0.039473684210526314, + "meteor": 0.053152180092092556, + "precision": 0.020134228187919462, + "pred_md": "Pwe\n\n| endurance | |\n|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|---------------|\n| off-optimum. .............................. | 172 |\n| performance. ............... .... ......... | 170 |\n| specific ................................. | 158, 170 |\n| engine failure | |\n| effect on multiengine airplane. ............ | 294, 376 |\n| power off glide performance. ................ | 369 |\n| equilibrium conditions. ....................... | 150 |\n| equivalent airspeed, EAT. .................... | 11 |\n| equivalent parasite area. ...................... | 89 |\n| equivalent shaft horsepower, ESHP. ........... | 133 |\n| expansionwave .............................. | 211 |\n| factorofsafcty | 326 |\n| ............................... fatigue considerations. ........................ | 328 |\n| feathering and governing of propellers. ......... | 148 |\n| flap | |\n| aerodynamic effects. ....................... | 37, 43 |\n| typCS ...................................... | 41 |\n| flutter ....................................... | 342 |\n| force divergence. ............................. | 218 |\n| friction | |\n| braking, ............................. | 388 |\n| cocfficicnt. | 388 |\n| ................................ skin friction. .............................. | 54 |\n| frost ........................................ | 373 |\n| fuel qualities. ................................ | 141 |\n| glide performance. ........................... | 369 |\n| governing apparatus, turbine engines. .......... governing and feathering of propellers. ......... | 121 |\n| gusts and wind shear. .................... | 147 ... 367 |\n| gust load factor. ........................... | 332 |\n| groundeffect ................................. | 379 |\n| heating, aerodynamic. ........................ | 242 |\n| helicopter, problems. ......................... | 399 |\n| helicopter stability and control. ............. | 319 |\n| high lift | |\n| devices .. ...... ............ ... ., | ., 39 |\n| flight at high lift conditions ................. | 35 |\n| High Speed Aerodynamics, Chapter III. ........ | 201 |\n| humidity, effect on power. .................... | 144 |\n| ice .......................................... | 373 |\n| indicated airspeed, IAS. ......... ............. | 10 |\n| induced | |\n| angle of attack. ........................... | 66 |\n| drag. .................................... | 66 |\n| drag coefficient. ........................... | 68 |\n| flow. ..................................... | 63 |\n| inertia coupling. ................... ....... | 315 |\n| inlets, supersonic powerplant. | 238 |\n| ................. | |\n| interference between airplanes in flight. ........ items of airplane performance. ................. | 383 |\n| landing and ground loads. .................... landing flare and touchdown, | 343 |\n| ............. | 362 |\n\n415\n\n## NAVWEPS 00-8OT-80\n\n## INDEX\n\nPsge\n\n9\n\n| ........... | |\n|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|-----------|\n| !a' ding gear configuration stability. | 305 |\n| landing performance. ...... .... ... | 192 |\n| ... factors affecting performance. .... ........... | 196 |\n| lateral co' trol, ............................... | 300 |\n| lateral stability. ....................... .... | 294 |\n| lift | |\n| characteristics. ........................... | 24 |\n| coefficient .................................. | 23 |\n| equation ................................... | 23 |\n| generation .. ............ ............ ... | 16, 63 |\n| lift-drag ratio. ............................... | 32 |\n| limit load. ................................. | 326 |\n| linespeeds ................................... | 394 |\n| load factor ................................ | 37, 331 |\n| load spectrum. ............. \\_ ................ . | 328 |\n| longitudinal | |\n| control .................................... | 275 |\n| dynamic stability. .......................... | 279 |\n| static stability. ........................... | 250 |\n| Mach number | |\n| definition. | 202 |\n| .................................. critical Mach ' umber. ...................... | 2!5 |\n| maneuvering load factor ..................... | 331 |\n| maneuvering performance. ........ ........... | 176 |\n| maneuvering stability. | 268 |\n| ...................... mean aerodynamic chord, MAC. ............. | 63 |\n| mirror landing system ......................... .......................... | 358 207 |\n| normal shock wave. obliqueshockwave .......................... | 207 |\n| operating limitations | |\n| propellers, .... | 148 |\n| ..................... reciproczring c ... .................. | 144 |\n| turbojet ................................... | 124 |\n| .. turboprop. | 133 |\n| ............................... Operating Strength Limitations, Chapter V. .... | 325 |\n| overstress, effect on service life. ................ | 344 |\n| parasite area, equivalent. .... .............. | 89 |\n| parasitedrag ................................. | 87 |\n| performance, Airplane Performance, Chapter II. | 95 |\n| pilot induced oscillarion. ..................... | 314 |\n| pitching moment | |\n| airfoil. .................................... | 47 |\n| longitudinal. .................. ........ | 249, 251 |\n| pitch-up ..................................... | 313 |\n| pitot-static system. ............... ........... | |\n| planform effects. ............................. | 61 |\n| power effects on stability. ..................... | 259 |\n| power off stability ... ........................ | 259 |\n| power required. ................... .......... | 96 |\n| power settling. ................... ........ | 4c3 |\n| preignition, .... .... | 140 |\n| ........... pressure altitude. ......... .... ... ... | .. 4 |\n| pressure distribution. .. ......... ..... | 14 |", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-8OT-80 INDEX \n\n## Psge\n\n415" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8843491184295357, + "doc_id": "eb7414458d989a97ecc894cfacff962140e4ec21ba1902f43b96b107d37aa7b8", + "edit_distance": 0.8883861236802413, + "f1_score": 0.9377431906614786, + "meteor": 0.7145891053379707, + "precision": 0.9601593625498008, + "pred_md": "\n\nwhere\n\np=rate of roll, radians per second 6=wing span, ft.\n\nV=airplane flight velocity, ft. per sec. and, one radian=S7.3 degrees\n\npb btained Generally, the maximum values of rVo by control in roll are approximately 0.1 to 0.07. The helix angle of roll, $i, is, actually a common denominator of rolling performance.\n\nThe deflection of the lateral control surfaces creates the differential lift and the rolling moment to accelerate the airplane in roll. The roll rate increases until an equal and opposite moment is created by the resistance to rolling motion or ' damping in roll.' The second illustration of figure 4.29 defines the source of the damping in roll. When the airplane is given a rolling velocity to the right, the downgoing wing experiences an increase in angle of attack due to the helix angle of roll. Of course, the upgoing wing experiences a decrease in angle of attack. In flight at angles of attack less than that for maximum lift, the downgoing wing experiences an increase in lift and the upgoing wing experiences a decrease in lift and a rolling moment is developed which opposes the rolling motion. Thus, the steady state rolling motion occurs when the damping moment equals the control moment.\n\nThe response of the airplane to aileron deflection is shown by the time history diagram of figure 4.29. When the airplane is restrained so that pure rolling motion is obtained, the initial response to an aileron deflection is a steady increase in roll rate. As the roll rate increases so does the damping moment and the roll acceleration decreases. Finally, the damping moment approaches the control moment and a steady state roll rate is achieved.\n\n301\n\nNAVWEPS 00-6OT-60 STABILITY AND CONTROL\n\nIf the airplane is unrestrained and sideslip is allowed, the affect of the directional stability and dihedral effect can be appreciated. The conventional airplane will develop adverse yawing moments due to aileron deflection and rolling motio6. Adverse yaw tends to produce yawing displacements and sideslip but this is resisted by the directional stability of the airplane. If adverse yaw produces sideslip, dihedral effect creates a rolling moment opposing the roll and tends to reduce the roll rate. The typical transient motions (A) and (B) of the time history diagram of figure 4.29 show that high directional stability with low dihedral effect is the preferable combination. Such a combination provides an airplane which has no extreme requirement of coordinating aileron and rudder in order to achieve satisfactory rolling performance. While the coupled motion of the airplane in roll is important, further discussion of lateral control will be directed to pure uncoupled rolling performance.\n\nROLLING PERFORMANCE. The required rolling performance of an airplane is generally specified as certain necessary values of the roll helix angle, &I$ However, in certain conditions of flight, it may be more appropriate to specify minimum times for the airplane to accelerate through a given angle of roll. Usually, the maximum value of 2% should be on the order of 0.10. Of course, fighters and attack airplanes have a more specific requirement for high rolling performance and 0.09 Pb may be considered a minimum necessary 2v. Patrol, transport, and bomberairplaneshaveless requirement for high rolling performance and a Pb of 0.07 may be adequate for these types. 2-V\n\nThe ailerons or spoilers must be powerful Pb enough to provide the required rV' While the size and effectiveness of the lateral control devices is important, consideration must be\n\nRevised January 1965\n\n1", + "recall": 0.9163498098859315, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-6OT-60 STABILITY AND CONTROL \n\nwhere \n\npb Generally, the maximum values of rVobtained by control in roll are approximately 0.1 to 0.07. The helix angle of roll, $i, is, actually a com- mon denominator of rolling performance. \n\nIf the airplane is unrestrained and sideslip is allowed, the affect of the directional stability and dihedral effect can be appreciated. The conventional airplane will develop adverse yawing moments due to aileron deflection and rolling motio6. Adverse yaw tends to produce yawing displacements and sideslip but this is resisted by the directional stability of the air- plane. If adverse yaw produces sideslip, di- hedral effect creates a rolling moment opposing the roll and tends to reduce the roll rate. The typical transient motions (A) and (B) of the time history diagram of figure 4.29 show that high directional stability with low dihedral effect is the preferable combination. Such a combination provides an airplane which has no extreme requirement of coordinating aileron and rudder in order to achieve satisfactory rolling performance. While the coupled mo- tion of the airplane in roll is important, further discussion of lateral control will be directed to pure uncoupled rolling performance. \n\nand, one radian=S7.3 degrees \n\n$$Roll helix angle=&; (radians) $$\n\n$$p=rate of roll, radians per second 6=wing span, ft. V=airplane flight velocity, ft. per sec. $$\n\nROLLING PERFORMANCE. The required rolling performance of an airplane is generally specified as certain necessary values of the roll 1 helix angle, &I$ However, in certain condi- tions of flight, it may be more appropriate to specify minimum times for the airplane to accelerate through a given angle of roll. Usually, the maximum value of 2% should be on the order of 0.10. Of course, fighters and attack airplanes have a more specific require- ment for high rolling performance and 0.09 Pb may be considered a minimum necessary 2v. Patrol, transport, and bomberairplaneshaveless requirement for high rolling performance and a Pb 2-V of 0.07 may be adequate for these types. \n\nThe ailerons or spoilers must be powerful Pb enough to provide the required rV’ While the size and effectiveness of the lateral control devices is important, consideration must be \n\nThe deflection of the lateral control surfaces creates the differential lift and the rolling moment to accelerate the airplane in roll. The roll rate increases until an equal and opposite moment is created by the resistance to rolling motion or “damping in roll.” The second illustration of figure 4.29 defines the source of the damping in roll. When the airplane is given a rolling velocity to the right, the downgoing wing experiences an increase in angle of attack due to the helix angle of roll. Of course, the upgoing wing experiences a decrease in angle of attack. In flight at angles of attack less than that for maximum lift, the downgoing wing experiences an increase in lift and the upgoing wing experiences a de- crease in lift and a rolling moment is developed which opposes the rolling motion. Thus, the steady state rolling motion occurs when the damping moment equals the control moment. \n\nThe response of the airplane to aileron deflec- tion is shown by the time history diagram of figure 4.29. When the airplane is restrained so that pure rolling motion is obtained, the initial response to an aileron deflection is a steady increase in roll rate. As the roll rate increases so does the damping moment and the roll acceleration decreases. Finally, the damping moment approaches the control mo- ment and a steady state roll rate is achieved. \n\nRevised January 1965 \n\n301" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7519879218115272, + "doc_id": "145a289156ef0d60450efe6f57521ac8e5dd13eee911bc7bce19519021925aef", + "edit_distance": 0.2571428571428571, + "f1_score": 0.9559322033898305, + "meteor": 0.7650435776793125, + "precision": 0.9724137931034482, + "pred_md": "FAA Chart Users' Guide - VFR Terms and Symbols\n\n## CARIBBEAN VFR AERONAUTICAL CHARTS (CAC)\n\nStarting in 2016, the FAA CARIBBEAN VFR Aeronautical Charts were first published, replacing the discontinued World Aeronautical Charts (WACs), parts of CH-25, CJ-26, and CJ-27, with CJ-26's last effective date of 1 February 2018 and CJ-27 last effective date of 29 March 2018. The Caribbean Charts are published as two VFR Charts: Caribbean 1 (CAC-1) covers Southern Florida, Cuba, Haiti and the Bahamas; Caribbean 2 (CAC-2) covers Puerto Rico, Haiti, Dominican Republic, the Lesser Antilles and Leeward Islands. CAC-1 is updated annually and CAC-2 biennially.\n\nCaribbean Charts are designed for VFR and provide aeronautical and topographic information of the Caribbean. The aeronautical information includes airports,\n\nradio aids to navigation, Class B airspace and special use airspace. The topographic information includes city tint, populated places, principal roads, drainage patterns and shaded relief.\n\nThe chart symbols used on the Caribbean Charts are similar to those used in the Sectional and Terminal Area Charts, the\n\nmajor difference being in scale. The Caribbean VFR Chart scale is 1:1,000,000 vs the Sectional Chart Scale of 1:500,000 and Terminal Area Chart Scale of 1:250,000. Chart symbology will appear smaller on the Caribbean VFR Charts.\n\nExample from Caribbean 1 VFR Aeronautical Chart\n\nAirport Traffic Service and Air -port Space Information Unique to CAC\n\nOnly airway and reserved airspace effective below 18,000' MSL in the U.S. airspace and below FL200 outside of the U.S. airspace are shown.\n\n22", + "recall": 0.94, + "true_md": "## CARIBBEAN VFR AERONAUTICAL CHARTS (CAC)\n\nStarting in 2016, the FAA CARIBBEAN VFR Aeronautical Charts were first published, replacing the discontinued World Aeronautical Charts (WACs), parts of CH-25, CJ-26, and CJ-27, with CJ-26’s last effective date of 1 February 2018 and CJ-27 last effective date of 29 March 2018. The Caribbean Charts are published as two VFR Charts: Caribbean 1 (CAC-1) covers Southern Florida, Cuba, Haiti and the Bahamas; Caribbean 2 (CAC-2) covers Puerto Rico, Haiti, Dominican Republic, the Lesser Antilles and Leeward Islands. CAC-1 is updated annually and CAC-2 biennially.\n\nCaribbean Charts are designed for VFR and provide aeronautical and topographic information of the Carib- bean. The aeronautical information includes airports, radio aids to navigation, Class B airspace and special use airspace. The topographic information includes city tint, popu-\n\nbean. The aeronautical information includes airports, radio aids to navigation, Class B airspace and special use airspace. The topographic information includes city tint, popu- lated places, principal roads, drainage patterns and shaded relief.\n\nThe chart symbols used on the Caribbean Charts are similar to those used in the Sectional and Terminal Area Charts, the major difference being in scale. \n\nThe chart symbols used on the Caribbean Charts are similar to those used in the Sectional and Terminal Area Charts, the major difference being in scale. The Caribbean VFR Chart scale is 1:1,000,000 vs the Sectional Chart Scale of 1:500,000 and Terminal Area Chart Scale of 1:250,000. Chart symbology will appear smaller on the Caribbean VFR Charts.\n\nExample from Caribbean 1 VFR Aeronautical Chart\n\n## Airport Traffic Service and Air - port Space Information Unique to CAC\n\nOnly airway and reserved air- space effective below 18,000’ MSL in the U.S. airspace and below FL200 outside of the U.S. airspace are shown.\n\nFAA Chart Users’ Guide - VFR Terms and Symbols\n\n22" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "9e37cac6e8d267608243e211aae0f8414b5f9bb2c68759197a689bafe501f25e", + "edit_distance": 0.2571428571428571, + "f1_score": 0.9559322033898305, + "meteor": 0.7650435776793125, + "precision": 0.9724137931034482, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.94, + "true_md": "" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8202284509703532, + "doc_id": "affbaeb205c6f3cfcaff73a2c0d5347f581f0648e3915fc7a2d3ca2eea05308a", + "edit_distance": 0.6374829001367989, + "f1_score": 0.9449152542372882, + "meteor": 0.6654254606922797, + "precision": 0.9653679653679653, + "pred_md": "wave also occurs when a wedge or cone angle exceeds some critical value. Whenever the shock wave forms perpendicular to the upstream flow, the shock wave is termed a ' normal' shock wave and the flow immediately behind the wave is subsonic. Any relatively blunt object in a supersonic airstream will form a normal shock wave immediately ahead of the leading edge slowing the airstream to subsonic SO the airstream may feel the presence of the blunt nose and flow around it. Once past the blunt nose the airstream may remain subsonic or accelerate back to supersonic depending on the shape of the nose and the Mach number of the free stream.\n\nIn addition to the formation of normal shock waves described above, this same type of wave may be formed in an entirely different manner when there is no object in the supersonic airstream. It is particular that whenever a supersonic airscream is slowed to subsonic without a change in direction a normal shock wave will form as a boundary between the supersonic and subsonic regions. This is an important fact since aircraft usually encounter some ' compressibility effects' before the flight speed is sonic. Figure 3.6 illustrates the manner in which an airfoil at high subsonic speeds has local flow velocities which are supersonic. As the local supersonic flow moves aft, a normal shock wave forms slowing the flow to subsonic. The transition of flow from subsonic to supersonic is smooth and is not accompanied by shock waves if the transition is made gradually with a smooth surface. The transition of flow from supersonic to subsonic without direction change always forms a normal shock wave.\n\nA supersonic airstream passing through a normal shock wave will experience these changes:\n\n- (1) The airstream is slowed to subsonic; the local Mach number behind the wave is approximately equal to the reciprocal of the Mach number ahead of the wave-e.g., if\n\n21' 1\n\n## NAVWEPS OD-EOT-80 HIGH SPEED AERODYNAMICS\n\nMach number ahead of the wave is 1.25, the Mach number of the flow behind the wave is approximately 0.80.\n\n- (2) The airflow direction immediately behind the wave is unchanged.\n- (3) The static pressure of the airstream behind the wave is increased greatly.\n- (4) The density of the airstream behind the wave is increased greatly.\n- (5) The energy of the airstream (indicated by total pressure-dynamic plus static) is greatly reduced. The normal shock wave is very wasteful of energy.\n\nEXPANSION WAVE. If a supersonic airstream were turned away from the preceding flow an expansion wave would form. The flow ' around a corner' shown in figure 3.7 will not cause sharp, sudden changes in the airflow except at the corner itself and thus is not actually a ' shock' wave. A supersonic airstream passing through an expansion wave will experience these changes:\n\n- (1) The airstream is accelerated; the velocity and Mach number behind the wave are greater.\n- (2) The flow direction is changed to flow along the surface-provided separation does not occur.\n- (3) The static pressure of the airstream behind the wave is decreased.\n- (4) The density of -the airstream behind the wave is decreased.\n- (5) Since the flow changes in a rather gradual manner there is no ' shock' and no loss of energy in the airstream. The expansion wave does not dissipate airstream energy.\n\nThe expansion wave in three dimensions is a slightly different case and the principal difference is the tendency for the static pressure to continue to increase past the wave.\n\nThe following table is provided to summarize the characteristics of the three principal wave forms encountered with supersonic flow.", + "recall": 0.9253112033195021, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OD-EOT-80 HIGH SPEED AERODYNAMICS \n\nwave also occurs when a wedge or cone angle exceeds some critical value. Whenever the shock wave forms perpendicular to the up- stream flow, the shock wave is termed a “normal” shock wave and the flow immediately behind the wave is subsonic. Any relatively blunt object in a supersonic airstream will form a normal shock wave immediately ahead of the leading edge slowing the airstream to subsonic SO the airstream may feel the presence of the blunt nose and flow around it. Once past the blunt nose the airstream may remain subsonic or accelerate back to supersonic depending on the shape of the nose and the Mach number of the free stream. In addition to the formation of normal \n\nMach number ahead of the wave is 1.25, the Mach number of the flow behind the wave is approximately 0.80. \n\n(2) The airflow direction immediately behind the wave is unchanged. \n\n(3) The static pressure of the airstream behind the wave is increased greatly. (4) The density of the airstream behind \n\nbehind the wave is increased greatly. (4) The density of the airstream behind the wave is increased greatly. (5) The energy of the airstream (indi- \n\nthe wave is increased greatly. (5) The energy of the airstream (indi- cated by total pressure-dynamic plus static) is greatly reduced. The normal shock wave is very wasteful of energy. \n\nEXPANSION WAVE. If a supersonic air- stream were turned away from the preceding flow an expansion wave would form. The flow “around a corner” shown in figure 3.7 will not cause sharp, sudden changes in the airflow except at the corner itself and thus is not actually a “shock” wave. A supersonic airstream passing through an expansion wave will experience these changes: \n\n(1) The airstream is accelerated; the ve- locity and Mach number behind the wave are greater. \n\nthe free stream. In addition to the formation of normal shock waves described above, this same type of wave may be formed in an entirely different manner when there is no object in the super- sonic airstream. It is particular that whenever a supersonic airscream is slowed to subsonic without a change in direction a normal shock wave will form as a boundary between the supersonic and subsonic regions. This is an important fact since aircraft usually encounter some “compressibility effects” before the flight speed is sonic. Figure 3.6 illustrates the man- ner in which an airfoil at high subsonic speeds has local flow velocities which are supersonic. As the local supersonic flow moves aft, a normal shock wave forms slowing the flow to subsonic. The transition of flow from subsonic to supersonic is smooth and is not accompanied by shock waves if the transition is made gradually with a smooth surface. The transition of flow from supersonic to subsonic without direction change always forms a normal shock wave. \n\n(2) The flow direction is changed to flow along the surface-provided separa- tion does not occur. \n\n(3) The static pressure of the airstream behind the wave is decreased. \n\n(4) The density of -the airstream behind the wave is decreased. \n\n(5) Since the flow changes in a rather gradual manner there is no “shock” and no loss of energy in the airstream. The expansion wave does not dissipate air- stream energy. \n\nA supersonic airstream passing through a normal shock wave will experience these changes: (1) The airstream is slowed to subsonic; \n\nThe expansion wave in three dimensions is a slightly different case and the principal difference is the tendency for the static pres- sure to continue to increase past the wave. \n\nThe following table is provided to summa- rize the characteristics of the three principal wave forms encountered with supersonic flow. \n\nchanges: (1) The airstream is slowed to subsonic; the local Mach number behind the wave is approximately equal to the reciprocal of the Mach number ahead of the wave-e.g., if \n\n21 ’ 1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8892045058950081, + "doc_id": "9745bf1f65a5522fedbcad77fa9323e0947ad7a1a631698657be53b619fce8f1", + "edit_distance": 0.611731843575419, + "f1_score": 0.9246575342465754, + "meteor": 0.7786513110586051, + "precision": 0.9712230215827338, + "pred_md": "Excess airspeed at landing is just as undesirable as a deficiency of airspeed. An cxccssivc airspeed at landing will produce an undesirable increase in landing distance and the energy to be dissipated by the brakes for the field landing or excessive arresting loads for theshipboard landing. In addition, the excess airspeed is a corollary of too low an angle of attack and the airplane may contact the deck or runway nose wheel first and cause damage to the nose wheel or begin a porpoising of the airplane. During a flare to landing, any excess speed will be difficult to dissipate due to the reduction of drag due to ground effect. Thus, if the airplane is held off with excess airspeed the airplane will ' float' with the consequence of a barrier engagement, barricade engagement, bolter, or considerable runway distance used before touchdown.\n\n- A fundamental requirement for a good landing is a well planned and executed approach. The possibility of errors during the landing process is minimized when the airplane is brought to the point of touchdown with the proper glide path and airspeed. With the proper approach, there is no need for drastic changes in the flight path, angle of attack, or power setting to accomplish touchdown at the intended point on the deck or runway. Late corrections to line up with the deck or diving for the deck are common errors which eventually result in landing accidents. Accurate control of airspeed and glide path are absolutely necessary and the LSO, angle of attack indicator, and the mirror landing system provide great assistance in accurate control of the airplane.\n\n## THE TAKEOFF\n\nAs in the case of landing, the specific techniques necessary may vary greatly between various types of airplanes and various operations but certain fundamental principles will be common to all airplanes and all operations. The specific procedures recommended for each airplane type must be followed exactly to\n\n## MAVWEPS OD-BOT-80 APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYING\n\ninsure a consistent, safe takeoff flying technique.\n\nTAKEOFF SPEED AND DISTANCE. The takeoff speed of any airplane is some minimum practical airspeed which allows sufficient margin above stall and provides satisfactory control and initial rate of climb.. Depending on the airplane characteristics, the takeoff speed will be some value 5 to 25 percent above the stall or minimum control speed. As such, the takeoff will be accomplished at a certain value of lift coefficient and angle of attack specific to each airplane configuration. As a result, the takeoff airspeed (FAX or CM) of any specific airplane configuration is a function of the gross weight at takeoff. Too low an airspeed at takeoff may cause stall, lack of adequate control, or poor initial climb performance. An excess of speed at takeoff may provide better control and initial rate of climb but the higher speed requires additional distance and may provide critical conditions for the tires.\n\nThe takeoff distance of an airplane is affected by many different factors other than technique and, prior to takeoff, the takeoff distance must be determined and compared with the runway length available. The principal factors affecting the takeoff distance are as follows:\n\n- (1) The gross weight of the airplane has a considerable effect on takeoff distance because it affects both takeoff speed and acceleration during takeoff roll.\n- (2) The surface winrls must be considered because of the powerful effect of a headwind or tailwind on the takeoff distance. In the case of the crosswind, the component of wind along the runway will be the effective headwind or tailwind velocity. In addition, the component of wind across the runway will define certain requirements of lateral control power and the limiting component wind must not be exceeded.\n- (3) Pressure altitude and temperature can cause a large effect on takeoff distance, especially in the case of the turbine powered", + "recall": 0.8823529411764706, + "true_md": "MAVWEPS OD-BOT-80 APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYING \n\ninsure a consistent, safe takeoff flying tech- nique. \n\nExcess airspeed at landing is just as undesira- ble as a deficiency of airspeed. An cxccssivc airspeed at landing will produce an undesirable increase in landing distance and the energy to be dissipated by the brakes for the field landing or excessive arresting loads for theshipboard landing. In addition, the excess airspeed is a corollary of too low an angle of attack and the airplane may contact the deck or runway nose wheel first and cause damage to the nose wheel or begin a porpoising of the airplane. During a flare to landing, any excess speed will be difficult to dissipate due to the reduction of drag due to ground effect. Thus, if the air- plane is held off with excess airspeed the air- plane will “float” with the consequence of a barrier engagement, barricade engagement, bolter, or considerable runway distance used before touchdown. \n\nTAKEOFF SPEED AND DISTANCE. The takeoff speed of any airplane is some mini- mum practical airspeed which allows sufficient margin above stall and provides satisfactory control and initial rate of climb.. Depending on the airplane characteristics, the takeoff speed will be some value 5 to 25 percent above the stall or minimum control speed. As such, the takeoff will be accomplished at a certain value of lift coefficient and angle of attack specific to each airplane configuration. As a result, the takeoff airspeed (FAX or CM) of any specific airplane configuration is a function of the gross weight at takeoff. Too low an airspeed at takeoff may cause stall, lack of adequate control, or poor initial climb per- formance. An excess of speed at takeoff may provide better control and initial rate of climb but the higher speed requires additional dis- tance and may provide critical conditions for the tires. \n\nA fundamental requirement for a good land- ing is a well planned and executed approach. The possibility of errors during the landing process is minimized when the airplane is brought to the point of touchdown with the proper glide path and airspeed. With the proper approach, there is no need for drastic changes in the flight path, angle of attack, or power setting to accomplish touchdown at the intended point on the deck or runway. Late corrections to line up with the deck or diving for the deck are common errors which eventu- ally result in landing accidents. Accurate control of airspeed and glide path are ab- solutely necessary and the LSO, angle of attack indicator, and the mirror landing system pro- vide great assistance in accurate control of the airplane. \n\nThe takeoff distance of an airplane is affected by many different factors other than technique and, prior to takeoff, the takeoff distance must be determined and compared with the runway length available. The principal factors affecting the takeoff distance are as follows: \n\n(1) The gross weight of the airplane has a considerable effect on takeoff distance be- cause it affects both takeoff speed and ac- celeration during takeoff roll. \n\n(2) The surface winrls must be considered because of the powerful effect of a headwind or tailwind on the takeoff distance. In the case of the crosswind, the component of wind along the runway will be the effective headwind or tailwind velocity. In addi- tion, the component of wind across the run- way will define certain requirements of lateral control power and the limiting compo- nent wind must not be exceeded. \n\n(3) Pressure altitude and temperature can cause a large effect on takeoff distance, es- pecially in the case of the turbine powered \n\nAs in the case of landing, the specific tech- niques necessary may vary greatly between various types of airplanes and various oper- ations but certain fundamental principles will be common to all airplanes and all operations. The specific procedures recommended for each airplane type must be followed exactly to \n\n## THE TAKEOFF" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.007725637847419328, + "doc_id": "3b96a8c3eb2483780f8dd675f428edaf225896bb76f47e90fd07f587b2684954", + "edit_distance": 0.9819004524886877, + "f1_score": 0.12244897959183675, + "meteor": 0.17444065225635197, + "precision": 0.06593406593406594, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS 00-BOT-BO TABLE OF CONTENTS\n\nPam\n\n| BRAKING PERFORMANCE. | 387 |\n|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|----------|\n| ......................................... Friction cbaracte~istics Braking technique Typical errors of braking technique | |\n| REFCTSAL SPEEDS , LINE SPEEDS, AND CRITICAL LENGTH. ............................................................. | 391 |\n| Refusal speed Line speeds Critical field length, multi-engine operation SONIC BOOMS. ....................................................... | 396 |\n| Shock waves and audible sound Precautions HELICOPTER PROBLEMS. ........................................... | 399 |\n| Rotoraerodynamics ..................................................... | 400 |\n| Retreating blade stall ................................................... | 402 |\n| Compressjbility effects .................................................. | 404 |\n| Autorotatton charactertsttcs ............................................. ......................................................... | 405 |\n| Powersettling | 408 |\n| THE FLIGHT HANDBOOK. ........................................ SELECTED EFERENCES. .................................. R ... | 411 413 |\n| Iklr\\C' ,,' YL)\\ ....................................................... | 414 |\n\nxvi", + "recall": 0.8571428571428571, + "true_md": "## NAVWEPS 00-BOT-BO TABLE OF CONTENTS\n\nxvi" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9013302989661113, + "doc_id": "2851d7e6a5c4242a6c47e01114fae81188c65ae4fb6da3e19938c712609ddf50", + "edit_distance": 0.7148817802503477, + "f1_score": 0.9458333333333333, + "meteor": 0.7143988713403904, + "precision": 0.9659574468085106, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS 00-801-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE\n\nthe distance varies directly as the square of the velocity and inversely as the acceleration.\n\nAs an example of this relationship, assume that during takeoff an airplane is, accelerated uniformly from zero velocity to a takeoff velocity of 150 knots (253.5 ft. per sec.) with an acceleration of 6.434 ft. per sec.* (or, 0.2g, since g=32.17 ft. per sec.*). The takeoff distance would be:\n\n\n\nIf the acceleration during takeoff were reduced 10 percent, the takeoff distance would increase 11.1 percent; if the takeoff velocity were increased 10 percent, the takeoff distance would increase 21 percent. These relationships point to the fact that proper accounting must be made of altitude, temperature, gross weight, wind, etc. because any item affecting acceleration or takeoff velocity will have a definite effect on takeoff distance.\n\nIf an airplane were to land at a velocity of 150 knots and be decelerated uniformly to a stop with the same acceleration of 0.2g, the landing stop distance would be 5,000 ft. However, the case is not necessarily that an aircraft may have identical takeoff and landing performance but the principle illustrated is that distance is a function of velocity and acceleration. As before, a 10 percent lower acceleration increases stop distance Il.1 percent, and a 10 percent higher landing speed increases landing distance 21 percent.\n\nThe general relationship of velocity, acceleration, and distance for uniformly accelerated motion is illustrated by figure 2.31. In this illustration., acceleration distance is shown as a function of velocity for various values of acceleration.\n\nTAKEOFF PERFORMANCE. The minimum takeoff distance is of primary interest in the operation of any aircraft because it defines\n\nthe runway requirements. The minimum takeoff distance is obtained by takeoff at some minimum safe velocity which allows sufficient margin above stall and provides satisfactory control and initial rate of climb. Generally, the takeoff speed is some fixed percentage of the stall speed or minimum control speed for the airplane in the takeoff configuration. As such, the takeoff will be accomplished at some particular value of lift coefficient and angle of attack. Depending on the airplane characteristics, the takeoff speed will be anywhere from 1.05 to 1.25 times the stall speed or minimum control speed. If the takeoff speed is specified as 1.10 times the stall speed, the takeoff lift coefficient is 82.6 percent of CLand the angle of attack and lift coeticient for takeoff are fixed values independent of weight, altitude, wind, etc. Hence, an angle of attack indicator can be a valuable aid during takeoff.\n\nTo obtain minimum takeoff distance at the specified takeoff velocity, the forces which act on the aircraft must provide the maximum acceleration during the takeoff roll. The various forces acting on the aircraft may or may not be at the control of the pilot and various techniques may be necessary in certain airplanes to maintain takeoff acceleration at the highest value.\n\nFigure 2.32 illustrates the various forces which act on the aircraft during takeoff roll. The powerplant thrust is the principal force to provide the acceleration and, for minimum takeoff ,distance, the output thrust should be at a maximum. Lift and drag are produced as soon as the airplane has speed and the values of lift and drag depend on the angle of attack and dynamic .pressure. Rolling friction results when there is a normal force on the wheels and the friction force is the product of the normal force and the coefficient of rolling friction. The normal force pressing the wheels against the runway surface is the net of weight and lift while the rolling friction coefficient is a function of the tire type and runway surface texture.", + "recall": 0.926530612244898, + "true_md": "the distance varies directly as the square of the velocity and inversely as the acceleration. \n\nAs an example of this relationship, assume that during takeoff an airplane is, accelerated uniformly from zero velocity to a takeoff velocity of 150 knots (253.5 ft. per sec.) with an acceleration of 6.434 ft. per sec.* (or, 0.2g, since g=32.17 ft. per sec.*). The takeoff distance would be: \n\n## NAVWEPS 00-801-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE\n\nthe runway requirements. The minimum take- off distance is obtained by takeoff at some minimum safe velocity which allows sufficient margin above stall and provides satisfactory control and initial rate of climb. Generally, the takeoff speed is some fixed percentage of the stall speed or minimum control speed for the airplane in the takeoff configuration. As such, the takeoff will be accomplished at some particular value of lift coefficient and angle of attack. Depending on the airplane character- istics, the takeoff speed will be anywhere from 1.05 to 1.25 times the stall speed or minimum control speed. If the takeoff speed is specified as 1.10 times the stall speed, the takeoff lift coefficient is 82.6 percent of CL- and the angle of attack and lift coeticient for takeoff are fixed values independent of weight, altitude, wind, etc. Hence, an angle of attack indicator can be a valuable aid during takeoff. \n\nIf the acceleration during takeoff were reduced 10 percent, the takeoff distance would increase 11.1 percent; if the takeoff velocity were increased 10 percent, the takeoff distance would increase 21 percent. These relation- ships point to the fact that proper accounting must be made of altitude, temperature, gross weight, wind, etc. because any item affecting acceleration or takeoff velocity will have a definite effect on takeoff distance. If an airplane were to land at a velocity of \n\nTo obtain minimum takeoff distance at the specified takeoff velocity, the forces which act on the aircraft must provide the maximum acceleration during the takeoff roll. The various forces acting on the aircraft may or may not be at the control of the pilot and various techniques may be necessary in certain airplanes to maintain takeoff acceleration at the highest value. \n\ndefinite effect on takeoff distance. If an airplane were to land at a velocity of 150 knots and be decelerated uniformly to a stop with the same acceleration of 0.2g, the landing stop distance would be 5,000 ft. However, the case is not necessarily that an aircraft may have identical takeoff and landing performance but the principle illustrated is that distance is a function of velocity and accelera- tion. As before, a 10 percent lower accelera- tion increases stop distance Il.1 percent, and a 10 percent higher landing speed increases landing distance 21 percent. \n\nFigure 2.32 illustrates the various forces which act on the aircraft during takeoff roll. The powerplant thrust is the principal force to provide the acceleration and, for minimum takeoff ,distance, the output thrust should be at a maximum. Lift and drag are produced as soon as the airplane has speed and the values of lift and drag depend on the angle of attack and dynamic .pressure. Rolling friction results when there is a normal force on the wheels and the friction force is the product of the normal force and the coefficient of rolling friction. The normal force pressing the wheels against the runway surface is the net of weight and lift while the rolling friction coefficient is a function of the tire type and runway surface texture. \n\nThe general relationship of velocity, accel- eration, and distance for uniformly accelerated motion is illustrated by figure 2.31. In this illustration., acceleration distance is shown as a function of velocity for various values of acceleration. \n\nTAKEOFF PERFORMANCE. The mini- mum takeoff distance is of primary interest in the operation of any aircraft because it defines \n\n$$= (253.5)* (2)(6.434) =5,ooo ft. $$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8287710610439608, + "doc_id": "da2ab96e275f8da999d24199d6e039b270d034847cafc83872216f0efdd89194", + "edit_distance": 0.597544338335607, + "f1_score": 0.9306260575296109, + "meteor": 0.7999376999331445, + "precision": 0.9515570934256056, + "pred_md": "camber at 40 percent chord, 12 percent thickness at 30 percent chord)--a fairly typical ' conventionaal' airfoil section. The lift curve show a steady increase in cl with increasing RN. However, note that a>maller change in cr occurs between Reynolds Numbers of 6.0 ad 9.0 million than occurs between 0.1 and 3.0 million. In other words, greater changes in CI occur in the range of Reynolds Numbers zhere the laminar (low energy) boundary layer predominates. The drag curves for the section show essentially the same feature-the greatest variations occur at very low Reynolds Numbers. Typical full scale Reynolds Numbers for aircraft in flight may be 3 to 5@O illion m where the boundary layer is predominately turbulent. Scale model tests may involve Reynolds Numbers of 0.1 to 5 million where the boundary layer be predominately laminar. Hence, the ' scale' corrections are very necessary to correlate the principal aerodynamic characteristics.\n\nThe very large changes in aerodynamic characteristics at low Reynolds Numbers are due in great part to the low energy laminar boundary layer typical of low Reynolds Numbers. Low Reynolds Numbers are the result of some combination of low velocity, small size, and high kinematic viscosity RN= ( 3\n\nThus, small surfaces, low flight speeds, or very high altitudes can provide the regime of low Reynolds Numbers. One interesting phenomenon associated with low BN is the high form drag due to separation of the low energy boundary layer. The ordinary golf ball operates at low RN and would have very high form drag without dimpling. The surface roughness from dimpling disturbs the laminar boundary layer forcing a premature transition to turbulent. The forced turbulence in the boundary layer reduces the form drag by providing a higher energy boundary layer to allay separation. Essentially the same effect can be produced on a model airplane wing by roughening the leading edge-the turbulent\n\nNAVWEPS DD-RDT-80\n\nBASIC AERODYNAMICS\n\nboundary layer obtained may reduce the form drag due to separation. In each instance, the forced transition will be beneficial if the reduction in form drag is greater than the increase in skin friction. Of course, this possibility exists only at low Reynolds Numbers.\n\n1,n a similar sense, ' trip' wires or small surface protuberances on a wind tunnel model may be used to force transition of the boundary layer and simulate the effect of higher Reynolds Numbers.\n\n## PLANFORM EFFECTS AND AIRPLANE DRAG\n\n## EFFECT OF WING PLANFORM\n\nThe previous discussion of aerodynamic forces concerned the properties of airfoil sections in two-dimensional flow with no consideration given to the influence of the planform. When the effects of wing planform are introduced, attention must be directed to the existence of flow components in the spanwise direction. In other words, airfoil section properties deal with flow in two dimensions I while plonform properties consider flow in three dimensions.\n\nIn order to fully describe the planform of a wing, several terms are required. The terms having the greatest influence on the aerodynamic characteristics are illustrated in figure 1.28.\n\n- (1) The wing r?rc11, , is simply S the plan surface area of the wing. Although a portion of the area may be covered by fuselage or nacelles, the pressure carryover on these surfaces allows legitimate consideration of the entire plan area.\n- (2) The wing ~ptia, 6, is measured tip to tip.\n- (3) The avcragc chord, c, is the geometric average. The product of the span and the average chord is the wing area (6X6=$).\n- (4) The aspect ratio, AR, is the proportion of the span and the average chord.\n\nAR=b/c", + "recall": 0.9105960264900662, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS DD-RDT-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS \n\nboundary layer obtained may reduce the form drag due to separation. In each instance, the forced transition will be beneficial if the reduc- tion in form drag is greater than the increase in skin friction. Of course, this possibility exists only at low Reynolds Numbers. 1,n a similar sense, “trip” wires or small \n\nexists only at low Reynolds Numbers. 1,n a similar sense, “trip” wires or small surface protuberances on a wind tunnel model may be used to force transition of the boundary layer and simulate the effect of higher Reynolds Numbers. \n\ncamber at 40 percent chord, 12 percent thick- ness at 30 percent chord)--a fairly typical “conventionaal” airfoil section. The lift curve show a steady increase in cl with increasing RN. However, note that a>maller change in cr occurs between Reynolds Numbers of 6.0 ad 9.0 million than occurs between 0.1 and 3.0 million. In other words, greater changes in CI occur in the range of Reynolds Num- bers zhere the laminar (low energy) boundary layer predominates. The drag curves for the section show essentially the same feature-the greatest variations occur at very low Reynolds Numbers. Typical full scale Reynolds Num- bers for aircraft in flight may be 3 to 5@O million where the boundary layer is predominately turbulent. Scale model tests may involve Reynolds Numbers of 0.1 to 5 million where the boundary layer be predominately laminar. Hence, the “scale” corrections are very neces- sary to correlate the principal aerodynamic characteristics. The very large changes in aerodynamic \n\nThe previous discussion of aerodynamic forces concerned the properties of airfoil sec- tions in two-dimensional flow with no consid- eration given to the influence of the planform. When the effects of wing planform are intro- duced, attention must be directed to the ex- istence of flow components in the spanwise direction. In other words, airfoil section properties deal with flow in two dimensions I while plonform properties consider flow in three dimensions. \n\n## EFFECT OF WING PLANFORM\n\n## PLANFORM EFFECTS AND AIRPLANE DRAG\n\ncharacteristics. The very large changes in aerodynamic characteristics at low Reynolds Numbers are due in great part to the low energy laminar boundary layer typical of low Reynolds Num- bers. Low Reynolds Numbers are the result of some combination of low velocity, small size, and high kinematic viscosity RN= ( 3 Thus, small surfaces, low flight speeds, or very \n\n( 3 Thus, small surfaces, low flight speeds, or very high altitudes can provide the regime of low Reynolds Numbers. One interesting phenom- enon associated with low BN is the high form drag due to separation of the low energy boundary layer. The ordinary golf ball oper- ates at low RN and would have very high form drag without dimpling. The surface roughness from dimpling disturbs the laminar boundary layer forcing a premature transition to turbulent. The forced turbulence in the boundary layer reduces the form drag by pro- viding a higher energy boundary layer to allay separation. Essentially the same effect can be produced on a model airplane wing by roughening the leading edge-the turbulent \n\nIn order to fully describe the planform of a wing, several terms are required. The terms having the greatest influence on the aerody- namic characteristics are illustrated in figure 1.28. \n\n(1) The wing r?rc11, S, is simply the plan surface area of the wing. Although a por- tion of the area may be covered by fuselage or nacelles, the pressure carryover on these surfaces allows legitimate consideration of the entire plan area. \n\n(2) The wing ~ptia, 6, is measured tip to tip. \n\n(3) The avcragc chord, c, is the geometric average. The product of the span and the average chord is the wing area (6X6=$). \n\n(4) The aspect ratio, AR, is the proportion of the span and the average chord. \n\n$$AR=b/c $$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "d67d8ef35cf1fabc7d3269993d88aed464c513d562aa26d13c33490adfaa3b99", + "edit_distance": 0.45454545454545453, + "f1_score": 0.8, + "meteor": 0.6880733944954129, + "precision": 0.8, + "pred_md": "FAA Chart Users' Guide - What's New\n\n10", + "recall": 0.8, + "true_md": "10\n\nFAA Chart Users’ Guide - What’s New" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7578064685189447, + "doc_id": "133e5301ae181bbbe5bddc17f4353860b1cbb413dc857bf0d7bb7362d1aab072", + "edit_distance": 0.672069825436409, + "f1_score": 0.8942807625649916, + "meteor": 0.7035189557530697, + "precision": 0.9381818181818182, + "pred_md": "of such a device. To illustrate a few principles of flap management, figure 1.19 presents the lift and drag curves of a typical airplane in the clean and flap down configurations.\n\nIn order to appreciate some of the factors involved in flap management, assume that the airpIane has just taken off and the flaps are extended. The pilot should not completely retract the flaps until the airplane has sufficient speed. If the flaps are retracted prematurely at insufhcient airspeed, maximum lift coeficient of the clean configuration may not be able to support the airplane and the airplane will sink or stall. Of course, this same factor must be considered for intermediate flap positions between fully retracted and fully extended. Assume that the airplane is allowed to gain speed and reduce the flight lift coefiicient to the point of flap retraction indicated on figure 1.19. As the configuration is altered from the ' cluttered' to the clean configuration, three important changes take place:\n\n- (1) The reduction in camber by flap retraction changes the wing pitching moment and-for the majority of airplanes-requires retrimming to balance the nose up moment change. Some airplanes feature an automatic retrimming which is programmed with flap deflection.\n- (2) The retraction of flaps shown on figure 1.19 causes a reduction of drag coefficient at that lift coefficient. This drag reduction improves the acceleration of the airplane.\n- (3) The retraction of flaps requires an increase in angle of attack to maintain the same lift coefficient. Thus, if airplane acceleration is low through the flap retraction speed range, angle of attack must be increased to prevent the airplane from sinking. This situation is typical after takeoff when gross weight, density altitude, and temperature are high. However, some aircraft have such high acceleration through the flap retraction speed that the rapid gain in airspeed requtres much less noticeable attitude change.\n\n45\n\nNAVWEPS OO-EOT-SO BASIC AERODYNAMICS\n\nWhen the flaps are lowered for landing essentially the same items must be considered. Extending the flaps will cause these. changes to take place:\n\n- (1) Lowering the flaps requires retrimming to balance the nose down moment change.\n- (2) The increase in drag requires a higher power setting to maintain airspeed and altitude.\n- (3) The angle of attack required to produce the same lift coefficient is less, e.g., flap extension tends to cause the airplane to ' balloon.'\n\nAn additional factor which must be considered when rapidly accelerating after takeoff, or when lowering the flaps for landing, is the limit airspeed for flap extension. Excessive airspeeds in the flap down configuration may cause structural damage.\n\nIn many aircraft the effect of intermediate flap deflection is of primary importance in certain critical operating conditions. Small initial deflections of the flap cause noticeable changes in C' s,, without large changes in drag coefficient. This feature is especially true of the airplane equipped with slotted or Fowler flaps (refer to fig. 1.17). Large flap deflections past 30' to 33' do not create the same rate of change of Csbut do cause greater changes in CD. A fact true of most airplanes is that the first 50 percent of flap deflection causes mwc than half of the total change in Cr.and the last 50 percent of flap deflection causes mo~c than half of the total change in Cs.\n\nThe effect of power on the stall speed of an airplane is determined by many factors. The most important factors affecting this relationship are powerplant type (prop or jet), thrustto-weight ratio, and inclination of the thrust vector at maximum lift. The effect of the propeller is illustrated in figure 1.20. The slisstream velocity behind the propeller is different from the free stream velocity depending on the thrust developed. Thus, when the propeller driven airplane is at low air+ceds", + "recall": 0.8543046357615894, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OO-EOT-SO BASIC AERODYNAMICS \n\n45 \n\nof such a device. To illustrate a few principles of flap management, figure 1.19 presents the lift and drag curves of a typical airplane in the clean and flap down configurations. \n\nWhen the flaps are lowered for landing essen- tially the same items must be considered. Ex- tending the flaps will cause these. changes to take place: (1) Lowering the flaps requires retrim- \n\ntake place: (1) Lowering the flaps requires retrim- ming to balance the nose down moment change. (2) The increase in drag requires a higher \n\nchange. (2) The increase in drag requires a higher power setting to maintain airspeed and altitude. \n\n(3) The angle of attack required to pro- duce the same lift coefficient is less, e.g., flap extension tends to cause the airplane to “balloon.” An additional factor which must be consid- \n\nIn order to appreciate some of the factors involved in flap management, assume that the airpIane has just taken off and the flaps are extended. The pilot should not completely retract the flaps until the airplane has sufficient speed. If the flaps are retracted prematurely at insufhcient airspeed, maximum lift coefi- cient of the clean configuration may not be able to support the airplane and the airplane will sink or stall. Of course, this same factor must be considered for intermediate flap posi- tions between fully retracted and fully ex- tended. Assume that the airplane is allowed to gain speed and reduce the flight lift coefii- cient to the point of flap retraction indicated on figure 1.19. As the configuration is altered from the “cluttered” to the clean configura- tion, three important changes take place: (1) The reduction in camber by flap re- \n\n“balloon.” An additional factor which must be consid- ered when rapidly accelerating after takeoff, or when lowering the flaps for landing, is the limit airspeed for flap extension. Excessive airspeeds in the flap down configuration may cause structural damage. In many aircraft the effect of intermediate \n\ntion, three important changes take place: (1) The reduction in camber by flap re- traction changes the wing pitching moment and-for the majority of airplanes-requires retrimming to balance the nose up moment change. Some airplanes feature an automat- ic retrimming which is programmed with flap deflection. \n\n(2) The retraction of flaps shown on figure 1.19 causes a reduction of drag coeffi- cient at that lift coefficient. This drag reduction improves the acceleration of the airplane. \n\ncause structural damage. In many aircraft the effect of intermediate flap deflection is of primary importance in certain critical operating conditions. Small initial deflections of the flap cause noticeable changes in C ’ s,, without large changes in drag coefficient. This feature is especially true of the airplane equipped with slotted or Fowler flaps (refer to fig. 1.17). Large flap deflections past 30’ to 33’ do not create the same rate of change of Cs- but do cause greater changes in CD. A fact true of most airplanes is that the first 50 percent of flap deflection causes mwc than half of the total change in Cr.- and the last 50 percent of flap deflection causes mo~c than half of the total change in Cs. The effect of power on the stall speed of an \n\n(3) The retraction of flaps requires an increase in angle of attack to maintain the same lift coefficient. Thus, if airplane accel- eration is low through the flap retraction speed range, angle of attack must be in- creased to prevent the airplane from sinking. This situation is typical after takeoff when gross weight, density altitude, and tempera- ture are high. However, some aircraft have such high acceleration through the flap re- traction speed that the rapid gain in air- speed requtres much less noticeable attitude change. \n\nthan half of the total change in Cs. The effect of power on the stall speed of an airplane is determined by many factors. The most important factors affecting this relation- ship are powerplant type (prop or jet), thrust- to-weight ratio, and inclination of the thrust vector at maximum lift. The effect of the propeller is illustrated in figure 1.20. The slisstream velocity behind the propeller is different from the free stream velocity depend- ing on the thrust developed. Thus, when the propeller driven airplane is at low air+ceds" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4249272923272817, + "doc_id": "69ca6c958944f4407deaae7143de9da0b9ddb1278226dae52ee3e916459aab34", + "edit_distance": 0.5806451612903226, + "f1_score": 0.9473684210526315, + "meteor": 0.8676704545454544, + "precision": 0.9473684210526315, + "pred_md": "## AIRSPACE\n\nU.S. Airspace depiction as shown on Visual Aeronautical Charts\n\nU.S. Airspace depiction as shown on Visual Aeronautical Charts\n\n57\n\nFAA Chart Users' Guide - Airspace", + "recall": 0.9473684210526315, + "true_md": "## AIRSPACE\n\nFAA Chart Users’ Guide - Airspace\n\n57\n\nU.S. Airspace depiction as shown on Visual Aeronautical Charts" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6422097223733472, + "doc_id": "e90efc776214ab0b64a782279fefd53664d698c4e238c13bc943b3a027480b41", + "edit_distance": 0.868421052631579, + "f1_score": 0.9019607843137255, + "meteor": 0.9179688762048356, + "precision": 0.92, + "pred_md": "PROFILE VIEW\n\n## EC-1, 22 APR 2021 to 17 JUN 2021\n\n125\n\nEC-1, 22 APR 2021 to 17 JUN 2021\n\nFAA Chart Users' Guide - Terminal Procedures Publication (TPP) - Symbols", + "recall": 0.8846153846153846, + "true_md": "FAA Chart Users’ Guide - T erminal Procedures Publication (TPP) - Symbols\n\n125\n\n## PROFILE VIEW\n\nEC-1, 22 APR 2021 to 17 JUN 2021\n\nEC-1, 22 APR 2021 to 17 JUN 2021" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7939952912074792, + "doc_id": "a22f2f6af27e5a2409e5218ac5c3340409fee37c542b511cfc2fe465409a073f", + "edit_distance": 0.6893063583815029, + "f1_score": 0.9021956087824351, + "meteor": 0.7105390826166154, + "precision": 0.9495798319327731, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS oo-80mo AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE\n\nwould be to provide the endurance thrust with some engine(s) shut down and the remaining engine(s) operating at a more efficient power output. This technique would cause a mmimum loss of endurance if at low altitude. The feasibility of such a procedure is dependent on many operational factors.\n\nIn all cases, the airplane should be in the cleanest possible external configuration because the specific endurance is directly proportional to the (L/D).\n\n## MANEUVERING PERFORMANCE\n\n,...s'\n\nthe airplane were at a 60' bank and lift were not provided to produce the exact load factor of 2.0, the aircraft would be accelerating in the vertical direction as well as the horizontal direction and the turn would not be steady. Also, any sideforce on the aircraft due to sideslip, etc., would place the resultant aerodynamic force out of the plane of symmetry perpendicular to the lateral axis and the turn would not be coordinated.\n\n.i :.,cyz'\n\nWhen the airplane is' in turning flight, the airplane is not in static equilibrium for there must be developed the unbalance of force to produce the acceleration of the turn. During a steady coordinated turn, the lift is inclined to produce a horizontal component of force to equal the centrifugal force of the turn. In addition, the steady turn is achieved by producing a vertical component of lift which is equal to the weight of the airplane. Figure 2.28 illustrates the forces which act on the airplane in a steady, coordinated turn.\n\nFor the case of the steady, coordinatedturn, the vertical component oft lift must equal the weight of the aircraft so that there will be no acceleration in the vertical direction. This requirement leads to the following relationship:\n\n\n\nwhere\n\n\n\nFrom this relationship it is apparent that the steady, coordinated turn requires specific values of load factor, n, at various angles of bank, 6. For example, a bank angle of 60' requires a load factor of 2.0 (cos 60' =0.5 or set 60' =2.0) to provide the steady, coordinated turn. If\n\nAs a consequence of the increase lift required to produce the steady turn in a bank, ' i he i nduced drag is increased above that incurred by steady, wing level, lift-equal-weight flight. In a sense, the increased lift required in a steady turn will increase the total drag or power required in the same manner as increased gross weight in level flight. The curves of figure 2.28 illustrate the general effect of turning flight on the total thrust and power required. Of course, the change in thrust required at any given speed is due to the change in induced drag and the magnitude of change depends on the value of induced drag in level flight and the angle of bank in .turning flight. Since the induced drag generally varies as the square of C,, the following data provide an illustration of the effect of various degrees of bank :\n\nSince the, induced drag predominates at low speeds, steep turns at low speeds can produce significant increases in thrust or power required to maintain altitude. Thus, steep turns must be avoided after takeoff, during approach, and especially during a critical power situation from failure or malfunction of a powerplant. The greatly increased induced drag is just as\n\n176", + "recall": 0.8593155893536122, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS oo-80mo AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE \n\nthe airplane were at a 60’ bank and lift were not provided to produce the exact load factor of 2.0, the aircraft would be accelerating in the vertical direction as well as the horizontal di- rection and the turn would not be steady. Also, any sideforce on the aircraft due to sideslip, etc., would place the resultant aero- dynamic force out of the plane of symmetry perpendicular to the lateral axis and the turn would not be coordinated. \n\nwould be to provide the endurance thrust with some engine(s) shut down and the remaining engine(s) operating at a more efficient power output. This technique would cause a mmi- mum loss of endurance if at low altitude. The feasibility of such a procedure is dependent on many operational factors. \n\nIn all cases, the airplane should be in the cleanest possible external configuration because the specific endurance is directly proportional to the (L/D). \n\n.i :.,cyz’ As a consequence of the increase lift re- quired to produce the steady turn in a bank, ’ ihe induced drag is increased above that in- curred by steady, wing level, lift-equal-weight flight. In a sense, the increased lift required in a steady turn will increase the total drag or power required in the same manner as increased gross weight in level flight. The curves of figure 2.28 illustrate the general effect of turn- ing flight on the total thrust and power re- quired. Of course, the change in thrust re- quired at any given speed is due to the change in induced drag and the magnitude of change depends on the value of induced drag in level flight and the angle of bank in .turning flight. Since the induced drag generally varies as the square of C,, the following data provide an illustration of the effect of various degrees of bank : \n\n.i :.,cyz’ When the airplane is ’ in turning flight, the airplane is not in static equilibrium for there must be developed the unbalance of force to produce the acceleration of the turn. During a steady coordinated turn, the lift is inclined to produce a horizontal component of force to equal the centrifugal force of the turn. In addition, the steady turn is achieved by pro- ducing a vertical component of lift which is equal to the weight of the airplane. Figure 2.28 illustrates the forces which act on the airplane in a steady, coordinated turn. For the case of the steady, coordinatedturn, \n\n## MANEUVERING PERFORMANCE ,...s’\n\nairplane in a steady, coordinated turn. For the case of the steady, coordinatedturn, the vertical component oft lift must equal the weight of the aircraft so that there will be no acceleration in the vertical direction. This requirement leads to the following relation- ship: \n\n$$L *=- W 1 BE-- cos q5 n=sec $6 $$\n\nwhere n=sec $6 rz= load factor or “G” L=lift, lbs. W= weight, Ibs. += bank angle, degrees (phi) \n\nFrom this relationship it is apparent that the steady, coordinated turn requires specific values of load factor, n, at various angles of bank, 6. For example, a bank angle of 60’ requires a load factor of 2.0 (cos 60 ’ =0.5 or set 60 ’ =2.0) to provide the steady, coordinated turn. If \n\nSince the, induced drag predominates at low speeds, steep turns at low speeds can produce significant increases in thrust or power required to maintain altitude. Thus, steep turns must be avoided after takeoff, during approach, and especially during a critical power situation from failure or malfunction of a powerplant. The greatly increased induced drag is just as \n\n176" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4142756581379753, + "doc_id": "0793501bb7232423160dbf4141c05ceeefd9fa60c394580372790e7b4e508937", + "edit_distance": 0.43478260869565216, + "f1_score": 0.8387096774193549, + "meteor": 0.6135032488331656, + "precision": 0.9285714285714286, + "pred_md": "## Aeronautical Information Services Aeronautical Chart Users' Guide\n\nEffective as of 22 April 2021", + "recall": 0.7647058823529411, + "true_md": "# Aeronautical Information Services Aeronautical Chart Users’ Guide\n\nFederal Aviation Administration\n\nEffective as of 22 April 2021\n\nAeronautical Information Services Aeronautical Chart" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.48604416846997905, + "doc_id": "8e91a76e16f11146b922a92d727202695f2fa8139de1a30d82cfb435095dd7fa", + "edit_distance": 0.7756410256410257, + "f1_score": 0.7125, + "meteor": 0.8443389917246753, + "precision": 0.5533980582524272, + "pred_md": "FAA Chart Users Guide - VFR Symbology - Sectional and Terminal Area Charts\n\n## AIRSPACE INFORMATION (Continued)\n\n## VFR Transition Routes\n\nAppropriate notes as required may be shown.\n\nUni-directional\n\nBi-directional\n\nBi-directional with NAVAID Ident and Radial\n\nTAC only\n\n## Terminal Radar Service Area (TRSA)\n\nTRSA Name\n\nTRSA Boundaries\n\nTRSA Sectors\n\nAppropriate notes as required may be shown.\n\nExamlple: Los Angeles\n\nExample: Harrisburg, PA\n\n## NAVIGATIONAL AND PROCEDURAL INFORMATION\n\n## Isogonic Line and Value\n\nIsogonic lines and values shall be based on the five year epoch magnetic variation model.\n\n## Local Magnetic Notes\n\nUnreliability Notes\n\n## Intersections\n\nNamed intersections used as reporting points. Arrows are directed toward facilities which establish intersection.\n\n## Aeronautical Lights\n\nBy Request\n\nRotating or Oscillating\n\nIsolated Location\n\nRotating Light with Flashing Code Identification Light\n\nRotating Light with Course Lights and Site Number\n\n32", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "32\n\nFAA Chart Users Guide - VFR Symbology - Sectional and Terminal Area Charts\n\nExamlple: Los Angeles\n\nExample: Harrisburg, PA\n\n## NAVIGATIONAL AND PROCEDURAL INFORMATION Isogonic Line and Value Aeronautical Lights\n\n## AIRSPACE INFORMATION (Continued)\n\n## VFR Transition Routes\n\nAppropriate notes as required may be shown.\n\nUni-directional\n\nBi-directional\n\nBi-directional with NAVAID Ident and Radial\n\nTRSA Name \n\nTRSA Boundaries\n\nTRSA Sectors\n\nAppropriate notes as required may be shown.\n\n## Terminal Radar Service Area (TRSA)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8256470430699403, + "doc_id": "b448658f1a1ef6265ddf2bf1e665ecf525e18f5fdfba36c808ed1be777e5e001", + "edit_distance": 0.8502747252747253, + "f1_score": 0.9094202898550725, + "meteor": 0.7347184707147651, + "precision": 0.9507575757575758, + "pred_md": "The specific fuel consumption of the turboprop powerplant is defined as follows :\n\nspecific fuel consumption=\n\n\n\n\n\nTypical values for specific fuel consumption, c, range from 0.5 to 0.8 lbs. per hr. per ESHP. The variation of specific fuel consumption with operating conditions is similar to that of the turbojet engine. The minimum specific fuel consumption is obtained at relatively high power setting and high altitudes. The low inlet air temperature reduces the specific fuel consumption and the lowest values of c are obtained near altitudes of 25,ooO to 3900 ft. Thus; the turboprop as well as the turbojet has a preference for high altitude operation.\n\n## THE RECRIPROCATING ENGINE\n\nThe reciprocating engine is one of the most efficient powerplants used for aircraft power. The combination of the reciprocating engine and propeller is one of the most efficient means of converting the chemical energy of fuel into flying time or distance. Because of the inherent high efficiency, the reciprocating engine is an important type of aircraft powerplant.\n\nOPERATING CHARACTERISTICS. The function of the typical reciprocating engine involves four strokes of the piston to complete one operating cycle. This principal operating cycle is illustrated in figure 2.15 by the variation of pressure and volume within the cylinder. The first stroke of the operating cycle is the downstroke of the piston with the intake valve open. This stroke draws in a charge of fuel-air mixture along AB of the pressurevolume diagram. The second stroke accomplishes compression of the fuel-air mixture along line EC. Combustion is initiated by a spark ignition apparatus and combustion takes place in essentially a constant volume. The combustion of the fuel-air mixture liberates\n\n## NAVWEPS 00-8OT-80\n\n## AlR,Pl.ANE PERFORMANCE\n\nheat and causes the rise of pressure along line CD. The power stroke utilizes the increased pressure through the expansion along line DE. Then the exhaust begins by the initial rejection along line EB and is completed by the upstroke along line BA.\n\nThe net work produced by the cycle of operation is idealized by the area BCDE on the pressure-volume diagram of figure 2.15. During the actual rather than ideal cycle of operation, the intake pressure is lower than the exhaust pressure and the negative work represents a pumping loss. The incomplete expansion during the power stroke represents a basic loss in the operating cycle because of the rejection of combustion products along line EB. The area EFB represents a basic loss in the operating cycle because of the rejection of combustion products along line EB. The area EFB represents a certain amount of energy of the exhaust gases, a part of which can be extracted by exhaust turbines as additional shaft power to be coupled to the crankshaft (turbocompound engine) or to be used in operating a supercharger (turbosupercharger). In addition, the exhaust gas energy may be utilized to augment engine cooling flow (ejector exhaust) and reduce cowl drag.\n\nSince the net work produced during the operating cycle is represented by the enclosed area of pressure-volume diagram, the output of the engine is affected by any factor which influences this area. The weight of fuel-air mixture will determine the energy released by combustion and the weight of charge can be altered by altitude,supercharging,etc. Mixturestrength, preignition, spark timing, etc., can affect the energy release of a given airflow and alter the work produced during the operating cycle.\n\nThe mechanical work accomplished during the power stroke is the result of the gas pressure sustained on the piston. The linkage of the piston to a crankshaft by the connecting rod applies torque to the output shaft. During this conversion of pressure energy to mechanical energy, certain losses are inevitable because", + "recall": 0.8715277777777778, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-8OT-80 AlR,Pl.ANE PERFORMANCE \n\nheat and causes the rise of pressure along line CD. The power stroke utilizes the increased pressure through the expansion along line DE. Then the exhaust begins by the initial rejection along line EB and is completed by the upstroke along line BA. The net work produced by the cycle of opera- \n\nThe specific fuel consumption of the turbo- prop powerplant is defined as follows : \n\nfuel consumption= engine fuel flow equivalent shaft horsepower \n\nspecific fuel consumption= engine fuel flow \n\nc=lbs. per hr. ESHP \n\nalong line BA. The net work produced by the cycle of opera- tion is idealized by the area BCDE on the pressure-volume diagram of figure 2.15. Dur- ing the actual rather than ideal cycle of op- eration, the intake pressure is lower than the exhaust pressure and the negative work repre- sents a pumping loss. The incomplete expan- sion during the power stroke represents a basic loss in the operating cycle because of the re- jection of combustion products along line EB. The area EFB represents a basic loss in the operating cycle because of the rejection of combustion products along line EB. The area EFB represents a certain amount of energy of the exhaust gases, a part of which can be ex- tracted by exhaust turbines as additional shaft power to be coupled to the crankshaft (turbo- compound engine) or to be used in operating a supercharger (turbosupercharger). In addi- tion, the exhaust gas energy may be utilized to augment engine cooling flow (ejector exhaust) and reduce cowl drag. \n\nTypical values for specific fuel consumption, c, range from 0.5 to 0.8 lbs. per hr. per ESHP. The variation of specific fuel consumption with operating conditions is similar to that of the turbojet engine. The minimum specific fuel consumption is obtained at relatively high power setting and high altitudes. The low inlet air temperature reduces the specific fuel consumption and the lowest values of c are ob- tained near altitudes of 25,ooO to 3900 ft. Thus; the turboprop as well as the turbojet has a preference for high altitude operation. \n\nThe reciprocating engine is one of the most efficient powerplants used for aircraft power. The combination of the reciprocating engine and propeller is one of the most efficient means of converting the chemical energy of fuel into flying time or distance. Because of the in- herent high efficiency, the reciprocating engine is an important type of aircraft powerplant. OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS. The \n\nSince the net work produced during the op- erating cycle is represented by the enclosed area of pressure-volume diagram, the output of the engine is affected by any factor which influences this area. The weight of fuel-air mixture will determine the energy released by combustion and the weight of charge can be altered by altitude,supercharging,etc. Mixturestrength, preignition, spark timing, etc., can affect the energy release of a given airflow and alter the work produced during the operating cycle. \n\n## THE RECRIPROCATING ENGINE\n\nis an important type of aircraft powerplant. OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS. The function of the typical reciprocating engine in- volves four strokes of the piston to complete one operating cycle. This principal operating cycle is illustrated in figure 2.15 by the varia- tion of pressure and volume within the cylin- der. The first stroke of the operating cycle is the downstroke of the piston with the intake valve open. This stroke draws in a charge of fuel-air mixture along AB of the pressure- volume diagram. The second stroke accom- plishes compression of the fuel-air mixture along line EC. Combustion is initiated by a spark ignition apparatus and combustion takes place in essentially a constant volume. The combustion of the fuel-air mixture liberates \n\nThe mechanical work accomplished during the power stroke is the result of the gas pres- sure sustained on the piston. The linkage of the piston to a crankshaft by the connecting rod applies torque to the output shaft. During this conversion of pressure energy to mechani- cal energy, certain losses are inevitable because" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8163999547189746, + "doc_id": "fc30abf6f980802d99ba578aa57cb3cd71b9ab418376d03043a8dfe047dd1bdc", + "edit_distance": 0.6399474375821288, + "f1_score": 0.9166666666666667, + "meteor": 0.6801886247631544, + "precision": 0.9405204460966543, + "pred_md": "lower surface lifts act along the same vertical line. An increase in.lift on the symmetrical airfoil produces no change in this situation and the center of pressure remains fixed at the aerodynamic center.\n\nThe location of the aerodynamic center of an airfoil is not affected by camber, thickness, and angle of attack. In fact, two-dimensional incompressible airfoil theory will predict the aerodynamic center at the 25 percent chord point for any airfoil regardless of camber, thickness, and angle of attack. Actual airfoils, which are subject to real fluid flow, may not have the lift due to angle of .attack concentrated at the exact 25 percent chord point. However, the actual location of the aerodynamic center for various sections is rarely forward of 23 percent or aft of 27 percent chord point.\n\nThe moment about the aerodynamic center has its source in the relative pressure distribution and requires application of the coefficient form of expression for proper evaluation. The moment about the aerodynamic center is expressed by the following equation :\n\nwhere\n\nA&, = moment about the aerodynamic center, a.c., ft.-lbs.\n\nCMa.c,=coefbcient of moment about the a.c.\n\nq= dynamic pressure, psf\n\nS=wing area, sq ft.\n\nc=chord, ft.\n\nThe moment coefficient used in this equation is the dimensionless ratio of the moment pressure to dynamic pressure moment and is a function\n\n\n\nof. the shape of the airfoil mean camber line. Figure 1.22 shows the moment coefficient,\n\n49\n\nNAVWEPS O&601-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS\n\nC%C. versus lift coefficient for several repre-. sentative sections. The sign convention applied to moment coefficients is that the nose-up moment is positive.\n\nThe NACA Ooog airfoil is a symmettical section of 9 percent maximum thickness. Since the mean line of this airfoil has no camber, the coefhcient of moment about the aerodynamic center is zero, i.e., the c.p. is at the ac. The departure from zero cno.+ occurs only as the airfoil approaches maximum lift and the stall produces a moment change in the negative (nose-down) direction. The NACA 4412 and 63,-412 sections have noticeable positive camber which cause relatively large moments about the aerodynamic center. Notice that for each sectionshowninfrgure 1.22, the c,,,.... isconstant for all lift coefficients less than cl,-.\n\nThe NACA 23012 airfoil is a very efficient conventional section which has been used on many airplanes. One of the features of the ~section is a relatively high c& with only a small c,,,,,,; The pitching moment coefficients 1 for this section are shown on figure 1.22 along with the effect of various type flaps added to the basic section. Large amounts of camber applied well aft on the chord cause large negative moment coefficients. This fact is illustrated by the large negative moment coeflicients produced by the 30' deflection of a 25 percent chord flap.\n\nme kc. is a quantity determined by the shape of the mean-camber line. Symmetrical airfoils have zero c,,,,. and the c.p. remains at the a.~. in unstalled flight. The airfoil with positive camber will have a negative c,,,~,~, which means the c.p. is behind the a.~. Since the c5.c. s constant i in unstalled flight a certain relationship between lift coefficient and center of pressure can be evolved. An example of this relationship is shown in figure 1.22 for the NACA 63i-412 airfoil by a plot of c.p. versus c,. Note that at low lift coefficients the center of pressure is well aft-even past the trailing edge-and an increase in C~ oves the c.p, form ward toward the a.~. The c.9. approaches the\n\nRevised Jmuoy 1965", + "recall": 0.8939929328621908, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS O&601-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS \n\nlower surface lifts act along the same vertical line. An increase in.lift on the symmetrical airfoil produces no change in this situation and the center of pressure remains fixed at the aero- dynamic center. \n\n$_{C%C. }$versus lift coefficient for several repre-. sentative sections. The sign convention ap- plied to moment coefficients is that the nose-up moment is positive. The NACA Ooog airfoil is a symmettical sec- \n\nmoment is positive. The NACA Ooog airfoil is a symmettical sec- tion of 9 percent maximum thickness. Since the mean line of this airfoil has no camber, the coefhcient of moment about the aerody- namic center is zero, i.e., the c.p. is at the ac. The departure from zero cno.+ occurs only as the airfoil approaches maximum lift and the stall produces a moment change in the negative (nose-down) direction. The NACA 4412 and 63,-412 sections have noticeable positive cam- ber which cause relatively large moments about the aerodynamic center. Notice that for each sectionshowninfrgure 1.22, the c,,,.... isconstant for all lift coefficients less than cl,-. The NACA 23012 airfoil is a very efficient \n\nThe location of the aerodynamic center of an airfoil is not affected by camber, thickness, and angle of attack. In fact, two-dimensional in- compressible airfoil theory will predict the aerodynamic center at the 25 percent chord point for any airfoil regardless of camber, thickness, and angle of attack. Actual airfoils, which are subject to real fluid flow, may not have the lift due to angle of .attack concentrated at the exact 25 percent chord point. However, the actual location of the aerodynamic center for various sections is rarely forward of 23 percent or aft of 27 percent chord point. The moment about the aerodynamic center \n\nor aft of 27 percent chord point. The moment about the aerodynamic center has its source in the relative pressure distribu- tion and requires application of the coefficient form of expression for proper evaluation. The moment about the aerodynamic center is ex- pressed by the following equation : \n\nfor all lift coefficients less than cl,-. The NACA 23012 airfoil is a very efficient conventional section which has been used on many airplanes. One of the features of the ~section is a relatively high c& with only a small c,,,,,,; The pitching moment coefficients 1 for this section are shown on figure 1.22 along with the effect of various type flaps added to the basic section. Large amounts of camber applied well aft on the chord cause large nega- tive moment coefficients. This fact is illus- trated by the large negative moment coefli- cients produced by the 30” deflection of a 25 percent chord flap. is a quantity determined by the \n\npercent chord flap. me kc. is a quantity determined by the shape of the mean-camber line. Symmetrical airfoils have zero c,,,,. and the c.p. remains at the a.~. in unstalled flight. The airfoil with positive camber will which means the c.p. is behind the a.~. Since the c5.c. is constant in unstalled flight a certain relationship between lift coefficient and center of pressure can be evolved. An example of this relationship is shown in figure 1.22 for the NACA 63i-412 airfoil by a plot of c.p. versus c,. Note that at low lift coefficients the center of pressure is well aft-even past the trailing edge-and an increase in C~ moves the c.p, for- ward toward the a.~. The c.9. approaches the \n\nwhere \n\nThe moment coefficient used in this equation is the dimensionless ratio of the moment pressure to dynamic pressure moment and is a function \n\n- A&, = moment about the aerodynamic center, a.c., ft.-lbs. \n\n- CMa.c,=coefbcient of moment about the a.c. \n\n- q= dynamic pressure, psf \n\n- S=wing area, sq ft. \n\n- c=chord, ft. \n\n$$c ML3.C. %.c. = p- $$\n\nof. the shape of the airfoil mean camber line. Figure 1.22 shows the moment coefficient, \n\n49 \n\nRevised Jmuoy 1965" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8228406332058158, + "doc_id": "134469c1b5f882b9896f0b7ee2ea5288357b1b8f34b60cee3ac72b50200e6637", + "edit_distance": 0.40555555555555556, + "f1_score": 0.9234693877551021, + "meteor": 0.844413573809844, + "precision": 0.9427083333333334, + "pred_md": "345\n\n## NAVWEPS 00-8OT-80 OPERATING STRENGTH LIMITATIONS\n\nFigure 5.6. Typical Stress Strain Diagram for a High Strength Aluminum Alloy\n\nFigure 5.6. Typical Stress Strain Diagram for a High Strength Aluminum Alloy\n\nthe ' endurance limit.' If the operating cyclic stresses never exceed this ' endurance limit' an infinite (,or in some cases ' near infinite' ) number of cycles can be withstood without fatigue failure. No significant fatigue damage accrues from stresses below the endurance limit but the value of this endurance limit is approximately 30 to 50 percent of the yield strength for the light alloys used ia airkraft construction. The rate of fatigue damage caused by stresses only &g/&y above the endurance limit is insignificant. Even stresses near the limit load do not cause a significant accumulation of fatigue damage if the frequency of applicatibn is reasonable and within the intended mission requirement. However, stresses above the limit load-and especially stresses well above the limit load-create a very rapid rate of fatigue damage.\n\ninherent high yield strength and low ductility of typical aircraft metals. These same overstresses cause high rate of fatigue damage and create premature failure of parts in service. The effect of accumulated overstress is rhe formation and propagation of fatigue cracks. While it is sure that fatigue crack always will be formed before final failure of a part, accumulated overstress is most severe and fatigue provoking at the inevitable stress coticentrations. Hence, disassembly and detailed' inspection is both costly and time-consuming. To prevent in-service failures of a basically sound structure, the part must be properly maintained and operated within the design ' envelope.' Examples of in-service fatigue failures are shown in figure 5.7.\n\nA puzzling situation then exists. ' Overstress' is difficult to recognize because of the\n\nThe operation of any aircraft and powerplant must be conducted withm the operating limitations prescribed in the flight handbook. No hearsay or rumors can be substituted for chc", + "recall": 0.905, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-8OT-80 OPERATING STRENGTH LIMITATIONS \n\nFigure 5.6. Typical Stress Strain Diagram for a High Strength Aluminum Alloy \n\nthe “endurance limit.” If the operating cyclic stresses never exceed this “endurance limit” an infinite (,or in some cases “near infinite”) num- ber of cycles can be withstood without fatigue failure. No significant fatigue damage accrues from stresses below the endurance limit but the value of this endurance limit is approxi- mately 30 to 50 percent of the yield strength for the light alloys used ia airkraft construc- tion. The rate of fatigue damage caused by stresses only &g/&y above the endurance limit is insignificant. Even stresses near the limit load do not cause a significant accumulation of fatigue damage if the frequency of applicatibn is reasonable and within the intended mission requirement. However, stresses above the limit load-and especially stresses well above the limit load-create a very rapid rate of fatigue damage. A puzzling situation then exists. “Over- \n\nfatigue damage. A puzzling situation then exists. “Over- stress” is difficult to recognize because of the \n\nThe operation of any aircraft and powerplant must be conducted withm the operating limita- tions prescribed in the flight handbook. No hearsay or rumors can be substituted for chc \n\ninherent high yield strength and low ductility of typical aircraft metals. These same over- stresses cause high rate of fatigue damage and create premature failure of parts in service. The effect of accumulated overstress is rhe formation and propagation of fatigue cracks. While it is sure that fatigue crack always will be formed before final failure of a part, accumu- lated overstress is most severe and fatigue provoking at the inevitable stress coticentra- tions. Hence, disassembly and detailed ’ inspec- tion is both costly and time-consuming. To prevent in-service failures of a basically sound structure, the part must be properly maintained and operated within the design “envelope.” Examples of in-service fatigue failures are shown in figure 5.7. \n\n345" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "6addbd5edcd910631f24331fe367c4b98259f8022b258338148336876dc7e25b", + "edit_distance": 0.40555555555555556, + "f1_score": 0.9234693877551021, + "meteor": 0.844413573809844, + "precision": 0.9427083333333334, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.905, + "true_md": "" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.12153149707662117, + "doc_id": "50d9d5346bd57bb0ef152178c97dfa0d8649d7196d9aad8e3ff8b6c036689264", + "edit_distance": 0.9402985074626866, + "f1_score": 0.3434343434343434, + "meteor": 0.4966246789369319, + "precision": 0.20987654320987653, + "pred_md": "## AIRSPACE INFORMATION (Continued)\n\n## Enroute Chart Examples\n\nLow Enroute Chart (Continued)\n\n## Reference Number\n\n79\n\n## Description\n\n## Multiple MCAs at a NAVAID\n\nV21 and V257 - MCA at DBS of 8600' traveling North\n\nV298 - MCA at DBS of 9800' traveling West\n\nV343 - MCA at DBS of 8500' traveling North\n\nV520 - MCA at DBS of 9000' traveling East\n\nV520 - MCA at DBS of 10600' traveling West\n\n## MCA and MRA at a Fix\n\nMCA at SABAT on V298 of 11,100 traveling East. MRA at SABAT of 10000.\n\n## Example of MOCA and directional MEAs along a Victor Route\n\nTraveling East from DBS, MEA 13,000' the first two segments, 15,000 along third segment.\n\nTraveling West from QUIRT, MEA of 15,000' the first segment, MEA of 10,000 the second segment and MEA of 9,000 the third segment.\n\n## MCA Example\n\nMCA at OSITY on V330. MCA of 9500' traveling East on V330 from Idaho Falls (IDA) VOR-DME.\n\nFAA Chart Users' Guide - IFR Enroute Symbology", + "recall": 0.9444444444444444, + "true_md": "79\n\nFAA Chart Users’ Guide - IFR Enroute Symbology\n\n## AIRSPACE INFORMATION (Continued)\n\n## Enroute Chart Examples Low Enroute Chart (Continued)\n\n## Enroute Chart Examples Low Enroute Chart (Continued)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9040347614558454, + "doc_id": "f897ae5b1a115123b3e55528fbfb35596b2c88088334620284e4caa331aba04d", + "edit_distance": 0.717741935483871, + "f1_score": 0.9341085271317828, + "meteor": 0.7531513673320734, + "precision": 0.964, + "pred_md": "## ' I - YPICAL SUPERSONIC FLOW PATTERNS\n\nWhen supersonic flow is clearly established, all changes in velocity, pressure, density, flow direction, etc., take place quite suddenly and in relatively confined areas. The areas of flows change are generally distinct and the phenomena are referred to as ' wave' formations. All compression waves occur suddenly and are wasteful of energy. Hence, the compression waves are distinguished by the sudden ' shock' type of behavior. All expansion waves are not so sudden in their occurrence and are not wasteful of energy like the compression shock waves. Various types of waves can occur in supersonic flow and the nature of the wave formed depends upon the airstream and the shape of the object causing the flow change. Essentially, there are three fundamental types of waves formed in supersonic flow: (1) the oblip shock wave (compression), (2) the normal shock wave (compression), (3) the expansion wave (no shock).\n\nOBLIQUE SHOCK WAVE. Consider the case where a supersonic airstream is turned into the preceding airflow. Such would be the case of a supersonic flow ' into a comer' as shown in figure 3.3. A supersonic airstream passing through the oblique shock wave will experience these changes:\n\n- (1) The airstream is slowed down; the velocity and Mach number behind the wave are reduced but the flow is still supersonic\n- (2) The flow direction is changed to flow along the surface\n- (3) The static pressure of the airstrea:m behind the wave is increased\n- (4) The density of the airstream behind the wave is increased\n- (5) Some of the available energy of the airstream (indicated by the sum of dynamic and static pressure) is dissipated and turned into unavailable heat energy. Hence, the shock wave is wasteful of energy.\n\nA typical case of oblique shock wave formation is that of a wedge pointed into a supersonic airstream. The oblique shock wave\n\n## NAVWEPS OD-807-80 HIGH SPEED AERODkNAMlCS\n\nwill form on each surface of the wedge and the inclination of the shock wave will be a function of the free stream Mach number and the wedge angle. As the free stream Mach number increases, the shock wave angle decreases; as the wedge angle increases the shock wave angle increases, and, if the wedge angle is increased to some critical amount, the shock wave will detach from the leading edge of the wedge. It is important to note that detachment of the shock wave will produce sub$onic flow immediately after the central portion of the shock wave. Figure 3.4 illustrates these typical flow patterns and the effect of Mach number and wedge angle.\n\nThe previous flow across a wedge in a supersonic airstream would allow flow in ;UU dimensions. If a cone were placed in a supersonic airstream the airflow would occur in three dimensions and there would be some noticeable differences in flow characteristics. Three-dimensional flow for the same Mach number and flow direction change would produce a weaker shock wave with less change in pressure and density. Also, this conical wave formation allows changes in airflow that continue to occur past the wave front and the wave strength varies with distance away from the surface. Figure 3.5 depicts the typical three-dimensional flow past a cone.\n\nOblique shock waves can be reflected like any pressure wave and this effect is shown in figure 3.5. This reflection appears logical and necessary since the original wave changes the flow direction toward the wall and the reflected wave creates the subsequent flow change to cause the flow to remain parallel to the wall surface. This reflection phenomenon places definite restrictions on the size of a model in a wind tunnel since a wave reflected back to the model would cause a pressure distribution not typical of free flight.\n\nNORMAL SHOCK WAVE. If a bluntnosed object is placed in a supersonic airstream the shock wave which is formed will be detached from the leading edge. This detached", + "recall": 0.9060150375939849, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OD-807-80 HIGH SPEED AERODkNAMlCS \n\nwill form on each surface of the wedge and the inclination of the shock wave will be a func- tion of the free stream Mach number and the wedge angle. As the free stream Mach number increases, the shock wave angle decreases; as the wedge angle increases the shock wave angle increases, and, if the wedge angle is in- creased to some critical amount, the shock wave will detach from the leading edge of the wedge. It is important to note that detach- ment of the shock wave will produce sub$onic flow immediately after the central portion of the shock wave. Figure 3.4 illustrates these typical flow patterns and the effect of Mach number and wedge angle. \n\nWhen supersonic flow is clearly established, all changes in velocity, pressure, density, flow direction, etc., take place quite suddenly and in relatively confined areas. The areas of flows change are generally distinct and the phenom- ena are referred to as “wave” formations. All compression waves occur suddenly and are wasteful of energy. Hence, the compression waves are distinguished by the sudden “shock” type of behavior. All expansion waves are not so sudden in their occurrence and are not waste- ful of energy like the compression shock waves. Various types of waves can occur in supersonic flow and the nature of the wave formed depends upon the airstream and the shape of the object causing the flow change. Essentially, there are three fundamental types of waves formed in supersonic flow: (1) the oblip shock wave (compression), (2) the normal shock wave (compression), (3) the expansion wave (no shock). \n\n## ‘ I-YPICAL SUPERSONIC FLOW PATTERNS\n\nThe previous flow across a wedge in a supersonic airstream would allow flow in ;UU dimensions. If a cone were placed in a super- sonic airstream the airflow would occur in three dimensions and there would be some noticeable differences in flow characteristics. Three-dimensional flow for the same Mach number and flow direction change would pro- duce a weaker shock wave with less change in pressure and density. Also, this conical wave formation allows changes in airflow that con- tinue to occur past the wave front and the wave strength varies with distance away from the surface. Figure 3.5 depicts the typical three-dimensional flow past a cone. \n\nOBLIQUE SHOCK WAVE. Consider the case where a supersonic airstream is turned into the preceding airflow. Such would be the case of a supersonic flow “into a comer” as shown in figure 3.3. A supersonic airstream passing through the oblique shock wave will experience these changes: \n\n(1) The airstream is slowed down; the velocity and Mach number behind the wave are reduced but the flow is still supersonic \n\n(2) The flow direction is changed to flow along the surface \n\n(3) The static pressure of the airstrea:m behind the wave is increased \n\n(4) The density of the airstream behind the wave is increased \n\n(5) Some of the available energy of the airstream (indicated by the sum of dynamic and static pressure) is dissipated and turned into unavailable heat energy. Hence, the shock wave is wasteful of energy. \n\nA typical case of oblique shock wave forma- tion is that of a wedge pointed into a super- sonic airstream. The oblique shock wave \n\nNORMAL SHOCK WAVE. If a blunt- nosed object is placed in a supersonic airstream the shock wave which is formed will be de- tached from the leading edge. This detached \n\nOblique shock waves can be reflected like any pressure wave and this effect is shown in figure 3.5. This reflection appears logical and necessary since the original wave changes the flow direction toward the wall and the reflected wave creates the subsequent flow change to cause the flow to remain parallel to the wall surface. This reflection phenomenon places definite restrictions on the size of a model in a wind tunnel since a wave reflected back to the model would cause a pressure distribution not typical of free flight." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8921697584063223, + "doc_id": "3557edd7e708b0fc3877ced79d8bc462279f245699a0445651f1dfa347d7954b", + "edit_distance": 0.625531914893617, + "f1_score": 0.9528455284552846, + "meteor": 0.830529626390017, + "precision": 0.979933110367893, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS 00-8OT-80 OPERATING STRENGTH LIMITATIONS\n\nis cti~n&zti~e during cyclic stressing, the useful service life of the aircraft must be anticipated to predict the gross effect of service loads. Then, the primary structure is required to sustain the typical load spectrum rhrough the anticipated service life without the occurrence of fatigue failure. To prove this capability of the structure, various major components must be subjected to an accelerated fatigue test to verify the resistance to repeated loads.\n\nThe design of a highly stressed or long life structure emphasizes the problems of fatigue. Great care must be taken during design and manufacture to minimize stress concentrations which enhance fatigue. When the aircraft enters service operation, care must be taken in the maintenance of components to insure proper adjustment, torquing, inspection, etc., as proper maintenance is a necessity for achieving full service life. Also, the structure must not be subjected to a load spectrum more severe than was considered in design or fatigue failures may occur within the anticipated service life. With this additional factor in mind, any pilot should have all the more respect for the operating strength limits-recurring overstress causes a high rate of fatigue damage.\n\nThere are many examples of the detrimental effect of repeated overstress on service life. One major automobile manufacturer advertised his product as ' guaranteed to provide 100,000 miles of normal driving without mechanical failure.' The little old lady from Pasadena-the original owner of ALL used cars -will probably best the guaranteed mileage by many times. On the other hand, the hotrod artist and freeway Grand Prix contender do not qualify for the guarantee since their manner of operation could not be considered normal. The typical modern automobile may be capable of 60,000 to l~,OOO miles of normal operation before an overhaul is necessary. However, this same automobile may encounter catastrophic failures in a few hundred miles if operated continually at maximum torque in low drive range. Obviously, there are similar\n\n330\n\nrelationships for aircraft and powerplant structures.\n\nCREEP CONSIDERATIONS. By definition, creep is the structural deformation which occurs as a function of time. If a part is subjected to a constant stress of sufficient magnitude, the part will continue to develop plastic strain and deform with time. Eventually, failure can occur from the accumulation of creep damage. Creep conditions are most critical at high stress and high temperature since both factors increase the rate of creep damage. Of course, any structure subject to creep conditions should not encounter excessive deformation or failure within the anticipated service life.\n\nThe high operating temperatures of gas turbine components furnish a critical environment for creep conditions. The normal operating temperatures and stresses of gas turbine components create considerable problems in design for service life. Thus, operating limitations deserve very serious respect since excessive engine speed or excessive turbine temperatures will cause a large increase in the rate of creep damage and lead to premature failure of components. Gas turbines require high operating temperatures to achieve high performance and efficiency and short periods of excessive temperatures can incur highly damaging creep rates.\n\nAirplane structures can be subject to high temperatures due to aerodynamic heating at high Mach numbers. Thus, very high speed airplanes can be subject to operating limitations due to creep conditions.\n\n## AFROELASTIC EFFECTS\n\nThe requirement for structural stiffness and rigidity is the consideration given to the interaction of aerodynamic forces and deflections of the structure. The aircraft and its components must have sufficient stiffness to prevent or minimize aeroelastic influences in the normal flight range, Aileron reversal, divergence, flutter, and vibration should not occur in the range of flight speeds which will be normal operation for the aircraft.", + "recall": 0.9272151898734177, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-8OT-80 OPERATING STRENGTH LIMITATIONS \n\nrelationships for aircraft and powerplant structures. \n\nis cti~n&zti~e during cyclic stressing, the useful service life of the aircraft must be anticipated to predict the gross effect of service loads. Then, the primary structure is required to sustain the typical load spectrum rhrough the anticipated service life without the occurrence of fatigue failure. To prove this capability of the structure, various major components must be subjected to an accelerated fatigue test to verify the resistance to repeated loads. \n\nCREEP CONSIDERATIONS. By definition, creep is the structural deformation which oc- curs as a function of time. If a part is subjected to a constant stress of sufficient magnitude, the part will continue to develop plastic strain and deform with time. Eventually, failure can occur from the accumulation of creep damage. Creep conditions are most critical at high stress and high temperature since both factors increase the rate of creep damage. Of course, any structure subject to creep conditions should not encounter excessive deformation or failure within the anticipated service life. \n\nThe design of a highly stressed or long life structure emphasizes the problems of fatigue. Great care must be taken during design and manufacture to minimize stress concentrations which enhance fatigue. When the aircraft enters service operation, care must be taken in the maintenance of components to insure proper adjustment, torquing, inspection, etc., as proper maintenance is a necessity for achieving full service life. Also, the structure must not be subjected to a load spectrum more severe than was considered in design or fatigue failures may occur within the anticipated service life. With this additional factor in mind, any pilot should have all the more respect for the oper- ating strength limits-recurring overstress causes a high rate of fatigue damage. There are many examples of the detrimental \n\nThe high operating temperatures of gas tur- bine components furnish a critical environment for creep conditions. The normal operating temperatures and stresses of gas turbine com- ponents create considerable problems in design for service life. Thus, operating limitations deserve very serious respect since excessive engine speed or excessive turbine temperatures will cause a large increase in the rate of creep damage and lead to premature failure of com- ponents. Gas turbines require high operating temperatures to achieve high performance and efficiency and short periods of excessive tem- peratures can incur highly damaging creep rates. Airplane structures can be subject to high \n\ncauses a high rate of fatigue damage. There are many examples of the detrimental effect of repeated overstress on service life. One major automobile manufacturer adver- tised his product as “guaranteed to provide 100,000 miles of normal driving without me- chanical failure.” The little old lady from Pasadena-the original owner of ALL used cars -will probably best the guaranteed mileage by many times. On the other hand, the hot- rod artist and freeway Grand Prix contender do not qualify for the guarantee since their manner of operation could not be considered normal. The typical modern automobile may be capable of 60,000 to l~,OOO miles of normal operation before an overhaul is necessary. However, this same automobile may encounter catastrophic failures in a few hundred miles if operated continually at maximum torque in low drive range. Obviously, there are similar \n\nrates. Airplane structures can be subject to high temperatures due to aerodynamic heating at high Mach numbers. Thus, very high speed airplanes can be subject to operating limita- tions due to creep conditions. \n\nThe requirement for structural stiffness and rigidity is the consideration given to the inter- action of aerodynamic forces and deflections of the structure. The aircraft and its components must have sufficient stiffness to prevent or minimize aeroelastic influences in the normal flight range, Aileron reversal, divergence, flutter, and vibration should not occur in the range of flight speeds which will be normal operation for the aircraft. \n\n## AFROELASTIC EFFECTS\n\n330" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8527855119933073, + "doc_id": "e46ff9d5a3699bf732077061ff58cc990a12d1e175683a3264f1794cc8dc635f", + "edit_distance": 0.5944976076555024, + "f1_score": 0.9440993788819877, + "meteor": 0.7328949608477662, + "precision": 0.9827586206896551, + "pred_md": "e.g., cruise, climb, maneuvers, etc. The region of reversed command is encountered primarily in the low speed phases of flight during takeoff and landing. Because of the extensive low speed flight during carrier operations, the Naval Aviator will be more familiar with the region of reversed command than the ordinary pilot.\n\nThe characteristics of flight in the region' of normal command are illustrated at point A on the second curve of figure 6.2. If the airplane is established in steady, level flight at point A, lift is equal to weight and the power available is set equal to the power required. When the airplane is disturbed to some airspeed slightly greater than point ' A, a power deficiency exists and, wheq,:the &+la&is disturbed to some airspeed slightly lower than point A, a power excess exists. This relationship provides a tendency for the airplane to return to the equilibrium of point A and resume the original flight condition following a disturbance. Also, the static longitudinal stability of the airplane tends to return the airplane to the original trimmed CL and velocity corresponding to this C,. The phugoid usually has most satisfactory qualities at low values of C,. so the high speed of the region ' of normal command provides little tendency of. the airplane' s, airspeed to vary or wander abom.\n\nWith all factors considered, flight in Lhe region of noi& command is characterized by a relatively strong tendency of the airplane to maintain the trim speed quite naturally. However, flight in the region of normal command can lead to some unusual and erroneous impres-, sions regarding proper flying technique. For example, if the airplane is established at point A in steady level flight, a controlled increase in airspeed without a change in power setting will create a deficiency of power and cause the airplane to descend. Similarly, a controlled decrease in airspeed without a change in power setting will create an excess of power and cause the airplane to climb. This fact, coupled with Lhe transient motion of the airplane when the\n\n## NAVWEPS OD4OT-80 APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYING\n\nangle of attack is changed rapidly, may lead to the impression thal rate of climb and descent can be controlled by changes in angle of attack. While such is true in the region of normal command, for the conditions of stead' flight, primary control of altitude remains the power setting and the primary control of airspeed remains the angle of attack. The impressions and habits that can be developed in the region of normal command can bring about disastrous consequences in the region of reversed command\n\nThe characteristics of flight in the region of reversed command are illustrated at point B on the second curve of figure 6.2. If the airplane is established in steady, level flight at point B, lift is equal to weight and the power available is set equal to the. power required. When the airplane is disturbed to some airspeed slightly greater than point B, an excess of power exists and, when the airplane is disturbed to some airspeed slightly lower than point B, a deficiency of power exists. This relationship is basically unstable because the variation of excess power to either side of point B tends to magnify any original disturbance. While the static longitudinal stability of the airplane tends to maintain the original trimmed C, and airspeed corresponding to that CL, the phugoid usually has the least satisfactory qualities at the high values of CL corresponding to low speed flight.\n\nWhen all factors are considered, flight in the region of reversed command is characterized by a relatively weak tendency of the airplane to maintain the trim speed naturally. In fact it is likely that the airplane will exhibit no inherent tendency to maintain the trim speed in this regime of flight. For this reason, the pilot inust give particular attention to precise control of airspeed when operating in the low flight speeds of the region of reversed command.\n\nWhile flight in the region of normal command may create doubt as to the primary control of airspeed and altitude, operation in the region of reversed command should leave little", + "recall": 0.9083665338645418, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OD4OT-80 APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYING \n\ne.g., cruise, climb, maneuvers, etc. The region of reversed command is encountered primarily in the low speed phases of flight during takeoff and landing. Because of the extensive low speed flight during carrier operations, the Naval Aviator will be more familiar with the region of reversed command than the ordinary pilot. The characteristics of flight in the region ’ of \n\nangle of attack is changed rapidly, may lead to the impression thal rate of climb and descent can be controlled by changes in angle of attack. While such is true in the region of normal com- mand, for the conditions of stead’ flight, pri- mary control of altitude remains the power setting and the primary control of airspeed re- mains the angle of attack. The impressions and habits that can be developed in the region of normal command can bring about disastrous consequences in the region of reversed com- mand The characteristics of flight in the region of \n\npilot. The characteristics of flight in the region ’ of normal command are illustrated at point A on the second curve of figure 6.2. If the airplane is established in steady, level flight at point A, lift is equal to weight and the power available is set equal to the power required. When the airplane is disturbed to some airspeed slightly greater than point ‘ A, a power deficiency exists and, wheq,:the &+la&is disturbed to some air- speed slightly lower than point A, a power excess exists. This relationship provides a tendency for the airplane to return to the equili- brium of point A and resume the original flight condition following a disturbance. Also, the static longitudinal stability of the airplane tends to return the airplane to the original trimmed CL and velocity corresponding to this C,. The phugoid usually has most satisfactory qualities at low values of C,. so the high speed of the region ‘ of normal command provides little tendency of. the airplane ’ s, airspeed to vary or wander abom. With all factors considered, flight in Lhe \n\nmand The characteristics of flight in the region of reversed command are illustrated at point B on the second curve of figure 6.2. If the air- plane is established in steady, level flight at point B, lift is equal to weight and the power available is set equal to the. power required. When the airplane is disturbed to some air- speed slightly greater than point B, an excess of power exists and, when the airplane is dis- turbed to some airspeed slightly lower than point B, a deficiency of power exists. This relationship is basically unstable because the variation of excess power to either side of point B tends to magnify any original dis- turbance. While the static longitudinal sta- bility of the airplane tends to maintain the original trimmed C, and airspeed correspond- ing to that CL, the phugoid usually has the least satisfactory qualities at the high values of CL corresponding to low speed flight. \n\nvary or wander abom. With all factors considered, flight in Lhe region of noi& command is characterized by a relatively strong tendency of the airplane to maintain the trim speed quite naturally. How- ever, flight in the region of normal command can lead to some unusual and erroneous impres-, sions regarding proper flying technique. For example, if the airplane is established at point A in steady level flight, a controlled increase in airspeed without a change in power setting will create a deficiency of power and cause the airplane to descend. Similarly, a controlled decrease in airspeed without a change in power setting will create an excess of power and cause the airplane to climb. This fact, coupled with Lhe transient motion of the airplane when the \n\nWhen all factors are considered, flight in the region of reversed command is characterized by a relatively weak tendency of the airplane to maintain the trim speed naturally. In fact it is likely that the airplane will exhibit no inherent tendency to maintain the trim speed in this regime of flight. For this reason, the pilot inust give particular attention to precise control of airspeed when operating in the low flight speeds of the region of reversed command. While flight in the region of normal com- \n\nflight speeds of the region of reversed command. While flight in the region of normal com- mand may create doubt as to the primary con- trol of airspeed and altitude, operation in the region of reversed command should leave little" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6506126303185474, + "doc_id": "d0945d9321628a0bbe35d2abb3f970cc3c87b9dae62adbcb14bfe59549fe21fe", + "edit_distance": 0.4132231404958678, + "f1_score": 0.9333333333333331, + "meteor": 0.76009909196595, + "precision": 0.958904109589041, + "pred_md": "## AIRSPACE INFORMATION (Continued)\n\n## Off Route Obstruction Clearance Altitude (OROCA)\n\nLow Charts Only\n\nOROCA is computed similarly to the Maximum Elevation Figure (MEF) found on Visual charts except that it provides an additional vertical buffer of 1,000 feet in desig -nated non-mountainous areas and a 2,000 foot vertical buffer in designated mountainous areas within the United States.\n\nExample: 12,500 feet\n\n## Special Flight Rules Area (SFRA)\n\nLow and High Charts\n\nSFRA Symbology\n\n87\n\nFAA Chart Users' Guide - IFR Enroute Symbology", + "recall": 0.9090909090909091, + "true_md": "87\n\nFAA Chart Users’ Guide - IFR Enroute Symbology\n\n## Off Route Obstruction Clearance Altitude (OROCA)\n\n## AIRSPACE INFORMATION (Continued)\n\nLow Charts Only\n\nOROCA is computed similarly to the Maximum Elevation Figure (MEF) found on Visual charts except that it pro- vides an additional vertical buffer of 1,000 feet in desig - nated non-mountainous areas and a 2,000 foot vertical buffer in designated mountainous areas within the United States.\n\nExample: 12,500 feet\n\nLow and High Charts\n\nSFRA Symbology\n\n## Example: Low L-13 Chart\n\n## Special Flight Rules Area (SFRA)\n\nExample: Low Chart (Washington Area Chart) \n\nExample: High Chart (H-12)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9555998866793785, + "doc_id": "267d581a02a9f7511fa823b4c698d3acdb53e8828fafca7bce1893f8e452b9df", + "edit_distance": 0.07124352331606218, + "f1_score": 0.9811965811965813, + "meteor": 0.9833007724637868, + "precision": 0.9896551724137931, + "pred_md": "FAA Chart Users' Guide - IFR Enroute Terms\n\n## INSTRUMENT AIRWAYS\n\nThe FAA has established two fixed route systems for air navigation. The VOR and LF/MF system-designated from 1,200' Above Ground Level (AGL) to but not including FL 180 is shown on IFR Enroute Low Altitude Charts, and the Jet Route system designated from FL 180 to FL 450 inclusive is shown on IFR Enroute High Altitude Charts.\n\n## VOR LF/MF AIRWAY SYSTEM (IFR LOW ALTITUDE ENROUTE CHARTS)\n\nIn this system VOR airways - airways based on VOR or VORTAC NAVAIDs - are depicted in black and identified by a \"V\" (Victor) followed by the route number (e.g., \"V12\").\n\nLF/MF airways - airways based on LF/MF NAVAIDs - are sometimes called \"colored airways\" because they are identified by color name and number (e.g., \"Amber One\", charted as \"A1\"). In Alaska Green and Red airways are plotted east and west, and Amber and Blue airways are plotted north and south. Regardless of their color identifier, LF/MF airways are shown in brown.\n\n## AIRWAY/ROUTE DATA\n\nOn both series of IFR Enroute Charts, airway/route data such as the airway identifications, magnetic courses bearings or radials, mileages, and altitudes (e.g., Minimum Enroute Altitudes (MEAs), Minimum Reception Altitudes (MRAs), Maximum Authorized Altitudes (MAAs), Minimum Obstacle Clearance Altitudes (MOCAs), Minimum Turning Altitudes (MTAs) and Minimum Crossing Altitudes (MCAs)) are shown aligned with the airway.\n\nAs a rule the airway/route data is charted and in the same color as the airway, with one exception. Charted in blue, Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS) MEAs, identified with a \"G\" suffix, have been added to \"V\" and \"colored airways\" for aircraft flying those airways using Global Positioning System (GPS) navigation.\n\nAirways/Routes predicated on VOR or VORTAC NAVAIDs are defined by the outbound radial from the NAVAID. Airways/ Routes predicated on LF/MF NAVAIDs are defined by the inbound bearing.\n\n- · Minimum Enroute Altitude (MEA) - The MEA is the lowest published altitude between radio fixes that assures acceptable navigational signal coverage and meets obstacle clearance requirements between those fixes. The MEA prescribed for a Federal airway or segment, RNAV low or high route, or other direct route applies to the entire width of the airway, segment, or route between the radio fixes defining the airway, segment, or route. MEAs for routes wholly contained within controlled airspace normally provide a buffer above the floor of controlled airspace consisting of at least 300 feet within transition areas and 500 feet within control areas. MEAs are established based upon obstacle clearance over terrain and man-made objects, adequacy of navigation facility performance, and communications requirements.\n- · Minimum Reception Altitude (MRA) - MRAs are determined by FAA flight inspection traversing an entire route of flight to establish the minimum altitude the navigation signal can be received for the route and for off-course NAVAID facilities that determine a fix. When the MRA at the fix is higher than the MEA, an MRA is established for the fix and is the lowest altitude at which an intersection can be determined.\n- · Maximum Authorized Altitude (MAA) - An MAA is a published altitude representing the maximum usable altitude or flight level for an airspace structure or route segment. It is the highest altitude on a Federal airway, jet route, RNAV low or high route, or other direct route for which an MEA is designated at which adequate reception of navigation signals is assured.\n- · Minimum Obstruction Clearance Altitude (MOCA) - The MOCA is the lowest published altitude in effect be -tween radio fixes on VOR airways, off-airway routes, or route segments which meets obstacle clearance require -ments for the entire route segment and which assures acceptable navigational signal coverage only within 25 statute (22 nautical) miles of a VOR. A MOCA is only shown on the Enroute Low Charts and only published when it is lower than the MEA. When shown, it is preceded by an asterisk.\n\n64", + "recall": 0.9728813559322034, + "true_md": "## INSTRUMENT AIRWAYS\n\n## VOR LF/MF AIRWAY SYSTEM (IFR LOW ALTITUDE ENROUTE CHARTS)\n\n## AIRWAY/ROUTE DATA\n\nFAA Chart Users’ Guide - IFR Enroute Terms\n\nThe FAA has established two fixed route systems for air navigation. The VOR and LF/MF system-designated from 1,200' Above Ground Level (AGL) to but not including FL 180 is shown on IFR Enroute Low Altitude Charts, and the Jet Route system designated from FL 180 to FL 450 inclusive is shown on IFR Enroute High Altitude Charts.\n\nIn this system VOR airways - airways based on VOR or VORTAC NAVAIDs - are depicted in black and identified by a \"V\" (Victor) followed by the route number (e.g., \"V12\").\n\nLF/MF airways - airways based on LF/MF NAVAIDs - are sometimes called \"colored airways\" because they are identified by color name and number (e.g., \"Amber One\", charted as \"A1\"). In Alaska Green and Red airways are plotted east and west, and Amber and Blue airways are plotted north and south. Regardless of their color identifier, LF/MF airways are shown in brown.\n\nOn both series of IFR Enroute Charts, airway/route data such as the airway identifications, magnetic courses bearings or radials, mileages, and altitudes (e.g., Minimum Enroute Altitudes (MEAs), Minimum Reception Altitudes (MRAs), Maxi- mum Authorized Altitudes (MAAs), Minimum Obstacle Clearance Altitudes (MOCAs), Minimum Turning Altitudes (MTAs) and Minimum Crossing Altitudes (MCAs)) are shown aligned with the airway.\n\nAs a rule the airway/route data is charted and in the same color as the airway, with one exception. Charted in blue, Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS) MEAs, identified with a \"G\" suffix, have been added to \"V\" and \"colored airways\" for aircraft flying those airways using Global Positioning System (GPS) navigation.\n\nAirways/Routes predicated on VOR or VORTAC NAVAIDs are defined by the outbound radial from the NAVAID. Airways/ Routes predicated on LF/MF NAVAIDs are defined by the inbound bearing.\n\n- • Minimum Enroute Altitude (MEA) - The MEA is the lowest published altitude between radio fixes that assures acceptable navigational signal coverage and meets obstacle clearance requirements between those fixes. The MEA prescribed for a Federal airway or segment, RNAV low or high route, or other direct route applies to the en- tire width of the airway, segment, or route between the radio fixes defining the airway, segment, or route. MEAs for routes wholly contained within controlled airspace normally provide a buffer above the floor of controlled airspace consisting of at least 300 feet within transition areas and 500 feet within control areas. MEAs are established based upon obstacle clearance over terrain and man-made objects, adequacy of navigation facility performance, and communications requirements.\n\n- • Minimum Reception Altitude (MRA) - MRAs are determined by FAA flight inspection traversing an entire route of flight to establish the minimum altitude the navigation signal can be received for the route and for off-course NAVAID facilities that determine a fix. When the MRA at the fix is higher than the MEA, an MRA is established for the fix and is the lowest altitude at which an intersection can be determined.\n\n- • Maximum Authorized Altitude (MAA) - An MAA is a published altitude representing the maximum usable altitude or flight level for an airspace structure or route segment. It is the highest altitude on a Federal airway, jet route, RNAV low or high route, or other direct route for which an MEA is designated at which adequate reception of navigation signals is assured.\n\n- • Minimum Obstruction Clearance Altitude (MOCA) - The MOCA is the lowest published altitude in effect be - tween radio fixes on VOR airways, off-airway routes, or route segments which meets obstacle clearance require - ments for the entire route segment and which assures acceptable navigational signal coverage only within 25 statute (22 nautical) miles of a VOR. A MOCA is only shown on the Enroute Low Charts and only published when it is lower than the MEA. When shown, it is preceded by an asterisk.\n\n64" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9227809953920794, + "doc_id": "925321c4f490afa5edce96f8defa6841706bd0c0a89347bf728be4a682a26cac", + "edit_distance": 0.5402298850574713, + "f1_score": 0.9602763385146805, + "meteor": 0.8705730694860366, + "precision": 0.9823321554770318, + "pred_md": "brakes does not produce the maximum coeficient of friction. The incipient skid condition will produce the maximum coefficient of friction but this peak is difficult to recognize and maintain without an antiskid system. Judicious use of the brakes is necessary to obtain the peak coefficient of friction but not develop a skid or locked wheel which could cause tire failure, loss of control, or considerable reduction in the friction coefficient.\n\nThe capacity of the brakes must be sufficient to create adequate braking torque and produce the high coefficient of friction. In addition, the brakes must be capable of withstanding the heat generated without fading or losing effectiveness. The most critical requirements of the brakes occur during landing at the maximum allowable landing weight.\n\nTYPICAL ERRORS OF BRAKING TECHNIQUE. Errors in braking technique are usually coincident with errors of other sorts. For example, if the pilot lands an airplane with excessive airspeed, poor braking technique could accompany the original error to produce an unsafe situation. One common error of of braking technique is the application of braking torque in excess of the maximum possible rolling torque. The result will be that the wheel decelerates and locks and the skid reduces the coefficient of friction, lowers the capability for side force, and enhances the possibility of tire failure. If maximum braking is necessary, caution must be used to modulate the braking torque to prevent locking the wheel and causing a skid. On the other hand, maximum coefficient of friction is obtained at the incipient skidding condition so sufficient brake torque must be applied to produce maximum friction force. Intermittent braking serves no useful purpose when the objective is maximum deceleration because the periods between brake application produce only slight or negligible cooling. Brake should be applied smoothly and braking torque modulated at or near the peak value to insure that skid does not develop.\n\n391\n\n## NAVWEPS OD-BOT-80 APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYING\n\nOne of the important factors affecting the landing roll distance is landing touchdown speed. Any excess velocity at landing causes a large increase in the minimum stop distance and it is necessary that the pilot control the landing precisely so to land at the appropriate speed. When landing on the dry, hard surface runway of adequate length, a tendency is to take advantage of any excess runway and allow the airplane to touchdown with excess speed. Of course, such- errors in technique cannot be tolerated and the pilot must strive for precision in all landings. Immediately after touchdown, the airp1ar.e lift may be considerable and the normal force on the braking surfaces quite low. Thus, if excessive braking torque is applied, the wheel may lock easily at high speeds and tire failure may take place suddenly.\n\nLanding on a wet or icy runway requires judicious use of the brakes because of the reduction in the maximum coefficient of friction. Because of reduction in the maximum attainable value of the coefficient of friction, the pilot must anticipate an increase in the minimum landing distance above that applicable for the dry runway conditions. When there is considerable water or ice on rhe runway, an increase in landing distance on the order of 40 to 100 percent must be expected for similar conditions of gross weight, density altitude, wind, etc. Unfortunately, the conditions likely to produce poor braking action also will cause high idle thrust of the turbojet engine and the extreme case (smooth, glazed ice or heavy rain) may dictate shutting down the engine to effect a reasonable stopping distance.\n\n## REFUSAL SPEEDS, LINE SPEEDS, AND CRITICAL FIELD LENGTH\n\nDuring takeoff, it is necessary to monitor the performance of the airplane and evaluate the acceleration to insure that the airplane will", + "recall": 0.9391891891891891, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OD-BOT-80 APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYING \n\nbrakes does not produce the maximum coefi- cient of friction. The incipient skid condi- tion will produce the maximum coefficient of friction but this peak is difficult to recognize and maintain without an antiskid system. Judicious use of the brakes is necessary to obtain the peak coefficient of friction but not develop a skid or locked wheel which could cause tire failure, loss of control, or consider- able reduction in the friction coefficient. \n\nOne of the important factors affecting the landing roll distance is landing touchdown speed. Any excess velocity at landing causes a large increase in the minimum stop distance and it is necessary that the pilot control the landing precisely so to land at the appropriate speed. When landing on the dry, hard surface runway of adequate length, a tendency is to take advantage of any excess runway and allow the airplane to touchdown with excess speed. Of course, such- errors in technique cannot be tolerated and the pilot must strive for precision in all landings. Immediately after touchdown, the airp1ar.e lift may be considerable and the normal force on the braking surfaces quite low. Thus, if excessive braking torque is applied, the wheel may lock easily at high speeds and tire failure may take place suddenly. \n\nThe capacity of the brakes must be sufficient to create adequate braking torque and produce the high coefficient of friction. In addition, the brakes must be capable of withstanding the heat generated without fading or losing effectiveness. The most critical requirements of the brakes occur during landing at the maximum allowable landing weight. TYPICAL ERRORS OF BRAKING TECH- \n\nmaximum allowable landing weight. TYPICAL ERRORS OF BRAKING TECH- NIQUE. Errors in braking technique are usu- ally coincident with errors of other sorts. For example, if the pilot lands an airplane with excessive airspeed, poor braking technique could accompany the original error to produce an unsafe situation. One common error of of braking technique is the application of braking torque in excess of the maximum possible rolling torque. The result will be that the wheel decelerates and locks and the skid reduces the coefficient of friction, lowers the capability for side force, and enhances the possibility of tire failure. If maximum brak- ing is necessary, caution must be used to modulate the braking torque to prevent lock- ing the wheel and causing a skid. On the other hand, maximum coefficient of friction is obtained at the incipient skidding condition so sufficient brake torque must be applied to produce maximum friction force. Intermittent braking serves no useful purpose when the objective is maximum deceleration because the periods between brake application produce only slight or negligible cooling. Brake should be applied smoothly and braking torque modulated at or near the peak value to insure that skid does not develop. \n\nLanding on a wet or icy runway requires judicious use of the brakes because of the re- duction in the maximum coefficient of friction. Because of reduction in the maximum attain- able value of the coefficient of friction, the pilot must anticipate an increase in the mini- mum landing distance above that applicable for the dry runway conditions. When there is considerable water or ice on rhe runway, an increase in landing distance on the order of 40 to 100 percent must be expected for similar conditions of gross weight, density altitude, wind, etc. Unfortunately, the conditions likely to produce poor braking action also will cause high idle thrust of the turbojet engine and the extreme case (smooth, glazed ice or heavy rain) may dictate shutting down the engine to effect a reasonable stopping distance. \n\nDuring takeoff, it is necessary to monitor the performance of the airplane and evaluate the acceleration to insure that the airplane will \n\n## REFUSAL SPEEDS, LINE SPEEDS, AND CRITICAL FIELD LENGTH\n\n391" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8313239238766497, + "doc_id": "c9517879beadf51f079331dc78a9ec40e16161cb4add07e320b780463fb16d1a", + "edit_distance": 0.6512345679012346, + "f1_score": 0.9106382978723404, + "meteor": 0.6912502944476583, + "precision": 0.9427312775330396, + "pred_md": "attack would produce an approximate 0.5 change in lift coefficient. Evidently, lift,~curve slope is not a factor important in the selection of an airfoil.\n\nAn important lift property affected by the airfoil shape is the section maximum lift coefficient, ci-. The effect of airfoil shape on cican be appreciated by comparison of the lift curves for the five airfoils of figure 1.12. The NACA airfoils 63X06,63-009, and 63i-012 ate symmetrical sections of a basic thickness distribution but maximum thicknesses of 6, 9, and 12 percent respectively. The effect of thickness on ~1% is obvious from an inspection of these curves :\n\n9.0°\n\nThe 12-percent section has a crapproximately 70 percent greater than the 6-percent thick section. In addition, the thicker airfoils have greater benefit from the use of various high lift devices.\n\nThe effect of camber is illustrated by the lift curves of the NACA 4412 and 631-412 sections. The NACA 4412 section is a 12 percent thick airfoil which has 4 percent maximum camber located at 40 percent of the chord. The NACA 63i-412 airfoil has the same thickness and thickness distribution as the 631-012 but camber added to give a ' design' ' lift coefficient (c, for minimum section drag) of 0.4. The lift curves for these two airfoils show that camber has a beneficial e&t on cl-.\n\nAn additional effect of camber is the change in zero lift angle. While the symmetrical\n\n29\n\nNAVWEPS OO-BOT-BO BASIC AE,RODYMAMlCS\n\nsections have zero lift at zero angle of attack, the sections with positive camber have negative angles for zero lift.\n\nThe importance of maximum lift coefficient is obvious. If the maximum lift coefficient is high, the stall speed will be low. However, the high thickness and camber necessary for high section maximum lift coefficients may produce low critical Mach numbers and large twisting moments at high speed. In other words, a high maximum lift coefficient is just one of the many features desired of an airfoil section.\n\nDRAG CHARACTERISTICS. Drag is the net aerodynamic force parallel to the relative wind and its source is the pressure distribution and skin friction on the surface. Large, thick bluff bodies in an airstream show a predominance of form drag due to the unbalanced pressure distribution. However, streamlined bodies with smooth contours show a ptedominance of drag due to skin friction. In a fashion similar to other aerodynamic forces, drag forces may be considered in the form of a coefficient which is independent of dynamic pressure and surface area. The basic drag equation is as follows:\n\nwhere\n\n\n\n\n\nS= wing surface area, sq. ft.\n\nThe force of drag is shown as the product of dynamic pressure, surface area, and drag coefficient, C,. The drag coefficient in this equation is similar to any other aerodynamic force coefficient-it is the ratio of drag pressure to dynamic pressure. If the drag coefficient of a conventional airplane were plotted versus angle of attack, the result would be typical of the graph shown in figure 1.13. At low angles of attack the drag coefficient is low and small changes in angle of attack create only slight changes in drag coefficient. At", + "recall": 0.8806584362139918, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OO-BOT-BO BASIC AE,RODYMAMlCS \n\nsections have zero lift at zero angle of attack, the sections with positive camber have nega- tive angles for zero lift. The importance of maximum lift coefficient \n\nattack would produce an approximate 0.5 change in lift coefficient. Evidently, lift,~curve slope is not a factor important in the selection of an airfoil. An important lift property affected by the \n\nof an airfoil. An important lift property affected by the airfoil shape is the section maximum lift co- efficient, ci-. The effect of airfoil shape on ci- can be appreciated by comparison of the lift curves for the five airfoils of figure 1.12. The NACA airfoils 63X06,63-009, and 63i-012 ate symmetrical sections of a basic thickness distribution but maximum thicknesses of 6, 9, and 12 percent respectively. The effect of thickness on ~1% is obvious from an inspec- tion of these curves : \n\ntive angles for zero lift. The importance of maximum lift coefficient is obvious. If the maximum lift coefficient is high, the stall speed will be low. However, the high thickness and camber necessary for high section maximum lift coefficients may produce low critical Mach numbers and large twisting moments at high speed. In other words, a high maximum lift coefficient is just one of the many features desired of an airfoil section. DRAG CHARACTERISTICS. Drag is the \n\nsection. DRAG CHARACTERISTICS. Drag is the net aerodynamic force parallel to the relative wind and its source is the pressure distribution and skin friction on the surface. Large, thick bluff bodies in an airstream show a predomi- nance of form drag due to the unbalanced pres- sure distribution. However, streamlined bodies with smooth contours show a ptedomi- nance of drag due to skin friction. In a fashion similar to other aerodynamic forces, drag forces may be considered in the form of a coefficient which is independent of dynamic pressure and surface area. The basic drag equation is as follows: \n\nD=GqS \n\nwhere \n\nD=drag, lbs. C,= drag coefficient q= dynamic pressure, psf UP =z (V in knots, TAS) S= wing surface area, sq. ft. \n\nThe force of drag is shown as the product of dynamic pressure, surface area, and drag co- efficient, C,. The drag coefficient in this equation is similar to any other aerodynamic force coefficient-it is the ratio of drag pres- sure to dynamic pressure. If the drag co- efficient of a conventional airplane were plotted versus angle of attack, the result would be typical of the graph shown in figure 1.13. At low angles of attack the drag coefficient is low and small changes in angle of attack create only slight changes in drag coefficient. At \n\nThe 12-percent section has a cr- approxi- mately 70 percent greater than the 6-percent thick section. In addition, the thicker airfoils have greater benefit from the use of various high lift devices. \n\nThe effect of camber is illustrated by the lift curves of the NACA 4412 and 631-412 sections. The NACA 4412 section is a 12 percent thick airfoil which has 4 percent maximum camber located at 40 percent of the chord. The NACA 63i-412 airfoil has the same thickness and thickness distribution as the 631-012 but camber added to give a “design”’ lift coefficient (c, for minimum section drag) of 0.4. The lift curves for these two airfoils show that camber has a beneficial e&t on cl-. \n\n29 \n\nAn additional effect of camber is the change in zero lift angle. While the symmetrical" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7285505954775419, + "doc_id": "349acad716475db8dd1e4e2ce7ecb71ccf9281b1c10c1727844938e1c418d33f", + "edit_distance": 0.3125, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9536471433704636, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS 00-801-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL\n\nFigure 4.6. Wing Contribution\n\nFigure 4.6. Wing Contribution\n\n254", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-801-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL \n\nFigure 4.6. Wing Contribution \n\n254" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8554838684293687, + "doc_id": "ee8c3b223ff6c77920cebf8ad9c61cb62540e2724c25a26676aae287f928e68a", + "edit_distance": 0.2725490196078431, + "f1_score": 0.9207161125319692, + "meteor": 0.7987408424652194, + "precision": 0.9523809523809523, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS OO-BOT-80 BASIC AE,RODYNAMlCS\n\n(C) The point of minimum total drag occurs at a speed of 163 knots. Since this speed incurs the least total drag for lift-equal-weight flight, the airplane is operating at (L/D)ma,. Because of the particular manner in which parasite and induced drags vary with speed (parasite drag directly as the speed squared; i nduced drag inversely as the speed squared) the minimum total drag occurs when the induced and parasite drags are equal. The speed for minimum drag is an important reference for many items of airplane performance. One item previously ,presented related glide performance and lift-drag ratio. At the speed of 163 knots this airplane incurs a total drag of 778 lbs. while producing 12,000 lbs. of lift. These figures indicate a maximum lift-drag ratio of 15.4.and relate a glide ratio of 15.4.~ In addition, if this airplane were jet powered, the airplane would achieve maximum endurance at this airspeed for ' the specified altitude. If this airplane were propeller powered, the airplane would achieve maximum range at this airspeed for the specified altitude.\n\n(D) Point (D) is at an airspeed approximately 32 percent greater than the speed for (L/D),.,. Note that the parasite drag comprises 75 percent of the total drag at a speed of\n\n94\n\n215 knots. This point on the drag curve produces the highest proportion between velocity and drag and would be the point for maximum range if the airplane were jet powered. Because of the high proportion of parasite drag at this point the long range jet airplane has great preference for great aerodynamic cleanness and less demand for a high aspect ratio than the long range propeller powered airplane. (E) At a speed of 400 knots, the i nduced\n\ndrag is an extremely small part of the total drag and parasite drag predominates.\n\n(P) As the airplane reaches very high flight speeds, the drag rises in a very rapid fashion due to compressibility. Since the generalized equation for parasite drag does not account for compressibility effects, the actual drag rise is typified by the dashed line.\n\nThe airplane drag curve shown in figure 1.34 is particular to one weight, configuration, and altitude in level flight. Any change in one of these variables will affect the specific drags at specific velocities.\n\nThe airplane drag curve is a major factor in many items of airplane performance. Range, endurance, climb, maneuver, landing, takeoff, etc., performance are based on some relationship involving the airplane drag curve.", + "recall": 0.8910891089108911, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OO-BOT-80 BASIC AE,RODYNAMlCS \n\n(C) The point of minimum total drag occurs at a speed of 163 knots. Since this speed in- curs the least total drag for lift-equal-weight flight, the airplane is operating at (L/D)ma,. Because of the particular manner in which parasite and induced drags vary with speed (parasite drag directly as the speed squared; induced drag inversely as the speed squared) the minimum total drag occurs when the in- duced and parasite drags are equal. The speed for minimum drag is an important reference for many items of airplane performance. One item previously ,presented related glide per- formance and lift-drag ratio. At the speed of 163 knots this airplane incurs a total drag of 778 lbs. while producing 12,000 lbs. of lift. These figures indicate a maximum lift-drag ratio of 15.4.and relate a glide ratio of 15.4.~ In addition, if this airplane were jet powered, the airplane would achieve maximum en- durance at this airspeed for ‘ the specified alti- tude. If this airplane were propeller powered, the airplane would achieve maximum range at this airspeed for the specified altitude. \n\n215 knots. This point on the drag curve pro- duces the highest proportion between velocity and drag and would be the point for maximum range if the airplane were jet powered. Be- cause of the high proportion of parasite drag at this point the long range jet airplane has great preference for great aerodynamic clean- ness and less demand for a high aspect ratio than the long range propeller powered airplane. \n\n(E) At a speed of 400 knots, the induced drag is an extremely small part of the total drag and parasite drag predominates. \n\n(P) As the airplane reaches very high flight speeds, the drag rises in a very rapid fashion due to compressibility. Since the generalized equation for parasite drag does not account for compressibility effects, the actual drag rise is typified by the dashed line. The airplane drag curve shown in figure 1.34 \n\ntypified by the dashed line. The airplane drag curve shown in figure 1.34 is particular to one weight, configuration, and altitude in level flight. Any change in one of these variables will affect the specific drags at specific velocities. The airplane drag curve is a major factor in \n\nspecific velocities. The airplane drag curve is a major factor in many items of airplane performance. Range, endurance, climb, maneuver, landing, takeoff, etc., performance are based on some relation- ship involving the airplane drag curve. \n\n(D) Point (D) is at an airspeed approxi- mately 32 percent greater than the speed for (L/D),.,. Note that the parasite drag com- prises 75 percent of the total drag at a speed of \n\n94" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.004928125802894125, + "doc_id": "fd756aef7569f209ff5a0522c5c6569da7b8a8c4bfcee9cdde6318d5b0848090", + "edit_distance": 0.9878048780487805, + "f1_score": 0.07017543859649122, + "meteor": 0.09361009361009363, + "precision": 0.03636363636363636, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS 00-BOT-80 TABLE OF CONTENTS\n\nPace\n\n| Spinrecovety..; ................................................... Slipstream rotatmn. ................................................ Cross wind takeoff and landing. ................................... Asymmetrical power. ............................................... | 291 294 294 294 |\n|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|----------------------|\n| LATERAL STABILITY AND CONTROL | |\n| LATERAL STABILITY, ........................................... | 294 |\n| Definlttons .................................................... ....... | 295 |\n| CONTRIBUTION OF THE AIRPLANE COMPONENTS. | 295 |\n| Wing.........~.........~ | 298 |\n| Fuselage and wmg powton, ................................................................................... Sweepback ......................................................... | 298 |\n| Vertical tail. ........................................................ | 298 298 |\n| LATERAL DYNAMIC | |\n| EFFECTS, ................................ | 299 |\n| Directional divergence Spiral divergence Dutch roll | |\n| CONTROL IN ROLL .............................................. | 300 |\n| . . Rolhsg motmn of an airplane. ...................................... Roliing performance, .............................................. | 300 301 305 |\n| Critical requirements. .............................................. | |\n| MISCELLANEOUS STABILITY PROBLEMS | |\n| LANDING GEAR CONFIGURATIONS ......................... | 305 |\n| Tail wheel type Tricyde type Bicycle type | |\n| SPINS AND PROBLEMS OF SPIN RECOVERY ................ | 307 |\n| Principal prospin moments Fundamental principle of recovery Effect of configuration ......................................................... | 313 |\n| PITCH-UP., | |\n| Definition Contribution of the airplane components | |\n| EFFECTS OF HIGH MACH NUMBER.. | 313 |\n| Longitudinal stability and control Directional stability Dynamic stability and damping | |\n| PILOT INDUCED OSCILLATIONS.. Pilot.control system-airplane coupling High q aed low stick force stability | 314 |\n| | \\_. |\n| ROLL COUPLING. Inertia | 315 |\n| and aerodynamic coupling Inertia and wind axes Natural pitch, yaw, and coupled pitch-yaw frequencies Critical roll rates Autorotative rolling Operating limitations | |\n| HELICOPTER STABILITY AND CONTROL. Rotor gyroscopic effects Cyclic and collective pitch | |\n| | 319 |\n| Lon f e of itudinal, lateral, and directional control Ang attack and velocity stability Dynamic stability | |\n\nxiii", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-BOT-80 TABLE OF CONTENTS \n\nxiii" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.865280324772981, + "doc_id": "b1d8a7ac1b90c55b9fa35bef15d6602980520a6b2779536c5748ab6e854a5d1d", + "edit_distance": 0.8155940594059405, + "f1_score": 0.9222011385199241, + "meteor": 0.6422852002322297, + "precision": 0.9455252918287937, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS OD-8OT-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS\n\nmatched with a planformwhose chord is distributed in an elliptical fashion (the elliptical wing), each square foot of area along the span produces exactly the same lift pressure. The elliptical wing planform then has each section of the wing working at exactly the same local lift coefhcient and the i nduced downflow at the wing is uniform throughout the span. In the aerodynamic sense, the elliptical. wing is the most efficient planform because the uniformity of lift coefficient and downwash incurs rbt iea$t induced drag for a given aspect ratio. The merit of any wing @anform is then measured by the closeness with which the distribution of lift coefficient and downwash approach that of the elliptical planform.\n\nThe effect of the elliptical planform is illustrated in figure 1.32 by the plot of local lift coefficient to wing lift coefficient, f! G' versus scm:spnn L.' CY.ICG. Tbac e!liptical ,4;..t,or, wing p* duces a constant value of$=J.O throughout the span from root to tip.' Thus, the local section angle of attack, LYE, nd local a i nduced angle of attack, CY,, re constant a throughout the span. If the planform area distribution is anything other than elliptical, it may be expected that the local section and induced angles of attack will not be constant along the span. A planform previously considered is the\n\nsimple rectangular wing which has a taper ratio of 1.0. A characteristic of the rectangular wing is a strong vortex at the tip with local downwash behind the wing which is high at the tip and low at the root. This large nonuniformity in downwash causes similar variation in the local induced angles of attack along the span. At the tip, where high downwash exists, the local i nduced angle of attack is greater than the average for the wing. Since the wing angle of attack is composed of the sum of at and aor a large local (x, reduces the local a0 creating low local lift coefficients at the tip. ' I he reverse is true at the root of the rectangular wing where low local downwash\n\n76\n\nexists. This situation creates an induced angle of attack at the root which is less than the average for the wing and a local section angle of attack higher than the average for the wing. The result is shown by the graph of figure 1.32 which depicts a local lift coefficient at the root almost 20 percent greater than the wing lift coefficient.\n\nThe effect of the rectangular planform may be appreciated by matching a near elliptical lift distribution with a planform with a constant chord. The chords near ' the tip develop less lift pressure than the root and consequently have lower section lift coe&cients. The great nonuniformity of local lift coefficient along the span implies that some sections carry .more than their share of the load while others carry less than their share of the load. Hence, for a given aspect ratio, the rectangular planform will be less efficient -t--L. -11:. -!-~I LlLill UK C' lqJLlCal wing. For exampie, a rectangular wing of AR=6 would have 16 percent higher i nduced angle of attack for the wing and 5 percent higher i nduced drag than an elliptical wing of the same aspect ratio.\n\nAt the other extreme of taper is the pointed wing which has a taper ratio of zero. The extremely small parcel of area at the pointed tip is not capable of holding the main tip vortex at the tip and a drastic change in downwash distribution results. The pointed wing has greatest downwash at the root and this downwash decreases toward the tip. In the i mmediate vicinity of the pointed tip, an upwash is encountered which indicates that negative induced angles of attack exist in this area. The resulting variation of local lift coefficient shows low cr at the root and very high c, at the tip. This effect may be appreciated by realizing that the wide chords at the root produce low lift pressures while the very narrow chords toward the tip are subject to very high lift pressures.. The variation of 2 throughout the span of the wing of L taper ratio==0 is shown on the graph of figure", + "recall": 0.9, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OD-8OT-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS \n\nexists. This situation creates an induced angle of attack at the root which is less than the average for the wing and a local section angle of attack higher than the average for the wing. The result is shown by the graph of figure 1.32 which depicts a local lift coefficient at the root almost 20 percent greater than the wing lift coefficient. \n\nmatched with a planformwhose chord is dis- tributed in an elliptical fashion (the elliptical wing), each square foot of area along the span produces exactly the same lift pressure. The elliptical wing planform then has each section of the wing working at exactly the same local lift coefhcient and the induced downflow at the wing is uniform throughout the span. In the aerodynamic sense, the elliptical. wing is the most efficient planform because the uni- formity of lift coefficient and downwash incurs rbt iea$t induced drag for a given aspect ratio. The merit of any wing @anform is then meas- ured by the closeness with which the distribu- tion of lift coefficient and downwash approach that of the elliptical planform. The effect of the elliptical planform is illus- \n\nThe effect of the rectangular planform may be appreciated by matching a near elliptical lift distribution with a planform with a constant chord. The chords near ‘ the tip develop less lift pressure than the root and consequently have lower section lift coe&- cients. The great nonuniformity of local lift coefficient along the span implies that some sections carry .more than their share of the load while others carry less than their share of the load. Hence, for a given aspect ratio, the rectangular planform will be less efficient -t-- -L. -11:. -!-~I LlLill UK C ‘ lqJLlCal wing. For exampie, a rectangular wing of AR=6 would have 16 percent higher induced angle of attack for the wing and 5 percent higher induced drag than an elliptical wing of the same aspect ratio. \n\nthat of the elliptical planform. The effect of the elliptical planform is illus- trated in figure 1.32 by the plot of local lift coefficient to wing lift coefficient, f! G’ versus scm:spnn L.“CY.ICG. ,4;..t,or, Tbac e!liptical wing p* duces a constant value of$=J.O throughout the span from root to tip.‘ Thus, the local section angle of attack, LYE, and local induced angle of attack, CY,, are constant throughout the span. If the planform area distribution is anything other than elliptical, it may be ex- pected that the local section and induced angles of attack will not be constant along the span. \n\nAt the other extreme of taper is the pointed wing which has a taper ratio of zero. The extremely small parcel of area at the pointed tip is not capable of holding the main tip vortex at the tip and a drastic change in down- wash distribution results. The pointed wing has greatest downwash at the root and this downwash decreases toward the tip. In the immediate vicinity of the pointed tip, an upwash is encountered which indicates that negative induced angles of attack exist in this area. The resulting variation of local lift coefficient shows low cr at the root and very high c, at the tip. This effect may be appre- ciated by realizing that the wide chords at the root produce low lift pressures while the very narrow chords toward the tip are sub- ject to very high lift pressures.. The varia- tion of 2 throughout the span of the wing of L taper ratio==0 is shown on the graph of figure \n\nA planform previously considered is the simple rectangular wing which has a taper ratio of 1.0. A characteristic of the rectangular wing is a strong vortex at the tip with local downwash behind the wing which is high at the tip and low at the root. This large non- uniformity in downwash causes similar varia- tion in the local induced angles of attack along the span. At the tip, where high downwash exists, the local induced angle of attack is greater than the average for the wing. Since the wing angle of attack is composed of the sum of at and aor a large local (x, reduces the local a0 creating low local lift coefficients at the tip. ‘ Ihe reverse is true at the root of the rectangular wing where low local downwash \n\n76" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8684935228323236, + "doc_id": "def1abb6fe5361b7671912def0abe602c442e6ef3ba4bcbc78294eea8400b667", + "edit_distance": 0.8663663663663663, + "f1_score": 0.9404517453798769, + "meteor": 0.6709982048289258, + "precision": 0.9621848739495799, + "pred_md": "the turboprop powerplant is rated by an ' equivalent shaft horsepower.'\n\n\n\nwhere ESHP=equivalent shaft horsepower EHP= brake horsepower, or shaft horsepower applied to the propeller T,= jet thrust, lbs. V=flight velocity, knots, TAS ' 1s propeller = efficiency\n\nThe gas turbine engine is capable of processing large quantities of air and can produce high output power for a given engine size. Thus, the principal advantage of the turboprop powerplant is the high specific power output, high power per engine weight and high power per engine size.\n\nThe gas turbine engine must operate at quite high rotative speed to process large airflows and produce high power. However, high rotative speeds are not conducive to high propeller efficiency because of compressibility effects. A large reduction of shaft speed must be provided in order to match the powerplant and the propeller. The reduction gearing must provide a propeller shaft speed which can be utilized effectively by the propeller and, because of the high rotative speeds of the turbine, gearing ratios of 6 to 15 may be typical. The transmission of large shaft horsepower with such high gearing involves considerable desi,gn problems to provide good service life. The problems of such gearing were one of the greatest difficulties in the development of turboprop powerplants.\n\nThe governing apparatus for the turboprop powerplant must account for one additional variable, the propeller blade angle. If the propeller is governed separately from the turbine, an interaction can exist between the engine and propeller governers and various ' hunting,' overspeed, and overtemperature conditions are possible. For this reason, the\n\n## NAVWEPS Oo-ROT-30 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE\n\nengine-propeller combination is operated at a constant RPM throughout the major range of output power and the principal variables ofcontrol are fuel flow and propeller blade angle. In the major range of power output, the throttle commands a certain fuel flow and the propeller blade angle adjusts to increase the propeller load and remain at the governed speed.\n\nThe operating limitations of the turboprop powerplant are quite similar in nature to the operating limitations of the turbojet engine. Generally, the turbine temperature limnations are the most critical items. In addition, overspeed conditions can produce overstress of the gearing and propeller as well as overstress of the turbine section.\n\nThe performance of the turboprop illustrates the typical advantages of the propeller-engine combination. Higher propulsive efficiency and high thrust and low speeds provide the characteristic of range, endurance, and takeoff performance superior to the turbojet. As is typical of all propeller equipped powerplants, the power available is nearly constant with speed. Because the power from the jet thrust depends on velocity, the power available increases slightly with speed. However, the thrust available decreases with speed. The equivalent shaft horsepower, ESHP, of the turboprop is affected by mass ,flow and inlet temperature in fashion similar to that of the turbojet. Thus, the ESHP will vary with altitude much like the thrust output of the turbojet because the higher altitude produces much lower density and engine mass flow. The gas turbine-propeller combination utilizes a number of turbine stages to extract shaft power from the exhaust gases and, as high compressor inlet temperatures reduce the fuel flow allowable within turbine temperature limits, hot days will cause a noticeable loss of output power. Generally, the turboprop is just as sensitive, if not more sensitive, to compressor inlet air temperature as the turbojet engine.\n\n133", + "recall": 0.9196787148594378, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS Oo-ROT-30 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE \n\nthe turboprop powerplant is rated by an “equivalent shaft horsepower.” \n\nengine-propeller combination is operated at a constant RPM throughout the major range of output power and the principal variables ofcon- trol are fuel flow and propeller blade angle. In the major range of power output, the throttle commands a certain fuel flow and the propeller blade angle adjusts to increase the propeller load and remain at the governed speed. The operating limitations of the turboprop \n\nspeed. The operating limitations of the turboprop powerplant are quite similar in nature to the operating limitations of the turbojet engine. Generally, the turbine temperature limnations are the most critical items. In addition, over- speed conditions can produce overstress of the gearing and propeller as well as overstress of the turbine section. \n\n- where ESHP=equivalent shaft horsepower \n\n- EHP= brake horsepower, or shaft horse- power applied to the propeller \n\n- T,= jet thrust, lbs. \n\n- V=flight velocity, knots, TAS \n\n- ‘ 1s = propeller efficiency \n\n$$T,y ESHP= BHP+325vp $$\n\nwhere ESHP=equivalent shaft horsepower \n\nThe gas turbine engine is capable of processing large quantities of air and can produce high output power for a given engine size. Thus, the principal advantage of the turboprop powerplant is the high specific power output, high power per engine weight and high power per engine size. \n\nThe performance of the turboprop illustrates the typical advantages of the propeller-engine combination. Higher propulsive efficiency and high thrust and low speeds provide the characteristic of range, endurance, and takeoff performance superior to the turbojet. As is typical of all propeller equipped powerplants, the power available is nearly constant with speed. Because the power from the jet thrust depends on velocity, the power available in- creases slightly with speed. However, the thrust available decreases with speed. The equivalent shaft horsepower, ESHP, of the turboprop is affected by mass ,flow and inlet temperature in fashion similar to that of the turbojet. Thus, the ESHP will vary with altitude much like the thrust output of the turbojet because the higher altitude produces much lower density and engine mass flow. The gas turbine-propeller combination utilizes a number of turbine stages to extract shaft power from the exhaust gases and, as high compressor inlet temperatures reduce the fuel flow allowable within turbine temperature limits, hot days will cause a noticeable loss of output power. Generally, the turboprop is just as sensitive, if not more sensitive, to com- pressor inlet air temperature as the turbojet engine. \n\nThe gas turbine engine must operate at quite high rotative speed to process large airflows and produce high power. However, high rotative speeds are not conducive to high propeller efficiency because of compressibility effects. A large reduction of shaft speed must be provided in order to match the powerplant and the propeller. The reduction gearing must provide a propeller shaft speed which can be utilized effectively by the propeller and, be- cause of the high rotative speeds of the turbine, gearing ratios of 6 to 15 may be typical. The transmission of large shaft horsepower with such high gearing involves considerable desi,gn problems to provide good service life. The problems of such gearing were one of the greatest difficulties in the development of turboprop powerplants. The governing apparatus for the turboprop \n\nturboprop powerplants. The governing apparatus for the turboprop powerplant must account for one additional variable, the propeller blade angle. If the propeller is governed separately from the tur- bine, an interaction can exist between the engine and propeller governers and various “hunting,” overspeed, and overtemperature conditions are possible. For this reason, the \n\n133" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4768255116380303, + "doc_id": "0a5a8eea938173c5aebf6c4a215de7ff90377433e4417567120fc2e5109f4800", + "edit_distance": 0.5607476635514018, + "f1_score": 0.6778523489932886, + "meteor": 0.8188014094671676, + "precision": 0.5233160621761658, + "pred_md": "VOR-DME\n\nDME\n\n## VFR FLYWAY PLANNING CHARTS\n\n## GENERAL INFORMATION\n\nVFR Flyway Planning Charts are printed on the reverse sides of the Baltimore-Washington, Charlotte, Chicago, Cincinnati, Dallas-Ft. Worth, Denver, Detroit, Houston, Las Vegas, Los Angeles, Miami, Orlando, New Orleans, Phoenix, St. Louis, Salt Lake City, San Diego, San Francisco and Seattle Terminal Area Charts (TACs). The scale is 1:250,000, with area of coverage the same as the associated TACs. Flyway Planning Charts depict flight paths and altitudes recommended for use to by-pass areas heavily traversed by large turbine-powered aircraft. Ground references on these charts provide a guide for visual orientation. VFR Flyway Planning charts are designed for use in conjunction with TACs and are not to be used for navigation.\n\n## AIRPORTS\n\n## Landplane\n\nNo distinction is made between airports with fuel and those without fuel. Runways may be exaggerated to clearly portray the pattern. Hardsurfaced runways which are closed but still exist are included in the charted pattern.\n\nFAR 91 - Fixed wing special VFR operations prohibited.\n\n## RADIO AIDS TO NAVIGATION\n\nVHF Omni-Directional Radio Range (VOR)\n\nVORTAC\n\nExample: DME co-located at an airport.\n\n## Landplane (continued)\n\n(Pvt): Non-public use having emergency or landmark value.\n\n'OBJECTIONABLE': This airport may adversely affect airspace use.\n\nABANDONED - Depicted for landmark value or to prevent confusion with an adjacent usable landing area. Only portrayed beneath or close to the VFR flyway routes or requested by the FAA. (Normally at least 3000' paved).\n\nNon-Directional Radio Beacon (NDB)\n\nNDB-DME\n\nNAVAIDS Used to Define Class Airspace\n\n43\n\nFAA Chart Users' Guide - VFR Chart Symbology - Flyway Planning Chars", + "recall": 0.9619047619047619, + "true_md": "## GENERAL INFORMATION\n\nVFR Flyway Planning Charts are printed on the reverse sides of the Baltimore-Washington, Charlotte, Chicago, Cincin- nati, Dallas-Ft. Worth, Denver, Detroit, Houston, Las Vegas, Los Angeles, Miami, Orlando, New Orleans, Phoenix, St. Lou- is, Salt Lake City, San Diego, San Francisco and Seattle Terminal Area Charts (TACs). The scale is 1:250,000, with area of coverage the same as the associated TACs. Flyway Planning Charts depict flight paths and altitudes recommended for use to by-pass areas heavily traversed by large turbine-powered aircraft. Ground references on these charts provide a guide for visual orientation. VFR Flyway Planning charts are designed for use in conjunction with TACs and are not to be used for navigation.\n\n43\n\nFAA Chart Users’ Guide - VFR Chart Symbology - Flyway Planning Chars\n\n## AIRPORTS\n\n## VFR FLYWAY PLANNING CHARTS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8608260711790489, + "doc_id": "a31eddb67599ff4a07dc89e97c026e608b1574a45cf7a0f6bdbf1266d15f9678", + "edit_distance": 0.5863874345549738, + "f1_score": 0.9419354838709677, + "meteor": 0.8301033548996887, + "precision": 0.9700996677740864, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS 00-ROT-80\n\n## OPERATING STRENGTH LIMITATIONS\n\ndue to the gust condition are higher. This is explained by the fact that essentially the same lift change acts on the lighter mass. The high accelerations and inertia forces magnify the impression of the magnitude of turbulence. If this same airplane encounters the gust condition at higher than ordinary gross weight, the accelerations due to the gust condition are lower, i.e., the same lift change acts on the gteatet mass. Since the pilot primarily senses the degree of turbulence by the resulting accelerations and inertia forces, this effect can produce a very misleading impression.\n\nThe effect of airspeed and altitude on the gust load factor is important from the standpoint of flying operations. The effect of altitude is related by the term &, which would related that an airplane flying at a given EAS at 40,000 ft. (c=O.25) would experience a gust load factor increment only one-half as great as at sea level. This effect results because the true airspeed is twice as great and only one-half the change in angle of attack occurs for a given gust velocity. The effect of airspeed is illustrated by the linear variation of gust increment with equivalent airspeed. Such a variation emphasizes the effect of gusts at high flight speeds and the probability of structural damage at excessive speeds in turbulence.\n\nThe operation of any aircraft is subject to specific operating strength limitations. A single large overstress may cause structural failure or damage severe enough to require costly overhaul. Less severe overstress repeated for sufficient time will cause fatigue cracking and require replacement of parts to prevent subsequent failure. A combat airplane need not be operated in a manner like the ' little old lady from Pasadena' driving to church on Sunday but each aircraft type has strength capability only specific to the mission requirement. Operating limitations must be given due regard.\n\n334\n\n## THE V-B OR V-g DIAGRAM\n\nThe operating flight strength limitations of an airplane are presented in the form of a V-' -n or V-g diagram. This chart usually is included in the aircraft flight handbook in the section dealing with operating limitations. A typical V-n diagram is shown in figure 5.3. The V-n diagram presented in figure 5.3 is intended to present the most important general features of such a diagram and does not necessarily represent the characteristics of any particular airplane. Each airplane type has its own particular V-n diagram with specific V' s and n' s,\n\nThe flight operating strength of an airplane is presented on a graph whose horizontal scale is airspeed (V) and vertical scale is load factor (n). The presentation of the airplane strength is contingent on four factors being known: (I) the aircraft gross weight, (2) the configuration of the aircraft (clean, external stores, flaps and landing gear position, etc.), (3) symmetry of loading (since a rolling pullout at high speed can reduce the structural limits to approximately two-thirds of the symmetrical load limits) and (4) the applicable altitude. A change in any one of these four factors can cause important changes in operating limits.\n\nFor the airplane shown, the positive limit load factor is 7.5 and the, positive ultimate load factor is Il.25 (7.5x1.5)For negative lift flight conditions the negative' limit load factor is 3.0 and the negative ultimate load factor is 4.5 (3.0x1.5). The limrt airspeed is stated as 575 knots while the wing level stall speed is apparently 100 knots.\n\nFigure 5.4 provides supplementary information to illustrate the significance of the V-n diagram of figure 5.3. The lines of maximum lift capa' bility are the first points of importance on the' V-n diagram. The subject aircraft is capable bf developing no more than one positive ' g' at 100 knots, the wing level stall speed of the airplane. Since the maximum load faztor varies with the square of the aitspeed,", + "recall": 0.9153605015673981, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-ROT-80 OPERATING STRENGTH LIMITATIONS \n\n## THE V-B OR V-g DIAGRAM\n\ndue to the gust condition are higher. This is explained by the fact that essentially the same lift change acts on the lighter mass. The high accelerations and inertia forces magnify the impression of the magnitude of turbulence. If this same airplane encounters the gust condition at higher than ordinary gross weight, the accelerations due to the gust condition are lower, i.e., the same lift change acts on the gteatet mass. Since the pilot primarily senses the degree of turbulence by the resulting accelerations and inertia forces, this effect can produce a very misleading impression. \n\nThe operating flight strength limitations of an airplane are presented in the form of a V- ‘ -n or V-g diagram. This chart usually is included in the aircraft flight handbook in the section dealing with operating limitations. A typical V-n diagram is shown in figure 5.3. The V-n diagram presented in figure 5.3 is intended to present the most important general features of such a diagram and does not neces- sarily represent the characteristics of any par- ticular airplane. Each airplane type has its own particular V-n diagram with specific V ’ s and n ’ s, The flight operating strength of an airplane \n\nThe effect of airspeed and altitude on the gust load factor is important from the stand- point of flying operations. The effect of alti- tude is related by the term &, which would related that an airplane flying at a given EAS at 40,000 ft. (c=O.25) would experience a gust load factor increment only one-half as great as at sea level. This effect results be- cause the true airspeed is twice as great and only one-half the change in angle of attack occurs for a given gust velocity. The effect of airspeed is illustrated by the linear variation of gust increment with equivalent airspeed. Such a variation emphasizes the effect of gusts at high flight speeds and the probability of structural damage at excessive speeds in turbu- lence. \n\nand n ’ s, The flight operating strength of an airplane is presented on a graph whose horizontal scale is airspeed (V) and vertical scale is load factor (n). The presentation of the airplane strength is contingent on four factors being known: (I) the aircraft gross weight, (2) the configura- tion of the aircraft (clean, external stores, flaps and landing gear position, etc.), (3) symmetry of loading (since a rolling pullout at high speed can reduce the structural limits to approxi- mately two-thirds of the symmetrical load limits) and (4) the applicable altitude. A change in any one of these four factors can cause important changes in operating limits. For the airplane shown, the positive limit \n\ncause important changes in operating limits. For the airplane shown, the positive limit load factor is 7.5 and the, positive ultimate load factor is Il.25 (7.5x1.5)- For negative lift flight conditions the negative ’ limit load factor is 3.0 and the negative ultimate load factor is 4.5 (3.0x1.5). The limrt airspeed is stated as 575 knots while the wing level stall speed is apparently 100 knots. \n\nThe operation of any aircraft is subject to specific operating strength limitations. A single large overstress may cause structural failure or damage severe enough to require costly overhaul. Less severe overstress re- peated for sufficient time will cause fatigue cracking and require replacement of parts to prevent subsequent failure. A combat airplane need not be operated in a manner like the “little old lady from Pasadena” driving to church on Sunday but each aircraft type has strength capability only specific to the mission require- ment. Operating limitations must be given due regard. \n\nFigure 5.4 provides supplementary informa- tion to illustrate the significance of the V-n diagram of figure 5.3. The lines of maximum lift capa ’ bility are the first points of importance on the’ V-n diagram. The subject aircraft is capable bf developing no more than one posi- tive “g” at 100 knots, the wing level stall speed of the airplane. Since the maximum load faztor varies with the square of the aitspeed, \n\n334" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.342104577056443, + "doc_id": "28f2a5b5a9513489f6a08c3a149cf1da8bd3addfce88ae8ef4f23cc86d8fad0b", + "edit_distance": 0.5666666666666667, + "f1_score": 0.787878787878788, + "meteor": 0.8827436299963773, + "precision": 0.65, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS oo-BDT-BD STABILITY AND CONTROL\n\n## BODY OF REVOLUTION IN PERFECT FLUID\n\nFigure 4.8. Body or Nacelle Contribution\n\nFigure 4.8. Body or Nacelle Contribution\n\n257", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS oo-BDT-BD STABILITY AND CONTROL \n\nFigure 4.8. Body or Nacelle Contribution \n\n257" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9600031686888539, + "doc_id": "cf8bc85a4dc5ac9708dc9a252ae259b7fb03e10306cec9a96af9808d4e568d3e", + "edit_distance": 0.9011532125205931, + "f1_score": 0.9900990099009901, + "meteor": 0.7499496859457889, + "precision": 0.9933774834437086, + "pred_md": "## EXPLANATION OF VFR TERMS AND SYMBOLS\n\nThis chapter covers the Sectional Aeronautical Chart (Sectional). These charts include the most current data at a scale of (1:500,000) which is large enough to be read easily by pilots flying by sight under Visual Flight Rules. Sectionals are named after a major city within its area of coverage.\n\nThe chart legend includes aeronautical symbols and information about drainage, terrain, the contour of the land, and elevation. You can learn to identify aeronautical, topographical, and obstruction symbols (such as radio and television towers) by using the legend.\n\nA brief description next to a small black square indicates the exact location for many of the landmarks easily recognized from the air, such as stadiums, pumping stations, refineries, etc. A small black open circle with descriptive type indicates oil, gas or mineral wells. A small black circle with descriptive type indicates water, oil or gas tanks. The scale for some items may be increased to make them easier to read on the chart.\n\nAeronautical Information Services' charts are prepared in accordance with specifications of the Interagency Air Committee (IAC) and are approved by representatives of the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) and the Department of Defense (DoD).\n\n## WATER FEATURES (HYDROGRAPHY)\n\nWater features are depicted using two tones of blue, and are considered either \"Open Water\" or \"Inland Water.\" \"Open Water,\" a lighter blue tone, shows the shoreline limitations of all coastal water features at the average (mean) high water levels for oceans and seas. Light blue also represents the connecting waters like bays, gulfs, sounds and large estuaries.\n\nExceptionally large lakes like the Great Lakes, Great Salt Lake, and Lake Okeechobee, etc., are considered Open Water features. The Open Water tone extends inland as far as necessary to adjoin the darker blue \"Inland Water\" tones. All other bodies of water are marked as \"Inland Water\" in the darker blue tone.\n\n## LAND FEATURES (TERRAIN) AND OBSTRUCTIONS\n\nThe elevation and configuration of the Earth's surface is important to pilots. Our Aeronautical Information Specialists are devoted to showing the contour of the earth and any obstructions clearly and accurately on our charts. We use five differ -ent techniques: contour lines, shaded relief, color tints, obstruction symbols, and Maximum Elevation Figures (MEF).\n\n- 1. Contour lines join points of equal elevation. On Sectionals, basic contours are spaced at 500' intervals. Intermediate contours are typically at 250' intervals in moderately level or gently rolling areas. Auxiliary contours at 50', 100', 125', or 150' intervals occasionally show smaller relief features in areas of relatively low relief. The pattern of these lines and their spacing gives the pilot a visual concept of the terrain. Widely spaced contours represent gentle slopes, while closely spaced contours represent steep slopes.\n- 2. Shaded relief shows how terrain may appear from the air. Shadows are shown as if light is coming from the northwest, because studies have shown that our visual perception has been conditioned to this view.\n\n11\n\nFAA Chart Users' Guide - VFR Terms and Symbols", + "recall": 0.9868421052631579, + "true_md": "11\n\nFAA Chart Users’ Guide - VFR Terms and Symbols\n\n## EXPLANATION OF VFR TERMS AND SYMBOLS\n\n## WATER FEATURES (HYDROGRAPHY)\n\n## LAND FEATURES (TERRAIN) AND OBSTRUCTIONS\n\n- 2. Shaded relief shows how terrain may appear from the air. Shadows are shown as if light is coming from the northwest, because studies have shown that our visual perception has been conditioned to this view. \n\n- 1. Contour lines join points of equal elevation. On Sectionals, basic contours are spaced at 500' intervals. Intermediate contours are typically at 250' intervals in moderately level or gently rolling areas. Auxiliary contours at 50', 100', 125', or 150' intervals occasionally show smaller relief features in areas of relatively low relief. The pattern of these lines and their spacing gives the pilot a visual concept of the terrain. Widely spaced contours represent gentle slopes, while closely spaced contours represent steep slopes. \n\nThe elevation and configuration of the Earth's surface is important to pilots. Our Aeronautical Information Specialists are devoted to showing the contour of the earth and any obstructions clearly and accurately on our charts. We use five differ - ent techniques: contour lines, shaded relief, color tints, obstruction symbols, and Maximum Elevation Figures (MEF).\n\nExceptionally large lakes like the Great Lakes, Great Salt Lake, and Lake Okeechobee, etc., are considered Open Water features. The Open Water tone extends inland as far as necessary to adjoin the darker blue \"Inland Water\" tones. All other bodies of water are marked as \"Inland Water\" in the darker blue tone.\n\nWater features are depicted using two tones of blue, and are considered either \"Open Water\" or \"Inland Water.\" \"Open Water,\" a lighter blue tone, shows the shoreline limitations of all coastal water features at the average (mean) high water levels for oceans and seas. Light blue also represents the connecting waters like bays, gulfs, sounds and large estuaries.\n\nAeronautical Information Services' charts are prepared in accordance with specifications of the Interagency Air Committee (IAC) and are approved by representatives of the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) and the Department of Defense (DoD).\n\nA brief description next to a small black square indicates the exact location for many of the landmarks easily recognized from the air, such as stadiums, pumping stations, refineries, etc. A small black open circle with descriptive type indicates oil, gas or mineral wells. A small black circle with descriptive type indicates water, oil or gas tanks. The scale for some items may be increased to make them easier to read on the chart.\n\nThe chart legend includes aeronautical symbols and information about drainage, terrain, the contour of the land, and elevation. You can learn to identify aeronautical, topographical, and obstruction symbols (such as radio and television tow- ers) by using the legend.\n\nThis chapter covers the Sectional Aeronautical Chart (Sectional). These charts include the most current data at a scale of (1:500,000) which is large enough to be read easily by pilots flying by sight under Visual Flight Rules. Sectionals are named after a major city within its area of coverage." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8410184191266287, + "doc_id": "195ac54b4ba0b7932f9cfaaf42ea5173d4476914b7a9bab564a67c737deefa4a", + "edit_distance": 0.15454545454545454, + "f1_score": 0.9310344827586206, + "meteor": 0.8339275807479338, + "precision": 0.9566929133858267, + "pred_md": "dissipating requirements of the brakes. There will be a maximum design landing weight specified for each airpIane and this limitation must be respected because of critical landing loads, arresting loads, or brake requirements. Of course, any airplane will have a limiting touchdown rate of descent specified with the maximum landing weight and the principal landing load limitations will be defined by the combination. of gross weight and rate of descent at touchdown.\n\n(2) The surface winds must be considered because of the large effect of a headwind or tailwind OR the landing distance. In the case of the crosswind, the component of wind along the runway will be the effective headwind or tailwind velocity. Also, the crosswind component across the runway will define certain requirements of lateral control power. The airplane which exhibirs large dihedral effect at high lift coefficients is quite sensitive to crosswind and a limiting crosswind component will be defined for the configuration.\n\n- (3) Press.w~ dtitsde and tmpma~e will affect the landing distance because of the effect on the true airspeed for landing. Thus, pressure altitude and temperature must be considered to define the density altitude.\n- (4) The runway condition must be considered for its effect on landing distances. Runway slope of ordinary values will ordinarily favor selection of a runway for a favorable headwind at landing. The surface condition of the runway will determine braking effectiveness and ice or water on the runway may produce a considerable increase in the minimum landing distance.\n\nThus, preparation for the landing must include determination of the landing distance of the airplane and comparison with the runway length available. Use of the angle of attack indicator and the mirror landing system will assist the pilot in effecting touchdown at the desired location with the proper airspeed. Of\n\n## NAVWEPS OD-BOT-BO APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYING\n\ncourse, the landing is not completed until the airplane is slowed to turn off the runway. Control of the airpIane must be maintained after the touchdown and proper technique must be used to decelerate the airplane.\n\nTYPICAL ERRORS. There are many undesirable consequences when basic principles and specific procedures are not followed during the approach and landing. Some of the typical errors involved in landing accidents are outlined in the following discussion.\n\nThe steep, low power approach leads to an exce.rsive ate of descent and the possibility r of a hard landing. This is particularly the case for the modern, low aspect ratio, swept wing airplane configuration which incurs very large induced drag at low speeds and does not have very conventional flare characteristics. For this type of airplane in a steep, low power approach, an increased angle of attack without a change of power setting may not cause a reduction of rate of descent and may even increase the rate of descent at touchdown. For this reason, a moderate stabilized approach is necessary and the principal changes in rate of descent must be controlled by changes in power setting and principal changes in airspeed must be controlled by changes in angle of attack.\n\n' An excessive angle of attack during the approach and landing implies that the airplane is being operated at too low an airspeed. Of course, excessive angle of attack may cause the airplane to stall or spin and the low altitude may preclude recovery. Also, the low aspect ratio configuration at an excessively low airspeed will incur very high induced drag and will necessitate a high power setting or otherwise incur an excessive rate of descent. An additional problem is created by an excessive angle of attack for the airplane which exhibits a large dihedral effect at high lift coefficients. In this case, the airplane would be more sensitive to crosswind.s and adequate lateral control may not be available to effect a safe landing at a critical value of crosswind.", + "recall": 0.9067164179104478, + "true_md": "dissipating requirements of the brakes. There will be a maximum design landing weight specified for each airpIane and this limitation must be respected because of critical landing loads, arresting loads, or brake requirements. Of course, any air- plane will have a limiting touchdown rate of descent specified with the maximum land- ing weight and the principal landing load limitations will be defined by the combina- tion. of gross weight and rate of descent at touchdown. \n\n(2) The surface winds must be considered because of the large effect of a headwind or tailwind OR the landing distance. In the case of the crosswind, the component of wind along the runway will be the effective headwind or tailwind velocity. Also, the crosswind component across the runway will define certain requirements of lateral control power. The airplane which exhibirs large dihedral effect at high lift coefficients is quite sensitive to crosswind and a limiting crosswind component will be defined for the configuration. \n\n(3) Press.w~ dtitsde and tmpma~e will affect the landing distance because of the effect on the true airspeed for landing. Thus, pressure altitude and temperature must be considered to define the density altitude. (4) The runway condition must be con- \n\nbe considered to define the density altitude. (4) The runway condition must be con- sidered for its effect on landing distances. Runway slope of ordinary values will ordi- narily favor selection of a runway for a favorable headwind at landing. The surface condition of the runway will determine braking effectiveness and ice or water on the runway may produce a considerable increase in the minimum landing distance. Thus, preparation for the landing must in- \n\nin the minimum landing distance. Thus, preparation for the landing must in- clude determination of the landing distance of the airplane and comparison with the runway length available. Use of the angle of attack indicator and the mirror landing system will assist the pilot in effecting touchdown at the desired location with the proper airspeed. Of \n\ncourse, the landing is not completed until the airplane is slowed to turn off the runway. Control of the airpIane must be maintained after the touchdown and proper technique must be used to decelerate the airplane. TYPICAL ERRORS. There are many un- \n\nbe used to decelerate the airplane. TYPICAL ERRORS. There are many un- desirable consequences when basic principles and specific procedures are not followed during the approach and landing. Some of the typical errors involved in landing accidents are out- lined in the following discussion. \n\nThe steep, low power approach leads to an exce.rsive rate of descent and the possibility of a hard landing. This is particularly the case for the modern, low aspect ratio, swept wing airplane configuration which incurs very large induced drag at low speeds and does not have very conventional flare characteristics. For this type of airplane in a steep, low power approach, an increased angle of attack without a change of power setting may not cause a reduction of rate of descent and may even in- crease the rate of descent at touchdown. For this reason, a moderate stabilized approach is necessary and the principal changes in rate of descent must be controlled by changes in power setting and principal changes in airspeed must be controlled by changes in angle of attack. ‘ An excessive angle of attack during the ap- \n\nbe controlled by changes in angle of attack. ‘ An excessive angle of attack during the ap- proach and landing implies that the airplane is being operated at too low an airspeed. Of course, excessive angle of attack may cause the airplane to stall or spin and the low altitude may preclude recovery. Also, the low aspect ratio configuration at an excessively low air- speed will incur very high induced drag and will necessitate a high power setting or other- wise incur an excessive rate of descent. An additional problem is created by an excessive angle of attack for the airplane which exhibits a large dihedral effect at high lift coefficients. In this case, the airplane would be more sensi- tive to crosswind.s and adequate lateral control may not be available to effect a safe landing at a critical value of crosswind. \n\n## NAVWEPS OD-BOT-BO APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYING" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8702733272193778, + "doc_id": "a95967aad760d0fea6c2b39ba40d7f55abeccbc7dbe06206a2d32a6b0e485c0f", + "edit_distance": 0.710455764075067, + "f1_score": 0.9284467713787087, + "meteor": 0.7455583068399945, + "precision": 0.9568345323741008, + "pred_md": "The partial expansion of the gases through the turbine will provide the power to operate the engine. As. the gases are discharged from the turbine at point F, expansion will continue through the tailpipe nozzle. until atmospheric pressure is achieved in the exhaust. Thus, continued expansion in the jet nozzle will reduce the pressure and increase the volume of the unit weight of air to point G on the pressure volume diagram. As a result, the final jet velocity is greater than the inlet velocity and the momentum change necessary for the .development of thrust ha~s' been created. The area YFGA represents the work remaining to provide the expansion to jet velocity after the turbine has extracted the work requited to operate the compressor.\n\nOf course, the combustion chamber discharge could be more completely expanded through a larger turbine section and the net power could be used to operate a propeller rather than provide high exhaust gas velocity. For certain applications, the gas turbine-propeller combination could utilize the high power capability of the gas turbine with greater propulsive efficiency.\n\nFUNCTION OF THE COMPONENTS. Each of the engine components previously described will contribute some function affecting the efficiency and output of the turbojet engine. For this reason, each of these components should be analyzed to determine the requitements for satisfactory operating characteristics.\n\nThe i&t or &@er must be matched to the powerplant to provide the compressor entry with the required airflow. Generally, the compressor inlet must receive the required airflow at subsonic velocity with uniform distribution of velocity and direction at the compressor face. The diffuser must capture high energy air and deliver it at low Mach number uniformly to the compressor. When the inlet is along the sides of the fuselage, the edges of the inlet must be located such that the inlet receives only high energy air and provision must be made to dispose of the\n\n109\n\n## NAVWEPS OO-ROT-RO AtRPlANE PERFORMANCE\n\nboundary layer along the fuselage surface. At supersonic flight speeds, the diffuser must slow the air to subsonic with the least waste of energy in the inlet air and accomplish the process with a minimum of aerodynamic drag. In addition, the inlet must be efIicient and stable in operation throughout the range of angles of attack and Mach numbers of which the airplane is capable.\n\nThe operation of the compressor can be affected greatly by the uniformity of flow at the compressor face. When large variations in flow velocity and direction exist at the face of the axial compressor, the efficiency and stallsurge limits are lowered. Thus, the flight conditions which involve high angle of attack and high sideslip can cause deterioration of inlet performance.\n\nThe compreJ.ror &on s is one of the most important components of the turbojet engine. The compressor must furnish the combustion chamber with large quantities of high pressure air in a most efficient manner. Since the compressor of a jet engine has no direct cooling, the compression process takes place with a minimum of heat Ioss of the compressed air. Any friction loss or inefficiency of the compression process is manifested as an undesirable additional increase in the temperature of the compressor discharge air. Hence, compressor efficiency will determine the compressor power necessary to create the pressure rise of a given airflow and will affect the temperature change which can take place in the combustion chamber.\n\nThe compressor section of a jet engine may be an axial flow or centrifugal flow compressor. The centrifugal flow compressor has great utility, simplicity, and flexibility of operation. The operation of the centrifugal compressor requires relatively low inlet velocities and a plenum chamber or expansion space must be provided for the inlet. The impeller rotating at high speed receives the inlet air and ptovides high acceleration by virtue of centrifugal force. As a result, the air leaves the impeller", + "recall": 0.9016949152542373, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OO-ROT-RO AtRPlANE PERFORMANCE \n\nboundary layer along the fuselage surface. At supersonic flight speeds, the diffuser must slow the air to subsonic with the least waste of energy in the inlet air and accomplish the process with a minimum of aerodynamic drag. In addition, the inlet must be efIicient and stable in operation throughout the range of angles of attack and Mach numbers of which the airplane is capable. \n\nThe partial expansion of the gases through the turbine will provide the power to operate the engine. As. the gases are discharged from the turbine at point F, expansion will continue through the tailpipe nozzle. until atmospheric pressure is achieved in the exhaust. Thus, continued expansion in the jet nozzle will re- duce the pressure and increase the volume of the unit weight of air to point G on the pressure volume diagram. As a result, the final jet velocity is greater than the inlet velocity and the momentum change necessary for the .de- velopment of thrust ha~s ’ been created. The area YFGA represents the work remaining to provide the expansion to jet velocity after the turbine has extracted the work requited to operate the compressor. \n\nThe operation of the compressor can be af- fected greatly by the uniformity of flow at the compressor face. When large variations in flow velocity and direction exist at the face of the axial compressor, the efficiency and stall- surge limits are lowered. Thus, the flight conditions which involve high angle of attack and high sideslip can cause deterioration of inlet performance. The compreJ.ror s&on is one of the most im- \n\nOf course, the combustion chamber discharge could be more completely expanded through a larger turbine section and the net power could be used to operate a propeller rather than pro- vide high exhaust gas velocity. For certain applications, the gas turbine-propeller combi- nation could utilize the high power capability of the gas turbine with greater propulsive efficiency. \n\ninlet performance. The compreJ.ror s&on is one of the most im- portant components of the turbojet engine. The compressor must furnish the combustion chamber with large quantities of high pressure air in a most efficient manner. Since the com- pressor of a jet engine has no direct cooling, the compression process takes place with a minimum of heat Ioss of the compressed air. Any friction loss or inefficiency of the com- pression process is manifested as an undesirable additional increase in the temperature of the compressor discharge air. Hence, compressor efficiency will determine the compressor power necessary to create the pressure rise of a given airflow and will affect the temperature change which can take place in the combustion chamber. \n\nFUNCTION OF THE COMPONENTS. Each of the engine components previously de- scribed will contribute some function affecting the efficiency and output of the turbojet engine. For this reason, each of these components should be analyzed to determine the requite- ments for satisfactory operating characteristics. \n\nThe i&t or &@er must be matched to the powerplant to provide the compressor entry with the required airflow. Generally, the compressor inlet must receive the required air- flow at subsonic velocity with uniform dis- tribution of velocity and direction at the compressor face. The diffuser must capture high energy air and deliver it at low Mach number uniformly to the compressor. When the inlet is along the sides of the fuselage, the edges of the inlet must be located such that the inlet receives only high energy air and provision must be made to dispose of the \n\nThe compressor section of a jet engine may be an axial flow or centrifugal flow compressor. The centrifugal flow compressor has great util- ity, simplicity, and flexibility of operation. The operation of the centrifugal compressor requires relatively low inlet velocities and a plenum chamber or expansion space must be provided for the inlet. The impeller rotating at high speed receives the inlet air and pto- vides high acceleration by virtue of centrifugal force. As a result, the air leaves the impeller \n\n## FUNCTION OF THE COMPONENTS. Each of the engine components previously de-\n\n109" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.3056090128108268, + "doc_id": "0bbc1536bb50b9b010bb0d7470ead029258b7da4e7230c1c30e6e9e3f0b1a588", + "edit_distance": 0.8541666666666666, + "f1_score": 0.6461538461538462, + "meteor": 0.4918829371506834, + "precision": 0.875, + "pred_md": "FAA Chart Users' Guide - VFR Symbology - Sectional and Terminal Area Charts\n\n## AIRPORTS (Continued)\n\n## Airport Data Grouping\n\nNon Towered\n\nTowered\n\n24", + "recall": 0.5121951219512195, + "true_md": "## Airport Data Grouping\n\n(Pvt): Non-public use having emergency or landmark value.\n\n“OBJECTIONABLE”: This airport may adversely affect airspace use.\n\nFAA Chart Users’ Guide - VFR Symbology - Sectional and Terminal Area Charts\n\n24\n\nAIRPORTS (Continued)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8640742509844542, + "doc_id": "679c3dd69d9e8fa32f9380558ffb984385aef7fa1f9ecf16affa1cf5dd37e719", + "edit_distance": 0.5624227441285538, + "f1_score": 0.9283276450511946, + "meteor": 0.72349213551677, + "precision": 0.9444444444444444, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS 004OT-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS\n\n(3) During the landing phase where an excessive angle of attack (or excessively low airspeed) would create high i nduced drag and a high power setting to control rate of descent. A common error in the technique of landing modern conbgurations is a steep, low power approach to landing. The steep flight path requires considerable maneuver to flare the airplane for touchdown and necessitates a definite increase in angle of attack. Since the maneuver of the flare is a transient condition, the variation of both lift and drag with angle of attack must be considered. The lift and drag curves for a high aspect ratio wing (fig. 1.31) show continued strong increase in C, with 01 p to stall u and large changes in Co only at the point of stall. These characteristics imply that the high aspect ratio airplane is usually capable of flare without unusual results. The in-\\_\\_^\\_' ^ :----I.. -c \\_&-\\_\\_ . .-* n.-. 1 L o *we -..-: 1 C,LaLDC 1 ,l5~~ VI ~LL~C d 11 a p~ovmes the increase in lift to change the flight path direction without large changes in drag to decelerate the airplane.\n\nThe lift and drag curves for a low aspect ratio wing (fig. 1.31) show that at high angles of attack the lift curve is shallow, i.e., small changes in C, with increased a. This implies a large rotation needed to provide the lift to flare the airplane from a steep approach. The drag curve for the low aspect ratio wing shows large, powerful increases in C, with Cr. well below the stall. These lift and drag characteristics of the low aspect ratio wing create a distinct change in the flare characteristics. If a flare is attempted from a steep approach at low airspeed, the increased angle of attack may provide such increased induced drag and rapid loss of airspeed that the airplane does not actually flare. A possible result is that an even higher sink rate may be incurred. This is one factor favoring the use of the ' no-flare' or ' minimum flare' type landing technique for certain modern configurations. These same aerodynamic properties set the best glide speeds of low aspect ratio airplanes above the\n\n74\n\nspeed for (L/D)-. The additional speed provides a more favorable margin of flare capability for flameout landing from a steep glide path (low aspect ratio, low (L/D)-, low glide ratio).\n\nThe landing technique must emphasize proper control of angle of attack and rate of descent to prevent high sink rates and hard landings. As before, to be sure that it will not go unsaid, excessive airspeed at landing creates its own problems-excessive wear and tear on tires and brakes, excessive landing distance, etc.\n\nThe effect of the low aspect ratio planform of modern airplanes emphasizes the need for proper flying techniques at low airspeeds. Excessive angles of attack create enormous i nduced drag which can hinder takeoff performance and incur high sink rates at landing. Since such aircraft have intrinsic high minimum flying speeds, an excessively low angle of attack at takeoff or landing creates its own problems. These facts underscore the importance of a ' thread-the-needle,' professional flying technique.\n\n## EFFECT OF TAPER AND SWEEPBACK\n\nThe aspect ratio of a wing is the primary factor in determining the three-dimensional characteristics of the ordinary wing and its drag due to lift. However, certain local effects take place throughout the span of the wing and these effects are due to the distribution of area throughout the span. The distribution of lift along the span of a wing cannot have sharp discontinuities. (Nature just doesn' t arrange natural forces with sharp discontinuities.) The typical lift distribution is arranged in some elliptical fashion. A representative distribution of the lift per foot of span along the scan of a wing is shown in figure 1.32.\n\nThe natural distribution of lift along the span of a wing provides a basis for appreciating the effect of area distribution and taper along the span. If the elliptical lift distribution is", + "recall": 0.912751677852349, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 004OT-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS \n\nspeed for (L/D)-. The additional speed pro- vides a more favorable margin of flare capabil- ity for flameout landing from a steep glide path (low aspect ratio, low (L/D)-, low glide ratio). The landing technique must emphasize \n\n(3) During the landing phase where an excessive angle of attack (or excessively low airspeed) would create high induced drag and a high power setting to control rate of descent. A common error in the technique of landing modern conbgurations is a steep, low power approach to landing. The steep flight path requires considerable maneuver to flare the airplane for touchdown and necessitates a definite increase in angle of attack. Since the maneuver of the flare is a transient condition, the variation of both lift and drag with angle of attack must be considered. The lift and drag curves for a high aspect ratio wing (fig. 1.31) show con- tinued strong increase in C, with 01 up to stall and large changes in Co only at the point of stall. These characteristics imply that the high aspect ratio airplane is usually capable of flare without unusual results. The in- \\_\\_^\\_“^ :- ---I.. -c \\_&-\\_\\_ 1. .-* n.-. -..- : 1 C,LaLDC 111 a,l5~~ VI ~LL~CL do *we p~ovmes the increase in lift to change the flight path direction without large changes in drag to decelerate the airplane. The lift and drag curves for a low aspect \n\nratio). The landing technique must emphasize proper control of angle of attack and rate of descent to prevent high sink rates and hard landings. As before, to be sure that it will not go unsaid, excessive airspeed at landing creates its own problems-excessive wear and tear on tires and brakes, excessive landing distance, etc. \n\nThe effect of the low aspect ratio planform of modern airplanes emphasizes the need for proper flying techniques at low airspeeds. Excessive angles of attack create enormous induced drag which can hinder takeoff per- formance and incur high sink rates at landing. Since such aircraft have intrinsic high mini- mum flying speeds, an excessively low angle of attack at takeoff or landing creates its own problems. These facts underscore the im- portance of a “thread-the-needle,” professional flying technique. \n\ndecelerate the airplane. The lift and drag curves for a low aspect ratio wing (fig. 1.31) show that at high angles of attack the lift curve is shallow, i.e., small changes in C, with increased a. This implies a large rotation needed to provide the lift to flare the airplane from a steep approach. The drag curve for the low aspect ratio wing shows large, powerful increases in C, with Cr. well below the stall. These lift and drag charac- teristics of the low aspect ratio wing create a distinct change in the flare characteristics. If a flare is attempted from a steep approach at low airspeed, the increased angle of attack may provide such increased induced drag and rapid loss of airspeed that the airplane does not actually flare. A possible result is that an even higher sink rate may be incurred. This is one factor favoring the use of the “no-flare” or “minimum flare” type landing technique for certain modern configurations. These same aerodynamic properties set the best glide speeds of low aspect ratio airplanes above the \n\nThe aspect ratio of a wing is the primary factor in determining the three-dimensional characteristics of the ordinary wing and its drag due to lift. However, certain local effects take place throughout the span of the wing and these effects are due to the distribution of area throughout the span. The distribution of lift along the span of a wing cannot have sharp discontinuities. (Nature just doesn ’ t arrange natural forces with sharp discontinuities.) The typical lift distribution is arranged in some elliptical fashion. A representative dis- tribution of the lift per foot of span along the scan of a wing is shown in figure 1.32. The natural distribution of lift along the \n\nscan of a wing is shown in figure 1.32. The natural distribution of lift along the span of a wing provides a basis for appreciating the effect of area distribution and taper along the span. If the elliptical lift distribution is \n\n## EFFECT OF TAPER AND SWEEPBACK\n\n74" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8956923254529798, + "doc_id": "ec81b04b58686a04db70e931aa13fa4aafb07cf2913f7d4069ff46e329bef61b", + "edit_distance": 0.6978233034571063, + "f1_score": 0.9273356401384083, + "meteor": 0.7364429595841079, + "precision": 0.950354609929078, + "pred_md": "The plainjap shown in figure 1.17 is a simple hinged portion of the trailing edge. The effect of the camber added well aft on the chord causes a significant increase in cbr. In addition, the zero lift angle changes to a more negative value and the drag increases greatly. The split flap shown in figure 1.17 consist of plate deflected from the lower surface of the section and produces a slightly greater change in c I moT an th the plain flap. However, a much larger change in drag results from the great turbulent wake produced by this type flap. The greater drag' may not be such a disadvanrage when ir is realized that it may be advantageous to accomplish steeper landing approaches over obstacles or require higher power from the engine during approach (to minimize engine acceleration time for waveoR).\n\nThe slottedPap is similar to the plain flap but the gap between the main section and flap leading edge is given specific contours. High energy air from the lower surface is ducted to the flap upper surface. The high energy air from the slot accelerates the upper surface boundary layer and delays airflow separation to some higher lift coefficient. The slotted flap can cause much greater increases in c,,, than the plain or split flap and section drags are much lower.\n\nThe Fowkr&zp arrangement is similar to the slotted flap. The difference is that the deflected flap segment is moved aft along a set of tracks which increases the chord and effects an increase in wing area. The Fowler flap is characterized by large increases in c,,, with minimum changes in drag. ,.\n\nOne additional factor requiring consideration in a comparison of flap types is the aerodynamic twisting moments caused by the flap. Positive camber produces a nose down twisting moment-especially great when large camber is used well aft on the chord (an obvious implication is that flaps are not practical on a flying wing or tailless airplane). The deflection of a flap causes large nose down moments which create important twisting\n\n41\n\n## NAVWEPS OO-BOT-BO BASIC AERODYNAMICS\n\nloads on the structure and pitching moments that must be controlled with the horizontal tail. Unfortunately, the flap types producing the greatest increases in c,,usually cause the greatest twisting moments. The Fowler flap causes the greatest change in twisting moment while the split flap causes the least. This factor-along with mechanical complexity of the installation-may complicate the choice of a flap configuration.\n\nThe effectiveness of flaps on a wing configuration depend on many different factors. One important factor is the amount of the wing area affected by the flaps. Since a certain amount of the span is reserved for ailerons, the actual wing maximum lift properties will be less than that of the flapped two-dimensional section. If the basic wing has a low thickness, any type of flap will be less effective than on a wing of greater thickness. Sweepback of the wing can cause an additional significant reduction in the effectiveness of flaps.\n\nHigh lift devices applied to the leading edge of a section consist of slots, slats, and small amounts of local camber. The fixed slot in a wing conducts flow of high energy air into the boundary layer on the upper surface and delays airflow separation to some higher angle of attack and lift coefficient. Since the slot alone effects no change in camber, the higher maximum lift coefficient will be obtained at a higher angle of attack, i.e., the slot simply delays stall to a higher angle of attack. An automatic slot arrangement consists of a leading edge segment (slat) which is free to move on tracks. At low angles of attack the slat is held flush against the leading edge by the high positive local pressures. When the section is at high angles of attack, the high local suction pressures at the leading edge create a chordwise force forward to actuate the slat. The slot formed then allows the section to continue to a higher angle of attack and produce a clno. greater than that of the", + "recall": 0.9054054054054054, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OO-BOT-BO BASIC AERODYNAMICS \n\nloads on the structure and pitching moments that must be controlled with the horizontal tail. Unfortunately, the flap types producing the greatest increases in c,,- usually cause the greatest twisting moments. The Fowler flap causes the greatest change in twisting moment while the split flap causes the least. This factor-along with mechanical complexity of the installation-may complicate the choice of a flap configuration. The effectiveness of flaps on a wing con- \n\nof a flap configuration. The effectiveness of flaps on a wing con- figuration depend on many different factors. One important factor is the amount of the wing area affected by the flaps. Since a certain amount of the span is reserved for ailerons, the actual wing maximum lift prop- erties will be less than that of the flapped two-dimensional section. If the basic wing has a low thickness, any type of flap will be less effective than on a wing of greater thick- ness. Sweepback of the wing can cause an additional significant reduction in the effec- tiveness of flaps. \n\nThe plainjap shown in figure 1.17 is a simple hinged portion of the trailing edge. The effect of the camber added well aft on the chord causes a significant increase in cbr. In addi- tion, the zero lift angle changes to a more negative value and the drag increases greatly. The split flap shown in figure 1.17 consist of plate deflected from the lower surface of the section and produces a slightly greater change in c ImoT than the plain flap. However, a much larger change in drag results from the great turbulent wake produced by this type flap. The greater drag ’ may not be such a disadvan- rage when ir is realized that it may be advan- tageous to accomplish steeper landing ap- proaches over obstacles or require higher power from the engine during approach (to minimize engine acceleration time for waveoR). \n\nThe slottedPap is similar to the plain flap but the gap between the main section and flap leading edge is given specific contours. High energy air from the lower surface is ducted to the flap upper surface. The high energy air from the slot accelerates the upper surface boundary layer and delays airflow separation to some higher lift coefficient. The slotted flap can cause much greater increases in c,,, than the plain or split flap and section drags are much lower. The Fowkr&zp arrangement is similar to the \n\nare much lower. The Fowkr&zp arrangement is similar to the slotted flap. The difference is that the de- flected flap segment is moved aft along a set of tracks which increases the chord and effects an increase in wing area. The Fowler flap is characterized by large increases in c,,, with minimum changes in drag. ,. \n\nHigh lift devices applied to the leading edge of a section consist of slots, slats, and small amounts of local camber. The fixed slot in a wing conducts flow of high energy air into the boundary layer on the upper surface and delays airflow separation to some higher angle of attack and lift coefficient. Since the slot alone effects no change in camber, the higher maximum lift coefficient will be obtained at a higher angle of attack, i.e., the slot simply delays stall to a higher angle of attack. An automatic slot arrangement consists of a leading edge segment (slat) which is free to move on tracks. At low angles of attack the slat is held flush against the leading edge by the high positive local pressures. When the section is at high angles of attack, the high local suction pressures at the leading edge create a chordwise force forward to actuate the slat. The slot formed then allows the section to continue to a higher angle of attack and produce a clno. greater than that of the \n\nOne additional factor requiring consider- ation in a comparison of flap types is the aero- dynamic twisting moments caused by the flap. Positive camber produces a nose down twisting moment-especially great when large camber is used well aft on the chord (an obvious implication is that flaps are not prac- tical on a flying wing or tailless airplane). The deflection of a flap causes large nose down moments which create important twisting \n\n41" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8523094619735772, + "doc_id": "d19d96d0973b9ad334c810c6e1c85cc555cb7f7d98639ab065fda60bc364ebf0", + "edit_distance": 0.4016393442622951, + "f1_score": 0.92, + "meteor": 0.904048269085647, + "precision": 0.9078947368421053, + "pred_md": "## VFR SECTIONAL AND TERMINAL AREA CHARTS\n\n## GENERAL INFORMATION\n\nThe symbols shown in this section illustrate those that appear in the Sectional Aeronautical Charts (Sectionals) and Terminal Area Charts (TACs). The same symbology is utilized in VFR Flyway Planning Charts, Helicopter Route Charts and Caribbean Aeronautical Charts (CACs), however the scale of the symbols may be different due to the particular chart scales. Where symbology is distinctive to a given chart, examples and explanations are given in the additional examples.\n\n## AIRPORTS\n\nFuel not available or complete information is not available.\n\n23\n\nFAA Chart Users' Guide - VFR Symbology - Sectional and Terminal Charts", + "recall": 0.9324324324324325, + "true_md": "## VFR SECTIONAL AND TERMINAL AREA CHARTS\n\n## GENERAL INFORMATION\n\n## AIRPORTS\n\n23$^{ }$\n\nFAA Chart Users’ Guide - VFR Symbology - Sectional and Terminal Charts\n\nThe symbols shown in this section illustrate those that appear in the Sectional Aeronautical Charts (Sectionals) and Terminal Area Charts (TACs). The same symbology is utilized in VFR Flyway Planning Charts, Helicopter Route Charts and Caribbean Aeronautical Charts (CACs), however the scale of the symbols may be different due to the particular chart scales. Where symbology is distinctive to a given chart, examples and explanations are given in the additional examples." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.949720545293221, + "doc_id": "6ea07226b568a0b7613b3eab9771dec423b64fbd48215e73963565aa423cdb50", + "edit_distance": 0.15912897822445563, + "f1_score": 0.9801084990958411, + "meteor": 0.9689910589846948, + "precision": 0.9854545454545455, + "pred_md": "FAA Chart Users' Guide - IFR Enroute Terms\n\n## UNUSABLE AIRWAY/ROUTE SEGMENTS\n\nAirway/Route segments designated by the FAA as unusable will be depicted as shown below.\n\nUnusable Victor Route\n\nUnusable Victor Route\n\nPilots should not file a flight plan for or accept a clearance that includes navigation on any route or route segment depict -ed as unusable. Pilots using RNAV may request ATC clearance to fly point-to-point between valid waypoints or fixes, even those on routes depicted as unusable (refer to AC 90-108 for RNAV eligibility).\n\n## Coincident Airways/Routes with Unusable Segment\n\nWhen two airways/routes are coincident, but only one airway/route is designated as unusable, the following note indicating which airway the unusable symbology applies to will be placed in close proximity to the airway/route identifiers.\n\n## OFF ROUTE OBSTRUCTION CLEARANCE ALTITUDE (OROCA)\n\nThe Off Route Obstruction Clearance Altitude (OROCA) is depicted on IFR Enroute Low Altitude and Pacific charts and is represented in thousands and hundreds of feet above MSL. OROCAs are shown in every 30 x 30 minute quadrant on Area Charts, every one degree by one degree quadrant for IFR Enroute Low Altitude Charts - U.S. and every two degree by two degree quadrant on IFR Enroute Low Altitude Charts - Alaska. The OROCA represents the highest possible obstruction elevation including both terrain and other vertical obstruction data (towers, trees, etc.) bounded by the ticked lines of latitude/longitude including data 4 NM outside the quadrant. In this example the OROCA represents 12,500 feet.\n\nOROCA is computed just as the Maximum Elevation Figure (MEF) found on Visual Flight Rule (VFR) Charts except that it provides an additional vertical buffer of 1,000 feet in designated non-mountainous areas and a 2,000 foot vertical buffer in designated mountainous areas within the United States. For areas in Mexico and the Caribbean, located outside the U.S. Air Defense Identification Zone (ADIZ), the OROCA provides obstruction clearance with a 3,000 foot vertical buffer. Evaluating the area around the quadrant provides the chart user the same lateral clearance an airway provides should the line of intended flight follow a ticked line of latitude or longitude. OROCA does not provide for NAVAID signal cover -age, communication coverage and would not be consistent with altitudes assigned by Air Traffic Control. OROCAs can be found over all land masses and open water areas containing man-made obstructions (such as oil rigs).\n\n## MILITARY TRAINING ROUTES (MTRs)\n\nMilitary Training Routes (MTRs) are routes established for the conduct of low-altitude, high-speed military flight training (generally below 10,000 feet MSL at airspeeds in excess of 250 knots Indicated Air Speed). These routes are depicted in brown on IFR Enroute Low Altitude Charts, and are not shown on inset charts or on IFR Enroute High Altitude Charts. IFR Enroute Low Altitude Charts depict all IFR Military Training Routes (IRs) and VFR Military Training Routes (VRs), except those VRs that are entirely at or below 1,500 feet AGL.\n\nMTRs are identified by designators (IR-107, VR-134) which are shown in brown on the route centerline. Arrows are shown to indicate the direction of flight along the route. The width of the route determines the width of the line that is plotted on the chart:\n\n66", + "recall": 0.9748201438848921, + "true_md": "66\n\nAirway/Route segments designated by the FAA as unusable will be depicted as shown below.\n\nPilots should not file a flight plan for or accept a clearance that includes navigation on any route or route segment depict - ed as unusable. Pilots using RNAV may request ATC clearance to fly point-to-point between valid waypoints or fixes, even those on routes depicted as unusable (refer to AC 90-108 for RNAV eligibility).\n\nWhen two airways/routes are coincident, but only one airway/route is designated as unusable, the following note indicat- ing which airway the unusable symbology applies to will be placed in close proximity to the airway/route identifiers.\n\nThe Off Route Obstruction Clearance Altitude (OROCA) is depicted on IFR Enroute Low Altitude and Pacific charts and is represented in thousands and hundreds of feet above MSL. OROCAs are shown in every 30 x 30 minute quadrant on Area Charts, every one degree by one degree quadrant for IFR Enroute Low Altitude Charts - U.S. and every two de- gree by two degree quadrant on IFR Enroute Low Altitude Charts - Alaska. The OROCA represents the highest possible obstruction elevation including both terrain and other vertical obstruction data (towers, trees, etc.) bounded by the ticked lines of latitude/longitude including data 4 NM outside the quadrant. In this example the OROCA represents 12,500 feet.\n\nOROCA is computed just as the Maximum Elevation Figure (MEF) found on Visual Flight Rule (VFR) Charts except that it provides an additional vertical buffer of 1,000 feet in designated non-mountainous areas and a 2,000 foot vertical buffer in designated mountainous areas within the United States. For areas in Mexico and the Caribbean, located outside the U.S. Air Defense Identification Zone (ADIZ), the OROCA provides obstruction clearance with a 3,000 foot vertical buffer. Evaluating the area around the quadrant provides the chart user the same lateral clearance an airway provides should the line of intended flight follow a ticked line of latitude or longitude. OROCA does not provide for NAVAID signal cover - age, communication coverage and would not be consistent with altitudes assigned by Air Traffic Control. OROCAs can be found over all land masses and open water areas containing man-made obstructions (such as oil rigs).\n\nMilitary Training Routes (MTRs) are routes established for the conduct of low-altitude, high-speed military flight training (generally below 10,000 feet MSL at airspeeds in excess of 250 knots Indicated Air Speed). These routes are depicted in brown on IFR Enroute Low Altitude Charts, and are not shown on inset charts or on IFR Enroute High Altitude Charts. IFR Enroute Low Altitude Charts depict all IFR Military Training Routes (IRs) and VFR Military Training Routes (VRs), except those VRs that are entirely at or below 1,500 feet AGL.\n\nMTRs are identified by designators (IR-107, VR-134) which are shown in brown on the route centerline. Arrows are shown to indicate the direction of flight along the route. The width of the route determines the width of the line that is plotted on the chart:\n\n## MILITARY TRAINING ROUTES (MTRs)\n\nFAA Chart Users’ Guide - IFR Enroute Terms\n\n## OFF ROUTE OBSTRUCTION CLEARANCE ALTITUDE (OROCA)\n\n## Coincident Airways/Routes with Unusable Segment\n\n## UNUSABLE AIRWAY/ROUTE SEGMENTS\n\nUnusable Victor Route" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6017516768861083, + "doc_id": "273631c3fe9b91227a49ac5a7ba0afa5e74085bdc022396a826dbc0e2902677a", + "edit_distance": 0.5483870967741935, + "f1_score": 0.9444444444444444, + "meteor": 0.7609192251461988, + "precision": 0.9444444444444444, + "pred_md": "FAA Chart Users' Guide - IFR Enroute Symbology\n\n## AIRSPACE INFORMATION (Continued)\n\n## Enroute Chart Examples\n\nLow Enroute Chart\n\n78", + "recall": 0.9444444444444444, + "true_md": "## AIRSPACE INFORMATION (Continued)\n\n78\n\nFAA Chart Users’ Guide - IFR Enroute Symbology\n\n## Enroute Chart Examples Low Enroute Chart\n\nEnroute Chart Examples Low Enroute Chart" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9017519612062806, + "doc_id": "82fd40883d97672202e2673e595d57b4dc34dd3eec8711d41196a03d4915a5de", + "edit_distance": 0.9002624671916011, + "f1_score": 0.9227799227799228, + "meteor": 0.6093192344247306, + "precision": 0.952191235059761, + "pred_md": "by the local flow changes at these surfaces. Of course, the strength of the shock waves and the pressure j ump through the wave decreases rapidly with distance away from the airplane. While the pressure jump through the shock wave decreases with distance away from the surface, it does not disappear completely and a measurable-but very smallpressure will exist at a considerable distance from the airplane.\n\nSound is transmitted through the air as a series of very weak pressure waves. In the ordinary range of audible frequencies, the threshold of audibility for intensity of sound is for pressure waves with an approximate R.M.S. value of pressure as low as 0.0000002 psf. Within this same range of frequencies, the threshold of feeling for intensity of sound is for pressure values with an approximate R.M.S. value of pressure of 0.2 to 0.5 psf. Continuous sound at the threshold of feeling is of the intensity to cause painful hearing. Thus, the shock waves generated by an airplane in supersonic flight are capable of creating audible sound and, in the extreme case, can be of a magnitude to cause considerable disturbance. Pressure jumps of 0.02 to 0.3 psf have been recorded during the passage of an airplane in supersonic flight. As a result, the sonic ' booms' are the pressure waves generated by the shock waves formed on the airplane in supersonic flight.\n\nThe source of sonic booms is illustrated by figure 6.14. When the airplane is in level supersonic flight, a pattern of shock waves is developed which is much dependent on the configuration and flight Mach number of the airplane. At a considerable distance from the airplane, these shock waves tend to combine along two common fronts and extend away from the airplane in a sort of conical surface. The waves decrease in strength with distance away from the airplane but the pressure jump remains of an audible intensity for a considerable distance from the airplane. If the wave extends to the ground or water surface, it will\n\n## NAVWEPS OD-8OT-RO APP,LICATlON OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYING\n\nbe reflected and attenuated to some extent depending on the character of the reflecting surface. Of course, if this attached wave form is carried,across a populated area at the surface, th.population will experience the pressure waves as a sonic boom.\n\nThe intensity of the boom will depend on many different factors. The characteristics of the airplane generating the shock waves will be of some importance since a large, high drag, high gross weight airplane in flight at high Mach number will be transferring a greater energy to the air mass. Flight altitude will have an important bearing on boom intensity since at high altitude the pressure jump across a given wave form is much less. In addition, at high altitude a greater distance exists between the generating source of the pressure disturbance and the ground level and the strength of the wave will have a greater distance in which to decay. The ordinary variation of temperature and density plus the natural turbulence of atmosphere will tend to reflect or dissipate the shock wave generated at high altitude. However, in a stable, quiescent atmosphere, the pressure wave from the airplane in high supersonic flight at high altitude may be of an audible magnitude at lateral distances as great as 10 to 30 miles. Thus, supersonic flight over or adjacent to populated areas will produce a sonic boom.\n\nActually, it is not necessary for any airplane to fly supersonic over or adjacent to a populated area to create a sonic boom. This possibility is shown by the second illustration of figure 6.14 where an airplane decelerates to subsonic from a supersonic dive. As the airplane slows to subsonic from supersonic speed, the airplane will release the leading bow and tail waves which formed as the airplane accelerated from subsonic to supersonic speed. The release of these shock waves is analogous to the case where a surface ship slows to below the wave propagation speed and releases the bow wave which then travels out ahead of", + "recall": 0.8951310861423221, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OD-8OT-RO APP,LICATlON OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYING \n\nbe reflected and attenuated to some extent depending on the character of the reflecting surface. Of course, if this attached wave form is carried,across a populated area at the surface, th.- population will experience the pressure waves as a sonic boom. The intensity of the boom will depend on \n\nby the local flow changes at these surfaces. Of course, the strength of the shock waves and the pressure jump through the wave decreases rapidly with distance away from the airplane. While the pressure jump through the shock wave decreases with distance away from the surface, it does not disappear com- pletely and a measurable-but very small- pressure will exist at a considerable distance from the airplane. \n\nwaves as a sonic boom. The intensity of the boom will depend on many different factors. The characteristics of the airplane generating the shock waves will be of some importance since a large, high drag, high gross weight airplane in flight at high Mach number will be transferring a greater energy to the air mass. Flight altitude will have an important bearing on boom intensity since at high altitude the pressure jump across a given wave form is much less. In addition, at high altitude a greater distance exists be- tween the generating source of the pressure disturbance and the ground level and the strength of the wave will have a greater dis- tance in which to decay. The ordinary vari- ation of temperature and density plus the natural turbulence of atmosphere will tend to reflect or dissipate the shock wave generated at high altitude. However, in a stable, quies- cent atmosphere, the pressure wave from the airplane in high supersonic flight at high alti- tude may be of an audible magnitude at lateral distances as great as 10 to 30 miles. Thus, supersonic flight over or adjacent to populated areas will produce a sonic boom. \n\nSound is transmitted through the air as a series of very weak pressure waves. In the ordinary range of audible frequencies, the threshold of audibility for intensity of sound is for pressure waves with an approximate R.M.S. value of pressure as low as 0.0000002 psf. Within this same range of frequencies, the threshold of feeling for intensity of sound is for pressure values with an approximate R.M.S. value of pressure of 0.2 to 0.5 psf. Continuous sound at the threshold of feeling is of the intensity to cause painful hearing. Thus, the shock waves generated by an air- plane in supersonic flight are capable of creat- ing audible sound and, in the extreme case, can be of a magnitude to cause considerable dis- turbance. Pressure jumps of 0.02 to 0.3 psf have been recorded during the passage of an airplane in supersonic flight. As a result, the sonic “booms” are the pressure waves generated by the shock waves formed on the airplane in supersonic flight. \n\nActually, it is not necessary for any airplane to fly supersonic over or adjacent to a popu- lated area to create a sonic boom. This possibility is shown by the second illustration of figure 6.14 where an airplane decelerates to subsonic from a supersonic dive. As the air- plane slows to subsonic from supersonic speed, the airplane will release the leading bow and tail waves which formed as the airplane accel- erated from subsonic to supersonic speed. The release of these shock waves is analogous to the case where a surface ship slows to below the wave propagation speed and releases the bow wave which then travels out ahead of \n\nThe source of sonic booms is illustrated by figure 6.14. When the airplane is in level supersonic flight, a pattern of shock waves is developed which is much dependent on the configuration and flight Mach number of the airplane. At a considerable distance from the airplane, these shock waves tend to combine along two common fronts and extend away from the airplane in a sort of conical surface. The waves decrease in strength with distance away from the airplane but the pressure jump remains of an audible intensity for a consider- able distance from the airplane. If the wave extends to the ground or water surface, it will" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9456782307057304, + "doc_id": "affe2ab7c5ff86f083b7636e24e4c206f8a4adc363506c1e0061dab383b248d8", + "edit_distance": 0.028277634961439587, + "f1_score": 0.9619565217391305, + "meteor": 0.9729609842358645, + "precision": 0.9833333333333333, + "pred_md": "## PREFACE\n\nThe purpose of this textbook is to present the elements of applied aerodynamics and aeronautical engineering which relate directly to the problems of flying operations. All Naval Aviators possess a natural interest in the basic aerodynamic factors which affect the performance of all aircraft. Due .to the increasing complexity of modern aircraft, this natural interest must be applied to develop a sound understanding of basic engineering principles and an appreciation of some of the more advanced problems of aerodynamics and engineering. The safety and effectiveness of flying operations will depend greatly on the understanding and appreciation of how and why an airplane flies. The principles of aerodynamics will provide the foundations for developing exacting and precise flying techniques and operational procedures.\n\nThe content of this textbook has been arranged to provide as complete as possible a reference for all phases of flying in Naval Aviation. Hence, the text material is applicable to the problems of flight training, transition training, and general flying operations. The manner of presentation throughout the text has been designed to provide the elements of both theory and application and will allow either directed or unassisted study. As a result, the text material' will be applicable to supplement formal class Iectures and briefings and provide reading material as a background for training and flying operations.\n\nMuch of the specialized mathematical detail of aerodynamics has been omitted wherever it was considered unnecessary in the field of flying operations. Also, many of the basic assumptions and limitations of certain parts of aerodynamic theory have been omitted for the sake of simplicity and clarity of presentation. In order to contend with these specific shortcomings, the Naval Aviator should rely on the assistance of certain specially qualified individuals within Naval Aviation. For example, graduate aeronautical engineers, graduates of the Test Pilot Training School at the Naval Air Test Center, graduates of the Naval Aviation Safety Officers Course, and technical representatives of the manufacturers are qualified to assist in interpreting and applying the more difficult parts of aerodynamics and aeronautical engineering. To be sure, the specialized qualifications of these individuals should be utilized wherever possible.\n\niii", + "recall": 0.9414893617021277, + "true_md": "## PREFACE\n\nThe purpose of this textbook is to present the elements of applied aerodynamics and aeronautical engineering which relate directly to the problems of flying operations. All Naval Aviators possess a natural interest in the basic aerodynamic factors which affect the performance of all aircraft. Due .to the increasing complexity of modern aircraft, this natural interest must be applied to develop a sound understanding of basic engineering principles and an appreciation of some of the more advanced problems of aerodynamics and engineering. The safety and effectiveness of flying operations will depend greatly on the under- standing and appreciation of how and why an airplane flies. The principles of aerodynamics will provide the foundations for developing exacting and precise flying techniques and operational procedures. \n\nThe content of this textbook has been arranged to provide as com- plete as possible a reference for all phases of flying in Naval Aviation. Hence, the text material is applicable to the problems of flight train- ing, transition training, and general flying operations. The manner of presentation throughout the text has been designed to provide the elements of both theory and application and will allow either directed or unassisted study. As a result, the text material ’ will be applicable to supplement formal class Iectures and briefings and provide reading material as a background for training and flying operations. \n\nMuch of the specialized mathematical detail of aerodynamics has been omitted wherever it was considered unnecessary in the field of flying operations. Also, many of the basic assumptions and limita- tions of certain parts of aerodynamic theory have been omitted for the sake of simplicity and clarity of presentation. In order to contend with these specific shortcomings, the Naval Aviator should rely on the assistance of certain specially qualified individuals within Naval Avia- tion. For example, graduate aeronautical engineers, graduates of the Test Pilot Training School at the Naval Air Test Center, graduates of the Naval Aviation Safety Officers Course, and technical representatives of the manufacturers are qualified to assist in interpreting and applying the more difficult parts of aerodynamics and aeronautical engineering. To be sure, the specialized qualifications of these individuals should be utilized wherever possible. \n\niii" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.32834897578768363, + "doc_id": "e4a7a7086b7aa5e466079718edf0dae793e9afc6b22f73ef0cacc51d6c0fea49", + "edit_distance": 0.6176470588235294, + "f1_score": 0.787878787878788, + "meteor": 0.6776997041420119, + "precision": 0.6842105263157895, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS 00-80' 1-80 SlABILITY AND CONTROL\n\nFigure 4.19. Longitudinal Control Requirements\n\nFigure 4.19. Longitudinal Control Requirements\n\n~, :,.,\n\n:.:,\n\n:~'\n\nLANDING CONTROL\n\n176", + "recall": 0.9285714285714286, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-80 ’ 1-80 SlABILITY AND CONTROL \n\nFigure 4.19. Longitudinal Control Requirements \n\n176" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8651835922289308, + "doc_id": "b21e998f72ac7ea0ac3a3e68070ac2f64236ebcc6aca7774de672e7422b0800e", + "edit_distance": 0.6521739130434783, + "f1_score": 0.896969696969697, + "meteor": 0.7796943615502542, + "precision": 0.9426751592356688, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS 00-801-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE\n\nthe effect of these items on takeoff distance is\n\n\n\n(ut 1eaJt this effect because weight will alter the net accelerating force)\n\nThis result approximates the e5ect of gross weight on takeoff distance for airplanes with relatively high thrust-to-weight ratios. In effect, the takeoff distance will vary at least as the square of the gross weight. For example, a 10 percent increase ,in takeoff gross weight would cause:\n\na 5 percent increase in takeoff velocity at least a, 9 percent decrease in acceleration at least a 21 percent increase in takeoff distance\n\nFor the airplane with a high thrust-to-weight ratio, the increase in takeoff distance would be approximately 21 to 22 percent but, for the airplane with a relatively low thrust-to*eight ratio, the increase in takeoff distance would be approximately 25 to 30 percent. Such a powerful effect requires proper consideration of gross weight in predicting takeoff distance.\n\nThe effect of wind on takeoff distance is large and proper consideration also must be provided when predicting takeoff distance. The effect of a headwind is to allow the airplane to reach the takeoff velocity at a lower ground velocity while the effect of a tailwind is to require the airplane to achieve a greater ground velocity to attain the takeoff velocity. The effect of the wind on acceleration is relatively small and, for the most part, can be neglected. To evaluate the effect of wind on takeoff distance, the following relationships are used:\n\n188\n\nthe effect of a headwind is to reduce the takeoff ground velocity by the amount of the headwind velocity, VW\n\nthe effect of wind on acceleration is negligible,\n\nthe effect of these items on takeoff distance is\n\nwhere Xi= zero wind takeoff distance Sa=takeoff distance into the headwind V,= headwind velocity VI= takeoff ground velocity with zero\n\nwind, or, simply, the take05 airspeed\n\nAs a .result of this relationship, a headwind wh,ich is 10 percent of the takeoff airspeed will reduce the takeoff distance 19 percent. However, a tailwind (or negative headwind) which is 10 percent of the take05 airspeed will increase the takeoff distance 21 percent. In the case where the headwind velocity is 50 percent of the takeoff speed, the takeoff distance would be approximately 25 percent of the zero wind takeoff distance (75 percent reduction).\n\nThe e5ect of wind on landing distance is identical to the effect on takeoff distance. Figure 2.33 illustrates the general dfect of wind by the percent change in takeoff or landing distance as a function of the ratio of wind velocity to takeoff or landing speed.", + "recall": 0.8554913294797688, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-801-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE \n\nthe effect of a headwind is to reduce the takeoff ground velocity by the amount of the headwind velocity, VW \n\nthe effect of these items on takeoff dis- tance is \n\nor \n\nthe effect of wind on acceleration is negligible, \n\nthe effect of these items on takeoff distance is \n\n(ut 1eaJt this effect because weight will alter the net accelerating force) \n\n$$g+?)x(Z) J-2 WY2 a -= - J-1 ( ) WI $$\n\nThis result approximates the e5ect of gross weight on takeoff distance for airplanes with relatively high thrust-to-weight ratios. In effect, the takeoff distance will vary at least as the square of the gross weight. For ex- ample, a 10 percent increase ,in takeoff gross weight would cause: \n\na 5 percent increase in takeoff velocity at least a, 9 percent decrease in acceleration at least a 21 percent increase in takeoff distance \n\nwhere \n\n- Xi= zero wind takeoff distance \n\n- Sa=takeoff distance into the head- wind \n\n- V,= headwind velocity \n\n- VI= takeoff ground velocity with zero wind, or, simply, the take05 airspeed \n\nFor the airplane with a high thrust-to-weight ratio, the increase in takeoff distance would be approximately 21 to 22 percent but, for the airplane with a relatively low thrust-to- *eight ratio, the increase in takeoff distance would be approximately 25 to 30 percent. Such a powerful effect requires proper con- sideration of gross weight in predicting takeoff distance. \n\nAs a .result of this relationship, a headwind wh,ich is 10 percent of the takeoff airspeed will reduce the takeoff distance 19 percent. How- ever, a tailwind (or negative headwind) which is 10 percent of the take05 airspeed will in- crease the takeoff distance 21 percent. In the case where the headwind velocity is 50 percent of the takeoff speed, the takeoff distance would be approximately 25 percent of the zero wind takeoff distance (75 percent reduction). \n\nThe effect of wind on takeoff distance is large and proper consideration also must be provided when predicting takeoff distance. The effect of a headwind is to allow the airplane to reach the takeoff velocity at a lower ground velocity while the effect of a tailwind is to require the airplane to achieve a greater ground velocity to attain the takeoff velocity. The effect of the wind on acceleration is relatively small and, for the most part, can be neglected. To evaluate the effect of wind on takeoff distance, the following relationships are used: \n\nThe e5ect of wind on landing distance is identical to the effect on takeoff distance. Figure 2.33 illustrates the general dfect of wind by the percent change in takeoff or land- ing distance as a function of the ratio of wind velocity to takeoff or landing speed. \n\n188" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0015044105346966033, + "doc_id": "aedf0047279dd762e093d84a75997932443873d990f02fb69950fdd449a528e0", + "edit_distance": 0.9907834101382489, + "f1_score": 0.055944055944055944, + "meteor": 0.08444148936170215, + "precision": 0.02877697841726619, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS OO-EOT-80 INDEX\n\nproprllcrs\n\nlmd\n\n| charactcrlstics. ........... : ............... | 14s |\n|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|-------|\n| efficiency .................................. | 145 |\n| opcrarmg limitations. ............ : ......... | 148 |\n| propulsion | |\n| etlicicncy .................................. | 106 |\n| principles. ............. : \\_ ................. | 104 |\n| ram tempcraturc rise. ......................... | 242 |\n| range performance. $ .................... | 158 |\n| off-optimum conditions. .................... | 172 |\n| propeller airplanes. ......................... | 160 |\n| turbojet airplanes ........................... | 164 |\n| rate of climb. ................................ | 154 |\n| reciprocating engines | |\n| operating characteristics ..................... | 13s |\n| operating limitations. ....................... | 144 |\n| refusal speed, ....... .+: .................... | 392 |\n| tetreating blade stall. ......................... | 402 |\n| reversed command region. ..................... | 353 |\n| Reynolds number. ............. :. ............. | 54 |\n| scale effect. | 59 |\n| .................................. separation, airflow. ............................ | 56 |\n| service life. ................................ | 328 |\n| shock induced separation. ..................... | 218 |\n| shock wave formation. ....................... sideslip angle. ............................... | 218 |\n| slipstream rotation. .......................... | 284 |\n| sonic booms. ................................. | 294 |\n| | 396 |\n| spanwise lift distribution. ..................... | 74 |\n| specificendurance ............................. | 170 |\n| specific fuel consumption | |\n| reciprocating engine. ....................... | 141 |\n| turbojet cngi.ne. ......................... | 117 |\n| specificrange ................................. | 158 |\n| speed, maximum and minimum. ............... | 150 |\n| spin,spinrecovery..........................291, | 307 |\n| Srability and Control, Chapter IV. ............. | 243 |\n| stability | |\n| directional. ................................ | 284 |\n| dynamic ................................... | 245 |\n| helicopter .................................. | 319 |\n| lateral ..................................... | 294 |\n| longitudinal. ... : .......................... | 250 |\n| miscellaneous problems. ..................... | 305 |\n| static ............................ ......... | 243 |\n| stallspeeds ................................. | 35 |\n\nt?evised Jcmuarv 1965\n\nPage\n\n77\n\n39\n\n14\n\n| ................................ | |\n|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|-----------|\n| seal pattern. | |\n| stall rec' very. ............................... | |\n| standard atmosphere. ......................... | 4 |\n| static strength. ............................... | 326 |\n| streamline pattern. ............. ............. | |\n| supercharging. ............................... | 141 |\n| supersonic airfoil sections. .................... | 223 |\n| sweepback ................................... | 63 |\n| advantages .................................. | 226 |\n| disadvantages. ............................. | 231 |\n| takeoff ...................................... | 365 |\n| takeoff performance. .......................... | 184 |\n| factors affecting performance. ................ | 187 |\n| taper, taper ratio. ............................ | 63 |\n| thrust augmentation. ......................... | 129 |\n| thrust required. .............................. | 96 |\n| time limitations, powcrplants. ............... | 128, 144 |\n| tip stall. .................................... | 77 |\n| tip vortex. .................................. | 63 |\n| torque. ............................... ,;, ........ | 137 52 |\n| transition of boundary layer. .................. .. | |\n| transon1c aIrfoIl scctlo' s. ................ ...... | 220 |\n| true airspeed, TAS. ........................... turbojetengines .............................. | 14 107 |\n| operating characteristics. ................... | 116 |\n| operating limitations. ...................... | 124 |\n| turboprop, gas turbine-propeller combination. | ... 132 |\n| turbulence.................................332, ......................... | 339 |\n| turning performance. | 178 |\n| turn rate, turn radius. ........................ | 176 |\n| unsymmetrical power, see asymmetrical power. viscosity. ................................... ......................... | 4 |\n| V-n or V-g diagram. | 334 |\n| vortex system. ............................... | 63 |\n| line or bound vortex. ....................... | 64 |\n| tip or trailing vortex. ...................... | 64 |\n| injection reciprocating | |\n| w&r engine. ....................... turbojetengine ............................. | 144 131 |\n| wavedrag................................. | , 215 |\n| wind, effect on range. ........................ windshear ................................. ................................ | 168 |\n| YPWm'me't | 367 291 |\n| yaw,adverse yawangle ................................... ................................ | 284 284 |", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OO-EOT-80 INDEX \n\nt?evised Jcmuarv 1965" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7288583567238983, + "doc_id": "09b1b7d0fedc14e890f9850b3bd5be774d6e29411aac653f2d5910665df70306", + "edit_distance": 0.175, + "f1_score": 0.9056603773584907, + "meteor": 0.9156641722711628, + "precision": 0.9230769230769231, + "pred_md": "FAA Chart Users' Guide - Terminal Procedures Publication (TPP) - Symbols\n\n## AIRPORT DIAGRAM/AIRPORT SKETCH\n\n## EC-1, 22 APR 2021 to 17 JUN 2021\n\n122\n\nEC-1, 22 APR 2021 to 17 JUN 2021", + "recall": 0.8888888888888888, + "true_md": "122\n\nFAA Chart Users’ Guide - T erminal Procedures Publication (TPP) - Symbols\n\n## AIRPORT DIAGRAM/AIRPORT SKETCH\n\nEC-1, 22 APR 2021 to 17 JUN 2021\n\nEC-1, 22 APR 2021 to 17 JUN 2021" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.488923022434901, + "doc_id": "d4f8a8df1ee48353d285759147e39cb64f453100e1cc9e5432f1dc66ea7c2983", + "edit_distance": 0.125, + "f1_score": 0.875, + "meteor": 0.864795918367347, + "precision": 0.875, + "pred_md": "FAA Chart Users' Guide - Introduction\n\n8", + "recall": 0.875, + "true_md": "FAA Chart Users’ Guide - Introduction\n\n8" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7476598054926679, + "doc_id": "d280350db42e4861e3a708cd74aaa2aa8cbc27238be5b5ddcb083641ecfc41ed", + "edit_distance": 0.5955967555040557, + "f1_score": 0.939571150097466, + "meteor": 0.6117883958805898, + "precision": 0.9678714859437751, + "pred_md": "angle of the surface must be sufficiently great to prevent stall and subsequent loss of effectiveness at ordinary sideslip angles. The high Mach numbers of supersonic flight produces a decrease in lift curve slope with the consequent reduction in tail contribution to stability. In order to have sufficient directional stability at high Mach numbers, the typical supersonic configuration will exhibit relatively large vertical tail surfaces.\n\nThe flow field in which the vertical tail operates is affected by the othei components of the airplane as well as powe; effects. The dynamic pressure at the vertical tail could depend on the slipstream of a propeller or the boundary layer of the fuselage. Also, the local flow direction at the vertical tail is influenced by the wing wake, fuselage crossflow, induced flow of the horizontal tail, or the direction of slipstream from a propeller. Each of these factors must be considered as possibly affecting the contribution of the vertical tail to directional stability.\n\nThe contribution of the wing tb %tatic directional stability is tisually small: The swept wing provides a stable contribution' depending on the amount of sweepback but the contribution is relatively weak when compared with other components. :.\n\nNAVWEPS OO-ROLRO STARIUTY AND CONTROL\n\ngreater aerodynamic force and, generally, a continued destabilizing influence.\n\nFigure 4.23 illustrates a typical buildup of the directional stability of an airplane by separating the contribution of the fuselage and tail. As shown by the graph of C. versus 6, the contribution of the fuselage is destabilizing but the instability decreases at large sideslip angles. Tbe contribution of the vertical tail alone is highly stabilizing up to the point where the surface begins to stall. The contribution of the vertical tail must be large enough so that the complete airplane (wing-fuselage-tail combination) exhibits the required degree of stability.\n\nThe dorsal fin has a powerful effect on preserving the directional stability at large angles of sideslip wliich would produce stall of the vertical tail. The addition of a dorsal fin to the airplane will allay the decay of directional stability at high sideslip in two ways. The least obvious but most important effect is a large increase in the fuselage stability at large sideslip angles. In addition, the effective aspect rario of the vertical tail is reduced which increases the stall angle for the surface. By this twofold effect, the addition of the dorsal fin is a v useful' device.\n\nPoluer effects on static directional stability similar to the power effects on static longitudinal stability. The direct effects are confined to the normal force at the propeller plane or the jet inlet and, of course, are destabilizing when the propeller or inlet is located ahead of the c.g. The indirect effects of power induced velocities and flow dirkccion changes at the vertical tail are quite significant for the propeller driven airplane and can produce large directional trim changes. As in the lontitudinal case, the indirect effects are negligible for the jet powered airplane.\n\nThe contribution of the direct and indirect power effects to static directional stability is greatest for the propeller powered airplane and usually slight for the jet powered airplane. In either case, the general effect of power is\n\nThe contribution of the fuselage d nacelles are an is of primary importance since these components furnish rhe greatest destabilizing influence. The contribution of the fuselage and nacelles is similar to the longitudinal case with the exception that there is no large influence of the induced flow field of the wing. The subsonic center of pressure of the fuselage will be located at or forward of the quarterlength point and, since the airplane c.g. is usually considerably aft of this point, the fuselage contribution will be destabilizing. However, at large angles of sideslip the large destabilizing contribution of the fuselage diminishes which is some relief to the problem of maintaining directional stability at large displacements. The supersonic pressure,. distribution on the body provides a relatively\n\n287", + "recall": 0.9128787878787878, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OO-ROLRO STARIUTY AND CONTROL \n\ngreater aerodynamic force and, generally, a continued destabilizing influence. \n\nangle of the surface must be sufficiently great to prevent stall and subsequent loss of effec- tiveness at ordinary sideslip angles. The high Mach numbers of supersonic flight produces a decrease in lift curve slope with the consequent reduction in tail contribution to stability. In order to have sufficient directional stability at high Mach numbers, the typical supersonic configuration will exhibit relatively large vertical tail surfaces. \n\nFigure 4.23 illustrates a typical buildup of the directional stability of an airplane by separating the contribution of the fuselage and tail. As shown by the graph of C. versus 6, the contribution of the fuselage is de- stabilizing but the instability decreases at large sideslip angles. Tbe contribution of the vertical tail alone is highly stabilizing up to the point where the surface begins to stall. The contribution of the vertical tail must be large enough so that the complete airplane (wing-fuselage-tail combination) exhibits the required degree of stability. \n\nThe flow field in which the vertical tail operates is affected by the othei components of the airplane as well as powe; effects. The dynamic pressure at the vertical tail could depend on the slipstream of a propeller or the boundary layer of the fuselage. Also, the local flow direction at the vertical tail is in- fluenced by the wing wake, fuselage crossflow, induced flow of the horizontal tail, or the direction of slipstream from a propeller. Each of these factors must be considered as possibly affecting the contribution of the vertical tail to directional stability. \n\nThe dorsal fin has a powerful effect on pre- serving the directional stability at large angles of sideslip wliich would produce stall of the vertical tail. The addition of a dorsal fin to the airplane will allay the decay of directional stability at high sideslip in two ways. The least obvious but most important effect is a large increase in the fuselage stability at large sideslip angles. In addition, the effective aspect rario of the vertical tail is reduced which increases the stall angle for the surface. By this twofold effect, the addition of the dorsal fin is a v useful’ device. \n\nThe contribution of the wing tb %tatic direc- tional stability is tisually small: The swept wing provides a stable contribution ’ depending on the amount of sweepback but the contribu- tion is relatively weak when compared with other components. :. The contribution of the fuselage and nacelles \n\nnacelles Poluer effects on static directional stability are similar to the power effects on static longitudinal stability. The direct effects are confined to the normal force at the propeller plane or the jet inlet and, of course, are de- stabilizing when the propeller or inlet is located ahead of the c.g. The indirect effects of power induced velocities and flow dirkccion changes at the vertical tail are quite significant for the propeller driven airplane and can pro- duce large directional trim changes. As in the lontitudinal case, the indirect effects are negligible for the jet powered airplane. \n\nother components. :. The contribution of the fuselage and nacelles is of primary importance since these compo- nents furnish rhe greatest destabilizing in- fluence. The contribution of the fuselage and nacelles is similar to the longitudinal case with the exception that there is no large in- fluence of the induced flow field of the wing. The subsonic center of pressure of the fuselage will be located at or forward of the quarter- length point and, since the airplane c.g. is usually considerably aft of this point, the fuselage contribution will be destabilizing. However, at large angles of sideslip the large destabilizing contribution of the fuselage di- minishes which is some relief to the problem of maintaining directional stability at large displacements. The supersonic pressure,. dis- tribution on the body provides a relatively are similar to the power effects on static longitudinal stability. confined to the normal force at the propeller plane or the jet inlet and, of course, are de- stabilizing when the propeller or inlet is located ahead of the c.g. The indirect effects of power induced velocities and flow dirkccion changes at the vertical tail are quite significant for the propeller driven airplane and can pro- duce large directional trim changes. As in the lontitudinal case, the indirect effects are negligible for the jet powered airplane. power effects to static directional stability is greatest for the propeller powered airplane and usually slight for the jet powered airplane. In either case, the general effect of power is \n\nThe contribution of the direct and indirect power effects to static directional stability is greatest for the propeller powered airplane and usually slight for the jet powered airplane. In either case, the general effect of power is \n\n287" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.3980668738240055, + "doc_id": "9dacc99ce0fc7329e941d22ee433a1b6dd0252f7f20fac6e7334200c8bbf79d1", + "edit_distance": 0.5416666666666666, + "f1_score": 0.8148148148148148, + "meteor": 0.891621312907344, + "precision": 0.6875, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS 00-SOT-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL\n\n## EFFECT OF ELEVATOR DEFLECTION\n\nFigure 4.13. Longitudinal Control\n\nFigure 4.13. Longitudinal Control\n\n265", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-SOT-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL \n\nFigure 4.13. Longitudinal Control \n\n265" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8466181587416142, + "doc_id": "236dc281f58b1c8628d233c04051644194fb5c371dddd4da82bd5ccf230a6c8c", + "edit_distance": 0.1381118881118881, + "f1_score": 0.9281314168377824, + "meteor": 0.8747105975424931, + "precision": 0.9535864978902954, + "pred_md": "It is important to distinguish between strength and stiffness. Strength is simply the resistance to load while stiffness is the resistance to deflection or deformation. While strength and stiffness are related, it is necessary to appreciate that adequate structural strength does not automatically provide adequate stiffness. Thus, special consideration is necessary to provide the structural components with specific stiffness characteristics to prevent undesirable aeroelastic effects during normal operation.\n\nAn obvious solution to the apparent problems of static strength, fatigue strength, stiffness and rigidity would be to build the airplane like a product of an anvil works, capable of withstanding all conceivable loads. However, high performance airplane configurations cannot be developed with ineficient, lowly stressed structures. The effect of additional weight is best illustrated by preliminary design studies of a very long range, high altitude bomber. In the preliminary phases of design, each additional pound of any weight would necessitate a 25-pound increase in gross weight to maintain the same performance. An increase in the weight of any item produced a chain reaction-more fuel, larger tanks, bigger engines, more fuel, heavier landing gear, more fuel, etc. In the competitive sense of design, no additional structural weight can be tolerated to provide more strength than is specified as necessary for the design mission requirement.\n\n## AIRCRAFT LOADS AND OPERATING LIMITATIONS\n\n## FLIGHT LOADS-MANEUVERS AND GUSTS\n\nThe loads imposed on an aircraft in flight are the result of maneuvers and gusts. The maneuver loads may predominate in the design of fighter airplanes while gust loads may predominate in the design of the large multiengine aircraft. The maneuver loads an\n\n331\n\n## NAVWEPS 00-EOT-80 OPERATING STRENGTH LIMITATIONS\n\nairplane may encounter depend in great part on the mission type of the airplane. However, the maximum maneuvering capability is of interest because of the relationship with strength limits.\n\nThe flight load factor is defined as the proportion between airplane lift and weight, where\n\n\n\nMANEUVERING LOAD FACTORS. The maximum lift attainable at any airspeed occurs when the airplane is at CLmU. With the use of the basic lift equation, this maximum lift is expressed as:\n\nSince maximum lift must be equal to the weight at the stall speed,\n\nIf the effects of compressibility and viscosity on Ch are neglected for simplification, the maximum load factor attainable is determined by the following relationship.\n\n\n\nThus, if the airplane is flying at twice the stall speed and the angle of attack is increased to obtain maximum lift, a maximum load factor of four will result. At three times the stall speed, nine ' g' s' would result; four times the stall speed, sixteen g' s result; five times the stall speed, twenty-five g' s result; etc. Therefore, any airplane which has high speed performance may have the capability of high maneuvering load factors. The airplane which is capable of flight speeds that are", + "recall": 0.904, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-EOT-80 OPERATING STRENGTH LIMITATIONS \n\nIt is important to distinguish between strength and stiffness. Strength is simply the resistance to load while stiffness is the resist- ance to deflection or deformation. While strength and stiffness are related, it is necessary to appreciate that adequate structural strength does not automatically provide adequate stiff- ness. Thus, special consideration is necessary to provide the structural components with specific stiffness characteristics to prevent un- desirable aeroelastic effects during normal operation. An obvious solution to the apparent prob- \n\noperation. An obvious solution to the apparent prob- lems of static strength, fatigue strength, stiffness and rigidity would be to build the airplane like a product of an anvil works, capable of withstanding all conceivable loads. However, high performance airplane con- figurations cannot be developed with inefi- cient, lowly stressed structures. The effect of additional weight is best illustrated by pre- liminary design studies of a very long range, high altitude bomber. In the preliminary phases of design, each additional pound of any weight would necessitate a 25-pound increase in gross weight to maintain the same performance. An increase in the weight of any item produced a chain reaction-more fuel, larger tanks, bigger engines, more fuel, heavier landing gear, more fuel, etc. In the competitive sense of design, no additional structural weight can be tolerated to provide more strength than is specified as necessary for the design mission requirement. \n\n## AIRCRAFT LOADS AND OPERATING LIMITATIONS\n\n## FLIGHT LOADS-MANEUVERS AND GUSTS\n\nThe loads imposed on an aircraft in flight are the result of maneuvers and gusts. The maneuver loads may predominate in the design of fighter airplanes while gust loads may predominate in the design of the large multiengine aircraft. The maneuver loads an \n\n331 \n\nairplane may encounter depend in great part on the mission type of the airplane. However, the maximum maneuvering capability is of interest because of the relationship with strength limits. The flight load factor is defined as the pro- \n\nstrength limits. The flight load factor is defined as the pro- portion between airplane lift and weight, where \n\nMANEUVERING LOAD FACTORS. The maximum lift attainable at any airspeed occurs when the airplane is at CLmU. With the use of the basic lift equation, this maximum lift is expressed as: \n\nSince maximum lift must be equal to the weight at the stall speed, \n\nIf the effects of compressibility and viscosity on Ch are neglected for simplification, the maximum load factor attainable is determined by the following relationship. \n\nThus, if the airplane is flying at twice the stall speed and the angle of attack is increased to obtain maximum lift, a maximum load factor of four will result. At three times the stall speed, nine “g ’ s” would result; four times the stall speed, sixteen g ’ s result; five times the stall speed, twenty-five g ’ s result; etc. Therefore, any airplane which has high speed performance may have the capability of high maneuvering load factors. The airplane which is capable of flight speeds that are \n\nn=L/W n= load factor L=lift, Ibs. W= weight, Ibs." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7587895542636273, + "doc_id": "d603228eba52ba874f168ef6cc0b8110c3d9ceeb2cc7dae0bfee482b5d75fb74", + "edit_distance": 0.4114441416893733, + "f1_score": 0.8999999999999999, + "meteor": 0.801749151812871, + "precision": 0.9285714285714286, + "pred_md": "FAA-H-8083-13A Glider Flying Handbook Updated May 11, 2015\n\n## Errata as of May 11, 2015\n\n- 1. In the first bullet under 'Other Airspeed Limitations' in the left column of page 4-6, the first sentence should be changed to: 'Maneuvering speed (Va) - a structural design airspeed used in determining the strength requirements for the glider and its control surfaces. The structural design requirements do not cover multiple inputs in one axis or control inputs in more than one axis at a time at any speed, even below Va.'\n- 2. On page G-4 of the glossary, the following definition should be added: 'Maneuvering speed (Va) - a structural design airspeed used in determining the strength requirements for the glider and its control surfaces. The structural design requirements do not cover multiple inputs in one axis or control inputs in more than one axis at a time at any speed, even below Va.'\n\n## Errata as of October 21, 2013\n\n- 1. In Figure 7-2 on page 7-3, the upper center and upper right labels regarding towing are reversed. The upper center label should read, 'Towplane please turn left' and the upper right label should read, 'Towplane please turn right.'\n- 2. In Figure 7-34 on page 7-35, the label pointing to the rudder should read, 'Rudder deflected left.'\n\n## Errata as of September 17, 2013\n\n- 1. On page 1-3, the caption under Figure 1-5 should read, \"A DG Flugzeugbau GmbH DG800B glider.\"\n\n## Errata as of September 11, 2013\n\n- 1. In the Acknowledgements (page v), the web address for the Soaring Society of America, Inc. should read, 'www.ssa.org.'\n\n1 of 1", + "recall": 0.8731343283582089, + "true_md": "- 1. In the first bullet under “Other Airspeed Limitations” in the left column of page 4-6, the first sentence should be changed to: “Maneuvering speed (V$_{a) }$– a structural design airspeed used in determining the strength requirements for the glider and its control surfaces. The structural design requirements do not cover multiple inputs in one axis or control inputs in more than one axis at a time at any speed, even below V$_{a}$.” \n\n- 2. On page G-4 of the glossary, the following definition should be added: “Maneuvering speed (V$_{a) }$– a structural design airspeed used in determining the strength requirements for the glider and its control surfaces. The structural design requirements do not cover multiple inputs in one axis or control inputs in more than one axis at a time at any speed, even below V$_{a}$.” \n\n- 1. In Figure 7-2 on page 7-3, the upper center and upper right labels regarding towing are reversed. The upper center label should read, “Towplane please turn left” and the upper right label should read, “Towplane please turn right.” \n\n- 2. In Figure 7-34 on page 7-35, the label pointing to the rudder should read, “Rudder deflected left.” \n\n- 1. On page 1-3, the caption under Figure 1-5 should read, \"A DG Flugzeugbau GmbH DG- 800B glider.\" \n\n- 1. In the Acknowledgements (page v), the web address for the Soaring Society of America, Inc. should read, “www.ssa.org.” \n\n## Errata as of May 11, 2015\n\n## Errata as of October 21, 2013\n\n## Errata as of September 17, 2013\n\n## Errata as of September 11, 2013\n\n1 of 1 \n\n# FAA-H-8083-13A Glider Flying Handbook Updated May 11, 2015\n\nGlider Flying Handbook Updated May 11, 2015" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7248600507984249, + "doc_id": "eeab3056f4a530e1cb380e185693247ef382ee6af18e9a56ead97ca755fc518c", + "edit_distance": 0.30434782608695654, + "f1_score": 0.9677419354838711, + "meteor": 0.9571482035928143, + "precision": 0.9375, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS 00-801-80 APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYING\n\nFigure 6.6. Glide Performance\n\nFigure 6.6. Glide Performance\n\n370", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-801-80 APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYING \n\nFigure 6.6. Glide Performance \n\n370" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8656030552541708, + "doc_id": "08212053e2db1a70dd60a4f85650ceb33d7519af34f502e3ac894389d76663d6", + "edit_distance": 0.045454545454545456, + "f1_score": 0.9500000000000001, + "meteor": 0.9541331684188827, + "precision": 0.95, + "pred_md": "## AIRSPACE INFORMATION (Continued)\n\nFAA Chart Users' Guide - VFR Symbology - Sectional and Terminal Area Charts\n\n31", + "recall": 0.95, + "true_md": "## AIRSPACE INFORMATION (Continued)\n\nFAA Chart Users’ Guide - VFR Symbology - Sectional and Terminal Area Charts\n\n31" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8819037597998433, + "doc_id": "2579a7f80e39d6a9fe9a9b17b9a5c909609552127036ba4a1f79f45aeae63e0e", + "edit_distance": 0.10061919504643962, + "f1_score": 0.9233716475095786, + "meteor": 0.9247340127291255, + "precision": 0.9601593625498008, + "pred_md": "cause damage from excessive flight loads. The usual term given to the speed at point A is the ' maneuver speed,' since consideration of subsonic aerodynamics wouId predict minimum usable turn radius to occur at this condition. The maneuver speed is a valuable reference point since an airplane operating below this point cannot produce a damaging positive flight load. Any combination of maneuver and gust cannot create damage due to excess airload when the airplane is below the maneuver speed.\n\nThe maneuver speed can be computed from the following equation:\n\nwhere\n\nVP= maneuver speed\n\nV,= stall speed\n\nn limit = limit load factor\n\nOf course, the stall speed and limit load factor must be appropriate for the airplane gross weight. One notable fact is that this speed, once properly computed, remains a constant value if no significant change takes place in the spanwise weight distribution. The maneuver speed of the subject aircraft of figure 5.4. would be\n\n\n\n## EFFECT OF HIGH SPEED FLIGHT\n\nMany different factors may be of structural importance in high speed flight. Any one or combination of these factors may be encountered if the airplane is operated beyond the limit (or redline) airspeed.\n\nAt speeds beyond the limit speed the airplane may encounter a critical gust. This is especially true of a high aspect ratio airplane with a low limit load factor. Of course, this\n\n339\n\n## NAVWEPS 00-801-80 OPERATING STRENGTH LIMITATIONS\n\nis also an important consideration for an airplane with a high limit load factor if the gust should be superimposed 00 a maneuver. Since the gust Ioad factor increment varies directly with airspeed and gust intensity, high airspeeds must be avoided in turbulent conditions.\n\nWhen it is impossible to avoid turbulent conditions and the airplane must be subject to gusts, the flight condition must be properly controlled to minimize the effect of turbulence. If possible, the airplane airspeed and power should be adjusted prior to entry into turbulence to provide a stabilized attitude. Obviously, penetration of turbulence should not be accomplished at an excess airspeed because of possible structural damage. On the other hand, an excessively low speed should not be chosen to penetrate turbulence for the gusts may cause stalling of the aircraft and difficulty of control. To select a proper penetration airspeed the speed should not be excessively high or ' low-the two extremes must be tempered. The ' maneuver' speed is an important reference point since it is the highest speed that can be taken to alleviate stall due to gust and the lowest speed at which limit load factor can be develoPed aerodynamically. The optimum penetration speed occurs at or very near the maneuver speed.\n\nAileron rever& is a phenomenon particular to high speed flight. When in flight at very high dynamic pressures, the wing torsional deflections which occur with aileron deflection are considerable and cause noticeable change in aileron effectiveness. The deflection of an aileron on a rigid wing creates a change in lift and produces a rolling moment. In addition the deflection of the control surface creates a twisting moment on the wing. When the actual elastic wing is subject to this condition at high dynamic pressures, the twisting moment produces measurable twisting deformations which affect the rolling performance of the aircraft. Figure 5.5 illustrates this process and the effect of airspeed on aileron effectiveness. At some high dynamic pressure, the", + "recall": 0.8892988929889298, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-801-80 OPERATING STRENGTH LIMITATIONS \n\ncause damage from excessive flight loads. The usual term given to the speed at point A is the “maneuver speed,” since consideration of subsonic aerodynamics wouId predict mini- mum usable turn radius to occur at this con- dition. The maneuver speed is a valuable reference point since an airplane operating below this point cannot produce a damaging positive flight load. Any combination of maneuver and gust cannot create damage due to excess airload when the airplane is below the maneuver speed. The maneuver speed can be computed from \n\nthe maneuver speed. The maneuver speed can be computed from the following equation: \n\nwhere \n\nVP= maneuver speed V,= stall speed n limit = limit load factor \n\nOf course, the stall speed and limit load factor must be appropriate for the airplane gross weight. One notable fact is that this speed, once properly computed, remains a constant value if no significant change takes place in the spanwise weight distribution. The ma- neuver speed of the subject aircraft of figure 5.4. would be \n\nv,= loo&3 \n\n= 274 knots \n\n## EFFECT OF HIGH SPEED FLIGHT\n\nMany different factors may be of structural importance in high speed flight. Any one or combination of these factors may be encount- ered if the airplane is operated beyond the limit (or redline) airspeed. \n\nAt speeds beyond the limit speed the air- plane may encounter a critical gust. This is especially true of a high aspect ratio airplane with a low limit load factor. Of course, this \n\nis also an important consideration for an air- plane with a high limit load factor if the gust should be superimposed 00 a maneuver. Since the gust Ioad factor increment varies directly with airspeed and gust intensity, high airspeeds must be avoided in turbulent conditions. \n\nWhen it is impossible to avoid turbulent conditions and the airplane must be subject to gusts, the flight condition must be properly controlled to minimize the effect of turbulence. If possible, the airplane airspeed and power should be adjusted prior to entry into turbu- lence to provide a stabilized attitude. Ob- viously, penetration of turbulence should not be accomplished at an excess airspeed because of possible structural damage. On the other hand, an excessively low speed should not be chosen to penetrate turbulence for the gusts may cause stalling of the aircraft and difficulty of control. To select a proper penetration airspeed the speed should not be excessively high or ‘ low-the two extremes must be tempered. The “maneuver” speed is an im- portant reference point since it is the highest speed that can be taken to alleviate stall due to gust and the lowest speed at which limit load factor can be develoPed aerodynamically. The optimum penetration speed occurs at or very near the maneuver speed. \n\nAileron rever& is a phenomenon particular to high speed flight. When in flight at very high dynamic pressures, the wing torsional deflections which occur with aileron deflection are considerable and cause noticeable change in aileron effectiveness. The deflection of an aileron on a rigid wing creates a change in lift and produces a rolling moment. In addition the deflection of the control surface creates a twisting moment on the wing. When the actual elastic wing is subject to this condition at high dynamic pressures, the twisting mo- ment produces measurable twisting deforma- tions which affect the rolling performance of the aircraft. Figure 5.5 illustrates this process and the effect of airspeed on aileron effective- ness. At some high dynamic pressure, the \n\n339" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5879094915747982, + "doc_id": "bc752bf96e673fa8cb1975ee1ef83a80b9047862dfed49b1fae5ad80c7ccb21a", + "edit_distance": 0.38095238095238093, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9283080353314467, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS OO-ROT-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE\n\nFigure 2.1. Airplane Thrust and Power Required\n\nFigure 2.1. Airplane Thrust and Power Required\n\n96", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OO-ROT-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE \n\nFigure 2.1. Airplane Thrust and Power Required \n\n96" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8904680158150425, + "doc_id": "3bdf0d557e607a7632b6215c23d2e6f2c48faf8e38f77f05a7c3bbd459c0e6bd", + "edit_distance": 0.7586206896551724, + "f1_score": 0.9863013698630138, + "meteor": 0.9596551724137932, + "precision": 0.9863013698630136, + "pred_md": "## AIRSPACE INFORMATION (Continued)\n\n## Special Conservation Areas\n\nNational Park, Wildlife Refuge, Primitive and Wilderness Areas, etc.\n\n## Special Flight Rules Area (SFRA) Relating to National Security\n\nExample: Washington DC\n\nAppropriate notes as required may be shown.\n\nNote: Delimiting line not shown when it coincides with International Boundary, projection lines or other linear features.\n\n## Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR) Relating to National Security\n\nExample: Washington DC\n\nAppropriate notes as required may be shown.\n\nNOAA Regulated National Marine Sanctuary Designated Areas\n\n29\n\nFAA Chart Users' Guide - VFR Symbology - Sectional and Terminal Area Charts", + "recall": 0.9863013698630136, + "true_md": "FAA Chart Users’ Guide - VFR Symbology - Sectional and Terminal Area Charts\n\n29\n\n## AIRSPACE INFORMATION (Continued)\n\nExample: Washington DC\n\nAppropriate notes as required may be shown.\n\nExample: Washington DC\n\nAppropriate notes as required may be shown.\n\nNote: Delimiting line not shown when it coincides with International Boundary, projection lines or other linear features.\n\nNOAA Regulated National Marine Sanctuary Designated Areas\n\nNational Park, Wildlife Refuge, Primitive and Wilderness Areas, etc. \n\n## Special Conservation Areas\n\n## Special Flight Rules Area (SFRA) Relating to National Security\n\n## Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR) Relating to National Security" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8664409935451329, + "doc_id": "3ba92b52a356ee92ed214a73624cb9f9fee2791eae4eece9bb6e4b331d3a903f", + "edit_distance": 0.6344086021505376, + "f1_score": 0.9414062500000002, + "meteor": 0.792840446580964, + "precision": 0.9757085020242915, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS 00-8OT-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL\n\nhigh angles of attack is required to effect recovery during a spin. Since the effectiveness of the vertical tail is reduced at large angles of attack, the directional control power necessary for spin recovery may produce a critical requirement of rudder power.\n\nSLIPSTREAM ROTATION. A critical directional control requirement may exist when the propeller powered airplane is at high power and low airspeed. As shown in figure 4.26, the single rotation propeller i nduces a slipstream swirl which causes a change in flow direction at the vertical tail. The rudder must furnish sufficient control power to balance this condition and achieve zero sideslip.\n\nCROSSWIND TAKEOFF AND LANDING. Since the airplane must make a true path down the runway, a crosswind during takeoff or landing will require that the airplane be.controlled in a sideslip. The rudder must have sufficient control power to create the required sideslip for the expected crosswinds.\n\nASYMMETRICAL POWER. The design of a multiengine airplane must account for the possibility of an engine failure at low airspeed. The unbalance of thrust from a condition of unsymmetrical power produces a yawing moment dependent upon the thrust unbalance and the lever arm of the force. The deflection of the rudder will create a side force on the tail and contribute a yawing moment to balance the yawing moment due to the unbalance of thrust. Since the yawing moment coefficient from the unbalance of thrust will be greatest at low speed, the critical requirement will be at a low speed with the one critical engine out and the remaining engines at maximum power. Figure 4.26 compares the yawing moment coeflicient for maximum rudder deflection with the yawing moment coefficient for the unbalance of thrust. The intersection of the two lines,determines the minimum speed for directional control, i.e., the lowest speed at which the rudder control moment can equal the moment of unbalanced thrust, It is usually specified that the minimum directional control speed be no greater than 1.2 times the stall\n\nRevised January 1965\n\n294\n\nspeed of the airplane in the lightest practical takeoff configuration. This will provide adequate directional control for the remaining conditions of flight.\n\nOnce defined, the minimum directional control speed is not a function of weight, altitude, etc., but is simply the equivalent airspeed (or dynamic pressure). to produce a required yawing moment with the maximum rudder deflection. If the airplane is operated in the critical unbalance of power below the minimum con trol speed, the airplane will yaw uncontrollably into the inoperative engine. In order to regain directional control below the minimum speed certain alternatives exist: reduce power on the operating engines or sacrifice altitude for airspeed. Neither alternative is satisfactory if the airplane is in a marginal condition of powered flight so due respect must be given to the minimum control speed.\n\nDue to the side force on the vertical tail, a slight bank is necessary to prevent turning flight at zero sideslip. The inoperative engine will be raised and the inclined wing lift will provide a component of force to balance the 1 side force on the tail.\n\nIn each of the critical conditions of required directional control, high directional stability is desirable as it will reduce the displacement of the aircraft from any disturbing influence. Of course, directional control must he sufficient to attain zero sideslip. The critical control requirement for the multiengine airplane is the condition of asymmetrical power since spinning is not common to this type of airplane. The single engine propeller airplane may have either the spin recovery or the slipstream rotation as a critical design condition. The single engine jet airplane may have a variety of critical items but the spin recovery requirement usually predominates.\n\n## LATERAL STABILITY AND CONTROL\n\n## LATERAL STABILITY\n\nThe static lateral stability of an airplane involves consideration of rolling moments due", + "recall": 0.909433962264151, + "true_md": "## NAVWEPS 00-8OT-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL\n\nspeed of the airplane in the lightest practical takeoff configuration. This will provide ade- quate directional control for the remaining conditions of flight. Once defined, the minimum directional con- \n\nhigh angles of attack is required to effect re- covery during a spin. Since the effectiveness of the vertical tail is reduced at large angles of attack, the directional control power neces- sary for spin recovery may produce a critical requirement of rudder power. SLIPSTREAM ROTATION. A critical di- \n\nrequirement of rudder power. SLIPSTREAM ROTATION. A critical di- rectional control requirement may exist when the propeller powered airplane is at high power and low airspeed. As shown in figure 4.26, the single rotation propeller induces a slipstream swirl which causes a change in flow direction at the vertical tail. The rudder must furnish sufficient control power to balance this condition and achieve zero sideslip. \n\nconditions of flight. Once defined, the minimum directional con- trol speed is not a function of weight, altitude, etc., but is simply the equivalent airspeed (or dynamic pressure). to produce a required yaw- ing moment with the maximum rudder deflec- tion. If the airplane is operated in the critical unbalance of power below the minimum con trol speed, the airplane will yaw uncontrolla- bly into the inoperative engine. In order to regain directional control below the minimum speed certain alternatives exist: reduce power on the operating engines or sacrifice altitude for airspeed. Neither alternative is satisfac- tory if the airplane is in a marginal condition of powered flight so due respect must be given to the minimum control speed. \n\nCROSSWIND TAKEOFF AND LANDING. Since the airplane must make a true path down the runway, a crosswind during takeoff or landing will require that the airplane be.con- trolled in a sideslip. The rudder must have sufficient control power to create the required sideslip for the expected crosswinds. \n\nDue to the side force on the vertical tail, a slight bank is necessary to prevent turning flight at zero sideslip. The inoperative engine will be raised and the inclined wing lift will provide a component of force to balance the 1 side force on the tail. In each of the critical conditions of required \n\nASYMMETRICAL POWER. The design of a multiengine airplane must account for the possibility of an engine failure at low airspeed. The unbalance of thrust from a condition of unsymmetrical power produces a yawing mo- ment dependent upon the thrust unbalance and the lever arm of the force. The deflection of the rudder will create a side force on the tail and contribute a yawing moment to balance the yawing moment due to the unbalance of thrust. Since the yawing moment coefficient from the unbalance of thrust will be greatest at low speed, the critical requirement will be at a low speed with the one critical engine out and the remaining engines at maximum power. Figure 4.26 compares the yawing moment coeflicient for maximum rudder deflec- tion with the yawing moment coefficient for the unbalance of thrust. The intersection of the two lines,determines the minimum speed for directional control, i.e., the lowest speed at which the rudder control moment can equal the moment of unbalanced thrust, It is usually specified that the minimum directional control speed be no greater than 1.2 times the stall \n\nside force on the tail. In each of the critical conditions of required directional control, high directional stability is desirable as it will reduce the displacement of the aircraft from any disturbing influence. Of course, directional control must he sufficient to attain zero sideslip. The critical control requirement for the multiengine airplane is the condition of asymmetrical power since spinning is not common to this type of airplane. The single engine propeller airplane may have either the spin recovery or the slipstream rota- tion as a critical design condition. The single engine jet airplane may have a variety of critical items but the spin recovery require- ment usually predominates. \n\nThe static lateral stability of an airplane involves consideration of rolling moments due \n\n## LATERAL STABILITY AND CONTROL\n\n## LATERAL STABILITY\n\n294 \n\nRevised January 1965" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7062594378058554, + "doc_id": "9b3e0d06bdd58927e0a80acc43ff89c61ad333d589d0968d4972e187899b143f", + "edit_distance": 0.3333333333333333, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9501763668430336, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS 00-801-80 HIGH SPEED AERODYNAMICS\n\nFigure 3.18. Generd Pknform Effects\n\nFigure 3.18. Generd Pknform Effects\n\n235", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-801-80 HIGH SPEED AERODYNAMICS \n\nFigure 3.18. Generd Pknform Effects \n\n235" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.3608647983367211, + "doc_id": "82841d49f6d115f152d8d5cbc0bcb8eb61214f6b519052144a4e80556b6050d7", + "edit_distance": 0.6756756756756757, + "f1_score": 0.8, + "meteor": 0.883114640883978, + "precision": 0.6666666666666666, + "pred_md": "THRUST\n\nREQUIRED\n\n(LB9\n\nVELOCITY-KNOTS\n\n(TAS)\n\nFigure 2.4. Ekf of Altitude on Thrust and Power Required\n\nFigure 2.4. Ekf of Altitude on Thrust and Power Required\n\n103\n\n## NAVWEPS Oo-8oT-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS Oo-8oT-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE \n\nFigure 2.4. Ekf of Altitude on Thrust and Power Required \n\n103" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.29375856725480254, + "doc_id": "3306705696cd306165abc1aaa60a4427c29a2cb9d332cb08f4098ebc88e44a1c", + "edit_distance": 0.6666666666666666, + "f1_score": 0.5714285714285714, + "meteor": 0.83251953125, + "precision": 0.4, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS 00-8OT-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS\n\n## DOWNWASH FLOW FIELD BEHIND A SWEPT,TAPERED WING ILLUSTRATED BY TUFT-GRID PHOTOGRAPHS 60° DELTA, AR=2.31, X = 0\n\nFROM\n\nFROM NACA TN 2674\n\nFROM NACA TN 2674\n\nFigure 1.33. Stall Patterns (sheet 7 of 8)\n\n84", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-8OT-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS \n\nFigure 1.33. Stall Patterns (sheet 7 of 8) \n\n84" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.18362020424206807, + "doc_id": "2f601c89257a19bffc28b3c23f92e79f40c8ac80c5c302173dc5b68b580dbc88", + "edit_distance": 0.6551724137931034, + "f1_score": 0.7692307692307692, + "meteor": 0.8369747899159665, + "precision": 0.625, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS GOdOT-\n\nAIRPLANE PERFORMANCE\n\n## CENTRIFUGAL COMPRESSOR\n\nAXIAL FLOW COMPRESSOR\n\nAXIAL FLOW COMPRESSOR\n\nCOMPRESSOR BLADING\n\nCOMPRESSOR BLADING\n\nFigure 2.7. Compressor Types\n\nFigure 2.7. Compressor Types\n\n110", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS GOdOT- AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE \n\nFigure 2.7. Compressor Types \n\n110" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4418463817237387, + "doc_id": "0a4aaef44d29e23274842991f40e1e75c9d20820759cf7953a60f5bbe7cfe8f6", + "edit_distance": 0.8636363636363636, + "f1_score": 0.9230769230769229, + "meteor": 0.9216295602571197, + "precision": 0.8571428571428571, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS 00-EOT-80\n\n## STABILITY AND CONTROL\n\nNON-OSCILLATORY\n\nMODES\n\nFigure 4.2. Dynamic Sfabihty\n\nFigure 4.2. Dynamic Sfabihty\n\n246", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Figure 4.2. Dynamic Sfabihty \n\n246 \n\n## NAVWEPS 00-EOT-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8044110435608378, + "doc_id": "89402e813743176d018d76463e137a9f7290add0c54d60593e79e63dbde1fe67", + "edit_distance": 0.802158273381295, + "f1_score": 0.9397590361445781, + "meteor": 0.7489423508117791, + "precision": 0.9669421487603306, + "pred_md": "## AIRSPACE INFORMATION (Continued)\n\n## Class C Airspace\n\nAppropriate notes as required may be shown.\n\n(Mode C see FAR 91.215/ AIM)\n\n## Class E Airspace\n\nThe limits of Class E airspace shall be shown by narrow vignettes or by the dashed magenta symbol. Individual units of designated airspace are not necessarily shown; instead, the aggre-\n\ngate lateral and vertical limits shall be defined by the following:\n\nAirspace beginning at the surface (sfc) designated around airports..\n\nAirspace beginning at 700 feet AGL that laterally abuts 1200 feet or higher Class E Airspace...\n\nAirspace beginning at 700 feet AGL that laterally abuts uncontrolled (Class G) airspace...\n\nAirspace beginning at 1200 feet AGL that laterally abuts uncontrolled (Class G) airspace...\n\nDifferentiates floors of airspace greater than 700 feet above the surface...\n\nWhen the ceiling is less than 18,000 feet MSL, the value prefixed by the word 'CEILING', shall be shown along the limits.\n\n27\n\n## Class D Airspace\n\nAltitude in hundreds of feet MSL\n\n(A minus in front of the figure is used to indicate 'from surface to but not including...')\n\nAirspace beginning at the surface (sfc) designated around airports...\n\nAirspace beginning at the surface with an airspace exclusion area where Class E airspace is excluded below 1200' MSL.\n\nFAA Chart Users' Guide - VFR Symbology - Sectional and Terminal Area Charts", + "recall": 0.9140625, + "true_md": "27\n\nFAA Chart Users’ Guide - VFR Symbology - Sectional and Terminal Area Charts\n\n## AIRSPACE INFORMATION (Continued)\n\n## Class D Airspace\n\n## Class C Airspace\n\n## Class E Airspace\n\nWhen the ceiling is less than 18,000 feet MSL, the value prefixed by the word “CEILING”, shall be shown along the limits.\n\nDifferentiates floors of airspace greater than 700 feet above the surface... \n\nAirspace beginning at 1200 feet AGL that laterally abuts uncontrolled (Class G) airspace...\n\nAirspace beginning at 700 feet AGL that laterally abuts uncontrolled (Class G) airspace...\n\nAirspace beginning at 700 feet AGL that laterally abuts 1200 feet or higher Class E Airspace...\n\nAirspace beginning at the surface (sfc) designated around air- ports.. \n\nAirspace beginning at the surface with an airspace exclusion area where Class E airspace is ex- cluded below 1200’ MSL.\n\ninstead, the aggre- gate lateral and vertical limits shall be defined by the following:\n\nThe limits of Class E airspace shall be shown by narrow vignettes or by the dashed magenta symbol. Individual units of designated airspace are not necessarily shown; instead, the aggre- gate lateral and vertical limits shall be defined by the following:\n\nAirspace beginning at the surface (sfc) desig- nated around airports...\n\n(A minus in front of the figure is used to indicate “from surface to but not including...”)\n\nAltitude in hundreds of feet MSL\n\nAppropriate notes as required may be shown. \n\n(Mode C see FAR 91.215/ AIM)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.558436019234981, + "doc_id": "0b81210cb75f0d6a526e00a11ba20634bd04dcc1e81d239f9be54a3aecdce8bf", + "edit_distance": 0.4074074074074074, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9213952850877193, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS OD-BOT-80\n\nSTABILITY AND CONTROL\n\nFigure 4.10. Stability Build-up and Effect of C.G. Positim\n\nFigure 4.10. Stability Build-up and Effect of C.G. Positim", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OD-BOT-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL \n\nFigure 4.10. Stability Build-up and Effect of C.G. Positim" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8015310754076442, + "doc_id": "2b14ac0a7bb374e66d02dceddac4e243d5bb216a36f090fbef15816898cebcb6", + "edit_distance": 0.7545931758530183, + "f1_score": 0.9344, + "meteor": 0.6874615525219155, + "precision": 0.9636963696369637, + "pred_md": "design features which result in a large positive dihedral effect are high sweepback, high wing position, or large, high vertical tail, When the inertia axis is inclined below the aerodynamic axis at low or negative angles of attack, the roll induced inertia couple results in proverse yaw.\n\nDepending on the flight condition where the roll coupling problem exists, four basic types of airplane behavior are possible:\n\n- (1) Coupled motion stable but unacceptabk. In this case the motion is stable but proves unacceptable because of poor damping of the motion. Poor damping would make it dificult to track a target or the initial amplitudes of the motion may be great enough to cause structural failure of loss of control.\n- (2) Coupled motion stable and acceptable. The behavior of the airplane is stable and adequately damped to allow acceptable target tracking. The amplitudes of motion are too slight to result in structural failure or loss of control.\n- (3) Coupled motion divergent and unacceptable. The rate of divergence is too rapid for the pilot to recognize the condition and recover prior' to structural failure or complete loss of control.\n- (4) Coupled. motion divergent but acceptable. For such a condition the rate of divergence is quite slow and considerable roll displacement is necessary to produce a critical amplitude. The condition can be recognized easily in time to take corrective action.\n\nThere are available various means to cope with the problem of roll coupling. The following items can be applied to control the problem of roll coupling:\n\n- (ZZ) Increase directional stability.\n- (b) Reduce dihedral effect.\n- (c) M' mnmze t h e mc mation 1' of the inertia axis at normal flight conditions.\n- (d) Reduce undesirable aerodynamic coupling.\n- (e) Limit roll rate, roll duration, and angle of attack or load factor for performing rolling maneuvers.\n\n319\n\n## NAVWEPS DD-EOT-80 STABMTY AND CONTROL\n\nThe first four items can be effected,only during design or by design changes. Some roll performance restriction is inevitable since all of the desirable characteristics are difficult to obtain without serious compromise elsewhere in the airplane design. The typical high speed airplane will have some sort of roll petformance limitation provided by flight restrictions or automatic control devices to prevent reaching some critical condition from which recovery is impossible. Any roll restriction provided an airplane must be regarded as a principal flight operating limitation since the more severe motions can cause complete loss of control and structural failure.\n\n## HELICOPTER STABILITY AND CONTROL\n\nIn discussing many of the problems of stability and control that occur in high speed airplanes, one might be prone to believe that the slow flying helicopter does not have any such problems. Unfortunately, this is not the case. Flying qualities that would be considered totally unsatisfactory by fixed-wing standards ate normal for helicopters. Helicopter pilots are living evidence that an unstable aircraft ca. k' .: controlled. Also, they are evidence ~a. control without stability requires constant attention and results in considerable pilot fatigue.\n\n' Inertia coupling' problems are relatively new to fixed-wing aircraft but a similar effect in the helicopter rotor has resulted in some of its most important characteristics. This aerodynamic-dynamic coupling effect is so important that it must be considered in discussing both stability and control. The helicopter derives both longitudinal and lateral control by tilting the main rotor and thus producing a pltchmg or rolling moment as indicated in figure 4.35. The magnitude of the rotor thrust the angle of tilt, and the height of the rotor hub above the c.g. determine the control moment produced. It should be noted that low control effectiveness would result when the rotor thrust is low. Some helicopters", + "recall": 0.906832298136646, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS DD-EOT-80 STABMTY AND CONTROL \n\nThe first four items can be effected,only during design or by design changes. Some roll per- formance restriction is inevitable since all of the desirable characteristics are difficult to obtain without serious compromise elsewhere in the airplane design. The typical high speed airplane will have some sort of roll pet- formance limitation provided by flight restric- tions or automatic control devices to prevent reaching some critical condition from which recovery is impossible. Any roll restriction provided an airplane must be regarded as a principal flight operating limitation since the more severe motions can cause complete loss of control and structural failure. \n\ndesign features which result in a large positive dihedral effect are high sweepback, high wing position, or large, high vertical tail, When the inertia axis is inclined below the aero- dynamic axis at low or negative angles of attack, the roll induced inertia couple results in proverse yaw. \n\nDepending on the flight condition where the roll coupling problem exists, four basic types of airplane behavior are possible: \n\n(1) Coupled motion stable but unacceptabk. In this case the motion is stable but proves unacceptable because of poor damping of the motion. Poor damping would make it dificult to track a target or the initial am- plitudes of the motion may be great enough to cause structural failure of loss of control. \n\n(2) Coupled motion stable and acceptable. The behavior of the airplane is stable and adequately damped to allow acceptable target tracking. The amplitudes of motion are too slight to result in structural failure or loss of control. \n\n(3) Coupled motion divergent and unacceptable. The rate of divergence is too rapid for the pilot to recognize the condition and recover prior’ to structural failure or complete loss of control. \n\nIn discussing many of the problems of sta- bility and control that occur in high speed airplanes, one might be prone to believe that the slow flying helicopter does not have any such problems. Unfortunately, this is not the case. Flying qualities that would be con- sidered totally unsatisfactory by fixed-wing standards ate normal for helicopters. Heli- copter pilots are living evidence that an un- stable aircraft ca. k ‘ .: controlled. Also, they are evidence ~a. control without stability requires constant attention and results in con- siderable pilot fatigue. \n\n(4) Coupled. motion divergent but acceptable. For such a condition the rate of divergence is quite slow and considerable roll displace- ment is necessary to produce a critical ampli- tude. The condition can be recognized easily in time to take corrective action. \n\n“Inertia coupling” problems are relatively new to fixed-wing aircraft but a similar effect in the helicopter rotor has resulted in some of its most important characteristics. This aerodynamic-dynamic coupling effect is so im- portant that it must be considered in discussing both stability and control. The helicopter derives both longitudinal and lateral control by tilting the main rotor and thus producing a pltchmg or rolling moment as indicated in figure 4.35. The magnitude of the rotor thrust the angle of tilt, and the height of the rotor hub above the c.g. determine the control moment produced. It should be noted that low control effectiveness would result when the rotor thrust is low. Some helicopters \n\nThere are available various means to cope with the problem of roll coupling. The fol- lowing items can be applied to control the problem of roll coupling: (ZZ) Increase directional stability. \n\nproblem of roll coupling: (ZZ) Increase directional stability. (b) Reduce dihedral effect. \n\n(ZZ) Increase directional stability. (b) Reduce dihedral effect. (c) M’ h 1‘ \n\n(b) Reduce dihedral effect. (c) M’ h 1‘ mnmze t e mc mation of the inertia axis at normal flight conditions. (d) Reduce undesirable \n\naxis at normal flight conditions. (d) Reduce undesirable aerodynamic coupling. (e) Limit roll rate, roll duration, and \n\ncoupling. (e) Limit roll rate, roll duration, and angle of attack or load factor for performing rolling maneuvers. \n\n319 \n\n## HELICOPTER STABILITY AND CONTROL" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.06494316600039413, + "doc_id": "9011449e1aa7a84dc2d4fd43542ee858d682e32d1d68a7cdfa2bdd47f78a1f8d", + "edit_distance": 0.9492537313432836, + "f1_score": 0.18300653594771243, + "meteor": 0.30724137210808106, + "precision": 0.10144927536231885, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS 00401-80 TABLE OF CONTENTS\n\n## CHAPTER 6. APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC ROBLEMS OF FLYING P\n\n| PRIMARY CONTROL OF AIRSPEED AND ALTITUDE.. Angle of attack versus airspeed | 349 |\n|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|-------|\n| Rate of climb and descent Flying technique REGION OF REVERSED COMMAND. . | 353 |\n| THE ANGLE OF ATTACK INDICATOR AND THE MIRROR LANDING SYSTEM. . The angle of attack indicator The mirror landing system | 357 |\n| THE APPROACH AND LANDING., The approach The landing flare and touchdown Typical errors | 360 |\n| THE TAKEOFF.. Takeoff speed and distance Typical errors | 365 |\n| GUSTS AND WIND SHEAR.. \\_. t,. Vertical and horizontal gusts | 367 |\n| POWER-OFF GLIDE PERFORMANCE. . Glide angle and lift-drag ratio Factors affecting glide performance The flameout pattern | 369 |\n| EFFECTOF ICE AND FROST ON AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE.. Effect of ice Effect of frost | 373 |\n| ENGINE FAILURE ON THE MULTI-ENGINE AIRPLANE. Effecf of weight and altihtde Control requirements | 376 |\n| Effeti on performance Etrect of turning flight and configuration GROUND EFFECT., \\_, Aerodynamic influence of ground effect Ground effect on specific flight conditions | 379 |\n| INTERFERENCE BETWEEN AIRPLANES IN FLIGHT.. Effect of lateral, vertical, and IongiNdinal separation Collision possibility | 383 |\n\nmrx", + "recall": 0.9333333333333333, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00401-80 TABLE OF CONTENTS \n\n## CHAPTER 6. APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYING" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "e5c3704104bef6a4528cb712ac705bde389b021a6e4b9da1cceba75594ab12d8", + "edit_distance": 0.9492537313432836, + "f1_score": 0.18300653594771243, + "meteor": 0.30724137210808106, + "precision": 0.10144927536231885, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.9333333333333333, + "true_md": "" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8179939645749099, + "doc_id": "621f971dad8d5bf5a6a72fed6f89f3020aea869d81a4748e84a726c84b2a3c23", + "edit_distance": 0.6209239130434783, + "f1_score": 0.9094269870609981, + "meteor": 0.6970417386662087, + "precision": 0.9609375, + "pred_md": "can be assumed to take place with negligible changes in velocity. The second mode consists of a pitching oscillation during which the airplane is being restored to equilibrium by the static stability and the amplitude of oscillation decreased by pitch damping. The typical motion is of relatively high frequency with a period of oscillation on the order of 6.5 to 5 seconds.\n\nFor the conventional subsonic airplane, the second mode stick-fixed is characterized by heavy damping with a time to damp to half amplitude of approximately 0.5 seconds. IJsually, if the airplane has static stability stickfixed, the pitch damping contributed by the horizontal tail will assume sufficient dynamic stability for the short period oscillation. However, the second mode stick-free has the possibility of weak damping or unstable oscillations. This is the case where static stability does not automatically imply adequate dynamic stability. The second mode stick-free is essentially a coupling of motion between the airplane short period pitching motion and elevator in rotation about the hinge line. Extreme care must be taken in the design of the control surfaces to ensure dynamic stability for this mode. The elevators must be statically balanced about the hinge line and aerodynamic balance must be within certain limits. Control system friction must be minimized as it contributes to the oscillatory tendency. If instability were to exist in the second mode, ' porpoising' of the airplane would result with possibility of structural damage. An oscillation at high dynamic pressures with large changes in angle of attack could produce severe flight loads.\n\nThe second mode has relatively short periods that correspond closely with the normal pilot response lag time, e.g., 1 or 2 seconds or less. There is the possibility that an attempt to forceably damp an oscillation may actually reinforce the oscillation and produce instability. This is particularly true in the case of powered controls where a small input energy into the\n\n?Bl\n\nNAVWEPS 00-BOT-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL\n\ncontrol system is greatly magnified. In addition, response lag of the controls may add to the problem of attempting to forceably damp the oscillation. In this case, should an oscillation appear, the best rule is to release the controls as the airplane stick-free will demonstrate the necessary damping, Even an attempt to fix the controls when the airplane is oscillating may result in a small unstable input into the control system which can reinforce the oscillation to produce failing flight loads. Because of the very short period of the oscillation, the amplitude of an unstable oscillation can reach dangerous proportions in an extremely short period of time.\n\nThe third mode occurs in the elevator free case and is usually a very short period oscillation. The motion is essentially one of the elevator flapping about the hinge line and, in most cases, the oscillation has very heavy damping. A typical flapping mode may have a period of 0.3 to 1.5 seconds and a time to damp to halfamplitude of approximately 0.1 second.\n\nOf all the modes of longitudinal dynamic stability, the second mode or porpoising oscillation is of greatest importance. The porpoising oscillation has the possibility of damaging flight loads and can be adversely affected by pilot response lag. It should be remembered that when stick-free the airplane will demonstrate the necessary damping.\n\nThe problems of dynamic stability are acute under certain conditions of flight. Low static stability generally increases the period (decreases frequency) of the short period oscillations and increases the time to damp to halfamplitude. High altitude-and consequently low density-reduces the aerodynamic damping. Also, high Mach numbers of supersonic flight produce a decay of aerodynamic damping.\n\n## MODERN CONTROL SYSTEMS\n\nIn order to accomplish the stability and control objectives, various configurations of control systems are necessary. Generally, the", + "recall": 0.8631578947368421, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-BOT-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL \n\ncontrol system is greatly magnified. In addi- tion, response lag of the controls may add to the problem of attempting to forceably damp the oscillation. In this case, should an oscilla- tion appear, the best rule is to release the con- trols as the airplane stick-free will demonstrate the necessary damping, Even an attempt to fix the controls when the airplane is oscillating may result in a small unstable input into the control system which can reinforce the oscilla- tion to produce failing flight loads. Because of the very short period of the oscillation, the amplitude of an unstable oscillation can reach dangerous proportions in an extremely short period of time. The third mode occurs in the elevator free case \n\ncan be assumed to take place with negligible changes in velocity. The second mode consists of a pitching oscillation during which the air- plane is being restored to equilibrium by the static stability and the amplitude of oscillation decreased by pitch damping. The typical mo- tion is of relatively high frequency with a period of oscillation on the order of 6.5 to 5 seconds. For the conventional subsonic airplane, the \n\nseconds. For the conventional subsonic airplane, the second mode stick-fixed is characterized by heavy damping with a time to damp to half amplitude of approximately 0.5 seconds. IJsu- ally, if the airplane has static stability stick- fixed, the pitch damping contributed by the horizontal tail will assume sufficient dynamic stability for the short period oscillation. How- ever, the second mode stick-free has the possi- bility of weak damping or unstable oscilla- tions. This is the case where static stability does not automatically imply adequate dy- namic stability. The second mode stick-free is essentially a coupling of motion between the airplane short period pitching motion and ele- vator in rotation about the hinge line. Ex- treme care must be taken in the design of the control surfaces to ensure dynamic stability for this mode. The elevators must be statically balanced about the hinge line and aerodynamic balance must be within certain limits. Control system friction must be minimized as it con- tributes to the oscillatory tendency. If insta- bility were to exist in the second mode, “por- poising” of the airplane would result with possibility of structural damage. An oscilla- tion at high dynamic pressures with large changes in angle of attack could produce severe flight loads. \n\nperiod of time. The third mode occurs in the elevator free case and is usually a very short period oscillation. The motion is essentially one of the elevator flapping about the hinge line and, in most cases, the oscillation has very heavy damping. A typical flapping mode may have a period of 0.3 to 1.5 seconds and a time to damp to half- amplitude of approximately 0.1 second. \n\nOf all the modes of longitudinal dynamic stability, the second mode or porpoising oscil- lation is of greatest importance. The por- poising oscillation has the possibility of damaging flight loads and can be adversely affected by pilot response lag. It should be remembered that when stick-free the airplane will demonstrate the necessary damping. The problems of dynamic stability are acute \n\nwill demonstrate the necessary damping. The problems of dynamic stability are acute under certain conditions of flight. Low static stability generally increases the period (de- creases frequency) of the short period oscil- lations and increases the time to damp to half- amplitude. High altitude-and consequently low density-reduces the aerodynamic damp- ing. Also, high Mach numbers of supersonic flight produce a decay of aerodynamic damping. \n\nThe second mode has relatively short periods that correspond closely with the normal pilot response lag time, e.g., 1 or 2 seconds or less. There is the possibility that an attempt to forceably damp an oscillation may actually re- inforce the oscillation and produce instability. This is particularly true in the case of powered controls where a small input energy into the \n\nIn order to accomplish the stability and control objectives, various configurations of control systems are necessary. Generally, the \n\n## MODERN CONTROL SYSTEMS\n\n?Bl" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8895037716652503, + "doc_id": "472f13b61c939bbec55eb2d4584096de2257cc4f78cbc409d58792a360c44fb3", + "edit_distance": 0.4628330995792426, + "f1_score": 0.9403973509933774, + "meteor": 0.7227159799814563, + "precision": 0.9815668202764977, + "pred_md": "2 of figure 2.12. Curve 2 of this illustration defines an upper limit of fuel flow which can be tolerated within stall-surge and temperature limits. The governing apparatus of the engine must limit the acceleration fuel flow within this boundary.\n\nTo appreciate the governing requirements during the acceleration process, assume the engine described in figure 2.12 is in steady state stabilized operation at point A and it is desired to acceler&the engine to maximum RPM and stabilize:at point C. As the throttle is placed at the position for maximum RPM, the fuel control will increase the fuel flow to point B to provide acceleration fuel flow. As the engine accelerates and increases RPM, the fuel control will continue to increase the fuel flow within the acceleration boundary until the engine speed approaches the controlled maximum RPM at point C. As the engine speed nears the maximum at point C, the fuel contrcl' will reduce fuel flow to produce stabilized operation at this point and prevent the engine overspeeding the commanded RPM. Of course, if the throttle is opened very gradually, the acceleration fuel flow is barely above the steady state condition and the engine does not approach the acceleration fuel flow boundary. While this technique is recommended for ordinary conditions to achieve trouble free operation and good service life, the engine must be capable of good acceleration to produce rapid thrust changes for satisfactory flight control.\n\nIn order for the powerplant to achieve minimum acceleration times, the fuel control must provide acceleration fuel flow as close as practical to the acceleration boundary. Thus, a maximum controlled acceleration may produce limiting turbine inlet temperatures or slight incipient stall-surge of the compressor. Proper maintenance and adjustment of the engine governing apparatus is essential to produce minimum acceleration times without incurring excessive temperatures or heavy stallsurge conditions.\n\n## NAVWEPS 00-8OT-30 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE\n\nDuring deceleration conditions, the minimum allowable fuel flow is defined by the lean limit to support combustion. If the fuel flow is reduced below some critical value at each RPM, lean blowout or flameout will occur. This condition is illustrated by curve 3 of figure 2.12 which forms the deceleration fuel flow boundary. The governing apparatus must regulate the deceleration fuel flow within this boundary.\n\nTo appreciate the governing requirements during the deceleration process, assume the engine described in figure 2.12 is in stabilized, steady state operation at point C and it is desired to decelerate to idle conditions and stabilize at point E. As the throttle is placed at the position for idle RPM, the fuel control will decrease the fuel flow to point D to provide the deceleration fuel flow. As the engine decelerates and decreases RPM, the fuel governing will continue to decrease the fuel flow within the deceleration boundary until the idle fuel flow is reached and RPM is established at point E. Of course, if the throttle is closed very slowly, the deceleration fuel flow is barely below the steady state condition and the engine does not approach the deceleration fuel flow boundary. The fuel control must provide a deceleration flow close to the boundary to provide rapid decrease in thrust and satisfactory flight control.\n\nIn most cases, the deceleration fuel flow boundary is considerably below the steady state fuel flow and no great problem exists in obtaining satisfactory deceleration characteristics. In fact, the greater problem is concerned with obtaining proper acceleration characteristics. For the majority of centrifugal flow engines, the acceleration boundary is set usually by temperature limiting conditions rather than compressor surge conditions. Peak operating efficiency of the centrifugal compressor is obtained at flow conditions which are below the surge limit, hence acceleration fuel flow boundary is determined by turbine temperature limits. The usual result is that\n\n123", + "recall": 0.902542372881356, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-8OT-30 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE \n\nDuring deceleration conditions, the mini- mum allowable fuel flow is defined by the lean limit to support combustion. If the fuel flow is reduced below some critical value at each RPM, lean blowout or flameout will occur. This condition is illustrated by curve 3 of figure 2.12 which forms the deceleration fuel flow boundary. The governing apparatus must regulate the deceleration fuel flow within this boundary. To appreciate the governing requirements \n\n2 of figure 2.12. Curve 2 of this illustration defines an upper limit of fuel flow which can be tolerated within stall-surge and tempera- ture limits. The governing apparatus of the engine must limit the acceleration fuel flow within this boundary. \n\nTo appreciate the governing requirements during the acceleration process, assume the engine described in figure 2.12 is in steady state stabilized operation at point A and it is desired to acceler&the engine to maximum RPM and stabilize:at point C. As the throttle is placed at the position for maximum RPM, the fuel control will increase the fuel flow to point B to provide acceleration fuel flow. As the engine accelerates and increases RPM, the fuel control will continue to increase the fuel flow within the acceleration boundary until the engine speed approaches the controlled maxi- mum RPM at point C. As the engine speed nears the maximum at point C, the fuel contrcl’ will reduce fuel flow to produce stabilized oper- ation at this point and prevent the engine overspeeding the commanded RPM. Of course, if the throttle is opened very gradually, the acceleration fuel flow is barely above the steady state condition and the engine does not ap- proach the acceleration fuel flow boundary. While this technique is recommended for ordinary conditions to achieve trouble free operation and good service life, the engine must be capable of good acceleration to produce rapid thrust changes for satisfactory flight control. In order for the powerplant to achieve mini- \n\nboundary. To appreciate the governing requirements during the deceleration process, assume the engine described in figure 2.12 is in stabilized, steady state operation at point C and it is desired to decelerate to idle conditions and stabilize at point E. As the throttle is placed at the position for idle RPM, the fuel control will decrease the fuel flow to point D to provide the deceleration fuel flow. As the engine decelerates and decreases RPM, the fuel gov- erning will continue to decrease the fuel flow within the deceleration boundary until the idle fuel flow is reached and RPM is established at point E. Of course, if the throttle is closed very slowly, the deceleration fuel flow is barely below the steady state condition and the engine does not approach the deceleration fuel flow boundary. The fuel control must provide a deceleration flow close to the boundary to provide rapid decrease in thrust and satisfactory flight control. In most cases, the deceleration fuel flow \n\nflight control. In most cases, the deceleration fuel flow boundary is considerably below the steady state fuel flow and no great problem exists in obtaining satisfactory deceleration character- istics. In fact, the greater problem is con- cerned with obtaining proper acceleration characteristics. For the majority of centrifu- gal flow engines, the acceleration boundary is set usually by temperature limiting conditions rather than compressor surge conditions. Peak operating efficiency of the centrifugal com- pressor is obtained at flow conditions which are below the surge limit, hence acceleration fuel flow boundary is determined by turbine temperature limits. The usual result is that \n\ncontrol. In order for the powerplant to achieve mini- mum acceleration times, the fuel control must provide acceleration fuel flow as close as practical to the acceleration boundary. Thus, a maximum controlled acceleration may pro- duce limiting turbine inlet temperatures or slight incipient stall-surge of the compressor. Proper maintenance and adjustment of the engine governing apparatus is essential to produce minimum acceleration times without incurring excessive temperatures or heavy stall- surge conditions. \n\n123" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4226405630978418, + "doc_id": "ad36271070c0b3700fc57ae10046e2a5d377900200b7d5ac81646a07ff9ac4d6", + "edit_distance": 0.5714285714285714, + "f1_score": 0.7894736842105263, + "meteor": 0.8739869281045752, + "precision": 0.6521739130434783, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS 00-801-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE\n\n## FORCES ACTING ON THE AIRPLANE DURING LAUDING ROLL\n\nFigure 2.34. Forces Acting on Airplane During Landing Roll\n\nFigure 2.34. Forces Acting on Airplane During Landing Roll\n\n194", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-801-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE \n\nFigure 2.34. Forces Acting on Airplane During Landing Roll \n\n194" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.2797836537546968, + "doc_id": "703ccb00bbd8c491780be8a22632c59b2533de33bd48426fddd3943cb9f060a8", + "edit_distance": 0.6842105263157895, + "f1_score": 0.5714285714285714, + "meteor": 0.8200152207001523, + "precision": 0.4, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS 00-EOT-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL\n\nTRIM TAB\n\nVARIABLE\n\nLAGGING TAB\n\nLEAOING TAB\n\nSERVO\n\nTAB\n\nLINKAGE\n\nHORN FREE TO\n\nPIVOT ON HINGE 13X6\n\nSPRING LLADED TAB\n\nSPRING LLADED TAB\n\nROTATES TAB UP\n\nFigure 4.18. Various Tab Devices\n\n274", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-EOT-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL \n\nFigure 4.18. Various Tab Devices \n\n274" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6943791127685994, + "doc_id": "4602514575c2969bcb1dfa85790cb1acdac21ef13859558380f0826f86c46c14", + "edit_distance": 0.2903225806451613, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9578115413764481, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS OO-ROT-RO AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE\n\n## EFFECT OF SUPERCHARGING ON ALTITUDE PERFORMANCE\n\nFigure 2.17. Fffect of Supercharging on Altitude Performonce\n\nFigure 2.17. Fffect of Supercharging on Altitude Performonce\n\n142", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OO-ROT-RO AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE \n\n## EFFECT OF SUPERCHARGING ON ALTITUDE PERFORMANCE\n\nFigure 2.17. Fffect of Supercharging on Altitude Performonce \n\n142" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.058520976682318114, + "doc_id": "47fac8d135b373ab7d8ef8e0e327b923e1a4387c8b24e00991a94a84c4978251", + "edit_distance": 0.926605504587156, + "f1_score": 0.23776223776223776, + "meteor": 0.3755672982322511, + "precision": 0.136, + "pred_md": "FAA Chart Users' Guide - IFR Enroute Symbology\n\n## RADIO AIDS TO NAVIGATION (Continued)\n\nFrequency Protection\n\nFrequency Protection usable range at 18,000' AGL - 40 NM\n\nFrequency Protection usable range at 12,000' AGL - 25 NM\n\n## DISTANCE MEASURING EQUIPMENT\n\nFacilities that operate in the 'Y' mode for DME reception\n\n## VOICE COMMUNICATIONS VIA NAVAID\n\nVoice Transmitted\n\nNo Voice Transmitted\n\n## NAVAID SHUTDOWN STATUS\n\nPART TIME OR ON-REQUEST\n\n(L)\n\n(T)\n\n(Y)\n\nVHF/UHF LF/MF\n\nVHF/UHF LF/MF\n\n## Navigation and Communication Boxes - Common Elements\n\n## AUTOMATED WEATHER BROADCAST SERVICES\n\nASOS/AWOS - Automated Surface Observing Station/Automated Weather Observing Station\n\n## LATITUDE AND LONGITUDE\n\nLatitude and Longitude coordinates are provided for those NAVAIDs that make up part of a route/airway or a holding pattern. All TACAN facilities will include geographic coordinates.\n\nVHF/UHF\n\nLF/MF\n\n## LOW ENROUTE HIGH ENROUTE\n\n## Navigation and Communication Boxes - Examples\n\n## LOW ENROUTE CHARTS\n\n## VOR\n\nR - Receive only 122.1R\n\nControlling FSS Name - ANDERSON\n\n(T) - Service Volume\n\nReceive & Transmit on 122.35 (T) - Service Volume Latitude and Longitude\n\nControlling FSS Name - MACON\n\n## HIGH ENROUTE CHARTS\n\nVOR\n\n72", + "recall": 0.9444444444444444, + "true_md": "72\n\nFAA Chart Users’ Guide - IFR Enroute Symbology\n\n## RADIO AIDS TO NAVIGATION (Continued)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8586262453028902, + "doc_id": "903175dcfae37cbfb65208782a2a518d15ad39a867b4267aec5c52bcb508da1f", + "edit_distance": 0.3825503355704698, + "f1_score": 0.9710982658959538, + "meteor": 0.8838696152408234, + "precision": 0.9767441860465116, + "pred_md": "- · DME arcs or Radius-to-Fix legs (RF) are shown as smooth arcs from a designated start point to a designated terminus.\n\n- · Visual segment Instrument approach procedures, including Copter approach procedures, that terminate or have missed approaches prior to the airport/heliport, and are authorized to proceed visually, will depict the visual flight path by a dashed line symbol from the missed approach point to the airport.\n\nOn RNAV charts where the visual track may only apply to a specific line of minima, the visual procedure track line will not be shown in the planview. There will be a note directed to that portion of the procedure track.\n\nTraditional (NAVAID) Approach RNAV Approach\n\nTraditional (NAVAID) Approach RNAV Approach\n\n101\n\nFAA Chart Users' Guide - Terminal Procedures Publication (TPP) - Terms", + "recall": 0.9655172413793104, + "true_md": "FAA Chart Users’ Guide - Terminal Procedures Publication (TPP) - Terms\n\n101\n\n- • Visual segment - Instrument approach procedures, including Copter approach procedures, that terminate or have missed approaches prior to the airport/heliport, and are authorized to proceed visually, will depict the visual flight path by a dashed line symbol from the missed approach point to the airport.\n\nOn RNA charts where the visual track may only apply to a specific line of minima, the visual procedure track line will not be shown in the planview. There will be a note directed to that portion of the procedure track.\n\n- • DME arcs or Radius-to-Fix legs (RF) are shown as smooth arcs from a designated start point to a designated terminus. \n\nTraditional (NAVAID) Approach\n\nRNAV Approach" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7724662001939179, + "doc_id": "f7ddec8522528cd5cd5dd92a54b655b0d6b69238b0bff3ecbcbf144afbb96d67", + "edit_distance": 0.3024054982817869, + "f1_score": 0.8854625550660792, + "meteor": 0.8046692414249904, + "precision": 0.9436619718309859, + "pred_md": "If the potential energy is represented by the static pressure, p, the sum of the potential and kinetic energy is the total pressure of the airstream.\n\n\n\nThis equation is the Bernoulli equation for ' i ncompressible flow. It is important to appreciate that the term >$pV2 has the units of pressure, psf. This term is one of the most important in all aerodynamics and appears so frequently t&it is given the name ' dynamic pressure' and the shorthand notation ' 4' .\n\n\n\nWith this definition it could be said that the sum of static and dynamic pressure in the flow tube remains constant.\n\nFigure 1.3 illustrates the variation of static, dynamic, and total pressure of air flowing through a closed tube. Note that the total pressure is con,stant throughout the length and any change in dynamic pressure produces the same magnitude change in static pressure.\n\nThe dynamic pressure of a free airstream is the one ' common denominator of all aerodynamic forces and moments. Dynamic pressure represents the kinetic energy of the free airstream and is a factor relating the capability for producing changes in static pressure on a surface. As defined, the dynamic, pressure varies directly as the density and the square of the velocity. Typical values of dynamic pressure, 4, are shown in table l-1 for various true airspeeds in the standard atmosphere. Notice that the dynamic pressure at some fixed velocity varies directly with the density ratio at any altitude. Also, appreciate the fact that at an altitude of 40,oM) feet (where the density ratio, b, is 0.2462) it is necessary to have a true air velocity twice that at sea level in order to product the same dynamic pressure.\n\n9\n\nNAVWEPS 00-801-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS\n\nTABLE l-l. Effect of Speed and Altitvde on Dwzmnic Prerrure\n\nAIRSPEED MEASUREMENT. If a symmetrically shaped object were placed in a moving airstream, the flow pattern typical of figure 1.4 would result. The airstream at the very nose of the object would stagnate and the relative flow velocity at this point would be zero. The airflow ahead of the object possesses some certain dynamic pressure and ambient static pressure. At the very nose of the object the local velocity will drop to zero and the airstream dynamic pressure will be converted into an increase in static pressure at the stagnation point. In other words, there will exist a static pressure at the stagnation point which is equal to the airstream total pressure-ambient static pressure plus dynamic pressure.\n\nAround the surface of the object the airflow will divide and the local velocity will increase from zero at the stagnation point to some maximum on the sides of the object. If friction and viscosity effects are neglected, the", + "recall": 0.8340248962655602, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-801-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS \n\nIf the potential energy is represented by the static pressure, p, the sum of the potential and kinetic energy is the total pressure of the air- stream. \n\nwhere H=total pressure, psf (sometimes re- \n\nferred to as “head ’ pressure) p=static pressure, psf. p=density, siugs per cu. ft. V= velocity, ft./set. \n\nThis equation is the Bernoulli equation for ‘ incompressible flow. It is important to ap- preciate that the term >$pV2 has the units of pressure, psf. This term is one of the most important in all aerodynamics and appears so frequently t&it is given the name “dynamic pressure” and the shorthand notation “4”. \n\n$$H=p+% P V’ $$\n\n$$q= dynamic pressure, psf = jgpv2 $$\n\nWith this definition it could be said that the sum of static and dynamic pressure in the flow tube remains constant. \n\nFigure 1.3 illustrates the variation of static, dynamic, and total pressure of air flowing through a closed tube. Note that the total pressure is con,stant throughout the length and any change in dynamic pressure produces the same magnitude change in static pressure. The dynamic pressure of a free airstream is \n\nthe same magnitude change in static pressure. The dynamic pressure of a free airstream is the one ‘ common denominator of all aero- dynamic forces and moments. Dynamic pres- sure represents the kinetic energy of the free airstream and is a factor relating the capability for producing changes in static pressure on a surface. As defined, the dynamic, pressure varies directly as the density and the square of the velocity. Typical values of dynamic pres- sure, 4, are shown in table l-1 for various true airspeeds in the standard atmosphere. Notice that the dynamic pressure at some fixed veloc- ity varies directly with the density ratio at any altitude. Also, appreciate the fact that at an altitude of 40,oM) feet (where the density ratio, b, is 0.2462) it is necessary to have a true air velocity twice that at sea level in order to product the same dynamic pressure. \n\nAround the surface of the object the airflow will divide and the local velocity will increase from zero at the stagnation point to some maximum on the sides of the object. If fric- tion and viscosity effects are neglected, the \n\nAIRSPEED MEASUREMENT. If a sym- metrically shaped object were placed in a moving airstream, the flow pattern typical of figure 1.4 would result. The airstream at the very nose of the object would stagnate and the relative flow velocity at this point would be zero. The airflow ahead of the object pos- sesses some certain dynamic pressure and ambient static pressure. At the very nose of the object the local velocity will drop to zero and the airstream dynamic pressure will be converted into an increase in static pressure at the stagnation point. In other words, there will exist a static pressure at the stagnation point which is equal to the airstream total pressure-ambient static pressure plus dynamic pressure. \n\n9 \n\nTABLE l-l. Effect of Speed and Altitvde on Dwzmnic Prerrure" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8782540427316745, + "doc_id": "ed38d43a085b3a2ad75230c62232d87f312ff7ec971350f4741e8d48c01e617f", + "edit_distance": 0.6838905775075987, + "f1_score": 0.91651865008881, + "meteor": 0.8353948986083121, + "precision": 0.9555555555555556, + "pred_md": "(4) Sweepback contributes to lateral stability in rhe same sense as dihedral. When the swept wing aircraft is placed in a sideslip, the wing into the wind experiences an increase in lift since the sweep is less and the wing away from the wind produces less lift since rhe sweep is greater. As shown in figure 3.15, the swept wing aircraft in a sideslip experiences lift changes and a subsequent rolling moment which tends to right the aircraft. This lateral stability conrribution depends on the sweepback and the lift coefficient of the wing. A highly swept wing operating at high lift coeflicient usually experiences such an excess of this lateral stability contribution that adequate controllability may be a significant problem. As shown, the swept wing has certain important advantages. However, the use of sweepback produces certain inevitable disadvantages which are important from the standpoint of both airplane design and flight operations. The most important of these disadvantages are as follows:\n\n(1) When sweepback is combined with taper there is an extremely powerful tendency for the wing to stall tip first. This pattern of stall is very undesirable since there would be little stall warning, a serious reduction in lateral control effectiveness, and the forward shift of the center of pressure would contribute to a nose up moment (' pitch up' or ' stick force lightening' ). Taper has its own effect of producing higher local lift coefhcients toward the tip and one of the effects of sweepback is very similar. All outboard wing sections are affected by the upwash of the preceding inboard sections and the lift distribution resulting from sweepback alone is similar to that of high taper.\n\nAn additional effect is the tendency to develop a strong spanwise flow of the boundary layer toward the tip when the wing is at high lift coefficients. This spanwise flow produces a relatively low energy boundary layer near the tip which can be easily sep-\n\n251\n\n## NAVWEPS 00-801-80\n\n## HIGH SPEED AERODYNAMICS\n\narated. The combined effect of taper and sweep present a considerable problem of tip stall and this is illustrated by the flow patterns of figure 3.16. Design for high speed performance may dictate high sweepback, while structural efficiency may demand a highly tapered planform. When such is the case, the wing may require extensive aerodynamic tailoring to provide a suitable stall pattern and a lift distribution at cruise condition which reduces drag due to lift. Washout of the tip, variation of section camber throughout span, flow fences, slats, leading edge extension, etc., are typical devices used to modify the stall pattern and minimize drag due to lift at cruise condition.\n\n(2) As shown by the lift curve of figure 3.15 the use of sweepback will reduce the lift curve slope and the subsonic maximum lift coefficient. It is important to note this case is definitely subsonic since sweepback may be used to improve the transonic maneuvering capability. Various sweep angles applied to wings of moderate aspect ratio produce these approximate effects on the subsonic lift characteristics:\n\nThe reduction of the low speed maximum lift coefficient (which is in addition to that lost due to tip stall) has very important implications in design. If wing loading is not reduced, stall speeds increase and subsonic maneuverability decreases. On the other hand, if wing loading is reduced, the increase in wing surface area may reduce the anticipated benefit of sweepback in the transonic flight regime. Since the requirements of performance predominate, certain increases of stall speeds, takeoff speeds,", + "recall": 0.8805460750853242, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-801-80 HIGH SPEED AERODYNAMICS \n\n(4) Sweepback contributes to lateral sta- bility in rhe same sense as dihedral. When the swept wing aircraft is placed in a side- slip, the wing into the wind experiences an increase in lift since the sweep is less and the wing away from the wind produces less lift since rhe sweep is greater. As shown in figure 3.15, the swept wing aircraft in a sideslip experiences lift changes and a sub- sequent rolling moment which tends to right the aircraft. This lateral stability conrribution depends on the sweepback and the lift coefficient of the wing. A highly swept wing operating at high lift coeflicient usually experiences such an excess of this lateral stability contribution that adequate controllability may be a significant problem. As shown, the swept wing has certain im- \n\narated. The combined effect of taper and sweep present a considerable problem of tip stall and this is illustrated by the flow pat- terns of figure 3.16. Design for high speed performance may dictate high sweepback, while structural efficiency may demand a highly tapered planform. When such is the case, the wing may require extensive aero- dynamic tailoring to provide a suitable stall pattern and a lift distribution at cruise condi- tion which reduces drag due to lift. Wash- out of the tip, variation of section camber throughout span, flow fences, slats, leading edge extension, etc., are typical devices used to modify the stall pattern and minimize drag due to lift at cruise condition. \n\n(2) As shown by the lift curve of figure 3.15 the use of sweepback will reduce the lift curve slope and the subsonic maximum lift coefficient. It is important to note this case is definitely subsonic since sweepback may be used to improve the transonic ma- neuvering capability. Various sweep angles applied to wings of moderate aspect ratio produce these approximate effects on the subsonic lift characteristics: \n\nportant advantages. However, the use of sweepback produces certain inevitable disad- vantages which are important from the stand- point of both airplane design and flight oper- ations. The most important of these disad- vantages are as follows: \n\n(1) When sweepback is combined with taper there is an extremely powerful tendency for the wing to stall tip first. This pattern of stall is very undesirable since there would be little stall warning, a serious reduction in lateral control effectiveness, and the for- ward shift of the center of pressure would contribute to a nose up moment (“pitch up” or “stick force lightening”). Taper has its own effect of producing higher local lift coefhcients toward the tip and one of the effects of sweepback is very similar. All outboard wing sections are affected by the upwash of the preceding inboard sections and the lift distribution resulting from sweep- back alone is similar to that of high taper. \n\nThe reduction of the low speed maximum lift coefficient (which is in addition to that lost due to tip stall) has very important implications in design. If wing loading is not reduced, stall speeds increase and sub- sonic maneuverability decreases. On the other hand, if wing loading is reduced, the increase in wing surface area may reduce the anticipated benefit of sweepback in the transonic flight regime. Since the require- ments of performance predominate, certain increases of stall speeds, takeoff speeds, \n\nAn additional effect is the tendency to develop a strong spanwise flow of the bound- ary layer toward the tip when the wing is at high lift coefficients. This spanwise flow produces a relatively low energy boundary layer near the tip which can be easily sep- \n\n251" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.895436850048049, + "doc_id": "6f486ed446819183094019f7d4711a82cb2e01d99734b43329eb186bdf3395b4", + "edit_distance": 0.7951807228915663, + "f1_score": 0.9894736842105265, + "meteor": 0.8724738581359398, + "precision": 0.9832635983263598, + "pred_md": "R\n\nR - Radial\n\nR - Receive\n\nR - Restricted Area (Special Use Airspace)\n\nRCO - Remote Communications Outlet\n\nRF - Radius-to-Fix\n\nRNAV - Area Navigation\n\nRNP - Required Navigation Performance\n\nRNP AR - Required Navigation Performance Authorization\n\nRequired\n\nROC - Required Obstacle Clearance\n\nRP - Right Pattern\n\nRVR - Runway Visual Range\n\nRVSM - Reduced Vertical Separation Minimum\n\nRwy - Runway\n\n## S\n\nS - South\n\nSAAAR - Special Aircraft and Aircrew Authorization Required\n\nSAAR - Special Aircraft and Aircrew Requirements\n\nSATNAV - Satellite Navigation\n\nSDF - Simplified Directional Facility\n\nSER - Start End of Runway\n\nSFAR - Special Flight Rules Area\n\nSFC - Surface\n\nSFRA - Special Flight Rules Area\n\nSIAPs - Standard Instrument Approach Procedures\n\nSID - Standard Instrument Departure\n\nSM - Statute Mile\n\nSMAR - Special Military Activity Routes\n\nSMGCS - Surface Movement Guidance and Control System\n\nSOIA - Simultaneous Offset Instrument Approaches\n\nSSV - Standard Service Volume\n\nSTAR - Standard Terminal Arrival Procedure\n\nSUA - Special Use Airspace\n\nSVFR - Special Visual Flight Rules\n\n## T\n\nT - Transmit\n\nTA - Travel Advisory\n\nTAA - Terminal Arrival Area\n\nTAC - Terminal Area Chart\n\nTACAN - Tactical Air Navigation\n\nTAS - True Air Speed\n\nTCA - Terminal Control Areas (Canada)\n\nTCH - Threshold Crossing Height\n\nTDZ - Touchdown Zone\n\nTDZE - Touchdown Zone Elevation\n\nTDZL - Touchdown Zone Lights\n\nTDZ/CL - Touchdown Zone/Centerline Lights\n\nTERPS - U.S. Standard for Terminal Instrument Procedures\n\nTFR - Temporary Flight Restriction\n\nTIBS - Telephone Information Briefing Service\n\nTIS-B - Traffic Information Service - Broadcast\n\n| TOC - Top of Climb |\n|---------------------------------------|\n| TOD - Top of Descent |\n| TODA - Takeoff Distance Available |\n| TOGA - Takeoff/Go Around |\n| TORA - Takeoff Runway Available |\n| TPP - Terminal Procedures Publication |\n| TRSA - Terminal Radar Service Area |\n| TWR - Tower |\n\n## U\n\nUC - Under Construction\n\nUHF - Ultra High Frequency\n\nUIR - Upper Information Region\n\nUNICOM - Universal Communications\n\nU.S. - United States\n\nUSA - United States Army\n\nUSAF - United States Air Force\n\nUSCG - United State Coast Guard\n\nUTA - Upper Control Area\n\n## V\n\nVCOA - Visual Climb Over Airport / Airfield\n\nVDA - Vertical Descent Angle\n\nVDP - Visual Decent Point\n\nVFR - Visual Flight Rules\n\nVGSI - Visual Glide Slope Indicator\n\nVHF - Very High Frequency\n\nVMC - Visual Meteorological Conditions\n\nVNAV - Vertical Navigation\n\nVOR - VHF Omnidirectional Radio Range\n\nVORTAC - VHF Omnidirectional Radio Range/Tactical Air Navigation\n\nVPA - Vertical Path Angle\n\nVR - Visual Route (Military)\n\n## W\n\nW - Warning Area (Special Use Airspace)\n\nW - West\n\nWAAS - Wide-Area Augmentation System\n\nWAC - World Aeronautical Chart\n\nWP - Waypoint\n\nWX CAM - Weather Camera (Alaska)\n\n131\n\nFAA Chart Users' Guide - Abbreviations", + "recall": 0.9957627118644068, + "true_md": "## R\n\n## S\n\n## U\n\n## V\n\n## T\n\n## W\n\n131\n\nFAA Chart Users’ Guide - Abbreviations\n\nTOC - Top of Climb TOD - Top of Descent TODA - Takeoff Distance Available TOGA - Takeoff/Go Around TORA - Takeoff Runway Available TPP - Terminal Procedures Publication TRSA - Terminal Radar Service Area TWR - Tower\n\nR - Radial R - Receive R - Restricted Area (Special Use Airspace) RCO - Remote Communications Outlet RF - Radius-to-Fix RNAV - Area Navigation RNP - Required Navigation Performance RNP AR - Required Navigation Performance Authorization Required ROC - Required Obstacle Clearance RP - Right Pattern RVR - Runway Visual Range RVSM - Reduced Vertical Separation Minimum Rwy - Runway\n\nUC - Under Construction UHF - Ultra High Frequency UIR - Upper Information Region UNICOM - Universal Communications U.S. - United States USA - United States Army USAF - United States Air Force USCG - United State Coast Guard UTA - Upper Control Area\n\nS - South SAAAR - Special Aircraft and Aircrew Authorization Required SAAR - Special Aircraft and Aircrew Requirements SATNAV - Satellite Navigation SDF - Simplified Directional Facility SER - Start End of Runway SFAR - Special Flight Rules Area SFC - Surface SFRA - Special Flight Rules Area SIAPs - Standard Instrument Approach Procedures SID - Standard Instrument Departure SM - Statute Mile SMAR - Special Military Activity Routes SMGCS - Surface Movement Guidance and Control System SOIA - Simultaneous Offset Instrument Approaches SSV - Standard Service Volume STAR - Standard Terminal Arrival Procedure SUA - Special Use Airspace SVFR - Special Visual Flight Rules\n\nVCOA - Visual Climb Over Airport / Airfield VDA - Vertical Descent Angle VDP - Visual Decent Point VFR - Visual Flight Rules VGSI - Visual Glide Slope Indicator VHF - Very High Frequency VMC - Visual Meteorological Conditions VNAV - Vertical Navigation VOR - VHF Omnidirectional Radio Range VORTAC - VHF Omnidirectional Radio Range/Tactical Air Navigation VPA - Vertical Path Angle VR - Visual Route (Military)\n\nW - Warning Area (Special Use Airspace) W - West WAAS - Wide-Area Augmentation System WAC - World Aeronautical Chart WP - Waypoint WX CAM - Weather Camera (Alaska)\n\nT - Transmit TA - Travel Advisory TAA - Terminal Arrival Area TAC - Terminal Area Chart TACAN - Tactical Air Navigation TAS - True Air Speed TCA - Terminal Control Areas (Canada) TCH - Threshold Crossing Height TDZ - Touchdown Zone TDZE - Touchdown Zone Elevation TDZL - Touchdown Zone Lights TDZ/CL - Touchdown Zone/Centerline Lights TERPS - U.S. Standard for Terminal Instrument Procedures TFR - Temporary Flight Restriction TIBS - Telephone Information Briefing Service TIS-B - Traffic Information Service - Broadcast" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "74f38127a72320dd7aa3d1af801ad5d5cb6ecdf7c3968e699b19802b0c895eb8", + "edit_distance": 0.7951807228915663, + "f1_score": 0.9894736842105265, + "meteor": 0.8724738581359398, + "precision": 0.9832635983263598, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.9957627118644068, + "true_md": "" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.42946831450777656, + "doc_id": "2aea9f0dae92b7b49d50f120b9c13ec367467495d3ce4876da4bb412c610ff66", + "edit_distance": 0.625, + "f1_score": 0.72, + "meteor": 0.5812089145422478, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS C&801-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE\n\nlS7\n\nlS7", + "recall": 0.5625, + "true_md": "Figure UP, Climb ad Desceni Pedormome \n\nlS7 \n\nNAVWEPS C&801-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5798442808829941, + "doc_id": "31b5fe178fed2e8a792a1427be1da68ce995720fa8e89ee9b66a740d9679dcdc", + "edit_distance": 0.391304347826087, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9382276400493083, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS DD-ROT-80\n\nBASIC AERODYNAMICS\n\nFigure 1.30. Wing Vortex System and Induced Flow\n\nFigure 1.30. Wing Vortex System and Induced Flow\n\n67", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS DD-ROT-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS \n\nFigure 1.30. Wing Vortex System and Induced Flow \n\n67" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.45046627229833414, + "doc_id": "53b2b49dbd5f47698e47becdc706eca41bdf0921ec9ac53176116c77f8095f34", + "edit_distance": 0.5, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.908203125, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Figure 5.4. Signikance o\\ the V-n Diagram\n\nFigure 5.4. Signikance o\\ the V-n Diagram", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Figure 5.4. Signikance o\\ the V-n Diagram" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5032370023805728, + "doc_id": "08ba30a24e259d51686e9508b29a8767221cf0803e3389236675b43c1cc1f3d1", + "edit_distance": 0.6129032258064516, + "f1_score": 0.9696969696969697, + "meteor": 0.9231608244320746, + "precision": 0.9411764705882353, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS OD-801-80 HIGN SPEED AEQODYNAMICJ\n\nFigure 3.9. Transonic Flow Patterns (sheet 2 of 2)\n\nFigure 3.9. Transonic Flow Patterns (sheet 2 of 2)", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Figure 3.9. Transonic Flow Patterns (sheet 2 of 2) \n\nNAVWEPS OD-801-80 \n\nHIGN SPEED AEQODYNAMICJ" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.2294725101101817, + "doc_id": "90a9b6d13d59a33f0f63b09c79730ae1c3eb1380b9682c0e535466b3a605c98c", + "edit_distance": 0.7777777777777778, + "f1_score": 0.6829268292682926, + "meteor": 0.854119425547997, + "precision": 0.5185185185185185, + "pred_md": "## FRICTION DRAG OF A SMOOTH FLAT PLATE\n\n## CONVENTIONAL AfdD LAMINAR FLOW SECTIONS\n\nFigure 7.25. Skin Friction Drag\n\nFigure 7.25. Skin Friction Drag\n\n55\n\nNAWWEPS OD-EOT-SO\n\nBASIC AERODYfflAMICS\n\nWeaised January 1965", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAWWEPS OD-EOT-SO BASIC AERODYfflAMICS \n\nFigure 7.25. Skin Friction Drag \n\nWeaised January 1965 \n\n55" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.40276720463657734, + "doc_id": "ecfae70b166d01aa88057576f4293201410d35a11aefe8cfb337e671312af636", + "edit_distance": 0.42857142857142855, + "f1_score": 0.9230769230769229, + "meteor": 0.9229651162790699, + "precision": 0.8571428571428571, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS DD-BOT-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS\n\nCAMBERED\n\nFigure 1.27. Development of Pitching Moments\n\nFigure 1.27. Development of Pitching Moments\n\nAIRFOIL\n\n48", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS DD-BOT-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS \n\nFigure 1.27. Development of Pitching Moments \n\n48" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.29941078791199854, + "doc_id": "2b3ec673ce81ac0ad079760fc1d87b76666dcb7dbc4828c29afe3afe180cd4bc", + "edit_distance": 0.8073394495412844, + "f1_score": 0.9829545454545455, + "meteor": 0.38137831538504124, + "precision": 0.9885714285714285, + "pred_md": "FAA Chart Users' Guide - Terminal Procedures Publication (TPP) - Terms\n\n## Airport Diagram Features:\n\n## 1. Runways\n\n- a. complete with magnetic headings (including magnetic variation and epoch year) and identifiers.\n- b. Runways under construction shall also be shown.\n- c. Runway dimensions, displaced thresholds, runway end elevations.\n- d. Runway surface composition\n- e. Weight bearing capacity (landing gear configuration or Pavement Classification Number)\n- f. Land and Hold Short (LAHSO) lines, ILS hold lines, Localizer/Glide Slope Critical Areas.\n- g. Arresting Gear. To include Engineered Materials Arresting System (EMAS).\n- 2. Taxiways, with identifiers. Taxiways under construction shall also be shown.\n- 3. Hot Spot locations.\n- 4. Parking areas, run-up pads, alert areas, landing pads, 'Non-Movement' areas (where pilot is NOT under air traffic control), ramps, aprons and hold pads.\n- 5. Turnarounds, blast pads, stopways, overruns, and clearways (include dimensions when known).\n- 6. Large tanks, including fueling area.\n- 7. Control towers (include tower height).\n- 8. Airport beacon.\n- 9. Helicopter pads.\n- 10. Radar reflectors.\n- 11. Highest obstruction within diagram boundary.\n- 12. Any building that pilot can taxi to. Other buildings to include terminal/ administration and Base operations, fire station, NWS, AFSS, FAA, FSDO, ANG, USCG, FBO.\n- 13. Comm Frequencies.\n\nNote: Star when used in the Comm Frequencies indicates part-time status. Check Chart Supplement for times of operation.\n\n116", + "recall": 0.9774011299435028, + "true_md": "## Airport Diagram Features:\n\nFAA Chart Users’ Guide - Terminal Procedures Publication (TPP) - Terms\n\n116\n\nNote: Star when used in the Comm Frequencies indicates part-time status. Check Chart Supplement for times of operation.\n\n- ANG, USCG, FBO. 13. Comm Frequencies. \n\n- boundary. 12. Any building that pilot can taxi to. Other buildings to include terminal/ administration and Base operations, fire station, NWS, AFSS, FAA, FSDO, ANG, USCG, FBO. 13. Comm Frequencies. \n\n- 10. Radar reflectors. 11. Highest obstruction within diagram boundary. 12. Any building that pilot can taxi to. \n\n- 9. Helicopter pads. 10. Radar reflectors. 11. Highest obstruction within diagram \n\n- 8. Airport beacon. 9. Helicopter pads. 10. Radar reflectors.\n\n- 7. Control towers (include tower height). 8. Airport beacon. 9. Helicopter pads.\n\n- 6. Large tanks, including fueling area. 7. Control towers (include tower height). 8. Airport beacon.\n\n- 5. Turnarounds, blast pads, stopways, overruns, and clearways (include dimensions when known). 6. Large tanks, including fueling area. 7. Control towers (include tower height).\n\n- control), ramps, aprons and hold pads. 5. Turnarounds, blast pads, stopways, overruns, and clearways (include dimensions when known). 6. Large tanks, including fueling area.\n\n- 3. Hot Spot locations. 4. Parking areas, run-up pads, alert areas, landing pads, “Non-Movement” areas (where pilot is NOT under air traffic control), ramps, aprons and hold pads. 5. Turnarounds, blast pads, stopways, overruns, and clearways (include dimensions when known).\n\n- 2. Taxiways, with identifiers. Taxiways under construction shall also be shown. 3. Hot Spot locations. 4. Parking areas, run-up pads, alert areas, landing pads, “Non-Movement” areas (where pilot is NOT under air traffic \n\n- 2. Taxiways, with identifiers. Taxiways under construction shall also be shown. 3. Hot Spot locations.\n\n- f. Land and Hold Short (LAHSO) lines, ILS hold lines, Localizer/Glide Slope Critical Areas. g. Arresting Gear. To include Engineered Materials Arresting System (EMAS). \n\n- e. Weight bearing capacity (landing gear configuration or Pavement Classification Number) f. Land and Hold Short (LAHSO) lines, ILS hold lines, Localizer/Glide Slope Critical Areas. g. Arresting Gear. To include Engineered Materials Arresting System (EMAS). \n\n- d. Runway surface composition e. Weight bearing capacity (landing gear configuration or Pavement Classification Number) f. Land and Hold Short (LAHSO) lines, ILS hold lines, Localizer/Glide Slope Critical Areas. \n\n- c. Runway dimensions, displaced thresholds, runway end elevations. d. Runway surface composition e. Weight bearing capacity (landing gear configuration or Pavement Classification Number)\n\n- b. Runways under construction shall also be shown. c. Runway dimensions, displaced thresholds, runway end elevations. d. Runway surface composition \n\n- a. complete with magnetic headings (including magnetic variation and epoch year) and identifiers. b. Runways under construction shall also be shown. c. Runway dimensions, displaced thresholds, runway end elevations. \n\n- a. complete with magnetic headings (including magnetic variation and epoch year) and identifiers. b. Runways under construction shall also be shown. \n\n- 1. Runways" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7149386152066958, + "doc_id": "8af804754e8eb4963899d0999191f2f5983b197bf3e23dabefbf7c6b5cd207fe", + "edit_distance": 0.41025641025641024, + "f1_score": 0.9629629629629629, + "meteor": 0.9392838178680473, + "precision": 0.9629629629629629, + "pred_md": "FAA Chart Users' Guide - VFR Symbology - Flyway Planning Charts\n\n## HYDROGRAPHY\n\n## Shorelines\n\n## RELIEF\n\n## Spot Elevations\n\nPosition Accurate Mountain Peaks\n\n48\n\n## Reservoirs\n\n## Major Lakes and Rivers", + "recall": 0.9629629629629629, + "true_md": "48\n\nFAA Chart Users’ Guide - VFR Symbology - Flyway Planning Charts\n\n## HYDROGRAPHY\n\n## Reservoirs\n\n## Major Lakes and Rivers\n\n## RELIEF\n\nSpot Elevations Position Accurate Mountain Peaks\n\n## Shorelines" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5307712171072443, + "doc_id": "60e836baec5e99ce4312386e69bb51c7bc8dc973d4054b58ed64e3f34113d8a0", + "edit_distance": 0.3, + "f1_score": 0.8999999999999999, + "meteor": 0.8833333333333334, + "precision": 0.9, + "pred_md": "FAA Chart Users' Guide - IFR Enroute Symbology\n\n90", + "recall": 0.9, + "true_md": "90\n\nFAA Chart Users’ Guide - IFR Enroute Symbology" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.909080605936806, + "doc_id": "997f3d7a52433b488825d16e9e11579acd550448621f20b0ceafba9ec43fc778", + "edit_distance": 0.23529411764705882, + "f1_score": 0.9888888888888888, + "meteor": 0.9847183894133786, + "precision": 0.9888888888888889, + "pred_md": "FAA Chart Users' Guide - Terminal Procedures Publication (TPP) - Terms\n\n## NAVAIDS\n\nNAVAIDs used on ground based charts will show the appropriate symbol accompanied by a data box that contains the facility name, frequency, identifier and Morse code. A NAVAID box with a heavy line indicates the primary NAVAID used for the approach.\n\nNAVAIDs used on GPS based charts show the appropriate symbol identified with the name and identifier.\n\n## Localizer Depiction\n\nThe localizer is depicted in the Planview using the following symbol. The size of the charted localizer symbol does not serve as an indication of the service volume.\n\n## Restrictive Airspeeds Along the Procedure Track\n\nRestrictive airspeeds along the procedure track are shown paired with their respective fix/facility.\n\n102", + "recall": 0.9888888888888889, + "true_md": "## NAVAIDS\n\n## Localizer Depiction\n\n## Restrictive Airspeeds Along the Procedure Track\n\nFAA Chart Users’ Guide - Terminal Procedures Publication (TPP) - Terms\n\n102\n\nNAVAIDs used on ground based charts will show the appropriate symbol accompanied by a data box that contains the facility name, frequency, identifier and Morse code. A NAVAID box with a heavy line indicates the primary NAVAID used for the approach.\n\nNAVAIDs used on GPS based charts show the appropriate symbol identified with the name and identifier.\n\nThe localizer is depicted in the Planview using the following symbol. The size of the charted localizer symbol does not serve as an indication of the service volume.\n\nRestrictive airspeeds along the procedure track are shown paired with their respective fix/facility." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7598356856515925, + "doc_id": "204100f39e39342580ea94898739f2f02592ceca98434240727ad8309d9f9a96", + "edit_distance": 0.3333333333333333, + "f1_score": 0.8888888888888888, + "meteor": 0.9449404761904763, + "precision": 0.8, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS 00-801-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-801-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6158787442830632, + "doc_id": "64e7558ce84acbd30293b442538b9154a2997108457cd915d480eebbdb4072db", + "edit_distance": 0.42857142857142855, + "f1_score": 0.9600000000000002, + "meteor": 0.9280792420327305, + "precision": 0.9230769230769231, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS 00-801-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE\n\nFigure 2.28. Effect of Turning Flight\n\nFigure 2.28. Effect of Turning Flight\n\n177", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-801-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE \n\nFigure 2.28. Effect of Turning Flight \n\n177" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9041507636924357, + "doc_id": "9e08a3197046b519ff4236e8b6926d6b70ff0b2977a15ee810240d16646f7150", + "edit_distance": 0.6991260923845194, + "f1_score": 0.9409523809523811, + "meteor": 0.7596428628368062, + "precision": 0.9610894941634242, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS DO-ROT-80 APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS\n\n## TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYING\n\nusually means remaining over a particular spot on the ground, it shall be considered here as flight at zero airspeed. This is necessary because the aerodynamic characteristics of the rotor depend on its motion with respect to the air and not the ground. Hovering in a 20 knot wind is aerodynamically equivalent to flying at an airspeed of 20 knots in a no-wind condition, and the characteristics will be identical in the two conditions.\n\nThe first point to realize is that the rotor is subject to the same physical l aws of aerodynamics and motion that govern flight of the fixed-wing airplane. The manner in which the rotor is subject to these laws is much more complicated due to the complex flow conditions.\n\nRotor lift can be explained by either of two methods. The first method, utilizing simple momentum theory based on Newton' s Laws, merely states that lift results from the rotor accelerating a mass of air downward in the same way that the jet engine develops thrust by accelerating a mass of air out the tailpipe. The second method of viewing rotor lift concerns the pressure forces acting on the various sections of the blade from root to tip. The simple momentum theory is useful in determining only lift characteristics while the ' blade element' theory gives drag as well as lift characteristics and is useful in giving a picture of the forces at work on the rotor. In the ' blade element' theory, the blade is divided up into ' blade elements' as shown in figure 6.15. The forces acting on each blade element are analyzed. Then the forces on all elements are summed up to give the characteristics of the whole rotor. The relative wind acting on each segment is the resultant of two velocity components: (1) the velocity due CO the rotation of the blades about the hub and (2) the i nduced velocity, or downwash velocity caused by the rotor. the velocity due to rotation at a particular element is proportional to the rotor speed and the distance of the element from the rotor hub.\n\nThus, the velocity due to rotation varies linearly from zero at the hub to a maximum at the tip. A typical blade section with the forces acting on it is shown in figure 6.15.\n\nA summation of the forces acting perpendicular to the plane of rotation (tip path plane) will determine the rotor thrust (or lift) characteristics while summation of the moments resulting from forces acting in the plane of rotation will determine the rotor torque characteristics. As a result of this analysis, the rotor thrust (or lift) is found to be propoctional to the air density, a nondimensional thrust coefficient, and the square of the tip speed, or linear speed of the tip of the blade. The thrust coefficient is a function of the average blade section lift coefficient and the rotor solidity, which is the proportion of blade area to disc area. The lift coefficient is identical to that used in airplane aerodynamics while the solidity is analagous to the aspect ratio in airplane aerodynamics. The rotor torque is found to be proportional to a nondimensional torque coefficient, the air density, the disc area, the square of the tip speed, and the blade radius. The torque coefficient is dependent upon the average profile drag coefficient of the blades, the blade pitch angle, and the average lift coefficient of the blades. The torque can be thought to result from components of profile and induced drag forces acting on the blades, similar to those on an airplane.\n\nAs in the airplane, there is one angle of attack or blade pitch condition that will result in the most efficient operation. Unfortunately, the typical helicopter rotor operates at a near constant RPM and thus a constant true airspeed and cannot operate at this most eficient condition over a wide range of altitude and gross weight as the fixed-wing airplane. The airplane is able to maintain an efficient angle of attack at various altitudes, and gross weights by flying at various airspeeds but the helicopter will operate with a near constant rotor velocity and vary blade angle to contend with variations in altitude and gross weight.", + "recall": 0.9216417910447762, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS DO-ROT-80 APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYING \n\nThus, the velocity due to rotation varies line- arly from zero at the hub to a maximum at the tip. A typical blade section with the forces acting on it is shown in figure 6.15. \n\nusually means remaining over a particular spot on the ground, it shall be considered here as flight at zero airspeed. This is necessary because the aerodynamic characteristics of the rotor depend on its motion with respect to the air and not the ground. Hovering in a 20 knot wind is aerodynamically equivalent to flying at an airspeed of 20 knots in a no-wind condition, and the characteristics will be identical in the two conditions. The first point to realize is that the rotor is \n\nA summation of the forces acting perpen- dicular to the plane of rotation (tip path plane) will determine the rotor thrust (or lift) char- acteristics while summation of the moments resulting from forces acting in the plane of rotation will determine the rotor torque char- acteristics. As a result of this analysis, the rotor thrust (or lift) is found to be propoc- tional to the air density, a nondimensional thrust coefficient, and the square of the tip speed, or linear speed of the tip of the blade. The thrust coefficient is a function of the aver- age blade section lift coefficient and the rotor solidity, which is the proportion of blade area to disc area. The lift coefficient is identical to that used in airplane aerodynamics while the solidity is analagous to the aspect ratio in air- plane aerodynamics. The rotor torque is found to be proportional to a nondimensional torque coefficient, the air density, the disc area, the square of the tip speed, and the blade radius. The torque coefficient is dependent upon the average profile drag coefficient of the blades, the blade pitch angle, and the average lift coefficient of the blades. The torque can be thought to result from components of profile and induced drag forces acting on the blades, similar to those on an airplane. \n\nidentical in the two conditions. The first point to realize is that the rotor is subject to the same physical laws of aero- dynamics and motion that govern flight of the fixed-wing airplane. The manner in which the rotor is subject to these laws is much more complicated due to the complex flow con- ditions. \n\nRotor lift can be explained by either of two methods. The first method, utilizing simple momentum theory based on Newton ’ s Laws, merely states that lift results from the rotor accelerating a mass of air downward in the same way that the jet engine develops thrust by accelerating a mass of air out the tailpipe. The second method of viewing rotor lift concerns the pressure forces acting on the various sections of the blade from root to tip. The simple momentum theory is useful in determining only lift characteristics while the “blade element” theory gives drag as well as lift characteristics and is useful in giving a picture of the forces at work on the rotor. In the “blade element” theory, the blade is divided up into “blade elements” as shown in figure 6.15. The forces acting on each blade element are analyzed. Then the forces on all elements are summed up to give the characteristics of the whole rotor. The relative wind acting on each segment is the resultant of two velocity components: (1) the velocity due CO the rotation of the blades about the hub and (2) the induced velocity, or downwash velocity caused by the rotor. the velocity due to rotation at a particular element is proportional to the rotor speed and the distance of the element from the rotor hub. \n\nAs in the airplane, there is one angle of attack or blade pitch condition that will result in the most efficient operation. Unfortu- nately, the typical helicopter rotor operates at a near constant RPM and thus a constant true airspeed and cannot operate at this most eficient condition over a wide range of altitude and gross weight as the fixed-wing airplane. The airplane is able to maintain an efficient angle of attack at various altitudes, and gross weights by flying at various airspeeds but the helicopter will operate with a near constant rotor velocity and vary blade angle to contend with variations in altitude and gross weight." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.41374412020518814, + "doc_id": "92ca38114851f7b95e22b42bc30cd1765835f52670d7327cb97d17f5563f000b", + "edit_distance": 0.5384615384615384, + "f1_score": 0.8666666666666667, + "meteor": 0.9035047792444242, + "precision": 0.7647058823529411, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS 00-80T-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE\n\n## TYPICAL COMBUSTION CHAMBER\n\nFigure 2.8. Combustion Chamber and Turbine Components\n\nFigure 2.8. Combustion Chamber and Turbine Components\n\n112", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-80T-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE \n\n112 \n\nFigure 2.8. Combustion Chamber and Turbine Components" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6068410610880497, + "doc_id": "74c501d1a679a340fc173d41917f525cb9699627307d65275bf76bd04d416698", + "edit_distance": 0.4, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9363888888888889, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS 00-BOT-80\n\nBASIC AERODYNAMICS\n\nFigure 7.73. Drag Characteristics (sheet 1 of 21\n\nFigure 7.73. Drag Characteristics (sheet 1 of 21\n\n30", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-BOT-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS \n\nFigure 7.73. Drag Characteristics (sheet 1 of 21 \n\n30" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8855228615776255, + "doc_id": "0f6dff8d713312aa45ceb219e02083e40f41a6e908fa35f5f77cea6004dddcad", + "edit_distance": 0.4082914572864322, + "f1_score": 0.934010152284264, + "meteor": 0.8159782203144997, + "precision": 0.9550173010380623, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS 00-801-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS\n\napproximates that of the elliptical wing. Hence, the stall pattern is much the same as the elliptical wing.\n\n(D) The highly tapered wing of taper ratio=0.25 shows the stall tendency inherent with high taper. The lift distribution of such a wing has distinct peaks just inboard from the tip. Since the wing stall is started in the vicinity of the highest local lift coefficient, this planform has a strong ' tip stall' tendency. The initial stall is not started at the exact tip but at the station inboard from the tip where highest local lift c,oefficients prevail. If an actual wing were allowed to stall in this fashion the occurrence of stall would be typified by aileron buffet and wing drop. There would be no buffet of the empennage or aft fuselage, no strong nose down moment, and very little-if any-aileron effectiveness. In order to prevent such undesirable happenings, the wing must be tailored to favor the stall pattern. The wing may be given a geometric. twist or ' washout' to decrease the local angles of attack at the tip. In addition, the airfoil section may be varied throughout the span such that sections with greater thickness and camber are located in the areas of highest local lift coefhcients. The higher ctof such sections can then develop the higher local C~S and be less likely to stall. The addition of leading edge slots or slats toward the tip increase the local c tand stall angle of attack and are useful in allaying tip stall and loss of aileron effectiveness. Another device for improving the stall pattern would be the forcing of stall in the desired location by decrctising he t section ctmar in this vicinity. The use of sharp leading edges or ' stall strips' is a powerful device to control the stall pattern.\n\n.(E) The pointed tip wing of taper ratio equal to zero develops extremely high local lift coefficients at the tip. For all practical purposes, the pointed tip will be stalled at any condition of lift unless extensive tailoring is applied to the wing. Such a planform has no\n\npractical application to an airplane which is definitely subsonic in performance.\n\n(F) Sweepback applied to a wing planform alters the lift distribution similar to decreasing taper ratio. Also, a predominating influence of the swept planform is the tendency for a strong crossflow of the boundary layer at high lift coefficients. Since the outboard sections of the wing trail the inboard sections, the outboard suction pressures tend to draw the boundary layer toward the tip. The result is a thickened low energy boundary layer at the tips which is easily separated. The develop ment of the spanwise flow in the boundary layer is illustrated by the photographs of figure 1.33. Note that the dye streamers on the upper surface of the~swept wing develop a strong spanwise crossflow at high angles of attack. Slots, slats, and flow fences help to allay the strong tendency for spanwise flow.\n\nWhen sweepback and taper are combined in a planform, the inherent tip stall tendency is considerable. If tip stall of any significance is allowed to occur on the swept wing, an additional complication results: the forward shift in the wing center of pressure creates an unstable nose up pitching moment. The stall sequence of a swept, tapered wing is indicated by the tuft-grid photographs of figure 1.33.\n\nAn additional effect on sweepback is the reduction in the slope of the lift curve and maximum lift coeflicient. When the sweepback is large and combined with low aspect ratio the lift curve is very shallow and maximum lift coefficient can occur at tremendous angles.of attack. The lift curve of one typical low aspect ratio, highly tapered, swept wing airplane depicts a maximum lift coefficient at approximately 43' angle of attack. Such drastic angles of attack are impractical in many respects. If the airplane is operated at such high angles of attack an extreme landing gear configuration is required, i nduced drag is extremely high, and the stability of the airplane may seriously deteriorate. Thus, the modern conhguration of airplane may have ' minimum", + "recall": 0.9139072847682119, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-801-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS \n\napproximates that of the elliptical wing. Hence, the stall pattern is much the same as the elliptical wing. (D) The highly tapered wing of taper \n\nelliptical wing. (D) The highly tapered wing of taper ratio=0.25 shows the stall tendency inherent with high taper. The lift distribution of such a wing has distinct peaks just inboard from the tip. Since the wing stall is started in the vicinity of the highest local lift coefficient, this planform has a strong “tip stall” tendency. The initial stall is not started at the exact tip but at the station inboard from the tip where highest local lift c,oefficients prevail. If an actual wing were allowed to stall in this fashion the occurrence of stall would be typi- fied by aileron buffet and wing drop. There would be no buffet of the empennage or aft fuselage, no strong nose down moment, and very little-if any-aileron effectiveness. In order to prevent such undesirable happenings, the wing must be tailored to favor the stall pattern. The wing may be given a geometric. twist or “washout” to decrease the local angles of attack at the tip. In addition, the airfoil section may be varied throughout the span such that sections with greater thickness and camber are located in the areas of highest local lift coefhcients. The higher ct- of such sections can then develop the higher local C~S and be less likely to stall. The addition of leading edge slots or slats toward the tip increase the local c t- and stall angle of attack and are useful in allaying tip stall and loss of aileron effectiveness. Another device for im- proving the stall pattern would be the forcing of stall in the desired location by decrctising the section ctmar in this vicinity. The use of sharp leading edges or “stall strips” is a powerful device to control the stall pattern. \n\n.(E) The pointed tip wing of taper ratio equal to zero develops extremely high local lift coefficients at the tip. For all practical purposes, the pointed tip will be stalled at any condition of lift unless extensive tailoring is applied to the wing. Such a planform has no \n\nAn additional effect on sweepback is the re- duction in the slope of the lift curve and maxi- mum lift coeflicient. When the sweepback is large and combined with low aspect ratio the lift curve is very shallow and maximum lift coefficient can occur at tremendous angles.of attack. The lift curve of one typical low aspect ratio, highly tapered, swept wing air- plane depicts a maximum lift coefficient at approximately 43’ angle of attack. Such dras- tic angles of attack are impractical in many respects. If the airplane is operated at such high angles of attack an extreme landing gear configuration is required, induced drag is ex- tremely high, and the stability of the airplane may seriously deteriorate. Thus, the modern conhguration of airplane may have “minimum \n\nallay the strong tendency for spanwise flow. When sweepback and taper are combined in a planform, the inherent tip stall tendency is considerable. If tip stall of any significance is allowed to occur on the swept wing, an addi- tional complication results: the forward shift in the wing center of pressure creates an un- stable nose up pitching moment. The stall sequence of a swept, tapered wing is indicated by the tuft-grid photographs of figure 1.33. \n\n(F) Sweepback applied to a wing planform alters the lift distribution similar to decreasing taper ratio. Also, a predominating influence of the swept planform is the tendency for a strong crossflow of the boundary layer at high lift coefficients. Since the outboard sections of the wing trail the inboard sections, the out- board suction pressures tend to draw the boundary layer toward the tip. The result is a thickened low energy boundary layer at the tips which is easily separated. The develop ment of the spanwise flow in the boundary layer is illustrated by the photographs of figure 1.33. Note that the dye streamers on the upper surface of the~swept wing develop a strong spanwise crossflow at high angles of attack. Slots, slats, and flow fences help to allay the strong tendency for spanwise flow. When sweepback and taper are combined in \n\npractical application to an airplane which is definitely subsonic in performance." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8038868493701244, + "doc_id": "dbd3cc8963e5b69526f3cc374aa412012eb82195dba72448743ae4878693e7cc", + "edit_distance": 0.8728395061728395, + "f1_score": 0.9203539823008848, + "meteor": 0.6706210287217016, + "precision": 0.9558823529411765, + "pred_md": "## PdAVWEPS OD-BOT-80 APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYING\n\nthe low pitch limit, the rotor RPM can be increased only by a sacrifice in altitude or airspeed. If insufficient altitude is available to exchange for rotor speed, a hard landing is inevitable. SufIicient rotor rotational energy must be available to permit adding collective pitch to reduce the helicopter' s rate of descent before final ground contact.\n\nIn the case of most small helicopters, at least 300 feet of altitude is necessary for an average pilot to set up a steady autorotation and land the helicopter safely without damage. This minimum becomes 500 to 600 feet for the larger helicopters, and will be even greater for helicopters with increased disc loading. These characteristics are usually presented in the flight handbook in the form of a ' dead man' s curve' which shows the combinations of airspeed and altitude above the terrain where a successful autorotative landing would be dishcult, if not impossible.\n\nA typical ' dead man' s curve' is shown in figure 6.18. The most critical combinations are due to low altitude and low airspeed illustrated by area A of figure 6.18. Less critical conditions exist at higher airspeeds because of the greater energy available to set up a steady autorotation. The lower limit of area A is a finite altitude because the helicopter can be landed successfully if collective pitch is held rather than reduced. In this specific case there is not sufficient energy to reach a steady state autorotation. The maximum altitude at which this is possible is approximately ten feet on most helicopters.\n\nArea B on the ' dead man' s curve' of figure 6.18 is critical because of ground contact flight speed or rate of descent, which is based on the strength of the landing gear. The average pilot may have difhculty in successfully flaring the helicopter from a high speed flight condition without allowing the tail rotor to strike the ground or contacting the ground at an excessive airspeed. A less critical zone is sometimes shown on this curve to indicate that higher ground contact speeds can be permitted\n\nwhen the landing surface is smooth. In addition, various stability and control characteristics of a helicopter may produce critical conditions in this area. The critical areas of the ' dead man' s curve' should be avoided unless such operation is a specific mission requirement.\n\nPOWER SETTLING. The term ' power settling' has been used to describe a variety of flight conditions of the helicopter. True ' power settling' occurs only when the helicopter rotor is operating in a rotary flow condition called the ' vortex ring state.' The flow through the rotor in the ' vortex ring state' is upward near the center of the disc and downward in the outer portion, resulting in a condition of zero net thrust on the rotor. If the rotor thrust is zero, the helicopter is effectively free-falling and extremely high rates of descent can result.\n\nThe downwash distribution within the rotor is shown in figure 6.19 for the conditions of normal hovering and power settling. Part A of figure 6.19 illustrates the typical downwash distribution for hovering flight. If sufficient power were not available to hover at this condition, the helicopter would begin to settle at some rate of descent depending on the deficiency of power. This rate of descent would effectively decrease the downwash throughout the rotor and result in a redistribution of downwash similar to Part B of figure 6.19. At the outer portion of the rotor disc, the local i nduced downwash velocity is greater than the rate of descent and downflow exists. At the center of the rotor disc, the rate of descent is greater than the local i nduced downwash velocity and the resultant flow is upward. This flow condition results in the rotary ' vortex ring' state. By reference to the basic momentum theory it is apparent that the rotor will produce no thrust in this condition if the net mass flow of air through the rotor is zero. It is important to note that the main lifting part of the rotor is not stalled. The rotor roughness and loss of", + "recall": 0.8873720136518771, + "true_md": "PdAVWEPS OD-BOT-80 APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYING \n\nwhen the landing surface is smooth. In ad- dition, various stability and control character- istics of a helicopter may produce critical con- ditions in this area. The critical areas of the “dead man ’ s curve” should be avoided unless such operation is a specific mission require- ment. POWER SETTLING. The term “power \n\nthe low pitch limit, the rotor RPM can be in- creased only by a sacrifice in altitude or air- speed. If insufficient altitude is available to exchange for rotor speed, a hard landing is inevitable. SufIicient rotor rotational energy must be available to permit adding collective pitch to reduce the helicopter ’ s rate of descent before final ground contact. \n\nment. POWER SETTLING. The term “power settling” has been used to describe a variety of flight conditions of the helicopter. True “power settling” occurs only when the heli- copter rotor is operating in a rotary flow condition called the “vortex ring state.” The flow through the rotor in the “vortex ring state” is upward near the center of the disc and downward in the outer portion, resulting in a condition of zero net thrust on the rotor. If the rotor thrust is zero, the helicopter is effectively free-falling and ex- tremely high rates of descent can result. The downwash distribution within the \n\nIn the case of most small helicopters, at least 300 feet of altitude is necessary for an average pilot to set up a steady autorotation and land the helicopter safely without damage. This minimum becomes 500 to 600 feet for the larger helicopters, and will be even greater for helicopters with increased disc loading. These characteristics are usually presented in the flight handbook in the form of a “dead man ’ s curve” which shows the combinations of air- speed and altitude above the terrain where a successful autorotative landing would be dish- cult, if not impossible. A typical “dead man ’ s curve” is shown in \n\ntremely high rates of descent can result. The downwash distribution within the rotor is shown in figure 6.19 for the conditions of normal hovering and power settling. Part A of figure 6.19 illustrates the typical down- wash distribution for hovering flight. If sufficient power were not available to hover at this condition, the helicopter would begin to settle at some rate of descent depending on the deficiency of power. This rate of descent would effectively decrease the downwash throughout the rotor and result in a redistri- bution of downwash similar to Part B of figure 6.19. At the outer portion of the rotor disc, the local induced downwash veloc- ity is greater than the rate of descent and downflow exists. At the center of the rotor disc, the rate of descent is greater than the local induced downwash velocity and the resultant flow is upward. This flow condition results in the rotary “vortex ring” state. By reference to the basic momentum theory it is apparent that the rotor will produce no thrust in this condition if the net mass flow of air through the rotor is zero. It is important to note that the main lifting part of the rotor is not stalled. The rotor roughness and loss of \n\ncult, if not impossible. A typical “dead man ’ s curve” is shown in figure 6.18. The most critical combinations are due to low altitude and low airspeed illus- trated by area A of figure 6.18. Less critical conditions exist at higher airspeeds because of the greater energy available to set up a steady autorotation. The lower limit of area A is a finite altitude because the helicopter can be landed successfully if collective pitch is held rather than reduced. In this specific case there is not sufficient energy to reach a steady state autorotation. The maximum altitude at which this is possible is approximately ten feet on most helicopters. \n\nArea B on the “dead man ’ s curve” of figure 6.18 is critical because of ground contact flight speed or rate of descent, which is based on the strength of the landing gear. The average pilot may have difhculty in successfully flaring the helicopter from a high speed flight con- dition without allowing the tail rotor to strike the ground or contacting the ground at an ex- cessive airspeed. A less critical zone is some- times shown on this curve to indicate that higher ground contact speeds can be permitted" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8900030890949939, + "doc_id": "1eb881c0c710e154cc23c019f71163fc2f5cc6f56663ad4b2d516d815f47cd4b", + "edit_distance": 0.07810320781032078, + "f1_score": 0.920696324951644, + "meteor": 0.9334671492145115, + "precision": 0.9558232931726908, + "pred_md": "## NAVWE,PS OD-80T-80 APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYING\n\nthe forces acting on the airplane, i.e., lift, thrust, weight, and drag.\n\nANGLE OF ATTACK VERSUS AIRSPEED. In order to achieve equilibrium in the vertical direction, the net lift must equal the airplane weight. This is a contingency of steady, level flight or steady climbing and descending flight when the flight path inclination is slight. A refinement of the basic lift equation defines the relationship of speed, weight, lift coefficient, etc., for the condition of lift equal to weight.\n\n\n\nor\n\nwhere\n\nV=velocity, knots (TAX) VE=equivalent airspeed, knots (EAS) W=gross weight, lbs. S= wing surface area, sq. ft. W/S= wing loading, psf g=altitudc density ratio C,= lift coefficient\n\nFrom this relationship it is appreciated that a given configuration of airplane with a specific wing loading, W/S, will achieve lift equal to weight at particular combinations of velocity, V, and lift coefficient, C,. In steady flight, each equivalent airspeed demands a particular vaIue of C,, and each value of C, demands a particular equivalent airspeed to provide lift equal to weight. Figure 6.1 illustrates a typical lift curve for an airplane and shows the relationship between C, and OL, angle of attack. For this relationship, some specific value of a will create a certain value of C, for any given aerodynamic configuration.\n\nFor the conditions of steady flight with a given airplane, each angle of attack corresponds to a specific airspeed. Each angle of attack produces a specific value of CL and each value of C, requires a specific value of equiva-\n\nlent airspeed to provide lift equal to weight. Hence, angle of attack is the primary .control of airspeed in mad3 fright. If an airplane is established in steady, level flight at a particular airspeed, any increase in angle of attack will result in some reduced airspeed common to the increased C,. A decrease in angle of attack will result in some increased airspeed common to the decreased CL. As a result of the change in airspeed, the airplane may climb or descend if there is no change in powet setting but the change in airspeed was provided by the change in angle of attack. The state of the airplane during the change in speed will be some transient condition between the original and final steady state conditions.\n\nPrimary control of airspeed in steady flight by angle of attack is an important principle. With some configurations of airplanes, low speed flight will bring about a low level of longitudinal stick force stability and possibility of low airplane static longitudinal stability. In such a case, the ' feel' for airspeed will be light and may not furnish a ready reference for easy control of the airplane. In addition, the high angles of attack common to low speed flight are likely to provide large position errors to the airspeed indicating system. Thus, proper control of airspeed will be enhanced by good ' attitude' flying or-when the visual t;eference field is poor-an angle of attack indicator.\n\nRATE OF CLIMB AND .DESCENT. In order for an airplane to achieve ' equilibrium at constant altitude, lift must be equal to weight and thrust must be equal to drag. Steady, level flight requires equilibrium in both the vertical and horizontal directions. For the case of climbing or descending flight conditions, a component of weight is inclined along the flight path direction and equilibrium is achieved when thrust is not equal to the drag. When the airplane is in a steady climb or descent, the rate of climb is related by the following expression:\n\n350", + "recall": 0.8880597014925373, + "true_md": "NAVWE,PS OD-80T-80 \n\n## APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYING\n\nthe forces acting on the airplane, i.e., lift, thrust, weight, and drag. ANGLE OF ATTACK VERSUS AIRSPEED. \n\nthrust, weight, and drag. ANGLE OF ATTACK VERSUS AIRSPEED. In order to achieve equilibrium in the vertical direction, the net lift must equal the airplane weight. This is a contingency of steady, level flight or steady climbing and descending flight when the flight path inclination is slight. A refinement of the basic lift equation defines the relationship of speed, weight, lift coefficient, etc., for the condition of lift equal to weight. \n\n$$V=17.2 y J TP $$\n\nor \n\nwhere \n\nV=velocity, knots (TAX) VE=equivalent airspeed, knots (EAS) W=gross weight, lbs. S= wing surface area, sq. ft. W/S= wing loading, psf g=altitudc density ratio C,= lift coefficient \n\nFrom this relationship it is appreciated that a given configuration of airplane with a specific wing loading, W/S, will achieve lift equal to weight at particular combinations of velocity, V, and lift coefficient, C,. In steady flight, each equivalent airspeed demands a particular vaIue of C,, and each value of C, demands a particular equivalent airspeed to provide lift equal to weight. Figure 6.1 illustrates a typical lift curve for an airplane and shows the relation- ship between C, and OL, angle of attack. For this relationship, some specific value of a will create a certain value of C, for any given aero- dynamic configuration. \n\nFor the conditions of steady flight with a given airplane, each angle of attack corre- sponds to a specific airspeed. Each angle of attack produces a specific value of CL and each value of C, requires a specific value of equiva- \n\n350 \n\nlent airspeed to provide lift equal to weight. Hence, angle of attack is the primary .control of airspeed in mad3 fright. If an airplane is es- tablished in steady, level flight at a particular airspeed, any increase in angle of attack will result in some reduced airspeed common to the increased C,. A decrease in angle of attack will result in some increased airspeed com- mon to the decreased CL. As a result of the change in airspeed, the airplane may climb or descend if there is no change in powet setting but the change in airspeed was provided by the change in angle of attack. The state of the airplane during the change in speed will be some transient condition between the original and final steady state conditions. \n\nPrimary control of airspeed in steady flight by angle of attack is an important principle. With some configurations of airplanes, low speed flight will bring about a low level of longitudinal stick force stability and possi- bility of low airplane static longitudi- nal stability. In such a case, the “feel” for airspeed will be light and may not furnish a ready reference for easy control of the air- plane. In addition, the high angles of attack common to low speed flight are likely to pro- vide large position errors to the airspeed indi- cating system. Thus, proper control of air- speed will be enhanced by good “attitude” flying or-when the visual t;eference field is poor-an angle of attack indicator. \n\nRATE OF CLIMB AND .DESCENT. In order for an airplane to achieve ‘ equilibrium at constant altitude, lift must be equal to weight and thrust must be equal to drag. Steady, level flight requires equilibrium in both the vertical and horizontal directions. For the case of climbing or descending flight condi- tions, a component of weight is inclined along the flight path direction and equilibrium is achieved when thrust is not equal to the drag. When the airplane is in a steady climb or descent, the rate of climb is related by the following expression:" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5031131838038054, + "doc_id": "dd0af96c254829aa6d254c8b8cd82c17dadb9e5a428f2288951b9f0acda317f0", + "edit_distance": 0.41935483870967744, + "f1_score": 0.8947368421052632, + "meteor": 0.915371329879102, + "precision": 0.8095238095238095, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS OG-8OT-80 APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYING\n\n## EFFECT OF VERTICAL GUST\n\nFigure 6.5. Effect of Wind Shear\n\nFigure 6.5. Effect of Wind Shear\n\n368", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OG-8OT-80 APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYING \n\nFigure 6.5. Effect of Wind Shear \n\n368" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5906871848918501, + "doc_id": "99094ee1f3a0798d7b8c13a2c30866bee2c6e81cd2276c8aa0ce258750766c75", + "edit_distance": 0.4, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9353298611111112, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS 00-8OT-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE\n\nFtgure P.25. Rangt Performoncr, Jet Aircraft\n\nFtgure P.25. Rangt Performoncr, Jet Aircraft", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-8OT-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE \n\nFtgure P.25. Rangt Performoncr, Jet Aircraft" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0036911071638315008, + "doc_id": "ba218d4f772662ab643e65c2c1a1f62410a6dfe219e4509e651e8fd0d1ea093a", + "edit_distance": 0.9898305084745763, + "f1_score": 0.08955223880597016, + "meteor": 0.07936507936507939, + "precision": 0.046875, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS OO-BOT-BO TABLE OF CONTENTS\n\n| FRICTION EFFECTS. | 52 | | | | |\n|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|--------|--------|------------------|-----------------------------|-------------------------------------------------------------------|\n| | 52 | | | | |\n| Viscous Bow.. Boundarglayers.................................................... | 52 | | | | |\n| Laminar flow Transition Turbulent flow | | | | | |\n| ReyooldsNumber.................................................. | 54 | | | | |\n| Definition Skin friction versus Reynolds Number | | | | | |\n| Airflowseparatioa.................................................. | 56 | | | | |\n| Pressure distribution | | | | | |\n| Prcswrc gradient and boundary layer energy Factors affecting separation | | | | | |\n| Scaleeffect......................................................... | 59 | | | | |\n| Effect on aerodynamic characteristics Reynolds Number correlation | | | | | |\n| PLANFORM EFFECTS AND AIRPLANE DRAG | | | | | |\n| EFFECT OF WING PLANFORM.. | 61 | | | | |\n| . . Descr1puon of planform | 61 | | | | |\n| Area, span,, and chord Aspect ratm and taper Sweepback Mean aerodynamic chord | | | | | |\n| Development of lift by a wing.. | 63 | | | | |\n| vortex system Ti and bound vortices flow | | | I&cd | and downwash | |\n| INDUCED DRAG. : | 66 | | | | |\n| angle of attack and inclined lift. Induced drag coefficient, | | | | | |\n| Induced | 66 68 | | | | |\n| Effect of lift coefficient Effect of aspect ratio | | | | | |\n| Effectoflift........................................................ | 68 | | | | |\n| Effea of altitude.. | 2; | | | | |\n| EffectofsPeed...................................................... Effect of aspect ratio. | | 71 | | | |\n| OF TAPER AND StiEEPtiACK. | | | | | |\n| EFFECT | 74 | | | | |\n| STALL PATI' ERNS. | | | | | |\n| for stall | | | | | |\n| Taper Sweepback | | | | | |\n| characteristics. | | | | | |\n| | 86 | | | | |\n| Modifications | | | | | |\n| EffeaofpIanform.................................................. | | | | | |\n| | :: | | | | |\n| Pnvorablestallpattern.............................................. | | | | | |\n| | 77 | | | | |\n| | 76 | | | | |\n| Spanwise lift distribution | | | | | |\n| | .' , | 74 76 | Effect on lift | and drag characteristics. | localinducedflow................................................. |\n\nvii", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OO-BOT-BO TABLE OF CONTENTS \n\nvii" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5026147453550859, + "doc_id": "35de138a8e93f89f9812530dce3b9e53710208a9c0b62fff2c923e4409dc9daf", + "edit_distance": 0.4782608695652174, + "f1_score": 0.8571428571428572, + "meteor": 0.9088740458015265, + "precision": 0.75, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS 00-801-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL\n\nEFFECT\n\nOF DOWNSPRING\n\nFigure 4.77. Tailoring Control Forces\n\nFigure 4.77. Tailoring Control Forces\n\n272", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-801-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL \n\nFigure 4.77. Tailoring Control Forces \n\n272" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.45920647199089537, + "doc_id": "1602ab45e562c562fb518c54364d87e8949d0b0f1aa5957403b5db919dd33db0", + "edit_distance": 0.6, + "f1_score": 0.9600000000000002, + "meteor": 0.7259908536585366, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS 00-ROT-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS\n\nFigure 1.3. Variation o\\ Pressure in Tube\n\nFigure 1.3. Variation o\\ Pressure in Tube", + "recall": 0.9230769230769231, + "true_md": "Figure 1.3. Variation o\\ Pressure in Tube \n\n## BASIC AERODYNAMICS\n\n## NAVWEPS 00-ROT-80" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6132878268086118, + "doc_id": "18ea13f92535ec926e1fe7b01a77641a54fe7c748b1dc405a0c77b04e48e3f21", + "edit_distance": 0.7931034482758621, + "f1_score": 0.9743589743589745, + "meteor": 0.8528634361233479, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS OO-80T-80 APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYING\n\nFigure 6.1. Primary Control of Airspeed and Altitude\n\nFigure 6.1. Primary Control of Airspeed and Altitude\n\n351", + "recall": 0.95, + "true_md": "Figure 6.1. Primary Control of Airspeed and Altitude \n\n351 \n\n## NAVWEPS OO-80T-80 APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYING" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9263447838144752, + "doc_id": "0b6c09d6ec8f25db4beabdc9bc615aef8732fe51b3df10d96f5af6274e8d9779", + "edit_distance": 0.5539568345323741, + "f1_score": 0.9716088328075712, + "meteor": 0.9330684177084042, + "precision": 0.9871794871794872, + "pred_md": "FAA Chart Users' Guide - IFR Enroute Terms\n\nAirports marked \"Pvt\" immediately following the airport name are not for public use, but otherwise meet the criteria for charting as specified above.\n\nRunway length is the length of the longest active runway (including displaced thresholds but excluding overruns) and is shown to the nearest 100 feet using 70 feet as the division point; e.g., a runway of 8,070' is labeled 81. The following run -way compositions (materials) constitute a hard-surfaced runway: asphalt, bitumen, chip seal, concrete, and tar macadam. Runways that are not hard-surfaced have a small letter \"s\" following the runway length, indicating a soft surface.\n\nsymbol between the airport elevation and runway length means that runway lights are in operation sunset to sunrise.\n\nA symbol indicates there is Pilot Controlled Lighting. A symbol means the lighting is part-time or on request, the pilot should consult the Chart Supplement for light operating procedures. The Aeronautical Information Manual (AIM) thoroughly explains the types and uses of airport lighting aids.\n\n## VOR Minimum Operational Network (MON) Airports Designator\n\nMON Airports with the Airport designator at the top of the Airport Data Block. The MON designation is to alert pilots to those airports that have retained ILS and VOR instrument approach procedures for safe recovery in the event of a GPS outage. Refer to the Aeronautical Information Manual (AIM) for expanded MON Airport guidance.\n\n60", + "recall": 0.9565217391304348, + "true_md": "Airports marked \"Pvt\" immediately following the airport name are not for public use, but otherwise meet the criteria for charting as specified above.\n\nRunway length is the length of the longest active runway (including displaced thresholds but excluding overruns) and is shown to the nearest 100 feet using 70 feet as the division point; e.g., a runway of 8,070' is labeled 81. The following run - way compositions (materials) constitute a hard-surfaced runway: asphalt, bitumen, chip seal, concrete, and tar macadam. Runways that are not hard-surfaced have a small letter \"s\" following the runway length, indicating a soft surface.\n\nFAA Chart Users’ Guide - IFR Enroute Terms\n\n## VOR Minimum Operational Network (MON) Airports Designator\n\nMON Airports with the Airport designator at the top of the Airport Data Block. The MON designation is to alert pilots to those airports that have retained ILS and VOR instrument approach procedures for safe recovery in the event of a GPS outage. Refer to the Aeronautical Information Manual (AIM) for expanded MON Airport guidance.\n\nA symbol between the airport elevation and runway length means that runway lights are in operation sunset to sunrise. A symbol indicates there is Pilot Controlled Lighting. A symbol means the lighting is part-time or on request, the pilot should consult the Chart Supplement for light operating procedures. The Aeronautical Information Manual (AIM) thor- oughly explains the types and uses of airport lighting aids.\n\n60\n\n## AIRPORT DATA DEPICTION" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8902117922264996, + "doc_id": "862a59f269b4447bfb56357a019042830d32a7b8ea3828b7a106e4f0c3329c1a", + "edit_distance": 0.6977401129943502, + "f1_score": 0.9265033407572383, + "meteor": 0.6790420292256298, + "precision": 0.9674418604651163, + "pred_md": "manifold pressure any greater than the induction system inlet pressure. As altitude is increased with full throttle and a governed RPM, the airflow through the engine is reduced and BHP decreases. The first forms of supercharging were of relatively low pressure ratio and the added airflow and power could be handled at full throttle within detonation limits. Such a ' ground boosted' engine would achieve higher output power at all altitudes but an increase in altitude would produce a decrease in manifold pressure, airflow, and power output.\n\nMore advanced forms of supercharging with higher pressure ratios can produce very large engine airflow. In fact, the typical case of altitude supercharging will produce such high airflow at low altitude operation that full throttle operation cannot be utilized within detonation limits. Figure 2.17 illustrates this case for a typical two-speed engine driven altitude supercharging installation. At sea level, the limiting manifold pressure produces a certain amount of BHP. Full throttle operation could produce a higher MAP and BHP if detonation were not the problem. In this case full throttle operation is unavailable because of detonation limits. As altitude is increased with the supercharger or ' blower' at low speed, the constant MAP is maintained by opening the throttle and the BHP increases above the sea level value because of the reduced exhaust back pressure. Opening the throttle allows the supercharger inlet to receive the same inlet pressure and produce the same MAP. Finally, the increase of altitude will require full throttle to produce the constant MAP with low blower and this point is termed the ' critical altitude' or ' full throttle height.' If altitude is increased beyond the critical altitude, the engine MAP, airflow, and BHP decrease.\n\nThe critical altitude with a particular supercharger installation is specific to a given combination of MAP and RPM. Obviously, a lower MAP could be maintained to some\n\n143\n\nNAVWEPS OO-ROT-RO AWIANE PERFORMANCE\n\nhigher altitude or a lower engine speed would produce less supercharging and a given MAP would require a greater throttle opening. Generally, the most important critical altitudes will be specified for maximum, rated, and maximum cruise power conditions.\n\nA change of the blower to a high speed will provide greater supercharging but will require more shaft power and incur a greater temperature rise. Thus, the high blower speed can produce an increase in altitude performance within the detonation limitations. The variation of BHP with altitude for the blower at high speed shows an increase in critical altitude and greater BHP than is obtainable in low blower. Operation below the high blower critical altitude requires some limiting manifold pressure to remain within detonation limits. It is apparent that the shift to high blower is not required just past low blower critical altitude but at the point where the transition from low blower, full throttle to high blower, limit hiAP will produce greater BHP. Of course, if the blower speed is increased without reducing the throttle opening, an ' overboost' can occur.\n\nSince the exhaust gases have considerable energy, exhaust turbines provide a source of supercharger power. The turbosupercharger (TB.S) allows control of the supercharger speed and output to very high altitudes with a variable discharge exhaust turbine (PDT). The turbosupercharger is capable of providing the engine airflow with increasing altitude by increasing turbine and supercharger speed. Critical altitude for the turbosupercharger is usually defined by the altitude which produces the limiting exhaust turbine speed.\n\nThe minimum specific fuel consumption of the supercharged engine is not greatly affected by altitudes less than the critical altitude. At the maximum cruise power condition, specific fuel consumption will decrease slightly with an increase in altitude up to the critical altitude. Above critical altitude, maximum ,cruise power cannot be maintained but the", + "recall": 0.8888888888888888, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OO-ROT-RO AWIANE PERFORMANCE \n\nhigher altitude or a lower engine speed would produce less supercharging and a given MAP would require a greater throttle opening. Generally, the most important critical alti- tudes will be specified for maximum, rated, and maximum cruise power conditions. \n\nmanifold pressure any greater than the induc- tion system inlet pressure. As altitude is increased with full throttle and a governed RPM, the airflow through the engine is reduced and BHP decreases. The first forms of supercharging were of relatively low pressure ratio and the added airflow and power could be handled at full throttle within detonation limits. Such a “ground boosted” engine would achieve higher output power at all altitudes but an increase in altitude would produce a decrease in manifold pressure, air- flow, and power output. \n\nA change of the blower to a high speed will provide greater supercharging but will require more shaft power and incur a greater tempera- ture rise. Thus, the high blower speed can produce an increase in altitude performance within the detonation limitations. The vari- ation of BHP with altitude for the blower at high speed shows an increase in critical alti- tude and greater BHP than is obtainable in low blower. Operation below the high blower critical altitude requires some limiting mani- fold pressure to remain within detonation limits. It is apparent that the shift to high blower is not required just past low blower critical altitude but at the point where the transition from low blower, full throttle to high blower, limit hiAP will produce greater BHP. Of course, if the blower speed is increased without reducing the throttle opening, an “overboost” can occur. Since the exhaust gases have considerable \n\nMore advanced forms of supercharging with higher pressure ratios can produce very large engine airflow. In fact, the typical case of altitude supercharging will produce such high airflow at low altitude operation that full throttle operation cannot be utilized within detonation limits. Figure 2.17 illustrates this case for a typical two-speed engine driven altitude supercharging installation. At sea level, the limiting manifold pressure produces a certain amount of BHP. Full throttle oper- ation could produce a higher MAP and BHP if detonation were not the problem. In this case full throttle operation is unavailable because of detonation limits. As altitude is increased with the supercharger or “blower” at low speed, the constant MAP is maintained by opening the throttle and the BHP increases above the sea level value because of the re- duced exhaust back pressure. Opening the throttle allows the supercharger inlet to re- ceive the same inlet pressure and produce the same MAP. Finally, the increase of altitude will require full throttle to produce the con- stant MAP with low blower and this point is termed the “critical altitude” or “full throttle height.” If altitude is increased beyond the critical altitude, the engine MAP, airflow, and BHP decrease. \n\nopening, an Since the exhaust gases have considerable energy, exhaust turbines provide a source of supercharger power. The turbosupercharger (TB.S) allows control of the supercharger speed and output to very high altitudes with a variable discharge exhaust turbine (PDT). The turbosupercharger is capable of providing the engine airflow with increasing altitude by increasing turbine and supercharger speed. Critical altitude for the turbosupercharger is usually defined by the altitude which produces the limiting exhaust turbine speed. \n\nThe minimum specific fuel consumption of the supercharged engine is not greatly affected by altitudes less than the critical altitude. At the maximum cruise power condition, specific fuel consumption will decrease slightly with an increase in altitude up to the critical altitude. Above critical altitude, maximum ,cruise power cannot be maintained but the \n\nThe critical altitude with a particular super- charger installation is specific to a given com- bination of MAP and RPM. Obviously, a lower MAP could be maintained to some \n\n143" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8417586072625738, + "doc_id": "406c523861ea60a0336b4c55a49fab89cba67a2eb06e540001da7289d0a6e400", + "edit_distance": 0.8034398034398035, + "f1_score": 0.9361702127659575, + "meteor": 0.6706616072289187, + "precision": 0.9758064516129032, + "pred_md": "the maximum positive lift capability of this airplane is 4 ' g' at 200 knots, 9 g at 300 knots, 16 g at 400 knots, etc. Any load factor above this line is unavailable aerodynamically, i.e., the subject airplane cannot fly above the line of maximum lift capability. Essentially the same situation exists for negative lift flight with the exception that the speed necessary to produce a given negative load factor is higher than that to produce the same positive load factor. Generally, the negative CL,., is less than the positive CL,., and the airplane may lack sufficient control power to maneuver in this direction.\n\nIf the subject airplane is flown at a positive load factor greater than the positive limit load' factor of 7.5, structural damage will be possible. When the airplane is operated in this region, objectionable permanent deformation of the primary structure may take place and a high rate of fatigue damage is incurred. Operation above the limit load factor must be avoided in normal operation. If conditions of extreme emergency require load factors above the limit to prevent an immediate disaster, the airplane should be capable of withstanding the ultimate load factor without failure. The same situation exists in negative lift flight with the exception that the limit and ultimate load factors are of smaller magnitude and the negative limit load factor may not be the same value at all airspeeds. At speeds above the maximum level flight airspeed the negative limit load factor may be of smaller magnitude.\n\nThe limit airspeed (or redline speed) is a design reference point for the airplane-the subject airplane is limited to 575 knots. If flight is attempted beyond the limit airspeed structural,idamage or structural failure may result from a variety of phenomena. The airplane in flight above the limit airspeed may encounter:\n\n- (u) critical gust\n- (6) destructive flutter\n- (c) aileron reversal\n- (d) wing or surface divergence\n- (e) critical compressibility effects such as stability and control problems, damaging buffet, etc.\n\n## NAVWEPS 00-SOT-80 OPERATING STRENGTH LIMITATIONS\n\nThe occurrence of any one of these items could cause structural damage or failure of the primary structure. A reasonable accounting of these items is required during the design of an airplane to prevent such occurrences in the required operating regions. The limit airspeed of an airplane may be any value between terminal dive speedand 1.2 times the maximum level flight speed,depending on the aircraft type and mission requirement. Whatever the resulting limit airspeed happens to be, it deserves due respect.\n\nThus, the airplane in flight is limited to a regime of airspeeds and g' s which do not exceed the limit (or redline) speed, do not exceed the limit load factor, and cannot exceed the maximum lift capability. The airplane must be operated within this ' envelope' to prevent structural damage and ensure that the anticipated service life of the airplane is obtained. The pilot must appreciate the V-n diagram as describing the allowable combination of airspeeds and load factors for safe operation. Any maneuver, gust, or gust plus maneuver outside the structural envelope can cause sttuctural damage and effectively shorten the service.life, of the airplane.\n\nThere are two points of great importance on the V-n diagram of figure 5.4. Point B is the intersection of the negative limit load factor and line of maximum negative lift capability. Any airspeed greater than point B provides a negative lift capability sufficient to damage the airplane; any airspeed less than point B does not provide negative lift capability sufficient to damage the airplane from excessive flight loads. Point A is the intersection of the positive limit load factor and the line of maximum, positive lift capability. The airspeed at this point is the minimum airspeed at which the limit load can be developed aerodynamically. Any airspeed greater than pomt A provides a positive lift capability sufficient to damage the airplane; any airspeed less than point A does not provide Positive lift capability sufficient to", + "recall": 0.8996282527881041, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-SOT-80 OPERATING STRENGTH LIMITATIONS \n\nThe occurrence of any one of these items could cause structural damage or failure of the pri- mary structure. A reasonable accounting of these items is required during the design of an airplane to prevent such occurrences in the re- quired operating regions. The limit airspeed of an airplane may be any value between termi- nal dive speedand 1.2 times the maximum level flight speed,depending on the aircraft type and mission requirement. Whatever the resulting limit airspeed happens to be, it deserves due respect. \n\nthe maximum positive lift capability of this airplane is 4 “g” at 200 knots, 9 g at 300 knots, 16 g at 400 knots, etc. Any load factor above this line is unavailable aerodynamically, i.e., the subject airplane cannot fly above the line of maximum lift capability. Essentially the same situation exists for negative lift flight with the exception that the speed necessary to produce a given negative load factor is higher than that to produce the same positive load factor. Gen- erally, the negative CL,., is less than the posi- tive CL,., and the airplane may lack sufficient control power to maneuver in this direction. \n\nThus, the airplane in flight is limited to a regime of airspeeds and g ’ s which do not exceed the limit (or redline) speed, do not exceed the limit load factor, and cannot exceed the maximum lift capability. The airplane must be operated within this “envelope” to prevent structural damage and ensure that the anticipated service life of the airplane is obtained. The pilot must appreciate the V-n diagram as describing the allowable combination of airspeeds and load factors for safe operation. Any maneuver, gust, or gust plus maneuver outside the structural envelope can cause sttuctural damage and effectively shorten the service.life, of the airplane. \n\nIf the subject airplane is flown at a positive load factor greater than the positive limit load’ factor of 7.5, structural damage will be possi- ble. When the airplane is operated in this region, objectionable permanent deformation of the primary structure may take place and a high rate of fatigue damage is incurred. Opera- tion above the limit load factor must be avoided in normal operation. If conditions of extreme emergency require load factors above the limit to prevent an immediate disaster, the airplane should be capable of withstanding the ultimate load factor without failure. The same situation exists in negative lift flight with the exception that the limit and ultimate load factors are of smaller magnitude and the negative limit load factor may not be the same value at all airspeeds. At speeds above the maximum level flight airspeed the negative limit load factor may be of smaller magnitude. \n\nThere are two points of great importance on the V-n diagram of figure 5.4. Point B is the intersection of the negative limit load factor and line of maximum negative lift capability. Any airspeed greater than point B provides a negative lift capability sufficient to damage the airplane; any airspeed less than point B does not provide negative lift capability sufficient to damage the airplane from excessive flight loads. Point A is the intersection of the positive limit load factor and the line of maximum, positive lift capa- bility. The airspeed at this point is the minimum airspeed at which the limit load can be developed aerodynamically. Any air- speed greater than pomt A provides a positive lift capability sufficient to damage the air- plane; any airspeed less than point A does not provide Positive lift capability sufficient to \n\nThe limit airspeed (or redline speed) is a de- sign reference point for the airplane-the sub- ject airplane is limited to 575 knots. If flight is attempted beyond the limit airspeed struc- tural,idamage or structural failure may result from a variety of phenomena. The airplane in flight above the limit airspeed may encounter: (u) critical gust \n\n- flight above the limit airspeed may encounter: (u) critical gust (6) destructive flutter \n\n- (u) critical gust (6) destructive flutter (c) aileron reversal \n\n- (6) destructive flutter (c) aileron reversal (d) wing or surface divergence \n\n- (c) aileron reversal (d) wing or surface divergence (e) critical compressibility effects such as \n\n- (d) wing or surface divergence (e) critical compressibility effects such as stability and control problems, damaging buffet, etc." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5828233954152653, + "doc_id": "6375d555092231bb9e93f8a702e7e4263f38a68cc50ecad82d2aebae45dd723d", + "edit_distance": 0.375, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.939622641509434, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS OfJ-RDT-8D BASIC AERODYNAMICS\n\nFigure 4.32. Sponwise Lift Distribution\n\nFigure 4.32. Sponwise Lift Distribution", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OfJ-RDT-8D BASIC AERODYNAMICS \n\nFigure 4.32. Sponwise Lift Distribution" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.523829873363494, + "doc_id": "78e13074e1c955bb990fc6798f1b4bb21a785823ef786caafeeb7b46ab44a5e1", + "edit_distance": 0.45098039215686275, + "f1_score": 0.9230769230769229, + "meteor": 0.9430309734513275, + "precision": 0.8571428571428571, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS DG-RDT-RD HIGH SPEED AERODYNAMICS\n\nFE!4 MODEL AT VARIOUS MACH NUMBERS a-O0 pee\n\nM* 1.2\n\nW 1.6\n\nFigure 3.11. Schliemn Photographs of Supersonic Flight (sheet 1 of 2)\n\nFigure 3.11. Schliemn Photographs of Supersonic Flight (sheet 1 of 2)\n\n221", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS DG-RDT-RD HIGH SPEED AERODYNAMICS \n\n## FE!4 MODEL AT VARIOUS MACH NUMBERS a-O0 pee\n\nFigure 3.11. Schliemn Photographs of Supersonic Flight (sheet 1 of 2) \n\n221" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8800440471098688, + "doc_id": "441e639e1b1dbe53a26ce05269b4558797fad42374f6e9c6abc943ddec82eacd", + "edit_distance": 0.541095890410959, + "f1_score": 0.9418604651162791, + "meteor": 0.8915428165783106, + "precision": 0.9529411764705882, + "pred_md": "243\n\nNAVWEPS 00-80T-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL\n\n## Chapter 4\n\n## STABILITY AND CONTROL\n\nAn aircraft must have satisfactory handling qualities in addition to adequate performance. ' l Yhe aircraft must have adequate stability to maintain a uniform flight condition and recover from the various disturbing influences. It is necessary to provide sufficient stability to minimize the workload of the pilot. Also, the aircraft must have proper response to the controls so that it may achieve the inherent performance. There are certain conditions of\n\nflight which provide the most critical requirements of stability and control and these conditions must be understood and respected to accomplish safe and efficient operation of the aircraft.\n\n## DEFINITIONS\n\n## STATIC STABILITY\n\nAn aircraft is in a state of equilibrium when the sum of all forces and all moments is equal", + "recall": 0.9310344827586207, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-80T-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL \n\n## Chapter 4\n\n## STABILITY AND CONTROL\n\n## DEFINITIONS\n\n## STATIC STABILITY\n\nflight which provide the most critical require- ments of stability and control and these condi- tions must be understood and respected to accomplish safe and efficient operation of the aircraft. \n\nAn aircraft must have satisfactory handling qualities in addition to adequate performance. ‘ lYhe aircraft must have adequate stability to maintain a uniform flight condition and recover from the various disturbing influences. It is necessary to provide sufficient stability to minimize the workload of the pilot. Also, the aircraft must have proper response to the controls so that it may achieve the inherent performance. There are certain conditions of \n\nAn aircraft is in a state of equilibrium when the sum of all forces and all moments is equal \n\n243" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7861394785146456, + "doc_id": "0faf844165623b917203d1151a41d0928f4ae0a18d7d897be8bd9a7ffa6b84e2", + "edit_distance": 0.41916167664670656, + "f1_score": 0.8684863523573201, + "meteor": 0.7866771264079384, + "precision": 0.9776536312849162, + "pred_md": "FAA Chart Users' Guide - IFR Enroute Terms\n\n## AIRSPACE INFORMATION\n\n## CONTROLLED AIRSPACE\n\nControlled airspace consists of those areas where some or all aircraft are subjected to air traffic control within the follow -ing airspace classifications of A, B, C, D, & E.\n\nAir Route Traffic Control Centers (ARTCC) are established to provide Air Traffic Control to aircraft operating on IFR flight plans within controlled airspace, particularly during the enroute phase of flight. Boundaries of the ARTCCs are shown in their entirety using the symbol below.\n\nAir Route Traffic Control Center (ARTCC)\n\nARTCC Name Site Name Frequency When Controller Pilot Data Link Communication (CPDLC) exists for an ARTCC, the text CPDLC (LOGON KUSA) will be shown parallel to the boundary above or below the ARTCC identification as shown below.\n\nAir Route Traffic Control Center (ARTCC) with Controller Pilot Data Link Communication (CPDLC)\n\nThe responsible ARTCC Center names are shown adjacent and parallel to the boundary line. ARTCC sector frequencies are shown in boxes outlined by the same symbol.\n\nARTCC Name\n\nSite Name\n\nFrequency discrete VHF and UHF frequencies\n\nARTCC Remoted Sites with\n\nClass A Airspace is depicted as open area (white) on the IFR Enroute High Altitude Charts. It consists of airspace from 18,000 Mean Sea Level (MSL) to FL600.\n\nClass B Airspace is depicted as screened blue area with a solid line encompassing the area.\n\nClass C Airspace is depicted as screened blue area with a dashed line encompassing the area with a letter 'C' enclosed in a box following the airport name.\n\nClass B and Class C Airspace consist of controlled airspace extending upward from the surface or a designated floor to specified altitudes, within which all aircraft and pilots are subject to the operating rules and requirements specified in the Federal Aviation Regulations (UHF) 71. Class B and C Airspace are shown in abbreviated forms on IFR Enroute Low Altitude Charts. A general note adjacent to Class B airspace refers the user to the appropriate VFR Terminal Area Chart.\n\nClass D Airspace (airports with an operating control tower) are depicted as open area (white) with a letter 'D' enclosed in a box following the airport name.\n\nClass E Airspace is depicted as open area (white) on the IFR Enroute Low Altitude Charts. It consists of airspace below FL180.\n\n62", + "recall": 0.78125, + "true_md": "AUTOMATED WEATHER BROADCAST SERVICES ASOS/AWOS - Automated Surface Observing Station/Automated Weather Observing Station\n\nLatitude and Longitude coordinates are provided for those NAVAIDs that make up part of a route/airway or a holding pattern. All TACAN facilities will include geographic coordinates. \n\n## LATITUDE AND LONGITUDE\n\nControlled airspace consists of those areas where some or all aircraft are subjected to air traffic control within the follow - ing airspace classifications of A, B, C, D, & E.\n\nAir Route Traffic Control Centers (ARTCC) are established to provide Air Traffic Control to aircraft operating on IFR flight plans within controlled airspace, particularly during the enroute phase of flight. Boundaries of the ARTCCs are shown in their entirety using the symbol below.\n\nThe responsible ARTCC Center names are shown adjacent and parallel to the boundary line. ARTCC sector frequencies are shown in boxes outlined by the same symbol.\n\nARTCC Name Site Name Frequency When Controller Pilot Data Link Communication (CPDLC) exists for an ARTCC, the text CPDLC (LOGON KUSA) will be shown parallel to the boundary above or below the ARTCC identification as shown below.\n\nClass A Airspace is depicted as open area (white) on the IFR Enroute High Altitude Charts. It consists of airspace from 18,000 Mean Sea Level (MSL) to FL600.\n\nClass B Airspace is depicted as screened blue area with a solid line encompassing the area.\n\nClass C Airspace is depicted as screened blue area with a dashed line encompassing the area with a let- ter “C” enclosed in a box following the airport name.\n\nClass B and Class C Airspace consist of controlled airspace extending upward from the surface or a des- ignated floor to specified altitudes, within which all aircraft and pilots are subject to the operating rules and requirements specified in the Federal Aviation Regulations (UHF) 71. Class B and C Airspace are shown in abbreviated forms on IFR Enroute Low Altitude Charts. A general note adjacent to Class B airspace refers the user to the appropriate VFR Terminal Area Chart.\n\nClass D Airspace (airports with an operating control tower) are depicted as open area (white) with a letter “D” enclosed in a box following the airport name.\n\nClass E Airspace is depicted as open area (white) on the IFR Enroute Low Altitude Charts. It consists of airspace below FL180.\n\nAutomated weather, when available, is broadcast on the associ - ated NAVAID frequency.\n\nLF/MF\n\nVHF/UHF\n\nFAA Chart Users’ Guide - IFR Enroute Terms\n\n## AIRSPACE INFORMATION\n\n## CONTROLLED AIRSPACE\n\n62\n\nARTCC Remoted Sites with discrete VHF and UHF frequencies\n\nAir Route Traffic Control Center (ARTCC) with Controller Pilot Data Link Communication (CPDLC)\n\nAir Route Traffic Control Center (ARTCC)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8982876555504052, + "doc_id": "b418d46e56e7dd9b955daf9bb38006e538c9f53cf8de9022407d7767325289b2", + "edit_distance": 0.09466666666666666, + "f1_score": 0.9388489208633093, + "meteor": 0.8913500769340296, + "precision": 0.9630996309963099, + "pred_md": "percent of the stall speed for propeller airplanes or 90 percent of the stall speed for jet airplanes. This feat must be accomplished on a smooth runway at all normal service takeoff loading conditions.\n\nFigure 4.19 illustrates the principal forces acting on an airplane during takeoff toll. When the airplane is in the three point attitude at some speed less than the stall speed, the wing lift will be less than the weight of the airplane. As the elevators must be capable of rotating to the takeoff attitude, the critical condition will be with zero load on the nose wheel and the net of lift and weight supported on the main gear. Rolling friction resulting from the normal force on the main gear creates an adverse nose down moment. Also, the center of gravity ahead of the main gear contributes a nose down moment and this consideration could decide the most aft location of the main landing gear during design. The wing may contribute a large nose down moment when flaps are deflected but this effect may be countered by a slight increase in downwash at the tail. To balance these nose down moments, the horizontal tail should be capable of producing sufficient nose up moment to attam the takeoff attitude. at the specified speeds.\n\nThe propeller airplane at takeoff power may induce considerable slipstream velocity at the horizontal tail which can provide an increase in the e&iency of the surface. The jet airplane does not experience a similar magnitude of this effect since the induced velocities from the jet are relatively small compared to the slipstream velocities from a propeller.\n\nLANDING CONTROL REQUIREMENT At landing, the airplane must have suthcient control power to ensure adequate control at specified landing speeds. Adequate landing control is usually assured if the elevators are capable of holding the airplane just off the runway at 105 percent of the stall speed. Of course, the most critical requirement will exist when the c.g. is in the most forward position,\n\n177\n\n## NAVWEPS 00-BOT-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL\n\nflaps are fully extended, and power is set at idle. This configuration will provide the most stable condition which is most demanding of controllability. The full deflection of flaps usually provides the greatest wing diving moment and idle power will produce the most critical (least) dynamic pressure at the hotizontal tail.\n\nThe landing control requirement has one particular difference from the maneuvering control requirement of free flight. As the airplane approaches the ground surface, there will be a change in the three-dimensional flow of the airplane due to ground effect. A wing in proximity to the ground plane will experience a decrease in tip vortices and downwash at a given lift coefficient. The decrease in downwash at the tail tends to increase the static stability and produce a nosedown moment from the reduction in download on the tail. Thus, the airplane just off the runway surface will requite additional control deflection to trim at a given lift coefficient and the landing control requirement may be critical in the design of longitudinal control power.\n\nAs an example of ground effect, a typical propeller powered airplane may requite as much as 15' more up elevator to trim at CLin ground effect than in free flight away from the ground plane. Because of this effect, many aitplaneshavesufIicientcontrolpowertoachieve full stall out of ground effect but do not have the ability to achieve full stall when in close proximity to the ground.\n\nIn some cases the effectiveness of the control surface is adversely affected by the use of trim tabs. If trim tabs are used to excess in ttimming stick forces, the effectiveness of the elevator.may be reduced to hinder landing or takeoff control.\n\nEach of the three principal conditions requiting adequate longitudinal control are ctitical for high static stability. If the forward c.g. limit is exceeded, the airplane may encounter a deficiency of controllability in any of these conditions. Thus, the forward c.g.", + "recall": 0.9157894736842105, + "true_md": "percent of the stall speed for propeller air- planes or 90 percent of the stall speed for jet airplanes. This feat must be accomplished on a smooth runway at all normal service takeoff loading conditions. \n\nFigure 4.19 illustrates the principal forces acting on an airplane during takeoff toll. When the airplane is in the three point attitude at some speed less than the stall speed, the wing lift will be less than the weight of the airplane. As the elevators must be capable of rotating to the takeoff attitude, the critical condition will be with zero load on the nose wheel and the net of lift and weight supported on the main gear. Rolling friction resulting from the normal force on the main gear creates an adverse nose down moment. Also, the center of gravity ahead of the main gear contributes a nose down moment and this consideration could decide the most aft loca- tion of the main landing gear during design. The wing may contribute a large nose down moment when flaps are deflected but this effect may be countered by a slight increase in downwash at the tail. To balance these nose down moments, the horizontal tail should be capable of producing sufficient nose up moment to attam the takeoff attitude. at the specified speeds. The propeller airplane at takeoff power may \n\nthe specified speeds. The propeller airplane at takeoff power may induce considerable slipstream velocity at the horizontal tail which can provide an increase in the e&iency of the surface. The jet airplane does not experience a similar magni- tude of this effect since the induced velocities from the jet are relatively small compared to the slipstream velocities from a propeller. \n\nAt landing, the airplane must have suthcient control power to ensure adequate control at specified landing speeds. Adequate landing control is usually assured if the elevators are capable of holding the airplane just off the runway at 105 percent of the stall speed. Of course, the most critical requirement will exist when the c.g. is in the most forward position, \n\nflaps are fully extended, and power is set at idle. This configuration will provide the most stable condition which is most demand- ing of controllability. The full deflection of flaps usually provides the greatest wing diving moment and idle power will produce the most critical (least) dynamic pressure at the hoti- zontal tail. \n\nThe landing control requirement has one particular difference from the maneuvering control requirement of free flight. As the airplane approaches the ground surface, there will be a change in the three-dimensional flow of the airplane due to ground effect. A wing in proximity to the ground plane will experience a decrease in tip vortices and downwash at a given lift coefficient. The decrease in down- wash at the tail tends to increase the static stability and produce a nosedown moment from the reduction in download on the tail. Thus, the airplane just off the runway surface will requite additional control deflection to trim at a given lift coefficient and the landing con- trol requirement may be critical in the design of longitudinal control power. \n\nAs an example of ground effect, a typical propeller powered airplane may requite as much as 15” more up elevator to trim at CL- in ground effect than in free flight away from the ground plane. Because of this effect, many aitplaneshavesufIicientcontrolpowertoachieve full stall out of ground effect but do not have the ability to achieve full stall when in close proximity to the ground. In some cases the effectiveness of the control \n\nproximity to the ground. In some cases the effectiveness of the control surface is adversely affected by the use of trim tabs. If trim tabs are used to excess in ttim- ming stick forces, the effectiveness of the elevator.may be reduced to hinder landing or takeoff control. \n\nEach of the three principal conditions re- quiting adequate longitudinal control are ctit- ical for high static stability. If the forward c.g. limit is exceeded, the airplane may en- counter a deficiency of controllability in any of these conditions. Thus, the forward c.g. \n\n177 \n\n## LANDING CONTROL REQUIREMENT\n\nNAVWEPS 00-BOT-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6102169202557912, + "doc_id": "7168ac7c41167adce1209493a84140b35ed2604ea24d24a89f5bdd5e6b4252eb", + "edit_distance": 0.35294117647058826, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.945426047306925, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS oo-SOT-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL\n\nFigure 4.31. Landing Gear Configurations\n\nFigure 4.31. Landing Gear Configurations", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS oo-SOT-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL \n\nFigure 4.31. Landing Gear Configurations" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8901854553046176, + "doc_id": "054489dd23a3392cc6107f91cf0d583403cb4921c19a639068615cedd6865930", + "edit_distance": 0.5188953488372093, + "f1_score": 0.9184060721062619, + "meteor": 0.9080847601223633, + "precision": 0.952755905511811, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS DD-8OT-80 APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS\n\n## TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYING\n\nlater portions of takeoff if the airplane is unable to become airborne or if insufficient margin above stall speed prevents successful initial climb, In no circumstances should a formation of ice or frost be allowed to remain on the airplane wing surfaces prior to takeoff.\n\n## ENGINE FAILURE ON THE MULTIENGINE AIRPLANE\n\nIn the case of the single-engine airplane, power-plant failure leaves only the alternatives of effecting a successful power-off landing or abandoning the airplane. In the case of the multiengine airplane, the failure of a powerplant does nor necessarily constitute a disaster since flight may be continued with the remaining powerplants functioning. However, the performance of the multiengine airplane with a powerplant inoperative may be critical for certain conditions of flight and specific techniques and procedures must be observed to obtain adequate performance.\n\nThe effect of a powerplant failure on the multiengine turbojet airplane is illustrated by the first chart of figure 6.8 with the variation of required and available thrust with velocity. If half of the airplane powerplants are inoperative, e.g., single-engine operation of a twinengine airplane, the maximum thrust available at each velocity is reduced to half that available prior to the engine failure. The variation of thrust required with velocity may be affected by the failure of a powerplant in that there may be significant increases in drag if specific procedures are not followed. The inoperative powerplant may contribute additional drag and the pilot must insure that the additional drag is held to a minimum. In the case of the propeller powered airplane, the propeller must be feathered, cowl flaps closed. etc., as the increased drag will detract considerably from the performance.\n\nThe principal effects of the reduced available thrust are pointed out by the illustration of figure 6.6. Of course, the lower available thrust will reduce the maximum level flight\n\nspeed but of greater importance is the reduction in excess thrust. Since the acceleration and climb performance is a function of the excess thrust and power, the failure of a powerplant will be most immediately appreciated in this area of performance. As illustrated in figure 6.8, loss of one-half the maximum available thrust will reduce the excess thrust to less than half the original value. Since some thrust is required to sustain flight, the excess which remains to accelerate and climb the airplane may be greatly reduced. The most critical conditions will exist when various factors combine to produce a minimum of excess thrust or power when engine failure occurs. Thus, critical conditions will be common to high gross weight and high density altitude (and high temperatures in the case of the turbine powered airplane) as each of these factors will reduce the excess thrust at any specific flight condition.\n\nThe asymmetrical power condition which results when a powerplant fails can provide critical control requirements. First consideration is due the yawing moment produced by the asymmetrical power condition. Adequate directional control will be available only when the airplane speed is greater than the minimum directional control speed. Thus, the pilot must insure that the flight speed never falls below the minimum directional control speed because the application of maximum power on the functioning powerplants will produce an uncontrollable yaw if adequate directional control is unavailable. A second consideration which is due the propeller powered airplane involves the rolling moments caused by the slipstream velocity. Asymmetrical power on the propeller airplane will create a dissymmetry of the slipstream velocities on the wing and create rolling moments which must be controlled. These slipstream i nduced rolling moments will be greatest at high power and low velocity and the pilot must be sure of adequate lateral control, especially for the crosswind landing.\n\n376", + "recall": 0.8864468864468864, + "true_md": "## NAVWEPS DD-8OT-80 APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYING\n\n## ENGINE FAILURE ON THE MULTIENGINE AIRPLANE\n\nlater portions of takeoff if the airplane is un- able to become airborne or if insufficient margin above stall speed prevents successful initial climb, In no circumstances should a formation of ice or frost be allowed to remain on the air- plane wing surfaces prior to takeoff. \n\nIn the case of the single-engine airplane, power-plant failure leaves only the alternatives of effecting a successful power-off landing or abandoning the airplane. In the case of the multiengine airplane, the failure of a power- plant does nor necessarily constitute a disaster since flight may be continued with the remain- ing powerplants functioning. However, the performance of the multiengine airplane with a powerplant inoperative may be critical for certain conditions of flight and specific tech- niques and procedures must be observed to obtain adequate performance. \n\nThe effect of a powerplant failure on the multiengine turbojet airplane is illustrated by the first chart of figure 6.8 with the variation of required and available thrust with velocity. If half of the airplane powerplants are inoper- ative, e.g., single-engine operation of a twin- engine airplane, the maximum thrust available at each velocity is reduced to half that avail- able prior to the engine failure. The variation of thrust required with velocity may be affected by the failure of a powerplant in that there may be significant increases in drag if specific procedures are not followed. The inoperative powerplant may contribute addi- tional drag and the pilot must insure that the additional drag is held to a minimum. In the case of the propeller powered airplane, the propeller must be feathered, cowl flaps closed. etc., as the increased drag will detract con- siderably from the performance. \n\nThe principal effects of the reduced available thrust are pointed out by the illustration of figure 6.6. Of course, the lower available thrust will reduce the maximum level flight \n\nThe asymmetrical power condition which results when a powerplant fails can provide critical control requirements. First consid- eration is due the yawing moment produced by the asymmetrical power condition. Ade- quate directional control will be available only when the airplane speed is greater than the minimum directional control speed. Thus, the pilot must insure that the flight speed never falls below the minimum directional control speed because the application of maximum power on the functioning powerplants will produce an uncontrollable yaw if adequate directional control is unavailable. A second consideration which is due the propeller powered airplane involves the rolling moments caused by the slipstream velocity. Asym- metrical power on the propeller airplane will create a dissymmetry of the slipstream veloc- ities on the wing and create rolling moments which must be controlled. These slipstream induced rolling moments will be greatest at high power and low velocity and the pilot must be sure of adequate lateral control, especially for the crosswind landing. \n\nspeed but of greater importance is the reduc- tion in excess thrust. Since the acceleration and climb performance is a function of the excess thrust and power, the failure of a power- plant will be most immediately appreciated in this area of performance. As illustrated in figure 6.8, loss of one-half the maximum avail- able thrust will reduce the excess thrust to less than half the original value. Since some thrust is required to sustain flight, the excess which remains to accelerate and climb the airplane may be greatly reduced. The most critical conditions will exist when various factors combine to produce a minimum of excess thrust or power when engine failure occurs. Thus, critical conditions will be com- mon to high gross weight and high density altitude (and high temperatures in the case of the turbine powered airplane) as each of these factors will reduce the excess thrust at any specific flight condition. \n\n376" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8765048728760029, + "doc_id": "5e415333c54f54baa892072be89cc57e22ca79665dc03b9228e050dbe343b6d6", + "edit_distance": 0.7407932011331445, + "f1_score": 0.9360967184801381, + "meteor": 0.7386402908064604, + "precision": 0.9678571428571429, + "pred_md": "control experienced during ' power settling' results from the turbulent rotational flow on the blades and the unsteady shifting of the flow in and out spanwise along the blade. There is an area of positive thrust in the outer portion of the rotor as a result of the mass of air accelerated downward and an area of negative thrust at the center of the rotor as a result of the mass of air flowing upward. The rotor is stalled only near the hub but no important effect is contributed because of the low local velocities.\n\nOperation in the ' vortex ring' state is a transient condition and the helicopter will seek equilibrium by descending. As the helicopter descends, a greater upflow through the disc results until eventually the flow is entirely up through the rotor and the rotor enters autorotation where lower rates of descent can be achieved. Unfortunately, considerable altitude will be lost before the autorotative type of flow is achieved and a positive recovery technique must be applied to minimize the loss of altitude. ' Power settling' can be recognized by rotor roughness, loss of control due to the turbulent rotational flow, and a very high rate of descent (as high as 3,000 fpm). It is most likely to be encountered inadvertently when attempting to hover when sufficient power is not available because of high gross weight or high density altitude.\n\nRecovery from ' power settling' can be accomplished by getting the rotor out of the ' vortex ring state.' If the condition is encountered with low power, rapid application of full power may increase the downwash sufficiently to get .the rotor out of the condition. If the condition is encountered at high or maximum power or, if maximum power does not effect a recovery, increasing airspeed by diving will result in recovery with minimum loss of altitude. This type of recovery is most effective but adequate cyclic control must be available. If cyclic control has been lost, recovery must be effected by reducing power and collective pitch and entering autorotation.\n\n411\n\n## NAVWEPS OD-EOT-80 APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYING\n\nWhen normal autorotation has been established, a normal power recovery from the autorotation can be made. While such a recovery technique is effective, considerable altitude may be lost. Hence, diving out of the power settling condition provides the most favorable means of recovery.\n\nActually, real instances of true ' power settling' are quite rare. A condition often described incorrectly as ' power settling' is merely a high sink rate as a result of insufficient power to terminate an approach to landing. This situation frequently occurs during high gross weight or high density altitude operation. The flow conditions within the rotor are quite normal and there is merely insufficient power to reduce rate of descent and terminate an approach. Such a situation becomes more critical with a steep approach since the more rapid descent will require more power to terminate the approach.\n\n## THE FLIGHT HANDBOOK\n\nFor the professional aviator, there are few documents which are as important as the airplane flight handbook. The information and data contained in the various sections of the flight handbook provide the basis for safe and effective operation of the airplane.\n\nVarious sections of the flight handbook are devoted to the following subjects:\n\n- (1) Equipment and Systems. With the mechanical complexity of the modern airplane, it is imperative that the pilot be familiar with every item of the aircraft. Only through exact knowledge of the equipment can the pilot properly operate the airplane and contend with malfunctions.\n- (2) Operating Procedures. Good procedures are mandatory to effect safe operation of the airplane and its equipment. The complexity of modern equipment dictates the use of special and exact procedures of operation and any haphazard or non-standard procedure is an", + "recall": 0.9063545150501672, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OD-EOT-80 APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYING \n\nWhen normal autorotation has been estab- lished, a normal power recovery from the auto- rotation can be made. While such a recovery technique is effective, considerable altitude may be lost. Hence, diving out of the power settling condition provides the most favorable means of recovery. \n\ncontrol experienced during “power settling” results from the turbulent rotational flow on the blades and the unsteady shifting of the flow in and out spanwise along the blade. There is an area of positive thrust in the outer portion of the rotor as a result of the mass of air accelerated downward and an area of negative thrust at the center of the rotor as a result of the mass of air flowing upward. The rotor is stalled only near the hub but no important effect is contributed because of the low local velocities. \n\nActually, real instances of true “power settling” are quite rare. A condition often described incorrectly as “power settling” is merely a high sink rate as a result of insufficient power to terminate an approach to landing. This situation frequently occurs during high gross weight or high density altitude operation. The flow conditions within the rotor are quite normal and there is merely insufficient power to reduce rate of descent and terminate an approach. Such a situation becomes more critical with a steep approach since the more rapid descent will require more power to terminate the approach. \n\nOperation in the “vortex ring” state is a transient condition and the helicopter will seek equilibrium by descending. As the heli- copter descends, a greater upflow through the disc results until eventually the flow is entirely up through the rotor and the rotor enters auto- rotation where lower rates of descent can be achieved. Unfortunately, considerable alti- tude will be lost before the autorotative type of flow is achieved and a positive recovery technique must be applied to minimize the loss of altitude. “Power settling” can be recog- nized by rotor roughness, loss of control due to the turbulent rotational flow, and a very high rate of descent (as high as 3,000 fpm). It is most likely to be encountered inadvert- ently when attempting to hover when suf- ficient power is not available because of high gross weight or high density altitude. \n\nFor the professional aviator, there are few documents which are as important as the air- plane flight handbook. The information and data contained in the various sections of the flight handbook provide the basis for safe and effective operation of the airplane. \n\nVarious sections of the flight handbook are devoted to the following subjects: \n\nRecovery from “power settling” can be ac- complished by getting the rotor out of the “vortex ring state.” If the condition is en- countered with low power, rapid application of full power may increase the downwash suf- ficiently to get .the rotor out of the condition. If the condition is encountered at high or maximum power or, if maximum power does not effect a recovery, increasing airspeed by diving will result in recovery with minimum loss of altitude. This type of recovery is most effective but adequate cyclic control must be available. If cyclic control has been lost, re- covery must be effected by reducing power and collective pitch and entering autorotation. \n\n(2) Operating Procedures. Good procedures are mandatory to effect safe operation of the airplane and its equipment. The complexity of modern equipment dictates the use of special and exact procedures of operation and any haphazard or non-standard procedure is an \n\n(1) Equipment and Systems. With the me- chanical complexity of the modern airplane, it is imperative that the pilot be familiar with every item of the aircraft. Only through exact knowledge of the equipment can the pilot properly operate the airplane and contend with malfunctions. \n\n## THE FLIGHT HANDBOOK\n\n411" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9172057806430071, + "doc_id": "61fed49a05dc7e4d6a4209e3adb72491ad4de75c4c5756de6184211ad56d2880", + "edit_distance": 0.13082039911308205, + "f1_score": 0.9586056644880177, + "meteor": 0.9543083732332954, + "precision": 0.9691629955947136, + "pred_md": "## Runway Construction\n\nRunway construction is depicted as follows:\n\n## Hot Spots\n\nHot Spots (HS) are a runway safety related problem area or intersection on an airport. Typically it is a complex or confusing taxiway/taxiway or taxiway/runway intersection. A confusing condition may be compounded by a miscommunication between a controller and a pilot, and may cause an aircraft separation standard to be compromised. The area may have a history of surface incidents or the potential for surface incidents.\n\nHot Spots are indicated on the Airport Diagram with a brown open circle or polygon leadered to a Hot Spot number, e.g., HS 1. The number corresponds to a listing and description on the Hot Spot page in the front the TPP. More information and the location of Hot Spots can be found at http://www.faa.gov/airports/runway\\_safety/hotspots/hotspots\\_list/.\n\n## DEPARTURE PROCEDURES (DPs)\n\nDeparture Procedures (DPs) are designed specifically to assist pilots in avoiding obstacles during the climb to the mini -mum enroute altitude, and/or airports that have civil IFR takeoff minimums other than standard. There are two types of DPs: Obstacle Departure Procedures (ODPs), printed either textually or graphically and Standard Instrument Departures (SIDs), always printed graphically. SIDs are primarily designed for system enhancement and to reduce pilot/controller workload, and require ATC clearance. ODPs provide obstruction clearance via the least onerous route from the terminal area and may be flown without ATC clearance. All DPs provide the pilot with a safe departure from the airport and transi -tion to the enroute structure.\n\nGenerally, DP charts are depicted 'not to scale' due to the great distances involved on some procedures or route segments. A 'to scale' portrayal may be used if readability is assured.\n\nThe DP will show the departure routing, including transitions to the appropriate enroute structure. All routes, turns, altitudes, NAVAIDs, facilities forming intersections and fixes, and those facilities terminating the departure route are shown. A textual description of the departure procedure is also provided. For RNAV DPs, the transition text consists of the transition name and associated computer code. On non-RNAV DPs, the transition text will also include the description of all turns, altitudes, radials, bearings and facilities/fixes needed to guide the user from the common departure point to the terminat -ing facility fix.\n\n117\n\nFAA Chart Users' Guide - Terminal Procedures Publication (TPP) - Terms", + "recall": 0.9482758620689655, + "true_md": "117\n\nFAA Chart Users’ Guide - Terminal Procedures Publication (TPP) - Terms\n\nRunway construction is depicted as follows:\n\nHot Spots (HS) are a runway safety related problem area or intersection on an airport. Typically it is a complex or confus- ing taxiway/taxiway or taxiway/runway intersection. A confusing condition may be compounded by a miscommunication between a controller and a pilot, and may cause an aircraft separation standard to be compromised. The area may have a history of surface incidents or the potential for surface incidents.\n\nHot Spots are indicated on the Airport Diagram with a brown open circle or polygon leadered to a Hot Spot number, e.g., HS 1. The number corresponds to a listing and description on the Hot Spot page in the front the TPP. More information and the location of Hot Spots can be found at http://www.faa.gov/airports/runway\\_safety/hotspots/hotspots\\_list/.\n\nDeparture Procedures (DPs) are designed specifically to assist pilots in avoiding obstacles during the climb to the mini - mum enroute altitude, and/or airports that have civil IFR takeoff minimums other than standard. There are two types of DPs: Obstacle Departure Procedures (ODPs), printed either textually or graphically and Standard Instrument Departures (SIDs), always printed graphically. SIDs are primarily designed for system enhancement and to reduce pilot/controller workload, and require ATC clearance. ODPs provide obstruction clearance via the least onerous route from the terminal area and may be flown without ATC clearance. All DPs provide the pilot with a safe departure from the airport and transi - tion to the enroute structure.\n\nGenerally, DP charts are depicted “not to scale” due to the great distances involved on some procedures or route seg- ments. A “to scale” portrayal may be used if readability is assured.\n\nThe DP will show the departure routing, including transitions to the appropriate enroute structure. All routes, turns, alti- tudes, NAVAIDs, facilities forming intersections and fixes, and those facilities terminating the departure route are shown. A textual description of the departure procedure is also provided. For RNAV DPs, the transition text consists of the transition name and associated computer code. On non-RNAV DPs, the transition text will also include the description of all turns, altitudes, radials, bearings and facilities/fixes needed to guide the user from the common departure point to the terminat - ing facility fix.\n\n## DEPARTURE PROCEDURES (DPs)\n\n## Hot Spots\n\n## Runway Construction" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8656156086298801, + "doc_id": "6a221fc3f0e14d7b544d2cd7916897c3038f427ccb5da6a5c8dd43e6c5c2fb38", + "edit_distance": 0.7187910643889619, + "f1_score": 0.9279437609841827, + "meteor": 0.7113568942526433, + "precision": 0.96, + "pred_md": "1.32. As with the rectangular wing, the nonuniformity of downwash and lift distribution result in inefficiency of rhis planform. For example, a pointed wing of AR=6 would have 17 percent higher induced angle of attack for the wing and 13 percent higher induced drag than an elliptical wing of thesame aspect ratio.\n\nBetween the two extremes of taper will\n\nexist planforms of more tolerable efficiency. The variations of 2 for a wing of taper ratio\n\n=0.5 closely approxtmates the lift distribution of the elliptical wing and the drag due to lift characteristics are nearly identical. A wing of AR=6 and taper ratio=0.5 has only 3 percent higher ai and 1 percent greater CD: than an elliptical wing of the same aspect ratio.\n\n,A separate effect on the spanwise lift distribution is contributed by wing sweepback. Sweepback of the planform tends to alter the lift distribution similar to decreasing the taper ratio. Also, large sweepback tends to increase induced drag.\n\nThe elliptical wing is the ideal of the subsonic aerodynamic planform since it provides a minimum of induced drag for a given aspect ratio. However, the major objection to the elliptical planform is the extreme difficulty of mechanical layout and construction. A highly tapered planform is desirable from the standpoint of structural weight and stiffness and the usual wing planform may have a taper ratio from 0.45 to 0.20. Since structural considerations are quite important in the development of an airplane configuration, the tapered planform is a necessity for an efficient configuration. In order to preserve the aerodynamic efficiency, the resulting planform is tailored by wing twist and section variation to obtain as near as possible the elliptic lift distribution.\n\n## STALL PATTERNS\n\nAn additional effect of the planfotm area distribution is on stall pattern of wing. The desirable stall pattern of any wing is a stall which begins on the root sections first. The\n\nNAVWEPS OD-ROT-RO RASIC AERODYNAM!CS\n\nadvantages of root stall first are that ailerons remain effective at high angles of attack, favorable stall warning results from the buffet on the empennage and aft portion of the fuselage, and the loss of downwash behind the root usually ptovides a stable nose down moment to the airplane. Such a stall pattern is favored but may be difficult to obtain with certain wing configurations. The types of stall patterns inherent with various planforms are illustrated in figure 1.33. The various planform effects are separated as follows :\n\n(A) The elliptical planform has constant local lift coefficients throughout the span from root to tip. Such a lift distribution means that all sections will reach stall at essentially the same wing angle of attack and stall will begin and progress uniformly throughout the span. While the elliptical wing would reach high lift coefficients before incipient stall, there would be little advance warning of complete stall. Also, the ailerons may lack effectiveness when the wing operates near the stall and lateral control may be difficult.\n\n(B) The lift distribution of the rectangular wing exhibits low local lift coefficients at the tip and high local lift coe5cients at the root. Since the wing will initiate stall in the area of highest local lift coefficients, the rectangular wing is characterized by a strong root stall tendency. Of course, this stall pattern is favorable since there is adequate stall warning buffet, adequate aileron effectiveness, and usually strong stable moment changes on the aitplane. Because of the great aerodynamic and structural ine&ciency of this planform, the rectangular wing finds limited application only to low cost, low speed light planes. The simplicity of construction and favorable stall characteristics are predominating requirements of such an airplane. The stall sequence fot a rectangular wing is shown by the tuft-grid pictures. The progressive flow separation illustrates the strong root stall tendency.\n\n(C) The wing of moderate taper (taper ratio=0.5) has a lift distribution which closely", + "recall": 0.8979591836734694, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OD-ROT-RO RASIC AERODYNAM!CS \n\n1.32. As with the rectangular wing, the non- uniformity of downwash and lift distribution result in inefficiency of rhis planform. For example, a pointed wing of AR=6 would have 17 percent higher induced angle of attack for the wing and 13 percent higher induced drag than an elliptical wing of thesame aspect ratio. \n\nadvantages of root stall first are that ailerons remain effective at high angles of attack, favorable stall warning results from the buffet on the empennage and aft portion of the fuse- lage, and the loss of downwash behind the root usually ptovides a stable nose down moment to the airplane. Such a stall pattern is favored but may be difficult to obtain with certain wing configurations. The types of stall patterns in- herent with various planforms are illustrated in figure 1.33. The various planform effects are separated as follows : (A) The elliptical planform has constant \n\nBetween the two extremes of taper will exist planforms of more tolerable efficiency. \n\nThe variations of 2 for a wing of taper ratio =0.5 closely approxtmates the lift distribution of the elliptical wing and the drag due to lift characteristics are nearly identical. A wing of AR=6 and taper ratio=0.5 has only 3 percent higher ai and 1 percent greater CD: than an elliptical wing of the same aspect ratio. \n\n,A separate effect on the spanwise lift dis- tribution is contributed by wing sweepback. Sweepback of the planform tends to alter the lift distribution similar to decreasing the taper ratio. Also, large sweepback tends to increase induced drag. The elliptical wing is the ideal of the sub- \n\nare separated as follows : (A) The elliptical planform has constant local lift coefficients throughout the span from root to tip. Such a lift distribution means that all sections will reach stall at essentially the same wing angle of attack and stall will begin and progress uniformly throughout the span. While the elliptical wing would reach high lift coefficients before incipient stall, there would be little advance warning of complete stall. Also, the ailerons may lack effectiveness when the wing operates near the stall and lat- eral control may be difficult. (B) The lift distribution of the rectangular \n\neral control may be difficult. (B) The lift distribution of the rectangular wing exhibits low local lift coefficients at the tip and high local lift coe5cients at the root. Since the wing will initiate stall in the area of highest local lift coefficients, the rectangular wing is characterized by a strong root stall tendency. Of course, this stall pattern is fav- orable since there is adequate stall warning buffet, adequate aileron effectiveness, and usu- ally strong stable moment changes on the ait- plane. Because of the great aerodynamic and structural ine&ciency of this planform, the rectangular wing finds limited application only to low cost, low speed light planes. The sim- plicity of construction and favorable stall characteristics are predominating requirements of such an airplane. The stall sequence fot a rectangular wing is shown by the tuft-grid pictures. The progressive flow separation il- lustrates the strong root stall tendency. \n\ninduced drag. The elliptical wing is the ideal of the sub- sonic aerodynamic planform since it provides a minimum of induced drag for a given aspect ratio. However, the major objection to the elliptical planform is the extreme difficulty of mechanical layout and construction. A highly tapered planform is desirable from the stand- point of structural weight and stiffness and the usual wing planform may have a taper ratio from 0.45 to 0.20. Since structural con- siderations are quite important in the develop- ment of an airplane configuration, the tapered planform is a necessity for an efficient configu- ration. In order to preserve the aerodynamic efficiency, the resulting planform is tailored by wing twist and section variation to obtain as near as possible the elliptic lift distribution. \n\nAn additional effect of the planfotm area distribution is on stall pattern of wing. The desirable stall pattern of any wing is a stall which begins on the root sections first. The \n\n(C) The wing of moderate taper (taper ratio=0.5) has a lift distribution which closely \n\n## STALL PATTERNS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.16341167437708168, + "doc_id": "be9fa3427827274d81046b7787f8889899b1f201cab951ac64a59d03eb854659", + "edit_distance": 0.7674418604651163, + "f1_score": 0.7857142857142857, + "meteor": 0.7667908276102898, + "precision": 0.6470588235294118, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS Oo-ROT-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nFigure 2.5. Principles of Propulsion\n\nFigure 2.5. Principles of Propulsion\n\n105", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS Oo-ROT-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE \n\n105 \n\nFigure 2.5. Principles of Propulsion" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8343129591514222, + "doc_id": "f033a902856b160416eb838bbf4def08e7dfb14062992ddc1d03e8ae970d0c69", + "edit_distance": 0.8417818740399385, + "f1_score": 0.9230769230769229, + "meteor": 0.7346405771108823, + "precision": 0.9629629629629629, + "pred_md": "PlAVWEPS 00-8OT-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS\n\nThis relationship has great application in aerodynamics and is quite fundamental and necessary in certain parts of airplane performance.\n\nVISCOSITY. The viscosity of the air is important in scale and friction effects. The coefficient of absolute viscosity is the proportion between the shearing stress and velocity gradient for a fluid flow. The viscosity of gases is unusual in that the viscosity is generally a function of temperature alone and an increase in temperature increases the viscosity. The coefficient of absolute viscosity is assigned the shorthand notation I, (mu). Since many parts of aerodynamics involve consideration of viscosity and density, a more usual form of viscosity measure is the proportion of the coefficient of absolute viscosity and density. This combination is termed the ' kinematic viscosity' and is noted by Y (nu).\n\nkinematic viscosity\n\n\n\n\n\nv=PlP\n\nThe kinematic viscosity of air at standard sea level conditions is 0.0001576 square feet per second. At an altitude of 40,000 feet the kinematic viscosity is increased to 0.0005059 square foot per second.\n\nIn order to provide a common denominator for comparison of various aircraft, a standard atmosphere has been adopted. The standard atmosphere actually represents the mean or average properties of the atmosphere. Figure 1.1 illustrates the variation of the most important properties of the air throughout the standard atmosphere. Notice that the lapse rate is constant in the troposphere and the stratosphere begins with the isothermal region.\n\nSince all aircraft performance is compared and,evaluated in the environment of the standard atmosphere, all of the aircraft instrumentation is calibrated for the standard atmosphere.\n\n4\n\nThus, certain corrections must apply to the instrumentation as well as the aircraft performance if the operating conditions do not fit the standard atmosphere. In order to properly account for the nonstandard atmosphere certain terms must be defined. Pressure &itudc . is the altitude in the standard atmosphere corresponditrg to a particular pressure. The aircraft altimeter is essentially a sensitive barometer calibrated to indicate altitude in the staotlard atmosphere. If the altimeter is set for 29.92 in. Hg the altitude indicated is the pressure altitude-the altitude in the standard atmosphere corresponding to the sensed pressure. Of course, this indicated pressure altitude may not be the actual height above sea level due to variations in remperature, lapse rate; atniospheric pressure, and possible errors in the sensed pressure.\n\nThe more appropriate term for correlating aerodynamic performance in the nonstandard atmosphere is density &it&-the altitude in the standard atmosphere corresponding to a particular value of air density. The computation of density altitude must certainly involve consideration of pressure (pressure altitude) and temperature. Figure 1.6 illustrates the manner in which pressure altitude and temperature combine to produce a certain density altitude. This chart is quite standard in use and is usually included in the performance section of the flight handbook. Many subject areas of aerodynamics and aircraft performance will emphasize density altitude and temperature as the most important factors requiring consideration.\n\n## BERNOULLI' S PRINCIPLE AND SUBSONIC AIRFLOW\n\nAll of the external aerodynamic forces on a surface are the result of air pressure or air friction. Friction effects are generally confined to a thin layer of air in the immediate vicinity of the surface and friction forces are not the predominating aerodynamic forces. Therefore,", + "recall": 0.8863636363636364, + "true_md": "PlAVWEPS 00-8OT-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS \n\nThus, certain corrections must apply to the instrumentation as well as the aircraft per- formance if the operating conditions do not fit the standard atmosphere. In order to prop- erly account for the nonstandard atmosphere certain terms must be defined. Pressure .&itudc is the altitude in the standard atmosphere corresponditrg to a particular pressure. The aircraft altimeter is essentially a sensitive barometer calibrated to indicate altitude in the staotlard atmosphere. If the altimeter is set for 29.92 in. Hg the altitude indicated is the pressure altitude-the altitude in the stand- ard atmosphere corresponding to the sensed pressure. Of course, this indicated pressure altitude may not be the actual height above sea level due to variations in remperature, lapse rate; atniospheric pressure, and possible errors in the sensed pressure. \n\nThis relationship has great application in aerodynamics and is quite fundamental and necessary in certain parts of airplane perform- ance. VISCOSITY. The viscosity of the air is \n\nance. VISCOSITY. The viscosity of the air is important in scale and friction effects. The coefficient of absolute viscosity is the propor- tion between the shearing stress and velocity gradient for a fluid flow. The viscosity of gases is unusual in that the viscosity is gen- erally a function of temperature alone and an increase in temperature increases the viscosity. The coefficient of absolute viscosity is assigned the shorthand notation I, (mu). Since many parts of aerodynamics involve consideration of viscosity and density, a more usual form of viscosity measure is the proportion of the co- efficient of absolute viscosity and density. This combination is termed the “kinematic viscosity” and is noted by Y (nu). \n\n$$cc coefficient of absolute viscosity density v=PlP $$\n\nThe more appropriate term for correlating aerodynamic performance in the nonstandard atmosphere is density &it&-the altitude in the standard atmosphere corresponding to a particular value of air density. The computa- tion of density altitude must certainly involve consideration of pressure (pressure altitude) and temperature. Figure 1.6 illustrates the manner in which pressure altitude and tem- perature combine to produce a certain density altitude. This chart is quite standard in use and is usually included in the performance section of the flight handbook. Many subject areas of aerodynamics and aircraft performance will emphasize density altitude and temperature as the most important factors requiring con- sideration. \n\nkinematic viscosity \n\nThe kinematic viscosity of air at standard sea level conditions is 0.0001576 square feet per second. At an altitude of 40,000 feet the kinematic viscosity is increased to 0.0005059 square foot per second. \n\nIn order to provide a common denominator for comparison of various aircraft, a standard atmosphere has been adopted. The standard atmosphere actually represents the mean or average properties of the atmosphere. Figure 1.1 illustrates the variation of the most im- portant properties of the air throughout the standard atmosphere. Notice that the lapse rate is constant in the troposphere and the stratosphere begins with the isothermal region. Since all aircraft performance is compared \n\nstratosphere begins with the isothermal region. Since all aircraft performance is compared and,evaluated in the environment of the stand- ard atmosphere, all of the aircraft instrumenta- tion is calibrated for the standard atmosphere. \n\nAll of the external aerodynamic forces on a surface are the result of air pressure or air fric- tion. Friction effects are generally confined to a thin layer of air in the immediate vicinity of the surface and friction forces are not the pre- dominating aerodynamic forces. Therefore, \n\n## BERNOULLI ’ S PRINCIPLE AND SUBSONIC AIRFLOW\n\n4" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4452035958895918, + "doc_id": "4624c19d4ea7c5e2b804ae501354670096d25f93d9c1264653395f9d3d74fb30", + "edit_distance": 0.5, + "f1_score": 0.8666666666666667, + "meteor": 0.8958497124177597, + "precision": 0.7647058823529411, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS 00-8OT-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL\n\n0\n\n0\n\n-I\n\nb\n\nFigure 4.5. Airphmc Static Longitudinal Stability\n\nFigure 4.5. Airphmc Static Longitudinal Stability\n\n252", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-8OT-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL \n\nFigure 4.5. Airphmc Static Longitudinal Stability \n\n252" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8611953221221078, + "doc_id": "e562ca1e710214279c1303965257bf97fde5de77b72c15acb9bb935f19951908", + "edit_distance": 0.7510431154381085, + "f1_score": 0.9166666666666667, + "meteor": 0.7586204641584982, + "precision": 0.9649122807017544, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS OD-SOT-80 APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS,\n\n## TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYING\n\nairplane. Density altitude will determine the true airspeed at takeoff and can affect the takeoff acceleration by altering the powerplant thrust. The effect of tempetature alone is important in the case of the turbine powered aircraft since inlet air temperature will affect powerplant thrust. Ic should be noted that a typical turbojet aitplane may he approximately twice as sensitive to density altitude and five to ten times as sensitive to temperature as a representacive reciprocating engine powered airplane.\n\n(4) Specific humidity must be accounted for in the case of the reciprocating engine powered airplane. A high water vapor content in the air will cause a definite reduction in takeoff power and takeoff acceleration.\n\n(5) The runluay condition will deserve consideration when the takeoff acceleration is basically low. The runway slope must be compared carefully with the surface winds because ordinary values of runway slope will usually favor choice of the runway with headwind and upslope rather than downslope and tailwind. The surface condition of the runway has little bearing on takeoff distance as long as the runway is a hard surface.\n\nEach .of these factors must be accounted for and the takeoff distance properly computed for the existing conditions. Since obstacle clearance distance is generally a function of the same factors which affect takeoff distance, the obstacle clearance distance is usually related as some proportion of the takeoff distance. Of course, the takeoff and obstacle clearance distances related by the handbook data will be obtained by the techniques and procedures outlined in the handbook.\n\nTYPICAL ERRORS. The takeoff distance of an airplane should be computed for each takeoff. A most inexcusable error would be to attempt takeoff from a runway of insufficient\n\nlength. Familiarity with the airplane handbook performance data and proper accounting of weight, wind, altitude, temperature, etc., are necessary parts of flying. Conditions of high gross weight, high pressure altitude and temperature, and unfavorable winds create the extreme requirements of runway length, especially for the turbine powered airplane. Under these conditions, use of the handbook data is mandatory and no guesswork can be tolerated.\n\nOne typical.etror of takeoff technique is the premature or excess pitch rotation of the airplane. Premzture or excm pitch rotation of the airplane may seriously reduce the takeoff acceleration and increase the takeoff distance. In addition, when the airplane is placed at an excessive angle of attack during takeoff, the airplane may become airborne at too low a speed and the result may be a stall, lack of adequate control (especially in a crosswind), or poor initial climb performance. In fact. there are certain low aspect ratio configurations of airplanes which, at an excessive angle of artack, will not fly out of ground effect. Thus, over-rotation of the airplane ,during takeoff may hinder takeoff acceleration or the.initial climb. It is quite typical for an airplane to be placed at an excess angle of attack and become airborne prematurely then settle back fo rhe runway. When the proper angle of attack is assumed, the airplane simply accelerates to the takeoff speed and becomes airborne wirh sufficient initial rate of climb. In this sense, the appropriate rotation and takeoff speeds or an angle of attack indicator must be used.\n\nIf the airplane is subject to a sudden pull-up or Jteep tzzra after becoming airborne, rhe,resulr may be a stall, spin, or reduction in initial rate of climb. The increased angle of attack may exceed the critical angle of attack or the increase in induced drag may be quite large. For this reason, any clearing turns made immediately after takeoff or deck launch must be slight and well within the capabilities of the airplane.\n\n366", + "recall": 0.873015873015873, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OD-SOT-80 APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS, TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYING \n\nlength. Familiarity with the airplane hand- book performance data and proper accounting of weight, wind, altitude, temperature, etc., are necessary parts of flying. Conditions of high gross weight, high pressure altitude and temperature, and unfavorable winds create the extreme requirements of runway length, espe- cially for the turbine powered airplane. Under these conditions, use of the handbook data is mandatory and no guesswork can be tolerated. One typical.etror of takeoff technique is the \n\nairplane. Density altitude will determine the true airspeed at takeoff and can affect the takeoff acceleration by altering the powerplant thrust. The effect of tempeta- ture alone is important in the case of the turbine powered aircraft since inlet air tem- perature will affect powerplant thrust. Ic should be noted that a typical turbojet ait- plane may he approximately twice as sensi- tive to density altitude and five to ten times as sensitive to temperature as a representa- cive reciprocating engine powered airplane. \n\n(4) Specific humidity must be accounted for in the case of the reciprocating engine powered airplane. A high water vapor content in the air will cause a definite reduc- tion in takeoff power and takeoff acceler- ation. \n\nmandatory and no guesswork can be tolerated. One typical.etror of takeoff technique is the premature or excess pitch rotation of the air- plane. Premzture or excm pitch rotation of the airplane may seriously reduce the takeoff accel- eration and increase the takeoff distance. In addition, when the airplane is placed at an excessive angle of attack during takeoff, the airplane may become airborne at too low a speed and the result may be a stall, lack of ade- quate control (especially in a crosswind), or poor initial climb performance. In fact. there are certain low aspect ratio configurations of airplanes which, at an excessive angle of ar- tack, will not fly out of ground effect. Thus, over-rotation of the airplane ,during takeoff may hinder takeoff acceleration or the.initial climb. It is quite typical for an airplane to be placed at an excess angle of attack and become airborne prematurely then settle back fo rhe runway. When the proper angle of attack is assumed, the airplane simply accelerates to the takeoff speed and becomes airborne wirh suf- ficient initial rate of climb. In this sense, the appropriate rotation and takeoff speeds or an angle of attack indicator must be used. \n\n(5) The runluay condition will deserve con- sideration when the takeoff acceleration is basically low. The runway slope must be compared carefully with the surface winds because ordinary values of runway slope will usually favor choice of the runway with headwind and upslope rather than down- slope and tailwind. The surface condition of the runway has little bearing on takeoff distance as long as the runway is a hard surface. \n\nEach .of these factors must be accounted for and the takeoff distance properly com- puted for the existing conditions. Since obstacle clearance distance is generally a function of the same factors which affect takeoff distance, the obstacle clearance dis- tance is usually related as some proportion of the takeoff distance. Of course, the take- off and obstacle clearance distances related by the handbook data will be obtained by the techniques and procedures outlined in the handbook. \n\nIf the airplane is subject to a sudden pull-up or Jteep tzzra after becoming airborne, rhe,resulr may be a stall, spin, or reduction in initial rate of climb. The increased angle of attack may exceed the critical angle of attack or the in- crease in induced drag may be quite large. For this reason, any clearing turns made immedi- ately after takeoff or deck launch must be slight and well within the capabilities of the air- plane. \n\nTYPICAL ERRORS. The takeoff distance of an airplane should be computed for each takeoff. A most inexcusable error would be to attempt takeoff from a runway of insufficient \n\n366" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.21626010675918345, + "doc_id": "4e0aaeb90140ee9c2cc290f06ac853da787f3aef784b9e8b3070cd8603704196", + "edit_distance": 0.5263157894736842, + "f1_score": 0.6428571428571428, + "meteor": 0.8211575489862951, + "precision": 0.5, + "pred_md": "## Airspace Information (Continued)\n\nVHF/UHF LF/MF\n\n77\n\nFAA Chart Users' Guide - IFR Enroute Symbology", + "recall": 0.9, + "true_md": "77\n\nFAA Chart Users’ Guide - IFR Enroute Symbology" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.31377936689074815, + "doc_id": "69c629782b11c0ec223948818618793b6d7ea14c9c2ef35ae54acb2103310927", + "edit_distance": 0.66, + "f1_score": 0.7272727272727273, + "meteor": 0.835137300356248, + "precision": 0.5714285714285714, + "pred_md": "CYLINDER\n\nWITHOUT\n\nCIRCULATION\n\n## NAVWEPS 00-8OT-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS\n\nCYLINDER\n\nWITH\n\nCIRCULATION\n\nMAGNUS EFFECT BY ROTATING CYLINDER\n\nMAGNUS EFFECT BY ROTATING CYLINDER\n\nAIRFOIL LIFT\n\nFigure 1.8. Generation of Lift (sheet 1 of 2)\n\nAIRFOIL LIFTFigure 1.8. Generation of Lift (sheet 1 of 2)\n\n17", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-8OT-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS \n\nFigure 1.8. Generation of Lift (sheet 1 of 2) \n\n17" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9042057833446494, + "doc_id": "8ddc81c392d0f60285485045b02ae4fdb12637bcce92b3fa513b90933fe59fe7", + "edit_distance": 0.5958904109589042, + "f1_score": 0.9798657718120807, + "meteor": 0.7726075929605397, + "precision": 0.9798657718120806, + "pred_md": "The coordinates for the airport reference point are located at the center of the bottom margin.\n\n## BRIEFING STRIP INFORMATION\n\nAt the top of every TPP is the Briefing Strip which consists of three stacked strips of information immediately above the planview. Information varies depending upon the type of procedure.\n\n## Top Briefing Strip\n\nThe top briefing strip contains procedural information in three separate boxes, in the following sequence from left to right:\n\n- · Box 1: Primary Procedure Navigation Information: The primary navigation type (VOR, LOC, NDB, RNAV, etc.) with its identifier and frequency/channel. If applicable, WAAS, the WAAS Channel Number, and the WAAS Refer -ence Path indicator are shown stacked top to bottom. If the primary navigation type is GBAS, then the following information is shown, stacked top to bottom: GBAS, CH NNNN, RPI XXXX. If there is not a primary Navigation Box required, the first box is removed.\n- · Box 2: Final Approach Course Information . The inbound Approach Course (APP CRS) is shown.\n- · Box 3: Runway Landing Information: Stacked top to bottom, the runway landing distance (Rwy Ldg), the Touchdown Zone Elevation (TDZE), and the Airport Elevation (Apt Elev) are shown. Rwy Ldg may not reflect full runway length due to displaced thresholds and shorter declared distances.\n\nTop Briefing Strip Examples:\n\n## Ground based NAVAID:\n\n## RNAV-WAAS:\n\nGBAS:\n\n95\n\nFAA Chart Users' Guide - Terminal Procedures Publication (TPP) - Terms", + "recall": 0.9798657718120806, + "true_md": "FAA Chart Users’ Guide - Terminal Procedures Publication (TPP) - Terms\n\n95\n\n- • Box 3: Runway Landing Information: Stacked top to bottom, the runway landing distance (Rwy Ldg), the Touchdown Zone Elevation (TDZE), and the Airport Elevation (Apt Elev) are shown. Rwy Ldg may not reflect full runway length due to displaced thresholds and shorter declared distances.\n\n- • Box 1: Primary Procedure Navigation Information: The primary navigation type (VOR, LOC, NDB, RNAV, etc.) with its identifier and frequency/channel. If applicable, WAAS, the WAAS Channel Number, and the WAAS Refer - ence Path indicator are shown stacked top to bottom. If the primary navigation type is GBAS, then the following information is shown, stacked top to bottom: GBAS, CH NNNN, RPI XXXX. If there is not a primary Navigation Box required, the first box is removed.\n\n- • Box 2: Final Approach Course Information . The inbound Approach Course (APP CRS) is shown. \n\nThe top briefing strip contains procedural information in three separate boxes, in the following sequence from left to right:\n\n## Top Briefing Strip\n\nThe coordinates for the airport reference point are located at the center of the bottom margin. \n\nAt the top of every TPP is the Briefing Strip which consists of three stacked strips of information immediately above the planview. Information varies depending upon the type of procedure. \n\n## BRIEFING STRIP INFORMATION\n\nTop Briefing Strip Examples:\n\nGround based NAVAID: \n\nRNAV-WAAS: \n\nGBAS:" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8648312015951675, + "doc_id": "2334a5e2d894b081fced7eff7350d21f45cd8e56cd95ed37181412808df565c3", + "edit_distance": 0.39271255060728744, + "f1_score": 0.9184692179700499, + "meteor": 0.880423624357152, + "precision": 0.9550173010380623, + "pred_md": "Thus, wirh rhe higher lift coefficienr available, less dynamic pressure is required to provide the necessary lift.\n\nBecause of the stated variation of stall speed with C-, large changes in CLare necessary to produce significant changes in stall speed. This effect is illustrated by the graph in figure 1.16 and certain typical values are shown below:\n\nPercent increase CL. in .~. 2 10 so loo 300\n\nPercent reduction in stall speed 1 5 18 29 50\n\nThe contribution of the high lift devices must be considerable to cause large reduction in stall speed. The most elaborate combination of flaps, slots, slats, and boundary layer control throughout the span of the wing would be required to increase C,by 300 percent. A common case is that of a typical propeller driven transport which experiences a 70 percent increase in CzIM1 by full flap deflection. A typical single engine jet fighter with a thin swept wing obtains a 20 percent increase in CLby full flap deflection. Thin airfoil sections with sweepback impose distinct limitations on the effectiveness of flaps and the 20 percent increase in CLby flaps is a typicalif not high-value for such a configuration.\n\nOne factor common to maximum lift condition is the angle of attack and pressure distribution. The maximum lift coefficient of a particular wing configuration is obtained at one angle of attack and one pressure distribution. Weight, bank angle, load factor, density altitude, and airspeed have no direct effect on the stall angle of attack. This fact is sufficient justification for the use of angle of attack indicators and stall warning devices which sense pressure distribution on the wing. During flight maneuvers, landing approach, takeoff, turns, etc. the airplani will stall if the critical angle of attack is cxcccdcd. The airspeed ar which stall occurs will be determined by weight, load factor, and altitude but the stall\n\n39\n\n## NAVWEPS OO-EOT-RO BASIC AERODYNAMICS\n\nangle of attack is unaffected. At any parricular altitude, the indicated stall speed is a function of weight and load factor. An increase in altitude will produce a decrease in density and increase the true airspeed at stall. Also, an increase in altitude will alter compressibility and viscosity effects and, generally speaking, cause the in,&ztcd stall speed to increase. This parti&lar consideration is usually significant only above altitudes of 20,000 ft.\n\nRecovery from stall involves a very simple concept. Since stall is precipitated by an excessive angle of attack, the angle of attack must be dccmmd. This is a fundamental principle which is common to any airplane.\n\nAn airplane may be designed to be ' stallproof' simply by reducing the effectiveness of the elevators. If the elevators are not powerful enough to hold the airplane to high angles of attack, the airplane cannot be stalled in any condition of flight. Such a requirement for a tactical military airplane would seriously reduce performance. High lift coefficients near the maximum are required for high maneuverability and low landing and takeoff speeds. Hence, the Naval Aviator must appreciate the effect of the many variables affecting the stall speed and regard ' attitude flying,' angle of attack indicators, and stall warning devices as techniques which allow more precise control of the airplane at high lift conditions.\n\n## HIGH LIFT DEVICES\n\nThere are many different types of high lift devices used to increase the maximum lift coefficient for low speed flight. The high lift devices applied to the trailing edge of a section consist of a flap which is usually 15 to 25 percent of the chord. The deflection of a flap produces the effect of a large amount of camber added well aft on the chord. The principal types of flaps are shown applied to a basic section of airfoil. The effect of a 30' deflection of a 25 percent chord flap is shown on the lift and drag curves of figure 1.17.", + "recall": 0.8846153846153846, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OO-EOT-RO BASIC AERODYNAMICS \n\nThus, wirh rhe higher lift coefficienr available, less dynamic pressure is required to provide the necessary lift. \n\nBecause of the stated variation of stall speed with C-, large changes in CL- are necessary to produce significant changes in stall speed. This effect is illustrated by the graph in figure 1.16 and certain typical values are shown below: \n\nPercent increase in CL. .~. 2 10 so loo 300 \n\nPercent reduction in stall speed 1 5 18 29 50 \n\nThe contribution of the high lift devices must be considerable to cause large reduction in stall speed. The most elaborate combination of flaps, slots, slats, and boundary layer con- trol throughout the span of the wing would be required to increase C,- by 300 percent. A common case is that of a typical propeller driven transport which experiences a 70 per- cent increase in CzIM1 by full flap deflection. A typical single engine jet fighter with a thin swept wing obtains a 20 percent increase in CL- by full flap deflection. Thin airfoil sec- tions with sweepback impose distinct limita- tions on the effectiveness of flaps and the 20 percent increase in CL- by flaps is a typical- if not high-value for such a configuration. \n\nOne factor common to maximum lift condi- tion is the angle of attack and pressure distri- bution. The maximum lift coefficient of a particular wing configuration is obtained at one angle of attack and one pressure distribu- tion. Weight, bank angle, load factor, density altitude, and airspeed have no direct effect on the stall angle of attack. This fact is sufficient justification for the use of angle of attack indi- cators and stall warning devices which sense pressure distribution on the wing. During flight maneuvers, landing approach, takeoff, turns, etc. the airplani will stall if the critical angle of attack is cxcccdcd. The airspeed ar which stall occurs will be determined by weight, load factor, and altitude but the stall \n\n39 \n\n## HIGH LIFT DEVICES\n\nThere are many different types of high lift devices used to increase the maximum lift co- efficient for low speed flight. The high lift devices applied to the trailing edge of a section consist of a flap which is usually 15 to 25 per- cent of the chord. The deflection of a flap produces the effect of a large amount of camber added well aft on the chord. The principal types of flaps are shown applied to a basic sec- tion of airfoil. The effect of a 30’ deflection of a 25 percent chord flap is shown on the lift and drag curves of figure 1.17. \n\nAn airplane may be designed to be “stall- proof” simply by reducing the effectiveness of the elevators. If the elevators are not power- ful enough to hold the airplane to high angles of attack, the airplane cannot be stalled in any condition of flight. Such a requirement for a tactical military airplane would seriously re- duce performance. High lift coefficients near the maximum are required for high maneuver- ability and low landing and takeoff speeds. Hence, the Naval Aviator must appreciate the effect of the many variables affecting the stall speed and regard “attitude flying,” angle of attack indicators, and stall warning devices as techniques which allow more precise control of the airplane at high lift conditions. \n\nangle of attack is unaffected. At any parricu- lar altitude, the indicated stall speed is a func- tion of weight and load factor. An increase in altitude will produce a decrease in density and increase the true airspeed at stall. Also, an increase in altitude will alter compressibility and viscosity effects and, generally speaking, cause the in,&ztcd stall speed to increase. This parti&lar consideration is usually sig- nificant only above altitudes of 20,000 ft. \n\nRecovery from stall involves a very simple concept. Since stall is precipitated by an excessive angle of attack, the angle of attack must be dccmmd. This is a fundamental princi- ple which is common to any airplane." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.41180376356915777, + "doc_id": "b698ec39f5b9dd597c0a844808c8618cd25f26880fa594b30c6d8d59aab6d12d", + "edit_distance": 0.4444444444444444, + "f1_score": 0.9565217391304348, + "meteor": 0.9306350215441124, + "precision": 0.9166666666666666, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS OD-3OT-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL\n\nFigure 4.34. Roll Coupling\n\nFigure 4.34. Roll Coupling\n\n316", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OD-3OT-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL \n\n316 \n\nFigure 4.34. Roll Coupling" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8777848757535406, + "doc_id": "4a80135621eea05a55ddb2bbdcd13146194bc2abcd84a8187c75d2d4c186ec63", + "edit_distance": 0.6685796269727403, + "f1_score": 0.9418181818181819, + "meteor": 0.7471939148883077, + "precision": 0.9810606060606061, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPJ OO-ROT-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE\n\nto airplane factors. The turboprop powerplant prefers operation at low inlet air temperatures and relatively high power setting to produce low specific fuel consumption. While an increase in altitude will increase the minimum power required for the airplane, the powerplant achieves more efficient operation. As a result of these differences, maximum endurance of the multiengine turboprop airplane at low altitudes may require shutting down some of the powerplants in order to operate the remaining powerplants at a higher, more efficient power setting.\n\nEFFECT OF ALTITUDE ON ENDURANCE, TURBOJET AIRPLANES. Since the fuel flow of the turbojet powered airplane is proportional to thrust required, the turbojet airplane will achieve maximum specific endurance when operated at minimum thrust required or (L/D),. In subsonic flight, (L/D)m~ occurs at a specific value of lift coefBcient for a given airplane and is essentially independent of weight or altitude. If a given weight an~d configuration of airplane is operated at various altitudes, the value of the minimum thrust required is unaffected by the curves of thrust required versus velocity shown in figure 2.27. Hence, it is apparent that the aerodynamic configuration has no prefeience for altitude (within compressibility limits) and specific endurance is a function only of engine performance.\n\nThe specific fuel consumption of the turbojet engine is strongly affected by operating RPM and altitude. Generally, the turbojet engine prefers the operating range near normal rated engine speed and the low temperatures of the stratosphere to produce low specific fuel consumption. Thus, increased altitude provides the favorable lower inlet air temperature and requires a greater engine speed to provide the thrust required at (L/D)-. The typical turbojet airplane experiences an increase in specific endurance with altitude with the peak values occurring at or near the tropopausc. For example, a typical single-engine turbojet\n\nairplane will have a maximum specific endurance at 35,ooO ft. which is at least 40 percent greater than the maximum value at sea level. If the turbojet airplane is at low altitude and it is necessary to hold for a considerable time, maximum time in the air will be obtained by beginning a climb to some optimum altitude dependent upon the fuel quantity available. Even though fuel is expended during the climb, the higher altitude will provide greater total endurance. Of course, the use of afterburner for the climb would produce a prohibitive reduction in endurance.\n\n## OFl4X' TIMUM RANGE AND ENDURANCE\n\nThere are many conditions of flying operations in which optimum range or endurance conditions are not possible or practical. In many instances, the off-optimum conditions result from certain operational requirements or simplification of operating procedure. In addition, off-optimum performance may be the result of a powerplant malfunction or failure. The most important conditions are discussed for various airplanes by powerplant type.\n\nRECIPROCATING POWERED AIRPLANE. In the majority of cases, the reciprocating powered airplane is operated at' an engine dictated cruise. Service use will most probably define some continuous power setting which will give good service life and trouble-free operation of the powerplant. When range or endurance is of no special interest, the simple expedient is to operate the powerplant at the recommended power setting and accept whatever speed, range, or endurance that results. While such a procedure greatly simplifies the matter of cruise control, the practice does not provide the necessary knowledge required for operating a high performance, long range airplane.\n\nThe failure of an engine on the multiengine reciprocating powered airplane has interesting ramifications. The first problem appearing is to produce sufficient power from the remaining engines to keep the airplane airborne. The\n\n172", + "recall": 0.9055944055944056, + "true_md": "NAVWEPJ OO-ROT-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE \n\n## OFl4X ’ TIMUM RANGE AND ENDUR- ANCE There are many conditions of flying oper-\n\nairplane will have a maximum specific endur- ance at 35,ooO ft. which is at least 40 percent greater than the maximum value at sea level. If the turbojet airplane is at low altitude and it is necessary to hold for a considerable time, maximum time in the air will be obtained by beginning a climb to some optimum altitude dependent upon the fuel quantity available. Even though fuel is expended during the climb, the higher altitude will provide greater total endurance. Of course, the use of afterburner for the climb would produce a prohibitive re- duction in endurance. \n\nto airplane factors. The turboprop power- plant prefers operation at low inlet air tem- peratures and relatively high power setting to produce low specific fuel consumption. While an increase in altitude will increase the mini- mum power required for the airplane, the powerplant achieves more efficient operation. As a result of these differences, maximum en- durance of the multiengine turboprop airplane at low altitudes may require shutting down some of the powerplants in order to operate the remaining powerplants at a higher, more efficient power setting. \n\nEFFECT OF ALTITUDE ON ENDUR- ANCE, TURBOJET AIRPLANES. Since the fuel flow of the turbojet powered airplane is proportional to thrust required, the turbojet airplane will achieve maximum specific endur- ance when operated at minimum thrust re- quired or (L/D),. In subsonic flight, (L/D)m~ occurs at a specific value of lift coefBcient for a given airplane and is essentially independent of weight or altitude. If a given weight an~d configuration of airplane is oper- ated at various altitudes, the value of the minimum thrust required is unaffected by the curves of thrust required versus velocity shown in figure 2.27. Hence, it is apparent that the aerodynamic configuration has no prefeience for altitude (within compressibility limits) and specific endurance is a function only of engine performance. The specific fuel consumption of the turbojet \n\nANCE There are many conditions of flying oper- ations in which optimum range or endurance conditions are not possible or practical. In many instances, the off-optimum conditions result from certain operational requirements or simplification of operating procedure. In addition, off-optimum performance may be the result of a powerplant malfunction or failure. The most important conditions are discussed for various airplanes by powerplant type. \n\nRECIPROCATING POWERED AIR- PLANE. In the majority of cases, the recipro- cating powered airplane is operated at ’ an engine dictated cruise. Service use will most probably define some continuous power setting which will give good service life and trouble-free operation of the powerplant. When range or endurance is of no special interest, the simple expedient is to operate the powerplant at the recommended power setting and accept what- ever speed, range, or endurance that results. While such a procedure greatly simplifies the matter of cruise control, the practice does not provide the necessary knowledge required for operating a high performance, long range airplane. \n\nengine performance. The specific fuel consumption of the turbojet engine is strongly affected by operating RPM and altitude. Generally, the turbojet engine prefers the operating range near normal rated engine speed and the low temperatures of the stratosphere to produce low specific fuel con- sumption. Thus, increased altitude provides the favorable lower inlet air temperature and requires a greater engine speed to provide the thrust required at (L/D)-. The typical turbojet airplane experiences an increase in specific endurance with altitude with the peak values occurring at or near the tropopausc. For example, a typical single-engine turbojet \n\nThe failure of an engine on the multiengine reciprocating powered airplane has interesting ramifications. The first problem appearing is to produce sufficient power from the remaining engines to keep the airplane airborne. The \n\n172" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8956852475313098, + "doc_id": "5311d96ab385f00e782c12bb091bac4df1e0bfbcd3a58e03d7b908cd348bdef4", + "edit_distance": 0.46467391304347827, + "f1_score": 0.926916221033868, + "meteor": 0.8769612279146933, + "precision": 0.959409594095941, + "pred_md": "Another important form of direct interference is common when the two airplanes are in a trail position and stepped down. As shown in figure 6.10, the single airplane in flight develops upwash ahead of the wing and downwash behind and any restriction accorded the flow can alter the distribution and magnitude of the upwash and downwash. When the trailing airplane is in close proximity aft and below the leading airplane a mutual interference takes place betweetrthe two airplanes. The leading airplane above will experience an effect which would be somewhat similar to encountermg ground effect, i.e., a reduction in induced drag, a reduction in downwash at the tail, and a change in pitching moment nose down. The trailing airplane below will experience an effect which is generally the opposite of the airplane above. In other words, the airplane below will experience an increase in induced drag, an increase in downwash at the tail, and a change in pitching moment nose up. Thus, when the airplanes are in close proximity, a definite collision possibility exists because of the trim change experienced by each airplane. The magnitude of the trim change is greatest when the airplanes are operating at high lift coefficients, e.g., low speed flight, and when the airplanes are in close proximity.\n\nIn formation flying, this sort of interference must be appreciated and anticipated. In crossing under another airplane, care must be taken to anticipate the trim change and adequate clearance must be maintained, otherwise a collision may result. The pilot of the leading aircraft will know of the presence of the trailing airplane by the trim change experienced. Obviously, some anticipation is necessary and adequate separation is necessary to prevent a disturbing magnitude of the trim change. In a close diamond formation the leader will be able to ' feel' the presence of the slot man even though the airplane is not within view. Obviously, the slot man will have a difficult job during formation maneuvers because of the unstable trim changes\n\n## NAVWEPS OO-ROT-80 APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS\n\n## TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYING\n\nand greater power changes required to hold position.\n\nA common collision problem is the case of an airplane with a malfunctioning landing gear. If another' airpIane is called to inspect the malfunctioning landing gear, great care must be taken to maintain adequate separation and preserve orientation. Many instances such as this have resulted in a collision when the pilo: of the trailing airplane became disoriented and did not maintain adequate separation.\n\nDuring inflight refueling, essentially the same problems of interference exist. AS the receiver approaches the tanker from behind and below, the receiver will encounter the downwash from the tanker and require a slight, gradual increase in power and pitch attitude to continue approach to the receiving position. While.' the .receiver may not be visible to the pilot ' of the tanker, he will anticipate the receiver coming into position by the slight reduttion in power required and nose down changein pitching moment. Adequate clearance and, proper position must be maintained by the pilot of the receiver for a collision possibility is enhanced by the relative positions of the airplanes. A hazardous condition exists if the pilot of the receiver has excessive speed and runs under the tanker in close proximity.* ' The trim change experienced by both airphines may be large and unexpected and it may be difficult to avoid a collision.\n\nIn addition to the forms of interference previously mentioned, there exists the possibility of strong interference between airplanes in supersonic flight. In this case, the shock waves from one airplane may strongly affect the pressure distribution and rolling, yawing, and pitching moments of an adjacent airPl ane. It is difficult to express general relationships of the effect except that magnitude of the effects will be greatest when in close proximity at low altitude and high 4. Generally, the trailing airplane will be most affected.", + "recall": 0.896551724137931, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OO-ROT-80 APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYING \n\nand greater power changes required to hold position. A common collision problem is the case of \n\nAnother important form of direct inter- ference is common when the two airplanes are in a trail position and stepped down. As shown in figure 6.10, the single airplane in flight de- velops upwash ahead of the wing and down- wash behind and any restriction accorded the flow can alter the distribution and magnitude of the upwash and downwash. When the trailing airplane is in close proximity aft and below the leading airplane a mutual interference takes place betweetrthe two airplanes. The leading airplane above will experience an effect which would be somewhat similar to encountermg ground effect, i.e., a reduction in induced drag, a reduction in downwash at the tail, and a change in pitching moment nose down. The trailing airplane below will experience an effect which is generally the opposite of the airplane above. In other words, the airplane below will experience an increase in induced drag, an increase in downwash at the tail, and a change in pitching moment nose up. Thus, when the airplanes are in close proximity, a definite collision possibility exists because of the trim change experienced by each airplane. The magnitude of the trim change is greatest when the airplanes are operating at high lift coefficients, e.g., low speed flight, and when the airplanes are in close proximity. \n\nposition. A common collision problem is the case of an airplane with a malfunctioning landing gear. If another”airpIane is called to inspect the malfunctioning landing gear, great care must be taken to maintain adequate separation and preserve orientation. Many instances such as this have resulted in a collision when the pilo: of the trailing airplane became dis- oriented and did not maintain adequate sepa- ration. \n\nDuring inflight refueling, essentially the same problems of interference exist. AS the receiver approaches the tanker from behind and below, the receiver will encounter the downwash from the tanker and require a slight, gradual increase in power and pitch attitude to continue approach to the receiving position. While. ‘ the .receiver may not be visible to the pilot ‘ of the tanker, he will anticipate the receiver coming into position by the slight reduttion in power required and nose down changein pitching moment. Ade- quate clearance and, proper position must be maintained by the pilot of the receiver for a collision possibility is enhanced by the rela- tive positions of the airplanes. A hazardous condition exists if the pilot of the receiver has excessive speed and runs under the tanker in close proximity.* ‘ The trim change expe- rienced by both airphines may be large and unexpected and it may be difficult to avoid a collision. \n\nIn formation flying, this sort of interference must be appreciated and anticipated. In cross- ing under another airplane, care must be taken to anticipate the trim change and adequate clearance must be maintained, other- wise a collision may result. The pilot of the leading aircraft will know of the presence of the trailing airplane by the trim change experienced. Obviously, some anticipation is necessary and adequate separation is necessary to prevent a disturbing magnitude of the trim change. In a close diamond formation the leader will be able to “feel” the presence of the slot man even though the airplane is not within view. Obviously, the slot man will have a difficult job during formation maneuvers because of the unstable trim changes \n\nIn addition to the forms of interference previously mentioned, there exists the possi- bility of strong interference between airplanes in supersonic flight. In this case, the shock waves from one airplane may strongly affect the pressure distribution and rolling, yawing, and pitching moments of an adjacent air- Pl ane. It is difficult to express general rela- tionships of the effect except that magnitude of the effects will be greatest when in close proximity at low altitude and high 4. General- ly, the trailing airplane will be most affected." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.03762820327016156, + "doc_id": "e20d286ea482efa64f1502fcec9730e5b56737f939af38e723a5d7aac4ca735d", + "edit_distance": 0.9378238341968912, + "f1_score": 0.16, + "meteor": 0.3840725806451613, + "precision": 0.08771929824561403, + "pred_md": "FAA Chart Users' Guide - VFR Chart Symbology - Helicopter Charts\n\n## AIRSPACE INFORMATION (Continued)\n\n## Special Airspace Areas (Continued)\n\nFlight Restricted Zone (FRZ) Relating to National Security\n\n## Air Defense Identification Zone (ADIZ)\n\nNote: Delimiting line not shown when it coincides with International Boundary, projection lines or other linear features.\n\n## Special Security Notice Permanent Continuous Flight Restriction Areas\n\n## Mode C (FAR 91.215)\n\nAppropriate notes as required may be shown.\n\n## Terminal Radar Service Area (TRSA)\n\nAppropriate notes as required may be shown.\n\n52\n\nExample: Washington DC\n\n## Special Air Traffic Rules / Airport Traffic Areas (FAR Part 93)\n\nAppropriate boxed notes as required shown adjacent to area. Inside the FAR Part 93 boundary area, the cross hatching is at a 45 degree angle.\n\nSporting Event Termporary Flight Restriction (TFR) Sites\n\n## Miscellaneous Activity Areas\n\nAerobatic Practice Area\n\nGlider Operations\n\nHang Glider Activity\n\nUltralight Activity\n\nUnmanned Aircraft Activity\n\nParachute Jumping Area with Frequency\n\nSpace Launch Activity Area", + "recall": 0.9090909090909091, + "true_md": "FAA Chart Users’ Guide - VFR Chart Symbology - Helicopter Charts\n\n52" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.15422690537585765, + "doc_id": "6ba759d3d6fa6856c53d33ad69378a07165e4302c9fc95fceee3c3ec4da417bf", + "edit_distance": 0.9387755102040817, + "f1_score": 0.4107142857142857, + "meteor": 0.3027613412228797, + "precision": 0.34328358208955223, + "pred_md": "## RADIO AIDS TO NAVIGATION (Continued)\n\n## COMMON ELEMENTS (HIGH AND LOW CHARTS)\n\n## RCO Frequency\n\nSingle Frequency\n\nMultiple Frequencies Frequencies transmit and receive except those followed by R and T: R - Receive Only T - Transmit Only\n\n## NAVAID Box\n\nThin line NAVAID boxes without frequency(s) and FSS radio name indicates no FSS frequencies available.\n\nShadow NAVAID box indicates NAVAID and Flight Service Station (FSS) have same name.\n\n71\n\nVHF/UHF LF/MF\n\nFAA Chart Users' Guide - IFR Enroute Symbology", + "recall": 0.5111111111111111, + "true_md": "71\n\nFAA Chart Users’ Guide - IFR Enroute Symbology\n\n## NAVIGATION AND COMMUNICATION BOXES - COMMON ELEMENTS\n\n## RADIO AIDS TO NAVIGATION (Continued)\n\nILS Localizer Example with Back Course (Chart: Enroute Low L-1 US)\n\n## LOW ALTITUDE\n\n## ILS LOCALIZER\n\n## HIGH ALTITUDE - ALASKA VOR/DME RNAV\n\n## HIGH ALTITUDE - ALASKA VOR/DME RNAV WAYPOINT DATA\n\nILS Localizer Back Course with additional navigation function\n\nILS Localizer Course with additional navigation function" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8538953173620748, + "doc_id": "ed63680233f624fbdb76c7adbf10fafdef8734cf57a13daf8c5e14ac8a36b7d9", + "edit_distance": 0.8939393939393939, + "f1_score": 0.9625668449197863, + "meteor": 0.7091264640412741, + "precision": 0.967741935483871, + "pred_md": "thrust line is below the c.g., thrust produces a positive or noseup moment and the effect is destabilizing. On the other hand, if the thrust line is ,located above the c.g., a negative moment is created and the effect is stabilizing.\n\nA propeller or inlet duct located ahead of the c.g. contributes a destabilizing effect. As shown in figure 4.11, a rotating propeller inclined to the windstream causes a deflection of the airflow. The momentum change of the\n\n## NAVWEPS 00-BOT-80 STABILITY ,AND CONTROL\n\nslipstream creates a normal force at the plane of the propeller similar to a wing creating lift by deflecting an airstream. As this normal force will increase with an increase in airplane angle of attack, the effect will be destabilizing when the propeller is ahead of the cg. The magnitude of the unstable contribution depends on the distance from the c.g. to the propeller and is largest at high power and low dynamic pressure. The normal force created\n\n261", + "recall": 0.9574468085106383, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-BOT-80 STABILITY ,AND CONTROL \n\nslipstream creates a normal force at the plane of the propeller similar to a wing creating lift by deflecting an airstream. As this normal force will increase with an increase in airplane angle of attack, the effect will be destabilizing when the propeller is ahead of the cg. The magnitude of the unstable contribution de- pends on the distance from the c.g. to the propeller and is largest at high power and low dynamic pressure. The normal force created \n\nthrust line is below the c.g., thrust produces a positive or noseup moment and the effect is de- stabilizing. On the other hand, if the thrust line is ,located above the c.g., a negative moment is created and the effect is stabilizing. A propeller or inlet duct located ahead of \n\nmoment is created and the effect is stabilizing. A propeller or inlet duct located ahead of the c.g. contributes a destabilizing effect. As shown in figure 4.11, a rotating propeller in- clined to the windstream causes a deflection of the airflow. The momentum change of the \n\n261" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8889445353217825, + "doc_id": "f69445296251c432013b727f64e31712d9a2e67d9003166807a9d621304adc2f", + "edit_distance": 0.7878378378378378, + "f1_score": 0.9204545454545455, + "meteor": 0.6804151796735887, + "precision": 0.9566929133858267, + "pred_md": "turboprop airplane but additional factors are available to influence the specific endurance at low altitude. In other words, low altitude endurance can be improved by shutting down some powerplants and operating the remaining powerplants at higher, more efbcient power setting. Many operational factors could decide whether such procedure would be a suitable technique.\n\nTURBOJET POWERED AIRPLANE. Increasing altitude has a powerful effect on both the range and endurance of the turbojet airplane. As a result of this powerful effect, the typical turbojet airplane will achieve maximum specific endurance at or near the tropopause. Also, the maximum specific range will be obtained at even higher altitudes since the peak specific range generally occurs at the highest altitude at which the normal rating of the engine can sustain the optimum aerodynamic conditions. At low altitude cruise conditions, the engine speed necessary to sustain optimum aerodynamic conditions is very low and the specific fuel consumption is relatively poor. Thus, at low altitude, the airplane prefers the low speeds to obtain (&/CD)but the powerplant prefers the higher speeds common to higher engine efficiency. The compromise results in maximum specific range at flight speeds well above the optimum aerodynamic conditions. In a sense, low altitude cruise conditions are engine dictated.\n\nAltitude is the one most important factor affecting the specific range of the turbojet airplane. Any operation below the optimum altitude will have a noticeable effect on the range capability and proper consideration must be given to the loss of range. In addition, turbojet airplanes designed specifically for long range will have a large percent of the gross weight as fuel. The large changes in gross weight during cruise will require particular methods of cruise control to extract the maximum flight range. A variation from the optimum flight path of cruise (constant Mach\n\n17s\n\n## NAVWEPS OO-EOT-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE\n\nnumber, cruise-climb, or whatever the appropriate technique) will result in a loss of range capability.\n\nThe failure of an engine during the optimum cruise of a multiengine turbojet airplane will cause a noticeable loss of range. Since the optimum cruise of the turbojet is generally a thrust-limited cruise, the loss of part of the total thrust means that the airplane must descend to a lower altitude. For example, if a twin-engine jet begins an optimum cruise at 35,000 ft. (e=O.31) and one powerplant fails, the airplane must descend to a lower altitude so that the operative engine can provide the cruise thrust. The resulting altitude would be approximately 16,030 ft. (~=0.61). Thus, the airplane will experience a loss of the range remaining at the point of engine failure and loss could be accounted for by the reduced velocity (TM) and the increase in specific fuel consumption (c~) from the higher ambient air temperature. In the case of the example airplane, engine failure would cause a 30 to 40 percent loss of range from the point of engine failure. Of course, the jettisoning of expendable weight items would allow higher altitude and would increase the specific range.\n\nMaximum endurance in the turbojet airplane varies with altitude but the variation is due to the changes in ' fuel flow necessary to provide the thrust required at (I./D),... The low inlet air temperature of the tropopause and the greater engine speed reduce the specific fuel consumption to a minimum. If the singleengine turbojet airplane is at low altitude and must hold or endure for a period of time, a climb should begin to take advantage of the higher specific endurance at higher altitude. The altitude to which to climb will be determined by the quantity of fuel remaining. In the case of the multiengine turbojet at low altitude, some slightly different procedure may be utilized. If all powerplants are operating, it is desirable to climb to a higher altitude which is a function of the remaining fuel quantity. An alternative at low altitude", + "recall": 0.8868613138686131, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OO-EOT-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE \n\nnumber, cruise-climb, or whatever the appro- priate technique) will result in a loss of range capability. The failure of an engine during the optimum \n\nturboprop airplane but additional factors are available to influence the specific endurance at low altitude. In other words, low altitude endurance can be improved by shutting down some powerplants and operating the remaining powerplants at higher, more efbcient power setting. Many operational factors could decide whether such procedure would be a suitable technique. \n\ncapability. The failure of an engine during the optimum cruise of a multiengine turbojet airplane will cause a noticeable loss of range. Since the optimum cruise of the turbojet is generally a thrust-limited cruise, the loss of part of the total thrust means that the airplane must descend to a lower altitude. For example, if a twin-engine jet begins an optimum cruise at 35,000 ft. (e=O.31) and one powerplant fails, the airplane must descend to a lower altitude so that the operative engine can provide the cruise thrust. The resulting altitude would be approximately 16,030 ft. (~=0.61). Thus, the airplane will experience a loss of the range remaining at the point of engine failure and loss could be accounted for by the reduced velocity (TM) and the increase in specific fuel consumption (c~) from the higher ambient air temperature. In the case of the example air- plane, engine failure would cause a 30 to 40 percent loss of range from the point of engine failure. Of course, the jettisoning of expend- able weight items would allow higher altitude and would increase the specific range. \n\nTURBOJET POWERED AIRPLANE. In- creasing altitude has a powerful effect on both the range and endurance of the turbojet air- plane. As a result of this powerful effect, the typical turbojet airplane will achieve maxi- mum specific endurance at or near the tropo- pause. Also, the maximum specific range will be obtained at even higher altitudes since the peak specific range generally occurs at the highest altitude at which the normal rating of the engine can sustain the optimum aero- dynamic conditions. At low altitude cruise conditions, the engine speed necessary to sus- tain optimum aerodynamic conditions is very low and the specific fuel consumption is rela- tively poor. Thus, at low altitude, the air- plane prefers the low speeds to obtain (&/CD)- but the powerplant prefers the higher speeds common to higher engine effi- ciency. The compromise results in maximum specific range at flight speeds well above the optimum aerodynamic conditions. In a sense, low altitude cruise conditions are engine dictated. \n\nMaximum endurance in the turbojet air- plane varies with altitude but the variation is due to the changes in ‘ fuel flow necessary to provide the thrust required at (I./D),... The low inlet air temperature of the tropopause and the greater engine speed reduce the specific fuel consumption to a minimum. If the single- engine turbojet airplane is at low altitude and must hold or endure for a period of time, a climb should begin to take advantage of the higher specific endurance at higher altitude. The altitude to which to climb will be deter- mined by the quantity of fuel remaining. In the case of the multiengine turbojet at low altitude, some slightly different procedure may be utilized. If all powerplants are oper- ating, it is desirable to climb to a higher altitude which is a function of the remaining fuel quantity. An alternative at low altitude \n\nAltitude is the one most important factor affecting the specific range of the turbojet airplane. Any operation below the optimum altitude will have a noticeable effect on the range capability and proper consideration must be given to the loss of range. In addi- tion, turbojet airplanes designed specifically for long range will have a large percent of the gross weight as fuel. The large changes in gross weight during cruise will require partic- ular methods of cruise control to extract the maximum flight range. A variation from the optimum flight path of cruise (constant Mach \n\n17s" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6433175422776263, + "doc_id": "c622f9527de2b4c6d730228203c45c8a09c17cb14261dd4fd9d4dd452a98a72a", + "edit_distance": 0.4, + "f1_score": 0.9600000000000002, + "meteor": 0.93017578125, + "precision": 0.9230769230769231, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS 00-807-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL\n\nFigure 4.30. Control in Roll\n\nFigure 4.30. Control in Roll\n\n304", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-807-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL \n\nFigure 4.30. Control in Roll \n\n304" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.16249656001955806, + "doc_id": "0a529417b895e62ed2c90b15aaf98974c42c714d59b31aea22439db3f4fb3f06", + "edit_distance": 0.7321428571428571, + "f1_score": 0.4137931034482759, + "meteor": 0.7361111111111112, + "precision": 0.26666666666666666, + "pred_md": "## CULTURE\n\n## Railroads\n\nSingle Track\n\nDouble Track\n\nBridges\n\nPopulated Places\n\nBuilt-up Areas\n\n55\n\n## Roads\n\nDual-Lane: Divided Highways\n\nMajor Boulevards & Major Streets Primary\n\n## Boundaries\n\nInternational\n\nState or Province\n\nPower Transmission Lines\n\nProminent Pictorials\n\nLandmarks\n\nFAA Chart Users' Guide - VFR Chart Symbology - Helicopter Charts", + "recall": 0.9230769230769231, + "true_md": "## CULTURE\n\n55\n\nFAA Chart Users’ Guide - VFR Chart Symbology - Helicopter Charts" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9137024791647929, + "doc_id": "a1e51039cbb16c23900f50aabe18ddd517f60ab858b02343f5763000046f6cf0", + "edit_distance": 0.3756983240223464, + "f1_score": 0.9539594843462247, + "meteor": 0.8015356735364958, + "precision": 0.9773584905660377, + "pred_md": "However, if high speed flight is the primary consideration, the airfoil must be chosen to have. the highest practical critical Mach number.\n\nCritical Mach number has been defined as the flight Mach number which produces first evidence of local sonic flow. Thus, the airfoil shape and lift coe&ient-which determine the pressure and velocity distribution-will have a profound effect on critical Mach number. Conventional, low speed airfoil shapes have relatively poor compressibility characteristics because of the high local velocities near the leading edge. These high local velocities are inevitable if both the maximum thickness and camber are well forward on the chord. An improvement of the compressibility characteristics can be obtained by moving the points of maximum camber and thickness aft on the chord. This would distribute the pressure and velocity more evenly along the chord and produce a lower peak velocity for the same lift coefficient. Fortunately, the airfoil shape to provide extensive lamiaar flow and low profile drag in low speed, subsonic flight will provide a pressure distribution which is favorable for high speed flight. Figure 3.12 illustrates the pressure distributions and variation of critical Mach number with lift coefficient for a conventional low speed airfoil and a high speed section.\n\nIn order to obtain a high critical Mach number from an airfoil at some low lift coefficient the section must have:\n\n- (u) Low thickness ratio. The point of maximum thickness should be aft to smooth the pressure distribution.\n- (6) Low camber. The mean camber line should be shaped to help minimize the local velocity peaks.\n\nIn addition, the higher the required lift coefficient the lower the critical Mach number and more camber is required of the airfoil. If supersonic flight is a possibility the thickness ratio and leading edge radius must be small to decrease wave drag.\n\n## NAVWEPS 00-801-80 HIGH SPEED AERODYNAMICS\n\nFigure 3.13 shows the flow patterns for two basic supersonic airfoil sections and provides the approximate equations for lift,drag, and lift curve slope. Since the wave drag is the only factor of difference between -the two airfoil sections, notice the configuration factors which affect the wave drag. For the same thickness ratio, the circular arc airfoil would have a larger wedge angle formed between the upper and lower surfaces at the leading edge. At the same flight Mach number the larger angle at the leading edge would form the stronger shock wave at the nose and cause a greater pressure change on the circular arc airfoil. This same principle applies when investigating the effect of airfoil thickness. Notice that the wave drag coefficients for both airfoils vary as the SQUARE of the thickness ratio, e.g., if the thickness ratio were doubled, the wave drag coefhcient would he four times as great. If the thickness were increased, the airflow at the leading edge will experience a greater change in direction and a stronger shock wave will be formed. This powerful variation of wave drag with thickness ratio necessitates the use of very thin airfoils with sharp leading edges for supersonic flight. An additional consideration is that thin airfoil sections favor the use of low aspect ratios and high taper to obtain lightweight structures and preserve stiffness and rigidity.\n\nThe parameter JMz-l appears in the denominator of each of the equations for the aerodynamic coefficients and indicates a decrease in each of these coefficients with an increase in Mach number. Essentially, this means that any aerodynamic surface becomes less sensitive to changes in angle of attack at higher Mach numbers. The decrease in lift curve slope with Mach number has tremendous implications in the stability and control of high speed aircraft. The vertical tail becomes less sensitive to angles of sideslip and the directional stability of the aircraft will deteriorate with Mach number. The horizontal tail of the airplane experiences the same", + "recall": 0.9316546762589928, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-801-80 HIGH SPEED AERODYNAMICS \n\nHowever, if high speed flight is the primary consideration, the airfoil must be chosen to have. the highest practical critical Mach number. \n\nCritical Mach number has been defined as the flight Mach number which produces first evidence of local sonic flow. Thus, the air- foil shape and lift coe&ient-which determine the pressure and velocity distribution-will have a profound effect on critical Mach number. Conventional, low speed airfoil shapes have relatively poor compressibility characteristics because of the high local velocities near the leading edge. These high local velocities are inevitable if both the maximum thickness and camber are well forward on the chord. An improvement of the compressibility character- istics can be obtained by moving the points of maximum camber and thickness aft on the chord. This would distribute the pressure and velocity more evenly along the chord and produce a lower peak velocity for the same lift coefficient. Fortunately, the airfoil shape to provide extensive lamiaar flow and low profile drag in low speed, subsonic flight will provide a pressure distribution which is favor- able for high speed flight. Figure 3.12 illustrates the pressure distributions and variation of critical Mach number with lift coefficient for a conventional low speed airfoil and a high speed section. \n\nFigure 3.13 shows the flow patterns for two basic supersonic airfoil sections and pro- vides the approximate equations for lift,drag, and lift curve slope. Since the wave drag is the only factor of difference between -the two airfoil sections, notice the configuration fac- tors which affect the wave drag. For the same thickness ratio, the circular arc airfoil would have a larger wedge angle formed between the upper and lower surfaces at the leading edge. At the same flight Mach num- ber the larger angle at the leading edge would form the stronger shock wave at the nose and cause a greater pressure change on the circular arc airfoil. This same principle applies when investigating the effect of airfoil thickness. Notice that the wave drag coefficients for both airfoils vary as the SQUARE of the thickness ratio, e.g., if the thickness ratio were doubled, the wave drag coefhcient would he four times as great. If the thickness were increased, the airflow at the leading edge will experience a greater change in direction and a stronger shock wave will be formed. This powerful variation of wave drag with thick- ness ratio necessitates the use of very thin air- foils with sharp leading edges for supersonic flight. An additional consideration is that thin airfoil sections favor the use of low aspect ratios and high taper to obtain lightweight structures and preserve stiffness and rigidity. \n\nThe parameter JMz-l appears in the denominator of each of the equations for the aerodynamic coefficients and indicates a de- crease in each of these coefficients with an increase in Mach number. Essentially, this means that any aerodynamic surface becomes less sensitive to changes in angle of attack at higher Mach numbers. The decrease in lift curve slope with Mach number has tremendous implications in the stability and control of high speed aircraft. The vertical tail becomes less sensitive to angles of sideslip and the directional stability of the aircraft will deteri- orate with Mach number. The horizontal tail of the airplane experiences the same \n\nIn order to obtain a high critical Mach number from an airfoil at some low lift coefficient the section must have: (u) Low thickness ratio. The point of \n\ncoefficient the section must have: (u) Low thickness ratio. The point of maximum thickness should be aft to smooth the pressure distribution. \n\n(6) Low camber. The mean camber line should be shaped to help minimize the local velocity peaks. \n\nIn addition, the higher the required lift coefficient the lower the critical Mach number and more camber is required of the airfoil. If supersonic flight is a possibility the thick- ness ratio and leading edge radius must be small to decrease wave drag." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5268590095318534, + "doc_id": "3de34e2ac095df7c0650dfb82b97c4b4a76b43568aa70cf50819d17fd1ca0843", + "edit_distance": 0.39436619718309857, + "f1_score": 0.943661971830986, + "meteor": 0.6601290095195999, + "precision": 0.9571428571428572, + "pred_md": "## SELECTED REFERENCES\n\n- 1. Dommasch, Sherby, and Connolly\n\n' Airplane Aerodynamics'\n\n- Pitman Publishing Co.\n- 2d Edition, 1957\n- 2. Perkins and Hage\n- ' Airplane Performance, Stability, and Control' John Wiley and Sons 1949\n- 3. E. A.\n- ' Engineering Supersonic Aerodynamics'\n- Bonney McGraw-Hill Book Co. 1950\n- 4. Hurt, Vernon, and Martin\n- ' Aeronautical Engineering, Section I, Manual of Instruction, Aviation Safety Officer Course'\n- University of Southern California 1958\n- 5. Fairchild, Magill, and Brye ' Principles of Helicopter Engineering' University of Southern California 1959\n\n413\n\nNAVWEPS 00-802-30 SELECTED REFERENCES\n\nRevised January 1965", + "recall": 0.9305555555555556, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-802-30 SELECTED REFERENCES \n\n## SELECTED REFERENCES\n\n- 1. Dommasch, Sherby, and Connolly “Airplane Aerodynamics” Pitman Publishing Co. 2d Edition, 1957 \n\n- 2. Perkins and Hage “Airplane Performance, Stability, and Control” John Wiley and Sons 1949 3. E. A. Bonney \n\n- 1949 3. E. A. Bonney “Engineering Supersonic Aerodynamics” McGraw-Hill Book Co. 1950 4. Hurt, Vernon, and Martin \n\n- 1950 4. Hurt, Vernon, and Martin “Aeronautical Engineering, Section I, Manual of Instruction, Avi- ation Safety Officer Course” University of Southern California 1958 5. Fairchild, Magill, and Brye \n\n- 1958 5. Fairchild, Magill, and Brye “Principles of Helicopter Engineering” University of Southern California 1959 \n\nRevised January 1965 \n\n413" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8582008999942037, + "doc_id": "d9de3422b131da9206b119b526071f1550041cfccef264d04410b2d5053ec914", + "edit_distance": 0.8226950354609929, + "f1_score": 0.9414316702819957, + "meteor": 0.7485935507685285, + "precision": 0.96875, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS OCMOT-60 HIGH SPEED AERODYNAMICS\n\nIt is important to note that compressibility effects are not limited to flight speeds at and above the speed of sound. Since any aircraft will have some aerodynamic shape and will be developing lift there will be local flow velocities on the surfaces which arc greater than the flight speed. Thus, an aircraft can experience compressibility effects at flight speeds well below the speed of sound. Since there is the possibility of having both subsonic and supersonic flows existing on the aircraft it is convenient to define certain regimes of flight. These regimes are defined approximately as follows:\n\nSubsonic-Mach numbers below 0.75 Transonic-Mach numbers from 0.75 to 1.20 Supersonic-Mach numbers from 1.20 to 5.00\n\nHypersonic-Mach numbers above 5.00 While the flight Mach numbers used to define these regimes of flight are quite approximate, it is important to appreciate the types of flow existing in each area. In the subsonic regime it is most likely that pure subsonic airflow exists on all parts of the aircraft. In the transonic regime it is very probable that flow on the aircraft components may be partly subsonic and partly supersonic. The supersonic and hypersonic' flight regimes will provide definite supersonic flow velocities on all parts of the aircraft. Of course, in supersonic flight there will be some portions of the boundary layer which are subsonic but the predominating flow is still supersonic.\n\nThe principal differences between subsonic and supersonic flow are due to the cmprrsJibi& of the supersonic flow. Thus, any change of velocity or pressure of a supersonic flow will produce a related change of density which must be considered and accounted for. Figure 3.2 provides a comparison of incompressible and compressible flow through a closed tube. Of course, the condition of continuity must exist in the flow through the closed tube; the mass flow at any station along the tube is constant. This qualification must\n\nRevised January 1965\n\nexist in both compressible and incompressible cases.\n\nThe example of subsonic incompressible flow is simplified by the fact that the density of flow is constant throughout the tube. Thus, as the flow approaches a constriction and the streamlines converge, velocity increases and static pressure decreases. In other words, a convergence of the tube requires an increasing velocity to accommodate the continuity of flow. Also, as the subsonic incompressible flow enters a diverging section of the tube, velocity decreases and static pressure increases but density remains unchanged. The behavior of subsonic incompressible flow is that a convergence causes expansion (decreasing pressure) while a divergence causes compression (increasing pressure).\n\nThe example of supersonic compressible flow is complicated by the fact that the variations of flow density are related to the changes in velocity and static pressure. The behavior of supersonic compressible flow is that a convergence causes compression while a divergence causes expansion. Thus, as the supersonic compressible flow approaches a constriction and the streamlines converge, velocity dccreases and static pressure increases. Continuity of mass flow is maintained by the increase in flow density which accompanies the decrease in velocity. As the supersonic compressible flow enters a diverging section of the tube, velocity increases, static pressure decreases, and density decreases to accommodate the condition of continuity.\n\nThe previous comparison points out three 1 significant differences between supersonic corn- 1 pressible and subsonic incompressible flow.\n\n- (a) Compressible flow includes the additional variable of flow density.\n- (b) Convergence of flow causes expansion of incompressible flow but compression of compressible flow.\n- (c) Divergence of flow causes compression of incompressible flow but expansion of compressible flow.\n\n204", + "recall": 0.9156118143459916, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OCMOT-60 HIGH SPEED AERODYNAMICS \n\nexist in both compressible and incompressible cases. \n\nThe example of subsonic incompressible flow is simplified by the fact that the density of flow is constant throughout the tube. Thus, as the flow approaches a constriction and the streamlines converge, velocity increases and static pressure decreases. In other words, a convergence of the tube requires an increasing velocity to accommodate the continuity of flow. Also, as the subsonic incompressible flow enters a diverging section of the tube, velocity decreases and static pressure increases but density remains unchanged. The behavior of subsonic incompressible flow is that a con- vergence causes expansion (decreasing pressure) while a divergence causes compression (in- creasing pressure). The example of supersonic compressible flow \n\nIt is important to note that compressibility effects are not limited to flight speeds at and above the speed of sound. Since any aircraft will have some aerodynamic shape and will be developing lift there will be local flow velocities on the surfaces which arc greater than the flight speed. Thus, an aircraft can experience compressibility effects at flight speeds well below the speed of sound. Since there is the possibility of having both subsonic and supersonic flows existing on the aircraft it is convenient to define certain regimes of flight. These regimes are defined approxi- mately as follows: Subsonic-Mach numbers below 0.75 \n\n- mately as follows: Subsonic-Mach numbers below 0.75 Transonic-Mach numbers from 0.75 to \n\n- Subsonic-Mach numbers below 0.75 Transonic-Mach numbers from 0.75 to 1.20 Supersonic-Mach numbers from 1.20 to \n\n- 1.20 Supersonic-Mach numbers from 1.20 to 5.00 Hypersonic-Mach numbers above 5.00 \n\ncreasing pressure). The example of supersonic compressible flow is complicated by the fact that the variations of flow density are related to the changes in velocity and static pressure. The behavior of supersonic compressible flow is that a con- vergence causes compression while a divergence causes expansion. Thus, as the supersonic compressible flow approaches a constriction and the streamlines converge, velocity dc- creases and static pressure increases. Con- tinuity of mass flow is maintained by the increase in flow density which accompanies the decrease in velocity. As the supersonic com- pressible flow enters a diverging section of the tube, velocity increases, static pressure de- creases, and density decreases to accommodate the condition of continuity. \n\n5.00 Hypersonic-Mach numbers above 5.00 While the flight Mach numbers used to define these regimes of flight are quite approximate, it is important to appreciate the types of flow existing in each area. In the subsonic regime it is most likely that pure subsonic airflow exists on all parts of the aircraft. In the transonic regime it is very probable that flow on the aircraft components may be partly sub- sonic and partly supersonic. The supersonic and hypersonic’ flight regimes will provide definite supersonic flow velocities on all parts of the aircraft. Of course, in supersonic flight there will be some portions of the boundary layer which are subsonic but the predominating flow is still supersonic. \n\nThe previous comparison points out three 1 significant differences between supersonic corn- 1 pressible and subsonic incompressible flow. \n\nThe principal differences between subsonic and supersonic flow are due to the cmprrs- Jibi& of the supersonic flow. Thus, any change of velocity or pressure of a supersonic flow will produce a related change of density which must be considered and accounted for. Figure 3.2 provides a comparison of incom- pressible and compressible flow through a closed tube. Of course, the condition of con- tinuity must exist in the flow through the closed tube; the mass flow at any station along the tube is constant. This qualification must \n\n(a) Compressible flow includes the addi- tional variable of flow density. \n\n(b) Convergence of flow causes expansion of incompressible flow but compression of compressible flow. \n\n(c) Divergence of flow causes compression of incompressible flow but expansion of compressible flow. \n\n204 \n\nRevised January 1965" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.38376797444789135, + "doc_id": "1cc8bcb6d084b16e7b13115fd22fce5bf22af747906628cc1410de49397da083", + "edit_distance": 0.7037037037037037, + "f1_score": 0.6666666666666666, + "meteor": 0.5876795162509448, + "precision": 0.5909090909090909, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS 00-807-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE\n\nINLET\n\nOR\n\nDIFFUSER\n\nCOMPRESSOR\n\nTURBOJET\n\nENGINE\n\nCYCLE\n\nFigure 2.6. Turbojet Engines\n\nFigure 2.6. Turbojet Engines\n\n108\n\nCOMBUSTION\n\nCHAMBER\n\nTURBINE\n\nTAILPIPE\n\nNOZZLE", + "recall": 0.7647058823529411, + "true_md": "## NAVWEPS 00-807-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE\n\nVOLUME. CU. FT. \n\nFigure 2.6. Turbojet Engines \n\nTURBOJET ENGINE CYCLE \n\n108" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8211325105173835, + "doc_id": "7375fd01d3c3c2ce11d7bfd0b19ebf13796cca057f64a4c392ddf2bed583c235", + "edit_distance": 0.2887323943661972, + "f1_score": 0.9545454545454547, + "meteor": 0.928198086463501, + "precision": 0.9655172413793104, + "pred_md": "201\n\n## NAVWEPS 00-801-80 HIGH SPEED AERODYNAMICS\n\nChapter 3 HIGH SPEED AERODYNAMICS\n\nChapter 3 HIGH SPEED AERODYNAMICS\n\nDevelopments in aircraft and powerplants have produced high performance airplanes with capabilities for very high speed flight. The study of aerodynamics at these very high flight speeds has many significant differences from the study of classical low speed aerodynamics. Therefore, it is quite necessary that the Naval Aviator be familiar with the nature of high speed airflow and the characteristics of high performance airplane configurations.\n\n## GENERAL CONCEPTS AND SUPERSONIC FLOW PATTERNS\n\n## NATURE OF COMPRESSIBILITY\n\nAt low flight speeds the study of aerodynamics is greatly simplified by the fact that air may experience relatively small changes in pressure with only negligible changes in density. This airflow is termed incompressible ince the air may undergo changes s", + "recall": 0.9438202247191011, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-801-80 HIGH SPEED AERODYNAMICS \n\n## Chapter 3\n\n## HIGH SPEED AERODYNAMICS\n\n## GENERAL CONCEPTS AND SUPERSONIC FLOW PATTERNS\n\n## NATURE OF COMPRESSIBILITY\n\nDevelopments in aircraft and powerplants have produced high performance airplanes with capabilities for very high speed flight. The study of aerodynamics at these very high flight speeds has many significant differences from the study of classical low speed aero- dynamics. Therefore, it is quite necessary that the Naval Aviator be familiar with the nature of high speed airflow and the charac- teristics of high performance airplane configurations. \n\nAt low flight speeds the study of aero- dynamics is greatly simplified by the fact that air may experience relatively small changes in pressure with only negligible changes in density. This airflow is termed incompressible since the air may undergo changes \n\n201" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5986744307891794, + "doc_id": "599e31d341910f01878b171523623d743debcb0f76d0b66c3bf7d0753a1dfa3f", + "edit_distance": 0.4090909090909091, + "f1_score": 0.9629629629629631, + "meteor": 0.9335490187731472, + "precision": 0.9285714285714286, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS 00-80T-80 HIGH SPEED AERODYNAMICS\n\nFigure 3.14. General Effects of Sweepbock\n\nFigure 3.14. General Effects of Sweepbock\n\n227", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-80T-80 HIGH SPEED AERODYNAMICS \n\nFigure 3.14. General Effects of Sweepbock \n\n227" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7539614579764983, + "doc_id": "35ad56f4ab26b184e85c71f2b100cacc0227d88b38c56fa6bd6136e3e4bff1f9", + "edit_distance": 0.7654075546719682, + "f1_score": 0.9293478260869565, + "meteor": 0.691073647802292, + "precision": 0.8860103626943006, + "pred_md": "## EXPLANATION OF IFR ENROUTE TERMS\n\nFAA charts are prepared in accordance with specifications of the Interagency Air Committee (IAC), and are approved by representatives of the Federal Aviation Administration and the Department of Defense (DoD). Some information on these charts may only apply to military pilots.\n\nThe explanations of symbols used on Instrument Flight Rule (IFR) Enroute Charts and examples in this section are based primarily on the IFR Enroute Low Altitude Charts. Other IFR products use similar symbols in various colors. The chart legends portray aeronautical symbols with a brief description of what each symbol depicts. This section provides more details of the symbols and how they are used on IFR Enroute charts.\n\n## AIRPORTS\n\nOperational airports are shown on IFR Enroute Charts.\n\n## Low Charts:\n\n- · All IAP Airports are shown on the Low Altitude Charts (US and Alaska).\n- · Non-IAP Airports are shown on the U.S. Low Altitude Charts (Contiguous US) have a minimum hard surface runway of 3,000'.\n- · Non-IAP airports are shown on the U.S. Low Altitude Alaska Charts are show if the runway is 3000' or longer, hard or soft surface.\n- · Public heliports with an Instrument Approach Procedure (IAP) or requested by the FAA or DoD are depicted on the IFR Enroute Low Altitude Charts.\n- · Seaplane bases requested by the FAA or DoD are depicted on the IFR Enroute Low Altitude Charts.\n\nOn IFR Enroute Low Altitude Charts, airport tabulation is provided which identifies airport names, IDs and the panels they are located on.\n\n## High Charts:\n\n- · Airports shown on the U.S. High Enroute Charts (Contiguous US) have a minimum hard surface runway of 5000'.\n- · Airports shown on the U.S. High Enroute Alaska Charts have a minimum hard surface runway of 4000'.\n\nCharted airports are classified according to the following criteria:\n\n## LOW/HIGH ALTITUDE\n\nBlue - Airports with an Instrument Approach Procedure and/or RADAR MINIMA published in the high altitude DoD Flight Information Publications (FLIPs)\n\nGreen - Airports which have an approved Instrument Approach Procedure and/or RADAR MINIMA published in either the U.S. Terminal Procedures Publications (TPPs) or the DoD FLIPs\n\nBrown - Airports without a published Instrument Approach Procedure or RADAR MINIMA\n\nAirports are plotted at their true geographic position.\n\nAirports are identified by the airport name. In the case of military airports, Air Force Base (AFB), Naval Air Station (NAS), Naval Air Facility (NAF), Marine Corps Air Station (MCAS), Army Air Field (AAF), etc., the abbreviated letters appear as part of the airport name.\n\n59\n\nFAA Chart Users' Guide - IFR Enroute Terms", + "recall": 0.9771428571428571, + "true_md": "## EXPLANATION OF IFR ENROUTE TERMS\n\n## AIRPORTS\n\nAirports are plotted at their true geographic position.\n\nAirports are identified by the airport name. In the case of military airports, Air Force Base (AFB), Naval Air Station (NAS), Naval Air Facility (NAF), Marine Corps Air Station (MCAS), Army Air Field (AAF), etc., the abbreviated letters appear as part of the airport name.\n\n59\n\nCharted airports are classified according to the following criteria:\n\nHigh Charts: \n\nOn IFR Enroute Low Altitude Charts, airport tabulation is provided which identifies airport names, IDs and the panels they are located on. \n\nFAA Chart Users’ Guide - IFR Enroute Terms\n\nLow Charts: \n\nOperational airports are shown on IFR Enroute Charts. \n\nThe explanations of symbols used on Instrument Flight Rule (IFR) Enroute Charts and examples in this section are based primarily on the IFR Enroute Low Altitude Charts. Other IFR products use similar symbols in various colors. The chart leg- ends portray aeronautical symbols with a brief description of what each symbol depicts. This section provides more details of the symbols and how they are used on IFR Enroute charts.\n\nFAA charts are prepared in accordance with specifications of the Interagency Air Committee (IAC), and are approved by representatives of the Federal Aviation Administration and the Department of Defense (DoD). Some information on these charts may only apply to military pilots.\n\n- • All IAP Airports are shown on the Low Altitude Charts (US and Alaska). \n\n- • Non-IAP Airports are shown on the U.S. Low Altitude Charts (Contiguous US) have a minimum hard surface runway of 3,000’. \n\n- • Non-IAP airports are shown on the U.S. Low Altitude Alaska Charts are show if the runway is 3000’ or longer, hard or soft surface. \n\n- • Public heliports with an Instrument Approach Procedure (IAP) or requested by the FAA or DoD are depicted on the IFR Enroute Low Altitude Charts. \n\n- • Seaplane bases requested by the FAA or DoD are depicted on the IFR Enroute Low Altitude Charts. \n\n- • Airports shown on the U.S. High Enroute Alaska Charts have a minimum hard surface runway of 4000’. \n\n- • Airports shown on the U.S. High Enroute Charts (Contiguous US) have a minimum hard surface runway of 5000’." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7801262393500739, + "doc_id": "bae9bb3e523b918e57c7799485ddfd6b3628db9b5b353ec786896820839ab840", + "edit_distance": 0.7562408223201175, + "f1_score": 0.9202226345083486, + "meteor": 0.7579446196609321, + "precision": 0.9575289575289575, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS 00-801-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE\n\nwill cause these approximate increases in takeoff distance:\n\n- 3% percent for the supercharged reciprocating airplane when below critical altitude\n- 7 percent for the turbojet with high thtustto-weight ratio\n- 10 percent for the turbojet with low thrust-to-weight ratio\n\nThese approximate relationships show the turbojet airplane to be much more sensitive to density altitude than the reciprocating powered airplane, This is an important fact which must be appreciated by pilots in transition from propeller type to jet type airplanes. Proper accounting of pressure altitude (field elevation is a poor substitute) and temperature is mandatory for accurate prediction of takeoff roll distance.\n\nThe most critical conditions of takeoff performance are the result of somecombination of high gross weight, altitude, temperature and unfavorable wind. In a11 cases, ir behooves the pilot to make an accurate prcdiction of takeoff' distance from the performance data of the Flight Handboo& regardless of the runway available, and to strive for.2 polished, professional takeoff technique.\n\nIn the prediction of takeoff distance from the handbook data, the following primary considerations must be given:\n\n## Reciprocating powered airplane\n\n- (1) Pressure altitude and temperatureto define the effect of density altitude on distance.\n- (2) Gross weight-a large effect on distance.\n- (3) Specific humidity-to correct cakeoff distance for the power loss associated with water vapor.\n- (4) Wind-a large effect due to the wind or wind component along the runway. Turbine powered airplane\n- (I) Pressure altitude and temperatureto define the effect of density altitude.\n\n192\n\n- (2) Gross weight.\n- (3) Temperature--an additional correction for nonstandard temperatures to account for the thrust loss associated with high compressor inlet air temperature. For this correction the ambient temperature at the runway conditions is appropriate rather than the ambient temperature at some distant location.\n\n## (4) Wind.\n\nIn addition, corrections are necessary to account for runway slope, engine power deficiencies, etc.\n\nLANDING PERFORMANCE. In many cases, the landing distance of an airplane will define the runway requirements for flying operations. This is particularly the case of high speed ' jet airplanes at low altitudes where landing distance is the problem rather than takeoff performance. The minimum landing distance is obtained by landing at some minimum safe velocity which allows sufficient margin above stall and provides satisfactory, control and capability for waveoff Generally, the landing speed is some fixed percentage of the stall speed or minimum control speed for the airplane in the landing configuration. As such, the landing will be accomplished at some particuIar value of ~lift coefficient and angle of attack. The exact value of CL and P for landing will depend on the airplane characteristics but, once defined, the values are independent of weight, altitude, wind, etc. Thus, an angle of attack indicator can be a valuable aid during approach and landing.\n\nTo obtain minimum landing distance at the specified landing velocity, the forces which act on the airplane must provide maximum deceleration (or negative.acceIeration) during the landing roll. The various forces actin~g. on the airplane during the landing roll may require various techniques to maintain landing deceleration at the peak value.\n\nFigure 2.34 illustrates the forces acting on the aircraft during landing roll. The powerplant thnrJt should be a minimum positive", + "recall": 0.8857142857142857, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-801-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE \n\n(2) Gross weight. \n\n(3) Temperature--an additional correc- tion for nonstandard temperatures to ac- count for the thrust loss associated with high compressor inlet air temperature. For this correction the ambient tempera- ture at the runway conditions is appro- priate rather than the ambient temperature at some distant location. (4) Wind. \n\nat some distant location. (4) Wind. \n\nIn addition, corrections are necessary to ac- count for runway slope, engine power defi- ciencies, etc. LANDING PERFORMANCE. In many \n\nwill cause these approximate increases in takeoff distance: 3% percent for the supercharged recipro- \n\n- takeoff distance: 3% percent for the supercharged recipro- cating airplane when below critical altitude 7 percent for the turbojet with high thtust- \n\n- altitude 7 percent for the turbojet with high thtust- to-weight ratio 10 percent for the turbojet with \n\n- to-weight ratio 10 percent for the turbojet with low thrust-to-weight ratio \n\nThese approximate relationships show the turbojet airplane to be much more sensitive to density altitude than the reciprocating powered airplane, This is an important fact which must be appreciated by pilots in transition from propeller type to jet type airplanes. Proper accounting of pressure altitude (field elevation is a poor substitute) and temperature is mandatory for accurate prediction of takeoff roll distance. The most critical conditions of takeoff \n\nciencies, etc. LANDING PERFORMANCE. In many cases, the landing distance of an airplane will define the runway requirements for flying operations. This is particularly the case of high speed ‘ jet airplanes at low altitudes where landing distance is the problem rather than takeoff performance. The minimum landing distance is obtained by landing at some mini- mum safe velocity which allows sufficient mar- gin above stall and provides satisfactory, con- trol and capability for waveoff Generally, the landing speed is some fixed percentage of the stall speed or minimum control speed for the airplane in the landing configuration. As such, the landing will be accomplished at some particuIar value of ~lift coefficient and angle of attack. The exact value of CL and P for landing will depend on the airplane characteristics but, once defined, the values are independent of weight, altitude, wind, etc. Thus, an angle of attack indicator can be a valuable aid during approach and landing. \n\nroll distance. The most critical conditions of takeoff performance are the result of somecombination of high gross weight, altitude, temperature and unfavorable wind. In a11 cases, ir be- hooves the pilot to make an accurate prcdic- tion of takeoff’ distance from the performance data of the Flight Handboo& regardless of the runway available, and to strive for.2 polished, professional takeoff technique. \n\nIn the prediction of takeoff distance from the handbook data, the following primary considerations must be given: \n\n(1) Pressure altitude and temperature- to define the effect of density altitude on distance. \n\n(2) Gross weight-a large effect on dis- tance. \n\n(3) Specific humidity-to correct cake- off distance for the power loss associated with water vapor. \n\n(4) Wind-a large effect due to the wind or wind component along the runway. \n\n(I) Pressure altitude and temperature- to define the effect of density altitude. \n\n## Turbine powered airplane\n\n## Reciprocating powered airplane\n\nTo obtain minimum landing distance at the specified landing velocity, the forces which act on the airplane must provide maximum deceleration (or negative.acceIeration) during the landing roll. The various forces actin~g. on the airplane during the landing roll may require various techniques to maintain landing deceleration at the peak value. \n\nFigure 2.34 illustrates the forces acting on the aircraft during landing roll. The power- plant thnrJt should be a minimum positive \n\n192" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8741877220064475, + "doc_id": "6e0563fb2a3fde8833b65a2e851df22a9901559359b15efcea25680aeec8f394", + "edit_distance": 0.5655339805825242, + "f1_score": 0.9174311926605506, + "meteor": 0.6875378229674072, + "precision": 0.9578544061302682, + "pred_md": "In order to obtain maximum glide ratio, the airplane must be operated at the angle of attack and lift coefficient which provide maximum lift-drag ratio. The illustration of figure 6.6 depicts a variation of lift-drag ratio, L/D, with lift coeficient, C,, for a typical airplane in the clean and landing configurations. Note that (LID),,, for each configuration will occur at a specihc value of lift coefficient and, hence, a specific angle of attack. Thus, the maximum glide performance of a given airplane configuration will be unaffected by gross weight and altitude when the airplane is operated at (L/D),az. Of course, an exception occurs at very high altitudes where compressibility effects may alter the aerodynamic characteristics. The highest value of (L/D) will occur with the airplane in the clean configuration. As the airplane is changed to the landing configuration, the added parasite drag reduces (L/D)\\_nz and the C, which produces (L/D),, will be increased. Thus, the best glide speed for the landingconhguration generallywill be lessthan the best glidespeed .for theclean configuration.\n\nThe power-off glide performance may be appreciated also by the graph of rate of descent versus velocity shown in figure 6.6. When a straight line is drawn from the origin tangent to the curve, a point is located which produces the maximum proportion of velocity to rate of descent. Obviously, this condition provides maximum glide ratio. Since the rate of descent is proportional to the power required, the points of tangency define the aerodynamic condition of (L/D)m.z.\n\nFACTORS AFFECTING GLIDE PERFORMANCE. In order to obtain the minimum glide angle through the air, the airplane must be operated at (L/D)mor. The subsonic (LIDL of a given airplane configuration will occur at a specific value of lift coefficient and angle of attack. However, as can be noted from the curves of figure 6.6, small deviations from the optimum C, will not cause a drastic reduction of (L/D) and glide ratio. In fact, a 5 percent deviation in speed from the best glide\n\n## NAVWEPS W-ROT-80 APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYING\n\nspeed will not cause any significant reduction of glide ratio. This is fortunate and allows the specifying of convenient glide speeds which will be appropriate for a range of gross weights at which power-off gliding may be encountered, e.g., small quantities of fuel remaining.\n\nAn attempt to stretch a glide by flying at speeds above or below the best glide speed will prove futile. As shown by the illustration of figure 6.6, any C, above or below the optimum will produce a lift-drag ratio less than the maximum. If the airplane angle of attack is increased above the value for (L/D),,, a transient reduction in rate of descent will take place but this process must be reserved for the landing phase. Eventually, the steady-state conditions would be achieved and the increased angle of attack would incur a lower airspeed and a reduction in (L/D) and glide ratio.\n\nThe effect of gross weight on glide performance may be difficult to appreciate. Since (L/D)of a given airplane configuration will occur at a specific value of C,, the gross weight of the airplane will not affect the glide ratio if the airplane is operated at the optimum C,. Thus, two airplanes of identical aerodynamic configuration but different gross weight could glide the same distance from the same altitude. Of course, this fact would be true only if both airplanes are flown at the specific C, to produce (L/D),,. The principal difference would be that the heavier airplane must fly at a higher airspeed to support the greater weight at the optimum C,. In addition, the heavier airplane flying at the greater speed along the same flight path would develop a greater rate of descent.\n\nThe relationship which exists between gross weight and velocity for a particular C, is as follows:\n\nwhere VI= best glide speed corresponding to some original gross weight. WI V,=best glide speed corresponding to\n\n\n\nsome new gross weight, IV2", + "recall": 0.8802816901408451, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS W-ROT-80 APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYING \n\nIn order to obtain maximum glide ratio, the airplane must be operated at the angle of at- tack and lift coefficient which provide maxi- mum lift-drag ratio. The illustration of figure 6.6 depicts a variation of lift-drag ratio, L/D, with lift coeficient, C,, for a typical airplane in the clean and landing configurations. Note that (LID),,, for each configuration will occur at a specihc value of lift coefficient and, hence, a specific angle of attack. Thus, the maximum glide performance of a given airplane configu- ration will be unaffected by gross weight and altitude when the airplane is operated at (L/D),az. Of course, an exception occurs at very high altitudes where compressibility ef- fects may alter the aerodynamic characteristics. The highest value of (L/D) will occur with the airplane in the clean configuration. As the airplane is changed to the landing configura- tion, the added parasite drag reduces (L/D)\\_nz and the C, which produces (L/D),, will be in- creased. Thus, the best glide speed for the landingconhguration generallywill be lessthan the best glidespeed .for theclean configuration. \n\nspeed will not cause any significant reduction of glide ratio. This is fortunate and allows the specifying of convenient glide speeds which will be appropriate for a range of gross weights at which power-off gliding may be encoun- tered, e.g., small quantities of fuel remaining. \n\nAn attempt to stretch a glide by flying at speeds above or below the best glide speed will prove futile. As shown by the illustration of figure 6.6, any C, above or below the optimum will produce a lift-drag ratio less than the maximum. If the airplane angle of attack is increased above the value for (L/D),,, a tran- sient reduction in rate of descent will take place but this process must be reserved for the land- ing phase. Eventually, the steady-state condi- tions would be achieved and the increased angle of attack would incur a lower airspeed and a reduction in (L/D) and glide ratio. The effect of gross weight on glide performance \n\nand a reduction in (L/D) and glide ratio. The effect of gross weight on glide performance may be difficult to appreciate. Since (L/D)- of a given airplane configuration will occur at a specific value of C,, the gross weight of the air- plane will not affect the glide ratio if the air- plane is operated at the optimum C,. Thus, two airplanes of identical aerodynamic con- figuration but different gross weight could glide the same distance from the same altitude. Of course, this fact would be true only if both airplanes are flown at the specific C, to produce (L/D),,. The principal difference would be that the heavier airplane must fly at a higher airspeed to support the greater weight at the optimum C,. In addition, the heavier airplane flying at the greater speed along the same flight path would develop a greater rate of descent. \n\nThe relationship which exists between gross weight and velocity for a particular C, is as follows: VT- w, \n\nThe power-off glide performance may be appreciated also by the graph of rate of descent versus velocity shown in figure 6.6. When a straight line is drawn from the origin tangent to the curve, a point is located which produces the maximum proportion of velocity to rate of descent. Obviously, this condition provides maximum glide ratio. Since the rate of descent is proportional to the power required, the points of tangency define the aerodynamic condition of (L/D)m.z. \n\nFACTORS AFFECTING GLIDE PER- FORMANCE. In order to obtain the mini- mum glide angle through the air, the airplane must be operated at (L/D)mor. The subsonic (LIDL of a given airplane configuration will occur at a specific value of lift coefficient and angle of attack. However, as can be noted from the curves of figure 6.6, small deviations from the optimum C, will not cause a drastic reduction of (L/D) and glide ratio. In fact, a 5 percent deviation in speed from the best glide \n\nwhere \n\n- VI= best glide speed corresponding to some original gross weight. WI \n\n- V,=best glide speed corresponding to some new gross weight, IV2 \n\n$$-4 VT- w, VI w, (constant C,> $$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8102405623584606, + "doc_id": "40055ade5c56ccdc33146bf43da0bc62f2c245d729df283e55a81a1a648a1ccc", + "edit_distance": 0.5978755690440061, + "f1_score": 0.891041162227603, + "meteor": 0.6166226056769599, + "precision": 0.9435897435897436, + "pred_md": "Induced drag predominates at speeds below the point of minimum total drag. When the airplane is operated at the condition of minimum power required, the total drag is 75 percent induced drag and 25 percent parasite drag. Thus, the induced drag is three times as great as the parasite drag when at minimum power required.\n\n## VARIATIONS OF THRUST REQUIRED AND POWER REQUIRED\n\nThe curves of thrust required and power required versus velocity provide the basis for comprehensive analysis of all the major items of airplane performance. The changes in the drag and power curves with variations of air-plane gross weight, configuration, and altitude furnish insight for the ' variation of range, endurance, climb performance, etc., with these same items.\n\nThe effect of a change in weight on the thrust and power required is illustrated by figure 2.2. 1 The primary effect of a weight change is a change in the induced drag and induced power required at any given speed. Thus, the greatest changes in the curves of thrust and power required will take place in the range of low speed flight where the i nduced effects predominate. The changes in thrust and power required in the range of high speed flight are relatively slight because parasite effects predominate at high speed. The induced effects at high speed are relatively small and changes in these items produce a small effect on the total thrust or power required.\n\nIn addition to the general effect on .the induced drag and power required at particular speeds, a change in weight will require that the airplane operate at different airspeeds to maintain conditions of a specific lift coefficient and angle of attack. If the airplane is in steady flight at a particular C,,, the airpseed required for this CL will vary with weight in the following manner :\n\n99\n\nNAVWEPS OO-.ROT-80 PERFORMANCE\n\nAtRPlANE\n\n\n\nwhere\n\nVi = speed corresponding to a specific C, and weight, W,\n\nVa=speed corresponding to the same C, but a different weight, Ws\n\nFor the example airplane of figure 2.2, a change of gross weight from 15,000 to 22,500 lbs. requires that the airplane operate at speeds which are 22.5 percent greater to maintain a specific lift coefficient. For example, if the 15,000-lb. airplane operates at 160 knots for (L/D)-, the speed for (L/D)mz at 22,500 lbs. is:\n\n\n\nThe same situation exists with respect to the curves of power required where a change in weight requires a change of speed to maintain flight at a particular CL. For example, if the 15,000-lb. airplane achieves minimum power required at 122 knots, an increase in weight to 22,500 Ibs. increases the speed for minimum power required to 149 knots.\n\n0f course, the thrust and power required at specific lift coefficients are altered by changes in weight. At a specific C,, any change in weight causes a like change in thrust required, e.g., a 50-percent increase in weight causes a 50-percent increase in thrust required at the same C,. The effect of a weight change on the power required at a specific CL is a bit more complex because a change in speed accompanies the change\n\nRevised January 1965", + "recall": 0.8440366972477065, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OO-.ROT-80 AtRPlANE PERFORMANCE \n\nInduced drag predominates at speeds below the point of minimum total drag. When the airplane is operated at the condition of mini- mum power required, the total drag is 75 percent induced drag and 25 percent parasite drag. Thus, the induced drag is three times as great as the parasite drag when at minimum power required. \n\nThe curves of thrust required and power required versus velocity provide the basis for comprehensive analysis of all the major items of airplane performance. The changes in the drag and power curves with variations of air-- plane gross weight, configuration, and altitude furnish insight for the ‘ variation of range, endurance, climb performance, etc., with these same items. The effect of a change in weight on the thrust \n\nFor the example airplane of figure 2.2, a change of gross weight from 15,000 to 22,500 lbs. re- quires that the airplane operate at speeds which are 22.5 percent greater to maintain a specific lift coefficient. For example, if the 15,000-lb. airplane operates at 160 knots for (L/D)-, the speed for (L/D)mz at 22,500 lbs. is: \n\nwhere \n\n$$v, Tg -=J VI E $$\n\nVi = speed corresponding to a specific C, and weight, W, \n\nVa=speed corresponding to the same C, but a different weight, Ws \n\nsame items. The effect of a change in weight on the thrust and power required is illustrated by figure 2.2. 1 The primary effect of a weight change is a change in the induced drag and induced power required at any given speed. Thus, the great- est changes in the curves of thrust and power required will take place in the range of low speed flight where the induced effects pre- dominate. The changes in thrust and power required in the range of high speed flight are relatively slight because parasite effects pre- dominate at high speed. The induced effects at high speed are relatively small and changes in these items produce a small effect on the total thrust or power required. \n\n## VARIATIONS OF THRUST REQUIRED AND POWER REQUIRED\n\n$$v, = VI@ =I&) 22,500 -\\i- 15,000 = (160) (1.225) = 196 knots $$\n\nThe same situation exists with respect to the curves of power required where a change in weight requires a change of speed to maintain flight at a particular CL. For example, if the 15,000-lb. airplane achieves minimum power required at 122 knots, an increase in weight to 22,500 Ibs. increases the speed for minimum power required to 149 knots. 0f course, the thrust and power required at \n\npower required to 149 knots. 0f course, the thrust and power required at specific lift coefficients are altered by changes in weight. At a specific C,, any change in weight causes a like change in thrust required, e.g., a 50-percent increase in weight causes a 50-per- cent increase in thrust required at the same C,. The effect of a weight change on the power re- quired at a specific CL is a bit more complex be- cause a change in speed accompanies the change \n\nIn addition to the general effect on .the in- duced drag and power required at particular speeds, a change in weight will require that the airplane operate at different airspeeds to main- tain conditions of a specific lift coefficient and angle of attack. If the airplane is in steady flight at a particular C,,, the airpseed required for this CL will vary with weight in the fol- lowing manner : \n\nRevised January 1965 \n\n99" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8442836207057901, + "doc_id": "8f6489d48b2dcf1f553a29b48bb8aa9dad2547a17bcc07d76f8a28d94b7d993a", + "edit_distance": 0.5940860215053764, + "f1_score": 0.9400749063670413, + "meteor": 0.7375047501244549, + "precision": 0.98046875, + "pred_md": "maintain a nucleus of combustion in the combustion chamber. In rhe normal combustion process, the speed of flame propagation is quite low and, if the local velocities are too high at the forward end of the combustion chamber, poor combustion will result and it is likely rhar the flame will blow out. The secondary air-or cooling flow-is introduced downstream from the combustion nucleus to dilute the combustion products and lower the discharge gas temperature.\n\nThe fuel nozzle must provide a finely atomized, evenly distributed spray of fuel through a wide range of flow rates. Very specialized design is necessary to provide a nozzle with suitable characteristics. The spray parrern and circulation in the combustion chamber must make efficient use of the fuel by complete combustion. The temperatures in the combustion nucleus can exceed 1,700' to 1,SW' C but the secondary air will dilute the gas and reduce the temperature to some value which can be tolerated in the turbine section. A pressure drop will occur through the combustion chamber to accelerate the combustion gas rearward. In addition, turbulence and fluid friction will cause a pressure drop but this loss must be held to the minimum incurred by providing complete combustion. Heat transferred through the walls of the combustion chamber constitutes a loss of thermal energy and should be held to a minimum. Thus, the combustion chamber should enclose the combustion space with a minimum of surface area to minimize heat and friction losses. Hence, the ' annular' typ: combustion chamber offers certain advantages over the multiple ' can' type combustion chamber.\n\nThe tur6inc section is the most critical element of the turbojet engine. The function of the turbine is to extract energy from the combustion gases and furnish power to drive the compressor and accessories. In the case of the turboprop engine, the turbine section must extract a very large portion of the exhaust gas\n\n113\n\n## NAVWEPS O(L8OT-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE\n\nenergy to drive the propeller in addition to the compressor and accessories.\n\nThe combustion chamber delivers high energy combustion gases to the turbine section at high pressure and tolerable temperature. The turbine nozzle vanes are a row of stationary blades immediately ahead of the rotating turbine. These blades form the nozzles which discharge the combustion gases as high velocity jets onto the rotating turbine. In this manner, the high pressure energy of the combustion gases is converted into kinetic energy and a pressure and temperature drop takes place. The function of the turbine blades operating in these jets is to develop a tangential force along the turbine wheel thus extracting mechanical energy from the combustion gases. This is illustrated in figure 2.8.\n\nThe form of the turbine blades may be a combination of two distinct types. The imp&c type turbine relies upon the nozzle vanes to accomplish the conversion of combustion gas static pressure to high velocity jets. The impulse turbine blades are shaped to produce a large deflection of the gas and develop the tangential force by the flow direction change. In such a design, negligible velocity and pressure drop occurs with the flow across the turbine rotor blades. The reaction type turbine differs in that large velocity and pressure changes occur across the turbine rotor blades. In the reaction turbine, rhe stationary nozzle vanes serve only to guide the combustion gas onto the turbine rotor with negligible changes in velocity and pressure. The reaction turbine rotor blades are shaped to provide a pressure drop and velocity increase across the blades and the reaction from this velocity increase provides the tangential force on the wheel. Generally, the turbine design is a form utilizing some feature of each of the two types.\n\nThe turbine blade is subjected to high centrifugal stresses which vary as the square of the rorative speed. In addition, the blade\n\nRevised January 1965", + "recall": 0.9028776978417267, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS O(L8OT-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE \n\nenergy to drive the propeller in addition to the compressor and accessories. The combustion chamber delivers high en- \n\nmaintain a nucleus of combustion in the com- bustion chamber. In rhe normal combustion process, the speed of flame propagation is quite low and, if the local velocities are too high at the forward end of the combustion chamber, poor combustion will result and it is likely rhar the flame will blow out. The secondary air-or cooling flow-is introduced downstream from the combustion nucleus to dilute the com- bustion products and lower the discharge gas temperature. \n\ncompressor and accessories. The combustion chamber delivers high en- ergy combustion gases to the turbine section at high pressure and tolerable temperature. The turbine nozzle vanes are a row of stationary blades immediately ahead of the rotating tur- bine. These blades form the nozzles which discharge the combustion gases as high ve- locity jets onto the rotating turbine. In this manner, the high pressure energy of the com- bustion gases is converted into kinetic energy and a pressure and temperature drop takes place. The function of the turbine blades operating in these jets is to develop a tangen- tial force along the turbine wheel thus extract- ing mechanical energy from the combustion gases. This is illustrated in figure 2.8. \n\nThe fuel nozzle must provide a finely atomized, evenly distributed spray of fuel through a wide range of flow rates. Very specialized design is necessary to provide a nozzle with suitable characteristics. The spray parrern and circulation in the combustion chamber must make efficient use of the fuel by complete combustion. The temperatures in the combustion nucleus can exceed 1,700” to 1,SW’ C but the secondary air will dilute the gas and reduce the temperature to some value which can be tolerated in the turbine section. A pressure drop will occur through the com- bustion chamber to accelerate the combustion gas rearward. In addition, turbulence and fluid friction will cause a pressure drop but this loss must be held to the minimum incurred by providing complete combustion. Heat trans- ferred through the walls of the combustion chamber constitutes a loss of thermal energy and should be held to a minimum. Thus, the combustion chamber should enclose the com- bustion space with a minimum of surface area to minimize heat and friction losses. Hence, the “annular” typ: combustion chamber offers certain advantages over the multiple “can” type combustion chamber. The tur6inc section is the most critical element \n\nThe form of the turbine blades may be a com- bination of two distinct types. The imp&c type turbine relies upon the nozzle vanes to accomplish the conversion of combustion gas static pressure to high velocity jets. The impulse turbine blades are shaped to produce a large deflection of the gas and develop the tangential force by the flow direction change. In such a design, negligible velocity and pres- sure drop occurs with the flow across the tur- bine rotor blades. The reaction type turbine differs in that large velocity and pressure changes occur across the turbine rotor blades. In the reaction turbine, rhe stationary nozzle vanes serve only to guide the combustion gas onto the turbine rotor with negligible changes in velocity and pressure. The reaction tur- bine rotor blades are shaped to provide a pres- sure drop and velocity increase across the blades and the reaction from this velocity in- crease provides the tangential force on the wheel. Generally, the turbine design is a form utilizing some feature of each of the two types. The turbine blade is subjected to high \n\ntype combustion chamber. The tur6inc section is the most critical element of the turbojet engine. The function of the turbine is to extract energy from the combus- tion gases and furnish power to drive the com- pressor and accessories. In the case of the turboprop engine, the turbine section must ex- tract a very large portion of the exhaust gas \n\ntypes. The turbine blade is subjected to high centrifugal stresses which vary as the square of the rorative speed. In addition, the blade \n\nRevised January 1965 \n\n113" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.47913131225520417, + "doc_id": "817b3586ac914b086d82124dc03a3c4ca113e7ec5f69f804214e90014fd18f01", + "edit_distance": 0.45454545454545453, + "f1_score": 0.8571428571428572, + "meteor": 0.889690170940171, + "precision": 0.75, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS 00-BOT-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL\n\n,/' EQUl\n\nFigure 4.74. Control Force Stability\n\nFigure 4.74. Control Force Stability\n\n267", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-BOT-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL \n\nFigure 4.74. Control Force Stability \n\n267" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.009711029407883735, + "doc_id": "9a4b78d83ad2ef256b0d676d9eadcafc356b9a0aa29ab19dca83d21a4f2a0004", + "edit_distance": 0.9775967413441955, + "f1_score": 0.16842105263157894, + "meteor": 0.19567570702286832, + "precision": 0.09411764705882353, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS OO-BOT-BO TABLE OF CONTENTS\n\n| Landing performance.. . . . . | |\n|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|----------|\n| | 192 |\n| Forces acting on the airplane Accclanted motion Factors of technique | |\n| Factors affecting landing performance. . . | 196 |\n| E&t of gross weight | |\n| Effect of wind | |\n| Fg; | |\n| ~~~~~~~;mpcntwc ro a | |\n| | 200 |\n| Impmtance of handbook performance data. | |\n| CHAPTER 3. HIGH SPEED AERODYNAMICS | |\n| NATURE OF COMPRESSIBILITY. ............................... | 201 |\n| Definition of Mach number. ........................................ | 202 |\n| Sttbsonic, traasonic, supersonic, and hypersonic flight regimes. ....... | 204 |\n| Compressible flow conditions ....................................... ............... | 204 |\n| Comparison of compressible and incompressible flow. | 204 |\n| TYPICAL SUPERSONIC FLOW PATTERNS., .................. | 207 |\n| Obliqueshockwave ................................................ ................................................ | 207 |\n| Normalshockwave Ex nsionwave | 207 211 |\n| E t9' ct on .................................................... e velocity, Mach number, density, pressure, energy. .. : ........ | 213 |\n| SECTIONS IN SUPERSONIC FLOW. ............................ | 213 |\n| nowpatterns ...................................................... | 213 |\n| Pressure distribution. .............................................. | 213 |\n| Wavedrag ......................................................... | 21s |\n| Location of aerodynamic center. .................................... | 21s |\n| CONFIGURATION EFFECTS | |\n| TRANSONIC AND SUPERSONIC FLIGHT. . | 215 |\n| Critical Mach ntlm~r | 2 15 |\n| Shock wave formatton. . . . . . . . . . . . . | 218 |\n| Shock induced separation.. i.. | $2: |\n| Porcedivergence................................................... | |\n| Phenomena of transonic flight.. | 218 |\n| Phenomena of supersonic Bight.. | 220 |\n| TRANSONIC AND SUPERSONIC CONFIGURATIONS. | |\n| Airfoil . | 220 220 |\n| sections.. Transonic sections Supctsonic sections Wave drag characteristics | |\n| Effect of Mach number on airfoil characteristics Plaaform effects. | |\n| ,.......,..... | 226 |\n| Effect of swcc ack | |\n| p' wcepback Advantages o s Disadvantages of sweepback Effect of nspct ratio and tip shape | |\n| Control surfaces. . . . . . . . . . | 236 |\n\nAll\n\nmovable surfaces", + "recall": 0.8, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OO-BOT-BO TABLE OF CONTENTS \n\n## CONFIGURATION EFFECTS\n\n## GENERAL CONCEPTS AND SUPERSONIC FLOW PATTERNS\n\n## CHAPTER 3. HIGH SPEED AERODYNAMICS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5758522372341492, + "doc_id": "f8b27897317671b06ad5bab846a0a884b35cc5501ca2e74feb145472cb2babb3", + "edit_distance": 0.7222222222222222, + "f1_score": 0.9565217391304348, + "meteor": 0.8638835911563184, + "precision": 0.9166666666666666, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS 00-801-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL\n\nFigure 4.15. Maneuvering Stability\n\nFigure 4.15. Maneuvering Stability\n\n269", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Figure 4.15. Maneuvering Stability \n\n269 \n\nNAVWEPS 00-801-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.549696364469696, + "doc_id": "52387455262f98fa7ff2ccfe5d9823c8766473c1af86e61d5aae251665d36f82", + "edit_distance": 0.4230769230769231, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9305728088336785, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS OO-ROT-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE\n\nFigure 2.2. Effect of Weight on Thrust and Power Required\n\nFigure 2.2. Effect of Weight on Thrust and Power Required", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OO-ROT-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE \n\nFigure 2.2. Effect of Weight on Thrust and Power Required" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8651982024292402, + "doc_id": "69568dba893a109bf0d9f1567c9fffbfb30bcbb662a194eb881ddddd6f44e2b3", + "edit_distance": 0.42724458204334365, + "f1_score": 0.9200779727095517, + "meteor": 0.8950223742635499, + "precision": 0.963265306122449, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS 00-EOT-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE\n\npropellers is obtained by rotating the blade angle well below the low pitch stop and applying engine power. The action is to extract a large amount of momentum from the airstream and thereby create negative thrust. The magnitude of the reverse thrust from propellets is very large, especially in the case of the turboprop where a very large shaft power can be fed into the propeller. In the case of reverse propeller thrust, maximum effectiveness is achieved by use immediately after the airplane is in contact with the runway. The reverse thrust capability is greatest at the high speed and, obviously, any delay in producing deceleration allows runway to pass by at a rapid rate. Reverse thrust of turbojet engines will usually employ some form of vanes, buckets, or clamshells in the exhaust to turn or direct the exhaust gases forward. Whenever the exit velocity is less than the inlet velocity (or negative), a negative momentum change occurs and negative thrust is produced. The reverse jet thrust is valuable and effective but it should not be compared with the reverse thrust capability of a comparable propeller powerplant which has the high intrinsic thrust at low velocities. As with the propeller reverse thrust, jet reverse thrust must be applied immediately after ground contact for maximum effectiveness in reducing landing distance.\n\nFACTORS AFFECTING LANDING PERFORMANCE. In addition to the important factors of proper technique, many other variables affect the landing performance of an airplane. Any item which alters the landing velocity or deceleration during landing toll will affect the landing distance. As with takeoff performance, the relationships of uniformly accelerated motion will be assumed applicable for studying the principal effects on landing distance. The case of uniformly accelerated motion defines landing distance as varying directly as the square of the landing velocity and inversely as the acceleration during landing toll.\n\nwhere Si = landing distance resulting from certain values of landing velocity, Vi, and acceleration, 6zi S2=landing distance resulting from some\n\ndifferent values of landing velocity, V2, or acceleration, a2\n\nWith this relationship, the effect of the many variables on landing distance can be apptoximated.\n\nThe effect of gross wclght on landing distance is one of the principal items determining the landing distance of an airplane One effect of an increased gross weight is that the airplane will require a greater speed to support the airplane at the landing angle of attack and lift coefficient. The relationship of landing speed and gross weight would be as follows:\n\nwhere Vi=landing velocity corresponding to some original weight, W, Vs = landing velocity corresponding to\n\nsome different weight, W,\n\nThus, a given airplane in the landing configuration at a given gross weight will have a specific landing speed (MS ot CAS) which is invariant with altitude, temperature, wind, etc., because a certain value of 4 is necessary to provide lifr equal to weight at the landing C,. As an example of the effect of a change in gross weight, a 21 percent increase in landing weight will require a 10 percent increase in landing speed to support the greater weight.\n\nWhen minimum landing distances are considered, braking friction forces predominate during the landing toll and, for the majority of airplane configurations, braking friction is the main source of deceleration. In this case, an increase in gross weight provides a greater", + "recall": 0.8805970149253731, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-EOT-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE \n\nwhere \n\n- Si = landing distance resulting from certain values of landing velocity, Vi, and acceleration, 6zi S2=landing distance resulting from some \n\n- acceleration, 6zi S2=landing distance resulting from some different values of landing velocity, V2, or acceleration, a2 \n\npropellers is obtained by rotating the blade angle well below the low pitch stop and applying engine power. The action is to ex- tract a large amount of momentum from the airstream and thereby create negative thrust. The magnitude of the reverse thrust from pro- pellets is very large, especially in the case of the turboprop where a very large shaft power can be fed into the propeller. In the case of reverse propeller thrust, maximum effective- ness is achieved by use immediately after the airplane is in contact with the runway. The reverse thrust capability is greatest at the high speed and, obviously, any delay in pro- ducing deceleration allows runway to pass by at a rapid rate. Reverse thrust of turbojet engines will usually employ some form of vanes, buckets, or clamshells in the exhaust to turn or direct the exhaust gases forward. Whenever the exit velocity is less than the in- let velocity (or negative), a negative momen- tum change occurs and negative thrust is produced. The reverse jet thrust is valuable and effective but it should not be compared with the reverse thrust capability of a com- parable propeller powerplant which has the high intrinsic thrust at low velocities. As with the propeller reverse thrust, jet reverse thrust must be applied immediately after ground contact for maximum effectiveness in reducing landing distance. \n\nWith this relationship, the effect of the many variables on landing distance can be apptoxi- mated. \n\nThe effect of gross wclght on landing distance is one of the principal items determining the landing distance of an airplane One effect of an increased gross weight is that the airplane will require a greater speed to support the airplane at the landing angle of attack and lift coefficient. The relationship of land- ing speed and gross weight would be as follows: \n\nwhere Vi=landing \n\n- where Vi=landing velocity corresponding to some original weight, W, \n\n- Vs = landing velocity corresponding to some different weight, W, \n\nFACTORS AFFECTING LANDING PER- FORMANCE. In addition to the important factors of proper technique, many other vari- ables affect the landing performance of an air- plane. Any item which alters the landing velocity or deceleration during landing toll will affect the landing distance. As with takeoff performance, the relationships of uni- formly accelerated motion will be assumed applicable for studying the principal effects on landing distance. The case of uniformly ac- celerated motion defines landing distance as varying directly as the square of the landing velocity and inversely as the acceleration dur- ing landing toll. \n\nThus, a given airplane in the landing con- figuration at a given gross weight will have a specific landing speed (MS ot CAS) which is invariant with altitude, temperature, wind, etc., because a certain value of 4 is necessary to provide lifr equal to weight at the landing C,. As an example of the effect of a change in gross weight, a 21 percent increase in landing weight will require a 10 percent increase in landing speed to support the greater weight. \n\nWhen minimum landing distances are con- sidered, braking friction forces predominate during the landing toll and, for the majority of airplane configurations, braking friction is the main source of deceleration. In this case, an increase in gross weight provides a greater" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.866645836742314, + "doc_id": "906a1258a1d75ed031c96163bc483e4e352e2b8a7cec532e6b81b9144d6d6cb2", + "edit_distance": 0.5230769230769231, + "f1_score": 0.9417989417989417, + "meteor": 0.7901138390903246, + "precision": 0.9638989169675091, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS oo-s01-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL\n\nMach number. As a corollary of this increase in stability is a decrease in controllability and an increase in trim drag.\n\nThe static directional stability of an airplane decreases with Mach number in supersonic flight. The influence of the fuselage and the decrease in vertical tail lift curve slope bring about this condition.\n\nThe dynamic stability of the airplane generally deteriorates with Mach number in supersonic flight. Since a large part of the damping depends on the tail surfaces, the decrease in lift curve slope with Mach number will account in part for the decrease in damp ing. Of course, all principal motions of the aircraft must have satisfactory damping and if the damping is not available aerodynamically it must be provided synthetically to obtain satisfactory flying qualities. For many high speed configurations the pitch and yaw dampers, flight stabilization systems, etc., are basic necessities rather than luxuries.\n\nGenerally, flight at high Mach number will cake place at high altitude hence the effect of high altitude must be separated for study. All of the basic aerodynamic damping is due to moments created by pitching, rolling, or yawing motion of the aircraft. These moments are derived from the changes in angles of attack on the tail surfaces with angular rotation (see fig. 4.15). The very high true airspeeds common to high altitude flight reduce the angle of attack changes and reduce the aerodynamic damping. In fact, the aerodynamic damping is proportional to & similar to the proportion of true airspeed to equivalent airspeed. Thus, at the altitude of 4O,C00 ft., the aerodynamic damping would be reduced to one-half the sea level value and at the altitude of 100,000 ft. the aerodynamic damping would be reduced to one-tenth the sea level value.\n\nHigh dynamic pressures (high $I can be common to flight at high Mach number and adverse aeroelastic effects may be encountered. If the aircraft surfaces, encounter significant\n\n314\n\ndeflection when subject to load, the tendency may be to lower the contribution to static stability and reduce the damping contribution. Thus, the problem of adequate stability of the various airplane motions is aggravated.\n\n## PILOT INDUCED OSCILLATIONS\n\nThe pilot may purposely induce various motions to the airplane by the action of the controls. In additron, certain undesirable motions may occur due to inadvertent action on the controls. The most important condition exists with the short period longitudinal motion of the airplane where pilotcontrol system response lag can produce an unstable oscillation. The coupling possible in the pilot-control system-airplane combination is most certainly capable of producing damaging flight loads and loss of control of the airplane.\n\nWhen the normal human response lag and control system lag are coupled with the airplane motion, inadvertent control reactions by the pilot may furnish a negative damping to the oscillatory motion and dynamic instability exists. Since the short period motion is of relatively high frequency, the amplitude of the pitching oscillation can reach dangerous proportions in an unbelievably short time. When the pilot i nduced oscillation is encountered, the most effective solution is an i mmediate release of the controls. Any attempt to forcibly damp the oscillation simply continues the excitation and amplifies the oscillation. Freeing the controls removes the unstable (but inadvertent) excitation and allows the airplane to recover by virtue of its inherent dynamic stability.\n\nThe pilot i nduced oscillation is most likely under certain conditions, Most obvious is the case of the pilot unfamiliar with the ' feel' of the airplane and likely to overcontrol or have excessive response lag. High speed flight at low. altitude (high 4) is most likely to provide low stick-force gradients and periods", + "recall": 0.9206896551724137, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS oo-s01-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL \n\ndeflection when subject to load, the tendency may be to lower the contribution to static stability and reduce the damping contribution. Thus, the problem of adequate stability of the various airplane motions is aggravated. \n\nMach number. As a corollary of this increase in stability is a decrease in controllability and an increase in trim drag. The static directional stability of an air- \n\nan increase in trim drag. The static directional stability of an air- plane decreases with Mach number in super- sonic flight. The influence of the fuselage and the decrease in vertical tail lift curve slope bring about this condition. The dynamic stability of the airplane \n\nbring about this condition. The dynamic stability of the airplane generally deteriorates with Mach number in supersonic flight. Since a large part of the damping depends on the tail surfaces, the decrease in lift curve slope with Mach number will account in part for the decrease in damp ing. Of course, all principal motions of the aircraft must have satisfactory damping and if the damping is not available aerodynami- cally it must be provided synthetically to obtain satisfactory flying qualities. For many high speed configurations the pitch and yaw dampers, flight stabilization systems, etc., are basic necessities rather than luxuries. \n\nThe pilot may purposely induce various motions to the airplane by the action of the controls. In additron, certain undesirable motions may occur due to inadvertent action on the controls. The most important con- dition exists with the short period longitu- dinal motion of the airplane where pilot- control system response lag can produce an unstable oscillation. The coupling possible in the pilot-control system-airplane combi- nation is most certainly capable of producing damaging flight loads and loss of control of the airplane. When the normal human response lag and \n\nGenerally, flight at high Mach number will cake place at high altitude hence the effect of high altitude must be separated for study. All of the basic aerodynamic damping is due to moments created by pitching, rolling, or yawing motion of the aircraft. These moments are derived from the changes in angles of attack on the tail surfaces with angular rotation (see fig. 4.15). The very high true airspeeds common to high altitude flight reduce the angle of attack changes and reduce the aerodynamic damping. In fact, the aero- dynamic damping is proportional to & similar to the proportion of true airspeed to equivalent airspeed. Thus, at the altitude of 4O,C00 ft., the aerodynamic damping would be reduced to one-half the sea level value and at the altitude of 100,000 ft. the aerodynamic damping would be reduced to one-tenth the sea level value. \n\nthe airplane. When the normal human response lag and control system lag are coupled with the air- plane motion, inadvertent control reactions by the pilot may furnish a negative damping to the oscillatory motion and dynamic in- stability exists. Since the short period motion is of relatively high frequency, the amplitude of the pitching oscillation can reach dangerous proportions in an unbelievably short time. When the pilot induced oscillation is en- countered, the most effective solution is an immediate release of the controls. Any at- tempt to forcibly damp the oscillation simply continues the excitation and amplifies the oscillation. Freeing the controls removes the unstable (but inadvertent) excitation and allows the airplane to recover by virtue of its inherent dynamic stability. \n\nThe pilot induced oscillation is most likely under certain conditions, Most obvious is the case of the pilot unfamiliar with the “feel” of the airplane and likely to overcontrol or have excessive response lag. High speed flight at low. altitude (high 4) is most likely to provide low stick-force gradients and periods \n\nHigh dynamic pressures (high $I can be common to flight at high Mach number and adverse aeroelastic effects may be encountered. If the aircraft surfaces, encounter significant \n\n314 \n\n## PILOT INDUCED OSCILLATIONS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8355455787925028, + "doc_id": "bc6b32ad74ad93ff241c0df983e9f40e598e9fe5b2b3c8ee30c2dc67f427b6e7", + "edit_distance": 0.5164520743919886, + "f1_score": 0.9110707803992741, + "meteor": 0.7078427555705686, + "precision": 0.9580152671755725, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS oo-EOT-80\n\n## OPERATING STRENGTH LIMITATIONS\n\n## GENERAL DEFINITIONS AND STRUCTURAL REQUIREMENTS\n\nThere are strength requirements which ate common to all aircraft. In general, these requirements can be separated into three particular areas. These are detailed in the following discussion.\n\n## STATIC STRENGTH\n\nThe static strength requirement is the consideration given to the effect of simple static loads with none of the ramifications of the repetition or cyclic variation of loads. An important reference point in the static strength requirement is the ' limit load' condition. When the aircraft is at the design conliguration, there will be some maximum of load which would be anticipated from the mission requirement of the airplane. For example, a fighter or attack type aircraft, at the design configuration, may encounter a very peak load factor of 7.5 in the accomplishment of its mission. Of course, such an aircraft may be subject to load factors of 3, 4, 5, 6, 1, etc., but no more than 7.5 should be required to accomplish the mission. Thus, the limit load condition is the maximum of loads anticipated in normal operation of the aircraft, Various types of aircraft will have different limit load factors according to the primary mission of the aircraft. Typical values are tabulated below:\n\nhbi' <\n\nOf course, these examples are quite general and it is important to note that there may be variations according to specific mission requirements.\n\nSince the limit load is the maximum of the normally anticipated loads, the aircraft structure must withstand this load with no ill effects. Specilicallv, the primary structure of the aircraft should experience no objectionable\n\n3,26\n\npermanent deformation when subjected to the limit load. In fact, the components must withstand this load with a positive margin. This requirement implies that the aircraft should withstand successfully the limit load and then return to the original unstressed shape when the load is removed. Obviously, if the aircraft is subjected to some load which is in excess of the limit load, the overstress may incur an objectionable permanent deformation of the primary structure and require replacement of the damaged parts.\n\nMany different flight and ground load conditions must be considered to define the most critical conditions for the structural components. In addition to positive lift flight, negative lift flight must be considered. Also, the effect of flap and landing gear configuration, gross weight, flight Mach,number, symmetry of loading, c.g. positions, etc., must be studied to account for all possible sources of critical loads. To verify the capability of the structure, ground static tests are conducted and flight demonstrations ate required.\n\nTo provide for the rare instances of flight when a load greater than the limit is required to prevent a disaster, an ' ultimate factor of safety' is provided. Experience has shown that an ultimate factor of safety of 1.5 is sufficient for piloted aircraft. Thus, the aircraft must be capable of withstanding a load which is 1.3 times the design limit load. The primary structure of the aircraft must withstand the ' ultimate load' (1.5 times limit) without failure. Of course, permanent deformation may be expected with this ' overstress' but no actual failure of the major load-carrying components should take place at ultimate load Ground static tests are necessary to verify this capability of the structure.\n\nAn appreciation of the static strength requirements may be obtained by inspection of the basic properties of a typical aircraft metal. Figure 3.1 illustrates the typical static strength properties of a metal sample by a plot of applied stress versus resulting strain. At low values", + "recall": 0.8685121107266436, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS oo-EOT-80 OPERATING STRENGTH LIMITATIONS \n\n## GENERAL DEFINITIONS AND STRUC- TURAL REQUIREMENTS\n\n## STATIC STRENGTH\n\npermanent deformation when subjected to the limit load. In fact, the components must with- stand this load with a positive margin. This requirement implies that the aircraft should withstand successfully the limit load and then return to the original unstressed shape when the load is removed. Obviously, if the air- craft is subjected to some load which is in excess of the limit load, the overstress may incur an objectionable permanent deformation of the primary structure and require replace- ment of the damaged parts. Many different flight and ground load condi- \n\nThere are strength requirements which ate common to all aircraft. In general, these re- quirements can be separated into three particu- lar areas. These are detailed in the following discussion. \n\nThe static strength requirement is the con- sideration given to the effect of simple static loads with none of the ramifications of the repetition or cyclic variation of loads. An important reference point in the static strength requirement is the “limit load” condition. When the aircraft is at the design conligura- tion, there will be some maximum of load which would be anticipated from the mission requirement of the airplane. For example, a fighter or attack type aircraft, at the design configuration, may encounter a very peak load factor of 7.5 in the accomplishment of its mis- sion. Of course, such an aircraft may be sub- ject to load factors of 3, 4, 5, 6, 1, etc., but no more than 7.5 should be required to accom- plish the mission. Thus, the limit load condi- tion is the maximum of loads anticipated in normal operation of the aircraft, Various types of aircraft will have different limit load factors according to the primary mission of the aircraft. Typical values are tabulated below: hbi”< \n\nment of the damaged parts. Many different flight and ground load condi- tions must be considered to define the most critical conditions for the structural com- ponents. In addition to positive lift flight, negative lift flight must be considered. Also, the effect of flap and landing gear configura- tion, gross weight, flight Mach,number, sym- metry of loading, c.g. positions, etc., must be studied to account for all possible sources of critical loads. To verify the capability of the structure, ground static tests are conducted and flight demonstrations ate required. \n\nTo provide for the rare instances of flight when a load greater than the limit is required to prevent a disaster, an “ultimate factor of safety” is provided. Experience has shown that an ultimate factor of safety of 1.5 is suf- ficient for piloted aircraft. Thus, the aircraft must be capable of withstanding a load which is 1.3 times the design limit load. The primary structure of the aircraft must withstand the “ultimate load” (1.5 times limit) without failure. Of course, permanent deformation may be expected with this “overstress” but no actual failure of the major load-carrying components should take place at ultimate load Ground static tests are necessary to verify this capability of the structure. \n\nOf course, these examples are quite general and it is important to note that there may be varia- tions according to specific mission require- ments. \n\nAn appreciation of the static strength re- quirements may be obtained by inspection of the basic properties of a typical aircraft metal. Figure 3.1 illustrates the typical static strength properties of a metal sample by a plot of applied stress versus resulting strain. At low values \n\nSince the limit load is the maximum of the normally anticipated loads, the aircraft struc- ture must withstand this load with no ill effects. Specilicallv, the primary structure of the aircraft should experience no objectionable \n\n3,26" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8888481980462881, + "doc_id": "2224d752f524c49da82688e32e001ea1f75880f081d32fbdf8ec0a33b669dd8e", + "edit_distance": 0.12091038406827881, + "f1_score": 0.9377162629757786, + "meteor": 0.8702035675549455, + "precision": 0.9713261648745519, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS OO-ROT-RO AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE\n\nThe governing of the engine-propeller combination will allow operation throughout a wide range of power and speed while maintaining efficient operation.\n\nIf the envelope of maximum propeller dficiency is available, the propulsive horsepower available will appear as shown in the second chart of figure 2.19. The propulsive power available, Pa, is the product of the propeller efficiency and applied shaft horsepower.\n\nThe propellers used on most large reciprocating engines derive peak propeller efficiencies on the order of s,=O.85 to 0.88. Of course, the peak values are designed to occur at some specific design condition. For example, the selection of a propel!er for a !ong rasge transport wsuld require matching of the engine-propeller combination for peak efhciency at cruise condjtion. On the other hand, selection of a propeller for a utility or liaison type airplane would require matching of the engine-propeller combination to achieve high propulsive power at low speed and high power for good takeoff and climb performance.\n\nSeveral special considerations must be made for the application of aircraft propellers. In the event of a powerplant malfunction or failure, provision must be made to streamline the propeller blades and reduce drag so that flight may be continued on the remaining operating engines. This is accomplished by feathering the propeller blades which .stops rotation and incurs a minimum of drag for the inoperative engine. The necessity for feathering is illustrated in figure 2.19 by the change in equivalent parasite area, Af, with propeller blade angle, 8, of a typical instaliation. When the propeller blade angle is in the feathered position, the change in parasite drag is at a minimum and, in the case of a typical multiengine aircraft, the added parasite drag from\n\na single feathered propeller is a relatively small contribution to the airpfane total drag.\n\nAt smaller blade angles near the Rat pitch position, the drag added by the propeller is very large. AC these small blade angles, the propeller windmilling at high RPM can create such a tremendous amount of drag that the airplane may be uncontrollable. The propeller windmilling at high speed in the low range of blade angles can produce an increase in parasite drag which may be as great as the parasite drag of the basic airplane. An indication of this powerful drag is seen by the hclieopter in autorotation. The windmilling rotor is capable of producing autorotation rates ofdcscent which approach that of a parachute canopy with the identical disc area laading. THUS, the propeller windmilling at high speed and small blade angle can produce an cffccti+e drag coefficient of the disc area which compares with tha~t of a parachute canopy. The drag and yawing moment caused by loss of power at high engine-propeller speed is considerable and the transient yawing displaccmcnt of the aircraft' may produce critical loads for the vertical tail. For this reason, automatic feathering may be a necessity rather than a luxury.\n\nThe large drag which can be produced by the rotating propeller can be utilized to improve the stopping performance of the airplane. Rotation of the propekr blade to small positive values or negative values with applied power can produce large drag or reverse thrust. Since the thrust capability of the propeller is quite high at low speeds, very high deceleration can be provided by reverse thrust alone,\n\nThe qs&zg limitatiar of the pmpcllcr are closely associated with those of the Rowerplant. Overspeed conditions are critical because of the large centrifugal loads and blade twisting moments produced by an excessive rotative speed. In addition, the propeller blades will have various vibratory modes and certain operating limitations may hc necessary to prevent exciting resonant conditions.", + "recall": 0.9063545150501672, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OO-ROT-RO AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE \n\nThe governing of the engine-propeller combi- nation will allow operation throughout a wide range of power and speed while maintaining efficient operation. \n\nIf the envelope of maximum propeller dfi- ciency is available, the propulsive horsepower available will appear as shown in the second chart of figure 2.19. The propulsive power available, Pa, is the product of the propeller efficiency and applied shaft horsepower. \n\na single feathered propeller is a relatively small contribution to the airpfane total drag. \n\nThe propellers used on most large reciprocating engines derive peak propeller efficiencies on the order of s,=O.85 to 0.88. Of course, the peak values are designed to occur at some specific design condition. For example, the selection of a propel!er for a !ong rasge transport wsuld require matching of the engine-propeller com- bination for peak efhciency at cruise condjtion. On the other hand, selection of a propeller for a utility or liaison type airplane would require matching of the engine-propeller combination to achieve high propulsive power at low speed and high power for good takeoff and climb performance. \n\nSeveral special considerations must be made for the application of aircraft propellers. In the event of a powerplant malfunction or failure, provision must be made to streamline the propeller blades and reduce drag so that flight may be continued on the remaining op- erating engines. This is accomplished by feathering the propeller blades which .stops rotation and incurs a minimum of drag for the inoperative engine. The necessity for feather- ing is illustrated in figure 2.19 by the change in equivalent parasite area, Af, with propeller blade angle, 8, of a typical instaliation. When the propeller blade angle is in the feathered position, the change in parasite drag is at a minimum and, in the case of a typical multi- engine aircraft, the added parasite drag from \n\nAt smaller blade angles near the Rat pitch position, the drag added by the propeller is very large. AC these small blade angles, the propeller windmilling at high RPM can create such a tremendous amount of drag that the airplane may be uncontrollable. The propel- ler windmilling at high speed in the low range of blade angles can produce an increase in para- site drag which may be as great as the parasite drag of the basic airplane. An indication of this powerful drag is seen by the hclieopter in autorotation. The windmilling rotor is ca- pable of producing autorotation rates ofdcscent which approach that of a parachute canopy with the identical disc area laading. THUS, the propeller windmilling at high speed and small blade angle can produce an cffccti+e drag coefficient of the disc area which compares with tha~t of a parachute canopy. The drag and yawing moment caused by loss of power at high engine-propeller speed is considerable and the transient yawing displaccmcnt of the aircraft’ may produce critical loads for the vertical tail. For this reason, automatic feathering may be a necessity rather than a luxury. The large drag which can be produced by \n\nluxury. The large drag which can be produced by the rotating propeller can be utilized to im- prove the stopping performance of the air- plane. Rotation of the propekr blade to small positive values or negative values with applied power can produce large drag or re- verse thrust. Since the thrust capability of the propeller is quite high at low speeds, very high deceleration can be provided by reverse thrust alone, The qs&zg limitatiar of the pmpcllcr are \n\nthrust alone, The qs&zg limitatiar of the pmpcllcr are closely associated with those of the Rower- plant. Overspeed conditions are critical be- cause of the large centrifugal loads and blade twisting moments produced by an excessive rotative speed. In addition, the propeller blades will have various vibratory modes and certain operating limitations may hc necessary to prevent exciting resonant conditions." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8619486712555323, + "doc_id": "743141a5096857972d8f3d5e79194602f3e4af880f70e4a14b72ecc29e06dc0a", + "edit_distance": 0.691747572815534, + "f1_score": 0.9233644859813085, + "meteor": 0.6949786254390036, + "precision": 0.9610894941634242, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS 00-BOT-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL\n\nat which equilibrium will occur. As the elevator is fixed in various positions, equilibrium (or trim) will occur at various lift coefficients and the trim CL can be correlated with elevator deflection as in the second graph of figure 4.13.\n\nWhen the c,g. position of the airplane is fixed, each elevator position corresponds to a particular trim lift coefficient. AS the c.g. is moved aft the slope of this line decreases and the decrease in stability is evident by a given control displacement causing a greater change in trim lift coefficient. This is evidence that decreasing stability causes increased controllability and, of course, increasing stability decreases controllability. If the c.g. is moved aft until the line of trim CL versus elevator deflection has zero slope, neutral static stability is obtained and the ' stick-fixed' neutral point is determined.\n\nSince each value of lift coefhcient corresponds to a particular value of dynamic pressure required to support an airplane in level flight, uim airspeed can be correlated with elevator deflection as in the third graph of figure 4.13. If the c.g. location is ahead of the stick-fixed neutral point and control position is directly related to surface deflection, the airplane will give evidence of stick podion mbility. In other words, the airplane will require the stick to be moved aft to increase the angle of attack and trim at a lower airspeed and to be moved forward to decrease the angle of attack and trim at a higher airspeed. To be sure, it is desirable to have an airplane demonstrate this feature. If the airplane were to have stick position instability, the airplane would require the stick to be moved aft to trim at a higher airspeed or to be moved forward to trim at a lower airspeed.\n\nThere may be slight differences in the static longitudinal stability if the elevators are allowed to float free. If the elevators are allowed to float free as in ' hands-off' flight, the elevators may have a tendency to ' float' or streamline when the horizontal tail is given a change in angle of attack. If the hot&ma1\n\ntail is subject to an increase in angle of attack and the elevators tend to float up, the change in lift on the tail is less than if the elevators remain fixed and the tail contribution to stability is reduced. Thus, the ' stick-free' stability of an airplane is usually less than the stick-fixed stability. A typical reduction of stability by free elevators is shown in figure 4.14(A) where the airplane. stick-free demonstrates a reduction of the slope of CM versus Cs. While aerodynamic balance may be provided tu reduce control forces, proper balance of the surfaces will reduce floating and prevent great differences between stick-fixed and stick-free stability. The greatest floating tendency occurs when the surface is at a high angle of attack hence the greatest difference between stick-fixed and stick-free stability occurs when the airplane is at high angle of attack.\n\nIf the controls are fully powered and actuated by an irreversible mechanism, the surfaces are not free to float and there is no differace between the stick-fixed and stick-free static stability.\n\nThe control forces in a conventional airplane are made up of two components. First, the basic stick-free stability of the airplane contributes an i ncremem of force which is independent of airspeed.. Next, there. is an increment of force dependent on the trim tab setting which varies with-the dynamic pressure or the square of ' equivalent airspeed. Figure 4.14(B) indicates the variation of stick force with airspeed and illustrates the effect of tab setting on stick force. In order te trim the airplane at point (1) a certain amount of up elevator is required and zero stick force is obtained~ with' the nse of the tab. To trim the airplane for higher speeds corresponding to points (2) and (3) less and less nose-up tab is required. Note that when the airplane is properly trimmed, a push force is required to increase airspeed and a pull force is required to decrease airspeed. In this manner, the airplane would indicate positive stick force stability with a stable ' feel' for air-\n\n246", + "recall": 0.8884892086330936, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-BOT-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL \n\ntail is subject to an increase in angle of attack and the elevators tend to float up, the change in lift on the tail is less than if the elevators remain fixed and the tail contribution to stability is reduced. Thus, the “stick-free” stability of an airplane is usually less than the stick-fixed stability. A typical reduction of stability by free elevators is shown in figure 4.14(A) where the airplane. stick-free demon- strates a reduction of the slope of CM versus Cs. While aerodynamic balance may be provided tu reduce control forces, proper balance of the surfaces will reduce floating and prevent great differences between stick-fixed and stick-free stability. The greatest floating tendency oc- curs when the surface is at a high angle of attack hence the greatest difference between stick-fixed and stick-free stability occurs when the airplane is at high angle of attack. \n\nat which equilibrium will occur. As the ele- vator is fixed in various positions, equilibrium (or trim) will occur at various lift coefficients and the trim CL can be correlated with elevator deflection as in the second graph of figure 4.13. When the c,g. position of the airplane is \n\ndeflection as in the second graph of figure 4.13. When the c,g. position of the airplane is fixed, each elevator position corresponds to a particular trim lift coefficient. AS the c.g. is moved aft the slope of this line decreases and the decrease in stability is evident by a given control displacement causing a greater change in trim lift coefficient. This is evidence that decreasing stability causes increased controlla- bility and, of course, increasing stability de- creases controllability. If the c.g. is moved aft until the line of trim CL versus elevator de- flection has zero slope, neutral static stability is obtained and the “stick-fixed” neutral point is determined. \n\nIf the controls are fully powered and actu- ated by an irreversible mechanism, the sur- faces are not free to float and there is no differ- ace between the stick-fixed and stick-free static stability. The control forces in a conventional air- \n\nSince each value of lift coefhcient corresponds to a particular value of dynamic pressure re- quired to support an airplane in level flight, uim airspeed can be correlated with elevator deflection as in the third graph of figure 4.13. If the c.g. location is ahead of the stick-fixed neutral point and control position is directly related to surface deflection, the airplane will give evidence of stick podion mbility. In other words, the airplane will require the stick to be moved aft to increase the angle of attack and trim at a lower airspeed and to be moved forward to decrease the angle of attack and trim at a higher airspeed. To be sure, it is desirable to have an airplane demon- strate this feature. If the airplane were to have stick position instability, the airplane would require the stick to be moved aft to trim at a higher airspeed or to be moved forward to trim at a lower airspeed. \n\nstatic stability. The control forces in a conventional air- plane are made up of two components. First, the basic stick-free stability of the airplane contributes an incremem of force which is independent of airspeed.. Next, there. is an increment of force dependent on the trim tab setting which varies with-the dynamic pres- sure or the square of ‘ equivalent airspeed. Figure 4.14(B) indicates the variation of stick force with airspeed and illustrates the effect of tab setting on stick force. In order te trim the airplane at point (1) a certain amount of up elevator is required and zero stick force is obtained~ with ’ the nse of the tab. To trim the airplane for higher speeds corre- sponding to points (2) and (3) less and less nose-up tab is required. Note that when the airplane is properly trimmed, a push force is required to increase airspeed and a pull force is required to decrease airspeed. In this man- ner, the airplane would indicate positive stick force stability with a stable “feel” for air- \n\nThere may be slight differences in the static longitudinal stability if the elevators are allowed to float free. If the elevators are allowed to float free as in “hands-off” flight, the elevators may have a tendency to “float” or streamline when the horizontal tail is given a change in angle of attack. If the hot&ma1 \n\n246" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8242367502646054, + "doc_id": "e1aa6c1bc0df7578c03904609d112fd89a7c117b1ba848ca3bd3f4695a06e8fa", + "edit_distance": 0.15384615384615385, + "f1_score": 0.9523809523809523, + "meteor": 0.9817739079102716, + "precision": 0.9090909090909091, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS OD-BOT-80 APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYING\n\n3s9", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OD-BOT-80 APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYING \n\n3s9" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.45661409154608934, + "doc_id": "63f058dcb3bd27810c25e264cee7503964b428ba94b708f0f8b42b64f08f79da", + "edit_distance": 0.5, + "f1_score": 0.8205128205128205, + "meteor": 0.908203125, + "precision": 0.6956521739130435, + "pred_md": "NAVWWS 00-8OT-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS\n\n## EFFECT OF c LMAX ONSTALL SPEED\n\nFigure 7.76. Flight at High Liff Conditions\n\nFigure 7.76. Flight at High Liff Conditions\n\n38\n\nRevised Jarwary 1965", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWWS 00-8OT-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS \n\nFigure 7.76. Flight at High Liff Conditions \n\n38 \n\nRevised Jarwary 1965" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9134295598209932, + "doc_id": "0dff51a0f184ffdb50f19e9afae54201ff5696707227edad2d364f56dd11508c", + "edit_distance": 0.05503355704697987, + "f1_score": 0.9473684210526315, + "meteor": 0.9132850176288663, + "precision": 0.974025974025974, + "pred_md": "percent and, when the wing is at a height equal to one-tenth the span (h/b=O.l), the reduction in induced drag is 47.6 percent. Thus, a large reduction in induced drag will take place only when the wing is very close to the ground. Because of this variation, ground effect is most usually recognized during the liftoff of takeoff or prior to touchdown on landing.\n\nThe reduction of the tip or trailing vortices due to ground effect alters the spanwise lift distribution and reduces the induced angle of attack. In this case, the wing will require a lower angle of attack in ground effect to produce the same lift coefficient. This effect is illustrated by the lift curves of figure 6.9 which show that the airplane in ground effect will develop a greater slope of the lift curve. For the wing in ground effect, a lower angle of attack is necessary to produce the same lift coefficient or, if a constant angle of attack is maintained, an increase in lift coefficient will result.\n\nFigure 6.9 illustrates the manner in which ground effect will alter the curve of thrust required versus velocity. Since induced drag predominates at low speeds, the reduction of induced drag due to ground effect will cause the most significant reduction of thrust required (parasite plus induced drag) only at low speeds. At high speeds where parasite drag predominates, the induced drag is but a small part of the total drag and ground effect causes no significant change in thrust required. Because ground effect involves the induced effects of airplane when in close proximity to the ground, its effects are of greatest concern during the takeoff and landing. Ordinarily, these are the only phases of flight in which the airplane would be in close proximity to the ground.\n\nGROUND EFFECT ON SPECIFIC FLIGHT CONDITIONS. The overall influence of ground effect is best realized by assuming that the airplane descends into ground effect while maintaining a constant lift coefficient and,\n\n3&l\n\n## NAVWEPS CKLBOT-BO APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYING\n\nthus, a constant dynamic pressure and equivalent airspeed. As the airplane descends into ground effect, the following. effects will take place:\n\n- (1) Because of the reduced induced angle of attack and change in lift distribution, a smaller wing angle of attack will be required to produce the same lift coefficient. If a constant pitch attitude is maintained as ground effect is encountered, an increase in lift coefficient will be incurred.\n- (2) The reduction in induced flow due to ground effect causes a significant reduction in induced drag but causes no direct effect on parasite drag. As a result of the reduction in induced drag, the thrust required at low speeds will be reduced.\n- (3) The reduction in downwash due to ground effect will produce a change in longitudinal stability and trim. Generally, the reduction in downwash at the horizontal tail increases the contribution to static longitudinal stability. In addition, the reduction of downwash at the tail usually requires a greater up elevator to trim the airplane at a specific lift coefficient. For the conventional airplane configuration, encountering ground effect will produce a nose-down change in pitching moment. Of course, the increase in stability and trim change associated with ground effect provide a critical requirement of adequate longitudinal control power for landing and takeoff.\n- (4) Due to the change in upwash, downwash, and tip vortices, there will be a change in position error of the airspeed system, associated with ground effect. In the majority of cases, ground effect will cause an increase in the local pressure at the static source and produce a lower indication of airspeed and altitude.\n\nDuring the landing pha~c of flight, the effect of proximity to the ground plane must be understood and appreciated. If the airplane is brought into ground effect with a constant angle of attack, the airplane will experience", + "recall": 0.9221311475409836, + "true_md": "percent and, when the wing is at a height equal to one-tenth the span (h/b=O.l), the reduction in induced drag is 47.6 percent. Thus, a large reduction in induced drag will take place only when the wing is very close to the ground. Because of this variation, ground effect is most usually recognized during the liftoff of takeoff or prior to touchdown on landing. \n\nThe reduction of the tip or trailing vortices due to ground effect alters the spanwise lift distribution and reduces the induced angle of attack. In this case, the wing will require a lower angle of attack in ground effect to produce the same lift coefficient. This effect is illustrated by the lift curves of figure 6.9 which show that the airplane in ground effect will develop a greater slope of the lift curve. For the wing in ground effect, a lower angle of attack is necessary to produce the same lift coefficient or, if a constant angle of attack is maintained, an increase in lift coefficient will result. \n\nFigure 6.9 illustrates the manner in which ground effect will alter the curve of thrust re- quired versus velocity. Since induced drag predominates at low speeds, the reduction of induced drag due to ground effect will cause the most significant reduction of thrust re- quired (parasite plus induced drag) only at low speeds. At high speeds where parasite drag predominates, the induced drag is but a small part of the total drag and ground effect causes no significant change in thrust re- quired. Because ground effect involves the induced effects of airplane when in close prox- imity to the ground, its effects are of greatest concern during the takeoff and landing. Ordi- narily, these are the only phases of flight in which the airplane would be in close proximity to the ground. \n\nGROUND EFFECT ON SPECIFIC FLIGHT CONDITIONS. The overall influence of ground effect is best realized by assuming that the airplane descends into ground effect while maintaining a constant lift coefficient and, \n\n3&l \n\n## NAVWEPS CKLBOT-BO APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYING\n\nthus, a constant dynamic pressure and equiva- lent airspeed. As the airplane descends into ground effect, the following. effects will take place: \n\n(1) Because of the reduced induced angle of attack and change in lift distribution, a smaller wing angle of attack will be required to produce the same lift coefficient. If a constant pitch attitude is maintained as ground effect is encountered, an increase in lift coefficient will be incurred. \n\n(2) The reduction in induced flow due to ground effect causes a significant reduction in induced drag but causes no direct effect on parasite drag. As a result of the reduction in induced drag, the thrust required at low speeds will be reduced. \n\n(3) The reduction in downwash due to ground effect will produce a change in longi- tudinal stability and trim. Generally, the reduction in downwash at the horizontal tail increases the contribution to static longi- tudinal stability. In addition, the reduction of downwash at the tail usually requires a greater up elevator to trim the airplane at a specific lift coefficient. For the conven- tional airplane configuration, encountering ground effect will produce a nose-down change in pitching moment. Of course, the increase in stability and trim change associ- ated with ground effect provide a critical re- quirement of adequate longitudinal control power for landing and takeoff. \n\n(4) Due to the change in upwash, down- wash, and tip vortices, there will be a change in position error of the airspeed system, as- sociated with ground effect. In the majority of cases, ground effect will cause an increase in the local pressure at the static source and produce a lower indication of airspeed and altitude. During the landing pha~c of flight, the effect \n\naltitude. During the landing pha~c of flight, the effect of proximity to the ground plane must be understood and appreciated. If the airplane is brought into ground effect with a constant angle of attack, the airplane will experience" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.957467105157578, + "doc_id": "55abda724dbf146758ff9df732cd3a23a3649ea46e9ee835e8812c5980d72795", + "edit_distance": 0.35776614310645727, + "f1_score": 0.9866666666666666, + "meteor": 0.8715927915880284, + "precision": 0.9923371647509579, + "pred_md": "FAA Chart Users Guide - VFR Terms and Symbols\n\nand a number indicating the floor.\n\nIf the ceiling is less than 18,000' MSL, the value (preceded by the word \"ceiling\") is shown along the limits of the controlled airspace. These limits are shown with the same symbol indicated above.\n\n## UNCONTROLLED AIRSPACE\n\nClass G Airspace within the United States extends up to 14,500' Mean Sea Level. At and above this altitude is Class E, excluding the airspace less than 1500' above the terrain and certain special use airspace areas.\n\n## SPECIAL USE AIRSPACE\n\nSpecial Use Airspace (SUA) confines certain flight activities and restricts entry, or cautions other aircraft operating within specific boundaries. Except for Controlled Firing Areas, SUA areas are depicted on VFR Charts. Controlled Firing Areas are not charted because their activities are suspended immediately when spotter aircraft, radar, or ground lookout positions indicate an aircraft might be approaching the area. Nonparticipating aircraft are not required to change their flight paths. SUA areas are shown in their entirety (within the limits of the chart), even when they overlap, adjoin, or when an area is designated within another area. The areas are identified by type and identifying name/number, and are positioned either within or immediately adjacent to the area.\n\n- * Alert Areas do not extend into Class A, B, C and D airspace, or Class E airport surface areas.\n\n## OTHER AIRSPACE AREAS\n\nMode C Required Airspace (from the surface to 10,000' MSL) within a 30 NM radius of the primary airport(s) for which a Class B is designated, is depicted by a solid magenta line.\n\nMode C is required, but not depicted for operations within and above all Class C up to 10,000' MSL.\n\nEnroute Mode C requirements (at and above 10,000' MSL except in airspace at and below 2500' AGL) are not depicted. See FAR 91.215 and the AIM.\n\nFAR 93 Airports and heliports under Federal Aviation Regulation 93 (FAR 93), (Special Air Traffic Rules and Airport Traffic Patterns), are shown by \"boxing\" the airport name.\n\nFAR 91 Airports where fixed wing special visual flight rules operations are prohibited (FAR 91) are shown with the type \"NO SVFR\" above the airport name.\n\nNational Security Areas indicated with a broken magenta line and Special Flight Rules Areas (SFRAs) indicated with the following symbol: , consist of airspace with defined vertical and lateral dimensions estab -lished at locations where there is a requirement for increased security and safety of ground facilities. Pilots should avoid flying through these depicted areas. When necessary, flight may be temporarily prohibited.\n\nThe Washington DC Flight Restricted Zone (FRZ) is related to National Security. It is depicted using the Prohibited/ Restricted/Warning Area symbology and is located within the SFRA. It is defined as the airspace within approximately a 13 to 15 NM radius of the DCA VOR-DME. Additional requirements are levied upon aviators requesting access to operate inside the National Capital Region.\n\n18", + "recall": 0.9810606060606061, + "true_md": "FAA Chart Users Guide - VFR Terms and Symbols\n\n18\n\nIf the ceiling is less than 18,000' MSL, the value (preceded by the word \"ceiling\") is shown along the limits of the controlled airspace. These limits are shown with the same symbol indicated above.\n\nSpecial Use Airspace (SUA) confines certain flight activities and restricts entry, or cautions other aircraft operating within specific boundaries. Except for Controlled Firing Areas, SUA areas are depicted on VFR Charts. Controlled Firing Areas are not charted because their activities are suspended immediately when spotter aircraft, radar, or ground lookout posi- tions indicate an aircraft might be approaching the area. Nonparticipating aircraft are not required to change their flight paths. SUA areas are shown in their entirety (within the limits of the chart), even when they overlap, adjoin, or when an area is designated within another area. The areas are identified by type and identifying name/number, and are positioned either within or immediately adjacent to the area.\n\n* Alert Areas do not extend into Class A, B, C and D airspace, or Class E airport surface areas. \n\nMode C Required Airspace (from the surface to 10,000' MSL) within a 30 NM radius of the primary airport(s) for which a Class B is designated, is depicted by a solid magenta line.\n\nMode C is required, but not depicted for operations within and above all Class C up to 10,000' MSL. \n\nEnroute Mode C requirements (at and above 10,000' MSL except in airspace at and below 2500' AGL) are not depicted. See FAR 91.215 and the AIM.\n\nFAR 91 Airports where fixed wing special visual flight rules operations are prohibited (FAR 91) are shown with the type \"NO SVFR\" above the airport name.\n\nNational Security Areas indicated with a broken magenta line and Special Flight Rules Areas (SFRAs) in- dicated with the following symbol: , consist of airspace with defined vertical and lateral dimensions estab - lished at locations where there is a requirement for increased security and safety of ground facilities. Pilots should avoid flying through these depicted areas. When necessary, flight may be temporarily prohibited.\n\nThe Washington DC Flight Restricted Zone (FRZ) is related to National Security. It is depicted using the Prohibited/ Restricted/Warning Area symbology and is located within the SFRA. It is defined as the airspace within approximately a 13 to 15 NM radius of the DCA VOR-DME. Additional requirements are levied upon aviators requesting access to operate inside the National Capital Region.\n\n## OTHER AIRSPACE AREAS\n\nFAR 93 Airports and heliports under Federal Aviation Regulation 93 (FAR 93), (Special Air Traffic Rules and Airport Traffic Patterns), are shown by \"boxing\" the airport name.\n\n## UNCONTROLLED AIRSPACE\n\n## SPECIAL USE AIRSPACE\n\nClass G Airspace within the United States extends up to 14,500' Mean Sea Level. At and above this altitude is Class E, excluding the airspace less than 1500' above the terrain and certain special use airspace areas.\n\nand a number indicating the floor." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6729864884660303, + "doc_id": "9981656d22eb5fbeb044f7a8892a59c75b8efafc05fad4d037e0e9cc090bd118", + "edit_distance": 0.21428571428571427, + "f1_score": 0.8695652173913044, + "meteor": 0.8989296843246172, + "precision": 0.8333333333333334, + "pred_md": "## MAVWEPS OO-BOLBO APPLICA' IIOM OF AERODYNAMICS 10 SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYI~NG", + "recall": 0.9090909090909091, + "true_md": "MAVWEPS OO-BOLBO APPLICA ’ IIOM OF AERODYNAMICS 10 SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYI~NG" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5362721716524187, + "doc_id": "47078d3fad26ce3d8ab44bdf3517e391f6c7fe2a4021b60c242e8bc871c15de0", + "edit_distance": 0.42857142857142855, + "f1_score": 0.9600000000000002, + "meteor": 0.9280792420327305, + "precision": 0.9230769230769231, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS OO-ROT-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS\n\nFigure 9.35. Typical Airplane Drag Curves\n\nFigure 9.35. Typical Airplane Drag Curves\n\n93", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OO-ROT-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS \n\nFigure 9.35. Typical Airplane Drag Curves \n\n93" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9183601084962719, + "doc_id": "8deb9ec528e87a73cd7b132b5c61054f28a43b3ef27e5fc9a50bcab704497691", + "edit_distance": 0.7177215189873418, + "f1_score": 0.954861111111111, + "meteor": 0.8403419102083995, + "precision": 0.9786476868327402, + "pred_md": "airspeed will allow. If full flap deflection is utilized for takeoff it is important to recall that the last 50 percent of flap deflection creates more than half the total drag increase but less than half the total change in CL,-. Thus, for some configurations of airplanes, a greater reduction in drag may be accomplished by partial retraction of the flaps rather than retraction of the landing gear. Also, it is important that no steep turns be attempted because of the undesirable increase in induced drag.\n\nDuring the landing with an engine inoperative, the same fundamental precautions must be observed as during takeoff, i.e., minimum directional control speed must be maintained (or exceeded), no steep turns should be attempted, and the extension of the flaps and landing gear must be well planned. In the case of' a critical power condition it may be necessary to delay the extension of the landing gear and full flaps until a successful landing is assured. If a waveoff is necessary, maximum performance will be obtained cleaning up the airplane and accelerating to the best climb speed before attempting any gain in altitude.\n\nAt all times during flight with an engine inoperative, the pilot must utilize the proper techniques for control of airspeed and altitude, e.g., for the conditions of steady flight, angle of attack is the primary control of airspeed and excess power is the primary control of rate of climb. For example, if during approach to landing the extension of full flaps and landing gear creates a deficiency of power at all speeds, the airplane will be committed to descend. If the approach is not properly planned and the airplane sinks below the desired glide path, an increase in angle of attack will only allow the airplane to fly more slowly and descend more rapidly. An attempt to hold altitude by increased angle of attack when a power deficiency exists only causes a continued loss of airspeed. Proper procedures and technique are an absolute necessity for safe flight when an engine failure occurs.\n\n379\n\n## NAVWEPS OO-BOT-80 APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYING\n\n## GROUND EFFECT\n\nWhen an airplane in flight nears the ground (or water) surface, a change occurs in the three dimensional flow pattern because the local airflow cannot have a vertical component at the ground plane. Thus, the ground plane will furnish a restriction to the flow and alter the wing upwash, downwash, and tip vortices. These general effects due to the presence of the ground plane are referred to as ' ground effect. ' *\n\nAERODYNAMIC INFLUENCE OF GROUND EFFECT. While the aerodynamic characteristics of the tail and fuselage are altered by ground effects, the principal effects due to proximity of the ground plane are the changes in the aerodynamic characteristics of the wing. As the wing encounters ground effect and is maintained at a constant lift coefficient, there is a reduction in the upwash, downwash, and the tip vortices. These effects are illustrated by the sketches of figure 6.9. As a result of the reduced tip vortices, the wing in the presence of ground effect will behave as if it were of a greater aspect ratio. In other words, the induced velocities due to the tip (or trailing) vortices will be reduced and the wing will incur smaller values of induced drag coefficient, C,<, and induced angle of attack, OL;, or f any specific lift coefhcient, C,.\n\nIn order for ground effect to be of a significant magnitude, the wing must be quite close to the ground plane. Figure 6.9 illustrates one of the direct results of ground effect by the variation of induced drag coefficient with wing height above the ground plane for a representative unswept wing at constant lift coefficient. Notice that the wing must be quite close to the ground for a noticeable reduction in induced drag. When the wing is at a height equal to the span (h/b=l.O), the reduction in induced drag is only 1.4 percent. However, when the wing is at a height equal to one-fourth the span (b/b= 0.25), the reduction in induced drag is 23.5", + "recall": 0.9322033898305084, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OO-BOT-80 APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYING \n\nWhen an airplane in flight nears the ground (or water) surface, a change occurs in the three dimensional flow pattern because the local airflow cannot have a vertical component at the ground plane. Thus, the ground plane will furnish a restriction to the flow and alter the wing upwash, downwash, and tip vortices. These general effects due to the presence of the ground plane are referred to as “ground effect. ‘ * \n\nairspeed will allow. If full flap deflection is utilized for takeoff it is important to recall that the last 50 percent of flap deflection creates more than half the total drag increase but less than half the total change in CL,-. Thus, for some configurations of airplanes, a greater re- duction in drag may be accomplished by partial retraction of the flaps rather than retraction of the landing gear. Also, it is important that no steep turns be attempted because of the unde- sirable increase in induced drag. \n\n## GROUND EFFECT\n\nAERODYNAMIC INFLUENCE OF GROUND EFFECT. While the aerodynamic characteristics of the tail and fuselage are altered by ground effects, the principal effects due to proximity of the ground plane are the changes in the aerodynamic characteristics of the wing. As the wing encounters ground effect and is maintained at a constant lift coefficient, there is a reduction in the upwash, downwash, and the tip vortices. These effects are illustrated by the sketches of figure 6.9. As a result of the reduced tip vortices, the wing in the presence of ground effect will behave as if it were of a greater aspect ratio. In other words, the induced velocities due to the tip (or trailing) vortices will be reduced and the wing will incur smaller values of induced drag coefficient, C,<, and induced angle of attack, OL;, for any specific lift coefhcient, C,. \n\nDuring the landing with an engine inopera- tive, the same fundamental precautions must be observed as during takeoff, i.e., minimum directional control speed must be maintained (or exceeded), no steep turns should be at- tempted, and the extension of the flaps and landing gear must be well planned. In the case of ’ a critical power condition it may be neces- sary to delay the extension of the landing gear and full flaps until a successful landing is as- sured. If a waveoff is necessary, maximum per- formance will be obtained cleaning up the air- plane and accelerating to the best climb speed before attempting any gain in altitude. At all times during flight with an engine \n\nbefore attempting any gain in altitude. At all times during flight with an engine inoperative, the pilot must utilize the proper techniques for control of airspeed and altitude, e.g., for the conditions of steady flight, angle of attack is the primary control of airspeed and excess power is the primary control of rate of climb. For example, if during approach to landing the extension of full flaps and landing gear creates a deficiency of power at all speeds, the airplane will be committed to descend. If the approach is not properly planned and the airplane sinks below the desired glide path, an increase in angle of attack will only allow the airplane to fly more slowly and descend more rapidly. An attempt to hold altitude by increased angle of attack when a power deficiency exists only causes a continued loss of airspeed. Proper procedures and technique are an absolute necessity for safe flight when an engine failure occurs. \n\nIn order for ground effect to be of a signifi- cant magnitude, the wing must be quite close to the ground plane. Figure 6.9 illustrates one of the direct results of ground effect by the variation of induced drag coefficient with wing height above the ground plane for a representative unswept wing at constant lift coefficient. Notice that the wing must be quite close to the ground for a noticeable reduction in induced drag. When the wing is at a height equal to the span (h/b=l.O), the reduction in induced drag is only 1.4 percent. However, when the wing is at a height equal to one-fourth the span (b/b= 0.25), the reduction in induced drag is 23.5 \n\n379" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6192227701143045, + "doc_id": "733f445bae7924094ecf6c914b7bdc347935d240f02d6915682cdbc1ac7f525e", + "edit_distance": 0.5277777777777778, + "f1_score": 0.9056603773584905, + "meteor": 0.9293314662399024, + "precision": 0.8571428571428571, + "pred_md": "FAA Chart Users' Guide - IFR Enroute Symbology\n\n## RADIO AIDS TO NAVIGATION (Continued)\n\n## Stand Alone Flight Services and Communication Outlets\n\n## LOW CHARTS\n\n## HIGH CHARTS\n\n74", + "recall": 0.96, + "true_md": "## RADIO AIDS TO NAVIGATION (Continued)\n\n## Stand Alone Flight Services and Communication Outlets\n\n74\n\nFAA Chart Users’ Guide - IFR Enroute Symbology" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9056149916601196, + "doc_id": "b9d2df315372f4c5921bcb80d75b9f184d86e132efeca57827f28d4af115b81d", + "edit_distance": 0.0651872399445215, + "f1_score": 0.9082969432314412, + "meteor": 0.9504028988358676, + "precision": 0.9541284403669725, + "pred_md": "known for converting fuel energy into propulsive energy. However, the intermittent action of the reciprocating engine places practical limits to the airflow that can be processed and restricts the development of power. The continuous, steady flow feature of the gas turbine allows such a powerplant to process considerably greater airflow and, thus, utilize a greater expenditure of fuel energy. While the propulsive efficiency of the turbojet engine is considerably below that of the reciprocating engine-propeller combination, the specific power output of the turbojet at high speeds is quite superior.\n\nThe operation of the turbojet engine involves a relatively large change in velocity being imparted to the mass flow through the engine. Figure 2.6 illustrates the operation of a typical turbojet engine by considering the processing given a unit weight of inlet airflow. Consider a unit weight of ambient air approaching the inlet to the engine then experiencing the changes in pressure and volume as it is processed by' the turbojet. The chart of pressure versus volume of figure 2.6 shows that the unit weight of airflow at atmospheric condition A is delivered to the inlet entrance at condition B. The purpose of the inlet or diffuser as to reduce the velocity and increase the pressure of the flow entering the compressor section. Thus, the aerodynamic compression produces an increase in pressure and decrease in volume of the unit weight of air and delivers air to the compressor at condition C. The work done by the aerodynamic compression of the inlet ot diffuser is represented by the area ABCX. Generally, most conventional turbojet engines require that the compressor inlet flow be subsonic and supersonic flight will involve considerable aerodynamic compression in the inlet.\n\nAir delivered to the compressor inlet at condition C is then subject to further compression through the compressor section. As a result of the function of the compressor, the unit weight of air is subject to a decrease in volume and increase in pressure to condition D. The\n\n## NAVWEPS 00-801-80 ARPLANE PERFORMANCE\n\ncompressor pressure ratio should be high to produce a high thermal efliciency in the engine The area XCDZ represents the work done by the compressor during the compression of the unit weight of air. Of course, certain losses and inefliciencies are incurred during the compression and the power required to operate the compressor will be greater than that indicated by the work done on the engine airflow.\n\nCompressed air is discharged from the compressor to the combustion chamber at condition D. Fuel is added in the combustion chamber, and the combustion of fuel liberates considerable heat energy. The combustion process in the gas turbine differs from that of the reciprocating engine in that the process is essentially a constant pressure addition of heat energy. As a result, the combustion of fuel causes a large change in temperature and large change of volume of the unit weight of airflow. The process in the combustion chamber is represented by the change from point D to point E of the pressure-volume diagram of figure 2.6.\n\nThe combustion products are delivered to the turbine section where sufficient work must be extracted to power the compressor section. The combustion chamber discharges high temperature, high pressure gas to the turbine where a partial expansion is accomplished with a drop in pressure and increase in volume to point F on the pressure-volume diagram. The work extracted from the unit weight of air by the turbine section is represented by the area ZEFY. As with the compressor, the actual shaft work extracted by the turbine will differ from that indicated by the pressure-volume diagram because of certain losses incurred through the turbine section. For steady, stabilized operation of the turbojet engine the power extracted by the turbine will equal the power required to operate the compressor. If the turbine power exceeds the compressor power required, the engine will accelerate; if the turbine power is less than the compressor power required, the engine will decelerate.\n\n107", + "recall": 0.8666666666666667, + "true_md": "known for converting fuel energy into propul- sive energy. However, the intermittent action of the reciprocating engine places practical limits to the airflow that can be processed and restricts the development of power. The con- tinuous, steady flow feature of the gas turbine allows such a powerplant to process consider- ably greater airflow and, thus, utilize a greater expenditure of fuel energy. While the pro- pulsive efficiency of the turbojet engine is con- siderably below that of the reciprocating en- gine-propeller combination, the specific power output of the turbojet at high speeds is quite superior. \n\nThe operation of the turbojet engine involves a relatively large change in velocity being im- parted to the mass flow through the engine. Figure 2.6 illustrates the operation of a typical turbojet engine by considering the processing given a unit weight of inlet airflow. Consider a unit weight of ambient air approaching the inlet to the engine then experiencing the changes in pressure and volume as it is proc- essed by ’ the turbojet. The chart of pressure versus volume of figure 2.6 shows that the unit weight of airflow at atmospheric condition A is delivered to the inlet entrance at condition B. The purpose of the inlet or diffuser as to reduce the velocity and increase the pressure of the flow entering the compressor section. Thus, the aerodynamic compression produces an increase in pressure and decrease in volume of the unit weight of air and delivers air to the compressor at condition C. The work done by the aerodynamic compression of the inlet ot diffuser is represented by the area ABCX. Generally, most conventional turbojet engines require that the compressor inlet flow be sub- sonic and supersonic flight will involve con- siderable aerodynamic compression in the inlet. \n\nAir delivered to the compressor inlet at con- dition C is then subject to further compression through the compressor section. As a result of the function of the compressor, the unit weight of air is subject to a decrease in volume and increase in pressure to condition D. The \n\ncompressor pressure ratio should be high to produce a high thermal efliciency in the engine The area XCDZ represents the work done by the compressor during the compression of the unit weight of air. Of course, certain losses and inefliciencies are incurred during the com- pression and the power required to operate the compressor will be greater than that indicated by the work done on the engine airflow. \n\nCompressed air is discharged from the com- pressor to the combustion chamber at condition D. Fuel is added in the combustion chamber, and the combustion of fuel liberates consider- able heat energy. The combustion process in the gas turbine differs from that of the recipro- cating engine in that the process is essentially a constant pressure addition of heat energy. As a result, the combustion of fuel causes a large change in temperature and large change of volume of the unit weight of airflow. The process in the combustion chamber is repre- sented by the change from point D to point E of the pressure-volume diagram of figure 2.6. \n\nThe combustion products are delivered to the turbine section where sufficient work must be extracted to power the compressor section. The combustion chamber discharges high tem- perature, high pressure gas to the turbine where a partial expansion is accomplished with a drop in pressure and increase in volume to point F on the pressure-volume diagram. The work extracted from the unit weight of air by the turbine section is represented by the area ZEFY. As with the compressor, the actual shaft work extracted by the turbine will differ from that indicated by the pressure-volume diagram because of certain losses incurred through the turbine section. For steady, sta- bilized operation of the turbojet engine the power extracted by the turbine will equal the power required to operate the compressor. If the turbine power exceeds the compressor power required, the engine will accelerate; if the turbine power is less than the compressor power required, the engine will decelerate. \n\n107 \n\nNAVWEPS 00-801-80 ARPLANE PERFORMANCE" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7875099168387606, + "doc_id": "0a3a4532cdd82eb171a3c3d345f01b66b08a7443dc252d7e8aede7d3493629ef", + "edit_distance": 0.4626038781163435, + "f1_score": 0.8971193415637859, + "meteor": 0.7423451350174709, + "precision": 0.956140350877193, + "pred_md": "flow is determined mainly by the shaft poluet put into the propeller rather than thrust. Thus, the powerplant fuel flow could be related directly to power required to maintain the airplane in steady, level flight. This fact allows study of the range of the propeller powered airplane by analysis of the curves of power required versus velocity.\n\nFigure 2.24 illustrates a typical curve of power required versus velocity which, for the propeller powered airplane, would be analogous to the variation of fuel flow versus velocity. Maximum endurance condition would be obtained at the point of minimum power required since this would require the lowest fuel flow to keep the airplane in steady, level flight. Maximum range condition would occur where the proportion between velocity and power required is greatest and this point is located by a straight line from the origin tangent to the curve.\n\nThe maximum range condition is obtained at maximum lift-drag ratio and it is important to note that (L/D),, for a given airplane configuration occurs at a particular angle of attack and li5t coefficient and is unaffected by weight or altitude (within compressibility limits). Since approximately 50 percent of the total dra.g a' t (L/D)* is induced drag, the propeller powered airplane which is designed specifically i3r IJong range will have a strong preference for rbe thigh aspect rario planform.\n\nThe effect ,df tihe variation of airplane gross weight is illustrated by the second graph of figure 2.24. ' The flight condition of (L/D),., is achieved a' t,one-particular value of lift coefIicient for a given airplane configuration. Hence, a variation of gross weight will alter the values of airspeed, power required, and specific range obtained at (L/D)m.r. If a given configuration ' of airplane is operated at constant altitude and the lift coefficient for WDL the following relationships will awb :\n\n161\n\n## NAVWEPS OS80140 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE\n\n\n\nwhere\n\ncondition (1) applies to some known condition of velocity, power required, and specific range for (L/D),., at some basic weight, WI condition (2) applies to some new values of\n\nvelocity, power required, and specific range for (L/D),., at some different weight, WI\n\nand,\n\nV= velocity, knots\n\nW= gross weight, Jbs.\n\nPr=power required, h.p.\n\nSK= specific range, nmi/lb.\n\nThus a 10 percent increase in gross weight would create:\n\n- a 5 percent increase in velocity\n- a 15 percent increase in power required\n- a 9 percent decrease in specific range\n\nwhen flight is maintained at the optimum conditions of (L/D),.,. The variations of velocity and power required must be monitored by the pilot as part of the cruise control to maintain .(L/D),.+ When the airplane fuel weight is a small part of the gross-weight and the range is small, then cruise control procedure can be simplified to essentially a constant speed and power setting throughout cruise. However, the long range airplane has a fuel weight which is a conside' rable part of the gross weight and cruise control procedure must employ scheduled airspeed and power changes to maintain optimum range conditions.\n\nThe effect of altitude on the range of the propeller powered airplane may be appreciated by inspection of the final graph of figure 2.24. If a given configuration of airplane is operated at constant gross weight and the lift coefficient", + "recall": 0.8449612403100775, + "true_md": "flow is determined mainly by the shaft poluet put into the propeller rather than thrust. Thus, the powerplant fuel flow could be related di- rectly to power required to maintain the air- plane in steady, level flight. This fact allows study of the range of the propeller powered airplane by analysis of the curves of power required versus velocity. Figure 2.24 illustrates a typical curve of \n\nrequired versus velocity. Figure 2.24 illustrates a typical curve of power required versus velocity which, for the propeller powered airplane, would be analo- gous to the variation of fuel flow versus veloc- ity. Maximum endurance condition would be obtained at the point of minimum power re- quired since this would require the lowest fuel flow to keep the airplane in steady, level flight. Maximum range condition would occur where the proportion between velocity and power re- quired is greatest and this point is located by a straight line from the origin tangent to the curve. \n\nThe maximum range condition is obtained at maximum lift-drag ratio and it is important to note that (L/D),, for a given airplane configuration occurs at a particular angle of attack and li5t coefficient and is unaffected by weight or altitude (within compressibility limits). Since approximately 50 percent of the total dra.g a ’ t (L/D)* is induced drag, the propeller powered airplane which is designed specifically i3r IJong range will have a strong preference for rbe thigh aspect rario planform. \n\nThe effect ,df tihe variation of airplane gross weight is illustrated by the second graph of figure 2.24. ‘ The flight condition of (L/D),., is achieved a ’ t,one-particular value of lift coefIi- cient for a given airplane configuration. Hence, a variation of gross weight will alter the values of airspeed, power required, and spe- cific range obtained at (L/D)m.r. If a given configuration ‘ of airplane is operated at con- stant altitude and the lift coefficient for WDL the following relationships will awb : \n\noptimum range conditions. The effect of altitude on the range of the propeller powered airplane may be appreciated by inspection of the final graph of figure 2.24. If a given configuration of airplane is operated at constant gross weight and the lift coefficient \n\nwhen flight is maintained at the optimum con- ditions of (L/D),.,. The variations of veloc- ity and power required must be monitored by the pilot as part of the cruise control to main- tain .(L/D),.+ When the airplane fuel weight is a small part of the gross-weight and the range is small, then cruise control procedure can be simplified to essentially a constant speed and power setting throughout cruise. However, the long range airplane has a fuel weight which is a conside ’ rable part of the gross weight and cruise control procedure must employ sched- uled airspeed and power changes to maintain optimum range conditions. The effect of altitude on the range of the \n\nThus a 10 percent increase in gross weight would create: \n\n- a 5 percent increase in velocity \n\n- a 15 percent increase in power required \n\n- a 9 percent decrease in specific range \n\nand, \n\nwhere \n\n- condition (1) applies to some known condi- tion of velocity, power required, and specific range for (L/D),., at some basic weight, WI condition (2) applies to some new values of \n\n- weight, WI condition (2) applies to some new values of velocity, power required, and specific range for (L/D),., at some different weight, WI \n\nV= velocity, knots W= gross weight, Jbs. \n\nV= velocity, knots W= gross weight, Jbs. \n\nPr=power required, h.p. \n\nSK= specific range, nmi/lb. \n\n161 \n\n$$-4 v*- E VI K pr* w* s ’ * -=H PC WI SRs WI -=- SRI W, $$\n\n## NAVWEPS OS80140 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.3290385879986622, + "doc_id": "b2c566892e1ef53fe8cf00d59226ef8d7fcbf113a2678db3149f98e5f8207b6d", + "edit_distance": 0.5714285714285714, + "f1_score": 0.8275862068965518, + "meteor": 0.8754595588235295, + "precision": 0.7058823529411765, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS OO-ROT-RO AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE\n\n## GENER,AL. RANGE CONDITIONS\n\nFigure 2.24. Range Performance, Propeller Aircraft\n\nFigure 2.24. Range Performance, Propeller Aircraft", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OO-ROT-RO AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE \n\nFigure 2.24. Range Performance, Propeller Aircraft" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9152456592556847, + "doc_id": "3ec93d36a6d273129f96f2736a259314e047e9a26be907cea126cf44e1cca0c1", + "edit_distance": 0.17486338797814208, + "f1_score": 0.9631067961165048, + "meteor": 0.9469732553500432, + "precision": 0.9763779527559056, + "pred_md": "FAA Chart Users' Guide - Terminal Procedures Publication (TPP) - Terms\n\nCopter DPs may also include a visual or VFR segment. Visual segments are depicted using the dashed line symbol below.\n\nVisual Flight Segment\n\nVFR Segments are not depicted with a line, but include the reference bearing and distance information at the endpoint of the VFR Segment, when provided, as shown below.\n\n## STANDARD TERMINAL ARRIVAL (STARs) CHARTS\n\nSTARs are pre-planned Instrument Flight Rule (IFR) air traffic control arrival procedures for pilot use in graphic and/or tex -tual form. STARs depict prescribed routes to transition the aircraft from the enroute structure to a fix in the terminal area from which an instrument approach can be conducted. STARs reduce pilot/controller workload and air-ground communications, minimizing error potential in delivery and receipt of clearances.\n\nSTAR charts generally shall be depicted 'not to scale' due to the great distances involved on many procedures and route segments. A 'to scale' depiction may be used only if readability is assured.\n\nThe STAR will show the arrival routing, including transitions from the appropriate enroute structure. All routes, turns, altitudes, NAVAIDs, facilities forming intersections and fixes, and those facilities/fixes terminating or beginning the arrival route shall be shown in the graphic depiction. A textual description of the arrival procedure is also provided. For RNAV STARs, transition text will consist of the transition name and associated computer code. For non-RNAV STARs, the transition text will also include a description of all turns, altitudes, radials, bearings and facilities/fixes needed to guide the user from the entry point to the common facility/fix.\n\n## CHARTED VISUAL FLIGHT PROCEDURE (CVFP) CHARTS\n\nCVFPs are charted visual approaches established for environmental/noise considerations, and/or when necessary for the safety and efficiency of air traffic operations. The approach charts depict prominent landmarks, courses, and recommend -ed altitudes to specific runways. CVFPs are designed to be used primarily for turbojet aircraft. CVFPs are not instrument approaches and do not have missed approach segments.\n\nCVFPs are named for the primary landmark and the specific runway for which the procedure is developed, such as: RIVER VISUAL RWY 18, STADIUM VISUAL RWY 24. The CVFP charts are divided into planview and notes sections separated by a bar scale in 1 NM increments. The planview of the CVFP includes the portrayal of visual approach procedures information, such as landmarks, NAVAIDs, visual track, hydrography, special use airspace and cultural features, as applicable.\n\nCVFPs originate at or near, and are designed around, prominent visual landmarks and typically do not extend beyond 15 flight path miles from the landing runway. Visual tracks start at a geographical point or landmark where the procedure must be flown visually to the airport. The visual track is indicated by a dashed line. Visual tracks may include the track value, distance and minimum or recommended altitudes.\n\n118", + "recall": 0.9501915708812261, + "true_md": "Copter DPs may also include a visual or VFR segment. Visual segments are depicted using the dashed line symbol be- low. \n\nVFR Segments are not depicted with a line, but include the reference bearing and distance information at the endpoint of the VFR Segment, when provided, as shown below. \n\nSTARs are pre-planned Instrument Flight Rule (IFR) air traffic control arrival procedures for pilot use in graphic and/or tex - tual form. STARs depict prescribed routes to transition the aircraft from the enroute structure to a fix in the terminal area from which an instrument approach can be conducted. STARs reduce pilot/controller workload and air-ground communi- cations, minimizing error potential in delivery and receipt of clearances.\n\nSTAR charts generally shall be depicted ‘not to scale’ due to the great distances involved on many procedures and route segments. A ‘to scale’ depiction may be used only if readability is assured.\n\nThe STAR will show the arrival routing, including transitions from the appropriate enroute structure. All routes, turns, altitudes, NAVAIDs, facilities forming intersections and fixes, and those facilities/fixes terminating or beginning the arrival route shall be shown in the graphic depiction. A textual description of the arrival procedure is also provided. For RNAV STARs, transition text will consist of the transition name and associated computer code. For non-RNAV STARs, the transi- tion text will also include a description of all turns, altitudes, radials, bearings and facilities/fixes needed to guide the user from the entry point to the common facility/fix.\n\nCVFPs are charted visual approaches established for environmental/noise considerations, and/or when necessary for the safety and efficiency of air traffic operations. The approach charts depict prominent landmarks, courses, and recommend - ed altitudes to specific runways. CVFPs are designed to be used primarily for turbojet aircraft. CVFPs are not instrument approaches and do not have missed approach segments.\n\nCVFPs are named for the primary landmark and the specific runway for which the procedure is developed, such as: RIVER VISUAL RWY 18, STADIUM VISUAL RWY 24. The CVFP charts are divided into planview and notes sections separated by a bar scale in 1 NM increments. The planview of the CVFP includes the portrayal of visual approach proce- dures information, such as landmarks, NAVAIDs, visual track, hydrography, special use airspace and cultural features, as applicable.\n\nCVFPs originate at or near, and are designed around, prominent visual landmarks and typically do not extend beyond 15 flight path miles from the landing runway. Visual tracks start at a geographical point or landmark where the procedure must be flown visually to the airport. The visual track is indicated by a dashed line. Visual tracks may include the track value, distance and minimum or recommended altitudes.\n\n118\n\nFAA Chart Users’ Guide - Terminal Procedures Publication (TPP) - Terms\n\n## CHARTED VISUAL FLIGHT PROCEDURE (CVFP) CHARTS\n\n## STANDARD TERMINAL ARRIVAL (STARs) CHARTS\n\nExample of Copter with VFR Segment\n\nVisual Flight Segment" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4172261448611506, + "doc_id": "f115ee589d65baa81644f3f6bd25a56977c792f4ace0f673086158524adbe847", + "edit_distance": 0.5, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.906986531986532, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Figure 5.3. Flight Strength Diagram\n\nFigure 5.3. Flight Strength Diagram", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Figure 5.3. Flight Strength Diagram" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9080863715974958, + "doc_id": "7887b10d63094ae822f7abcdb4cc013140335d7a6464d509b07b443efc4e7cb0", + "edit_distance": 0.8469656992084432, + "f1_score": 0.9422382671480144, + "meteor": 0.6853605467452067, + "precision": 0.9738805970149254, + "pred_md": "excessive angles of attack. Of course, a low speed airplane could be: designed to be spinproof by making it stallproof. By limiting the amount of control deflection, the airplane may not have the longitudinal control power to trim to maximum lift angle of attack. Such a provision may be possible for certain light planes and commercial aircraft but would create an unrealistic and impractical limitation on the utility of a military airplane.\n\nThe modern high speed airplane configuration is typified by low aspect ratio, swept wing planforms with relatively large yaw and pitch inertia. The aerodynamic characteristics of such a configuration are shown in figure 4.32. The lift curve (C, versus U) is quite shallow at high angles of attack and maximum lift is not clearly defined. When this type of airplane is provided a rolling motion at high angles of attack, relatively small changes in C, take place. When this effect is combined with the relatively short span of this type airplane, it is apparent that the wing autorotation contribution will be quite weak and will not be a predominating pro-spin moment. The relatively large changes in drag coefficient with rolling motion imply .a predominance of yaw for the spin of the high speed airplane configuration.\n\nActually, various other factors contribute to the predominating yaw tendency for the spin of the modern airplane configuration. The static directional stability deteriorates at high angles of attack and may be so weak that extemely large yaw displacements result. In certain instances, very high angles of attack may bring such a decay in directional stability that a ' slice' or extreme yaw displacement takes place before a true spin is apparent. At these high angles of attack, the adverse yaw due to roll and aileron deflection can be very strong and create large yaw displacements of the airplane prior to realizing a stall.\n\nThe aircraft with the relatively large, long fuselage can exhibit a significant moment contribution from the fuselage alone. The cross flow pattern on the fuselage at high angles of\n\n## NAWWEPS DO-BOT-BO STABILITY AND CONTROL\n\nattack is capable of producing pro-spin moments of considerable magnitude which contribute to the self-sustaining nature of the spin. Also, the large distributed mass of the fuselage in rolling-yawing rotation contributes to inertia moments which flatten the spin and place the aircraft at extreme angles of attack.\n\nThe spin recovery of the modern high speed airplane involves principles which are similar to those of the spin recovery of the conventional airplane. However, the nature of the spin for the modern configuration may involve specific differences in technique necessary to reduce the sideslip and angle of attack. The use of opposite rudder to control the sideslip and effect recovery will depend on the effectiveness of the rudder when the airplane is in the spin. At high positive angles of attack and high sideslip the rudder effectiveness may be reduced and additional anti-spin moments must be provided for rapid recovery. The deflection of ailerons into the spin reduces the autorotation rolling moment and can produce adverse yaw to aid the rudder yawing moment in effecting recovery.\n\nThere may be many other specific differences in the technique necessary to effect spin recovery . The effectiveness of the rudder during recovery may be altered by the position of elevators or horizontal tail. Generally, full aft stick may be necessary during the initial phase of recovery to increase the effectiveness of the rudder. The use of power during the spin recovery of a propeller powered airplane may or may not aid recovery depending on the specific airplane and the particular nature of the slipstream effects. The use of power during the spin recovery of a jet powered airplane induces no significant or helpful flow but does offer the possibility of a severe compressor stall and adverse gyroscopic moments. Since the airplane is at high angle of attack and sideslip, the flow at the inlet may be very poor and the staI1 limits considerably reduced. These items serve to point out possible differences in technique required for various configurations. The spin recovery specific for\n\n31.1", + "recall": 0.9125874125874126, + "true_md": "NAWWEPS DO-BOT-BO STABILITY AND CONTROL \n\nattack is capable of producing pro-spin mo- ments of considerable magnitude which con- tribute to the self-sustaining nature of the spin. Also, the large distributed mass of the fuselage in rolling-yawing rotation contributes to inertia moments which flatten the spin and place the aircraft at extreme angles of attack. \n\nexcessive angles of attack. Of course, a low speed airplane could be: designed to be spin- proof by making it stallproof. By limiting the amount of control deflection, the airplane may not have the longitudinal control power to trim to maximum lift angle of attack. Such a provision may be possible for certain light planes and commercial aircraft but would create an unrealistic and impractical limita- tion on the utility of a military airplane. \n\nThe spin recovery of the modern high speed airplane involves principles which are similar to those of the spin recovery of the conven- tional airplane. However, the nature of the spin for the modern configuration may involve specific differences in technique necessary to reduce the sideslip and angle of attack. The use of opposite rudder to control the sideslip and effect recovery will depend on the effective- ness of the rudder when the airplane is in the spin. At high positive angles of attack and high sideslip the rudder effectiveness may be reduced and additional anti-spin moments must be provided for rapid recovery. The deflection of ailerons into the spin reduces the autorota- tion rolling moment and can produce adverse yaw to aid the rudder yawing moment in effecting recovery. \n\nThe modern high speed airplane configura- tion is typified by low aspect ratio, swept wing planforms with relatively large yaw and pitch inertia. The aerodynamic characteristics of such a configuration are shown in figure 4.32. The lift curve (C, versus U) is quite shallow at high angles of attack and maximum lift is not clearly defined. When this type of airplane is provided a rolling motion at high angles of attack, relatively small changes in C, take place. When this effect is combined with the relatively short span of this type airplane, it is apparent that the wing autorotation contribu- tion will be quite weak and will not be a pre- dominating pro-spin moment. The relatively large changes in drag coefficient with rolling motion imply .a predominance of yaw for the spin of the high speed airplane configuration. Actually, various other factors contribute \n\nThere may be many other specific differences in the technique necessary to effect spin re- covery . The effectiveness of the rudder during recovery may be altered by the position of elevators or horizontal tail. Generally, full aft stick may be necessary during the initial phase of recovery to increase the effectiveness of the rudder. The use of power during the spin recovery of a propeller powered airplane may or may not aid recovery depending on the specific airplane and the particular nature of the slipstream effects. The use of power during the spin recovery of a jet powered airplane induces no significant or helpful flow but does offer the possibility of a severe compressor stall and adverse gyroscopic moments. Since the airplane is at high angle of attack and sideslip, the flow at the inlet may be very poor and the staI1 limits considerably reduced. These items serve to point out possible dif- ferences in technique required for various con- figurations. The spin recovery specific for \n\nspin of the high speed airplane configuration. Actually, various other factors contribute to the predominating yaw tendency for the spin of the modern airplane configuration. The static directional stability deteriorates at high angles of attack and may be so weak that extemely large yaw displacements result. In certain instances, very high angles of attack may bring such a decay in directional stability that a “slice” or extreme yaw displacement takes place before a true spin is apparent. At these high angles of attack, the adverse yaw due to roll and aileron deflection can be very strong and create large yaw displacements of the airplane prior to realizing a stall. \n\nThe aircraft with the relatively large, long fuselage can exhibit a significant moment con- tribution from the fuselage alone. The cross flow pattern on the fuselage at high angles of \n\n31.1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8972177453785692, + "doc_id": "376bce97697cd8b8df4b5a587ca135b0a722d7b1dc1598304080fa38226d0f52", + "edit_distance": 0.48346055979643765, + "f1_score": 0.9432485322896281, + "meteor": 0.711112593406046, + "precision": 0.9717741935483871, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS DO-ROT-80 APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYING\n\n\n\nwhere\n\nRC=rate of climb, ft: per min. Pn=propulsive power available, h.p. Pr=power required for level flight, h.p. W=gross weight, Ibs.\n\nFrom this relationship it is appreciated that the rate of climb in steady flight is a direct function of the difference between power available and power required. If a given airplane configuration is in lift-equal-to-weight flight at some specific airspeed and altitude, there is a specific power required to maintain these conditions. If the power available from the powerplant is adjusted LO equal the power required, the rate of cl&b is zero (Pa--Pr=O). This is illustrated in figure 6.1 where the power available is ser equal to the power required at velocity (A). If rhe airplane were in steady level flight at velocity (A), an increase in power available would create an excess of power which will cause a rate of climb. Of course, if the speed were allowed to increase by a decreased angle of attack, the increased power setting could simply maintain altitude at some higher airspeed. However, if the original aerodynamic conditions arc maintained, speed is maintained at (A) and an increased power available results in a rate of climb. Also, a decrease in power available at point (A) will produce a deficiency in power and result in a negative rate of climb (or a rate of descent). For this reason, it is apparenr. that pomr setting is the primary control of altitude Jtcady in Bight. There is the direct correlation between the excess power (Pa-P,>, and rhe airplane rate of climb, RC.\n\nFLYING TECHNIQUE, Since the conditions of steady flight predominate during a majority of all flying, the fundamentals of flying technique are the principles of steady flight:\n\n- (1) Angle of attack is the primary control of airspeed.\n- (2) Power setting is the primary control of altitude, i.e., rate of cl&b/descent.\n\nWith the exception of the transient conditions of flight which occur during maneuvers and acrobatics, the conditions of steady flight will be applicable during such steady flight conditions as cruise, climb, descent, takeoff, approach, landing, etc. A clear understanding of these two principles will develop good, safe flying techniques applicable to any sort of airplane.\n\nThe primary control of airspeed during steady flight conditions is the angle of attack. However, changes in airspeed will necessitate changes in power setting to maintain altitude because of the variation of power required with velocity. The primary control of altitude (rate of climb/descent) is the power setting. If an airplane is being flown at a particular airspeed in level flight, an increase or decrease in power setting will result in a rate of climb or descent at this airspeed. While the angle of attack must be maintained to hold airspeed in steady flight, a change in power setting will necessitate a change in nttitude;to.accommodate the new flight path direction. These principles form the basis for ' attitude' flying technique, i.e., ' attitude plus, power equals performance,' and provide .a background for good instrument flying technique as well as good flying technique for all ordinary flying conditions.\n\nOne of the most important phases of flight is the landing approach and it is during this phase of flight that the principles of steady flight are so applicable. If, during the landing approach, it is realized that ithe airplane is below the desired glide path, an increase in nose up attitude will not insure that the airplane will climb to the desired glide path. In fact, an increase in nose-up attitude may produce a greater race of descent and cause the airplane co sink more below the desired glide path. At a given airspeed, only an increase in power setting can cause a rate of climb (or lower rate of descent) and an in-\n\n352", + "recall": 0.9163498098859315, + "true_md": "## NAVWEPS DO-ROT-80 APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYING\n\n$$RC,,= 33,ooo pa;pr ( 1 $$\n\nwhere \n\nRC=rate of climb, ft: per min. Pn=propulsive power available, h.p. Pr=power required for level flight, h.p. W=gross weight, Ibs. \n\n(2) Power setting is the primary control of altitude, i.e., rate of cl&b/descent. \n\nWith the exception of the transient conditions of flight which occur during maneuvers and acrobatics, the conditions of steady flight will be applicable during such steady flight condi- tions as cruise, climb, descent, takeoff, ap- proach, landing, etc. A clear understanding of these two principles will develop good, safe flying techniques applicable to any sort of airplane. The primary control of airspeed during \n\nFrom this relationship it is appreciated that the rate of climb in steady flight is a direct function of the difference between power avail- able and power required. If a given airplane configuration is in lift-equal-to-weight flight at some specific airspeed and altitude, there is a specific power required to maintain these conditions. If the power available from the powerplant is adjusted LO equal the power required, the rate of cl&b is zero (Pa--Pr=O). This is illustrated in figure 6.1 where the power available is ser equal to the power required at velocity (A). If rhe airplane were in steady level flight at velocity (A), an increase in power available would create an excess of power which will cause a rate of climb. Of course, if the speed were allowed to increase by a decreased angle of attack, the increased power setting could simply maintain altitude at some higher airspeed. However, if the original aerodynamic conditions arc maintain- ed, speed is maintained at (A) and an increased power available results in a rate of climb. Also, a decrease in power available at point (A) will produce a deficiency in power and result in a negative rate of climb (or a rate of descent). For this reason, it is apparenr. that pomr setting is the primary control of altitude in Jtcady Bight. There is the direct correlation between the excess power (Pa-P,>, and rhe airplane rate of climb, RC. FLYING TECHNIQUE, Since the condi- \n\nrate of climb, RC. FLYING TECHNIQUE, Since the condi- tions of steady flight predominate during a majority of all flying, the fundamentals of flying technique are the principles of steady flight: \n\n(1) Angle of attack is the primary control of airspeed. \n\nOne of the most important phases of flight is the landing approach and it is during this phase of flight that the principles of steady flight are so applicable. If, during the landing approach, it is realized that ithe airplane is below the desired glide path, an increase in nose up attitude will not insure that the airplane will climb to the desired glide path. In fact, an increase in nose-up attitude may produce a greater race of descent and cause the airplane co sink more below the desired glide path. At a given airspeed, only an increase in power setting can cause a rate of climb (or lower rate of descent) and an in- \n\nairplane. The primary control of airspeed during steady flight conditions is the angle of attack. However, changes in airspeed will necessitate changes in power setting to maintain altitude because of the variation of power required with velocity. The primary control of altitude (rate of climb/descent) is the power setting. If an airplane is being flown at a particular airspeed in level flight, an increase or decrease in power setting will result in a rate of climb or descent at this airspeed. While the angle of attack must be maintained to hold airspeed in steady flight, a change in power setting will necessitate a change in nttitude;to.accommodate the new flight path direction. These princi- ples form the basis for “attitude” flying tech- nique, i.e., “attitude plus, power equals per- formance,” and provide .a background for good instrument flying technique as well as good flying technique for all ordinary flying conditions. \n\n352" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8344669752569224, + "doc_id": "6dee7ed415e45147ad3915635a70f57be79b4bbd4ead5cab4fd66af8198fe767", + "edit_distance": 0.7852760736196319, + "f1_score": 0.9406392694063928, + "meteor": 0.7909266836580264, + "precision": 0.9809523809523809, + "pred_md": "## HELICOPTER ROUTE CHARTS\n\n## GENERAL INFORMATION\n\nHelicopter Route Charts are three-color charts that depict current aeronautical information useful to helicopter pilots navigating in areas with high concentrations of helicopter activity. Information depicted includes helicopter routes, four classes of heliports with associated frequency and lighting capabilities, NAVAIDS, and obstructions. In addition, pictorial symbols, roads, and easily-identified geographical features are portrayed. The scale is 1:125,000. These charts are updated every three years or as needed to accommodate major changes.\n\n## AIRPORTS\n\nLighting codes refer to runway edge lights and may not represent the longest runway or full length lighting. Dashes are not shown on heliports or helipads unless additional information follows the elevation (e.g. UNICOM, CTAF).\n\n49\n\nFAA Chart Users' Guide - VFR Chart Symbology - Helicopter Charts", + "recall": 0.9035087719298246, + "true_md": "## GENERAL INFORMATION\n\n## HELICOPTER ROUTE CHARTS\n\nFAA Chart Users’ Guide - VFR Chart Symbology - Helicopter Charts\n\n49\n\nWhen lighting is lacking, the respective character is replaced by a dash.\n\nLighting codes refer to runway edge lights and may not represent the longest runway or full length lighting. Dashes are not shown on heliports or helipads unless additional information follows the elevation (e.g. UNICOM, CTAF).\n\nHelicopter Route Charts are three-color charts that depict current aeronautical information useful to helicopter pilots navigating in areas with high concentrations of helicopter activity. Information depicted includes helicopter routes, four classes of heliports with associated frequency and lighting capabilities, NAVAIDS, and obstructions. In addition, pictorial symbols, roads, and easily-identified geographical features are portrayed. The scale is 1:125,000. These charts are updated every three years or as needed to accommo- date major changes.\n\n## AIRPORTS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8855148703818204, + "doc_id": "9d96e9dcf1e200e6bddb1ebcfde5df3436e3aa9de69df33a4e5bf6eecdff49c4", + "edit_distance": 0.46558704453441296, + "f1_score": 0.9338677354709419, + "meteor": 0.7449947645304894, + "precision": 0.9789915966386554, + "pred_md": "problem will be most .critical if the airplane is at high altitude, high gross weight, and with gaps and gear extended. Lower altitude, jettisoning of weight items, and cleaning up the airplane will reduce the power required for flight. Of course, the propeller on the inoperative engine must be feathered or the power required may exceed that available from the remaining operating powerplants.\n\nThe effect on range is much dependent on the airplane configuration. When the propeller on the' inoperative engine is feathered, the added drag is at a minimum, but there is added the trim drag ,required to balance the unsymmetrical power. When both these sources of added drag are accounted for, the (L/D),is reduced but not by significant amounts. Generally, if the specific fuel consumption and propeller efficiency do not deteriorate, the maximum specific range is not greatly reduced. On the twin-engine airplane the power required must .be furnished by the one remaining engine and this. usually requires more than the,maximum cruise-rating of the powerplant.i As a result the powerplant cannot be operated in the auto-lean or manual lean, power range and the specific ,fuel consumption increasesgreatly! Thus, noticeable loss of range must be anticipated when one engine fails on the twin-engine airplane. The failure of oneengine on the four (or more) engine airpla,W may allow the required, power to be,develo,ped:by.the three remaining powerplants operating in an economical power range. If the airplane is clean, at low altitude, and low gross weight, ,the failure of one engine is not likely to cause a, loss of range. However, then loss. of ' two engines is likely ' to cause a considerable loss of range.\n\nWhen engine failure produces a critical power or range situation, improved performance is possible with- theairplane in ;the clean configuration at low altitude. Also, jettisoning of expendable weight items will reduce the power required and improve the specific range.\n\n173\n\n## NAVWEPS OO-ROT-RO AtRPLANE PERFORMANCE\n\nTURBOPROP POWERED AIRPLANE. The turbine engine has the preference for relatively high power settings and high altitudes to provide low specific fuel consumption. Thus, the off-optimum conditions of range or endurance can be concerned with altitudes less than the optimum. Altitudes less than the optimum can reduce the range but the loss can be minimized on the multiengine airplane by shutting down some powerplants and operating the remaining powerplants at a higher, more efficient output. In this case the change of range is confined to the variation of specific fuel consumption with altitude.\n\nEssentially the same situation exists in the case of engine failure when cruising at optimum altitude. If the propeller on the inoperative engine is feathered, the loss of range will be confined to the change in specific fuel consumption from the reduced cruise altitude. If a critical power situation exists due to engine failure, a reduction in altitude provides immediate benefit because of the reduction of power required and the increase in power available from the power plants. In addition, the jettisoning of expendable weight items will improve performance and, of course, the clean configuration provides minimum parasite drag.\n\nMaximum specific endurance of the turboprop airplane does not vary as greatly with altitude as the turbojet airplane. While each configuration has its own particular operating requirements, low altitude endurance of the turboprop airplane requires special consideration. The single-engine turboprop will generaBy experience an increase in specific endurance with an increase in altitude from sea level. However, if the airplane is at low altitude and must hold or endure for a period of time, the decision to begin a climb or hold the existing altitude will depend on the quantity of fuel available. The decision depends primarily on the climb fuel,requirements and the variation of specific endurance with altitude. A somewhat similar problem exists with the multiengine", + "recall": 0.89272030651341, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OO-ROT-RO AtRPLANE PERFORMANCE \n\n## TURBOPROP POWERED AIRPLANE. The turbine engine has the preference for\n\nproblem will be most .critical if the airplane is at high altitude, high gross weight, and with gaps and gear extended. Lower altitude, jettisoning of weight items, and cleaning up the airplane will reduce the power required for flight. Of course, the propeller on the in- operative engine must be feathered or the power required may exceed that available from the remaining operating powerplants. \n\nTURBOPROP POWERED AIRPLANE. The turbine engine has the preference for relatively high power settings and high alti- tudes to provide low specific fuel consumption. Thus, the off-optimum conditions of range or endurance can be concerned with altitudes less than the optimum. Altitudes less than the optimum can reduce the range but the loss can be minimized on the multiengine airplane by shutting down some powerplants and operating the remaining powerplants at a higher, more efficient output. In this case the change of range is confined to the variation of specific fuel consumption with altitude. \n\nThe effect on range is much dependent on the airplane configuration. When the pro- peller on the ’ inoperative engine is feathered, the added drag is at a minimum, but there is added the trim drag ,required to balance the unsymmetrical power. When both these sources of added drag are accounted for, the (L/D)- ,is reduced but not by significant amounts. Generally, if the specific fuel con- sumption and propeller efficiency do not deteri- orate, the maximum specific range is not greatly reduced. On the twin-engine airplane the power required must .be furnished by the one remaining engine and this. usually requires more than the,maximum cruise-rating of the powerplant.i As a result the powerplant can- not be operated in the auto-lean or manual lean, power range and the specific ,fuel con- sumption increasesgreatly! Thus, noticeable loss of range must be anticipated when one engine fails on the twin-engine airplane. The failure of oneengine on the four (or more) engine airpla,W may allow the required, power to be,develo,ped:by.the three remaining power- plants operating in an economical power range. If the airplane is clean, at low altitude, and low gross weight, ,the failure of one engine is not likely to cause a, loss of range. However, then loss. of ‘ two engines is likely ‘ to cause a considerable loss of range. \n\nEssentially the same situation exists in the case of engine failure when cruising at optimum altitude. If the propeller on the inoperative engine is feathered, the loss of range will be confined to the change in specific fuel con- sumption from the reduced cruise altitude. If a critical power situation exists due to engine failure, a reduction in altitude provides im- mediate benefit because of the reduction of power required and the increase in power available from the power plants. In addition, the jettisoning of expendable weight items will improve performance and, of course, the clean configuration provides minimum parasite drag. \n\nMaximum specific endurance of the turbo- prop airplane does not vary as greatly with altitude as the turbojet airplane. While each configuration has its own particular operating requirements, low altitude endurance of the turboprop airplane requires special considera- tion. The single-engine turboprop will gen- eraBy experience an increase in specific endur- ance with an increase in altitude from sea level. However, if the airplane is at low altitude and must hold or endure for a period of time, the decision to begin a climb or hold the existing altitude will depend on the quantity of fuel available. The decision depends primarily on the climb fuel,requirements and the variation of specific endurance with altitude. A somewhat similar problem exists with the multiengine \n\nWhen engine failure produces a critical power or range situation, improved perform- ance is possible with- theairplane in ;the clean configuration at low altitude. Also, jetti- soning of expendable weight items will reduce the power required and improve the specific range. \n\n173" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8944275118258644, + "doc_id": "f33b7513f86bd5567457e35797e6f7121edaf9a9af552b1243e0ebc3cff48a75", + "edit_distance": 0.806993006993007, + "f1_score": 0.9298892988929888, + "meteor": 0.7267278531389186, + "precision": 0.9692307692307692, + "pred_md": "depending on the nature of the dihedral effect of the airplane.\n\nIt should be noted that initial inclination of the inertia axis above the aerodynamic axis will cause the inertia couple to provide adverse yaw with rolling motion. If the inertia axis were initially inclined below the aerodynamic axis (as may happen at high 4 or negative load factors), the roll induced inertia couple would provide proverse yaw. Thus, roll coupling may present a problem at both positive and negative inclination of the inertia axis depending on the exact aerodynamic and inertia characteristics of the configuration.\n\nAs a result of the aerodynamic and inertia coupling, rolling motion can induce a great variety of longitudinal, directional, and lateral forces and moments. The actual motion of the airplane is a result of a complex combination of the aerodynamic and inertia coupling. Actually, all airplanes exhibit aerodynamic and inertia coupling but of varying degrees. The roll coupling causes no problem when the moments resulting from the inertia couple are easily counteracted by the aerodynamic restoring moments. The very short span, high speed modern aircraft has the capability for the high roll rates which cause large magnitudes of the inertia couple. The low aspect ratio planform and flight at high Mach number allow large inclination of the inertia axis with respect to the aerodynamic axis and also add to the magnitude of the inertia couple. In addition, the aerodynamic restoring moments deteriorate as a result of high Mach number and angle of attack and can create the most serious roll coupling conditions.\n\nSince the roll coupling induces pitching and yawing motion, the longitudinal and directional stability is important in determining the overall characteristics of the coupled motion. A stable airplane, when disturbed in pitch and yaw, will return to equilibrium after a series of oscillations. For each flight condition, the airplane will have a coupled pitch-yaw ftequency between the uncoupled and separate\n\n317\n\nNAVWEPS 00-8OT-80 CONTROL\n\nSTABILITY AND\n\npitch frequency and yaw frequency. Generally, the greater the static longitudinal and directional stability, the higher will be the coupled pitch-yaw frequency. When the airplane is subject to roiling motion, the inertia couple disturbs the airplane in pitch and yaw with each roll revolution and provides a disturbing forcing function.' If the airplane is rolled at a rate equal to the coupled pitch-yaw frequency, the oscillatory motion will either diverge or stabilize at some maximum amplitude depending on the airplane characteristics.\n\nThe longitudinal stability of the typical high speed configuration is much greater than the directional stability and results in a pitch frequency higher than the yaw frequency. Increasing the directional stability by increasing the vertical tail area, addition of ventral hns, or use of stabilization systems will increase the coupled pitch-yaw frequency and raise the roll rate at which a possible divergent condition could exist. Increasing directional stability by the addition of ventral fins rather than by addition to the vertical tail has an advantage of not contributing to the positive dihedral effect at low or negative angles of attack. High dihedral effect makes higher roll rates more easily attainable in roll motion where proverse yaw occurs.\n\nSince the uncoupled yawing frequency is lower than the pitching frequency, a divergent condition would lirst reach critical proportions in yaw, closely followed by pitch. Of course, whether the airplane motion becomes divergent directionally or longitudinally is of academic interest only.\n\nThere is one additional type of coupling problem that is referred to as ' autorotative rolling.' A rolling airplane which has a high positive dihedral effect may reach a large proverse sideslip as a result of the inertia couple and the rolling moment due to sideslip may exceed that available from lateral control. In such a case it would not be possible to stop the airplane from rolling although lateral control was held full against the roll direction. The", + "recall": 0.8936170212765957, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-8OT-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL \n\ndepending on the nature of the dihedral effect of the airplane. \n\npitch frequency and yaw frequency. Gen- erally, the greater the static longitudinal and directional stability, the higher will be the coupled pitch-yaw frequency. When the air- plane is subject to roiling motion, the inertia couple disturbs the airplane in pitch and yaw with each roll revolution and provides a dis- turbing forcing function.’ If the airplane is rolled at a rate equal to the coupled pitch-yaw frequency, the oscillatory motion will either diverge or stabilize at some maximum ampli- tude depending on the airplane characteristics. \n\nIt should be noted that initial inclination of the inertia axis above the aerodynamic axis will cause the inertia couple to provide adverse yaw with rolling motion. If the inertia axis were initially inclined below the aerodynamic axis (as may happen at high 4 or negative load factors), the roll induced inertia couple would provide proverse yaw. Thus, roll coupling may present a problem at both positive and negative inclination of the inertia axis depend- ing on the exact aerodynamic and inertia characteristics of the configuration. \n\nThe longitudinal stability of the typical high speed configuration is much greater than the directional stability and results in a pitch fre- quency higher than the yaw frequency. In- creasing the directional stability by increasing the vertical tail area, addition of ventral hns, or use of stabilization systems will increase the coupled pitch-yaw frequency and raise the roll rate at which a possible divergent condition could exist. Increasing directional stability by the addition of ventral fins rather than by addition to the vertical tail has an advantage of not contributing to the positive dihedral effect at low or negative angles of attack. High dihedral effect makes higher roll rates more easily attainable in roll motion where proverse yaw occurs. Since the uncoupled yawing frequency is \n\nAs a result of the aerodynamic and inertia coupling, rolling motion can induce a great variety of longitudinal, directional, and lateral forces and moments. The actual motion of the airplane is a result of a complex combina- tion of the aerodynamic and inertia coupling. Actually, all airplanes exhibit aerodynamic and inertia coupling but of varying degrees. The roll coupling causes no problem when the moments resulting from the inertia couple are easily counteracted by the aerodynamic re- storing moments. The very short span, high speed modern aircraft has the capability for the high roll rates which cause large magni- tudes of the inertia couple. The low aspect ratio planform and flight at high Mach number allow large inclination of the inertia axis with respect to the aerodynamic axis and also add to the magnitude of the inertia couple. In addition, the aerodynamic restoring moments deteriorate as a result of high Mach number and angle of attack and can create the most serious roll coupling conditions. \n\nproverse yaw occurs. Since the uncoupled yawing frequency is lower than the pitching frequency, a divergent condition would lirst reach critical proportions in yaw, closely followed by pitch. Of course, whether the airplane motion becomes divergent directionally or longitudinally is of academic interest only. \n\nThere is one additional type of coupling problem that is referred to as “autorotative rolling.” A rolling airplane which has a high positive dihedral effect may reach a large pro- verse sideslip as a result of the inertia couple and the rolling moment due to sideslip may exceed that available from lateral control. In such a case it would not be possible to stop the air- plane from rolling although lateral control was held full against the roll direction. The \n\nSince the roll coupling induces pitching and yawing motion, the longitudinal and direc- tional stability is important in determining the overall characteristics of the coupled motion. A stable airplane, when disturbed in pitch and yaw, will return to equilibrium after a series of oscillations. For each flight condition, the airplane will have a coupled pitch-yaw fte- quency between the uncoupled and separate \n\n317" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8065874729615693, + "doc_id": "b9798b125eae6c235f81eb7b3f011c32d970c81c8c29b58d0088f2486262e51a", + "edit_distance": 0.7906295754026355, + "f1_score": 0.9073724007561437, + "meteor": 0.6583696395120974, + "precision": 0.9411764705882353, + "pred_md": "it is more appropriate to define propeller efficiency in the following manner:\n\n\n\nwhere\n\nvP= propeller\n\nefficiency\n\nT= propeller\n\nthrust\n\nV= flight\n\nvelocity,\n\nknots\n\nBHP= brake horsepower applied to the propeller\n\nMany di,fferent factors govern the efficiency of a propeller. Generally, a large diameter propeller favors a high propeller efficiency from the standpoint of large mass flow. However, a powerful adverse effect on propeller efficiency is produced by high tip speeds and conipressibility effects. Of course, small diameter propellers favor low tip speeds. In addition, the propeller and powerplant must be matched for compatibility of output and efficiency.\n\nIn order to appreciate some of the principal factors controlling the efficiency of a given propeller, figure 2.18 Uustrates the distribution of rotative velocity along the rotating propeller blade. These rotative velocities add to the local inflow velocities to produce a variation of resultant velocity and direction along the blade. The typical distribution of thrust along the propeller blade is shown with the predominating thrust being located on the outer portions of the blade. Note that the propeller producing thrust develops a tip vortex similar to the wing producing lift. Evidence of this vortex can be seen by the condensation phenomenon occurring at this Iocation under certain atmospheric conditions.\n\nThe component velocities at a given propeller blade section are shown by the diagram of figure 2.18. The inflow velocity adds vectorially to the velocity due to rotation to produce an inclination of the resultant wind with respect to the planes of rotation. This inclination is termed + (phi), the effective pitch\n\n## NAVWEPS 00-8OL80 AiRPlANE PERFORMANCE\n\nangle, and is a function of some proportion of the flight velocity, V, and the velocity due to rotation which is mD at the tip. The proportions of these terms describe the propeller ' advance ratio' , J.\n\nwhere J=propeller advance ratio V=flight velocity, ft. per sec. n=propeller rotative speed, revolutions per sec. D = propeller diameter, ft.\n\nThe propeller blade angle, fi (beta), varies throughout the length of the blade but a representative value is measured at 75 percent of the blade length from the hub.\n\nNote that the difference between the effective pitch angle, 4, and the blade angle, 8, determines an effective angle of attack for the propeller blade section. Since the angle of attack is the principal factor affecting the efficiency of an airfoil section, it is reasonable to make the analogy that the advance ratio, J, and blade angle, 8, are the principal factors affecting .propeller efficiency. The performance of a propelleris typified by the chart of figure 2.19 whichillustrates the variation of propeller efficiency, ~a, with advance ratio, J, for various values of blade angle, 8. The value of vP for each fl increases with J until a peak is reached, then decreases. It is apparent that a fixed pitch propeller may be selected to provide suitable performance in a narrow range of advance ratio but efficiency would suffer considerably outside this range.\n\nIn order to provide high propeller efficiency through a wide range of operation, the propeller blade angle must be controllable. The most convenient means of controlling the propeller is the provision of a constant speed governing apparatus. The constant speed governing feature is favorable from the standpoint of engine operation in that engine output and efficiency is positively controlled and governed.\n\n147", + "recall": 0.8759124087591241, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-8OL80 AiRPlANE PERFORMANCE \n\nangle, and is a function of some proportion of the flight velocity, V, and the velocity due to rotation which is mD at the tip. The pro- portions of these terms describe the propeller “advance ratio”, J. \n\nit is more appropriate to define propeller effi- ciency in the following manner: \n\n‘ )~= output propulsive power mput shaft horsepower \n\nwhere \n\n- vP= propeller efficiency \n\n- T= propeller thrust V= flight velocity, knots \n\n- T= propeller thrust V= flight velocity, knots BHP= brake horsepower applied to the \n\n- V= flight velocity, knots BHP= brake horsepower applied to the propeller \n\n- J=propeller advance ratio \n\n- V=flight velocity, ft. per sec. \n\n- n=propeller rotative speed, revolutions per sec. \n\n- D = propeller diameter, ft. \n\nwhere \n\nThe propeller blade angle, fi (beta), varies throughout the length of the blade but a representative value is measured at 75 percent of the blade length from the hub. Note that the difference between the effec- \n\nMany di,fferent factors govern the efficiency of a propeller. Generally, a large diameter pro- peller favors a high propeller efficiency from the standpoint of large mass flow. However, a powerful adverse effect on propeller efficiency is produced by high tip speeds and conipressi- bility effects. Of course, small diameter pro- pellers favor low tip speeds. In addition, the propeller and powerplant must be matched for compatibility of output and efficiency. \n\nof the blade length from the hub. Note that the difference between the effec- tive pitch angle, 4, and the blade angle, 8, determines an effective angle of attack for the propeller blade section. Since the angle of attack is the principal factor affecting the efficiency of an airfoil section, it is reasonable to make the analogy that the advance ratio, J, and blade angle, 8, are the principal factors affecting .propeller efficiency. The perform- ance of a propelleris typified by the chart of figure 2.19 which- illustrates the variation of propeller efficiency, ~a, with advance ratio, J, for various values of blade angle, 8. The value of vP for each fl increases with J until a peak is reached, then decreases. It is apparent that a fixed pitch propeller may be selected to provide suitable performance in a narrow range of advance ratio but efficiency would suffer considerably outside this range. \n\nIn order to appreciate some of the principal factors controlling the efficiency of a given propeller, figure 2.18 Uustrates the distribu- tion of rotative velocity along the rotating propeller blade. These rotative velocities add to the local inflow velocities to produce a variation of resultant velocity and direction along the blade. The typical distribution of thrust along the propeller blade is shown with the predominating thrust being located on the outer portions of the blade. Note that the propeller producing thrust develops a tip vortex similar to the wing producing lift. Evidence of this vortex can be seen by the con- densation phenomenon occurring at this Ioca- tion under certain atmospheric conditions. \n\nIn order to provide high propeller efficiency through a wide range of operation, the pro- peller blade angle must be controllable. The most convenient means of controlling the propeller is the provision of a constant speed governing apparatus. The constant speed gov- erning feature is favorable from the standpoint of engine operation in that engine output and efficiency is positively controlled and governed. \n\nThe component velocities at a given propeller blade section are shown by the diagram of figure 2.18. The inflow velocity adds vec- torially to the velocity due to rotation to pro- duce an inclination of the resultant wind with respect to the planes of rotation. This incli- nation is termed + (phi), the effective pitch \n\n147" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.17377394345044514, + "doc_id": "5e1a3824662089c398e6200a4771cc0d9d1bb1009257b097efce9555af2ba7ba", + "edit_distance": 0.6363636363636364, + "f1_score": 0.5333333333333333, + "meteor": 0.3853155339805825, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "NAWEPS DD-BDT-BD BASIC AERODYNAMICS", + "recall": 0.36363636363636365, + "true_md": "NAWEPS DD-BDT-BD BASIC AERODYNAMICS \n\nFtaure 1.2. Airflow Within a Tube" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.510154433288328, + "doc_id": "08da2ff5320f62bc257735729c78b3952a7672755d51187c70a42688c12d7276", + "edit_distance": 0.4444444444444444, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9325886330409356, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "NAWWEPS 00-8OT-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS\n\nFigure 1.26. Airflow Separation (sheet 7 of 2)\n\nFigure 1.26. Airflow Separation (sheet 7 of 2)\n\n57", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAWWEPS 00-8OT-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS \n\n57 \n\nFigure 1.26. Airflow Separation (sheet 7 of 2)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.592432681151506, + "doc_id": "6266b48a805dc580c410b738fb4beb554b2c3fee12bde51b156ce35f4167b7ea", + "edit_distance": 0.41379310344827586, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9333054488763831, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS 00-SOT-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS\n\nFigure 7.8. Generation of Lift (sheet 2 of 2)\n\nFigure 7.8. Generation of Lift (sheet 2 of 2)\n\n18", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-SOT-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS \n\nFigure 7.8. Generation of Lift (sheet 2 of 2) \n\n18" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.18403486067741753, + "doc_id": "b753cfe755ebc8234738efa4a85489252cf2982e14ec2dbb102eda1988e91d45", + "edit_distance": 0.7731958762886598, + "f1_score": 0.6744186046511628, + "meteor": 0.4094757013719737, + "precision": 0.9830508474576272, + "pred_md": "## AIRSPACE INFORMATION\n\n## Class B Airspace\n\n## Special Airspace Areas\n\n## Special Flight Rules Area (SFRA) Relating to National Security\n\nExample: Washington DC\n\nAppropriate notes as required may be shown.\n\nNote: Delimiting line not shown when it coincides with International Boundary, projection lines or other linear features.\n\n51\n\n## Class C Airspace\n\nFAA Chart Users' Guide - VFR Chart Symbology - Helicopter Charts", + "recall": 0.5132743362831859, + "true_md": "51\n\nFAA Chart Users’ Guide - VFR Chart Symbology - Helicopter Charts\n\n## Special Airspace Areas\n\n## Special Flight Rules Area (SFRA) Relating to National Security\n\n## Class D Airspace\n\n## AIRSPACE INFORMATION\n\n## Class B Airspace\n\n## Class C Airspace\n\nAppropriate notes as required may be shown. (Mode C see FAR 91.215/AIM)\n\nAppropriate notes as required may be shown. (Mode C see FAR 91.215/AIM)\n\nAll mileages are nautical (NM)\n\n(Floors extending “upward from above” a certain altitude are preceded by a +. Operations at and below these altitudes are outside of Class B Airspace.)\n\nAll radials are magnetic.\n\n(A minus in front of the figure is used to indicate “from surface to but not includ- ing...”)\n\nAltitudes in hundreds of feet MSL.\n\nExample: Washington DC\n\nAppropriate notes as required may be shown.\n\nNote: Delimiting line not shown when it coincides with International Boundary, projection lines or other linear features.\n\n## Class E Surface (SFC) Airspace" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8741866958762307, + "doc_id": "17c22488d4f6e12083ac75219fadbff078b01aea52c8c9b41ea6f480c14fd5a7", + "edit_distance": 0.44397163120567373, + "f1_score": 0.9377289377289377, + "meteor": 0.8434467647518048, + "precision": 0.9660377358490566, + "pred_md": "at very high velocity and high kinetic energy. A pressure rise is produced by subsequent expansion in the diffuser manifold by converting the kinetic energy into static pressure energy. The manifold then distributes the high pressure discharge to the combustion chambers. A double entry impeller allows a given diameter compressor to process a greater airflow. The major components of the centrifugal compressor are illustrated in figure 2.7.\n\nThe centrifugal compressor can provide a relatively high pressure ratio per stage but the provision of more than one or two stages is rarely feasible for aircraft turbine engines. The single stage centrifugal compressor is capable of producing pressure ratios of about three or four with reasonable efficiency. &essure ratios greater than four require such high impeller tip speed that compressor efficiency decreases very rapidly. Since high pressure ratios are necessary to achieve low fuel consumption, the centrifugal compressor finds greatest application to the smaller engines where simplicity and flexibility of operation are the principal requirements rather than high efficiency.\n\nThe axial flow compressor consists of altetnate rows of rotating and stationary airfoils. The major components of the axial flow compressor ate illustrated in figure 2.7. A pressure rise occurs through the row of rotating blades since the airfoils cause a decrease in velocity relative to the blades. Additional pressure rise takes place through the row of stationary blades since these airfoils cause a decrease in the absolute velocity of flow. The decrease I in velocity, relative or absolute, eEeLts a com1 ptession of the flow and causes the increase in static pressure. While the pressure rise pet stage of the axial compressor is relatively Jo%-, the efficiency is very high and high pressure ratios can be obtained efficiently by successive axial stages. Of course, the eficient pressure rise in each stage is limited by excessive gas velocities. The multistage axial flow compressor is capable of providing pressure ratios\n\n111\n\nNAWEPS 00-8OT-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE\n\nfrom five to ten (or greater) with efficiencies which cannot be approached with a multistage centrifugal compressor.\n\nThe axial flow compressor can provide efficiently the high. pressure ratios necessary for low fuel consumption. Also, the axial compressor is capable of providing high airflow with a minimum of compressor diameter. When compared with the centrifugal compressor, the design and construction of the axial compressor is relatively complex and costly and the high efficiency is sustained over a much narrower range of operating conditions. For these reasons, the axial compressor finds greatest application where rhe demands of efficiency and output predominate over considerations. of cost, simplicity, flexibility of operation, etc. Multispool compressors and variable statot blades serve to improve the operating characteristics of the axial compressor and increase the flexibility of operation.\n\nThe combustion chamber must convert the fuel chemical energy into heat energy and cause a large increase in the total energy of the engine airflow. The combustion chamber will opetate with one principal limitation: the discharge from the combustion chamber must be at temperatures which can be tolerated by the turbine section. The combustion of liquid hydrocarbon fuels can produce gas temperatures which are in excess of 1,700 to 1,800° C. However, the maximum continuous turbine blade operating temperatures rarely exceed NO0 to J,OOO' C and considerable excess air must be used in the combustion chamber to prevent exceeding these temperature limits.\n\nWhile the combustion chamber design may .take various forms and configurations, the main features of a typical combustion chamber ate illustrated by figure 2.8. The combustion chamber receives the high pressure discharge from the compressor and introduces apptoximately one half of this air into the immediate area of the fuel spray. This primary combustion air must be introduced with relatively high turbulence and quite low velocities to\n\nRevised Januwy 1965", + "recall": 0.9110320284697508, + "true_md": "NAWEPS 00-8OT-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE \n\nat very high velocity and high kinetic energy. A pressure rise is produced by subsequent ex- pansion in the diffuser manifold by converting the kinetic energy into static pressure energy. The manifold then distributes the high pres- sure discharge to the combustion chambers. A double entry impeller allows a given diam- eter compressor to process a greater airflow. The major components of the centrifugal com- pressor are illustrated in figure 2.7. \n\nThe centrifugal compressor can provide a relatively high pressure ratio per stage but the provision of more than one or two stages is rarely feasible for aircraft turbine engines. The single stage centrifugal compressor is capable of producing pressure ratios of about three or four with reasonable efficiency. &es- sure ratios greater than four require such high impeller tip speed that compressor efficiency decreases very rapidly. Since high pressure ratios are necessary to achieve low fuel con- sumption, the centrifugal compressor finds greatest application to the smaller engines where simplicity and flexibility of operation are the principal requirements rather than high efficiency. \n\nThe axial flow compressor consists of altet- nate rows of rotating and stationary airfoils. The major components of the axial flow com- pressor ate illustrated in figure 2.7. A pressure rise occurs through the row of rotating blades since the airfoils cause a decrease in velocity relative to the blades. Additional pressure rise takes place through the row of stationary blades since these airfoils cause a decrease in the absolute velocity of flow. The decrease in velocity, relative or absolute, eEeLts a com- 1 ptession of the flow and causes the increase in static pressure. While the pressure rise pet stage of the axial compressor is relatively Jo%-, the efficiency is very high and high pressure ratios can be obtained efficiently by successive axial stages. Of course, the eficient pressure rise in each stage is limited by excessive gas velocities. The multistage axial flow com- pressor is capable of providing pressure ratios \n\nWhile the combustion chamber design may .take various forms and configurations, the main features of a typical combustion chamber ate illustrated by figure 2.8. The combustion chamber receives the high pressure discharge from the compressor and introduces apptoxi- mately one half of this air into the immediate area of the fuel spray. This primary combus- tion air must be introduced with relatively high turbulence and quite low velocities to \n\nThe combustion chamber must convert the fuel chemical energy into heat energy and cause a large increase in the total energy of the engine airflow. The combustion chamber will opet- ate with one principal limitation: the dis- charge from the combustion chamber must be at temperatures which can be tolerated by the turbine section. The combustion of liquid hydrocarbon fuels can produce gas temperatures which are in excess of 1,700 to 1,800° C. However, the maximum continuous turbine blade operating temperatures rarely exceed NO0 to J,OOO” C and considerable excess air must be used in the combustion chamber to prevent exceeding these temperature limits. \n\nstage centrifugal compressor. The axial flow compressor can provide efficiently the high. pressure ratios necessary for low fuel consumption. Also, the axial compressor is capable of providing high air- flow with a minimum of compressor diameter. When compared with the centrifugal com- pressor, the design and construction of the axial compressor is relatively complex and costly and the high efficiency is sustained over a much narrower range of operating conditions. For these reasons, the axial compressor finds greatest application where rhe demands of efficiency and output predominate over con- siderations. of cost, simplicity, flexibility of operation, etc. Multispool compressors and variable statot blades serve to improve the operating characteristics of the axial com- pressor and increase the flexibility of operation. \n\nfrom five to ten (or greater) with efficiencies which cannot be approached with a multi- stage centrifugal compressor. The axial flow compressor can provide \n\n111 \n\nRevised Januwy 1965" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.848087158774838, + "doc_id": "3f0d5ddbb51aa8e57501ab05c2ad89458d927216d00ff09cbc18e803dc0259f3", + "edit_distance": 0.5968790637191157, + "f1_score": 0.9256198347107438, + "meteor": 0.7885752573860716, + "precision": 0.9556313993174061, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS 00-EOT-80 OPERATING STRENGTH LIMITATIONS\n\nemphasize the necessity of proper maintenance of the struts. An additional fact illustrated is that the landing load factor varies as the square of the touchdown rate of descent. Therefore, a 20 percent higher rate of descent increases the landing load factor 44 percent. This fact should emphasize the need for proper landing technique to prevent a hard landing and overstress of the landing gear components and associated structure.\n\nThe effect of landing gross weight is twofold. A higher gross weight at some landing load factor produces a higher force in the landing gear. The highe: gross weight requires a higher approach speed and, if the same glide path is used, a higher rate of descent results. In addition to the principal vertical loads on the landing gear, there are varied side loads, wheel spin up and spring back loads, etc., all of which tend to be more critical at high gross weight, high touchdown ground speed, and high rate of descent.\n\nThe function of the landing gear as a shock absorbing device has an important application when a forced landing must be accomplished on an unprepared surface. If the terrain is rough and the landing gear is not extended, initial contact will be made with relatively solid structure and whatever energy is absorbed will be accompanied by high vertical accelerations. These high vertical accelerations encountered with a gear-up landing on an unprepared surface are the source of a very incapacitating type injury-vertical compression fracture of the vertebrae. Unless some peculiarity of the configuration makes it inadvisable, it is generally recommended that the landing gear be down for forced landing on an unprepared surface. (NOTE: for those prone to forget, it is also recommended that the gear be down for landing on prepared surfaces.)\n\n## EFFECT OF OVERSTRESS ON SERVICE LIFE\n\nAccumulated periods of overstress can create a very detrimental effect on the useful service\n\n344\n\nlife of any structural component. This fact is certain and irreversible. Thus, the operation of the airplane, powerplant, and various systems must be limited to design values to prevent failure or excessive maintenance costs early in the anticipated service life. The operating limitations presented in the handbook must be adhered to in a very strict fashion.\n\nIn many cases of modern aircraft structures it is very difficult to appreciate the effect of a moderate overstress. This feature is due in great part to the inherent strength of the materials used in modern aircraft construction. As a general airframe static strength requirement, the primary structure must not experience objectionable permanent deformation at limit load or ~failure at 150 percent of limit load (ultimate load is 1.5 times limit load). To satisfy each part of the requirement, limit load must not exceed the yield stress and ultimate load must not exceed the ultimate stress capability of the parts.\n\nMany of the high strength materials used in aircraft construction have stress-strain diagrams typical of figure 5.6. One feature of these materials is that the yield point is at some stress much greater than two-thirds of the ultimate stress. Thus, the critical design condition is the ultimate load. If 150 percent of limit load corresponds to ultimate stress of the material, 100 percent of limit load corresponds to a stress much lower than the yield stress. Because of the inherent properties of the high strength material and the ultimate factor of safety of 1.5, the limit load condition is rarely the critical design point and usually possesses a large positive margin of static strength. This fact alone implies that the structure must be grossly overstressed to produce damage easily vidble to the naked eye. This lack of i mmediate visible damage with ' overstress' makes it quite diflicult to recognize or appreciate the long range effect.\n\nA reference point provided on the stress strain diagram of figure 5.6 is a stress termed", + "recall": 0.8974358974358975, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-EOT-80 OPERATING STRENGTH LIMITATIONS \n\nlife of any structural component. This fact is certain and irreversible. Thus, the opera- tion of the airplane, powerplant, and various systems must be limited to design values to prevent failure or excessive maintenance costs early in the anticipated service life. The operating limitations presented in the hand- book must be adhered to in a very strict fashion. In many cases of modern aircraft structures \n\nemphasize the necessity of proper maintenance of the struts. An additional fact illustrated is that the landing load factor varies as the square of the touchdown rate of descent. Therefore, a 20 percent higher rate of descent increases the landing load factor 44 percent. This fact should emphasize the need for proper landing technique to prevent a hard landing and over- stress of the landing gear components and associated structure. The effect of landing gross weight is two- \n\nfashion. In many cases of modern aircraft structures it is very difficult to appreciate the effect of a moderate overstress. This feature is due in great part to the inherent strength of the materials used in modern aircraft construction. As a general airframe static strength require- ment, the primary structure must not expe- rience objectionable permanent deformation at limit load or ~failure at 150 percent of limit load (ultimate load is 1.5 times limit load). To satisfy each part of the requirement, limit load must not exceed the yield stress and ulti- mate load must not exceed the ultimate stress capability of the parts. Many of the high strength materials used in \n\nassociated structure. The effect of landing gross weight is two- fold. A higher gross weight at some landing load factor produces a higher force in the landing gear. The highe: gross weight re- quires a higher approach speed and, if the same glide path is used, a higher rate of descent results. In addition to the principal vertical loads on the landing gear, there are varied side loads, wheel spin up and spring back loads, etc., all of which tend to be more critical at high gross weight, high touchdown ground speed, and high rate of descent. The function of the landing gear as a shock \n\nspeed, and high rate of descent. The function of the landing gear as a shock absorbing device has an important application when a forced landing must be accomplished on an unprepared surface. If the terrain is rough and the landing gear is not extended, initial contact will be made with relatively solid structure and whatever energy is ab- sorbed will be accompanied by high vertical accelerations. These high vertical accelera- tions encountered with a gear-up landing on an unprepared surface are the source of a very incapacitating type injury-vertical compres- sion fracture of the vertebrae. Unless some peculiarity of the configuration makes it inadvisable, it is generally recommended that the landing gear be down for forced landing on an unprepared surface. (NOTE: for those prone to forget, it is also recommended that the gear be down for landing on prepared surfaces.) \n\ncapability of the parts. Many of the high strength materials used in aircraft construction have stress-strain dia- grams typical of figure 5.6. One feature of these materials is that the yield point is at some stress much greater than two-thirds of the ultimate stress. Thus, the critical design condition is the ultimate load. If 150 percent of limit load corresponds to ultimate stress of the material, 100 percent of limit load corre- sponds to a stress much lower than the yield stress. Because of the inherent properties of the high strength material and the ultimate factor of safety of 1.5, the limit load condition is rarely the critical design point and usually possesses a large positive margin of static strength. This fact alone implies that the structure must be grossly overstressed to pro- duce damage easily vidble to the naked eye. This lack of immediate visible damage with “overstress” makes it quite diflicult to recog- nize or appreciate the long range effect. \n\nA reference point provided on the stress strain diagram of figure 5.6 is a stress termed \n\nAccumulated periods of overstress can create a very detrimental effect on the useful service \n\n## EFFECT OF OVERSTRESS ON SERVICE LIFE\n\n344" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7819329930535281, + "doc_id": "e723e8ae75a5e62299d6e8eeabd0061ada3919d07dc63db5294baa87a34f62f9", + "edit_distance": 0.5903225806451613, + "f1_score": 0.9262086513994909, + "meteor": 0.6333238432953975, + "precision": 0.9578947368421052, + "pred_md": "impression of the ' barn door' size. Hence, parasite drag can be appreciated as the result of the dynamic pressure, 4, acting on the equivalent parasite area, j. The ' equivalent' parasite area is defmed by this relationship as a hypothetical surface with a C,=l.O which produces the same parasite drag as the airplane. An analogy would be a barn door in the airstream which is equivalent to the airplane. Typical values for the equivalent parasite area range from 4 sq. ft. for a clean fighter type airplane to 40 sq. ft. for a large transport type airplane. Of course, when any airplane is changed from the clean configuration to the landing configuration, the equivalent parasite area increases.\n\nEFFECT OF CONFIGURATION. The parasite drag, D,, is unaffected by lift, but is variable with dynamic pressure and equivalent parasite area. This principle furnishes the basis for illustrating the variation of parasite drag with the various conditions of flight. If all other factors are held constant, the parasite drag varies directly with the equivalent parasite area.\n\n\n\nwhere\n\nD,,= parasite drag corresponding to some original parasite area, fi\n\nD,,==parasite drag corresponding to some new parasite area, fi\n\n## (V and (r are constant)\n\nAs an example, the lowering of the landing gear and flaps may increase the parasite area 80 percent. At any given speed and altitude this airplane would experience an 80 percent increase in parasite drag.\n\nEFFECT OF ALTITUDE. In a similar manner the effect of altitude on parasite drag may\n\n91\n\nNAVWEK OD-BOT-BO BASIC AERODYNAMICS\n\nbe appreciated. The general effect of altitude is expressed by:\n\nwhere\n\nD,, = parasite drag corresponding to some original altitude density ratio, 0,\n\nD,,=parasite drag corresponding to some new altitude density ratio, (ra\n\n## (and f, V are constant)\n\nThis relationship implies that parasite drag would decrease at altitude, e.g., a given airplane in flight at a given T.4.Y at 40,COO ft. (e=O.29 would have one-fourth the parasite drag when at sea level (u=l.OO). This effect results when the lower air density produces less dynamic pressure. However, if the airplane is flown at a constant EAS, the dynamic pressure and, thus, parasite drag do not vary. In this case, the TASwould be higher at altitude to provide the same EAS.\n\nEFFECT OF SPEED. The effect of speed alone on parasite drag is the most important. If all other factors are held constant, the effect of velocity on parasite drag is expressed as:\n\n\n\nwhere\n\nD,,=parasite drag corresponding to some original speed, Vi\n\nD,,=parasite drag corresponding to some new speed, VS\n\n\n\nThis relationship expresses a powerful effect of speed on parasite drag. As an example, a given airplane in flight at some altitude would have four times as much parasite drag at twice", + "recall": 0.896551724137931, + "true_md": "NAVWEK OD-BOT-BO BASIC AERODYNAMICS \n\nbe appreciated. The general effect of altitude is expressed by: \n\nimpression of the “barn door” size. Hence, parasite drag can be appreciated as the result of the dynamic pressure, 4, acting on the equivalent parasite area, j. The “equivalent” parasite area is defmed by this relationship as a hypothetical surface with a C,=l.O which produces the same parasite drag as the air- plane. An analogy would be a barn door in the airstream which is equivalent to the air- plane. Typical values for the equivalent para- site area range from 4 sq. ft. for a clean fighter type airplane to 40 sq. ft. for a large transport type airplane. Of course, when any airplane is changed from the clean configuration to the landing configuration, the equivalent parasite area increases. \n\nEFFECT OF CONFIGURATION. The par- asite drag, D,, is unaffected by lift, but is variable with dynamic pressure and equivalent parasite area. This principle furnishes the basis for illustrating the variation of parasite drag with the various conditions of flight. If all other factors are held constant, the para- site drag varies directly with the equivalent parasite area. \n\nThis relationship implies that parasite drag would decrease at altitude, e.g., a given air- plane in flight at a given T.4.Y at 40,COO ft. (e=O.29 would have one-fourth the parasite drag when at sea level (u=l.OO). This effect results when the lower air density produces less dynamic pressure. However, if the air- plane is flown at a constant EAS, the dynamic pressure and, thus, parasite drag do not vary. In this case, the TASwould be higher at altitude to provide the same EAS. EFFECT OF SPEED. The effect of speed \n\nwhere \n\n- D,, = parasite drag corresponding to some orig- inal altitude density ratio, 0, \n\n- D,,=parasite drag corresponding to some new altitude density ratio, (ra \n\n(and f, V are constant) \n\nto provide the same EAS. EFFECT OF SPEED. The effect of speed alone on parasite drag is the most important. If all other factors are held constant, the effect of velocity on parasite drag is expressed as: \n\nwhere \n\n- D,,= parasite drag corresponding to some orig- inal parasite area, fi \n\n- D,,==parasite drag corresponding to some new parasite area, fi \n\n- D,,=parasite drag corresponding to some orig- inal speed, Vi \n\n- D,,=parasite drag corresponding to some new speed, VS \n\n$$&, V, * -=- (3 D,, V $$\n\n$$D,,= b C) D,, I $$\n\n## (j and o are constant)\n\n## (V and (r are constant)\n\nwhere \n\nThis relationship expresses a powerful effect of speed on parasite drag. As an example, a given airplane in flight at some altitude would have four times as much parasite drag at twice \n\nAs an example, the lowering of the landing gear and flaps may increase the parasite area 80 percent. At any given speed and altitude this airplane would experience an 80 percent increase in parasite drag. EFFECT OF ALTITUDE. In a similar man- \n\nincrease in parasite drag. EFFECT OF ALTITUDE. In a similar man- ner the effect of altitude on parasite drag may \n\n91" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7754185330249599, + "doc_id": "7e0b5ee75bb64c77b06c1220fdc1a5b085c3ff091d6fb64bb88c586badedf294", + "edit_distance": 0.800747198007472, + "f1_score": 0.9230769230769229, + "meteor": 0.6443553316295523, + "precision": 0.9647058823529412, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS oOgOT-8O BASIC AERODYNAMICS\n\n- (2) The chord is the characteristic dimension of the airfoil.\n- (3) The mean-camber line is a line drawn halfway between the upper and lower surfaces. Actually, the chord line connects the ends of the mean-camber line.\n- (4) The shape of the mean-camber line is very important in determining the aerodynamic characteristics of an airfoil section. The maximum camber (displacement of the mean line from the chord line) and the Iocation of the maximum camber help to define the shape of the mean-camber line. These quantities are expressed as fractions or percent of the basic chord dimension. A typical iow speed airfoil may have a maximum camber of 4 percent located 40 percent aft of the leading edge.\n- (5) The thickness and thickness distribution of the profile are important properties of a section. The maximum tbicknus and location of maximum thickness define thickness and distribution of thickness and are expressed as fractions or percent of the chord. A typical low speed airfoil may have a. maximum thickness of 12 percent located 30 percent aft of the leading edge.\n- (6) The leading edge radius of the airfoil is the radius of curvature given the leading edge shape. It is the radius of the circle centered on a line tangent to the leading edge camber and connecting tangency pcints of upper and lower surfaces with the leading edge. Typical leading edge radii are zero (knife edge) to 1 or 2 percent.\n- (7) The Iift produced by an airfoil is the net force produced perpendicular to the n&ative wind.\n- (8) The drag incurred by an airfoil is the net force produced parallel to the relative wind.\n- (9) The angle of attack is the angle between the chord line and the relative wind. Angle of attack is given the shorthand notation a (alpha). Of course, it is important to difi ferentiate between pitch attitude angle and\n\n22\n\nangle of attack. Regardless of the condition of flight, the instantaneous flight path of the surface determines the direction of the oncoming relative wind and the angle of attack is the angle between the instantaneous relative wind and the chord line. To respect the definition of angle of attack, visualize the flight path of the aircraft during a loop and appreciate that the relative wind is defined by the flight path at any point during the maneuver.\n\nNotice that the description of an airfoil profile is by dimensions which are fractions or percent of the basic chord dimension. Thus, when an airfoil. profile is specified a relative shape is described. (NOTB: A numerical system of designating airfoil profiles originated by the National ~Advisory Committee for Aeronautics [NACA] is used to describe the main geometric features and certain aerodynamic properties. NACA Report Nol 824 wi!! provide the detail of this system.)\n\nAERODYNAMIC FORCE COEFFICIENT. The aerodynamic forces of lift and drag depend on the combined effect of many different variables. The important single variables could IX:\n\n- (1) Airstream velocity\n- (2) Air density\n- (3) Shape or profile of the surface\n- (4) Angle of attack\n- (5) Surface area\n- (6) Compressibility effects\n- (7) Viscosity effects\n\nIf the effects of viscosity and compressibility are not of i mmediate importance, the remaining items can be combined for consideration. Since the major aerodynamic forces are the result of various pressures distributed on a surface, the surface area will be a major factor. Dynamic prcssurc of the airstream is another common denominator of aerodynamic forces and is a major factor since the magnitude of a pressure distribution depends on the source energy of the free stream. The remaining major factor is the relative peJJ#re dittribution", + "recall": 0.8848920863309353, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS oOgOT-8O BASIC AERODYNAMICS \n\nangle of attack. Regardless of the condi- tion of flight, the instantaneous flight path of the surface determines the direction of the oncoming relative wind and the angle of attack is the angle between the instantaneous relative wind and the chord line. To respect the definition of angle of attack, visualize the flight path of the aircraft during a loop and appreciate that the relative wind is defined by the flight path at any point dur- ing the maneuver. Notice that the description of an airfoil \n\n(2) The chord is the characteristic dimen- sion of the airfoil. (3) The mean-camber line is a line drawn \n\nsion of the airfoil. (3) The mean-camber line is a line drawn halfway between the upper and lower sur- faces. Actually, the chord line connects the ends of the mean-camber line. (4) The shape of the mean-camber line is \n\nends of the mean-camber line. (4) The shape of the mean-camber line is very important in determining the aerody- namic characteristics of an airfoil section. The maximum camber (displacement of the mean line from the chord line) and the Ioca- tion of the maximum camber help to define the shape of the mean-camber line. These quantities are expressed as fractions or per- cent of the basic chord dimension. A typi- cal iow speed airfoil may have a maximum camber of 4 percent located 40 percent aft of the leading edge. (5) The thickness and thickness distribu- \n\ning the maneuver. Notice that the description of an airfoil profile is by dimensions which are fractions or percent of the basic chord dimension. Thus, when an airfoil. profile is specified a relative shape is described. (NOTB: A numerical sys- tem of designating airfoil profiles originated by the National ~Advisory Committee for Aero- nautics [NACA] is used to describe the main geometric features and certain aerodynamic properties. NACA Report Nol 824 wi!! pro- vide the detail of this system.) AERODYNAMIC FORCE COEFFICIENT. \n\nvide the detail of this system.) AERODYNAMIC FORCE COEFFICIENT. The aerodynamic forces of lift and drag depend on the combined effect of many different vari- ables. The important single variables could IX: \n\nthe leading edge. (5) The thickness and thickness distribu- tion of the profile are important properties of a section. The maximum tbicknus and location of maximum thickness define thick- ness and distribution of thickness and are expressed as fractions or percent of the chord. A typical low speed airfoil may have a. maximum thickness of 12 percent located 30 percent aft of the leading edge. \n\n(6) The leading edge radius of the airfoil is the radius of curvature given the leading edge shape. It is the radius of the circle centered on a line tangent to the leading edge camber and connecting tangency pcints of upper and lower surfaces with the leading edge. Typi- cal leading edge radii are zero (knife edge) to 1 or 2 percent. \n\nIf the effects of viscosity and compressibility are not of immediate importance, the remain- ing items can be combined for consideration. Since the major aerodynamic forces are the result of various pressures distributed on a surface, the surface area will be a major factor. Dynamic prcssurc of the airstream is another common denominator of aerodynamic forces and is a major factor since the magnitude of a pressure distribution depends on the source energy of the free stream. The remaining major factor is the relative peJJ#re dittribution \n\n(9) The angle of attack is the angle between the chord line and the relative wind. Angle of attack is given the shorthand notation a (alpha). Of course, it is important to dif- ferentiate between pitch attitude angle and \n\n(8) The drag incurred by an airfoil is the net force produced parallel to the relative wind. \n\n(7) The Iift produced by an airfoil is the net force produced perpendicular to the n&a- tive wind. \n\n22 \n\n- (1) Airstream velocity \n\n- (2) Air density (3) Shape or profile of the surface \n\n- (2) Air density (3) Shape or profile of the surface \n\n- (4) Angle of attack \n\n- (5) Surface area (6) Compressibility effects \n\n- (5) Surface area (6) Compressibility effects \n\n- (7) Viscosity effects" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9437648384415599, + "doc_id": "79d6c9b56f8b6a6720312834b3a9b680694ffe5d97121390670e10f064cb3094", + "edit_distance": 0.11226252158894647, + "f1_score": 0.9793388429752067, + "meteor": 0.9744906374334523, + "precision": 0.9875, + "pred_md": "- · Minimum Turning Altitude (MTA) - Minimum turning altitude (MTA) is a charted altitude providing vertical and lateral obstruction clearance based on turn criteria over certain fixes, NAVAIDs, waypoints, and on charted route segments. When a VHF airway or route terminates at a NAVAID or fix, the primary area extends beyond that termination point. When a change of course on VHF airways and routes is necessary, the enroute obstacle clearance turning area extends the primary and secondary obstacle clearance areas to accommodate the turn radius of the aircraft. Since turns at or after fix passage may exceed airway and route boundaries, pilots are expected to adhere to airway and route protected airspace by leading turns early before a fix. The turn area provides obstacle clearance for both turn anticipation (turning prior to the fix) and flyover protection (turning after crossing the fix). Turning fixes requiring a higher MTA are charted with a flag along with accompanying text describing the MTA restriction.\n- · Minimum Crossing Altitude (MCA) - An MCA is the lowest altitude at certain fixes at which the aircraft must cross when proceeding in the direction of a higher minimum enroute IFR altitude. MCAs are established in all cases where obstacles intervene to prevent pilots from maintaining obstacle clearance during a normal climb to a higher MEA after passing a point beyond which the higher MEA applies. The same protected enroute area vertical obstacle clearance requirements for the primary and secondary areas are considered in the determination of the MCA.\n\nVictor Route (with RNAV/GPS MEA shown in blue)\n\nVictor Route (with RNAV/GPS MEA shown in blue)\n\n## AREA NAVIGATION (RNAV) \"T\" ROUTE SYSTEM\n\nThe FAA has created new low altitude area navigation (RNAV) \"T\" routes for the enroute and terminal environments. The RNAV routes will provide more direct routing for IFR aircraft and enhance the safety and efficiency of the National Air -space System. To utilize these routes aircraft are required to be equipped with IFR approved GNSS. In Alaska, TSO-145a and 146a equipment is required.\n\nLow altitude RNAV only routes are identified by the prefix \"T\", and the prefix \"TK\" for RNAV helicopter routes followed by a three digit number (T-200 to T-500). Routes are depicted in blue on the IFR Enroute Low Altitude Charts. RNAV route data (route line, identification boxes, mileages, waypoints, waypoint names, magnetic reference courses and MEAs) will also be printed in blue. Magnetic reference courses will be shown originating from a waypoint, fix/reporting point or NAVAID. GNSS MEA for each segment is established to ensure obstacle clearance and communications reception. GNSS MEAs are identified with a \"G\" suffix.\n\nJoint Victor/RNAV routes are charted as outlined above except as noted. The joint Victor route and the RNAV route identification boxes are shown adjacent to each other. Magnetic reference courses are not shown. MEAs are charted above the appropriate identification box or stacked in pairs, GNSS and Victor. On joint routes, RNAV specific information will be printed in blue.\n\n65\n\nFAA Chart Users' Guide - IFR Enroute Terms", + "recall": 0.9713114754098361, + "true_md": "65\n\n- • Minimum Turning Altitude (MTA) - Minimum turning altitude (MTA) is a charted altitude providing vertical and lateral obstruction clearance based on turn criteria over certain fixes, NAVAIDs, waypoints, and on charted route segments. When a VHF airway or route terminates at a NAVAID or fix, the primary area extends beyond that termination point. When a change of course on VHF airways and routes is necessary, the enroute obstacle clear- ance turning area extends the primary and secondary obstacle clearance areas to accommodate the turn radius of the aircraft. Since turns at or after fix passage may exceed airway and route boundaries, pilots are expected to adhere to airway and route protected airspace by leading turns early before a fix. The turn area provides obstacle clearance for both turn anticipation (turning prior to the fix) and flyover protection (turning after crossing the fix). Turning fixes requiring a higher MTA are charted with a flag along with accompanying text describing the MTA restriction.\n\n- • Minimum Crossing Altitude (MCA) - An MCA is the lowest altitude at certain fixes at which the aircraft must cross when proceeding in the direction of a higher minimum enroute IFR altitude. MCAs are established in all cases where obstacles intervene to prevent pilots from maintaining obstacle clearance during a normal climb to a higher MEA after passing a point beyond which the higher MEA applies. The same protected enroute area vertical obstacle clearance requirements for the primary and secondary areas are considered in the determination of the MCA.\n\nThe FAA has created new low altitude area navigation (RNAV) \"T\" routes for the enroute and terminal environments. The RNAV routes will provide more direct routing for IFR aircraft and enhance the safety and efficiency of the National Air - space System. To utilize these routes aircraft are required to be equipped with IFR approved GNSS. In Alaska, TSO-145a and 146a equipment is required.\n\nLow altitude RNAV only routes are identified by the prefix \"T\", and the prefix \"TK\" for RNAV helicopter routes followed by a three digit number (T-200 to T-500). Routes are depicted in blue on the IFR Enroute Low Altitude Charts. RNAV route data (route line, identification boxes, mileages, waypoints, waypoint names, magnetic reference courses and MEAs) will also be printed in blue. Magnetic reference courses will be shown originating from a waypoint, fix/reporting point or NAVAID. GNSS MEA for each segment is established to ensure obstacle clearance and communications reception. GNSS MEAs are identified with a \"G\" suffix.\n\nJoint Victor/RNAV routes are charted as outlined above except as noted. The joint Victor route and the RNAV route iden- tification boxes are shown adjacent to each other. Magnetic reference courses are not shown. MEAs are charted above the appropriate identification box or stacked in pairs, GNSS and Victor. On joint routes, RNAV specific information will be printed in blue.\n\nFAA Chart Users’ Guide - IFR Enroute Terms\n\n## AREA NAVIGATION (RNAV) \"T\" ROUTE SYSTEM\n\nVictor Route (with RNAV/GPS MEA shown in blue)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5633316759136162, + "doc_id": "514df9dfbbe3176c2dab124596e4d7b737f0f73aff6881ffdf0d2e0d2e459563", + "edit_distance": 0.8260869565217391, + "f1_score": 0.9090909090909091, + "meteor": 0.9005504645539009, + "precision": 0.8823529411764706, + "pred_md": "FAA Chart Users' Guide - VFR Chart Symbology - Helicopter Charts\n\n## NAVIGATIONAL AND PROCEDURAL INFORMATION\n\n## VFR Checkpoints\n\n54", + "recall": 0.9375, + "true_md": "54\n\n## NAVIGATIONAL AND PROCEDURAL INFORMATION\n\nFAA Chart Users’ Guide - VFR Chart Symbology - Helicopter Charts" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6865065103648591, + "doc_id": "107e50fa1b67dc09a1588ae9d49f697b22815b37cdec66b40ad7d0029cf7ad37", + "edit_distance": 0.3333333333333333, + "f1_score": 0.8333333333333334, + "meteor": 0.8220833333333335, + "precision": 0.8333333333333334, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS 00-801-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE\n\nr\n\nii2.18. Rhuiples of Ropellerr\n\n146\n\n--", + "recall": 0.8333333333333334, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-801-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE -- \n\nii- 2.18. Rhuiples of Ropellerr \n\n146" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8988920052483476, + "doc_id": "6f88529489d32e4581b066ec4c9c3a42db31ec820f97c19b42a832ddb3b26e1d", + "edit_distance": 0.7706919945725916, + "f1_score": 0.948960302457467, + "meteor": 0.7529869611942842, + "precision": 0.9766536964980544, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS 00-8' X-60\n\n## STABILITY AND CONTROL\n\nattack airplanes. A large patrol or transport type airplane would ordinarily show a much higher maneuvering stick force gradient because of the lower limit load factor.\n\nWhen the airplane has high static stability, the maneuvering stability will be high and a high stick force gradient will result. A possibility exists that the forward c.g. limit could be set to prevent an excessively high maneuvering stick force gradient. As the c.g. is moved aft, the stick force gradient decreases with decreasing maneuvering stability and the lower limit of stick force gradient may be reached.\n\nThe pitch damping of the airplane is obviously related to air density. At high altitudes, the high true airspeed reduces the change in tail angle of attack for a given pitching velocity and reduces the pitch damping. Thus, a decrease in maneuvering stick force stability can be expected with increased altitude.\n\nTAILORING CONTROL FORCES. The control forces should reflect the stability of the airplane but, at the same time, should be of a tolerable magnitude. The design of the surfaces and control system may employ an infinite variety of techniques to provide satisfactory control forces.\n\nAerodynamic balance must be thought of in two different senses. First, the control surface must be balanced to reduce hinge moments due to changes in angle of attack. This is necessary to reduce the floating tendency of the surface which reduces the stick-free stability. Next, aerodynamic balance can reduce the hinge moments due to deflection of the control surface. Generally, it is difficult to obtain a high degree of deflection balance without incurring a large overbalance of the surface for changes in angle of attack.\n\nSome of the types of aerodynamic balance are illustrated in figure 4.16. Thesimple horn type balance employs a concentrated balance area located ahead of the hinge line. The balance area may extend completely to the\n\nleading edge (unshielded) or partway to the leading edge (shielded). Aerodynamic balance can be achieved by the provision of- a hinge line aft of the control surface leading edge. The resulting overhang of surface area ahead of the hinge line will provide a degree of balance depending on the amount of overhang. Another variation of aerodynamic balance is an internal balance surface ahead of the hinge line which is contained within ,the surface. A flexible seal is usually incorporated to increase the effectiveness of the balance area. Even the bevelling of the trailing edge..of the control surface is effective also as a balancing technique. The choice of the type of aerodynamic balance will depend on many factors such as required degree of balance, simplicity, drag, etc.\n\nMany devices can be added to a control system to modify or tailor the stick force stability to desired levels. If a spring is added to the control system as shown in figure 4.16, it will tend to center the stick and provide a force increment depending on stick displacement. When the control system has a fixed gearing between stick position and surface deflection, the centering spring will provide a contribution to stick force stability according to stick position. The contribution to stick force stability will be largest at low flight speeds where relatively large control deflections are required. The contribution will be smallest at high airspeed because of the smaller control deflections required. Thus, .the stick centering bungee will increase the airspeed and maneuvering stick force stability but the contribution decreases at high airspeeds. A variation of this device would be a spring stiffness which would be controlled to vary with dynamic pressure, 4. In this case, the contribution of the spring to stick force stability would, not diminish with. speed.\n\nA ' downspring' added to a control system is~ a means ~of increasing airspeed stick force stability without a change in airplane static\n\n2,70", + "recall": 0.9227941176470589, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-8 ’ X-60 STABILITY AND CONTROL \n\nleading edge (unshielded) or partway to the leading edge (shielded). Aerodynamic balance can be achieved by the provision of- a hinge line aft of the control surface leading edge. The resulting overhang of surface area ahead of the hinge line will provide a degree of balance depending on the amount of overhang. Another variation of aerodynamic balance is an internal balance surface ahead of the hinge line which is contained within ,the surface. A flexible seal is usually incorporated to in- crease the effectiveness of the balance area. Even the bevelling of the trailing edge..of the control surface is effective also as a balancing technique. The choice of the type of aerody- namic balance will depend on many factors such as required degree of balance, simplicity, drag, etc. Many devices can be added to a control \n\nattack airplanes. A large patrol or transport type airplane would ordinarily show a much higher maneuvering stick force gradient be- cause of the lower limit load factor. When the airplane has high static stability, \n\ncause of the lower limit load factor. When the airplane has high static stability, the maneuvering stability will be high and a high stick force gradient will result. A possibility exists that the forward c.g. limit could be set to prevent an excessively high maneuvering stick force gradient. As the c.g. is moved aft, the stick force gradient de- creases with decreasing maneuvering stability and the lower limit of stick force gradient may be reached. \n\nThe pitch damping of the airplane is obvi- ously related to air density. At high altitudes, the high true airspeed reduces the change in tail angle of attack for a given pitching velocity and reduces the pitch damping. Thus, a de- crease in maneuvering stick force stability can be expected with increased altitude. \n\nTAILORING CONTROL FORCES. The control forces should reflect the stability of the airplane but, at the same time, should be of a tolerable magnitude. The design of the surfaces and control system may employ an infinite variety of techniques to provide satis- factory control forces. \n\ndrag, etc. Many devices can be added to a control system to modify or tailor the stick force stability to desired levels. If a spring is added to the control system as shown in figure 4.16, it will tend to center the stick and provide a force increment depending on stick displace- ment. When the control system has a fixed gearing between stick position and surface deflection, the centering spring will provide a contribution to stick force stability according to stick position. The contribution to stick force stability will be largest at low flight speeds where relatively large control deflec- tions are required. The contribution will be smallest at high airspeed because of the smaller control deflections required. Thus, .the stick centering bungee will increase the airspeed and maneuvering stick force stability but the contribution decreases at high airspeeds. A variation of this device would be a spring stiffness which would be controlled to vary with dynamic pressure, 4. In this case, the contribution of the spring to stick force stability would, not diminish with. speed. \n\nAerodynamic balance must be thought of in two different senses. First, the control surface must be balanced to reduce hinge moments due to changes in angle of attack. This is necessary to reduce the floating tendency of the surface which reduces the stick-free stability. Next, aerodynamic balance can reduce the hinge moments due to deflection of the control sur- face. Generally, it is difficult to obtain a high degree of deflection balance without incurring a large overbalance of the surface for changes in angle of attack. \n\nSome of the types of aerodynamic balance are illustrated in figure 4.16. Thesimple horn type balance employs a concentrated balance area located ahead of the hinge line. The balance area may extend completely to the \n\nA “downspring” added to a control system is~ a means ~of increasing airspeed stick force stability without a change in airplane static \n\n2,70" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8195300167707227, + "doc_id": "84377039530ed9242932a85c8e867608bba589c38770542a1e2e7f5e841d8a86", + "edit_distance": 0.4183381088825215, + "f1_score": 0.9009708737864077, + "meteor": 0.7839219285841955, + "precision": 0.9508196721311475, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS 00-801-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE\n\nis at a minimum, (LID),. Thus, for maximum steady-state angle of climb, the turbojet aircraft would be operated at the speed ,for (L/D),. This poses somewhat of a problem in determining the proper procedure for obstacle clearance after takeoff. If the obstacle is a considerable distance from the takeoff point, the problem is essentially that of a long term gain and steady state conditions will predominate. That is, acceleration from the takeoff speed to (L/D), speed will be favorable because the maximum steady climb angle can be attained. However, if the obstacle is a relatively short distance from the takeoff point, the additional distance required to accelerate to (L/D),, speed may be detrimental and the resulting situation may prove to be a short term gain problem. In this case, it may prove necessary to begin climb out at or near the takeoff speed or hold the aircraft on the runway for extra speed and a subsequent zoom. The problem is su&ciently varied that no general conclusion can be applied to all jer aircraft and particular procedures are specified for each aircraft in the Flight Handbook.\n\nOf greater general interest in climb performance are the factors which affect the rate of climb. The vertical velocity of an airplane depends on the flight speed and the inclination of the flight path. In fact, the rate of climb is the vertical component of the flight path velocity. By the diagram of figure 2.21, the following relationship is developed:\n\n\n\n154\n\nRevId J4mwy 1ws\n\nwhere RC=rate of climb, f.p.-. P11=power available, h.p. Pr=power re W=weight, 1 s % uired, h.p. V=true airspeed, knots\n\n33,000 is the factor converting horsepower\n\nto ft-lbs/min 101.3isthefactorconvertingknocstof.p.m.\n\nThe above relationship states that, for a given weight airplane, the rate af climb (RC) depends on the difference between the power available and the power required (PdPr), or excess power. Of course, when the excess power is zero (Pa-Pr=O or Pa== PI), the rate of climb is zero and the airplane is in steady level flight. When the power available is greater than the power required, the excess power will, allow a rate of climb specific to the magnitude of excess power. Also, when the power available is less than the power required, the deficiency of power produces a rate of descent. This relationship provides the basis for an important axiom of flight technique: ' For the conditions of steady flight, the power setting is the primary control of rate of climb or descent' .\n\nOne of the most important items of climb performance is the maximum rate of climb. By the previous equation for rate of climb, maximum rate of climb would occur where there exists the greatest difference between power available and power required, i.e., maximum (PaPr). Figure 2.21 illustrates the climb rate performance with the curves of power available and power required versus velocity. The power required curve is again a representative airplane which could be powered by either a turbojet or propeller type powerplant. The power available curves included are for a characteristic propeller powerplant and jet powerplant operating at maximum output.\n\nThe power curves for the representative propeller aircraft show a variation of propulsive power typical of a reciprocating engine-propeller combination. The maximum rate of climb for this aircraft will occur at some speed\n\nand", + "recall": 0.8560885608856088, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-801-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE \n\nwhere RC=rate of climb, f.p.-. \n\nand V=true airspeed, knots 33,000 is the factor converting horsepower \n\nis at a minimum, (LID),. Thus, for maxi- mum steady-state angle of climb, the turbojet aircraft would be operated at the speed ,for (L/D),. This poses somewhat of a problem in determining the proper procedure for ob- stacle clearance after takeoff. If the obstacle is a considerable distance from the takeoff point, the problem is essentially that of a long term gain and steady state conditions will pre- dominate. That is, acceleration from the take- off speed to (L/D), speed will be favorable because the maximum steady climb angle can be attained. However, if the obstacle is a rela- tively short distance from the takeoff point, the additional distance required to accelerate to (L/D),, speed may be detrimental and the resulting situation may prove to be a short term gain problem. In this case, it may prove necessary to begin climb out at or near the take- off speed or hold the aircraft on the runway for extra speed and a subsequent zoom. The problem is su&ciently varied that no general conclusion can be applied to all jer aircraft and particular procedures are specified for each air- craft in the Flight Handbook. \n\nto ft-lbs/min 101.3isthefactorconvertingknocstof.p.m. The above relationship states that, for a given weight airplane, the rate af climb (RC) depends on the difference between the power available and the power required (Pd- Pr), or excess power. Of course, when the excess power is zero (Pa-Pr=O or Pa== PI), the rate of climb is zero and the airplane is in steady level flight. When the power available is greater than the power required, the excess power will, allow a rate of climb specific to the magnitude of excess power. Also, when the power available is less than the power required, the deficiency of power produces a rate of descent. This rela- tionship provides the basis for an important axiom of flight technique: “For the conditions of steady flight, the power setting is the pri- mary control of rate of climb or descent”. \n\nOne of the most important items of climb performance is the maximum rate of climb. By the previous equation for rate of climb, maximum rate of climb would occur where there exists the greatest difference between power available and power required, i.e., maximum (Pa- Pr). Figure 2.21 illustrates the climb rate performance with the curves of power available and power required versus velocity. The power required curve is again a representative airplane which could be powered by either a turbojet or propeller type power- plant. The power available curves included are for a characteristic propeller powerplant and jet powerplant operating at maximum output. \n\nThe power curves for the representative pro- peller aircraft show a variation of propulsive power typical of a reciprocating engine-pro- peller combination. The maximum rate of climb for this aircraft will occur at some speed \n\nOf greater general interest in climb per- formance are the factors which affect the rate of climb. The vertical velocity of an airplane depends on the flight speed and the inclination of the flight path. In fact, the rate of climb is the vertical component of the flight path velocity. By the diagram of figure 2.21, the following relationship is developed: \n\nRC- 101.3 V sin y \n\nsince \n\nthen \n\na& \n\n2-v with Pa=% \n\nand Pr=& \n\n$$RC=101.3 V $$\n\n154 \n\nRevId J4mwy 1ws \n\nwhere RC=rate of climb, f.p.-. P11=power available, h.p. Pr=power re W=weight, 1 % uired, h.p. s and V=true airspeed, knots \n\nand 33,000 is the factor converting horsepower to ft-lbs/min 101.3isthefactorconvertingknocstof.p.m." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.11858358800493096, + "doc_id": "93f66bd09f695fed8061ba69afb5b7a1951783f38eeed9bd2cbba43d31f7f9d0", + "edit_distance": 0.8975609756097561, + "f1_score": 0.38202247191011235, + "meteor": 0.5888979285311973, + "precision": 0.23943661971830985, + "pred_md": "FAA Chart Users' Guide - IFR Enroute Symbology\n\n## AIRSPACE INFORMATION (Continued)\n\n## Enroute Chart Examples\n\n## Low Enroute Chart (Continued)\n\n## Reference Number\n\n80\n\n## Description\n\n## MEA VHF and RNAV Example\n\nMEA for aircraft utilizing VHF NAVAID of 15000' MEA for aircraft utilizing RNAV of 13300'\n\nMOCA of 13300'\n\n## MCA and MTA Example at a NAVAID\n\nMCA for aircraft traveling West along V520 to cross JAC at 15200' MCA for aircraft traveling West along V330 to cross JAC at 13400'\n\nMTA for aircraft crossing over and turning at JAC:\n\nAircraft traveling NE on V465 and turning to V330 on a W heading or turning to V520 on a W heading must turn at altitude of 16000' or higher\n\nAircraft traveling E on V520 and turning to V330 on a W heading must turn at altitude of 14200'\n\nAircraft traveling E on V330 and turning to V520 on a W heading must turn at altitude of 16000' or higher\n\nAircraft traveling NW on V328 and turning to V465 on a SW heading must turn at altitude of 15100' or higher.", + "recall": 0.9444444444444444, + "true_md": "FAA Chart Users’ Guide - IFR Enroute Symbology\n\n80\n\n## Low Enroute Chart (Continued)\n\n## Enroute Chart Examples\n\n## AIRSPACE INFORMATION (Continued)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9065221254667237, + "doc_id": "fc76bd93657abd9a84922a401f3a4e2aa87e4d6eb626427d7a74d2960d90925c", + "edit_distance": 0.5083655083655083, + "f1_score": 0.9358490566037735, + "meteor": 0.8255014019405281, + "precision": 0.9649805447470817, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS 00-801-80 STABILITY AND CONlRO' L\n\nspeed, If the airplane were given a large nose down tab setting the pull force would increase with airspeed. This fact points out the possibility of ' feel' as not being a true indication of airplane static stability.\n\nIf the c.g. of the airplane were varied while maintaining trim at a constant airspeed, the effect of c.g. position on stick force stability could be appreciated. As illustrated in figure 4,14(C), moving the c,g. aft decreases the slope of the line of stick force through the trim speed. Thus, decreasing stick force stability is evident in that smaller stick forces are necessary to displace the airplane from the trim speed. When the stick force gradient (or slope) becomes zero, the c.g. is at the stick-free neutral point and neutral stability exists. If the c.g. is aft of the stick-free neutral point, stick force instability will exist, e.g. the airplane will require a push force at a lower speed or a pull force at a higher speed. It should be noted that the stick force gradient is low at low airspeeds and when the airplane is at low speeds, high power, and a c.g. position near the aft limit, the ' feel' for airspeed will be weak.\n\nControl system friction can create very undesirable effects on control forces. Figure 4.14(D) illustrates that the control force versus airspeed is a band rather than a line. A wide friction force band can completely mask the stick force stability when the stick force stability is low. Modern flight control systems require precise maintenance to minimize the friction force band and preserve proper feel to the airplane.\n\nMANEUVERING STABILITY. When an airplane is subject to a normal acceleration, the flight path is curved and the airplane is subject to a pitching velocity. Because of the pitching velocity in maneuvering flight, the longitudinal stability of the airplane is slightly greater than in steady flight conditions. When an airplane is subject to a pitch1 ing velocity at a given lift coefficient, the airplane develops a pitching moment resisting\n\nthe pitch motion which adds to the restoring moment from the basic static stability. The principal source of this additional pitching moment is illustrated in figure 4.15.\n\nDuring a pull-up the airplane is subject to an angular rotation about the lateral axis and the horizontal tail will experience a component of wind due to the pitching velocity. The vector addition of this component velocity to the flight velocity provides a change in angle of attack for the tail and the change in lift on the tail creates a pitching moment resisting the pitching motion. Since the pitching moment opposes the pitching motion but is due to the pitching motion, the effect is a damping in pitch. Of course, the other components of the airplane may develop resisting moments and contribute to pitch damping but the horizontal tail is usually the largest contribution. The added pitching moment from pitch damping will effect a higher stability in maneuvers than is apparent in steady flight. From this consideration, the neutral point for maneuvering flight will be aft of the neutral point for unaccelerated flight and in most cases will not be a critical item. If the airplane demonstrates static stability in unaccelerated flight, it will most surely demonstrate stability in maneuvering flight.\n\nThe most direct appreciation of the maneuvering stability of an airplane is obtained from a plot of stick force versus load factor such as shown in figure 4.15. The airplane with positive maneuvering stability should demonstrate a steady increase in stick force with increase in load factor or ' G' . The maneuvering stick force gradient-or stick force per G-must be positive but should be of the proper magnitude. The stick force gradient must not be excessively high or the airplane will be difficult and tiring to maneuver. Also, the stick force gradient must not be too low or the airplane may be overstressed inadvertently when light control forces exist. A maneuvering stick force gradient of 3 to 8 lbs. per G is satisfactory for most fighter and", + "recall": 0.9084249084249084, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-801-80 STABILITY AND CONlRO ’ L \n\nthe pitch motion which adds to the restoring moment from the basic static stability. The principal source of this additional pitching moment is illustrated in figure 4.15. \n\nspeed, If the airplane were given a large nose down tab setting the pull force would in- crease with airspeed. This fact points out the possibility of “feel” as not being a true indi- cation of airplane static stability. If the c.g. of the airplane were varied while \n\ncation of airplane static stability. If the c.g. of the airplane were varied while maintaining trim at a constant airspeed, the effect of c.g. position on stick force stability could be appreciated. As illustrated in figure 4,14(C), moving the c,g. aft decreases the slope of the line of stick force through the trim speed. Thus, decreasing stick force stability is evident in that smaller stick forces are necessary to displace the airplane from the trim speed. When the stick force gradient (or slope) becomes zero, the c.g. is at the stick-free neutral point and neutral stability exists. If the c.g. is aft of the stick-free neutral point, stick force instability will exist, e.g. the airplane will require a push force at a lower speed or a pull force at a higher speed. It should be noted that the stick force gradient is low at low airspeeds and when the airplane is at low speeds, high power, and a c.g. position near the aft limit, the “feel” for airspeed will be weak. \n\nDuring a pull-up the airplane is subject to an angular rotation about the lateral axis and the horizontal tail will experience a component of wind due to the pitching velocity. The vector addition of this component velocity to the flight velocity provides a change in angle of attack for the tail and the change in lift on the tail creates a pitching moment resisting the pitching motion. Since the pitching mo- ment opposes the pitching motion but is due to the pitching motion, the effect is a damping in pitch. Of course, the other components of the airplane may develop resisting moments and contribute to pitch damping but the horizontal tail is usually the largest contri- bution. The added pitching moment from pitch damping will effect a higher stability in maneuvers than is apparent in steady flight. From this consideration, the neutral point for maneuvering flight will be aft of the neutral point for unaccelerated flight and in most cases will not be a critical item. If the airplane demonstrates static stability in unaccelerated flight, it will most surely demonstrate stability in maneuvering flight. \n\nControl system friction can create very un- desirable effects on control forces. Figure 4.14(D) illustrates that the control force versus airspeed is a band rather than a line. A wide friction force band can completely mask the stick force stability when the stick force stability is low. Modern flight control systems require precise maintenance to mini- mize the friction force band and preserve proper feel to the airplane. \n\nThe most direct appreciation of the ma- neuvering stability of an airplane is obtained from a plot of stick force versus load factor such as shown in figure 4.15. The airplane with positive maneuvering stability should demonstrate a steady increase in stick force with increase in load factor or “G”. The maneuvering stick force gradient-or stick force per G-must be positive but should be of the proper magnitude. The stick force gradient must not be excessively high or the airplane will be difficult and tiring to maneuver. Also, the stick force gradient must not be too low or the airplane may be overstressed in- advertently when light control forces exist. A maneuvering stick force gradient of 3 to 8 lbs. per G is satisfactory for most fighter and \n\nMANEUVERING STABILITY. When an airplane is subject to a normal acceleration, the flight path is curved and the airplane is subject to a pitching velocity. Because of the pitching velocity in maneuvering flight, the longitudinal stability of the airplane is slightly greater than in steady flight condi- tions. When an airplane is subject to a pitch- 1 ing velocity at a given lift coefficient, the air- plane develops a pitching moment resisting" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8627569420221245, + "doc_id": "b8645cb3d0363890307d3d3da3b08ec8417dab04ef7106f343598a01f7ef230a", + "edit_distance": 0.5142118863049095, + "f1_score": 0.926441351888668, + "meteor": 0.733760076586471, + "precision": 0.9588477366255144, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS 00-8OT-90 STABHITY AND CONTROL\n\nat the inlet of a jet engine contributes a similar destabilizing effect when the inlet is ahead of the c,g. As with the propeller, the magnitude of the stability contribution is largest at high thrust and low flight speed.\n\nThe indirect effects of power are of greatest concern in the propeller powered airplane rather than the jet powered airplane. As shown in figure 4.12, the propeller powered airplane creates slipstream velocities on the various surfaces which are different from the flow field typical of power-off flight. Since the various wing, nacelle, and fuselage surfaces are partly or wholly i mmersed in this slipstream, the contribution of these components to stability can be quite different from the power-off flight condition. Ordinarily, the change of fuselage and nacelle contribution with power is relatively small. The added lift on the portion of the wing i mmersed in the slipstream requires that the airplane operate at a lower angle of attack to produce the same effective lift coefficienr. Generally, this reduction in angle of attack to effect the same CL reduces the tail contribution to stability. However, the increase in dynamic pressure at the tail tends to increase the effectiveness of the tail and may be a stabilizing effect. The magnitude of this contribution due to the slipstream velocity on the tail will depend on the c.g. position and trim lift coefficient.\n\nThe deflection of the slipstream by the normal force at the propeller tends to increase the downwash at the horizontal tail and reduce the contribution to stability. Essentially the same destabilizing effect is produced by the flow i nduced at the exhaust of the jet powerplant. Ordinarily, the i nduced flow at the horizontal tail of a jet airplane is slight and is destabilizing when the jet passes underneath the horizontal tail. The magnitude of the indirect power effects on stability tends to be greatest at high Cr, high power, and low flight speeds.\n\nThe combined direct and indirect power effects contribute to a general reduction of\n\nstatic stability at high power, high CL, and low 4. It is generally true that any airplane will experience the lowest level of static longitudinal stability under these conditions. Because of the greater magnitude of both direct and indirect power effects, the propeller powered airplane usually experiences a greater effect than the jet powered airplane.\n\nAn additional effect on stability can be from the extension of high lift devices. The high lift devices tend to increase downwash at the tail and reduce the dynamic pressure at the tail, both of which are destabilizing. However, the high lift devices may prevent an unstable contribution of the wing at high CL. While the effect of high lift devices depends on the airplane configuration, the usual effect is destabilizing. Hence, the airplane may experience the most critical forward neutral point during the power approach or waveoff. During these conditions of flight the static stability is usually the weakest and particular attention must be given to precise control of the airplane. The power-on neutral point may set the most aft limit of c.g. position.\n\nCONTROL FORCE STABILITY. The static longitudinal stability of an airplane is defined by the tendency to return to equilibrium upon displacement. In otherwords, the stable airplane will resist displacement from the trim or equilibrium. The control forces of the airplane should reflect the stability of the airplane and provide suitable reference for precise control of the airplane.\n\nThe effect of elevator deflection on pitching moments is illustrated by the first graph of figure 4.13. If the elevators of the airplane are fixed at zero deflection, the resulting line of CM versus C' s for 0' depicts the static stability and trim lift coefficient. If the elevators are fixed at a deflection of 10' up, the airplane static stability is unchanged but the trim lift coefficient is increased. A change in elevator or stabilizer position does not alter the tail contribution to stability but the change in pitching moment will alter the lift coeflicient\n\n264", + "recall": 0.8961538461538462, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-8OT-90 STABHITY AND CONTROL \n\nstatic stability at high power, high CL, and low 4. It is generally true that any airplane will experience the lowest level of static longi- tudinal stability under these conditions. Be- cause of the greater magnitude of both direct and indirect power effects, the propeller pow- ered airplane usually experiences a greater effect than the jet powered airplane. An additional effect on stability can be from \n\nat the inlet of a jet engine contributes a similar destabilizing effect when the inlet is ahead of the c,g. As with the propeller, the magni- tude of the stability contribution is largest at high thrust and low flight speed. The indirect effects of power are of greatest \n\nhigh thrust and low flight speed. The indirect effects of power are of greatest concern in the propeller powered airplane rather than the jet powered airplane. As shown in figure 4.12, the propeller powered airplane creates slipstream velocities on the various surfaces which are different from the flow field typical of power-off flight. Since the various wing, nacelle, and fuselage surfaces are partly or wholly immersed in this slip- stream, the contribution of these components to stability can be quite different from the power-off flight condition. Ordinarily, the change of fuselage and nacelle contribution with power is relatively small. The added lift on the portion of the wing immersed in the slipstream requires that the airplane oper- ate at a lower angle of attack to produce the same effective lift coefficienr. Generally, this reduction in angle of attack to effect the same CL reduces the tail contribution to stability. However, the increase in dynamic pressure at the tail tends to increase the effectiveness of the tail and may be a stabilizing effect. The magnitude of this contribution due to the slipstream velocity on the tail will depend on the c.g. position and trim lift coefficient. \n\neffect than the jet powered airplane. An additional effect on stability can be from the extension of high lift devices. The high lift devices tend to increase downwash at the tail and reduce the dynamic pressure at the tail, both of which are destabilizing. However, the high lift devices may prevent an unstable contribution of the wing at high CL. While the effect of high lift devices depends on the airplane configuration, the usual effect is de- stabilizing. Hence, the airplane may experi- ence the most critical forward neutral point during the power approach or waveoff. Dur- ing these conditions of flight the static stability is usually the weakest and particular attention must be given to precise control of the air- plane. The power-on neutral point may set the most aft limit of c.g. position. \n\nCONTROL FORCE STABILITY. The static longitudinal stability of an airplane is defined by the tendency to return to equilibrium upon displacement. In otherwords, the stable air- plane will resist displacement from the trim or equilibrium. The control forces of the air- plane should reflect the stability of the air- plane and provide suitable reference for precise control of the airplane. \n\nThe deflection of the slipstream by the nor- mal force at the propeller tends to increase the downwash at the horizontal tail and reduce the contribution to stability. Essentially the same destabilizing effect is produced by the flow induced at the exhaust of the jet power- plant. Ordinarily, the induced flow at the horizontal tail of a jet airplane is slight and is destabilizing when the jet passes underneath the horizontal tail. The magnitude of the indirect power effects on stability tends to be greatest at high Cr, high power, and low flight speeds. \n\nThe effect of elevator deflection on pitching moments is illustrated by the first graph of figure 4.13. If the elevators of the airplane are fixed at zero deflection, the resulting line of CM versus C ’ s for 0’ depicts the static stability and trim lift coefficient. If the elevators are fixed at a deflection of 10” up, the airplane static stability is unchanged but the trim lift coefficient is increased. A change in elevator or stabilizer position does not alter the tail contribution to stability but the change in pitching moment will alter the lift coeflicient \n\nThe combined direct and indirect power effects contribute to a general reduction of \n\n264" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "c9928e01d6b3f9d6229ecba6488a37b7e8a24188fee2aec45c59a419fed87bfd", + "edit_distance": 0.5142118863049095, + "f1_score": 0.926441351888668, + "meteor": 0.733760076586471, + "precision": 0.9588477366255144, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.8961538461538462, + "true_md": "3~PWbWtlOdWd 3NVldUlV 08-108-00 SdSMAVN" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7419446627365011, + "doc_id": "ea58205bf173dac04fe80c9281849ccfd5a27eacb0a7a7285df2fb8d612284b9", + "edit_distance": 0.2, + "f1_score": 0.9285714285714286, + "meteor": 0.9287414965986395, + "precision": 0.9285714285714286, + "pred_md": "FAA Chart Users' Guide - VFR Symbology - Sectional and Terminal Area Charts\n\n42", + "recall": 0.9285714285714286, + "true_md": "42\n\nFAA Chart Users’ Guide - VFR Symbology - Sectional and Terminal Area Charts" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8103732971818994, + "doc_id": "5f03600be0b4d55159d486fbea1c95d367b73ddb06b0a319e67d614ba1a67955", + "edit_distance": 0.6607142857142857, + "f1_score": 0.9463869463869465, + "meteor": 0.6738886944032427, + "precision": 0.9712918660287081, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS oo-801-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE\n\n## where\n\ncondition (1) applies to some known condition of weight, fuel flow, and specific range at some original basic altitude during cruise climb.\n\ncon&&r (2) applies to some new values of weight, fuel flow, and specific range at some different altitude along a particular cruise path.\n\nand\n\nV= velocity, knots M = Mach number W= gross weight, lbs. FF=fuel flow, lbs./hr. JR= specific range, nmi./lb. e=altitude density ratio\n\nThus, during a cruise-climb flight, a 10 percent decrease in gross weight from the consumption of fuel would create:\n\nno change in Mach number or ' TAS\n\n- a 5 percent decrease in EAS\n- a 10 percent decrease in C, i.e., higher altitude\n- a 10 percent decrease in fuel flow\n- an 11 percent increase in specific range\n\nAn important comparison can be made between the constant altitude cruise and the cruiseclimb with respect to the variation of specific range. From the previous relationships, a 2 percent reduction in gross weight durmg\n\ncruise would create a 1 percent increase in specific range in a constant altitude cruise but a 2 percent increase in specific range in a cruiseclimb at constant .Mach number. Thus, a higher average specific range can.be maintained during the expenditure of a given increment of fuel. If an airplane begins a cruise at optimum conditions at or above the tropopause with a given weight of fuel, the following data\n\n168\n\nprovide a comparison of the total range available from a constant altitude or cruise-climb\n\nFor example, if the cruise fuel weight is 50 percent of the gross weight, the climbing cruise flight path will provide a range 18.2 percent greater than cruise at constant ,altitude. This comparison does not include consideration of any variation of specific fuel consumption during cruise or the effects of compressibility in defining the optimum aerodynamic conditions for cruising flight. However, the comparison is generally applicable for aircraft which have subsonic cruise.\n\nWhen the airplane has a supersonic cruise for maximum range, the optimum flight path is generally one of a constant Mach number. The optimum flight path is generally-but not necessarily-a climbing cruise. In this case of subsonic. or supersonic cruise, a Machmeter is of principal importance in cruise control of the jet airplane.\n\nThe @ct of wind on nznge is of considerable importance in flying operations. Of course, a headwind will always reduce range and a tailwind will always increase range. The selection of a cruise altitude with the most favorable (or least unfa:vorable) winds is a relatively simple matter for the case of the propeller powered airplane. Since the range of the.propeller powered airplane is relatively unaffected by altitude, the altitude with the most favorable winds is selected for range. However, the range of the turbojet airplane is greatly affected by altitude so the selection of an optimum altitude will involve considering the wind profile ' with the variation of range with altitude. Since the turbojet range increases", + "recall": 0.9227272727272727, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS oo-801-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE \n\nprovide a comparison of the total range avail- able from a constant altitude or cruise-climb \n\nwhere \n\nand \n\nV= velocity, knots M = Mach number W= gross weight, lbs. FF=fuel flow, lbs./hr. JR= specific range, nmi./lb. e=altitude density ratio \n\nThus, during a cruise-climb flight, a 10 percent decrease in gross weight from the consumption of fuel would create: \n\nFor example, if the cruise fuel weight is 50 per- cent of the gross weight, the climbing cruise flight path will provide a range 18.2 percent greater than cruise at constant ,altitude. This comparison does not include consideration of any variation of specific fuel consumption dur- ing cruise or the effects of compressibility in defining the optimum aerodynamic conditions for cruising flight. However, the comparison is generally applicable for aircraft which have subsonic cruise. \n\n- condition (1) applies to some known condi- tion of weight, fuel flow, and specific range at some original basic altitude during cruise climb. \n\n- con&&r (2) applies to some new values of weight, fuel flow, and specific range at some different altitude along a partic- ular cruise path. \n\nno change in Mach number or ‘ TAS a 5 percent decrease in EAS \n\nno change in Mach number or a 5 percent decrease in EAS a 10 percent decrease in C, i.e., higher \n\na 5 percent decrease in EAS a 10 percent decrease in C, i.e., higher altitude \n\na 10 percent decrease in fuel flow an 11 percent increase in specific range \n\na 10 percent decrease in fuel flow an 11 percent increase in specific range \n\nAn important comparison can be made between the constant altitude cruise and the cruise- climb with respect to the variation of specific range. From the previous relationships, a 2 percent reduction in gross weight durmg \n\nWhen the airplane has a supersonic cruise for maximum range, the optimum flight path is generally one of a constant Mach number. The optimum flight path is generally-but not necessarily-a climbing cruise. In this case of subsonic. or supersonic cruise, a Machmeter is of principal importance in cruise control of the jet airplane. The @ct of wind on nznge is of considerable \n\njet airplane. The @ct of wind on nznge is of considerable importance in flying operations. Of course, a headwind will always reduce range and a tailwind will always increase range. The selection of a cruise altitude with the most favorable (or least unfa:vorable) winds is a rel- atively simple matter for the case of the propeller powered airplane. Since the range of the.propeller powered airplane is relatively un- affected by altitude, the altitude with the most favorable winds is selected for range. However, the range of the turbojet airplane is greatly affected by altitude so the selection of an op- timum altitude will involve considering the wind profile ‘ with the variation of range with altitude. Since the turbojet range increases \n\ncruise would create a 1 percent increase in specific range in a constant altitude cruise but a 2 percent increase in specific range in a cruise- climb at constant .Mach number. Thus, a higher average specific range can.be maintained during the expenditure of a given increment of fuel. If an airplane begins a cruise at optimum conditions at or above the tropopause with a given weight of fuel, the following data \n\n168" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8079796378454231, + "doc_id": "d018b7e458411e4bce046bade37f964c9599a59f2b4413b7eaa88aac2a7aa928", + "edit_distance": 0.38735177865612647, + "f1_score": 0.9158878504672897, + "meteor": 0.9302374841577202, + "precision": 0.8990825688073395, + "pred_md": "FAA Chart Users' Guide - Terminal Procedures Publication (TPP) - Terms\n\nSW-1, 18 AUG 2016 to 15 SEP 2016\n\nSW-1, 18 AUG 2016 to 15 SEP 2016\n\nComplex IAP Example with RF Legs\n\nComplex IAP Example with RF Legs\n\n- · Feeder Routes (highlighted in blue - See Simple IAP Example on previous page) may be used to provide a transition from the enroute structure to the IAF.\n- · Initial Approach (highlighted in purple in examples above) is the segment between the initial approach fix (IAF) and the intermediate fix (IF) or the point where the aircraft is established on the intermediate course or final ap -proach course.\n- · Intermediate Approach (highlighted in yellow in examples above) is the segment between the intermediate fix or point and the final approach fix.\n- · Final Approach Course (highlighted in red in the examples above) is the segment between the final approach fix or point and the runway, airport, or missed approach point.\n- · Missed Approach (highlighted in green in the example above) begins at the MAP and continues until the designated fix or waypoint. Missed Approach Procedure Track is shown as a hash marked line in the planview. If the missed approach fix falls outside of the area of the planview it will be shown in a separate box in the planview.\n\n100", + "recall": 0.9333333333333333, + "true_md": "FAA Chart Users’ Guide - Terminal Procedures Publication (TPP) - Terms\n\nComplex IAP Example with RF Legs \n\n- • Initial Approach (highlighted in purple in examples above) is the segment between the initial approach fix (IAF) and the intermediate fix (IF) or the point where the aircraft is established on the intermediate course or final ap - proach course.\n\n- • Feeder Routes (highlighted in blue - See Simple IAP Example on previous page) may be used to provide a tran- sition from the enroute structure to the IAF. \n\n- • Intermediate Approach (highlighted in yellow in examples above) is the segment between the intermediate fix or point and the final approach fix. \n\n- • Final Approach Course (highlighted in red in the examples above) is the segment between the final approach fix or point and the runway, airport, or missed approach point. \n\n- • Missed Approach (highlighted in green in the example above) begins at the MAP and continues until the desig- nated fix or waypoint. Missed Approach Procedure Track is shown as a hash marked line in the planview. If the missed approach fix falls outside of the area of the planview it will be shown in a separate box in the planview.\n\n100" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5450176720923848, + "doc_id": "327785d792086fbbfc78fb4ba12440a5ed868d915033e00f2ec4bc0e91b9a061", + "edit_distance": 0.4117647058823529, + "f1_score": 0.9523809523809523, + "meteor": 0.9308411214953272, + "precision": 0.9090909090909091, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS OD-80T-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE\n\nFigure 2.21. Climb Performance\n\nFigure 2.21. Climb Performance\n\n153", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OD-80T-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE \n\nFigure 2.21. Climb Performance \n\n153" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.3832031049494125, + "doc_id": "f7576ae0b2e02a7daaa1ca0f4ab91c71aeea140133be30a62fd18748ad7a5719", + "edit_distance": 0.5689655172413793, + "f1_score": 0.7741935483870968, + "meteor": 0.877286219081272, + "precision": 0.631578947368421, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS OO-EOT-80 APP,LlCATlON OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYING\n\n## VARIATION OF SPEED WITH DISTANCE FOR UNIFORMLY ACCELERATED MOTION DURING TAKEOFF ROLL\n\nPER CENT OF TAKEOFF\n\nDISTANCE\n\nFigure 6.12. Refused Take& and Takeof\\ Velocity Variafion\n\nFigure 6.12. Refused Take& and Takeof\\ Velocity Variafion\n\n393", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OO-EOT-80 APP,LlCATlON OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYING \n\nFigure 6.12. Refused Take& and Takeof\\ Velocity Variafion \n\n393" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "2c214c924fa986c1e22a719b395cf1e962c2d77595b24f73b70ce3300907c88b", + "edit_distance": 0.5689655172413793, + "f1_score": 0.7741935483870968, + "meteor": 0.877286219081272, + "precision": 0.631578947368421, + "pred_md": "B", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8529106453000467, + "doc_id": "fcf4cda77e12cdfe5cd2efffdf789beac8a280e9a3b95764aa9591ea477a1494", + "edit_distance": 0.5543766578249337, + "f1_score": 0.9671532846715328, + "meteor": 0.7293661182996397, + "precision": 0.9851301115241635, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS OD-80140 APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS\n\n## TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYING\n\nblade must operate at a greater angle of attack. If the blade pitch is increased or the forward speed increased the stalled portion of the rotor disc becomes larger with the stall progressing in toward the hub from the tip of the retreating blade. When approximately 15 percent of the rotor disc is stalled, control of the helicopter will be impossible. Flight tests have determined that control becomes marginal and the stall is considered severe when the outer one-quarter of the retreating blade is stalled. Retreating blade stall can be recognized by rotor toughness, erratic stick forces, a vibration and stick shake with a frequency determined by the number of blades and the rotor speed. Each of the blades of a three-bladed rotor will stall as it passes through the stall region and create a vibration with three beats pet rotor revolution. Other evidence of retreating blade stall is partial or complete loss of control or a pitch-up tendency which can be uncontrollable if the stall is severe.\n\nConditions favorable for the occurrence of retreating blade stall are those conditions that result in high retreating blade angles of attack. Each of the following conditions results in a higher angle of attack on the retreating blade and may contribute to retreating blade stall:\n\n- 1. High airspeed\n- 2. Low totor RPM-operation at low rotor RPM necessitates the use of higher blade pitch to get a given thrust from the rotor, thus a higher angle of attack\n- 3. High gross weight\n- 4. High density altitude\n- 5. Accelerated flight, high load factor\n- 6. Flight through turbulent air or gustssharp updrafts result in temporary increase in blade angle of attack\n- 7. Excessive ot abrupt control deflections during maneuvers\n\nRecovery from a stalled condition can be effected only by decreasing the blade angle of attack below the stall angle. This can be accomplished by one or a combination of the\n\nfollowing items depending on severity of the stall:\n\n- 1. Decrease collective pitch\n- 2. Decrease airspeed\n- 3. Increase rotor RPM\n- 4. Decrease severity of accelerated manewer or control deflection\n\nIf the stall is severe enough to result in pitch-up, forward cyclic to attempt to control pitch-up is ineffective and may aggravate the stall since forward cyclic results in an increase in blade angle of attack on the retreating blade. The helicopter will automatically recover from a severe stall since the airspeed is decreased in the nose high attitude but recovery can be assisted by gradual reduction in collective pitch, increasing RPM, and leveling the helicopter with pedal and cyclic stick.\n\nFrom the previous discussion, it is apparent that there is some degree of retreating blade stall even at moderate airspeeds. However, the helicopter is able to perform satisfactorily until a sufficiently large area of the rotor disc is stalled. Adequate warning of the impending stall is present when the stall condition is approached slowly. There is inadequate warni,ng of the stall only when the blade pitch or blade angle of attack is increased rapidly. Therefore, unintentional severe stall is most likely to occur during abrupt control motions or rapid accelerated maneuvers.\n\nCOMPRESSIBILITY EFFECTS. The highest relative velocities occur at the tip of the advancing blade since the speed of the helicopter is added to the speed due to rotation at this point. When the Mach number of the tip section of the advancing blade exceeds the critical Mach number for the rotor blade section, compressibility effects result. The critical Mach number is reduced by thick, highly cambered airfoils and critical Mach number decreases with increased lift coefficient. Most helicopter blades have symmetrical sections and therefore have relatively high critical Mach numbers at low lift coefhcients. Since the principal effects of compressibility are the", + "recall": 0.9498207885304659, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OD-80140 APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYING \n\nfollowing items depending on severity of the stall: \n\nblade must operate at a greater angle of attack. If the blade pitch is increased or the forward speed increased the stalled portion of the rotor disc becomes larger with the stall progressing in toward the hub from the tip of the retreating blade. When approximately 15 percent of the rotor disc is stalled, control of the heli- copter will be impossible. Flight tests have determined that control becomes marginal and the stall is considered severe when the outer one-quarter of the retreating blade is stalled. Retreating blade stall can be recognized by rotor toughness, erratic stick forces, a vibration and stick shake with a frequency determined by the number of blades and the rotor speed. Each of the blades of a three-bladed rotor will stall as it passes through the stall region and create a vibration with three beats pet rotor revolution. Other evidence of retreating blade stall is partial or complete loss of control or a pitch-up tendency which can be uncontrollable if the stall is severe. \n\n- 1. Decrease collective pitch \n\n- 2. Decrease airspeed 3. Increase rotor RPM \n\n- 2. Decrease airspeed 3. Increase rotor RPM \n\n- 4. Decrease severity of accelerated ma- newer or control deflection \n\nIf the stall is severe enough to result in pitch-up, forward cyclic to attempt to control pitch-up is ineffective and may aggravate the stall since forward cyclic results in an increase in blade angle of attack on the retreating blade. The helicopter will automatically recover from a severe stall since the airspeed is decreased in the nose high attitude but recovery can be assisted by gradual reduction in collective pitch, increasing RPM, and leveling the heli- copter with pedal and cyclic stick. \n\nFrom the previous discussion, it is apparent that there is some degree of retreating blade stall even at moderate airspeeds. However, the helicopter is able to perform satisfactorily until a sufficiently large area of the rotor disc is stalled. Adequate warning of the impend- ing stall is present when the stall condition is approached slowly. There is inadequate warni,ng of the stall only when the blade pitch or blade angle of attack is increased rapidly. Therefore, unintentional severe stall is most likely to occur during abrupt control motions or rapid accelerated maneuvers. \n\nCOMPRESSIBILITY EFFECTS. The highest relative velocities occur at the tip of the ad- vancing blade since the speed of the helicopter is added to the speed due to rotation at this point. When the Mach number of the tip section of the advancing blade exceeds the critical Mach number for the rotor blade sec- tion, compressibility effects result. The criti- cal Mach number is reduced by thick, highly cambered airfoils and critical Mach number decreases with increased lift coefficient. Most helicopter blades have symmetrical sections and therefore have relatively high critical Mach numbers at low lift coefhcients. Since the principal effects of compressibility are the \n\nConditions favorable for the occurrence of retreating blade stall are those conditions that result in high retreating blade angles of attack. Each of the following conditions results in a higher angle of attack on the retreating blade and may contribute to retreating blade stall: 1. High airspeed \n\nRecovery from a stalled condition can be effected only by decreasing the blade angle of attack below the stall angle. This can be accomplished by one or a combination of the \n\n- and may contribute to retreating blade stall: 1. High airspeed \n\n- 2. Low totor RPM-operation at low rotor RPM necessitates the use of higher blade pitch to get a given thrust from the rotor, thus a higher angle of attack \n\n- 3. High gross weight 4. High density altitude \n\n- 3. High gross weight 4. High density altitude \n\n- 5. Accelerated flight, high load factor 6. Flight through turbulent air or gusts- \n\n- 5. Accelerated flight, high load factor 6. Flight through turbulent air or gusts- sharp updrafts result in temporary increase in blade angle of attack 7. Excessive ot abrupt control deflections \n\n- increase in blade angle of attack 7. Excessive ot abrupt control deflections during maneuvers" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9083889702383389, + "doc_id": "08f6c5af8e354f15c8a360e96dfada9b507db0dd1958c30a310f7cd927f0aa2d", + "edit_distance": 0.48284960422163586, + "f1_score": 0.9359223300970874, + "meteor": 0.7392274092635684, + "precision": 0.9678714859437751, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS 00-SOT-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS\n\nIf the surface of the plate is smooth and the original airstream has no turbulence, the plate at low Reynolds Numbers will exist with pure laminar flow. When the RN is increased to approximately 530,000, transition occurs on the plate and the flow is partly turbulent. Once transition takes place, the drag coefficient of the plate increases from the laminar curve to the turbulent curve. As the RN approaches very high values (20 to 50 million) the drag curve of the plate approaches and nearly equals the values for the turbulent curve. At such high RN the boundary layer is predominantly turbulent with very little laminar flow-the transition point is very close to the leading edge. While the smooth, flat plate is not exactly representative of the typical airfoil, basic fluid friction phenomena are illustrated. At RN less than a half million the boundary layer will be entirely laminar unless there is extreme surface roughness or turbulence induced in the airstream. Reynolds Numbers between one and five million produce boundary layer flow which is partly laminar and partly turbulent. At RN above ten million the boundary layer characteristics are predominantly turbulent.\n\nIn order to obtain low drag sections, the transition from laminar to turbulent must be delayed so that a greater portion of the surface will be influenced by the laminar boundary layer. The conventional, low speed airfoil shapes are characterized, by minimum pressure points very close to the leading edge. Since high local velocities enhance early transition, very little surface is covered by the laminar boundary layer, A comparison of two 9 percent thick symmetrical airfoils is presented in figure 1.25. One section is the ' conventional' NACA C!UO~ section which has a minimum pressure point at approximately 10 percent chord at zero lift. The other section is the NACA 66039 which has a minimum pressure point at approximately 60 percent chord at zero lift. The lower local velocities at the leading edge and the favorable pressure gradient of the NACA 66-009\n\n56\n\ndelay the transition to some point farther aft on the chord. The subsequent reduction in friction drag at the low angles of attack accounts for the ' drag bucket' shown on the graphs of cd and cI for these sections. Of course, the advantages of the laminar flow airfoil are apparent only for the smooth airfoil since surface roughness or waviness may preclude extensive development of a laminar boundary layer.\n\nAIRFLOW SEPARATION. The character of the boundary layer on an aerodynamic surface is greatly influenced by the pressure gradient. In order to study this effect, the pressure distribution of a cylinder in a perfect fluid is repeated in figure 1.26. The airflows depict a local velocity of !zero at the forward stagnation point and a maximum local velocity at the extreme surface. The airflow moves from the high positive pressure to the minimum pressure point-a favorable pressure gradient (high to low). As the air moves from the extreme surface aft, the local velocity decreases to zero at the aft stagnation point. The static pressure increases from the minimum (or maxi mum suction) to the high positive pressure at the aft stagnation point-an adverse pressure gradient (low to high).\n\nThe action of the pressure gradient is such that the favorable pressure gradient assists the boundary layer while the adverse pressure gradient i mpedes the flow of the boundary layer. The effect of an adverse pressure gradient is illustrated by the segment X-Y of figure 1.26. A corollary of the skin friction drag is the continual reduction of boundary layer energy as flow continues aft on a surface. * The velocity profiles of the boundary layer are shown on segment X-Y of figure 1.26. In the area of adverse pressure gradient the boundary layer flow is impeded and tends to show a reduction in velocity next to the surface. If the boundary layer does not have sufhcient kinetic energy in the presence of the adverse pressure gradient, the lower levels of the boundary layer may stagnate prematurely.", + "recall": 0.9060150375939849, + "true_md": "56 \n\ndelay the transition to some point farther aft on the chord. The subsequent reduction in friction drag at the low angles of attack ac- counts for the “drag bucket” shown on the graphs of cd and cI for these sections. Of course, the advantages of the laminar flow airfoil are apparent only for the smooth airfoil since surface roughness or waviness may pre- clude extensive development of a laminar boundary layer. \n\nIf the surface of the plate is smooth and the original airstream has no turbulence, the plate at low Reynolds Numbers will exist with pure laminar flow. When the RN is increased to approximately 530,000, transition occurs on the plate and the flow is partly turbulent. Once transition takes place, the drag coefficient of the plate increases from the laminar curve to the turbulent curve. As the RN approaches very high values (20 to 50 million) the drag curve of the plate approaches and nearly equals the values for the turbulent curve. At such high RN the boundary layer is predominantly turbulent with very little laminar flow-the transition point is very close to the leading edge. While the smooth, flat plate is not ex- actly representative of the typical airfoil, basic fluid friction phenomena are illustrated. At RN less than a half million the boundary layer will be entirely laminar unless there is extreme surface roughness or turbulence induced in the airstream. Reynolds Numbers between one and five million produce boundary layer flow which is partly laminar and partly turbulent. At RN above ten million the boundary layer characteristics are predominantly turbulent. \n\nIn order to obtain low drag sections, the transition from laminar to turbulent must be delayed so that a greater portion of the sur- face will be influenced by the laminar bound- ary layer. The conventional, low speed air- foil shapes are characterized, by minimum pressure points very close to the leading edge. Since high local velocities enhance early transition, very little surface is covered by the laminar boundary layer, A comparison of two 9 percent thick symmetrical airfoils is presented in figure 1.25. One section is the “conventional” NACA C!UO~ section which has a minimum pressure point at approxi- mately 10 percent chord at zero lift. The other section is the NACA 66039 which has a minimum pressure point at approximately 60 percent chord at zero lift. The lower local velocities at the leading edge and the favor- able pressure gradient of the NACA 66-009 \n\nsure gradient (low to high). The action of the pressure gradient is such that the favorable pressure gradient assists the boundary layer while the adverse pressure gradient impedes the flow of the boundary layer. The effect of an adverse pressure gradi- ent is illustrated by the segment X-Y of figure 1.26. A corollary of the skin friction drag is the continual reduction of boundary layer energy as flow continues aft on a surface. * The velocity profiles of the boundary layer are shown on segment X-Y of figure 1.26. In the area of adverse pressure gradient the bound- ary layer flow is impeded and tends to show a reduction in velocity next to the surface. If the boundary layer does not have sufhcient kinetic energy in the presence of the adverse pressure gradient, the lower levels of the boundary layer may stagnate prematurely. \n\nAIRFLOW SEPARATION. The character of the boundary layer on an aerodynamic surface is greatly influenced by the pressure gradient. In order to study this effect, the pressure distribution of a cylinder in a perfect fluid is repeated in figure 1.26. The airflows depict a local velocity of !zero at the forward stagnation point and a maximum local velocity at the extreme surface. The airflow moves from the high positive pressure to the minimum pressure point-a favorable pressure gradient (high to low). As the air moves from the extreme surface aft, the local velocity decreases to zero at the aft stagnation point. The static pressure increases from the minimum (or max- imum suction) to the high positive pressure at the aft stagnation point-an adverse pres- sure gradient (low to high). The action of the pressure gradient is such \n\n## NAVWEPS 00-SOT-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7465524488751861, + "doc_id": "5f8ae174b1ff3cdb0a57ee0424bfd928c943a3f8b6fc7e91b9a351d880c383f2", + "edit_distance": 0.6870554765291608, + "f1_score": 0.8640595903165735, + "meteor": 0.6761094574698201, + "precision": 0.9392712550607287, + "pred_md": "## PLIGHT AT HIGH LIFT CONDITIONS\n\nIt is frequently stated that the career Naval Aviator spends more than half his life ' below a thousand feet and a hundred knots.' Regardless of the implications of such a statement, the thought does cunnute the relationship of minimum flying speeds and carrier aviation. Only in Naval Aviation is there such importance assigned to precision control of the aircraft at high lift conditions. Safe operation in carrier aviation demands precision control of the airplane at high lift conditions.\n\nThe aerodynamic lift characteristics of an airplane are portrayed by the curve of lift coefficient versus angle of attack. Such a curve is illustrated in figure 1.15 for a specific airplane in the clean and flap down configurations. A given aerodynamic configuration experiences increases in lift coefficient with increases in angle of attack until the maximum lift coefficient is obtained. A further increase in angIe of attack produces stall and the lift coefficient then decreases. Since the maximum lift coefficient corresponds to the minimum speed available in flight, it is an important point of reference. The stall speed of the aircraft in level flight is related by the equation:\n\n\n\nwhere\n\nV.-stall speed, knots TAS W=gross weight, lbs. c Lnoz= airplane maximum lift coefficient csaltitude density ratio S= wing area, sq. ft.\n\nThis equation illustrates the effect on stall speed of weight and wing area (or wing loading, W/S), maximum lift coefficient, and altitude. If the stall speed is desired in EAS, the density ratio will be that for sea level (u= 1.000).\n\nEFFECT OF WEIGHT. Modern configurations of airplanes are characterized by a large percent. of the maximum gross weight being\n\n35\n\nNAVWEPS 00-BOT-RO BASIC AERODYNAMICS\n\nfuel. Hence, the gross weight and stall speed of the airplane can vary considerably throughout the flight. The effect of only weight on stall speed can be expressed by a modified form of the stall speed equation where density ratio, c r,,,.,, and wing area are held constant.\n\n\n\nwhere V*,=stall speed corresponding to some gross weight, WI\n\nV@a= stall speed corresponding to a different gross weight, WP\n\nAs an illustration of this equation, assume that a particular airplane has a stall speed of 100 knots at a gross weight of 10,000 lbs. The stall speeds of this Sam: airplane at other gross weights would be:\n\nFigure 1.15 illustrates the effect of weight on stall speed on a percentage basis and will be valid for any airplane. Many specific conditions of flight are accomplished at certain fixed angles of attack and lift coefficients. The effect of weight on a percentage basis on the speeds for any specific lift coefficient and angle of attack is identical. Note that at small variations of weight, a rule of thumb may express the effect of weight on stall speed' a 2 percent change in weight causes a I percent change in stall speed.'\n\nEFFECT OF MANEUVERING FLIGHT. Turning flight and maneuvers produce an effect on stall speed which is similar to the effect of weight. Inspection of the chart on figure 1.16 shows the forces acting on an airplane in a steady turn. Any steady turn requires that the vertical component of Iift be equal to", + "recall": 0.8, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-BOT-RO BASIC AERODYNAMICS \n\nfuel. Hence, the gross weight and stall speed of the airplane can vary considerably through- out the flight. The effect of only weight on stall speed can be expressed by a modified form of the stall speed equation where density ratio, c r,,,.,, and wing area are held constant. \n\nIt is frequently stated that the career Naval Aviator spends more than half his life “below a thousand feet and a hundred knots.” Re- gardless of the implications of such a state- ment, the thought does cunnute the relation- ship of minimum flying speeds and carrier aviation. Only in Naval Aviation is there such importance assigned to precision control of the aircraft at high lift conditions. Safe operation in carrier aviation demands precision control of the airplane at high lift conditions. The aerodynamic lift characteristics of an \n\ncontrol of the airplane at high lift conditions. The aerodynamic lift characteristics of an airplane are portrayed by the curve of lift coefficient versus angle of attack. Such a curve is illustrated in figure 1.15 for a specific airplane in the clean and flap down configura- tions. A given aerodynamic configuration ex- periences increases in lift coefficient with in- creases in angle of attack until the maximum lift coefficient is obtained. A further increase in angIe of attack produces stall and the lift coefficient then decreases. Since the maximum lift coefficient corresponds to the minimum speed available in flight, it is an important point of reference. The stall speed of the air- craft in level flight is related by the equation: \n\nAs an illustration of this equation, assume that a particular airplane has a stall speed of 100 knots at a gross weight of 10,000 lbs. The stall speeds of this Sam: airplane at other gross weights would be: \n\nwhere \n\nV*,=stall speed corresponding to some gross weight, WI V@a= stall speed corresponding to a dif- \n\ngross weight, WI V@a= stall speed corresponding to a dif- ferent gross weight, WP \n\nFigure 1.15 illustrates the effect of weight on stall speed on a percentage basis and will be valid for any airplane. Many specific condi- tions of flight are accomplished at certain fixed angles of attack and lift coefficients. The effect of weight on a percentage basis on the speeds for any specific lift coefficient and angle of attack is identical. Note that at small variations of weight, a rule of thumb may express the effect of weight on stall speed- “a 2 percent change in weight causes a I per- cent change in stall speed.” \n\nThis equation illustrates the effect on stall speed of weight and wing area (or wing load- ing, W/S), maximum lift coefficient, and alti- tude. If the stall speed is desired in EAS, the density ratio will be that for sea level (u= 1.000). EFFECT OF WEIGHT. Modern configu- \n\n1.000). EFFECT OF WEIGHT. Modern configu- rations of airplanes are characterized by a large percent. of the maximum gross weight being \n\nEFFECT OF MANEUVERING FLIGHT. Turning flight and maneuvers produce an effect on stall speed which is similar to the effect of weight. Inspection of the chart on figure 1.16 shows the forces acting on an airplane in a steady turn. Any steady turn requires that the vertical component of Iift be equal to \n\nV.-stall speed, knots TAS W=gross weight, lbs. c Lnoz= airplane maximum lift coefficient csaltitude density ratio S= wing area, sq. ft. \n\nwhere \n\n$$V7.=17.2 J-- c w .ln2s $$\n\n$$ll,W 100x 4, ‘ &~=lO, 12,ooO 110 14,4al 120 9mJ 95 8,100 90 $$\n\n## EFFECT OF MANEUVERING FLIGHT. Turning flight and maneuvers produce an\n\n35 \n\n$$V _i_z- K J v.,- K $$\n\n## PLIGHT AT HIGH LIFT CONDITIONS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.025195112400546955, + "doc_id": "dfe6c5715dcae5dd8ade2cd4f9bf4b9f10580ba2013b4febd2114c8b740eecf1", + "edit_distance": 0.9782608695652174, + "f1_score": 0.1751824817518248, + "meteor": 0.34721760521241946, + "precision": 0.0967741935483871, + "pred_md": "## AIRSPACE INFORMATION\n\nAirway/Route Types Low and High Enroute Airway Data:\n\n## Low Enroute Charts\n\nVictor Airways\n\nLF/MF Airway\n\nUncontrolled LF/MF Airway\n\nRNAV T Route\n\nGNSS Required\n\nRNAV TK Helicopter Route\n\nGNSS Required\n\nPreferred Single Direction Victor Route\n\nUnusable Route Segment\n\nDirection of Flight Indicator Canadian\n\nRoutes Only\n\nMilitary Training Routes (MTR)\n\nMTRs 5NM or less both sides of centerline\n\nMTRs greater than 5NM either or both sides of centerline\n\nArrow indicates direction of route\n\nSee MTR tabulation for altitude range information\n\nAll IR and VR MTRs are shown except those VRs at or bleow 1500' AGL\n\nCAUTION: Inset charts do not depict MTRs\n\nLow and High Enroute Charts\n\nATS Route\n\nOceanic Route\n\n75\n\nVHF/UHF Data is depicted in Black. LF/MF Data is depicted in Brown. RNAV Route data is depicted in Blue\n\nHigh Enroute Charts\n\nJet Routes\n\nAtlantic Routes\n\nBahama Routes\n\nRNAV Q Routes\n\nAlaska Q Routes require GNSS and radar surveillance. Within the CONUS, GNSS or DME/DME/IRU RNAV required, unless otherwise indicated. DME/DME/IRU aircraft require radar surveillance.\n\nPreferred Single Direction Jet Routes\n\nPreferred Single Direction RNAV Q Routes\n\nSingle Direction ATS Route\n\nUnusable Route Segment\n\nSubstitute Route\n\nAll relative and supporting data See NOTAMs or appropriate shown in brown. publication for specific\n\ninformation.\n\nFAA Chart Users' Guide - IFR Enroute Symbology", + "recall": 0.9230769230769231, + "true_md": "75\n\nFAA Chart Users’ Guide - IFR Enroute Symbology\n\n## AIRSPACE INFORMATION" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.3573352482107136, + "doc_id": "d7f59e782165697f6e765368e02e688356219d63f1cdc8ea4ce3101003f482b7", + "edit_distance": 0.5217391304347826, + "f1_score": 0.7857142857142857, + "meteor": 0.8989296843246173, + "precision": 0.6470588235294118, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS OO-80T-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL\n\nAIRPLANE\n\nRESPONSE TO AILERON\n\nDEFLECTION\n\nFigure 4.29. Rolling Performance\n\nFigure 4.29. Rolling Performance\n\n302", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OO-80T-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL \n\nFigure 4.29. Rolling Performance \n\n302" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4608662469973654, + "doc_id": "48ed4c1f1e45caf57360fd158b4c679ba5b64f88d6bca7aef089a071a61efcf6", + "edit_distance": 0.5, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9087494023632265, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Figure 7.26. Airflow Separation (sheet 2 of 2)\n\nFigure 7.26. Airflow Separation (sheet 2 of 2)", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Figure 7.26. Airflow Separation (sheet 2 of 2)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8034172302741047, + "doc_id": "2ee8bcc1a6b359cf9db9e0e0f234b5aa81a8479e0258bd9db6b6dec669f40636", + "edit_distance": 0.6933962264150944, + "f1_score": 0.9365558912386708, + "meteor": 0.8341579671427198, + "precision": 0.9117647058823529, + "pred_md": "## IFR ENROUTE LOW / HIGH ALTITUDE SYMBOLS\n\n## (U.S., PACIFIC AND ALASKA CHARTS)\n\n## AIRPORTS\n\nSeaplane - Civil\n\nCharts: Low\n\nHeliport\n\nCharts: Low\n\nEmergency Use Only\n\nPacific Only\n\nFacilities in BLUE or GREEN have an approved Instrument Approach Procedure and/or RADAR MINIMA published in either the FAA Terminal Procedures Publication or the DoD FLIPs. Those in BLUE have an Instrument Approach Procedure and/or RADAR MINIMA published at least in the High Altitude DoD FLIPs. Facilities in BROWN do not have a published Instrument Procedure or RADAR MINIMA.\n\nAll IAP Airports are shown on the Low Altitude Charts.\n\nNon-IAP Airports shown on the U.S. Low Altitude Charts have a minimum hard surface runway of 3000'.\n\nAirports shown on the U.S. High Altitude Charts have a minimum hard surface runway of 5000'.\n\nAirports shown on the Alask High Altitude Charts have a minimum hard or soft surface runway of 4000'.\n\nAssociated city names for public airports are shown above or preceding the airport name and city name are the same only the airport name is shown. City names for military and private airports are not shown.\n\nThe airport identifier in parentheses follows the airport name or Pvt.\n\nPvt - Private Use\n\n## AIRPORT DATA DEPICTION\n\nLow Altitude\n\n- 1. Airport elevation given in feet above or below mean sea level\n- 2. Pvt - Private use, not available to general public\n- 3. A solid line box enclosed the airport name indicates FAR 93 Special Requirements - see Directory/Supplement\n- 4. 'NO SVFR' above the airport name indicates FAR 91 fixedwing special VFR flight is prohibited.\n\n5. or following the airport identifier indicates Class C or Class D Airspace\n\nHigh Altitude - U.S.\n\n- 6. Associated city names for public airports are shown above or preceding the airport name. If airport name and city name are the same, only the airport name is shown. The airport identifier in parentheses follows the airport name. City names for military and private airports are not shown.\n\n7. Airport Ident ICAO Location Indicator shown outside contiguous U.S.\n\n- 8. AFIS Alaska only\n\nHigh Altitude - Alaska\n\nAirport Data - Low/High Altitude\n\nCivil\n\nCharts: High/Low\n\nCivil And Military\n\nCharts: High/Low\n\nMilitary\n\nCharts: High/Low\n\nSeaplane - Civil\n\nHeliport\n\nEmergency Use Only\n\n69\n\nFAA Chart Users' Guide - IFR Enroute Symbology", + "recall": 0.9627329192546584, + "true_md": "FAA Chart Users’ Guide - IFR Enroute Symbology\n\nPvt - Private Use\n\nThe airport identifier in parentheses follows the airport name or Pvt.\n\nAssociated city names for public airports are shown above or preceding the airport name and city name are the same only the airport name is shown. City names for military and private airports are not shown.\n\nAirports shown on the Alask High Altitude Charts have a minimum hard or soft surface runway of 4000’.\n\nAirports shown on the U.S. High Altitude Charts have a minimum hard surface runway of 5000’.\n\nNon-IAP Airports shown on the U.S. Low Altitude Charts have a minimum hard surface runway of 3000’.\n\nAll IAP Airports are shown on the Low Altitude Charts.\n\nFacilities in BLUE or GREEN have an approved Instrument Approach Procedure and/or RADAR MINIMA published in either the FAA Terminal Procedures Publication or the DoD FLIPs. Those in BLUE have an Instrument Approach Procedure and/or RADAR MINIMA published at least in the High Altitude DoD FLIPs. Facilities in BROWN do not have a published Instrument Procedure or RADAR MINIMA.\n\n## IFR ENROUTE LOW / HIGH ALTITUDE SYMBOLS (U.S., PACIFIC AND ALASKA CHARTS)\n\n## AIRPORTS\n\n## AIRPORT DATA DEPICTION\n\n## Low Altitude\n\n- 5. or following the airport identifier indicates Class C or Class D Airspace\n\n- 4. “NO SVFR” above the airport name indicates FAR 91 fixed- wing special VFR flight is prohibited.\n\n- 3. A solid line box enclosed the airport name indicates FAR 93 Special Requirements - see Directory/Supplement\n\n- 2. Pvt - Private use, not available to general public\n\n- 1. Airport elevation given in feet above or below mean sea level\n\n- 6. Associated city names for public airports are shown above or preceding the airport name. If airport name and city name are the same, only the airport name is shown. The airport identifier in parentheses follows the airport name. City names for military and private airports are not shown.\n\n- 7. Airport Ident ICAO Location Indicator shown outside contiguous U.S.\n\n- 8. AFIS Alaska only\n\nHigh Altitude - Alaska\n\nHigh Altitude - U.S.\n\n69" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5697863655544793, + "doc_id": "9a6c4191e16f6f1738060e766fbf1cbc85608e715e1f3f17a750af7cc5a6f727", + "edit_distance": 0.6, + "f1_score": 0.9600000000000002, + "meteor": 0.8200152207001522, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS 00-801-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS\n\nFigure 1.34. Airplane Parasite and Induced Drag\n\nFigure 1.34. Airplane Parasite and Induced Drag", + "recall": 0.9230769230769231, + "true_md": "Figure 1.34. Airplane Parasite and Induced Drag \n\n## NAVWEPS 00-801-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8584376115206404, + "doc_id": "f2ccc2a12c6365435cee8fd8745ac3d212548def6355af173c98cbc5e05a69ed", + "edit_distance": 0.6549935149156939, + "f1_score": 0.9715302491103204, + "meteor": 0.7225671740601786, + "precision": 0.9820143884892086, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS 00-8OT-80 HIGH SPEED AERODYNAMICS\n\nshock wave forms as the boundary between the supersonic flow and the subsonic flow on the aft portion of the airfoil surface. The acceleration of the airflow from subsonic to supersonic is smooth and unaccompanied by shock waves if the surface is smooth and the transition gradual. However, the transition of airflow from supersonic to subsonic is always accompanied by a shock wave and, when there is no change in direction of the airflow, the wave form is a normal shock wave.\n\nRecall that one of the principal effects of th,e normal shock wave is to produce a large increase in the static pressure of the airstream behind the wave. If the shock wave is strong, the boundary layer may not have sufficient kinetic energy to withstand the large, adverse pressure gradient and separation will occur. At speeds only slightly beyond critical Mach number the shock wave formed is not strong enough to cause spearation or any noticeable change in the aerodynamic force coefficients. However, an increase in speed above critical Mach number sufhcient to form a strong shock wave can cause separation of the boundary layer and produce sudden changes in the aerodynamic force coefficients. Such a flow condition is shown in figure 3.9 by the flow pattern for M=O.n. Notice that a further increase in Mach number to 0.82 can enlarge the supersonic area on the upper surface and form an additional area of supersonic flow and normal shock wave on the lower surface.\n\nAs the flight speed approaches the speed of sound the areas of supersonic flow enlarge and the shock waves move nearer the trailing edge. The boundary layer may remain separated or may reattach depending much upon the airfoil shape and angle of attack. When the flight speed exceeds the speed of sound the ' bow' wave forms at the leading edge and this typical flow pattern is illustrated in figure 3.9 by the drawing for M= 1.05. If the speed is increased to some higher supersonic\n\n218\n\nvalue all oblique portions of the waves incline more greatly and the detached normal shock portion of the bow wave moves closer to the leading edge.\n\nOf course, all components of the aircraft are affected by compressibility in a manner somewhat similar to that of basic airfoil. The tail, fuselage, nacelles, canopy, etc. and the efkct of the interference between the various surfaces of the aircraft must be considered.\n\nFORCE DIVERGENCE. The airflow separation i nduced by shock wave formation can create significant variations in the aerodynamic force coefficients. When the free stream speed is greater than critical Mach number some typical effects on an airfoil section are as follows :\n\n- (1) An increase in the section drag coefficient for a given section lift coe5cient.\n- (2) A decrease in section lift coefficient for a given section angle of attack.\n- (3) A change in section pitching moment coe5cient.\n\nA reference point is usually taken by a plot of drag coe5cient versus Mach number for a constant lift coefficient. Such a graph is shown in figure 3.10. The Mach number which produces a sharp change in the drag coe5cient is termed the ' force divergence' Mach number and, for most airfoils, usually exceeds the critical Mach number at least 5 to 10 percent. This condition is also referred to as the ' drag divergence' or ' drag rise.'\n\nPHENOMENA OF TRANSONIC FLIGHT. Associated with the ' drag rise' are buffet, trim and stability changes, and a decrease in control surface effectiveness. Conventional aileron, rudder, and elevator surfaces sub jetted to this high frequency buffet may ' buzz,' and changes in hinge moments may produce undesirable control forces. Of course, if the buffet is quite severe and prolonged, structural damage may occur if this operation is in violation of operating limitations. When airflow separation occurs on the wing due to", + "recall": 0.9612676056338029, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-8OT-80 HIGH SPEED AERODYNAMICS \n\nvalue all oblique portions of the waves incline more greatly and the detached normal shock portion of the bow wave moves closer to the leading edge. \n\nOf course, all components of the aircraft are affected by compressibility in a manner somewhat similar to that of basic airfoil. The tail, fuselage, nacelles, canopy, etc. and the efkct of the interference between the various surfaces of the aircraft must be considered. FORCE DIVERGENCE. The airflow sepa- \n\nshock wave forms as the boundary between the supersonic flow and the subsonic flow on the aft portion of the airfoil surface. The acceleration of the airflow from subsonic to supersonic is smooth and unaccompanied by shock waves if the surface is smooth and the transition gradual. However, the transition of airflow from supersonic to subsonic is always accompanied by a shock wave and, when there is no change in direction of the airflow, the wave form is a normal shock wave. Recall that one of the principal effects of \n\nconsidered. FORCE DIVERGENCE. The airflow sepa- ration induced by shock wave formation can create significant variations in the aerody- namic force coefficients. When the free stream speed is greater than critical Mach number some typical effects on an airfoil section are as follows : (1) An increase in the section drag coeffi- \n\nwave. Recall that one of the principal effects of th,e normal shock wave is to produce a large increase in the static pressure of the airstream behind the wave. If the shock wave is strong, the boundary layer may not have sufficient kinetic energy to withstand the large, adverse pressure gradient and separation will occur. At speeds only slightly beyond critical Mach number the shock wave formed is not strong enough to cause spearation or any noticeable change in the aerodynamic force coefficients. However, an increase in speed above critical Mach number sufhcient to form a strong shock wave can cause sepa- ration of the boundary layer and produce sudden changes in the aerodynamic force coefficients. Such a flow condition is shown in figure 3.9 by the flow pattern for M=O.n. Notice that a further increase in Mach number to 0.82 can enlarge the supersonic area on the upper surface and form an additional area of supersonic flow and normal shock wave on the lower surface. \n\nfollows : (1) An increase in the section drag coeffi- cient for a given section lift coe5cient. \n\n(2) A decrease in section lift coefficient for a given section angle of attack. \n\n(3) A change in section pitching moment coe5cient. A reference point is usually taken by a plot \n\ncoe5cient. A reference point is usually taken by a plot of drag coe5cient versus Mach number for a constant lift coefficient. Such a graph is shown in figure 3.10. The Mach number which produces a sharp change in the drag coe5cient is termed the “force divergence” Mach number and, for most airfoils, usually exceeds the critical Mach number at least 5 to 10 percent. This condition is also referred to as the “drag divergence” or “drag rise.” PHENOMENA OF TRANSONIC FLIGHT. \n\nAssociated with the “drag rise” are buffet, trim and stability changes, and a decrease in control surface effectiveness. Conventional aileron, rudder, and elevator surfaces sub jetted to this high frequency buffet may “buzz,” and changes in hinge moments may produce undesirable control forces. Of course, if the buffet is quite severe and prolonged, structural damage may occur if this operation is in violation of operating limitations. When airflow separation occurs on the wing due to \n\nAs the flight speed approaches the speed of sound the areas of supersonic flow enlarge and the shock waves move nearer the trailing edge. The boundary layer may remain sepa- rated or may reattach depending much upon the airfoil shape and angle of attack. When the flight speed exceeds the speed of sound the “bow” wave forms at the leading edge and this typical flow pattern is illustrated in figure 3.9 by the drawing for M= 1.05. If the speed is increased to some higher supersonic \n\n## to as the “drag divergence” or “drag rise.” PHENOMENA OF TRANSONIC FLIGHT.\n\n218" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7509396823091735, + "doc_id": "e050097e7df18fb9f32374a48f29ba4b3be38e83b02a4ab5f91c71ea4f178bf4", + "edit_distance": 0.4863013698630137, + "f1_score": 0.8810572687224669, + "meteor": 0.632326875469787, + "precision": 0.9259259259259259, + "pred_md": "in with the induced drag coefficient by a constant factor which is defined as the ' airplane e5ciency factor' , c. By this method of accounting the airplane drag coe5cient is expressed as :\n\nwhere\n\nC DPmB= oefficient minimum parasite drag c CD;= induced drag coe5cient e = airplane e5ciency factor\n\nIn this form, the airplane drag coefficient is expressed as the sum of drag not due to lift F%d' ) and drag due to lift (G). The airplane efficiency factor is some co&ant (usually less than unity) which includes parasite drag due to lift with the drag i nduced by lift. C Dpmr' s invariant i with lift and represents the parasite drag at zero lift. A typical value of C r,Pmin ould w be 0.020, of which the wing may account for 50 percent, the fuselage and nacelles 40 percent, and the tail 10 percent. The term of ( 0.318 g > accounts for all drag due' to lift-the drag i nduced by lift and the extra parasite drag due to lift. Typical values of the airplane efficiency factor range from 0.6 to 0.9 depending on the airplane configuration and its characteristics. While the term of drag due to lift does include some parasite drag, it is still generally referred to as induced drag.\n\nThe second graph of figure 1.34 shows that the sum of CD, and G can approximate the -mm e actual airplane CD through a large range of lift coefficients. For airplanes of moderate aspect ratio, this representation of the airplane total drag is quite accurate in the ordinary range of lift coefficients up to near 70 percent of CL,,. At high lift coefficients near CL-, the proced-\n\n89\n\n## NAVWEPS 00-8OT-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS\n\nure is not too accurate because of the sharper variation of parasite drag at high angles of attack. In a sense, the airplane efficiency factor would change from the constant value and decrease. The deviation of the actual airplane drag from the approximating curve is quite noticeable for airplanes with low aspect ratio and sweepback. Another factor to consider is the effect of compressibility. Since compressibility effects would destroy this relationship, the greatest application is for subsonic performance analysis.\n\nThe total airplane drag is the sum of the parasite and induced drags.\n\nwhere\n\nand\n\n\n\nWhen expressed in this form the induced drag, Di, includes all drags due to lift and is solely a function of lift. The parasite drag, D,, is the parasite drag and is completely independent of lift-it could be called the ' barn door' drag of the airplane.\n\nAn alternate expression for the parasite drag is:\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nIn this form, the equivalent parasite area, f, is the product of CDPml' nd S and relates an a", + "recall": 0.8403361344537815, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-8OT-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS \n\nure is not too accurate because of the sharper variation of parasite drag at high angles of attack. In a sense, the airplane efficiency fac- tor would change from the constant value and decrease. The deviation of the actual airplane drag from the approximating curve is quite noticeable for airplanes with low aspect ratio and sweepback. Another factor to consider is the effect of compressibility. Since compressi- bility effects would destroy this relationship, the greatest application is for subsonic perform- ance analysis. \n\nin with the induced drag coefficient by a con- stant factor which is defined as the “airplane e5ciency factor”, c. By this method of ac- counting the airplane drag coe5cient is ex- pressed as : \n\nwhere \n\nwhere C DPmB= minimum parasite drag coefficient \n\nCD;= induced drag coe5cient \n\ne = airplane e5ciency factor \n\nThe total airplane drag is the sum of the parasite and induced drags. \n\nwhere \n\nIn this form, the airplane drag coefficient is expressed as the sum of drag not due to lift F%d” ) and drag due to lift (G). The air- plane efficiency factor is some co&ant (usually less than unity) which includes parasite drag due to lift with the drag induced by lift. C Dpmr” is invariant with lift and represents the parasite drag at zero lift. A typical value of C r,Pmin would be 0.020, of which the wing may account for 50 percent, the fuselage and nacelles 40 percent, and the tail 10 percent. The term of ( 0.318 g > accounts for all drag due’ to lift-the drag induced by lift and the extra parasite drag due to lift. Typical values of the airplane efficiency factor range from 0.6 to 0.9 depending on the airplane configuration and its characteristics. While the term of drag due to lift does include some parasite drag, it is still generally referred to as induced drag. \n\nThe second graph of figure 1.34 shows that the sum of CD, and G can approximate the -mm e actual airplane CD through a large range of lift coefficients. For airplanes of moderate aspect ratio, this representation of the airplane total drag is quite accurate in the ordinary range of lift coefficients up to near 70 percent of CL,,. At high lift coefficients near CL-, the proced- \n\nIn this form, the equivalent parasite area, f, is the product of CDPml” and S and relates an \n\nor \n\nR=fq $^{where }$f = equivalent parasite area, sq. ft. f = CDPmi,S q= dynamic pressure, psf UP =- 295 or \n\n$$DpEfg $$\n\n$$Di= induced drag =(0.318 $+S $$\n\n$$D= D,+D< $$\n\n$$D,= parasite drag $$\n\nand \n\nWhen expressed in this form the induced drag, Di, includes all drags due to lift and is solely a function of lift. The parasite drag, D,, is the parasite drag and is completely independent of lift-it could be called the “barn door” drag of the airplane. \n\nAn alternate expression for the parasite drag is: \n\n89" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.887309200490305, + "doc_id": "10c81a6dbeb217af5b1abb33daf5f16ff0cb1fc89ab662de895b9c43f4da0f50", + "edit_distance": 0.35844155844155845, + "f1_score": 0.9333333333333331, + "meteor": 0.8230600139422068, + "precision": 0.9545454545454546, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS 00-801-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS\n\nas great a speed or one-fourth as much parasite drag at half the original speed. This fact may be appreciated by the relationship of dynamic pressure with speed-twice as much V, four times as much 4, and four times as much D,. This expressed variation of parasite drag with speed points out that parasite drag will be of greatest importance at high speeds and practically insignificant in flight at low dynamic pressures. To illustrate this fact, an airplane in flight just above the stall speed could have a parasite drag which is only 25 percent of the total drag. However, this same airpfane at maximum level flight speed at low altitude would have a parasite drag which' is very nearly 100 percent of the total drag. The predominance of parasite drag at high flight speeds emphasizes the necessity for great aerodynamic cleanness (low j) to obtain high speed performance.\n\nIn the subsonic regime of flight, the ordinary configuration of airplane has a very large portion of the equivalent parasite area determined by skin friction drag. As the wing contributes nearly half of the total parasite drag, the profile drag of the wing can be minimized by the use of the airfoil sections which produce extensive laminar flow. A subtle effect on parasite drag occurs from the influence of the wing area. Since the wing area (S) appears directly in the parasite drag equation, a reduction in wing area would reduce the parasite drag if all other factors were unchanged. While the exact relationship involves consideration of many factors, most optimum airplane configurations have a strong preference for the highest practical wing loading and minimum wing surface area.\n\nAs the flight speeds of aircraft approach the speed of sound, great care must be taken to delay and alleviate compressibility effects. In order to delay and teduce the drag rise associated with compressibility effects, the components of the airplanes must be arranged to reduce the early formation of shock waves on the airplane. This will generally require\n\n92\n\nfuselage and nacelles of high fineness ratio, well faired canopies, and thin wing sections which have very smooth uniform pressure distributions. -Low aspect ratios and sweepback are favorable in delaying and reducing the compressibility drag rise. In addition, interference effects are quite important in transonic and supersonic flight and the airplane cross section area distribution must be controlled to minimize local velocity peaks which could create premature strong shock wave formation.\n\nThe modern configuration of airplane will illustrate the features required to effect very high speed performance-low aspect ratio, sweepback, thin low drag sections, etc. These same features produce flight characteristics at low airspeeds which necessitate .proper flying technique.\n\n## AIRPLANE TOTAL DRAG\n\nI%,- rn+ql Jr,, e v nf ~ln eimlooe in fl.jght is the AI&C CYCYl Y Y YIL L' y' ' ' c sum of the induced and parasite drag. Figure I.35 illustrates the variation of toral drag with speed for a given airplane in level flight at a particular weight, configuration, and altitude. The parasite drag increases with speed varying as the square of the velocity while the i nduced drag decreases with speed varying inversely as the square of the velocity. The total drag of the airplane shows the predominance of induced drag at low speed and parasite drag at high speed. Specific points of interest on the drag curve are as follows:\n\n(A) Stall of this particular airplane occurs at 100 knots and is indicated by a sharp rise in the actual drag. Since the generalized iquations for i nduced and parasite do not account for conditions at stall, the actual drag of the airplane is depicted by the ' hook' of the dotted line.\n\n(B) At a speed of 124 knots, the airplane would incur a minimum rate of descent in power-off flight. Note that at this speed the i nduced drag comprises 75 percent of the total drag. If this airplane were powered with a reciprocating-propeller type powerplant, maximum endurance would occur at this airspeed.", + "recall": 0.9130434782608695, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-801-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS \n\nas great a speed or one-fourth as much parasite drag at half the original speed. This fact may be appreciated by the relationship of dynamic pressure with speed-twice as much V, four times as much 4, and four times as much D,. This expressed variation of parasite drag with speed points out that parasite drag will be of greatest importance at high speeds and prac- tically insignificant in flight at low dynamic pressures. To illustrate this fact, an airplane in flight just above the stall speed could have a parasite drag which is only 25 percent of the total drag. However, this same airpfane at maximum level flight speed at low altitude would have a parasite drag which’ is very nearly 100 percent of the total drag. The predominance of parasite drag at high flight speeds emphasizes the necessity for great aero- dynamic cleanness (low j) to obtain high speed performance. \n\nIn the subsonic regime of flight, the ordinary configuration of airplane has a very large por- tion of the equivalent parasite area determined by skin friction drag. As the wing contrib- utes nearly half of the total parasite drag, the profile drag of the wing can be minimized by the use of the airfoil sections which produce extensive laminar flow. A subtle effect on parasite drag occurs from the influence of the wing area. Since the wing area (S) appears directly in the parasite drag equation, a reduc- tion in wing area would reduce the parasite drag if all other factors were unchanged. While the exact relationship involves con- sideration of many factors, most optimum airplane configurations have a strong preference for the highest practical wing loading and minimum wing surface area. \n\nAs the flight speeds of aircraft approach the speed of sound, great care must be taken to delay and alleviate compressibility effects. In order to delay and teduce the drag rise associated with compressibility effects, the components of the airplanes must be arranged to reduce the early formation of shock waves on the airplane. This will generally require \n\n(B) At a speed of 124 knots, the airplane would incur a minimum rate of descent in power-off flight. Note that at this speed the induced drag comprises 75 percent of the total drag. If this airplane were powered with a reciprocating-propeller type powerplant, maxi- mum endurance would occur at this airspeed. \n\non the drag curve are as follows: (A) Stall of this particular airplane occurs at 100 knots and is indicated by a sharp rise in the actual drag. Since the generalized iqua- tions for induced and parasite do not account for conditions at stall, the actual drag of the airplane is depicted by the “hook” of the dotted line. \n\nI%,- rn+ql Jr,, nf ~ln eimlooe in fl.jght is the AI&C CYCYl Y Ye v YIL L”y’““c sum of the induced and parasite drag. Figure I.35 illustrates the variation of toral drag with speed for a given airplane in level flight at a particular weight, configuration, and alti- tude. The parasite drag increases with speed varying as the square of the velocity while the induced drag decreases with speed varying in- versely as the square of the velocity. The total drag of the airplane shows the predomi- nance of induced drag at low speed and parasite drag at high speed. Specific points of interest on the drag curve are as follows: (A) Stall of this particular airplane occurs \n\nfuselage and nacelles of high fineness ratio, well faired canopies, and thin wing sections which have very smooth uniform pressure dis- tributions. -Low aspect ratios and sweepback are favorable in delaying and reducing the compressibility drag rise. In addition, inter- ference effects are quite important in transonic and supersonic flight and the airplane cross section area distribution must be controlled to minimize local velocity peaks which could create premature strong shock wave formation. The modern configuration of airplane will illustrate the features required to effect very high speed performance-low aspect ratio, sweepback, thin low drag sections, etc. These same features produce flight characteristics at low airspeeds which necessitate .proper flying technique. \n\n## AIRPLANE TOTAL DRAG\n\n92" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8805700698969072, + "doc_id": "769a1b819d3472c805e58e04bc4ce483b0e8d4f462bc8ec3e3afa22826dc26c7", + "edit_distance": 0.5830065359477125, + "f1_score": 0.9381237524950099, + "meteor": 0.7298721228436501, + "precision": 0.9710743801652892, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS OD-BOT-BO APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYI' NG\n\ndeficiency. It is most desirable that the powerplant be capable of effecting rapid changes in thrust to allow precise control of the airplane during approach.\n\nThe type of approach path is an important factor since it affects the requirement of the flare, the touchdown rate of descent, and-to some extent-the ability to control the point of touchdown. Approach path A of figure 6.4 depicts the steep, low power approach. Such a flight path generally involves a low power setting near idle conditions and a high rate of descent. Precise control of the airplane is difficult and an excess airspeed usually results from an approach path similar to A. Waveoff may be difficult because of the required engine acceleration and the high rate of descent. In addition, the steep approach path with high rate of descent requires considerable flare to reduce the rate of descent at touchdown. This extreme flare requirement will be di,fficult to execute with consistency and will generally result in great variation in the speed, rate of descent, and point of touchdown.\n\nApproach path C of figure 6.4 typifies the long, shallow approach with too small an inclination of the flight path.. Such a flight path requires a relatively high power setting and a deficiency of airspeed is a usual consequence. This extreme of an approach path is not desirable because it is difficult to control the point of touchdown and the low speed may allow the airplane to settle prematurely short of the intended landing touchdown.\n\nSome approach path between the extremes of A and C must be selected, e.g., flight path B. The desirable approach path must not incur excessive speed and rate of descent or require excessive flaring prior to touchdown. Also, some moderate power setting must be required which will allow accurate control of the flight path and provide suitable waveoff characteristics. The approach flight path cannot be too shallow for excessive power setting may be required and it may be difficult\n\n362\n\nto judge and control the point of touchdown. The LSO, mirror landing system, and various approach lighting systems will aid the pilot in achieving the desired approach flight path.\n\nTHE LANDING FLARE AND TOUCHDOWN. The specific techniques of landing flare and touchdown will vary considerably between various types of airplanes. In fact, for certain types of airplanes, a flare from a properly executed approach may not be desirable because of the possibility of certain critical dynamic landing loads or because of the necessity for a certain standard of technique when aerodynamic flare characteristics are critical. The landing speed should be the lowest practical speed above the stall or minimum control speed to reduce landing distances and arresting loads. Generally, the landing speed will be from 5 to 25 percent above the stall speed depending on the airplane type and the particular operation.\n\nThe technique required for the landing will be determined in great part by the aerodynamic characteristics of the airplane. If the airplane characteristics are low wing loading, high LID, and relatively high lift curve slope, the airplane usually will have good landing flare characteristics. If the airplane characteristics are high wing loading, low L/D, and relatively low lift curve slope, the airplane may not possess desirable flare characteristics and landing technique may require a minimum of flare to touchdown. These extremes are illustrated by the lift curves of figure 6.4.\n\nIn preparation for the landing, several factors must be accounted for because of their effect on landing distance, landing loads, and arresting loads. These factors are:\n\n(1) Landing gross weight must be considered because of its effect on landing speed and landing loads. Since the landing is accomplished at a specific angle of attack or margin above the stall speed, gross weight will define the landing speed. In addition, the gross weight is an important factor in determining the landing distance and energy", + "recall": 0.9073359073359073, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OD-BOT-BO APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYI ’ NG \n\nto judge and control the point of touchdown. The LSO, mirror landing system, and various approach lighting systems will aid the pilot in achieving the desired approach flight path. \n\ndeficiency. It is most desirable that the power- plant be capable of effecting rapid changes in thrust to allow precise control of the airplane during approach. The type of approach path is an important \n\nduring approach. The type of approach path is an important factor since it affects the requirement of the flare, the touchdown rate of descent, and-to some extent-the ability to control the point of touchdown. Approach path A of figure 6.4 depicts the steep, low power approach. Such a flight path generally involves a low power setting near idle conditions and a high rate of descent. Precise control of the air- plane is difficult and an excess airspeed usually results from an approach path similar to A. Waveoff may be difficult because of the re- quired engine acceleration and the high rate of descent. In addition, the steep approach path with high rate of descent requires con- siderable flare to reduce the rate of descent at touchdown. This extreme flare requirement will be di,fficult to execute with consistency and will generally result in great variation in the speed, rate of descent, and point of touchdown. Approach path C of figure 6.4 typifies the \n\nTHE LANDING FLARE AND TOUCH- DOWN. The specific techniques of landing flare and touchdown will vary considerably between various types of airplanes. In fact, for certain types of airplanes, a flare from a properly executed approach may not be de- sirable because of the possibility of certain critical dynamic landing loads or because of the necessity for a certain standard of tech- nique when aerodynamic flare characteristics are critical. The landing speed should be the lowest practical speed above the stall or mini- mum control speed to reduce landing distances and arresting loads. Generally, the landing speed will be from 5 to 25 percent above the stall speed depending on the airplane type and the particular operation. \n\nThe technique required for the landing will be determined in great part by the aerodynamic characteristics of the airplane. If the airplane characteristics are low wing loading, high LID, and relatively high lift curve slope, the airplane usually will have good landing flare charac- teristics. If the airplane characteristics are high wing loading, low L/D, and relatively low lift curve slope, the airplane may not possess desirable flare characteristics and landing tech- nique may require a minimum of flare to touchdown. These extremes are illustrated by the lift curves of figure 6.4. In preparation for the landing, several factors \n\ntouchdown. Approach path C of figure 6.4 typifies the long, shallow approach with too small an inclination of the flight path.. Such a flight path requires a relatively high power setting and a deficiency of airspeed is a usual conse- quence. This extreme of an approach path is not desirable because it is difficult to control the point of touchdown and the low speed may allow the airplane to settle prematurely short of the intended landing touchdown. \n\nthe lift curves of figure 6.4. In preparation for the landing, several factors must be accounted for because of their effect on landing distance, landing loads, and arrest- ing loads. These factors are: \n\n(1) Landing gross weight must be con- sidered because of its effect on landing speed and landing loads. Since the landing is accomplished at a specific angle of attack or margin above the stall speed, gross weight will define the landing speed. In addition, the gross weight is an important factor in determining the landing distance and energy \n\nSome approach path between the extremes of A and C must be selected, e.g., flight path B. The desirable approach path must not incur excessive speed and rate of descent or require excessive flaring prior to touchdown. Also, some moderate power setting must be required which will allow accurate control of the flight path and provide suitable waveoff characteristics. The approach flight path cannot be too shallow for excessive power setting may be required and it may be difficult \n\n362" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.3222217105236201, + "doc_id": "c484657297f43557e081714d208eee254ab0bd5ae05617e40f6f6e71cc2e91df", + "edit_distance": 0.575, + "f1_score": 0.7111111111111111, + "meteor": 0.8033906882591093, + "precision": 0.6153846153846154, + "pred_md": "FAA Chart Users' Guide - Terminal Procedures Publication (TPP) - Symbols\n\n## PLANVIEW SYMBOLS (Continued)\n\nEC-1, 22 APR 2021 to 17 JUN 2021\n\nEC-1, 22 APR 2021 to 17 JUN 2021\n\n124", + "recall": 0.8421052631578947, + "true_md": "FAA Chart Users’ Guide - T erminal Procedures Publication (TPP) - Symbols\n\n124\n\n## PLANVIEW SYMBOLS (Continued)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.007788093196053743, + "doc_id": "6e8e9d351980cd026925004c785ec6a0470e3b0ef2ba3b6fcd8c781833ef3c62", + "edit_distance": 0.9876712328767123, + "f1_score": 0.12820512820512822, + "meteor": 0.094304643515763, + "precision": 0.06896551724137931, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS OO-EOT-80 TABLE OF CONTENTS\n\nPW\n\n| Interpretation of the lift equation.. . . . . . | 23 | | | | | | |\n|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|------------------------|---------------------------------------------------------|-------------------|--------------------------------------------------------------|------------------------------------------|--------|----|\n| Lift cocfficicnt versus angle of attack Stall speed and angle of attack Angle of attack versus velocity Primary control of airspeed | | | | | | | |\n| . . \\_ . . . \\_ . mrfou un cnacactectsucs. | | | | | | | |\n| . . | 27 | | | | | | |\n| Section angle of attack and lift coefficient Ty ical section chvactctistics E&t of thickness and cambet | | | | | | | |\n| Drag characteristics, . . . . . . . | 29 | | | | | | |\n| Drag equation Drag cocficicnt versus angle of attack | | ratio | | Lift-drag | | | |\n| Airfoil drag chanwteristics.. ) | | | | | | | |\n| | 33 | | | | | | |\n| Section drag cocfficicnt Ty ical section characteristics E 2 ect of thickness and cunbcr Low drag sections | | | | | | | |\n| StaII speeds. . . . . . . . . .,. . . . . . | 3.5 | | | | | | |\n| Maximum lift cc&cicnt Stall angle of attack | | | | | | | |\n| ..,e * . . | :: | | | | | | |\n| ~lrecrorwergnt.................................................... Effect of maneuvering flight,. | | | | | | | |\n| Effect of high lift devices., . | | | | | | | |\n| Load factor ~ets~s bank angle Stall spad versus load factor | | | | | | | |\n| | 37 | | | | | | |\n| Effect on stall speed | | | | | | | |\n| . . . . . | | | | | 39 | | |\n| HIGH . | 41 | of high lift devices., Plain flap S lit flap | | | | | |\n| Stall angle of attack and stall recovery. LIFT DEVICES. | | | 39 | Types | | | |\n| S otted flap P Fowler flap | | | | | | | |\n| Slots and slats Boundary layer control of high lift | | devices. | | | | | |\n| Flap retraction and extension Chan es in lift, drag, and trim | | Effect o f power | MOMENTS . : | Operation | 43 | | a: |\n| DEVELOPMENT OF AERODYNAMIC | PITCHING .~. : . ! | Pressure distribution. Pitching moment coefficient. | center. . , 49 | Effect of camber Effect of flaps Relationship between | of pressure, aerodynamic centet, and | center | |\n| Center of pressure and aerodynamic | | | | | | | |\n\nEffect of supersonic flow\n\nvi", + "recall": 0.9090909090909091, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OO-EOT-80 TABLE OF CONTENTS \n\nvi \n\n## DEVELOPMENT OF AERODYNAMIC PITCHING MOMENTS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.763505186049019, + "doc_id": "27df24cc3598570ded728a6688b42eb8367e9d6f9028480b272065fd98d2156d", + "edit_distance": 0.6303501945525292, + "f1_score": 0.8564356435643564, + "meteor": 0.6745140224328066, + "precision": 0.9351351351351351, + "pred_md": "weight of the airplane and the horizontal component of lift be equal to the centrifugal force. Thus, the aircraft in a steady turn develops a lift greater than weight and experiences increased stall speeds.\n\nTrigonometric ' relationships allow determination of the effect of bank angle on stall speed and load factor. The load factor, B, is the proportion between lift and weight and is determined by:\n\n\n\nwhere\n\nn=load factor (or ' G' )\n\ncos 6 = cosine of the bank angle, + (phi)\n\nTypical values of load factor determined by this relationship are:\n\n\n\n\n\nThe stall speed in a turn can be determined by:\n\nwhere the\n\nv,+= stall speed at some bank angle + V,= stall speed for wing level, lift-equalweight flight n=load factor corresponding to bank angle\n\nThe percent increase in stall speed in a turn is shown on figure l.i6. Since this chart is predicated on a steady turn and constant CL,, the figures a!e valid for any airplane. The chart shows that no appreciable change in load factor or stall speed occurs at bank angles less than 30' . Above 4S' of bank the increase in load factor and stall speed is quite rapid. This fact emphasizes the need for avoiding steep turns at low airspeeds-a flight condition common to stall-spin accidents.\n\n37\n\n## NAVWEPS 00-8OT-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS\n\nEFFECT OF HIGH LIET DEVICES. The primary purpose of high lift devices (flaps, slots, slats, etc.) is to increase the CLn, of the airplane and reduce the stall speed. The takeoff and landing speeds are consequently reduced. The effect of a typical high lift device is shown by the airplane lift curves of figure 1.15 and is summarized here:\n\nThe principal effect of the extension of flaps is to increase the C,, and reduce the angle of attack for any given lift coefficient. The increase in CL,, afforded by flap deflection reduces the stall speed in a certain proportion, the effect described by the equation:\n\n\n\nwhere\n\nV,,= stall speed with flaps down\n\nv,=stall speed without flaps\n\nC,= maximum lift coefficient of the clean configuration\n\nC&,= maximum lift coefficient with flaps down\n\nFor example, assume the airplane described by the lift curves of figure 1.15 has a stall speed of 100 knots at the landing weight in the clean configuration. If the flaps are lowered the reduced stall speed is reduced to:\n\n", + "recall": 0.7899543378995434, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-8OT-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS \n\nEFFECT OF HIGH LIET DEVICES. The primary purpose of high lift devices (flaps, slots, slats, etc.) is to increase the CLn, of the airplane and reduce the stall speed. The take- off and landing speeds are consequently re- duced. The effect of a typical high lift device is shown by the airplane lift curves of figure 1.15 and is summarized here: \n\nweight of the airplane and the horizontal com- ponent of lift be equal to the centrifugal force. Thus, the aircraft in a steady turn develops a lift greater than weight and experiences in- creased stall speeds. Trigonometric ‘relationships allow deter- \n\ncreased stall speeds. Trigonometric ‘relationships allow deter- mination of the effect of bank angle on stall speed and load factor. The load factor, B, is the proportion between lift and weight and is determined by: \n\nn=load factor (or “G”) cos 6 = cosine of the bank angle, + (phi) \n\nwhere \n\nTypical values of load factor determined by this relationship are: \n\nThe stall speed in a turn can be determined by: \n\nwhere \n\nv,+= stall speed at some bank angle + V,= stall speed for wing level, lift-equal- weight flight \n\nn=load factor corresponding to the bank angle \n\nThe percent increase in stall speed in a turn is shown on figure l.i6. Since this chart is predi- cated on a steady turn and constant CL,, the figures a!e valid for any airplane. The chart shows that no appreciable change in load fac- tor or stall speed occurs at bank angles less than 30“. Above 4S” of bank the increase in load factor and stall speed is quite rapid. This fact emphasizes the need for avoiding steep turns at low airspeeds-a flight condition common to stall-spin accidents. \n\nFor example, assume the airplane described by the lift curves of figure 1.15 has a stall speed of 100 knots at the landing weight in the clean configuration. If the flaps are lowered the reduced stall speed is reduced to: \n\nwhere \n\nV,,= stall speed with flaps down \n\nv,=stall speed without flaps \n\nC,= maximum lift coefficient of the clean configuration \n\nC&,= maximum lift coefficient with flaps down \n\n$$.+.- 00 130 300 450 600 759 n-l.00 1.035 1.154 1.414 z.ooo 4.ooo $$\n\n$$- v,=v, z% J Ch, $$\n\nThe principal effect of the extension of flaps is to increase the C,, and reduce the angle of attack for any given lift coefficient. The in- crease in CL,, afforded by flap deflection re- duces the stall speed in a certain proportion, the effect described by the equation: \n\n$$L fizz-- W 1 n=- cos I$ $$\n\n37" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8992871260111418, + "doc_id": "9ff3dbb1bb68a81c4e264dff80c7d282d04261d0c5caefdcf2111c8f18d8bb29", + "edit_distance": 0.7794117647058824, + "f1_score": 0.9384057971014492, + "meteor": 0.674754687607489, + "precision": 0.9700374531835206, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS DD-BOT-80 APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYING\n\nattack (and, hence, airspeed) and the flight path of the landing aircraft and signal corrections to be made in order to achieve the desired flight path and angle of attack. Because of the field of orientation available to the LSO, he is able to perceive the flight path and angle of attack more accurately than the pilot without an angle of attack indicator and mirror landing system.\n\n## THE APPROACH AND LANDING\n\nThe specific techniques necessary during the phase of approach and landing may vary considerably between various types of airplanes and various operations. However, regardless of the airplane type or operation, there are certain fundamental principles which will define the basic techniques of flying during approach and landing. The specific procedures recommended for each airplane type must be followed exactly to insure a consistent, safe landing technique.\n\nTHE APPROACH. The approach must be conductrd to provide a stabilized, steady flight path to the intended point of touchdown. The approach speed specified for an airplane must provide sufficient margin above the stall speed or minimum control speed to allow satisfactory control and adequate maneuverability. On the other hand, the approach speed must not be greatly in excess of the touchdown speed or a large reduction in speed would be necessary prior to ground contact. Generally, the approach speed will be from 10 to 30 percent above the stall speed depending on the airplane type and the particular operation.\n\nDuring the approach, the pilot must attempt to maintain a smooth flight path and prepare for the touchdown. A smooth, steady approach to landing will minimize the transient items of the flight path and provide the pilot better opportunity to perceive and orientate the airplane along the desired flight path. Steep turns must be avoided at the low speeds of the approach because of the increase in drag\n\nand stall speed in the turn. Figure 6.4 illustrates the typical change in thrust required caused by a steep turn. A steep turn may cause the airplane to stall or the large increase in induced drag may create an excessive rate of descent. In either case, there may not be sufficient altitude to effect recovery. If the .airplane is not properly lined up on the final approach, it is certainly preferable to take a waveoff and go around rather than ' press on regardless' and attempt to salvage a decent landing from a poor approach.\n\nThe proper coordination of the controls is an absolute necessity during the approach. In this sense, due respect must be given to the primary control of airspeed and race of descent for the conditions of the steady approach. Thus, the proper angle of attack will produce the desired approach airspeed; too low an angle of attack will incur an excess speed while an excessive angle of attack will produce a deficiency of speed and may cause stall or control problems. Once the proper airspeed and angle of attack are attained the primary control of rate of descent during the steady approach will be the power setting. For example, if it is realized that the airplane is above the desired glide path, a more nose-down attitude without a decrease in power setting will result in a gain in airspeed. On the other hand, if it is realized that the airplane is below the desired glide path, a more nose-up attitude without an increase in power setting will simply allow the airplane to fly more slowly and-in the region of reversed command-eventually produce a greater rate of descent. For the conditions of steady flight, angle of attack is the primary control of airspeed and power setting is the primary control of rate of climb and descent. This is especially true during the steady approach to landing. Of course, the ability of the powerplant to produce rapid changes in thrust will affect the specific technique to be used. If the powerplant is not capable of producing immediate controlled changes in thrust, the operating technique must' account for this\n\n360", + "recall": 0.9087719298245615, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS DD-BOT-80 APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYING \n\nand stall speed in the turn. Figure 6.4 illus- trates the typical change in thrust required caused by a steep turn. A steep turn may cause the airplane to stall or the large increase in in- duced drag may create an excessive rate of descent. In either case, there may not be suf- ficient altitude to effect recovery. If the .air- plane is not properly lined up on the final ap- proach, it is certainly preferable to take a waveoff and go around rather than “press on regardless” and attempt to salvage a decent landing from a poor approach. \n\nattack (and, hence, airspeed) and the flight path of the landing aircraft and signal correc- tions to be made in order to achieve the desired flight path and angle of attack. Because of the field of orientation available to the LSO, he is able to perceive the flight path and angle of attack more accurately than the pilot with- out an angle of attack indicator and mirror landing system. \n\nThe specific techniques necessary during the phase of approach and landing may vary con- siderably between various types of airplanes and various operations. However, regardless of the airplane type or operation, there are certain fundamental principles which will de- fine the basic techniques of flying during ap- proach and landing. The specific procedures recommended for each airplane type must be followed exactly to insure a consistent, safe landing technique. \n\n## THE APPROACH AND LANDING\n\nThe proper coordination of the controls is an absolute necessity during the approach. In this sense, due respect must be given to the primary control of airspeed and race of descent for the conditions of the steady approach. Thus, the proper angle of attack will produce the desired approach airspeed; too low an angle of attack will incur an excess speed while an excessive angle of attack will produce a deficiency of speed and may cause stall or con- trol problems. Once the proper airspeed and angle of attack are attained the primary control of rate of descent during the steady approach will be the power setting. For example, if it is realized that the airplane is above the de- sired glide path, a more nose-down attitude without a decrease in power setting will result in a gain in airspeed. On the other hand, if it is realized that the airplane is below the desired glide path, a more nose-up attitude without an increase in power setting will simply allow the airplane to fly more slowly and-in the region of reversed command-eventually produce a greater rate of descent. For the conditions of steady flight, angle of attack is the primary control of airspeed and power setting is the primary control of rate of climb and descent. This is especially true during the steady ap- proach to landing. Of course, the ability of the powerplant to produce rapid changes in thrust will affect the specific technique to be used. If the powerplant is not capable of pro- ducing immediate controlled changes in thrust, the operating technique must’ account for this \n\nTHE APPROACH. The approach must be conductrd to provide a stabilized, steady flight path to the intended point of touchdown. The approach speed specified for an airplane must provide sufficient margin above the stall speed or minimum control speed to allow satisfactory control and adequate maneuverability. On the other hand, the approach speed must not be greatly in excess of the touchdown speed or a large reduction in speed would be necessary prior to ground contact. Generally, the ap- proach speed will be from 10 to 30 percent above the stall speed depending on the air- plane type and the particular operation. \n\nDuring the approach, the pilot must attempt to maintain a smooth flight path and prepare for the touchdown. A smooth, steady ap- proach to landing will minimize the transient items of the flight path and provide the pilot better opportunity to perceive and orientate the airplane along the desired flight path. Steep turns must be avoided at the low speeds of the approach because of the increase in drag \n\n360" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8980070536762986, + "doc_id": "793aa9a4c8359c6bfb9652dfecba964f43895c122d07f4f026d4e78ab14ecf5c", + "edit_distance": 0.8657534246575342, + "f1_score": 0.9496981891348089, + "meteor": 0.6523831237458698, + "precision": 0.9752066115702479, + "pred_md": "figure 4.36. The directional control requirements are easily met in a tandem-rotor helicopter because the engine torque from one rotor is opposed by the torque of the other rotor thereby eliminating one directional moment. Of course, some net unbalance of torque may have to be overcome if the engine torque on the two rotors is different.\n\nWhen a tandem-rotor helicopter is rotated rapidly about one of the rotors rather than about the cg., the other rotor picks up ' translational lift' as a result of the velocity due to rotation and an increase in rotor thrust results. This causes pitch-up or pitch-down depending on which rotor the helicopter is being rotated about. Rotation about the forward rotor, which is more common, results in pitch-down.\n\nThe overall stability of a helicopter results from the individual stability contributions of the various components just as in the case of the fixed-wing airplane. The stability contributions can be divided as follows:\n\n- (1) Rotor\n- (2) Fuselage\n- (3) Stabilizers\n- (4) Mechanical devices\n\nThe destabilizing contribution of the fuselage and the stabilizing contribution of a stabilizing surface are similar in effect to an airplane and will not be discussed here. The principal stability characteristics that make the helicopter different from an airplane are those of the rotor.\n\nTwo types of stability are important in the rotor: (1) angle of attack stability and (2) velocity stability. In hovering flight the relative wind velocity, angle of attack, and lift on each blade of the rotor is the same. If the rotor is displaced through some angle, no changes in forces result. Therefore, the rotor has neutral angle of attack stability when hovering. However, in forward flight, an increase in rotor angle of attack increases the lift on the advancing blade more than on the\n\n323\n\n## NAVWEPS 00-801-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL\n\nretreating blade since the relative wind velocities are greater on the advancing blade. This lateral dissymmetry of lift causes the rotor to tilt back due to the gyroscopic effect of the rotor, further increasing the rotor angle of attack. Thus, the rotor is unstable with changes in angle of attack at forward flight speeds. Since the magnitude of the unstable moment is affected by the magnitude of the rotor thrust as well as the tilt of the thrust force, a greater instability exists for increases in angle of attack than for decreases in angle of attack. In addition, the instability is greater for increases in angle of attack when the rotor thrust also increases.\n\nIf the rotor angle of attack is held constant and the rotor is given a translational velocity, a dissymmetry of lift results since the velocity of the advancing blade is increased while the velocity of the retreating blade is decreased. This dissymmetry of lift causes the rotor to tilt in a direction to oppose the change in velocity due to the gyroscopic effect of the rotor. Hence, the rotor has velocity stability.\n\nA hovering helicopter exhibits some degree of apparent stability by virtue of its velocity stability although it has neutral angle of attack stability. This type of hovering stability is analogous to the apparent lateraldirectional stability an airplane exhibits due to dihedral effect. Additional hovering stability can be obtained by the use of mechanical stabilizers such as th,e Bell stabilizer bar, by the use of offset flapping hinges, or by synthetic or artificial stabilization devices.\n\nThe total static stability of a helicopter is determined by combining the stability contributions of all the components. The usual result for a typical helicopter is instability with angle of attack and a variable velocity stability which becomes neutral or unstable at high speeds. Of course, the helicopter could be made stable with angle of attack by providing a large enough horizontal stabilizer. Unfortunately, adverse effects at low speed or", + "recall": 0.9254901960784314, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-801-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL \n\nretreating blade since the relative wind veloci- ties are greater on the advancing blade. This lateral dissymmetry of lift causes the rotor to tilt back due to the gyroscopic effect of the rotor, further increasing the rotor angle of attack. Thus, the rotor is unstable with changes in angle of attack at forward flight speeds. Since the magnitude of the unstable moment is affected by the magnitude of the rotor thrust as well as the tilt of the thrust force, a greater instability exists for increases in angle of attack than for decreases in angle of attack. In addition, the instability is greater for increases in angle of attack when the rotor thrust also increases. \n\nfigure 4.36. The directional control require- ments are easily met in a tandem-rotor heli- copter because the engine torque from one rotor is opposed by the torque of the other rotor thereby eliminating one directional mo- ment. Of course, some net unbalance of torque may have to be overcome if the engine torque on the two rotors is different. \n\nWhen a tandem-rotor helicopter is rotated rapidly about one of the rotors rather than about the cg., the other rotor picks up “translational lift” as a result of the velocity due to rotation and an increase in rotor thrust results. This causes pitch-up or pitch-down depending on which rotor the helicopter is being rotated about. Rotation about the forward rotor, which is more common, re- sults in pitch-down. \n\nIf the rotor angle of attack is held constant and the rotor is given a translational velocity, a dissymmetry of lift results since the velocity of the advancing blade is increased while the velocity of the retreating blade is decreased. This dissymmetry of lift causes the rotor to tilt in a direction to oppose the change in velocity due to the gyroscopic effect of the rotor. Hence, the rotor has velocity stability. \n\nA hovering helicopter exhibits some degree of apparent stability by virtue of its velocity stability although it has neutral angle of attack stability. This type of hovering sta- bility is analogous to the apparent lateral- directional stability an airplane exhibits due to dihedral effect. Additional hovering sta- bility can be obtained by the use of mechanical stabilizers such as th,e Bell stabilizer bar, by the use of offset flapping hinges, or by syn- thetic or artificial stabilization devices. \n\nThe total static stability of a helicopter is determined by combining the stability con- tributions of all the components. The usual result for a typical helicopter is instability with angle of attack and a variable velocity stability which becomes neutral or unstable at high speeds. Of course, the helicopter could be made stable with angle of attack by providing a large enough horizontal stabilizer. Unfortunately, adverse effects at low speed or \n\nthe rotor. Two types of stability are important in the rotor: (1) angle of attack stability and (2) velocity stability. In hovering flight the relative wind velocity, angle of attack, and lift on each blade of the rotor is the same. If the rotor is displaced through some angle, no changes in forces result. Therefore, the rotor has neutral angle of attack stability when hovering. However, in forward flight, an increase in rotor angle of attack increases the lift on the advancing blade more than on the \n\nThe destabilizing contribution of the fuselage and the stabilizing contribution of a stabilizing surface are similar in effect to an airplane and will not be discussed here. The principal stability characteristics that make the heli- copter different from an airplane are those of the rotor. Two types of stability are important in the \n\nThe overall stability of a helicopter results from the individual stability contributions of the various components just as in the case of the fixed-wing airplane. The stability con- tributions can be divided as follows: \n\n323 \n\n- (1) Rotor \n\n- (2) Fuselage (3) Stabilizers \n\n- (2) Fuselage (3) Stabilizers \n\n- (4) Mechanical devices" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.335604731175871, + "doc_id": "a0703529578a7ddfb21fd570dc697b4b94b5a17f7c5b37555e10ae0de79fd4de", + "edit_distance": 0.7277777777777777, + "f1_score": 0.8939393939393938, + "meteor": 0.7376954905673611, + "precision": 0.8309859154929577, + "pred_md": "NA VAIR 00•801•80\n\n## AERODYNAMICS FOR NAVAL AVIATORS\n\nBY\n\nH. H. HURT, JR. UNIVERSITY OF SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA\n\nDISTRIBUTION STATEMENT A. Approved for public release; distribution is unlimited. DESTRUCTION NOTICE - For unclassified, limited documents, destroy by any method that will prevent disclosure of contents or reconstruction of the document.\n\nPUBLISHED BY DIRECTION OF COMMANDER, NAVAL AIR SYSTEMS COMMAND\n\nglyph<c=19,font=/TimesNewRoman>glyph<c=27,font=/TimesNewRoman>glyph<c=19,font=/TimesNewRoman>glyph<c=19,font=/TimesNewRoman>/3glyph<c=20,font=/TimesNewRoman>glyph<c=20,font=/TimesNewRoman>glyph<c=20,font=/TimesNewRoman>glyph<c=23,font=/TimesNewRoman>glyph<c=23,font=/TimesNewRoman>glyph<c=25,font=/TimesNewRoman>glyph<c=21,font=/TimesNewRoman>\n\nREVISED JANUARY 1965", + "recall": 0.9672131147540983, + "true_md": "## NA VAIR 00•801•80\n\nDISTRIBUTION STATEMENT A. Approved for public release; distribution is unlimited. \n\nDESTRUCTION NOTICE - For unclassified, limited documents, destroy by any method that will prevent disclosure of contents or reconstruction of the document. \n\n## PUBLISHED BY DIRECTION OF COMMANDER, NAVAL AIR SYSTEMS COMMAND\n\n## REVISED JANUARY 1965\n\n# AERODYNAMICS FOR NAVAL AVIATORS\n\nBY H. H. HURT, JR. UNIVERSITY OF SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA \n\n/ 3" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.48039151505285577, + "doc_id": "bb5d76d6d579948212a3a054a2ff7946db2e2f107000f474b4b383f41e22c911", + "edit_distance": 0.6956521739130435, + "f1_score": 0.9259259259259258, + "meteor": 0.884899439686589, + "precision": 0.8928571428571429, + "pred_md": "## RADIO AIDS TO NAVIGATION (Continued)\n\n## Navigation And Communication Boxes - Examples (Continued)\n\n## LOW ENROUTE CHARTS\n\n## VOR/DME\n\n## VOR/DME\n\n73\n\n## HIGH ENROUTE CHARTS\n\nFAA Chart Users' Guide - IFR Enroute Symbology", + "recall": 0.9615384615384616, + "true_md": "## RADIO AIDS TO NAVIGATION (Continued)\n\nFAA Chart Users’ Guide - IFR Enroute Symbology\n\n73\n\n## Navigation And Communication Boxes - Examples (Continued) LOW ENROUTE CHARTS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.2909822025130098, + "doc_id": "c53ca12d2ba0a2a9ada73aedf8e184733204bb32b5b1c90d15bda48d3ac9b674", + "edit_distance": 0.6285714285714286, + "f1_score": 0.8125, + "meteor": 0.8537060105886017, + "precision": 0.6842105263157895, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS OD-SOT-80 HIGH SPEED AERODYNAMICS\n\nSUPERSONIC FLOW INTO A CORNER\n\nSUPERSONIC FLOW INTO A CORNER\n\nSUPERSONIC FLOW INTO A ROUNDED CORNER\n\nSUPERSONIC FLOW INTO A ROUNDED CORNER\n\nFigure 3.3. Oblique Shock Wave Formotion\n\n206", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OD-SOT-80 HIGH SPEED AERODYNAMICS \n\nFigure 3.3. Oblique Shock Wave Formotion \n\n206" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7691605673134586, + "doc_id": "497fd812f6667ada31b0d063729cb3f7a5799242932e987c053010cec7b947b6", + "edit_distance": 0.07692307692307693, + "f1_score": 0.9090909090909091, + "meteor": 0.920940170940171, + "precision": 0.9090909090909091, + "pred_md": "FAA Chart Users' Guide - VFR Chart Symbology - Helicopter Charts\n\n56", + "recall": 0.9090909090909091, + "true_md": "FAA Chart Users’ Guide - VFR Chart Symbology - Helicopter Charts\n\n56" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.624366297650497, + "doc_id": "190920ad8110d93505bfc2320b2f889d4e4aec03fb6683d01e20c6cebe9861ad", + "edit_distance": 0.5, + "f1_score": 0.9824561403508772, + "meteor": 0.9485576923076924, + "precision": 0.9655172413793104, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS O&601-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE\n\n## FORCES ACTING ON THE AIRPLANE DURING TAKEOFF ROLL\n\n1\n\nFigure 2.32. Forces Acting on the Airplane During Takeoff Roll\n\nFigure 2.32. Forces Acting on the Airplane During Takeoff Roll\n\n186", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## FORCES ACTING ON THE AIRPLANE DURING TAKEOFF ROLL\n\nFigure 2.32. Forces Acting on the Airplane During Takeoff Roll \n\n186 \n\nNAVWEPS O&601-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6431176456584405, + "doc_id": "9186e623abfa2d085967fcc8e0cf7fee943b5421f9092aeee57b18a354dfc068", + "edit_distance": 0.7315789473684211, + "f1_score": 0.85838779956427, + "meteor": 0.5110255630375735, + "precision": 0.9292452830188679, + "pred_md": "existing on the surface. Of course, the velocity distribution, and resulting pressure distribution, is determmed by the.shape or profile of the surface and the angle of a' track. Thus, any aerodynamic force can be represented as the product df three major factors:\n\nthe surface area of the objects the dynamic pressure of the airstream the coefficient or index of force determined\n\nby the relative pressure distribution This relationship is expressed by the following equation :\n\n\n\nIn order to fully appreciate the importance of the aerodynamic force coe&cient, C,, the , above equation is rearranged to alternate forms :\n\nIn this form, the aerodynamic force coefficient Js appreciared as the aerodynamic force per surface area and dynamic pressure. In other words, the force coefficient is a dimensionless ratio between the average aerodynamic pressure (aerodynamic force.per ' area) and the airstream dynamic pressure. All the aerodynamic forces of lift and drag are studied on this basisthe common denominator in each case being surface area and dynamic pressure. By such a definition, a ' lift coefficient' would .be the ratio between lift pressure and dynamic pressure; a ' drag coefficient' would be the ratio between drag pressure and.:d.ynamic pressure. The use of the coefficient form of an aerodynamic force is necessary since the force coellicient is:\n\n(1) An index 04 the aerodynamic force independent of area, density, and velocity.\n\n23\n\nNAVWEPS m-60T-30 BASIC AERODYNAMICS\n\nIt is derived from the relative pressure and velocity distribution.\n\n- (2) Influenced only by the shape of the surface and angle of attack since these factors determine the pressure distribution.\n- (3) An index which allows evaluation of the effects of compressibility and viscosity. Since the effects of area, density, and velocity are obviated by the coefficient form, compressibility and viscosity effects can be separated for study.\n\nTHE BASIC LIFT EQUATION. Lift has been dehned as the net force developed perpendicular to the relative wind. The aerodynamic force of lift on an airplane results from the generation of a pressure distribution on the wing. This lift force is described by the following equation:\n\n\n\nwhere\n\n\n\nThe lift coefhcient used in this equation is the ratio of the lift pressure and dynamic pressure and is a function of the shape of the wing and angle of attack. If the lift coefficient of a conventional airplane wing planfoi-m were plotted versus angle of attack, the result would be typical of the graph of figure 1.11. Since the effects of speed, density, area, weight, altitude, etc., are eliminated by the coefficient form, an indication of the true lift capability is obtained. Each angle of attack produces a particular lift coefficient since the angle of attack is the controlling factor in the pressure distribution. Lift coeflicient increases with angle of attack up to the maximum lift coefficient, c L,,,~., and, as angle of attack is increased beyond the maximum lift angle, the airflow is unable to adhere to the upper surface. The airflow then separates from the upper surface and stall occurs.\n\nJNTERPRETATION OF THE LIFT EQUATION. Several important relationships are", + "recall": 0.7975708502024291, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS m-60T-30 BASIC AERODYNAMICS \n\nIt is derived from the relative pressure and velocity distribution. (2) Influenced only by the shape of the \n\nvelocity distribution. (2) Influenced only by the shape of the surface and angle of attack since these factors determine the pressure distribution. \n\nexisting on the surface. Of course, the ve- locity distribution, and resulting pressure dis- tribution, is determmed by the.shape or pro- file of the surface and the angle of a ’ track. Thus, any aerodynamic force can be repre- sented as the product df three major factors: \n\nthe surface area of the objects \n\nthe dynamic pressure of the airstream the coefficient or index of force determined \n\nthe dynamic pressure of the airstream the coefficient or index of force determined by the relative pressure distribution \n\nThis relationship is expressed by the following equation : \n\n(3) An index which allows evaluation of the effects of compressibility and viscosity. Since the effects of area, density, and velocity are obviated by the coefficient form, com- pressibility and viscosity effects can be separated for study. \n\nTHE BASIC LIFT EQUATION. Lift has been dehned as the net force developed per- pendicular to the relative wind. The aero- dynamic force of lift on an airplane results from the generation of a pressure distribution on the wing. This lift force is described by the following equation: L=C& \n\nF= C,qS \n\nwhere F = aerodynamic force, lbs. \n\nwhere F = aerodynamic force, lbs. C,=coeflicient of aerodynamic force \n\nF = aerodynamic force, lbs. C,=coeflicient of aerodynamic force \n\n,iay;mic pressure, psf \n\nS=surface area, sq. ft. In order to fully appreciate the importance \n\nS=surface area, sq. ft. In order to fully appreciate the importance of the aerodynamic force coe&cient, C,, the , above equation is rearranged to alternate forms : \n\nthe following equation: L=C& \n\nwhere \n\nL=lift, lbs. \n\nC, = lift coefficient. \n\nq= dy;:mic pressure, psf +p \n\nq= dy;:mic pressure, +p \n\nS= wing surface area, sq. ft. \n\nThe lift coefhcient used in this equation is the ratio of the lift pressure and dynamic pressure and is a function of the shape of the wing and angle of attack. If the lift coefficient of a conventional airplane wing planfoi-m were plotted versus angle of attack, the result would be typical of the graph of figure 1.11. Since the effects of speed, density, area, weight, alti- tude, etc., are eliminated by the coefficient form, an indication of the true lift capability is ob- tained. Each angle of attack produces a par- ticular lift coefficient since the angle of attack is the controlling factor in the pressure dis- tribution. Lift coeflicient increases with angle of attack up to the maximum lift coefficient, c L,,,~., and, as angle of attack is increased be- yond the maximum lift angle, the airflow is unable to adhere to the upper surface. The airflow then separates from the upper surface and stall occurs. JNTERPRETATION OF THE LIFT EQUA- \n\nIn this form, the aerodynamic force coefficient Js appreciared as the aerodynamic force per surface area and dynamic pressure. In other words, the force coefficient is a dimensionless ratio between the average aerodynamic pres- sure (aerodynamic force.per ‘ area) and the air- stream dynamic pressure. All the aerodynamic forces of lift and drag are studied on this basis- the common denominator in each case being surface area and dynamic pressure. By such a definition, a “lift coefficient” would .be the ratio between lift pressure and dynamic pres- sure; a “drag coefficient” would be the ratio between drag pressure and.:d.ynamic pressure. The use of the coefficient form of an aero- dynamic force is necessary since the force coellicient is: (1) An index 04 the aerodynamic force \n\ncoellicient is: (1) An index 04 the aerodynamic force independent of area, density, and velocity. \n\nand stall occurs. JNTERPRETATION OF THE LIFT EQUA- TION. Several important relationships are \n\n23" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.1420238853349142, + "doc_id": "1ab619d53402a578e512cd4fdaf72efa22096388b6bc0d7d55fa857043fa72e7", + "edit_distance": 0.7492857142857143, + "f1_score": 0.9959514170040485, + "meteor": 0.27272941554488656, + "precision": 0.9959514170040485, + "pred_md": "## ABBREVIATIONS\n\n## A\n\nAAF - Army Air Field\n\nAAS - Airport Advisory Service\n\nAAUP - Attention All Users Page\n\nAC - Advisory Circular\n\nADF - Automatic Direction Finder\n\nADIZ - Air Defense Identification Zone\n\nADS - Automatic Dependent Surveillance\n\nADS-B - Automatic Dependent Surveillance-Broadcast\n\nAdvsry - Advisory\n\nAFB - Air Force Base\n\nAFIS - Automatic Flight Information Service\n\nAFS - Air Force Station\n\nAFSS - Automated Flight Service Station\n\nAGL - Above Ground Level\n\nAIM - Aeronautical Information Manual\n\nAIRAC - Aeronautical Information Regulation And Control\n\nAK - Alaska\n\nAL - Approach and Landing\n\nANG - Air National Guard\n\nAPP - Approach\n\nAPP CON - Approach Control\n\nAPP CRS - Approach Course\n\nApt - Airport\n\nAPV - Approaches with Vertical Guidance\n\nARP - Airport Reference Point\n\nARTCC - Air Route Traffic Control Center\n\nASDA - Accelerate-Stop Distance Available\n\nASDE-X - Airport Surface Detection Equipment-Model X\n\nASOS - Automated Surface Observing Station\n\nASR - Airport Surveillance Radar\n\nATC - Air Traffic Control\n\nATIS - Automatic Terminal Information Service\n\nATS - Air Traffic Service\n\nAUNICOM - Automated Aeronautical Advisory Station\n\nAWOS - Automated Weather Observing Station\n\n## B\n\nBaro-VNAV - Barometric Vertical Navigation BS - Broadcast Station\n\n## C\n\nCAC - Caribbean Aeronautical Chart\n\nCAT - Category\n\nCFA - Controlled Firing Areas\n\nCFR - Code of Federal Regulations\n\nCH - Channel\n\nCL - Runway Centerline Lights\n\nCLNC DEL - Clearance Delivery\n\nCNF - Computer Navigation Fix\n\nCOP - Changeover Point\n\nCPDLC - Controller Pilot Data Link Communication\n\nCRS - Course\n\nCT - Control Tower\n\nCTAF - Common Traffic Advisory Frequency CVFP - Charted Visual Flight Procedure CZ - Control Zone (Canada)\n\n## D\n\nDA - Decision Altitude\n\nDA - Density Altitude\n\nD-ATIS - Digital Automatic Terminal Information Service\n\nDH - Decision Height\n\nDME - Distance Measuring Equipment\n\nDND - Department of National Defense (Canada)\n\nDoD - Department of Defense\n\nDOF - Digital Obstacle File\n\nDP - Departure Procedure\n\nDT - Daylight Savings Time\n\nDVA - Diverse Vector Area\n\n## E\n\nE - East\n\nEFAS - Enroute Flight Advisory Service\n\nEFB - Electronic Flight Bag\n\nElev - Elevation\n\nEMAS - Engineered Materials Arresting System\n\n## F\n\nFAA - Federal Aviation Administration\n\nFAF - Final Approach Fix\n\nFAP - Final Approach Point\n\nFAR - Federal Aviation Regulation\n\nFBO - Fixed-Based Operator\n\nFIR - Flight Information Region\n\nFL - Flight Level\n\nFLIP - Flight Information Publication\n\nFMS - Flight Management System\n\nFREQ - Frequency\n\nFRZ - Flight Restricted Zone\n\nFSDO - Flight Standards District Office\n\nFSS - Flight Service Station\n\n## G\n\nGBAS - Ground-Based Augmentation System\n\nGCO - Ground Communications Outlet\n\nGLS - GBAS Landing System\n\nGND - Ground\n\nGND CON - Ground Control\n\nGNSS - Global Navigation Satellite System\n\nGP - Glide Path\n\nGPS - Global Positioning System\n\nGS - Glide Slope\n\nGS - Ground Speed\n\n129\n\nFAA Chart Users' Guide - Abbreviations", + "recall": 0.9959514170040485, + "true_md": "## ABBREVIATIONS\n\n## A\n\n## D\n\n## E\n\n## F\n\n## B\n\n## C\n\n## G\n\n129\n\n- AAF - Army Air Field AAS - Airport Advisory Service\n\n- AAF - Army Air Field AAS - Airport Advisory Service AAUP - Attention All Users Page\n\n- AAS - Airport Advisory Service AAUP - Attention All Users Page AC - Advisory Circular\n\n- AAUP - Attention All Users Page AC - Advisory Circular ADF - Automatic Direction Finder\n\n- AC - Advisory Circular ADF - Automatic Direction Finder ADIZ - Air Defense Identification Zone\n\n- ADF - Automatic Direction Finder ADIZ - Air Defense Identification Zone ADS - Automatic Dependent Surveillance\n\n- ADIZ - Air Defense Identification Zone ADS - Automatic Dependent Surveillance ADS-B - Automatic Dependent Surveillance-Broadcast\n\n- ADS - Automatic Dependent Surveillance ADS-B - Automatic Dependent Surveillance-Broadcast Advsry - Advisory\n\n- ADS-B - Automatic Dependent Surveillance-Broadcast Advsry - Advisory AFB - Air Force Base\n\n- Advsry - Advisory AFB - Air Force Base AFIS - Automatic Flight Information Service\n\n- AFB - Air Force Base AFIS - Automatic Flight Information Service AFS - Air Force Station\n\n- AFIS - Automatic Flight Information Service AFS - Air Force Station AFSS - Automated Flight Service Station\n\n- AFS - Air Force Station AFSS - Automated Flight Service Station AGL - Above Ground Level\n\n- AFSS - Automated Flight Service Station AGL - Above Ground Level AIM - Aeronautical Information Manual\n\n- AGL - Above Ground Level AIM - Aeronautical Information Manual AIRAC - Aeronautical Information Regulation And Control\n\n- AIM - Aeronautical Information Manual AIRAC - Aeronautical Information Regulation And Control AK - Alaska\n\n- AIRAC - Aeronautical Information Regulation And Control AK - Alaska AL - Approach and Landing\n\n- AK - Alaska AL - Approach and Landing ANG - Air National Guard\n\n- AL - Approach and Landing ANG - Air National Guard APP - Approach\n\n- ANG - Air National Guard APP - Approach APP CON - Approach Control\n\n- APP - Approach APP CON - Approach Control APP CRS - Approach Course\n\n- APP CON - Approach Control APP CRS - Approach Course Apt - Airport\n\n- APP CRS - Approach Course Apt - Airport APV - Approaches with Vertical Guidance\n\n- Apt - Airport APV - Approaches with Vertical Guidance ARP - Airport Reference Point\n\n- APV - Approaches with Vertical Guidance ARP - Airport Reference Point ARTCC - Air Route Traffic Control Center\n\n- ARP - Airport Reference Point ARTCC - Air Route Traffic Control Center ASDA - Accelerate-Stop Distance Available\n\n- ARTCC - Air Route Traffic Control Center ASDA - Accelerate-Stop Distance Available ASDE-X - Airport Surface Detection Equipment-Model X\n\n- ASDA - Accelerate-Stop Distance Available ASDE-X - Airport Surface Detection Equipment-Model X ASOS - Automated Surface Observing Station\n\n- ASDE-X - Airport Surface Detection Equipment-Model X ASOS - Automated Surface Observing Station ASR - Airport Surveillance Radar\n\n- ASOS - Automated Surface Observing Station ASR - Airport Surveillance Radar ATC - Air Traffic Control\n\n- ASR - Airport Surveillance Radar ATC - Air Traffic Control ATIS - Automatic Terminal Information Service\n\n- ATC - Air Traffic Control ATIS - Automatic Terminal Information Service ATS - Air Traffic Service\n\n- ATIS - Automatic Terminal Information Service ATS - Air Traffic Service AUNICOM - Automated Aeronautical Advisory Station\n\n- ATS - Air Traffic Service AUNICOM - Automated Aeronautical Advisory Station AWOS - Automated Weather Observing Station\n\n- AUNICOM - Automated Aeronautical Advisory Station AWOS - Automated Weather Observing Station\n\n- Baro-VNAV - Barometric Vertical Navigation BS - Broadcast Station\n\n- Baro-VNAV - Barometric Vertical Navigation BS - Broadcast Station\n\n- CAC - Caribbean Aeronautical Chart CAT - Category\n\n- CAC - Caribbean Aeronautical Chart CAT - Category CFA - Controlled Firing Areas\n\n- CAT - Category CFA - Controlled Firing Areas CFR - Code of Federal Regulations\n\n- CFA - Controlled Firing Areas CFR - Code of Federal Regulations CH - Channel\n\n- CFR - Code of Federal Regulations CH - Channel CL - Runway Centerline Lights\n\n- CH - Channel CL - Runway Centerline Lights CLNC DEL - Clearance Delivery\n\n- CL - Runway Centerline Lights CLNC DEL - Clearance Delivery CNF - Computer Navigation Fix\n\n- CLNC DEL - Clearance Delivery CNF - Computer Navigation Fix COP - Changeover Point\n\n- CNF - Computer Navigation Fix COP - Changeover Point CPDLC - Controller Pilot Data Link Communication\n\n- COP - Changeover Point CPDLC - Controller Pilot Data Link Communication CRS - Course\n\n- CPDLC - Controller Pilot Data Link Communication CRS - Course CT - Control Tower\n\n- CRS - Course CT - Control Tower\n\n- GBAS - Ground-Based Augmentation System GCO - Ground Communications Outlet\n\n- GBAS - Ground-Based Augmentation System GCO - Ground Communications Outlet GLS - GBAS Landing System\n\n- GCO - Ground Communications Outlet GLS - GBAS Landing System GND - Ground\n\n- GLS - GBAS Landing System GND - Ground GND CON - Ground Control\n\n- GND - Ground GND CON - Ground Control GNSS - Global Navigation Satellite System\n\n- GND CON - Ground Control GNSS - Global Navigation Satellite System GP - Glide Path\n\n- GNSS - Global Navigation Satellite System GP - Glide Path GPS - Global Positioning System\n\n- GP - Glide Path GPS - Global Positioning System GS - Glide Slope\n\n- GPS - Global Positioning System GS - Glide Slope GS - Ground Speed\n\n- GS - Glide Slope GS - Ground Speed\n\n- FAA - Federal Aviation Administration FAF - Final Approach Fix\n\n- FAA - Federal Aviation Administration FAF - Final Approach Fix FAP - Final Approach Point\n\n- FAF - Final Approach Fix FAP - Final Approach Point FAR - Federal Aviation Regulation\n\n- FAP - Final Approach Point FAR - Federal Aviation Regulation FBO - Fixed-Based Operator\n\n- FAR - Federal Aviation Regulation FBO - Fixed-Based Operator FIR - Flight Information Region\n\n- FBO - Fixed-Based Operator FIR - Flight Information Region FL - Flight Level\n\n- FIR - Flight Information Region FL - Flight Level FLIP - Flight Information Publication\n\n- FL - Flight Level FLIP - Flight Information Publication FMS - Flight Management System\n\n- FLIP - Flight Information Publication FMS - Flight Management System FREQ - Frequency\n\n- FMS - Flight Management System FREQ - Frequency FRZ - Flight Restricted Zone\n\n- FREQ - Frequency FRZ - Flight Restricted Zone FSDO - Flight Standards District Office\n\n- FRZ - Flight Restricted Zone FSDO - Flight Standards District Office FSS - Flight Service Station\n\n- FSDO - Flight Standards District Office FSS - Flight Service Station\n\n- E - East EFAS - Enroute Flight Advisory Service\n\n- E - East EFAS - Enroute Flight Advisory Service EFB - Electronic Flight Bag\n\n- EFAS - Enroute Flight Advisory Service EFB - Electronic Flight Bag Elev - Elevation\n\n- EFB - Electronic Flight Bag Elev - Elevation EMAS - Engineered Materials Arresting System\n\n- Elev - Elevation EMAS - Engineered Materials Arresting System\n\n- DA - Decision Altitude DA - Density Altitude\n\n- DA - Decision Altitude DA - Density Altitude D-ATIS - Digital Automatic Terminal Information Service\n\n- DA - Density Altitude D-ATIS - Digital Automatic Terminal Information Service DH - Decision Height\n\n- D-ATIS - Digital Automatic Terminal Information Service DH - Decision Height DME - Distance Measuring Equipment\n\n- DH - Decision Height DME - Distance Measuring Equipment DND - Department of National Defense (Canada)\n\n- DME - Distance Measuring Equipment DND - Department of National Defense (Canada) DoD - Department of Defense\n\n- DND - Department of National Defense (Canada) DoD - Department of Defense DOF - Digital Obstacle File\n\n- DoD - Department of Defense DOF - Digital Obstacle File DP - Departure Procedure\n\n- DOF - Digital Obstacle File DP - Departure Procedure DT - Daylight Savings Time\n\n- DP - Departure Procedure DT - Daylight Savings Time DVA - Diverse Vector Area\n\n- DT - Daylight Savings Time DVA - Diverse Vector Area\n\n- CVFP - Charted Visual Flight Procedure CZ - Control Zone (Canada)\n\n- CTAF - Common Traffic Advisory Frequency CVFP - Charted Visual Flight Procedure CZ - Control Zone (Canada)\n\n- CTAF - Common Traffic Advisory Frequency CVFP - Charted Visual Flight Procedure\n\nFAA Chart Users’ Guide - Abbreviations" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8742753717073847, + "doc_id": "26f30c763d7076d599cd0181a275e64a3e7544119ad34a84f8ee5721d5ffcc71", + "edit_distance": 0.8214783821478382, + "f1_score": 0.9367088607594937, + "meteor": 0.6961434768924386, + "precision": 0.9736842105263158, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS 00-8OT-RO AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE\n\nObviously, spark ignition timing is an important factor controlling the initial rise of pressure in the combustion chamber. The ignition of the fuel mixture must begin at the proper time to allow flame front propagation and the release of heat to build up peak pressure for the power stroke .\n\nThe speed of flame front propagation is a major factor affecting the power output of the reciprocating engine since this factor controls the rate of heat release and rate of pressure rise in the combustion chamber. For this reason, dual ignition is necessary for powerplants of high specific power output. Obviously, normal combustion can be accomplished more rapidly with the propagation of two flame fronts rather than one. The two sources of ignition are able to accomplish the combustion heat release and pressure rise in a shorter period of time. Fuel-air ratio is another factor affecting the flame propagation speed in the combustion chamber. The maximum flame propagation speed occurs near a fuel-air ratio of 0.08 and, thus, maximum power output for a given airflow will tend to occur at this value rather than the stoichiometric value.\n\nTwo aberrations of the combustion process are preignition and detonation. Preignition is simply a premature ignition and flame f&t propagation due to hot spots in the combustion chamber. Various lead and carbon deposits and feathered edges on metal surfaces can supply a glow ignition spot and begin a flame propagation prior to normal spark ignition. As shown on the graph of figure 2.16, preignition causes a premature rise of pressure during the piston travel. As a result, preignition combustion pressures and temperatures will exceed normal combustion values and are very likely to cause engine damage. Because of the premature rise of pressure toward the end of the compression stroke, the net work of the operating cycle is reduced. Preignition is evidenced by a rise in cylinder head temperature and drop in BMEP or torque pressure.\n\n140\n\nDenotation offers the possibility of immediate destruction of the powerplant. The normal combustion process is initiated by the spark and beginning of flame front propagation As the flame front is propagated, the combustion chamber pressure and temperature begin to rise. Under certain conditions of high combustion pressure and temperature, the mixture ahead of the advancing flame front may suddenly explode with considerable violence and send strong detonation waves through the combustion chamber. The result is depicted by the graph of figure 2.16, whete:a sharp, explosive increase in pressure takes place with a subsequent reduction of the mean pres; sure during the power stroke. Detonation produces sharp explosive pressure peaks many times greater than normal combustion1 Also, the exploding gases radiate considerable heat and cause excessive temperatures for many local parts of the engine. The effects of heavy detonation are so severe that structural damage is the immediate result. Rapid rise of cylinder head temperature, rapid drop in BMEP, and loud, expensive noises are evidence of detonation.\n\nDetonation is not necessarily confined to. a period after the beginning of normal flame front propagation. With extremely low grades of fuel, detonation can occur before normal ignition. In addition, the high temperatures and pressure caused by preignition will mean that detonation is usually a corollary of preigniticn. Detonation results from a sudden, unstable decomposition of fuel at some critical combination of high temperature and pressure. Thus, detonation is most likely to occur at any op erating condition which produces high combustion pressures and temperatures. Generally, high engine airflow and fuel-air ratios for maximum heat release will produce the critical conditions. High engine airflow is common to high MAP and RPM and the engine is most sensitive to CAT and fuel-air ratio in this region.", + "recall": 0.9024390243902439, + "true_md": "## NAVWEPS 00-8OT-RO AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE\n\nObviously, spark ignition timing is an impor- tant factor controlling the initial rise of pres- sure in the combustion chamber. The ignition of the fuel mixture must begin at the proper time to allow flame front propagation and the release of heat to build up peak pressure for the power stroke . The speed of flame front propagation is a \n\nDenotation offers the possibility of immedi- ate destruction of the powerplant. The nor- mal combustion process is initiated by the spark and beginning of flame front propaga- tion As the flame front is propagated, the combustion chamber pressure and temperature begin to rise. Under certain conditions of high combustion pressure and temperature, the mixture ahead of the advancing flame front may suddenly explode with considerable vi- olence and send strong detonation waves through the combustion chamber. The result is depicted by the graph of figure 2.16, whete:a sharp, explosive increase in pressure takes place with a subsequent reduction of the mean pres; sure during the power stroke. Detonation produces sharp explosive pressure peaks many times greater than normal combustion1 Also, the exploding gases radiate considerable heat and cause excessive temperatures for many local parts of the engine. The effects of heavy detonation are so severe that structural damage is the immediate result. Rapid rise of cylinder head temperature, rapid drop in BMEP, and loud, expensive noises are evidence of detona- tion. Detonation is not necessarily confined to. a \n\npower stroke . The speed of flame front propagation is a major factor affecting the power output of the reciprocating engine since this factor controls the rate of heat release and rate of pressure rise in the combustion chamber. For this reason, dual ignition is necessary for powerplants of high specific power output. Obviously, nor- mal combustion can be accomplished more rapidly with the propagation of two flame fronts rather than one. The two sources of ignition are able to accomplish the combus- tion heat release and pressure rise in a shorter period of time. Fuel-air ratio is another factor affecting the flame propagation speed in the combustion chamber. The maximum flame propagation speed occurs near a fuel-air ratio of 0.08 and, thus, maximum power output for a given airflow will tend to occur at this value rather than the stoichiometric value. \n\ntion. Detonation is not necessarily confined to. a period after the beginning of normal flame front propagation. With extremely low grades of fuel, detonation can occur before normal igni- tion. In addition, the high temperatures and pressure caused by preignition will mean that detonation is usually a corollary of preigniticn. Detonation results from a sudden, unstable de- composition of fuel at some critical combina- tion of high temperature and pressure. Thus, detonation is most likely to occur at any op erating condition which produces high com- bustion pressures and temperatures. Gener- ally, high engine airflow and fuel-air ratios for maximum heat release will produce the critical conditions. High engine airflow is common to high MAP and RPM and the engine is most sensitive to CAT and fuel-air ratio in this region. \n\nTwo aberrations of the combustion process are preignition and detonation. Preignition is simply a premature ignition and flame f&t propagation due to hot spots in the combustion chamber. Various lead and carbon deposits and feathered edges on metal surfaces can sup- ply a glow ignition spot and begin a flame propagation prior to normal spark ignition. As shown on the graph of figure 2.16, pre- ignition causes a premature rise of pressure during the piston travel. As a result, preignition combustion pressures and tempera- tures will exceed normal combustion values and are very likely to cause engine damage. Be- cause of the premature rise of pressure toward the end of the compression stroke, the net work of the operating cycle is reduced. Preignition is evidenced by a rise in cylinder head tempera- ture and drop in BMEP or torque pressure. \n\n140" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.871833964127889, + "doc_id": "a0b7f3cc1bfc7775235ed1a09a36fb47a289d14c1cd83b1379e84f4a713fb681", + "edit_distance": 0.8235294117647058, + "f1_score": 0.9168278529980657, + "meteor": 0.667879698766191, + "precision": 0.9595141700404858, + "pred_md": "thrust. Because of the high fuel consumption during afterburner operation and the adverse effect on endurance, the use of the afterburner should be limited to short periods of time. In addition, there may be limited time for the use of the afterburner due to critical heating of supporting or adjacent structure in the vicinity of the afterburner.\n\nThe specific fuel consumption of the basic engine will increase with the addition of the afterburner apparatus. The losses incurred by the greater fluid friction, nozzle and flameholder pressure drop, etc. increase the specific fuel consumption of the basic engine approximately 5 to 10 percent.\n\nThe principal advantage of afterburner is the ability to add large amounts of thrust with relatively small weight penalty. The application of the afterburner is most common to the interceptor, fighter, and high speed type aircraft.\n\nThe use of wafer injection in the turbojet engine is another means of thrust augmentation which allows the combustion of additional fuel within engine speed and temperature limits. The most usual addition of water injection devices is to supplement takeoff and climbout performance, especially at high ambient temperatures and high altitudes. The typical water injection device can produce a 25 to 35 percent increase in thrust.\n\nThe most usual means of water injection is direct flow of the fluid into the combustion chamber. This is illustrated in figure 2.14. The addition of the fluid directly into the combustion chamber increases the mass flow and reduces the turbine inlet temperature. The drop in temperature reduces the turbine power and a greater fuel flow is required to maintain engine speed. Thus, the mass flow is increased, more fuel flow is allowed within turbine limits, and greater, energy is imparted to the exhaust gases.\n\nThe fluid injected into the combustion chambers is generally a mixture of water and alcohol. The water-alcohol solution has one\n\n131\n\nNAVWEPS 00-30T-30 AIRPLANE PERFORMAPJCE\n\nimmediate advantage in that it prevents fouling of the plumbing from the freezing of residual fluid at low temperatures. In addition, a large concentration of alcohol in the mixture can provide part of the additional chemical energy required to maintain engine speed. In fact, the large concentration of alcohol in the injection mixture is a preferred means of adding additional fuel energy. If the added chemical energy is included with the water flow, no abrupt changes in governed fuel flow are necessary and there is less chance of underspeed with fluid injection and overspeed or overtemperature when fluid flow is exhausted. Of course, strict proportions of the mixture are necessary. Since most water injection devices are essentially an unmodulated flow, the use of this device is limited to high engine speed and low altitude to prevent the water flow from quenching combustion.\n\nTHE GAS TURBINE-PROPELLER COMBINATION. The turbojet engine utilizes the turbine to extract suflicient power to operate the compressor. The remaining exhaust gas energy is utilized to provide the high exhaust gas velocity and jet thrust. The propulsive efficiency of the turbojet engine is relatively low because thrust is produced by creating a large velocity change with a relatively small mass flow. The gas turbine-propeller combination is capable of producing higher propulsive efficiency in subsonic flight by having the propeller operate on a much greater mass flow.\n\nThe turboprop or propjet powerplant requires additional turbine stages to continue expansion in the turbine section and extract a very large percent of the exhaust gas energy as shaft power. In this sense, the turboprop is primarily a power producing machine and the jet thrust is a small amount of the output propulsive power. Ordinarily, the jet thrust of the turboprop accounts for 15 to 25 percent of the total thrust output. Since the turboprop is primarily a power producing machine,", + "recall": 0.8777777777777778, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-30T-30 AIRPLANE PERFORMAPJCE \n\nthrust. Because of the high fuel consumption during afterburner operation and the adverse effect on endurance, the use of the afterburner should be limited to short periods of time. In addition, there may be limited time for the use of the afterburner due to critical heating of supporting or adjacent structure in the vicin- ity of the afterburner. \n\nimmediate advantage in that it prevents fouling of the plumbing from the freezing of residual fluid at low temperatures. In addition, a large concentration of alcohol in the mixture can provide part of the additional chemical energy required to maintain engine speed. In fact, the large concentration of alcohol in the in- jection mixture is a preferred means of adding additional fuel energy. If the added chemical energy is included with the water flow, no abrupt changes in governed fuel flow are necessary and there is less chance of underspeed with fluid injection and overspeed or over- temperature when fluid flow is exhausted. Of course, strict proportions of the mixture are necessary. Since most water injection devices are essentially an unmodulated flow, the use of this device is limited to high engine speed and low altitude to prevent the water flow from quenching combustion. \n\nThe specific fuel consumption of the basic engine will increase with the addition of the afterburner apparatus. The losses incurred by the greater fluid friction, nozzle and flame- holder pressure drop, etc. increase the specific fuel consumption of the basic engine approxi- mately 5 to 10 percent. The principal advantage of afterburner is the \n\nmately 5 to 10 percent. The principal advantage of afterburner is the ability to add large amounts of thrust with relatively small weight penalty. The applica- tion of the afterburner is most common to the interceptor, fighter, and high speed type aircraft. The use of wafer injection in the turbojet en- \n\nTHE GAS TURBINE-PROPELLER COM- BINATION. The turbojet engine utilizes the turbine to extract suflicient power to operate the compressor. The remaining exhaust gas energy is utilized to provide the high exhaust gas velocity and jet thrust. The propulsive efficiency of the turbojet engine is relatively low because thrust is produced by creating a large velocity change with a relatively small mass flow. The gas turbine-propeller combin- ation is capable of producing higher propulsive efficiency in subsonic flight by having the pro- peller operate on a much greater mass flow. \n\naircraft. The use of wafer injection in the turbojet en- gine is another means of thrust augmentation which allows the combustion of additional fuel within engine speed and temperature limits. The most usual addition of water injection de- vices is to supplement takeoff and climbout performance, especially at high ambient tem- peratures and high altitudes. The typical water injection device can produce a 25 to 35 percent increase in thrust. \n\nThe turboprop or propjet powerplant re- quires additional turbine stages to continue expansion in the turbine section and extract a very large percent of the exhaust gas energy as shaft power. In this sense, the turboprop is primarily a power producing machine and the jet thrust is a small amount of the output propulsive power. Ordinarily, the jet thrust of the turboprop accounts for 15 to 25 percent of the total thrust output. Since the turbo- prop is primarily a power producing machine, \n\nThe most usual means of water injection is direct flow of the fluid into the combustion chamber. This is illustrated in figure 2.14. The addition of the fluid directly into the com- bustion chamber increases the mass flow and reduces the turbine inlet temperature. The drop in temperature reduces the turbine power and a greater fuel flow is required to maintain engine speed. Thus, the mass flow is increased, more fuel flow is allowed within turbine limits, and greater, energy is imparted to the exhaust gases. \n\nThe fluid injected into the combustion cham- bers is generally a mixture of water and alco- hol. The water-alcohol solution has one \n\n131" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.12183733060653985, + "doc_id": "485ac28f91370fd3fde1f7772e1e3389d492f35537af34e53e9b872018df821a", + "edit_distance": 0.8389830508474576, + "f1_score": 0.3505154639175258, + "meteor": 0.6037015003067542, + "precision": 0.21518987341772153, + "pred_md": "FAA Chart Users' Guide - VFR Symbology - Flyway Planning Charts\n\n## AIRSPACE INFORMATION (Continued)\n\n## Special Air Traffic Rules/Airport Traffic Areas (FAR Part 93)\n\nAppropriate boxed note as required shown adjacent to area. Inside the FAR Part 93 boundary area, the cross hatching is at a 45 degree angle.\n\n## Terminal Radar Service Area (TRSA)\n\n## IFR Routes\n\nArrival\n\nDeparture\n\nArrival/Departure\n\n## VFR Transition Routes\n\nAppropriate notes as required may be shown.\n\nUni-directional\n\nBi-directional\n\nBi-directional with NAVAID Ident and Radial\n\n## Special Conservation Areas\n\nNOAA Regulated National Marine Sanctuary Designated Areas\n\n## Mode C (FAR 91.215)\n\n46", + "recall": 0.9444444444444444, + "true_md": "FAA Chart Users’ Guide - VFR Symbology - Flyway Planning Charts\n\n## AIRSPACE INFORMATION (Continued)\n\n46" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9459144397068615, + "doc_id": "6c427f37158bde08e5c9ed40c19cf18499931e8fba30d78101d4b4cdb304c2c1", + "edit_distance": 0.8660049627791563, + "f1_score": 0.9700598802395208, + "meteor": 0.6896676244833037, + "precision": 0.9818181818181818, + "pred_md": "## Altitudes\n\nRestrictive altitudes along the procedure track are shown paired with their respective fix/ facility. Minimum, Maximum, Mandatory and Recommended Altitudes are shown.\n\nAltitudes that are shown along a route are minimum altitudes.\n\n## Holding Patterns and Procedure Turns\n\nHolding Patterns are used for many reasons, including deteriorating weather or high traffic volume. Holding might also be required following a missed approach. Each holding pattern has a fix, a direction to hold from the fix, and an airway, bear -ing, course, radial, or route on which the aircraft is to hold. These elements, along with the direction of the turns, define the holding pattern.\n\nIf a holding pattern has a non-standard speed restriction, it will be depicted by an icon with the limiting air speed shown inside the holding pattern symbol. These elements, along with the direction of the turns, define the holding pattern. If two types of holds are located at the same point, the procedural holding pattern will be shown in-lieu of arrival or missed approach holding patterns. Timing or distance limits for Hold-in-lieu of Procedure Turn Holding Patterns will be shown.\n\nWaypoints designated as a holding fix are shown as fly-by, without the circle around the symbol. However, in the event the holding fix/waypoint is also designated in some other part of the procedure (i.e., IAF) with a fly-over function, then the holding fix/waypoint will be charted as a fly-over point.\n\nA procedure turn (PT) is the maneuver prescribed to perform a course reversal to establish the aircraft inbound on an intermediate or final approach course. The procedure turn or hold-in-lieu-of procedure turn is a required maneuver when it is depicted on the approach chart. However, the procedure turn or the hold-in-lieu-of PT is not permitted when the symbol 'NoPT' is depicted on the initial segment being flown, when a RADAR VECTOR to the final approach course is provided, or when conducting a timed approach from a holding fix. The procedure turn will be shown in the planview and in the profile of the chart.\n\n103\n\nFAA Chart Users' Guide - Terminal Procedures Publication (TPP) - Terms", + "recall": 0.9585798816568047, + "true_md": "103\n\nFAA Chart Users’ Guide - Terminal Procedures Publication (TPP) - Terms\n\n## Altitudes\n\n## Holding Patterns and Procedure Turns\n\nA procedure turn (PT) is the maneuver prescribed to perform a course reversal to establish the aircraft inbound on an intermediate or final approach course. The procedure turn or hold-in-lieu-of procedure turn is a required maneuver when it is depicted on the approach chart. However, the procedure turn or the hold-in-lieu-of PT is not permitted when the symbol “NoPT” is depicted on the initial segment being flown, when a RADAR VECTOR to the final approach course is provided, or when conducting a timed approach from a holding fix. The procedure turn will be shown in the planview and in the profile of the chart.\n\nWaypoints designated as a holding fix are shown as fly-by, without the circle around the symbol. However, in the event the holding fix/waypoint is also designated in some other part of the procedure (i.e., IAF) with a fly-over function, then the holding fix/waypoint will be charted as a fly-over point.\n\nIf a holding pattern has a non-standard speed restriction, it will be depicted by an icon with the limiting air speed shown inside the holding pattern symbol. These elements, along with the direction of the turns, define the holding pattern. If two types of holds are located at the same point, the procedural holding pattern will be shown in-lieu of arrival or missed ap- proach holding patterns. Timing or distance limits for Hold-in-lieu of Procedure Turn Holding Patterns will be shown.\n\nHolding Patterns are used for many reasons, including deteriorating weather or high traffic volume. Holding might also be required following a missed approach. Each holding pattern has a fix, a direction to hold from the fix, and an airway, bear - ing, course, radial, or route on which the aircraft is to hold. These elements, along with the direction of the turns, define the holding pattern. \n\nAltitudes that are shown along a route are minimum altitudes. \n\nRestrictive altitudes along the procedure track are shown paired with their respective fix/ facility. Minimum, Maximum, Mandatory and Recommended Altitudes are shown." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8485328328656555, + "doc_id": "2a3e6180583ad20a36277ad2daaf3df1dd2859050837f41e81c52f15dd3e9ba0", + "edit_distance": 0.5303951367781155, + "f1_score": 0.9270072992700731, + "meteor": 0.7986227021245108, + "precision": 0.9621212121212122, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS 00-801-80\n\n## OPERATING STRENGTH LIMITATIONS\n\nmany times the stall speed will require due consideration of the operating strength limits.\n\nThe structural design of the aircraft must consider the possibility of negative load factors from maneuvers. Since the pilot cannot comfortably tolerate large prolonged negative ' g' , the aircraft need not be designed for negative load factors as great as the positive load factors.\n\nThe effect of airplane gross weight during maneuvers must be appreciated because of the particular relation to flight operating strength limitations. During flight, the pilot appreciates the degree of a maneuver from the inertia forces produced by various load factors; the airplane structure senses the degree of a maneuver principally by the airloads involved. Thus, the pilot recognizes loadfactor while the structure recognizes only load. To better understand this relationship, consider an example airplane whose basic configuration gross weight is 20,000 lbs. At this basic configuration assume a limit load factor for symmetrical flight of 5.6 and an ultimate load factor of 8.4. If the airplane is operated at any other configuration, the load factor limits will be altered. The following data illustrate this fact by tabulating the load factors required to produce identical airloads at various gross weights.\n\nAs illustrated, at high gross weights above the basic configuration weight, the limit and ultimate load factors may be seriously reduced. For the airplane shown, a 5-g maneuver immediately after a high gross weight takeoff could be very near the ' disaster regime,' especially if turbulence is associated with the maneuver. In the same sense, this airplane at very low operating weights below that of the basic configuration would experience greatly increased limit and ultimate load factors.\n\nOperation in this region of high load factors at .low gross weight may create the impression that the airplane has great excess strength capability. This effect must be understood and intelligently appreciated since it is not uncommon to have a modern airplane configuration with more than SO percent of its gross weight as fuel.\n\nGUST LOAD FACTORS. Gusts are associated with the vertical and horizontal velocity gradients in the atmosphere. A horizontal gust produces a change in dynamic pressure on the airplane but causes relatively small and unimportant changes in flight load factor. The more important gusts are the vertical gusts which cause changes in angle of attack. This process is illustrated in figure 5.2. The vectorial addition of the gust velocity to the airplane velocity causes the change in angle of attack and change in lift. The change in angle of attack at some flight condition causes a change in the flight load factor. The increment change in load factor due to the vertical gust can be determined from the following equation:\n\nwhere\n\nAn=change in load factor due to gust m=lift curve slope, unit\n\nof C, per degree of 01 o=altitude density ratio W/S= wing loading, psf V. = equivalent airspeed, knots KU=equivalent sharp edged gust velocity ft. per sec.\n\nAs an example, consider the case of an airplane with a lift curve slope m=O.OB and wing loading, (W/S)=60 psf. If this airplane were flying at sea level at 350 knots and encountered an effective gust of 30 ft. per sec., the gust would produce a load factor i ncrement of 1.61. This i ncrement would be added to the flight load factor of the airplane prior to the gust,\n\n332", + "recall": 0.8943661971830986, + "true_md": "## NAVWEPS 00-801-80 OPERATING STRENGTH LIMITATIONS\n\nOperation in this region of high load factors at .low gross weight may create the impression that the airplane has great excess strength capability. This effect must be understood and intelligently appreciated since it is not uncom- mon to have a modern airplane configuration with more than SO percent of its gross weight as fuel. \n\nmany times the stall speed will require due consideration of the operating strength limits. The structural design of the aircraft must \n\nconsideration of the operating strength limits. The structural design of the aircraft must consider the possibility of negative load factors from maneuvers. Since the pilot cannot com- fortably tolerate large prolonged negative “g”, the aircraft need not be designed for negative load factors as great as the positive load factors. The effect of airplane gross weight during \n\nload factors as great as the positive load factors. The effect of airplane gross weight during maneuvers must be appreciated because of the particular relation to flight operating strength limitations. During flight, the pilot appre- ciates the degree of a maneuver from the inertia forces produced by various load factors; the airplane structure senses the degree of a maneuver principally by the airloads involved. Thus, the pilot recognizes loadfactor while the structure recognizes only load. To better understand this relationship, consider an ex- ample airplane whose basic configuration gross weight is 20,000 lbs. At this basic configura- tion assume a limit load factor for symmetrical flight of 5.6 and an ultimate load factor of 8.4. If the airplane is operated at any other con- figuration, the load factor limits will be al- tered. The following data illustrate this fact by tabulating the load factors required to produce identical airloads at various gross weights. \n\nGUST LOAD FACTORS. Gusts are asso- ciated with the vertical and horizontal velocity gradients in the atmosphere. A horizontal gust produces a change in dynamic pressure on the airplane but causes relatively small and unimportant changes in flight load factor. The more important gusts are the vertical gusts which cause changes in angle of attack. This process is illustrated in figure 5.2. The vec- torial addition of the gust velocity to the air- plane velocity causes the change in angle of attack and change in lift. The change in angle of attack at some flight condition causes a change in the flight load factor. The incre- ment change in load factor due to the vertical gust can be determined from the following equation: \n\nwhere \n\nAn=change in load factor due to gust m=lift curve slope, unit of C, per degree of 01 o=altitude density ratio W/S= wing loading, psf V. = equivalent airspeed, knots KU=equivalent sharp edged gust velocity ft. per sec. \n\nAs illustrated, at high gross weights above the basic configuration weight, the limit and ulti- mate load factors may be seriously reduced. For the airplane shown, a 5-g maneuver im- mediately after a high gross weight takeoff could be very near the “disaster regime,” especially if turbulence is associated with the maneuver. In the same sense, this airplane at very low operating weights below that of the basic configuration would experience great- ly increased limit and ultimate load factors. \n\nAs an example, consider the case of an air- plane with a lift curve slope m=O.OB and wing loading, (W/S)=60 psf. If this airplane were flying at sea level at 350 knots and encountered an effective gust of 30 ft. per sec., the gust would produce a load factor increment of 1.61. This increment would be added to the flight load factor of the airplane prior to the gust, \n\n332" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8257773053605606, + "doc_id": "94f874d4bc4dfb68af77dd3b873b88b292d9561ddcca6486b0fa012aba6c9449", + "edit_distance": 0.752906976744186, + "f1_score": 0.9037800687285223, + "meteor": 0.7393697099425146, + "precision": 0.9460431654676259, + "pred_md": "twisting deflections which reduce the effectiveness of the aileron, e.g., downward deflection of an aileron creates a nose down twist of the wing which reduces the rolling moment due to aileron deflection. At very high speeds, the torsional deflection of the wing may be so great than a rolling moment is created opposite to the direction controlled and ' aileron reversal' occurs. Prior to the speed for aileron reversal, a serious loss of roll helix angle may be encountered. The effect of this aeroelastic phenomenon on rolling performance is illustrated in figure 4.30.\n\nTo counter the undesirable inceractiuo between aerodynamic forces and wing torsional deflections, the trailing edge ailerons may be moved inboard to reduce the portion of the span subjected to twisting moments. Of course, the short span, highly tapered wing planform is favorable for providing relatively high stiffness. In addition, various configurations of spoilers may be capabIe of producing the required rolling performance without the development of large twisting moments.\n\nCRITICAL REQUIREMENTS, The critical conditions for requiring adequate lateral control power may occur at either high speed or low speed depending on the airplane configuration and intended use. In transonic and supersonic flight, compressibility effects tend to reduce the effectiveness of lateral control devices to produce required roll helix angles. These effects are most significant when combined with a loss of control effectiveness due to aeroelastic effects. Airplanes designed for high speed flight must maintain suflicient lateral control effectiveness at the design dive speed and this is usually the predominating requirement.\n\nDuring landing and takeoff, the airplane must have adequate lateral control power to contend with the ordinary conditions of flight. The lateral controls must be capable of achieving required roll helix angles and acceleration through prescribed roll dispIacements. Also, the airplane must be capable of being con-\n\n## NAVWEPS OO-UOT-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL\n\ntrolled in a sideslip to accomplish crosswind takeoff and landing. The lateral control during crosswind takeoff and landing is a particular problem when the dihedral effect is high. Since the sweepback contributes a large dihedral effect at high lift coefficients, the problem is most important for the airplane with considerable sweepback. The limiting crosswind components must be given due respect especially when the airplane is at low gross weight. At low gross weight the specified takeoff and landing speeds will be low and the controlled angle of sideslip will be largest for a given crosswind velocity.\n\n## MISCELLANEOUS STABILITY PROBLEMS\n\nThere are several general problems of flying which involve certain principles of stability as well as specific areas of longitudinal, directional and lateral stability. Various conditions of flight will exist in which certain problems of stability (or instability) are unavoidable for some reason or another. any of the following items deserve consideration because of the possible unsafe condition of flight and the contribution to an aircraft accident.\n\n## LANDING GEAR CONFIGURATIONS\n\nThere are three general configurations for the aircraft landing gear: the tricycle, bicycle, and ' conventional' tail wheel arrangement. At low rolling speeds where the airplane aerodynamic forces are negligible, the ' control-fixed' static stability of each of these configurations is determined by the side force characteristics of the tires and is not a significant problem.\n\nThe instability which allows ground loops in an aircraft with a conventional tail wheel landing gear is quite basic and can be appreciated from the illustration of figure 4.31. Centrifugal force produced by a turn must be balanced and the aircraft placed in equilibrium. The greatest side force is produced at the main wheels but to achieve equilibrium with the", + "recall": 0.8651315789473685, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OO-UOT-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL \n\ntrolled in a sideslip to accomplish crosswind takeoff and landing. The lateral control dur- ing crosswind takeoff and landing is a par- ticular problem when the dihedral effect is high. Since the sweepback contributes a large dihedral effect at high lift coefficients, the problem is most important for the airplane with considerable sweepback. The limiting crosswind components must be given due re- spect especially when the airplane is at low gross weight. At low gross weight the speci- fied takeoff and landing speeds will be low and the controlled angle of sideslip will be largest for a given crosswind velocity. \n\ntwisting deflections which reduce the effec- tiveness of the aileron, e.g., downward deflec- tion of an aileron creates a nose down twist of the wing which reduces the rolling moment due to aileron deflection. At very high speeds, the torsional deflection of the wing may be so great than a rolling moment is created opposite to the direction controlled and “aile- ron reversal” occurs. Prior to the speed for aileron reversal, a serious loss of roll helix angle may be encountered. The effect of this aeroelastic phenomenon on rolling perform- ance is illustrated in figure 4.30. To counter the undesirable inceractiuo be- \n\nance is illustrated in figure 4.30. To counter the undesirable inceractiuo be- tween aerodynamic forces and wing torsional deflections, the trailing edge ailerons may be moved inboard to reduce the portion of the span subjected to twisting moments. Of course, the short span, highly tapered wing planform is favorable for providing relatively high stiffness. In addition, various configura- tions of spoilers may be capabIe of producing the required rolling performance without the development of large twisting moments. CRITICAL REQUIREMENTS, The critical \n\nThere are several general problems of flying which involve certain principles of stability as well as specific areas of longitudinal, direc- tional and lateral stability. Various condi- tions of flight will exist in which certain problems of stability (or instability) are un- avoidable for some reason or another. any of the following items deserve consideration because of the possible unsafe condition of flight and the contribution to an aircraft accident. \n\ndevelopment of large twisting moments. CRITICAL REQUIREMENTS, The critical conditions for requiring adequate lateral con- trol power may occur at either high speed or low speed depending on the airplane configura- tion and intended use. In transonic and super- sonic flight, compressibility effects tend to reduce the effectiveness of lateral control de- vices to produce required roll helix angles. These effects are most significant when com- bined with a loss of control effectiveness due to aeroelastic effects. Airplanes designed for high speed flight must maintain suflicient lateral control effectiveness at the design dive speed and this is usually the predominating requirement. \n\nThere are three general configurations for the aircraft landing gear: the tricycle, bicycle, and “conventional” tail wheel arrangement. At low rolling speeds where the airplane aerody- namic forces are negligible, the “control-fixed” static stability of each of these configurations is determined by the side force characteristics of the tires and is not a significant problem. \n\nThe instability which allows ground loops in an aircraft with a conventional tail wheel landing gear is quite basic and can be appre- ciated from the illustration of figure 4.31. Cen- trifugal force produced by a turn must be balanced and the aircraft placed in equilibrium. The greatest side force is produced at the main wheels but to achieve equilibrium with the \n\nDuring landing and takeoff, the airplane must have adequate lateral control power to contend with the ordinary conditions of flight. The lateral controls must be capable of achiev- ing required roll helix angles and acceleration through prescribed roll dispIacements. Also, the airplane must be capable of being con- \n\n## LANDING GEAR CONFIGURATIONS\n\n## MISCELLANEOUS STABILITY PROBLEMS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.889486372426997, + "doc_id": "730deaebd0ff265af7e0208105f2886441ef1011e1420f480f882e092378f8cc", + "edit_distance": 0.5273556231003039, + "f1_score": 0.9507042253521127, + "meteor": 0.8381745248732412, + "precision": 0.9782608695652174, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS 00-801-80 HIGH SPEEO AERODYNAMICS\n\nOnce the configuration of a transonic aircraft is fixed, the pilot must respect the effect of angle of attack and altitude. The local flow 1 velocities on any upper surface increase with an increase in angle of attack. Hence, local sonic flow and subsequent shock wave formation can occur at lower free stream Mach numbers. A pilot must appreciate this reduction of force divergence Mach number with lift coefficient since maneuvers at high speed may produce compressibility effects which may not be encountered in unaccelerated flight. The effect of altitude is important since the magnitude of any force or moment change due to compressibility will depend upon the dynamic pressure of the airstream. Compressibility effects encountered at high altitude and low dynamic pressure may be of little consequence in the operation of a transonic aircraft. However, the same compressibility effects encountered at low altitudes and high dynamic pressures will create greater trim changes, heavier buffet, etc., and perhaps transonic flight restrictions which are of principal interest only to low altitude.\n\nPHENOMENA OF SUPERSONIC FLIGHT. While many of the particular effects of supersonic flight will be presented in the detail of later discussion, many general effects may be anticipated. The airplane configuration must have aerodynamic shapes which will have low drag in compressible flow. Generally, this will require airfoil sections of low thickness ratio and sharp leading edges and body shapes of high fineness ratio to minimize the supersonic wave drag. Because of the aft movement of the aerodynamic center with supersonic flow, the increase in static longitudinal stability will demand effective, powerful control surfaces to achieve adequate controllability for supersonic maneuvering.\n\nAs a corollary of supersonic flight the shock wave formation on the airplane may create special problems outside the immediate vicinity of the airplane surfaces. While the shock waves a great distance away from the airplane\n\nno\n\ncan be quite weak, the pressure waves can be of sufficient magnitude to create an audible disturbance. Thus, ' sonic booms' will be a simple consequence of supersonic flight.\n\nThe aircraft powerplant: for supersonic flight must be of relatively high thrust output. Also, in many cases it may be necessary to provide the air breathing powerplant with special inlet configurations which will slow the airflow to subsonic prior to reaching the compressor face or combustion chamber. Aerodynamic heating of supersonic flight can provide critical inlet temperatures for the gas turbine engine as well as critical structural temperatures.\n\nThe density variations in airflow may be shown by certain optical techniques. Schlieren photographs and shadowgraphs can define the various wave patterns and their effect on the airflow. The Schlieren photographs presented in figure 3.11 define the flow conditions on an aircraft in supersonic flight.\n\n## TRANSONIC AND SUPERSONIC CONFIGURATIONS\n\nAircraft configurations developed for high speed flight will have significant differences in shape and planform when compared with aircraft designed for low speed flight. One of the outstanding differences will be in the selection of airfoil profiles for transonic or supersonic flight.\n\nAIRFOIL SECTIONS. It should be obvious that airfoils for high speed subsonic flight should have high critical Mach numbers since critical Mach number defines the lower limit for shock wave formation and subsequent force divergence. An additional complication to airfoil selection in this speed range is that the airfoil should have a high maximum lift coefficient and sufficient thickness to allow application of high lift devices. Otherwise an excessive wing area would be required to provide maneuverability and reasonable takeoff and landing speeds.\n\nI", + "recall": 0.9246575342465754, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-801-80 HIGH SPEEO AERODYNAMICS \n\nOnce the configuration of a transonic air- craft is fixed, the pilot must respect the effect of angle of attack and altitude. The local flow 1 velocities on any upper surface increase with an increase in angle of attack. Hence, local sonic flow and subsequent shock wave formation can occur at lower free stream Mach numbers. A pilot must appreciate this reduction of force divergence Mach number with lift coefficient since maneuvers at high speed may produce compressibility effects which may not be en- countered in unaccelerated flight. The effect of altitude is important since the magnitude of any force or moment change due to com- pressibility will depend upon the dynamic pressure of the airstream. Compressibility effects encountered at high altitude and low dynamic pressure may be of little consequence in the operation of a transonic aircraft. How- ever, the same compressibility effects en- countered at low altitudes and high dynamic pressures will create greater trim changes, heavier buffet, etc., and perhaps transonic flight restrictions which are of principal inter- est only to low altitude. \n\ncan be quite weak, the pressure waves can be of sufficient magnitude to create an audible disturbance. Thus, “sonic booms” will be a simple consequence of supersonic flight. \n\nThe aircraft powerplant: for supersonic flight must be of relatively high thrust output. Also, in many cases it may be necessary to provide the air breathing powerplant with special inlet configurations which will slow the airflow to subsonic prior to reaching the compressor face or combustion chamber. Aero- dynamic heating of supersonic flight can pro- vide critical inlet temperatures for the gas turbine engine as well as critical structural temperatures. \n\nThe density variations in airflow may be shown by certain optical techniques. Schlieren photographs and shadowgraphs can define the various wave patterns and their effect on the airflow. The Schlieren photographs presented in figure 3.11 define the flow conditions on an aircraft in supersonic flight. I \n\nPHENOMENA OF SUPERSONIC FLIGHT. While many of the particular effects of super- sonic flight will be presented in the detail of later discussion, many general effects may be anticipated. The airplane configuration must have aerodynamic shapes which will have low drag in compressible flow. Generally, this will require airfoil sections of low thickness ratio and sharp leading edges and body shapes of high fineness ratio to minimize the supersonic wave drag. Because of the aft movement of the aerodynamic center with supersonic flow, the increase in static longitudinal stability will demand effective, powerful control surfaces to achieve adequate controllability for super- sonic maneuvering. \n\nAircraft configurations developed for high speed flight will have significant differences in shape and planform when compared with air- craft designed for low speed flight. One of the outstanding differences will be in the selection of airfoil profiles for transonic or supersonic flight. \n\nAIRFOIL SECTIONS. It should be ob- vious that airfoils for high speed subsonic flight should have high critical Mach num- bers since critical Mach number defines the lower limit for shock wave formation and subsequent force divergence. An additional complication to airfoil selection in this speed range is that the airfoil should have a high maximum lift coefficient and sufficient thickness to allow application of high lift devices. Otherwise an excessive wing area would be required to provide maneuverability and reasonable takeoff and landing speeds. \n\n## TRANSONIC AND SUPERSONIC CONFIGU- RATIONS\n\n## PHENOMENA OF SUPERSONIC FLIGHT. While many of the particular effects of super-\n\nAs a corollary of supersonic flight the shock wave formation on the airplane may create special problems outside the immediate vicinity of the airplane surfaces. While the shock waves a great distance away from the airplane \n\nno" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8224289870257365, + "doc_id": "7c1f7c72883d8364f3eef7fd665482ede38e0c7d7602a1dc1560641a6fde8e96", + "edit_distance": 0.7516869095816464, + "f1_score": 0.902309058614565, + "meteor": 0.7277238177021434, + "precision": 0.9407407407407408, + "pred_md": "Note that for the conditions of steady flight, each airspeed requites a specific angle of attack and lift coefficient. This fact provides a fundamental concept of flying technique: Angle of attack is tbs primary Control of airspeed in steady flight. Of course, the control stick or wheel allows the pilot to control the angle of attack and, thus, control the airspeed in steady flight. In the same sense, the throttle controls the output of the powerplant and allows the pilot to control rate of climb and descent at various airspeeds.\n\nThe teal believers of these concepts ate professional instrument pilots, LSO' s, and glider pilots.. The glider pilot (or flameout enthusiast) has no recourse but to control airspeed by angle of attack and accept whatever rate of descent is incurred at the various airspeeds. The LSO must become quite proficient at judging the flight path and angle of attack of the airplane in the pattern. The more complete visual reference field available to the LSO allows him to judge the angle of attack of the airplane mote accurately than the pilot. When the airplane approaches the LSO, the precise judgment of airspeed is by the angle of attack rather than the rate of closure. If the LSO sees the airplane on the desired flight path but with too low an angle of attack, the airspeed is too high; if the angle of attack is too high, the airspeed is too low and the aitplane is approaching the stall. The mirror landing system coupled with an angle of attack indicator is an obvious refinement. The mittot indicates the desired flight path and the\n\n27\n\nNAVWEPS WOT-BO BASIC AERODYNAMICS\n\nangle of attack indicator allows precision control of the airspeed. The accomplished insttument pilot is the devotee of ' attitude' flying technique-his creed being ' attitude plus power equals performance.' During a GCA approach, the professional instrument pilot controls airspeed with stick (angle of attack) and rate of descent with power adjustment.\n\nManeuvering flight and certain transient conditions of flight tend to complicate the relationship of angle of attack and airspeed. However, the majority of flight and, certainly, the most critical regime of flight (takeoff, approach, and landing), is conducted in essentially steady flight condition.\n\nAIRFOIL LIFT CHARACTERISTICS. Airfoil section properties differ from wing or airplane properties because of the effect of the planform. Actually, the wing may have vatious airfoil sections from root to tip with taper, twist, sweepback and local flow components in a spanwise direction. The resulting aetodynamic properties of the wing are determined by the action of each section along the span and the three-dimensional flow. Airfoil section properties are derived from the basic shape or profile in two-dimensional flow and the force coefficients are given a notation of lower case letters. For example, a wing or airplane lift coefficient is C, while an airfoil section lift coefficient is termed cr. Also, wing angle of attack is Q while section angle of attack is differentiated by the use of 01~. The study of section properties allows an objective consideration of the effects of camber, thickness, etc.\n\nThe lift characteristics of five illustrative airfoil sections are shown in figure 1.12. The section lift coe&icient, c,, is plotted versus section angle of attack, olO, for five standard NACA airfoil profiles. One characteristic feature of all airfoil sections is that the slope of the various lift curves is essentially the same. At l ow lift coefhcients, the section lift coefficient i ncreases approximately 0.1 for each degree increase in angle of attack. For each of the airfoils shown, a S' change in angle of", + "recall": 0.8668941979522184, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS WOT-BO BASIC AERODYNAMICS \n\nangle of attack indicator allows precision con- trol of the airspeed. The accomplished insttu- ment pilot is the devotee of “attitude” flying technique-his creed being “attitude plus power equals performance.” During a GCA approach, the professional instrument pilot controls airspeed with stick (angle of attack) and rate of descent with power adjustment. Maneuvering flight and certain transient \n\nand rate of descent with power adjustment. Maneuvering flight and certain transient conditions of flight tend to complicate the relationship of angle of attack and airspeed. However, the majority of flight and, certainly, the most critical regime of flight (takeoff, ap- proach, and landing), is conducted in essen- tially steady flight condition. AIRFOIL LIFT CHARACTERISTICS. \n\nNote that for the conditions of steady flight, each airspeed requites a specific angle of attack and lift coefficient. This fact provides a fun- damental concept of flying technique: Angle of attack is tbs primary Control of airspeed in steady flight. Of course, the control stick or wheel allows the pilot to control the angle of attack and, thus, control the airspeed in steady flight. In the same sense, the throttle controls the output of the powerplant and allows the pilot to control rate of climb and descent at various airspeeds. The teal believers of these concepts ate pro- \n\ntially steady flight condition. AIRFOIL LIFT CHARACTERISTICS. Air- foil section properties differ from wing or airplane properties because of the effect of the planform. Actually, the wing may have vati- ous airfoil sections from root to tip with taper, twist, sweepback and local flow components in a spanwise direction. The resulting aeto- dynamic properties of the wing are determined by the action of each section along the span and the three-dimensional flow. Airfoil sec- tion properties are derived from the basic shape or profile in two-dimensional flow and the force coefficients are given a notation of lower case letters. For example, a wing or airplane lift coefficient is C, while an airfoil section lift coefficient is termed cr. Also, wing angle of attack is Q while section angle of attack is differentiated by the use of 01~. The study of section properties allows an objective consider- ation of the effects of camber, thickness, etc. The lift characteristics of five illustrative \n\nairspeeds. The teal believers of these concepts ate pro- fessional instrument pilots, LSO ’ s, and glider pilots.. The glider pilot (or flameout enthusi- ast) has no recourse but to control airspeed by angle of attack and accept whatever rate of descent is incurred at the various airspeeds. The LSO must become quite proficient at judg- ing the flight path and angle of attack of the airplane in the pattern. The more complete visual reference field available to the LSO allows him to judge the angle of attack of the airplane mote accurately than the pilot. When the airplane approaches the LSO, the precise judgment of airspeed is by the angle of attack rather than the rate of closure. If the LSO sees the airplane on the desired flight path but with too low an angle of attack, the airspeed is too high; if the angle of attack is too high, the airspeed is too low and the ait- plane is approaching the stall. The mirror landing system coupled with an angle of attack indicator is an obvious refinement. The mit- tot indicates the desired flight path and the \n\nation of the effects of camber, thickness, etc. The lift characteristics of five illustrative airfoil sections are shown in figure 1.12. The section lift coe&icient, c,, is plotted versus section angle of attack, olO, for five standard NACA airfoil profiles. One characteristic fea- ture of all airfoil sections is that the slope of the various lift curves is essentially the same. At low lift coefhcients, the section lift coeffi- cient increases approximately 0.1 for each degree increase in angle of attack. For each of the airfoils shown, a S’ change in angle of \n\n27" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.31823566221963034, + "doc_id": "1a754e5dfb1cc925c4269fb7754512c97a28f523a2d4d91d686e2bf11977f6cc", + "edit_distance": 0.6153846153846154, + "f1_score": 0.7692307692307692, + "meteor": 0.8616379310344827, + "precision": 0.625, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS 00-BOT-BO STABILITY AND CONTROL\n\nFigure 4.9. Contribution of Tail and Downwash Effects\n\nFigure 4.9. Contribution of Tail and Downwash Effects\n\n258", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Figure 4.9. Contribution of Tail and Downwash Effects \n\n258" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8891400849005909, + "doc_id": "02c4183ab8eadbce5baedd46c71e78814d9e3513c08b9b9a5983d92555857e3b", + "edit_distance": 0.38571428571428573, + "f1_score": 0.963963963963964, + "meteor": 0.9518820836006069, + "precision": 0.963963963963964, + "pred_md": "FAA Chart Users' Guide - Terminal Procedures Publication (TPP) - Terms\n\nExample of Copter with Inset\n\nExample of Copter with Inset\n\n## MISSED APPROACH INFORMATION\n\nMissed approach information is shown in 3 locations on the chart:\n\n- · The Middle Briefing Strip - The complete textual missed approach instructions are provided at the top of the ap -proach chart in the middle pilot briefing strip.\n- · The Planview - The missed approach track is drawn using a thin, hash marked line with a directional arrow. If the missed approach fix is off the chart, the missed approach track shall extend to the chart border.\n- · The Profile Box - Missed Approach Icons will be depicted in the upper left or upper right of the profile box. The Missed Approach Icons are intended to provide quick, at a glance intuitive guidance to the pilot, to supplement the textual missed approach instructions in the briefing strip. Space permitting, all textual missed approach in -structions will be graphically depicted in sequence. If space does not permit the depiction of all missed approach icons, only the first four icon boxes will be shown.\n\n108", + "recall": 0.963963963963964, + "true_md": "Example of Copter with Inset\n\nFAA Chart Users’ Guide - Terminal Procedures Publication (TPP) - Terms\n\n## MISSED APPROACH INFORMATION\n\nMissed approach information is shown in 3 locations on the chart:\n\n- • The Planview - The missed approach track is drawn using a thin, hash marked line with a directional arrow. If the missed approach fix is off the chart, the missed approach track shall extend to the chart border.\n\n- • The Middle Briefing Strip - The complete textual missed approach instructions are provided at the top of the ap - proach chart in the middle pilot briefing strip.\n\n- • The Profile Box - Missed Approach Icons will be depicted in the upper left or upper right of the profile box. The Missed Approach Icons are intended to provide quick, at a glance intuitive guidance to the pilot, to supplement the textual missed approach instructions in the briefing strip. Space permitting, all textual missed approach in - structions will be graphically depicted in sequence. If space does not permit the depiction of all missed approach icons, only the first four icon boxes will be shown.\n\n108" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.011981290206111194, + "doc_id": "53b89fe952b8c97e62f63bb8731954282904653322a615f3fbd56376b893a505", + "edit_distance": 0.9633867276887872, + "f1_score": 0.17857142857142858, + "meteor": 0.22105594864497854, + "precision": 0.09868421052631579, + "pred_md": "NAWEPS 00-801-80 TABLE OF CONTENTS\n\n| . | |\n|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|----------|\n| Supersonic engine inlets. | 238 |\n| Internal and external comprcsrion inlets Inlet performance and powerplant matching | |\n| Supersonic configurations. | 240 |\n| AERODYNAMIC HEATING. | 242 |\n| Ram temperature rise.. \\_. | 242 |\n| Effect on structural materials and powerplant performance. | 242 |\n| CHAPTER 4. STABILITY AND CONTROL | |\n| DEFINITIONS | |\n| STATIC STABIL .ITY. ............................................... | 243 |\n| DYNAMIC STAB1 ' LITY .................................... | 245 |\n| TRIM AND CONTROLLABI ,LITY | 247 |\n| .......................... AIRPLANE REFERENCE AXES. ........................... | 249 |\n| LONGITUDINAL STABILITY AND CONTROL | |\n| STATIC LONGITUDINAL STABILITY. ......................... | 250 |\n| Generalconsiderations:. .. :,\\_~. ...... . ............... | -25' 0. |\n| . .... Contribution of the component surfaces .............................. | 253 |\n| Wing Fuselage and nacelles | |\n| Horizontal tail Power-off stability. .................................................. | 259 |\n| Powereffects | 259 |\n| ....................................................... Control force stability. ............................................. | 264 |\n| Maneuveringstability ............................................... Tailoring control forces. ........................................... | 268 270 |\n| LONGITUDINAL CONTROL. .................................... | 275 |\n| Maneuvering control requirement. .................................. | 275 |\n| Takeoff control requirement. ....................................... | 275 |\n| Landing control requirement. ....................................... | 277 |\n| LONGITUDINAL DYNAMIC STABILITY. ..................... | 279 |\n| Phugoid ........................................................... Short period motions ............................................... | 279 281 |\n| MODERN CONTROL SYSTEMS. ................................. | 281 |\n| Conventional Boosted Power operated | |\n| DIRECTIONAL STABILITY AND CONTROL | |\n| DIRECTIONAL STABILITY. ...................................... | 284 |\n| Defimtuxu ................................................. ...... | 284 |\n| Contribution of the airplane components ............................ | 285 |\n| Vertical tail Wing Power effects | |\n| Fuselage and nacelles .. ................................................ | |\n| Crawal conditions. | 290 |\n| DIRECTIONAL CONTROL ....................... >. .............. | 290 |\n| Directional control requirements. .................. ................ Adverseyaw ....................................................... | 291 291 |\n\nxii", + "recall": 0.9375, + "true_md": "NAWEPS 00-801-80 TABLE OF CONTENTS \n\nxii \n\n## DIRECTIONAL STABILITY AND CONTROL\n\n## LONGITUDINAL STABILITY AND CONTROL\n\n## CHAPTER 4. STABILITY AND CONTROL\n\n## DEFINITIONS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.24941747177008258, + "doc_id": "16be3e11b69ea65d771105a9e69fa2d88f83eb8c046290f07d7da97ff0ac6d06", + "edit_distance": 0.6, + "f1_score": 0.7499999999999999, + "meteor": 0.8675523349436393, + "precision": 0.6, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS 00-801-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE\n\nfigure 2.30. Maneuvering Performance\n\nfigure 2.30. Maneuvering Performance\n\n181", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "figure 2.30. Maneuvering Performance \n\n181" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6118729878978276, + "doc_id": "106576c5d452e0e0c1622f66a523a2ce400eb769c2c7cf21aa69d814ceb7d0cf", + "edit_distance": 0.3235294117647059, + "f1_score": 0.9777777777777777, + "meteor": 0.9494544627379617, + "precision": 0.9565217391304348, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS OD-8OT-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS\n\n## (DATA FROM NACA REPORT NO. 824)\n\nFigure 1.12. Lift Characteristics of lypicol Airfoil Sections\n\nFigure 1.12. Lift Characteristics of lypicol Airfoil Sections\n\n28", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OD-8OT-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS \n\n(DATA FROM NACA REPORT NO. 824) \n\nFigure 1.12. Lift Characteristics of lypicol Airfoil Sections \n\n28" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.821285891978334, + "doc_id": "3bbd04987e37ed82910566e8e86245c12d48238c0bb25d3dd702305507d11a69", + "edit_distance": 0.6590563165905632, + "f1_score": 0.9090909090909091, + "meteor": 0.7032660384163016, + "precision": 0.9513274336283186, + "pred_md": "## NAWEPS 0040140 AlRPLANE PERFORMANCE\n\nOf course, the development of thrus,t with some finite mass flow will require some finite velocity change and there will be the inevitable waste of power in the airstream. In order to achieve high efficiency of propulsion, the thrust should be developed with a minimum of wasted power.\n\nThe propulsion efficiency of the jet powerplant can be evaluated by comparing the propulsive output power with the input power. Since the input power is the sum of the output power and wasted power, an expression for propulsion efficiency can be derived.\n\n\n\n\n\nwhere\n\n\n\nPa = propulsive power available\n\n\n\nPw= power wasted\n\nThe resulting expression for propulsion efficiency, v,,, shows a dependency on the flight velocity, V,, and the jet velocity, VZ. When the flight velocity is zero, the propulsion efficiency is zero since all power generated is wasted in the slipstream and the propulsive power is zero. The propulsion efliciency would be I.00 (or 100 percent) only when the flight velocity, Vi, equals the jet velocity, Vz. Actually, it would not be possible to produce thrust under such conditions with a finite mass flow. While 100 percent efficiency of propulsion can not be attained practically, some insight is furnished to the means of creating high values of propulsion efficiency. To ob tain high propulsion efficiency it is necessary\n\nto produce the required thrust with the highest possible mass flow and lowest possible velocity change.\n\nThe graph of figure 2.5 shows the variation of propulsion efficiency, qP, with the ratio of flight speed to jet velocity, VJV,. To achieve a propulsion efficiency of 0.85 requires that the flight velocity be approximately 75 percent of the slipstream speed relative to the airplane. Such a propulsive efficiency could be typical of a propeller powered airplane which derives its thrust by the propeller handling a large mass flow of air. The typical turbojet powerplant cannot achieve such high propulsive ethciency because the thrust is derived with a relatively smaller mass flow and larger vclocity change. For example, if the jet velocity is 1,200 ft. per sec. at a flight velocity of 600 ft. per sec., the propulsion efficiency is 0.67. The ducted fan, bypass jet, and turboprop are variaCon -which impiove tliC propulsive efIiciency of a type of powerplant which has very high power capability.\n\nWhen the conditions of range, endurance, or economy of operation are predominant, high propulsion efhciency is necessary. Thus, the propeller powered airplane with its inherent high propulsive efliciency will always find ap plication. The requirements of very high speed and high altitude demand very high propulsive power from relatively small powcrplants. When there are practical limits to the increase of mass flow, high output is obtained by large velocity changes and low propulsive efficiency is an inevitable consequence.\n\n## TURBOJET ENGINES\n\nThe turbojet engine has foundwidespread USC in aircraft propulsion because of the relatively high power output per powerplant weight and size. Very few aircraft powerplants can compare with the high output, flexibility, simplicity, and small size of the aircraft gas turbine. The coupling of the propeller and reciprocating engine is one of the most efficient means\n\n106", + "recall": 0.8704453441295547, + "true_md": "## NAWEPS 0040140 AlRPLANE PERFORMANCE\n\nto produce the required thrust with the highest possible mass flow and lowest possible velocity change. The graph of figure 2.5 shows the variation \n\nOf course, the development of thrus,t with some finite mass flow will require some finite velocity change and there will be the inevita- ble waste of power in the airstream. In order to achieve high efficiency of propulsion, the thrust should be developed with a minimum of wasted power. The propulsion efficiency of the jet power- \n\nof wasted power. The propulsion efficiency of the jet power- plant can be evaluated by comparing the propulsive output power with the input power. Since the input power is the sum of the output power and wasted power, an expression for propulsion efficiency can be derived. \n\nchange. The graph of figure 2.5 shows the variation of propulsion efficiency, qP, with the ratio of flight speed to jet velocity, VJV,. To achieve a propulsion efficiency of 0.85 requires that the flight velocity be approximately 75 percent of the slipstream speed relative to the airplane. Such a propulsive efficiency could be typical of a propeller powered airplane which derives its thrust by the propeller handling a large mass flow of air. The typical turbojet power- plant cannot achieve such high propulsive ethciency because the thrust is derived with a relatively smaller mass flow and larger vcloc- ity change. For example, if the jet velocity is 1,200 ft. per sec. at a flight velocity of 600 ft. per sec., the propulsion efficiency is 0.67. The ducted fan, bypass jet, and turboprop are vari- aCon -which impiove tliC propulsive efIiciency of a type of powerplant which has very high power capability. When the conditions of range, endurance, or \n\npower capability. When the conditions of range, endurance, or economy of operation are predominant, high propulsion efhciency is necessary. Thus, the propeller powered airplane with its inherent high propulsive efliciency will always find ap plication. The requirements of very high speed and high altitude demand very high propulsive power from relatively small powcr- plants. When there are practical limits to the increase of mass flow, high output is obtained by large velocity changes and low propulsive efficiency is an inevitable consequence. \n\nThe resulting expression for propulsion effi- ciency, v,,, shows a dependency on the flight velocity, V,, and the jet velocity, VZ. When the flight velocity is zero, the propulsion efficiency is zero since all power generated is wasted in the slipstream and the propulsive power is zero. The propulsion efliciency would be I.00 (or 100 percent) only when the flight velocity, Vi, equals the jet velocity, Vz. Actually, it would not be possible to produce thrust under such conditions with a finite mass flow. While 100 percent efficiency of propul- sion can not be attained practically, some insight is furnished to the means of creating high values of propulsion efficiency. To ob tain high propulsion efficiency it is necessary \n\nThe turbojet engine has foundwidespread USC in aircraft propulsion because of the relatively high power output per powerplant weight and size. Very few aircraft powerplants can com- pare with the high output, flexibility, simplic- ity, and small size of the aircraft gas turbine. The coupling of the propeller and recipro- cating engine is one of the most efficient means \n\n## TURBOJET ENGINES\n\nwhere \n\n$$Pa vp=Pa+Pw zv, ')p= v*+v1 $$\n\n$$trp = propulsion efficiency 9=“eta” Pa = propulsive power available = TCZV~ Pw= power wasted $$\n\n106" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8984914628843952, + "doc_id": "3aa9d99590e1b24ce4a10685d3ffe86550965aedb338c57987004ef9e80fcf93", + "edit_distance": 0.8426395939086294, + "f1_score": 0.9182879377431906, + "meteor": 0.6365684408010278, + "precision": 0.959349593495935, + "pred_md": "CONTRIBUTION OF THE COMPONENT SURFACES. The net pitching moment about the lateral axis is due to the contribution of each of the component surfaces acting in their appropriate flow fields. By study of the contribution of each component the effect of each component on the static stability may be appreciated. It is necessary to recall that the pitching moment coefficient is defined as:\n\n\n\nThus, any pitching moment coefficient-regardless of source-has the common denominator of dynamic pressure, q, wing area, S, and wing mean aerodynamic chord, MAC. This common denominator is applied to the pitching moments contributed by the fuselage and nacelles, horizontal tail, and power effects as well as pitching moments contributed by the wing.\n\nWING. The contribution of the wing to stability depends primarily on the location of the aerodynamic center with respect to the airplane center of gravity. Generally, the aerodynamic center-or a.c.-is defined as the point on the wing mean aerodynamic chord where the wing pitching moment coefficient does not vary with lift coefficient. All changes in lift coefficient effectively take place at the wing aerodynamic center. Thus, if the wing experiences some change in lift coefficient, the pitching moment created will be a direct function of the relative location of the a.c. and c.g.\n\nSince stability is evidenced by the development of restoring moments, the c.g. must be forward of the a.c. for the wing to contribute to positive static longitudinal stability. As shown in figure 4.6, a change in lift aft of the c,g. produces a stable restoring moment dependent npon the lever arm between the a.c. and c.g. In this case, the wing contribution would be stable and the curve of CM versus CL for the wing alone would have a negative slope. If the c.g. were located at the a.c., C, would\n\nNAVWEPS OO-BOT-BO STABILITY AND CONTROL\n\nnot vary with C, since all changes in lift would take place at the c.g. In this case, the wing contribution to stability would be neutral. When the c.g. is located behind the a.c. the wing contribution i,s unstable and the curve of C, versus CL for the wing alone would have a positive slope.\n\nSince the wing is the predominating aerodynamic surface of an airplane, any change in the wing contribution may produce a significant change in the airplane stability. This fact would be most apparent in the case of the flying wing or tailless airplane where the wing contribution determines the airplane stability. In order for the wing to achieve stability, the c.g. must be ahead of the a.c. Also, the wing must have a positive pitching moment about the aerodynamic center to achieve trim at positive lift coefficients. The first chart of figure 4.7 illustrates that the wing which is stable will trim at a negative lift coefficient if the C,,, is negative. If the stable wing has a positive C,,, it will then trim at a useful positive CL. The only means available to achieve trim at a positive CL with a wing which has a negative C,,, is an unstable c.g. position aft of the ax. As a result, the tailless aircraft cannot utilize high lift devices which incur any significant changes in C,,,.\n\nWhiIe the trim lift coefficient may be altered by a change in c.g. position, the resulting change in stability is undesirable and is unsatisfactory as a primary means of control. The variation of trim CL by deflection of control surfaces is usually more effective and is less inviting of disaster. The early attempts at manned flight led to this conclusion.\n\nWhen the aircraft is operating in subsonic flight, the a.c. of the wing remains fixed at the 25 percent chord station. When the aircraft is flown in supersonic flight, the ax. of the wing will approach the 50 percent chord station. Such a large variation in the location of the a.c. can produce large changes in the wing contribution and greatly alter the airplane longitudinal stability. The second chart\n\n252", + "recall": 0.8805970149253731, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OO-BOT-BO STABILITY AND CONTROL \n\nnot vary with C, since all changes in lift would take place at the c.g. In this case, the wing contribution to stability would be neutral. When the c.g. is located behind the a.c. the wing contribution i,s unstable and the curve of C, versus CL for the wing alone would have a positive slope. Since the wing is the predominating aero- \n\nCONTRIBUTION OF THE COMPONENT SURFACES. The net pitching moment about the lateral axis is due to the contribution of each of the component surfaces acting in their appropriate flow fields. By study of the con- tribution of each component the effect of each component on the static stability may be ap- preciated. It is necessary to recall that the pitching moment coefficient is defined as: \n\na positive slope. Since the wing is the predominating aero- dynamic surface of an airplane, any change in the wing contribution may produce a sig- nificant change in the airplane stability. This fact would be most apparent in the case of the flying wing or tailless airplane where the wing contribution determines the airplane stability. In order for the wing to achieve stability, the c.g. must be ahead of the a.c. Also, the wing must have a positive pitching moment about the aerodynamic center to achieve trim at positive lift coefficients. The first chart of figure 4.7 illustrates that the wing which is stable will trim at a negative lift coefficient if the C,,, is negative. If the stable wing has a positive C,,, it will then trim at a useful posi- tive CL. The only means available to achieve trim at a positive CL with a wing which has a negative C,,, is an unstable c.g. position aft of the ax. As a result, the tailless aircraft cannot utilize high lift devices which incur any significant changes in C,,,. \n\nThus, any pitching moment coefficient-re- gardless of source-has the common denomi- nator of dynamic pressure, q, wing area, S, and wing mean aerodynamic chord, MAC. This common denominator is applied to the pitch- ing moments contributed by the fuselage and nacelles, horizontal tail, and power effects as well as pitching moments contributed by the wing. \n\nWING. The contribution of the wing to stability depends primarily on the location of the aerodynamic center with respect to the airplane center of gravity. Generally, the aerodynamic center-or a.c.-is defined as the point on the wing mean aerodynamic chord where the wing pitching moment coefficient does not vary with lift coefficient. All changes in lift coefficient effectively take place at the wing aerodynamic center. Thus, if the wing experiences some change in lift coefficient, the pitching moment created will be a direct function of the relative location of the a.c. and c.g. Since stability is evidenced by the develop- \n\nWhiIe the trim lift coefficient may be altered by a change in c.g. position, the resulting change in stability is undesirable and is unsat- isfactory as a primary means of control. The variation of trim CL by deflection of control surfaces is usually more effective and is less inviting of disaster. The early attempts at manned flight led to this conclusion. \n\nWhen the aircraft is operating in subsonic flight, the a.c. of the wing remains fixed at the 25 percent chord station. When the aircraft is flown in supersonic flight, the ax. of the wing will approach the 50 percent chord sta- tion. Such a large variation in the location of the a.c. can produce large changes in the wing contribution and greatly alter the air- plane longitudinal stability. The second chart \n\nc.g. Since stability is evidenced by the develop- ment of restoring moments, the c.g. must be forward of the a.c. for the wing to contribute to positive static longitudinal stability. As shown in figure 4.6, a change in lift aft of the c,g. produces a stable restoring moment de- pendent npon the lever arm between the a.c. and c.g. In this case, the wing contribution would be stable and the curve of CM versus CL for the wing alone would have a negative slope. If the c.g. were located at the a.c., C, would \n\n252 \n\n$$M ‘“=qS(MAC) $$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9041467114109883, + "doc_id": "4bed2a8aa51ac37058e79605821bbc426d032b0b6ca8bdf3409ed8508ccd8c67", + "edit_distance": 0.20215633423180593, + "f1_score": 0.949438202247191, + "meteor": 0.9653684989730832, + "precision": 0.9337016574585635, + "pred_md": "FAA Chart Users' Guide - Terminal Procedures Publication (TPP) - Terms\n\n## Circling Minimums\n\nThere was a change to the TERPS criteria in 2012 that affects circling area dimension by expanding the areas to provide improved obstacle protection. To indicate that the new criteria had been applied to a given procedure, a is placed on the circling line of minimums. The new circling tables and explanatory information is located in the Legend of the TPP.\n\nThe approaches using standard circling approach areas can be identified by the absence of the on the circling line of minima.\n\nApply Standard Circling Approach Maneuvering Radius Table\n\n## AIRPORT SKETCH\n\nThe airport sketch is a depiction of the airport with emphasis on runway pattern and related information, positioned in either the lower left or lower right corner of the chart to aid pilot recognition of the airport from the air and to provide some information to aid on ground navigation of the airport. The runways are drawn to scale and oriented to true north. Runway dimensions (length and width) are shown for all active runways.\n\nRunway(s) are depicted based on what type and construction of the runway.\n\nTaxiways and aprons are shaded grey. Other runway features that may be shown are runway numbers, runway dimensions, runway slope, arresting gear, and displaced threshold.\n\nOther information concerning lighting, final approach bearings, airport beacon, obstacles, control tower, NAVAIDs, heli -pads may also be shown.\n\n## Airport Elevation and Touchdown Zone Elevation\n\nThe airport elevation is shown enclosed within a box in the upper left corner of the sketch box and the touchdown zone elevation (TDZE) is shown in the upper right corner of the sketch box. The airport elevation is the highest point of an airport's usable runways measured in feet from mean sea level. The TDZE is the highest elevation in the first 3,000 feet of the landing surface. Circling only approaches will not show a TDZE.\n\n114\n\nApply Expanded Circling Approach Maneuvering Airspace Radius Table", + "recall": 0.9657142857142857, + "true_md": "There was a change to the TERPS criteria in 2012 that affects circling area dimension by expanding the areas to provide improved obstacle protection. To indicate that the new criteria had been applied to a given procedure, a is placed on the circling line of minimums. The new circling tables and explanatory information is located in the Legend of the TPP.\n\nThe approaches using standard circling approach areas can be identified by the absence of the on the circling line of minima.\n\nThe airport sketch is a depiction of the airport with emphasis on runway pattern and related information, positioned in either the lower left or lower right corner of the chart to aid pi- lot recognition of the airport from the air and to provide some information to aid on ground navigation of the airport. The runways are drawn to scale and oriented to true north. Runway dimensions (length and width) are shown for all active runways.\n\nRunway(s) are depicted based on what type and construction of the runway.\n\nTaxiways and aprons are shaded grey. Other runway features that may be shown are runway numbers, runway dimen- sions, runway slope, arresting gear, and displaced threshold.\n\nOther information concerning lighting, final approach bearings, airport beacon, obstacles, control tower, NAVAIDs, heli - pads may also be shown.\n\nThe airport elevation is shown enclosed within a box in the upper left corner of the sketch box and the touchdown zone elevation (TDZE) is shown in the upper right corner of the sketch box. The airport elevation is the highest point of an airport’s usable runways measured in feet from mean sea level. The TDZE is the highest elevation in the first 3,000 feet of the landing surface. Circling only approaches will not show a TDZE.\n\n114\n\nFAA Chart Users’ Guide - Terminal Procedures Publication (TPP) - Terms\n\n## Airport Elevation and Touchdown Zone Elevation\n\n## AIRPORT SKETCH\n\n## Circling Minimums" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.24552336310484263, + "doc_id": "b0746ffdb1e0943448794927e13c3d14beeec6ffd0b0369fa35b3d254210e065", + "edit_distance": 0.6756756756756757, + "f1_score": 0.6, + "meteor": 0.8256704980842913, + "precision": 0.42857142857142855, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS OO-BOT-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL\n\n## IST MODE OR PHUGOID\n\n2ND\n\nMODE OR SHORT\n\nPERIOD\n\nOSCILLATION\n\nMOTION OCCURS AT ESSENTIALLY CONSTANT SPEED\n\nFigure 4.20. Longiitudinal Dynamic Sttxbility\n\nFigure 4.20. Longiitudinal Dynamic Sttxbility\n\n280\n\n0", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OO-BOT-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL \n\nFigure 4.20. Longiitudinal Dynamic Sttxbility \n\n280" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7635332920902254, + "doc_id": "fa6a3f4a3d06a36f9599b2bb974380ba4778d41c6815c35a7671aad4aee2ff63", + "edit_distance": 0.6190476190476191, + "f1_score": 0.9473684210526315, + "meteor": 0.9507738095238095, + "precision": 0.9473684210526315, + "pred_md": "## HYDROGRAPHY (Continued)\n\n39\n\nFAA Chart Users' Guide - VFR Symbology - Sectional and Terminal Area Charts", + "recall": 0.9473684210526315, + "true_md": "39\n\nFAA Chart Users’ Guide - VFR Symbology - Sectional and Terminal Area Charts\n\n## HYDROGRAPHY (Continued)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9139373954681373, + "doc_id": "96e6a143ec97b97f544014d5349452120e3f52098a5a30e2966e093ed1dbf88d", + "edit_distance": 0.7913580246913581, + "f1_score": 0.9277978339350179, + "meteor": 0.6597593587492846, + "precision": 0.9661654135338346, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS OD-ROT-80 APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO ' SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYl,NG\n\nAs a result of this relationship, a IO percent increase in gross weight would require a 5 percent increase in glide speed to maintain (L/D),,. While small. variations in gross weight may produce a measurable change in best glide speed, the airplane can tolerate small deviations from the optimum C, without significant change in (L/D) and glide ratio. For this reason, a standard, single value of glide speed may be specified for a small range of gross weights at which glide performance can be of importance. A gross weight which is considerably different from the normal range will require a modification of best glide speed to maintain the maximum glide ratio.\n\nThe effect a! &it.& on glide performance is insignificant if there is no change in (L/D),.,. Generally, the glide performance of the majority of airplanes is subsonic and there is no noticeable variation of (L/D),, with altitude. Any specific airplane configuration at a particular gross weight will require a specific value of dynamic pressure to sustain flight at the C, for (L/D),,. Thus, the airplane will have a best glide speed which is a specific value of equivalent airspeed (EAS) independent of altitude. For convenience and simplicity, this best glide speed is specified as a specific value of indicated airspeed (IAS) and compressibility and position errors are neglected. The principal effect of altitude is that at high altitude the true airspeed (TAX) and rate of descent along the optimum glide path are increased above the low altitude conditions. However, if WD),.z is maintained, the glide angle and glide ratio are identical to the low altitllde conditions.\n\nThe effect of configura+~n has been noted previously in that the addition of parasite drag by flaps, landing gear, speed brakes, external stores, etc. will reduce the maximum lift-drag ratio and cause a reduction of glide ratio. In the case where glide distance is of great importance, the airplane must be maintained in the clean configuration and flown at (L/D),=,\n\nThe eficct aj wind on gliding performance is similar to the effect of wind on cruising range. That is, a headwind will always reduce the glide range and a tailwind will always increase the glide range. The maximum glide range of the airplane in still air will be obtained by flight at (L/D),,,,. However, when a wind is present, the optimum gliding conditions may not be accomplished by operation at (L/D)ma. For example, when a headwind is present, the optimum glide speed will be increased to obtain a maximum proportion of ground distance to altitude. In this sense, the increased glide speed helps to minimize the detrimental effect of the headwind. In the case of a tailwind, the optimum glide speed will be reduced to maximize the benefit of the tailwind. For ordinary wind conditions, maintaining the glide speed best for zero wind conditions will suffice and the loss or gain in glide distance must be accepted. However, when the wind conditions are extreme and the wind velocity is large in comparison with the glide speed, e.g., wind velocity greater than 25 percent of the glide speed, changes in the glide speed must be made to obtain maximum possible ground distance.\n\nTHE FLAMEOUT PATTERN. In the case of failure of the powerplant, every effort should be made to establish a well-planned, stabilized approach if a suitable landing area is available. Generally a 360' overhead approach is specified with the approach beginning from the ' high key' point of the flameout pattern. The function of a standardized pattern is to provide a flight path well within the capabilities of the airplane and the abilities of the pilot to judge and control the flight path. The flight handbook will generally specify the particulars of the flameout pattern such as the altitude at the high key, glide speeds, use of flaps, etc. Of course, the particulars of the flameout pattern will be determined by the aerodynamic characteristics of the airplane. A principal factor is the\n\n272", + "recall": 0.8923611111111112, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OD-ROT-80 APPLICATION OF AERODYNAMICS TO ‘ SPECIFIC PROBLEMS OF FLYl,NG \n\nThe eficct aj wind on gliding performance is similar to the effect of wind on cruising range. That is, a headwind will always reduce the glide range and a tailwind will always increase the glide range. The maximum glide range of the airplane in still air will be obtained by flight at (L/D),,,,. However, when a wind is present, the optimum gliding conditions may not be accomplished by operation at (L/D)ma. For example, when a headwind is present, the optimum glide speed will be increased to obtain a maximum proportion of ground dis- tance to altitude. In this sense, the increased glide speed helps to minimize the detrimental effect of the headwind. In the case of a tail- wind, the optimum glide speed will be reduced to maximize the benefit of the tailwind. For ordinary wind conditions, maintaining the glide speed best for zero wind conditions will suffice and the loss or gain in glide distance must be accepted. However, when the wind conditions are extreme and the wind velocity is large in comparison with the glide speed, e.g., wind velocity greater than 25 percent of the glide speed, changes in the glide speed must be made to obtain maximum possible ground distance. THE FLAMEOUT PATTERN. In the case \n\nAs a result of this relationship, a IO percent increase in gross weight would require a 5 per- cent increase in glide speed to maintain (L/D),,. While small. variations in gross weight may produce a measurable change in best glide speed, the airplane can tolerate small deviations from the optimum C, without signif- icant change in (L/D) and glide ratio. For this reason, a standard, single value of glide speed may be specified for a small range of gross weights at which glide performance can be of importance. A gross weight which is con- siderably different from the normal range will require a modification of best glide speed to maintain the maximum glide ratio. \n\nThe effect a! &it.& on glide performance is insignificant if there is no change in (L/D),.,. Generally, the glide performance of the major- ity of airplanes is subsonic and there is no noticeable variation of (L/D),, with altitude. Any specific airplane configuration at a partic- ular gross weight will require a specific value of dynamic pressure to sustain flight at the C, for (L/D),,. Thus, the airplane will have a best glide speed which is a specific value of equivalent airspeed (EAS) independent of altitude. For convenience and simplicity, this best glide speed is specified as a specific value of indicated airspeed (IAS) and compressibility and position errors are neglected. The prin- cipal effect of altitude is that at high altitude the true airspeed (TAX) and rate of descent along the optimum glide path are increased above the low altitude conditions. However, if WD),.z is maintained, the glide angle and glide ratio are identical to the low altitllde conditions. \n\ndistance. THE FLAMEOUT PATTERN. In the case of failure of the powerplant, every effort should be made to establish a well-planned, stabilized approach if a suitable landing area is available. Generally a 360’ overhead ap- proach is specified with the approach begin- ning from the “high key” point of the flameout pattern. The function of a standardized pattern is to provide a flight path well within the capabilities of the airplane and the abilities of the pilot to judge and control the flight path. The flight handbook will generally specify the particulars of the flameout pattern such as the altitude at the high key, glide speeds, use of flaps, etc. Of course, the par- ticulars of the flameout pattern will be de- termined by the aerodynamic characteristics of the airplane. A principal factor is the \n\nThe effect of configura+~n has been noted pre- viously in that the addition of parasite drag by flaps, landing gear, speed brakes, external stores, etc. will reduce the maximum lift-drag ratio and cause a reduction of glide ratio. In the case where glide distance is of great im- portance, the airplane must be maintained in the clean configuration and flown at (L/D),=, \n\n272" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.20823512359629073, + "doc_id": "d7278ea4067c827a7dd48a2bae6ae9a4ace368482e401f6ca186546275694bea", + "edit_distance": 0.8245614035087719, + "f1_score": 0.56, + "meteor": 0.7639121222259395, + "precision": 0.3888888888888889, + "pred_md": "## SURFACE TUFT PHOTOGRAHS FOR A SWEPT, TAPERED WlNG 60° DELTA, AR=2.31, A=0\n\nFigure 1.33. Std Patterns (sheet 8 018)\n\nFigure 1.33. Std Patterns (sheet 8 018)\n\na = 0 DEGEES\n\na = 0 DEGEES\n\nFROM NACA TN 2674\n\nFROM NACA TN 2674\n\nNAVWEPS OD-801-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OD-801-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS \n\nFigure 1.33. Std Patterns (sheet 8 018)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8418114242566115, + "doc_id": "166041d9317b6da2053e2ca7c6b02fada05c61054f5f9b03d79107fba52c0f98", + "edit_distance": 0.8767833981841764, + "f1_score": 0.915032679738562, + "meteor": 0.5958179226373335, + "precision": 0.9502262443438914, + "pred_md": "moment about the lateral axis is studied in the coefficient form.\n\n\n\nor\n\n\n\nwhere\n\nM=pitching moment about the c.g., ft.lbs., positive if in a nose-up direction q= dynamic pressure, psf S= wing area, sq. ft. MAC=mean aerodynamic chord, ft. C,= pitching moment coefficient\n\nThe pitching moment coefficients contributed by all the various components of the aircraft are summed up and plotted versus lift coefficient. Study of this plot of C, versus C, will relate the static longitudinal stability of the airplane.\n\nGraph A of figure 4.5 illustrates the variation of pitching moment coefficient, C,, with lift coefficient, C,, for an airplane with positive static longitudinal stability. Evidence of static stability is shown by the tendency to re,t,urn to equilibrium-or ' trim' upon dis.,placement. The airplane described by graph A is in trim or equilibrium when C,=O and, if the ' airplane is disturbed to some different C,, the pitching moment change tends to return the aircraft to the.point of trim. If the airplane ' were disturbed to some higher C, (point Y), a negative or nose-down pitching moment is developed which tends to decrease angle of attack back to the trim point. If the airplane were disturbed to some lower C,, (point X), a positive, or nose-up pitching moment is developed which tends to increase the angle of attack back to the trim point. Thus, positive static longitudinal stability is indicated by a negative slope of C, versus C,, i.e., positive stability is evidenced by a decrease in CM with an increase in C,.\n\nThe degree of static longitudinal stability is indicated by the slope of the curve of pitching moment coefficient with lift coefficient. Graph\n\n251\n\n## NAVWE,PS OO-ROT-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL\n\nB of figure 4.5 provides comparison of the stable and unstable conditions. Positive stability is indicated by the curve with negative slope. Neutral static stability would be the result if the curve had zero slope. If neutral stability exists, the airplane could be disturbed to some higher or lower lift coefficient without change in pitching moment coefficient. Such a condition would indicate that the airplane would have no tendency to return to some original equilibrium and would not hold trim. An airplane which demonstrates a positive slope of the C, versus C, curve would be unstable. If the unstable airplane were subject to any disturbance from equilibrium at the trim point, the changes in pitching moment would only magnify the disturbance. When the unstable airplane is disturbed to some higher CL, a positive change in C, occurs which would illustrate a tendency for continued, greater displacement. When the unstable airplane is disturbed to some lower C,,, a negative change in C, takes place which tends to create continued displacement.\n\nOrdinarily, the static longitudinal stability of a conventional airplane configuration does not vary with lift coefficient. In other words, the slope of C, versus CL does not change with CL. However, if the airplane has sweepback, large contribution of power effects to stability, or significant changes in downwash at the horizontal tail, noticeable changes in static stability can occur at high lift coefficients. This condition is illustrated by graph C of figure 4.5. The curve of C, versus CL of this illustration shows a good stable slope at low values of CL. Increasing CL effects a slight decrease in the negative slope hence a decrease in stability occurs. With continued increase in C,, the slope becomes zero and neutral stability exists. Eventually, the slope becomes positive and the airplane becomes unstable or ' pitch-up' results. Thus, at any lift coefficient, the static stability of the airpl.ane is depicted by the slope of the curve of CM versus CL.", + "recall": 0.8823529411764706, + "true_md": "NAVWE,PS OO-ROT-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL \n\nmoment about the lateral axis is studied in the coefficient form. \n\nB of figure 4.5 provides comparison of the stable and unstable conditions. Positive sta- bility is indicated by the curve with negative slope. Neutral static stability would be the result if the curve had zero slope. If neutral stability exists, the airplane could be dis- turbed to some higher or lower lift coefficient without change in pitching moment coefficient. Such a condition would indicate that the air- plane would have no tendency to return to some original equilibrium and would not hold trim. An airplane which demonstrates a posi- tive slope of the C, versus C, curve would be unstable. If the unstable airplane were subject to any disturbance from equilibrium at the trim point, the changes in pitching moment would only magnify the disturbance. When the unstable airplane is disturbed to some higher CL, a positive change in C, occurs which would illustrate a tendency for continued, greater displacement. When the unstable air- plane is disturbed to some lower C,,, a negative change in C, takes place which tends to create continued displacement. \n\nOrdinarily, the static longitudinal stability of a conventional airplane configuration does not vary with lift coefficient. In other words, the slope of C, versus CL does not change with CL. However, if the airplane has sweepback, large contribution of power effects to stability, or significant changes in downwash at the horizontal tail, noticeable changes in static stability can occur at high lift coefficients. This condition is illustrated by graph C of figure 4.5. The curve of C, versus CL of this illustration shows a good stable slope at low values of CL. Increasing CL effects a slight decrease in the negative slope hence a decrease in stability occurs. With continued increase in C,, the slope becomes zero and neutral stability exists. Eventually, the slope be- comes positive and the airplane becomes un- stable or “pitch-up” results. Thus, at any lift coefficient, the static stability of the air- pl.ane is depicted by the slope of the curve of CM versus CL. \n\nThe degree of static longitudinal stability is indicated by the slope of the curve of pitching moment coefficient with lift coefficient. Graph \n\nGraph A of figure 4.5 illustrates the variation of pitching moment coefficient, C,, with lift coefficient, C,, for an airplane with positive static longitudinal stability. Evidence of static stability is shown by the tendency to re- ,t,urn to equilibrium-or “trim”- upon dis- .,placement. The airplane described by graph A is in trim or equilibrium when C,=O and, if the ‘ airplane is disturbed to some different C,, the pitching moment change tends to return the aircraft to the.point of trim. If the airplane ‘ were disturbed to some higher C, (point Y), a negative or nose-down pitching moment is de- veloped which tends to decrease angle of attack back to the trim point. If the airplane were disturbed to some lower C,, (point X), a posi- tive, or nose-up pitching moment is developed which tends to increase the angle of attack back to the trim point. Thus, positive static longitudinal stability is indicated by a negative slope of C, versus C,, i.e., positive stability is evidenced by a decrease in CM with an increase in C,. \n\nThe pitching moment coefficients contributed by all the various components of the aircraft are summed up and plotted versus lift coeffi- cient. Study of this plot of C, versus C, will relate the static longitudinal stability of the airplane. \n\n- M=pitching moment about the c.g., ft.- lbs., positive if in a nose-up direction \n\n- q= dynamic pressure, psf S= wing area, sq. ft. \n\n- q= dynamic pressure, S= wing area, sq. ft. \n\n- MAC=mean aerodynamic chord, ft. C,= pitching moment coefficient \n\n- MAC=mean aerodynamic chord, ft. C,= pitching moment coefficient \n\nwhere \n\nor \n\n$$M = C,qS(MAC) $$\n\n$$M &= qS(MAC) $$\n\n251" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8707781840773287, + "doc_id": "0f356babd839758e390bd486cd725d01ba71ceae2518331db0a773bc60bc57b8", + "edit_distance": 0.3444592790387183, + "f1_score": 0.943894389438944, + "meteor": 0.8464795949760123, + "precision": 0.9694915254237289, + "pred_md": "## NAVWEPS OO-BOT-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE\n\nthe lower temperatures can precipitate this water out of solution in liquid or ice crystal form.\n\nHigh altitude flight produces relatively small air mass flow through the engine and the relatively low fuel flow rate. At these conditions a malfunction of the fuel control and governing apparatus could cause flameout. If the fuel control allows excessively low fuel flow during controlled deceleration, the lean blow out limit may be exceeded. Also, if the governed idle condition allows any deceleration below the idle condition the engine will usually continue to lose speed and flameout.\n\nRestarting the engine in flight requires suflicient RPM and airflow to allow stabilized operation. Generally, the extremes of altitude are most critical for attempted airstart.\n\n(4) An increased compressor nlet air tcmpcrai tare can have a profound effect on the output tbLrust of 2 rnrhniet m&n,= ---' -,----o---. As shown in figure 2.13, an increase in compressor inlet temperature produces an even greater increase in the compressor discharge temperature. Since the turbine inlet temperature is limited to some maximum value, any increase in compressor discharge temperature will reduce the temperature change which can take place in the combustion chamber. Hence, the fuel flow will be limited and a reduction in thrust is incurred.\n\nThe effect of inlet air temperature on thrust output has two special ramifications. At rakcoff, a high ambient air temperature at a given pressure altitude relates a high density altitude. Thus, the takeoff thrust is reduced because of low density and low mass flow. In addition to the loss of thrust due to reduced mass flow, thrust and fuel flow are reduced further because of the high compressor inlet temperature. In flight at Sigh Mach number, the aerodynamic heating will provide an increase in compressor inlet temperature. Since the compressor inlet temperature will reflect the compressor discharge temperature and the allowable fuel flow, the compressor inlet air temperature may\n\nprovide a convenient limit to sustained high speed flight.\n\n(5) The effect of engine overspeed r critical vio bration speed ranger is important in the service life of an engine. One of the principal sources of turbine loads is the centrifugal loads due to rotation. Since the centrifugal loads vary as the square of the rotative speed, a 5 percent overspeed would produce 10.25 percent overstress (1.05*= 1.1025). The large increase in stress with rorative speed could produce very rapid accumulation of creep and fatigue damage at high temperature. Repeated overspeed and, hence, overstress can cause failure early in the anticipated service life.\n\nSince the turbojet engine is composed of many different distributed masses and elastic structure, there are certain vibra~tory modes and frequencies for the shaft, blades, etc. While it is necessary to prevent any resonant conditions from existing within the normal operating range, there may be certain vibratory modes encountered in the low power range common to ground operation, low altitude endurance, acceleration or deceleration. If certain operating RPM range restrictions are specified due to vibratory conditions, operations must be conducted with a minimum of time in this area. The greatly increased stresses common to vibratory conditions are quite likely to cause fatigue failures of the offending components.\n\nThe operating limitations of the engine are usually specified by various combinations of RPM, exhaust gas temperature, and allowable time. The conditions of high power output and acceleration have relatively short times allowable to prevent abuse of the powerplant and obtain good service life. While the allowable times at various high power and acceleration condition appear arbitrary, the purpose is to reduce the spectrum of loading which contributes the most rapid accumulation of creep and fatigue damage. In fact, in some instances, the arbitrary time standards can be set to suit the particular requirements of a\n\n128", + "recall": 0.9196141479099679, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OO-BOT-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE \n\nthe lower temperatures can precipitate this water out of solution in liquid or ice crystal form. High altitude flight produces relatively small \n\nform. High altitude flight produces relatively small air mass flow through the engine and the rela- tively low fuel flow rate. At these conditions a malfunction of the fuel control and governing apparatus could cause flameout. If the fuel control allows excessively low fuel flow during controlled deceleration, the lean blow out limit may be exceeded. Also, if the governed idle condition allows any deceleration below the idle condition the engine will usually continue to lose speed and flameout. \n\nRestarting the engine in flight requires sufli- cient RPM and airflow to allow stabilized op- eration. Generally, the extremes of altitude are most critical for attempted airstart. (4) An increased compressor inlet air tcmpcra- \n\nare most critical for attempted airstart. (4) An increased compressor inlet air tcmpcra- tare can have a profound effect on the output tbLrust of 2 rnrhniet m&n,= ---“-,-- --o---. As shown in figure 2.13, an increase in compressor inlet temperature produces an even greater increase in the compressor discharge temperature. Since the turbine inlet temperature is limited to some maximum value, any increase in com- pressor discharge temperature will reduce the temperature change which can take place in the combustion chamber. Hence, the fuel flow will be limited and a reduction in thrust is incurred. \n\nThe effect of inlet air temperature on thrust output has two special ramifications. At rakc- off, a high ambient air temperature at a given pressure altitude relates a high density altitude. Thus, the takeoff thrust is reduced because of low density and low mass flow. In addition to the loss of thrust due to reduced mass flow, thrust and fuel flow are reduced further be- cause of the high compressor inlet temperature. In flight at Sigh Mach number, the aerodynamic heating will provide an increase in compressor inlet temperature. Since the compressor inlet temperature will reflect the compressor dis- charge temperature and the allowable fuel flow, the compressor inlet air temperature may \n\noffending components. The operating limitations of the engine are usually specified by various combinations of RPM, exhaust gas temperature, and allowable time. The conditions of high power output and acceleration have relatively short times allowable to prevent abuse of the powerplant and obtain good service life. While the al- lowable times at various high power and acceleration condition appear arbitrary, the purpose is to reduce the spectrum of loading which contributes the most rapid accumulation of creep and fatigue damage. In fact, in some instances, the arbitrary time standards can be set to suit the particular requirements of a \n\nSince the turbojet engine is composed of many different distributed masses and elastic structure, there are certain vibra~tory modes and frequencies for the shaft, blades, etc. While it is necessary to prevent any resonant conditions from existing within the normal operating range, there may be certain vibra- tory modes encountered in the low power range common to ground operation, low altitude endurance, acceleration or deceleration. If certain operating RPM range restrictions are specified due to vibratory conditions, opera- tions must be conducted with a minimum of time in this area. The greatly increased stresses common to vibratory conditions are quite likely to cause fatigue failures of the offending components. The operating limitations of the engine are \n\n(5) The effect of engine overspeed or critical vi- bration speed ranger is important in the service life of an engine. One of the principal sources of turbine loads is the centrifugal loads due to rotation. Since the centrifugal loads vary as the square of the rotative speed, a 5 percent overspeed would produce 10.25 percent over- stress (1.05*= 1.1025). The large increase in stress with rorative speed could produce very rapid accumulation of creep and fatigue dam- age at high temperature. Repeated overspeed and, hence, overstress can cause failure early in the anticipated service life. \n\nprovide a convenient limit to sustained high speed flight. \n\n128" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9082620617492209, + "doc_id": "36f536567753e8055fb857430b16a3df747499aaf47fac4b525f47ca7cc637df", + "edit_distance": 0.5732814526588845, + "f1_score": 0.9483394833948341, + "meteor": 0.7780285779203878, + "precision": 0.969811320754717, + "pred_md": "weight if the airplane is flown at the angle of attack for (L/D),. Of course, the gross weight would affect the glide airspeed necessary for this particular angle of attack but the glide ratio would be unaffected.\n\nAIRFOIL DRAG CHARACTERISTICS. The total drag of an airplane is composed of the drags of the individual components and the forces caused by interference between these components. The drag of an airplane configuration must include the various drags due to lift, form, friction, interference, leakage, etc. To appreciate the factors which affect the drag of an airplane configuration, it is most logical to consider the factors which affect the drag of airfoil sections. In order to allow an objective consideration of the effects of thickness, camber, etc., the properties of two-dimensional sections must be studied. Airfoil section properties are derived from the basic profile in two-dimensional. flow and are provided the lower case shorthand notation to distinguish them from wing or airplane properties, e.g., wing or airplane drag coe5cient is C, while airfoil section drag coefficient is c,.\n\nThe drag characteristics of three illustrative airfoil sections are shown in figure 1.14. The section drag coe&cient, c,, is plotted versus the section lift coefficient, cr. The drag on the airfoil section is composed of pressure drag and skin friction. When the airfoil is at low lift coe&cients, the drag due to skin friction predominates. The drag curve for a conventional airfoil tends to be quite shallow in this region since there is very little variation of skin friction with angle of attack. When the airfoil is at high lift coefficients, form or pressure drag predominates and the drag coefficient varies rapidly with lift coefficient. The NACA 0006 is a thin symmetrical profile which has a maximum thickness of 6 percent located at 30 percent of the chord. This section shows a typical variation of cd and cr.\n\nThe NACA 4412 section is a 12 percent thick airfoil with 4 percent maximum camber at\n\n## NAVWEPS OO-EOT-RO BASIC AERODYNAMICS\n\n40 percent chord. When this section is compared with the NACA 0006 section the effect of camber can be appreciated. At low lift coefficients the thtn, symmetrical section has much lower drag. However, at lift coefficients above 03 the thicker, cambered section has the lower drag. Thus, proper camber and thickness can improve the lift-drag ratio of the section.\n\nThe NACA 63,412 is a cambered 12 percent thick airfoil of the ' ' l aminar flow' type. This airfoil is shaped to produce a design lift coe5cient of 0.4. Notice that the drag curve of this airfoil has distinct aberrations with very low drag coefficients near the lift coefficient of 0.4. This airfoil profile has its camber and thickness distributed to produce very low uniform velocity on the forward surface (minimum pressure point well aft) at this lift coefficient. The resulting pressure and velocity distribution enhance extensive laminar flow in the boundary layer and greatly reduce the skin friction drag. The benefit of the laminar flow is appreciated by comparing the minimum drag of this airfoil with an airfoil which has one-half the maximum thickness-the NACA ooo6.\n\nThe choice of an airfoil section will depend on the consideration oftmany different factors. While the cI, of the section is an important quality, a more appropriate factor for consideration is the maximum lift coefficient of the section when various high lift devices are applied. Trailing edge flaps and leading edge high lift devices are applied to increase the cr,, for low speed performance. Thus, an appropriate factor for comparison is the ratio of section drag coe5cient to section maximum lift coefficient with flaps-cd/crm,. When this quantity is corrected for compressibility, a preliminary selection of an airfoil section is possible. The airfoil having the lowest value of c&~, at the design flight condition (endurance, range, high speed, etc.) will create the least section drag for a given .design stall speed.", + "recall": 0.927797833935018, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS OO-EOT-RO BASIC AERODYNAMICS \n\n40 percent chord. When this section is com- pared with the NACA 0006 section the effect of camber can be appreciated. At low lift coefficients the thtn, symmetrical section has much lower drag. However, at lift coeffi- cients above 03 the thicker, cambered section has the lower drag. Thus, proper camber and thickness can improve the lift-drag ratio of the section. \n\nweight if the airplane is flown at the angle of attack for (L/D),. Of course, the gross weight would affect the glide airspeed neces- sary for this particular angle of attack but the glide ratio would be unaffected. \n\nAIRFOIL DRAG CHARACTERISTICS. The total drag of an airplane is composed of the drags of the individual components and the forces caused by interference between these components. The drag of an airplane con- figuration must include the various drags due to lift, form, friction, interference, leakage, etc. To appreciate the factors which affect the drag of an airplane configuration, it is most logical to consider the factors which affect the drag of airfoil sections. In order to allow an objective consideration of the effects of thickness, camber, etc., the properties of two-dimensional sections must be studied. Airfoil section properties are derived from the basic profile in two-dimensional. flow and are provided the lower case shorthand notation to distinguish them from wing or airplane properties, e.g., wing or airplane drag coe5- cient is C, while airfoil section drag coefficient is c,. The drag characteristics of three illustrative \n\nThe NACA 63,412 is a cambered 12 percent thick airfoil of the ‘“laminar flow” type. This airfoil is shaped to produce a design lift coe5cient of 0.4. Notice that the drag curve of this airfoil has distinct aberrations with very low drag coefficients near the lift coeffi- cient of 0.4. This airfoil profile has its camber and thickness distributed to produce very low uniform velocity on the forward surface (mini- mum pressure point well aft) at this lift coeffi- cient. The resulting pressure and velocity distribution enhance extensive laminar flow in the boundary layer and greatly reduce the skin friction drag. The benefit of the laminar flow is appreciated by comparing the minimum drag of this airfoil with an airfoil which has one-half the maximum thickness-the NACA ooo6. The choice of an airfoil section will depend \n\nis c,. The drag characteristics of three illustrative airfoil sections are shown in figure 1.14. The section drag coe&cient, c,, is plotted versus the section lift coefficient, cr. The drag on the airfoil section is composed of pressure drag and skin friction. When the airfoil is at low lift coe&cients, the drag due to skin friction predominates. The drag curve for a conven- tional airfoil tends to be quite shallow in this region since there is very little variation of skin friction with angle of attack. When the airfoil is at high lift coefficients, form or pressure drag predominates and the drag co- efficient varies rapidly with lift coefficient. The NACA 0006 is a thin symmetrical profile which has a maximum thickness of 6 percent located at 30 percent of the chord. This section shows a typical variation of cd and cr. \n\nooo6. The choice of an airfoil section will depend on the consideration oftmany different factors. While the cI, of the section is an important quality, a more appropriate factor for con- sideration is the maximum lift coefficient of the section when various high lift devices are applied. Trailing edge flaps and leading edge high lift devices are applied to increase the cr,, for low speed performance. Thus, an appropriate factor for comparison is the ratio of section drag coe5cient to section maximum lift coefficient with flaps-cd/crm,. When this quantity is corrected for compressibility, a preliminary selection of an airfoil section is possible. The airfoil having the lowest value of c&~, at the design flight condition (en- durance, range, high speed, etc.) will create the least section drag for a given .design stall speed. \n\nThe NACA 4412 section is a 12 percent thick airfoil with 4 percent maximum camber at" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.439933170526582, + "doc_id": "57085630c330828e6af89ac652f0896329a5f9ac0f83fcf75b772ff4dd8d6618", + "edit_distance": 0.5238095238095238, + "f1_score": 0.8, + "meteor": 0.8972972972972975, + "precision": 0.6666666666666666, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS 00-801-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE\n\n## PRO~' ELLER EFFICIENCY\n\nFigure 2.79. Propeller Operation\n\nFigure 2.79. Propeller Operation\n\n149", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-801-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE \n\nFigure 2.79. Propeller Operation \n\n149" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8222332545392147, + "doc_id": "16654b9ef401688977e0b439fff7d6b38e273be4ed98122da42b910566f84219", + "edit_distance": 0.6954314720812182, + "f1_score": 0.9897959183673469, + "meteor": 0.8944541766010348, + "precision": 0.9897959183673469, + "pred_md": "FAA Chart Users' Guide - IFR Enroute Symbology\n\n## AIRSPACE INFORMATION (Continued)\n\n## Special Use Airspace - Canada & Caribbean\n\nLow and High\n\nCharts\n\nCanada Only\n\nCYA - Advisory Area\n\nCYD - Danger Area\n\nCYR - Restricted Area\n\nCaribbean Only\n\nD - Danger Area\n\nIn the Caribbean, the first two letters represent the country code, i.e. (MY) Bahamas, (MU) Cuba\n\n## NAVIGATIONAL AND PROCEDURAL INFORMATION\n\nCruising Altitudes - Low Charts - U.S. Only\n\nIFR outside controlled airspace.\n\nIFR within controlled airspace as assigned by ATC.\n\nALL courses are magnetic.\n\nVFR above 3000' AGL unless otherwise authorized by ATC.\n\n## Cruising Altitudes - High Charts - U.S. Only\n\nIFR within controlled airspace as assigned by ATC\n\nAll courses are magnetic.\n\n## 18,000' MSL to FL280\n\nVFR or VFR On Top add 500'\n\nNo VFR flights within Class A Airspace above 3000' AGL unless otherwise authorized\n\n88\n\n## RVSM Levels FL290 to FL410\n\n## FL430 and above\n\nNo VFR or VFR On Top authorized above FL285 in RVSM airspace.", + "recall": 0.9897959183673469, + "true_md": "## AIRSPACE INFORMATION (Continued)\n\n## NAVIGATIONAL AND PROCEDURAL INFORMATION\n\nLow and High Charts\n\nCanada Only\n\nCYA - Advisory Area\n\nCYD - Danger Area\n\nCYR - Restricted Area\n\nCaribbean Only D - Danger Area\n\nIn the Caribbean, the first two letters represent the country code, i.e. (MY) Bahamas, (MU) Cuba\n\n18,000’ MSL to FL280\n\nRVSM Levels FL290 to FL410 \n\nFL430 and above\n\nNo VFR or VFR On Top authorized above FL285 in RVSM airspace.\n\nVFR or VFR On Top add 500’\n\nNo VFR flights within Class A Airspace above 3000’ AGL unless otherwise authorized\n\n88\n\nAll courses are magnetic.\n\nIFR within controlled airspace as assigned by ATC \n\nVFR above 3000’ AGL unless otherwise authorized by ATC.\n\nIFR outside controlled airspace.\n\nIFR within controlled airspace as assigned by ATC.\n\nALL courses are magnetic.\n\n## Cruising Altitudes - High Charts - U.S. Only\n\n## Cruising Altitudes - Low Charts - U.S. Only\n\n## Special Use Airspace - Canada & Caribbean\n\nFAA Chart Users’ Guide - IFR Enroute Symbology" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8522255976880739, + "doc_id": "7a861a9eb522483760f4472284e51fc586729d78a69fe4832c6954035bc3787d", + "edit_distance": 0.7069219440353461, + "f1_score": 0.875, + "meteor": 0.7450181799644989, + "precision": 0.8884615384615384, + "pred_md": "be expected to vary as the square of the rotative speed, N. However, since a variation in rotative speed will alter airflow, fuel flow, compressor and turbine efficiency, etc., the thrust variation will be much greater than just the second power of rotative speed. Instead of thrust being proportional to iV2, the typical fixed geometry engine develops thrust approximately proportional to N3.6. Of course, such a variation is particular to constant altitude and speed.\n\nFigure 2.10 illustrates the variation of percent maximum thrust with percent maximum RPM for a ' typical fixed geometry engine. Typical values from this graph are as follows:\n\nP<m#r a%. PM m R\n\nPmwit MX. lJrw,r\n\nI\n\nt\n\nNote that in the top end of power output, each 1 percent RPM change causes a 3.5-percent change in thrust output. This illustrates the power of variation of thrust with rotative speed which, iii this example, is N3.' . Also note that the top 20 percent of RPM controls more than half of the output thrust.\n\nWhile the fixed geometry engine develops thrust approximately proportional to Na.' , the engine with variable geometrywill demonstrate a much more powerful effect of rotative speed. When the jet engine is equipped with a variable nozzle, multispool compressor, variable stator blades, etc., the engine is more likely to develop thrust proportional to rotative speed from values of N4.6 to N6.0. For example, if a variable geometry engine develops thrust proportional to Ns.' , each one per cent RPM change causes a 5.0-percent thrust change at the top end of power output. Also, the top 13 percent of RPM would control the top 50 percent of thrust output.\n\nThe powerful variation of thrust with engine speed has certain ramifications which should\n\n## NAVWEPS 00-801-80\n\n## AlR,PlANE PERFORMANCE\n\nbe appreciated. If the turbojet powerplant operates at less than the ' trimmed' or adjusted speed for maximum thrust, the deficiency of thrust for takeoff may cause a considerable increase in takeoff distance. During approach, an excessively low RPM may cause very low thrust and produce a very steep glide path. In addition, the low RPM range involves the much greater engine acceleration time to produce thrust for a waveoff. Another complication exists when the thrust is proportional to some large power of rotative speed, e.g., Nb.O. The small changes in RPM produce such large variations in thrust that instruments other than the tachometer must be furnished for accurate indication of thrust output.\n\nThe ' specific fuel consumption, ci' is an important factor for evaluating the performance and efficiency of operation of a turbojet engine. The specific fuel consumption is the proportion between the fuel flow (in lbs. per hr.) and the thrust (in lbs.). For example, an engine which has a fuel flow of 14,000 lbs. per hr. and a thrust of 12,500 lbs. has a specific fuel consumption of:\n\n\n\n\n\nc,=1.12 lbs./hr./lb.\n\nThus, each unit pound of thrust requires 1.12 lbs. per hr. fuel flow. Obviously, high engine efficiency would be indicated by a low value of c,. Typical values for turbojet engines with relatively high pressure ratios range from 0.8 to 1.2 at design operating conditions in subsonic flight. High energy fuels and greater pressure ratios tend to produce the lower values of ct. Supersonic flight with the attendant inlet losses and high compressor inlet air temperatures tend to increase the specific fuel consumption to values of 1.2 to 2.0. Of course, the use of an afterburner is quite inefficient", + "recall": 0.8619402985074627, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-801-80 AlR,PlANE PERFORMANCE \n\nbe expected to vary as the square of the rota- tive speed, N. However, since a variation in rotative speed will alter airflow, fuel flow, compressor and turbine efficiency, etc., the thrust variation will be much greater than just the second power of rotative speed. In- stead of thrust being proportional to iV2, the typical fixed geometry engine develops thrust approximately proportional to N3.6. Of course, such a variation is particular to constant alti- tude and speed. Figure 2.10 illustrates the variation of per- \n\ntude and speed. Figure 2.10 illustrates the variation of per- cent maximum thrust with percent maximum RPM for a ‘ typical fixed geometry engine. Typical values from this graph are as follows: \n\nbe appreciated. If the turbojet powerplant operates at less than the “trimmed” or adjusted speed for maximum thrust, the deficiency of thrust for takeoff may cause a considerable increase in takeoff distance. During approach, an excessively low RPM may cause very low thrust and produce a very steep glide path. In addition, the low RPM range involves the much greater engine acceleration time to pro- duce thrust for a waveoff. Another compli- cation exists when the thrust is proportional to some large power of rotative speed, e.g., Nb.O. The small changes in RPM produce such large variations in thrust that instruments other than the tachometer must be furnished for accurate indication of thrust output. \n\nThe “specific fuel consumption, ci’ is an important factor for evaluating the perform- ance and efficiency of operation of a turbojet engine. The specific fuel consumption is the proportion between the fuel flow (in lbs. per hr.) and the thrust (in lbs.). For example, an engine which has a fuel flow of 14,000 lbs. per hr. and a thrust of 12,500 lbs. has a specific fuel consumption of: \n\nNote that in the top end of power output, each 1 percent RPM change causes a 3.5-percent change in thrust output. This illustrates the power of variation of thrust with rotative speed which, iii this example, is N3.“. Also note that the top 20 percent of RPM controls more than half of the output thrust. \n\nWhile the fixed geometry engine develops thrust approximately proportional to Na.“, the engine with variable geometrywill demonstrate a much more powerful effect of rotative speed. When the jet engine is equipped with a vari- able nozzle, multispool compressor, variable stator blades, etc., the engine is more likely to develop thrust proportional to rotative speed from values of N4.6 to N6.0. For ex- ample, if a variable geometry engine develops thrust proportional to Ns. ‘ , each one per cent RPM change causes a 5.0-percent thrust change at the top end of power output. Also, the top 13 percent of RPM would control the top 50 percent of thrust output. \n\nThus, each unit pound of thrust requires 1.12 lbs. per hr. fuel flow. Obviously, high engine efficiency would be indicated by a low value of c,. Typical values for turbojet engines with relatively high pressure ratios range from 0.8 to 1.2 at design operating conditions in sub- sonic flight. High energy fuels and greater pressure ratios tend to produce the lower values of ct. Supersonic flight with the attendant in- let losses and high compressor inlet air tem- peratures tend to increase the specific fuel con- sumption to values of 1.2 to 2.0. Of course, the use of an afterburner is quite inefficient \n\nThe powerful variation of thrust with engine speed has certain ramifications which should \n\n$$Fuel flow “= Thrust 14,000 lbs./hr. ‘ I= 12,500 lbs. c,=1.12 lbs./hr./lb. $$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "6bbae7d4fc3c109b7d9ef55ce842a67ed64bacfe633c0094261c6ca832388e5f", + "edit_distance": 0.7069219440353461, + "f1_score": 0.875, + "meteor": 0.7450181799644989, + "precision": 0.8884615384615384, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.8619402985074627, + "true_md": "" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.3420291337705514, + "doc_id": "d1f64864dda95b51d6012f4f62d1c67942a58efebdc6a54bdabd12974c8c80bd", + "edit_distance": 0.5625, + "f1_score": 0.7777777777777779, + "meteor": 0.8847842934642212, + "precision": 0.6363636363636364, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS DD-BOT-BD BASK AERODYNAMICS\n\n## (DATA FROM NACA REPORT ~0.824)\n\nFigure 1.14. Drag Characteristics of Typical Airfoil Sections\n\nFigure 1.14. Drag Characteristics of Typical Airfoil Sections\n\n34", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS DD-BOT-BD BASK AERODYNAMICS \n\nFigure 1.14. Drag Characteristics of Typical Airfoil Sections \n\n34" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.47492478328030047, + "doc_id": "08d4efcfbf38bbd9716700b0cd8ce3249f8492d1e23e13d6a6ad2930030dd731", + "edit_distance": 0.5151515151515151, + "f1_score": 0.8648648648648649, + "meteor": 0.903072033898305, + "precision": 0.7619047619047619, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS 00-801-80 BASIC AERODYNAMICS\n\n## TYPICAL POSITION ERROR CORRECTION\n\nFigure 1.6. Airspeed Corrections (sheet 1 of 2)\n\nFigure 1.6. Airspeed Corrections (sheet 1 of 2)\n\n12", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-801-80 \n\nBASIC AERODYNAMICS \n\nFigure 1.6. Airspeed Corrections (sheet 1 of 2) \n\n12" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8874495993458942, + "doc_id": "fa1e0890162fff615d7ed4096b71e9366fddca93542cc585c354d9ee36e6daca", + "edit_distance": 0.7311385459533608, + "f1_score": 0.9140461215932916, + "meteor": 0.7316082153255187, + "precision": 0.956140350877193, + "pred_md": "stability. As shown in figure 4.17, a downspring consists of a long preloaded spring attached to the control system which tends to rotate the elevators down. The effect of the downspring is to contribute an increment of pull force independent of control deflection or airspeed. When rhe downspring is added to the control system of an airplane and the airplane is retrimmed for the original speed, the airspeed stick force gradient is increased and there is a stronger feel for airspeed. The downspring would provide an ' ersatz' improvement to an airplane deficient in airspeed stick force stability, Since the force increment from the downspring is unaffected by stick position or normal acceleration, the maneuvering stick force stability would be unchanged.\n\nThe bobweight is an effective device for improving stick force stability. As shown in figure 4.17, the bobweight consists of an eccentric mass attached to the control system which-in unaccelerated flight--contributes an increment of pull force identical to the downspring. In fact, a bobweight added to the control system of an airplane produces an effect identical to the downspring. The bobweight will increase the airspeed stick force gradient and increase the feel for airspeed.\n\nA bobweighr will have an effect on the maneuvering stick force gradient since the bobweight mass is subjected to the same acceleration as the airplane. Thus, the bobweight will provide an increment of stick force in direct proportion to the maneuvering acceleration of the airplane. Because of the linear contribution of the bobweight, the bobweight can be applted to Increase the maneuvering stick force stability if the basic airplane has too low a value or develops a decreasing gradient at high lift coefficients.\n\nThe example of the bobweight is useful to point out the effect of the control system distributed masses. All carrier aircraft must have the control system mass balanced to prevent undesirable control forces from the longitudinal accelerations during catapult launching.\n\n## NAVWEPS 00-EOT-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL\n\nVarious control surface tab devices can be utilized to modify control forces. Since the deflection of a tab is so powerful in creating hinge moments on a control surface, the possible application of tab devices is almost without limit, The basic trim tab arrangement is shown in figure 4.18 where a variable linkage connects the tab and the control surface. Extension or contraction of this linkage will deflect the tab relative to the control surface and create a certain change in hinge mon~ent coefficient. The use of the trim tab will allow the pilot to reduce the hinge moment to zero and trim the control forces to zero for a given flight condition. Of course, the trim tab should have adequate effectiveness so that control forces can be trimmed out throughout the flight speed range.\n\nThe lagging tab arrangement shown in figure 4.18 employs a linkage between the fixed surface and the tab surface. The geometry is such that upward deflection of the control surface displaces the tab down relative to the control surface. Such relative displacement of the tab will aid in deflection of the control surface and thus reduce the hinge moments due to deflection. An obvious advantage of this device is the reduction of deflection hinge moments without a change in aerodynamic balance.\n\nThe leading tab arrangement shown in figure 4.18 also employs a linkage between the fixed surface and the tab surface. However, the geometry of the linkage is such that upward deflection of the control surface displaces the tab up relative to the control surface. This relationship serves to increase the control surface hinge moments due to deflection of the surface.\n\nThe servo tad shown in figure 4.18 utilizes a horn which has no direct connection to the control surface and is free to pivot about the hinge axis. However, a linkage connects this free horn to the tab surface. Thus, the control system simply deflects the tab and the resulting hinge moments deflect the control surface.", + "recall": 0.8755020080321285, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-EOT-80 STABILITY AND CONTROL \n\nVarious control surface tab devices can be utilized to modify control forces. Since the de- flection of a tab is so powerful in creating hinge moments on a control surface, the possible application of tab devices is almost without limit, The basic trim tab arrangement is shown in figure 4.18 where a variable linkage connects the tab and the control surface. Ex- tension or contraction of this linkage will de- flect the tab relative to the control surface and create a certain change in hinge mon~ent coef- ficient. The use of the trim tab will allow the pilot to reduce the hinge moment to zero and trim the control forces to zero for a given flight condition. Of course, the trim tab should have adequate effectiveness so that control forces can be trimmed out throughout the flight speed range. \n\nstability. As shown in figure 4.17, a down- spring consists of a long preloaded spring at- tached to the control system which tends to rotate the elevators down. The effect of the downspring is to contribute an increment of pull force independent of control deflection or airspeed. When rhe downspring is added to the control system of an airplane and the air- plane is retrimmed for the original speed, the airspeed stick force gradient is increased and there is a stronger feel for airspeed. The down- spring would provide an “ersatz” improve- ment to an airplane deficient in airspeed stick force stability, Since the force increment from the downspring is unaffected by stick position or normal acceleration, the maneuvering stick force stability would be unchanged. \n\nThe bobweight is an effective device for im- proving stick force stability. As shown in figure 4.17, the bobweight consists of an eccen- tric mass attached to the control system which-in unaccelerated flight--contributes an increment of pull force identical to the downspring. In fact, a bobweight added to the control system of an airplane produces an effect identical to the downspring. The bob- weight will increase the airspeed stick force gradient and increase the feel for airspeed. \n\nThe lagging tab arrangement shown in figure 4.18 employs a linkage between the fixed sur- face and the tab surface. The geometry is such that upward deflection of the control surface displaces the tab down relative to the control surface. Such relative displacement of the tab will aid in deflection of the control surface and thus reduce the hinge moments due to deflection. An obvious advantage of this device is the reduction of deflection hinge moments without a change in aerodynamic balance. The leading tab arrangement shown in figure \n\nA bobweighr will have an effect on the maneuvering stick force gradient since the bob- weight mass is subjected to the same accelera- tion as the airplane. Thus, the bobweight will provide an increment of stick force in direct proportion to the maneuvering acceleration of the airplane. Because of the linear contribu- tion of the bobweight, the bobweight can be applted to Increase the maneuvering stick force stability if the basic airplane has too low a value or develops a decreasing gradient at high lift coefficients. \n\nbalance. The leading tab arrangement shown in figure 4.18 also employs a linkage between the fixed surface and the tab surface. However, the geometry of the linkage is such that upward deflection of the control surface displaces the tab up relative to the control surface. This relationship serves to increase the control sur- face hinge moments due to deflection of the surface. \n\nThe servo tad shown in figure 4.18 utilizes a horn which has no direct connection to the control surface and is free to pivot about the hinge axis. However, a linkage connects this free horn to the tab surface. Thus, the control system simply deflects the tab and the resulting hinge moments deflect the control surface. \n\nThe example of the bobweight is useful to point out the effect of the control system dis- tributed masses. All carrier aircraft must have the control system mass balanced to prevent undesirable control forces from the longi- tudinal accelerations during catapult launching." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6910621773335011, + "doc_id": "4c680aa7dac761944a2d880dca5ab8532a056e4e34a09fa02c68ec9f88be503a", + "edit_distance": 0.35294117647058826, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.945426047306925, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "NAVWEPS 00-307-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE\n\nFigure 2.16. Reciprocating Engine Operation\n\nFigure 2.16. Reciprocating Engine Operation\n\n139", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "NAVWEPS 00-307-80 AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE \n\nFigure 2.16. Reciprocating Engine Operation \n\n139" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5704818836588781, + "doc_id": "c893b7f8bf900f019acc1a1a5b4da6b4ecc10127d587c735071a5cf689eca366", + "edit_distance": 0.6338028169014085, + "f1_score": 0.9743589743589742, + "meteor": 0.7284172661870503, + "precision": 0.9743589743589743, + "pred_md": "## Airspace Information (Continued)\n\n## Enroute Chart Examples\n\n## Reference Number\n\n81\n\nDescription\n\nHigh RNAV Route with MEA for DME/DME/IRU RNAV Aircraft\n\nMEA of 24,000'\n\n## Directional Jet Route with Time Restrictions\n\nJet Route 34 available between 1100 - 0300Z\n\nFAA Chart Users' Guide - IFR Enroute Symbology", + "recall": 0.9743589743589743, + "true_md": "81\n\nFAA Chart Users’ Guide - IFR Enroute Symbology\n\n## Enroute Chart Examples High Enroute Chart\n\n## Airspace Information (Continued)\n\n## Directional Jet Route with Time Restrictions\n\n## High RNAV Route with MEA for DME/DME/IRU RNAV Aircraft\n\n## Description\n\n## Reference Number\n\nMEA of 24,000’\n\nJet Route 34 available between 1100 - 0300Z\n\n## Enroute Chart Examples High Enroute Chart" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9072867855923781, + "doc_id": "1793ffa223a51e94886f8248a46e548fe1105dd7749c76b9c68e375afd3534b6", + "edit_distance": 0.40717299578059074, + "f1_score": 0.9309090909090909, + "meteor": 0.911733073228393, + "precision": 0.920863309352518, + "pred_md": "- (4) In this regulation-\n- 'authorised person' means-\n- (a) a constable,\n- (b) the Civil Aviation Authority,\n- (c) the Secretary of State, or\n- (d) a person authorised by the Civil Aviation Authority or the Secretary of State under the Air Navigation Order 2016( a );\n- 'operator' has the meaning given in article 4 of the Air Navigation Order 2016;\n- 'pilot in command' and 'private aircraft' have the meanings given in the Air Navigation Order 2016 (see Schedule 1 to that Order);\n\n'relevant transport service', in relation to an operator, means a transport service provided by or on behalf of that operator;\n\n- 'transport service' means-\n- (a) a relevant service,\n- (b) a shuttle service,\n- (c) a service (other than a relevant service) which-\n- (i) is carrying passengers travelling to England from outside the common travel area (whether for payment or valuable consideration or otherwise), and\n- (ii) is provided by means of an aircraft (other than a private aircraft), or\n- (d) a flight which-\n- (i) is carrying passengers travelling to England from outside the common travel area (whether for payment or valuable consideration or otherwise), and\n- (ii) is provided by means of a private aircraft.\n\n## PART 5\n\n## Offences, proceedings and information\n\n## Offences and penalties\n\n- 19. -(1) A person ('P') commits an offence where-\n- (a) without reasonable excuse P contravenes a requirement in regulation 3 (requirement to provide information);\n- (b) without reasonable excuse P contravenes a requirement in regulation 4 (requirement to possess notification of negative test result);\n- (c) without reasonable excuse P contravenes a requirement in regulation 6 (requirement to book and undertake tests);\n- (d) without reasonable excuse P contravenes a requirement in regulation 7 (requirement to undertake workforce tests);\n- (e) without reasonable excuse P contravenes a requirement in regulation 8 (requirement for offshore installation workers to take tests);\n- (f) P contravenes a requirement in regulation 9 (requirement to self-isolate);\n- (g) without reasonable excuse P contravenes a requirement in or imposed under regulation 11 (enforcement of requirement to self-isolate) apart from paragraph (2) of that regulation;\n\n( a ) S.I. 2016/765.\n\n23", + "recall": 0.9411764705882353, + "true_md": "(4) In this regulation— \n\n“authorised person” means— \n\n“operator” has the meaning given in article 4 of the Air Navigation Order 2016; \n\n“pilot in command” and “private aircraft” have the meanings given in the Air Navigation Order 2016 (see Schedule 1 to that Order); \n\n“relevant transport service”, in relation to an operator, means a transport service provided by or on behalf of that operator; \n\n“transport service” means— \n\n19. —(1) A person (“P”) commits an offence where— \n\n## Offences, proceedings and information\n\n## Offences and penalties\n\n## PART 5\n\n- (a) a constable, \n\n- (b) the Civil Aviation Authority, \n\n- (c) the Secretary of State, or \n\n- (d) a person authorised by the Civil Aviation Authority or the Secretary of State under the Air Navigation Order 2016( a ); \n\n- (a) a relevant service, \n\n- (b) a shuttle service, \n\n- (c) a service (other than a relevant service) which— \n\n- (i) is carrying passengers travelling to England from outside the common travel area (whether for payment or valuable consideration or otherwise), and \n\n- (ii) is provided by means of an aircraft (other than a private aircraft), or \n\n- (d) a flight which— \n\n- (i) is carrying passengers travelling to England from outside the common travel area (whether for payment or valuable consideration or otherwise), and \n\n- (ii) is provided by means of a private aircraft. \n\n- (a) without reasonable excuse P contravenes a requirement in regulation 3 (requirement to provide information); \n\n- (b) without reasonable excuse P contravenes a requirement in regulation 4 (requirement to possess notification of negative test result); \n\n- (c) without reasonable excuse P contravenes a requirement in regulation 6 (requirement to book and undertake tests); \n\n- (d) without reasonable excuse P contravenes a requirement in regulation 7 (requirement to undertake workforce tests); \n\n- (e) without reasonable excuse P contravenes a requirement in regulation 8 (requirement for offshore installation workers to take tests); \n\n- (f) P contravenes a requirement in regulation 9 (requirement to self-isolate); \n\n- (g) without reasonable excuse P contravenes a requirement in or imposed under regulation 11 (enforcement of requirement to self-isolate) apart from paragraph (2) of that regulation; \n\n( a ) S.I. 2016/765. \n\n23" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.890498478923586, + "doc_id": "2b65cb5e20f1c397b536d1eef6eb70a088786ff493558512339aa56670a02fd4", + "edit_distance": 0.14189189189189189, + "f1_score": 0.932862190812721, + "meteor": 0.9583167123942806, + "precision": 0.9103448275862069, + "pred_md": "## S T A T U T O R Y I N S T R U M E N T S\n\n## 2020 No. 468\n\n## DANGEROUS DRUGS\n\nThe Misuse of Drugs (Coronavirus) (Amendments Relating to the Supply of Controlled Drugs During a Pandemic etc.) Regulations 2020\n\nMade\n\n-\n\n-\n\n-\n\n-\n\n28th April 2020\n\nLaid before Parliament\n\n29th April 2020\n\nComing into force in accordance with regulation 1(2)\n\nThe Secretary of State, in exercise of the powers conferred by sections 7(1)(b) and (2)(b), 10(1) and (2)(g), 22(1)(a)(i) and 31(1)(a) of the Misuse of Drugs Act 1971( a ), makes the following Regulations.\n\nIn accordance with section 31(3) of that Act, the Secretary of State has consulted with the Advisory Council on the Misuse of Drugs.\n\n## Citation, commencement and extent\n\n- 1. -(1) These Regulations may be cited as the Misuse of Drugs (Coronavirus) (Amendments Relating to the Supply of Controlled Drugs During a Pandemic etc.) Regulations 2020.\n- (2) These Regulations come into force on the day after the day on which they are laid before Parliament.\n- (3) These Regulations extend to England and Wales and Scotland.\n\n## Amendment of the Misuse of Drugs Regulations 2001\n\n- 2. The Misuse of Drugs Regulations 2001( b ) are amended as follows.\n\n## Amendment of regulation 2\n\n- 3. In regulation 2( c ) (interpretation), in paragraph (1), after the definition of 'health prescription' insert-\n\n''health service' means-\n\n( a ) 1971 c. 38. Section 7 was amended by the Police Reform and Social Responsibility Act 2011 (c. 13) ('the 2011 Act'), Schedule 17, paragraph 7. Section 10 was amended by the 2011 Act, Schedule 17, paragraph 10. Section 22 was amended by the 2011 Act, Schedule 17, paragraph 14. See the definition of 'prescribed' in section 37(1).\n\n( b ) S.I. 2001/3998. The relevant amending instrument is S.I. 2015/891.\n\n( c ) There are amendments to regulation 2(1), but none is relevant.", + "recall": 0.9565217391304348, + "true_md": "S T A T U T O R Y I N S T R U M E N T S\n\n# 2020 No. 468\n\n# DANGEROUS DRUGS\n\nThe Misuse of Drugs (Coronavirus) (Amendments Relating to the Supply of Controlled Drugs During a Pandemic etc.) Regulations 2020 \n\nComing into force in accordance with regulation 1(2) \n\nThe Secretary of State, in exercise of the powers conferred by sections 7(1)(b) and (2)(b), 10(1) and (2)(g), 22(1)(a)(i) and 31(1)(a) of the Misuse of Drugs Act 1971( a ), makes the following Regulations.\n\nIn accordance with section 31(3) of that Act, the Secretary of State has consulted with the Advisory Council on the Misuse of Drugs. \n\n1. —(1) These Regulations may be cited as the Misuse of Drugs (Coronavirus) (Amendments Relating to the Supply of Controlled Drugs During a Pandemic etc.) Regulations 2020. \n\n(2) These Regulations come into force on the day after the day on which they are laid before Parliament. \n\n(3) These Regulations extend to England and Wales and Scotland. \n\n## Citation, commencement and extent\n\n## Amendment of the Misuse of Drugs Regulations 2001\n\n## Amendment of regulation 2\n\n2. The Misuse of Drugs Regulations 2001( b ) are amended as follows. \n\n3. In regulation 2( c ) (interpretation), in paragraph (1), after the definition of “health prescription” insert— \n\n““health service” means— \n\n( a ) 1971 c. 38. Section 7 was amended by the Police Reform and Social Responsibility Act 2011 (c. 13) (“the 2011 Act”), Schedule 17, paragraph 7. Section 10 was amended by the 2011 Act, Schedule 17, paragraph 10. Section 22 was amended by the 2011 Act, Schedule 17, paragraph 14. See the definition of “prescribed” in section 37(1). \n\n( b ) S.I. 2001/3998. The relevant amending instrument is S.I. 2015/891. \n\n( c ) There are amendments to regulation 2(1), but none is relevant." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.367322118016489, + "doc_id": "28ed7971fe595d0eb3de5f95f484639a3401e07d247aef82e2e195c0f8af2d22", + "edit_distance": 0.43260188087774293, + "f1_score": 0.9519650655021834, + "meteor": 0.808424982346195, + "precision": 0.9732142857142857, + "pred_md": "| Olympic, Paralympic and Commonwealth Games Qualification Events |\n|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|\n| Professional Darts Corporation - Players Championship |\n| Rugby Football Union international fixtures |\n| Rugby League Challenge Cup |\n| UEFA Champions League and Europa League fixtures |\n| Cage Warriors Trilogy Series |\n| England & Wales Cricket Board - T20 Blast |\n| England & Wales Cricket Board - The Rachael Heyhoe Flint Trophy |\n| Matchroom - Championship League Snooker Tournament |\n| International Championship Boxing - Queensberry Promotions |\n| Motorsport UK - British Kart Championships |\n| International Boxing Championship Matches - MTK Promotions |\n| GB Taekwondo Fight Night II - International Taekwondo, Para Taekwondo and Karate Event |\n| Matchroom - World Pool Championship |\n| Hennessy Sports - International Boxing Championship matches |\n| Motorsport UK - British Rallycross Championship and Support Championship |\n| Professional Darts Corporation - Unibet Premier League |\n| GB Taekwondo Olympic and Paralympic Test Matches |\n| Matchroom - Championship League Pool |\n| Modern Pentathlon Test Event |\n| Professional Darts Corporation - Challenge Tour |\n| Professional Darts Corporation - Development Tour |\n| Professional Darts Corporation - UK Open |\n| Rugby League Betfred Championship |\n| Wheelchair Rugby Quad Nations |\n| British Dressage - Keysoe International |\n| British Eventing Elite Pathways Events |\n| British Showjumping's Winter Classic series qualifiers |\n| Burnham Market International |\n| Manchester Squash Open 2021 |\n| Matchroom - World Pool Masters |\n| Vitality Big Half |\n| British Athletics - 20km Race Walk Olympic Trial |\n\n51", + "recall": 0.9316239316239316, + "true_md": "Olympic, Paralympic and Commonwealth Games Qualification Events \n\nProfessional Darts Corporation – Players Championship \n\nRugby Football Union international fixtures \n\nRugby League Challenge Cup \n\nUEFA Champions League and Europa League fixtures \n\nCage Warriors Trilogy Series \n\nEngland & Wales Cricket Board – T20 Blast \n\nEngland & Wales Cricket Board – The Rachael Heyhoe Flint Trophy \n\nMatchroom – Championship League Snooker Tournament \n\nInternational Championship Boxing – Queensberry Promotions \n\nMotorsport UK - British Kart Championships \n\nInternational Boxing Championship Matches – MTK Promotions \n\nGB Taekwondo Fight Night II – International Taekwondo, Para Taekwondo and Karate Event \n\nMatchroom – World Pool Championship \n\nHennessy Sports – International Boxing Championship matches \n\nMotorsport UK – British Rallycross Championship and Support Championship \n\nProfessional Darts Corporation – Unibet Premier League \n\nGB Taekwondo Olympic and Paralympic Test Matches \n\nMatchroom – Championship League Pool \n\nModern Pentathlon Test Event \n\nProfessional Darts Corporation – Challenge Tour \n\nProfessional Darts Corporation – Development Tour \n\nProfessional Darts Corporation – UK Open \n\nRugby League Betfred Championship \n\nWheelchair Rugby Quad Nations \n\nBoxing Road to Tokyo \n\nBritish Dressage – Keysoe International \n\nBritish Eventing Elite Pathways Events \n\nBritish Showjumping’s Winter Classic series qualifiers \n\nBurnham Market International \n\nInternational Boxing - Dennis Hobson Promotions \n\nManchester Squash Open 2021 \n\nMatchroom – World Pool Masters \n\nVitality Big Half \n\nBritish Athletics – 20km Race Walk Olympic Trial \n\n51" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9496192858106698, + "doc_id": "a1f8e7a937524e24d308a62296436f7c6dbbfc4b1b12381913e6486ec6e6898a", + "edit_distance": 0.18691588785046728, + "f1_score": 0.9877551020408163, + "meteor": 0.9357462779215571, + "precision": 0.9918032786885246, + "pred_md": "Signed by authority of the Secretary of State for Transport\n\n12th May 2021\n\n## EXPLANATORY NOTE\n\n(This note is not part of the Regulations)\n\nThese Regulations impose restrictions on flying in the vicinity of Royal St George's Golf Course, Sandwich, Kent as part of the security arrangements for the 2021 Open Golf Championships. Kent Police considers that flying should be restricted in the vicinity of the Championships for security and public safety reasons. This has been agreed by the Civil Aviation Authority and the Department for Transport.\n\nThe times mentioned in regulation 3(1) are Co-ordinated Universal Time (UTC) which is one hour behind British Summer Time (BST).\n\nIn relation to the permission mentioned in regulation 3(2)(b), Kent Police may be contacted as notified.\n\nFull details of this Statutory Instrument will be promulgated by Aeronautical Information Circular (AIC) and Notice to Airmen (NOTAM).\n\nThe point of contact in the Civil Aviation Authority is Mr S J Maxted, Airspace Regulator, Safety and Airspace Regulation Group, on telephone number 03301 383216.\n\n2\n\nDavid J Best Grade 7 Department for Transport", + "recall": 0.983739837398374, + "true_md": "David J Best Grade 7 Department for Transport \n\nSigned by authority of the Secretary of State for Transport \n\n12th May 2021 \n\nThese Regulations impose restrictions on flying in the vicinity of Royal St George’s Golf Course, Sandwich, Kent as part of the security arrangements for the 2021 Open Golf Championships. Kent Police considers that flying should be restricted in the vicinity of the Championships for security and public safety reasons. This has been agreed by the Civil Aviation Authority and the Department for Transport. \n\nThe times mentioned in regulation 3(1) are Co-ordinated Universal Time (UTC) which is one hour behind British Summer Time (BST). \n\nIn relation to the permission mentioned in regulation 3(2)(b), Kent Police may be contacted as notified. \n\nFull details of this Statutory Instrument will be promulgated by Aeronautical Information Circular (AIC) and Notice to Airmen (NOTAM). \n\nThe point of contact in the Civil Aviation Authority is Mr S J Maxted, Airspace Regulator, Safety and Airspace Regulation Group, on telephone number 03301 383216. \n\n2\n\n## EXPLANATORY NOTE\n\n## (This note is not part of the Regulations)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.864285871171512, + "doc_id": "234dcdca7b42d65e8d2b9db614699a39a8c4ddede32e9b52f98551617553f365", + "edit_distance": 0.12658227848101267, + "f1_score": 0.9344262295081968, + "meteor": 0.9132857542927868, + "precision": 0.9344262295081968, + "pred_md": "A full impact assessment has not been produced for this instrument as no, or no significant, impact on the private, voluntary or public sector is foreseen.\n\n' Crown copyright 2020\n\nPrinted and published in the UK by The Stationery Office Limited under the authority and superintendence of Jeff James, Controller of Her Majesty's Stationery Office and Queen's Printer of Acts of Parliament.\n\n£4.90\n\nUK202002241000 02/2020 19585\n\nhttp://www.legislation.gov.uk/id/uksi/2020/169\n\n2", + "recall": 0.9344262295081968, + "true_md": "A full impact assessment has not been produced for this instrument as no, or no significant, impact on the private, voluntary or public sector is foreseen.\n\n© Crown copyright 2020 \n\nPrinted and published in the UK by The Stationery Office Limited under the authority and superintendence of Jeff James, Controller of Her Majesty’s Stationery Office and Queen’s Printer of Acts of Parliament. \n\nUK202002241000 02/2020 19585 \n\n£4.90 \n\nhttp://www.legislation.gov.uk/id/uksi/2020/169" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9095209798186967, + "doc_id": "7272f2319fdabbd80dd0251d85dec8f3369fbc19ec6ccfd44909f3e35368d8e8", + "edit_distance": 0.5387596899224806, + "f1_score": 0.9672727272727272, + "meteor": 0.8028855568816254, + "precision": 0.9708029197080292, + "pred_md": "- (c) individuals employed by, contracted by or party to an agreement to undertake removal of mucus or saliva with, Sodexo Limited, company number 00842846 or Sodexo Holdings Limited, company number 02987170.\n\n## Sunsetting of this Order\n\n- 3. This Order ceases to have effect at the end of 18 months beginning with the date this Order comes into force.\n\nAt 1.57 p.m. on 17th April 2020\n\nMatt Hancock Secretary of State, Department of Health and Social Care\n\n## EXPLANATORY NOTE\n\n(This note is not part of the Order)\n\nThis Order is made under the Safeguarding Vulnerable Groups Act 2006 (c. 47) ('the 2006 Act'). This Order provides for the activity of removal of saliva or mucus from the mouth or nose of an individual where that is done for the purpose of testing an individual for coronavirus, not to be treated as a regulated activity within the meaning of the 2006 Act. The provision made by Article 2(1) applies to specified individuals. This Order ceases to have effect at the end of 18 months from its coming into force.\n\n' Crown copyright 2020\n\nPrinted and published in the UK by The Stationery Office Limited under the authority and superintendence of Jeff James, Controller of Her Majesty's Stationery Office and Queen's Printer of Acts of Parliament.\n\n£4.90\n\nUK202004171002 04/2020 19585\n\nhttp://www.legislation.gov.uk/id/uksi/2020/433\n\n2", + "recall": 0.9637681159420289, + "true_md": "3. This Order ceases to have effect at the end of 18 months beginning with the date this Order comes into force. \n\nMatt Hancock Secretary of State, Department of Health and Social Care \n\nAt 1.57 p.m. on 17th April 2020 \n\nThis Order is made under the Safeguarding Vulnerable Groups Act 2006 (c. 47) (“the 2006 Act”). This Order provides for the activity of removal of saliva or mucus from the mouth or nose of an individual where that is done for the purpose of testing an individual for coronavirus, not to be treated as a regulated activity within the meaning of the 2006 Act. The provision made by Article 2(1) applies to specified individuals. This Order ceases to have effect at the end of 18 months from its coming into force. \n\n© Crown copyright 2020 \n\nPrinted and published in the UK by The Stationery Office Limited under the authority and superintendence of Jeff James, Controller of Her Majesty’s Stationery Office and Queen’s Printer of Acts of Parliament. \n\n## Sunsetting of this Order\n\n## EXPLANATORY NOTE\n\n## (This note is not part of the Order)\n\n- (c) individuals employed by, contracted by or party to an agreement to undertake removal of mucus or saliva with, Sodexo Limited, company number 00842846 or Sodexo Holdings Limited, company number 02987170. \n\n£4.90 \n\nUK202004171002 04/2020 19585 \n\nhttp://www.legislation.gov.uk/id/uksi/2020/433" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "b54dd16e15d24c9615ddf4979982bd0124874b50aeccb39e17306e277ac6bd26", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9985422740524781, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "£4.90\n\nUK202004281006 05/2020 19585\n\nhttp://www.legislation.gov.uk/id/uksi/2020/468", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "£4.90 \n\nUK202004281006 05/2020 19585 \n\nhttp://www.legislation.gov.uk/id/uksi/2020/468" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9638740494553069, + "doc_id": "de7c5b1668e68889650e0dfcc97d621072a264d8f75c455bdea006f4a9382d82", + "edit_distance": 0.22015503875968992, + "f1_score": 0.9765013054830288, + "meteor": 0.9710098231343904, + "precision": 0.9790575916230366, + "pred_md": "- (6) The following persons are not required to comply with this regulation-\n- (a) a child who is under the age of 11;\n- (b) a person described in paragraph 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 13, 14, 15 or 34 of Schedule 4 (exemptions);\n- (c) a person described in any sub-paragraph of paragraph 3(1) of Schedule 7 (testing before arrival in England).\n- (7) For the purposes of this regulation-\n- (a) a test is a qualifying test if it complies with paragraph 1 of Schedule 7;\n- (b) a notification of a negative result is valid if it includes the information specified in paragraph 2 of Schedule 7;\n- (c) a child is to be treated as possessing valid notification of a negative result from a qualifying test taken by that child even if that notification is possessed by a person who is travelling with, and has responsibility for, that child.\n\n## Requirements relating to tests\n\n- 5. -(1) Except as provided in paragraph (6) and subject to the provisions relating to length of stay in paragraph (1) of regulation 6 (requirement to book and undertake tests), regulation 6 applies to a person who arrives in England who-\n- (a) is a category 1 arrival, other than a person of the description in paragraph (4);\n- (b) is required to self-isolate under-\n- (i) regulation 9 (requirement to self-isolate), or\n- (ii) Schedule 11 (additional measures applicable to arrivals from category 3 countries and territories);\n- (c) is not required to self-isolate under regulation 9 only by virtue of one or more of the following paragraphs of Schedule 4 (exemptions)-\n- (i) paragraph 1(1)(i) (representatives of foreign countries or territories on official business),\n- (ii) paragraph 1(1)(j) (representatives of government of British overseas territory),\n- (iii) paragraph 4 (foreign officials or contractors with border security duties),\n- (iv) paragraph 5 (road passenger transport workers),\n- (v) paragraph 14 (civil aviation inspectors),\n- (vi) paragraph 16 (certain Crown Servants, persons certified as returning from essential state business etc.),\n- (vii) paragraph 17 (essential or emergency work outside the United Kingdom), or\n- (viii) paragraph 30 (postal operators);\n- (d) falls within the description in paragraph 44 (elite sportspersons and ancillary sportspersons) of Schedule 4; or\n- (e) may temporarily cease to self-isolate by virtue of paragraph (15)(f)(ii) or (15)(i) of regulation 9 and the following paragraphs of Schedule 4-\n- (i) paragraph 4 (foreign officials with border security duties),\n- (ii) paragraph 5 (road passenger transport workers),\n- (iii) paragraph 14 (civil aviation inspectors),\n- (iv) paragraph 21 (water and sewerage workers),\n- (v) paragraph 22 (flood and coastal defence workers),\n- (vi) paragraph 23 (electricity workers),\n- (vii) paragraph 24 (nuclear power workers),\n\n7", + "recall": 0.9739583333333334, + "true_md": "(6) The following persons are not required to comply with this regulation— \n\n(7) For the purposes of this regulation— \n\n5. —(1) Except as provided in paragraph (6) and subject to the provisions relating to length of stay in paragraph (1) of regulation 6 (requirement to book and undertake tests), regulation 6 applies to a person who arrives in England who— \n\n7\n\n- (a) a child who is under the age of 11; \n\n- (b) a person described in paragraph 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 13, 14, 15 or 34 of Schedule 4 (exemptions); \n\n- (c) a person described in any sub-paragraph of paragraph 3(1) of Schedule 7 (testing before arrival in England). \n\n- (a) a test is a qualifying test if it complies with paragraph 1 of Schedule 7; \n\n- (b) a notification of a negative result is valid if it includes the information specified in paragraph 2 of Schedule 7; \n\n- (c) a child is to be treated as possessing valid notification of a negative result from a qualifying test taken by that child even if that notification is possessed by a person who is travelling with, and has responsibility for, that child. \n\n- (a) is a category 1 arrival, other than a person of the description in paragraph (4); \n\n- (b) is required to self-isolate under— \n\n- (i) regulation 9 (requirement to self-isolate), or \n\n- (ii) Schedule 11 (additional measures applicable to arrivals from category 3 countries and territories); \n\n- (c) is not required to self-isolate under regulation 9 only by virtue of one or more of the following paragraphs of Schedule 4 (exemptions)— \n\n- (i) paragraph 1(1)(i) (representatives of foreign countries or territories on official business), \n\n- (ii) paragraph 1(1)(j) (representatives of government of British overseas territory), \n\n- (iii) paragraph 4 (foreign officials or contractors with border security duties), \n\n- (iv) paragraph 5 (road passenger transport workers), \n\n- (v) paragraph 14 (civil aviation inspectors), \n\n- (vi) paragraph 16 (certain Crown Servants, persons certified as returning from essential state business etc.), \n\n- (vii) paragraph 17 (essential or emergency work outside the United Kingdom), or \n\n- (viii) paragraph 30 (postal operators); \n\n- (d) falls within the description in paragraph 44 (elite sportspersons and ancillary sportspersons) of Schedule 4; or \n\n- (e) may temporarily cease to self-isolate by virtue of paragraph (15)(f)(ii) or (15)(i) of regulation 9 and the following paragraphs of Schedule 4— \n\n- (i) paragraph 4 (foreign officials with border security duties), \n\n- (ii) paragraph 5 (road passenger transport workers), \n\n- (iii) paragraph 14 (civil aviation inspectors), \n\n- (iv) paragraph 21 (water and sewerage workers), \n\n- (v) paragraph 22 (flood and coastal defence workers), \n\n- (vi) paragraph 23 (electricity workers), \n\n- (vii) paragraph 24 (nuclear power workers), \n\n## Requirements relating to tests" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8611374753321586, + "doc_id": "ed7a4a0de24c8e2b2813f06eb67a3ec63ed475c710a69fe7366c70cf412e6670", + "edit_distance": 0.14314115308151093, + "f1_score": 0.9536784741144415, + "meteor": 0.9096459683121625, + "precision": 0.9562841530054644, + "pred_md": "## S T A T U T O R Y I N S T R U M E N T S\n\n## 2020 No. 410\n\n## ROAD TRAFFIC\n\nThe M42 Motorway (Junction 8 to Junction 7) and M6 Toll Motorway (M6 Toll Junction T2 to M42 Junction 8) (Warwickshire) (Temporary Prohibition of Traffic) Order 2020\n\nMade\n\n-\n\n-\n\n-\n\n-\n\n27th March 2020\n\nComing into force\n\n-\n\n-\n\n3rd April 2020\n\nWHEREAS the Secretary of State for Transport, being the traffic authority for the M42 Motorway ('the M42') and the M6 Toll Motorway ('the M6 Toll'), is satisfied that traffic on a length of the M42 Motorway and a length of the M6 Toll Motorway, in the County of Warwickshire, should be prohibited because works are proposed to be executed thereon:\n\nNOW, THEREFORE, the Secretary of State for Transport, in exercise of the powers conferred by section 14(1)(a) of the Road Traffic Regulation Act 1984( a ), hereby makes the following Order:\n\n- 1. This Order may be cited as the M42 Motorway (Junction 8 to Junction 7) and M6 Toll Motorway (M6 Toll Junction T2 to M42 Junction 8) (Warwickshire) (Temporary Prohibition of Traffic) Order 2020 and shall come into force on Friday 3rd April 2020.\n\n## 2. In this Order-\n\n'the motorway' means -\n\n- a) the southbound carriageway of the M42 from a point 165 metres south of the centreline of the Watton Lane underbridge, to a point 615 metres north of the centreline of the B4114 Birmingham Road overbridge; and\n- b) the southbound carriageway of the M6 Toll from the exit slip road at Junction T2, to its merge with the southbound carriageway of the M42 at Junction 8;\n- 'the works period' means the period starting at 21.00 hours on Monday 6th April 2020 and ending when the said works have been completed;\n\nand a reference to an article followed by a number is a reference to the article in this Order which bears that number.\n\n- 3. Subject as mentioned in article 4, no person shall, during the works period, cause or permit any vehicle to enter or proceed on the motorway.\n- 4. The provisions of article 3 shall apply only during such times and to such extent as shall from time to time be indicated by traffic signs and shall not apply to any vehicle-\n\n( a ) 1984 c. 27, a new section 14 was substituted by the Road Traffic (Temporary Restrictions) Act 1991 (c. 26), section 1(1) and Schedule 1.", + "recall": 0.9510869565217391, + "true_md": "S T A T U T O R Y I N S T R U M E N T S\n\n# 2020 No. 410\n\n# ROAD TRAFFIC\n\nThe M42 Motorway (Junction 8 to Junction 7) and M6 Toll Motorway (M6 Toll Junction T2 to M42 Junction 8) (Warwickshire) (Temporary Prohibition of Traffic) Order 2020 \n\nWHEREAS the Secretary of State for Transport, being the traffic authority for the M42 Motorway (“the M42”) and the M6 Toll Motorway (“the M6 Toll”), is satisfied that traffic on a length of the M42 Motorway and a length of the M6 Toll Motorway, in the County of Warwickshire, should be prohibited because works are proposed to be executed thereon: \n\nNOW, THEREFORE, the Secretary of State for Transport, in exercise of the powers conferred by section 14(1)(a) of the Road Traffic Regulation Act 1984( $^{a}$), hereby makes the following Order: \n\n$^{1.}$ This Order may be cited as the M42 Motorway (Junction 8 to Junction 7) and M6 Toll Motorway (M6 Toll Junction T2 to M42 Junction 8) (Warwickshire) (Temporary Prohibition of Traffic) Order 2020 and shall come into force on Friday 3rd April 2020. \n\n“the motorway” means – \n\n- $^{2.}$ In this Order— \n\n- a) the southbound carriageway of the M42 from a point 165 metres south of the centreline of the Watton Lane underbridge, to a point 615 metres north of the centreline of the B4114 Birmingham Road overbridge; and \n\n- b) the southbound carriageway of the M6 Toll from the exit slip road at Junction T2, to its merge with the southbound carriageway of the M42 at Junction 8; \n\n“the works period” means the period starting at 21.00 hours on Monday 6th April 2020 and ending when the said works have been completed; \n\nand a reference to an article followed by a number is a reference to the article in this Order which bears that number. \n\n$^{3.}$ Subject as mentioned in article 4, no person shall, during the works period, cause or permit any vehicle to enter or proceed on the motorway. \n\n$^{4.}$ The provisions of article 3 shall apply only during such times and to such extent as shall from time to time be indicated by traffic signs and shall not apply to any vehicle– \n\n( $^{a}$) 1984 c. 27, a new section 14 was substituted by the Road Traffic (Temporary Restrictions) Act 1991 (c. 26), section 1(1) and Schedule 1." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9341340813833784, + "doc_id": "b981a4003ddab36b379ae2a63e50c7b5e5b69c6c58d3583c5ae1a41c8e64d05c", + "edit_distance": 0.07006369426751592, + "f1_score": 0.9683544303797469, + "meteor": 0.9634119268719588, + "precision": 0.9745222929936306, + "pred_md": "I approve\n\n29th April 2021\n\nKevin Foster Parliamentary Under Secretary of State Home Office\n\n## EXPLANATORY NOTE\n\n(This note is not part of the Regulations)\n\nThese Regulations provide for records of marriages to be kept in churches and chapels of the Church of England and the Church in Wales, other than chapels to which Part 5 of the Marriage Act 1949 applies (naval, military and air force chapels).\n\nRegulation 2 requires parochial church councils to provide books known as 'registers of marriage services' to churches and chapels in their parish in which banns of matrimony may be published, for the purposes of keeping the records required by regulation 3. Regulation 2 also imposes requirements relating to the durability and pre-printed content of these registers, and provides that they belong to the parochial church council.\n\nRegulation 3 requires specified information to be recorded in a register of marriage services when a marriage has been solemnized on or after 4th May 2021 according to the rites of the Church of England or Church in Wales in a church or chapel in which banns of matrimony may be published. The record must be made and signed by the member of the clergy by whom the marriage was solemnized.\n\nRegulation 4 imposes requirements relating to the keeping of registers of marriage services provided under regulation 2.\n\nA full impact assessment has not been produced for this instrument because no, or no significant, impact on the private, public or voluntary sector is foreseen.\n\n' Crown copyright 2021\n\nPrinted and published in the UK by The Stationery Office Limited under the authority and superintendence of Jeff James, Controller of Her Majesty's Stationery Office and Queen's Printer of Acts of Parliament.\n\n3", + "recall": 0.9622641509433962, + "true_md": "Kevin Foster Parliamentary Under Secretary of State Home Office \n\n29th April 2021 \n\nI approve \n\n## EXPLANATORY NOTE\n\n## (This note is not part of the Regulations)\n\nThese Regulations provide for records of marriages to be kept in churches and chapels of the Church of England and the Church in Wales, other than chapels to which Part 5 of the Marriage Act 1949 applies (naval, military and air force chapels). \n\nRegulation 2 requires parochial church councils to provide books known as “registers of marriage services” to churches and chapels in their parish in which banns of matrimony may be published, for the purposes of keeping the records required by regulation 3. Regulation 2 also imposes requirements relating to the durability and pre-printed content of these registers, and provides that they belong to the parochial church council. \n\nRegulation 3 requires specified information to be recorded in a register of marriage services when a marriage has been solemnized on or after 4th May 2021 according to the rites of the Church of England or Church in Wales in a church or chapel in which banns of matrimony may be published. The record must be made and signed by the member of the clergy by whom the marriage was solemnized. \n\nRegulation 4 imposes requirements relating to the keeping of registers of marriage services provided under regulation 2. \n\nA full impact assessment has not been produced for this instrument because no, or no significant, impact on the private, public or voluntary sector is foreseen. \n\n© Crown copyright 2021 \n\nPrinted and published in the UK by The Stationery Office Limited under the authority and superintendence of Jeff James, Controller of Her Majesty’s Stationery Office and Queen’s Printer of Acts of Parliament. \n\n3" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9250254626105797, + "doc_id": "8f0095c170c1b68cb08c3469fd3b3069d05ebb4ae0de60595c4402e5fa8d734a", + "edit_distance": 0.35104669887278583, + "f1_score": 0.9544235924932977, + "meteor": 0.9580263381995134, + "precision": 0.956989247311828, + "pred_md": "- (3) Where a further test undertaken in accordance with sub-paragraph (1)(a) generates a negative result, this paragraph applies to P from the time P is notified of that negative result as if the workforce test undertaken by P in accordance with regulation 7 had generated a negative result (and accordingly, from that time, P is no longer required to self-isolate).\n- (4) Paragraph 11(4) and (5) (notification of test results) of Schedule 8 applies in relation to a further test undertaken pursuant to sub-paragraph (1)(a) as it applies to a test provider in relation to a test provided under Schedule 8.\n- (5) Where a workforce test undertaken by P in accordance with regulation 7 generates an inconclusive result, P must as soon as reasonably practicable undertake a further workforce test and that further workforce test is to be treated as a replacement workforce test within the meaning of regulation 7(4).\n\n## Duties on employers\n\n- 4. -(1) An employer with more than 50 employees who is the employer of any person who is required to undertake workforce tests or has responsibility for any agency worker who is required to undertake workforce tests, must take reasonable steps to facilitate the taking of those tests by that person or agency worker in accordance with these Regulations.\n- (2) In the discharge of the duty under sub-paragraph (1), an employer must have regard to any guidance issued by the Secretary of State for the purposes of this paragraph.\n- (3) In sub-paragraph (1) an employer has responsibility for an agency worker if-\n- (a) the agency worker is supplied or to be supplied by a person (an 'agent') to the employer under a contract or other arrangements made between the agent and the employer; and\n- (b) the agency worker is not-\n- (i) a worker because of the absence of a worker's contract between the agency worker and the agent or the employer, or\n- (ii) a party to a contract under which the agency worker undertakes to do the work for another party to a contract whose status is, by virtue of the contract, that of a client or customer of any profession or business undertaking carried on by the agency worker.\n\n## SCHEDULE 10\n\n## Optional testing after arrival in England\n\n## Application of this Schedule\n\n- 1. A person who is required by regulation 9(2) to self-isolate ('P') may undertake an appropriate test in the circumstances described in paragraph 4 for the purposes of determining whether they may cease self-isolating (as provided for in regulation 9(16)).\n\n## Appropriate tests\n\n- 2. -(1) A test is an 'appropriate test' where-\n- (a) it is a test for the detection of coronavirus;\n- (b) the manufacturer of any device used for the purposes of the test states that the device has-\n- (i) a sensitivity greater than 95% (with 95% two-sided confidence interval entirely above 90%),\n- (ii) a specificity greater than 95% (with 95% two-sided confidence interval entirely above 90%),\n\n68\n\nRegulation 9(16)", + "recall": 0.9518716577540107, + "true_md": "(3) Where a further test undertaken in accordance with sub-paragraph (1)(a) generates a negative result, this paragraph applies to P from the time P is notified of that negative result as if the workforce test undertaken by P in accordance with regulation 7 had generated a negative result (and accordingly, from that time, P is no longer required to self-isolate). \n\n(4) Paragraph 11(4) and (5) (notification of test results) of Schedule 8 applies in relation to a further test undertaken pursuant to sub-paragraph (1)(a) as it applies to a test provider in relation to a test provided under Schedule 8. \n\n(5) Where a workforce test undertaken by P in accordance with regulation 7 generates an inconclusive result, P must as soon as reasonably practicable undertake a further workforce test and that further workforce test is to be treated as a replacement workforce test within the meaning of regulation 7(4). \n\n4. —(1) An employer with more than 50 employees who is the employer of any person who is required to undertake workforce tests or has responsibility for any agency worker who is required to undertake workforce tests, must take reasonable steps to facilitate the taking of those tests by that person or agency worker in accordance with these Regulations. \n\n(2) In the discharge of the duty under sub-paragraph (1), an employer must have regard to any guidance issued by the Secretary of State for the purposes of this paragraph. \n\n(3) In sub-paragraph (1) an employer has responsibility for an agency worker if— \n\nRegulation 9(16) \n\n1. A person who is required by regulation 9(2) to self-isolate (“P”) may undertake an appropriate test in the circumstances described in paragraph 4 for the purposes of determining whether they may cease self-isolating (as provided for in regulation 9(16)). \n\n2. —(1) A test is an “appropriate test” where— \n\n## SCHEDULE 10\n\n## Optional testing after arrival in England\n\n## Application of this Schedule\n\n## Appropriate tests\n\n## Duties on employers\n\n- (a) the agency worker is supplied or to be supplied by a person (an “agent”) to the employer under a contract or other arrangements made between the agent and the employer; and \n\n- (b) the agency worker is not— \n\n- (i) a worker because of the absence of a worker’s contract between the agency worker and the agent or the employer, or \n\n- (ii) a party to a contract under which the agency worker undertakes to do the work for another party to a contract whose status is, by virtue of the contract, that of a client or customer of any profession or business undertaking carried on by the agency worker. \n\n- (a) it is a test for the detection of coronavirus; \n\n- (b) the manufacturer of any device used for the purposes of the test states that the device has— \n\n- (i) a sensitivity greater than 95% (with 95% two-sided confidence interval entirely above 90%), \n\n- (ii) a specificity greater than 95% (with 95% two-sided confidence interval entirely above 90%), \n\n68" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8355785019245769, + "doc_id": "4a0258ed64207da437b542557c2c40de1b7954549da771a58f7160b8673146e6", + "edit_distance": 0.11627906976744186, + "f1_score": 0.9230769230769229, + "meteor": 0.8876320319983431, + "precision": 0.9375, + "pred_md": "' Crown copyright 2020\n\nPrinted and published in the UK by The Stationery Office Limited under the authority and superintendence of Jeff James, Controller of Her Majesty's Stationery Office and Queen's Printer of Acts of Parliament.\n\n5", + "recall": 0.9090909090909091, + "true_md": "© Crown copyright 2020 \n\nPrinted and published in the UK by The Stationery Office Limited under the authority and superintendence of Jeff James, Controller of Her Majesty’s Stationery Office and Queen’s Printer of Acts of Parliament. \n\n5" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9065771644910728, + "doc_id": "ef65fbc52ea1036c9ff5b80a5b2638d97bad2cb0cbd52cab56f1c668029cd735", + "edit_distance": 0.3775811209439528, + "f1_score": 0.9519650655021836, + "meteor": 0.8366619927430035, + "precision": 0.9396551724137931, + "pred_md": "- (c) 'Air Operations Regulation' has the meaning given in paragraph 1 of Schedule 1 to the Air Navigation Order 2016.\n- 10. Any of the following who have travelled to the United Kingdom in the course of their work-\n- (a) drivers and crew on shuttle services and on services for the carriage of passengers or goods by way of the tunnel system;\n- (b) other workers carrying out essential roles for the safe or efficient operation of the tunnel system, shuttle services or services for the carriage of passengers or goods by way of the tunnel system, or relating to the security of the tunnel system or any such services.\n- 11. -(1) The condition mentioned in regulation 3(10)(c) is that the person has on their journey to England travelled only-\n- (a) on a conveyance which does not carry passengers;\n- (b) in an area of a conveyance which is not accessible to passengers; or\n- (c) in an area of a conveyance which is accessible to passengers in vehicles, where passengers remain within their vehicles while the person is present in that area of the conveyance.\n- (2) For the purposes of this paragraph-\n- (a) 'not accessible to passengers' means separated by a continuous physical barrier which passengers are not permitted to cross;\n- (b) 'passenger' does not include a person of the description in paragraph 10(1)(b).\n- 12. -(1) A transit passenger.\n- (2) For the purposes of sub-paragraph (1), 'transit passenger' means a person who on arrival in the United Kingdom-\n- (a) passes through to another country or territory outside the common travel area without entering the United Kingdom; or\n- (b) enters the United Kingdom for the sole purpose of continuing a journey to a country or territory outside the common travel area and-\n- (i) remains within their port of entry until their departure from England, or\n- (ii) travels directly from their port of entry to another port of departure in England.\n\n## 13. -(1) A road haulage worker.\n\n- (2) For the purposes of this paragraph-\n- (a) 'driver' includes a person who is travelling in a vehicle as a relief driver;\n- (b) 'goods vehicle' has the meaning given in section 192 of the Road Traffic Act 1988( a );\n- (c) 'road haulage worker' means -\n- (i) the driver of a goods vehicle that is being used in connection with the carriage of goods, other than goods for non-commercial personal use by the driver, or\n- (ii) a person who is employed by the holder of a Community licence issued under Article 4 of Regulation (EC) No 1072/2009 of the European Parliament and of the Council( b ), and who is acting in the course of their employment.\n- 14. Civil aviation inspectors, as defined in Annex 9 to the Convention on International Civil Aviation signed at Chicago on 7th December 1944( c ), where they have travelled to the United Kingdom when engaged on inspection duties.\n\n( a ) 1988 c. 52. There are amendments to section 192 but none is relevant.\n\n( b ) OJ No. L 300, 14.11.2009, p. 72.\n\n( c ) The latest edition of Annex 9, which is published by the International Civil Aviation Organization, is the 15th edition, which applied from 23rd February 2018 (ISBN 978-92-9258-301-9).\n\n38", + "recall": 0.9646017699115044, + "true_md": "- (c) “Air Operations Regulation” has the meaning given in paragraph 1 of Schedule 1 to the Air Navigation Order 2016. \n\n- (a) drivers and crew on shuttle services and on services for the carriage of passengers or goods by way of the tunnel system; \n\n- (b) other workers carrying out essential roles for the safe or efficient operation of the tunnel system, shuttle services or services for the carriage of passengers or goods by way of the tunnel system, or relating to the security of the tunnel system or any such services. \n\n- (a) on a conveyance which does not carry passengers; \n\n- (b) in an area of a conveyance which is not accessible to passengers; or \n\n- (c) in an area of a conveyance which is accessible to passengers in vehicles, where passengers remain within their vehicles while the person is present in that area of the conveyance. \n\n- (a) “not accessible to passengers” means separated by a continuous physical barrier which passengers are not permitted to cross; \n\n- (b) “passenger” does not include a person of the description in paragraph 10(1)(b). \n\n- (a) passes through to another country or territory outside the common travel area without entering the United Kingdom; or \n\n- (b) enters the United Kingdom for the sole purpose of continuing a journey to a country or territory outside the common travel area and— \n\n- (i) remains within their port of entry until their departure from England, or \n\n- (ii) travels directly from their port of entry to another port of departure in England. \n\n- (a) “driver” includes a person who is travelling in a vehicle as a relief driver; \n\n- (b) “goods vehicle” has the meaning given in section 192 of the Road Traffic Act 1988( a ); \n\n- (c) “road haulage worker” means — \n\n- (i) the driver of a goods vehicle that is being used in connection with the carriage of goods, other than goods for non-commercial personal use by the driver, or \n\n- (ii) a person who is employed by the holder of a Community licence issued under Article 4 of Regulation (EC) No 1072/2009 of the European Parliament and of the Council( b ), and who is acting in the course of their employment. \n\n14. Civil aviation inspectors, as defined in Annex 9 to the Convention on International Civil Aviation signed at Chicago on 7th December 1944( c ), where they have travelled to the United Kingdom when engaged on inspection duties. \n\n13. —(1) A road haulage worker. \n\n(2) For the purposes of this paragraph— \n\n(2) For the purposes of sub-paragraph (1), “transit passenger” means a person who on arrival in the United Kingdom— \n\n12. —(1) A transit passenger. \n\n(2) For the purposes of this paragraph— \n\n11. —(1) The condition mentioned in regulation 3(10)(c) is that the person has on their journey to England travelled only— \n\n10. Any of the following who have travelled to the United Kingdom in the course of their work— \n\n( a ) 1988 c. 52. There are amendments to section 192 but none is relevant. \n\n( b ) OJ No. L 300, 14.11.2009, p. 72. \n\n( c ) The latest edition of Annex 9, which is published by the International Civil Aviation Organization, is the 15th edition, which applied from 23rd February 2018 (ISBN 978-92-9258-301-9). \n\n38" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9131309640577506, + "doc_id": "1b8d6d62fd091a3eed1da135f1a7c69a817572f61b194dce4d0298da67363a02", + "edit_distance": 0.5971731448763251, + "f1_score": 0.9517684887459805, + "meteor": 0.8845117464530925, + "precision": 0.9548387096774194, + "pred_md": "## Charge for day 2 tests and day 8 tests\n\n- 12. -(1) The Secretary of State or a person designated by the Secretary of State may impose a charge in respect of mandatory tests provided by a public provider.\n- (2) The Secretary of State-\n- (a) must publish details of the charges in such manner as the Secretary of State considers appropriate; and\n- (b) may recover any sum owed by a person pursuant to such a charge as a debt.\n\n## SCHEDULE 9\n\n## Workforce tests\n\nRegulation 7(5)\n\n## Interpretation of this Schedule\n\n1. In this Schedule-\n\n- (a) 'P' means a person required to undertake workforce tests under regulation 7 (requirement to undertake workforce tests);\n- (b) 'workforce test' means any of the categories of workforce test described in regulation 7(6).\n\n## Requirement after failure to undertake test\n\n- 2. -(1) Sub-paragraph (2) applies where P fails to undertake a workforce test that P is required by regulation 7 to undertake.\n- (2) Where this sub-paragraph applies, P must self-isolate in accordance with regulation 2 of the Self-Isolation Regulations until the earlier of-\n- (a) the end of the 14th day after the day on which P arrived in England; or\n- (b) the time P obtains a negative result from a workforce test.\n- (3) P must comply with any applicable obligations in regulation 7(2) during any period that P is required to self-isolate in accordance with sub-paragraph (2).\n- (4) Where P is required to self-isolate in accordance with sub-paragraph (2), regulation 2(2) of the Self-Isolation Regulations (meaning of self-isolate) applies as if it also permitted P to leave the place of self-isolation where necessary to undertake a workplace test.\n\n## Consequences of test results\n\n- 3. -(1) Where a workforce test undertaken by P in accordance with regulation 7 generates a positive result-\n- (a) P must as soon as reasonably practicable undertake a further test which complies with the requirements for a day 2 test specified in paragraph 6 of Schedule 8 (mandatory testing after arrival in England), in the circumstances specified in paragraph 10 of that Schedule (other than the circumstances in paragraph 10(2) about when a test must be undertaken);\n- (b) P must self-isolate in accordance with regulation 2 of the Self-Isolation Regulations until the end of the 10th day after the day P undertook the test.\n- (2) Where sub-paragraph (1) applies-\n- (a) if the test taken by P was a workforce test undertaken for day 2, P is not required to undertake a workforce test for day 5 or day 8;\n- (b) if the test undertaken by P was a workforce test undertaken for day 5, P is not required to undertake a workforce test for day 8.\n\n67", + "recall": 0.9487179487179487, + "true_md": "## Charge for day 2 tests and day 8 tests\n\n## SCHEDULE 9\n\n## Workforce tests\n\n## Interpretation of this Schedule\n\nRegulation 7(5) \n\n## Requirement after failure to undertake test\n\n## Consequences of test results\n\n12. —(1) The Secretary of State or a person designated by the Secretary of State may impose a charge in respect of mandatory tests provided by a public provider. \n\n(2) The Secretary of State— \n\n1. In this Schedule— \n\n2. —(1) Sub-paragraph (2) applies where P fails to undertake a workforce test that P is required by regulation 7 to undertake. \n\n(2) Where this sub-paragraph applies, P must self-isolate in accordance with regulation 2 of the Self-Isolation Regulations until the earlier of— \n\n(3) P must comply with any applicable obligations in regulation 7(2) during any period that P is required to self-isolate in accordance with sub-paragraph (2). \n\n(4) Where P is required to self-isolate in accordance with sub-paragraph (2), regulation 2(2) of the Self-Isolation Regulations (meaning of self-isolate) applies as if it also permitted P to leave the place of self-isolation where necessary to undertake a workplace test. \n\n3. —(1) Where a workforce test undertaken by P in accordance with regulation 7 generates a positive result— \n\n(2) Where sub-paragraph (1) applies— \n\n67\n\n- (a) must publish details of the charges in such manner as the Secretary of State considers appropriate; and \n\n- (b) may recover any sum owed by a person pursuant to such a charge as a debt. \n\n- (a) “P” means a person required to undertake workforce tests under regulation 7 (requirement to undertake workforce tests); \n\n- (b) “workforce test” means any of the categories of workforce test described in regulation 7(6). \n\n- (a) the end of the 14th day after the day on which P arrived in England; or \n\n- (b) the time P obtains a negative result from a workforce test. \n\n- (a) P must as soon as reasonably practicable undertake a further test which complies with the requirements for a day 2 test specified in paragraph 6 of Schedule 8 (mandatory testing after arrival in England), in the circumstances specified in paragraph 10 of that Schedule (other than the circumstances in paragraph 10(2) about when a test must be undertaken); \n\n- (b) P must self-isolate in accordance with regulation 2 of the Self-Isolation Regulations until the end of the 10th day after the day P undertook the test. \n\n- (a) if the test taken by P was a workforce test undertaken for day 2, P is not required to undertake a workforce test for day 5 or day 8; \n\n- (b) if the test undertaken by P was a workforce test undertaken for day 5, P is not required to undertake a workforce test for day 8." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "6fadeecb68267f8beb0ba002142954d95ad3fc0d693372a414fe910050e51567", + "edit_distance": 0.5971731448763251, + "f1_score": 0.9517684887459805, + "meteor": 0.8845117464530925, + "precision": 0.9548387096774194, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.9487179487179487, + "true_md": "" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "7e7484f2b288ecf69645e4f4139e5d21b4bb6feaee9d70789abe5a1626a4686b", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9985422740524781, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "£4.90\n\nUK202004201005 04/2020 19585\n\nhttp://www.legislation.gov.uk/id/uksi/2020/438", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "£4.90 \n\nUK202004201005 04/2020 19585 \n\nhttp://www.legislation.gov.uk/id/uksi/2020/438" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8840190823885951, + "doc_id": "477a76933cd1bf277e0b316f6427269721a7aecc22296f81353468f3b0e7b103", + "edit_distance": 0.4788732394366197, + "f1_score": 0.9540636042402826, + "meteor": 0.9344531860872489, + "precision": 0.9310344827586207, + "pred_md": "S T A T U T O R Y I N S T R U M E N T S\n\n## 2020 No. 412\n\n## TOWN AND COUNTRY PLANNING, ENGLAND\n\nThe Town and Country Planning (General Permitted Development) (Coronavirus) (England) (Amendment) Order 2020\n\nMade\n\n- - - -\n\n7th April 2020\n\nLaid before Parliament\n\n8th April 2020\n\nComing into force\n\n- -\n\nat 10.00 a.m. on 9th April 2020\n\nThe Secretary of State, in exercise of the powers conferred by sections 59, 60(1) and 61(1) of the Town and Country Planning Act 1990( a ), makes the following Order.\n\n## Citation and commencement\n\n- 1. This Order may be cited as the Town and Country Planning (General Permitted Development) (Coronavirus) (England) (Amendment) Order 2020 and comes into force at 10.00 a.m. on 9th April 2020.\n\n## Amendments to the Town and Country Planning (General Permitted Development) (England) Order 2015\n\n- 2. The Town and Country Planning (General Permitted Development) (England) Order 2015( b ) is amended in accordance with article 3.\n\n3. In Schedule 2, after Part 12 insert-\n\n## 'PART 12A\n\nDevelopment by Local Authorities and Health Service Bodies\n\n## Class A\n\nEmergency development by a local authority or health service body\n\n( a ) 1990 c. 8. Amendments have been made to section 59 which are not relevant to this Order. Section 60 was amended by section 4(1) of the Growth and Infrastructure Act 2013 (c. 27) and section 152 of the Housing and Planning Act 2016 (c. 22).\n\n( b ) S.I. 2015/596, which has been amended by S.I. 2016/332, S.I. 2016/1040, S.I. 2017/391, S.I. 2017/619, S.I. 2018/119, S.I. 2018/343, S.I. 2019/907 and S.I. 2020/330.", + "recall": 0.9782608695652174, + "true_md": "S T A T U T O R Y I N S T R U M E N T S\n\n# 2020 No. 412\n\n# TOWN AND COUNTRY PLANNING, ENGLAND\n\nThe Town and Country Planning (General Permitted Development) (Coronavirus) (England) (Amendment) Order 2020 \n\nThe Secretary of State, in exercise of the powers conferred by sections 59, 60(1) and 61(1) of the Town and Country Planning Act 1990( a ), makes the following Order. \n\n1. This Order may be cited as the Town and Country Planning (General Permitted Development) (Coronavirus) (England) (Amendment) Order 2020 and comes into force at 10.00 a.m. on 9th April 2020. \n\n3. In Schedule 2, after Part 12 insert— \n\nEmergency development by a local authority or health service body \n\n( a ) 1990 c. 8. Amendments have been made to section 59 which are not relevant to this Order. Section 60 was amended by section 4(1) of the Growth and Infrastructure Act 2013 (c. 27) and section 152 of the Housing and Planning Act 2016 (c. 22). \n\n( b ) S.I. 2015/596, which has been amended by S.I. 2016/332, S.I. 2016/1040, S.I. 2017/391, S.I. 2017/619, S.I. 2018/119, S.I. 2018/343, S.I. 2019/907 and S.I. 2020/330. \n\n2. The Town and Country Planning (General Permitted Development) (England) Order 2015( b ) is amended in accordance with article 3. \n\n## “PART 12A\n\n## Development by Local Authorities and Health Service Bodies\n\n## Class A\n\n## Amendments to the Town and Country Planning (General Permitted Development) (England) Order 2015\n\n## Citation and commencement" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9611693086549215, + "doc_id": "5d78d321624c500710875ec0f6604df33f49aa564e4f92775d0f37f6d9d6753c", + "edit_distance": 0.18607954545454544, + "f1_score": 0.9583333333333334, + "meteor": 0.8496937165745515, + "precision": 0.9672897196261683, + "pred_md": "- (d) where P leaves, or is outside of, the place where they are self-isolating in accordance with paragraph (11)(j), from any person (other than a person who is required by paragraph (2) to self-isolate) whose assistance P reasonably requires in order to undertake the test, by reason of -\n- (i) P being a child, or\n- (ii) any disability of P's.\n- (10) Paragraph (2) does not require P to remain in isolation from a person ('V') when V is at the place where P is self-isolating-\n- (a) to provide emergency assistance;\n- (b) to provide care or assistance, including relevant personal care within the meaning of paragraph 1(1B) or 7(3B) of Schedule 4 to the Safeguarding Vulnerable Groups Act 2006( a ), to P or to any other person who is living in the place where P is self-isolating;\n- (c) to provide medical assistance, including to provide any of the services mentioned in paragraph (11)(b), to P or to any other person who is living in the place where P is selfisolating, where this is required urgently or on the advice of a registered medical practitioner;\n- (d) to provide veterinary services, where this is required urgently or on the advice of a veterinary surgeon;\n- (e) to provide critical public services, including those mentioned in paragraph (11)(i)(ii);\n- (f) to administer a test to P in accordance with Schedule 9.\n- (11) During the period of their self-isolation, P may not leave, or be outside of, the place where P is self-isolating except-\n- (a) to travel in order to leave England, provided that they do so directly (subject to paragraph 3(1) of Schedule 8);\n- (b) to seek medical assistance, where this is required urgently or on the advice of a registered medical practitioner, including to access services from dentists, opticians, audiologists, chiropodists, chiropractors, osteopaths and other medical or health practitioners, including services relating to mental health;\n- (c) to undertake a workforce test required by regulation 7;\n- (d) to access veterinary services where this is required urgently or on the advice of a veterinary surgeon;\n- (e) to fulfil a legal obligation, including attending court or satisfying bail conditions, or to participate in legal proceedings;\n- (f) to avoid injury or illness or to escape a risk of harm;\n- (g) on compassionate grounds, including to attend a funeral of-\n- (i) a member of P's household,\n- (ii) a close family member, or\n- (iii) if no-one within paragraph (i) or (ii) are attending, a friend;\n- (h) to move to a different place for self-isolation specified in the Passenger Locator Form or a form equivalent to a Passenger Locator Form pursuant to an enactment in Scotland, Wales or Northern Ireland;\n- (i) in exceptional circumstances such as-\n- (i) to obtain basic necessities such as food and medical supplies for those in the same household (including any pets or animals in the household) where it is not possible to obtain these provisions in any other manner,\n\n( a ) 2006 c. 47. Paragraph 1(1B) of Schedule 4 was inserted by section 64(3) of the Protection of Freedoms Act 2012 (c. 9) and paragraph 7(3B) was substituted by section 66(2) of that Act.\n\n15", + "recall": 0.9495412844036697, + "true_md": "- (d) where P leaves, or is outside of, the place where they are self-isolating in accordance with paragraph (11)(j), from any person (other than a person who is required by paragraph (2) to self-isolate) whose assistance P reasonably requires in order to undertake the test, by reason of — \n\n- (i) P being a child, or \n\n- (ii) any disability of P’s. \n\n- (a) to provide emergency assistance; \n\n- (b) to provide care or assistance, including relevant personal care within the meaning of paragraph 1(1B) or 7(3B) of Schedule 4 to the Safeguarding Vulnerable Groups Act 2006( a ), to P or to any other person who is living in the place where P is self-isolating; \n\n- (c) to provide medical assistance, including to provide any of the services mentioned in paragraph (11)(b), to P or to any other person who is living in the place where P is self- isolating, where this is required urgently or on the advice of a registered medical practitioner; \n\n- (d) to provide veterinary services, where this is required urgently or on the advice of a veterinary surgeon; \n\n- (e) to provide critical public services, including those mentioned in paragraph (11)(i)(ii); \n\n- (f) to administer a test to P in accordance with Schedule 9. \n\n- (a) to travel in order to leave England, provided that they do so directly (subject to paragraph 3(1) of Schedule 8); \n\n- (b) to seek medical assistance, where this is required urgently or on the advice of a registered medical practitioner, including to access services from dentists, opticians, audiologists, chiropodists, chiropractors, osteopaths and other medical or health practitioners, including services relating to mental health; \n\n- (c) to undertake a workforce test required by regulation 7; \n\n- (d) to access veterinary services where this is required urgently or on the advice of a veterinary surgeon; \n\n- (e) to fulfil a legal obligation, including attending court or satisfying bail conditions, or to participate in legal proceedings; \n\n- (f) to avoid injury or illness or to escape a risk of harm; \n\n- (g) on compassionate grounds, including to attend a funeral of— \n\n- (i) a member of P’s household, \n\n- (ii) a close family member, or \n\n- (iii) if no-one within paragraph (i) or (ii) are attending, a friend; \n\n- (h) to move to a different place for self-isolation specified in the Passenger Locator Form or a form equivalent to a Passenger Locator Form pursuant to an enactment in Scotland, Wales or Northern Ireland; \n\n- (i) in exceptional circumstances such as— \n\n- (i) to obtain basic necessities such as food and medical supplies for those in the same household (including any pets or animals in the household) where it is not possible to obtain these provisions in any other manner, \n\n( a ) 2006 c. 47. Paragraph 1(1B) of Schedule 4 was inserted by section 64(3) of the Protection of Freedoms Act 2012 (c. 9) and paragraph 7(3B) was substituted by section 66(2) of that Act. \n\n15\n\n(11) During the period of their self-isolation, P may not leave, or be outside of, the place where P is self-isolating except— \n\n(10) Paragraph (2) does not require P to remain in isolation from a person (“V”) when V is at the place where P is self-isolating—" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9319297042921167, + "doc_id": "dc5f96f61bed7ba0b18c719f30ffc520eac3aea84c6d0f83525dab0653d672d8", + "edit_distance": 0.7197231833910035, + "f1_score": 0.9493670886075948, + "meteor": 0.6241439448975218, + "precision": 0.9493670886075949, + "pred_md": "## Permitted development\n\nA. Development by or on behalf of a local authority( a ) or health service body on land owned, leased, occupied or maintained by it for the purposes of-\n\n- (a) preventing an emergency;\n- (b) reducing, controlling or mitigating the effects of an emergency; or\n- (c) taking other action in connection with an emergency.\n\n## Development not permitted\n\nA.1. Development is not permitted by Class A if-\n\n- (a) any part of the development is on land which is, or forms part of-\n- (ii) a military explosive storage area;\n- (iii) a site of special scientific interest;\n- (b) the land or building is, or contains, a scheduled monument;\n- (c) any part of the development would be carried out within 5 metres of any boundary of the curtilage of a dwellinghouse;\n- (d) the height of any new building exceeds-\n- (i) a height of 6 metres above ground where any part of the new building is within 10 metres of any boundary of the land; or\n- (ii) the height of the highest part of the roof of the original building, or a height of 18 metres above the ground, whichever is the greater;\n- (e) the height of any building enlarged, improved or altered exceeds-\n- (i) the height of the highest part of the roof of the original building, or a height of 6 metres above the ground, whichever is the greater, where any part of the enlarged, improved or altered building is within 10 metres of any boundary of the curtilage of the original building; or\n- (ii) the height of the highest part of the roof of the original building, or a height of 18 metres above the ground, whichever is the greater; or\n- (f) any moveable structure, works, plant or machinery required temporarily and in connection with and for the duration of the development would be located in a position-\n- (i) within 10 metres of any boundary of the curtilage of a dwellinghouse, or\n- (ii) within 5 metres of any boundary of the land.\n\n## Conditions\n\nA.2. Development is permitted by Class A subject to the following conditions-\n\n- (a) if the developer is not the local planning authority, the developer must, as soon as practicable after commencing development, notify the local planning authority of the development;\n- (b) any use of the land for the purposes of Class A ceases on or before 31st December 2020; and\n- (c) on or before the expiry of a period of 12 months beginning with the date on which the use of the land ceases for the purpose of Class A-\n- (i) any building, works, plant, machinery, structure and erection permitted by Class A is removed; and\n\n( a ) See section 336(1) of the Town and Country Planning Act 1990 for the definition of 'local authority'.\n\n2", + "recall": 0.9493670886075949, + "true_md": "## Permitted development\n\n## Development not permitted\n\n## Conditions\n\n( a ) See section 336(1) of the Town and Country Planning Act 1990 for the definition of “local authority”. \n\n2\n\nA.1. Development is not permitted by Class A if— \n\nA.2. Development is permitted by Class A subject to the following conditions— \n\n- (i) any building, works, plant, machinery, structure and erection permitted by Class A is removed; and \n\n- (c) on or before the expiry of a period of 12 months beginning with the date on which the use of the land ceases for the purpose of Class A— \n\n- (b) any use of the land for the purposes of Class A ceases on or before 31st December 2020; and \n\n- (a) if the developer is not the local planning authority, the developer must, as soon as practicable after commencing development, notify the local planning authority of the development; \n\n- (f) any moveable structure, works, plant or machinery required temporarily and in connection with and for the duration of the development would be located in a position— \n\n- (i) within 10 metres of any boundary of the curtilage of a dwellinghouse, or \n\n- (ii) within 5 metres of any boundary of the land. \n\n- (ii) the height of the highest part of the roof of the original building, or a height of 18 metres above the ground, whichever is the greater; or \n\n- (i) the height of the highest part of the roof of the original building, or a height of 6 metres above the ground, whichever is the greater, where any part of the enlarged, improved or altered building is within 10 metres of any boundary of the curtilage of the original building; or \n\n- (e) the height of any building enlarged, improved or altered exceeds— \n\n- (ii) the height of the highest part of the roof of the original building, or a height of 18 metres above the ground, whichever is the greater; \n\n- (i) a height of 6 metres above ground where any part of the new building is within 10 metres of any boundary of the land; or \n\n- (d) the height of any new building exceeds— \n\n- (c) any part of the development would be carried out within 5 metres of any boundary of the curtilage of a dwellinghouse; \n\n- (b) the land or building is, or contains, a scheduled monument; \n\n- (ii) a military explosive storage area; \n\n- (iii) a site of special scientific interest; \n\n- (a) any part of the development is on land which is, or forms part of— \n\n- (a) preventing an emergency; \n\n- (b) reducing, controlling or mitigating the effects of an emergency; or \n\n- (c) taking other action in connection with an emergency. \n\nA. Development by or on behalf of a local authority( a ) or health service body on land owned, leased, occupied or maintained by it for the purposes of—" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9512645965691346, + "doc_id": "46f1d328c09ca3cbfe683d938b7e1c6d00924492ee959112b55b4124d14f3ea4", + "edit_distance": 0.24509803921568626, + "f1_score": 0.9663865546218487, + "meteor": 0.9458666257897596, + "precision": 0.9663865546218487, + "pred_md": "## EXPLANATORY NOTE\n\n(This note is not part of the Order)\n\nThis Order amends the Safety of Sports Grounds (Designation) Order 2015 (S.I. 2015/661) so as to designate Brentford Community Stadium, Brentford, as a sports ground for which a safety certificate is required under the Safety of Sports Grounds Act 1975 (c. 52).\n\nBrentford Community Stadium is occupied by Brentford Football Club (a member of the Football League Limited) and London Irish Rugby Football Club, and is a sports ground in England and Wales at which association football matches are played and which, in the opinion of the Secretary of State, has accommodation for more than 5,000 spectators.\n\nA full impact assessment has not been produced for this instrument as no, or significant, impact on private, voluntary or public sector is foreseen.\n\n' Crown copyright 2020\n\nPrinted and published in the UK by The Stationery Office Limited under the authority and superintendence of Jeff James, Controller of Her Majesty's Stationery Office and Queen's Printer of Acts of Parliament.\n\n£4.90\n\nUK202004171003 04/2020 19585\n\nhttp://www.legislation.gov.uk/id/uksi/2020/434\n\n2", + "recall": 0.9663865546218487, + "true_md": "This Order amends the Safety of Sports Grounds (Designation) Order 2015 (S.I. 2015/661) so as to designate Brentford Community Stadium, Brentford, as a sports ground for which a safety certificate is required under the Safety of Sports Grounds Act 1975 (c. 52). \n\nBrentford Community Stadium is occupied by Brentford Football Club (a member of the Football League Limited) and London Irish Rugby Football Club, and is a sports ground in England and Wales at which association football matches are played and which, in the opinion of the Secretary of State, has accommodation for more than 5,000 spectators. \n\nA full impact assessment has not been produced for this instrument as no, or significant, impact on private, voluntary or public sector is foreseen. \n\n£4.90 \n\nUK202004171003 04/2020 19585 \n\nhttp://www.legislation.gov.uk/id/uksi/2020/434 \n\n## EXPLANATORY NOTE\n\n(This note is not part of the Order) \n\n© Crown copyright 2020 \n\nPrinted and published in the UK by The Stationery Office Limited under the authority and superintendence of Jeff James, Controller of Her Majesty’s Stationery Office and Queen’s Printer of Acts of Parliament." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.859823405675937, + "doc_id": "8190ba80f90b0c999644ca92b958ebf84ea996d6ec8342d1dd3c535e2b29883d", + "edit_distance": 0.28343023255813954, + "f1_score": 0.9346246973365617, + "meteor": 0.8719082907660319, + "precision": 0.9278846153846154, + "pred_md": "- (b) prior to P's arrival in the United Kingdom the Foreign, Commonwealth and Development Office-\n- (i) has confirmed in writing to the person giving the confirmation referred to in paragraph (a) that it has received that confirmation, and\n- (ii) where P is a representative of a foreign country or territory, has then confirmed in writing to the person giving the confirmation referred to in paragraph (a) that P is travelling to the United Kingdom to conduct official business with the United Kingdom and is not required to comply with regulation 9.\n- (4) For the purposes of this paragraph-\n- (a) 'consular courier' means a person who has been provided by the State on behalf of which they are acting with an official document confirming their status as a consular courier in accordance with Article 35(5) of the Vienna Convention on Consular Relations of 1963;\n- (b) 'consular post' means any consulate-general, consulate, vice-consulate or consular agency;\n- (c) 'diplomatic courier' means a person who has been provided by the State on behalf of which they are acting with an official document confirming their status as a diplomatic courier in accordance with Article 27(5) of the Vienna Convention on Diplomatic Relations of 1961;\n- (d) 'G7 event' means-\n- (i) an event organised by Her Majesty's Government in connection with the United Kingdom's G7 2021 presidency,\n- (ii) a meeting, connected to an event described in sub-paragraph (a), between representatives of States, foreign territories or organisations which are represented at such an event;\n- (e) 'international organisation' means an international organisation accorded privileges and immunities in the United Kingdom;\n- (f) 'member of a consular post' means a 'consular officer', 'consular employee' and 'member of the service staff' as defined in Schedule 1 to the Consular Relations Act 1968( a ), and 'head of consular post' has the meaning given in that Schedule;\n- (g) 'member of a diplomatic mission' means the 'head of the mission', 'members of the diplomatic staff', 'members of the administrative and technical staff' and 'members of the service staff' as defined in Schedule 1 to the Diplomatic Privileges Act 1964( b );\n- (h) 'relevant person' means-\n- (i) where P is to attend or facilitate a G7 event on behalf of a State, a foreign territory or an organisation, the head of the relevant mission or post, the office representing the foreign territory in the United Kingdom or the organisation,\n- (ii) where P is to attend or facilitate a G7 event on their own behalf, P.\n- (5) This paragraph is without prejudice to any immunity from jurisdiction or inviolability which is accorded to any person described in sub-paragraph (1) or (2) under the law of England and Wales apart from these Regulations.\n- 2. -(1) A Crown servant or government contractor where they are-\n- (a) required to undertake essential government work related to the United Kingdom border in the United Kingdom within the period during which they would, but for this paragraph, have had to self-isolate in accordance with regulation 9; or\n- (b) undertaking essential government work related to the United Kingdom border outside of the United Kingdom but-\n\n( a ) 1968 c. 18. There are amendments but none is relevant.\n\n( b ) 1964 c. 81. There are amendments but none is relevant.\n\n35", + "recall": 0.9414634146341463, + "true_md": "- (b) prior to P’s arrival in the United Kingdom the Foreign, Commonwealth and Development Office— \n\n- (i) has confirmed in writing to the person giving the confirmation referred to in paragraph (a) that it has received that confirmation, and \n\n- (ii) where P is a representative of a foreign country or territory, has then confirmed in writing to the person giving the confirmation referred to in paragraph (a) that P is travelling to the United Kingdom to conduct official business with the United Kingdom and is not required to comply with regulation 9. \n\n- (a) “consular courier” means a person who has been provided by the State on behalf of which they are acting with an official document confirming their status as a consular courier in accordance with Article 35(5) of the Vienna Convention on Consular Relations of 1963; \n\n- (b) “consular post” means any consulate-general, consulate, vice-consulate or consular agency; \n\n- (c) “diplomatic courier” means a person who has been provided by the State on behalf of which they are acting with an official document confirming their status as a diplomatic courier in accordance with Article 27(5) of the Vienna Convention on Diplomatic Relations of 1961; \n\n- (d) “G7 event” means— \n\n- (i) an event organised by Her Majesty’s Government in connection with the United Kingdom’s G7 2021 presidency, \n\n- (ii) a meeting, connected to an event described in sub-paragraph (a), between representatives of States, foreign territories or organisations which are represented at such an event; \n\n- (e) “international organisation” means an international organisation accorded privileges and immunities in the United Kingdom; \n\n- (f) “member of a consular post” means a “consular officer”, “consular employee” and “member of the service staff” as defined in Schedule 1 to the Consular Relations Act 1968( a ), and “head of consular post” has the meaning given in that Schedule; \n\n- (g) “member of a diplomatic mission” means the “head of the mission”, “members of the diplomatic staff”, “members of the administrative and technical staff” and “members of the service staff” as defined in Schedule 1 to the Diplomatic Privileges Act 1964( b ); \n\n- (h) “relevant person” means— \n\n- (i) where P is to attend or facilitate a G7 event on behalf of a State, a foreign territory or an organisation, the head of the relevant mission or post, the office representing the foreign territory in the United Kingdom or the organisation, \n\n- (ii) where P is to attend or facilitate a G7 event on their own behalf, P. \n\n- (a) required to undertake essential government work related to the United Kingdom border in the United Kingdom within the period during which they would, but for this paragraph, have had to self-isolate in accordance with regulation 9; or \n\n- (b) undertaking essential government work related to the United Kingdom border outside of the United Kingdom but— \n\n( a ) 1968 c. 18. There are amendments but none is relevant. \n\n( b ) 1964 c. 81. There are amendments but none is relevant. \n\n35\n\n(5) This paragraph is without prejudice to any immunity from jurisdiction or inviolability which is accorded to any person described in sub-paragraph (1) or (2) under the law of England and Wales apart from these Regulations. \n\n2. —(1) A Crown servant or government contractor where they are— \n\n(4) For the purposes of this paragraph—" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.921554979996082, + "doc_id": "4849dc90f225791f1339e6fc04553c313d2a3e0215e1979584426b7bb6c5eda0", + "edit_distance": 0.7039848197343453, + "f1_score": 0.9689119170984457, + "meteor": 0.8521588776325051, + "precision": 0.9739583333333334, + "pred_md": "- or training for the specified competition, or travelling between different locations where the specified competition or training for the specified competition is taking place, and\n- (iii) at all times when P is not self-isolating P remains in isolation with any other international elite sportspersons or domestic elite sportspersons who are competing in or training for the specified competition or with international ancillary sportspersons or domestic ancillary sportspersons involved in the specified competition; and\n- (e) where P is an international ancillary sportsperson-\n- (i) P provides, on arrival in England, written evidence from a United Kingdom or English sport national governing body of P's status as an international ancillary sportsperson attending a specified competition,\n- (ii) P travels directly to and remains in the place where P will be self-isolating apart from when P is travelling to or from, or attending the location of the specified competition or training for the specified competition, or travelling between different locations where the specified competition or training for the specified competition is taking place, and\n- (iii) at all times when P is not self-isolating P remains in isolation with international elite sportspersons or domestic elite sportspersons who are competing in or training for the specified competition or with international ancillary sportspersons or domestic ancillary sportspersons involved in the specified competition.\n- (5) When considering whether a person derives a living from competing in a sport for the purposes of sub-paragraphs (2) and (3), any payment made for a person's benefit by reason of their competing in a particular sport is to be taken into account, including payment by way of salary, prize money or through a contractual arrangement of any other kind.\n- 45. -(1) A person who has travelled to the United Kingdom for the purposes of essential work carried out for or on behalf of the nominated undertaker.\n- (2) For the purposes of sub-paragraph (1)-\n- (a) 'essential work' means work which has been designated as such by the Secretary of State for Transport and includes, in particular, work done or required for Phase One purposes as defined in section 67 of the High Speed Rail (London-West Midlands) Act 2017( a );\n- 'nominated undertaker' is the person appointed by article 2(1) of the High Speed Rail\n- (b) (London-West Midlands) (Nomination) Order 2017( b ).\n\n## SCHEDULE 5\n\n## List of sporting events\n\nBetfred Super League Rugby Football League fixtures\n\nEngland & Wales Cricket Board International Cricket fixtures\n\nEuropean Professional Club Rugby fixtures\n\nFIH Pro League hockey fixtures\n\nFootball Association International fixtures\n\nGuinness PRO14 Rugby Football Union fixtures\n\nMatchroom - Boxing Championship matches\n\n( a ) 2017 c. 7.\n\n( b ) S.I. 2017/184.\n\nParagraph 44(2) of Schedule 4\n\n50", + "recall": 0.9639175257731959, + "true_md": "or training for the specified competition, or travelling between different locations where the specified competition or training for the specified competition is taking place, and \n\n(5) When considering whether a person derives a living from competing in a sport for the purposes of sub-paragraphs (2) and (3), any payment made for a person’s benefit by reason of their competing in a particular sport is to be taken into account, including payment by way of salary, prize money or through a contractual arrangement of any other kind. \n\n45. —(1) A person who has travelled to the United Kingdom for the purposes of essential work carried out for or on behalf of the nominated undertaker. \n\n(2) For the purposes of sub-paragraph (1)— \n\nBetfred Super League Rugby Football League fixtures \n\nEngland & Wales Cricket Board International Cricket fixtures \n\nParagraph 44(2) of Schedule 4 \n\nEuropean Professional Club Rugby fixtures \n\nFIH Pro League hockey fixtures \n\nFootball Association International fixtures \n\nGuinness PRO14 Rugby Football Union fixtures \n\nMatchroom – Boxing Championship matches \n\n## SCHEDULE 5\n\n## List of sporting events\n\n- (iii) at all times when P is not self-isolating P remains in isolation with any other international elite sportspersons or domestic elite sportspersons who are competing in or training for the specified competition or with international ancillary sportspersons or domestic ancillary sportspersons involved in the specified competition; and \n\n- (e) where P is an international ancillary sportsperson— \n\n- (i) P provides, on arrival in England, written evidence from a United Kingdom or English sport national governing body of P’s status as an international ancillary sportsperson attending a specified competition, \n\n- (ii) P travels directly to and remains in the place where P will be self-isolating apart from when P is travelling to or from, or attending the location of the specified competition or training for the specified competition, or travelling between different locations where the specified competition or training for the specified competition is taking place, and \n\n- (iii) at all times when P is not self-isolating P remains in isolation with international elite sportspersons or domestic elite sportspersons who are competing in or training for the specified competition or with international ancillary sportspersons or domestic ancillary sportspersons involved in the specified competition. \n\n- (a) “essential work” means work which has been designated as such by the Secretary of State for Transport and includes, in particular, work done or required for Phase One purposes as defined in section 67 of the High Speed Rail (London-West Midlands) Act 2017( a ); \n\n- (b) “nominated undertaker” is the person appointed by article 2(1) of the High Speed Rail (London-West Midlands) (Nomination) Order 2017( b ). \n\n( a ) 2017 c. 7. \n\n( b ) S.I. 2017/184. \n\n50" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9346350812853552, + "doc_id": "2be71b4b22533518c87426decdd9611a127311ce502032a7d538fcc14c942a99", + "edit_distance": 0.40860215053763443, + "f1_score": 0.9464285714285714, + "meteor": 0.9284003275198562, + "precision": 0.9408284023668639, + "pred_md": "- (4) A fixed penalty notice must-\n- (a) give reasonably detailed particulars of the circumstances alleged to constitute the offence;\n- (b) state the period during which (because of paragraph (3)(a)) proceedings will not be taken for the offence;\n- (c) specify the amount of the fixed penalty in accordance with Schedule 14;\n- (d) state the name and address of the person to whom the fixed penalty may be paid; and\n- (e) specify permissible methods of payment.\n- (5) Subject to paragraph (7), whatever other method may be specified under paragraph (4)(e), payment of a fixed penalty may be made by pre-paying and posting to the person whose name is stated under paragraph (4)(d), at the stated address, a letter containing the amount of the penalty (in cash or otherwise).\n- (6) Where a letter is sent as described in paragraph (5), payment is regarded as having been made at the time at which that letter would be delivered in the ordinary course of post.\n- (7) Paragraph (5) does not apply in the case of-\n- (a) an offence under regulation 19(7); or\n- (b) and offence under regulation 19(14) (obstruction) in relation to an offence under regulation 19(7).\n- (8) In any proceedings, a certificate that-\n- (a) purports to be signed by or on behalf of the designated officer; and\n- (b) states that the payment of a fixed penalty was, or was not, received by the date specified in the certificate,\n\nis evidence of the facts stated.\n\n- (9) For the purposes of this regulation-\n- (a) other than in relation to an operator offence, 'authorised person' means-\n- (i) a constable,\n- (ii) an immigration officer, but only in relation to the issue of a fixed penalty notice in respect of an information offence or an offence described in regulation 19(1)(a), (b), (c), (g), (h), (i), (j), (5) and (6), or\n- (iii) a person designated by the Secretary of State for the purposes of this regulation;\n- (b) in relation to an operator offence, 'authorised person' means-\n- (i) in relation to passengers arriving by sea, the Secretary of State for Transport,\n- (ii) in relation to passengers arriving by air, the Civil Aviation Authority,\n- (iii) in relation to passenger arriving by rail, the Office of Rail and Road;\n- (c) 'the designated officer' means-\n- (i) in relation to an offence other than an operator offence, an officer designated by the Secretary of State for the purposes of this regulation,\n- (ii) in relation to an operator offence, the authorised person;\n- (d) 'operator offence' means an offence-\n- (i) under regulation 19(7),\n- (ii) under regulation 19(13), or\n- (iii) under regulation 19(14) (obstruction) in relation to a function relating to an offence under regulation 19(7).\n\n27", + "recall": 0.9520958083832335, + "true_md": "(4) A fixed penalty notice must— \n\n(5) Subject to paragraph (7), whatever other method may be specified under paragraph (4)(e), payment of a fixed penalty may be made by pre-paying and posting to the person whose name is stated under paragraph (4)(d), at the stated address, a letter containing the amount of the penalty (in cash or otherwise). \n\n(6) Where a letter is sent as described in paragraph (5), payment is regarded as having been made at the time at which that letter would be delivered in the ordinary course of post. \n\n(7) Paragraph (5) does not apply in the case of— \n\n(8) In any proceedings, a certificate that— \n\nis evidence of the facts stated. \n\n(9) For the purposes of this regulation— \n\n- (a) give reasonably detailed particulars of the circumstances alleged to constitute the offence; \n\n- (b) state the period during which (because of paragraph (3)(a)) proceedings will not be taken for the offence; \n\n- (c) specify the amount of the fixed penalty in accordance with Schedule 14; \n\n- (d) state the name and address of the person to whom the fixed penalty may be paid; and \n\n- (e) specify permissible methods of payment. \n\n- (a) an offence under regulation 19(7); or \n\n- (b) and offence under regulation 19(14) (obstruction) in relation to an offence under regulation 19(7). \n\n- (a) purports to be signed by or on behalf of the designated officer; and \n\n- (b) states that the payment of a fixed penalty was, or was not, received by the date specified in the certificate, \n\n- (a) other than in relation to an operator offence, “authorised person” means— \n\n- (i) a constable, \n\n- (ii) an immigration officer, but only in relation to the issue of a fixed penalty notice in respect of an information offence or an offence described in regulation 19(1)(a), (b), (c), (g), (h), (i), (j), (5) and (6), or \n\n- (iii) a person designated by the Secretary of State for the purposes of this regulation; \n\n- (b) in relation to an operator offence, “authorised person” means— \n\n- (i) in relation to passengers arriving by sea, the Secretary of State for Transport, \n\n- (ii) in relation to passengers arriving by air, the Civil Aviation Authority, \n\n- (iii) in relation to passenger arriving by rail, the Office of Rail and Road; \n\n- (c) “the designated officer” means— \n\n- (i) in relation to an offence other than an operator offence, an officer designated by the Secretary of State for the purposes of this regulation, \n\n- (ii) in relation to an operator offence, the authorised person; \n\n- (d) “operator offence” means an offence— \n\n- (i) under regulation 19(7), \n\n- (ii) under regulation 19(13), or \n\n- (iii) under regulation 19(14) (obstruction) in relation to a function relating to an offence under regulation 19(7). \n\n27" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.49686946045990393, + "doc_id": "beccf83d0e9804578caab9e46f33262179c7ae58127441f07aa4988916953f5e", + "edit_distance": 0.42450142450142453, + "f1_score": 0.9512195121951219, + "meteor": 0.813012123734811, + "precision": 0.9831932773109243, + "pred_md": "| FIA World Endurance Championship Prologue and Round 1 Silverstone |\n|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|\n| British Para Athletics Sprint Meet |\n| Motorsport UK - HSCC Formula 2 Championship Masters Historic Race Weekend |\n| Motorsport UK - British Superkart Championship and Support Series |\n| Motorsport UK - British Truck Racing Championship |\n| British Equestrian - International Dressage Events |\n| European Tour - Betfred British Masters |\n| Motorsport UK - GT World Challenge Europe Sprint Cup and Support Series |\n| Motorsport UK - Donington Historic Festival |\n| Motorsport UK - British Touring Car Championship and Support Series |\n| Motorsport UK - Ferrari Challenge UK and Support |\n| Motorsport UK - British GT Championship and Support Series / Porsche Sprint Challenge GB and Support Series |\n| Motorsport UK - Master Historic F1 / Sports Cars and Support Series |\n| Motorsport UK - FIA Main Event 2021 and Support Series |\n| England Hockey Pro League |\n| FIM Speedway Grand Prix World Championship - Qualifying Round |\n| Royal Windsor Horse Show |\n| British Speedway Premiership, Championship and National Development Leagues |\n| The 2020 UEFA European Football Championship |\n| British Superbike Championship and Support Series |\n| ACU - British Motocross Championship and Support races |\n| European Tour - English Championships |\n| Lingfield Derby/Oaks Trials Day horse-racing |\n| Al Shaqab Lockinge Day horse-racing |\n| Equestrian Jumping - Wellington, Heckfield |\n| Curling - World Mixed Doubles Championship 2021 |\n| UCI Mountain Bike World Cup |\n| AJ Bell 2021 World Triathlon Leeds |\n| European 10,000m Cup (incorporating the British 10,000 Olympic Trial) |\n| Equestrian Eventing - Belsay International |\n\nW Series Test Event\n\n52", + "recall": 0.9212598425196851, + "true_md": "FIA World Endurance Championship Prologue and Round 1 Silverstone \n\nBritish Para Athletics Sprint Meet \n\nMotorsport UK – HSCC Formula 2 Championship Masters Historic Race Weekend \n\nMotorsport UK – British Superkart Championship and Support Series \n\nMotorsport UK – British Truck Racing Championship \n\nBritish Equestrian – International Dressage Events \n\nEuropean Tour – Betfred British Masters \n\nMotorsport UK – GT World Challenge Europe Sprint Cup and Support Series \n\nMotorsport UK – Donington Historic Festival \n\nMotorsport UK – British Touring Car Championship and Support Series \n\nMotorsport UK – Ferrari Challenge UK and Support \n\nMotorsport UK – British GT Championship and Support Series / Porsche Sprint Challenge GB and Support Series \n\nMotorsport UK – Master Historic F1 / Sports Cars and Support Series \n\nMotorsport UK – FIA Main Event 2021 and Support Series \n\nEngland Hockey Pro League \n\nFIM Speedway Grand Prix World Championship - Qualifying Round \n\nRoyal Windsor Horse Show \n\nBritish Speedway Premiership, Championship and National Development Leagues \n\nThe 2020 UEFA European Football Championship \n\nBritish Superbike Championship and Support Series \n\nACU – British Motocross Championship and Support races \n\nEquestrian Eventing – Cirencester \n\nEuropean Tour – English Championships \n\nLingfield Derby/Oaks Trials Day horse-racing \n\nAl Shaqab Lockinge Day horse-racing \n\nDante Festival horse-racing \n\nLawn Tennis Association – GB Pro Series Roehampton 1 & 2 \n\nEquestrian Jumping – Wellington, Heckfield \n\nCurling – World Mixed Doubles Championship 2021 \n\nUCI Mountain Bike World Cup \n\nAJ Bell 2021 World Triathlon Leeds \n\nEuropean 10,000m Cup (incorporating the British 10,000 Olympic Trial) \n\nEquestrian Eventing - Belsay International \n\nW Series Test Event \n\n52" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9121123844641968, + "doc_id": "ad2931edb332653f0f5ba66b9eb3e60b87707b506375e74e0b42429740306128", + "edit_distance": 0.09465020576131687, + "f1_score": 0.9482758620689654, + "meteor": 0.9354916741001283, + "precision": 0.9649122807017544, + "pred_md": "27th February 2020\n\nTwo of the Lords Commissioners of Her Majesty's Treasury\n\n## EXPLANATORY NOTE\n\n(This note is not part of the Order)\n\nThis Order amends sections 150(1), 155(1B) and 161(b) of the Income Tax (Earnings and Pensions) Act 2003 (c. 1) ('the Act').\n\nWhere an employee receives fuel for a car or van as a result of their employment and they are chargeable to tax in respect of that vehicle under section 120 or 154 of the Act, the cash equivalent of the benefit of that fuel is treated as earnings under sections 149 and 160 of the Act.\n\nThe cash equivalent of the benefit of fuel for a car is normally calculated by applying the 'appropriate percentage' (usually calculated by reference to the CO2 emissions of the car) to the figure in section 150(1) of the Act. Article 2 of this Order increases this figure to £24,500 for the tax year 2020-21 and subsequent tax years. The cash equivalent of the benefit of fuel for a van is specified at in section 161(b) of the Act. Article 4 of this Order increases this figure to £666 for the tax year 2020-21 and subsequent tax years.\n\nWhere a van is made available by reason of the employment to an employee for private use that is more than insignificant and not limited to ordinary commuting, section 154 of the Act treats the cash equivalent of the benefit of the van as earnings. For vans that cannot in any circumstances emit CO2 by being driven, the cash equivalent of the benefit for the tax years 2015-16 to 2021-22 is calculated by applying the 'appropriate percentage' (calculated by reference to the tax year and to section 155(1C) of the Act) to the figure in section 155(1B)(a) of the Act. For other vans, the cash equivalent of the benefit is set out in section 155(1B)(b) of the Act. Article 3 of this Order increases these figures to £3,490 for the tax year 2020-21 and subsequent tax years.\n\nA Tax Information and Impact Note covering this instrument will be published on the website at www.gov.uk/government/collections/tax-information-and-impact-notes-tiins.\n\n' Crown copyright 2020\n\nPrinted and published in the UK by The Stationery Office Limited under the authority and superintendence of Jeff James, Controller of Her Majesty's Stationery Office and Queen's Printer of Acts of Parliament.\n\n£4.90\n\nUK202002281005 03/2020 19585\n\nhttp://www.legislation.gov.uk/id/uksi/2020/199\n\n2\n\nIain Stewart Rebecca Harris", + "recall": 0.9322033898305084, + "true_md": "Iain Stewart Rebecca Harris Two of the Lords Commissioners of Her Majesty’s Treasury \n\n27th February 2020 \n\n## EXPLANATORY NOTE\n\n## (This note is not part of the Order)\n\nThis Order amends sections 150(1), 155(1B) and 161(b) of the Income Tax (Earnings and Pensions) Act 2003 (c. 1) (“the Act”). \n\nWhere an employee receives fuel for a car or van as a result of their employment and they are chargeable to tax in respect of that vehicle under section 120 or 154 of the Act, the cash equivalent of the benefit of that fuel is treated as earnings under sections 149 and 160 of the Act. \n\nThe cash equivalent of the benefit of fuel for a car is normally calculated by applying the “appropriate percentage” (usually calculated by reference to the CO$_{2 }$emissions of the car) to the figure in section 150(1) of the Act. Article 2 of this Order increases this figure to £24,500 for the tax year 2020-21 and subsequent tax years. The cash equivalent of the benefit of fuel for a van is specified at in section 161(b) of the Act. Article 4 of this Order increases this figure to £666 for the tax year 2020-21 and subsequent tax years. \n\nWhere a van is made available by reason of the employment to an employee for private use that is more than insignificant and not limited to ordinary commuting, section 154 of the Act treats the cash equivalent of the benefit of the van as earnings. For vans that cannot in any circumstances emit CO$_{2 }$by being driven, the cash equivalent of the benefit for the tax years 2015-16 to 2021-22 is calculated by applying the “appropriate percentage” (calculated by reference to the tax year and to section 155(1C) of the Act) to the figure in section 155(1B)(a) of the Act. For other vans, the cash equivalent of the benefit is set out in section 155(1B)(b) of the Act. Article 3 of this Order increases these figures to £3,490 for the tax year 2020-21 and subsequent tax years. \n\nA Tax Information and Impact Note covering this instrument will be published on the website at www.gov.uk/government/collections/tax-information-and-impact-notes-tiins. \n\n© Crown copyright 2020 \n\nPrinted and published in the UK by The Stationery Office Limited under the authority and superintendence of Jeff James, Controller of Her Majesty’s Stationery Office and Queen’s Printer of Acts of Parliament. \n\n£4.90 \n\nUK202002281005 03/2020 19585 \n\nhttp://www.legislation.gov.uk/id/uksi/2020/199" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "a8e3eda277043c7478bc690c8ce1575d00b8392d67ca931d5099f6ff32cd4f3f", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9985422740524781, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "£6.90\n\nUK202004291001 05/2020 19585\n\nhttp://www.legislation.gov.uk/id/uksi/2020/471", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "£6.90 \n\nUK202004291001 05/2020 19585 \n\nhttp://www.legislation.gov.uk/id/uksi/2020/471" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.882506016521138, + "doc_id": "2bdc0bfe2185c41970392ebf11429417499b49e618db72077c070c64a0ebde12", + "edit_distance": 0.20365535248041775, + "f1_score": 0.9661016949152541, + "meteor": 0.9687666735629664, + "precision": 0.9606741573033708, + "pred_md": "## S T A T U T O R Y I N S T R U M E N T S\n\n## 2021 No. 577\n\n## CIVIL AVIATION\n\nThe Air Navigation (Restriction of Flying) (Royal St George's Golf Course) Regulations 2021\n\nMade\n\n-\n\n-\n\n-\n\n-\n\n12th May 2021\n\nComing into force\n\n- -\n\n11th July 2021\n\nThe Secretary of State has decided that it is in the public interest to restrict flying in the vicinity of Royal St George's Golf Course, Sandwich, Kent, by reason of the intended holding of the 2021 Open Golf Championship which is scheduled to take place there.\n\nThe Secretary of State makes the following Regulations in exercise of the powers conferred by article 239 of the Air Navigation Order 2016( a ).\n\n## Citation and commencement\n\n1. These Regulations may be cited as the Air Navigation (Restriction of Flying) (Royal St George's Golf Course) Regulations 2021 and come into force on 11th July 2021.\n\n## Interpretation\n\n2. In regulation 3(1) the times referred to are Co-ordinated Universal Time( b ).\n\n## Restricted airspace\n\n3. -(1) Subject to paragraph (2), between 0400 hours and 2100 hours on each of the nine days beginning on 11th July 2021 and ending on 19th July 2021 no aircraft is to fly below 2,000 feet above mean sea level within the area bounded by a circle having a radius of 1.07 nautical miles whose centre is at 521628N 0012201E.\n\n- (2) Paragraph (1) does not apply to any aircraft-\n- (a) operating by or on behalf of the-\n- (i) National Police Air Service,\n- (ii) Helicopter Emergency Services, or\n- (iii) Maritime and Coastguard Agency, or\n- (b) operating with the permission of Kent Police.\n\n( a ) S.I. 2016/765, to which there are amendments not relevant to these Regulations.\n\n( b ) Co-ordinated Universal Time (UTC) is one hour behind British Summer Time (BST).", + "recall": 0.9715909090909091, + "true_md": "S T A T U T O R Y I N S T R U M E N T S\n\n# 2021 No. 577\n\n# CIVIL AVIATION\n\nThe Air Navigation (Restriction of Flying) (Royal St George’s Golf Course) Regulations 2021 \n\nThe Secretary of State has decided that it is in the public interest to restrict flying in the vicinity of Royal St George’s Golf Course, Sandwich, Kent, by reason of the intended holding of the 2021 Open Golf Championship which is scheduled to take place there. \n\nThe Secretary of State makes the following Regulations in exercise of the powers conferred by article 239 of the Air Navigation Order 2016( a ). \n\n1. These Regulations may be cited as the Air Navigation (Restriction of Flying) (Royal St George’s Golf Course) Regulations 2021 and come into force on 11th July 2021. \n\n2. In regulation 3(1) the times referred to are Co-ordinated Universal Time( b ). \n\n3. —(1) Subject to paragraph (2), between 0400 hours and 2100 hours on each of the nine days beginning on 11th July 2021 and ending on 19th July 2021 no aircraft is to fly below 2,000 feet above mean sea level within the area bounded by a circle having a radius of 1.07 nautical miles whose centre is at 521628N 0012201E. \n\n(2) Paragraph (1) does not apply to any aircraft— \n\n- (a) operating by or on behalf of the— \n\n- (b) operating with the permission of Kent Police. \n\n- (i) National Police Air Service, \n\n- (ii) Helicopter Emergency Services, or \n\n- (iii) Maritime and Coastguard Agency, or \n\n( a ) S.I. 2016/765, to which there are amendments not relevant to these Regulations. \n\n( b ) Co-ordinated Universal Time (UTC) is one hour behind British Summer Time (BST). \n\n## Restricted airspace\n\n## Interpretation\n\n## Citation and commencement" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9371810176459994, + "doc_id": "65ded3992b6b8ebf694e9d6e411c3ae38bd6f2afc4d0bf4ddb2580414db3c355", + "edit_distance": 0.7800338409475466, + "f1_score": 0.972972972972973, + "meteor": 0.7139199013362225, + "precision": 0.9818181818181818, + "pred_md": "- (a) indicates the descriptions of information required by each of sub-paragraphs (a) to (h) of regulation 3(2) in relation to the marriage, and\n- (b) provides corresponding spaces for recording information required by each of those subparagraphs in relation to the marriage.\n- (6) A register of marriage services provided under paragraph (1) by a parochial church council belongs to that parochial church council.\n\n## Duty to record information about marriages solemnized according to the rites of the Church of England or Church in Wales\n\n- 3. -(1) Paragraphs (2), (3) and (4) apply where a marriage has been solemnized according to the rites of the Church of England in a church or chapel in which banns of matrimony may be published.\n- (2) As soon as practicable after the marriage has been solemnized, the clergyman by whom the marriage was solemnized must make a record of the following information in relation to that marriage in a register of marriage services provided to the church or chapel under regulation 2(1)-\n- (a) the date and place of the marriage;\n- (b) the name and surname of each party;\n- (c) the date of birth of each party;\n- (d) the occupation (if any) of each party;\n- (e) the address of each party at the time of the marriage;\n- (f) the names and surnames of each party's parents, so far as those names and surnames are known to the clergyman who solemnized the marriage;\n- (g) the name and surname of each of the witnesses in whose presence the marriage was solemnized;\n- (h) the name and surname of the clergyman by whom the marriage was solemnized.\n- (3) The clergyman must record the information required by paragraph (2) in English, and may also record information required by that paragraph in Welsh where the church or chapel is situated in Wales.\n- (4) After making a record under paragraph (2) the clergyman must sign it.\n- (5) This regulation does not apply in relation to a marriage solemnized before 4th May 2021.\n\n## Requirements about the keeping of registers of marriage services\n\n- 4. -(1) The rector, vicar or curate in charge of a church or chapel to which a register of marriage services has been provided under regulation 2(1) must-\n- (a) ensure that the register is kept in that church or chapel, and\n- (b) do everything that is reasonably practicable to ensure that the register is protected against theft, loss or damage.\n- (2) Where there is no rector, vicar or curate in charge of a church or chapel to which a register of marriage services has been provided under regulation 2(1), the obligations under paragraph (1) in respect of that register fall on the churchwardens of the parish in which the church or chapel is situated.\n\nGiven under my hand on 29th April 2021\n\nAbi Tierney Registrar General\n\n2", + "recall": 0.9642857142857143, + "true_md": "- (a) indicates the descriptions of information required by each of sub-paragraphs (a) to (h) of regulation 3(2) in relation to the marriage, and \n\n- (b) provides corresponding spaces for recording information required by each of those sub- paragraphs in relation to the marriage. \n\n- (a) the date and place of the marriage; \n\n- (b) the name and surname of each party; \n\n- (c) the date of birth of each party; \n\n- (d) the occupation (if any) of each party; \n\n- (e) the address of each party at the time of the marriage; \n\n- (f) the names and surnames of each party’s parents, so far as those names and surnames are known to the clergyman who solemnized the marriage; \n\n- (g) the name and surname of each of the witnesses in whose presence the marriage was solemnized; \n\n- (h) the name and surname of the clergyman by whom the marriage was solemnized. \n\n- (a) ensure that the register is kept in that church or chapel, and \n\n- (b) do everything that is reasonably practicable to ensure that the register is protected against theft, loss or damage. \n\nAbi Tierney Registrar General \n\nGiven under my hand on 29th April 2021 \n\n2\n\n(2) Where there is no rector, vicar or curate in charge of a church or chapel to which a register of marriage services has been provided under regulation 2(1), the obligations under paragraph (1) in respect of that register fall on the churchwardens of the parish in which the church or chapel is situated. \n\n4. —(1) The rector, vicar or curate in charge of a church or chapel to which a register of marriage services has been provided under regulation 2(1) must— \n\n(4) After making a record under paragraph (2) the clergyman must sign it. \n\n(5) This regulation does not apply in relation to a marriage solemnized before 4th May 2021. \n\n(3) The clergyman must record the information required by paragraph (2) in English, and may also record information required by that paragraph in Welsh where the church or chapel is situated in Wales. \n\n## Requirements about the keeping of registers of marriage services\n\n## Duty to record information about marriages solemnized according to the rites of the Church of England or Church in Wales\n\n3. —(1) Paragraphs (2), (3) and (4) apply where a marriage has been solemnized according to the rites of the Church of England in a church or chapel in which banns of matrimony may be published. \n\n(2) As soon as practicable after the marriage has been solemnized, the clergyman by whom the marriage was solemnized must make a record of the following information in relation to that marriage in a register of marriage services provided to the church or chapel under regulation 2(1)— \n\n(6) A register of marriage services provided under paragraph (1) by a parochial church council belongs to that parochial church council." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9187678472739238, + "doc_id": "9077474a1e7dccbe8952537abd87f14fcabc708581b1f08d962cd9200f90c94c", + "edit_distance": 0.3885630498533724, + "f1_score": 0.957345971563981, + "meteor": 0.9137049220909771, + "precision": 0.9665071770334929, + "pred_md": "- (b) their home address, and-\n- (i) where P is a person to whom regulation 9(1)(a) or (b) applies, the address or addresses at which they intend to self-isolate, or are self-isolating, in accordance with regulation 9 (if different from their home address), or\n- (ii) where P is a person to whom regulation 10 applies, the address of the accommodation designated for the purposes of Schedule 11.\n- (4) Where P is a child, or a person with a disability who is unable for that reason to provide the notification and information set out or referred to in sub-paragraph (3) to the test provider-\n- (a) the notification and information set out or referred to in sub-paragraph (3), other than the information set out in paragraph 4(b)(xi) and (xii) of Schedule 10, is provided to the test provider on P's behalf by another person ('Y'); and\n- (b) either the information set out in paragraph 4(b)(xi) and (xii) of Schedule 10 is provided by Y to the test provider or, where appropriate, Y provides their own telephone number and email address to the test provider.\n- (5) At the time the test is booked and payment made the test provider gives P a test reference number in the format specified in sub-paragraph (6) and, where appropriate, also provides that test reference number to Y.\n- (6) A test reference number must consist of 12 characters comprising 5 letters followed by 7 digits.\n\n## Notification of test results\n\n- 11. -(1) This paragraph applies to a private provider who administers or provides a test to P in the circumstances described in paragraph 10.\n- (2) The private provider must, within 24 hours of the result becoming available-\n- (a) notify P or, where paragraph 10(4) applies, Y by email, letter, or text message, of the result of P's test; or\n- (b) make P's test result available to P, or where paragraph 10(4) applies, to Y via a secure web portal,\n\nin accordance with sub-paragraph (3).\n\n- (3) The notification of P's test result must include P's name, date of birth, passport number, or travel document reference number (as appropriate), the name and contact details of the test provider and P's test reference number, and must be conveyed using one of the following forms of words, as appropriate-\n\n## Form A: negative test result\n\nYour coronavirus (COVID-19) test result is negative. You did not have the virus when the test was done.\n\nYou are not required to quarantine if you are travelling from a green-list country. If you are travelling from an amber list country and took the test on or before day 2 of your quarantine you must continue to quarantine until you have completed the 10-day quarantine period and received a negative test result for a test taken on day 8. If you took the test on day 8 and are travelling from an amber-list country you may stop quarantine when you have completed your 10-day quarantine period.\n\n## You should self-isolate again if:\n\nyou get symptoms of coronavirus (COVID-19) - get an NHS coronavirus (COVID-19) test from www.gov.uk/get-coronavirus-test and self-isolate until you get the results\n\nyou're going into hospital (self-isolating until the date you go in)\n\nsomeone you live with tests positive\n\n65", + "recall": 0.9483568075117371, + "true_md": "- (b) their home address, and— \n\n- (i) where P is a person to whom regulation 9(1)(a) or (b) applies, the address or addresses at which they intend to self-isolate, or are self-isolating, in accordance with regulation 9 (if different from their home address), or \n\n- (ii) where P is a person to whom regulation 10 applies, the address of the accommodation designated for the purposes of Schedule 11. \n\n- (a) the notification and information set out or referred to in sub-paragraph (3), other than the information set out in paragraph 4(b)(xi) and (xii) of Schedule 10, is provided to the test provider on P’s behalf by another person (“Y”); and \n\n- (b) either the information set out in paragraph 4(b)(xi) and (xii) of Schedule 10 is provided by Y to the test provider or, where appropriate, Y provides their own telephone number and email address to the test provider. \n\n- (a) notify P or, where paragraph 10(4) applies, Y by email, letter, or text message, of the result of P’s test; or \n\n- (b) make P’s test result available to P, or where paragraph 10(4) applies, to Y via a secure web portal, \n\n(4) Where P is a child, or a person with a disability who is unable for that reason to provide the notification and information set out or referred to in sub-paragraph (3) to the test provider— \n\n(5) At the time the test is booked and payment made the test provider gives P a test reference number in the format specified in sub-paragraph (6) and, where appropriate, also provides that test reference number to Y. \n\n(6) A test reference number must consist of 12 characters comprising 5 letters followed by 7 digits. \n\n11. —(1) This paragraph applies to a private provider who administers or provides a test to P in the circumstances described in paragraph 10. \n\n(2) The private provider must, within 24 hours of the result becoming available— \n\nin accordance with sub-paragraph (3). \n\n(3) The notification of P’s test result must include P’s name, date of birth, passport number, or travel document reference number (as appropriate), the name and contact details of the test provider and P’s test reference number, and must be conveyed using one of the following forms of words, as appropriate— \n\nYour coronavirus (COVID-19) test result is negative. You did not have the virus when the test was done. \n\nYou are not required to quarantine if you are travelling from a green-list country. If you are travelling from an amber list country and took the test on or before day 2 of your quarantine you must continue to quarantine until you have completed the 10-day quarantine period and received a negative test result for a test taken on day 8. If you took the test on day 8 and are travelling from an amber-list country you may stop quarantine when you have completed your 10-day quarantine period. \n\nYou should self-isolate again if: \n\nyou get symptoms of coronavirus (COVID-19) – get an NHS coronavirus (COVID-19) test from www.gov.uk/get-coronavirus-test and self-isolate until you get the results \n\nyou’re going into hospital (self-isolating until the date you go in) \n\nsomeone you live with tests positive \n\n## Form A: negative test result\n\n## Notification of test results\n\n65" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.17438110183518032, + "doc_id": "f0855c0c64977d2c461a4abbc949dafcebbda10a43d30c104147b3a60f94922e", + "edit_distance": 0.8325688073394495, + "f1_score": 0.5529411764705883, + "meteor": 0.6110266238189939, + "precision": 0.3821138211382114, + "pred_md": "## S T A T U T O R Y I N S T R U M E N T S\n\n## 2021 No. 582\n\n## PUBLIC HEALTH, ENGLAND\n\nThe Health Protection (Coronavirus, International Travel and Operator Liability) (England) Regulations 2021\n\nMade\n\n-\n\n-\n\n-\n\n-\n\nat 10.32 a.m. on 14th May 2021\n\nLaid before Parliament\n\nat 2.30 p.m. on 14th May 2021\n\nComing into force\n\n- -\n\nat 4.00 a.m. on 17th May 2021\n\n## CONTENTS\n\n## PART 1\n\n## Introductory\n\n| 1. | Citation, commencement, extent and application | 3 |\n|---------------------------------------------|----------------------------------------------------------------------------|---------------------------------------------|\n| 2. | Interpretation and introduction of Schedules 1 to 4 | 3 |\n| PART 2 | PART 2 | PART 2 |\n| Requirements on persons arriving in England | Requirements on persons arriving in England | Requirements on persons arriving in England |\n| 3. | Requirement on passengers to provide information | 5 |\n| 4. | Requirement to possess notification of negative test result | 6 |\n| 5. | Requirements relating to tests | 7 |\n| 6. | Requirement to book and undertake tests | 9 |\n| 7. | Requirement to undertake workforce tests | 10 |\n| 8. | Test requirements: offshore installation workers | 12 |\n| 9. | Further requirements on arrivals from category 2 countries and territories | 13 |\n| 10. | Further requirements on arrivals from category 3 countries or territories | 17 |\n| PART 3 | PART 3 | PART 3 |\n| Enforcement | Enforcement | Enforcement |\n| 11. | Enforcement of requirement to self-isolate | 17 |\n| 12. | Power of entry | 19 |\n| PART 4 | PART 4 | PART 4 |\n| Requirements on operators | Requirements on operators | Requirements on operators |\n| 13. | Passenger information requirement | 19 |\n| 14. | Required information and manner | 20 |", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "S T A T U T O R Y I N S T R U M E N T S\n\n# 2021 No. 582\n\n# PUBLIC HEALTH, ENGLAND\n\nThe Health Protection (Coronavirus, International Travel and Operator Liability) (England) Regulations 2021 \n\n## CONTENTS\n\n## PART 1\n\n## Introductory\n\n## PART 2\n\n## Requirements on persons arriving in England\n\n## PART 3\n\n## Enforcement\n\n## PART 4\n\n## Requirements on operators" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9239359470726244, + "doc_id": "876f3a29c5313f0090e8bf5efc193d927818247a8d24b567fbe81b522d3b4ac3", + "edit_distance": 0.23718887262079064, + "f1_score": 0.9533169533169533, + "meteor": 0.8816934025553601, + "precision": 0.9603960396039604, + "pred_md": "- (i) a sensitivity of at least 80%,\n- (ii) a specificity of at least 97%, and\n- (iii) a limit of detection of less than or equal to 100,000 SARS-CoV-2 copies per millilitre;\n- (b) it is not a test provided or administered under the National Health Service Act 2006, the National Health Services (Wales) Act 2006, the National Health Service (Scotland) Act 1978, or the Health and Personal Social Services (Northern Ireland) Order 1972; and\n- (c) the test sample is taken from the person no more than three days before-\n- (i) in the case of that person travelling to England on a commercial transport service, the service's scheduled time of departure, or\n- (ii) in any other case, the actual time of departure of the vessel or aircraft on which that person is travelling to England.\n\n## Form of notification of negative result\n\n- 2. Notification of a negative test result must include, in English, French or Spanish, the following information-\n- (a) the name of the person from whom the sample was taken;\n- (b) that person's date of birth or age;\n- (c) the negative result of the test;\n- (d) the date the test sample was collected or received by the test provider;\n- (e) the name of the test provider and information sufficient to contact that provider;\n- (f) a statement-\n- (i) that the test was a polymerase chain reaction test, or\n- (ii) of the name of the device that was used for the test.\n\n## Persons not required to comply with regulation 4\n\n- 3. -(1) The persons referred to in regulation 4(6)(c) (and not required to comply with that regulation) are-\n- (a) a person ('P') described in-\n- (i) paragraph 16(1)(b) of Schedule 4 where, prior to P's departure to the United Kingdom, the relevant Department has certified that they meet this description and are not required to comply with regulation 4, or\n- (ii) paragraph 17 of Schedule 4 where, prior to P's departure to the United Kingdom, the relevant Department has also certified that they are not required to comply with regulation 4;\n- (b) a Crown servant or government contractor ('C') who is required to undertake essential policing or essential government work in the United Kingdom or is returning from conducting such work outside the United Kingdom where, prior to C's departure to the United Kingdom, the relevant Department has certified that they meet this description and are not required to comply with regulation 4;\n- (c) a representative ('R') of a foreign country or territory, or of the government of a British overseas territory, travelling to the United Kingdom to conduct official business with the United Kingdom where, prior to R's departure to the United Kingdom-\n- (i) the relevant head of the mission, consular post, or office representing a foreign territory in the United Kingdom, or a Governor of a British overseas territory (as the case may be), or a person acting on their authority, confirms in writing to the Foreign Commonwealth and Development Office that R is required to undertake work which is essential to the foreign country represented by the mission or consular post, the foreign territory represented by the office or the British overseas territory, and\n\n57", + "recall": 0.9463414634146341, + "true_md": "- (i) a sensitivity of at least 80%, \n\n- (ii) a specificity of at least 97%, and \n\n- (iii) a limit of detection of less than or equal to 100,000 SARS-CoV-2 copies per millilitre; \n\n- (b) it is not a test provided or administered under the National Health Service Act 2006, the National Health Services (Wales) Act 2006, the National Health Service (Scotland) Act 1978, or the Health and Personal Social Services (Northern Ireland) Order 1972; and \n\n- (c) the test sample is taken from the person no more than three days before— \n\n- (i) in the case of that person travelling to England on a commercial transport service, the service’s scheduled time of departure, or \n\n- (ii) in any other case, the actual time of departure of the vessel or aircraft on which that person is travelling to England. \n\n- (a) the name of the person from whom the sample was taken; \n\n- (b) that person’s date of birth or age; \n\n- (c) the negative result of the test; \n\n- (d) the date the test sample was collected or received by the test provider; \n\n- (e) the name of the test provider and information sufficient to contact that provider; \n\n- (f) a statement— \n\n- (i) that the test was a polymerase chain reaction test, or \n\n- (ii) of the name of the device that was used for the test. \n\n- (a) a person (“P”) described in— \n\n- (i) paragraph 16(1)(b) of Schedule 4 where, prior to P’s departure to the United Kingdom, the relevant Department has certified that they meet this description and are not required to comply with regulation 4, or \n\n- (ii) paragraph 17 of Schedule 4 where, prior to P’s departure to the United Kingdom, the relevant Department has also certified that they are not required to comply with regulation 4; \n\n- (b) a Crown servant or government contractor (“C”) who is required to undertake essential policing or essential government work in the United Kingdom or is returning from conducting such work outside the United Kingdom where, prior to C’s departure to the United Kingdom, the relevant Department has certified that they meet this description and are not required to comply with regulation 4; \n\n- (c) a representative (“R”) of a foreign country or territory, or of the government of a British overseas territory, travelling to the United Kingdom to conduct official business with the United Kingdom where, prior to R’s departure to the United Kingdom— \n\n- (i) the relevant head of the mission, consular post, or office representing a foreign territory in the United Kingdom, or a Governor of a British overseas territory (as the case may be), or a person acting on their authority, confirms in writing to the Foreign Commonwealth and Development Office that R is required to undertake work which is essential to the foreign country represented by the mission or consular post, the foreign territory represented by the office or the British overseas territory, and \n\n57\n\n## Persons not required to comply with regulation 4\n\n## Form of notification of negative result\n\n2. Notification of a negative test result must include, in English, French or Spanish, the following information— \n\n3. —(1) The persons referred to in regulation 4(6)(c) (and not required to comply with that regulation) are—" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9317984510714976, + "doc_id": "182ccde0bf426225735e4885e2cba589cb58c7d4908d1305797926c99f40e60a", + "edit_distance": 0.5777439024390244, + "f1_score": 0.9432624113475178, + "meteor": 0.7051742873698216, + "precision": 0.95, + "pred_md": "- (b) B undertook a day 2 test that generated a positive result.\n- (4) Subject to paragraph 4, where P's day 2 test and day 8 test both generate a negative result, P must continue to self-isolate in accordance with the relevant self-isolation provisions until the later of-\n- (a) the end of the default self-isolation period;\n- (b) the day on which P receives the result of their day 8 test.\n- (5) Where a mandatory test undertaken by P generates an inconclusive result P must continue to self-isolate in accordance with the relevant self-isolation provisions-\n- (a) until the end of the 10th day after the day P undertook the test;\n- (b) where P undertakes a test to which sub-paragraph (7) applies and the test generates a negative result, until the later of-\n- (i) the end of the default self-isolation period,\n- (ii) the day on which P receives the negative result; or\n- (c) where P undertakes a test to which sub-paragraph (7) applies and the test generates a positive result, until the end of the 10th day after the day P undertook the test.\n- (6) Where sub-paragraph (5)(c) applies, P is not required to undertake a day 8 test in accordance with regulation 6.\n- (7) This sub-paragraph applies to-\n- (a) a day 8 test;\n- (b) a test-\n- (i) complying with the requirements for a day 8 test specified in paragraphs 8 and 9 (other than the requirement in paragraph 9(1)(e) that the test be administered or provided to P no earlier than the end of the seventh day after the day on which P arrived in England),\n- (ii) undertaken in the circumstances specified in paragraph 10 (other than the circumstances in paragraph 10(2) about when a test must be undertaken), and\n- (iii) undertaken during the period specified in sub-paragraph (5)(a).\n\n## Optional tests\n\n- 4. -(1) This paragraph applies where P-\n- (a) is a non-Schedule 11 passenger who is required to comply with regulation 9, and\n- (b) undertakes a day 2 test which generates a negative or inconclusive result.\n- (2) P may undertake a test in accordance with Schedule 10 (optional testing after arrival in England), and, where the test generates a negative result, P ceases to be required to self-isolate from the time that P is notified of that result.\n- (3) P must in any event undertake the day 8 test booked in accordance with regulation 6.\n- (4) Where P ceases to be required to self-isolate under these Regulations in accordance with regulation 9(16), paragraph 3(1), (4) and (5) do not apply in relation to P's day 8 test.\n\n## Tests other than in accordance with these Regulations\n\n- 5. -(1) This paragraph applies where-\n- (a) P is a non-Schedule 11 passenger;\n- (b) P undertakes a day 2 test which generates a negative result;\n- (c) while P is self-isolating under these Regulations, P subsequently undertakes a test other than in accordance with these Regulations; and\n- (d) P is notified that such test generates a positive result.\n\n60", + "recall": 0.9366197183098591, + "true_md": "- (b) B undertook a day 2 test that generated a positive result. \n\n- (a) the end of the default self-isolation period; \n\n- (b) the day on which P receives the result of their day 8 test. \n\n- (a) until the end of the 10th day after the day P undertook the test; \n\n- (b) where P undertakes a test to which sub-paragraph (7) applies and the test generates a negative result, until the later of— \n\n- (i) the end of the default self-isolation period, \n\n- (ii) the day on which P receives the negative result; or \n\n- (c) where P undertakes a test to which sub-paragraph (7) applies and the test generates a positive result, until the end of the 10th day after the day P undertook the test. \n\n- (a) a day 8 test; \n\n- (b) a test— \n\n- (i) complying with the requirements for a day 8 test specified in paragraphs 8 and 9 (other than the requirement in paragraph 9(1)(e) that the test be administered or provided to P no earlier than the end of the seventh day after the day on which P arrived in England), \n\n- (ii) undertaken in the circumstances specified in paragraph 10 (other than the circumstances in paragraph 10(2) about when a test must be undertaken), and \n\n- (iii) undertaken during the period specified in sub-paragraph (5)(a). \n\n- (a) is a non-Schedule 11 passenger who is required to comply with regulation 9, and \n\n- (b) undertakes a day 2 test which generates a negative or inconclusive result. \n\n- (a) P is a non-Schedule 11 passenger; \n\n- (b) P undertakes a day 2 test which generates a negative result; \n\n- (c) while P is self-isolating under these Regulations, P subsequently undertakes a test other than in accordance with these Regulations; and \n\n- (d) P is notified that such test generates a positive result. \n\n60\n\n(4) Subject to paragraph 4, where P’s day 2 test and day 8 test both generate a negative result, P must continue to self-isolate in accordance with the relevant self-isolation provisions until the later of— \n\n(5) Where a mandatory test undertaken by P generates an inconclusive result P must continue to self-isolate in accordance with the relevant self-isolation provisions— \n\n(6) Where sub-paragraph (5)(c) applies, P is not required to undertake a day 8 test in accordance with regulation 6. \n\n(7) This sub-paragraph applies to— \n\n4. —(1) This paragraph applies where P— \n\n(2) P may undertake a test in accordance with Schedule 10 (optional testing after arrival in England), and, where the test generates a negative result, P ceases to be required to self-isolate from the time that P is notified of that result. \n\n(3) P must in any event undertake the day 8 test booked in accordance with regulation 6. \n\n(4) Where P ceases to be required to self-isolate under these Regulations in accordance with regulation 9(16), paragraph 3(1), (4) and (5) do not apply in relation to P’s day 8 test. \n\n5. —(1) This paragraph applies where— \n\n## Tests other than in accordance with these Regulations\n\n## Optional tests" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8058954790682747, + "doc_id": "fb65b36bda58f6cdbb27343a966e5c61ac586a0a8cdf3c68569c3e8b0539ca73", + "edit_distance": 0.288135593220339, + "f1_score": 0.9693877551020407, + "meteor": 0.928226709460569, + "precision": 0.9595959595959596, + "pred_md": "## S T A T U T O R Y I N S T R U M E N T S\n\n## 2021 No. 522\n\n## EDUCATION, ENGLAND\n\n## CHILDREN AND YOUNG PERSONS, ENGLAND\n\nThe Inspectors of Education, Children's Services and Skills (No. 2) Order 2021\n\nMade\n\n-\n\n-\n\n-\n\n-\n\n28th April 2021\n\nComing into force\n\n-\n\n-\n\n29th April 2021\n\nAt the Court at Windsor Castle, the 28th day of April 2021\n\nPresent,\n\nThe Queen's Most Excellent Majesty in Council\n\nHer Majesty, in exercise of the powers conferred by section 114(1) of the Education and Inspections Act 2006( a ), is pleased, by and with the advice of Her Privy Council, to order as follows:\n\n## Citation and commencement\n\n1. This Order may be cited as the Inspectors of Education, Children's Services and Skills (No. 2) Order 2021 and comes into force on 29th April 2021.\n\n## Appointment of Her Majesty's Inspectors of Education, Children's Services and Skills\n\n2. The persons named in the Schedule to this Order are appointed as Her Majesty's Inspectors of Education, Children's Services and Skills.\n\nRichard Tilbrook Clerk of the Privy Council\n\n( a ) 2006 c.40.", + "recall": 0.979381443298969, + "true_md": "S T A T U T O R Y I N S T R U M E N T S\n\n# 2021 No. 522\n\n# EDUCATION, ENGLAND\n\n# CHILDREN AND YOUNG PERSONS, ENGLAND\n\nThe Inspectors of Education, Children’s Services and Skills (No. 2) Order 2021 \n\nAt the Court at Windsor Castle, the 28th day of April 2021 \n\nPresent, \n\nThe Queen’s Most Excellent Majesty in Council \n\nHer Majesty, in exercise of the powers conferred by section 114(1) of the Education and Inspections Act 2006( a ), is pleased, by and with the advice of Her Privy Council, to order as follows: \n\n1. This Order may be cited as the Inspectors of Education, Children’s Services and Skills (No. 2) Order 2021 and comes into force on 29th April 2021. \n\n2. The persons named in the Schedule to this Order are appointed as Her Majesty’s Inspectors of Education, Children’s Services and Skills. \n\n## Citation and commencement\n\n## Appointment of Her Majesty’s Inspectors of Education, Children’s Services and Skills\n\nRichard Tilbrook Clerk of the Privy Council \n\n( a ) 2006 c.40." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.935272817989051, + "doc_id": "a1ff21677d115c8aaacb6a2f0e795213b4183bcf9d7dad3aedcf90b595e5207f", + "edit_distance": 0.043121149897330596, + "f1_score": 0.9750692520775622, + "meteor": 0.9557415798536945, + "precision": 0.9777777777777777, + "pred_md": "## EXPLANATORY NOTE\n\n(This note is not part of the Regulations)\n\nThese Regulations make amendments to secondary legislation relating to special educational needs and disability in order to provide exceptions to time limits set out in that legislation where they cannot be met because of a reason relating to the incidence or transmission of coronavirus.\n\nRegulation 2 contains review and expiry provisions. The Secretary of State is required to review the effectiveness of the Regulations during the period in which they have effect. The Regulations cease to have effect on 25th September 2020.\n\nRegulations 3 to 14 amend the Special Educational Needs and Disability Regulations 2014 ('the SEND Regulations 2014').\n\nRegulation 5 inserts a glossing provision into the SEND Regulations 2014 which relaxes certain requirements in those Regulations for actions to be taken within specified time limits where it is not reasonably practicable for a person to meet those requirements for a reason relating to the incidence or transmission of coronavirus. Instead, any such requirement is to be read as a requirement for such action to be taken as soon as reasonably practicable.\n\nRegulations 6 to 14 make textual amendments to the SEND Regulations 2014 to relax time limits.\n\nRegulations 15 to 17 amend the Special Educational Needs (Personal Budgets) Regulations 2014 ('the Personal Budgets Regulations 2014').\n\nRegulation 17 inserts a similar glossing provision into the Personal Budgets Regulations 2014 as regulation 5 does in respect of the SEND Regulations 2014.\n\nRegulations 18 to 27 amend the Special Educational Needs and Disability (Detained Persons) Regulations 2015 ('the Detained Persons Regulations 2015').\n\nRegulation 20 inserts a glossing provision into the Detained Persons Regulations 2015 similar to the ones in regulations 5 and 17 in relation to the SEND Regulations 2014 and the Personal Budgets Regulations 2014 respectively.\n\nRegulations 21 to 27 make textual amendments to the Detained Persons Regulations 2015 to relax time limits.\n\nRegulations 28 to 30 amend the Special Educational Needs and Disability (First-tier Tribunal Recommendations Power) Regulations 2017 ('the First-tier Tribunal Regulations 2017').\n\nRegulation 30 inserts a glossing provision into the First-tier Tribunal Regulations 2017 similar to those in regulations 5, 17 and 20.\n\nAn impact assessment has not been produced for this instrument as this is a temporary, emergency measure and no significant impact on business, charities or voluntary bodies is foreseen.\n\nAn Explanatory Memorandum is published alongside this instrument on www.legislation.gov.uk.\n\n' Crown copyright 2020\n\nPrinted and published in the UK by The Stationery Office Limited under the authority and superintendence of Jeff James, Controller of Her Majesty's Stationery Office and Queen's Printer of Acts of Parliament.\n\n6", + "recall": 0.9723756906077348, + "true_md": "## EXPLANATORY NOTE\n\n## (This note is not part of the Regulations)\n\nThese Regulations make amendments to secondary legislation relating to special educational needs and disability in order to provide exceptions to time limits set out in that legislation where they cannot be met because of a reason relating to the incidence or transmission of coronavirus. \n\nRegulation 2 contains review and expiry provisions. The Secretary of State is required to review the effectiveness of the Regulations during the period in which they have effect. The Regulations cease to have effect on 25th September 2020. \n\nRegulations 3 to 14 amend the Special Educational Needs and Disability Regulations 2014 (‘the SEND Regulations 2014’). \n\nRegulation 5 inserts a glossing provision into the SEND Regulations 2014 which relaxes certain requirements in those Regulations for actions to be taken within specified time limits where it is not reasonably practicable for a person to meet those requirements for a reason relating to the incidence or transmission of coronavirus. Instead, any such requirement is to be read as a requirement for such action to be taken as soon as reasonably practicable. \n\nRegulations 6 to 14 make textual amendments to the SEND Regulations 2014 to relax time limits. \n\nRegulations 15 to 17 amend the Special Educational Needs (Personal Budgets) Regulations 2014 (‘the Personal Budgets Regulations 2014’). \n\nRegulation 17 inserts a similar glossing provision into the Personal Budgets Regulations 2014 as regulation 5 does in respect of the SEND Regulations 2014. \n\nRegulations 18 to 27 amend the Special Educational Needs and Disability (Detained Persons) Regulations 2015 (‘the Detained Persons Regulations 2015’). \n\nRegulation 20 inserts a glossing provision into the Detained Persons Regulations 2015 similar to the ones in regulations 5 and 17 in relation to the SEND Regulations 2014 and the Personal Budgets Regulations 2014 respectively. \n\nRegulations 21 to 27 make textual amendments to the Detained Persons Regulations 2015 to relax time limits. \n\nRegulations 28 to 30 amend the Special Educational Needs and Disability (First-tier Tribunal Recommendations Power) Regulations 2017 (‘the First-tier Tribunal Regulations 2017’). \n\nRegulation 30 inserts a glossing provision into the First-tier Tribunal Regulations 2017 similar to those in regulations 5, 17 and 20. \n\nAn impact assessment has not been produced for this instrument as this is a temporary, emergency measure and no significant impact on business, charities or voluntary bodies is foreseen. \n\nAn Explanatory Memorandum is published alongside this instrument on www.legislation.gov.uk. \n\n© Crown copyright 2020 \n\nPrinted and published in the UK by The Stationery Office Limited under the authority and superintendence of Jeff James, Controller of Her Majesty’s Stationery Office and Queen’s Printer of Acts of Parliament. \n\n6" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9280264951746376, + "doc_id": "a4b61d2b2bcc4faae97aeb3ba401e3fda6cf50dda8d04e340ce957c1cb4a9183", + "edit_distance": 0.5423728813559322, + "f1_score": 0.9590361445783133, + "meteor": 0.8758282342744376, + "precision": 0.961352657004831, + "pred_md": "- (d) to visit a person ('D') whom P reasonably believes is dying, and where P is a member of D's household or a close family member or friend of D;\n- (e) to attend the funeral of a member of P's household or a close family member;\n- (f) in other exceptional circumstances such as-\n- (i) to seek medical assistance where this is required urgently or on the advice of a registered medical practitioner including to access services from dentists, opticians, audiologists, chiropodists, chiropractors, osteopaths and other medical and health practitioners, including services relating to mental health,\n- (ii) to access critical public services including social services or services provided to victims (such as victims of crime),\n- (iii) to avoid injury or illness or to escape risk of harm,\n- (iv) to access veterinary services where this is required urgently or on the advice of a veterinary surgeon.\n- (2) P may only leave or be outside of the place where P is self-isolating in reliance on the grounds mentioned in sub-paragraph (1)(c), (d) or (e)-\n- (a) if P has been given prior permission by a person authorised by the Secretary of State for this purpose;\n- (b) if P complies with any reasonable requirements imposed by the person so authorised in relation to the exercise, the visit to the person or attendance at the funeral.\n\n## Meaning of 'place'\n\n14. For the purposes of this Schedule the place referred to in paragraphs 8 to 13 means the room in the designated accommodation where P is staying and, if connected to the room where P is staying, the room of any person referred to in paragraph 11(a) (travelling companion), including any balcony, and does not include the communal areas or any garden, yard, passage, stair, garage, outhouse or appurtenance of the accommodation in which the place is situated.\n\n## Designations\n\n15. The Secretary of State must designate for the purposes of this Schedule-\n\n- (a) accommodation;\n- (b) transportation to the designated accommodation,\n\nand must publish details of the designations in such manner as appears to the Secretary of State to be appropriate.\n\n## Duties where P is a child\n\n16. If P is a child-\n\n- (a) any person who has custody or charge of P when P is travelling to England must ensure, so far as is reasonably practicable, that P complies with the obligations in paragraphs 5 and 6;\n- (b) any person who has custody or charge of P during P's period of self-isolation must ensure, so far as is reasonably practicable, that P self-isolates in accordance with this Schedule.\n\n## Person caring for P\n\n- 17. A person may reside in the place where P is residing pursuant to this Schedule to provide assistance P reasonably requires by reason of-\n- (a) P being a child; or\n- (b) any disability of P's,\n\n78", + "recall": 0.9567307692307693, + "true_md": "- (d) to visit a person (“D”) whom P reasonably believes is dying, and where P is a member of D’s household or a close family member or friend of D; \n\n- (e) to attend the funeral of a member of P’s household or a close family member; \n\n- (f) in other exceptional circumstances such as— \n\n- (i) to seek medical assistance where this is required urgently or on the advice of a registered medical practitioner including to access services from dentists, opticians, audiologists, chiropodists, chiropractors, osteopaths and other medical and health practitioners, including services relating to mental health, \n\n- (ii) to access critical public services including social services or services provided to victims (such as victims of crime), \n\n- (iii) to avoid injury or illness or to escape risk of harm, \n\n- (iv) to access veterinary services where this is required urgently or on the advice of a veterinary surgeon. \n\n- (a) if P has been given prior permission by a person authorised by the Secretary of State for this purpose; \n\n- (b) if P complies with any reasonable requirements imposed by the person so authorised in relation to the exercise, the visit to the person or attendance at the funeral. \n\n- (a) accommodation; \n\n- (b) transportation to the designated accommodation, \n\n- (a) any person who has custody or charge of P when P is travelling to England must ensure, so far as is reasonably practicable, that P complies with the obligations in paragraphs 5 and 6; \n\n- (b) any person who has custody or charge of P during P’s period of self-isolation must ensure, so far as is reasonably practicable, that P self-isolates in accordance with this Schedule. \n\n- (a) P being a child; or \n\n- (b) any disability of P’s, \n\n(2) P may only leave or be outside of the place where P is self-isolating in reliance on the grounds mentioned in sub-paragraph (1)(c), (d) or (e)— \n\n14. For the purposes of this Schedule the place referred to in paragraphs 8 to 13 means the room in the designated accommodation where P is staying and, if connected to the room where P is staying, the room of any person referred to in paragraph 11(a) (travelling companion), including any balcony, and does not include the communal areas or any garden, yard, passage, stair, garage, outhouse or appurtenance of the accommodation in which the place is situated. \n\n15. The Secretary of State must designate for the purposes of this Schedule— \n\nand must publish details of the designations in such manner as appears to the Secretary of State to be appropriate. \n\n16. If P is a child— \n\n## Duties where P is a child\n\n## Designations\n\n## Meaning of “place”\n\n## Person caring for P\n\n17. A person may reside in the place where P is residing pursuant to this Schedule to provide assistance P reasonably requires by reason of— \n\n78" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9053608235955447, + "doc_id": "c03fd365f68ea07a528c91edd91ee032b3a1a5ecef8c846799e061ad0314284b", + "edit_distance": 0.2638888888888889, + "f1_score": 0.9307692307692308, + "meteor": 0.8984421536384595, + "precision": 0.9307692307692308, + "pred_md": "## Test requirements: offshore installation workers\n\n- 8. -(1) This regulation applies to a person ('P') to whom regulation 5(4) applies.\n- (2) P must undertake a day 2 test after arriving in England but before P departs to the offshore installation.\n- (3) If P intends to depart to the offshore installation before P has received the result of the day 2 test undertaken pursuant to paragraph (2), P must also take a workforce test before P departs to the offshore installation.\n- (4) If a workforce test undertaken pursuant to paragraph (3) generates a positive result P must self-isolate in accordance with regulation 2 of the Self-Isolation Regulations until P has received the result of the day 2 test undertaken pursuant to paragraph (2).\n- (5) If the day 2 test undertaken pursuant to paragraph (2) generates a positive result P must selfisolate in accordance with regulation 2 of the Self-Isolation Regulations until the end of the 10th day after P undertook that test.\n- (6) If the day 2 test undertaken pursuant to paragraph (2) generates a negative result, from the time that P is notified of that result, P is no longer subject to any requirement to self-isolate by virtue of paragraph (4).\n- (7) Subject to paragraph (8), while P is on an offshore installation, P must undertake a workforce test before the end of the third day following the day P arrives on the installation and then within each successive 3 day period within 3 days of the test most recently taken.\n- (8) P is not required to undertake any workforce test after the 10th day after the day P arrived in England.\n- (9) If a workforce test undertaken pursuant to paragraph (7) generates a positive result, P must-\n- (a) undertake a day 2 test as soon as reasonably practicable; and\n- (b) self-isolate in accordance with regulation 2 of the Self-Isolation Regulations until the earlier of-\n- (i) the time P is notified of the result of the day 2 test undertaken pursuant to subparagraph (a), or\n- (ii) the end of the 10th day after the day P arrived in England.\n- (10) If a day 2 test undertaken pursuant to paragraph (9)(a) generates a positive result, P must self-isolate in accordance with regulation 2 of the Self-Isolation Regulations until the 10th day after the day P undertook that test.\n- (11) If a day 2 test undertaken pursuant to paragraph (9)(a) generates a negative result, from the time that P is notified of that result P is no longer subject to any requirement to self-isolate by virtue of paragraph (9)(b).\n- (12) If P returns to England from the offshore installation on or before the 8th day after the day P arrived in England, P must undertake a day 8 test on, or as soon as reasonably practicable after, the 8th day after P the day arrived in England.\n- (13) If the day 8 test undertaken pursuant to paragraph (12) generates a positive result, P must self-isolate in accordance with regulation 2 of the Self-Isolation Regulations until the end of the 10th day after P undertook that test.\n- (14) In this regulation-\n- 'day 2 test' has the same meaning as in regulation 6(12)(a);\n- 'day 8 test' has the same meaning as in regulation 6(12)(b);\n- 'offshore installation' has the same meaning as in paragraph 29 of Schedule 4;\n\n'workforce test' has the same meaning as in regulation 7(6)(b).\n\n12", + "recall": 0.9307692307692308, + "true_md": "## Test requirements: offshore installation workers\n\n8. —(1) This regulation applies to a person (“P”) to whom regulation 5(4) applies. \n\n(2) P must undertake a day 2 test after arriving in England but before P departs to the offshore installation. \n\n(3) If P intends to depart to the offshore installation before P has received the result of the day 2 test undertaken pursuant to paragraph (2), P must also take a workforce test before P departs to the offshore installation. \n\n(4) If a workforce test undertaken pursuant to paragraph (3) generates a positive result P must self-isolate in accordance with regulation 2 of the Self-Isolation Regulations until P has received the result of the day 2 test undertaken pursuant to paragraph (2). \n\n(5) If the day 2 test undertaken pursuant to paragraph (2) generates a positive result P must self- isolate in accordance with regulation 2 of the Self-Isolation Regulations until the end of the 10th day after P undertook that test. \n\n(6) If the day 2 test undertaken pursuant to paragraph (2) generates a negative result, from the time that P is notified of that result, P is no longer subject to any requirement to self-isolate by virtue of paragraph (4). \n\n(7) Subject to paragraph (8), while P is on an offshore installation, P must undertake a workforce test before the end of the third day following the day P arrives on the installation and then within each successive 3 day period within 3 days of the test most recently taken. \n\n(8) P is not required to undertake any workforce test after the 10th day after the day P arrived in England. \n\n(9) If a workforce test undertaken pursuant to paragraph (7) generates a positive result, P must— \n\n(10) If a day 2 test undertaken pursuant to paragraph (9)(a) generates a positive result, P must self-isolate in accordance with regulation 2 of the Self-Isolation Regulations until the 10th day after the day P undertook that test. \n\n(11) If a day 2 test undertaken pursuant to paragraph (9)(a) generates a negative result, from the time that P is notified of that result P is no longer subject to any requirement to self-isolate by virtue of paragraph (9)(b). \n\n(12) If P returns to England from the offshore installation on or before the 8th day after the day P arrived in England, P must undertake a day 8 test on, or as soon as reasonably practicable after, the 8th day after P the day arrived in England. \n\n(13) If the day 8 test undertaken pursuant to paragraph (12) generates a positive result, P must self-isolate in accordance with regulation 2 of the Self-Isolation Regulations until the end of the 10th day after P undertook that test. \n\n(14) In this regulation— \n\n“day 2 test” has the same meaning as in regulation 6(12)(a); \n\n“day 8 test” has the same meaning as in regulation 6(12)(b); \n\n“offshore installation” has the same meaning as in paragraph 29 of Schedule 4; \n\n“workforce test” has the same meaning as in regulation 7(6)(b). \n\n- (a) undertake a day 2 test as soon as reasonably practicable; and \n\n- (b) self-isolate in accordance with regulation 2 of the Self-Isolation Regulations until the earlier of— \n\n- (i) the time P is notified of the result of the day 2 test undertaken pursuant to sub- paragraph (a), or \n\n- (ii) the end of the 10th day after the day P arrived in England. \n\n12" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9561170533240115, + "doc_id": "7fb6f69720ea25b21bd542b37bade7287f2aa4db337e14b0b2dabc7e7790274c", + "edit_distance": 0.04654088050314465, + "f1_score": 0.9557109557109557, + "meteor": 0.9761817490834649, + "precision": 0.9534883720930233, + "pred_md": "- (5) P is also a relevant person if travelling with a person who is a relevant person by virtue of sub-paragraph (4), where it is necessary for P to care for that relevant person, and where the Secretary of State has confirmed in writing that this paragraph applies in relation to P and has not withdrawn that confirmation.\n- (6) P is also a relevant person if-\n- (a) P needs to visit a person ('D') whom P reasonably believes is dying, or where D is severely ill;\n- (b) P is a member of D's household or a close family member or friend of D;\n- (c) it would not be reasonably practicable for P to visit D if P were required to self-isolate in designated accommodation; and\n- (d) the Secretary of State has confirmed in writing that this paragraph applies in relation to P and has not withdrawn that confirmation.\n- (7) In this paragraph-\n- (a) 'boarding school' means a school or college, which-\n- (i) provides accommodation for its pupils or, as the case may be, students on its own premises, or\n- (ii) arranges accommodation for its pupils or students to be provided elsewhere (other than in connection with a residential trip away from the school);\n- (b) 'school' means-\n- (i) an alternative provision academy within the meaning of section 1C of the Academies Act 2010( a ),\n- (ii) a community, foundation or voluntary school or a community or foundation special school within the meaning of section 20 of the School Standards and Framework Act 1998( b ),\n- (iii) an independent school (as defined by section 463 of the Education Act 1996( c )) registered under section 95 of the Education and Skills Act 2008( d ),\n- (iv) a non-maintained special school (as defined in section 337A of the Education Act 1996( ), or e\n- (v) a pupil referral unit within the meaning of section 19(2B) of the Education Act 1996( ); f\n- (c) 'college' means-\n- (i) an institution within the further education sector within the meaning of section 91 of the Further and Higher Education Act 1992( g ), or\n- (ii) a 16 to 19 Academy within the meaning of section 1B of the Academies Act 2010( h ).\n\n( a ) 2010 c. 32; section 1C was inserted by section 53(7) of the Education Act 2011 (c. 21).\n\n( b ) 1998 c. 31; section 20 was amended by paragraph 95 of Schedule 21 to the Education Act 2002 (c. 32), paragraph 13 of Schedule 3 to the Education and Inspections Act 2006 (c. 40) and S.I. 2010/1158.\n\n( c ) 1996 c. 56; section 463 was substituted by section 172 of the Education Act 2002 and amended so far as relevant by paragraphs 1 and 43 of Schedule 3 to the Children and Families Act 2014 (c. 6) and S.I. 2010/1158\n\n( d ) 2008 c. 25\n\n( e ) 1996 c. 56; section 337A was substituted by section 142(1) of the Education and Skills Act 2008 (c. 25).\n\n( f ) Section 19(2B) was amended so far as relevant by section 47 of and Schedule 8 to the Education Act 1997, section 3 of and paragraph 1 of Schedule 3 and Schedule 4 to the Children, Schools and Families Act 2010, section 101 of the Education and Inspections Act 2006, S.I. 2007/1507 and S.I. 2010/1158.\n\n( g ) 1992 c. 13; section 91 was amended in so far as relevant by paragraph 42 of Schedule 9 and Schedule 11 to the Learning and Skills Act 2000 (c. 21), paragraph 13 of Schedule 8 to the apprenticeships, Skills, Children and Learning Act 2009 (c. 22) and by paragraphs 23 and 26 of Schedule 8 to the Higher Education and Research Act 2018 (c. 29).\n\n( h ) Section 1B was inserted by section 53(7) of the Education Act 2011.\n\n80", + "recall": 0.9579439252336449, + "true_md": "(5) P is also a relevant person if travelling with a person who is a relevant person by virtue of sub-paragraph (4), where it is necessary for P to care for that relevant person, and where the Secretary of State has confirmed in writing that this paragraph applies in relation to P and has not withdrawn that confirmation. \n\n(6) P is also a relevant person if— \n\n(7) In this paragraph— \n\n- (a) P needs to visit a person (“D”) whom P reasonably believes is dying, or where D is severely ill; \n\n- (b) P is a member of D’s household or a close family member or friend of D; \n\n- (c) it would not be reasonably practicable for P to visit D if P were required to self-isolate in designated accommodation; and \n\n- (d) the Secretary of State has confirmed in writing that this paragraph applies in relation to P and has not withdrawn that confirmation. \n\n- (a) “boarding school” means a school or college, which— \n\n- (i) provides accommodation for its pupils or, as the case may be, students on its own premises, or \n\n- (ii) arranges accommodation for its pupils or students to be provided elsewhere (other than in connection with a residential trip away from the school); \n\n- (b) “school” means— \n\n- (i) an alternative provision academy within the meaning of section 1C of the Academies Act 2010( a ), \n\n- (ii) a community, foundation or voluntary school or a community or foundation special school within the meaning of section 20 of the School Standards and Framework Act 1998( b ), \n\n- (iii) an independent school (as defined by section 463 of the Education Act 1996( c )) registered under section 95 of the Education and Skills Act 2008( d ), \n\n- (iv) a non-maintained special school (as defined in section 337A of the Education Act 1996( e ), or \n\n- (v) a pupil referral unit within the meaning of section 19(2B) of the Education Act 1996( f ); \n\n- (c) “college” means— \n\n- (i) an institution within the further education sector within the meaning of section 91 of the Further and Higher Education Act 1992( g ), or \n\n- (ii) a 16 to 19 Academy within the meaning of section 1B of the Academies Act 2010( h ). \n\n( a ) 2010 c. 32; section 1C was inserted by section 53(7) of the Education Act 2011 (c. 21). \n\n( b ) 1998 c. 31; section 20 was amended by paragraph 95 of Schedule 21 to the Education Act 2002 (c. 32), paragraph 13 of Schedule 3 to the Education and Inspections Act 2006 (c. 40) and S.I. 2010/1158. \n\n( c ) 1996 c. 56; section 463 was substituted by section 172 of the Education Act 2002 and amended so far as relevant by paragraphs 1 and 43 of Schedule 3 to the Children and Families Act 2014 (c. 6) and S.I. 2010/1158 \n\n( d ) 2008 c. 25 \n\n( e ) 1996 c. 56; section 337A was substituted by section 142(1) of the Education and Skills Act 2008 (c. 25). \n\n( f ) Section 19(2B) was amended so far as relevant by section 47 of and Schedule 8 to the Education Act 1997, section 3 of and paragraph 1 of Schedule 3 and Schedule 4 to the Children, Schools and Families Act 2010, section 101 of the Education and Inspections Act 2006, S.I. 2007/1507 and S.I. 2010/1158. \n\n( g ) 1992 c. 13; section 91 was amended in so far as relevant by paragraph 42 of Schedule 9 and Schedule 11 to the Learning and Skills Act 2000 (c. 21), paragraph 13 of Schedule 8 to the apprenticeships, Skills, Children and Learning Act 2009 (c. 22) and by paragraphs 23 and 26 of Schedule 8 to the Higher Education and Research Act 2018 (c. 29). \n\n( h ) Section 1B was inserted by section 53(7) of the Education Act 2011. \n\n80" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9864504626712929, + "doc_id": "24ba4ffa015e66bf62299976c0a75fdc74acb95c94cc269bd8fac1f2d747df7c", + "edit_distance": 0.4738562091503268, + "f1_score": 0.9953271028037385, + "meteor": 0.9470169039627236, + "precision": 0.9953271028037384, + "pred_md": "- (viii) paragraph 25 (chemical weapons inspectors),\n- (ix) paragraph 26 (space workers),\n- (x) paragraph 28 (oil workers),\n- (xi) paragraph 29 (offshore oil and gas workers) unless paragraph (4) applies to the person,\n- (xii) paragraph 31 (specialist technical workers),\n- (xiii) paragraph 32 (specialist waste management workers),\n- (xiv) paragraph 35 (medicines inspectors),\n- (xv) paragraph 36 (clinical trial conductors),\n- (xvi) paragraph 37 (clinical investigators),\n- (xvii) paragraph 38 (medical and veterinary specialists),\n- (xviii) paragraph 39 (infrastructure workers), or\n- (xix) paragraph 40 (communications operation workers).\n\n(2) In paragraph (1)(b), the reference to persons required to self-isolate under regulation 9 does not include anyone who may temporarily cease to self-isolate by virtue of regulation 9(15)(f)(ii), (15)(g)(ii), or (15)(i) (and accordingly regulation 6 does not apply to such persons).\n\n- (3) Regulation 7 (requirement to undertake workforce tests) applies to a person who is not required to self-isolate under regulation 9 by virtue of any sub-paragraph of regulation 9(15) and the following paragraphs of Schedule 4, or who may temporarily cease to self-isolate or whose obligation to self-isolate under that regulation is otherwise modified by virtue of those provisions-\n- (a) paragraph 2 (UK officials with border security duties);\n- (b) paragraph 3 (officials involved in essential defence activities);\n- (c) paragraph 6 (seamen and masters) other than seamen and masters of fishing vessels within the meaning of the Merchant Shipping Act 1995( a );\n- (d) paragraph 7 (pilots);\n- (e) paragraph 8 (inspectors and surveyors of ships);\n- (f) paragraph 9 (aircraft crew and pilots);\n- (g) paragraph 10 (international rail crew, passenger and freight operators);\n- (h) paragraph 13 (road haulage workers);\n- (i) paragraph 15 (Channel Tunnel system workers);\n- (j) paragraph 18 (repatriated prisoners);\n- (k) paragraph 19 (international prison escorts);\n- (l) paragraph 27 (aerospace engineers and aerospace workers);\n- (m) paragraph 34 (persons transporting human blood etc.); or\n- (n) paragraph 43 (seasonal agricultural workers).\n- (4) Regulation 7 also applies to a category 1 arrival who would have been a person to whom paragraph (3) applied if that person had arrived from a category 2 country or territory.\n- (5) Regulation 8 (test requirements: offshore installation workers) applies to a worker who falls within the description in paragraph 29(1)(a) of Schedule 4 who arrives in England and is required to undertake or commence activities on an offshore installation, including critical safety work on an offshore installation.\n\n( a ) 1995 c. 21.\n\n8", + "recall": 0.9953271028037384, + "true_md": "- (viii) paragraph 25 (chemical weapons inspectors), \n\n- (ix) paragraph 26 (space workers), \n\n- (x) paragraph 28 (oil workers), \n\n- (xi) paragraph 29 (offshore oil and gas workers) unless paragraph (4) applies to the person, \n\n- (xii) paragraph 31 (specialist technical workers), \n\n- (xiii) paragraph 32 (specialist waste management workers), \n\n- (xiv) paragraph 35 (medicines inspectors), \n\n- (xv) paragraph 36 (clinical trial conductors), \n\n- (xvi) paragraph 37 (clinical investigators), \n\n- (xvii) paragraph 38 (medical and veterinary specialists), \n\n- (xviii) paragraph 39 (infrastructure workers), or \n\n- (xix) paragraph 40 (communications operation workers). \n\n- (a) paragraph 2 (UK officials with border security duties); \n\n- (b) paragraph 3 (officials involved in essential defence activities); \n\n- (c) paragraph 6 (seamen and masters) other than seamen and masters of fishing vessels within the meaning of the Merchant Shipping Act 1995( a ); \n\n- (d) paragraph 7 (pilots); \n\n- (e) paragraph 8 (inspectors and surveyors of ships); \n\n- (f) paragraph 9 (aircraft crew and pilots); \n\n- (g) paragraph 10 (international rail crew, passenger and freight operators); \n\n- (h) paragraph 13 (road haulage workers); \n\n- (i) paragraph 15 (Channel Tunnel system workers); \n\n- (j) paragraph 18 (repatriated prisoners); \n\n- (k) paragraph 19 (international prison escorts); \n\n- (l) paragraph 27 (aerospace engineers and aerospace workers); \n\n- (m) paragraph 34 (persons transporting human blood etc.); or \n\n- (n) paragraph 43 (seasonal agricultural workers). \n\n(2) In paragraph (1)(b), the reference to persons required to self-isolate under regulation 9 does not include anyone who may temporarily cease to self-isolate by virtue of regulation 9(15)(f)(ii), (15)(g)(ii), or (15)(i) (and accordingly regulation 6 does not apply to such persons). \n\n(3) Regulation 7 (requirement to undertake workforce tests) applies to a person who is not required to self-isolate under regulation 9 by virtue of any sub-paragraph of regulation 9(15) and the following paragraphs of Schedule 4, or who may temporarily cease to self-isolate or whose obligation to self-isolate under that regulation is otherwise modified by virtue of those provisions— \n\n(4) Regulation 7 also applies to a category 1 arrival who would have been a person to whom paragraph (3) applied if that person had arrived from a category 2 country or territory. \n\n(5) Regulation 8 (test requirements: offshore installation workers) applies to a worker who falls within the description in paragraph 29(1)(a) of Schedule 4 who arrives in England and is required to undertake or commence activities on an offshore installation, including critical safety work on an offshore installation. \n\n( a ) 1995 c. 21. \n\n8" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9455961229783286, + "doc_id": "43cb40a368fcdb3bd85ea7c6a4e61d9f33589e22820cf38a1f821e8fdc2ca19e", + "edit_distance": 0.30945945945945946, + "f1_score": 0.9704142011834319, + "meteor": 0.9525175189061662, + "precision": 0.9647058823529412, + "pred_md": "- (iii) a limit of detection of less than or equal to 1000 SARS-CoV-2 copies per millilitre, and\n- (iv) uses an established molecular detection method;\n- (c) any device used for the purposes of the test-\n- (i) can be put into service in accordance with Part 4 of the Medical Devices Regulations 2002, other than solely by virtue of regulation 39(2) of those Regulations,\n- (ii) has been validated no more than 18 months before the test is administered or provided to P;\n- (d) it is not a test provided or administered under the National Health Service Act 2006, the National Health Service (Wales) Act 2006( a ), the National Health Service (Scotland) Act 1978( b ), or the Health and Personal Social Services (Northern Ireland) Order 1972( c ); and\n- (e) the test provider complies with paragraph 3.\n\n(2) For the purposes of sub-paragraph (1), 'validated', in relation to a device, means confirmed as having the required sensitivity and specificity using at least 150 positive clinical samples and 250 negative clinical samples against a laboratory-based RT-PCR test that is itself within the performance specification of the target product profile published by the Medicines and Healthcare Products Regulatory Agency for laboratory based SARS-CoV-2 PCR tests, by-\n\n- (a) the Secretary of State;\n- (b) a laboratory which is accredited to ISO standard 15189 or ISO/IEC standard 17025( d ) by-\n- (i) the United Kingdom Accreditation Service( e ) ('UKAS'), or\n- (ii) an accreditation body that is a signatory to the International Laboratory Accreditation Cooperation ('ILAC') Mutual Recognition Arrangement( ) or the European cof operation for Accreditation ('EA') Multilateral Agreement( g ),\n- other than a laboratory which processes tests provided by the test provider for the purposes of this Schedule or is owned by the test provider or the device manufacturer. ( h ); or\n- (c) a laboratory which is accredited by UKAS to ISO standard 15189 or ISO/IEC standard 17025( ), other than a laboratory which processes tests provided by the test provider for i the purposes of this Schedule or is owned by the test provider or the device manufacturer.\n\n( a ) 2006 c. 42.\n\n( b ) 1978 c. 29.\n\n( c ) S.I. 1972/1265 (N.I. 14).\n\n( d ) ISO standards are published in Geneva by the International Organisation for Standardisation, and are available on their website (www.iso.org) or at ISO Central Secretariat, International Organization for Standardization (ISO), 1 rue de VarembØ, Case postale 56, CH-1211, Geneva 20, Switzerland. ISO/IEC 17025 General requirements for the competence of testing and calibration laboratories was published in November 2017.\n\n( e ) The United Kingdom Accreditation Service is a company limited by guarantee incorporated in England and Wales under number 3076190.\n\n( f ) ILAC is an international organisation which coordinates the work of its signatory national accreditation bodies which are themselves involved in the accreditation of conformity assessment bodies, testing laboratories, and medical testing laboratories.\n\n( g ) EA is a regional organisation which coordinates the work of its signatory national accreditation bodies. EA is recognised by and works closely with ILAC.\n\n( h ) A body corporate established under section 232 of the Health and Social Care Act 2012 (c. 7).\n\n( ) i ISO standards are published in Geneva by the International Organisation for Standardisation, and are available on their website (www.iso.org) or at ISO Central Secretariat, International Organization for Standardization (ISO), 1 rue de VarembØ, Case postale 56, CH-1211, Geneva 20, Switzerland. ISO/IEC 17025 General requirements for the competence of testing and calibration laboratories was published in November 2017. ISO 15189 Medical Laboratories requirements for quality and competence was published in November 2012.\n\n69", + "recall": 0.9761904761904762, + "true_md": "- (iv) uses an established molecular detection method; \n\n- (c) any device used for the purposes of the test— \n\n- (i) can be put into service in accordance with Part 4 of the Medical Devices Regulations 2002, other than solely by virtue of regulation 39(2) of those Regulations, \n\n- (ii) has been validated no more than 18 months before the test is administered or provided to P; \n\n- (e) the test provider complies with paragraph 3. \n\n- (d) it is not a test provided or administered under the National Health Service Act 2006, the National Health Service (Wales) Act 2006( a ), the National Health Service (Scotland) Act 1978( b ), or the Health and Personal Social Services (Northern Ireland) Order 1972( c ); and \n\n- (iii) a limit of detection of less than or equal to 1000 SARS-CoV-2 copies per millilitre, and \n\n- (a) the Secretary of State; \n\n- (b) a laboratory which is accredited to ISO standard 15189 or ISO/IEC standard 17025( d ) by— \n\n- (i) the United Kingdom Accreditation Service( e ) (“UKAS”), or \n\n- (ii) an accreditation body that is a signatory to the International Laboratory Accreditation Cooperation (“ILAC”) Mutual Recognition Arrangement( f ) or the European co- operation for Accreditation (“EA”) Multilateral Agreement( g ), \n\n- (c) a laboratory which is accredited by UKAS to ISO standard 15189 or ISO/IEC standard 17025( i ), other than a laboratory which processes tests provided by the test provider for the purposes of this Schedule or is owned by the test provider or the device manufacturer. \n\n(2) For the purposes of sub-paragraph (1), “validated”, in relation to a device, means confirmed as having the required sensitivity and specificity using at least 150 positive clinical samples and 250 negative clinical samples against a laboratory-based RT-PCR test that is itself within the performance specification of the target product profile published by the Medicines and Healthcare Products Regulatory Agency for laboratory based SARS-CoV-2 PCR tests, by— \n\nother than a laboratory which processes tests provided by the test provider for the purposes of this Schedule or is owned by the test provider or the device manufacturer. ( h ); or \n\n( a ) 2006 c. 42. \n\n( b ) 1978 c. 29. \n\n( c ) S.I. 1972/1265 (N.I. 14). \n\n( d ) ISO standards are published in Geneva by the International Organisation for Standardisation, and are available on their website (www.iso.org) or at ISO Central Secretariat, International Organization for Standardization (ISO), 1 rue de Varembé, Case postale 56, CH-1211, Geneva 20, Switzerland. ISO/IEC 17025 General requirements for the competence of testing and calibration laboratories was published in November 2017. \n\n( e ) The United Kingdom Accreditation Service is a company limited by guarantee incorporated in England and Wales under number 3076190. \n\n( f ) ILAC is an international organisation which coordinates the work of its signatory national accreditation bodies which are themselves involved in the accreditation of conformity assessment bodies, testing laboratories, and medical testing laboratories. \n\n( g ) EA is a regional organisation which coordinates the work of its signatory national accreditation bodies. EA is recognised by and works closely with ILAC.\n\n( h ) A body corporate established under section 232 of the Health and Social Care Act 2012 (c. 7). \n\n( i ) ISO standards are published in Geneva by the International Organisation for Standardisation, and are available on their website (www.iso.org) or at ISO Central Secretariat, International Organization for Standardization (ISO), 1 rue de Varembé, Case postale 56, CH-1211, Geneva 20, Switzerland. ISO/IEC 17025 General requirements for the competence of testing and calibration laboratories was published in November 2017. ISO 15189 Medical Laboratories requirements for quality and competence was published in November 2012. \n\n69" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8926416047201122, + "doc_id": "889b4413c4e4f3760888bc26cb0c03196c366cfb0691931efa6bc758df4a138b", + "edit_distance": 0.2030716723549488, + "f1_score": 0.943127962085308, + "meteor": 0.9013693476952831, + "precision": 0.943127962085308, + "pred_md": "- (a) 'new account' means a financial account maintained by a reporting financial institution( a ) opened on or after 13th May 2020;\n- (b) 'pre-existing account' means-\n- (i) a financial account maintained by a reporting financial institution as of 12th May 2020, or\n- (ii) a financial account within Section VIII(C)(9)(b) of Annex 1 of the DAC( b ), but in the application of that provision the references to 'subparagraph C(9)(a)' are to be read as references to paragraph (i) of this sub-paragraph.\n- (4) The accounts are-\n- (a) non-registered pension arrangements where the annual contributions are limited to £50,000 and funds contributed cannot be accessed before the age of 55 except in circumstances of serious ill health;\n- (b) Premium Bonds issued by the UK National Savings and Investments;\n- (c) Fixed Interest Savings Certificates issued by the UK National Savings and Investments; and\n- (d) Index Linked Savings Certificates issued by the UK National Savings and Investments.'.\n- (5) In Schedule 2, omit paragraphs 2, 6, 8 and 9.\n\n## Transitional provision\n\n- 3. -(1) For the purposes of the International Tax Compliance Regulations 2015, in relation to an account that by virtue of regulation 2(5) ceases to be an excluded account, the calendar year 2020 is treated as beginning on 13th May 2020 and ending on 31st December 2020.\n- (2) Where in consequence of paragraph (1) it is necessary to apportion an amount for the calendar year 2020 to the period ending immediately before 13th May 2020 and the period beginning with that date, it is to be apportioned-\n- (a) on a time basis according to the respective length of the periods, or\n- (b) if that method would produce a result that is unjust or unreasonable, on a just and reasonable basis.\n\nDavid Rutley Maggie Throup\n\n20th April 2020\n\nTwo of the Lords Commissioners of Her Majesty's Treasury\n\n## EXPLANATORY NOTE\n\n(This note is not part of the Regulations)\n\nThe Regulations amend the International Tax Compliance Regulations 2015 ('the principal Regulations') which give effect to agreements and arrangements reached between the United Kingdom and other jurisdictions to improve international tax compliance.\n\nRegulation 2(2) extends the application of the principal Regulations to arrangements entered into by the United Kingdom for the exchange of financial account information with other jurisdictions up to 19th April 2020, the date before the Regulations are made.\n\nRegulation 2(5) omits various accounts from the category of excluded accounts. Regulation 2(4)(b) amends the definitions of 'new account' and 'pre-existing account' in relation to those\n\n( a ) 'Financial account' and 'reporting financial institution' are defined in the table in regulation 24(2) of the principal Regulations.\n\n( b ) 'The DAC' is defined in regulation 1(3)(a) of the principal Regulations.\n\n2", + "recall": 0.943127962085308, + "true_md": "- (a) “new account” means a financial account maintained by a reporting financial institution( a ) opened on or after 13th May 2020; \n\n- (b) “pre-existing account” means— \n\n- (i) a financial account maintained by a reporting financial institution as of 12th May 2020, or \n\n- (ii) a financial account within Section VIII(C)(9)(b) of Annex 1 of the DAC( b ), but in the application of that provision the references to “subparagraph C(9)(a)” are to be read as references to paragraph (i) of this sub-paragraph. \n\n- (a) non-registered pension arrangements where the annual contributions are limited to £50,000 and funds contributed cannot be accessed before the age of 55 except in circumstances of serious ill health; \n\n- (b) Premium Bonds issued by the UK National Savings and Investments; \n\n- (c) Fixed Interest Savings Certificates issued by the UK National Savings and Investments; and \n\n- (d) Index Linked Savings Certificates issued by the UK National Savings and Investments.”. \n\n## Transitional provision\n\n3. —(1) For the purposes of the International Tax Compliance Regulations 2015, in relation to an account that by virtue of regulation 2(5) ceases to be an excluded account, the calendar year 2020 is treated as beginning on 13th May 2020 and ending on 31st December 2020. \n\n(2) Where in consequence of paragraph (1) it is necessary to apportion an amount for the calendar year 2020 to the period ending immediately before 13th May 2020 and the period beginning with that date, it is to be apportioned— \n\n- (a) on a time basis according to the respective length of the periods, or \n\n- (b) if that method would produce a result that is unjust or unreasonable, on a just and reasonable basis. \n\n## EXPLANATORY NOTE\n\n(This note is not part of the Regulations) \n\nThe Regulations amend the International Tax Compliance Regulations 2015 (“the principal Regulations”) which give effect to agreements and arrangements reached between the United Kingdom and other jurisdictions to improve international tax compliance. \n\nRegulation 2(2) extends the application of the principal Regulations to arrangements entered into by the United Kingdom for the exchange of financial account information with other jurisdictions up to 19th April 2020, the date before the Regulations are made. \n\nRegulation 2(5) omits various accounts from the category of excluded accounts. Regulation 2(4)(b) amends the definitions of “new account” and “pre-existing account” in relation to those \n\nDavid Rutley \n\nMaggie Throup \n\nTwo of the Lords Commissioners of Her Majesty’s Treasury \n\n20th April 2020 \n\n2\n\n- (4) The accounts are— \n\n(5) In Schedule 2, omit paragraphs 2, 6, 8 and 9. \n\n( a ) “Financial account” and “reporting financial institution” are defined in the table in regulation 24(2) of the principal Regulations. \n\n( b ) “The DAC” is defined in regulation 1(3)(a) of the principal Regulations." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9179008135942086, + "doc_id": "8248420b774a48f3791178a4016a031ca848c62754890b87de4e486d4310d7e8", + "edit_distance": 0.14821428571428572, + "f1_score": 0.9473684210526315, + "meteor": 0.9485416622197295, + "precision": 0.945, + "pred_md": "- (2) P ceases to be required to self-isolate in accordance with these Regulations, and regulation 2A of the Self-Isolation Regulations applies in relation to P.\n\n## Day 2 tests: general test requirements\n\n- 6. -(1) For the purposes of regulation 6(12)(a), a day 2 test complies with this paragraph where-\n- (a) it is a test provided by a public provider; or\n- (b) it is a test provided by a private provider-\n- (i) in respect of-\n- (aa) a non-Schedule 11 passenger, on or after 1st March 2021;\n- (bb) a Schedule 11 passenger, on 1st or 2nd March 2021,\n- (ii) where the test complies with sub-paragraph (2), and\n- (iii) where the private provider complies with paragraph 7.\n- (2) A test complies with this sub-paragraph where-\n- (a) it is a semi-quantitative test for the detection of coronavirus which-\n- (i) targets a minimum of two distinguishable SARS-CoV-2 genes other than the S gene and performance reference controls,\n- (ii) includes routine in silico assurance against every variant of concern, and\n- (iii) produces a test solution that provides extracted nucleic acid that is suitable for whole genome sequencing using a specified method;\n- (b) it is, in relation to a Schedule 11 passenger, a test that can be self-administered;\n- (c) the manufacturer of any device used for the purposes of the test states that the device-\n- (i) uses an established molecular detection method,\n- (ii) has a specificity and a sensitivity greater than 99% (with a 95% two-sided confidence interval entirely above 97%),\n- (iii) has a limit of detection of less than or equal to 1000 SARS-CoV-2 copies per millilitre, and\n- (iv) is suitable for identifying every variant of concern; and\n- (d) any device used for the purposes of the test-\n- (i) can be put into service in accordance with Part 4 of the Medical Devices Regulations 2002, other than solely by virtue of regulation 39(2) of those Regulations, and\n- (ii) has been validated no more than 18 months before the test is administered or provided to P.\n- (3) For the purposes of sub-paragraph (2)-\n- (a) 'specified method' means a targeted sequence method specific to SARS-CoV-2 or an equivalent-\n- (i) amplicon method, or\n- (ii) sequence bait capture method;\n- (b) 'validated', in relation to a device, has the meaning given by paragraph 2(2) of Schedule 10;\n- (c) 'variant of concern' means a variant of SARS-CoV-2 identified in a designation made by the Secretary of State for the purposes of this paragraph and published in a manner as appears to the Secretary of State to be appropriate.\n\n61", + "recall": 0.949748743718593, + "true_md": "(2) P ceases to be required to self-isolate in accordance with these Regulations, and regulation 2A of the Self-Isolation Regulations applies in relation to P. \n\n6. —(1) For the purposes of regulation 6(12)(a), a day 2 test complies with this paragraph where— \n\n(2) A test complies with this sub-paragraph where— \n\n- (a) it is a test provided by a public provider; or \n\n- (b) it is a test provided by a private provider— \n\n- (i) in respect of— \n\n- (aa) a non-Schedule 11 passenger, on or after 1st March 2021; \n\n- (bb) a Schedule 11 passenger, on 1st or 2nd March 2021, \n\n- (ii) where the test complies with sub-paragraph (2), and \n\n- (iii) where the private provider complies with paragraph 7. \n\n- (a) it is a semi-quantitative test for the detection of coronavirus which— \n\n- (i) targets a minimum of two distinguishable SARS-CoV-2 genes other than the S gene and performance reference controls, \n\n- (ii) includes routine in silico assurance against every variant of concern, and \n\n- (iii) produces a test solution that provides extracted nucleic acid that is suitable for whole genome sequencing using a specified method; \n\n- (b) it is, in relation to a Schedule 11 passenger, a test that can be self-administered; \n\n- (c) the manufacturer of any device used for the purposes of the test states that the device— \n\n- (i) uses an established molecular detection method, \n\n- (ii) has a specificity and a sensitivity greater than 99% (with a 95% two-sided confidence interval entirely above 97%), \n\n- (iii) has a limit of detection of less than or equal to 1000 SARS-CoV-2 copies per millilitre, and \n\n- (iv) is suitable for identifying every variant of concern; and \n\n- (d) any device used for the purposes of the test— \n\n- (i) can be put into service in accordance with Part 4 of the Medical Devices Regulations 2002, other than solely by virtue of regulation 39(2) of those Regulations, and \n\n- (ii) has been validated no more than 18 months before the test is administered or provided to P. \n\n- (a) “specified method” means a targeted sequence method specific to SARS-CoV-2 or an equivalent— \n\n- (i) amplicon method, or \n\n- (ii) sequence bait capture method; \n\n- (b) “validated”, in relation to a device, has the meaning given by paragraph 2(2) of Schedule 10; \n\n- (c) “variant of concern” means a variant of SARS-CoV-2 identified in a designation made by the Secretary of State for the purposes of this paragraph and published in a manner as appears to the Secretary of State to be appropriate. \n\n(3) For the purposes of sub-paragraph (2)— \n\n## Day 2 tests: general test requirements\n\n61" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8899282053829232, + "doc_id": "73364c085017dd5f7a9caa62c4ba6d2b3eb736e152fbbd7a15189696d9d726d9", + "edit_distance": 0.5478547854785478, + "f1_score": 0.9461756373937676, + "meteor": 0.7941371131363424, + "precision": 0.9488636363636364, + "pred_md": "- (11) For the purposes of this regulation, 'authorised person' means-\n- (a) a constable;\n- (b) for the purposes of paragraphs (2) and (3) only, an immigration officer; or\n- (c) a person designated by the Secretary of State for the purposes of this regulation.\n\n## Power of entry\n\n- 12. -(1) A constable may enter premises in order-\n- (a) to search for a person who is suspected of committing an offence of contravening the requirement in paragraph 10 (duty to self-isolate) of Schedule 11;\n- (b) to remove a person of the description in sub-paragraph (a) to accommodation designated by the Secretary of State for the purposes of Schedule 11.\n- (2) The power in paragraph (1) is exercisable if the constable-\n- (a) has reasonable grounds to believe that a person of the description in paragraph (1)(a) is in or on the premises; and\n- (b) has a reasonable belief that it is necessary and proportionate to enter the premises for the purposes specified in paragraph (1)(b).\n- (3) A constable exercising the power in paragraph (1)-\n- (a) may use reasonable force if necessary; and\n- (b) may be accompanied by a police community support officer.\n- (4) A constable exercising the power in paragraph (1)-\n- (a) if asked by a person on the premises, must show evidence of the constable's identity and outline the purpose for which the power is being exercised; and\n- (b) if the premises are unoccupied or the occupier is temporarily absent, must leave the premises as effectively secured against unauthorised entry as when the constable found them.\n- (5) In this regulation, 'premises' includes any building or structure and any land.\n\n## PART 4\n\n## Requirements on operators\n\n## Passenger information requirement\n\n- 13. -(1) Subject to the following provisions of this regulation, an operator must ensure that a passenger who arrives at a port in England on a relevant service is provided with the information required by regulation 14 ('the passenger information requirement') and in the manner required by that regulation at each of the times specified in paragraph (2).\n- (2) The times are-\n- (a) where prior to departure a booking was made for the passenger to travel on the relevant service, before the booking was made ('the pre-booking information requirement');\n- (b) where, at least 48 hours prior to the scheduled departure time of the relevant service, a booking was made for the passenger to travel on it, between 24 and 48 hours prior to the scheduled departure time of that service ('the pre-departure information requirement');\n\n(c) where prior to departure the passenger was checked in to travel on the relevant service, at the time of check-in ('the check-in information requirement'); and\n\n(d) while the passenger was on board the vessel, aircraft or train ('the on-board information requirement').\n\n19", + "recall": 0.943502824858757, + "true_md": "(11) For the purposes of this regulation, “authorised person” means— \n\n12. —(1) A constable may enter premises in order— \n\n(2) The power in paragraph (1) is exercisable if the constable— \n\n(3) A constable exercising the power in paragraph (1)— \n\n(4) A constable exercising the power in paragraph (1)— \n\n(5) In this regulation, “premises” includes any building or structure and any land. \n\n13. —(1) Subject to the following provisions of this regulation, an operator must ensure that a passenger who arrives at a port in England on a relevant service is provided with the information required by regulation 14 (“the passenger information requirement”) and in the manner required by that regulation at each of the times specified in paragraph (2). \n\n(2) The times are— \n\n- (a) a constable; \n\n- (b) for the purposes of paragraphs (2) and (3) only, an immigration officer; or \n\n- (c) a person designated by the Secretary of State for the purposes of this regulation. \n\n- (a) to search for a person who is suspected of committing an offence of contravening the requirement in paragraph 10 (duty to self-isolate) of Schedule 11; \n\n- (b) to remove a person of the description in sub-paragraph (a) to accommodation designated by the Secretary of State for the purposes of Schedule 11. \n\n- (a) has reasonable grounds to believe that a person of the description in paragraph (1)(a) is in or on the premises; and \n\n- (b) has a reasonable belief that it is necessary and proportionate to enter the premises for the purposes specified in paragraph (1)(b). \n\n- (a) may use reasonable force if necessary; and \n\n- (b) may be accompanied by a police community support officer. \n\n- (a) if asked by a person on the premises, must show evidence of the constable’s identity and outline the purpose for which the power is being exercised; and \n\n- (b) if the premises are unoccupied or the occupier is temporarily absent, must leave the premises as effectively secured against unauthorised entry as when the constable found them. \n\n## PART 4\n\n## Requirements on operators\n\n## Passenger information requirement\n\n## Power of entry\n\n- (a) where prior to departure a booking was made for the passenger to travel on the relevant service, before the booking was made (“the pre-booking information requirement”); \n\n- (b) where, at least 48 hours prior to the scheduled departure time of the relevant service, a booking was made for the passenger to travel on it, between 24 and 48 hours prior to the scheduled departure time of that service (“the pre-departure information requirement”); \n\n- (c) where prior to departure the passenger was checked in to travel on the relevant service, at the time of check-in (“the check-in information requirement”); and \n\n- (d) while the passenger was on board the vessel, aircraft or train (“the on-board information requirement”). \n\n19" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8868598847565672, + "doc_id": "074b42c5093f46ea948711f38b3469a7fef5b0f1913baf954c0167f6265e9389", + "edit_distance": 0.22593320235756384, + "f1_score": 0.9299719887955181, + "meteor": 0.9441581455631686, + "precision": 0.8877005347593583, + "pred_md": "S T A T U T O R Y I N S T R U M E N T S\n\n## 2020 No. 434\n\n## SPORTS GROUNDS AND SPORTING EVENTS\n\nThe Safety of Sports Grounds (Designation) (Amendment) (No. 2) Order 2020\n\nMade\n\n-\n\n-\n\n-\n\n-\n\n17th April 2020\n\nLaid before Parliament\n\n21st April 2020\n\nComing into force -\n\n-\n\n13th May 2020\n\nThe Secretary of State makes the following Order in exercise of the powers conferred by sections 1(1) and 18(2) of the Safety of Sports Grounds Act 1975( a ).\n\nThe Secretary of State is of the opinion that the conditions in section 1(1) of that Act are satisfied( b ) and has, in accordance with section 18(4) of that Act, consulted with such persons and bodies of persons as appear requisite to the Secretary of State.\n\n## Citation and commencement\n\n- 1. This Order may be cited as the Safety of Sports Grounds (Designation) (Amendment) (No. 2) Order 2020 and comes into force on 13th May 2020.\n\n## Amendment to the Safety of Sports Grounds (Designation) Order 2015\n\n- 2. -(1) The Safety of Sports Grounds (Designation) Order 2015( c ) is amended as follows.\n- (2) In Schedule 2 (sports grounds designated under article 2(2)), after the entry for Griffin Park, occupied by Brentford Football Club, insert-\n\n'Brentford Community Stadium, Lionel Road South, Brentford TW8 0RU\n\nBrentford Football Club and London Irish Rugby Football Club'.\n\n17th April 2020\n\nNigel Huddleston Minister for Sport, Tourism and Heritage Department for Digital, Culture, Media and Sport\n\n( a ) 1975 c. 52; section 1(1) was amended by Schedule 2 to the Fire Safety and Safety of Places of Sport Act 1987 (c. 27).\n\n( b ) By section 1(1) of the Safety of Sports Grounds Act 1975, the Secretary of State may by order designate as a sports ground requiring a safety certificate under that Act any sports ground which, in the Secretary of State's opinion, has accommodation for more than 10,000 spectators. The Safety of Sports Grounds (Accommodation of Spectators) Order 1996 (S.I. 1996/499) substituted the number 5,000 for the number of spectators specified in section 1(1) of that Act in respect of sports grounds in England and Wales at which association football matches are played and which are occupied by a club which is a member of the Football League Limited or the Football Association Premier League Limited.\n\n( c ) S.I. 2015/661, to which there are amendments not relevant to this Order.", + "recall": 0.9764705882352941, + "true_md": "S T A T U T O R Y I N S T R U M E N T S\n\n# 2020 No. 434\n\n# SPORTS GROUNDS AND SPORTING EVENTS\n\nThe Safety of Sports Grounds (Designation) (Amendment) (No. 2) Order 2020 \n\nThe Secretary of State makes the following Order in exercise of the powers conferred by sections 1(1) and 18(2) of the Safety of Sports Grounds Act 1975( a ). \n\nThe Secretary of State is of the opinion that the conditions in section 1(1) of that Act are satisfied( b ) and has, in accordance with section 18(4) of that Act, consulted with such persons and bodies of persons as appear requisite to the Secretary of State. \n\n1. This Order may be cited as the Safety of Sports Grounds (Designation) (Amendment) (No. 2) Order 2020 and comes into force on 13th May 2020. \n\n(2) In Schedule 2 (sports grounds designated under article 2(2)), after the entry for Griffin Park, occupied by Brentford Football Club, insert— \n\n2. —(1) The Safety of Sports Grounds (Designation) Order 2015( c ) is amended as follows. \n\n17th April 2020 \n\nNigel Huddleston Minister for Sport, Tourism and Heritage Department for Digital, Culture, Media and Sport \n\n( a ) 1975 c. 52; section 1(1) was amended by Schedule 2 to the Fire Safety and Safety of Places of Sport Act 1987 (c. 27). \n\n( b ) By section 1(1) of the Safety of Sports Grounds Act 1975, the Secretary of State may by order designate as a sports ground requiring a safety certificate under that Act any sports ground which, in the Secretary of State’s opinion, has accommodation for more than 10,000 spectators. The Safety of Sports Grounds (Accommodation of Spectators) Order 1996 (S.I. 1996/499) substituted the number 5,000 for the number of spectators specified in section 1(1) of that Act in respect of sports grounds in England and Wales at which association football matches are played and which are occupied by a club which is a member of the Football League Limited or the Football Association Premier League Limited. \n\n( c ) S.I. 2015/661, to which there are amendments not relevant to this Order. \n\n## Citation and commencement\n\n## Amendment to the Safety of Sports Grounds (Designation) Order 2015" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9609371162492717, + "doc_id": "7cd9a40b883e79a3318b177c8b02bda00814d921fa43a3350a2507d1ae3839e1", + "edit_distance": 0.12087912087912088, + "f1_score": 0.9676025917926566, + "meteor": 0.8891402294891915, + "precision": 0.9696969696969697, + "pred_md": "## Day 2 tests: private provider requirements\n\n- 7. -(1) For the purposes of paragraph 6(1)(b)(iii), a private provider complies with this paragraph where-\n- (a) they comply with the requirements of paragraph 3(1)(a) and (e) to (h) of Schedule 10 as if any reference in those provisions to an appropriate test were a reference to a day 2 test;\n- (b) if the provider is a laboratory that conducts diagnostic test evaluation for testing in accordance with this Schedule, they have made a declaration to the Department of Health and Social Care that they meet the minimum standards for private sector-provided testing at https://support-covid-19-testing.dhsc.gov.uk/InternationalTesting;\n- (c) they have provided the Department of Health and Social Care with a list of all organisations that they work with (whether by sub-contract or otherwise) to carry out the testing service or to carry out genomic sequencing, indicating the nature of the service that each organisation is providing, and kept that list updated as appropriate;\n- (d) the person responsible for the taking of samples meets the relevant requirements for accreditation to ISO standard 15189 or ISO/IEC standard 17025 in respect of the taking of samples;\n- (e) the laboratory used by the test provider for the processing of samples meets the relevant requirements for ISO standard 15189 or ISO/IEC standard 17025 in respect of the evaluation of the established molecular detection method and the genomic sequencing of samples;\n- (f) they receive the information required by paragraph 10(3) or (4) (as appropriate), and if they administer the test to P, they do so no later than the end of the second day after the day on which P arrived in England;\n- (g) each day, they notify the Secretary of State in writing of-\n- (i) the number of tests they sold on that day, and\n- (ii) in relation to each test sold on that day-\n- (aa) the date of the arrival in England of the person in respect of whom the test was sold, and\n- (bb) whether the person in respect of whom the test was sold is a category 1 arrival or not;\n- (h) they sequence each sample with a cycle threshold less than 30 (equivalent to ~1,000 viral genome copies per millilitre);\n- (i) in respect of the sequencing of samples, they must secure a reference genome coverage breadth of at least 50% and at least 30 times coverage;\n- (j) on a request by the Secretary of State or the COVID-19 Genomics UK Consortium, they make samples available for the purpose of dual sequencing;\n- (k) they preserve and transport samples in a manner that enables genome sequencing;\n- (l) they have in place a process to remove human reads from any data submitted in a notification to Public Health England pursuant to the Health Protection (Notification) Regulations 2010; and\n- (m) if they arrange with another person ('X') for X to carry out any element of the single end-to-end testing service on their behalf, the test provider ensures that X complies with the following so far as relevant to the carrying out of that element-\n- (i) paragraph 3(1)(e) to (h) of Schedule 10 as applied by paragraph (a) of this subparagraph,\n- (ii) paragraph (c) to (l) of this sub-paragraph,\n- (iii) paragraph 11(2), (3) and (4).\n- (2) For the purposes of sub-paragraph (1)(m), 'single end-to-end testing service' has the meaning given in paragraph 3(2)(c) of Schedule 10.\n\n62", + "recall": 0.9655172413793104, + "true_md": "## Day 2 tests: private provider requirements\n\n7. —(1) For the purposes of paragraph 6(1)(b)(iii), a private provider complies with this paragraph where— \n\n(2) For the purposes of sub-paragraph (1)(m), “single end-to-end testing service” has the meaning given in paragraph 3(2)(c) of Schedule 10. \n\n62\n\n- (a) they comply with the requirements of paragraph 3(1)(a) and (e) to (h) of Schedule 10 as if any reference in those provisions to an appropriate test were a reference to a day 2 test; \n\n- (b) if the provider is a laboratory that conducts diagnostic test evaluation for testing in accordance with this Schedule, they have made a declaration to the Department of Health and Social Care that they meet the minimum standards for private sector-provided testing at https://support-covid-19-testing.dhsc.gov.uk/InternationalTesting; \n\n- (c) they have provided the Department of Health and Social Care with a list of all organisations that they work with (whether by sub-contract or otherwise) to carry out the testing service or to carry out genomic sequencing, indicating the nature of the service that each organisation is providing, and kept that list updated as appropriate; \n\n- (d) the person responsible for the taking of samples meets the relevant requirements for accreditation to ISO standard 15189 or ISO/IEC standard 17025 in respect of the taking of samples; \n\n- (e) the laboratory used by the test provider for the processing of samples meets the relevant requirements for ISO standard 15189 or ISO/IEC standard 17025 in respect of the evaluation of the established molecular detection method and the genomic sequencing of samples; \n\n- (f) they receive the information required by paragraph 10(3) or (4) (as appropriate), and if they administer the test to P, they do so no later than the end of the second day after the day on which P arrived in England; \n\n- (g) each day, they notify the Secretary of State in writing of— \n\n- (i) the number of tests they sold on that day, and \n\n- (ii) in relation to each test sold on that day— \n\n- (aa) the date of the arrival in England of the person in respect of whom the test was sold, and \n\n- (bb) whether the person in respect of whom the test was sold is a category 1 arrival or not; \n\n- (h) they sequence each sample with a cycle threshold less than 30 (equivalent to ~1,000 viral genome copies per millilitre); \n\n- (i) in respect of the sequencing of samples, they must secure a reference genome coverage breadth of at least 50% and at least 30 times coverage; \n\n- (j) on a request by the Secretary of State or the COVID-19 Genomics UK Consortium, they make samples available for the purpose of dual sequencing; \n\n- (k) they preserve and transport samples in a manner that enables genome sequencing; \n\n- (l) they have in place a process to remove human reads from any data submitted in a notification to Public Health England pursuant to the Health Protection (Notification) Regulations 2010; and \n\n- (m) if they arrange with another person (“X”) for X to carry out any element of the single end-to-end testing service on their behalf, the test provider ensures that X complies with the following so far as relevant to the carrying out of that element— \n\n- (i) paragraph 3(1)(e) to (h) of Schedule 10 as applied by paragraph (a) of this sub- paragraph, \n\n- (ii) paragraph (c) to (l) of this sub-paragraph, \n\n- (iii) paragraph 11(2), (3) and (4)." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9276002446854185, + "doc_id": "dc0346ac9776b86387d71eee5f91298e613e8e359f414eeb69c2dff22c915077", + "edit_distance": 0.7407407407407407, + "f1_score": 0.9655172413793105, + "meteor": 0.7659889806799067, + "precision": 0.9685534591194969, + "pred_md": "## Regulation 19(7)(b) to (d)\n\n15. Breach of requirement under regulation 16(1), 17(1) or 18(1) (other operator offences), £2,000.\n\n## Regulation 19(13)\n\n16. Breach of requirement under regulation 15 (operator records and information), £500.\n\n## Regulation 19(14)\n\n17. Breach of regulation 19(14) (wilful obstruction of a person carrying out a function under these Regulations)-\n\n- (a) obstruction of a function relating to regulation 3-\n- (i) in the case of the first fixed penalty notice, £500,\n- (ii) in the case of the second fixed penalty notice, £1,000,\n- (iii) in the case of the third fixed penalty notice, £2,000,\n- (iv) in the case of the fourth and subsequent fixed penalty notices, £4,000,\n\nwith no account taken of any fixed penalty notices given before 4.00 a.m. on 18th January 2021;\n\n- (b) obstruction of a function relating to regulation 4-\n- (i) in the case of the first fixed penalty notice, £500,\n- (ii) in the case of the second fixed penalty notice, £1,000,\n- (iii) in the case of the third fixed penalty notice, £2,000,\n- (iv) in the case of the fourth and subsequent fixed penalty notices, £4,000;\n- (c) obstruction of a function relating to regulations 9 or 11 apart from regulation 11(3), £1,000;\n- (d) obstruction of a function relating to regulation (11)(3) or in relation to regulation 10-\n- (i) in the case of the first fixed penalty notice, £5,000,\n- (ii) in the case of the second fixed penalty notice, £8,000,\n- (iii) in the case of the third and subsequent fixed penalty notice, £10,000;\n- (e) in any other case, £500.\n\n18. In determining how many fixed penalty notices a person ('P') has received for the purposes of paragraph 8 (breach of requirement in regulation 9 to self-isolate etc), if P received more than one fixed penalty notice for that offence before 2nd October 2020, only one of those notices may be taken into account.\n\n## SCHEDULE 15\n\nRegulation 26(2)\n\n## Consequential Amendments\n\n1. -(1) The Health Protection (Notification) Regulations 2010( a ) are amended as follows.\n\n(2) In regulation 4(3D)(b), for 'regulation 3B of the Health Protection (Coronavirus, International Travel) (England) Regulations 2020' substitute 'regulation 6 of the Health Protection (Coronavirus, International Travel and Operator Liability) (England) Regulations 2021'.\n\n( a ) S.I. 2010/659. Regulations 4(3D) and 4ZA were inserted by S.I. 2021/150. There are other amendments but none is relevant.\n\n88", + "recall": 0.9625, + "true_md": "## Regulation 19(7)(b) to (d)\n\n## Regulation 19(13)\n\n## Regulation 19(14)\n\n## SCHEDULE 15\n\n## Consequential Amendments\n\nRegulation 26(2) \n\n15. Breach of requirement under regulation 16(1), 17(1) or 18(1) (other operator offences), £2,000. \n\n16. Breach of requirement under regulation 15 (operator records and information), £500. \n\n17. Breach of regulation 19(14) (wilful obstruction of a person carrying out a function under these Regulations)— \n\nwith no account taken of any fixed penalty notices given before 4.00 a.m. on 18th January 2021; \n\n18. In determining how many fixed penalty notices a person (“P”) has received for the purposes of paragraph 8 (breach of requirement in regulation 9 to self-isolate etc), if P received more than one fixed penalty notice for that offence before 2nd October 2020, only one of those notices may be taken into account. \n\n1. —(1) The Health Protection (Notification) Regulations 2010( a ) are amended as follows. \n\n(2) In regulation 4(3D)(b), for “regulation 3B of the Health Protection (Coronavirus, International Travel) (England) Regulations 2020” substitute “regulation 6 of the Health Protection (Coronavirus, International Travel and Operator Liability) (England) Regulations 2021”. \n\n( a ) S.I. 2010/659. Regulations 4(3D) and 4ZA were inserted by S.I. 2021/150. There are other amendments but none is relevant. \n\n88\n\n- (a) obstruction of a function relating to regulation 3— \n\n- (i) in the case of the first fixed penalty notice, £500, \n\n- (ii) in the case of the second fixed penalty notice, £1,000, \n\n- (iii) in the case of the third fixed penalty notice, £2,000, \n\n- (iv) in the case of the fourth and subsequent fixed penalty notices, £4,000, \n\n- (b) obstruction of a function relating to regulation 4— \n\n- (i) in the case of the first fixed penalty notice, £500, \n\n- (ii) in the case of the second fixed penalty notice, £1,000, \n\n- (iii) in the case of the third fixed penalty notice, £2,000, \n\n- (iv) in the case of the fourth and subsequent fixed penalty notices, £4,000; \n\n- (c) obstruction of a function relating to regulations 9 or 11 apart from regulation 11(3), £1,000; \n\n- (d) obstruction of a function relating to regulation (11)(3) or in relation to regulation 10— \n\n- (i) in the case of the first fixed penalty notice, £5,000, \n\n- (ii) in the case of the second fixed penalty notice, £8,000, \n\n- (iii) in the case of the third and subsequent fixed penalty notice, £10,000; \n\n- (e) in any other case, £500." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8755570105018823, + "doc_id": "3939e500496a13676751283679088c2496cb73cd5cf9a2903a85e55052199ca9", + "edit_distance": 0.2616279069767442, + "f1_score": 0.9498069498069499, + "meteor": 0.9368249775537714, + "precision": 0.924812030075188, + "pred_md": "S T A T U T O R Y I N S T R U M E N T S\n\n## 2020 No. 124\n\n## LOCAL GOVERNMENT, ENGLAND\n\nThe Local Government (Structural Changes) (Further Financial Provisions and Amendment) (Amendment) Regulations 2020\n\nMade\n\n-\n\n-\n\n-\n\n-\n\n6th February 2020\n\nLaid before Parliament\n\n11th February 2020\n\nComing into force\n\n-\n\n-\n\n1st April 2020\n\nThe Secretary of State makes these Regulations in exercise of the powers conferred by sections 14 and 240(10) of the Local Government and Public Involvement in Health Act 2007( a ).\n\n## Citation and commencement\n\n- 1. These Regulations may be cited as the Local Government (Structural Changes) (Further Financial Provisions and Amendment) (Amendment) Regulations 2020 and come into force on 1st April 2020.\n\nAmendment of the Local Government (Structural Changes) (Further Financial Provisions and Amendment) Regulations 2009\n\n- 2. -(1) The Local Government (Structural Changes) (Further Financial Provisions and Amendment) Regulations 2009( b ) are amended in accordance with paragraph (2).\n- (2) In Regulation 4 (establishment of general funds), for '1st April 2019' substitute 'The reorganisation date'.\n\nSigned by authority of the Secretary of State for Housing, Communities and Local Government\n\n6th February 2020\n\nLuke Hall Parliamentary Under Secretary of State Ministry of Housing, Communities and Local Government\n\n## EXPLANATORY NOTE\n\n(This note is not part of the Regulations)\n\nThese Regulations amend the Local Government (Structural Changes) (Further Financial Provisions and Amendment) Regulations 2009 so that the date specified for a general fund to be established is changed from 1st April 2019 to the date specified in the order made under section 7\n\n( a ) 2007 c.28.\n\n( b ) S.I. 2009/5, amended by S.I. 2018/930.", + "recall": 0.9761904761904762, + "true_md": "S T A T U T O R Y I N S T R U M E N T S\n\n# 2020 No. 124\n\n# LOCAL GOVERNMENT, ENGLAND\n\nThe Local Government (Structural Changes) (Further Financial Provisions and Amendment) (Amendment) Regulations 2020 \n\nThe Secretary of State makes these Regulations in exercise of the powers conferred by sections 14 and 240(10) of the Local Government and Public Involvement in Health Act 2007( a ). \n\n1. These Regulations may be cited as the Local Government (Structural Changes) (Further Financial Provisions and Amendment) (Amendment) Regulations 2020 and come into force on 1st April 2020. \n\n2. —(1) The Local Government (Structural Changes) (Further Financial Provisions and Amendment) Regulations 2009( b ) are amended in accordance with paragraph (2). \n\n(2) In Regulation 4 (establishment of general funds), for “1st April 2019” substitute “The reorganisation date”. \n\nSigned by authority of the Secretary of State for Housing, Communities and Local Government \n\n6th February 2020 \n\nLuke Hall Parliamentary Under Secretary of State Ministry of Housing, Communities and Local Government \n\n(This note is not part of the Regulations) \n\nThese Regulations amend the Local Government (Structural Changes) (Further Financial Provisions and Amendment) Regulations 2009 so that the date specified for a general fund to be established is changed from 1st April 2019 to the date specified in the order made under section 7 \n\n( a ) 2007 c.28. \n\n( b ) S.I. 2009/5, amended by S.I. 2018/930. \n\n## EXPLANATORY NOTE\n\n## Amendment of the Local Government (Structural Changes) (Further Financial Provisions and Amendment) Regulations 2009\n\n## Citation and commencement" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.953496921205717, + "doc_id": "c99db1d1cfe1dadba3a5316198ac005d25a9be6b2e5b4e87ccfe85099a14030a", + "edit_distance": 0.1016949152542373, + "f1_score": 0.9565217391304348, + "meteor": 0.9774859972422294, + "precision": 0.9662162162162162, + "pred_md": "- (3) If another person (A) makes the booking on behalf of the passenger (whether or not A is also a passenger on the relevant service), the pre-booking information requirement is to be treated as complied with if the required information is provided to A in the required manner before the booking is made, along with a written request that A provide that information to the passenger unless A considers that, by virtue of age or mental capacity, the passenger is unlikely to be capable of understanding it.\n- (4) If another person (A) makes the booking on behalf of the passenger (whether or not A is also a passenger on the relevant service), the pre-departure information requirement is to be treated as complied with if the required information is provided to A in the required manner between 24 and 48 hours prior to the scheduled departure time of the relevant service, along with a written request that A provide that information to the passenger unless A considers that, by virtue of age or mental capacity, the passenger is unlikely to be capable of understanding it.\n- (5) If another person (A) checks in on behalf of the passenger (whether or not A is also a passenger on the relevant service), the check-in information requirement is to be treated as complied with if the required information was provided to A in the required manner at the time of check-in, along with a written request that A provide that information to the passenger unless A considers that, by virtue of age or mental capacity, the passenger is unlikely to be capable of understanding it.\n\n## Required information and manner\n\n- 14. -(1) For the purposes of regulation 13(2)(a) (pre-booking information requirement), the required information-\n- (a) in the case of online bookings-\n- (i) must be displayed prominently on an operator's website or mobile application,\n- (ii) is the information specified in Part 1 of Schedule 12 (information for passengers) and a hyperlink to each of the relevant websites;\n- (b) in the case of telephone bookings-\n- (i) must be provided orally,\n- (ii) is the information specified in Part 1 of Schedule 12;\n- (c) in the case of in-person bookings-\n- (i) must be provided orally or in writing,\n- (ii) where provided orally, is the information specified in Part 1 of Schedule 12,\n- (iii) where provided in writing, is a written notice which informs passengers of the requirements to provide information, to possess notification of a negative test result, to book and undertake tests and to self-isolate in regulations 3, 4, 6 and 9.\n- (2) For the purposes of regulation 13(2)(b) (pre-departure information requirement), the required information-\n- (a) must be provided by text message, push notification, email or orally;\n- (b) where provided by text message or push notification, is text which-\n- (i) informs passengers of the requirements to provide information in regulation 3 and that penalties apply for failure to comply with those requirements,\n- (ii) includes a hyperlink to https://www.gov.uk/provide-journey-contact-details-beforetravel-uk,\n- (iii) informs passengers of the requirement to possess notification of a negative test result in regulation 4, and\n- (iv) informs passengers of the requirement to book and undertake tests in regulation 6;\n- (c) where provided orally, is the information specified in Part 1 of Schedule 12;\n- (d) where provided by email, is the information specified in Part 1 of Schedule 12 and a hyperlink to each of the relevant websites.\n\n20", + "recall": 0.9470198675496688, + "true_md": "(3) If another person (A) makes the booking on behalf of the passenger (whether or not A is also a passenger on the relevant service), the pre-booking information requirement is to be treated as complied with if the required information is provided to A in the required manner before the booking is made, along with a written request that A provide that information to the passenger unless A considers that, by virtue of age or mental capacity, the passenger is unlikely to be capable of understanding it. \n\n(4) If another person (A) makes the booking on behalf of the passenger (whether or not A is also a passenger on the relevant service), the pre-departure information requirement is to be treated as complied with if the required information is provided to A in the required manner between 24 and 48 hours prior to the scheduled departure time of the relevant service, along with a written request that A provide that information to the passenger unless A considers that, by virtue of age or mental capacity, the passenger is unlikely to be capable of understanding it. \n\n(5) If another person (A) checks in on behalf of the passenger (whether or not A is also a passenger on the relevant service), the check-in information requirement is to be treated as complied with if the required information was provided to A in the required manner at the time of check-in, along with a written request that A provide that information to the passenger unless A considers that, by virtue of age or mental capacity, the passenger is unlikely to be capable of understanding it. \n\n14. —(1) For the purposes of regulation 13(2)(a) (pre-booking information requirement), the required information— \n\n(2) For the purposes of regulation 13(2)(b) (pre-departure information requirement), the required information— \n\n- (a) in the case of online bookings— \n\n- (i) must be displayed prominently on an operator’s website or mobile application, \n\n- (ii) is the information specified in Part 1 of Schedule 12 (information for passengers) and a hyperlink to each of the relevant websites; \n\n- (b) in the case of telephone bookings— \n\n- (i) must be provided orally, \n\n- (ii) is the information specified in Part 1 of Schedule 12; \n\n- (c) in the case of in-person bookings— \n\n- (i) must be provided orally or in writing, \n\n- (ii) where provided orally, is the information specified in Part 1 of Schedule 12, \n\n- (iii) where provided in writing, is a written notice which informs passengers of the requirements to provide information, to possess notification of a negative test result, to book and undertake tests and to self-isolate in regulations 3, 4, 6 and 9. \n\n- (a) must be provided by text message, push notification, email or orally; \n\n- (b) where provided by text message or push notification, is text which— \n\n- (i) informs passengers of the requirements to provide information in regulation 3 and that penalties apply for failure to comply with those requirements, \n\n- (ii) includes a hyperlink to https://www.gov.uk/provide-journey-contact-details-before- travel-uk, \n\n- (iii) informs passengers of the requirement to possess notification of a negative test result in regulation 4, and \n\n- (iv) informs passengers of the requirement to book and undertake tests in regulation 6; \n\n- (c) where provided orally, is the information specified in Part 1 of Schedule 12; \n\n- (d) where provided by email, is the information specified in Part 1 of Schedule 12 and a hyperlink to each of the relevant websites. \n\n20\n\n## Required information and manner" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9357885853795967, + "doc_id": "1769e1cd583dbbfc74326aa461bb3a7a5ca2daffb950008ff7b7b38c46eda8f3", + "edit_distance": 0.4657718120805369, + "f1_score": 0.9488372093023255, + "meteor": 0.8414111509016253, + "precision": 0.9532710280373832, + "pred_md": "- (iv) in the goods vehicle or a hotel, hostel or bed and breakfast accommodation while not undertaking the work described in that paragraph if P is travelling with another person in a goods vehicle with a sleeper cab.\n- (4) The address specified by P in the Passenger Locator Form pursuant to paragraph 2(a) of Schedule 6 must be-\n- (a) their home;\n- (b) the home of a friend or family member;\n- (c) a hotel, hostel, bed and breakfast accommodation, holiday apartment or home, campsite, caravan park or boarding house, canal boat or any other vessel;\n- (d) a military site or establishment;\n- (e) accommodation facilitated by the Secretary of State for the purposes of P's self-isolation;\n- (f) where P is an asylum seeker, accommodation provided or arranged under section 4, 95 or 98 of the Immigration and Asylum Act 1999; or\n- (g) where P is a person described in paragraph 9(1) of Schedule 10 to the Immigration Act 2016 (powers of Secretary of State to enable person to meet bail conditions), accommodation provided or arranged under that paragraph.\n- (5) More than one address may be specified as the place at which P intends to self-isolate in the Passenger Locator Form where-\n- (a) a legal obligation requires P to change addresses; or\n- (b) it is necessary for P to stay overnight at an address on their arrival in England before travelling directly to another address at which they will be self-isolating.\n- (6) In paragraph (3)(a)(ii) 'a place at which they intend to self-isolate while in England' means-\n- (a) where the person has completed a Passenger Locator Form, at an intended place of selfisolation specified in that form;\n- (b) where the person has completed a form equivalent to a Passenger Locator Form pursuant to an enactment in Scotland, Wales or Northern Ireland, at an intended place of selfisolation specified in that form;\n- (c) in any other case at a place described in paragraph (4)(a) to (c).\n- (7) P must, on their arrival in England, travel directly to the place at which they are to selfisolate, and must then self-isolate until whichever is the earlier of-\n- (a) the end of the 10th day after the day on which they arrived in England or, if later, the end of any period that applies by virtue of paragraph 2 or 3 of Schedule 8;\n- (b) their departure from England; or\n- (c) the beginning of P's period of self-isolation, where P or R, where P is a child, is notified under regulation 2A or 2B of the Self-Isolation Regulations( a ).\n- (8) In paragraph (7)(c), 'period of self-isolation' and 'R' have the meanings given for the purposes of Part 1 of the Self-Isolation Regulations (see regulations 3 and 5 of those Regulations).\n- (9) Paragraph (2) does not require P to remain in isolation-\n- (a) from any person with whom they were travelling when they arrived in England and who is also self-isolating in the place where P is self-isolating;\n- (b) where P is self-isolating in their home, from any member of their household;\n- (c) where P is self-isolating in the home of a friend or family member, from any member of the household of that friend or family member;\n\n( a ) A person notified, or a child in respect of whom a notification is given, under regulation 2A or 2B will be required to selfisolate in accordance with those Regulations from the moment the notification is given. Regulations 2A and 2B were inserted by S.I. 2021/364.\n\n14", + "recall": 0.9444444444444444, + "true_md": "- (iv) in the goods vehicle or a hotel, hostel or bed and breakfast accommodation while not undertaking the work described in that paragraph if P is travelling with another person in a goods vehicle with a sleeper cab. \n\n- (a) their home; \n\n- (b) the home of a friend or family member; \n\n- (c) a hotel, hostel, bed and breakfast accommodation, holiday apartment or home, campsite, caravan park or boarding house, canal boat or any other vessel; \n\n- (d) a military site or establishment; \n\n- (e) accommodation facilitated by the Secretary of State for the purposes of P’s self-isolation; \n\n- (f) where P is an asylum seeker, accommodation provided or arranged under section 4, 95 or 98 of the Immigration and Asylum Act 1999; or \n\n- (g) where P is a person described in paragraph 9(1) of Schedule 10 to the Immigration Act 2016 (powers of Secretary of State to enable person to meet bail conditions), accommodation provided or arranged under that paragraph. \n\n- (a) a legal obligation requires P to change addresses; or \n\n- (b) it is necessary for P to stay overnight at an address on their arrival in England before travelling directly to another address at which they will be self-isolating. \n\n- (a) where the person has completed a Passenger Locator Form, at an intended place of self- isolation specified in that form; \n\n- (b) where the person has completed a form equivalent to a Passenger Locator Form pursuant to an enactment in Scotland, Wales or Northern Ireland, at an intended place of self- isolation specified in that form; \n\n- (c) in any other case at a place described in paragraph (4)(a) to (c). \n\n- (a) the end of the 10th day after the day on which they arrived in England or, if later, the end of any period that applies by virtue of paragraph 2 or 3 of Schedule 8; \n\n- (b) their departure from England; or \n\n- (c) the beginning of P’s period of self-isolation, where P or R, where P is a child, is notified under regulation 2A or 2B of the Self-Isolation Regulations( a ). \n\n- (a) from any person with whom they were travelling when they arrived in England and who is also self-isolating in the place where P is self-isolating; \n\n- (b) where P is self-isolating in their home, from any member of their household; \n\n- (c) where P is self-isolating in the home of a friend or family member, from any member of the household of that friend or family member; \n\n(4) The address specified by P in the Passenger Locator Form pursuant to paragraph 2(a) of Schedule 6 must be— \n\n(5) More than one address may be specified as the place at which P intends to self-isolate in the Passenger Locator Form where— \n\n(6) In paragraph (3)(a)(ii) “a place at which they intend to self-isolate while in England” means— \n\n(7) P must, on their arrival in England, travel directly to the place at which they are to self- isolate, and must then self-isolate until whichever is the earlier of— \n\n(8) In paragraph (7)(c), “period of self-isolation” and “R” have the meanings given for the purposes of Part 1 of the Self-Isolation Regulations (see regulations 3 and 5 of those Regulations). \n\n(9) Paragraph (2) does not require P to remain in isolation— \n\n( a ) A person notified, or a child in respect of whom a notification is given, under regulation 2A or 2B will be required to self- isolate in accordance with those Regulations from the moment the notification is given. Regulations 2A and 2B were inserted by S.I. 2021/364.\n\n14" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.949445753425562, + "doc_id": "cef4730f775d2e672cea887eac93d7c5abd9ba6b6e2cc36e8119b020d6b22687", + "edit_distance": 0.6, + "f1_score": 0.9714285714285713, + "meteor": 0.824826334194148, + "precision": 0.9714285714285714, + "pred_md": "- (4) For the purposes of these Regulations a person is not treated as having been in a country or territory if-\n- (a) the person has only been on a vessel which has been in the territorial waters of that country or territory;\n- (b) the person did not disembark from that vessel while it was in the territorial waters of that country or territory;\n- (c) that vessel did not moor at a port in that country or territory; and\n- (d) no passenger was permitted to be taken on board that vessel while it was in the territorial waters of that country or territory.\n- (5) Schedule 4 (exemptions) describes categories of person who are exempt from certain requirements in accordance with these Regulations.\n\n## PART 2\n\n## Requirements on persons arriving in England\n\n## Requirement on passengers to provide information\n\n- 3. -(1) A person who arrives in England from a country or territory outside the common travel area must, subject to paragraph (2), provide on the Passenger Locator Form the information set out in Schedule 6 ('passenger information') on their arrival.\n- (2) A person who presents at immigration control at the Channel Tunnel shuttle terminal area in France( a ), with the intention of boarding a shuttle service destined for the United Kingdom, must provide on the Passenger Locator Form their passenger information on so presenting.\n- (3) Subject to paragraph (4), a person who arrives in England from within the common travel area who has been in a country or territory outside the common travel area at any time in the period beginning with the 10th day before the date of their arrival in England must provide on the Passenger Locator Form their passenger information on their arrival.\n- (4) Paragraph (3) does not apply to a person who arrives in England from Scotland, Wales or Northern Ireland and who has completed a form equivalent to a Passenger Locator Form pursuant to an enactment in Scotland, Wales or Northern Ireland, specifying-\n- (a) in the case of a person who is required to comply with regulation 9 (category 2 and category 3 arrivals), an address in England where that person intends to self-isolate; or\n- (b) in the case of any other person, an address in England where that person intends to stay during the period of 10 days beginning on the day after the date of their arrival in the United Kingdom.\n- (5) A person who is travelling with a child for whom they have responsibility, must ensure that passenger information is provided in relation to that child on the Passenger Locator Form-\n- (a) on their arrival in England, in the case of a person described in paragraph (1) or (3); or\n- (b) when they present at immigration control, in the case of a person described in paragraph (2).\n- (6) A person described in any of paragraphs (1) to (3) who provides their passenger information, and any passenger information required by virtue of paragraph (5), on the Passenger Locator Form in the 48 hours before they are required to do so, is treated as having complied with those paragraphs (as applicable).\n\n( a ) Article 4(1) of the Channel Tunnel (International Arrangements) Order 1993 (S.I. 1993/1813) has the effect of extending all frontier control enactments to the control zone in France. A 'frontier control enactment' is an enactment which contains provision relating to frontier controls and the definition of 'frontier controls' in Schedule 1 to that Order includes controls in relation to health. The Public Health (Control of Disease) Act 1984 and these Regulations made under it therefore apply in the control zone.\n\n5", + "recall": 0.9714285714285714, + "true_md": "(4) For the purposes of these Regulations a person is not treated as having been in a country or territory if— \n\n(5) Schedule 4 (exemptions) describes categories of person who are exempt from certain requirements in accordance with these Regulations. \n\n3. —(1) A person who arrives in England from a country or territory outside the common travel area must, subject to paragraph (2), provide on the Passenger Locator Form the information set out in Schedule 6 (“passenger information”) on their arrival. \n\n(2) A person who presents at immigration control at the Channel Tunnel shuttle terminal area in France( a ), with the intention of boarding a shuttle service destined for the United Kingdom, must provide on the Passenger Locator Form their passenger information on so presenting. \n\n(3) Subject to paragraph (4), a person who arrives in England from within the common travel area who has been in a country or territory outside the common travel area at any time in the period beginning with the 10th day before the date of their arrival in England must provide on the Passenger Locator Form their passenger information on their arrival. \n\n(4) Paragraph (3) does not apply to a person who arrives in England from Scotland, Wales or Northern Ireland and who has completed a form equivalent to a Passenger Locator Form pursuant to an enactment in Scotland, Wales or Northern Ireland, specifying— \n\n(5) A person who is travelling with a child for whom they have responsibility, must ensure that passenger information is provided in relation to that child on the Passenger Locator Form— \n\n(6) A person described in any of paragraphs (1) to (3) who provides their passenger information, and any passenger information required by virtue of paragraph (5), on the Passenger Locator Form in the 48 hours before they are required to do so, is treated as having complied with those paragraphs (as applicable). \n\n- (a) the person has only been on a vessel which has been in the territorial waters of that country or territory; \n\n- (b) the person did not disembark from that vessel while it was in the territorial waters of that country or territory; \n\n- (c) that vessel did not moor at a port in that country or territory; and \n\n- (d) no passenger was permitted to be taken on board that vessel while it was in the territorial waters of that country or territory. \n\n- (a) in the case of a person who is required to comply with regulation 9 (category 2 and category 3 arrivals), an address in England where that person intends to self-isolate; or \n\n- (b) in the case of any other person, an address in England where that person intends to stay during the period of 10 days beginning on the day after the date of their arrival in the United Kingdom. \n\n- (a) on their arrival in England, in the case of a person described in paragraph (1) or (3); or \n\n- (b) when they present at immigration control, in the case of a person described in paragraph (2). \n\n( a ) Article 4(1) of the Channel Tunnel (International Arrangements) Order 1993 (S.I. 1993/1813) has the effect of extending all frontier control enactments to the control zone in France. A “frontier control enactment” is an enactment which contains provision relating to frontier controls and the definition of “frontier controls” in Schedule 1 to that Order includes controls in relation to health. The Public Health (Control of Disease) Act 1984 and these Regulations made under it therefore apply in the control zone. \n\n5\n\n## PART 2\n\n## Requirements on persons arriving in England\n\n## Requirement on passengers to provide information" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "9567bea253665cce644e9bffb46a26b49462a53a3daa07e62724687ffda9e041", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9814814814814815, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "http://www.legislation.gov.uk/id/uksi/2021/582", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "http://www.legislation.gov.uk/id/uksi/2021/582" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8879316020181287, + "doc_id": "1bff94fbe34e976d53eabc5b8b43f3552e34f3be7613b53dfe29637e7fd2205e", + "edit_distance": 0.26813471502590674, + "f1_score": 0.9521410579345089, + "meteor": 0.9049737454233177, + "precision": 0.9402985074626866, + "pred_md": "- 21. -(1) Workers engaged in essential or emergency works-\n- (a) related to water supplies and sewerage services; and\n- (b) carried out by, for, or on behalf of a water undertaker, sewerage undertaker, water supply licensee, sewerage licensee or local authority,\n\nwhere they have travelled to the United Kingdom in the course of their work.\n\n- (2) For the purposes of sub-paragraph (1)-\n- (a) 'essential or emergency works' includes-\n- (i) inspections, maintenance, repairs, and asset replacement activities,\n- (ii) monitoring, sampling and analysis of water supplies under the Private Water Supplies (England) Regulations 2016( a ), the Water Supply (Water Quality) Regulations 2016( b ), the Private Water Supplies (Wales) Regulations 2017( c ), or the Water Supply (Water Quality) Regulations 2018( d );\n- (b) 'sewerage licensee' means the holder of a sewerage licence under section 17BA of the Water Industry Act 1991( e );\n- (c) 'sewerage services' has the meaning given in section 219(1) of the Water Industry Act 1991( ); f\n- (d) 'water supply licensee' has the meaning given in sections 17A(7) and 219(1) of the Water Industry Act 1991( g ).\n- 22. -(1) Workers engaged in essential or emergency works relating to flood and coastal erosion risk management on behalf of-\n- (a) the Environment Agency; or\n- (b) a lead local flood authority in England.\n- (2) For the purposes of sub-paragraph (1)-\n- (a) 'flood' and 'coastal erosion' have the meanings given in section 1 of the Flood and Water Management Act 2010( h );\n- (b) 'lead local flood authority' has the meaning given in section 6(7) of that Act;\n- (c) 'risk management' has the meaning given in section 3 of that Act( ). i\n- 23. -(1) Workers engaged in essential or emergency works-\n- (a) related to-\n- (i) a generating station,\n- (ii) an electricity interconnector,\n- (iii) a district heat network as defined in regulation 2 of the Heat Network (Metering and Billing) Regulations 2014( ), j\n- (iv) communal heating as defined in regulation 2 of the Heat Network (Metering and Billing) Regulations 2014,\n- (v) automated ballast cleaning and track re-laying systems on a network, or\n- (vi) the commissioning, maintenance and repair of industrial machinery for use on a network; or\n\n( a ) S.I. 2016/618; relevant amending instruments are S.I. 2017/506, 2018/707 and 2019/558.\n\n( b ) S.I. 2016/614; relevant amending instruments are S.I. 2017/506, 2018/706 and 378, 2019/526 and 558.\n\n( c ) S.I. 2017/1041 (W. 270), as amended by S.I. 2018/647 (W. 121), S.I. 2019/460 (W. 110) and S.I. 2019/463 (W. 111).\n\n( d ) S.I. 2018/647 (W. 121), as amended by S.I. 2019/463 (W. 111).\n\n( e ) 1991 c. 56. Section 17BA(6) was inserted by section 4(1) of the Water Act 2014 (c. 21). The reference to 'sewerage licensee' was inserted in section 219(1) by paragraph 120(2)(f) of Schedule 7 to the Water Act 2014.\n\n( f ) The definition of 'sewerage services' was amended by paragraph 120 of Schedule 7 to the Water Act 2014.\n\n- ( g ) Section 17A was inserted by section 1 of the Water Act 2014.\n- ( h ) 2010 c. 29.\n- ( ) i And see section 2 of the Flood and Water Management Act 2010 for the meaning of 'risk'.\n- ( ) j S.I. 2014/3120. There are no relevant amending instruments.\n\n40", + "recall": 0.9642857142857143, + "true_md": "21. —(1) Workers engaged in essential or emergency works— \n\nwhere they have travelled to the United Kingdom in the course of their work. \n\n(2) For the purposes of sub-paragraph (1)— \n\n22. —(1) Workers engaged in essential or emergency works relating to flood and coastal erosion risk management on behalf of— \n\n(2) For the purposes of sub-paragraph (1)— \n\n23. —(1) Workers engaged in essential or emergency works— \n\n- (a) related to water supplies and sewerage services; and \n\n- (b) carried out by, for, or on behalf of a water undertaker, sewerage undertaker, water supply licensee, sewerage licensee or local authority, \n\n- (a) “essential or emergency works” includes— \n\n- (i) inspections, maintenance, repairs, and asset replacement activities, \n\n- (ii) monitoring, sampling and analysis of water supplies under the Private Water Supplies (England) Regulations 2016( a ), the Water Supply (Water Quality) Regulations 2016( b ), the Private Water Supplies (Wales) Regulations 2017( c ), or the Water Supply (Water Quality) Regulations 2018( d ); \n\n- (b) “sewerage licensee” means the holder of a sewerage licence under section 17BA of the Water Industry Act 1991( e ); \n\n- (c) “sewerage services” has the meaning given in section 219(1) of the Water Industry Act 1991( f ); \n\n- (d) “water supply licensee” has the meaning given in sections 17A(7) and 219(1) of the Water Industry Act 1991( g ). \n\n- (a) the Environment Agency; or \n\n- (b) a lead local flood authority in England. \n\n- (a) “flood” and “coastal erosion” have the meanings given in section 1 of the Flood and Water Management Act 2010( h ); \n\n- (b) “lead local flood authority” has the meaning given in section 6(7) of that Act; \n\n- (c) “risk management” has the meaning given in section 3 of that Act( i ). \n\n- (a) related to— \n\n- (i) a generating station, \n\n- (ii) an electricity interconnector, \n\n- (iii) a district heat network as defined in regulation 2 of the Heat Network (Metering and Billing) Regulations 2014( j ), \n\n- (iv) communal heating as defined in regulation 2 of the Heat Network (Metering and Billing) Regulations 2014, \n\n- (v) automated ballast cleaning and track re-laying systems on a network, or \n\n- (vi) the commissioning, maintenance and repair of industrial machinery for use on a network; or \n\n( a ) S.I. 2016/618; relevant amending instruments are S.I. 2017/506, 2018/707 and 2019/558. \n\n( b ) S.I. 2016/614; relevant amending instruments are S.I. 2017/506, 2018/706 and 378, 2019/526 and 558. \n\n( c ) S.I. 2017/1041 (W. 270), as amended by S.I. 2018/647 (W. 121), S.I. 2019/460 (W. 110) and S.I. 2019/463 (W. 111). \n\n( d ) S.I. 2018/647 (W. 121), as amended by S.I. 2019/463 (W. 111). \n\n( e ) 1991 c. 56. Section 17BA(6) was inserted by section 4(1) of the Water Act 2014 (c. 21). The reference to “sewerage licensee” was inserted in section 219(1) by paragraph 120(2)(f) of Schedule 7 to the Water Act 2014. \n\n( f ) The definition of “sewerage services” was amended by paragraph 120 of Schedule 7 to the Water Act 2014. \n\n( g ) Section 17A was inserted by section 1 of the Water Act 2014. \n\n( h ) 2010 c. 29. \n\n( i ) And see section 2 of the Flood and Water Management Act 2010 for the meaning of “risk”. \n\n( j ) S.I. 2014/3120. There are no relevant amending instruments. \n\n40" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9268356912142358, + "doc_id": "bca86cfe346197420d739febb12f48eb105f81e3c6723aca1edc552c0a2dc39d", + "edit_distance": 0.291497975708502, + "f1_score": 0.96875, + "meteor": 0.950043693515484, + "precision": 0.9738219895287958, + "pred_md": "- (ii) either the information set out in paragraph (b)(xi) and (xii) is provided by X to the test provider or, where appropriate, X provides their own telephone number and email address to the test provider;\n- (d) at the time the test is booked and payment made the test provider gives P a test reference number in the format specified in sub-paragraph (e) and, where appropriate, also provides that test reference number to X;\n- (e) a test reference number must consist of 12 characters comprising 5 letters followed by 7 digits.\n\n## Notification of test results\n\n- 5. -(1) Sub-paragraphs (2) to (6) apply to a test provider who administers or provides an appropriate test to P in the circumstances described in paragraph 4.\n- (2) The test provider must, within 24 hours of the result becoming available-\n- (a) notify P or, where paragraph 4(c) applies, X by email, letter, or text message, of the result of P's test; or\n- (b) make P's test result available to P, or to X where paragraph 4(c) applies, via a secure web portal,\n\nin accordance with sub-paragraph (3).\n\n- (3) The notification of P's test result must include P's name, date of birth, passport number, or travel document reference number (as appropriate), the name and contact details of the test provider and P's test reference number, and must be conveyed using one of the following forms of words, as appropriate-\n\n## Form A: negative test result\n\nYour coronavirus test result is negative. You did not have the virus when the test was done. If you are self-isolating as an international arrival from an amber-list country, region or territory you may stop self-isolating.\n\nYou should self-isolate if:\n\nyou get symptoms of coronavirus (you should get an NHS coronavirus test and self-isolate until you get the results)\n\nyou are going into hospital (self-isolating until the date you go in)\n\nsomeone you live with tests positive\n\nyou have been traced as a contact of someone who tested positive\n\nFor advice on when you might need to self-isolate and what to do, go to www.nhs.uk/conditions/coronavirus-covid-19 and read 'Self-isolation and treating symptoms'.\n\nIt is a legal requirement to self-isolate when you arrive in the UK from an amber-list country, territory or region. If you are contacted by the enforcement authorities or the police after you have received this negative result please show them this notification.\n\n72", + "recall": 0.9637305699481865, + "true_md": "- (ii) either the information set out in paragraph (b)(xi) and (xii) is provided by X to the test provider or, where appropriate, X provides their own telephone number and email address to the test provider; \n\n- (d) at the time the test is booked and payment made the test provider gives P a test reference number in the format specified in sub-paragraph (e) and, where appropriate, also provides that test reference number to X; \n\n- (e) a test reference number must consist of 12 characters comprising 5 letters followed by 7 digits. \n\n- (a) notify P or, where paragraph 4(c) applies, X by email, letter, or text message, of the result of P’s test; or \n\n- (b) make P’s test result available to P, or to X where paragraph 4(c) applies, via a secure web portal, \n\n5. —(1) Sub-paragraphs (2) to (6) apply to a test provider who administers or provides an appropriate test to P in the circumstances described in paragraph 4. \n\n(2) The test provider must, within 24 hours of the result becoming available— \n\nin accordance with sub-paragraph (3). \n\n(3) The notification of P’s test result must include P’s name, date of birth, passport number, or travel document reference number (as appropriate), the name and contact details of the test provider and P’s test reference number, and must be conveyed using one of the following forms of words, as appropriate— \n\nYour coronavirus test result is negative. You did not have the virus when the test was done. If you are self-isolating as an international arrival from an amber-list country, region or territory you may stop self-isolating. \n\nYou should self-isolate if: \n\nyou get symptoms of coronavirus (you should get an NHS coronavirus test and self-isolate until you get the results) \n\nyou are going into hospital (self-isolating until the date you go in) \n\nsomeone you live with tests positive \n\nyou have been traced as a contact of someone who tested positive \n\nFor advice on when you might need to self-isolate and what to do, go to www.nhs.uk/conditions/coronavirus-covid-19 and read ‘Self-isolation and treating symptoms’. \n\nIt is a legal requirement to self-isolate when you arrive in the UK from an amber-list country, territory or region. If you are contacted by the enforcement authorities or the police after you have received this negative result please show them this notification. \n\n72\n\n## Form A: negative test result\n\n## Notification of test results" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9309852966346998, + "doc_id": "3fe20e90b33816f41b2f1eda285b98a234214a21f6cfab14ca36e14e8760a740", + "edit_distance": 0.2887096774193548, + "f1_score": 0.9506493506493507, + "meteor": 0.8510505099466588, + "precision": 0.953125, + "pred_md": "- (b) complies with the requirements of sub-paragraph (4) where relevant.\n- (4) The requirements of this sub-paragraph are that-\n- (a) in the case of a person who completed stage one-\n- (i) before 15th December 2020 and who is carrying out a test after 18th January 2021,\n- (ii) on or after 15th December 2020 and who is carrying out a test after whichever is the later of-\n- (aa) 18th January 2021, and\n- (bb) the date four weeks after the date on which they completed stage one,\n\nthey have complied with the requirements published by UKAS in relation to accreditation to that standard at http://www.ukas.com/C19-Stage2-UKAS-Appraisal ('stage two'),\n\n- (b) in the case of a person who completed stage two-\n- (i) on or before 18th January 2021 and who is carrying out a test on or after 1st July 2021,\n- (ii) after 18th January 2021 and who is carrying out a test on or after whichever is the later of-\n- (aa) 1st July 2021, and\n- (bb) the date four months after the date on which they completed stage two,\n\nthey are accredited by UKAS to that standard.\n\n## Required circumstances for undertaking testing\n\n- 4. The circumstances mentioned in paragraph 1 are that-\n- (a) P undertakes the test on or after the fifth day after the day on which P arrived in England;\n- (b) subject to sub-paragraphs (c) and (d), at the time the test is booked P notifies the test provider that P wishes to undertake the test for the purposes of determining whether they may cease self-isolating under these Regulations, and provides the test provider with-\n- (i) their full name,\n- (ii) their sex,\n- (iii) their date of birth,\n- (iv) their NHS number (if known and applicable),\n- (v) their ethnicity,\n- (vi) their home address, and the address or addresses at which they intend to self-isolate in accordance with regulation 9 while in England (if different),\n- (vii) the date of their arrival in the United Kingdom,\n- (viii) their coach number, flight number or vessel name (as appropriate),\n- (ix) the date on which they last departed from or transited through a category 2 country or territory,\n- (x) the country or territory they were travelling from when they arrived in the United Kingdom, and any country or territory they transited through as part of that journey,\n- (xi) their email address,\n- (xii) their telephone number,\n- (xiii) their passport number, or travel document reference number (as appropriate);\n- (c) where P is a child, or a person with a disability who is unable for that reason to provide the notification and information set out in paragraph (b) to the test provider-\n- (i) the notification and information set out in paragraph (b), other than in paragraph (b)(xi) and (xii), is provided to the test provider on P's behalf by another person ('X'), and\n\n71", + "recall": 0.9481865284974094, + "true_md": "- (b) complies with the requirements of sub-paragraph (4) where relevant. \n\n- (a) in the case of a person who completed stage one— \n\n- (i) before 15th December 2020 and who is carrying out a test after 18th January 2021, \n\n- (ii) on or after 15th December 2020 and who is carrying out a test after whichever is the later of— \n\n- (aa) 18th January 2021, and \n\n- (bb) the date four weeks after the date on which they completed stage one, \n\n- (b) in the case of a person who completed stage two— \n\n- (i) on or before 18th January 2021 and who is carrying out a test on or after 1st July 2021, \n\n- (ii) after 18th January 2021 and who is carrying out a test on or after whichever is the later of— \n\n- (aa) 1st July 2021, and \n\n- (bb) the date four months after the date on which they completed stage two, \n\n- (a) P undertakes the test on or after the fifth day after the day on which P arrived in England; \n\n- (b) subject to sub-paragraphs (c) and (d), at the time the test is booked P notifies the test provider that P wishes to undertake the test for the purposes of determining whether they may cease self-isolating under these Regulations, and provides the test provider with— \n\n- (i) their full name, \n\n- (ii) their sex, \n\n- (iii) their date of birth, \n\n- (iv) their NHS number (if known and applicable), \n\n- (v) their ethnicity, \n\n- (vi) their home address, and the address or addresses at which they intend to self-isolate in accordance with regulation 9 while in England (if different), \n\n- (vii) the date of their arrival in the United Kingdom, \n\n- (viii) their coach number, flight number or vessel name (as appropriate), \n\n- (ix) the date on which they last departed from or transited through a category 2 country or territory, \n\n- (x) the country or territory they were travelling from when they arrived in the United Kingdom, and any country or territory they transited through as part of that journey, \n\n- (xi) their email address, \n\n- (xii) their telephone number, \n\n- (xiii) their passport number, or travel document reference number (as appropriate); \n\n- (i) the notification and information set out in paragraph (b), other than in paragraph (b)(xi) and (xii), is provided to the test provider on P’s behalf by another person (“X”), and \n\n- (c) where P is a child, or a person with a disability who is unable for that reason to provide the notification and information set out in paragraph (b) to the test provider— \n\n71\n\n(4) The requirements of this sub-paragraph are that— \n\nthey have complied with the requirements published by UKAS in relation to accreditation to that standard at http://www.ukas.com/C19-Stage2-UKAS-Appraisal (“stage two”), \n\nthey are accredited by UKAS to that standard. \n\n4. The circumstances mentioned in paragraph 1 are that— \n\n## Required circumstances for undertaking testing" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6678147845408905, + "doc_id": "729b21c6cf8cc059a0e0d19cac8db79d395d20f1f3fe4b3885fb987e87ea4953", + "edit_distance": 0.7654320987654321, + "f1_score": 0.8448275862068966, + "meteor": 0.5871324458862122, + "precision": 0.8376068376068376, + "pred_md": "## Amendment to rule 4 (the overriding objective)\n\n6. In rule 4(2), for 'will' substitute 'must'.\n\n## Amendments to rule 5 (standard of proof)\n\n## 7. In rule 5-\n\n- (a) for 'will' substitute 'must';\n- (b) for 'the standard applicable in civil proceedings' substitute 'the civil standard of proof'.\n\n## Amendment to rule 14 (supplementary Statements)\n\n8. In rule 14(1), for 'paragraph (4)' substitute 'paragraph (5)'.\n\n## Amendment to rule 16 (adjournment of application pending Law Society investigation)\n\n9. In rule 16(1), for 'panel' substitute 'Tribunal'.\n\n## Amendment to rule 17 (applications for restoration and termination of indefinite suspension)\n\n10. In rule 17(1), for 'the Act' substitute 'the 1974 Act'.\n\n## Amendment to rule 20 (standard directions)\n\n11. In rule 20(3), for 'will' substitute 'may'.\n\n## Amendment to rule 22 (procedural applications)\n\n12. In rule 22(2), for 'paragraph 8(6)' substitute 'rule 8(6)'.\n\n## Amendments to rule 26 (disclosure and discovery)\n\n13. -(1) In rule 26(2), for 'will only apply' substitute 'only applies'. (2) In rule 26(3), for 'will not' substitute 'does not'.\n\n## Amendment to rule 28 (written evidence)\n\n14. In rule 28(3), for 'the party on whom the notice was served' substitute 'the party by whom the notice was served'.\n\n## Amendments to rule 29 (Civil Evidence Act notices)\n\n15. In rule 29(1)-\n\n- (a) for 'provisions' substitute 'provision';\n- (b) before 'the Civil Evidence Act 1995' insert 'the provisions of'.\n\n## Amendment to rule 31 (interpreters and translators)\n\n16. In rule 31(1), after 'witness' insert ', applicant'.\n\n## Amendments to rule 32 (previous findings of record)\n\n17. -(1) In rule 32(2), for 'is admissible' substitute 'are admissible'.\n\n(2) In rule 32(3), for 'appear' substitute 'appears'.\n\n2", + "recall": 0.8521739130434782, + "true_md": "## Amendment to rule 4 (the overriding objective)\n\n## Amendments to rule 5 (standard of proof)\n\n## Amendment to rule 14 (supplementary Statements)\n\n## Amendment to rule 16 (adjournment of application pending Law Society investigation)\n\n## Amendment to rule 17 (applications for restoration and termination of indefinite suspension)\n\n## Amendment to rule 20 (standard directions)\n\n## Amendment to rule 22 (procedural applications)\n\n## Amendments to rule 26 (disclosure and discovery)\n\n## Amendment to rule 28 (written evidence)\n\n## Amendments to rule 29 (Civil Evidence Act notices)\n\n## Amendment to rule 31 (interpreters and translators)\n\n## Amendments to rule 32 (previous findings of record)\n\n17. —(1) In rule 32(2), for “is admissible” substitute “are admissible”. \n\n(2) In rule 32(3), for “appear” substitute “appears”. \n\n16. In rule 31(1), after “witness” insert “, applicant”. \n\n15. In rule 29(1)— \n\n14. In rule 28(3), for “the party on whom the notice was served” substitute “the party by whom the notice was served”. \n\n13. —(1) In rule 26(2), for “will only apply” substitute “only applies”. \n\n(2) In rule 26(3), for “will not” substitute “does not”. \n\n12. In rule 22(2), for “paragraph 8(6)” substitute “rule 8(6)”. \n\n11. In rule 20(3), for “will” substitute “may”. \n\n10. In rule 17(1), for “the Act” substitute “the 1974 Act”. \n\n9. In rule 16(1), for “panel” substitute “Tribunal”. \n\n8. In rule 14(1), for “paragraph (4)” substitute “paragraph (5)”. \n\n7. In rule 5— \n\n6. In rule 4(2), for “will” substitute “must”. \n\n- (a) for “will” substitute “must”; \n\n- (b) for “the standard applicable in civil proceedings” substitute “the civil standard of proof”. \n\n- (a) for “provisions” substitute “provision”; \n\n- (b) before “the Civil Evidence Act 1995” insert “the provisions of”. \n\n2" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8057908101547513, + "doc_id": "76711d735dbdaeb3fb2d535e0bf5f4d53738f9dc2da6aa73d1d19a669f3fcd7c", + "edit_distance": 0.30985915492957744, + "f1_score": 0.9395017793594306, + "meteor": 0.9395940342924993, + "precision": 0.9166666666666666, + "pred_md": "S T A T U T O R Y I N S T R U M E N T S\n\n## 2020 No. 433\n\n## CHILDREN AND YOUNG PERSONS, ENGLAND AND WALES\n\n## PROTECTION OF VULNERABLE ADULTS, ENGLAND AND WALES\n\nThe Safeguarding Vulnerable Groups Act 2006 (Regulated Activities) (Coronavirus) Order 2020\n\nMade\n\n-\n\n-\n\n-\n\n-\n\nat 1.57 p.m. on 17th April 2020\n\nLaid before Parliament\n\nat 3.30 p.m. on 17th April 2020\n\nComing into force -\n\n-\n\nat 1.57 p.m. on 17th April 2020\n\nThe Secretary of State for Health and Social Care makes the following Order in exercise of the powers conferred by section 61(5) of, and paragraphs 6 and 9 of Schedule 4 to, the Safeguarding Vulnerable Groups Act 2006( a ).\n\n## Citation, interpretation and commencement\n\n- 1. -(1) This Order may be cited as the Safeguarding Vulnerable Groups Act 2006 (Regulated Activities) (Coronavirus) Order 2020.\n- (2) In this Order 'coronavirus' has the meaning described in section 1(1) of the Coronavirus Act 2020( b ) (meaning of 'coronavirus' and related terminology).\n- (3) This Order comes into force on 17th April 2020.\n\n## Removing saliva or mucus for the purpose of testing for coronavirus is not to be treated as a regulated activity\n\n- 2. -(1) Removing saliva or mucus from the mouth or nose of an individual where that is being done for the purpose of testing the presence of coronavirus in that individual, is not to be treated as a regulated activity.\n- (2) Paragraph (1) applies to testing carried out by the following persons -\n- (a) members of Her Majesty's Forces;\n- (b) employees of The Boots Company plc, company number 00027657; and\n\n( a ) 2006 c.47.\n\n( b ) 2020 c.7.", + "recall": 0.9635036496350365, + "true_md": "S T A T U T O R Y I N S T R U M E N T S\n\n# 2020 No. 433\n\n# CHILDREN AND YOUNG PERSONS, ENGLAND AND WALES\n\n# PROTECTION OF VULNERABLE ADULTS, ENGLAND AND WALES\n\nThe Safeguarding Vulnerable Groups Act 2006 (Regulated Activities) (Coronavirus) Order 2020 \n\nThe Secretary of State for Health and Social Care makes the following Order in exercise of the powers conferred by section 61(5) of, and paragraphs 6 and 9 of Schedule 4 to, the Safeguarding Vulnerable Groups Act 2006( a ). \n\n1. —(1) This Order may be cited as the Safeguarding Vulnerable Groups Act 2006 (Regulated Activities) (Coronavirus) Order 2020. \n\n(2) In this Order “coronavirus” has the meaning described in section 1(1) of the Coronavirus Act 2020( b ) (meaning of “coronavirus” and related terminology). \n\n(3) This Order comes into force on 17th April 2020. \n\n2. —(1) Removing saliva or mucus from the mouth or nose of an individual where that is being done for the purpose of testing the presence of coronavirus in that individual, is not to be treated as a regulated activity. \n\n- (2) Paragraph (1) applies to testing carried out by the following persons — \n\n- (a) members of Her Majesty’s Forces; \n\n- (b) employees of The Boots Company plc, company number 00027657; and \n\n( a ) 2006 c.47. \n\n( b ) 2020 c.7. \n\n## Removing saliva or mucus for the purpose of testing for coronavirus is not to be treated as a regulated activity\n\n## Citation, interpretation and commencement" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9034158583345857, + "doc_id": "20a5b94498d3349c38a4e8e3c395655c6b8950f1aab595dc5be31ce662956640", + "edit_distance": 0.12526096033402923, + "f1_score": 0.9849849849849851, + "meteor": 0.9935326437656173, + "precision": 0.9704142011834319, + "pred_md": "## S T A T U T O R Y I N S T R U M E N T S\n\n## 2020 No. 169\n\n## PREVENTION AND SUPPRESSION OF TERRORISM\n\nThe Proscribed Organisations (Name Change) Order 2020\n\nMade - - - - at 8.45 a.m. on 24th February 2020\n\nLaid before Parliament at 11.45 a.m. on 24th February 2020\n\nComing into force in accordance with article 1\n\nThe Secretary of State makes the following Order in exercise of the powers conferred by section 3(6) of the Terrorism Act 2000( a ).\n\nIn accordance with section 3(6)(a) of that Act, the Secretary of State believes that the organisation listed as National Action in Schedule 2 to that Act is operating wholly or partly under a name that is not specified in that Schedule (whether as well as or instead of under the specified name).\n\n## Citation and commencement\n\n- 1. This Order may be cited as the Proscribed Organisations (Name Change) Order 2020 and comes into force on the day after the day on which it is laid before Parliament.\n\n## Name change\n\n- 2. System Resistance Network, being a name not specified in Schedule 2 to the Terrorism Act 2000 (proscribed organisations), is to be treated as another name for National Action, being an organisation listed in that Schedule( b ).\n\nHome Office\n\nJames Brokenshire Minister of State\n\nAt 8.45 a.m. on 24th February 2020\n\n## EXPLANATORY NOTE\n\n(This note is not part of the Order)\n\nPart 2 of the Terrorism Act 2000 (c. 11) makes provision about proscribed organisations (including setting out offences in relation to such organisations in sections 11 to 13). An organisation is proscribed if it is listed in Schedule 2 to that Act or, as in most cases, if it operates under the same name as an organisation so listed (section 3(1)).\n\nSection 3(6) of that Act enables the Secretary of State, by order, to provide that a name that is not specified in Schedule 2 to that Act is to be treated as another name for an organisation that is listed in that Schedule. Article 2 of this Order specifies System Resistance Network as another name for the organisation listed as National Action.\n\n( a ) 2000 c. 11; section 3 was amended by sections 21 and 22 of the Terrorism Act 2006 (c. 11).\n\n( b ) National Action was added to Schedule 2 by S.I. 2016/1238; there are other amending instruments but none is relevant.", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "S T A T U T O R Y I N S T R U M E N T S\n\n# 2020 No. 169\n\n# PREVENTION AND SUPPRESSION OF TERRORISM\n\nThe Proscribed Organisations (Name Change) Order 2020 \n\nComing into force in accordance with article 1 \n\nThe Secretary of State makes the following Order in exercise of the powers conferred by section 3(6) of the Terrorism Act 2000( a ). \n\nIn accordance with section 3(6)(a) of that Act, the Secretary of State believes that the organisation listed as National Action in Schedule 2 to that Act is operating wholly or partly under a name that is not specified in that Schedule (whether as well as or instead of under the specified name). \n\n1. This Order may be cited as the Proscribed Organisations (Name Change) Order 2020 and comes into force on the day after the day on which it is laid before Parliament. \n\n2. System Resistance Network, being a name not specified in Schedule 2 to the Terrorism Act 2000 (proscribed organisations), is to be treated as another name for National Action, being an organisation listed in that Schedule( b ). \n\nHome Office \n\nAt 8.45 a.m. on 24th February 2020 \n\nJames Brokenshire Minister of State \n\n(This note is not part of the Order) \n\nPart 2 of the Terrorism Act 2000 (c. 11) makes provision about proscribed organisations (including setting out offences in relation to such organisations in sections 11 to 13). An organisation is proscribed if it is listed in Schedule 2 to that Act or, as in most cases, if it operates under the same name as an organisation so listed (section 3(1)). \n\nSection 3(6) of that Act enables the Secretary of State, by order, to provide that a name that is not specified in Schedule 2 to that Act is to be treated as another name for an organisation that is listed in that Schedule. Article 2 of this Order specifies System Resistance Network as another name for the organisation listed as National Action.\n\n( a ) 2000 c. 11; section 3 was amended by sections 21 and 22 of the Terrorism Act 2006 (c. 11). \n\n( b ) National Action was added to Schedule 2 by S.I. 2016/1238; there are other amending instruments but none is relevant. \n\n## Name change\n\n## Citation and commencement\n\n## EXPLANATORY NOTE" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8023787810593341, + "doc_id": "cba99ebf959fc09c67824c741e841916f1456e60859e65e0007612bd9fec7b10", + "edit_distance": 0.5, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9329036200675125, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Australia\n\nBrunei\n\nFalkland Islands\n\nFaroe Islands\n\nGibraltar\n\nIceland\n\nIsrael\n\nNew Zealand\n\nPortugal, including the Azores and Madeira\n\nSaint Helena, Ascension and Tristan da Cunha\n\nSingapore\n\nSouth Georgia and the South Sandwich Islands\n\n## SCHEDULE 2\n\nRegulation 2(1)\n\nRegulation 2(1)\n\nCategory 2 countries and territories\n\nAny country or territory outside the common travel area not listed in Schedule 1 or Schedule 3.\n\n## SCHEDULE 3\n\nCategory 3 countries and territories\n\n32\n\nRegulation 2(1)\n\nAngola\n\nArgentina\n\nBangladesh\n\nBolivia\n\nBotswana\n\nBrazil\n\nBurundi\n\nCape Verde\n\nChile\n\n## SCHEDULES\n\n## SCHEDULE 1\n\n## Category 1 countries and territories", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## SCHEDULES\n\n## SCHEDULE 1\n\n## Category 1 countries and territories\n\nRegulation 2(1) \n\nAustralia \n\nBrunei \n\nFalkland Islands \n\nFaroe Islands \n\nGibraltar \n\nIceland \n\nIsrael \n\nNew Zealand \n\nPortugal, including the Azores and Madeira \n\nSaint Helena, Ascension and Tristan da Cunha \n\nSingapore \n\nSouth Georgia and the South Sandwich Islands \n\nRegulation 2(1) \n\nAny country or territory outside the common travel area not listed in Schedule 1 or Schedule 3. \n\nRegulation 2(1) \n\nAngola \n\nArgentina \n\nBangladesh \n\nBotswana \n\nBolivia \n\nBrazil \n\nBurundi \n\nCape Verde \n\nChile \n\n32\n\n## SCHEDULE 3\n\n## Category 3 countries and territories\n\n## SCHEDULE 2\n\n## Category 2 countries and territories" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9092273872765593, + "doc_id": "3644b68e13867af5a75476a00d1335236e7e04896e0c8a8a5e9185972d341148", + "edit_distance": 0.22272727272727272, + "f1_score": 0.9018181818181819, + "meteor": 0.9589269860484939, + "precision": 0.8732394366197183, + "pred_md": "## S T A T U T O R Y I N S T R U M E N T S\n\n## 2020 No. 199\n\n## INCOME TAX\n\n## The Van Benefit and Car and Van Fuel Benefit Order 2020\n\nMade\n\n-\n\n-\n\n-\n\n-\n\n27th February 2020\n\nLaid before the House of Commons\n\n2nd March 2020\n\nComing into force\n\n- -\n\n6th April 2020\n\nThe Treasury make the following Order in exercise of the powers conferred by section 170(1A)(b) and (c), (2), (5) and (6) of the Income Tax (Earnings and Pensions) Act 2003( a ):\n\n## Citation, commencement and application\n\n- 1. -(1) This Order may be cited as the Van Benefit and Car and Van Fuel Benefit Order 2020.\n- (2) This Order comes into force on 6th April 2020 and applies to the tax year 2020-21 and subsequent tax years.\n\n## Amendment to section 150 of the Income Tax (Earnings and Pensions) Act 2003\n\n- 2. In section 150(1) of the Income Tax (Earnings and Pensions) Act 2003 (car fuel: calculating the cash equivalent)( b ) for '£24,100' substitute '£24,500'.\n\n## Amendment to section 155 of the Income Tax (Earnings and Pensions) Act 2003\n\n- 3. In section 155(1B)(a) and (b) of the Income Tax (Earnings and Pensions) Act 2003 (cash equivalent of the benefit of a van)( c ) for '£3,430' substitute '£3,490'.\n\n## Amendment to section 161 of the Income Tax (Earnings and Pensions) Act 2003\n\n- 4. In section 161(b) of the Income Tax (Earnings and Pensions) Act 2003 (van fuel: the cash equivalent)( d ) for '£655' substitute '£666'.\n\n( a ) 2003 c. 1; section 170(1A) was inserted by paragraph 7(2) of Schedule 14 to the Finance Act 2004 (c.12) with effect for the tax year 2005-06 and subsequent tax years, then substituted by section 10(1) and (6) of the Finance Act 2015 (c. 11) with effect for the tax year 2015-16 and subsequent years; and section 170(2) was amended by paragraph 7(3) of, and section 170(5) was amended by paragraph 7(4) of, Schedule 14 to the Finance Act 2004 with effect for the tax year 2005-06 and subsequent tax years.\n\n( b ) The figure specified in section 150(1) was last substituted by S.I. 2018/1176.\n\n( c ) Section 155 was substituted by paragraph 5 of Schedule 14 to the Finance Act 2004 with effect for the tax year 2005-06 and subsequent tax years. Section 155(1B) was substituted by section 10(2) of the Finance Act 2015 with effect for the tax year 2015-16 and subsequent tax years, and amended by section 11(2) of the Finance Act 2016 (c. 24) with effect for the tax year 2016-17 and subsequent tax years. The figure specified in section 155(1B)(a) and (b) was last substituted by S.I. 2018/1176.\n\n( d ) Section 161 was substituted by paragraph 5 of Schedule 14 to the Finance Act 2004 with effect for the tax year 2005-06 and subsequent tax years. The figure specified in section 161(b) was last substituted by S.I. 2018/1176.", + "recall": 0.9323308270676691, + "true_md": "S T A T U T O R Y I N S T R U M E N T S\n\n# 2020 No. 199\n\n# INCOME TAX\n\nThe Van Benefit and Car and Van Fuel Benefit Order 2020 \n\nThe Treasury make the following Order in exercise of the powers conferred by section 170(1A)(b) and (c), (2), (5) and (6) of the Income Tax (Earnings and Pensions) Act 2003( a ): \n\n1. —(1) This Order may be cited as the Van Benefit and Car and Van Fuel Benefit Order 2020. \n\n(2) This Order comes into force on 6th April 2020 and applies to the tax year 2020-21 and subsequent tax years. \n\n2. In section 150(1) of the Income Tax (Earnings and Pensions) Act 2003 (car fuel: calculating the cash equivalent)( b ) for “£24,100” substitute “£24,500”. \n\n3. In section 155(1B)(a) and (b) of the Income Tax (Earnings and Pensions) Act 2003 (cash equivalent of the benefit of a van)( c ) for “£3,430” substitute “£3,490”. \n\n4. In section 161(b) of the Income Tax (Earnings and Pensions) Act 2003 (van fuel: the cash equivalent)( d ) for “£655” substitute “£666”. \n\n## Amendment to section 161 of the Income Tax (Earnings and Pensions) Act 2003\n\n## Amendment to section 155 of the Income Tax (Earnings and Pensions) Act 2003\n\n## Amendment to section 150 of the Income Tax (Earnings and Pensions) Act 2003\n\n## Citation, commencement and application\n\n( a ) 2003 c. 1; section 170(1A) was inserted by paragraph 7(2) of Schedule 14 to the Finance Act 2004 (c.12) with effect for the tax year 2005-06 and subsequent tax years, then substituted by section 10(1) and (6) of the Finance Act 2015 (c. 11) with effect for the tax year 2015-16 and subsequent years; and section 170(2) was amended by paragraph 7(3) of, and section 170(5) was amended by paragraph 7(4) of, Schedule 14 to the Finance Act 2004 with effect for the tax year 2005-06 and subsequent tax years. \n\n( b ) The figure specified in section 150(1) was last substituted by S.I. 2018/1176. \n\n( c ) Section 155 was substituted by paragraph 5 of Schedule 14 to the Finance Act 2004 with effect for the tax year 2005-06 and subsequent tax years. Section 155(1B) was substituted by section 10(2) of the Finance Act 2015 with effect for the tax year 2015-16 and subsequent tax years, and amended by section 11(2) of the Finance Act 2016 (c. 24) with effect for the tax year 2016-17 and subsequent tax years. The figure specified in section 155(1B)(a) and (b) was last substituted by S.I. 2018/1176. \n\n( d ) Section 161 was substituted by paragraph 5 of Schedule 14 to the Finance Act 2004 with effect for the tax year 2005-06 and subsequent tax years. The figure specified in section 161(b) was last substituted by S.I. 2018/1176." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9249088605474874, + "doc_id": "ad2eb027aa1c6ebe992b938a1df64d62657a0b0ec2437b8aacb0be541e46f155", + "edit_distance": 0.865546218487395, + "f1_score": 0.9723756906077349, + "meteor": 0.7897708368284815, + "precision": 0.9777777777777777, + "pred_md": "## Prohibition on arrival of vessels into England\n\n- 3. -(1) A controller must not cause or permit a vessel whose last point of departure was a country or territory listed in paragraph 5 to moor at a port in England unless mooring at a port in England-\n- (a) is reasonably necessary to secure the safety of the vessel or the health and safety of any person aboard it; or\n- (b) is otherwise required pursuant to a direction issued under Schedule 3A to the Merchant Shipping Act 1995.\n- (2) This paragraph does not apply in relation to-\n- (a) a commercially operated vessel carrying no passengers;\n- (b) a vessel operated by or in support of Her Majesty's Government in the United Kingdom;\n- (c) a vessel operated by or in support of a foreign country or territory where, prior to its arrival in England, a United Kingdom Government Department has provided written confirmation to the operator that the vessel is carrying passengers who are travelling to conduct official business with the United Kingdom.\n- 4. The countries or territories referred to in paragraph 2(1) are-\n- (a) Argentina;\n- (b) Brazil;\n- (c) Cape Verde;\n- (d) Chile;\n- (e) Ethiopia;\n- (f) The Maldives;\n- (g) Oman;\n- (h) Qatar;\n- (i) South Africa;\n- (j) Turkey;\n- (k) United Arab Emirates.\n- 5. The countries or territories referred to in paragraph 3(1) are-\n- Turkey\n- 6. A controller who contravenes paragraph 2(1) or 3(1) commits an offence punishable on summary conviction by a fine.\n\n## SCHEDULE 14\n\n## Amounts of fixed penalties\n\n## Amounts of fixed penalties\n\n- 1. The amounts specified for the purposes of regulation 20(4)(c) are the amounts specified in paragraphs 2 to 17 in relation to the offences described in each paragraph.\n\n## Regulation 19(1)(a)\n\n- 2. Breach of regulation 3(1), (2) (3) (5), (7) or (8) (without reasonable excuse fail to provide passenger information, or evidence of having provided passenger information, or to update passenger information)-\n- (a) in the case of the first fixed penalty notice, £500;\n\n85\n\nRegulation 20(4)(c)", + "recall": 0.967032967032967, + "true_md": "## Prohibition on arrival of vessels into England\n\n## SCHEDULE 14\n\n## Amounts of fixed penalties\n\n## Amounts of fixed penalties\n\n## Regulation 19(1)(a)\n\nRegulation 20(4)(c) \n\n3. —(1) A controller must not cause or permit a vessel whose last point of departure was a country or territory listed in paragraph 5 to moor at a port in England unless mooring at a port in England— \n\n(2) This paragraph does not apply in relation to— \n\n4. The countries or territories referred to in paragraph 2(1) are— \n\n5. The countries or territories referred to in paragraph 3(1) are— \n\nTurkey \n\n6. A controller who contravenes paragraph 2(1) or 3(1) commits an offence punishable on summary conviction by a fine. \n\n1. The amounts specified for the purposes of regulation 20(4)(c) are the amounts specified in paragraphs 2 to 17 in relation to the offences described in each paragraph. \n\n2. Breach of regulation 3(1), (2) (3) (5), (7) or (8) (without reasonable excuse fail to provide passenger information, or evidence of having provided passenger information, or to update passenger information)— \n\n85\n\n- (a) in the case of the first fixed penalty notice, £500; \n\n- (a) is reasonably necessary to secure the safety of the vessel or the health and safety of any person aboard it; or \n\n- (b) is otherwise required pursuant to a direction issued under Schedule 3A to the Merchant Shipping Act 1995. \n\n- (a) a commercially operated vessel carrying no passengers; \n\n- (b) a vessel operated by or in support of Her Majesty’s Government in the United Kingdom; \n\n- (c) a vessel operated by or in support of a foreign country or territory where, prior to its arrival in England, a United Kingdom Government Department has provided written confirmation to the operator that the vessel is carrying passengers who are travelling to conduct official business with the United Kingdom. \n\n- (a) Argentina; \n\n- (b) Brazil; \n\n- (c) Cape Verde; \n\n- (d) Chile; \n\n- (e) Ethiopia; \n\n- (f) The Maldives; \n\n- (g) Oman; \n\n- (h) Qatar; \n\n- (i) South Africa; \n\n- (j) Turkey; \n\n- (k) United Arab Emirates." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.912256417431821, + "doc_id": "a260e3069927913260ff40d1df1b2f04f5b1749f07fedb2bd2fad119c9bf913e", + "edit_distance": 0.5101123595505618, + "f1_score": 0.9363057324840763, + "meteor": 0.8888330086457653, + "precision": 0.9363057324840764, + "pred_md": "https://www.gov.uk/provide-journey-contact-details-before-travel-uk\n\nhttps://www.gov.uk/uk-border-control\n\nhttps://www.nidirect.gov.uk/articles/coronavirus-covid-19-international-travel-advice\n\nhttps://www.gov.scot/publications/coronavirus-covid-19-international-travel-quarantine/\n\nhttps://gov.wales/arriving-wales-overseas\n\n## SCHEDULE 13\n\nRegulation 18(3)\n\n## Prohibition on the arrival of aircraft and vessels into England\n\n## Interpretation of this Schedule\n\n1. -(1) In this Schedule-\n\n'controller' means-\n\n- (a) in relation to a commercially operated aircraft or vessel, the person who has management control over the aircraft or vessel when it arrives in England,\n- (b) in relation to any other aircraft or vessel, the person who has physical control over the aircraft or vessel when it arrives in England;\n\n'passenger' means a person carried in or on an aircraft or vessel other than a member of the aircraft or vessel's crew;\n\n'port' has the same meaning as in the Merchant Shipping Act 1995( a ).\n\n- (2) In the definition of 'controller' in sub-paragraph (1) 'arrives' means-\n- (a) in relation to an aircraft, lands;\n- (b) in relation to a vessel, moors at a port.\n\n## Prohibition on arrival of aircraft into England\n\n- 2. -(1) A controller must not cause or permit an aircraft whose last point of departure was in a country or territory listed in paragraph 4 to land in England unless-\n- (a) landing in England is reasonably necessary to secure the safety of the aircraft or the health and safety of any person aboard it;\n- (b) the landing is only for the purpose of refuelling, or aircraft maintenance, and no passengers are permitted to board, or disembark from, the aircraft; or\n- (c) the aircraft is an air ambulance and landing for the purpose of transporting a person for medical treatment.\n- (2) This paragraph does not apply in relation to-\n- (a) a commercially operated aircraft carrying no passengers;\n- (b) an aircraft operated by or in support of Her Majesty's Government in the United Kingdom;\n- (c) an aircraft operated by or in support of a foreign country or territory where, prior to its arrival in England, a United Kingdom Government Department has provided written confirmation to the operator that the aircraft is carrying passengers who are travelling to conduct official business with the United Kingdom.\n\n( a ) 1995 c. 21.\n\n84", + "recall": 0.9363057324840764, + "true_md": "https://www.gov.uk/provide-journey-contact-details-before-travel-uk \n\nhttps://www.gov.uk/uk-border-control \n\nhttps://www.nidirect.gov.uk/articles/coronavirus-covid-19-international-travel-advice \n\nhttps://www.gov.scot/publications/coronavirus-covid-19-international-travel-quarantine/ \n\nhttps://gov.wales/arriving-wales-overseas \n\nRegulation 18(3) \n\n## SCHEDULE 13\n\n## Prohibition on the arrival of aircraft and vessels into England\n\n## Interpretation of this Schedule\n\n## Prohibition on arrival of aircraft into England\n\n“controller” means— \n\n“passenger” means a person carried in or on an aircraft or vessel other than a member of the aircraft or vessel’s crew; \n\n“port” has the same meaning as in the Merchant Shipping Act 1995( a ). \n\n(2) In the definition of “controller” in sub-paragraph (1) “arrives” means— \n\n2. —(1) A controller must not cause or permit an aircraft whose last point of departure was in a country or territory listed in paragraph 4 to land in England unless— \n\n(2) This paragraph does not apply in relation to— \n\n( a ) 1995 c. 21. \n\n84\n\n1. —(1) In this Schedule— \n\n- (a) in relation to a commercially operated aircraft or vessel, the person who has management control over the aircraft or vessel when it arrives in England, \n\n- (b) in relation to any other aircraft or vessel, the person who has physical control over the aircraft or vessel when it arrives in England; \n\n- (a) in relation to an aircraft, lands; \n\n- (b) in relation to a vessel, moors at a port. \n\n- (a) landing in England is reasonably necessary to secure the safety of the aircraft or the health and safety of any person aboard it; \n\n- (b) the landing is only for the purpose of refuelling, or aircraft maintenance, and no passengers are permitted to board, or disembark from, the aircraft; or \n\n- (c) the aircraft is an air ambulance and landing for the purpose of transporting a person for medical treatment. \n\n- (a) a commercially operated aircraft carrying no passengers; \n\n- (b) an aircraft operated by or in support of Her Majesty’s Government in the United Kingdom; \n\n- (c) an aircraft operated by or in support of a foreign country or territory where, prior to its arrival in England, a United Kingdom Government Department has provided written confirmation to the operator that the aircraft is carrying passengers who are travelling to conduct official business with the United Kingdom." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.884171743643591, + "doc_id": "80f91a29e4c1f4f444c10522bf6f43c32021b6ca030ab2182cd047eceae6de8e", + "edit_distance": 0.36619718309859156, + "f1_score": 0.9890909090909091, + "meteor": 0.9777709403245384, + "precision": 0.9855072463768116, + "pred_md": "## SCHEDULE 12\n\n## Information for passengers\n\n## PART 1\n\nThe specified information is-\n\n## ESSENTIAL INFORMATION TO ENTER ENGLAND FROM OVERSEAS\n\nEveryone entering England from overseas (including UK nationals and residents) must provide proof of a negative COVID-19 test taken within 3 days of departure to England.\n\nFill in your Passenger Locator Form up to 48 hours before arrival. You must declare all countries you have visited or transited through in the 10 days prior to your arrival on your Passenger Locator Form.\n\nBefore departure check the list of red, amber, and green countries, as the list can change regularly.\n\n## Red list passengers\n\n- 1. Book a managed quarantine package\n- 2. Complete a Passenger Locator Form\n\nYou can only enter if you are a British or Irish National, or you have residence rights in the UK. You must enter through a designated port and quarantine in a government approved hotel for 10 days\n\n## Amber list passengers\n\n- 1. Book tests for day 2 and 8\n- 2. Complete a Passenger Locator Form\n- 3. Make plans to self-quarantine in private accommodation for 10 full days after arrival (or full duration of stay if less than 10 days)\n\n## Green list passengers\n\n- 1. Book a test for day 2\n- 2. Complete a Passenger Locator Form\n\nThese measures apply to all persons (including UK nationals and residents) arriving in England from outside the common travel area comprising the United Kingdom, Ireland, the Isle of Man,\n\n82\n\nRegulation 14", + "recall": 0.9927007299270073, + "true_md": "Regulation 14 \n\nThe specified information is— \n\nEveryone entering England from overseas (including UK nationals and residents) must provide proof of a   negative COVID-19 test   taken within 3 days of departure to   England. \n\nFill in your Passenger Locator Form up to 48 hours before arrival. You must declare all countries you have visited or transited through in the 10 days prior to your arrival on your Passenger Locator Form.  \n\nBefore departure check the list of red, amber, and green countries, as the list can change regularly. \n\nYou can only enter if you are a British or Irish National, or you have residence rights in the UK. You must enter through a designated port and quarantine in a government approved hotel for 10 days \n\n1. Book a   managed quarantine   package \n\n2. Complete a   Passenger Locator Form \n\n1. Book   tests for day 2 and 8 \n\n2. Complete a   Passenger Locator Form \n\n3. Make plans to   self-quarantine   in private accommodation   for 10 full days after arrival (or full duration of stay if less than 10 days) \n\n1. Book a   test for day 2 \n\n2. Complete a   Passenger Locator Form \n\nThese measures apply to all persons (including UK nationals and residents) arriving in England from outside the common travel area   comprising the United Kingdom, Ireland, the Isle of Man, \n\n82\n\n## Green   list   passengers\n\n## Amber   list   passengers\n\n## Red   list   passengers\n\n## ESSENTIAL   INFORMATION TO ENTER ENGLAND FROM OVERSEAS\n\n## PART 1\n\n## Information for passengers\n\n## SCHEDULE 12" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9644309778002635, + "doc_id": "f9e7b48194a44ae7ef8fe1e6fd22cf01158cd57e753f3f8de03999e4cdf9721f", + "edit_distance": 0.019151846785225718, + "f1_score": 0.9636363636363636, + "meteor": 0.9815129659746766, + "precision": 0.9724770642201835, + "pred_md": "- (i) P provides, on arrival in England, written evidence from a United Kingdom or English sport national governing body of P's status as a domestic elite sportsperson returning to England from competing in an elite sports event or participating in training for an Olympic or Paralympic event,\n- (ii) P travels directly to, and remains in any place where P is self-isolating, apart from when P is travelling to or from, or attending the location of, an elite sports event in which they are competing or training for an elite sports event, or travelling between different locations where such an elite sports event or training for an elite sports event is taking place, and\n- (iii) at all times when P is not self-isolating P remains in isolation with any other domestic elite sportspersons or international elite sportspersons who are competing in or training for that elite sports event or with domestic ancillary sportspersons or international ancillary sportspersons involved in that elite sports event;\n- (b) where P is a domestic elite sportsperson of a kind described in paragraph (c)(ii) of the definition of that expression in sub-paragraph (2)-\n- (i) P provides, on arrival in England, written evidence from a United Kingdom or English sport national governing body of P's status as a domestic elite sportsperson who has travelled to England to participate in training for or to compete in an elite sports event,\n- (ii) P travels directly to, and remains in any place where P is self-isolating, apart from when P is travelling to or from, or attending the location of an elite sports event in which they are competing or training for an elite sports event, or travelling between different locations where such an elite sports event or training for an elite sports event is taking place, and\n- (iii) at all times when P is not self-isolating P remains in isolation with any other domestic elite sportspersons or international elite sportspersons who are competing in or training for that elite sports event or with domestic ancillary sportspersons or international ancillary sportspersons involved in that elite sports event;\n- (c) where P is a domestic ancillary sportsperson-\n- (i) P provides, on arrival in England, written evidence from a United Kingdom or English sport national governing body of P's status as a domestic ancillary sportsperson returning to England having been involved in the running of an elite sports event or the support of a domestic elite sportsperson,\n- (ii) P travels directly to, and remains in any place where P is self-isolating, apart from when P-\n- (aa) is travelling to or from, or attending the location of, any place in which P's presence is essential to the running of an elite sports event,\n- (bb) is travelling to or from, or attending the location of, any place in which P provides essential support to a domestic elite sportsperson who is competing in or training for an elite sports event,\n- (cc) is travelling between different locations where any activity described in paragraph (aa) or (bb) is taking place, and\n- (iii) at all times when P is not self-isolating P remains in isolation with domestic elite sportspersons or international elite sportspersons who are competing in or training for that elite sports event or with domestic ancillary sportspersons or international ancillary sportspersons involved in that elite sports event;\n- (d) where P is an international elite sportsperson-\n- (i) P provides, on arrival in England, written evidence from a United Kingdom or English sport national governing body of P's status as an international elite sportsperson attending a specified competition,\n- (ii) P travels directly to, and remains in any place where P is self-isolating, apart from when P is travelling to or from, or attending the location of the specified competition\n\n49", + "recall": 0.954954954954955, + "true_md": "- (i) P provides, on arrival in England, written evidence from a United Kingdom or English sport national governing body of P’s status as a domestic elite sportsperson returning to England from competing in an elite sports event or participating in training for an Olympic or Paralympic event, \n\n- (ii) P travels directly to, and remains in any place where P is self-isolating, apart from when P is travelling to or from, or attending the location of, an elite sports event in which they are competing or training for an elite sports event, or travelling between different locations where such an elite sports event or training for an elite sports event is taking place, and \n\n- (iii) at all times when P is not self-isolating P remains in isolation with any other domestic elite sportspersons or international elite sportspersons who are competing in or training for that elite sports event or with domestic ancillary sportspersons or international ancillary sportspersons involved in that elite sports event; \n\n- (b) where P is a domestic elite sportsperson of a kind described in paragraph (c)(ii) of the definition of that expression in sub-paragraph (2)— \n\n- (i) P provides, on arrival in England, written evidence from a United Kingdom or English sport national governing body of P’s status as a domestic elite sportsperson who has travelled to England to participate in training for or to compete in an elite sports event, \n\n- (ii) P travels directly to, and remains in any place where P is self-isolating, apart from when P is travelling to or from, or attending the location of an elite sports event in which they are competing or training for an elite sports event, or travelling between different locations where such an elite sports event or training for an elite sports event is taking place, and \n\n- (iii) at all times when P is not self-isolating P remains in isolation with any other domestic elite sportspersons or international elite sportspersons who are competing in or training for that elite sports event or with domestic ancillary sportspersons or international ancillary sportspersons involved in that elite sports event; \n\n- (c) where P is a domestic ancillary sportsperson— \n\n- (i) P provides, on arrival in England, written evidence from a United Kingdom or English sport national governing body of P’s status as a domestic ancillary sportsperson returning to England having been involved in the running of an elite sports event or the support of a domestic elite sportsperson, \n\n- (ii) P travels directly to, and remains in any place where P is self-isolating, apart from when P— \n\n- (aa) is travelling to or from, or attending the location of, any place in which P’s presence is essential to the running of an elite sports event, \n\n- (bb) is travelling to or from, or attending the location of, any place in which P provides essential support to a domestic elite sportsperson who is competing in or training for an elite sports event, \n\n- (cc) is travelling between different locations where any activity described in paragraph (aa) or (bb) is taking place, and \n\n- (iii) at all times when P is not self-isolating P remains in isolation with domestic elite sportspersons or international elite sportspersons who are competing in or training for that elite sports event or with domestic ancillary sportspersons or international ancillary sportspersons involved in that elite sports event; \n\n- (d) where P is an international elite sportsperson— \n\n- (i) P provides, on arrival in England, written evidence from a United Kingdom or English sport national governing body of P’s status as an international elite sportsperson attending a specified competition, \n\n- (ii) P travels directly to, and remains in any place where P is self-isolating, apart from when P is travelling to or from, or attending the location of the specified competition \n\n49" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9040557455355529, + "doc_id": "18f658356253c4bdd9804508d3106fdeaa47697208c1bd0e006b025da1ad9aec", + "edit_distance": 0.16780045351473924, + "f1_score": 0.9768976897689768, + "meteor": 0.9403715125830858, + "precision": 0.9801324503311258, + "pred_md": "S T A T U T O R Y I N S T R U M E N T S\n\n## 2021 No. 574\n\n## EXITING THE EUROPEAN UNION\n\n## PROFESSIONAL QUALIFICATIONS\n\n## The Recognition of Professional Qualifications (Amendment etc.) (EU Exit) Regulations 2021\n\nThe requirements of paragraph 3(2) of Schedule 7 to the European Union (Withdrawal) Act 2018( a ) (relating to the appropriate Parliamentary procedure for these Regulations) have been satisfied.\n\nThe Secretary of State makes these Regulations in exercise of the powers conferred by section 8(1) of, and paragraph 21(b) of Schedule 7 to, that Act.\n\n## Citation, commencement and extent\n\n- 1. -(1) These Regulations may be cited as the Recognition of Professional Qualifications (Amendment etc.) (EU Exit) Regulations 2021 and come into force on the 22nd day after the day on which they are laid.\n- (2) An amendment made by these Regulations has the same extent as the provision being amended.\n\n## Amendments to the Recognition of Professional Qualifications (Amendment etc.) (EU Exit) Regulations 2019\n\n- 2. -(1) Part 3 of Schedule 1 to the Recognition of Professional Qualifications (Amendment etc.) (EU Exit) Regulations 2019( b ) is amended as follows.\n- (2) In paragraph 42(3)(j) omit ', save to the extent that paragraph 47 of this Schedule applies'.\n- (3) In paragraph 44(4)(g) omit ', save to the extent that paragraph 47 of this Schedule applies'.\n- (4) For paragraph 47(2) substitute-\n- '(2) Regulation 68 of the principal Regulations continues to apply on and after IP completion day as it had effect immediately before IP completion day, but subject to the\n\n( a ) 2018 c. 16. Section 8 was amended by the European Union (Withdrawal Agreement) Act 2020 (c.1), section 27(1) to (6). Paragraph 21(b) of Schedule 7 was amended by Schedule 5, paragraphs 38 and 53(1) and (2)(b), to that Act.\n\n( b ) S.I. 2019/312 as amended by S.I. 2020/1038.", + "recall": 0.9736842105263158, + "true_md": "S T A T U T O R Y I N S T R U M E N T S\n\n# 2021 No. 574\n\n# EXITING THE EUROPEAN UNION\n\n# PROFESSIONAL QUALIFICATIONS\n\nThe Recognition of Professional Qualifications (Amendment etc.) (EU Exit) Regulations 2021 \n\nThe requirements of paragraph 3(2) of Schedule 7 to the European Union (Withdrawal) Act 2018( a ) (relating to the appropriate Parliamentary procedure for these Regulations) have been satisfied. \n\nThe Secretary of State makes these Regulations in exercise of the powers conferred by section 8(1) of, and paragraph 21(b) of Schedule 7 to, that Act. \n\n1. —(1) These Regulations may be cited as the Recognition of Professional Qualifications (Amendment etc.) (EU Exit) Regulations 2021 and come into force on the 22nd day after the day on which they are laid. \n\n(2) An amendment made by these Regulations has the same extent as the provision being amended. \n\n2. —(1) Part 3 of Schedule 1 to the Recognition of Professional Qualifications (Amendment etc.) (EU Exit) Regulations 2019( b ) is amended as follows. \n\n(2) In paragraph 42(3)(j) omit “, save to the extent that paragraph 47 of this Schedule applies”. \n\n(3) In paragraph 44(4)(g) omit “, save to the extent that paragraph 47 of this Schedule applies”. \n\n(4) For paragraph 47(2) substitute— \n\n“(2) Regulation 68 of the principal Regulations continues to apply on and after IP completion day as it had effect immediately before IP completion day, but subject to the \n\n( a ) 2018 c. 16. Section 8 was amended by the European Union (Withdrawal Agreement) Act 2020 (c.1), section 27(1) to (6). Paragraph 21(b) of Schedule 7 was amended by Schedule 5, paragraphs 38 and 53(1) and (2)(b), to that Act. \n\n( b ) S.I. 2019/312 as amended by S.I. 2020/1038. \n\n## Amendments to the Recognition of Professional Qualifications (Amendment etc.) (EU Exit) Regulations 2019\n\n## Citation, commencement and extent" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9456580925434974, + "doc_id": "824240a9c8a72a44367ebb098e2f5e084d1059b80d72e864190d6e876b560e01", + "edit_distance": 0.3940949935815148, + "f1_score": 0.948905109489051, + "meteor": 0.9461872189839233, + "precision": 0.9512195121951219, + "pred_md": "- (c) they have provided the Department of Health and Social Care with a list of all organisations that they work with (whether by sub-contract or otherwise) to carry out the testing service or to carry out genomic sequencing, indicating the nature of the service that each organisation is providing and kept that list updated as appropriate;\n- (d) in relation to a test which requires laboratory processing-\n- (i) the person responsible for the taking of samples meets the relevant requirements for accreditation to ISO standard 15189 or ISO/IEC standard 17025 in respect of the taking of samples, and\n- (ii) the laboratory used by the test provider for the processing of samples meets the relevant requirements for accreditation to ISO standard 15189 or ISO/IEC standard 17025 in respect of the processing of samples;\n- (e) in relation to a point of care test, they meet the relevant requirements for accreditation to ISO Standard 15189 and ISO standard 22870;\n- (f) they receive the information required by paragraph 10(3) or (4) (as appropriate), and if they administer the test to P, they do so no earlier than the end of the seventh day after the day on which P arrived in England;\n- (g) each day, they notify the Secretary of State in writing of-\n- (i) the number of tests they sold on that day, and\n- (ii) in relation to each test sold on that day-\n- (aa) the date of arrival in England of the person in respect of whom the test was sold, and\n- (bb) whether the person in respect of whom the test was sold is a category 1 arrival or not;\n- (h) if they arrange with another person ('X') for X to carry out any element of the single end-to-end testing service on their behalf, the test provider ensures that X complies with the following so far as relevant to the carrying out of that element-\n- (i) paragraph 3(1)(e) to (i) of Schedule 10 as applied by paragraph (a) of this subparagraph,\n- (ii) paragraph (b) to (g) of this sub-paragraph,\n- (iii) paragraph 11(2), (3) and (4).\n- (2) For the purposes of sub-paragraph (1)(h), 'single end-to-end testing service' has the meaning given in paragraph 3(2)(c) of Schedule 10.\n- (3) For the purposes of sub-paragraph (1)(d) and (e), a person or laboratory (as the case may be) meets the relevant requirements for accreditation to a standard where the person who is the operator of the laboratory complies with the requirements of regulation 6 of the Health Protection (Coronavirus, Testing Requirements and Standards) (England) Regulations 2020 as if-\n- (a) a reference to an applicable test were a reference to a day 8 test;\n- (b) a reference to a test provider were a reference to a private provider.\n\n## Required circumstances for undertaking a day 2 test or a day 8 test\n\n- 10. -(1) The circumstances mentioned in regulation 6(12)(a) and (b) are as follows.\n- (2) In relation to-\n- (a) a day 2 test, P undertakes the test no later than the end of the second day after the day on which P arrived in England;\n- (b) a day 8 test, P undertakes the test no earlier than the end of the seventh day after the day on which P arrived in England.\n- (3) Subject to sub-paragraph (4), at the time the test is booked P notifies the test provider that P is to undertake the test under these Regulations, and provides the test provider with-\n- (a) the information set out in paragraph 4(b)(i) to (v) and (vii) to (xiii) of Schedule 10; and\n\n64", + "recall": 0.9466019417475728, + "true_md": "- (c) they have provided the Department of Health and Social Care with a list of all organisations that they work with (whether by sub-contract or otherwise) to carry out the testing service or to carry out genomic sequencing, indicating the nature of the service that each organisation is providing and kept that list updated as appropriate; \n\n- (d) in relation to a test which requires laboratory processing— \n\n- (i) the person responsible for the taking of samples meets the relevant requirements for accreditation to ISO standard 15189 or ISO/IEC standard 17025 in respect of the taking of samples, and \n\n- (ii) the laboratory used by the test provider for the processing of samples meets the relevant requirements for accreditation to ISO standard 15189 or ISO/IEC standard 17025 in respect of the processing of samples; \n\n- (e) in relation to a point of care test, they meet the relevant requirements for accreditation to ISO Standard 15189 and ISO standard 22870; \n\n- (f) they receive the information required by paragraph 10(3) or (4) (as appropriate), and if they administer the test to P, they do so no earlier than the end of the seventh day after the day on which P arrived in England; \n\n- (g) each day, they notify the Secretary of State in writing of— \n\n- (ii) in relation to each test sold on that day— \n\n- (i) the number of tests they sold on that day, and \n\n- (aa) the date of arrival in England of the person in respect of whom the test was sold, and \n\n- (bb) whether the person in respect of whom the test was sold is a category 1 arrival or not; \n\n- (h) if they arrange with another person (“X”) for X to carry out any element of the single end-to-end testing service on their behalf, the test provider ensures that X complies with the following so far as relevant to the carrying out of that element— \n\n- (i) paragraph 3(1)(e) to (i) of Schedule 10 as applied by paragraph (a) of this sub- paragraph, \n\n- (ii) paragraph (b) to (g) of this sub-paragraph, \n\n- (iii) paragraph 11(2), (3) and (4). \n\n- (a) a reference to an applicable test were a reference to a day 8 test; \n\n- (b) a reference to a test provider were a reference to a private provider. \n\n- (a) a day 2 test, P undertakes the test no later than the end of the second day after the day on which P arrived in England; \n\n- (b) a day 8 test, P undertakes the test no earlier than the end of the seventh day after the day on which P arrived in England. \n\n- (a) the information set out in paragraph 4(b)(i) to (v) and (vii) to (xiii) of Schedule 10; and \n\n(2) For the purposes of sub-paragraph (1)(h), “single end-to-end testing service” has the meaning given in paragraph 3(2)(c) of Schedule 10. \n\n(3) For the purposes of sub-paragraph (1)(d) and (e), a person or laboratory (as the case may be) meets the relevant requirements for accreditation to a standard where the person who is the operator of the laboratory complies with the requirements of regulation 6 of the Health Protection (Coronavirus, Testing Requirements and Standards) (England) Regulations 2020 as if— \n\n10. —(1) The circumstances mentioned in regulation 6(12)(a) and (b) are as follows. \n\n(2) In relation to— \n\n(3) Subject to sub-paragraph (4), at the time the test is booked P notifies the test provider that P is to undertake the test under these Regulations, and provides the test provider with— \n\n## Required circumstances for undertaking a day 2 test or a day 8 test\n\n64" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9465704552965518, + "doc_id": "3c3c91556780f8202ee13a10e96719dcd17bd01b48589347a908c5aa4bb2a571", + "edit_distance": 0.7285921625544267, + "f1_score": 0.9672131147540984, + "meteor": 0.6953988733096407, + "precision": 0.9725274725274725, + "pred_md": "- (f) in paragraph 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 13(2)(c)(ii), 14, 18, 19, 20 or 27 of Schedule 4 and is-\n- (i) ordinarily resident in the United Kingdom, P is not required to comply with this regulation,\n- (ii) not ordinarily resident in the United Kingdom, P is not required to comply with this regulation while undertaking the work or activity described in the relevant paragraph of that Schedule;\n- (g) in paragraph 10 of Schedule 4, is engaged in work relating to the carriage of passengers by way of the tunnel system and is-\n- (i) ordinarily resident in the United Kingdom, P is not required to comply with this regulation,\n- (ii) not ordinarily resident in the United Kingdom, P is not required to comply with this regulation while undertaking that work;\n- (h) in paragraph 13(2)(c)(i) of Schedule 4 (driver of a goods vehicle) and is ordinarily resident in the United Kingdom, P is only required to comply with this regulation while undertaking the work described in that paragraph;\n- (i) in paragraph 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 28, 29, 31, 32, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41 or 45 of Schedule 4, P is not required to comply with this regulation while undertaking the work or activity described in the relevant paragraph of that Schedule;\n- (j) in any other paragraph of Schedule 4, including paragraph 10 in so far as it relates to work other than the carriage of passengers by way of the tunnel system, P is not required to comply with this regulation.\n- (16) P ceases to be required to comply with this regulation, where P-\n- (a) has undertaken a test in accordance with Schedule 10; and\n- (b) is notified in accordance with paragraph 5(2) of that Schedule that the result of that test is negative,\n\nfrom the time P is so notified.\n\n- (17) The full or partial disapplication of the requirement to self-isolate under this regulation that is provided for in paragraphs (15) and (16) does not apply to person who is both-\n- (a) described in paragraph (1)(a)(iii) of this regulation; and\n- (b) described in paragraph 1(1)(a) to (h) or (k) of Schedule 4.\n\n## Further requirements on arrivals from category 3 countries or territories\n\n- 10. -(1) This regulation applies to a person ('P') where P is a Schedule 11 passenger.\n- (2) P must remain in isolation from others in accordance with, and otherwise comply with the requirements in, Schedule 11.\n- (3) The address specified by P in the Passenger Locator Form pursuant to paragraph 2(a) of Schedule 6 must be the designated accommodation which is part of the managed self-isolation package booked by or on behalf of P.\n\n## PART 3\n\n## Enforcement\n\n## Enforcement of requirement to self-isolate\n\n11. -(1) Where an authorised person has reasonable grounds to believe that a person ('P') has left, or is outside of, the place where P is self-isolating in contravention of regulation 9, Schedule 8 or Schedule 11, the authorised person may-\n\n- (a) direct P to return to the place where P is self-isolating;\n\n17", + "recall": 0.9619565217391305, + "true_md": "(16) P ceases to be required to comply with this regulation, where P— \n\nfrom the time P is so notified. \n\n(17) The full or partial disapplication of the requirement to self-isolate under this regulation that is provided for in paragraphs (15) and (16) does not apply to person who is both— \n\n10. —(1) This regulation applies to a person (“P”) where P is a Schedule 11 passenger. \n\n(2) P must remain in isolation from others in accordance with, and otherwise comply with the requirements in, Schedule 11. \n\n(3) The address specified by P in the Passenger Locator Form pursuant to paragraph 2(a) of Schedule 6 must be the designated accommodation which is part of the managed self-isolation package booked by or on behalf of P. \n\n- (b) described in paragraph 1(1)(a) to (h) or (k) of Schedule 4. \n\n- (a) described in paragraph (1)(a)(iii) of this regulation; and \n\n- (b) is notified in accordance with paragraph 5(2) of that Schedule that the result of that test is negative, \n\n- (a) has undertaken a test in accordance with Schedule 10; and \n\n- (f) in paragraph 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 13(2)(c)(ii), 14, 18, 19, 20 or 27 of Schedule 4 and is— \n\n- (i) ordinarily resident in the United Kingdom, P is not required to comply with this regulation, \n\n- (ii) not ordinarily resident in the United Kingdom, P is not required to comply with this regulation while undertaking the work or activity described in the relevant paragraph of that Schedule; \n\n- (g) in paragraph 10 of Schedule 4, is engaged in work relating to the carriage of passengers by way of the tunnel system and is— \n\n- (i) ordinarily resident in the United Kingdom, P is not required to comply with this regulation, \n\n- (ii) not ordinarily resident in the United Kingdom, P is not required to comply with this regulation while undertaking that work; \n\n- (h) in paragraph 13(2)(c)(i) of Schedule 4 (driver of a goods vehicle) and is ordinarily resident in the United Kingdom, P is only required to comply with this regulation while undertaking the work described in that paragraph; \n\n- (i) in paragraph 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 28, 29, 31, 32, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41 or 45 of Schedule 4, P is not required to comply with this regulation while undertaking the work or activity described in the relevant paragraph of that Schedule; \n\n- (j) in any other paragraph of Schedule 4, including paragraph 10 in so far as it relates to work other than the carriage of passengers by way of the tunnel system, P is not required to comply with this regulation. \n\n- (a) direct P to return to the place where P is self-isolating; \n\n## Further requirements on arrivals from category 3 countries or territories\n\n## PART 3\n\n## Enforcement\n\n## Enforcement of requirement to self-isolate\n\n11. —(1) Where an authorised person has reasonable grounds to believe that a person (“P”) has left, or is outside of, the place where P is self-isolating in contravention of regulation 9, Schedule 8 or Schedule 11, the authorised person may— \n\n17" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9530406369776817, + "doc_id": "7471f4db195d27504749d962af9844c3ca46670cd60c8cef2597b29227a9d2aa", + "edit_distance": 0.41883116883116883, + "f1_score": 0.9722222222222223, + "meteor": 0.8759727890105963, + "precision": 0.9813084112149533, + "pred_md": "- (b) in the case of the second fixed penalty notice, £1,000;\n- (c) in the case of the third fixed penalty notice, £2,000;\n- (d) in the case of the fourth and subsequent fixed penalty notices, £4,000.\n\n## Regulation 19(6)\n\n3. Breach of regulation 19(6) (intentionally or recklessly provide false passenger information)-\n\n- (a) if the offence consists of the intentional or reckless provision of false or misleading passenger information relating to the person's travel history in relation to a category 3 country or territory), £10,000;\n- (b) in any other case-\n- (i) in the case of the first fixed penalty notice, £500,\n- (ii) in the case of the second fixed penalty notice, £1,000,\n- (iii) in the case of the third fixed penalty notice, £2,000,\n- (iv) in the case of the fourth and subsequent fixed penalty notices, £4,000.\n\n## Regulation 19(1)(b)\n\n- 4. Breach of regulation 4 (1), (2), (3) or (4) (without reasonable excuse fail to possess or produce evidence of negative test result on arrival)-\n- (a) in the case of the first fixed penalty notice, £500;\n- (b) in the case of the second fixed penalty notice, £1,000;\n- (c) in the case of the third fixed penalty notice, £2,000;\n- (d) in the case of the fourth and subsequent fixed penalty notices, £4,000.\n\n## Regulation 19(1)(c)\n\n5. Breach of regulation 6 (requirement to book and undertake tests)-\n\n- (a) in the case of a fixed penalty notice issued in respect of a failure to possess a testing package in accordance with regulation 6(3), £1,000;\n- (b) in the case of a fixed penalty notice issued in respect of a failure to obtain a testing package in accordance with regulation 6(4), £2,000;\n- (c) in the case of a fixed penalty notice issued in respect of a failure to obtain a testing package for a child in accordance with regulation 6(5), £1,000;\n- (d) in the case of the first fixed penalty notice issued in respect of a failure to undertake a test in accordance with regulation 6(6) or (8), £1,000;\n- (e) in the case of the second fixed penalty notice issued in respect of a failure to undertake a test in accordance with regulation 6(6) or (8), £2,000;\n- (f) regulation 6(11) (duty to provide evidence), £1,000.\n\n## Regulation 19(1)(d)\n\n6. Breach of regulation 7(2), (3) or (9) (requirement to undertake workforce tests)-\n\n- (a) in the case of a first fixed penalty notice, £1,000;\n- (b) in the case of a second fixed penalty notice, £2,000;\n- (c) in the case of a third and subsequent fixed penalty notice, £3,000.\n\n86", + "recall": 0.963302752293578, + "true_md": "- (b) in the case of the second fixed penalty notice, £1,000; \n\n- (c) in the case of the third fixed penalty notice, £2,000; \n\n- (d) in the case of the fourth and subsequent fixed penalty notices, £4,000. \n\n- (a) if the offence consists of the intentional or reckless provision of false or misleading passenger information relating to the person’s travel history in relation to a category 3 country or territory), £10,000; \n\n- (b) in any other case— \n\n- (i) in the case of the first fixed penalty notice, £500, \n\n- (ii) in the case of the second fixed penalty notice, £1,000, \n\n- (iii) in the case of the third fixed penalty notice, £2,000, \n\n- (iv) in the case of the fourth and subsequent fixed penalty notices, £4,000. \n\n- (a) in the case of the first fixed penalty notice, £500; \n\n- (c) in the case of the third fixed penalty notice, £2,000; \n\n- (b) in the case of the second fixed penalty notice, £1,000; \n\n- (d) in the case of the fourth and subsequent fixed penalty notices, £4,000. \n\n- (a) in the case of a fixed penalty notice issued in respect of a failure to possess a testing package in accordance with regulation 6(3), £1,000; \n\n- (b) in the case of a fixed penalty notice issued in respect of a failure to obtain a testing package in accordance with regulation 6(4), £2,000; \n\n- (c) in the case of a fixed penalty notice issued in respect of a failure to obtain a testing package for a child in accordance with regulation 6(5), £1,000; \n\n- (d) in the case of the first fixed penalty notice issued in respect of a failure to undertake a test in accordance with regulation 6(6) or (8), £1,000; \n\n- (e) in the case of the second fixed penalty notice issued in respect of a failure to undertake a test in accordance with regulation 6(6) or (8), £2,000; \n\n- (f) regulation 6(11) (duty to provide evidence), £1,000. \n\n- (a) in the case of a first fixed penalty notice, £1,000; \n\n- (b) in the case of a second fixed penalty notice, £2,000; \n\n- (c) in the case of a third and subsequent fixed penalty notice, £3,000. \n\n6. Breach of regulation 7(2), (3) or (9) (requirement to undertake workforce tests)— \n\n5. Breach of regulation 6 (requirement to book and undertake tests)— \n\n4. Breach of regulation 4 (1), (2), (3) or (4) (without reasonable excuse fail to possess or produce evidence of negative test result on arrival)— \n\n3. Breach of regulation 19(6) (intentionally or recklessly provide false passenger information)— \n\n## Regulation 19(6)\n\n## Regulation 19(1)(b)\n\n## Regulation 19(1)(c)\n\n## Regulation 19(1)(d)\n\n86" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9271737373025059, + "doc_id": "4852df60c9897e5659502b48eca0e6718e9ff93c1d6e7012497966377bac7f83", + "edit_distance": 0.045454545454545456, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9996243425995492, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Colombia\n\nDemocratic Republic of the Congo\n\nEcuador\n\nEswatini\n\nEthiopia\n\nFrench Guiana\n\nGuyana\n\nIndia\n\nKenya\n\nLesotho\n\nMalawi\n\nThe Maldives\n\nMozambique\n\nNamibia\n\nNepal\n\nOman\n\nPakistan\n\nPanama\n\nParaguay\n\nPeru\n\nPhilippines\n\nQatar\n\nRwanda\n\nSeychelles\n\nSomalia\n\nSouth Africa\n\nSuriname\n\nTanzania\n\nTurkey\n\nUnited Arab Emirates\n\nUruguay\n\nVenezuela\n\nZambia\n\nZimbabwe\n\n33", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Colombia \n\nDemocratic Republic of the Congo \n\nEcuador \n\nEthiopia \n\nEswatini \n\nFrench Guiana \n\nGuyana \n\nIndia \n\nKenya \n\nLesotho \n\nMalawi \n\nThe Maldives \n\nMozambique \n\nNamibia \n\nNepal \n\nOman \n\nPakistan \n\nPanama \n\nParaguay \n\nPeru \n\nPhilippines \n\nQatar \n\nRwanda \n\nSeychelles \n\nSomalia\n\nSouth Africa \n\nSuriname \n\nTanzania \n\nTurkey \n\nUnited Arab Emirates \n\nUruguay \n\nVenezuela \n\nZambia \n\nZimbabwe \n\n33" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9086310837369407, + "doc_id": "a219ec170c271b9042a665a0b07a23519757a0da75a21deefed4f211da9d4ab2", + "edit_distance": 0.1716171617161716, + "f1_score": 0.9672544080604535, + "meteor": 0.9791259452069275, + "precision": 0.9552238805970149, + "pred_md": "## S T A T U T O R Y I N S T R U M E N T S\n\n## 2021 No. 538\n\n## MARRIAGE, ENGLAND AND WALES\n\nThe Marriage (Keeping of Records in Churches and Chapels) Regulations 2021\n\nMade\n\n-\n\n-\n\n-\n\n-\n\n29th April 2021\n\nComing into force - -\n\n4th May 2021\n\nThe Registrar General makes these Regulations with the approval of the Secretary of State in exercise of the powers conferred by section 74(1)(c)(v), (1A)(a) and (3) of the Marriage Act 1949( a ).\n\n## Citation, commencement, extent and interpretation\n\n- 1. -(1) These Regulations may be cited as the Marriage (Keeping of Records in Churches and Chapels) Regulations 2021.\n- (2) These Regulations come into force on 4th May 2021.\n- (3) These Regulations extend to England and Wales.\n- (4) In these Regulations, 'chapel' does not include a chapel to which Part 5 of the Marriage Act 1949 (marriages in naval, military and air force chapels) applies( b ).\n\n## Duty of parochial church councils to provide registers of marriage services\n\n- 2. -(1) The parochial church council of a parish must provide books for the purpose of making records under regulation 3 to each church and chapel of the Church of England( c ) in that parish in which banns of matrimony may be published.\n- (2) Books provided under paragraph (1) are to be known as 'registers of marriage services'.\n- (3) A register of marriage services provided under paragraph (1) must meet the requirements of paragraphs (4) and (5).\n- (4) The register must be made of durable material.\n- (5) For the purposes of enabling a record to be made in the register under regulation 3 in respect of a marriage, the register must be printed in such a way that it-\n\n( a ) 1949 c. 76 (12 & 13 Geo 6). Section 74 was amended by Schedule 2 to the Registration Service Act 1953 (c. 37) and by paragraph 5(1)(d) of Schedule 2 to the Transfer of Functions (Registration) Order 2008 (S.I. 2008/678) and subsequently renumbered as section 74(1) by article 12 of the Registration of Marriages etc. (Electronic Communications and Electronic Storage) Order 2009 (S.I. 2009/2821). Section 74(1) was amended by paragraph 19 of Schedule 15 to the Immigration Act 2016 (c. 19) and paragraph 43 of Schedule 1 to the Registration of Marriages Regulations 2021 (S.I. 2021/411), which also inserted subsection (1A).\n\n( b ) See section 68(2) of the Marriage Act 1949. The certification function of the Admiralty under that section was transferred to the Secretary of State by the Defence (Transfer of Functions) Act 1964 (c. 15).\n\n( c ) Section 78(2) of the Marriage Act 1949 provides for references to the Church of England to be construed as including references to the Church in Wales.", + "recall": 0.9795918367346939, + "true_md": "S T A T U T O R Y I N S T R U M E N T S\n\n# 2021 No. 538\n\n# MARRIAGE, ENGLAND AND WALES\n\nThe Marriage (Keeping of Records in Churches and Chapels) Regulations 2021 \n\nThe Registrar General makes these Regulations with the approval of the Secretary of State in exercise of the powers conferred by section 74(1)(c)(v), (1A)(a) and (3) of the Marriage Act 1949( a ). \n\n1. —(1) These Regulations may be cited as the Marriage (Keeping of Records in Churches and Chapels) Regulations 2021. \n\n(4) In these Regulations, “chapel” does not include a chapel to which Part 5 of the Marriage Act 1949 (marriages in naval, military and air force chapels) applies( b ). \n\n(3) These Regulations extend to England and Wales. \n\n(2) These Regulations come into force on 4th May 2021. \n\n## Citation, commencement, extent and interpretation\n\n## Duty of parochial church councils to provide registers of marriage services\n\n2. —(1) The parochial church council of a parish must provide books for the purpose of making records under regulation 3 to each church and chapel of the Church of England( c ) in that parish in which banns of matrimony may be published. \n\n(2) Books provided under paragraph (1) are to be known as “registers of marriage services”. \n\n(3) A register of marriage services provided under paragraph (1) must meet the requirements of paragraphs (4) and (5). \n\n(4) The register must be made of durable material. \n\n(5) For the purposes of enabling a record to be made in the register under regulation 3 in respect of a marriage, the register must be printed in such a way that it— \n\n( a ) 1949 c. 76 (12 & 13 Geo 6). Section 74 was amended by Schedule 2 to the Registration Service Act 1953 (c. 37) and by paragraph 5(1)(d) of Schedule 2 to the Transfer of Functions (Registration) Order 2008 (S.I. 2008/678) and subsequently renumbered as section 74(1) by article 12 of the Registration of Marriages etc. (Electronic Communications and Electronic Storage) Order 2009 (S.I. 2009/2821). Section 74(1) was amended by paragraph 19 of Schedule 15 to the Immigration Act 2016 (c. 19) and paragraph 43 of Schedule 1 to the Registration of Marriages Regulations 2021 (S.I. 2021/411), which also inserted subsection (1A). \n\n( b ) See section 68(2) of the Marriage Act 1949. The certification function of the Admiralty under that section was transferred to the Secretary of State by the Defence (Transfer of Functions) Act 1964 (c. 15). \n\n( c ) Section 78(2) of the Marriage Act 1949 provides for references to the Church of England to be construed as including references to the Church in Wales." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8345189516518399, + "doc_id": "4956a1b464acef7f6a4e86bc8a790a8c8fe96d9ffda72a1a159c6489aa78a1dd", + "edit_distance": 0.1594488188976378, + "f1_score": 0.9135135135135135, + "meteor": 0.915308222983705, + "precision": 0.8941798941798942, + "pred_md": "## S T A T U T O R Y I N S T R U M E N T S\n\n## 2020 No. 438\n\n## TAXES\n\n## The International Tax Compliance (Amendment) Regulations 2020\n\nMade\n\n-\n\n-\n\n-\n\n-\n\n20th April 2020\n\nLaid before the House of Commons\n\n21st April 2020\n\nComing into force\n\n- -\n\n13th May 2020\n\nThe Treasury make these Regulations in exercise of the powers conferred by section 222 of the Finance Act 2013( a ):\n\n## Citation and commencement\n\n- 1. These Regulations may be cited as the International Tax Compliance (Amendment) Regulations 2020 and come into force on 13th May 2020.\n\n## Amendments to the International Tax Compliance Regulations 2015\n\n- 2. -(1) The International Tax Compliance Regulations 2015( b ) are amended as follows.\n- (2) In regulation 1(3)(b)(i), for '16th May 2019' substitute '19th April 2020'( c ).\n- (3) In regulation 3(4A)(a), at the beginning insert 'subject to regulation 24(3)'.\n- (4) In regulation 24-\n- (a) in the table in paragraph (2), in the column headed 'the CRS'-\n- (i) at the beginning of the entry for 'new account' insert 'subject to paragraph (3)', and\n- (ii) at the beginning of the entry for 'pre-existing account' insert 'subject to regulation 3(4A)(a) and paragraph (3)', and\n- (b) after paragraph (2) insert-\n- '(3) In respect of the accounts listed in paragraph (4)-\n\n( a ) 2013 c. 29; section 222 was amended by section 50 of the Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33) but the amendments are not relevant to these Regulations.\n\n( b ) S.I. 2015/878 (referred to in these footnotes as 'the principal Regulations'); relevant amending instruments are S.I. 2017/598, 2018/490 and 2019/881.\n\n( c ) In accordance with the common reporting standard for automatic exchange of financial account information developed by the Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development and adopted by the United Kingdom, the United Kingdom exchanges information received from financial institutions under the principal Regulations with a territory which is a 'Reportable Jurisdiction' under the CRS and with which the United Kingdom has entered into international exchange arrangements for that year. Reportable Jurisdictions are identified in a published list available at https://www.gov.uk/hmrcinternal-manuals/international-exchange-of-information/ieim402340. A hard copy of this list is available for inspection at the offices of HMRC at 10 South Colonnade, 9th Floor, Canary Wharf, London E14 4PU.", + "recall": 0.9337016574585635, + "true_md": "S T A T U T O R Y I N S T R U M E N T S\n\n# 2020 No. 438\n\n# TAXES\n\nThe International Tax Compliance (Amendment) Regulations 2020 \n\nThe Treasury make these Regulations in exercise of the powers conferred by section 222 of the Finance Act 2013( a ): \n\n1. These Regulations may be cited as the International Tax Compliance (Amendment) Regulations 2020 and come into force on 13th May 2020. \n\n## Citation and commencement\n\n## Amendments to the International Tax Compliance Regulations 2015\n\n- 2. —(1) The International Tax Compliance Regulations 2015( b ) are amended as follows. \n\n- (2) In regulation 1(3)(b)(i), for “16th May 2019” substitute “19th April 2020”( c ). \n\n- (3) In regulation 3(4A)(a), at the beginning insert “subject to regulation 24(3)”. \n\n- (4) In regulation 24— \n\n- (a) in the table in paragraph (2), in the column headed “the CRS”— \n\n- (i) at the beginning of the entry for “new account” insert “subject to paragraph (3)”, and \n\n- (ii) at the beginning of the entry for “pre-existing account” insert “subject to regulation 3(4A)(a) and paragraph (3)”, and \n\n- (b) after paragraph (2) insert— \n\n- “(3) In respect of the accounts listed in paragraph (4)— \n\n( a ) 2013 c. 29; section 222 was amended by section 50 of the Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33) but the amendments are not relevant to these Regulations. \n\n( b ) S.I. 2015/878 (referred to in these footnotes as “the principal Regulations”); relevant amending instruments are S.I. 2017/598, 2018/490 and 2019/881. \n\n( c ) In accordance with the common reporting standard for automatic exchange of financial account information developed by the Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development and adopted by the United Kingdom, the United Kingdom exchanges information received from financial institutions under the principal Regulations with a territory which is a “Reportable Jurisdiction” under the CRS and with which the United Kingdom has entered into international exchange arrangements for that year. Reportable Jurisdictions are identified in a published list available at https://www.gov.uk/hmrc- internal-manuals/international-exchange-of-information/ieim402340. A hard copy of this list is available for inspection at the offices of HMRC at 10 South Colonnade, 9th Floor, Canary Wharf, London E14 4PU." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9181155274050351, + "doc_id": "ca8b2a67ce72161aa713f2c20022d4ce6a005a1a8ea3ba3ef2143afebefd03c1", + "edit_distance": 0.08280254777070063, + "f1_score": 0.9655172413793103, + "meteor": 0.9557473878085929, + "precision": 0.9710982658959537, + "pred_md": "modification specified in sub-paragraph (3), in relation to any appeal made in relation to the decision to send an alert.'.\n\n(5) For paragraph 47(3) substitute-\n\n'(3) The modification to the principal Regulations is that regulation 68(5)(b) is to be read as if the words 'and direct the alert be withdrawn or amended accordingly' were omitted.'.\n\n11th May 2021\n\nGrimstone Minister of State Department for Business, Energy and Industrial Strategy\n\n## EXPLANATORY NOTE\n\n(This note is not part of the Regulations)\n\nThese Regulations are made in exercise of the powers conferred by section 8(1) of, and paragraph 21(b) of Schedule 7 to, the European Union (Withdrawal) Act 2018 (c. 16), in order to address failures of retained EU law to operate effectively and other deficiencies arising from the withdrawal of the UK from the European Union.\n\nRegulation 2 makes amendments to Part 3 of Schedule 1 to the Recognition of Professional Qualifications (Amendment etc.) (EU Exit) Regulations 2019 (S.I. 2019/312) in order to remove ineffective obligations on designated competent authorities in respect of alerts made before IP completion day.\n\nA full impact assessment has not been produced for this instrument as no, or no significant, impact on the private or voluntary sector is foreseen. An Explanatory Memorandum has been published alongside these Regulations on www.legislation.gov.uk.\n\n' Crown copyright 2021\n\nPrinted and published in the UK by The Stationery Office Limited under the authority and superintendence of Jeff James, Controller of Her Majesty's Stationery Office and Queen's Printer of Acts of Parliament.\n\n£4.90\n\nhttp://www.legislation.gov.uk/id/uksi/2021/574\n\n2", + "recall": 0.96, + "true_md": "modification specified in sub-paragraph (3), in relation to any appeal made in relation to the decision to send an alert.”. \n\n(5) For paragraph 47(3) substitute— \n\n“(3) The modification to the principal Regulations is that regulation 68(5)(b) is to be read as if the words “and direct the alert be withdrawn or amended accordingly” were omitted.”. \n\nGrimstone Minister of State Department for Business, Energy and Industrial Strategy \n\n11th May 2021 \n\n(This note is not part of the Regulations) \n\nThese Regulations are made in exercise of the powers conferred by section 8(1) of, and paragraph 21(b) of Schedule 7 to, the European Union (Withdrawal) Act 2018 (c. 16), in order to address failures of retained EU law to operate effectively and other deficiencies arising from the withdrawal of the UK from the European Union. \n\nRegulation 2 makes amendments to Part 3 of Schedule 1 to the Recognition of Professional Qualifications (Amendment etc.) (EU Exit) Regulations 2019 (S.I. 2019/312) in order to remove ineffective obligations on designated competent authorities in respect of alerts made before IP completion day. \n\nA full impact assessment has not been produced for this instrument as no, or no significant, impact on the private or voluntary sector is foreseen. An Explanatory Memorandum has been published alongside these Regulations on www.legislation.gov.uk. \n\n## EXPLANATORY NOTE\n\n© Crown copyright 2021 \n\nPrinted and published in the UK by The Stationery Office Limited under the authority and superintendence of Jeff James, Controller of Her Majesty’s Stationery Office and Queen’s Printer of Acts of Parliament. \n\n£4.90 \n\nhttp://www.legislation.gov.uk/id/uksi/2021/574" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.32223324431479844, + "doc_id": "a3f5fb936d05db2b08cad885ec3b2ebe88c44583ec948f81cb1108bcda4a5a0f", + "edit_distance": 0.4368932038834951, + "f1_score": 0.9427312775330396, + "meteor": 0.7774440082497339, + "precision": 0.963963963963964, + "pred_md": "| European Tour - Staysure PGA Seniors Championship |\n|------------------------------------------------------------------|\n| Ladies European Tour - ISPS HANDA World Invitational |\n| London Diamond League (Anniversary Games) |\n| World Superbike - World Championship - British Round |\n| FIM Speedway Grand Prix World Championship - British Round |\n| 2021 Great Britain Sail Grand Prix I Plymouth |\n| The Hundred Cricket |\n| Motorsport UK - Formula Student 2021 |\n| Motorsport UK - Silverstone Classic & Support Races |\n| Motorsport UK - Festival of Speed |\n| British Grand Prix |\n| Motorsport UK - Porsche Sprint Challenge GB and supporting races |\n| NASCAR Whelan Euro Series and support races |\n| Motorsport UK - British GT Championship and support races |\n| British Kart Grand Prix |\n| Formula E |\n| The Coral Eclipse - Sandown horse-racing |\n| The Moet & Chandon July Festival at Newmarket horse-racing |\n| QIPCO King George Diamond Weekend horse-racing |\n| Qatar Goodwood Festival horse-racing |\n| British Open Wheelchair Tennis Championships |\n| Polaris Squads |\n| Equestrian Jumping - Wettenhall International |\n| Equestrian Eventing - Keysoe International |\n| Equestrian Dressage - Hartpury International |\n| Equestrian Eventing - Barbury Castle International |\n| Equestrian Jumping - Hickstead |\n| Equestrian Eventing - Burgham International |\n| Equestrian Eventing - Bishop Burton International |\n| European Tour - Hero Open |\n| European Tour - English Open |\n| Ladies European Tour - Trust Golf Women's Scottish Open |\n| Moto GP - World Championship Grand Prix - British Round |\n\n54", + "recall": 0.9224137931034483, + "true_md": "European Tour – Staysure PGA Seniors Championship \n\nLadies European Tour – ISPS HANDA World Invitational \n\nLondon Diamond League (Anniversary Games) \n\nWorld Superbike – World Championship – British Round \n\nFIM Speedway Grand Prix World Championship – British Round \n\n2021 Great Britain Sail Grand Prix I Plymouth \n\nThe Hundred Cricket \n\nMotorsport UK – Formula Student 2021 \n\nMotorsport UK – Silverstone Classic & Support Races \n\nMotorsport UK – Festival of Speed \n\nBritish Grand Prix \n\nMotorsport UK – Porsche Sprint Challenge GB and supporting races \n\nNASCAR Whelan Euro Series and support races \n\nMotorsport UK – British GT Championship and support races \n\nBritish Kart Grand Prix \n\nFormula E \n\nThe Coral Eclipse – Sandown horse-racing \n\nThe Moet & Chandon July Festival at Newmarket horse-racing \n\nQIPCO King George Diamond Weekend horse-racing \n\nQatar Goodwood Festival horse-racing \n\nBritish Open Wheelchair Tennis Championships \n\nPolaris Squads \n\nProfessional Darts Corporation – Betfred World Matchplay Darts \n\nEquestrian Jumping – Wettenhall International \n\nEquestrian Eventing – Keysoe International \n\nEquestrian Jumping – Harthill International \n\nEquestrian Dressage – Hartpury International \n\nEquestrian Eventing – Barbury Castle International \n\nEquestrian Jumping – Hickstead \n\nEquestrian Eventing – Burgham International \n\nEquestrian Eventing – Bishop Burton International \n\nEuropean Tour – Hero Open \n\nEuropean Tour – English Open \n\nLadies European Tour – Trust Golf Women’s Scottish Open \n\nMoto GP – World Championship Grand Prix – British Round \n\n54" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9396239978613964, + "doc_id": "cd85ad51079da702f5539ca6d50cb21485d529fe6caa24fb22bf0c10099d39cb", + "edit_distance": 0.830703012912482, + "f1_score": 0.9696969696969697, + "meteor": 0.7371649112401213, + "precision": 0.9674418604651163, + "pred_md": "- of crude oil based fuels to consumers in the United Kingdom or persons carrying on business in the United Kingdom; and\n- (b) the activities are required to ensure continued safe operation of the facility,\n\nwhere they have travelled to the United Kingdom in the course of their work.\n\n- (2) For the purposes of sub-paragraph (1)-\n- (a) a facility has a capacity in excess of 20,000 tonnes at any time if it was used in the previous calendar year for the purposes of downstream oil sector activities in relation to more than that number of tonnes of oil;\n- (b) 'specified activities' are-\n- (i) storing oil,\n- (ii) handling oil,\n- (iii) the carriage of oil by sea or inland water,\n- (iv) conveying oil by pipes,\n- (v) refining or otherwise processing oil.\n- 29. -(1) A worker required to undertake or commence within the period during which they would, but for this paragraph, have had to self-isolate in accordance with regulation 9-\n- (a) activities on or in relation to an offshore installation;\n- (b) activities on or in relation to upstream petroleum infrastructure;\n- (c) critical safety work on an offshore installation or well being decommissioned or preserved pending demolition or reuse; or\n- (d) activities for the provision of workers, goods, materials or equipment or other essential services required to support the safe operation of the activities referred to in paragraphs (a) to (c),\n\nwhere they have travelled to the United Kingdom in the course of their work.\n\n- (2) For the purposes of sub-paragraph (1)-\n- (a) 'offshore installation' has the meaning given in section 44 of the Petroleum Act 1998( a );\n- (b) 'upstream petroleum infrastructure' has the meaning given in section 9H of the Petroleum Act 1998( b );\n- (c) 'well' has the meaning given in section 45A(10) of the Petroleum Act 1998( c ).\n- 30. A postal operator, as defined in section 27(3) of the Postal Services Act 2011( d ), where they have travelled to the United Kingdom in the course of their work.\n- 31. A worker with specialist technical skills, where those specialist technical skills are required for essential or emergency works or services (including commissioning, maintenance, and repairs and safety checks) to ensure the continued production, supply, movement, manufacture, storage or preservation of goods, where they have travelled to the United Kingdom in the course of their work or otherwise to commence or resume their work.\n- 32. A worker with specialist technical skills, where those specialist technical skills are required for essential or emergency works (including construction, commissioning, installation, maintenance, repairs and safety checks) or to fulfil contractual obligations or warranty specifications in, or in connection with, waste management facilities used for the management, sorting, treatment, recovery, or disposal of waste (including energy from waste), where they have travelled to the United Kingdom in the course of their work.\n\n( a ) 1998 c. 17. Section 44 was amended by paragraph 11 of Schedule 1 to the Energy Act 2008 (c. 32).\n\n( b ) Section 9H was substituted by section 74(2) of the Energy Act 2016 (c. 20).\n\n( c ) Section 45A was inserted by section 75(1) of the Energy Act 2008. There are amendments to section 45A(10) but none is relevant.\n\n( d ) 2011 c. 5.\n\n43", + "recall": 0.9719626168224299, + "true_md": "of crude oil based fuels to consumers in the United Kingdom or persons carrying on business in the United Kingdom; and \n\nwhere they have travelled to the United Kingdom in the course of their work. \n\n(2) For the purposes of sub-paragraph (1)— \n\n29. —(1) A worker required to undertake or commence within the period during which they would, but for this paragraph, have had to self-isolate in accordance with regulation 9— \n\nwhere they have travelled to the United Kingdom in the course of their work. \n\n(2) For the purposes of sub-paragraph (1)— \n\n30. A postal operator, as defined in section 27(3) of the Postal Services Act 2011( d ), where they have travelled to the United Kingdom in the course of their work. \n\n31. A worker with specialist technical skills, where those specialist technical skills are required for essential or emergency works or services (including commissioning, maintenance, and repairs and safety checks) to ensure the continued production, supply, movement, manufacture, storage or preservation of goods, where they have travelled to the United Kingdom in the course of their work or otherwise to commence or resume their work. \n\n32. A worker with specialist technical skills, where those specialist technical skills are required for essential or emergency works (including construction, commissioning, installation, maintenance, repairs and safety checks) or to fulfil contractual obligations or warranty specifications in, or in connection with, waste management facilities used for the management, sorting, treatment, recovery, or disposal of waste (including energy from waste), where they have travelled to the United Kingdom in the course of their work. \n\n( a ) 1998 c. 17. Section 44 was amended by paragraph 11 of Schedule 1 to the Energy Act 2008 (c. 32). \n\n( b ) Section 9H was substituted by section 74(2) of the Energy Act 2016 (c. 20). \n\n( c ) Section 45A was inserted by section 75(1) of the Energy Act 2008. There are amendments to section 45A(10) but none is relevant. \n\n( d ) 2011 c. 5. \n\n43\n\n- (b) the activities are required to ensure continued safe operation of the facility, \n\n- (a) a facility has a capacity in excess of 20,000 tonnes at any time if it was used in the previous calendar year for the purposes of downstream oil sector activities in relation to more than that number of tonnes of oil; \n\n- (b) “specified activities” are— \n\n- (i) storing oil, \n\n- (ii) handling oil, \n\n- (iii) the carriage of oil by sea or inland water, \n\n- (iv) conveying oil by pipes, \n\n- (v) refining or otherwise processing oil. \n\n- (a) activities on or in relation to an offshore installation; \n\n- (b) activities on or in relation to upstream petroleum infrastructure; \n\n- (c) critical safety work on an offshore installation or well being decommissioned or preserved pending demolition or reuse; or \n\n- (d) activities for the provision of workers, goods, materials or equipment or other essential services required to support the safe operation of the activities referred to in paragraphs (a) to (c), \n\n- (a) “offshore installation” has the meaning given in section 44 of the Petroleum Act 1998( a ); \n\n- (b) “upstream petroleum infrastructure” has the meaning given in section 9H of the Petroleum Act 1998( b ); \n\n- (c) “well” has the meaning given in section 45A(10) of the Petroleum Act 1998( c )." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9509371840194855, + "doc_id": "8129e1aaca170b6b8405c981a5b252879d672d3ce1cbd6c2b26708ba634e5d90", + "edit_distance": 0.43503649635036495, + "f1_score": 0.9556650246305418, + "meteor": 0.8340884013641464, + "precision": 0.9603960396039604, + "pred_md": "- (ii) to access critical public services, including-\n- (aa) social services,\n- (bb) services provided to victims (such as victims of crime),\n- (iii) to move to a different place for self-isolation where it becomes impracticable to remain at the address at which they are self-isolating;\n- (j) for the purposes of, or connected with, undertaking a test in accordance with Schedule 8 or Schedule 10;\n- (k) if self-isolating in a goods vehicle by virtue of paragraph (3)(d)-\n- (i) for sanitary reasons,\n- (ii) to take exercise outside,\n- (iii) where required or permitted by that paragraph, to move to a different place for selfisolation,\n- (iv) to inspect the vehicle or its load or to carry out any other task required for the safe and continued operation of the vehicle, including refuelling, and\n- (v) for any other reason or purpose specified in this paragraph.\n- (12) For the purposes of this regulation, the place referred to in paragraph (3) includes the premises where P is self-isolating together with any garden, yard, passage, stair, garage, outhouse, or other appurtenance of such premises.\n- (13) If P is a child, any person who has custody or charge of P during P's period of self-isolation must ensure, so far as reasonably practicable, that P self-isolates in accordance with this regulation.\n- (14) If P has arrived from Wales or Scotland and is in England, temporarily, for a reason which would constitute an exception under paragraph (11), P is not required to comply with this regulation.\n- (15) If P is a person described-\n- (a) in paragraph 1(1) of Schedule 4-\n- (i) where P is a person described in paragraph 1(1)(a) to (k) of, and meets the conditions set out in paragraph 1(3) of, that Schedule, P is not required to comply with this regulation,\n- (ii) in any other case, paragraph (3)(b) and (c) does not apply to P;\n- (b) in paragraph 1(2) of Schedule 4 (essential work for foreign country etc), P is not required to comply with this regulation;\n- (c) in paragraph 33 of Schedule 4 (healthcare), paragraph (2) does not require P to remain in isolation in the circumstances set out in paragraph 33 of that Schedule;\n- (d) in paragraph 43 of Schedule 4 (horticultural work)-\n- (i) paragraph (2) does not require P to remain in isolation from any other person who is living or working on the specified farm,\n- (ii) paragraph (3)(a)(i) applies with the modification that the address specified by P as the address at which they intend to self-isolate must be the specified farm, where 'specified farm' has the meaning given in paragraph 43 of Schedule 4;\n- (e) either-\n- (i) in paragraph 44 of Schedule 4 (elite sports),\n- (ii) in sub-paragraphs (1)(h) to (l) of paragraph 2 of Schedule 11 (exemptions from additional measures applicable to arrivals from category 3 countries and territories),\n- P satisfies the requirements of paragraph (2) if P complies with the relevant conditions specified in paragraph 44(4) of Schedule 4;\n\n16", + "recall": 0.9509803921568627, + "true_md": "- (ii) to access critical public services, including— \n\n- (aa) social services, \n\n- (bb) services provided to victims (such as victims of crime), \n\n- (iii) to move to a different place for self-isolation where it becomes impracticable to remain at the address at which they are self-isolating; \n\n- (j) for the purposes of, or connected with, undertaking a test in accordance with Schedule 8 or Schedule 10; \n\n- (k) if self-isolating in a goods vehicle by virtue of paragraph (3)(d)— \n\n- (i) for sanitary reasons, \n\n- (ii) to take exercise outside, \n\n- (iii) where required or permitted by that paragraph, to move to a different place for self- isolation, \n\n- (iv) to inspect the vehicle or its load or to carry out any other task required for the safe and continued operation of the vehicle, including refuelling, and \n\n- (v) for any other reason or purpose specified in this paragraph. \n\n- (a) in paragraph 1(1) of Schedule 4— \n\n- (i) where P is a person described in paragraph 1(1)(a) to (k) of, and meets the conditions set out in paragraph 1(3) of, that Schedule, P is not required to comply with this regulation, \n\n- (ii) in any other case, paragraph (3)(b) and (c) does not apply to P; \n\n- (b) in paragraph 1(2) of Schedule 4 (essential work for foreign country etc), P is not required to comply with this regulation; \n\n- (c) in paragraph 33 of Schedule 4 (healthcare), paragraph (2) does not require P to remain in isolation in the circumstances set out in paragraph 33 of that Schedule; \n\n- (d) in paragraph 43 of Schedule 4 (horticultural work)— \n\n- (i) paragraph (2) does not require P to remain in isolation from any other person who is living or working on the specified farm, \n\n- (ii) paragraph (3)(a)(i) applies with the modification that the address specified by P as the address at which they intend to self-isolate must be the specified farm, where “specified farm” has the meaning given in paragraph 43 of Schedule 4; \n\n- (e) either— \n\n- (i) in paragraph 44 of Schedule 4 (elite sports), \n\n- (ii) in sub-paragraphs (1)(h) to (l) of paragraph 2 of Schedule 11 (exemptions from additional measures applicable to arrivals from category 3 countries and territories), \n\nP satisfies the requirements of paragraph (2) if P complies with the relevant conditions specified in paragraph 44(4) of Schedule 4; \n\n(15) If P is a person described— \n\n(14) If P has arrived from Wales or Scotland and is in England, temporarily, for a reason which would constitute an exception under paragraph (11), P is not required to comply with this regulation. \n\n(13) If P is a child, any person who has custody or charge of P during P’s period of self-isolation must ensure, so far as reasonably practicable, that P self-isolates in accordance with this regulation. \n\n(12) For the purposes of this regulation, the place referred to in paragraph (3) includes the premises where P is self-isolating together with any garden, yard, passage, stair, garage, outhouse, or other appurtenance of such premises. \n\n16" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9137878430756178, + "doc_id": "42ee9a7cb0535fb59006a8d30e44975203082d78adb137d95df9914952a9b107", + "edit_distance": 0.8575581395348837, + "f1_score": 0.959568733153639, + "meteor": 0.6672018832346908, + "precision": 0.9621621621621622, + "pred_md": "- (ii) the land is restored to its condition before the development took place, or, if the developer is not also the local planning authority, to such other state as may be agreed in writing between the local planning authority and the developer.\n\n## Interpretation of Class A\n\n- A.3 -(1)For the purposes of Class A-\n\n'emergency' means an event or situation which threatens serious damage to human welfare in a place in the United Kingdom;\n\n'health service body' means-\n\n- (a) the National Health Service Commissioning Board;\n- (b) the Care Quality Commission( a );\n- (c) a clinical commissioning group established under section 14D of the National Health Service Act 2006( b );\n- (d) Health Education England( c );\n- (e) the Health Research Authority( d );\n- (f) the Health and Social Care Information Centre( e );\n- (g) the Human Fertilisation and Embryology Authority( ); f\n- (h) the Human Tissue Authority( g );\n- (i) Monitor( h );\n- (j) the National Institute for Health and Care Excellence( ); i\n- (k) a Special Health Authority established under section 28 of that Act( ); j\n- (l) an NHS trust in England as defined in section 25 of that Act;\n- (m) an NHS foundation trust in England, as referred to in section 30(1) of that Act( k );\n- (n) a company formed under section 223 of that Act( ) and wholly owned by the l Secretary of State.\n- (2) For the purposes of paragraph (1), an event or situation threatens serious damage to human welfare only if it involves, causes or may cause-\n- (a) loss of human life;\n- (b) human illness or injury;\n- (c) homelessness;\n- (d) damage to property;\n- (e) disruption of a supply of money, food, water, energy, or fuel;\n- (f) disruption of a system of communication;\n- (g) disruption of facilities for transport; or\n\n( a ) The Care Quality Commission was established by section 1 of the Social Care Act 2008 (c. 14).\n\n( b ) 2006 c.41.\n\n( c ) Health Education England was established by section 96 of the Care Act 2014 (c. 23).\n\n( d ) The Health Research Authority was established by section 109 of the Care Act 2014.\n\n( e ) The Health and Social Care Information Centre was established by section 252 of the Health and Social Care Act 2012 (c. 7) ('the 2012 Act').\n\n- ( f ) The Human Fertilisation and Embryology Authority was established by section 5 of the Human Fertilisation and Embryology Act 1990 (c.37).\n\n( g ) The Human Tissue Authority was established by section 13 of the Human Tissue Act 2004 (c.30).\n\n- ( h ) Monitor was established by section 61 of the Health and Social Care Act 2012.\n- ( ) i The National Institute for Health and Care Excellence was established by section 232 of the 2012 Act.\n- ( ) j Section 28 was amended by paragraph 13 of Part 2 of Schedule 4 to the Health and Social Care 2012 (c. 14).\n- ( k ) Section 30 was amended by section 159(1) of the 2012 Act.\n- ( ) l Section 223 was amended by paragraph 117(1) of the 2012 Act and S.I. 2009/1941.\n\n3", + "recall": 0.956989247311828, + "true_md": "## Interpretation of Class A\n\n( a ) The Care Quality Commission was established by section 1 of the Social Care Act 2008 (c. 14). \n\n( b ) 2006 c.41.\n\n( c ) Health Education England was established by section 96 of the Care Act 2014 (c. 23). \n\n( d ) The Health Research Authority was established by section 109 of the Care Act 2014. \n\n( e ) The Health and Social Care Information Centre was established by section 252 of the Health and Social Care Act 2012 (c. 7) (“the 2012 Act”). \n\n( f ) The Human Fertilisation and Embryology Authority was established by section 5 of the Human Fertilisation and Embryology Act 1990 (c.37).\n\n( g ) The Human Tissue Authority was established by section 13 of the Human Tissue Act 2004 (c.30). \n\n( h ) Monitor was established by section 61 of the Health and Social Care Act 2012. \n\n( i ) The National Institute for Health and Care Excellence was established by section 232 of the 2012 Act. \n\n( j ) Section 28 was amended by paragraph 13 of Part 2 of Schedule 4 to the Health and Social Care 2012 (c. 14). \n\n( k ) Section 30 was amended by section 159(1) of the 2012 Act. \n\n( l ) Section 223 was amended by paragraph 117(1) of the 2012 Act and S.I. 2009/1941. \n\n3\n\n(2) For the purposes of paragraph (1), an event or situation threatens serious damage to human welfare only if it involves, causes or may cause— \n\n“emergency” means an event or situation which threatens serious damage to human welfare in a place in the United Kingdom; \n\n“health service body” means— \n\nA.3 —(1)For the purposes of Class A— \n\n- (ii) the land is restored to its condition before the development took place, or, if the developer is not also the local planning authority, to such other state as may be agreed in writing between the local planning authority and the developer. \n\n- (a) the National Health Service Commissioning Board; \n\n- (b) the Care Quality Commission( a ); \n\n- (c) a clinical commissioning group established under section 14D of the National Health Service Act 2006( b ); \n\n- (d) Health Education England( c ); \n\n- (e) the Health Research Authority( d ); \n\n- (f) the Health and Social Care Information Centre( e ); \n\n- (g) the Human Fertilisation and Embryology Authority( f ); \n\n- (h) the Human Tissue Authority( g ); \n\n- (i) Monitor( h ); \n\n- (j) the National Institute for Health and Care Excellence( i ); \n\n- (k) a Special Health Authority established under section 28 of that Act( j ); \n\n- (l) an NHS trust in England as defined in section 25 of that Act; \n\n- (m) an NHS foundation trust in England, as referred to in section 30(1) of that Act( k ); \n\n- (n) a company formed under section 223 of that Act( l ) and wholly owned by the Secretary of State. \n\n- (a) loss of human life; \n\n- (b) human illness or injury; \n\n- (c) homelessness; \n\n- (d) damage to property; \n\n- (e) disruption of a supply of money, food, water, energy, or fuel; \n\n- (f) disruption of a system of communication; \n\n- (g) disruption of facilities for transport; or" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8982810761791999, + "doc_id": "68c2c6d1317eb359cf54902c437101fb89d8c3e9cdd73b9ba82c38fc2b261dc3", + "edit_distance": 0.13813229571984437, + "f1_score": 0.9572649572649572, + "meteor": 0.9747924734766021, + "precision": 0.9385474860335196, + "pred_md": "## S T A T U T O R Y I N S T R U M E N T S\n\n## 2020 No. 471\n\n## EDUCATION, ENGLAND\n\nThe Special Educational Needs and Disability (Coronavirus) (Amendment) Regulations 2020\n\nMade\n\n-\n\n-\n\n-\n\n-\n\n28th April 2020\n\nLaid before Parliament\n\n30th April 2020\n\nComing into force\n\n-\n\n-\n\n1st May 2020\n\nThe Secretary of State makes the following Regulations in exercise of the powers conferred by sections 30(8), 31(4), 36(11), 37(4), 44(7)(b) and (c), 47, 49(3), 51(4), 56(1), 71(11), 73(4), 74(3) and 135(2) and (3) of the Children and Families Act 2014( a ) and sections 29(3) and 569(4) of the Education Act 1996( b ).\n\n## Citation and commencement\n\n- 1. These Regulations may be cited as the Special Educational Needs and Disability (Coronavirus) (Amendment) Regulations 2020 and come into force on 1st May 2020.\n\n## Review and expiry\n\n- 2. -(1) The Secretary of State must review the effectiveness of these Regulations during the period for which they have effect.\n- (2) These Regulations cease to have effect on 25th September 2020.\n\n## Amendment of the Special Educational Needs and Disability Regulations 2014\n\n- 3. The Special Educational Needs and Disability Regulations 2014( c ) are amended as follows.\n- 4. In regulation 2(1) (interpretation), at the appropriate place insert-\n- ''coronavirus' means severe acute respiratory syndrome coronavirus 2 (SARS-CoV-2); '.\n- 5. After regulation 2 (interpretation) insert-\n\n## ' Relaxation of time periods due to coronavirus exception\n\n2A. -(1) Where the coronavirus exception applies, any requirement in any of the regulations specified in paragraph (3) for action to be taken within a specified period of\n\n( a ) 2014 c.6. Section 30(8) was amended by Schedule 2, Part 1, paragraph 4 to the Children and Social Work Act 2017 (c.16).\n\n( b ) 1996 c.56. Section 29(3) was amended by Schedule 30, paragraph 67 and Schedule 31 to the School Standards and Framework Act 1998 (c.31) and S.I. 2010/1158 and section 569(4) was amended by section 8(1) and (5) of the Education (Wales) Measure 2009.\n\n( c ) S.I. 2014/1530, relevant amending instruments are S.I. 2014/2096, S.I. 2015/359 and S.I. 2017/1306.", + "recall": 0.9767441860465116, + "true_md": "S T A T U T O R Y I N S T R U M E N T S\n\n# 2020 No. 471\n\n# EDUCATION, ENGLAND\n\nThe Special Educational Needs and Disability (Coronavirus) (Amendment) Regulations 2020 \n\nThe Secretary of State makes the following Regulations in exercise of the powers conferred by sections 30(8), 31(4), 36(11), 37(4), 44(7)(b) and (c), 47, 49(3), 51(4), 56(1), 71(11), 73(4), 74(3) and 135(2) and (3) of the Children and Families Act 2014( a ) and sections 29(3) and 569(4) of the Education Act 1996( b ). \n\n1. These Regulations may be cited as the Special Educational Needs and Disability (Coronavirus) (Amendment) Regulations 2020 and come into force on 1st May 2020. \n\n## Citation and commencement\n\n## Review and expiry\n\n2. —(1) The Secretary of State must review the effectiveness of these Regulations during the period for which they have effect. \n\n- (2) These Regulations cease to have effect on 25th September 2020. \n\n## Amendment of the Special Educational Needs and Disability Regulations 2014\n\n3. The Special Educational Needs and Disability Regulations 2014( c ) are amended as follows. \n\n4. In regulation 2(1) (interpretation), at the appropriate place insert— \n\n““coronavirus” means severe acute respiratory syndrome coronavirus 2 (SARS-CoV-2); ”. \n\n5. After regulation 2 (interpretation) insert— \n\n2A. —(1) Where the coronavirus exception applies, any requirement in any of the regulations specified in paragraph (3) for action to be taken within a specified period of \n\n## “ Relaxation of time periods due to coronavirus exception\n\n( a ) 2014 c.6. Section 30(8) was amended by Schedule 2, Part 1, paragraph 4 to the Children and Social Work Act 2017 (c.16). \n\n( b ) 1996 c.56. Section 29(3) was amended by Schedule 30, paragraph 67 and Schedule 31 to the School Standards and Framework Act 1998 (c.31) and S.I. 2010/1158 and section 569(4) was amended by section 8(1) and (5) of the Education (Wales) Measure 2009. \n\n( c ) S.I. 2014/1530, relevant amending instruments are S.I. 2014/2096, S.I. 2015/359 and S.I. 2017/1306." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9070735763662311, + "doc_id": "4dbb188425764256ead1e5c36828735590a04ed9d1ae3ccb44b4948f5f13250b", + "edit_distance": 0.5786963434022258, + "f1_score": 0.9690140845070422, + "meteor": 0.7595380827549831, + "precision": 0.9717514124293786, + "pred_md": "- (2) The coronavirus exception applies where it is not reasonably practicable for the local authority to meet the requirement specified in regulation 11(2)(a) for a reason relating to the incidence or transmission of coronavirus.'.\n\n## Amendment of the Special Educational Needs and Disability (Detained Persons) Regulations 2015\n\n- 18. The Special Educational Needs and Disability (Detained Persons) Regulations 2015( a ) are amended as follows.\n- 19. In regulation 2(1) (interpretation), at the appropriate place insert-\n- ''coronavirus' means severe acute respiratory syndrome coronavirus 2 (SARS-CoV-2); '.\n- 20. After regulation 2 (interpretation) insert-\n\n## ' Relaxation of time periods due to coronavirus exception\n\n- 2A. -(1) Where the coronavirus exception applies, any requirement in any of the regulations specified in paragraph (3) for action to be taken within a specified period of time or by a certain day is to be read instead as a requirement for such action to be taken as soon as reasonably practicable.\n- (2) The coronavirus exception applies where it is not reasonably practicable for a person to meet a requirement referred to in paragraph (1) for a reason relating to the incidence or transmission of coronavirus.\n- (3) The following regulations are specified for the purposes of paragraphs (1) and (2)-\n- (a) regulation 15(1) and (4) (needs assessments which are not completed);\n- (b) regulation 16(2), (3) and (4) (transfer of a kept EHC plan);\n- (c) regulation 17(1) and (2) (restriction on disclosure of EHC plans);\n- (d) regulation 19 (requirement to consider mediation);\n- (e) regulation 20(1) and (2) (where the appropriate person does not wish to or fails to pursue mediation);\n- (f) regulation 21 (mediation);\n- (g) regulation 24(1) and (3) (mediation certificate under section 55(5) of the Act);\n- (h) regulation 27(3) (steps to be taken by a home authority);\n- (i) regulation 29(2) and (6) (compliance with the orders of the First-tier Tribunal); and\n- (j) regulation 30(3) and (6) (unopposed appeals).'.\n- 21. In regulation 4 (determination whether or not special educational provision may be necessary), after paragraph (2) insert-\n- '(3) The local authority need not comply with the time limit referred to in paragraph (1) if it is impractical to do so because of a reason relating to the incidence or transmission of coronavirus.'.\n- 22. In regulation 5(4) (decision whether or not to conduct a detained person's EHC needs assessment)-\n- (a) at the end of sub-paragraph (b) omit 'or'; and\n- (b) at the end of sub-paragraph (c) insert-\n\n', or\n\n- (d) of a reason relating to the incidence or transmission of coronavirus'.\n\n( a ) S.I. 2015/62.\n\n4", + "recall": 0.9662921348314607, + "true_md": "(2) The coronavirus exception applies where it is not reasonably practicable for the local authority to meet the requirement specified in regulation 11(2)(a) for a reason relating to the incidence or transmission of coronavirus.”. \n\n19. In regulation 2(1) (interpretation), at the appropriate place insert— \n\n18. The Special Educational Needs and Disability (Detained Persons) Regulations 2015( a ) are amended as follows. \n\n20. After regulation 2 (interpretation) insert— \n\n2A. —(1) Where the coronavirus exception applies, any requirement in any of the regulations specified in paragraph (3) for action to be taken within a specified period of time or by a certain day is to be read instead as a requirement for such action to be taken as soon as reasonably practicable. \n\n(2) The coronavirus exception applies where it is not reasonably practicable for a person to meet a requirement referred to in paragraph (1) for a reason relating to the incidence or transmission of coronavirus. \n\n(3) The following regulations are specified for the purposes of paragraphs (1) and (2)— \n\n21. In regulation 4 (determination whether or not special educational provision may be necessary), after paragraph (2) insert— \n\n“(3) The local authority need not comply with the time limit referred to in paragraph (1) if it is impractical to do so because of a reason relating to the incidence or transmission of coronavirus.”. \n\n22. In regulation 5(4) (decision whether or not to conduct a detained person’s EHC needs assessment)— \n\n( a ) S.I. 2015/62. \n\n4\n\n- (a) at the end of sub-paragraph (b) omit “or”; and \n\n- (b) at the end of sub-paragraph (c) insert— \n\n- (d) of a reason relating to the incidence or transmission of coronavirus”. \n\n“, or \n\n- (a) regulation 15(1) and (4) (needs assessments which are not completed); \n\n- (b) regulation 16(2), (3) and (4) (transfer of a kept EHC plan); \n\n- (c) regulation 17(1) and (2) (restriction on disclosure of EHC plans); \n\n- (d) regulation 19 (requirement to consider mediation); \n\n- (e) regulation 20(1) and (2) (where the appropriate person does not wish to or fails to pursue mediation); \n\n- (f) regulation 21 (mediation); \n\n- (g) regulation 24(1) and (3) (mediation certificate under section 55(5) of the Act); \n\n- (h) regulation 27(3) (steps to be taken by a home authority); \n\n- (i) regulation 29(2) and (6) (compliance with the orders of the First-tier Tribunal); and \n\n- (j) regulation 30(3) and (6) (unopposed appeals).”. \n\n## Amendment of the Special Educational Needs and Disability (Detained Persons) Regulations 2015\n\n““coronavirus” means severe acute respiratory syndrome coronavirus 2 (SARS-CoV-2); ”. \n\n## “ Relaxation of time periods due to coronavirus exception" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8195868058867335, + "doc_id": "710f18009fec8e9ba6131866341825eeb4b63be6b62f8ebf2dfaac471a919fa9", + "edit_distance": 0.18633540372670807, + "f1_score": 0.9716981132075472, + "meteor": 0.8864369978674865, + "precision": 0.9716981132075472, + "pred_md": "## SCHEDULE\n\nArticle 2\n\nThe Persons Appointed as Her Majesty's Inspectors of Education, Children's Services and Skills on 29th April 2021\n\n2\n\n£4.90\n\nhttp://www.legislation.gov.uk/id/uksi/2021/522\n\nKendra Louise Bell\n\nNicholas Christian Bennison\n\nSarah Canto\n\nAlice Clare Clay\n\nAliki Joan Constantopoulou\n\nChristopher David Ellison\n\nHelen Marie Forrest\n\nEmma Gater\n\nDavid James Gilkerson\n\nAnna Gravelle\n\nJohn Richard Jones\n\nChristine Ann Kennet\n\nTracey Ledder\n\nKirsty Norbury\n\nRakesh Narsih Patel\n\nRebecca Ann Quested\n\nDavid Radomsky\n\n## EXPLANATORY NOTE\n\n(This note is not part of the Order)\n\nThis Order appoints the persons named in the Schedule as Her Majesty's Inspectors of Education, Children's Services and Skills.\n\n' Crown copyright 2021\n\nPrinted and published in the UK by The Stationery Office Limited under the authority and superintendence of Jeff James, Controller of Her Majesty's Stationery Office and Queen's Printer of Acts of Parliament.", + "recall": 0.9716981132075472, + "true_md": "Article 2 \n\n## SCHEDULE\n\n## The Persons Appointed as Her Majesty’s Inspectors of Education, Children’s Services and Skills on 29th April 2021\n\nKendra Louise Bell \n\nNicholas Christian Bennison \n\nSarah Canto \n\nAlice Clare Clay \n\nAliki Joan Constantopoulou \n\nChristopher David Ellison \n\nHelen Marie Forrest \n\nEmma Gater \n\nDavid James Gilkerson \n\nAnna Gravelle \n\nJohn Richard Jones \n\nChristine Ann Kennet \n\nTracey Ledder \n\nKirsty Norbury \n\nRakesh Narsih Patel \n\nRebecca Ann Quested \n\nDavid Radomsky \n\n## EXPLANATORY NOTE\n\n## (This note is not part of the Order)\n\nThis Order appoints the persons named in the Schedule as Her Majesty’s Inspectors of Education, Children’s Services and Skills. \n\n© Crown copyright 2021 \n\nPrinted and published in the UK by The Stationery Office Limited under the authority and superintendence of Jeff James, Controller of Her Majesty’s Stationery Office and Queen’s Printer of Acts of Parliament. \n\n£4.90 \n\nhttp://www.legislation.gov.uk/id/uksi/2021/522" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9490527533140548, + "doc_id": "cfa3052ff79548db033e28ff2b9596d075673d4fc4c23dd027ec9ac42c7f28a2", + "edit_distance": 0.47988505747126436, + "f1_score": 0.9976798143851507, + "meteor": 0.9598101078779859, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz - www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n(4a) Ist eine bereits vorher geleistete Rente neu festzustellen und sind dabei die persönlichen Entgeltpunkte neu zu ermitteln, sind die Vorschriften des Fremdrentengesetzes maßgebend, die bei erstmaliger Feststellung der Rente anzuwenden waren, soweit § 317 Abs. 2a des Sechsten Buches Sozialgesetzbuch nichts anderes bestimmt.\n\n(5) § 22 Abs. 3 des Fremdrentengesetzes in der bis zum 31. Dezember 1991 geltenden Fassung und § 22 Abs. 4 des Fremdrentengesetzes in der ab 1. Januar 1992 sowie in der vom 7. Mai 1996 an geltenden Fassung finden keine Anwendung auf Berechtigte, die nach Maßgabe des Abkommens vom 8. Dezember 1990 zwischen der Bundesrepublik Deutschland und der Republik Polen über Soziale Sicherheit Ansprüche und Anwartschaften auf der Grundlage des Abkommens vom 9. Oktober 1975 zwischen der Bundesrepublik Deutschland und der Volksrepublik Polen über Renten- und Unfallversicherung haben.\n\n## (6) Bei Berechtigten nach dem Fremdrentengesetz, die\n\n- a) ihren gewöhnlichen Aufenthalt im Beitrittsgebiet haben und dort nach dem 31. Dezember 1991 einen Anspruch auf Zahlung einer Rente nach dem Fremdrentengesetz erwerben,\n- b) nach dem 31. Dezember 1990 ihren gewöhnlichen Aufenthalt aus dem Beitrittsgebiet in das Gebiet der Bundesrepublik Deutschland ohne das Beitrittsgebiet verlegen und dort nach dem 31. Dezember 1991 einen Anspruch auf Zahlung einer Rente nach dem Fremdrentengesetz erwerben oder\n- c) nach dem 31. Dezember 1991 ihren gewöhnlichen Aufenthalt aus dem Gebiet der Bundesrepublik Deutschland ohne das Beitrittsgebiet in das Beitrittsgebiet verlegen und bereits vor Verlegung des gewöhnlichen Aufenthalts einen Anspruch auf Zahlung einer Rente nach dem Fremdrentengesetz haben,\n\nwerden für nach dem Fremdrentengesetz anrechenbare Zeiten Entgeltpunkte (Ost) ermittelt; im Falle von Buchstabe c gilt dies nur, sofern am 31. Dezember 1991 Anspruch auf Zahlung einer Rente nach dem Fremdrentengesetz nicht bestand. Dies gilt auch für die Zeiten eines weiteren Rentenbezuges aufgrund neuer Rentenfeststellungen, wenn sich die Rentenbezugszeiten ununterbrochen aneinander anschließen. Bei Berechtigten nach Satz 1 Buchstabe a und c, die ihren gewöhnlichen Aufenthalt aus dem Beitrittsgebiet in das Gebiet der Bundesrepublik Deutschland ohne das Beitrittsgebiet verlegen, verbleibt es für Zeiten nach dem Fremdrentengesetz bei den ermittelten Entgeltpunkten (Ost).\n\n## (7) (weggefallen)\n\n## § 4a\n\n§ 22a des Fremdrentengesetzes gilt nicht für Personen nach § 4 Abs. 5.\n\n## § 4b\n\n§ 22b des Fremdrentengesetzes ist nicht für Berechtigte anzuwenden, die vor dem 7. Mai 1996 ihren gewöhnlichen Aufenthalt in der Bundesrepublik Deutschland genommen haben.\n\n## § 4c\n\n(1) Für Berechtigte, die vor dem 7. Mai 1996 ihren gewöhnlichen Aufenthalt im Gebiet der Bundesrepublik Deutschland genommen haben und deren Rente vor dem 1. Oktober 1996 beginnt, sind für die Berechnung dieser Rente das § 22 Abs. 3 des Fremdrentengesetzes in der bis zum 31. Dezember 1991 geltenden Fassung und § 22 Abs. 4 des Fremdrentengesetzes in der ab dem 1. Januar 1992 geltenden Fassung sowie § 4 Abs. 5 und 7 in der am 6. Mai 1996 geltenden Fassung anzuwenden.\n\n## (2) Für Berechtigte,\n\n- 1. die vor dem 1. Januar 1991 ihren gewöhnlichen Aufenthalt im Gebiet der Bundesrepublik Deutschland genommen haben,\n- 2. deren Rente nach dem 30. September 1996 beginnt und\n- 3. über deren Rentenantrag oder über deren bis 31. Dezember 2004 gestellten Antrag auf Rücknahme des Rentenbescheides am 30. Juni 2006 noch nicht rechtskräftig entschieden worden ist,\n\nwird für diese Rente einmalig zum Rentenbeginn ein Zuschlag an persönlichen Entgeltpunkten ermittelt. Der Zuschlag an persönlichen Entgeltpunkten ergibt sich aus der Differenz zwischen der mit und ohne Anwendung von § 22 Abs. 4 des Fremdrentengesetzes ermittelten Summe aller persönlichen Entgeltpunkte. Dieser Zuschlag wird monatlich für die Zeit des Rentenbezuges\n\nvom 1. Oktober 1996 bis 30. Juni 1997 voll,\n\n- Seite 4 von 9 -", + "recall": 0.9953703703703703, + "true_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz ‒ www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n(4a) Ist eine bereits vorher geleistete Rente neu festzustellen und sind dabei die persönlichen Entgeltpunkte neu zu ermitteln, sind die Vorschriften des Fremdrentengesetzes maßgebend, die bei erstmaliger Feststellung der Rente anzuwenden waren, soweit § 317 Abs. 2a des Sechsten Buches Sozialgesetzbuch nichts anderes bestimmt.\n\n(5) § 22 Abs. 3 des Fremdrentengesetzes in der bis zum 31. Dezember 1991 geltenden Fassung und § 22 Abs. 4 des Fremdrentengesetzes in der ab 1. Januar 1992 sowie in der vom 7. Mai 1996 an geltenden Fassung finden keine Anwendung auf Berechtigte, die nach Maßgabe des Abkommens vom 8. Dezember 1990 zwischen der Bundesrepublik Deutschland und der Republik Polen über Soziale Sicherheit Ansprüche und Anwartschaften auf der Grundlage des Abkommens vom 9. Oktober 1975 zwischen der Bundesrepublik Deutschland und der Volksrepublik Polen über Renten- und Unfallversicherung haben.\n\n(6) Bei Berechtigten nach dem Fremdrentengesetz, die\n\n(7) (weggefallen)\n\n## § 4a\n\n## § 4b\n\n## § 4c\n\n§ 22a des Fremdrentengesetzes gilt nicht für Personen nach § 4 Abs. 5.\n\n§ 22b des Fremdrentengesetzes ist nicht für Berechtigte anzuwenden, die vor dem 7. Mai 1996 ihren gewöhnlichen Aufenthalt in der Bundesrepublik Deutschland genommen haben.\n\n(1) Für Berechtigte, die vor dem 7. Mai 1996 ihren gewöhnlichen Aufenthalt im Gebiet der Bundesrepublik Deutschland genommen haben und deren Rente vor dem 1. Oktober 1996 beginnt, sind für die Berechnung dieser Rente das § 22 Abs. 3 des Fremdrentengesetzes in der bis zum 31. Dezember 1991 geltenden Fassung und § 22 Abs. 4 des Fremdrentengesetzes in der ab dem 1. Januar 1992 geltenden Fassung sowie § 4 Abs. 5 und 7 in der am 6. Mai 1996 geltenden Fassung anzuwenden.\n\n(2) Für Berechtigte,\n\na) ihren gewöhnlichen Aufenthalt im Beitrittsgebiet haben und dort nach dem 31. Dezember 1991 einen Anspruch auf Zahlung einer Rente nach dem Fremdrentengesetz erwerben,\n\nb) nach dem 31. Dezember 1990 ihren gewöhnlichen Aufenthalt aus dem Beitrittsgebiet in das Gebiet der Bundesrepublik Deutschland ohne das Beitrittsgebiet verlegen und dort nach dem 31. Dezember 1991 einen Anspruch auf Zahlung einer Rente nach dem Fremdrentengesetz erwerben oder\n\nc) nach dem 31. Dezember 1991 ihren gewöhnlichen Aufenthalt aus dem Gebiet der Bundesrepublik Deutschland ohne das Beitrittsgebiet in das Beitrittsgebiet verlegen und bereits vor Verlegung des gewöhnlichen Aufenthalts einen Anspruch auf Zahlung einer Rente nach dem Fremdrentengesetz haben,\n\nwerden für nach dem Fremdrentengesetz anrechenbare Zeiten Entgeltpunkte (Ost) ermittelt; im Falle von Buchstabe c gilt dies nur, sofern am 31. Dezember 1991 Anspruch auf Zahlung einer Rente nach dem Fremdrentengesetz nicht bestand. Dies gilt auch für die Zeiten eines weiteren Rentenbezuges aufgrund neuer Rentenfeststellungen, wenn sich die Rentenbezugszeiten ununterbrochen aneinander anschließen. Bei Berechtigten nach Satz 1 Buchstabe a und c, die ihren gewöhnlichen Aufenthalt aus dem Beitrittsgebiet in das Gebiet der Bundesrepublik Deutschland ohne das Beitrittsgebiet verlegen, verbleibt es für Zeiten nach dem Fremdrentengesetz bei den ermittelten Entgeltpunkten (Ost).\n\n1. die vor dem 1. Januar 1991 ihren gewöhnlichen Aufenthalt im Gebiet der Bundesrepublik Deutschland genommen haben,\n\n2. deren Rente nach dem 30. September 1996 beginnt und\n\n3. über deren Rentenantrag oder über deren bis 31. Dezember 2004 gestellten Antrag auf Rücknahme des Rentenbescheides am 30. Juni 2006 noch nicht rechtskräftig entschieden worden ist,\n\nwird für diese Rente einmalig zum Rentenbeginn ein Zuschlag an persönlichen Entgeltpunkten ermittelt. Der Zuschlag an persönlichen Entgeltpunkten ergibt sich aus der Differenz zwischen der mit und ohne Anwendung von § 22 Abs. 4 des Fremdrentengesetzes ermittelten Summe aller persönlichen Entgeltpunkte. Dieser Zuschlag wird monatlich für die Zeit des Rentenbezuges vom 1. Oktober 1996 bis 30. Juni 1997 voll,\n\n- Seite 4 von 9 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8942255541978509, + "doc_id": "167c7664b5576eda5719166f8fc078df428263483ac9432eef7bd399ff82058d", + "edit_distance": 0.045454545454545456, + "f1_score": 0.9714285714285715, + "meteor": 0.9541331684188827, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz - www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n- Seite 31 von 78 -", + "recall": 0.9444444444444444, + "true_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz ‒ www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n- Seite 31 von 78 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9603974587362212, + "doc_id": "e79cadefb28b715267531c76e0e384453eab16d76fe14136517205e46a548b1d", + "edit_distance": 0.2464, + "f1_score": 0.9979209979209981, + "meteor": 0.9925883990588037, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz - www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\nWasserdampf mit gesundheitsgefährdenden Zusatzstoffen oder durch andere flüssige Wärmeträger oder Kältemittel beheizt werden, müssen außerdem so beschaffen sein, daß durch undichte Wärmetauscherwände die Wärmeträger oder Kältemittel nicht in gefahrdrohender Menge in die Warmwasserversorgungsanlage eindringen können.\n\n## § 3 Verbindungsstücke\n\n- (1) Abgasrohre und Abgaskanäle (Verbindungsstücke) müssen aus form- und hitzebeständigen, nichtbrennbaren Baustoffen bestehen, einschließlich der Anschlüsse und der Verschlüsse der Reinigungsöffnungen dicht und gegen die bei einer bestimmungsgemäßen Abgaskondensation entstehenden Stoffe widerstandsfähig sein. Abgaskanäle müssen widerstandsfähig gegen Abgas aller Brennstoffe sein.\n- (2) Für Abgasrohre, durch die nur Abgase mit niedrigen Temperaturen abgeführt werden, dürfen brennbare Baustoffe verwendet werden, wenn der Brandschutz gewährleistet ist.\n- (3) Verbindungsstücke dürfen nicht in andere Geschosse geführt werden; das gilt nicht bei einem Anschluß an freistehende Schornsteine. Abgasrohre dürfen nicht durch Räume führen, in denen nach § 7 Abs. 2 das Aufstellen von Feuerstätten unzulässig ist.\n- (4) Abgasrohre müssen von brennbaren Baustoffen so weit entfernt sein, daß eine Brandgefahr nicht entsteht. Führen Abgasrohre durch Bauteile mit brennbaren Baustoffen, so sind diese Bauteile durch geeignete Vorkehrungen zu schützen.\n\n## § 4 Schornsteine und andere Abgasanlagen\n\n- (1) Lichter Querschnitt, Höhe, Wärmedurchlaßwiderstand, Dichtheit, innere Oberfläche und Anordnung der Schornsteine sowie der Anschluß der Feuerstätten nach Zahl, Art und Nennwärmeleistung müssen so beschaffen sein, daß\n- 1. die Abgase über Dach gefördert werden,\n- 2. genügend Verbrennungsluft nachströmt,\n- 3. im Schornstein und im Verbindungsstück kein Überdruck gegenüber Räumen entsteht,\n- 4. die Schornsteine und andere Abgasanlagen nicht gefährlich durchfeuchten und\n- 5. die abgeführten Abgase nicht zu Gefahren oder unzumutbaren Belästigungen führen.\n\nAbgasventilatoren, die die Abgasförderung unterstützen, sind zulässig, wenn bei Ausfall der Ventilatoren Gefahren nicht entstehen können. Abweichend von Satz 1 Nr. 3 darf Überdruck auftreten in\n\n- 1. Verbindungsstücken mit Schalldämpfern oder Abgasfiltern bei Anordnung in einem Heizraum nach § 7 Abs. 9 und\n- 2. Schornsteinen und Verbindungsstücken in gewerblichen Betriebsgebäuden, freistehenden Kesselhäusern und Dachheizzentralen, wenn diese Bauteile so dicht sind, daß Abgase nicht austreten. Die Sätze 1 bis 3 gelten für andere, über Dach führende Abgasanlagen entsprechend.\n- (2) Schornsteine müssen aus nichtbrennbaren Baustoffen bestehen. Sie müssen widerstandsfähig gegen Abgas aller Brennstoffe und gegen die bei einer bestimmungsgemäßen Abgaskondensation entstehenden Stoffe sein. Sie müssen so hergestellt und angeordnet sein, daß\n- 1. durch den Betrieb der Feuerstätten, mindestens aber durch Abgas mit einer Temperatur von 500 Grad C, die freien Außenseiten der Schornsteine in Räumen nicht auf mehr als 100 Grad C erwärmt werden,\n- 2. durch Schornsteinbrände Gefahren nicht entstehen und\n- 3. durch Brandbelastung von außen während einer Branddauer von 90 Minuten Feuer und Rauch durch sie nicht in andere Geschosse übertragen werden.\n\nFür Schornsteine, an die nur Gasfeuerstätten mit Feuerungseinrichtung ohne Gebläse und einer höchstmöglichen Wärmeleistung von nicht mehr als 30 kW angeschlossen werden sollen, gelten lediglich die Anforderungen nach den Sätzen 1, 2 und 3 Nr. 1 und 3 mit der Maßgabe, daß nur von Abgasen von Gasfeuerstätten mit einer Temperatur von 350 Grad C auszugehen ist (Schornsteine mit begrenzter Temperaturbeständigkeit).\n\n- (3) Für andere Abgasanlagen, durch die nur Abgase mit niedrigen Temperaturen abgeführt werden, dürfen brennbare Baustoffe verwendet werden, wenn die Baustoffe gegen die Abgase und die bei einer\n\n- Seite 3 von 6 -", + "recall": 0.995850622406639, + "true_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz ‒ www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\nWasserdampf mit gesundheitsgefährdenden Zusatzstoffen oder durch andere flüssige Wärmeträger oder Kältemittel beheizt werden, müssen außerdem so beschaffen sein, daß durch undichte Wärmetauscherwände die Wärmeträger oder Kältemittel nicht in gefahrdrohender Menge in die Warmwasserversorgungsanlage eindringen können.\n\n(1) Abgasrohre und Abgaskanäle (Verbindungsstücke) müssen aus form- und hitzebeständigen, nichtbrennbaren Baustoffen bestehen, einschließlich der Anschlüsse und der Verschlüsse der Reinigungsöffnungen dicht und gegen die bei einer bestimmungsgemäßen Abgaskondensation entstehenden Stoffe widerstandsfähig sein. Abgaskanäle müssen widerstandsfähig gegen Abgas aller Brennstoffe sein.\n\n(2) Für Abgasrohre, durch die nur Abgase mit niedrigen Temperaturen abgeführt werden, dürfen brennbare Baustoffe verwendet werden, wenn der Brandschutz gewährleistet ist.\n\n(3) Verbindungsstücke dürfen nicht in andere Geschosse geführt werden; das gilt nicht bei einem Anschluß an freistehende Schornsteine. Abgasrohre dürfen nicht durch Räume führen, in denen nach § 7 Abs. 2 das Aufstellen von Feuerstätten unzulässig ist.\n\n(4) Abgasrohre müssen von brennbaren Baustoffen so weit entfernt sein, daß eine Brandgefahr nicht entsteht. Führen Abgasrohre durch Bauteile mit brennbaren Baustoffen, so sind diese Bauteile durch geeignete Vorkehrungen zu schützen.\n\n## § 3 Verbindungsstücke\n\n## § 4 Schornsteine und andere Abgasanlagen\n\n(1) Lichter Querschnitt, Höhe, Wärmedurchlaßwiderstand, Dichtheit, innere Oberfläche und Anordnung der Schornsteine sowie der Anschluß der Feuerstätten nach Zahl, Art und Nennwärmeleistung müssen so beschaffen sein, daß\n\nAbgasventilatoren, die die Abgasförderung unterstützen, sind zulässig, wenn bei Ausfall der Ventilatoren Gefahren nicht entstehen können. Abweichend von Satz 1 Nr. 3 darf Überdruck auftreten in\n\n(2) Schornsteine müssen aus nichtbrennbaren Baustoffen bestehen. Sie müssen widerstandsfähig gegen Abgas aller Brennstoffe und gegen die bei einer bestimmungsgemäßen Abgaskondensation entstehenden Stoffe sein. Sie müssen so hergestellt und angeordnet sein, daß\n\n- 1. die Abgase über Dach gefördert werden,\n\n- 2. genügend Verbrennungsluft nachströmt,\n\n- 3. im Schornstein und im Verbindungsstück kein Überdruck gegenüber Räumen entsteht,\n\n- 4. die Schornsteine und andere Abgasanlagen nicht gefährlich durchfeuchten und\n\n- 5. die abgeführten Abgase nicht zu Gefahren oder unzumutbaren Belästigungen führen.\n\n- 1. Verbindungsstücken mit Schalldämpfern oder Abgasfiltern bei Anordnung in einem Heizraum nach § 7 Abs. 9 und\n\n- 2. Schornsteinen und Verbindungsstücken in gewerblichen Betriebsgebäuden, freistehenden Kesselhäusern und Dachheizzentralen, wenn diese Bauteile so dicht sind, daß Abgase nicht austreten. Die Sätze 1 bis 3 gelten für andere, über Dach führende Abgasanlagen entsprechend.\n\n- 1. durch den Betrieb der Feuerstätten, mindestens aber durch Abgas mit einer Temperatur von 500 Grad C, die freien Außenseiten der Schornsteine in Räumen nicht auf mehr als 100 Grad C erwärmt werden,\n\n- 2. durch Schornsteinbrände Gefahren nicht entstehen und\n\n- 3. durch Brandbelastung von außen während einer Branddauer von 90 Minuten Feuer und Rauch durch sie nicht in andere Geschosse übertragen werden.\n\nFür Schornsteine, an die nur Gasfeuerstätten mit Feuerungseinrichtung ohne Gebläse und einer höchstmöglichen Wärmeleistung von nicht mehr als 30 kW angeschlossen werden sollen, gelten lediglich die Anforderungen nach den Sätzen 1, 2 und 3 Nr. 1 und 3 mit der Maßgabe, daß nur von Abgasen von Gasfeuerstätten mit einer Temperatur von 350 Grad C auszugehen ist (Schornsteine mit begrenzter Temperaturbeständigkeit).\n\n(3) Für andere Abgasanlagen, durch die nur Abgase mit niedrigen Temperaturen abgeführt werden, dürfen brennbare Baustoffe verwendet werden, wenn die Baustoffe gegen die Abgase und die bei einer\n\n- Seite 3 von 6 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7220289688563856, + "doc_id": "55f52fd3ec4a6951449fea7676664aec5c8da0facb1097216aa4d18989d876e8", + "edit_distance": 0.25650557620817843, + "f1_score": 0.9918699186991868, + "meteor": 0.7424215744789813, + "precision": 0.991869918699187, + "pred_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz - www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n## Gesetz zur Neuregelung des Fremdrenten- und Auslandsrentenrechts und zur Anpassung der Berliner Rentenversicherung an die Vorschriften des Arbeiterrentenversicherungs-Neuregelungsgesetzes und des Angestelltenversicherungs-Neuregelungsgesetzes (Fremdrentenund Auslandsrenten-Neuregelungsgesetz - FANG)\n\nFANG\n\nAusfertigungsdatum: 25.02.1960\n\nVollzitat:\n\n\"Fremdrenten- und Auslandsrenten-Neuregelungsgesetz in der im Bundesgesetzblatt Teil III, Gliederungsnummer 824-3, veröffentlichten bereinigten Fassung, das zuletzt durch Artikel 303 der Verordnung vom 19. Juni 2020 (BGBl. I S. 1328) geändert worden ist\"\n\nStand: Zuletzt geändert durch Art. 303 V v. 19.6.2020 I 1328\n\n## Fußnote\n\n(+++ Textnachweis Geltung ab: 1.4.1970 +++)\n\nDiese Vorschrift gilt nicht in dem in Art. 3 des Einigungsvertrages genannten Gebiet gem. Art. 11 und Anl. I Kap. VIII Sachg. H Abschn. I Nr. 19 EinigVtr v. 31.8.1990 iVm Art. 1 G v. 23.9.1990 II 885, 1058 Die Vorschrift ist gem. Art. 35 Abs. 1 Nr. 4 G v. 25.7.1991 I 1606 (RÜG) im Beitrittsgebiet mWv 1.1.1992 in Kraft getreten\n\nArt. 1: FRG 824-2\n\n## Inhaltsverzeichnis\n\n- Seite 1 von 9 -", + "recall": 0.991869918699187, + "true_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz ‒ www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n# Gesetz zur Neuregelung des Fremdrenten- und Auslandsrentenrechts und zur Anpassung der Berliner Rentenversicherung an die Vorschriften des Arbeiterrentenversicherungs-Neuregelungsgesetzes und des Angestelltenversicherungs-Neuregelungsgesetzes (Fremdrenten- und Auslandsrenten-Neuregelungsgesetz - FANG)\n\nFANG\n\nAusfertigungsdatum: 25.02.1960\n\nVollzitat:\n\n\"Fremdrenten- und Auslandsrenten-Neuregelungsgesetz in der im Bundesgesetzblatt Teil III, Gliederungsnummer 824-3, veröffentlichten bereinigten Fassung, das zuletzt durch Artikel 303 der Verordnung vom 19. Juni 2020 (BGBl. I S. 1328) geändert worden ist\"\n\nStand: Zuletzt geändert durch Art. 303 V v. 19.6.2020 I 1328\n\n(+++ Textnachweis Geltung ab: 1.4.1970 +++)\n\nDiese Vorschrift gilt nicht in dem in Art. 3 des Einigungsvertrages genannten Gebiet gem. Art. 11 und Anl. I Kap. VIII Sachg. H Abschn. I Nr. 19 EinigVtr v. 31.8.1990 iVm Art. 1 G v. 23.9.1990 II 885, 1058 Die Vorschrift ist gem. Art. 35 Abs. 1 Nr. 4 G v. 25.7.1991 I 1606 (RÜG) im Beitrittsgebiet mWv 1.1.1992 in Kraft\n\nVIII Sachg. H Abschn. I Nr. 19 EinigVtr v. 31.8.1990 iVm Art. 1 G v. 23.9.1990 II 885, 1058 Die Vorschrift ist gem. Art. 35 Abs. 1 Nr. 4 G v. 25.7.1991 I 1606 (RÜG) im Beitrittsgebiet mWv 1.1.1992 in Kraft getreten Art. 1: FRG 824-2\n\ngetreten Art. 1: FRG 824-2\n\n## Inhaltsverzeichnis\n\n- Seite 1 von 9 -\n\n## Fußnote" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8942255541978509, + "doc_id": "8a01540fd7684b7e7c0a2179414698eefd70d3727db6835581c40025945ce803", + "edit_distance": 0.045454545454545456, + "f1_score": 0.9714285714285715, + "meteor": 0.9541331684188827, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz - www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n- Seite 14 von 78 -", + "recall": 0.9444444444444444, + "true_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz ‒ www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n- Seite 14 von 78 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.28625935889286336, + "doc_id": "2811e2210c3c3a6257c6d9e7474402933e2e2bab5747d75f9ba1acb8c3912d2a", + "edit_distance": 0.7673267326732673, + "f1_score": 0.900763358778626, + "meteor": 0.5712197062286678, + "precision": 0.9516129032258065, + "pred_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz - www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n| § 9 | Arbeitsprobe |\n|-----------|------------------------------------------------------------------|\n| § 10 | Schriftliche Prüfung |\n| § 11 | Anforderungen und Prüfungsinhalte |\n| § 12 | Prüfungsbestandteile |\n| § 13 | Fallstudie |\n| | Schriftliche Prüfung |\n| § 14 | |\n| | Prüfungsteil |\n| | Mitarbeiterführung und Personalmanagement |\n| § 15 | Anforderungen und Prüfungsinhalte |\n| § 17 | Fallstudie |\n| § 18 | Schriftliche Prüfung |\n| | Bewertungen in den Prüfungen, Befreiung von |\n| § 19 | Prüfungsbestandteilen, Bestehens- und Zeugnisregelungen |\n| § 20 § 21 | Bewertungen in den Prüfungen Befreiung von Prüfungsbestandteilen |\n| § 22 | Bestehen der Prüfung Zeugnisse |\n| | Abschnitt 6 |\n| § 23 § 24 | Mündliche Ergänzungsprüfung Wiederholung der Prüfung |\n| | Abschnitt 7 |\n\n- Seite 2 von 15 -", + "recall": 0.855072463768116, + "true_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz ‒ www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n- § 9 Arbeitsprobe\n\n- § 10 Schriftliche Prüfung\n\n## Abschnitt 3\n\n## Prüfungsteil Betriebs- und Unternehmensführung\n\n## Abschnitt 4\n\n## Prüfungsteil Mitarbeiterführung und Personalmanagement\n\n## Ergänzungs- und Wiederholungsprüfung\n\n## Abschnitt 6\n\n## Abschnitt 7\n\n- Seite 2 von 15 -\n\n## Abschnitt 5\n\n## Bewertungen in den Prüfungen, Befreiung von Prüfungsbestandteilen, Bestehens- und Zeugnisregelungen\n\n- § 11 Anforderungen und Prüfungsinhalte\n\n- § 12 Prüfungsbestandteile\n\n- § 13 Fallstudie\n\n- § 14 Schriftliche Prüfung\n\n- § 15 Anforderungen und Prüfungsinhalte\n\n- § 16 Prüfungsbestandteile\n\n- § 17 Fallstudie\n\n- § 18 Schriftliche Prüfung\n\n- § 19 Bewertungen in den Prüfungen\n\n- § 20 Befreiung von Prüfungsbestandteilen\n\n- § 21 Bestehen der Prüfung\n\n- § 22 Zeugnisse\n\n- § 23 Mündliche Ergänzungsprüfung\n\n- § 24 Wiederholung der Prüfung" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8958039312312598, + "doc_id": "948d5170e724c3ba42b7d9d51a2dc31a215e8de84b3fad5566f09bd2c9c498f7", + "edit_distance": 0.045454545454545456, + "f1_score": 0.9714285714285715, + "meteor": 0.9584899408774165, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n- Seite 61 von 78 -", + "recall": 0.9444444444444444, + "true_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz ‒ www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n- Seite 61 von 78 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9415841947058826, + "doc_id": "4cf86758d320d74a1693fc535ee83c3de9fceb0bcef9f9e9992991df1acefd33", + "edit_distance": 0.10699588477366255, + "f1_score": 0.9961389961389961, + "meteor": 0.9886694547707559, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz - www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n## Bekanntmachung betreffend die Bestimmung der Form des Stempelzeichens zur Angabe des Feingehalts auf goldenen und silbernen Geräten\n\nFeinGehStempG\n\nAusfertigungsdatum: 07.01.1886\n\nVollzitat:\n\n\"Bekanntmachung betreffend die Bestimmung der Form des Stempelzeichens zur Angabe des Feingehalts auf goldenen und silbernen Geräten in der im Bundesgesetzblatt Teil III, Gliederungsnummer 7142-1-1, veröffentlichten bereinigten Fassung\"\n\n## Fußnote\n\n(+++ Textnachweis ab: 1. 1.1964 +++)\n\n----\n\nAuf Grund des § 3 des Gesetzes über den Feingehalt der Gold- und Silberwaren vom 16. Juli 1884 (Reichsgesetzbl. S. 120) hat der Bundesrat folgende Bestimmung getroffen:\n\nDas Stempelzeichen für die Gold- und Silbergeräte muß enthalten:\n\n- 1. die Reichs-Krone,\n- 2. das Sonnenzeichen ... für Gold oder das Mondsichelzeichen ... für Silber,\n- 3. die Angabe des Feingehalts in Tausendteilen und\n- 4. die Firma oder die in Gemäßheit des Gesetzes vom 30. November 1874 eingetragene Schutzmarke des Geschäfts, für welches die Stempelung bewirkt ist.\n\n## Die Krone muß\n\nbei Goldgeräten in dem Sonnenzeichen ...,\n\nbei Silbergeräten rechts neben dem Mondsichelzeichen ...\n\nsich befinden.\n\nGold ... Silber ...\n\n(... = nicht darstellbare Abbildungen,\n\nFundstelle: BGBl. Teil III)\n\n## Fußnote\n\nNr. 4 Kursivdruck: Jetzt des Warenzeichengesetzes 423-1\n\n- Seite 1 von 1 -", + "recall": 0.9923076923076923, + "true_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz ‒ www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n# Bekanntmachung betreffend die Bestimmung der Form des Stempelzeichens zur Angabe des Feingehalts auf goldenen und silbernen Geräten\n\nFeinGehStempG\n\nAusfertigungsdatum: 07.01.1886\n\nVollzitat:\n\n\"Bekanntmachung betreffend die Bestimmung der Form des Stempelzeichens zur Angabe des Feingehalts auf goldenen und silbernen Geräten in der im Bundesgesetzblatt Teil III, Gliederungsnummer 7142-1-1, veröffentlichten bereinigten Fassung\"\n\n(+++ Textnachweis ab: 1. 1.1964 +++)\n\n----\n\nAuf Grund des § 3 des Gesetzes über den Feingehalt der Gold- und Silberwaren vom 16. Juli 1884 (Reichsgesetzbl. S. 120) hat der Bundesrat folgende Bestimmung getroffen: Das Stempelzeichen für die Gold- und Silbergeräte muß enthalten:\n\nNr. 4 Kursivdruck: Jetzt des Warenzeichengesetzes 423-1\n\n- 1. die Reichs-Krone,\n\n- 2. das Sonnenzeichen ... für Gold oder das Mondsichelzeichen ... für Silber,\n\n- 3. die Angabe des Feingehalts in Tausendteilen und\n\n- 4. die Firma oder die in Gemäßheit des Gesetzes vom 30. November 1874 eingetragene Schutzmarke des Geschäfts, für welches die Stempelung bewirkt ist.\n\n- Die Krone muß bei Goldgeräten in dem Sonnenzeichen ..., bei Silbergeräten rechts neben dem Mondsichelzeichen ...\n\n- sich befinden. Gold ... Silber ...\n\n(... = nicht darstellbare Abbildungen, Fundstelle: BGBl. Teil III)\n\n## Fußnote\n\n## Fußnote\n\n- Seite 1 von 1 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8942255541978509, + "doc_id": "3223514ba1a805ebf2b39944d867b31c2a560d925415dc0457f0a14c9f8f7688", + "edit_distance": 0.045454545454545456, + "f1_score": 0.9714285714285715, + "meteor": 0.9541331684188827, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz - www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n- Seite 11 von 24 -", + "recall": 0.9444444444444444, + "true_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz ‒ www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n- Seite 11 von 24 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9670940257191215, + "doc_id": "a7db878097a66665d58786c7bfc80e04b4636ecd569aa9908a02b367f620805a", + "edit_distance": 0.2347417840375587, + "f1_score": 0.9979209979209981, + "meteor": 0.975826441948228, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz - www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n## § 5 Form und Format der Datenübermittlung\n\n- (1) Die Mitteilungspflichtigen haben die Daten gemäß der Anforderung der Deutschen Bundesbank zu übermitteln. Sind von der Deutschen Bundesbank mit der Datenanforderung Schemata zur Übermittlung der Daten veröffentlicht worden, sind diese von den Mitteilungspflichtigen zu verwenden.\n- (2) Personenbezogene Daten dürfen von den Mitteilungspflichtigen nicht übermittelt werden. Kann ein Mitteilungspflichtiger dieser Auflage bezogen auf einen bestimmten Meldestichtag und auf einen bestimmten Teil der zu meldenden Daten nicht nachkommen, hat er dies gegenüber der Deutschen Bundesbank innerhalb der Übermittlungsfrist anzuzeigen. Die Meldepflicht besteht hinsichtlich der übrigen angeforderten Daten fort. Die unterbliebene Übermittlung ansonsten personenbezogener Daten ist im Falle einer fortlaufenden Datenanforderung in anonymisierter Form in die nächstmögliche Datenübermittlung einzubeziehen.\n- (3) Die Übermittlung der Daten erfolgt elektronisch unter Nutzung der von der Deutschen Bundesbank angebotenen elektronischen Übermittlungswege. Zur weiteren Erläuterung der zu übermittelnden Daten sowie der Form und des Formats der Datenübermittlung kann die Deutsche Bundesbank Richtlinien und Rundschreiben veröffentlichen.\n\n## § 6 Zeitliche Vorgaben\n\n- (1) Die Mitteilungspflichtigen übermitteln Daten entsprechend der angeforderten Meldefrequenz zu den folgenden Meldestichtagen:\n- 1. für monatliche Meldungen zum jeweils letzten Tag des Monats,\n- 2. für vierteljährliche Meldungen zum 31. März, 30. Juni, 30. September oder 31. Dezember,\n- 3. für halbjährliche Meldungen zum 30. Juni und zum 31. Dezember,\n- 4. für jährliche Meldungen zum 31. Dezember.\n\n(2) Die Übermittlung von Daten an die Deutsche Bundesbank ist täglich möglich. Monatlich zu meldende Daten sind spätestens bis zum Geschäftsschluss des zehnten Geschäftstages nach Ablauf des jeweiligen Monats an die Deutsche Bundesbank zu übermitteln. Vierteljährlich zu meldende Daten sind für das erste Quartal bis zum Geschäftsschluss des 15. Mai; für das zweite Quartal bis zum Geschäftsschluss des 15. August; für das dritte Quartal bis zum Geschäftsschluss des 15. November jeweils desselben Jahres und für das vierte Quartal bis zum Geschäftsschluss des 15. Februar des Folgejahres zu übermitteln. Halbjährlich zu meldende Daten sind für das erste Halbjahr bis zum Geschäftsschluss des 15. August desselben Jahres und für das zweite Halbjahr bis zum Geschäftsschluss des 15. Februar des Folgejahres zu übermitteln. Jährlich zu meldende Daten sind bis zum Geschäftsschluss des 15. Februar des Folgejahres zu übermitteln. Die jeweils zu beachtenden Meldestichtage und Übermittlungsfristen sind in der Anforderung nach § 3 Absatz 1 anzugeben.\n\n(3) Fällt das Ende der Übermittlungsfrist auf einen gesetzlichen Feiertag oder einen Samstag oder Sonntag, so sind die Daten bis zum Geschäftsschluss des darauffolgenden Geschäftstages zu übermitteln.\n\n(4) In der Anforderung zur einmaligen Übermittlung von Daten und für die erstmalige Übermittlung von Daten im Rahmen einer fortlaufenden Datenanforderung hat die Deutsche Bundesbank eine angemessene Frist vorzusehen. Bei einer regelmäßigen Datenanforderung kann die erstmalige Datenübermittlung frühestens 18 Monate nach Bekanntgabe der entsprechenden Anforderung vorgesehen werden.\n\n## § 7 Befugnis zur Überprüfung\n\n- (1) Die Deutsche Bundesbank ist befugt, auch ohne besonderen Anlass, die Richtigkeit und Qualität der übermittelten Daten zu überprüfen. Die Befugnis nach Satz 1 umfasst auch das Recht, für Zwecke einer Plausibilitätsprüfung von den Mitteilungspflichtigen\n- 1. die Vorlage von Unterlagen zu verlangen,\n- 2. die Bücher und Unterlagen der Mitteilungspflichtigen zu überprüfen,\n- 3. Kopien und Auszüge aus diesen Büchern und Unterlagen anzufertigen,\n- 4. schriftliche oder mündliche Erläuterungen zu verlangen und\n- 5. zu diesem Zweck die Geschäftsräume der Mitteilungspflichtigen innerhalb der üblichen Betriebs- und Geschäftszeiten zu betreten.\n\n- Seite 6 von 7 -", + "recall": 0.995850622406639, + "true_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz ‒ www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n## § 5 Form und Format der Datenübermittlung\n\n(1) Die Mitteilungspflichtigen haben die Daten gemäß der Anforderung der Deutschen Bundesbank zu übermitteln. Sind von der Deutschen Bundesbank mit der Datenanforderung Schemata zur Übermittlung der Daten veröffentlicht worden, sind diese von den Mitteilungspflichtigen zu verwenden.\n\n(2) Personenbezogene Daten dürfen von den Mitteilungspflichtigen nicht übermittelt werden. Kann ein Mitteilungspflichtiger dieser Auflage bezogen auf einen bestimmten Meldestichtag und auf einen bestimmten Teil der zu meldenden Daten nicht nachkommen, hat er dies gegenüber der Deutschen Bundesbank innerhalb der Übermittlungsfrist anzuzeigen. Die Meldepflicht besteht hinsichtlich der übrigen angeforderten Daten fort. Die unterbliebene Übermittlung ansonsten personenbezogener Daten ist im Falle einer fortlaufenden Datenanforderung in anonymisierter Form in die nächstmögliche Datenübermittlung einzubeziehen.\n\n(3) Die Übermittlung der Daten erfolgt elektronisch unter Nutzung der von der Deutschen Bundesbank angebotenen elektronischen Übermittlungswege. Zur weiteren Erläuterung der zu übermittelnden Daten sowie der Form und des Formats der Datenübermittlung kann die Deutsche Bundesbank Richtlinien und Rundschreiben veröffentlichen.\n\n(1) Die Mitteilungspflichtigen übermitteln Daten entsprechend der angeforderten Meldefrequenz zu den folgenden Meldestichtagen:\n\n(2) Die Übermittlung von Daten an die Deutsche Bundesbank ist täglich möglich. Monatlich zu meldende Daten sind spätestens bis zum Geschäftsschluss des zehnten Geschäftstages nach Ablauf des jeweiligen Monats an die Deutsche Bundesbank zu übermitteln. Vierteljährlich zu meldende Daten sind für das erste Quartal bis zum Geschäftsschluss des 15. Mai; für das zweite Quartal bis zum Geschäftsschluss des 15. August; für das dritte Quartal bis zum Geschäftsschluss des 15. November jeweils desselben Jahres und für das vierte Quartal bis zum Geschäftsschluss des 15. Februar des Folgejahres zu übermitteln. Halbjährlich zu meldende Daten sind für das erste Halbjahr bis zum Geschäftsschluss des 15. August desselben Jahres und für das zweite Halbjahr bis zum Geschäftsschluss des 15. Februar des Folgejahres zu übermitteln. Jährlich zu meldende Daten sind bis zum Geschäftsschluss des 15. Februar des Folgejahres zu übermitteln. Die jeweils zu beachtenden Meldestichtage und Übermittlungsfristen sind in der Anforderung nach § 3 Absatz 1 anzugeben.\n\n(3) Fällt das Ende der Übermittlungsfrist auf einen gesetzlichen Feiertag oder einen Samstag oder Sonntag, so sind die Daten bis zum Geschäftsschluss des darauffolgenden Geschäftstages zu übermitteln.\n\n(4) In der Anforderung zur einmaligen Übermittlung von Daten und für die erstmalige Übermittlung von Daten im Rahmen einer fortlaufenden Datenanforderung hat die Deutsche Bundesbank eine angemessene Frist vorzusehen. Bei einer regelmäßigen Datenanforderung kann die erstmalige Datenübermittlung frühestens 18 Monate nach Bekanntgabe der entsprechenden Anforderung vorgesehen werden.\n\n(1) Die Deutsche Bundesbank ist befugt, auch ohne besonderen Anlass, die Richtigkeit und Qualität der übermittelten Daten zu überprüfen. Die Befugnis nach Satz 1 umfasst auch das Recht, für Zwecke einer Plausibilitätsprüfung von den Mitteilungspflichtigen\n\n## § 7 Befugnis zur Überprüfung\n\n## § 6 Zeitliche Vorgaben\n\n- 1. die Vorlage von Unterlagen zu verlangen,\n\n- 2. die Bücher und Unterlagen der Mitteilungspflichtigen zu überprüfen,\n\n- 3. Kopien und Auszüge aus diesen Büchern und Unterlagen anzufertigen,\n\n- 4. schriftliche oder mündliche Erläuterungen zu verlangen und\n\n- 5. zu diesem Zweck die Geschäftsräume der Mitteilungspflichtigen innerhalb der üblichen Betriebs- und Geschäftszeiten zu betreten.\n\n- Seite 6 von 7 -\n\n- 1. für monatliche Meldungen zum jeweils letzten Tag des Monats,\n\n- 2. für vierteljährliche Meldungen zum 31. März, 30. Juni, 30. September oder 31. Dezember,\n\n- 3. für halbjährliche Meldungen zum 30. Juni und zum 31. Dezember,\n\n- 4. für jährliche Meldungen zum 31. Dezember." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7268404983179738, + "doc_id": "a3f6fabd5809275f8c70b90b6b7ae2de0ba294d906db1e0b0dd48c672f61c437", + "edit_distance": 0.20569620253164558, + "f1_score": 0.9372937293729374, + "meteor": 0.8036527460811645, + "precision": 0.9466666666666667, + "pred_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz - www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n- *) Berechnung der theoretischen Versorgungsfläche für das Beitragsjahr 2014:\n\nDie theoretische Versorgungsfläche ist eine Berechnungsgröße zur Ermittlung des Beitrags. Sie basiert für alle Rundfunkdienste auf den internationalen Ausbreitungskurven der ITU-R P.370, den internationalen Abkommen für T-DAB Wiesbaden 1995 und Maastricht 2002 und für DVB-T Chester 1997, sowie den jeweils gültigen nationalen Richtlinien (zurzeit 176 TR 22 bzw. 5 R 22 vom März 1992).\n\n- Angaben für die jeweils frequenzabhängige Mindestnutzfeldstärke sind für TV-analog der ITU-R BT.417 zu entnehmen, Angaben für den Betrieb eines Kanals im Band II in analoger Übertragungstechnik (UKWTonrundfunk) sind dem Abkommen Genf 1984 zu entnehmen, Angaben für den Betrieb eines T-DAB-Kanals dem Abkommen Wiesbaden 1995 (Pkt. 2.2.3, Tabelle 1, Position 'Medianwert der Mindestfeldstärke') und Angaben für den Betrieb eines DVB-T-Kanals dem Abkommen Chester 1997 (Tabelle A.1.50, Position 'Medianwert für die minimale äquivalente Feldstärke'). In Gleichwellennetzen werden theoretische Versorgungsflächen verschiedener Sender nicht mehrfach veranschlagt.\n\nAuf der Basis der oben genannten Ausbreitungskurven wird für eine Sendefunkanlage eine Mindestnutzfeldstärkekontur gemäß den jeweils gültigen internationalen Abkommen errechnet. Hieraus ergibt sich für jeden 10°-Schritt eine Entfernung r vom Senderstandort bis zu dem Punkt, an dem die Mindestnutzfeldstärke erreicht ist. Daraus kann für jeden der 36 10°-Schritte ein Flächenelement A berechnet werden:\n\nDurch Addition der 36 Flächenelemente ergibt sich die theoretische Versorgungsfläche einer Sendeanlage in Quadratkilometern.\n\n- Seite 49 von 78 -", + "recall": 0.9281045751633987, + "true_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz ‒ www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n *) Berechnung der theoretischen Versorgungsfläche für das Beitragsjahr 2014: Die theoretische Versorgungsfläche ist eine Berechnungsgröße zur Ermittlung des Beitrags. Sie basiert für alle Rundfunkdienste auf den internationalen Ausbreitungskurven der ITU‑R P.370, den internationalen Abkommen für T‑DAB Wiesbaden 1995 und Maastricht 2002 und für DVB‑T Chester 1997, sowie den jeweils gültigen nationalen Richtlinien (zurzeit 176 TR 22 bzw. 5 R 22 vom März 1992). Angaben für die jeweils frequenzabhängige Mindestnutzfeldstärke sind für TV-analog der ITU‑R BT.417\n\ngültigen nationalen Richtlinien (zurzeit 176 TR 22 bzw. 5 R 22 vom März 1992). Angaben für die jeweils frequenzabhängige Mindestnutzfeldstärke sind für TV-analog der ITU‑R BT.417 zu entnehmen, Angaben für den Betrieb eines Kanals im Band II in analoger Übertragungstechnik (UKW- Tonrundfunk) sind dem Abkommen Genf 1984 zu entnehmen, Angaben für den Betrieb eines T‑DAB-Kanals dem Abkommen Wiesbaden 1995 (Pkt. 2.2.3, Tabelle 1, Position „Medianwert der Mindestfeldstärke“) und Angaben für den Betrieb eines DVB‑T-Kanals dem Abkommen Chester 1997 (Tabelle A.1.50, Position „Medianwert für die minimale äquivalente Feldstärke“). In Gleichwellennetzen werden theoretische Versorgungsflächen verschiedener Sender nicht mehrfach veranschlagt. Auf der Basis der oben genannten Ausbreitungskurven wird für eine Sendefunkanlage eine\n\nVersorgungsflächen verschiedener Sender nicht mehrfach veranschlagt. Auf der Basis der oben genannten Ausbreitungskurven wird für eine Sendefunkanlage eine Mindestnutzfeldstärkekontur gemäß den jeweils gültigen internationalen Abkommen errechnet. Hieraus ergibt sich für jeden 10°-Schritt eine Entfernung r vom Senderstandort bis zu dem Punkt, an dem die Mindestnutzfeldstärke erreicht ist. Daraus kann für jeden der 36 10°-Schritte ein Flächenelement A berechnet werden:\n\nDurch Addition der 36 Flächenelemente ergibt sich die theoretische Versorgungsfläche einer Sendeanlage in Quadratkilometern.\n\n- Seite 49 von 78 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8701231188378621, + "doc_id": "62fedf68921d279002ade66bdb54dcaf5f5ab2eb3f4c546fa3156cbe00555404", + "edit_distance": 0.225, + "f1_score": 0.9799196787148593, + "meteor": 0.9558972412447458, + "precision": 0.991869918699187, + "pred_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz - www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n## Verordnung über die Prüfung zum anerkannten Abschluss Geprüfter Fachagrarwirt Baumpflege - Bachelor Professional Baumpflege oder Geprüfte Fachagrarwirtin Baumpflege Bachelor Professional Baumpflege (Fachagrarwirt-BaumpflegePrüfungsverordnung - FABaumPflPrV)\n\nFABaumPflPrV\n\nAusfertigungsdatum: 02.12.2020\n\nVollzitat:\n\n\"Fachagrarwirt-Baumpflege-Prüfungsverordnung vom 2. Dezember 2020 (BGBl. I S. 2643)\"\n\nErsetzt V 806-21-7-39 v. 29.6.1993 I 1114 (FAgrPrV)\n\n## Fußnote\n\n(+++ Textnachweis ab: 1.1.2021 +++)\n\n## Eingangsformel\n\nAuf Grund des § 53 Absatz 1 in Verbindung mit Absatz 2 und Absatz 3 Nummer 1 und mit § 53a Absatz 1 Nummer 2 und mit § 53c des Berufsbildungsgesetzes in der Fassung der Bekanntmachung vom 4. Mai 2020 (BGBl. I S. 920) verordnet das Bundesministerium für Ernährung und Landwirtschaft im Einvernehmen mit dem Bundesministerium für Bildung und Forschung nach Anhörung des Hauptausschusses des Bundesinstituts für Berufsbildung:\n\n## Inhaltsübersicht\n\nAbschnitt 1\n\nAllgemeines\n\n- § 1 Ziel der Prüfung, Fortbildungsstufe und Bezeichnung des Fortbildungsabschlusses\n- § 2 Qualifizierungsbereiche\n- § 3 Voraussetzungen für die Zulassung zur Prüfung\n- § 4 Gliederung der Prüfung\n- § 5 Bewerten der Prüfung\n\n## Abschnitt 2\n\nPrüfungsteil\n\nBaumdiagnose und Baumpflegemaßnahmen\n\n- § 6 Anforderungen und Prüfungsinhalte\n- § 7 Prüfungsbestandteile\n- § 8 Arbeitsprojekt\n\n- Seite 1 von 15 -", + "recall": 0.9682539682539683, + "true_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz ‒ www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n# Verordnung über die Prüfung zum anerkannten Abschluss Geprüfter Fachagrarwirt Baumpflege – Bachelor Professional Baumpflege oder Geprüfte Fachagrarwirtin Baumpflege – Bachelor Professional Baumpflege (Fachagrarwirt-Baumpflege- Prüfungsverordnung - FABaumPflPrV)\n\n## Fußnote\n\n## Eingangsformel\n\n## Inhaltsübersicht\n\nFABaumPflPrV\n\nAusfertigungsdatum: 02.12.2020\n\nVollzitat:\n\n\"Fachagrarwirt-Baumpflege-Prüfungsverordnung vom 2. Dezember 2020 (BGBl. I S. 2643)\" Ersetzt V 806-21-7-39 v. 29.6.1993 I 1114 (FAgrPrV)\n\n(+++ Textnachweis ab: 1.1.2021 +++)\n\nAuf Grund des § 53 Absatz 1 in Verbindung mit Absatz 2 und Absatz 3 Nummer 1 und mit § 53a Absatz 1 Nummer 2 und mit § 53c des Berufsbildungsgesetzes in der Fassung der Bekanntmachung vom 4. Mai 2020 (BGBl. I S. 920) verordnet das Bundesministerium für Ernährung und Landwirtschaft im Einvernehmen mit dem Bundesministerium für Bildung und Forschung nach Anhörung des Hauptausschusses des Bundesinstituts für Berufsbildung:\n\n## Abschnitt 1\n\n## Allgemeines\n\n## Abschnitt 2\n\n## Prüfungsteil Baumdiagnose und Baumpflegemaßnahmen\n\n- Seite 1 von 15 -\n\n- § 1 Ziel der Prüfung, Fortbildungsstufe und Bezeichnung des Fortbildungsabschlusses\n\n- § 2 Qualifizierungsbereiche\n\n- § 3 Voraussetzungen für die Zulassung zur Prüfung\n\n- § 4 Gliederung der Prüfung\n\n- § 5 Bewerten der Prüfung\n\n- § 6 Anforderungen und Prüfungsinhalte\n\n- § 7 Prüfungsbestandteile\n\n- § 8 Arbeitsprojekt" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8942255541978509, + "doc_id": "23c01bd282d46d100db04fccd967dde8bc0008322cfee8dff6670e28e52d48d5", + "edit_distance": 0.045454545454545456, + "f1_score": 0.9714285714285715, + "meteor": 0.9541331684188827, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz - www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n- Seite 12 von 24 -", + "recall": 0.9444444444444444, + "true_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz ‒ www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n- Seite 12 von 24 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7814109923461532, + "doc_id": "f2caadd9fb1bc3da448eaa45255b2aac90d315983d18cf5764def97ba919785b", + "edit_distance": 0.18134715025906736, + "f1_score": 0.9705882352941176, + "meteor": 0.8158386643679437, + "precision": 0.9801980198019802, + "pred_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz - www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\nDie Ermittlung der Entfernungen basiert auf den Ausbreitungskurven für Landausbreitung der Empfehlung ITU-R P.370 für 50 % Zeit- und 50 % Ortswahrscheinlichkeit. Die Geländerauigkeit beträgt 50 m. Als Parameter sind der Frequenzbereich, in dem die Nutzung stattfindet, der Wert der Mindestnutzfeldstärke sowie die sektoriellen effektiven Antennenhöhen und Leistungen erforderlich. Für Entfernungen r, die kleiner sind als 10 km, werden die Ausbreitungskurven verwendet, die zurzeit auch in den Anlagen 1a und 2a der Richtlinie 176 TR 22 bzw. der Richtlinie 5 R 22 zu finden sind.\n\nFür Sender, die im Rahmen eines Gleichwellennetzes betrieben werden, wird mittels Leistungsadditionsverfahren die Summenfeldstärke des Netzes berechnet. Die theoretische Versorgungsfläche entsteht durch Addition von hinreichend kleinen Flächenelementen, in denen die Mindestnutzfeldstärke erreicht wird.\n\nFrequenznutzungsbeiträge und EMV-Beiträge für das Jahr 2015\n\n- Seite 50 von 78 -", + "recall": 0.9611650485436893, + "true_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz ‒ www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\nDie Ermittlung der Entfernungen basiert auf den Ausbreitungskurven für Landausbreitung der Empfehlung ITU‑R P.370 für 50 % Zeit‑ und 50 % Ortswahrscheinlichkeit. Die Geländerauigkeit beträgt 50 m. Als Parameter sind der Frequenzbereich, in dem die Nutzung stattfindet, der Wert der Mindestnutzfeldstärke sowie die sektoriellen effektiven Antennenhöhen und Leistungen erforderlich. Für Entfernungen r, die kleiner sind als 10 km, werden die Ausbreitungskurven verwendet, die zurzeit auch in den Anlagen 1a und 2a der Richtlinie 176 TR 22 bzw. der Richtlinie 5 R 22 zu finden sind. Für Sender, die im Rahmen eines Gleichwellennetzes betrieben werden, wird mittels\n\n2a der Richtlinie 176 TR 22 bzw. der Richtlinie 5 R 22 zu finden sind. Für Sender, die im Rahmen eines Gleichwellennetzes betrieben werden, wird mittels Leistungsadditionsverfahren die Summenfeldstärke des Netzes berechnet. Die theoretische Versorgungsfläche entsteht durch Addition von hinreichend kleinen Flächenelementen, in denen die Mindestnutzfeldstärke erreicht wird.\n\n## Frequenznutzungsbeiträge und EMV-Beiträge für das Jahr 2015\n\n- Seite 50 von 78 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.814992723008203, + "doc_id": "494d1ecdf6e193b1a1b1dee9261fdb53dbdcfbcf36e025c08562fe285a153e90", + "edit_distance": 0.6973293768545994, + "f1_score": 0.9893617021276596, + "meteor": 0.9094878535446675, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Anlage 4 (zu § 5 Absatz 1 Nummer 1) GVFDI\n\n(Fundstelle: BGBl. I 2013, 4219 - 4220)\n\n## PDF-Dokument wird in eigenem Fenster angezeigt\n\n## Anlage 5 (zu § 5 Absatz 1 Nummer 2) STFDI\n\n(Fundstelle: BGBl. I 2013, 4221 - 4222)\n\nPDF-Dokument wird in eigenem Fenster angezeigt\n\n## Anlage 6 (zu § 6 Absatz 2 Nummer 1) QGV\n\n(Fundstelle: BGBl. I 2013, 4223 - 4224; bzgl. einzelner Änderungen vgl. Fußnote)\n\nPDF-Dokument wird in eigenem Fenster angezeigt\n\n## Anlage 7 (zu § 4 Absatz 6 Satz 1) QGVP\n\n(Fundstelle: BGBl. I 2013, 4225 - 4226; bzgl. einzelner Änderungen vgl. Fußnote)\n\nPDF-Dokument wird in eigenem Fenster angezeigt\n\n## Anlage 8 (zu § 6 Absatz 2 Nummer 2) QV 1\n\n(Fundstelle: BGBl. I 2013, 4227 - 4228; bzgl. einzelner Änderungen vgl. Fußnote)\n\nPDF-Dokument wird in eigenem Fenster angezeigt\n\n## Anlage 9 (zu § 6 Absatz 2 Nummer 3) QV 2\n\n(Fundstelle: BGBl. I 2013, 4229 - 4230; bzgl. einzelner Änderungen vgl. Fußnote)\n\nPDF-Dokument wird in eigenem Fenster angezeigt\n\nAnlage 10 (weggefallen)\n\nAnlage 11 (weggefallen)\n\nAnlage 12 (weggefallen)\n\nAnlage 13 (zu § 6 Absatz 1) QSA\n\n(Fundstelle: BGBl. I 2020, 1893)\n\n## Finanzinformationen gemäß § 25 Absatz 2 KWG - Sonstige Angaben -\n\n(Übergeordnetes Unternehmen einschließlich nachgeordneter Unternehmen mit Sitz im Inland und im Ausland) 1\n\n- Seite 10 von 17 -\n\nEin Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz - www.gesetze-im-internet.de", + "recall": 0.9789473684210527, + "true_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz ‒ www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n## Anlage 4 (zu § 5 Absatz 1 Nummer 1) GVFDI\n\n## Anlage 5 (zu § 5 Absatz 1 Nummer 2) STFDI\n\n## Anlage 6 (zu § 6 Absatz 2 Nummer 1) QGV\n\n## Anlage 7 (zu § 4 Absatz 6 Satz 1) QGVP\n\n## Anlage 8 (zu § 6 Absatz 2 Nummer 2) QV 1\n\n## Anlage 9 (zu § 6 Absatz 2 Nummer 3) QV 2\n\n## Anlage 10 (weggefallen)\n\n## Anlage 11 (weggefallen)\n\n## Anlage 12 (weggefallen)\n\n## Anlage 13 (zu § 6 Absatz 1) QSA\n\n## Finanzinformationen gemäß § 25 Absatz 2 KWG – Sonstige Angaben – (Übergeordnetes Unternehmen einschließlich nachgeordneter Unternehmen mit Sitz im Inland und im Ausland)\n\n(Fundstelle: BGBl. I 2013, 4219 - 4220)\n\nPDF-Dokument wird in eigenem Fenster angezeigt\n\n(Fundstelle: BGBl. I 2013, 4221 - 4222)\n\nPDF-Dokument wird in eigenem Fenster angezeigt\n\n(Fundstelle: BGBl. I 2013, 4223 - 4224; bzgl. einzelner Änderungen vgl. Fußnote)\n\nPDF-Dokument wird in eigenem Fenster angezeigt\n\n(Fundstelle: BGBl. I 2013, 4225 - 4226; bzgl. einzelner Änderungen vgl. Fußnote)\n\nPDF-Dokument wird in eigenem Fenster angezeigt\n\n(Fundstelle: BGBl. I 2013, 4227 - 4228; bzgl. einzelner Änderungen vgl. Fußnote)\n\nPDF-Dokument wird in eigenem Fenster angezeigt\n\n(Fundstelle: BGBl. I 2013, 4229 - 4230; bzgl. einzelner Änderungen vgl. Fußnote)\n\nPDF-Dokument wird in eigenem Fenster angezeigt\n\n(Fundstelle: BGBl. I 2020, 1893)\n\n– Sonstige Angaben – (Übergeordnetes Unternehmen einschließlich nachgeordneter Unternehmen mit Sitz im Inland und im Ausland) 1\n\n- Seite 10 von 17 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7644868951259614, + "doc_id": "2f4478f13234046bbad5a92068d9dd7b7f9b817522cfa80c8cb0fcc1fcc1c1a5", + "edit_distance": 0.8276762402088773, + "f1_score": 0.996742671009772, + "meteor": 0.715515519086472, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## § 1 Anwendungsbereich\n\n## Abschnitt 2 Finanzinformationen\n\n- § 2 Art und Umfang der Finanzinformationen und der ergänzenden Informationen\n- § 3 Termin und Verfahren zur Einreichung\n- § 4 Finanzinformationen von Kreditinstituten\n- § 5 Finanzinformationen von Finanzdienstleistungsinstituten und Wertpapierhandelsbanken\n- § 6 Finanzinformationen auf zusammengefasster Basis\n- § 7 Ergänzende Informationen von Finanzdienstleistungsinstituten\n\nAbschnitt 3\n\nRisikotragfähigkeitsinformationen\n\n- Seite 1 von 17 -\n\nEin Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz - www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n## Verordnung zur Einreichung von Finanz- und Risikotragfähigkeitsinformationen nach dem Kreditwesengesetz (Finanz- und Risikotragfähigkeitsinformationenverordnung FinaRisikoV)\n\nFinaRisikoV\n\nAusfertigungsdatum: 06.12.2013\n\nVollzitat:\n\n\"Finanz- und Risikotragfähigkeitsinformationenverordnung vom 6. Dezember 2013 (BGBl. I S. 4209), die zuletzt durch Artikel 7 Absatz 40 des Gesetzes vom 12. Mai 2021 (BGBl. I S. 990) geändert worden ist\"\n\nStand:\n\nzuletzt geändert durch Art. 1 V v. 12.8.2020 I 1890\n\nHinweis: noch nicht abschließend bearbeitet\n\nÄnderung durch Art. 7 Abs. 40 G v. 12.5.2021 I 990 (Nr. 23) textlich nachgewiesen, dokumentarisch\n\n## Fußnote\n\n(+++ Textnachweis ab: 1.1.2014 +++)\n\n(+++ Amtlicher Hinweis des Normgebers auf EG-Recht\n\nUmsetzung der\n\nEURL 36/2013 (Celex Nr: 32013L0036) vgl. V . 19.12.2014 I 2336\n\nAnpassung der\n\nEUV 575/2013 (Celex Nr: 32006L0048) vgl. V . 19.12.2014 I 2336 +++)\n\n(+++ Zur Anwendung vgl. § 8 F v. 6.12.2013 u. § 13 +++)\n\nDie V wurde als Artikel 1 der V v. 6.12.2013 I 4209 vom Bundesministerium der Finanzen im Benehmen mit der Deutschen Bundesbank beschlossen. Sie ist gem. Art. 4 Abs. 1 Satz 1 dieser V am 1.1.2014 in Kraft getreten. Überschrift: IdF d. Art. 1 V v. 19.12.2014 I 2336 mWv 30.12.2014\n\n## Inhaltsübersicht\n\n## Abschnitt 1 Allgemeines", + "recall": 0.9935064935064936, + "true_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz ‒ www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n# Verordnung zur Einreichung von Finanz- und Risikotragfähigkeitsinformationen nach dem Kreditwesengesetz (Finanz- und Risikotragfähigkeitsinformationenverordnung - FinaRisikoV)\n\nFinaRisikoV\n\nVollzitat:\n\nAusfertigungsdatum: 06.12.2013\n\n\"Finanz- und Risikotragfähigkeitsinformationenverordnung vom 6. Dezember 2013 (BGBl. I S. 4209), die zuletzt durch Artikel 7 Absatz 40 des Gesetzes vom 12. Mai 2021 (BGBl. I S. 990) geändert worden ist\"\n\n## Fußnote\n\nDie V wurde als Artikel 1 der V v. 6.12.2013 I 4209 vom Bundesministerium der Finanzen im Benehmen mit der Deutschen Bundesbank beschlossen. Sie ist gem. Art. 4 Abs. 1 Satz 1 dieser V am 1.1.2014 in Kraft getreten. Überschrift: IdF d. Art. 1 V v. 19.12.2014 I 2336 mWv 30.12.2014\n\n## Inhaltsübersicht\n\n## Abschnitt 1 Allgemeines\n\n## Abschnitt 2 Finanzinformationen\n\n- § 1 Anwendungsbereich\n\n- § 3 Termin und Verfahren zur Einreichung\n\n- § 2 Art und Umfang der Finanzinformationen und der ergänzenden Informationen\n\n- § 4 Finanzinformationen von Kreditinstituten\n\n- § 5 Finanzinformationen von Finanzdienstleistungsinstituten und Wertpapierhandelsbanken\n\n- § 6 Finanzinformationen auf zusammengefasster Basis\n\n- § 7 Ergänzende Informationen von Finanzdienstleistungsinstituten\n\n## Abschnitt 3 Risikotragfähigkeitsinformationen\n\n- Seite 1 von 17 -\n\n- Stand: zuletzt geändert durch Art. 1 V v. 12.8.2020 I 1890\n\n- Hinweis: Änderung durch Art. 7 Abs. 40 G v. 12.5.2021 I 990 (Nr. 23) textlich nachgewiesen, dokumentarisch noch nicht abschließend bearbeitet\n\n(+++ Textnachweis ab: 1.1.2014 +++) (+++ Amtlicher Hinweis des Normgebers auf EG-Recht\n\n(+++ Textnachweis ab: 1.1.2014 +++) (+++ Amtlicher Hinweis des Normgebers auf EG-Recht Umsetzung der EURL 36/2013 (Celex Nr: 32013L0036) vgl. V . 19.12.2014 I 2336\n\nUmsetzung der EURL 36/2013 (Celex Nr: 32013L0036) vgl. V . 19.12.2014 I 2336 Anpassung der EUV 575/2013 (Celex Nr: 32006L0048) vgl. V . 19.12.2014 I 2336 +++)\n\nAnpassung der EUV 575/2013 (Celex Nr: 32006L0048) vgl. V . 19.12.2014 I 2336 +++) (+++ Zur Anwendung vgl. § 8 F v. 6.12.2013 u. § 13 +++)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8924517514138761, + "doc_id": "40f75473544afdf9383756f928bd68ff6c93e98b0379b9c727f207a42e716787", + "edit_distance": 0.29439252336448596, + "f1_score": 0.9823008849557524, + "meteor": 0.9852558290774049, + "precision": 0.9910714285714286, + "pred_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz - www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n## Verordnung zur Bestimmung von privatfinanzierten Abschnitten von Bundesfernstraßen (FernstraßenbauprivatfinanzierungsBestimmungsverordnung - FStrPrivFinBestV)\n\nFStrPrivFinBestV\n\nAusfertigungsdatum: 20.06.2005\n\nVollzitat:\n\n\"Fernstraßenbauprivatfinanzierungs-Bestimmungsverordnung vom 20. Juni 2005 (BGBl. I S. 1686)\"\n\n## Fußnote\n\n(+++ Textnachweis ab: 25. 6.2005 +++)\n\n## Eingangsformel\n\nAuf Grund des § 3 Abs. 1 Satz 2 des Fernstraßenbauprivatfinanzierungsgesetzes in der Fassung der Bekanntmachung vom 20. Januar 2003 (BGBl. I S. 98) verordnet das Bundesministerium für Verkehr, Bau- und Wohnungswesen im Einvernehmen mit den Landesregierungen der Länder Mecklenburg-Vorpommern und Schleswig-Holstein:\n\n## § 1 Bestimmung privatfinanzierter Abschnitte von Bundesfernstraßen\n\nDie in der Anlage bezeichneten Abschnitte von Bundesfernstraßen werden als Strecken festgelegt, die nach Maßgabe des Fernstraßenbauprivatfinanzierungsgesetzes und der übrigen zu diesem Gesetz ergangenen Rechtsverordnungen gebaut, erhalten, betrieben und finanziert werden sollen (Privatfinanzierte Abschnitte von Bundesfernstraßen).\n\n## § 2 Inkrafttreten, Außerkrafttreten\n\nDiese Verordnung tritt am Tage nach der Verkündung in Kraft.\n\n## Anlage (zu § 1) Privatfinanzierte Abschnitte von Bundesfernstraßen\n\nFundstelle des Originaltextes: BGBl. I 2005, 1686\n\n- Seite 1 von 1 -", + "recall": 0.9736842105263158, + "true_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz ‒ www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n# Verordnung zur Bestimmung von privatfinanzierten Abschnitten von Bundesfernstraßen (Fernstraßenbauprivatfinanzierungs- Bestimmungsverordnung - FStrPrivFinBestV)\n\nFStrPrivFinBestV\n\nAusfertigungsdatum: 20.06.2005\n\nVollzitat:\n\n\"Fernstraßenbauprivatfinanzierungs-Bestimmungsverordnung vom 20. Juni 2005 (BGBl. I S. 1686)\"\n\n(+++ Textnachweis ab: 25. 6.2005 +++)\n\nAuf Grund des § 3 Abs. 1 Satz 2 des Fernstraßenbauprivatfinanzierungsgesetzes in der Fassung der Bekanntmachung vom 20. Januar 2003 (BGBl. I S. 98) verordnet das Bundesministerium für Verkehr, Bau- und Wohnungswesen im Einvernehmen mit den Landesregierungen der Länder Mecklenburg-Vorpommern und Schleswig-Holstein:\n\nDie in der Anlage bezeichneten Abschnitte von Bundesfernstraßen werden als Strecken festgelegt, die nach Maßgabe des Fernstraßenbauprivatfinanzierungsgesetzes und der übrigen zu diesem Gesetz ergangenen Rechtsverordnungen gebaut, erhalten, betrieben und finanziert werden sollen (Privatfinanzierte Abschnitte von Bundesfernstraßen).\n\nDiese Verordnung tritt am Tage nach der Verkündung in Kraft.\n\nFundstelle des Originaltextes: BGBl. I 2005, 1686\n\n## Fußnote\n\n## Eingangsformel\n\n## § 1 Bestimmung privatfinanzierter Abschnitte von Bundesfernstraßen\n\n## § 2 Inkrafttreten, Außerkrafttreten\n\n## Anlage (zu § 1) Privatfinanzierte Abschnitte von Bundesfernstraßen\n\n- Seite 1 von 1 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9573917793789077, + "doc_id": "62a8e2de11471b069979cc2b31c7c8e3a6587125f00031955d916a4ac4681849", + "edit_distance": 0.0234375, + "f1_score": 0.9773462783171523, + "meteor": 0.9777043410246382, + "precision": 0.9869281045751634, + "pred_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz - www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n'Medianwert für die minimale äquivalente Feldstärke'). In Gleichwellennetzen werden theoretische Versorgungsflächen verschiedener Sender nicht mehrfach veranschlagt.\n\nAuf der Basis der oben genannten Ausbreitungskurven wird für eine Sendefunkanlage eine Mindestnutzfeldstärkekontur gemäß den jeweils gültigen internationalen Abkommen errechnet. Hieraus ergibt sich für jeden 10°-Schritt eine Entfernung r vom Senderstandort bis zu dem Punkt, an dem die Mindestnutzfeldstärke erreicht ist. Daraus kann für jeden der 36 10°-Schritte ein Flächenelement A berechnet werden:\n\nDurch Addition der 36 Flächenelemente ergibt sich die theoretische Versorgungsfläche einer Sendeanlage in Quadratkilometern.\n\nDie Ermittlung der Entfernungen basiert auf den Ausbreitungskurven für Landausbreitung der Empfehlung ITU-R P.370 für 50 % Zeit- und 50 % Ortswahrscheinlichkeit. Die Geländerauigkeit beträgt 50 m. Als Parameter sind der Frequenzbereich, in dem die Nutzung stattfindet, der Wert der Mindestnutzfeldstärke sowie die sektoriellen effektiven Antennenhöhen und Leistungen erforderlich. Für Entfernungen r, die kleiner sind als 10 km, werden die Ausbreitungskurven verwendet, die zurzeit auch in den Anlagen 1a und 2a der Richtlinie 176 TR 22 bzw. der Richtlinie 5 R 22 zu finden sind.\n\nFür Sender, die im Rahmen eines Gleichwellennetzes betrieben werden, wird mittels Leistungsadditionsverfahren die Summenfeldstärke des Netzes berechnet. Die theoretische Versorgungsfläche entsteht durch Addition von hinreichend kleinen Flächenelementen, in denen die Mindestnutzfeldstärke erreicht wird.\n\nFrequenznutzungsbeiträge und EMV-Beiträge für das Jahr 2016\n\n- Seite 54 von 78 -", + "recall": 0.967948717948718, + "true_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz ‒ www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n„Medianwert für die minimale äquivalente Feldstärke“). In Gleichwellennetzen werden theoretische Versorgungsflächen verschiedener Sender nicht mehrfach veranschlagt.\n\nAuf der Basis der oben genannten Ausbreitungskurven wird für eine Sendefunkanlage eine Mindestnutzfeldstärkekontur gemäß den jeweils gültigen internationalen Abkommen errechnet. Hieraus ergibt sich für jeden 10°-Schritt eine Entfernung r vom Senderstandort bis zu dem Punkt, an dem die Mindestnutzfeldstärke erreicht ist. Daraus kann für jeden der 36 10°-Schritte ein Flächenelement A berechnet werden:\n\nDurch Addition der 36 Flächenelemente ergibt sich die theoretische Versorgungsfläche einer Sendeanlage in Quadratkilometern.\n\nDie Ermittlung der Entfernungen basiert auf den Ausbreitungskurven für Landausbreitung der Empfehlung ITU-R P.370 für 50 % Zeit- und 50 % Ortswahrscheinlichkeit. Die Geländerauigkeit beträgt 50 m. Als Parameter sind der Frequenzbereich, in dem die Nutzung stattfindet, der Wert der Mindestnutzfeldstärke sowie die sektoriellen effektiven Antennenhöhen und Leistungen erforderlich. Für Entfernungen r, die kleiner sind als 10 km, werden die Ausbreitungskurven verwendet, die zurzeit auch in den Anlagen 1a und 2a der Richtlinie 176 TR 22 bzw. der Richtlinie 5 R 22 zu finden sind.\n\nFür Sender, die im Rahmen eines Gleichwellennetzes betrieben werden, wird mittels Leistungsadditionsverfahren die Summenfeldstärke des Netzes berechnet. Die theoretische Versorgungsfläche entsteht durch Addition von hinreichend kleinen Flächenelementen, in denen die Mindestnutzfeldstärke erreicht wird.\n\n## Frequenznutzungsbeiträge und EMV-Beiträge für das Jahr 2016\n\n- Seite 54 von 78 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9234732618882052, + "doc_id": "15757e813e56959325b344c4edf40f12887f894cfa43666f6debf8924c16d6a6", + "edit_distance": 0.03225806451612903, + "f1_score": 0.978723404255319, + "meteor": 0.9675985663082438, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz - www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n## Frequenznutzungsbeiträge und EMV-Beiträge für das Jahr 2009\n\n- Seite 25 von 78 -", + "recall": 0.9583333333333334, + "true_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz ‒ www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n## Frequenznutzungsbeiträge und EMV-Beiträge für das Jahr 2009\n\n- Seite 25 von 78 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9813057074915894, + "doc_id": "fd746cf39479eca2e6d94ad3e0c84dd76ee285a9720c6ba56915ee2ecbc007ef", + "edit_distance": 0.0078125, + "f1_score": 0.9925925925925925, + "meteor": 0.992185562496125, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz - www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n- b) Benennung der drei schwerpunktmäßigen Handlungsbereiche,\n- 3. zur Situationsaufgabe nach § 6 Absatz 5\n- a) Benennung des Prüfungsteils unter Angabe des schwerpunktmäßigen Handlungsbereichs,\n- b) Benennung und Bewertung der Konzeption und praktischen Umsetzung mit Note sowie\n- c) Benennung und Bewertung der Präsentation mit Fachgespräch mit Note,\n- 4. die errechnete Gesamtpunktzahl für die gesamte Prüfung,\n- 5. die Gesamtnote als Dezimalzahl,\n- 6. die Gesamtnote in Worten,\n- 7. Befreiungen nach § 7,\n- 8. Vorliegen des Sachkundenachweises für die Anwendung von Pflanzenschutzmitteln nach § 2 Absatz 2.\n\n- Seite 9 von 9 -", + "recall": 0.9852941176470589, + "true_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz ‒ www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n- b) Benennung der drei schwerpunktmäßigen Handlungsbereiche,\n\n- 3. zur Situationsaufgabe nach § 6 Absatz 5\n\n- a) Benennung des Prüfungsteils unter Angabe des schwerpunktmäßigen Handlungsbereichs,\n\n- b) Benennung und Bewertung der Konzeption und praktischen Umsetzung mit Note sowie\n\n- c) Benennung und Bewertung der Präsentation mit Fachgespräch mit Note,\n\n- 4. die errechnete Gesamtpunktzahl für die gesamte Prüfung,\n\n- 5. die Gesamtnote als Dezimalzahl,\n\n- 6. die Gesamtnote in Worten,\n\n- 7. Befreiungen nach § 7,\n\n- 8. Vorliegen des Sachkundenachweises für die Anwendung von Pflanzenschutzmitteln nach § 2 Absatz 2.\n\n- Seite 9 von 9 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8942255541978509, + "doc_id": "138ca24fd799e92e0cb610108eb58736354e6c852fd97978f106c8a3825455bc", + "edit_distance": 0.045454545454545456, + "f1_score": 0.9714285714285715, + "meteor": 0.9541331684188827, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz - www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n- Seite 23 von 78 -", + "recall": 0.9444444444444444, + "true_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz ‒ www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n- Seite 23 von 78 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8784492876951839, + "doc_id": "b7188c941a031471e80d9970c20287fbdfb2918ad1e1a3abc975a7f222800033", + "edit_distance": 0.11594202898550725, + "f1_score": 0.98989898989899, + "meteor": 0.9834939969100517, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz - www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n## Internationaler Fernmeldevertrag\n\nFMVtr 1973\n\nAusfertigungsdatum: 25.10.1973\n\nVollzitat:\n\n\"Internationaler Fernmeldevertrag vom 25. Oktober 1973 (BGBl. 1976 II S. 1090)\"\n\n## Fußnote\n\nG v. 9.7.1976 II 1089 Inkraft gem. Bek. v. 7.4.1977 II 506 mWv 18.11.1976\n\n- Seite 1 von 1 -", + "recall": 0.98, + "true_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz ‒ www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n# Internationaler Fernmeldevertrag\n\nFMVtr 1973\n\nAusfertigungsdatum: 25.10.1973\n\nVollzitat:\n\n\"Internationaler Fernmeldevertrag vom 25. Oktober 1973 (BGBl. 1976 II S. 1090)\"\n\nG v. 9.7.1976 II 1089 Inkraft gem. Bek. v. 7.4.1977 II 506 mWv 18.11.1976\n\n## Fußnote\n\n- Seite 1 von 1 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8959198278451055, + "doc_id": "ce1caf0ca340581617805819c3f0e57e85402e4ba5eac4db6be8a52396fd890a", + "edit_distance": 0.3890160183066362, + "f1_score": 0.9936708860759493, + "meteor": 0.9139194869778094, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz - www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n## § 10 Risikotragfähigkeitsinformationen von Kreditinstituten\n\n- (1) Kreditinstitute haben die Angaben gemäß § 8 Absatz 1 zu melden und hierfür die Formulare aus den Anlagen 14 und 17 bis 26 dieser Verordnung zu verwenden.\n- (2) Kreditinstitute im Sinne des § 53b und des § 53c Absatz 1 Nummer 2 des Kreditwesengesetzes und Wertpapierhandelsbanken im Sinne des § 1 Absatz 3d Satz 5 des Kreditwesengesetzes sind von der Pflicht, Risikotragfähigkeitsinformationen nach Absatz 1 einzureichen, befreit.\n- (3) Kreditinstitute, die nach § 2a Absatz 2 des Kreditwesengesetzes für das Management von Risiken mit Ausnahme des Liquiditätsrisikos von den Anforderungen an eine ordnungsgemäße Geschäftsorganisation gemäß § 25a Absatz 1 des Kreditwesengesetzes freigestellt sind, sind von der Pflicht, Risikotragfähigkeitsinformationen nach Absatz 1 einzureichen, befreit. Satz 1 gilt entsprechend für Kreditinstitute, für die eine solche Freistellung gemäß § 2a Absatz 5 des Kreditwesengesetzes als gewährt gilt.\n\n## § 11 Risikotragfähigkeitsinformationen auf zusammengefasster Ebene\n\n- (1) Übergeordnete Unternehmen einer Gruppe, zu der mindestens ein Kreditinstitut mit Sitz im Inland gehört, haben die Risikotragfähigkeitsinformationen der Gruppe auf zusammengefasster Ebene gemäß § 8 Absatz 1 einzureichen und hierfür die Formulare aus den Anlagen 14 bis 26 dieser Verordnung zu verwenden.\n- (2) Gehören zu einer Gruppe keine inländischen Kreditinstitute, die weder Wertpapierhandelsbank noch Kreditinstitut im Sinne des § 53b oder § 53c Absatz 1 Nummer 2 des Kreditwesengesetzes sind, so ist das übergeordnete Unternehmen von der Pflicht, Risikotragfähigkeitsinformationen nach Absatz 1 einzureichen, befreit.\n\n## § 12 Kreditinstitute und Gruppen mit erhöhter Meldefrequenz\n\nDie Bundesanstalt kann für ein Kreditinstitut oder eine Gruppe im Einzelfall eine erhöhte Meldefrequenz anordnen, soweit dies zur Erfüllung ihrer Aufgaben erforderlich ist.\n\n## Abschnitt 4 Schlussvorschrift\n\n§ 13 (weggefallen)\n\nAnlage 1 (zu § 4 Abs 1 Nummer 1) GVKI\n\n(Fundstelle: BGBl. I 2013, 4213 - 4214)\n\nPDF-Dokument wird in eigenem Fenster angezeigt\n\nAnlage 2 (zu § 4 Absatz 1 Nummer 2) GVKIP\n\n(Fundstelle: BGBl. I 2013, 4215 - 4216)\n\nPDF-Dokument wird in eigenem Fenster angezeigt\n\nAnlage 3 (zu § 4 Absatz 1 Nummer 3) SAKI\n\n(Fundstelle: BGBl. I 2020, 1891 - 1892)\n\nFinanzinformationen gemäß § 25 Absatz 1 Satz 1 KWG - Sonstige Angaben -\n\n- Seite 6 von 17 -", + "recall": 0.9874213836477987, + "true_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz ‒ www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n## § 10 Risikotragfähigkeitsinformationen von Kreditinstituten\n\n## § 11 Risikotragfähigkeitsinformationen auf zusammengefasster Ebene\n\n## § 12 Kreditinstitute und Gruppen mit erhöhter Meldefrequenz\n\n## Abschnitt 4 Schlussvorschrift\n\n## § 13 (weggefallen)\n\n## Anlage 1 (zu § 4 Abs 1 Nummer 1) GVKI\n\n## Anlage 2 (zu § 4 Absatz 1 Nummer 2) GVKIP\n\n## Anlage 3 (zu § 4 Absatz 1 Nummer 3) SAKI\n\n## Finanzinformationen gemäß § 25 Absatz 1 Satz 1 KWG – Sonstige Angaben –\n\n(1) Kreditinstitute haben die Angaben gemäß § 8 Absatz 1 zu melden und hierfür die Formulare aus den Anlagen 14 und 17 bis 26 dieser Verordnung zu verwenden.\n\n(2) Kreditinstitute im Sinne des § 53b und des § 53c Absatz 1 Nummer 2 des Kreditwesengesetzes und Wertpapierhandelsbanken im Sinne des § 1 Absatz 3d Satz 5 des Kreditwesengesetzes sind von der Pflicht, Risikotragfähigkeitsinformationen nach Absatz 1 einzureichen, befreit.\n\n(3) Kreditinstitute, die nach § 2a Absatz 2 des Kreditwesengesetzes für das Management von Risiken mit Ausnahme des Liquiditätsrisikos von den Anforderungen an eine ordnungsgemäße Geschäftsorganisation gemäß § 25a Absatz 1 des Kreditwesengesetzes freigestellt sind, sind von der Pflicht, Risikotragfähigkeitsinformationen nach Absatz 1 einzureichen, befreit. Satz 1 gilt entsprechend für Kreditinstitute, für die eine solche Freistellung gemäß § 2a Absatz 5 des Kreditwesengesetzes als gewährt gilt.\n\n(1) Übergeordnete Unternehmen einer Gruppe, zu der mindestens ein Kreditinstitut mit Sitz im Inland gehört, haben die Risikotragfähigkeitsinformationen der Gruppe auf zusammengefasster Ebene gemäß § 8 Absatz 1 einzureichen und hierfür die Formulare aus den Anlagen 14 bis 26 dieser Verordnung zu verwenden.\n\n(2) Gehören zu einer Gruppe keine inländischen Kreditinstitute, die weder Wertpapierhandelsbank noch Kreditinstitut im Sinne des § 53b oder § 53c Absatz 1 Nummer 2 des Kreditwesengesetzes sind, so ist das übergeordnete Unternehmen von der Pflicht, Risikotragfähigkeitsinformationen nach Absatz 1 einzureichen, befreit.\n\nDie Bundesanstalt kann für ein Kreditinstitut oder eine Gruppe im Einzelfall eine erhöhte Meldefrequenz anordnen, soweit dies zur Erfüllung ihrer Aufgaben erforderlich ist.\n\n(Fundstelle: BGBl. I 2013, 4213 - 4214)\n\nPDF-Dokument wird in eigenem Fenster angezeigt\n\n(Fundstelle: BGBl. I 2013, 4215 - 4216)\n\nPDF-Dokument wird in eigenem Fenster angezeigt\n\n(Fundstelle: BGBl. I 2020, 1891 – 1892)\n\n- Seite 6 von 17 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8942255541978509, + "doc_id": "ac77df7dd05820f3c2d58f957f5d41df66a15f24a4579b082ea3c51ce91db225", + "edit_distance": 0.045454545454545456, + "f1_score": 0.9714285714285715, + "meteor": 0.9541331684188827, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz - www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n- Seite 42 von 78 -", + "recall": 0.9444444444444444, + "true_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz ‒ www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n- Seite 42 von 78 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.905751185462186, + "doc_id": "8ba84c5085b7502b8a253d5ec429690884bfbc742a41f72a9462aec9511ffa09", + "edit_distance": 0.6650717703349283, + "f1_score": 0.9943181818181818, + "meteor": 0.82287225894611, + "precision": 0.9943181818181818, + "pred_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz - www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n## Verordnung über Kreuzungsanlagen im Zuge von Bundesfernstraßen (Bundesfernstraßenkreuzungsverordnung FStrKrV)\n\nFStrKrV\n\nAusfertigungsdatum: 02.12.1975\n\nVollzitat:\n\n\"Bundesfernstraßenkreuzungsverordnung vom 2. Dezember 1975 (BGBl. I S. 2984, 2985)\"\n\n## Fußnote\n\n(+++ Textnachweis ab: 1. 1.1976 +++)\n\n## § 1 Höhengleiche Kreuzungen\n\n- (1) Zur Kreuzungsanlage im Sinne des § 13 Abs. 1 FStrG, die der Baulastträger der Bundesfernstraße zu unterhalten hat, gehören\n- 1. von der die Bundesfernstraße kreuzenden Straße vom Anfang ihrer Eckausrundungen an\n- -die befestigten Fahrstreifen einschließlich Trenn-, Seiten- und Randstreifen,\n- -die Verkehrszeichen und -einrichtungen sowie Verkehrsanlagen aller Art, insbesondere Verkehrsinseln,\n- -die Gehwege außerhalb der Ortsdurchfahrten und die Radwege, soweit diese Wege mit der kreuzenden Straße in Zusammenhang stehen und mit dieser gleichlaufen,\n- -die Durchlässe, Dämme, Gräben, Böschungen und Stützmauern,\n- 2. die durch die Kreuzung bedingten Lichtzeichenanlagen.\n- (2) Eine Eckausrundung beginnt an der Stelle, an der der erste Radius die Ecken der Straßenränder von der Bundesfernstraße und der kreuzenden Straße abzurunden beginnt.\n- (3) Sichtfelder gehören zur kreuzenden Straße.\n\n## § 2 Über- und Unterführungen\n\n- (1) Zum Kreuzungsbauwerk im Sinne des § 13 Abs. 2 des Bundesfernstraßengesetzes gehören\n- 1. die Widerlager mit Flügelmauern,\n- 2. die Pfeiler,\n- 3. der Überbau mit Geländern, Brüstungen und Auffangvorrichtungen, jedoch mit Ausnahme der Straßendecke, der Entwässerungsrinnen und Einläufe und, soweit sie nicht durch die Konstruktion der Brücke bedingt sind, der Verkehrszeichen und -einrichtungen sowie Verkehrsanlagen aller Art.\n- (2) Die nicht zum Kreuzungsbauwerk rechnenden Teile des Überbaus (Abs. 1 Nr. 3) gehören zu der Straße, in deren Verlauf sie liegen.\n- (3) Verbindungsarme zwischen der Bundesfernstraße und der kreuzenden Straße gehören zur Bundesfernstraße. Die Verbindungsarme enden am äußeren Fahrbahnrand der kreuzenden Straße. Sind Abbiege- oder Einfädelstreifen auf der kreuzenden Straße vorhanden, so enden die Verbindungsarme am Anfang der Eckausrundungen der kreuzenden Straße. Bei höhenungleichen Einmündungen beginnen die Verbindungsarme an der ersten Aufweitung der einmündenden Straße. Lichtzeichenanlagen und Verkehrsinseln an der Einmündung des Verbindungsarms gehören zur Bundesfernstraße.\n\n## § 3 Sonstige Teile der Kreuzungsanlage\n\n- Seite 1 von 2 -", + "recall": 0.9943181818181818, + "true_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz ‒ www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n# Verordnung über Kreuzungsanlagen im Zuge von Bundesfernstraßen (Bundesfernstraßenkreuzungsverordnung - FStrKrV)\n\n## Fußnote\n\n## § 1 Höhengleiche Kreuzungen\n\n## § 2 Über- und Unterführungen\n\n## § 3 Sonstige Teile der Kreuzungsanlage\n\nFStrKrV\n\nAusfertigungsdatum: 02.12.1975\n\nVollzitat:\n\n\"Bundesfernstraßenkreuzungsverordnung vom 2. Dezember 1975 (BGBl. I S. 2984, 2985)\"\n\n(+++ Textnachweis ab: 1. 1.1976 +++)\n\n(1) Zur Kreuzungsanlage im Sinne des § 13 Abs. 1 FStrG, die der Baulastträger der Bundesfernstraße zu unterhalten hat, gehören\n\n(2) Eine Eckausrundung beginnt an der Stelle, an der der erste Radius die Ecken der Straßenränder von der Bundesfernstraße und der kreuzenden Straße abzurunden beginnt.\n\n(3) Sichtfelder gehören zur kreuzenden Straße.\n\n(2) Die nicht zum Kreuzungsbauwerk rechnenden Teile des Überbaus (Abs. 1 Nr. 3) gehören zu der Straße, in deren Verlauf sie liegen.\n\n(3) Verbindungsarme zwischen der Bundesfernstraße und der kreuzenden Straße gehören zur Bundesfernstraße. Die Verbindungsarme enden am äußeren Fahrbahnrand der kreuzenden Straße. Sind Abbiege- oder Einfädelstreifen auf der kreuzenden Straße vorhanden, so enden die Verbindungsarme am Anfang der Eckausrundungen der kreuzenden Straße. Bei höhenungleichen Einmündungen beginnen die Verbindungsarme an der ersten Aufweitung der einmündenden Straße. Lichtzeichenanlagen und Verkehrsinseln an der Einmündung des Verbindungsarms gehören zur Bundesfernstraße.\n\n- 1. die Widerlager mit Flügelmauern,\n\n- 2. die Pfeiler,\n\n- 3. der Überbau mit Geländern, Brüstungen und Auffangvorrichtungen, jedoch mit Ausnahme der Straßendecke, der Entwässerungsrinnen und Einläufe und, soweit sie nicht durch die Konstruktion der Brücke bedingt sind, der Verkehrszeichen und -einrichtungen sowie Verkehrsanlagen aller Art.\n\n(1) Zum Kreuzungsbauwerk im Sinne des § 13 Abs. 2 des Bundesfernstraßengesetzes gehören\n\n- 1. von der die Bundesfernstraße kreuzenden Straße vom Anfang ihrer Eckausrundungen an\n\n- - die befestigten Fahrstreifen einschließlich Trenn-, Seiten- und Randstreifen,\n\n- - die Verkehrszeichen und -einrichtungen sowie Verkehrsanlagen aller Art, insbesondere Verkehrsinseln,\n\n- - die Gehwege außerhalb der Ortsdurchfahrten und die Radwege, soweit diese Wege mit der kreuzenden Straße in Zusammenhang stehen und mit dieser gleichlaufen,\n\n- - die Durchlässe, Dämme, Gräben, Böschungen und Stützmauern,\n\n- 2. die durch die Kreuzung bedingten Lichtzeichenanlagen.\n\n- Seite 1 von 2 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9706347370114506, + "doc_id": "d8518f797ab26dca556300e74a687a7c4b3472763678550116cf1b9f0327ad2f", + "edit_distance": 0.3302540415704388, + "f1_score": 0.9965635738831616, + "meteor": 0.9578749144641178, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz - www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n- 2. berufsprofilgebende Fertigkeiten, Kenntnisse und Fähigkeiten in der Fachrichtung Karosserieinstandhaltungstechnik oder in der Fachrichtung Karosserie- und Fahrzeugbautechnik und\n- 3. integrative Fertigkeiten, Kenntnisse und Fähigkeiten.\n\n(2) Fachrichtungsübergreifende berufsprofilgebende Fertigkeiten, Kenntnisse und Fähigkeiten sind:\n\n- 1. Bedienen von Fahrzeugen und Systemen,\n- 2. Außerbetriebnehmen und Inbetriebnehmen von fahrzeugtechnischen Systemen,\n- 3. Messen und Prüfen an Systemen,\n- 4. Durchführen von Instandhaltungs- und Wartungsarbeiten,\n- 5. Demontieren, Reparieren und Montieren von Bauteilen, Baugruppen und Systemen,\n- 6. Diagnostizieren von Fehlern und Störungen an Fahrzeugen und Systemen,\n- 7. Instandsetzen von Fahrzeugen und Fügen von Fahrzeugteilen,\n- 8. Ausrüsten mit Zubehör und Zusatzeinrichtungen,\n- 9. Anfertigen von Karosserie- und Fahrzeugbauteilen,\n- 10. Prüfen, Pflegen und Schützen von Oberflächen,\n- 11. Kontrollieren und Übergeben von Fahrzeugen.\n\n(3) Berufsprofilgebende Fertigkeiten, Kenntnisse und Fähigkeiten in der Fachrichtung Karosserieinstandhaltungstechnik sind:\n\n- 1. Beurteilen des Schadensumfangs,\n- 2. Instandhalten von Karosserien, Aufbauten, Fahrgestellen und Fahrwerken,\n- 3. Instandsetzen und Herstellen von vernetzten Systemen,\n- 4. Um- und Nachrüsten mit Zubehör und Zusatzeinrichtungen,\n- 5. Herstellen und Aufbereiten von Oberflächen.\n\n(4) Berufsprofilgebende Fertigkeiten, Kenntnisse und Fähigkeiten in der Fachrichtung Karosserie- und Fahrzeugbautechnik sind:\n\n- 1. Konstruieren, Herstellen, Ein-, Auf-, Umbauen und Nachrüsten von Karosserien, Karosserieteilen, Baugruppen und Fahrgestellen,\n- 2. Durchführen von Prüf-, Mess- und Einstellarbeiten,\n- 3. Instandhalten von Karosserie- und Fahrzeugbauteilen sowie von Baugruppen,\n- 4. Beurteilen des Schadensumfangs,\n- 5. Herstellen, Aufbereiten und Schützen von Oberflächen.\n\nDie berufsprofilgebenden Fertigkeiten, Kenntnisse und Fähigkeiten sind in mindestens einem der Einsatzgebiete Karosseriebau oder Fahrzeugbau anzuwenden und zu vertiefen. Das Einsatzgebiet oder die Einsatzgebiete werden vom Ausbildungsbetrieb festgelegt.\n\n(5) Integrative Fertigkeiten, Kenntnisse und Fähigkeiten sind:\n\n- 1. Berufsbildung, Arbeits- und Tarifrecht,\n- 2. Aufbau und Organisation des Ausbildungsbetriebes,\n- 3. Sicherheit und Gesundheitsschutz bei der Arbeit,\n- 4. Umweltschutz,\n- 5. Planen und Vorbereiten von Arbeitsabläufen sowie Kontrollieren und Bewerten von Arbeitsergebnissen,\n- 6. betriebliche und technische Kommunikation,\n- 7. Durchführen von qualitätssichernden Maßnahmen.\n\n## § 5 Ausbildungsrahmenplan\n\n- Seite 2 von 24 -", + "recall": 0.9931506849315068, + "true_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz ‒ www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n- 2. berufsprofilgebende Fertigkeiten, Kenntnisse und Fähigkeiten in der Fachrichtung Karosserieinstandhaltungstechnik oder in der Fachrichtung Karosserie- und Fahrzeugbautechnik und\n\n- 3. integrative Fertigkeiten, Kenntnisse und Fähigkeiten.\n\n- 1. Bedienen von Fahrzeugen und Systemen,\n\n- 2. Außerbetriebnehmen und Inbetriebnehmen von fahrzeugtechnischen Systemen,\n\n- 3. Messen und Prüfen an Systemen,\n\n- 4. Durchführen von Instandhaltungs- und Wartungsarbeiten,\n\n- 5. Demontieren, Reparieren und Montieren von Bauteilen, Baugruppen und Systemen,\n\n- 6. Diagnostizieren von Fehlern und Störungen an Fahrzeugen und Systemen,\n\n- 7. Instandsetzen von Fahrzeugen und Fügen von Fahrzeugteilen,\n\n- 8. Ausrüsten mit Zubehör und Zusatzeinrichtungen,\n\n- 9. Anfertigen von Karosserie- und Fahrzeugbauteilen,\n\n- 10. Prüfen, Pflegen und Schützen von Oberflächen,\n\n- 11. Kontrollieren und Übergeben von Fahrzeugen.\n\n(2) Fachrichtungsübergreifende berufsprofilgebende Fertigkeiten, Kenntnisse und Fähigkeiten sind:\n\n(3) Berufsprofilgebende Fertigkeiten, Kenntnisse und Fähigkeiten in der Fachrichtung Karosserieinstandhaltungstechnik sind:\n\n- 1. Beurteilen des Schadensumfangs,\n\n- 2. Instandhalten von Karosserien, Aufbauten, Fahrgestellen und Fahrwerken,\n\n- 3. Instandsetzen und Herstellen von vernetzten Systemen,\n\n- 4. Um- und Nachrüsten mit Zubehör und Zusatzeinrichtungen,\n\n- 5. Herstellen und Aufbereiten von Oberflächen.\n\n- 1. Konstruieren, Herstellen, Ein-, Auf-, Umbauen und Nachrüsten von Karosserien, Karosserieteilen, Baugruppen und Fahrgestellen,\n\n- 2. Durchführen von Prüf-, Mess- und Einstellarbeiten,\n\n- 3. Instandhalten von Karosserie- und Fahrzeugbauteilen sowie von Baugruppen,\n\n- 4. Beurteilen des Schadensumfangs,\n\n- 5. Herstellen, Aufbereiten und Schützen von Oberflächen.\n\n- 1. Berufsbildung, Arbeits- und Tarifrecht,\n\n- 2. Aufbau und Organisation des Ausbildungsbetriebes,\n\n- 3. Sicherheit und Gesundheitsschutz bei der Arbeit,\n\n- 4. Umweltschutz,\n\n- 5. Planen und Vorbereiten von Arbeitsabläufen sowie Kontrollieren und Bewerten von Arbeitsergebnissen,\n\n- 6. betriebliche und technische Kommunikation,\n\n- 7. Durchführen von qualitätssichernden Maßnahmen.\n\n(5) Integrative Fertigkeiten, Kenntnisse und Fähigkeiten sind:\n\nDie berufsprofilgebenden Fertigkeiten, Kenntnisse und Fähigkeiten sind in mindestens einem der Einsatzgebiete Karosseriebau oder Fahrzeugbau anzuwenden und zu vertiefen. Das Einsatzgebiet oder die Einsatzgebiete werden vom Ausbildungsbetrieb festgelegt.\n\n(4) Berufsprofilgebende Fertigkeiten, Kenntnisse und Fähigkeiten in der Fachrichtung Karosserie- und Fahrzeugbautechnik sind:\n\n## § 5 Ausbildungsrahmenplan\n\n- Seite 2 von 24 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8548648508274843, + "doc_id": "3d337ff16bbf111f6905a6c822a54105e964e64651071970e0aa076d8d08c682", + "edit_distance": 0.5962732919254659, + "f1_score": 0.9572192513368984, + "meteor": 0.8605493853532001, + "precision": 0.9421052631578948, + "pred_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz - www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n- 2. Auftragsplanung\n\nmit 10 Prozent,\n\n- 3. Kundenauftrag\n\nmit 40 Prozent,\n\n- 4. Karosserieinstandhaltungstechnik\n\nmit 20 Prozent,\n\n- 5. Wirtschafts- und Sozialkunde\n\nmit 10 Prozent.\n\n- (2) Die Abschluss- oder Gesellenprüfung ist bestanden, wenn die Prüfungsleistungen wie folgt bewertet worden sind:\n- 1. im Gesamtergebnis von Teil 1 und Teil 2 mit mindestens 'ausreichend',\n- 2. im Ergebnis von Teil 2 mit mindestens 'ausreichend',\n- 3. im Prüfungsbereich Kundenauftrag mit mindestens 'ausreichend',\n- 4. in mindestens einem weiteren Prüfungsbereich von Teil 2 mit mindestens 'ausreichend' und\n- 5. in keinem Prüfungsbereich von Teil 2 mit 'ungenügend'.\n- (3) Auf Antrag des Prüflings ist die Prüfung in einem der Prüfungsbereiche 'Karosserieinstandhaltungstechnik' oder 'Wirtschafts- und Sozialkunde' durch eine mündliche Prüfung von etwa 15 Minuten zu ergänzen, wenn\n- 1. der Prüfungsbereich schlechter als mit 'ausreichend' bewertet worden ist und\n- 2. die mündliche Ergänzungsprüfung für das Bestehen der Abschluss- oder Gesellenprüfung den Ausschlag geben kann.\n\nBei der Ermittlung des Ergebnisses für diesen Prüfungsbereich sind das bisherige Ergebnis und das Ergebnis der mündlichen Ergänzungsprüfung im Verhältnis 2 : 1 zu gewichten.\n\n## § 11 Teil 2 der Abschluss- oder Gesellenprüfung in der Fachrichtung Karosserie- und Fahrzeugbautechnik\n\n- (1) Teil 2 der Abschluss- oder Gesellenprüfung erstreckt sich auf\n- 1. die in der Anlage genannten Fertigkeiten, Kenntnisse und Fähigkeiten sowie\n- 2. den Lehrstoff des Berufsschulunterrichts, soweit der Lehrstoff für die Berufsausbildung wesentlich ist.\n\n(2) In Teil 2 der Abschluss- oder Gesellenprüfung sollen Fertigkeiten, Kenntnisse und Fähigkeiten, die bereits Gegenstand von Teil 1 der Abschluss- oder Gesellenprüfung waren, nur insoweit einbezogen werden, als es für die Feststellung der beruflichen Handlungsfähigkeit erforderlich ist.\n\n(3) Teil 2 der Abschluss- oder Gesellenprüfung besteht aus den folgenden Prüfungsbereichen:\n\n- 1. Kundenauftrag,\n- 2. Karosserie- und Fahrzeugbautechnik sowie\n- 3. Wirtschafts- und Sozialkunde.\n\n(4) Für den Prüfungsbereich Kundenauftrag bestehen folgende Vorgaben:\n\n- 1. der Prüfling soll nachweisen, dass er in der Lage ist,\n- a) Arbeitsaufträge zu analysieren und Lösungen zu entwickeln,\n- b) Arbeitsabläufe selbständig zu planen und umzusetzen und dabei sowohl wirtschaftliche, technische, organisatorische, zeitliche und qualitätssichernde Vorgaben zu beachten als auch den Umweltschutz zu berücksichtigen,\n- c) Sicherheit und Gesundheitsschutz zu berücksichtigen,\n- d) Material zu disponieren,\n- e) fahrzeugtechnische Systeme außer Betrieb und in Betrieb zu nehmen,\n- f) Bauteile und Baugruppen herzustellen und zu montieren,\n- g) Systeme aufzubauen und Funktionsprüfungen durchzuführen,\n\n- Seite 6 von 24 -", + "recall": 0.9728260869565217, + "true_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz ‒ www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n(2) Die Abschluss- oder Gesellenprüfung ist bestanden, wenn die Prüfungsleistungen wie folgt bewertet worden sind:\n\n(3) Auf Antrag des Prüflings ist die Prüfung in einem der Prüfungsbereiche „Karosserieinstandhaltungstechnik“ oder „Wirtschafts- und Sozialkunde“ durch eine mündliche Prüfung von etwa 15 Minuten zu ergänzen, wenn\n\nBei der Ermittlung des Ergebnisses für diesen Prüfungsbereich sind das bisherige Ergebnis und das Ergebnis der mündlichen Ergänzungsprüfung im Verhältnis 2 : 1 zu gewichten.\n\n(2) In Teil 2 der Abschluss- oder Gesellenprüfung sollen Fertigkeiten, Kenntnisse und Fähigkeiten, die bereits Gegenstand von Teil 1 der Abschluss- oder Gesellenprüfung waren, nur insoweit einbezogen werden, als es für die Feststellung der beruflichen Handlungsfähigkeit erforderlich ist.\n\n(4) Für den Prüfungsbereich Kundenauftrag bestehen folgende Vorgaben:\n\n- 1. im Gesamtergebnis von Teil 1 und Teil 2 mit mindestens „ausreichend“,\n\n- 2. im Ergebnis von Teil 2 mit mindestens „ausreichend“,\n\n- 3. im Prüfungsbereich Kundenauftrag mit mindestens „ausreichend“,\n\n- 4. in mindestens einem weiteren Prüfungsbereich von Teil 2 mit mindestens „ausreichend“ und\n\n- 5. in keinem Prüfungsbereich von Teil 2 mit „ungenügend“.\n\n- 1. der Prüfungsbereich schlechter als mit „ausreichend“ bewertet worden ist und\n\n- 2. die mündliche Ergänzungsprüfung für das Bestehen der Abschluss- oder Gesellenprüfung den Ausschlag geben kann.\n\n- (1) Teil 2 der Abschluss- oder Gesellenprüfung erstreckt sich auf\n\n- 1. die in der Anlage genannten Fertigkeiten, Kenntnisse und Fähigkeiten sowie\n\n- 2. den Lehrstoff des Berufsschulunterrichts, soweit der Lehrstoff für die Berufsausbildung wesentlich ist.\n\n- (3) Teil 2 der Abschluss- oder Gesellenprüfung besteht aus den folgenden Prüfungsbereichen:\n\n- 1. Kundenauftrag,\n\n- 2. Karosserie- und Fahrzeugbautechnik sowie\n\n- 3. Wirtschafts- und Sozialkunde.\n\n- 1. der Prüfling soll nachweisen, dass er in der Lage ist,\n\n- a) Arbeitsaufträge zu analysieren und Lösungen zu entwickeln,\n\n- b) Arbeitsabläufe selbständig zu planen und umzusetzen und dabei sowohl wirtschaftliche, technische, organisatorische, zeitliche und qualitätssichernde Vorgaben zu beachten als auch den Umweltschutz zu berücksichtigen,\n\n- c) Sicherheit und Gesundheitsschutz zu berücksichtigen,\n\n- d) Material zu disponieren,\n\n- e) fahrzeugtechnische Systeme außer Betrieb und in Betrieb zu nehmen,\n\n- f) Bauteile und Baugruppen herzustellen und zu montieren,\n\n- g) Systeme aufzubauen und Funktionsprüfungen durchzuführen,\n\n## § 11 Teil 2 der Abschluss- oder Gesellenprüfung in der Fachrichtung Karosserie- und Fahrzeugbautechnik\n\n- Seite 6 von 24 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8666867447808765, + "doc_id": "c5aaf1585abcb5dfc78d73af72eecb0f0d9154a77bca62e6c212fc2f6816fe1d", + "edit_distance": 0.20388349514563106, + "f1_score": 0.993006993006993, + "meteor": 0.9881715423993404, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz - www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n## Vertrag zwischen der Bundesrepublik Deutschland und der Republik Österreich zur Regelung von Schäden der Vertriebenen, Umsiedler und Verfolgten, über weitere finanzielle Fragen und Fragen aus dem sozialen Bereich (Finanz- und Ausgleichsvertrag)\n\nFinAusglVtr AUT\n\nAusfertigungsdatum: 27.11.1961\n\nVollzitat:\n\n\"Finanz- und Ausgleichsvertrag vom 27. November 1961 (BGBl. 1962 II S. 1044)\"\n\n## Fußnote\n\nG v. 21.8.1962 II 1041\n\nInkraft gem. Bek. v. 17.9.1962 II 1437 mWv 11.10.1962\n\n- Seite 1 von 1 -", + "recall": 0.9861111111111112, + "true_md": "- Seite 1 von 1 -\n\nEin Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz ‒ www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n# Vertrag zwischen der Bundesrepublik Deutschland und der Republik Österreich zur Regelung von Schäden der Vertriebenen, Umsiedler und Verfolgten, über weitere finanzielle Fragen und Fragen aus dem sozialen Bereich (Finanz- und Ausgleichsvertrag)\n\nAusfertigungsdatum: 27.11.1961\n\nFinAusglVtr AUT\n\nVollzitat:\n\n\"Finanz- und Ausgleichsvertrag vom 27. November 1961 (BGBl. 1962 II S. 1044)\"\n\nG v. 21.8.1962 II 1041 Inkraft gem. Bek. v. 17.9.1962 II 1437 mWv 11.10.1962\n\n## Fußnote" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9531665704100638, + "doc_id": "cff4f599d9d1e0171e964566ba9c9862d0e93cf2d5c3cedce90021004238b97d", + "edit_distance": 0.35785953177257523, + "f1_score": 0.9969418960244648, + "meteor": 0.9893761606992756, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz - www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\nBei gewerblichen Betrieben oder freistehenden Kesselhäusern können Ausnahmen von Absatz 9 Satz 1 gestattet werden, wenn wegen der Art des Betriebes und der Beschaffenheit der Aufstellräume Bedenken nicht bestehen.\n\n- (11) Heizräume müssen Be- und Entlüftungsanlagen haben, die die Heizräume während des Betriebs ständig lüften und den Feuerstätten die erforderliche Verbrennungsluft zuführen. Die Lüftungsanlagen sind so anzuordnen, daß der sichere Betrieb der Feuerstätten nicht beeinträchtigt wird. Bei Feuerstätten für Flüssiggas müssen die Lüftungsanlagen mindestens für einen eineinhalbfachen Luftwechsel je Stunde bemessen und ständig wirksam sein.\n\n## § 8 Feuerungsanlagen besonderer Art\n\n- (1) Andere Anforderungen als nach den §§ 2 bis 7 können an Feuerstätten besonderer Art, an ihre Verbindungsstücke und Schornsteine oder sonstige Abgasanlagen, an ihre Aufstellräume und an ihren Betrieb gestellt werden. Verlangt werden können Nachprüfungen, die von Zeit zu Zeit zu wiederholen sind, und Bescheinigungen über deren Ergebnis.\n\n(2) Zu den Feuerstätten besonderer Art gehören insbesondere\n\n- 1. Feuerstätten zur Erwärmung oder sonstigen Behandlung brennbarer Stoffe, wie Räucher- und Trockenanlagen und Backöfen,\n- 2. Feuerstätten mit organischem Wärmeträger,\n- 3. offene Kamine für andere feste Brennstoffe als Holz in Stücken,\n- 4. Feuerstätten mit niedriger Abgastemperatur, wie Brennwertkessel und andere Feuerstätten mit nachgeschalteten Heizflächen zur Wärmegewinnung durch Verminderung der Abgastemperatur.\n\n## § 9 Inkrafttreten\n\nDiese Anordnung tritt am 1. März 1991 in Kraft. § 7 Abs. 3 tritt am Tage nach der Veröffentlichung im Gesetzblatt in Kraft.\n\n## Schlußformel\n\n## Der Minister für Bauwesen, Städtebau und Wohnungswirtschaft\n\n- Seite 6 von 6 -", + "recall": 0.9939024390243902, + "true_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz ‒ www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\nBei gewerblichen Betrieben oder freistehenden Kesselhäusern können Ausnahmen von Absatz 9 Satz 1 gestattet werden, wenn wegen der Art des Betriebes und der Beschaffenheit der Aufstellräume Bedenken nicht bestehen.\n\n(11) Heizräume müssen Be- und Entlüftungsanlagen haben, die die Heizräume während des Betriebs ständig lüften und den Feuerstätten die erforderliche Verbrennungsluft zuführen. Die Lüftungsanlagen sind so anzuordnen, daß der sichere Betrieb der Feuerstätten nicht beeinträchtigt wird. Bei Feuerstätten für Flüssiggas müssen die Lüftungsanlagen mindestens für einen eineinhalbfachen Luftwechsel je Stunde bemessen und ständig wirksam sein.\n\n(1) Andere Anforderungen als nach den §§ 2 bis 7 können an Feuerstätten besonderer Art, an ihre Verbindungsstücke und Schornsteine oder sonstige Abgasanlagen, an ihre Aufstellräume und an ihren Betrieb gestellt werden. Verlangt werden können Nachprüfungen, die von Zeit zu Zeit zu wiederholen sind, und Bescheinigungen über deren Ergebnis.\n\n(2) Zu den Feuerstätten besonderer Art gehören insbesondere\n\nDiese Anordnung tritt am 1. März 1991 in Kraft. § 7 Abs. 3 tritt am Tage nach der Veröffentlichung im Gesetzblatt in Kraft.\n\n## § 8 Feuerungsanlagen besonderer Art\n\n## § 9 Inkrafttreten\n\n## Schlußformel\n\n## Der Minister für Bauwesen, Städtebau und Wohnungswirtschaft\n\n- 1. Feuerstätten zur Erwärmung oder sonstigen Behandlung brennbarer Stoffe, wie Räucher- und Trockenanlagen und Backöfen,\n\n- 2. Feuerstätten mit organischem Wärmeträger,\n\n- 3. offene Kamine für andere feste Brennstoffe als Holz in Stücken,\n\n- 4. Feuerstätten mit niedriger Abgastemperatur, wie Brennwertkessel und andere Feuerstätten mit nachgeschalteten Heizflächen zur Wärmegewinnung durch Verminderung der Abgastemperatur.\n\n- Seite 6 von 6 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7864676198082979, + "doc_id": "f21151831fd04b645b32df697aaad46900a0284536c35606c5228ddbb508abec", + "edit_distance": 0.16105769230769232, + "f1_score": 0.9445910290237466, + "meteor": 0.8406150361823971, + "precision": 0.9521276595744681, + "pred_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz - www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n- *) Berechnung der theoretischen Versorgungsfläche für das Beitragsjahr 2010:\n\nDie theoretische Versorgungsfläche ist eine Berechnungsgröße zur Ermittlung des Beitrags. Sie basiert für alle Rundfunkdienste auf den internationalen Ausbreitungskurven der ITU-R P.370 sowie auf den jeweils gültigen nationalen Richtlinien (zurzeit 176 TR 22 bzw. 5 R 22 vom März 1992) und weiteren nationalen und internationalen Festlegungen, wie zum Beispiel für T-DAB Wiesbaden 1995 und Maastricht 2002 und für DVB-T Chester 1997.\n\nAngaben für die jeweils frequenzabhängige Mindestnutzfeldstärke sind für TV-analog der ITU-R BT.417 zu entnehmen, Angaben für den Betrieb eines Kanals im Band II in analoger Übertragungstechnik (UKWTonrundfunk) sind dem Abkommen Genf 1984 zu entnehmen, Angaben für den Betrieb eines T-DAB-Kanals dem Abkommen Wiesbaden 1995 (Pkt. 2.2.3, Tabelle 1, Position 'Medianwert der Mindestfeldstärke') und Angaben für den Betrieb eines DVB-T-Kanals dem Abkommen Chester 1997 (Tabelle A.1.50, Position 'Medianwert für die minimale äquivalente Feldstärke'). In Gleichwellennetzen werden theoretische Versorgungsflächen verschiedener Sender nicht mehrfach veranschlagt.\n\nAuf der Basis der oben genannten Ausbreitungskurven wird für eine Sendefunkanlage eine Mindestnutzfeldstärkekontur gemäß den jeweils gültigen internationalen Abkommen errechnet. Hieraus ergibt sich für jeden 10°-Schritt eine Entfernung r vom Senderstandort bis zu dem Punkt, an dem die Mindestnutzfeldstärke erreicht ist. Daraus kann für jeden der 36 10°-Schritte ein Flächenelement A berechnet werden:\n\nDurch Addition der 36 Flächenelemente ergibt sich die theoretische Versorgungsfläche einer Sendeanlage in Quadratkilometern.\n\nDie Ermittlung der Entfernungen basiert auf den Ausbreitungskurven für Landausbreitung der Empfehlung ITU-R P.370 für 50 % Zeit- und 50 % Ortswahrscheinlichkeit. Die Geländerauigkeit beträgt 50 m. Als Parameter sind der Frequenzbereich, in dem die Nutzung stattfindet, der Wert der Mindestnutzfeldstärke sowie die sektoriellen effektiven Antennenhöhen und Leistungen erforderlich. Für Entfernungen r, die kleiner sind als 10 km, werden die Ausbreitungskurven verwendet, die zurzeit auch in den Anlagen 1a und 2a der Richtlinie 176 TR 22 bzw. der Richtlinie 5 R 22 zu finden sind.\n\n- Seite 32 von 78 -", + "recall": 0.93717277486911, + "true_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz ‒ www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n *) Berechnung der theoretischen Versorgungsfläche für das Beitragsjahr 2010: Die theoretische Versorgungsfläche ist eine Berechnungsgröße zur Ermittlung des Beitrags. Sie basiert für alle Rundfunkdienste auf den internationalen Ausbreitungskurven der ITU‑R P.370 sowie auf den jeweils gültigen nationalen Richtlinien (zurzeit 176 TR 22 bzw. 5 R 22 vom März 1992) und weiteren nationalen und internationalen Festlegungen, wie zum Beispiel für T‑DAB Wiesbaden 1995 und Maastricht 2002 und für DVB‑T Chester 1997. Angaben für die jeweils frequenzabhängige Mindestnutzfeldstärke sind für TV-analog der ITU‑R BT.417\n\nDVB‑T Chester 1997. Angaben für die jeweils frequenzabhängige Mindestnutzfeldstärke sind für TV-analog der ITU‑R BT.417 zu entnehmen, Angaben für den Betrieb eines Kanals im Band II in analoger Übertragungstechnik (UKW- Tonrundfunk) sind dem Abkommen Genf 1984 zu entnehmen, Angaben für den Betrieb eines T‑DAB-Kanals dem Abkommen Wiesbaden 1995 (Pkt. 2.2.3, Tabelle 1, Position „Medianwert der Mindestfeldstärke“) und Angaben für den Betrieb eines DVB‑T-Kanals dem Abkommen Chester 1997 (Tabelle A.1.50, Position „Medianwert für die minimale äquivalente Feldstärke“). In Gleichwellennetzen werden theoretische Versorgungsflächen verschiedener Sender nicht mehrfach veranschlagt. Auf der Basis der oben genannten Ausbreitungskurven wird für eine Sendefunkanlage eine\n\nVersorgungsflächen verschiedener Sender nicht mehrfach veranschlagt. Auf der Basis der oben genannten Ausbreitungskurven wird für eine Sendefunkanlage eine Mindestnutzfeldstärkekontur gemäß den jeweils gültigen internationalen Abkommen errechnet. Hieraus ergibt sich für jeden 10°-Schritt eine Entfernung r vom Senderstandort bis zu dem Punkt, an dem die Mindestnutzfeldstärke erreicht ist. Daraus kann für jeden der 36 10°-Schritte ein Flächenelement A berechnet werden:\n\nDurch Addition der 36 Flächenelemente ergibt sich die theoretische Versorgungsfläche einer Sendeanlage in Quadratkilometern. Die Ermittlung der Entfernungen basiert auf den Ausbreitungskurven für Landausbreitung der Empfehlung\n\nQuadratkilometern. Die Ermittlung der Entfernungen basiert auf den Ausbreitungskurven für Landausbreitung der Empfehlung ITU‑R P.370 für 50 % Zeit‑ und 50 % Ortswahrscheinlichkeit. Die Geländerauigkeit beträgt 50 m. Als Parameter sind der Frequenzbereich, in dem die Nutzung stattfindet, der Wert der Mindestnutzfeldstärke sowie die sektoriellen effektiven Antennenhöhen und Leistungen erforderlich. Für Entfernungen r, die kleiner sind als 10 km, werden die Ausbreitungskurven verwendet, die zurzeit auch in den Anlagen 1a und 2a der Richtlinie 176 TR 22 bzw. der Richtlinie 5 R 22 zu finden sind.\n\n- Seite 32 von 78 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8280213108873489, + "doc_id": "42712e5cc677508ea2858e60e1bb4106a0a064b44927a349b3c6f60ccee884b9", + "edit_distance": 0.34210526315789475, + "f1_score": 0.9666666666666666, + "meteor": 0.9492165868595068, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz - www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n## Abschnitt B: berufsprofilgebende Fertigkeiten, Kenntnisse und Fähigkeiten in der Fachrichtung Karosserieinstandhaltungstechnik\n\n- Seite 14 von 24 -", + "recall": 0.9354838709677419, + "true_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz ‒ www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n- Seite 14 von 24 -\n\n## Abschnitt B: berufsprofilgebende Fertigkeiten, Kenntnisse und Fähigkeiten in der Fachrichtung Karosserieinstandhaltungstechnik Zeitliche" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.07418264079528118, + "doc_id": "810a287a7db46c3413aa7eae5ace6e1e17074bac657bbfe02e8cb5a0705faf4f", + "edit_distance": 0.819327731092437, + "f1_score": 0.5901639344262295, + "meteor": 0.6547907812679473, + "precision": 0.4235294117647059, + "pred_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz - www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\nInstitutsnummer:\n\nPrüfziffer:\n\nName:\n\nOrt:\n\nStand Ende:\n\nDie angegebenen Beträge lauten auf volle Euro. 1\n\n## Sonstige Angaben\n\n## (1) Angaben zu stillen Reserven und stillen Lasten\n\n## 010 Stille Reserven\n\n- 020 bei Finanzinstrumenten (nicht Bestandteil einer Bewertungseinheit)\n- 030 in Wertpapieren außerhalb des Handelsbestands\n\n040\n\nbei Schuldverschreibungen und anderen festverzinslichen Wertpapieren\n\n040\n\n\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\n\ndarunter: 050\n\nkurzfristig realisierbar\n\n050\n\n\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\n\n- 060\n\nbei Aktien und anderen nicht festverzinslichen Wertpapieren\n\n060\n\n\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\n\ndarunter: 070\n\nkurzfristig realisierbar\n\n070\n\n\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\n\ndarunter: 080\n\nin offenen Spezial-AIF 2\n\n080\n\n\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\n\n(040 + 060) 030\n\n\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\n\n090\n\nin Derivaten\n\n090\n\n\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\n\n(030 + 090)\n\n020\n\n\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\n\n## 100 bei Finanzinstrumenten (Bestandteil einer Bewertungseinheit) 3\n\n- 110 in Wertpapieren außerhalb des Handelsbestands\n- 120\n\nbei Schuldverschreibungen und anderen festverzinslichen Wertpapieren\n\n120\n\n\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\n\n- 130\n\nbei Aktien und anderen nicht festverzinslichen Wertpapieren\n\n130\n\n\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\n\n(120 + 130) 110\n\n\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\n\n140\n\nin Derivaten\n\n140\n\n\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\n\n(110 + 140) 100\n\n\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\n\n(020 + 100) 010\n\n\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\n\n## 150 Stille Lasten\n\n- 160 bei Finanzinstrumenten (nicht Bestandteil einer Bewertungseinheit)\n- 170 in Wertpapieren außerhalb des Handelsbestands\n\n180\n\nbei Schuldverschreibungen und anderen festverzinslichen Wertpapieren\n\n180\n\n\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\n\n- Seite 7 von 17 -", + "recall": 0.972972972972973, + "true_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz ‒ www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\nInstitutsnummer:\n\nPrüfziffer:\n\nName:\n\nOrt:\n\nStand Ende:\n\n## Die angegebenen Beträge lauten auf volle Euro. 1\n\n## Sonstige Angaben\n\n- Seite 7 von 17 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.822879678805666, + "doc_id": "ca0e611da705e5cd677dd5550946f775bb5d55b0bc6e5738c56b772c722541a1", + "edit_distance": 0.15185185185185185, + "f1_score": 0.9752650176678447, + "meteor": 0.8582310716795423, + "precision": 0.9787234042553191, + "pred_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz - www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n## *) Theoretische Versorgungsfläche:\n\nDie Theoretische Versorgungsfläche ist eine Berechnungsgröße zur Ermittlung des Beitrags. Sie basiert für alle Rundfunkdienste auf den internationalen Ausbreitungskurven der ITU-R P.370 sowie den jeweils gültigen nationalen Richtlinien (zurzeit 176 TR 22 bzw. 5 R 22 vom März 1992) und weiteren nationalen und internationalen Festlegungen, wie zum Beispiel für T-DAB Wiesbaden 1995 und Maastricht 2002 und für DVB-T Chester 1997.\n\nAngaben für die jeweils frequenzabhängige Mindestnutzfeldstärke sind für TV-analog der ITU-R BT.417, für den Betrieb eines Kanals im Band II in analoger Übertragungstechnik (UKW-Tonrundfunk) dem Abkommen Genf 1984, für den Betrieb eines T-DAB-Kanals dem Abkommen Wiesbaden 1995 (Pkt. 2.23, Tabelle 1, Position 'Medianwert der Mindestfeldstärke') und für den Betrieb eines DVB-T-Kanals dem Abkommen Chester 1997 (Tabelle A.1.50, Position 'Medianwert für die minimale äquivalente Feldstärke') zu entnehmen. In Gleichwellennetzen unterbleibt eine Mehrfachveranschlagung von Theoretischen Versorgungsflächen verschiedener Sender.\n\nAuf der Basis dieser Ausbreitungskurven wird für eine Sendefunkanlage eine Mindestnutzfeldstärkekontur gemäß den jeweils gültigen internationalen Abkommen errechnet. Hieraus ergibt sich für jeden 10°-Schritt eine Entfernung R vom Senderstandort bis zu dem Punkt, an dem die Mindestnutzfeldstärke erreicht ist. Daraus kann für jede der 36 Richtungen ein Flächenelement\n\n- Seite 6 von 78 -", + "recall": 0.971830985915493, + "true_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz ‒ www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n *) Theoretische Versorgungsfläche: Die Theoretische Versorgungsfläche ist eine Berechnungsgröße zur Ermittlung des Beitrags. Sie basiert für alle Rundfunkdienste auf den internationalen Ausbreitungskurven der ITU-R P.370 sowie den jeweils gültigen nationalen Richtlinien (zurzeit 176 TR 22 bzw. 5 R 22 vom März 1992) und weiteren nationalen und internationalen Festlegungen, wie zum Beispiel für T-DAB Wiesbaden 1995 und Maastricht 2002 und für DVB-T Chester 1997. Angaben für die jeweils frequenzabhängige Mindestnutzfeldstärke sind für TV-analog der ITU-R BT.417,\n\nDVB-T Chester 1997. Angaben für die jeweils frequenzabhängige Mindestnutzfeldstärke sind für TV-analog der ITU-R BT.417, für den Betrieb eines Kanals im Band II in analoger Übertragungstechnik (UKW-Tonrundfunk) dem Abkommen Genf 1984, für den Betrieb eines T-DAB-Kanals dem Abkommen Wiesbaden 1995 (Pkt. 2.23, Tabelle 1, Position „Medianwert der Mindestfeldstärke“) und für den Betrieb eines DVB-T-Kanals dem Abkommen Chester 1997 (Tabelle A.1.50, Position „Medianwert für die minimale äquivalente Feldstärke“) zu entnehmen. In Gleichwellennetzen unterbleibt eine Mehrfachveranschlagung von Theoretischen Versorgungsflächen verschiedener Sender. Auf der Basis dieser Ausbreitungskurven wird für eine Sendefunkanlage eine Mindestnutzfeldstärkekontur\n\nVersorgungsflächen verschiedener Sender. Auf der Basis dieser Ausbreitungskurven wird für eine Sendefunkanlage eine Mindestnutzfeldstärkekontur gemäß den jeweils gültigen internationalen Abkommen errechnet. Hieraus ergibt sich für jeden 10°-Schritt eine Entfernung R vom Senderstandort bis zu dem Punkt, an dem die Mindestnutzfeldstärke erreicht ist. Daraus kann für jede der 36 Richtungen ein Flächenelement\n\n- Seite 6 von 78 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8942255541978509, + "doc_id": "193abdb12ca8cea7fbbf9328f57595215167695fd7dc3d3fc3fdbd19f82273ca", + "edit_distance": 0.045454545454545456, + "f1_score": 0.9714285714285715, + "meteor": 0.9541331684188827, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz - www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n- Seite 55 von 78 -", + "recall": 0.9444444444444444, + "true_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz ‒ www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n- Seite 55 von 78 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9179084140042219, + "doc_id": "b464482dda5b50c3b2944a4c7731025520547566455dbe93aca7d250fdbe14ef", + "edit_distance": 0.06493506493506493, + "f1_score": 0.9759036144578312, + "meteor": 0.9782828331053137, + "precision": 0.9818181818181818, + "pred_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz - www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n- 1. Gewinnen, Einarbeiten und Anleiten von Mitarbeitern und Mitarbeiterinnen,\n- 2. Weiterbilden von Mitarbeitern und Mitarbeiterinnen,\n- 3. Motivation und betriebliche Bindung von Mitarbeitern und Mitarbeiterinnen,\n- 4. betriebliche Kommunikation und Unternehmenskultur,\n- 5. Konfliktlösungsstrategien,\n- 6. Führungsstile und Führungsverhalten,\n- 7. Personalentwicklung,\n- 8. Gesundheitsschutz und Arbeitssicherheit sowie\n- 9. einschlägige Rechtsvorschriften, insbesondere aus dem Arbeitsrecht, einschließlich dem Tarifrecht, und dem Sozialrecht.\n\n## § 16 Prüfungsbestandteile\n\nDie Prüfung besteht aus\n\n- 1. einer Fallstudie nach § 17 und\n- 2. einer schriftlichen Prüfung nach § 18.\n\n## § 17 Fallstudie\n\n- (1) In der Fallstudie hat der Prüfling eine Situation der Mitarbeiterführung zu bearbeiten. Die Situation wird vom Prüfungsausschuss vorgegeben und muss sich auf die in § 15 Absatz 2 beschriebenen Inhalte beziehen.\n- (2) Der Prüfling hat die vorgegebene Situation zu analysieren, Handlungsoptionen zu entwickeln, diese schriftlich zu dokumentieren und in einem Fachgespräch zu erläutern.\n- (3) Für die Bearbeitung der Fallstudie stehen 180 Minuten zur Verfügung. Das Fachgespräch soll nicht länger als 30 Minuten dauern.\n\n## § 18 Schriftliche Prüfung\n\n- (1) Die schriftliche Prüfung besteht aus einer unter Aufsicht anzufertigenden Arbeit mit komplexen fallbezogenen Aufgaben aus den Prüfungsinhalten nach § 15 Absatz 2.\n- (2) Die Bearbeitungszeit für die schriftliche Prüfung beträgt 150 Minuten.\n\n## Abschnitt 5\n\n## Bewertungen in den Prüfungen, Befreiung von Prüfungsbestandteilen, Bestehensund Zeugnisregelungen\n\n## § 19 Bewertungen in den Prüfungen\n\n- (1) Jede Leistung in den sieben Prüfungsbestandteilen nach § 7 Nummer 1 bis 3, § 12 Nummer 1 und 2 sowie § 16 Nummer 1 und 2 ist gesondert mit einer Note als Dezimalzahl nach Anlage 1 zu bewerten.\n- (2) Die Bewertung der Leistung des Prüfungsteils 'Baumdiagnose und Baumpflegemaßnahmen' errechnet sich aus den Noten der Prüfungsbestandteile Arbeitsprojekt (§ 8), Arbeitsprobe (§ 9) und schriftliche Prüfung (§ 10) nach folgender Formel:\n\n- Seite 9 von 15 -", + "recall": 0.9700598802395209, + "true_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz ‒ www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n- 1. Gewinnen, Einarbeiten und Anleiten von Mitarbeitern und Mitarbeiterinnen,\n\n- 2. Weiterbilden von Mitarbeitern und Mitarbeiterinnen,\n\n- 3. Motivation und betriebliche Bindung von Mitarbeitern und Mitarbeiterinnen,\n\n- 4. betriebliche Kommunikation und Unternehmenskultur,\n\n- 5. Konfliktlösungsstrategien,\n\n- 6. Führungsstile und Führungsverhalten,\n\n- 7. Personalentwicklung,\n\n- 8. Gesundheitsschutz und Arbeitssicherheit sowie\n\n- 9. einschlägige Rechtsvorschriften, insbesondere aus dem Arbeitsrecht, einschließlich dem Tarifrecht, und dem Sozialrecht.\n\n## § 16 Prüfungsbestandteile\n\nDie Prüfung besteht aus\n\n- 1. einer Fallstudie nach § 17 und\n\n- 2. einer schriftlichen Prüfung nach § 18.\n\n## § 17 Fallstudie\n\n(1) In der Fallstudie hat der Prüfling eine Situation der Mitarbeiterführung zu bearbeiten. Die Situation wird vom Prüfungsausschuss vorgegeben und muss sich auf die in § 15 Absatz 2 beschriebenen Inhalte beziehen.\n\n(2) Der Prüfling hat die vorgegebene Situation zu analysieren, Handlungsoptionen zu entwickeln, diese schriftlich zu dokumentieren und in einem Fachgespräch zu erläutern.\n\n(3) Für die Bearbeitung der Fallstudie stehen 180 Minuten zur Verfügung. Das Fachgespräch soll nicht länger als 30 Minuten dauern.\n\n(1) Die schriftliche Prüfung besteht aus einer unter Aufsicht anzufertigenden Arbeit mit komplexen fallbezogenen Aufgaben aus den Prüfungsinhalten nach § 15 Absatz 2.\n\n(2) Die Bearbeitungszeit für die schriftliche Prüfung beträgt 150 Minuten.\n\n## § 18 Schriftliche Prüfung\n\n## Abschnitt 5 Bewertungen in den Prüfungen, Befreiung von Prüfungsbestandteilen, Bestehens- und Zeugnisregelungen\n\n## § 19 Bewertungen in den Prüfungen\n\n(1) Jede Leistung in den sieben Prüfungsbestandteilen nach § 7 Nummer 1 bis 3, § 12 Nummer 1 und 2 sowie § 16 Nummer 1 und 2 ist gesondert mit einer Note als Dezimalzahl nach Anlage 1 zu bewerten.\n\n(2) Die Bewertung der Leistung des Prüfungsteils „Baumdiagnose und Baumpflegemaßnahmen“ errechnet sich aus den Noten der Prüfungsbestandteile Arbeitsprojekt (§ 8), Arbeitsprobe (§ 9) und schriftliche Prüfung (§ 10) nach folgender Formel:\n\n- Seite 9 von 15 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.934733305659254, + "doc_id": "f8cc60d96578d355ca10d6455bcab6d2cd7f00fcfd68522c88cb85afd123642b", + "edit_distance": 0.03389830508474576, + "f1_score": 0.9974811083123425, + "meteor": 0.9924550163349591, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz - www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n- (5) Die Feststellung nach Absätzen 1 und 2 trifft die Stelle, die nach dem Gesetz zu Artikel 131 des Grundgesetzes zuständig sein würde, wenn die in Absatz 1 bezeichneten Personen zum Personenkreis des vorgenannten Gesetzes gehören würden.\n- (6) Die Absätze 1 bis 5 gelten vom 1. Januar 1992 an nur noch für Personen, die einen Anspruch auf eine nach den Vorschriften des Sechsten Buches Sozialgesetzbuch zu berechnende Rente haben oder aufgrund der Nachversicherung erwerben würden.\n\n## § 23\n\n- (1) Die in § 1 Buchstabe d des Fremdrentengesetzes genannten Personen, die während des Krieges als ausländische Arbeitskräfte im Gebiet des Deutschen Reichs beschäftigt waren, gelten für die Zeiten als nachversichert,\n- a) in denen sie der Versicherungspflicht unterlegen haben, ohne daß für sie Beiträge zu den gesetzlichen Rentenversicherungen entrichtet worden sind oder als entrichtet gelten,\n- b) in denen sie der Versicherungspflicht unterlegen hätten, wenn sie nicht als Ausländer von der Versicherungspflicht ausgenommen gewesen wären.\n\nSatz 1 gilt auch für den Fall des Todes, wenn rentenberechtigte Hinterbliebene vorhanden sind.\n\n- (2) Die Nachversicherung gilt als durchgeführt in den Fällen des Absatzes 1 Buchstabe a in dem Zweig der gesetzlichen Rentenversicherungen, in dem die Versicherungspflicht bestanden hat, in den Fällen des Absatzes 1 Buchstabe b in dem Zweig der gesetzlichen Rentenversicherungen, in dem die\n- Versicherungspflicht bestanden hätte, wenn der Beschäftigte nicht als Ausländer von der Versicherungspflicht ausgenommen gewesen wäre.\n- (3) Soweit eine Nachversicherung als durchgeführt gilt, gelten die daraus erworbenen Anwartschaften sowie Anwartschaften aus Beiträgen, die für Zeiten entrichtet worden sind, die vor den in Absatz 1 genannten Zeiten liegen, als bis zum 31. Dezember 1956 erhalten.\n- (4) Die Weiterversicherung in den gesetzlichen Rentenversicherungen richtet sich nach den allgemeinen Vorschriften; hierbei gelten die Zeiten der Nachversicherung als Zeiten, für die Beiträge für eine rentenversicherungspflichtige Beschäftigung entrichtet sind.\n- (5) Für die Feststellung der Leistungen gelten die Vorschriften über die Feststellung von Leistungen aus den gesetzlichen Rentenversicherungen bei verlorengegangenen, zerstörten, unbrauchbar gewordenen oder nicht erreichbaren Versicherungsunterlagen entsprechend.\n- (6) Ist wegen der in Absatz 1 getroffenen Regelung eine laufende Rente neu festzustellen, so ist die Neufeststellung rückwirkend zum Zeitpunkt des Rentenbeginns, frühestens zum 1. Januar 1959, vorzunehmen; die Unterschiedsbeträge sind nachzuzahlen.\n- (7) Der Bund erstattet den Trägern der gesetzlichen Rentenversicherungen im Versicherungsfall die auf die Zeiten nach Absatz 1 entfallenden Leistungen.\n- (8) Die Absätze 1 bis 7 gelten vom 1. Januar 1992 an nur noch für Personen, die einen Anspruch auf eine nach den Vorschriften des Sechsten Buches Sozialgesetzbuch zu berechnende Rente haben oder aufgrund der Nachversicherung erwerben würden.\n\n## V.\n\n## Wirksamwerden der Verbesserungen\n\n## § 24\n\n-\n\n## Art 7 Schlußvorschriften\n\n§ 1\n\n- Seite 8 von 9 -", + "recall": 0.9949748743718593, + "true_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz ‒ www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n(5) Die Feststellung nach Absätzen 1 und 2 trifft die Stelle, die nach dem Gesetz zu Artikel 131 des Grundgesetzes zuständig sein würde, wenn die in Absatz 1 bezeichneten Personen zum Personenkreis des vorgenannten Gesetzes gehören würden.\n\n(6) Die Absätze 1 bis 5 gelten vom 1. Januar 1992 an nur noch für Personen, die einen Anspruch auf eine nach den Vorschriften des Sechsten Buches Sozialgesetzbuch zu berechnende Rente haben oder aufgrund der Nachversicherung erwerben würden.\n\n## § 23\n\n(1) Die in § 1 Buchstabe d des Fremdrentengesetzes genannten Personen, die während des Krieges als ausländische Arbeitskräfte im Gebiet des Deutschen Reichs beschäftigt waren, gelten für die Zeiten als nachversichert,\n\n- a) in denen sie der Versicherungspflicht unterlegen haben, ohne daß für sie Beiträge zu den gesetzlichen Rentenversicherungen entrichtet worden sind oder als entrichtet gelten,\n\n- b) in denen sie der Versicherungspflicht unterlegen hätten, wenn sie nicht als Ausländer von der Versicherungspflicht ausgenommen gewesen wären.\n\nSatz 1 gilt auch für den Fall des Todes, wenn rentenberechtigte Hinterbliebene vorhanden sind.\n\n(2) Die Nachversicherung gilt als durchgeführt in den Fällen des Absatzes 1 Buchstabe a in dem Zweig der gesetzlichen Rentenversicherungen, in dem die Versicherungspflicht bestanden hat, in den Fällen des Absatzes 1 Buchstabe b in dem Zweig der gesetzlichen Rentenversicherungen, in dem die Versicherungspflicht bestanden hätte, wenn der Beschäftigte nicht als Ausländer von der Versicherungspflicht ausgenommen gewesen wäre.\n\n(3) Soweit eine Nachversicherung als durchgeführt gilt, gelten die daraus erworbenen Anwartschaften sowie Anwartschaften aus Beiträgen, die für Zeiten entrichtet worden sind, die vor den in Absatz 1 genannten Zeiten liegen, als bis zum 31. Dezember 1956 erhalten.\n\n(4) Die Weiterversicherung in den gesetzlichen Rentenversicherungen richtet sich nach den allgemeinen Vorschriften; hierbei gelten die Zeiten der Nachversicherung als Zeiten, für die Beiträge für eine rentenversicherungspflichtige Beschäftigung entrichtet sind.\n\n(5) Für die Feststellung der Leistungen gelten die Vorschriften über die Feststellung von Leistungen aus den gesetzlichen Rentenversicherungen bei verlorengegangenen, zerstörten, unbrauchbar gewordenen oder nicht erreichbaren Versicherungsunterlagen entsprechend.\n\n(6) Ist wegen der in Absatz 1 getroffenen Regelung eine laufende Rente neu festzustellen, so ist die Neufeststellung rückwirkend zum Zeitpunkt des Rentenbeginns, frühestens zum 1. Januar 1959, vorzunehmen; die Unterschiedsbeträge sind nachzuzahlen.\n\n(7) Der Bund erstattet den Trägern der gesetzlichen Rentenversicherungen im Versicherungsfall die auf die Zeiten nach Absatz 1 entfallenden Leistungen.\n\n(8) Die Absätze 1 bis 7 gelten vom 1. Januar 1992 an nur noch für Personen, die einen Anspruch auf eine nach den Vorschriften des Sechsten Buches Sozialgesetzbuch zu berechnende Rente haben oder aufgrund der Nachversicherung erwerben würden.\n\n## V. Wirksamwerden der Verbesserungen\n\n## § 24\n\n## -\n\n## Art 7 Schlußvorschriften\n\n## § 1\n\n- Seite 8 von 9 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9368794970189798, + "doc_id": "1fa8460eeec1823c1275cb0fb705196c28e36aac03fae29a47aae00ce77de96b", + "edit_distance": 0.3215434083601286, + "f1_score": 0.9979209979209981, + "meteor": 0.9695094309021407, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz - www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\nbestimmungsgemäßen Abgaskondensation entstehenden Stoffe widerstandsfähig sind und der Brandschutz gewährleistet ist.\n\n- (4) Schornsteine sind unmittelbar auf dem Baugrund oder auf einem feuerbeständigen Unterbau aus nichtbrennbaren Baustoffen zu errichten. Ein Unterbau aus nichtbrennbaren Baustoffen genügt\n- 1. in Gebäuden geringer Höhe,\n- 2. für Schornsteine, die oberhalb der obersten Geschoßdecke eines Gebäudes beginnen.\n- (5) Die Schornsteinmündungen müssen ungeschützte Bauteile mit brennbaren Baustoffen, ausgenommen harte Bedachung (§ 31 Abs. 1 BauO), mindestens 1 m überragen oder von ihnen, waagerecht gemessen, mindestens 1,50 m entfernt sein. Bei weicher Bedachung (§ 31 Abs. 4 BauO) müssen die Schornsteine am First austreten und diesen mindestens um 80 cm überragen.\n- (6) Schornsteine dürfen die Standsicherheit tragender Bauteile durch großflächige Erwärmung nicht gefährden.\n- (7) Für Schornsteine aus Metall können Ausnahmen von den Absätzen 2 und 4 zugelassen werden, wenn wegen der Stand- oder Betriebssicherheit und des Brandschutzes Bedenken nicht bestehen.\n\n## § 5 Ableitung der Abgase\n\n- (1) Die Ableitung der Abgase der Feuerstätten über Dach muß so erfolgen, daß ihr Abtransport mit der Luftströmung gewährleistet ist.\n- (2) Die Anforderungen nach Absatz 1 gelten bei Feuerstätten mit einer Gesamtnennwärmeleistung bis 1 MW als erfüllt, wenn die Mündungen der Schornsteine und der anderen über Dach führenden Abgasanlagen\n- 1. die höchste Kante des Daches mit einer Neigung von mehr als 20 Grad um mindestens 40 cm\n- 2. die Flächen des Daches mit einer Neigung von 20 Grad oder weniger um mindestens 1 m und\n- 3. Aufbauten des Daches, die den Schornsteinen oder anderen Abgasanlagen näher liegen, als deren 1,5fache Höhe über Dach beträgt, um mindestens 1 m\n\nüberragen. Bei Dächern mit Brüstungen ist durch Höherführung der Mündungen und durch Brüstungsöffnungen sicherzustellen, daß ein gefährliches Ansammeln von Abgasen nicht eintritt.\n\n- (3) Abweichend von Absatz 2 genügt bei raumluftunabhängigen Gasfeuerstätten mit einer Nennwärmeleistung bis 30 kW, deren Abgase mit Hilfe eines Ventilators abgeführt werden, ein Abstand der Mündung von der Dachfläche von mindestens 40 cm.\n- (4) Die Anforderungen nach Absatz 1 gelten bei Feuerstätten mit einer Gesamtnennwärmeleistung von mehr als 1 MW als erfüllt, wenn die Mündungen der Schornsteine und der anderen über Dach führenden Abgasanlagen die höchste Kante des Daches mit einer Neigung von 20 Grad oder mehr um mindestens 3 m überragen und mindestens 10 m über der Geländeoberfläche liegen. Bei einer Dachneigung von weniger als 20 Grad ist die Höhe der Mündung auf einen fiktiven Dachfirst zu beziehen, dessen Höhe unter Zugrundelegung einer Dachneigung von 20 Grad berechnet wird.\n- (5) Die Mündungen von Schornsteinen und anderen Abgasanlagen müssen zu Lüftungsöffnungen und Fenstern so angeordnet sein, daß Gefahren oder unzumutbare Belästigungen, auch für Nachbarn, nicht entstehen.\n\n## § 6 Rohrleitungen\n\nRohrleitungen in Gebäuden einschließlich der Formstücke und Armaturen sowie der Steuer-, Regel-, Sicherheits- und Meßeinrichtungen müssen dicht und so beschaffen und eingebaut sein, daß sie den beim bestimmungsgemäßen Gebrauch auftretenden Beanspruchungen standhalten. Sie dürfen einschließlich ihrer Wärmedämmung oder sonstigen Ummantelungen nicht die Brandsicherheit gefährden und bei äußerer Brandeinwirkung nicht zu einer Explosionsgefahr führen.\n\n## § 7 Aufstellräume von Feuerstätten\n\n- (1) Aufstellräume müssen so bemessen sein, daß Feuerstätten ordnungsgemäß errichtet, betrieben und unterhalten werden können.\n- (2) Feuerstätten dürfen nicht aufgestellt oder errichtet werden\n\n- Seite 4 von 6 -", + "recall": 0.995850622406639, + "true_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz ‒ www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\nbestimmungsgemäßen Abgaskondensation entstehenden Stoffe widerstandsfähig sind und der Brandschutz gewährleistet ist.\n\n(4) Schornsteine sind unmittelbar auf dem Baugrund oder auf einem feuerbeständigen Unterbau aus nichtbrennbaren Baustoffen zu errichten. Ein Unterbau aus nichtbrennbaren Baustoffen genügt\n\n(5) Die Schornsteinmündungen müssen ungeschützte Bauteile mit brennbaren Baustoffen, ausgenommen harte Bedachung (§ 31 Abs. 1 BauO), mindestens 1 m überragen oder von ihnen, waagerecht gemessen, mindestens 1,50 m entfernt sein. Bei weicher Bedachung (§ 31 Abs. 4 BauO) müssen die Schornsteine am First austreten und diesen mindestens um 80 cm überragen.\n\n(6) Schornsteine dürfen die Standsicherheit tragender Bauteile durch großflächige Erwärmung nicht gefährden.\n\n(7) Für Schornsteine aus Metall können Ausnahmen von den Absätzen 2 und 4 zugelassen werden, wenn wegen der Stand- oder Betriebssicherheit und des Brandschutzes Bedenken nicht bestehen.\n\n- 1. in Gebäuden geringer Höhe,\n\n- 2. für Schornsteine, die oberhalb der obersten Geschoßdecke eines Gebäudes beginnen.\n\n## § 5 Ableitung der Abgase\n\n(1) Die Ableitung der Abgase der Feuerstätten über Dach muß so erfolgen, daß ihr Abtransport mit der Luftströmung gewährleistet ist.\n\n(2) Die Anforderungen nach Absatz 1 gelten bei Feuerstätten mit einer Gesamtnennwärmeleistung bis 1 MW als erfüllt, wenn die Mündungen der Schornsteine und der anderen über Dach führenden Abgasanlagen\n\nüberragen. Bei Dächern mit Brüstungen ist durch Höherführung der Mündungen und durch Brüstungsöffnungen sicherzustellen, daß ein gefährliches Ansammeln von Abgasen nicht eintritt.\n\n(3) Abweichend von Absatz 2 genügt bei raumluftunabhängigen Gasfeuerstätten mit einer Nennwärmeleistung bis 30 kW, deren Abgase mit Hilfe eines Ventilators abgeführt werden, ein Abstand der Mündung von der Dachfläche von mindestens 40 cm.\n\n(4) Die Anforderungen nach Absatz 1 gelten bei Feuerstätten mit einer Gesamtnennwärmeleistung von mehr als 1 MW als erfüllt, wenn die Mündungen der Schornsteine und der anderen über Dach führenden Abgasanlagen die höchste Kante des Daches mit einer Neigung von 20 Grad oder mehr um mindestens 3 m überragen und mindestens 10 m über der Geländeoberfläche liegen. Bei einer Dachneigung von weniger als 20 Grad ist die Höhe der Mündung auf einen fiktiven Dachfirst zu beziehen, dessen Höhe unter Zugrundelegung einer Dachneigung von 20 Grad berechnet wird.\n\n(5) Die Mündungen von Schornsteinen und anderen Abgasanlagen müssen zu Lüftungsöffnungen und Fenstern so angeordnet sein, daß Gefahren oder unzumutbare Belästigungen, auch für Nachbarn, nicht entstehen.\n\n- 1. die höchste Kante des Daches mit einer Neigung von mehr als 20 Grad um mindestens 40 cm\n\n- 2. die Flächen des Daches mit einer Neigung von 20 Grad oder weniger um mindestens 1 m und\n\n- 3. Aufbauten des Daches, die den Schornsteinen oder anderen Abgasanlagen näher liegen, als deren 1,5fache Höhe über Dach beträgt, um mindestens 1 m\n\n## § 6 Rohrleitungen\n\n## § 7 Aufstellräume von Feuerstätten\n\nRohrleitungen in Gebäuden einschließlich der Formstücke und Armaturen sowie der Steuer-, Regel-, Sicherheits- und Meßeinrichtungen müssen dicht und so beschaffen und eingebaut sein, daß sie den beim bestimmungsgemäßen Gebrauch auftretenden Beanspruchungen standhalten. Sie dürfen einschließlich ihrer Wärmedämmung oder sonstigen Ummantelungen nicht die Brandsicherheit gefährden und bei äußerer Brandeinwirkung nicht zu einer Explosionsgefahr führen.\n\n(1) Aufstellräume müssen so bemessen sein, daß Feuerstätten ordnungsgemäß errichtet, betrieben und unterhalten werden können.\n\n(2) Feuerstätten dürfen nicht aufgestellt oder errichtet werden\n\n- Seite 4 von 6 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.968090163504032, + "doc_id": "56808da3cf7c720e2165df3d5406e6c046cbefe8893c101ee787918c54c02815", + "edit_distance": 0.21951219512195122, + "f1_score": 0.9977426636568849, + "meteor": 0.9909051650963537, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz - www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n- j) Konflikte erkennen und gezielt lösen sowie\n- k) Konzepte und Maßnahmen zur Arbeitssicherheit und zum Gesundheitsschutz in Abstimmung mit den hierfür zuständigen Stellen planen und umsetzen.\n\n(3) Für den Erwerb der in Absatz 2 bezeichneten Fertigkeiten, Kenntnisse und Fähigkeiten bedarf es in der Regel eines Lernumfangs von insgesamt mindestens 1 200 Stunden. Der Lerninhalt bestimmt sich nach den Anforderungen der jeweiligen Prüfungsteile nach § 4 in Verbindung mit den Anforderungen und Prüfungsinhalten der §§ 6, 11 und 15.\n\n## § 3 Voraussetzungen für die Zulassung zur Prüfung\n\n(1) Zur Prüfung ist zuzulassen, wer die Anforderungen des § 53c des Berufsbildungsgesetzes erfüllt und Folgendes nachweist:\n\n- 1. eine erfolgreich abgelegte Abschlussprüfung in den anerkannten Ausbildungsberufen Forstwirt/Forstwirtin, Gärtner/Gärtnerin oder Landwirt/Landwirtin,\n- 2. eine erfolgreich abgelegte Abschlussprüfung in einem anderen anerkannten Ausbildungsberuf und eine auf die Berufsausbildung folgende, mindestens dreijährige Berufspraxis oder\n- 3. eine mindestens fünfjährige Berufspraxis.\n- (2) Die Berufspraxis nach Absatz 1 Nummer 2 und 3 muss in Unternehmen, Behörden, Einrichtungen oder Teilen von diesen abgeleistet worden sein, die überwiegend Arbeiten in der Baumpflege durchführen. Die Berufspraxis muss in Bezug auf baumpflegerische Tätigkeiten einschlägig sein. Die Dauer und der Inhalt der Berufspraxis ist durch eine Bescheinigung der beschäftigenden Stelle nachzuweisen.\n- (3) Abweichend von den in den Absätzen 1 und 2 genannten Voraussetzungen ist zur Prüfung auch zuzulassen, wer durch Vorlage von Zeugnissen oder auf andere Weise glaubhaft macht, eine berufliche Handlungsfähigkeit erworben zu haben, die die Zulassung zur Prüfung rechtfertigt.\n\n## § 4 Gliederung der Prüfung\n\nDie Prüfung umfasst die folgenden Prüfungsteile:\n\n- 1. Baumdiagnose und Baumpflegemaßnahmen,\n- 2. Betriebs- und Unternehmensführung und\n- 3. Mitarbeiterführung und Personalmanagement.\n\n## § 5 Bewerten der Prüfung\n\nFür die Bewertung der Leistungen in der Prüfung ist der in Anlage 1 dargestellte sechsstufige Bewertungsmaßstab anzuwenden.\n\n## Abschnitt 2\n\n## Prüfungsteil Baumdiagnose und Baumpflegemaßnahmen\n\n## § 6 Anforderungen und Prüfungsinhalte\n\n(1) Im Prüfungsteil Baumdiagnose und Baumpflegemaßnahmen hat der Prüfling nachzuweisen, dass er in der Lage ist,\n\n- 1. Bäume botanisch sowie hinsichtlich ihres Alters und ihrer Entwicklung zu erfassen und ihren Zustand einschließlich des Umfeldes unter Berücksichtigung anerkannter Methoden und Parameter der Baumkontrolle, der Baumdiagnose und der Verkehrssicherheit zu beurteilen und zu dokumentieren,\n- 2. die ökologische Bedeutung von Bäumen unter Berücksichtigung naturschutz-, artenschutz- und planungsrechtlicher Aspekte zu erfassen und zu beurteilen,\n- 3. Sachwerte von Bäumen zu ermitteln,\n- 4. Bäume und Pflanzen des Baumumfeldes unter Berücksichtigung rechtlicher, funktionaler, gestalterischer und ökologischer Aspekte sowie der Klima-, Standort- und Pflegeansprüche zu verwenden,\n\n- Seite 5 von 15 -", + "recall": 0.9954954954954955, + "true_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz ‒ www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n- j) Konflikte erkennen und gezielt lösen sowie\n\n- k) Konzepte und Maßnahmen zur Arbeitssicherheit und zum Gesundheitsschutz in Abstimmung mit den hierfür zuständigen Stellen planen und umsetzen.\n\n(3) Für den Erwerb der in Absatz 2 bezeichneten Fertigkeiten, Kenntnisse und Fähigkeiten bedarf es in der Regel eines Lernumfangs von insgesamt mindestens 1 200 Stunden. Der Lerninhalt bestimmt sich nach den Anforderungen der jeweiligen Prüfungsteile nach § 4 in Verbindung mit den Anforderungen und Prüfungsinhalten der §§ 6, 11 und 15.\n\n## § 3 Voraussetzungen für die Zulassung zur Prüfung\n\n(1) Zur Prüfung ist zuzulassen, wer die Anforderungen des § 53c des Berufsbildungsgesetzes erfüllt und Folgendes nachweist:\n\n(2) Die Berufspraxis nach Absatz 1 Nummer 2 und 3 muss in Unternehmen, Behörden, Einrichtungen oder Teilen von diesen abgeleistet worden sein, die überwiegend Arbeiten in der Baumpflege durchführen. Die Berufspraxis muss in Bezug auf baumpflegerische Tätigkeiten einschlägig sein. Die Dauer und der Inhalt der Berufspraxis ist durch eine Bescheinigung der beschäftigenden Stelle nachzuweisen.\n\n(3) Abweichend von den in den Absätzen 1 und 2 genannten Voraussetzungen ist zur Prüfung auch zuzulassen, wer durch Vorlage von Zeugnissen oder auf andere Weise glaubhaft macht, eine berufliche Handlungsfähigkeit erworben zu haben, die die Zulassung zur Prüfung rechtfertigt.\n\n- 1. eine erfolgreich abgelegte Abschlussprüfung in den anerkannten Ausbildungsberufen Forstwirt/Forstwirtin, Gärtner/Gärtnerin oder Landwirt/Landwirtin,\n\n- 2. eine erfolgreich abgelegte Abschlussprüfung in einem anderen anerkannten Ausbildungsberuf und eine auf die Berufsausbildung folgende, mindestens dreijährige Berufspraxis oder\n\n- 3. eine mindestens fünfjährige Berufspraxis.\n\n- 1. Baumdiagnose und Baumpflegemaßnahmen,\n\n- 2. Betriebs- und Unternehmensführung und\n\n- 3. Mitarbeiterführung und Personalmanagement.\n\n## § 4 Gliederung der Prüfung\n\nDie Prüfung umfasst die folgenden Prüfungsteile:\n\nFür die Bewertung der Leistungen in der Prüfung ist der in Anlage 1 dargestellte sechsstufige Bewertungsmaßstab anzuwenden.\n\n## § 5 Bewerten der Prüfung\n\n## Abschnitt 2 Prüfungsteil Baumdiagnose und Baumpflegemaßnahmen\n\n## § 6 Anforderungen und Prüfungsinhalte\n\n(1) Im Prüfungsteil Baumdiagnose und Baumpflegemaßnahmen hat der Prüfling nachzuweisen, dass er in der Lage ist,\n\n- 1. Bäume botanisch sowie hinsichtlich ihres Alters und ihrer Entwicklung zu erfassen und ihren Zustand einschließlich des Umfeldes unter Berücksichtigung anerkannter Methoden und Parameter der Baumkontrolle, der Baumdiagnose und der Verkehrssicherheit zu beurteilen und zu dokumentieren,\n\n- 2. die ökologische Bedeutung von Bäumen unter Berücksichtigung naturschutz-, artenschutz- und planungsrechtlicher Aspekte zu erfassen und zu beurteilen,\n\n- 3. Sachwerte von Bäumen zu ermitteln,\n\n- 4. Bäume und Pflanzen des Baumumfeldes unter Berücksichtigung rechtlicher, funktionaler, gestalterischer und ökologischer Aspekte sowie der Klima-, Standort- und Pflegeansprüche zu verwenden,\n\n- Seite 5 von 15 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9524685793122045, + "doc_id": "7e9028c5b2976b98e62db000b81bd43f321809ceb9893bcfd242c704aa49608d", + "edit_distance": 0.36016096579476864, + "f1_score": 0.9935483870967742, + "meteor": 0.9372448481861804, + "precision": 0.9914163090128756, + "pred_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz - www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n- h) Informationssysteme zu nutzen und Diagnosesysteme einzusetzen,\n- i) Störungen in Systemen festzustellen, Fehler einzugrenzen und zu beheben,\n- j) Mess- und Prüfprotokolle zu erstellen und zu analysieren und\n- k) Kundinnen und Kunden seine Vorgehensweise zu erläutern;\n- 2. für den Nachweis nach Nummer 1 sind folgende Tätigkeiten zugrunde zu legen:\n- a) Herstellen, Prüfen und Montieren einer Fahrzeugkarosserie oder einer Fahrzeugbaukonstruktion oder Umbauen einer Fahrzeugkarosserie oder einer Fahrzeugbaukonstruktion sowie\n- b) Anschließen von Systemen und Bauteilen nach Schalt- und Funktionsplänen einschließlich Prüfen der Funktion und Erstellen einer praxisbezogenen Dokumentation;\n- 3. der Prüfling soll eine Arbeitsaufgabe bearbeiten, die aus mehreren Teilaufgaben bestehen kann und einem Kundenauftrag entspricht, und sein Vorgehen dokumentieren;\n- 4. mit dem Prüfling soll über die Arbeitsaufgabe ein situatives Fachgespräch geführt werden, das aus mehreren Gesprächsphasen bestehen kann;\n- 5. die Prüfungszeit beträgt 14 Stunden; das situative Fachgespräch soll innerhalb dieser Zeit insgesamt höchstens 20 Minuten dauern.\n\nAbweichend von Satz 1 Nummer 2 können auch andere Tätigkeiten zugrunde gelegt werden, wenn sie in gleicher Breite und Tiefe den Nachweis nach Satz 1 Nummer 1 ermöglichen.\n\n(5) Für den Prüfungsbereich Karosserie- und Fahrzeugbautechnik bestehen folgende Vorgaben:\n\n- 1. der Prüfling soll nachweisen, dass er in der Lage ist,\n- a) die Verwendung von Werk- und Hilfsstoffen zu planen sowie Werkzeuge und Maschinen dem jeweiligen Verfahren zuzuordnen,\n- b) Problemanalysen unter Beachtung von technischen Regeln, Vorgaben und zulassungsrechtlichen Bestimmungen durchzuführen und Herstellungswege aufzuzeigen,\n- c) Skizzen anzufertigen,\n- d) Zeichnungen sowie Funktions-, Schalt- und Vernetzungspläne auszuwerten,\n- e) Maßnahmen unter Berücksichtigung betrieblicher Abläufe zu planen, Unterlagen auszuwerten und zu ändern,\n- f) funktionale Zusammenhänge eines Fahrzeuges und die Fahrzeugkonstruktion darzustellen,\n- g) elektrotechnische Funktionen unter Anwendung der Sicherheitsvorschriften darzustellen,\n- h) Berechnungen durchzuführen und\n- i) elektrotechnische Arbeiten an Hochvoltkomponenten unter Anwendung der Sicherheitsvorschriften darzustellen;\n- 2. der Prüfling soll die Aufgaben schriftlich bearbeiten, wobei er als Hilfsmittel nur praxisübliche Dokumente verwenden darf;\n- 3. die Prüfungszeit beträgt 180 Minuten.\n\n(6) Für den Prüfungsbereich Wirtschafts- und Sozialkunde bestehen folgende Vorgaben:\n\n- 1. der Prüfling soll nachweisen, dass er in der Lage ist, allgemeine wirtschaftliche und gesellschaftliche Zusammenhänge der Berufs- und Arbeitswelt darzustellen und zu beurteilen;\n- 2. der Prüfling soll die praxisbezogenen Aufgaben schriftlich bearbeiten;\n- 3. die Prüfungszeit beträgt 60 Minuten.\n\n## § 12 Gewichtung der Prüfungsbereiche und Bestehen der Gesellen- oder Abschlussprüfung in der Fachrichtung Karosserie- und Fahrzeugbautechnik\n\n- (1) Die Ergebnisse der Prüfungsbereiche sind wie folgt zu gewichten:\n- 1. Arbeitsauftrag\n\n- Seite 7 von 24 -\n\nmit 20 Prozent,", + "recall": 0.9956896551724138, + "true_md": "- h) Informationssysteme zu nutzen und Diagnosesysteme einzusetzen,\n\n- i) Störungen in Systemen festzustellen, Fehler einzugrenzen und zu beheben,\n\n- j) Mess- und Prüfprotokolle zu erstellen und zu analysieren und\n\n- k) Kundinnen und Kunden seine Vorgehensweise zu erläutern;\n\n- a) Herstellen, Prüfen und Montieren einer Fahrzeugkarosserie oder einer Fahrzeugbaukonstruktion oder Umbauen einer Fahrzeugkarosserie oder einer Fahrzeugbaukonstruktion sowie\n\n- b) Anschließen von Systemen und Bauteilen nach Schalt- und Funktionsplänen einschließlich Prüfen der Funktion und Erstellen einer praxisbezogenen Dokumentation;\n\n- 2. für den Nachweis nach Nummer 1 sind folgende Tätigkeiten zugrunde zu legen:\n\n- 3. der Prüfling soll eine Arbeitsaufgabe bearbeiten, die aus mehreren Teilaufgaben bestehen kann und einem Kundenauftrag entspricht, und sein Vorgehen dokumentieren;\n\n- 4. mit dem Prüfling soll über die Arbeitsaufgabe ein situatives Fachgespräch geführt werden, das aus mehreren Gesprächsphasen bestehen kann;\n\n- 5. die Prüfungszeit beträgt 14 Stunden; das situative Fachgespräch soll innerhalb dieser Zeit insgesamt höchstens 20 Minuten dauern.\n\n- 1. der Prüfling soll nachweisen, dass er in der Lage ist,\n\n- a) die Verwendung von Werk- und Hilfsstoffen zu planen sowie Werkzeuge und Maschinen dem jeweiligen Verfahren zuzuordnen,\n\n- b) Problemanalysen unter Beachtung von technischen Regeln, Vorgaben und zulassungsrechtlichen Bestimmungen durchzuführen und Herstellungswege aufzuzeigen,\n\n- c) Skizzen anzufertigen,\n\n- d) Zeichnungen sowie Funktions-, Schalt- und Vernetzungspläne auszuwerten,\n\n- e) Maßnahmen unter Berücksichtigung betrieblicher Abläufe zu planen, Unterlagen auszuwerten und zu ändern,\n\n- f) funktionale Zusammenhänge eines Fahrzeuges und die Fahrzeugkonstruktion darzustellen,\n\n- g) elektrotechnische Funktionen unter Anwendung der Sicherheitsvorschriften darzustellen,\n\n- h) Berechnungen durchzuführen und\n\n- i) elektrotechnische Arbeiten an Hochvoltkomponenten unter Anwendung der Sicherheitsvorschriften darzustellen;\n\n- 2. der Prüfling soll die Aufgaben schriftlich bearbeiten, wobei er als Hilfsmittel nur praxisübliche Dokumente verwenden darf;\n\n- 3. die Prüfungszeit beträgt 180 Minuten.\n\n- 1. der Prüfling soll nachweisen, dass er in der Lage ist, allgemeine wirtschaftliche und gesellschaftliche Zusammenhänge der Berufs- und Arbeitswelt darzustellen und zu beurteilen;\n\n- 2. der Prüfling soll die praxisbezogenen Aufgaben schriftlich bearbeiten;\n\n- 3. die Prüfungszeit beträgt 60 Minuten.\n\n(6) Für den Prüfungsbereich Wirtschafts- und Sozialkunde bestehen folgende Vorgaben:\n\n(5) Für den Prüfungsbereich Karosserie- und Fahrzeugbautechnik bestehen folgende Vorgaben:\n\nAbweichend von Satz 1 Nummer 2 können auch andere Tätigkeiten zugrunde gelegt werden, wenn sie in gleicher Breite und Tiefe den Nachweis nach Satz 1 Nummer 1 ermöglichen.\n\n## § 12 Gewichtung der Prüfungsbereiche und Bestehen der Gesellen- oder Abschlussprüfung in der Fachrichtung Karosserie- und Fahrzeugbautechnik\n\n- Seite 7 von 24 -\n\n(1) Die Ergebnisse der Prüfungsbereiche sind wie folgt zu gewichten:\n\nEin Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz ‒ www.gesetze-im-internet.de" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9770210603360524, + "doc_id": "b750fa05ed1bf24cdccb6c0026bb46dbb585a79a934996414d1b7d4015464b11", + "edit_distance": 0.09292929292929293, + "f1_score": 0.9974683544303797, + "meteor": 0.9975072643312403, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz - www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n## Verordnung zur Durchführung von Datenerhebungen durch die Deutsche Bundesbank zur Erfüllung der Aufgaben nach dem Finanzstabilitätsgesetz (Finanzstabilitätsdatenerhebungsverordnung - FinStabDEV)\n\nFinStabDEV\n\nAusfertigungsdatum: 28.01.2021\n\nVollzitat:\n\n\"Finanzstabilitätsdatenerhebungsverordnung vom 28. Januar 2021 (BGBl. I S. 110, 1165)\"\n\n## Fußnote\n\n(+++ Textnachweis ab: 3.2.2021 +++)\n\n## Eingangsformel\n\nAuf Grund des § 6 Absatz 2 des Finanzstabilitätsgesetzes vom 28. November 2012 (BGBl. I S. 2369) verordnet das Bundesministerium der Finanzen im Einvernehmen mit der Deutschen Bundesbank:\n\n## § 1 Anwendungsbereich\n\nDiese Verordnung gilt für die Anforderung von Daten von finanziellen Kapitalgesellschaften im Sinne von Anhang A Kapitel 2 Nummer 2.32 bis 2.67 der Verordnung (EG) Nr. 2223/96 des Rates vom 25. Juni 1996 zum Europäischen System Volkswirtschaftlicher Gesamtrechnungen auf nationaler und regionaler Ebene in der Europäischen Gemeinschaft (ABl. L 310 vom 30.11.1996, S. 1), die zuletzt durch die Verordnung (EU) Nr. 517/2013 (ABl. L 158 vom 10.6.2013, S. 1) geändert worden ist, mit Sitz im Inland durch die Deutsche Bundesbank. Die nach dieser Verordnung zu erhebenden Daten dienen der Wahrung der Finanzstabilität, indem mit ihnen insbesondere die für die Finanzstabilität maßgeblichen Sachverhalte analysiert und Gefahren identifiziert werden. Damit unterstützt die Erhebung dieser Daten die Erfüllung der Aufgaben der Deutschen Bundesbank nach dem Finanzstabilitätsgesetz, insbesondere der in § 1 Absatz 1 des Finanzstabilitätsgesetzes aufgeführten Aufgaben.\n\n## § 2 Begriffsbestimmungen\n\n(1) Für die Zwecke dieser Verordnung bezeichnet der Ausdruck\n\n- 1. Mitteilungspflichtige: alle finanziellen Kapitalgesellschaften im Sinne von Anhang A Kapitel 2 Nummer 2.32 bis 2.67 der Verordnung (EG) Nr. 2223/96 mit Sitz im Inland;\n- 2. Wirtschafts- und Handelsdaten: alle Daten im Sinne von § 6 Absatz 1 Satz 2 und 3 des Finanzstabilitätsgesetzes.\n\n(2) Für die Zwecke der Benennung der nach § 4 dieser Verordnung mitzuteilenden Daten bezeichnet der Ausdruck\n\n- 1. gewerbliche Darlehensgeber:\n- a) Kreditinstitute im Sinne von § 1 Absatz 1 des Kreditwesengesetzes,\n- b) inländische Zweigniederlassungen von CRR-Kreditinstituten mit Sitz in einem anderen Staat des Europäischen Wirtschaftsraums im Sinne von § 53b Absatz 1 des Kreditwesengesetzes,\n- c) Kapitalverwaltungsgesellschaften im Sinne von § 17 Absatz 1 des Kapitalanlagegesetzbuches, die für Rechnung eines Alternativen Investmentfonds (AIF) Gelddarlehen gewähren, sowie\n- d) Unternehmen im Sinne von § 1 Absatz 1 Nummer 1 und 5 des Versicherungsaufsichtsgesetzes;\n- 2. Wohnimmobilie: eine im Inland belegene Wohnimmobilie im Sinne von Artikel 4 Absatz 1 Nummer 75 der Verordnung (EU) Nr. 575/2013 des Europäischen Parlaments und des Rates vom 26. Juni 2013 über\n\n- Seite 1 von 7 -", + "recall": 0.9949494949494949, + "true_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz ‒ www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n# Verordnung zur Durchführung von Datenerhebungen durch die Deutsche Bundesbank zur Erfüllung der Aufgaben nach dem Finanzstabilitätsgesetz (Finanzstabilitätsdatenerhebungsverordnung - FinStabDEV)\n\nFinStabDEV\n\nAusfertigungsdatum: 28.01.2021\n\nVollzitat:\n\n\"Finanzstabilitätsdatenerhebungsverordnung vom 28. Januar 2021 (BGBl. I S. 110, 1165)\"\n\n## Fußnote\n\n## Eingangsformel\n\n(+++ Textnachweis ab: 3.2.2021 +++)\n\nAuf Grund des § 6 Absatz 2 des Finanzstabilitätsgesetzes vom 28. November 2012 (BGBl. I S. 2369) verordnet das Bundesministerium der Finanzen im Einvernehmen mit der Deutschen Bundesbank:\n\n## § 1 Anwendungsbereich\n\nDiese Verordnung gilt für die Anforderung von Daten von finanziellen Kapitalgesellschaften im Sinne von Anhang A Kapitel 2 Nummer 2.32 bis 2.67 der Verordnung (EG) Nr. 2223/96 des Rates vom 25. Juni 1996 zum Europäischen System Volkswirtschaftlicher Gesamtrechnungen auf nationaler und regionaler Ebene in der Europäischen Gemeinschaft (ABl. L 310 vom 30.11.1996, S. 1), die zuletzt durch die Verordnung (EU) Nr. 517/2013 (ABl. L 158 vom 10.6.2013, S. 1) geändert worden ist, mit Sitz im Inland durch die Deutsche Bundesbank. Die nach dieser Verordnung zu erhebenden Daten dienen der Wahrung der Finanzstabilität, indem mit ihnen insbesondere die für die Finanzstabilität maßgeblichen Sachverhalte analysiert und Gefahren identifiziert werden. Damit unterstützt die Erhebung dieser Daten die Erfüllung der Aufgaben der Deutschen Bundesbank nach dem Finanzstabilitätsgesetz, insbesondere der in § 1 Absatz 1 des Finanzstabilitätsgesetzes aufgeführten Aufgaben.\n\n## § 2 Begriffsbestimmungen\n\n(1) Für die Zwecke dieser Verordnung bezeichnet der Ausdruck\n\n(2) Für die Zwecke der Benennung der nach § 4 dieser Verordnung mitzuteilenden Daten bezeichnet der Ausdruck\n\n- 1. Mitteilungspflichtige: alle finanziellen Kapitalgesellschaften im Sinne von Anhang A Kapitel 2 Nummer 2.32 bis 2.67 der Verordnung (EG) Nr. 2223/96 mit Sitz im Inland;\n\n- 2. Wirtschafts- und Handelsdaten: alle Daten im Sinne von § 6 Absatz 1 Satz 2 und 3 des Finanzstabilitätsgesetzes.\n\n- 1. gewerbliche Darlehensgeber:\n\n- a) Kreditinstitute im Sinne von § 1 Absatz 1 des Kreditwesengesetzes,\n\n- b) inländische Zweigniederlassungen von CRR-Kreditinstituten mit Sitz in einem anderen Staat des Europäischen Wirtschaftsraums im Sinne von § 53b Absatz 1 des Kreditwesengesetzes,\n\n- c) Kapitalverwaltungsgesellschaften im Sinne von § 17 Absatz 1 des Kapitalanlagegesetzbuches, die für Rechnung eines Alternativen Investmentfonds (AIF) Gelddarlehen gewähren, sowie\n\n- d) Unternehmen im Sinne von § 1 Absatz 1 Nummer 1 und 5 des Versicherungsaufsichtsgesetzes;\n\n- 2. Wohnimmobilie: eine im Inland belegene Wohnimmobilie im Sinne von Artikel 4 Absatz 1 Nummer 75 der Verordnung (EU) Nr. 575/2013 des Europäischen Parlaments und des Rates vom 26. Juni 2013 über\n\n- Seite 1 von 7 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8942255541978509, + "doc_id": "4b7cb6ee2d1488f1219a7f583f7e48e28d137a95fbf9c8cd459d5b0280bea8da", + "edit_distance": 0.045454545454545456, + "f1_score": 0.9714285714285715, + "meteor": 0.9541331684188827, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz - www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n- Seite 21 von 78 -", + "recall": 0.9444444444444444, + "true_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz ‒ www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n- Seite 21 von 78 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9343054853196678, + "doc_id": "b1aee3023cc75bc4b3e794914126dc123182a5af5571ffdf99df9975e89444b1", + "edit_distance": 0.7473309608540926, + "f1_score": 0.9686746987951806, + "meteor": 0.8172392036758171, + "precision": 0.9710144927536232, + "pred_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz - www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n- 3. Methoden der Marktbeobachtung und -analyse beherrschen,\n- 4. rechtliche Rahmenbedingungen der Unternehmensführung kennen und beachten und\n- 5. Controllinginstrumente anwenden und Regeln des Qualitätsmanagements beachten.\n\n(3) Im Handlungsbereich 'Interne und externe Kommunikation' soll die zu prüfende Person nachweisen, dass sie in der Lage ist, inner- und außerbetriebliche Kommunikationsprozesse zu fördern und zu gestalten, kundenorientiert kommunikative Problemsituationen zu erkennen und angemessene Lösungsvorschläge zu unterbreiten sowie die Möglichkeiten zeitgemäßer Kommunikationstechniken und Datenverarbeitung zu nutzen. Es können insbesondere folgende Qualifikationsschwerpunkte geprüft werden:\n\n- 1. Kommunikationsformen beherrschen,\n- 2. Individual- und Gruppenverhalten beurteilen und Teamarbeit fördern,\n- 3. Methoden der Konfliktvermeidung und der Konfliktlösung anwenden und\n- 4. Instrumente und Möglichkeiten der Kommunikationstechnologie nutzen.\n\n(4) Im Handlungsbereich 'Mitarbeiterführung und Personalentwicklung' soll die zu prüfende Person nachweisen, dass sie in der Lage ist, den Personalbedarf zu ermitteln und den Personaleinsatz den Anforderungen entsprechend sicherzustellen. Insbesondere soll sie Mitarbeiter durch die Anwendung geeigneter Methoden zielgerichtet zu eigenverantwortlichem Handeln führen können. Ferner soll sie in der Lage sein, auf der Basis einer quantitativen und qualitativen Personalplanung eine systematische Personalentwicklung durchzuführen. Es können insbesondere folgende Qualifikationsschwerpunkte geprüft werden:\n\n- 1. quantitativen und qualitativen Personalbedarf bestimmen,\n- 2. Stellenbeschreibungen und Anforderungsprofile erstellen,\n- 3. Führungsmethoden und -mittel zur Bewältigung betrieblicher Aufgaben anwenden,\n- 4. Mitarbeiter unter Berücksichtigung ihrer Eignung sowie der betrieblichen Anforderungen auswählen, einsetzen und motivieren und\n- 5. Maßnahmen der Personalentwicklung zur Qualifizierung und zielgerichteten Motivation unter Berücksichtigung des betrieblichen Bedarfs und der Mitarbeiterinteressen planen und veranlassen.\n- (5) Im Handlungsbereich 'Ausbildung' soll die zu prüfende Person nachweisen, dass sie in der Lage ist, die nachfolgenden Qualifikationsschwerpunkte selbstständig zu planen, durchzuführen und zu kontrollieren und somit die berufs- und arbeitspädagogische Eignung zur Ausbildung in der Floristik besitzt. Es können folgende Handlungsfelder geprüft werden:\n- 1. Ausbildungsvoraussetzungen prüfen und Ausbildung planen,\n- 2. Ausbildung vorbereiten und bei der Einstellung von Auszubildenden mitwirken,\n- 3. Ausbildung durchführen und\n- 4. Ausbildung abschließen.\n\n(6) Im Handlungsbereich 'Planung, Organisation von Abläufen und Kalkulation' soll die zu prüfende Person nachweisen, dass sie in der Lage ist, floristische Werkstücke und Dienstleistungen zu entwerfen sowie die betrieblichen Abläufe zu analysieren, zu planen, durchzuführen und zu kontrollieren. Sie soll das Personal- und Zeitmanagement beherrschen. Ferner soll sie die Arbeitsablaufplanung und die Disposition der Werkstoffe und Geräte durchführen und eine Kostenkalkulation erstellen können. Es können insbesondere folgende Qualifikationsschwerpunkte geprüft werden:\n\n- 1. Gestalterische Konzepte für floristische Werkstücke und Dienstleistungen entwickeln und erläutern,\n- 2. Betriebs- und Arbeitsplatzorganisation durchführen,\n- 3. Arbeitsorganisation und Zeitplanung erstellen,\n- 4. Kostenkalkulation und Preisbildung durchführen und\n- 5. Arbeitssicherheit sowie Gesundheits- und Umweltschutz berücksichtigen und gewährleisten.\n\n(7) Im Handlungsbereich 'Beschaffung und Pflege' soll die zu prüfende Person nachweisen, dass sie in der Lage ist, Bezugsquellen für pflanzliche und nichtpflanzliche Werkstoffe, Geräte und Dienstleistungen zu erschließen\n\n- Seite 3 von 9 -", + "recall": 0.9663461538461539, + "true_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz ‒ www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n- 3. Methoden der Marktbeobachtung und -analyse beherrschen,\n\n- 4. rechtliche Rahmenbedingungen der Unternehmensführung kennen und beachten und\n\n- 5. Controllinginstrumente anwenden und Regeln des Qualitätsmanagements beachten.\n\n- 1. Kommunikationsformen beherrschen,\n\n- 2. Individual- und Gruppenverhalten beurteilen und Teamarbeit fördern,\n\n- 3. Methoden der Konfliktvermeidung und der Konfliktlösung anwenden und\n\n- 4. Instrumente und Möglichkeiten der Kommunikationstechnologie nutzen.\n\n- 1. quantitativen und qualitativen Personalbedarf bestimmen,\n\n- 2. Stellenbeschreibungen und Anforderungsprofile erstellen,\n\n- 3. Führungsmethoden und -mittel zur Bewältigung betrieblicher Aufgaben anwenden,\n\n- 4. Mitarbeiter unter Berücksichtigung ihrer Eignung sowie der betrieblichen Anforderungen auswählen, einsetzen und motivieren und\n\n- 5. Maßnahmen der Personalentwicklung zur Qualifizierung und zielgerichteten Motivation unter Berücksichtigung des betrieblichen Bedarfs und der Mitarbeiterinteressen planen und veranlassen.\n\n- 1. Ausbildungsvoraussetzungen prüfen und Ausbildung planen,\n\n- 2. Ausbildung vorbereiten und bei der Einstellung von Auszubildenden mitwirken,\n\n- 3. Ausbildung durchführen und\n\n- 4. Ausbildung abschließen.\n\n- 1. Gestalterische Konzepte für floristische Werkstücke und Dienstleistungen entwickeln und erläutern,\n\n- 2. Betriebs- und Arbeitsplatzorganisation durchführen,\n\n- 3. Arbeitsorganisation und Zeitplanung erstellen,\n\n- 4. Kostenkalkulation und Preisbildung durchführen und\n\n- 5. Arbeitssicherheit sowie Gesundheits- und Umweltschutz berücksichtigen und gewährleisten.\n\n(7) Im Handlungsbereich „Beschaffung und Pflege“ soll die zu prüfende Person nachweisen, dass sie in der Lage ist, Bezugsquellen für pflanzliche und nichtpflanzliche Werkstoffe, Geräte und Dienstleistungen zu erschließen\n\n(6) Im Handlungsbereich „Planung, Organisation von Abläufen und Kalkulation“ soll die zu prüfende Person nachweisen, dass sie in der Lage ist, floristische Werkstücke und Dienstleistungen zu entwerfen sowie die betrieblichen Abläufe zu analysieren, zu planen, durchzuführen und zu kontrollieren. Sie soll das Personal- und Zeitmanagement beherrschen. Ferner soll sie die Arbeitsablaufplanung und die Disposition der Werkstoffe und Geräte durchführen und eine Kostenkalkulation erstellen können. Es können insbesondere folgende Qualifikationsschwerpunkte geprüft werden:\n\n(5) Im Handlungsbereich „Ausbildung“ soll die zu prüfende Person nachweisen, dass sie in der Lage ist, die nachfolgenden Qualifikationsschwerpunkte selbstständig zu planen, durchzuführen und zu kontrollieren und somit die berufs- und arbeitspädagogische Eignung zur Ausbildung in der Floristik besitzt. Es können folgende Handlungsfelder geprüft werden:\n\n(4) Im Handlungsbereich „Mitarbeiterführung und Personalentwicklung“ soll die zu prüfende Person nachweisen, dass sie in der Lage ist, den Personalbedarf zu ermitteln und den Personaleinsatz den Anforderungen entsprechend sicherzustellen. Insbesondere soll sie Mitarbeiter durch die Anwendung geeigneter Methoden zielgerichtet zu eigenverantwortlichem Handeln führen können. Ferner soll sie in der Lage sein, auf der Basis einer quantitativen und qualitativen Personalplanung eine systematische Personalentwicklung durchzuführen. Es können insbesondere folgende Qualifikationsschwerpunkte geprüft werden:\n\n(3) Im Handlungsbereich „Interne und externe Kommunikation“ soll die zu prüfende Person nachweisen, dass sie in der Lage ist, inner- und außerbetriebliche Kommunikationsprozesse zu fördern und zu gestalten, kundenorientiert kommunikative Problemsituationen zu erkennen und angemessene Lösungsvorschläge zu unterbreiten sowie die Möglichkeiten zeitgemäßer Kommunikationstechniken und Datenverarbeitung zu nutzen. Es können insbesondere folgende Qualifikationsschwerpunkte geprüft werden:\n\n- Seite 3 von 9 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9496148857635824, + "doc_id": "b26e6931fa38d56dab388b54d7d2b1f54e7b582ce963b0df344d5f6b1a8c6666", + "edit_distance": 0.2931937172774869, + "f1_score": 0.9978768577494691, + "meteor": 0.9517539944724154, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz - www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n## Verordnung über Beiträge zum Schutz einer störungsfreien Frequenznutzung (Frequenzschutzbeitragsverordnung - FSBeitrV)\n\nFSBeitrV\n\nAusfertigungsdatum: 13.05.2004\n\nVollzitat:\n\n\"Frequenzschutzbeitragsverordnung vom 13. Mai 2004 (BGBl. I S. 958), die zuletzt durch Artikel 1 der Verordnung vom 25. März 2021 (BGBl. I S. 382) geändert worden ist\"\n\nStand:\n\nZuletzt geändert durch Art. 317 V v. 19.6.2020 I 1328\n\nHinweis:\n\nÄnderung durch Art. 1 V v. 25.3.2021 I 382 (Nr. 12) mWv 31.3.2021 textlich nachgewiesen, dokumentarisch noch nicht abschließend bearbeitet\n\n## Fußnote\n\n(+++ Textnachweis ab: 1.1.2003 +++)\n\n## Eingangsformel\n\nAuf Grund des § 48 Abs. 3 des Telekommunikationsgesetzes vom 25. Juli 1996 (BGBl. I S. 1120), zuletzt geändert durch Artikel 1 und 3 des Gesetzes vom 3. August 2003 (BGBl. I S. 1120), und des § 11 Abs. 2 des Gesetzes über die elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit von Geräten vom 18. September 1998 (BGBl. I S. 2882), geändert durch Artikel 22 des Gesetzes vom 7. Mai 2002 (BGBl. I S. 1529), verordnet das Bundesministerium für Wirtschaft und Arbeit im Einvernehmen mit dem Bundesministerium der Finanzen:\n\n## § 1 Beitragspflicht\n\n- (1) Beitragspflichtig für die Kosten, die der Bundesnetzagentur für Elektrizität, Gas, Telekommunikation, Post und Eisenbahnen (Bundesnetzagentur) durch die in\n- 1. § 143 Absatz 1 des Telekommunikationsgesetzes,\n- 2. § 31 Absatz 1 des Elektromagnetische-Verträglichkeit-Gesetzes und\n- 3. § 35 Absatz 1 des Funkanlagengesetzes\n\ngenannten Tätigkeit entstehen, ist jeder Senderbetreiber und jeder, dem Frequenzen nach § 55 des Telekommunikationsgesetzes zugeteilt sind. Die bis zum 1. August 1996 erteilten Verleihungen gelten, soweit sie Festlegungen über die Nutzung von Frequenzen enthalten, als Zuteilungen nach § 55 des Telekommunikationsgesetzes. Dies gilt auch für sonstige Verwaltungsakte, soweit sie eine Genehmigung zur Nutzung von Frequenzen beinhalten.\n\n- (2) Beitragspflichtige nach Absatz 1 werden in Nutzergruppen zusammengefasst. Die Beitragserhebung erfolgt nach Nutzergruppen gemäß den Spalten 5, 6 und 7 der Anlage zu dieser Verordnung. Innerhalb der Nutzergruppen erfolgt die Aufteilung des Beitrags nach Bezugseinheiten gemäß Spalte 4 der Anlage zu dieser Verordnung. Beitragspflichtige, denen Frequenzen zugeteilt sind, für die aber noch keine Beitragsberechnung nach § 3 Abs. 3 möglich ist (neue Nutzergruppen), werden am Ende der Anlage aufgeführt. Die Anlage wird jährlich fortgeschrieben.\n- (3) Die Beitragspflicht beginnt mit dem Monat der Zuteilung der für den Betrieb der Sendefunkanlage oder des Sendefunknetzes notwendigen Frequenzen oder Nummern, frühestens jedoch mit dem Beginn des Kalenderjahres, für das eine Beitragsfestlegung nach § 3 erfolgt ist. Sie endet mit Ablauf des Monats, in dem der Verzicht auf die Frequenzzuteilung oder die Nummernzuteilung, die Rücknahme oder der Widerruf der Zuteilung wirksam wird oder eine Befristung der Zuteilung abläuft. Ein rückwirkender Verzicht auf die Zuteilung im Sinne des Absatzes 1 ist ausgeschlossen.\n- (4) Nach dieser Verordnung werden Beiträge nur für die Zeit ab dem 1. Januar 2003 erhoben.\n\n- Seite 1 von 78 -", + "recall": 0.9957627118644068, + "true_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz ‒ www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n# Verordnung über Beiträge zum Schutz einer störungsfreien Frequenznutzung (Frequenzschutzbeitragsverordnung - FSBeitrV)\n\n## Fußnote\n\n## Eingangsformel\n\n## § 1 Beitragspflicht\n\nFSBeitrV\n\nAusfertigungsdatum: 13.05.2004\n\nVollzitat:\n\n\"Frequenzschutzbeitragsverordnung vom 13. Mai 2004 (BGBl. I S. 958), die zuletzt durch Artikel 1 der Verordnung vom 25. März 2021 (BGBl. I S. 382) geändert worden ist\"\n\n(+++ Textnachweis ab: 1.1.2003 +++)\n\nAuf Grund des § 48 Abs. 3 des Telekommunikationsgesetzes vom 25. Juli 1996 (BGBl. I S. 1120), zuletzt geändert durch Artikel 1 und 3 des Gesetzes vom 3. August 2003 (BGBl. I S. 1120), und des § 11 Abs. 2 des Gesetzes über die elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit von Geräten vom 18. September 1998 (BGBl. I S. 2882), geändert durch Artikel 22 des Gesetzes vom 7. Mai 2002 (BGBl. I S. 1529), verordnet das Bundesministerium für Wirtschaft und Arbeit im Einvernehmen mit dem Bundesministerium der Finanzen:\n\n(1) Beitragspflichtig für die Kosten, die der Bundesnetzagentur für Elektrizität, Gas, Telekommunikation, Post und Eisenbahnen (Bundesnetzagentur) durch die in\n\ngenannten Tätigkeit entstehen, ist jeder Senderbetreiber und jeder, dem Frequenzen nach § 55 des Telekommunikationsgesetzes zugeteilt sind. Die bis zum 1. August 1996 erteilten Verleihungen gelten, soweit sie Festlegungen über die Nutzung von Frequenzen enthalten, als Zuteilungen nach § 55 des Telekommunikationsgesetzes. Dies gilt auch für sonstige Verwaltungsakte, soweit sie eine Genehmigung zur Nutzung von Frequenzen beinhalten.\n\n(2) Beitragspflichtige nach Absatz 1 werden in Nutzergruppen zusammengefasst. Die Beitragserhebung erfolgt nach Nutzergruppen gemäß den Spalten 5, 6 und 7 der Anlage zu dieser Verordnung. Innerhalb der Nutzergruppen erfolgt die Aufteilung des Beitrags nach Bezugseinheiten gemäß Spalte 4 der Anlage zu dieser Verordnung. Beitragspflichtige, denen Frequenzen zugeteilt sind, für die aber noch keine Beitragsberechnung nach § 3 Abs. 3 möglich ist (neue Nutzergruppen), werden am Ende der Anlage aufgeführt. Die Anlage wird jährlich fortgeschrieben.\n\n(3) Die Beitragspflicht beginnt mit dem Monat der Zuteilung der für den Betrieb der Sendefunkanlage oder des Sendefunknetzes notwendigen Frequenzen oder Nummern, frühestens jedoch mit dem Beginn des Kalenderjahres, für das eine Beitragsfestlegung nach § 3 erfolgt ist. Sie endet mit Ablauf des Monats, in dem der Verzicht auf die Frequenzzuteilung oder die Nummernzuteilung, die Rücknahme oder der Widerruf der Zuteilung wirksam wird oder eine Befristung der Zuteilung abläuft. Ein rückwirkender Verzicht auf die Zuteilung im Sinne des Absatzes 1 ist ausgeschlossen.\n\n(4) Nach dieser Verordnung werden Beiträge nur für die Zeit ab dem 1. Januar 2003 erhoben.\n\n- 1. § 143 Absatz 1 des Telekommunikationsgesetzes,\n\n- 2. § 31 Absatz 1 des Elektromagnetische-Verträglichkeit-Gesetzes und\n\n- 3. § 35 Absatz 1 des Funkanlagengesetzes\n\n- Seite 1 von 78 -\n\n- Stand: Zuletzt geändert durch Art. 317 V v. 19.6.2020 I 1328\n\n- Hinweis: Änderung durch Art. 1 V v. 25.3.2021 I 382 (Nr. 12) mWv 31.3.2021 textlich nachgewiesen, dokumentarisch noch nicht abschließend bearbeitet" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8942255541978509, + "doc_id": "ad84378e5ee8b943e433cba5b9b100c450b7c70af401e649e228dadaaece86bc", + "edit_distance": 0.045454545454545456, + "f1_score": 0.9714285714285715, + "meteor": 0.9541331684188827, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz - www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n- Seite 18 von 24 -", + "recall": 0.9444444444444444, + "true_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz ‒ www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n- Seite 18 von 24 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8942255541978509, + "doc_id": "60a8cb48d86ade34dfd9f8af440aa92a25148da887ca1b9a196ec1a61e2a617c", + "edit_distance": 0.045454545454545456, + "f1_score": 0.9714285714285715, + "meteor": 0.9541331684188827, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz - www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n- Seite 19 von 24 -", + "recall": 0.9444444444444444, + "true_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz ‒ www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n- Seite 19 von 24 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9336019071911406, + "doc_id": "4953a4570867d6bd084363c9260daf6fa9209812130b5d157631cd454011291c", + "edit_distance": 0.040697674418604654, + "f1_score": 0.9519230769230769, + "meteor": 0.9656549197694921, + "precision": 0.9611650485436893, + "pred_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz - www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n*\n\nBerechnung der theoretischen Versorgungsfläche für das Beitragsjahr 2015:\n\nDie theoretische Versorgungsfläche ist eine Berechnungsgröße zur Ermittlung des Beitrags. Sie basiert für alle Rundfunkdienste auf den internationalen Ausbreitungskurven der ITU-R P.370, den internationalen Abkommen für T-DAB Wiesbaden 1995 und Maastricht 2002 und für DVB-T Chester 1997, sowie den jeweils gültigen nationalen Richtlinien (zurzeit 176 TR 22 bzw. 5 R 22 vom März 1992).\n\nAngaben für die jeweils frequenzabhängige Mindestnutzfeldstärke sind für TV-analog der ITU-R BT.417 zu entnehmen, Angaben für den Betrieb eines Kanals im Band II in analoger Übertragungstechnik (UKWTonrundfunk) sind dem Abkommen Genf 1984 zu entnehmen, Angaben für den Betrieb eines T-DAB-Kanals dem Abkommen Wiesbaden 1995 (Pkt. 2.2.3, Tabelle 1, Position 'Medianwert der Mindestfeldstärke') und Angaben für den Betrieb eines DVB-T-Kanals dem Abkommen Chester 1997 (Tabelle A.1.50, Position\n\n- Seite 53 von 78 -", + "recall": 0.9428571428571428, + "true_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz ‒ www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\nBerechnung der theoretischen Versorgungsfläche für das Beitragsjahr 2015:\n\nDie theoretische Versorgungsfläche ist eine Berechnungsgröße zur Ermittlung des Beitrags. Sie basiert für alle Rundfunkdienste auf den internationalen Ausbreitungskurven der ITU-R P.370, den internationalen Abkommen für T-DAB Wiesbaden 1995 und Maastricht 2002 und für DVB-T Chester 1997, sowie den jeweils gültigen nationalen Richtlinien (zurzeit 176 TR 22 bzw. 5 R 22 vom März 1992).\n\nAngaben für die jeweils frequenzabhängige Mindestnutzfeldstärke sind für TV-analog der ITU-R BT.417 zu entnehmen, Angaben für den Betrieb eines Kanals im Band II in analoger Übertragungstechnik (UKW- Tonrundfunk) sind dem Abkommen Genf 1984 zu entnehmen, Angaben für den Betrieb eines T-DAB-Kanals dem Abkommen Wiesbaden 1995 (Pkt. 2.2.3, Tabelle 1, Position „Medianwert der Mindestfeldstärke“) und Angaben für den Betrieb eines DVB-T-Kanals dem Abkommen Chester 1997 (Tabelle A.1.50, Position\n\n- Seite 53 von 78 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9150513688091665, + "doc_id": "f106fc6aa8028e5cbe474bce8597c10db70cf3b7ec55b41957addc8a2f7155d4", + "edit_distance": 0.16702819956616052, + "f1_score": 0.978021978021978, + "meteor": 0.9661424292754677, + "precision": 0.9888888888888889, + "pred_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz - www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n- (1) Wurde eine oder wurden zwei der schriftlichen Prüfungen nach den §§ 10, 14 und 18 schlechter als mit 'ausreichend' nach Anlage 1 bewertet, ist auf Antrag des Prüflings eine dieser Prüfungen durch eine mündliche Prüfung zu ergänzen, wenn dies den Ausschlag für das Bestehen der Prüfung insgesamt geben kann.\n- (2) Die mündliche Ergänzungsprüfung soll nicht länger als 30 Minuten dauern.\n- (3) Für die Ermittlung des Ergebnisses der ergänzten schriftlichen Prüfung ist die bisherige Note der schriftlichen Prüfung und die Note der mündlichen Ergänzungsprüfung im Verhältnis 2:1 zu gewichten.\n\n## § 24 Wiederholung der Prüfung\n\n- (1) Eine Prüfung, die nicht bestanden wurde, kann zweimal wiederholt werden.\n- (2) In der Wiederholungsprüfung ist der Prüfling auf Antrag von einzelnen Prüfungsteilen nach § 4 und einzelnen Prüfungsbestandteilen nach den §§ 7, 12 und 16 zu befreien, wenn\n- 1. die entsprechenden Leistungen in einer vorangegangenen Prüfung mindestens mit 'ausreichend' nach Anlage 1 bewertet worden sind und\n- 2. der Prüfling sich innerhalb von zwei Jahren, gerechnet vom Tag der Feststellung des Ergebnisses der nicht bestandenen Prüfung an, zur Wiederholungsprüfung anmeldet.\n\n## Abschnitt 7 Schlussvorschriften\n\n## § 25 Übergangsvorschriften\n\n- (1) Die bis zum Ablauf des 31. Dezember 2020 begonnenen Prüfungsverfahren sind nach den Vorschriften der Verordnung über die Prüfung zum anerkannten Abschluss Geprüfter Fachagrarwirt/Geprüfte Fachagrarwirtin Baumpflege und Baumsanierung vom 29. Juni 1993 (BGBl. I S. 1114) zu Ende zu führen.\n- (2) Prüflinge, die die Prüfung nach den bis zum Ablauf des 31. Dezember 2020 geltenden Vorschriften nicht bestanden haben und die sich innerhalb von zwei Jahren ab dem 1. Januar 2021 zu einer Wiederholungsprüfung anmelden, legen die Wiederholungsprüfung nach den Vorschriften der Verordnung über die Prüfung zum anerkannten Abschluss Geprüfter Fachagrarwirt/Geprüfte Fachagrarwirtin - Baumpflege und Baumsanierung vom 29. Juni 1993 (BGBl. I S. 1114) ab.\n\n## § 26 Inkrafttreten, Außerkrafttreten\n\nDiese Verordnung tritt am 1. Januar 2021 in Kraft. Gleichzeitig tritt die Verordnung über die Prüfung zum anerkannten Abschluss Geprüfter Fachagrarwirt/Geprüfte Fachagrarwirtin - Baumpflege und Baumsanierung vom 29. Juni 1993 (BGBl. I S. 1114) außer Kraft.\n\n## Anlage 1 (zu § 5) Bewertungsmaßstab für die Leistungen\n\n(Fundstelle: BGBl. I 2020, 2650)\n\nFür die Bewertung der Leistungen in der Prüfung, den Prüfungsteilen und den Prüfungsbestandteilen ist der folgende Bewertungsmaßstab anzuwenden.\n\n- Seite 14 von 15 -", + "recall": 0.967391304347826, + "true_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz ‒ www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n(1) Wurde eine oder wurden zwei der schriftlichen Prüfungen nach den §§ 10, 14 und 18 schlechter als mit „ausreichend“ nach Anlage 1 bewertet, ist auf Antrag des Prüflings eine dieser Prüfungen durch eine mündliche Prüfung zu ergänzen, wenn dies den Ausschlag für das Bestehen der Prüfung insgesamt geben kann.\n\n(2) Die mündliche Ergänzungsprüfung soll nicht länger als 30 Minuten dauern.\n\n(3) Für die Ermittlung des Ergebnisses der ergänzten schriftlichen Prüfung ist die bisherige Note der schriftlichen Prüfung und die Note der mündlichen Ergänzungsprüfung im Verhältnis 2:1 zu gewichten.\n\n## § 24 Wiederholung der Prüfung\n\n## Abschnitt 7 Schlussvorschriften\n\n## § 25 Übergangsvorschriften\n\n## § 26 Inkrafttreten, Außerkrafttreten\n\n## Anlage 1 (zu § 5) Bewertungsmaßstab für die Leistungen\n\n(1) Eine Prüfung, die nicht bestanden wurde, kann zweimal wiederholt werden.\n\n(2) In der Wiederholungsprüfung ist der Prüfling auf Antrag von einzelnen Prüfungsteilen nach § 4 und einzelnen Prüfungsbestandteilen nach den §§ 7, 12 und 16 zu befreien, wenn\n\n- 1. die entsprechenden Leistungen in einer vorangegangenen Prüfung mindestens mit „ausreichend“ nach Anlage 1 bewertet worden sind und\n\n- 2. der Prüfling sich innerhalb von zwei Jahren, gerechnet vom Tag der Feststellung des Ergebnisses der nicht bestandenen Prüfung an, zur Wiederholungsprüfung anmeldet.\n\n(1) Die bis zum Ablauf des 31. Dezember 2020 begonnenen Prüfungsverfahren sind nach den Vorschriften der Verordnung über die Prüfung zum anerkannten Abschluss Geprüfter Fachagrarwirt/Geprüfte Fachagrarwirtin – Baumpflege und Baumsanierung vom 29. Juni 1993 (BGBl. I S. 1114) zu Ende zu führen.\n\n(2) Prüflinge, die die Prüfung nach den bis zum Ablauf des 31. Dezember 2020 geltenden Vorschriften nicht bestanden haben und die sich innerhalb von zwei Jahren ab dem 1. Januar 2021 zu einer Wiederholungsprüfung anmelden, legen die Wiederholungsprüfung nach den Vorschriften der Verordnung über die Prüfung zum anerkannten Abschluss Geprüfter Fachagrarwirt/Geprüfte Fachagrarwirtin – Baumpflege und Baumsanierung vom 29. Juni 1993 (BGBl. I S. 1114) ab.\n\nDiese Verordnung tritt am 1. Januar 2021 in Kraft. Gleichzeitig tritt die Verordnung über die Prüfung zum anerkannten Abschluss Geprüfter Fachagrarwirt/Geprüfte Fachagrarwirtin – Baumpflege und Baumsanierung vom 29. Juni 1993 (BGBl. I S. 1114) außer Kraft.\n\n(Fundstelle: BGBl. I 2020, 2650)\n\nFür die Bewertung der Leistungen in der Prüfung, den Prüfungsteilen und den Prüfungsbestandteilen ist der folgende Bewertungsmaßstab anzuwenden. Benotung\n\n- Seite 14 von 15 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9475277057239172, + "doc_id": "bf8b6658d72622cf54a5491290fcbd7afbc03cc6bf8614f520e407baf047011b", + "edit_distance": 0.1681260945709282, + "f1_score": 0.9976580796252928, + "meteor": 0.99441807051873, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz - www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n## Gesetz über den Bau und die Finanzierung von Bundesfernstraßen durch Private (Fernstraßenbauprivatfinanzierungsgesetz FStrPrivFinG)\n\nFStrPrivFinG\n\nAusfertigungsdatum: 30.08.1994\n\nVollzitat:\n\n\"Fernstraßenbauprivatfinanzierungsgesetz in der Fassung der Bekanntmachung vom 6. Januar 2006 (BGBl. I S. 49), das zuletzt durch Artikel 142 des Gesetzes vom 20. November 2019 (BGBl. I S. 1626) geändert worden ist\"\n\nStand:\n\nNeugefasst durch Bek. v. 6.1.2006 I 49;\n\nZuletzt geändert durch Art. 142 G v. 20.11.2019 I 1626\n\nMittelbare Änderung durch Art. 8 Nr. 2 G v. 29.11.2018 I 2237 berücksichtigt\n\n## Fußnote\n\n(+++ Textnachweis ab: 3.9.1994 +++)\n\n## § 1 Bau und Finanzierung durch Private\n\n- (1) Zur Verstärkung von Investitionen in das Bundesfernstraßennetz können Private Aufgaben des Neu- und Ausbaus von Bundesfernstraßen auf der Grundlage einer Mautgebührenfinanzierung wahrnehmen.\n- (2) Hierzu kann der Bau, die Erhaltung, der Betrieb und die Finanzierung von Bundesfernstraßen Privaten zur Ausführung übertragen werden.\n- (3) Der Private hat die Rechte und Pflichten des Trägers der Straßenbaulast nach den §§ 7a, 16a Abs. 3, §§ 18f, 19 und 19a des Bundesfernstraßengesetzes.\n- (4) Hoheitliche Befugnisse gehen auf den Privaten nicht über, soweit dieses Gesetz nichts anderes bestimmt.\n- (5) Mautgebühren im Sinne dieses Gesetzes sind öffentlich-rechtliche Gebühren (Gebühren) oder privatrechtliche Entgelte (Entgelte).\n\n## § 2 Mautgebührenerhebung durch Private; Verordnungsermächtigung\n\n- (1) Die Landesregierungen werden ermächtigt, einen Privaten, der sich vertraglich zur Übernahme von Aufgaben nach § 1 Abs. 2 für ein in der Rechtsverordnung nach § 3 Abs. 1 Satz 2 festgelegtes Bundesstraßenprojekt, soweit nicht dem Bund die Verwaltung der Bundesstraße zusteht, verpflichtet, durch Rechtsverordnung mit den Befugnissen, die für den Bau, den Betrieb und die Unterhaltung des nach § 3 Abs. 1 Satz 2 bestimmten Bundesstraßenabschnitts erforderlich sind, insbesondere mit dem Recht zur Erhebung einer Mautgebühr und dem Betreiben der Verkehrszeichen und Verkehrseinrichtungen nach Maßgabe der Absätze 3 bis 5, zu beleihen. Sie können diese Ermächtigung durch Rechtsverordnung auf die oberste Landesstraßenbaubehörde übertragen. Das Bundesministerium für Verkehr und digitale Infrastruktur wird ermächtigt, einen Privaten, der sich vertraglich zur Übernahme von Aufgaben nach § 1 Absatz 2 für ein in der Rechtsverordnung nach § 3 Absatz 1 Satz 2 festgelegtes Bundesfernstraßenprojekt, soweit dem Bund die Verwaltung einer Bundesfernstraße zusteht, verpflichtet, durch Rechtsverordnung ohne Zustimmung des Bundesrates mit den Befugnissen, die für den Bau, den Betrieb und die Unterhaltung des nach § 3 Absatz 1 Satz 2 bestimmten Bundesfernstraßenabschnitts erforderlich sind, insbesondere mit dem Recht zur Erhebung einer Mautgebühr oder dem Betreiben der Verkehrszeichen und Verkehrseinrichtungen nach Maßgabe der Absätze 3 bis 5, zu beleihen. Es kann diese Ermächtigung durch Rechtsverordnung auf das Fernstraßen-Bundesamt übertragen. Die Mautgebühr dient der Refinanzierung der dem Privaten im Zusammenhang mit der Erfüllung der nach § 1 Abs. 2 übernommenen Aufgaben entstehenden Aufwendungen zuzüglich eines projektangemessenen Unternehmergewinns. Die Mautgebühr wird vom Privaten nach Maßgabe der Absätze 2 bis 4 als Gebühr auf der Grundlage einer\n\n- Seite 1 von 6 -", + "recall": 0.9953271028037384, + "true_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz ‒ www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n# Gesetz über den Bau und die Finanzierung von Bundesfernstraßen durch Private (Fernstraßenbauprivatfinanzierungsgesetz - FStrPrivFinG)\n\n## Fußnote\n\n## § 1 Bau und Finanzierung durch Private\n\n## § 2 Mautgebührenerhebung durch Private; Verordnungsermächtigung\n\nFStrPrivFinG\n\nAusfertigungsdatum: 30.08.1994\n\nVollzitat:\n\n\"Fernstraßenbauprivatfinanzierungsgesetz in der Fassung der Bekanntmachung vom 6. Januar 2006 (BGBl. I S. 49), das zuletzt durch Artikel 142 des Gesetzes vom 20. November 2019 (BGBl. I S. 1626) geändert worden ist\"\n\nMittelbare Änderung durch Art. 8 Nr. 2 G v. 29.11.2018 I 2237 berücksichtigt\n\n(+++ Textnachweis ab: 3.9.1994 +++)\n\n(1) Zur Verstärkung von Investitionen in das Bundesfernstraßennetz können Private Aufgaben des Neu- und Ausbaus von Bundesfernstraßen auf der Grundlage einer Mautgebührenfinanzierung wahrnehmen.\n\n(2) Hierzu kann der Bau, die Erhaltung, der Betrieb und die Finanzierung von Bundesfernstraßen Privaten zur Ausführung übertragen werden.\n\n(3) Der Private hat die Rechte und Pflichten des Trägers der Straßenbaulast nach den §§ 7a, 16a Abs. 3, §§ 18f, 19 und 19a des Bundesfernstraßengesetzes.\n\n(4) Hoheitliche Befugnisse gehen auf den Privaten nicht über, soweit dieses Gesetz nichts anderes bestimmt.\n\n(5) Mautgebühren im Sinne dieses Gesetzes sind öffentlich-rechtliche Gebühren (Gebühren) oder privatrechtliche Entgelte (Entgelte).\n\n(1) Die Landesregierungen werden ermächtigt, einen Privaten, der sich vertraglich zur Übernahme von Aufgaben nach § 1 Abs. 2 für ein in der Rechtsverordnung nach § 3 Abs. 1 Satz 2 festgelegtes Bundesstraßenprojekt, soweit nicht dem Bund die Verwaltung der Bundesstraße zusteht, verpflichtet, durch Rechtsverordnung mit den Befugnissen, die für den Bau, den Betrieb und die Unterhaltung des nach § 3 Abs. 1 Satz 2 bestimmten Bundesstraßenabschnitts erforderlich sind, insbesondere mit dem Recht zur Erhebung einer Mautgebühr und dem Betreiben der Verkehrszeichen und Verkehrseinrichtungen nach Maßgabe der Absätze 3 bis 5, zu beleihen. Sie können diese Ermächtigung durch Rechtsverordnung auf die oberste Landesstraßenbaubehörde übertragen. Das Bundesministerium für Verkehr und digitale Infrastruktur wird ermächtigt, einen Privaten, der sich vertraglich zur Übernahme von Aufgaben nach § 1 Absatz 2 für ein in der Rechtsverordnung nach § 3 Absatz 1 Satz 2 festgelegtes Bundesfernstraßenprojekt, soweit dem Bund die Verwaltung einer Bundesfernstraße zusteht, verpflichtet, durch Rechtsverordnung ohne Zustimmung des Bundesrates mit den Befugnissen, die für den Bau, den Betrieb und die Unterhaltung des nach § 3 Absatz 1 Satz 2 bestimmten Bundesfernstraßenabschnitts erforderlich sind, insbesondere mit dem Recht zur Erhebung einer Mautgebühr oder dem Betreiben der Verkehrszeichen und Verkehrseinrichtungen nach Maßgabe der Absätze 3 bis 5, zu beleihen. Es kann diese Ermächtigung durch Rechtsverordnung auf das Fernstraßen-Bundesamt übertragen. Die Mautgebühr dient der Refinanzierung der dem Privaten im Zusammenhang mit der Erfüllung der nach § 1 Abs. 2 übernommenen Aufgaben entstehenden Aufwendungen zuzüglich eines projektangemessenen Unternehmergewinns. Die Mautgebühr wird vom Privaten nach Maßgabe der Absätze 2 bis 4 als Gebühr auf der Grundlage einer\n\n- Seite 1 von 6 -\n\n- Stand: Neugefasst durch Bek. v. 6.1.2006 I 49;\n\nZuletzt geändert durch Art. 142 G v. 20.11.2019 I 1626" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8942255541978509, + "doc_id": "80d348a114c5e4ccffabc10d4a0d5b4125dfe6d280f3a2bcb9e407092e375e84", + "edit_distance": 0.045454545454545456, + "f1_score": 0.9714285714285715, + "meteor": 0.9541331684188827, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz - www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n- Seite 52 von 78 -", + "recall": 0.9444444444444444, + "true_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz ‒ www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n- Seite 52 von 78 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9477292127748838, + "doc_id": "7c8d09cf8373ec33c62ffce304fb2b2b1eaa0173de40d98712244761714f5ac2", + "edit_distance": 0.25, + "f1_score": 0.9976133651551312, + "meteor": 0.9705269587775486, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz - www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n## Gesetz zur Errichtung eines Fernstraßen-Bundesamtes (Fernstraßen-Bundesamt-Errichtungsgesetz - FStrBAG)\n\nFStrBAG\n\nAusfertigungsdatum: 14.08.2017\n\nVollzitat:\n\n\"Fernstraßen-Bundesamt-Errichtungsgesetz vom 14. August 2017 (BGBl. I S. 3122, 3143), das durch Artikel 7 des Gesetzes vom 29. Juni 2020 (BGBl. I S. 1528) geändert worden ist\"\n\nHinweis: Änderung durch Art. 7 G v. 29.6.2020 I 1528 (Nr. 32) textlich nachgewiesen, dokumentarisch noch nicht abschließend bearbeitet\n\n## Fußnote\n\n(+++ Textnachweis ab: 18.8.2017 +++)\n\n(+++ Zur Nichtanwendung vgl. § 3 Abs. 2 +++)\n\nDas G wurde als Artikel 14 des G v. 14.8.2017 I 3122 vom Bundestag mit Zustimmung des Bundesrates beschlossen. Es ist gem. Art. 25 Abs. 1 dieses G am 18.8.2017 in Kraft getreten. Die §§ 2 und 3 Absatz 1 und 2 treten gem. Art. 25 Abs. 4 Nr. 1 dieses G am 1.1.2021 in Kraft.\n\nVgl. Organisationserlass zur Errichtung des Fernstraßen-Bundesamtes v. 26.9.2018 BAnz AT 28.09.2018 B4 (FStrBAOrgErl 2018)\n\n## § 1 Errichtung\n\n- (1) Zum 1. Januar 2021 wird das Fernstraßen-Bundesamt als Bundesoberbehörde im Geschäftsbereich des Bundesministeriums für Verkehr und digitale Infrastruktur seine Tätigkeit aufnehmen.\n- (2) Auf Vorschlag des Bundesministeriums für Verkehr und digitale Infrastruktur bestimmt die Bundesregierung den Sitz des Fernstraßen-Bundesamtes.\n- (3) Das Fernstraßen-Bundesamt wird von einem Präsidenten oder einer Präsidentin geleitet.\n\n## § 2 Aufgaben des Fernstraßen-Bundesamtes\n\n- (1) Dem Fernstraßen-Bundesamt obliegen folgende Aufgaben:\n- 1. die Widmung, Umstufung und Einziehung nach Maßgabe von § 2 des Bundesfernstraßengesetzes bei Bundesfernstraßen, soweit dem Bund die Verwaltung zusteht,\n- 2. die Erteilung des Einverständnisses zur Widmungs- und Aufstufungsentscheidung der obersten Landesstraßenbaubehörde zu Bundesautobahnen und Bundesstraßen nach § 2 Absatz 6 Satz 5 des Bundesfernstraßengesetzes,\n- 3. die Bestimmung der Planung und Linienführung für Bundesfernstraßen nach § 16 des Bundesfernstraßengesetzes,\n- 4. nach Maßgabe des Absatzes 2 und 3 und des § 3 Absatz 2 und 3 die Planfeststellung und Plangenehmigung für den Bau oder die Änderung von Bundesautobahnen nach § 17 des Bundesfernstraßengesetzes, einschließlich der vorgeschriebenen Anhörungen, und\n- 5. die Wahrnehmung der Rechts- und Fachaufsicht über die Gesellschaft privaten Rechts im Sinne des Infrastrukturgesellschaftserrichtungsgesetzes, soweit diese auf Grund des § 6 des Infrastrukturgesellschaftserrichtungsgesetzes mit der Wahrnehmung von hoheitlichen Aufgaben beliehen ist.\n\nIm Übrigen ist das Fernstraßen-Bundesamt zuständig, sofern und soweit ihm durch ein Gesetz oder auf Grund eines Gesetzes Aufgaben zugewiesen werden. Das Fernstraßen-Bundesamt unterstützt das\n\n- Seite 1 von 3 -", + "recall": 0.9952380952380953, + "true_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz ‒ www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n# Gesetz zur Errichtung eines Fernstraßen-Bundesamtes (Fernstraßen-Bundesamt-Errichtungsgesetz - FStrBAG)\n\nFStrBAG\n\nAusfertigungsdatum: 14.08.2017\n\nVollzitat:\n\n\"Fernstraßen-Bundesamt-Errichtungsgesetz vom 14. August 2017 (BGBl. I S. 3122, 3143), das durch Artikel 7 des Gesetzes vom 29. Juni 2020 (BGBl. I S. 1528) geändert worden ist\"\n\n(+++ Textnachweis ab: 18.8.2017 +++) (+++ Zur Nichtanwendung vgl. § 3 Abs. 2 +++)\n\nDas G wurde als Artikel 14 des G v. 14.8.2017 I 3122 vom Bundestag mit Zustimmung des Bundesrates beschlossen. Es ist gem. Art. 25 Abs. 1 dieses G am 18.8.2017 in Kraft getreten. Die §§ 2 und 3 Absatz 1 und 2 treten gem. Art. 25 Abs. 4 Nr. 1 dieses G am 1.1.2021 in Kraft.\n\nVgl. Organisationserlass zur Errichtung des Fernstraßen-Bundesamtes v. 26.9.2018 BAnz AT 28.09.2018 B4 (FStrBAOrgErl 2018)\n\n(1) Zum 1. Januar 2021 wird das Fernstraßen-Bundesamt als Bundesoberbehörde im Geschäftsbereich des Bundesministeriums für Verkehr und digitale Infrastruktur seine Tätigkeit aufnehmen.\n\n(2) Auf Vorschlag des Bundesministeriums für Verkehr und digitale Infrastruktur bestimmt die Bundesregierung den Sitz des Fernstraßen-Bundesamtes.\n\n(3) Das Fernstraßen-Bundesamt wird von einem Präsidenten oder einer Präsidentin geleitet.\n\n(1) Dem Fernstraßen-Bundesamt obliegen folgende Aufgaben:\n\nIm Übrigen ist das Fernstraßen-Bundesamt zuständig, sofern und soweit ihm durch ein Gesetz oder auf Grund eines Gesetzes Aufgaben zugewiesen werden. Das Fernstraßen-Bundesamt unterstützt das\n\n## Fußnote\n\n## § 1 Errichtung\n\n## § 2 Aufgaben des Fernstraßen-Bundesamtes\n\n- 1. die Widmung, Umstufung und Einziehung nach Maßgabe von § 2 des Bundesfernstraßengesetzes bei Bundesfernstraßen, soweit dem Bund die Verwaltung zusteht,\n\n- 2. die Erteilung des Einverständnisses zur Widmungs- und Aufstufungsentscheidung der obersten Landesstraßenbaubehörde zu Bundesautobahnen und Bundesstraßen nach § 2 Absatz 6 Satz 5 des Bundesfernstraßengesetzes,\n\n- 3. die Bestimmung der Planung und Linienführung für Bundesfernstraßen nach § 16 des Bundesfernstraßengesetzes,\n\n- 4. nach Maßgabe des Absatzes 2 und 3 und des § 3 Absatz 2 und 3 die Planfeststellung und Plangenehmigung für den Bau oder die Änderung von Bundesautobahnen nach § 17 des Bundesfernstraßengesetzes, einschließlich der vorgeschriebenen Anhörungen, und\n\n- 5. die Wahrnehmung der Rechts- und Fachaufsicht über die Gesellschaft privaten Rechts im Sinne des Infrastrukturgesellschaftserrichtungsgesetzes, soweit diese auf Grund des § 6 des Infrastrukturgesellschaftserrichtungsgesetzes mit der Wahrnehmung von hoheitlichen Aufgaben beliehen ist.\n\n- Seite 1 von 3 -\n\n- Hinweis: Änderung durch Art. 7 G v. 29.6.2020 I 1528 (Nr. 32) textlich nachgewiesen, dokumentarisch noch nicht abschließend bearbeitet" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7073893413952578, + "doc_id": "9c989101d58199a52e185ea03be0456ebc7eef3a534431e640b82b35c8a15dc1", + "edit_distance": 0.3112033195020747, + "f1_score": 0.8800000000000001, + "meteor": 0.9120118211027303, + "precision": 0.8380952380952381, + "pred_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz - www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n## Anlage 2 (zu § 10) Zeugnisinhalte\n\n(Fundstelle: BGBl. I 2019, 2229)\n\nTei l A - Z e u g n i s o h n e P r ü f u n g s e r g e b n i s s e :\n\n- 1. Bezeichnung der ausstellenden Behörde,\n- 2. Name und Geburtsdatum der geprüften Person,\n- 3. Datum des Bestehens der Prüfung,\n- 4. Bezeichnung des erworbenen Fortbildungsabschlusses nach § 1 Absatz 3,\n- 5. Bezeichnung und Fundstelle dieser Fortbildungsordnung nach den Angaben im Bundesgesetzblatt unter Berücksichtigung erfolgter Änderungen dieser Verordnung,\n- 6. Datum der Ausstellung des Zeugnisses samt Unterschrift der zuständigen Stelle.\n\nTei l B - Z e u g n i s m i t P r ü f u n g s e r g e b n i s s e n :\n\nAlle Angaben des Teils A sowie zusätzlich:\n\n- 1. zur Situationsaufgabe nach § 6 Absatz 2\n- a) Benennung und Bewertung dieser Situationsaufgabe mit Note sowie\n- b) Benennung der drei schwerpunktmäßigen Handlungsbereiche,\n- 2. zur Situationsaufgabe nach § 6 Absatz 3\n- a) Benennung und Bewertung dieser Situationsaufgabe mit Note sowie\n\n- Seite 8 von 9 -", + "recall": 0.9263157894736842, + "true_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz ‒ www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n## Anlage 2 (zu § 10) Zeugnisinhalte\n\n(Fundstelle: BGBl. I 2019, 2229)\n\nTeil A – Zeugnis ohne Prüfungsergebnisse:\n\nTeil B – Zeugnis mit Prüfungsergebnissen:\n\nAlle Angaben des Teils A sowie zusätzlich:\n\n- 1. Bezeichnung der ausstellenden Behörde,\n\n- 2. Name und Geburtsdatum der geprüften Person,\n\n- 3. Datum des Bestehens der Prüfung,\n\n- 4. Bezeichnung des erworbenen Fortbildungsabschlusses nach § 1 Absatz 3,\n\n- 5. Bezeichnung und Fundstelle dieser Fortbildungsordnung nach den Angaben im Bundesgesetzblatt unter Berücksichtigung erfolgter Änderungen dieser Verordnung,\n\n- 6. Datum der Ausstellung des Zeugnisses samt Unterschrift der zuständigen Stelle.\n\n- 1. zur Situationsaufgabe nach § 6 Absatz 2\n\n- a) Benennung und Bewertung dieser Situationsaufgabe mit Note sowie\n\n- b) Benennung der drei schwerpunktmäßigen Handlungsbereiche,\n\n- 2. zur Situationsaufgabe nach § 6 Absatz 3\n\n- a) Benennung und Bewertung dieser Situationsaufgabe mit Note sowie\n\n- Seite 8 von 9 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8958039312312598, + "doc_id": "b444f908080662032801155b5a1e923121cb4adbf263f33ec06859e2b92c83f2", + "edit_distance": 0.045454545454545456, + "f1_score": 0.9714285714285715, + "meteor": 0.9584899408774165, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n- Seite 10 von 15 -", + "recall": 0.9444444444444444, + "true_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz ‒ www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n- Seite 10 von 15 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9541417220255248, + "doc_id": "ce1bc89f77ba7b858d6e6b9b030f0a825fd43d8c9ca72e534fadc6047c6cb381", + "edit_distance": 0.11479944674965421, + "f1_score": 0.9896049896049897, + "meteor": 0.9756900468298433, + "precision": 0.9916666666666667, + "pred_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz - www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\nBundesministerium für Verkehr und digitale Infrastruktur fachlich bei der Wahrnehmung der Bundesaufsicht über die Landesbehörden, soweit dem Bund die Verwaltung der Bundesstraßen nicht zusteht, bei der Erarbeitung von Rechts- und Verwaltungsvorschriften sowie bei der zwischenstaatlichen Zusammenarbeit.\n\n- (2) Das Fernstraßen-Bundesamt ist Anhörungs- und Planfeststellungsbehörde in Planfeststellungsverfahren oder Plangenehmigungsbehörde in Plangenehmigungsverfahren, die auf der Grundlage des § 17 des Bundesfernstraßengesetzes für den Bau oder die Änderung von Bundesautobahnen durchgeführt werden. Es trifft in den in Satz 1 genannten Fällen auch die Entscheidung nach § 74 Absatz 7 des Verwaltungsverfahrensgesetzes.\n- (3) Soweit nach Artikel 90 Absatz 4 oder Artikel 143e Absatz 2 des Grundgesetzes auf Antrag eines Landes Bundesstraßen, soweit sie im Gebiet dieses Landes liegen, vom Bund in Bundesverwaltung übernommen werden, ist das Fernstraßen-Bundesamt Anhörungs- und Planfeststellungsbehörde in Planfeststellungsverfahren oder Plangenehmigungsbehörde in Plangenehmigungsverfahren für den Bau oder die Änderung von Bundesfernstraßen.\n\n## Fußnote\n\n(+++ § 2 Abs. 2: Zur Nichtanwendung vgl. § 3 Abs. 2 +++)\n\n## § 3 Übergangsregelung, Antragsrecht der Länder\n\n- (1) Das Fernstraßen-Bundesamt tritt im Rahmen seiner Zuständigkeiten nach § 2 in vor dem 1. Januar 2021 eingeleitete Verwaltungsverfahren ein, soweit in den Absätzen 2 und 3 nichts Abweichendes bestimmt ist.\n- (2) § 2 Absatz 2 findet keine Anwendung auf Planfeststellungs- oder Plangenehmigungsverfahren, die zum 1. Januar 2021 bereits eingeleitet worden sind. Diese werden von den Ländern fortgeführt.\n- (3) Abweichend von § 2 Absatz 2 ist eine nach Landesrecht zuständige Behörde Anhörungsund Planfeststellungsbehörde in Planfeststellungsverfahren, Plangenehmigungsbehörde in Plangenehmigungsverfahren, die auf der Grundlage des § 17 des Bundesfernstraßengesetzes für den Bau oder die Änderung von Bundesautobahnen durchgeführt werden, sowie zuständig für die Entscheidung nach § 74 Absatz 7 des Verwaltungsverfahrensgesetzes, wenn ein Land dies beim Fernstraßen-Bundesamt beantragt. Die beantragte Übernahme wird mit Beginn des zweiten auf die Antragstellung folgenden Kalenderjahres wirksam und das jeweilige Land trägt ab diesem Zeitpunkt seine Kosten. Sie ist in einem vom Land zu bestimmenden Amtsblatt zu veröffentlichen. Die Antragstellung eines Landes erfolgt stets für alle Bundesautobahnen, die in dem jeweiligen Land liegen, und ist nur einmalig möglich. Erfolgt die Antragstellung mit Wirkung zum 1. Januar 2021, tritt die Zuständigkeit des Fernstraßen-Bundesamtes nach § 2 Absatz 2 nicht ein. Erfolgt eine Antragstellung mit Wirkung zu einem späteren Zeitpunkt, gilt Absatz 2 entsprechend, so dass die nach dem 1. Januar 2021 bis zum Zeitpunkt der wirksamen Übernahme eingeleiteten Verfahren vom Fernstraßen-Bundesamt fortgeführt werden und das jeweilige Land die Kosten ab dem Zeitpunkt der wirksamen Übernahme erstattet. Bei Zuständigkeit einer nach Landesrecht zuständigen Behörde ist das Bundesministerium für Verkehr und digitale Infrastruktur berechtigt, die Zuständigkeit für die Befugnisse nach § 2 Absatz 2 dem FernstraßenBundesamt zu übertragen, sofern es tatsächliche Anhaltspunkte gibt, dass ein Land seiner Aufgabe zur Schaffung von Baurecht nach den §§ 17 bis 17e des Bundesfernstraßengesetzes nicht ordnungsgemäß nachkommt. Die Übertragung der Befugnisse auf das Fernstraßen-Bundesamt wird mit Beginn des zweiten auf die Entscheidung des Bundesministeriums für Verkehr und digitale Infrastruktur folgenden Kalenderjahres wirksam und der Bund trägt ab diesem Zeitpunkt die Kosten. Absatz 2 gilt entsprechend, so dass die bis zum Zeitpunkt der wirksamen Übertragung auf das Fernstraßen-Bundesamt eingeleiteten Verfahren von dem jeweiligen Land fortgeführt werden und das Fernstraßen-Bundesamt dem jeweiligen Land die Kosten ab dem Zeitpunkt der wirksamen Übertragung erstattet. Das Bundesministerium für Verkehr und digitale Infrastruktur wird den Zeitpunkt der wirksamen Übertragung im Bundesanzeiger veröffentlichen.\n\n## § 4 Straßenverkehrsrechtliche Aufgaben des Fernstraßen-Bundesamtes\n\n- (1) Das Bundesministerium für Verkehr und digitale Infrastruktur wird ermächtigt, durch Rechtsverordnung mit Zustimmung des Bundesrates dem Fernstraßen-Bundesamt Aufgaben zur Durchführung des Straßenverkehrsgesetzes und der auf Grund des Straßenverkehrsgesetzes erlassenen Rechtsverordnungen zu übertragen und dabei den Übergang laufender Verfahren auf das Fernstraßen-Bundesamt zu regeln. Übertragbar sind straßenverkehrsrechtliche Aufgaben auf Bundesautobahnen in der Baulast des Bundes und auf Bundesstraßen in Bundesverwaltung, die\n- 1. im Zusammenhang mit dem Bau, Betrieb oder der Erhaltung der vorgenannten Straßen stehen,\n\n- Seite 2 von 3 -", + "recall": 0.9875518672199171, + "true_md": "Bundesministerium für Verkehr und digitale Infrastruktur fachlich bei der Wahrnehmung der Bundesaufsicht über die Landesbehörden, soweit dem Bund die Verwaltung der Bundesstraßen nicht zusteht, bei der Erarbeitung von Rechts- und Verwaltungsvorschriften sowie bei der zwischenstaatlichen Zusammenarbeit.\n\n(2) Das Fernstraßen-Bundesamt ist Anhörungs- und Planfeststellungsbehörde in Planfeststellungsverfahren oder Plangenehmigungsbehörde in Plangenehmigungsverfahren, die auf der Grundlage des § 17 des Bundesfernstraßengesetzes für den Bau oder die Änderung von Bundesautobahnen durchgeführt werden. Es trifft in den in Satz 1 genannten Fällen auch die Entscheidung nach § 74 Absatz 7 des Verwaltungsverfahrensgesetzes.\n\n(3) Soweit nach Artikel 90 Absatz 4 oder Artikel 143e Absatz 2 des Grundgesetzes auf Antrag eines Landes Bundesstraßen, soweit sie im Gebiet dieses Landes liegen, vom Bund in Bundesverwaltung übernommen werden, ist das Fernstraßen-Bundesamt Anhörungs- und Planfeststellungsbehörde in Planfeststellungsverfahren oder Plangenehmigungsbehörde in Plangenehmigungsverfahren für den Bau oder die Änderung von Bundesfernstraßen.\n\n(+++ § 2 Abs. 2: Zur Nichtanwendung vgl. § 3 Abs. 2 +++)\n\n(1) Das Fernstraßen-Bundesamt tritt im Rahmen seiner Zuständigkeiten nach § 2 in vor dem 1. Januar 2021 eingeleitete Verwaltungsverfahren ein, soweit in den Absätzen 2 und 3 nichts Abweichendes bestimmt ist.\n\n(2) § 2 Absatz 2 findet keine Anwendung auf Planfeststellungs- oder Plangenehmigungsverfahren, die zum 1. Januar 2021 bereits eingeleitet worden sind. Diese werden von den Ländern fortgeführt.\n\n(3) Abweichend von § 2 Absatz 2 ist eine nach Landesrecht zuständige Behörde Anhörungs- und Planfeststellungsbehörde in Planfeststellungsverfahren, Plangenehmigungsbehörde in Plangenehmigungsverfahren, die auf der Grundlage des § 17 des Bundesfernstraßengesetzes für den Bau oder die Änderung von Bundesautobahnen durchgeführt werden, sowie zuständig für die Entscheidung nach § 74 Absatz 7 des Verwaltungsverfahrensgesetzes, wenn ein Land dies beim Fernstraßen-Bundesamt beantragt. Die beantragte Übernahme wird mit Beginn des zweiten auf die Antragstellung folgenden Kalenderjahres wirksam und das jeweilige Land trägt ab diesem Zeitpunkt seine Kosten. Sie ist in einem vom Land zu bestimmenden Amtsblatt zu veröffentlichen. Die Antragstellung eines Landes erfolgt stets für alle Bundesautobahnen, die in dem jeweiligen Land liegen, und ist nur einmalig möglich. Erfolgt die Antragstellung mit Wirkung zum 1. Januar 2021, tritt die Zuständigkeit des Fernstraßen-Bundesamtes nach § 2 Absatz 2 nicht ein. Erfolgt eine Antragstellung mit Wirkung zu einem späteren Zeitpunkt, gilt Absatz 2 entsprechend, so dass die nach dem 1. Januar 2021 bis zum Zeitpunkt der wirksamen Übernahme eingeleiteten Verfahren vom Fernstraßen-Bundesamt fortgeführt werden und das jeweilige Land die Kosten ab dem Zeitpunkt der wirksamen Übernahme erstattet. Bei Zuständigkeit einer nach Landesrecht zuständigen Behörde ist das Bundesministerium für Verkehr und digitale Infrastruktur berechtigt, die Zuständigkeit für die Befugnisse nach § 2 Absatz 2 dem Fernstraßen- Bundesamt zu übertragen, sofern es tatsächliche Anhaltspunkte gibt, dass ein Land seiner Aufgabe zur Schaffung von Baurecht nach den §§ 17 bis 17e des Bundesfernstraßengesetzes nicht ordnungsgemäß nachkommt. Die Übertragung der Befugnisse auf das Fernstraßen-Bundesamt wird mit Beginn des zweiten auf die Entscheidung des Bundesministeriums für Verkehr und digitale Infrastruktur folgenden Kalenderjahres wirksam und der Bund trägt ab diesem Zeitpunkt die Kosten. Absatz 2 gilt entsprechend, so dass die bis zum Zeitpunkt der wirksamen Übertragung auf das Fernstraßen-Bundesamt eingeleiteten Verfahren von dem jeweiligen Land fortgeführt werden und das Fernstraßen-Bundesamt dem jeweiligen Land die Kosten ab dem Zeitpunkt der wirksamen Übertragung erstattet. Das Bundesministerium für Verkehr und digitale Infrastruktur wird den Zeitpunkt der wirksamen Übertragung im Bundesanzeiger veröffentlichen.\n\n(1) Das Bundesministerium für Verkehr und digitale Infrastruktur wird ermächtigt, durch Rechtsverordnung mit Zustimmung des Bundesrates dem Fernstraßen-Bundesamt Aufgaben zur Durchführung des Straßenverkehrsgesetzes und der auf Grund des Straßenverkehrsgesetzes erlassenen Rechtsverordnungen zu übertragen und dabei den Übergang laufender Verfahren auf das Fernstraßen-Bundesamt zu regeln. Übertragbar sind straßenverkehrsrechtliche Aufgaben auf Bundesautobahnen in der Baulast des Bundes und auf Bundesstraßen in Bundesverwaltung, die\n\n1. im Zusammenhang mit dem Bau, Betrieb oder der Erhaltung der vorgenannten Straßen stehen,\n\nEin Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz ‒ www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n## Fußnote\n\n## § 3 Übergangsregelung, Antragsrecht der Länder\n\n## § 4 Straßenverkehrsrechtliche Aufgaben des Fernstraßen-Bundesamtes\n\n- Seite 2 von 3 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9469620814112965, + "doc_id": "b37a76240e3dedd1d870d4526c8a9031ab949ba116ad9b0bae5b6afcda208f2e", + "edit_distance": 0.11139896373056994, + "f1_score": 0.9968051118210862, + "meteor": 0.9939621381088098, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz - www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n## Anordnung über Feuerungsanlagen, Anlagen zur Verteilung von Wärme und zur Warmwasserversorgung sowie Brennstofflagerung (Feuerungsanordnung - FeuAO)\n\nFeuAO\n\nAusfertigungsdatum: 10.09.1990\n\nVollzitat:\n\n\"Feuerungsanordnung vom 10. September 1990 (GBl. DDR 1990 I S. 1557)\"\n\n## Fußnote\n\n(+++ Textnachweis Geltung ab: 3.10.1990 +++)\n\nIn den beigetretenen Ländern fortgeltendes Recht der ehem. Deutschen Demokratischen Republik gem. Art. 3 Nr. 32 Buchst. b EinigVtrVbg v. 18.9.1990 II 1239 nach Maßgabe d. Art. 9 EinigVtr v. 31.8.1990 iVm Art. 1 G v. 23.9.1990 II 885, 889 mWv 3.10.1990.\n\n## Eingangsformel\n\nAuf Grund § 82 Abs. 1 des Gesetzes vom 20. Juli 1990 über die Bauordnung (BauO) (GBl. I Nr. 50 S. 929) in Verbindung mit § 2 Abs. 2 des Gesetzes vom 20. Juli 1990 zur Einführung des Gesetzes vom 20. Juli 1990 über die Bauordnung (BauO) (GBl. I Nr. 50 S. 950) wird folgendes angeordnet:\n\n## Inhaltsverzeichnis\n\n- § 1 Geltungsbereich, Begriffe\n- § 2 Feuerstätten, Anlagen zur Verteilung von Wärme und zur Warmwasserversorgung\n- § 3 Verbindungsstücke\n- § 4 Schornsteine und andere Abgasanlagen\n- § 5 Ableitung der Abgase\n- § 6 Rohrleitungen\n- § 7 Aufstellräume von Feuerstätten\n- § 8 Feuerungsanlagen besonderer Art\n- § 9 Inkrafttreten\n\n## § 1 Geltungsbereich, Begriffe\n\n(1) Diese Anordnung gilt für\n\n- 1. Feuerstätten, Verbindungsstücke, Schornsteine oder andere Abgasanlagen (Feuerungsanlagen),\n- 2. Anlagen zur Verteilung von Wärme,\n- 3. Anlagen zur Warmwasserversorgung,\n- 4. Leitungen für Brennstoffe,\n- 5. Aufstellräume von Feuerstätten.\n\n(2) Diese Anordnung gilt nicht für Dampfkesselanlagen mit Dampfkesseln der Gruppe IV im Sinne der Verordnung über Dampfkesselanlagen (Dampfkesselverordnung - DampfkV) vom 27. Februar 1980 (BGBl. I S. 173) mit der Änderung vom 16. Dezember 1986 (BGBl. I S. 2441).\n\n- (3) Im Sinne dieser Anordnung sind\n\n- Seite 1 von 6 -", + "recall": 0.9936305732484076, + "true_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz ‒ www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n# Anordnung über Feuerungsanlagen, Anlagen zur Verteilung von Wärme und zur Warmwasserversorgung sowie Brennstofflagerung (Feuerungsanordnung - FeuAO)\n\nFeuAO\n\nAusfertigungsdatum: 10.09.1990\n\nVollzitat:\n\n\"Feuerungsanordnung vom 10. September 1990 (GBl. DDR 1990 I S. 1557)\"\n\n(+++ Textnachweis Geltung ab: 3.10.1990 +++)\n\nIn den beigetretenen Ländern fortgeltendes Recht der ehem. Deutschen Demokratischen Republik gem. Art. 3 Nr. 32 Buchst. b EinigVtrVbg v. 18.9.1990 II 1239 nach Maßgabe d. Art. 9 EinigVtr v. 31.8.1990 iVm Art. 1 G v. 23.9.1990 II 885, 889 mWv 3.10.1990.\n\nAuf Grund § 82 Abs. 1 des Gesetzes vom 20. Juli 1990 über die Bauordnung (BauO) (GBl. I Nr. 50 S. 929) in Verbindung mit § 2 Abs. 2 des Gesetzes vom 20. Juli 1990 zur Einführung des Gesetzes vom 20. Juli 1990 über die Bauordnung (BauO) (GBl. I Nr. 50 S. 950) wird folgendes angeordnet:\n\n## Inhaltsverzeichnis\n\n## Eingangsformel\n\n## Fußnote\n\n- § 1 Geltungsbereich, Begriffe\n\n- § 2 Feuerstätten, Anlagen zur Verteilung von Wärme und zur Warmwasserversorgung\n\n- § 3 Verbindungsstücke\n\n- § 4 Schornsteine und andere Abgasanlagen\n\n- § 5 Ableitung der Abgase\n\n- § 6 Rohrleitungen\n\n- § 7 Aufstellräume von Feuerstätten\n\n- § 8 Feuerungsanlagen besonderer Art\n\n- § 9 Inkrafttreten\n\n- 1. Feuerstätten, Verbindungsstücke, Schornsteine oder andere Abgasanlagen (Feuerungsanlagen),\n\n- 2. Anlagen zur Verteilung von Wärme,\n\n- 3. Anlagen zur Warmwasserversorgung,\n\n- 4. Leitungen für Brennstoffe,\n\n- 5. Aufstellräume von Feuerstätten.\n\n(1) Diese Anordnung gilt für\n\n(2) Diese Anordnung gilt nicht für Dampfkesselanlagen mit Dampfkesseln der Gruppe IV im Sinne der Verordnung über Dampfkesselanlagen (Dampfkesselverordnung - DampfkV) vom 27. Februar 1980 (BGBl. I S. 173) mit der Änderung vom 16. Dezember 1986 (BGBl. I S. 2441).\n\n(3) Im Sinne dieser Anordnung sind\n\n## § 1 Geltungsbereich, Begriffe\n\n- Seite 1 von 6 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9521941474980715, + "doc_id": "500aacd8376bf042492e8e8cf32e2223c2b7be57d3e5e324ad72991d1b2f09b2", + "edit_distance": 0.6566901408450704, + "f1_score": 0.997624703087886, + "meteor": 0.8723484738799365, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Mehrere Schuldner haften als Gesamtschuldner.\n\n## § 9 Entrichtung der Mautgebühr\n\n- (1) Der Schuldner hat die Mautgebühr in der sich aus der Rechtsverordnung nach § 5 Abs. 1 Satz 1 oder der Genehmigung nach § 6 Abs. 1 jeweils ergebenden Höhe spätestens bei Beginn der mautgebührenpflichtigen Benutzung der Strecke oder im Falle einer Stundung zu dem festgesetzten Zeitpunkt an den Privaten zu entrichten.\n- (2) Der Private hat dem Schuldner die Entrichtung der Mautgebühr durch Barzahlung zu ermöglichen. Darüber hinaus darf er die Mautgebühr im Einzugs- oder automatisierten Verfahren erheben. Auf Verlangen des Schuldners ist eine Quittung zu erteilen.\n- (3) Wird die Mautgebühr im Einzugsverfahren oder im automatisierten Verfahren entrichtet, darf der Private Daten nur verarbeiten, soweit dies erforderlich ist, um mautgebührenpflichtige Benutzungen zu ermöglichen (Berechnungsdaten), abzurechnen (Abrechnungsdaten) und zu kontrollieren (Kontrolldaten). Es sind\n- 1. Berechnungsdaten:\n- a) das Kennzeichen des Fahrzeugs,\n- b) die für die Mautgebührenhöhe maßgeblichen Merkmale des Fahrzeugs oder der Fahrzeugkombination,\n- c) die Höhe der zu entrichtenden Mautgebühr;\n- 2. Abrechnungsdaten:\n- a) Ort und Zeit der mautgebührenpflichtigen Benutzung der Strecke,\n- b) Zeitpunkt und Höhe der entrichteten oder noch zu entrichtenden Mautgebühr,\n- c) sonstige Daten, die für die Abwicklung der durch Rechtsverordnung nach Absatz 6 zugelassenen Zahlungs- und Abrechnungsverfahren erforderlich sind;\n- 3. Kontrolldaten:\n- a) das Kennzeichen und das Bild des Fahrzeugs,\n- b) die für die Mautgebührenhöhe maßgeblichen Merkmale des Fahrzeugs oder der Fahrzeugkombination,\n- c) die Höhe der entrichteten und der zu entrichtenden Mautgebühr,\n- d) Ort und Zeit der mautgebührenpflichtigen Benutzung der Strecke,\n- e) der Name der Person, die die Strecke benutzt.\n- (4) Der Schuldner hat bei der Mautgebührenerhebung nach Maßgabe des § 10 mitzuwirken. Er hat die technischen Einrichtungen zur Mautgebührenerhebung ordnungsgemäß zu benutzen und die für die Mautgebührenerhebung maßgeblichen Tatsachen anzugeben.\n- (5) Hat der Private mit einer anderen Stelle einen Vertrag über die Be- und Abrechnung der Mautgebühr geschlossen, sind die Vorschriften über Datenverarbeitung im Auftrag anzuwenden. Die Absätze 2 und 3 gelten für den Auftragnehmer entsprechend.\n- (6) Das Bundesministerium für Verkehr und digitale Infrastruktur erlässt nach Anhörung der jeweils zuständigen obersten Landesstraßenbaubehörde durch Rechtsverordnung mit Zustimmung des Bundesrates ergänzende Bestimmungen über Art und Umfang der Verarbeitung der Daten nach Absatz 3 für die vom Privaten jeweils eingesetzten Verfahren.\n\n## § 10 Nachweis und Kontrolle der Mautgebührenentrichtung\n\n- (1) Auf Verlangen des Privaten hat der Schuldner die ordnungsgemäße Entrichtung der Mautgebühr nachzuweisen. Hat der Schuldner im Voraus die Mautgebühr entrichtet und hierüber Belege erhalten, so hat er diese bei der Benutzung mitzuführen und auf Verlangen den zur Kontrolle befugten Personen zur Prüfung auszuhändigen.\n- (2) Hat der Schuldner die Mautgebühr nicht oder nicht in voller Höhe entrichtet, darf der Private die Kontrolldaten zum Zweck der Vollstreckung der Mautgebühr, der Einziehung der Mautgebühr oder zur Erstellung des Gebührenbescheids verarbeiten.\n\n- Seite 5 von 6 -\n\nEin Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz - www.gesetze-im-internet.de", + "recall": 0.995260663507109, + "true_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz ‒ www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\nMehrere Schuldner haften als Gesamtschuldner.\n\n(1) Der Schuldner hat die Mautgebühr in der sich aus der Rechtsverordnung nach § 5 Abs. 1 Satz 1 oder der Genehmigung nach § 6 Abs. 1 jeweils ergebenden Höhe spätestens bei Beginn der mautgebührenpflichtigen Benutzung der Strecke oder im Falle einer Stundung zu dem festgesetzten Zeitpunkt an den Privaten zu entrichten.\n\n(2) Der Private hat dem Schuldner die Entrichtung der Mautgebühr durch Barzahlung zu ermöglichen. Darüber hinaus darf er die Mautgebühr im Einzugs- oder automatisierten Verfahren erheben. Auf Verlangen des Schuldners ist eine Quittung zu erteilen.\n\n(3) Wird die Mautgebühr im Einzugsverfahren oder im automatisierten Verfahren entrichtet, darf der Private Daten nur verarbeiten, soweit dies erforderlich ist, um mautgebührenpflichtige Benutzungen zu ermöglichen (Berechnungsdaten), abzurechnen (Abrechnungsdaten) und zu kontrollieren (Kontrolldaten). Es sind\n\n(4) Der Schuldner hat bei der Mautgebührenerhebung nach Maßgabe des § 10 mitzuwirken. Er hat die technischen Einrichtungen zur Mautgebührenerhebung ordnungsgemäß zu benutzen und die für die Mautgebührenerhebung maßgeblichen Tatsachen anzugeben.\n\n(5) Hat der Private mit einer anderen Stelle einen Vertrag über die Be- und Abrechnung der Mautgebühr geschlossen, sind die Vorschriften über Datenverarbeitung im Auftrag anzuwenden. Die Absätze 2 und 3 gelten für den Auftragnehmer entsprechend.\n\n(6) Das Bundesministerium für Verkehr und digitale Infrastruktur erlässt nach Anhörung der jeweils zuständigen obersten Landesstraßenbaubehörde durch Rechtsverordnung mit Zustimmung des Bundesrates ergänzende Bestimmungen über Art und Umfang der Verarbeitung der Daten nach Absatz 3 für die vom Privaten jeweils eingesetzten Verfahren.\n\n(1) Auf Verlangen des Privaten hat der Schuldner die ordnungsgemäße Entrichtung der Mautgebühr nachzuweisen. Hat der Schuldner im Voraus die Mautgebühr entrichtet und hierüber Belege erhalten, so hat er diese bei der Benutzung mitzuführen und auf Verlangen den zur Kontrolle befugten Personen zur Prüfung auszuhändigen.\n\n(2) Hat der Schuldner die Mautgebühr nicht oder nicht in voller Höhe entrichtet, darf der Private die Kontrolldaten zum Zweck der Vollstreckung der Mautgebühr, der Einziehung der Mautgebühr oder zur Erstellung des Gebührenbescheids verarbeiten.\n\n## § 10 Nachweis und Kontrolle der Mautgebührenentrichtung\n\n## § 9 Entrichtung der Mautgebühr\n\n- 1. Berechnungsdaten:\n\n- a) das Kennzeichen des Fahrzeugs,\n\n- b) die für die Mautgebührenhöhe maßgeblichen Merkmale des Fahrzeugs oder der Fahrzeugkombination,\n\n- c) die Höhe der zu entrichtenden Mautgebühr;\n\n- 2. Abrechnungsdaten:\n\n- a) Ort und Zeit der mautgebührenpflichtigen Benutzung der Strecke,\n\n- b) Zeitpunkt und Höhe der entrichteten oder noch zu entrichtenden Mautgebühr,\n\n- c) sonstige Daten, die für die Abwicklung der durch Rechtsverordnung nach Absatz 6 zugelassenen Zahlungs- und Abrechnungsverfahren erforderlich sind;\n\n- 3. Kontrolldaten:\n\n- a) das Kennzeichen und das Bild des Fahrzeugs,\n\n- b) die für die Mautgebührenhöhe maßgeblichen Merkmale des Fahrzeugs oder der Fahrzeugkombination,\n\n- c) die Höhe der entrichteten und der zu entrichtenden Mautgebühr,\n\n- d) Ort und Zeit der mautgebührenpflichtigen Benutzung der Strecke,\n\n- e) der Name der Person, die die Strecke benutzt.\n\n- Seite 5 von 6 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.982646906825102, + "doc_id": "a65d07ce144ba8ec5713dabc8aa3a8ef65614869d942b6554b39636976e8c0db", + "edit_distance": 0.00784313725490196, + "f1_score": 0.9980353634577603, + "meteor": 0.9974360933812725, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz - www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n## Verordnung über die Prüfung zum anerkannten Abschluss Geprüfter Floristmeister oder Geprüfte Floristmeisterin (Floristmeister-Fortbildungsprüfungsverordnung - FloristMFPrV)\n\nFloristMFPrV\n\nAusfertigungsdatum: 09.12.2019\n\nVollzitat:\n\n\"Floristmeister-Fortbildungsprüfungsverordnung vom 9. Dezember 2019 (BGBl. I S. 2153, 2223)\"\n\nErsetzt V 806-21-7-62 v. 5.4.2001 I 534 (FloristMPrV)\n\n## Fußnote\n\n(+++ Diese Verordnung ist ab dem 1.10.2020 anzuwenden gem. § 2 V 9.12.2019 I 2153, 2240 (FortbVenÄndV6AnwV) +++) (+++ Textnachweis ab: 17.12.2019 +++) (+++ Zur Anwendung vgl. § 7 Satz 4 +++)\n\nDie V wurde als Artikel 20 der V v. 9.12.2019 I 2153 vom Bundesministerium für Bildung und Forschung nach Anhörung des Hauptausschusses des Bundesinstituts für Berufsbildung im Einvernehmen mit dem Bundesministerium für Wirtschaft und Energie, dem Bundesministerium für Verkehr und digitale Infrastruktur, dem Bundesministerium für Umwelt, Naturschutz und nukleare Sicherheit, dem Bundesministerium des Innern, für Bau und Heimat, dem Bundesministerium für Gesundheit, dem Bundesministerium für Arbeit und Soziales und dem Bundesministerium für Justiz und Verbraucherschutz beschlossen. Sie ist gem. Art. 85 Satz 1 dieser V am 17.12.2019 in Kraft getreten.\n\n## § 1 Ziel der Prüfung und Bezeichnung des Abschlusses\n\n- (1) Zum Nachweis von Kenntnissen, Fertigkeiten und Erfahrungen, die durch die berufliche Fortbildung zum Geprüften Floristmeister oder zur Geprüften Floristmeisterin erworben worden sind, kann die zuständige Stelle eine Prüfung nach den §§ 2 bis 10 durchführen.\n- (2) Durch die Prüfung ist festzustellen, ob die zu prüfende Person die notwendige Qualifikation besitzt, folgende im Zusammenhang stehende Aufgaben eines Floristmeisters als Fach- und Führungskraft in ihrem Aufgabenbereich, insbesondere beim Planen, Anfertigen und Vermarkten von floristischen Werkstücken wahrzunehmen:\n- 1. Disponieren, Einkaufen, Verwalten und Einsetzen von Waren; Beachten von Qualitätsanforderungen und von einschlägigen Rechtsvorschriften; Veranlassen der sachgerechten Lagerung von Waren, Werkstoffen und Hilfsmitteln; Überprüfen des Bestandes; Veranlassen der Instandhaltung von Einrichtungen, Maschinen und Geräten;\n- 2. selbstständiges Planen und Ausführen von gestalterisch-technischen Arbeiten; Durchführen von Kostenrechnung und Preiskalkulation; Überwachen der Kostenentwicklung sowie der Arbeitsleistung; Sicherstellen der Kontrollen ein- und ausgehender Waren, der Werkstoffe, Hilfsmittel und Werkstücke hinsichtlich ihrer Quantität und Qualität;\n- 3. Einsetzen des Personals zur Gewährleistung eines termingerechten und wirtschaftlichen Arbeitens; Hinwirken auf eine reibungslose Zusammenarbeit im Betriebsablauf; Zusammenarbeit mit anderen Betriebsteilen und Betrieben;\n- 4. Erstellen eines Marketingkonzeptes, Planen und Durchführen von Werbemaßnahmen; Beraten von Kunden und Führen von Verkaufsgesprächen;\n- 5. Übertragen von Aufgaben unter Berücksichtigung fachspezifischer, wirtschaftlicher und sozialer Aspekte auf die Mitarbeiter entsprechend ihrer Qualifikation, Leistungsfähigkeit und Eignung; Einarbeiten, Motivieren und Anleiten der Mitarbeiter; berufliche Aus- und Weiterbildung der Mitarbeiter; Zusammenarbeiten mit der Geschäftsführung und dem Betriebsrat;\n\n- Seite 1 von 9 -", + "recall": 0.996078431372549, + "true_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz ‒ www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n# Verordnung über die Prüfung zum anerkannten Abschluss Geprüfter Floristmeister oder Geprüfte Floristmeisterin (Floristmeister-Fortbildungsprüfungsverordnung - FloristMFPrV)\n\nFloristMFPrV\n\nAusfertigungsdatum: 09.12.2019\n\nVollzitat:\n\n\"Floristmeister-Fortbildungsprüfungsverordnung vom 9. Dezember 2019 (BGBl. I S. 2153, 2223)\"\n\nErsetzt V 806-21-7-62 v. 5.4.2001 I 534 (FloristMPrV)\n\n## Fußnote\n\n(+++ Diese Verordnung ist ab dem 1.10.2020 anzuwenden gem. § 2 V 9.12.2019 I 2153, 2240 (FortbVenÄndV6AnwV) +++) (+++ Textnachweis ab: 17.12.2019 +++) (+++ Zur Anwendung vgl. § 7 Satz 4 +++)\n\nDie V wurde als Artikel 20 der V v. 9.12.2019 I 2153 vom Bundesministerium für Bildung und Forschung nach Anhörung des Hauptausschusses des Bundesinstituts für Berufsbildung im Einvernehmen mit dem Bundesministerium für Wirtschaft und Energie, dem Bundesministerium für Verkehr und digitale Infrastruktur, dem Bundesministerium für Umwelt, Naturschutz und nukleare Sicherheit, dem Bundesministerium des Innern, für Bau und Heimat, dem Bundesministerium für Gesundheit, dem Bundesministerium für Arbeit und Soziales und dem Bundesministerium für Justiz und Verbraucherschutz beschlossen. Sie ist gem. Art. 85 Satz 1 dieser V am 17.12.2019 in Kraft getreten.\n\n## § 1 Ziel der Prüfung und Bezeichnung des Abschlusses\n\n(1) Zum Nachweis von Kenntnissen, Fertigkeiten und Erfahrungen, die durch die berufliche Fortbildung zum Geprüften Floristmeister oder zur Geprüften Floristmeisterin erworben worden sind, kann die zuständige Stelle eine Prüfung nach den §§ 2 bis 10 durchführen.\n\n(2) Durch die Prüfung ist festzustellen, ob die zu prüfende Person die notwendige Qualifikation besitzt, folgende im Zusammenhang stehende Aufgaben eines Floristmeisters als Fach- und Führungskraft in ihrem Aufgabenbereich, insbesondere beim Planen, Anfertigen und Vermarkten von floristischen Werkstücken wahrzunehmen:\n\n- 1. Disponieren, Einkaufen, Verwalten und Einsetzen von Waren; Beachten von Qualitätsanforderungen und von einschlägigen Rechtsvorschriften; Veranlassen der sachgerechten Lagerung von Waren, Werkstoffen und Hilfsmitteln; Überprüfen des Bestandes; Veranlassen der Instandhaltung von Einrichtungen, Maschinen und Geräten;\n\n- 2. selbstständiges Planen und Ausführen von gestalterisch-technischen Arbeiten; Durchführen von Kostenrechnung und Preiskalkulation; Überwachen der Kostenentwicklung sowie der Arbeitsleistung; Sicherstellen der Kontrollen ein- und ausgehender Waren, der Werkstoffe, Hilfsmittel und Werkstücke hinsichtlich ihrer Quantität und Qualität;\n\n- 3. Einsetzen des Personals zur Gewährleistung eines termingerechten und wirtschaftlichen Arbeitens; Hinwirken auf eine reibungslose Zusammenarbeit im Betriebsablauf; Zusammenarbeit mit anderen Betriebsteilen und Betrieben;\n\n- 4. Erstellen eines Marketingkonzeptes, Planen und Durchführen von Werbemaßnahmen; Beraten von Kunden und Führen von Verkaufsgesprächen;\n\n- 5. Übertragen von Aufgaben unter Berücksichtigung fachspezifischer, wirtschaftlicher und sozialer Aspekte auf die Mitarbeiter entsprechend ihrer Qualifikation, Leistungsfähigkeit und Eignung; Einarbeiten, Motivieren und Anleiten der Mitarbeiter; berufliche Aus- und Weiterbildung der Mitarbeiter; Zusammenarbeiten mit der Geschäftsführung und dem Betriebsrat;\n\n- Seite 1 von 9 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0030738117413002504, + "doc_id": "4b34206bf550bfba3f13171ea1f77c83a38a4e769e7d38a7bc285314c3c3f113", + "edit_distance": 0.8717948717948718, + "f1_score": 0.3571428571428571, + "meteor": 0.14385907790650154, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz - www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n## Abschnitt 1\n\n- Seite 2 von 17 -", + "recall": 0.21739130434782608, + "true_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz ‒ www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n- § 8 Art und Umfang der Risikotragfähigkeitsinformationen\n\n- § 9 Turnus, Frist und Verfahren zur Einreichung der Risikotragfähigkeitsinformationen\n\n- § 10 Risikotragfähigkeitsinformationen von Kreditinstituten\n\n- § 11 Risikotragfähigkeitsinformationen auf zusammengefasster Ebene\n\n- § 12 Kreditinstitute und Gruppen mit erhöhter Meldefrequenz\n\n## Abschnitt 4 Schlussvorschrift\n\n- § 13 (weggefallen)\n\n- Anlage 1 GVKI\n\n- Anlage 2 GVKIP\n\n- Anlage 3 SAKI\n\n- Anlage 4 GVFDI\n\n- Anlage 5 STFDI\n\n- Anlage 6 QGV\n\n- Anlage 7 QGVP\n\n- Anlage 8 QV 1\n\n- Anlage 9 QV 2\n\n- Anlage 10 (weggefallen)\n\n- Anlage 11 (weggefallen)\n\n- Anlage 12 (weggefallen)\n\n- Anlage 13 QSA\n\n- Anlage 13a EKRQU\n\n- Anlage 14 DBL\n\n- Anlage 15 GRP\n\n- Anlage 16 STA\n\n- Anlage 17 RTFK\n\n- Anlage 18 STKK\n\n- Anlage 19 RDP-R\n\n- Anlage 20 RDP-BI\n\n- Anlage 21 RDP-BH\n\n- Anlage 22 RDP-BW\n\n- Anlage 23 RSK\n\n- Anlage 24 STG\n\n- Anlage 25 KPL\n\n- Anlage 26 ILAAP\n\n## Abschnitt 1\n\n- Seite 2 von 17 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.835262674111884, + "doc_id": "4bd85888236e9ef4d2b70d52f72cb6c11c4c8329b4e54097ec4754d427f4d5cf", + "edit_distance": 0.502092050209205, + "f1_score": 0.9833333333333334, + "meteor": 0.972943462120554, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "PDF-Dokument wird in eigenem Fenster angezeigt\n\nPDF-Dokument wird in eigenem Fenster angezeigt\n\n## Anlage 16 (zu § 11 Absatz 1)\n\n(Fundstelle: BGBl. I 2014, 2343)\n\nPDF-Dokument wird in eigenem Fenster angezeigt\n\n## Anlage 17 (zu § 10 Absatz 1 und § 11 Absatz 1)\n\n(Fundstelle: BGBl. I 2014, 2344)\n\nPDF-Dokument wird in eigenem Fenster angezeigt\n\n## Anlage 18\n\n(Fundstelle: BGBl. I 2020, 1897 - 1898)\n\nPDF-Dokument wird in eigenem Fenster angezeigt\n\nPDF-Dokument wird in eigenem Fenster angezeigt\n\n## Anlage 19\n\n(Fundstelle: BGBl. I 2020, 1899 - 1901)\n\nPDF-Dokument wird in eigenem Fenster angezeigt\n\nPDF-Dokument wird in eigenem Fenster angezeigt\n\nPDF-Dokument wird in eigenem Fenster angezeigt\n\n## Anlage 20\n\n(Fundstelle: BGBl. I 2020, 1902 - 1904)\n\nPDF-Dokument wird in eigenem Fenster angezeigt PDF-Dokument wird in eigenem Fenster angezeigt PDF-Dokument wird in eigenem Fenster angezeigt\n\n## Anlage 21\n\n(Fundstelle: BGBl. I 2020, 1905 - 1907)\n\nPDF-Dokument wird in eigenem Fenster angezeigt PDF-Dokument wird in eigenem Fenster angezeigt\n\nPDF-Dokument wird in eigenem Fenster angezeigt\n\n## Anlage 22\n\n(Fundstelle: BGBl. I 2020, 1908 - 1909)\n\n- Seite 15 von 17 -\n\nEin Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz - www.gesetze-im-internet.de", + "recall": 0.9672131147540983, + "true_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz ‒ www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n## Anlage 16 (zu § 11 Absatz 1)\n\n## Anlage 17 (zu § 10 Absatz 1 und § 11 Absatz 1)\n\n## Anlage 18\n\n## Anlage 19\n\n## Anlage 20\n\n## Anlage 21\n\n## Anlage 22\n\nPDF-Dokument wird in eigenem Fenster angezeigt\n\nPDF-Dokument wird in eigenem Fenster angezeigt\n\n(Fundstelle: BGBl. I 2014, 2343)\n\nPDF-Dokument wird in eigenem Fenster angezeigt\n\n(Fundstelle: BGBl. I 2014, 2344)\n\nPDF-Dokument wird in eigenem Fenster angezeigt\n\n(Fundstelle: BGBl. I 2020, 1897 – 1898)\n\nPDF-Dokument wird in eigenem Fenster angezeigt\n\nPDF-Dokument wird in eigenem Fenster angezeigt\n\n(Fundstelle: BGBl. I 2020, 1899 – 1901)\n\nPDF-Dokument wird in eigenem Fenster angezeigt\n\nPDF-Dokument wird in eigenem Fenster angezeigt\n\nPDF-Dokument wird in eigenem Fenster angezeigt\n\nPDF-Dokument wird in eigenem Fenster angezeigt\n\n(Fundstelle: BGBl. I 2020, 1902 – 1904)\n\nPDF-Dokument wird in eigenem Fenster angezeigt\n\nPDF-Dokument wird in eigenem Fenster angezeigt\n\n(Fundstelle: BGBl. I 2020, 1905 – 1907)\n\nPDF-Dokument wird in eigenem Fenster angezeigt\n\nPDF-Dokument wird in eigenem Fenster angezeigt\n\nPDF-Dokument wird in eigenem Fenster angezeigt\n\n(Fundstelle: BGBl. I 2020, 1908 – 1909)\n\n- Seite 15 von 17 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8962022530684102, + "doc_id": "4016da527acc6ce6d8e8db50d433a525538844391c450e465f14436f5fe75def", + "edit_distance": 0.25745682888540034, + "f1_score": 0.9896373056994819, + "meteor": 0.9675068943177842, + "precision": 0.9947916666666666, + "pred_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz - www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n- 3. Sonstige Angaben - SAKI (Anlage 3) und\n- 4. Vermögensstatus nach Maßgabe von Absatz 2.\n- (2) Die Angaben zum Vermögensstatus nach Absatz 1 Nummer 4 gelten für Kreditinstitute, die auf Grund einer Anordnung nach § 18 des Gesetzes über die Deutsche Bundesbank oder nach Artikel 5 des Protokolls über die Satzung des Europäischen Systems der Zentralbanken und der Europäischen Zentralbank vom 7. Februar 1992 (ABl. C 191 vom 29.7.1992, S. 68) in der jeweils geltenden Fassung Daten zur Monatlichen Bilanzstatistik melden, mit diesen Meldungen als eingereicht. Alle anderen Kreditinstitute haben die Angaben zum Vermögensstatus unter Verwendung des Formulars Vermögensstatus - STFDI (Anlage 5) einzureichen.\n- (3) Kreditinstitute, die nur das Garantiegeschäft im Sinne des § 1 Absatz 1 Satz 2 Nummer 8 des Kreditwesengesetzes betreiben, sind von der Pflicht, Finanzinformationen nach Absatz 1 einzureichen, befreit.\n- (4) Kreditinstitute im Sinne des § 53b des Kreditwesengesetzes sind von der Pflicht, Finanzinformationen nach Absatz 1 Nummer 1, 2 und 3 einzureichen, befreit.\n- (5) Kreditinstitute im Sinne des § 53 des Kreditwesengesetzes und Kreditinstitute im Sinne des § 53c Absatz 1 Nummer 2 des Kreditwesengesetzes sind von der Pflicht, Finanzinformationen nach Absatz 1 Nummer 2 einzureichen, befreit.\n- (6) Kreditinstitute, die Teil einer Institutsgruppe, einer Finanzholding-Gruppe oder einer gemischten Finanzholding-Gruppe sind, sind von der Pflicht, Finanzinformationen nach Absatz 1 Nummer 2 einzureichen, befreit, wenn diese Finanzinformationen auf zusammengefasster Basis durch das übergeordnete Unternehmen der Gruppe unter Verwendung des Formulars Planangaben für die Gewinn- und Verlustrechnung - QGVP (Anlage 7) eingereicht werden. Die Befreiung nach Satz 1 gilt entsprechend, wenn das übergeordnete Unternehmen der Gruppe Finanzinformationen nach § 2 Absatz 1 Nummer 2 auf Basis internationaler Rechnungslegungsstandards erstellt und die Bundesanstalt diese Finanzinformationen für die jeweilige Gruppe auf sonstige Weise in gleichwertiger Form erhält. Die Entscheidung über die Gleichwertigkeit trifft die Bundesanstalt.\n\n## § 5 Finanzinformationen von Finanzdienstleistungsinstituten und Wertpapierhandelsbanken\n\n- (1) Finanzdienstleistungsinstitute und Wertpapierhandelsbanken haben die folgenden Finanzinformationen einzureichen und hierfür die folgenden Formulare aus den Anlagen der Verordnung zu verwenden:\n- 1. Gewinn- und Verlustrechnung - GVFDI (Anlage 4) und\n- 2. Vermögensstatus - STFDI (Anlage 5).\n- (2) Finanzdienstleistungsinstitute, die entweder über die Drittstaateneinlagenvermittlung oder über das Sortengeschäft hinaus keine weiteren nach dem Kreditwesengesetz erlaubnispflichtigen Geschäfte betreiben, sind von der Pflicht, Finanzinformationen nach Absatz 1 einzureichen, befreit.\n\n## § 6 Finanzinformationen auf zusammengefasster Basis\n\n- (1) Übergeordnete Unternehmen haben auf zusammengefasster Basis das Formular Sonstige Angaben - QSA (Anlage 13) einzureichen.\n- (2) Übergeordnete Unternehmen, deren Institutsgruppe, Finanzholding-Gruppe oder gemischte FinanzholdingGruppe kein CRR-Kreditinstitut im Sinne des § 1 Absatz 3d Satz 1 des Kreditwesengesetzes angehört, haben abweichend von Absatz 1 die folgenden Finanzinformationen auf zusammengefasster Basis einzureichen und hierfür die folgenden Formulare aus den Anlagen der Verordnung zu verwenden:\n- 1. Gewinn- und Verlustrechnung - QGV (Anlage 6),\n- 2. Vermögensstatus - Angaben zu den Aktiva - QV 1 (Anlage 8) und\n- 3. Vermögensstatus - Angaben zu den Passiva - QV 2 (Anlage 9).\n- (3) (weggefallen)\n\n## Fußnote\n\n(+++ § 6: Zur Anwendung vgl. § 8 Abs. 1 F v. 6.12.2013 u. § 13 Abs. 1 +++)\n\n- Seite 4 von 17 -", + "recall": 0.9845360824742269, + "true_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz ‒ www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n- 3. Sonstige Angaben – SAKI (Anlage 3) und\n\n- 4. Vermögensstatus nach Maßgabe von Absatz 2.\n\n(2) Die Angaben zum Vermögensstatus nach Absatz 1 Nummer 4 gelten für Kreditinstitute, die auf Grund einer Anordnung nach § 18 des Gesetzes über die Deutsche Bundesbank oder nach Artikel 5 des Protokolls über die Satzung des Europäischen Systems der Zentralbanken und der Europäischen Zentralbank vom 7. Februar 1992 (ABl. C 191 vom 29.7.1992, S. 68) in der jeweils geltenden Fassung Daten zur Monatlichen Bilanzstatistik melden, mit diesen Meldungen als eingereicht. Alle anderen Kreditinstitute haben die Angaben zum Vermögensstatus unter Verwendung des Formulars Vermögensstatus – STFDI (Anlage 5) einzureichen.\n\n(3) Kreditinstitute, die nur das Garantiegeschäft im Sinne des § 1 Absatz 1 Satz 2 Nummer 8 des Kreditwesengesetzes betreiben, sind von der Pflicht, Finanzinformationen nach Absatz 1 einzureichen, befreit.\n\n(4) Kreditinstitute im Sinne des § 53b des Kreditwesengesetzes sind von der Pflicht, Finanzinformationen nach Absatz 1 Nummer 1, 2 und 3 einzureichen, befreit.\n\n(5) Kreditinstitute im Sinne des § 53 des Kreditwesengesetzes und Kreditinstitute im Sinne des § 53c Absatz 1 Nummer 2 des Kreditwesengesetzes sind von der Pflicht, Finanzinformationen nach Absatz 1 Nummer 2 einzureichen, befreit.\n\n(6) Kreditinstitute, die Teil einer Institutsgruppe, einer Finanzholding-Gruppe oder einer gemischten Finanzholding-Gruppe sind, sind von der Pflicht, Finanzinformationen nach Absatz 1 Nummer 2 einzureichen, befreit, wenn diese Finanzinformationen auf zusammengefasster Basis durch das übergeordnete Unternehmen der Gruppe unter Verwendung des Formulars Planangaben für die Gewinn- und Verlustrechnung – QGVP (Anlage 7) eingereicht werden. Die Befreiung nach Satz 1 gilt entsprechend, wenn das übergeordnete Unternehmen der Gruppe Finanzinformationen nach § 2 Absatz 1 Nummer 2 auf Basis internationaler Rechnungslegungsstandards erstellt und die Bundesanstalt diese Finanzinformationen für die jeweilige Gruppe auf sonstige Weise in gleichwertiger Form erhält. Die Entscheidung über die Gleichwertigkeit trifft die Bundesanstalt.\n\n(1) Finanzdienstleistungsinstitute und Wertpapierhandelsbanken haben die folgenden Finanzinformationen einzureichen und hierfür die folgenden Formulare aus den Anlagen der Verordnung zu verwenden:\n\n(2) Finanzdienstleistungsinstitute, die entweder über die Drittstaateneinlagenvermittlung oder über das Sortengeschäft hinaus keine weiteren nach dem Kreditwesengesetz erlaubnispflichtigen Geschäfte betreiben, sind von der Pflicht, Finanzinformationen nach Absatz 1 einzureichen, befreit.\n\n(1) Übergeordnete Unternehmen haben auf zusammengefasster Basis das Formular Sonstige Angaben – QSA (Anlage 13) einzureichen.\n\n(2) Übergeordnete Unternehmen, deren Institutsgruppe, Finanzholding-Gruppe oder gemischte Finanzholding- Gruppe kein CRR-Kreditinstitut im Sinne des § 1 Absatz 3d Satz 1 des Kreditwesengesetzes angehört, haben abweichend von Absatz 1 die folgenden Finanzinformationen auf zusammengefasster Basis einzureichen und hierfür die folgenden Formulare aus den Anlagen der Verordnung zu verwenden:\n\n(3) (weggefallen)\n\n(+++ § 6: Zur Anwendung vgl. § 8 Abs. 1 F v. 6.12.2013 u. § 13 Abs. 1 +++)\n\n## § 5 Finanzinformationen von Finanzdienstleistungsinstituten und Wertpapierhandelsbanken\n\n## § 6 Finanzinformationen auf zusammengefasster Basis\n\n## Fußnote\n\n- 1. Gewinn- und Verlustrechnung – GVFDI (Anlage 4) und\n\n- 2. Vermögensstatus – STFDI (Anlage 5).\n\n- 1. Gewinn- und Verlustrechnung – QGV (Anlage 6),\n\n- 2. Vermögensstatus – Angaben zu den Aktiva – QV 1 (Anlage 8) und\n\n- 3. Vermögensstatus – Angaben zu den Passiva – QV 2 (Anlage 9).\n\n- Seite 4 von 17 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8942255541978509, + "doc_id": "925d72b096518f9f16e11698051412a9c1cb318e3aea7fb1c765c092b462adf1", + "edit_distance": 0.045454545454545456, + "f1_score": 0.9714285714285715, + "meteor": 0.9541331684188827, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz - www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n- Seite 26 von 78 -", + "recall": 0.9444444444444444, + "true_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz ‒ www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n- Seite 26 von 78 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9619541706466483, + "doc_id": "7526f675244aee850c27c0379aa42254443056b759c6c10328ce0161aaa0ff3c", + "edit_distance": 0.47216494845360824, + "f1_score": 0.9975550122249389, + "meteor": 0.9549439308627844, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz - www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n- g) fachbezogene Probleme und deren Lösungen darzustellen sowie seine Vorgehensweise zu begründen;\n- 2. für den Nachweis nach Nummer 1 sind folgende Tätigkeiten zugrunde zu legen:\n- a) Anfertigen und Prüfen eines funktionsfähigen Bauteils sowie\n- b) Anschließen und Prüfen eines elektrischen oder elektronischen Systems;\n- 3. der Prüfling soll ein Prüfungsprodukt herstellen, das aus mehreren Teilprodukten bestehen kann und einem Kundenauftrag entspricht;\n- 4. mit dem Prüfling soll ein auftragsbezogenes Fachgespräch über das Prüfungsprodukt geführt werden;\n- 5. die Prüfungszeit beträgt für das Prüfungsprodukt sechs Stunden und für das auftragsbezogene Fachgespräch höchstens 15 Minuten.\n\n(4) Für den Prüfungsbereich Auftragsplanung bestehen folgende Vorgaben:\n\n- 1. der Prüfling soll nachweisen, dass er in der Lage ist,\n- a) Arbeitsabläufe unter Beachtung der Werkstoffeigenschaften zu planen,\n- b) Arbeitssicherheits-, Umweltschutz- und Gesundheitsschutzbestimmungen zu berücksichtigen,\n- c) die für die Herstellung erforderlichen Bauteile, Werkzeuge, Maschinen und Hilfsmittel festzulegen und dabei die technischen Regeln und die Werkstoffeigenschaften zu beachten sowie\n- d) informationstechnische, technologische und mathematische Sachverhalte zu bewerten und Lösungswege darzustellen;\n- 2. der Prüfling soll Aufgaben schriftlich bearbeiten, die sich auf den Prüfungsbereich Arbeitsauftrag nach Absatz 3 beziehen;\n- 3. die Prüfungszeit beträgt 90 Minuten.\n\n## § 9 Teil 2 der Abschluss- oder Gesellenprüfung in der Fachrichtung Karosserieinstandhaltungstechnik\n\n- (1) Teil 2 der Abschluss- oder Gesellenprüfung erstreckt sich auf\n- 1. die in der Anlage genannten Fertigkeiten, Kenntnisse und Fähigkeiten sowie\n- 2. den Lehrstoff des Berufsschulunterrichts, soweit der Lehrstoff für die Berufsausbildung wesentlich ist.\n\n(2) In Teil 2 der Abschluss- oder Gesellenprüfung sollen Fertigkeiten, Kenntnisse und Fähigkeiten, die bereits Gegenstand von Teil 1 der Abschluss- oder Gesellenprüfung waren, nur insoweit einbezogen werden, als es für die Feststellung der beruflichen Handlungsfähigkeit erforderlich ist.\n\n(3) Teil 2 der Abschluss- oder Gesellenprüfung besteht aus folgenden Prüfungsbereichen:\n\n- 1. Kundenauftrag,\n- 2. Karosserieinstandhaltungstechnik sowie\n- 3. Wirtschafts- und Sozialkunde.\n\n(4) Für den Prüfungsbereich Kundenauftrag bestehen folgende Vorgaben:\n\n- 1. der Prüfling soll nachweisen, dass er in der Lage ist,\n- a) Arbeitsaufträge zu analysieren und Lösungen zu entwickeln,\n- b) Arbeitsabläufe selbständig zu planen und umzusetzen und dabei sowohl wirtschaftliche, technische, organisatorische, zeitliche und qualitätssichernde Vorgaben zu beachten als auch den Umweltschutz zu berücksichtigen,\n- c) Sicherheit und Gesundheitsschutz zu berücksichtigen,\n- d) Material zu disponieren,\n- e) fahrzeugtechnische Systeme außer Betrieb und in Betrieb zu nehmen,\n- f) Bauteile und Baugruppen zu trennen und zu verbinden,\n\n- Seite 4 von 24 -", + "recall": 0.9951219512195122, + "true_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz ‒ www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n- g) fachbezogene Probleme und deren Lösungen darzustellen sowie seine Vorgehensweise zu begründen;\n\n- 2. für den Nachweis nach Nummer 1 sind folgende Tätigkeiten zugrunde zu legen:\n\n- a) Anfertigen und Prüfen eines funktionsfähigen Bauteils sowie\n\n- b) Anschließen und Prüfen eines elektrischen oder elektronischen Systems;\n\n- 3. der Prüfling soll ein Prüfungsprodukt herstellen, das aus mehreren Teilprodukten bestehen kann und einem Kundenauftrag entspricht;\n\n- 4. mit dem Prüfling soll ein auftragsbezogenes Fachgespräch über das Prüfungsprodukt geführt werden;\n\n- 5. die Prüfungszeit beträgt für das Prüfungsprodukt sechs Stunden und für das auftragsbezogene Fachgespräch höchstens 15 Minuten.\n\n- 1. der Prüfling soll nachweisen, dass er in der Lage ist,\n\n- a) Arbeitsabläufe unter Beachtung der Werkstoffeigenschaften zu planen,\n\n- b) Arbeitssicherheits-, Umweltschutz- und Gesundheitsschutzbestimmungen zu berücksichtigen,\n\n- c) die für die Herstellung erforderlichen Bauteile, Werkzeuge, Maschinen und Hilfsmittel festzulegen und dabei die technischen Regeln und die Werkstoffeigenschaften zu beachten sowie\n\n- d) informationstechnische, technologische und mathematische Sachverhalte zu bewerten und Lösungswege darzustellen;\n\n- 2. der Prüfling soll Aufgaben schriftlich bearbeiten, die sich auf den Prüfungsbereich Arbeitsauftrag nach Absatz 3 beziehen;\n\n- 3. die Prüfungszeit beträgt 90 Minuten.\n\n- 1. die in der Anlage genannten Fertigkeiten, Kenntnisse und Fähigkeiten sowie\n\n- 2. den Lehrstoff des Berufsschulunterrichts, soweit der Lehrstoff für die Berufsausbildung wesentlich ist.\n\n- 1. Kundenauftrag,\n\n- 2. Karosserieinstandhaltungstechnik sowie\n\n- 3. Wirtschafts- und Sozialkunde.\n\n- a) Arbeitsaufträge zu analysieren und Lösungen zu entwickeln,\n\n- b) Arbeitsabläufe selbständig zu planen und umzusetzen und dabei sowohl wirtschaftliche, technische, organisatorische, zeitliche und qualitätssichernde Vorgaben zu beachten als auch den Umweltschutz zu berücksichtigen,\n\n- c) Sicherheit und Gesundheitsschutz zu berücksichtigen,\n\n- d) Material zu disponieren,\n\n- e) fahrzeugtechnische Systeme außer Betrieb und in Betrieb zu nehmen,\n\n- f) Bauteile und Baugruppen zu trennen und zu verbinden,\n\n- Seite 4 von 24 -\n\n(4) Für den Prüfungsbereich Kundenauftrag bestehen folgende Vorgaben:\n\n- 1. der Prüfling soll nachweisen, dass er in der Lage ist,\n\n(3) Teil 2 der Abschluss- oder Gesellenprüfung besteht aus folgenden Prüfungsbereichen:\n\n(2) In Teil 2 der Abschluss- oder Gesellenprüfung sollen Fertigkeiten, Kenntnisse und Fähigkeiten, die bereits Gegenstand von Teil 1 der Abschluss- oder Gesellenprüfung waren, nur insoweit einbezogen werden, als es für die Feststellung der beruflichen Handlungsfähigkeit erforderlich ist.\n\n(1) Teil 2 der Abschluss- oder Gesellenprüfung erstreckt sich auf\n\n(4) Für den Prüfungsbereich Auftragsplanung bestehen folgende Vorgaben:\n\n## § 9 Teil 2 der Abschluss- oder Gesellenprüfung in der Fachrichtung Karosserieinstandhaltungstechnik" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7783894325673525, + "doc_id": "7aa125ce13ba4fe290ecca24d7d0ba0104f57c48be8b82efc5b45221c5917650", + "edit_distance": 0.19730941704035873, + "f1_score": 0.9815303430079155, + "meteor": 0.7650631514874838, + "precision": 0.9841269841269841, + "pred_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz - www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n## *) Theoretische Versorgungsfläche:\n\nDie Theoretische Versorgungsfläche ist eine Berechnungsgröße zur Ermittlung des Beitrags. Sie basiert für alle Rundfunkdienste auf den internationalen Ausbreitungskurven der ITU-R P.370 sowie den jeweils gültigen nationalen Richtlinien (zurzeit 176 TR 22 bzw. 5 R 22 vom März 1992) und weiteren nationalen und internationalen Festlegungen, wie zum Beispiel für T-DAB Wiesbaden 1995 und Maastricht 2002 und für DVB-T Chester 1997.\n\nAngaben für die jeweils frequenzabhängige Mindestnutzfeldstärke sind für TV-analog der ITU-R BT.417, für den Betrieb eines Kanals im Band II in analoger Übertragungstechnik (UKW-Tonrundfunk) dem Abkommen Genf 1984, für den Betrieb eines T-DAB-Kanals dem Abkommen Wiesbaden 1995 (Pkt. 2.23, Tabelle 1, Position 'Medianwert der Mindestfeldstärke') und für den Betrieb eines DVB-T-Kanals dem Abkommen Chester 1997 (Tabelle A.1.50, Position 'Medianwert für die minimale äquivalente Feldstärke') zu entnehmen. In Gleichwellennetzen unterbleibt eine Mehrfachveranschlagung von Theoretischen Versorgungsflächen verschiedener Sender.\n\nAuf der Basis dieser Ausbreitungskurven wird für eine Sendefunkanlage eine Mindestnutzfeldstärkekontur gemäß den jeweils gültigen internationalen Abkommen errechnet. Hieraus ergibt sich für jeden 10°-Schritt eine Entfernung R vom Senderstandort bis zu dem Punkt, an dem die Mindestnutzfeldstärke erreicht ist. Daraus kann für jede der 36 Richtungen ein Flächenelement\n\nberechnet werden. Durch Addition der 36 Flächenelemente ergibt sich die Theoretische Versorgungsfläche einer Sendeanlage in qkm.\n\nDie Ermittlung der Entfernungen basiert auf den Ausbreitungskurven für Landausbreitung der Empfehlung ITU-R P.370 für 50 % Zeit- und 50 % Ortswahrscheinlichkeit. Die Geländerauigkeit beträgt 50 m. Als Parameter sind der Frequenzbereich, in welchem die Nutzung stattfindet, der Wert der Mindestnutzfeldstärke sowie die sektoriellen effektiven Antennenhöhen und Leistungen erforderlich. Für Entfernungen (R) kleiner 10 km werden die Ausbreitungskurven verwandt, welche zurzeit auch in den Anlagen 1a und 2a der Richtlinien 176 TR 22 bzw. 5 R 22 zu finden sind.\n\nFür Sender, die im Rahmen eines Gleichwellennetzes betrieben werden, wird mittels Leistungsadditionsverfahren eine Summenfeldstärke des Netzes berechnet. Die Theoretische\n\n- Seite 9 von 78 -", + "recall": 0.9789473684210527, + "true_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz ‒ www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n *) Theoretische Versorgungsfläche: Die Theoretische Versorgungsfläche ist eine Berechnungsgröße zur Ermittlung des Beitrags. Sie basiert für alle Rundfunkdienste auf den internationalen Ausbreitungskurven der ITU-R P.370 sowie den jeweils gültigen nationalen Richtlinien (zurzeit 176 TR 22 bzw. 5 R 22 vom März 1992) und weiteren nationalen und internationalen Festlegungen, wie zum Beispiel für T-DAB Wiesbaden 1995 und Maastricht 2002 und für DVB-T Chester 1997. Angaben für die jeweils frequenzabhängige Mindestnutzfeldstärke sind für TV-analog der ITU-R BT.417,\n\nDVB-T Chester 1997. Angaben für die jeweils frequenzabhängige Mindestnutzfeldstärke sind für TV-analog der ITU-R BT.417, für den Betrieb eines Kanals im Band II in analoger Übertragungstechnik (UKW-Tonrundfunk) dem Abkommen Genf 1984, für den Betrieb eines T-DAB-Kanals dem Abkommen Wiesbaden 1995 (Pkt. 2.23, Tabelle 1, Position „Medianwert der Mindestfeldstärke“) und für den Betrieb eines DVB-T-Kanals dem Abkommen Chester 1997 (Tabelle A.1.50, Position „Medianwert für die minimale äquivalente Feldstärke“) zu entnehmen. In Gleichwellennetzen unterbleibt eine Mehrfachveranschlagung von Theoretischen Versorgungsflächen verschiedener Sender. Auf der Basis dieser Ausbreitungskurven wird für eine Sendefunkanlage eine Mindestnutzfeldstärkekontur\n\nVersorgungsflächen verschiedener Sender. Auf der Basis dieser Ausbreitungskurven wird für eine Sendefunkanlage eine Mindestnutzfeldstärkekontur gemäß den jeweils gültigen internationalen Abkommen errechnet. Hieraus ergibt sich für jeden 10°-Schritt eine Entfernung R vom Senderstandort bis zu dem Punkt, an dem die Mindestnutzfeldstärke erreicht ist. Daraus kann für jede der 36 Richtungen ein Flächenelement\n\nberechnet werden. Durch Addition der 36 Flächenelemente ergibt sich die Theoretische Versorgungsfläche einer Sendeanlage in qkm. Die Ermittlung der Entfernungen basiert auf den Ausbreitungskurven für Landausbreitung der\n\neiner Sendeanlage in qkm. Die Ermittlung der Entfernungen basiert auf den Ausbreitungskurven für Landausbreitung der Empfehlung ITU-R P.370 für 50 % Zeit- und 50 % Ortswahrscheinlichkeit. Die Geländerauigkeit beträgt 50 m. Als Parameter sind der Frequenzbereich, in welchem die Nutzung stattfindet, der Wert der Mindestnutzfeldstärke sowie die sektoriellen effektiven Antennenhöhen und Leistungen erforderlich. Für Entfernungen (R) kleiner 10 km werden die Ausbreitungskurven verwandt, welche zurzeit auch in den Anlagen 1a und 2a der Richtlinien 176 TR 22 bzw. 5 R 22 zu finden sind. Für Sender, die im Rahmen eines Gleichwellennetzes betrieben werden, wird mittels\n\nAnlagen 1a und 2a der Richtlinien 176 TR 22 bzw. 5 R 22 zu finden sind. Für Sender, die im Rahmen eines Gleichwellennetzes betrieben werden, wird mittels Leistungsadditionsverfahren eine Summenfeldstärke des Netzes berechnet. Die Theoretische\n\n- Seite 9 von 78 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7089873594553371, + "doc_id": "210cf5d4be062b9ef5154667712f7c90975b93c3cf349ffbd8e144daed6a120b", + "edit_distance": 0.2349137931034483, + "f1_score": 0.9451697127937336, + "meteor": 0.7413108112072553, + "precision": 0.9526315789473684, + "pred_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz - www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\nAbkommen für T-DAB Wiesbaden 1995 und Maastricht 2002 und für DVB-T Chester 1997, sowie den jeweils gültigen nationalen Richtlinien (zurzeit 176 TR 22 bzw. 5 R 22 vom März 1992).\n\nAngaben für die jeweils frequenzabhängige Mindestnutzfeldstärke sind für TV-analog der ITU-R BT.417 zu entnehmen, Angaben für den Betrieb eines Kanals im Band II in analoger Übertragungstechnik (UKWTonrundfunk) sind dem Abkommen Genf 1984 zu entnehmen, Angaben für den Betrieb eines T-DAB-Kanals dem Abkommen Wiesbaden 1995 (Pkt. 2.2.3, Tabelle 1, Position 'Medianwert der Mindestfeldstärke') und Angaben für den Betrieb eines DVB-T-Kanals dem Abkommen Chester 1997 (Tabelle A.1.50, Position 'Medianwert für die minimale äquivalente Feldstärke'). In Gleichwellennetzen werden theoretische Versorgungsflächen verschiedener Sender nicht mehrfach veranschlagt.\n\nAuf der Basis der oben genannten Ausbreitungskurven wird für eine Sendefunkanlage eine Mindestnutzfeldstärkekontur gemäß den jeweils gültigen internationalen Abkommen errechnet. Hieraus ergibt sich für jeden 10°-Schritt eine Entfernung r vom Senderstandort bis zu dem Punkt, an dem die Mindestnutzfeldstärke erreicht ist. Daraus kann für jeden der 36 10°-Schritte ein Flächenelement A berechnet werden:\n\nDurch Addition der 36 Flächenelemente ergibt sich die theoretische Versorgungsfläche einer Sendeanlage in Quadratkilometern.\n\nDie Ermittlung der Entfernungen basiert auf den Ausbreitungskurven für Landausbreitung der Empfehlung ITU-R P.370 für 50 % Zeit- und 50 % Ortswahrscheinlichkeit. Die Geländerauigkeit beträgt 50 m. Als Parameter sind der Frequenzbereich, in dem die Nutzung stattfindet, der Wert der Mindestnutzfeldstärke sowie die sektoriellen effektiven Antennenhöhen und Leistungen erforderlich. Für Entfernungen r, die kleiner sind als 10 km, werden die Ausbreitungskurven verwendet, die zurzeit auch in den Anlagen 1a und 2a der Richtlinie 176 TR 22 bzw. der Richtlinie 5 R 22 zu finden sind.\n\nFür Sender, die im Rahmen eines Gleichwellennetzes betrieben werden, wird mittels Leistungsadditionsverfahren die Summenfeldstärke des Netzes berechnet. Die theoretische Versorgungsfläche entsteht durch Addition von hinreichend kleinen Flächenelementen, in denen die Mindestnutzfeldstärke erreicht wird.\n\n## Frequenznutzungsbeiträge und EMV-Beiträge für das Jahr 2013\n\n- Seite 41 von 78 -", + "recall": 0.9378238341968912, + "true_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz ‒ www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\nAbkommen für T‑DAB Wiesbaden 1995 und Maastricht 2002 und für DVB‑T Chester 1997, sowie den jeweils gültigen nationalen Richtlinien (zurzeit 176 TR 22 bzw. 5 R 22 vom März 1992). Angaben für die jeweils frequenzabhängige Mindestnutzfeldstärke sind für TV-analog der ITU‑R BT.417\n\ngültigen nationalen Richtlinien (zurzeit 176 TR 22 bzw. 5 R 22 vom März 1992). Angaben für die jeweils frequenzabhängige Mindestnutzfeldstärke sind für TV-analog der ITU‑R BT.417 zu entnehmen, Angaben für den Betrieb eines Kanals im Band II in analoger Übertragungstechnik (UKW- Tonrundfunk) sind dem Abkommen Genf 1984 zu entnehmen, Angaben für den Betrieb eines T‑DAB-Kanals dem Abkommen Wiesbaden 1995 (Pkt. 2.2.3, Tabelle 1, Position „Medianwert der Mindestfeldstärke“) und Angaben für den Betrieb eines DVB‑T-Kanals dem Abkommen Chester 1997 (Tabelle A.1.50, Position „Medianwert für die minimale äquivalente Feldstärke“). In Gleichwellennetzen werden theoretische Versorgungsflächen verschiedener Sender nicht mehrfach veranschlagt. Auf der Basis der oben genannten Ausbreitungskurven wird für eine Sendefunkanlage eine\n\nVersorgungsflächen verschiedener Sender nicht mehrfach veranschlagt. Auf der Basis der oben genannten Ausbreitungskurven wird für eine Sendefunkanlage eine Mindestnutzfeldstärkekontur gemäß den jeweils gültigen internationalen Abkommen errechnet. Hieraus ergibt sich für jeden 10°-Schritt eine Entfernung r vom Senderstandort bis zu dem Punkt, an dem die Mindestnutzfeldstärke erreicht ist. Daraus kann für jeden der 36 10°-Schritte ein Flächenelement A berechnet werden:\n\nDurch Addition der 36 Flächenelemente ergibt sich die theoretische Versorgungsfläche einer Sendeanlage in Quadratkilometern. Die Ermittlung der Entfernungen basiert auf den Ausbreitungskurven für Landausbreitung der Empfehlung\n\nQuadratkilometern. Die Ermittlung der Entfernungen basiert auf den Ausbreitungskurven für Landausbreitung der Empfehlung ITU‑R P.370 für 50 % Zeit‑ und 50 % Ortswahrscheinlichkeit. Die Geländerauigkeit beträgt 50 m. Als Parameter sind der Frequenzbereich, in dem die Nutzung stattfindet, der Wert der Mindestnutzfeldstärke sowie die sektoriellen effektiven Antennenhöhen und Leistungen erforderlich. Für Entfernungen r, die kleiner sind als 10 km, werden die Ausbreitungskurven verwendet, die zurzeit auch in den Anlagen 1a und 2a der Richtlinie 176 TR 22 bzw. der Richtlinie 5 R 22 zu finden sind. Für Sender, die im Rahmen eines Gleichwellennetzes betrieben werden, wird mittels\n\n2a der Richtlinie 176 TR 22 bzw. der Richtlinie 5 R 22 zu finden sind. Für Sender, die im Rahmen eines Gleichwellennetzes betrieben werden, wird mittels Leistungsadditionsverfahren die Summenfeldstärke des Netzes berechnet. Die theoretische Versorgungsfläche entsteht durch Addition von hinreichend kleinen Flächenelementen, in denen die Mindestnutzfeldstärke erreicht wird.\n\n## Frequenznutzungsbeiträge und EMV-Beiträge für das Jahr 2013\n\n- Seite 41 von 78 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8367273811895829, + "doc_id": "271a9bf57c0d3eb114fb6ee0bfb41eea96a39ab41e50b05505d055db9734e984", + "edit_distance": 0.325, + "f1_score": 0.9677419354838711, + "meteor": 0.9518255472476204, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz - www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n## Abschnitt C: berufsprofilgebende Fertigkeiten, Kenntnisse und Fähigkeiten in der Fachrichtung Karosserie- und Fahrzeugbautechnik\n\n- Seite 17 von 24 -", + "recall": 0.9375, + "true_md": "Ein Service des Bundesministeriums der Justiz und für Verbraucherschutz sowie des Bundesamts für Justiz ‒ www.gesetze-im-internet.de\n\n- Seite 17 von 24 -\n\n## Abschnitt C: berufsprofilgebende Fertigkeiten, Kenntnisse und Fähigkeiten in der Fachrichtung Karosserie- und Fahrzeugbautechnik Zeitliche" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "31af11501c3132dd39bea05f9ea15b53a1c1f6f8b93f9a7bed5a1c69cacb688d", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999999980379854, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "regions listed in Appended Table 3-2 (excluding Iraq and North Korea));\n\n- (2) The provisions of Article 2 do not apply in the following cases; provided, however, that this is not limited to goods listed in the middle column of rows 37 to 41 and rows 43 to 45 of Appended Table 2:\n- (i) where a person intends to export goods which have been landed temporarily, except where such person intends to export goods listed in the middle column of row 1, row 35, and row 35-2 of Appended Table 2 (in the case of goods listed in the middle column of row 1 and row 35-2,(i) of the same table, excluding those specified by the Minister of Economy, Trade and Industry by public notice);\n- (ii) where a person intends to export goods listed in Appended Table 5, except where such person intends to export the following goods:\n- (a) goods listed in the middle column of row 1, row 35-3, (i) and (vi), row 35-4, and the middle column of row 36 of Appended Table 2 (with respect to goods listed in row 35-3, (i) and (vi) of the same table, limited to those specified by the Minister of Economy, Trade and Industry in a public notice);\n- (b) goods listed in Appended Table 5, item (ii), which are also listed in the middle column of row 35 and row 35-2 of Appended Table 2;\n- (c) goods listed in Appended Table 5, item (ii) and item (iii), which are also listed in Appended Table 2-2 and are exported to North Korea;\n- (iii) where a person prescribed in Article 10, paragraph (2) of the Act on Waste Disposal and Public Cleaning (Act No. 137 of 1970) (including the cases where it is applied mutatis mutandis pursuant to Article 15-4-7, paragraph (1) of the same Act) intends to export goods listed in row 35-2(2) of Appended Table 2, except where such person intends to export goods listed in row 35-3, (i) and (vi) of Appended Table 2 (limited to those specified by the Minister of Economy, Trade and Industry in a public notice);\n- (iv) where any of the person listed in the left-hand column of Appended Table 6 intends to export goods listed in the right-hand column upon departure from Japan by personally carrying the goods or separately sending them after declaring export at customs, except where such person intends to export goods listed in the middle column of row 1, row 35-3, (i) and (vi), and the middle column of row 35-4 of Appended Table 2 (with respect to goods listed in row 35-3, (i) and (vi) of the same table, limited to those specified by the Minister of Economy, Trade and Industry in a public notice), where a person who departs from Japan after entering Japan temporarily intends to export goods listed in row 36 of the same table (excluding those specified by the Minister of Economy, Trade and Industry by public notice), and where a vessel or aircraft crew intends to export goods listed in Appended Table 2-2 to North Korea.\n\n4", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "regions listed in Appended Table 3-2 (excluding Iraq and North Korea)); \n\n- (2) The provisions of Article 2 do not apply in the following cases; provided, however, that this is not limited to goods listed in the middle column of rows 37 to 41 and rows 43 to 45 of Appended Table 2: \n\n- (i) where a person intends to export goods which have been landed temporarily, except where such person intends to export goods listed in the middle column of row 1, row 35, and row 35-2 of Appended Table 2 (in the case of goods listed in the middle column of row 1 and row 35-2,(i) of the same table, excluding those specified by the Minister of Economy, Trade and Industry by public notice); \n\n- (ii) where a person intends to export goods listed in Appended Table 5, except where such person intends to export the following goods: \n\n- (a) goods listed in the middle column of row 1, row 35-3, (i) and (vi), row 35-4, and the middle column of row 36 of Appended Table 2 (with respect to goods listed in row 35-3, (i) and (vi) of the same table, limited to those specified by the Minister of Economy, Trade and Industry in a public notice); \n\n- (b) goods listed in Appended Table 5, item (ii), which are also listed in the middle column of row 35 and row 35-2 of Appended Table 2; \n\n- (c) goods listed in Appended Table 5, item (ii) and item (iii), which are also listed in Appended Table 2-2 and are exported to North Korea; \n\n- (iii) where a person prescribed in Article 10, paragraph (2) of the Act on Waste Disposal and Public Cleaning (Act No. 137 of 1970) (including the cases where it is applied mutatis mutandis pursuant to Article 15-4-7, paragraph (1) of the same Act) intends to export goods listed in row 35-2(2) of Appended Table 2, except where such person intends to export goods listed in row 35-3, (i) and (vi) of Appended Table 2 (limited to those specified by the Minister of Economy, Trade and Industry in a public notice); \n\n- (iv) where any of the person listed in the left-hand column of Appended Table 6 intends to export goods listed in the right-hand column upon departure from Japan by personally carrying the goods or separately sending them after declaring export at customs, except where such person intends to export goods listed in the middle column of row 1, row 35-3, (i) and (vi), and the middle column of row 35-4 of Appended Table 2 (with respect to goods listed in row 35-3, (i) and (vi) of the same table, limited to those specified by the Minister of Economy, Trade and Industry in a public notice), where a person who departs from Japan after entering Japan temporarily intends to export goods listed in row 36 of the same table (excluding those specified by the Minister of Economy, Trade and Industry by public notice), and where a vessel or aircraft crew intends to export goods listed in Appended Table 2-2 to North Korea. \n\n4" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9573268189960944, + "doc_id": "30e1a610d02f820b934f5e00c236c3f620a6f212aa8041d4041c251dec4b039f", + "edit_distance": 0.24152542372881355, + "f1_score": 0.984375, + "meteor": 0.9216097380263749, + "precision": 0.984375, + "pred_md": "## (Effective Date)\n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of July 1, 1997.\n\n(Transitional Measures Concerning Penal Provision)\n\n- (2) With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 327 of November 12, 1997] [Extract]\n\n(Effective Date)\n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of November 16, 1997.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 353 of December 10, 1997] [Extract]\n\n## (Effective Date)\n\nArticle 1 This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of enforcement of the provisions listed in Article 1, item (i) of the Supplementary Provisions of the Act for Partial Revision of the Act on Waste Management and Public Cleansing (hereinafter referred to as the \"Revised Act\" in this Article) (June 17, 1998); provided, however, that the provisions listed as follows come into effect as of the date specified in the corresponding item:\n\n- (i) the part of the provisions of Article 1 that revises the table of contents of the Order for Enforcement of the Act on Waste Management and Public Cleansing, the provisions adding five Articles after Article 5 of Chapter II of the same Order (excluding the part pertaining to Article 5-2 and Article 5-3 of the same Order), the provisions revising Article 6-8 of the same Order (limited to the part changing the term \"the proviso to Article 14, paragraph (9)\" to \"the proviso to Article 14, paragraph (10)\"), the provisions revising Article 6-11 of the same Order (limited to the part changing the term \"the proviso to Article 14-4, paragraph (9)\" to \"the proviso to Article 14-4, paragraph (10)\"), the provisions revising Article 7-2 of the same Order, the provisions changing Article 7-2 of Chapter III of the same Order to Article 74 of the same Order, the provisions adding two Articles after Article 7 of the same Order (excluding the part pertaining to Article 7-2 of the same Order), the provisions deleting Article 22 of the same Order and changing Article 212 of the same Order to Article 22, the provisions of Article 4, the provisions of Article 6, and the provisions of Article 7: The date of enforcement of the\n\n33", + "recall": 0.984375, + "true_md": "(Effective Date) \n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of July 1, 1997. \n\n- (2) With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable. \n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of November 16, 1997. \n\n- Article 1 This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of enforcement of the provisions listed in Article 1, item (i) of the Supplementary Provisions of the Act for Partial Revision of the Act on Waste Management and Public Cleansing (hereinafter referred to as the \"Revised Act\" in this Article) (June 17, 1998); provided, however, that the provisions listed as follows come into effect as of the date specified in the corresponding item: \n\n- (i) the part of the provisions of Article 1 that revises the table of contents of the Order for Enforcement of the Act on Waste Management and Public Cleansing, the provisions adding five Articles after Article 5 of Chapter II of the same Order (excluding the part pertaining to Article 5-2 and Article 5-3 of the same Order), the provisions revising Article 6-8 of the same Order (limited to the part changing the term \"the proviso to Article 14, paragraph (9)\" to \"the proviso to Article 14, paragraph (10)\"), the provisions revising Article 6-11 of the same Order (limited to the part changing the term \"the proviso to Article 14-4, paragraph (9)\" to \"the proviso to Article 14-4, paragraph (10)\"), the provisions revising Article 7-2 of the same Order, the provisions changing Article 7-2 of Chapter III of the same Order to Article 7- 4 of the same Order, the provisions adding two Articles after Article 7 of the same Order (excluding the part pertaining to Article 7-2 of the same Order), the provisions deleting Article 22 of the same Order and changing Article 21- 2 of the same Order to Article 22, the provisions of Article 4, the provisions of Article 6, and the provisions of Article 7: The date of enforcement of the \n\n33 \n\n(Effective Date) \n\n(Effective Date) \n\n(Transitional Measures Concerning Penal Provision) \n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 327 of November 12, 1997] [Extract]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 353 of December 10, 1997] [Extract]" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9488539447735526, + "doc_id": "6477e0179c98b7af3595bfd49cc6c33996287c67f4ac000a0b93467184725db5", + "edit_distance": 0.4963855421686747, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9347498575506804, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "revising the middle column of row 165 of Appended Table 1, the provisions revising row 166 of the same table, the provisions revising item (ii) of Appended Table 2, the provisions revising Appended Table 5, and the provisions of the next paragraph and paragraph (3) of the Supplementary Provisions come into effect as of the date of promulgation.\n\n- (2) Up until February 14, 1985, the term \"all regions\" in the provisions of row 166 of Appended Table 1 after the revision is to be deemed to be replaced with \"region A.\"\n- (3) With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 315 of September 30, 1986]\n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of October 6, 1986.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 378 of December 19, 1986]\n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of January 1, 1987; provided, however, that the provisions revising row 18, row 21, row 44, row 48, row 75, row 120, row 146-2, row 151, row 155 and row 159 of Appended Table 1 come into effect as of the date of promulgation.\n- (2) With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 382 of December 23, 1986]\n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of January 1, 1987.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 373 of November 5, 1987] [Extract]\n\n## (Effective Date)\n\nArticle 1 This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of enforcement of the Act for Partial Revision of the Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Control Act (November 10, 1987).\n\n## (Transitional Measures)\n\nArticle 3 With regard to export of goods that is deemed to have been approved under Article 1, paragraph (2) of the Export Trade Control Order revised by\n\n21", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "revising the middle column of row 165 of Appended Table 1, the provisions revising row 166 of the same table, the provisions revising item (ii) of Appended Table 2, the provisions revising Appended Table 5, and the provisions of the next paragraph and paragraph (3) of the Supplementary Provisions come into effect as of the date of promulgation. \n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of October 6, 1986. \n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of January 1, 1987. \n\n(Effective Date) \n\n(Transitional Measures) \n\n- (2) Up until February 14, 1985, the term \"all regions\" in the provisions of row 166 of Appended Table 1 after the revision is to be deemed to be replaced with \"region A.\" \n\n- (3) With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable. \n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of January 1, 1987; provided, however, that the provisions revising row 18, row 21, row 44, row 48, row 75, row 120, row 146-2, row 151, row 155 and row 159 of Appended Table 1 come into effect as of the date of promulgation. \n\n- (2) With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable. \n\n- Article 1 This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of enforcement of the Act for Partial Revision of the Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Control Act (November 10, 1987). \n\n- Article 3 With regard to export of goods that is deemed to have been approved under Article 1, paragraph (2) of the Export Trade Control Order revised by \n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 373 of November 5, 1987] [Extract]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 382 of December 23, 1986]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 315 of September 30, 1986]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 378 of December 19, 1986]\n\n21" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9221983382356712, + "doc_id": "63d4ab82b8e065f01b5bbf85432fb0f30289a0d200afb0b4bf406a6f1b5cbdff", + "edit_distance": 0.5786350148367952, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.883994115465146, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 23 of February 28, 1966]\n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of March 5, 1966.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 302 of September 1, 1966]\n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of September 15, 1966; provided, however, that the provisions revising row 33, rows 88 and 89, row 119, row 133, and row 133-2 to row 133-4 of Appended Table 1 come into effect as of the date of promulgation.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 345 of October 7, 1966]\n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of October 17, 1966.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 361 of November 2, 1966]\n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of November 7, 1966.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 389 of December 24, 1966]\n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of December 26, 1966.\n\nSupplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 26 of March 2, 1967] This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of March 15, 1967.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 31 of March 15, 1967]\n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of March 22, 1967.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 368 of December 25, 1967]\n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of promulgation; provided, however, that the provisions revising row 30, row 41-2, and row 133 of Appended Table 1 come into effect as of January 1, 1968.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 131 of May 27, 1968]\n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of promulgation; provided,\n\n14", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 23 of February 28, 1966]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 302 of September 1, 1966]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 345 of October 7, 1966]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 361 of November 2, 1966]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 389 of December 24, 1966]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 26 of March 2, 1967]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 31 of March 15, 1967]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 368 of December 25, 1967]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 131 of May 27, 1968]\n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of March 5, 1966. \n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of September 15, 1966; provided, however, that the provisions revising row 33, rows 88 and 89, row 119, row 133, and row 133-2 to row 133-4 of Appended Table 1 come into effect as of the date of promulgation. \n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of October 17, 1966. \n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of November 7, 1966. \n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of December 26, 1966. \n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of March 15, 1967. \n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of March 22, 1967. \n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of promulgation; provided, however, that the provisions revising row 30, row 41-2, and row 133 of Appended Table 1 come into effect as of January 1, 1968. \n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of promulgation; provided, \n\n14" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9658092816081097, + "doc_id": "9e8bd8f64390c22f9fe763bf7d9f8f34473260ef973a09a5964764035e398a8c", + "edit_distance": 0.31116389548693585, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9895408188598261, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "- (i) the part of the provisions of Article 1 that revises Article 18 of the Foreign Exchange Control Order and the part of the provisions of Article 2 that revises Article 4, paragraph (2) of the Export Trade Control Order and Appended Table 2-2: June 26, 1992;\n- (ii) the part of the provisions of Article 2 that revises Article 2, paragraph (1), item (i)-2 of the Export Trade Control Order, Appended Table 2, and Appended Table 7: July 1, 1992.\n- (4) With regard to export of goods conducted, as permitted, by a person who has obtained, prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, permission under Article 1, paragraph (1) of the Export Trade Control Order prior to the revision with respect to export of goods to Hungary, the provisions then in force remain applicable.\n- (5) With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 371 of December 9, 1992]\n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of December 31, 1992.\n- (2) With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 395 of December 28, 1992]\n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of January 20, 1993.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 66 of March 26, 1993]\n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of April 1, 1993.\n- (2) With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 157 of April 27, 1993]\n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of May 1, 1993.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 202 of June 18, 1993]\n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of July 16, 1993.\n\n26", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "- (i) the part of the provisions of Article 1 that revises Article 18 of the Foreign Exchange Control Order and the part of the provisions of Article 2 that revises Article 4, paragraph (2) of the Export Trade Control Order and Appended Table 2-2: June 26, 1992; \n\n- (ii) the part of the provisions of Article 2 that revises Article 2, paragraph (1), item (i)-2 of the Export Trade Control Order, Appended Table 2, and Appended Table 7: July 1, 1992. \n\n- (4) With regard to export of goods conducted, as permitted, by a person who has obtained, prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, permission under Article 1, paragraph (1) of the Export Trade Control Order prior to the revision with respect to export of goods to Hungary, the provisions then in force remain applicable. \n\n- (5) With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable. \n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of December 31, 1992. \n\n- (2) With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable. \n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of April 1, 1993. \n\n- (2) With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable. \n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of January 20, 1993. \n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of May 1, 1993. \n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of July 16, 1993. \n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 371 of December 9, 1992]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 395 of December 28, 1992]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 66 of March 26, 1993]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 157 of April 27, 1993]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 202 of June 18, 1993]\n\n26" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9950994149719425, + "doc_id": "b18a5916667c6cfc4592606525dc1f3fe19da46a88752b0f60dd182c32c8559a", + "edit_distance": 0.041176470588235294, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9971955317899835, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Appended Table 2-2 (Re: Articles 2 and 4)\n\n- (i) beef (limited to frozen beef);\n- (ii) fish fillets (limited to those frozen which are specified by the Minister of Economy, Trade and Industry in a public notice);\n- (iii) caviar and caviar substitutes made from fish eggs;\n- (iv) alcoholic beverages;\n- (v) manufactured tobacco and tobacco substitutes;\n- (vi) perfume and cologne;\n- (vii) preparations for cosmetic, makeup or skin care purposes (including preparations for sun-block or suntan purposes and excluding medicine) and preparations for finger or toe nail polish purposes;\n- (viii) trunks, suitcases, cosmetics bags, executive cases, brief cases, school bags, or other containers equivalent thereto (limited to those whose outer surface is made of leather, composition leather, or patent leather);\n- (ix) handbags (limited to those whose outer surface is made of leather, composition leather, or patent leather);\n- (x) wallets or other goods usually carried in a pocket or handbag (limited to those whose outer surface is made of leather, composition leather, or patent leather);\n- (xi) clothes and accessories therefor (limited to those made of leather or composition leather);\n- (xii) fur coats or other fur products and artificial fur products;\n- (xiii) carpets or other floor coverings made of woven fabric;\n- (xiii)-2 tapestries (limited to those specified by the Minister of Economy, Trade and Industry in a public notice);\n- (xiii)-3 porcelain tableware (limited to those specified by the Minister of Economy, Trade and Industry in a public notice);\n- (xiv) glasses (limited to those made of lead glass and specified by the Minister of Economy, Trade and Industry in a public notice);\n- (xv) natural or cultivated pearls, precious stones, semiprecious stones, specified metals (meaning silver, gold, white gold, iridium, osmium, palladium, rhodium, and ruthenium; the same applies hereinafter) and metals coated with specified metals and products thereof;\n- (xvi) portable digital automatic data processors (limited to those at least consisting of a central processing unit, keyboard, and display);\n- (xvii) microphones and stands therefor, loud speakers, headphones and earphones, those combining microphones and loud speakers, audio amplifiers, and electric sound amplifiers;\n- (xviii) sound reproducers, recorders, and equipment for recording or reproducing videos, and components and accessories therefor; (xix) media for sound recording or other recording equivalent thereto\n\n71", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Appended Table 2-2 (Re: Articles 2 and 4) \n\n- (i) beef (limited to frozen beef); \n\n- (ii) fish fillets (limited to those frozen which are specified by the Minister of Economy, Trade and Industry in a public notice); \n\n- (iii) caviar and caviar substitutes made from fish eggs; \n\n- (iv) alcoholic beverages; \n\n- (vi) perfume and cologne; \n\n- (vii) preparations for cosmetic, makeup or skin care purposes (including preparations for sun-block or suntan purposes and excluding medicine) and preparations for finger or toe nail polish purposes; \n\n- (v) manufactured tobacco and tobacco substitutes; \n\n- (viii) trunks, suitcases, cosmetics bags, executive cases, brief cases, school bags, or other containers equivalent thereto (limited to those whose outer surface is made of leather, composition leather, or patent leather); \n\n- (ix) handbags (limited to those whose outer surface is made of leather, composition leather, or patent leather); \n\n- (x) wallets or other goods usually carried in a pocket or handbag (limited to those whose outer surface is made of leather, composition leather, or patent leather); \n\n- (xi) clothes and accessories therefor (limited to those made of leather or composition leather); \n\n- (xii) fur coats or other fur products and artificial fur products; \n\n- (xiii) carpets or other floor coverings made of woven fabric; \n\n- (xiii)-2 tapestries (limited to those specified by the Minister of Economy, Trade and Industry in a public notice); \n\n- (xiii)-3 porcelain tableware (limited to those specified by the Minister of Economy, Trade and Industry in a public notice); \n\n- (xiv) glasses (limited to those made of lead glass and specified by the Minister of Economy, Trade and Industry in a public notice); \n\n- (xv) natural or cultivated pearls, precious stones, semiprecious stones, specified metals (meaning silver, gold, white gold, iridium, osmium, palladium, rhodium, and ruthenium; the same applies hereinafter) and metals coated with specified metals and products thereof; \n\n- (xvi) portable digital automatic data processors (limited to those at least consisting of a central processing unit, keyboard, and display); \n\n- (xvii) microphones and stands therefor, loud speakers, headphones and earphones, those combining microphones and loud speakers, audio amplifiers, and electric sound amplifiers; \n\n- (xviii) sound reproducers, recorders, and equipment for recording or reproducing videos, and components and accessories therefor; \n\n- (xix) media for sound recording or other recording equivalent thereto \n\n71" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9424611469535726, + "doc_id": "d147686641174d2358bd9c5c2e19621cc4d873353f1e03dbdc0810c7b9de0621", + "edit_distance": 0.2760416666666667, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.974734364702086, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "on the Cabinet Order Concerning Temporary Special Provisions of the Foreign Exchange Control Order, etc., upon Implementation of the Administrative Agreement under Article III of the Security Treaty between Japan and the United States of America, or an Order of the Prime Minister's Office or Order of the Ministry of International Trade and Industry, all of which are effective at the time of enforcement of this Cabinet Order and have not yet been revised, is to be effective, after the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, as the Order Concerning Reports of Foreign Exchange Banks and Money Exchangers, the Export Trade Control Order, the Import Trade Control Order, the Foreign Exchange Control Order, or the relevant order of the competent ministry, Order of the Ministry of Finance or Order of the Ministry of International Trade and Industry based on the Cabinet Order Concerning Temporary Special Provisions of the Foreign Exchange Control Order, etc. upon Implementation of the Administrative Agreement under Article III of the Security Treaty between Japan and the United States of America, or an Order of the Ministry of Finance or Order of the Ministry of International Trade and Industry, all of which have been revised.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 367 of August 26, 1952] [Extract]\n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of September 1, 1952.\n\nSupplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 500 of December 26, 1952] This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of January 1, 1953.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 77 of April 10, 1954]\n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of promulgation.\n\nSupplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 119 of June 1, 1954] This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of promulgation.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 150 of July 30, 1955]\n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of August 10, 1955.\n\nSupplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 328 of December 15, 1955]\n\n9", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "on the Cabinet Order Concerning Temporary Special Provisions of the Foreign Exchange Control Order, etc., upon Implementation of the Administrative Agreement under Article III of the Security Treaty between Japan and the United States of America, or an Order of the Prime Minister's Office or Order of the Ministry of International Trade and Industry, all of which are effective at the time of enforcement of this Cabinet Order and have not yet been revised, is to be effective, after the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, as the Order Concerning Reports of Foreign Exchange Banks and Money Exchangers, the Export Trade Control Order, the Import Trade Control Order, the Foreign Exchange Control Order, or the relevant order of the competent ministry, Order of the Ministry of Finance or Order of the Ministry of International Trade and Industry based on the Cabinet Order Concerning Temporary Special Provisions of the Foreign Exchange Control Order, etc. upon Implementation of the Administrative Agreement under Article III of the Security Treaty between Japan and the United States of America, or an Order of the Ministry of Finance or Order of the Ministry of International Trade and Industry, all of which have been revised. \n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of January 1, 1953. \n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of promulgation. \n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of promulgation. \n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of August 10, 1955. \n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 367 of August 26, 1952] [Extract]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 500 of December 26, 1952]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 77 of April 10, 1954]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 150 of July 30, 1955]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 119 of June 1, 1954]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 328 of December 15, 1955]\n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of September 1, 1952. \n\n9" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9853862382972379, + "doc_id": "71780825e7d800938610ae97e237832962d1c1f7a718ae5f9ea634bfaef539d0", + "edit_distance": 0.6976744186046512, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.8112536004264194, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "however, that the part of the provisions of Article 1 that revises row 12 of the Appended Table of the Foreign Exchange Control Order and the part of the provisions of Article 2 that revises row 26, row 32, row 34, row 43, row 100, row 117, and row 124 of Appended Table 1 of the Export Trade Control Order come into effect as of the date of promulgation.\n\n- (2) With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order (with regard to the revising provisions prescribed in the proviso to the preceding paragraph, prior to the enforcement of the revising provisions), the provisions then in force remain applicable.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 246 of August 15, 1990] [Extract]\n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of August 22, 1990.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 297 of October 2, 1990]\n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of promulgation; provided, however, that the part of the provisions revising Article 2, paragraph (1), item (i)-2 that changes the term \"21\" to \"21-2,\" the provisions revising Article 2, paragraph (5), the provisions revising Article 4, paragraph (2), the provisions adding row 21-2 to Appended Table 2, the provisions revising row 39 of the same table and the provisions adding row 6 to Appended Table 7 come into effect as of October 12, 1990.\n- (2) With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 308 of October 17, 1990]\n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of November 1, 1990; provided, however, that the part of the provisions of Article 1 that revises row 1, row 1-2, row 10-2, row 11-2, row 13, row 17, and row 19 of the Appended Table of the Foreign Exchange Control Order, and the part of the provisions of Article 2 that revises row 2, row 9, row 15, row 29 to row 30, row 46, row 53, row 58, row 71, row 75 to row 77, row 89, row 92, row 93, row 106, row 108, row 109, row 118, row 121, row 122, row 125 to row 127, row 129 to row 131, row 140, row 142, row 144, row 145, row 149, row 153, row 155, row 165 to row 167 of Appended Table 1 of the Export Trade Control Order come into effect as of the date of promulgation.\n- (2) With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to\n\n24", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "however, that the part of the provisions of Article 1 that revises row 12 of the Appended Table of the Foreign Exchange Control Order and the part of the provisions of Article 2 that revises row 26, row 32, row 34, row 43, row 100, row 117, and row 124 of Appended Table 1 of the Export Trade Control Order come into effect as of the date of promulgation. \n\n- (2) With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to \n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of November 1, 1990; provided, however, that the part of the provisions of Article 1 that revises row 1, row 1-2, row 10-2, row 11-2, row 13, row 17, and row 19 of the Appended Table of the Foreign Exchange Control Order, and the part of the provisions of Article 2 that revises row 2, row 9, row 15, row 29 to row 30, row 46, row 53, row 58, row 71, row 75 to row 77, row 89, row 92, row 93, row 106, row 108, row 109, row 118, row 121, row 122, row 125 to row 127, row 129 to row 131, row 140, row 142, row 144, row 145, row 149, row 153, row 155, row 165 to row 167 of Appended Table 1 of the Export Trade Control Order come into effect as of the date of promulgation. \n\n- (2) With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable. \n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of promulgation; provided, however, that the part of the provisions revising Article 2, paragraph (1), item (i)-2 that changes the term \"21\" to \"21-2,\" the provisions revising Article 2, paragraph (5), the provisions revising Article 4, paragraph (2), the provisions adding row 21-2 to Appended Table 2, the provisions revising row 39 of the same table and the provisions adding row 6 to Appended Table 7 come into effect as of October 12, 1990. \n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of August 22, 1990. \n\n- (2) With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order (with regard to the revising provisions prescribed in the proviso to the preceding paragraph, prior to the enforcement of the revising provisions), the provisions then in force remain applicable. \n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 246 of August 15, 1990] [Extract]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 297 of October 2, 1990]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 308 of October 17, 1990]\n\n24" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9499437917735631, + "doc_id": "9d9f27906273d3cd250f2d7d21936958bddce11f0ed5ac0792b7976b38514595", + "edit_distance": 0.4675324675324675, + "f1_score": 0.9955947136563875, + "meteor": 0.8729102442644152, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Revised Act (December 17, 1997).\n\nArticle 6 With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 387 of December 25, 1997]\n\n(Effective Date)\n\nArticle 1 This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of April 1, 1998\n\n(Transitional Measures upon Partial Revision of the Import Trade Control Order)\n\nArticle 2 With regard to export of goods conducted, as permitted, by a person who has obtained, prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, permission for import by a certified foreign exchange bank under Article 4, paragraph (2) of the Import Trade Control Order prior to the revision under Article 2, to which the provisions of Article 4, paragraph (1) of the same Order after the revision applies, the provisions then in force remain applicable.\n\n(Transitional Measures Concerning Penal Provision)\n\nArticle 3 With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 63 of March 25, 1998]\n\n(Effective Date)\n\nArticle 1 This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of April 1, 1998.\n\n(Transitional Measures Concerning Valid Period of Permission and Approval) Article 2 With regard to the valid period of permission under Article 48, paragraph (1) of the Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Control Act (Act No. 228 of 1949) or approval under Article 2, paragraph (1) of the Export Trade Control Order prior to the revision that has already been obtained at the time of the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable, irrespective of the provisions of Article 8, paragraph (1) of the Export Trade Control Order after the revision.\n\n(Transitional Measures Concerning Penal Provision)\n\nArticle 3 With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed\n\n34", + "recall": 0.9912280701754386, + "true_md": "Revised Act (December 17, 1997). \n\n(Effective Date) \n\nArticle 1 This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of April 1, 1998 \n\n(Transitional Measures Concerning Penal Provision) \n\n(Effective Date) \n\nArticle 1 This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of April 1, 1998. \n\n(Transitional Measures Concerning Penal Provision) \n\nArticle 3 With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed \n\n- Article 6 With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable. \n\n- (Transitional Measures upon Partial Revision of the Import Trade Control Order) \n\n- Article 2 With regard to export of goods conducted, as permitted, by a person who has obtained, prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, permission for import by a certified foreign exchange bank under Article 4, paragraph (2) of the Import Trade Control Order prior to the revision under Article 2, to which the provisions of Article 4, paragraph (1) of the same Order after the revision applies, the provisions then in force remain applicable. \n\n- Article 3 With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable. \n\n- Article 2 With regard to the valid period of permission under Article 48, paragraph (1) of the Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Control Act (Act No. 228 of 1949) or approval under Article 2, paragraph (1) of the Export Trade Control Order prior to the revision that has already been obtained at the time of the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable, irrespective of the provisions of Article 8, paragraph (1) of the Export Trade Control Order after the revision. \n\n(Transitional Measures Concerning Valid Period of Permission and Approval) \n\n34 \n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 63 of March 25, 1998]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 387 of December 25, 1997]" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9795488836601811, + "doc_id": "6f605ec032a012d2ba85ebeec9c4f8a37a5fcc544a4506cf64d941385c10990c", + "edit_distance": 0.042682926829268296, + "f1_score": 0.9966777408637874, + "meteor": 0.9838547264664973, + "precision": 0.9933774834437086, + "pred_md": "Article 10 The employee specified by Cabinet Order as prescribed in Article 53, paragraph (4), item (i) of the Act is an employee who falls under either of the following:\n\n- (i) a person who manages the operations at a business office or office or any other person specified by Order of Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry as being equivalent thereto; or\n- (ii) a person who manages the operations prohibited under Article 53, paragraph (1) or paragraph (2) of the Act or any other person specified by Order of Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry as being equivalent thereto (excluding those listed in the preceding item).\n\n## (Reports)\n\nArticle 11 The Minister of Economy, Trade and Industry may, within the limit necessary for the enforcement of the Act (limited to Chapter VI and Chapter Vi-3) and this Cabinet Order, collect necessary reports from a person who intend to export goods, a person who have exported goods or a person who have produced such goods, or another person concerned.\n\n## (Delegation of Authority)\n\nArticle 12 The following authority of the Minister of Economy, Trade and Industry is to be delegated to the Directors-General of Custom-Houses:\n\n- (i) the authority to grant approval under Article 2, paragraph (1) with respect to goods listed in the middle column of rows 39 to 41 and row 43 of Appended Table 2 (in the case of goods listed in the middle column of row 43 of the same table, excluding those specified by the Minister of Economy, Trade and Industry by public notice);\n- (ii) the following authority in the range designated by the Minister of Economy, Trade and Industry:\n- (a) the authority under Article 2, paragraph (1) to grant approval with respect to goods the price of which does not need to be settled in full by means of payment;\n- (b) the authority under Article 2, paragraph (1) to grant approval with respect to goods which have been carried, stored or transported into bonded areas and are to be revesseled from the bonded areas;\n- (c) the authority under Article 67, paragraph (1) of the Act to attach conditions to approval set forth in (a) or (b);\n- (d) the authority under Article 8, paragraph (2) to extend the valid period of permission under Article 48, paragraph (1) of the Act or approval under Article 2, paragraph (1).\n\n(Acts of Government Organs)\n\n6", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "- Article 10 The employee specified by Cabinet Order as prescribed in Article 53, paragraph (4), item (i) of the Act is an employee who falls under either of the following: \n\n- (i) a person who manages the operations at a business office or office or any other person specified by Order of Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry as being equivalent thereto; or \n\n- (ii) a person who manages the operations prohibited under Article 53, paragraph (1) or paragraph (2) of the Act or any other person specified by Order of Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry as being equivalent thereto (excluding those listed in the preceding item). \n\n- Article 11 The Minister of Economy, Trade and Industry may, within the limit necessary for the enforcement of the Act (limited to Chapter VI and Chapter Vi-3) and this Cabinet Order, collect necessary reports from a person who intend to export goods, a person who have exported goods or a person who have produced such goods, or another person concerned. \n\n- Article 12 The following authority of the Minister of Economy, Trade and Industry is to be delegated to the Directors-General of Custom-Houses: \n\n- (i) the authority to grant approval under Article 2, paragraph (1) with respect to goods listed in the middle column of rows 39 to 41 and row 43 of Appended Table 2 (in the case of goods listed in the middle column of row 43 of the same table, excluding those specified by the Minister of Economy, Trade and Industry by public notice); \n\n- (ii) the following authority in the range designated by the Minister of Economy, Trade and Industry: \n\n- (a) the authority under Article 2, paragraph (1) to grant approval with respect to goods the price of which does not need to be settled in full by means of payment; \n\n- (b) the authority under Article 2, paragraph (1) to grant approval with respect to goods which have been carried, stored or transported into bonded areas and are to be revesseled from the bonded areas; \n\n- (c) the authority under Article 67, paragraph (1) of the Act to attach conditions to approval set forth in (a) or (b); \n\n- (d) the authority under Article 8, paragraph (2) to extend the valid period of permission under Article 48, paragraph (1) of the Act or approval under Article 2, paragraph (1). \n\n(Acts of Government Organs) \n\n6 \n\n(Reports) \n\n(Delegation of Authority)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9430114500286346, + "doc_id": "6a3093d2ffd210cd77a5d8c0ece798875e936ea5da2b1e3d7eb83db6a6691333", + "edit_distance": 0.3816568047337278, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9753120539884632, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 207 of June 28, 1950] [Extract]\n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of June 30, 1950.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 306 of October 9, 1950]\n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of promulgation.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 375 of December 29, 1950] [Extract]\n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of January 1, 1951.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 200 of June 8, 1951] [Extract]\n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of promulgation.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 301 of September 21, 1951]\n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of September 25, 1951.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 384 of December 22, 1951] [Extract]\n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of January 1, 1952.\n- (2) With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 306 of July 31, 1952] [Extract]\n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of August 1, 1952.\n- (4) The Order Concerning Reports of Foreign Exchange Banks and Money Exchangers, the Export Trade Control Order, the Import Trade Control Order, the Foreign Exchange Control Order, or the Foreign Exchange Control Commission Rules, Order of the Prime Minister's Office, Order of the Ministry of Finance or Order of the Ministry of International Trade and Industry based\n\n8", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 207 of June 28, 1950] [Extract]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 306 of October 9, 1950]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 375 of December 29, 1950] [Extract]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 200 of June 8, 1951] [Extract]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 301 of September 21, 1951]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 384 of December 22, 1951] [Extract]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 306 of July 31, 1952] [Extract]\n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of September 25, 1951. \n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of promulgation. \n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of June 30, 1950. \n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of January 1, 1951. \n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of promulgation. \n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of January 1, 1952. \n\n- (2) With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable. \n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of August 1, 1952. \n\n- (4) The Order Concerning Reports of Foreign Exchange Banks and Money Exchangers, the Export Trade Control Order, the Import Trade Control Order, the Foreign Exchange Control Order, or the Foreign Exchange Control Commission Rules, Order of the Prime Minister's Office, Order of the Ministry of Finance or Order of the Ministry of International Trade and Industry based \n\n8" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9417220566030351, + "doc_id": "d803517ae76631c331f193b9d5d790e980102f60cde94bf3564bff091c21dfb2", + "edit_distance": 0.4688279301745636, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9224276861436768, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "that the provisions revising row 21-2 of Appended Table 2 come into effect as of November 1, 2001.\n\n(Transitional Measures Concerning Penal Provision)\n\n- (2) With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 439 of December 28, 2001]\n\n(Effective Date)\n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of April 1, 2002.\n\n(Transitional Measures Concerning Penal Provision)\n\n- (2) With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 209 of June 14, 2002]\n\n(Effective Date)\n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of July 15, 2002.\n\n(Transitional Measures Concerning Penal Provision)\n\n- (2) With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 288 of September 4, 2002]\n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect for each of the provisions listed as follows as of the date specified in the corresponding item:\n\n- (i) the part of the provisions of Article 1 that revises Article 11, item (i) of the Export Trade Control Order, and row 36, row 37, and row 43 of Appended Table 2, and the provisions of Article 2: The day on which the Convention on the Means of Prohibiting and Preventing the Illicit Import, Export and Transfer of Ownership of Cultural Property comes into effect in Japan;\n- (ii) the part of the provisions of Article 1 that revises row 1, (i) of Appended Table 1 of the Export Trade Control Order: September 30, 2002; (iii) the part of the provisions of Article 1 that revises row 35 of Appended Table 2 of the Export Trade Control Order (excluding the part adding the\n\n38", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "that the provisions revising row 21-2 of Appended Table 2 come into effect as of November 1, 2001. \n\n(Transitional Measures Concerning Penal Provision) \n\n(Effective Date) \n\n(Transitional Measures Concerning Penal Provision) \n\n(Effective Date) \n\n(Transitional Measures Concerning Penal Provision) \n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect for each of the provisions listed as follows as of the date specified in the corresponding item: \n\n- (2) With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable. \n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of April 1, 2002. \n\n- (2) With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable. \n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of July 15, 2002. \n\n- (2) With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable. \n\n- (i) the part of the provisions of Article 1 that revises Article 11, item (i) of the Export Trade Control Order, and row 36, row 37, and row 43 of Appended Table 2, and the provisions of Article 2: The day on which the Convention on the Means of Prohibiting and Preventing the Illicit Import, Export and Transfer of Ownership of Cultural Property comes into effect in Japan; \n\n- (ii) the part of the provisions of Article 1 that revises row 1, (i) of Appended Table 1 of the Export Trade Control Order: September 30, 2002; \n\n- (iii) the part of the provisions of Article 1 that revises row 35 of Appended Table 2 of the Export Trade Control Order (excluding the part adding the \n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 439 of December 28, 2001]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 209 of June 14, 2002]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 288 of September 4, 2002]\n\n38" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9129502175470501, + "doc_id": "164f9ee7ce2dd520f2bfeb0643ade113ed18af61711affea6e5175ebdb0619a9", + "edit_distance": 0.5377049180327869, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9202009810729915, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 424 of December 27, 1999]\n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of March 1, 2000.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 75 of March 17, 2000]\n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of April 3, 2000.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 224 of May 17, 2000]\n\n(Effective Date)\n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of promulgation.\n\n(Transitional Measures Concerning Penal Provision)\n\n- (2) With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 243 of June 2, 2000] [Extract]\n\n(Effective Date)\n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of October 1, 2000.\n\n(Transitional Measures)\n\n- (2) With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 311 of June 7, 2000] [Extract]\n\n(Effective Date)\n\nArticle 1 This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of enforcement of the Act for Partial Revision of the Cabinet Act (Act No. 88 of 1999) (January 6, 2001).\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 347 of June 23, 2000]\n\n36", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable. \n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 424 of December 27, 1999]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 75 of March 17, 2000]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 224 of May 17, 2000]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 243 of June 2, 2000] [Extract]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 311 of June 7, 2000] [Extract]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 347 of June 23, 2000]\n\n(Effective Date) \n\n(Transitional Measures) \n\n(Effective Date) \n\n(Transitional Measures Concerning Penal Provision) \n\n(Effective Date) \n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of April 3, 2000. \n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of March 1, 2000. \n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of promulgation. \n\n- (2) With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable. \n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of October 1, 2000. \n\n- (2) With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable. \n\n- Article 1 This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of enforcement of the Act for Partial Revision of the Cabinet Act (Act No. 88 of 1999) (January 6, 2001). \n\n36" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9960684156239338, + "doc_id": "92374cee0bcedfdbd383144ca04184db7a0787fa6639b6d7a07d390beb4c63f3", + "edit_distance": 0.0035026269702276708, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999996642842685, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "export restrictions under the treaties and other international agreements that Japan has signed;\n\n- (d) goods for public use sent to embassies, legations, consulates and other equivalent facilities of Japan;\n- (e) goods imported without charge for the purpose of export without charge, which are specified by the Minister of Economy, Trade and Industry by public notice;\n- (f) goods to be exported without charge for the purpose of import without charge, which are specified by the Minister of Economy, Trade and Industry by public notice;\n- (iii) where a person intends to export goods listed in row 16 of Appended Table 1 (excluding Temporarily Landed Goods to Foreign Countries) designating the regions listed in the right-hand column of the same row as the destination, except for cases falling under any of the following (or except for cases falling under any of (a), (b), or (d), if that person intends to export goods to a region other than those listed in Appended Table 3-2):\n- (a) where the case falls under cases specified by Order of the Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry wherein the goods are likely to be used for the Development, etc. of Nuclear Weapons, etc.;\n- (b) where notice has been made by the Minister of Economy, Trade and Industry that an application for permission should be filed because the goods are likely to be used for the Development, etc. of Nuclear Weapons, etc.;\n- (c) where the case falls under cases specified by Order of the Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry wherein the goods are likely to be used for the development, manufacture or use of the goods listed in the middle column of row 1 of Appended Table 1 (excluding goods falling under the category of nuclear weapons, etc.; the same applies in (d));\n- (d) where notice has been made by the Minister of Economy, Trade and Industry that an application for permission should be filed because the goods are likely to be used for the development, manufacture or use of the goods listed in the middle column of row 1 of Appended Table 1;\n- (iv) where a person intends to export goods listed in the middle column of rows 5 to 13 or row 15 of Appended Table 1, the total value of which is not more than 1,000,000 yen (or 50,000 yen in the case of goods listed in Appended Table 3-3) (excluding Temporarily Landed Goods to Foreign Countries) designating a region other than those listed in Appended Table 4 as the destination (except for cases falling under any of (a), (b) or (d) of the preceding item (iii) if that person intends to export goods to a region other than those listed in Appended Table 3 (or except for cases falling under any of (a) to (d) of the same item if that person intends to export goods to the\n\n3", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "export restrictions under the treaties and other international agreements that Japan has signed; \n\n3 \n\n- (d) goods for public use sent to embassies, legations, consulates and other equivalent facilities of Japan; \n\n- (e) goods imported without charge for the purpose of export without charge, which are specified by the Minister of Economy, Trade and Industry by public notice; \n\n- (f) goods to be exported without charge for the purpose of import without charge, which are specified by the Minister of Economy, Trade and Industry by public notice; \n\n- (iii) where a person intends to export goods listed in row 16 of Appended Table 1 (excluding Temporarily Landed Goods to Foreign Countries) designating the regions listed in the right-hand column of the same row as the destination, except for cases falling under any of the following (or except for cases falling under any of (a), (b), or (d), if that person intends to export goods to a region other than those listed in Appended Table 3-2): \n\n- (a) where the case falls under cases specified by Order of the Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry wherein the goods are likely to be used for the Development, etc. of Nuclear Weapons, etc.; \n\n- (b) where notice has been made by the Minister of Economy, Trade and Industry that an application for permission should be filed because the goods are likely to be used for the Development, etc. of Nuclear Weapons, etc.; \n\n- (c) where the case falls under cases specified by Order of the Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry wherein the goods are likely to be used for the development, manufacture or use of the goods listed in the middle column of row 1 of Appended Table 1 (excluding goods falling under the category of nuclear weapons, etc.; the same applies in (d)); \n\n- (d) where notice has been made by the Minister of Economy, Trade and Industry that an application for permission should be filed because the goods are likely to be used for the development, manufacture or use of the goods listed in the middle column of row 1 of Appended Table 1; \n\n- (iv) where a person intends to export goods listed in the middle column of rows 5 to 13 or row 15 of Appended Table 1, the total value of which is not more than 1,000,000 yen (or 50,000 yen in the case of goods listed in Appended Table 3-3) (excluding Temporarily Landed Goods to Foreign Countries) designating a region other than those listed in Appended Table 4 as the destination (except for cases falling under any of (a), (b) or (d) of the preceding item (iii) if that person intends to export goods to a region other than those listed in Appended Table 3 (or except for cases falling under any of (a) to (d) of the same item if that person intends to export goods to the" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9087464017973454, + "doc_id": "17c2db4d6fb601ce5cda1b5ccb3ab8d5a6145c66e63dfa5ae4f2c363b16bd0f5", + "edit_distance": 0.4540059347181009, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.8509943114125957, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 157 of June 10, 1960] [Extract]\n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of July 1, 1960.\n\nSupplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 163 of June 20, 1960] This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of June 23, 1960.\n\nSupplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 219 of July 28, 1960] This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of August 1, 1960.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 279 of October 25, 1960] [Extract]\n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of November 1, 1960.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 316 of December 28, 1960]\n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of January 10, 1961.\n- (2) With regard to export of goods to Iran or Iraq conducted as approved or permitted under Article 1, paragraph (1) or Article 2, paragraph (1) prior to the revision, the provisions of Article 1, paragraph (1), item (i)-2 after the revision do not apply.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 127 of May 4, 1961] [Extract]\n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of May 8, 1961.\n\nSupplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 264 of July 17, 1961] This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of July 20, 1961.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 380 of November 20, 1961]\n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of November 25, 1961.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 416 of December 21, 1961]\n\n11", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 157 of June 10, 1960] [Extract]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 163 of June 20, 1960]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 219 of July 28, 1960]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 279 of October 25, 1960] [Extract]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 316 of December 28, 1960]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 127 of May 4, 1961] [Extract]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 264 of July 17, 1961]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 380 of November 20, 1961]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 416 of December 21, 1961]\n\n11 \n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of July 20, 1961. \n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of November 25, 1961. \n\n- (2) With regard to export of goods to Iran or Iraq conducted as approved or permitted under Article 1, paragraph (1) or Article 2, paragraph (1) prior to the revision, the provisions of Article 1, paragraph (1), item (i)-2 after the revision do not apply. \n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of May 8, 1961. \n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of January 10, 1961. \n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of November 1, 1960. \n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of July 1, 1960. \n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of June 23, 1960. \n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of August 1, 1960." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.945851967114812, + "doc_id": "fa716b5b0a0248d710af4adf482a13d9680e90f209def25f51d6e0f2343a1bb8", + "edit_distance": 0.41005291005291006, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9092731307254976, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of September 1, 1964.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 387 of December 28, 1964]\n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of promulgation.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 245 of July 5, 1965]\n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of promulgation; provided, however, that the provisions adding row 174-3 after row 174-2 of Appended Table 1 come into effect as of July 15, 1965.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 332 of October 5, 1965]\n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of November 15, 1965; provided however, that the provisions revising row 26 of Appended Table 1, the provisions revising row 30 of the same table, the provisions revising row 72 and row 73 of the same table, the provisions revising row 101 and row 102 of the same table, the provisions revising row 105 of the same table, the provisions revising row 112 of the same table, and the provisions revising row 116 of the same table come into effect as of the date of promulgation, and the provisions revising row 4 of the same table and the provisions revising row 9 of the same table come into effect as of October 15, 1965.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 350 of November 5, 1965] [Extract]\n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of November 8, 1965.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 353 of November 11, 1965] [Extract]\n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of December 1, 1965.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 366 of December 2, 1965]\n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of December 9, 1965.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 10 of February 3, 1966]\n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of February 10, 1966.\n\n13", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of September 1, 1964. \n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of promulgation. \n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of promulgation; provided, however, that the provisions adding row 174-3 after row 174-2 of Appended Table 1 come into effect as of July 15, 1965. \n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of November 15, 1965; provided however, that the provisions revising row 26 of Appended Table 1, the provisions revising row 30 of the same table, the provisions revising row 72 and row 73 of the same table, the provisions revising row 101 and row 102 of the same table, the provisions revising row 105 of the same table, the provisions revising row 112 of the same table, and the provisions revising row 116 of the same table come into effect as of the date of promulgation, and the provisions revising row 4 of the same table and the provisions revising row 9 of the same table come into effect as of October 15, 1965. \n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of December 9, 1965. \n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of February 10, 1966. \n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of November 8, 1965. \n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of December 1, 1965. \n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 387 of December 28, 1964]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 245 of July 5, 1965]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 332 of October 5, 1965]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 350 of November 5, 1965] [Extract]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 353 of November 11, 1965] [Extract]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 366 of December 2, 1965]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 10 of February 3, 1966]\n\n13" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "6dfed4e9fb694366704149d8a1bec8213f610f72e976bc4dbae655d2467238bc", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.5, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "69", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "69" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "733622c9bbefea10ae0bd2f3630811fec439fb3ef98ea3e08309b795881df34b", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.5, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "63", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "63" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9734502703603667, + "doc_id": "88b848ed7babd104f41865198c37151c42496d9ebc25b3262d9317ad9f3a992a", + "edit_distance": 0.49375, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.8061568648726852, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Article 1, paragraph (1) of the Export Trade Control Order with respect to export of goods to Iran, the provisions then in force remain applicable\n\n- (3) With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 278 of September 14, 1981]\n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of October 12, 1981; provided, however, that the provisions deleting row 1 of Appended Table 1 and changing row 2 of the same table to row 1 of the same table, the provisions deleting row 44 of the same table and changing row 43-2 of the same table into row 44 of the same table, the provisions deleting row 58-2 of the same table, the provisions revising row 59, row 68 to row 70, row 77, row 84, row 92, row 103 and row 124 of the same table, the provisions deleting row 148-2 of the same table, the provisions revising row 166 of the same table, the provisions revising item (i) of the Notes of the same table (excluding the provisions adding \", Cuba\" after \"Canada\" and the provisions adding \", Ethiopia\" after \"Egypt\"), the provisions deleting row 1 of Appended Table 3, and the provisions revising row 1 of Appended Table 5 come into effect as of the date of promulgation.\n- (2) With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 39 of March 21, 1984]\n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of April 10, 1984; provided, however that the provisions revising row 32 of Appended Table 1 come into effect as of the date of promulgation.\n- (2) With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 248 of July 27, 1984]\n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of August 3, 1984.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 7 of January 25, 1985]\n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of February 15, 1985; provided, however, that the provisions adding one paragraph to Article 4, the provisions\n\n20", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Article 1, paragraph (1) of the Export Trade Control Order with respect to export of goods to Iran, the provisions then in force remain applicable \n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of August 3, 1984. \n\n20 \n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of February 15, 1985; provided, however, that the provisions adding one paragraph to Article 4, the provisions \n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of April 10, 1984; provided, however that the provisions revising row 32 of Appended Table 1 come into effect as of the date of promulgation. \n\n- (2) With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable. \n\n- (2) With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable. \n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of October 12, 1981; provided, however, that the provisions deleting row 1 of Appended Table 1 and changing row 2 of the same table to row 1 of the same table, the provisions deleting row 44 of the same table and changing row 43-2 of the same table into row 44 of the same table, the provisions deleting row 58-2 of the same table, the provisions revising row 59, row 68 to row 70, row 77, row 84, row 92, row 103 and row 124 of the same table, the provisions deleting row 148-2 of the same table, the provisions revising row 166 of the same table, the provisions revising item (i) of the Notes of the same table (excluding the provisions adding \", Cuba\" after \"Canada\" and the provisions adding \", Ethiopia\" after \"Egypt\"), the provisions deleting row 1 of Appended Table 3, and the provisions revising row 1 of Appended Table 5 come into effect as of the date of promulgation. \n\n- (3) With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable. \n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 278 of September 14, 1981]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 39 of March 21, 1984]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 248 of July 27, 1984]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 7 of January 25, 1985]" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9146555674022671, + "doc_id": "9416a54f3443b0b223859342220b80a264667fb2668bb48de75b782f5b923ab7", + "edit_distance": 0.8548387096774194, + "f1_score": 0.9946236559139785, + "meteor": 0.7907139126435423, + "precision": 0.9946236559139785, + "pred_md": "(excluding those for photographs or moving pictures and including those that record sounds or others equivalent thereto);\n\n(xx) video camera recorders and digital cameras\n\n(xxi) radio receivers (including those that can receive cordless telephones or radio telegraphy);\n\n(xxii) television sets (limited to color television sets specified by the Minister of Economy, Trade and Industry by public notice), video monitors (limited to color video monitors), and video projectors;\n\n(xxiii) automobiles and vehicles specially designed for snow driving (in the case of vehicles specially designed for snow driving, limited to those specified by the Minister of Economy, Trade and Industry in a public notice);\n\n(xxiv) motorcycles (including mopeds) and motor-assisted bicycles;\n\n(xxv) yachts or other vessels for recreation or sports, and canoes;\n\n(xxvi) cameras (limited to single-lens reflex cameras);\n\n(xxvii) moving picture cameras and projectors;\n\n(xxviii) projectors, photographic enlarger, and photographic reducers (excluding moving pictures);\n\n(xxix) projection screens;\n\n(xxx) wristwatches, pocket watches, or other portable watches (including stopwatches);\n\n(xxxi) musical instruments and components and accessories therefor; (xxxi)-2 sports gear, and components and accessories therefor (limited to those specified by the Minister of Economy, Trade and Industry in a public notice); (xxxii) fountain pens;\n\n(xxxiii) works of art, collections, and antiques.\n\n## Appended Table 3 (Re: Article 4)\n\nArgentina, Australia, Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, Canada, Czech Republic, Denmark, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Ireland, Italy, Luxembourg, Netherlands, New Zealand, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, United Kingdom of Great Britain and Northern Ireland, and United States of America\n\n## Appended Table 3-2 (Re: Article 4)\n\nAfghanistan, Central African Republic, Democratic Republic of the Congo, Iraq, Lebanon, Libya, North Korea, Somalia, Republic of South Sudan, and Sudan\n\n## Appended Table 3-3 (Re: Article 4)\n\nGoods listed in row 5 (xiv) or (xviii), row 7 (ii) or (xv), the middle column of row 8, row 9 (i) or (vi), row 10 (i), (ii), (iv), (vi), (vii), (ix), (ix)-2 or (xi), row 12 (i),\n\n72", + "recall": 0.9946236559139785, + "true_md": "(excluding those for photographs or moving pictures and including those that record sounds or others equivalent thereto); \n\nAppended Table 3 (Re: Article 4) \n\nArgentina, Australia, Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, Canada, Czech Republic, Denmark, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Ireland, Italy, Luxembourg, Netherlands, New Zealand, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, United Kingdom of Great Britain and Northern Ireland, and United States of America \n\nAppended Table 3-2 (Re: Article 4) \n\nAfghanistan, Central African Republic, Democratic Republic of the Congo, Iraq, Lebanon, Libya, North Korea, Somalia, Republic of South Sudan, and Sudan \n\nAppended Table 3-3 (Re: Article 4) \n\nGoods listed in row 5 (xiv) or (xviii), row 7 (ii) or (xv), the middle column of row 8, row 9 (i) or (vi), row 10 (i), (ii), (iv), (vi), (vii), (ix), (ix)-2 or (xi), row 12 (i), \n\n72 \n\n- (xx) video camera recorders and digital cameras \n\n- (xxi) radio receivers (including those that can receive cordless telephones or radio telegraphy); \n\n- (xxii) television sets (limited to color television sets specified by the Minister of Economy, Trade and Industry by public notice), video monitors (limited to color video monitors), and video projectors; \n\n- (xxiii) automobiles and vehicles specially designed for snow driving (in the case of vehicles specially designed for snow driving, limited to those specified by the Minister of Economy, Trade and Industry in a public notice); \n\n- (xxiv) motorcycles (including mopeds) and motor-assisted bicycles; \n\n- (xxv) yachts or other vessels for recreation or sports, and canoes; \n\n- (xxvi) cameras (limited to single-lens reflex cameras); \n\n- (xxvii) moving picture cameras and projectors; \n\n- (xxviii) projectors, photographic enlarger, and photographic reducers (excluding moving pictures); \n\n- (xxix) projection screens; \n\n- (xxx) wristwatches, pocket watches, or other portable watches (including stopwatches); \n\n- (xxxi) musical instruments and components and accessories therefor; \n\n- (xxxi)-2 sports gear, and components and accessories therefor (limited to those specified by the Minister of Economy, Trade and Industry in a public notice); \n\n- (xxxii) fountain pens; \n\n- (xxxiii) works of art, collections, and antiques." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "2fb4d09a5aebb05ee808dc958ee79d7c1a9637cd6a4820da60c64ced04e2c2e4", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.5, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "66", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "66" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "908f4e44a9cdc94bfc86696ab8ab74bb17680023f9e6fe8c4c611e816828547e", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.5, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "64", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "64" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "8f31c203f3f843840b3c33489a4db89bf6d6bdc2fd138e56a129b58cd9b56b04", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.5, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "59", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "59" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "9678b297efb1a78b32b8c41b15040aa168e05e5723cccf02ae0a5146443e0a90", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.5, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "58", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "58" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9673003622593789, + "doc_id": "675bdee15957d222678cb6aa6b547c9a73fcfed62730fa7ab31b27c295e7026d", + "edit_distance": 0.41363636363636364, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.931342253240045, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 17 of January 28, 1994]\n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of promulgation.\n- (2) With regard to a transaction conducted for the purpose of providing specified technology, as permitted, by a person who has obtained, prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, permission under Article 17-2, paragraph (1) of the Foreign Exchange Control Order prior to the revision with respect to transactions for the purpose of providing specified technology in the Czech Republic or Slovakia, the provisions then in force remain applicable.\n- (3) With regard to export of goods conducted, as permitted, by a person who has obtained, prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, permission under Article 1, paragraph (1) of the Export Trade Control Order prior to the revision with respect to export of goods to the Czech Republic or Slovakia, the provisions then in force remain applicable.\n- (4) With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 113 of March 31, 1994] [Extract]\n\n(Effective Date)\n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of April 1, 1994.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 143 of May 24, 1994]\n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of May 27, 1994.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 153 of June 24, 1994] [Extract]\n\n(Effective Date)\n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of July 6, 1994; provided, however, that the part of the provisions of Article 1 that revises row 8 of the Appended Table of the Foreign Exchange Control Order (limited to the part of the provisions of (ii) of the same row that changes the phrase \"goods listed in row 8(i) of Appended Table 1 of the Export Trade Control Order\" to \"computers, or auxiliaries or components therefor\"), and the part of the provisions of Article 2 that revises row 8 of Appended Table 1 of the Export Trade Control Order come into effect as of the date of promulgation.\n\n28", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of promulgation. \n\n- (2) With regard to a transaction conducted for the purpose of providing specified technology, as permitted, by a person who has obtained, prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, permission under Article 17-2, paragraph (1) of the Foreign Exchange Control Order prior to the revision with respect to transactions for the purpose of providing specified technology in the Czech Republic or Slovakia, the provisions then in force remain applicable. \n\n- (3) With regard to export of goods conducted, as permitted, by a person who has obtained, prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, permission under Article 1, paragraph (1) of the Export Trade Control Order prior to the revision with respect to export of goods to the Czech Republic or Slovakia, the provisions then in force remain applicable. \n\n- (4) With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable. \n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of April 1, 1994. \n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of July 6, 1994; provided, however, that the part of the provisions of Article 1 that revises row 8 of the Appended Table of the Foreign Exchange Control Order (limited to the part of the provisions of (ii) of the same row that changes the phrase \"goods listed in row 8(i) of Appended Table 1 of the Export Trade Control Order\" to \"computers, or auxiliaries or components therefor\"), and the part of the provisions of Article 2 that revises row 8 of Appended Table 1 of the Export Trade Control Order come into effect as of the date of promulgation. \n\n(Effective Date) \n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of May 27, 1994. \n\n(Effective Date) \n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 17 of January 28, 1994]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 113 of March 31, 1994] [Extract]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 143 of May 24, 1994]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 153 of June 24, 1994] [Extract]\n\n28" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9751120765491599, + "doc_id": "ccbdc47ea670d3d9b6d517000540418b718f1928f98ced53dc83eb6a8162a7bf", + "edit_distance": 0.1816326530612245, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9541786961465681, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "revision with respect to transactions for the purpose of providing the technologies listed in row 2(ii) of the Appended Table of the same Order, to which the provisions of Article 17-2, paragraph (3) of the Foreign Exchange Control Order after the revision applies, the provisions then in force remain applicable.\n\n- (3) With regard to export of goods conducted, as permitted, by a person who has obtained, prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, permission under Article 1, paragraph (1) of the Export Trade Control Order prior to the revision with respect to export of goods listed in row 2(xii) of Appended Table 1 of the same Order, to which the provisions of Article 1, paragraph (2) or Article 2, paragraph (1), item (i) of the Export Trade Control Order after the revision applies, the provisions then in force remain applicable.\n- (4) With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 250 of August 23, 1996] [Extract]\n\n## (Effective Date)\n\nArticle 1 This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of September 13, 1996.\n\n## (Transitional Measures)\n\nArticle 2 With regard to a service transaction conducted, as permitted, by a person who has obtained, prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, permission under Article 17-2, paragraph (3) of the Foreign Exchange Control Order prior to the revision with respect to transactions for the purpose of providing the technologies listed in the middle column of row 5 to row 15 of the Appended Table of the same Order, to which the provisions of Article 17-2, paragraph (1) of the Foreign Exchange Control Order after the revision applies, the provisions then in force remain applicable.\n\nArticle 3 With regard to export of goods conducted, as permitted or approved, by a person who has obtained, prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, permission under Article 1, paragraph (2) of the Export Trade Control Order prior to the revision or approval under Article 2, paragraph (1), item (i) of the same Order with respect to export of goods listed in the middle column of row 5 to row 15 of Appended Table 1 of the same Order, to which the provisions of Article 1, paragraph (1) of the Export Trade Control Order after the revision applies, the provisions then in force remain applicable.\n\n31", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "revision with respect to transactions for the purpose of providing the technologies listed in row 2(ii) of the Appended Table of the same Order, to which the provisions of Article 17-2, paragraph (3) of the Foreign Exchange Control Order after the revision applies, the provisions then in force remain applicable. \n\n(Effective Date) \n\nArticle 1 This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of September 13, 1996. \n\n(Transitional Measures) \n\n- (3) With regard to export of goods conducted, as permitted, by a person who has obtained, prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, permission under Article 1, paragraph (1) of the Export Trade Control Order prior to the revision with respect to export of goods listed in row 2(xii) of Appended Table 1 of the same Order, to which the provisions of Article 1, paragraph (2) or Article 2, paragraph (1), item (i) of the Export Trade Control Order after the revision applies, the provisions then in force remain applicable. \n\n- (4) With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable. \n\n- Article 2 With regard to a service transaction conducted, as permitted, by a person who has obtained, prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, permission under Article 17-2, paragraph (3) of the Foreign Exchange Control Order prior to the revision with respect to transactions for the purpose of providing the technologies listed in the middle column of row 5 to row 15 of the Appended Table of the same Order, to which the provisions of Article 17-2, paragraph (1) of the Foreign Exchange Control Order after the revision applies, the provisions then in force remain applicable. \n\n- Article 3 With regard to export of goods conducted, as permitted or approved, by a person who has obtained, prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, permission under Article 1, paragraph (2) of the Export Trade Control Order prior to the revision or approval under Article 2, paragraph (1), item (i) of the same Order with respect to export of goods listed in the middle column of row 5 to row 15 of Appended Table 1 of the same Order, to which the provisions of Article 1, paragraph (1) of the Export Trade Control Order after the revision applies, the provisions then in force remain applicable. \n\n31 \n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 250 of August 23, 1996] [Extract]" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9820476493039656, + "doc_id": "70056f99712e3642c42a993f8fd855c48e6b56fb944afd103ff9d5d190eca3c2", + "edit_distance": 0.15076335877862596, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9582667131524035, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of promulgation; provided, however, that the provisions revising row 28 and row 30 of Appended Table 1 come into effect as of April 16, 1989.\n- (2) With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 202 of June 30, 1989]\n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of July 9, 1989; provided, however, that the provisions revising Appended Table 3 come into effect as of the date of promulgation.\n- (2) With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of the provisions revising Appended Table 3, the provisions then in force remain applicable.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 290 of September 29, 1989]\n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of promulgation; provided, however, that the revising provisions listed as follows come into effect as of the date listed in the corresponding item:\n- (i) the part of the provisions of Article 1 that revises row 1-2, row 5-3, row 8-2, row 8-3, row 9-2, row 12-2, row 12-3, row 18-2, and row 25 of the Appended Table of the Foreign Exchange Control Order and the part of the provisions of Article 2 that revises row 17, row 26, row 80, row 90, row 98, row 102, row 103, row 105, row 110, row 121, row 126, row 136, row 137, and row 151 of Appended Table 1 of the Export Trade Control Order: October 16, 1989;\n- (ii) the part of the provisions of Article 1 that revises row 1-3, row 5-2, row 7-2, row 10, and row 26 of the Appended Table of the Foreign Exchange Control Order and the part of the provisions of Article 2 that revises row 21, row 22, row 55, row 74, row 77-2, row 93, row 111, row 112, row 120, row 147, row 148, row 153, row 154, row 159, row 183, and row 184 of Appended Table 1 of the Export Trade Control Order: October 26, 1989.\n- (2) With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 350 of December 27, 1989]\n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of January 20, 1990; provided,\n\n23", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of promulgation; provided, however, that the provisions revising row 28 and row 30 of Appended Table 1 come into effect as of April 16, 1989. \n\n- (2) With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable. \n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of July 9, 1989; provided, however, that the provisions revising Appended Table 3 come into effect as of the date of promulgation. \n\n- (2) With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of the provisions revising Appended Table 3, the provisions then in force remain applicable. \n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of promulgation; provided, however, that the revising provisions listed as follows come into effect as of the date listed in the corresponding item: \n\n- (i) the part of the provisions of Article 1 that revises row 1-2, row 5-3, row 8-2, row 8-3, row 9-2, row 12-2, row 12-3, row 18-2, and row 25 of the Appended Table of the Foreign Exchange Control Order and the part of the provisions of Article 2 that revises row 17, row 26, row 80, row 90, row 98, row 102, row 103, row 105, row 110, row 121, row 126, row 136, row 137, and row 151 of Appended Table 1 of the Export Trade Control Order: October 16, 1989; \n\n- (ii) the part of the provisions of Article 1 that revises row 1-3, row 5-2, row 7-2, row 10, and row 26 of the Appended Table of the Foreign Exchange Control Order and the part of the provisions of Article 2 that revises row 21, row 22, row 55, row 74, row 77-2, row 93, row 111, row 112, row 120, row 147, row 148, row 153, row 154, row 159, row 183, and row 184 of Appended Table 1 of the Export Trade Control Order: October 26, 1989. \n\n- (2) With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable. \n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of January 20, 1990; provided, \n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 350 of December 27, 1989]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 202 of June 30, 1989]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 290 of September 29, 1989]\n\n23" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9666659478936722, + "doc_id": "706ec63d665a373dfe803ff411b5aba1af9bd003c4e2026a04a24bcf34272e64", + "edit_distance": 0.08793103448275862, + "f1_score": 0.99375, + "meteor": 0.991346942875668, + "precision": 0.99375, + "pred_md": "Article 13 (1) The provisions of this Cabinet Order do not apply where the Minister of Economy, Trade and Industry exports goods.\n\n- (2) The provisions of Article 5 apply mutatis mutandis to the case set forth in the preceding paragraph.\n\n(Goods That Are Especially Likely to Be Used for the Development of Nuclear Weapons)\n\nArticle 14 Goods specified by Cabinet Order as prescribed in Article 69-6, paragraph (2), item (ii) of the Act are to be those listed in row 1 (excluding (v), (vi), and (x) to (xii)) of Appended Table 1 and those listed in the middle column of row 2 to row 4 of the same table (excluding nuclear weapons, etc.).\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Extract]\n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of promulgation.\n- (2) A person who has obtained permission for export under the provisions of an order based on the Order on Temporary Measures for Trade, etc. (Imperial Order No. 328 of 1946) prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order is to be deemed to have obtained permission set forth in Article 1, paragraph (1).\n- (3) Up until April 13, 2021, the term \"goods listed in Appended Table 2-2 (excluding goods listed in the middle column of row 1, row 36, row 39 to row 41, and row 43 to row 45 of Appended Table 2) to North Korea\" in Article 2, paragraph (1), item (i)-2 is to be deemed to be replaced with \"goods (excluding goods listed in the middle column of row1, row 19 to row 21-3, row 25, row 30, row 33, row 35 to row 41, and row 43 to row 45 of Appended Table 2-1) to North Korea\"; the term \"goods listed in Appended Table 5, item (ii) and item (iii)\" in Article 4, paragraph (2), item (ii), (c) is to be deemed to be replaced with \"goods listed in Appended Table 5, item (ii), which are exported to North Korea, and goods listed in item (iii) of the same table\"; the term \"of the same table\" in paragraph (3) of the same Article is to be deemed to be replaced with \"of the same table; provided, however, that this is not limited to goods which are exported to North Korea\"; and the term \"Articles 2 and 4\" in Appended Table 22 shall be deemed to be replaced with \"Article 4.\"\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 13 of January 28, 1950]\n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of promulgation.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 122 of May 4, 1950]\n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of May 8, 1950.\n\n7", + "recall": 0.99375, + "true_md": "- Article 13 (1) The provisions of this Cabinet Order do not apply where the Minister of Economy, Trade and Industry exports goods. \n\n- (2) The provisions of Article 5 apply mutatis mutandis to the case set forth in the preceding paragraph. \n\n- (Goods That Are Especially Likely to Be Used for the Development of Nuclear Weapons) \n\n- Article 14 Goods specified by Cabinet Order as prescribed in Article 69-6, paragraph (2), item (ii) of the Act are to be those listed in row 1 (excluding (v), (vi), and (x) to (xii)) of Appended Table 1 and those listed in the middle column of row 2 to row 4 of the same table (excluding nuclear weapons, etc.). \n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of promulgation. \n\n- (2) A person who has obtained permission for export under the provisions of an order based on the Order on Temporary Measures for Trade, etc. (Imperial Order No. 328 of 1946) prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order is to be deemed to have obtained permission set forth in Article 1, paragraph (1). \n\n- (3) Up until April 13, 2021, the term \"goods listed in Appended Table 2-2 (excluding goods listed in the middle column of row 1, row 36, row 39 to row 41, and row 43 to row 45 of Appended Table 2) to North Korea\" in Article 2, paragraph (1), item (i)-2 is to be deemed to be replaced with \"goods (excluding goods listed in the middle column of row1, row 19 to row 21-3, row 25, row 30, row 33, row 35 to row 41, and row 43 to row 45 of Appended Table 2-1) to North Korea\"; the term \"goods listed in Appended Table 5, item (ii) and item (iii)\" in Article 4, paragraph (2), item (ii), (c) is to be deemed to be replaced with \"goods listed in Appended Table 5, item (ii), which are exported to North Korea, and goods listed in item (iii) of the same table\"; the term \"of the same table\" in paragraph (3) of the same Article is to be deemed to be replaced with \"of the same table; provided, however, that this is not limited to goods which are exported to North Korea\"; and the term \"Articles 2 and 4\" in Appended Table 2- 2 shall be deemed to be replaced with \"Article 4.\" \n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of promulgation. \n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of May 8, 1950. \n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 13 of January 28, 1950]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 122 of May 4, 1950]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Extract]\n\n7" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9548707248088796, + "doc_id": "47a1264b952fd92bdc54eaf0950b4d8e395b37719dcd31e6845012eafd1d559f", + "edit_distance": 0.3763440860215054, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9313964358900562, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "follows as of the date specified in the corresponding item:\n\n- (i) the provisions revising row 27 of Appended Table 2: April 1, 1995;\n- (ii) the provisions revising row 21-2 of Appended Table 2: April 4, 1995;\n- (iii) the provisions revising Article 2, paragraph (1), item (iii), row 24 of Appended Table 2, and row 4 of Appended Table 7: May 1, 1995;\n\n(iv) the provisions revising row 35 of Appended Table 2: June 14, 1995.\n\n- (2) With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of the provisions listed in item (i) or item (iii) of the preceding paragraph, the provisions then in force remain applicable.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 240 of June 14, 1995] [Extract]\n\n## (Effective Date)\n\nArticle 1 This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of enforcement of the Act for Partial Revision of the Act on Conservation of Endangered Species of Wild Fauna and Flora (June 28, 1995).\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 311 of August 9, 1995]\n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of August 23, 1995.\n- (2) With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 420 of December 20, 1995] [Extract]\n\n## (Effective Date)\n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of October 1, 1996; provided, however, that the provisions listed as follows come into effect as of the date specified in the corresponding item:\n- (ii) the part of the provisions of Article 2 that revises row 2 of Appended Table 1 of the Export Trade Control Order (limited to the part related to (xv) of the same row), and the provisions revising row 3-2 and row 6 of the same table: January 3, 1996.\n\n## (Transitional Measures)\n\n- (2) With regard to a service transaction conducted, as permitted, by a person who has obtained, prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, permission under Article 17-2, paragraph (1) of the Foreign Exchange Control Order prior to the\n\n30", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "follows as of the date specified in the corresponding item: \n\n- (i) the provisions revising row 27 of Appended Table 2: April 1, 1995; \n\n- (ii) the provisions revising row 21-2 of Appended Table 2: April 4, 1995; \n\n- (iv) the provisions revising row 35 of Appended Table 2: June 14, 1995. \n\n- (iii) the provisions revising Article 2, paragraph (1), item (iii), row 24 of Appended Table 2, and row 4 of Appended Table 7: May 1, 1995; \n\n- (2) With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of the provisions listed in item (i) or item (iii) of the preceding paragraph, the provisions then in force remain applicable. \n\n- Article 1 This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of enforcement of the Act for Partial Revision of the Act on Conservation of Endangered Species of Wild Fauna and Flora (June 28, 1995). \n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of August 23, 1995. \n\n- (2) With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable. \n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of October 1, 1996; provided, however, that the provisions listed as follows come into effect as of the date specified in the corresponding item: \n\n- (ii) the part of the provisions of Article 2 that revises row 2 of Appended Table 1 of the Export Trade Control Order (limited to the part related to (xv) of the same row), and the provisions revising row 3-2 and row 6 of the same table: January 3, 1996. \n\n- (2) With regard to a service transaction conducted, as permitted, by a person who has obtained, prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, permission under Article 17-2, paragraph (1) of the Foreign Exchange Control Order prior to the \n\n30 \n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 420 of December 20, 1995] [Extract]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 311 of August 9, 1995]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 240 of June 14, 1995] [Extract]\n\n(Effective Date) \n\n(Effective Date) \n\n(Transitional Measures)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.947961536142922, + "doc_id": "209c31da019254691a030b8d05544995f59db0624fbef3119c4b9eca875c1e42", + "edit_distance": 0.2770448548812665, + "f1_score": 0.9947643979057591, + "meteor": 0.9786669389711269, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "however, that the provisions revising row 11, row 79, row 109 and row 176 of Appended Table 1 and the provisions adding one row next to row 201-2 of the same table come into effect as of June 1, 1968.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 158 of June 13, 1968] [Extract]\n\n(1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of June 15, 1968.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 261 of October 11, 1969]\n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of November 1, 1969; provided, however, that the provisions revising row 1, row 27, row 63, row 117, row 158, row 160, and row 170 of Appended Table 1, the provisions revising row 1 of Appended Table 3, and the part of the provisions revising row 5 of the same table that deletes the terms \", 63\" and \", 160\" come into effect as of the date of promulgation.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 266 of October 28, 1969]\n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of November 1, 1969.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 1 of January 22, 1970]\n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of January 27, 1970.\n\nSupplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 327 of October 12, 1971] This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of October 15, 1971.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 84 of April 25, 1972]\n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of promulgation.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 111 of April 28, 1972]\n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the day on which the agreement between Japan and the United States of America concerning the Ryukyu Islands and the Daito Islands comes into effect (May 15, 1972).\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 373 of October 4, 1972]\n\n15", + "recall": 0.9895833333333334, + "true_md": "however, that the provisions revising row 11, row 79, row 109 and row 176 of Appended Table 1 and the provisions adding one row next to row 201-2 of the same table come into effect as of June 1, 1968. \n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 158 of June 13, 1968] [Extract]\n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of June 15, 1968. \n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 261 of October 11, 1969]\n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of November 1, 1969; provided, however, that the provisions revising row 1, row 27, row 63, row 117, row 158, row 160, and row 170 of Appended Table 1, the provisions revising row 1 of Appended Table 3, and the part of the provisions revising row 5 of the same table that deletes the terms \", 63\" and \", 160\" come into effect as of the date of promulgation. \n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 266 of October 28, 1969]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 1 of January 22, 1970]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 327 of October 12, 1971]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 84 of April 25, 1972]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 111 of April 28, 1972]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 373 of October 4, 1972]\n\n15 \n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the day on which the agreement between Japan and the United States of America concerning the Ryukyu Islands and the Daito Islands comes into effect (May 15, 1972). \n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of promulgation. \n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of October 15, 1971. \n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of January 27, 1970. \n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of November 1, 1969." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9264779259842731, + "doc_id": "aa0e7dc9c910218f803f02d763f2e6e2b7ded420c927691c8ccc6ea8c70ccd04", + "edit_distance": 0.5333333333333333, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9449231384499714, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of January 1, 2005; provided, however, that the part of the provisions of Article 2 that revises Appended Table 2 of the Export Trade Control Order come into effect as of the date of promulgation.\n\n(Transitional Measures Concerning Penal Provision)\n\n- (2) With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 105 of March 31, 2005] [Extract]\n\n(Effective Date)\n\nArticle 1 This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of April 1, 2005.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 247 of July 21, 2005] [Extract]\n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of March 1, 2006.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 358 of December 2, 2005]\n\n(Effective Date)\n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of January 1, 2006.\n\n(Transitional Measures Concerning Penal Provision)\n\n- (2) With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 200 of May 24, 2006] [Extract]\n\n(Effective Date)\n\nArticle 1 This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of June 1, 2006.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 250 of July 26, 2006] [Extract]\n\n(Effective Date)\n\nArticle 1 This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of October 1, 2006; provided,\n\n42", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of January 1, 2005; provided, however, that the part of the provisions of Article 2 that revises Appended Table 2 of the Export Trade Control Order come into effect as of the date of promulgation. \n\n- (2) With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable. \n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of January 1, 2006. \n\n- (2) With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable. \n\nArticle 1 This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of October 1, 2006; provided, \n\n(Effective Date) \n\n(Effective Date) \n\nArticle 1 This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of June 1, 2006. \n\n(Transitional Measures Concerning Penal Provision) \n\n(Effective Date) \n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of March 1, 2006. \n\n(Effective Date) \n\nArticle 1 This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of April 1, 2005. \n\n(Transitional Measures Concerning Penal Provision) \n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 105 of March 31, 2005] [Extract]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 247 of July 21, 2005] [Extract]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 358 of December 2, 2005]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 200 of May 24, 2006] [Extract]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 250 of July 26, 2006] [Extract]\n\n42" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9436576424241566, + "doc_id": "463dbe220d417316c6098dbf8d553da8f54eea7bbd62930cdace80dcdbf3cde1", + "edit_distance": 0.6401985111662531, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9068109909186434, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "term \"and group III\" below \"group II\"): The day on which the revision to the Montreal Protocol on Substances that Deplete the Ozone Layer, adopted on September 17, 1997 (the revision adopted at the Ninth Meeting of the Parties), comes into effect in Japan;\n\n- (iv) the part of the provisions of Article 1 that revises row 35 of Appended Table 2 of the Export Trade Control Order (limited to the part adding the term \"and group III\" below \"group II\"): February 24, 2003.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 405 of December 27, 2002]\n\n(Effective Date)\n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of January 10, 2003; provided, however, that the provisions deleting Article 4, paragraph (2), item (ii), (c), the provisions changing (d) of the same item to (c) of the same item, the provisions deleting row 25-2 and row 25-3 of Appended Table 2, and the provisions of the next paragraph come into effect as of the date of promulgation.\n\n(Transitional Measures Concerning Penal Provision)\n\n- (2) With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of the revising provisions prescribed in the proviso to the preceding paragraph, the provisions then in force remain applicable.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 28 of January 31, 2003] [Extract]\n\n## (Effective Date)\n\nArticle 1 This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of enforcement of the Act on the Utilization of Information and Communications Technology in Administrative Procedures (February 3, 2003).\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 125 of March 31, 2003]\n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of April 1, 2003.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 198 of April 4, 2003]\n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of April 14, 2003.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 213 of April 23, 2003] [Extract]\n\n39", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "term \"and group III\" below \"group II\"): The day on which the revision to the Montreal Protocol on Substances that Deplete the Ozone Layer, adopted on September 17, 1997 (the revision adopted at the Ninth Meeting of the Parties), comes into effect in Japan; \n\n(Effective Date) \n\n(Transitional Measures Concerning Penal Provision) \n\n(Effective Date) \n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of April 1, 2003. \n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of April 14, 2003. \n\n39 \n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 213 of April 23, 2003] [Extract]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 198 of April 4, 2003]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 125 of March 31, 2003]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 28 of January 31, 2003] [Extract]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 405 of December 27, 2002]\n\n- (iv) the part of the provisions of Article 1 that revises row 35 of Appended Table 2 of the Export Trade Control Order (limited to the part adding the term \"and group III\" below \"group II\"): February 24, 2003. \n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of January 10, 2003; provided, however, that the provisions deleting Article 4, paragraph (2), item (ii), (c), the provisions changing (d) of the same item to (c) of the same item, the provisions deleting row 25-2 and row 25-3 of Appended Table 2, and the provisions of the next paragraph come into effect as of the date of promulgation. \n\n- (2) With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of the revising provisions prescribed in the proviso to the preceding paragraph, the provisions then in force remain applicable. \n\n- Article 1 This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of enforcement of the Act on the Utilization of Information and Communications Technology in Administrative Procedures (February 3, 2003)." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9810870209135198, + "doc_id": "27d2dacd1e1dbe81a90c8959c5a6c1116e6cadab8c7476255277a66801029ddf", + "edit_distance": 0.04878048780487805, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9926179323519295, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Article 48, paragraph (1) of the New Act or this Cabinet Order (hereinafter referred to as the \"New Order\") or have been permitted under Article 2, paragraph (1) of the New Order, pursuant to the provisions of Article 3 of the Supplementary Provisions of the Revised Act, conditions attached to permission under Article 1, paragraph (1) of the Export Trade Control Order prior to the revision by this Cabinet Order (hereinafter referred to as the \"Former Order\") pursuant to the provisions of paragraph (6) of the same Article is to be deemed to be conditions attached to approval under Article 48, paragraph (1) of the New Act or Article 1, paragraph (1) of the New Order or conditions attached to permission under Article 2, paragraph (1) of the New Order, pursuant to the provisions of Article 1, paragraph (4) or Article 2, paragraph (6) of the New Order, respectively.\n\nArticle 4 The valid period of the approval or permission for export of goods prescribed in the preceding Article is to be three months from the day on which permission under Article 1, paragraph (1) of the Former Order was granted (where any valid period different from the period set forth in Article 8, paragraph (1) of the Former Order was determined pursuant to the provisions of paragraph (2) of the same Article, or where such valid period was extended, the relevant period).\n\nArticle 5 With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 331 of November 26, 1988]\n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of December 20, 1988; provided, however, that the part of the provisions of Article 2 that revises row 5, row 16, row 19, row 25, row 46, row 69, row 93, row 130, row 131, and row 155 of Appended Table 1 of the Export Trade Control Order comes into effect as of the date of promulgation.\n- (2) With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 25 of February 7, 1989]\n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of February 16, 1989.\n\nSupplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 104 of April 7, 1989]\n\n22", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Article 48, paragraph (1) of the New Act or this Cabinet Order (hereinafter referred to as the \"New Order\") or have been permitted under Article 2, paragraph (1) of the New Order, pursuant to the provisions of Article 3 of the Supplementary Provisions of the Revised Act, conditions attached to permission under Article 1, paragraph (1) of the Export Trade Control Order prior to the revision by this Cabinet Order (hereinafter referred to as the \"Former Order\") pursuant to the provisions of paragraph (6) of the same Article is to be deemed to be conditions attached to approval under Article 48, paragraph (1) of the New Act or Article 1, paragraph (1) of the New Order or conditions attached to permission under Article 2, paragraph (1) of the New Order, pursuant to the provisions of Article 1, paragraph (4) or Article 2, paragraph (6) of the New Order, respectively. \n\n- Article 4 The valid period of the approval or permission for export of goods prescribed in the preceding Article is to be three months from the day on which permission under Article 1, paragraph (1) of the Former Order was granted (where any valid period different from the period set forth in Article 8, paragraph (1) of the Former Order was determined pursuant to the provisions of paragraph (2) of the same Article, or where such valid period was extended, the relevant period). \n\n- Article 5 With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable. \n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 331 of November 26, 1988]\n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of December 20, 1988; provided, however, that the part of the provisions of Article 2 that revises row 5, row 16, row 19, row 25, row 46, row 69, row 93, row 130, row 131, and row 155 of Appended Table 1 of the Export Trade Control Order comes into effect as of the date of promulgation. \n\n- (2) With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable. \n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 25 of February 7, 1989]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 104 of April 7, 1989]\n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of February 16, 1989. \n\n22" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9501432708640104, + "doc_id": "6b53f9765fc5de969b1bc05bf97fffaeff02565120a4cd6fadadd4dd46a50197", + "edit_distance": 0.40554156171284633, + "f1_score": 0.9960474308300395, + "meteor": 0.9673358513742845, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "however, that the part of the provisions of Article 1 that revises the table of contents of the Order for Enforcement of the Act on Waste Management and Public Cleansing, the provisions adding two Articles after Article 5-10 of Chapter II of the same Order, the provisions revising Article 6-2, item (ii) and Article 7-6 of the same Order, the provisions changing the same Article of Chapter III of the same Order to Article 7-8 of the same Order, the provisions adding two Articles after Article 7-5 of the same Order, and the provisions of Article 4 of the Supplementary Provisions come into effect as of the date of enforcement of the provisions listed in Article 1, item (ii) of the Supplementary Provisions of the Act for Partial Revision of the Air Pollution Control Act, etc. for Preventing Asbestos Health Damage (August 9, 2006).\n\n## (Transitional Measures Concerning Penal Provision)\n\nArticle 3 With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 257 of August 2, 2006] [Extract]\n\n(Effective Date)\n\nArticle 1 This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of September 1, 2006.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 304 of September 21, 2006] [Extract]\n\n## (Effective Date)\n\nArticle 1 This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of January 1, 2007; provided, however, that the provisions of Article 2 come into effect as of the date of enforcement of the Act on Advancement of Comprehensive Service Related to Education, Child Care, etc. of Preschool Children (Act No. 77 of 2006), and the provisions of Article 4 come into effect as of October 1, 2006.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 356 of November 14, 2006]\n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the next day of the date of promulgation.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 387 of December 20, 2006]\n\n(Effective Date)\n\n43", + "recall": 0.9921259842519685, + "true_md": "however, that the part of the provisions of Article 1 that revises the table of contents of the Order for Enforcement of the Act on Waste Management and Public Cleansing, the provisions adding two Articles after Article 5-10 of Chapter II of the same Order, the provisions revising Article 6-2, item (ii) and Article 7-6 of the same Order, the provisions changing the same Article of Chapter III of the same Order to Article 7-8 of the same Order, the provisions adding two Articles after Article 7-5 of the same Order, and the provisions of Article 4 of the Supplementary Provisions come into effect as of the date of enforcement of the provisions listed in Article 1, item (ii) of the Supplementary Provisions of the Act for Partial Revision of the Air Pollution Control Act, etc. for Preventing Asbestos Health Damage (August 9, 2006). \n\n(Transitional Measures Concerning Penal Provision) \n\n(Effective Date) \n\n(Effective Date) \n\nArticle 1 This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of September 1, 2006. \n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the next day of the date of promulgation. \n\n(Effective Date) \n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 387 of December 20, 2006]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 356 of November 14, 2006]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 304 of September 21, 2006] [Extract]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 257 of August 2, 2006] [Extract]\n\n- Article 3 With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable. \n\n- Article 1 This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of January 1, 2007; provided, however, that the provisions of Article 2 come into effect as of the date of enforcement of the Act on Advancement of Comprehensive Service Related to Education, Child Care, etc. of Preschool Children (Act No. 77 of 2006), and the provisions of Article 4 come into effect as of October 1, 2006. \n\n43" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "7148f5eeb0be84c2f67156ec9a10248e703b205b66b51c2817fc32b491bae68f", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.5, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "75", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "75" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9672179987311716, + "doc_id": "c7a3c4a32ea8754ff36665be0fc66ed74e6cf4f2bc941b9083e5579f54e76475", + "edit_distance": 0.20334928229665072, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9911341444152139, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 197 of June 8, 1977]\n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of promulgation.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 289 of September 30, 1977] [Extract]\n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of October 1, 1977.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 282 of July 5, 1978] [Extract]\n\n(Effective Date)\n\nArticle 1 This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of promulgation.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 331 of September 22, 1978]\n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of October 2, 1978.\n- (2) With regard to export or import of goods conducted, as permitted, by a person who has obtained, prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, permission set forth in Article 2, paragraph (1) of the Export Trade Control Order prior to the revision with respect to the conclusion of a consignment sales trade contract, the provisions then in force remain applicable.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 138 of May 26, 1980] [Extract]\n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of June 2, 1980.\n- (2) With regard to export of goods conducted, as approved or permitted, by a person who has obtained, prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, approval or permission under Article 1, paragraph (1) or Article 2, paragraph (1) of the Export Trade Control Order with respect to export of goods to Iran, the provisions then in force remain applicable.\n- (4) With regard to a target service contract concluded or target services provided by a person who has obtained, prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, permission under Article 17, paragraph (2) of the Foreign Exchange Control Order or approval, permission or certification under the Export Trade Control Order or Import Trade Control Order for concluding a target service contract or providing target services with respect to a specified business, as permitted under the same paragraph or as approved, permitted or certified under the\n\n18", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 197 of June 8, 1977]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 289 of September 30, 1977] [Extract]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 282 of July 5, 1978] [Extract]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 331 of September 22, 1978]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 138 of May 26, 1980] [Extract]\n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of promulgation. \n\n(Effective Date) \n\nArticle 1 This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of promulgation. \n\n18 \n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of October 1, 1977. \n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of October 2, 1978. \n\n- (2) With regard to export or import of goods conducted, as permitted, by a person who has obtained, prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, permission set forth in Article 2, paragraph (1) of the Export Trade Control Order prior to the revision with respect to the conclusion of a consignment sales trade contract, the provisions then in force remain applicable. \n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of June 2, 1980. \n\n- (2) With regard to export of goods conducted, as approved or permitted, by a person who has obtained, prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, approval or permission under Article 1, paragraph (1) or Article 2, paragraph (1) of the Export Trade Control Order with respect to export of goods to Iran, the provisions then in force remain applicable. \n\n- (4) With regard to a target service contract concluded or target services provided by a person who has obtained, prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, permission under Article 17, paragraph (2) of the Foreign Exchange Control Order or approval, permission or certification under the Export Trade Control Order or Import Trade Control Order for concluding a target service contract or providing target services with respect to a specified business, as permitted under the same paragraph or as approved, permitted or certified under the" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.870952734227642, + "doc_id": "8f37ada3764c17cbed11bb4c6c506f8b0d05a93c530555330aff86c5c6dadf4a", + "edit_distance": 0.12355212355212356, + "f1_score": 0.9953051643192488, + "meteor": 0.8366878486933109, + "precision": 0.9906542056074766, + "pred_md": "(ii) Chemical substances listed below and contained in the agricultural chemicals prescribed in Article 2, paragraph (1) of the Agricultural Chemicals Control Act (Act No. 82 of 1948); however, limited to those determined and publicly notified by the Minister of the Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry (1) Agricultural chemicals for which the registration application was refused under Article 4, paragraph (1) of the Agricultural Chemicals Control Act (including as applied mutatis mutandice puursuant to Article 34, paragraph (6) of the same Act) for the reason that they are found to fall under any of the provisions of Article 4, paragraph (1), item (v) to item (ix) or item (xi) of the same Act (including as applied mutatis mutandis pursuant to Article 34, papragraph (6) of the same Act; hereinafter, the same applies in (2) to (4))\n\n(2) Agricultural chemicals for which the registration was cancelled under Article 9, paragrpah (2) of the Agricultural Chemicals Control Act (including as applied mutatis mutandis pursuant to Article 34, paragraph (6) of the same Act) for the reason that they are found to fall under any of the provisions of Article 4, paragraph (1) item (v) to item (ix) or item (xi) of the same Act\n\n(3) Agricultural chemicals for which the registration was cancelled under Article 9, paragraph (3) of the Agricultural Chemicals Control Act (including as applied mutatis mutandis pursuant to Article 34, paragraph (6) of the same Act) for the reason that any events prescribed in Article 4, paragraph (1), item (v) to item (ix) or item (xi) of the same Act have occurred\n\n(4) Agricultural chemicals of which sales were prohibited under Article 18, paragraph (2) of the Agricultural Chemicals Control Act for the reason that it is necessary to prohibit such sales in order to prevent any events prescribed in Article 4, paragraph (1), item (v) to item (ix) or item (xi) of the same Act from occurring\n\n(iii) Specified poisonous substances prescribed in Article 2, paragraph (3) of the Poisonous Substances Control Act (Act No. 303 of 1950) (excluding those listed in (1) above)\n\n68", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "(ii) Chemical substances listed below and contained in the agricultural chemicals prescribed in Article 2, paragraph (1) of the Agricultural Chemicals Control Act (Act No. 82 of 1948); however, limited to those determined and publicly notified by the Minister of the Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry (1) Agricultural chemicals for which the registration \n\nthe Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry (1) Agricultural chemicals for which the registration application was refused under Article 4, paragraph (1) of the Agricultural Chemicals Control Act (including as applied mutatis mutandice puursuant to Article 34, paragraph (6) of the same Act) for the reason that they are found to fall under any of the provisions of Article 4, paragraph (1), item (v) to item (ix) or item (xi) of the same Act (including as applied mutatis mutandis pursuant to Article 34, papragraph (6) of the same Act; hereinafter, the same applies in (2) to (4)) (2) Agricultural chemicals for which the registration \n\nsame applies in (2) to (4)) (2) Agricultural chemicals for which the registration was cancelled under Article 9, paragrpah (2) of the Agricultural Chemicals Control Act (including as applied mutatis mutandis pursuant to Article 34, paragraph (6) of the same Act) for the reason that they are found to fall under any of the provisions of Article 4, paragraph (1) item (v) to item (ix) or item (xi) of the same Act (3) Agricultural chemicals for which the registration \n\n(xi) of the same Act (3) Agricultural chemicals for which the registration was cancelled under Article 9, paragraph (3) of the Agricultural Chemicals Control Act (including as applied mutatis mutandis pursuant to Article 34, paragraph (6) of the same Act) for the reason that any events prescribed in Article 4, paragraph (1), item (v) to item (ix) or item (xi) of the same Act have occurred (4) Agricultural chemicals of which sales were \n\noccurred (4) Agricultural chemicals of which sales were prohibited under Article 18, paragraph (2) of the Agricultural Chemicals Control Act for the reason that it is necessary to prohibit such sales in order to prevent any events prescribed in Article 4, paragraph (1), item (v) to item (ix) or item (xi) of the same Act from occurring (iii) Specified poisonous substances prescribed in Article 2, paragraph (3) of the Poisonous Substances Control Act (Act No. 303 of 1950) (excluding those listed in (1) above)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "3667b01d7ac01e63711d8ee392c649754d59f61e382fd682408885b5f1d1488a", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.5, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "52", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "52" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9807916187274088, + "doc_id": "1f6e480d63b1e59e3957aba9177e2335cece5a7aaea7999359fa9d3101117df5", + "edit_distance": 0.16630196936542668, + "f1_score": 0.9969604863221886, + "meteor": 0.9887796244441349, + "precision": 0.9939393939393939, + "pred_md": "- (ii), (v) or (vi), or row 13 (v) of Appended Table 1, which are specified by the Minister of Economy, Trade and Industry by public notice, or goods listed in the middle column of row 15 of the same table\n- (i) relief supplies provided without charge\n- (ii) product samples or advertising materials provided without charge, the total value of which is not more than two million yen (in the case of goods listed in the middle column of Appended Table 2 as specified by the Minister of Economy, Trade and Industry by public notice, which are exported to the regions listed in the right-hand column of the same table as specified by the Minister of Economy, Trade and Industry by public notice, limited to those having total value of not more than the amount designated by the Minister of Economy, Trade and Industry by public notice, not exceeding two million yen);\n- (iii) small packages or small parcels containing personal belongings, household articles, occupational tools or commercial tools that are sent by international mail and are to be used by the receivers for private purposes, or similar parcels sent by other means;\n- (iv) supplies for vessels or aircraft to be used for foreign vessels or aircrafts;\n- (v) aircraft parts as well as machines and apparatus mounted on aircrafts to be used for the safe arrival and departure or navigation of aircrafts and parts thereof, which need repair and are exported without charge;\n- (vi) publications to be used by the National Diet Library for the purpose of international exchange;\n- (vii) goods which belong to the heads of foreign countries visiting Japan and their families and attendants thereof;\n- (viii) goods to be used for private purposes by ambassadors, ministers or other equivalent delegates of foreign countries dispatched to Japan and staff of diplomatic establishments of foreign countries located in Japan (which means embassies, legations, consulates and other equivalent facilities; the same applies hereinafter), and goods sent from diplomatic establishments of foreign countries;\n- (ix) medals, prize cups and trophies, badges and other equivalent objects to be awarded to residents in foreign countries;\n\nAppended Table 4 (Re: Article 4)\n\nIran, Iraq, North Korea\n\nAppended Table 4-2 (Re: Article 4) Deleted.\n\n## Appended Table 5 (Re: Article 4)\n\n73", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "(ii), (v) or (vi), or row 13 (v) of Appended Table 1, which are specified by the Minister of Economy, Trade and Industry by public notice, or goods listed in the middle column of row 15 of the same table \n\n- Appended Table 4 (Re: Article 4) Iran, Iraq, North Korea \n\n- Appended Table 4-2 (Re: Article 4) Deleted. \n\n- Appended Table 5 (Re: Article 4) \n\n- (i) relief supplies provided without charge \n\n- (ii) product samples or advertising materials provided without charge, the total value of which is not more than two million yen (in the case of goods listed in the middle column of Appended Table 2 as specified by the Minister of Economy, Trade and Industry by public notice, which are exported to the regions listed in the right-hand column of the same table as specified by the Minister of Economy, Trade and Industry by public notice, limited to those having total value of not more than the amount designated by the Minister of Economy, Trade and Industry by public notice, not exceeding two million yen); \n\n- (iii) small packages or small parcels containing personal belongings, household articles, occupational tools or commercial tools that are sent by international mail and are to be used by the receivers for private purposes, or similar parcels sent by other means; \n\n- (iv) supplies for vessels or aircraft to be used for foreign vessels or aircrafts; \n\n- (v) aircraft parts as well as machines and apparatus mounted on aircrafts to be used for the safe arrival and departure or navigation of aircrafts and parts thereof, which need repair and are exported without charge; \n\n- (vi) publications to be used by the National Diet Library for the purpose of international exchange; \n\n- (vii) goods which belong to the heads of foreign countries visiting Japan and their families and attendants thereof; \n\n- (viii) goods to be used for private purposes by ambassadors, ministers or other equivalent delegates of foreign countries dispatched to Japan and staff of diplomatic establishments of foreign countries located in Japan (which means embassies, legations, consulates and other equivalent facilities; the same applies hereinafter), and goods sent from diplomatic establishments of foreign countries; \n\n- (ix) medals, prize cups and trophies, badges and other equivalent objects to be awarded to residents in foreign countries; \n\n73" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "569212050f4104991d5dc3db929c766935c3763543d618a8f616b5c5aa164f87", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.5, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "62", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "62" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4746180311991482, + "doc_id": "c39a46ad82ee20e02b25d369cf63674dc69d184468fdffe10515ae869f1a01e8", + "edit_distance": 0.425, + "f1_score": 0.9899665551839465, + "meteor": 0.49809131910502, + "precision": 0.9932885906040269, + "pred_md": "(xviii) Metals, waste, or scraps of beryllium or beryllium alloys, or beryllium compounds, or primary or semifinished products thereof (excluding primary or semifinished products of beryllium oxide used in electronics parts)\n\n(xix) Substances used as alpha sources for the detonation of nuclear weapons, or raw materials therefor (excluding those listed in (i) above) (xx) Boron-10\n\n(xxi) Substances used as reducing or oxidizing agents for the production of nuclear fuel materials (xxii) Crucibles made with materials which are corrosion-resistant against actinide\n\n(xxiii) Metals, waste or scraps of hafnium or hafnium alloys, or hafnium compounds, or primary or semifinished products thereof\n\n(xxiv) Metals, waste or scraps of lithium or lithium alloys, lithium compounds or mixtures containing lithium, or primary or semi-finished products thereof (xxv) Primary products of tungsten, tungsten carbide or alloys (limited to those that have cylindrical or hemispherical shapes or a combination of both shapes) (xxvi) Metals, waste, or scraps of zirconium or zirconium alloys, or zirconium compounds, or primary or semi-finished products thereof\n\n(xxvii) Electrolytic cells for fluorine production (xxviii) Equipment for the production or assembly of gas centrifuge rotors, or components therefor\n\n(xxix) Centrifugal balancing machines (excluding single-plane balancing machines)\n\n(xxx) Filament winding machines, or components or controllers therefor\n\n(xxxi) Gas laser oscillators, solid-state laser oscillators, or dye laser oscillators usable for the separation of uranium isotopes\n\n(xxxii) Mass spectrometers or ion sources usable for the analysis of nuclear fuel materials\n\n(xxxiii) Pressure gauges or bellows valves using materials which are corrosion-resistant against uranium hexafluoride (excluding those listed in the middle column of row 3)\n\n(xxxiv) Superconducting solenoid electromagnets (xxxv) Vacuum pumps used in separators for uranium isotopes (excluding those listed in the middle column of row 3)\n\n(xxxv)-2 Scroll-type compressors or vacuum pumps that use bellows seals (excluding those listed in (xxxv) and the middle column of row 3)\n\n(xxxvi) Direct current power units with lower fluctuations of voltage and current\n\n54", + "recall": 0.9866666666666667, + "true_md": "(xviii) Metals, waste, or scraps of beryllium or beryllium alloys, or beryllium compounds, or primary or semi- finished products thereof (excluding primary or semi- finished products of beryllium oxide used in electronics parts) (xix) Substances used as alpha sources for the \n\nparts) (xix) Substances used as alpha sources for the detonation of nuclear weapons, or raw materials therefor (excluding those listed in (i) above) (xx) Boron-10 \n\ntherefor (excluding those listed in (i) above) (xx) Boron-10 (xxi) Substances used as reducing or oxidizing agents \n\n(xx) Boron-10 (xxi) Substances used as reducing or oxidizing agents for the production of nuclear fuel materials (xxii) Crucibles made with materials which are \n\nfor the production of nuclear fuel materials (xxii) Crucibles made with materials which are corrosion-resistant against actinide (xxiii) Metals, waste or scraps of hafnium or hafnium \n\ncorrosion-resistant against actinide (xxiii) Metals, waste or scraps of hafnium or hafnium alloys, or hafnium compounds, or primary or semi- finished products thereof (xxiv) Metals, waste or scraps of lithium or lithium \n\nfinished products thereof (xxiv) Metals, waste or scraps of lithium or lithium alloys, lithium compounds or mixtures containing lithium, or primary or semi-finished products thereof (xxv) Primary products of tungsten, tungsten carbide or \n\nlithium, or primary or semi-finished products thereof (xxv) Primary products of tungsten, tungsten carbide or alloys (limited to those that have cylindrical or hemispherical shapes or a combination of both shapes) (xxvi) Metals, waste, or scraps of zirconium or \n\nhemispherical shapes or a combination of both shapes) (xxvi) Metals, waste, or scraps of zirconium or zirconium alloys, or zirconium compounds, or primary or semi-finished products thereof (xxvii) Electrolytic cells for fluorine production \n\nor semi-finished products thereof (xxvii) Electrolytic cells for fluorine production (xxviii) Equipment for the production or assembly of gas \n\n(xxvii) Electrolytic cells for fluorine production (xxviii) Equipment for the production or assembly of gas centrifuge rotors, or components therefor (xxix) Centrifugal balancing machines (excluding \n\ncentrifuge rotors, or components therefor (xxix) Centrifugal balancing machines (excluding single-plane balancing machines) (xxx) Filament winding machines, or components or \n\nsingle-plane balancing machines) (xxx) Filament winding machines, or components or controllers therefor (xxxi) Gas laser oscillators, solid-state laser oscillators, \n\ncontrollers therefor (xxxi) Gas laser oscillators, solid-state laser oscillators, or dye laser oscillators usable for the separation of uranium isotopes (xxxii) Mass spectrometers or ion sources usable for the \n\nuranium isotopes (xxxii) Mass spectrometers or ion sources usable for the analysis of nuclear fuel materials (xxxiii) Pressure gauges or bellows valves using \n\nanalysis of nuclear fuel materials (xxxiii) Pressure gauges or bellows valves using materials which are corrosion-resistant against uranium hexafluoride (excluding those listed in the middle column of row 3) (xxxiv) Superconducting solenoid electromagnets \n\nmiddle column of row 3) (xxxiv) Superconducting solenoid electromagnets (xxxv) Vacuum pumps used in separators for uranium \n\n(xxxiv) Superconducting solenoid electromagnets (xxxv) Vacuum pumps used in separators for uranium isotopes (excluding those listed in the middle column of row 3) (xxxv)-2 Scroll-type compressors or vacuum pumps that \n\nrow 3) (xxxv)-2 Scroll-type compressors or vacuum pumps that use bellows seals (excluding those listed in (xxxv) and the middle column of row 3) (xxxvi) Direct current power units with lower \n\nthe middle column of row 3) (xxxvi) Direct current power units with lower fluctuations of voltage and current \n\n54" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9398463780054234, + "doc_id": "ff538fa73b31d58cf46a558106dbe4f8b30de8d8c19e2c33ffe4c73520ceffd9", + "edit_distance": 0.347953216374269, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9215569600574667, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 531 of December 19, 2003] [Extract]\n\n## (Effective Date)\n\nArticle 1 This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the day on which the Rotterdam Convention on the Prior Informed Consent Procedure for Certain Hazardous Chemicals and Pesticides in International Trade comes into effect in Japan; provided, however, that the provisions revising row 35 of Appended Table 2 come into effect as of January 1, 2004.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 535 of December 19, 2003] [Extract]\n\n## (Effective Date)\n\nArticle 1 This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of enforcement of the Act for Partial Revision of the Pharmaceutical Affairs Act and the Blood Donation Brokerage Control Act (April 1, 2005); provided, however, that the provisions of Article 5 come into effect as of the later of either the date of enforcement of the Cabinet Order for Partial Revision of the Export Trade Control Order (Cabinet Order No. 531 of 2003) or the date of enforcement of this Cabinet Order, and the provisions of Article 9 of the Supplementary Provisions come into effect as of the date of promulgation.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 107 of March 31, 2004] [Extract]\n\n## (Effective Date)\n\nArticle 1 This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of April 1, 2004.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 174 of April 28, 2004] [Extract]\n\n(Effective Date)\n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of May 17, 2004.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 352 of November 10, 2004]\n\n(Effective Date)\n\n41", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable. \n\n(Effective Date) \n\n(Effective Date) \n\n(Effective Date) \n\nArticle 1 This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of April 1, 2004. \n\n(Effective Date) \n\n(Effective Date) \n\n- Article 1 This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the day on which the Rotterdam Convention on the Prior Informed Consent Procedure for Certain Hazardous Chemicals and Pesticides in International Trade comes into effect in Japan; provided, however, that the provisions revising row 35 of Appended Table 2 come into effect as of January 1, 2004. \n\n- Article 1 This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of enforcement of the Act for Partial Revision of the Pharmaceutical Affairs Act and the Blood Donation Brokerage Control Act (April 1, 2005); provided, however, that the provisions of Article 5 come into effect as of the later of either the date of enforcement of the Cabinet Order for Partial Revision of the Export Trade Control Order (Cabinet Order No. 531 of 2003) or the date of enforcement of this Cabinet Order, and the provisions of Article 9 of the Supplementary Provisions come into effect as of the date of promulgation. \n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of May 17, 2004. \n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 531 of December 19, 2003] [Extract]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 535 of December 19, 2003] [Extract]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 107 of March 31, 2004] [Extract]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 174 of April 28, 2004] [Extract]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 352 of November 10, 2004]\n\n41" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.950420639900426, + "doc_id": "ec95d004fef88da1b8da10e26660c4f83786d1e253657483fd40eac0d2997538", + "edit_distance": 0.37557603686635943, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.920262773778134, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Export Trade Control Order or Import Trade Control Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 264 of October 11, 1980] [Extract]\n\n## (Effective Date)\n\nArticle 1 This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of enforcement of the Act for Partial Revision of the Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Control Act (December 1, 1980).\n\n## (Transitional Measures)\n\nArticle 2 (1) With regard to export of goods conducted, as permitted, by a person who has obtained, prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, permission under Article 1, paragraph (1) of the Export Trade Control Order prior to the revision, to which the provisions of Article 1, paragraph (1) of the same Order after the revision applies, the provisions then in force remain applicable.\n\n- (2) With regard to export or import of goods conducted, as approved, by a person who has obtained, prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, approval under Article 2, paragraph (1) of the Export Trade Control Order prior to the revision, with respect to the conclusion of a contract for processing deal trade, to which the provisions of Article 1, paragraph (1) of the same Order after the revision or Article 4, paragraph (1) of the Import Trade Control Order applies, the provisions then in force remain applicable.\n\n## (Transitional Measures Concerning Penal Provision)\n\nArticle 3 With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 285 of October 31, 1980]\n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the day on which the Convention on International Trade in Endangered Species of Wild Fauna and Flora comes into effect in Japan (November 4, 1980).\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 7 of January 26, 1981]\n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of promulgation.\n- (2) With regard to export of goods conducted, as permitted, by a person who has obtained, prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, permission under\n\n19", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Export Trade Control Order or Import Trade Control Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable. \n\n(Effective Date) \n\n(Transitional Measures) \n\n(Transitional Measures Concerning Penal Provision) \n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the day on which the Convention on International Trade in Endangered Species of Wild Fauna and Flora comes into effect in Japan (November 4, 1980). \n\n- Article 1 This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of enforcement of the Act for Partial Revision of the Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Control Act (December 1, 1980). \n\n- Article 2 (1) With regard to export of goods conducted, as permitted, by a person who has obtained, prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, permission under Article 1, paragraph (1) of the Export Trade Control Order prior to the revision, to which the provisions of Article 1, paragraph (1) of the same Order after the revision applies, the provisions then in force remain applicable. \n\n- (2) With regard to export or import of goods conducted, as approved, by a person who has obtained, prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, approval under Article 2, paragraph (1) of the Export Trade Control Order prior to the revision, with respect to the conclusion of a contract for processing deal trade, to which the provisions of Article 1, paragraph (1) of the same Order after the revision or Article 4, paragraph (1) of the Import Trade Control Order applies, the provisions then in force remain applicable. \n\n- Article 3 With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable. \n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of promulgation. \n\n- (2) With regard to export of goods conducted, as permitted, by a person who has obtained, prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, permission under \n\n19 \n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 264 of October 11, 1980] [Extract]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 285 of October 31, 1980]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 7 of January 26, 1981]" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9325510685040826, + "doc_id": "ba61e7c6bf3772b3ba8550b9b9ce1ffe3d40eb777affa3c7c3f0d1e9d1abf915", + "edit_distance": 0.5811209439528023, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9276179437258156, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 287 of August 26, 1998]\n\n(Effective Date)\n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of promulgation; provided, however, that the provisions revising Appended Table 2 come into effect as of August 29, 1998.\n\n(Transitional Measures Concerning Penal Provision)\n\n- (2) With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 359 of November 5, 1998]\n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of November 12, 1998.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 130 of March 31, 1999]\n\n(Effective Date)\n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of April 1, 1999.\n\n(Transitional Measures Concerning Penal Provision)\n\n- (2) With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 190 of June 18, 1999] [Extract]\n\n(Effective Date)\n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of promulgation; provided, however, that the provisions listed as follows come into effect as of the date specified in the corresponding item:\n- (ii) the part of the provisions of Article 2 that revises row 16 of Appended Table 1 of the Export Trade Control Order: July 18, 1999.\n\n(Transitional Measures Concerning Penal Provision)\n\n- (2) With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to\n\n35", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable. \n\n(Effective Date) \n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of November 12, 1998. \n\n(Transitional Measures Concerning Penal Provision) \n\n(Effective Date) \n\n(Transitional Measures Concerning Penal Provision) \n\n(Effective Date) \n\n(Transitional Measures Concerning Penal Provision) \n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of promulgation; provided, however, that the provisions revising Appended Table 2 come into effect as of August 29, 1998. \n\n- (2) With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable. \n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of April 1, 1999. \n\n- (2) With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable. \n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of promulgation; provided, however, that the provisions listed as follows come into effect as of the date specified in the corresponding item: \n\n- (ii) the part of the provisions of Article 2 that revises row 16 of Appended Table 1 of the Export Trade Control Order: July 18, 1999. \n\n- (2) With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to \n\n35 \n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 287 of August 26, 1998]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 359 of November 5, 1998]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 130 of March 31, 1999]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 190 of June 18, 1999] [Extract]" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9744223551626496, + "doc_id": "ccca43ffb53aca219e2017d0e81df775d53a077a4edaef0d0d2d32802e69a01f", + "edit_distance": 0.06326530612244897, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9983545215325642, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Export Trade Control Order (Tentative translation)\n\n(Cabinet Order No. 378 of December 1, 1949)\n\nThe Cabinet hereby enacts this Cabinet Order based on the provisions of Article 26, Article 48, Article 49, Article 67, and Article 69 of the Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Control Act and the provisions of paragraph (4) of the Supplementary Provisions, and for purposes of implementing the same Act.\n\n## (Permission for Export)\n\n- Article 1 (1) Export of certain kinds of goods to certain regions specified by Cabinet Order under Article 48, paragraph (1) of the Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Act (Act No. 228 of 1949; hereinafter referred to as the \"Act\") is to be the export of the goods listed in the middle column of Appended Table 1 to the regions listed in the right-hand column of the same table.\n- (2) A person who intends to obtain permission under Article 48, paragraph (1) of the Act must file an application for permission in accordance with the procedure specified by Order of the Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry.\n\n## (Export Approval)\n\n- Article 2 (1) A person who intends to export goods that fall under any of the following items must obtain the approval of the Minister of Economy, Trade and Industry in accordance with the procedure specified by Order of the Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry:\n- (i) export of goods listed in the middle column of Appended Table 2 to the regions listed in the right-hand column of the same table;\n- (i)-2 exports of goods listed in Appended Table 2-2 (excluding goods listed in the middle column of row 1, row 36, row 39 to row 41, and row 43 to row 45 of Appended Table 2) to North Korea;\n- (ii) export of goods under a contract for processing deal trade whereby a contractor residing in a foreign country is entrusted with processing work in a foreign country (limited to the cases where the whole or part of the processing work under the relevant contract for processing deal trade falls within the scope of processing works specified by the Minister of Economy, Trade and Industry (hereinafter referred to as \"Designated Processing Works\")) (limited to raw materials for processing to be used for processing works under the relevant contracts for processing deal trade falling under the scope of Designated Processing Works, which are specified by the Minister of Economy, Trade and Industry for the respective categories of Designated Processing Works and pertain to the respective Designated\n\n1", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "(Cabinet Order No. 378 of December 1, 1949) \n\n# Export Trade Control Order (Tentative translation)\n\nThe Cabinet hereby enacts this Cabinet Order based on the provisions of Article 26, Article 48, Article 49, Article 67, and Article 69 of the Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Control Act and the provisions of paragraph (4) of the Supplementary Provisions, and for purposes of implementing the same Act. \n\n(Permission for Export) \n\n- Article 1 (1) Export of certain kinds of goods to certain regions specified by Cabinet Order under Article 48, paragraph (1) of the Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Act (Act No. 228 of 1949; hereinafter referred to as the \"Act\") is to be the export of the goods listed in the middle column of Appended Table 1 to the regions listed in the right-hand column of the same table. \n\n- (2) A person who intends to obtain permission under Article 48, paragraph (1) of the Act must file an application for permission in accordance with the procedure specified by Order of the Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry. \n\n- Article 2 (1) A person who intends to export goods that fall under any of the following items must obtain the approval of the Minister of Economy, Trade and Industry in accordance with the procedure specified by Order of the Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry: \n\n- (i) export of goods listed in the middle column of Appended Table 2 to the regions listed in the right-hand column of the same table; \n\n- (i)-2 exports of goods listed in Appended Table 2-2 (excluding goods listed in the middle column of row 1, row 36, row 39 to row 41, and row 43 to row 45 of Appended Table 2) to North Korea; \n\n- (ii) export of goods under a contract for processing deal trade whereby a contractor residing in a foreign country is entrusted with processing work in a foreign country (limited to the cases where the whole or part of the processing work under the relevant contract for processing deal trade falls within the scope of processing works specified by the Minister of Economy, Trade and Industry (hereinafter referred to as \"Designated Processing Works\")) (limited to raw materials for processing to be used for processing works under the relevant contracts for processing deal trade falling under the scope of Designated Processing Works, which are specified by the Minister of Economy, Trade and Industry for the respective categories of Designated Processing Works and pertain to the respective Designated \n\n(Export Approval) \n\n1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9180841915766826, + "doc_id": "c306f6f191c043bd8770153dbc33aa39f3ec92a362ee1b1a14089e7e842464d6", + "edit_distance": 0.528, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.868029366340435, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## (Effective Date)\n\nArticle 1 This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of enforcement of the Revised Act (November 25, 2014).\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 172 of April 3, 2015]\n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of promulgation.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 284 of July 31, 2015]\n\n## (Effective Date)\n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of October 1, 2015; provided, however, that the provisions of Article 2 that amend Article 4, paragraph (2), item (ii), (a) and the proviso to item (iv) of the same paragraph of the Export Trade Control Order and the provisions adding as follows next to row 35-3 of Appended Table 2 of the same Order come into effect as of day on which the Minamata Convention on Mercury comes into effect in Japan.\n\n(Transitional Measures Concerning Penal Provision)\n\n- (2) Prior laws continue to govern the applicability of penal provisions to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 189 of April 1, 2016]\n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of promulgation.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 266 of July 29, 2016]\n\n## (Effective Date)\n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of promulgation.\n\n(Transitional Measures Concerning Penal Provision)\n\n- (2) Prior laws continue to govern the applicability of penal provisions to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 346 of November 7, 2016]\n\n## (Effective Date)\n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of January 7, 2017; provided, however, that the provisions listed as follows come into effect as of the date specified in\n\n48", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "(Effective Date) \n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of promulgation. \n\n(Effective Date) \n\n(Transitional Measures Concerning Penal Provision) \n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of promulgation. \n\n(Effective Date) \n\n(Transitional Measures Concerning Penal Provision) \n\n(Effective Date) \n\n- Article 1 This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of enforcement of the Revised Act (November 25, 2014). \n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of October 1, 2015; provided, however, that the provisions of Article 2 that amend Article 4, paragraph (2), item (ii), (a) and the proviso to item (iv) of the same paragraph of the Export Trade Control Order and the provisions adding as follows next to row 35-3 of Appended Table 2 of the same Order come into effect as of day on which the Minamata Convention on Mercury comes into effect in Japan. \n\n- (2) Prior laws continue to govern the applicability of penal provisions to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order. \n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of promulgation. \n\n- (2) Prior laws continue to govern the applicability of penal provisions to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order. \n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of January 7, 2017; provided, however, that the provisions listed as follows come into effect as of the date specified in \n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 172 of April 3, 2015]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 284 of July 31, 2015]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 189 of April 1, 2016]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 266 of July 29, 2016]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 346 of November 7, 2016]\n\n48" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9328490764934492, + "doc_id": "a0d19bcb248d98b411bb7cee72ff8e146a0e22ee2b7de30357b6648cb70ce9be", + "edit_distance": 0.4883720930232558, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9170760293708415, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 19 of January 31, 2018] [Extract]\n\n(Effective Date)\n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of enforcement of the Act Partially Amending the Act on Conservation of Endangered Species of Wild Fauna and Flora (June 1, 2018).\n\n## Supplementary Provisions\n\n(Effective Date)\n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the day on which two months have elapsed from the date of promulgation; provided, however, that the provisions of Article 2 that amend Appended Table 2 of the Export Trade Control Order come into effect as of April 1, 2019.\n\n(Transitional Measures Concerning Penal Provision)\n\n- (2) Prior laws continue to govern the applicability of penal provisions to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order (with regard to the amending provisions prescribed in the proviso to the preceding paragraph, the relevant amending provisions).\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 319 of November 21, 2018] [Extract]\n\n(Effective Date)\n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of enforcement of the provisions of Article 5 of the Amended Act (September 1, 2019).\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 326 of November 30, 2018] [Extract]\n\n(Effective Date)\n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of enforcement of the Act Partially Amending the Agricultural Chemicals Control Act (December 1, 2018).\n\n(Transitional Measures Concerning Penal Provision)\n\n- (2) Prior laws continue to govern the applicability of penal provisions to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 341 of December 19, 2018]\n\n50", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 19 of January 31, 2018] [Extract]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 319 of November 21, 2018] [Extract]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 326 of November 30, 2018] [Extract]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 341 of December 19, 2018]\n\n(Effective Date) \n\n(Effective Date) \n\n(Effective Date) \n\n(Transitional Measures Concerning Penal Provision) \n\n(Transitional Measures Concerning Penal Provision) \n\n(Effective Date) \n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of enforcement of the Act Partially Amending the Act on Conservation of Endangered Species of Wild Fauna and Flora (June 1, 2018). \n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the day on which two months have elapsed from the date of promulgation; provided, however, that the provisions of Article 2 that amend Appended Table 2 of the Export Trade Control Order come into effect as of April 1, 2019. \n\n- (2) Prior laws continue to govern the applicability of penal provisions to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order (with regard to the amending provisions prescribed in the proviso to the preceding paragraph, the relevant amending provisions). \n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of enforcement of the provisions of Article 5 of the Amended Act (September 1, 2019). \n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of enforcement of the Act Partially Amending the Agricultural Chemicals Control Act (December 1, 2018). \n\n- (2) Prior laws continue to govern the applicability of penal provisions to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order. \n\n50" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9736242124117499, + "doc_id": "477831bfc9802d60fe2ff059efe131cf5a14323a7fbdee08f8e530d07b1425c4", + "edit_distance": 0.22014051522248243, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9640371085294281, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 269 of July 30, 1993]\n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of promulgation; provided, however, that the provisions revising row 35 of Appended Table 2 come into effect as of August 10, 1993.\n- (2) With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 379 of December 1, 1993] [Extract]\n\n## (Effective Date)\n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of December 22, 1993; provided, however, that the revising provisions listed as follows come into effect as of the date listed in the corresponding item:\n- (i) the provisions revising row 9, (iv) of Appended Table 1: The date of promulgation;\n- (ii) the provisions revising Article 2, paragraph (5), the provisions revising Article 4, paragraph (2), and the part of the provisions adding row 35-2 to Appended Table 2 that relates to (ii) of the same row (excluding the part that excludes those listed in (i)): The date of enforcement of the Act for Partial Revision of the Act on Waste Management and Public Cleansing (Act No. 105 of 1992);\n- (iii) the part of the provisions adding row 35-2 to Appended Table 2 that relates to (i) of the same row and the part that excludes those listed in (i) from the part that relates to (ii) of the same row: The day on which the Basel Convention on the Control of Transboundary Movements of Hazardous Wastes and Their Disposal comes to effect in Japan (December 16, 1993).\n\n(Transitional Measures Concerning Penal Provision)\n\n- (2) With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 382 of December 2, 1993] [Extract]\n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of December 6, 1993.\n\n27", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 269 of July 30, 1993]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 379 of December 1, 1993] [Extract]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 382 of December 2, 1993] [Extract]\n\n(Effective Date) \n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of promulgation; provided, however, that the provisions revising row 35 of Appended Table 2 come into effect as of August 10, 1993. \n\n- (2) With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable. \n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of December 22, 1993; provided, however, that the revising provisions listed as follows come into effect as of the date listed in the corresponding item: \n\n- (i) the provisions revising row 9, (iv) of Appended Table 1: The date of promulgation; \n\n- (ii) the provisions revising Article 2, paragraph (5), the provisions revising Article 4, paragraph (2), and the part of the provisions adding row 35-2 to Appended Table 2 that relates to (ii) of the same row (excluding the part that excludes those listed in (i)): The date of enforcement of the Act for Partial Revision of the Act on Waste Management and Public Cleansing (Act No. 105 of 1992); \n\n- (iii) the part of the provisions adding row 35-2 to Appended Table 2 that relates to (i) of the same row and the part that excludes those listed in (i) from the part that relates to (ii) of the same row: The day on which the Basel Convention on the Control of Transboundary Movements of Hazardous Wastes and Their Disposal comes to effect in Japan (December 16, 1993). \n\n- (2) With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable. \n\n(Transitional Measures Concerning Penal Provision) \n\n27 \n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of December 6, 1993." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9166905658807626, + "doc_id": "d0a1843e983fbe55f94d2159aeda2a9bd699b86743f98a7f34856e0b23f00a91", + "edit_distance": 0.6424050632911392, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9060396813183136, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "(Effective Date)\n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of July 7, 2000.\n\n(Transitional Measures Concerning Penal Provision)\n\n- (2) With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 391 of July 24, 2000] [Extract]\n\n(Effective Date)\n\nArticle 1 This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of April 1, 2001.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 545 of December 27, 2000]\n\n(Effective Date)\n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of promulgation.\n\n(Transitional Measures Concerning Penal Provision)\n\n- (2) With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 184 of May 16, 2001]\n\n(Effective Date)\n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of promulgation; provided, however, that the provisions revising row 10 of Appended Table 1 come into effect as of May 30, 2001.\n\n(Transitional Measures Concerning Penal Provision)\n\n- (2) With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 335 of October 26, 2001]\n\n(Effective Date)\n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of January 1, 2002; provided, however,\n\n37", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "(Effective Date) \n\n(Transitional Measures Concerning Penal Provision) \n\n(Effective Date) \n\nArticle 1 This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of April 1, 2001. \n\n(Effective Date) \n\n(Transitional Measures Concerning Penal Provision) \n\n(Effective Date) \n\n(Transitional Measures Concerning Penal Provision) \n\n(Effective Date) \n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of July 7, 2000. \n\n- (2) With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable. \n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of promulgation. \n\n- (2) With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable. \n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of promulgation; provided, however, that the provisions revising row 10 of Appended Table 1 come into effect as of May 30, 2001. \n\n- (2) With regard to the application of penal provision to acts committed prior to the enforcement of this Cabinet Order, the provisions then in force remain applicable. \n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of January 1, 2002; provided, however, \n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 391 of July 24, 2000] [Extract]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 545 of December 27, 2000]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 184 of May 16, 2001]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 335 of October 26, 2001]\n\n37" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8864205875439113, + "doc_id": "e344fe5e5c0157d9f51a724c0d38096d5ca51bdff246a7191a48c9ebe4f55554", + "edit_distance": 0.5448275862068965, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.8774417978883067, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of December 23, 1961.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 432 of December 28, 1961] [Extract]\n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of January 1, 1962.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 398 of October 1, 1962]\n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of promulgation.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 126 of April 12, 1963] [Extract]\n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of April 15, 1963.\n\nSupplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 177 of May 29, 1963] This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of May 31, 1963.\n\nSupplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 240 of July 8, 1963] This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of July 12, 1963.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 89 of March 31, 1964] [Extract]\n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of April 1, 1964.\n\nSupplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 178 of June 8, 1964] This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of June 10, 1964.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 181 of June 15, 1964] [Extract]\n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of July 1, 1964.\n\nSupplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 276 of August 24, 1964]\n\n12", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of December 23, 1961. \n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of the date of promulgation. \n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of May 31, 1963. \n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of July 12, 1963. \n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of June 10, 1964. \n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of January 1, 1962. \n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of April 15, 1963. \n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of April 1, 1964. \n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of July 1, 1964. \n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 432 of December 28, 1961] [Extract]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 398 of October 1, 1962]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 126 of April 12, 1963] [Extract]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 177 of May 29, 1963]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 240 of July 8, 1963]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 89 of March 31, 1964] [Extract]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 178 of June 8, 1964]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 181 of June 15, 1964] [Extract]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 276 of August 24, 1964]\n\n12" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8801754069423207, + "doc_id": "5359e40c12fb9a6f4975fec138f7ac338787f133ae7e7f5302e41fd202ce3c33", + "edit_distance": 0.570957095709571, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.8558414670638013, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of December 21, 1955.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 29 of March 22, 1956] [Extract]\n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of April 1, 1956.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 341 of November 14, 1956] [Extract]\n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of November 16, 1956.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 255 of August 28, 1958] [Extract]\n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of September 1, 1958.\n\nSupplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 339 of December 22, 1958] This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of December 25, 1958.\n\nSupplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 77 of March 31, 1959] This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of April 6, 1959.\n\nSupplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 284 of September 1, 1959] This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of September 7, 1959.\n\nSupplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 327 of October 30, 1959] This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of November 2, 1959.\n\nSupplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 108 of April 25, 1960] This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of May 1, 1960.\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 135 of May 30, 1960] [Extract]\n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of June 6, 1960.\n\n10", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of December 21, 1955. \n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of December 25, 1958. \n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of April 6, 1959. \n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of September 7, 1959. \n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of November 2, 1959. \n\nThis Cabinet Order comes into effect as of May 1, 1960. \n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 29 of March 22, 1956] [Extract]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 341 of November 14, 1956] [Extract]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 255 of August 28, 1958] [Extract]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 339 of December 22, 1958]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 77 of March 31, 1959]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 284 of September 1, 1959]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 327 of October 30, 1959]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 135 of May 30, 1960] [Extract]\n\n## Supplementary Provisions [Cabinet Order No. 108 of April 25, 1960]\n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of June 6, 1960. \n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of September 1, 1958. \n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of November 16, 1956. \n\n- (1) This Cabinet Order comes into effect as of April 1, 1956. \n\n10" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "1335767bd2271831e85116a343169dcb0d35a333ac8880ebfcb9da2564e6f9d2", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.5, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "56", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "56" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7247553698103593, + "doc_id": "cbf0838b738ff06e08b85f5c8591c253ee2279e31229de161d63fea6bc99eaa1", + "edit_distance": 0.25892857142857145, + "f1_score": 0.8200000000000001, + "meteor": 0.8744577006507592, + "precision": 0.7454545454545455, + "pred_md": "238\n\nTable 56. Function Keys for Edit Operation on the Design Display (continued)\n\nYou can use the following function keys when you are specifying the end position:\n\n- v Press the F6 key to specify the end position of a graphic.\n- v Press the F9 key to specify the end position of a line.\n- v Press the F10 key to specify the end position of a box.\n- v Press the F22 key to specify the end position of a block.\n\nTable 57. Function Keys to Specify End Position on the Design Display\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.9111111111111111, + "true_md": "Table56.FunctionKeysforEditOperationontheDesignDisplay (continued)\n\nYou can use the following function keys when you are specifying the end position:\n\nTable57.FunctionKeystoSpecifyEndPositionontheDesignDisplay\n\n- v Press the F6 key to specify the end position of a graphic.\n\n- v Press the F9 key to specify the end position of a line.\n\n- v Press the F10 key to specify the end position of a box.\n\n- v Press the F22 key to specify the end position of a block.\n\n238 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8386727797962062, + "doc_id": "7e9b34d09728c84a6208f2f049f268f0135f13f4c4f292308837eadd553e11e4", + "edit_distance": 0.8333333333333334, + "f1_score": 0.9318181818181818, + "meteor": 0.6651298763457452, + "precision": 0.9761904761904762, + "pred_md": "## Specify Break Fields\n\nThis display allows you to specify which fields will cause a page break when you want start a new page according to the field value in the record even if the number of the records in the current page does not reach the page maximum. When the value of the record in the specified fields is not equal to that of the previous record, the Print Format Utility starts a new page before printing the record.\n\nIf two or more fields are specified as break fields, a page break occurs when the value of any of the specified fields for a record is not equal to that of the previous record. On this display, the names, the length, the type, and the descriptions of the fields in the specified database file are listed.\n\nThe following table explains each field of the Specify Break Fields display.\n\nTable 29. Specify Break Fields display fields\n\nChapter 10. Work with PFD Definitions\n\n161", + "recall": 0.8913043478260869, + "true_md": "## Specify Break Fields\n\n## Specify Break Fields\n\nChapter 10. Work with PFD Definitions 161\n\nThe following table explains each field of the Specify Break Fields display.\n\nIf two or more fields are specified as break fields, a page break occurs when the value of any of the specified fields for a record is not equal to that of the previous record. On this display, the names, the length, the type, and the descriptions of the fields in the specified database file are listed.\n\nThis display allows you to specify which fields will cause a page break when you want start a new page according to the field value in the record even if the number of the records in the current page does not reach the page maximum. When the value of the record in the specified fields is not equal to that of the previous record, the Print Format Utility starts a new page before printing the record.\n\nBottom\n\nF3=Exit F5=Refresh F12=Cancel\n\nType option, press Enter. 1=Select\n\nTable29.SpecifyBreakFieldsdisplayfields" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7071067811865475, + "doc_id": "870b9199d481119e944352494d1f384c71f9d49f32c2eba7618217d74b750e68", + "edit_distance": 0.2, + "f1_score": 0.8421052631578947, + "meteor": 0.8017676767676769, + "precision": 0.8888888888888888, + "pred_md": "268\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.8, + "true_md": "268 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6841919185056334, + "doc_id": "39f65102b2ec8416fb8e5efd00dfc7ef0fb4a8bd7d07af4a526146b8d0c45106", + "edit_distance": 0.3165829145728643, + "f1_score": 0.8927335640138409, + "meteor": 0.900551717111205, + "precision": 0.8113207547169812, + "pred_md": "## Appendix D. Using GDFs in AFP Utilities\n\nIBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries cannot create GDF in itself.\n\nGraphics data format (GDF) is a means of storing pictures. GDDM uses it internally, and also makes it available to application programs. It consists of a set of orders with similar meanings to the GDDM graphics call statements. In many cases there is a one-for-one mapping between GDF orders and GDDM call statements.\n\nYou can create GDF easily by using Business Graphics Utility (BGU), and also by application programs. You can also create GDF on System/390.\n\nTo use a System/390 GDF file, you must first convert the GDF file for use on the server. To convert the GDF file, use the GDF Bridge Utility of the Graphical Display and Query Facility (QGDF) Licensed Program. You can do conversions in either VM or in MVS/TSO.\n\nIf the System/390 supports VM, type the following to start the GDF Bridge Utility and press Enter:\n\nEMGGDFB fn TOGDF |EXPAND|\n\nThe entries in this procedure are as follows:\n\nfn\n\nThe filename of a CMS file whose file type is ADMGDF. This file contains the ADMGDF object.\n\nTOGDF\n\nIndicates that the specified file is to be converted to a GDF file.\n\nEXPAND\n\nSpecifies that vector symbols and arcs be expanded to lines.\n\nIf the System/390 supports MVS/TSO, type the following to start the GDF Bridge Utility and press Enter:\n\nEMGGDFB indsn outdsn member TOGDF |EXPAND|\n\nThe entries in this procedure are as follows:\n\nindsn\n\nThe fully qualified name of the dataset that contains the ADMGDF object.\n\noutdsn\n\nThe fully qualified name of the dataset that is to contain the GDF object.\n\nmember\n\nThe name of the member in the above datasets that contains the input/output.\n\nTOGDF\n\nSpecifies that the input member is to be converted into a GDF file and\n\nstored in the output member.\n\nEXPAND\n\nSpecifies that vector symbols and arcs be expanded to lines.\n\nThe GDF file created by these procedures can then be migrated to the server for use by iSeries system.\n\nNote: GDFs created by System/390 GDDM releases subsequent to release 1.3 may not be supported by the system.\n\n439", + "recall": 0.9923076923076923, + "true_md": "## Appendix D. Using GDFs in AFP Utilities\n\nIBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries cannot create GDF in itself.\n\nGraphics data format (GDF) is a means of storing pictures. GDDM uses it internally, and also makes it available to application programs. It consists of a set of orders with similar meanings to the GDDM graphics call statements. In many cases there is a one-for-one mapping between GDF orders and GDDM call statements.\n\nYou can create GDF easily by using Business Graphics Utility (BGU), and also by application programs. You can also create GDF on System/390.\n\nTo use a System/390 GDF file, you must first convert the GDF file for use on the server. To convert the GDF file, use the GDF Bridge Utility of the Graphical Display and Query Facility (QGDF) Licensed Program. You can do conversions in either VM or in MVS/TSO.\n\nIf the System/390 supports VM, type the following to start the GDF Bridge Utility and press Enter: EMGGDFB fn TOGDF |EXPAND|\n\nThe entries in this procedure are as follows:\n\nIf the System/390 supports MVS/TSO, type the following to start the GDF Bridge Utility and press Enter:\n\nEMGGDFB indsn outdsn member TOGDF |EXPAND|\n\nThe entries in this procedure are as follows:\n\nThe GDF file created by these procedures can then be migrated to the server for use by iSeries system.\n\n- Note: GDFs created by System/390 GDDM releases subsequent to release 1.3 may not be supported by the system.\n\n439" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8957568537588615, + "doc_id": "23f42847acac82cecc8eda24323ba07ce9543b4252d22c31d5da297d87f0b18f", + "edit_distance": 0.14685314685314685, + "f1_score": 0.9604519774011301, + "meteor": 0.967681745534832, + "precision": 0.9659090909090909, + "pred_md": "14\n\nprinted on HP-CL printers if transformed first by the Host Printer Transform, which is an integrated print subsystem of iSeries.\n\n- v Support for accessing image files on a client workstation through a program such as iSeries Access.\n- v iSeries-resident AFP fonts as required by overlays and Print Format Utility applications. Fonts are available in 240 dot per inch (dpi), 300 dpi, and outline fonts with AFP Font Collection (5468-113), in both SBCS (single byte character set) and DBCS (double byte character set) versions.\n\n## AFP Utilities Fundamentals (Concepts)\n\nThis section describes the concepts and terminology used in AFP Utilities for iSeries.\n\n## Libraries, Files, and Members\n\nInformation or data is organized and stored on your system in various forms. When you work with AFP Utilities for iSeries, you need to understand the relationship between libraries, files, and members on the system. A library is a place on the system to store files and objects. A file contains one or more members. When a file is copied to another file, all the members that are contained in the original file are copied to the new file also. When a file is erased, all the members that are contained in the original file are erased also.\n\nFigure 8 shows the relationship of the members and the files in the library.\n\nFigure 8. Members and Files in a Library\n\nFigure 8. Members and Files in a Library\n\nWhen you create a member such as a source overlay or a printout format definition (PFD definition), you need to create a library and a file (a source overlay file or a PFD definition file) in advance to store the member.\n\n## Elements\n\nThe elements are text, lines, boxes, bar codes, page segments, and graphics that are defined in a source overlay and a printout format definition. In a page layout of a printout format definition, you can define a record as an element.\n\nSee 'Chapter 13. Design Operation' on page 227 for more information about defining elements in a source overlay and a printout format definition.\n\n## AFP Utilities for iSeries Displays\n\nSeveral types of displays are shown when you use the AFP Utilities for iSeries.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.9550561797752809, + "true_md": "printed on HP-CL printers if transformed first by the Host Printer Transform, which is an integrated print subsystem of iSeries.\n\n- v Support for accessing image files on a client workstation through a program such as iSeries Access.\n\n- v iSeries–resident AFP fonts as required by overlays and Print Format Utility applications. Fonts are available in 240 dot per inch (dpi), 300 dpi, and outline fonts with AFP Font Collection (5468–113), in both SBCS (single byte character set) and DBCS (double byte character set) versions.\n\n## AFP Utilities Fundamentals (Concepts)\n\n## Libraries, Files, and Members\n\nThis section describes the concepts and terminology used in AFP Utilities for iSeries.\n\nInformation or data is organized and stored on your system in various forms. When you work with AFP Utilities for iSeries, you need to understand the relationship between libraries, files, and members on the system. A library is a place on the system to store files and objects. A file contains one or more members. When a file is copied to another file, all the members that are contained in the original file are copied to the new file also. When a file is erased, all the members that are contained in the original file are erased also.\n\nFigure 8 shows the relationship of the members and the files in the library.\n\nFigure8.MembersandFilesinaLibrary\n\nWhen you create a member such as a source overlay or a printout format definition (PFD definition), you need to create a library and a file (a source overlay file or a PFD definition file) in advance to store the member.\n\nThe elements are text, lines, boxes, bar codes, page segments, and graphics that are defined in a source overlay and a printout format definition. In a page layout of a printout format definition, you can define a record as an element.\n\nSee “Chapter 13. Design Operation” on page 227 for more information about defining elements in a source overlay and a printout format definition.\n\nSeveral types of displays are shown when you use the AFP Utilities for iSeries.\n\n## Elements\n\n## AFP Utilities for iSeries Displays\n\n14 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9492049995454138, + "doc_id": "d0077ad866c22e8b3446ce7f4caf2fbc0ee44f3213b3ebf1838f9ddc26423bfe", + "edit_distance": 0.8389610389610389, + "f1_score": 0.9863013698630138, + "meteor": 0.8648361229147463, + "precision": 0.9863013698630136, + "pred_md": "## Chapter 3. Getting Started with the Overlay Utility\n\nThis chapter describes how to create an overlay with the Overlay Utility by showing a practical exercise.\n\nThe operational steps of creating an overlay with the Overlay Utility are as follows:\n\n- Step 1. Starting the Overlay Utility.\n- Step 2. Creating a source overlay file in a library.\n- Step 3. Creating a source overlay in the previously created source overlay file.\n\nThis step consists of the following sub-steps:\n\n- a. Designing a source overlay\n- 1) Defining a text element\n- 2) Defining a line element\n- 3) Defining a box element\n- 4) Defining a bar code element\n- 5) Placing a graphics element\n- b. Viewing the overlay with the AFP Workbench Viewer\n- c. Saving the source overlay\n- Step 4. Changing a source overlay.\n- This step consists of the following sub-steps:\n- a. Designing a source overlay, including placing a page segment\n- b. Saving the source overlay\n- c. Creating an overlay from a source overlay\n- Step 5. Using an overlay.\n\n## Notes:\n\n- 1. Some printers do not support bar code and graphics architectures. If your printer does not support graphics, you should not place graphics in a source overlay. If your printer does not support bar codes, you should specify your printer type on the Define Overlay Specifications display in the \" Creating a Source Overlay \" step. AFP Utilities for iSeries generates appropriate data to print a bar code on those printers. See IBM Printing Systems: Printer Information , (S544-5750), to check if your printer supports them.\n- 2. To perform the following task, you need a page segment and a physical file. Page segment QFCLOGO and physical file QAFCGRPH should exist in library QGPL. If they do not exist, copy page segment QFCPAGS and physical file QAFCGDF from library QAFP to library QGPL as page segment QFCLOGO and physical file QAFCGRPH. You can use the Create Duplicate Object (CRTDUPOBJ) command to accomplish this.\n\n29", + "recall": 0.9863013698630136, + "true_md": "## Chapter 3. Getting Started with the Overlay Utility\n\nThis chapter describes how to create an overlay with the Overlay Utility by showing a practical exercise.\n\nThe operational steps of creating an overlay with the Overlay Utility are as follows:\n\n29\n\n- 1. Some printers do not support bar code and graphics architectures. If your printer does not support graphics, you should not place graphics in a source overlay. If your printer does not support bar codes, you should specify your printer type on the Define Overlay Specifications display in the † Creating a Source Overlay † step. AFP Utilities for iSeries generates appropriate data to print a bar code on those printers. See IBM Printing Systems: Printer Information , (S544–5750), to check if your printer supports them.\n\n- 2. To perform the following task, you need a page segment and a physical file. Page segment QFCLOGO and physical file QAFCGRPH should exist in library QGPL. If they do not exist, copy page segment QFCPAGS and physical file QAFCGDF from library QAFP to library QGPL as page segment QFCLOGO and physical file QAFCGRPH. You can use the Create Duplicate Object (CRTDUPOBJ) command to accomplish this.\n\n- Step 1. Starting the Overlay Utility.\n\n- Step 2. Creating a source overlay file in a library.\n\n- Step 3. Creating a source overlay in the previously created source overlay file. This step consists of the following sub-steps:\n\n- a. Designing a source overlay\n\n- b. Viewing the overlay with the AFP Workbench Viewer\n\n- c. Saving the source overlay\n\n- 1) Defining a text element\n\n- 2) Defining a line element\n\n- 3) Defining a box element\n\n- 4) Defining a bar code element\n\n- 5) Placing a graphics element\n\n- Step 4. Changing a source overlay.\n\n- a. Designing a source overlay, including placing a page segment\n\n- b. Saving the source overlay\n\n- c. Creating an overlay from a source overlay\n\n- Step 5. Using an overlay.\n\nThis step consists of the following sub-steps:\n\n## Notes:" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.905026986017891, + "doc_id": "ca1f4877400352f8cfed88fb5d096a950e2431b311cbfd4cba0c1845adcf4e66", + "edit_distance": 0.7400468384074942, + "f1_score": 0.9785714285714285, + "meteor": 0.8693186893628554, + "precision": 0.9785714285714285, + "pred_md": "specified on the Create authority prompt (CRTAUT parameter) is changed, the new value will not affect this page segment.\n\n## *CHANGE\n\nChange authority allows the user to perform all operations on the page segment except those limited to the owner or controlled by object existence authority and object management authority. The user can change the page segment and perform basic functions on the page segment. Change authority provides object operational authority and all data authority.\n\n- *ALL All authority allows the user to perform all operations on the page segment except those limited to the owner or controlled by authorization list management authority. The user can control the page segment's existence, specify the security for the page segment, change the page segment, and perform basic functions on the page segment. The user cannot transfer ownership of the page segment.\n- *USE\n\nUse authority allows the user to perform basic operations on the page segment, such as read the page segment. The user is prevented from changing the page segment. Use authority provides object operational authority, read authority, and execute authority.\n\n## *EXCLUDE\n\nExclude authority prevents the user from accessing the page segment.\n\n## authorization-list-name\n\nSpecify the name of an authorization list. Users included on the authorization list are granted authority to the page segment as specified by the list. The authorization list must exist when the page segment is created.\n\nText 'description' (TEXT)\n\nSpecifies text that briefly describes the page segment to be created.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\n## *SAME\n\nSpecifies the text used when you previously created a page segment of the same name.\n\n## *BLANK\n\nSpecifies the text is blank.\n\n'description'\n\nSpecify no more than 50 characters of text, enclosed in apostrophes.\n\n## Replace (REPLACE)\n\nSpecifies whether or not the page segment replaces the existing page segment if a page segment of the same name already exists in the library.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\n*YES\n\n*NO\n\nA new page segment is created and the old page segment is replaced by it.\n\nA new page segment is not created if an old page segment of the same name already exists in the library.\n\nChapter 21. AFP Utilities for iSeries Commands\n\n377", + "recall": 0.9785714285714285, + "true_md": "specified on the Create authority prompt (CRTAUT parameter) is changed, the new value will not affect this page segment.\n\nChange authority allows the user to perform all operations on the page segment except those limited to the owner or controlled by object existence authority and object management authority. The user can change the page segment and perform basic functions on the page segment. Change authority provides object operational authority and all data authority.\n\nExclude authority prevents the user from accessing the page segment.\n\nSpecify the name of an authorization list. Users included on the authorization list are granted authority to the page segment as specified by the list. The authorization list must exist when the page segment is created.\n\nSpecifies text that briefly describes the page segment to be created.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\nSpecifies the text used when you previously created a page segment of the same name.\n\nSpecifies the text is blank.\n\nSpecify no more than 50 characters of text, enclosed in apostrophes.\n\nSpecifies whether or not the page segment replaces the existing page segment if a page segment of the same name already exists in the library.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\nChapter 21. AFP Utilities for iSeries Commands 377\n\n- *NO A new page segment is not created if an old page segment of the same name already exists in the library.\n\n- *YES A new page segment is created and the old page segment is replaced by it.\n\n- *USE Use authority allows the user to perform basic operations on the page segment, such as read the page segment. The user is prevented from changing the page segment. Use authority provides object operational authority, read authority, and execute authority.\n\n- *ALL All authority allows the user to perform all operations on the page segment except those limited to the owner or controlled by authorization list management authority. The user can control the page segment’s existence, specify the security for the page segment, change the page segment, and perform basic functions on the page segment. The user cannot transfer ownership of the page segment.\n\n## *CHANGE\n\n## authorization-list-name\n\n## *EXCLUDE\n\n## Text ’description’ (TEXT)\n\n## *SAME\n\n## *BLANK\n\n## ’description’\n\n## Replace (REPLACE)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8560905312314177, + "doc_id": "bf9ac814ee07aa98a7d6d3b30d29ebee9b1422831b67736ac6a8c2d903f795a5", + "edit_distance": 0.827027027027027, + "f1_score": 0.9884169884169884, + "meteor": 0.7533843960403455, + "precision": 0.9922480620155039, + "pred_md": "Source overlay (MBR)\n\nSpecifies the name of the source overlay to be worked with or created. The default value for this parameter depends on whether or not you specify the FILE parameter.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\n## *SELECT\n\nThis is the default value if you specify the FILE parameter. If you choose *SELECT, you will get the lists of all source overlays in the specified source overlay file and library. Select one or more source overlays to work with on the display.\n\n*PRV\n\nThis is the default value if you do not specify the FILE parameter. *PRV is the name of the previous source overlay that was used.\n\nThis is the default value if you do not specify the FILE parameter. *PRV is the name of the previous source overlay that was used.\n\nsource-overlay-name\n\nSpecify the name of the source overlay you want to work with.\n\n## Option (OPTION)\n\nSpecifies the function to perform on the selected source overlay.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\n*BLANK or ' '\n\nThis is the default value if you do not specify a source overlay name. *BLANK specifies no action.\n\n## 1=Create\n\nType 1 to create a source overlay.\n\n## 2=Change\n\nThis is the default value if you specify a source overlay name.\n\nType 2 to change a source overlay.\n\n## 3=Copy\n\nType 3 to copy a source overlay.\n\n4=Delete\n\nType 4 to delete a source overlay.\n\n6=Print\n\nType 6 to print a source overlay.\n\n7=Rename\n\nType 7 to rename a source overlay.\n\n## 9=Create overlay\n\nType 9 to create an overlay from a source overlay.\n\n## STRPFU (Start Print Format Utility) Command\n\nThis command allows you to perform an option of Print Format Utility directly without viewing the Work with PFD Definitions display. Figure 28 on the following page shows the command syntax for STRPFU command.\n\nChapter 21. AFP Utilities for iSeries Commands\n\n365", + "recall": 0.9846153846153847, + "true_md": "## Source overlay (MBR)\n\n## *SELECT\n\n## source-overlay-name\n\n## Option (OPTION)\n\n## *BLANK or ’ ’\n\n## 1=Create\n\n## 2=Change\n\n## 3=Copy\n\n## 4=Delete\n\n## 6=Print\n\n## 7=Rename\n\n## 9=Create overlay\n\n## STRPFU (Start Print Format Utility) Command\n\nThis command allows you to perform an option of Print Format Utility directly without viewing the Work with PFD Definitions display. Figure 28 on the following page shows the command syntax for STRPFU command.\n\nType 9 to create an overlay from a source overlay.\n\nType 7 to rename a source overlay.\n\nType 6 to print a source overlay.\n\nType 4 to delete a source overlay.\n\nType 3 to copy a source overlay.\n\nType 2 to change a source overlay.\n\nThis is the default value if you specify a source overlay name.\n\nType 1 to create a source overlay.\n\nThis is the default value if you do not specify a source overlay name. *BLANK specifies no action.\n\nSpecifies the function to perform on the selected source overlay.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\nSpecify the name of the source overlay you want to work with.\n\nThis is the default value if you do not specify the FILE parameter. *PRV is the name of the previous source overlay that was used.\n\nThis is the default value if you specify the FILE parameter. If you choose *SELECT, you will get the lists of all source overlays in the specified source overlay file and library. Select one or more source overlays to work with on the display.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\nSpecifies the name of the source overlay to be worked with or created. The default value for this parameter depends on whether or not you specify the FILE parameter.\n\n- *PRV This is the default value if you do not specify the FILE parameter. *PRV is the name of the previous source overlay that was used.\n\nChapter 21. AFP Utilities for iSeries Commands 365" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7071067811865475, + "doc_id": "4e99c504727097e30f2bf43e53eed98b2043b7c7a52d0af4117fe813e402dafd", + "edit_distance": 0.2, + "f1_score": 0.8421052631578947, + "meteor": 0.8017676767676769, + "precision": 0.8888888888888888, + "pred_md": "340\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.8, + "true_md": "340 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0019466865530115072, + "doc_id": "1bc631a94861608927a5d42c790d1371af460bab200b6ee990f936ec67a07b34", + "edit_distance": 0.9974035608308606, + "f1_score": 0.07079646017699115, + "meteor": 0.02849066762383346, + "precision": 0.037037037037037035, + "pred_md": "| 56. | Function Keys for Edit Operation on the Design Display . . . . . . . . . | Function Keys for Edit Operation on the Design Display . . . . . . . . . |\n|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|\n| 57. | Function Keys to Specify End Position on the Design Display . . . . . . . Formatting examples . . . . . . . | Function Keys to Specify End Position on the Design Display . . . . . . . Formatting examples . . . . . . . |\n| 58. | . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 . 270 | . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 . 270 |\n| 59. POSTNET types. . . . | . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . | . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . |\n| 60. | . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . | . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . |\n| Select Page Segment display fields 61. Select Field in Record Format (Graphics) . 62. Work with Source Overlay Fonts display fields | Select Page Segment display fields 61. Select Field in Record Format (Graphics) . 62. Work with Source Overlay Fonts display fields | Select Page Segment display fields 61. Select Field in Record Format (Graphics) . 62. Work with Source Overlay Fonts display fields |\n| 63. | 63. | 63. |\n| | . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . | . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . |\n| 64. 65. | Change Source Overlay Font display fields Change PFD Definition Font display fields. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change Source Overlay Font display fields | Change Source Overlay Font display fields Change PFD Definition Font display fields. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change Source Overlay Font display fields |\n| 66. | . 301 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . | . 301 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . |\n| Display PFD Definition Font display fields. 67. | Display PFD Definition Font display fields. 67. | Display PFD Definition Font display fields. 67. |\n| 68. 69. | 304 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 . 332 . 342 342 | 304 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 . 332 . 342 342 |\n| | Display Source Overlay Font display fields Convert to Page Segment display fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Work with Overlays Function prompts . Work with Overlays Function options . . | . . |\n| | . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 . 344 | . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 . 344 |\n| 70. 71. 72. 73. | . . . . . . . . . . . . . . | . . . . . . . . . . . . . . |\n| Work with Overlays Function columns Confirm Delete of Overlays display fields Print Overlay display fields . | . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . | . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . |\n| . | . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . | . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . |\n| 74. Convert Overlay to File display fields 75. Work with Page segments Function prompts 76. Work with Page segments Function options 77. Work with Page segments Function columns | . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . | 345 . 348 . 352 . 353 . 353 |\n| . | | . . . |\n| 78. 79. Print Page Segment display fields. 80. | . Confirm Delete of Page Segments display fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . | 355 356 358 . 391 |\n| 81. 82. | . . . . . . . . . . . . . | . . |\n| | Convert Page Segment to Files display fields Overlay Utility minimum and maximum limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . | |\n| 83. 84. Sense bytes and possible causes 85. | Print Format Utility minimum and maximum limitations . Common symptoms and possible causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . | |\n| 86. | Degree of rotation and rotation formats . . . . . . . . . . | 394 403 . 406 . 420 . 440 |\n| 87. Tasks related to source overlays . | . . . | . |\n| 88. | GDF orders generated by S/390, iSeries system, and the GDF orders supported by AFP Utilities. . Tasks related to source overlay files . . . . | 443 . 444 |\n| | . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . | . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . |\n| 89. | | |\n| 90. | . . . . . . . Tasks related to PFD definitions Tasks related to PFD definition files | |\n| 91. Tasks related to overlay objects | . . . . . . . . . Defining an element in the screen view of the design display | . . . . . . . . . Defining an element in the screen view of the design display |\n| 92. | . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . | . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . |\n| Tasks related to page segments 93. | Handling existing elements in the screen view of the design display Changing the view of the display in the screen view of the design display Defining an element in the list view of the design display Handling existing elements in the list view of the design display | Handling existing elements in the screen view of the design display Changing the view of the display in the screen view of the design display Defining an element in the list view of the design display Handling existing elements in the list view of the design display |\n| 94. | . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . | . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . |\n| 95. 96. 97. 98. 99. | | |\n| | . . . . | . . . . |\n| | . . . . . . | . . . . . . |\n| Tasks related to text element Tasks related to text element 100. Tasks related to line element | . . . . | . . . . |\n| 101. 102. | . . . | . . . |\n| | . . 448 . . 449 . . 449 . . 450 . . 450 . . 451 . . 451 452 | . . 448 . . 449 . . 449 . . 450 . . 450 . . 451 . . 451 452 |\n| | . . . . 452 . . 453 | . . . . 452 . . 453 |\n| 103. 104. | 103. 104. | 103. 104. |\n| | . . . . . . . . . . . . | . . . . . . . . . . . . |\n| Tasks related to box element Tasks related to bar code element . 105. | . . . . . . . . . . . | . . . . . . . . . . . |\n| 106. 107. | 106. 107. | 106. 107. |\n| 108. | . . . . | . . . . |\n| | . . . | . . . |\n| | . . . . . . | . . . . . . |\n| 109. 110. | . . . . | . . . . |\n| Tasks related to graphics element . 111. | . . . . . . | . . . . . . |\n| Tasks related to page segment element 112. | . . . . . . . . . . . . | |\n| Tasks related to record layout element Tasks related to font Tasks related to printout specifications Tasks related to mapping object Tasks related to break fields. IPDS data-type towers Code 128 character set | | |\n| | Tasks related to overlay specifications and PFD specifications | |\n| | . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . | |\n\nxii\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.8, + "true_md": "xii AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.44478866747774504, + "doc_id": "a5c1f491f81db592daa9ed1bcf223978ca1814329ec0ae5feb630935936d1ca2", + "edit_distance": 0.5054151624548736, + "f1_score": 0.7952755905511811, + "meteor": 0.6329223153678678, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "You can create an overlay from this display. Except for the overlay name, the default names and text description are the same as those of the source overlay. The first eight characters of the source overlay name are used as the default overlay name.\n\n## Example Actions:\n\n- 1. Type Y for the Create overlay prompt.\n- 2. Press the Enter key.\n\nThe Work with Source Overlays display appears with completion messages. A + character at the end of the message line indicates that there are more messages remaining. In this case, the completion message for creating an overlay is the remaining message.\n\nTo look at the remaining message, move the cursor to the message line and press the Page Down (Roll Up) key. You should look at the remaining messages because error messages may be displayed.\n\nExample Action: Press the F3 key.\n\nThe IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries menu appears.\n\nChapter 3. Getting Started with the Overlay Utility\n\n55", + "recall": 0.6601307189542484, + "true_md": "You can create an overlay from this display. Except for the overlay name, the default names and text description are the same as those of the source overlay. The first eight characters of the source overlay name are used as the default overlay name.\n\nThe Work with Source Overlays display appears with completion messages. A + character at the end of the message line indicates that there are more messages remaining. In this case, the completion message for creating an overlay is the remaining message.\n\nTo look at the remaining message, move the cursor to the message line and press the Page Down (Roll Up) key. You should look at the remaining messages because error messages may be displayed.\n\n## Example Actions:\n\n- 1. Type Y for the Create overlay prompt.\n\n- 2. Press the Enter key.\n\nExample Action: Press the F3 key.\n\nThe IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries menu appears.\n\nWork with Source Overlays File . . ........ OVLFILE Name, F4 for list Library........ OVLLIB Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB Source overlay ..... *ALL Name, generic*, *ALL Position to....... Starting characters Type options, press Enter. 1=Create 2=Change 3=Copy 4=Delete 6=Print 7=Rename 9=Create overlay Source Opt Overlay Text Changed STATIONERY Sample Form number 3 12/12/90 Bottom Parameters or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F9=Retrieve F11=Display names only F12=Cancel Source overlay STATIONERY saved in file OVLFILE successfully. +\n\nChapter 3. Getting Started with the Overlay Utility 55" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.2108445456905127, + "doc_id": "37c45e26c4e1d69a9fc84645245eed221a4a54cbbd801206a8e06461ad766f89", + "edit_distance": 0.7083333333333334, + "f1_score": 0.8, + "meteor": 0.6962719298245613, + "precision": 0.8, + "pred_md": "|\n\n|\n\n|\n\n| |\n\n| |\n\n|\n\n|\n\n|\n\n|\n\n|\n\n|\n\n|\n\n|\n\n188\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.8, + "true_md": "188 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8603118393054798, + "doc_id": "9c4cc5cad513fa636ad56e9c3a8905111302088d9e09286055adc17a3eb17177", + "edit_distance": 0.5886792452830188, + "f1_score": 0.970464135021097, + "meteor": 0.9038896423220572, + "precision": 0.9663865546218487, + "pred_md": "## Chapter 9. Starting and Ending the Print Format Utility\n\nThis chapter provides additional information for starting and ending the Print Format Utility.\n\n## Starting the Print Format Utility\n\nYou can start the Print Format Utility by typing either of the following commands on the command line and pressing Enter.\n\n- 1. STRAFPU (Start IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries)\n- 2. STRPFU (Start Print Format Utility)\n\nIf you start by typing STRAFPU , the following menu appears:\n\n```\nAFPU IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries Select one of the following: Overlay Utility 1. Work with source overlays 2. Work with source overlay files Print Format Utility 11. Work with PFD definitions 12. Work with PFD definition files 13. Print database file member 14. Print AFP Utilities tutorial Resource Management Utility 21. Convert to page segment 22. Work with overlays 23. Work with page segments Selection or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel F16=System main menu (C) COPYRIGHT IBM CORP. 1991, 1993.\n```\n\nYou can start the following four Print Format Utility functions from this menu:\n\nOption\n\nFunction\n\n11\n\nWork with PFD definitions\n\n12\n\nWork with PFD definition files\n\n13 Print database file member\n\n14 Print AFP Utilities tutorial\n\nThe following describe the options available on the above menu. To select one of the following, type the number of the option on the command line, and press Enter.\n\n139", + "recall": 0.9745762711864406, + "true_md": "## Chapter 9. Starting and Ending the Print Format Utility\n\n## Starting the Print Format Utility\n\nThis chapter provides additional information for starting and ending the Print Format Utility.\n\nYou can start the Print Format Utility by typing either of the following commands on the command line and pressing Enter.\n\nIf you start by typing STRAFPU , the following menu appears:\n\nYou can start the following four Print Format Utility functions from this menu:\n\nThe following describe the options available on the above menu. To select one of the following, type the number of the option on the command line, and press Enter.\n\n- 1. STRAFPU (Start IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries)\n\n- 2. STRPFU (Start Print Format Utility)\n\nAFPU IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries Select one of the following: Overlay Utility 1. Work with source overlays 2. Work with source overlay files Print Format Utility 11. Work with PFD definitions 12. Work with PFD definition files 13. Print database file member 14. Print AFP Utilities tutorial Resource Management Utility 21. Convert to page segment 22. Work with overlays 23. Work with page segments Selection or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel F16=System main menu (C) COPYRIGHT IBM CORP. 1991, 1993.\n\n139" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8919418788435258, + "doc_id": "2ef00db87d9be740213bed84ed6c0dd7173d2712ee683f8083d76fa35927a60d", + "edit_distance": 0.09090909090909091, + "f1_score": 0.958139534883721, + "meteor": 0.9398205281249346, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "This display shows the list of source overlay fonts or PFD definition fonts. You can select a font by typing 1 in the Opt column next to the Font Number column and pressing Enter.\n\nThe following table explains each field in this display.\n\nYou may specify a 1 in the Opt column, then press Enter. Now you return to the previous display.\n\n## Line\n\nTo specify a line element, first move the cursor to the start position of the line and press the F9 key to define a line element. A mark %Lnnn (where nnn is 001 through 999) appears at the start position.\n\nMove the cursor to the end position of the line element and press the F9 key again.\n\nThe key entry area will appear at the lower part of the image area. Start and end positions that were previously identified by the cursor are displayed. A line image also appears to show the start and end positions on the image area.\n\nTo change a line element, move the cursor to the mark of the line and press the F14 (Change) key. The key entry area will appear at the lower part of the image area.\n\nChapter 13. Design Operation\n\n249", + "recall": 0.9196428571428571, + "true_md": "## Select Source Overlay Font\n\nType option, press Enter. 1=Select\n\nBottom\n\nF5=Refresh F12=Cancel\n\nThis display shows the list of source overlay fonts or PFD definition fonts. You can select a font by typing 1 in the Opt column next to the Font Number column and pressing Enter.\n\nThe following table explains each field in this display.\n\nYou may specify a 1 in the Opt column, then press Enter. Now you return to the previous display.\n\nTo specify a line element, first move the cursor to the start position of the line and press the F9 key to define a line element. A mark %Lnnn (where nnn is 001 through 999) appears at the start position.\n\nMove the cursor to the end position of the line element and press the F9 key again.\n\nThe key entry area will appear at the lower part of the image area. Start and end positions that were previously identified by the cursor are displayed. A line image also appears to show the start and end positions on the image area.\n\nTo change a line element, move the cursor to the mark of the line and press the F14 (Change) key. The key entry area will appear at the lower part of the image area.\n\n## Line\n\nChapter 13. Design Operation 249" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9146803986644941, + "doc_id": "1e11aa3b2584c458c4ddd864519ef639fef2e4902e9c2017fc7bfcdc31e1ae3c", + "edit_distance": 0.2138728323699422, + "f1_score": 0.9625668449197863, + "meteor": 0.9601322584514765, + "precision": 0.967741935483871, + "pred_md": "384\n\n## 'description'\n\nSpecify no more than 50 characters of text, enclosed in apostrophes.\n\n## Replace (REPLACE)\n\nSpecifies whether or not the page segment replaces the existing page segment if a page segment of the same name already exists in the library.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\n*YES\n\n*NO\n\nA new page segment is created and the old page segment is replaced by it.\n\nA new page segment is not created if an old page segment of the same name already exists in the library.\n\n## CVTOVLPFM (Convert Overlay to Physical File Member) Command\n\nThis command allows you to convert an overlay (object) to a member in a physical database file. The overlay converted to a physical database file can be transferred to the VM, the MVS, and the OS/2 system.\n\nThe following figure shows the command syntax for CVTOVLPFM command.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.9574468085106383, + "true_md": "384 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\n’description’\n\nSpecify no more than 50 characters of text, enclosed in apostrophes.\n\nSpecifies whether or not the page segment replaces the existing page segment if a page segment of the same name already exists in the library.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\n## Replace (REPLACE)\n\n- *YES A new page segment is created and the old page segment is replaced by it.\n\n- *NO A new page segment is not created if an old page segment of the same name already exists in the library.\n\n## CVTOVLPFM (Convert Overlay to Physical File Member) Command\n\nThis command allows you to convert an overlay (object) to a member in a physical database file. The overlay converted to a physical database file can be transferred to the VM, the MVS, and the OS/2 system.\n\nThe following figure shows the command syntax for CVTOVLPFM command." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.49915938920340513, + "doc_id": "f47f9031335db77966edbc0217055ba5026db120329f9b1f5ebaa0a6a7535b9f", + "edit_distance": 0.631578947368421, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9559884559884562, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Basic English Language Skills\n\n## Compare the following examples:\n\n## Example A\n\n## Example B", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Basic English Language Skills\n\nExample A\n\nExample B\n\n## Compare the following examples:" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5601116640267788, + "doc_id": "2368805d9aaaa3b3698f026550afe2e9f32b86bad218b5478652a446d60479c4", + "edit_distance": 0.5135135135135135, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9342557872881094, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "The following table describes the fields on the Convert to Page Segment display:\n\nThe following table describes the fields on the Convert to Page Segment display:\n\nChapter 18. Convert to Page Segment Function\n\n333", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Chapter 18. Convert to Page Segment Function 333\n\nThe following table describes the fields on the Convert to Page Segment display:" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5465048273698216, + "doc_id": "01d07afe1cb54ecd23eedfe4d91b81dd88e61bf4e0dbe2467784db4177a6c691", + "edit_distance": 0.8843892880470281, + "f1_score": 0.9552238805970149, + "meteor": 0.5423664238561711, + "precision": 0.9907120743034056, + "pred_md": "| display (continued) Convert Page Segment to PFM display 357, 358 | |\n|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|-------------------------------------------------------------------------|\n| Convert PCD to Page Segment (CVTPCDPAGS) display 326 | 324, 325, |\n| Convert PFM to Page Segment (CVTPFMPAGS) display 326, 327 Convert to Page Segment | |\n| display 212 Copy Source Overlay display 77 Copy Source Overlay File display Create Overlay display 47, 54, 80 Create PFD Definition display 131 Create Source Overlays display Define Bar Code Detail display | 92 33 265 |\n| Create PFD Definition File display 108 Create PFD Definition Files display 209 Create PFD Definitions display 147 Create Source Overlay display 46, 65 Create Source Overlay File display 32, 89, 91 | 110, 33, |\n| Define Summary Data display Define Text Detail display 116, 117 design display 16, 228, 229 list view 229 screen view 229 Design Overlay display 35, 36, 37, | 181 |\n| 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 51, 52, 230, 240, 242, 243, 250, 252, 263, 273, 278, 279, 288, 289, 290, 291, 292 Design Page Layout display 127, 128, 129, 130, 169, 170, 171, 175, 176, 284 Design Record Layout display 112, 114, 115, 118, 119, 120, 121, 122, 123, 125, 126, 162, 166 Display PFD Definition Font display 304, 305, 306 Edit Numeric display 168 132 | 46, 53, |\n| Exit Definition display Exit Overlay Utility display 73 Exit PFD Definition display | |\n| fonts 304 | 194 IBM Advanced Function Printing 49, 59, 106, 135, 139, 221, 315, 323 |\n| help 19 Utilities for iSeries display iSeries Main Menu display | 15, 30, 223 |\n\n| display (continued) overlay description 312, 346 | |\n|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|------------------|\n| page segment description | 312, 356 |\n| PFD definition file description | |\n| Place Graphics Detail display | 214 |\n| Place Page Segment Detail display 275 | |\n| Place Record Layout Detail display 128, 173, 174, 285 | 281 |\n| Print Database File Member display 134, 136, 216, 220, 221 Print Overlay display 319, 345 Print Page segment display Print Page Segment display | 322 |\n| Specify Mapping Object Name display 191 Specify Record Selection display work with display 15 Work with Overlays display 319, 341 Work with Page Segments | |\n| source overlay file description Specify Break Fields display Specify Database File display 111, 158 Specify Element Selection display 321, 351 | 355 |\n| display 107, 203, 205 display 297 Work with PFD Definitions display 109, 133, 135, 143, 196, 215 Work with Source Overlay | 47, 54, |\n| Print PFD Data (PRTPFDDTA) display 223 Save PFD Definition display Save Source Overlay display 74 Select Database File display Select Database File Member display 219 Select Field in Record Format display 117, 164, 276, 283 Select Fields to Edit Numeric | 132, 195 159 |\n| Work with PFD Definition Fonts | |\n| display 169 Select Page Segment display Select PFD Definition display 222 Select PFD Definition File display 221 Select Record Format display display 164 Select Source Overlay Font display 249 | 137, 160 94 110, |\n| Select Reserved Variable Name | 276 |\n| | 183 |\n| | 161 |\n| | 124 |\n| | 318, |\n| Work with PFD Definition Files | |\n| display 48 display 31, 48, 83, 85 | |\n| display 297 | |\n| Work with Source Overlay Files Work with Source Overlay Fonts | |\n| Work with Source Overlays display 33, 50, 55, 61 display a page segment description | 312 |\n\nfile\n\n214\n\n| | display description of source overlay file 94 |\n|-----------------------|-------------------------------------------------|\n| DMAS forms duplex 188 | 459 |\n\n## E\n\n| EAN-13 | 264 | | |\n|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------|-----------------|----------|-----|\n| EAN-8 edit | 264 | | |\n| element 288, 295 element operations 234 EIA (Electronic Industries Association) | | | |\n| labels 461 element | | | |\n| 14, 100 | | | |\n| bar code 42, 263, 413 | | | |\n| block edit 289 | | | |\n| box 39, 252, 411 format 419 | | | |\n| shading 435 text placement change 239, 294 change in list view | | 419 | |\n| 291 confirm delete 72 copy 288 | | | |\n| edit 288, 295 graphic 43, 277 | | | |\n| line 38, 249, 409 move 288 page segment 288 | 273, 414 | | |\n| record layout 284, 414 remove | | | |\n| 35, 242, 408 295 | | | |\n| 295 | | | |\n| text element list copy | | | |\n| sort | 295 295 295 | | |\n| move remove restore | | | |\n| element mark hide 232 on/off refresh scroll | 231 232 232 232 | | |\n| change define edit 234 | 233 408 | | |\n| 233 screen view | | | |\n| 234 element position | | | |\n| element operations | 123 | 391, 395 | |\n| element selection specify element type | | | |\n| bar code 227 | | | |\n| box 227 | | | |\n| 227 | | | 228 |\n| | | 227 | |\n| line 227 page segment record layout | | | |\n| 227, 408 | | | |\n| text | | | |\n| element type and position (problem | | | |\n| element position limitations | | | |\n\nIndex\n\n477", + "recall": 0.9221902017291066, + "true_md": "display description of source overlay file 94 DMAS forms 459 duplex 188\n\n## E\n\nEAN-13 264 EAN-8 264 edit element 288, 295 element operations 234 EIA (Electronic Industries Association) labels 461 element 14, 100 bar code 42, 263, 413 block edit 289 box 39, 252, 411 format 419 rotation 420 shading 435 text placement 419 change 239, 294 change in list view 291 confirm delete 72 copy 288 create 294 define 239 edit 288, 295 graphic 43, 277 graphics 415 line 38, 249, 409 move 288 page segment 273, 414 record layout 284, 414 remove 288 text 35, 242, 408 element list copy 295 move 295 remove 295 restore 295 sort 295 element mark 231 hide 232 on/off 232 refresh 232 scroll 232 element operations change 234 define 233 edit 234 screen view 233 element position 408 element position limitations 391, 395 element selection specify 123 element type 227, 408 bar code 227 box 227 line 227 page segment 227 record layout 228 text 227 element type and position (problem analysis) 408\n\ndisplay (continued) overlay description 312, 346 page segment description 312, 356 PFD definition file description 214 Place Graphics Detail display 281 Place Page Segment Detail display 275 Place Record Layout Detail display 128, 173, 174, 285 Print Database File Member display 134, 136, 216, 220, 221 Print Overlay display 319, 345 Print Page segment display 322 Print Page Segment display 355 Print PFD Data (PRTPFDDTA) display 223 Save PFD Definition display 132, 195 Save Source Overlay display 47, 54, 74 Select Database File display 159 Select Database File Member display 219 Select Field in Record Format display 117, 164, 276, 283 Select Fields to Edit Numeric display 169 Select Page Segment display 276 Select PFD Definition display 137, 222 Select PFD Definition File display 221 Select Record Format display 160 Select Reserved Variable Name display 164 Select Source Overlay Font display 249 source overlay file description 94 Specify Break Fields display 161 Specify Database File display 110, 111, 158 Specify Element Selection 124 Specify Mapping Object Name display 191 Specify Record Selection display 183 work with display 15 Work with Overlays display 318, 319, 341 Work with Page Segments display 321, 351 Work with PFD Definition Files display 107, 203, 205 Work with PFD Definition Fonts display 297 Work with PFD Definitions display 109, 133, 135, 143, 196, 215 Work with Source Overlay display 48 Work with Source Overlay Files display 31, 48, 83, 85 Work with Source Overlay Fonts display 297 Work with Source Overlays display 33, 50, 55, 61 display a page segment description 312 display an overlay description 312 display description of PFD definition file 214\n\ndisplay (continued) Convert Page Segment to PFM display 357, 358 Convert PCD to Page Segment (CVTPCDPAGS) display 324, 325, 326 Convert PFM to Page Segment (CVTPFMPAGS) display 326, 327 Convert to Page Segment display 316, 317, 331, 332, 333, 335 Copy PFD Definition display 198 Copy PFD Definition File display 212 Copy Source Overlay display 77 Copy Source Overlay File display 92 Create Overlay display 47, 54, 80 Create PFD Definition display 131 Create PFD Definition File display 108 Create PFD Definition Files display 209 Create PFD Definitions display 110, 147 Create Source Overlay display 33, 46, 65 Create Source Overlay File display 32, 89, 91 Create Source Overlays display 33 Define Bar Code Detail display 265 Define Box Detail display 254, 255 Define Line Detail display 251 Define Overlay Specifications display 66 Define PFD Specifications display 149, 150 Define Printout Specifications display 130, 131, 187 Define Summary Data display 181 Define Text Detail display 116, 117 design display 16, 228, 229 list view 229 screen view 229 Design Overlay display 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 51, 52, 230, 240, 242, 243, 250, 252, 263, 273, 278, 279, 288, 289, 290, 291, 292 Design Page Layout display 127, 128, 129, 130, 169, 170, 171, 175, 176, 284 Design Record Layout display 112, 114, 115, 118, 119, 120, 121, 122, 123, 125, 126, 162, 166 Display PFD Definition Font display 304, 305, 306 Edit Numeric display 168 Exit Definition display 132 Exit Overlay Utility display 46, 53, 73 Exit PFD Definition display 194 fonts 304 help 19 IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries display 15, 30, 49, 59, 106, 135, 139, 221, 315, 323 iSeries Main Menu display 223 Mapping Page Segment Name display 192 menu display 14\n\nIndex 477" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8802731285386961, + "doc_id": "299f4d1de1513dd783c52979283f88da20ae0b78516afb6bc4052922d51e86cf", + "edit_distance": 0.3310104529616725, + "f1_score": 0.9655172413793103, + "meteor": 0.9506479944798292, + "precision": 0.9491525423728814, + "pred_md": "| | | |\n\n## v Control field\n\nFunction Keys: Through the image area, you can see the position of the element or the entire overlay, page layout, or record layout on the display. The image area is similar to a window through which you can see the layout. If the layout is longer than the image area, you can see only a part of it. Therefore, you need to scroll the image area to see the other parts of the layout. The following keys are available to scroll the image area.\n\nTable 50. Function Keys for Scroll Operation\n\nControl Field: In addition to the scrolling functions provided by function keys, the Overlay Utility and the Print Format Utility provide the function to scroll through the image area using the Control field on the display. Do the following:\n\n- 1. Enter one of the following commands in the Control field on the image area.\n- 2. Press Enter.\n\nTable 51. Commands in Control Field for Scroll Operation\n\n## Element Operations in the Screen View\n\nIn the screen view, you can do the following element operations:\n\n- v Define (place) an element\n- v Change an element\n- v Edit an element (copy, move, or remove)\n- v Edit a block of elements (copy, move, or remove)\n\nThe operational steps are different for each operation, but you need to scroll the image area until your desired part is displayed before you start the following operations.\n\nChapter 13. Design Operation\n\n233", + "recall": 0.9824561403508771, + "true_md": "- v Control field\n\nFunction Keys: Through the image area, you can see the position of the element or the entire overlay, page layout, or record layout on the display. The image area is similar to a window through which you can see the layout. If the layout is longer than the image area, you can see only a part of it. Therefore, you need to scroll the image area to see the other parts of the layout. The following keys are available to scroll the image area.\n\nControl Field: In addition to the scrolling functions provided by function keys, the Overlay Utility and the Print Format Utility provide the function to scroll through the image area using the Control field on the display. Do the following:\n\nTable50.FunctionKeysforScrollOperation\n\nTable51.CommandsinControlFieldforScrollOperation\n\nChapter 13. Design Operation 233\n\nThe operational steps are different for each operation, but you need to scroll the image area until your desired part is displayed before you start the following operations.\n\nIn the screen view, you can do the following element operations:\n\n## Element Operations in the Screen View\n\n- v Define (place) an element\n\n- v Change an element\n\n- v Edit an element (copy, move, or remove)\n\n- v Edit a block of elements (copy, move, or remove)\n\n- 1. Enter one of the following commands in the Control field on the image area.\n\n- 2. Press Enter." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9483698332688567, + "doc_id": "50e33cc91937ac335d8ce339eb437a1edb227a20d21e75393f3498d05f5a6e08", + "edit_distance": 0.32079646017699115, + "f1_score": 0.9710982658959538, + "meteor": 0.8906727133283762, + "precision": 0.9767441860465116, + "pred_md": "154\n\n## Change PFD Specifications\n\nYou can change the specifications of an existing PFD definition, or create a new PFD definition based on an existing PFD definition by changing it. Conflicts can occur between previously defined elements and changed specifications in the same PFD definition. This method is usually preferred in the following cases.\n\nNote:\n\nThe change operation is similar to the create operation. The only difference is that the previously entered parameters are already filled in for each field when the display appears. See 'Define PFD Specifications' on page 149 for the description of each parameter.\n\n- v Making the page size smaller\n\nWhen you attempt to reduce the page size from the previously defined value, some elements are placed outside of the newly defined page. For example, elements placed close to the right edge of the previous page layout or record layout can be moved outside of the newly defined page. In this case, elements are deleted if their positions are moved out of the page.\n\nThe Print Format Utility displays the confirmation display when such a situation occurs to let you enter the delete element operation or cancel the change PFD specifications operation. See 'Confirm Delete of Elements' on page 156 for more information.\n\n- v Changing the unit of measure\n\nThe Print Format Utility allows changing the unit of measure in the PFD specifications between inches and centimeters. The defined numbers in each element do not change. So some elements are placed outside of the page layout or the record layout when the number specified for the size exceeds the possible maximum value for the unit. In this case, the page size is made smaller as explained earlier.\n\n- v Changing the printer type\n\nThe Print Format Utility allows changing the printer type in the PFD specifications. The Print Format Utility checks the compatibility between previously defined elements with the newly specified printer type. If the Print Format Utility finds any mismatched elements, the Print Format Utility displays the confirmation display and lists these elements on the display. You can then delete the elements or cancel changing the PFD specifications.\n\nWhen the parameter values of the elements become incorrect by changing the parameter values of the PFD specifications, a warning message is displayed. You can adjust parameter values of those element as follows by pressing the Enter key, or you can change the parameter values of the PFD specifications to correct the errors.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.9655172413793104, + "true_md": "## Change PFD Specifications\n\nYou can change the specifications of an existing PFD definition, or create a new PFD definition based on an existing PFD definition by changing it. Conflicts can occur between previously defined elements and changed specifications in the same PFD definition. This method is usually preferred in the following cases.\n\nWhen you attempt to reduce the page size from the previously defined value, some elements are placed outside of the newly defined page. For example, elements placed close to the right edge of the previous page layout or record layout can be moved outside of the newly defined page. In this case, elements are deleted if their positions are moved out of the page. The Print Format Utility displays the confirmation display when such a situation occurs to let you enter the delete element operation or cancel the change PFD specifications operation. See “Confirm Delete of Elements” on page 156 for more information.\n\nThe Print Format Utility allows changing the unit of measure in the PFD specifications between inches and centimeters. The defined numbers in each element do not change. So some elements are placed outside of the page layout or the record layout when the number specified for the size exceeds the possible maximum value for the unit. In this case, the page size is made smaller as explained earlier.\n\nThe Print Format Utility allows changing the printer type in the PFD specifications. The Print Format Utility checks the compatibility between previously defined elements with the newly specified printer type. If the Print Format Utility finds any mismatched elements, the Print Format Utility displays the confirmation display and lists these elements on the display. You can then delete the elements or cancel changing the PFD specifications.\n\nWhen the parameter values of the elements become incorrect by changing the parameter values of the PFD specifications, a warning message is displayed. You can adjust parameter values of those element as follows by pressing the Enter key, or you can change the parameter values of the PFD specifications to correct the errors.\n\n- Note: The change operation is similar to the create operation. The only difference is that the previously entered parameters are already filled in for each field when the display appears. See “Define PFD Specifications” on page 149 for the description of each parameter.\n\n- v Making the page size smaller\n\n- v Changing the unit of measure\n\n- v Changing the printer type\n\n154 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9240511355321878, + "doc_id": "a824f69348c77442d28c65bcae4cd4cb62139f4cdaaaf133f10ba9251104564d", + "edit_distance": 0.27184466019417475, + "f1_score": 0.963350785340314, + "meteor": 0.9739483600464467, + "precision": 0.9387755102040817, + "pred_md": "Table 84. Sense bytes and possible causes (continued)\n\n## Contacting Your Service Representative\n\nIf you cannot solve a problem using the problem analysis procedure listed in this appendix, you may want to contact your service representative. Before contacting your service representative, be prepared to provide the following information:\n\n- v A copy of the display on which the problem occurred and the values specified. If a copy is not obtained because you cannot press the Print key, provide the title of the display, all values you specified, and the key you pressed.\n- v A copy of the source overlay or PFD definition being processed (if applicable).\n- v A copy of the input database file (if applicable).\n\nIf the problem occurred while your spooled file was being printed, the following is also required:\n\n- v A copy of the page segment being used.\n- v A copy of the spooled file being printed.\n- v A copy of the job log of the printer writer.\n- v A copy of the printout.\n\nChapter 23. Problem Analysis\n\n407", + "recall": 0.989247311827957, + "true_md": "Table84.Sensebytesandpossiblecauses (continued)\n\nIf you cannot solve a problem using the problem analysis procedure listed in this appendix, you may want to contact your service representative. Before contacting your service representative, be prepared to provide the following information:\n\nIf the problem occurred while your spooled file was being printed, the following is also required:\n\n## Contacting Your Service Representative\n\n- v A copy of the display on which the problem occurred and the values specified. If a copy is not obtained because you cannot press the Print key, provide the title of the display, all values you specified, and the key you pressed.\n\n- v A copy of the source overlay or PFD definition being processed (if applicable).\n\n- v A copy of the input database file (if applicable).\n\n- v A copy of the page segment being used.\n\n- v A copy of the spooled file being printed.\n\n- v A copy of the job log of the printer writer.\n\n- v A copy of the printout.\n\nChapter 23. Problem Analysis 407" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7071067811865475, + "doc_id": "528b8544dc8824996d84d4b7302cf6bc16ac2532c712ecf9eb570df0ca06df19", + "edit_distance": 0.2, + "f1_score": 0.8421052631578947, + "meteor": 0.8017676767676769, + "precision": 0.8888888888888888, + "pred_md": "xvi\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.8, + "true_md": "xvi AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7687809456013128, + "doc_id": "30c5c7e939eda3f028b3c41e5e9ce70684bbe22f635ebda57619d5574e2e5b12", + "edit_distance": 0.592964824120603, + "f1_score": 0.8928571428571428, + "meteor": 0.8003530562828951, + "precision": 0.9493670886075949, + "pred_md": "## 4=Delete Overlays\n\nTo delete an overlay object, do the following on the Work with Overlays display on page 341.\n\n- 1. Type 4 in the Opt column beside the overlay that you want to delete.\n- 2. Press Enter.\n\nThe Confirm Delete of Overlays display appears:\n\nOn this display, the overlays that you specified to be deleted on the previous display are listed.\n\nConfirm the list and press Enter to delete them or press F12 to cancel. When you press Enter, the CL Command DLTOVL is called.\n\nThe following table describes the Confirm Delete of Overlays display.\n\nTable 72. Confirm Delete of Overlays display fields\n\n## 6=Print Overlay\n\nTo print an overlay object, do the following on the Work with Overlays display on page 341.\n\n- 1. Type 6 in the Opt column beside the overlay that you want to print.\n- 2. Press Enter.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide\n\n344", + "recall": 0.8426966292134831, + "true_md": "## 4=Delete Overlays\n\n## Confirm Delete of Overlays\n\n## 6=Print Overlay\n\nTo print an overlay object, do the following on the Work with Overlays display on page 341.\n\nOn this display, the overlays that you specified to be deleted on the previous display are listed.\n\nConfirm the list and press Enter to delete them or press F12 to cancel. When you press Enter, the CL Command DLTOVL is called.\n\nThe following table describes the Confirm Delete of Overlays display.\n\nTable72.ConfirmDeleteofOverlaysdisplayfields\n\n- 1. Type 6 in the Opt column beside the overlay that you want to print.\n\n- 2. Press Enter.\n\n344 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\nF11=Display names only F12=Cancel\n\nBottom\n\nPress enter to confirm your choices for 4=Delete. Press F12 to return to change your choices.\n\nThe Confirm Delete of Overlays display appears:\n\nTo delete an overlay object, do the following on the Work with Overlays display on page 341.\n\n- 1. Type 4 in the Opt column beside the overlay that you want to delete.\n\n- 2. Press Enter." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6526922544154561, + "doc_id": "29021544f314f9ca75115d30dccbd3f243e3c43cd069e53acaf5625fad1519cc", + "edit_distance": 0.38213399503722084, + "f1_score": 0.9640718562874253, + "meteor": 0.9180032812165011, + "precision": 0.9698795180722891, + "pred_md": "400\n\n- 003: Do you still have the problem?\n\nYes Go to Step 004.\n\nNo\n\nThe problem was resolved.\n\n004: Does the printer have the current PTF level?\n\nSee the manual for your printer to verify the PTF level.\n\nYes\n\nGo to Step 005 below.\n\n- No Do the following:\n- 1. Install the current level of PTF.\n- 2. Retry the IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries function.\n\n005: Were there any messages in the print writer's message queue indicating an error condition that prevented the print writer job from completing the job?\n\nYes See 'Sense Codes and Possible Causes' on page 406 and follow the directions.\n\nNo Go to Step 012 on page 402.\n\n006: Do you still have the problem?\n\nYes Go to Step 012 on page 402.\n\nNo\n\nThe problem was resolved.\n\n\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\n\n007: Did you receive a message indicating an error condition that prevented you from completing the task?\n\nYes Take the actions indicated by the message. If the action requires you to call for help, see 'Contacting Your Service Representative' on page 407.\n\nWhen you examine a message to see what actions are required, check the following:\n\n- v Second-level message text, which describes the message in more detail. To display the second-level message text, position the cursor on the message line and press the F1 (Help) key.\n- v Cause and Recovery, if applicable, for an explanation of the possible cause of the problem and for appropriate recovery actions.\n\nYou may be receiving more than one message. A plus sign (+) at the end of the message indicates there are more messages being sent. To see the remaining messages, position the cursor on the message line and press the Roll Up (Page Down) key.\n\nIf you still cannot solve your problem after fully examining the message, see 'Contacting Your Service Representative' on page 407.\n\nNo\n\nGo to Step 008 on page 401.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.9583333333333334, + "true_md": "## 005: Were there any messages in the print writer’s message queue indicating an error condition that prevented the print writer job from completing the job?\n\n## 006: Do you still have the problem?\n\n## 007: Did you receive a message indicating an error condition that prevented you from completing the task?\n\n## 003: Do you still have the problem?\n\n## 004: Does the printer have the current PTF level?\n\nSee the manual for your printer to verify the PTF level.\n\n- Yes Go to Step 004.\n\n- No The problem was resolved.\n\n- Yes Go to Step 005 below.\n\n- No Do the following:\n\n- 1. Install the current level of PTF.\n\n- 2. Retry the IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries function.\n\n- Yes See “Sense Codes and Possible Causes” on page 406 and follow the directions.\n\n- No Go to Step 012 on page 402.\n\n- Yes Go to Step 012 on page 402.\n\n- No The problem was resolved.\n\n- Yes Take the actions indicated by the message. If the action requires you to call for help, see “Contacting Your Service Representative” on page 407.\n\nWhen you examine a message to see what actions are required, check the following:\n\n- v Second-level message text, which describes the message in more detail. To display the second-level message text, position the cursor on the message line and press the F1 (Help) key.\n\n- v Cause and Recovery, if applicable, for an explanation of the possible cause of the problem and for appropriate recovery actions.\n\nYou may be receiving more than one message. A plus sign (+) at the end of the message indicates there are more messages being sent. To see the remaining messages, position the cursor on the message line and press the Roll Up (Page Down) key.\n\nIf you still cannot solve your problem after fully examining the message, see “Contacting Your Service Representative” on page 407.\n\n- No Go to Step 008 on page 401.\n\n400 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8815613019887638, + "doc_id": "a6121594a8af6b0726d3dae1c7c439433e0803e94d43d1bce5d9504cdac7f60d", + "edit_distance": 0.532520325203252, + "f1_score": 0.9423076923076924, + "meteor": 0.8314625768160292, + "precision": 0.98, + "pred_md": "You are required to enter the qualified name of the page segment to be created and the object type of the input data.\n\n## Example Actions:\n\n- 1. Type LOGO for the Page segment prompt.\n- 2. Type MYLIB for the Library prompt.\n- 3. Type 1 for the Source object type prompt.\n- 4. Press the Enter key.\n\nRemaining parameters appear according to the specified object type of the input data.\n\nYou are required to enter the folder name and the PC document name. You may also enter other parameters; for example, type Y for the Change image size prompt if you want to increase or decrease the image size or type 180 for the Degree of rotation prompt if you want to print the image upside down.\n\n## Example Actions:\n\n- 1. Type IOCAFLR for the From folder prompt.\n- 2. Type LOGO for the From PC document prompt.\n- 3. Type Logo for the Text 'description' prompt.\n- 4. Press the Enter key.\n\nThe IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries menu appears with a completion message. Page segment LOGO has been created in library MYLIB.\n\nChapter 16. Getting Started with the Resource Management utility\n\n317", + "recall": 0.9074074074074074, + "true_md": "You are required to enter the qualified name of the page segment to be created and the object type of the input data.\n\nRemaining parameters appear according to the specified object type of the input data.\n\nYou are required to enter the folder name and the PC document name. You may also enter other parameters; for example, type Y for the Change image size prompt if you want to increase or decrease the image size or type 180 for the Degree of rotation prompt if you want to print the image upside down.\n\nThe IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries menu appears with a completion message. Page segment LOGO has been created in library MYLIB.\n\n## Example Actions:\n\n- 1. Type IOCAFLR for the From folder prompt.\n\n- 2. Type LOGO for the From PC document prompt.\n\n- 3. Type Logo for the Text ’description’ prompt.\n\n- 4. Press the Enter key.\n\nType choices, press Enter.\n\n## Convert to Page Segment\n\nF3=Exit F5=Refresh F12=Cancel\n\nBottom\n\n## Example Actions:\n\n- 1. Type LOGO for the Page segment prompt.\n\n- 2. Type MYLIB for the Library prompt.\n\n- 3. Type 1 for the Source object type prompt.\n\n- 4. Press the Enter key.\n\nChapter 16. Getting Started with the Resource Management utility 317" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.662556115718456, + "doc_id": "8d341eb9256c02539c5e769cc344e3458cf2284472dcee4ebbc53828251a7230", + "edit_distance": 0.3, + "f1_score": 0.8679245283018868, + "meteor": 0.7495759697981069, + "precision": 0.7931034482758621, + "pred_md": "Choice on the Define Box Detail display:\n\nFormat : 1=Horizontal Degree of rotation : 180\n\nFigure 36. Print Example -3\n\nFigure 36. Print Example -3\n\nAppendix B. Rotation, Format, and Shading Pattern in Box\n\n423", + "recall": 0.9583333333333334, + "true_md": "Choice on the Define Box Detail display:\n\nFormat : 1=Horizontal Degree of rotation : 180\n\nFormat : 1=Horizontal Degree of rotation : 180\n\nFigure36.PrintExample-3\n\nAppendix B. Rotation, Format, and Shading Pattern in Box 423" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9594029896862554, + "doc_id": "93f13691bf37bf90d986e8da8d68be1a6c454bbc782f4372b4692857f149f87d", + "edit_distance": 0.038834951456310676, + "f1_score": 0.9743589743589742, + "meteor": 0.9815049859343237, + "precision": 0.9827586206896551, + "pred_md": "280\n\nThe following table explains each field in these displays.\n\nPress Enter after you specify the parameters, press the F4 key to specify more parameters, or press F3 or F12 to cancel the operation.\n\nBy pressing the F4 key, one of the following displays appears. You can enter the data in the following display and complete the operation, or obtain the list of the folders, the PC documents, the files, the libraries, or members by pressing the F4 key in each field.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.9661016949152542, + "true_md": "The following table explains each field in these displays.\n\nPress Enter after you specify the parameters, press the F4 key to specify more parameters, or press F3 or F12 to cancel the operation.\n\nBy pressing the F4 key, one of the following displays appears. You can enter the data in the following display and complete the operation, or obtain the list of the folders, the PC documents, the files, the libraries, or members by pressing the F4 key in each field.\n\n280 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9193910200716693, + "doc_id": "e66502cca37dc225f9ddd5df05b822e63a6e76b03f5d17f329bc166e150a35b1", + "edit_distance": 0.13157894736842105, + "f1_score": 0.9629629629629631, + "meteor": 0.9613678208405989, + "precision": 0.9701492537313433, + "pred_md": "Basic English Language Skils\n\n## CHAPTER 12:\n\n## LANGUAGE SKILLS AT WORK SENDING E-MAILS TO YOUR COLLEAGUES\n\nIn today's working environment, it is almost guaranteed that you will be required to communicate with colleagues via e-mail on a regular basis. And due to the large number of e-mails we now send and receive each day, proper e-mail etiquette is more important than ever.\n\nDeveloped for Oxbridge Academy", + "recall": 0.9558823529411765, + "true_md": "## CHAPTER 12:\n\n## LANGUAGE SKILLS AT WORK SENDING E-MAILS TO YOUR COLLEAGUES\n\nBasic English Language Skills\n\nIn today’s working environment, it is almost guaranteed that you will be required to communicate with colleagues via e-mail on a regular basis. And due to the large number of e-mails we now send and receive each day, proper e-mail etiquette is more important than ever.\n\nDeveloped for Oxbridge Academy" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7071067811865475, + "doc_id": "b3c1ca77fdf289130d6a82e5b9bfe027c6d422dd3c7d0e6d7d2097df8e3e6ab9", + "edit_distance": 0.2, + "f1_score": 0.8421052631578947, + "meteor": 0.8017676767676769, + "precision": 0.8888888888888888, + "pred_md": "68\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.8, + "true_md": "68 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "9767773eb08a91bbb18bab8fe179f1f9844dbf260a45158e1a2d3dcf33a1c0f1", + "edit_distance": 0.9974424552429667, + "f1_score": 0.15789473684210528, + "meteor": 0.02082767363940959, + "precision": 0.09375, + "pred_md": "| Options . . | . . . | | . | . | . | | . | . . | . | | . . | . | . | . | . | | . . | . . | . . | . . . | . . | . . | . | . | | . | . . | |\n|--------------------------------------------------|--------------------------------------------------|--------------------------------------------------|--------------------------------------------------|--------------------------------------------------|--------------------------------------------------|--------------------------------------------------|--------------------------------------------------|--------------------------------------------------|--------------------------------------------------|--------------------------------------------------|-------|-----|-----|-----|-----|-----|---------|-------|-------|---------|-------|-------|-----|-------|-------|-----|---------|---------|\n| Columns . . . | . . | . | | . | . | | . . | | . . | . | | . | . . | . | | . | . . . . | . . | | . | . | . | . . | . . . | . . . | . | . . . | . . . |\n| 3=Copy Page Segment | . | | . | . | | . | | . . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . . . . | . . | | . . | . . | . . | | | . . | . . | . . . | . . |\n| 4=Delete Page Segments. | | | | . . | | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . . | . . | . | | . . . | . . | . . | . . | | . | . | . | . | . . . | . |\n| 6=Print Page Segment | . | . | | . | . | . | . | | . | . | . | . | . | . | . . | . . | . . . . | | . . | . | . | . . . | . | . | . | . | . . . | . |\n| 7=Rename Page Segment | | . | | . | | . | . . | . | . | . | | . | . . | . | . | . | . . . | . . | . . | . | . . . | . . | . | . . | 356 | 356 | 356 | 356 |\n| 8=Display Page Segment Description | 8=Display Page Segment Description | 8=Display Page Segment Description | 8=Display Page Segment Description | 8=Display Page Segment Description | 8=Display Page Segment Description | | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . . | . . | . . | . | . | | . | . | . | . | . . | . . |\n| 9=Convert Page Segment to Physical File Member . | 9=Convert Page Segment to Physical File Member . | 9=Convert Page Segment to Physical File Member . | 9=Convert Page Segment to Physical File Member . | 9=Convert Page Segment to Physical File Member . | 9=Convert Page Segment to Physical File Member . | 9=Convert Page Segment to Physical File Member . | 9=Convert Page Segment to Physical File Member . | 9=Convert Page Segment to Physical File Member . | 9=Convert Page Segment to Physical File Member . | 9=Convert Page Segment to Physical File Member . | | . | . | . | . . | | | . . | | . | . . | . . | | . | . . | . . | . . . . | . . . . |\n| 13=Change Page Segment Text . . . . . . . | 13=Change Page Segment Text . . . . . . . | 13=Change Page Segment Text . . . . . . . | 13=Change Page Segment Text . . . . . . . | 13=Change Page Segment Text . . . . . . . | 13=Change Page Segment Text . . . . . . . | 13=Change Page Segment Text . . . . . . . | 13=Change Page Segment Text . . . . . . . | 13=Change Page Segment Text . . . . . . . | 13=Change Page Segment Text . . . . . . . | 13=Change Page Segment Text . . . . . . . | | . | . | . | . | | | | . . | . | . . | . . | . . | . . . | . . | . . | . . . | . . |\n\n308\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.5, + "true_md": "308 AFPUtilitiesforiSeries:User’sGuide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7104214013978052, + "doc_id": "3aa94a3035c634984ed2a9996eadbfe57872af9a80affca19933d0580a472e92", + "edit_distance": 0.2743362831858407, + "f1_score": 0.9836065573770493, + "meteor": 0.9523375136615801, + "precision": 0.9836065573770492, + "pred_md": "Figure 7 shows a print sample of the labels you can create using the Print Format Utility.\n\nFigure 7 shows a print sample of the labels you can create using the Print Format Utility.\n\nFigure 7. Print Sample (Labels)\n\nFigure 7. Print Sample (Labels)\n\nYou can create various kinds of output from one database file member. For example, you can print a list of products , product descriptions , or even delivery labels as shown below from one database file member by using different printout format definitions.\n\nChapter 1. What are the IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries?\n\n11", + "recall": 0.9836065573770492, + "true_md": "Figure 7 shows a print sample of the labels you can create using the Print Format Utility.\n\nFigure7.PrintSample(Labels)\n\nYou can create various kinds of output from one database file member. For example, you can print a list of products , product descriptions , or even delivery labels as shown below from one database file member by using different printout format definitions.\n\nChapter 1. What are the IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries? 11" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9156597717309751, + "doc_id": "a5e731d7e7e2e9fba18edd2eb7f6c43c9a13c59b0c3f0074650db5ea1f29a1ad", + "edit_distance": 0.09859154929577464, + "f1_score": 0.9764705882352942, + "meteor": 0.988322617214907, + "precision": 0.9651162790697675, + "pred_md": "You can also print some variable data such as job date, job time, page number, record number, database file name, library name, and member name by specifying character strings which are called reserved variable names in the text data on a text element or a box element.\n\n## Page Layout\n\nYou must also define how to lay out the records, which are described in the previous section, in a page as a page layout . You need to specify where and how many times to place the defined records in a page. You can specify the fixed data such as text, lines, boxes, bar codes in the same way as you specify them in a record.\n\nThe following figure shows the sample page:\n\nFigure 16. Page Layout Sample\n\nFigure 16. Page Layout Sample\n\nYou can print some variable data such as job date, job time, page number, record number, database file name, library name, and member name by specifying character strings which are called reserved variable names in the text data on a text element or a box element.\n\nChapter 7. Introduction to Print Format Utility\n\n99", + "recall": 0.9880952380952381, + "true_md": "You can also print some variable data such as job date, job time, page number, record number, database file name, library name, and member name by specifying character strings which are called reserved variable names in the text data on a text element or a box element.\n\nYou must also define how to lay out the records, which are described in the previous section, in a page as a page layout . You need to specify where and how many times to place the defined records in a page. You can specify the fixed data such as text, lines, boxes, bar codes in the same way as you specify them in a record.\n\nThe following figure shows the sample page:\n\nYou can print some variable data such as job date, job time, page number, record number, database file name, library name, and member name by specifying character strings which are called reserved variable names in the text data on a text element or a box element.\n\nFigure16.PageLayoutSample\n\nChapter 7. Introduction to Print Format Utility 99\n\n## Page Layout" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6103948842287594, + "doc_id": "e6776a1d9b3d9b49903a56c7b4e1b309b59c90256448dd1ad4c8e67517285518", + "edit_distance": 0.5906040268456376, + "f1_score": 0.844574780058651, + "meteor": 0.6483005759635109, + "precision": 0.9863013698630136, + "pred_md": "Step 6. To remove the elements, press F10. To copy or move the elements, move the cursor to the corner of the destination area which is the same corner as the origin of the area to be copied or moved. This can be any corner of the rectangular area. Scroll the window if necessary.\n\n- Step 7. Press one of the following function keys to copy or move the elements in the rectangular area.\n\n```\nCopy F6 Move F9\n```\n\nThe elements in the rectangular area are copied, moved, or removed.\n\nIf the F6 key is pressed the following display appears.\n\n## Changing Elements in the List View\n\nIn addition to the screen view, the Overlay Utility and the Print Format Utility have the list view to define an element. You can easily change between the list view and the screen view by pressing the F17 key.\n\nIn the list view, you can see and change all the element definitions. The list view is useful for making minor changes to the elements that are already defined in the overlay, the record layout, or the page layout. The list view can also be used to create new elements. Creating new elements may be easier to do in the screen view which shows an approximate image.\n\n## Layout of the List View\n\nThe list view can display up to 16 elements at a time. To display more elements, scroll the window vertically. Each element shows up to 44 characters in the parameter field. To display the rest of the parameter field, scroll the window horizontally. The parameter field contains only the mandatory parameters for each element. To display or change other parameters, go to the Change Detail display by placing the cursor on the line of the element and pressing the F14 key, then the F4 key.\n\nChapter 13. Design Operation\n\n291", + "recall": 0.7384615384615385, + "true_md": "- Step 6. To remove the elements, press F10. To copy or move the elements, move the cursor to the corner of the destination area which is the same corner as the origin of the area to be copied or moved. This can be any corner of the rectangular area. Scroll the window if necessary.\n\n- Step 7. Press one of the following function keys to copy or move the elements in the rectangular area.\n\nChapter 13. Design Operation 291\n\nThe list view can display up to 16 elements at a time. To display more elements, scroll the window vertically. Each element shows up to 44 characters in the parameter field. To display the rest of the parameter field, scroll the window horizontally. The parameter field contains only the mandatory parameters for each element. To display or change other parameters, go to the Change Detail display by placing the cursor on the line of the element and pressing the F14 key, then the F4 key.\n\nIn the list view, you can see and change all the element definitions. The list view is useful for making minor changes to the elements that are already defined in the overlay, the record layout, or the page layout. The list view can also be used to create new elements. Creating new elements may be easier to do in the screen view which shows an approximate image.\n\nIn addition to the screen view, the Overlay Utility and the Print Format Utility have the list view to define an element. You can easily change between the list view and the screen view by pressing the F17 key.\n\nThe elements in the rectangular area are copied, moved, or removed.\n\nIf the F6 key is pressed the following display appears.\n\nCopy F6\n\nMove F9\n\nDesign Overlay Columns: 1- 74 Control . . Source overlay.....SAMPLE *...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7.... 001 002 003 004 005 006 *T001 s an example. 007 008 009 *T002 s an example. 010 011 012 013 *T003 s an example. 014 015 016 *T004 s an example. 017 More... F3=Exit F6=Text F9=Line F10=Box F11=Bar code F21=Element edit F22=Block edit F24=More keys 2 elements copied.\n\n## Changing Elements in the List View\n\n## Layout of the List View" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9409772847924017, + "doc_id": "f03e939ec740a5282fbfa41bf6beccf9423aa36cf0e7aeafe7bf31b2925fb2ca", + "edit_distance": 0.15, + "f1_score": 0.9813664596273293, + "meteor": 0.9809644587956209, + "precision": 0.9875, + "pred_md": "xviii\n\n- v The AS/400 Information Directory , a unique, multimedia interface to a searchable database containing descriptions of titles available from IBM or from selected other publishers. The AS/400 Information Directory is shipped with your system at no charge.\n\n## Who Should Use This Book\n\nThis book is intended for iSeries users, such as system administrators, system programmers, and anyone who uses the iSeries system.\n\nBefore you use this book, you should be familiar with the introductory material for using the iSeries system. You do not need to understand how to use a high-level programming language to use AFP Utilities\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.9753086419753086, + "true_md": "- v The AS/400 Information Directory , a unique, multimedia interface to a searchable database containing descriptions of titles available from IBM or from selected other publishers. The AS/400 Information Directory is shipped with your system at no charge.\n\nThis book is intended for iSeries users, such as system administrators, system programmers, and anyone who uses the iSeries system.\n\nBefore you use this book, you should be familiar with the introductory material for using the iSeries system. You do not need to understand how to use a high-level programming language to use AFP Utilities\n\n## Who Should Use This Book\n\nxviii AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6892207442806265, + "doc_id": "b0e42e073487f4c7151566469890327587c048352026f7af1ba941c4dfb2d94c", + "edit_distance": 0.11888111888111888, + "f1_score": 0.8888888888888888, + "meteor": 0.9500978284699463, + "precision": 0.8888888888888888, + "pred_md": "178\n\nThe following example shows how each of the summary data is printed on the page:\n\nDatabase :\n\n-----------------------------------------------------\n\n|\n\n## PFD Definition :\n\n|\n\n|\n\n|\n\n|\n\n- -Place four records in a page\n\n|\n\n|\n\n- -PRODUCT is the break field\n\n|\n\n|\n\n- -Specify the summary data of SALES for a page\n\n|\n\n|\n\n- -Specify the summary data of SALES for page break\n\n|\n\n|\n\n|\n\n-----------------------------------------------------\n\n|\n\n|\n\nPrint the database file with the PFD definition\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.8888888888888888, + "true_md": "The following example shows how each of the summary data is printed on the page:\n\n----------------------------------------------------- | PFD Definition : | | | - Place four records in a page | | - PRODUCT is the break field | - Specify the summary data of SALES for a page | | - Specify the summary data of SALES for page break | | ----------------------------------------------------- | | Print the database file with the PFD definition\n\nDatabase :\n\n178 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7778559059520478, + "doc_id": "22dfbe82d35e7ebcda3dcb1cdc3b70eba7e066bd0e781e660668267ad585bf8b", + "edit_distance": 0.29473684210526313, + "f1_score": 0.9036144578313253, + "meteor": 0.9484841604315528, + "precision": 0.8522727272727273, + "pred_md": "16\n\nFigure 10. Prompts and Columns on the Work with Source Overlays Display\n\nFigure 10. Prompts and Columns on the Work with Source Overlays Display\n\n## Design display\n\nThe following Design displays are available:\n\n- v Design Overlay display\n- v Design Record Layout display\n- v Design Page Layout display\n\nThe Design display has two views. One is the screen view and the other is the list view . You can switch the view from one to the other by pressing the F17 key.\n\n+-------------------+\n\nF17\n\n+-----------------+\n\nScreen View: In the screen view, an approximate print image is displayed in the upper part of the screen called the image area . You can design an overlay, a record layout, and a page layout while viewing the approximate print image being created on the display. When you enter the Design display, the display is initially set to the screen view.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.9615384615384616, + "true_md": "16 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\nFigure10.PromptsandColumnsontheWorkwithSourceOverlaysDisplay\n\n## Design display\n\nThe following Design displays are available:\n\n- v Design Overlay display\n\n- v Design Record Layout display\n\n- v Design Page Layout display\n\nThe Design display has two views. One is the screen view and the other is the list view . You can switch the view from one to the other by pressing the F17 key.\n\nScreen View: In the screen view, an approximate print image is displayed in the upper part of the screen called the image area . You can design an overlay, a record layout, and a page layout while viewing the approximate print image being created on the display. When you enter the Design display, the display is initially set to the screen view." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7178662811064701, + "doc_id": "0cc4bf98cea3af633d64520c9ba5c97f00ab277449dd60dc56b5f1be3b0626b5", + "edit_distance": 0.13768115942028986, + "f1_score": 0.8903225806451613, + "meteor": 0.8870654777558942, + "precision": 0.9857142857142858, + "pred_md": "118\n\nIn this case &NAME. is displayed because NAME is the selected field.\n\nExample Action: Press the Enter key.\n\nThe following display appears.\n\nThe variable data is defined as a text element, and a mark *T003 that indicates a text element is displayed at the position of the specified variable record.\n\nExample Action: In the same way, specify another variable text element which contains the data in the PRICE field in the record.\n\nNote: You can concatenate variable data and fixed data by typing in the Text data prompt as follows:\n\nPrice : &PRICE.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.8117647058823529, + "true_md": "In this case &NAME. is displayed because NAME is the selected field.\n\nExample Action: Press the Enter key.\n\nThe following display appears.\n\n017 More... F3=Exit F6=Text F9=Line F10=Box F11=Bar code F21=Element edit F22=Block edit F24=More keys\n\nThe variable data is defined as a text element, and a mark *T003 that indicates a text element is displayed at the position of the specified variable record.\n\nExample Action: In the same way, specify another variable text element which contains the data in the PRICE field in the record.\n\nNote: You can concatenate variable data and fixed data by typing in the Text data prompt as follows:\n\nPrice : &PRICE.\n\n118 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.688225299691894, + "doc_id": "6022bcdfce495000ce77b019ae85e078676f10054982483e11f16a6b117b4783", + "edit_distance": 0.39543726235741444, + "f1_score": 0.883495145631068, + "meteor": 0.6784129636267503, + "precision": 0.9578947368421052, + "pred_md": "## 4=Delete PFD Definition\n\nTo delete PFD definitions, do the following on the display on page 143.\n\n- 1. Type 4 in the Opt column beside the PFD definition that you want to delete.\n- 2. Press the Enter key.\n\nThe following display appears:\n\nOn this display, all PFD definitions that are specified to be deleted are listed for confirmation. Press the Enter key to confirm your choices for deletion; then these PFD definitions are deleted. If you do not want to delete these PFD definitions, press F12 to return to the previous display to change your choices.\n\nThe following table explains the Confirm Delete of PFD Definition display.\n\nTable 39. Confirm Delete of PFD Definition display fields\n\nThe PFD definitions you previously chose to delete (option 4), are listed. Confirm the list and press the Enter key to delete these definitions or press the F12 key to return to change your choice on the Work with PFD definitions display on page 143.\n\nWhen the PFD definitions are deleted, the screen returns to the Work with PFD definitions display with a message in the 24th line. When two or more definitions\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide\n\n200", + "recall": 0.8198198198198198, + "true_md": "## 4=Delete PFD Definition\n\nTo delete PFD definitions, do the following on the display on page 143.\n\nThe following display appears:\n\nOn this display, all PFD definitions that are specified to be deleted are listed for confirmation. Press the Enter key to confirm your choices for deletion; then these PFD definitions are deleted. If you do not want to delete these PFD definitions, press F12 to return to the previous display to change your choices.\n\nThe following table explains the Confirm Delete of PFD Definition display.\n\n- 1. Type 4 in the Opt column beside the PFD definition that you want to delete.\n\n- 2. Press the Enter key.\n\nTable39.ConfirmDeleteofPFDDefinitiondisplayfields\n\nThe PFD definitions you previously chose to delete (option 4), are listed. Confirm the list and press the Enter key to delete these definitions or press the F12 key to return to change your choice on the Work with PFD definitions display on page 143.\n\nWhen the PFD definitions are deleted, the screen returns to the Work with PFD definitions display with a message in the 24th line. When two or more definitions\n\n200 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\nConfirm Delete of PFD Definitions File............: PFUFILE Library . ........: PFULIB Press Enter to confirm your choices for 4=Delete. Press F12 to return to change your choices. PFD Opt Definition Text Changed 4 PFDNEW Sample PFD definition 12/13/90 Bottom F11=Display names only F12=Cancel" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.739405998393746, + "doc_id": "771ef2aebed622b9a72b5d8294e3ed8cb06d05fcb72fd6981a407327014027b3", + "edit_distance": 0.42857142857142855, + "f1_score": 0.933884297520661, + "meteor": 0.8029540392525869, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Chapter 18. Convert to Page Segment Function\n\nTo start the convert to page segment function, type 21 on the Selection or command line on the IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries menu and press Enter. The Convert to Page Segment display appears:\n\nNote: AFP Utilities for iSeries stores the information for Page segment and Library in an Interactive Profile Entry for the user profile. These values replace the values displayed the next time the function is used.\n\nThe Convert to Page Segment display allows you to create a page segment from either a PC document in an iSeries folder or a physical file member. The PC document or physical file member must contain image data stream (IMDS) or IOCA function set 10 data. The created page segment can be placed in a source overlay by using the Overlay Utility, and printed on an IPDS printer. It is also possible to place the page segment in a record layout or page layout by using the Print Format Utility and print it on an IPDS printer.\n\nOn this display, you need to specify the name of the page segment, library, and whether the page segment is to be created from a physical file member or a PC document.\n\n331", + "recall": 0.875968992248062, + "true_md": "## Chapter 18. Convert to Page Segment Function\n\nTo start the convert to page segment function, type 21 on the Selection or command line on the IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries menu and press Enter. The Convert to Page Segment display appears:\n\nThe Convert to Page Segment display allows you to create a page segment from either a PC document in an iSeries folder or a physical file member. The PC document or physical file member must contain image data stream (IMDS) or IOCA function set 10 data. The created page segment can be placed in a source overlay by using the Overlay Utility, and printed on an IPDS printer. It is also possible to place the page segment in a record layout or page layout by using the Print Format Utility and print it on an IPDS printer.\n\nOn this display, you need to specify the name of the page segment, library, and whether the page segment is to be created from a physical file member or a PC document.\n\n- Note: AFP Utilities for iSeries stores the information for Page segment and Library in an Interactive Profile Entry for the user profile. These values replace the values displayed the next time the function is used.\n\nBottom\n\nF3=Exit F5=Refresh F12=Cancel\n\nType choices, press Enter.\n\n## Convert to Page Segment\n\n331\n\nPage segment........ Name Library . ........ *CURLIB Name, *CURLIB Source object type . .... 1=PCdocument, 2=File" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.961345600612263, + "doc_id": "fd97d3559339d750690f1936281e5b9ea1be3d88546b746d1b1544decd2d7c7b", + "edit_distance": 0.9119804400977995, + "f1_score": 0.9837587006960559, + "meteor": 0.7177450932037518, + "precision": 0.9953051643192489, + "pred_md": "## EXCEL TRAINING MANUAL\n\n## 1. INTRODUCTION TO EXCEL\n\nMicrosoft Excel gives businesses the tools they need to make the most of their data. And when it comes to making the most of resources, and maximizing return on investment, this is becoming increasingly important. Firms are collecting ever-greater volumes of data from multiple sources, including in-store-transactions, online sales and social media. They need to be able to collate and analyze this information quickly and effectively.\n\nExcel spreadsheets are commonly used across business to display financial information and other data relevant to the running of the business. This could be information relevant to the customer relationship management department, sales, marketing or HR. With so many business functions now reliant on IT and the internet, Excel continues to be seen as a vital tool for administration and the effective running of a business.\n\n- ‰ Excel is a computer program used to create electronic spreadsheets.\n- ‰ Within excel user can organize data, create chart and perform calculations.\n- ‰ Excel is a convenient program because it allow user to create large spreadsheets, reference information, and it allows for better storage of information.\n- ‰ Excels operates like other Microsoft (MS) office programs and has many of the same functions and shortcuts of other MS programs.\n\n## 1.1 WHAT IS A SPREADSHEET?\n\nA spreadsheet is the computerized equivalent of a general ledger. It has taken the place of the pencil, paper, and calculator. Spreadsheet programs were first developed for accountants but have now been adopted by anyone wanting to prepare a budget, forecast sales data, create profit and loss statements, and compare financial alternatives and any other mathematical applications requiring calculations.\n\n- The electronic spreadsheet is laid out similar to the paper ledger sheet in that it is divided into columns and rows. Any task that can be done on paper can be performed on an electronic spreadsheet faster and more accurately.\n\nThe problem with manual sheets is that if any error is found within the data, all answers must be erased and recalculated manually. With the computerized spreadsheet, formulas can be written that are automatically updated whenever the data are changed.\n\nPage 5 /g3", + "recall": 0.9724770642201835, + "true_md": "EXCEL TRAINING MANUAL\n\n## 1. INTRODUCTION TO EXCEL\n\n## 1.1 WHAT IS A SPREADSHEET?\n\nPage 5 GLYPH<g3>\n\nThe problem with manual sheets is that if any error is found within the data, all answers must be erased and recalculated manually. With the computerized spreadsheet, formulas can be written that are automatically updated whenever the data are changed.\n\nThe electronic spreadsheet is laid out similar to the paper ledger sheet in that it is divided into columns and rows. Any task that can be done on paper can be performed on an electronic spreadsheet faster and more accurately.\n\nA spreadsheet is the computerized equivalent of a general ledger. It has taken the place of the pencil, paper, and calculator. Spreadsheet programs were first developed for accountants but have now been adopted by anyone wanting to prepare a budget, forecast sales data, create profit and loss statements, and compare financial alternatives and any other mathematical applications requiring calculations.\n\nExcel spreadsheets are commonly used across business to display financial information and other data relevant to the running of the business. This could be information relevant to the customer relationship management department, sales, marketing or HR. With so many business functions now reliant on IT and the internet, Excel continues to be seen as a vital tool for administration and the effective running of a business. \n\nMicrosoft Excel gives businesses the tools they need to make the most of their data. And when it comes to making the most of resources, and maximizing return on investment, this is becoming increasingly important. Firms are collecting ever-greater volumes of data from multiple sources, including in-store-transactions, online sales and social media. They need to be able to collate and analyze this information quickly and effectively. \n\n- ‰ Excels operates like other Microsoft (MS) office programs and has many of the same functions and shortcuts of other MS programs.\n\n- ‰ Excel is a convenient program because it allow user to create large spreadsheets, reference information, and it allows for better storage of information. \n\n- ‰ Within excel user can organize data, create chart and perform calculations. \n\n- ‰ Excel is a computer program used to create electronic spreadsheets." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.77876462748531, + "doc_id": "b4c51a9777f6ccc2aae960fbbf905e2f7affc7f6931c428dbdbd66b5d038c8bb", + "edit_distance": 0.19597989949748743, + "f1_score": 0.9005235602094241, + "meteor": 0.8994506296639669, + "precision": 0.9347826086956522, + "pred_md": "158\n\n## Work with PFD Definition Fonts\n\nFor the work with fonts operations, see 'Chapter 14. Work with Fonts' on page 297.\n\n## Specify Database File\n\nOn this display, specify the name of the database file to be printed and the name of the library that contains the database file. If the file has more than one record format, you must also specify the record format to be used.\n\nThe following table explains each field of the Specify Database File display.\n\nTable 26. Specify Database File display fields\n\nIf it is not necessary to list the database file nor record format name, type the fields and press the Enter key. The display for another action appears.\n\nTo list record formats, move the cursor to the Record format prompt, press the F4 key, and go to 'Design Record Layout' on page 162.\n\nTo list database files, move the cursor to the Database file prompt and press the F4 key.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.8686868686868687, + "true_md": "## Work with PFD Definition Fonts\n\n## Specify Database File\n\n## Specify Database File\n\nType choices, press Enter.\n\nFor the work with fonts operations, see “Chapter 14. Work with Fonts” on page 297.\n\nF3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel\n\nOn this display, specify the name of the database file to be printed and the name of the library that contains the database file. If the file has more than one record format, you must also specify the record format to be used.\n\nThe following table explains each field of the Specify Database File display.\n\nTable26.SpecifyDatabaseFiledisplayfields\n\nIf it is not necessary to list the database file nor record format name, type the fields and press the Enter key. The display for another action appears.\n\nTo list record formats, move the cursor to the Record format prompt, press the F4 key, and go to “Design Record Layout” on page 162.\n\nTo list database files, move the cursor to the Database file prompt and press the F4 key.\n\n158 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8903080373019473, + "doc_id": "3b7b0292c769c7b1c8b6336c1c011d5182dec5fbea95c01e28f6af886f9e26c6", + "edit_distance": 0.08333333333333333, + "f1_score": 0.972972972972973, + "meteor": 0.9701450870602123, + "precision": 0.9818181818181818, + "pred_md": "## CVTPFMPAGS (Convert Physical File Member to Page Segment)\n\n## Command\n\nThis command allows you to convert a member in a physical database file to a page segment. The member must contain IMDS (Image Data Stream) format or IOCA function set 10 image data.\n\nThe following figure shows the command syntax for CVTPFMPAGS command.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide\n\n378", + "recall": 0.9642857142857143, + "true_md": "## CVTPFMPAGS (Convert Physical File Member to Page Segment) Command\n\nThis command allows you to convert a member in a physical database file to a page segment. The member must contain IMDS (Image Data Stream) format or IOCA function set 10 image data.\n\nThe following figure shows the command syntax for CVTPFMPAGS command.\n\n378 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.18140008661253734, + "doc_id": "356dae4131faf634304678befffded176aa97c9d9b381212741a64cbed41643d", + "edit_distance": 0.9097222222222222, + "f1_score": 0.5782493368700266, + "meteor": 0.3551193003796145, + "precision": 0.7730496453900709, + "pred_md": "## EXCEL TRAINING MANUAL\n\n## 5. FUNCTIONS\n\n## 5.1 INDEX MATCH FUNCTION\n\nThe INDEX function (enter into spreadsheet) returns a value or reference of the cell at the intersection of a particular row and column, in a given range. It's syntax is:\n\n=INDEX(array, row\\_num, [column\\_num])\n\nUsing the INDEX function\n\nSo, as an example type into A10 =index(A1:B6,4,1). The first argument is 'array' so we specify our table which is A1 through B6. Next argument is row number, and that's row 4, and the final argument is column number, and that's column 1. The function should return what is at the intersection of row 4, column 1. So, hit enter, and we see that it returns the text string MOTOR OIL which is correct. So the INDEX function basically looks up values for us as well.\n\nLet's look at another function called MATCH. It's syntax is:\n\n=MATCH(lookup\\_value, lookup\\_array, [match\\_type])\n\nThe MATCH function returns the relative position of an item in an array that matches a specified value in a specified order. It takes 3 arguments: the lookup value, the lookup array, and the match type, in which we can specify if we want an exact match or not. Let's take an example of using the INDEX and MATCH functions at the same time.\n\nLet's use them to find out how many widgets we have in stock. In B10 enter the formula: =INDEX(A2:B6,MATCH(A10,A2:A6,0),2)\n\nPage\n\n13 /g3", + "recall": 0.461864406779661, + "true_md": "EXCE L L TRAIN N ING MA A NUAL\n\n## 5. FUN NCTIO ONS\n\n## 5.1 IND DEX MAT TCH FUN NCTION\n\nLet’s =IN s use them t NDEX(A2:B6 to find out h 6,MATCH(A how many w A10,A2:A6,0) widgets we h ,2) have in stoc ck. In B10 en nter the form mula: \n\nThe spec array take MATCH fu cified value y, and the m e an example unction retur in a specifi match type, i e of using th rns the rela ied order. I in which we e INDEX an tive position t takes 3 ar e can specify nd MATCH f n of an item rguments: th y if we want functions at m in an array he lookup v an exact ma the same tim y that match value, the lo atch or not. me. hes a okup Let’s \n\n=MA ATCH(looku up\\_value, lo okup\\_array, , [match\\_typ pe]) \n\nLet’s s look at ano other functio on called MA ATCH. It’s s syntax is: \n\nSo, a spec and wha text for u as an examp cify our table the final arg at is at the in string MOT us as well. ple type int e which is A gument is co ntersection o TOR OIL wh to A10 =ind A1 through B olumn numb of row 4, col hich is correc dex(A1:B6,4,1 B6. Next arg ber, and that lumn 1. So, ct. So the IN 1). The first gument is ro t’s column 1 hit enter, an NDEX functi t argument i ow number, . The functi nd we see th ion basically is “array” s and that’s ro ion should re hat it return y looks up v so we ow 4, eturn ns the alues \n\nUsing g the INDEX fun nction \n\n=IND DEX(array, row\\_num, [ column\\_num m]) \n\nThe inter INDEX fun rsection of a nction (enter a particular r into spread row and colu dsheet) retur umn, in a giv rns a value o ven range. I or reference It’s syntax is of the cell a s: at the \n\nPage 13 GLYPH<g3>" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "7c22839d45a564915be016452f1e5ab25b2a90fb9c4f6b2d172648362ab0ea8a", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9976851851851852, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Chapter 13. Design Operation\n\n267", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Chapter 13. Design Operation 267" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7964931860643588, + "doc_id": "649996c657fd2d7a92fcf7fd8e2b7beb78a585cabd6564c6ce2d24a651b5d01a", + "edit_distance": 0.3584905660377358, + "f1_score": 0.9565217391304348, + "meteor": 0.963844895235977, + "precision": 0.9428571428571428, + "pred_md": "## Appendix I. Font Samples\n\nThis appendix presents a sampling of various fonts provided by IBM. Refer to IBM AFP Fonts: Font Samples for a more complete description and illustration of fonts provided by IBM.\n\n## Times New Roman Medium\n\nFigure 51. Times New Roman Medium\n\n465", + "recall": 0.9705882352941176, + "true_md": "## Appendix I. Font Samples\n\n## Times New Roman Medium\n\nThis appendix presents a sampling of various fonts provided by IBM. Refer to IBM AFP Fonts: Font Samples for a more complete description and illustration of fonts provided by IBM.\n\nFigure51.TimesNewRomanMedium\n\n465" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8980847834539366, + "doc_id": "0be2b5c80506c13d9cee9a89a01459bb6d956dd3bc92389d900a4eac25a1175a", + "edit_distance": 0.6064073226544623, + "f1_score": 0.9733333333333335, + "meteor": 0.9324496395535549, + "precision": 0.9733333333333334, + "pred_md": "you specify break fields. For example, if you want to print the total of the SALES field for each page, specify the prompts as follows:\n\n```\nText data . . . . . . . . . . &SALES (*TOTAL). . . . Print at page break only . . N\n```\n\nIf you want to print the total of the SALES field only for page breaks, specify the prompts as follows:\n\n&SALES (*TOTAL).\n\n```\nText data . . . . . . . . . . . . . Print at page break only . . Y\n```\n\nYou can concatenate summary data with other summary data, constants, and reserved variable names as follows:\n\n&SALES(TOTALS) is for &PRODUCT (*FIRST)..\n\n&SALES (*TOTAL). as of &*DATE..\n\nYou can also specify the following elements to be printed only when a page break occurs. For example, you can print them as the header and the frame of summary data.\n\n- v Text element\n- v Bar code element\n- v Box element\n- v Line element\n- v Page segment element\n- v Graphics element\n\nTo print an element only when a page break occurs, specify Y for the Print at page break only prompt on the detail display such as the Define Line Detail display. When the element is specified to be printed only when a page break occurs, the mark on the design display is displayed with the character '>' after the element number as follows:\n\n*L001>\n\n*T002>\n\nYou can define reserved variable data both in a page layout and in a record layout.\n\nNote: The value used for the *RCDNBR special value in a page layout is the record number of the last record on the page.\n\nSee 'Design Record Layout' on page 162 for more information.\n\nWhen you have completed the design of the page layout, press the F3 key to exit from the Design Page Layout display.\n\n## Specify Record Selection\n\nThis is an optional step. If no conditions are specified for record selection from this display, all records in the database file member are printed.\n\nChapter 10. Work with PFD Definitions\n\n183", + "recall": 0.9733333333333334, + "true_md": "you specify break fields. For example, if you want to print the total of the SALES field for each page, specify the prompts as follows:\n\nIf you want to print the total of the SALES field only for page breaks, specify the prompts as follows:\n\nYou can concatenate summary data with other summary data, constants, and reserved variable names as follows:\n\nYou can also specify the following elements to be printed only when a page break occurs. For example, you can print them as the header and the frame of summary data.\n\nTo print an element only when a page break occurs, specify Y for the Print at page break only prompt on the detail display such as the Define Line Detail display. When the element is specified to be printed only when a page break occurs, the mark on the design display is displayed with the character ’>’ after the element number as follows:\n\nYou can define reserved variable data both in a page layout and in a record layout.\n\n- v Text element\n\n- v Bar code element\n\n- v Box element\n\n- v Line element\n\n- v Page segment element\n\n- v Graphics element\n\nText data.......... &SALES (*TOTAL). . . Print at page break only . . N\n\nText data.......... &SALES (*TOTAL). . . Print at page break only . . Y\n\n*L001> *T002>\n\n&SALES(TOTALS) is for &PRODUCT (*FIRST).. &SALES (*TOTAL). as of &*DATE..\n\nNote: The value used for the *RCDNBR special value in a page layout is the record number of the last record on the page.\n\nSee “Design Record Layout” on page 162 for more information.\n\nWhen you have completed the design of the page layout, press the F3 key to exit from the Design Page Layout display.\n\nThis is an optional step. If no conditions are specified for record selection from this display, all records in the database file member are printed.\n\nChapter 10. Work with PFD Definitions 183\n\n## Specify Record Selection" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.012120310006080718, + "doc_id": "6b4d6ca762a2fedea2f379c4b5dbe84f3b21f80bb279c208dff51e4874f33069", + "edit_distance": 0.9775561097256857, + "f1_score": 0.12021857923497267, + "meteor": 0.2037103831135227, + "precision": 0.0650887573964497, + "pred_md": "186\n\nColumn\n\nValue\n\nOne of the following can be specified:\n\n- v Numeric constant\n\nThis is possible when the field is numeric type data. A numeric constant can be from 1 to 31 digits long, and can contain the following characters:\n\n- -Digits (0 through 9)\n- -A plus sign (+) or minus sign (-) at the beginning\n- -A period.\n\nFloating point expressions are not allowed, although floating point data is allowed.\n\n## Examples:\n\nCorrect\n\nIncorrect\n\nReason\n\n+12.5\n\n+12.5.0\n\n2\n\nperiods\n\nare\n\ncontained.\n\n-20\n\n20-\n\n-\n\ndoes\n\nnot\n\ncome\n\nfirst\n\n.00005\n\n.0000A5\n\n'A'\n\nis\n\nnot\n\nnumeric\n\n123456\n\n1.23456E+5\n\nFloating\n\npoint\n\nexpression\n\n- v Character constant like 'ABC'\n\nThis is possible when the field is character type data. The maximum for a character length is the same as the length of the Value column. A character constant is simply characters enclosed in apostrophes (for example, 'xxx'). If a character constant contains an apostrophe, it must be entered as two apostrophes. For example, if you want to print records that list the street addresses as Granger's Circle, type the constant as 'Granger's Circle'.\n\n## Examples:\n\nTable 34. Specify Record Selection display fields (continued)\n\n- v A field name in the database file member\n\nAny fields in the input database file member can be specified, but its data type must match with the data type specified in the Field column. For example, if the data type is numeric, you must specify it as numeric data. If it is character data, you must specify it as character data. Comparison of SBCS type and DBCS type is allowed.\n\nYou can select a field name from the list of field names in the database file by pressing F4.\n\nIf a field and a value are not of the same length, the Print Format Utility handles the shorter one as if it has the same length as the longer one as follows:\n\n- v 0's are added at the left of numeric values.\n- v SBCS blanks are added at the right of character values.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide\n\nDescription", + "recall": 0.7857142857142857, + "true_md": "Table34.SpecifyRecordSelectiondisplayfields (continued)\n\n186 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8751016839352584, + "doc_id": "e97ea8a5da9c99ba1b9634fec823655115a5387960841b16d5b9aced4a4dea84", + "edit_distance": 0.14, + "f1_score": 0.9354838709677418, + "meteor": 0.9564631681724182, + "precision": 0.9354838709677419, + "pred_md": "Basic English Language Skils\n\n## CHAPTER 2:\n\n## PARTS OF SPEECH\n\n## Parts of speech are used to construct meaningful sentences.\n\nLanguage is made up of many different combinations of words and sentences that we use to communicate with one another.\n\nDifferent types of words have different roles to play within sentences, and different types of sentences perform different functions.\n\nIn this chapter, we'll be showing you how different types of words (called parts of speech) are used to construct meaningful sentences.\n\nD\n\neveloped for Oxbridge Academy", + "recall": 0.9354838709677419, + "true_md": "## CHAPTER 2:\n\n## PARTS OF SPEECH\n\nParts of speech are used to construct meaningful sentences.\n\nLanguage is made up of many different combinations of words and sentences that we use to communicate with one another. \n\nDifferent types of words have different roles to play within sentences, and different types of sentences perform different functions.\n\nIn this chapter, we’ll be showing you how different types of words (called parts of speech) are used to construct meaningful sentences.\n\nDeveloped for Oxbridge Academy\n\nBasic English Language Skills" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.06344957613635595, + "doc_id": "0848494348557188eba7ae68aa8aaf12fc4b8ef317c7878c99db15ba7d1418e8", + "edit_distance": 0.6524822695035462, + "f1_score": 0.6725663716814159, + "meteor": 0.3805511301403964, + "precision": 0.926829268292683, + "pred_md": "From this display, you can specify further detail characteristics of the record element. For example, you can specify the direction, repetition, and distance.\n\nThe following table explains each field of the Place Record Layout Detail display.\n\nTable 32. Place Record Layout display fields\n\nChapter 10. Work with PFD Definitions\n\n173", + "recall": 0.5277777777777778, + "true_md": "From this display, you can specify further detail characteristics of the record element. For example, you can specify the direction, repetition, and distance.\n\nThe following table explains each field of the Place Record Layout Detail display.\n\nTable32.PlaceRecordLayoutdisplayfields\n\nChapter 10. Work with PFD Definitions 173\n\nPlace Record Layout Detail Mark: *R001 Measurement method: Row/Column Type choices, press Enter. Position: Across . . ......... 10 1-999 Down . . . . . . . . .... 4 Element . . ......... Name Direction .......... 1 1=Across, 2=Down Repetition: Across . . ......... 1 1-99 Down . . . . . . . . .... Distance: Across . . ......... 1-999 Down . . . . . . . . .... F3=Exit F5=Refresh F6=Change measurement method F12=Cancel" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6873006458965896, + "doc_id": "b29737cfb2d0a0b4925680a8025f6fd7e80f7509d683af5300bff9f1675a9466", + "edit_distance": 0.3142857142857143, + "f1_score": 0.8695652173913044, + "meteor": 0.841187763049297, + "precision": 0.9302325581395349, + "pred_md": "Specify the name of the PFD definition, the PFD definition file, the library, and the description text.\n\nYou can also specify whether or not to delete any removed elements.\n\nThe following table explains each field of the Save PFD Definition display.\n\nTable 37. Save PFD Definition display fields\n\nChapter 10. Work with PFD Definitions\n\n195", + "recall": 0.8163265306122449, + "true_md": "Type choices, press Enter.\n\n## Save PFD Definition\n\nF4=Prompt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel\n\nSpecify the name of the PFD definition, the PFD definition file, the library, and the description text.\n\nYou can also specify whether or not to delete any removed elements.\n\nThe following table explains each field of the Save PFD Definition display.\n\nTable37.SavePFDDefinitiondisplayfields\n\nChapter 10. Work with PFD Definitions 195" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8999540637526582, + "doc_id": "1c1dc6dd7bf2738cadec2cd297b89f5ee25e10688d0edf541b7ae246fec45cba", + "edit_distance": 0.38392857142857145, + "f1_score": 0.9853658536585366, + "meteor": 0.9676517029920564, + "precision": 0.9901960784313726, + "pred_md": "312\n\n## Renaming an Overlay\n\nThis function calls the CL command RNMOBJ and renames the specified overlay.\n\n## Printing an Overlay\n\nThis function allows you to print an iSeries overlay on an IPDS printer. The Resource Management Utility generates the AFPDS data stream as a spooled file that is to be printed on an IPDS printer by the iSeries.\n\n## Displaying an Overlay Description\n\nThis function calls the CL command DSPOBJD and displays the overlay description.\n\n## Changing an Overlay Description\n\nThis function calls the CL command CHGOBJD and changes the overlay description.\n\n## Converting an Overlay to Physical File Member\n\nThis function allows you to convert an overlay to a physical file member. You can transfer the overlay to another system such as the System/370.\n\n## Working with Page Segments\n\nThis function allows you to:\n\n- v Copy a page segment object in a library\n- v Delete page segment objects in a library\n- v Rename a page segment object in a library\n- v Print a page segment object in a library\n- v Display the description of the page segment\n- v Change the description of the page segment\n- v Convert a page segment to a physical file member\n\n## Copying a Page Segment\n\nThis function calls the CL command CRTDUPOBJ and copies a page segment to a new one.\n\n## Deleting Page Segments\n\nThis function calls the CL command DLTPAGSEG and deletes the specified page segments.\n\n## Renaming a Page Segment\n\nThis function calls the CL command RNMOBJ and renames the specified page segment.\n\n## Printing a Page Segment\n\nThis function allows you to print an iSeries page segment on an IPDS printer. The Resource Management Utility generates the AFPDS data stream as a spooled file that is to be printed on an IPDS printer by the iSeries.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.9805825242718447, + "true_md": "## Renaming an Overlay\n\n## Printing an Overlay\n\n## Displaying an Overlay Description\n\n## Changing an Overlay Description\n\n## Converting an Overlay to Physical File Member\n\n## Working with Page Segments\n\n## Copying a Page Segment\n\n## Deleting Page Segments\n\n## Renaming a Page Segment\n\n## Printing a Page Segment\n\n312 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\nThis function calls the CL command RNMOBJ and renames the specified overlay.\n\nThis function allows you to print an iSeries overlay on an IPDS printer. The Resource Management Utility generates the AFPDS data stream as a spooled file that is to be printed on an IPDS printer by the iSeries.\n\nThis function calls the CL command DSPOBJD and displays the overlay description.\n\nThis function calls the CL command CHGOBJD and changes the overlay description.\n\nThis function allows you to convert an overlay to a physical file member. You can transfer the overlay to another system such as the System/370.\n\nThis function allows you to:\n\n- v Copy a page segment object in a library\n\n- v Delete page segment objects in a library\n\n- v Rename a page segment object in a library\n\n- v Print a page segment object in a library\n\n- v Display the description of the page segment\n\n- v Change the description of the page segment\n\n- v Convert a page segment to a physical file member\n\nThis function calls the CL command CRTDUPOBJ and copies a page segment to a new one.\n\nThis function calls the CL command DLTPAGSEG and deletes the specified page segments.\n\nThis function calls the CL command RNMOBJ and renames the specified page segment.\n\nThis function allows you to print an iSeries page segment on an IPDS printer. The Resource Management Utility generates the AFPDS data stream as a spooled file that is to be printed on an IPDS printer by the iSeries." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5774488605865419, + "doc_id": "130a2f45d05a7581c0b630db42028b19844a8bb694d0543b377ac3f94f9220c3", + "edit_distance": 0.7441860465116279, + "f1_score": 0.819672131147541, + "meteor": 0.8353403473190518, + "precision": 0.7575757575757576, + "pred_md": "432\n\nChoice on the Define Box Detail display:\n\nFormat : 3=Vertical, right to left Degree of rotation : 90\n\nFigure 45. Print Example - 12\n\nFigure 45. Print Example - 12\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.8928571428571429, + "true_md": "Figure45.PrintExample-12\n\n432 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\nChoice on the Define Box Detail display:\n\nFormat : 3=Vertical, right to left Degree of rotation : 90" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.34838969131089126, + "doc_id": "0e4fb27cb786635b1132ed074aff632afccd50589d058ca419d4ac1e8d4489ed", + "edit_distance": 0.4491525423728814, + "f1_score": 0.7812500000000001, + "meteor": 0.5875036330106277, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "You can select the field in a record format by typing a 1 (Select) in the Opt column.\n\n## Example Actions:\n\n- 1. Type 1 in the Opt column beside NAME .\n- 2. Press the Enter key.\n\nThe Define Text Detail display appears again with the selected field name in the Text data prompt.\n\nChapter 8. Getting Started with Print Format Utility\n\n117", + "recall": 0.6410256410256411, + "true_md": "Chapter 8. Getting Started with Print Format Utility 117\n\nYou can select the field in a record format by typing a 1 (Select) in the Opt column.\n\n## Example Actions:\n\n- 1. Type 1 in the Opt column beside NAME$_{.}$\n\n- 2. Press the Enter key.\n\nThe Define Text Detail display appears again with the selected field name in the Text data prompt.\n\n## Select Field in Record Format\n\nType option, press Enter. 1=Select\n\nBottom F5=Refresh F11=Select reserved variable F12=Cancel\n\n## Define Text Detail\n\nOverstrike......... Character More... F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F6=Change measurement method F10=Edit numeric F12=Cancel" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9428161760377307, + "doc_id": "12de77be848ffae39969d947139f7661a193f05fd8be634903d1deb49fe8e002", + "edit_distance": 0.022727272727272728, + "f1_score": 0.982456140350877, + "meteor": 0.9772519851025124, + "precision": 0.9824561403508771, + "pred_md": "## Printing Overlays with AFP Utilities for iSeries\n\nOverlays can be printed using AFP Utilities for iSeries menu option 22, then specifying option 6=Print next to the overlay name. To print overlays with Printout Format Definitions, select the \" Define Printout Specifications \" option on either the Create PFD Definition or Change PFD Definition panel. Then, specify the overlay name and library name for Front side overlay and Back side overlay.\n\nChapter 3. Getting Started with the Overlay Utility\n\n57", + "recall": 0.9824561403508771, + "true_md": "## Printing Overlays with AFP Utilities for iSeries\n\nOverlays can be printed using AFP Utilities for iSeries menu option 22, then specifying option 6=Print next to the overlay name. To print overlays with Printout Format Definitions, select the † Define Printout Specifications † option on either the Create PFD Definition or Change PFD Definition panel. Then, specify the overlay name and library name for Front side overlay and Back side overlay.\n\nChapter 3. Getting Started with the Overlay Utility 57" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.851403061958809, + "doc_id": "c8ab83039d19c3fbbedc84628d9562fe3704a0d61a008e6411a926fb8a40e297", + "edit_distance": 0.43983402489626555, + "f1_score": 0.9502762430939226, + "meteor": 0.9573629693862489, + "precision": 0.945054945054945, + "pred_md": "## Print Format Utility\n\nThe Print Format Utility provides the capability to develop AFP output applications directly from database files. With the Print Format Utility, you can:\n\n- v Design your desired layout of a record interactively in the same way as the Overlay Utility.\n\nYou can define headings, boxes, or logos which contain text, lines, boxes, images, bar codes, and graphics to be printed in addition to the data in the database file member.\n\nFigure 6 shows a sample label you can create from a record in a database file using the Print Format Utility.\n\nFigure 6. Sample Label (Created by the Print Format Utility)\n\nFigure 6. Sample Label (Created by the Print Format Utility)\n\n- v Design a page layout interactively in the same way as in the Overlay Utility. You can define headings, boxes, or logos which contain text, lines, boxes, images, bar codes, and graphics to be printed.\n- v Save the record layout and page layout as a printout format definition in your file.\n- v Print a database file member according to the printout format definition.\n- v Replicate a record layout across and down the page such as in a multiple-up label application.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide\n\n10", + "recall": 0.9555555555555556, + "true_md": "## Print Format Utility\n\nThe Print Format Utility provides the capability to develop AFP output applications directly from database files. With the Print Format Utility, you can:\n\nYou can define headings, boxes, or logos which contain text, lines, boxes, images, bar codes, and graphics to be printed in addition to the data in the database file member.\n\nFigure 6 shows a sample label you can create from a record in a database file using the Print Format Utility.\n\n- v Design your desired layout of a record interactively in the same way as the Overlay Utility.\n\n- v Design a page layout interactively in the same way as in the Overlay Utility.\n\n- v Save the record layout and page layout as a printout format definition in your file.\n\n- v Print a database file member according to the printout format definition.\n\n- v Replicate a record layout across and down the page such as in a multiple-up label application.\n\nYou can define headings, boxes, or logos which contain text, lines, boxes, images, bar codes, and graphics to be printed.\n\n10 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\nFigure6.SampleLabel(CreatedbythePrintFormatUtility)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5048436902501794, + "doc_id": "0dd398d71eab4633ca737e98f908951121d5211cbefdb51607ca9487b0185f56", + "edit_distance": 0.41379310344827586, + "f1_score": 0.8444444444444446, + "meteor": 0.8057647015754087, + "precision": 0.8260869565217391, + "pred_md": "348\n\nThe following table describes the Convert Overlay to File display.\n\nTable 74. Convert Overlay to File display fields\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.8636363636363636, + "true_md": "The following table describes the Convert Overlay to File display.\n\nTable74.ConvertOverlaytoFiledisplayfields\n\n348 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6487269754873215, + "doc_id": "7c30a8611fe535dfb4bab018e104871479d51b5d372fb440509df79bd946b888", + "edit_distance": 0.3333333333333333, + "f1_score": 0.9552238805970149, + "meteor": 0.914080542458921, + "precision": 0.9696969696969697, + "pred_md": "412\n\nLine Placement is Center: The center of horizontal lines is positioned to the center of the row. The center of vertical lines is positioned to the center of the column.\n\nMeasurement Method is Inch or Centimeter: The top of the horizontal lines is positioned to the vertical position. The left of the vertical lines is positioned to the horizontal position.\n\nMeasurement Method is Inch or Centimeter: The top of the horizontal lines is positioned to the vertical position. The left of the vertical lines is positioned to the horizontal position.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.9411764705882353, + "true_md": "Line Placement is Center: The center of horizontal lines is positioned to the center of the row. The center of vertical lines is positioned to the center of the column.\n\nMeasurement Method is Inch or Centimeter: The top of the horizontal lines is positioned to the vertical position. The left of the vertical lines is positioned to the horizontal position.\n\n412 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.006385868921562851, + "doc_id": "22c4e8c9a58d89e7e51c2c5815bfe51834ac3142be0cb3bb095473f8dee78787", + "edit_distance": 0.993058769088385, + "f1_score": 0.2765957446808511, + "meteor": 0.052448703058459174, + "precision": 0.16049382716049382, + "pred_md": "## Part 1. Introduction to IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries\n\n| | Chapter 1. What are the IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries? What You Can Do with AFP Utilities for iSeries | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n|-------------------------------------------------------------|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|---------|----|---------|-------|-----|-------|---------|-----|-------|-----|---------|-------|---------|-------|---------|-----|---------|-----------|---------------|-------|-------------------------|-------|---------|-----------------|--------|-------|-----|---------|-----|-------|----|\n| Using Overlays | | . | . | | . | . | . . | . . | | . | | | . . . | | | . . . . | | | . . . | | | . . . . . . . . . . . . | | | . . . . . . . . | | . 5 | | | . . | | |\n| | | . | | | | . . | | . | . | | . . | . | . | . . | . . | . . | . | . . . | . | | . | | | | | | . | 7 | | | | |\n| Using Images . | | . . | | . | . | | . | . | . . | . | . | . . | . | . . | . | . . | . | . | . . | . | | . | . | . | . . | . | . | . 8 | | | | |\n| Using Bar Codes | . | . . . | . | . | . | . | | . | . | . | . | . | . . | . | . . . | . | . . | . | . . . | . 8 | | | | | | | | | | . | | |\n| Using Graphics | . | . . | . | . | . . | | . | . . . | . | . | . | . | . | . | | | . . | . . | . . . | . . | . | . | . | | . . | | . 8 | | | . | | |\n| Overlay Utility . | | . . . | | | . . | . | . | . . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | | | . . . | . . | . . | | . . | | . | | . | . | . 9 | | . | | |\n| Print Format Utility | | . . . | . | . | . | | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . . | | | | . . | . | . . . | . | . . . | . . . | | | . . . | . 10 | | . | | | |\n| Resource Management Utility | | . | | | . . | . | . . . | . | | . . | . | . | . . . | . . . | . . | . | | | . . . | . . . . . . . | . . . | . . | . | . | . . . . 13 | . 12 . | | | . . | | | |\n| AFP Resource and AFP Utilities for iSeries . | . | | | | | . | | | . | . | . . | . | . . | . | . . | . | . | . | . . | . | | . | | | | . | | | . | | | |\n| Requirements for Use of the AFP Utilities for iSeries. | | | | | | | | | | | . | . | . . | . | . . | . . | . . | . . | . . . | | | . | . | . | | . | . 13 | | | | | |\n| Hardware Requirements | . | . . | | | | . | . | . | . | | . | . | . | . | | . | | . | . . | . 13 | | | | | . . . | . | | | . | | | |\n| | . | | | . | . | . | | . . | . | | | | . | . . | | . | | . . | . . . . | . . . | | | . | | . | . | . 13 | 14 | . | | | |\n| Software Requirements AFP Utilities Fundamentals (Concepts) | . . | | . | | . | | . . | . . | . | | | . | . . | . | | . | . . | | . . | . | | . | | . . . | . . | | | | . | | . | |\n| Libraries, Files, and Members . | . . . . | . | . | | . . | . . | . . | . | . | | | . | . | . | . | . . | . | . . | . . | . | . | . | . . | . . | | . | . | . | . . . | | | |\n| Elements | . . | . | . | | . | | | . | . | | | . | . | . | . | | . | . | . . . . . | . | . | . . | . | . | | . | 14 | . . | 14 . 14 | | | |\n| . AFP Utilities for iSeries Displays | . | | | | | . | . | . . | . | . | | . | | | | . | . . | | . . . . | | . | . . | . | | . . | | . 15 | | . | | | |\n| Menu Display Work with Display . | . . . . | . . . . | | . . . . | . . . | . | . | . . . . | . . | | | . . . . | . . | | . . | . . | | . . . . | . . . | . . . . | . | | . . . | . . . . | . . | | 15 | . | . . . | . . | | |\n| Design display | . | . . . | | . . | . | | . | . | . | . | . | | . | . | . | . | . | | . . . | . | | | . . . | . | . | . | | | . . | | . 16 | |\n| Function Keys | | . | | . | . | | . | . | . | . | | | | | | . | | . . | | | . . . | . | . . | . | . | | . | | . . . | | 17 | |\n| . Related Online Information | . | . | | . | | . . | | . | . | | . | . | . | . | | . | . | . . . | . | . . | . | . | . | | | | | | . | | | |\n| Help for Displays | . | | . | | . . | . | . | . | . . | . . | | | . | | | . | . | . . | . . . | . . | . | | | . . | | | | . . | . | . . | | |\n| InfoSeeker . | . | . . . . | | . | . | . | . . | . | | . . | | . | | | | | . . | | . | . | . . | . . . | . . | . | | | 19 19 | . | . | . | . . . | |\n| | . | | | | | | | . | . | | | | . | | | | | | . . . | | | . | | . | | | | . | . | | 19 19 | . |\n| Help for Control Language Commands | . | | | | | | | | | . . . | | | . | . . . . | . . . | | . . | . | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| | | . | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| | | | . | | | . | | | | | | | | | | | | . . | | . | | | . | | . . | | | | . . | . | | |\n| . . | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| | | | | | . | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | . . | | | . | | . | | | | | . | | | |\n| . . . | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n\n1\n\n.\n\n3", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## Part 1. Introduction to IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries\n\n1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9524321814885852, + "doc_id": "bbdfbf5fe240fc6084e12d4b140a201bee5c4df43b32239df49c493abf3d0541", + "edit_distance": 0.575, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.7983154620308325, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Step 3. After completing the parameter specification, press Enter to complete the create element operation. The newly created element has a sequence number one greater than that of the last element created, and is added to the bottom of the list.\n\n## Change\n\nTo change an existing element, do the following.\n\nStep 1. Place the cursor on the line of the element to be changed.\n\n- Step 2.\n\nPress the F14 key. The key entry area appears at the lower part of the display. The remainder of the change element operation is the same as the create element operation, except that the parameters appear on the key entry area with the values previously specified.\n\nStep 3. Press the F4 key to specify the other parameters if necessary.\n\nStep 4. After completing the parameter specification, press Enter to complete the change element operation. The list reflects the changes of the element.\n\n## Sort Element List\n\nOn the list edit panel, when F4 is pressed with the cursor positioned in the NBR field, the NAME field, the ACROSS field, or the DOWN field, the list is sorted according to the contents of the field and re-displayed.\n\nIf the measurement method is not the same for all elements in the list, the list cannot be sorted by the ACROSS field or DOWN field.\n\nIf the cursor is positioned in the name field, elements which have nothing shown in the field will be assigned a name consisting of the one-character ID followed by the three-character number displayed in the NBR field. This is the same as the element mark displayed in screen edit mode without the asterisk. The name assigned will not be displayed.\n\nElements added to a sorted list will be added at the bottom of the list. Elements which are changed in a sorted list will remain in the same list position until the list is sorted again.\n\n## Copy, Move, Remove, or Restore\n\nIn the list view, you can copy, move, or remove the existing elements using the element edit function. You can restore removed elements, which is impossible in the screen view.\n\n## Element Edit\n\nTo copy, move, remove, or restore an element, do the following:\n\nStep 1. Place the cursor in the NBR column on the line of the element to be copied, moved, removed, or restored on the image area.\n\nStep 2. Type one of the following commands and press the Enter key. The operation to be executed is determined by the option selected.\n\n- C Copies the element.\n\nThe key entry area appears at the lower part of the display, and you can specify the position in the Across prompt and the Down prompt of the new element.\n\nThe newly created element is added after the last line of the list and the display scrolls to show the new element. The original element is not affected by the copy.\n\nChapter 13. Design Operation\n\n295", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "- Step 3. After completing the parameter specification, press Enter to complete the create element operation. The newly created element has a sequence number one greater than that of the last element created, and is added to the bottom of the list.\n\nTo change an existing element, do the following.\n\nOn the list edit panel, when F4 is pressed with the cursor positioned in the NBR field, the NAME field, the ACROSS field, or the DOWN field, the list is sorted according to the contents of the field and re-displayed.\n\nIf the measurement method is not the same for all elements in the list, the list cannot be sorted by the ACROSS field or DOWN field.\n\nIf the cursor is positioned in the name field, elements which have nothing shown in the field will be assigned a name consisting of the one-character ID followed by the three-character number displayed in the NBR field. This is the same as the element mark displayed in screen edit mode without the asterisk. The name assigned will not be displayed.\n\nElements added to a sorted list will be added at the bottom of the list. Elements which are changed in a sorted list will remain in the same list position until the list is sorted again.\n\nIn the list view, you can copy, move, or remove the existing elements using the element edit function. You can restore removed elements, which is impossible in the screen view.\n\nTo copy, move, remove, or restore an element, do the following:\n\nThe key entry area appears at the lower part of the display, and you can specify the position in the Across prompt and the Down prompt of the new element.\n\nThe newly created element is added after the last line of the list and the display scrolls to show the new element. The original element is not affected by the copy.\n\nChapter 13. Design Operation 295\n\n- C Copies the element.\n\n- Step 1. Place the cursor in the NBR column on the line of the element to be copied, moved, removed, or restored on the image area.\n\n- Step 2. Type one of the following commands and press the Enter key. The operation to be executed is determined by the option selected.\n\n- Step 1. Place the cursor on the line of the element to be changed.\n\n- Step 2. Press the F14 key. The key entry area appears at the lower part of the display. The remainder of the change element operation is the same as the create element operation, except that the parameters appear on the key entry area with the values previously specified.\n\n- Step 3. Press the F4 key to specify the other parameters if necessary.\n\n- Step 4. After completing the parameter specification, press Enter to complete the change element operation. The list reflects the changes of the element.\n\n## Change\n\n## Sort Element List\n\n## Copy, Move, Remove, or Restore\n\n## Element Edit" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6333963850928109, + "doc_id": "01ca174e345c7acc15cc2d69fb8e944ab93acbfada3039a8c1d6a3c3aa2c3597", + "edit_distance": 0.34545454545454546, + "f1_score": 0.9387755102040818, + "meteor": 0.6443622212526147, + "precision": 0.9452054794520548, + "pred_md": "Basic English Language Skills\n\n## First Paragraph\n\nIntroduce yourself, and explain why you are writing the letter. If you are responding to a job advertisement, state which advertisement you are responding to, and indicate where you found it.\n\n## For example:\n\n'I would like to apply for the position of Graphic Designer, as advertised in the Career Times on 1 March 2015.'\n\nIf possible, mention a mutual contact or acquaintance.\n\n## For example:\n\n'Samantha Stevens mentioned that you are looking for an experienced Graphic Designer with a keen interest in the fashion industry.'\n\n## Second Paragraph\n\nMention your qualifications, skills and experience, and relate them to the needs of the company. Give relevant examples of how you have used your skills in the past to perform similar tasks and responsibilities to those set out in the job description.\n\n## Third Paragraph\n\nExplain why you want to work for this organisation in particular. Where relevant, explain any gaps in your CV. If you don't have the required academic qualifications, for example, you can explain how your practical work experience makes up for it.\n\n## Fourth paragraph\n\nMention any documents or attachments that you have included with your cover letter, and state your availability for an interview.\n\n## Close\n\nThank the recipient for taking the time to read your letter, and sign off with a professional greeting, such as 'Yours sincerely' or 'Kind regards', followed by your full name, telephone number and e-mail address.", + "recall": 0.9324324324324325, + "true_md": "Basic English Language Skills\n\n## First Paragraph Introduce yourself, and explain why you are writing the letter.\n\nFirst Paragraph Introduce yourself, and explain why you are writing the letter. If you are responding to a job advertisement, state which advertisement you are responding to, and indicate where you found it.\n\nFor example: “I would like to apply for the position of Graphic Designer, as advertised \n\nFor example: “I would like to apply for the position of Graphic Designer, as advertised in the Career Times on 1 March 2015.”\n\nIf possible, mention a mutual contact or acquaintance.\n\nFor example: “Samantha Stevens mentioned that you are looking for an experienced \n\nFor example: “Samantha Stevens mentioned that you are looking for an experienced Graphic Designer with a keen interest in the fashion industry.”\n\nSecond Paragraph Mention your qualifications, skills and experience, and relate them to the needs of the company. Give relevant examples of how you have used your skills in the past to perform similar tasks and responsibilities to those set out in the job description.\n\nThird Paragraph Explain why you want to work for this organisation in particular. Where relevant, explain any gaps in your CV. If you don’t have the required academic qualifications, for example, you can explain how your practical work experience makes up for it.\n\n## Third Paragraph Explain why you want to work for this organisation in particular. Where\n\n## Second Paragraph Mention your qualifications, skills and experience, and relate them to the\n\n## Fourth paragraph Mention any documents or attachments that you have included with your\n\n## Close Thank the recipient for taking the time to read your letter, and\n\nFourth paragraph Mention any documents or attachments that you have included with your cover letter, and state your availability for an interview.\n\nClose Thank the recipient for taking the time to read your letter, and sign off with a professional greeting, such as “Yours sincerely” or “Kind regards”, followed by your full name, telephone number and e-mail address." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.2508877834205276, + "doc_id": "c9d9067ff3c5b857e4e4658d23242b2a9961d1eeca3b59ee712fe2c8c26753bd", + "edit_distance": 0.5462962962962963, + "f1_score": 0.6857142857142856, + "meteor": 0.5053692177162127, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Press the Roll Up (Page Down) key to see the next page of the Define Box Detail display.\n\nPress the Roll Up (Page Down) key to see the next page of the Define Box Detail display.\n\nPress the Roll Up (Page Down) key to see the next page of the Define Box Detail display.\n\nChapter 13. Design Operation\n\n255", + "recall": 0.5217391304347826, + "true_md": "Press the Roll Up (Page Down) key to see the next page of the Define Box Detail display.\n\nPress the Roll Up (Page Down) key to see the next page of the Define Box Detail display.\n\n## Define Box Detail\n\n## Define Box Detail\n\nMark: *B002 Measurement method: Row/Column\n\nType choices, press Enter.\n\nMore... F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F6=Change measurement method F12=Cancel\n\nMore... F12=Cancel\n\nBottom F12=Cancel\n\nBottom F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F6=Change measurement method F12=Cancel\n\nMark: *B002 Measurement method: Row/Column\n\nType choices, press Enter.\n\nChapter 13. Design Operation 255" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8833635788668053, + "doc_id": "37fbffae8488adbca35c23781a92bbf235a9be5dd36a169357b341e9157b8045", + "edit_distance": 0.8333333333333334, + "f1_score": 0.9672727272727274, + "meteor": 0.8373530080393495, + "precision": 0.9568345323741008, + "pred_md": "## Chapter 16. Getting Started with the Resource Management utility\n\nThis chapter describes how to do some typical tasks of the Resource Management Utility.\n\nThis chapter includes the following tasks:\n\n- 1. Converting a PC document to a page segment\n- 2. Printing an overlay\n- 3. Printing a page segment\n\nYou do not need to perform these tasks sequentially because they are independent.\n\nNote:\n\nTo perform some of the tasks, you need to prepare input data for the tasks. Please read the first part of each section for detail.\n\n## Starting Resource Management Utility\n\nExample Actions:\n\n- 1. Type STRAFPU on the command line.\n- 2. Press the Enter key.\n\nThe IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries menu appears.\n\n```\nAFPU IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries Select one of the following: Overlay Utility 1. Work with source overlays 2. Work with source overlay files Print Format Utility 11. Work with PFD definitions 12. Work with PFD definition files 13. Print database file member 14. Print AFP Utilities tutorial Resource Management Utility 21. Convert to page segment 22. Work with overlays 23. Work with page segments Selection or command ===> 21 F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel F16=System main menu (C) COPYRIGHT IBM CORP. 1991, 1993.\n```\n\nYou can start the following three Resource Management Utility functions from this display:\n\nSelection\n\nFunction\n\n21\n\nConvert to Page Segment\n\n22\n\nWork with Overlays\n\n315", + "recall": 0.9779411764705882, + "true_md": "## Chapter 16. Getting Started with the Resource Management utility\n\n## Starting Resource Management Utility\n\n## Example Actions:\n\nThe IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries menu appears.\n\nAFPU IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries Select one of the following: Overlay Utility 1. Work with source overlays 2. Work with source overlay files Print Format Utility 11. Work with PFD definitions 12. Work with PFD definition files 13. Print database file member 14. Print AFP Utilities tutorial Resource Management Utility 21. Convert to page segment 22. Work with overlays 23. Work with page segments Selection or command ===> 21 F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel F16=System main menu (C) COPYRIGHT IBM CORP. 1991, 1993.\n\nYou can start the following three Resource Management Utility functions from this display:\n\n315\n\n- 1. Converting a PC document to a page segment\n\n- 2. Printing an overlay\n\n- 3. Printing a page segment\n\n- Note: To perform some of the tasks, you need to prepare input data for the tasks. Please read the first part of each section for detail.\n\n- 1. Type STRAFPU on the command line.\n\n- 2. Press the Enter key.\n\nThis chapter describes how to do some typical tasks of the Resource Management Utility.\n\nThis chapter includes the following tasks:\n\nYou do not need to perform these tasks sequentially because they are independent." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4768955997633769, + "doc_id": "ae2a31dd2506175286eed7e7d2468a89fa30fe1b3e0438e27ba0eb891aa7571f", + "edit_distance": 0.7096774193548387, + "f1_score": 0.7692307692307692, + "meteor": 0.8444646414571226, + "precision": 0.6896551724137931, + "pred_md": "90\n\nTable 14. Create Source Overlay File display fields (continued)\n\nPress the Enter key after you specify the choices.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.8695652173913043, + "true_md": "Table14.CreateSourceOverlayFiledisplayfields (continued)\n\n90 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\nPress the Enter key after you specify the choices." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9214392235189629, + "doc_id": "0edcc2811ae1a595b24c6b97fcd23f4cff611e38a5ed7f1fb05e93b86f662117", + "edit_distance": 0.0847750865051903, + "f1_score": 0.9823677581863981, + "meteor": 0.9696338501462097, + "precision": 0.9948979591836735, + "pred_md": "232\n\nUtility and the Print Format Utility keep the system assigned mark for this element even if you have assigned a name for it. The Overlay Utility and the Print Format Utility do not use that system assigned mark for elements which have a user assigned name.\n\nThe element mark is changed to an asterisk followed by this element's name on the image area. For example, if you define a text element as the first element of an overlay and assign a name ABCD , the element mark *T001 is changed to *ABCD .\n\nTo define or change an element name, press F4=Detail from either the Define or Change panels. Type the name you wish to assign to the element next to the element prompt.\n\nIf you erase the previously assigned name, the Overlay Utility and the Print Format Utility replace it by the system assigned mark such as *T001 . Any characters up to four can be assigned as the element name.\n\nEven if the length of the element name is less than four characters, the element mark occupies six characters, since the mark on the image area consists of an asterisk, the name, and a blank character.\n\n## Element Mark On/Off\n\nThe element marks on the image area can be suppressed or re-displayed by pressing F15 (Mark On/Off). When the F15 key is first pressed, all the element marks displayed on the image area disappear from the display except the last one. This is especially useful to verify the entire text element or line/box element without overriding other element marks.\n\nWhen the F15 key is pressed the second time, all the element marks are displayed on the image area again.\n\n## Hide\n\nOne element may be overlapped with other elements in the display. If element marks overlap each other on the image area, the one created last is displayed. The other overlapped marks are not displayed. By repeatedly creating elements, some elements can not be seen on the image area. To solve this problem, the hide function is provided. This function temporarily removes elements one by one at the position of the cursor, and an element that was overlapped by the hidden one appears. You can use this function by pressing F16 (Hide).\n\nThe hidden elements are removed from the image area, but not actually removed. You can see them by pressing the F5 (Refresh) key.\n\n## Refresh\n\nThe Overlay Utility and the Print Format Utility also provide the refresh function. You can use this function by pressing F5 (Refresh). It restores the elements that were temporarily hidden by the hide function.\n\nBoth hide and refresh functions only affect the image shown on the display. They do not change the elements you entered nor do they change the printed output when an overlay or PFD data is printed.\n\n## Scroll\n\nThe Overlay Utility and the Print Format Utility provide two ways to scroll in the screen view and the list view:\n\n- v Function keys\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.9701492537313433, + "true_md": "Utility and the Print Format Utility keep the system assigned mark for this element even if you have assigned a name for it. The Overlay Utility and the Print Format Utility do not use that system assigned mark for elements which have a user assigned name.\n\nThe element mark is changed to an asterisk followed by this element’s name on the image area. For example, if you define a text element as the first element of an overlay and assign a name ABCD$_{, the element mark}$ *T001 is changed to *ABCD$_{.}$\n\nTo define or change an element name, press F4=Detail from either the Define or Change panels. Type the name you wish to assign to the element next to the element prompt.\n\nIf you erase the previously assigned name, the Overlay Utility and the Print Format Utility replace it by the system assigned mark such as *T001$_{. Any}$ characters up to four can be assigned as the element name.\n\nEven if the length of the element name is less than four characters, the element mark occupies six characters, since the mark on the image area consists of an asterisk, the name, and a blank character.\n\nThe element marks on the image area can be suppressed or re-displayed by pressing F15 (Mark On/Off). When the F15 key is first pressed, all the element marks displayed on the image area disappear from the display except the last one. This is especially useful to verify the entire text element or line/box element without overriding other element marks.\n\n## Element Mark On/Off\n\nWhen the F15 key is pressed the second time, all the element marks are displayed on the image area again.\n\nOne element may be overlapped with other elements in the display. If element marks overlap each other on the image area, the one created last is displayed. The other overlapped marks are not displayed. By repeatedly creating elements, some elements can not be seen on the image area. To solve this problem, the hide function is provided. This function temporarily removes elements one by one at the position of the cursor, and an element that was overlapped by the hidden one appears. You can use this function by pressing F16 (Hide).\n\n## Hide\n\nThe hidden elements are removed from the image area, but not actually removed. You can see them by pressing the F5 (Refresh) key.\n\nThe Overlay Utility and the Print Format Utility also provide the refresh function. You can use this function by pressing F5 (Refresh). It restores the elements that were temporarily hidden by the hide function.\n\n## Refresh\n\nBoth hide and refresh functions only affect the image shown on the display. They do not change the elements you entered nor do they change the printed output when an overlay or PFD data is printed.\n\nThe Overlay Utility and the Print Format Utility provide two ways to scroll in the screen view and the list view:\n\n## Scroll\n\n- v Function keys\n\n232 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0020796995527989233, + "doc_id": "e1058ae92c7a7370a7dfe74de3bc8d8377839c2e498313743f125d4ccc6e4e1c", + "edit_distance": 0.9972086531751571, + "f1_score": 0.11666666666666667, + "meteor": 0.0214857045609258, + "precision": 0.061946902654867256, + "pred_md": "## Part 2. Overlay Utility\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n23\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n61\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n83\n\n.\n\n.\n\n29\n\n.\n\n.\n\n59\n\n| Chapter 2. Introduction to the Overlay Utility Print Form and Overlay | . . . | | . . | . | . | . | . . . | . . | . | . . | | | | . . | . . | . . | . . . . | . | . . | . . . | . . | . | | . | . . | . | | . . . . . . 23 | | | | |\n|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|-----------|------------------------------------------|-------|-------|-------|-----|---------|-----------|-----|-------|-------------------|-------------|---------|-------------|-------------|-----------|-----------------|---------|-----------|---------|-------|-----------|-----------|-----------|-------------|---------|-----------------|----------------------------------|-----|-------|-----|-----|\n| Source Overlay . . . | . . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | | . | . | . . | . . . . | | . . | . . . | . . | . | . | | | . | . | | | | | . | | | | |\n| Overlay Specifications . | . | | . | . | . . | . | . . | . | . | . | . | | . . | . | . . . | . | . | . . . . | . . | . . | . . | . | . . | . . | 24 24 | | | . | | | | |\n| Overlay Fonts . . | . . | . . | . | . . | . | . | . | . . | | . | . | . . | . | . | . . . . | . | . . | | . . | . | . | . | . . | . | 24 | | | . | | | | |\n| Design Overlay . . | . . | . . | . . | | . . | . | . . | . | . | . | . | . . . | . . | . | . . | . . | . . . | . . | . . | | . | . | . | | | | | . . 25 | | | | |\n| Operation Flow . . . | . . | | . . | . | . . | | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . . | . . | . . | . | | . 26 | | . | . | | | | | | . | | | | |\n| Chapter 3. Getting Started with the Overlay Utility | | | | | . | | . | . . | . . | . | . . | . . . | . | | . | . . . | . . | | . . | . . | . | . | | . | . | . | . | . | | | | |\n| Step 1 - Starting the Overlay Utility | | | . | . . | | | . . | | | | | . . | . . | . | . . | | . . | | . . 30 | | | . | | | | | | . | | | | |\n| Step 2 - Creating a Source Overlay File | | | | . . | . | | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . . . | . . | | . . | | . . | . | . 31 | | | | | | | . | | | . | |\n| Step 3 - Creating a Source Overlay Defining a Text Element | . . | . | . . | . . . | . . | . . | . . | . | . | . . | . . . . | . . . . | . . | . | . . . | . . | . . . . | . | . . . | . . | . . | . . | | . 33 . 35 | | | | . . . . . . | | | | |\n| Defining a Line Element | . . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . . | . | . | . . | . | . | . . . | | . . | . | . | . | | | | | | . | . . . 38 | | | | |\n| Defining a Box Element | . . | . | . | . . | . . | . . | . | . | . | | . | . | . | . . . | . | . | . | . | . . | . | | | | | . | . . | . 39 | . . | | | | |\n| Defining a Bar Code Element | | . | . . | . . | . . . | . . | . . | . . | . | . | . . | . . . . | . . | . . | . . . . | . | . | | . . | . | . | . . | . | | . 42 . 43 | | | . . . . | | | . . | |\n| Placing a Graphics Element | . | . | | . | | | | | | . | . | . . . | . . | | . | . . . | . . | . . | | . . | | . . . . | | | | | | | | | | |\n| Viewing the Overlay with the AFP Workbench Viewer . | . | . | . | . . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | | . . | . | | . | . | . | . . | . . | | | | | | | | | | |\n| Saving the Source Overlay Step 4 - Changing a Source Overlay | | | . | . . . | . . . | . | . . | . . | . . | | . . . . | . . . | . . | . . | | . . | . . . | . . | | . . . | . | . . | . . . . | . . | . . 49 | . 45 46 | | . . | | | | |\n| Placing a Page Segment Creating an Overlay from a Source Overlay | . . | | . . | . . | . | . . | . | . | . . | . . | | . . . . . | . . | . | . | . . | . . . . . | . . | . . . . | . . . . | . . . | . . | . | . | . | | | . . . 49 . . . 54 | | . | . | |\n| Step 5 - Using an Overlay | . . | . . | . | . . . | . | . | . . | . . | . | | | . . | | . | . | . | . . | | . | . . . | | . . . | . . . | . 56 . | | | | . . | | | | |\n| Overriding a Printer File Using the Printer File . | . | . | . . | . . | . | . | . | . | . | | . . | . . . | | . | | | . | . . | . | | | . | . | | . . . | 56 . | | . | | | | |\n| | . . | . | | | | | . | . | . | . | | . . . | . . | . . | . . | . . | . . . | | . . | . | . | . . | | . . | 56 . 57 | | | . | | | | |\n| Printing Overlays with AFP Utilities for iSeries | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | . | | | . | | | . | . . | | | | | | | |\n| Chapter 4. Starting and Ending the Overlay Utility Starting the Overlay Utility | . . | . | . | . . | . | . | | . | | . | . | . | . | . . | . | . | . . | . . | . . | . . | . . | . | . . . | . . | . . 59 . 60 | | | | | | | |\n| Option 2 (Work with source overlay files) | | | | . | . | | . . | . | . . | | . | | . | . . | . . . . | . . . | . . | . . | . . . . | . | . | . | . | | . | | . | . | | | | |\n| Option 1 (Work with source overlays) | | | | | . | | . . . | . | . | . | . . | | . . . | . . . | . | . . . . . | . . | . . . | . | | . . | . . | . 60 . 60 | | | | | . | | | | |\n| Ending the Overlay Utility | . | . . Chapter 5. Work with Source Overlays | . | . . | . . | . | . . | . . | . | . | . . . | . . . . | . | . . | . | . . | | . | . . . . . | . | . | | . | | . . | . . . . | | . | | . | . | |\n| . . . . . . . | . . . . . | . . | . . | . . | . . | | . . | . | . . | . . | . . | . . | . | . | . . | . . | . . | . . | . . | . | . | . . . | . . | | | . | . . | . . 62 . . | | | | |\n| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | . . | . . | | . | . . | . . | | | | | | | | | . | | | |\n| . . . . . . | . | . | . | . . | | . | . . | | . | . | . | | | . | . | . | | . | . | | . | | . | . . . | | . | 63 64 . 64 . 64 | . | | | | |\n| . . . | . | . | | . | . | . | . . | . | . | | . | . . | . . . . | . | . . | . | . . | . | . | . | . | . | | | . | | | . | | . . . | | |\n| . Showing a Source Overlay List . Selecting a Source Overlay from a List | | | . | . . | . . | . | . | . | . | . . | | | | . | | . . | . | | . | . | . | . | | . . | | . | | . | | | | . . |\n| 1=Create a Source Overlay Define Overlay Specifications Change Overlay Specifications | . . . . | | . . | . . | . . | . . | . | . | . | . . . | | . . | . | | | . | | . . . | . . | . . | . . | | . . . . | . . | . . | . | . . . | . . . . 65 . . . . . 66 | . . | . . | | . . |\n| | | | . . | . . | . . | . . | . . . | . . | . . | . . | . . | . . . . | . | . | . | | . . . . . . . . | . | . | . . . | | . . . . . | | . . . . . | . . | | | . . . . . 70 . . . . . 72 . | | . . . | . | |\n| Confirm Delete of Elements . Work with Source Overlay Fonts Design Overlay . . . Saving a Source Overlay | . . . . | . | . . . | . . . | . . . | . . | . . | . . . . . | | . | . . . . . . . . . | . . . . . . | | . . . . . . | . . . . . . | . . . | . | | . | | . . | . . | . | | | | | . . . . 73 . . . . 73 . . . . 73 | | | | |\n\n21", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## Part 2. Overlay Utility\n\n21" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.512498372766667, + "doc_id": "28cf3d39aa62109f8e1253a3a3b5c4231173b5f0f387c3dac3dabd9b313ed1c9", + "edit_distance": 0.47953216374269003, + "f1_score": 0.8615384615384615, + "meteor": 0.6862528820699667, + "precision": 0.9491525423728814, + "pred_md": "## 2=Change PFD Definition File\n\nTo change the description of a PFD definition file, do the following on the Work with PFD Definition Files display on page 205.\n\n- 1. Type 2 in the Opt column beside the PFD definition file you want to change.\n- 2. Press Enter.\n\nThe following display appears:\n\nUsing the Change PFD Definition File display, you can change the description text of a PFD definition file.\n\nTable 44. Change PFD Definition Files display fields\n\nWhen you press Enter, the description will be changed. When the change of description is completed, the screen returns to the Work with PFD Definition Files display on page 205.\n\nChapter 11. Work with PFD Definition Files\n\n211", + "recall": 0.7887323943661971, + "true_md": "## 2=Change PFD Definition File\n\nTo change the description of a PFD definition file, do the following on the Work with PFD Definition Files display on page 205.\n\nThe following display appears:\n\nType choices, press Enter.\n\nFile...........: PFUFILE Library . . ......: PFULIB\n\nFile...........: PFUFILE Library . . ......: PFULIB\n\nText 'description' . . . . PFD file for exercise\n\nF3=Exit F5=Refresh F12=Cancel\n\nUsing the Change PFD Definition File display, you can change the description text of a PFD definition file.\n\nWhen you press Enter, the description will be changed. When the change of description is completed, the screen returns to the Work with PFD Definition Files display on page 205.\n\nTable44.ChangePFDDefinitionFilesdisplayfields\n\n- 1. Type 2 in the Opt column beside the PFD definition file you want to change.\n\n- 2. Press Enter.\n\n## Change PFD Definition File\n\nChapter 11. Work with PFD Definition Files 211" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.658823398498943, + "doc_id": "99d5eab953136726b4eb43e3e3ae3737fa1ff1d12dbb48400a391ee917ac88e3", + "edit_distance": 0.6845238095238095, + "f1_score": 0.8402366863905326, + "meteor": 0.7161796320071241, + "precision": 0.9102564102564102, + "pred_md": "The Select Page Segment display shows the list of page segments in the libraries in the library list. You can select a page segment by typing 1 in the Opt column next to the Page Segment column and pressing Enter.\n\nNote: The library name is not passed, and it is not guaranteed that the page segment is retrieved from the library. It depends on the contents of the library list when a spooled file is created. See 'Page Segment' on page 392 and'Page Segment' on page 396 for more information.\n\nTable 60. Select Page Segment display fields\n\nSpecify Variable Page Segment: You can specify a variable page segment in a record layout. See 'Specify Mapping Object Name' on page 191 for more information.\n\nChapter 13. Design Operation\n\n277", + "recall": 0.7802197802197802, + "true_md": "## Select Page Segment\n\nThe Select Page Segment display shows the list of page segments in the libraries in the library list. You can select a page segment by typing 1 in the Opt column next to the Page Segment column and pressing Enter.\n\nTable60.SelectPageSegmentdisplayfields\n\nSpecify Variable Page Segment: You can specify a variable page segment in a record layout. See “Specify Mapping Object Name” on page 191 for more information.\n\nChapter 13. Design Operation 277\n\nPosition to....... Starting characters Type option, press Enter. 1=Select Page Opt Segment Library Text BEAR QGPL bear Bottom F5=Refresh F12=Cancel\n\nNote: The library name is not passed, and it is not guaranteed that the page segment is retrieved from the library. It depends on the contents of the library list when a spooled file is created. See “Page Segment” on page 392 and“Page Segment” on page 396 for more information." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8981410735804074, + "doc_id": "3b595e5ae44898481dcf85df86e06771c18ea57d4fc7cd9fa7b3589876b3f9eb", + "edit_distance": 0.2804878048780488, + "f1_score": 0.9811320754716982, + "meteor": 0.9611086447665066, + "precision": 0.9873417721518988, + "pred_md": "172\n\nWhen you press the Enter key, the record is placed and a mark *R001-001 is displayed at the position of the record. This mark indicates that the record is the first one in the page and not a repeated one.\n\n## Repetition of the Record in the Page\n\nThere are two directions to repeat the records in the page. One is to repeat the records horizontally - from left to right first, and then from top to bottom. The other is to repeat the records vertically - from top to bottom first, and then from left to right. The following are examples:\n\nSample of repeating records vertically\n\nImage to go here\n\nSample of repeating records horizontally\n\nImage to go here\n\nTo place the record repeatedly press F4 (Detail) to show the Place Record Layout Detail display.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.975, + "true_md": "When you press the Enter key, the record is placed and a mark *R001-001 is displayed at the position of the record. This mark indicates that the record is the first one in the page and not a repeated one.\n\nThere are two directions to repeat the records in the page. One is to repeat the records horizontally - from left to right first, and then from top to bottom. The other is to repeat the records vertically - from top to bottom first, and then from left to right. The following are examples:\n\nImage to go here\n\nImage to go here\n\nTo place the record repeatedly press F4 (Detail) to show the Place Record Layout Detail display.\n\n## Repetition of the Record in the Page\n\n## Sample of repeating records vertically\n\n## Sample of repeating records horizontally\n\n172 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8606824583334175, + "doc_id": "4fca1882be4e56857001929b8dc67c5663f47aaf477349b898723a778130cf5d", + "edit_distance": 0.07792207792207792, + "f1_score": 0.9298245614035088, + "meteor": 0.9231157563892853, + "precision": 0.9464285714285714, + "pred_md": "Basic English Language Skils\n\n## SUMMARIES\n\n## General Tips for Making Summaries\n\n- · Underline or highlight key points as you work through your study material, and make notes.\n- · When you come across a word or concept you don't understand, look it up in a dictionary, or do some research on the concept, and add your own definition to your summary.\n\nDeveloped for Oxbridge Academy", + "recall": 0.9137931034482759, + "true_md": "Basic English Language Skills\n\n## SUMMARIES\n\n## General Tips for Making Summaries\n\n- • Underline or highlight key points as you work through your study material, and make notes.\n\n- • When you come across a word or concept you don’t understand, look it up in a dictionary, or do some research on the concept, and add your own definition to your summary.\n\nDeveloped for Oxbridge Academy" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6282504227373162, + "doc_id": "cc0db7f33f594125ffc90bdddc0e94e0872f25bc8e5e28fcaf8de2f00cde8e56", + "edit_distance": 0.7606382978723404, + "f1_score": 0.932515337423313, + "meteor": 0.6433380076569368, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## 4=Delete a Source Overlay\n\nTo delete a source overlay, do the following on the Work with Source Overlays display on page 61.\n\n- 1. Type a 4 in the Opt column beside the source overlay you want to delete.\n- You can select more than one source overlay on the display.\n- 2. Press Enter.\n\nThe Confirm Delete of Source Overlays display appears:\n\nOn this display, all source overlays that you specified to delete are listed for your confirmation. Press Enter to confirm your choices for deletion, after which these source overlays are deleted. If you do not want to delete these source overlays, press F12 to return to the previous display to change your choices.\n\nPress the Enter key to delete source overlays.\n\nChapter 5. Work with Source Overlays\n\n79", + "recall": 0.8735632183908046, + "true_md": "## 4=Delete a Source Overlay\n\n## Confirm Delete of Source Overlays\n\nOn this display, all source overlays that you specified to delete are listed for your confirmation. Press Enter to confirm your choices for deletion, after which these source overlays are deleted. If you do not want to delete these source overlays, press F12 to return to the previous display to change your choices.\n\nPress the Enter key to delete source overlays.\n\nThe Confirm Delete of Source Overlays display appears:\n\nTo delete a source overlay, do the following on the Work with Source Overlays display on page 61.\n\n- 1. Type a 4 in the Opt column beside the source overlay you want to delete. You can select more than one source overlay on the display.\n\n- 2. Press Enter.\n\nFile............: OUFILE Library . . .......: OULIB\n\nPress Enter to confirm your choices for 4=Delete. Press F12 to return to change your choices.\n\nF11=Display names only F12=Cancel\n\nBottom\n\nChapter 5. Work with Source Overlays 79" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.42907438309650875, + "doc_id": "f51338763738ab5fb722db38f712ee01c072f83f1d1e7a56518b144ba9c25016", + "edit_distance": 0.3483606557377049, + "f1_score": 0.7813953488372094, + "meteor": 0.6658715275966921, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Chapter 19. Work with Overlays Function\n\nThe work with overlays function allows you to copy, delete, rename, and print an overlay object which is built by the overlay utility, display and change the description of an overlay, and convert an overlay object to a physical file from the list of overlays found in the selected libraries.\n\nTo use a work with overlays function, type 22 on the Selection or command line on the IBM Advanced Function Print Utilities for iSeries menu on page 324 and press Enter. The following display appears:\n\nThe Work with Overlays display shows a list of overlays in the libraries that you specified. If you specified an overlay name or generic name for the Overlay prompt, only those overlays that match the specified values are included in the list.\n\nThe following tables describe the Work with Overlays display.\n\n341", + "recall": 0.6412213740458015, + "true_md": "## Chapter 19. Work with Overlays Function\n\nThe work with overlays function allows you to copy, delete, rename, and print an overlay object which is built by the overlay utility, display and change the description of an overlay, and convert an overlay object to a physical file from the list of overlays found in the selected libraries.\n\nTo use a work with overlays function, type 22 on the Selection or command line on the IBM Advanced Function Print Utilities for iSeries menu on page 324 and press Enter. The following display appears:\n\n## Work with Overlays\n\nLibrary ......... OVLLIB Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB *ALL, *USRLIBL, *ALLUSR Overlay ......... *ALL Name, generic*, *ALL Position to....... Starting character(s) Type options, press Enter. 3=Copy 4=Delete 6=Print 7=Rename 8=Display description 9=Convert to file 13=Change text Opt Overlay Library Text STATIONE OVLLIB Sample Form number 3 Bottom Parameters or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F9=Retrieve F11=Display names only F12=Cancel\n\nThe Work with Overlays display shows a list of overlays in the libraries that you specified. If you specified an overlay name or generic name for the Overlay prompt, only those overlays that match the specified values are included in the list.\n\nThe following tables describe the Work with Overlays display.\n\n341" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.955619341011841, + "doc_id": "24404a05cd7cf91f48687502fff7864b48e2c1440bcd9c23a8322c0117dc46e6", + "edit_distance": 0.054187192118226604, + "f1_score": 0.9805825242718447, + "meteor": 0.9854549038935435, + "precision": 0.9805825242718447, + "pred_md": "You can define fixed data in the same way data is defined with the overlay utility.\n\nSee 'Chapter 13. Design Operation' on page 227 for more information about the design operation.\n\nWhen you complete designing the record layout, press the F3 key to exit from this display.\n\n## Numeric Editing\n\nThe Print Format Utility allows you to specify an edit code with which the numeric data from the database file should be printed. If any edit code is not specified, the Print Format Utility prints the numeric field data according to the editing information on the field definition, or the default format when the editing information does not exist.\n\nThe Print Format Utility allows you to specify an edit code for a field on the following elements in a record layout.\n\n- v Text data on a text element\n- v Text data on a box element\n\nWhen a field name is specified on the Text data prompt on the Define Text Detail display or on the Define Box Detail display, press the F10 key and the following display appears:\n\nChapter 10. Work with PFD Definitions\n\n167", + "recall": 0.9805825242718447, + "true_md": "You can define fixed data in the same way data is defined with the overlay utility.\n\nSee “Chapter 13. Design Operation” on page 227 for more information about the design operation.\n\nWhen you complete designing the record layout, press the F3 key to exit from this display.\n\nThe Print Format Utility allows you to specify an edit code with which the numeric data from the database file should be printed. If any edit code is not specified, the Print Format Utility prints the numeric field data according to the editing information on the field definition, or the default format when the editing information does not exist.\n\nThe Print Format Utility allows you to specify an edit code for a field on the following elements in a record layout.\n\n## Numeric Editing\n\n- v Text data on a text element\n\n- v Text data on a box element\n\nWhen a field name is specified on the Text data prompt on the Define Text Detail display or on the Define Box Detail display, press the F10 key and the following display appears:\n\nChapter 10. Work with PFD Definitions 167" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.3222846809862341, + "doc_id": "59a3c6f8d10bac84e678e847022de3cf1755e2fb870c948116312ef71b9b7de1", + "edit_distance": 0.5673758865248227, + "f1_score": 0.7322404371584699, + "meteor": 0.6032495538370017, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Example Actions:\n\n- 1. Type 1 in the Bar code type prompt.\n- 2. Type in the Bar code data prompt.\n- 3. Press the Enter key.\n\nNote: If you do not know the field name, do the following operations:\n\n- 1. Type 1 in the Bar code type prompt and press the F4 key.\n- 2. On the Define Bar Code Detail display, move the cursor to the Bar code data prompt and press the F4 key.\n- 3. On the Select Field in Record Format display, type a 1 in the Opt column beside the field you want to select.\n- 4. Press the Enter key. The Define Bar Code Detail display appears.\n- 5. Press the Enter key twice.\n- The Design Record Layout display appears.\n\nChapter 8. Getting Started with Print Format Utility\n\n121", + "recall": 0.5775862068965517, + "true_md": "Design Record Layout Columns: 1- 74 Control . . PFD definition.....PRODUCTLBL *...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7.... 001 002 003 *T001 t : *T003 004 005 *T002 : *T004 . 006 *S005 007 %C006 008 009 010 011 012 More... Define Bar Code Mark . . . . . . : *C006 Measurement method....:Row/Column Position.....Across 3 Down 7 Bar code type . . . 1 Bar code data . . F3=Exit F4=Detail F6=Change measurement method F12=Cancel F24=More keys\n\n## Example Actions:\n\nNote: If you do not know the field name, do the following operations:\n\n- 1. Type 1 in the Bar code type prompt.\n\n- 2. Type in the Bar code data prompt.\n\n- 3. Press the Enter key.\n\n- 1. Type 1 in the Bar code type prompt and press the F4 key.\n\n- 2. On the Define Bar Code Detail display, move the cursor to the Bar code data prompt and press the F4 key.\n\n- 3. On the Select Field in Record Format display, type a 1 in the Opt column beside the field you want to select.\n\n- 4. Press the Enter key.\n\n- 5. Press the Enter key twice.\n\nThe Define Bar Code Detail display appears.\n\nThe Design Record Layout display appears.\n\nChapter 8. Getting Started with Print Format Utility 121" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8639722680305478, + "doc_id": "c9f0651980fa0744b88172416a3e8457fd1bfc8aa32670ece7df955f286c8d41", + "edit_distance": 0.7163636363636363, + "f1_score": 0.9665427509293681, + "meteor": 0.9008088506740836, + "precision": 0.9701492537313433, + "pred_md": "## Step 1 - Starting the Print Format Utility\n\nExample Actions: To start AFP Utilities for iSeries, type STRAFPU (Start Advanced Function Printing Utilities) on the command line and press Enter.\n\nThe IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries menu appears:\n\n```\nAFPU IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries Select one of the following: Overlay Utility 1. Work with source overlays 2. Work with source overlay files Print Format Utility 11. Work with PFD definitions 12. Work with PFD definition files 13. Print database file member 14. Print AFP Utilities tutorial Resource Management Utility 21. Convert to page segment 22. Work with overlays 23. Work with page segments Selection or command ===> 12 F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel F16=System main menu (C) COPYRIGHT IBM CORP. 1991, 1993.\n```\n\nFrom this display, you can select any function of AFP Utilities.\n\nThe Print Format Utility functions are:\n\nSelection\n\nFunction\n\n11\n\nWork with PFD definitions\n\n12\n\nWork with PFD definition files\n\n13\n\nPrint database file member\n\n14\n\nPrint AFP Utilities tutorial\n\nBefore you create a PFD definition, you must create a PFD definition file to store it.\n\nNote: You need a library to store a PFD definition file. MYLIB is used in the following example, but you may use the name of your library instead. If you do not have any libraries, create a library by typing CRTLIB MYLIB and pressing the Enter key.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide\n\n106", + "recall": 0.9629629629629629, + "true_md": "## Step 1 - Starting the Print Format Utility\n\nExample Actions: To start AFP Utilities for iSeries, type STRAFPU (Start Advanced Function Printing Utilities) on the command line and press Enter.\n\nThe IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries menu appears:\n\nFrom this display, you can select any function of AFP Utilities.\n\nThe Print Format Utility functions are:\n\nBefore you create a PFD definition, you must create a PFD definition file to store it.\n\n- Note: You need a library to store a PFD definition file. MYLIB is used in the following example, but you may use the name of your library instead. If you do not have any libraries, create a library by typing CRTLIB MYLIB and pressing the Enter key.\n\nAFPU IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries Select one of the following: Overlay Utility 1. Work with source overlays 2. Work with source overlay files Print Format Utility 11. Work with PFD definitions 12. Work with PFD definition files 13. Print database file member 14. Print AFP Utilities tutorial Resource Management Utility 21. Convert to page segment 22. Work with overlays 23. Work with page segments Selection or command ===> 12 F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel F16=System main menu (C) COPYRIGHT IBM CORP. 1991, 1993.\n\n106 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.10188441888738728, + "doc_id": "b4f8fbb6416e88176c99b73601feee93afb71973c194a02ded173ecc8617140c", + "edit_distance": 0.7515923566878981, + "f1_score": 0.5443037974683543, + "meteor": 0.37987472216609414, + "precision": 0.7962962962962963, + "pred_md": "## EXCEL TRAINING MANUAL\n\nReport Filter: or Pivot Chart Report. A report filter helps to manage the display of large amounts of data, and to focus on a subset of data in the report, such as a product line, a time span, a Geographic region Use a report filter to conveniently display a subset of data in a PivotTable report\n\nColumn Labels: A field that is assigned a column orientation in a PivotTable report.\n\nRow Labels: A field that is assigned a row orientation in a PivotTable report.\n\nPage\n\n20 /g3", + "recall": 0.41346153846153844, + "true_md": "EXCE L L TRAIN N ING MA A NUAL\n\nReport F or Pivot to focus region Filter: Use a Chart Repor on a subset a report filter rt. A report f t of data in t r to conveni filter helps t the report, iently displa to manage th such as a p ay a subset o he display o product line of data in a P of large amou e, a time spa PivotTable re unts of data an, a Geogra eport a, and aphic \n\nColumn Labels: A fi ield that is as ssigned a co olumn orient tation in a Pi ivotTable re port. \n\nRow Lab bels: A field d that is assig gned a row o orientation i n a PivotTab ble report. \n\nReport Fi ilter \n\nColumn Labels \n\nRow Lab bels \n\n∑ Values s \n\nPage 20 GLYPH<g3>" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "3411c1ffdf5fb8c589074b7336496b0f953af432dc5c451f2ae5bb95fa2deea2", + "edit_distance": 0.9989572471324296, + "f1_score": 0.049180327868852465, + "meteor": 0.00871905682550514, + "precision": 0.02586206896551724, + "pred_md": "| Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|-----|-----------------------------------------|-------|---------|---------|-------------|-----------|-----------------------|-----|-------------------|-------|---------|---------|-------|---------|---------|-----------|---------|-----------|---------|-------|---------------|---------|---------|-----|-------|-------|-----|-------------|---------|-----|-----|----|---------|----|----|-----|-----|---------|-------------|\n| Resource Management Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| 397 Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 Sending Source Overlays and PFD Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| Chapter 23. Problem Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | . | . | | | . | . | . |\n| How to Use This Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | . | | | | | | | | | | | | | . | | | | | |\n| Identifying Problems . . . . . . . | | | | . . | | . . . | | . | . | . | . | . . | . | | . | . . | . | . . | . . . | . | . . . | 399 399 | | | . | | | | | | . | . | | | . | | | | | |\n| 0100: Problem Analysis Procedures | | | . | . . | | . . | . | | . . | . . | . | . . | . | . | . | . . | . | . . | . . | | . | . 399 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | . | |\n| Common Symptoms and Possible Causes . | | | | . | | . . | . | | . | | . | . . | . | . . . | . . | . . . | . . | . . | . . | . . | . | 403 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| | | . | | . . | | . | . | | . . | . | . | . | . | | . . | . . | . | . | . | . | . | 406 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| Sense Codes and Possible Causes. . | | Contacting Your Service Representative. | | . . | . | . . | . | . | . | . | . | . . | . | . | . . | . | . . | . | . | . | . . | | | | | | | | | | | | | | . | | . | | . | |\n| Element Type and Position . . . | . | . . | | . . . | . . | . . | . . | . | . . | . . | . | . . . | . . . . | . . | . | . | . . | . . | . . . | . | . . | . | . | . | . | | | . . | 407 . | 408 408 | | . | | | | | | | . . . | |\n| Text Element and Position . Line Element and Position . | . . | . . . | | . . . | . | . . | | . | . | . | . . | . | . . | . . | . . | . . | . . | | . . | . | . . . | . | . | . | | . | | . | . . | 409 | | | | | | | | | . | |\n| Box Element and Position . . Bar Code Element and Position | . . | | . . | . . . . | . . . . | . | . | . . | | . . | . . | . | | | | . . | . . | . | . | . | | . . . | . | . | . | . . | . . | . | . | . | . . | . | . | 411 413 | | | | | . . | |\n| Page Segment Element and Position . | | | | . . . . | . . | . . . . | | . . | . . | | . . | . . | . | | . | . | . . | . | | | . | | . | . | . . | . | . | . . | . | | | . . | . | . . | | . | . . | . . | . . . | . 414 . 414 |\n| Record Layout Element and Position Graphics Element and Position | | . | . | . . | . | . . | | . | . | | . | . . | | . | . | | . | . | . | . . | | . . | | . . | | | . | | . | | | | | . | | | . | | . | 415 |\n| Appendix A. Printer Characteristics . . | | . | . . | . . | . | . . | . . | . . | . . | | . | . . . . | . . | . . . | . . | . . . | . . | . | . . . . . | . | | . . | | | . . | | . | . . | . . 417 | | | | | | | | . | | . . | |\n| Supported Printers . Printable Area . . . . . Printer Storage Limitations . | . . | . . | . . | . . | . . | . . | | . . | . . | | . . | . . | . . . | . . | . | . | . | . | | . . | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | . | |\n| | | . | . | . . | | | . . | | | | . | . . . . | . . | | . | | | | | | | | . . | | | | | . . | . . | 417 417 | | | | | | | | | . | |\n| Appendix B. Rotation, Format, and Shading Pattern in Box | . . | | | . | | | | | | | | | . | | . | . | . . | . | | | | | . . . . | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| Format, Text Placement and Rotation . . . . | | | . . | | . . | | | | | | | . | . | . . . | . . | . . . . | . . . . . | . | . . . . | . . . . | . . | . . . | | | . | . . . | . . . | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| Format . . . . . | . | . . . | | . . | . | . | . | | . | | . | . . | . | . | | . | . | | . . | . | . . | | . | 419 419 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| Text Placement . Degree of Rotation . . | . | . | . | . . . | . | . . | . . | . | . . | . | . . | . | . | . . | . | | | | . | . | . | | | | | | . | . | . . | 419 420 | | | | | | | . | | | |\n| Shading Pattern in Box . . . | . | . . . . | . . | . . . | . . | . . | . | | | . . | . . . | . . . . | . | . . | . . . . | | | . . . . | . . | | . . | | 435 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | . | | | |\n| Appendix C. Rotation of Graphics | | | | | . . | . | . | . . | . | . | . | . | . . . | | . . | . . . . | | | . . . | . . . | . . . | | . | . | . . | . | | . . | . . | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| Appendix D. Using GDFs in AFP Utilities | | | | | | | . | | | | | . | . | | | . | . | . | . | . | . | . . . . . . . | . . . | | | | | | | | | | | . | | | | | | |\n| Appendix E. How to Do a Task How to Use This Chapter . . | . | | . | . . | . . | . | . | | | | . | . | | . | | | | | . | | . . | . | . . . | | . . | . . | . . | . . | . | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| | | . | | . | . . | | . . | . . | . . | . | . | . . | . . | . | . . | . . . | | . | . . . | . . . | | . . | . | . | . | | . | . . | 443 443 444 | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| Tasks Related to Source Overlays. Tasks Related to Source Overlay Files | | . . | . | . . | . . . | . | . | . . | | | | | . . | . | . | | . | | | | . . . | . . | . | | | | . | | | | . | | | | | | | | | |\n| | | . | . | | | . | | . . | | . | | . . . | | | | | . | . | . . | . . . . | | . | | . | | . | | | | . | | | . | | | . | . | | . . . . | |\n| Tasks Related to PFD Definitions . Tasks Related to PFD Definition Files Tasks Related to Overlay Objects . | | . | . . . | . . . | . . . | . . . . . . | . . . . . | . . . . . . . . . . . | | . . . . . . . . . | . . | . . | . . | . | | . | . | | . | | . | | | | . . | | | | | | | . | | . . | | | . . | | . . . . | 444 445 446 |\n\nviii\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n399\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n417\n\n.\n\n419\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n437\n\n.\n\n.\n\n439\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n443", + "recall": 0.5, + "true_md": "viii AFPUtilitiesforiSeries:User’sGuide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.031383157749464555, + "doc_id": "6838adc4a9874f75d5c146980f6f30324da0bc0e8ac36de878b318d6a00f0ea4", + "edit_distance": 0.6932668329177057, + "f1_score": 0.6343283582089553, + "meteor": 0.26568676659528906, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Start Printing by PRTPFDDTA\n\nTo start printing with command PRTPFDDTA (print a database file member) from the iSeries main menu or Command Entry screen, type PRTPFDDTA at the command line on the display and press the F4 key. This command allows you to print using a PFD with a batch job or submit the print job from a CL program.\n\n## The following command prompt appears:\n\nSee page 215 through 221 for more information.\n\nWhen printing completes, the screen returns to the previous display with either a completion message or an error message displayed in the 24th line of the display depending on what happened during printing.\n\nChapter 12. Print Database File Member\n\n223", + "recall": 0.4644808743169399, + "true_md": "## Start Printing by PRTPFDDTA\n\nTo start printing with command PRTPFDDTA (print a database file member) from the iSeries main menu or Command Entry screen, type PRTPFDDTA at the command line on the display and press the F4 key. This command allows you to print using a PFD with a batch job or submit the print job from a CL program.\n\nThe following command prompt appears:\n\nSee page 215 through 221 for more information.\n\nWhen printing completes, the screen returns to the previous display with either a completion message or an error message displayed in the 24th line of the display depending on what happened during printing.\n\nChapter 12. Print Database File Member 223\n\nMAIN iSeries Main Menu System: SYSTNAME Select one of the following: 1. User tasks 2. Office tasks 3. General system tasks 4. Files, libraries, and folders 5. Programming 6. Communications 7. Define or change the system 8. Problem handling 9. Display a menu 10. Information Assistant options 11. iSeries Access tasks 90. Sign off Selection or command ===> PRTPFDDTA F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel F13=Information Assistant F23=Set initial menu\n\nPrint PFD Data (PRTPFDDTA) Type choices, press Enter. PFD file ............ NAME Library . . ......... *LIBL NAME, *LIBL, *CURLIB PFD definition . . . . . .... *FIRST NAME, *FIRST Database file ......... *PFD NAME, *PFD Library . . ......... NAME, *LIBL, *CURLIB Member . ............ *FIRST NAME, *FIRST Include grid.......... *NO *YES, *NO Record selection . . . ..... *YES Ending page .......... *END 1-9999, *END Source drawer ......... *PFD 1-255, *PFD, *E1 Output bin........... *DEVD 1-65535, *DEVD Copies . ............ *PFD 1-255, *PFD Output queue.......... *JOB NAME, *JOB Library . . ......... NAME, *LIBL, *CURLIB Form definition . . . ..... *PFD NAME, *PFD, *DEVD, *INLINE Library . . ......... NAME, *LIBL, *CURLIB Bottom F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel F13=How to use this display F24=More keys" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.933607993789093, + "doc_id": "35a0c3d8f0d6fddd9a660bc70ca87086ff7672f6b4e8795472bb4c3927597319", + "edit_distance": 0.6717791411042945, + "f1_score": 0.9688581314878894, + "meteor": 0.914800261640807, + "precision": 0.9655172413793104, + "pred_md": "## Menu Display\n\nWhen you start AFP Utilities for iSeries by entering the STRAFPU command, the menu for IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries is shown. You can start any function of AFP Utilities for iSeries from this menu.\n\nFigure 9. Menu for the IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries\n\n```\nAFPU IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries Select one of the following: Overlay Utility 1. Work with source overlays 2. Work with source overlay files Print Format Utility 11. Work with PFD definitions 12. Work with PFD definition files 13. Print database file member 14. Print AFP Utilities tutorial Resource Management Utility 21. Convert to page segment 22. Work with overlays 23. Work with page segments Selection or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel F16=System main menu (C) COPYRIGHT IBM CORP. 1991, 1996.\n```\n\n## Work with Display\n\nTo indicate fields on the Work with display, two different words are used in this manual. They are prompts and columns .\n\nPrompts: A prompt is a request for information on a display that allows you to type a response. For example, the File, Library, Source overlay , and Position to fields are prompts on the Work with Source Overlays display.\n\nWhen F4 for list is shown to the right of the prompt, you can show a list by placing the cursor in the field and pressing the F4 key.\n\nColumns: A column is either a request for information or lines of information that define certain fields in a list. For example, the Opt, Source Overlay, Text , and Changed fields are columns on the Work with Source Overlays display.\n\nChapter 1. What are the IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries?\n\n15", + "recall": 0.9722222222222222, + "true_md": "## Menu Display\n\nMenu Display When you start AFP Utilities for iSeries by entering the STRAFPU command, the menu for IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries is shown. You can start any function of AFP Utilities for iSeries from this menu.\n\nFigure9.MenufortheIBMAdvancedFunctionPrintingUtilitiesforiSeries\n\n## Work with Display\n\nTo indicate fields on the Work with display, two different words are used in this manual. They are prompts and columns .\n\nPrompts: A prompt is a request for information on a display that allows you to type a response. For example, the File, Library, Source overlay , and Position to fields are prompts on the Work with Source Overlays display.\n\nWhen F4 for list is shown to the right of the prompt, you can show a list by placing the cursor in the field and pressing the F4 key.\n\nColumns: A column is either a request for information or lines of information that define certain fields in a list. For example, the Opt, Source Overlay, Text , and Changed fields are columns on the Work with Source Overlays display.\n\nAFPU IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries Select one of the following: Overlay Utility 1. Work with source overlays 2. Work with source overlay files Print Format Utility 11. Work with PFD definitions 12. Work with PFD definition files 13. Print database file member 14. Print AFP Utilities tutorial Resource Management Utility 21. Convert to page segment 22. Work with overlays 23. Work with page segments Selection or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel F16=System main menu (C) COPYRIGHT IBM CORP. 1991, 1996.\n\nChapter 1. What are the IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries? 15" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.402664515317738, + "doc_id": "d2467fa09318e15718729814c64ceea8a5283e7114968a978ce61d3b61ba103e", + "edit_distance": 0.46332046332046334, + "f1_score": 0.7298578199052133, + "meteor": 0.5400073271931016, + "precision": 0.9058823529411765, + "pred_md": "## Step 3 - Creating a PFD Definition\n\nTo print data from a database file, you must create a PFD definition from the Work with PFD Definitions display. The AFP Utilities for iSeries print the data according to your PFD definition.\n\nFor example, the following describes how to create a PFD definition in PFD file 'PFDFILE' located in library 'MYLIB' to print the label below from the database file 'QAFCPFDDTA' in library QGPL.\n\nFigure 18. Sample Label\n\nFigure 18. Sample Label\n\n## Example Actions:\n\n- 1. Type 1 (Create) in the Opt column in the first line of the list.\n- 2. Type the PFD definition name PRODUCTLBL in the PFD Definition column in the first line of the list.\n- 3. Press the Enter key.\n\nThe Create PFD Definition display allows you to select the action items for creating a PFD definition.\n\nChapter 8. Getting Started with Print Format Utility\n\n109", + "recall": 0.6111111111111112, + "true_md": "## Step 3 - Creating a PFD Definition\n\n## Example Actions:\n\nTo print data from a database file, you must create a PFD definition from the Work with PFD Definitions display. The AFP Utilities for iSeries print the data according to your PFD definition.\n\nFor example, the following describes how to create a PFD definition in PFD file ’PFDFILE’ located in library ’MYLIB’ to print the label below from the database file ’QAFCPFDDTA’ in library QGPL.\n\n- 1. Type 1 (Create) in the Opt column in the first line of the list.\n\n- 2. Type the PFD definition name PRODUCTLBL in the PFD Definition column in the first line of the list.\n\n- 3. Press the Enter key.\n\nThe Create PFD Definition display allows you to select the action items for creating a PFD definition.\n\nChapter 8. Getting Started with Print Format Utility 109\n\nFigure18.SampleLabel\n\n## Work with PFD Definitions\n\nFile . . ........ PFDFILE Name, F4 for list Library........ MYLIB Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB PFD definition ..... *ALL Name, generic*, *ALL Position to....... Starting characters Type options, press Enter. 1=Create 2=Change 3=Copy 4=Delete 6=Print PFD definition 7=Rename 9=Print database file PFD Opt Definition Text Changed 1 PRODUCTLBL (No PFD definitions in file) Bottom Parameters or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F9=Retrieve F11=Display names only F12=Cancel" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7848736597970806, + "doc_id": "bb2944e6d9ada0514e5c704b977df8e4243cd95f1770b3db2af5e66f3dae8001", + "edit_distance": 0.40229885057471265, + "f1_score": 0.9256198347107438, + "meteor": 0.9017696596060791, + "precision": 0.9032258064516129, + "pred_md": "360\n\nTable 80. Convert Page Segment to Files display fields (continued)\n\n## 13=Change Page Segment Text\n\nTo change a page segment description text, do the following on the Work with Page Segments display on page 351.\n\n- 1. Type 13 in the Opt column beside the page segment for which you want to change the description text.\n- 2. Press Enter.\n\nThe CL command CHGOBJD will be called.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.9491525423728814, + "true_md": "Table80.ConvertPageSegmenttoFilesdisplayfields (continued)\n\nTo change a page segment description text, do the following on the Work with Page Segments display on page 351.\n\nThe CL command CHGOBJD will be called.\n\n- 1. Type 13 in the Opt column beside the page segment for which you want to change the description text.\n\n- 2. Press Enter.\n\n## 13=Change Page Segment Text\n\n360 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.13576659291907378, + "doc_id": "9a4e92ab15f357d0c3965f5ec96a873e70db6ce8bc53359b43492248a1202ca3", + "edit_distance": 0.8395061728395061, + "f1_score": 0.5922330097087379, + "meteor": 0.4755239576581524, + "precision": 0.7530864197530864, + "pred_md": "## EXCEL TRAINING MANUAL\n\n## 7. PIVOT TABLE\n\nPivot Table is one of the most powerful features in Excel. This presentation describes Pivot Tables and Few Features of Pivot Table\n\nA pivot table is a great reporting tool that sorts and sums independent of the original data layout in the spreadsheet. If you never used one, these below example will most interesting for you.\n\n## 7.1 HOW TO APPLY\n\nAs given in example I have created data of 3 Workers x,y,z and their, weekly payments in Various Segments. Selected a Range of (A1:D50)\n\nPage 18 /g3", + "recall": 0.488, + "true_md": "EXCE L L TRAIN N ING MA A NUAL\n\n## 7. PIV OT TA BLE\n\n## 7.1 HO OW TO AP PPLY\n\nPage 18 GLYPH<g3>\n\nPivot Ta Tables an ble is one o nd Few Feat of the most ures of Pivo powerful fe ot Table eatures in E Excel. This p presentation n describes P Pivot \n\nA pivot layout in you. table is a g n the spreads great reporti sheet. If you ing tool that u never used t sorts and d one, these sums indep below exam pendent of t mple will mo the original ost interestin data ng for \n\nAs g Vari given in exam ious Segmen mple I have nts. Selected e created dat d a Range of ta of 3 Work (A1:D50) kers x,y,z an nd their, wee ekly paymen nts in" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8684757818200949, + "doc_id": "dec974701437d8ecfe8fd1045b2e4c5ac2c5e723f566cd1cc873c5baf5bb8d51", + "edit_distance": 0.42578125, + "f1_score": 0.9465020576131689, + "meteor": 0.8920531783324187, + "precision": 0.9583333333333334, + "pred_md": "316\n\nSelection\n\nFunction\n\n23\n\nWork with Page Segments\n\n## Converting a PC Document to a Page Segment\n\nNote:\n\nTo perform the following task, you need a PC document, in a folder, that contains IMDS format or IOCA function set 10 image data. To create a PC document, do the following:\n\n- 1. If necessary, ask the system administrator to add a directory entry (ADDDIRE) for your user ID.\n- 2. Create a folder using the Create Folder (CRTFLR) command.\n- 3. On a personal computer that is connected to the server and has iSeries Access shared folder function running on it, create an IMDS format or an IOCA function set 10 image data file with an image handling program.\n- 4. On the personal computer, copy the file to a document in a shared folder.\n\nIn the following examples, the following names are used:\n\nIOCAFLR for the folder name\n\nLOGO for the PC document name\n\nMYLIB for the library name\n\nLOGO for the page segment name\n\nYou may change these names to your own names.\n\n## Example Actions:\n\n- 1. Type 21 on the Selection or command line in the display.\n- 2. Press the Enter key.\n\n## The Convert to Page Segment display appears:\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.9349593495934959, + "true_md": "- Note: To perform the following task, you need a PC document, in a folder, that contains IMDS format or IOCA function set 10 image data. To create a PC document, do the following:\n\n- 1. If necessary, ask the system administrator to add a directory entry (ADDDIRE) for your user ID.\n\n- 2. Create a folder using the Create Folder (CRTFLR) command.\n\n- 3. On a personal computer that is connected to the server and has iSeries Access shared folder function running on it, create an IMDS format or an IOCA function set 10 image data file with an image handling program.\n\n- 4. On the personal computer, copy the file to a document in a shared folder.\n\n- 1. Type 21 on the Selection or command line in the display.\n\n- 2. Press the Enter key.\n\nF3=Exit F5=Refresh F12=Cancel\n\nBottom\n\n## Convert to Page Segment\n\nType choices, press Enter.\n\n## Example Actions:\n\nThe Convert to Page Segment display appears:\n\nYou may change these names to your own names.\n\nIn the following examples, the following names are used:\n\nIOCAFLR for the folder name\n\nLOGO for the PC document name\n\nMYLIB for the library name\n\nLOGO for the page segment name\n\n## Converting a PC Document to a Page Segment\n\n316 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7071067811865475, + "doc_id": "985e3ee4f848739671cbfcc9cc90bbf56b7089e49ff7ee30ee25b752287ce2e7", + "edit_distance": 0.2, + "f1_score": 0.8421052631578947, + "meteor": 0.8017676767676769, + "precision": 0.8888888888888888, + "pred_md": "202\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.8, + "true_md": "202 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8467010641746112, + "doc_id": "3ac3bd030fe5d4a0c1f7a4f475f9accd2ab77cf9e6f0e74faac78efe6ad7ee57", + "edit_distance": 0.4591549295774648, + "f1_score": 0.9775280898876403, + "meteor": 0.8931873365447016, + "precision": 0.9886363636363636, + "pred_md": "380\n\n*PRV\n\nSpecifies that the name of the page segment and library used when you performed this command last is used. If you specify *PRV for the PAGSEG parameter, it is not necessary to specify a library.\n\npage-segment-name\n\nSpecify the page segment name to be created.\n\nThe possible library values are:\n\n## *CURLIB\n\nThe current library for the job is used to create the page segment. If no library is specified as the current library for the job, library QGPL is used.\n\nlibrary-name\n\nSpecify the library in which the page segment will be created.\n\n## From file (FILE)\n\nSpecifies the qualified name of the physical file that contains the member to be converted.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\n*PRV Specifies the file and library used when you previously created a page segment of the same name.\n\nfile-name\n\nSpecify the name of an existing physical database file to be used. If you do not specify a library name, *LIBL is used.\n\nThe possible library values are:\n\n*LIBL\n\nThe library list is used to locate the file.\n\n## *CURLIB\n\nThe current library for the job is used to locate the file. If no library is specified as the current library for the job, library QGPL is used.\n\nlibrary-name\n\nSpecify the library where the file is located.\n\nFrom member (MBR)\n\nSpecifies the name of the physical file member to be converted.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\n*PRV\n\nSpecifies the member name used when you previously created a page segment of the same name.\n\n*PAGSEG\n\nSpecifies that the name of the page segment to be created is the same as the name of the member.\n\nmember-name\n\nSpecify the member name that is to be converted.\n\nChange image size (CHGIMGSIZE)\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.9666666666666667, + "true_md": "- *PRV Specifies that the name of the page segment and library used when you performed this command last is used. If you specify *PRV for the PAGSEG parameter, it is not necessary to specify a library.\n\n## page-segment-name\n\n## *CURLIB\n\n## library-name\n\n## From file (FILE)\n\n## file-name\n\n## *CURLIB\n\n## library-name\n\n## From member (MBR)\n\n## *PAGSEG\n\n## Change image size (CHGIMGSIZE)\n\n## member-name\n\nSpecify the page segment name to be created. The possible library values are:\n\nThe current library for the job is used to create the page segment. If no library is specified as the current library for the job, library QGPL is used.\n\nSpecify the library in which the page segment will be created.\n\nSpecifies the qualified name of the physical file that contains the member to be converted.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\nSpecify the name of an existing physical database file to be used. If you do not specify a library name, *LIBL is used.\n\nThe possible library values are:\n\n*LIBL The library list is used to locate the file.\n\nThe current library for the job is used to locate the file. If no library is specified as the current library for the job, library QGPL is used.\n\nSpecify the library where the file is located.\n\nSpecifies the name of the physical file member to be converted. The possible values are:\n\nSpecifies that the name of the page segment to be created is the same as the name of the member.\n\nSpecify the member name that is to be converted.\n\n380 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\n- *PRV Specifies the member name used when you previously created a page segment of the same name.\n\n- *PRV Specifies the file and library used when you previously created a page segment of the same name." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8544856461216721, + "doc_id": "fbb55d3e3a67bfcc6c1dcdd22294aa938e0eb23cd181f283e0caf8060fc3a9f6", + "edit_distance": 0.17142857142857143, + "f1_score": 0.9322033898305084, + "meteor": 0.9333654669626456, + "precision": 0.9482758620689655, + "pred_md": "Table 47. Print Database File Member display fields (continued)\n\nYou can choose a database file and a member from the list. For example, move the cursor to the member prompt and press F4. The Select Database File Member display appears:\n\nThe database file members that are contained in the database file you specified on the previous display are listed. You can page up the list of database file members by specifying the starting characters of the name of the database file member in the Position to prompt.\n\nChapter 12. Print Database File Member\n\n219", + "recall": 0.9166666666666666, + "true_md": "Table47.PrintDatabaseFileMemberdisplayfields (continued)\n\nYou can choose a database file and a member from the list. For example, move the cursor to the member prompt and press F4. The Select Database File Member display appears:\n\n## Select Database File Member\n\nBottom\n\nF5=Refresh F12=Cancel\n\nThe database file members that are contained in the database file you specified on the previous display are listed. You can page up the list of database file members by specifying the starting characters of the name of the database file member in the Position to prompt.\n\nChapter 12. Print Database File Member 219" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.851372351345615, + "doc_id": "b8c7392c200bd9e627116ba39e870a31d360c465896b3b03e34e5edc94d421fb", + "edit_distance": 0.42382271468144045, + "f1_score": 0.9333333333333333, + "meteor": 0.9106562423544245, + "precision": 0.9236111111111112, + "pred_md": "98\n\n- v Offset\n- v Grid (design aid) position\n\nIf nothing is specified, the default values are used.\n\n## PFD Definition Fonts\n\nFonts are predefined, but you can change PFD definition fonts if you want.\n\n## Database File\n\nYou can specify which fields of data in the database file are printed.\n\nYou can specify the name of the database file, library, and record format. If you do not specify them in a PFD definition, you need to specify them when you print a database file member. You can also specify fields in the database file to cause a page break.\n\n## Record Layout\n\nThe Print Format Utility manages two kinds of records which are distinguished depending on their definitions as follows:\n\n- v The record defined in the database file. It is referred to as a \" database file record. \"\n- v The record defined by Print Format Utility as a unit or set of data to be printed. It is simply referred to as a \" record. \" A record consists of data from a database file record and other data such as text, lines, boxes, and bar codes you define for the record.\n\nYou must define how you lay out the data, which are called elements , in a record as a record layout .\n\nFor example, you can print the following label from a record in a database file member using Print Format Utility.\n\nFigure 15. Record Layout Sample\n\nFigure 15. Record Layout Sample\n\nOn the above label, the product name 'Color TV', the price '980', and the bar code which is coded from the price are picked up from the fields in the database file record. Other data in the label such as 'Product :', 'Price :', lines, and logos are defined in this record for the label independently of the data in the database file record.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.9432624113475178, + "true_md": "- v Offset\n\n- v Grid (design aid) position\n\nIf nothing is specified, the default values are used.\n\nFonts are predefined, but you can change PFD definition fonts if you want.\n\nYou can specify which fields of data in the database file are printed.\n\nYou can specify the name of the database file, library, and record format. If you do not specify them in a PFD definition, you need to specify them when you print a database file member. You can also specify fields in the database file to cause a page break.\n\nThe Print Format Utility manages two kinds of records which are distinguished depending on their definitions as follows:\n\nYou must define how you lay out the data, which are called elements , in a record as a record layout .\n\nFor example, you can print the following label from a record in a database file member using Print Format Utility.\n\n- v The record defined in the database file. It is referred to as a † database file record. †\n\n- v The record defined by Print Format Utility as a unit or set of data to be printed. It is simply referred to as a † record. † A record consists of data from a database file record and other data such as text, lines, boxes, and bar codes you define for the record.\n\nOn the above label, the product name ’Color TV’, the price ’980’, and the bar code which is coded from the price are picked up from the fields in the database file record. Other data in the label such as ’Product :’, ’Price :’, lines, and logos are defined in this record for the label independently of the data in the database file record.\n\nFigure15.RecordLayoutSample\n\n## Record Layout\n\n## Database File\n\n## PFD Definition Fonts\n\n98 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.944595020903216, + "doc_id": "9ea169ab20de7e4e04d64b29c3c5547ba5bea00dfb87bd274a370ff2c5cce35c", + "edit_distance": 0.1358695652173913, + "f1_score": 0.9636963696369638, + "meteor": 0.9807064090164538, + "precision": 0.954248366013072, + "pred_md": "208\n\nTable 43. Work with PFD Definition Files columns (continued)\n\n## Showing a PFD Definition File List\n\nThe PFD definition files can be listed on the lower part of the display by specifying the Library field and File field. When you want to change the content of the list, specify the name of the file and library. You can page up or down the list on the display by specifying the starting characters in the Position to prompt.\n\nNote:\n\nWhen you specify any of the PFD Definition file field and Library field, you can not specify the Opt column.\n\n## Selecting a PFD Definition File from a List\n\nThe list on the display contains the names of all or a specified subset of PFD definition files that exist in the library (or libraries) indicated by the Library field. (However, only the PFD definition files and libraries for which you have the necessary authority are shown.) The text that describes the PFD definition files and the date the file was last changed are also shown in the list.\n\nWhen a list is shown, a one-word indicator always appears below and to the right of the list to indicate the position in the list. More... means that there are more items after the item currently shown. Bottom means that the end of the list has been reached.\n\nUse the Page or Roll keys to move forward or backward through the list.\n\nIf you are creating a PFD definition file, you can check this list to see what names are already used before you choose a new name. You can create a PFD definition file by typing 1, a PFD definition file name, and a library name in the first list position, and you can select other PFD definition files from the list using any of the options except 1 (Create).\n\nTherefore, you can select one or more names by doing one or both of the following:\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.9733333333333334, + "true_md": "Table43.WorkwithPFDDefinitionFilescolumns (continued)\n\nThe PFD definition files can be listed on the lower part of the display by specifying the Library field and File field. When you want to change the content of the list, specify the name of the file and library. You can page up or down the list on the display by specifying the starting characters in the Position to prompt.\n\n- Note: When you specify any of the PFD Definition file field and Library field, you can not specify the Opt column.\n\nThe list on the display contains the names of all or a specified subset of PFD definition files that exist in the library (or libraries) indicated by the Library field. (However, only the PFD definition files and libraries for which you have the necessary authority are shown.) The text that describes the PFD definition files and the date the file was last changed are also shown in the list.\n\nWhen a list is shown, a one-word indicator always appears below and to the right of the list to indicate the position in the list. More... means that there are more items after the item currently shown. Bottom means that the end of the list has been reached.\n\nUse the Page or Roll keys to move forward or backward through the list.\n\nIf you are creating a PFD definition file, you can check this list to see what names are already used before you choose a new name. You can create a PFD definition file by typing 1, a PFD definition file name, and a library name in the first list position, and you can select other PFD definition files from the list using any of the options except 1 (Create).\n\nTherefore, you can select one or more names by doing one or both of the following:\n\n208 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\n## Selecting a PFD Definition File from a List\n\n## Showing a PFD Definition File List" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "31b99b07090fdbd611a8a8843f9ceb5a068a6650762b4c122b7d1dd3c253b376", + "edit_distance": 0.9968454258675079, + "f1_score": 0.08108108108108109, + "meteor": 0.025428413488114983, + "precision": 0.04411764705882353, + "pred_md": "| Placing a Graphics Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Viewing the Overlay with the AFP Workbench Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 | | | | | | | | |\n|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|---------|---------|-----|-----|-----|-------------|-----|---------|\n| Step 4 - Changing a Source Overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 | | | | | | | | |\n| Saving the Source Overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 | | | | | | | | |\n| Placing a Page Segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . | . | . . | . | . | . | . . . . | 49 | |\n| . Creating an Overlay from a Source Overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Step 5 - Using an Overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . | | | . . | | . . | . . . . | . | . 54 56 |\n| | | | | | | . . | | |\n| Overriding a Printer File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . | | | | | | | | |\n| . . . . 56 Using the Printer File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Printing Overlays with AFP Utilities for iSeries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 | | | | | | | | |\n| Chapter 4. Starting and Ending the Overlay Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . | | | | | | | | |\n| Starting the Overlay Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 | | | | | | | | |\n| Chapter 5. Work with Source Overlays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prompts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 | | | | | | | | |\n| Showing a Source Overlay List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting a Source Overlay from a List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . | . . . . | . . . . | . . | . . | . . | . . . . . . | . . | 64 64 |\n\niv\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide\n\n.\n\n.\n\n59\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n61\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n95\n\n.\n\n.\n\n83\n\n.\n\n.\n\n97", + "recall": 0.5, + "true_md": "iv AFPUtilitiesforiSeries:User’sGuide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.025653589360437393, + "doc_id": "978de51926b0a60b65fd9498876983d4157990c56329591c242ff45d34c47b29", + "edit_distance": 0.746031746031746, + "f1_score": 0.6, + "meteor": 0.35786202869536204, + "precision": 0.868421052631579, + "pred_md": "174\n\nTable 32. Place Record Layout display fields (continued)\n\nType all choices and press the Enter key.\n\nFor example, specify the following data and press the Enter key.\n\nThe following figure shows the above choices:\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.4583333333333333, + "true_md": "Table32.PlaceRecordLayoutdisplayfields (continued)\n\nType all choices and press the Enter key.\n\nFor example, specify the following data and press the Enter key.\n\n## Place Record Layout Detail\n\nMark: *R001 Measurement method: Row/Column Type choices, press the Enter key. Position: Across ........... 10 1-999 Down . . .......... 4 Element . .......... Name Direction . . . . . . . . . . 1 1=Across, 2=Down Repetition: Across ........... 3 1-99 Down . . .......... 2 Distance: Across ........... 25 1-999 Down . . .......... 8 Bottom F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F6=Change measurement method F12=Cancel\n\nThe following figure shows the above choices:\n\n174 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6279461287720718, + "doc_id": "5167b9f892b6134ab5c34951e2933be1c498c521daa314cac8485032ef866ee2", + "edit_distance": 0.7016129032258065, + "f1_score": 0.9592760180995477, + "meteor": 0.6612825186412594, + "precision": 0.9724770642201835, + "pred_md": "Basic English Language Skils\n\n## TIPS FOR FILLING IN YOUR COLLEGE REGISTRATION FORM\n\nApplying for college (www.oxbridgeacademy.co.za/enrol-now/) can be a daunting experience. Not only do you need to choose a course, but you also need to make sure that you:\n\n- · meet the entry requirements\n- · meet the deadlines\n- · fill in the forms correctly\n- · send the forms to the right address\n- · include all the necessary attachments\n\nTo make the college registration process easier for you, we've compiled a comprehensive guide on how to register at Oxbridge Academy (www.oxbridgeacademy.co.za/enrol-now/). The guide also includes general tips that will be relevant to the application and registration processes at other colleges.\n\n## There are 4 steps you need to follow when you want to register as a student at Oxbridge Academy:\n\n- 1. Select Your Course\n- 2. Fill in Your Student Details\n- 3. Select Your Delivery Option\n- 4. Pay Your Registration Fee and Send in Your Form", + "recall": 0.9464285714285714, + "true_md": "## CHAPTER 5:\n\n## TIPS FOR FILLING IN YOUR COLLEGE REGISTRATION FORM\n\n## There are 4 steps you need to follow when you want to register as a student at Oxbridge Academy:\n\nApplying for college (www.oxbridgeacademy.co.za/enrol-now/) can be a daunting experience. Not only do you need to choose a course, but you also need to make sure that you: • meet the entry requirements\n\nTo make the college registration process easier for you, we’ve compiled a comprehensive guide on how to register at Oxbridge Academy (www.oxbridgeacademy.co.za/enrol-now/). The guide also includes general tips that will be relevant to the application and registration processes at other colleges.\n\n- 1. Select Your Course\n\n- 2. Fill in Your Student Details\n\n- 3. Select Your Delivery Option\n\n- 4. Pay Your Registration Fee and Send in Your Form\n\n- also need to make sure that you: • meet the entry requirements • meet the deadlines\n\n- • meet the entry requirements • meet the deadlines • fill in the forms correctly\n\n- • meet the deadlines • fill in the forms correctly • send the forms to the right address\n\n- • fill in the forms correctly • send the forms to the right address • include all the necessary attachments\n\n- • send the forms to the right address • include all the necessary attachments\n\nBasic English Language Skills" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6998107293115293, + "doc_id": "cab1799cbd1a9c44754c7022f369f6b249f72209b0bdbc9908c313fd2c8b2b00", + "edit_distance": 0.8764478764478765, + "f1_score": 0.9186046511627907, + "meteor": 0.684677261893333, + "precision": 0.8494623655913979, + "pred_md": "## Line Width and Page Size\n\nIf a line or a box is near the edge of the page and the line width is too big, some portion of the line may exceed the page size although the line or box element is inside.\n\nIn this case, no lines are printed for that element and an error message is displayed.\n\n## Element Position\n\nIf you specify the page size in inches or centimeters and specify an element position in inches or centimeters, you may not be allowed to specify the position, although the position is inside the page size.\n\nThis can occur at positions near the right edge or bottom of the page. The position, specified in inches or centimeters, must be inside the page when it is expressed in rows and columns. For example:\n\n```\nCharacters per line ............... 10 Lines per inches ................. 6 Page width ........................ 5.15 inches (51 columns) height ....................... 6.1 inches (36 lines) Position Across ................... 5.12 inches is not allowed since it will be 52nd column. Down ..................... 6.05 inches is not allowed since it will be 37th line.\n```\n\nWhen you use a 300-pel printer to print a text element whose character size is not *DEFAULT, it may not print when the position of the text element is too close to the bottom of the page. In such cases, the text element should be moved higher in the page or the height of the page size should be increased.\n\n## Restrictions\n\n## PFD Definition File\n\nIf a file meets the following four conditions, it is shown on the Work with PFD Definition Files display as a PFD definition file even if it is not created as a PFD definition file.\n\n- v The file is a physical file\n- v The file is not a source file\n- v The file is not a DDM file\n- v The record length is 80\n\nIt is recommended that you use files created using the Print Format Utility.\n\n## Font\n\n- 1. It is not checked if the specified font exists. If the font does not exist, errors are issued when your printout is sent to the printer.\n- 2. It is not checked if the specified font is an SBCS font or a DBCS font. If you specify a DBCS font for SBCS characters or specify an SBCS font for DBCS characters, the result depends on the text to be printed. The text may be printed with unexpected characters, or not printed with some errors.\n- 3. On the Work with PFD Definition Fonts display you can select *DEFAULT to specify the default font value of the text element, the box element, or the graphics element. When you print a page using *DEFAULT without any\n\nChapter 22. Limitations and Restrictions\n\n395", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## Line Width and Page Size\n\n## Element Position\n\n## Restrictions\n\n## PFD Definition File\n\n## Font\n\n- 1. It is not checked if the specified font exists. If the font does not exist, errors are issued when your printout is sent to the printer.\n\n- 2. It is not checked if the specified font is an SBCS font or a DBCS font. If you specify a DBCS font for SBCS characters or specify an SBCS font for DBCS characters, the result depends on the text to be printed. The text may be printed with unexpected characters, or not printed with some errors.\n\n- 3. On the Work with PFD Definition Fonts display you can select *DEFAULT to specify the default font value of the text element, the box element, or the graphics element. When you print a page using *DEFAULT without any\n\nChapter 22. Limitations and Restrictions 395\n\n- v The record length is 80\n\n- v The file is not a DDM file\n\n- v The file is not a source file\n\n- v The file is a physical file\n\nIf a line or a box is near the edge of the page and the line width is too big, some portion of the line may exceed the page size although the line or box element is inside.\n\nIn this case, no lines are printed for that element and an error message is displayed.\n\nIf you specify the page size in inches or centimeters and specify an element position in inches or centimeters, you may not be allowed to specify the position, although the position is inside the page size.\n\nThis can occur at positions near the right edge or bottom of the page. The position, specified in inches or centimeters, must be inside the page when it is expressed in rows and columns. For example:\n\nWhen you use a 300-pel printer to print a text element whose character size is not *DEFAULT, it may not print when the position of the text element is too close to the bottom of the page. In such cases, the text element should be moved higher in the page or the height of the page size should be increased.\n\nIf a file meets the following four conditions, it is shown on the Work with PFD Definition Files display as a PFD definition file even if it is not created as a PFD definition file.\n\nIt is recommended that you use files created using the Print Format Utility." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7593976031686178, + "doc_id": "45847854112115007912946e70df42a0ceda52ce685d1fe815e48c7ae66edc2e", + "edit_distance": 0.42528735632183906, + "f1_score": 0.9357798165137613, + "meteor": 0.9451569709031106, + "precision": 0.9107142857142857, + "pred_md": "## Columns\n\nTable 70. Work with Overlays Function options (continued)\n\nTable 71. Work with Overlays Function columns\n\n## 3=Copy Overlay Object\n\nTo copy an overlay object, do the following on the Work with Overlays display on page 341.\n\n- 1. Type 3 in the Opt column beside the overlay that you want to copy.\n- 2. Press Enter.\n\nThen the CL command CRTDUPOBJ will be called.\n\nChapter 19. Work with Overlays Function\n\n343", + "recall": 0.9622641509433962, + "true_md": "Table70.WorkwithOverlaysFunctionoptions (continued)\n\nTable71.WorkwithOverlaysFunctioncolumns\n\n## Columns\n\n## 3=Copy Overlay Object\n\nTo copy an overlay object, do the following on the Work with Overlays display on page 341.\n\nThen the CL command CRTDUPOBJ will be called.\n\n- 1. Type 3 in the Opt column beside the overlay that you want to copy.\n\n- 2. Press Enter.\n\nChapter 19. Work with Overlays Function 343" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6657691612729257, + "doc_id": "4196c7318d0e256094ffe9de18697172d070936beacf555adb7afd2ba6401a75", + "edit_distance": 0.4937888198757764, + "f1_score": 0.8557692307692308, + "meteor": 0.6894761899268647, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "- v In the Opt column beside the PFD definition file name in the list that you want to use, type the number of option (task) to be used.\n- v In only the first (top) position of the list, type an option number (for the task), a PFD definition file name and a library name in the Opt , File , and Library columns respectively.\n\n## 1=Create PFD Definition File\n\nBefore you create a PFD definition, you must create a PFD definition file. To create a PFD definition file, do the following on the Work with PFD Definition Files display on page 205.\n\n- 1. Type 1 in the Opt column in the first line of the list.\n- 2. Type the name of the new PFD definition file in the File prompt in the first line of the list.\n- 3. Type the name of the library where the PFD definition file resides in the Library prompt in the first line of the list.\n- 4. Press Enter.\n\nThe following display appears:\n\nUsing the Create PFD Definition File display, you can create a PFD definition file from the information specified on this display.\n\nThe Work with PFD Definitions display appears after the PFD definition file is created, so that you can create PFD definitions in the PFD definition file.\n\nChapter 11. Work with PFD Definition Files\n\n209", + "recall": 0.7478991596638656, + "true_md": "- v In the Opt column beside the PFD definition file name in the list that you want to use, type the number of option (task) to be used.\n\n- v In only the first (top) position of the list, type an option number (for the task), a PFD definition file name and a library name in the Opt , File , and Library columns respectively.\n\n- 1. Type 1 in the Opt column in the first line of the list.\n\n- 2. Type the name of the new PFD definition file in the File prompt in the first line of the list.\n\n- 3. Type the name of the library where the PFD definition file resides in the Library prompt in the first line of the list.\n\n- 4. Press Enter.\n\nUsing the Create PFD Definition File display, you can create a PFD definition file from the information specified on this display.\n\nThe Work with PFD Definitions display appears after the PFD definition file is created, so that you can create PFD definitions in the PFD definition file.\n\nChapter 11. Work with PFD Definition Files 209\n\n## Create PFD Definition File\n\nThe following display appears:\n\nBefore you create a PFD definition, you must create a PFD definition file. To create a PFD definition file, do the following on the Work with PFD Definition Files display on page 205.\n\n## 1=Create PFD Definition File\n\nFile............: PFD2 Library . . .......: PFULIB Type choices, press Enter. User specified DBCS data . . N Y=Yes, N=No Text 'description' . .... File for product label Authority ......... *LIBCRTAUT Name, *LIBCRTAUT, *ALL *CHANGE, *EXCLUDE, *USE F3=Exit F5=Refresh F12=Cancel" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7366411001704434, + "doc_id": "a8aaa760a8ff10911d75b3d9ecb56ca022622ff37f9ddc8fd3d096a6d59b11fa", + "edit_distance": 0.30662020905923343, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.7555451815967973, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## OPERATION (cont.)\n\n## Model AY11240\n\n## Model AY11238\n\n- 7. To clearly see the outline of the specimen, rotate the coarse adjustment knob and lower the barrel to the space limiter.\n- 8. Rotate the fine adjustment knob until the image is in sharp focus. When using other objectives, rotate the fine focus adjustment until the image is in focus.\n- 6. To clearly see the outline of the specimen, rotate the coarse adjustment knob and lower the barrel to the space limiter.\n- 7. Rotate the fine adjustment knob until the image is in sharp focus. When using other objectives, rotate the fine focus adjustment until the image is in focus.\n\n## USING THE 5-HOLE DIAPHRAGM\n\n- 1. To obtain the best contrast for observing, match the hole size to the objective that is being used to view the specimen.\n- 2. Each hole has a corresponding number from 1 to 5. 1 is the smallest hole; 5 is the largest hole.\n- Use the following guidelines to match the hole number to the objective that you have selected:\n- 40x objective: Use #5 hole\n\n10x objective: Use #4 or #3 hole\n\n4x objective: Use #2 or #1 hole\n\n## COARSE KNOB ADJUSTMENT - Model AY11240\n\n- 1. The coarse adjustment knob has an adjustable heavy-light nut (See Fig.1).\n- 2. To adjust the knob loosen or tighten the nut. NOTE: Adjusting the nut too tight will make focusing difficult. Adjusting the nut too loose will cause the tube to slide.\n\nFig. 1- Coarse Adjustment Knob\n\nFig. 1- Coarse Adjustment Knob\n\n5\n\n6\n\n## MODEL AY11228/AY11232\n\n## MICROSCOPE USAGE\n\nBARSKA Model AY11228 and Model AY11232 are designed for biological studies such as specimen examination. They can also be used for examining bacteria and for general clinical and medical studies. Simple design and use is especially useful for school classroom instruction.\n\n## CONSTRUCTION\n\nBARSKA Model AY11228 is a fixed power stereo microscope. It is constructed with two optical paths at the same angle. It is equipped with transmitted illumination and oblique illumination. By using this instrument, the user can observe and enlarge the right side stereo image. BARSKA Model AY11232 is a zoom stereo microscope. The object being viewed is enlarged through two identical sized sets of right and left eye lenses. The zoom provides different magnification and features an inversion system which allows the image to be viewed normally and right side up.", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## OPERATION ( cont. )\n\n## Model AY11240\n\n## Model AY11238\n\n## USING THE 5-HOLE DIAPHRAGM\n\n## COARSE KNOB ADJUSTMENT - Model AY11240\n\n## MICROSCOPE USAGE\n\n## CONSTRUCTION\n\n6\n\n5\n\n- 7. To clearly see the outline of the specimen, rotate the coarse adjustment knob and lower the barrel to the space limiter. 8. Rotate the fine adjustment knob\n\n- the barrel to the space limiter. 8. Rotate the fine adjustment knob until the image is in sharp focus. When using other objectives, rotate the fine focus adjustment until the image is in focus.\n\n- 6. To clearly see the outline of the specimen, rotate the coarse adjustment knob and lower the barrel to the space limiter. 7. Rotate the fine adjustment knob\n\n- the barrel to the space limiter. 7. Rotate the fine adjustment knob until the image is in sharp focus. When using other objectives, rotate the fine focus adjustment until the image is in focus.\n\n- 1. To obtain the best contrast for observing, match the hole size to the objective that is being used to view the specimen. 2. Each hole has a corresponding number from 1 to 5. 1 is the\n\n- the objective that is being used to view the specimen. 2. Each hole has a corresponding number from 1 to 5. 1 is the smallest hole; 5 is the largest hole. Use the following guidelines to match the hole number to the\n\nsmallest hole; 5 is the largest hole. Use the following guidelines to match the hole number to the objective that you have selected: 40x objective: Use #5 hole 10x objective: Use #4 or #3 hole 4x objective: Use #2 or #1 hole\n\n- 1. The coarse adjustment knob has an adjustable heavy-light nut (See Fig.1). 2. To adjust the knob loosen or tighten the nut.\n\n- (See Fig.1). 2. To adjust the knob loosen or tighten the nut. NOTE: Adjusting the nut too tight will make focusing difficult.\n\nTo adjust the knob loosen or tighten the nut. NOTE: Adjusting the nut too tight will make focusing difficult. Adjusting the nut too loose will cause the tube to slide.\n\nBARSKA Model AY11228 and Model AY11232 are designed for biological studies such as specimen examination. They can also be used for examining bacteria and for general clinical and medical studies. Simple design and use is especially useful for school classroom instruction.\n\nBARSKA Model AY11228 is a fixed power stereo microscope. It is constructed with two optical paths at the same angle. It is equipped with transmitted illumination and oblique illumination. By using this instrument, the user can observe and enlarge the right side stereo image. BARSKA Model AY11232 is a zoom stereo microscope. The object being viewed is enlarged through two identical sized sets of right and left eye lenses. The zoom provides different magnification and features an inversion system which allows the image to be viewed normally and right side up.\n\nFig. 1- Coarse Adjustment Knob\n\n## MODEL AY11228/AY11232" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8600451357516945, + "doc_id": "c5f33b17b312c6eaf03a020fcc74efb6c8c6637aa7b5487950aac798643967e0", + "edit_distance": 0.30616740088105726, + "f1_score": 0.961038961038961, + "meteor": 0.909171270718232, + "precision": 0.9635416666666666, + "pred_md": "## Chapter 23. Problem Analysis\n\nIf a problem occurs while you are using the IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries or its output is being printed, the cause of the problem may not be obvious. An error in your application, in the system environment, or the IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries are all possible causes of an error condition. The problem analysis procedure in this chapter can help you isolate the cause of the problem and solve it. If you need more information, refer to 'Contacting Your Service Representative' on page 407.\n\n## How to Use This Procedure\n\nBefore you use this procedure, you should be aware of the restrictions. See 'Chapter 22. Limitations and Restrictions' on page 391 for general restrictions, and 'Appendix A. Printer Characteristics' on page 417 for the restrictions of printers.\n\nThis procedure is arranged as a sequence of questions to which you can answer Yes or No . Depending on your answer, you are either directed to another question or to a recommendation for action. The number in the box shows the sequence number of the step.\n\n'Common Symptoms and Possible Causes' on page 403 and 'Sense Codes and Possible Causes' on page 406 are also provided to help you reach the cause quickly. You may be directed to one of these lists by the following procedure.\n\nStart at Question 1 and follow the question-and-answer sequence, answering each question to which you are directed. If the problem is a condition that requires more detailed procedures, you are referred to those procedures.\n\n## Identifying Problems\n\nWhen a problem occurs, follow the procedures below to pinpoint its possible cause:\n\n## 0100: Problem Analysis Procedures\n\n001: Did the problem occur after a spooled file had been created?\n\nThis question asks if programs of IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries have completed and you have problems with the spooled file; for example, you cannot print the spooled file or the printout is not as expected.\n\nYes Go to Step 002.\n\nNo Go to Step 006.\n\n002: Was your printout different from what you expected?\n\nIf you do not receive anything although you expect a printout, your answer is 'Yes'.\n\nYes See 'Common Symptoms and Possible Causes' on page 403 and follow the directions.\n\nNo Go to Step 005 on page 400.\n\n399", + "recall": 0.9585492227979274, + "true_md": "## Chapter 23. Problem Analysis\n\n## How to Use This Procedure\n\n## Identifying Problems\n\n## 0100: Problem Analysis Procedures\n\n## 001: Did the problem occur after a spooled file had been created?\n\n## 002: Was your printout different from what you expected?\n\nIf a problem occurs while you are using the IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries or its output is being printed, the cause of the problem may not be obvious. An error in your application, in the system environment, or the IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries are all possible causes of an error condition. The problem analysis procedure in this chapter can help you isolate the cause of the problem and solve it. If you need more information, refer to “Contacting Your Service Representative” on page 407.\n\nBefore you use this procedure, you should be aware of the restrictions. See “Chapter 22. Limitations and Restrictions” on page 391 for general restrictions, and “Appendix A. Printer Characteristics” on page 417 for the restrictions of printers.\n\nThis procedure is arranged as a sequence of questions to which you can answer Yes or No . Depending on your answer, you are either directed to another question or to a recommendation for action. The number in the box shows the sequence number of the step.\n\n“Common Symptoms and Possible Causes” on page 403 and “Sense Codes and Possible Causes” on page 406 are also provided to help you reach the cause quickly. You may be directed to one of these lists by the following procedure.\n\nStart at Question 1 and follow the question-and-answer sequence, answering each question to which you are directed. If the problem is a condition that requires more detailed procedures, you are referred to those procedures.\n\nWhen a problem occurs, follow the procedures below to pinpoint its possible cause:\n\nThis question asks if programs of IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries have completed and you have problems with the spooled file; for example, you cannot print the spooled file or the printout is not as expected.\n\nIf you do not receive anything although you expect a printout, your answer is ’Yes’.\n\n- Yes See “Common Symptoms and Possible Causes” on page 403 and follow the directions.\n\n- No Go to Step 005 on page 400.\n\n- Yes Go to Step 002.\n\n- No Go to Step 006.\n\n399" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.41797472141076863, + "doc_id": "a0122e9b23d9673675f28128bc595a4711a75f106c04eb38547b9294d9ffc5f3", + "edit_distance": 0.6951219512195121, + "f1_score": 0.8045977011494253, + "meteor": 0.376422183189752, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Graphics Element and Position\n\n## Measurement Method is Row/Column\n\nThe top side of the graphics block is positioned to the top of the row. The bottom side of the graphics block is positioned to the bottom of the row. The left of the graphics block is positioned to the left of the column. The right of the graphics block is positioned to the right of the column.\n\n## Measurement Method is Inch or Centimeter\n\nThe horizontal side of the graphics block is positioned to the vertical position. The vertical side of the graphics block is positioned to the horizontal position.\n\nChapter 23. Problem Analysis\n\n415", + "recall": 0.6730769230769231, + "true_md": "## Graphics Element and Position\n\n## Measurement Method is Row/Column\n\nThe top side of the graphics block is positioned to the top of the row. The bottom side of the graphics block is positioned to the bottom of the row. The left of the graphics block is positioned to the left of the column. The right of the graphics block is positioned to the right of the column.\n\nThe horizontal side of the graphics block is positioned to the vertical position. The vertical side of the graphics block is positioned to the horizontal position.\n\n## Measurement Method is Inch or Centimeter\n\nChapter 23. Problem Analysis 415\n\nPosition || |V +-->+-------------------------------------------+ | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | *-------------------------------------------+<--+ | | || +---Position\n\n| Start | | End | | Column | Column --------+---------------------------------------------------+------- | | Start Row | | | | | | --------+ +------- | | | | | | -------+ +------- | | End Row | | | | | | --------+---------------------------------------------------+------- | | | |" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8703903472881365, + "doc_id": "c8428007107644588d920264ea7b5dd157ec3b998c80c9ee48dca79353e9ea63", + "edit_distance": 0.17160686427457097, + "f1_score": 0.9371428571428573, + "meteor": 0.9890103826322526, + "precision": 0.9213483146067416, + "pred_md": "368\n\n```\n*LIBL/ -------- PRTPFDDTA----PFDFILE- --*CURLIB/-- ---- --PFD-definition-file-name--- - library-name/ - Required ------------------------------------------------------------------------ Optional - *FIRST----------------- |P| --PFDMBR ---- ---- - ----------------------- --PFD-definition-name---- --*PFD-------------------------------- | -*LIBL/--------- | --FILE---- --- --*CURLIB/------- ---file-name----- -------------------- --library-name/-- -*FIRST---------- --MBR--- ------------------------------------------- --member-name----- -*NO-- ---GRID---- -------- ------------------------------------------- --*YES- ---*YES- -*END-------- ---RCDSLT-- -------- --ENDPAGE--- --------------- --*NO-- page-number - ---*PFD ------------- ---DRAWER-- - *E1 -------------- --------------------------------------- - *CUT ------------- --print-drawer ----- ---*DEVD--------- ---*PFD-------------- ---OUTBIN-- ---------COPIES-- ----- --output-bin---- --number-of-copies-- -----*JOB ------------------------------------- ---OUTQ- ----------------- | ---*LIBL/ --------- | - --*CURLIB/-------- ---- output-queue ------- --library-name --- ---*PFD---------------------------------------------- ---FORMDF-- - *INLINE ------------------------------------------ -------- | ---*LIBL/ --------- | - --*CURLIB/-------- ---- form-definition-name------ --library-name --- -------------------------------------- | Job: B, I Pgm: B, I REXX: B, I Exec | -------------------------------------\n```\n\nFigure 29. The Command Syntax for PRTPFDDTA Command\n\nFigure 29. The Command Syntax for PRTPFDDTA Command\n\nThe following describes the parameters for PRTPFDDTA command.\n\nPFD file (PFDFILE)\n\nSpecifies the PFD definition file and library that contain the PFD definition to be used.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.9534883720930233, + "true_md": "Figure29.TheCommandSyntaxforPRTPFDDTACommand\n\nThe following describes the parameters for PRTPFDDTA command.\n\n## PFD file (PFDFILE)\n\nSpecifies the PFD definition file and library that contain the PFD definition to be used.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\n368 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\n*LIBL/ -------- PRTPFDDTA----PFDFILE- --*CURLIB/-- ---- --PFD-definition-file-name--- - library-name/ - Required ------------------------------------------------------------------------ Optional - *FIRST----------------- |P| --PFDMBR ---- ---- - ----------------------- --PFD-definition-name---- --*PFD-------------------------------- | -*LIBL/--------- | --FILE---- --- --*CURLIB/------- ---file-name----- -------------------- --library-name/-- -*FIRST---------- --MBR--- ------------------------------------------- --member-name----- -*NO-- ---GRID---- -------- ------------------------------------------- --*YES- ---*YES- -*END-------- ---RCDSLT-- -------- --ENDPAGE--- --------------- --*NO-- page-number - ---*PFD ------------- ---DRAWER-- - *E1 -------------- --------------------------------------- - *CUT ------------- --print-drawer ----- ---*DEVD--------- ---*PFD-------------- ---OUTBIN-- ---------COPIES-- ----- --output-bin---- --number-of-copies-- -----*JOB ------------------------------------- ---OUTQ- ----------------- | ---*LIBL/ --------- | - --*CURLIB/-------- ---- output-queue ------- --library-name --- ---*PFD---------------------------------------------- ---FORMDF-- - *INLINE ------------------------------------------ -------- | ---*LIBL/ --------- | - --*CURLIB/-------- ---- form-definition-name------ --library-name --- -------------------------------------- | Job: B, I Pgm: B, I REXX: B, I Exec | -------------------------------------" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "277499a6bb6df765c2aabd5c22b43bc0d6afac596c0906ef71ad7dc398d21bf5", + "edit_distance": 0.8620689655172413, + "f1_score": 0.6363636363636364, + "meteor": 0.45023482658959535, + "precision": 0.7777777777777778, + "pred_md": "## EXCEL TRAINING MANUAL\n\n## NOTES\n\n\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\n\n\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\n\n\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\n\n\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\n\n\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\n\n\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\n\n\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\n\n\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\n\n\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\n\n\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\n\n\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\n\n\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\n\n\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\n\n\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\n\n\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\n\n\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\n\n\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\n\n\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\n\nPage 3 /g3", + "recall": 0.5384615384615384, + "true_md": "## NOTES\n\nEXCEL TRAINING MANUAL\n\nPage 3 GLYPH<g3>" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9517038886504241, + "doc_id": "3a5cacd3cfe344b2f41706319f404d56427155d30a7205dbb3f253c22c403007", + "edit_distance": 0.2038369304556355, + "f1_score": 0.9721362229102166, + "meteor": 0.9581330607109154, + "precision": 0.9631901840490797, + "pred_md": "## Columns\n\n64\n\nTable 5. Work with Source Overlays columns\n\n## Showing a Source Overlay List\n\nThe source overlays can be listed on the lower part of the display by specifying the Library prompt and File prompt. When you want to change the content of the list, specify the name of a file and library, and press the Enter key. You can page up or down the list on the display by specifying the starting characters in the Position to prompt.\n\nNote:\n\nWhen you specify either the Source overlay prompt, File prompt, or the Library prompt, you can not specify an option in the Opt column.\n\n## Selecting a Source Overlay from a List\n\nThe list on the display contains the names of all or a specified subset of the source overlays that exist in the source overlay file indicated by the File prompt. The text that describes the source overlays and the date when the source overlay was last changed are also shown in the list.\n\nWhen a list is shown, a one-word indicator always appears below and to the right of the list to tell you where you are in the list. More... means that there are more items after the item currently shown. Bottom means that you are at the end of the list.\n\nUse the Page or Roll keys to move forward or backward through the list.\n\nIf you are creating a source overlay, you can check this list to see what names are already used before you choose a new name. You can create a source overlay by typing 1 and a source overlay name in the first list position, and you can select other source overlays from the list using any of the options except 1 (Create).\n\nTherefore, you can select one or more names by doing one or both of the following:\n\n- v In the Opt column beside the source overlay name in the list that you want to use, type the number of the option (task) to be used.\n- v In only the first (top) position of the list, type an option number (for the task), a source overlay name in the Opt and Source Overlay columns respectively.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.98125, + "true_md": "## Columns\n\n## Showing a Source Overlay List\n\n## Selecting a Source Overlay from a List\n\nTable5.WorkwithSourceOverlayscolumns\n\nThe source overlays can be listed on the lower part of the display by specifying the Library prompt and File prompt. When you want to change the content of the list, specify the name of a file and library, and press the Enter key. You can page up or down the list on the display by specifying the starting characters in the Position to prompt.\n\nThe list on the display contains the names of all or a specified subset of the source overlays that exist in the source overlay file indicated by the File prompt. The text that describes the source overlays and the date when the source overlay was last changed are also shown in the list.\n\nWhen a list is shown, a one-word indicator always appears below and to the right of the list to tell you where you are in the list. More... means that there are more items after the item currently shown. Bottom means that you are at the end of the list.\n\nUse the Page or Roll keys to move forward or backward through the list.\n\nIf you are creating a source overlay, you can check this list to see what names are already used before you choose a new name. You can create a source overlay by typing 1 and a source overlay name in the first list position, and you can select other source overlays from the list using any of the options except 1 (Create).\n\nTherefore, you can select one or more names by doing one or both of the following:\n\n- Note: When you specify either the Source overlay prompt, File prompt, or the Library prompt, you can not specify an option in the Opt column.\n\n- v In the Opt column beside the source overlay name in the list that you want to use, type the number of the option (task) to be used.\n\n- v In only the first (top) position of the list, type an option number (for the task), a source overlay name in the Opt and Source Overlay columns respectively.\n\n64 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5850508675915687, + "doc_id": "37fe1e41a2dde29e79bf2737c2d10bbd28d5d963683d48f917fb9a62049eddeb", + "edit_distance": 0.6787330316742082, + "f1_score": 0.8651685393258427, + "meteor": 0.7304110073272726, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Chapter 11. Work with PFD Definition Files\n\nThis chapter provides additional information for working with PFD definition files.\n\nYou can select any of the following options from this display.\n\n- v Creating PFD definition file\n- v Changing PFD definition file description\n- v Copying PFD definition file\n- v Deleting PFD definition file\n- v Renaming PFD definition file\n- v Displaying PFD definition file description\n- v Starting work with PFD definitions\n\nSelect 12 (Work with PFD definition files) on the AFP utilities menu on page 139, and press Enter. The following display appears:\n\nUse this display to select the PFD definition files you want to list and work with. You can use the Library and File prompts to specify subset criteria. When you press Enter, the Work with PFD Definition Files display appears. The following table explains each field on this display.\n\n203", + "recall": 0.7623762376237624, + "true_md": "## Chapter 11. Work with PFD Definition Files\n\nThis chapter provides additional information for working with PFD definition files.\n\nYou can select any of the following options from this display.\n\nSelect 12 (Work with PFD definition files) on the AFP utilities menu on page 139, and press Enter. The following display appears:\n\nUse this display to select the PFD definition files you want to list and work with. You can use the Library and File prompts to specify subset criteria. When you press Enter, the Work with PFD Definition Files display appears. The following table explains each field on this display.\n\n- v Creating PFD definition file\n\n- v Changing PFD definition file description\n\n- v Copying PFD definition file\n\n- v Deleting PFD definition file\n\n- v Renaming PFD definition file\n\n- v Displaying PFD definition file description\n\n- v Starting work with PFD definitions\n\nType choices, press Enter. Library . . ........ PFULIB Name, *USRLIBL, *LIBL *CURLIB, *ALLUSR, *ALL File . . . . ........ *ALL Name, generic*, *ALL\n\n## Work with PFD Definition Files\n\nParameters or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel\n\n203" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4562001137233029, + "doc_id": "ebd3d3906aec53a66a7558f563ce629fd190705c3db7ba898f83cb18c6c8158f", + "edit_distance": 0.5756756756756757, + "f1_score": 0.9278350515463918, + "meteor": 0.5683882413359832, + "precision": 0.9507042253521126, + "pred_md": "## Example Action: Press the Enter key.\n\nThe Design Overlay display appears.\n\n## Example Actions:\n\n- 1. Move the cursor to position (Across : 60, Down 1) to place the logo.\n- 2. Press the F13 key.\n\nA % appears at the cursor position, a message prompts you to press the F9 key, and the function key area changes.\n\n```\nDesign Overlay Columns: 1- 74 Control . . ______ Source overlay . . . . . STATIONERY *...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7.... 001 % 002 *T001 Stationery Co., Ltd. 003 004 *T002 rd Stationery Sales Slip Date: / / 005 *L003 -----------------------*L026 --006 007 *B004 -----------*L017 -------:----------*L020 --------+ 008 : *T021 : *T022 ty : *T023 : *T025 ( $ ): 009 : : : *T024 : : 010 *L012 -----------:------------:----------:-------------011 : *T013 oint Pen : : : : 012 *L011 -----------:------------:----------:-------------013 : *T014 : : : : 014 *L010 -----------:------------:----------:-------------015 : *T015 : : : : 016 *L009 -----------:------------:----------:-------------017 : *T016 : : : : More... F3=Exit F6=Place graphics F9=Place page segment F12=Cancel F24=More keys Press F6 or F9 to place graphics or page segment.\n```\n\n## Example Action: Press the F9 key.\n\nThe mark %S030 appears in the image area, indicating a page segment, and the key entry area is displayed, prompting you to enter a page segment name.\n\nChapter 3. Getting Started with the Overlay Utility\n\n51", + "recall": 0.9060402684563759, + "true_md": "Example Action: Press the Enter key.\n\nThe Design Overlay display appears.\n\nA % appears at the cursor position, a message prompts you to press the F9 key, and the function key area changes.\n\nThe mark %S030 appears in the image area, indicating a page segment, and the key entry area is displayed, prompting you to enter a page segment name.\n\nExample Action: Press the F9 key.\n\nDesign Overlay Columns: 1- 74 Control . . \\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_ Source overlay.....STATIONERY *...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7.... 001 002 *T001 Stationery Co., Ltd. 003 004 *T002 rd Stationery Sales Slip Date: / / 005 *L003 ------------------------ *L026 -- 006 007 *B004 -----------*L017 -------:----------*L020 --------+ 008 : *T021 : *T022 ty : *T023 : *T025 ( $ ): 009 : : *T024 : : 010 *L012 -----------:------------:----------:-------------- 011 : *T013 oint Pen : : : : 012 *L011 -----------:------------:----------:-------------- 013 : *T014 : : : : 014 *L010 -----------:------------:----------:-------------- 015 : *T015 : : : : 016 *L009 -----------:------------:----------:-------------- 017 : *T016 : : : : More... F3=Exit F6=Text F9=Line F10=Box F11=Bar code F21=Element edit F22=Block edit F24=More keys\n\nDesign Overlay Columns: 1- 74 Control . . \\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_ Source overlay.....STATIONERY *...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7.... 001 % 002 *T001 Stationery Co., Ltd. 003 004 *T002 rd Stationery Sales Slip Date: / / 005 *L003 ------------------------ *L026 -- 006 007 *B004 -----------*L017 -------:----------*L020 --------+ 008 : *T021 : *T022 ty : *T023 : *T025 ( $ ): 009 : : *T024 : : 010 *L012 -----------:------------:----------:-------------- 011 : *T013 oint Pen : : : : 012 *L011 -----------:------------:----------:-------------- 013 : *T014 : : : : 014 *L010 -----------:------------:----------:-------------- 015 : *T015 : : : : 016 *L009 -----------:------------:----------:-------------- 017 : *T016 : : : : More... F3=Exit F6=Place graphics F9=Place page segment F12=Cancel F24=More keys Press F6 or F9 to place graphics or page segment.\n\nChapter 3. Getting Started with the Overlay Utility 51\n\n- 1. Move the cursor to position (Across : 60, Down 1) to place the logo.\n\n- 2. Press the F13 key.\n\n## Example Actions:" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7411535263741733, + "doc_id": "b224c977c9ced3e68c234f27308748cc5c9239a2f061fe3948540e65b399b61b", + "edit_distance": 0.6346153846153846, + "f1_score": 0.9016393442622951, + "meteor": 0.8612977840425572, + "precision": 0.8870967741935484, + "pred_md": "6\n\nFigure 2. Letter Preparation Using AFP Utilities\n\nFigure 2. Letter Preparation Using AFP Utilities\n\nThe AFP Utilities provide flexible printing. For example, with AFP Utilities you can:\n\n- v Highlight a list of items by printing the list in a different type style from the remainder of the text.\n- v Print your letterhead in one font and your text in another font.\n\nYou can electronically store your letterhead so it always prints in the same style. This printing concept is described in \" Using Overlays. \"\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.9166666666666666, + "true_md": "Figure2.LetterPreparationUsingAFPUtilities\n\nThe AFP Utilities provide flexible printing. For example, with AFP Utilities you can:\n\nYou can electronically store your letterhead so it always prints in the same style. This printing concept is described in † Using Overlays. †\n\n- v Highlight a list of items by printing the list in a different type style from the remainder of the text.\n\n- v Print your letterhead in one font and your text in another font.\n\n6 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6690095851336586, + "doc_id": "ab55cf8504a64ed536bd994182969b2a5af5c232eb618bb8a43e537300e43f65", + "edit_distance": 0.375, + "f1_score": 0.9268292682926829, + "meteor": 0.9271144581986707, + "precision": 0.9047619047619048, + "pred_md": "## Columns\n\nTable 12. Work with Source Overlay Files options (continued)\n\nTable 13. Work with Source Overlay Files columns\n\nSpecify one of the options in the Opt column and press Enter.\n\nYou can exit from this display by pressing F3 (Exit) or F12 (Cancel).\n\nChapter 6. Work with Source Overlay Files\n\n87", + "recall": 0.95, + "true_md": "Table12.WorkwithSourceOverlayFilesoptions (continued)\n\nTable13.WorkwithSourceOverlayFilescolumns\n\nSpecify one of the options in the Opt column and press Enter.\n\nYou can exit from this display by pressing F3 (Exit) or F12 (Cancel).\n\nChapter 6. Work with Source Overlay Files 87\n\n## Columns" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8803867809092477, + "doc_id": "095430d125c8783eb91a722556d97e050933ed155bfb69e0b8c8fb9bcd8c7750", + "edit_distance": 0.428087986463621, + "f1_score": 0.9375, + "meteor": 0.9101030167803803, + "precision": 0.9292035398230089, + "pred_md": "366\n\n```\nSTRPFU*-------------------------------------------------------------> Required ------------------------------------------------------------------------* Optional *->*PRV---------------------------------------------* >--PFDFILE*----* *->*LIBL/*---------* *----> *--+--*CURLIB/*-------+--PFD-definition-file-name---* *-*library-name/*--* *->*PRV-----------------* >--PFDMBR------+->*SELECT--------------+--------------------------------> *--PFD-definition-name--* *->*BLANK** >--OPTION*-+--1------+--------------------------------------------------* *->2*-----* *-*3*-----* *-*4*-----* *-*6*-----* *-*7*-----* *-*9*-----* *------------------------------------* | Job: I Pgm: I REXX: I Exec | *------------------------------------*\n```\n\nFigure 28. The Command Syntax for STRPFU Command\n\nFigure 28. The Command Syntax for STRPFU Command\n\nThe following describes the parameters for STRPFU command.\n\n## PFD file (PFDFILE)\n\nSpecifies the PFD definition file and library that contain the PFD definition to be worked with.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\n*PRV\n\nSpecifies that the Print Format Utility is to use the name of the PFD definition file and library used in your last Print Format Utility session. If you specify *PRV for the PFDFILE parameter, it is not necessary to specify a library.\n\n## PFD-definition-file-name\n\nSpecify the name of an existing PFD definition file to be used. If you specify the PFD-definition-file-name and a library name, Print Format Utility searches the specified library for the PFD definition file. If you do not specify a library name, *LIBL is used.\n\nThe possible library values are:\n\n*LIBL\n\nThe library list is used to locate the file.\n\n## *CURLIB\n\nThe current library for the job is used to locate the file. If no library is specified as the current library for the job, library QGPL is used.\n\nlibrary-name\n\nSpecify the library where the file is located.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.9459459459459459, + "true_md": "The following describes the parameters for STRPFU command.\n\nFigure28.TheCommandSyntaxforSTRPFUCommand\n\n## PFD file (PFDFILE)\n\n366 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\nSpecifies the PFD definition file and library that contain the PFD definition to be worked with.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\n- *PRV Specifies that the Print Format Utility is to use the name of the PFD definition file and library used in your last Print Format Utility session. If you specify *PRV for the PFDFILE parameter, it is not necessary to specify a library.\n\nSTRPFU*-------------------------------------------------------------> Required ------------------------------------------------------------------------* Optional *->*PRV---------------------------------------------* >--PFDFILE*----* *->*LIBL/*---------* *----> *--+--*CURLIB/*-------+--PFD-definition-file-name---* *-*library-name/*--* *->*PRV-----------------* >--PFDMBR------+->*SELECT--------------+--------------------------------> *--PFD-definition-name--* *->*BLANK** >--OPTION*-+--1------+--------------------------------------------------* *->2*-----* *-*3*-----* *-*4*-----* *-*6*-----* *-*7*-----* *-*9*-----* *------------------------------------* | Job: I Pgm: I REXX: I Exec | *------------------------------------*\n\nThe possible library values are:\n\n- PFD-definition-file-name Specify the name of an existing PFD definition file to be used. If you specify the PFD-definition-file-name and a library name, Print Format Utility searches the specified library for the PFD definition file. If you do not specify a library name, *LIBL is used.\n\n- *LIBL The library list is used to locate the file.\n\n- *CURLIB The current library for the job is used to locate the file. If no library is specified as the current library for the job, library QGPL is used.\n\n- library-name Specify the library where the file is located." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.474568942836414, + "doc_id": "dc4a1098b9835db7b407d984e85e88493372c5501c0b11cf28c68191b33ba8e6", + "edit_distance": 0.49122807017543857, + "f1_score": 0.8807339449541284, + "meteor": 0.5895888084527784, + "precision": 0.9056603773584906, + "pred_md": "Basic English Language Skills\n\n## · Only include necessary attachments with your e-mails.\n\nRemember that many e-mail clients have a size limit on attachments, and that attachments over a certain size may cause your e-mail to be blocked.\n\n## · Keep it professional.\n\nDon't pass on spam e-mails, chain letters, or inappropriate jokes, and don't spread gossip via e-mail.\n\nDeveloped for Oxbridge Academy", + "recall": 0.8571428571428571, + "true_md": "- • Only include necessary attachments with your e-mails. Remember that many e-mail clients have a size limit on attach-\n\n- • Keep it professional. Don’t pass on spam e-mails, chain letters, or inappropriate jokes, \n\nBasic English Language Skills\n\nOnly include necessary attachments with your e-mails. Remember that many e-mail clients have a size limit on attach- ments, and that attachments over a certain size may cause your e-mail to be blocked.\n\nKeep it professional. Don’t pass on spam e-mails, chain letters, or inappropriate jokes, and don’t spread gossip via e-mail.\n\nDeveloped for Oxbridge Academy" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.621174499498103, + "doc_id": "5578786694c10e2d627a1c0168590df50149a729b20b0c535a90bb93a7c61abe", + "edit_distance": 0.5467625899280576, + "f1_score": 0.9395973154362416, + "meteor": 0.7257742455074215, + "precision": 0.9459459459459459, + "pred_md": "Basic English Language Skils\n\n## PUNCTUATION\n\n## Parts of speech are used to construct meaningful sentences.\n\nPunctuation refers to the various signs and symbols that are used in written language to:\n\n- · Clarify meaning\n- · Show emphasis\n- · Break passages of text into separate parts, making them easier to read\n\nPunctuation rules are there to make sure that we all use punctuation marks consistently. If we all used punctuation according to our own preferences, it would become incredibly confusing, and it would no longer help to clarify the meaning of our text.\n\nD\n\neveloped for Oxbridge Academy", + "recall": 0.9333333333333333, + "true_md": "Basic English Language Skills\n\n## CHAPTER 3:\n\n## PUNCTUATION\n\nParts of speech are used to construct meaningful sentences.\n\nPunctuation refers to the various signs and symbols that are used in written language to: • Clarify meaning\n\nPunctuation rules are there to make sure that we all use punctuation marks consistently. If we all used punctuation according to our own preferences, it would become incredibly confusing, and it would no longer help to clarify the meaning of our text.\n\nDeveloped for Oxbridge Academy\n\n- written language to: • Clarify meaning • Show emphasis\n\n- • Clarify meaning • Show emphasis • Break passages of text into separate parts, making them easier \n\n- • Show emphasis • Break passages of text into separate parts, making them easier to read" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6284038667493034, + "doc_id": "ffa7d492a6c8e1171983a3ff93c9dab2ea27087b16a5593b25e1f60dbc93f9aa", + "edit_distance": 0.41414141414141414, + "f1_score": 0.8666666666666667, + "meteor": 0.7790211719308794, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Chapter 10. Work with PFD Definitions\n\nThis chapter provides additional information for working with PFD definitions.\n\nYou can select the following options from this display.\n\n- v Creating PFD definition\n- v Changing PFD definition\n- v Copying PFD definition\n- v Deleting PFD definition\n- v Printing PFD definition\n- v Renaming PFD definition\n- v Printing database file\n\nSelect 11 (Work with PFD definitions) on the AFP utilities menu on page 139, and press the Enter key. The following display appears:\n\nWhen the definition is the first PFD definition to be created, no definition list appears on the display.\n\nNote: Before you create a PFD definition, you need to create a PFD definition file by using option 1 (Create) on the Work with PFD Definition Files display.\n\nThe following tables explain the Work with PFD Definitions display.\n\n143", + "recall": 0.7647058823529411, + "true_md": "## Chapter 10. Work with PFD Definitions\n\nYou can select the following options from this display.\n\nThis chapter provides additional information for working with PFD definitions.\n\n- v Creating PFD definition\n\n- v Changing PFD definition\n\n- v Copying PFD definition\n\n- v Deleting PFD definition\n\n- v Printing PFD definition\n\n- v Renaming PFD definition\n\n- v Printing database file\n\nSelect 11 (Work with PFD definitions) on the AFP utilities menu on page 139, and press the Enter key. The following display appears:\n\n## Work with PFD Definitions\n\nType options, press Enter. 1=Create 2=Change 3=Copy 4=Delete 6=Print PFD definition 7=Rename 9=Print database file\n\nBottom\n\nParameters or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F9=Retrieve F11=Display names only F12=Cancel\n\nWhen the definition is the first PFD definition to be created, no definition list appears on the display.\n\nThe following tables explain the Work with PFD Definitions display.\n\n- Note: Before you create a PFD definition, you need to create a PFD definition file by using option 1 (Create) on the Work with PFD Definition Files display.\n\n143" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.23035298119758524, + "doc_id": "a8cf463235532728c9861d0bee5354c737c5ef40138a73468db2ebdb1685dd99", + "edit_distance": 0.7272727272727273, + "f1_score": 0.6190476190476191, + "meteor": 0.6896912611198326, + "precision": 0.52, + "pred_md": "## Options\n\n86\n\nTable 11. Work with Source Overlay Files prompts (continued)\n\nTable 12. Work with Source Overlay Files options\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.7647058823529411, + "true_md": "Table11.WorkwithSourceOverlayFilesprompts (continued)\n\nTable12.WorkwithSourceOverlayFilesoptions\n\n## Options\n\n86 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5325020836696004, + "doc_id": "fcd68a9f077d9c703fa8d6776dbff4f19933d9c9b5d5106741b2109f28d44c08", + "edit_distance": 0.4358974358974359, + "f1_score": 0.7924528301886793, + "meteor": 0.8490937746256896, + "precision": 0.7241379310344828, + "pred_md": "428\n\nChoice on the Define Box Detail display:\n\nFormat : 2=Vertical Degree of rotation : 180\n\nFigure 41. Print Example - 8\n\nFigure 41. Print Example - 8\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.875, + "true_md": "Choice on the Define Box Detail display:\n\nFormat : 2=Vertical Degree of rotation : 180\n\nFigure41.PrintExample-8\n\n428 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.38589612050200905, + "doc_id": "e7c6710f02337fcbbe3bf6816409cd19272c0e1f400794fda0374823d4ee1d4f", + "edit_distance": 0.7325581395348837, + "f1_score": 0.7899159663865546, + "meteor": 0.6263161853188929, + "precision": 0.6811594202898551, + "pred_md": "The following display appears when you type data in the fields and press the F10 key.\n\nThe following display appears when you type data in the fields and press the F10 key.\n\n```\nConvert PCD to Page Segment (CVTPCDPAGS) Type choices, press Enter. Page segment . . . . . . . . . . LOGO NAME, *PRV Library . . . . . . . . . . . *CURLIB NAME, *CURLIB From folder . . . . . . . . . . LOGOFLD From PC document . . . . . . . . LOGODOC NAME, *PRV, *PAGSEG Change image size . . . . . . . *NO *SAME, *NO, *YES Bottom F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel F13=How to use this display F24=More keys\n```\n\nPress the Enter key and the following display appears.\n\nChapter 17. Starting and Ending the Resource Management Utility\n\n325", + "recall": 0.94, + "true_md": "## Convert PCD to Page Segment (CVTPCDPAGS)\n\n## Convert PCD to Page Segment (CVTPCDPAGS)\n\nType choices, press Enter.\n\nType choices, press Enter.\n\nBottom F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F10=Additional parameters F12=Cancel F13=How to use this display F24=More keys\n\nBottom F12=Cancel\n\nThe following display appears when you type data in the fields and press the F10 key.\n\nBottom F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel F13=How to use this display F24=More keys\n\nBottom F13=How to use this display\n\nPress the Enter key and the following display appears.\n\nChapter 17. Starting and Ending the Resource Management Utility 325" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.25958657290343434, + "doc_id": "37ecf4d4a311877d7be1cd9045b236120e6bdaef31b58e90b4974eaff588d665", + "edit_distance": 0.5714285714285714, + "f1_score": 0.6060606060606061, + "meteor": 0.713161297576882, + "precision": 0.5, + "pred_md": "## Prompts\n\n206\n\nTable 41. Work with PFD Definition Files prompts\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.7692307692307693, + "true_md": "## Prompts\n\nTable41.WorkwithPFDDefinitionFilesprompts\n\n206 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9662662659785297, + "doc_id": "ae4e9d078e7a19721d71fe57ac5cc8195af827e7a596f5029b80f3e707446a22", + "edit_distance": 0.8762135922330098, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.6934632918377601, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Related Online Information\n\nThe following online information is available on the iSeries system. After pressing the Help key on any menu, press the Help key a second time to see an explanation of how the online information works, including the InfoSeeker function. You can press either the Help key or F1 for help.\n\n## Help for Displays\n\nYou can press the Help key on any display to see information about the display. Two types of help are available:\n\nContextual\n\nExtended\n\nContextual help explains the field on which the cursor is positioned when you press the Help key. For example, it describes the choices available for a prompt. If a system message appears at the bottom of the display, position the cursor on the message and press the Help key to see information about the cause of the message and the appropriate action to take.\n\nExtended help explains the purpose of the display. Extended help appears if you press the Help key when the cursor is outside the areas for which contextual help is available, or if you press F2 (Extended help) when you are looking at the contextual help.\n\nTo exit the online information, press F3 (Exit). You return to the display where you pressed the Help key.\n\n## InfoSeeker\n\nInfoSeeker is the iSeries implementation of the IBM BookManager Read architecture; InfoSeeker provides access to online books from any workstation. It provides powerful search and retrieval functions and allows the grouping of information to meet individual installation needs. InfoSeeker can read any book created by the IBM BookManager BUILD license programs (available for VM, MVS, and OS/2 systems).\n\nTo use InfoSeeker, press the Help key, then press F11 (InfoSeeker). You can also use InfoSeeker by selecting option 20 (InfoSeeker) on the GO INFO menu.\n\n## Help for Control Language Commands\n\nTo see prompts for parameters for a control language command, type the command, then press F4 (Prompt) instead of the Enter key. To see extended help for the command, type the command and press the Help key. You can see contextual help for CL commands also.\n\nChapter 1. What are the IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries?\n\n19", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## Related Online Information\n\n## Help for Displays\n\n## InfoSeeker\n\n## Help for Control Language Commands\n\nTo see prompts for parameters for a control language command, type the command, then press F4 (Prompt) instead of the Enter key. To see extended help for the command, type the command and press the Help key. You can see contextual help for CL commands also.\n\nChapter 1. What are the IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries? 19\n\nTo use InfoSeeker, press the Help key, then press F11 (InfoSeeker). You can also use InfoSeeker by selecting option 20 (InfoSeeker) on the GO INFO menu.\n\nInfoSeeker is the iSeries implementation of the IBM BookManager Read architecture; InfoSeeker provides access to online books from any workstation. It provides powerful search and retrieval functions and allows the grouping of information to meet individual installation needs. InfoSeeker can read any book created by the IBM BookManager BUILD license programs (available for VM, MVS, and OS/2 systems).\n\nTo exit the online information, press F3 (Exit). You return to the display where you pressed the Help key.\n\nExtended help explains the purpose of the display. Extended help appears if you press the Help key when the cursor is outside the areas for which contextual help is available, or if you press F2 (Extended help) when you are looking at the contextual help.\n\nContextual help explains the field on which the cursor is positioned when you press the Help key. For example, it describes the choices available for a prompt. If a system message appears at the bottom of the display, position the cursor on the message and press the Help key to see information about the cause of the message and the appropriate action to take.\n\nExtended\n\nContextual\n\nYou can press the Help key on any display to see information about the display. Two types of help are available:\n\nThe following online information is available on the iSeries system. After pressing the Help key on any menu, press the Help key a second time to see an explanation of how the online information works, including the InfoSeeker function. You can press either the Help key or F1 for help." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6173195048375957, + "doc_id": "9886f44c7fb18f5b2d7879fa0969d843f930379ca6406a6a1ad78bf37cb6e270", + "edit_distance": 0.4430379746835443, + "f1_score": 0.9090909090909091, + "meteor": 0.6886680749322941, + "precision": 0.9905660377358491, + "pred_md": "32\n\n## Example Actions:\n\n- 1. Type 1 (Create) in the Opt column on the first line of the list.\n- 2. Type OVLFILE in the File column on the first line of the list.\n- 3. Type OVLLIB in the Library column on the first line of the list.\n- 4. Press the Enter key.\n\nThe Create Source Overlay File display appears.\n\nFrom this display you can specify:\n\n- v Whether or not you use DBCS data (this prompt is only displayed on DBCS systems).\n- v A short description of the source overlay file up to 50 SBCS characters long. This description is saved with the source overlay file and displayed when the source overlay files are listed to help you to identify the source overlay files.\n- v Authority given to users who do not have specific authority to the source overlay file.\n\n## Example Actions:\n\n- 1. Do not change the default value for the User specified DBCS data prompt.\n\nNote: This prompt field appears only when your system is DBCS capable.\n\n- 2. Type Source overlay file for exercise for the Text 'description' prompt.\n- 3. Press the Enter key.\n\nThe Work with Source Overlays display appears.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.84, + "true_md": "## Example Actions:\n\nThe Create Source Overlay File display appears.\n\n- 1. Type 1 (Create) in the Opt column on the first line of the list.\n\n- 2. Type OVLFILE in the File column on the first line of the list.\n\n- 3. Type OVLLIB in the Library column on the first line of the list.\n\n- 4. Press the Enter key.\n\n- v Whether or not you use DBCS data (this prompt is only displayed on DBCS systems).\n\n- v A short description of the source overlay file up to 50 SBCS characters long. This description is saved with the source overlay file and displayed when the source overlay files are listed to help you to identify the source overlay files.\n\n- v Authority given to users who do not have specific authority to the source overlay file.\n\n- 1. Do not change the default value for the User specified DBCS data prompt.\n\n- 2. Type Source overlay file for exercise for the Text ’description’ prompt.\n\n- 3. Press the Enter key.\n\nThe Work with Source Overlays display appears.\n\nNote: This prompt field appears only when your system is DBCS capable.\n\n## Example Actions:\n\nFrom this display you can specify:\n\nCreate Source Overlay File File............: OVLFILE Library . ........: OVLLIB Type choices, press Enter. User specified DBCS data . . N Y=Yes, N=No Text 'description' . . . . . Source overlay file for exercise Authority . . . . . . . . . *LIBCRTAUT Name, *LIBCRTAUT, *ALL *CHANGE, *EXCLUDE, *USE F3=Exit F5=Refresh F12=Cancel\n\n32 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "394bbe75468ad2e629d0f3e7adad4d07001ab63f4b61cb2ce8737855121a1dae", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9990234375, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Chapter 10. Work with PFD Definitions\n\n189", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Chapter 10. Work with PFD Definitions 189" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.14587064344542114, + "doc_id": "6ee0b86c1c39d70fba5420c9b6d44d966e2e50b990d7aeb43a1efee99e5278bf", + "edit_distance": 0.5955056179775281, + "f1_score": 0.6538461538461537, + "meteor": 0.42874748505018706, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Bar Code\n\nYou can initiate the define bar code operation by pressing F11 (Bar code) or the change bar code operation by pressing the F14 key with the cursor at a bar code element mark. The key entry area appears replacing the lower part of the image area as shown in the following display.\n\nThe following table explains each field in this display.\n\nThe following table explains each field in this display.\n\nChapter 13. Design Operation\n\n263", + "recall": 0.4857142857142857, + "true_md": "## Bar Code\n\nYou can initiate the define bar code operation by pressing F11 (Bar code) or the change bar code operation by pressing the F14 key with the cursor at a bar code element mark. The key entry area appears replacing the lower part of the image area as shown in the following display.\n\nThe following table explains each field in this display.\n\nChapter 13. Design Operation 263\n\nDesign Overlay Columns: 1- 74 Control . . Source overlay.....STATIONERY *...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7.... 001 002 003 004 %C002 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 More... Define Bar Code Mark . . . . . . : *C002 Measurement method....:Row/Column Position.....Across 10 Down 4 Bar code type . . . Bar code data . . F3=Exit F4=Detail F6=Change measurement method F12=Cancel F24=More keys" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8310224929801406, + "doc_id": "671857adfe4ecd943dd7d49dd11b1bf58d4656e7929e28b170685468605be8ec", + "edit_distance": 0.48563218390804597, + "f1_score": 0.9353233830845772, + "meteor": 0.728649545836986, + "precision": 0.9894736842105263, + "pred_md": "|\n\n|\n\n## Define Printout Specifications\n\n## Define Printout Specifications\n\nType choices, press Enter.\n\nCopies . .\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n. . . . . . . . .\n\n1\n\n1-255\n\nPrint fidelity . .\n\n. .\n\n. .\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n*CONTENT\n\n*CONTENT, *ABSOLUTE\n\nPrint quality\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n*STD\n\n*STD, *DRAFT, *NLQ\n\nPrint on both\n\nsides. . .\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n*NO\n\n*NO, *YES, *TUMBLE\n\nOmit back side page layout\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\nN\n\nY=Yes, N=No\n\nForm\n\ntype\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n*STD\n\nCharacter value, *STD\n\nSource drawer\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n1\n\n1-255, *E1, *CUT\n\nFront side overlay:\n\nOverlay\n\n.\n\n. .\n\n. . . . . . . . .\n\n*NONE\n\nName, *NONE, F4 for list\n\nLibrary\n\n. .\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n*LIBL\n\nName, *LIBL, *CURLIB\n\nOffset across\n\n. . . . . . . . .\n\n.00\n\n0.00-22.75\n\nOffset down\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.00\n\n0.00-22.75\n\nBack side overlay:\n\nOverlay\n\n.\n\n. .\n\n. . . . . . . . .\n\n*NONE\n\nName, *NONE, F4 for list\n\nLibrary\n\n. .\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n*LIBL\n\nName, *LIBL, *CURLIB\n\nOffset across\n\n. . . . . . . . .\n\n.00\n\n0.00-22.75\n\nOffset down\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.00\n\n0.00-22.75\n\nMore...\n\nF3=Exit F4=Prompt\n\nF5=Refresh\n\nF12=Cancel\n\nThe Define Printout Specifications display allows you to define how the printout will be printed, such as:\n\n- v Number of copies\n- v Print quality\n- v Source drawer\n\nChapter 10. Work with PFD Definitions\n\n187", + "recall": 0.8867924528301887, + "true_md": "## Define Printout Specifications\n\nDefine Printout Specifications Type choices, press Enter. Copies . ............. 1 1-255 Print fidelity . . . . . ..... *CONTENT *CONTENT, *ABSOLUTE Print quality .......... *STD *STD, *DRAFT, *NLQ Print on both sides. . ...... *NO *NO, *YES, *TUMBLE Omit back side page layout.... N Y=Yes, N=No Form type ............ *STD Character value, *STD Source drawer .......... 1 1-255, *E1, *CUT Front side overlay: Overlay . . .......... *NONE Name, *NONE, F4 for list Library . .......... *LIBL Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB Offset across ......... .00 0.00-22.75 Offset down .......... Back side overlay: Overlay . . .......... *NONE Name, *NONE, F4 for list Library . .......... *LIBL Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB Offset across ......... .00 0.00-22.75 Offset down .......... More... F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel\n\nDefine Printout Specifications Type choices, press Enter. Form definition.............. *DEVD Name, *DEVD, *INLINE Library.......... *CONTENT Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB Bottom F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel\n\nThe Define Printout Specifications display allows you to define how the printout will be printed, such as:\n\n- v Number of copies\n\n- v Print quality\n\n- v Source drawer\n\nChapter 10. Work with PFD Definitions 187" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "1952df86130f44b2fdf74fd9cf693af08651b1261d7d63c45f54a18561658d03", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9976851851851852, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Chapter 13. Design Operation\n\n293", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Chapter 13. Design Operation 293" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7408851815106874, + "doc_id": "cf88dae947ae5304ab930c769aeddcd09ea091e20d3698068e6158d520322004", + "edit_distance": 0.18823529411764706, + "f1_score": 0.9411764705882353, + "meteor": 0.8356959769553755, + "precision": 0.9795918367346939, + "pred_md": "74\n\nUsing the Exit Overlay Utility display, you can specify to:\n\n- v Save the source overlay\n- v Exit creating or changing the source overlay without saving it.\n- v Resume the overlay utility session.\n\nStep 4. Type 1 in the Option prompt, and press the Enter key. The Save Source Overlay display appears.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.9056603773584906, + "true_md": "## Exit Overlay Utility\n\nType choices, press Enter.\n\nF12=Cancel\n\nUsing the Exit Overlay Utility display, you can specify to:\n\n- v Save the source overlay\n\n- v Exit creating or changing the source overlay without saving it.\n\n- v Resume the overlay utility session.\n\n- Step 4. Type 1 in the Option prompt, and press the Enter key. The Save Source Overlay display appears.\n\n74 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.3641896921561933, + "doc_id": "67954aa9958c44d5f179ced630d584681cd5efb9fed4894e2e1bd7e899c27912", + "edit_distance": 0.7376543209876543, + "f1_score": 0.7891891891891892, + "meteor": 0.5439613392101478, + "precision": 0.9864864864864865, + "pred_md": "## 6=Print a Source Overlay\n\nTo print a source overlay, do the following on the Work with Source Overlays display on page 61.\n\n- 1. Type a 6 in the Opt column beside the source overlay.\n- 2. Press Enter.\n\nThe specified source overlay is printed.\n\n## 7=Rename a Source Overlay\n\nTo rename a source overlay, do the following on the Work with Source Overlays display on page 61.\n\n- 1. Type a 7 in the Opt column beside the source overlay.\n- 2. Press Enter.\n\nThe Rename Member display appears. Type the new name of the source overlay in the New member prompt.\n\n## 9=Create Overlay\n\nTo create an overlay object from a source overlay, perform the following steps on the Work with Source Overlays display on page 61.\n\n- 1. Type a 9 in the Opt column beside the source overlay.\n- 2. Press Enter.\n\nThe Create Overlay display appears:\n\nUsing this display, you can create an overlay object from the source overlay that you created using the overlay utility.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide\n\n80", + "recall": 0.6576576576576577, + "true_md": "## 6=Print a Source Overlay\n\n## 7=Rename a Source Overlay\n\n## 9=Create Overlay\n\nUsing this display, you can create an overlay object from the source overlay that you created using the overlay utility.\n\nTo print a source overlay, do the following on the Work with Source Overlays display on page 61.\n\nThe specified source overlay is printed.\n\nTo rename a source overlay, do the following on the Work with Source Overlays display on page 61.\n\nThe Rename Member display appears. Type the new name of the source overlay in the New member prompt.\n\nTo create an overlay object from a source overlay, perform the following steps on the Work with Source Overlays display on page 61.\n\nThe Create Overlay display appears:\n\nCreate Overlay File............: OUFILE Library . ........: OULIB Source overlay . . . . . . . : OVL1 Text............: Overlay 1 Type choices, press Enter. Create overlay ....... Y Y=Yes, N=No Overlay . ......... OVL1 Name Library ......... OULIB Name, *CURLIB Text 'description' . . . . . Overlay 1 Include grid . ....... N Y=Yes, N=No Replace if exists . . . . . Print overlay ....... N Y=Yes, N=No Authority . . . . . . . . . *LIBCRTAUT Name, *LIBCRTAUT, *ALL *CHANGE, *EXCLUDE, *USE F3=Exit F5=Refresh F12=Cancel\n\n80 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\n- 1. Type a 9 in the Opt column beside the source overlay.\n\n- 2. Press Enter.\n\n- 2. Press Enter.\n\n- 1. Type a 7 in the Opt column beside the source overlay.\n\n- 1. Type a 6 in the Opt column beside the source overlay.\n\n- 2. Press Enter." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4345900051081388, + "doc_id": "7a0cf07387c2935833f674199cef4f0be27cc0d43953198c09b47ed2d363d292", + "edit_distance": 0.785622593068036, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.4851278070291936, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## SPECIFICATIONS\n\n## Model AY11228\n\n- 1. Interpupillary Adjustment: 55mm - 75mm\n- 2. Working Stage Diameter: 95mm\n- 3. Focus Knob Adjustment Range: 60mm\n- 4. Elevator Adjustment Range: 110mm\n- 5. Right Diopter Adjustment Range: +4 to -6 dopters\n- 6. Illumination: Input Voltage: 110V AC or 220V Output: Oblique illumination: 12V 10W Halogen Lamp\n\n## Model AY11232\n\n- 1. Interpupillary Adjustment: 55mm - 75mm\n- 2. Working Stage Diameter: 95mm\n- 3. Focus Knob Adjustment Range: >50mm\n- 4. Elevator Adjustment Range: 110mm\n- 5. Diopter Adjustment Range: +/- 5 diopters\n- 6. Illumination:\n- Input Voltage: 110V AC or 220V Output: Oblique Illumination: 12V 10W Halogen Lamp Transmitted Illumination: 12V 10W Halogen Lamp\n\n## Optical Specifications - Model AY11228\n\n## Optical Specifications - Model AY11232\n\n7\n\n8\n\n## PARTS LIST\n\n## Model AY11228\n\n## OPERATION\n\n## Model AY11228\n\n## Model AY11232\n\n- 1. Remove components from package. identify all parts before assembling.\n- 2. Tighten the knob on the stand to prevent the elevator from sliding down.\n- 3. Fix the binocular body on the stand with the tightening screw.\n- 4. Check the input voltage to ensure that it conforms to the microscopes requirement.\n\n## SELECTING THE ILLUMINATION\n\n- 1. Depending on microscope use, select oblique or transmitted illumination.\n- 2. The Brightness Adjustment knobs change the oblique or transmitted light independently. The transmitted illuminator fluorescent lamp cannot be adjusted.\n- 3. The angle of the oblique lamp can be adjusted to ensure optimum lighting of the sample.\n- 1. Remove components from package. identify all parts before assembling.\n- 2. Check the input voltage to ensure that it conforms to the microscopes requirement.\n\n## SELECTING THE ILLUMINATION\n\n- 1. Depending on microscope use, select oblique or transmitted illumination.\n- 2. The Brightness Adjustment Knobs change the oblique or transmitted light independently. The transmitted illuminator fluorescent lamp cannot be adjusted.\n- 3. The angle of the oblique lamp can be adjusted to ensure optimum lighting of the sample.\n\n## CHANGING THE INTERPUPILLARY DISTANCE\n\n- 1. The distance between the observer's pupils is the interpupillary distance.\n- 2. To adjust the interpupillary distance rotate the prism caps until both eyes coincide with the image in the eyepiece.\n\n## Model AY11232", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## SPECIFICATIONS\n\n## PARTS LIST\n\n## Model AY11228\n\n## Model AY11228 1. Interpupillary Adjustment: 55mm - 75mm\n\n## Model AY11232 1. Interpupillary Adjustment: 55mm - 75mm\n\n## Optical Specifications - Model AY11228\n\n## Optical Specifications - Model AY11232\n\n## Model AY11232\n\n## OPERATION\n\n## Model AY11228\n\n## Model AY11232\n\n## SELECTING THE ILLUMINATION\n\n## SELECTING THE ILLUMINATION\n\n## CHANGING THE INTERPUPILLARY DISTANCE 1. The distance between the observer's\n\n- 8 pupils is the interpupillary distance. 2. To adjust the interpupillary distance rotate the prism caps until both eyes coincide with the image in the eyepiece. \n\n- DISTANCE 1. The distance between the observer's pupils is the interpupillary distance. 2. To adjust the interpupillary distance\n\n- adjusted. 3. The angle of the oblique lamp can be adjusted to ensure optimum lighting of the sample.\n\n- oblique or transmitted illumination. 2. The Brightness Adjustment Knobs change the oblique or transmitted light independently. The transmitted illuminator fluorescent lamp cannot be adjusted. 3. The angle of the oblique lamp can be\n\n- 1. Depending on microscope use, select oblique or transmitted illumination. 2. The Brightness Adjustment Knobs\n\n8\n\n7\n\n- Model AY11228 1. Interpupillary Adjustment: 55mm - 75mm 2. Working Stage Diameter: 95mm\n\n- 1. Interpupillary Adjustment: 55mm - 75mm 2. Working Stage Diameter: 95mm 3. Focus Knob Adjustment Range: 60mm\n\n- 2. Working Stage Diameter: 95mm 3. Focus Knob Adjustment Range: 60mm 4. Elevator Adjustment Range: 110mm\n\n- 3. Focus Knob Adjustment Range: 60mm 4. Elevator Adjustment Range: 110mm 5. Right Diopter Adjustment Range: +4 to -6 dopters\n\n- 4. Elevator Adjustment Range: 110mm 5. Right Diopter Adjustment Range: +4 to -6 dopters 6. Illumination:\n\n- 5. Right Diopter Adjustment Range: +4 to -6 dopters 6. Illumination: Input Voltage: 110V AC or 220V\n\n- Model AY11232 1. Interpupillary Adjustment: 55mm - 75mm 2. Working Stage Diameter: 95mm\n\n- 1. Interpupillary Adjustment: 55mm - 75mm 2. Working Stage Diameter: 95mm 3. Focus Knob Adjustment Range: >50mm\n\n- 2. Working Stage Diameter: 95mm 3. Focus Knob Adjustment Range: >50mm 4. Elevator Adjustment Range: 110mm\n\n- 3. Focus Knob Adjustment Range: >50mm 4. Elevator Adjustment Range: 110mm 5. Diopter Adjustment Range: +/- 5 diopters\n\n- 4. Elevator Adjustment Range: 110mm 5. Diopter Adjustment Range: +/- 5 diopters 6. Illumination:\n\n- 5. Diopter Adjustment Range: +/- 5 diopters 6. Illumination: Input Voltage: 110V AC or 220V\n\nIllumination: Input Voltage: 110V AC or 220V Output: Oblique Illumination: 12V 10W Halogen Lamp Transmitted Illumination: 12V 10W Halogen Lamp\n\nIllumination: Input Voltage: 110V AC or 220V Output: Oblique illumination: 12V 10W Halogen Lamp\n\n- be adjusted. 3. The angle of the oblique lamp can be adjusted to ensure optimum lighting of the sample.\n\n- oblique or transmitted illumination. 2. The Brightness Adjustment knobs change the oblique or transmitted light independently. The transmitted illuminator fluorescent lamp cannot be adjusted. 3. The angle of the oblique lamp can be\n\n- 1. Depending on microscope use, select oblique or transmitted illumination. 2. The Brightness Adjustment knobs\n\n- 1. Remove components from package. identify all parts before assembling. 2. Tighten the knob on the stand to\n\n- identify all parts before assembling. 2. Tighten the knob on the stand to prevent the elevator from sliding down. 3. Fix the binocular body on the stand\n\n- down. 3. Fix the binocular body on the stand with the tightening screw. 4. Check the input voltage to ensure that\n\n- with the tightening screw. 4. Check the input voltage to ensure that it conforms to the microscopes requirement.\n\n- identify all parts before assembling. 2. Check the input voltage to ensure that it conforms to the microscopes requirement.\n\n- 1. Remove components from package. identify all parts before assembling. 2. Check the input voltage to ensure that" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8769011609658357, + "doc_id": "7900e0f925c863ca0a2ff3b7559742a971f8d4fc5d45c5ce41a493981f5e7f90", + "edit_distance": 0.5362903225806451, + "f1_score": 0.9709543568464729, + "meteor": 0.8990725039458771, + "precision": 0.9669421487603306, + "pred_md": "## Chapter 4. Starting and Ending the Overlay Utility\n\nThis chapter provides additional information for starting and ending the Overlay Utility.\n\n## Starting the Overlay Utility\n\nYou can start the Overlay Utility by typing either of the following commands on the command line and pressing Enter.\n\n- 1. STRAFPU (Start Advanced Function Printing Utilities)\n- 2. STROVLU (Start Overlay Utility)\n\nIf you start by using STRAFPU , the following display appears:\n\n```\nAFPU IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries Select one of the following: Overlay Utility 1. Work with source overlays 2. Work with source overlay files Print Format Utility 11. Work with PFD definitions 12. Work with PFD definition files 13. Print database file member 14. Print AFP Utilities tutorial Resource Management Utility 21. Convert to page segment 22. Work with overlays 23. Work with page segments Selection or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel F16=System main menu (C) COPYRIGHT IBM CORP. 1991, 1993.\n```\n\nYou can start the following two Overlay Utility functions from this menu:\n\nOption Function\n\n- 1 Work with source overlays\n- 2 Work with source overlay files\n\nThe following describes the options available on the above menu. To select one of the following, type the number of the option on the command line, and press Enter.\n\n59", + "recall": 0.975, + "true_md": "## Chapter 4. Starting and Ending the Overlay Utility\n\n## Starting the Overlay Utility\n\nThis chapter provides additional information for starting and ending the Overlay Utility.\n\nYou can start the Overlay Utility by typing either of the following commands on the command line and pressing Enter.\n\nIf you start by using STRAFPU , the following display appears:\n\n- 1. STRAFPU (Start Advanced Function Printing Utilities)\n\n- 2. STROVLU (Start Overlay Utility)\n\nYou can start the following two Overlay Utility functions from this menu:\n\nThe following describes the options available on the above menu. To select one of the following, type the number of the option on the command line, and press Enter.\n\nAFPU IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries Select one of the following: Overlay Utility 1. Work with source overlays 2. Work with source overlay files Print Format Utility 11. Work with PFD definitions 12. Work with PFD definition files 13. Print database file member 14. Print AFP Utilities tutorial Resource Management Utility 21. Convert to page segment 22. Work with overlays 23. Work with page segments Selection or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel F16=System main menu (C) COPYRIGHT IBM CORP. 1991, 1993.\n\n59" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.066409537370516, + "doc_id": "c8dcfce031ffb9d85954f93ab78fcd6baa42c74f2d320180849a67c669051f93", + "edit_distance": 0.6440677966101694, + "f1_score": 0.6091954022988506, + "meteor": 0.3458257832094729, + "precision": 0.9814814814814815, + "pred_md": "48\n\nThe following display appears with the completion message.\n\nSource overlay STATIONERY has been created in file OVLFILE in library OVLLIB, and it is shown in the list.\n\nExample Action: Press the F3 key to complete the source overlay creation.\n\nThe following display appears.\n\nSource overlay file OVLFILE, which contains source overlay STATIONERY, has been created in library OVLLIB, and it is shown in the list.\n\nExample Action: Press the F3 key to exit from this display.\n\nThe IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries menu appears.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.44166666666666665, + "true_md": "The following display appears with the completion message.\n\nSource overlay STATIONERY has been created in file OVLFILE in library OVLLIB, and it is shown in the list.\n\nExample Action: Press the F3 key to complete the source overlay creation.\n\nThe following display appears.\n\nSource overlay file OVLFILE, which contains source overlay STATIONERY, has been created in library OVLLIB, and it is shown in the list.\n\nExample Action: Press the F3 key to exit from this display.\n\nThe IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries menu appears.\n\n48 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\n## Work with Source Overlays\n\n## Work with Source Overlay Files\n\nFile .......... OVLFILE Name, F4 for list Library . . ...... OVLLIB Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB Source overlay . . . . . *ALL Name, generic*, *ALL Position to....... Starting characters Type options, press Enter. 1=Create 2=Change 3=Copy 4=Delete 6=Print 7=Rename 9=Create overlay Source Opt Overlay Text Changed STATIONERY Sample Form number 3 12/12/90 Bottom Parameters or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F9=Retrieve F11=Display names only F12=Cancel Source overlay STATIONERY saved in file OVLFILE successfully.\n\nLibrary . ........ OVLLIB Name, *USRLIBL, *LIBL, *CURLIB... File .......... *ALL Name, generic*, *ALL Position to....... Starting characters Type options, press Enter. 1=Create 2=Change 3=Copy 4=Delete 8=Display description 12=Work with source overlays Opt File Library Text Changed OVLFILE OVLLIB Source overlay file for exercise 12/12/90 Bottom Parameters or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel Source overlay file OVLFILE created in library OVLLIB." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6385925180488682, + "doc_id": "b168f0b50e082003dc3032bcb067fef4d2aa3f47a30c0cdd75335ba488586e7d", + "edit_distance": 0.5625, + "f1_score": 0.8888888888888888, + "meteor": 0.7155612244897959, + "precision": 0.9230769230769231, + "pred_md": "iSeries Advanced Series\n\n## Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide\n\nS544-5349-02", + "recall": 0.8571428571428571, + "true_md": "# Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\niSeries Advanced Series\n\nS544-5349-02" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.31569611706824424, + "doc_id": "1c0c23c6f1354a9c88d21bb231a124ca46162b5dd04f7f61129f7ac408eea2e5", + "edit_distance": 0.5714285714285714, + "f1_score": 0.6060606060606061, + "meteor": 0.713161297576882, + "precision": 0.5, + "pred_md": "## Prompts\n\n352\n\nTable 75. Work with Page segments Function prompts\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.7692307692307693, + "true_md": "## Prompts\n\n352 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\nTable75.WorkwithPagesegmentsFunctionprompts" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.2833011785908051, + "doc_id": "6bf5bb88e24928190f9a23a7d2fdda040436a927cf03edc56b32ffc9b959311f", + "edit_distance": 0.7630331753554502, + "f1_score": 0.7154471544715447, + "meteor": 0.7461689513750865, + "precision": 0.5714285714285714, + "pred_md": "132\n\n## Example Action: Press the F3 key to exit from creating a PFD definition.\n\n```\nExit PFD Definition Type choices, press Enter. Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1=Save and exit 2=Exit without saving 3=Resume PFU session Return to PFD definition list . . Y Y=Yes, N=No F12=Cancel\n```\n\n## Example Actions:\n\n- 1. Type 1 in the Option prompt.\n- 2. Press the Enter key.\n\n## The Save PFD Definition display appears.\n\n```\nSave PFD Definition Type choices, press Enter. PFD definition . . . . . . . . . . . PRODUCTLBL Name, F4 for list File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PFDFILE Name, F4 for list Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . MYLIB Name, *CURLIB Text 'description' . . . . . . . . . PFD exercise Delete removed elements . . . . . . N Y=Yes, N=No F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel\n```\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.9565217391304348, + "true_md": "Example Action: Press the F3 key to exit from creating a PFD definition.\n\nThe Save PFD Definition display appears.\n\n## Example Actions:\n\n## Save PFD Definition\n\n## Exit PFD Definition\n\nType choices, press Enter.\n\nF4=Prompt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel\n\nF12=Cancel\n\n- 1. Type 1 in the Option prompt.\n\n- 2. Press the Enter key.\n\nType choices, press Enter.\n\n132 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9359316961247433, + "doc_id": "a52fa0c9339f9038e76f8ca424adf6a610083523de9925d6e5f7ba1ee6618bb0", + "edit_distance": 0.5369649805447471, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9491003996384478, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Appendix B. Rotation, Format, and Shading Pattern in Box\n\n## Format, Text Placement and Rotation\n\nYou can specify the rotation of an overlay or a page, and the text position in a box element.\n\nOn the Define Box Detail display, you can specify the format, the text placement and the rotation in the Format prompt, in the Text placement prompt and in the Degree of rotation prompt respectively.\n\nYou can specify the following values in the Format prompt.\n\n- 1 Horizontal\n- 2 Vertical\n- 3 Vertical, right to left\n\nNote: The value 3 can be specified only when Y is specified for the user-specified DBCS data prompt on the Create Source Overlay File display or the Create PFD Definition File display and the iSeries system is double byte capable.\n\n## Text Placement\n\nYou can specify the following values in the Horizontal prompt and the Vertical prompt when the format is horizontal.\n\n- v Horizontal prompt\n- 1 Left\n- 2 Center\n- 3 Right\n- 4 Balance\n- v Vertical prompt\n- 1 Top\n- 2 Center\n- 3 Bottom\n\nYou can specify the following values in the Horizontal prompt and the Vertical prompt when the format is vertical or vertical right to left.\n\n- v Horizontal prompt\n- 1 Left\n- 2 Center\n- 3 Right\n- v Vertical prompt\n- 1 Top\n- 2 Center\n- 3 Bottom\n- 4 Balance\n\n## Format\n\n419", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## Appendix B. Rotation, Format, and Shading Pattern in Box\n\n## Format, Text Placement and Rotation\n\nYou can specify the rotation of an overlay or a page, and the text position in a box element.\n\nOn the Define Box Detail display, you can specify the format, the text placement and the rotation in the Format prompt, in the Text placement prompt and in the Degree of rotation prompt respectively.\n\nYou can specify the following values in the Format prompt.\n\nYou can specify the following values in the Horizontal prompt and the Vertical prompt when the format is horizontal.\n\nYou can specify the following values in the Horizontal prompt and the Vertical prompt when the format is vertical or vertical right to left.\n\n419\n\n- v Horizontal prompt\n\n- v Vertical prompt\n\n- v Horizontal prompt\n\n- v Vertical prompt\n\n## Format\n\n## Text Placement\n\n- 1 Horizontal\n\n- 2 Vertical\n\n- 3 Vertical, right to left\n\nNote: The value 3 can be specified only when Y is specified for the user-specified DBCS data prompt on the Create Source Overlay File display or the Create PFD Definition File display and the iSeries system is double byte capable.\n\n- 1 Left\n\n- 2 Center\n\n- 3 Right\n\n- 4 Balance\n\n- 1 Top\n\n- 2 Center\n\n- 3 Bottom\n\n- 1 Left\n\n- 2 Center\n\n- 3 Right\n\n- 1 Top\n\n- 2 Center\n\n- 3 Bottom\n\n- 4 Balance" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8906412660680538, + "doc_id": "59ff9b04ae854e3453aa8e58367ce1025745cb5efbae70e85876089bf8990fa0", + "edit_distance": 0.47305389221556887, + "f1_score": 0.9536423841059603, + "meteor": 0.9242550550570786, + "precision": 0.96, + "pred_md": "46\n\n## Saving the Source Overlay\n\nExample Action: Press the F3 key (Exit).\n\nThe following display appears.\n\n```\nCreate Source Overlay File . . . . . . . . . . . . : OVLFILE Library . . . . . . . . . : OVLLIB Source overlay . . . . . . . : STATIONERY Type options, press Enter. 1=Select Opt Action Define overlay specifications Work with source overlay fonts Design overlay F3=Exit F5=Refresh F9=Select all\n```\n\nExample Action: Press the F3 key to exit from this display.\n\nThe following display appears.\n\n```\nExit Overlay Utility Type choices, press Enter. Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1=Save and exit 2=Exit without saving 3=Resume Overlay Utility session Return to source overlay list . . Y Y=Yes, N=No F12=Cancel\n```\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.9473684210526315, + "true_md": "## Saving the Source Overlay\n\nExample Action: Press the F3 key (Exit).\n\nThe following display appears.\n\nExample Action: Press the F3 key to exit from this display.\n\nThe following display appears.\n\n46 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\nCreate Source Overlay File............: OVLFILE Library . ........: OVLLIB Source overlay . . . . . . . : STATIONERY Type options, press Enter. 1=Select Opt Action Define overlay specifications Work with source overlay fonts Design overlay F3=Exit F5=Refresh F9=Select all\n\nExit Overlay Utility Type choices, press Enter. Option . ............ 1 1=Save and exit 2=Exit without saving 3=Resume Overlay Utility session Return to source overlay list . . Y Y=Yes, N=No F12=Cancel" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8575785004585921, + "doc_id": "566f33d2949667054052dc29857d3d79251893f897ceafd03a60297c4f723038", + "edit_distance": 0.7319148936170212, + "f1_score": 0.9262295081967213, + "meteor": 0.7969831118349516, + "precision": 0.9262295081967213, + "pred_md": "Basic English Language Skills\n\nTo help you choose the right words in various situations, we've compiled a list of commonly confused words in the English language, along with examples of how to use them correctly:\n\n## Accept/Except\n\nTo 'accept' something means to receive or approve of it. E.g. Jane accepted the apple gratefully.\n\n'Except' means that something is being excluded. E.g. She would eat any fruit except oranges.\n\n## Advice/Advise\n\n'Advice' is a noun.\n\nE.g. John gave him advice regarding his bank loan.\n\n'Advise' is a verb.\n\nE.g. John advised him that it was a bad idea to take out a third bank loan.\n\n## Affect/Effect\n\nTo 'affect' something is to make some change to it. E.g. The power cuts affect the company's ability to manufacture goods.\n\nTo 'effect' something is to bring it about, to put it into effect. E.g. He effected the change in schedule when he realised that production was too slow.\n\nAn 'effect' is a change that occurs as a consequence of something else.\n\nE.g. The power cuts had a negative effect on the company's ability to manufacture goods.\n\nDeveloped for Oxbridge Academy", + "recall": 0.9262295081967213, + "true_md": "To help you choose the right words in various situations, we’ve compiled a list of commonly confused words in the English language, along with examples of how to use them correctly:\n\n## Accept/Except\n\n## Affect/Effect\n\nAn “effect” is a change that occurs as a consequence of something else. E.g. The power cuts had a negative effect on the company’s ability to manufacture goods.\n\nTo “effect” something is to bring it about, to put it into effect. E.g. He effected the change in schedule when he realised that production was too slow.\n\nTo “affect” something is to make some change to it. E.g. The power cuts affect the company’s ability to manufacture goods.\n\n“Advise” is a verb. E.g. John advised him that it was a bad idea to take out a third bank loan.\n\n“Advice” is a noun. E.g. John gave him advice regarding his bank loan.\n\n“Except” means that something is being excluded. E.g. She would eat any fruit except oranges.\n\nTo “accept” something means to receive or approve of it. E.g. Jane accepted the apple gratefully.\n\n## Advice/Advise\n\nBasic English Language Skills\n\nDeveloped for Oxbridge Academy" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8784353258751683, + "doc_id": "2d78aa73ecb8fb5a77e8a2df5506b1d3374f871e1570431d52561f60a2cc7d18", + "edit_distance": 0.36363636363636365, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9987321562734786, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Program Number:\n\n5722-AF1\n\nPrinted in the United States of America on recycled paper containing 10% recovered post-consumer fiber.\n\nS544-5349-02", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "S544-5349-02\n\nPrinted in the United States of America on recycled paper containing 10% recovered post-consumer fiber.\n\nProgram Number: 5722-AF1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.841397006808535, + "doc_id": "0ba2e530d6b04545fa9fbf12f55ba0566a865f5d0b17a023202d150b6acecf85", + "edit_distance": 0.3225806451612903, + "f1_score": 0.9435897435897435, + "meteor": 0.834523220591875, + "precision": 0.989247311827957, + "pred_md": "276\n\nPress Enter, the F3, or F12 key after you specify the parameters. The Design display will be displayed.\n\nSelect Page Segment: When you are designing a record layout, the Select Field in Record Format display appears to select a variable data field name from the field list of the database file. If a variable field name is selected, the contents of the field will be substituted as the page segment name or will be mapped to a page segment name by the Specify Mapping Object Name function.\n\nThen press the F11 key to show the Select Page Segment display to select an existing page segment object from the list.\n\nWhen you are designing an overlay or a page layout, and you press F4 (Detail) in the Place Page Segment Detail display with the cursor in the Page segment prompt, the following display appears to select a page segment name. In the following display, you can select a page segment name by entering 1 in the Opt column and pressing Enter.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.9019607843137255, + "true_md": "Press Enter, the F3, or F12 key after you specify the parameters. The Design display will be displayed.\n\nSelect Page Segment: When you are designing a record layout, the Select Field in Record Format display appears to select a variable data field name from the field list of the database file. If a variable field name is selected, the contents of the field will be substituted as the page segment name or will be mapped to a page segment name by the Specify Mapping Object Name function.\n\nWhen you are designing an overlay or a page layout, and you press F4 (Detail) in the Place Page Segment Detail display with the cursor in the Page segment prompt, the following display appears to select a page segment name. In the following display, you can select a page segment name by entering 1 in the Opt column and pressing Enter.\n\nThen press the F11 key to show the Select Page Segment display to select an existing page segment object from the list.\n\n276 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\n## Select Field in Record Format\n\nF5=Refresh\n\nF11=Select Object\n\nF12=Cancel\n\nBOTTOM\n\nType an option, press Enter. 1=Select" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.13310483730047679, + "doc_id": "fecd2ddbc625c67b702fb74530d0f1b73bf4fdf3766090a6c6cb39c833c1f7f2", + "edit_distance": 0.8325358851674641, + "f1_score": 0.6923076923076923, + "meteor": 0.3811965512587406, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Step 2 - Creating a Source Overlay File\n\nExample Actions:\n\n- 1. Type 2 on the command line.\n- 2. Press the Enter key.\n\nThe Work with Source Overlay Files display appears.\n\nExample Action: Type OVLLIB in the Library prompt and press the Enter key to list source overlay files stored in OVLLIB.\n\nNote: No source overlay file is shown because no source overlay file is stored in OVLLIB.\n\nChapter 3. Getting Started with the Overlay Utility\n\n31", + "recall": 0.5294117647058824, + "true_md": "## Step 2 - Creating a Source Overlay File\n\n## Example Actions:\n\n## Work with Source Overlay Files\n\n## Work with Source Overlay Files\n\n- Note: No source overlay file is shown because no source overlay file is stored in OVLLIB.\n\nChapter 3. Getting Started with the Overlay Utility 31\n\nLibrary ......... OVLLIB Name, *USRLIBL, *LIBL, *CURLIB... File . . ........ *ALL Name, generic*, *ALL Position to....... Starting characters Type options, press Enter. 1=Create 2=Change 3=Copy 4=Delete 7=Rename 8=Display description 12=Work with source overlays Opt File Library Text Changed 1 OVLFILE OVLLIB (No source overlay files in library) Bottom Parameters or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F9=Retrieve F11=Display names only F12=Cancel\n\nType choices, press the Enter key.\n\nThe Work with Source Overlay Files display appears.\n\n- 1. Type 2 on the command line.\n\n- 2. Press the Enter key.\n\nParameters or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel\n\nExample Action: Type OVLLIB in the Library prompt and press the Enter key to list source overlay files stored in OVLLIB." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7071067811865475, + "doc_id": "3ae5ca3cc3fc8bef93ad4a899909e426e79d38acd55e846385dceebd7c566260", + "edit_distance": 0.2, + "f1_score": 0.8421052631578947, + "meteor": 0.8017676767676769, + "precision": 0.8888888888888888, + "pred_md": "482\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.8, + "true_md": "482 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9752769517663666, + "doc_id": "e9823ed7d3a322e4633aa3ac893dda947a4c452fe27b848a2e222078e13fda09", + "edit_distance": 0.44988344988344986, + "f1_score": 0.9923664122137404, + "meteor": 0.9377460532159617, + "precision": 0.9923664122137404, + "pred_md": "image area. In AFP Utilities, an area on the display where the image of an AFP resource is displayed when a user designs the resource. See also key entry area .\n\nimage data stream. An advanced function printing data stream that represents image data. See also IO1 and IM1 .\n\nImage Object Content Architecture (IOCA). A defined data stream used to store raster image data. The images in a Mixed Object:Document Content Architecture document are stored using IOCA. See also IO1 and Mixed Object:Document Content Architecture .\n\nIM1. A data tower of an intelligent printer data stream that represents image data. See also IO1 .\n\nindex search. A searchable part of the online help information that provides \" how-to \" and explanatory topics to supplement the help for specific displays. The system-recognized identifier for the object type is *SCHIDX.\n\nIMDS. The Image Data Stream (IOCA). Advanced Function Printing Utilities can create the page segment from IMDS. See image Object Content Architecture (IOCA) and IO1 .\n\ninput field. A field specified in a display file or database file that is reserved for information supplied by a user. Contrast with output field .\n\nintegrity. See data integrity .\n\nintelligent printer data stream (IPDS). An all-points-addressable data stream that allows users to position text, images, and graphics at any defined point on a printed page.\n\ninteractive. Pertaining to the dialog-like exchange of information between people and a computer. Contrast with batch .\n\nIOCA. See Image Object Content Architecture (IOCA) .\n\nIO1. A data tower of an intelligent printer data stream that represents image data. Both IM1 and IO1 represent a raster pattern, but IO1 commands provide additional functions. See also IM1 and Image Object Content Architecture (IOCA) .\n\nIPDS. See intelligent printer data stream (IPDS) .\n\njob. A unit of work to be done by a computer.\n\njob description. A system object that defines how a job is to be processed. The object name is *JOBD.\n\njob log. A record of requests submitted to the system by a job, the messages related to the requests, and the actions performed by the system on the job. The job log is maintained by the system program.\n\njob name. The name of the job as identified to the system. For an interactive job, the job is assigned the name of the work station at which the job was started; for a batch job, the name is specified in the command used to submit the job. Contrast with qualified job name .\n\nKanji. Characters originating from the Chinese characters used in the Japanese written language.\n\nkey entry area. In AFP Utilities, an area shown at the lower part of the image area for entering the parameters for an element. See also image area .\n\nlabel. (1) The name of a file on a diskette or tape. (2) An identifier of a command or program statement generally used for branching.\n\nleader. The blank section of tape at the beginning of a reel.\n\nlibrary. (1) A system object that serves as a directory to other objects. A library groups related objects, and allows the user to find objects by name. The system-recognized identifier for the object type is *LIB. Compare with folder and document library . (2) The set of publications for a system.\n\nlibrary list. A list that indicates which libraries are to be searched and the order in which they are to be searched. The system-recognized identifier is *LIBL.\n\nlibrary name. A user-defined word that names a library.\n\nlicensed program. A separately orderable program, supplied by IBM, that performs functions related to processing user data. Examples of licensed programs are , , ,, and so on.\n\nlines per inch (lpi). The number of characters that can be printed vertically within an inch.\n\nlist view. In AFP Utilities, the presentation of a display shown while a user is in list edit mode. See also screen view .\n\nlogo. (1) A letter, combination of letters, or symbol used to represent an entire word (abbreviation for logogram). (2) The display that identifies the IBM Corporation and the program name on licensed programs.\n\nlpi. See lines per inch (lpi) .\n\nmapping. A representation of one thing to another.\n\nmapping object. A function of to map a database field value to an object name.\n\nmark. See element mark .\n\nmatrix. An arrangement in rows and columns.\n\nGlossary\n\n471", + "recall": 0.9923664122137404, + "true_md": "image area. In AFP Utilities, an area on the display where the image of an AFP resource is displayed when a user designs the resource. See also key entry area .\n\nimage data stream. An advanced function printing data stream that represents image data. See also IO1 and IM1 .\n\nImage Object Content Architecture (IOCA). A defined data stream used to store raster image data. The images in a Mixed Object:Document Content Architecture document are stored using IOCA. See also IO1 and Mixed Object:Document Content Architecture .\n\nIM1. A data tower of an intelligent printer data stream that represents image data. See also IO1 .\n\nindex search. A searchable part of the online help information that provides † how-to † and explanatory topics to supplement the help for specific displays. The system-recognized identifier for the object type is *SCHIDX.\n\nIMDS. The Image Data Stream (IOCA). Advanced Function Printing Utilities can create the page segment from IMDS. See image Object Content Architecture (IOCA) and IO1 .\n\ninput field. A field specified in a display file or database file that is reserved for information supplied by a user. Contrast with output field .\n\nintegrity. See data integrity .\n\nintelligent printer data stream (IPDS). An all-points-addressable data stream that allows users to position text, images, and graphics at any defined point on a printed page.\n\ninteractive. Pertaining to the dialog-like exchange of information between people and a computer. Contrast with batch .\n\nIOCA. See Image Object Content Architecture (IOCA) .\n\nIO1. A data tower of an intelligent printer data stream that represents image data. Both IM1 and IO1 represent a raster pattern, but IO1 commands provide additional functions. See also IM1 and Image Object Content Architecture (IOCA) .\n\nIPDS. See intelligent printer data stream (IPDS) .\n\njob. A unit of work to be done by a computer.\n\njob description. A system object that defines how a job is to be processed. The object name is *JOBD.\n\njob log. A record of requests submitted to the system by a job, the messages related to the requests, and the actions performed by the system on the job. The job log is maintained by the system program.\n\nmatrix. An arrangement in rows and columns.\n\nmark. See element mark .\n\nmapping object. A function of to map a database field value to an object name.\n\nmapping. A representation of one thing to another.\n\nlpi. See lines per inch (lpi) .\n\nlogo. (1) A letter, combination of letters, or symbol used to represent an entire word (abbreviation for logogram). (2) The display that identifies the IBM Corporation and the program name on licensed programs.\n\nlist view. In AFP Utilities, the presentation of a display shown while a user is in list edit mode. See also screen view .\n\nlines per inch (lpi). The number of characters that can be printed vertically within an inch.\n\nlicensed program. A separately orderable program, supplied by IBM, that performs functions related to processing user data. Examples of licensed programs are,,,,andsoon.\n\nlibrary name. A user-defined word that names a library.\n\nlibrary list. A list that indicates which libraries are to be searched and the order in which they are to be searched. The system-recognized identifier is *LIBL.\n\nlibrary. (1) A system object that serves as a directory to other objects. A library groups related objects, and allows the user to find objects by name. The system-recognized identifier for the object type is *LIB. Compare with folder and document library . (2) The set of publications for a system.\n\nleader. The blank section of tape at the beginning of a reel.\n\nlabel. (1) The name of a file on a diskette or tape. (2) An identifier of a command or program statement generally used for branching.\n\nkey entry area. In AFP Utilities, an area shown at the lower part of the image area for entering the parameters for an element. See also image area .\n\nKanji. Characters originating from the Chinese characters used in the Japanese written language.\n\njob name. The name of the job as identified to the system. For an interactive job, the job is assigned the name of the work station at which the job was started; for a batch job, the name is specified in the command used to submit the job. Contrast with qualified job name .\n\nGlossary 471" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8402694505750592, + "doc_id": "7cee1e3cd51f2e8aeb621a65285f24581b15c6ad76b75d501e04ccb1258e7450", + "edit_distance": 0.25416666666666665, + "f1_score": 0.9779735682819384, + "meteor": 0.9342757729810819, + "precision": 0.9736842105263158, + "pred_md": "## Overlay Utility\n\nThe Overlay Utility enables you to create overlays (electronic forms). Once created, an overlay can be placed on pages of output using iSeries printer file support, Data Description Specifications (DDS) in conjunction with High-Level Language (HLL) application programs, Advanced Print Utility, iSeries page and form definitions, AFP Toolbox, Print Format Utility, and other AFP document enabling applications. Figure 3 shows how an overlay can be merged with data.\n\n## You can:\n\n- v Design an overlay interactively on a display screen.\n- An overlay can contain text with several kinds of fonts, lines, boxes, images, bar codes, and graphics.\n- v Store the source data of the overlay (source overlay) that you designed in your file.\n- v Change the source overlay that was previously stored in the file.\n- v Create an overlay object from the source overlay.\n- v Print the overlay object that was created in the specified library.\n\nFigure 5 shows a sample overlay.\n\nFigure 5 shows a sample overlay.\n\nFigure 5. Sample Overlay (Created by the Overlay Utility)\n\nFigure 5. Sample Overlay (Created by the Overlay Utility)\n\nChapter 1. What are the IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries?\n\n9", + "recall": 0.9823008849557522, + "true_md": "## Overlay Utility\n\nThe Overlay Utility enables you to create overlays (electronic forms). Once created, an overlay can be placed on pages of output using iSeries printer file support, Data Description Specifications (DDS) in conjunction with High-Level Language (HLL) application programs, Advanced Print Utility, iSeries page and form definitions, AFP Toolbox, Print Format Utility, and other AFP document enabling applications. Figure 3 shows how an overlay can be merged with data.\n\nYou can:\n\n- v Design an overlay interactively on a display screen.\n\n- v Store the source data of the overlay (source overlay) that you designed in your file.\n\n- v Change the source overlay that was previously stored in the file.\n\n- v Create an overlay object from the source overlay.\n\n- v Print the overlay object that was created in the specified library.\n\nAn overlay can contain text with several kinds of fonts, lines, boxes, images, bar codes, and graphics.\n\nFigure 5 shows a sample overlay.\n\nFigure5.SampleOverlay(CreatedbytheOverlayUtility)\n\nChapter 1. What are the IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries? 9" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "a7761cbcd7ebd8caca3de4d6f72534eb21611fb80000277930c784afa7c02fea", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999999170615642, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Basic English Language Skills\n\nAll rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, or any information storage or retrieval system, without prior permission in writing from the publisher. Subject to any applicable licensing terms and conditions in the case of electronically supplied publications, a person may engage in fair dealing with a copy of this publication for his or her personal or private use, or his or her research or private study. See Section 12(1)(a) of the Copyright Act 98 of 1978.\n\nThe authors and the publisher have made every effort to obtain permission for and to acknowledge the use of copyright material. Should any infringement of copyright have occurred, please contact the publisher, and every effort will be made to rectify omissions or errors in the event of a reprint or new edition.\n\nDeveloped for Oxbridge Academy - 2015\n\nDeveloped for Oxbridge Academy", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Basic English Language Skills\n\nAll rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, or any information storage or retrieval system, without prior permission in writing from the publisher. Subject to any applicable licensing terms and conditions in the case of electronically supplied publications, a person may engage in fair dealing with a copy of this publication for his or her personal or private use, or his or her research or private study. See Section 12(1)(a) of the Copyright Act 98 of 1978.\n\nThe authors and the publisher have made every effort to obtain permission for and to acknowledge the use of copyright material. Should any infringement of copyright have occurred, please contact the publisher, and every effort will be made to rectify omissions or errors in the event of a reprint or new edition.\n\nDeveloped for Oxbridge Academy - 2015\n\nDeveloped for Oxbridge Academy" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7071067811865475, + "doc_id": "25a2bb585040dd612d8439c3f1b133551615e579691a95ac8c6f0ad1ab9464c2", + "edit_distance": 0.2, + "f1_score": 0.8421052631578947, + "meteor": 0.8017676767676769, + "precision": 0.8888888888888888, + "pred_md": "438\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.8, + "true_md": "438 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "63f2e7702dd9b5e7385592099ca74d1473f6dd236d630148109daf5777b276d5", + "edit_distance": 0.9985575189325641, + "f1_score": 0.05454545454545455, + "meteor": 0.0133499466002136, + "precision": 0.028037383177570093, + "pred_md": "## Contents\n\n.iii\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n| Tables . . | . . | . | . | . | . | . . | | . | . . | . | | . | . | . . . | . | . . | . . | . | . | . | . . | . x | | | . | | | . | | . | | | | | . | | | . . | . |\n|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|-------|--------------------------------|---------|--------------------------------------------------------------|------------------------------------|-------|-------|-----------|-------------------|-------|---------|-----------|-----------|-------------|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------|-----------------|-------|---------|---------|---------|-----------------|---------|-----------|---------|-----------|-------|---------------------|------------------|---------|-------|-----|-------|----|---------|-----|----|----|-----------------------|-----|\n| Figures . . . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | | . . | . | . . | . | . . | . | . | . | . | . | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| Notices . . | . . | . | . | | . . . | . | . | . . | . . | . | . . | . . . . | . | . | . . | . . | . | . . . . | . . . | . . . | . | . | . . . | | . . | | . . | . | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| | | Trademarks and Service Marks . | | | | . . | . | . | | . | . | . . | | . | . | . | | . | | . . | . xv . xvii . . | . | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| About IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries . | | | . | . | . | . . | . | | | | | . . | . | | | . . | . | . | . . | . . | . | xviii | . | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| Who Should Use This Book | | | | | | | | . | . | . | . | | | | . . . | . | | | | | . | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| | | | | | | | . | | | | | . . | | | | | | | | . | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| Part 1. Introduction to IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | . | . . | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| What You Can Do with AFP Utilities for iSeries | . . | . | | . | . | . . | . | . | . . | . . . | . | . . . . . | . . . | . . . | Chapter 1. What are the IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries? | . | | . . | . . . . | . . | . . | . | . . . | . . . | | | . . | . . 5 . 7 | | | | | | . | | | . | . . . . | . |\n| Using Overlays Using Images . | . . . | . . . | . | . | . | . . . | . . | . . | . | . | . . . . | . . | . . | | . . | . . . | . | . | . | . . . . | . | . . | . | . . . . | . 8 . 8 | | | | | | | | | . | | | | . . | |\n| Using Bar Codes | . . | | . | . . | . | . . | . | . . | . . | . | . | . . | . | . | . . | . | . | . . | . | . | . . | . | . | . | | . . . | | . 8 | | | | | | | | | | . | |\n| Using Graphics Overlay Utility | . | . | . | . | . . | . . . | . | . | . | . | . | . . . . | . . | . . | . . . . | . . | | . . | . . | . . | . | . | . | . | . . | | | | | | | | | | | | | . | |\n| . . Print Format Utility | . . | . . . | | . . . | . | . . . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . . | . | . . . | . | . . | | . . | . . | . | . . | | . . | | | . . . | . 9 . 10 12 | | | | | | | | | | . . | |\n| Resource Management Utility | . | | | . | . | . | . . | . . | . | . . | . | . . . | . . . . . | | . . . . . | . . | . | . | . . | . . . | | | . . | | | . . | | . . 13 . | | | | | | | | | | . | |\n| AFP Resource and AFP Utilities for iSeries . Requirements for Use of the AFP Utilities for iSeries. | | | | | . | . | | | . | . . | | . . . | . . . . | . . . . . . | . . . | . . | . . | . | . . | . | . . | . . | . . . . . | | | | | 13 . 13 | | | | | | | | | | . . | |\n| Hardware Requirements | | . | . | . . | . | . . . | . . | . . | . . | . . . | . . | . . | . . . | . . . . . | . . . . | . . | . | | . . | | | . . | . | | | | | 13 | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| Software Requirements | | . | . | | . | . | . | | . | . | | . . . | . | . . . . | . . | . . . . . . . . | . | . . | | . . . | . . . . | . . . . | . . | | | | | 14 14 | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| AFP Utilities Fundamentals (Concepts) Elements . . . . | . | | | . | | . . | . | . | . | . . | . | . . . . | . . . . . | . . . | . . . . . . . | . . . | . . . | . | . . | | . . . | | . . | . . | | | | 14 . 14 | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| Libraries, Files, and Members | | . | . | . | | . | | . . . | . | . | . | | . . . | | . | | | | . | . | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| AFP Utilities for iSeries Displays Function Keys . . | . . | | . | . | . . . | . . . | . . | . . | . | . . | . . | . . | . . | . . | . . . . | | . . . | | . | . | | . . | | | | | . . | . 17 | . . . . | | | | | | | | | | |\n| | | . | | . | . . | . | . . . | . . . . . | . . | | . | . . | . . . | . | . . | . . . | . . . | . . | . . | . . | . | | | . | . . . . . | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| Related Online Information Help for Displays . InfoSeeker . | . | . . | . | . . | . | . . . | . | | . . | . | . | . . | . . | . | . . . . . | . . . | . | . | . . | | | . | | . | | . | . 19 . 19 . 19 . 19 | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| . . . | . . | . | | | Help for Control Language Commands | . | . . | . . | . . | . . | . . | . . | . . | . . . . | . . | . . | | | . . | . | . | . | | | | | | | | . . . | | | | | | | | | |\n| | | | | | . | . . | . | . | . | . | . | | | | | | | | . | | | . | | | | | | . . | . . | | | | | | | | | | |\n| Part 2. Overlay Utility. | | | | | | | | | | | | . | | | | . | . | . | | . . | . | | . . | . | . | . | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| Chapter 2. Introduction to the Overlay Utility. Print Form and Overlay . . | . | | . | . . | . . | . . | . . | . . | . . . . . | . . | . . | . . . | | | . . | . | . . | . . . | . . . | . . | . . . . | | . | . . . | . . | | | . . . . 23 . | | | . . | . . . | | | | | | . | |\n| Source Overlay . . . | . | | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | | | . | | | | . | | . | . . | | . | . . . | . | . . | . . . . | . . . | . . | . 24 . . 24 | . . . | . . . | | | | | | . | | . . . . . . . . | |\n| Overlay Specifications . Overlay Fonts . . Design Overlay . . Operation Flow . . | . . . | . . . . | . . . . | . . . . Chapter 3. Getting Started with the Overlay Utility. | . . . | . . . | . . . | . . . | . . . . . . . . . | . . . | . . . | | . . . . . | . . . . . . | . . . | . . | . . | . . . | . . | . . . . | . . . . . | . . . | . . | . | . . . . . | . | | . 24 . 25 . 26 . | | | . . | | . | . . . . | | . | | . . . . . . . . . . . | . |\n\n.\n\n1\n\niii\n\n3\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n23\n\n.\n\n.\n\n29\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## Contents\n\niii" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5203412353479889, + "doc_id": "54094c9ae6dfdf22ba83d9b08018312fb1258f1ed706c4211a7c1247c2b119a7", + "edit_distance": 0.45454545454545453, + "f1_score": 0.7272727272727273, + "meteor": 0.8630595523581135, + "precision": 0.6, + "pred_md": "Table 80. Convert Page Segment to Files display fields (continued)\n\nChapter 20. Work with Page Segments Function\n\n359", + "recall": 0.9230769230769231, + "true_md": "Table80.ConvertPageSegmenttoFilesdisplayfields (continued)\n\nChapter 20. Work with Page Segments Function 359" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.27676050264093816, + "doc_id": "063097513d8e9785aed9ed3407536d7ad9c5bafd61f7d0756f148bbfa1e139eb", + "edit_distance": 0.5614973262032086, + "f1_score": 0.6703910614525139, + "meteor": 0.46842703852363515, + "precision": 0.9230769230769231, + "pred_md": "## Select Database File\n\nOn this display, the names and the descriptions of database files in the specified library are listed.\n\nThe following table explains each field of the Select Database File display.\n\nTable 27. Select Database File display fields\n\nSpecify 1 in the Opt column beside the database file to select, and press the Enter key.\n\nWhen you specify the database file (and the record format, if necessary), the display goes to 'Design Record Layout' on page 162.\n\nChapter 10. Work with PFD Definitions\n\n159", + "recall": 0.5263157894736842, + "true_md": "## Select Database File\n\nOn this display, the names and the descriptions of database files in the specified library are listed.\n\nThe following table explains each field of the Select Database File display.\n\nSpecify 1 in the Opt column beside the database file to select, and press the Enter key.\n\nWhen you specify the database file (and the record format, if necessary), the display goes to “Design Record Layout” on page 162.\n\nChapter 10. Work with PFD Definitions 159\n\nTable27.SelectDatabaseFiledisplayfields\n\nSelect Database File Library .........: QGPL Position to ........ Starting characters Type option, press Enter. 1=Select Opt File Text QAAPFILE Symbol set symbol definitions logical file QAAPFILE$ Symbol set small symbol definitions QAAPFILE# Symbol set medium symbol definitions QAAPFILE@ Symbol set large symbol definitions QAFCGRPH SAMPLE GDF 1 QAFCPFDDTA SAMPLE DATABASE FILE FOR PFU QAFCTUTDBF SAMPLE DATABASE FILE FOR TUTORIAL QAFCTUTOR AFPU TUTORIAL TEXT QAFCTUTPFD AFP Utilities for iSeries tutorial PFD file QAFCTUTXMP Sample PFD File QAFCXMPAI2 SAMPLE DATABASE FILE (AIAG\\_B2) More... F5=Refresh F12=Cancel" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8796475232851825, + "doc_id": "1dea6fcd746f8361239d288e5ff8d3869535bca6ae35b380eea918d56e833e91", + "edit_distance": 0.39568345323741005, + "f1_score": 0.948905109489051, + "meteor": 0.9150019487651915, + "precision": 0.9420289855072463, + "pred_md": "194\n\n## Saving PFD Definition\n\nWhen you complete the PFD definition, the Create PFD Definition display or the Change PFD Definition display appears. Press the F3 key to exit from defining PFD definition. The following display appears:\n\nYou can specify how you exit from PFD definition. You can choose:\n\n- v Whether or not to save the PFD definition.\n- v Which display you want to return to.\n\nThe following table explains each field of the Exit PFD Definition display.\n\nTable 36. Exit PFD Definition display fields\n\nType all choices and press the Enter key.\n\nWhen you specify 1 in the Option prompt and Y in the Return to PFD definition list prompt, the following display appears:\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.9558823529411765, + "true_md": "## Saving PFD Definition\n\nWhen you complete the PFD definition, the Create PFD Definition display or the Change PFD Definition display appears. Press the F3 key to exit from defining PFD definition. The following display appears:\n\nYou can specify how you exit from PFD definition. You can choose:\n\nThe following table explains each field of the Exit PFD Definition display.\n\nType all choices and press the Enter key.\n\nWhen you specify 1 in the Option prompt and Y in the Return to PFD definition list prompt, the following display appears:\n\n194 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\n- v Whether or not to save the PFD definition.\n\n- v Which display you want to return to.\n\nTable36.ExitPFDDefinitiondisplayfields" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.27447938256311044, + "doc_id": "8d69b7c474596c72477f4d4d29c0912f665b1e7ee81d4013a89ff6b0973ab8cb", + "edit_distance": 0.6, + "f1_score": 0.6470588235294118, + "meteor": 0.7353107664440168, + "precision": 0.55, + "pred_md": "152\n\nTable 22. Define PFD Specifications display fields (continued)\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.7857142857142857, + "true_md": "Table22.DefinePFDSpecificationsdisplayfields (continued)\n\n152 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.20158074753947833, + "doc_id": "8d151f841ed2873e86c1043fdb3ce7e2908747fc2943dfeab2dadb6125e0b58d", + "edit_distance": 0.7142857142857143, + "f1_score": 0.5161290322580645, + "meteor": 0.6490885416666667, + "precision": 0.4, + "pred_md": "236\n\nTable 53. Function Keys for Base Operation on the Design Display\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.7272727272727273, + "true_md": "236 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\nTable53.FunctionKeysforBaseOperationontheDesignDisplay" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8954071409316701, + "doc_id": "bc52dbdc7c5c1c9098da7dc90e5573553645f1688644834c72beb5b495005441", + "edit_distance": 0.09090909090909091, + "f1_score": 0.9673202614379085, + "meteor": 0.9837414618989795, + "precision": 0.9487179487179487, + "pred_md": "## What You Can Do with AFP Utilities for iSeries\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries enable you to print a document such as a business letter in only one step. In conventional printing, you must load letterhead paper into your printer, print the letter texts, and then manually sign the letter.\n\nFigure 1. Conventional Letter Preparation\n\nFigure 1. Conventional Letter Preparation\n\nWith the AFP Utilities for iSeries, you can electronically store your letterhead and signature and print the letterhead, text, and signature all at the same time on blank paper already in your IPDS printer. You can also include graphics such as a line chart or bar chart in your letter, creating a composite document.\n\nChapter 1. What are the IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries?\n\n5", + "recall": 0.9866666666666667, + "true_md": "## What You Can Do with AFP Utilities for iSeries\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries enable you to print a document such as a business letter in only one step. In conventional printing, you must load letterhead paper into your printer, print the letter texts, and then manually sign the letter.\n\nWith the AFP Utilities for iSeries, you can electronically store your letterhead and signature and print the letterhead, text, and signature all at the same time on blank paper already in your IPDS printer. You can also include graphics such as a line chart or bar chart in your letter, creating a composite document.\n\nFigure1.ConventionalLetterPreparation\n\nChapter 1. What are the IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries? 5" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7071067811865475, + "doc_id": "740edd9f972631604e971068bc2869985ac5bda48ad49dd17fbb82ac4dd916fa", + "edit_distance": 0.2, + "f1_score": 0.8421052631578947, + "meteor": 0.8017676767676769, + "precision": 0.8888888888888888, + "pred_md": "442\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.8, + "true_md": "442 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8945854757111827, + "doc_id": "8c14c92ac060e8c8f51b91926fb161667366946d53a2c40703dcec22c6849ddf", + "edit_distance": 0.12857142857142856, + "f1_score": 0.9651741293532338, + "meteor": 0.9601355476940284, + "precision": 0.97, + "pred_md": "To use an SBCS font that resides in the system, you can specify either a coded font name or a pair of code page name and font character set name. To use a DBCS font that resides in the system, you must specify a coded font name.\n\n## Code page\n\nHas an object type *FNTRSC with attribute CDEPAG. A code page has many code points and their corresponding character identifiers. Character identifiers are mapped to corresponding character patterns by a font character set.\n\n## Font character set\n\nHas an object type *FNTRSC with attribute FNTCHRSET. A font character set has many character identifiers and their corresponding character patterns.\n\nThe WRKFNTRSC command shows you a list of font resources. Most fonts reside in libraries that have names that start with QFNT.\n\nChange Font (Font Type=1): When you choose 1 for the Font type prompt, the following display appears.\n\nUsing this display, you can change the font identifier, point size, graphic character set, code page, and the description text.\n\nTable 64. Change PFD Definition Font display fields\n\nChapter 14. Work with Fonts\n\n301", + "recall": 0.9603960396039604, + "true_md": "To use an SBCS font that resides in the system, you can specify either a coded font name or a pair of code page name and font character set name. To use a DBCS font that resides in the system, you must specify a coded font name.\n\nHas an object type *FNTRSC with attribute CDEPAG. A code page has many code points and their corresponding character identifiers. Character identifiers are mapped to corresponding character patterns by a font character set.\n\nHas an object type *FNTRSC with attribute FNTCHRSET. A font character set has many character identifiers and their corresponding character patterns.\n\nThe WRKFNTRSC command shows you a list of font resources. Most fonts reside in libraries that have names that start with QFNT.\n\nChange Font (Font Type=1): When you choose 1 for the Font type prompt, the following display appears.\n\nUsing this display, you can change the font identifier, point size, graphic character set, code page, and the description text.\n\nTable64.ChangePFDDefinitionFontdisplayfields\n\n## Code page\n\n## Font character set\n\nChapter 14. Work with Fonts 301\n\n## Change PFD Definition Font\n\nF3=Exit F5=Refresh F12=Cancel" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8059931039832422, + "doc_id": "14091e0cac82c96150900389bf054d744a630675a6c9b2996b5437d565e8c752", + "edit_distance": 0.5845070422535211, + "f1_score": 0.9378881987577641, + "meteor": 0.776732901496013, + "precision": 0.949685534591195, + "pred_md": "Basic English Language Skills\n\n- · Each paragraph should contain one main thought or idea, and there should be a logical link between each paragraph and the next.\n- · Make sure that you focus on answering the question - only include relevant information, and remember to present logical arguments in support of your answer.\n- 8. Proofread your assignment before handing it in. Tip: read your answers out loud to make sure that they sound logical.\n\n## 9. Always keep a copy or electronic backup of your assignment.\n\nThis way, you won't have to start over if your computer crashes, or\n\nredo the whole assignment if the original goes missing.\n\n- 10. When you get your assignment back from your tutor: Read through the feedback, and learn from your mistakes. This will help you to prepare for your exams (if you have to write them), as well as to help you achieve better marks in future assignments.\n\n## TYPES OF QUESTIONS THAT YOU WILL FREQUENTLY COME ACROSS IN ASSIGNMENTS\n\nIn your assignments, you will often be asked to write short paragraphs or longer essays in which you have to 'explain' a particular concept, 'identify' certain features, or 'prove' a certain point.\n\nIt's sometimes difficult to figure out exactly what these questions mean -- which is why we are providing you with the following explanations:", + "recall": 0.9263803680981595, + "true_md": "Basic English Language Skills\n\n- • Each paragraph should contain one main thought or idea, and there should be a logical link between each paragraph and the next. Make sure that you focus on answering the question – only include \n\n- should be a logical link between each paragraph and the next. • Make sure that you focus on answering the question – only include relevant information, and remember to present logical arguments in support of your answer.\n\nIn your assignments, you will often be asked to write short paragraphs or longer essays in which you have to “explain” a particular concept, “iden- tify” certain features, or “prove” a certain point.\n\nIt’s sometimes difficult to figure out exactly what these questions mean -- which is why we are providing you with the following explanations:\n\n8. Proofread your assignment before handing it in. Tip: read your answers out loud to make sure that they sound logical.\n\n9. Always keep a copy or electronic backup of your assignment. This way, you won’t have to start over if your computer crashes, or redo the whole assignment if the original goes missing.\n\n10. When you get your assignment back from your tutor: Read through the feedback, and learn from your mistakes. This will help you to prepare for your exams (if you have to write them), as well as to help you achieve better marks in future assignments.\n\n## TYPES OF QUESTIONS THAT YOU WILL FREQUENTLY COME ACROSS IN ASSIGNMENTS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9785828697118352, + "doc_id": "4234b576f74e92b0d76b705c8a15bdc4462a1dd85a61cc42210de512f0b02e9a", + "edit_distance": 0.4409722222222222, + "f1_score": 0.990791896869245, + "meteor": 0.9590499059267018, + "precision": 0.9889705882352942, + "pred_md": "parameter. A value supplied to a command or program that is used either as input or to control the actions of the command or program.\n\nparity. The state of being either even-numbered or odd-numbered. A parity bit is a binary number added to a group of binary numbers to make the sum of that group either always odd (odd parity) or always even (even parity).\n\nPC file. A file stored on a personal computer.\n\npending. Pertaining to a request that was submitted and that is awaiting processing.\n\nPFD. See printout format definition (PFD) .\n\nPFU. See print format utility (PFU) .\n\nplace operation. In AFP Utilities, an operation that defines a page segment or a record layout in an AFP resource.\n\npoint. (1) The second byte of a DBCS code, which uniquely identifies double-byte characters in the same ward. Contrast with ward . (2) In AFP support, a unit of measurement used mainly for describing type sizes. Each pica has 12 points, and an inch has approximately 72 points.\n\nprint format utility (PFU). In AFP Utilities, a utility that allows a user to print a database file member in various formats without writing any programs.\n\nprint text. An option that allows the user to specify a line of text at the bottom of a list.\n\nprinter file. A device file that determines what attributes printed output will have. A particular printer may or may not support all of the attributes specified in a printer file.\n\nprinter writer. A system program that writes spooled files to a printer.\n\nprintout format definition (PFD). In AFP Utilities, a file member that contains information about the record layout, page layout, record selection, and database file name. A PFD is used to print the records of a database file member in various formats.\n\nprivate authority. The authority specifically given to a user for an object that overrides any other authorities, such as the authority of a user's group profile or an authorization list. Contrast with public authority .\n\nproblem analysis. The process of finding the cause of a problem. For example, a program error, device error, or user error.\n\nprogram. A sequence of instructions that a computer can interpret and run.\n\nprompt. A reminder or a displayed request for information or user action. The user must respond to allow the program to proceed.\n\npublic authority. The authority given to users who do not have any specific (private) authority to an object, who are not on the authorization list (if one is specified for the object), and whose group profile has no specific authority to the object. Contrast with private authority .\n\nQGPL. See general-purpose library .\n\nqualified name. The name of the library containing the object and the name of the object. Contrast with object name .\n\nqueue. A list of messages, jobs, files, or requests waiting to be read, processed, printed, or distributed in a predetermined order.\n\nread authority. A data authority that allows the user to look at the contents of an entry in an object or to run a program. See also add authority , delete authority , and update authority .\n\nrecord. A group of related data, words, or fields treated as a unit, such as one name, address, and telephone number.\n\nrecord format. A named part of a file that identifies records of a specified record format description.\n\nrecord layout. In AFP Utilities, a part of the printout format definition that defines how each field of a database file record is formatted and printed by the print format utility. See also page layout .\n\nrecord selection. The process of selecting particular records from a file and including the information from the records, for example, in a report.\n\nremote. Pertaining to a device, system, or file that is connected to another device, system, or file through a communications line. Contrast with local .\n\nreserved variable data. The following data is called as 'reserved variable data', and can be printed as text on the record layout in the same manner as printing variable data from the database file.\n\n- v Job date\n- v Job time\n- v Page number\n- v Record number\n- v Database file name\n- v Library name\n- v Member name\n\nresolution. In computer graphics, a measure of the sharpness of an image, expressed as the number of lines per unit of length or the number of points per unit of area discernible in that image.\n\nGlossary\n\n473", + "recall": 0.992619926199262, + "true_md": "parameter. A value supplied to a command or program that is used either as input or to control the actions of the command or program.\n\nparity. The state of being either even-numbered or odd-numbered. A parity bit is a binary number added to a group of binary numbers to make the sum of that group either always odd (odd parity) or always even (even parity).\n\nPC file. A file stored on a personal computer.\n\npending. Pertaining to a request that was submitted and that is awaiting processing.\n\nPFD. See printout format definition (PFD) .\n\nPFU. See print format utility (PFU) .\n\nplace operation. In AFP Utilities, an operation that defines a page segment or a record layout in an AFP resource.\n\npoint. (1) The second byte of a DBCS code, which uniquely identifies double-byte characters in the same ward. Contrast with ward . (2) In AFP support, a unit of measurement used mainly for describing type sizes. Each pica has 12 points, and an inch has approximately 72 points.\n\nprint format utility (PFU). In AFP Utilities, a utility that allows a user to print a database file member in various formats without writing any programs.\n\nprint text. An option that allows the user to specify a line of text at the bottom of a list.\n\nprinter file. A device file that determines what attributes printed output will have. A particular printer may or may not support all of the attributes specified in a printer file.\n\nprinter writer. A system program that writes spooled files to a printer.\n\nprintout format definition (PFD). In AFP Utilities, a file member that contains information about the record layout, page layout, record selection, and database file name. A PFD is used to print the records of a database file member in various formats.\n\nprivate authority. The authority specifically given to a user for an object that overrides any other authorities, such as the authority of a user’s group profile or an authorization list. Contrast with public authority .\n\nproblem analysis. The process of finding the cause of a problem. For example, a program error, device error, or user error.\n\nprogram. A sequence of instructions that a computer can interpret and run.\n\nresolution. In computer graphics, a measure of the sharpness of an image, expressed as the number of lines per unit of length or the number of points per unit of area discernible in that image.\n\nreserved variable data. The following data is called as ’reserved variable data’, and can be printed as text on the record layout in the same manner as printing variable data from the database file.\n\nremote. Pertaining to a device, system, or file that is connected to another device, system, or file through a communications line. Contrast with local .\n\nrecord selection. The process of selecting particular records from a file and including the information from the records, for example, in a report.\n\nrecord layout. In AFP Utilities, a part of the printout format definition that defines how each field of a database file record is formatted and printed by the print format utility. See also page layout .\n\nrecord format. A named part of a file that identifies records of a specified record format description.\n\nrecord. A group of related data, words, or fields treated as a unit, such as one name, address, and telephone number.\n\nread authority. A data authority that allows the user to look at the contents of an entry in an object or to run a program. See also add authority , delete authority , and update authority .\n\nqueue. A list of messages, jobs, files, or requests waiting to be read, processed, printed, or distributed in a predetermined order.\n\nqualified name. The name of the library containing the object and the name of the object. Contrast with object name .\n\nQGPL. See general-purpose library .\n\npublic authority. The authority given to users who do not have any specific (private) authority to an object, who are not on the authorization list (if one is specified for the object), and whose group profile has no specific authority to the object. Contrast with private authority .\n\nprompt. A reminder or a displayed request for information or user action. The user must respond to allow the program to proceed.\n\n- v Job date\n\n- v Job time\n\n- v Page number\n\n- v Record number\n\n- v Database file name\n\n- v Library name\n\n- v Member name\n\nGlossary 473" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.001289932035291898, + "doc_id": "30abc95a9986635209a7a55f2c2511a2f2250647dd30dc7219fcc93043e50cc3", + "edit_distance": 0.8181818181818182, + "f1_score": 0.5153374233128835, + "meteor": 0.20242269684411857, + "precision": 0.9545454545454546, + "pred_md": "Move the cursor to the bottom-right corner of the graphics area to specify the size, and press the F6 key again. The key entry area appears at the lower part of the image area as shown in the following display:\n\n## When you specify '2=File' as the source object type, the following display appears:\n\nChapter 13. Design Operation\n\n279", + "recall": 0.35294117647058826, + "true_md": "Move the cursor to the bottom-right corner of the graphics area to specify the size, and press the F6 key again. The key entry area appears at the lower part of the image area as shown in the following display:\n\nWhen you specify ’2=File’ as the source object type, the following display appears:\n\nDesign Overlay Columns: 1- 74 Control . . Source overlay.....STATIONERY *...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7.... 001 002 003 004 %G003-----------------------------+ 005 : : 006 007 : : 008 More... Place Graphics Mark . . . . . . : *G003 Measurement method....:Row/Column Start position . . Across 10 Down 4 End position...Across 41 14 Source object type . \\_ 1=PC document, 2=File F3=Exit F5=Refresh F6=Change measurement method F12=Cancel F15=Mark on/off F16=Hide F19=Left F20=Right\n\nDesign Overlay Columns: 1- 74 Control . . Source overlay.....STATIONERY *...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7.... 001 002 003 004 %G003-----------------------------+ 005 : : 006 007 : : 008 More... Place Graphics Mark . . . . . . : *G003 Measurement method....:Row/Column Start position . . Across 10 Down 4 End position...Across 41 14 Source object type .2 1=PC document, 2=File File . . . . . . . .\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_ Name Library......*LIBL\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_ Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB Member .......*FIRST\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_ Name, *FIRST F3=Exit F4=Detail F6=Change measurement method F12=Cancel F24=More keys\n\nChapter 13. Design Operation 279" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9335198742882813, + "doc_id": "cc19163b7d4d11679e382254f85b7cb707940de5f37ef5c6a0682bbaf7572289", + "edit_distance": 0.14285714285714285, + "f1_score": 0.978723404255319, + "meteor": 0.984071238623788, + "precision": 0.9787234042553191, + "pred_md": "Basic English Language Skills\n\n## STEP 3 - SELECT YOUR DELIVERY OPTION\n\nIn this section, you need to place a cross in the box next to the method by which you would like to receive your study material. In the example above, the student has indicated that they would like to receive their study material via registered post.", + "recall": 0.9787234042553191, + "true_md": "## STEP 3 – SELECT YOUR DELIVERY OPTION\n\nIn this section, you need to place a cross in the box next to the method by which you would like to receive your study material. In the example above, the student has indicated that they would like to receive their study material via registered post.\n\nBasic English Language Skills" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7071067811865475, + "doc_id": "52f961d5a57df3cc77d063509b99421fa9056c352905710257bbd4628f1a51ff", + "edit_distance": 0.2, + "f1_score": 0.8421052631578947, + "meteor": 0.8017676767676769, + "precision": 0.8888888888888888, + "pred_md": "462\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.8, + "true_md": "462 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9845652690823334, + "doc_id": "c7d0a7e9c6fcdd23414ba3a5dfdef22db4055421e4eea6d3a2e0091f4b8c1d40", + "edit_distance": 0.41718555417185554, + "f1_score": 0.9943502824858755, + "meteor": 0.9614690408361241, + "precision": 0.9962264150943396, + "pred_md": "## Glossary\n\nadvanced function printing (AFP). The ability of programs to use the all-points-addressable concept to print text and images on a printer.\n\nadvanced function printing data stream (AFPDS). In AFP support, the printer data stream used for printing advanced function printing data. The AFPDS includes composed text, page segments, electronic overlays, form definitions, and fonts that are downloaded from the iSeries system to the printer.\n\nAFP. See advanced function printing (AFP)\n\nAFP resources. The form definitions, page definitions, fonts, overlays (electronic forms), and page segments (graphic images). With PrintManager, resources can either exist in a system library, or be placed inline with a print job as the job is written to the spool.\n\nAFPDS. See advanced function printing data stream (AFPDS) .\n\nall authority. An object authority that allows the user to perform all operations on the object except those limited to the owner or controlled by authorization list management authority. The user can control the object's existence, specify the security for the object, and change the object. Contrast with exclude authority .\n\nall-points-addressable. In AFP support, pertaining to the capability to address, refer to, and position text, overlays, and images at any defined point on the printable area of the paper.\n\napplication. A particular business task, such as inventory control or accounts receivable.\n\napplication program. A program used to perform a particular data processing task, such as inventory control or payroll.\n\nascending sequence. The arrangement of data in order from the lowest value to the highest value, according to the rules for comparing data. Contrast with descending sequence .\n\nauthorization list. A list of two or more user IDs and their authorities for system resources. The system-recognized identifier for the object type is *AUTL.\n\nbar code. A pattern of bars of various widths containing data to be interpreted by a scanning device.\n\nbatch. Pertaining to a group of jobs to be run on a computer sequentially with the same program with little or no operator action. Contrast with interactive .\n\nbatch job. A predefined group of processing actions submitted to the system to be performed with little or no interaction between the user and the system. Contrast with interactive job .\n\nbin. In AFP support, the standard-size paper source on the IBM 3820.\n\nblock edit function. In AFP Utilities, a function that moves, copies, or removes all elements defined in a specified scope on the image area at one time.\n\nbox. In AFP Utilities, a continuous line constructing a rectangle.\n\nbreak field. In AFP Utilities, the field which causes a page break. When the encounters the record whose value of the specified field in the record are not equal to that of the previous record, page break occurs.\n\nbyte. (1) The smallest unit of storage that can be addressed directly. (2) A group of 8 adjacent bits. In the EBCDIC coding system, 1 byte can represent a character. In the double-byte coding system, 2 bytes represent a character.\n\nchange authority. An object authority that allows a user to perform all operations on the object except those limited to the owner or controlled by object existence authority and object management authority. The user can add, change, and delete entries in an object, or read the contents of an entry in the object. Change authority combines object operational authority and all the data authorities.\n\ncharacter. Any letter, number, or other symbol in the data character set that is part of the organization, control, or representation of data.\n\ncharacter set. A group of characters used for a specific reason; for example, the set of characters the display station can display, the set of characters a printer can print, or a particular set of graphic characters in a code page; for example, the 256 EBCDIC characters.\n\ncharacter string. A sequence of consecutive characters that are used as a value.\n\ncharacters per inch (cpi). The number of characters printed horizontally within an inch across a page.\n\ncheck digit. The far right number of a self-check field used to verify the accuracy of the field.\n\nCL. See control language (CL) .\n\n467", + "recall": 0.9924812030075187, + "true_md": "## Glossary\n\nadvanced function printing (AFP). The ability of programs to use the all-points-addressable concept to print text and images on a printer.\n\nadvanced function printing data stream (AFPDS). In AFP support, the printer data stream used for printing advanced function printing data. The AFPDS includes composed text, page segments, electronic overlays, form definitions, and fonts that are downloaded from the iSeries system to the printer.\n\nAFP. See advanced function printing (AFP)\n\nAFP resources. The form definitions, page definitions, fonts, overlays (electronic forms), and page segments (graphic images). With PrintManager, resources can either exist in a system library, or be placed inline with a print job as the job is written to the spool.\n\nAFPDS. See advanced function printing data stream (AFPDS) .\n\nall authority. An object authority that allows the user to perform all operations on the object except those limited to the owner or controlled by authorization list management authority. The user can control the object’s existence, specify the security for the object, and change the object. Contrast with exclude authority .\n\nall-points-addressable. In AFP support, pertaining to the capability to address, refer to, and position text, overlays, and images at any defined point on the printable area of the paper.\n\napplication. A particular business task, such as inventory control or accounts receivable.\n\napplication program. A program used to perform a particular data processing task, such as inventory control or payroll.\n\nascending sequence. The arrangement of data in order from the lowest value to the highest value, according to the rules for comparing data. Contrast with descending sequence .\n\nauthorization list. A list of two or more user IDs and their authorities for system resources. The system-recognized identifier for the object type is *AUTL.\n\nbar code. A pattern of bars of various widths containing data to be interpreted by a scanning device.\n\nbatch. Pertaining to a group of jobs to be run on a computer sequentially with the same program with little or no operator action. Contrast with interactive .\n\nCL. See control language (CL) .\n\ncheck digit. The far right number of a self-check field used to verify the accuracy of the field.\n\ncharacters per inch (cpi). The number of characters printed horizontally within an inch across a page.\n\ncharacter string. A sequence of consecutive characters that are used as a value.\n\ncharacter set. A group of characters used for a specific reason; for example, the set of characters the display station can display, the set of characters a printer can print, or a particular set of graphic characters in a code page; for example, the 256 EBCDIC characters.\n\ncharacter. Any letter, number, or other symbol in the data character set that is part of the organization, control, or representation of data.\n\nchange authority. An object authority that allows a user to perform all operations on the object except those limited to the owner or controlled by object existence authority and object management authority. The user can add, change, and delete entries in an object, or read the contents of an entry in the object. Change authority combines object operational authority and all the data authorities.\n\nbyte. (1) The smallest unit of storage that can be addressed directly. (2) A group of 8 adjacent bits. In the EBCDIC coding system, 1 byte can represent a character. In the double-byte coding system, 2 bytes represent a character.\n\nbreak field. In AFP Utilities, the field which causes a page break. When the encounters the record whose value of the specified field in the record are not equal to that of the previous record, page break occurs.\n\nbox. In AFP Utilities, a continuous line constructing a rectangle.\n\nblock edit function. In AFP Utilities, a function that moves, copies, or removes all elements defined in a specified scope on the image area at one time.\n\nbin. In AFP support, the standard-size paper source on the IBM 3820.\n\nbatch job. A predefined group of processing actions submitted to the system to be performed with little or no interaction between the user and the system. Contrast with interactive job .\n\n467" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9641945114903937, + "doc_id": "b24c085e9ad41fbe1610eed400a3805cd0493165c510623832dc4af2f3142d07", + "edit_distance": 0.2889344262295082, + "f1_score": 0.9823529411764708, + "meteor": 0.9672292650830736, + "precision": 0.9881656804733728, + "pred_md": "Initially, there is nothing defined in the record. From this display, you can define the record layout, that is, which fields of the database file member or which elements such as a line, a box, or a bar code will be printed at what location within the record which is defined for the PFD definition.\n\n## Data in Record Layout\n\nThere are three types of data that can be specified.\n\n- v Variable data\n- v Reserved variable data\n- v Fixed data\n\nVariable Data: The field data from a database file (printed as text, bar codes, and referred to page segment names, or graphic names) is called variable data . You can specify not only their locations in the record layout, but also the fonts used for the text, if it is underlined or not, color, direction, bar code types, and so on.\n\nUse one of the following to specify the name of a field whose value is printed:\n\nthe Text data prompt for text elements\n\nthe Bar code data prompt for bar code elements\n\nthe Text data prompt for box elements\n\nField names must be uppercase and enclosed with an ampersand (&) and a period (.). For example, specify a field name PRODCT as follows:\n\nText\n\ndata\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n. &PRODCT.\n\nField names and constant data may be concatenated in a prompt. The following are all correct values:\n\nABC&PRODCT.XYZ &PRODCT.&PRICE.\n\nThe &PRODCT. is the best product, and price is &PRICE. dollars.\n\nThe name of a field that contains an object name to be printed can be specified by using one of the following:\n\nFor page segments, the Page segment prompt\n\nFor graphics elements, the Folder prompt, Document prompt, File prompt, Library prompt, and Member prompt\n\nField names must be uppercase and enclosed with an ampersand (&) and a period (.). Concatenating two or more variable fields and fixed data is allowed the same as for variable text data.\n\nFor more information about the mapping name, see 'Specify Mapping Object Name' on page 191.\n\nNote: Variable data can be specified only in the record layout.\n\nReserved Variable Data: The following data can be specified as text on a text element or on a box element in the record layout in the same manner as printing variable data from the database file. The following reserved variable names can be specified to print the variable data:\n\nChapter 10. Work with PFD Definitions\n\n163", + "recall": 0.9766081871345029, + "true_md": "Initially, there is nothing defined in the record. From this display, you can define the record layout, that is, which fields of the database file member or which elements such as a line, a box, or a bar code will be printed at what location within the record which is defined for the PFD definition.\n\nThere are three types of data that can be specified.\n\nVariable Data: The field data from a database file (printed as text, bar codes, and referred to page segment names, or graphic names) is called variable data . You can specify not only their locations in the record layout, but also the fonts used for the text, if it is underlined or not, color, direction, bar code types, and so on.\n\nUse one of the following to specify the name of a field whose value is printed:\n\nthe Text data prompt for text elements\n\nthe Bar code data prompt for bar code elements\n\nthe Text data prompt for box elements\n\nField names must be uppercase and enclosed with an ampersand (&) and a period (.). For example, specify a field name PRODCT as follows:\n\nText data....&PRODCT.\n\nField names and constant data may be concatenated in a prompt. The following are all correct values:\n\nThe name of a field that contains an object name to be printed can be specified by using one of the following:\n\nFor page segments, the Page segment prompt\n\nFor graphics elements, the Folder prompt, Document prompt, File prompt, Library prompt, and Member prompt\n\nField names must be uppercase and enclosed with an ampersand (&) and a period (.). Concatenating two or more variable fields and fixed data is allowed the same as for variable text data.\n\nFor more information about the mapping name, see “Specify Mapping Object Name” on page 191.\n\nReserved Variable Data: The following data can be specified as text on a text element or on a box element in the record layout in the same manner as printing variable data from the database file. The following reserved variable names can be specified to print the variable data:\n\nNote: Variable data can be specified only in the record layout.\n\nChapter 10. Work with PFD Definitions 163\n\nABC&PRODCT.XYZ &PRODCT.&PRICE. The &PRODCT. is the best product, and price is &PRICE. dollars.\n\n## Data in Record Layout\n\n- v Variable data\n\n- v Reserved variable data\n\n- v Fixed data" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8371301327406285, + "doc_id": "9d00051fe76dd7915bd36ef353f2f5de934306a566ae553682d4fa83f26c52c6", + "edit_distance": 0.49557522123893805, + "f1_score": 0.9502262443438914, + "meteor": 0.9704300383296213, + "precision": 0.9375, + "pred_md": "388\n\nThe following figure shows the command syntax for CVTPAGSPFM command.\n\n```\n-----*LIBL/-------- CVTPAGSPFM----PAGSEG---- ---*CURLIB/------ ----page-segment-name-------- ---library-name-- --*FIXED------ ----DTAFMT------ -------------------------------------------- -*CONTINUOUS- ---*CURLIB/----- ---*VM-------- ----FILE-------- ------- --*MVS------- --------------------- -library-name- --file-name-- Required ------------------------------------------------------------------------ Optional -- ----*PAGSEG------ |P| ----MBR--- ------------------------------------------- - -- --member-name-- ----*PSGTXT------ ----TEXT-- ------------------------------------------------ -'description'- ----*NO -- ----REPLACE----- ------------------------------------------------- --*YES-- ----*NO -- ----CRTFILE----- ------------------------------------------------- --*YES-- (1) ---*BLANK-------- ----FILETEXT-- ------------------------------------------ -'description'- (1) CRTFILE='*YES' only ------------------------------------- | Job: B/I Pgm: B/I REXX: B/I EXEC | ------------------------------------\n```\n\nFigure 33. The Command Syntax for CVTPAGSPFM Command\n\nFigure 33. The Command Syntax for CVTPAGSPFM Command\n\nThe following describes the parameters for CVTPAGSPFM command.\n\nPage segment (PAGSEG)\n\nSpecifies the qualified name of the page segment that is converted to a physical file member. This is a required parameter.\n\n*LIBL The library list is used to locate the page segment.\n\n*CURLIB\n\nThe current library for the job is used to locate the page segment If no library is specified as the current library for the job, library QGPL is used.\n\nlibrary-name\n\nSpecify the library where the page segment is located.\n\nFormat of data (DTAFMT)\n\nSpecifies how data is placed in a physical file member.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.963302752293578, + "true_md": "The following figure shows the command syntax for CVTPAGSPFM command.\n\nThe following describes the parameters for CVTPAGSPFM command.\n\nSpecifies the qualified name of the page segment that is converted to a physical file member. This is a required parameter.\n\nSpecify the library where the page segment is located.\n\nThe current library for the job is used to locate the page segment If no library is specified as the current library for the job, library QGPL is used.\n\nSpecifies how data is placed in a physical file member.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\n## Format of data (DTAFMT)\n\n## library-name\n\n## *CURLIB\n\n## Page segment (PAGSEG)\n\n*LIBL The library list is used to locate the page segment.\n\n388 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\nFigure33.TheCommandSyntaxforCVTPAGSPFMCommand\n\n-----*LIBL/-------- CVTPAGSPFM----PAGSEG---- ---*CURLIB/------ ----page-segment-name-------- ---library-name-- --*FIXED------ ----DTAFMT------ -------------------------------------------- -*CONTINUOUS- ---*CURLIB/----- ---*VM-------- ----FILE-------- ------- --*MVS------- --------------------- -library-name- --file-name-- Required ------------------------------------------------------------------------ Optional -- ----*PAGSEG------ |P| ----MBR--- ------------------------------------------- - -- --member-name-- ----*PSGTXT------ ----TEXT-- ------------------------------------------------ -'description'- ----*NO -- ----REPLACE----- ------------------------------------------------- --*YES-- ----*NO -- ----CRTFILE----- ------------------------------------------------- --*YES-- (1) ---*BLANK-------- ----FILETEXT-- ------------------------------------------ -'description'- (1) CRTFILE='*YES' only ------------------------------------- | Job: B/I Pgm: B/I REXX: B/I EXEC | ------------------------------------" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.052421241258452524, + "doc_id": "db02133f3f051b8757ec59fc64fbb7cbd206864772679b0200aaf1e57632b022", + "edit_distance": 0.6208955223880597, + "f1_score": 0.6824644549763034, + "meteor": 0.40709138826559516, + "precision": 0.9863013698630136, + "pred_md": "290\n\n- Step 4. Move the cursor to the opposite corner of the rectangular area. Scroll the window if necessary.\n\nNote:\n\nThe lines, boxes, and graphics need to be completely contained in the rectangular area. The element types need only to have the starting position (the asterisk part) of the element mark within the rectangular area.\n\nStep 5. Press the F22 key again to specify the other corner of the rectangular area. The area is enclosed by equal (=) signs. The equal signs can overlay any element. The % mark shows the origin of the area to be copied, moved, or removed.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.5217391304347826, + "true_md": "Design Overlay Columns: 1- 74 Control . . Source overlay . . . . . SAMPLE *...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7.... 001 002 003 004 005 % 006 *T001 s an example. 007 008 009 *T002 s an example. 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 More... F3=Exit F5=Refresh F12=Cancel F15=Mark on/off F16=Hide F19=Left F20=Right F22=Block edit Specify opposite corner of block and press F22.\n\nDesign Overlay Columns: 1- 74 Control . . Source overlay . . . . . SAMPLE *...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7.... 001 002 003 004 005 %========================= 006 =*T001 s an example. = 007 = 008 = 009 = *T002 s an example.= 010 ========================== 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 More... F3=Exit F6=Copy F9=Move F10=Remove F12=Cancel F19=Left F20=Right F24=More keys Specify destination, press F6, F9, or F10.\n\n- Step 4. Move the cursor to the opposite corner of the rectangular area. Scroll the window if necessary.\n\n- Note: The lines, boxes, and graphics need to be completely contained in the rectangular area. The element types need only to have the starting position (the asterisk part) of the element mark within the rectangular area.\n\n- Step 5. Press the F22 key again to specify the other corner of the rectangular area. The area is enclosed by equal (=) signs. The equal signs can overlay any element. The % mark shows the origin of the area to be copied, moved, or removed.\n\n290 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8860067529653709, + "doc_id": "9590a504fde3de13727fb040eb81422541a77e22c44582cedd870f6bd09e04eb", + "edit_distance": 0.7552083333333334, + "f1_score": 0.9375, + "meteor": 0.7562337846738602, + "precision": 0.9375, + "pred_md": "Basic English Language Skills\n\n## Approve/Approve of\n\nTo 'approve' something is to give consent. E.g. The director approved the budget.\n\nTo 'approve of' something is to express a favourable opinion about it. E.g. The mother did not approve of the way her daughter was dressed for the school dance.\n\n## Borrow/Lend\n\nTo 'borrow' something is to take it with the intention of giving it back. E.g. He borrowed the book from his colleague.\n\nTo 'lend' something is to give it to someone with the expectation that they will give it back.\n\nE.g. She is lending the car to him so that he can drive to work today.\n\n## Compliment/Complement\n\nYou 'compliment' someone when you make a favourable comment about them.\n\nE.g. He complimented her by telling her that she was a good writer.\n\nYou 'complement' something (or someone) when you add something else to it that suits or fits it well.\n\nE.g. That scarf complements her dress.", + "recall": 0.9375, + "true_md": "## Approve/Approve of\n\n## Borrow/Lend\n\n## Compliment/Complement\n\nYou “compliment” someone when you make a favourable comment about them. E.g. He complimented her by telling her that she was a good writer.\n\nYou “complement” something (or someone) when you add something else to it that suits or fits it well. E.g. That scarf complements her dress.\n\nTo “lend” something is to give it to someone with the expectation that they will give it back. E.g. She is lending the car to him so that he can drive to work today.\n\nTo “borrow” something is to take it with the intention of giving it back. E.g. He borrowed the book from his colleague.\n\nTo “approve” something is to give consent. E.g. The director approved the budget.\n\nTo “approve of” something is to express a favourable opinion about it. E.g. The mother did not approve of the way her daughter was dressed for the school dance.\n\nBasic English Language Skills" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9344996373364767, + "doc_id": "9b66c01bc31369b303649974705d675d09a9a989b240da34cac267d87b071348", + "edit_distance": 0.6732283464566929, + "f1_score": 0.9780564263322885, + "meteor": 0.9562852270897219, + "precision": 0.975, + "pred_md": "460\n\n## MAPICS/DB Forms\n\nThe overlays for MAPICS/DB (Manufacturing Accounting and Production Information Control/Data Base) preprinted forms are provided. MAPICS/DB is actually made up of the following 18 program products:\n\n5728-M7X Cross Application Support\n\n5728-M73 Accounts Payable\n\n5728-M74 Accounts Receivable\n\n5728-M7G Capacity Planning\n\n5728-M7H Financial Analysis\n\n5728-M7L Forecasting\n\n5728-M77 General Ledger\n\n5728-M75 Inventory Management\n\n5728-M7J Master Production Schedule Planning\n\n5728-M7B Material Requirements Planning\n\n5728-M79 Order Entry and Invoicing\n\n5728-M72 Payroll\n\n5728-M76 Product Data Management\n\n5728-M7I Production Control and Costing\n\n5728-M7S Production Monitoring and Control\n\n5728-M7K Purchasing\n\n5728-M7R Repetitive Production Management\n\n5728-M78 Sales Analysis\n\n5706-287 Manufacturing Performance Analysis\n\nThe following source overlays are provided:\n\n## Sample PFD Definitions\n\nSome samples of PFD definitions and database files are provided. The PFD definitions would be used to print bar code labels for standard labels.\n\nYou can copy the PFD definitions from library QGPL, change the newly created PFD definitions, and print your bar code labels. For example, you can include your company name in the label.\n\nYou should choose a PFD definition file for your printer from the following list:\n\nPFD Definition File\n\nDescription\n\nSome sample PFD definitions are not contained in all PFD definition files due to certain printer restrictions such as the maximum size of the overlay.\n\nNote: These samples have not been thoroughly tested under all conditions. It is your responsibility to change PFD definitions if necessary.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.9811320754716981, + "true_md": "## MAPICS/DB Forms\n\nThe overlays for MAPICS/DB (Manufacturing Accounting and Production Information Control/Data Base) preprinted forms are provided. MAPICS/DB is actually made up of the following 18 program products:\n\nThe following source overlays are provided:\n\nSome sample PFD definitions are not contained in all PFD definition files due to certain printer restrictions such as the maximum size of the overlay.\n\nYou should choose a PFD definition file for your printer from the following list:\n\nYou can copy the PFD definitions from library QGPL, change the newly created PFD definitions, and print your bar code labels. For example, you can include your company name in the label.\n\nSome samples of PFD definitions and database files are provided. The PFD definitions would be used to print bar code labels for standard labels.\n\n5728-M7X Cross Application Support 5728-M73 Accounts Payable 5728-M74 Accounts Receivable 5728-M7G Capacity Planning 5728-M7H Financial Analysis 5728-M7L Forecasting 5728-M77 General Ledger 5728-M75 Inventory Management 5728-M7J Master Production Schedule Planning 5728-M7B Material Requirements Planning 5728-M79 Order Entry and Invoicing 5728-M72 Payroll 5728-M76 Product Data Management 5728-M7I Production Control and Costing 5728-M7S Production Monitoring and Control 5728-M7K Purchasing 5728-M7R Repetitive Production Management 5728-M78 Sales Analysis 5706-287 Manufacturing Performance Analysis\n\n## Sample PFD Definitions\n\n- Note: These samples have not been thoroughly tested under all conditions. It is your responsibility to change PFD definitions if necessary.\n\n460 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.20527077024929344, + "doc_id": "7893c395db1d53659d07dcc81eaa17bb7ac93d33340ecb7b2125f412f41352db", + "edit_distance": 0.8219584569732937, + "f1_score": 0.5913621262458473, + "meteor": 0.5020187245986198, + "precision": 0.7416666666666667, + "pred_md": "## EXCEL TRAINING MANUAL\n\n## 4. SORTING\n\nSorting is a common task that allows you to change or customize the order of your spreadsheet data. For example, you could organize an office birthday list by employee, birthdate, or department, making it easier to find what you're looking for. Custom sorting takes it a step further, giving you the ability to sort multiple levels (such as department first, then birthdate, to group birthdates by department), and more.\n\n## 4.1 HOW TO APPLY:\n\n## 4.1.1 TO SORT IN ALPHABETICAL ORDER:\n\n- ‰ Select a cell in the column you want to sort (In this example, we choose a cell in column Q).\n- ‰ Click the Sort & Filter command in the Editing group on the Home tab.\n- ‰ Select Sort A to Z. Now the information in the Category column is organized in alphabetical order.\n\n## 4.1.2 TO SORT FROM SMALLEST TO LARGEST:\n\n- ‰ Select a cell in the column you want to sort (In this example, we choose a cell in column Q).\n- ‰ Click the Sort & Filter command in the Editing group on the Home tab.\n- ‰ Select From Smallest to Largest. Now the information is organized from the smallest to largest amount.\n\nPage\n\n12 /g3", + "recall": 0.49171270718232046, + "true_md": "EXCE L L TRAIN N ING MA A NUAL\n\n## 4. SO ORTIN NG\n\n## 4.1 HO OW TO AP PPLY:\n\n## 4.1.1 T TO SORT T IN ALPH HABETIC CAL ORD DER:\n\n## 4.1.2 T TO SORT T FROM S SMALLES ST TO LA ARGEST:\n\nPage 12 GLYPH<g3>\n\n- ‰ Select a c column Q cell in the co Q). olumn you want to sor rt (In this ex xample, we choose a ce ell in \n\n- ‰ Click the Sort & Filter r command in the Editin ng group on the Home ta ab.\n\n- ‰ Select Fro to largest om Smallest amount. to Largest. N Now the inf formation is organized f from the sm allest \n\n- ‰ Select a c column Q cell in the co Q). olumn you want to sor rt (In this ex xample, we choose a ce ell in \n\n- ‰ Click the Sort & Filter r command in the Editin ng group on the Home ta ab.\n\n- ‰ Select Sor alphabeti rt A to Z. N cal order. Now the inf formation in n the Categ gory column n is organize ed in \n\nSorting is data. Fo departme further, g group bir s a common r example, ent, making giving you th rthdates by n task that al you could g it easier to he ability to department llows you to organize a o find what sort multip ), and more. o change or c an office bir you're look ple levels (su . customize th rthday list king for. Cu uch as depart he order of y by employe ustom sortin tment first, t your spread ee, birthdat ng takes it a then birthda sheet te, or a step ate, to" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.25958657290343434, + "doc_id": "c340d0ad667e37643b2349c32e8a9ac0f16e6309805ada1aa41920c4c506d1d9", + "edit_distance": 0.6190476190476191, + "f1_score": 0.6285714285714286, + "meteor": 0.7303086523865744, + "precision": 0.5238095238095238, + "pred_md": "218\n\nTable 47. Print Database File Member display fields (continued)\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.7857142857142857, + "true_md": "Table47.PrintDatabaseFileMemberdisplayfields (continued)\n\n218 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8283798880713792, + "doc_id": "1da79b41e79cd849ae08d3c114f143a61cce2744b3bebf87cd51a4c7c7e47ef1", + "edit_distance": 0.2994011976047904, + "f1_score": 0.9497716894977168, + "meteor": 0.9223044925599827, + "precision": 0.9454545454545454, + "pred_md": "No\n\nInstall the program changes that have not yet been applied and try the IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries function again. See the Software Installation manual for a description of how to install program changes.\n\n## Common Symptoms and Possible Causes\n\nThe following shows common problems and their possible causes.\n\nYour problem may match more than one item in the table. For example, if you print a page segment and it is not printed; you may need to check both \" Nothing is printed \" and \" Image (page segment) is not printed . \"\n\nYour specified font type may be changed by the system. In that case, a message is sent to the message queue of the printer writer that indicates font substitution.\n\nTable 83. Common symptoms and possible causes\n\nChapter 23. Problem Analysis\n\n403\n\n- v Follow the directions in 'Contacting Your Service Representative' on page 407.", + "recall": 0.9541284403669725, + "true_md": "- v Follow the directions in “Contacting Your Service Representative” on page 407.\n\nNo\n\nInstall the program changes that have not yet been applied and try the IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries function again. See the Software Installation manual for a description of how to install program changes.\n\nThe following shows common problems and their possible causes.\n\nYour problem may match more than one item in the table. For example, if you print a page segment and it is not printed; you may need to check both † Nothing is printed † and † Image (page segment) is not printed † .\n\nYour specified font type may be changed by the system. In that case, a message is sent to the message queue of the printer writer that indicates font substitution.\n\n## Common Symptoms and Possible Causes\n\nTable83.Commonsymptomsandpossiblecauses\n\nChapter 23. Problem Analysis 403" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7071067811865475, + "doc_id": "fda18da0507dbb22b97754cf6c41039f5644569acca0b8d87c9dc58933a165f1", + "edit_distance": 0.2, + "f1_score": 0.8421052631578947, + "meteor": 0.8017676767676769, + "precision": 0.8888888888888888, + "pred_md": "246\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.8, + "true_md": "246 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.02639539967738686, + "doc_id": "0709738596d488fe18d2244eb6995fda3f8429befc3aa4e4fee4bb6625950897", + "edit_distance": 0.9680672268907563, + "f1_score": 0.5390070921985816, + "meteor": 0.08467975337183162, + "precision": 0.9047619047619048, + "pred_md": "Figure 31. The Command Syntax for CVTPFMPAGS Command\n\nFigure 31. The Command Syntax for CVTPFMPAGS Command\n\nThe following describes the parameters for CVTPFMPAGS command.\n\nPage segment (PAGSEG)\n\nSpecifies the qualified name of the page segment to be created. This is a required parameter.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\nChapter 21. AFP Utilities for iSeries Commands\n\n379", + "recall": 0.3838383838383838, + "true_md": "Figure31.TheCommandSyntaxforCVTPFMPAGSCommand\n\nThe following describes the parameters for CVTPFMPAGS command.\n\nSpecifies the qualified name of the page segment to be created. This is a required parameter.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\n## Page segment (PAGSEG)\n\nChapter 21. AFP Utilities for iSeries Commands 379\n\n-------*PRV ------------------------------- CVTPFMPAGS-----PAGSEG--- ----*CURLIB/------ ----- --- - page-segment-name- - library-name - Required ------------------------------------------------------------------------ Optional -----*PRV ------------------------- -- | | ----*PRV ------- |P| ----FILE - ----*LIBL/-------- -- MBR - - *PAGSEG -------- - --*CURLIB/------ -- file-name - - member-name --library-name/- ----*NO--- ----CHGIMGSIZE-- ------------------------------------------------- --*YES-- (1) ----*SAME-- ----*SAME------- ----*SAME--------- ----IMGSIZE-- --*INCH-- --- --- ----------- --*CM---- --width-value- --length-value-- (1) ----*SAME - ----MAPPING - --*PAT--- --------------------------------------------------- --*STF--- - *CAT--- - *IPTP-- - *IPTPD- ----*SAME - ----IMGRTT - --0------ ---------------------------------------------------- --90----- - 180---- - 270---- -----*SAME ------- ---*LIBCRTAUT--- ----AUT - ---*CHANGE------ ------------------------------------------------ ---*ALL--------- ---*USE--------- ---*EXCLUDE----- -- name -------- -----*SAME --------- ----*YES - ----TEXT - -- *BLANK -------- ------REPLACE - ------------------ -- 'description'-- - *NO -- (1) CHGIMGSIZE='*YES' only ------------------------------------- |Job: B, I Pgm: B, I REXX: B, I Exec | ------------------------------------" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8387007108157597, + "doc_id": "188030eac20e07324dd85b9ccfaa66a9d041c4a381b7682818c0e7e6ac5afa72", + "edit_distance": 0.08496732026143791, + "f1_score": 0.9497206703910615, + "meteor": 0.9566096226724755, + "precision": 0.9550561797752809, + "pred_md": "Basic English Language Skils\n\n## ASSIGNMENT\n\n- 1. Identify the verb in the following sentence:\n\nThe grey elephant drinks water from the largest lake in Africa.\n\n- 2. Identify the collective noun in the following sentence:\n\nThe board of directors voted in favour of the decision.\n\n- 3. Correct the punctuation in the following sentence:\n\nAnthea will you please buy bread milk and eggs when you go to the shop.\n\n- 4. Choose the correct word:\n\nCharles was accepted/excepted into the engineering studies course at Oxbridge Academy.\n\n- 5. Choose the correct word:\n\nIts/It's time to go home now.\n\n- 6. Choose the correct word:\n\nThey were late for work, because there/their train was delayed.\n\n- 7. Choose the correct word:\n\nYou're/Your going to write your exam next week.", + "recall": 0.9444444444444444, + "true_md": "Basic English Language Skills\n\n## ASSIGNMENT\n\n1. Identify the verb in the following sentence: The grey elephant drinks water from the largest lake in Africa.\n\n2. Identify the collective noun in the following sentence: The board of directors voted in favour of the decision.\n\n3. Correct the punctuation in the following sentence:\n\nAnthea will you please buy bread milk and eggs when you go to the shop. \n\n4. Choose the correct word:\n\nCharles was accepted/excepted into the engineering studies course at Oxbridge Academy.\n\n5. Choose the correct word:\n\nIts/It’s time to go home now.\n\n6. Choose the correct word:\n\nThey were late for work, because there/their train was delayed.\n\n7. Choose the correct word:\n\nYou’re/Your going to write your exam next week." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "d643c8cb08136ec98abce52d1d44d3c6338eab1c12eadaf8530e6c207dd680ad", + "edit_distance": 0.9993263725159987, + "f1_score": 0.03225806451612903, + "meteor": 0.006277201205222632, + "precision": 0.01639344262295082, + "pred_md": "| Printout Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Mapping Object Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n|------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|----------------------------------------|-------------|-------------|---------|-------|---------|---------|-------------|-------------|-------------|-----------|-------|-------|---------|-------------|---------------------------------|---------------------------|---------------------|-----------------|-------------|-----------|-----------------|---------------------|-----------------------|-------------|-----|-----------|-----|----|---------------------------|\n| Printing with Print Format Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Operation Flow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Chapter 8. Getting Started with Print Format Utility. . . . . . . . | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| Step 1 - Starting the Print Format Utility | | | | | | | . | | | | | . | . | | . | | . | . | . | | | . | | | | | | | | |\n| | | | | . . | . | | . | . | . . . | . | . | . | . | . | . . . . | | . . | . | . | . | | 106 | | | . | | | | | . |\n| Step 2 - Creating a PFD Definition File . | | | | . . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . . . | | . | . | . . . | | . . | . . | | | | | | | . | | | | | . 107 |\n| Step 3 - Creating a PFD Definition . | | | . | . . . . | . | . . | . | . | . . | . . | . . | | . | . | . . | . . . . . | . . . . . . . | . . . . . | | | | | | . . | . | | | | | 110 |\n| Specifying a Database File | | . . . | . | . . | | . | . | . . | . . | . | . . | . | . | . | . . . | . . . | | . . . | . 109 . | | | | | . . | | | | | | |\n| Designing a Record Layout . | | . | . | . . | . | | . . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . . | . . | . . . | . . . . | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| Designing a Page Layout | | . . . | . | . . | | . | . | . | . . | . . | . | . | . . | . . . . | | . . | . . . | 112 126 | | | | | | . | | | | | | |\n| . Defining Printout Specifications | | . | . | . . . | | . | | . . . | . . . | . | . | . | | . | | . | . | . . . | . . | | | 130 | | | | | | | | . |\n| Exiting from Defining the PFD Definition . Step 4 - Printing a Database File | | . | | . | . . | . . | | . | . . | . . | . . | . . | . . | . . | . . . . . . | . . | . . . . | . . . | . . . . | . | . . . | 131 134 | | | | | | | | . |\n| Step 5 - Ending the Print Format Utility | | . | . | . . . . | . | . . . . | . . | | . . | . . | | . | . | . | . | . . | | . . | . | | | | | . . | | | | | | |\n| Step 6 - Printing the AFP Utilities tutorial . | | | | . | | . | . | | . | . . | . | . | | . | | . . . | . . . . | . | . . | . 135 . 136 | | | | . . | . | | | | | |\n| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | . | . | . . | | . | | | . | . | . | | | | | | |\n| Chapter 9. Starting and Ending the Print Format Utility | | . | . . | . . . | | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . . | | . . . | . . . | . . | . | | . | . . | . | . . | . | | | | | . . 139 |\n| Starting the Print Format Utility Option 11 (Work with PFD definitions) . Option 12 (Work with PFD definition files) | Option 13 (Print Database File Member) | | | . . . | . . . | . . . . | . . | . . | . . . . . . | . . . . . . | . . . | . . . | | | . . | . . . . . | . . . . . . . . . . | | . . . . . | . . . | . . | . . | . | . . . . . . . . . . | | | | | | . 140 . 140 . 140 |\n| Option 14 (Print AFP Utilities tutorial) Ending the Print Format Utility | | | . . | . . . | . | . . | . . | . . | . . | . . | | . . | . . | . . | . . . | . . | . . | . . . | . . | . . . | | | | . . | . | | | | | . 140 . 141 |\n| | | . | | | | | | | . | | | | . . | . | . | | | | . | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| Chapter 10. Work with PFD Definitions | . | | . | | | | . | . | . | | . | . | . | . | . | | . . | | . . | | | | . | . | | | | | | . |\n| Prompts . . . | . . . | . . | . . | . . . | . | . | . | . . | . . | . | . . . | . . . | | . . . | . . . . . | . | . . | . | | | | | | . | | | | | . | . 144 |\n| Options . . . . . Columns . . . . . | . . . | . . . . . | . . . . | . . . | . . | . . | . . | . . | . . . | . . . | . . . . . | . . | . . . | . . . | . . . | | | . . . . | . 145 . . | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| Showing a PFD Definition List | . | | . | | . | . . . . | . | . | . . | . | . . | . . | . . | . . . | . . . . | . . . . | . . | | . . . . . . . . | 146 146 . | | | | | | | | | | |\n| Selecting a PFD Definition from a List 1=Create PFD Definitions | . | . . | . . . | . . | . . | | . | . | | | . | . . | . | . . . | . . . . | . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . | . . . . . | . . . . . . . . . . | . . | . . . | . . . . . | 146 . 147 . 149 | | | | | | | | |\n| Define PFD Specifications Work with PFD Definition Fonts . | | . . | | . | | . . . | . . | . | | . . | . | | . | . . . | . . | | . . . . . . . . . . . . . | . . . . . . | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| Specify Database File . | . | | . . . | . . | . | . . . | . | . . | . . | . . | . . | . . | . | | | | | | . . . | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| Specify Break Fields | . | . . | . . | . . . | . . | . . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . . | . | . | | | . | . . | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| . Design Record Layout | . | . . . | . . . | | . . . | . | . . | . . | . . | . | . | . | . | | | | . . . . . . . | . . . . . . | . | . | | . . . . . | . . | . 158 . 158 . 161 . . | | | | | | |\n| Design Page Layout . | . | . | . . . | . . | . . | . . | . | . . . . . . | | . . | . . | . . | . . | . | . . . | . . . | | . | | . . . . . | . . . . | | | | | | | | | |\n| | | . | . . . | . . | | | . | . . | . . | . | . | . | | | . | | | | . . . . | | | . | 162 169 . 183 . 187 | | | | | | | |\n| Specify Record Selection. Define Printout Specifications . Specify Mapping Object Name | | . | . . | . . | | . . | | . | . | | . . | | | . | | | | . | . . | | | | | . | | | | | | |\n| | . | | . . . | . . . | . . | . | . . | . . | . . | . | . | | . | | . | . . . | | . . . | . . . . . . | . | | | | . | . . . . . . | | | | | |\n| | . | . . . | . . . | . . | . . . | . | . . . . | . . . | . . | . . | | . . | . . . | | | . . | . | | . . . | . | | | . | . | | . . | . . . . . | | | |\n| 2=Change PFD Definition 3=Copy PFD Definition . 4=Delete PFD Definition. | . | . . . | . . . | . | | . | . . . | . | | | . | . . | . | | | . . . . . . | . | . . . . | . . | . . . | | . . . . . . | . . | . . . | | | | . . | | 191 197 . 198 . 200 . 201 |\n| 6=Print PFD Definition . . 7=Rename PFD Definition . . | . . 9=Print Database File. . . | . . . . . . | . . . . . . | . . . | . . . | . . . | . . . | . . . . . | . . | . . | . . . . | . . | | | . . . . . . | . . . . . . | . . . . . | | | | | | | . . . . . . | . | | | | | . 201 . 201 |\n\nContents\n\nv\n\n.\n\n105\n\n.\n\n139\n\n.\n\n.\n\n143\n\n.\n\n.\n\n203", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Contents v" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8010265661230472, + "doc_id": "bcd950fd20398cfbd980b40f33fd72e8423b3cdc8e2c7804ee4c0fe4201a0a74", + "edit_distance": 0.5385906040268457, + "f1_score": 0.96875, + "meteor": 0.8234169500032619, + "precision": 0.9587628865979382, + "pred_md": "180\n\nPage 2\n\n```\n-----------------------------------------------------| Placed Records : Record 5 | | Record 6 | | Record 7 | | | | Summary data of Sales for page | | | | First value : 800 (from Record 5) | | Last value : 300 (from Record 7) | | Total : 1140 (from Record 5-7) | | Average : 380 (Total/record count) | | Maximum : 800 (from Record 5) | | Minimum : 40 (from Record 6) | | Record count: 3 | | | | Summary data of SALES for page break | | | | First value : 200 (from Record 1) | | Last value : 300 (from Record 7) | | Total : 2940 (from Record 1-7) | | Average : 420 (Total/record count) | | Maximum : 1000 (from Record 3) | | Minimum : 40 (from Record 6) | | Record count: 7 | | | -----------------------------------------------------\n```\n\nNote:\n\nThe page break occurs on record 8. Record 8 is printed on the next page. The summary data for the page break summarizes all sales data for PRODUCT Color TV.\n\nPage 3\n\n```\n-----------------------------------------------------| Placed Records : Record 8 | | Record 9 | | Record 10 | | Record 11 | | | | Summary data of Sales for page | | | | First value : 100 (from Record 8) | | Last value : 300 (from Record 11) | | Total : 660 (from Record 8-11) | | Average : 165 (Total/record count) | | Maximum : 300 (from Record 11) | | Minimum : 60 (from Record 10) | | Record count: 4 | | | | Summary data of SALES for page break | | | | First value : 100 (from Record 8) | | Last value : 300 (from Record 11) | | Total : 660 (from Record 8-11) | | Average : 165 (Total/record count) | | Maximum : 300 (from Record 11) | | Minimum : 60 (from Record 10) | | Record count: 4 | | | -----------------------------------------------------\n```\n\nNote:\n\nThe page break occurs on record 12. This page contains the last record before the page break, so the summary data for the page break is printed on this page. The previous page break occurred on the previous page, so the summary data for the page break is equal to the summary data for the page, and it summarizes all sales data for PRODUCT Radio.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.9789473684210527, + "true_md": "Note: The page break occurs on record 8. Record 8 is printed on the next page. The summary data for the page break summarizes all sales data for PRODUCT Color TV.\n\nNote: The page break occurs on record 12. This page contains the last record before the page break, so the summary data for the page break is printed on this page. The previous page break occurred on the previous page, so the summary data for the page break is equal to the summary data for the page, and it summarizes all sales data for PRODUCT Radio.\n\n180 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\nPage 3 -----------------------------------------------------\n\nPage 2 ----------------------------------------------------- | Placed Records : Record 5 | | Record 6 Record 7 | | | Summary data of Sales for page | | First value : 800 (from Record 5) | | Last value : 300 (from Record 7) Total : 1140 (from Record 5-7) | | Average : 380 (Total/record count) Maximum 800 (from Record 5) | | Minimum : 40 (from Record 6) Record count: 3 | | | Summary data of SALES for page break | | First value : 200 (from Record 1) | | Last value : 300 (from Record 7) Total : 2940 (from Record 1-7) | | Average : 420 (Total/record count) Maximum : 1000 (from Record 3) | | Minimum : 40 (from Record 6) Record count: 7 | | -----------------------------------------------------\n\nPage 3 ----------------------------------------------------- | Placed Records : Record 8 | | Record 9 Record 10 | | Record 11 | | Summary data of Sales for page | | First value : 100 (from Record 8) | Last value : 300 (from Record 11) | Total 660 (from Record 8-11) | Average : 165 (Total/record count) | Maximum 300 (from Record 11) | Minimum : 60 (from Record 10) | Record count: 4 | | | Summary data of SALES for page break | | First value : 100 (from Record 8) | Last value : 300 (from Record 11) | Total 660 (from Record 8-11) | Average : 165 (Total/record count) | Maximum 300 (from Record 11) | Minimum : 60 (from Record 10) | Record count: 4 | | -----------------------------------------------------\n\nPage 2 -----------------------------------------------------" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8659611038025339, + "doc_id": "0bdb086c4e773ede6908117b7fa51ad1e1d49cf8d26f49889107f433e080f0e4", + "edit_distance": 0.5638841567291312, + "f1_score": 0.9707112970711297, + "meteor": 0.9789445848102187, + "precision": 0.9508196721311475, + "pred_md": "```\n-----*LIBL/-------- CVTOVLPFM------OVL------ ---*CURLIB/------ ----overlay-name------------- ---library-name-- --*FIXED------ ----DTAFMT------ -------------------------------------------- -*CONTINUOUS- ---*CURLIB/----- ---*VM-------- ----FILE-------- ------- --*MVS------- --------------------- -library-name- --file-name-- Required ------------------------------------------------------------------------ Optional -- ----*OVL--------- |P| ----MBR--- ------------------------------------------- - -- --member-name-- ----*OVLTXT------ ----TEXT-- ------------------------------------------------ -'description'- ----*NO -- ----REPLACE----- ------------------------------------------------- --*YES-- ----*NO -- ----CRTFILE----- ------------------------------------------------- --*YES-- (1) ---*BLANK-------- ----FILETEXT-- ------------------------------------------ -'description'- (1) CRTFILE='*YES' only ------------------------------------- | Job: B/I Pgm: B/I REXX: B/I EXEC | ------------------------------------\n```\n\nFigure 32. The Command Syntax for CVTOVLPFM Command\n\nFigure 32. The Command Syntax for CVTOVLPFM Command\n\nThe following describes the parameters for CVTOVLPFM command.\n\nOverlay (OVL)\n\nSpecifies the qualified name of the overlay that is converted to a physical file member. This is a required parameter.\n\n*LIBL The library list is used to locate the overlay.\n\n## *CURLIB\n\nThe current library for the job is used to locate the overlay. If no library is specified as the current library for the job, library QGPL is used.\n\nlibrary-name\n\nSpecify the library where the overlay is located.\n\nFormat of data (DTAFMT)\n\nSpecifies how data is placed in a physical file member.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\n*FIXED\n\nOne record has one structured field. The padding character is binary 0s. The record length of the fixed format file is the length of\n\nChapter 21. AFP Utilities for iSeries Commands\n\n385", + "recall": 0.9914529914529915, + "true_md": "Figure32.TheCommandSyntaxforCVTOVLPFMCommand\n\nThe following describes the parameters for CVTOVLPFM command.\n\n## Overlay (OVL)\n\n## *CURLIB\n\n## Format of data (DTAFMT)\n\nSpecifies the qualified name of the overlay that is converted to a physical file member. This is a required parameter.\n\n*LIBL The library list is used to locate the overlay.\n\nThe current library for the job is used to locate the overlay. If no library is specified as the current library for the job, library QGPL is used.\n\nSpecify the library where the overlay is located.\n\nSpecifies how data is placed in a physical file member.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\nOne record has one structured field. The padding character is binary 0s. The record length of the fixed format file is the length of\n\nChapter 21. AFP Utilities for iSeries Commands 385\n\n## library-name\n\n## *FIXED\n\n-----*LIBL/-------- CVTOVLPFM------OVL------ ---*CURLIB/------ ----overlay-name------------- ---library-name-- --*FIXED------ ----DTAFMT------ -------------------------------------------- -*CONTINUOUS- ---*CURLIB/----- ---*VM-------- ----FILE-------- ------- --*MVS------- --------------------- -library-name- --file-name-- Required ------------------------------------------------------------------------ Optional -- ----*OVL--------- |P| ----MBR--- ------------------------------------------- - -- --member-name-- ----*OVLTXT------ ----TEXT-- ------------------------------------------------ -'description'- ----*NO -- ----REPLACE----- ------------------------------------------------- --*YES-- ----*NO -- ----CRTFILE----- ------------------------------------------------- --*YES-- (1) ---*BLANK-------- ----FILETEXT-- ------------------------------------------ -'description'- (1) CRTFILE='*YES' only ------------------------------------- | Job: B/I Pgm: B/I REXX: B/I EXEC | ------------------------------------" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7071067811865475, + "doc_id": "cec3f6ba8b8d92e40407c5efe2dc94cd4bef9073f1677a8d0bb254d72e73382e", + "edit_distance": 0.2, + "f1_score": 0.8421052631578947, + "meteor": 0.8017676767676769, + "precision": 0.8888888888888888, + "pred_md": "258\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.8, + "true_md": "258 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8498775294985225, + "doc_id": "b494ee340114f3106f01d1548e2b73fb1201d3606dc98c58af7a87939c85241b", + "edit_distance": 0.2198581560283688, + "f1_score": 0.9374999999999998, + "meteor": 0.9294220037776453, + "precision": 0.9259259259259259, + "pred_md": "406\n\nTable 83. Common symptoms and possible causes (continued)\n\n## Sense Codes and Possible Causes\n\nSome messages sent to the message queue of the printer writer show the sense data returned by the printer. To see the sense data, position the cursor to the message and press the F1 (Help) key. The second-level message appears, and its cause shows the sense data if applicable. For example,\n\n...\n\nthe corresponding sense data is X'0118'..X'02' X'01'. Processing of the ...\n\n01, 18, and 02 is the sense byte 0, 1, and 19.\n\nThe following table shows typical sense bytes and their possible causes:\n\nTable 84. Sense bytes and possible causes\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.9493670886075949, + "true_md": "Table83.Commonsymptomsandpossiblecauses (continued)\n\nTable84.Sensebytesandpossiblecauses\n\n406 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\n## Sense Codes and Possible Causes\n\nSome messages sent to the message queue of the printer writer show the sense data returned by the printer. To see the sense data, position the cursor to the message and press the F1 (Help) key. The second-level message appears, and its cause shows the sense data if applicable. For example,\n\n... the corresponding sense data is X'0118'..X'02' X'01'. Processing of the ...\n\n01, 18, and 02 is the sense byte 0, 1, and 19.\n\nThe following table shows typical sense bytes and their possible causes:" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8107291618120591, + "doc_id": "b0834b70d79e58ff6fee8bfd42c6f4d3090923cd2371200c3412e4471dcc5632", + "edit_distance": 0.23125, + "f1_score": 0.9277108433734942, + "meteor": 0.850721908349027, + "precision": 0.9625, + "pred_md": "Basic English Language Skils\n\n## NOUNS\n\nThe job of a noun is to name something. It might be an object, a person, a place, or even a thought or idea. There are different types of nouns:\n\nCommon nouns: Refer to an object that you can see or touch.\n\n```\nExample: table, chair, dog\n```\n\nProper nouns: Indicate the name of a person or place. Proper nouns always start with a capital letter .\n\n```\nExample: South Africa, Oxbridge Academy, Desmond Tutu, Toyota\n```\n\nAbstract nouns: Refer to concepts, rather than to things that you can detect with your senses.\n\n```\nExample: love, courage, hope, innovation\n```\n\nCollective nouns: Are used to name a group or collection of people or things.", + "recall": 0.8953488372093024, + "true_md": "## NOUNS\n\nThe job of a noun is to name something. It might be an object, a person, a place, or even a thought or idea. There are different types of nouns:\n\nCommon nouns: Refer to an object that you can see or touch.\n\nExample: table, chair, dog\n\nProper nouns: Indicate the name of a person or place. Proper nouns always start with a capital letter.\n\nExample: South Africa, Oxbridge Academy, Desmond Tutu, Toyota\n\nBasic English Language Skills\n\nAbstract nouns: Refer to concepts, rather than to things that you can detect with your senses.\n\nExample: love, courage, hope, innovation\n\nCollective nouns: Are used to name a group or collection of people or things.\n\nExample: “board” of directors, “litter” of puppies, “herd” of cattle" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.32850875894193704, + "doc_id": "67004e6946eaa93c32bb19ef2248f63781b830e93c7dbc893a15f976c2fe45ee", + "edit_distance": 0.4, + "f1_score": 0.7894736842105263, + "meteor": 0.6325302870107092, + "precision": 0.9782608695652174, + "pred_md": "168\n\nOn this display, you can specify an edit code and an edit code modifier.\n\nWhen you specify the above parameters and press the Enter key, the Define Text Detail display appears again.\n\nWhen you specify multiple fields on the Text data prompt, the Select Fields to Edit Numeric display appears to select fields before the Edit Numeric display appears.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.6617647058823529, + "true_md": "Edit Numeric Field . . . . . . ....: PRICE Type choices, press Enter. Edit code ............ 1-4, A-D, J-Q, X-Z User-defined 5-9 Edit code modifier . . . ..... 1=Asterisk fill 2=Floating currency symbol F3=Exit F5=Refresh F12=Cancel\n\nOn this display, you can specify an edit code and an edit code modifier.\n\nWhen you specify the above parameters and press the Enter key, the Define Text Detail display appears again.\n\nWhen you specify multiple fields on the Text data prompt, the Select Fields to Edit Numeric display appears to select fields before the Edit Numeric display appears.\n\n168 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "8534c9c883130ffc3a3975fc368a04f744f3081912cdf3b3c789effa17abccf6", + "edit_distance": 0.8315789473684211, + "f1_score": 0.43548387096774194, + "meteor": 0.3283169167500636, + "precision": 0.6585365853658537, + "pred_md": "## 3.2.4 TO MANAGE CONDITIONAL FORMATTING:\n\nClick the Conditional Formatting command.\n\nSelect Manage Rules from the menu. The Conditional Formatting Rules Manager dialog box will appear. From here you can edit a rule, delete a rule, or change the order of rules.\n\nPage\n\n11 /g3", + "recall": 0.3253012048192771, + "true_md": "EXCE L L TRAIN N ING MA A NUAL\n\nPage 11 GLYPH<g3>\n\nSe b ru elect Manag ox will app ules. ge Rules from pear. From h m the menu here you can . The Condi n edit a rul tional Form e, delete a r matting Rules rule, or chan s Manager d nge the ord dialog der of \n\nC Click the Con nditional For rmatting com mmand. \n\n## 3.2.4 T TO MANA AGE CON NDITION NAL FOR RMATTIN NG:" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5774488605865419, + "doc_id": "1a20fe0c5546fc2bdd6d39238368a45ac744bb8ca5704866fea0b66603b7cc7d", + "edit_distance": 0.7441860465116279, + "f1_score": 0.819672131147541, + "meteor": 0.8353403473190518, + "precision": 0.7575757575757576, + "pred_md": "434\n\nChoice on the Define Box Detail display:\n\nFormat : 3=Vertical, right to left Degree of rotation : 270\n\nFigure 47. Print Example - 14\n\nFigure 47. Print Example - 14\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.8928571428571429, + "true_md": "Figure47.PrintExample-14\n\n434 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\nChoice on the Define Box Detail display:\n\nFormat : 3=Vertical, right to left Degree of rotation : 270" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.3750168314352387, + "doc_id": "905640be70ae0f5eb42db80e628735c34e24cd684362e8c5477147c45c0f70c3", + "edit_distance": 0.6547619047619048, + "f1_score": 0.7499999999999999, + "meteor": 0.7611731022728228, + "precision": 0.6086956521739131, + "pred_md": "Example Action: Press the F3 key to complete designing overlay.\n\nThe Change Source Overlay display appears.\n\n```\nChange Source Overlay File . . . . . . . . . . . . : OVLFILE Library . . . . . . . . . : OVLLIB Source overlay . . . . . . . : STATIONERY Type options, press Enter. 1=Select Opt Action Define overlay specifications Work with source overlay fonts Design overlay F3=Exit F5=Refresh F9=Select all\n```\n\nExample Action: Press the F3 key to exit changing a source overlay.\n\nThe Exit Overlay Utility display appears.\n\n```\nExit Overlay Utility Type choices, press Enter. Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1=Save and exit 2=Exit without saving 3=Resume Overlay Utility session Return to source overlay list . . Y Y=Yes, N=No F12=Cancel\n```\n\nChapter 3. Getting Started with the Overlay Utility\n\n53", + "recall": 0.9767441860465116, + "true_md": "Example Action: Press the F3 key to complete designing overlay.\n\nThe Change Source Overlay display appears.\n\nExample Action: Press the F3 key to exit changing a source overlay.\n\nThe Exit Overlay Utility display appears.\n\nF12=Cancel\n\nF3=Exit F5=Refresh F9=Select all\n\nType options, press Enter. 1=Select\n\n## Change Source Overlay\n\n## Exit Overlay Utility\n\nType choices, press Enter.\n\nChapter 3. Getting Started with the Overlay Utility 53" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9580068621387053, + "doc_id": "4e469d39e09ef07a8b44a204049a6c4bd73137ece280fbe02da5fbcd907a51c7", + "edit_distance": 0.628428927680798, + "f1_score": 0.9878048780487805, + "meteor": 0.8102995317821453, + "precision": 0.9878048780487805, + "pred_md": "## Chapter 2. Introduction to the Overlay Utility\n\nThe Overlay Utility is one of the AFP Utilities that allows you to create electronic form overlays, which can always be printed in their stored format and can be positioned anywhere on the page.\n\nUsing the overlay utility, you can:\n\n- 1. Design an overlay interactively on a display.\n- The information you defined for an overlay is called a source overlay .\n- 2. Save a source overlay in your file.\n- 3. Create an overlay object from a source overlay, which can be printed on the IPDS printers.\n\nYou can change the design of the overlay by changing the source overlay.\n\n## Notes:\n\n- 1. You cannot directly change the overlay object. You need to change the source overlay and create the overlay object from it.\n- 2. You can work with the overlay object using the resource management utility. See 'Chapter 19. Work with Overlays Function' on page 341 for more information.\n\n## Print Form and Overlay\n\nYou can merge the overlay object with various spooled files as your final printout.\n\nYou can use overlays at any time you want on various types of forms. Thus, you can eliminate the use of preprinted paper forms.\n\nThe overlay can be composed of text, images, graphics, lines, boxes, and bar codes called elements . All of the environmental data (such as font references) is defined as a part of the overlay definition. The fonts defined for the overlay are not influenced by the fonts used for the variable data on the logical page.\n\nThe basic function of the overlay is to provide a template-like pattern that establishes fixed data for merging with various spooled files.\n\nFor each element, you must specify its position and the horizontal and vertical distances from the overlay origin. You can also specify the offset, and horizontal and vertical distances of the overlay origin from the origin of the page. The initial values are set to zero offset in both directions, which means the overlay origin will coincide with the page origin. This eliminates the need for preprinted paper forms.\n\n23", + "recall": 0.9878048780487805, + "true_md": "## Chapter 2. Introduction to the Overlay Utility\n\n## Print Form and Overlay\n\nThe Overlay Utility is one of the AFP Utilities that allows you to create electronic form overlays, which can always be printed in their stored format and can be positioned anywhere on the page.\n\nUsing the overlay utility, you can:\n\nYou can change the design of the overlay by changing the source overlay.\n\nYou can merge the overlay object with various spooled files as your final printout. You can use overlays at any time you want on various types of forms. Thus, you can eliminate the use of preprinted paper forms.\n\nThe overlay can be composed of text, images, graphics, lines, boxes, and bar codes called elements . All of the environmental data (such as font references) is defined as a part of the overlay definition. The fonts defined for the overlay are not influenced by the fonts used for the variable data on the logical page.\n\nThe basic function of the overlay is to provide a template-like pattern that establishes fixed data for merging with various spooled files.\n\nFor each element, you must specify its position and the horizontal and vertical distances from the overlay origin. You can also specify the offset, and horizontal and vertical distances of the overlay origin from the origin of the page. The initial values are set to zero offset in both directions, which means the overlay origin will coincide with the page origin. This eliminates the need for preprinted paper forms.\n\n23\n\n- 1. You cannot directly change the overlay object. You need to change the source overlay and create the overlay object from it.\n\n- 2. You can work with the overlay object using the resource management utility. See “Chapter 19. Work with Overlays Function” on page 341 for more information.\n\n- 1. Design an overlay interactively on a display. The information you defined for an overlay is called a source overlay .\n\n- 2. Save a source overlay in your file.\n\n- 3. Create an overlay object from a source overlay, which can be printed on the IPDS printers.\n\n## Notes:" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0220379642680524, + "doc_id": "f41ae55ab94c0a3107fe70f9ff522a0631d532e8d0a9767a142b4361c4699d60", + "edit_distance": 0.7443365695792881, + "f1_score": 0.6304347826086957, + "meteor": 0.2976948019075112, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Example Action: Press the Enter key to define the line element in the source overlay.\n\nThe following display appears.\n\nMark %L003 changes to *L003 in the display to show that the line is correctly defined.\n\n## Defining a Box Element\n\nExample Action: Move the cursor to position (Across : 5, Down : 7) to start defining a box, and press the F10 key.\n\nThe following display appears.\n\nChapter 3. Getting Started with the Overlay Utility\n\n39", + "recall": 0.4603174603174603, + "true_md": "Example Action: Press the Enter key to define the line element in the source overlay.\n\nThe following display appears.\n\nMark %L003 changes to *L003 in the display to show that the line is correctly defined.\n\nExample Action: Move the cursor to position (Across : 5, Down : 7) to start defining a box, and press the F10 key.\n\nThe following display appears.\n\nChapter 3. Getting Started with the Overlay Utility 39\n\nDesign Overlay Columns: 1- 74 Control . . \\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_ Source overlay.....STATIONERY *...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7.... 001 002 *T001 Stationery Co., Ltd. 003 004 *T002 rd Stationery Sales Slip Date: / / 005 *L003 ------------------------ 006 007 %B004 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 More... F3=Exit F5=Refresh F10=Box F12=Cancel F15=Mark on/off F16=Hide F19=Left F20=Right Specify opposite corner of box and press F10.\n\nDesign Overlay Columns: 1- 74 Control . . \\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_ Source overlay.....STATIONERY *...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7.... 001 002 *T001 Stationery Co., Ltd. 003 004 *T002 rd Stationery Sales Slip Date: / / 005 *L003 ------------------------ 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 More... F3=Exit F6=Text F9=Line F10=Box F11=Bar code F21=Element edit F22=Block edit F24=More keys\n\n## Defining a Box Element" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6049536298437038, + "doc_id": "c1b63c783d384421920754ee9b7637c002cff2c4553672d4b762c18da82a40f5", + "edit_distance": 0.5894039735099338, + "f1_score": 0.9473684210526315, + "meteor": 0.708279239969939, + "precision": 0.9767441860465116, + "pred_md": "Initially, nothing is defined in the page layout shown above. Place the record layout and define fixed data in the page interactively. You can define fixed data in the same way you did while designing the record layout.\n\nYou can place the record layout in the following steps.\n\nExample Action: Move the cursor to the position (Across : 5, Down : 5) you want to place the record layout and press the F13 key.\n\n```\nDesign Page Layout Columns: 174 Control . . PFD definition . . . . . PRODUCTLBL *...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7.... 001 002 003 004 005 % 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 More... F3=Exit F6=Place graphics F9=Place page segment F11=Place record layout F12=Cancel F24=More keys Press F6, F9 or F11 for graphics, page segment or record layout.\n```\n\nA percent sign (%) displays to indicate the cursor position. (A mark is not displayed because the element type has not yet been specified.)\n\nThe function key area changes and F11=Place record layout is displayed.\n\nChapter 8. Getting Started with Print Format Utility\n\n127", + "recall": 0.9197080291970803, + "true_md": "Design Page Layout Columns: 1- 74 Control . . PFD definition.....PRODUCTLBL *...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7.... 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 More... F3=Exit F6=Text F9=Line F10=Box F11=Bar code F21=Element edit F22=Block edit F24=More keys\n\nDesign Page Layout Columns: 1- 74 Control . . PFD definition.....PRODUCTLBL *...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7.... 001 002 003 004 005 % 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 More... F3=Exit F6=Place graphics F9=Place page segment F11=Place record layout F12=Cancel F24=More keys Press F6, F9 or F11 for graphics, page segment or record layout.\n\nA percent sign (%) displays to indicate the cursor position. (A mark is not displayed because the element type has not yet been specified.)\n\nThe function key area changes and F11=Place record layout is displayed.\n\nExample Action: Move the cursor to the position (Across : 5, Down : 5) you want to place the record layout and press the F13 key.\n\nYou can place the record layout in the following steps.\n\nInitially, nothing is defined in the page layout shown above. Place the record layout and define fixed data in the page interactively. You can define fixed data in the same way you did while designing the record layout.\n\nChapter 8. Getting Started with Print Format Utility 127" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "809324ce3b595de4eb158b92a091d9d22765898cf4f850e4476e0105d30bf82a", + "edit_distance": 0.9939172749391727, + "f1_score": 0.23529411764705882, + "meteor": 0.06229235880398672, + "precision": 0.14285714285714285, + "pred_md": "| Options. . . . . . . . . | . 86 | . . | . . . . . | | . . | . | . | . | | . . | | . | . . | . . | . | | . | | | | | | | | |\n|-----------------------------------------------|--------|-------|-------------|----|-------|-----|-----|-----|-----|-------|-----|-----|-------|-------|-----|-----|-----|-----|-----|-----|-----|-----|-----|----|----|\n| | . | | . | | | . | . | . | . . | . | | . | . . | . | | | | | . . | | | | | | |\n| Columns . . . . . | . . | . | . . | . | . | . | | . . | . | | | . | | . | . | . | . . | | . | . . | . | . | . | . | 87 |\n| Showing a Source Overlay File List | | . | . | . | . . | . | . | . | . | | | . | . . | . . | . . | . . | . | . | . | . | | . | . . | . | 88 |\n| Selecting a Source Overlay File from a List . | . | | | | . | | | . | . | . . | . | | | . . | . | . . | . . | . . | . . | . | . | . . | . | . | 88 |\n| 1=Create Source Overlay File | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . . | . | . | | . . | . . . | . . | | . | . . | . | . | . | . | . | . . | . | 89 |\n| 2=Change Source Overlay File Description . | | | | | . | | . | . | . | . . | . | . | . . | . . | . . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . . | . | 91 |\n| 3=Copy Source Overlay File . . | | | . . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | | . | . . | . | . | . . | . . | . . | . . | . | . | . | . . | . | 92 |\n| 4=Delete Source Overlay File . | | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . . | | . . | . . | . . | . | . | . . | . | . | . . | . | 93 |\n| 7=Rename Source Overlay File . | | . | . | . | . . | | . | . | . | . | . | . | . . | . | | . | . . | . . | . . | . | . . | . | . . | . | 94 |\n| 8=Display Description of Source Overlay File | . | | | | . | | | . | . | . | . | . | . . | . . | . | . . | . . | . | . | | . | . . | . . | . | 94 |\n| 12=Work with Source Overlays . | | . . | . . | . | . | . | | . | . | . | . . | . | . | . | . | . | . . | . | . . | . | . | . | . . | . | 94 |\n\n22\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.6666666666666666, + "true_md": "22 AFPUtilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.478069885931757, + "doc_id": "89984e49b5b7293c4e6562c583454c4be7e65531b6fa384c0507816e0bf8ad10", + "edit_distance": 0.75, + "f1_score": 0.9244186046511628, + "meteor": 0.4529537144333625, + "precision": 0.9298245614035088, + "pred_md": "Basic English Language Skils\n\n## HERE ARE A FEW GUIDELINES TO KEEP IN MIND WHEN SENDING E-MAILS TO YOUR COLLEAGUES:\n\n## · Always use a relevant and descriptive subject line.\n\nE-mails with blank subject lines may be marked as spam by the recipient's e-mail client, and e-mails with non-descriptive subject lines such as 'Hello' or 'Meeting' may be ignored.\n\n## · Write your e-mail in clear and simple language.\n\nDon't try to sound too formal, and don't use complicated words when simple ones would work just fine. As far as possible, write in the active voice.\n\n## · Structure your message clearly, and include only the necessary information.\n\nTake care not to confuse the message by including too many topics in one e-mail. Respect your colleagues' time, and try to keep your messages as short as possible.\n\n## · Don't type your e-mail in ALL CAPS.\n\nThis is regarded as the online equivalent of shouting.\n\n- · Always proofread your e-mail before you hit 'send'.\n\nGrammar and spelling errors come across as unprofessional.\n\n- · If you include a link in your e-mail, make sure that you provide some context.\n\nYour recipients are unlikely to click on a link if they don't have any idea as to what they are going to see when they open it.\n\n- · Only mark an e-mail as 'urgent' when it really does require immediate attention.\n\nWhat's urgent to you may not always be urgent to your recipients.\n\n## · Don't use the CC' or Reply All' functions unnecessarily.\n\nOnly send your e-mails to the people who really need to see them.", + "recall": 0.9190751445086706, + "true_md": "## HERE ARE A FEW GUIDELINES TO KEEP IN MIND WHEN SENDING E-MAILS TO YOUR COLLEAGUES:\n\nBasic English Language Skills\n\n- • Always use a relevant and descriptive subject line. E-mails with blank subject lines may be marked as spam by the \n\n- • Write your e-mail in clear and simple language. Don’t try to sound too formal, and don’t use complicated words \n\n- • Structure your message clearly, and include only the necessary information. Take care not to confuse the message by including too many topics \n\n- • Don’t type your e-mail in ALL CAPS. This is regarded as the online equivalent of shouting.\n\n- • Always proofread your e-mail before you hit ‘send’. Grammar and spelling errors come across as unprofessional.\n\n- • If you include a link in your e-mail, make sure that you provide some context. Your recipients are unlikely to click on a link if they don’t have any \n\n- • Only mark an e-mail as ‘urgent’ when it really does require immedi- ate attention. What’s urgent to you may not always be urgent to your recipients.\n\n- • Don’t use the CC’ or Reply All’ functions unnecessarily. Only send your e-mails to the people who really need to see them.\n\nate attention. What’s urgent to you may not always be urgent to your recipients.\n\nDon’t use the CC’ or Reply All’ functions unnecessarily. Only send your e-mails to the people who really need to see them.\n\ncontext. Your recipients are unlikely to click on a link if they don’t have any idea as to what they are going to see when they open it.\n\nAlways proofread your e-mail before you hit ‘send’. Grammar and spelling errors come across as unprofessional.\n\nDon’t type your e-mail in ALL CAPS. This is regarded as the online equivalent of shouting.\n\ninformation. Take care not to confuse the message by including too many topics in one e-mail. Respect your colleagues’ time, and try to keep your messages as short as possible.\n\nWrite your e-mail in clear and simple language. Don’t try to sound too formal, and don’t use complicated words when simple ones would work just fine. As far as possible, write in the active voice.\n\nAlways use a relevant and descriptive subject line. E-mails with blank subject lines may be marked as spam by the recipient’s e-mail client, and e-mails with non-descriptive subject lines such as “Hello” or “Meeting” may be ignored." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.15755733131497723, + "doc_id": "86dc9ab64354ea673bc19c19d75aeeafedb54a1504373d6648b93a586d192eae", + "edit_distance": 0.82, + "f1_score": 0.3076923076923077, + "meteor": 0.6146384479717814, + "precision": 0.18604651162790697, + "pred_md": "## Appendix H. Code 128 Character Set\n\nTable 112. Code 128 character set\n\nNote: The printer or AFP Utilities for iSeries generate all START, STOP, SHIFT, and CODE characters in order to produce the shortest bar code possible from the given data.\n\n463", + "recall": 0.8888888888888888, + "true_md": "## Appendix H. Code 128 Character Set\n\nTable112.Code128characterset\n\n463" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7247852719653999, + "doc_id": "fe17c5fde4db7cc83cb8312e8d4be5c4f824ef1900dc641e09ca84180d451bac", + "edit_distance": 0.41818181818181815, + "f1_score": 0.9612403100775194, + "meteor": 0.9368394761844128, + "precision": 0.96875, + "pred_md": "## Source Overlay\n\n24\n\nFigure 12 shows a sample overlay.\n\nFigure 12 shows a sample overlay.\n\nFigure 12. Sample Overlay\n\nFigure 12. Sample Overlay\n\nA source overlay provides the necessary information to create an overlay object that can be printed on an IPDS printer.\n\nThe following information must be provided in a source overlay.\n\n## Overlay Specifications\n\nThe specifications contain characters per inch, lines per inch, degree of rotation, default element measurement method, and so on.\n\n## Overlay Fonts\n\nFonts are predefined, but can be changed.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.9538461538461539, + "true_md": "Figure 12 shows a sample overlay.\n\nA source overlay provides the necessary information to create an overlay object that can be printed on an IPDS printer.\n\nThe following information must be provided in a source overlay.\n\nThe specifications contain characters per inch, lines per inch, degree of rotation, default element measurement method, and so on.\n\nFonts are predefined, but can be changed.\n\n## Overlay Fonts\n\n## Overlay Specifications\n\n## Source Overlay\n\nFigure12.SampleOverlay\n\n24 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8562671173587458, + "doc_id": "51da0dae3f118ef9c6966dd21266d6cf66365415ba23d527caf882228df6f657", + "edit_distance": 0.12643678160919541, + "f1_score": 0.9306930693069306, + "meteor": 0.8978698327295972, + "precision": 0.8867924528301887, + "pred_md": "When the parameter values of the elements become incorrect by changing the parameter values of the overlay specifications, a warning message is displayed. You can adjust parameter values of those elements by pressing the Enter key, or you can change the parameter values of the overlay specifications to correct the errors.\n\nThe following table describes the cause of warning messages and the results.\n\nTable 6. The Cause of a Message and Its Results\n\nChapter 5. Work with Source Overlays\n\n71", + "recall": 0.9791666666666666, + "true_md": "When the parameter values of the elements become incorrect by changing the parameter values of the overlay specifications, a warning message is displayed. You can adjust parameter values of those elements by pressing the Enter key, or you can change the parameter values of the overlay specifications to correct the errors.\n\nThe following table describes the cause of warning messages and the results.\n\nTable6.TheCauseofaMessageandItsResults\n\nChapter 5. Work with Source Overlays 71" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7598533147606717, + "doc_id": "def7d1709f965889360594680cca95d488807959a445d765bb36767bd5bad6df", + "edit_distance": 0.7163461538461539, + "f1_score": 0.9146341463414634, + "meteor": 0.7452876346403607, + "precision": 0.9868421052631579, + "pred_md": "## 3=Copy Page Segment\n\nTo copy a page segment, do the following on the Work with Page Segments display on page 351.\n\n- 1. Type 3 in the Opt column beside the page segment that you want to copy.\n- 2. Press Enter.\n\nThe CL command CRTDUPOBJ will be called.\n\n## 4=Delete Page Segments\n\nTo delete a page segment, do the following on the Work with Page Segments display on page 351.\n\n- 1. Type 4 in the Opt column beside the page segment that you want to delete.\n- 2. Press Enter.\n\nThe Confirm Delete of Page Segments display appears:\n\nOn this display, all the page segments that you specified to be deleted on the previous display are listed.\n\nPress Enter to delete the page segments in the list or press F12 to cancel the deletion. When you press Enter, the CL command DLTPAGSEG is called.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide\n\n354", + "recall": 0.8522727272727273, + "true_md": "## 3=Copy Page Segment\n\n## 4=Delete Page Segments\n\nTo copy a page segment, do the following on the Work with Page Segments display on page 351.\n\nThe CL command CRTDUPOBJ will be called.\n\nThe Confirm Delete of Page Segments display appears:\n\nTo delete a page segment, do the following on the Work with Page Segments display on page 351.\n\nF11=Display names only F12=Cancel\n\nBottom\n\nOn this display, all the page segments that you specified to be deleted on the previous display are listed.\n\nPress Enter to delete the page segments in the list or press F12 to cancel the deletion. When you press Enter, the CL command DLTPAGSEG is called.\n\n354 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\n- 1. Type 3 in the Opt column beside the page segment that you want to copy.\n\n- 2. Press Enter.\n\n- 1. Type 4 in the Opt column beside the page segment that you want to delete.\n\n- 2. Press Enter.\n\n## Confirm Delete of Page Segments\n\nPress enter to confirm your choices for 4=Delete. Press F12 to return to change your choices." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9533225131397628, + "doc_id": "090c340cb60347b4c2e56d20d141ca3f68934d66e177c4a0e78fc7422018b620", + "edit_distance": 0.5012048192771085, + "f1_score": 0.9712460063897764, + "meteor": 0.7834805740110519, + "precision": 0.9620253164556962, + "pred_md": "## Columns\n\n146\n\nTable 20. Work with PFD Definitions columns\n\n## Showing a PFD Definition List\n\nThe PFD definitions can be listed on the lower part of the display by specifying the Library prompt and File prompt. When you want to change the content of the list, specify the name of a file and library, and press the Enter key. You can page up or down the list on the display by specifying the starting characters in the Position to prompt.\n\nNote:\n\nWhen you specify any of the PFD Definition prompt, File prompt, and Library prompt, you can not specify the Opt column.\n\n## Selecting a PFD Definition from a List\n\nThe list on the display contains the names of all or specified subset of the PFD definitions that exist in the PFD definition file indicated by the File prompt. The text that describes the PFD definitions and the date of the last change to the PFD definition are also shown in the list.\n\nWhen a list is shown, a one-word indicator always appears below and to the right of the list to tell you where you are in the list. More... means that there are more items after the item currently shown. Bottom means that you are at the end of the list.\n\nUse the Page or Roll keys to move forward or backward through the list.\n\nIf you are creating a PFD definition, you can check this list to see what names are already used before you choose a new name. You can create a PFD definition by typing 1 and a PFD definition name in the first list position, and you can select other PFD definitions from the list using any of the options except 1 (Create).\n\nTherefore, you can select one or more names by doing one or both of the following:\n\n- v In the Opt column beside the PFD definition name in the list that you want to use, type the number of the option (task) to be used.\n- v In only the first (top) position of the list, type an option number (for the task), and a PFD definition name in the Opt and PFD Definition columns respectively.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.9806451612903225, + "true_md": "## Columns\n\n## Showing a PFD Definition List\n\n## Selecting a PFD Definition from a List\n\nThe list on the display contains the names of all or specified subset of the PFD definitions that exist in the PFD definition file indicated by the File prompt. The text that describes the PFD definitions and the date of the last change to the PFD definition are also shown in the list.\n\nWhen a list is shown, a one-word indicator always appears below and to the right of the list to tell you where you are in the list. More... means that there are more items after the item currently shown. Bottom means that you are at the end of the list.\n\nUse the Page or Roll keys to move forward or backward through the list.\n\nIf you are creating a PFD definition, you can check this list to see what names are already used before you choose a new name. You can create a PFD definition by typing 1 and a PFD definition name in the first list position, and you can select other PFD definitions from the list using any of the options except 1 (Create).\n\nTherefore, you can select one or more names by doing one or both of the following:\n\nThe PFD definitions can be listed on the lower part of the display by specifying the Library prompt and File prompt. When you want to change the content of the list, specify the name of a file and library, and press the Enter key. You can page up or down the list on the display by specifying the starting characters in the Position to prompt.\n\n- v In the Opt column beside the PFD definition name in the list that you want to use, type the number of the option (task) to be used.\n\n- v In only the first (top) position of the list, type an option number (for the task), and a PFD definition name in the Opt and PFD Definition columns respectively.\n\n- Note: When you specify any of the PFD Definition prompt, File prompt, and Library prompt, you can not specify the Opt column.\n\nTable20.WorkwithPFDDefinitionscolumns\n\n146 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7013905466085864, + "doc_id": "1a73bd8e6d0ab2e0dc6d97929166b0019983b7e4a159551f527faeb2e52434fd", + "edit_distance": 0.3493975903614458, + "f1_score": 0.8888888888888888, + "meteor": 0.882645277324127, + "precision": 0.8301886792452831, + "pred_md": "Table 92. Tasks related to page segments (continued)\n\n## Tasks Related to Screen View of Design Display\n\nNote:\n\nThe following description assumes that you are on one of the following displays and in the screen view:\n\nThe Design Overlay display\n\nThe Design Record Layout display\n\nThe Design Page Layout display\n\n## Defining an Element\n\nTable 93. Defining an element in the screen view of the design display\n\nAppendix E. How to Do a Task\n\n447", + "recall": 0.9565217391304348, + "true_md": "## Tasks Related to Screen View of Design Display\n\nNote: The following description assumes that you are on one of the following displays and in the screen view:\n\nThe Design Overlay display\n\nThe Design Record Layout display\n\nThe Design Page Layout display\n\n## Defining an Element\n\nTable93.Defininganelementinthescreenviewofthedesigndisplay\n\nAppendix E. How to Do a Task 447\n\nTable92.Tasksrelatedtopagesegments (continued)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.3950835618155951, + "doc_id": "298f46c461f43f799e13dd6d1a3010bb99a8706b4245e9e5c126daf7ac9f66de", + "edit_distance": 0.5666666666666667, + "f1_score": 0.6329113924050633, + "meteor": 0.7391929242675511, + "precision": 0.5555555555555556, + "pred_md": "436\n\nFigure 49. Shading patterns\n\nFigure 49. Shading patterns\n\nWhen you specify the following choice for the Shading type prompt, the percentage ranges as shown are designated:\n\nShade type\n\nValue (%)\n\n*LIGHT\n\n24.00 - 26.99\n\n*MEDIUM\n\n48.00 - 50.99\n\n*DARK\n\n72.00 - 74.99\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.7352941176470589, + "true_md": "Following is an example of shading.\n\nWhen you specify the following choice for the Shading type prompt, the percentage ranges as shown are designated:\n\n436 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\nFigure49.Shadingpatterns" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "23f86483c4b4088bb2b9f77ac9f67b035ae67e16b7e58732243ce8dcd367cedd", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9976851851851852, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Chapter 13. Design Operation\n\n257", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Chapter 13. Design Operation 257" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5550625427160644, + "doc_id": "9b3bf34684fada91febc7fb63f8d9b7c3967d00a1dc933c60877816dc2bd89eb", + "edit_distance": 0.5618279569892473, + "f1_score": 0.7970479704797047, + "meteor": 0.6871193366061574, + "precision": 0.9642857142857143, + "pred_md": "112\n\n## Designing a Record Layout\n\nThere are two kinds of records which are distinguished depending on their definitions as follows:\n\n- v The record defined in the database file is referred to as a \" database file record. \"\n- v The record defined by the Design Record Layout process of the Print Format Utility will be referred to as a \" record \" or \" record layout. \"\n\nFrom this display you can specify the layout of the data in a record. Initially, there is nothing defined in the record. From this display, you can define the record layout, that is, which field of the record in the database file or what kinds of elements such as lines, boxes, or bar codes are printed at what location in the record.\n\nThe following are different types of data you can specify in a record:\n\n## Variable Data\n\nField data from a database file is called variable data .\n\nText You can specify not only their locations on the page, but also color, direction, and so on.\n\n## Bar Codes\n\nYou can specify not only their locations on the page, but also color, direction, and so on.\n\nImage\n\nYou can specify the mapping of data in a database file to a page segment name.\n\n## Graphics\n\nYou can specify the mapping of data in a database file to the name of a folder, a document, a library, a file, or a member.\n\nNote: Variable data can be specified only in the record layout.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.6792452830188679, + "true_md": "## Designing a Record Layout\n\nDesign Record Layout Columns: 1- 74 Control . . PFD definition.....PRODUCTLBL *...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7.... 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 More... F3=Exit F6=Text F9=Line F10=Box F11=Bar code F21=Element edit F22=Block edit F24=More keys\n\nThere are two kinds of records which are distinguished depending on their definitions as follows:\n\nFrom this display you can specify the layout of the data in a record. Initially, there is nothing defined in the record. From this display, you can define the record layout, that is, which field of the record in the database file or what kinds of elements such as lines, boxes, or bar codes are printed at what location in the record.\n\nThe following are different types of data you can specify in a record:\n\nField data from a database file is called variable data .\n\nYou can specify not only their locations on the page, but also color, direction, and so on.\n\nYou can specify the mapping of data in a database file to the name of a folder, a document, a library, a file, or a member.\n\n- Text You can specify not only their locations on the page, but also color, direction, and so on.\n\n- Image You can specify the mapping of data in a database file to a page segment name.\n\nNote: Variable data can be specified only in the record layout.\n\n## Graphics\n\n## Bar Codes\n\n## Variable Data\n\n112 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\n- v The record defined in the database file is referred to as a † database file record. †\n\n- v The record defined by the Design Record Layout process of the Print Format Utility will be referred to as a † record † or † record layout. †" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7448579655194831, + "doc_id": "5b68c5bb58e823906a966b017e1008d2fc8b3287275fbedb050441bfd49b9cc8", + "edit_distance": 0.22641509433962265, + "f1_score": 0.9210526315789475, + "meteor": 0.8870006705401264, + "precision": 0.9210526315789473, + "pred_md": "420\n\n## Degree of Rotation\n\nYou can specify 0, 90, 180, and 270 to rotate the text clockwise.\n\nThe following print examples show various rotation and formats of the text.\n\nTable 85. Degree of rotation and rotation formats\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.9210526315789473, + "true_md": "## Degree of Rotation\n\nYou can specify 0, 90, 180, and 270 to rotate the text clockwise.\n\nThe following print examples show various rotation and formats of the text.\n\nTable85.Degreeofrotationandrotationformats\n\n420 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.45601393324358347, + "doc_id": "04d8c58278a94cd066a91c4bca14b720412ffa91623c1db9d3ab61624e66d779", + "edit_distance": 0.5719557195571956, + "f1_score": 0.8078817733990148, + "meteor": 0.5725956809181275, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "To print only the tutorial overview.\n\n## Example Actions:\n\n- 1. Press the Tab key twice to position the cursor to the PFD definition prompt.\n- 2. Press the F4 key.\n\nThe Select PFD Definition display appears:\n\n## Example Actions:\n\n- 1. Press the Tab key to position the cursor to PFD definition TUTOR10.\n- 2. Type 1, and press Enter.\n\nThe Print Database File Member display appears again.\n\n## Example Action:\n\n- 1. Press the Enter key again to print the tutorial overview.\n\nNote: A spooled file is created in an output queue by the print operation, and it is printed on the printer after the print writer sends it to a printer.\n\nThe IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries menu appears.\n\nExample Action: Press the F3 key to return to the Main Menu.\n\nChapter 8. Getting Started with Print Format Utility\n\n137", + "recall": 0.6776859504132231, + "true_md": "To print only the tutorial overview.\n\n## Example Actions:\n\n- 1. Press the Tab key twice to position the cursor to the PFD definition prompt.\n\n- 2. Press the F4 key.\n\nThe Select PFD Definition display appears:\n\nSelect PFD Definition File.........: QAFCTUTPFD Library . . ....: QGPL Position to ...... Starting characters Type option, press Enter. 1=Select PFD Opt Definition Text TUTORIAL Entire tutorial TUTOR10 Overview - Topics covered in the tutorial TUTOR20 Create Source Overlay file and Source Overlay TUTOR25 Create Source Overlay TUTOR30 Create the database file and add data with DFU TUTOR32 Create the database file - no data TUTOR40 Add data to the database file with DFU TUTOR50 Create PFD File, Create and Change a PFD TUTOR55 Create a PFD Definition More... F5=Refresh F12=Cancel\n\n## Example Action:\n\n## Example Actions:\n\nThe Print Database File Member display appears again.\n\nThe IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries menu appears.\n\nExample Action: Press the F3 key to return to the Main Menu.\n\n- Note: A spooled file is created in an output queue by the print operation, and it is printed on the printer after the print writer sends it to a printer.\n\n- 1. Press the Enter key again to print the tutorial overview.\n\n- 1. Press the Tab key to position the cursor to PFD definition TUTOR10.\n\n- 2. Type 1, and press Enter.\n\n137\n\nChapter 8. Getting Started with Print Format Utility" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.49736679581032145, + "doc_id": "916bf37f973a171a32527cc72ea005d00f5ace410c53e5af935d34632f3bad22", + "edit_distance": 0.3375, + "f1_score": 0.8145161290322581, + "meteor": 0.7026436804830157, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "- Step 4. To remove the element, press F10. To copy or move the element, move the cursor to the position where the selected element is to be copied (or moved). Page up or down to position the screen if necessary.\n- Step 5. To copy or move the element, press one of the following function keys:\n\nCopy F6 Move F9\n\nThe element is copied, moved, or removed, and the element edit operation is complete.\n\n## Block Edit\n\nYou can copy, move, or remove multiple elements in a rectangular area at one time with the block edit function. The elements displayed without an element mark or hidden under the other elements can also be edited by this function. The following example explains how to copy, move, or remove the elements:\n\n- Step 1. Scroll the window to display the elements to be edited.\n- Step 2. Place the cursor at one corner of the rectangular area that contains the elements to be edited.\n- Step 3. Press the F22 key to begin the block edit operation and specify one corner of the rectangular area. A % sign appears at the cursor position.\n\nChapter 13. Design Operation\n\n289", + "recall": 0.6870748299319728, + "true_md": "- Step 4. To remove the element, press F10. To copy or move the element, move the cursor to the position where the selected element is to be copied (or moved). Page up or down to position the screen if necessary.\n\n- Step 5. To copy or move the element, press one of the following function keys:\n\nThe element is copied, moved, or removed, and the element edit operation is complete.\n\nYou can copy, move, or remove multiple elements in a rectangular area at one time with the block edit function. The elements displayed without an element mark or hidden under the other elements can also be edited by this function. The following example explains how to copy, move, or remove the elements:\n\n- Step 1. Scroll the window to display the elements to be edited.\n\n- Step 2. Place the cursor at one corner of the rectangular area that contains the elements to be edited.\n\n- Step 3. Press the F22 key to begin the block edit operation and specify one corner of the rectangular area. A % sign appears at the cursor position.\n\nChapter 13. Design Operation 289\n\n## Block Edit\n\n- Copy F6\n\n- Move F9\n\nDesign Overlay Columns: 1- 74 Control . . Source overlay.....SAMPLE *...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7.... 001 002 003 004 005 006 *T001 s an example. 007 008 009 *T002 s an example. 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 More... F3=Exit F6=Text F9=Line F10=Box F11=Bar code F21=Element edit F22=Block edit F24=More keys One element copied." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8634289879656829, + "doc_id": "07093893be7de922de6d1538ee5e0f35483fdf896cf5b2b5efe68339ee2e2980", + "edit_distance": 0.11538461538461539, + "f1_score": 0.9347826086956522, + "meteor": 0.9447436628959798, + "precision": 0.9347826086956522, + "pred_md": "Basic English Language Skils\n\n## CHAPTER 9:\n\n## TIPS FOR ANSWERING EXAM QUESTIONS\n\nYou're sitting at a table in a room full of students, hunched over your exam paper, with your pen in hand. Your brain feels fried, and your hand is starting to cramp. You look at the clock, and you realise that you have only ten minutes left to answer Question 5b - which counts for 50 marks.\n\nExams can be a stressful experience. To help reduce the stress and anxiety surrounding exams, and to help you achieve the best possible marks, we've compiled a list of exam-writing tips for you.\n\n## IMPROVE YOUR MARKS!\n\nD\n\neveloped for Oxbridge Academy", + "recall": 0.9347826086956522, + "true_md": "Basic English Language Skills\n\n## CHAPTER 9:\n\n## TIPS FOR ANSWERING EXAM QUESTIONS\n\nYou’re sitting at a table in a room full of students, hunched over your exam paper, with your pen in hand. Your brain feels fried, and your hand is starting to cramp. You look at the clock, and you realise that you have only ten minutes left to answer Question 5b – which counts for 50 marks.\n\nExams can be a stressful experience. To help reduce the stress and anxiety surrounding exams, and to help you achieve the best possible marks, we’ve compiled a list of exam-writing tips for you.\n\nDeveloped for Oxbridge Academy\n\nIMPROVE YOUR MARKS!" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.3497458943927543, + "doc_id": "9c26b1bf93b522be99d36cf7b7a9afb3e8bd77567fef275eeebdffb45a67d3db", + "edit_distance": 0.4732142857142857, + "f1_score": 0.763819095477387, + "meteor": 0.5850219654547735, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Chapter 12. Print Database File Member\n\nOnce you have designed your Print Format Utility application, you can run the application using any of the three following methods:\n\n- v By selecting Print database file from the Work with PFD Definitions display. To get to the Work with PFD Definitions display, use the STRPFU command or STRAFPU option 11.\n- v By selecting Print database file from the APFU menu.\n- v By running the PRTPFDDTA command.\n\n## Start Printing from Work with PFD Definitions Display\n\nTo start printing database file members from the Work with PFD Definitions display, type 9 in the Opt column beside the PFD definition you want to use to print a database file member and then press the Enter key.\n\n215", + "recall": 0.6178861788617886, + "true_md": "## Chapter 12. Print Database File Member\n\n## Start Printing from Work with PFD Definitions Display\n\nOnce you have designed your Print Format Utility application, you can run the application using any of the three following methods:\n\n- v By selecting Print database file from the Work with PFD Definitions display. To get to the Work with PFD Definitions display, use the STRPFU command or STRAFPU option 11.\n\n- v By selecting Print database file from the APFU menu.\n\n- v By running the PRTPFDDTA command.\n\nTo start printing database file members from the Work with PFD Definitions display, type 9 in the Opt column beside the PFD definition you want to use to print a database file member and then press the Enter key.\n\n## Work with PFD Definitions\n\nFile . . ........ PFDFILE Name, F4 for list Library........ MYLIB Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB PFD definition ..... *ALL Name, generic*, *ALL Position to....... Starting characters Type options, press Enter. 1=Create 2=Change 3=Copy 4=Delete 6=Print PFD definition 7=Rename 9=Print database file PFD Opt Definition Text Changed 9 PRODUCTLBL PFD exercise 12/13/90 Bottom Parameters or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F9=Retrieve F11=Display names only F12=Cancel\n\n215" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6890550637934566, + "doc_id": "15a02321d997c50fd7ad419492d9f13f96e2620bb1e7623c40ea1755ae657009", + "edit_distance": 0.5517241379310345, + "f1_score": 0.8253968253968254, + "meteor": 0.8875503020414149, + "precision": 0.7647058823529411, + "pred_md": "430\n\nChoice on the Define Box Detail display:\n\nFormat : 2=Vertical Degree of rotation : 90\n\nChoice on the Define Overlay Specifications display or the Define PFD Specifications Display:\n\nDegree of rotation : 90\n\nFigure 43. Print Example - 10\n\nFigure 43. Print Example - 10\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.896551724137931, + "true_md": "Figure43.PrintExample-10\n\n430 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\nChoice on the Define Box Detail display:\n\nFormat : 2=Vertical Degree of rotation : 90\n\nChoice on the Define Overlay Specifications display or the Define PFD Specifications Display:\n\nDegree of rotation : 90" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8960327380157671, + "doc_id": "de583e4ddc7613b8b3a026a16762b952ff81a16c6f7902a5610f7ddbe35d3387", + "edit_distance": 0.09202453987730061, + "f1_score": 0.9381443298969072, + "meteor": 0.9699765506366594, + "precision": 0.9191919191919192, + "pred_md": "Basic English Language Skils\n\n## STEP 1 - SELECT YOUR COURSE\n\nOxbridge Academy Short Course: Marketing Management\n\nADV101\n\nBefore you start filling in the registration form, you need to choose your course. Once you've identified the course that you would like to study, remember to check that you meet the entry requirements.\n\nYou can find the course name and course code for your chosen course on the relevant detailed course information page on our website. Have a look at the example in the screenshot below (the course name and course code are circled in red):\n\nPlease make sure to check the accreditation status of your chosen course. Some of our courses are non-credit bearing skills development courses, which are neither accredited by external bodies nor registered on the NQF. Please go to our website: oxbridgeacademy.co.za for more information about our skills development courses.\n\nDeveloped for Oxbridge Academy", + "recall": 0.9578947368421052, + "true_md": "## STEP 1 – SELECT YOUR COURSE\n\nBasic English Language Skills\n\nBefore you start filling in the registration form, you need to choose your course. Once you’ve identified the course that you would like to study, remember to check that you meet the entry requirements.\n\nYou can find the course name and course code for your chosen course on the relevant detailed course information page on our website. Have a look at the example in the screenshot below (the course name and course code are circled in red):\n\nPlease make sure to check the accreditation status of your chosen course. Some of our courses are non-credit bearing skills development courses, which are neither accredited by external bodies nor registered on the NQF. Please go to our website: oxbridgeacademy.co.za for more information about our skills development courses.\n\nDeveloped for Oxbridge Academy" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.27447938256311044, + "doc_id": "b9822e4c6ab0b9591c8be42ad808aa06a340a646aeb58c8936f1ad7d809d18dc", + "edit_distance": 0.55, + "f1_score": 0.625, + "meteor": 0.7180459639986415, + "precision": 0.5263157894736842, + "pred_md": "## Prompts\n\n62\n\nTable 3. Work with Source Overlays prompts\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.7692307692307693, + "true_md": "## Prompts\n\nTable3.WorkwithSourceOverlaysprompts\n\n62 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.21141520553439383, + "doc_id": "c6c0c8ee5b7898889bda2bf493ca1a9329d123bb7f174f93a02ca1cc102ac319", + "edit_distance": 0.8, + "f1_score": 0.5873015873015873, + "meteor": 0.7139480672194681, + "precision": 0.43023255813953487, + "pred_md": "262\n\n## Formatting Examples:\n\nTable 58. Formatting examples\n\nHorizontal\n\nVertical\n\nVertical, right to left\n\nCharacters are printed from left to right. The following shows an example:\n\n```\n--------------------------------| The first line. | | The second line. | | The third line. | | | --------------------------------\n```\n\nCharacters are printed vertically from top to bottom. Vertical lines of text are printed from left to right. The following shows an example:\n\nCharacters are printed vertically from top to bottom. Vertical lines of text are printed from right to left, as the Japanese traditional way of formatting. This is the same meaning as Vertical when there is only one line of text. This choice appears when you are using DBCS data. The following shows an example.\n\nOn the Define Box Detail display, type the choices and press Enter, the F3, or F12 key after you specify the parameters. The Design display will be displayed.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.925, + "true_md": "## Formatting Examples:\n\nTable58.Formattingexamples\n\nOn the Define Box Detail display, type the choices and press Enter, the F3, or F12 key after you specify the parameters. The Design display will be displayed.\n\n262 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.769549180062459, + "doc_id": "b6837732171efbfbde33d83cbe02a176a56e72bd71eb59038c31f23fffcdaa5d", + "edit_distance": 0.41015625, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9232130978915299, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Page 1\n\n-----------------------------------------------------\n\n|\n\nPlaced Records : Record\n\n1\n\n|\n\nRecord 2\n\n|\n\nRecord 3\n\n|\n\nRecord 4\n\n|\n\n|\n\nSummary data of SALES for page\n\n|\n\n|\n\nFirst value :\n\n200 (from Record 1)\n\n|\n\nLast value : 100 (from Record 4)\n\n|\n\nTotal\n\n: 1800 (from Record 1-4)\n\n|\n\nAverage\n\n: 450 (Total/record count)\n\n|\n\nMaximum :\n\n1000 (from Record 3)\n\n|\n\nMinimum :\n\n100 (from Record 4)\n\n|\n\nRecord count:\n\n4\n\n|\n\n|\n\nSummary data of SALES for page break\n\n|\n\n|\n\nFirst value :\n\nNot printed\n\n|\n\nLast value\n\n:\n\nNot printed\n\n|\n\nTotal\n\n: Not printed\n\n|\n\nAverage\n\n: Not printed\n\n|\n\nMaximum\n\n:\n\nNot\n\nprinted\n\n|\n\nMinimum :\n\nNot printed\n\n|\n\nRecord count:\n\nNot printed\n\n|\n\n|\n\n|\n\n|\n\n|\n\n|\n\n|\n\n|\n\n|\n\n|\n\n|\n\n|\n\n|\n\n|\n\n|\n\n|\n\n|\n\n|\n\n|\n\n|\n\n|\n\n|\n\n|\n\n|\n\n|\n\n|\n\n-----------------------------------------------------\n\nNote:\n\nThe page break does not occur on page 1 because the value of the PRODUCT field does not change. Therefore, summary data for the page break is not printed.\n\nChapter 10. Work with PFD Definitions\n\n179", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "- Note: The page break does not occur on page 1 because the value of the PRODUCT field does not change. Therefore, summary data for the page break is not printed.\n\nPage 1 ----------------------------------------------------- | Placed Records : Record 1 | | Record 2 Record 3 | | Record 4 | | Summary data of SALES for page | | First value : 200 (from Record 1) | Last value : 100 (from Record 4) | Total : 1800 (from Record 1-4) | Average : 450 (Total/record count) | Maximum : 1000 (from Record 3) | Minimum : 100 (from Record 4) | Record count: 4 | | | Summary data of SALES for page break | | First value : Not printed | Last value : | Total Not printed | Average : | Maximum Not printed | Minimum : | Record count: Not printed | | -----------------------------------------------------\n\nChapter 10. Work with PFD Definitions 179" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9404861035849763, + "doc_id": "b22e0f9bb66720fbd77884198de9b62bce1a0c412b2565fec8c30b00050210ec", + "edit_distance": 0.14056224899598393, + "f1_score": 0.9799196787148595, + "meteor": 0.9514760750624321, + "precision": 0.976, + "pred_md": "Basic English Language Skills\n\n- 19. You cannot use a dictionary when summarising your study material.\n- 20. Plagiarism is not a serious offence.\n- 21. When writing an exam, you should always answer the questions in numerical order.\n- 22. E-mail etiquette is important in the workplace.\n- 23. Mind maps help you to understand the relationships between con -cepts.\n- 24. When you answer an essay question, you should try to include as much information as possible.\n\n## Do the following:\n\n- 25. Create a mind map to summarise Chapter 7 (How to Ask for Help from Your Tutor). (5)\n- 26. List 3 things you need to do if you want to earn good marks for your written assignments. (3)\n- 27. List 5 important things to keep in mind when writing a cover letter.\n\n(5)\n\n- 28. List 5 of the things that you should include in a resignation letter.\n\n(5)\n\n- 29. List 3 methods you can use to summarise your study material. (3)\n- 30. Give 2 examples of how good language skills can benefit your ca -reer. (2)\n- 31. Complete the following sentence:\n\nSummarising your study material gives you the opportunity to\n\nDeveloped for Oxbridge Academy", + "recall": 0.9838709677419355, + "true_md": "Basic English Language Skills\n\nDeveloped for Oxbridge Academy\n\nSummarising your study material gives you the opportunity to\n\n- 19. You cannot use a dictionary when summarising your study material.\n\n- 20. Plagiarism is not a serious offence.\n\n- 21. When writing an exam, you should always answer the questions in numerical order.\n\n- 22. E-mail etiquette is important in the workplace.\n\n- 23. Mind maps help you to understand the relationships between con - cepts.\n\n- 24. When you answer an essay question, you should try to include as much information as possible.\n\n- 25. Create a mind map to summarise Chapter 7 (How to Ask for Help from Your Tutor). (5)\n\n- 26. List 3 things you need to do if you want to earn good marks for your written assignments. (3)\n\n- 27. List 5 important things to keep in mind when writing a cover letter. (5)\n\n- 28. List 5 of the things that you should include in a resignation letter. (5)\n\n- 29. List 3 methods you can use to summarise your study material. (3)\n\n- 30. Give 2 examples of how good language skills can benefit your ca - reer. (2)\n\n- 31. Complete the following sentence:\n\nDo the following:" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5919429392087461, + "doc_id": "2c27602773075c5aa8361423668b06e31acebbd596cbab11bac66ac3694c8287", + "edit_distance": 0.6685393258426966, + "f1_score": 0.9362880886426592, + "meteor": 0.5064447501130098, + "precision": 0.9441340782122905, + "pred_md": "Basic English Language Skills\n\nBy stating the problem clearly, and by asking a specific question that you would like your tutor to answer, such as in example B, you are much more likely to get a meaningful response from your tutor.\n\n## Don't use text-speak (such as 'ur' and 'pls') in your e-mail.\n\nNot only does this look unprofessional, but your tutor may have a hard time understanding what it is that you are trying to say. You should also avoid using emoticons ( ;-) ), as these don't belong in formal communica -tion.\n\n## Proofread your e-mail.\n\nRead through your e-mail to make sure you have:\n\n- · Stated your question/problem clearly.\n- · Used a suitable tone.\n- · Used correct grammar.\n\nAlso use spellcheck to make sure that there are no spelling mistakes. If you make spelling mistakes, you will give your tutors a bad impression, as it makes your writing look sloppy.\n\n## Check that you have typed in the correct e-mail address.\n\nIt's easy to type in the wrong address by mistake.\n\n## Take care when sending attachments.\n\nIf you need to send an attachment, make sure that it is in an accessible file format, and that the size doesn't exceed the maximum limit. Many e-mail clients limit the size of attachments to 5 MB -- and if your attachment exceeds this size, your e-mail might not be delivered.\n\n## Say 'thank you'.\n\nIf you receive a reply from your tutor, it is good manners to acknowledge receipt of the response by sending a 'thank you' e- mail.\n\nBy following these tips, you are more likely to establish good relationships with your tutors, as well as to get the type of academic support that you need.\n\nRemember that asking for help is a sign of strength. And asking for help early on in your studies will increase your chances of success.\n\nDeveloped for Oxbridge Academy", + "recall": 0.9285714285714286, + "true_md": "By stating the problem clearly, and by asking a specific question that you would like your tutor to answer, such as in example B, you are much more likely to get a meaningful response from your tutor.\n\nProofread your e-mail. Read through your e-mail to make sure you have: • Stated your question/problem clearly.\n\nAlso use spellcheck to make sure that there are no spelling mistakes. If you make spelling mistakes, you will give your tutors a bad impression, as it makes your writing look sloppy.\n\nCheck that you have typed in the correct e-mail address. It’s easy to type in the wrong address by mistake.\n\nTake care when sending attachments. If you need to send an attachment, make sure that it is in an accessible file format, and that the size doesn’t exceed the maximum limit. Many e-mail clients limit the size of attachments to 5 MB -- and if your attachment exceeds this size, your e-mail might not be delivered.\n\nSay “thank you”. If you receive a reply from your tutor, it is good manners to acknowledge receipt of the response by sending a “thank you” e- mail.\n\nBy following these tips, you are more likely to establish good relationships with your tutors, as well as to get the type of academic support that you need.\n\nRemember that asking for help is a sign of strength. And asking for help early on in your studies will increase your chances of success.\n\nDeveloped for Oxbridge Academy\n\n## Say “thank you”. If you receive a reply from your tutor, it is good manners to acknowledge\n\n## Take care when sending attachments. If you need to send an attachment, make sure that it is in an accessible\n\n## Check that you have typed in the correct e-mail address. It’s easy to type in the wrong address by mistake.\n\n## Proofread your e-mail. Read through your e-mail to make sure you have:\n\nDon’t use text-speak (such as “ur” and “pls”) in your e-mail. Not only does this look unprofessional, but your tutor may have a hard time understanding what it is that you are trying to say. You should also avoid using emoticons ( ;-) ), as these don’t belong in formal communica - tion.\n\n## Don’t use text-speak (such as “ur” and “pls”) in your e-mail. Not only does this look unprofessional, but your tutor may have a hard\n\nBasic English Language Skills\n\n- Read through your e-mail to make sure you have: • Stated your question/problem clearly. • Used a suitable tone.\n\n- • Stated your question/problem clearly. • Used a suitable tone. • Used correct grammar.\n\n- • Used a suitable tone. • Used correct grammar." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9593737709821026, + "doc_id": "1f7790cfca8bfed59f9efb9a189e6c55a54e29de3a19d204d4bf5ef398ffcefc", + "edit_distance": 0.4785100286532951, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9811612835808627, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Chapter 15. Introduction to Resource Management Utility (RMU)\n\nThe Resource Management Utility is one of the AFP Utilities that allows you to manage the AFP resources, such as overlay objects, that are created by the or page segments interactively.\n\nThe Resource Management Utility has the following three functions:\n\n- v Convert to page segment\n- v Working with overlays\n- v Working with page segments\n\n## Converting to an iSeries Page Segment\n\nWhen you want to place images in an overlay or you want to print a page which contains some images such as signatures or logos, you need to store these images on the server as page segments before you use them with the Overlay Utility or the Print Format Utility.\n\nThis function allows you to create a from the following:\n\n- v An iSeries database file that contains an Image Object Content Architecture (IOCA) function set 10 image.\n- v A PC document that contains an Image Object Content Architecture (IOCA) function set 10 image and is stored in a server folder using the iSeries Access shared folder function.\n\nTo create a page segment from a file containing an image data stream (IMDS) image, use the CRTPAGSEG command.\n\n## Converting to a Page Segment from an iSeries Database File\n\nWhen your server is connected to a System/370 through a communication line, you can create a page segment from a database file of image data by the following steps:\n\n- 1. Use a System/370 image application to create an image of an IOCA function set 10 image.\n- 2. Store the image in a System/370 file.\n- 3. Send the image data from the System/370 system to the server.\n- 4. Receive the image data as a physical file member.\n- 5. Start the (STRAFPU command).\n- 6. Select Convert to page segment (option 21).\n\n309", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## Chapter 15. Introduction to Resource Management Utility (RMU)\n\n## Converting to an iSeries Page Segment\n\n## Converting to a Page Segment from an iSeries Database File\n\nThe Resource Management Utility is one of the AFP Utilities that allows you to manage the AFP resources, such as overlay objects, that are created by the or page segments interactively.\n\nThe Resource Management Utility has the following three functions:\n\nWhen you want to place images in an overlay or you want to print a page which contains some images such as signatures or logos, you need to store these images on the server as page segments before you use them with the Overlay Utility or the Print Format Utility.\n\nThis function allows you to create a from the following:\n\nTo create a page segment from a file containing an image data stream (IMDS) image, use the CRTPAGSEG command.\n\nWhen your server is connected to a System/370 through a communication line, you can create a page segment from a database file of image data by the following steps:\n\n309\n\n- v Convert to page segment\n\n- v Working with overlays\n\n- v Working with page segments\n\n- v An iSeries database file that contains an Image Object Content Architecture (IOCA) function set 10 image.\n\n- v A PC document that contains an Image Object Content Architecture (IOCA) function set 10 image and is stored in a server folder using the iSeries Access shared folder function.\n\n- 1. Use a System/370 image application to create an image of an IOCA function set 10 image.\n\n- 2. Store the image in a System/370 file.\n\n- 3. Send the image data from the System/370 system to the server.\n\n- 4. Receive the image data as a physical file member.\n\n- 5. Start the (STRAFPU command).\n\n- 6. Select Convert to page segment (option 21)." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.2148487012257097, + "doc_id": "1df0938c5a46ea49a24cd873e875693590ecf1dfcc58cc565922d1ef8ec26c6e", + "edit_distance": 0.7391304347826086, + "f1_score": 0.6486486486486486, + "meteor": 0.7815561057769222, + "precision": 0.4878048780487805, + "pred_md": "284\n\n## Record Layout\n\nTo specify a record layout in the page layout, first move the cursor to the position of the record layout, and press F13 (Place). The following display appears.\n\n```\nDesign Page Layout Columns: 174 Control . . PFD definition . . . . . PRODUCTLBL *...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7.... 001 002 003 004 005 % 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 More... F3=Exit F6=Place graphics F9=Place page segment F11=Place record layout F12=Cancel F24=More keys Press F6, F9 or F11 for graphics, page segment or record layout.\n```\n\nPress the F11 key to select the record layout to be placed. The % mark changes to %Rnnn-001 (where nnn is 001 through 999) and the key entry area appears at the lower part of the image area shown in the following display.\n\n```\nDesign Page Layout Columns: 174 Control . . PFD definition . . . . . PRODUCTLBL *...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7.... 001 002 003 004 005 %R001-001 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 More... Place Record Layout Mark . . . . . . : *R001 Measurement method . . . . : Row/Column Position . . . . . Across 5 Down 5 F3=Exit F4=Detail F6=Change measurement method F12=Cancel F24=More keys\n```\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.967741935483871, + "true_md": "284 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\n## Record Layout\n\nTo specify a record layout in the page layout, first move the cursor to the position of the record layout, and press F13 (Place). The following display appears.\n\nPress the F11 key to select the record layout to be placed. The % mark changes to %Rnnn-001 (where nnn is 001 through 999) and the key entry area appears at the lower part of the image area shown in the following display." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9542988504824075, + "doc_id": "abdcd53a00c4f836ce789ef4d68e7985323cc662b37abdb58f9cf4ce8a9fb0a8", + "edit_distance": 0.043478260869565216, + "f1_score": 0.9747899159663864, + "meteor": 0.9792823654267253, + "precision": 0.9830508474576272, + "pred_md": "282\n\nThe following table explains each field in these displays.\n\nPress Enter after you specify the parameters, press the F4 key to specify more parameters, or press F3 or F12 to cancel the operation.\n\nSelect Field in Record Format (Graphics): If you press F4 (Detail) in the Place Graphics Detail display when the cursor is in the Folder, PC document, Library, File , or Member prompt, the following occurs:\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.9666666666666667, + "true_md": "The following table explains each field in these displays.\n\nPress Enter after you specify the parameters, press the F4 key to specify more parameters, or press F3 or F12 to cancel the operation.\n\nSelect Field in Record Format (Graphics): If you press F4 (Detail) in the Place Graphics Detail display when the cursor is in the Folder, PC document, Library, File , or Member prompt, the following occurs:\n\n282 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7387945788876367, + "doc_id": "a907141f869fa09c603788ebe45694692cff5cc6c0b368d15bd016ee9eb1ca32", + "edit_distance": 0.2, + "f1_score": 0.9230769230769229, + "meteor": 0.8995595260251876, + "precision": 0.9473684210526315, + "pred_md": "256\n\nThe following table explains each field in this display.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.9, + "true_md": "The following table explains each field in this display.\n\n256 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.81303668351613, + "doc_id": "3a15c65a46812521b48cd33a90582c8129bc97865143040d895fb30417a34a2f", + "edit_distance": 0.15384615384615385, + "f1_score": 0.9361702127659574, + "meteor": 0.9244959244959245, + "precision": 0.9565217391304348, + "pred_md": "336\n\nThe following table describes the fields newly shown on the Convert to Page Segment display:\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.9166666666666666, + "true_md": "The following table describes the fields newly shown on the Convert to Page Segment display:\n\n336 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.07675053332197007, + "doc_id": "19720b9727c321be7706ab552b008aa53766dcc04f9b49c640841a63c9d21369", + "edit_distance": 0.8534704370179949, + "f1_score": 0.4347826086956522, + "meteor": 0.4253408213052947, + "precision": 0.28662420382165604, + "pred_md": "402\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide\n\ndescription specifies a 0 for the message level in the LOG parameter, a job log is not printed.\n\n- 4. Examine the job log to find out why the problem occurred.\n\nIf you cannot solve the problem, see 'Contacting Your Service Representative' on page 407.\n\n\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\n\n010: Did you send a source overlay or PFD definition to another iSeries and you can not use it on the destination iSeries system?\n\nYes See 'Sending Source Overlays and PFD Definitions' on page 398 for more information.\n\nNo Go to Step 011 below.\n\n\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\n\n011: Is the current version and release of the IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries on your system?\n\nTo verify the version and release number of your system, type GO LICPGM\n\nSelect 'Display installed licensed programs' on the menu, and look at the installed release of 5716-SS1 on the list.\n\nTo verify the version and release number of the IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries, look at the installed release of 5716-AF1 on the list.\n\nThe IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries must have the same version and release number as the IBM iSeries operating system.\n\nYes Go to Step 012 below.\n\nNo Do the following:\n\n- 1. Install the current version and release level of IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries.\n- 2. Install all current program changes to IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries.\n- 3. Retry the IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries function.\n\nSee the Software Installation manual for a description of how to install IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries and make program changes.\n\n012: Have all IBM-supplied program changes that you received for the current release of IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries been installed?\n\nYes Do the following if you require additional assistance:\n\n- v Cancel the failing job and print the job log. Sign off the work station, choosing *LIST for the LOG parameter. For example SIGNOFF LOG(*LIST)\n\nCall the system operator to verify that the job log was printed.", + "recall": 0.9, + "true_md": "402 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\ndescription specifies a 0 for the message level in the LOG parameter, a job log is not printed.\n\n- 4. Examine the job log to find out why the problem occurred.\n\nIf you cannot solve the problem, see “Contacting Your Service Representative” on page 407." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8203943562015846, + "doc_id": "94eb7266a52240fea04eb9828010174c7511a2500c44ab08233e15feccf7df73", + "edit_distance": 0.4177215189873418, + "f1_score": 0.9444444444444442, + "meteor": 0.9499516798362799, + "precision": 0.9107142857142857, + "pred_md": "Table 74. Convert Overlay to File display fields (continued)\n\n## 13=Change Overlay Text\n\nTo change an overlay text, do the following on the Work with Overlays display on page 341.\n\n- 1. Type 13 in the Opt column beside the overlay for which you want to change the description text.\n- 2. Press Enter.\n\nThe CL command CHGOBJD is called.\n\nChapter 19. Work with Overlays Function\n\n349", + "recall": 0.9807692307692307, + "true_md": "Table74.ConvertOverlaytoFiledisplayfields (continued)\n\nTo change an overlay text, do the following on the Work with Overlays display on page 341.\n\nThe CL command CHGOBJD is called.\n\n- 1. Type 13 in the Opt column beside the overlay for which you want to change the description text.\n\n- 2. Press Enter.\n\nChapter 19. Work with Overlays Function 349\n\n## 13=Change Overlay Text" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.3480169463522633, + "doc_id": "33eefc54295ccc742e2363eeaf852998dd347e403650128e6881d746420229eb", + "edit_distance": 0.6422018348623854, + "f1_score": 0.8046875000000001, + "meteor": 0.49377662678877654, + "precision": 0.9903846153846154, + "pred_md": "116\n\n## Specifying Variable Text Data from a Database File Record\n\nExample Action: Move cursor to the position (Across : 13, Down : 3) where you want to place the product name on the display and press the F6 key.\n\n- v If you know the field name of the database file record, type an ampersand (&), the field name, a period (.), and press the Enter key. When the field name is specified this way, letters must be specified in uppercase.\n- v If you do not know the field name, press the F4 key twice to show the list.\n\nExample Action: Press the F4 key.\n\nThe Define Text Detail display appears.\n\nYou can specify all parameters for a text element on the Define Text Detail display.\n\nNote: You can see the Define Detail display by pressing the F4 key for any element as well as text elements.\n\nExample Action: Move the cursor to the Text data prompt and press the F4 key.\n\nThe Select Field in Record Format display appears.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.6776315789473685, + "true_md": "## Specifying Variable Text Data from a Database File Record\n\nYou can specify all parameters for a text element on the Define Text Detail display.\n\nExample Action: Move the cursor to the Text data prompt and press the F4 key.\n\nThe Select Field in Record Format display appears.\n\nExample Action: Press the F4 key.\n\nThe Define Text Detail display appears.\n\n## Define Text Detail\n\n- Note: You can see the Define Detail display by pressing the F4 key for any element as well as text elements.\n\n- v If you know the field name of the database file record, type an ampersand (&), the field name, a period (.), and press the Enter key. When the field name is specified this way, letters must be specified in uppercase.\n\n- v If you do not know the field name, press the F4 key twice to show the list.\n\nExample Action: Move cursor to the position (Across : 13, Down : 3) where you want to place the product name on the display and press the F6 key.\n\nMark: *T003 Measurement method: Row/Column Type choices, press Enter. Position: Across .......... 13 1-999 Down . . ......... 3 Text data ......... F4 for list Element . ......... Name Format . . ......... 1 1=Horizontal, 2=Vertical Degree of rotation . . . . . 0 0, 90, 180, 270 Color . .......... *DEFAULT *DEFAULT, 1=Blue, 2=Red 3=Magenta, 4=Green, 5=Cyan 6=Yellow, 7=Brown, 8=Black Underline . . . . . . . . . N Y=Yes, N=No More... F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F6=Change measurement method F10=Edit numeric F12=Cancel Text data not specified.\n\n116 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.2710219254771062, + "doc_id": "805c3ea309594ab40afc9826d5ff05fc58dfd5e481c55c651b5ce5642a5ce739", + "edit_distance": 0.4782608695652174, + "f1_score": 0.8732394366197184, + "meteor": 0.5479393332957513, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "When you select Y (Yes) for the Change image size prompt and press Enter, the Convert to Page Segment display changes as follows:\n\nChapter 18. Convert to Page Segment Function\n\n335", + "recall": 0.775, + "true_md": "Bottom\n\nF3=Exit F5=Refresh F12=Cancel\n\nF3=Exit F5=Refresh F12=Cancel\n\nMore...\n\nType choices, press Enter.\n\nType choices, press Enter.\n\n## Convert to Page Segment\n\n## Convert to Page Segment\n\nWhen you select Y (Yes) for the Change image size prompt and press Enter, the Convert to Page Segment display changes as follows:\n\nChapter 18. Convert to Page Segment Function 335" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "a49c9dc4e9f728ee93984e2e745643d77b43463dae3c20fd8915c5c437af5663", + "edit_distance": 0.9986445272788885, + "f1_score": 0.037267080745341616, + "meteor": 0.012554402410445267, + "precision": 0.0189873417721519, + "pred_md": "## Figures\n\n| 1. | Conventional Letter Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 5 |\n|-----------------|------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|-------------------------------------------------------------------|-----------|-------------------------------------------------|-------|-----|-------------|---------|---------|---------|-------------|-----------|-------|-------------------|---------------------|---------------------|---------------|-----------------------|---------------|-------------|-----------------------|-------------------|-----------|-------------------------|---------|----|----|-----|-------------|\n| 2. | Letter Preparation Using AFP Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Using Overlays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| 3. 4. | Using Page Segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 . . . . . 9 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| 5. | Sample Overlay (Created by the Overlay Utility) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sample Label (Created by the Print Format Utility) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| 6. | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | . | . | | | | | | | | | | . | . | 10 |\n| 7. | | Print Sample (Labels) | . . | . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . | | | | | | | | | | | | | | . | . | . | | | | | | | . | . | 11 |\n| 8. | | | | . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| | | Members and Files in a Library . | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | . | . | 14 |\n| | | | | | | | | . | . | | . | | . | | . | | | | . | | . . | | . . | | | | | . | |\n| 9. | | Menu for the IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries | | | | . . | | . | | . | . | . | | . | . | | | . . | | . 15 | | | | | | | | | |\n| 10. | | Prompts and Columns on the Work with Source Overlays Display | . | . | | . | | . . | . . | | | . 16 | . | | | | | | . | | . . | | . . | | | | | | |\n| 11. | Design Display . | . | . . . . . | . . . | . . . | . . | . . . | . . . | . | . | | 17 | . . . | . . . . | | . . | . . | | . | . | . | | . | | | | | | |\n| 12. 13. | Sample Overlay . . . | | . | . . . | . | . | . . | . . . . | . . . . | . | . . | . | . | . . . . | | . | . | | . . 24 . 26 | | . . . . | | . | | | | | | |\n| | Sample Overlay . . | Overview of Overlay Utility Operation | | . . | . . | | . | . | . | | . . . | . | . | | . . | . | . . | . . | . | . | . | | . | | | | | | |\n| 14. | Record Layout Sample . | | . . . | . . | . . | . | . . | . . | . . | . | . . | | | . . . | . . | . . | | . . | . . . . . | | . . . . | . . . | . . . | | . 34 98 | | | | |\n| 15. 16. | Page Layout Sample | | . . . | . | . . | . | . . | . . | . . | | . . | . | . . | . . | . . | . | . . . | . . . | . . . . | . | . . . . 102 . 109 | . . | | | | | | | 99 |\n| 17. | Overview of Print Format Utility Operation Sample Label . . | | . | | . | . | . | | | | | . . | . | . | . | . . . . | . | . . | | | . . . . | | . . | . | . . | | | | |\n| 18. . | | | . | . . | . | | | . | . | | . | | . | . | . . . | | . | | | | | | . . . | . . | . . | | | | |\n| 19. 20. | Position-and-trim mapping . Position and Distance of the Record in the Page Layout | | | . | . . | . | | . | . | . | . | . | . | . . | . . . | . . | . | . . . . | . . | | . . | . . | . . | | . | | | . . | 166 288 |\n| 21. | Process of Converting to Page Segment . | | | | | . | . | . | . . | . | | . . | . . | . | . . . . | . . | . . . | | | . . . . | . . . | . . . | . . . . | . . . | . . . | | | . . | 310 311 |\n| 22. | Letter which contain a Page Segment Example of Position-and-Trim Mapping. | | | | | | . . | . | . | . | | . . . | . . | . | . | . . . | . . | . . | . . | . . . | | . | . . . . . | | | | | . | 337 |\n| | | | | . | . | . . | . . | . . . | . | . | . . | . | . | . . . . . | . . . . . . . . | . . . . . . | . . . | | . . . | | . . . | | | | | | | | 337 |\n| 23. 24. 25. | Example of Scale-to-Fit Mapping Example of Center-and-Trim Mapping | | | | | | | . . | . . | | . . . | . . . | . . . | . . . . . . . . . | . . . . . . . . . . | . . . . . | . . . | | . . . . . . | . . . . | . . | | . | | | | | | |\n| | Example of Rotating the Image Block | | | | | | . . | | . | | . . | . . | . | . . . | | . | . | | . . . | | . . | | . | 338 339 364 | | | | | |\n| 26. | | | | | | | | | | | . . . | | | | . | | | | . . . . . | . | . . . . | | . . | | | | | | |\n| 27. 28. 29. | Command Syntax for STROVLU Command The Command Syntax for STRPFU Command | | | | | | | | | | | | . | | . . . | . . . . | | | | . | 366 368 373 | | | | | | | | |\n| | | | | | | | | | | | . | . . | | . . . | | | | | . . . | . | . . . | . . . . . . . . . | | | | | | | |\n| 30. 31. | The Command Syntax for PRTPFDDTA Command . The Command Syntax for CVTPCDPAGS Command The Command Syntax for CVTPFMPAGS Command . | | | . | | | . | | | . . . | | . . | . | . . | . . . . | . . . . . . . . . . | . . | . . | . . . | . . . . . . | . . . . . . . . . . . | . . . . | . | . 379 . . . . | | | | | |\n| 32. 33. 34. . . | The Command Syntax for CVTOVLPFM Command. The Command Syntax for CVTPAGSPFM Command Print Example - 1 | . . | . . | . | . . | . | . | | . . . | | . | . . | . | . . . | | | . . . . | . . . . . . . . . . . | . . . | | . . . . . . | . | . . | . . . | . | | | | |\n| 35. . . | Print Example - 2 Print Example -3 | . | | | | . | . | . | | | . | | | . . | | | | . | . . . . | | . . . | | | | . | | | | |\n| 36. . . | | . | | | | | | . | . | . | . | . . | | . | | | . | . . | . | | . . . . . . | | . | | | | | | |\n| 37. . . | Print Example - 4 Print Example - 5 | . | . . | . . | | . . | . . | . | | . . | . | . . | . . | . . | . | | . . | . . | . . . . . . . | . | . . . | . . | . . . . | | | | | | |\n| . . | Print Example - 6 | . | | . | | . | . | | . . . | . | . | . . | . . | . | | | | | . | | . . . . | | . . | . . | | | | | |\n| 38. 39. | Print Example - 7 | . | . . | . | . | | . . . | . | . . | . . . | . . | | . | . . . | | . | | . . . . . . . | . . . . . | | . | | . . . . | 385 388 421 422 426 427 | | | | | 423 424 425 |\n| . . 40. . 41. | Print Example - 8 | . . . | . . | . . | | . . | . . . | . . . . | | . . | . . . | . . . . . | . . | . | . . | . . . . . . . . . . | . . . . . . . | . . . . | . . . . . | | . . . . . . . . . | . . | . . . . . | . 428 . 429 430 | | . | . | | |\n| 42. 43. 44. . | Print Example - 9 . Print Example - 10 . . . Print Example - 11 . . . . | . . . . | . . . | . . . . . . . | . . | . . | . . . . . . | . . | . . | . . . . | . . . . . . | . | | | | | | | | | . . . . . . . . . | | . . . | . | . | . | | . | 431 |\n\nxiii", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## Figures\n\nxiii" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.35125022525986144, + "doc_id": "70e4e37c86696018bc82290eef650f0f90ada670979f916e6df6a3b0eb5c6803", + "edit_distance": 0.5862068965517241, + "f1_score": 0.7027027027027027, + "meteor": 0.7538688696172249, + "precision": 0.65, + "pred_md": "## Helvetica Roman Bold\n\nFigure 52. Helvetica Roman Bold\n\nFigure 53. Courier Font Samples\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide\n\n## Courier\n\n466", + "recall": 0.7647058823529411, + "true_md": "## Helvetica Roman Bold\n\n## Courier\n\n466 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\nFigure53.CourierFontSamples\n\nFigure52.HelveticaRomanBold" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.09202155362525821, + "doc_id": "e0dff754ff2a3486a897a962a17a08fac7f36af6e5e3a31007589726b1c9fc7e", + "edit_distance": 0.8029197080291971, + "f1_score": 0.7619047619047619, + "meteor": 0.20884229320443312, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Line Element and Position\n\n## Measurement Method is Row/Column\n\nLine Placement is Border: The top of a horizontal line is positioned to the top of the row. The left side of a vertical line is positioned to the left of the column.\n\nChapter 23. Problem Analysis\n\n409", + "recall": 0.6153846153846154, + "true_md": "## Line Element and Position\n\n## Measurement Method is Row/Column\n\nLine Placement is Border: The top of a horizontal line is positioned to the top of the row. The left side of a vertical line is positioned to the left of the column.\n\n| Start | | End | | Column | Column -------+--------------------------------------------+------- | Horizontal Line | *--------------------------------------------* Row n | | | | | | | | --------+-----------+--------------------+-----------+------- | | | | | | | Column n | -------+---+-------+------- || | Start | V | Row | e | | |r| |t| | |i| |c| | --------* a *-------+------- :l: : :: : -------* l *-------+------- |i| | End | n | Row | e | | || | || --------+---+-------+------- | |\n\nChapter 23. Problem Analysis 409" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8888193340607906, + "doc_id": "ef03df40af172a7be20004cb240aaf813dca7b761dd42672fadf584674e952c3", + "edit_distance": 0.3522167487684729, + "f1_score": 0.9616519174041298, + "meteor": 0.9550524868839354, + "precision": 0.9588235294117647, + "pred_md": "In the screen view, the display is divided into the image area and the key entry area when you define or change an element as follows:\n\nFigure 11. Design Display\n\nSee 'Defining Elements in the Screen View' on page 229 for more information.\n\nFigure 11. Design DisplaySee 'Defining Elements in the Screen View' on page 229 for more information.\n\nList view: In the list view, all element definitions are listed on the display in the order of the sequence number unless the list has been sorted using F4=Sort. The list can be sorted by the sequence number (NBR), name, or across or down position. Each line describes one element. The intended use of the list view is to view elements that are already designed and to make changes to the elements. However, list view can also be used to define, copy, move, or remove elements. You may easily find an element because you can see part of the definitions such as the bar code data and the page segment name that are not displayed on the image area in the screen view. You can switch to the screen view by pressing F17. See 'Changing Elements in the List View' on page 291 for more information.\n\n## Function Keys\n\nYou can use the available function keys on each display in AFP Utilities for iSeries to perform specific tasks. For example, if you press F12, the display changes to the one you worked on before the current display appeared.\n\nNote:\n\nThe functions available for your use are shown at the bottom of the display. If both lines show function keys, there may be additional ones that are not shown. To see a complete list of function keys supported on a display, press F24 to show the remaining keys, or position the cursor in the function key area of the display and press the Help key.\n\nOn the Design display, some function keys work differently depending on the situation. See 'Function Keys on the Design Display' on page 235 for the description about the function keys supported on the Design displays.\n\nChapter 1. What are the IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries?\n\n17", + "recall": 0.9644970414201184, + "true_md": "In the screen view, the display is divided into the image area and the key entry area when you define or change an element as follows:\n\nSee “Defining Elements in the Screen View” on page 229 for more information.\n\nFigure11.DesignDisplay\n\nList view: In the list view, all element definitions are listed on the display in the order of the sequence number unless the list has been sorted using F4=Sort. The list can be sorted by the sequence number (NBR), name, or across or down position. Each line describes one element. The intended use of the list view is to view elements that are already designed and to make changes to the elements. However, list view can also be used to define, copy, move, or remove elements. You may easily find an element because you can see part of the definitions such as the bar code data and the page segment name that are not displayed on the image area in the screen view. You can switch to the screen view by pressing F17. See “Changing Elements in the List View” on page 291 for more information.\n\nYou can use the available function keys on each display in AFP Utilities for iSeries to perform specific tasks. For example, if you press F12, the display changes to the one you worked on before the current display appeared.\n\nOn the Design display, some function keys work differently depending on the situation. See “Function Keys on the Design Display” on page 235 for the description about the function keys supported on the Design displays.\n\nChapter 1. What are the IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries? 17\n\n- Note: The functions available for your use are shown at the bottom of the display. If both lines show function keys, there may be additional ones that are not shown. To see a complete list of function keys supported on a display, press F24 to show the remaining keys, or position the cursor in the function key area of the display and press the Help key.\n\n## Function Keys" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "173eded0b4c680f289f1d264348bb63bf7817cd401e47aaf857b42bab6911b42", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9976851851851852, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Chapter 13. Design Operation\n\n247", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Chapter 13. Design Operation 247" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7797655744002213, + "doc_id": "5c63a87bc7b7af8db850716f6b7a75a64b966a2ebccf8f05a754c2fce188bb0e", + "edit_distance": 0.32653061224489793, + "f1_score": 0.908256880733945, + "meteor": 0.8938455466060357, + "precision": 0.853448275862069, + "pred_md": "270\n\n- v\n\nThe length of data can be 7 characters.\n\n- v EAN-13 (includes JAN-standard)\n\nThe following characters are valid.\n\n0123456789\n\nThe length of data can be 12, 14, or 17 characters. The first 2 digits are two flag digits. The next 10 digits are the article-identification digits. The first flag digit is not bar-coded. The second flag digit that the article-identification digit and a check digit generated by the printer are bar-coded.\n\nIf the length of data is 14 characters, the last 2 digits are interpreted as the EAN two-digit add-on. If the length of data is 17 characters, the last 5 digits are interpreted as the EAN five-digit add-on.\n\n- v 2-of-5 industrial\n\nThe following characters are valid.\n\n0123456789\n\nThe length of data can be up to 100 characters.\n\n- 2-of-5 matrix The following characters are valid.\n\n0123456789\n\nThe length of data can be up to 100 characters.\n\n- v Interleaved 2-of-5 (MHI/AIM USD-1)\n\nThe following characters are valid.\n\n0123456789\n\nThe length of data can be up to 100 characters.\n\n- v Codabar (MHI/AIM USD-4)\n\nThe following characters are valid.\n\n0123456789\n\n-$:/.+ABCD\n\nThe length of data can be up to 100 characters. The characters A, B, C, and D shall be used only as start and stop delimiters.\n\n- v CODE128\n\nAll ASCII 128 character set values are valid, and the data length is variable.\n\n- v POSTNET\n\nThe following characters are valid.\n\n0123456789\n\nYou can specify the following POSTNET type:\n\nTable 59. POSTNET types\n\n- 1 ZIP Code (The maximum length is 5 digits)\n- 2 ZIP+4 (9 digits)\n- 3 Advanced bar codes (11 digits)\n- 4 Variable length data (up to 100 digits)\n- v RM4SCC\n\nThe following characters are valid.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.9705882352941176, + "true_md": "The length of data can be 7 characters.\n\nThe length of data can be 12, 14, or 17 characters. The first 2 digits are two flag digits. The next 10 digits are the article-identification digits. The first flag digit is not bar-coded. The second flag digit that the article-identification digit and a check digit generated by the printer are bar-coded.\n\nIf the length of data is 14 characters, the last 2 digits are interpreted as the EAN two-digit add-on. If the length of data is 17 characters, the last 5 digits are interpreted as the EAN five-digit add-on.\n\nThe length of data can be up to 100 characters.\n\nThe following characters are valid. 0123456789\n\nThe following characters are valid. 0123456789\n\nThe length of data can be up to 100 characters.\n\nThe following characters are valid. 0123456789\n\nThe length of data can be up to 100 characters.\n\nThe following characters are valid. 0123456789 -$:/.+ABCD\n\nThe length of data can be up to 100 characters. The characters A, B, C, and D shall be used only as start and stop delimiters.\n\nAll ASCII 128 character set values are valid, and the data length is variable.\n\nThe following characters are valid. 0123456789\n\nYou can specify the following POSTNET type:\n\nThe following characters are valid.\n\n270 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\nThe following characters are valid. 0123456789\n\n- v EAN-13 (includes JAN-standard)\n\n- v 2-of-5 industrial\n\n- v 2-of-5 matrix\n\n- v Interleaved 2-of-5 (MHI/AIM USD-1)\n\n- v Codabar (MHI/AIM USD-4)\n\n- v POSTNET\n\n- v RM4SCC\n\nTable59.POSTNETtypes\n\n- v CODE128" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7068438691132751, + "doc_id": "c823bd436c3772de50d549cde7a312ebc1b3ca2e2b20cedb86e716d0aa014f42", + "edit_distance": 0.5717488789237668, + "f1_score": 0.9974424552429667, + "meteor": 0.7640982822047978, + "precision": 0.9948979591836735, + "pred_md": "\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\n\n008: Has the input inhibited light stayed on longer than expected?\n\nYes\n\nPress the Error/Reset key. If the light does not go off, do one of the following:\n\n- v Press the System Request key and press the Enter key. When the system request menu appears, start an alternate job.\n- v Go to another work station and sign on.\n\nEnter the Work with Subsystem (WRKSBS) command to request the Work with Subsystems display. Choose the Work with subsystems jobs option for the subsystem you are running under. Look for a job entry that has the same job name as the work station with the problem. If two entries are shown, look at both. Write down the names.\n\nNo\n\nGo to Step 010 on page 402.\n\n009: Does the job entry (or entries) indicate a status of HELD?\n\nYes Enter 6 in the input prompt next to the job name to release the job.\n\nNo\n\nYou could have a loop or wait state. Do the following to gather helpful information.\n\nType the Work Job (WRKJOB) command and press the F4 (Prompt) key. Choose the following values for the command parameters:\n\nParameter Value\n\nJob name\n\nJob name, user name, and job number for the failing job.\n\n## Output\n\n*PRINT to print the job information for later use.\n\n- 1. When the Work with Job menu appears, select option\n- 11 (Display the program stack). Press the Print key to print the program stack for the failing job.\n- The program stack lists the instruction the program is currently on. This may help you determine why the loop or delay occurred.\n- 2. Press the F3 (Exit) key until you return to the Command Entry display.\n- 3. Type the End Job (ENDJOB) command to cancel the failing job. For example:\n\nENDJOB JOB(008298/QUSER/DSP01)\n\nCheck with the system operator to ensure that the job log for the failing job is printed. The job log is a record of each program action and any messages resulting from these program actions.\n\nNote:\n\nYour job log should be printed if you use the default value for the log limit (LOGLMT) parameter on the ENDJOB command. If the job\n\nChapter 23. Problem Analysis\n\n401", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## 008: Has the input inhibited light stayed on longer than expected?\n\n## Yes\n\n## Yes\n\n## No\n\n## Parameter Value\n\n## Job name\n\n## 009: Does the job entry (or entries) indicate a status of HELD?\n\n## No\n\nPress the Error/Reset key. If the light does not go off, do one of the following:\n\nEnter the Work with Subsystem (WRKSBS) command to request the Work with Subsystems display. Choose the Work with subsystems jobs option for the subsystem you are running under. Look for a job entry that has the same job name as the work station with the problem. If two entries are shown, look at both. Write down the names.\n\nGo to Step 010 on page 402.\n\nEnter 6 in the input prompt next to the job name to release the job.\n\nYou could have a loop or wait state. Do the following to gather helpful information.\n\nType the Work Job (WRKJOB) command and press the F4 (Prompt) key. Choose the following values for the command parameters:\n\nJob name, user name, and job number for the failing job.\n\n*PRINT to print the job information for later use.\n\nChapter 23. Problem Analysis 401\n\n- Note: Your job log should be printed if you use the default value for the log limit (LOGLMT) parameter on the ENDJOB command. If the job\n\nCheck with the system operator to ensure that the job log for the failing job is printed. The job log is a record of each program action and any messages resulting from these program actions.\n\n- 2. Press the F3 (Exit) key until you return to the Command Entry display.\n\n- 1. When the Work with Job menu appears, select option 11 (Display the program stack). Press the Print key to print the program stack for the failing job.\n\n- 3. Type the End Job (ENDJOB) command to cancel the failing job. For example:\n\n## Output\n\nThe program stack lists the instruction the program is currently on. This may help you determine why the loop or delay occurred.\n\nENDJOB JOB(008298/QUSER/DSP01)\n\n- v Press the System Request key and press the Enter key. When the system request menu appears, start an alternate job.\n\n- v Go to another work station and sign on." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7663256952100419, + "doc_id": "958246af3b181f4feb06f3713c3b375938b8a03631c6666abed7e9022165a56a", + "edit_distance": 0.2608695652173913, + "f1_score": 0.893854748603352, + "meteor": 0.8636737253637166, + "precision": 0.9302325581395349, + "pred_md": "220\n\nThe following table explains the Select Database File Member display.\n\nTable 48. Select Database File Member display fields\n\nSelect a member by typing 1 in the Opt column of the member and press Enter.\n\nThe Print Database File Member display appears.\n\nThe Print Database File Member display appears.\n\nIf you are ready to print the database file, press Enter. The Print Format Utility starts to print the database file.\n\nWhen printing completes, the screen returns to the Work with PFD Definitions display with either a completion message or an error message displayed depending on what happened during printing. The errors detected by the Print Format Utility, such as 'Fields used in the PFD definition are not found in the database file' are printed in the printout listing that is created by the Print Format Utility.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.8602150537634409, + "true_md": "The following table explains the Select Database File Member display.\n\nTable48.SelectDatabaseFileMemberdisplayfields\n\nSelect a member by typing 1 in the Opt column of the member and press Enter.\n\nThe Print Database File Member display appears.\n\nIf you are ready to print the database file, press Enter. The Print Format Utility starts to print the database file.\n\nWhen printing completes, the screen returns to the Work with PFD Definitions display with either a completion message or an error message displayed depending on what happened during printing. The errors detected by the Print Format Utility, such as ’Fields used in the PFD definition are not found in the database file’ are printed in the printout listing that is created by the Print Format Utility.\n\n220 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\nType choices, press Enter.\n\n## Print Database File Member\n\nMore...\n\nF3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5777966168512882, + "doc_id": "a407667ec71415af7d1fe0d9134c8575c24d4d40a9a7a3993fa48794603ddec6", + "edit_distance": 0.3125, + "f1_score": 0.8461538461538461, + "meteor": 0.8483874759982757, + "precision": 0.8461538461538461, + "pred_md": "iSeries Advanced Series\n\n## Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide\n\nS544-5349-02", + "recall": 0.8461538461538461, + "true_md": "iSeries Advanced Series\n\nS544-5349-02\n\nAdvanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7968300999649198, + "doc_id": "9ee9065a4d57e19546773ec6817cdd7734766d6d555bc890c9657beafac4f41e", + "edit_distance": 0.29906542056074764, + "f1_score": 0.8870967741935485, + "meteor": 0.8091562701475526, + "precision": 0.8870967741935484, + "pred_md": "Basic English Language Skills\n\n## Uninterested/Disinterested\n\n'Uninterested' means not interested.\n\nE.g. The spectator was uninterested in the outcome of the game, as he did not support either of the teams on the field.\n\n'Disinterested' means impartial or unbiased. E.g. The judge was disinterested in the matter.\n\n## Your/You're\n\n'Your' is a possessive pronoun. E.g. Your assignment was due two days ago.\n\n'You're' is a contraction of 'you are'. E.g. You're supposed to be at work today.", + "recall": 0.8870967741935484, + "true_md": "## Uninterested/Disinterested\n\n## Your/You’re\n\nBasic English Language Skills\n\n“Uninterested” means not interested. E.g. The spectator was uninterested in the outcome of the game, as he did not support either of the teams on the field.\n\n“Disinterested” means impartial or unbiased. E.g. The judge was disinterested in the matter.\n\n“Your” is a possessive pronoun. E.g. Your assignment was due two days ago.\n\n“You’re” is a contraction of “you are”. E.g. You’re supposed to be at work today." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6469447653665981, + "doc_id": "82bde788f2973af08c3693ede404f33bd6d980d9994569dd924f01781324f083", + "edit_distance": 0.3333333333333333, + "f1_score": 0.851851851851852, + "meteor": 0.7455782312925169, + "precision": 0.7666666666666667, + "pred_md": "Choice on the Define Box Detail display:\n\nFormat : 2=Vertical Degree of rotation : 270\n\nFigure 42. Print Example - 9\n\nFigure 42. Print Example - 9\n\nAppendix B. Rotation, Format, and Shading Pattern in Box\n\n429", + "recall": 0.9583333333333334, + "true_md": "Choice on the Define Box Detail display:\n\nFormat : 2=Vertical Degree of rotation : 270\n\nFormat : 2=Vertical Degree of rotation : 270\n\nFigure42.PrintExample-9\n\nAppendix B. Rotation, Format, and Shading Pattern in Box 429" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.02605797256341099, + "doc_id": "0aafe8d4b66ac7ab81e9456327fbdb0177bee0d1ed5aa28a8cf6f72d14481779", + "edit_distance": 0.7590361445783133, + "f1_score": 0.6201550387596899, + "meteor": 0.3291591113129815, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Example Actions:\n\n- 1. Type 1 (Save and exit) in the Option prompt.\n- 2. Press the Enter key.\n\n## The following display appears.\n\n## Example Actions:\n\n- 1. Type Sample Form number 3 in the Text 'description' prompt.\n- 2. Press the Enter key.\n\n## The following display appears.\n\nExample Action: Press the Enter key.\n\nChapter 3. Getting Started with the Overlay Utility\n\n47", + "recall": 0.449438202247191, + "true_md": "## Example Actions:\n\n## Example Actions:\n\n- 1. Type 1 (Save and exit) in the Option prompt.\n\n- 2. Press the Enter key.\n\n- 1. Type Sample Form number 3 in the Text ’description’ prompt.\n\n- 2. Press the Enter key.\n\nThe following display appears.\n\nThe following display appears.\n\n## Save Source Overlay\n\n## Create Overlay\n\nExample Action: Press the Enter key.\n\nChapter 3. Getting Started with the Overlay Utility 47\n\nType choices, press Enter. Source overlay........... STATIONERY Name, F4 for list File . . . . ............ OVLFILE Library . ............ OVLLIB Name, *CURLIB Text 'description' . ........ Sample Form number 3 Delete removed elements ...... N Y=Yes, N=No F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel\n\nFile............: OVLFILE Library . . .......: OVLLIB Source overlay . . . . . . . : STATIONERY Text............: Sample Form number 3 Type choices, press Enter. Create overlay....... N Y=Yes, N=No Overlay . . ........ STATIONE Name Library . ........ OVLLIB Name, *CURLIB Text 'description' . .... Sample Form number 3 Include grid........ N Y=Yes, N=No Replace if exists . .... Print overlay ....... N Y=Yes, N=No Authority ......... *LIBCRTAUT Name, *LIBCRTAUT, *ALL *CHANGE, *EXCLUDE, *USE F3=Exit F5=Refresh F12=Cancel" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8394779283137215, + "doc_id": "9f1dbd57fbe774a8a7a8fd021ad766b521f979a675ccb4f8d582e0ea9d926fd1", + "edit_distance": 0.5441860465116279, + "f1_score": 0.9382716049382716, + "meteor": 0.773883377084527, + "precision": 0.987012987012987, + "pred_md": "Note: You can create a source overlay by specifying the new source overlay name from this display, but you can not create a source overlay file from this display. Use the Work with Source Overlay Files display to create a source overlay file. If you do not have a library for the source overlay file, use the Create Library ( CRTLIB ) command to create a library.\n\n## 1=Create a Source Overlay\n\nTo create a source overlay, do the following on the display on page 61.\n\n- 1. Type 1 in the Opt column in the first line of the list.\n- 2. Type the source overlay name in the Source Overlay column in the first line of the list.\n- 3. Press Enter.\n\nThe Create Source Overlay display appears:\n\nOn this display, you can create a source overlay. By typing a 1 in the Opt column of this display, you can go to the Define Overlay Specifications display, the Work with Source Overlay Fonts display, or the Design Overlay display.\n\nChapter 5. Work with Source Overlays\n\n65", + "recall": 0.8941176470588236, + "true_md": "- Note: You can create a source overlay by specifying the new source overlay name from this display, but you can not create a source overlay file from this display. Use the Work with Source Overlay Files display to create a source overlay file. If you do not have a library for the source overlay file, use the Create Library ( CRTLIB ) command to create a library.\n\nTo create a source overlay, do the following on the display on page 61.\n\nThe Create Source Overlay display appears:\n\nOn this display, you can create a source overlay. By typinga1inthe Opt column of this display, you can go to the Define Overlay Specifications display, the Work with Source Overlay Fonts display, or the Design Overlay display.\n\nChapter 5. Work with Source Overlays 65\n\n## 1=Create a Source Overlay\n\n- 1. Type 1 in the Opt column in the first line of the list.\n\n- 2. Type the source overlay name in the Source Overlay column in the first line of the list.\n\n- 3. Press Enter.\n\n## Create Source Overlay\n\nType options, press Enter. 1=Select\n\nF3=Exit F5=Refresh F9=Select all F12=Cancel" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.11942751871126685, + "doc_id": "c08fea3a7578845332a11b8de95030f505a5c6b2d45e099806a5b514d50877e2", + "edit_distance": 0.5825242718446602, + "f1_score": 0.6727272727272726, + "meteor": 0.4127634334653143, + "precision": 0.9487179487179487, + "pred_md": "Example Action: Type PFD exercise in the Text 'description' prompt, and press the Enter key.\n\nThe following display appears.\n\nFrom this display, you can print a database file.\n\nChapter 8. Getting Started with Print Format Utility\n\n133", + "recall": 0.5211267605633803, + "true_md": "Example Action: Type PFD exercise in the Text ’description’ prompt, and press the Enter key.\n\nThe following display appears.\n\nFrom this display, you can print a database file.\n\nPFD definition PRODUCTLBL saved in file PFDFILE successfully.\n\n## Work with PFD Definitions\n\nType options, press Enter. 1=Create 2=Change 3=Copy\n\nType options, press Enter. 1=Create 2=Change 3=Copy 4=Delete 6=Print PFD definition 7=Rename 9=Print database file\n\nParameters or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F9=Retrieve F11=Display names only F12=Cancel\n\nBottom\n\nChapter 8. Getting Started with Print Format Utility 133" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4873798785689997, + "doc_id": "9937171dfd980a943d76fcce16a1136d9dbdef3e5fd523719012d673dc6108c7", + "edit_distance": 0.6923076923076923, + "f1_score": 0.7924528301886793, + "meteor": 0.6355932203389831, + "precision": 0.7241379310344828, + "pred_md": "422\n\nChoice on the Define Box Detail display:\n\nFormat : 1=Horizontal Degree of rotation : 90\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide\n\nFigure 35. Print Example - 2\n\nFigure 35. Print Example - 2", + "recall": 0.875, + "true_md": "Choice on the Define Box Detail display:\n\nFigure35.PrintExample-2\n\n422 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\nFormat : 1=Horizontal Degree of rotation : 90\n\nFormat : 1=Horizontal Degree of rotation : 90" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.43210983957452614, + "doc_id": "bea81fe501ff95cc94bf34846159c79477efe981289f87936c51ba5186a0cd8a", + "edit_distance": 0.4782608695652174, + "f1_score": 0.7142857142857143, + "meteor": 0.6378206366375647, + "precision": 0.967741935483871, + "pred_md": "286\n\nFrom this display, you can specify further detail characteristics of the place record element. For example, you can specify the direction, repetition, and distance.\n\nFrom this display, you can specify further detail characteristics of the place record element. For example, you can specify the direction, repetition, and distance.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.5660377358490566, + "true_md": "## Place Record Layout Detail\n\nMark: *R001 Measurement method: Row/Column\n\nType choices, press Enter.\n\nF3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F6=Change measurement method F12=Cancel\n\nFrom this display, you can specify further detail characteristics of the place record element. For example, you can specify the direction, repetition, and distance.\n\n286 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.055968873749148204, + "doc_id": "00cbcdcc89d8a14fa7411d1d6e845947568dd3da8c7956c1c225a29d75e6185a", + "edit_distance": 0.8587360594795539, + "f1_score": 0.767123287671233, + "meteor": 0.3250374109263658, + "precision": 0.9333333333333333, + "pred_md": "## 3=Copy PFD Definition\n\nTo copy a PFD definition, do the following on the display on page 143.\n\n- 1. Type 3 in the Opt column beside the PFD definition that you want to copy.\n- 2. Press the Enter key.\n\nThe following display appears:\n\nUsing the Copy PFD Definition display, you can copy a PFD definition in the same or different file or library.\n\nThe following table explains each field of the Copy PFD Definition display.\n\nTable 38. Copy PFD Definition display fields\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide\n\n198", + "recall": 0.6511627906976745, + "true_md": "## 3=Copy PFD Definition\n\n198 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\nTo copy a PFD definition, do the following on the display on page 143.\n\nThe following display appears:\n\nUsing the Copy PFD Definition display, you can copy a PFD definition in the same or different file or library.\n\nThe following table explains each field of the Copy PFD Definition display.\n\nTable38.CopyPFDDefinitiondisplayfields\n\n## Copy PFD Definition\n\nFrom file .........: PFUFILE Library . ........: PFULIB\n\nFrom file .........: PFUFILE Library . ........: PFULIB PFD definition . . . . . . . : PFDNEW\n\nLibrary . ........: PFULIB PFD definition . . . . . . . : PFDNEW Text............: Sample PFD definition\n\nPFD definition . . . . . . . : PFDNEW Text............: Sample PFD definition\n\nType choices, press Enter.\n\nTo file .......... PFUFILE Name, F4 for list Library ......... PFULIB Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB\n\nTo file .......... PFUFILE Name, F4 for list Library ......... PFULIB Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB PFD definition ....... PFDNEW2 Name\n\nLibrary ......... PFULIB Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB PFD definition ....... PFDNEW2 Name Text 'description' . . . . . Sample PFD definition\n\nPFD definition ....... PFDNEW2 Name Text 'description' . . . . . Sample PFD definition\n\nF3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel\n\n- 1. Type 3 in the Opt column beside the PFD definition that you want to copy.\n\n- 2. Press the Enter key." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9472125345608782, + "doc_id": "87cdb6510c903219631cb9f9695fffb615b20554419905d165d226e7d1b68609", + "edit_distance": 0.2028985507246377, + "f1_score": 0.979591836734694, + "meteor": 0.9854189510979071, + "precision": 0.9863013698630136, + "pred_md": "82\n\nAn overlay is created from a source overlay. The source overlay consists of:\n\n- v Overlay specifications\n- v Font information\n- v Element definitions\n\nPress the Enter key to create the overlay. When the overlay object is created successfully, the Work with Source Overlays display or the screen before the Work with Source Overlays display appears with a message at the bottom of the screen. It depends on the value of the Return to source overlay list prompt in the Exit Overlay display.\n\nIf any error is found in the input parameters or in the resource selection on the screen, the field which contains the error is reversed and an error message appears at the bottom of the screen.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.972972972972973, + "true_md": "An overlay is created from a source overlay. The source overlay consists of:\n\nPress the Enter key to create the overlay. When the overlay object is created successfully, the Work with Source Overlays display or the screen before the Work with Source Overlays display appears with a message at the bottom of the screen. It depends on the value of the Return to source overlay list prompt in the Exit Overlay display.\n\nIf any error is found in the input parameters or in the resource selection on the screen, the field which contains the error is reversed and an error message appears at the bottom of the screen.\n\n- v Overlay specifications\n\n- v Font information\n\n- v Element definitions\n\n82 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9710092658367051, + "doc_id": "7baf003d2744807a046d9b07c28ba84a08d05ee222d59c805028dca4a94e1349", + "edit_distance": 0.012195121951219513, + "f1_score": 0.9789473684210527, + "meteor": 0.9878017414433403, + "precision": 0.9789473684210527, + "pred_md": "Basic English Language Skils\n\n## STEP 4 - PAY YOUR REGISTRATION FEE AND SEND IN YOUR FORM\n\nDifferent courses have different registration fees. Please check the course fees list (www.oxbridgeacademy.co.za/Documents/ Price-list-2015.pdf) to find out how much you need to pay to register for your chosen course, and pay this amount using the banking details provided at the bottom of the registration form. Remember to attach your proof of payment.\n\nIf you are under the age of 18, your parent or guardian will need to sign this section of the form to state that they are aware of your registration with Oxbridge Academy, and that they do not have any objections. If you are unemployed, you will need a guarantor to sign this section of the form. Your parent or guarantor will be held responsible if you miss any of your payments in relation to your course fees.\n\nDeveloped for Oxbridge Academy", + "recall": 0.9789473684210527, + "true_md": "Basic English Language Skills\n\n## STEP 4 – PAY YOUR REGISTRATION FEE AND SEND IN YOUR FORM\n\nDifferent courses have different registration fees. Please check the course fees list (www.oxbridgeacademy.co.za/Documents/ Price-list-2015.pdf) to find out how much you need to pay to register for your chosen course, and pay this amount using the banking details provided at the bottom of the registration form. Remember to attach your proof of payment.\n\nIf you are under the age of 18, your parent or guardian will need to sign this section of the form to state that they are aware of your registration with Oxbridge Academy, and that they do not have any objections. If you are unemployed, you will need a guarantor to sign this section of the form. Your parent or guarantor will be held responsible if you miss any of your payments in relation to your course fees.\n\nDeveloped for Oxbridge Academy" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8950551407870715, + "doc_id": "5548d4620bd10ccfcb312202856d42c3a4757b6ff54ebd51548283ba11fdbbd5", + "edit_distance": 0.7800687285223368, + "f1_score": 0.952, + "meteor": 0.9168002952110095, + "precision": 0.9754098360655737, + "pred_md": "The Design Record Layout display appears as follows.\n\n```\nDesign Record Layout Columns: 174 Control . . PFD definition . . . . . PRODUCTLBL *...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7.... 001 002 003 *T001 t : 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 More... F3=Exit F6=Text F9=Line F10=Box F11=Bar code F21=Element edit F22=Block edit F24=More keys\n```\n\nThe symbol before T001 changes from \" % \" to \" * \" which shows you that this text element is defined in the record layout.\n\nExample Actions: In the same way, specify another text element which contains \" Price : \" at (Across:3, Down: 5).\n\nThe following display appears:\n\n```\nDesign Record Layout Columns: 174 Control . . PFD definition . . . . . PRODUCTLBL *...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7.... 001 002 003 *T001 t : 004 005 *T002 : 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 More... F3=Exit F6=Text F9=Line F10=Box F11=Bar code F21=Element edit F22=Block edit F24=More keys\n```\n\nThe text \" Price : \" is partly covered by its mark *T002 .\n\nNote: When you set mark off (F15), only the last mark is displayed and others are not displayed.\n\nChapter 8. Getting Started with Print Format Utility\n\n115", + "recall": 0.9296875, + "true_md": "The Design Record Layout display appears as follows.\n\nThe symbol before T001 changes from † % † to † * † which shows you that this text element is defined in the record layout.\n\nExample Actions: In the same way, specify another text element which contains † Price : † at (Across:3, Down: 5).\n\nThe following display appears:\n\nThe text † Price : † is partly covered by its mark *T002$_{.}$\n\n- Note: When you set mark off (F15), only the last mark is displayed and others are not displayed.\n\nChapter 8. Getting Started with Print Format Utility 115\n\nDesign Record Layout Columns: 1- 74 Control . . PFD definition.....PRODUCTLBL *...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7.... 001 002 003 *T001 t : 004 005 *T002 : 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 More... F3=Exit F6=Text F9=Line F10=Box F11=Bar code F21=Element edit F22=Block edit F24=More keys\n\nDesign Record Layout Columns: 1- 74 Control . . PFD definition.....PRODUCTLBL *...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7.... 001 002 003 *T001 t : 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 More... F3=Exit F6=Text F9=Line F10=Box F11=Bar code F21=Element edit F22=Block edit F24=More keys" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6250760988340491, + "doc_id": "c98af30d4232054725dd93d544d6b4179a14f0a64e41ac8e0bc2600a309d7110", + "edit_distance": 0.25, + "f1_score": 0.8505747126436781, + "meteor": 0.749071529186186, + "precision": 0.9866666666666667, + "pred_md": "244\n\nPress the Enter, F3, or F12 key to return to the Design Overlay display, or press the F4 key to specify more parameters.\n\nIn the Define Text Detail display, you can specify more parameters for a text element if you need to define it more precisely. For example, you can specify the character font and color for the text element. The Overlay Utility and the Print Format Utility check the specified values to make sure the element is completely contained in the overlay, the record layout, or the page layout by referring to its page size, which was previously defined in the overlay specifications or the PFD specifications.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.7474747474747475, + "true_md": "Press the Enter, F3, or F12 key to return to the Design Overlay display, or press the F4 key to specify more parameters.\n\nIn the Define Text Detail display, you can specify more parameters for a text element if you need to define it more precisely. For example, you can specify the character font and color for the text element. The Overlay Utility and the Print Format Utility check the specified values to make sure the element is completely contained in the overlay, the record layout, or the page layout by referring to its page size, which was previously defined in the overlay specifications or the PFD specifications.\n\n244 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\n## Change Text Detail\n\nMark: *T001 Measurement method: Row/Column\n\nType choices, press Enter.\n\nF3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F6=Change measurement method F10=Edit numeric F12=Cancel\n\n*DEFAULT, 1-8, F4 for list More..." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6300134725386923, + "doc_id": "40cd8e32b5bb90a96faee3e25959aca9ca0645132a6a37263ef82bc6c932b174", + "edit_distance": 0.486159169550173, + "f1_score": 0.9473684210526317, + "meteor": 0.629120655713853, + "precision": 0.915929203539823, + "pred_md": "## INDEX\n\nMaintenance............................................ 1\n\nModel AY11240/Model AY11238.................. 2-5\n\nModel AY11228/Model AY11232.................. 6-9\n\nModel AY11230/Model AY11234.................. 10-13\n\nModel AY11236........................................ 14-18\n\nWarranty Information................................ Back Cover\n\n## IMPORTANT NOTES\n\nCongratulations on your purchase of this high quality BARSKA microscope. With proper care, this microscope will provide many years of use. Please read the following instructions before operating this instrument.\n\n- 1. Do not attempt to disassemble the instrument. This product has been carefully assembled at the factory and should only be examined by a factory-trained technician.\n- 2. This instrument should only be used in an environment with an indoor temperature range of 32 o F to 104 o F.\n- 3. Do not use this instrument in an environment with a lot of dust. Cover the instrument when not in use.\n- 4. Do not subject the instrument to shock.\n\n## MAINTENANCE\n\nProper care and storage of this instrument is essential. Please read the following guidelines:\n\n- 1. Keep the instrument in a dry and moisture-free location.\n- 2. Do not expose to acid, alkali fumes or moisture.\n- 3. Keep optical parts clean and free of dust. To clean optical parts gently wipe with lens cleaning tissue and a mixture of alcohol and diethyl ether. Depending on weather conditions, the following are the recommended mixture ratios:\n\nWet weather: 1:2\n\n- Dry Weather: 1:1\n- 4. After use, cover the instrument with the plastic dust cover.\n- 5. If instrument is to be stored for an extended period of time, remove the eyepiece and oculars and store in a moisture-proof container.\n\n1\n\n2\n\n## MODEL AY11240/AY11238\n\n## MICROSCOPE USAGE\n\nBARSKA Model AY11240 and Model AY11238 are designed for biological studies such as specimen examination. They can also be used for examining bacteria and for general clinical and medical studies. Simple design and use is especially useful for school classroom instruction.\n\n## CONSTRUCTION\n\nBARSKA Model AY11240 is a fixed tube type. For comfortable observation, the arm can be easily tilted at any angle from 90 o vertical to 45 o level. It is also equipped with a coarse adjustment and fine adjustment as well as a space limiter to protect the objective from contacting and damaging the specimen. BARSKA Model AY11238 features a monocular tube that is slanted at a 45 o angle. The head rotates 360 o . The Eyepiece Set Screw prevents the eyepiece from falling out of the tube.", + "recall": 0.981042654028436, + "true_md": "## INDEX\n\n## IMPORTANT NOTES\n\n## MAINTENANCE\n\n## CONSTRUCTION\n\n## MICROSCOPE USAGE\n\n## MODEL AY11240/AY11238\n\nCongratulations on your purchase of this high quality BARSKA microscope. With proper care, this microscope will provide many years of use. Please read the following instructions before operating this instrument.\n\n- 1. Do not attempt to disassemble the instrument. This product has been carefully assembled at the factory and should only be examined by a factory-trained technician.\n\n- 2. This instrument should only be used in an environment with an indoor temperature range of 32$^{o}$F to 104$^{o}$F.\n\n- 3. Do not use this instrument in an environment with a lot of dust. Cover the instrument when not in use.\n\n- 4. Do not subject the instrument to shock.\n\n- the following guidelines: 1. Keep the instrument in a dry and moisture-free location. 2. Do not expose to acid, alkali fumes or moisture.\n\n- 1. Keep the instrument in a dry and moisture-free location. 2. Do not expose to acid, alkali fumes or moisture. 3. Keep optical parts clean and free of dust. To clean optical parts\n\n- 2. Do not expose to acid, alkali fumes or moisture. 3. Keep optical parts clean and free of dust. To clean optical parts gently wipe with lens cleaning tissue and a mixture of alcohol and diethyl ether. Depending on weather conditions, the following are the recommended mixture ratios: Wet weather: 1:2\n\n- Dry Weather: 1:1 4. After use, cover the instrument with the plastic dust cover. 5. If instrument is to be stored for an extended period of time,\n\n- 4. After use, cover the instrument with the plastic dust cover. 5. If instrument is to be stored for an extended period of time, remove the eyepiece and oculars and store in a moisture-proof container.\n\n- BARSKA Model AY11240 is a fixed tube type. For comfortable observation, the arm can be easily tilted at any angle from 90 o vertical to 45$^{o }$level. It is also equipped with a coarse adjustment and fine adjustment as well as a space limiter to protect the objective from contacting and damaging the specimen. BARSKA Model AY11238 features a monocular tube that is slanted at a 45$^{o}$ angle. The head rotates 360$^{o}$. The Eyepiece Set Screw prevents the eyepiece from falling out of the tube.\n\n- BARSKA Model AY11240 and Model AY11238 are designed for biological studies such as specimen examination. They can also be used for examining bacteria and for general clinical and medical studies. Simple design and use is especially useful for school classroom instruction.\n\n2\n\n1\n\nProper care and storage of this instrument is essential. Please read the following guidelines: 1. Keep the instrument in a dry and moisture-free location.\n\nfollowing are the recommended mixture ratios: Wet weather: 1:2 Dry Weather: 1:1 After use, cover the instrument with the plastic dust cover." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.12492756814619471, + "doc_id": "a5b38e689615ff57ef3cceed3a96a834563754812c0cb23798af12bc113d1558", + "edit_distance": 0.7804878048780488, + "f1_score": 0.7224669603524229, + "meteor": 0.3874292713029049, + "precision": 0.9879518072289156, + "pred_md": "A % indicates the cursor position. (A mark is not displayed because the element type has not been specified.)\n\nWhen F11 is pressed to place a record, a mark %R001-001 is displayed at the cursor position in the image area and the key entry area appears at the bottom portion of the display. The cursor moves to the first input field of the key entry area as follows:\n\nThe mark for the record layout has a trailing repetition number. This repetition number will be incremented by 1, such as *R001-002, *R001-003 , and so on, when the record layout is repeated. See \" Repetition of the Record in the Page \" on the following page for details on repetition of records.\n\nChapter 10. Work with PFD Definitions\n\n171", + "recall": 0.5694444444444444, + "true_md": "Design Page Layout Columns: 1- 74 Control . . PFD definition.....PRODUCTLBL *...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7.... 001 002 003 004 % 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 More... F3=Exit F6=Place graphics F9=Place page segment F11=Place record layout F12=Cancel F24=More keys Press F6, F9 or F11 for graphics, page segment or record layout.\n\nDesign Page Layout Columns: 1- 74 Control . . PFD definition.....PRODUCTLBL *...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7.... 001 002 003 004 %R001-001 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 More... Place Record Layout Mark . . . . . . : *R001 Measurement method....:Row/Column Position.....Across 10 Down 4 F3=Exit F4=Detail F6=Change measurement method F12=Cancel F24=More keys\n\nThe mark for the record layout has a trailing repetition number. This repetition number will be incremented by 1, such as *R001-002, *R001-003 , and so on, when the record layout is repeated. See † Repetition of the Record in the Page † on the following page for details on repetition of records.\n\nWhen F11 is pressed to place a record, a mark %R001-001 is displayed at the cursor position in the image area and the key entry area appears at the bottom portion of the display. The cursor moves to the first input field of the key entry area as follows:\n\nA % indicates the cursor position. (A mark is not displayed because the element type has not been specified.)\n\nChapter 10. Work with PFD Definitions 171" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6129419859056385, + "doc_id": "9a71abaf31a50856fb4e5df1afb8ff31ab47606493b36b33014f650eef6d6303", + "edit_distance": 0.3548387096774194, + "f1_score": 0.8444444444444446, + "meteor": 0.8314766954816861, + "precision": 0.76, + "pred_md": "The following table describes the cause of warning messages and the result.\n\nTable 23. The Cause of Message and Its Result\n\nChapter 10. Work with PFD Definitions\n\n155", + "recall": 0.95, + "true_md": "The following table describes the cause of warning messages and the result.\n\nChapter 10. Work with PFD Definitions 155\n\nTable23.TheCauseofMessageandItsResult" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.06614300621235415, + "doc_id": "ae19964557ccedf32080bef6d2849e45449ea6fcd24249bd019c802c026af2f9", + "edit_distance": 0.9463087248322147, + "f1_score": 0.5921052631578947, + "meteor": 0.10908689825351332, + "precision": 0.9183673469387755, + "pred_md": "Figure 30. The Command Syntax for CVTPCDPAGS Command\n\nFigure 30. The Command Syntax for CVTPCDPAGS Command\n\nThe following describes the parameters for CVTPCDPAGS command.\n\nPage segment (PAGSEG)\n\nSpecifies the qualified name of the page segment to be created. This is a required parameter.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\n*PRV Specifies that the name of the page segment and library used when\n\nChapter 21. AFP Utilities for iSeries Commands\n\n373", + "recall": 0.4368932038834951, + "true_md": "The following describes the parameters for CVTPCDPAGS command.\n\nSpecifies the qualified name of the page segment to be created. This is a required parameter.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\n*PRV Specifies that the name of the page segment and library used when\n\nChapter 21. AFP Utilities for iSeries Commands 373\n\nFigure30.TheCommandSyntaxforCVTPCDPAGSCommand\n\n## Page segment (PAGSEG)\n\n------*PRV -------------------------------- CVTPCDPAGS-----PAGSEG--- ---*CURLIB/------ --- --- - page-segment-name-- - library-name - Required ------------------------------------------------------------------------ Optional -- -----*PRV------- -----*PRV ------------- |P| ----FRMFLR-- -FRMDOC- -*PAGSEG------------- --- - ---------- --folder-name- --PC-document-name -- ----*SAME- ----CHGIMGSIZE-- --*NO--- ------------------------------------------------- --*YES-- (1) ----*SAME-- ----*SAME------- ----*SAME--------- ----IMGSIZE-- --*INCH-- --- --- ----------- --*CM---- --width-value- --length-value-- (1) ----*SAME - ----MAPPING - --*PAT--- --------------------------------------------------- --*STF--- - *CAT--- - *IPTP-- - *IPTPD- ----*SAME - ----IMGRTT - --0------ ---------------------------------------------------- --90----- - 180---- - 270---- -----*SAME ------- ---*LIBCRTAUT--- ----AUT - ---*CHANGE------ ------------------------------------------------ ---*ALL--------- ---*USE--------- ---*EXCLUDE----- -- name -------- -----*SAME --------- ----*YES - ----TEXT - -- *BLANK -------- ------REPLACE - ------------------ -- 'description'-- - *NO -- (1) CHGIMGSIZE='*YES' only ------------------------------------- |Job: B, I Pgm: B, I REXX: B, I Exec | ------------------------------------" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.18260440143592746, + "doc_id": "fc56556180837be04919804358b40758e9f725b08dce18b7c820192e2b559396", + "edit_distance": 0.5795454545454546, + "f1_score": 0.7252747252747253, + "meteor": 0.5168855274822695, + "precision": 0.9166666666666666, + "pred_md": "## Display Font (Font Type=2):\n\nThis display shows the definition of a type 2 font.\n\nThe following table explains the Display Source Overlay Font display and the Display PFD Definition Font display.\n\nTable 67. Display Source Overlay Font display fields\n\nChapter 14. Work with Fonts\n\n305", + "recall": 0.6, + "true_md": "## Display Font (Font Type=2):\n\n## Display PFD Definition Font\n\nFont number ........: 1 Font type .........: 2 Coded font Coded font.........: X0GB12 Point size.........: *NONE Text............: BOLD 12 CPI Press Enter to continue. F3=Exit F12=Cancel\n\nThis display shows the definition of a type 2 font.\n\nThe following table explains the Display Source Overlay Font display and the Display PFD Definition Font display.\n\nTable67.DisplaySourceOverlayFontdisplayfields\n\nChapter 14. Work with Fonts 305" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7695255662199671, + "doc_id": "468be893c4c3de54d22747930edb2c3f56af623229da12971b2e6a9b78fd276d", + "edit_distance": 0.5159235668789809, + "f1_score": 0.8863636363636364, + "meteor": 0.9009885426499662, + "precision": 0.8210526315789474, + "pred_md": "294\n\n## Create or Change the Element\n\nYou can not enter or change parameters directly on the list. However, you can define new elements or change existing elements through the create or change element operation easily and efficiently.\n\n## Create\n\nTo define a new element in the list view, do the following.\n\nStep 1. Press one of the following function keys depending on the type of element regardless of the cursor position.\n\nText\n\nF6\n\nLine\n\nF9\n\nBox\n\nF10\n\nBar Code\n\nF11\n\nGraphics\n\nF13 then F6\n\nPage segment\n\nF13 then F9\n\nRecord layout\n\nF13 then F11\n\nThe key entry area appears at the lower part of the display. The remainder of the create element operation is the same as that in the screen view.\n\nStep 2. Press the F4 key to specify the other parameters if necessary.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.9629629629629629, + "true_md": "You can not enter or change parameters directly on the list. However, you can define new elements or change existing elements through the create or change element operation easily and efficiently.\n\nTo define a new element in the list view, do the following.\n\nThe key entry area appears at the lower part of the display. The remainder of the create element operation is the same as that in the screen view.\n\n## Create or Change the Element\n\n## Create\n\n- Step 1. Press one of the following function keys depending on the type of element regardless of the cursor position.\n\n- Step 2. Press the F4 key to specify the other parameters if necessary.\n\n294 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8381708023905083, + "doc_id": "c4171482cc3a86bf6cd8167389659ef72038c37dad62ecfc9691357d3b10efe8", + "edit_distance": 0.83125, + "f1_score": 0.9449838187702264, + "meteor": 0.7240452602101569, + "precision": 0.9605263157894737, + "pred_md": "Basic English Language Skills\n\n## Example:\n\n'I have been offered an opportunity to work as an IT Manager abroad, and I have decided to accept the offer.'\n\n## 4.\n\n## A sentence or two in which you thank your employer for the opportunities you have been given during your time with the organisation.\n\n## Example:\n\n'I would like to thank you for the wonderful opportunities you have given me, both to develop my skills, and to work with such knowledgeable and inspiring people.'\n\n## 5.\n\n## An offer to help with the transition.\n\nOnly include this if you are sincere, and don't make any promises that you won't be able to keep. You could, for example, assure your employer that you will finish your current projects or hand them over to a colleague. You could also offer to train the person who will be replacing you.\n\n## Example:\n\n'During the next two weeks, I will do everything I can to ensure a smooth transition for the company. If required, I am more than willing to assist with the hiring and training of the new Assistant IT Manager.'\n\n## 6.\n\n## A suitable closing.\n\nIt is important to use a closing that is appropriate in the circumstances. If you have a good relationship with your employer, you may want to wish him/her well for the future, and provide contact details that he/she can use to get in touch with you once you have left the organisation. You can then end your letter with a greeting such as 'Kind regards,' followed by your signature.\n\nDeveloped for Oxbridge Academy", + "recall": 0.9299363057324841, + "true_md": "## 4. A sentence or two in which you thank your employer for the opportunities you have been given during your time with the organisation.\n\n## 5. An offer to help with the transition.\n\n## 6. A suitable closing. It is important to use a closing that is appropriate in the circumstances.\n\nA suitable closing. It is important to use a closing that is appropriate in the circumstances. If you have a good relationship with your employer, you may want to wish him/her well for the future, and provide contact details that he/she can use to get in touch with you once you have left the organisation. You can then end your letter with a greeting such as “Kind regards,” followed by your signature.\n\nDeveloped for Oxbridge Academy\n\nExample: “During the next two weeks, I will do everything I can to ensure a smooth transition for the company. If required, I am more than willing to assist with the hiring and training of the new Assistant IT Manager.”\n\nOnly include this if you are sincere, and don’t make any promises that you won’t be able to keep. You could, for example, assure your employer that you will finish your current projects or hand them over to a colleague. You could also offer to train the person who will be replacing you.\n\nExample: “I would like to thank you for the wonderful opportunities you have given me, both to develop my skills, and to work with such knowledgeable and inspiring people.”\n\nExample: “I have been offered an opportunity to work as an IT Manager abroad, and I have decided to accept the offer.”\n\nBasic English Language Skills" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "6bb6796c65944d9fe3f4b20016bfb09cc139727e01b4d15bc6c821fc7d696134", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9976851851851852, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Chapter 13. Design Operation\n\n259", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Chapter 13. Design Operation 259" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5109688055404562, + "doc_id": "c05390a8f6b940798d5d28261688742b7fd78e198742b886c58c8014dbf80db5", + "edit_distance": 0.3170731707317073, + "f1_score": 0.7912087912087913, + "meteor": 0.6954241473037579, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Press the Enter, F3, or F12 key after you specify the parameters, or press the F4 key to specify more parameters.\n\nBy pressing the F4 key, the following display appears to specify those characteristics.\n\nThe following table explains each field in this display.\n\nChapter 13. Design Operation\n\n251", + "recall": 0.6545454545454545, + "true_md": "Press the Enter, F3, or F12 key after you specify the parameters, or press the F4 key to specify more parameters.\n\nBy pressing the F4 key, the following display appears to specify those characteristics.\n\n## Define Line Detail\n\nMark: *L002 Measurement method: Row/Column\n\nType choices, press Enter.\n\nF3=Exit F5=Refresh F6=Change measurement method F12=Cancel\n\nBottom\n\nThe following table explains each field in this display.\n\nChapter 13. Design Operation 251" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.22737774308545458, + "doc_id": "723e7d48b68c1e01f949ee84ba798a5d9d553936b22333c34efae6c28a92af5d", + "edit_distance": 0.7321428571428571, + "f1_score": 0.8999999999999999, + "meteor": 0.7585268884703913, + "precision": 0.9, + "pred_md": "| |\n\n|\n\n| |\n\n| |\n\n| |\n\n| |\n\n| |\n\n| |\n\n| |\n\n| |\n\n| |\n\n| |\n\n| |\n\n| |\n\n| |\n\n| |\n\n| |\n\n| |\n\n|\n\n|\n\n266\n\nThe following table explains each field in this display.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.9, + "true_md": "The following table explains each field in this display.\n\n266 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6554311306301651, + "doc_id": "988ad3280e05d6b41a5d01ff604408ddca1220150e42c8740b8650a1830814fe", + "edit_distance": 0.7541766109785203, + "f1_score": 0.9015873015873016, + "meteor": 0.6024095850083435, + "precision": 0.9342105263157895, + "pred_md": "Basic English Language Skils\n\n## LET'S HAVE A LOOK AT: THE FORMAT OF YOUR COVER LETTER:\n\n- · Your cover letter should be clear and concise. Keep it short -\n- · ideally, your letter should fit onto one side of an A4 page.\n- · Use a standard font, such as Arial or Times New Roman, to type your e-mail.\n- · If you are sending a hard copy of your cover letter: use the standard letter format, with your address at the top right, and the recipient's address below that, on the left.\n- · If you are sending your cover letter via e-mail: write the letter in the body of the e-mail, and start with the salutation (instead of your address).\n- · If you are responding to a job advertisement via e-mail, use the subject line provided in the advertisement. If no subject line was provided, use a relevant subject line that refers to the position being advertised. E.g. 'Application for Project Management Assistant position (ref. no. 4231)'.\n\n## Salutation\n\nIf you know the name of the person to whom you are writing:\n\n- · Start your letter by addressing the recipient by name: e.g. 'Dear Mr John Smith/Dear Ms Joanne Smith'\n\nIf you don't know the name of the person to whom you are writing (and only if you have no way of establishing the recipient's name):\n\n- · Start your letter by addressing the recipient in one of the following ways: 'Dear Hiring Manager' or 'Dear Sir/Madam'\n\nIn an e-mail, you can also leave out the salutation entirely (and replace it with a subject line) if you don't know the name of the intended recipient, and you feel uncomfortable using an impersonal salutation such as 'Dear Sir/Madam'.\n\nDeveloped for Oxbridge Academy", + "recall": 0.8711656441717791, + "true_md": "Basic English Language Skills\n\n## LET’S HAVE A LOOK AT: THE FORMAT OF YOUR COVER LETTER:\n\n## Salutation\n\nIf you know the name of the person to whom you are writing: Start your letter by addressing the recipient by name: e.g.\n\nIf you don’t know the name of the person to whom you are writing (and only if you have no way of establishing the recipient’s name): Start your letter by addressing the recipient in one of the following \n\nIn an e-mail, you can also leave out the salutation entirely (and replace it with a subject line) if you don’t know the name of the intended recip- ient, and you feel uncomfortable using an impersonal salutation such as “Dear Sir/Madam”.\n\n- • If you are responding to a job advertisement via e-mail, use the sub- ject line provided in the advertisement. If no subject line was provid- ed, use a relevant subject line that refers to the position being ad- vertised. E.g. “Application for Project Management Assistant position (ref. no. 4231)”.\n\n- • If you are sending your cover letter via e-mail: write the letter in the body of the e-mail, and start with the salutation (instead of your ad- dress).\n\n- • If you are sending a hard copy of your cover letter: use the standard letter format, with your address at the top right, and the recipient’s address below that, on the left.\n\n- • Use a standard font, such as Arial or Times New Roman, to type your e-mail.\n\n- • ideally, your letter should fit onto one side of an A4 page.\n\n- • Your cover letter should be clear and concise. Keep it short –\n\n- If you know the name of the person to whom you are writing: • Start your letter by addressing the recipient by name: e.g. “Dear Mr John Smith/Dear Ms Joanne Smith”\n\n- (and only if you have no way of establishing the recipient’s name): • Start your letter by addressing the recipient in one of the following ways: “Dear Hiring Manager” or “Dear Sir/Madam”\n\nDeveloped for Oxbridge Academy" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8172417847351484, + "doc_id": "4e9af4bb932d5424283c7a6b1aa9a8a00d8f5d464a93bb0d5de47e3fd4a7bcdb", + "edit_distance": 0.35294117647058826, + "f1_score": 0.9570552147239263, + "meteor": 0.9270477245062998, + "precision": 0.9512195121951219, + "pred_md": "310\n\n## Converting to a Page Segment from a PC Document\n\nWhen you create a page segment from a PC document, do the following to create a PC document:\n\n- 1. Use a PC image application program to create an IOCA function set 10 image.\n- 2. Store it in the iSeries folder as a PC document using the iSeries Access shared folder function.\n- 3. Start the (STRAFPU command).\n- 4. Select Convert to page segment (option 21).\n\nThe following figure shows the process of converting to page segment.\n\n-------------\n\n-------------\n\nFigure 21. Process of Converting to Page Segment\n\nFigure 21. Process of Converting to Page Segment\n\nThe page segment created and stored in the resource library by the Resource Management Utility can be used to create the following examples.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.9629629629629629, + "true_md": "## Converting to a Page Segment from a PC Document\n\nWhen you create a page segment from a PC document, do the following to create a PC document:\n\nThe following figure shows the process of converting to page segment.\n\n- 1. Use a PC image application program to create an IOCA function set 10 image.\n\n- 2. Store it in the iSeries folder as a PC document using the iSeries Access shared folder function.\n\n- 3. Start the (STRAFPU command).\n\n- 4. Select Convert to page segment (option 21).\n\nFigure21.ProcessofConvertingtoPageSegment\n\nThe page segment created and stored in the resource library by the Resource Management Utility can be used to create the following examples.\n\n310 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.791369700753665, + "doc_id": "1de2c34812e76d7a7980f108f88fd8c96903f9544f569b04a7ec504bedb13eb8", + "edit_distance": 0.752, + "f1_score": 0.9726027397260274, + "meteor": 0.8796570243555593, + "precision": 0.9861111111111112, + "pred_md": "Basic English Language Skills\n\n## Identify:\n\n## Interpret:\n\nName or list the most important features or characteristics.\n\n## Illustrate:\n\nUse a picture, diagram, chart, or concrete example to clarify a point.\n\n## Prove:\n\nEstablish the truth/acuracy of something by giving factual evidence or logical reasons.\n\n## Outline:\n\nPresent information in a brief, clear and logical manner.\n\nClarify or explain something in a more easily understood form, usually in a practical way.\n\n## Consider:\n\nCarefully examine something and give a judgement or opinion.\n\n## Justify:\n\nGive good reasons for some -thing\n\n## Summarise:\n\nGive the main points", + "recall": 0.9594594594594594, + "true_md": "Basic English Language Skills\n\n## Identify:\n\n## Interpret:\n\n## Consider:\n\n## Illustrate:\n\n## Prove:\n\n## Justify:\n\n## Outline:\n\n## Summarise:\n\nName or list the most important features or characteristics.\n\nClarify or explain something in a more easily understood form, usually in a practical way.\n\nUse a picture, diagram, chart, or concrete example to clarify a point.\n\nCarefully examine some- thing and give a judgement or opinion.\n\nEstablish the truth/acuracy of something by giving factual evidence or logical reasons.\n\nGive good reasons for some - thing\n\nPresent information in a brief, clear and logical manner.\n\nGive the main points" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9304058902025488, + "doc_id": "6efc64a16905a2aad0f4ab4ba2b54942dfaf59545edc986626e7c73226e3f5ab", + "edit_distance": 0.09433962264150944, + "f1_score": 0.9777777777777777, + "meteor": 0.9814775333713284, + "precision": 0.9850746268656716, + "pred_md": "252\n\nPress Enter, the F3, or F12 key after you specify the parameters. The Design display will be displayed.\n\n## Box\n\nThe following display appears by pressing the F10 key at the diagonal points for a box element definition, or by pressing the F14 key to change a box element.\n\nWhen you press Enter, the Overlay Utility and the Print Format Utility check the validity of the entered parameters. If no errors exist, the operation is completed and the key entry area disappears from the display.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.9705882352941176, + "true_md": "Press Enter, the F3, or F12 key after you specify the parameters. The Design display will be displayed.\n\nThe following display appears by pressing the F10 key at the diagonal points for a box element definition, or by pressing the F14 key to change a box element.\n\nWhen you press Enter, the Overlay Utility and the Print Format Utility check the validity of the entered parameters. If no errors exist, the operation is completed and the key entry area disappears from the display.\n\n252 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\n## Box" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9738413769414883, + "doc_id": "3981b44f818a8a0b237270cd0bfe019d24947aac99e58125c06907c97b13bc72", + "edit_distance": 0.21228070175438596, + "f1_score": 0.9912023460410558, + "meteor": 0.9886644968949495, + "precision": 0.9941176470588236, + "pred_md": "458\n\n## Fonts\n\nYou can print it on printers that do not support the PT2 tower if the printer is attached to the iSeries system, because the PT2 data stream is converted to the corresponding PT1 data stream if necessary. However, you can not print it on printers that do not support PT2 tower if the printer is attached to systems other than the iSeries system, because the PT2 to PT1 conversion is not supported.\n\nThere are two kinds of fonts. The first kind of font resides in the printer and is specified with the font and character identifier. You can specify this kind of font by specifying 1 for the Font type prompt on the Change Source Overlay Font display or the Change PFD Definition Font display.\n\nThe other kind of font resides on the iSeries system that the printer is attached to as resident fonts. The printer, when it requires a font, issues a font download request to the system for the required font or fonts. After this request, the server downloads the fonts to the printer. These fonts are specified with coded font name or a pair of the code page name and the character set name. You can specify the font by selecting 2 or 3 for the Font type prompt on the Change Source Overlay Font display or the Change PFD Definition Font display.\n\nNot all printers support both kinds of fonts. If the resource contains a font that is not supported by the target printer, the resource cannot be used. For example, you cannot use the first kind of font (printer resident) on the 3820 printers.\n\nYou may use a printer even though you specify an incompatible font, if the printer is attached to the iSeries system, because fonts are substituted if necessary. However, you can not print it on the same printer if the printer is attached to systems other than the iSeries system, because the font substitution is not supported.\n\nNote: Font substitution is supported by other systems from the following release. You can avoid this restriction by using the following releases:\n\n- v PSF/MVS Version 2 Release 1 or later\n- v PSF/VM Version 2 Release 1 or later\n\nIt is your responsibility to verify that the fonts you specified are substituted correctly.\n\nOther systems may not have the same font resources as the iSeries. You cannot print overlays or spooled files if the necessary font resources do not reside in the other system. It is your responsibility to verify that the fonts you specified reside in the system and are the same as the iSeries system.\n\n## Page Segments\n\nIf you include page segments in overlays or spooled files, you also have to send those page segments to the target system.\n\n## PSF (Print Service Facility)\n\nThe support level of AFPDS structured fields depends on the system and the release of PSF*. It is your responsibility to verify that your release level of PSF supports AFPDS structured field used in its resources (overlays and page segments) and spooled files.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.9883040935672515, + "true_md": "You can print it on printers that do not support the PT2 tower if the printer is attached to the iSeries system, because the PT2 data stream is converted to the corresponding PT1 data stream if necessary. However, you can not print it on printers that do not support PT2 tower if the printer is attached to systems other than the iSeries system, because the PT2 to PT1 conversion is not supported.\n\nThere are two kinds of fonts. The first kind of font resides in the printer and is specified with the font and character identifier. You can specify this kind of font by specifying 1 for the Font type prompt on the Change Source Overlay Font display or the Change PFD Definition Font display.\n\nThe other kind of font resides on the iSeries system that the printer is attached to as resident fonts. The printer, when it requires a font, issues a font download request to the system for the required font or fonts. After this request, the server downloads the fonts to the printer. These fonts are specified with coded font name or a pair of the code page name and the character set name. You can specify the font by selecting 2 or 3 for the Font type prompt on the Change Source Overlay Font display or the Change PFD Definition Font display.\n\nNot all printers support both kinds of fonts. If the resource contains a font that is not supported by the target printer, the resource cannot be used. For example, you cannot use the first kind of font (printer resident) on the 3820 printers.\n\nYou may use a printer even though you specify an incompatible font, if the printer is attached to the iSeries system, because fonts are substituted if necessary. However, you can not print it on the same printer if the printer is attached to systems other than the iSeries system, because the font substitution is not supported.\n\nIt is your responsibility to verify that the fonts you specified are substituted correctly.\n\nOther systems may not have the same font resources as the iSeries. You cannot print overlays or spooled files if the necessary font resources do not reside in the other system. It is your responsibility to verify that the fonts you specified reside in the system and are the same as the iSeries system.\n\nIf you include page segments in overlays or spooled files, you also have to send those page segments to the target system.\n\nThe support level of AFPDS structured fields depends on the system and the release of PSF*. It is your responsibility to verify that your release level of PSF supports AFPDS structured field used in its resources (overlays and page segments) and spooled files.\n\n## PSF (Print Service Facility)\n\n## Page Segments\n\n## Fonts\n\n- Note: Font substitution is supported by other systems from the following release. You can avoid this restriction by using the following releases:\n\n- v PSF/MVS Version 2 Release 1 or later\n\n- v PSF/VM Version 2 Release 1 or later\n\n458 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6482596389897988, + "doc_id": "f5eeedab7234bb70eb46f49a4cec668f1b2edb7e38921fa6c01b003aa87dc364", + "edit_distance": 0.4666666666666667, + "f1_score": 0.8250000000000002, + "meteor": 0.8846599337059378, + "precision": 0.7857142857142857, + "pred_md": "## Tasks Related to Source Overlay Files\n\nNote: The following description assumes that you are on a display with the command line.\n\nTable 88. Tasks related to source overlay files\n\n## Tasks Related to PFD Definitions\n\nNote: The following description assumes that you are on a display with the command line.\n\nTable 89. Tasks related to PFD definitions\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide\n\n444", + "recall": 0.868421052631579, + "true_md": "## Tasks Related to Source Overlay Files\n\n## Tasks Related to PFD Definitions\n\n- Note: The following description assumes that you are on a display with the command line.\n\n- Note: The following description assumes that you are on a display with the command line.\n\nTable88.Tasksrelatedtosourceoverlayfiles\n\nTable89.TasksrelatedtoPFDdefinitions\n\n444 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.22581811347946296, + "doc_id": "8c2a44fa3323c6dcab5337be811c864a5719a356c1a9ce1b22a7b3aec1dc6362", + "edit_distance": 0.6491228070175439, + "f1_score": 0.6918918918918919, + "meteor": 0.5708103986544436, + "precision": 0.9014084507042254, + "pred_md": "162\n\nTable 29. Specify Break Fields display fields (continued)\n\nType 1 in the Opt column beside the fields to be selected and press the Enter key.\n\n## Design Record Layout\n\nIn this section, records are distinguished depending on their definitions as follows:\n\n- v The record defined in the is referred to as a database file record .\n- v The record defined by the following process with the Print Format Utility based on the database file record will be simply referred to as a record .\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.5614035087719298, + "true_md": "Table29.SpecifyBreakFieldsdisplayfields (continued)\n\nIn this section, records are distinguished depending on their definitions as follows:\n\nType 1 in the Opt column beside the fields to be selected and press the Enter key.\n\n162 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\n## Design Record Layout\n\nDesign Record Layout Columns: 1- 74 Control . . PFD definition.....PRODUCTLBL *...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7.... 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 More... F3=Exit F6=Text F9=Line F10=Box F11=Bar code F21=Element edit F22=Block edit F24=More keys\n\n- v The record defined in the is referred to as a database file record .\n\n- v The record defined by the following process with the Print Format Utility based on the database file record will be simply referred to as a record ." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5470712223816955, + "doc_id": "5928255cfc5274b6767e302e9388c6425b8fbdb302c3a352e8a9837a8ffcfa5e", + "edit_distance": 0.5891891891891892, + "f1_score": 0.8735632183908045, + "meteor": 0.8432940928695851, + "precision": 0.8085106382978723, + "pred_md": "## Readers' Comments - We'd Like to Hear from You\n\niSeries Advanced Series\n\nAdvanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide\n\nPublication No. S544-5349-02\n\nOverall, how satisfied are you with the information in this book?\n\nVery Satisfied\n\nSatisfied\n\nNeutral\n\nDissatisfied h\n\nVery Dissatisfied\n\nOverall satisfaction\n\nh\n\nh\n\nh\n\nh\n\nHow satisfied are you that the information in this book is:\n\nVery Satisfied\n\nSatisfied\n\nNeutral\n\nDissatisfied\n\nVery Dissatisfied\n\nAccurate h\n\nh\n\nh\n\nh\n\nh\n\nComplete\n\nh\n\nh\n\nh\n\nh\n\nh\n\nEasy to find h\n\nh\n\nh\n\nh\n\nh\n\nEasy to understand h\n\nh\n\nh\n\nh\n\nh\n\nWell organized\n\nh\n\nh\n\nh\n\nh\n\nh\n\nApplicable to your tasks\n\nh\n\nh\n\nh\n\nh\n\nh\n\nPlease tell us how we can improve this book:\n\nThank you for your responses. May we contact you?\n\nh Yes\n\nh No\n\nWhen you send comments to IBM, you grant IBM a nonexclusive right to use or distribute your comments in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.\n\nName\n\nAddress\n\nCompany or Organization\n\nPhone No.", + "recall": 0.95, + "true_md": "## Readers’ Comments — We’d Like to Hear from You\n\n## How satisfied are you that the information in this book is:\n\nPlease tell us how we can improve this book:\n\n## iSeries Advanced Series Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\n## Publication No. S544-5349-02\n\n## Overall, how satisfied are you with the information in this book?\n\nThank you for your responses. May we contact you? h Yes h No\n\nWhen you send comments to IBM, you grant IBM a nonexclusive right to use or distribute your comments in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.\n\nName\n\nCompany or Organization\n\nPhone No.\n\nAddress" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9073630025029777, + "doc_id": "a5361ef71f15414a1f6b8521e3fe03d9cffbff83f30591949a3d8fde5b373691", + "edit_distance": 0.12264150943396226, + "f1_score": 0.935064935064935, + "meteor": 0.9451205103969754, + "precision": 0.9473684210526315, + "pred_md": "Basic English Language Skils\n\n## CHAPTER 7:\n\n## HOW TO ASK FOR HELP FROM YOUR TUTOR\n\nAs a student, you are going to experience times when you need help with your studies. You might be unsure about an assignment question, you might be confused by a particular concept, or you might be stressed about the upcoming exams.\n\nAnd if you are studying via distance learning (www.oxbridgeacademy.co. za/distance-learning/), where you don't have any face-to-face interaction with lecturers, you will need to rely on your tutors for the necessary academic support.", + "recall": 0.9230769230769231, + "true_md": "## CHAPTER 7:\n\n## HOW TO ASK FOR HELP FROM YOUR TUTOR\n\nBasic English Language Skills\n\nAs a student, you are going to experience times when you need help with your studies. You might be unsure about an assignment question, you might be confused by a particular concept, or you might be stressed about the upcoming exams.\n\nAnd if you are studying via distance learning (www.oxbridgeacademy.co. za/distance-learning/), where you don’t have any face-to-face interac- tion with lecturers, you will need to rely on your tutors for the necessary academic support." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7825533699938398, + "doc_id": "d95436c934cc26fcfd9b2cbdadb8f9c4f86f4b142b9273a1886238fac9d19076", + "edit_distance": 0.1836734693877551, + "f1_score": 0.935064935064935, + "meteor": 0.9351873536299765, + "precision": 0.9230769230769231, + "pred_md": "The following table explains each field of the Mapping Page Segment Name display:\n\nTable 35. Mapping Page Segment Name display fields\n\nNote: You can specify the data in the same way when other object types are mapped.\n\nChapter 10. Work with PFD Definitions\n\n193", + "recall": 0.9473684210526315, + "true_md": "The following table explains each field of the Mapping Page Segment Name display:\n\nTable35.MappingPageSegmentNamedisplayfields\n\n- Note: You can specify the data in the same way when other object types are mapped.\n\nChapter 10. Work with PFD Definitions 193" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7583817705637816, + "doc_id": "784804002b2d3fd823173f1c48086e9e6563756893f023e733f2df8b5c8df0f6", + "edit_distance": 0.5595238095238095, + "f1_score": 0.8622222222222223, + "meteor": 0.8291059553416954, + "precision": 0.7950819672131147, + "pred_md": "Table 16. Copy Source Overlay File display fields (continued)\n\nText 'description'\n\nSpecify a short description of the source overlay file in this prompt or leave the default if you want to copy the file with the same file description as the from file description. This description is saved with the source overlay file and displayed when the source overlay files are listed to help you identify the source overlay files.\n\nPress the Enter key after you specify the choices.\n\n## 4=Delete Source Overlay File\n\nTo delete a source overlay file, do the following on the Work with Source Overlay Files display.\n\n- 1. Type a 4 in the Opt column beside the name of the source overlay file you want to delete.\n- 2. Press Enter.\n\nThe Confirm Delete of Source Overlay Files display appears:\n\nUsing the Confirm Delete of Source Overlay Files display, you can confirm that you want to delete the files you chose by selecting option 4 (Delete) on the Work with Source Overlay Files display.\n\nNote:\n\nYou can delete only the source overlay files for which you have the authority to do so. If you do not have *OBJOPR and *OBJEXIST authority for a source overlay file, that source overlay file is not deleted.\n\nYou should use the displayed list of names to verify that you want to delete all of the source overlay files shown. If all of them are to be deleted, press Enter to delete them. If any of them should not be deleted, press F12 (Cancel). If you press F12, you return to the Work with Source Overlay Files display with all selections still shown, and you can remove 4 from the column beside the source overlay file you do not want to delete.\n\nChapter 6. Work with Source Overlay Files\n\n93", + "recall": 0.941747572815534, + "true_md": "The Confirm Delete of Source Overlay Files display appears:\n\nPress Enter to confirm your choices for 4=Delete. Press F12 to return to change your choices.\n\nBottom\n\nF11=Display names only F12=Cancel\n\n## Confirm Delete of Source Overlay Files\n\nPress the Enter key after you specify the choices.\n\nTo delete a source overlay file, do the following on the Work with Source Overlay Files display.\n\nTable16.CopySourceOverlayFiledisplayfields (continued)\n\n## 4=Delete Source Overlay File\n\n- 1. Type a 4 in the Opt column beside the name of the source overlay file you want to delete.\n\n- 2. Press Enter.\n\nUsing the Confirm Delete of Source Overlay Files display, you can confirm that you want to delete the files you chose by selecting option 4 (Delete) on the Work with Source Overlay Files display.\n\nYou should use the displayed list of names to verify that you want to delete all of the source overlay files shown. If all of them are to be deleted, press Enter to delete them. If any of them should not be deleted, press F12 (Cancel). If you press F12, you return to the Work with Source Overlay Files display with all selections still shown, and you can remove 4 from the column beside the source overlay file you do not want to delete.\n\nChapter 6. Work with Source Overlay Files 93\n\n- Note: You can delete only the source overlay files for which you have the authority to do so. If you do not have *OBJOPR and *OBJEXIST authority for a source overlay file, that source overlay file is not deleted." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.18185234853618296, + "doc_id": "c1c6002fc177204a703d073fa77c4fa51bfb32048c8baaedf97d16b9e29fa7f7", + "edit_distance": 0.7391304347826086, + "f1_score": 0.5925925925925926, + "meteor": 0.6384477459016393, + "precision": 0.5, + "pred_md": "338\n\nFigure 25. Example of Center-and-Trim Mapping\n\nFigure 25. Example of Center-and-Trim Mapping\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.7272727272727273, + "true_md": "Figure25.ExampleofCenter-and-TrimMapping\n\n338 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8328279496100505, + "doc_id": "32ae584af375fc0d72bc58005b37d2036d7d2e91e03a7a8743dbb9c1bac28069", + "edit_distance": 0.9120879120879121, + "f1_score": 0.9400921658986175, + "meteor": 0.8791091218414244, + "precision": 0.9357798165137615, + "pred_md": "394\n\n## Text Font in Graphics (GDF)\n\nWhen a graphics element contains text characters, the text is printed using the font which is specified for the graphics element.\n\n## Overlay object authority\n\nWhen you replace an existing overlay by creating an overlay, the Authority parameter is ignored and the authority of the existing overlay remains.\n\n## Printer Dependencies\n\nEach printer has some unique restrictions. For example, some printers do not allow the data stream to print text vertically.\n\nSee 'Appendix A. Printer Characteristics' on page 417 for restrictions of each printer.\n\n## Print Format Utility\n\n## Limitations\n\n## Minimum and Maximum Limitations\n\nTable 82. Print Format Utility minimum and maximum limitations\n\n## Dashed and Dotted Lines\n\nIf the length of a line is too small as compared with the line width, dashed and dotted lines are printed as solid lines.\n\nThe minimum length of this limitation depends on the line width.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.9444444444444444, + "true_md": "## Text Font in Graphics (GDF)\n\n## Overlay object authority\n\n## Printer Dependencies\n\n## Print Format Utility\n\n## Limitations\n\n## Minimum and Maximum Limitations\n\n## Dashed and Dotted Lines\n\nIf the length of a line is too small as compared with the line width, dashed and dotted lines are printed as solid lines.\n\nThe minimum length of this limitation depends on the line width.\n\n394 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\nWhen a graphics element contains text characters, the text is printed using the font which is specified for the graphics element.\n\nWhen you replace an existing overlay by creating an overlay, the Authority parameter is ignored and the authority of the existing overlay remains.\n\nEach printer has some unique restrictions. For example, some printers do not allow the data stream to print text vertically.\n\nSee “Appendix A. Printer Characteristics” on page 417 for restrictions of each printer.\n\nTable82.PrintFormatUtilityminimumandmaximumlimitations" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7071067811865475, + "doc_id": "c041aa9967e5dc306aceeebc89dc7394dd59c0ae6d1ec3911db307bdf323e0f5", + "edit_distance": 0.2, + "f1_score": 0.8421052631578947, + "meteor": 0.8017676767676769, + "precision": 0.8888888888888888, + "pred_md": "260\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.8, + "true_md": "260 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9452772719045665, + "doc_id": "6ed55a1686f05788a31e78955316b99c4343d335c728a99fddd4fd63fea71667", + "edit_distance": 0.8842592592592593, + "f1_score": 0.9907120743034057, + "meteor": 0.7317322893509768, + "precision": 0.9937888198757764, + "pred_md": "## Step 5 - Using an Overlay\n\nOnce an overlay is created, there are a variety of ways to place an overlay in AFP document applications. Overlays can be referenced in the iSeries printer file, in DDS output specifications (using the OVERLAY keyword), with the Advanced Print Utility, with page and form definitions, with AFP Toolbox APIs, and with numerous third party applications. Refer to the iSeries Guide to Advanced Function Presentation and Print Services Facility (S544-5319) for more information on application options for AFP documents.\n\n## Overriding a Printer File\n\nTo use an overlay with a printer file, enter an OVRPRTF command to override the printer file with the overlay.\n\nSee the CL Reference book for detail of the OVRPRTF command.\n\nIn the following example, the printer file PRINTF is used as an example. You can use the name of your own printer file instead.\n\n## Example Actions:\n\n- 1. Type OVRPRTF FILE(PRINTF) FRONTOVL(OVLLIB/STATIONE) on the command line.\n- 2. Press the Enter key.\n\n## Using the Printer File\n\nTo create a spooled file that contains the overlay, use the printer file. Any program that uses the printer file will do.\n\nIn the following example, a program CRTPRT is used to create a spooled file. You should use the name of your own program that uses the printer file PRINTF.\n\n## Example Actions:\n\n- 1. Type CALL CRTPRT on the command line.\n- 2. Press the Enter key.\n\nIf you do not have a program that uses the printer file, you can try using the overlay with system-supplied programs as follows:\n\n- 1. Type OVRPRTF FILE(QSYSPRT) FRONTOVL(OVLLIB/STATIONE) on the command line.\n- 2. Press the Enter key.\n- 3. Press the Print key.\n\nWhen you press the Print key, a system program prints a copy of the displayed panel by using printer file QSYSPRT. Thus, overlay STATIONE is printed on the hard copy of the display you are seeing.\n\nYou can specify overlays in record formats of a DDS source for the printer file if the printer device type is *AFPDS. See iSeries Data Description Specifications Reference Version 2, SC41-9620 for more information.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide\n\n56", + "recall": 0.9876543209876543, + "true_md": "## Step 5 - Using an Overlay\n\n## Overriding a Printer File\n\n## Using the Printer File\n\n## Example Actions:\n\n## Example Actions:\n\n56 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\nYou can specify overlays in record formats of a DDS source for the printer file if the printer device type is *AFPDS. See iSeries Data Description Specifications Reference Version 2, SC41-9620 for more information.\n\nWhen you press the Print key, a system program prints a copy of the displayed panel by using printer file QSYSPRT. Thus, overlay STATIONE is printed on the hard copy of the display you are seeing.\n\nIf you do not have a program that uses the printer file, you can try using the overlay with system-supplied programs as follows:\n\nIn the following example, a program CRTPRT is used to create a spooled file. You should use the name of your own program that uses the printer file PRINTF.\n\nTo create a spooled file that contains the overlay, use the printer file. Any program that uses the printer file will do.\n\nTo use an overlay with a printer file, enter an OVRPRTF command to override the printer file with the overlay.\n\nSee the CL Reference book for detail of the OVRPRTF command.\n\nIn the following example, the printer file PRINTF is used as an example. You can use the name of your own printer file instead.\n\nOnce an overlay is created, there are a variety of ways to place an overlay in AFP document applications. Overlays can be referenced in the iSeries printer file, in DDS output specifications (using the OVERLAY keyword), with the Advanced Print Utility, with page and form definitions, with AFP Toolbox APIs, and with numerous third party applications. Refer to the iSeries Guide to Advanced Function Presentation and Print Services Facility (S544-5319) for more information on application options for AFP documents.\n\n- 1. Type OVRPRTF FILE(PRINTF) FRONTOVL(OVLLIB/STATIONE) on the command line.\n\n- 2. Press the Enter key.\n\n- 1. Type CALL CRTPRT on the command line.\n\n- 2. Press the Enter key.\n\n- 1. Type OVRPRTF FILE(QSYSPRT) FRONTOVL(OVLLIB/STATIONE) on the command line.\n\n- 2. Press the Enter key.\n\n- 3. Press the Print key." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9031527481217285, + "doc_id": "589aa9c732df435a91b258abae757ccd829c611851bceb6f3d733533328fbba0", + "edit_distance": 0.6041666666666666, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9862167923538773, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Displaying a Page Segment Description\n\nThis function calls the CL command DSPOBJD , and displays the page segment description.\n\n## Changing a Page Segment Description\n\nThis function calls the CL command CHGOBJD , and changes the page segment description.\n\n## Converting a Page Segment to a Physical File Member\n\nThis function allows you to convert a page segment to a physical file member. You can transfer the page segment to another system such as the System/370.\n\nChapter 15. Introduction to Resource Management Utility (RMU)\n\n313", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## Displaying a Page Segment Description\n\n## Changing a Page Segment Description\n\n## Converting a Page Segment to a Physical File Member\n\nChapter 15. Introduction to Resource Management Utility (RMU) 313\n\nThis function calls the CL command DSPOBJD , and displays the page segment description.\n\nThis function calls the CL command CHGOBJD , and changes the page segment description.\n\nThis function allows you to convert a page segment to a physical file member. You can transfer the page segment to another system such as the System/370." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.15172252927408802, + "doc_id": "5cb0ff6d0c8be38fb41653192fbbf543822d6872ca4bce45ab4b8d1ae66ac87f", + "edit_distance": 0.7001569858712716, + "f1_score": 0.8161434977578474, + "meteor": 0.3425764840325274, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "not need to change the data in the database file. Instead, you should specify mappings from these values to object names on the Specify Mapping Object Name display.\n\n## Printing with Print Format Utility\n\nThe Print Format Utility allows you to save the PFD definition as an iSeries file member so that the same definition can be used the next time you print a database file member. Once you save a PFD definition, you can make a new PFD definition based on the PFD definition by changing it from the display.\n\nYou can print various kinds of printout from one database file member by preparing various PFD definitions. For example, you can create a list of products , product descriptions , and delivery labels as shown below from one by using different printout format definitions.\n\n*---------------*\n\n|\n\n*---------------------*\n\n*--------------------*\n\n*---------------------------*\n\nChapter 7. Introduction to Print Format Utility\n\n3\n\n101", + "recall": 0.6893939393939394, + "true_md": "not need to change the data in the database file. Instead, you should specify mappings from these values to object names on the Specify Mapping Object Name display.\n\nThe Print Format Utility allows you to save the PFD definition as an iSeries file member so that the same definition can be used the next time you print a database file member. Once you save a PFD definition, you can make a new PFD definition based on the PFD definition by changing it from the display.\n\nYou can print various kinds of printout from one database file member by preparing various PFD definitions. For example, you can create a list of products , product descriptions , and delivery labels as shown below from one by using different printout format definitions.\n\n*---------------* | | | Database File | | | *-------*-------* | *----------------------+-------------------------* | | | V V V *-----------* *-----------* *-----------* | Print | | Print | | Print | | Operation | | Operation | | Operation | *-----*-----* *-----*-----* *-----*-----* | | | |<-*PFD definition 1 |<-*PFD definition 2 |<-*PFD definition 3 | | | Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 V V V *---------------------* *--------------------* *---------------------------* | List of products || Product descriptions || Delivery labels | |*------------*-----* | | | | *----------* *----------* | ||Product Name|Price| | Product name: | | Color TV||AMRadio | | |*------------+-----* | | ---------------- | | | 300 | | 20 | | || Color TV | 300| | Color TV || ||| | | ||| || | | AM Radio 20| | | ---------------- | | | || Video | 500| | Price : $300. | *----------* *----------* | : : | | | Country : U.S.A. | || | | | Stock : xxxxx | | Video | |CD Player | | | : : | | | 500 | | 100 | | | | ||| ||: :: :| || | | | | | *----------* *----------* | |*------------*-----* | | | *---------------------* *--------------------* *---------------------------*\n\n## Printing with Print Format Utility\n\nChapter 7. Introduction to Print Format Utility 101" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7071067811865475, + "doc_id": "66c8b75e2570a86182c55fa73bb09ee9a17b9c4d48c68c79631536c4b7a1fcdb", + "edit_distance": 0.2, + "f1_score": 0.8421052631578947, + "meteor": 0.8017676767676769, + "precision": 0.8888888888888888, + "pred_md": "2\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.8, + "true_md": "2 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0027918622579960954, + "doc_id": "6a60b64e53abd827f55a405bc87adbbd02e66385acf770fe83fa0df4e36c72c9", + "edit_distance": 0.9349112426035503, + "f1_score": 0.5306122448979592, + "meteor": 0.08520882925773644, + "precision": 0.8666666666666667, + "pred_md": "## Operation Flow\n\n102\n\nFigure 17 shows the overview of the print format utility operation.\n\n*-------------------------*\n\nFigure 17. Overview of Print Format Utility Operation\n\nFigure 17. Overview of Print Format Utility Operation\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.38235294117647056, + "true_md": "## Operation Flow\n\nFigure 17 shows the overview of the print format utility operation.\n\nFigure17.OverviewofPrintFormatUtilityOperation\n\n102 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\n*-------------------------* Step 1 | - Define PFD | | specifications and fonts | | - Specify database file | | - Specify break fields | *------------*------------* | *------------------+-------------------* | *------------->| | || V | | *-------------------* | | Place element on | | | | the record layout | | *---------*---------* Step 2 | | V | *-------------------* | | | Define contents | | of element | | *---------*---------* | *--------------* *------------------+-------------------* | *------------------+-------------------* | *------------->| | || V | | *-------------------* | | Place element on | | | | the page layout | *---------*---------* Step 3 | | V | *-------------------* | | | Define contents | | of element | | *---------*---------* | *--------------* *------------------+-------------------* V *-------------------* Step 4 | - Specify record | | selection | - Define printout | | specifications | | - Specify mapping | | object name | *---------*---------* V *-------------------* Step 5 | Save a PFD | definition *---------*---------* V *-------------------* Step 6 | Print a | database file *-------------------*" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.025776255745253836, + "doc_id": "893b5aa14000842356d163275355749acb4b32ffeee1732aea3283b9950a6247", + "edit_distance": 0.8343558282208589, + "f1_score": 0.5485714285714286, + "meteor": 0.2578377190100765, + "precision": 0.9795918367346939, + "pred_md": "38\n\n## Defining a Line Element\n\n## Example Actions:\n\n- 1. Move the cursor to position (Across : 10, Down : 5) to start defining a line.\n- 2. Press the F9 key.\n\nThe following display appears.\n\n## Example Actions:\n\n- 1. Move the cursor to position (Across : 39, Down : 5) to define the end of the line.\n- 2. Press the F9 key.\n\nThe key entry area appears on the display.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.38095238095238093, + "true_md": "## Defining a Line Element\n\n## Example Actions:\n\nThe following display appears.\n\nThe key entry area appears on the display.\n\n38 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\n## Example Actions:\n\n- 1. Move the cursor to position (Across : 39, Down : 5) to define the end of the line.\n\n- 2. Press the F9 key.\n\n- 1. Move the cursor to position (Across : 10, Down : 5) to start defining a line.\n\n- 2. Press the F9 key.\n\nDesign Overlay Columns: 1- 74 Control . . \\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_ Source overlay.....STATIONERY *...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7.... 001 002 *T001 Stationery Co., Ltd. 003 004 *T002 rd Stationery Sales Slip Date: / / 005 %L003 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 More... F3=Exit F5=Refresh F9=Line F12=Cancel F15=Mark on/off F16=Hide F19=Left F20=Right Specify opposite end of line and press F9.\n\nDesign Overlay Columns: 1- 74 Control . . \\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_ Source overlay.....STATIONERY *...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7.... 001 002 *T001 Stationery Co., Ltd. 003 004 *T002 rd Stationery Sales Slip Date: / / 005 %L003 ------------------------ 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 More... Define Line Mark......:*L003 Measurement method....:Row/Column Start position . . Across 10 Down 5 End position . . . Across 39 F3=Exit F4=Detail F6=Change measurement method F12=Cancel F24=More keys" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9401334775586903, + "doc_id": "d18a64809be9b9eaab48abc3232757008c6676994a122db51504916cdd9a9629", + "edit_distance": 0.4334677419354839, + "f1_score": 0.9892473118279571, + "meteor": 0.9531157551848729, + "precision": 0.9928057553956835, + "pred_md": "376\n\n## *CAT (Center and trim)\n\nThe center of the input image is located to the center of the output image area. The image size is not changed, and any portion of the input image that falls outside of the output image size is trimmed.\n\n## *IPTP (Image point to pel)\n\nThe top left corner of the input image is located to the top left corner of the output image area. No resolution correction is done and each image point in the input image is mapped to a pel of the output printer. The image size may vary depending on the pel-density of the output printer, and any portion of the input image that falls outside of the output image size is trimmed.\n\n## *IPTPD (Image point to pel with double dot)\n\nThe top left corner of the input image is located to the top left corner of the output image area. No resolution correction is done and each image point in the input image is doubled (replicated) in both dimensions and mapped to pels of the output printer. The image size may vary depending on the pel-density of the output printer, and any portion of the input image that falls outside of the output image size is trimmed.\n\n## Degree of rotation (IMGRTT)\n\nSpecifies the degree of the clockwise rotation of the output image. The center of the rotation is the top left corner of the image.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\n## *SAME\n\nSpecifies the degree of rotation used when you previously created a page segment of the same name.\n\n- 0 No rotation is done.\n- 90 The image is rotated 90 degrees clockwise.\n- 180 The image is rotated 180 degrees clockwise.\n- 270 The image is rotated 270 degrees clockwise.\n\n## Authority (AUT)\n\nSpecifies the authority given to the user who does not have specific authority, who is not on the authorization list, or whose user group has no specific authority to the created page segment.\n\nNote:\n\nThis value is ignored and the current authority remains when you replace the existing page segment.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\n## *SAME\n\nSpecifies the same value used for this parameter when you previously created a page segment of the same name. If this is the first page segment, the default value is *LIBCRTAUT.\n\n## *LIBCRTAUT\n\nThe system determines the authority for the page segment by using the value specified for the Create authority prompt (CRTAUT parameter) on the Create Library command (CRTLIB) for the library containing the page segment to be created. If the value\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.9857142857142858, + "true_md": "## *CAT (Center and trim)\n\n## *IPTP (Image point to pel)\n\n## *IPTPD (Image point to pel with double dot)\n\n## Degree of rotation (IMGRTT)\n\n## *SAME\n\n## Authority (AUT)\n\n## *SAME\n\n## *LIBCRTAUT\n\nThe center of the input image is located to the center of the output image area. The image size is not changed, and any portion of the input image that falls outside of the output image size is trimmed.\n\nThe top left corner of the input image is located to the top left corner of the output image area. No resolution correction is done and each image point in the input image is mapped to a pel of the output printer. The image size may vary depending on the pel-density of the output printer, and any portion of the input image that falls outside of the output image size is trimmed.\n\nThe top left corner of the input image is located to the top left corner of the output image area. No resolution correction is done and each image point in the input image is doubled (replicated) in both dimensions and mapped to pels of the output printer. The image size may vary depending on the pel-density of the output printer, and any portion of the input image that falls outside of the output image size is trimmed.\n\nSpecifies the degree of the clockwise rotation of the output image. The center of the rotation is the top left corner of the image.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\nSpecifies the degree of rotation used when you previously created a page segment of the same name.\n\nSpecifies the authority given to the user who does not have specific authority, who is not on the authorization list, or whose user group has no specific authority to the created page segment.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\nSpecifies the same value used for this parameter when you previously created a page segment of the same name. If this is the first page segment, the default value is *LIBCRTAUT.\n\nThe system determines the authority for the page segment by using the value specified for the Create authority prompt (CRTAUT parameter) on the Create Library command (CRTLIB) for the library containing the page segment to be created. If the value\n\n376 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\n- Note: This value is ignored and the current authority remains when you replace the existing page segment.\n\n- 0 No rotation is done.\n\n- 90 The image is rotated 90 degrees clockwise.\n\n- 180 The image is rotated 180 degrees clockwise.\n\n- 270 The image is rotated 270 degrees clockwise." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9651750788533575, + "doc_id": "921e793593beca97ced40b324735f2d79906ae72fa28afa4fe7b6f45eab4fd2b", + "edit_distance": 0.8292682926829268, + "f1_score": 0.9926470588235295, + "meteor": 0.8342835680678646, + "precision": 0.9926470588235294, + "pred_md": "## Chapter 8. Getting Started with Print Format Utility\n\nThis chapter describes how to print data from a database file member with the Print Format Utility by showing a practical printing exercise.\n\nThe operational steps of printing with the Print Format Utility are as follows:\n\n- Step 1. Starting the Print Format Utility\n- Step 2. Creating a PFD definition in a library.\n- Step 3. Creating a PFD definition in a PFD definition file that you created in step 2. This step consists of the following sub-steps:\n- a. Specifying a database file\n- b. Designing a record layout\n- c. Designing a page layout\n- d. Defining printout specifications\n- e. Saving a PFD definition\n- Step 4. Printing a database file based on the PFD definition.\n- Step 5. Ending the Print Format Utility.\n- Step 6. Printing the AFP Utilities tutorial.\n\nNote: If your printer does not support bar codes, you should specify your printer type on the Define PFD Specifications display in the creating a PFD definition step. AFP Utilities for iSeries generate appropriate data to print bar codes on your printer. Refer to IBM Printing Systems: Printer Information , (S544-5750), to check if your printer supports them.\n\nA page segment is needed to perform the following task. Page segment QFCLOGO should exist in library QGPL. If it does not exist, copy page segment QFCPAGS from library QAFP to library QGPL as page segment QFCLOGO. You can use the Create Duplicate Object (CRTDUPOBJ) command to do this.\n\n105", + "recall": 0.9926470588235294, + "true_md": "## Chapter 8. Getting Started with Print Format Utility\n\nThis chapter describes how to print data from a database file member with the Print Format Utility by showing a practical printing exercise.\n\nA page segment is needed to perform the following task. Page segment QFCLOGO should exist in library QGPL. If it does not exist, copy page segment QFCPAGS from library QAFP to library QGPL as page segment QFCLOGO. You can use the Create Duplicate Object (CRTDUPOBJ) command to do this.\n\n- Note: If your printer does not support bar codes, you should specify your printer type on the Define PFD Specifications display in the creating a PFD definition step. AFP Utilities for iSeries generate appropriate data to print bar codes on your printer. Refer to IBM Printing Systems: Printer Information , (S544–5750), to check if your printer supports them.\n\nThe operational steps of printing with the Print Format Utility are as follows:\n\n- Step 1. Starting the Print Format Utility\n\n- Step 2. Creating a PFD definition in a library.\n\n- Step 3. Creating a PFD definition in a PFD definition file that you created in step 2. This step consists of the following sub-steps:\n\n- a. Specifying a database file\n\n- b. Designing a record layout\n\n- c. Designing a page layout\n\n- e. Saving a PFD definition\n\n- d. Defining printout specifications\n\n- Step 4. Printing a database file based on the PFD definition.\n\n- Step 5. Ending the Print Format Utility.\n\n- Step 6. Printing the AFP Utilities tutorial.\n\n105" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7829600306846276, + "doc_id": "eca0d324f9c207cddeb43cf1b8d711cbf8f1587198b213e12b5d2b991c8c8f13", + "edit_distance": 0.8566308243727598, + "f1_score": 0.9111111111111111, + "meteor": 0.6413270467735553, + "precision": 0.924812030075188, + "pred_md": "Basic English Language Skils\n\n## THE PURPOSE OF A RESIGNATION LETTER:\n\nThe purpose of a resignation letter is to give your employer official no -tice that you will be leaving the organisation. However, it is usually appropriate to inform your manager of your intention to resign in person, and then to follow up your conversation with the formal resignation letter.\n\nWhat to include:\n\nYour resignation letter should be short and to the point. Keep it positive and professional - this is not the place to voice your dissatisfaction with your job.\n\nIn your letter, you should make sure that you include the following:\n\n## 1.\n\n## A clear statement of your intention to resign.\n\nExample:\n\n'Please accept this letter as formal notice of my resignation from my post as Assistant IT Manager at XYZ.'\n\n## 2.\n\nReference to your notice period (where applicable), as well as your last working day with the organisation.\n\nExample:\n\n'My last working day will be in two weeks' time, on 31 August 2015.'\n\n## 3.\n\n## Your reason for leaving.\n\nYou don't need to elaborate on this if you don't want to. Remember to keep it positive, and not to make any rude, offensive or insulting remarks about the organisation or your co- workers, no matter how tempting it might be.", + "recall": 0.8978102189781022, + "true_md": "## THE PURPOSE OF A RESIGNATION LETTER:\n\n## 1. A clear statement of your intention to resign.\n\n## 2. Reference to your notice period (where applicable), as well as your last working day with the organisation.\n\n## 3. Your reason for leaving. You don’t need to elaborate on this if you don’t want to. Remember\n\nExample: “My last working day will be in two weeks’ time, on 31 August 2015.”\n\nYour reason for leaving. You don’t need to elaborate on this if you don’t want to. Remember to keep it positive, and not to make any rude, offensive or insulting remarks about the organisation or your co- workers, no matter how tempting it might be.\n\nExample: “Please accept this letter as formal notice of my resignation from my post as Assistant IT Manager at XYZ.”\n\nIn your letter, you should make sure that you include the following:\n\nYour resignation letter should be short and to the point. Keep it positive and professional – this is not the place to voice your dissatisfaction with your job.\n\nWhat to include:\n\nThe purpose of a resignation letter is to give your employer official no - tice that you will be leaving the organisation. However, it is usually ap- propriate to inform your manager of your intention to resign in person, and then to follow up your conversation with the formal resignation letter.\n\nBasic English Language Skills" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.01699582899231978, + "doc_id": "54590ff235cdf0b0b8cd6c75ea2237a28e5f0b610e0722b355a81487d52517be", + "edit_distance": 0.7848101265822784, + "f1_score": 0.4411764705882353, + "meteor": 0.2306413825806482, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "The following table explains each field in this display.\n\nThe following table explains each field in this display.\n\nChapter 13. Design Operation\n\n275", + "recall": 0.2830188679245283, + "true_md": "## Place Page Segment Detail\n\nMark: *S003 Measurement method: Row/Column Type choices, press Enter. Position: Across . . ......... 10 1-999 Down . . . . . . . . .... 4 Page segment......... Name,F4forlist Element . . ......... Name F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F6=Change measurement method F12=Cancel Page segment name not specified.\n\nThe following table explains each field in this display.\n\nChapter 13. Design Operation 275" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.22612164703205964, + "doc_id": "2b44fe4051dd3b9485c0f2672ca96a97415671c3bb19195add6031ded6cb9c5d", + "edit_distance": 0.6842105263157895, + "f1_score": 0.5333333333333333, + "meteor": 0.6600900423728814, + "precision": 0.42105263157894735, + "pred_md": "204\n\nTable 40. Work with PFD Definition Files display fields\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.7272727272727273, + "true_md": "Table40.WorkwithPFDDefinitionFilesdisplayfields\n\n204 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.08380902718311123, + "doc_id": "70dd1ec6ab47be36e1ea0f58e18c88ecebad2b9e6554214a0fcaa0371970000b", + "edit_distance": 0.5951557093425606, + "f1_score": 0.6788990825688073, + "meteor": 0.45044848333887627, + "precision": 0.9736842105263158, + "pred_md": "128\n\n## Example Action: Press the F11 key to place a record.\n\nA mark %R001-001 is displayed at the cursor position in the image area and the key entry area appears at the bottom portion of the display.\n\nThe mark for the record layout has a trailing sequence number. This sequence number will be incremented by 1 such as *R001-002, *R001-003, and so on, when the record layout is repeated.\n\nExample Action: Move the cursor to the key entry area and press the F4 key.\n\n## The Place Record Layout Detail display appears.\n\nYou can type the desired choices in the detail list.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.5211267605633803, + "true_md": "Example Action: Press the F11 key to place a record.\n\nDesign Page Layout Columns: 1- 74 Control . . PFD definition.....PRODUCTLBL *...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7.... 001 002 003 004 005 %R001-001 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 More... Place Record Layout Mark......:*R001 Measurement method....:Row/Column Position .....Across 5 Down 5 F3=Exit F4=Detail F6=Change measurement method F12=Cancel F24=More keys\n\nPlace Record Layout Detail Mark: *R001 Measurement method: Row/Column Type choices, press Enter. Position: Across ........... 5 1-999 Down . . .......... Element . .......... Name Direction . . . . . . . . . . 1 1=Across, 2=Down Repetition: Across ........... 2 1-99 Down . . .......... 4 Distance: Across ........... 40 1-999 Down . . .......... 10 Bottom F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F6=Change measurement method F12=Cancel\n\nA mark %R001-001 is displayed at the cursor position in the image area and the key entry area appears at the bottom portion of the display.\n\nThe mark for the record layout has a trailing sequence number. This sequence number will be incremented by 1 such as *R001-002, *R001-003, and so on, when the record layout is repeated.\n\nExample Action: Move the cursor to the key entry area and press the F4 key.\n\nThe Place Record Layout Detail display appears.\n\nYou can type the desired choices in the detail list.\n\n128 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7071067811865475, + "doc_id": "a55d7ad5e4cac2cfbd631d980b903b975bd76fe066bcaba39a032316751d26c4", + "edit_distance": 0.2, + "f1_score": 0.8421052631578947, + "meteor": 0.8017676767676769, + "precision": 0.8888888888888888, + "pred_md": "142\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.8, + "true_md": "142 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9226898288319445, + "doc_id": "957710cba90d48c45bd8608d162a9456339ff77a4bcfb639dc46c384875bc435", + "edit_distance": 0.7074829931972789, + "f1_score": 0.9779411764705883, + "meteor": 0.8400981812094224, + "precision": 0.9779411764705882, + "pred_md": "Note: This value is ignored and the current authority remains when you replace the existing page segment.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\n## *SAME\n\nSpecifies the same value used for this parameter when you previously created a page segment of the same name. If this is the first page segment, the default value is *LIBCRTAUT.\n\n## *LIBCRTAUT\n\nThe system determines the authority for the page segment by using the value specified for the Create authority prompt (CRTAUT parameter) on the Create Library command (CRTLIB) for the library containing the page segment to be created. If the value specified on the Create authority prompt (CRTAUT parameter) is changed, the new value will not affect this page segment.\n\n## *CHANGE\n\nChange authority allows the user to perform all operations on the page segment except those limited to the owner or controlled by object existence authority and object management authority. The user can change the page segment and perform basic functions on the page segment. Change authority provides object operational authority and all data authority.\n\n- *ALL All authority allows the user to perform all operations on the page segment except those limited to the owner or controlled by authorization list management authority. The user can control the page segment's existence, specify the security for the page segment, change the page segment, and perform basic functions on the page segment. The user cannot transfer ownership of the page segment.\n\n*USE Use authority allows the user to perform basic operations on the page segment, such as read the page segment. The user is prevented from changing the page segment. Use authority provides object operational authority, read authority, and execute authority.\n\n## *EXCLUDE\n\nExclude authority prevents the user from accessing the page segment.\n\n## authorization-list-name\n\nSpecify the name of an authorization list. Users included on the authorization list are granted authority to the page segment as specified by the list. The authorization list must exist when the page segment is created.\n\nText 'description' (TEXT)\n\nSpecifies text that briefly describes the page segment to be created.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\n## *SAME\n\nSpecifies the text used when you previously created a page segment of the same name.\n\n## *BLANK\n\nSpecifies the text is blank.\n\nChapter 21. AFP Utilities for iSeries Commands\n\n383", + "recall": 0.9779411764705882, + "true_md": "- Note: This value is ignored and the current authority remains when you replace the existing page segment.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\n## *SAME\n\n## *LIBCRTAUT\n\n## *CHANGE\n\n## authorization-list-name\n\n## *EXCLUDE\n\n## Text ’description’ (TEXT)\n\n## *SAME\n\n## *BLANK\n\nSpecifies the text is blank.\n\nSpecifies the text used when you previously created a page segment of the same name.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\nSpecifies text that briefly describes the page segment to be created.\n\nSpecify the name of an authorization list. Users included on the authorization list are granted authority to the page segment as specified by the list. The authorization list must exist when the page segment is created.\n\nExclude authority prevents the user from accessing the page segment.\n\nChange authority allows the user to perform all operations on the page segment except those limited to the owner or controlled by object existence authority and object management authority. The user can change the page segment and perform basic functions on the page segment. Change authority provides object operational authority and all data authority.\n\nThe system determines the authority for the page segment by using the value specified for the Create authority prompt (CRTAUT parameter) on the Create Library command (CRTLIB) for the library containing the page segment to be created. If the value specified on the Create authority prompt (CRTAUT parameter) is changed, the new value will not affect this page segment.\n\nSpecifies the same value used for this parameter when you previously created a page segment of the same name. If this is the first page segment, the default value is *LIBCRTAUT.\n\n- *ALL All authority allows the user to perform all operations on the page segment except those limited to the owner or controlled by authorization list management authority. The user can control the page segment’s existence, specify the security for the page segment, change the page segment, and perform basic functions on the page segment. The user cannot transfer ownership of the page segment.\n\n- *USE Use authority allows the user to perform basic operations on the page segment, such as read the page segment. The user is prevented from changing the page segment. Use authority provides object operational authority, read authority, and execute authority.\n\nChapter 21. AFP Utilities for iSeries Commands 383" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9268536116918104, + "doc_id": "f5134b6c94e97cf92ac975729474fe1346451ca16ad6ca804d1a9088c8fc6fb6", + "edit_distance": 0.8457583547557841, + "f1_score": 0.9672897196261683, + "meteor": 0.7574793363854491, + "precision": 0.981042654028436, + "pred_md": "## EXCEL TRAINING MANUAL\n\n## 1.2 WHAT CAN A SPREADSHEET DO?\n\nIn contrast to a word processor, which manipulates text, a spreadsheet manipulates numerical data and text. Using a spreadsheet, one can create budgets, analyze data, produce financial plans, and perform various other simple and complex numerical applications.\n\nBy having formulas that automatically recalculate, either built by you, the user, or the builtin math functions, you can play with the numbers to see how the result is affected. Using this 'what-if?' analysis, you can see what affect changing a data value or calculation can have on your monitoring program.\n\nSpreadsheets can also be used for graphing data points, reporting data analyses, and organizing and storing data.\n\n## 1.3 BENEFITS OF USING EXCEL\n\nMicrosoft excel is a powerful tool that is widely used to help people analyze organize data in a systemic manner. Using Microsoft Excel and other office applications, you can easily share your insight and analysis with partners, customers and co-workers with great zeal. Here are some of the benefits of using Microsoft Excel in terms of analyzing and sharing information within the workplace.\n\n## 1.3.1 USER FRIENDLY INTERFACE\n\nThe new Microsoft excel has an improved user interface that enable you to organize your information in a systematic manner. Based on your current project, whether writing formulas or creating tables, Office Excel features appropriate tools and commands to help you accomplish your task.\n\n## 1.3.2 MANAGES AND ORGANIZE MASSIVE DATA\n\nWork with loads of data using Microsoft Excel, which provide endless opportunities in regards to data management. Apart from having a bigger grid, Microsoft Excel also supports multicore processors to help you calculate formula-intense tasks.\n\n## 1.3.3 PROVIDES BETTER ANALYSIS\n\nUse the redesigned chart engine in Microsoft Excel to present your data in professional oriented charts. Apply visual modifications to your presentation such as soft shadowing, 3-D effects and transparency. Moreover, create and manage massive data the same way because Office Microsoft excel also supports other office applications like Microsoft Office Power Point.\n\nPage 6 /g3", + "recall": 0.9539170506912442, + "true_md": "EXCEL TRAINING MANUAL\n\n## 1.2 WHAT CAN A SPREADSHEET DO?\n\n## 1.3 BENEFITS OF USING EXCEL\n\n## 1.3.1 USER FRIENDLY INTERFACE\n\n## 1.3.2 MANAGES AND ORGANIZE MASSIVE DATA\n\n## 1.3.3 PROVIDES BETTER ANALYSIS\n\nPage 6 GLYPH<g3>\n\nUse the redesigned chart engine in Microsoft Excel to present your data in professional oriented charts. Apply visual modifications to your presentation such as soft shadowing, 3-D effects and transparency. Moreover, create and manage massive data the same way because Office Microsoft excel also supports other office applications like Microsoft Office Power Point. \n\nWork with loads of data using Microsoft Excel, which provide endless opportunities in regards to data management. Apart from having a bigger grid, Microsoft Excel also supports multicore processors to help you calculate formula-intense tasks. \n\nThe new Microsoft excel has an improved user interface that enable you to organize your information in a systematic manner. Based on your current project, whether writing formulas or creating tables, Office Excel features appropriate tools and commands to help you accomplish your task. \n\nMicrosoft excel is a powerful tool that is widely used to help people analyze organize data in a systemic manner. Using Microsoft Excel and other office applications, you can easily share your insight and analysis with partners, customers and co-workers with great zeal. Here are some of the benefits of using Microsoft Excel in terms of analyzing and sharing information within the workplace. \n\nSpreadsheets can also be used for graphing data points, reporting data analyses, and organizing and storing data. \n\nBy having formulas that automatically recalculate, either built by you, the user, or the built- in math functions, you can play with the numbers to see how the result is affected. Using this “what-if?” analysis, you can see what affect changing a data value or calculation can have on your monitoring program.\n\nIn contrast to a word processor, which manipulates text, a spreadsheet manipulates numerical data and text. Using a spreadsheet, one can create budgets, analyze data, produce financial plans, and perform various other simple and complex numerical applications." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5398321596055176, + "doc_id": "6df62be8e23d8a037e4244bedefa9d97e835be9938439d9b4ca1f61cd9026c36", + "edit_distance": 0.6228070175438597, + "f1_score": 0.8571428571428572, + "meteor": 0.8259458402154775, + "precision": 0.8035714285714286, + "pred_md": "Table 94. Handling existing elements in the screen view of the design display (continued)\n\n## Changing the View of the Display\n\nTable 95. Changing the view of the display in the screen view of the design display\n\n## Tasks Related to List View of Design Display\n\nNote: The following description assumes that you are on one of the following displays and in the list view:\n\nThe Design Overlay display\n\nThe Design Record Layout display\n\nThe Design Page Layout display\n\n## Defining an Element\n\nTable 96. Defining an element in the list view of the design display\n\nAppendix E. How to Do a Task\n\n449", + "recall": 0.9183673469387755, + "true_md": "Table94.Handlingexistingelementsinthescreenviewofthedesigndisplay (continued)\n\nTable95.Changingtheviewofthedisplayinthescreenviewofthedesigndisplay\n\nTable96.Defininganelementinthelistviewofthedesigndisplay\n\n## Tasks Related to List View of Design Display\n\n## Defining an Element\n\n## Changing the View of the Display\n\nAppendix E. How to Do a Task 449\n\n- Note: The following description assumes that you are on one of the following displays and in the list view:\n\nThe Design Overlay display The Design Record Layout display The Design Page Layout display" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5514358016231325, + "doc_id": "079bf1266ffc2474224b819a1170b16338a76bc44bfb735196430ec4ab224e58", + "edit_distance": 0.61, + "f1_score": 0.78, + "meteor": 0.8726956242338799, + "precision": 0.6964285714285714, + "pred_md": "450\n\nTable 96. Defining an element in the list view of the design display (continued)\n\n## Handling Existing Elements\n\nTable 97. Handling existing elements in the list view of the design display\n\n## Tasks Related to Each Element\n\n## Text Element\n\nNote: The following description assumes that you are on one of the following displays:\n\nThe Define Text Detail display\n\nThe Change Text Detail display\n\nThe Define Box Detail display\n\nThe Change Box Detail display\n\nTable 98. Tasks related to text element\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.8863636363636364, + "true_md": "Table96.Defininganelementinthelistviewofthedesigndisplay (continued)\n\nTable97.Handlingexistingelementsinthelistviewofthedesigndisplay\n\nTable98.Tasksrelatedtotextelement\n\n450 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\nNote: The following description assumes that you are on one of the following displays:\n\nThe Define Text Detail display\n\nThe Change Text Detail display\n\nThe Define Box Detail display\n\nThe Change Box Detail display\n\n## Handling Existing Elements\n\n## Tasks Related to Each Element\n\n## Text Element" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.06695718273210093, + "doc_id": "01526971b1f9d87a0a27fae5384cd1c3167a886bef47aab88977c01ef611bda6", + "edit_distance": 0.6583629893238434, + "f1_score": 0.7171717171717172, + "meteor": 0.38362341472479017, + "precision": 0.9861111111111112, + "pred_md": "## Step 4 - Printing a Database File\n\nYou can print a database file in the following procedures.\n\nExample Actions:\n\n- 1. Type 9 (Print ) in the Opt column beside PRODUCTLBL .\n- 2. Press the Enter key.\n\nThe Print Database File Member display appears:\n\nExample Action: Press the Enter key to use the predefined values.\n\nThe database file member is printed.\n\nNote: A spooled file is created in an output queue by the print operation, and it is printed on the printer after the print writer sends it to a printer.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide\n\n134", + "recall": 0.5634920634920635, + "true_md": "## Step 4 - Printing a Database File\n\n## Example Actions:\n\nYou can print a database file in the following procedures.\n\nThe Print Database File Member display appears:\n\n- 1. Type 9 (Print ) in the Opt column beside PRODUCTLBL$_{.}$\n\n- 2. Press the Enter key.\n\nExample Action: Press the Enter key to use the predefined values.\n\nThe database file member is printed.\n\n- Note: A spooled file is created in an output queue by the print operation, and it is printed on the printer after the print writer sends it to a printer.\n\n134 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\n## Print Database File Member\n\nFile.............: PFDFILE Library ..........: MYLIB PFD definition ........: PRODUCTLBL Type choices, press Enter. Database file ......... *PFD Name, *PFD, F4 for list Library ........... *LIBL Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB Member . . ........... *FIRST Name, *FIRST, F4 for list Include grid . ......... N Y=Yes, N=No Record selection . . . ..... Y Ending page . . . . . . .... *END 1-9999, *END Source Drawer ......... *PFD 1-255, *PFD, *E1 Output bin . . . . . . . .... *DEVD 1-65535, *DEVD Copies . . ........... *PFD 1-255, *PFD Output queue . ......... *JOB Name, *JOB Library ........... Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB More... F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7946150088145886, + "doc_id": "9fd75fc8ebfdce7c64b8c8d5d06914586b9e648f8063390a4d590aeebb352de7", + "edit_distance": 0.22658610271903323, + "f1_score": 0.8841201716738197, + "meteor": 0.9099102424376074, + "precision": 0.8442622950819673, + "pred_md": "The end of data is handled as a page break. The summary data for the page break is printed on the last page.\n\nTo define summary data in a text element or a box element in a page layout, you need to specify which field is summarized, and which summary data is printed on the Text data prompt by typing an ampersand (&), the field name, a left parenthesis '(', the strings for the summary data, a right parenthesis ')', and a period '.' without inserting any spaces as follows:\n\n```\nText data . . . . &SALES (*TOTAL).\n```\n\nThe strings for each summary data are:\n\nTable 33. Summary data strings\n\nSummary Data\n\nStrings\n\nFirst value\n\n*FIRST\n\nLast value\n\n*LAST\n\nTotal\n\n*TOTAL\n\nAverage\n\n*AVG\n\nMaximum value\n\n*MAX\n\nMinimum value\n\n*MIN\n\nRecord count\n\n*CNT\n\nYou can press the F4 key on the Text prompt of the Define Text Detail display or the Define Box Detail display to display the Select Field in Record Format display as with the Design Record Layout display.\n\nWhen you select a database file field on the Select field in Record Format display and press the Enter key, the Define Text Detail display (or the Define Box Detail display) appears with the selected field in the Text data prompt as follows:\n\n```\nText data . . . . . . . . . . . &SALES\n```\n\n(*FIRST).\n\n*FIRST is the default summary function. You can show the Define Summary Data display by pressing the F10 key, and change the summary function. You can also specify an edit code for the summary data on the display.\n\nChapter 10. Work with PFD Definitions\n\n181", + "recall": 0.9279279279279279, + "true_md": "The end of data is handled as a page break. The summary data for the page break is printed on the last page.\n\nTo define summary data in a text element or a box element in a page layout, you need to specify which field is summarized, and which summary data is printed on the Text data prompt by typing an ampersand (&), the field name, a left parenthesis ’(’, the strings for the summary data, a right parenthesis ’)’, and a period ’.’ without inserting any spaces as follows:\n\nText data....&SALES (*TOTAL).\n\nThe strings for each summary data are:\n\nYou can press the F4 key on the Text prompt of the Define Text Detail display or the Define Box Detail display to display the Select Field in Record Format display as with the Design Record Layout display.\n\nWhen you select a database file field on the Select field in Record Format display and press the Enter key, the Define Text Detail display (or the Define Box Detail display) appears with the selected field in the Text data prompt as follows:\n\nText data...........&SALES (*FIRST).\n\n*FIRST is the default summary function. You can show the Define Summary Data display by pressing the F10 key, and change the summary function. You can also specify an edit code for the summary data on the display.\n\n## Define Summary Data\n\nTable33.Summarydatastrings\n\nF3=Exit F5=Refresh F12=Cancel\n\nChapter 10. Work with PFD Definitions 181" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7195889025612088, + "doc_id": "3c81c8dda42694a4943bcbd8afd89b93d8fb07c542b18d5deaea92c5a436f48c", + "edit_distance": 0.7950819672131147, + "f1_score": 0.8852459016393441, + "meteor": 0.750343059664671, + "precision": 0.9, + "pred_md": "Basic English Language Skils\n\n## IN THIS E-BOOK, WE'LL BE HELPING YOU TO:\n\n- · Develop your basic English language skills.\n- · Improve your English grammar.\n\nApply your language and communication skills in a business contexT. ( www.oxbridgeacademy.co.za/find-a- course/business-administrationcourses/)\n\n'Grammar is a litmus test. If job hopefuls can't distinguish between 'to' and too', their applications go into the bin'\n\nKyle Wiens, CEO of iFixit\n\n'Grammar often seems to be a low priority in education. Are school undervaluing grammar, given that employers may rule out applications with sloppy writing?'\n\nThe New York Times\n\nDeveloped for Oxbridge Academy", + "recall": 0.8709677419354839, + "true_md": "Basic English Language Skills\n\nDeveloped for Oxbridge Academy\n\n“Grammar often seems to be a low priority in education. Are school undervaluing grammar, given that employers may rule out applications with sloppy writing?”\n\nThe New York Times\n\n“Grammar is a litmus test. If job hopefuls can’t distinguish between ‘to’ and too’, their applications go into the bin”\n\nKyle Wiens, CEO of iFixit\n\nApply your language and communication skills in a business contexT. ( www.oxbridgeacademy.co.za/find-a- course/business-administration- courses/) \n\n## IN THIS E-BOOK, WE’LL BE HELPING YOU TO:\n\n- • Develop your basic English language skills.\n\n- • Improve your English grammar." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9294938085725959, + "doc_id": "47e25753db704c519cbd0f0d8d367ad3f8f28a143a05171b64daa72d9e1e80fc", + "edit_distance": 0.8991596638655462, + "f1_score": 0.9693251533742332, + "meteor": 0.7969172052774691, + "precision": 0.9753086419753086, + "pred_md": "Basic English Language Skils\n\n## USING THE WRONG WORD CAN SOMETIMES HAVE AMUSING (AND EMBARRASSING) RESULTS.\n\nAs you can probably tell from the image above, using the wrong word can sometimes have amusing (and embarrassing) results. In some situations, however, the effect of using incorrect words may be more serious.\n\nIn academic or business writing, for example, the words that you choose will influence the reader's opinion of you.\n\nIncorrect word choice in an exam or assignment may cause you to lose marks, while using the wrong word in a business letter may create a bad first impression.\n\n(www.oxbridgeacademy.co.za/find-a-course/business-administration-courses/)", + "recall": 0.9634146341463414, + "true_md": "Basic English Language Skills\n\nIncorrect word choice in an exam or assignment may cause you to lose marks, while using the wrong word in a business letter may create a bad first impression. \n\n(www.oxbridgeacademy.co.za/find-a-course/business-administration-courses/)\n\nIn academic or business writing, for example, the words that you choose will influence the reader’s opinion of you.\n\nAs you can probably tell from the image above, using the wrong word can sometimes have amusing (and embarrassing) results. In some situations, however, the effect of using incorrect words may be more serious. \n\n## USING THE WRONG WORD CAN SOMETIMES HAVE AMUSING (AND EMBARRASSING) RESULTS." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.616592263321503, + "doc_id": "ae1e58031ba64b75bbfd3077bf621aab399ef2f34f0acd72543d49339f023320", + "edit_distance": 0.5340909090909091, + "f1_score": 0.8510638297872342, + "meteor": 0.8354418692857428, + "precision": 0.8163265306122449, + "pred_md": "452\n\n## The Define Box Detail display\n\n## The Change Box Detail display\n\nTable 101. Tasks related to box element\n\n## Bar Code Element\n\nNote: The following description assumes that you are on one of the following displays:\n\nThe Define Bar Code Detail display\n\nThe Change Bar Code Detail display\n\nNote: Some bar code types do not allow some of the following operations.\n\nTable 102. Tasks related to bar code element\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.8888888888888888, + "true_md": "The Define Box Detail display\n\nThe Change Box Detail display\n\nTable101.Tasksrelatedtoboxelement\n\nTable102.Tasksrelatedtobarcodeelement\n\n452 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\n- Note: The following description assumes that you are on one of the following displays:\n\n- Note: Some bar code types do not allow some of the following operations.\n\n## Bar Code Element\n\nThe Define Bar Code Detail display\n\nThe Change Bar Code Detail display" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4351348680415905, + "doc_id": "90d2f4977e3109aabd3a5e19118dd677ec8fcc040f2bd2732eb9e16caa6a2f2a", + "edit_distance": 0.6251604621309371, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.49641521664769384, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## SPECIFICATIONS\n\n## Model AY11230\n\n- 1. Interpupillary Adjustment: 55mm - 75mm\n- 2. Working Stage Diameter: 95mm\n- 3. Focus Knob Adjustment Range: 60mm\n- 4. Elevator Adjustment Range: 110mm\n- 5. Right Diopter Adjustment Range: +4 to -6 dopters\n- 6. Illumination: Input Voltage: 110V AC or 220V Output: Oblique illumination: 12V 10W Halogen Lamp\n\n## Model AY11234\n\n- 1. Interpupillary Adjustment: 55mm - 75mm\n- 2. Working Stage Diameter: 95mm\n- 3. Focus Knob Adjustment Range: >50mm\n- 4. Elevator Adjustment Range: 110mm\n- 5. Diopter Adjustment Range: +/- 5 diopters\n- 6. Illumination:\n\nInput Voltage: 110V AC or 220V Output: Oblique Illumination: 12V 10W Halogen Lamp Transmitted Illumination: 12V 10W Halogen Lamp\n\n## Optical Specifications - Model AY11230\n\n## Optical Specifications - Model AY11234\n\n11\n\n## PARTS LIST\n\n## Model AY11230\n\n## OPERATION\n\n## Model AY11230\n\n## Model AY11234\n\n- 1. Remove components from package. identify all parts before assembling.\n- 2. Tighten the knob on the stand to prevent the elevator from sliding down.\n- 3. Fix the binocular body on the stand with the tightening screw.\n- 4. Check the input voltage to ensure that it conforms to the microscopes requirement.\n\n## SELECTING THE ILLUMINATION\n\n- 1. Depending on microscope use, select oblique or transmitted illumination.\n- 2. The Brightness Adjustment knobs change the oblique or transmitted light independently. The transmitted illuminator fluorescent lamp cannot be adjusted.\n- 3. The angle of the oblique lamp can be adjusted to ensure optimum lighting of the sample.\n- 1. Remove components from package. identify all parts before assembling.\n- 2. Check the input voltage to ensure that it conforms to the microscopes requirement.\n\n## SELECTING THE ILLUMINATION\n\n- 1. Depending on microscope use, select oblique or transmitted illumination.\n- 2. The Brightness Adjustment Knobs change the oblique or transmitted light independently. The transmitted illuminator fluorescent lamp cannot be adjusted.\n- 3. The angle of the oblique lamp can be adjusted to ensure optimum lighting of the sample.\n\n## CHANGING THE INTERPUPILLARY DISTANCE\n\n- 1. The distance between the observer's pupils is the interpupillary distance.\n- 12 2. To adjust the interpupillary distance rotate the prism caps until both eyes coincide with the image in the eyepiece.\n\n## Model AY11234", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## SPECIFICATIONS\n\n## PARTS LIST\n\n## Optical Specifications - Model AY11230\n\n## Optical Specifications - Model AY11234\n\n## OPERATION\n\n## Model AY11230\n\n## Model AY11234\n\n## CHANGING THE INTERPUPILLARY DISTANCE 1. The distance between the observer's\n\n## SELECTING THE ILLUMINATION\n\n## SELECTING THE ILLUMINATION\n\n## Model AY11234\n\n## Model AY11230\n\n## Model AY11230 1. Interpupillary Adjustment: 55mm - 75mm\n\n## Model AY11234 1. Interpupillary Adjustment: 55mm - 75mm\n\n- Model AY11230 1. Interpupillary Adjustment: 55mm - 75mm 2. Working Stage Diameter: 95mm\n\n- 1. Interpupillary Adjustment: 55mm - 75mm 2. Working Stage Diameter: 95mm 3. Focus Knob Adjustment Range: 60mm\n\n- 2. Working Stage Diameter: 95mm 3. Focus Knob Adjustment Range: 60mm 4. Elevator Adjustment Range: 110mm\n\n- 3. Focus Knob Adjustment Range: 60mm 4. Elevator Adjustment Range: 110mm 5. Right Diopter Adjustment Range: +4 to -6 dopters\n\n- 4. Elevator Adjustment Range: 110mm 5. Right Diopter Adjustment Range: +4 to -6 dopters 6. Illumination:\n\n- 5. Right Diopter Adjustment Range: +4 to -6 dopters 6. Illumination: Input Voltage: 110V AC or 220V\n\n- Model AY11234 1. Interpupillary Adjustment: 55mm - 75mm 2. Working Stage Diameter: 95mm\n\n- 1. Interpupillary Adjustment: 55mm - 75mm 2. Working Stage Diameter: 95mm 3. Focus Knob Adjustment Range: >50mm\n\n- 2. Working Stage Diameter: 95mm 3. Focus Knob Adjustment Range: >50mm 4. Elevator Adjustment Range: 110mm\n\n- 3. Focus Knob Adjustment Range: >50mm 4. Elevator Adjustment Range: 110mm 5. Diopter Adjustment Range: +/- 5 diopters\n\n- 4. Elevator Adjustment Range: 110mm 5. Diopter Adjustment Range: +/- 5 diopters 6. Illumination:\n\n- 5. Diopter Adjustment Range: +/- 5 diopters 6. Illumination: Input Voltage: 110V AC or 220V\n\nIllumination: Input Voltage: 110V AC or 220V Output: Oblique illumination: 12V 10W Halogen Lamp\n\nIllumination: Input Voltage: 110V AC or 220V Output: Oblique Illumination: 12V 10W Halogen Lamp Transmitted Illumination: 12V 10W Halogen Lamp\n\n- 1. Remove components from package. identify all parts before assembling. 2. Tighten the knob on the stand to\n\n- identify all parts before assembling. 2. Tighten the knob on the stand to prevent the elevator from sliding down. 3. Fix the binocular body on the stand\n\n- down. 3. Fix the binocular body on the stand with the tightening screw. 4. Check the input voltage to ensure that\n\n- with the tightening screw. 4. Check the input voltage to ensure that it conforms to the microscopes requirement.\n\n- 1. Depending on microscope use, select oblique or transmitted illumination. 2. The Brightness Adjustment knobs\n\n- oblique or transmitted illumination. 2. The Brightness Adjustment knobs change the oblique or transmitted light independently. The transmitted illuminator fluorescent lamp cannot be adjusted. 3. The angle of the oblique lamp can be\n\n- be adjusted. 3. The angle of the oblique lamp can be adjusted to ensure optimum lighting of the sample.\n\n- DISTANCE 1. The distance between the observer's pupils is the interpupillary distance. 2. To adjust the interpupillary distance\n\n- 12 pupils is the interpupillary distance. 2. To adjust the interpupillary distance rotate the prism caps until both eyes coincide with the image in the eyepiece. \n\n12\n\n- adjusted. 3. The angle of the oblique lamp can be adjusted to ensure optimum lighting of the sample.\n\n- oblique or transmitted illumination. 2. The Brightness Adjustment Knobs change the oblique or transmitted light independently. The transmitted illuminator fluorescent lamp cannot be adjusted. 3. The angle of the oblique lamp can be\n\n- 1. Depending on microscope use, select oblique or transmitted illumination. 2. The Brightness Adjustment Knobs\n\n- identify all parts before assembling. 2. Check the input voltage to ensure that it conforms to the microscopes requirement.\n\n- 1. Remove components from package. identify all parts before assembling. 2. Check the input voltage to ensure that\n\n11" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.733590758249106, + "doc_id": "9664fdd8238867bafbae5e675b56e9d017dfe248231c06e4896dec656ec7e6d0", + "edit_distance": 0.5239234449760766, + "f1_score": 0.8368794326241136, + "meteor": 0.7783898940628431, + "precision": 0.7239263803680982, + "pred_md": "Type 1 in the Opt column beside the reserved variable name to select and press the Enter key. The Define Text Detail (or the Define Box Detail) display appears with the selected reserved variable name enclosed with an ampersand (&) and a period (.).\n\nThe reserved variable name can be concatenated with variable data (field names) or fixed data as follows:\n\nPage number: &*PAGNBR.\n\n&*DATE.-&*TIME.\n\n&COMPANY. is in the record number &*RCDNBR..\n\nNote: Reserved variable data is printed in the following format:\n\n- v The job date is printed with the date format and the date separator defined on the job definition attribute.\n- v The job time is printed with the time separator defined on the job definition attribute.\n- v The page number is printed as eight-digit numeric data. The leading zeros are suppressed with blanks.\n- v The record number is printed as eight-digit numeric data. The leading zeros are suppressed with blanks.\n\nFixed Data: In addition to the data from a database file, data called fixed data can be defined when the PFD definition is created or changed.\n\nAny combination of the following elements can be printed as fixed data in a record layout:\n\nTable 31. Fixed Data elements\n\nText\n\nText with various fonts, underlined or not, color, and so on. With various length, width, dashed, dotted, shaded, and so on. For the supported bar code types, see 'Bar Code' on page 227. Page segments converted either from PC documents or physical file members.\n\nLines and Boxes\n\nBar Codes\n\nImages\n\nGraphics\n\nThe graphics data (GDF format) that reside in a physical file member or a PC document in a folder.\n\nTo create a PFD definition containing fixed data, define the contents of these elements. They are not affected by the contents of the to be printed. Some examples of using these elements are:\n\nText:\n\nTitle\n\nLines and Boxes:\n\nBox\n\nImages:\n\nLogo\n\nThe following is a sample of variable data and fixed data in a record layout and a page layout.\n\nChapter 10. Work with PFD Definitions\n\n165", + "recall": 0.9915966386554622, + "true_md": "Type 1 in the Opt column beside the reserved variable name to select and press the Enter key. The Define Text Detail (or the Define Box Detail) display appears with the selected reserved variable name enclosed with an ampersand (&) and a period (.).\n\nThe reserved variable name can be concatenated with variable data (field names) or fixed data as follows:\n\nPage number: &*PAGNBR. &*DATE.-&*TIME. &COMPANY. is in the record number &*RCDNBR..\n\nTo create a PFD definition containing fixed data, define the contents of these elements. They are not affected by the contents of the to be printed. Some examples of using these elements are:\n\nThe following is a sample of variable data and fixed data in a record layout and a page layout.\n\nNote: Reserved variable data is printed in the following format:\n\n- v The job date is printed with the date format and the date separator defined on the job definition attribute.\n\n- v The job time is printed with the time separator defined on the job definition attribute.\n\n- v The page number is printed as eight-digit numeric data. The leading zeros are suppressed with blanks.\n\n- v The record number is printed as eight-digit numeric data. The leading zeros are suppressed with blanks.\n\nFixed Data: In addition to the data from a database file, data called fixed data can be defined when the PFD definition is created or changed.\n\nAny combination of the following elements can be printed as fixed data in a record layout:\n\nTable31.FixedDataelements\n\nChapter 10. Work with PFD Definitions 165" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9550079372004823, + "doc_id": "3360d6ce5f2e49c4c98be322190f8beb9ae52deff5c2ef9d2ea3b99cbbc360b8", + "edit_distance": 0.0603448275862069, + "f1_score": 0.9759450171821307, + "meteor": 0.9831272013108887, + "precision": 0.9793103448275862, + "pred_md": "Basic English Language Skils\n\n## Did you enjoy reading this book?\n\nJoin our online social community and share your opinion:\n\nwww.facebook.com/oxbridgeacademysa twitter.com/oxbridgeEdu www.linkedin.com/company/oxbridge-academy\n\nOxbridge Academy is an established distance learning college offer -ing skills courses, national qualifications, and internationally recognised courses to students in South Africa and abroad.\n\nWith our head office in Stellenbosch in the Western Cape, we cater to our students' needs by recruiting industry-expert tutors to provide academic assistance via telephone and e-mail, as well as by designing our study material in such a way that it is clear, simple, and easy for our students to understand.\n\nWith us, studying from home is easy, affordable, and convenient.\n\n## CONTACT NUMBERS:\n\nTel: 021 1100 200 Tel:+2721 883 2454 (international) Fax: 086 111 2121\n\nFax: +2721 883 2378 (international)\n\nWhatsapp: 0605671585 Email: info@oxbridgeacademy.co.za\n\nPostal Address:\n\nPO Box 12723, Die Boord, Stellenbosch, 7613\n\nWe are registered with the Department of Higher Education and Training as a Private College in terms of Section 31(6)(a) of the Continuing Education and Training Act, 2006 (Act No. 16 of 2006). Registration No. 2009/FE07/070.\n\nDeveloped for Oxbridge Academy", + "recall": 0.9726027397260274, + "true_md": "Basic English Language Skills\n\n## CONTACT NUMBERS:\n\n## Did you enjoy reading this book?\n\nJoin our online social community and share your opinion:\n\nwww.facebook.com/oxbridgeacademysa twitter.com/oxbridgeEdu www.linkedin.com/company/oxbridge-academy\n\nOxbridge Academy is an established distance learning college offer - ing skills courses, national qualifications, and internationally recognised courses to students in South Africa and abroad. \n\nWith our head office in Stellenbosch in the Western Cape, we cater to our students’ needs by recruiting industry-expert tutors to provide academic assistance via telephone and e-mail, as well as by designing our study material in such a way that it is clear, simple, and easy for our students to understand. \n\nWith us, studying from home is easy, affordable, and convenient.\n\nTel: 021 1100 200 Tel:+2721 883 2454 (international) Fax: 086 111 2121 Fax: +2721 883 2378 (international)\n\nWhatsapp: 0605671585 Email: info@oxbridgeacademy.co.za\n\nPostal Address: PO Box 12723, Die Boord, Stellenbosch, 7613\n\nWe are registered with the Department of Higher Education and Training as a Private College in terms of Section 31(6)(a) of the Continuing Education and Training Act, 2006 (Act No. 16 of 2006). Registration No. 2009/FE07/070.\n\nDeveloped for Oxbridge Academy" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.2988565156407745, + "doc_id": "242a0502f713c57dbeb29d9cd3d4b83f28a6899a1d4baffc45583189cb4331ff", + "edit_distance": 0.6666666666666666, + "f1_score": 0.6666666666666666, + "meteor": 0.7687031761105836, + "precision": 0.5294117647058824, + "pred_md": "Figure 26. Example of Rotating the Image Block\n\nFigure 26. Example of Rotating the Image Block\n\nChapter 18. Convert to Page Segment Function\n\n339", + "recall": 0.9, + "true_md": "Figure26.ExampleofRotatingtheImageBlock\n\nChapter 18. Convert to Page Segment Function 339" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8903305284183549, + "doc_id": "61077b0c8ddd32ce86e33cf6c1b716794dc210db4f799c3dd86616106c949355", + "edit_distance": 0.07272727272727272, + "f1_score": 0.9134328358208954, + "meteor": 0.93062241764767, + "precision": 0.9161676646706587, + "pred_md": "## Chapter 1. What are the IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries?\n\nThe IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries (AFP/U), Version 4 Release 2, is a licensed program consisting of three integrated utilities that provide support for Advanced Function Printing (AFP) applications on iSeries. These utilities enable you to create and manage electronic forms (overlays), to create and manage image resources, and to create AFP applications from server database files. The three AFP Utilities are:\n\nOverlay Utility: Enables you to create electronic forms directly on the server for use in iSeries AFP applications. The Overlay Utility works with any iSeries terminal, providing an interactive design interface. Overlay Utility functions include:\n\n- v Create AFP electronic forms from any iSeries terminal\n- v Place text, lines, boxes, shading, bar codes, graphics, and page segments at any location on the overlay page\n- v Present text in a wide variety of fonts using either downloadable fonts (iSeries-resident) or printer-resident fonts\n- v Present text in either single byte character sets (SBCS) or double byte character sets (DBCS)\n- v Present text in four orientations (across, down, back, and up) and three formats (horizontal, vertical, and vertical right to left)\n- v Define horizontal and vertical lines, with control of line type (solid, dashed, or dotted) and line thickness\n- v Define boxes, with control over box type (solid, dashed, or dotted) and shading\n- v Define any of 14 standard bar code symbologies with control over sizing, human-readable information, and orientation. Supported bar codes are:\n- -3-of-9 code, MHI/AIM US-3\n- -Interleave 2-of-5\n- -MSI Plessey\n- -Industrial 2-of-5\n- -Codabar\n- -UPC-A\n- -UPC-E\n- -EAN-8\n- -EAN-13\n- -Matrix 2-of-5\n- -POSTNET\n- -Code128\n- -Japan Postal\n- -Royal Mail\n- v Position overlay, page segment, and graphic elements by row/column or direct page offset in inches or centimeters\n\n3", + "recall": 0.9107142857142857, + "true_md": "## Chapter 1. What are the IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries?\n\nThe IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries (AFP/U), Version 4 Release 2, is a licensed program consisting of three integrated utilities that provide support for Advanced Function Printing (AFP) applications on iSeries. These utilities enable you to create and manage electronic forms (overlays), to create and manage image resources, and to create AFP applications from server database files. The three AFP Utilities are:\n\nOverlay Utility: Enables you to create electronic forms directly on the server for use in iSeries AFP applications. The Overlay Utility works with any iSeries terminal, providing an interactive design interface. Overlay Utility functions include:\n\n- v Create AFP electronic forms from any iSeries terminal\n\n- v Place text, lines, boxes, shading, bar codes, graphics, and page segments at any location on the overlay page\n\n- v Present text in a wide variety of fonts using either downloadable fonts (iSeries-resident) or printer-resident fonts\n\n- v Present text in either single byte character sets (SBCS) or double byte character sets (DBCS)\n\n- v Present text in four orientations (across, down, back, and up) and three formats (horizontal, vertical, and vertical right to left)\n\n- v Define horizontal and vertical lines, with control of line type (solid, dashed, or dotted) and line thickness\n\n- v Define boxes, with control over box type (solid, dashed, or dotted) and shading\n\n- v Define any of 14 standard bar code symbologies with control over sizing, human-readable information, and orientation. Supported bar codes are:\n\n- – 3-of-9 code, MHI/AIM US-3\n\n- – Interleave 2-of-5\n\n- – MSI Plessey\n\n- – Industrial 2-of-5\n\n- – Codabar\n\n- – UPC-A\n\n- – UPC-E\n\n- – EAN-8\n\n- – EAN-13\n\n- – Matrix 2-of-5\n\n- – POSTNET\n\n- – Code128\n\n- – Japan Postal\n\n- – Royal Mail\n\n- v Position overlay, page segment, and graphic elements by row/column or direct page offset in inches or centimeters\n\n3" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7125022186234304, + "doc_id": "2a438f8678ee8466f981c94b296224a9de2d6840df9e400a6c4e7f7f1a85923b", + "edit_distance": 0.3157894736842105, + "f1_score": 0.875, + "meteor": 0.863152869422462, + "precision": 0.9333333333333333, + "pred_md": "## The Print Overlay display appears:\n\nThe print overlay function allows you to print an overlay on an IPDS printer.\n\nFrom this display, you can specify the name of an output queue, the number of copies, and print fidelity.\n\nThe following table describes the Print Overlay display.\n\nTable 73. Print Overlay display fields\n\nChapter 19. Work with Overlays Function\n\n345", + "recall": 0.8235294117647058, + "true_md": "The Print Overlay display appears:\n\nThe print overlay function allows you to print an overlay on an IPDS printer.\n\nFrom this display, you can specify the name of an output queue, the number of copies, and print fidelity.\n\nThe following table describes the Print Overlay display.\n\nChapter 19. Work with Overlays Function 345\n\nTable73.PrintOverlaydisplayfields\n\nBottom\n\nF3=Exit F5=Refresh F12=Cancel\n\nType choices, press Enter.\n\n## Print Overlay" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7451089456349699, + "doc_id": "b6ec098288ca75dd57a937ebf7f566f02f20d32aae4fa2689d7b586658f24bbc", + "edit_distance": 0.3211920529801324, + "f1_score": 0.9741697416974171, + "meteor": 0.7177688783846873, + "precision": 0.9777777777777777, + "pred_md": "Basic English Language Skills\n\nIf you have any questions about your course work, you are always welcome to approach your tutors for help. Just remember that your tutors cannot guess what your needs are: you will have to make contact with your tutors and communicate your questions clearly if you want to get the assistance that you need.\n\nWhen it comes to contacting your tutors, your best option will usually be to send an e-mail.\n\nHere are some important tips to keep in mind when requesting help from a tutor via e-mail:\n\nHere are some important tips to keep in mind when requesting help from a tutor via e-mail:\n\n## Use a relevant and descriptive subject line.\n\nThis way, your tutor will immediately know what your e-mail is about, and he or she will be more likely to open it. A good subject line might read as follows: 'Enquiry regarding Assignment 1 for Safety Management 101'\n\n## Be polite, and use an appropriate form of address.\n\nAlways start your e-mail with an appropriate form of address, such as 'Hello Mr/Ms …' and sign it off with your full name and student number. This will help to give your message a friendly, yet professional tone.\n\n## Be clear and concise.\n\nMake sure that your tutor will be able to understand what it is that you are asking.\n\nDeveloped for Oxbridge Academy", + "recall": 0.9705882352941176, + "true_md": "Basic English Language Skills\n\nIf you have any questions about your course work, you are always welcome to approach your tutors for help. Just remember that your tutors cannot guess what your needs are: you will have to make contact with your tutors and communicate your questions clearly if you want to get the assistance that you need.\n\nWhen it comes to contacting your tutors, your best option will usually be to send an e-mail.\n\nHere are some important tips to keep in mind when requesting help from a tutor via e-mail:\n\nUse a relevant and descriptive subject line. This way, your tutor will immediately know what your e-mail is about, and he or she will be more likely to open it. A good subject line might read as follows: “Enquiry regarding Assignment 1 for Safety Management 101”\n\nBe polite, and use an appropriate form of address. Always start your e-mail with an appropriate form of address, such as “Hello Mr/Ms …” and sign it off with your full name and student number. This will help to give your message a friendly, yet professional tone.\n\nBe clear and concise. Make sure that your tutor will be able to understand what it is that you are asking.\n\nDeveloped for Oxbridge Academy\n\n## Be polite, and use an appropriate form of address. Always start your e-mail with an appropriate form of address,\n\n## Be clear and concise. Make sure that your tutor will be able to understand what it is that\n\n## Use a relevant and descriptive subject line. This way, your tutor will immediately know what your e-mail is" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7144091457627971, + "doc_id": "ab734a1f7d5291241023cd5bc923cd3dd7d373109f62e5849c7f47793b1c51dc", + "edit_distance": 0.3448275862068966, + "f1_score": 0.8617886178861788, + "meteor": 0.781278655349027, + "precision": 0.9137931034482759, + "pred_md": "## Confirm Delete of Page Layout Elements\n\nThe Confirm Delete of Page Layout Elements display shows the list elements in the page layout to be deleted due to change of the PFD specifications. The Reason column shows why the element is to be deleted.\n\nYou can delete these elements by pressing Enter. If you don't want to delete these elements, press F12 to cancel. Then, the Define PFD Specifications display appears.\n\nTable 25. Confirm Delete of Page Layout Elements display fields\n\nChapter 10. Work with PFD Definitions\n\n157", + "recall": 0.8153846153846154, + "true_md": "Confirm Delete of Page Layout Elements\n\n## Confirm Delete of Page Layout Elements\n\nPress the Enter key to confirm your choices. Press F12 to return to change your choices.\n\nBottom\n\nF12=Cancel\n\nThe Confirm Delete of Page Layout Elements display shows the list elements in the page layout to be deleted due to change of the PFD specifications. The Reason column shows why the element is to be deleted.\n\nYou can delete these elements by pressing Enter. If you don’t want to delete these elements, press F12 to cancel. Then, the Define PFD Specifications display appears.\n\nTable25.ConfirmDeleteofPageLayoutElementsdisplayfields\n\nChapter 10. Work with PFD Definitions 157" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.004357631782256143, + "doc_id": "5a4a1acf325b64c92642a369e5008eb56bea2fd3f6ebcb9ef10e5ac7ec5ddcec", + "edit_distance": 0.7739130434782608, + "f1_score": 0.46, + "meteor": 0.2334902270767462, + "precision": 0.9583333333333334, + "pred_md": "Direction : 1\n\nRepetition-Across: 3\n\nRepetition-Down :\n\n2\n\nDistance-Across : 25\n\nDistance-Down : 8\n\n## The following display appears:\n\nChapter 10. Work with PFD Definitions\n\n175", + "recall": 0.3026315789473684, + "true_md": "Direction : 1 Repetition-Across: 3 Repetition-Down : 2 Distance-Across : 25 Distance-Down : 8\n\nThe following display appears:\n\nDesign Page Layout Columns: 1- 74 Control . . PFD definition.....PRODUCTLBL *...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7.... 001 002 003 004 *R001-001 *R001-002 *R001-003 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 *R001-004 *R001-005 *R001-006 013 014 015 016 017 More... F3=Exit F6=Text F9=Line F10=Box F11=Bar code F21=Element edit F22=Block edit F24=More keys\n\nChapter 10. Work with PFD Definitions 175" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.44429347606748193, + "doc_id": "ef35267c64ebbbaa3345d1ba0120785ad0a2cfcdce9a4b53b87b9581d0b8c8b3", + "edit_distance": 0.34798534798534797, + "f1_score": 0.7800829875518672, + "meteor": 0.696424559049954, + "precision": 0.9894736842105263, + "pred_md": "242\n\nStep 7. Complete the definition by pressing the Enter key.\n\nFinally, the defined element appears on the image area as shown in the following display.\n\nRepeat the above steps to define the rest of the elements.\n\nStep 8. After you define all the elements, press the F3 key to save the overlay, the record layout, or the page layout.\n\n## Text\n\nTo create a text element, press the F6 (Text) key and the key entry area appears in the lower position of the display as follows. This display also appears by pressing the F14 key to change a text element. When you press Enter, the Overlay Utility and the Print Format Utility check the validity of the entered parameters. If errors do not exist, the operation is completed and the key entry area disappears from the display.\n\nBy pressing the F4 (Detail) key, you can define the detailed characteristics of the text element.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.6438356164383562, + "true_md": "- Step 7. Complete the definition by pressing the Enter key.\n\nFinally, the defined element appears on the image area as shown in the following display.\n\nRepeat the above steps to define the rest of the elements.\n\n- Step 8. After you define all the elements, press the F3 key to save the overlay, the record layout, or the page layout.\n\nTo create a text element, press the F6 (Text) key and the key entry area appears in the lower position of the display as follows. This display also appears by pressing the F14 key to change a text element. When you press Enter, the Overlay Utility and the Print Format Utility check the validity of the entered parameters. If errors do not exist, the operation is completed and the key entry area disappears from the display.\n\nBy pressing the F4 (Detail) key, you can define the detailed characteristics of the text element.\n\n## Text\n\nDesign Overlay Columns: 1- 74 Control . . Source overlay . . . . . STATIONERY *...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7.... 001 002 *T001 s an example. 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 More... F3=Exit F6=Text F9=Line F10=Box F11=Bar code F21=Element edit F22=Block edit F24=More keys\n\n242 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8231567272813388, + "doc_id": "b5f62fceb4ffcd7ccb1e344c7863511df643dd15a00513f29e8a48152a7f4537", + "edit_distance": 0.757679180887372, + "f1_score": 0.9722222222222221, + "meteor": 0.8182412954143164, + "precision": 0.9722222222222222, + "pred_md": "390\n\nThe possible values are:\n\n*PSGTXT\n\nSpecifies the same description of the page segment specified in the PAGSEG parameter.\n\n'description'\n\nSpecify the description of the member.\n\n## Replace (REPLACE)\n\nSpecifies whether or not the physical file member replaces the existing physical file member if a physical file member of the same name already exists in the library.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\n*NO\n\nA new physical file member is not created if an old physical file member of the same name already exists in the library.\n\n*YES\n\nA new physical file member is created and the old physical file member is replaced by it.\n\n## Create file (CRTFILE)\n\nSpecifies whether or not the file is created if the file does not exist.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\n*NO\n\nDo not create the file.\n\n*YES\n\nCreate the file.\n\n## Text 'description' (FILETEXT)\n\nSpecifies text that briefly describes the file and its function. This prompt is valid only when CRTFILE parameter is *YES. The description should be specified with no more than 50 characters of text and enclosed in apostrophes.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\n*BLANK\n\nNo text is specified.\n\n'description'\n\nSpecify the description of the file.\n\nNote:\n\nYou must check the version and the supported structured fields of the target system's PSF.\n\nA page segment which can be used on the iSeries cannot necessarily be used on the target system.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.9722222222222222, + "true_md": "The possible values are:\n\nSpecifies the same description of the page segment specified in the PAGSEG parameter.\n\nSpecify the description of the member.\n\nSpecifies whether or not the physical file member replaces the existing physical file member if a physical file member of the same name already exists in the library.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\nSpecifies whether or not the file is created if the file does not exist.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\nSpecifies text that briefly describes the file and its function. This prompt is valid only when CRTFILE parameter is *YES. The description should be specified with no more than 50 characters of text and enclosed in apostrophes.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\nSpecify the description of the file.\n\nNo text is specified.\n\nA page segment which can be used on the iSeries cannot necessarily be used on the target system.\n\n390 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\n- Note: You must check the version and the supported structured fields of the target system’s PSF.\n\n- *YES A new physical file member is created and the old physical file member is replaced by it.\n\n- *NO A new physical file member is not created if an old physical file member of the same name already exists in the library.\n\n- *NO Do not create the file.\n\n- *YES Create the file.\n\n## ’description’\n\n## *BLANK\n\n## Text ’description’ (FILETEXT)\n\n## Create file (CRTFILE)\n\n## Replace (REPLACE)\n\n## *PSGTXT\n\n## ’description’" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "a5bd9d1b546939ff962e7640840b09be07c8bd7b78ac5445b71dfb3eb0b1ee55", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9990234375, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Chapter 5. Work with Source Overlays\n\n67", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Chapter 5. Work with Source Overlays 67" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0014918501773295196, + "doc_id": "4eae1f92df6bbe3e6a5d3a9cb4947cf709d8f9e44d4b5337f192638f07b2a4c1", + "edit_distance": 0.9980220401243289, + "f1_score": 0.11881188118811882, + "meteor": 0.0176205962673798, + "precision": 0.06315789473684211, + "pred_md": "## Part 6. References\n\n| Chapter 21. AFP Utilities for iSeries Commands STRAFPU (Start AFP Utilities for iSeries) Command | | | | | | | | | | . | . . | . . . | . . | | . . . . | . . . | . . . . . | . . . | . . | . . 363 | . | . . | . . . . | . . . . . . . | | | | | | | | . |\n|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|-------------|---------|-------|-----|-------|-----|-------|-----|-------|---------------------|-------------|-------------|---------|-------|-----------|-----------------------------------------|-------------------------------|-----------------------------|-------------------------------------|-------------------------|---------------------|-------|-----------|-----------------------------|---------|-----|-----|---------------|-----|-----|-------------|---------------|\n| STROVLU (Start Overlay Utility) Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 STRPFU (Start Print Format Utility) Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 PRTPFDDTA (Print PFD Data) Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 CVTPCDPAGS (Convert PC Document to Page Segment) Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 CVTPFMPAGS (Convert Physical File Member to Page Segment) Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 CVTOVLPFM (Convert Overlay to Physical File Member) Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 CVTPAGSPFM (Convert Page Segment to Physical File Member) Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 . . . . . . | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| | | | . | . | . | . | . | | . | . | | | . | . | . | . . | . . | | . . | . 391 | | | . | . | | | | | | | | |\n| Overlay Utility . | . . | . | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | . . | . . | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| Chapter 22. Limitations and Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| | | . | | | | | | | . | . | . | | | . | | . | | | | . | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| Limitations | . . . | . | . | | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . . | . . . | . . | . . . | . . . | . . | . . 391 | | | | . . | | | | . | . | | | |\n| Minimum and Maximum Limitations | | | | | | | | | . | . . . | . | . | . . | . | . . . | . . | . . . | . . | . . | 391 | . | | | . . | | | | . | | | | |\n| Dashed and Dotted Lines | | . | . | . | . | . . | . . | . . | . . | . . . | . | . . | . | . . . | . . . . . | . . . . . . | . . . . | . . . . . | . . . . . | . 391 . 391 | . . | | | . . | | | | . . | | . . | | |\n| Line Width and Overlay Size Element Position Restrictions . | . . | . | . . . | . | | . . | . . | . . | . | . . . . | . . | . . | . . . | . . . | . . | . . | . . . . . . | | . . | . 391 . 392 | | | . . | . . . . | | | | | . . | . | | |\n| Source Overlay File | | | . | | . | . | | . | . . | . . | . . | . | . . . | | . . . . | . | . . . | . | . | . 392 | . . | . . | . | . . | | | | | . | | | |\n| Font . . . Page Segment | . | . | . . | . | | . | . . | . | . | . . . | . | . . | . | | . | . . . . | . . | . . | . . | . 392 . . | . . . . . . . . . . | . . . | | . . | | | | | . | | | |\n| | . . | . . | . . | . | . | . . | . . | . | . | . . | . | . | . . | . | . | . . . | . . | . | . | . . 392 | . | | | . . | | | | | | | | |\n| Line . | . | . | . | | . | | | . | . | . . | . | . | . . | . | . | . . | . | | . . | 393 . | | | | . . | | | | | | | | |\n| Box. . . Text in Box | . . . | . . | . . . | . . | . . | . . | . . | . . | . . | . . . | . | . | . . | . . . | . . . | . . | . . | . | . . | . 393 . 393 | | . | . | . . . . . . . | | | | | | . | | |\n| | | | . | . | | . | | . | . | . . | . . | . . | . . | . | . | . . . | . | . . | . | . . | . . | . . . | | . . | | | | | | | | |\n| Shading in Box . | . | . | | . | | . | . . | . | . | . | | . | . | . . | | | | . . . . | . . . | . . | . . | | | . . | | | | | | | | |\n| Graphics (GDF) Size Text Font in Graphics (GDF) Overlay object authority. | | | . | . | . | . . | . | . . | . . | . . | . . | . . | . . . | . . | . . . | . . | . . . . . . . | . . . . . . . . . . . . . . | . 393 . 393 . 394 . 394 . 394 | | | | | . . | | | | . . | | | | |\n| Printer Dependencies. | . | | | . | . . | . | . . | . | . | . | . . | . . | | . . | . . | | . . . . . . . . | . . | | . . . . | . . . . . . . | | | | | | | . | | | | |\n| Print Format Utility Limitations . . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . . | . . | . . . . . . . . . . | | . . . | . . | . . | . . . | . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . | . . . . | . . . . . . . . | . . . . 394 . . 394 . . 394 . . 394 | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| | | . | . | . | . | . | . | | | . . . . | . . . . | | | | . . | . . | . . . . . . . . . | . . . . . . | . . . . . . . . . . . . | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | . | | | . . | . . . . | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| Minimum and Maximum Limitations Dashed and Dotted Lines | | | | | . | . | . | . | . . | . | . | | . . . | . . . | . . | . . . . . . | | . . | . . . . | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| Line Width and Page Size Element Position | . | | . | . | . . | . . | . . | | . . | . . . . | . . | | . . | . . | . | . . . | . . . | . . | | 395 395 | . . . . . | | | . . . . | | | | | | | | |\n| Restrictions . | . . . | | | | . | . | | . . | . | . . | . | . | . . . | . | . . . . . | | | . . . . . . | . . | . . . . . 395 . . . . | | | | . | | | | | | | | |\n| PFD Definition File | . . . | . | . . | . . | . | . | . . . | . | . | . . . . . | | . | . . | . | . | | . . | | . | 395 . . | . . | | | . | | | | | | | | |\n| Font . | | | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | | | . | . | . | . . . | . . | . . | | | 395 | . . . | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| Page Segment | . . . | . | . | . | | . | . | | . | . . . | . | . | . | . | . . | . | . . | | . . | 396 . | . . | . | . . . . | . . . . . . . . . . | | | | | | | | |\n| Line | . . . . . . | . | . | | . | . | | . | . . | . . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . . . | . . . . | | 396 | | | . . . | | | | | | | | | |\n| Box. | . | . . | . . | . | . | . | | | . | . . . . | . | . | . | . | . | . . | . | . | | . 396 | . | | . . | . . . . . . . | | | | | | | | |\n| | | . | | . | . | . | . . | . . | . | . | . | . | . . | . | . | . . | . . | . . | . . | 396 . | | . . | . . | . | | | | | | | | |\n| Text in Box | . | . . | . | . | | . | . | . | . | . . | . | . | . | | . | . | . . . | . | . | . 397 397 | | . | . . . . | . . . . . . . . . . . . . | | | | | | | | |\n| Shading in Box . Graphics (GDF) Size Text Font in Graphics (GDF) | | . | . | . | | . . | . . | . . | . | . | . . . . . | . . . . . . | . . . | . . . | . . | . . . . | . . . . | . . . | . . | . . . . 397 . . . . . . | . . . | | . . . | . | | | | | | | | |\n| | | . | | . | | . | . | | . | . | | . | | | . | . | . . . | | | 397 . | . . | | | . | . . . . | | | | | | | |\n| Resource Management Utility . Limitations . . | . . | . | . | . | | . | | . | . . | . . | . . | . . . | . . . . | | . . . | . . . . | . | . . | . . . | 397 397 | . . . | . | | . . . . . . . . . . . . . . | . | . . | . . | . . . . . . . | | . | . . . . . . | . . . . . . . |\n| Restrictions IMDS (IOCA) Data Stream . Print Operation. Creating Page Segment | . . . | . . . . | . . . | | . . . | . | . . | . | . . . | . . . . . . . . | . . . . . . | . . . . . . | . . . | . . | . . . . | . . . . . . . | . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . | | . . | 397 397 397 . | | | | . . . . | | | | | . | | | |\n\nChapter 23. Problem Analysis\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n399\n\n361\n\n.\n\n.\n\n363\n\n.\n\n.\n\n391", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## Part 6. References\n\n361" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9362170439704629, + "doc_id": "9e7e26469208d6c96eb4adc8f6112e7361387a11bec2e4243a36cdb22e63ef0f", + "edit_distance": 0.10682492581602374, + "f1_score": 0.9387755102040818, + "meteor": 0.970802386688072, + "precision": 0.92, + "pred_md": "Table 105. Tasks related to record layout element (continued)\n\n## Tasks Related to Database File Selection\n\nNote: The following description assumes that you are on the Specify Database File display.\n\n- 1. Type the database file name in the Database file prompt, or show the list of the database file names by pressing the F4 key and select one.\n- 2. Type the library name in the Library prompt.\n- 3. Type the record format name in the Record format prompt, or show the list of the record format names by pressing the F4 key and select one.\n- 4. Press Enter.\n\n## Tasks Related to Record Selection\n\nNote: The following description assumes that you are on the Specify Record Selection display.\n\n- 1. Type the field name in the Field F4 for list column, or show the list of the field names by pressing the F4 key and select one.\n- 2. Type one of the following test names in the Test column.\n- v EQ\n- v NE\n- v LE\n- v GE\n- v LT\n- v GT\n- v RANGE\n- 3. Type the value in the Value (Field, number, or 'character') column or show the list\n\nof the field names by pressing the F4 key and select one. If you specify more than one conditions, type AND or OR in the AND/OR column, the field name in the Field column, the test name in the Test column, and the value in the Value column.\n\n- 4. Press Enter.\n\n## Tasks Related to Overlay Specifications and PFD Specifications\n\nNote: The following description assumes that you are on one of the following displays:\n\nThe Define Overlay Specifications display\n\nThe Define PFD Specifications display\n\n454\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.9583333333333334, + "true_md": "Table105.Tasksrelatedtorecordlayoutelement (continued)\n\n## Tasks Related to Database File Selection\n\n- Note: The following description assumes that you are on the Specify Database File display.\n\n- 1. Type the database file name in the Database file prompt, or show the list of the database file names by pressing the F4 key and select one.\n\n- 2. Type the library name in the Library prompt.\n\n- 3. Type the record format name in the Record format prompt, or show the list of the record format names by pressing the F4 key and select one.\n\n- 4. Press Enter.\n\n- Note: The following description assumes that you are on the Specify Record Selection display.\n\n- 1. Type the field name in the Field F4 for list column, or show the list of the field names by pressing the F4 key and select one.\n\n- 2. Type one of the following test names in the Test column.\n\n- v EQ\n\n- v NE\n\n- v LE\n\n- v GE\n\n- v LT\n\n- v GT\n\n- v RANGE\n\n- 3. Type the value in the Value (Field, number, or ’character’) column or show the list of the field names by pressing the F4 key and select one.\n\n- 4. Press Enter.\n\nIf you specify more than one conditions, type AND or OR in the AND/OR column, the field name in the Field column, the test name in the Test column, and the value in the Value column.\n\n## Tasks Related to Record Selection\n\n## Tasks Related to Overlay Specifications and PFD Specifications\n\n- Note: The following description assumes that you are on one of the following displays:\n\nThe Define Overlay Specifications display\n\nThe Define PFD Specifications display\n\n454 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7355646855825884, + "doc_id": "065ef2c2d1975ed87d3549ed6cfada37bcf8fe359fc4851a3fd4461e563a634c", + "edit_distance": 0.4423076923076923, + "f1_score": 0.9259259259259258, + "meteor": 0.7691140469526944, + "precision": 0.9615384615384616, + "pred_md": "## 2=Change Font\n\n300\n\nTo change the font, do the following on the Work with Source Overlay Fonts display or the Work with PFD Definition Fonts display.\n\n- 1. Type 2 in the Opt column beside the font number you want to change.\n- 2. Press Enter.\n\nThe following display appears:\n\nSpecify 1, 2, or 3 and press Enter.\n\nSpecify 1, 2, or 3 and press Enter.\n\nThe following table explains the Change Source Overlay Font display and the Change PFD Definition Font display.\n\nTable 63. Change Source Overlay Font display fields\n\nThe display that appears next is different depending on your choice for the Font type prompt.\n\nSome fonts reside in the printer, while some fonts reside in the system and are downloaded to the printer. To use the former fonts, type 1 in the Font type prompt. To use the latter fonts, type 2 or 3 . Those fonts that reside in the system consist of three objects:\n\n## Coded font\n\nHas an object type *FNTRSC with attribute CDEFNT. Coded fonts for SBCS fonts contain a code pair consisting of a code page name and font character set name. Coded fonts for DBCS fonts contain many pairs of code page names and font character set names.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.8928571428571429, + "true_md": "## 2=Change Font\n\nTo change the font, do the following on the Work with Source Overlay Fonts display or the Work with PFD Definition Fonts display.\n\nThe following display appears:\n\nSpecify 1, 2, or 3 and press Enter.\n\nThe following table explains the Change Source Overlay Font display and the Change PFD Definition Font display.\n\nThe display that appears next is different depending on your choice for the Font type prompt.\n\nSome fonts reside in the printer, while some fonts reside in the system and are downloaded to the printer. To use the former fonts, type 1 in the Font type prompt. To use the latter fonts, type 2 or 3 . Those fonts that reside in the system consist of three objects:\n\nHas an object type *FNTRSC with attribute CDEFNT. Coded fonts for SBCS fonts contain a code pair consisting of a code page name and font character set name. Coded fonts for DBCS fonts contain many pairs of code page names and font character set names.\n\n300 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\n## Coded font\n\n- 1. Type 2 in the Opt column beside the font number you want to change.\n\n- 2. Press Enter.\n\nTable63.ChangeSourceOverlayFontdisplayfields\n\nChange PFD Definition Font Font number ........: 1 Type choice, press Enter. Font type ......... 1 1=Font and character identifier 2=Coded font 3=Code page and font character set F3=Exit F5=Refresh F12=Cancel" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.13721773472070292, + "doc_id": "778321d053f2caebda697a5ade9e86adab985bfdf546cea5018bce99ba4bfe74", + "edit_distance": 0.7120418848167539, + "f1_score": 0.7336683417085427, + "meteor": 0.3549166503757121, + "precision": 0.9864864864864865, + "pred_md": "240\n\nStep 5.\n\nType the values for the parameters.\n\nThe Overlay Utility and the Print Format Utility prompt you to type the mandatory parameters to create the element. For example, on the display shown above, you need to type the text data; This is an example. as shown in the Text data prompt in the following display.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide\n\nThe key entry area format depends on the element type to be defined. In the previous display, the Overlay Utility and the Print Format Utility assign the element mark to this element and display it at the previous cursor position on the image area. The Overlay Utility and the Print Format Utility move the cursor to the appropriate input field on the key entry area.\n\nFor all the element types, you are asked to complete all mandatory parameters in the key entry area to complete the element definition.", + "recall": 0.584, + "true_md": "Design Overlay Columns: 1- 74 Control . . Source overlay . . . . . STATIONERY *...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7.... 001 002 %T001 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 More... Define Text Mark . . . . . . : *T001 Measurement method . . . . : Row/Column Position . . . . . Across 32 Down 2 Text data .... F3=Exit F4=Detail F6=Change measurement method F12=Cancel F24=More keys\n\nDesign Overlay Columns: 1- 74 Control . . Source overlay . . . . . STATIONERY *...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7.... 001 002 %T001 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 More... Define Text Mark . . . . . . : *T001 Measurement method . . . . : Row/Column Position . . . . . Across 32 Down 2 Text data .... This is an example. F3=Exit F4=Detail F6=Change measurement method F12=Cancel F24=More keys\n\n240 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\nThe key entry area format depends on the element type to be defined. In the previous display, the Overlay Utility and the Print Format Utility assign the element mark to this element and display it at the previous cursor position on the image area. The Overlay Utility and the Print Format Utility move the cursor to the appropriate input field on the key entry area.\n\nFor all the element types, you are asked to complete all mandatory parameters in the key entry area to complete the element definition.\n\nThe Overlay Utility and the Print Format Utility prompt you to type the mandatory parameters to create the element. For example, on the display shown above, you need to type the text data; This is an example. as shown in the Text data prompt in the following display.\n\n- Step 5. Type the values for the parameters." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7071067811865475, + "doc_id": "1c958198fe551707184c5b7db544b4012377c6b9682e4d6156ca093ac0153df9", + "edit_distance": 0.2, + "f1_score": 0.8421052631578947, + "meteor": 0.8017676767676769, + "precision": 0.8888888888888888, + "pred_md": "314\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.8, + "true_md": "314 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8237264179360798, + "doc_id": "bf1447b80535ec77030c98577507aa6d44ed7d9e66b2dd461cc8efc33e75c72f", + "edit_distance": 0.7678571428571429, + "f1_score": 0.8841201716738197, + "meteor": 0.7036533475167874, + "precision": 0.8803418803418803, + "pred_md": "Basic English Language Skills\n\n## Stationary/Stationery\n\n'Stationary' means not moving.\n\nE.g. The stationary truck held up the traffic.\n\n'Stationery' refers to writing materials. E.g. She needed new stationery for school.\n\n## There/Their/They're\n\n'There' is a preposition that refers to a place.\n\nE.g. He will be there in ten minutes.\n\n'Their' is a possessive pronoun. It indicates that something belongs to them.\n\nE.g. Due to unforeseen circumstances, their meeting was cancelled.\n\n'They're' is a contraction of 'they are'.\n\nE.g. They're not going to be pleased when they find out that he lost the report.\n\n## To/Too/Two\n\n'To' is a preposition, and indicates the relationship between one thing and another.\n\nE.g. I gave the letter to him.\n\n'Too' means 'also', 'additional' or 'more than what is necessary or desirable'.\n\nE.g. He is going on holiday too. As a result, there are too few people available to work over December.\n\n'Two' is a number.\n\nE.g. There are only two staff members in the office.", + "recall": 0.8879310344827587, + "true_md": "Basic English Language Skills\n\n## Stationary/Stationery\n\n## There/Their/They’re\n\n## To/Too/Two\n\n“To” is a preposition, and indicates the relationship between one thing and another. E.g. I gave the letter to him.\n\n“Too” means “also”, “additional” or “more than what is necessary or desirable”. E.g. He is going on holiday too. As a result, there are too few people available to work over December.\n\n“Two” is a number. E.g. There are only two staff members in the office.\n\n“They’re” is a contraction of “they are”. E.g. They’re not going to be pleased when they find out that he lost the report.\n\n“Their” is a possessive pronoun. It indicates that something belongs to them. E.g. Due to unforeseen circumstances, their meeting was cancelled.\n\n“There” is a preposition that refers to a place. E.g. He will be there in ten minutes.\n\n“Stationery” refers to writing materials. E.g. She needed new stationery for school.\n\n“Stationary” means not moving. E.g. The stationary truck held up the traffic." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9295168545183954, + "doc_id": "20250b57f873bd999671c3523e1d7806bb5007033077c1d36bff6f8be2903381", + "edit_distance": 0.7785977859778598, + "f1_score": 0.9253731343283582, + "meteor": 0.7725679790599357, + "precision": 0.9117647058823529, + "pred_md": "Readers' Comments - We'd Like to Hear from You S544-5349-02\n\nS544-5349-02\n\nIBMR\n\nFold and Tape\n\nPlease do not staple\n\nFold and Tape\n\nFold and Tape\n\nPlease do not staple\n\nFold and Tape\n\nNO POSTAGE NECESSARY IF MAILED IN THE UNITED STATES\n\n## BUSINESS REPLY MAIL\n\nFIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO. 40 ARMONK, NEW YORK\n\nPOSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE\n\nIBM Corporation Information Development IBM Printing Systems Department H7FE Building 004M PO Box 1900 Boulder, CO 80301-9817\n\n\\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_\n\n\\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_ \\_\n\n\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\n\nCut or Fold Along Line\n\nCut or Fold Along Line", + "recall": 0.9393939393939394, + "true_md": "Readers’ Comments — We’d Like to Hear from You S544-5349-02\n\nCut or Fold Along Line\n\nFold and Tape \\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\n\nPlease do not staple \\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\n\nFold and Tape \\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\n\nNO POSTAGE NECESSARY IF MAILED IN THE UNITED STATES\n\nFIRST-CLASS MAIL\n\nPERMIT NO. 40\n\nARMONK, NEW YORK\n\nPOSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE\n\n## BUSINESS REPLY MAIL\n\nIBM Corporation Information Development IBM Printing Systems Department H7FE Building 004M PO Box 1900 Boulder, CO 80301-9817\n\nFold and Tape\n\nPlease do not staple\n\nFold and Tape\n\nCut or Fold Along Line\n\nS544-5349-02" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.3969371733955392, + "doc_id": "b6161546069af4aca001cbad250c268f362daf97f6ac7353da45248870b48a5b", + "edit_distance": 0.7890479153702551, + "f1_score": 0.9445506692160612, + "meteor": 0.6722252145525132, + "precision": 0.9840637450199203, + "pred_md": "| end overlay utility 60 print format utility 135, 141 | 329 |\n|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|-------|\n| resource management utility end overlay utility 60 end print format utility 135 end resource management utility enlarge character size 248 | 329 |\n| EQ 185 equal (=) sign 290 | |\n| exit defining PFD definition 131 | |\n\n## F\n\n| 185 | field | | |\n|-----------------------------|---------------------------------|-----|-----|\n| 14 | | | |\n| fixed text data specify 114 | | | |\n| change display | | | |\n| restrictions set initial | | | |\n| work with font samples | | | |\n| Courier 466 | | | |\n| Helvetica Roman Bold | | | |\n| Times New Roman Medium | | | |\n| format in a box 417 | | | |\n| page down | | | |\n| page up | | | |\n| roll down | | | |\n| 235 235 roll up 235 | | | |\n| 235 | | | |\n| 17 | | | |\n| | function keys on design display | | |\n| | formatting examples | 262 | |\n| | function keys | | |\n| | | | 235 |\n\n## G\n\n| GDF 393, 397, 439 create 439 GE 185 | |\n|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|----------|\n| print format utility 104 resource management utility graphic | 313 |\n| control 280 degree of rotation 282 element name 282 end position 280, 282 folder 280, 282 font 282 mark 280, 282 measurement method rotation 437 start position 280, 282 | 280, 282 |\n| graphics (GDF) size restrictions 393, 397 graphics element and position measurement method 415 grid (overlay specifications) | 415 69 |\n\nGT\n\n185\n\n478\n\n## H\n\n| hardware requirements 13 height (overlay specifications) | 68 |\n|----------------------------------------------------------------|------|\n| height (PFD specifications) 152 help control language commands | 19 |\n| hide element mark 232 how to do a task 443 | |\n\n## I\n\n| identifying problems | 399 |\n|---------------------------------------------------------------------------|-------|\n| image area 16, 230 IMDS (IOCA) data stream restrictions 397 infoseeker 19 | |\n| IOCA data stream IPDS towers 457 | 397 |\n\n## J\n\n| | JAN-short 264 |\n|--------------|-----------------|\n| JAN-standard | 264 |\n| JPBC | 264 |\n\n## K\n\n## L\n\n## label\n\n| sample 10 | |\n|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|------------------|\n| layout of list view | 291 |\n| layout of screen view LE 185 | 230 |\n| limitations 391 overlay utility 391 print format utility printer storage 417 resource management utility | 394 397 |\n| line restrictions 393, 396 line element | |\n| border 252 control 250 element 252 end position 251 mark 250, 251 measurement method placement 252 specify 125 | 250, 251 |\n| width 252 line element and position measurement method line width and overlay size | 409 409, 411 391 |\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide\n\n| | list view (continued) control 292 |\n|---------------------|-------------------------------------|\n| ID 293 layout M 293 | 291 |\n| NAME | 293 |\n| NBR | 293 |\n\nLT\n\n185\n\n## M\n\n| MAPICS/DB forms mapping object name specify 191 | 460 100 |\n|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|-----------|\n| Center-and-trim | 336 |\n| Image point-to-pel Image point-to-pel with double | 336 |\n| dot 336 Position and trim Scale-to-fit 336 | 336 |\n| measurement method (overlay specifications) 68, 69 measurement method (PFD specifications) 152, 153 | |\n| member 14 menu display 14 limitations 394 | |\n| minimum and maximum | |\n| move element 288 element list 295 | |\n\nMSI\n\n264\n\n## N\n\n| | NE 185 |\n|-----------------|----------|\n| numeric editing | 167 |\n\n## O\n\n| offset (overlay specifications) | offset (overlay specifications) |\n|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|\n| offset (PFD specifications) 152 | offset (PFD specifications) 152 |\n| omit back side page layout | omit back side page layout |\n| online information 19 | online information 19 |\n| operation flow | operation flow |\n| 26, 102 overlay 23 convert 312 convert to (physical file member) copy 311 create 80 delete 311, 343 print rename 311, 346 sample 9, 24 using 56 work with 311 overlay description change 312 display 312, 346 overlay object authority 394 copy 343 overlay object authority restrictions | 26, 102 overlay 23 convert 312 convert to (physical file member) copy 311 create 80 delete 311, 343 print rename 311, 346 sample 9, 24 using 56 work with 311 overlay description change 312 display 312, 346 overlay object authority 394 copy 343 overlay object authority restrictions |\n| | 57, 312, 318, 344 |\n| | 394 |", + "recall": 0.9080882352941176, + "true_md": "end overlay utility 60 print format utility 135, 141 resource management utility 329 end overlay utility 60 end print format utility 135 end resource management utility 329 enlarge character size 248 EQ 185 equal (=) sign 290 exit defining PFD definition 131 design record layout 126\n\nfield 185 file 14 fixed text data specify 114 font change 300 display 304 restrictions 392, 395 set initial 306 work with 297 font samples 465 Courier 466 Helvetica Roman Bold 466 Times New Roman Medium 465 format in a box 417 formatting examples 262 function keys 17 page down 235 page up 235 roll down 235 roll up 235 function keys on design display 235\n\nGDF 393, 397, 439 create 439 GE 185 getting started overlay utility 27 print format utility 104 resource management utility 313 graphic control 280 degree of rotation 282 element name 282 end position 280, 282 folder 280, 282 font 282 mark 280, 282 measurement method 280, 282 rotation 437 start position 280, 282 graphics (GDF) size restrictions 393, 397 graphics element and position 415 measurement method 415 grid (overlay specifications) 69 grid (PFD specifications) 153 GT 185\n\nlabel sample 10 layout of list view 291 layout of screen view 230 LE 185 library 14 limitations 391 overlay utility 391 print format utility 394 printer storage 417 resource management utility 397 line restrictions 393, 396 line element border 252 control 250 element 252 end position 251 mark 250, 251 measurement method 250, 251 placement 252 specify 125 start position 250 type 252 width 252 line element and position 409 measurement method 409, 411 line width and overlay size 391 line width and page size limitations 394 lines per inch (overlay specifications) 67 lines per inch (PFD specifications) 152 list view 229\n\nkey entry area 16, 230\n\nJAN-short 264 JAN-standard 264 JPBC 264\n\nI identifying problems 399 image area 16, 230 IMDS (IOCA) data stream restrictions 397 infoseeker 19 IOCA data stream 397 IPDS towers 457\n\nhardware requirements 13 height (overlay specifications) 68 height (PFD specifications) 152 help control language commands 19 display 19 hide element mark 232 how to do a task 443\n\nlist view (continued) control 292 ID 293 layout 291 M 293 NAME 293 NBR 293 LT 185\n\nMAPICS/DB forms 460 mapping object name 100 specify 191 mapping option Center-and-trim 336 Image point-to-pel 336 Image point-to-pel with double dot 336 Position and trim 336 Scale-to-fit 336 measurement method (overlay specifications) 68, 69 measurement method (PFD specifications) 152, 153 member 14 menu display 14 minimum and maximum limitations 394 move element 288 element list 295 MSI 264\n\nNE 185 numeric editing 167\n\noffset (overlay specifications) 69 offset (PFD specifications) 152 omit back side page layout 189 online information 19 operation flow 26, 102 overlay 23 convert 312 convert to (physical file member) 346 copy 311 create 80 delete 311, 343 print 57, 312, 318, 344 rename 311, 346 sample 9, 24 using 56 work with 311 overlay description change 312 display 312, 346 overlay object authority 394 copy 343 overlay object authority restrictions 394 overlay specifications 24\n\n## F\n\n## H\n\n## M\n\n## J\n\n## K\n\n## L\n\n## N\n\n## O\n\n## G\n\n478 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.44838897611908535, + "doc_id": "6ecb89d8cc291fac0fbc86ef83c628f4889a0b838481947ae9360e0a3a89c69d", + "edit_distance": 0.6222222222222222, + "f1_score": 0.8717948717948717, + "meteor": 0.627645843452362, + "precision": 0.9714285714285714, + "pred_md": "54\n\n## Example Actions:\n\n- 1. Type 1 for the Option prompt.\n- 2. Press the Enter key.\n\nThe Save Source Overlay display appears.\n\nExample Action: Press the Enter key.\n\nThe Create Overlay display appears.\n\n## Creating an Overlay from a Source Overlay\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.7906976744186046, + "true_md": "## Example Actions:\n\n## Creating an Overlay from a Source Overlay\n\n## Create Overlay\n\n## Save Source Overlay\n\nF3=Exit F5=Refresh F12=Cancel\n\nF4=Prompt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel\n\nType choices, press Enter.\n\nThe Save Source Overlay display appears.\n\n- 1. Type 1 for the Option prompt.\n\n- 2. Press the Enter key.\n\nExample Action: Press the Enter key.\n\nThe Create Overlay display appears.\n\nType choices, press Enter.\n\n54 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.1272523583266795, + "doc_id": "0008814c7672d2ffb7be67cab9dacbb024945d5ddaecbfb62e356f62006de4c4", + "edit_distance": 0.7358490566037735, + "f1_score": 0.7777777777777779, + "meteor": 0.3668031701129297, + "precision": 0.9180327868852459, + "pred_md": "## 3=Copy PFD Definition File\n\nTo copy a PFD definition file, do the following on the Work with PFD Definition Files display on page 205.\n\n- 1. Type 3 in the Opt column beside the PFD definition file you want to copy.\n- 2. Press Enter.\n\nThe following display appears:\n\nUsing the Copy PFD Definition File display, you can copy a PFD definition file to a new PFD definition file. The entire set of PFD definitions will be copied to the new file.\n\nTable 45. Copy PFD Definition Files display fields\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide\n\n212", + "recall": 0.6746987951807228, + "true_md": "## 3=Copy PFD Definition File\n\n212 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\nTable45.CopyPFDDefinitionFilesdisplayfields\n\nUsing the Copy PFD Definition File display, you can copy a PFD definition file to a new PFD definition file. The entire set of PFD definitions will be copied to the new file.\n\nThe following display appears:\n\nTo copy a PFD definition file, do the following on the Work with PFD Definition Files display on page 205.\n\n1. Type 3 in the Opt column beside the PFD definition file you want to copy.\n\n2. Press Enter.\n\n## Copy PFD Definition File\n\nFrom file .........: PFUFILE Library . ........: PFULIB\n\nFrom file .........: PFUFILE Library . ........: PFULIB Text............: PFDfile for exercise\n\nLibrary . ........: PFULIB Text............: PFDfile for exercise\n\nType choices, press Enter.\n\nTo file .......... PFUFILE2 Name Library ......... PFULIB Name, *CURLIB\n\nTo file .......... PFUFILE2 Name Library ......... PFULIB Name, *CURLIB Text 'description' . . . . . PFD file for exercise\n\nLibrary ......... PFULIB Name, *CURLIB Text 'description' . . . . . PFD file for exercise\n\nF3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.2712497686721379, + "doc_id": "fbf5101624ff53d62fb68a7d42dc4e5fa3a046d1aef16c1d74bd35fc3b9a6ba5", + "edit_distance": 0.7117117117117117, + "f1_score": 0.9043478260869565, + "meteor": 0.45144254757647506, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Bar Code Element and Position\n\nNote:\n\nBar code elements have some leading blanks before the bars. Thus the first bar does not start at the specified position.\n\n## Measurement Method is Row/Column\n\nTop of the row and left edge of the column is the bar code position.\n\n## Measurement Method is Inch or Centimeter\n\nTop left corner of the bar code area is positioned.\n\n+---------------------\n\n-\n\n-\n\n---+\n\nChapter 23. Problem Analysis\n\n413", + "recall": 0.8253968253968254, + "true_md": "## Bar Code Element and Position\n\n## Measurement Method is Row/Column\n\n- Note: Bar code elements have some leading blanks before the bars. Thus the first bar does not start at the specified position.\n\nTop of the row and left edge of the column is the bar code position.\n\n| | | Column n | -------+--------------------- - - ---+ | || | || | || | || | Row n | || | || | || | || | *--------------------- - - ---= | | --------+-----------+------------ | |\n\nPosition | | V +--->+--------------------- - - ---+ | || | || | || | || | | || | || | || | || | +--------------------- - - ---+\n\nTop left corner of the bar code area is positioned.\n\n## Measurement Method is Inch or Centimeter\n\nChapter 23. Problem Analysis 413" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.46040792434782607, + "doc_id": "1852fcf886db5361edd386887b560a16dbef3d7446007fc716c3d5109ca20613", + "edit_distance": 0.3374233128834356, + "f1_score": 0.8219178082191781, + "meteor": 0.6204428878546963, + "precision": 0.967741935483871, + "pred_md": "## 2=Change a Source Overlay\n\nTo change a source overlay, see the Work with Source Overlays display on page 61.\n\n- 1. Type a 2 in the Opt column beside the source overlay you want to change.\n- 2. Press Enter.\n\nThe Change Source Overlay display appears:\n\nUsing the Change Source Overlay display, you can change the existing source overlay by selecting the action on the above display in the same way you do to create a source overlay. See '1=Create a Source Overlay' on page 65 for more information.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide\n\n76", + "recall": 0.7142857142857143, + "true_md": "## 2=Change a Source Overlay\n\nTo change a source overlay, see the Work with Source Overlays display on page 61.\n\n- 1. Type a 2 in the Opt column beside the source overlay you want to change.\n\n- 2. Press Enter.\n\nThe Change Source Overlay display appears:\n\nUsing the Change Source Overlay display, you can change the existing source overlay by selecting the action on the above display in the same way you do to create a source overlay. See “1=Create a Source Overlay” on page 65 for more information.\n\n76 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\nFile............: OUFILE Library . ........: OULIB Source overlay . . . . . . . : OVL6 Type options, press Enter. 1=Select Opt Action Define overlay specifications Work with source overlay fonts 1 Design overlay F3=Exit F5=Refresh F9=Select all F12=Cancel\n\n## Change Source Overlay" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.867413568628952, + "doc_id": "2ae41636eecd923e2c20a8c829c325b7b70ab87a9cf702954f071d027a1a3725", + "edit_distance": 0.48936170212765956, + "f1_score": 0.976303317535545, + "meteor": 0.8447987515941752, + "precision": 0.976303317535545, + "pred_md": "396\n\nchanges, the Courier 10 font (FONT ID 11) is sent to the printer. When you use the type 1 printer (IBM 4224/4234/4230) under the printer mode which does not have Courier 10, (such as the draft mode of the 4224 printer), you can not print a page with *ABSOLUTE for the print fidelity. In such cases, select *CONTENT for the print fidelity.\n\n## Page Segment\n\n- 1. It is not checked if the specified page segment exists. If the page segment does not exist in a library in the library list of the job, errors are issued when your printout is sent to the printer.\n- 2. When a database file printout is sent to the printer, the libraries in the library list of the job that created the printout are searched to locate the specified page segment.\n\nYou need to do the following before you print a database file member with a PFD definition:\n\n- v Put the correct page segment in a library.\n- v Put the library in the library list.\n- v Make sure the library that contains the page segment appears in the library list before any other library containing a page segment of the same name.\n- 3. It is unpredictable which font will be used if a page segment contains text. The font used to print the text can not be specified. Depending on the situation, a font specified for text within a page segment may be used, or the printer default font may be used.\n- 4. The program does not verify if a page segment contains either or both IM1 and IO1 format images. IM1 images may not be printed in desired resolution on some printers, and IO1 images cannot be printed on some printers. When IOCA images are used, support only IOCA function set 10.\n- See 'Appendix A. Printer Characteristics' on page 417 for restrictions of each printer.\n- 5. When 90, 180, or 270 is specified in the Degree of rotation prompt on the Define PFD Specifications screen, the page segments defined in the PFD definition do not rotate with the page layout.\n\n## Line\n\nNothing is printed for lines which have a greater width than length.\n\n## Box\n\nNothing is printed for boxes which have a line width specified which is greater than either the box width or the box height.\n\n## Text in Box\n\nText in a box is formatted by using the character spacing parameter specified on the box element. If the font size is different, formatting is incorrect.\n\n```\nFor example: Character spacing : Horizontal........................ 10 Vertical.......................... 6 Font for text in a box width ............................ 0.2 inches ( 5 CPI ) height ........................... 0.33 inches ( 3 CPI\n```\n\n```\n)\n```\n\nText will be printed to the right of the correct position for center. The second and subsequent lines will partly duplicate the preceding lines.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.976303317535545, + "true_md": "changes, the Courier 10 font (FONT ID 11) is sent to the printer. When you use the type 1 printer (IBM 4224/4234/4230) under the printer mode which does not have Courier 10, (such as the draft mode of the 4224 printer), you can not print a page with *ABSOLUTE for the print fidelity. In such cases, select *CONTENT for the print fidelity.\n\nYou need to do the following before you print a database file member with a PFD definition:\n\nNothing is printed for lines which have a greater width than length.\n\nNothing is printed for boxes which have a line width specified which is greater than either the box width or the box height.\n\nText in a box is formatted by using the character spacing parameter specified on the box element. If the font size is different, formatting is incorrect.\n\nFor example:\n\n## Page Segment\n\n## Line\n\n## Box\n\n## Text in Box\n\nText will be printed to the right of the correct position for center. The second and subsequent lines will partly duplicate the preceding lines.\n\n- 1. It is not checked if the specified page segment exists. If the page segment does not exist in a library in the library list of the job, errors are issued when your printout is sent to the printer.\n\n- 2. When a database file printout is sent to the printer, the libraries in the library list of the job that created the printout are searched to locate the specified page segment.\n\n- v Put the correct page segment in a library.\n\n- v Put the library in the library list.\n\n- v Make sure the library that contains the page segment appears in the library list before any other library containing a page segment of the same name.\n\n- 3. It is unpredictable which font will be used if a page segment contains text. The font used to print the text can not be specified. Depending on the situation, a font specified for text within a page segment may be used, or the printer default font may be used.\n\n- 4. The program does not verify if a page segment contains either or both IM1 and IO1 format images. IM1 images may not be printed in desired resolution on some printers, and IO1 images cannot be printed on some printers. When IOCA images are used, support only IOCA function set 10.\n\n- 5. When 90, 180, or 270 is specified in the Degree of rotation prompt on the Define PFD Specifications screen, the page segments defined in the PFD definition do not rotate with the page layout.\n\nSee “Appendix A. Printer Characteristics” on page 417 for restrictions of each printer.\n\n396 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\nFont for text in a box width ............................\n\nCharacter spacing : Horizontal........................ 10\n\nCharacter spacing : Horizontal........................ 10 Vertical.......................... 6\n\nFont for text in a box width ............................ 0.2 inches ( 5 CPI ) height ........................... 0.33 inches ( 3 CPI )" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.010179866414794958, + "doc_id": "536fdbec12c29d5be3cd424c9be5c3a3ab48f2824d33d2f9afbf44a5fda01bc7", + "edit_distance": 0.8666666666666667, + "f1_score": 0.6358381502890174, + "meteor": 0.2782105676405621, + "precision": 0.9649122807017544, + "pred_md": "326\n\nFrom this display, you can convert a PC document in a shared folder to a page segment.\n\nSee 'CVTPCDPAGS (Convert PC Document to Page Segment) Command' on page 372 for more information.\n\n## Starting the Resource Management Utility with the CVTPFMPAGS Command\n\nWhen you start the Resource Management Utility with the CVTPFMPAGS command and press the F4 key, the following display appears:\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.47413793103448276, + "true_md": "## Convert PCD to Page Segment (CVTPCDPAGS)\n\n## Starting the Resource Management Utility with the CVTPFMPAGS Command\n\n## Convert PFM to Page Segment (CVTPFMPAGS)\n\n326 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\nType choices, press Enter. Page segment..........> LOGO NAME, *PRV Library . .......... *CURLIB NAME, *CURLIB From folder ..........> LOGOFLD From PC document . . . . ....> LOGODOC NAME, *PRV, *PAGSEG Change image size . . . .... *NO *SAME, *NO, *YES Degree of rotation . . . .... *SAME 0, 90, 180, 270, *SAME Additional Parameters Authority ........... *SAME NAME, *LIBCRTAUT, *CHANGE... Text 'description' . . . .... Replace . ........... *YES *NO, *YES Bottom F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel F13=How to use this display F24=More keys\n\nType choices, press Enter. Page segment.......... NAME, *PRV Library . .......... *CURLIB NAME, *CURLIB From file ........... *PRV NAME, *PRV Library . .......... NAME, *LIBL, *CURLIB From member .......... *PRV NAME, *PRV, *PAGSEG Bottom F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F10=Additional parameters F12=Cancel F13=How to use this display F24=More keys\n\nFrom this display, you can convert a PC document in a shared folder to a page segment.\n\nSee “CVTPCDPAGS (Convert PC Document to Page Segment) Command” on page 372 for more information.\n\nWhen you start the Resource Management Utility with the CVTPFMPAGS command and press the F4 key, the following display appears:" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6428841291460603, + "doc_id": "58f088d3671a5710720166abd147046fc3f71e8c1c35f184b74234576c64cd93", + "edit_distance": 0.8043478260869565, + "f1_score": 0.8666666666666666, + "meteor": 0.901668982325073, + "precision": 0.7878787878787878, + "pred_md": "Choice on the Define Box Detail display:\n\nFormat : 3=Vertical, right to left Degree of rotation : 0\n\nFigure 44. Print Example - 11\n\nFigure 44. Print Example - 11\n\nAppendix B. Rotation, Format, and Shading Pattern in Box\n\n431", + "recall": 0.9629629629629629, + "true_md": "Choice on the Define Box Detail display:\n\nFigure44.PrintExample-11\n\nAppendix B. Rotation, Format, and Shading Pattern in Box 431\n\nFormat : 3=Vertical, right to left Degree of rotation : 0" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8624182352599264, + "doc_id": "d4c51f9dc14b7d3ba9387dda1ab8d8dc4c80742f5a3aa2d49ca872d942446692", + "edit_distance": 0.44966442953020136, + "f1_score": 0.9448818897637795, + "meteor": 0.8805211116480017, + "precision": 0.9375, + "pred_md": "356\n\nThe following table describes the Print Page Segment display.\n\nTable 79. Print Page Segment display fields\n\n## 7=Rename Page Segment\n\nTo rename a page segment, do the following on the Work with Page Segments display on page 351.\n\n- 1. Type 7 in the Opt column beside the page segment that you want to rename.\n- 2. Press Enter.\n\nThe CL command RNMOBJ will be called.\n\n## 8=Display Page Segment Description\n\nTo display a page segment description, do the following on the Work with Page Segments display on page 351.\n\n- 1. Type 8 in the Opt column beside the page segment name for which you want to display the description.\n- 2. Press Enter.\n\nThe CL command DSPOBJD will be called.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.9523809523809523, + "true_md": "The following table describes the Print Page Segment display.\n\nTable79.PrintPageSegmentdisplayfields\n\n## 7=Rename Page Segment\n\n## 8=Display Page Segment Description\n\nTo rename a page segment, do the following on the Work with Page Segments display on page 351.\n\nThe CL command RNMOBJ will be called.\n\nThe CL command DSPOBJD will be called.\n\nTo display a page segment description, do the following on the Work with Page Segments display on page 351.\n\n- 2. Press Enter.\n\n- 1. Type 8 in the Opt column beside the page segment name for which you want to display the description.\n\n- 2. Press Enter.\n\n- 1. Type 7 in the Opt column beside the page segment that you want to rename.\n\n356 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5459176696953583, + "doc_id": "d7ee2bfd61766d9aef47ef2e3f967f497a7c653c6aa6ade5cb6513f779d90b36", + "edit_distance": 0.5371900826446281, + "f1_score": 0.9544072948328268, + "meteor": 0.5155924909774305, + "precision": 0.9631901840490797, + "pred_md": "Basic English Language Skils\n\n## HERE ARE 10 TIPS FOR HOW YOU CAN ACHIEVE HIGHER MARKS FOR YOUR WRITTEN ASSIGNMENTS:\n\n## 1. Read (and follow) the instructions carefully.\n\nIf you are an Oxbridge Academy student, the general assignment guidelines will be provided in your 'Success' Study Guide. Specific instructions will also be included at the beginning of each of your assignments.\n\n## 2. Read the questions carefully.\n\nMake sure you understand what is being asked of you, so that you focus on answering the right questions, instead of providing irrelevant information.\n\n## 3. Remember that presentation is important.\n\nNeatness, spelling, and the structure of your assignment will all count toward the mark that you receive for your assignment.\n\n## 4. Use your course material and other external sources to find answers to the assignment questions.\n\nBut make sure to use your own words - don't just copy. You need to show the person marking your assignment that you have developed a sound understanding of the subject.\n\n## 5. When you use external resources, remember to reference them properly, and to include them in a bibliography.\n\nIf you don't, you may be guilty of plagiarism (www.oxforddictionaries. com/definition/english/plagiarism), which is a serious offence.\n\n- 6. Always hand in your own work, and make sure that you use your own words when you formulate your answers.\n\n## 7. When it comes to essay questions:\n\n- · Plan/outline your answer before doing the final draft.\n- · Remember that essays have titles, introductions, bodies, and conclusions.\n- · Use headings and paragraphs to structure your answer.\n\nDeveloped for Oxbridge Academy", + "recall": 0.9457831325301205, + "true_md": "## HERE ARE 10 TIPS FOR HOW YOU CAN ACHIEVE HIGHER MARKS FOR YOUR WRITTEN ASSIGNMENTS:\n\n1. Read (and follow) the instructions carefully. If you are an Oxbridge Academy student, the general assignment guidelines will be provided in your “Success” Study Guide. Specific instructions will also be included at the beginning of each of your assignments.\n\n2. Read the questions carefully. Make sure you understand what is being asked of you, so that you focus on answering the right questions, instead of providing irrelevant information.\n\n3. Remember that presentation is important. Neatness, spelling, and the structure of your assignment will all count toward the mark that you receive for your assignment.\n\nto the assignment questions. But make sure to use your own words – don’t just copy. You need to show the person marking your assignment that you have developed a sound understanding of the subject.\n\nproperly, and to include them in a bibliography. If you don’t, you may be guilty of plagiarism (www.oxforddictionaries. com/definition/english/plagiarism), which is a serious offence.\n\n6. Always hand in your own work, and make sure that you use your own words when you formulate your answers.\n\n- 7. When it comes to essay questions: • Plan/outline your answer before doing the final draft. Remember that essays have titles, introductions, bodies, and \n\n- • Plan/outline your answer before doing the final draft. • Remember that essays have titles, introductions, bodies, and conclusions. Use headings and paragraphs to structure your answer.\n\n- conclusions. • Use headings and paragraphs to structure your answer.\n\nDeveloped for Oxbridge Academy\n\n## 1. Read (and follow) the instructions carefully. If you are an Oxbridge Academy student, the general assignment\n\n## 2. Read the questions carefully. Make sure you understand what is being asked of you, so that you\n\n## 3. Remember that presentation is important. Neatness, spelling, and the structure of your assignment will all count\n\n## 4. Use your course material and other external sources to find answers to the assignment questions. But make sure to use your own words – don’t just copy. You need to show\n\n## 5. When you use external resources, remember to reference them properly, and to include them in a bibliography. If you don’t, you may be guilty of plagiarism (www.oxforddictionaries.\n\n## 7. When it comes to essay questions: Plan/outline your answer before doing the final draft.\n\nBasic English Language Skills" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5635173805788469, + "doc_id": "1b81cf65f47456ad4faa725d1eb09879bd633af16cfe2bf8cea661b87907bfac", + "edit_distance": 0.616, + "f1_score": 0.9945553539019963, + "meteor": 0.606851671362072, + "precision": 0.9927536231884058, + "pred_md": "## OPERATION (cont.)\n\n## Model AY11230\n\n## Model AY11234\n\n## SELECTING OBJECTIVE MAGNIFICATION\n\n- 1. There are two objectives. The lower magnification objective has a greater depth of field and view.\n- 2. In order to observe the specimen easily use the lower magnification objective first. Then, by rotating the case, the magnification can be changed.\n\n## CHANGING THE INTERPUPILLARY DISTANCE\n\n- 1. The distance between the observer's pupils is the interpupillary distance.\n- 2. To adjust the interpupillary distance rotate the prism caps until both eyes coincide with the image in the eyepiece.\n\n## FOCUSING\n\n- 1. Remove the lens protective cover.\n- 2. Place the specimen on the working stage.\n- 3. Focus the specimen with the left eye first while turning the focus knob until the image appears clear and sharp.\n\n## FOCUSING\n\n- 1. Turn the focusing knob away or toward you until a clear image is viewed.\n- 2. If the image is unclear, adjust the height of the elevator up or down, then turn the focusing knob again.\n\n## ZOOM MAGNIFICATION\n\n- 1. Turn the zoom magnification knob to the desired magnification and field of view.\n- 2. In most situations, it is recommended that you focus at the lowest magnification, then move to a higher magnification and re-focus as necessary.\n- 3. If the image is not clear to both eyes at the same time, the diopter ring may need adjustment.\n\n## DIOPTER RING ADJUSTMENT\n\n- 1. To adjust the eyepiece for viewing with or without eyeglasses and for differences in acuity between the right and left eyes, follow the following steps:\n- a. Observe an image through the left into focus using the focus knob.\n- b. By turning the diopter ring adjustment for the left eyepiece, bring the same point into sharp focus.\n- c.Then bring the same point into focus through the right eyepiece by turning the right diopter ring.\n- d.With more than one viewer, each diopter ring position for the left and right eyepieces, then before viewing set the diopter ring adjustments to that setting.\n- 4. Rotate the right eyepiece ring until the eyepiece and bring a specific point images in each eyepiece coincide and are sharp and clear.\n\n## CHANGING THE BULB\n\n- 1. Disconnect the power cord.\n- 2. When the bulb is cool, remove the oblique illuminator cap and remove the halogen bulb with cap.\n- 3. Replace with a new halogen bulb.\n- 4. Open the window in the base plate and viewer should note their own replace the halogen lamp or fluorescent lamp of transmitted illuminator.\n\n## USING THE VERTICAL TUBE MODELS AY11230/11234\n\n- 1. The vertical tube can be used for instructional viewing or to photograph the image with a digital camera or a micro TV unit\n- 2. Loosen the retention screw, then rotate the adjustment ring to change the length of the vertical tube.\n- re that both the images in 3. Make su\n\n13\n\n14\n\n## CHANGING THE BULB\n\n- 1. Disconnect the power cord from the electrical outlet.\n- 2. When the bulb is cool, remove the oblique illuminator cap and remove the halogen bulb with cap.\n- 3. Replace with a new halogen bulb.\n- 4. Open the window in the base plate and replace the halogen lamp or fluorescent lamp of transmitted illuminator.\n\n## MODEL AY11236\n\nModel AY11236\n\nModel AY11236\n\n## MICROSCOPE USAGE\n\nBARSKA Model AY11236 is a powerful fixed power compound microscope designed for biological studies such as specimen examination. It can also be used for examining bacteria and for general clinical and medical studies and other scientific uses.\n\n## CONSTRUCTION\n\nBARSKA Model AY11236 is a fixed power compound microscope. It is constructed with two optical paths at the same angle. It is equipped with transmitted illumination. By using this instrument, the user can observe specimens at magnification from 40x to 1000x by selecting the desired objective lens. Coarse and fine focus adjustments provide accuracy and image detail. The rotating head allows the user to position the eyepieces for maximum viewing comfort and easy access to all adjustment knobs.", + "recall": 0.9963636363636363, + "true_md": "OPERATION ( cont. )\n\n## Model AY11234\n\n## FOCUSING 1. Turn the focusing knob away or toward\n\n## Model AY11230\n\n## SELECTING OBJECTIVE MAGNIFICATION 1. There are two objectives. The lower\n\n## CHANGING THE INTERPUPILLARY DISTANCE 1. The distance between the observer's\n\n## ZOOM MAGNIFICATION 1. Turn the zoom magnification knob to\n\n## DIOPTER RING ADJUSTMENT 1. To adjust the eyepiece for viewing with\n\n## FOCUSING 1. Remove the lens protective cover.\n\n## CHANGING THE BULB 1. Disconnect the power cord.\n\n## USING THE VERTICAL TUBE - MODELS AY11230/11234\n\n## CHANGING THE BULB 1. Disconnect the power cord from the\n\n## MICROSCOPE USAGE\n\n## CONSTRUCTION\n\n- MAGNIFICATION 1. There are two objectives. The lower magnification objective has a greater depth of field and view. 2. In order to observe the specimen\n\n- depth of field and view. 2. In order to observe the specimen easily use the lower magnification objective first. Then, by rotating the case, the magnification can be changed.\n\n- DISTANCE 1. The distance between the observer's pupils is the interpupillary distance. 2. To adjust the interpupillary distance\n\n- pupils is the interpupillary distance. 2. To adjust the interpupillary distance rotate the prism caps until both eyes coincide with the image in the eyepiece. \n\n- FOCUSING 1. Remove the lens protective cover. 2. Place the specimen on the working\n\n- 1. Remove the lens protective cover. 2. Place the specimen on the working stage. 3. Focus the specimen with the left eye\n\n- stage. 3. Focus the specimen with the left eye first while turning the focus knob until the image appears clear and sharp. 4. Rotate the right eyepiece ring until the\n\n- the image appears clear and sharp. 4. Rotate the right eyepiece ring until the images in each eyepiece coincide and are sharp and clear.\n\n- CHANGING THE BULB 1. Disconnect the power cord. 2. When the bulb is cool, remove the\n\n- 1. Disconnect the power cord. 2. When the bulb is cool, remove the oblique illuminator cap and remove the halogen bulb with cap. 3. Replace with a new halogen bulb.\n\n- the halogen bulb with cap. 3. Replace with a new halogen bulb. 4. Open the window in the base plate and\n\n- 3. Replace with a new halogen bulb. 4. Open the window in the base plate and replace the halogen lamp or fluorescent lamp of transmitted illuminator.\n\n- 1. The vertical tube can be used for instructional viewing or to photograph the image with a digital camera or a micro TV unit 2. Loosen the retention screw, then rotate \n\n- micro TV unit 2. Loosen the retention screw, then rotate the adjustment ring to change the length of the vertical tube.\n\n- 3. Make sure that both the images in\n\n- FOCUSING 1. Turn the focusing knob away or toward you until a clear image is viewed. 2. If the image is unclear, adjust the\n\n- you until a clear image is viewed. 2. If the image is unclear, adjust the height of the elevator up or down, then turn the focusing knob again.\n\n- ZOOM MAGNIFICATION 1. Turn the zoom magnification knob to the desired magnification and field of view. 2. In most situations, it is recommended\n\n- view. 2. In most situations, it is recommended that you focus at the lowest magnification, then move to a higher magnification and re-focus as necessary. 3. If the image is not clear to both eyes\n\n- necessary. 3. If the image is not clear to both eyes at the same time, the diopter ring may need adjustment.\n\n- DIOPTER RING ADJUSTMENT 1. To adjust the eyepiece for viewing with or without eyeglasses and for differences in acuity between the right and left eyes, follow the following steps: a. Observe an image through the left\n\n- steps: a. Observe an image through the left eyepiece and bring a specific point into focus using the focus knob. b. By turning the diopter ring\n\n- into focus using the focus knob. b. By turning the diopter ring adjustment for the left eyepiece, bring the same point into sharp focus. c.Then bring the same point into\n\n- focus. c.Then bring the same point into focus through the right eyepiece by turning the right diopter ring. d.With more than one viewer, each\n\n- by turning the right diopter ring. d.With more than one viewer, each viewer should note their own diopter ring position for the left and right eyepieces, then before viewing set the diopter ring adjustments to that setting.\n\n- CHANGING THE BULB 1. Disconnect the power cord from the electrical outlet. 2. When the bulb is cool, remove the\n\n- electrical outlet. 2. When the bulb is cool, remove the oblique illuminator cap and remove the halogen bulb with cap. 3. Replace with a new halogen bulb.\n\n- the halogen bulb with cap. 3. Replace with a new halogen bulb. 4. Open the window in the base plate\n\n- 3. Replace with a new halogen bulb. 4. Open the window in the base plate and replace the halogen lamp or fluorescent lamp of transmitted illuminator.\n\nBARSKA Model AY11236 is a powerful fixed power compound microscope designed for biological studies such as specimen examination. It can also be used for examining bacteria and for general clinical and medical studies and other scientific uses. \n\nBARSKA Model AY11236 is a fixed power compound microscope. It is constructed with two optical paths at the same angle. It is equipped with transmitted illumination. By using this instrument, the user can observe specimens at magnification from 40x to 1000x by selecting the desired objective lens. Coarse and fine focus adjustments provide accuracy and image detail. The rotating head allows the user to position the eyepieces for maximum viewing comfort and easy access to all adjustment knobs.\n\nModel AY11236\n\n14\n\n13\n\nMODEL AY11236" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7071067811865475, + "doc_id": "a5f357825852a382dc165c4a881fb1083023bd2dac6984dd523d7d0a448cf5be", + "edit_distance": 0.2, + "f1_score": 0.8421052631578947, + "meteor": 0.8017676767676769, + "precision": 0.8888888888888888, + "pred_md": "226\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.8, + "true_md": "226 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.019541630937926255, + "doc_id": "c91edd3788580c5f5f008c906175b97d0620451a5f3fd102badbbaaa331fdef8", + "edit_distance": 0.8396946564885496, + "f1_score": 0.5949367088607594, + "meteor": 0.26778702909156293, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Step 5 - Ending the Print Format Utility\n\nWhen the database file is printed, the following display appears:\n\nExample Action: Press the F3 key to end the Work with PFD Definitions display.\n\nThe Work with PFD Definition Files display appears.\n\nExample Action: Press the F3 key.\n\nThe IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries menu appears.\n\nChapter 8. Getting Started with Print Format Utility\n\n135", + "recall": 0.42342342342342343, + "true_md": "## Step 5 - Ending the Print Format Utility\n\nThe IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries menu appears.\n\nExample Action: Press the F3 key.\n\nChapter 8. Getting Started with Print Format Utility 135\n\nExample Action: Press the F3 key to end the Work with PFD Definitions display.\n\nThe Work with PFD Definition Files display appears.\n\nWhen the database file is printed, the following display appears:\n\n## Work with PFD Definitions\n\n## Work with PFD Definition Files\n\nFile . . ........ PFDFILE Name, F4 for list Library........ MYLIB Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB PFD definition ..... *ALL Name, generic*, *ALL Position to....... Starting characters Type options, press Enter. 1=Create 2=Change 3=Copy 4=Delete 6=Print PFD definition 7=Rename 9=Print database file PFD Opt Definition Text Changed PRODUCTLBL PFD exercise 12/13/90 Bottom Parameters or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F9=Retrieve F11=Display names only F12=Cancel Member QAFCPFDDTA in database file QAFCPFDDTA printed.\n\nLibrary ......... MYLIB Name, *USRLIBL, *LIBL, *CURLIB... File . . ........ *ALL Name, generic*, *ALL Position to....... Starting characters Type options, press Enter. 1=Create 2=Change 3=Copy 4=Delete 7=Rename 8=Display description 12=Work with PFD definitions Opt File Library Text Changed PFDFILE MYLIB PFD file for exercise 12/13/90 Bottom Parameters or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F9=Retrieve F11=Display names only F12=Cancel PFD definition file PFDFILE created in library MYLIB." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9804274240373088, + "doc_id": "05c5655440455e4b1ae83c0e23151435703c4ecd7c2b1c003981063d2781362a", + "edit_distance": 0.1015625, + "f1_score": 0.9873417721518988, + "meteor": 0.9989693150118009, + "precision": 0.975, + "pred_md": "## Measurement Method is Inch or Centimeter\n\nThe top edge of a horizontal line is positioned to the vertical position. The left edge of a vertical line is positioned to the horizontal position.\n\n+-\n\n## Box Element and Position\n\n## Measurement Method is Row/Column\n\nLine Placement is Border: The top edge of the top horizontal line is positioned to the top of the row. The bottom edge of the bottom horizontal line is positioned to the bottom of the row. The left edge of the left vertical line is positioned to the left of the column. The right edge of the right vertical line is positioned to the right of the column.\n\nChapter 23. Problem Analysis\n\n411", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## Box Element and Position\n\n## Measurement Method is Inch or Centimeter\n\nThe top edge of a horizontal line is positioned to the vertical position. The left edge of a vertical line is positioned to the horizontal position.\n\n## Measurement Method is Row/Column\n\nLine Placement is Border: The top edge of the top horizontal line is positioned to the top of the row. The bottom edge of the bottom horizontal line is positioned to the bottom of the row. The left edge of the left vertical line is positioned to the left of the column. The right edge of the right vertical line is positioned to the right of the column.\n\nChapter 23. Problem Analysis 411" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.715057601936907, + "doc_id": "39724b6b7aa9acd6e3c474b52d1fd24a012314cc7c5b7ce19cbe07b46f92f647", + "edit_distance": 0.5681818181818182, + "f1_score": 0.904109589041096, + "meteor": 0.8561650385560957, + "precision": 0.8418367346938775, + "pred_md": "392\n\nright edge or bottom of the overlay. The position, specified in inches or centimeters, must be inside the overlay when it is expressed in rows and columns. For example:\n\n```\nCharacters per line ............... 10 Lines per inches ................. 6 Overlay width ..................... 5.15 inches (51 columns) height .................... 6.1 inches (36 lines) Position Across ................... 5.12 inches is not allowed since it will be in the 52nd column. Down ..................... 6.05 inches is not allowed\n```\n\nsince it will be in the 37th line.\n\nWhen you use a 300-pel printer to print a text element whose character size is not *DEFAULT, it may not print when the position of the text element is too close to the bottom of the overlay. In such cases, the text element should be moved to an upper location or the height of the overlay size should be increased.\n\n## Restrictions\n\n## Source Overlay File\n\nIf a file meets the following four conditions, it is shown on the Work with Source Overlay Files display as a source overlay file even if it is not created as a source overlay file.\n\n- v The file is a physical file\n- v The file is not a source file\n- v The file is not a DDM file\n- v The record length is 80\n\nIt is recommended that you use files created using the overlay utility.\n\n## Font\n\n- 1. It is not checked if the specified font exists. If the font does not exist, errors are issued when your printout with the overlay is sent to the printer.\n- 2. It is not checked if the specified font is an SBCS font or a DBCS font. If you specify a DBCS font for SBCS characters or specify an SBCS font for DBCS characters, the result depends on the text to be printed. The text may be printed with unexpected characters, or not printed with some errors.\n- 3. On the Work with Source Overlay Fonts display you can select *DEFAULT to specify the default font value of the text element, the box element, or the graphics element. When you print an overlay using *DEFAULT without any changes, the Courier 10 font (FONT ID 11) is sent to the printer. When you use a type 1 printer (IBM 4224/4234/4230) under the printer mode which doesn't have Courier 10, (such as the draft mode of the 4224 printer), you can not print with *ABSOLUTE for the print fidelity. In such cases, select *CONTENT for the print fidelity.\n\n## Page Segment\n\n- 1. The program does not verify if the specified page segment exists. If the page segment does not exist in a library in the library list of the job, errors are issued when your printout is sent to the printer.\n- 2. When a printout with an overlay is sent to the printer, the libraries in the library list of the job that created the printout are searched to locate the specified page segment.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.9763313609467456, + "true_md": "right edge or bottom of the overlay. The position, specified in inches or centimeters, must be inside the overlay when it is expressed in rows and columns. For example:\n\nWhen you use a 300-pel printer to print a text element whose character size is not *DEFAULT, it may not print when the position of the text element is too close to the bottom of the overlay. In such cases, the text element should be moved to an upper location or the height of the overlay size should be increased.\n\nIf a file meets the following four conditions, it is shown on the Work with Source Overlay Files display as a source overlay file even if it is not created as a source overlay file.\n\nIt is recommended that you use files created using the overlay utility.\n\n- 2. When a printout with an overlay is sent to the printer, the libraries in the library list of the job that created the printout are searched to locate the specified page segment.\n\n- 1. The program does not verify if the specified page segment exists. If the page segment does not exist in a library in the library list of the job, errors are issued when your printout is sent to the printer.\n\n- 3. On the Work with Source Overlay Fonts display you can select *DEFAULT to specify the default font value of the text element, the box element, or the graphics element. When you print an overlay using *DEFAULT without any changes, the Courier 10 font (FONT ID 11) is sent to the printer. When you use a type 1 printer (IBM 4224/4234/4230) under the printer mode which doesn’t have Courier 10, (such as the draft mode of the 4224 printer), you can not print with *ABSOLUTE for the print fidelity. In such cases, select *CONTENT for the print fidelity.\n\n- 2. It is not checked if the specified font is an SBCS font or a DBCS font. If you specify a DBCS font for SBCS characters or specify an SBCS font for DBCS characters, the result depends on the text to be printed. The text may be printed with unexpected characters, or not printed with some errors.\n\n- 1. It is not checked if the specified font exists. If the font does not exist, errors are issued when your printout with the overlay is sent to the printer.\n\n- v The record length is 80\n\n- v The file is not a DDM file\n\n- v The file is not a source file\n\n- v The file is a physical file\n\n## Restrictions\n\n## Source Overlay File\n\n## Font\n\n## Page Segment\n\n392 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8762824525557711, + "doc_id": "e07bb917bb1d781a7f73f3e9a51cdbdbd10e8af0eabacd7b0450ba0664010300", + "edit_distance": 0.24782608695652175, + "f1_score": 0.96, + "meteor": 0.9620197427448269, + "precision": 0.9629629629629629, + "pred_md": "After you specify the parameters, press Enter, the F3, or F12 key. The Design display is displayed.\n\nBar Code Data: The following explains the Bar code data prompt in detail. The valid set of characters and data lengths depend on the bar code type.\n\nFor a record layout of the printout format definition (PFD definition), you can enter a variable data field as \" &<field name>. . You can see the list of fields and \" select one of them by placing the cursor in the Bar code data prompt and pressing the F4 key. The following shows valid characters and data lengths for each bar code type:\n\n- v 3-of-9 code, MHI/AIM USD-3\n\nThe following characters are valid.\n\n0123456789 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ -.$/+% blank\n\nThe length of data can be up to 100 characters. When you want to add trailing spaces, enclose the data with apostrophes as follows:\n\n\n\n- v MSI\n\nThe following characters are valid. 0123456789\n\nThe length of data can be up to 15 characters for no check digit, up to 14 for 1 check digit, and up to 13 for 2 check digits. Specify the check digit through the define bar code detail operation. The default is no check digit.\n\n- v UPC/CGPC-Version A\n\nThe following characters are valid. 0123456789\n\nThe length of data can be 11, 13, or 16 characters. The first digit is the number-system digit. The next 10 digits are the article-number digits. If the length of data is 13 characters, the last 2 digits are interpreted as the UPC two-character supplement. If the length of data is 16 characters, the last 5 digits are interpreted as the UPC five-character supplement.\n\n- v UPC/CGPC-Version E\n\nThe following characters are valid.\n\n0123456789\n\nThe length of data can be 10, 12, or 15 characters. From the first 10 digits, the printer generates both the check digit and the six characters to be bar-coded. The check digit is not bar-coded. It is used only to assign odd or even parity to the six bar-coded digits.\n\nIf the length of data is 12 characters, the last 2 digits are interpreted as the UPC two-character supplement. If the length of data is 15 characters, the last 5 digits are interpreted as the UPC five-character supplement.\n\n- v EAN-8 (includes JAN-short)\n\nThe following characters are valid. 0123456789\n\nChapter 13. Design Operation\n\n269", + "recall": 0.9570552147239264, + "true_md": "After you specify the parameters, press Enter, the F3, or F12 key. The Design display is displayed.\n\nBar Code Data: The following explains the Bar code data prompt in detail. The valid set of characters and data lengths depend on the bar code type.\n\nFor a record layout of the printout format definition (PFD definition), you can enter a variable data field as † &<field name>. † . You can see the list of fields and select one of them by placing the cursor in the Bar code data prompt and pressing the F4 key. The following shows valid characters and data lengths for each bar code type:\n\nThe following characters are valid.\n\nThe length of data can be up to 100 characters. When you want to add trailing spaces, enclose the data with apostrophes as follows:\n\nThe length of data can be up to 15 characters for no check digit, up to 14 for 1 check digit, and up to 13 for 2 check digits. Specify the check digit through the define bar code detail operation. The default is no check digit.\n\nThe length of data can be 11, 13, or 16 characters. The first digit is the number-system digit. The next 10 digits are the article-number digits. If the length of data is 13 characters, the last 2 digits are interpreted as the UPC two-character supplement. If the length of data is 16 characters, the last 5 digits are interpreted as the UPC five-character supplement.\n\nThe length of data can be 10, 12, or 15 characters. From the first 10 digits, the printer generates both the check digit and the six characters to be bar-coded. The check digit is not bar-coded. It is used only to assign odd or even parity to the six bar-coded digits.\n\nIf the length of data is 12 characters, the last 2 digits are interpreted as the UPC two-character supplement. If the length of data is 15 characters, the last 5 digits are interpreted as the UPC five-character supplement.\n\nThe following characters are valid. 0123456789\n\nThe following characters are valid. 0123456789\n\nThe following characters are valid. 0123456789\n\nThe following characters are valid. 0123456789\n\n0123456789 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ -.$/+% blank\n\n- v 3-of-9 code, MHI/AIM USD-3\n\n- v MSI\n\n- v UPC/CGPC-Version A\n\n- v UPC/CGPC-Version E\n\n- v EAN-8 (includes JAN-short)\n\nChapter 13. Design Operation 269\n\n'ABC ' |\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_| |\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_ Trailing space" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.3129526951290235, + "doc_id": "92a10f79084595d2d4256d8cf2a7e1f788e893e60b022775d73ffc3b11f9851a", + "edit_distance": 0.6099290780141844, + "f1_score": 0.8605577689243027, + "meteor": 0.46413875962907436, + "precision": 0.8571428571428571, + "pred_md": "Basic English Language Skills\n\n- 13. If, in an exam, you are asked to compare object A and object B, it means that you should:\n- A -Carefully examine them both, and give a judgement or opinion.\n- B -Highlight or point out the differences and similarities between them.\n- C -Show what each object is like.\n- D -Clearly identify the differences between the objects.\n- 14. When sending an e-mail to a colleague, you should NOT:\n- A -Proofread your e-mail before you hit 'send'.\n- B -Structure your message clearly.\n- C -Use a relevant and descriptive subject line.\n- D -Type in ALL CAPS.\n- 15. Punctuation is used to:\n- A -Show emphasis\n- B -Clarify meaning\n- C -Make sentences look neat and tidy\n- D -A and B\n\n## 16. A good summary:\n\n- A -Uses the same words as the ones used in the study material.\n- B -Does not focus on specific keywords.\n- C -Includes examples.\n- D -Is very detailed.\n\n## True or false:\n\n- 17. You do not need to study for an open-book exam.\n- 18. Adding images to flash cards can help you to memorise your work.", + "recall": 0.864, + "true_md": "13. If, in an exam, you are asked to compare object A and object B, it means that you should:\n\n14. When sending an e-mail to a colleague, you should NOT:\n\n15. Punctuation is used to:\n\n16. A good summary:\n\nTrue or false:\n\n- A - Carefully examine them both, and give a judgement or opinion. B - Highlight or point out the differences and similarities\n\n- or opinion. B - Highlight or point out the differences and similarities between them. C - Show what each object is like.\n\n- between them. C - Show what each object is like. D - Clearly identify the differences between the objects.\n\n- C - Show what each object is like. D - Clearly identify the differences between the objects.\n\n- A - Proofread your e-mail before you hit ‘send’. B - Structure your message clearly.\n\n- A - Proofread your e-mail before you hit ‘send’. B - Structure your message clearly. C - Use a relevant and descriptive subject line.\n\n- B - Structure your message clearly. C - Use a relevant and descriptive subject line. D - Type in ALL CAPS.\n\n- C - Use a relevant and descriptive subject line. D - Type in ALL CAPS.\n\n- A - Show emphasis B - Clarify meaning\n\n- A - Show emphasis B - Clarify meaning C - Make sentences look neat and tidy\n\n- B - Clarify meaning C - Make sentences look neat and tidy D - A and B\n\n- C - Make sentences look neat and tidy D - A and B\n\n- A - Uses the same words as the ones used in the study material. B - Does not focus on specific keywords.\n\n- A - Uses the same words as the ones used in the study material. B - Does not focus on specific keywords. C - Includes examples.\n\n- B - Does not focus on specific keywords. C - Includes examples. D - Is very detailed.\n\n- C - Includes examples. D - Is very detailed.\n\n- 17. You do not need to study for an open-book exam.\n\n- 18. Adding images to flash cards can help you to memorise your work.\n\nBasic English Language Skills" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.2494364392913866, + "doc_id": "8049a5794064618ca2e332a8e0d20ed54609fe2da45f6cc9f0141aefa7630613", + "edit_distance": 0.6428571428571429, + "f1_score": 0.7216494845360825, + "meteor": 0.46148349081666845, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Placing a Graphics Element\n\nNote: If your selected printer does not support graphics, skip this section.\n\nNow, place a graphics element at the bottom of the overlay.\n\n## Example Actions:\n\n- 1. Move the cursor to position (Across : 5, Down : 28) to place a graphics element.\n- 2. Press the F13 key, then press the F6 key.\n\nThe following display appears.\n\nExample Action: Move the cursor to the right bottom corner of the graphics area (Across: 25, Down: 34) and press the PF6 key again.\n\nThe following display appears.\n\nChapter 3. Getting Started with the Overlay Utility\n\n43", + "recall": 0.5645161290322581, + "true_md": "## Placing a Graphics Element\n\nNote: If your selected printer does not support graphics, skip this section.\n\nNow, place a graphics element at the bottom of the overlay.\n\nThe following display appears.\n\nExample Action: Move the cursor to the right bottom corner of the graphics area (Across: 25, Down: 34) and press the PF6 key again.\n\nThe following display appears.\n\n## Example Actions:\n\n- 1. Move the cursor to position (Across : 5, Down : 28) to place a graphics element.\n\n- 2. Press the F13 key, then press the F6 key.\n\nDesign Overlay Columns: 1- 74 Control . . \\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_ Source overlay.....STATIONERY *...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7.... 025 : *T018 : 026 +------------------------------------------------------+ 027 028 %G029 029 030 031 032 033 *T027 o. 5A-3233-01 034 *C028 035 036 037 038 039 040 041 More... F3=Exit F5=Refresh F6=Place graphics F12=Cancel F15=Mark on/off F16=Hide F19=Left F20=Right Specify opposite corner of graphics block and press F6.\n\nChapter 3. Getting Started with the Overlay Utility 43" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8868816637046427, + "doc_id": "5fe7b5fbeb4068a6823a42370efdedb28618f7a22e145c6c57ba2863309cb8e8", + "edit_distance": 0.1836734693877551, + "f1_score": 0.9517241379310347, + "meteor": 0.9724185845972984, + "precision": 0.92, + "pred_md": "Choice on the Define Box Detail display:\n\nFormat : 3=Vertical, right to left Degree of rotation : 90\n\nChoice on the Define Overlay Specifications display or the Define PFD Specifications Display:\n\nDegree of rotation : 90\n\nFigure 48. Print Example - 15\n\nFigure 48. Print Example - 15\n\n## Shading Pattern in Box\n\nYou can specify the shading in a box element in the Shading pattern prompt and the Shading type prompt on the Define Box Detail display.\n\nWhen standard shading is selected, the degree of shading increases with the percentage the same way it does for screen shading. The difference between the two is that screen shading produces a screen-like pattern and standard shading produces a dot matrix not intended to be a pattern.\n\nAppendix B. Rotation, Format, and Shading Pattern in Box\n\n435", + "recall": 0.9857142857142858, + "true_md": "Choice on the Define Box Detail display:\n\nFormat : 3=Vertical, right to left Degree of rotation : 90\n\nChoice on the Define Overlay Specifications display or the Define PFD Specifications Display:\n\nDegree of rotation : 90\n\nYou can specify the shading in a box element in the Shading pattern prompt and the Shading type prompt on the Define Box Detail display.\n\nWhen standard shading is selected, the degree of shading increases with the percentage the same way it does for screen shading. The difference between the two is that screen shading produces a screen-like pattern and standard shading produces a dot matrix not intended to be a pattern.\n\nAppendix B. Rotation, Format, and Shading Pattern in Box 435\n\n## Shading Pattern in Box\n\nFigure48.PrintExample-15" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.12218939519846472, + "doc_id": "a5fa28a7e5155972aac081f40acf1ee1befd766d0703374670252e0bb0c28f37", + "edit_distance": 0.8459302325581395, + "f1_score": 0.5923344947735192, + "meteor": 0.43889893095078253, + "precision": 0.8018867924528302, + "pred_md": "## EXCEL TRAINING MANUAL\n\nThe first argument to INDEX is A2 through B6, our lookup array. Next we need the row and we want the MATCH function to determine which row the product motor oil is in, so we enter as the second argument to INDEX: MATCH(A10,A2:A6,0)\n\nThe lookup value we want is in cell A10, which is motor oil, so A10 is the first argument to MATCH. Then the lookup array is just A2 through A6, so that's the second argument to the MATCH function, and we want an exact match, so type 0 for the final argument to the MATCH function. So, MATCH will try to find the row number in which Motor oil is.\n\nThen we have to tell the INDEX function which column to look in to return a value after we've found our product, so that will be column 2 of our table, which has the number in stock. argument to the INDEX function, then hit enters and there we have it! It returns the number 33, which is the correct amount of widgets in stock. products in cell works correctly. So, we can see that the INDEX function is very similar to both VLOOKUP and HLOOKUP. So type Try typing 2, as the in A10 to see if final different it\n\nPage 14 /g3", + "recall": 0.4696132596685083, + "true_md": "EXCE L L TRAIN N ING MA A NUAL\n\nThe and we e first argum we want th enter as the s ment to INDE he MATCH f second argu EX is A2 thr function to d ument to IND rough B6, ou determine w DEX: MATC ur lookup ar which row th CH(A10,A2:A rray. Next w he product m A6,0) we need the motor oil is i e row in, so \n\nThe MAT MAT MAT lookup valu TCH. Then t TCH functio TCH functio ue we want the lookup a on, and we on. So, MAT is in cell A1 array is just A want an ex TCH will try 0, which is m A2 through xact match, y to find the motor oil, so A6, so that’s so type 0 fo row number o A10 is the s the second or the final r in which M first argume d argument t argument t Motor oil is. ent to to the o the \n\nThen func retu prod our stock argu then It re the stock prod work the to bo n we have ction which rn a value a duct, so that table, which k. So typ ument to th n hit enters a eturns the n correct am k. Try t y ducts in ce ks correctly INDEX fun oth VLOOK to tell the column to l after we’ve fo t will be colu h has the nu pe 2, as t he INDEX and there we number 33, mount of wi yping in ell A10 to . So, we can ction is very UP and HLO e INDEX ook in to ound our umn 2 of umber in the final function, e have it! which is idgets in different see if it n see that y similar OOKUP. \n\nPage 14 GLYPH<g3>" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.38050105371888165, + "doc_id": "0b18d9a19d6ec14080f55340223ba938cbe489d97cf39ea2ab71e8f63820702c", + "edit_distance": 0.9130434782608695, + "f1_score": 0.6923076923076922, + "meteor": 0.8328191489361703, + "precision": 0.5454545454545454, + "pred_md": "Choice on the Define Box Detail display:\n\nFormat : 3=Vertical, right to left Degree of rotation : 180\n\nFigure 46. Print Example - 13\n\nFigure 46. Print Example - 13\n\nAppendix B. Rotation, Format, and Shading Pattern in Box\n\n433", + "recall": 0.9473684210526315, + "true_md": "Figure46.PrintExample-13\n\nAppendix B. Rotation, Format, and Shading Pattern in Box 433\n\nChoice on the Define Box Detail display:" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.47239304936448184, + "doc_id": "96132796cce526bec7fea4641283ab523ea48acf1564d4a5e855e428e974cdb2", + "edit_distance": 0.5277777777777778, + "f1_score": 0.7591836734693876, + "meteor": 0.6277605229022234, + "precision": 0.9117647058823529, + "pred_md": "288\n\nFigure 20. Position and Distance of the Record in the Page Layout\n\nFigure 20. Position and Distance of the Record in the Page Layout\n\nPress Enter, the F3, or F12 key after you specify the parameters. You return to the Design display.\n\n## Copy, Move, and Remove an Existing Element\n\nIn the screen view, you can copy, move, or remove the existing elements on the image area.\n\n## Element Edit\n\nYou can copy, move, or remove a single element through the element edit operation. The following example explains how to copy an element.\n\n- Step 1. Scroll the window to display the element to be edited.\n- Step 2. Place the cursor at the element mark to be edited.\n- Step 3. Press the F21 key to begin the element edit operation. In the following example, *T001 is selected as the element for the element edit. The asterisk (*) changes to a percent (%) to show the source element, and the function keys for the element edit appear at the lower part of the image area as follows.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.6503496503496503, + "true_md": "Figure20.PositionandDistanceoftheRecordinthePageLayout\n\nPress Enter, the F3, or F12 key after you specify the parameters. You return to the Design display.\n\nIn the screen view, you can copy, move, or remove the existing elements on the image area.\n\nYou can copy, move, or remove a single element through the element edit operation. The following example explains how to copy an element.\n\n- Step 1. Scroll the window to display the element to be edited.\n\n- Step 2. Place the cursor at the element mark to be edited.\n\n- Step 3. Press the F21 key to begin the element edit operation. In the following example, *T001 is selected as the element for the element edit. The asterisk (*) changes to a percent (%) to show the source element, and the function keys for the element edit appear at the lower part of the image area as follows.\n\n288 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\n## Copy, Move, and Remove an Existing Element\n\n## Element Edit\n\nDesign Overlay Columns: 1- 74 Control . . Source overlay . . . . . SAMPLE *...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7.... 001 002 003 004 005 006 %T001 s an example. 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 More... F3=Exit F6=Copy F9=Move F10=Remove F12=Cancel F19=Left F20=Right F24=More keys Specify destination, press F6, F9, or F10." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4873798785689997, + "doc_id": "14f80aa873ac62e5be74920da87a6dcbc74163ea8fb216c0e260d8930b90b15d", + "edit_distance": 0.7435897435897436, + "f1_score": 0.7924528301886793, + "meteor": 0.8100928388494878, + "precision": 0.7241379310344828, + "pred_md": "424\n\nChoice on the Define Box Detail display:\n\nFormat : 1=Horizontal Degree of rotation : 270\n\nFigure 37. Print Example - 4\n\nFigure 37. Print Example - 4\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.875, + "true_md": "Choice on the Define Box Detail display:\n\nFigure37.PrintExample-4\n\n424 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\nFormat : 1=Horizontal Degree of rotation : 270" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8757918372940484, + "doc_id": "47b742483ce237da44e9deda5b788606ceba6307517342fea6a47e3a5ebb44c4", + "edit_distance": 0.09615384615384616, + "f1_score": 0.9210526315789472, + "meteor": 0.9476458813206099, + "precision": 0.9090909090909091, + "pred_md": "Basic English Language Skils\n\n## CHAPTER 4:\n\n## COMMONLY CONFUSED WORDS AND PHRASES\n\nWords are the building blocks of our language, and choosing the correct words is vital for communicating effectively. Choosing the correct word in a given situation can make the difference between getting your point across clearly and offending your audience unintentionally.\n\nUnfortunately, English is a tricky language, filled with many confus -ing words and phrases. And as a result, it's often difficult to remember which words you need to use in a particular context.\n\nD\n\neveloped for Oxbridge Academy", + "recall": 0.9333333333333333, + "true_md": "## CHAPTER 4:\n\n## COMMONLY CONFUSED WORDS AND PHRASES\n\nWords are the building blocks of our language, and choosing the correct words is vital for communicating effectively. Choosing the correct word in a given situation can make the difference between getting your point across clearly and offending your audience unintentionally.\n\nUnfortunately, English is a tricky language, filled with many confus - ing words and phrases. And as a result, it’s often difficult to remember which words you need to use in a particular context.\n\nDeveloped for Oxbridge Academy" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.32085673453450686, + "doc_id": "4dcf1c69fe7ed1c5a14cce01d53fd7c2f43a66859784d380564a5da455c93392", + "edit_distance": 0.7290322580645161, + "f1_score": 0.7832167832167831, + "meteor": 0.5392699751110455, + "precision": 0.9333333333333333, + "pred_md": "## 5=Display Font\n\n304\n\nTo display the font, do the following on the Work with Source Overlay Fonts display or the Work with PFD Definition Fonts display.\n\n- 1. Type 5 in the Opt. column beside the font number you want to display.\n- 2. Press Enter.\n\n## Display Font (Font Type=1):\n\nOn this display, you can see the definition of a type 1 font in detail.\n\nTable 66. Display PFD Definition Font display fields\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.6746987951807228, + "true_md": "## Display PFD Definition Font\n\nFont number ........: 1 Font type .........: Font and character identifier Font: Identifier . . ......: 11 Point size . . . . . . . . : *NONE Character identifier: Graphic character set . . : *SYSVAL Code page ........: Text............: 10CPICourier Press Enter to continue. F3=Exit F12=Cancel\n\nTo display the font, do the following on the Work with Source Overlay Fonts display or the Work with PFD Definition Fonts display.\n\nDisplay Font (Font Type=1):\n\nOn this display, you can see the definition of a type 1 font in detail.\n\nTable66.DisplayPFDDefinitionFontdisplayfields\n\n- 1. Type 5 in the Opt. column beside the font number you want to display.\n\n- 2. Press Enter.\n\n## 5=Display Font\n\n304 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9194586053622327, + "doc_id": "1968661b2d6142108270ae52f23dca9d8f9c57e642883a8b22fe3b39865f8b06", + "edit_distance": 0.6963906581740976, + "f1_score": 0.9581993569131833, + "meteor": 0.8547347075080584, + "precision": 0.9675324675324676, + "pred_md": "100\n\nYou can also print variable data, such as the field value of the first record in the group, the field value of the last record in the group, the total of the field values in the group, the average of the field values in the group, the maximum field value in the group, the minimum field value in the group, and the record counts of the group, by specifying character strings which are called summary data in the text data on a text element or a box element.\n\n## Elements\n\nThe record layout and the page layout are defined by placing text, page segments, lines, boxes, graphics, or bar codes, which are called elements .\n\nThe data in the database file record can be specified as text elements, bar code elements, the text in box elements, page segments, or graphics elements in a record layout.\n\nThe fixed data can be specified as text elements, line elements, box elements, bar code elements, page segment elements, or graphics elements in the record layout or the page layout.\n\nIf you print data in a field as a text element, text in a box element, a bar code element, a page segment, or a graphics element, specify the field name which is appended by an ampersand (&) before the name and a period (.) after the name as a parameter of the element data.\n\nSee 'Chapter 13. Design Operation' on page 227 for more information.\n\n## Record Selection\n\nYou can specify a condition for the field in the database file record to select data in the field to be printed. When you don't specify this option, all data in the database file record is printed.\n\n## Printout Specifications\n\nThe Define Printout Specifications display allows you to define how the printout will be printed, such as:\n\n- v Number of copies\n- v Print quality\n- v Source drawer\n\n## Mapping Object Name\n\nYou can specify a field name as any of the following object names:\n\n- v Page segment\n- v Folder\n- v PC document\n- v Library\n- v File\n- v Member\n\nThe value of the field in the input database file is used as the object name. In some cases, the values in the database file may not be appropriate for object names. For example, values like 'A.B.C' or 'IBM Corporation' cannot be object names. You do\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.9490445859872612, + "true_md": "You can also print variable data, such as the field value of the first record in the group, the field value of the last record in the group, the total of the field values in the group, the average of the field values in the group, the maximum field value in the group, the minimum field value in the group, and the record counts of the group, by specifying character strings which are called summary data in the text data on a text element or a box element.\n\n## Elements\n\n## Record Selection\n\n## Printout Specifications\n\n## Mapping Object Name\n\n100 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\nThe value of the field in the input database file is used as the object name. In some cases, the values in the database file may not be appropriate for object names. For example, values like ’A.B.C’ or ’IBM Corporation’ cannot be object names. You do\n\nYou can specify a field name as any of the following object names:\n\nThe Define Printout Specifications display allows you to define how the printout will be printed, such as:\n\nYou can specify a condition for the field in the database file record to select data in the field to be printed. When you don’t specify this option, all data in the database file record is printed.\n\nSee “Chapter 13. Design Operation” on page 227 for more information.\n\nIf you print data in a field as a text element, text in a box element, a bar code element, a page segment, or a graphics element, specify the field name which is appended by an ampersand (&) before the name and a period (.) after the name as a parameter of the element data.\n\nThe fixed data can be specified as text elements, line elements, box elements, bar code elements, page segment elements, or graphics elements in the record layout or the page layout.\n\nThe data in the database file record can be specified as text elements, bar code elements, the text in box elements, page segments, or graphics elements in a record layout.\n\nThe record layout and the page layout are defined by placing text, page segments, lines, boxes, graphics, or bar codes, which are called elements .\n\n- v Number of copies\n\n- v Print quality\n\n- v Source drawer\n\n- v Page segment\n\n- v Folder\n\n- v PC document\n\n- v Library\n\n- v File\n\n- v Member" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4659657276417695, + "doc_id": "1ccd4f449db4ca44d339fab972108d27a36d7088bae0123b868d6fc68b63eb08", + "edit_distance": 0.4482758620689655, + "f1_score": 0.7499999999999999, + "meteor": 0.7894438781288936, + "precision": 0.6666666666666666, + "pred_md": "84\n\nThe following table explains each field on this display.\n\nTable 10. Work with Source Overlay File display fields\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.8571428571428571, + "true_md": "The following table explains each field on this display.\n\nTable10.WorkwithSourceOverlayFiledisplayfields\n\n84 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6635524131935165, + "doc_id": "c73162fefe44ea7b4bc3a227c8f03dec98c8c63a34f1a69b487d58bbba82d586", + "edit_distance": 0.3548387096774194, + "f1_score": 0.85, + "meteor": 0.9070727187526625, + "precision": 0.7906976744186046, + "pred_md": "Table 106. Tasks related to overlay specifications and PFD specifications\n\n## Tasks Related to Font\n\nNote: The following description assumes that you are on one of the following displays:\n\nThe Work with Source Overlay Fonts display\n\nThe Work with PFD Definition Fonts display\n\nTable 107. Tasks related to font\n\nAppendix E. How to Do a Task\n\n455", + "recall": 0.918918918918919, + "true_md": "Table106.TasksrelatedtooverlayspecificationsandPFDspecifications\n\nTable107.Tasksrelatedtofont\n\n- Note: The following description assumes that you are on one of the following displays:\n\nThe Work with Source Overlay Fonts display\n\nThe Work with PFD Definition Fonts display\n\n## Tasks Related to Font\n\nAppendix E. How to Do a Task 455" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8775664656161726, + "doc_id": "9b699ccc91f3a17495475e2b8309fb5c957def5cb6d5cf88440a2c90481764ca", + "edit_distance": 0.7388059701492538, + "f1_score": 0.963963963963964, + "meteor": 0.7367190150721874, + "precision": 0.9727272727272728, + "pred_md": "108\n\n## Example Actions:\n\n- 1. Type 1 (Create) in the Opt column on the first line of the list.\n- 2. Type PFDFILE in the File column on the first line of the list.\n- 3. Type MYLIB in the Library column on the first line of the list.\n- 4. Press the Enter key.\n\nThe Create PFD Definition File display appears:\n\n## From this display you can specify:\n\n- v Whether or not DBCS data will be used (only when you are on a DBCS system).\n- v A short description of the PFD definition file up to 50 SBCS characters long. This description is saved with the PFD definition file and displayed when the PFD definition files are listed to help you to identify the PFD definition files.\n- v Authority given to users who do not have specific authority to the PFD definition file.\n\n## Example Actions:\n\n- 1. Do not change the default value for the User specified DBCS data prompt.\n\nNote: This prompt appears only when your system is DBCS capable.\n\n- 2. Type PFD file for exercise for the Text 'description' prompt.\n- 3. Press the Enter key.\n\nWhen the PFD definition file is created, the Work with PFD Definitions display appears to create a PFD definition in the file.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.9553571428571429, + "true_md": "## Example Actions:\n\nThe Create PFD Definition File display appears:\n\nFrom this display you can specify:\n\nWhen the PFD definition file is created, the Work with PFD Definitions display appears to create a PFD definition in the file.\n\n108 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\n## Example Actions:\n\n- 1. Do not change the default value for the User specified DBCS data prompt.\n\n- 2. Type PFD file for exercise for the Text ’description’ prompt.\n\n- 3. Press the Enter key.\n\n- v Authority given to users who do not have specific authority to the PFD definition file.\n\n- v A short description of the PFD definition file up to 50 SBCS characters long. This description is saved with the PFD definition file and displayed when the PFD definition files are listed to help you to identify the PFD definition files.\n\n- v Whether or not DBCS data will be used (only when you are on a DBCS system).\n\n- 1. Type 1 (Create) in the Opt column on the first line of the list.\n\n- 2. Type PFDFILE in the File column on the first line of the list.\n\n- 3. Type MYLIB in the Library column on the first line of the list.\n\n- 4. Press the Enter key.\n\nF3=Exit F5=Refresh F12=Cancel\n\n## Create PFD Definition File\n\nNote: This prompt appears only when your system is DBCS capable." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.005018659574590816, + "doc_id": "db5290c7b27912e025ad1bd6fa33ce76a2da8ee8f6e0a8e124a95c3ceae5cc81", + "edit_distance": 0.8557213930348259, + "f1_score": 0.5333333333333333, + "meteor": 0.20455759022197756, + "precision": 0.975609756097561, + "pred_md": "44\n\n## Example Actions:\n\n- 1. Type 2 in the Source object type prompt.\n- 2. Press the Enter key.\n\n## The following display appears.\n\n## Example Actions:\n\n- 1. Type QAFCGRPH in the File prompt.\n- 2. Type QGPL in the Library prompt.\n- 3. Press the Enter key.\n- *FIRST in the Member prompt changes to QAFCGDF .\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.3669724770642202, + "true_md": "Design Overlay Columns: 1- 74 Control . . \\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_ Source overlay.....STATIONERY *...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7.... 025 : *T018 : 026 +------------------------------------------------------+ 027 028 %G029 -------------+ 029 : : 030 031 : : 032 More... Place Graphics Mark......:*G029 Measurement method....:Row/Column Start position . . Across 5 Down 28 End position . . . Across 25 34 Source object type . 2 1=PC document, 2=File F3=Exit F5=Refresh F6=Change measurement method F12=Cancel F15=Mark on/off F16=Hide F19=Left F20=Right\n\nDesign Overlay Columns: 1- 74 Control . . \\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_ Source overlay.....STATIONERY *...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7.... 025 : *T018 : 026 +------------------------------------------------------+ 027 028 %G029 --------------+ 029 : : 030 031 : : 032 More... Place Graphics Mark......:*G029 Measurement method....:Row/Column Start position . . Across 5 Down 28 End position . . . Across 25 34 Source object type . 2 1=PC document, 2=File File........ QAFCGRPH Name Library ..... QGPL Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB Member . . . .... *FIRST Name, *FIRST F3=Exit F4=Detail F6=Change measurement method F12=Cancel F24=More keys\n\n## Example Actions:\n\n- 1. Type 2 in the Source object type prompt.\n\n- 2. Press the Enter key.\n\nThe following display appears.\n\n*FIRST in the Member prompt changes to QAFCGDF .\n\n## Example Actions:\n\n- 1. Type QAFCGRPH in the File prompt.\n\n- 2. Type QGPL in the Library prompt.\n\n- 3. Press the Enter key.\n\n44 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.798785152295643, + "doc_id": "5c0d76d71b6bba49f411250557f8724cffa4098b8c56d5ae721e1f815af76550", + "edit_distance": 0.5054945054945055, + "f1_score": 0.929936305732484, + "meteor": 0.9169593136854686, + "precision": 0.9012345679012346, + "pred_md": "Table 7. Confirm Delete of Elements display fields (continued)\n\n## Work with Source Overlay Fonts\n\nThe Work with Source Overlay Fonts display appears. For the work with fonts operation, see 'Chapter 14. Work with Fonts' on page 297.\n\n## Design Overlay\n\nYou can design a source overlay on the Design Overlay display. In a source overlay, you can define the following elements:\n\n- v Text\n- v Line\n- v Box\n- v Bar code\n- v Page segment\n- v Graphics\n\nFor more information about the design operation of a source overlay, see 'Chapter 13. Design Operation' on page 227.\n\n## Saving a Source Overlay\n\nWhen you create a source overlay, do the following to save it.\n\nStep 1. Press the F3 key on the Design Overlay display.\n\nStep 2. The Create Source Overlay display appears.\n\nPress the F3 key.\n\nStep 3. The following display appears.\n\nChapter 5. Work with Source Overlays\n\n73", + "recall": 0.9605263157894737, + "true_md": "Table7.ConfirmDeleteofElementsdisplayfields (continued)\n\nThe Work with Source Overlay Fonts display appears. For the work with fonts operation, see “Chapter 14. Work with Fonts” on page 297.\n\nYou can design a source overlay on the Design Overlay display. In a source overlay, you can define the following elements:\n\nFor more information about the design operation of a source overlay, see “Chapter 13. Design Operation” on page 227.\n\nWhen you create a source overlay, do the following to save it.\n\n## Work with Source Overlay Fonts\n\n## Design Overlay\n\n- v Text\n\n- v Line\n\n- v Box\n\n- v Bar code\n\n- v Page segment\n\n- v Graphics\n\n## Saving a Source Overlay\n\n- Step 1. Press the F3 key on the Design Overlay display.\n\n- Step 2. The Create Source Overlay display appears. Press the F3 key.\n\n- Step 3. The following display appears.\n\nChapter 5. Work with Source Overlays 73" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "65775456a793c931565b1e160599ed957a01d43966cce81cff23d4b80d135a31", + "edit_distance": 0.9872340425531915, + "f1_score": 0.21276595744680854, + "meteor": 0.1375, + "precision": 0.1388888888888889, + "pred_md": "## EXCEL TRAINING MANUAL\n\n| COUNT FUNCTIONS ..................................................................................................................... 16 | COUNT FUNCTIONS ..................................................................................................................... 16 |\n|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|\n| 6.1 HOW TO APPLY FORMULA ................................................................................................ 16 | 6.1 HOW TO APPLY FORMULA ................................................................................................ 16 |\n| 6.1.1 | COUNT .............................................................................................................................. 16 |\n| 6.1.2 | COUNTA ........................................................................................................................... 17 |\n| 6.1.3 | COUNTBLANK ................................................................................................................ 17 |\n| 6.1.4 | COUNTIF .......................................................................................................................... 17 |\n| PIVOT TABLE .................................................................................................................................. 18 | PIVOT TABLE .................................................................................................................................. 18 |\n| 7.1 | HOW TO APPLY ..................................................................................................................... 18 |\n\nPage 2 /g3", + "recall": 0.45454545454545453, + "true_md": "EXCEL TRAINING MANUAL\n\nPage 2 GLYPH<g3>" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8698676499301964, + "doc_id": "204c94c11b179ac52d1fca83dc13a39be5102f92e71b9bd75987721ba09e958e", + "edit_distance": 0.2442159383033419, + "f1_score": 0.9790209790209791, + "meteor": 0.9318330535504327, + "precision": 0.9790209790209791, + "pred_md": "Note:\n\n## *OVLTXT\n\nSpecifies the same description of the overlay specified in the overlay object.\n\n'description'\n\nSpecify the description of the member.\n\nReplace (REPLACE)\n\nSpecifies whether or not the physical file member replaces the existing physical file member if a physical file member of the same name already exists in the library.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\n*NO\n\n*YES\n\nA new physical file member is not created if an old physical file member of the same name already exists in the library.\n\nA new physical file member is created and the old physical file member is replaced by it.\n\n## Create file (CRTFILE)\n\nSpecifies whether or not the file is created if the file does not exist.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\n*NO\n\nDo not create the file.\n\n*YES\n\nCreate the file.\n\nText 'description' (FILETEXT)\n\nSpecifies text that briefly describes the file and its function. This prompt is valid only when the CRTFILE parameter is *YES. The description should be specified with no more than 50 characters of text and enclosed in apostrophes.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\n*BLANK\n\nNo text is specified.\n\n'description'\n\nSpecify the description of the file.\n\nBefore you use an overlay in the target system, you have to verify that the necessary resources to use that overlay (for example, font and page segment), are in the target system. Only transferring an overlay may be insufficient. You also have to check the version and the supported structured fields of the target system's PSF*.\n\nAn overlay which can be used on the iSeries system cannot necessarily be used on the target system.\n\n## CVTPAGSPFM (Convert Page Segment to Physical File Member) Command\n\nThis command allows you to convert a page segment to a member in a physical database file. The page segment converted to a physical database file can be transferred to the VM, the MVS, and the OS/2 system.\n\nChapter 21. AFP Utilities for iSeries Commands\n\n387", + "recall": 0.9790209790209791, + "true_md": "## *OVLTXT\n\n## Replace (REPLACE)\n\n## Create file (CRTFILE)\n\n## Text ’description’ (FILETEXT)\n\n## *BLANK\n\n## ’description’\n\n## CVTPAGSPFM (Convert Page Segment to Physical File Member) Command\n\nSpecifies the same description of the overlay specified in the overlay object.\n\n’description’\n\nSpecify the description of the member.\n\nSpecifies whether or not the physical file member replaces the existing physical file member if a physical file member of the same name already exists in the library.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\n- *NO A new physical file member is not created if an old physical file member of the same name already exists in the library.\n\n- *YES A new physical file member is created and the old physical file member is replaced by it.\n\nSpecifies whether or not the file is created if the file does not exist.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\n- *NO Do not create the file.\n\n- *YES Create the file.\n\nSpecifies text that briefly describes the file and its function. This prompt is valid only when the CRTFILE parameter is *YES. The description should be specified with no more than 50 characters of text and enclosed in apostrophes.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\nNo text is specified.\n\nSpecify the description of the file.\n\n- Note: Before you use an overlay in the target system, you have to verify that the necessary resources to use that overlay (for example, font and page segment), are in the target system. Only transferring an overlay may be insufficient. You also have to check the version and the supported structured fields of the target system’s PSF*.\n\nAn overlay which can be used on the iSeries system cannot necessarily be used on the target system.\n\nThis command allows you to convert a page segment to a member in a physical database file. The page segment converted to a physical database file can be transferred to the VM, the MVS, and the OS/2 system.\n\nChapter 21. AFP Utilities for iSeries Commands 387" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.24078435074822624, + "doc_id": "ed32a721aa04e591eeec7fd2bba3b7abfd104895569d667c27bc63bf100ea95d", + "edit_distance": 0.6666666666666666, + "f1_score": 0.5925925925925926, + "meteor": 0.6657318376068376, + "precision": 0.5, + "pred_md": "18\n\nTable 2. Summary of AFP Utilities Function Keys\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.7272727272727273, + "true_md": "Table2.SummaryofAFPUtilitiesFunctionKeys\n\n18 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9229573852898861, + "doc_id": "3a8fb4655f8b9f67ffdeb3a204c4e9f01abf0e6784f15ab432b22e16736058e6", + "edit_distance": 0.42443729903536975, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.8947543820391539, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Notices\n\nReferences in this publication to products or services of IBM do not suggest or imply that IBM will make them available in all countries where IBM does business or that only products or services of IBM may be used. Noninfringing equivalents may be substituted, but the user must verify that such substitutes, unless expressly designated by IBM, work correctly. No license, expressed or implied, to patents or copyrights of IBM is granted by furnishing this document. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to the IBM Director of Licensing, IBM Corporation, 500 Columbus Avenue, Thornwood, NY 10594, USA.\n\nLicensees of this program who wish to have information about it for the purpose of enabling: (1) the exchange of information between independently created programs and other programs (including this one) and (2) the mutual use of the information, which has been exchanged, should contact: IBM Corporation, Printing Systems Company Legal Department, Mail Drop 001W, Boulder, Colorado 80301 USA. Such information may be available, subject to appropriate terms and conditions, including in some cases, payment of a fee.\n\n## Trademarks and Service Marks\n\nThe following terms, denoted by an asterisk (*) in this publication, are trademarks of the IBM Corporation in the United States or other countries or both:\n\nAdvanced Function Presentation\n\nOS/2\n\nAdvanced Function Printing\n\nOS/400\n\nAFP\n\nPersonal Computer AT\n\nApplication System/400\n\nPersonal System/2\n\nAS/400\n\nPrint Services Facility\n\nBCOCA\n\nPSF\n\nGDDM\n\nSystem/370\n\nIBM\n\n400\n\nIPDS\n\niSeries\n\nMAPICS\n\nOther company, product and service names, which may be denoted by a double asterisk (**), may be trademarks or service marks of others.\n\nxv", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## Notices\n\n## Trademarks and Service Marks\n\nThe following terms, denoted by an asterisk (*) in this publication, are trademarks of the IBM Corporation in the United States or other countries or both:\n\nAdvanced Function Presentation Advanced Function Printing AFP Application System/400 AS/400 BCOCA GDDM IBM IPDS MAPICS\n\nOS/2 OS/400 Personal Computer AT Personal System/2 Print Services Facility PSF System/370 400 iSeries\n\nReferences in this publication to products or services of IBM do not suggest or imply that IBM will make them available in all countries where IBM does business or that only products or services of IBM may be used. Noninfringing equivalents may be substituted, but the user must verify that such substitutes, unless expressly designated by IBM, work correctly. No license, expressed or implied, to patents or copyrights of IBM is granted by furnishing this document. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to the IBM Director of Licensing, IBM Corporation, 500 Columbus Avenue, Thornwood, NY 10594, USA.\n\nLicensees of this program who wish to have information about it for the purpose of enabling: (1) the exchange of information between independently created programs and other programs (including this one) and (2) the mutual use of the information, which has been exchanged, should contact: IBM Corporation, Printing Systems Company Legal Department, Mail Drop 001W, Boulder, Colorado 80301 USA. Such information may be available, subject to appropriate terms and conditions, including in some cases, payment of a fee.\n\nOther company, product and service names, which may be denoted by a double asterisk (**), may be trademarks or service marks of others.\n\nxv" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8850173108378735, + "doc_id": "a5f06cf1a6d3e270c43e3a550840f610d64fec8d50c6a9e8f29e0a348974554f", + "edit_distance": 0.5670103092783505, + "f1_score": 0.9395973154362416, + "meteor": 0.8615586084680503, + "precision": 0.9333333333333333, + "pred_md": "## 2=Change Source Overlay File Description\n\nTo change the source overlay file description, do the following on the Work with Source Overlay Files display.\n\n- 1. Type a 2 in the Opt column beside the source overlay file for which you want to change the description.\n- 2. Press Enter.\n\nThe Change Source Overlay File display appears:\n\n```\nChange Source Overlay File File . . . . . . . . . . . . : OUFILE Library . . . . . . . . . : OULIB Type choices, press Enter. Text 'description' . . . . . File for source overlays F3=Exit F5=Refresh F12=Cancel\n```\n\nUsing the Change Source Overlay File display, you can change the description text of a source overlay file.\n\nSpecifies a new text description of the source overlay file.\n\nThe following table explains each field of the Change Source Overlay File display.\n\nTable 15. Change Source Overlay File display fields\n\nPress the Enter key after you specify the choices.\n\nChapter 6. Work with Source Overlay Files\n\n91", + "recall": 0.9459459459459459, + "true_md": "## 2=Change Source Overlay File Description\n\nTo change the source overlay file description, do the following on the Work with Source Overlay Files display.\n\nThe Change Source Overlay File display appears:\n\n- 1. Type a 2 in the Opt column beside the source overlay file for which you want to change the description.\n\n- 2. Press Enter.\n\nUsing the Change Source Overlay File display, you can change the description text of a source overlay file.\n\nSpecifies a new text description of the source overlay file.\n\nThe following table explains each field of the Change Source Overlay File display.\n\nPress the Enter key after you specify the choices.\n\nTable15.ChangeSourceOverlayFiledisplayfields\n\n## Change Source Overlay File\n\nFile............: OUFILE Library . . .......: OULIB Type choices, press Enter. Text 'description' . .... File for source overlays F3=Exit F5=Refresh F12=Cancel\n\nChapter 6. Work with Source Overlay Files 91" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.38634042246831324, + "doc_id": "64481b86f57508993d8c03ef246f28e1c95bd6e916a00dfc1eed16db788f4e91", + "edit_distance": 0.5454545454545454, + "f1_score": 0.7741935483870969, + "meteor": 0.7915173237753884, + "precision": 0.7058823529411765, + "pred_md": "## Options\n\n## Columns\n\nTable 42. Work with PFD Definition Files options\n\nTable 43. Work with PFD Definition Files columns\n\nChapter 11. Work with PFD Definition Files\n\n207", + "recall": 0.8571428571428571, + "true_md": "## Options\n\n## Columns\n\nTable43.WorkwithPFDDefinitionFilescolumns\n\nTable42.WorkwithPFDDefinitionFilesoptions\n\nChapter 11. Work with PFD Definition Files 207" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4489771072202117, + "doc_id": "ccbe08f3390d47046dbb9d4c839788ba05a0f5e139ab6931a06e8304247c54f0", + "edit_distance": 0.42105263157894735, + "f1_score": 0.8333333333333334, + "meteor": 0.8573566733910326, + "precision": 0.7692307692307693, + "pred_md": "## Options\n\nTable 4. Work with Source Overlays options\n\nChapter 5. Work with Source Overlays\n\n63", + "recall": 0.9090909090909091, + "true_md": "## Options\n\nTable4.WorkwithSourceOverlaysoptions\n\nChapter 5. Work with Source Overlays 63" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.395417577053692, + "doc_id": "c973682958772958a64130caee88867212260c7746919730c0d47eed9f011ff7", + "edit_distance": 0.4435146443514644, + "f1_score": 0.7821782178217822, + "meteor": 0.6147950908304498, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Example Actions:\n\n- 1. Type OVLLIB for the Library prompt.\n- 2. Press the Enter key.\n\nThe same Work with Overlays display shows another list of overlays.\n\nYou should see the name STATIONE, the overlay you created before, in the list. If you do not see the name, press the Page Down (Roll Up) key until the name appears or type the name for the Position to prompt and press the Enter key. The list is arranged in ascending sequence by overlay name.\n\nYou can choose any option for the overlays.\n\n## Example Actions:\n\n- 1. Type 6 in the Opt column beside the overlay name STATIONE.\n- 2. Press the Enter key.\n\nThe Print Overlay display appears.\n\nChapter 16. Getting Started with the Resource Management utility\n\n319", + "recall": 0.6422764227642277, + "true_md": "## Example Actions:\n\nThe same Work with Overlays display shows another list of overlays.\n\n- 1. Type OVLLIB for the Library prompt.\n\n- 2. Press the Enter key.\n\n## Work with Overlays\n\nYou should see the name STATIONE, the overlay you created before, in the list. If you do not see the name, press the Page Down (Roll Up) key until the name appears or type the name for the Position to prompt and press the Enter key. The list is arranged in ascending sequence by overlay name.\n\nYou can choose any option for the overlays.\n\nThe Print Overlay display appears.\n\n## Example Actions:\n\n- 1. Type 6 in the Opt column beside the overlay name STATIONE.\n\n- 2. Press the Enter key.\n\nLibrary ......... OVLLIB Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB *ALL, *USRLIBL, *ALLUSR Overlay ......... *ALL Name, generic*, *ALL Position to....... Starting character(s) Type options, press Enter. 3=Copy 4=Delete 6=Print 7=Rename 8=Display description 9=Convert to file 13=Change text Opt Overlay Library Text 6 STATIONE OVLLIB Sample Form number 3 Bottom Parameters or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F9=Retrieve F11=Display names only F12=Cancel\n\nChapter 16. Getting Started with the Resource Management utility 319" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.894588038748661, + "doc_id": "ab3399d5999628741761fa5779fe343332a49daa42f4015ea93129634b032dc0", + "edit_distance": 0.6172839506172839, + "f1_score": 0.9481481481481482, + "meteor": 0.8581536479811769, + "precision": 0.9552238805970149, + "pred_md": "## 1=Create Source Overlay File\n\nTo create a source overlay file do the following on the Work with Source Overlay Files display.\n\n- 1. Type a source overlay file name in the File column, and a library name in the Library column in the first line of the list.\n- 2. Type a 1 in the Opt column.\n- 3. Press Enter.\n\nThe Create Source Overlay File display appears:\n\nUsing the Create Source Overlay File display, you can create a source overlay file from the information specified on this display.\n\nThe Work with Source Overlays display appears after the source overlay file is created so that you can create source overlays in the source overlay file.\n\nThe following table explains each field of the Create Source Overlay File display.\n\nTable 14. Create Source Overlay File display fields\n\nChapter 6. Work with Source Overlay Files\n\n89", + "recall": 0.9411764705882353, + "true_md": "## 1=Create Source Overlay File\n\nTo create a source overlay file do the following on the Work with Source Overlay Files display.\n\nThe Create Source Overlay File display appears:\n\nUsing the Create Source Overlay File display, you can create a source overlay file from the information specified on this display.\n\nThe Work with Source Overlays display appears after the source overlay file is created so that you can create source overlays in the source overlay file.\n\nThe following table explains each field of the Create Source Overlay File display.\n\n- 1. Type a source overlay file name in the File column, and a library name in the Library column in the first line of the list.\n\n- 2. Type a 1 in the Opt column.\n\n- 3. Press Enter.\n\n## Create Source Overlay File\n\nTable14.CreateSourceOverlayFiledisplayfields\n\nChapter 6. Work with Source Overlay Files 89\n\nF3=Exit F5=Refresh F12=Cancel" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6731018702875419, + "doc_id": "7d5bec8dec64d314d74693c2422f850b36ac13b5583fcc7de27f02ebe15ff24b", + "edit_distance": 0.34545454545454546, + "f1_score": 0.9156626506024097, + "meteor": 0.8889916663785055, + "precision": 0.9047619047619048, + "pred_md": "34\n\n## Example Action:\n\n- 1. Press the Enter key.\n\nThe Design Overlay display appears.\n\nIn this example, source overlay STATIONERY in OVLFILE is being used to design an overlay.\n\nFigure 14. Sample Overlay\n\nFigure 14. Sample Overlay\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.926829268292683, + "true_md": "## Example Action:\n\nThe Design Overlay display appears.\n\nIn this example, source overlay STATIONERY in OVLFILE is being used to design an overlay.\n\n- 1. Press the Enter key.\n\nFigure14.SampleOverlay\n\n34 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "3a54f77cf8108096ff8d1b0714d4f022a92d5b255a42308bd56fd0dc66fbe4b3", + "edit_distance": 0.9994910941475827, + "f1_score": 0.03125, + "meteor": 0.0049975012493753135, + "precision": 0.016, + "pred_md": "Tables\n\nTables\n\n| 1. | Relationship between AFP resources and AFP Utilities for iSeries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n|-------------|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|-----------------------------------------|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|------------------------------------------|-------|-----------|-----|---------|----|---------|-----------|---------|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|-------|-------------------------------------|-----|-----|-------------------------------------|---------|--------------------|--------------|\n| 2. 3. | Summary of AFP Utilities Function Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| 4. | Work with Source Overlays prompts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Work with Source Overlays options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 . . . . . 64 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| 5. | Work with Source Overlays columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| 6. | The Cause of a Message and Its Results . . . . . . . . . . . | | | | | . | . | | . | . | . . | . . | . . | . | . . . | | . | | | . | |\n| 7. | Confirm Delete of Elements display fields . . . . . . . . . | | | | | | | | . | . . | . 71 . 72 | . . | . | | | | . | | | . | |\n| 8. 9. | Save Source Overlay display fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . | | | | | | | | | . . | . . | . . . . | . . | . . . | . . | . | 75 | . | | | |\n| 10. | Copy Source Overlay display fields . . . . . . . Work with Source Overlay File display fields . . . . . . . . . . | | | | | . . . . . | | . . . | | . | 78 | . . | . | . | . | | | . | | | |\n| 11. | Work with Source Overlay Files prompts. . . . . . . . | | | | | | | | | . . | . . | . . . | . . . | 85 | . . . | . | . | . | 84 | | |\n| 12. | Work with Source Overlay Files options . . . . . . . | | | | . . . | | | | | | | | Confirm Delete of Record Layout Elements display fields . Confirm Delete of Page Layout Elements display fields Common Function Keys for all Operations on the Design Display . Function Keys for Base Operation on the Design Display . Function Keys for Define or Change Operation on the Design Display Function Keys for Place Operation on the Design Display. | | . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . | | | | | . . | . . . . . 86 |\n| 13. 14. | Work with Source Overlay Files columns. . . . . Create Source Overlay File display fields. . . . . | | | | | | | | | | | | . . | | | | | . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . | | . . . . . . . . 87 | . 89 |\n| 15. 16. | . . . . . . . . Change Source Overlay File display fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Copy Source Overlay File display fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Confirm Delete of Source Overlay File display fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| 17. 18. | Work with PFD Definitions prompts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| 19. | . . 144 Work with PFD Definitions options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| 20. 21. | Work with PFD Definitions columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Create PFD Definition display fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| 22. 23. 24. | . . . . . The Cause of Message and Its Result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 | . | . | Define PFD Specifications display fields | . | . | . | . . | | . . | . . | | . | . | . | . | . | . . | 151 | | |\n| 25. | Specify Database File display fields . | . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| 26. | Select Database File display fields. | | . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| 27. 28. 29. | . . . . . Specify Break Fields display fields . . . . . | Select Record Format display fields . . | . . . . | . . | . . | . . | . . | . . . . | | . . . . | . . . . | | . . | . . | . . | . . | . . | . . . . | 160 161 | | |\n\nxi", + "recall": 0.6666666666666666, + "true_md": "## Tables\n\nxi" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.735562599452714, + "doc_id": "40530ae560c395438503db1bbffb494115f3806f9774303c87fb9ce95a26504b", + "edit_distance": 0.1774193548387097, + "f1_score": 0.7733333333333333, + "meteor": 0.7930851210445143, + "precision": 0.9886363636363636, + "pred_md": "Example Actions: Define the following elements in the same way:\n\n- 1. A line element from (Across : 5, Down : 24) to (Across : 60, Down : 24).\n- 2. A line element from (Across : 5, Down : 22) to (Across : 60, Down : 22).\n- 3. A line element from (Across : 5, Down : 20) to (Across : 60, Down : 20).\n- 4. A line element from (Across : 5, Down : 18) to (Across : 60, Down : 18).\n- 5. A line element from (Across : 5, Down : 16) to (Across : 60, Down : 16).\n- 6. A line element from (Across : 5, Down : 14) to (Across : 60, Down : 14).\n- 7. A line element from (Across : 5, Down : 12) to (Across : 60, Down : 12).\n- 8. A line element from (Across : 5, Down : 10) to (Across : 60, Down : 10).\n- 9. A text element Ball Point Pen at (Across : 7, Down : 11).\n- 10. A text element Pencil at (Across : 7, Down : 13).\n\n11.\n\nA text element\n\nEraser\n\nat (Across : 7, Down : 15).\n\n- 12. A text element Ruler at (Across : 7, Down : 17).\n- 13. A line element from (Across : 22, Down : 7) to (Across : 22, Down : 24).\n- 14. A text element Total at (Across : 7, Down : 25).\n- 15. A line element from (Across : 35, Down : 24) to (Across : 35, Down : 7).\n- 16. A line element from (Across : 46, Down : 7) to (Across : 46, Down : 24).\n- 17. A text element Item at (Across : 10, Down : 8).\n- 18. A text element Quantity at (Across : 24, Down : 8).\n- 19. A text element Unit at (Across : 37, Down : 8).\n- 20. A text element Price at (Across : 37, Down : 9).\n- 21. A text element Amount ( $ ) at (Across : 48, Down : 8).\n- 22. A line element from (Across : 52, Down : 5) to (Across : 59, Down : 5).\n- 23. A text element Form No. 5A-3233-01 at (Across : 45, Down : 33).\n\n## When the above elements are defined, the following display appears.\n\nChapter 3. Getting Started with the Overlay Utility\n\n41", + "recall": 0.635036496350365, + "true_md": "Example Actions: Define the following elements in the same way:\n\n- 1. A line element from (Across : 5, Down : 24) to (Across : 60, Down : 24).\n\n- 2. A line element from (Across : 5, Down : 22) to (Across : 60, Down : 22).\n\n- 3. A line element from (Across : 5, Down : 20) to (Across : 60, Down : 20).\n\n- 4. A line element from (Across : 5, Down : 18) to (Across : 60, Down : 18).\n\n- 5. A line element from (Across : 5, Down : 16) to (Across : 60, Down : 16).\n\n- 6. A line element from (Across : 5, Down : 14) to (Across : 60, Down : 14).\n\n- 7. A line element from (Across : 5, Down : 12) to (Across : 60, Down : 12).\n\n- 8. A line element from (Across : 5, Down : 10) to (Across : 60, Down : 10).\n\n- 9. A text element Ball Point Pen at (Across : 7, Down : 11).\n\n- 10. A text element Pencil at (Across : 7, Down : 13).\n\n- 11. A text element Eraser at (Across : 7, Down : 15).\n\n- 12. A text element Ruler at (Across : 7, Down : 17).\n\n- 13. A line element from (Across : 22, Down : 7) to (Across : 22, Down : 24).\n\n- 14. A text element Total at (Across : 7, Down : 25).\n\n- 15. A line element from (Across : 35, Down : 24) to (Across : 35, Down : 7).\n\n- 16. A line element from (Across : 46, Down : 7) to (Across : 46, Down : 24).\n\n- 17. A text element Item at (Across : 10, Down : 8).\n\n- 18. A text element Quantity at (Across : 24, Down : 8).\n\n- 19. A text element Unit at (Across : 37, Down : 8).\n\n- 20. A text element Price at (Across : 37, Down : 9).\n\n- 21. A text element Amount($)$\\_{at (Across : 48, Down : 8).}$\n\n- 22. A line element from (Across : 52, Down : 5) to (Across : 59, Down : 5).\n\n- 23. A text element Form No. 5A-3233-01 at (Across : 45, Down : 33).\n\nWhen the above elements are defined, the following display appears.\n\nDesign Overlay Columns: 1- 74 Control . . \\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_ Source overlay.....STATIONERY *...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7.... 025 : *T018 : 026 +------------------------------------------------------+ 027 028 029 030 031 032 033 *T027 o. 5A-3233-01 034 035 036 037 038 039 040 041 More... F3=Exit F6=Text F9=Line F10=Box F11=Bar code F21=Element edit F22=Block edit F24=More keys\n\nChapter 3. Getting Started with the Overlay Utility 41" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.92624166283095, + "doc_id": "49cd8b9d92d1689b567fd2c2095a66f3d5eed93e312e9c4dc7b3e467887950c9", + "edit_distance": 0.22549019607843138, + "f1_score": 0.9569377990430623, + "meteor": 0.9098506230262281, + "precision": 0.9523809523809523, + "pred_md": "Table 21. Create PFD Definition display fields (continued)\n\nThe selected options are performed one after another, and this display appears again when all operations are completed.\n\nSpecify 1 in the Opt column beside the action you want to select.\n\nIf you want to select all actions, press F9.\n\nWhen you have completed all operations, press F3 to exit this display.\n\n## Define PFD Specifications\n\n## Define PFD Specifications\n\nType choices, press Enter.\n\nPrinter\n\ntype\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n*DEFAULT\n\n*DEFAULT, 1 - 9999\n\nCharacters\n\nper\n\ninch\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n10.00\n\n5.00, 10.00, 12.00, 13.30, 15.00\n\n16.70, 18.00, 20.00\n\nLines per inch\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n6.00\n\n3.00, 4.00, 6.00, 7.50, 8.00, 9.00\n\n12.00\n\nDegree of rotation . .\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n0\n\n0, 90, 180, 270\n\nPage\n\nnumber\n\n.\n\n. . . . . . .\n\nN\n\nY=Yes, N=No\n\nDBCS\n\nSO/SI\n\nspacing . .\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\nY\n\nY=Yes, N=No\n\nMore...\n\nF3=Exit\n\nF5=Refresh\n\nF12=Cancel\n\nChapter 10. Work with PFD Definitions\n\n149", + "recall": 0.9615384615384616, + "true_md": "Table21.CreatePFDDefinitiondisplayfields (continued)\n\nThe selected options are performed one after another, and this display appears again when all operations are completed.\n\nSpecify 1 in the Opt column beside the action you want to select.\n\nIf you want to select all actions, press F9.\n\nWhen you have completed all operations, press F3 to exit this display.\n\n## Define PFD Specifications\n\n## Define PFD Specifications\n\nType choices, press Enter. Printer type........ *DEFAULT *DEFAULT, 1 - 9999 Characters per inch .... 10.00 5.00, 10.00, 12.00, 13.30, 15.00 16.70, 18.00, 20.00 Lines per inch....... 6.00 3.00, 4.00, 6.00, 7.50, 8.00, 9.00 12.00 Degree of rotation . .... 0 0, 90, 180, 270 Page number ........ N Y=Yes, N=No DBCS SO/SI spacing . .... Y More... F3=Exit F5=Refresh F12=Cancel\n\nChapter 10. Work with PFD Definitions 149" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.00010890876985506645, + "doc_id": "aec5ed8ad75a46f9767d5a44e56b9d2a40033774dd95fa135fd005cf9f1e2de6", + "edit_distance": 0.8241758241758241, + "f1_score": 0.375, + "meteor": 0.18656437125748504, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Defining a Text Element\n\nChapter 3. Getting Started with the Overlay Utility\n\n35", + "recall": 0.23076923076923078, + "true_md": "## Defining a Text Element\n\nChapter 3. Getting Started with the Overlay Utility 35\n\nDesign Overlay Columns: 1- 74 Control . . \\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_ Source overlay.....STATIONERY *...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7.... 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 More... F3=Exit F6=Text F9=Line F10=Box F11=Bar code F21=Element edit F22=Block edit F24=More keys" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.714013715961592, + "doc_id": "7ceaa3ba1021440c6746427e3832ec0160957e62cc2f95e19ba3c90700e4e083", + "edit_distance": 0.27472527472527475, + "f1_score": 0.8828828828828829, + "meteor": 0.8372260963904352, + "precision": 0.9423076923076923, + "pred_md": "Table 65. Change Source Overlay Font display fields (continued)\n\nChange Font (Font Type=3): When you choose 3 for the Font type prompt, the following display appears.\n\nUsing this display you can change the code page, font character set, point size for outline fonts, and description text.\n\nThe following table explains the Change Source Overlay Font display and the Change PFD Definition Font display.\n\nChapter 14. Work with Fonts\n\n303", + "recall": 0.8305084745762712, + "true_md": "Table65.ChangeSourceOverlayFontdisplayfields (continued)\n\nChange Font (Font Type=3): When you choose 3 for the Font type prompt, the following display appears.\n\nType choices, press Enter.\n\nF3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel\n\nUsing this display you can change the code page, font character set, point size for outline fonts, and description text.\n\nThe following table explains the Change Source Overlay Font display and the Change PFD Definition Font display.\n\nChapter 14. Work with Fonts 303\n\n## Change PFD Definition Font" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8956469716711664, + "doc_id": "f535be5d452c7e14c9e00c17421d65323425aff53967def99d986e89fe62f7b1", + "edit_distance": 0.10416666666666667, + "f1_score": 0.9402985074626864, + "meteor": 0.9684677071609198, + "precision": 0.9130434782608695, + "pred_md": "Table 62. Work with Source Overlay Fonts display fields\n\nNote:\n\nAn error message is displayed when the font type you select using option 2 (Change) or option 9 (Set default) causes a conflict. The conflict occurs because the selected font type cannot be used with the values specified for the printer type or other prompts of some elements. In such cases, by pressing the Enter key again, the system changes the values for the prompts as follows:\n\nChapter 14. Work with Fonts\n\n299", + "recall": 0.9692307692307692, + "true_md": "Table62.WorkwithSourceOverlayFontsdisplayfields\n\n- Note: An error message is displayed when the font type you select using option 2 (Change) or option 9 (Set default) causes a conflict. The conflict occurs because the selected font type cannot be used with the values specified for the printer type or other prompts of some elements. In such cases, by pressing the Enter key again, the system changes the values for the prompts as follows:\n\nChapter 14. Work with Fonts 299" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9301369954110589, + "doc_id": "d24a0d73db1c12a2d80d8f4c4e6cbcb717cf4903d58b2d279d15d6eff2c01402", + "edit_distance": 0.5375, + "f1_score": 0.9609375000000001, + "meteor": 0.8627169917719818, + "precision": 0.9761904761904762, + "pred_md": "## Step 3 - Creating a Source Overlay\n\nIn this step, an overlay is designed by creating a source overlay.\n\n```\nWork with Source Overlays File . . . . . . . . . . OVLFILE Name, F4 for list Library . . . . . . . . OVLLIB Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB Source overlay . . . . . *ALL Name, generic*, *ALL Position to . . . . . . . Starting characters Type options, press Enter. 1=Create 2=Change 3=Copy 4=Delete 6=Print 7=Rename 9=Create overlay Source Opt Overlay Text Changed 1 STATIONERY (No source overlays in file) Bottom Parameters or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F9=Retrieve F11=Display names only F12=Cancel\n```\n\n## Example Actions:\n\n- 1. Type 1 (Create) in the Opt column in the first line of the list.\n- 2. Type STATIONERY in the Source Overlay column in the first line of the list.\n- 3. Press the Enter key.\n\nNote: Unless it is changed, the first 8 characters of the source overlay name will be used for the overlay (object) name when you create an overlay (object) using option 9 (Create overlay). Any remaining characters are discarded.\n\nThe Create Source Overlay display appears.\n\n```\nCreate Source Overlay File . . . . . . . . . . . . : OVLFILE Library . . . . . . . . . : OVLLIB Source overlay . . . . . . . : STATIONERY Type options, press Enter. 1=Select Opt Action Define overlay specifications Work with source overlay fonts 1 Design overlay F3=Exit F5=Refresh F9=Select all F12=Cancel\n```\n\nChapter 3. Getting Started with the Overlay Utility\n\n33", + "recall": 0.9461538461538461, + "true_md": "## Step 3 - Creating a Source Overlay\n\nIn this step, an overlay is designed by creating a source overlay.\n\n## Work with Source Overlays\n\n## Create Source Overlay\n\nFile . . ........ OVLFILE Name, F4 for list Library........ OVLLIB Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB Source overlay ..... *ALL Name, generic*, *ALL Position to....... Starting characters Type options, press Enter. 1=Create 2=Change 3=Copy 4=Delete 6=Print 7=Rename 9=Create overlay Source Opt Overlay Text Changed 1 STATIONERY (No source overlays in file) Bottom Parameters or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F9=Retrieve F11=Display names only F12=Cancel\n\nFile............: OVLFILE Library . . .......: OVLLIB Source overlay . . . . . . . : STATIONERY Type options, press Enter. 1=Select Opt Action Define overlay specifications Work with source overlay fonts 1 Design overlay F3=Exit F5=Refresh F9=Select all F12=Cancel\n\nChapter 3. Getting Started with the Overlay Utility 33\n\nThe Create Source Overlay display appears.\n\n- Note: Unless it is changed, the first 8 characters of the source overlay name will be used for the overlay (object) name when you create an overlay (object) using option 9 (Create overlay). Any remaining characters are discarded.\n\n- 3. Press the Enter key.\n\n- 2. Type STATIONERY in the Source Overlay column in the first line of the list.\n\n- 1. Type 1 (Create) in the Opt column in the first line of the list.\n\n## Example Actions:" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.43718204684262757, + "doc_id": "153792c8a16c31a413a56b52176eb8b94920e7db7e252a5eccdd431e2a7889c3", + "edit_distance": 0.46218487394957986, + "f1_score": 0.7906976744186047, + "meteor": 0.6517209622191442, + "precision": 0.9272727272727272, + "pred_md": "160\n\n## Select Record Format\n\nOn this display, the name and the descriptions of record formats in the specified database file are listed.\n\nThe following table explains each field of the Select Record Format display.\n\nTable 28. Select Record Format display fields\n\nSpecify 1 in the Opt column beside the record format to be selected and press the Enter key. The Specify Database File display appears.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.6891891891891891, + "true_md": "## Select Record Format\n\n## Select Record Format\n\nDatabase file . . . . . . : QAFCPFDDTA Library . .......: QGPL Type option, press Enter. 1=Select Record Opt Format Text 1 PRODMASTER Product master QUALITY Quality data ROADMAP Road map Bottom F5=Refresh F12=Cancel\n\nOn this display, the name and the descriptions of record formats in the specified database file are listed.\n\nThe following table explains each field of the Select Record Format display.\n\nTable28.SelectRecordFormatdisplayfields\n\nSpecify 1 in the Opt column beside the record format to be selected and press the Enter key. The Specify Database File display appears.\n\n160 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5477396613018728, + "doc_id": "2ff9cc4bf51fa2410749ec6147719fd95ab09ce13ec77db45c542a44d74d81d5", + "edit_distance": 0.6241379310344828, + "f1_score": 0.832618025751073, + "meteor": 0.726409287849355, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Press Enter after specifying the above fields. The following display appears.\n\nUse the Work with PFD Definition Files display to can create, change, copy, delete, rename, display a description of a PFD definition file, or to start working with PFD definitions in a PFD definition file.\n\nNote:\n\nTo create a PFD definition file, you need a library in which the PFD definition file will reside. If you do not have any libraries, you can create a library by entering the Create library (CRTLIB) command on a command line on any display.\n\nThis display gives the user the ability to specify the name of the PFD definition file (in the File prompt) that you want to list and work with, along with the name of the library name (in the Library prompt) to locate the file.\n\nNote:\n\nIf the values in either or both of the Library or File prompts are changed, it is necessary to press Enter before the user can specify options in the Opt column.\n\nThe following tables explain each field of the Work with PFD Definition Files display.\n\nChapter 11. Work with PFD Definition Files\n\n205", + "recall": 0.7132352941176471, + "true_md": "Press Enter after specifying the above fields. The following display appears.\n\n## Work with PFD Definition Files\n\nLibrary ......... File . . ........ Position to.......\n\nPFULIB *ALL\n\nName, *USRLIBL, *LIBL, *CURLIB... Name, generic*, *ALL Starting characters\n\nType options, press Enter. 1=Create 2=Change 3=Copy 4=Delete 7=Rename 8=Display description 12=Work with PFD definitions\n\nParameters or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F9=Retrieve F11=Display names only F12=Cancel\n\nBottom\n\nUse the Work with PFD Definition Files display to can create, change, copy, delete, rename, display a description of a PFD definition file, or to start working with PFD definitions in a PFD definition file.\n\nThis display gives the user the ability to specify the name of the PFD definition file (in the File prompt) that you want to list and work with, along with the name of the library name (in the Library prompt) to locate the file.\n\nThe following tables explain each field of the Work with PFD Definition Files display.\n\n- Note: To create a PFD definition file, you need a library in which the PFD definition file will reside. If you do not have any libraries, you can create a library by entering the Create library (CRTLIB) command on a command line on any display.\n\n- Note: If the values in either or both of the Library or File prompts are changed, it is necessary to press Enter before the user can specify options in the Opt column.\n\nChapter 11. Work with PFD Definition Files 205" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9834010485386678, + "doc_id": "196507cb7c182e1b18f3a71b68545021ef0cd6a99f9c313c206d4d7a3010dd76", + "edit_distance": 0.01639344262295082, + "f1_score": 0.9811320754716982, + "meteor": 0.9909163111294615, + "precision": 0.975, + "pred_md": "B\n\nasic English Language Skills\n\n## To start off with, here are a few tips for improving your general language and communication skills:\n\n- 1. Read as much as possible. Reading improves your vocabulary, and helps you to become familiar with sentence structure, word order, and the correct use of punctuation.\n- 2. Invest in a good dictionary. When you are unsure of the meaning of a word, or when you come across an unfamiliar word, make sure to look it up in your dictionary.\n- 3. Keep a journal. This will give you an opportunity to practice your writing skills on a regular basis.", + "recall": 0.9873417721518988, + "true_md": "Basic English Language Skills\n\n## To start off with, here are a few tips for improving your general language and communication skills:\n\n- 1. Read as much as possible. Reading improves your vocabulary, and helps you to become familiar with sentence structure, word order, and the correct use of punctuation.\n\n- 2. Invest in a good dictionary. When you are unsure of the meaning of a word, or when you come across an unfamiliar word, make sure to look it up in your dictionary.\n\n- 3. Keep a journal. This will give you an opportunity to practice your writing skills on a regular basis." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.05231548935512444, + "doc_id": "a7ff2419ff372b4ec8eaf52cc8a444636396e0d9a8d7d050451af552fedeac2a", + "edit_distance": 0.6833333333333333, + "f1_score": 0.6732673267326732, + "meteor": 0.3834317395926575, + "precision": 0.9855072463768116, + "pred_md": "122\n\nThe bar code which is created from the specified field in the database file record is defined, and a mark *C006 that indicates a bar code element is displayed.\n\n## Specifying a Box Element\n\nYou can draw a box in the record layout.\n\nExample Action: Move the cursor to the position (Across : 1, Down : 1) of a corner of the box and press the F10 key.\n\nAn element mark %B007 appears at the position, and a message prompts you to press the F10 key again.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.5112781954887218, + "true_md": "Design Record Layout Columns: 1- 74 Control . . PFD definition.....PRODUCTLBL *...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7.... 001 002 003 *T001 t : *T003 004 005 *T002 : *T004 . 006 *S005 007 *C006 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 More... F3=Exit F6=Text F9=Line F10=Box F11=Bar code F21=Element edit F22=Block edit F24=More keys\n\nDesign Record Layout Columns: 1- 74 Control . . PFD definition.....PRODUCTLBL *...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7.... 001 %B007 002 003 *T001 t : *T003 004 005 *T002 : *T004 . 006 *S005 007 *C006 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 More... F3=Exit F5=Refresh F10=Box F12=Cancel F15=Mark on/off F16=Hide F19=Left F20=Right Specify opposite corner of box and press F10.\n\nThe bar code which is created from the specified field in the database file record is defined, and a mark *C006 that indicates a bar code element is displayed.\n\nYou can draw a box in the record layout.\n\nExample Action: Move the cursor to the position (Across : 1, Down : 1) of a corner of the box and press the F10 key.\n\nAn element mark %B007 appears at the position, and a message prompts you to press the F10 key again.\n\n## Specifying a Box Element\n\n122 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8624064271190208, + "doc_id": "965032b177d0f906da9d36448c9cb90924a3b23ca42f384d9aedd1edef8df6fe", + "edit_distance": 0.9487179487179487, + "f1_score": 0.9538461538461539, + "meteor": 0.9641403480518187, + "precision": 0.9393939393939394, + "pred_md": "B\n\nasic English Language Skills\n\n## PLEASE REMEMBER TO ATTACH THE FOLLOWING DOCUMENTS TO YOUR REGISTRATION FORM:\n\nA copy of your ID\n\nProof of your highest grade passed\n\nProof of any other relevant qualifications you have obtained", + "recall": 0.96875, + "true_md": "A copy of your ID\n\nProof of your highest grade passed\n\nProof of any other relevant qualifications you have obtained\n\n## PLEASE REMEMBER TO ATTACH THE FOLLOWING DOCUMENTS TO YOUR REGISTRATION FORM:\n\nBasic English Language Skills" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.37387529527768754, + "doc_id": "7e39d47e4ed37944ac0f758998c9f9573a5710a7478a692eafe4b414e37fde82", + "edit_distance": 0.5684647302904564, + "f1_score": 0.7525773195876289, + "meteor": 0.5974624928338198, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Example Actions:\n\n- 1. Type the value of the repetition (Across : 2, Down : 4) of the record layout to be printed.\n- 2. Type the value of the distance (Across : 40, Down : 10) of the record layouts to be printed.\n- 3. Press the Enter key.\n\n## The Design Page Layout display appears.\n\nTo print a title on the page, do the following.\n\n## Example Actions:\n\n- 1. Move the cursor to the position (Across : 33, Down : 2) to define text and press the F6 key. The key entry area appears.\n- 2. Type Product Delivery Labels in the Text data prompt.\n- 3. Press the Enter key.\n\nThe following display appears.\n\nChapter 8. Getting Started with Print Format Utility\n\n129", + "recall": 0.6033057851239669, + "true_md": "The Design Page Layout display appears.\n\nTo print a title on the page, do the following.\n\nThe following display appears.\n\n## Example Actions:\n\n## Example Actions:\n\n- 1. Type the value of the repetition (Across : 2, Down : 4) of the record layout to be printed.\n\n- 2. Type the value of the distance (Across : 40, Down : 10) of the record layouts to be printed.\n\n- 3. Press the Enter key.\n\n- 1. Move the cursor to the position (Across : 33, Down : 2) to define text and press the F6 key. The key entry area appears.\n\n- 2. Type Product Delivery Labels in the Text data prompt.\n\n- 3. Press the Enter key.\n\nDesign Page Layout Columns: 1- 74 Control . . PFD definition.....PRODUCTLBL *...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7.... 001 002 003 004 005 *R001-001 *R001-002 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 *R001-003 *R001-004 016 017 More... F3=Exit F6=Text F9=Line F10=Box F11=Bar code F21=Element edit F22=Block edit F24=More keys\n\nChapter 8. Getting Started with Print Format Utility 129" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.2419847617295703, + "doc_id": "19a2021a4cc7c1d18723964ba530d3659bdac7d2751dc781957b726e85ca00c9", + "edit_distance": 0.5576208178438662, + "f1_score": 0.5652173913043478, + "meteor": 0.5221292107333555, + "precision": 0.7358490566037735, + "pred_md": "## EXCEL TRAINING MANUAL\n\n## Formula\n\n=INDEX('SOURCE-1'!$D$2:$D$22,MATCH('TARGET-1'!D5,'SOURCE-1'!$C$2:$C$22,0))\n\n## 6. COUNT FUNCTIONS\n\nExcel's Count Functions allow you to count up the number of cells being used for a specific purpose such as the number of cells containing number values or the number of blank cells in a data range.\n\n- ‰ The function ignores empty cells and those that contain text data.\n- ‰ If a number is later added to an empty cell the function will be automatically updated to include this new data.\n- ‰ Note: dates, times, functions, and formulas are stored as numbers in Excel.\n- ‰ They will, selected range. therefore, be counted by the COUNT function if present in the\n\n## 6.1 HOW TO APPLY FORMULA\n\n## 6.1.1 COUNT\n\n=COUNT(VALUE1,VALUE2,…)\n\nPage\n\n16 /g3", + "recall": 0.4588235294117647, + "true_md": "## EXCE L L TRAIN N ING MA A NUAL\n\n## Form mula\n\n=IND DEX('SOUR RCE-1'!$D$2: :$D$22,MAT TCH('TARGE ET-1'!D5,'SO OURCE-1'!$C C$2:$C$22,0) )) \n\n## 6. C COUNT T FUNC CTIONS S\n\nExcel's C purpose data ran g ount Funct such as the e. ions allow y number of c you to coun cells contain n t up the n u n ing number umber of ce r values or t h e lls being us he number o s ed for a sp of blank cell s ecific s in a\n\n- ‰ The funct tion ignores empty cells and those th hat contain t text data. \n\n- ‰ If a num updated t mber is later to include th r added to his new data an empty c a. cell the fun nction will b be automati ically \n\n- ‰ Note: dat es, times, fu nctions, and d formulas a re stored as numbers in Excel. \n\n- ‰ $_{They wil}$ selected r ll, therefore range. e, be count ted by the e COUNT function if present in n the \n\n## 6.1 HO OW TO AP PPLY FO RMULA\n\n## 6.1.1 C COUNT\n\n=C COUNT(VAL LUE1,VALU UE2,…) \n\nPage 16 GLYPH<g3>" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6523152659846837, + "doc_id": "71c0532983dc7907f0b6aa1afdd149e918873301216334538d2212bb4157d3e1", + "edit_distance": 0.4931506849315068, + "f1_score": 0.8205128205128205, + "meteor": 0.8841170679840875, + "precision": 0.7804878048780488, + "pred_md": "## Tasks Related to Overlay Objects\n\nNote: The following description assumes that you are on a display with the command line.\n\nTable 91. Tasks related to overlay objects\n\n## Tasks Related to Page Segments\n\nNote: The following description assumes that you are on a display with the command line.\n\nTable 92. Tasks related to page segments\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide\n\n446", + "recall": 0.8648648648648649, + "true_md": "## Tasks Related to Overlay Objects\n\n## Tasks Related to Page Segments\n\nTable92.Tasksrelatedtopagesegments\n\nTable91.Tasksrelatedtooverlayobjects\n\n- Note: The following description assumes that you are on a display with the command line.\n\n- Note: The following description assumes that you are on a display with the command line.\n\n446 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.85749178011932, + "doc_id": "882fa8e31def780ee774207353a8132fff4c48d4d14632cd72ff0e401fced3ef", + "edit_distance": 0.6084142394822006, + "f1_score": 0.9514563106796117, + "meteor": 0.7796610934158644, + "precision": 0.9702970297029703, + "pred_md": "When you press Enter, the file is copied. When the copy is completed, the screen returns to the Work with PFD Definition Files display on page 205.\n\n## 4=Delete PFD Definition File\n\nTo delete a PFD definition file, do the following on the Work with PFD Definition Files display on page 205.\n\n- 1. Type 4 in the Opt column beside the PFD definition file you want to delete.\n- 2. Press Enter.\n\n## The following display appears:\n\nUsing the Confirm Delete of PFD Definition Files display, you can confirm that you want to delete the files you chose by selecting option 4 (Delete) on the Work with PFD Definition Files display.\n\nNote:\n\nYou can delete only the PFD definition files for which you have the authority to do so. If you do not have *OBJOPR and *OBJEXIST authority for a PFD definition file, that PFD definition file is not deleted.\n\nYou should use the displayed list of names to verify that you do want to delete all of the PFD definition files shown. If all of them are to be deleted, press Enter to delete them. If any of them should not be deleted, press F12 (Cancel). If you press F12, you return to the Work with PFD Definition Files display with all selections still shown, and you can remove 4 from the column beside the PFD definition file you do not want to delete.\n\nTable 46. Confirm Delete of PFD Definition Files display fields\n\nChapter 11. Work with PFD Definition Files\n\n213", + "recall": 0.9333333333333333, + "true_md": "When you press Enter, the file is copied. When the copy is completed, the screen returns to the Work with PFD Definition Files display on page 205.\n\nTo delete a PFD definition file, do the following on the Work with PFD Definition Files display on page 205.\n\nThe following display appears:\n\nUsing the Confirm Delete of PFD Definition Files display, you can confirm that you want to delete the files you chose by selecting option 4 (Delete) on the Work with PFD Definition Files display.\n\nYou should use the displayed list of names to verify that you do want to delete all of the PFD definition files shown. If all of them are to be deleted, press Enter to delete them. If any of them should not be deleted, press F12 (Cancel). If you press F12, you return to the Work with PFD Definition Files display with all selections still shown, and you can remove 4 from the column beside the PFD definition file you do not want to delete.\n\nChapter 11. Work with PFD Definition Files 213\n\n- Note: You can delete only the PFD definition files for which you have the authority to do so. If you do not have *OBJOPR and *OBJEXIST authority for a PFD definition file, that PFD definition file is not deleted.\n\nTable46.ConfirmDeleteofPFDDefinitionFilesdisplayfields\n\n## 4=Delete PFD Definition File\n\n- 1. Type 4 in the Opt column beside the PFD definition file you want to delete.\n\n- 2. Press Enter.\n\n## Confirm Delete of PFD Definition Files\n\nPress Enter to confirm your choices for 4=Delete. Press F12 to return to change your choices.\n\nF11=Display names only F12=Cancel\n\nBottom" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0021288647471878366, + "doc_id": "d0e1555dc42be1c46a3446839621935e15992206595ba97d9672c4a0a61ae51e", + "edit_distance": 0.9270186335403726, + "f1_score": 0.5357142857142857, + "meteor": 0.1413562521145485, + "precision": 0.9523809523809523, + "pred_md": "52\n\n## Example Actions:\n\n- 1. Type QFCLOGO for the Page segment prompt.\n- 2. Press the Enter key.\n\nNote:\n\nThe page segment you specify is not searched for now, but is searched for in the libraries in the library list when the overlay is printed. See 'Page Segment' on page 392 for more information.\n\nThe mark changes from %S030 to *S030 to indicate the element has been placed.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.37267080745341613, + "true_md": "Design Overlay Columns: 1- 74 Control . . \\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_ Source overlay.....STATIONERY *...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7.... 001 %S030 002 *T001 Stationery Co., Ltd. 003 004 *T002 rd Stationery Sales Slip Date: / / 005 *L003 ------------------------ *L026 -- 006 007 *B004 -----------*L017 -------:----------*L020 --------+ 008 : *T021 : *T022 ty : *T023 : *T025 ( $ ): 009 : : *T024 : : 010 *L012 -----------:------------:----------:-------------- 011 : *T013 oint Pen : : : : 012 *L011 -----------:------------:----------:-------------- More... Place Page Segment Mark......:*S030 Measurement method....:Row/Column Position .....Across 60 Down 1 Page Segment . . . QFCLOGO Name F3=Exit F4=Detail F6=Change measurement method F12=Cancel F24=More keys\n\nDesign Overlay Columns: 1- 74 Control . . \\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_ Source overlay.....STATIONERY *...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7.... 001 *S030 002 *T001 Stationery Co., Ltd. 003 004 *T002 rd Stationery Sales Slip Date: / / 005 *L003 ------------------------ *L026 -- 006 007 *B004 -----------*L017 -------:----------*L020 --------+ 008 : *T021 : *T022 ty : *T023 : *T025 ( $ ): 009 : : *T024 : : 010 *L012 -----------:------------:----------:-------------- 011 : *T013 oint Pen : : : : 012 *L011 -----------:------------:----------:-------------- 013 : *T014 : : : : 014 *L010 -----------:------------:----------:-------------- 015 : *T015 : : : : 016 *L009 -----------:------------:----------:-------------- 017 : *T016 : : : : More... F3=Exit F6=Text F9=Line F10=Box F11=Bar code F21=Element edit F22=Block edit F24=More keys\n\nThe mark changes from %S030 to *S030 to indicate the element has been placed.\n\n52 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\n- Note: The page segment you specify is not searched for now, but is searched for in the libraries in the library list when the overlay is printed. See “Page Segment” on page 392 for more information.\n\n- 2. Press the Enter key.\n\n- 1. Type QFCLOGO for the Page segment prompt.\n\n## Example Actions:" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7836953521160825, + "doc_id": "53281ee2e604de452e27c9899b9e6bdcd2acd11cee04427f0a97f7e2b5b7d9bc", + "edit_distance": 0.3333333333333333, + "f1_score": 0.9043478260869565, + "meteor": 0.9385423166283665, + "precision": 0.8813559322033898, + "pred_md": "Table 86. GDF orders generated by S/390, iSeries system, and the GDF orders supported by AFP Utilities (continued)\n\n## Note:\n\n1 the order is supported and it is the short format, which has no length field.\n\n2 finds this order, skips this order and handles the next order.\n\nNote:\n\nWhen AFP Utilities for iSeries finds an order which is not on this table, AFP Utilities for iSeries regards the file as an incorrect GDF file and exits from graphics handling.\n\nAppendix D. Using GDFs in AFP Utilities\n\n441", + "recall": 0.9285714285714286, + "true_md": "Table86.GDFordersgeneratedbyS/390,iSeriessystem,andtheGDForderssupportedby AFPUtilities (continued)\n\n## Note:\n\n1 the order is supported and it is the short format, which has no length field.\n\n2 finds this order, skips this order and handles the next order.\n\nAppendix D. Using GDFs in AFP Utilities 441\n\nNote: When AFP Utilities for iSeries finds an order which is not on this table, AFP Utilities for iSeries regards the file as an incorrect GDF file and exits from graphics handling." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.21111591031960614, + "doc_id": "412dbd0f3917acd6267bc081aacfb27438e8aa242fed42fc62dfd2135734b1fc", + "edit_distance": 0.6637931034482759, + "f1_score": 0.7425149700598803, + "meteor": 0.4653277070892652, + "precision": 0.9841269841269841, + "pred_md": "110\n\nThe actions with a 1 in the Opt column are the mandatory actions to create a PFD definition. Other actions for which the Opt column is left blank are optional.\n\n## Example Actions:\n\n- 1. Type 1 in the Opt column beside Define printout specifications .\n- 2. Press the Enter key.\n\nThe Specify Database File display appears.\n\n## Specifying a Database File\n\n## Example Actions:\n\n- 1. Type QGPL in the Library prompt.\n- 2. Move the cursor to the Database file prompt and press the F4 key to list the database files in library QGPL.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.5961538461538461, + "true_md": "The actions witha1inthe Opt column are the mandatory actions to create a PFD definition. Other actions for which the Opt column is left blank are optional.\n\nThe Specify Database File display appears.\n\n110 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\n## Specify Database File\n\n## Create PFD Definition\n\nFile...........: PFDFILE Library . .......: MYLIB PFD definition . . . . . . : PRODUCTLBL Type options, press Enter. 1=Select Opt Action Define PFD specifications Work with PFD definition fonts 1 Specify database file Specify break fields 1 Design record layout Design page layout Specify record selection Define printout specifications Specify mapping object name F3=Exit F5=Refresh F9=Select all F12=Cancel\n\nType choices, press Enter. Database file ......... Name,F4forlist Library ........... QGPL Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB Record format ......... *FIRST Name, *FIRST, F4 for list\n\n## Specifying a Database File\n\n## Example Actions:\n\n## Example Actions:\n\n- 1. Type QGPL in the Library prompt.\n\n- 2. Move the cursor to the Database file prompt and press the F4 key to list the database files in library QGPL.\n\n- 1. Type 1 in the Opt column beside Define printout specifications .\n\n- 2. Press the Enter key.\n\nF3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6207601709228744, + "doc_id": "792c888534e0e0a3dd183b5c7dcb2e29ac145619018fca8c018e31991f00dfb9", + "edit_distance": 0.21238938053097345, + "f1_score": 0.8554216867469879, + "meteor": 0.7960258723930308, + "precision": 0.8554216867469879, + "pred_md": "104\n\nThe following chapters show you how to:\n\n- v Get started with the Print Format Utility and use it by practically performing an exercise\n- v Start and end the Print Format Utility\n- v Work with a PFD definition\n- -Create a PFD definition\n- -Define PFD specifications\n- -Work with PFD definition fonts\n- -Specify database file and record format\n- -Specify break fields\n- -Design a record layout\n- -Design a page layout\n- -Specify record selection\n- -Define printout specifications\n- -Specify mapping object name\n- -Change a PFD definition\n- -Copy a PFD definition\n- -Delete a PFD definition\n- -Rename a PFD definition\n- -Print a PFD definition\n- v Work with a PFD definition file\n- -Create a PFD definition file\n- -Change a PFD definition file description\n- -Copy a PFD definition file\n- -Delete a PFD definition file\n- -Rename a PFD definition file\n- -Display a PFD definition file description\n- -Work with PFD definitions\n- v Print a database file member\n\nWhile using IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries, you can press the F1 key to display help information.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.8554216867469879, + "true_md": "The following chapters show you how to:\n\n- v Get started with the Print Format Utility and use it by practically performing an exercise\n\n- v Start and end the Print Format Utility\n\n- v Work with a PFD definition\n\n- – Create a PFD definition\n\n- - Define PFD specifications\n\n- - Work with PFD definition fonts\n\n- - Specify database file and record format\n\n- - Specify break fields\n\n- - Design a record layout\n\n- - Design a page layout\n\n- - Specify record selection\n\n- - Define printout specifications\n\n- - Specify mapping object name\n\n- – Change a PFD definition\n\n- – Copy a PFD definition\n\n- – Delete a PFD definition\n\n- – Rename a PFD definition\n\n- – Print a PFD definition\n\n- v Work with a PFD definition file\n\n- – Create a PFD definition file\n\n- – Change a PFD definition file description\n\n- – Copy a PFD definition file\n\n- – Delete a PFD definition file\n\n- – Rename a PFD definition file\n\n- – Display a PFD definition file description\n\n- – Work with PFD definitions\n\n- v Print a database file member\n\nWhile using IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries, you can press the F1 key to display help information.\n\n104 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4805184934351089, + "doc_id": "f5991b568b19193d07c5b625285d40df2d4ef45af2bb0203731d9d4fb348089b", + "edit_distance": 0.637546468401487, + "f1_score": 0.9544468546637743, + "meteor": 0.7527299419629928, + "precision": 0.9865470852017937, + "pred_md": "| specify break fields 161 | |\n|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|----------|\n| specify database file 158 specify mapping object name specify record selection 183 start | 191 |\n| CVTOVLPFM command CVTPAGSPFM command | 328 329 |\n| CVTPCDPAGS command | 324 |\n| CVTPFMPAGS command | 326 |\n| overlay utility 30, 59 print format utility | |\n| 106, 139 resource management utility STRAFPU Command 323 | 315, 323 |\n| start overlay utility 59 363 FILE parameter 364 MBR parameter 365 OPTION parameter 365 | |\n| STRAFPU command STRAFPU Command resource management utility 363 | 323 |\n| STROVLU (Start Overlay Utility) command STRPFU command 365 OPTION parameter 367 PFDFILE parameter 366 PFDMBR parameter 367 summary data 178 *AVG 181 *CNT 181 *FIRST 181 *LAST 181 *MAX 181 *MIN 181 *TOTAL 181 supported printers 417 symptom bar code is not printed | |\n| font is not as expected 405 graphics is not printed 404 image (page segment) is not printed 404 length of dotted or dashed line is not correct 405 nothing is printed 403 one or more elements are not printed 404 | 405 403 |\n| 404 character size is not as expected different image (page segment) is printed 405 element position is not as expected 405 page number is not printed shading in the box element is not correct 406 text in a box is not formatted correctly 405 text in graphics is not as expected 405 405 | |\n| text is not as expected | |\n| text lines overlap 405 | |\n\n## T\n\n456\n\n| tasks (continued) | |\n|--------------------------------------------------------------------|----------|\n| related to font 455 | |\n| related to list view of design display 449 | |\n| related to mapping object 456 446 | |\n| related to overlay objects related to overlay specifications | |\n| related to page segments 446 | |\n| related to PFD specifications 454 | |\n| related to printout specifications related to record selection 454 | |\n| related to screen view of design display 447 | |\n| related to source overlay files 444 | |\n| related to source overlays 443 | |\n| TEST | |\n| EQ 185 | |\n| GT 185 | |\n| LE 185 | |\n| LT 185 NE 185 | |\n| RANGE 185 | |\n| character size | 248 |\n| color 246 control 243 | |\n| DBCS font 247 | |\n| degree of rotation | 246 |\n| 247 | |\n| font | |\n| format 246 | |\n| height 248 mark 243, 245 | |\n| measurement method 243, 245 | |\n| overstrike 247 | |\n| position 243, 245 | |\n| text data 244, 245 underline 247 | |\n| width 248 | |\n| text element and position 408 measurement method 408 | |\n| text font in graphics (GDF) restrictions 393, 397 | |\n| trailing spaces 269 | |\n| tutorial | |\n| 136, 140 type (element) 227 | |\n| text in a box | |\n| restrictions | |\n| | 393, 396 |\n\n## U\n\n## V\n\n| value | 186 |\n|------------------------------------------------------|--------------------------------|\n| | variable text data specify 116 |\n| view | layout of the list view |\n| layout of the screen view overlay with AFP Workbench | 230 45 |\n\n## W\n\n| width (overlay specifications) | 68 |\n|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|--------------|\n| width (PFD specifications) 152 | |\n| work with | |\n| fonts 297 overlay | |\n| 311 overlays function | 324, 341 |\n| page segment 312 page segment function PFD definition PFD definition file | 324, 349 |\n| 140, 141, 214 140 PFD definition files 201 158 | |\n| PFD definition fonts source overlay | |\n| 60, 94 source overlay files 60, 82 73 | |\n| source overlay fonts work with display 15 work with fonts 297 | |\n| work with overlays function work with page segments | 324, 341 312 |\n| work with PFD definition files | 201 |\n| work with PFD definition fonts | 158 |\n| work with PFD definitions 214 work with source overlay files | |\n| | 82 |\n| work with source overlay fonts work with source overlays work with source overlays file | 73 60, 94 |\n| | 60 |\n\nIndex\n\n481", + "recall": 0.9243697478991597, + "true_md": "specify break fields 161 specify database file 158 specify mapping object name 191 specify record selection 183 start CVTOVLPFM command 328 CVTPAGSPFM command 329 CVTPCDPAGS command 324 CVTPFMPAGS command 326 overlay utility 30, 59 print format utility 106, 139 resource management utility 315, 323 STRAFPU Command 323 start overlay utility 59 STRAFPU command 363 FILE parameter 364 MBR parameter 365 OPTION parameter 365 STRAFPU Command resource management utility 323 STROVLU (Start Overlay Utility) command 363 STRPFU command 365 OPTION parameter 367 PFDFILE parameter 366 PFDMBR parameter 367 summary data 178 *AVG 181 *CNT 181 *FIRST 181 *LAST 181 *MAX 181 *MIN 181 *TOTAL 181 supported printers 417 symptom bar code is not printed 404 character size is not as expected 405 different image (page segment) is printed 405 element position is not as expected 405 font is not as expected 405 graphics is not printed 404 image (page segment) is not printed 404 length of dotted or dashed line is not correct 405 nothing is printed 403 one or more elements are not printed 404 page number is not printed 403 shading in the box element is not correct 406 text in a box is not formatted correctly 405 text in graphics is not as expected 405 text is not as expected 405 text lines overlap 405\n\ntasks (continued) related to font 455 related to list view of design display 449 related to mapping object 456 related to overlay objects 446 related to overlay specifications 454 related to page segments 446 related to PFD definition files 445 related to PFD definitions 444 related to PFD specifications 454 related to printout specifications 456 related to record selection 454 related to screen view of design display 447 related to source overlay files 444 related to source overlays 443 TEST EQ 185 GE 185 GT 185 LE 185 LT 185 NE 185 RANGE 185 text character size 248 color 246 control 243 DBCS font 247 degree of rotation 246 font 247 format 246 height 248 mark 243, 245 measurement method 243, 245 overstrike 247 position 243, 245 text data 244, 245 underline 247 width 248 text element and position 408 measurement method 408 text font in graphics (GDF) restrictions 393, 397 textinabox restrictions 393, 396 trailing spaces 269 tutorial 136, 140 type (element) 227\n\nunderline 247, 260 unit of measure (overlay specifications) 68 unit of measure (PFD specifications) 152 use bar code 8 graphics 8 images 8 overlay 7 printer file 56 using an overlay 56 using GDFs 439\n\ntasks 443 related to break fields 456 related to database file selection 454 related to element 450\n\nwidth (overlay specifications) 68 width (PFD specifications) 152 work with fonts 297 overlay 311 overlays function 324, 341 page segment 312 page segment function 324, 349 PFD definition 140, 141, 214 PFD definition file 140 PFD definition files 201 PFD definition fonts 158 source overlay 60, 94 source overlay files 60, 82 source overlay fonts 73 work with display 15 work with fonts 297 work with overlays 311 work with overlays function 324, 341 work with page segments 312 work with PFD definition files 201 work with PFD definition fonts 158 work with PFD definitions 214 work with source overlay files 82 work with source overlay fonts 73 work with source overlays 60, 94 work with source overlays file 60\n\nvalue 186 variable text data specify 116 view layout of the list view 291 layout of the screen view 230 overlay with AFP Workbench 45\n\n## T\n\n## U\n\n## V\n\n## W\n\nIndex 481" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7071067811865475, + "doc_id": "c43adbc6ef42c7c5a9439007e8bf9b144f1ea0f26f672f76239337c1a7ce4baf", + "edit_distance": 0.2, + "f1_score": 0.8421052631578947, + "meteor": 0.8017676767676769, + "precision": 0.8888888888888888, + "pred_md": "xiv\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.8, + "true_md": "xiv AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9614033383098802, + "doc_id": "85ebecfa7d93f5887f885e8a1ab59e3b6909dd69edafec9684c5e8043f16e671", + "edit_distance": 0.9115853658536586, + "f1_score": 0.981029810298103, + "meteor": 0.7536132804227352, + "precision": 0.9836956521739131, + "pred_md": "To go to the Design Record Layout display or the Design Page Layout display, do the following:\n\n- 1. On any display with a command line, type STRAFPU and press Enter.\n- 2. On the Advanced Function Printing Utilities menu, select option 11 (Work with PFD definitions) and press Enter.\n- 3. The Work with PFD Definitions display shows the list of PFD definitions in a PFD definition file. If you want to use another PFD definition file or library, type the name for the Library prompt and the File prompt in the upper part of the display, and press Enter.\n- 4. On the Work with PFD Definitions display, do one of the following:\n- v To create a new PFD definition, type 1 (Create) in the Opt column and a new PFD definition name in the PFD definition column on the first line in the list to create a new PFD definition and press Enter.\n- v To change an existing PFD definition, type 2 (Change) in the Opt column and a PFD definition name for the PFD definition column in the first line in the list or type 2 in the Opt column beside the PFD definition you want to change in the list and press Enter.\n- 5. On the Create PFD Definitions display or Change PFD Definition display, type 1 (Select) beside the Design Record Layout or the Design Page Layout in the action list, and press Enter.\n- 6. The Design Record Layout display or the Design Page Layout display appears.\n\n## Design Display\n\nTwo kinds of views of display are provided to design elements as follows:\n\n- v Screen view\n- v List view\n\n## Screen View\n\nThe screen view shows you an image that is similar to what will be printed. The printout image is shown in the upper part of the display called the image area . In the screen view, you can specify the position of an element by the cursor position in the image area. The design display is initially in the screen view. You can change it to the list view by pressing the F17 (Switch view) key.\n\nSee 'Defining Elements in the Screen View' on page 229 for more information.\n\n## List View\n\nIn the list view, all element definitions are displayed in the order of the sequence number with one element in a line. The order in which the elements are displayed can be changed by sorting the list (F4=Sort) by the number (NBR), NAME, ACROSS, or DOWN fields. To sort the list, place the cursor on or under one of these field names and press F4. The intended use of the list view is to see the defined elements in a source overlay, a record layout, or a page layout and make minor modifications to the elements. You can easily find an element because you can see part of the definitions such as the bar code data and the page segment name that are not displayed on the image area in the screen view. You can change the display to the screen view by pressing the F17 (Switch view) key.\n\nSee 'Changing Elements in the List View' on page 291 for more information.\n\n## Defining Elements in the Screen View\n\nIn the screen view, you can design an overlay, a record layout, or a page layout by entering the print image on the display. Because the print image is displayed on\n\nChapter 13. Design Operation\n\n229", + "recall": 0.9783783783783784, + "true_md": "To go to the Design Record Layout display or the Design Page Layout display, do the following:\n\nTwo kinds of views of display are provided to design elements as follows:\n\nThe screen view shows you an image that is similar to what will be printed. The printout image is shown in the upper part of the display called the image area .In the screen view, you can specify the position of an element by the cursor position in the image area. The design display is initially in the screen view. You can change it to the list view by pressing the F17 (Switch view) key.\n\nSee “Defining Elements in the Screen View” on page 229 for more information.\n\nIn the list view, all element definitions are displayed in the order of the sequence number with one element in a line. The order in which the elements are displayed can be changed by sorting the list (F4=Sort) by the number (NBR), NAME, ACROSS, or DOWN fields. To sort the list, place the cursor on or under one of these field names and press F4. The intended use of the list view is to see the defined elements in a source overlay, a record layout, or a page layout and make minor modifications to the elements. You can easily find an element because you can see part of the definitions such as the bar code data and the page segment name that are not displayed on the image area in the screen view. You can change the display to the screen view by pressing the F17 (Switch view) key.\n\nSee “Changing Elements in the List View” on page 291 for more information.\n\nIn the screen view, you can design an overlay, a record layout, or a page layout by entering the print image on the display. Because the print image is displayed on\n\nChapter 13. Design Operation 229\n\n## Defining Elements in the Screen View\n\n## List View\n\n## Screen View\n\n## Design Display\n\n- 1. On any display with a command line, type STRAFPU and press Enter.\n\n- 2. On the Advanced Function Printing Utilities menu, select option 11 (Work with PFD definitions) and press Enter.\n\n- 3. The Work with PFD Definitions display shows the list of PFD definitions in a PFD definition file. If you want to use another PFD definition file or library, type the name for the Library prompt and the File prompt in the upper part of the display, and press Enter.\n\n- 4. On the Work with PFD Definitions display, do one of the following:\n\n- v To create a new PFD definition, type 1 (Create) in the Opt column and a new PFD definition name in the PFD definition column on the first line in the list to create a new PFD definition and press Enter.\n\n- v To change an existing PFD definition, type 2 (Change) in the Opt column and a PFD definition name for the PFD definition column in the first line in the list or type 2 in the Opt column beside the PFD definition you want to change in the list and press Enter.\n\n- 5. On the Create PFD Definitions display or Change PFD Definition display, type 1 (Select) beside the Design Record Layout or the Design Page Layout in the action list, and press Enter.\n\n- 6. The Design Record Layout display or the Design Page Layout display appears.\n\n- v Screen view\n\n- v List view" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9075766897622636, + "doc_id": "d133784faf0c59e02082b5f3bc8e6e3570aea3a8794d64a73e854b88565c2882", + "edit_distance": 0.0859375, + "f1_score": 0.9859154929577465, + "meteor": 0.9625540107147502, + "precision": 0.9859154929577465, + "pred_md": "Basic English Language Skils\n\n## TABLE OF CONTENTS:\n\n- 1. General Language Tips to Get You Started\n- 2. Parts of Speech\n- 3. Punctuation\n- 4. Commonly Confused Words and Phrases\n- 5. Tips for Filling in Your College Registration Form\n- 6. Learn How to Summarise Your Study Material\n- 7. How to Ask for Help from Your Tutor\n- 8. Tips for Completing Your Written Assignments\n- 9. Tips for Answering Exam Questions\n- 10. Language Skills at Work - How to Write a Cover Letter\n- 11. Language Skills at Work - How to Write a Resignation Letter\n- 12. Language Skills at Work - Sending E-mails to Your Colleagues", + "recall": 0.9859154929577465, + "true_md": "## TABLE OF CONTENTS:\n\nBasic English Language Skills\n\n- 1. General Language Tips to Get You Started\n\n- 2. Parts of Speech\n\n- 3. Punctuation\n\n- 4. Commonly Confused Words and Phrases\n\n- 5. Tips for Filling in Your College Registration Form\n\n- 6. Learn How to Summarise Your Study Material\n\n- 7. How to Ask for Help from Your Tutor\n\n- 8. Tips for Completing Your Written Assignments\n\n- 9. Tips for Answering Exam Questions\n\n- 10. Language Skills at Work – How to Write a Cover Letter\n\n- 11. Language Skills at Work – How to Write a Resignation Letter\n\n- 12. Language Skills at Work – Sending E-mails to Your Colleagues" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4173978396251364, + "doc_id": "3dfae8af3071a559ef7f107e57a471fce2d3e0276b25ddde64c2bb9a2c5cc9b2", + "edit_distance": 0.3862815884476534, + "f1_score": 0.7844827586206897, + "meteor": 0.5772301967107888, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "The Work with Page Segments display appears:\n\nThe display shows all page segments in the libraries in the library list. The number of page segments shown in the list depends on your system. You may choose any options or enter a library name for the Library prompt to change the list.\n\nNote: The Opt prompt must be blank when you change the library name.\n\nYou should see page segment QFCLOGO and library QGPL in the list. If you do not see the name, press the Page Down (Roll Up) key until the name appears or type the name for the Position to prompt and press the Enter key. The list is arranged in ascending sequence by page segment name.\n\n## Example Actions:\n\n- 1. Type 6 in the Opt column beside page segment name QFCLOGO.\n- 2. Press the Enter key.\n\nChapter 16. Getting Started with the Resource Management utility\n\n321", + "recall": 0.6453900709219859, + "true_md": "The Work with Page Segments display appears:\n\n## Work with Page Segments\n\nThe display shows all page segments in the libraries in the library list. The number of page segments shown in the list depends on your system. You may choose any options or enter a library name for the Library prompt to change the list.\n\nNote: The Opt prompt must be blank when you change the library name.\n\nYou should see page segment QFCLOGO and library QGPL in the list. If you do not see the name, press the Page Down (Roll Up) key until the name appears or type the name for the Position to prompt and press the Enter key. The list is arranged in ascending sequence by page segment name.\n\n## Example Actions:\n\n- 1. Type 6 in the Opt column beside page segment name QFCLOGO.\n\n- 2. Press the Enter key.\n\nChapter 16. Getting Started with the Resource Management utility 321\n\nLibrary ......... *LIBL Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB *ALL, *USRLIBL, *ALLUSR Page segment . . . . . . *ALL Name, generic*, *ALL Position to....... Starting character(s) Type options, press Enter. 3=Copy 4=Delete 6=Print 7=Rename 8=Display description 9=Convert to file 13=Change text Page Opt Segment Library Text 6 QFCLOGO QGPL SAMPLE PAGE SEGMENT - IM1 FORMAT QFCLOGO2 SAMPLE PAGE SEGMENT - IOCA FUNCTION SET 10 FORMAT Bottom Parameters or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F9=Retrieve F11=Display names only F12=Cancel" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4952632416591065, + "doc_id": "d92cffda707fc7da7a4aa9c974b51ad26d87ee6e4947e714d75f5e5d2b5621f8", + "edit_distance": 0.4490934449093445, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.48158039392388147, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## OPERATION (cont.)\n\n- 6. Adjust the interpupillary distance by using the eyepiece interpupillary slide adjustment.\n- 7. Observe using the right eyepiece adjusting the coarse and fine focus and adjust the diopter ring until image is clear and sharp.\n- 8. Observe with the left eyepiece and adjust the diopter ring until image is clear and sharp.\n- 9. Rotate the fine focus adjustment when using other objectives. NOTE: This instrument is equipped with patent objectives so the precision or parfocalization is very high.\n\nFig. 1 - Objective Parts\n\nFig. 1 - Objective Parts\n\n- 10. If the image is in focus with the 10x objective, you can select other objectives and observe the specimen even if the fine adjustment knob has not been used by using the following method (See Fig. 1):\n- 1. Unscrew the 40x or 100x objective and remove from turret.\n- 2. Remove the mark sleeve.\n- 3. Turn the ring on the objective to adjust its parfocal distance.\n- 4. Re-insert the objective and compare with the 10x.\n- 5. Adjust until the 40x and 100x objectives image is clear.\n\n## USING THE CEDAR OIL\n\n- 1. Drop some cedar oil on to the top of the 100x objective when the 100x objective is being used. NOTE: To maintain a good quality image, rotate the turret right and left several times to eliminate bubbles in the cedar oil.\n- 2. After finishing the observation, wipe off the cedar oil.\n- 3. Do not use the 40x objective until you have wiped off all of the cedar oil.\n\n17\n\n18\n\n## OPERATION (cont.)\n\n## ADJUSTING THE CONDENSER APERTURE\n\n- 1. The numerical aperture of the condenser should match the numerical aperture of the objective being used.\n- 2. To make sure that the objectives are imaging properly (especially the 40x and 100x), follow this procedure:\n- 1. Take off the eyepiece.\n- 2. Look through the eyepiece.\n- 3. The smallest circle or light that you can see is the eyepiece's exit pupil.\n- 4. Adjust the aperture of the iris diaphragm in the condenser to 70% or 80% for the best contrast for observation (See Fig. 2.).\n\nFig. 2 - Condenser Diaphram Aperture\n\nFig. 2 - Condenser Diaphram Aperture\n\n## TROUBLESHOOTING", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## OPERATION ( cont. )\n\n## ADJUSTING THE CONDENSER APERTURE\n\n## TROUBLESHOOTING\n\n## USING THE CEDAR OIL\n\n- 6. Adjust the interpupillary distance by using the eyepiece interpupillary slide adjustment. 7. Observe using the right eyepiece adjusting the coarse and fine\n\n- interpupillary slide adjustment. 7. Observe using the right eyepiece adjusting the coarse and fine focus and adjust the diopter ring until image is clear and sharp. 8. Observe with the left eyepiece and adjust the diopter ring until\n\n- focus and adjust the diopter ring until image is clear and sharp. 8. Observe with the left eyepiece and adjust the diopter ring until image is clear and sharp. 9. Rotate the fine focus adjustment when using other objectives.\n\n- image is clear and sharp. 9. Rotate the fine focus adjustment when using other objectives. NOTE: This instrument is equipped with patent objectives so the precision or parfocalization is very high.\n\n- 10. If the image is in focus with the 10x objective, you can select other objectives and observe the specimen even if the fine adjustment knob has not been used by using the following method (See Fig. 1): 1. Unscrew the 40x or 100x objective and remove from\n\n- method (See Fig. 1): 1. Unscrew the 40x or 100x objective and remove from turret. 2. Remove the mark sleeve.\n\n- turret. 2. Remove the mark sleeve. 3. Turn the ring on the objective to adjust its parfocal\n\n- 2. Remove the mark sleeve. 3. Turn the ring on the objective to adjust its parfocal distance. 4. Re-insert the objective and compare with the 10x.\n\n- distance. 4. Re-insert the objective and compare with the 10x. 5. Adjust until the 40x and 100x objectives image is clear.\n\n- 4. Re-insert the objective and compare with the 10x. 5. Adjust until the 40x and 100x objectives image is clear.\n\n- 1. Drop some cedar oil on to the top of the 100x objective when the 100x objective is being used. NOTE: To maintain a good quality image, rotate the turret right and left several times to eliminate bubbles in the cedar oil. 2. After finishing the observation, wipe off the cedar oil.\n\n- bubbles in the cedar oil. 2. After finishing the observation, wipe off the cedar oil. 3. Do not use the 40x objective until you have wiped off all of the\n\n- 2. After finishing the observation, wipe off the cedar oil. 3. Do not use the 40x objective until you have wiped off all of the cedar oil. \n\n- 1. The numerical aperture of the condenser should match the numerical aperture of the objective being used. 2. To make sure that the objectives are imaging properly\n\n- numerical aperture of the objective being used. 2. To make sure that the objectives are imaging properly (especially the 40x and 100x), follow this procedure: 1. Take off the eyepiece.\n\n- (especially the 40x and 100x), follow this procedure: 1. Take off the eyepiece. 2. Look through the eyepiece.\n\n- 1. Take off the eyepiece. 2. Look through the eyepiece. 3. The smallest circle or light that you can see is the\n\n- 2. Look through the eyepiece. 3. The smallest circle or light that you can see is the eyepiece's exit pupil. 4. Adjust the aperture of the iris diaphragm in the\n\n- eyepiece's exit pupil. 4. Adjust the aperture of the iris diaphragm in the condenser to 70% or 80% for the best contrast for observation (See Fig. 2.).\n\nFig. 2 - Condenser Diaphram Aperture\n\nFig. 1 - Objective Parts\n\n## OPERATION ( cont. )\n\n18\n\n17" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.3451709519775473, + "doc_id": "5f172fdcd9174417b9c2ea3f386e2fc77a2019bbb9ca45a44cbbf6265beade6e", + "edit_distance": 0.3791469194312796, + "f1_score": 0.7348837209302326, + "meteor": 0.647082134221034, + "precision": 0.9634146341463414, + "pred_md": "170\n\nInitially, there is nothing defined in this page layout. Place records and define fixed data and variable data, such as summary data or reserved variable data in the page interactively.\n\nYou can define fixed data in the same way you do using the Overlay Utility. See 'Chapter 13. Design Operation' on page 227 for more information about the design operation.\n\nYou can place the record in the following steps.\n\nPress the F24 key to change the function key area in the following display.\n\nThe function key area changes and F13 (Place) is displayed. To place a record, move the cursor to the desired position and press F13. The following display appears:\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.5939849624060151, + "true_md": "Initially, there is nothing defined in this page layout. Place records and define fixed data and variable data, such as summary data or reserved variable data in the page interactively.\n\nYou can define fixed data in the same way you do using the Overlay Utility. See “Chapter 13. Design Operation” on page 227 for more information about the design operation.\n\nYou can place the record in the following steps.\n\nPress the F24 key to change the function key area in the following display.\n\nThe function key area changes and F13 (Place) is displayed. To place a record, move the cursor to the desired position and press F13. The following display appears:\n\nDesign Page Layout Columns: 1- 74 Control . . PFD definition.....PRODUCTLBL *...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7.... 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 More... F5=Refresh F13=Place F14=Change F15=Mark on/off F16=Hide F17=List view F24=More keys\n\n170 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.966733483987219, + "doc_id": "18145e60864d0b509ac8488d658ba1c5d7c5babf965fc0cc4222131c9692f799", + "edit_distance": 0.02643171806167401, + "f1_score": 0.9828571428571429, + "meteor": 0.9907025545180478, + "precision": 0.9885057471264368, + "pred_md": "12\n\n## Resource Management Utility\n\nThe images used by the Overlay Utility and the Print Format Utility (or any AFP application) are stored as page segments . These images are normally scanned into a client workstation. The Resource Management Utility is an interactive tool to:\n\n- v Convert an image to page segment.\n- v Convert a page segment to a physical file.\n- v Convert an overlay object to a physical file.\n- v Resize and rotate images as they are being created.\n\nIt also maintains AFP resource objects, such as page segments or overlay objects.\n\n## You can:\n\n- v Create a page segment from a physical file member.\n- v Create a page segment from a PC document.\n- v Convert a page segment or an overlay to a physical file member. (You can then transfer these AFP resource objects to other systems such as the System/370.)\n- v Copy, delete, rename, and print an overlay object, or display and change the description of an overlay object.\n- v Copy, delete, rename, and print a page segment, or display and change the description of an page segment.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.9772727272727273, + "true_md": "## Resource Management Utility\n\nThe images used by the Overlay Utility and the Print Format Utility (or any AFP application) are stored as page segments . These images are normally scanned into a client workstation. The Resource Management Utility is an interactive tool to:\n\n- v Convert an image to page segment.\n\n- v Convert a page segment to a physical file.\n\n- v Convert an overlay object to a physical file.\n\n- v Resize and rotate images as they are being created.\n\nIt also maintains AFP resource objects, such as page segments or overlay objects.\n\nYou can:\n\n- v Create a page segment from a physical file member.\n\n- v Create a page segment from a PC document.\n\n- v Convert a page segment or an overlay to a physical file member. (You can then transfer these AFP resource objects to other systems such as the System/370.)\n\n- v Copy, delete, rename, and print an overlay object, or display and change the description of an overlay object.\n\n- v Copy, delete, rename, and print a page segment, or display and change the description of an page segment.\n\n12 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9709345990112646, + "doc_id": "a4b5999aab1a8242af728607a4e8a2e9532ae5195fa6dde169cfd3e2746ed4e6", + "edit_distance": 0.03125, + "f1_score": 0.9647058823529412, + "meteor": 0.9702497561388681, + "precision": 0.9761904761904762, + "pred_md": "## Ending the Resource Management Utility\n\nYou can end the Resource Management Utility by pressing the F3 key on the Convert to Page Segment display, the Work with Overlays display, or the Work with Page Segments display. The display from which you started the Resource Management Utility will appear.\n\n330\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.9534883720930233, + "true_md": "## Ending the Resource Management Utility\n\nYou can end the Resource Management Utility by pressing the F3 key on the Convert to Page Segment display, the Work with Overlays display, or the Work with Page Segments display. The display from which you started the Resource Management Utility will appear.\n\n330 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6887647561098295, + "doc_id": "3280fdde961e0782669fa64b8bc8257f3408c8d2e4c7ca1f9a60dff7cfacb467", + "edit_distance": 0.5675675675675675, + "f1_score": 0.825, + "meteor": 0.9121469261974084, + "precision": 0.7674418604651163, + "pred_md": "Table 98. Tasks related to text element (continued)\n\nNote: The following description assumes that you are on one of the following displays:\n\nThe Define Box Detail display\n\nThe Change Box Detail display\n\nTable 99. Tasks related to text element\n\n## Line Element\n\nNote:\n\nThe following description assumes that you are on one of the following displays:\n\nThe Define Line Detail display\n\nThe Change Line Detail display\n\nTable 100. Tasks related to line element\n\n## Box Element\n\nNote:\n\nThe following description assumes that you are on one of the following displays:\n\nAppendix E. How to Do a Task\n\n451", + "recall": 0.8918918918918919, + "true_md": "Table98.Tasksrelatedtotextelement (continued)\n\n- Note: The following description assumes that you are on one of the following displays:\n\nThe Define Box Detail display The Change Box Detail display\n\n- Note: The following description assumes that you are on one of the following displays:\n\n- Note: The following description assumes that you are on one of the following displays:\n\nTable99.Tasksrelatedtotextelement\n\nTable100.Tasksrelatedtolineelement\n\n## Line Element\n\n## Box Element\n\nAppendix E. How to Do a Task 451\n\nThe Define Line Detail display The Change Line Detail display" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8491302808494349, + "doc_id": "db8cfd057461647b5371aaf784d08f46d2d87dee046b815e105cf280a1a9ba10", + "edit_distance": 0.5558510638297872, + "f1_score": 0.979591836734694, + "meteor": 0.8815433858159806, + "precision": 0.9896907216494846, + "pred_md": "374\n\nyou performed this command last is used. If you specify *PRV for the PAGSEG parameter, it is not necessary to specify a library.\n\npage-segment-name\n\nSpecify the name of the page segment to be created.\n\nThe possible library values are:\n\n## *CURLIB\n\nThe current library for the job is used to create the page segment. If no library is specified as the current library for the job, library QGPL is used.\n\nlibrary-name\n\nSpecify the library in which the page segment will be created.\n\n## From folder (FRMFLR)\n\nSpecifies the name of the folder that contains the PC document to be converted.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\n*PRV Specifies the name of the folder used when you previously created\n\na page segment of the same name.\n\nfolder-name\n\nSpecify the folder name.\n\n## From PC document (FRMDOC)\n\nSpecifies the PC document name to be converted.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\n*PRV\n\nSpecifies the name of the PC document used when you previously created a page segment of the same name.\n\n*PAGSEG\n\nSpecifies that the name of the page segment to be created is the same as the name of the PC document.\n\nPC-document-name\n\nSpecify the PC document name that is to be converted.\n\nChange image size (CHGIMGSIZE)\n\nSpecifies whether the size of the image in the page segment is changed or not.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\n*SAME\n\nSpecifies the same value used for this parameter when you previously created a page segment of the same name. If this is the first page segment, the default value is *NO.\n\n*NO Specifies not to change the image size.\n\n*YES\n\nSpecifies to change the image size.\n\nIf you specify *YES, the IMGSIZE and MAPPING parameters will appear, and you can specify the new image size in the page segment and how to map the input image to the size.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.9696969696969697, + "true_md": "you performed this command last is used. If you specify *PRV for the PAGSEG parameter, it is not necessary to specify a library.\n\nSpecify the name of the page segment to be created.\n\nThe possible library values are:\n\nThe current library for the job is used to create the page segment. If no library is specified as the current library for the job, library QGPL is used.\n\nSpecify the library in which the page segment will be created.\n\nSpecifies the name of the folder that contains the PC document to be converted.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\nSpecify the folder name.\n\nSpecifies the PC document name to be converted.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\nSpecifies that the name of the page segment to be created is the same as the name of the PC document.\n\nSpecify the PC document name that is to be converted.\n\nSpecifies whether the size of the image in the page segment is changed or not.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\nSpecifies the same value used for this parameter when you previously created a page segment of the same name. If this is the first page segment, the default value is *NO.\n\nIf you specify *YES, the IMGSIZE and MAPPING parameters will appear, and you can specify the new image size in the page segment and how to map the input image to the size.\n\n## Change image size (CHGIMGSIZE)\n\n## *SAME\n\n## PC-document-name\n\n## *PAGSEG\n\n## From PC document (FRMDOC)\n\n## folder-name\n\n## From folder (FRMFLR)\n\n## library-name\n\n## page-segment-name\n\n## *CURLIB\n\n- *PRV Specifies the name of the folder used when you previously created a page segment of the same name.\n\n- *PRV Specifies the name of the PC document used when you previously created a page segment of the same name.\n\n- *NO Specifies not to change the image size.\n\n- *YES Specifies to change the image size.\n\n374 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9737082929827321, + "doc_id": "a84c52daf6ab3f01aa7b19c5bf90de611209daf820d5d651c7c2661a21e90cf1", + "edit_distance": 0.08292682926829269, + "f1_score": 0.9775784753363227, + "meteor": 0.9887110786012488, + "precision": 0.9819819819819819, + "pred_md": "298\n\nthe font is specified with a font number or font local identifier (1-8) or *DEFAULT. In this display, you can specify which font is actually used for each font local ID.\n\nFonts are stored either in the printer (printer-resident) or on the iSeries system (host-resident). Printer-resident fonts are selected by using a Font Global ID (FGID), while host-resident fonts are selected either by using a coded font name or a combination of a code page and character set. The FGID is a number, such as 011 for Courier or 5687 for Times New Roman. Most printers have an operations panel option that will print out all of the printer-resident fonts along with the FGID number.\n\nHost-resident fonts are iSeries objects and are stored in iSeries libraries. For example, there is a set of 240 dots per inch (dpi) IBM Compatibility fonts that are shipped with iSeries and reside in the QFNTCPL library. With printers supporting 240 dpi, 300 dpi, and 600 dpi print resolutions, the IBM Compatibility fonts are probably insufficient for most applications. The IBM AFP Font Collection (5648-113) is a comprehensive set of AFP fonts supporting all of the various printer resolutions as well as the most common type styles used in business documents. Fonts for 240 dpi and 300 dpi resolutions are raster or bit-mapped fonts. This means that each character is comprised of a pattern of dots. Each character set contains all of the characters required (these characters can vary because there are over 48 different languages supported within the AFP Font Collection). There is a different character set for each point size and each typeface to be used. Refer to 'Appendix I. Font Samples' on page 465 for samples of the most commonly used font character sets. For example, character set C0H40060 is a Helvetica Roman Bold 6-point while C0H400Z0 is Helvetica Roman Bold 36-point.\n\nThe IBM AFP Font Collections also contains outline (scalable) fonts. With outline fonts, each character is represented by a series of vectors. As a result, one character set can be \" scaled \" to any point size. For example, the outline character set for Helvetica Roman Bold is CZH400. This one character set can print characters in any point size. With a printer that supports host-resident outline fonts, this font is downloaded to the printer and the printer will scale the characters as required.\n\nThe two types of fonts, printer-resident and host-resident, can be specified in three different ways within AFP/U:\n\n- v Font Global ID (FGID)\n- v Coded Font Name\n- v Code Page and Character Set Name\n\nThe coded font name is, in essence, the same as a code page and character set name. A coded font name is simply a shorthand notation for a code page and character set name combination. The code page is a table that facilitates certain country and character differences. For example, the code page T1V10037 is a standard US English code page while the code page T1V10285 is a standard United Kingdom English code page. There are minor differences in the text produced by using either of these code pages.\n\nThe following table explains the Work with Source Overlay Fonts display and the Work with PFD Definition Fonts display.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.9732142857142857, + "true_md": "the font is specified with a font number or font local identifier (1-8) or *DEFAULT. In this display, you can specify which font is actually used for each font local ID.\n\nFonts are stored either in the printer (printer-resident) or on the iSeries system (host-resident). Printer-resident fonts are selected by using a Font Global ID (FGID), while host-resident fonts are selected either by using a coded font name or a combination of a code page and character set. The FGID is a number, such as 011 for Courier or 5687 for Times New Roman. Most printers have an operations panel option that will print out all of the printer-resident fonts along with the FGID number.\n\nHost-resident fonts are iSeries objects and are stored in iSeries libraries. For example, there is a set of 240 dots per inch (dpi) IBM Compatibility fonts that are shipped with iSeries and reside in the QFNTCPL library. With printers supporting 240 dpi, 300 dpi, and 600 dpi print resolutions, the IBM Compatibility fonts are probably insufficient for most applications. The IBM AFP Font Collection (5648-113) is a comprehensive set of AFP fonts supporting all of the various printer resolutions as well as the most common type styles used in business documents. Fonts for 240 dpi and 300 dpi resolutions are raster or bit-mapped fonts. This means that each character is comprised of a pattern of dots. Each character set contains all of the characters required (these characters can vary because there are over 48 different languages supported within the AFP Font Collection). There is a different character set for each point size and each typeface to be used. Refer to “Appendix I. Font Samples” on page 465 for samples of the most commonly used font character sets. For example, character set C0H40060 is a Helvetica Roman Bold 6-point while C0H400Z0 is Helvetica Roman Bold 36-point.\n\nThe IBM AFP Font Collections also contains outline (scalable) fonts. With outline fonts, each character is represented by a series of vectors. As a result, one character set can be † scaled † to any point size. For example, the outline character set for Helvetica Roman Bold is CZH400. This one character set can print characters in any point size. With a printer that supports host-resident outline fonts, this font is downloaded to the printer and the printer will scale the characters as required.\n\nThe two types of fonts, printer-resident and host-resident, can be specified in three different ways within AFP/U:\n\nThe coded font name is, in essence, the same as a code page and character set name. A coded font name is simply a shorthand notation for a code page and character set name combination. The code page is a table that facilitates certain country and character differences. For example, the code page T1V10037 is a standard US English code page while the code page T1V10285 is a standard United Kingdom English code page. There are minor differences in the text produced by using either of these code pages.\n\nThe following table explains the Work with Source Overlay Fonts display and the Work with PFD Definition Fonts display.\n\n- v Font Global ID (FGID)\n\n- v Coded Font Name\n\n- v Code Page and Character Set Name\n\n298 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5040802179792181, + "doc_id": "42d018c1da811a1ddc6c532d8d04cea9f8b287d1907cbc7bc0d0d3c6c9b12b2b", + "edit_distance": 0.4444444444444444, + "f1_score": 0.7555555555555555, + "meteor": 0.8287608596250571, + "precision": 0.68, + "pred_md": "78\n\nTable 9. Copy Source Overlay display fields\n\nPress the Enter key after you type the choices.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.85, + "true_md": "Table9.CopySourceOverlaydisplayfields\n\nPress the Enter key after you type the choices.\n\n78 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4664766247915838, + "doc_id": "ff3a5c1070b5f9c4bc71a386d9a4cfb971a09d7cb7fb24db578eb82952d2398e", + "edit_distance": 0.7677419354838709, + "f1_score": 0.71875, + "meteor": 0.5852184031467553, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Note: The mark *S005 remains since this is the last element in the page.\n\nYou can also define the following summary data to print summarized data of field values in the grouped database records as a text element or as text in a box element.\n\n- v The field value of the first record in the group.\n- v The field value of the last record in the group.\n- v The total of the field values in the group.\n- v The average of the field values in the group.\n- v The minimum field value in the group.\n- v The maximum field value in the group.\n- v The number of records in the group.\n\nThe summary data can be printed in the following two groups:\n\n- v\n- Records in a page (summary for a page). summarized records.\n- The summary for a page is printed on the same page containing the\n- v Records from a page break to the next page break (summary for page break). The summary data for page break is printed on the page containing the last\n- record of the group.\n\nChapter 10. Work with PFD Definitions\n\n177", + "recall": 0.5609756097560976, + "true_md": "Design Page Layout Columns: 1- 74 Control . . PFD definition.....PRODUCTLBL *...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7.... 001 Label print of product and price *S005 002 Layout is as follows: 1 2 3 003 4 5 6 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 More... F3=Exit F6=Text F9=Line F10=Box F11=Bar code F21=Element edit F22=Block edit F24=More keys\n\nYou can also define the following summary data to print summarized data of field values in the grouped database records as a text element or as text in a box element.\n\nNote: The mark *S005 remains since this is the last element in the page.\n\nThe summary data can be printed in the following two groups:\n\nThe summary for a page is printed on the same page containing the summarized records.\n\nThe summary data for page break is printed on the page containing the last record of the group.\n\n- v Records from a page break to the next page break (summary for page break).\n\n- v Records in a page (summary for a page).\n\n- v The field value of the first record in the group.\n\n- v The field value of the last record in the group.\n\n- v The total of the field values in the group.\n\n- v The average of the field values in the group.\n\n- v The minimum field value in the group.\n\n- v The maximum field value in the group.\n\n- v The number of records in the group.\n\nChapter 10. Work with PFD Definitions 177" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.79708292969179, + "doc_id": "d2080285f723ad7e48a93dfde3fbf17fe703630d85d9798e0d85b9e1ce4d08a3", + "edit_distance": 0.2967032967032967, + "f1_score": 0.9217391304347825, + "meteor": 0.8999265335327745, + "precision": 0.8983050847457628, + "pred_md": "230\n\nthe character display, while the actual image is printed on the All Points Addressable (APA) printer, you can see only the approximate image of the overlay, the record layout, or the page layout on the display.\n\n## Layout of the Screen View\n\nThe screen view of the design display is shown:\n\nThe following table explains each field in the above display.\n\nTable 49. Design Overlay display in the screen view fields\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.9464285714285714, + "true_md": "the character display, while the actual image is printed on the All Points Addressable (APA) printer, you can see only the approximate image of the overlay, the record layout, or the page layout on the display.\n\nThe screen view of the design display is shown:\n\nThe following table explains each field in the above display.\n\nTable49.DesignOverlaydisplayinthescreenviewfields\n\n230 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\n## Layout of the Screen View" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6836027252652435, + "doc_id": "f2ca383e915fbc9d59cff03bdfdff4df040fcf723b00a3eaa30248af566d5c15", + "edit_distance": 0.6686390532544378, + "f1_score": 0.9627507163323782, + "meteor": 0.554767127537509, + "precision": 0.9710982658959537, + "pred_md": "Basic English Language Skills\n\n## 9. Use correct grammar and spelling.\n\nThis will contribute to the clarity of your answers, and will prevent the person marking your paper from having to guess what you mean.\n\n## 10. For longer questions and essay-style questions: plan your answers before you start writing.\n\nThis will help you to formulate logical arguments, as well as to structure your answers clearly. In essay questions, you will get marks for using the correct format, which includes making sure that you have an introduction, sub-headings and paragraphs, and a conclusion.\n\n## 11. Where relevant, give examples.\n\nThis will help to demonstrate that you understand the topic.\n\n## 12. If you are writing an open-book exam, keep in mind that you won't have enough time to look up all the answers.\n\nMake sure that you know your work, and that you know where to look for key information. These types of exams are more focused on testing your understanding than on testing your knowledge, which means that you need to have a thorough grasp of the work.\n\n- 13. If you have to answer multiple-choice questions, make sure that you read the questions very carefully.\n\nTry to think of the correct answer before you read through the options, as you are less likely to become confused. When in doubt, go with your first instinct. If there is more than one correct answer, go with the an -swer that appears to be most correct.\n\n- 14. If you start running out of time towards the end of the exam, write short notes as answers to each of the remaining questions, instead of trying to answer each question perfectly.\n\nThis way, you should still earn some marks for writing down the most important points.\n\n- 15. If you have time left at the end of the exam, go back and read through your answers to make sure that you are happy with them.\n\ntips tips tips tips tips tips tips tips tips tips tips tips tips\n\nDeveloped for Oxbridge Academy", + "recall": 0.9545454545454546, + "true_md": "- 9. Use correct grammar and spelling. This will contribute to the clarity of your answers, and will prevent the \n\n- 10. For longer questions and essay-style questions: plan your answers be- fore you start writing. This will help you to formulate logical arguments, as well as to structure \n\n- 11. Where relevant, give examples. This will help to demonstrate that you understand the topic.\n\n- 12. If you are writing an open-book exam, keep in mind that you won’t have enough time to look up all the answers. Make sure that you know your work, and that you know where to look \n\n- 13. If you have to answer multiple-choice questions, make sure that you read the questions very carefully. Try to think of the correct answer before you read through the options, \n\n- 14. If you start running out of time towards the end of the exam, write short notes as answers to each of the remaining questions, instead of trying to answer each question perfectly. This way, you should still earn some marks for writing down the most \n\n- 15. If you have time left at the end of the exam, go back and read through your answers to make sure that you are happy with them.\n\ntips tips tips tips tips tips tips tips tips tips tips tips tips\n\nDeveloped for Oxbridge Academy\n\nenough time to look up all the answers. Make sure that you know your work, and that you know where to look for key information. These types of exams are more focused on testing your understanding than on testing your knowledge, which means that you need to have a thorough grasp of the work.\n\nthe questions very carefully. Try to think of the correct answer before you read through the options, as you are less likely to become confused. When in doubt, go with your first instinct. If there is more than one correct answer, go with the an - swer that appears to be most correct.\n\nto answer each question perfectly. This way, you should still earn some marks for writing down the most important points.\n\nfore you start writing. This will help you to formulate logical arguments, as well as to structure your answers clearly. In essay questions, you will get marks for using the correct format, which includes making sure that you have an intro- duction, sub-headings and paragraphs, and a conclusion.\n\nWhere relevant, give examples. This will help to demonstrate that you understand the topic.\n\nUse correct grammar and spelling. This will contribute to the clarity of your answers, and will prevent the person marking your paper from having to guess what you mean.\n\nBasic English Language Skills" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9466665975769631, + "doc_id": "dee58d6a8ff48f62cd07e5754465d6de3487d51b751cced7a716aa8c84f4627b", + "edit_distance": 0.07386363636363637, + "f1_score": 0.957345971563981, + "meteor": 0.9669956619467702, + "precision": 0.9619047619047619, + "pred_md": "Basic English Language Skils\n\n## CHAPTER 8:\n\n## TIPS FOR COMPLETING YOUR WRITTEN ASSIGNMENTS\n\nDepending on which course you study, you will either be assessed by means of written assignments, or through a combination of written assignments and exams. Assignments not only help to deepen your understanding of the work, but they often also count toward your final mark.\n\nIt is therefore important that you put effort into your assignments, and that you complete them to the best of your ability.\n\nWe realise that, like many other students, you might be unsure of how to go about completing your assignments, or that you might be afraid of failure.\n\nIf you are an Oxbridge Academy student, we'd like you to know that we are here to help you every step of the way, and that we will give you the opportunity to resubmit your assignments if you don't achieve a pass mark the first time around.", + "recall": 0.9528301886792453, + "true_md": "## CHAPTER 8:\n\n## TIPS FOR COMPLETING YOUR WRITTEN ASSIGNMENTS\n\nBasic English Language Skills\n\nDepending on which course you study, you will either be assessed by means of written assignments, or through a combination of written assignments and exams. Assignments not only help to deepen your understanding of the work, but they often also count toward your final mark.\n\nIt is therefore important that you put effort into your assignments, and that you complete them to the best of your ability.\n\nWe realise that, like many other students, you might be unsure of how to go about completing your assignments, or that you might be afraid of failure.\n\nIf you are an Oxbridge Academy student, we’d like you to know that we are here to help you every step of the way, and that we will give you the opportunity to resubmit your assignments if you don’t achieve a pass mark the first time around." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9438392967420867, + "doc_id": "a79a8d171443b516f743766f51b22efb72382dd2809fcb5ac400300296ad2d61", + "edit_distance": 0.573076923076923, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9508420573509331, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "are deleted, a message is sent for each definition and a plus (+) sign appears in the rightmost column of the 24th line to indicate that more messages are sent from the system. They are displayed one after another by pressing the roll-up key after moving the cursor to the 24th line.\n\n## 6=Print PFD Definition\n\nTo print a PFD definition, do the following on the display on page 143.\n\n- 1. Type 6 in the Opt column beside the which you want to print.\n- 2. Press the Enter key.\n\nThe specified PFD definition will be printed, and the screen will return to the display on page 143.\n\n## 7=Rename PFD Definition\n\nTo rename a PFD definition, do the following on the display on page 143.\n\n- 1. Type 7 in the Opt column beside the for which you want to change the name.\n- 2. Press the Enter key.\n\nThe Rename Member display appears. Type the new name of the PFD definition in the New member prompt and press the Enter key.\n\n## 9=Print Database File\n\nTo start printing a database file, do the following on the display on page 143.\n\n- 1. Type 9 in the Opt column beside the which you use to print.\n- 2. Press the Enter key.\n\nThe following display appears on page 143.\n\nChapter 10. Work with PFD Definitions\n\n201", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "are deleted, a message is sent for each definition and a plus (+) sign appears in the rightmost column of the 24th line to indicate that more messages are sent from the system. They are displayed one after another by pressing the roll-up key after moving the cursor to the 24th line.\n\nTo print a PFD definition, do the following on the display on page 143.\n\nThe specified PFD definition will be printed, and the screen will return to the display on page 143.\n\nTo rename a PFD definition, do the following on the display on page 143.\n\nThe Rename Member display appears. Type the new name of the PFD definition in the New member prompt and press the Enter key.\n\nTo start printing a database file, do the following on the display on page 143.\n\nThe following display appears on page 143.\n\n## 9=Print Database File\n\n## 7=Rename PFD Definition\n\n## 6=Print PFD Definition\n\nChapter 10. Work with PFD Definitions 201\n\n- 1. Type 9 in the Opt column beside the which you use to print.\n\n- 2. Press the Enter key.\n\n- 2. Press the Enter key.\n\n- 1. Type 7 in the Opt column beside the for which you want to change the name.\n\n- 1. Type 6 in the Opt column beside the which you want to print.\n\n- 2. Press the Enter key." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8855773354400333, + "doc_id": "a009133facce718b28dcb4045ecce62c125fad0c54fff749ddd48b2291596280", + "edit_distance": 0.10687022900763359, + "f1_score": 0.9624060150375939, + "meteor": 0.9620488322717623, + "precision": 0.9624060150375939, + "pred_md": "## Step 1 - Starting the Overlay Utility\n\nExample Actions:\n\n- 1. Type STRAFPU on the command line.\n- 2. Press the Enter key.\n\nThe IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries menu appears.\n\n```\nAFPU IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries Select one of the following: Overlay Utility 1. Work with source overlays 2. Work with source overlay files Print Format Utility 11. Work with PFD definitions 12. Work with PFD definition files 13. Print database file member 14. Print AFP Utilities tutorial Resource Management Utility 21. Convert to page segment 22. Work with overlays 23. Work with page segments Selection or command ===> 2 F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel F16=System main menu (C) COPYRIGHT IBM CORP. 1991, 1996\n```\n\nFrom this display, you can select any function of AFP Utilities for iSeries.\n\nThe overlay utility functions are:\n\nOption\n\nFunction\n\n1\n\nWork with source overlays\n\n- 2 Work with source overlay files\n\nBefore you create a source overlay, you must create a source overlay file to store it.\n\nNote:\n\nYou need a library to create a source overlay. OVLLIB is used in the following example, but you may use the name of your library instead. If you do not have any libraries, create a library by typing CRTLIB OVLLIB on the command line and pressing the Enter key.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide\n\n30", + "recall": 0.9624060150375939, + "true_md": "## Step 1 - Starting the Overlay Utility\n\n## Example Actions:\n\n- 1. Type STRAFPU on the command line.\n\n- 2. Press the Enter key.\n\nThe IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries menu appears.\n\nAFPU IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries Select one of the following: Overlay Utility 1. Work with source overlays 2. Work with source overlay files Print Format Utility 11. Work with PFD definitions 12. Work with PFD definition files 13. Print database file member 14. Print AFP Utilities tutorial Resource Management Utility 21. Convert to page segment 22. Work with overlays 23. Work with page segments Selection or command ===> 2 F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel F16=System main menu (C) COPYRIGHT IBM CORP. 1991, 1996\n\nFrom this display, you can select any function of AFP Utilities for iSeries.\n\nThe overlay utility functions are:\n\nBefore you create a source overlay, you must create a source overlay file to store it.\n\n- Note: You need a library to create a source overlay. OVLLIB is used in the following example, but you may use the name of your library instead. If you do not have any libraries, create a library by typing CRTLIB OVLLIB on the command line and pressing the Enter key.\n\n30 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 3.1545438051702282e-06, + "doc_id": "14c24bb90ff44d8579ade4b0febc3104ef286d60c2a05eca55fd3592847b1b29", + "edit_distance": 0.8983050847457628, + "f1_score": 0.2727272727272727, + "meteor": 0.10474860335195531, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Chapter 13. Design Operation\n\n245", + "recall": 0.15789473684210525, + "true_md": "Chapter 13. Design Operation 245\n\nMark: *T001 Measurement method: Row/Column Type choices, press Enter. Character size: Width . . . . . . . . . . *DEFAULT *DEFAULT, 0.10-99.99 Height . . ........ Bottom F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F6=Change measurement method F10=Edit numeric F12=Cancel\n\n## Change Text Detail" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "1d9214b6e1f1bdc81411eb1f620e611e99f53d1993bb78aa80ecf8f21b85c5eb", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9990234375, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Chapter 5. Work with Source Overlays\n\n69", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Chapter 5. Work with Source Overlays 69" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8876591140081577, + "doc_id": "5b077dde6a12fa1e82f62af9d2382e5085c63d0011e814e875565491bf727358", + "edit_distance": 0.47635135135135137, + "f1_score": 0.9871244635193132, + "meteor": 0.9402360048513565, + "precision": 0.9913793103448276, + "pred_md": "398\n\nAn overlay which can be used on the iSeries cannot necessarily be used on the target system.\n\n## Converting the Page Segment to a Physical File Member\n\nNote: You should check the version and the supported structured fields of the target system's PSF.\n\nA page segment which can be used on the iSeries cannot necessarily be used on the target system.\n\n## Sending Source Overlays and PFD Definitions\n\nWhen you transfer a source overlay or a PFD definition to another iSeries system, you should not send it directly with the SNDNETF command. Instead, you should send it as a saved file as follows. Otherwise, it will not be recognized as a source overlay or a PFD definition on the destination iSeries system.\n\nOn the source iSeries system:\n\n- 1. Create a save file. CRTSAVF SRCOVLSAVF\n- 2. Save a source overlay file or a PFD definition file. SAVOBJ OBJ(SRCOVLFILE) LIB(OVLLIB) DEV(*SAVF) SAVF(SRCOVLSAVF)\n- 3. Send the saved file. SNDNETF SRCOVLFILE TOUSRID((USER NEWSYS))\n\nOn the target iSeries system:\n\n- 1. Create a save file. CRTSAVF SRCOVLSAVF\n- 2. Issue WRKNETF command.\n\nWRKNETF\n\n- 3. Receive the file into the newly created save file with option 1.\n- 4. Restore the save file: RSTOBJ OBJ(*ALL) SAVLIB(OVLLIB) DEV(*SAVF) SAVF(SRCOVLSAVF)\n\nNote: All source overlays or PFD definitions in the file are sent together.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.9829059829059829, + "true_md": "An overlay which can be used on the iSeries cannot necessarily be used on the target system.\n\nA page segment which can be used on the iSeries cannot necessarily be used on the target system.\n\n- Note: You should check the version and the supported structured fields of the target system’s PSF.\n\n## Converting the Page Segment to a Physical File Member\n\n## Sending Source Overlays and PFD Definitions\n\nNote: All source overlays or PFD definitions in the file are sent together.\n\nWhen you transfer a source overlay or a PFD definition to another iSeries system, you should not send it directly with the SNDNETF command. Instead, you should send it as a saved file as follows. Otherwise, it will not be recognized as a source overlay or a PFD definition on the destination iSeries system.\n\nOn the source iSeries system:\n\nOn the target iSeries system:\n\n- 1. Create a save file.\n\n- 2. Save a source overlay file or a PFD definition file.\n\n- 3. Send the saved file.\n\n- 1. Create a save file.\n\n- 2. Issue WRKNETF command.\n\n- 3. Receive the file into the newly created save file with option 1.\n\n- 4. Restore the save file:\n\nCRTSAVF SRCOVLSAVF\n\nSAVOBJ OBJ(SRCOVLFILE) LIB(OVLLIB) DEV(*SAVF) SAVF(SRCOVLSAVF)\n\nSNDNETF SRCOVLFILE TOUSRID((USER NEWSYS))\n\nCRTSAVF SRCOVLSAVF\n\nWRKNETF\n\nRSTOBJ OBJ(*ALL) SAVLIB(OVLLIB) DEV(*SAVF) SAVF(SRCOVLSAVF)\n\n398 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.957158964895779, + "doc_id": "2c956a5a14b6a72fb058cae9c5ddeb63726e4fca4d46d533b0a819a1bc0de07a", + "edit_distance": 0.3333333333333333, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9986263522820014, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Chapter 7. Introduction to Print Format Utility\n\nThe Print Format Utility enables you to develop AFP applications directly from database files. In a manner similar to Query for iSeries, database records are selected and processed into full pages of output combining variable data, text, overlays, bar codes, lines, boxes, image, and graphics. All of the instructions built during the Print Format Utility design process are stored as print format definitions (PFD). The ability of the Print Format Utility to design individual record layouts and then replicate those layouts across and down the page make it very productive with applications such as multiple-up barcoded labels.\n\nIn addition to the data from database file members, you can print fixed data that is defined by any of the element types (text, boxes, lines, bar codes, page segments, or graphics). Examples of fixed data are:\n\n- v Titles\n- v Company logos\n- v Drawings\n\nYou can also print variable data that are not defined in the database member, such as:\n\n- v Job date\n- v Job time\n- v Page number\n- v Record number\n- v Database file name\n- v Database library name\n- v Database member name\n\nTo print data with the Print Format Utility, you need to create a PFD definition to specify the print format of the data from the menu panel display interactively.\n\n## Printout Format Definition (PFD Definition)\n\nA PFD definition provides the necessary information about the data, forms, and formats which you want to print.\n\nYou need to provide the following information in a PFD definition.\n\n## PFD Specifications\n\nThe specifications contain the following:\n\n- v Printer type\n- v Characters per inch\n- v Lines per inch\n- v Degree of rotation\n- v Whether or not you want page numbers on each page\n- v Unit of measure\n- v Initial element measurement method\n- v Page size\n\n97", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## Chapter 7. Introduction to Print Format Utility\n\n## Printout Format Definition (PFD Definition)\n\n## PFD Specifications\n\n97\n\nThe Print Format Utility enables you to develop AFP applications directly from database files. In a manner similar to Query for iSeries, database records are selected and processed into full pages of output combining variable data, text, overlays, bar codes, lines, boxes, image, and graphics. All of the instructions built during the Print Format Utility design process are stored as print format definitions (PFD). The ability of the Print Format Utility to design individual record layouts and then replicate those layouts across and down the page make it very productive with applications such as multiple-up barcoded labels.\n\nIn addition to the data from database file members, you can print fixed data that is defined by any of the element types (text, boxes, lines, bar codes, page segments, or graphics). Examples of fixed data are:\n\nYou can also print variable data that are not defined in the database member, such as:\n\nTo print data with the Print Format Utility, you need to create a PFD definition to specify the print format of the data from the menu panel display interactively.\n\nA PFD definition provides the necessary information about the data, forms, and formats which you want to print.\n\nYou need to provide the following information in a PFD definition.\n\nThe specifications contain the following:\n\n- v Titles\n\n- v Company logos\n\n- v Drawings\n\n- v Job date\n\n- v Job time\n\n- v Page number\n\n- v Record number\n\n- v Database file name\n\n- v Database library name\n\n- v Database member name\n\n- v Printer type\n\n- v Characters per inch\n\n- v Lines per inch\n\n- v Whether or not you want page numbers on each page\n\n- v Degree of rotation\n\n- v Unit of measure\n\n- v Initial element measurement method\n\n- v Page size" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0025157098802951624, + "doc_id": "3e751505ad7ee13c78e3fe5e22a318f73be3321aad67931a6e52e9df8c687f3e", + "edit_distance": 0.9963369963369964, + "f1_score": 0.21333333333333335, + "meteor": 0.039667666166916554, + "precision": 0.12307692307692308, + "pred_md": "| How to Use This Procedure . . | . . . . | . . | . | . | . | . . . | 399 | | | . . | . . | . | | . . | . . | . | . | . | | | | . | . | . | |\n|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------|-------------|-----------|-----|-----|-----|---------|-------|-------|-------|---------|-------------|---------|-------|-------|---------|-----------|---------|---------|-------------|-------------|-------------|-------------|-------------|-------------|-------------|\n| . Identifying Problems . . . . . . | . . . . | . . | . | . . | . | . | | | | . | . . | . | . . | . | . | . . . | . . . . | . . . | . 399 . 399 | . 399 . 399 | . 399 . 399 | . 399 . 399 | . 399 . 399 | . 399 . 399 | . 399 . 399 |\n| 0100: Problem Analysis Procedures . | . . | . | . | . | . | . | | | . . . | . . . | . . | . . . | | | . | . . | | | | | | | . | | |\n| Common Symptoms and Possible Causes . | . | . | . . | . | . | . | . | . | | . | . . | . | . | | | . | . | 403 | 403 | 403 | 403 | 403 | 403 | 403 | 403 |\n| Sense Codes and Possible Causes. | . . . . | . . | . . | . | . | . . | . . | . . | | . | | | | . . | | | | . | 406 | 406 | 406 | 406 | 406 | 406 | 406 |\n| . | . . . | . . | . | . | . | . | . | . | | . | . . . . | . . . | . | | | . | | . | 407 | 407 | 407 | 407 | 407 | 407 | 407 |\n| Contacting Your Service Representative. | . | . | . | | | . . | . . | . . . | | . | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| Element Type and Position . . . . | . . . . . . | . | . | . . | . | . . . | . | . . . | . . | . . . | . . . . | | . | | | | . | . . | . . | . . | . . | . . | . . | . | 408 |\n| Text Element and Position . . . | . . . . | . | | | . | . . | | | . | . . . . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | 408 |\n| Measurement Method is Row/Column . Measurement Method is Inch or Centimeter | . . . | . . . . | . . | . | . | . | . . . | . | . . | . . . . | . . . . . | . . | . | . | . . . . | . . | . . | 408 | 408 | 408 | 408 | 408 | 408 | 408 | 408 |\n| Line Element and Position . . | . . . . . . | . | | . | | | | . | . . | . | . | . | . . | . . . | | . | . . | . 409 | . 409 | . 409 | . 409 | . 409 | . 409 | . 409 | . 409 |\n| . Measurement Method is Row/Column . | . . | . . | . | . | | . . | | . | | . | . . | . . . | . . . | | . | . | . | . . | 409 | 409 | 409 | 409 | 409 | 409 | 409 |\n| Measurement Method is Inch or Centimeter | . | . | . | | . | . | . | | | . . . | . | . . | . | . | . | . | | | | | | | . | . | |\n| | . . . . | . . | | | | . | | | | | . . . | . | . . | | . . | . . | . . | 411 411 | 411 411 | 411 411 | 411 411 | 411 411 | . | . | 411 411 |\n| Box Element and Position . . . Measurement Method is Row/Column . | . . | . . | . | . | . | . . | | | . | . . . | . . . | . | . . . | . | . | . . | . . . | 411 | 411 | 411 | 411 | 411 | 411 | 411 | 411 |\n| . . | . . | . . | . . | | . | . | . | . | . . | . . | . | . . | . . | . . . | . | . | . 413 | | | | | | | | |\n| Bar Code Element and Position . | . . | . | | | . | | | | . | | | | | . . | . | . . | . . | . . | . . | . . | . . | . . | . . | . . | . . |\n| Measurement Method is Row/Column . | . . | . | . | | | | | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | | 413 | 413 | 413 | 413 | 413 | 413 | 413 | 413 |\n| . | . . . | . . . . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . . . | . | . . . . . . | . . . . | . | . . . | . . . | . | . . . | . . . . | . . . . | . . . . | . . . . | . . . . | . . . . | . . . . | 413 |\n| Measurement Method is Inch or Centimeter Page Segment Element and Position . . | | . | . | | | | . | . | . | | | . | . . | . | . . . | . . | 414 414 | | | | | | | | |\n| Measurement Method is Row/Column . | . | . | . | | . | . | | | . | | . . | | | | . | | | | | . | | . | . | | |\n| Measurement Method is Inch or Centimeter Record Layout Element and Position . . | . . | . . . . . | . . | . | . | . | . | . . | . | . . . | . . . . | . . | | . . . | . | . . . . . | . . | . | . . | 414 414 | 414 414 | 414 414 | 414 414 | 414 414 | 414 414 |\n| Measurement Method is Row/Column . | . | . | . | | . | . | | . . | . . | | . | . . | . | . | . | | | . | . . . | . . | | | | . . | 414 |\n| | . | . | | | | | | . | | | . | | | | | . | . | . . | | . . | . | | . | | |\n| Measurement Method is Inch or Centimeter | . . . . . | . . . | . | . | | | | | . . | . . | . . . | . | . . | . . | . . . . | . . | . | | . | . | . | 414 . . 415 | . | 414 . . 415 | 414 . . 415 |\n| Graphics Element and Position . Measurement Method is Row/Column . | . . | . . . . | . . | . | . | | . | | . | . . | . . | . . | | | . | . . | . | . . | . . | . . . | . . . | . . . | . | . | 415 |\n| Measurement Method is Inch or Centimeter | . | . . | | | | . . | | . | . | . | . . . . . | . | | . | | | | . | | | | | . | . | 415 |\n\n362\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.8, + "true_md": "362 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4489771072202117, + "doc_id": "f311e70c4b5bfaced284c983cd4ddb99354622286f812cbb34c6e33fc71aedec", + "edit_distance": 0.42105263157894735, + "f1_score": 0.8333333333333334, + "meteor": 0.8573566733910326, + "precision": 0.7692307692307693, + "pred_md": "## Options\n\nTable 19. Work with PFD Definitions options\n\nChapter 10. Work with PFD Definitions\n\n145", + "recall": 0.9090909090909091, + "true_md": "## Options\n\nTable19.WorkwithPFDDefinitionsoptions\n\nChapter 10. Work with PFD Definitions 145" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9620787004933744, + "doc_id": "538764d48ce7473b213a9b4ed4791c2bac089516c977c5f7671e26fa8a7ebeb9", + "edit_distance": 0.054673721340388004, + "f1_score": 0.9811320754716982, + "meteor": 0.9789533791085895, + "precision": 0.9811320754716981, + "pred_md": "|\n\n|\n\n|\n\n|\n\n|\n\n|\n\n|\n\n| |\n\n|\n\n| |\n\n|\n\n|\n\n272\n\nNote: For additional information about Australian Postal bar code data, press the Help key with the cursor in the Bar code data prompt on the Define Bar Code or Change Bar Code display.\n\nCheck Digit: The following explains the Check digit prompt in detail.\n\n- v 3-of-9 code, 2-of-5 Industrial, 2-of-5 Matrix, Interleaved 2-of-5, Codabar.\n- Y Generates a check character and prints it with the bar code.\n- N Prints the bar code with no printer-generated check character.\n\nThe default value is N.\n\n- v MSI\n- 1 Prints the bar code with IBM modulo-10 check digit generated by the printer, and places this check digit at the end of the data. IBM modulo-10 check digit is the second check digit.\n- 2 Prints the bar code with both check digits generated by the printer, and places them at the end of the data. The first and second check digits are IBM modulo-10.\n- 3 Prints the bar code with both check digits generated by the printer, and places them at the end of the data. The first check digit is NCR modulo-11. The second check digit is IBM modulo-10. The remainder equals the check digit. A check digit of 10 is an error.\n- 4 Prints the bar code with both check digits generated by the printer, and places them at the end of the data. The first check digit is IBM modulo-11. The second check digit is IBM modulo-10. The remainder equals the check digit. A check digit of 10 is an error.\n- 5 Prints the bar code with both check digits generated by the printer, and places them at the end of the data. The first check digit is NCR modulo-11. The second check digit is IBM modulo-10. The remainder subtracted from 11 equals the check digit. A check digit of 10 is zero.\n- 6 Prints the bar code with both check digits generated by the printer, and places them at the end of the data. The first check digit is IBM modulo-11. The second check digit is IBM modulo-10. The remainder subtracted from 11 equals the check digit. A check digit of 10 is zero.\n- 7 Prints the bar code with both check digits generated by the printer, and places them at the end of the data. The first check digit is NCR modulo-11. The second check digit is IBM modulo-10. The remainder subtracted from 11 equals the check digit. A check digit of 10 is an error.\n- 8 Prints the bar code with both check digits generated by the printer, and places them at the end of the data. The first check digit is IBM modulo-11. The second check digit is IBM modulo-10. The remainder subtracted from 11 equals the check digit. A check digit of 10 is an error.\n- N Prints the bar code with no printer-generated check character.\n\nThe default value is N.\n\n- v Others\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.9811320754716981, + "true_md": "- Note: For additional information about Australian Postal bar code data, press the Help key with the cursor in the Bar code data prompt on the Define Bar Code or Change Bar Code display.\n\nCheck Digit: The following explains the Check digit prompt in detail.\n\n- v 3-of-9 code, 2-of-5 Industrial, 2-of-5 Matrix, Interleaved 2-of-5, Codabar.\n\n- Y Generates a check character and prints it with the bar code.\n\n- N Prints the bar code with no printer-generated check character.\n\n- v MSI\n\n- 1 Prints the bar code with IBM modulo-10 check digit generated by the printer, and places this check digit at the end of the data. IBM modulo-10 check digit is the second check digit.\n\n- 2 Prints the bar code with both check digits generated by the printer, and places them at the end of the data. The first and second check digits are IBM modulo-10.\n\n- 3 Prints the bar code with both check digits generated by the printer, and places them at the end of the data. The first check digit is NCR modulo-11. The second check digit is IBM modulo-10. The remainder equals the check digit. A check digit of 10 is an error.\n\n- 4 Prints the bar code with both check digits generated by the printer, and places them at the end of the data. The first check digit is IBM modulo-11. The second check digit is IBM modulo-10. The remainder equals the check digit. A check digit of 10 is an error.\n\n- 5 Prints the bar code with both check digits generated by the printer, and places them at the end of the data. The first check digit is NCR modulo-11. The second check digit is IBM modulo-10. The remainder subtracted from 11 equals the check digit. A check digit of 10 is zero.\n\n- 6 Prints the bar code with both check digits generated by the printer, and places them at the end of the data. The first check digit is IBM modulo-11. The second check digit is IBM modulo-10. The remainder subtracted from 11 equals the check digit. A check digit of 10 is zero.\n\n- 7 Prints the bar code with both check digits generated by the printer, and places them at the end of the data. The first check digit is NCR modulo-11. The second check digit is IBM modulo-10. The remainder subtracted from 11 equals the check digit. A check digit of 10 is an error.\n\n- 8 Prints the bar code with both check digits generated by the printer, and places them at the end of the data. The first check digit is IBM modulo-11. The second check digit is IBM modulo-10. The remainder subtracted from 11 equals the check digit. A check digit of 10 is an error.\n\n- N Prints the bar code with no printer-generated check character.\n\n- v Others\n\nThe default value is N.\n\nThe default value is N.\n\n272 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.049045474642631925, + "doc_id": "f0cc60ac412635716c96969dc2aa44711bd571c05037925266c8993ccf18658d", + "edit_distance": 0.7216216216216216, + "f1_score": 0.6521739130434783, + "meteor": 0.277225281499137, + "precision": 0.9836065573770492, + "pred_md": "42\n\n## Defining a Bar Code Element\n\nNow, define a bar code element below text element *T027.\n\nExample Action: Move the cursor to position (Across : 43, Down : 34) to define a bar code element, and press the F11 key.\n\n## The following display appears.\n\n## Example Action:\n\n- 1. Type 1 in the Bar code type prompt.\n- 2. Type 5A-3233-01 in the Bar code data prompt.\n- 3. Press the Enter key to define the bar code element in the source overlay.\n\n## The following display appears.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.4878048780487805, + "true_md": "## Defining a Bar Code Element\n\nNow, define a bar code element below text element *T027.\n\nExample Action: Move the cursor to position (Across : 43, Down : 34) to define a bar code element, and press the F11 key.\n\nThe following display appears.\n\nThe following display appears.\n\n## Example Action:\n\n- 1. Type 1 in the Bar code type prompt.\n\n- 2. Type 5A-3233-01 in the Bar code data prompt.\n\n- 3. Press the Enter key to define the bar code element in the source overlay.\n\n42 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\nDesign Overlay Columns: 1- 74 Control . . \\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_ Source overlay.....STATIONERY *...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7.... 025 : *T018 : 026 +------------------------------------------------------+ 027 028 029 030 031 032 033 *T027 o. 5A-3233-01 034 *C028 035 036 037 038 039 040 041 More... F3=Exit F6=Text F9=Line F10=Box F11=Bar code F21=Element edit F22=Block edit F24=More keys\n\nDesign Overlay Columns: 1- 74 Control . . \\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_ Source overlay.....STATIONERY *...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7.... 025 : *T018 : 026 +------------------------------------------------------+ 027 028 029 030 031 032 033 *T027 o. 5A-3233-01 034 %C028 035 036 More... Define Bar Code Mark......:*C028 Measurement method....:Row/Column Position .....Across 43 Down 34 Bar code type . . . 1 Bar code data . . 5A-3233-01 F3=Exit F4=Detail F6=Change measurement method F12=Cancel F24=More keys" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.001274554340828449, + "doc_id": "5aac2fef4800482c76e74b50f7cacdd87dec868cf0ced52666f7628dcaa9320c", + "edit_distance": 0.9022988505747126, + "f1_score": 0.3409090909090909, + "meteor": 0.10669697970822972, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "The following table explains each field in this display.\n\nThe following table explains each field in this display.\n\nChapter 13. Design Operation\n\n253", + "recall": 0.2054794520547945, + "true_md": "Design Overlay Columns: 1- 74 Control . . Source overlay.....STATIONERY *...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7.... 001 002 003 004 %B002 -------------------------------------------------+ 005 : : 006 007 : : 008 009 : : 010 +------------------------------------------------------+ 011 012 More... Define Box Mark . . . . . . : *B002 Measurement method....:Row/Column Start position . . Across 5 Down 4 End position...Across 60 10 F3=Exit F4=Detail F6=Change measurement method F12=Cancel F24=More keys\n\nThe following table explains each field in this display.\n\nChapter 13. Design Operation 253" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.026910757015762402, + "doc_id": "05b156b5c0ef71cd7f288590f5c1fdf094d251708e444038aafa5bd21032122c", + "edit_distance": 0.8246753246753247, + "f1_score": 0.5147058823529411, + "meteor": 0.2669720087011927, + "precision": 0.9722222222222222, + "pred_md": "196\n\nWhen you press the Enter key after specifying these prompts, the following display appears:\n\nPress the F3 key to exit from the above display. The display from which you started Print Format Utility appears.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.35, + "true_md": "Press the F3 key to exit from the above display. The display from which you started Print Format Utility appears.\n\nWhen you press the Enter key after specifying these prompts, the following display appears:\n\nWork with PFD Definitions File .......... PFUFILE Name, F4 for list Library . . ...... PFULIB Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB PFD definition . . . . . *ALL Name, generic*, *ALL Position to....... Starting characters Type options, press the Enter key. 1=Create 2=Change 3=Copy 4=Delete 6=Print PFD definition 7=Rename 9=Print database file PFD Opt Definition Text Changed PFDNEW Sample PFD definition 12/13/90 PFD1 PFD2 Sample PFD definition 12/13/90 PFD3 Bottom Parameters or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F9=Retrieve F11=Display names only F12=Cancel PFD definition PFDNEW saved in file PFUFILE successfully.\n\n196 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.848613925288779, + "doc_id": "4d81280d99f2fe93d8610024d87dcaa90cd3add8381fd5bab254957c8aa7c8f3", + "edit_distance": 0.12698412698412698, + "f1_score": 0.9236641221374045, + "meteor": 0.8044009663828583, + "precision": 0.968, + "pred_md": "## Specify Mapping Object Name\n\nYou can specify field names in the object name parameters of the Place Page Segment display or the Place Graphics display. When you specify field names, you can specify the mapping of a field value to an object name, if required.\n\nFor example, if you want to print various logos of the company based on the company name field in the database file, you need to name the page segment objects containing the logo data the same as the company names in the field. But in some cases, the length and the characters of the company name may be invalid for iSeries object names. AFP Utilities for iSeries provides the function that maps a field value in the database file to an object name in the iSeries system for the above case.\n\nYou can specify which value should be mapped to which iSeries object name. The mapping can be specified for each object type, page segment, document, folder, file, library, and member. For example, a field value 'IBM Co.' can be mapped to a page segment name 'QFCLOGO' and a file name 'QAFCGRPH'.\n\nWhen variable data is specified for page segments or graphics, AFP Utilities for iSeries first searches the specified mapping for the object type in the PFD definition. If no mapping is specified for the object type, or the searching field value is not found, the field value is taken as an object name. If the length of the field value is longer than the maximum object name length, the characters on the right are ignored.\n\nThe Specify Mapping Object Name display allows you to select the object to specify the mapping. You can select:\n\n- v Page segment\n- v Folder\n- v PC document\n- v Library\n- v File\n- v Member\n\nChapter 10. Work with PFD Definitions\n\n191", + "recall": 0.8832116788321168, + "true_md": "## Specify Mapping Object Name\n\nYou can specify field names in the object name parameters of the Place Page Segment display or the Place Graphics display. When you specify field names, you can specify the mapping of a field value to an object name, if required.\n\nFor example, if you want to print various logos of the company based on the company name field in the database file, you need to name the page segment objects containing the logo data the same as the company names in the field. But in some cases, the length and the characters of the company name may be invalid for iSeries object names. AFP Utilities for iSeries provides the function that maps a field value in the database file to an object name in the iSeries system for the above case.\n\nYou can specify which value should be mapped to which iSeries object name. The mapping can be specified for each object type, page segment, document, folder, file, library, and member. For example, a field value ’IBM Co.’ can be mapped to a page segment name ’QFCLOGO’ and a file name ’QAFCGRPH’.\n\nWhen variable data is specified for page segments or graphics, AFP Utilities for iSeries first searches the specified mapping for the object type in the PFD definition. If no mapping is specified for the object type, or the searching field value is not found, the field value is taken as an object name. If the length of the field value is longer than the maximum object name length, the characters on the right are ignored.\n\nThe Specify Mapping Object Name display allows you to select the object to specify the mapping. You can select:\n\nChapter 10. Work with PFD Definitions 191\n\n- v Page segment\n\n- v Folder\n\n- v PC document\n\n- v Library\n\n- v File\n\n- v Member\n\n## Specify Mapping Object Name\n\nType options, press the Enter key. 1=Select OPT Object \\_ Page segment Folder \\_ PC document Library \\_ File Member Bottom F3=Exit F5=Refresh F12=Cancel" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.829449373758096, + "doc_id": "f0513fa703bba88e361472f453885b102af640f1a54b37747486baae178a739d", + "edit_distance": 0.1565217391304348, + "f1_score": 0.9622641509433961, + "meteor": 0.9361007124092606, + "precision": 0.9444444444444444, + "pred_md": "## Appendix E. How to Do a Task\n\n## How to Use This Chapter\n\nThis chapter provides a quick reference of tasks. You should have a basic knowledge of how to use the iSeries and the IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries. You must know the following rules used in the descriptions in this chapter.\n\n- v \" Enter \" means to type the following data and press the Enter key.\n- v If it is on a menu, \" Enter n \" (n is an option number like \" Enter 2 ) means to type \" an option number on the command line and press the Enter key.\n- v If it is on a work with display, \" Enter n \" (n is an option number like \" Enter 2 ) \" means to type an option number next to the item in the list and press the Enter key.\n- v Not all details are described. For example, some required parameters are not described because they are shown on the display and explained in the online help information.\n\n## Tasks Related to Source Overlays\n\nNote: The following description assumes that you are on a display with the command line.\n\nTable 87. Tasks related to source overlays\n\n443", + "recall": 0.9807692307692307, + "true_md": "## Appendix E. How to Do a Task\n\n## How to Use This Chapter\n\n## Tasks Related to Source Overlays\n\n443\n\nThis chapter provides a quick reference of tasks. You should have a basic knowledge of how to use the iSeries and the IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries. You must know the following rules used in the descriptions in this chapter.\n\n- v † Enter † means to type the following data and press the Enter key.\n\n- v If it is on a menu, † Enter n † (n is an option number like † Enter 2 † ) means to type an option number on the command line and press the Enter key.\n\n- v If it is on a work with display, † Enter n † (n is an option number like † Enter 2 † ) means to type an option number next to the item in the list and press the Enter key.\n\n- v Not all details are described. For example, some required parameters are not described because they are shown on the display and explained in the online help information.\n\n- Note: The following description assumes that you are on a display with the command line.\n\nTable87.Tasksrelatedtosourceoverlays" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5511124985958256, + "doc_id": "0ce8892fa840c18e459935729a05a5e8518149dc2dee2a797615a4e1a176e27c", + "edit_distance": 0.2842465753424658, + "f1_score": 0.81, + "meteor": 0.7292215907270222, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Chapter 20. Work with Page Segments Function\n\nThe work with page segments function allows you to copy, delete, rename, and print a page segment, display and change the description of a page segment, and convert a page segment to a physical file member from the list of page segments found in the selected libraries.\n\nTo use the work with page segments function, type 23 on the Selection or command line on the IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries menu on page 324 and press Enter. The Work with Page Segments display appears:\n\nThe Work with Page Segments display shows a list of page segments in the libraries that you specified. If you specified a page segment name or generic name for the Page segment prompt, only those page segments that match the specified values are included in the list.\n\nYou can copy, delete, rename, and print a page segment, display and change the description text of a page segment, and convert a page segment to a physical file member from the list of page segments.\n\nThe following tables describe the Work with Page Segments display.\n\n351", + "recall": 0.680672268907563, + "true_md": "## Chapter 20. Work with Page Segments Function\n\nThe work with page segments function allows you to copy, delete, rename, and print a page segment, display and change the description of a page segment, and convert a page segment to a physical file member from the list of page segments found in the selected libraries.\n\nTo use the work with page segments function, type 23 on the Selection or command line on the IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries menu on page 324 and press Enter. The Work with Page Segments display appears:\n\n## Work with Page Segments\n\nLibrary ......... *LIBL Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB *ALL, *USRLIBL, *ALLUSR Page segment . . . . . . *ALL Name, generic*, *ALL Position to....... Starting character(s) Type options, press Enter. 3=Copy 4=Delete 6=Print 7=Rename 8=Display description 9=Convert to file 13=Change text\n\nBottom Parameters or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F9=Retrieve F11=Display names only F12=Cancel\n\nThe Work with Page Segments display shows a list of page segments in the libraries that you specified. If you specified a page segment name or generic name for the Page segment prompt, only those page segments that match the specified values are included in the list.\n\nYou can copy, delete, rename, and print a page segment, display and change the description text of a page segment, and convert a page segment to a physical file member from the list of page segments.\n\nThe following tables describe the Work with Page Segments display.\n\n351" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.30913405675778566, + "doc_id": "5080ace3236483df651b61721b5c43a1c92bf7f3db7ace1829139cfde89383cc", + "edit_distance": 0.7018272425249169, + "f1_score": 0.9204545454545455, + "meteor": 0.6327396443340038, + "precision": 0.9838056680161943, + "pred_md": "| printer type (overlay specifications) | 67 |\n|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|--------------|\n| printer type (PFD specifications) | 151 |\n| printout format definition database file 98 elements 100 mapping object name | 97 100 |\n| page layout 99 PFD definition fonts PFD specifications | 98 |\n| 97 print format utility 101 | 100 |\n| printout specifications | |\n| define 130, 187 problem analysis 399 identifying problems | 399 |\n| problems common symptoms possible causes | 403 |\n| COPIES parameter DRAWER parameter | 371 370 370 |\n| 403 prompts 15 PRTPFDDTA command | 222, 367 372 |\n| ENDPAGE parameter FILE parameter 369 FORMDF parameter | |\n| GRID parameter 370 MBR parameter 370 OUTBIN parameter OUTQ parameter PFDFILE parameter | 371 371 368 |\n\n## R\n\n| RANGE | 185 | | |\n|----------------------------------------------------------------------|------------------------------------|-----|-----|\n| record format select record layout | 160 98 | | |\n| control 285 design 111, 162 mark 285 | | 285 | |\n| measurement method position 285 | record layout element and position | | 414 |\n| measurement method record selection specify 183 refresh element mark | 414 100 232 | | |\n| remove element 288 element list | 295 | | |\n| rename overlay | 311, 346 | | |\n| page segment PFD definition PFD definition file | 312, 356 201 | | |\n| source overlay source overlay file | 214 80 | | |\n| | 94 | 312 | |\n| rename a page segment rename PFD definition | | | |\n| | 201 | | |\n\n480\n\n| rename PFD definition file rename source overlay 80 rename source overlay file | 214 | | | |\n|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------|-------|-----|-----|-----|\n| renaming an overlay 311 | 94 | | | |\n| repetition of the record in the page | | | | |\n| requirements | | | | |\n| hardware 13 software 13 | | | | |\n| resource management utility | 12 | | | |\n| CVTOVLPFM command | 328 | | | |\n| CVTPAGSPFM command | 329 | | | |\n| CVTPCDPAGS command | 324 | | | |\n| getting started 313 introduction 309 | | | | |\n| limitations 397 | | | | |\n| restrictions 397 | | | | |\n| | 397 | | | |\n| convert a page segment | | | | |\n| | 397 | | | |\n| create page segment | | | | |\n| IMDS (IOCA) data stream 397 | | | | |\n| | | 397 | | |\n| print operations | | | | |\n| | 323 | | | |\n| start 315, 322 | | | | |\n| STRAFPU Command | | | | |\n| restore element list 391 | | | | 295 |\n| 392 | | | | |\n| overlay utility print format utility | | 395 | 397 | |\n| restrictions resource management utility | | | | |\n| | | | 398 | |\n| convert an overlay | | | | |\n\n## S\n\n| sample label 10 sample overlay DMAS forms | 9, 24, 459 459 |\n|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|-----------------------------------------|\n| MAPICS/DB forms sample PFD definitions AFP Utilities tutorial PFD definitions 461 AIAG (Automotive Industry Action | 460 460 |\n| Group) labels | 461 |\n| labels 461 | EIA (Electronic Industries Association) |\n| save PFD definition source overlay | 194 46, 73 |\n| save PFD definition save source overlay screen view 229 | 194 46, 73 |\n| defining elements element operations layout 230 | 229 233 |\n| scroll element mark 232 | |\n| select database file | 208 |\n| 159 PFD definition file list PFD definition list record format 160 | 146 |\n| source overlay file source overlay list | 88 64 159 |\n| select database file | |\n| | 160 |\n| select record format | |\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide\n\n| selecting a PFD definition file from a list 208 | |\n|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|----------------|\n| send PFD definition 398 source overlay sense codes 406 | |\n| 398 possible causes 406 service representative set fonts 306 | 407 208 146 87 |\n| shading in a box restrictions 393, 397 shading pattern 257 | 417 |\n| shading pattern in a box shading type 257 show PFD definition file list PFD definition list source overlay file list | |\n| work with 94 source overlay file copy 92 create 31, 89 delete 93 rename 94 restrictions 392 select 88 | |\n| work with 82 source overlay file description change 91 display 94 show 87 source overlay list | |\n| source overlay file list select 64 | |\n| show 64 specify bar code element box element 122 | 120 |\n| element selection fixed text data | 123 191 |\n| 114 line element 125 mapping object name page segment 119 | |\n| record selection 183 | |\n\nvariable text data\n\n116", + "recall": 0.8647686832740213, + "true_md": "## S\n\n## R\n\n480 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\nprinter type (overlay specifications) 67 printer type (PFD specifications) 151 printout format definition 97 database file 98 elements 100 mapping object name 100 page layout 99 PFD definition fonts 98 PFD specifications 97 print format utility 101 printout specifications 100 record layout 98 record selection 100 printout specifications 100 define 130, 187 problem analysis 399 identifying problems 399 problems common symptoms 403 possible causes 403 prompts 15 PRTPFDDTA command 222, 367 COPIES parameter 371 DRAWER parameter 370 ENDPAGE parameter 370 FILE parameter 369 FORMDF parameter 372 GRID parameter 370 MBR parameter 370 OUTBIN parameter 371 OUTQ parameter 371 PFDFILE parameter 368 PFDMBR parameter 369 RCDSLT parameter 370 PSF (Print Service Facility) 458 PT2 tower (underline and overstrike) 457\n\nRANGE 185 record format select 160 record layout 98 control 285 design 111, 162 mark 285 measurement method 285 position 285 record layout element and position 414 measurement method 414 record selection 100 specify 183 refresh element mark 232 remove element 288 element list 295 rename overlay 311, 346 page segment 312, 356 PFD definition 201 PFD definition file 214 source overlay 80 source overlay file 94 rename a page segment 312 rename PFD definition 201\n\nrename PFD definition file 214 rename source overlay 80 rename source overlay file 94 renaming an overlay 311 repetition of the record in the page 172 requirements hardware 13 software 13 resource management utility 12 CVTOVLPFM command 328 CVTPAGSPFM command 329 CVTPCDPAGS command 324 CVTPFMPAGS command 326 end 322 getting started 313 introduction 309 limitations 397 restrictions 397 convert a page segment 398 convert an overlay 397 create page segment 397 IMDS (IOCA) data stream 397 print operations 397 start 315, 322 STRAFPU Command 323 restore element list 295 restrictions 391 overlay utility 392 print format utility 395 resource management utility 397 rotation in a box 417 rotation of graphics 437\n\nsample label 10 sample overlay 9, 24, 459 DMAS forms 459 MAPICS/DB forms 460 sample PFD definitions 460 AFP Utilities tutorial PFD definitions 461 AIAG (Automotive Industry Action Group) labels 461 EIA (Electronic Industries Association) labels 461 save PFD definition 194 source overlay 46, 73 save PFD definition 194 save source overlay 46, 73 screen view 229 defining elements 229 element operations 233 layout 230 scroll element mark 232 select database file 159 PFD definition file list 208 PFD definition list 146 record format 160 source overlay file 88 source overlay list 64 select database file 159 select record format 160\n\nselecting a PFD definition file from a list 208 send PFD definition 398 source overlay 398 sense codes 406 possible causes 406 service representative 407 set fonts 306 shading in a box restrictions 393, 397 shading pattern 257 shading pattern in a box 417 shading type 257 show PFD definition file list 208 PFD definition list 146 source overlay file list 87 source overlay list 64 size (overlay specifications) 68 size (PFD specifications) 152 software requirements 13 sort element list 295 source drawer 218 source overlay 24 change 49, 76 copy 77 create 65 delete 79 design overlay 25 overlay fonts 24 overlay specifications 24 print 80 rename 80 save 46, 73 send 398 work with 94 source overlay file copy 92 create 31, 89 delete 93 rename 94 restrictions 392 select 88 work with 82 source overlay file description change 91 display 94 source overlay file list show 87 source overlay list select 64 show 64 specify bar code element 120 box element 122 break fields 161 database file 110, 158 element selection 123 fixed text data 114 line element 125 mapping object name 191 page segment 119 record selection 183 variable text data 116" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9327648341437457, + "doc_id": "ea186308a8916803010a4dfb243c1bb0cabb55501641511ce149edf7d87192a5", + "edit_distance": 0.1390922401171303, + "f1_score": 0.9984301412872842, + "meteor": 0.9424701090747986, + "precision": 0.9968652037617555, + "pred_md": "## WARRANTY\n\nBARSKA warrants your micrscope to be free from defects in materials and workmanship for one (1) year. BARSKA will repair or replace such product or part thereof which, upon inspection by BARSKA, is found to be defective in materials or workmanship. As a condition to the obligation of BARSKA to repair or replace such product, the product must be returned to BARSKA together with proof-of-purchase satisfactory to BARSKA.\n\nThe Proper Return Merchandise Authorization Number (RMA) must be obtained from BARSKA in advance of return. Call BARSKA at (909) 445-8168 to receive the number to be displayed on the outside of your shipping container.\n\nAll returns must be accompanied by a written statement setting forth the name, address, and daytime telephone number of the owner, together with a brief description of any claimed defects. Parts or product for which replacement is made shall become the property of BARSKA.\n\nThe customer shall be responsible for all costs of transportation and insurance, both to and from BARSKA, and shall be required to prepay such costs.\n\nBARSKA shall use reasonable efforts to repair or replace any microscope covered by this warranty within thirty days of receipt. In the event repair or replacement shall require more than thirty days, BARSKA shall notify the customer accordingly. BARSKA reserves the right to replace any product which has been discontinued from its product line with a new product of comparable value and function.\n\nThis warranty shall be void and of no force of effect in the event a covered product has been modified in design or function, or subjected to abuse, misuse, mishandling or unauthorized repair. Further, product malfunction or deterioration due to normal wear is not covered by this warranty.\n\nBARSKA DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WHETHER OF MERCHANTABILITY OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR USE, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY SET FORTH HEREIN. THE SOLE OBLIGATION OF BARSKA UNDER THIS LIMITED WARRANTY SHALL BE TO REPAIR OR REPLACE THE COVERED PRODUCT, IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE TERMS SET FORTH HEREIN. BARSKA EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY LOST PROFITS, GENERAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHICH MAY RESULT FROM BREACH OF ANY WARRANTY, OR ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE ANY BARSKA PRODUCT. ANY WARRANTIES WHICH ARE IMPLIED AND WHICH CANNOT BE DISCLAIMED SHALL BE LIMITED IN DURATION TO A TERM OF ONE YEAR FROM THE DATE OF ORIGINAL RETAIL PURCHASE.\n\nSome states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages or limitation on how long an implied warranty lasts, so the above limitations and exclusions may not apply to you.\n\nThis warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state.\n\nBARSKA reserves the right to modify or discontinue, without prior notice to you, any model or style microscope.\n\nIf warranty problems arise, or if you need assistance in using your microscope contact:\n\n## BARSKA\n\nCustomer Service Department Tel. (909) 445-8168 Fax. (909) 445-8169 e-mail: service@barska.com\n\nMonday-Friday 8:30AM-5:30PM PST\n\nNOTE: This warranty is valid to U.S.A. customers who have purchased this product from an authorized BARSKA dealer in the U.S.A.\n\n©2015 BARSKA Optics Printed in China 4-15\n\n855 Towne Center Drive Pomona, CA 91767 Tel: 888-666-6769 Fax: 909.445.8169\n\nwww.barska.com\n\n## MICROSCOPE USER MANUAL\n\nMODEL AY11240 40X,100X,400X COMPOUND MONOCULAR\n\nMODEL AY11240 40X,100X,400X COMPOUND MONOCULAR\n\nMODEL AY11238 40X,100X,400X COMPOUND MONOCULAR\n\nMODEL AY11228 20X,40X STEREO BINOCULAR\n\nMODEL AY11232 7X-45X STEREO ZOOM\n\nMODEL AY11228 20X,40X STEREO BINOCULARMODEL AY11232 7X-45X STEREO ZOOM\n\nMODEL AY11230 20X,40X STEREO TRINOCULAR\n\nMODEL AY11230 20X,40X STEREO TRINOCULAR\n\nMODEL AY11236 40X,100X,400X,1000X COMPOUND\n\nMODEL AY11234 7X-45X ZOOM STEREO TRINOCULAR", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## WARRANTY\n\nBARSKA warrants your micrscope to be free from defects in materials and workmanship for one (1) year. BARSKA will repair or replace such product or part thereof which, upon inspection by BARSKA, is found to be \n\nBARSKA warrants your micrscope to be free from defects in materials and workmanship for one (1) year. BARSKA will repair or replace such product or part thereof which, upon inspection by BARSKA, is found to be defective in materials or workmanship. As a condition to the obligation of BARSKA to repair or replace such product, the product must be returned to BARSKA together with proof-of-purchase satisfactory to BARSKA.\n\nThe Proper Return Merchandise Authorization Number (RMA) must be obtained from BARSKA in advance of return. Call BARSKA at (909) 445-8168 to receive the number to be displayed on the outside of your shipping container. \n\nAll returns must be accompanied by a written statement setting forth the name, address, and daytime telephone number of the owner, together with a brief description of any claimed defects. Parts or product for which replacement is made shall become the property of BARSKA. \n\nThe customer shall be responsible for all costs of transportation and insurance, both to and from BARSKA, and shall be required to prepay such costs.\n\nBARSKA shall use reasonable efforts to repair or replace any microscope covered by this warranty within thirty days of receipt. In the event repair or replacement shall require more than thirty days, BARSKA shall notify the customer accordingly. BARSKA reserves the right to replace any product which has been discontinued from its product line with a new product of comparable value and function. \n\nThis warranty shall be void and of no force of effect in the event a covered product has been modified in design or function, or subjected to abuse, misuse, mishandling or unauthorized repair. Further, product malfunction or deterioration due to normal wear is not covered by this warranty.\n\nBARSKA DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WHETHER OF MERCHANTABILITY OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR USE, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY SET FORTH HEREIN. THE SOLE OBLIGATION OF BARSKA UNDER THIS LIMITED WARRANTY SHALL BE TO REPAIR OR REPLACE THE COVERED PRODUCT, IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE TERMS SET FORTH HEREIN. BARSKA EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY LOST PROFITS, GENERAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHICH MAY RESULT FROM BREACH OF ANY WARRANTY, OR ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE ANY BARSKA PRODUCT. ANY WARRANTIES WHICH ARE IMPLIED AND WHICH CANNOT BE DISCLAIMED SHALL BE LIMITED IN DURATION TO A TERM OF ONE YEAR FROM THE DATE OF ORIGINAL RETAIL PURCHASE. \n\nSome states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages or limitation on how long an implied warranty lasts, so the above limitations and exclusions may not apply to you. \n\nThis warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state. \n\nBARSKA reserves the right to modify or discontinue, without prior notice to you, any model or style microscope. \n\nIf warranty problems arise, or if you need assistance in using your microscope contact:\n\nBARSKA Customer Service Department Tel. (909) 445-8168 Fax. (909) 445-8169 e-mail: service@barska.com\n\nMonday-Friday 8:30AM-5:30PM PST\n\nNOTE: This warranty is valid to U.S.A. customers who have purchased this product from an authorized BARSKA dealer in the U.S.A. \n\n855 Towne Center Drive Pomona, CA 91767 Tel: 888-666-6769 Fax: 909.445.8169 www.barska.com\n\n©2015 BARSKA Optics Printed in China 4-15\n\n# MICROSCOPE USER MANUAL\n\nMODEL AY11236 40X,100X,400X,1000X COMPOUND\n\nMODEL AY11234 7X-45X ZOOM STEREO TRINOCULAR\n\nMODEL AY11230 20X,40X STEREO TRINOCULAR\n\nMODEL AY11232 7X-45X STEREO ZOOM\n\nMODEL AY11240 40X,100X,400X COMPOUND MONOCULAR\n\nMODEL AY11238 40X,100X,400X COMPOUND MONOCULAR\n\nMODEL AY11228 20X,40X STEREO BINOCULAR" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.848196179568842, + "doc_id": "d62fe67588ba2f5540ab7c8e0d07af3a566449e9d361a89f70903e28ac603074", + "edit_distance": 0.9056047197640118, + "f1_score": 0.9447852760736196, + "meteor": 0.7268895938340473, + "precision": 0.9565217391304348, + "pred_md": "## AFP Resource and AFP Utilities for iSeries\n\nThere are five kinds of AFP resources. The following table describes the relationship between AFP resources and AFP Utilities for iSeries.\n\nTable 1. Relationship between AFP resources and AFP Utilities for iSeries\n\n## Note:\n\n- 1 means that an AFP Utilities for iSeries source overlay is used.\n- 2 means that a physical file or a PC document is used.\n- 3 The Form definition option can be specified when printing a database file member or when defining printout specifications for PFD definitions.\n\n## Requirements for Use of the AFP Utilities for iSeries\n\nTo use the AFP Utilities for iSeries, the following hardware and software products are required.\n\n## Hardware Requirements\n\n- v Any model of iSeries.\n- v Any model of a 5250 display terminal or 5250 emulated work station that supports an 80 x 24 display size.\n- For DBCS support, a DBCS display workstation is required.\n- v One of the following IPDS printers is required:\n- -4224, 4230, 4234-12, 4230-102, 4247, 6400, 6404, 6408, 3130, 3160, 3812, 3816, 3930, 3112, 3116, 4312, 4317, 3912, 3916, 1931, 3935, and 4028 with the Arctic attachment\n- -3820 with SNA LU6.2 (SDLC attachment)\n- -3820, 3825, 3827, 3829, 3831, 3835, and 3900 with the SNA LU6.2 (Token Ring attachment through Remote Print Manager on Personal Computer AT* or Personal System/2*)\n\n## Software Requirements\n\n- v OS/400 Version 4 Release 2.0.\n- v Print Services Facility for iSeries, Version 4 Release 2.0 (5769-SS1), for printing to IPDS printers. Overlays and AFP applications created by AFP/U can also be\n\nChapter 1. What are the IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries?\n\n13", + "recall": 0.9333333333333333, + "true_md": "## AFP Resource and AFP Utilities for iSeries\n\n## Requirements for Use of the AFP Utilities for iSeries\n\n## Hardware Requirements\n\n## Software Requirements\n\nChapter 1. What are the IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries? 13\n\n- v OS/400 Version 4 Release 2.0.\n\n- v Print Services Facility for iSeries, Version 4 Release 2.0 (5769–SS1), for printing to IPDS printers. Overlays and AFP applications created by AFP/U can also be\n\n- – 3820, 3825, 3827, 3829, 3831, 3835, and 3900 with the SNA LU6.2 (Token Ring attachment through Remote Print Manager on Personal Computer AT* or Personal System/2*)\n\n- – 3820 with SNA LU6.2 (SDLC attachment)\n\n- – 4224, 4230, 4234–12, 4230–102, 4247, 6400, 6404, 6408, 3130, 3160, 3812, 3816, 3930, 3112, 3116, 4312, 4317, 3912, 3916, 1931, 3935, and 4028 with the Arctic attachment\n\n- v One of the following IPDS printers is required:\n\n- v Any model of a 5250 display terminal or 5250 emulated work station that supports an 80 x 24 display size.\n\n- v Any model of iSeries.\n\n- 1 means that an AFP Utilities for iSeries source overlay is used.\n\nTable1.RelationshipbetweenAFPresourcesandAFPUtilitiesforiSeries\n\nThere are five kinds of AFP resources. The following table describes the relationship between AFP resources and AFP Utilities for iSeries.\n\n$^{3}$The Form definition option can be specified when printing a database file member or when defining printout specifications for PFD definitions.\n\nTo use the AFP Utilities for iSeries, the following hardware and software products are required.\n\nFor DBCS support, a DBCS display workstation is required.\n\n- 2 means that a physical file or a PC document is used.\n\n## Note:" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6804995982958975, + "doc_id": "e119a89fe85776d680f158de38c646fb7c66180c2c5233b5b72b64eb513d856d", + "edit_distance": 0.3333333333333333, + "f1_score": 0.8870967741935483, + "meteor": 0.7667636782238905, + "precision": 0.9322033898305084, + "pred_md": "72\n\n## Confirm Delete of Elements\n\nThe Confirm Delete of Elements display shows the list of the elements to be deleted due to a change in the overlay specifications. The Reason column shows why the element is to be deleted.\n\nYou can delete these elements by pressing Enter. If you do not want to delete these elements, press F12 to cancel, then the Define Overlay Specifications display appears.\n\nTable 7. Confirm Delete of Elements display fields\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.8461538461538461, + "true_md": "## Confirm Delete of Elements\n\n## Confirm Delete of Elements\n\nPress Enter to confirm your choices for delete. Press F12 to return to change your choices.\n\nBottom\n\nF12=Cancel\n\nThe Confirm Delete of Elements display shows the list of the elements to be deleted due to a change in the overlay specifications. The Reason column shows why the element is to be deleted.\n\nYou can delete these elements by pressing Enter. If you do not want to delete these elements, press F12 to cancel, then the Define Overlay Specifications display appears.\n\nTable7.ConfirmDeleteofElementsdisplayfields\n\n72 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9381832883850153, + "doc_id": "e84fd0771d2903d9ca09b2b8d7a851ea81437767302e7a4a35bd6be92bfb6468", + "edit_distance": 0.3533487297921478, + "f1_score": 0.971264367816092, + "meteor": 0.8671219267966201, + "precision": 0.976878612716763, + "pred_md": "70\n\nThe overlay utility displays the required information to define overlay specifications. You can type appropriate values and press the Enter key to set the overlay specifications.\n\n## Change Overlay Specifications\n\nYou can change overlay specifications of the existing overlay, or you can create a new overlay based on the existing source overlay by changing it. Conflicts can occur between previously defined elements and changed overlay specifications in the same source overlay. This function is usually preferred in the following cases.\n\nNote:\n\nThe change operation is similar to the create operation. The only difference is that the previously entered parameters are already placed in each field when the display appears. See 'Define Overlay Specifications' on page 66 for the description of each parameter.\n\n- v Making the overlay size smaller\n\nWhen you try to reduce the overlay size from the previously defined values, some overlay elements may be positioned outside the newly defined overlay. The overlay size is always measured from the origin, the top-left corner of the overlay. For example, the overlay elements placed near the right edge or bottom of the previous overlay may be positioned outside the newly defined overlay. In this case, elements are deleted if their positions extend beyond the overlay boundaries.\n\nThe overlay utility displays the confirmation display when such a situation occurs to let you enter the delete element operation or cancel the change overlay specifications operation. See 'Confirm Delete of Elements' on page 72 for more information.\n\n- v Changing the unit of measure\n\nThe overlay utility allows you to change the unit of measure in the overlay specifications between inches and centimeters. The defined numbers in each element do not change. Therefore, some elements are positioned outside the overlay when the number specified for the size exceeds the possible maximum value for the unit. Also some values may exceed the lower limit of parameters such as module width.\n\n- v Changing the printer type\n\nThe overlay utility allows you to change the printer type in the overlay specifications. The overlay utility checks the compatibility between previously defined overlay elements with the newly specified printer type. If the overlay utility finds any mismatched elements, the overlay utility displays the confirmation display and lists these elements on the display. You can then delete the elements or cancel the change overlay specifications.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.9657142857142857, + "true_md": "The overlay utility displays the required information to define overlay specifications. You can type appropriate values and press the Enter key to set the overlay specifications.\n\nYou can change overlay specifications of the existing overlay, or you can create a new overlay based on the existing source overlay by changing it. Conflicts can occur between previously defined elements and changed overlay specifications in the same source overlay. This function is usually preferred in the following cases.\n\nWhen you try to reduce the overlay size from the previously defined values, some overlay elements may be positioned outside the newly defined overlay. The overlay size is always measured from the origin, the top-left corner of the overlay. For example, the overlay elements placed near the right edge or bottom of the previous overlay may be positioned outside the newly defined overlay. In this case, elements are deleted if their positions extend beyond the overlay boundaries.\n\nThe overlay utility displays the confirmation display when such a situation occurs to let you enter the delete element operation or cancel the change overlay specifications operation. See “Confirm Delete of Elements” on page 72 for more information.\n\nThe overlay utility allows you to change the unit of measure in the overlay specifications between inches and centimeters. The defined numbers in each element do not change. Therefore, some elements are positioned outside the overlay when the number specified for the size exceeds the possible maximum value for the unit. Also some values may exceed the lower limit of parameters such as module width.\n\nThe overlay utility allows you to change the printer type in the overlay specifications. The overlay utility checks the compatibility between previously defined overlay elements with the newly specified printer type. If the overlay utility finds any mismatched elements, the overlay utility displays the confirmation display and lists these elements on the display. You can then delete the elements or cancel the change overlay specifications.\n\n- v Changing the printer type\n\n- v Changing the unit of measure\n\n- v Making the overlay size smaller\n\n- Note: The change operation is similar to the create operation. The only difference is that the previously entered parameters are already placed in each field when the display appears. See “Define Overlay Specifications” on page 66 for the description of each parameter.\n\n## Change Overlay Specifications\n\n70 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5325020836696004, + "doc_id": "c2ee13bb0db56cde1e269b0d3257b0b4df046087c22d95bc823c52031e893ec1", + "edit_distance": 0.46153846153846156, + "f1_score": 0.7924528301886793, + "meteor": 0.8490937746256896, + "precision": 0.7241379310344828, + "pred_md": "426\n\nChoice on the Define Box Detail display:\n\nFormat : 2=Vertical Degree of rotation : 0\n\nFigure 39. Print Example - 6\n\nFigure 39. Print Example - 6\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.875, + "true_md": "Choice on the Define Box Detail display:\n\nFormat : 2=Vertical Degree of rotation : 0\n\n426 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\nFigure39.PrintExample-6" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.3348898410093915, + "doc_id": "0e533afe997c6d9429c327a7161bf07793cfec0ab0c00f338f61f5ed586742c5", + "edit_distance": 0.6170403587443947, + "f1_score": 0.9645669291338582, + "meteor": 0.8495355293204401, + "precision": 0.98, + "pred_md": "## Index\n\n## Special Characters\n\n## Numerics\n\n| 2-of-5 industrial | 264 |\n|---------------------|-------------------|\n| | 2-of-5 matrix 264 |\n| 3-of-9 code | 264 |\n\n## A\n\n| AFP Utilities for iSeries AFP resource 13 commands 363 | |\n|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|--------------------------------------------|\n| fundamentals 14 introduction 3 online information overlay utility 9 print format utility requirements 13 | 19 |\n| resource management utility | 10 12 |\n| source overlay file using GDFs 439 what is 3 | 82 |\n| using images using overlays AFP Utilities for iSeries commands | 8 7 |\n| display 14 element 14 file 14 | 363 AFP Utilities for iSeries fundamentals |\n| library 14 member 14 | |\n| AFP utilities tutorial print 140 | |\n| AFP Utilities tutorial PFD definitions print 136 | 461 |\n| AFP Workbench view overlay 45 | |\n| AIAG (Automotive Industry Action Group) labels 461 asterisk (*) mark 231 | |\n| authority overlay object page segment | 394 334 |\n| PFD definition file | 210 |\n| source overlay source overlay file | 81 90 |\n\n## B\n\n| back side overlay 189 |\n|-------------------------|\n| bar code data 264, 266 |\n\n| bar code element | 266 | |\n|----------------------------------------------------------------------|----------|----------|\n| character supplement check digit 267 | | |\n| color 267 data 266 degree of rotation | 267 | |\n| 268 | | |\n| height HRI 267 | | |\n| HRI asterisk 266 | 267 | |\n| HRI font mark | | |\n| 268 measurement method | | |\n| | | 266 |\n| module width 268 offset 267 | | |\n| position | | |\n| 266 specify 120 | | |\n| type | | |\n| 266 | | |\n| wide to narrow ratio | | 268 |\n| bar code element and position | | |\n| measurement method | | 413 |\n| bar code type 264, 266 | | |\n| block edit element | 289 | |\n| border 252, 257 box element 227, 252 | 261 | |\n| border 257 character spacing color 260 DBCS font 261 | | |\n| degree of rotation end position | | |\n| 256 258, 419 256 256 | 259 | |\n| format line type line width mark 256 | | |\n| measurement method | | 256 |\n| overstrike 260 restrictions rotation 420 shading 435 shading pattern | | |\n| | 393, 396 | |\n| shading type | | |\n| specify | 257 | |\n| | 257 | |\n| 122 | 256 | |\n| start position | 419 | |\n| text placement 260 | | |\n| underline box element and position | | |\n| measurement method | | |\n| | | 411 |\n| break fields related tasks | 456 | 411, 412 |\n\n## C\n\n| change element 239, 295 element in list view | 291 |\n|------------------------------------------------|-------|\n| element operations | 234 |\n| fonts 300 overlay description | 312 |\n| overlay specifications overlay text 349 | 70 |\n\n| change | |\n|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|--------|\n| (continued) page segment description page segment text 360 | 313 |\n| PFD definition 197 | |\n| PFD definition file | |\n| 211 PFD specifications 154 source overlay 49, 76 | |\n| source overlay file description | 91 313 |\n| change a page segment description change an overlay description | 312 |\n| change font 300 334 | |\n| change image size change PFD definition 197 | |\n| change PFD definition file 211 154 change source overlay 49, 76 | |\n| change PFD specifications | |\n| change source overlay file description 91 | |\n| character set 301, 303, 306 character size 248 | |\n| character spacing horizontal 261 | |\n| vertical 261 characters per inch (overlay | |\n| specifications) 67 specifications) 151 272 | |\n| characters per inch (PFD check digit code 128 character set 463 | |\n| columns 15 command CVTOVLPFM 384 CVTPAGSPFM 387 | |\n| CVTPCDPAGS 372 | |\n| 378 367 363 363 | |\n| 365 | |\n| CVTPFMPAGS PRTPFDDTA STRAFPU STROVLU | |\n| STRPFU 403 156 72 | |\n| common symptoms confirm delete of elements display overlay 72 | |\n| page layout 157 record layout 156 confirm delete of overlays display | 343 |\n| confirm delete of page segments display 354 confirm delete of PFD definitions display 200 | |\n| confirm delete of source overlay file confirm delete of source overlays | 93 |\n| contact service representative convert | 79 407 |\n| | 312 |\n| 312, 346 restrictions 397 | |\n| 313 | |\n| overlay to (physical file member) page segment to (database file) page segment to (physical file | |\n| overlay page segment | 309 |\n\nmember)\n\n313\n\n475", + "recall": 0.9496124031007752, + "true_md": "## Index\n\n## Special Characters\n\n## Numerics\n\n## A\n\n## B\n\n## C\n\n% mark 231 * mark 231 = sign 290\n\n2–of-5 industrial 264 2–of-5 matrix 264 3–of-9 code 264\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries AFP resource 13 commands 363 fundamentals 14 introduction 3 online information 19 overlay utility 9 print format utility 10 requirements 13 resource management utility 12 source overlay file 82 using GDFs 439 what is 3 what you can do 5 using bar codes 8 using graphics 8 using images 8 using overlays 7 AFP Utilities for iSeries commands 363 AFP Utilities for iSeries fundamentals display 14 element 14 file 14 library 14 member 14 AFP utilities tutorial print 140 AFP Utilities tutorial PFD definitions 461 print 136 AFP Workbench view overlay 45 AIAG (Automotive Industry Action Group) labels 461 asterisk (*) mark 231 authority overlay object 394 page segment 334 PFD definition file 210 source overlay 81 source overlay file 90\n\nback side overlay 189 bar code data 264, 266\n\nbar code element character supplement 266 check digit 267 color 267 data 266 degree of rotation 267 height 268 HRI 267 HRI asterisk 267 HRI font 268 mark 266 measurement method 266 module width 268 offset 267 position 266 specify 120 type 266 wide to narrow ratio 268 bar code element and position 413 measurement method 413 bar code type 264, 266 block edit element 289 border 252, 257 box element 227, 252 border 257 character spacing 261 color 260 DBCS font 261 degree of rotation 259 end position 256 format 258, 419 line type 256 line width 256 mark 256 measurement method 256 overstrike 260 restrictions 393, 396 rotation 420 shading 435 shading pattern 257 shading type 257 specify 122 start position 256 text placement 419 underline 260 box element and position 411 measurement method 411, 412 break fields related tasks 456 specify 161\n\nchange element 239, 295 element in list view 291 element operations 234 fonts 300 overlay description 312 overlay specifications 70 overlay text 349\n\nchange (continued) page segment description 313 page segment text 360 PFD definition 197 PFD definition file 211 PFD specifications 154 source overlay 49, 76 source overlay file description 91 change a page segment description 313 change an overlay description 312 change font 300 change image size 334 change PFD definition 197 change PFD definition file 211 change PFD specifications 154 change source overlay 49, 76 change source overlay file description 91 character set 301, 303, 306 character size 248 character spacing horizontal 261 vertical 261 characters per inch (overlay specifications) 67 characters per inch (PFD specifications) 151 check digit 272 code 128 character set 463 columns 15 command CVTOVLPFM 384 CVTPAGSPFM 387 CVTPCDPAGS 372 CVTPFMPAGS 378 PRTPFDDTA 367 STRAFPU 363 STROVLU 363 STRPFU 365 common symptoms 403 confirm delete of elements 156 display 72 overlay 72 page layout 157 record layout 156 confirm delete of overlays display 343 confirm delete of page segments display 354 confirm delete of PFD definitions display 200 confirm delete of source overlay file 93 confirm delete of source overlays 79 contact service representative 407 convert overlay 312, 346 restrictions 397 overlay to (physical file member) 312 page segment 313 page segment to (database file) 309 page segment to (physical file member) 313\n\n475" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8649493903499874, + "doc_id": "2863e605b98bcfbe874d5bc4b725a334da9a36f2b21ddfe893f2b5503b57ddb1", + "edit_distance": 0.6347305389221557, + "f1_score": 0.9572649572649572, + "meteor": 0.7615796623389429, + "precision": 0.9333333333333333, + "pred_md": "382\n\n## *SAME\n\nSpecifies the mapping option used when you previously created a page segment of the same name.\n\n## *PAT (Position and trim)\n\nThe top left corner of the input image is located to the top left corner of the output image area. The image size is not changed, and any portion of the input image that falls outside of the output image size is trimmed.\n\n## *STF (Scale to fit)\n\nThe center of the input image is located to the center of the output image area. The image size is changed so that the input image fits in the output image size.\n\n## *CAT (Center and trim)\n\nThe center of the input image is located to the center of the output image area. The image size is not changed, and any portion of the input image that falls outside of the output image size is trimmed.\n\n## *IPTP (Image point to pel)\n\nThe top left corner of the input image is located to the top left corner of the output image area. No resolution correction is done and each image point in the input image is mapped to a pel of the output printer. The image size may vary depending on the pel-density of the output printer, and any portion of the input image that falls outside of the output image size is trimmed.\n\n## *IPTPD (Image point to pel with double dot)\n\nThe top left corner of the input image is located to the top left corner of the output image area. No resolution correction is done and each image point in the input image is doubled (replicated) in both dimensions and mapped to pels of the output printer. The image size may vary depending on the pel-density of the output printer, and any portion of the input image that falls outside of the output image size is trimmed.\n\n## Degree of rotation (IMGRTT)\n\nSpecifies the degree of the clockwise rotation of the output image. The center of the rotation is the top left corner of the image.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\n## *SAME\n\nSpecifies the degree of rotation used when you previously created a page segment of the same name.\n\n- 0 No rotation is done.\n- 90 The image is rotated 90 degrees clockwise.\n- 180 The image is rotated 180 degrees clockwise.\n- 270 The image is rotated 270 degrees clockwise.\n\n## Authority (AUT)\n\nSpecifies the authority given to the user who does not have specific authority, who is not on the authorization list, or whose user group has no specific authority to the created page segment.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.9824561403508771, + "true_md": "## *SAME\n\n## *PAT (Position and trim)\n\n## *STF (Scale to fit)\n\n## *CAT (Center and trim)\n\n## *IPTP (Image point to pel)\n\n## *IPTPD (Image point to pel with double dot)\n\n## Degree of rotation (IMGRTT)\n\n## *SAME\n\n## Authority (AUT)\n\n382 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\nSpecifies the authority given to the user who does not have specific authority, who is not on the authorization list, or whose user group has no specific authority to the created page segment.\n\nSpecifies the degree of rotation used when you previously created a page segment of the same name.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\nSpecifies the degree of the clockwise rotation of the output image. The center of the rotation is the top left corner of the image.\n\nThe top left corner of the input image is located to the top left corner of the output image area. No resolution correction is done and each image point in the input image is doubled (replicated) in both dimensions and mapped to pels of the output printer. The image size may vary depending on the pel-density of the output printer, and any portion of the input image that falls outside of the output image size is trimmed.\n\nThe top left corner of the input image is located to the top left corner of the output image area. No resolution correction is done and each image point in the input image is mapped to a pel of the output printer. The image size may vary depending on the pel-density of the output printer, and any portion of the input image that falls outside of the output image size is trimmed.\n\nThe center of the input image is located to the center of the output image area. The image size is not changed, and any portion of the input image that falls outside of the output image size is trimmed.\n\nThe center of the input image is located to the center of the output image area. The image size is changed so that the input image fits in the output image size.\n\nThe top left corner of the input image is located to the top left corner of the output image area. The image size is not changed, and any portion of the input image that falls outside of the output image size is trimmed.\n\nSpecifies the mapping option used when you previously created a page segment of the same name." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7372392978334867, + "doc_id": "18a6527431802b2cfc59b051eaa23645b65535206fb6562c7dbafb1d6defaeb1", + "edit_distance": 0.37464788732394366, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.783022832329458, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## SPECIFICATIONS\n\n- 1. Length of mechanical tube: 160mm\n- 2. Conjugate distance between object and image: 195mm\n- 3. Condenser: Abbe; numerical aperture: NA1.25 (oil immersion)\n- 4. Illumination: Input 110V or 200V; Output: 20W\n- 5. Fine adjustment range: .002mm\n- 6. Coarse Adjustment Range: 20mm\n- 7. Shift or Mechanical Stage: Longitude - 40mm; Transversal - 70mm\n- 8. Condenser Elevation Range: 15mm\n- 9. Iris diaphragm aperture: 2mm-30mm\n\n## Objective Specifications\n\nNote: For oil immersion, please use the index of refraction 1.515 oil\n\n## Eyepiece Specifications\n\n## Total Magnification\n\n15\n\n16\n\n## PARTS LIST\n\n## OPERATION\n\n- 1. Remove all components from package. Identify all parts before assembling instrument.\n- 2. Attach 4x, 10x and 40x objectives by screwing into revolving turret. Tighten and secure to maximum finger pressure only.\n- 3. Place the specimen on the stage and secure with spring clips. NOTE: The cover glass must face upward (the thinner glass is the cover glass), otherwise when the 40x objective is used the specimen cannot be observed. Observation is best when the thickness of the cover glass is 0.1-1.1mm and the cover glass is 0.17mm.\n- 4. Plug power cord into an electrical outlet. Turn microscope lamp ON.\n- 5. Observe the specimen using the lowest magnification objective first. The 10x objective provides a larger field of view making it easier to search the specimen.", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## SPECIFICATIONS\n\n## PARTS LIST\n\n## Objective Specifications\n\n## Eyepiece Specifications\n\n## Total Magnification\n\n## OPERATION\n\n- 1. Length of mechanical tube: 160mm\n\n- 2. Conjugate distance between object and image: 195mm\n\n- 3. Condenser: Abbe; numerical aperture: NA1.25 (oil immersion)\n\n- 4. Illumination: Input 110V or 200V; Output: 20W\n\n- 5. Fine adjustment range: .002mm\n\n- 6. Coarse Adjustment Range: 20mm\n\n- 7. Shift or Mechanical Stage: Longitude - 40mm; Transversal - 70mm\n\n- 8. Condenser Elevation Range: 15mm\n\n- 9. Iris diaphragm aperture: 2mm-30mm\n\n- 1. Remove all components from package. Identify all parts before assembling instrument. 2. Attach 4x, 10x and 40x objectives by screwing into revolving\n\n- assembling instrument. 2. Attach 4x, 10x and 40x objectives by screwing into revolving turret. Tighten and secure to maximum finger pressure only. 3. Place the specimen on the stage and secure with spring clips.\n\n- turret. Tighten and secure to maximum finger pressure only. 3. Place the specimen on the stage and secure with spring clips. NOTE: The cover glass must face upward (the thinner glass is the cover glass), otherwise when the 40x objective is used the specimen cannot be observed. Observation is best when the thickness of the cover glass is 0.1-1.1mm and the cover glass is 0.17mm. 4. Plug power cord into an electrical outlet. Turn microscope\n\n- is 0.17mm. 4. Plug power cord into an electrical outlet. Turn microscope lamp ON. 5. Observe the specimen using the lowest magnification objective\n\n- lamp ON. 5. Observe the specimen using the lowest magnification objective first. The 10x objective provides a larger field of view making it easier to search the specimen.\n\n15\n\n16\n\nNote: For oil immersion, please use the index of refraction 1.515 oil" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7170068479234025, + "doc_id": "d7b3150bc7ea34a870941c96625a490ed649b07697db2e5a8a411b03cecfad5a", + "edit_distance": 0.21951219512195122, + "f1_score": 0.875, + "meteor": 0.8511048905477057, + "precision": 0.9210526315789473, + "pred_md": "On the Save Source Overlay display, you can specify the following:\n\nOn the Save Source Overlay display, you can specify the following:\n\nTable 8. Save Source Overlay display fields\n\nStep 5. When you complete the operation in this display and press the Enter key, the Create Overlay display appears.\n\n- Step 6. Press the Enter key. The Work with Source Overlays display appears.\n\nChapter 5. Work with Source Overlays\n\n75", + "recall": 0.8333333333333334, + "true_md": "## Save Source Overlay\n\nType choices, press Enter.\n\nF4=Prompt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel\n\nOn the Save Source Overlay display, you can specify the following:\n\nTable8.SaveSourceOverlaydisplayfields\n\n- Step 5. When you complete the operation in this display and press the Enter key, the Create Overlay display appears.\n\n- Step 6. Press the Enter key. The Work with Source Overlays display appears.\n\nChapter 5. Work with Source Overlays 75" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.828969133259693, + "doc_id": "525a3100b834578983c69a554fd6d308ca2d5b95432e70d719359db605570c36", + "edit_distance": 0.3193717277486911, + "f1_score": 0.9154228855721392, + "meteor": 0.8438222761309075, + "precision": 0.9108910891089109, + "pred_md": "Basic English Language Skills\n\n## Continual/Continuous\n\nIf something happens frequently, it is 'continual'.\n\nE.g. The trains were continually late.\n\nIf something happens all the time without interruption, it is 'continuous'.\n\nE.g. It rained continuously for three days.\n\n## Its/It's\n\n'Its' indicates possession.\n\nE.g. The company improved its performance by hiring new staff members.\n\n'It's' is a contraction of 'it is'. E.g. It's uncertain whether the company will meet the financial targets this year.\n\n## Principal/Principle\n\nE.g. The principal declared that the school term would be extended\n\nA 'principal' is the head of a school or college. by a week.\n\nA 'principal' thing is a main or most important thing.\n\nE.g. His commitment to the task was the principal reason for his success.\n\nA 'principle' is a fundamental rule or belief.\n\nE.g. It goes against my principles to eat meat.\n\nDeveloped for Oxbridge Academy", + "recall": 0.92, + "true_md": "Basic English Language Skills\n\n## Continual/Continuous\n\nIf something happens frequently, it is “continual”. E.g. The trains were continually late.\n\nIf something happens all the time without interruption, it is “continuous”. E.g. It rained continuously for three days.\n\n“Its” indicates possession. E.g. The company improved its performance by hiring new staff members.\n\n“It’s” is a contraction of “it is”. E.g. It’s uncertain whether the company will meet the financial targets this year.\n\nA “principal” is the head of a school or college. E.g. The principal declared that the school term would be extended by a week.\n\nA “principal” thing is a main or most important thing. E.g. His commitment to the task was the principal reason for his success.\n\nA “principle” is a fundamental rule or belief.\n\nE.g. It goes against my principles to eat meat.\n\nDeveloped for Oxbridge Academy\n\n## Its/It’s\n\n## Principal/Principle" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8842776239773849, + "doc_id": "e7c31da40e211b2c429adcdf64830a173868e176c7b359662fecd9c81bc53227", + "edit_distance": 0.10101010101010101, + "f1_score": 0.9767441860465117, + "meteor": 0.9767542213128017, + "precision": 0.9692307692307692, + "pred_md": "## Using Overlays\n\nOverlays are stored constructs of text, boxes, lines, graphics, images, and bar codes with all the instructions needed to print. They are often in complex configurations. An overlay is always printed in the same format as it was stored in and can be positioned anywhere on the page.\n\nOverlays are useful for letterheads and forms as shown in the following figure.\n\nFigure 3. Using Overlays\n\nFigure 3. Using Overlays\n\nChapter 1. What are the IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries?\n\n7", + "recall": 0.984375, + "true_md": "## Using Overlays\n\nOverlays are stored constructs of text, boxes, lines, graphics, images, and bar codes with all the instructions needed to print. They are often in complex configurations. An overlay is always printed in the same format as it was stored in and can be positioned anywhere on the page.\n\nOverlays are useful for letterheads and forms as shown in the following figure.\n\nFigure3.UsingOverlays\n\nChapter 1. What are the IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries? 7" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.41803061789444473, + "doc_id": "44154425b027bf4ad655b4ffa70d8f914485ab1f9173c2e9f693b795cde08df9", + "edit_distance": 0.42857142857142855, + "f1_score": 0.8344370860927153, + "meteor": 0.6603725961538461, + "precision": 0.984375, + "pred_md": "306\n\n## Display Font (Font Type=3):\n\nThis display shows the definition of a type 3 font.\n\nThe following table explains the Display Source Overlay Font display and the Display PFD Definition Font display.\n\n## 9=Set Initial Font\n\nTo change the definition of a font to the initial values, do the following on the Work with Source Overlay Fonts display or the Work with PFD Definition Fonts display.\n\n- 1. Type 9 in the Opt. column beside the font number for which you want to change the definition.\n- 2. Press Enter.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.7241379310344828, + "true_md": "Display Font (Font Type=3):\n\n## Display PFD Definition Font\n\nThis display shows the definition of a type 3 font.\n\nThe following table explains the Display Source Overlay Font display and the Display PFD Definition Font display.\n\nTo change the definition of a font to the initial values, do the following on the Work with Source Overlay Fonts display or the Work with PFD Definition Fonts display.\n\n- 1. Type 9 in the Opt. column beside the font number for which you want to change the definition.\n\n- 2. Press Enter.\n\n## 9=Set Initial Font\n\nFont number ........: 1 Font type .........: 3 Code page and font character set Code page T1D0BASE Font character set . . . . . : C0D0DB10 Point size.........: *NONE Text............: GOTHIC ROMAN BOLD 10 POINTS Press Enter to continue. F3=Exit F12=Cancel\n\n306 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7186876790997628, + "doc_id": "ec576fa71bce836b8f4afa1fcbd15a3ff61e29ab69a6b2bc1a40caabec786800", + "edit_distance": 0.9090909090909091, + "f1_score": 0.9494949494949494, + "meteor": 0.7692236285307251, + "precision": 0.9170731707317074, + "pred_md": "You need to do the following before you create a printout with the overlay:\n\n- v Put the correct page segment in a library.\n- v Put the library in the library list.\n- v Make sure the library that contains the desired page segment appears in the library list before any other library containing a page segment of the same name.\n- 3. It is unpredictable which font will be used if a page segment contains text. The font used to print the text can not be specified. Depending on the situation, a font specified for text within a page segment may be used, or the printer default font may be used.\n- 4. It is not checked if a page segment contains either or both IM1 and IO1 format images. IM1 images may not be printed in the desired resolution on some printers, and IO1 images cannot be printed on some printers. When IOCA images are used, support only IOCA function set 10.\n- See 'Appendix A. Printer Characteristics' on page 417 for restrictions of each printer.\n- 5. When 90, 180, or 270 is specified in the Degree of rotation prompt on the Define Overlay Specifications screen, page segments defined in the source overlay do not rotate with the overlay.\n\n## Line\n\nNothing is printed for lines that have a greater width than length.\n\n## Box\n\nNothing is printed for boxes that have line width specified which is greater than either the box width or the box height.\n\n## Text in Box\n\nText in a box is formatted by using the character spacing parameter specified on the box element. If the font size is different, formatting is incorrect.\n\n```\nFor example: Character spacing : Horizontal........................ 10 Vertical.......................... 6 Font for text in a box width ............................ 0.2 inches ( 5 CPI ) height ........................... 0.33 inches ( 3 CPI )\n```\n\nText will be printed to the right of the correct position for center. The second and subsequent lines will partly duplicate the preceding lines.\n\nTo avoid this situation, specify the character spacing value equal to that of the font.\n\n## Shading in Box\n\nIt sometimes takes a long time to print shaded boxes (especially with the IBM 4028 printer).\n\n## Graphics (GDF) Size\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries has no limitations and restrictions for the graphics (GDF) size, but printing an overlay which contains some large graphics (GDF) or too many graphics may cause a printer storage excess error. In such cases, check the printer storage size.\n\nChapter 22. Limitations and Restrictions\n\n393", + "recall": 0.9842931937172775, + "true_md": "You need to do the following before you create a printout with the overlay:\n\nNothing is printed for lines that have a greater width than length.\n\nNothing is printed for boxes that have line width specified which is greater than either the box width or the box height.\n\nText in a box is formatted by using the character spacing parameter specified on the box element. If the font size is different, formatting is incorrect.\n\nFor example:\n\nText will be printed to the right of the correct position for center. The second and subsequent lines will partly duplicate the preceding lines.\n\nTo avoid this situation, specify the character spacing value equal to that of the font.\n\nIt sometimes takes a long time to print shaded boxes (especially with the IBM 4028 printer).\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries has no limitations and restrictions for the graphics (GDF) size, but printing an overlay which contains some large graphics (GDF) or too many graphics may cause a printer storage excess error. In such cases, check the printer storage size.\n\nChapter 22. Limitations and Restrictions 393\n\n## Text in Box\n\n## Box\n\n## Line\n\n- v Put the correct page segment in a library.\n\n- v Put the library in the library list.\n\n- v Make sure the library that contains the desired page segment appears in the library list before any other library containing a page segment of the same name.\n\n- 3. It is unpredictable which font will be used if a page segment contains text. The font used to print the text can not be specified. Depending on the situation, a font specified for text within a page segment may be used, or the printer default font may be used.\n\n- 4. It is not checked if a page segment contains either or both IM1 and IO1 format images. IM1 images may not be printed in the desired resolution on some printers, and IO1 images cannot be printed on some printers. When IOCA images are used, support only IOCA function set 10.\n\n- 5. When 90, 180, or 270 is specified in the Degree of rotation prompt on the Define Overlay Specifications screen, page segments defined in the source overlay do not rotate with the overlay.\n\nSee “Appendix A. Printer Characteristics” on page 417 for restrictions of each printer.\n\n## Graphics (GDF) Size\n\n## Shading in Box" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5209482323601317, + "doc_id": "55d1622feb43dde01fa7a96816b7c934a4ba6d26416acb9e32c3c43f406ed9db", + "edit_distance": 0.5791505791505791, + "f1_score": 0.8545454545454547, + "meteor": 0.7116820663491662, + "precision": 0.9690721649484536, + "pred_md": "320\n\n## Example Actions:\n\n- 1. Type 2 for the Copies prompt.\n- 2. Press the Enter key.\n\nThe Work with Overlays display appears with a completion message. The overlay STATIONE has been printed. Press Enter to return to the IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries menu.\n\n## Printing a Page Segment\n\nNote: To perform the following task, you need a page segment. Page segment QFCLOGO should exist in library QGPL. If it does not exist, copy page segment QFCPAGS from library QAFP to page segment QFCLOGO in library QGPL.\n\nTo create a page segment, do the tasks described in 'Chapter 18. Convert to Page Segment Function' on page 331.\n\nIn the following examples, the following names are used:\n\nQGPL for the library name\n\nQFCLOGO for the page segment name\n\nYou may change these names to your own names.\n\n## Example Actions:\n\n- 1. Type 23 on the Selection or command line in the display.\n- 2. Press the Enter key.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.7642276422764228, + "true_md": "Print Overlay Overlay . .........: STATIONE Library . ........: OVLLIB Type choices, press Enter. Output queue . ....... *JOB Name, *JOB Library ......... Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB Copies . . ......... 2 1-255 Print fidelity ....... *CONTENT *CONTENT, *ABSOLUTE Bottom F3=Exit F5=Refresh F12=Cancel\n\n- Note: To perform the following task, you need a page segment. Page segment QFCLOGO should exist in library QGPL. If it does not exist, copy page segment QFCPAGS from library QAFP to page segment QFCLOGO in library QGPL.\n\n- 1. Type 2 for the Copies prompt.\n\n- 2. Press the Enter key.\n\n- 1. Type 23 on the Selection or command line in the display.\n\n- 2. Press the Enter key.\n\n320 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\nTo create a page segment, do the tasks described in “Chapter 18. Convert to Page Segment Function” on page 331.\n\nIn the following examples, the following names are used:\n\nQGPL for the library name\n\nQFCLOGO for the page segment name\n\nYou may change these names to your own names.\n\n## Example Actions:\n\n## Printing a Page Segment\n\n## Example Actions:\n\nThe Work with Overlays display appears with a completion message. The overlay STATIONE has been printed. Press Enter to return to the IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries menu." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9148089482730564, + "doc_id": "fa6126ad429ef5e71a86525c8bf0ad4084441d5523a3a752469ddd7bdeb1c5aa", + "edit_distance": 0.3511450381679389, + "f1_score": 0.9608938547486033, + "meteor": 0.9554128594466441, + "precision": 0.9662921348314607, + "pred_md": "Basic English Language Skils\n\n## CHAPTER 11:\n\n## LANGUAGE SKILLS AT WORK HOW TO WRITE A RESIGNATION LETTER\n\nNo matter what the reason, resigning from your job is likely to be an uncomfortable experience.\n\nIf you are leaving for personal reasons (such as moving away, starting a family, or retiring), you may feel sad about leaving. But if you are leaving for a better opportunity, or you've simply had enough of your current job, you may be glad to be moving on.\n\nEither way, it's always going to be in your best interests to leave on a positive note, and to resign in a professional manner.\n\nDeveloped for Oxbridge Academy", + "recall": 0.9555555555555556, + "true_md": "No matter what the reason, resigning from your job is likely to be an uncomfortable experience.\n\nIf you are leaving for personal reasons (such as moving away, starting a family, or retiring), you may feel sad about leaving. But if you are leaving for a better opportunity, or you’ve simply had enough of your current job, you may be glad to be moving on.\n\nEither way, it’s always going to be in your best interests to leave on a positive note, and to resign in a professional manner.\n\nDeveloped for Oxbridge Academy\n\n## LANGUAGE SKILLS AT WORK HOW TO WRITE A RESIGNATION LETTER\n\n## CHAPTER 11:\n\nBasic English Language Skills" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.001274554340828449, + "doc_id": "71bae7aa3a584475466e072c1cdd2f2f7fdcaa3b5db6e9a14fd1c96dfcd2bd07", + "edit_distance": 0.8559322033898306, + "f1_score": 0.32608695652173914, + "meteor": 0.15612278648483613, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "The following table explains each field in this display.\n\nThe following table explains each field in this display.\n\nChapter 13. Design Operation\n\n243", + "recall": 0.19480519480519481, + "true_md": "Design Overlay Columns: 1- 74 Control . . Source overlay.....STATIONERY *...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7.... 001 002 %T001 s an example. 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 More... Change Text Mark . . . . . . : *T001 Measurement method....:Row/Column Position.....Across 32 Down 2 Text data .... iSeries Stationery Co., Ltd. F3=Exit F4=Detail F6=Change measurement method F12=Cancel F24=More keys\n\nThe following table explains each field in this display.\n\nChapter 13. Design Operation 243" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6338556947840469, + "doc_id": "84c7763c53f531bd67003d9251dfe392bb7c5571d4e9246959e32317e25165a2", + "edit_distance": 0.4024767801857585, + "f1_score": 0.8583333333333334, + "meteor": 0.9069568334225642, + "precision": 0.7573529411764706, + "pred_md": "## Defining or Changing an Element\n\nIn the screen view, you can define an element in the following steps.\n\nStep 1. Move the cursor to the position where you want to place an element, or to the mark of the element to be changed on the image area.\n\nStep 2. Press an appropriate function key assigned for the element. The possible function keys are shown below:\n\nText\n\nF6 (Text)\n\nLine\n\nF9 (Line)\n\nBox\n\nF10 (Box)\n\nBar Code\n\nF11 (Bar code)\n\nGraphics\n\nF13 (Place), then F6 (Graphics)\n\nPage Segment\n\nF13 (Place), then F9 (Page segment)\n\nRecord Layout\n\nF13 (Place), then F11 (Record layout)\n\nChange (Any\n\nelement)\n\nF14\n\nAn element mark that begins with % is shown at the cursor position.\n\nStep 3. When you define a line, a box, or a graphic, move the cursor to the end of the element, and press F6, F9, or F10 again. When you define other elements, this step is not needed.\n\nStep 4.\n\nThe key entry area appears.\n\nAfter these steps, the Overlay Utility and the Print Format Utility show the key entry area in the Design display. The key entry area overrides the lower part of the image area. See the following description for each parameter in the key entry area and detailed information according to the type of the element:\n\nText\n\n'Text' on page 227\n\nLine\n\n'Line' on page 227\n\nBox\n\n'Box' on page 227\n\nBar code\n\n'Bar Code' on page 227\n\nPage segment\n\n'Page Segment' on page 227\n\nGraphics\n\n'Graphics' on page 228\n\nRecord layout\n\n'Record Layout' on page 228\n\nChapter 13. Design Operation\n\n239", + "recall": 0.9903846153846154, + "true_md": "## Defining or Changing an Element\n\nIn the screen view, you can define an element in the following steps.\n\n- Step 1. Move the cursor to the position where you want to place an element, or to the mark of the element to be changed on the image area.\n\n- Step 2. Press an appropriate function key assigned for the element. The possible function keys are shown below:\n\n- Step 3. When you define a line, a box, or a graphic, move the cursor to the end of the element, and press F6, F9, or F10 again. When you define other elements, this step is not needed.\n\n- Step 4. The key entry area appears.\n\nAfter these steps, the Overlay Utility and the Print Format Utility show the key entry area in the Design display. The key entry area overrides the lower part of the image area. See the following description for each parameter in the key entry area and detailed information according to the type of the element:\n\nAn element mark that begins with % is shown at the cursor position.\n\nChapter 13. Design Operation 239" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6575909538628469, + "doc_id": "5349927e279049ee11a364622e2bbbbe1c39eced905d730462fa413e37df4f41", + "edit_distance": 0.27586206896551724, + "f1_score": 0.9047619047619049, + "meteor": 0.9143216758068867, + "precision": 0.8636363636363636, + "pred_md": "The following table explains each field of the Define PFD Specifications display.\n\nTable 22. Define PFD Specifications display fields\n\nChapter 10. Work with PFD Definitions\n\n151", + "recall": 0.95, + "true_md": "The following table explains each field of the Define PFD Specifications display.\n\nTable22.DefinePFDSpecificationsdisplayfields\n\nChapter 10. Work with PFD Definitions 151" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5379404100090301, + "doc_id": "4fcf03e2392377ef7198a9fcf2582dda04c9669e3b6319dc6ed3712be40c5f9a", + "edit_distance": 0.6174496644295302, + "f1_score": 0.9722222222222221, + "meteor": 0.6045403492779838, + "precision": 0.9722222222222222, + "pred_md": "## Step 4 - Changing a Source Overlay\n\n## Placing a Page Segment\n\nWhen you want to place a logo image, created as a page segment, on the overlay that you have created, perform the following:\n\n## Example Actions:\n\n- 1. Type STRAFPU on the command line.\n- 2. Press the Enter key.\n\nThe IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries menu appears.\n\n```\nAFPU IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries Select one of the following: Overlay Utility 1. Work with source overlays 2. Work with source overlay files Print Format Utility 11. Work with PFD definitions 12. Work with PFD definition files 13. Print database file member 14. Print AFP Utilities tutorial Resource Management Utility 21. Convert to page segment 22. Work with overlays 23. Work with page segments Selection or command ===> 1 F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel F16=System main menu (C) COPYRIGHT IBM CORP. 1991, 1996.\n```\n\nChapter 3. Getting Started with the Overlay Utility\n\n49", + "recall": 0.9722222222222222, + "true_md": "## Step 4 - Changing a Source Overlay\n\n## Placing a Page Segment\n\n## Example Actions:\n\n## IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries\n\n- 1. Type STRAFPU on the command line.\n\n- 2. Press the Enter key.\n\nWhen you want to place a logo image, created as a page segment, on the overlay that you have created, perform the following:\n\nThe IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries menu appears.\n\nAFPU\n\nSelect one of the following:\n\nOverlay Utility 1. Work with source overlays\n\nPrint Format Utility 11. Work with PFD definitions\n\nResource Management Utility 21. Convert to page segment\n\nSelection or command ===> 1\n\nF3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel F16=System main menu (C) COPYRIGHT IBM CORP. 1991, 1996.\n\n- Overlay Utility 1. Work with source overlays 2. Work with source overlay files\n\n- 1. Work with source overlays 2. Work with source overlay files\n\n- Print Format Utility 11. Work with PFD definitions 12. Work with PFD definition files\n\n- 11. Work with PFD definitions 12. Work with PFD definition files 13. Print database file member\n\n- 12. Work with PFD definition files 13. Print database file member 14. Print AFP Utilities tutorial\n\n- 13. Print database file member 14. Print AFP Utilities tutorial\n\n- Resource Management Utility 21. Convert to page segment 22. Work with overlays\n\n- 21. Convert to page segment 22. Work with overlays 23. Work with page segments\n\n- 22. Work with overlays 23. Work with page segments\n\nChapter 3. Getting Started with the Overlay Utility 49" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7072510957432827, + "doc_id": "b4f4f7ffaa5359fae020e088ac0694c55b67b0b24ef228e48844e4e427d03beb", + "edit_distance": 0.6307692307692307, + "f1_score": 0.7951807228915662, + "meteor": 0.8979917318258663, + "precision": 0.717391304347826, + "pred_md": "## Graphics Element\n\nNote:\n\nThe following description assumes that you are on one of the following displays:\n\nThe Place Graphics Detail display\n\nThe Change Graphics Detail display\n\nTable 103. Tasks related to graphics element\n\n## Page Segment Element\n\nNote:\n\nThe following description assumes that you are on one of the following displays:\n\nThe Place Page Segment Detail display\n\nThe Change Page Segment Detail display\n\nTable 104. Tasks related to page segment element\n\n## Record Layout Element\n\nNote:\n\nThe following description assumes that you are on one of the following displays:\n\nThe Place Record Layout Detail display\n\nThe Change Record Layout Detail display\n\nTable 105. Tasks related to record layout element\n\nAppendix E. How to Do a Task\n\n453", + "recall": 0.8918918918918919, + "true_md": "## Graphics Element\n\n## Page Segment Element\n\n## Record Layout Element\n\nTable105.Tasksrelatedtorecordlayoutelement\n\nTable104.Tasksrelatedtopagesegmentelement\n\nTable103.Tasksrelatedtographicselement\n\n- Note: The following description assumes that you are on one of the following displays:\n\n- Note: The following description assumes that you are on one of the following displays:\n\n- Note: The following description assumes that you are on one of the following displays:\n\nThe Place Record Layout Detail display\n\nThe Change Record Layout Detail display\n\nThe Place Page Segment Detail display\n\nThe Change Page Segment Detail display\n\nThe Place Graphics Detail display\n\nThe Change Graphics Detail display\n\nAppendix E. How to Do a Task 453" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8346834936794848, + "doc_id": "7dd16bbbcc6cb00cdb8e9883850071f2fa23b51d4b3c6e50ee4e693a41be0f67", + "edit_distance": 0.61, + "f1_score": 0.9640287769784173, + "meteor": 0.8143947236807069, + "precision": 0.9710144927536232, + "pred_md": "## Fixed Data\n\nIn addition to the data from a database file, you can define any combination of the following elements, which is called fixed data . In a record layout, fixed data is not affected by the contents of the database file to be printed.\n\nText Text with various fonts, underlined or not, color, and so on.\n\nLine and Box\n\nWith various length, width, dashed/dotted, shaded, and so on.\n\nBar Codes\n\nFor the supported bar code types, see 'Chapter 13. Design Operation' on page 227.\n\nImage\n\nStored as page segments.\n\nGraphics\n\nStored as graphics elements.\n\n## Reserved Variable Data\n\nYou can also print variable data, which is resolved during the printing of the database file member such as date, time, and record number. You can specify this data in the text data of a text element or a box element.\n\nThe label in Figure 18 on page 109 consists of variable data and fixed data as shown below.\n\n- 1. Variable data defined in record layout:\n\nText\n\nThe product name (Color TV), and the price (980).\n\nBar code\n\nThe code (11) is printed as a bar code below the price.\n\n## 2. Fixed data defined in record layout:\n\nText\n\n'Product :' and 'Price :'\n\nLine\n\nBox lines around and between the text elements.\n\nImage\n\nLogo mark at the right bottom.\n\nThe following steps describe the process to create the above sample label.\n\nChapter 8. Getting Started with Print Format Utility\n\n113", + "recall": 0.9571428571428572, + "true_md": "## Fixed Data\n\nIn addition to the data from a database file, you can define any combination of the following elements, which is called fixed data .Ina record layout, fixed data is not affected by the contents of the database file to be printed.\n\nYou can also print variable data, which is resolved during the printing of the database file member such as date, time, and record number. You can specify this data in the text data of a text element or a box element.\n\nThe label in Figure 18 on page 109 consists of variable data and fixed data as shown below.\n\nThe following steps describe the process to create the above sample label.\n\n- 1. Variable data defined in record layout:\n\n- Text The product name (Color TV), and the price (980).\n\n- Bar code The code (11) is printed as a bar code below the price.\n\n- 2. Fixed data defined in record layout:\n\n- Text ’Product :’ and ’Price :’\n\n- Line Box lines around and between the text elements.\n\n- Image Logo mark at the right bottom.\n\nChapter 8. Getting Started with Print Format Utility 113\n\n## Reserved Variable Data\n\n## Graphics\n\n## Bar Codes\n\n## Line and Box\n\nText Text with various fonts, underlined or not, color, and so on.\n\nWith various length, width, dashed/dotted, shaded, and so on.\n\nFor the supported bar code types, see “Chapter 13. Design Operation” on page 227.\n\nImage Stored as page segments.\n\nStored as graphics elements." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "6b870c3571dc3aea5da9bab1a6ed6620f11b95928e06032b3eb51158f11dff69", + "edit_distance": 0.9993328885923949, + "f1_score": 0.034482758620689655, + "meteor": 0.006216843501326261, + "precision": 0.017543859649122806, + "pred_md": ".\n\n.\n\n331\n\n.\n\n.\n\n351\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n363\n\n| Chapter 16. Getting Started with the Resource Management utility . . . . . . . . | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|-----------|-------------|---------|---------|-----------|---------------|---------------|-------------|-------|-------------|-------|-----------|-------------|-------------|-------------------------|-------------------|-------------------------|-------------------------|-----------------------|-------------------|-------------|-------------|-------------|-----------------------|---------|-----------------------------------------------------------|----|----|-------------|-----------|\n| Starting Resource Management Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Converting a PC Document to a Page Segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| Printing an Overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| Printing a Page Segment Chapter 17. Starting and Ending the Resource Management Utility . . . . . . . . . | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| Starting the Resource Management Utility . | Starting the Resource Management Utility with the STRAFPU Command Starting the Resource Management with the CVTPCDPAGS Command . | | | | | . | . . . | . | . | . . | . | . . | . . | . . . | | | . . | . . | . . . . . | . . | . . . | . . . . . | . . . . | . 323 | | | | | . | | |\n| | Starting the Resource Management Utility with the CVTPFMPAGS Command | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | . . | . . | . | . . | . . | . . | . . | 323 324 | | | | | | | |\n| Starting the Resource Management Utility with the CVTOVLPFM Command . | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | . . . | . . . | | | | | | | | | | | . | |\n| Starting the Resource Management Utility with the CVTPAGSPFM Command Ending the Resource Management Utility . | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | . | . . | . . . . | . . | . . . | . . . | 326 328 329 | | | | | | | . | |\n| | | | | | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . . | . . | . | | . | . . . | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | . | | . . | . . | . . | . . | . . . | | | . 330 | | | | | | | |\n| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | . | | . . . | . | . | . | . . | | | . | . | | | | | | | |\n| Chapter 18. Convert to Page Segment Function | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | . | . . | . | . . . | | | | | | | | | | |\n| Prompts . Options . | Chapter 19. Work with Overlays Function . . . . | . . . | . . | . . . | . . | . . . . . | . . | . . | . . . . . . | . | . | . . | . . | . . | . . . . | . | . . . | . | . . | . . . . . . | . . . | | . . | . . | . . | . 342 | | | | | |\n| Columns . | . . . . | . . . | . . . . . . | . . . . | . . | . . . | . . | . . | . . . . | . . | . . . . . . | . . . | . . | . . . | . . | . | | | . . . . . | . . . . . . | . . | | . . | . . . . | . . | | | | | | . . . |\n| 3=Copy Overlay Object 4=Delete Overlays. | . . | . . . . . | . . . | . . | . . . . | . . . . | . . | . . | . | . . . | . . | . | . | | . . . | . . | . | . . | . . . | . . . . | . . | | | . | . . | | | | | | . . |\n| 6=Print Overlay 7=Rename Overlay | | . | . . | . | . . | . | . . | . . . . . . . | . . | . | . | . . | . . | . . . . | . | . . . . | . . | . | . | . . . | . | | | | . | | | | | | . |\n| | | | . | . | . . | . | . . . | . | . . . | | . . | . . | . | . . | . . . | | | . . | . . | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| 8=Display Overlay Description 9=Convert Overlay to Physical File Member 13=Change Overlay Text | . | | | . | . | | . . | | . . . | . . | . | . . | . | . . . . . . | | . | | . | . . . | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| | | | . | . | . | . | . . | . | . | | . | | . | | . . . . . . | . . . . | . | . | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| | | | | | . | | . | | | | | . . | | . | . . | . | . . . . . | . . . | . | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| Chapter 20. Work with Page Segments Function Prompts . . Options . . | . . . . . | . | . | . | . . . | . | . | . . | . | . . | . . | | . . | . . | . . . . | . . . | . . . . . . . . . | . . . . . . . . . . . . | . . . . . . | | . . . . | | | | | | | | | | |\n| Columns . . | . . . . | . . | . . | . | . . . . | . . . | . . . . . . . | . . . . . . | . . . . . . | . . . | . . | . . | | | . . | . | . . | . . | . . . . . . . | . . . . . . | 352 . 353 . . . | | | | | | | | | | |\n| 3=Copy Page Segment 4=Delete Page Segments. 6=Print Page Segment | | . . . . | . . . | . . | . . . | . | . . . | . | . | . | . . . | . | | . . . | . . | . . . . . . | . | . . . . . . | . . . . . | . . . . . . . . . | | | . . . . | . . . . | 353 354 354 . 355 356 | | | | | | |\n| 7=Rename Page Segment | | . . . | . . | . . | . . | . . | . | . . . | . . | . . | . | | . . | . . | . . . . | . . | | | | . | . . . | | | | | | | | | | |\n| 8=Display Page Segment Description | | | . | . . . | . | | . . . . | . | . . | . | . | | | | | . . | | | | . . . . . . . . . . . | | | | | . . . . | . . . . | . 342 . 343 . 343 . 344 . 344 . 346 . 346 . 346 . 349 . . | | | | |\n| | | | | | | . . | . | . | . . | . . | . . | | | . . . . | | | . | . | | | . | . | | . . . . | | | . . 356 . . | | | | . |\n| 9=Convert Page Segment to Physical File Member 13=Change Page Segment Text . | | | | . . | . | . . . | . . | . | . . | . | . | . | | | | | . | . . | . | | . . . | | | | . | | . . | | | | |\n| | | | . | | | | . | . | | | | | | | | | | . | . | . . . . | . | . . | | | | . | . | | | | |\n| Part 6. References | | | | . | . | . | | . | . | | . | | | | | . | . | | | | . . | . | . | | . | . | 360 . . . 363 | | | | |\n| | | | . | | | | . . . | . . . . | . . | . | . | . | . | | | | | | | . | . . | . | . . . . | . . . . | . | | 357 | | | | . . |\n| Chapter 21. AFP Utilities for iSeries Commands STRAFPU (Start AFP Utilities for iSeries) Command STROVLU (Start Overlay Utility) Command . STRPFU (Start Print Format Utility) Command PRTPFDDTA (Print PFD Data) Command . CVTPCDPAGS (Convert PC Document to Page Segment) Command . CVTPFMPAGS (Convert Physical File Member to Page Segment) Command CVTOVLPFM (Convert Overlay to Physical File Member) Command. CVTPAGSPFM (Convert Page Segment to Physical File Member) Command Chapter 22. Limitations and Restrictions | | | | | | | . . . | . . . . . | . . . | | . | | . . . . . | . . . . . . | . . . . . . | . . . . . . . . . . . . | . . | | . . . . . . . . . . . . | . . . . . . . . . | . . . . . . . . . | . . . . . . | | . . . . . . | | | . 363 . 365 . 367 . 372 . 378 . 384 | . | | . . . . . . | . . . . . |\n\nContents\n\nvii\n\n315\n\n323\n\n.\n\n.\n\n341\n\n.\n\n.\n\n391", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Contents vii" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.18975642157392233, + "doc_id": "b1f3b1925c526f8930952eedc932432036405159dcb0ee45e14071a5cd730ec3", + "edit_distance": 0.7966101694915254, + "f1_score": 0.6839378238341969, + "meteor": 0.4874782103220766, + "precision": 0.8354430379746836, + "pred_md": "## EXCEL TRAINING MANUAL\n\nNow choose any cell in this table and choose Pivot Table wizard in the Data menu. Excel asks for the data source and suggests this table. Click OK.\n\nHere, we need to understand the data range. Excel suggests the table as shown in above Slide. If you expect to add data in the future, set the data range to include as many rows as you think you will ever need. Rather than A1:D50, you may want to specify $A$1:$D$500.\n\nOne more suggestion is, as shown in Graphic you can define the Destination of Pivot Table as New Sheet or Existing Sheet.\n\nPage\n\n19 /g3", + "recall": 0.5789473684210527, + "true_md": "EXCE L L TRAIN N ING MA A NUAL\n\nN as Now choose sks for the d any cell in th data source a his table and and suggests d choose Piv s this table. vot Table wiz Click OK. zard in the D Data menu. E Excel \n\nHere, we suggests expect to include a need. R $A$1:$D$ e need to u the table a o add data in as many ro Rather than A $500. understand t as shown in n the future, ows as you A1:D50, you the data ran n above Slid , set the data think you u may want nge. Excel de. If you a range to will ever to specify \n\nOne mor define th Existing re suggestion he Destinatio Sheet. n is, as show on of Pivot T wn in Graphi Table as New ic you can w Sheet or \n\nPage 19 GLYPH<g3>" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5609689900416855, + "doc_id": "fabec7540fdce90105a66ea386d3cea2c792db587734dd2501b96792b7d81b1f", + "edit_distance": 0.36666666666666664, + "f1_score": 0.8571428571428572, + "meteor": 0.8300610216986523, + "precision": 0.84, + "pred_md": "148\n\nThe following table explains each field of the Create PFD Definition display.\n\nTable 21. Create PFD Definition display fields\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.875, + "true_md": "The following table explains each field of the Create PFD Definition display.\n\nTable21.CreatePFDDefinitiondisplayfields\n\n148 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8838818993087011, + "doc_id": "bb0cb0467d68265f9b072129d28eec58c60e94a978b8512e397bb26c9a476d0a", + "edit_distance": 0.4011299435028249, + "f1_score": 0.9937106918238994, + "meteor": 0.8347708770314499, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## PFD-definition-file-name\n\nSpecify the name of an existing PFD definition file to be used. If you specify the PFD-definition-file-name and a library name, Print Format Utility searches the specified library for the PFD definition file. If you do not specify a library name, *LIBL is used.\n\nThe possible library values are:\n\n*LIBL The library list is used to locate the file.\n\n## *CURLIB\n\nThe current library for the job is used to locate the file. If no library is specified as the current library for the job, library QGPL is used.\n\nlibrary-name\n\nSpecify the library where the file is located.\n\n## PFD definition (PFDMBR)\n\nSpecifies the name of the PFD definition to be used to print a database file member.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\n## *FIRST\n\nThis is the default value. The first PFD definition in the PFD definition file is used.\n\nPFD-definition-name\n\nSpecify the name of the PFD-definition you want to use.\n\nDatabase file (FILE)\n\nSpecifies the database file and library that contain the member to be printed.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\n*PFD\n\nSpecifies that the database file and library that are specified in the PFD definition is printed.\n\nfile-name\n\nSpecify the name of an existing database file to be used. If you specify the file-name and a library name, Print Format Utility searches the specified library for the database file. If you do not specify a library name, *LIBL is used.\n\nThe possible library values are:\n\n*LIBL The library list is used to locate the file.\n\n## *CURLIB\n\nThe current library for the job is used to locate the file. If no library is specified as the current library for the job, library QGPL is used.\n\nlibrary-name\n\nSpecify the library where the file is located.\n\nChapter 21. AFP Utilities for iSeries Commands\n\n369", + "recall": 0.9875, + "true_md": "## PFD-definition-file-name\n\n## *CURLIB\n\n## library-name\n\n## *FIRST\n\n## PFD-definition-name\n\n## Database file (FILE)\n\n## file-name\n\n## *CURLIB\n\n## library-name\n\nSpecify the name of an existing PFD definition file to be used. If you specify the PFD-definition-file-name and a library name, Print Format Utility searches the specified library for the PFD definition file. If you do not specify a library name, *LIBL is used.\n\nThe possible library values are:\n\nThe current library for the job is used to locate the file. If no library is specified as the current library for the job, library QGPL is used.\n\nSpecify the library where the file is located.\n\nSpecifies the name of the PFD definition to be used to print a database file member.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\n## PFD definition (PFDMBR)\n\nThis is the default value. The first PFD definition in the PFD definition file is used.\n\nSpecify the name of the PFD-definition you want to use.\n\nSpecifies the database file and library that contain the member to be printed.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\nSpecify the name of an existing database file to be used. If you specify the file-name and a library name, Print Format Utility searches the specified library for the database file. If you do not specify a library name, *LIBL is used.\n\nThe possible library values are:\n\nThe current library for the job is used to locate the file. If no library is specified as the current library for the job, library QGPL is used.\n\nSpecify the library where the file is located.\n\n*LIBL The library list is used to locate the file.\n\n*LIBL The library list is used to locate the file.\n\n- *PFD Specifies that the database file and library that are specified in the PFD definition is printed.\n\nChapter 21. AFP Utilities for iSeries Commands 369" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9058451371361538, + "doc_id": "f08b6cae37415091d83c6868a2764a741b0e92fbb1465687bd34d52cda872418", + "edit_distance": 0.0851063829787234, + "f1_score": 0.961038961038961, + "meteor": 0.9591513332806866, + "precision": 0.9736842105263158, + "pred_md": "210\n\nWhen you press Enter, the PFD definition file will be created with the description that you gave it, and the screen will return to the Work with PFD Definition Files display on page 205.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.9487179487179487, + "true_md": "When you press Enter, the PFD definition file will be created with the description that you gave it, and the screen will return to the Work with PFD Definition Files display on page 205.\n\n210 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8764255215261028, + "doc_id": "15d2a0ec0e7ebbf43719da195597808925648aa441c9db6d142f1a6f812b370d", + "edit_distance": 0.7708703374777975, + "f1_score": 0.9690140845070422, + "meteor": 0.71082326254335, + "precision": 0.9662921348314607, + "pred_md": "Step 1. This is an optional step.\n\nYou can change the default values of the PFD specifications; such as the offset, the lines per inch (LPI), the characters per inch (CPI), the unit of measure, the DBCS SO/SI spacing, the degree of rotation, and the printer type. See 'Define PFD Specifications' on page 149 for more information.\n\nYou can change the fonts used to print text. See 'Chapter 14. Work with Fonts' on page 297 for more information.\n\nYou can specify the database file to be printed. Though this is optional, it is encouraged to specify the database file because you can easily specify field names in step 2. See 'Specify Database File' on page 158 for more information.\n\nYou can also specify fields in the database file which cause page breaks. See 'Specify Break Fields' on page 161 for more information.\n\nStep 2. Design the record layout.\n\nRepeat the following operations:\n\n- a. Position the cursor on the screen where you want to enter an element such as text, box, and so on.\n- b. Place the element in the record layout by pressing the function key assigned for the element.\n- c. Type the element specification. After entering the data, a mark is assigned for the element by the Print Format Utility. The mark is placed at the element position on the screen.\n\nSee 'Design Record Layout' on page 162 for more information.\n\nStep 3. Design the page layout.\n\nRepeat the following operations:\n\n- a. Position the cursor on the screen where you want to enter an element such as text, box, and so on.\n- b. Place the element in the page layout by pressing the function key assigned for the element.\n- c. Type the element specification. After entering the data, a mark is assigned for the element by the Print Format Utility. The mark is placed at the element position on the screen.\n\nSee 'Design Page Layout' on page 169for more information.\n\nStep 4. This is an optional step.\n\nYou can specify which records to print by specifying up to five logical conditions. See 'Specify Record Selection' on page 183 for more information.\n\nYou can change the default values of the printout specifications; the number of copies, the print quality, and the source drawer. See 'Define Printout Specifications' on page 187 for more information.\n\nYou can specify the mapping of variable data to an object name. See 'Specify Mapping Object Name' on page 191 for more information.\n\nStep 5. After defining the PFD definition, save it in your library. See 'Saving PFD Definition' on page 194 for more information.\n\n- Step 6. Print a using the PFD definition. See 'Chapter 12. Print Database File Member' on page 215 for more information.\n\nChapter 7. Introduction to Print Format Utility\n\n103", + "recall": 0.9717514124293786, + "true_md": "- Step 1. This is an optional step.\n\n- Step 2. Design the record layout.\n\n- Step 3. Design the page layout.\n\n- Step 4. This is an optional step.\n\n- Step 5. After defining the PFD definition, save it in your library. See “Saving PFD Definition” on page 194 for more information.\n\n- Step 6. Print a using the PFD definition. See “Chapter 12. Print Database File Member” on page 215 for more information.\n\nYou can change the default values of the printout specifications; the number of copies, the print quality, and the source drawer. See “Define Printout Specifications” on page 187 for more information. You can specify the mapping of variable data to an object name. See “Specify Mapping Object Name” on page 191 for more information.\n\nYou can specify which records to print by specifying up to five logical conditions. See “Specify Record Selection” on page 183 for more information.\n\nSee “Design Page Layout” on page 169for more information.\n\nRepeat the following operations:\n\nSee “Design Record Layout” on page 162 for more information.\n\nYou can also specify fields in the database file which cause page breaks. See “Specify Break Fields” on page 161 for more information.\n\nYou can specify the database file to be printed. Though this is optional, it is encouraged to specify the database file because you can easily specify field names in step 2. See “Specify Database File” on page 158 for more information.\n\nYou can change the default values of the PFD specifications; such as the offset, the lines per inch (LPI), the characters per inch (CPI), the unit of measure, the DBCS SO/SI spacing, the degree of rotation, and the printer type. See “Define PFD Specifications” on page 149 for more information. You can change the fonts used to print text. See “Chapter 14. Work with Fonts” on page 297 for more information.\n\nRepeat the following operations:\n\n- a. Position the cursor on the screen where you want to enter an element such as text, box, and so on.\n\n- b. Place the element in the record layout by pressing the function key assigned for the element.\n\n- c. Type the element specification. After entering the data, a mark is assigned for the element by the Print Format Utility. The mark is placed at the element position on the screen.\n\n- a. Position the cursor on the screen where you want to enter an element such as text, box, and so on.\n\n- b. Place the element in the page layout by pressing the function key assigned for the element.\n\n- c. Type the element specification. After entering the data, a mark is assigned for the element by the Print Format Utility. The mark is placed at the element position on the screen.\n\nChapter 7. Introduction to Print Format Utility 103" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7071067811865475, + "doc_id": "9146094fb5fd078978191a4d82d6e18423fc8e5883ebf5ba494ae15f08b73f7b", + "edit_distance": 0.2, + "f1_score": 0.8421052631578947, + "meteor": 0.8017676767676769, + "precision": 0.8888888888888888, + "pred_md": "138\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.8, + "true_md": "138 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8036273829107254, + "doc_id": "a91ddd730e5cea9f0444d43aa0e62fe4a49468363d811975d03e24cd601d24fc", + "edit_distance": 0.3867403314917127, + "f1_score": 0.9162011173184359, + "meteor": 0.8443422935137624, + "precision": 0.9647058823529412, + "pred_md": "## 9=Convert Page Segment to Physical File Member\n\nTo convert a page segment to a physical file member, do the following on the Work with Page Segments display on page 351.\n\nNote: You have to check the version and the supported structured fields of the target system's Print Services Facility.\n\nA page segment which can be used on the iSeries system cannot necessarily be used on the target system.\n\n- 1. Type 9 in the Opt column beside the name of the page segment which you want to convert to a physical file member.\n- 2. Press Enter.\n\nThe following display appears:\n\n- 1. Type data in the prompts.\n- 2. Press Enter.\n\nA Text 'description' prompt for the file appears when you specify ' Y in the Create file prompt: and press enter.\n\nChapter 20. Work with Page Segments Function\n\n357", + "recall": 0.8723404255319149, + "true_md": "## 9=Convert Page Segment to Physical File Member\n\nTo convert a page segment to a physical file member, do the following on the Work with Page Segments display on page 351.\n\nA page segment which can be used on the iSeries system cannot necessarily be used on the target system.\n\nThe following display appears:\n\n- 1. Type 9 in the Opt column beside the name of the page segment which you want to convert to a physical file member.\n\n- 2. Press Enter.\n\n- Note: You have to check the version and the supported structured fields of the target system’s Print Services Facility.\n\n- 1. Type data in the prompts.\n\n- 2. Press Enter.\n\n## Convert Page Segment to PFM\n\nF3=Exit F5=Refresh F12=Cancel\n\nA Text ’description’ $_{prompt for the file appears when you specify ’}$Y in the Create file prompt: and press enter.\n\nChapter 20. Work with Page Segments Function 357" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.1887555707706035, + "doc_id": "f53d851a470e4bd3d0c7cef417be77190ee1c677408b7c0791d4f7712e4a5239", + "edit_distance": 0.55, + "f1_score": 0.684931506849315, + "meteor": 0.5130713329508511, + "precision": 0.9615384615384616, + "pred_md": "292\n\nThe following shows an example of the list view display.\n\nThe following shows an example of the list view display.\n\nThe following table explains each field in this display.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.5319148936170213, + "true_md": "The following shows an example of the list view display.\n\nDesign Overlay Control . . Source overlay.....STATIONERY\n\n## Design Overlay Source overlay.....STATIONERY\n\nMore...\n\nF3=Exit F10=Box\n\nF4=Sort F11=Bar code\n\nF6=Text F13=Place\n\nF9=Line F24=More keys\n\nThe following table explains each field in this display.\n\n292 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8884653475339969, + "doc_id": "bc2a71ac2e67383c935a0590b64afd99f2a5a33a66ff0259e42a6cc40c9e0d78", + "edit_distance": 0.10526315789473684, + "f1_score": 0.9500000000000001, + "meteor": 0.9623712310713036, + "precision": 0.95, + "pred_md": "| |\n\n264\n\nPress the Enter, F3 or F12 key after you specify the parameters, or press the F4 key to specify more parameters.\n\nBy pressing the F4 key, the following display appears. You can specify further details of the bar code element.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.95, + "true_md": "Press the Enter, F3 or F12 key after you specify the parameters, or press the F4 key to specify more parameters.\n\nBy pressing the F4 key, the following display appears. You can specify further details of the bar code element.\n\n264 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.3643647974798006, + "doc_id": "c14ba837a72019b5046375649eac021b0e5ba0c475527b38173b7c66122a58eb", + "edit_distance": 0.6788617886178862, + "f1_score": 0.7326732673267327, + "meteor": 0.5944172231595325, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Chapter 5. Work with Source Overlays\n\nThis chapter provides detailed information about the Work with source overlays option.\n\nYou can select the following tasks from this display:\n\n- v Create a source overlay\n- v Change a source overlay\n- v Copy a source overlay\n- v Delete a source overlay\n- v Rename a source overlay\n- v Print a source overlay\n- v Create an overlay object from a source overlay\n\nNote: Before you create a source overlay, you need to create a source overlay file by selecting 1 (Create) on the Work with Source Overlay Files display.\n\nType 1 (Work with source overlays) on the IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries menu on page 139 and press Enter. The Work with Source Overlays display appears:\n\nThe following tables describe the Work with Source Overlays display.\n\n61", + "recall": 0.578125, + "true_md": "## Chapter 5. Work with Source Overlays\n\nThis chapter provides detailed information about the Work with source overlays option.\n\nYou can select the following tasks from this display:\n\nType 1 (Work with source overlays) on the IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries menu on page 139 and press Enter. The Work with Source Overlays display appears:\n\n- v Create an overlay object from a source overlay\n\n- v Print a source overlay\n\n- v Rename a source overlay\n\n- v Delete a source overlay\n\n- v Copy a source overlay\n\n- v Change a source overlay\n\n- v Create a source overlay\n\nThe following tables describe the Work with Source Overlays display.\n\n61\n\nWork with Source Overlays File . . ........ OUFILE Name, F4 for list Library........ OULIB Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB Source overlay ..... *ALL Name, generic*, *ALL Position to....... Starting characters Type options, press Enter. 1=Create 2=Change 3=Copy 4=Delete 6=Print 7=Rename 9=Create overlay Source Opt Overlay Text Changed OVL1 Overlay 1 12/12/90 OVL2 Overlay 2 OVL3 Overlay 3 12/12/90 OVL4 Overlay 4 More... Parameters or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F9=Retrieve F11=Display names only F12=Cancel\n\nNote: Before you create a source overlay, you need to create a source overlay file by selecting 1 (Create) on the Work with Source Overlay Files display." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9552819558786431, + "doc_id": "c05a47b4932d431b7daf2bec16b1fe84c73ec9a340daf398c48ae5e6849b5b98", + "edit_distance": 0.7884615384615384, + "f1_score": 0.9878787878787879, + "meteor": 0.7187654063338184, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Chapter 13. Design Operation\n\nThis chapter describes the following information about the design operation of a source overlay, a record layout, or a page layout.\n\n- v The element types that you can define in an overlay, a record layout, or a page layout\n- v How you define the elements\n- v What you can define with the elements\n\nYou can define six elements types in a source overlay, a record layout, and a page layout. In a page layout, you can also place a record layout as an element.\n\nText that is specified in an overlay, such as ABCDE , is called a text element. It can be placed at any specified position on the overlay. Text attributes may also be specified to describe text characteristics such as font selection, format, and highlighting by underline, overstrike, and/or color.\n\nA line element is any straight line that connects two points either vertically or horizontally. You can select the type of line, such as dotted, dashed, or solid, and line width.\n\n## Element Types\n\n## Text\n\n## Line\n\n## Box\n\nA box element is a rectangle that is defined by two diagonally opposite corners. It can be placed anywhere on the overlay. You can select the shade pattern inside the box, the type of box line, either dotted, dashed, or solid, and line width. You may define text inside the box. Optionally, the text may be justified inside the box.\n\n## Bar Code\n\nA bar code element is a set of bars and spaces of various widths created from data by IPDS printers or the AFP Utilities for iSeries It can be placed at any specified position on the overlay. You can specify the following: bar code data; position to be placed; type of bar code; and optional attributes such as size, color, whether or not to print a human-readable interpretation (HRI), or whether or not to include a check digit.\n\n## Page Segment\n\nA page segment is an image in the AFP resource library. When you want to place a page segment in an overlay, you must create the page segment using the Resource Management Utility or the CRTPAGSEG command. You can refer to this page segment by its name and specify a print position to define it as an element. You can include the same page segment repeatedly in an overlay, a page layout, and a record layout.\n\n227", + "recall": 0.9760479041916168, + "true_md": "## Chapter 13. Design Operation\n\n## Element Types\n\n## Text\n\n## Line\n\n## Box\n\n## Bar Code\n\n## Page Segment\n\nA page segment is an image in the AFP resource library. When you want to place a page segment in an overlay, you must create the page segment using the Resource Management Utility or the CRTPAGSEG command. You can refer to this page segment by its name and specify a print position to define it as an element. You can include the same page segment repeatedly in an overlay, a page layout, and a record layout.\n\nA bar code element is a set of bars and spaces of various widths created from data by IPDS printers or the AFP Utilities for iSeries It can be placed at any specified position on the overlay. You can specify the following: bar code data; position to be placed; type of bar code; and optional attributes such as size, color, whether or not to print a human-readable interpretation (HRI), or whether or not to include a check digit.\n\nA box element is a rectangle that is defined by two diagonally opposite corners. It can be placed anywhere on the overlay. You can select the shade pattern inside the box, the type of box line, either dotted, dashed, or solid, and line width. You may define text inside the box. Optionally, the text may be justified inside the box.\n\nA line element is any straight line that connects two points either vertically or horizontally. You can select the type of line, such as dotted, dashed, or solid, and line width.\n\nText that is specified in an overlay, such as ABCDE$_{, is called a text element. It can be}$ placed at any specified position on the overlay. Text attributes may also be specified to describe text characteristics such as font selection, format, and highlighting by underline, overstrike, and/or color.\n\nYou can define six elements types in a source overlay, a record layout, and a page layout. In a page layout, you can also place a record layout as an element.\n\nThis chapter describes the following information about the design operation of a source overlay, a record layout, or a page layout.\n\n- v The element types that you can define in an overlay, a record layout, or a page layout\n\n- v How you define the elements\n\n- v What you can define with the elements\n\n227" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6575909538628469, + "doc_id": "e5d5739947952bf361c143b358c5ae9ba0e93d888a147ee5502a2ff07b7019e2", + "edit_distance": 0.27586206896551724, + "f1_score": 0.9047619047619049, + "meteor": 0.9143216758068867, + "precision": 0.8636363636363636, + "pred_md": "The following table describes the columns in the Specify Record Selection display.\n\nTable 34. Specify Record Selection display fields\n\nChapter 10. Work with PFD Definitions\n\n185", + "recall": 0.95, + "true_md": "The following table describes the columns in the Specify Record Selection display.\n\nTable34.SpecifyRecordSelectiondisplayfields\n\nChapter 10. Work with PFD Definitions 185" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9665370956056321, + "doc_id": "f611e7d232c8f58dd3ef8a16633f8f21939d6daca3a1b60b7d4a63fce538bb1c", + "edit_distance": 0.03225806451612903, + "f1_score": 0.979591836734694, + "meteor": 0.9846477000832263, + "precision": 0.9863013698630136, + "pred_md": "248\n\nWhen you press Enter, the Overlay Utility and the Print Format Utility check the validity of the entered parameters. If no errors are detected, the text element will be defined and the Design display will be displayed.\n\nFont Selection: You can show the Select Source Overlay Font display or the Select PFD Definition Font display by positioning the cursor in the Font or the DBCS font prompt and pressing the F4 (Prompt) key.\n\nYou can select a font to use from the list. The fonts are defined in the Work with Source Overlay Fonts display and in the Work with PFD Definition Fonts display.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.972972972972973, + "true_md": "When you press Enter, the Overlay Utility and the Print Format Utility check the validity of the entered parameters. If no errors are detected, the text element will be defined and the Design display will be displayed.\n\nFont Selection: You can show the Select Source Overlay Font display or the Select PFD Definition Font display by positioning the cursor in the Font or the DBCS font prompt and pressing the F4 (Prompt) key.\n\nYou can select a font to use from the list. The fonts are defined in the Work with Source Overlay Fonts display and in the Work with PFD Definition Fonts display.\n\n248 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.32288470831118393, + "doc_id": "b1fa8c860a275de69e857c7957abcb4c9f2a1b218657aab89350e8836edd97b6", + "edit_distance": 0.7980132450331126, + "f1_score": 0.7816091954022989, + "meteor": 0.5944107983901853, + "precision": 0.6601941747572816, + "pred_md": "The following display appears when you type data in the fields and press the F10 key.\n\nPress the Enter key and the following display appears.\n\n```\nConvert PFM to Page Segment (CVTPFMPAGS) Type choices, press Enter. Page segment . . . . . . . . . . > LOGO NAME, *PRV Library . . . . . . . . . . . *CURLIB NAME, *CURLIB From file . . . . . . . . . . . > LOGOFILE NAME, *PRV Library . . . . . . . . . . . > *CURLIB NAME, *LIBL, *CURLIB From member . . . . . . . . . . > LOGOMBR NAME, *PRV, *PAGSEG Change image size . . . . . . . *NO *SAME, *NO, *YES Degree of rotation . . . . . . . *SAME 0, 90, 180, 270, *SAME Additional Parameters Authority . . . . . . . . . . . *SAME NAME, *LIBCRTAUT, *CHANGE... Text 'description' . . . . . . . *SAME Replace . . . . . . . . . . . . *YES *NO, *YES Bottom F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel F13=How to use this display F24=More keys\n```\n\nFrom this display, you can convert a member in a database file to a page segment.\n\nSee 'CVTPFMPAGS (Convert Physical File Member to Page Segment) Command' on page 378 for more information.\n\nChapter 17. Starting and Ending the Resource Management Utility\n\n327", + "recall": 0.9577464788732394, + "true_md": "The following display appears when you type data in the fields and press the F10 key.\n\nPress the Enter key and the following display appears.\n\nFrom this display, you can convert a member in a database file to a page segment.\n\nSee “CVTPFMPAGS (Convert Physical File Member to Page Segment) Command” on page 378 for more information.\n\n## Convert PFM to Page Segment (CVTPFMPAGS)\n\n## Convert PFM to Page Segment (CVTPFMPAGS)\n\nType choices, press Enter.\n\nBottom F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel F13=How to use this display F24=More keys\n\nBottom F13=How to use this display\n\nAdditional Parameters\n\nType choices, press Enter.\n\nBottom F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel F13=How to use this display F24=More keys\n\nBottom F13=How to use this display\n\nChapter 17. Starting and Ending the Resource Management Utility 327" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8485331456637543, + "doc_id": "1a0dbcebe202ea5c79700a5b600966c25affafdd2cdd679106bc8a3e164db9aa", + "edit_distance": 0.4888888888888889, + "f1_score": 0.9629629629629631, + "meteor": 0.9172836166465853, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## AIAG (Automotive Industry Action Group) Labels\n\nThe following PFD definitions for AIAG labels are provided.\n\nPFD\n\nDefinition\n\nDescription\n\nAIAG\\_B2\\_HA\n\nAIAG-B2 (Vehicle ID Number Label) Horizontal bar code with HRI above\n\nAIAG\\_B2\\_HB\n\nAIAG-B2\n\n(Vehicle ID Number Label) Horizontal bar code with HRI below\n\nAIAG\\_B3\\_SP\n\nAIAG-B3\n\nShipping/Parts Identification Number Label\n\nAIAG\\_B3\\_ML AIAG-B3 Master Label\n\nAIAG\\_B3\\_LL\n\nAIAG-B3\n\nMixed Load Label\n\nAIAG\\_B4\\_PL AIAG-B4 Part Label\n\nAIAG\\_B4\\_PT AIAG-B4\n\nPart and Traceability data on a single line\n\nAIAG\\_B4\\_PD\n\nAIAG-B4\n\nPart, Traceability data, and supplier on a separate line\n\nAIAG\\_B5\\_PM AIAG-B5\n\nPrimary Metals Identification Tag\n\nThe following database files are provided as input files for the sample PFD Definitions:\n\nFile Name\n\nRecord Format\n\nDescription\n\n## EIA (Electronic Industries Association) Labels\n\nThe following PFD definitions for EIA labels are provided:\n\nPFD\n\nDefinition Description\n\nEIA\\_SMPL\\_1 Single Order Label (Single Product/Single Package)\n\nEIA\\_SMPL\\_2 Mixed Load Label (Single Order/Multiple Product ID's)\n\nEIA\\_SMPL\\_3 Multiple Order Label (Multiple Orders/Single Product ID)\n\nEIA\\_SMPL\\_4 Multiple Load Label (Multiple Orders/Multiple Product ID's)\n\nThe following database file is provided as an input file for the sample PFD Definitions:\n\nFile Name\n\nRecord Format\n\nDescription\n\nQAFCXMPEIA\n\nSHPLBL\n\nSample database file (EIA)\n\n## AFP Utilities Tutorial PFD Definitions\n\nThe following PFD definitions are provided as part of the AFP Utilities tutorial.\n\nPFD\n\nDefinition\n\nDescription\n\nTUTORIAL\n\nEntire tutorial\n\nTUTOR10\n\nOverview - Topics covered in the tutorial\n\nTUTOR20\n\nCreate\n\nSource\n\nOverlay\n\nfile\n\nand\n\nSource\n\nOverlay\n\nTUTOR25\n\nCreate Source Overlay\n\nTUTOR30\n\nCreate the database file and add data with DFU\n\nTUTOR32\n\nCreate the database file - no data\n\nTUTOR40\n\nAdd data to the database file with DFU\n\nTUTOR50\n\nCreate PFD File, Create and Change a PFD\n\nTUTOR55\n\nCreate a PFD Definition\n\nTUTOR57\n\nChange a PFD Definition\n\nTUTOR60\n\nPrint PFD Data\n\nTUTOR70\n\nCopy a PFD Definition\n\nTUTOR80\n\nConvert a page segment to a physical file member\n\nTUTOR90\n\nConvert a physical file member to a page segment\n\nThe following database files are provided as an input files for the AFP Utilities tutorial.\n\nFile Name\n\nRecord Format\n\nDescription\n\nQAFCTUTDBF\n\nFORMAT1\n\nSAMPLE DATABASE FILE FOR TUTORIAL AFPU TUTORIAL TEXT\n\nQAFCTUTOR\n\nTUTORTXT\n\nAppendix G. Sample Overlays and Sample PFD Definitions\n\n461", + "recall": 0.9285714285714286, + "true_md": "The following PFD definitions for AIAG labels are provided.\n\nThe following database files are provided as input files for the sample PFD Definitions:\n\nThe following PFD definitions for EIA labels are provided:\n\nThe following database file is provided as an input file for the sample PFD Definitions:\n\nThe following PFD definitions are provided as part of the AFP Utilities tutorial.\n\nThe following database files are provided as an input files for the AFP Utilities tutorial.\n\n## AIAG (Automotive Industry Action Group) Labels\n\n## EIA (Electronic Industries Association) Labels\n\n## AFP Utilities Tutorial PFD Definitions\n\n461\n\nPFD Definition Description AIAG\\_B2\\_HA AIAG-B2 (Vehicle ID Number Label) Horizontal bar code with HRI above AIAG\\_B2\\_HB (Vehicle ID Number Label) Horizontal bar code with HRI below AIAG\\_B3\\_SP AIAG-B3 Shipping/Parts Identification Number Label AIAG\\_B3\\_ML Master Label AIAG\\_B3\\_LL AIAG-B3 Mixed Load Label AIAG\\_B4\\_PL AIAG-B4 Part Label AIAG\\_B4\\_PT Part and Traceability data on a single line AIAG\\_B4\\_PD AIAG-B4 Part, Traceability data, and supplier on a separate line AIAG\\_B5\\_PM AIAG-B5 Primary Metals Identification Tag\n\nFile Name Record Format Description QAFCXMPAI2 VINLBL Sample database file (AIAG\\_B2) QAFCXMPAI3 SPILBL Sample database file (AIAG\\_B3) QAFCXMPAI4 IPLBL Sample database file (AIAG\\_B4) QAFCXMPAI5 SMPILBL Sample database file (AIAG\\_B5)\n\nPFD Definition Description EIA\\_SMPL\\_1 Single Order Label (Single Product/Single Package) EIA\\_SMPL\\_2 Mixed Load Label (Single Order/Multiple Product ID's) EIA\\_SMPL\\_3 Multiple Order Label (Multiple Orders/Single Product ID) EIA\\_SMPL\\_4 Multiple Load Label (Multiple Orders/Multiple Product ID's)\n\nFile Name Record Format Description QAFCXMPEIA SHPLBL Sample database file (EIA)\n\nPFD Definition Description TUTORIAL Entire tutorial TUTOR10 Overview - Topics covered in the tutorial TUTOR20 Create Source Overlay file and Source Overlay TUTOR25 Create Source Overlay TUTOR30 Create the database file and add data with DFU TUTOR32 Create the database file - no data TUTOR40 Add data to the database file with DFU TUTOR50 Create PFD File, Create and Change a PFD TUTOR55 Create a PFD Definition TUTOR57 Change a PFD Definition TUTOR60 Print PFD Data TUTOR70 Copy a PFD Definition TUTOR80 Convert a page segment to a physical file member TUTOR90 Convert a physical file member to a page segment\n\nFile Name Record Format Description QAFCTUTDBF FORMAT1 SAMPLE DATABASE FILE FOR TUTORIAL QAFCTUTOR TUTORTXT AFPU TUTORIAL TEXT\n\nAppendix G. Sample Overlays and Sample PFD Definitions" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9067465711335265, + "doc_id": "980ecfe61d33f4ba1e47a7c2c466734f4aaf58133cb0ca250f9f1a00feae2615", + "edit_distance": 0.4405940594059406, + "f1_score": 0.9740932642487046, + "meteor": 0.819006450940952, + "precision": 0.9690721649484536, + "pred_md": "296\n\n## M Moves the element.\n\nThe key entry area appears at the lower part of the display, and you can specify the position in the Across prompt and the Down prompt to specify the new position of the element.\n\n## R Removes the element.\n\nThe removed mark (*) appears in the ID column. The remove operation does not affect the removed element or other remaining elements. In the screen view, the removed elements do not appear on the image area, and you cannot change them. However, in the list view, they appear in the image area with an asterisk in the ID column. Removed elements are not printed.\n\n- S Restores the element.\n\nThe removed mark '*', shown in the ID column, disappears. In the screen view, the restored elements appear in the image area and they can be changed.\n\nStep 3. Press Enter. (This step is needed for copy and move operations only.) The selected element is copied or moved.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.9791666666666666, + "true_md": "- M Moves the element.\n\n- R Removes the element.\n\n- S Restores the element.\n\n- Step 3. Press Enter. (This step is needed for copy and move operations only.) The selected element is copied or moved.\n\nThe removed mark (*) appears in the ID column. The remove operation does not affect the removed element or other remaining elements. In the screen view, the removed elements do not appear on the image area, and you cannot change them. However, in the list view, they appear in the image area with an asterisk in the ID column. Removed elements are not printed.\n\nThe removed mark ’*’, shown in the ID column, disappears. In the screen view, the restored elements appear in the image area and they can be changed.\n\nThe key entry area appears at the lower part of the display, and you can specify the position in the Across prompt and the Down prompt to specify the new position of the element.\n\n296 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.32041957988760367, + "doc_id": "f35e3d5398a8336c7f79a19ca5adfbce644bddc955290eb605a25ee9e4264b06", + "edit_distance": 0.6818181818181818, + "f1_score": 0.7848101265822784, + "meteor": 0.5526785642615759, + "precision": 0.9393939393939394, + "pred_md": "- 1. Type data in the prompts.\n- 2. Press Enter.\n\nThe Text 'description' prompt appears as follows when you specify ' Y ' in the Create file prompt:\n\nChapter 19. Work with Overlays Function\n\n347", + "recall": 0.6739130434782609, + "true_md": "## Convert Overlay to PFM\n\n## Convert Overlay to PFM\n\nF3=Exit F5=Refresh F12=Cancel\n\nThe Text ’description’ $_{prompt appears as follows when you specify ’}$Y ’inthe Create file prompt:\n\nF3=Exit F5=Refresh F12=Cancel\n\nChapter 19. Work with Overlays Function 347\n\n- 1. Type data in the prompts.\n\n- 2. Press Enter." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9406207641805076, + "doc_id": "c2494382d4b41cda9c8edacaf2fa28b10637a1f3afbbfbbb762edd69718f33d3", + "edit_distance": 0.8566666666666667, + "f1_score": 0.9785932721712537, + "meteor": 0.7910273024942116, + "precision": 0.9937888198757764, + "pred_md": "## EXCEL TRAINING MANUAL\n\n## 1.3.4 ENJOY POWERFUL AND IMPROVED TABLE FEATURES\n\nCreate, filter, format and expand multiple tables with a set of formulas since Microsoft excel has improved features for tables. For instance, if you want to view data in an extended table, Office Excel keeps table headers in view as you scroll.\n\n## 1.3.5 SHARE SPREADSHEETS\n\nUse Microsoft Excel to share multiple spreadsheets with co-workers. Other parties may also access the data online as it renders the spreadsheets as HTML. Additionally, you can navigate, filter, sort and input parameters, all within the Web browser.\n\nBesides its numerous benefits, Microsoft Excel also has its share of shortcoming as well. Many users claim that Office Excel is not easily shared compared to other office applications.\n\n## 2. ERROR MESSAGES (CELL REFERENCE)\n\nIf you get an error message in Excel you might not get much help from the program in finding out the cause. The articles listed here cover the cause and cures for a number of common error messages in Excel, such as #REF!, #NULL!, and #####.\n\n## 2.1 INVALID CELL REFERENCE\n\nAn invalid cell reference error message occurs when a spreadsheet formula contains incorrect cell references.\n\nIn above example, if you click on the cell that contains the #REF! error, you will see that the cell reference within the cell has been replaced with #REF!. Therefore, in order to fix this error, you need to re-enter the correct cell references into your formula.\n\nPage 7 /g3", + "recall": 0.963855421686747, + "true_md": "EXCEL TRAINING MANUAL\n\n## 2. ERROR MESSAGES (CELL REFERENCE)\n\n## 2.1 INVALID CELL REFERENCE\n\n## 1.3.5 SHARE SPREADSHEETS\n\n## 1.3.4 ENJOY POWERFUL AND IMPROVED TABLE FEATURES\n\nPage 7 GLYPH<g3>\n\nIn above example, if you click on the cell that contains the #REF! error, you will see that the cell reference within the cell has been replaced with #REF!. Therefore, in order to fix this error, you need to re-enter the correct cell references into your formula.\n\nAn invalid cell reference error message occurs when a spreadsheet formula contains incorrect cell references. \n\nIf you get an error message in Excel you might not get much help from the program in finding out the cause. The articles listed here cover the cause and cures for a number of common error messages in Excel, such as #REF!, #NULL!, and #####. \n\nCreate, filter, format and expand multiple tables with a set of formulas since Microsoft excel has improved features for tables. For instance, if you want to view data in an extended table, Office Excel keeps table headers in view as you scroll. \n\nUse Microsoft Excel to share multiple spreadsheets with co-workers. Other parties may also access the data online as it renders the spreadsheets as HTML. Additionally, you can navigate, filter, sort and input parameters, all within the Web browser. \n\nBesides its numerous benefits, Microsoft Excel also has its share of shortcoming as well. Many users claim that Office Excel is not easily shared compared to other office applications." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.10987425552983027, + "doc_id": "32b933fd29307f1941192c2fddc9b879587ae987bd2bdcc2f35d0ae2ea4c17d5", + "edit_distance": 0.7323943661971831, + "f1_score": 0.7550200803212851, + "meteor": 0.42867762196047915, + "precision": 0.9894736842105263, + "pred_md": "For other bar code types, this field is ignored. A default value is not available.\n\n## Page Segment\n\nNote: Some printers do not support IOCA image (of page segment). See IBM Printing Systems: Printer Information , (S544-5750), for detail. AFP Utilities support only IOCA function set 10.\n\nTo specify a page segment in the overlay, first move the cursor to the start position of the page segment, and press F13 (Place). The following display appears.\n\nPress the F9 key to select the page segment to be placed. Then the % mark changes to the %Snnn (where nnn is 001 through 999) and the key entry area appears at the lower part of the image area as shown in the following display.\n\nChapter 13. Design Operation\n\n273", + "recall": 0.6103896103896104, + "true_md": "For other bar code types, this field is ignored. A default value is not available.\n\nTo specify a page segment in the overlay, first move the cursor to the start position of the page segment, and press F13 (Place). The following display appears.\n\n- Note: Some printers do not support IOCA image (of page segment). See IBM Printing Systems: Printer Information , (S544–5750), for detail. AFP Utilities support only IOCA function set 10.\n\n## Page Segment\n\n## Design Overlay Source overlay.....STATIONERY\n\nColumns: 1- 74\n\nPress the F9 key to select the page segment to be placed. Then the % mark changes to the %Snnn (where nnn is 001 through 999) and the key entry area appears at the lower part of the image area as shown in the following display.\n\nColumns: 1- 74\n\n## Design Overlay Source overlay.....STATIONERY\n\nDesign Overlay Columns: 1- 74 Control . . Source overlay.....STATIONERY *...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7.... 001 002 003 004 %S003 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 More... Place Page Segment Mark . . . . . . : *S003 Measurement method....:Row/Column Position.....Across 10 Down 4 Page Segment... Name F3=Exit F4=Detail F6=Change measurement method F12=Cancel F24=More keys\n\nDesign Overlay Columns: 1- 74 Control . . Source overlay.....STATIONERY *...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7.... 001 002 003 004 % 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 More... F3=Exit F6=Place graphics F9=Place page segment F12=Cancel F24=More keys Press F6 or F9 to place graphics or page segment.\n\nChapter 13. Design Operation 273" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8058962275396973, + "doc_id": "6f14b9cb84a7c9a3b03859babcbe56fe6a6780ebe27f5c61e565271b17c033e1", + "edit_distance": 0.5555555555555556, + "f1_score": 0.927536231884058, + "meteor": 0.8064528384586837, + "precision": 0.9552238805970149, + "pred_md": "The following table describes the Confirm Delete of Page Segments display.\n\nTable 78. Confirm Delete of Page Segments display fields\n\n## 6=Print Page Segment\n\nTo print a page segment, do the following on the Work with Page Segments display on page 351.\n\n- 1. Type 6 in the Opt column beside the page segment that you want to print.\n- 2. Press Enter.\n\nThe Print Page Segment display appears:\n\nThe print page segment function allows you to print a page segment on an IPDS printer.\n\nFrom this display, you can specify the name of the output queue, the number of copies, and the print fidelity.\n\nChapter 20. Work with Page Segments Function\n\n355", + "recall": 0.9014084507042254, + "true_md": "The following table describes the Confirm Delete of Page Segments display.\n\nTable78.ConfirmDeleteofPageSegmentsdisplayfields\n\n## 6=Print Page Segment\n\nTo print a page segment, do the following on the Work with Page Segments display on page 351.\n\nThe Print Page Segment display appears:\n\nThe print page segment function allows you to print a page segment on an IPDS printer.\n\nFrom this display, you can specify the name of the output queue, the number of copies, and the print fidelity.\n\n- 1. Type 6 in the Opt column beside the page segment that you want to print.\n\n- 2. Press Enter.\n\n## Print Page Segment\n\nBottom\n\nF3=Exit F5=Refresh F12=Cancel\n\nType choices, press Enter.\n\nChapter 20. Work with Page Segments Function 355" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7920421602430725, + "doc_id": "b57821527520864bbbf181ed3fab05b5047a895271063d53717012e967cbea9a", + "edit_distance": 0.2204724409448819, + "f1_score": 0.8961038961038961, + "meteor": 0.8726015662437066, + "precision": 0.9583333333333334, + "pred_md": "Basic English Language Skils\n\n## FLASH CARDS\n\nFlash cards are pieces of paper (or card) with questions on the one side, and corresponding answers on the other side.\n\nHere is an example:\n\nfront\n\nback\n\n## Tips for using flash cards:\n\n- · Include images/visual cues on your flash cards, as this will help you to memorise the contents.\n- · When studying, shuffle your deck of flash cards regularly (to make sure that you aren't simply memorising the order of the answers).\n- · Add new flash cards to your deck as you cover new topics or learn new concepts.", + "recall": 0.8414634146341463, + "true_md": "## FLASH CARDS\n\nFlash cards are pieces of paper (or card) with questions on the one side, and corresponding answers on the other side.\n\nHere is an example:\n\n## Tips for using flash cards:\n\n- • Include images/visual cues on your flash cards, as this will help you to memorise the contents.\n\n- • When studying, shuffle your deck of flash cards regularly (to make sure that you aren’t simply memorising the order of the answers).\n\n- • Add new flash cards to your deck as you cover new topics or learn new concepts.\n\nOccupational Health and Safety\n\nback\n\nWhat does OHS stand for?\n\nfront\n\nBasic English Language Skills" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9791073720005892, + "doc_id": "a82c73cd96ec32da1a675975b0cdd1993918c80f58bf3830dc5f08d5b4ca3702", + "edit_distance": 0.0639269406392694, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9973879081167452, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "- v Overview - Topics covered in the tutorial\n- v Create Source Overlay file and Source Overlay\n- v Create Source Overlay\n- v Create the database file and add data with DFU\n- v Create the database file - no data\n- v Add data to the database file with DFU\n- v Create PFD File, Create and Change a PFD\n- v Create a PFD Definition\n- v Change a PFD Definition\n- v Print PFD Data\n- v Copy a PFD Definition\n- v Convert a page segment to a physical file member\n- v Convert a physical file member to a page segment\n\n## Ending the Print Format Utility\n\nWhen you complete the work with the Print Format Utility, press the F3 key repeatedly. If you start the Print Format Utility by using the STRAFPU command, the menu panel display appears on page 139.\n\nIf you start the Print Format Utility by using the STRPFU command, the menu panel display on page 143 appears.\n\nTo end the Print Format Utility, press the F3 key one more time. Then the screen returns to the display from which you started the Print Format Utility.\n\nChapter 9. Starting and Ending the Print Format Utility\n\n141", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "- v Overview - Topics covered in the tutorial\n\n- v Create Source Overlay file and Source Overlay\n\n- v Create Source Overlay\n\n- v Create the database file and add data with DFU\n\n- v Create the database file - no data\n\n- v Add data to the database file with DFU\n\n- v Create PFD File, Create and Change a PFD\n\n- v Create a PFD Definition\n\n- v Change a PFD Definition\n\n- v Print PFD Data\n\n- v Copy a PFD Definition\n\n- v Convert a page segment to a physical file member\n\n- v Convert a physical file member to a page segment\n\nWhen you complete the work with the Print Format Utility, press the F3 key repeatedly. If you start the Print Format Utility by using the STRAFPU command, the menu panel display appears on page 139.\n\nIf you start the Print Format Utility by using the STRPFU command, the menu panel display on page 143 appears.\n\nTo end the Print Format Utility, press the F3 key one more time. Then the screen returns to the display from which you started the Print Format Utility.\n\n## Ending the Print Format Utility\n\nChapter 9. Starting and Ending the Print Format Utility 141" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5374067696441294, + "doc_id": "748a6117bcec3e54ec3dd65b76e3e3bd9ea4dce9b0023d8c60c11c0afb7a701d", + "edit_distance": 0.6070726915520629, + "f1_score": 0.9671641791044777, + "meteor": 0.47364839614254106, + "precision": 0.9700598802395209, + "pred_md": "Basic English Language Skils\n\n## HERE ARE 15 THINGS YOU CAN DO TO IMPROVE YOUR RESULTS IN YOUR NEXT EXAM:\n\n## 1. Check that you have received the correct exam paper.\n\nYou don't want to waste precious time (and energy) by starting with the wrong paper.\n\n## 2. Read the instructions.\n\nYou don't want to answer all the questions, only to realise halfway through the last essay that you were supposed to choose only one out of the three topics for Question 3.\n\n## 3. Read through the whole question paper before you start writing, and work out how much time you will have to answer each question.\n\nAs you read through the paper, highlight key words and phrases, so that you know what to focus on in each of your answers.\n\n- 4. Read the questions carefully, to make sure that you understand what is being asked of you.\n\nYou won't get marks for providing information that, despite being cor -rect, is irrelevant to the question.\n\n- 5. Remember that you don't have to answer the questions in numerical order.\n\nJust make sure that you number your answers clearly.\n\n## 6. If you get stuck on a particular question, leave it and move on.\n\nYou can always go back to it later if you have time left over at the end of the exam.\n\n## 7. Be clear and concise in your answers.\n\nLook at the mark allocation to gauge how detailed your answers should be. Make sure that you focus on answering the question, instead of simply writing down everything that you know about the topic.\n\n## 8. Write neatly.\n\nThe person marking your paper won't have time to sit and decipher untidy handwriting.", + "recall": 0.9642857142857143, + "true_md": "## HERE ARE 15 THINGS YOU CAN DO TO IMPROVE YOUR RESULTS IN YOUR NEXT EXAM:\n\n- 1. Check that you have received the correct exam paper. You don’t want to waste precious time (and energy) by starting with \n\n- 2. Read the instructions. You don’t want to answer all the questions, only to realise halfway \n\n- 3. Read through the whole question paper before you start writing, and work out how much time you will have to answer each question. As you read through the paper, highlight key words and phrases, so \n\n- 4. Read the questions carefully, to make sure that you understand what is being asked of you. You won’t get marks for providing information that, despite being cor -\n\n- 5. Remember that you don’t have to answer the questions in numerical order. Just make sure that you number your answers clearly.\n\n- 6. If you get stuck on a particular question, leave it and move on. You can always go back to it later if you have time left over at the end \n\n- 7. Be clear and concise in your answers. Look at the mark allocation to gauge how detailed your answers should \n\n- 8. Write neatly. The person marking your paper won’t have time to sit and decipher \n\nBe clear and concise in your answers. Look at the mark allocation to gauge how detailed your answers should be. Make sure that you focus on answering the question, instead of simply writing down everything that you know about the topic.\n\nWrite neatly. The person marking your paper won’t have time to sit and decipher untidy handwriting.\n\nIf you get stuck on a particular question, leave it and move on. You can always go back to it later if you have time left over at the end of the exam.\n\nnumerical order. Just make sure that you number your answers clearly.\n\nbeing asked of you. You won’t get marks for providing information that, despite being cor - rect, is irrelevant to the question.\n\nwork out how much time you will have to answer each question. As you read through the paper, highlight key words and phrases, so that you know what to focus on in each of your answers.\n\nRead the instructions. You don’t want to answer all the questions, only to realise halfway through the last essay that you were supposed to choose only one out of the three topics for Question 3.\n\nCheck that you have received the correct exam paper. You don’t want to waste precious time (and energy) by starting with the wrong paper.\n\nBasic English Language Skills" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9106957690377001, + "doc_id": "3b2fd050765f23995a50d2e8c7fa3cf5d70122a1d1f03fc80816ea48369eec92", + "edit_distance": 0.7551867219917012, + "f1_score": 0.956204379562044, + "meteor": 0.8159220690783163, + "precision": 0.9776119402985075, + "pred_md": "## EXCEL TRAINING MANUAL\n\n## 2.2 COLUMN NOT WIDE ENOUGH\n\nSometimes referred to as 'Railroad tracks', this condition is not really an error, but it occurs frequently and it can be frustrating if you don't know what it is or how to fix it.\n\n## 2.3 DIVIDING BY ZERO\n\nA #DIV/0! error message occurs when a formula tries to divide by zero. This article covers situations when this error will occur and how to correct it.\n\nThis problem can be overcome by using the Excel IF function to identify a possible division by 0 and, in this case.\n\n## 3. CONDITIONAL FORMATTING\n\nWith conditional formatting, you can select one or more cells, and create rules (conditions) for when and how those cells are formatted. The conditions can be, based on the selected cell's contents, or based on the contents of another cell.\n\nYou can control the following formats:\n\n- ‰ Number format\n- ‰ Font, font style, and font colour (but not font size)\n- ‰ Fill colour and fill pattern\n- ‰ Border colour and border style (but not border thickness)\n\nIf the rules (conditions) that you specified are met, then the formatting is applied.\n\nPage 8 /g3", + "recall": 0.9357142857142857, + "true_md": "EXCEL TRAINING MANUAL\n\n## 2.2 COLUMN NOT WIDE ENOUGH\n\n## 2.3 DIVIDING BY ZERO\n\n## 3. CONDITIONAL FORMATTING\n\nPage 8 GLYPH<g3>\n\nIf the rules (conditions) that you specified are met, then the formatting is applied. \n\nWith conditional formatting, you can select one or more cells, and create rules (conditions) for when and how those cells are formatted. The conditions can be, based on the selected cell's contents, or based on the contents of another cell. \n\nYou can control the following formats: \n\nThis problem can be overcome by using the Excel IF function to identify a possible division by 0 and, in this case. \n\nA #DIV/0! error message occurs when a formula tries to divide by zero. This article covers situations when this error will occur and how to correct it. \n\nSometimes referred to as “Railroad tracks”, this condition is not really an error, but it occurs frequently and it can be frustrating if you don't know what it is or how to fix it. \n\n- ‰ Number format \n\n- ‰ Font, font style, and font colour (but not font size) \n\n- ‰ Fill colour and fill pattern \n\n- ‰ Border colour and border style (but not border thickness)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7071067811865475, + "doc_id": "0126fb663150da7891fc49fae1e771604ab11827848bd414dbac4719e7bf4af2", + "edit_distance": 0.2, + "f1_score": 0.8421052631578947, + "meteor": 0.8017676767676769, + "precision": 0.8888888888888888, + "pred_md": "418\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.8, + "true_md": "418 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.13610561684203307, + "doc_id": "76cdfc0491fa319e4a98a3a1536861b8cae866a482b7beb7e2afc5d42af9c3da", + "edit_distance": 0.5555555555555556, + "f1_score": 0.670886075949367, + "meteor": 0.47045594577942085, + "precision": 0.9814814814814815, + "pred_md": "## Example Actions: Define another text element.\n\n- 1. Move the cursor to position (Across : 10, Down : 4).\n- 2. Press the F6 key.\n- 3. Type Standard Stationery Sales Slip Date: / / on the Text data prompt in the key entry area.\n- 4. Press the Enter key.\n\n## The following display appears.\n\nChapter 3. Getting Started with the Overlay Utility\n\n37", + "recall": 0.5096153846153846, + "true_md": "Example Actions: Define another text element.\n\n- 1. Move the cursor to position (Across : 10, Down : 4).\n\n- 2. Press the F6 key.\n\n- 3. Type Standard Stationery Sales Slip Date: / / on the Text data prompt in the key entry area.\n\n- 4. Press the Enter key.\n\nThe following display appears.\n\nDesign Overlay Columns: 1- 74 Control . . \\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_ Source overlay.....STATIONERY *...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7.... 001 002 *T001 Stationery Co., Ltd. 003 004 *T002 rd Stationery Sales Slip Date: / / 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 More... F3=Exit F6=Text F9=Line F10=Box F11=Bar code F21=Element edit F22=Block edit F24=More keys\n\nChapter 3. Getting Started with the Overlay Utility 37" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9409175360255143, + "doc_id": "19976986de686582037d143ebaaca260261036357768e9ad9152af64673f8b0d", + "edit_distance": 0.4740932642487047, + "f1_score": 0.9735849056603774, + "meteor": 0.9337348131524786, + "precision": 0.9772727272727273, + "pred_md": "214\n\nThe PFD definition files you previously chose to delete (option 4), are listed. Confirm the list and press Enter to delete these files or press the F12 key to return to change your choice(s) on the Work with PFD Definition Files display on page 205.\n\nWhen the files are deleted, the screen returns to the Work with PFD definition files with a message in the 24th line. When two or more files are deleted, a message is sent for each file, and a plus (+) sign appears in the rightmost column of the 24th line to indicate that more messages are sent from the system. They will be displayed one after another by pressing the Page-down key after moving the cursor to the 24th line.\n\n## 7=Rename PFD Definition File\n\nTo rename a PFD definition file, do the following on the Work with PFD Definition Files display:\n\n- 1. Type 7 in the Opt column beside the PFD definition file you want to rename.\n- 2. Press Enter.\n\nThe Rename Object display appears. Type the new name of the PFD definition file in the New object prompt.\n\n## 8=Display Description of PFD Definition File\n\nTo display the description of the PFD definition file, do the following on the Work with PFD Definition Files display:\n\n- 1. Type 8 in the Opt column beside the PFD definition file for which you want to display the description.\n- 2. Press Enter.\n\nThe display object description (DSPOBJD) command is called and the description of the PFD definition file is displayed.\n\n## 12=Work with PFD Definitions\n\nTo go to the Work with PFD Definitions display, do the following on the Work with PFD Definition Files display.\n\n- 1. Type 12 in the Opt column beside the PFD definition file that contains the PFD definitions you want to work with.\n- 2. Press Enter.\n\nThe Work with PFD Definitions display appears.\n\nSee 'Chapter 10. Work with PFD Definitions' on page 143 for more information.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.9699248120300752, + "true_md": "The PFD definition files you previously chose to delete (option 4), are listed. Confirm the list and press Enter to delete these files or press the F12 key to return to change your choice(s) on the Work with PFD Definition Files display on page 205.\n\nWhen the files are deleted, the screen returns to the Work with PFD definition files with a message in the 24th line. When two or more files are deleted, a message is sent for each file, and a plus (+) sign appears in the rightmost column of the 24th line to indicate that more messages are sent from the system. They will be displayed one after another by pressing the Page-down key after moving the cursor to the 24th line.\n\n## 7=Rename PFD Definition File\n\n## 8=Display Description of PFD Definition File\n\n## 12=Work with PFD Definitions\n\n214 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\nThe Work with PFD Definitions display appears.\n\nSee “Chapter 10. Work with PFD Definitions” on page 143 for more information.\n\nTo go to the Work with PFD Definitions display, do the following on the Work with PFD Definition Files display.\n\nThe display object description (DSPOBJD) command is called and the description of the PFD definition file is displayed.\n\nTo display the description of the PFD definition file, do the following on the Work with PFD Definition Files display:\n\nThe Rename Object display appears. Type the new name of the PFD definition file in the New object prompt.\n\nTo rename a PFD definition file, do the following on the Work with PFD Definition Files display:\n\n- 1. Type 7 in the Opt column beside the PFD definition file you want to rename.\n\n- 2. Press Enter.\n\n- 1. Type 12 in the Opt column beside the PFD definition file that contains the PFD definitions you want to work with.\n\n- 2. Press Enter.\n\n- 1. Type 8 in the Opt column beside the PFD definition file for which you want to display the description.\n\n- 2. Press Enter." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9599378026776929, + "doc_id": "5737ef415d3edf175a21f03d63688a8d2fb32f77c2fe2b24b42ac13c951b91a7", + "edit_distance": 0.26865671641791045, + "f1_score": 0.9965397923875432, + "meteor": 0.9952039715989516, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Appendix G. Sample Overlays and Sample PFD Definitions\n\nSome samples of overlays and PFD definitions are shipped with the AFP Utilities for iSeries program. They are copied in the QGPL library automatically when you install the AFP Utilities for iSeries program.\n\n## Sample Overlays\n\nSome samples of overlays are provided. The overlays can be used instead of the preprinted forms for the IBM iSeries Distributors Management Accounting System (DMAS) and the Manufacturing Accounting and Production Information Control System/Database (MAPICS*/DB).\n\nYou can copy the source overlays from library QGPL, change the newly created source overlays, and create new overlays for your iSeries application programs. For example, you can include the company name in the overlay.\n\nYou should choose a source overlay file for your printer from the following list:\n\nSome sample source overlays are not contained in all source overlay files due to certain printer restrictions such as the maximum size of the overlay.\n\nNote: These samples have not been thoroughly tested under all conditions. It is your responsibility to change source overlays if necessary.\n\n## DMAS Forms\n\nThe overlays for DMAS (IBM iSeries DISTRIBUTORS MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTING SYSTEM) preprinted forms are provided. DMAS is actually made up of the following 10 program products:\n\n5728-D48 Accounts Payable\n\n5728-D42 Accounts Receivable\n\n5728-D41 Billing\n\n5728-D4X Cross Application System Support\n\n5728-D47 General Ledger\n\n5728-D43 Inventory Control\n\n5728-D46 Inventory Management\n\n5728-D45 Purchasing\n\n5728-D44 Sales Analysis\n\n5728-D49 Payroll\n\nThe following source overlays are provided:\n\n459", + "recall": 0.993103448275862, + "true_md": "## Appendix G. Sample Overlays and Sample PFD Definitions\n\n## Sample Overlays\n\nSome samples of overlays and PFD definitions are shipped with the AFP Utilities for iSeries program. They are copied in the QGPL library automatically when you install the AFP Utilities for iSeries program.\n\nSome samples of overlays are provided. The overlays can be used instead of the preprinted forms for the IBM iSeries Distributors Management Accounting System (DMAS) and the Manufacturing Accounting and Production Information Control System/Database (MAPICS*/DB).\n\nYou can copy the source overlays from library QGPL, change the newly created source overlays, and create new overlays for your iSeries application programs. For example, you can include the company name in the overlay.\n\nYou should choose a source overlay file for your printer from the following list:\n\nSome sample source overlays are not contained in all source overlay files due to certain printer restrictions such as the maximum size of the overlay.\n\nThe overlays for DMAS (IBM iSeries DISTRIBUTORS MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTING SYSTEM) preprinted forms are provided. DMAS is actually made up of the following 10 program products:\n\nThe following source overlays are provided:\n\n5728-D48 Accounts Payable 5728-D42 Accounts Receivable 5728-D41 Billing 5728-D4X Cross Application System Support 5728-D47 General Ledger 5728-D43 Inventory Control 5728-D46 Inventory Management 5728-D45 Purchasing 5728-D44 Sales Analysis 5728-D49 Payroll\n\n459\n\n## DMAS Forms\n\n- Note: These samples have not been thoroughly tested under all conditions. It is your responsibility to change source overlays if necessary." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.1276002447948199, + "doc_id": "fd16e55366a60af1da8d108f048cf48ba9a597dbae93972cb5a47d812a02ac27", + "edit_distance": 0.6587982832618026, + "f1_score": 0.7148288973384029, + "meteor": 0.38599451084887104, + "precision": 0.9894736842105263, + "pred_md": "|\n\n|\n\n|\n\n|\n\n|\n\n|\n\n|\n\nExample Action: Move the cursor to the position (Across : 35, Down : 9) of the opposite corner of the box and press the F10 key.\n\nA box is drawn in the image area and the key entry area appears on the lower part of the display.\n\nExample Action: Press the Enter key to define the box element in the record layout.\n\nThe following display appears.\n\n## Element Selection\n\nElement selection provides a way to selectively print fields within a record layout. If no conditions are specified for element selection, the element is printed each time the record layout is printed. You can specify up to five logical conditions to select elements. The print format utility compares the contents of the specified fields of each record with the specified values and prints the element only for those records for which the test results are true.\n\nChapter 8. Getting Started with Print Format Utility\n\n123", + "recall": 0.5595238095238095, + "true_md": "Example Action: Move the cursor to the position (Across : 35, Down : 9) of the opposite corner of the box and press the F10 key.\n\nA box is drawn in the image area and the key entry area appears on the lower part of the display.\n\nExample Action: Press the Enter key to define the box element in the record layout.\n\nThe following display appears.\n\nDesign Record Layout Columns: 1- 74 Control . . PFD definition.....PRODUCTLBL *...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7.... 001 *B007 ----------------------------+ 002 : : 003 : *T001 t : *T003 004 : : 005 : *T002 : *T004 . 006 : *S005 : 007 : *C006 008 : : 009 +---------------------------------+ 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 More... F3=Exit F6=Text F9=Line F10=Box F11=Bar code F21=Element edit F22=Block edit F24=More keys\n\nDesign Record Layout Columns: 1- 74 Control . . PFD definition.....PRODUCTLBL *...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7.... 001 %B007 ----------------------------+ 002 : : 003 : *T001 t : *T003 004 : : 005 : *T002 : *T004 . 006 : *S005 : 007 : *C006 008 : : 009 +---------------------------------+ 010 011 012 More... Define Box Mark . . . . . . : *B007 Measurement method....:Row/Column Start position . . Across 1 Down 1 End position...Across 35 9 F3=Exit F4=Detail F6=Change measurement method F12=Cancel F24=More keys\n\nElement selection provides a way to selectively print fields within a record layout. If no conditions are specified for element selection, the element is printed each time the record layout is printed. You can specify up to five logical conditions to select elements. The print format utility compares the contents of the specified fields of each record with the specified values and prints the element only for those records for which the test results are true.\n\nChapter 8. Getting Started with Print Format Utility 123\n\n## Element Selection" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.35323780448173697, + "doc_id": "576c33122343434255b11fa6567ac0dcb94402d9a5bacaac59abb587859d6425", + "edit_distance": 0.7031963470319634, + "f1_score": 0.8220858895705521, + "meteor": 0.4850530079821157, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Chapter 14. Work with Fonts\n\nThis chapter describes what you can specify for the fonts on the Work with Source Overlay Fonts display and on the Work with PFD Definition Fonts display.\n\nYou can specify the source overlay fonts and the PFD definition fonts in the same way. Only the display title changes depending on the fonts you work with.\n\nThe examples that follow refer to PFD Definition Fonts, and they also apply to Source Overlay Fonts.\n\nFor each element (text, bar codes with HRI, or box containing text) on the Design Overlay, Design Record Layout, or Design Page Layout screens that requires a font,\n\n297", + "recall": 0.6979166666666666, + "true_md": "## Chapter 14. Work with Fonts\n\nYou can specify the source overlay fonts and the PFD definition fonts in the same way. Only the display title changes depending on the fonts you work with.\n\nThe examples that follow refer to PFD Definition Fonts, and they also apply to Source Overlay Fonts.\n\nFor each element (text, bar codes with HRI, or box containing text) on the Design Overlay, Design Record Layout, or Design Page Layout screens that requires a font,\n\nThis chapter describes what you can specify for the fonts on the Work with Source Overlay Fonts display and on the Work with PFD Definition Fonts display.\n\nWork with Source Overlay Fonts Type options, press Enter. 2=Change 5=Display 9=Set initial font Font Opt Number Text *DEFAULT 10 CPI Courier 1 2 10 CPI Courier 3 4 10 CPI Courier 5 6 10 CPI Courier 7 8 10 CPI Courier Bottom F3=Exit F5=Refresh F12=Cancel\n\nWork with PFD Definition Fonts Type options, press Enter. 2=Change 5=Display 9=Set initial font Font Opt Number Text *DEFAULT 10 CPI Courier 1 2 10 CPI Courier 3 4 10 CPI Courier 5 6 10 CPI Courier 7 8 10 CPI Courier Bottom F3=Exit F5=Refresh F12=Cancel\n\n297" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.018885633668029145, + "doc_id": "66e45c1466a578797911fe7a0596db66274f77438a263b9ce15c151c5fa2fe8e", + "edit_distance": 0.8651026392961877, + "f1_score": 0.5812807881773399, + "meteor": 0.23295746233323902, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "You can exit from the Work with PFD Definitions display by pressing the F3 key.\n\n## Start Printing from the AFP Utilities Menu\n\nTo start printing, type 13 at the command line on the AFP Utilities menu.\n\nThe Print Database File Member display appears:\n\nThe Print Database File Member display appears:\n\nYou can show the list of PFD definition files in the specified library. Move the cursor to the File prompt, and press the F4 key.\n\nThe Select PFD Definition File display appears:\n\nChapter 12. Print Database File Member\n\n221", + "recall": 0.4097222222222222, + "true_md": "You can exit from the Work with PFD Definitions display by pressing the F3 key.\n\nThe Print Database File Member display appears:\n\nYou can show the list of PFD definition files in the specified library. Move the cursor to the File prompt, and press the F4 key.\n\nThe Select PFD Definition File display appears:\n\nChapter 12. Print Database File Member 221\n\nTo start printing, type 13 at the command line on the AFP Utilities menu.\n\n## Start Printing from the AFP Utilities Menu\n\nAFPU IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries Select one of the following: Overlay Utility 1. Work with source overlays 2. Work with source overlay files Print Format Utility 11. Work with PFD definitions 12. Work with PFD definition files 13. Print database file member 14. Print AFP Utilities tutorial Resource Management Utility 21. Convert to page segment 22. Work with overlays 23. Work with page segments Selection or command ===> 13 F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel F16=System main menu\n\nPrint Database File Member Type choices, press Enter. File . . . . .......... Name,F4forlist Library . .......... MYLIB Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB PFD definition......... Name, *FIRST, F4 for list Database file ......... QAFCPFDDTA Name, *PFD, F4 for list Library . .......... QGPL Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB Member . . . .......... QAFCPFDDTA Name, *FIRST, F4 for list Include grid.......... N Y=Yes, N=No Record selection . . ...... Ending page .......... *END 1-9999, *END Source drawer ......... *PFD 1-255, *PFD, *E1 Output bin........... *DEVD 1-65535, *DEVD Copies . . . .......... *PFD 1-255, *PFD Output queue.......... *JOB Name, *JOB Library . .......... Name,*LIBL, *CURLIB More... F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.25351710291480956, + "doc_id": "44da47a65e0b5b6479f50f162657bdea7935ab8219298c2d47ce02921a3a9e71", + "edit_distance": 0.8144796380090498, + "f1_score": 0.9541666666666667, + "meteor": 0.555866400896313, + "precision": 0.9828326180257511, + "pred_md": "54\n\n| convert (continued) | convert (continued) | convert (continued) |\n|--------------------------------------------------------------|--------------------------------------------------------------|-----------------------|\n| PC document 316 | PC document 316 | PC document 316 |\n| convert a page segment | convert a page segment | |\n| restrictions 398 convert to | restrictions 398 convert to | |\n| page segment 309 page segment (from PC | page segment 309 page segment (from PC | |\n| document) 310, 316 324, 330 | document) 310, 316 324, 330 | |\n| page segment function | page segment function | |\n| physical file member 346, 356 | physical file member 346, 356 | |\n| element 288 295 | element 288 295 | |\n| element list overlay 311 | | |\n| overlay object 343 | overlay object 343 | |\n| page segment 312 | page segment 312 | |\n| page segment function | 354 | |\n| PFD definition 198 | PFD definition 198 | |\n| PFD definition file 212 source overlay 77 | | |\n| source overlay file 92 | | |\n| copy a page segment | | |\n| 312 copy an overlay 311 | | |\n| copy PFD definition 198 copy PFD definition file | | |\n| copy source overlay 77 copy source overlay file | 212 | |\n| create element 294 | 92 | |\n| overlay 80 | overlay 80 | |\n| overlay (from a source overlay) page segment | overlay (from a source overlay) page segment | |\n| page segment (from file) page segment (from PC document) 333 | page segment (from file) page segment (from PC document) 333 | |\n| PFD definition 109, 147 | PFD definition 109, 147 | |\n| | 107, 209 | |\n| PFD definition file | | |\n| source overlay 33, 65 | source overlay 33, 65 | |\n| source overlay file 31, 89 create a PFD definition file 209 | source overlay file 31, 89 create a PFD definition file 209 | |\n| create overlay 80 | create overlay 80 | |\n| create source overlay 33 | create source overlay 33 | |\n| create source overlay file 89 | create source overlay file 89 | |\n| Create Source Overlays display CVTOVLPFM command 384 | Create Source Overlays display CVTOVLPFM command 384 | |\n| CRTFILE parameter | 387 | |\n| DTAFMT parameter 386 | 385 | |\n| FILE parameter | | |\n| | 387 | |\n| FILETEXT parameter MBR parameter 386 | | |\n| OVL parameter | 387 | |\n| 385 | | |\n| REPLACE parameter resource management utility | | |\n| | 328 | |\n| TEXT parameter 386 | | |\n| CVTPAGSPFM command | 387 | |\n| CRTFILE parameter | 390 | |\n| DTAFMT parameter FILE parameter 389 | 388 | |\n| FILETEXT parameter | | |\n| | 390 | |\n| MBR parameter | | |\n| 389 | | |\n| PAGSEG parameter | | |\n| REPLACE parameter | | |\n| | 390 | |\n| 389 | | |\n| TEXT parameter | | |\n| CVTPCDPAGS command | | |\n| AUT parameter 376 | | |\n| | 329 | |\n| resource management utility | | |\n| 388 | | |\n| 372 | | |\n\n476\n\n| CVTPCDPAGS command (continued) | CVTPCDPAGS command (continued) | CVTPCDPAGS command (continued) | CVTPCDPAGS command (continued) |\n|-------------------------------------|----------------------------------|----------------------------------|----------------------------------|\n| CHGIMGSIZE parameter 374 | CHGIMGSIZE parameter 374 | CHGIMGSIZE parameter 374 | CHGIMGSIZE parameter 374 |\n| FRMDOC parameter 374 | FRMDOC parameter 374 | FRMDOC parameter 374 | FRMDOC parameter 374 |\n| FRMFLR parameter 374 | FRMFLR parameter 374 | FRMFLR parameter 374 | FRMFLR parameter 374 |\n| IMGRTT parameter 376 | IMGRTT parameter 376 | IMGRTT parameter 376 | IMGRTT parameter 376 |\n| IMGSIZE parameter 375 | IMGSIZE parameter 375 | IMGSIZE parameter 375 | IMGSIZE parameter 375 |\n| MAPPING parameter 375 | MAPPING parameter 375 | MAPPING parameter 375 | MAPPING parameter 375 |\n| PAGSEG parameter 373 | PAGSEG parameter 373 | PAGSEG parameter 373 | PAGSEG parameter 373 |\n| REPLACE parameter | 377 | 324 | 324 |\n| TEXT parameter 377 | | | |\n| CVTPFMPAGS command | 378 | 380 | 380 |\n| FILE parameter 380 | 382 | | |\n| IMGRTT parameter IMGSIZE parameter | 381 | | |\n| MAPPING parameter MBR parameter 380 | 381 | | |\n| PAGSEG parameter | | | |\n| REPLACE parameter | 379 | | |\n| resource management utility 383 | | | 384 |\n| TEXT parameter | | | |\n\n## D\n\n68\n\n| dashed and dotted lines 391 limitations 394 | |\n|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|-------------|\n| data element measurement (overlay specifications) 68 data in record layout | |\n| database file 98 print 134, 201 select 159 | 163 |\n| database file member print 140 DBCS font 247, 261 DBCS SO/SI (overlay specifications) | |\n| specifications) 152 define bar code element box element 39 | 42 |\n| line element 38 overlay specifications PFD specifications 149 printout specifications | 66 130, 187 |\n| text element 35 define PFD specifications | 149 |\n| define printout specifications defining elements in screen view | 130, 187 |\n| defining PFD definition exit 131 420 | 229 |\n| degree of rotation bar code 267 graphic 282 | |\n| in box 259 overlay specifications PFD specifications | 67 152 |\n| text 246 degree of rotation (overlay specifications) 67 | |\n| degree of rotation (PFD specifications) 152 | |\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide\n\n| delete | | | |\n|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|----------------------------------------------|\n| overlay 311, 343 page segment 312 | overlay 311, 343 page segment 312 | overlay 311, 343 page segment 312 | overlay 311, 343 page segment 312 |\n| page segment function 354 PFD definition 200 | page segment function 354 PFD definition 200 | page segment function 354 PFD definition 200 | page segment function 354 PFD definition 200 |\n| PFD definition file 213 | PFD definition file 213 | PFD definition file 213 | PFD definition file 213 |\n| source overlay 79 | | | |\n| source overlay file | 93 312 | | |\n| delete a page segment | | Change PFD Definition Files | |\n| delete an overlay 311 delete PFD definition | 200 | 126, 169 | |\n| delete PFD definition file delete source overlay | | 213 | |\n| delete source overlay file | 79 | 93 | |\n| design | | | |\n| | 126, 169 111, 162 | | |\n| page layout record layout design display 16 | 228 235 227 | | |\n| defining elements fucntion keys design operation element type | 227 227 228 | | |\n| bar code 227 box 227 line 227 page segment record layout text 227 design overlay 73 | 162 Change Bar Code Detail display Change PFD Definition display Change PFD Definition Fonts 300 Change Source Overlay display | design page layout design record layout exit 126 display 14 display 211 Change PFD Definition Font 157 | |\n| Confirm Delete of Elements 72 344 | 301, 302, 303 | display display 53, 76 | 265 197 50, |\n| display display Elements display display 354 | Change Text Detail display | | 244, 245 |\n| Confirm Delete of Overlays Confirm Delete of Page Layout Confirm Delete of Page Segments Confirm Delete of PFD Definition | | | |", + "recall": 0.9271255060728745, + "true_md": "## D\n\n476 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\nconvert (continued) PC document 316 convert a page segment restrictions 398 convert to page segment 309 page segment (from PC document) 310, 316 page segment function 324, 330 physical file member 346, 356 copy element 288 element list 295 overlay 311 overlay object 343 page segment 312 page segment function 354 PFD definition 198 PFD definition file 212 source overlay 77 source overlay file 92 copy a page segment 312 copy an overlay 311 copy PFD definition 198 copy PFD definition file 212 copy source overlay 77 copy source overlay file 92 create element 294 overlay 80 overlay (from a source overlay) 54 page segment restrictions 397 page segment (from file) 333 page segment (from PC document) 333 PFD definition 109, 147 PFD definition file 107, 209 source overlay 33, 65 source overlay file 31, 89 create a PFD definition file 209 create overlay 80 create source overlay 33 create source overlay file 89 Create Source Overlays display 33 CVTOVLPFM command 384 CRTFILE parameter 387 DTAFMT parameter 385 FILE parameter 386 FILETEXT parameter 387 MBR parameter 386 OVL parameter 385 REPLACE parameter 387 resource management utility 328 TEXT parameter 386 CVTPAGSPFM command 387 CRTFILE parameter 390 DTAFMT parameter 388 FILE parameter 389 FILETEXT parameter 390 MBR parameter 389 PAGSEG parameter 388 REPLACE parameter 390 resource management utility 329 TEXT parameter 389 CVTPCDPAGS command 372 AUT parameter 376\n\ndelete overlay 311, 343 page segment 312 page segment function 354 PFD definition 200 PFD definition file 213 source overlay 79 source overlay file 93 delete a page segment 312 delete an overlay 311 delete PFD definition 200 delete PFD definition file 213 delete source overlay 79 delete source overlay file 93 design page layout 126, 169 record layout 111, 162 design display 16 defining elements 228 fucntion keys 235 design operation 227 element type 227 bar code 227 box 227 line 227 page segment 227 record layout 228 text 227 design overlay 73 design page layout 126, 169 design record layout 162 exit 126 display 14 Change Bar Code Detail display 265 Change PFD Definition display 197 Change PFD Definition Files display 211 Change PFD Definition Font display 301, 302, 303 Change PFD Definition Fonts display 300 Change Source Overlay display 50, 53, 76 Change Text Detail display 244, 245 Confirm Delete of Elements display 72 Confirm Delete of Overlays display 344 Confirm Delete of Page Layout Elements display 157 Confirm Delete of Page Segments display 354 Confirm Delete of PFD Definition Files display 213 Confirm Delete of PFD Definitions display 200 Confirm Delete of Record Layout Elements display 156 Confirm Delete of Source Overlay Files display 93 Confirm Delete of Source Overlays display 79 Convert Overlay to PFM (CVTOVLPFM) display 328 Convert Overlay to PFM display 347 Convert Page Segment to PFM (CVTPAGSPFM) display 329\n\ndashed and dotted lines 391 limitations 394 data element measurement (overlay specifications) 68 data in record layout 163 database file 98 print 134, 201 select 159 specify 110, 158 database file member print 140 DBCS font 247, 261 DBCS SO/SI (overlay specifications) 68 DBCS SO/SI spacing (PFD specifications) 152 define bar code element 42 box element 39 element 239 element operations 233 line element 38 overlay specifications 66 PFD specifications 149 printout specifications 130, 187 text element 35 define PFD specifications 149 define printout specifications 130, 187 defining elements in screen view 229 defining PFD definition exit 131 degree of rotation 420 bar code 267 graphic 282 in box 259 overlay specifications 67 PFD specifications 152 text 246 degree of rotation (overlay specifications) 67 degree of rotation (PFD specifications) 152\n\nCVTPCDPAGS command (continued) CHGIMGSIZE parameter 374 FRMDOC parameter 374 FRMFLR parameter 374 IMGRTT parameter 376 IMGSIZE parameter 375 MAPPING parameter 375 PAGSEG parameter 373 REPLACE parameter 377 resource management utility 324 TEXT parameter 377 CVTPFMPAGS command 378 AUT parameter 382 CHGIMGSIZE parameter 380 FILE parameter 380 IMGRTT parameter 382 IMGSIZE parameter 381 MAPPING parameter 381 MBR parameter 380 PAGSEG parameter 379 REPLACE parameter 384 resource management utility 326 TEXT parameter 383" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9928955913439304, + "doc_id": "3cb9088df293f5b5721ec21a22211244e1deea470a12ab4ce784f5da1e99dba2", + "edit_distance": 0.16837315130830488, + "f1_score": 0.9948892674616694, + "meteor": 0.9960183691455866, + "precision": 0.9965870307167235, + "pred_md": "example, Bodini or Times Roman) that contains definitions of character sets, marker sets, and pattern sets.\n\nfont character set. In AFP support, a font file that contains the raster patterns, identifiers, and descriptions of characters.\n\nfont ID. A number that identifies the character style and size for certain printers.\n\nfont resource. A resource object on the iSeries system that is required to print AFPDS documents on a printer. The three types of font resources are coded fonts, character sets, and code pages. The system-recognized identifier for the object type is *FNTRSC.\n\nform. In AFP support, a physical sheet of paper on which data is printed. Synonymous with medium, physical page, and sheet.\n\nform definition. An AFP resource object that defines the characteristics of the printed media; for example, overlays to be used, text suppression, position of page data on the form, and number and modifications of a page. The system-recognized identifier for the object type is *FORMDF.\n\nform type. A 10-character identifier, assigned by the user, that identifies each type of form used for printed output.\n\nformat. (1) A defined arrangement of such things as characters, fields, and lines, usually used for displays, printouts, files, or documents. (2) The arrangement or layout of fields in a record. (3) The arrangement or layout of data on a storage medium, such as disk, tape, or diskette.\n\nfunction. (1) Any instruction or set of related instructions that perform a specific operation.\n\nfunction key. A keyboard key that allows the user to select keyboard functions or programmer functions. Contrast with character key .\n\nGDF (Graphics Data Format). Advanced Function Printing Utilities can create an AFP resource, such as an electric overlay and the spooled file using GDF.\n\ngeneral-purpose library. The library shipped with the system that contains IBM-provided objects required for many system functions and user-created objects that are not explicitly placed in a different library when they are created. Named QGPL.\n\ngeneric. Relating to, or characteristic of, a whole group or class.\n\ngeneric name. (1) The characters common to object names that can be used to identify a group of objects. A generic name ends with an asterisk (*). For example, ORD* identifies all objects whose names begin with the\n\n470\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide\n\ncharacters ORD. (2) In the hierarchical file system, a path name that contains one or more wildcard characters.\n\ngraphic character. A character that can be displayed or printed. Contrast with control character .\n\ngraphic character set. A set of graphic characters in a code page.\n\ngraphics. (1) In Advanced Function Printing Utilities, graphics data can be placed in a source overlay, a record layout, and a page layout. (2) Pictures and illustrations. (3) Pertaining to charts, tables, and their creation.\n\ngrid. In AFP Utilities, horizontal and vertical lines printed on an AFP resource, such as an electronic overlay, to help in the design of the AFP resource.\n\nhardware. Physical equipment, rather than programs, procedures, rules, and associated information.\n\nhide function. In AFP Utilities, a function on the screen view used to display elements hidden by other elements that were specified after the hidden elements and in the same or approximate position as the hidden elements.\n\nHRI. See human readable interpretation (HRI) .\n\nhuman readable interpretation (HRI). In AFP Utilities, the characters printed above or below a bar code. These characters are read by people, not by scanners.\n\nIBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities Version 2. The IBM licensed program that provides AFP functions on the iSeries system. It is composed of the following menu-driven interactive utilities: overlay utility, print format utility, and resource management utility.\n\nIBM iSeries Manufacturing, Accounting, and Production Information Control System I (MAPICS I). The IBM licensed program that provides a set of twelve integrated applications including financial, order processing, and manufacturing packages.\n\nIBM Operating System/400 Version 2 (OS/400). Pertaining to the IBM licensed program that can be used as the operating system for the system.\n\nIBM iSeries Access. The IBM licensed program that provides system functions to an attached personal computer.\n\nidentifier. (1) The name of something. (2) A sequence of bits or characters that identifies a user, program, device, or system to another user, program, device, or system.\n\nimage. An electronic representation of an original document recorded by a scanning device.", + "recall": 0.9931972789115646, + "true_md": "example, Bodini or Times Roman) that contains definitions of character sets, marker sets, and pattern sets.\n\nfont character set. In AFP support, a font file that contains the raster patterns, identifiers, and descriptions of characters.\n\nfont ID. A number that identifies the character style and size for certain printers.\n\nfont resource. A resource object on the iSeries system that is required to print AFPDS documents on a printer. The three types of font resources are coded fonts, character sets, and code pages. The system-recognized identifier for the object type is *FNTRSC.\n\nform. In AFP support, a physical sheet of paper on which data is printed. Synonymous with medium, physical page, and sheet.\n\nform definition. An AFP resource object that defines the characteristics of the printed media; for example, overlays to be used, text suppression, position of page data on the form, and number and modifications of a page. The system-recognized identifier for the object type is *FORMDF.\n\nform type. A 10-character identifier, assigned by the user, that identifies each type of form used for printed output.\n\nformat. (1) A defined arrangement of such things as characters, fields, and lines, usually used for displays, printouts, files, or documents. (2) The arrangement or layout of fields in a record. (3) The arrangement or layout of data on a storage medium, such as disk, tape, or diskette.\n\nfunction. (1) Any instruction or set of related instructions that perform a specific operation.\n\nfunction key. A keyboard key that allows the user to select keyboard functions or programmer functions. Contrast with character key .\n\nGDF (Graphics Data Format). Advanced Function Printing Utilities can create an AFP resource, such as an electric overlay and the spooled file using GDF.\n\ngeneral-purpose library. The library shipped with the system that contains IBM-provided objects required for many system functions and user-created objects that are not explicitly placed in a different library when they are created. Named QGPL.\n\ngeneric. Relating to, or characteristic of, a whole group or class.\n\ngeneric name. (1) The characters common to object names that can be used to identify a group of objects. A generic name ends with an asterisk (*). For example, ORD* identifies all objects whose names begin with the\n\ncharacters ORD. (2) In the hierarchical file system, a path name that contains one or more wildcard characters.\n\ngraphic character. A character that can be displayed or printed. Contrast with control character .\n\ngraphic character set. A set of graphic characters in a code page.\n\ngraphics. (1) In Advanced Function Printing Utilities, graphics data can be placed in a source overlay, a record layout, and a page layout. (2) Pictures and illustrations. (3) Pertaining to charts, tables, and their creation.\n\ngrid. In AFP Utilities, horizontal and vertical lines printed on an AFP resource, such as an electronic overlay, to help in the design of the AFP resource.\n\nhardware. Physical equipment, rather than programs, procedures, rules, and associated information.\n\nhide function. In AFP Utilities, a function on the screen view used to display elements hidden by other elements that were specified after the hidden elements and in the same or approximate position as the hidden elements.\n\nHRI. See human readable interpretation (HRI) .\n\nhuman readable interpretation (HRI). In AFP Utilities, the characters printed above or below a bar code. These characters are read by people, not by scanners.\n\nIBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities Version 2. The IBM licensed program that provides AFP functions on the iSeries system. It is composed of the following menu-driven interactive utilities: overlay utility, print format utility, and resource management utility.\n\nIBM iSeries Access. The IBM licensed program that provides system functions to an attached personal computer.\n\nidentifier. (1) The name of something. (2) A sequence of bits or characters that identifies a user, program, device, or system to another user, program, device, or system.\n\nimage. An electronic representation of an original document recorded by a scanning device.\n\n470 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\nIBM iSeries Manufacturing, Accounting, and Production Information Control System I (MAPICS I). The IBM licensed program that provides a set of twelve integrated applications including financial, order processing, and manufacturing packages.\n\nIBM Operating System/400 Version 2 (OS/400). Pertaining to the IBM licensed program that can be used as the operating system for the system." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9737943687031967, + "doc_id": "e2179cc1c96dbf99ca3c28faf0eeacc1c93ba69820d2d257bbc3abaac94b9c91", + "edit_distance": 0.3989769820971867, + "f1_score": 0.9899396378269617, + "meteor": 0.9682906107773579, + "precision": 0.9879518072289156, + "pred_md": "resource. Any part of the system required by a job or task, including main storage, devices, the processing unit, programs, files, libraries, and folders.\n\nresource management utility (RMU). In AFP Utilities, an interactive tool used to maintain AFP resources.\n\nresource name. A name assigned by the system to a line, controller, or device that is connected to the system.\n\nrestore. To copy data from tape, diskette, or a save file to auxiliary storage. Contrast with save .\n\nRMU. See resource management utility (RMU) .\n\nsave. To copy specific objects, libraries, or data by transferring them from main or auxiliary storage to magnetic media such as tape, diskettes, or a save file. Contrast with restore .\n\nSBCS. See single-byte character set (SBCS) .\n\nscreen view. In AFP Utilities, the presentation of a display shown while a user is in screen edit mode. See also list view .\n\nsequence number. (1) The number of a record that identifies the record within the source member. (2) A field in a journal entry that contains a number assigned by the system. This number is initially 1 and is increased by 1 until the journal is changed or the sequence number is reset by the user.\n\nsession. The length of time that starts when a user signs on at a display station and ends when the user signs off. location.\n\nsimplex. In AFP support, pertaining to printing on only one side of the paper. Contrast with duplex .\n\nsingle-byte character set (SBCS). A character set in which each character is represented by a one-byte code. Contrast with double-byte character set .\n\nsingle-byte coded font. In AFP support, a font in which the characters are defined by a 1-byte code point. A single-byte coded font has only one coded font section. Synonymous with single-byte font. Contrast with double-byte coded font .\n\nsource overlay. In AFP Utilities, a file member that contains the definition of an overlay.\n\nspecific authority. The types of authority a user can be given to use the system resources, including object authorities and data authorities. See also object authority and data authority . Contrast with special authority .\n\nspool. The system function of putting files or jobs into disk storage for later processing or printing.\n\n474\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide\n\nspooled file. A file that holds output data waiting to be processed, such as information waiting to be printed. Also known as spooled output file .\n\nstep. To cause a computer to run one operation.\n\nstore. To put or keep data in a storage device.\n\nsummary data. The following data is called as 'summary data':\n\n- v The field value of the first record in the group.\n- v The field value of the last record in the group.\n- v The total of the field values in the group.\n- v The average of the field values in the group.\n- v The minimum field value in the group.\n- v The maximum field value in the group.\n- v The record counts of the group.\n\nThey can be printed on the following element in the page layout:\n\n- v Text data on text element\n- v Text data on box element\n\nsyntax. The rules for constructing a command or statement.\n\nsystem unit. A part of a computer that contains the processing unit, and may contain devices such as disk units and tape units.\n\ntable. An orderly arrangement of data in rows and columns that can contain numbers, text, or a combination of both. The system-recognized identifier for the object type is *TBL.\n\nuse authority. An object authority that allows the user to run a program or to display the contents of a file. Use authority combines object operational authority and read authority.\n\nvariable data. In AFP Utilities, an element in the record layout whose value is represented in the database file. Contrast with fixed data .\n\nwide-to-narrow ratio. In AFP Utilities, the ratio of the wide element dimension to the narrow element dimension of a bar code. See also element .", + "recall": 0.9919354838709677, + "true_md": "resource. Any part of the system required by a job or task, including main storage, devices, the processing unit, programs, files, libraries, and folders.\n\nresource management utility (RMU). In AFP Utilities, an interactive tool used to maintain AFP resources.\n\nresource name. A name assigned by the system to a line, controller, or device that is connected to the system.\n\nrestore. To copy data from tape, diskette, or a save file to auxiliary storage. Contrast with save .\n\nRMU. See resource management utility (RMU) .\n\nsave. To copy specific objects, libraries, or data by transferring them from main or auxiliary storage to magnetic media such as tape, diskettes, or a save file. Contrast with restore .\n\nSBCS. See single-byte character set (SBCS) .\n\nscreen view. In AFP Utilities, the presentation of a display shown while a user is in screen edit mode. See also list view .\n\nsequence number. (1) The number of a record that identifies the record within the source member. (2) A field in a journal entry that contains a number assigned by the system. This number is initially 1 and is increased by 1 until the journal is changed or the sequence number is reset by the user.\n\nsession. The length of time that starts when a user signs on at a display station and ends when the user signs off. location.\n\nsimplex. In AFP support, pertaining to printing on only one side of the paper. Contrast with duplex .\n\nsingle-byte character set (SBCS). A character set in which each character is represented by a one-byte code. Contrast with double-byte character set .\n\nsingle-byte coded font. In AFP support, a font in which the characters are defined by a 1-byte code point. A single-byte coded font has only one coded font section. Synonymous with single-byte font. Contrast with double-byte coded font .\n\nsource overlay. In AFP Utilities, a file member that contains the definition of an overlay.\n\nspecific authority. The types of authority a user can be given to use the system resources, including object authorities and data authorities. See also object authority and data authority . Contrast with special authority .\n\nspool. The system function of putting files or jobs into disk storage for later processing or printing.\n\nwide-to-narrow ratio. In AFP Utilities, the ratio of the wide element dimension to the narrow element dimension of a bar code. See also element .\n\nvariable data. In AFP Utilities, an element in the record layout whose value is represented in the database file. Contrast with fixed data .\n\nuse authority. An object authority that allows the user to run a program or to display the contents of a file. Use authority combines object operational authority and read authority.\n\ntable. An orderly arrangement of data in rows and columns that can contain numbers, text, or a combination of both. The system-recognized identifier for the object type is *TBL.\n\nsystem unit. A part of a computer that contains the processing unit, and may contain devices such as disk units and tape units.\n\nsyntax. The rules for constructing a command or statement.\n\nThey can be printed on the following element in the page layout:\n\nsummary data. The following data is called as ’summary data’:\n\nstore. To put or keep data in a storage device.\n\nstep. To cause a computer to run one operation.\n\nspooled file. A file that holds output data waiting to be processed, such as information waiting to be printed. Also known as spooled output file .\n\n- v The field value of the first record in the group.\n\n- v The field value of the last record in the group.\n\n- v The total of the field values in the group.\n\n- v The average of the field values in the group.\n\n- v The minimum field value in the group.\n\n- v The maximum field value in the group.\n\n- v The record counts of the group.\n\n- v Text data on text element\n\n- v Text data on box element\n\n474 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5520516129306315, + "doc_id": "202ea2fb137026f6bca5fc9de66545c666f409046bc6189159f2c8a2b3193c11", + "edit_distance": 0.42105263157894735, + "f1_score": 0.7586206896551724, + "meteor": 0.865816359731893, + "precision": 0.6470588235294118, + "pred_md": "Table 22. Define PFD Specifications display fields (continued)\n\nChapter 10. Work with PFD Definitions\n\n153", + "recall": 0.9166666666666666, + "true_md": "Table22.DefinePFDSpecificationsdisplayfields (continued)\n\nChapter 10. Work with PFD Definitions 153" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7071067811865475, + "doc_id": "971e18d3284714d319ea2b6dbfc6cc304673e7c76e0a6edf2e06ecc2fdf34523", + "edit_distance": 0.2, + "f1_score": 0.8421052631578947, + "meteor": 0.8017676767676769, + "precision": 0.8888888888888888, + "pred_md": "190\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.8, + "true_md": "190 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9242069833950759, + "doc_id": "277f753661e455ae1e16e8236dffd6c5439c34d5dd1ac2a50c21e0c619f1fe5c", + "edit_distance": 0.2867647058823529, + "f1_score": 0.9590643274853801, + "meteor": 0.9569436349966045, + "precision": 0.9647058823529412, + "pred_md": "Basic English Language Skils\n\n## CHAPTER 10:\n\n## LANGUAGE SKILLS AT WORK HOW TO WRITE A COVER LETTER\n\nIf you've ever applied for a job, you'll know that writing the cover letter is the most difficult part of almost any job application. Your cover letter creates the first impression, and often determines whether an employer will even look at your CV.\n\nYou need to use this opportunity to introduce yourself and your skills, and to set yourself apart from all the other candidates. You can also use this opportunity to explain any gaps in your CV, and to motivate why you are the right person for the job.\n\ntips tips tips tips tips tips tips tips tips tips tips tips tips", + "recall": 0.9534883720930233, + "true_md": "Basic English Language Skills\n\nIf you’ve ever applied for a job, you’ll know that writing the cover letter is the most difficult part of almost any job application. Your cover letter creates the first impression, and often determines whether an employer will even look at your CV.\n\nYou need to use this opportunity to introduce yourself and your skills, and to set yourself apart from all the other candidates. You can also use this opportunity to explain any gaps in your CV, and to motivate why you are the right person for the job.\n\n## CHAPTER 10:\n\n## LANGUAGE SKILLS AT WORK HOW TO WRITE A COVER LETTER\n\ntips tips tips tips tips tips tips tips tips tips tips tips tips" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.18789676275885284, + "doc_id": "6849d173f69ec152050793babf91b924e65015ce96542079a1624e5bf2395f57", + "edit_distance": 0.6721311475409836, + "f1_score": 0.49645390070921985, + "meteor": 0.4548491369730837, + "precision": 0.7, + "pred_md": "## EXCEL TRAINING MANUAL\n\n## 3.2.2 TO REMOVE CONDITIONAL FORMATTING:\n\n- ‰ Click the Conditional Formatting command.\n- ‰ Select Clear Rules.\n- ‰ Choose to clear rules from the entire worksheet or the selected cells.\n\n## 3.2.3 TO APPLY NEW FORMATTING:\n\nClick the are different rules, you can apply these rules to differentiate particular cell. Conditional Formatting command. Select New Rules from the menu. There\n\nPage\n\n10 /g3", + "recall": 0.38461538461538464, + "true_md": "EXCE L L TRAIN N ING MA A NUAL\n\n## 3.2.2 T TO REMO OVE CON NDITION NAL FORM MATTIN NG:\n\n- ‰ Click the Conditional l Formatting g command. \n\n- ‰ Select Cle ear Rules. \n\n- ‰ Choose to o clear rules from the en ntire workshe eet or the se lected cells. \n\nC ar Click the Con re different r nditional Fo rules, you ca ormatting c an apply the ommand. Se ese rules to d elect New R differentiate Rules from particular c the menu. T ell. There \n\n## 3.2.3 T TO APPLY Y NEW FO ORMATT TING:\n\nPage 10 GLYPH<g3>" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8120043249675388, + "doc_id": "08fdaa2bc52726562303176c4c638a8b1fe20f1f8ed2a610227dd8e856c19726", + "edit_distance": 0.7794117647058824, + "f1_score": 0.9411764705882353, + "meteor": 0.7955197537584795, + "precision": 0.9375, + "pred_md": "## Operation Flow\n\n26\n\nFigure 13 shows an overview of the overlay utility operation and how to create an overlay.\n\n*-------------------*\n\nFigure 13. Overview of Overlay Utility Operation\n\nFigure 13. Overview of Overlay Utility Operation\n\n## Step 1. This is an optional step.\n\nYou can change the default values of the overlay specifications. These include printer type, characters per inch (CPI), lines per inch (LPI), degree of rotation, unit of measure, default data elements measurement method, overlay size, offset, and a grid to help design the overlay. See 'Define Overlay Specifications' on page 66 for more information.\n\nYou can change the fonts used to print text. See 'Chapter 14. Work with Fonts' on page 297 for more information.\n\nStep 2. Design your overlay.\n\nRepeat the following operations:\n\n- a. Position the cursor on the screen where you want to enter an element, such as text, box, and so on.\n- b. Place an element in the overlay by pressing the function key assigned for the element.\n- c. Type the element specification. After entering the data, a mark is assigned for the element by the overlay utility. The mark is placed at the element position on the screen.\n\nSee 'Chapter 13. Design Operation' on page 227 for more information.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.9448818897637795, + "true_md": "## Operation Flow\n\nFigure 13 shows an overview of the overlay utility operation and how to create an overlay.\n\nFigure13.OverviewofOverlayUtilityOperation\n\n- Step 1. This is an optional step.\n\n- Step 2. Design your overlay.\n\n- a. Position the cursor on the screen where you want to enter an element, such as text, box, and so on.\n\n- b. Place an element in the overlay by pressing the function key assigned for the element.\n\n- c. Type the element specification. After entering the data, a mark is assigned for the element by the overlay utility. The mark is placed at the element position on the screen.\n\n26 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\nYou can change the default values of the overlay specifications. These include printer type, characters per inch (CPI), lines per inch (LPI), degree of rotation, unit of measure, default data elements measurement method, overlay size, offset, and a grid to help design the overlay. See “Define Overlay Specifications” on page 66 for more information.\n\nYou can change the fonts used to print text. See “Chapter 14. Work with Fonts” on page 297 for more information.\n\nRepeat the following operations:\n\nSee “Chapter 13. Design Operation” on page 227 for more information." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9476231022508197, + "doc_id": "ed6bf824dc60800715a76a9105aa1017f8de8f899f184c38da71d0ed669b229e", + "edit_distance": 0.5976331360946746, + "f1_score": 0.976923076923077, + "meteor": 0.9274138072560169, + "precision": 0.9769230769230769, + "pred_md": "## Specifying a Page Segment\n\nYou can specify an image in a record in the following process.\n\nExample Action: Move the cursor to the position (Across : 25, Down : 6) where you want to place the image in the display, and press the F13 key.\n\n```\nDesign Record Layout Columns: 174 Control . . PFD definition . . . . . PRODUCTLBL *...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7.... 001 002 003 *T001 t : *T003 004 005 *T002 : *T004 . 006 % 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 More... F3=Exit F6=Place graphics F9=Place page segment F12=Cancel F24=More keys Press F6 or F9 to place graphics or page segment.\n```\n\nA % appears at the cursor position, and the message prompts you to press F6 or F9 to place graphics or page segment.\n\nExample Action: Press the F9 key.\n\nThe key entry area appears on the lower part of the display.\n\n```\nDesign Record Layout Columns: 174 Control . . PFD definition . . . . . PRODUCTLBL *...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7.... 001 002 003 *T001 t : *T003 004 005 *T002 : *T004 . 006 %S005 007 008 009 010 011 012 More... Place Page Segment Mark . . . . . . : *S005 Measurement method . . . . : Row/Column Position . . . . . Across 25 Down 6 Page Segment . . . QFCLOGO Name F3=Exit F4=Detail F6=Change measurement method F12=Cancel F24=More keys\n```\n\nChapter 8. Getting Started with Print Format Utility\n\n119", + "recall": 0.9769230769230769, + "true_md": "## Specifying a Page Segment\n\nYou can specify an image in a record in the following process.\n\nExample Action: Move the cursor to the position (Across : 25, Down : 6) where you want to place the image in the display, and press the F13 key.\n\nA % appears at the cursor position, and the message prompts you to press F6 or F9 to place graphics or page segment.\n\nExample Action: Press the F9 key.\n\nThe key entry area appears on the lower part of the display.\n\nChapter 8. Getting Started with Print Format Utility 119\n\nDesign Record Layout Columns: 1- 74 Control . . PFD definition.....PRODUCTLBL *...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7.... 001 002 003 *T001 t : *T003 004 005 *T002 : *T004 . 006 %S005 007 008 009 010 011 012 More... Place Page Segment Mark . . . . . . : *S005 Measurement method....:Row/Column Position.....Across 25 Down 6 Page Segment... QFCLOGO Name F3=Exit F4=Detail F6=Change measurement method F12=Cancel F24=More keys\n\nDesign Record Layout Columns: 1- 74 Control . . PFD definition.....PRODUCTLBL *...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7.... 001 002 003 *T001 t : *T003 004 005 *T002 : *T004 . 006 % 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 More... F3=Exit F6=Place graphics F9=Place page segment F12=Cancel F24=More keys Press F6 or F9 to place graphics or page segment." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8883727184038483, + "doc_id": "945696caeaa138ce28c2972c26679418fc423ffe53dbb818f8c156f3e211846a", + "edit_distance": 0.8333333333333334, + "f1_score": 0.9846153846153847, + "meteor": 0.7590400529246164, + "precision": 0.9922480620155039, + "pred_md": "372\n\nForm definition (FORMDF)\n\nSpecifies the qualified name of the form definition to use when printing the spooled file.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\n*PFD\n\n*DEVD\n\nSpecifies that the form definition specified in the device description for the printer will be used.\n\n## *INLINE\n\nSpecifies that the Print Format Utility will create an inline form definition to be used when printing the data. The page width and length specified in the printout format definition will be placed in the created form definition for page control with continuous form printers. These values will be used when the page size control value for the printer is set to *YES. Use the Work with PSF Configurations (WRKPSFCFG) command to set the page size control value.\n\n## form-definition-name\n\nSpecifies the name of the form definition to be used.\n\nThe possible library values are:\n\n*LIBL\n\nThe library list is used to locate the form definition.\n\n*CURLIB\n\nThe current library for the job is used to locate the form definition. If no library is specified as the current library for the job, library QGPL is used.\n\nlibrary-name\n\nSpecify the library where the form definition is located.\n\n## CVTPCDPAGS (Convert PC Document to Page Segment) Command\n\nCVTPCDPAGS command allows you to convert a PC document in a folder to a page segment. The PC document must contain IMDS (Image Data Stream) format image data or Image Object Content Architecture (IOCA) function set 10 data.\n\nThe following figure shows the command syntax for the CVTPCDPAGS command.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide\n\nSpecifies that the form definition and library that are specified in the PFD definition will be used to print the member.\n\nThis is the default value.", + "recall": 0.9770992366412213, + "true_md": "## Form definition (FORMDF)\n\n## *DEVD\n\n## *INLINE\n\n## form-definition-name\n\n## *CURLIB\n\n## library-name\n\n## CVTPCDPAGS (Convert PC Document to Page Segment) Command\n\nCVTPCDPAGS command allows you to convert a PC document in a folder to a page segment. The PC document must contain IMDS (Image Data Stream) format image data or Image Object Content Architecture (IOCA) function set 10 data.\n\nThe following figure shows the command syntax for the CVTPCDPAGS command.\n\nSpecify the library where the form definition is located.\n\nThe current library for the job is used to locate the form definition. If no library is specified as the current library for the job, library QGPL is used.\n\nSpecifies the name of the form definition to be used.\n\nThe possible library values are:\n\nSpecifies that the Print Format Utility will create an inline form definition to be used when printing the data. The page width and length specified in the printout format definition will be placed in the created form definition for page control with continuous form printers. These values will be used when the page size control value for the printer is set to *YES. Use the Work with PSF Configurations (WRKPSFCFG) command to set the page size control value.\n\nSpecifies that the form definition specified in the device description for the printer will be used.\n\nThis is the default value.\n\nSpecifies the qualified name of the form definition to use when printing the spooled file.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\n- *PFD Specifies that the form definition and library that are specified in the PFD definition will be used to print the member.\n\n- *LIBL The library list is used to locate the form definition.\n\n372 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8812366045483521, + "doc_id": "82f089ba2a40c7eef892cc1e1c09a66d4925cc621117957ad7a522dd9d50505a", + "edit_distance": 0.5690072639225182, + "f1_score": 0.9694656488549619, + "meteor": 0.885697338473254, + "precision": 0.9694656488549618, + "pred_md": "386\n\nthe longest AFPDS structured field in the overlay. If the length of the existing file is smaller than the length of the longest structured field, an error message is displayed. If the length of the existing file is larger than the length of the longest structured field, padding characters are added to the end of the records. This format is for the VM or the MVS system.\n\n## *CONTINUOUS\n\nThe structured fields are filled continuously and folded. Only the last record has padding characters; the padding characters are binary 0s. Any record length of the existing file is allowed. The created record length of the file is 256 bytes. This format is for the OS/2.\n\nThis is a required parameter.\n\n## To file (FILE)\n\nSpecifies the qualified name of the physical file being used to fill the overlay data.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\n*VM\n\nSpecifies that the name OVLY38PP is used. It will be a valid file type for an overlay on the VM system.\n\n*MVS\n\nSpecifies that the name O1xxxxxx is used. The 'xxxxxx' is the first six valid characters of the name specified in the OVL parameter. It will be a valid member name for an overlay on the MVS system.\n\nfile-name\n\nSpecifies the file name to fill the overlay data.\n\nThe library list is used to locate the overlay.\n\n## *CURLIB\n\nThe current library for the job is used to locate the file. If no library is specified as the current library for the job, library QGPL is used.\n\nlibrary-name\n\nSpecify the library where the file is located.\n\nTo member (MBR)\n\nSpecifies the name of the physical file member which is filled with the overlay data.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\n*OVL Specifies the name of the overlay specified in the OVL parameter.\n\nmember-name\n\nSpecify the member name to fill the overlay data.\n\nText 'description' (TEXT)\n\nSpecifies text that briefly describes the member and its function. The description should be specified with no more than 50 characters of text and enclosed in apostrophes.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.9694656488549618, + "true_md": "the longest AFPDS structured field in the overlay. If the length of the existing file is smaller than the length of the longest structured field, an error message is displayed. If the length of the existing file is larger than the length of the longest structured field, padding characters are added to the end of the records. This format is for the VM or the MVS system.\n\nThe structured fields are filled continuously and folded. Only the last record has padding characters; the padding characters are binary 0s. Any record length of the existing file is allowed. The created record length of the file is 256 bytes. This format is for the OS/2.\n\nThis is a required parameter.\n\nSpecifies the qualified name of the physical file being used to fill the overlay data.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\nSpecifies the file name to fill the overlay data.\n\nThe library list is used to locate the overlay.\n\nThe current library for the job is used to locate the file. If no library is specified as the current library for the job, library QGPL is used.\n\nSpecify the library where the file is located.\n\nSpecifies the name of the physical file member which is filled with the overlay data.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\nSpecify the member name to fill the overlay data.\n\nSpecifies text that briefly describes the member and its function. The description should be specified with no more than 50 characters of text and enclosed in apostrophes.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\n386 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\n## *CONTINUOUS\n\n## To file (FILE)\n\n## file-name\n\n## *CURLIB\n\n## library-name\n\n## member-name\n\n## Text ’description’ (TEXT)\n\n## To member (MBR)\n\n- *OVL Specifies the name of the overlay specified in the OVL parameter.\n\n- *MVS Specifies that the name O1xxxxxx is used. The ’xxxxxx’ is the first six valid characters of the name specified in the OVL parameter. It will be a valid member name for an overlay on the MVS system.\n\n- *VM Specifies that the name OVLY38PP is used. It will be a valid file type for an overlay on the VM system." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5766567056044878, + "doc_id": "b19f6f2f2e3131bf28956c9f31c1d3c3eb41646138d29165644079b0be350dbe", + "edit_distance": 0.4703196347031963, + "f1_score": 0.7665198237885462, + "meteor": 0.807830557937963, + "precision": 0.6492537313432836, + "pred_md": "B\n\nasic English Language Skills\n\n## ADVERBS\n\nAdverbs are words that give more information about verbs. They answer questions such as: 'How?' 'Where?' 'When?' 'To what extent?'\n\nThe meeting was promptly adjourned. (How?)\n\nShe saw the dire\n\nExample:\n\n## PREPOSITIONS\n\nA preposition is used to describe the relationship between a noun (or pronoun) and another word or phrase in a sentence\n\nShe found the report on her desk.\n\nThe door is behind him.\n\nHe walked around the office.\n\nExample:\n\n## CONJUNCTIONS\n\nConjunctions are joining words. They are used to join words, phrases and clauses in a sentence. The most frequently-used conjunctions include: and, but, for, nor, or, yet.\n\nShe works in sales and marketing.\n\nHe wanted to attend the conference, but he could not find the venue.\n\nI can't remember whether he is studying bookkeeping or accounting.\n\nHe missed his bus, yet he still made it to work on time\n\nExample:\n\nTo read more about parts of speech, you can go to the following links:\n\n- · www.5minuteenglish.com/grammar.htm\n- · www.englishclub.com/grammar/parts-of-speech- table.htm\n- · www.english-grammar-revolution.com/parts-of- speech.html", + "recall": 0.9354838709677419, + "true_md": "Basic English Language Skills\n\n## ADVERBS\n\n## PREPOSITIONS\n\nAdverbs are words that give more information about verbs. They answer questions such as: “How?” “Where?” “When?” “To what extent?”\n\nThe meeting was promptly adjourned. (How?) She saw the dire Example: \n\nA preposition is used to describe the relationship between a noun (or pronoun) and another word or phrase in a sentence\n\n## CONJUNCTIONS\n\nConjunctions are joining words. They are used to join words, phrases and clauses in a sentence. The most frequently-used conjunctions include: and, but, for, nor, or, yet.\n\n- • www.5minuteenglish.com/grammar.htm\n\n- • www.englishclub.com/grammar/parts-of-speech- table.htm\n\n- • www.english-grammar-revolution.com/parts-of- speech.html\n\nTo read more about parts of speech, you can go to the following links:" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0019821756970058303, + "doc_id": "3c4c0949e9c81ac7416d09ba13a39f07f78d3edf3dec291d11f87bb00fb6078c", + "edit_distance": 0.8327645051194539, + "f1_score": 0.4761904761904763, + "meteor": 0.22954769451825324, + "precision": 0.9782608695652174, + "pred_md": "|\n\n|\n\n|\n\n|\n\nNote: The content of the Change Bar Code Detail display varies depending on the bar code type, and not all types of bar codes provide all of the following prompts on the display.\n\nPress the Roll Up (Page Down) key to see the next page of the Define Bar Code Detail display.\n\nChapter 13. Design Operation\n\n265", + "recall": 0.3146853146853147, + "true_md": "- Note: The content of the Change Bar Code Detail display varies depending on the bar code type, and not all types of bar codes provide all of the following prompts on the display.\n\nChapter 13. Design Operation 265\n\n## Define Bar Code Detail\n\n## Define Bar Code Detail\n\nMark: *C002 Measurement method: Row/Column Type choices, press Enter. Position: Across . . ........ 10 1-999 Down . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Bar code type ....... 3 1=CODE3OF9, 2=MSI, 3=UPC-A 4=UPC-E, 5=EAN-8, 6=EAN-13 7=INDUST25, 8=MATRIX25 9=INTERL25, 10=CODABAR 11=CODE128, 12=POSTNET 13=RM4SCC, 14=JPBC 15=AUSTRALIAN POSTAL Bar code data ....... 12345678901 Element . . ........ Name More... F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F6=Change measurement method F12=Cancel\n\nMark: *C002 Measurement method: Row/Column Type choices, press Enter. Character supplement .... 0 0, 2, 5 Offset: Across . . ........ Number Degree of rotation . .... 0 0, 90, 180, 270 Color . . . ........ *DEFAULT *DEFAULT, 1=Blue, 2=Red 3=Magenta, 4=Green, 5=Cyan 6=Yellow, 7=Brown, 8=Black Check digit ........ N Y=Yes, N=No HRI ............ 3 1=Below, 2=Above, 3=No HRI asterisk........ N Y=Yes, N=No HRIfont.......... *DEFAULT *DEFAULT, 1-8, F4 for list Module width........ *DEFAULT, 0.001-0.254 Element height....... *DEFAULT *DEFAULT, 0.01-22.75 Wide to narrow ratio .... *DEFAULT, 2.00-3.00 Bottom F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F6=Change measurement method F12=Cancel\n\nPress the Roll Up (Page Down) key to see the next page of the Define Bar Code Detail display." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.046610048911630064, + "doc_id": "c65dfe96c423004b505e2980271f653e4ee707028a0909e6553a7718af1a7b46", + "edit_distance": 0.9111111111111111, + "f1_score": 0.18181818181818182, + "meteor": 0.48996913580246915, + "precision": 0.1, + "pred_md": "3\n\nBasic English Language Skills\n\n4\n\nSend your registration form to the registrations office at Oxbridge Academy via one of the following channels:\n\nFax:\n\n086 262 5550\n\nPost: PO Box 12723, Die Boord, 7613 E-mail: registrar@oxbridgeacademy.co.za\n\n6", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Basic English Language Skills" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4526810222444627, + "doc_id": "79b00c659c5a5ac0be6f46c3d3bb0c68890418d864dbacbcfb8be4b62ccc3673", + "edit_distance": 0.6521739130434783, + "f1_score": 0.7741935483870969, + "meteor": 0.6511210762331839, + "precision": 0.9230769230769231, + "pred_md": "## EXCEL TRAINING MANUAL\n\n## 5.2 How to Apply:\n\nSource\n\nPage 15 /g3", + "recall": 0.6666666666666666, + "true_md": "Page 15 GLYPH<g3>\n\n## 5.2 How to Apply:\n\n## Source\n\nEXCEL TRAINING MANUAL" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.33380800216772966, + "doc_id": "a18e655747f3dc6521172c22c7747a52d4bce7d162804a3f0a6169b2cbc815aa", + "edit_distance": 0.55, + "f1_score": 0.625, + "meteor": 0.7180459639986415, + "precision": 0.5263157894736842, + "pred_md": "## Prompts\n\n144\n\nTable 18. Work with PFD Definitions prompts\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.7692307692307693, + "true_md": "## Prompts\n\n144 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\nTable18.WorkwithPFDDefinitionsprompts" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8187462076169981, + "doc_id": "e305c27c811df0b77a3a01a1b747f1963a3cb7d90e1fe32208ff8d7f9882b9d6", + "edit_distance": 0.8179347826086957, + "f1_score": 0.9947643979057591, + "meteor": 0.7134416535107392, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Image area size (IMGSIZE)\n\nSpecifies the unit of measurement, width, and length of the image to be created in the page segment.\n\nUnit of measure\n\nSpecifies the unit of measure used to specify the following two parameters.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\n*SAME\n\nSpecifies the unit of measure used when you previously created a page segment of the same name.\n\nInch is used as the unit of measure.\n\nWidth\n\nSpecifies the width of the image to be created.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\n*SAME\n\nSpecifies the value of the width used when you previously created a page segment of the same name.\n\nwidth-value\n\nSpecify the width value in the selected unit of measure.\n\nLength\n\nSpecifies the length of the image to be created.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\n*SAME\n\nSpecifies the value of the length used when you previously created a page segment of the same name.\n\nlength-value\n\nSpecify the length value in the selected unit of measure.\n\n## Mapping option (MAPPING)\n\nSpecifies how the input image is mapped to the specified size of the output image in the page segment.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\n*SAME\n\nSpecifies the mapping option used when you previously created a page segment of the same name.\n\n## *PAT (Position and trim)\n\nThe top left corner of the input image is located to the top left corner of the output image area. The image size is not changed, and any portion of the input image that falls outside of the output image size is trimmed.\n\n*STF (Scale to fit)\n\nThe center of the input image is located to the center of the output image area. The image size is changed so that the input image fits in the output image size.\n\nChapter 21. AFP Utilities for iSeries Commands\n\n375\n\n*INCH\n\n*CM\n\nCentimeter is used as the unit of measure.", + "recall": 0.9895833333333334, + "true_md": "## Image area size (IMGSIZE)\n\n## Unit of measure\n\n## *SAME\n\n## *INCH\n\n## *SAME\n\n## width-value\n\n## Length\n\n## *SAME\n\n## Mapping option (MAPPING)\n\n## *SAME\n\n## *PAT (Position and trim)\n\n## *STF (Scale to fit)\n\nChapter 21. AFP Utilities for iSeries Commands 375\n\nThe center of the input image is located to the center of the output image area. The image size is changed so that the input image fits in the output image size.\n\nThe top left corner of the input image is located to the top left corner of the output image area. The image size is not changed, and any portion of the input image that falls outside of the output image size is trimmed.\n\nSpecifies the mapping option used when you previously created a page segment of the same name.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\nSpecifies how the input image is mapped to the specified size of the output image in the page segment.\n\nSpecify the length value in the selected unit of measure.\n\n## length-value\n\nSpecifies the value of the length used when you previously created a page segment of the same name.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\nSpecifies the length of the image to be created.\n\nSpecify the width value in the selected unit of measure.\n\nSpecifies the value of the width used when you previously created a page segment of the same name.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\nInch is used as the unit of measure.\n\nSpecifies the unit of measure used when you previously created a page segment of the same name.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\nSpecifies the unit of measure used to specify the following two parameters.\n\n- *CM Centimeter is used as the unit of measure.\n\n- Width Specifies the width of the image to be created.\n\nSpecifies the unit of measurement, width, and length of the image to be created in the page segment." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.2446359146273103, + "doc_id": "02576532310190bd266d30cf93ea9da928b929608b6333dc8b1d96c11877b0d3", + "edit_distance": 0.5675675675675675, + "f1_score": 0.6771653543307087, + "meteor": 0.4247619047619048, + "precision": 0.9772727272727273, + "pred_md": "184\n\nYou can specify up to five logical conditions to select records. The Print Format Utility compares the content of the specified field of each record with the specified value, and prints only those records whose test results are true.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.5180722891566265, + "true_md": "You can specify up to five logical conditions to select records. The Print Format Utility compares the content of the specified field of each record with the specified value, and prints only those records whose test results are true.\n\n184 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\n## Specify Record Selection\n\nF3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel\n\nType choices, press the Enter key. Tests: EQ, NE, LE, GE, LT, GT, RANGE AND/OR Field Test Value (Field, number, or 'character') F4 for list F4 for list PRODCT NE 'Wrong one' AND 'Bad'" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7071067811865475, + "doc_id": "9fe0e8c57eddc40797ece171097e88b0159d5f670a0c5f618eb4d42cfc89b57d", + "edit_distance": 0.2, + "f1_score": 0.8421052631578947, + "meteor": 0.8017676767676769, + "precision": 0.8888888888888888, + "pred_md": "416\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.8, + "true_md": "416 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.845549291675303, + "doc_id": "f5a2815177d819ca7c18b85597038c1906e96c5eedd1d4a5761f0827f936526e", + "edit_distance": 0.20634920634920634, + "f1_score": 0.9590643274853801, + "meteor": 0.9373696934848226, + "precision": 0.9647058823529412, + "pred_md": "Basic English Language Skills\n\nRemember that your resignation letter will be kept on file, as it forms part of your employment record. It is always best to keep it professional, as you may need a reference from your employer later on in your career.\n\nIt is also not worth burning bridges, and damaging potentially valuable relationships, just to have your say about the organisation and your feelings toward it.\n\n## ADDITIONAL RESOURCES:\n\nClick on the following links for more tips on how to write a resignation letter, as well as to find useful templates for different types of resig -nation letters:\n\n- · jobsearch.about.com\n- · www.totaljobs.com\n- · www.careerfaqs.com.au\n- · www.sample-resignation-letters.com", + "recall": 0.9534883720930233, + "true_md": "Remember that your resignation letter will be kept on file, as it forms part of your employment record. It is always best to keep it profession- al, as you may need a reference from your employer later on in your career.\n\nIt is also not worth burning bridges, and damaging potentially valuable relationships, just to have your say about the organisation and your feelings toward it.\n\nClick on the following links for more tips on how to write a resignation letter, as well as to find useful templates for different types of resig - nation letters:\n\n- • jobsearch.about.com\n\n- • www.totaljobs.com\n\n- • www.careerfaqs.com.au\n\n- • www.sample-resignation-letters.com\n\n## ADDITIONAL RESOURCES:\n\nBasic English Language Skills" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "95b299c4eb16104eb22e7a90dfdb77ebb38efeb0f6ab9fe52b67d7818d0e49d3", + "edit_distance": 0.7692307692307693, + "f1_score": 0.38805970149253727, + "meteor": 0.35794542536115576, + "precision": 0.5416666666666666, + "pred_md": "## EXCEL TRAINING MANUAL\n\n## 6.1.2 COUNTA\n\n=COUNTA(VALUE1,VALUE2,…)\n\n## 6.1.3 COUNTBLANK\n\n=COUNTBLANK(RANGE)\n\n## 6.1.4 COUNTIF\n\n=COUNTIF(RANGE,CRITERIA)\n\nPage\n\n17 /g3", + "recall": 0.3023255813953488, + "true_md": "EXCE L L TRAIN N ING MA\n\n## 6.1.2 C COUNTA A\n\n## 6.1.3 C COUNTBL LANK\n\n## 6.1.4 C COUNTIF F\n\n- =C COUNTA(VA ALUE1,VAL LUE2,…) \n\n- =C COUNTBLA NK(RANGE E) \n\n- =C COUNTIF(RA ANGE,CRIT TERIA)\n\nPage 17 GLYPH<g3>" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7071067811865475, + "doc_id": "05363f5d75d3b9d5e4ecf15743a4a6fb763e42106efe8deafef589d733dc848f", + "edit_distance": 0.2, + "f1_score": 0.8421052631578947, + "meteor": 0.8017676767676769, + "precision": 0.8888888888888888, + "pred_md": "x\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.8, + "true_md": "x AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8560363977976185, + "doc_id": "f71c987bb977e98fc5b77d7b5b1a834768f8c5bf1213f8226cf340efe07775d8", + "edit_distance": 0.7777777777777778, + "f1_score": 0.9886792452830188, + "meteor": 0.7981327362306294, + "precision": 0.9924242424242424, + "pred_md": "370\n\n## Member (MBR)\n\nSpecifies the name of the member to be printed.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\n*FIRST\n\nThis is the default value. The first member in the database file is printed.\n\nmember-name\n\nSpecify the name of the member you want to print.\n\n## Include grid (GRID)\n\nSpecifies whether a grid is included in the printout or not. A grid consists of horizontal lines and vertical lines, and the distance between horizontal lines and that between vertical lines are specified in the PFD specifications.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\n*NO\n\nThis is the default value. A grid is not included in the printout.\n\n*YES\n\nA grid is included in the printout.\n\n## Record selection (RCDSLT)\n\nSpecifies whether the records are selected according to the selection conditions specified in the PFD definition or not.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\n*YES\n\n*NO\n\nType *YES if you want to select and print only those records that match the selection conditions specified in the PFD definition.\n\nAll records are printed if no conditions are specified in the PFD definition.\n\nType *NO if you want to print all records regardless of the selection conditions specified in the PFD definition.\n\n## Ending page (ENDPAGE)\n\nSpecifies whether printing should stop at a certain page or continue until all records are processed.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\n*END Specifies to print until all records are processed.\n\npage-number\n\nSpecify the last page number to be printed. Print Format Utility stops printing when the last page specified by this parameter is printed or all records have been processed.\n\nThe possible value range is 1 - 9999.\n\n## Source drawer (DRAWER)\n\nSpecifies the source drawer used when single-cut sheets are fed into the printer. The possible values are:\n\n*PFD\n\n*E1\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide\n\nThe value specified in the printout specification is used. *PFD is the default.\n\nEnvelopes are fed from the envelope drawer on the sheet-feed paper handler.", + "recall": 0.9849624060150376, + "true_md": "## Member (MBR)\n\n## *FIRST\n\n## member-name\n\n## Include grid (GRID)\n\n## Record selection (RCDSLT)\n\n## Ending page (ENDPAGE)\n\n## page-number\n\n## Source drawer (DRAWER)\n\n370 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\n- *PFD The value specified in the printout specification is used. *PFD is the default.\n\n- *E1 Envelopes are fed from the envelope drawer on the sheet-feed paper handler.\n\n- *END Specifies to print until all records are processed.\n\n- *NO Type *NO if you want to print all records regardless of the selection conditions specified in the PFD definition.\n\n- *YES Type *YES if you want to select and print only those records that match the selection conditions specified in the PFD definition.\n\n- *NO This is the default value. A grid is not included in the printout.\n\n- *YES A grid is included in the printout.\n\nSpecifies the name of the member to be printed.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\nThis is the default value. The first member in the database file is printed.\n\nSpecify the name of the member you want to print.\n\nSpecifies whether a grid is included in the printout or not. A grid consists of horizontal lines and vertical lines, and the distance between horizontal lines and that between vertical lines are specified in the PFD specifications.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\nSpecifies whether the records are selected according to the selection conditions specified in the PFD definition or not.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\nAll records are printed if no conditions are specified in the PFD definition.\n\nSpecifies whether printing should stop at a certain page or continue until all records are processed.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\nSpecify the last page number to be printed. Print Format Utility stops printing when the last page specified by this parameter is printed or all records have been processed.\n\nThe possible value range is 1 - 9999.\n\nSpecifies the source drawer used when single-cut sheets are fed into the printer. The possible values are:" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8201199441708009, + "doc_id": "7cf7348752b504544a266a75e0ecc7bb43525ac52c1505319f573153eca2a874", + "edit_distance": 0.8734939759036144, + "f1_score": 0.938388625592417, + "meteor": 0.8219877307715967, + "precision": 0.9428571428571428, + "pred_md": "Basic English Language Skils\n\n## CHAPTER 6:\n\n## LEARN HOW TO SUMMARISE YOUR STUDY MATERIAL\n\nTo be successful in your studies, you need to learn how to create meaningful summaries of your course material. This is especially important if you are a distance learning student (www.oxbridgeacademy. co.za/distance-learning/), as you won't have a teacher or lecturer to point out key concepts, or to give you tips about the types of questions you can expect in the exams.\n\n## SUMMARISING YOUR WORK GIVES YOU AN OPPORTUNITY TO:\n\n- · Organise your study material into a structure that makes sense to you.\n- · Arrange your study material into a format that suits your learning style.\n- · Create memory aids for yourself.\n- · Identify key ideas and concepts.\n- · Focus on what's important.\n- · Prepare for exams more easily.\n\nDeveloped for Oxbridge Academy", + "recall": 0.9339622641509434, + "true_md": "## CHAPTER 6:\n\n## LEARN HOW TO SUMMARISE YOUR STUDY MATERIAL\n\nBasic English Language Skills\n\n## SUMMARISING YOUR WORK GIVES YOU AN OPPORTUNITY TO:\n\n- • Organise your study material into astructure that makes sense to you.\n\n- • Arrange your study material into a format that suits your learning style.\n\n- • Create memory aids for yourself.\n\n- • Identify key ideas and concepts.\n\n- • Focus on what’s important.\n\n- • Prepare for exams more easily.\n\nTo be successful in your studies, you need to learn how to create meaningful summaries of your course material. This is especially important if you are a distance learning student (www.oxbridgeacademy. co.za/distance-learning/), as you won’t have a teacher or lecturer to point out key concepts, or to give you tips about the types of questions you can expect in the exams.\n\nDeveloped for Oxbridge Academy" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.024570384780201533, + "doc_id": "4ba4a916e7f901be5bbcc2249de277eed0f1e6e4dfc41b1ae148dbd6d2583c1f", + "edit_distance": 0.7849462365591398, + "f1_score": 0.6333333333333333, + "meteor": 0.2658390791089181, + "precision": 0.9827586206896551, + "pred_md": "40\n\n## Example Actions:\n\n- 1. To specify the opposite corner of the box, press the Page Down (Roll Up) key two times.\n- 2. Move the cursor to position (Across : 60, Down : 26) to define the opposite corner of the box and press the F10 key.\n\n## The key entry area appears on the display.\n\nExample Action: Press the Enter key to define the box element in the source overlay.\n\n## The following display appears.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.4672131147540984, + "true_md": "## Example Actions:\n\n- 1. To specify the opposite corner of the box, press the Page Down (Roll Up) key two times.\n\n- 2. Move the cursor to position (Across : 60, Down : 26) to define the opposite corner of the box and press the F10 key.\n\nExample Action: Press the Enter key to define the box element in the source overlay.\n\nThe following display appears.\n\nThe key entry area appears on the display.\n\n## Design Overlay Source overlay.....STATIONERY\n\nColumns: 1- 74\n\nDesign Overlay Columns: 1- 74 Control . . \\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_ Source overlay.....STATIONERY *...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7.... 017 : : 018 019 : : 020 021 : : 022 023 : : 024 025 : : 026 +------------------------------------------------------+ 027 028 More... Define Box Mark......:*B004 Measurement method....:Row/Column Start position . . Across 5 Down 7 End position . . . Across 60 26 F3=Exit F4=Detail F6=Change measurement method F12=Cancel F24=More keys\n\nDesign Overlay Columns: 1- 74 Control . . \\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_ Source overlay.....STATIONERY *...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7.... 017 : : 018 019 : : 020 021 : : 022 023 : : 024 025 : : 026 +------------------------------------------------------+ 027 028 029 030 031 032 033 More... F3=Exit F6=Text F9=Line F10=Box F11=Bar code F21=Element edit F22=Block edit F24=More keys\n\n## Design Overlay Source overlay.....STATIONERY\n\nColumns: 1- 74\n\n40 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9530730654564602, + "doc_id": "be626e1957ca3dc63ab01780ab0c1bc1a141a36e814c27233a4de3f039670d72", + "edit_distance": 0.697986577181208, + "f1_score": 0.9848942598187312, + "meteor": 0.7918233461097355, + "precision": 0.9878787878787879, + "pred_md": "228\n\n## Graphics\n\nYou can include graphics data (GDF format) that resides in a physical file member or a PC document in a folder. You can refer to the graphics element by its file name and member name or by its folder and document name and specify a print position and the size to define it by two diagonally opposite corners as an element.\n\n## Record Layout\n\nA record layout is a function of a PFD definition. You can define the above elements in a record using the Print Format Utility and can treat the set of these elements as one record layout. In a page layout, a record layout is defined as an element.\n\n## Defining Elements on the Design Display\n\nYou can define elements on the following three displays:\n\n- v The Design Overlay display\n\nThis display allows you to design an overlay that contains text elements, line elements, box elements, bar code elements, page segments, and graphics elements.\n\nTo go to the Design Overlay display, do the following:\n\n- 1. On any display with a command line, type STRAFPU and press Enter.\n- 2. On the Advanced Function Printing Utilities menu, select option 1 (Work with source overlays) and press Enter.\n- 3. The Work with Source Overlays display shows the list of source overlays in a source overlay file. If you want to use another source overlay file or library, type the name for the Library prompt and the File prompt in the upper part of the display, and press Enter.\n- 4. On the Work with Source Overlays display, do one of the following:\n- -To create a new source overlay, type 1 (Create) in the Opt column and a new source overlay name in the Source overlay column on the first line in the list and press Enter to create a new source overlay.\n- -To change an existing source overlay, type 2 (Change) in the Opt column and a source overlay name for the Source overlay column in the first line in the list or type 2 in the Opt column beside the source overlay you want to change in the list, and press Enter.\n- 5. On the Create Source Overlays display or Change Source Overlay display, type 1 (Select) beside the Design Overlay option in the action list, and press Enter.\n- 6. The Design Overlay display appears.\n- v The Design Record Layout display\n- This display allows you to design a record layout which is a function of a PFD definition. The record layout contains text elements, line elements, box elements, bar code elements, page segments, and graphics elements. The text elements, box elements, bar code elements, page segments, and graphics can be fixed data or variable data (contain field names from a database file).\n- v The Design Page Layout display\n\nThis display allows you to design a page layout which is a function of a PFD definition. The page layout contains text elements, line elements, box elements, bar code elements, page segments, graphics elements, and a record layout.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.9819277108433735, + "true_md": "## Graphics\n\n## Record Layout\n\n## Defining Elements on the Design Display\n\n- v The Design Page Layout display\n\n- v The Design Record Layout display\n\n- 6. The Design Overlay display appears.\n\n- 5. On the Create Source Overlays display or Change Source Overlay display, type 1 (Select) beside the Design Overlay option in the action list, and press Enter.\n\n- – To change an existing source overlay, type 2 (Change) in the Opt column and a source overlay name for the Source overlay column in the first line in the list or type 2 in the Opt column beside the source overlay you want to change in the list, and press Enter.\n\n- – To create a new source overlay, type 1 (Create) in the Opt column and a new source overlay name in the Source overlay column on the first line in the list and press Enter to create a new source overlay.\n\n- 4. On the Work with Source Overlays display, do one of the following:\n\n- 3. The Work with Source Overlays display shows the list of source overlays in a source overlay file. If you want to use another source overlay file or library, type the name for the Library prompt and the File prompt in the upper part of the display, and press Enter.\n\n- 2. On the Advanced Function Printing Utilities menu, select option 1 (Work with source overlays) and press Enter.\n\n- 1. On any display with a command line, type STRAFPU and press Enter.\n\n- v The Design Overlay display\n\nThis display allows you to design an overlay that contains text elements, line elements, box elements, bar code elements, page segments, and graphics elements.\n\nTo go to the Design Overlay display, do the following:\n\nYou can define elements on the following three displays:\n\nA record layout is a function of a PFD definition. You can define the above elements in a record using the Print Format Utility and can treat the set of these elements as one record layout. In a page layout, a record layout is defined as an element.\n\nYou can include graphics data (GDF format) that resides in a physical file member or a PC document in a folder. You can refer to the graphics element by its file name and member name or by its folder and document name and specify a print position and the size to define it by two diagonally opposite corners as an element.\n\nThis display allows you to design a record layout which is a function of a PFD definition. The record layout contains text elements, line elements, box elements, bar code elements, page segments, and graphics elements. The text elements, box elements, bar code elements, page segments, and graphics can be fixed data or variable data (contain field names from a database file).\n\nThis display allows you to design a page layout which is a function of a PFD definition. The page layout contains text elements, line elements, box elements, bar code elements, page segments, graphics elements, and a record layout.\n\n228 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7516249827841501, + "doc_id": "bc7ddaae9bc7bf526ce99b48cadc338da66b78870cd853bf5edb7e9da3798174", + "edit_distance": 0.8221476510067114, + "f1_score": 0.9632107023411371, + "meteor": 0.7494531478467402, + "precision": 0.9795918367346939, + "pred_md": "## Payroll\n\n- · Pay salaries on time\n- · Make necessary deductions\n- · Calculate overtime\n\nBasic English Language Skills\n\n## The benefits of using mind maps include the following:\n\n- · They help you to see how the different bits of information fit into the bigger picture.\n- · They help you to understand the relationships between concepts.\n- · They help you to memorise information more quickly (by engaging both hemispheres of your brain).\n\n## Tips for making mind maps:\n\n- · Use different colours to distinguish between concepts.\n- · Use key words and phrases, instead of writing in full sentences.\n- · Include images/drawings that are relevant to the topic(s).\n- · Use arrows to show how different concepts are related.\n\n## BULLET POINTS OR LISTS\n\nIf you find that you memorise things more easily when they are in list form, then it might be a good idea to use bullet points when summarising your work.\n\nUsing bullet points can help you to understand (and memorise) your work more easily, as it requires you to:\n\n- · Identify the key points that you want to include in your lists.\n- · Come up with a logical structure for your lists.\n- · Categorise information into relevant lists.\n\nHere is an example:\n\n## HR Manager's Duties\n\n## Contracts\n\n## Training\n\n- · Draft employment contracts\n- · Ensure safekeeping of employment contracts\n\nDeveloped for Oxbridge Academy\n\n- · Establish staff training needs\n- · Establish skills gaps\n- · Take responsibility for succession planning", + "recall": 0.9473684210526315, + "true_md": "If you find that you memorise things more easily when they are in list form, then it might be a good idea to use bullet points when sum- marising your work.\n\nUsing bullet points can help you to understand (and memorise) your work more easily, as it requires you to:\n\nHere is an example:\n\n- • Use different colours to distinguish between concepts.\n\n- • Use key words and phrases, instead of writing in full sentences.\n\n- • Include images/drawings that are relevant to the topic(s).\n\n- • Use arrows to show how different concepts are related.\n\n- • Identify the key points that you want to include in your lists.\n\n- • Come up with a logical structure for your lists.\n\n- • Categorise information into relevant lists.\n\n- • They help you to see how the different bits of information fit into the bigger picture.\n\n- • They help you to understand the relationships between concepts.\n\n- • They help you to memorise information more quickly (by engaging both hemispheres of your brain).\n\nBasic English Language Skills\n\n## $^{ }$BULLET POINTS OR LISTS\n\n## HR Manager’s Duties\n\n## Payroll\n\n## Contracts\n\n## Training\n\n- • Establish staff training needs\n\n- • Establish skills gaps\n\n- • Take responsibility for succession planning\n\n- • Draft employment contracts\n\n- • Ensure safekeeping of employment contracts\n\n- • Pay salaries on time\n\n- • Make necessary deductions\n\n- • Calculate overtime\n\nDeveloped for Oxbridge Academy\n\n## The benefits of using mind maps include the following:\n\n## Tips for making mind maps:" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "22637c3f1c32debfc8fc8de655e0903efafca4fd39de674d6ceaf2d3d45288c0", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9976851851851852, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Chapter 13. Design Operation\n\n261", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Chapter 13. Design Operation 261" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6131544043143671, + "doc_id": "759e2b412f0511b41d617be5d6c71062044a2277f51b750926f9165eb25b1bc4", + "edit_distance": 0.36363636363636365, + "f1_score": 0.9189189189189189, + "meteor": 0.8242777630532732, + "precision": 0.8947368421052632, + "pred_md": "## Appendix C. Rotation of Graphics\n\nYou can specify the rotation of a graphics in a graphics element.\n\nFigure 50. Rotation of graphics\n\nFigure 50. Rotation of graphics\n\n437", + "recall": 0.9444444444444444, + "true_md": "## Appendix C. Rotation of Graphics\n\nYou can specify the rotation of a graphics in a graphics element.\n\nFigure50.Rotationofgraphics\n\n437" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "bfc7c17da74755d83803c1035f9cbd938aa6208ac81e57ca06c90e87773059a2", + "edit_distance": 0.9983642311886587, + "f1_score": 0.06818181818181818, + "meteor": 0.013535781544256123, + "precision": 0.036585365853658534, + "pred_md": "| | | Select Record Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|------------------------------------------------------------|-----|-----|-------|-----------|-----|-----|-----|-------|-----|-------|-------|---------|-------|-----|-------|---------------|-----------------------|-------------------|-----------|-----------|---------|-----|---------------|---------------|\n| . . . . . . . . . . . Specify Break Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| Design Record Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | . 161 . . 162 | |\n| Data in Record Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | . | | | . | | | |\n| Numeric Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | . . | | | . . | . . . . | . . | . | 163 167 | | | |\n| Design Page Layout . . . . Repetition of the Record in the Page. | | | . | . . | | . . . . . | . . | | . | . . . | . . | . . | . | . . . | . . . | . | . . | . . . . . . . | . . . . . . . . . . . | . . . . . . . . . | . 169 172 | | | | | |\n| Specify Record Selection. . . . | | | | . | . . . | . . | . . | . . | . | . | . | | . . . | . . . | | . | . . . | . . . | . . . . . . | . . . | 183 187 | | | | | |\n| | | | | | . . | . . | . | . | | | . | . | . | | . | | . | | . . . . | . . . | . | | | | | |\n| Define Printout Specifications . Specify Mapping Object Name | | | . . | . | . . | . . . | . . | . . | . . | . | | . . . | . . | . . . . | | . . | | | . . . . . | . . . . | . . . . | . . . . . | . | . . | . | 191 . 194 197 |\n| Saving PFD Definition . . . . . . . . . 2=Change PFD Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| . . . | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| 3=Copy PFD Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 4=Delete PFD Definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 6=Print PFD Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 7=Rename PFD Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 9=Print Database File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| 201 Chapter 11. Work with PFD Definition Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| Prompts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| | Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| Showing a PFD Definition File List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Selecting a PFD Definition File from a List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| 1=Create PFD Definition File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| 2=Change PFD Definition File . | . | | . | . | . | . . | . . | | . | . | . | | . | | . | . | . . | . . | . . . | . . . | . | | . | | . . | 211 |\n\n96\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide\n\n.\n\n.\n\n203\n\n.\n\n.\n\n215", + "recall": 0.5, + "true_md": "96 AFPUtilitiesforiSeries:User’sGuide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9042669694697199, + "doc_id": "52f12604768e99a5beaa42b4099c31658c0629f967ae0252471bb7f76a69e5ae", + "edit_distance": 0.07333333333333333, + "f1_score": 0.9506172839506173, + "meteor": 0.9409564784801117, + "precision": 0.9625, + "pred_md": "274\n\nThe following table explains each field in this display.\n\nPress Enter, the F3, or F12 key after you specify the parameters, or press the F4 key to specify more parameters.\n\nBy pressing the F4 key, the following display appears. You can enter the page segment name in the following display and complete the operation, or obtain the list of page segments by pressing the F4 key in the Page segment field.\n\nNote:\n\nThe Overlay Utility and the Print Format Utility do not verify whether the page segment you specified exists in the resource library or not because the page segment does not need to exist at this time. See 'Page Segment' on page 392 and 'Page Segment' on page 396 for more information.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.9390243902439024, + "true_md": "The following table explains each field in this display.\n\nPress Enter, the F3, or F12 key after you specify the parameters, or press the F4 key to specify more parameters.\n\nBy pressing the F4 key, the following display appears. You can enter the page segment name in the following display and complete the operation, or obtain the list of page segments by pressing the F4 key in the Page segment field.\n\n- Note: The Overlay Utility and the Print Format Utility do not verify whether the page segment you specified exists in the resource library or not because the page segment does not need to exist at this time. See “Page Segment” on page 392 and “Page Segment” on page 396 for more information.\n\n274 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8673142954926949, + "doc_id": "e0cef23214d8d8ca1f999b54861a75933c9e1234cf45b39188627b6a8c76eadf", + "edit_distance": 0.13333333333333333, + "f1_score": 0.9189189189189189, + "meteor": 0.968339200907959, + "precision": 0.8717948717948718, + "pred_md": "Table 38. Copy PFD Definition display fields (continued)\n\nChange the PFD definition name to PFDNEW2.\n\nWhen you press the Enter key, the PFD definition is copied. When the copy is completed, the screen returns to the Work with PFD definitions display on page 143.\n\nChapter 10. Work with PFD Definitions\n\n199", + "recall": 0.9714285714285714, + "true_md": "Table38.CopyPFDDefinitiondisplayfields (continued)\n\nChange the PFD definition name to PFDNEW2.\n\nWhen you press the Enter key, the PFD definition is copied. When the copy is completed, the screen returns to the Work with PFD definitions display on page 143.\n\nChapter 10. Work with PFD Definitions 199" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4175207285048997, + "doc_id": "b286783f55a2634560796498869bea8883c5c5543f314a845e0d96ffb2341d6d", + "edit_distance": 0.6728395061728395, + "f1_score": 0.8099173553719009, + "meteor": 0.723895648263126, + "precision": 0.7777777777777778, + "pred_md": "216\n\n## The Print Database File Member display appears:\n\nFile\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n. . . . . . . :\n\nPFDFILE\n\nLibrary\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n:\n\nMYLIB\n\nPFD definition .\n\n. . . . . . . :\n\nPRODUCTLBL\n\nForm definition\n\n. .\n\n.\n\n. .\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n*PFD\n\nName, *PFD, *DEVD, *INLINE\n\nLibrary\n\n. .\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n*LIBL\n\nName, *LIBL, *CURLIB\n\nFrom this display, you can specify how to print a database file member. You can specify:\n\n- v Which database file to print\n- v Whether you use record selection\n- v When you end printing at a certain page\n- v Which output queue to use\n- v How many copies to print\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.8448275862068966, + "true_md": "The Print Database File Member display appears:\n\nFrom this display, you can specify how to print a database file member. You can specify:\n\nF3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel\n\nBottom\n\nF3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel\n\nMore...\n\n## Print Database File Member\n\n## Print Database File Member\n\n- v Which database file to print\n\n- v Whether you use record selection\n\n- v When you end printing at a certain page\n\n- v Which output queue to use\n\n- v How many copies to print\n\n216 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8660658567024042, + "doc_id": "cb0c82ff4ffd18ec3232006b76255bf6e7cdbbb70afc74bbf8d4c88c13959346", + "edit_distance": 0.3439153439153439, + "f1_score": 0.9625000000000001, + "meteor": 0.8200999691725018, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## 3=Copy a Source Overlay\n\nTo copy a source overlay, do the following on the Work with Source Overlays display on page 61.\n\n- 1. Type a 3 in the Opt column beside the source overlay you want to copy.\n- 2. Press Enter.\n\nThe Copy Source Overlay display appears:\n\nUsing the Copy Source Overlay display, you can copy the source overlay to a source overlay in the same or different file or library.\n\nWhen invoked, the Copy Source Overlay function displays a screen showing the From File name, the From Library name and the name of the From Source Overlay. It also displays the same From File name, From Library name and Source Overlay name for the receiving File name, Library name and Source Overlay name.\n\nIn order for the copy request to work correctly, one of the values displayed in the Prompt screen must be unique.\n\nChapter 5. Work with Source Overlays\n\n77", + "recall": 0.927710843373494, + "true_md": "## 3=Copy a Source Overlay\n\nTo copy a source overlay, do the following on the Work with Source Overlays display on page 61.\n\nThe Copy Source Overlay display appears:\n\nUsing the Copy Source Overlay display, you can copy the source overlay to a source overlay in the same or different file or library.\n\nWhen invoked, the Copy Source Overlay function displays a screen showing the From File name, the From Library name and the name of the From Source Overlay. It also displays the same From File name, From Library name and Source Overlay name for the receiving File name, Library name and Source Overlay name.\n\nIn order for the copy request to work correctly, one of the values displayed in the Prompt screen must be unique.\n\nChapter 5. Work with Source Overlays 77\n\n## Copy Source Overlay\n\nType choices, press Enter.\n\nF3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel\n\n- 1. Type a 3 in the Opt column beside the source overlay you want to copy.\n\n- 2. Press Enter." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.1774373230048958, + "doc_id": "7cf8fe2e41fa1649a2aa9a6aad7692c6ad4c2ca9cdf9ee2c578d26eff60f8bed", + "edit_distance": 0.3712121212121212, + "f1_score": 0.7757009345794392, + "meteor": 0.6657352567870433, + "precision": 0.9880952380952381, + "pred_md": "114\n\n## Specifying Fixed Text Data\n\nExample Actions: Move the cursor to the position (Across : 3, Down : 3) where you want to place the text element in the display, and press the F6 key.\n\n## The following display appears:\n\nThe element mark for the text element (%T001) is displayed at the cursor position, and the key entry area appears at the bottom portion of the display. A % indicates that the element is being worked with. The key entry area contains the information of the element you are specifying, such as position.\n\nThe upper area of the display where you can place elements is called the image area . The image area shows you an approximate image of the printout.\n\n## Example Actions:\n\n- 1. Type Product : in the Text data prompt.\n- 2. Press the Enter key.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.6384615384615384, + "true_md": "## Specifying Fixed Text Data\n\nExample Actions: Move the cursor to the position (Across : 3, Down : 3) where you want to place the text element in the display, and press the F6 key.\n\nThe following display appears:\n\nDesign Record Layout Columns: 1- 74 Control . . PFD definition.....PRODUCTLBL *...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+.... 001 002 003 %T001 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 \\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_More... Define Text Mark......:*T001 Measurement method....:Row/Column Position .....Across 3 Down 3 Text data . . . . Product : F3=Exit F4=Detail F6=Change measurement method F12=Cancel F24=More keys\n\nThe element mark for the text element (%T001) is displayed at the cursor position, and the key entry area appears at the bottom portion of the display. A % indicates that the element is being worked with. The key entry area contains the information of the element you are specifying, such as position.\n\nThe upper area of the display where you can place elements is called the image area . The image area shows you an approximate image of the printout.\n\n## Example Actions:\n\n- 1. Type Product : in the Text data prompt.\n\n- 2. Press the Enter key.\n\n114 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "7e1cd102c287adb1b34f17a6ab9fedec1ecf77b09ac37d7c4add2fb9c3a287b6", + "edit_distance": 0.3712121212121212, + "f1_score": 0.7757009345794392, + "meteor": 0.6657352567870433, + "precision": 0.9880952380952381, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.6384615384615384, + "true_md": "" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4333225353796804, + "doc_id": "8bc5641d45e9a9e3595bf2f0591a21271ce4ee8c079ca81ac9e5b3a9440bb96f", + "edit_distance": 0.5660377358490566, + "f1_score": 0.830188679245283, + "meteor": 0.8353243243243244, + "precision": 0.7586206896551724, + "pred_md": "The following figures explain the meaning of the mapping option and the image orientation parameters.\n\nFigure 23. Example of Position-and-Trim Mapping\n\nFigure 23. Example of Position-and-Trim Mapping\n\nFigure 24. Example of Scale-to-Fit Mapping\n\nFigure 24. Example of Scale-to-Fit Mapping\n\nChapter 18. Convert to Page Segment Function\n\n337", + "recall": 0.9166666666666666, + "true_md": "The following figures explain the meaning of the mapping option and the image orientation parameters.\n\nChapter 18. Convert to Page Segment Function 337\n\nFigure24.ExampleofScale-to-FitMapping\n\nFigure23.ExampleofPosition-and-TrimMapping" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "56d0ffa2333cc91b295eaf0af099189a07bf2b72e80a6aa52e6f799c664d2722", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9990234375, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Chapter 5. Work with Source Overlays\n\n81", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Chapter 5. Work with Source Overlays 81" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9360824108264529, + "doc_id": "444786bbce6b53c17fa72fddf0829528865e1edff1634caa9c8c212c2d7f99dc", + "edit_distance": 0.7627551020408163, + "f1_score": 0.9574468085106385, + "meteor": 0.7187831593544881, + "precision": 0.967741935483871, + "pred_md": "## EXCEL TRAINING MANUAL\n\n## 3.1 ADVANTAGES OF CONDITIONAL FORMATTING\n\n- ‰ Make the feature easier. We wanted to make it much easier for users to find the feature, to add conditional formats to their work, and to remove them too.\n- ‰ Make more possible without needing to write formulas. We wanted users to be able to set up conditions like 'top 10%' and 'duplicates' with just one click.\n- ‰ Provide new 'visualizations'. We wanted to provide users with new visualizations for the purposes of exploring large data sets, identifying trends and exceptions, and quickly comparing data. We also wanted our new visualizations to be useful for annotation and presentation purposes.\n- ‰ Address top customer requests. Many, many users have asked for more than three conditions, better UI to be able to reorder rules, etc., so we wanted to address those requests.\n- ‰ Provide a better experience in PivotTables. We saw an opportunity for conditional formatting to 'do the right thing' when applied to PivotTables. For example, it should be easy to apply a conditional format to an entire level and have new values that show up inherit that format, behave sensibly when users pivot, sort, or expand/collapse, and so on.\n- ‰ Provide a better experience in Tables. Tables are a new feature in Excel 12 that I will cover more in a few weeks, but suffice to say that they have structure and conditional formatting takes advantage of the structure to help the user set up useful conditional formatting rules. For example, you can create a conditional formatting rule to compare two columns in a table or, based on a condition, format the entire row if needed.\n\n## 3.2 HOW TO APPLY CONDITONAL FORMATTING\n\n## 3.2.1 TO APPLY CONDITIONAL FORMATTING:\n\n- ‰ Select the cells you would like to format.\n- ‰ Select the Home tab.\n- ‰ Locate the Styles group.\n- ‰ Click the Conditional Formatting command. A menu will appear with your formatting options.\n\nPage 9 /g3", + "recall": 0.9473684210526315, + "true_md": "EXCEL TRAINING MANUAL\n\n## 3.1 ADVANTAGES OF CONDITIONAL FORMATTING\n\n## 3.2 HOW TO APPLY CONDITONAL FORMATTING\n\n## 3.2.1 TO APPLY CONDITIONAL FORMATTING:\n\nPage 9 GLYPH<g3>\n\n- ‰ Click the Conditional Formatting command. A menu will appear with your formatting options. \n\n- ‰ Locate the Styles group. \n\n- ‰ Select the Home tab. \n\n- ‰ Select the cells you would like to format. \n\n- ‰ Provide a better experience in Tables. Tables are a new feature in Excel 12 that I will cover more in a few weeks, but suffice to say that they have structure and conditional formatting takes advantage of the structure to help the user set up useful conditional formatting rules. For example, you can create a conditional formatting rule to compare two columns in a table or, based on a condition, format the entire row if needed. \n\n- ‰ Provide a better experience in PivotTables. We saw an opportunity for conditional formatting to “do the right thing” when applied to PivotTables. For example, it should be easy to apply a conditional format to an entire level and have new values that show up inherit that format, behave sensibly when users pivot, sort, or expand/collapse, and so on.\n\n- ‰ Make the feature easier. We wanted to make it much easier for users to find the feature, to add conditional formats to their work, and to remove them too. \n\n- ‰ Make more possible without needing to write formulas. We wanted users to be able to set up conditions like “top 10%” and “duplicates” with just one click.\n\n- ‰ Provide new “visualizations”. We wanted to provide users with new visualizations for the purposes of exploring large data sets, identifying trends and exceptions, and quickly comparing data. We also wanted our new visualizations to be useful for annotation and presentation purposes.\n\n- ‰ Address top customer requests. Many, many users have asked for more than three conditions, better UI to be able to reorder rules, etc., so we wanted to address those requests." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.27352192731876274, + "doc_id": "208fe91c9f43efb37b2812d5fe30834c5cbbfb0ac6aede1f37c5da95a74366d5", + "edit_distance": 0.6695421366954214, + "f1_score": 0.9773755656108597, + "meteor": 0.7941138219780352, + "precision": 0.9863013698630136, + "pred_md": "| | overlay specifications (continued) | | |\n|------------------------------------------------------------------|--------------------------------------|--------|---------|\n| change | 70 | | |\n| | 67 | | |\n| characters per inch DBCS SO/SI spacing 66 | | 68 | |\n| define degree of rotation | 67 | | |\n| design fonts grid | 25 | | |\n| 24 height | | | |\n| 69 | | | |\n| 68 offset | 67 | 68, 69 | |\n| lines per inch measurement method 69 | 67 | | |\n| printer type size 68 | | | |\n| unit of measure width 68 | | | |\n| change 349 9 | 68 | | |\n| overlay text | | | |\n| overlay utility | | | |\n| create 33 end 57 getting started limitations | 27 | | |\n| introduction | 23 | | |\n| 391 | | | 391 |\n| dashed and dotted lines | | | |\n| element position line width and overlay size minimum and maximum | 391 | | 391 391 |\n| box 393 | | | |\n| operation flow restrictions | 26 | | |\n| | 392 | | |\n| font | | 393 | |\n| 392 graphics (GDF) size line | | | |\n| 393 overlay object authority | | | 394 |\n| | 392 | 394 | |\n| page segment | | | |\n| printer dependencies shading in a box source overlay file | 393 | | |\n| text in a box source overlay 24 | 392 | | |\n| | | | 393 393 |\n| text font in graphics (GDF) | | | |\n\noverstrike\n\n247, 260\n\n## P\n\n| page layout 99 design 126, 169 page number (PFD specifications) | 152 | |\n|-------------------------------------------------------------------|----------------|----|\n| page segment 8 | page segment 8 | |\n| convert 313 | | |\n| convert form (database file) | 309 | |\n| convert from (PC document) | 310 | |\n| convert to 356 | | |\n| copy 312 | | |\n| delete 312 | | |\n| mark | | |\n| 275 measurement method 275 | | |\n| place 49 | | |\n| position 275 | | |\n| 312, 320, 355 | | |\n| print | | |\n| rename 312, 356 | | |\n| restrictions 392, 396 | | |\n\n414\n\n| page segment (continued) specify 119 work with 312 | | | | | | |\n|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|----------|----|----|-----|-----|-----|\n| page segment description display 312, 313, 356 page segment element and position measurement method 414 | | | | | | |\n| page segment text change 360 PC document convert 316 percent (%) mark 231 PFD definition 97 | 324, 330 | | | | | |\n| change 197 copy 198 create 109, 147 database file 98 delete 200 elements 100 | | | | | | |\n| print format utility printout specifications record layout 98 record selection 100 rename 201 | 101 100 | | | | | |\n| save 194 send 398 | | | | | | |\n| work with 140, 141, 214 PFD definition file change 211 | | | | | | |\n| create 107, 209 delete 213 214 | | | | | | |\n| rename restrictions 395 work with 140 | | | | | | |\n| PFD definition file description display 214 PFD definition file list select 208 show 208 | | | | | | |\n| PFD definition files work with 201 | | | | | | |\n| work with PFD definition list select 146 | | | | | | |\n| show 146 | | | | | | |\n| 154 characters per inch DBCS SO/SI | | | | | | |\n| define 149 degree of rotation grid 153 height | | | | | | |\n| 152 lines per inch | | | | | | |\n| 152 | | | | | | |\n| PFD specifications | | | | | | |\n| 158 | | | | | | |\n| PFD definition fonts | | | | | | |\n| | | 98 | 97 | 152 | 152 | |\n| change | | | | | | 151 |\n\nmeasurement method\n\n152, 153\n\n| PFD specifications (continued) | | | |\n|----------------------------------------------------------------------|---------------------|-----|----------|\n| offset 152 page number | | | |\n| 152 printer type 151 size 152 | | | |\n| unit of measure 152 width 152 | | | |\n| physical file member | | | 312, 313 |\n| place graphic element 43 | | | |\n| page segment | | | |\n| 49 | | | |\n| portability | | | |\n| fonts 458 | | | |\n| page segments | | | |\n| 458 restrictions 457 | | | |\n| portability to other systems print | | 457 | |\n| AFP utilities tutorial | | | 140 |\n| AFP Utilities tutorial 134, 201 | | | 136 |\n| database file member 140 overlay 57, 312, 318, 344 201 | database file | | |\n| page segment 312, 320, 355 PFD definition source overlay 80 | | | |\n| print a page segment 312 | | | |\n| print AFP Utilities tutorial 312 | | 136 | |\n| print an overlay | | | |\n| print database file 134, 201 | | | |\n| print database file member print form 23 print format utility 10, 97 | | 214 | |\n| end 135, 137 104 | | | |\n| getting started | | | |\n| introduction 97 limitations 394 | | | |\n| dashed and dotted lines element position | | 394 | |\n| 395 line width and page size 394 | | | |\n| restrictions 395 box 396 font 395 graphics (GDF) size | minimum and maximum | 397 | |\n| line 396 page segment | | | |\n| 396 PFD definition file printer dependencies | | 397 | 395 397 |\n| shading in a box 396 | print from | | |\n| text font in graphics (GDF) text in a box start 106, 137 | | 221 | |\n| AFP Utilities menu Work with PFD Definitions display | | | |\n| 215 | | | |\n| print on both sides 188 | | | |\n| print operation restrictions 397 | | | |\n| print PFD definition print source overlay | | | |\n| printable area 417 | | | |\n| print with format utility | | | |\n| printer characteristics | | | |\n| 417 | | | |\n| printer dependency restrictions 394, 397 56 | | | |\n| printer file | | | |\n| printer storage limitations | | 417 | |\n| | | 101 | |\n| | | | 201 80 |\n\nIndex\n\n479", + "recall": 0.968609865470852, + "true_md": "overlay specifications (continued) change 70 characters per inch 67 DBCS SO/SI spacing 68 define 66 degree of rotation 67 design 25 fonts 24 grid 69 height 68 lines per inch 67 measurement method 68, 69 offset 69 printer type 67 size 68 unit of measure 68 width 68 overlay text change 349 overlay utility 9 create 33 end 57 getting started 27 introduction 23 limitations 391 dashed and dotted lines 391 element position 391 line width and overlay size 391 minimum and maximum 391 operation flow 26 restrictions 392 box 393 font 392 graphics (GDF) size 393 line 393 overlay object authority 394 page segment 392 printer dependencies 394 shading in a box 393 source overlay file 392 text font in graphics (GDF) 393 text in a box 393 source overlay 24 overlay specifications 24 start 30, 57 override a printer file 56 overstrike 247, 260\n\npage layout 99 design 126, 169 page number (PFD specifications) 152 page segment 8 convert 313 convert form (database file) 309 convert from (PC document) 310 convert to 356 copy 312 delete 312 mark 275 measurement method 275 place 49 position 275 print 312, 320, 355 rename 312, 356 restrictions 392, 396\n\n## P\n\npage segment (continued) specify 119 work with 312 page segment description display 312, 313, 356 page segment element and position 414 measurement method 414 page segment function 324, 330 convert to 330 copy 354 delete 354 work with 349 page segment text change 360 PC document convert 316 percent (%) mark 231 PFD definition 97 change 197 copy 198 create 109, 147 database file 98 delete 200 elements 100 mapping object name 100 page layout 99 PFD definition fonts 98 PFD specifications 97 print 201 print format utility 101 printout specifications 100 record layout 98 record selection 100 rename 201 save 194 send 398 work with 140, 141, 214 PFD definition file change 211 copy 212 create 107, 209 delete 213 rename 214 restrictions 395 work with 140 PFD definition file description display 214 PFD definition file list select 208 show 208 PFD definition files work with 201 PFD definition fonts 98 work with 158 PFD definition list select 146 show 146 PFD specifications 97 change 154 characters per inch 151 DBCS SO/SI 152 define 149 degree of rotation 152 grid 153 height 152 lines per inch 152 measurement method 152, 153\n\nPFD specifications (continued) offset 152 page number 152 printer type 151 size 152 unit of measure 152 width 152 physical file member 312, 313 place graphic element 43 page segment 49 portability fonts 458 page segments 458 restrictions 457 portability to other systems 457 print AFP utilities tutorial 140 AFP Utilities tutorial 136 database file 134, 201 database file member 140 overlay 57, 312, 318, 344 page segment 312, 320, 355 PFD definition 201 source overlay 80 print a page segment 312 print AFP Utilities tutorial 136 print an overlay 312 print database file 134, 201 print database file member 214 print form 23 print format utility 10, 97 end 135, 137 getting started 104 introduction 97 limitations 394 dashed and dotted lines 394 element position 395 line width and page size 394 minimum and maximum 394 restrictions 395 box 396 font 395 graphics (GDF) size 397 line 396 page segment 396 PFD definition file 395 printer dependencies 397 shading in a box 397 text font in graphics (GDF) 397 text in a box 396 start 106, 137 print from AFP Utilities menu 221 Work with PFD Definitions display 215 print on both sides 188 print operation restrictions 397 print PFD definition 201 print source overlay 80 print with format utility 101 printable area 417 printer characteristics 417 printer dependency restrictions 394, 397 printer file 56 printer storage limitations 417\n\nIndex 479" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.015909960590846976, + "doc_id": "0b2093f8efa50f002ea5170379b6ab7c7d949ed08bf89c2294c8de02299bc1ad", + "edit_distance": 0.7245179063360881, + "f1_score": 0.7252747252747253, + "meteor": 0.27255966998536224, + "precision": 0.9705882352941176, + "pred_md": "328\n\n## Starting the Resource Management Utility with the CVTOVLPFM Command\n\nWhen you start the Resource Management Utility with the CVTOVLPFM command and press the F4 key, the following display appears:\n\nFrom this display, you can convert an overlay object to a database file member.\n\nWhen you type data in the fields, change the Create file field to ' *YES ', and press the Enter key, the following display appears.\n\nSee 'CVTOVLPFM (Convert Overlay to Physical File Member) Command' on page 384 for more information.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.5789473684210527, + "true_md": "## Starting the Resource Management Utility with the CVTOVLPFM Command\n\nWhen you start the Resource Management Utility with the CVTOVLPFM command and press the F4 key, the following display appears:\n\nFrom this display, you can convert an overlay object to a database file member.\n\nWhen you type data in the fields, change the Create file $_{field to ’}$*YES$_{’, and press}$ the Enter key, the following display appears.\n\nSee “CVTOVLPFM (Convert Overlay to Physical File Member) Command” on page 384 for more information.\n\n328 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\n## Convert Overlay to PFM (CVTOVLPFM)\n\n## Convert Overlay to PFM (CVTOVLPFM)\n\nType choices, press Enter. Overlay . ........... NAME Library . .......... *LIBL NAME, *LIBL, *CURLIB Format of data......... *FIXED, *CONTINUOUS To file . . . . . ....... NAME, *VM, *MVS Library . .......... *CURLIB NAME, *CURLIB To member ........... *OVL NAME, *OVL Text 'description' . . . .... *OVLTXT Replace . ........... *NO *YES, *NO Create file .......... Bottom F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel F13=How to use this display F24=More keys\n\nType choices, press Enter. Overlay . ...........> SMPOVL NAME Library . ..........> QGPL NAME, *LIBL, *CURLIB Format of data.........> *FIXED *FIXED, *CONTINUOUS To file . . . . . .......> *VM NAME, *VM, *MVS Library . .......... *CURLIB NAME, *CURLIB To member ........... *OVL NAME, *OVL Text 'description' . . . .... *OVLTXT Replace . ........... *NO *YES, *NO Create file ..........> *YES Text 'description' . . . .... *BLANK Bottom F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel F13=How to use this display F24=More keys" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.05622801631485363, + "doc_id": "343a47ff597d92a4d3ebddb827424b92b531de1787b04ef63ebf3123f460f3d2", + "edit_distance": 0.6420664206642066, + "f1_score": 0.6699507389162561, + "meteor": 0.3505760700940849, + "precision": 0.9714285714285714, + "pred_md": "278\n\n## Graphics\n\nNote: Some printers do not support graphics. See IBM Printing Systems: Printer Information , (S544-5750), for detail.\n\nTo specify a graphics element in the overlay, first move the cursor to the start position of the graphics element, and press F13 (Place). The following display appears.\n\nPress the F6 key to select the graphics to be placed. The % mark changes to the %Gnnn (where nnn is 001 through 999) as follows:\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.5112781954887218, + "true_md": "## Graphics\n\n- Note: Some printers do not support graphics. See IBM Printing Systems: Printer Information , (S544–5750), for detail.\n\nTo specify a graphics element in the overlay, first move the cursor to the start position of the graphics element, and press F13 (Place). The following display appears.\n\nPress the F6 key to select the graphics to be placed. The % mark changes to the %Gnnn (where nnn is 001 through 999) as follows:\n\n278 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\nDesign Overlay Columns: 1- 74 Control . . Source overlay.....STATIONERY *...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7.... 001 002 003 004 % 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 More... F3=Exit F5=Refresh F6=Place graphics F9=Place page segment F12=Cancel F15=Mark on/off F16=Hide F24=More keys Press F6 or F9 to place graphics or page segment.\n\nDesign Overlay Columns: 1- 74 Control . . Source overlay.....STATIONERY *...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7.... 001 002 003 004 %G003 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 More... F3=Exit F4=Detail F6=Change measurement method F12=Cancel F24=More keys Specify opposite corner of graphics block and press F6" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.12053710545017045, + "doc_id": "610e0003657c6116046f4169556069163f3ca079b99e62aa9005fc68f563fb50", + "edit_distance": 0.8760683760683761, + "f1_score": 0.3689320388349515, + "meteor": 0.5594710481749722, + "precision": 0.2261904761904762, + "pred_md": "## Design Overlay\n\nAn overlay image can be designed in a source overlay. The following elements can be placed or defined in a source overlay.\n\nText\n\nLine\n\nBox\n\nBar Code\n\nPage Segment\n\nGraphic\n\nText, such as ABCDE , specified in an overlay is called a text element. It can be placed at any specified position on the overlay. The text attributes may also be specified to describe the text characteristics such as font selection, vertical and horizontal format, character size, overstrike, and color.\n\nThe line element is any straight line that connects two points either vertically or horizontally. You may select the type of line, such as dotted, dashed, or solid, and the line width.\n\nThe box element is a rectangle that is defined by the two diagonally opposite corners. It can be placed anywhere on the overlay. You can select the shade pattern inside the box, the type of box line (either dotted, dashed, or solid), and line width. You may define text inside the box. Optionally, the text may be justified inside the box.\n\nThe bar code element is a set of bars and spaces of various width created from data by IPDS printers or It can be placed at a specified position on the overlay. You can specify the following:\n\n- v Bar code data\n- v Placement position\n- v Type of bar code\n- v Size\n- v Color\n- v Whether or not to print a human-readable interpretation (HRI)\n- v Whether or not to include a check digit\n\nA page segment is an image in the AFP resource library. You can refer to a page segment by its name and specify the print position to define it as an overlay element. You can include the same page segment repeatedly in an overlay.\n\nA graphic is an image constructed by vector data. Graphics can be created by using iSeries GDDM (Graphical Data Display Manager) or Business Graphics Utility. A graphic is stored on iSeries as a graphic data file. or iSeries GDDM and stored in an iSeries file. You can refer to a graphic by its file and library name and specify an area that is defined by the two diagonally opposite corners to define it as an overlay element. See 'Appendix D. Using GDFs in AFP Utilities' on page 439 on how to create GDF files.\n\nYou can select any of the overlay elements above and place them at the desired positions to define the overlay.\n\nChapter 2. Introduction to the Overlay Utility\n\n25", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## Design Overlay\n\nAn overlay image can be designed in a source overlay. The following elements can be placed or defined in a source overlay.\n\nYou can select any of the overlay elements above and place them at the desired positions to define the overlay.\n\nChapter 2. Introduction to the Overlay Utility 25" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8065352487995074, + "doc_id": "7fde3bc5861e90dd68a11d88a504cf5b2e8da390229b5517240f3f7195b57106", + "edit_distance": 0.17266187050359713, + "f1_score": 0.9202453987730062, + "meteor": 0.9466063409565887, + "precision": 0.9146341463414634, + "pred_md": "8\n\n## Using Images\n\nYou can place images anywhere on the page.\n\nFigure 4. Using Page Segments\n\nFigure 4. Using Page Segments\n\n## Using Bar Codes\n\nBar code data is encoded information that is recognized by optical scanning devices. The AFP Utilities for iSeries can print various types of bar codes in any size and with variations, such as with or without the human readable interpretation (HRI) characters.\n\n## Using Graphics\n\nThe AFP Utilities for iSeries can include the Graphics Data File (GDF). GDF can be created by OS/400* graphics or created by GDDM* on the System/390*. See 'Appendix D. Using GDFs in AFP Utilities' on page 439 for more information.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.9259259259259259, + "true_md": "## Using Images\n\nYou can place images anywhere on the page.\n\nFigure4.UsingPageSegments\n\n## Using Bar Codes\n\n## Using Graphics\n\nBar code data is encoded information that is recognized by optical scanning devices. The AFP Utilities for iSeries can print various types of bar codes in any size and with variations, such as with or without the human readable interpretation (HRI) characters.\n\nThe AFP Utilities for iSeries can include the Graphics Data File (GDF). GDF can be created by OS/400* graphics or created by GDDM* on the System/390*. See “Appendix D. Using GDFs in AFP Utilities” on page 439 for more information.\n\n8 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7071067811865475, + "doc_id": "2bfc41bf85ce622c6baaaf650a4c0a3d0e7e175320eccd0965d6607677259534", + "edit_distance": 0.2, + "f1_score": 0.8421052631578947, + "meteor": 0.8017676767676769, + "precision": 0.8888888888888888, + "pred_md": "58\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.8, + "true_md": "58 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.04819402032816481, + "doc_id": "7a6225421ea8401467c3813d5f0f9032471f5dec97b57d28849aa80ee19a8ebb", + "edit_distance": 0.7210884353741497, + "f1_score": 0.64, + "meteor": 0.267858521634116, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Specifying a Line Element\n\nYou can draw a line in a record layout.\n\nExample Action: Move the cursor to the position (Across : 3, Down : 4) to start the line and press the F9 key.\n\nAn element mark %L008 appears, and a message prompts you to press the F9 key.\n\nExample Action: Move the cursor to the end position (Across : 33, Down : 4) of the line and press the F9 key.\n\nA line is drawn in the image area, and the key entry area appears on the lower part of the display.\n\nChapter 8. Getting Started with Print Format Utility\n\n125", + "recall": 0.47058823529411764, + "true_md": "## Specifying a Line Element\n\nYou can draw a line in a record layout.\n\nExample Action: Move the cursor to the position (Across : 3, Down : 4) to start the line and press the F9 key.\n\nAn element mark %L008 appears, and a message prompts you to press the F9 key.\n\nExample Action: Move the cursor to the end position (Across : 33, Down : 4) of the line and press the F9 key.\n\nA line is drawn in the image area, and the key entry area appears on the lower part of the display.\n\nChapter 8. Getting Started with Print Format Utility 125\n\nDesign Record Layout Columns: 1- 74 Control . . PFD definition.....PRODUCTLBL *...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7.... 001 *B007 ----------------------------+ 002 : : 003 : *T001 t : *T003 004 : %L008 : 005 : *T002 : *T004 . 006 : *S005 : 007 : *C006 008 : : 009 +---------------------------------+ 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 More... F3=Exit F5=Refresh F9=Line F12=Cancel F15=Mark on/off F16=Hide F19=Left F20=Right Specify opposite end of line and press F9.\n\nDesign Record Layout Columns: 1- 74 Control . . PFD definition.....PRODUCTLBL *...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7.... 001 *B007 ----------------------------+ 002 : : 003 : *T001 t : *T003 004 : %L008 ------------------------- : 005 : *T002 : *T004 . : 006 : *S005 007 : *C006 : 008 : 009 +---------------------------------+ 010 011 012 More... Define Line Mark . . . . . . : *L008 Measurement method....:Row/Column Start position . . Across 3 Down 4 End position...Across 33 F3=Exit F4=Detail F6=Change measurement method F12=Cancel F24=More keys" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4439355974139835, + "doc_id": "b71a9edc842d22c944d5ebd11b7f0d613bd356824430f7b97e0f1d5348b8bef2", + "edit_distance": 0.4, + "f1_score": 0.855072463768116, + "meteor": 0.5662233974593379, + "precision": 0.9833333333333333, + "pred_md": "254\n\nPress Enter, the F3, or F12 key after you specify the parameters, or press the F4 key to specify more parameters.\n\nWhen you press the F4 key, the following display appears. You can specify further details of the box element. For example, you can specify the line type, the line width, the line placement, the shading pattern, and the shading type on this display.\n\nPress the Roll Up (Page Down) key to see the next page of the Define Box Detail display.\n\nPress the Roll Up (Page Down) key to see the next page of the Define Box Detail display.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.7564102564102564, + "true_md": "Press Enter, the F3, or F12 key after you specify the parameters, or press the F4 key to specify more parameters.\n\nWhen you press the F4 key, the following display appears. You can specify further details of the box element. For example, you can specify the line type, the line width, the line placement, the shading pattern, and the shading type on this display.\n\nPress the Roll Up (Page Down) key to see the next page of the Define Box Detail display.\n\n254 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\n## Define Box Detail\n\n## Define Box Detail\n\nMark: *B002 Measurement method: Row/Column\n\nType choices, press Enter.\n\nMore... F12=Cancel\n\nMore... F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F6=Change measurement method F12=Cancel\n\nMore... F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F6=Change measurement method F12=Cancel\n\nMore... F12=Cancel\n\nType choices, press Enter.\n\nMark: *B002 Measurement method: Row/Column" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5444595006657884, + "doc_id": "dea6e17901242041c24528ab96043648a45aef49b12e66e7c4f65b45365fcf3b", + "edit_distance": 0.40384615384615385, + "f1_score": 0.8363636363636364, + "meteor": 0.7721929422809187, + "precision": 0.8846153846153846, + "pred_md": "440\n\nThe following table shows the GDF orders generated by S/390, iSeries system, and the GDF orders supported by AFP Utilities.\n\nTable 86. GDF orders generated by S/390, iSeries system, and the GDF orders supported by AFP Utilities\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.7931034482758621, + "true_md": "The following table shows the GDF orders generated by S/390, iSeries system, and the GDF orders supported by AFP Utilities.\n\nTable86.GDFordersgeneratedbyS/390,iSeriessystem,andtheGDForderssupportedby AFPUtilities\n\n440 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9401156546689373, + "doc_id": "3a6f1db326e972d483ee84cb87e58c720cb28f37dc9286c57e7d5883db511316", + "edit_distance": 0.16230366492146597, + "f1_score": 0.9939393939393939, + "meteor": 0.9944081304114516, + "precision": 0.9939393939393939, + "pred_md": "## Appendix A. Printer Characteristics\n\nSome printers may not be able to print your output as designed. This appendix describes some of the printer characteristics, such as pel density and Single Byte (SBCS) and Double Byte (DBCS) Character Set support, that may affect the printout. For more information about printer characteristics, refer to the Advanced Function Printing: Printer Information , or appropriate documentation for your printer.\n\n## Supported Printers\n\nRefer to IBM Printing Systems: Printer Information , (S544-5750), for more information about which IBM Advanced Function Printers are supported. For additional information, also refer to the IBM printers web page at http://www.ibm.com/printers.\n\n## Printable Area\n\nDifferent printers have different printable areas. The printable area also depends on the paper size and the degree of rotation specified for the page layout or overlay used.\n\nYou should specify the Offset prompt on the Define Overlay Specifications display or the Define PFD Specifications display so that your printout fits within the printable area of your printer.\n\nFor information about the printable areas refer to the IBM Printing Systems: Printer Information , (S544-5750), or appropriate documentation for your printer.\n\n## Printer Storage Limitations\n\nThe data needed to print your printout is loaded into printer storage. With an unusually complex printout, the storage requirements may approach or exceed the storage limitations of the printer. If the storage limitations are exceeded, the printout will not be printed. If the storage used is close to the limitations, printing may be slowed somewhat.\n\nIn such cases, you should consider simplifying your printout in one or more of the following ways:\n\n- v Reduce the number of elements\n- v Reduce the number of fonts\n- v Reduce the number of page segments\n- v Reduce the number of graphics\n- v Avoid use of shading\n- v Avoid use of dotted and dashed lines or boxes\n- v Avoid use of enlarged or reduced characters\n- v Use smaller fonts\n\nYou should also consider purchasing more raster image storage for your printer if this is appropriate.\n\n417", + "recall": 0.9939393939393939, + "true_md": "## Appendix A. Printer Characteristics\n\n## Supported Printers\n\n## Printable Area\n\n## Printer Storage Limitations\n\nSome printers may not be able to print your output as designed. This appendix describes some of the printer characteristics, such as pel density and Single Byte (SBCS) and Double Byte (DBCS) Character Set support, that may affect the printout. For more information about printer characteristics, refer to the Advanced Function Printing: Printer Information , or appropriate documentation for your printer.\n\nRefer to IBM Printing Systems: Printer Information , (S544–5750), for more information about which IBM Advanced Function Printers are supported. For additional information, also refer to the IBM printers web page at http://www.ibm.com/printers.\n\nDifferent printers have different printable areas. The printable area also depends on the paper size and the degree of rotation specified for the page layout or overlay used.\n\nYou should specify the Offset prompt on the Define Overlay Specifications display or the Define PFD Specifications display so that your printout fits within the printable area of your printer.\n\nFor information about the printable areas refer to the IBM Printing Systems: Printer Information , (S544–5750), or appropriate documentation for your printer.\n\nThe data needed to print your printout is loaded into printer storage. With an unusually complex printout, the storage requirements may approach or exceed the storage limitations of the printer. If the storage limitations are exceeded, the printout will not be printed. If the storage used is close to the limitations, printing may be slowed somewhat.\n\nIn such cases, you should consider simplifying your printout in one or more of the following ways:\n\nYou should also consider purchasing more raster image storage for your printer if this is appropriate.\n\n- v Reduce the number of elements\n\n- v Reduce the number of fonts\n\n- v Reduce the number of page segments\n\n- v Reduce the number of graphics\n\n- v Avoid use of shading\n\n- v Avoid use of dotted and dashed lines or boxes\n\n- v Avoid use of enlarged or reduced characters\n\n- v Use smaller fonts\n\n417" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.27051890424469466, + "doc_id": "b1ef8f723bf4b13f6b0fcfc54c97dad74b2d2d0bb3bd8eacab930b141230339a", + "edit_distance": 0.8705882352941177, + "f1_score": 0.8351648351648351, + "meteor": 0.2787966835392355, + "precision": 0.9743589743589743, + "pred_md": "414\n\n## Page Segment Element and Position\n\n## Measurement Method is Row/Column\n\nTop of the row and left edge of the column is the page segment position.\n\n## Measurement Method is Inch or Centimeter\n\nTop left corner of the page segment is positioned.\n\n## Record Layout Element and Position\n\n## Measurement Method is Row/Column\n\nTop of the row and left edge of the column is the record layout position.\n\n## Measurement Method is Inch or Centimeter\n\nTop left corner of the record layout is positioned.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.7307692307692307, + "true_md": "## Page Segment Element and Position\n\n## Measurement Method is Row/Column\n\n## Measurement Method is Inch or Centimeter\n\n## Record Layout Element and Position\n\n## Measurement Method is Row/Column\n\n## Measurement Method is Inch or Centimeter\n\n414 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\nTop left corner of the record layout is positioned.\n\nTop of the row and left edge of the column is the record layout position.\n\nTop left corner of the page segment is positioned.\n\nTop of the row and left edge of the column is the page segment position.\n\n| | | Column n | -------+--------------------- - - ---+ | | Page segment Row n | | +--------------------- - - ---+ | | --------+-----------+------------ | |\n\nPosition | | V +--->+--------------------- - - ---+ | | Page segment | | +--------------------- - - ---+\n\n| | | Column n | -------+--------------------- - - ---+ | | Record layout Row n | | +--------------------- - - ---+ | | --------+-----------+------------ | |\n\nPosition | | V +--->+--------------------- - - ---+ | | Record layout | | +--------------------- - - ---+" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8507489535000977, + "doc_id": "406c3a019275c31d56ca63d5c797939628f6e4359a28cd012d7d7c06e29b9dd3", + "edit_distance": 0.8283132530120482, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.7267303581402224, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "*CUT For printers with manual feed, cut sheets are fed manually through the manual feeder.\n\n## PV.source-drawer\n\nSpecify the drawer from which the paper is fed. Valid values range from 1 through 255. For printers with manual feed, specifying 100 is the same as specifying *CUT.\n\n## Output bin (OUTBIN)\n\nSpecifies the destination of the output on printers capable of multiple output bins. The possible values are:\n\n*DEVD\n\nThe value specified in the Device description is used. *DEVD is the default.\n\noutput bin\n\nSpecify the output bin for the destination of the output. Valid values range from 1 through 65535.\n\nCopies (COPIES)\n\nSpecifies the number of copies to be printed.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\n*PFD\n\nSpecifies that the number specified in the PFD definition is used.\n\nThis is the default value.\n\nnumber-of-copies\n\nSpecify the number of copies to be printed.\n\nThe possible value range is 1 - 255.\n\n## Output queue (OUTQ)\n\nSpecifies the qualified name of the output queue in which the spooled file will be created.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\n*JOB\n\nSpecifies the output queue specified in the job description associated with this job is used.\n\nThis is the default value.\n\noutput-queue-name\n\nSpecifies the name of the output queue to be used.\n\nThe possible library values are:\n\n*LIBL The library list is used to locate the output queue.\n\n## *CURLIB\n\nThe current library for the job is used to locate the output queue. If no library is specified as the current library for the job, library QGPL is used.\n\nlibrary-name\n\nSpecify the library where the output queue is located.\n\nChapter 21. AFP Utilities for iSeries Commands\n\n371", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "- *CUT For printers with manual feed, cut sheets are fed manually through the manual feeder.\n\n- *PFD Specifies that the number specified in the PFD definition is used. This is the default value.\n\n- *JOB Specifies the output queue specified in the job description associated with this job is used.\n\nThe current library for the job is used to locate the output queue. If no library is specified as the current library for the job, library QGPL is used.\n\nSpecify the library where the output queue is located.\n\n*LIBL The library list is used to locate the output queue.\n\nSpecifies the qualified name of the output queue in which the spooled file will be created.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\nSpecify the drawer from which the paper is fed. Valid values range from 1 through 255. For printers with manual feed, specifying 100 is the same as specifying *CUT.\n\nSpecifies the destination of the output on printers capable of multiple output bins. The possible values are:\n\nThe value specified in the Device description is used. *DEVD is the default.\n\nSpecify the output bin for the destination of the output. Valid values range from 1 through 65535.\n\nSpecifies the number of copies to be printed.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\nSpecify the number of copies to be printed.\n\nThe possible value range is 1 - 255.\n\nChapter 21. AFP Utilities for iSeries Commands 371\n\nThis is the default value.\n\n## PV.source-drawer\n\n## Output bin (OUTBIN)\n\n## *DEVD\n\n## output bin\n\n## Copies (COPIES)\n\n## number-of-copies\n\n## Output queue (OUTQ)\n\n## output-queue-name\n\n## *CURLIB\n\n## library-name\n\nSpecifies the name of the output queue to be used.\n\nThe possible library values are:" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.33734425486247493, + "doc_id": "254241460f360b8013fc7ab8369bda3e5560a2d79c3249b06f0c8b32f814e6ee", + "edit_distance": 0.6324786324786325, + "f1_score": 0.9073170731707317, + "meteor": 0.42086501766309337, + "precision": 0.9029126213592233, + "pred_md": "Basic English Language Skills\n\n## 8. Choose the correct word:\n\nHe asked his manager for advice/advise regarding a problem at work.\n\n## 9. Choose the correct word:\n\nThere/They're/Their going to watch a movie this weekend.\n\nChoose the most correct answer for each of the following questions:\n\n## 10. What is an adjective used for?\n\n- A -To describe a noun\n- B -To describe a verb\n- C -To replace a pronoun\n- D -None of the above\n\n## 11. When should you use a comma?\n\n- A -When you want to separate items in a list.\n- B -When you want to separate a quotation from the rest of a sentence.\n\nC\n\n- -When you are addressing someone or something directly.\n- D -All of the above.\n\n## 12. Your tutor is there to:\n\n- A -Give you the right answers when you are doing your assignments.\n- B -Help you when you get stuck with your course work.\n- C -Assist you in completing your assignments.\n- D -B and C\n\nDeveloped for Oxbridge Academy", + "recall": 0.9117647058823529, + "true_md": "Basic English Language Skills\n\nDeveloped for Oxbridge Academy\n\nChoose the most correct answer for each of the following questions:\n\n10. What is an adjective used for?\n\n11. When should you use a comma?\n\n12. Your tutor is there to:\n\n8. Choose the correct word:\n\nHe asked his manager for advice/advise regarding a problem at work.\n\n9. Choose the correct word:\n\nThere/They’re/Their going to watch a movie this weekend.\n\n- A - To describe a noun B - To describe a verb\n\n- A - To describe a noun B - To describe a verb C - To replace a pronoun\n\n- B - To describe a verb C - To replace a pronoun D - None of the above\n\n- C - To replace a pronoun D - None of the above\n\n- A - When you want to separate items in a list. B - When you want to separate a quotation from the rest of\n\n- A - When you want to separate items in a list. B - When you want to separate a quotation from the rest of a sentence. C - When you are addressing someone or something directly.\n\n- a sentence. C - When you are addressing someone or something directly. D - All of the above.\n\n- C - When you are addressing someone or something directly. D - All of the above.\n\n- A - Give you the right answers when you are doing your assignments. B - Help you when you get stuck with your course work.\n\n- your assignments. B - Help you when you get stuck with your course work. C - Assist you in completing your assignments.\n\n- B - Help you when you get stuck with your course work. C - Assist you in completing your assignments. D - B and C\n\n- C - Assist you in completing your assignments. D - B and C" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.002276600938529353, + "doc_id": "c9fe3a3af3d881ec1736925c4e6601fc7f8e5555564e77a3363162858d6f03a2", + "edit_distance": 0.8582677165354331, + "f1_score": 0.3711340206185567, + "meteor": 0.16063882087111078, + "precision": 0.9473684210526315, + "pred_md": "250\n\nThe following table explains each field in this display.\n\nThe following table explains each field in this display.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.23076923076923078, + "true_md": "Design Overlay Columns: 1- 74 Control . . Source overlay.....STATIONERY *...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7.... 001 002 003 004 005 %L002 -------------------------- 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 More... Define Line Mark......:*L002 Measurement method....:Row/Column Start position . . Across 19 Down 5 End position . . . Across 50 F3=Exit F4=Detail F6=Change measurement method F12=Cancel F24=More keys\n\nThe following table explains each field in this display.\n\n250 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.49242264168779404, + "doc_id": "c7935fec92086e0c1c2efdc77b10d9a908ffc8047cc2fedeaa7c2a11b77daa8f", + "edit_distance": 0.5238095238095238, + "f1_score": 0.8679245283018868, + "meteor": 0.6871097050946019, + "precision": 0.9787234042553191, + "pred_md": "322\n\n## The Print Page Segment display appears.\n\n## Example Actions:\n\n- 1. Type 2 for the Copies prompt.\n- 2. Press the Enter key.\n\nThe Work with Page Segments display appears with a completion message. Page segment QFCLOGO has been printed.\n\nPress Enter to return to the IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries menu.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.7796610169491526, + "true_md": "The Print Page Segment display appears.\n\n## Print Page segment\n\nType choices, press Enter.\n\nPage Segment . . . . . . ....: QFCLOGO Library . ........: QGPL\n\nF3=Exit F5=Refresh F12=Cancel\n\nBottom\n\nThe Work with Page Segments display appears with a completion message. Page segment QFCLOGO has been printed.\n\nPress Enter to return to the IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries menu.\n\n## Example Actions:\n\n- 1. Type 2 for the Copies prompt.\n\n- 2. Press the Enter key.\n\n322 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8099113160985365, + "doc_id": "2648d861e744943ca983dbd3175290bd9ad30eba1a722f30889db90fdd1c8d63", + "edit_distance": 0.12307692307692308, + "f1_score": 0.9090909090909091, + "meteor": 0.9025624967912814, + "precision": 0.9375, + "pred_md": "## 3=Copy Source Overlay File\n\nTo copy a source overlay file, do the following on the Work with Source Overlay Files display.\n\n- 1. Type a 3 in the Opt column beside the name of the source overlay file you want to copy.\n- 2. Press Enter.\n\nUsing the Copy Source Overlay File display, you can copy a source overlay file to a new source overlay file. The entire set of source overlays will be copied to the new file.\n\nThe following table explains each field of the Copy Source Overlay File display.\n\nTable 16. Copy Source Overlay File display fields\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide\n\n92", + "recall": 0.8823529411764706, + "true_md": "## 3=Copy Source Overlay File\n\nTo copy a source overlay file, do the following on the Work with Source Overlay Files display.\n\n- 1. Type a 3 in the Opt column beside the name of the source overlay file you want to copy.\n\n- 2. Press Enter.\n\nUsing the Copy Source Overlay File display, you can copy a source overlay file to a new source overlay file. The entire set of source overlays will be copied to the new file.\n\nThe following table explains each field of the Copy Source Overlay File display.\n\nTable16.CopySourceOverlayFiledisplayfields\n\n## Copy Source Overlay File\n\nType choices, press Enter.\n\nF3=Exit\n\nF5=Refresh\n\nF12=Cancel\n\n92 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5573447999122271, + "doc_id": "60e576f75702c871538d86f7547cdb56c4081bea5ad0b815995060d550cbec31", + "edit_distance": 0.5336225596529284, + "f1_score": 0.8488372093023255, + "meteor": 0.6447294720997299, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Example Action: Press the Enter key again to place the graphics element in the source overlay.\n\nThe following display appears.\n\nAll elements have been defined.\n\n## Viewing the Overlay with the AFP Workbench Viewer\n\nNote:\n\nTo use the AFP Workbench Viewer, the workstation must be a programmable workstation (PC) and connected to the server system with iSeries Access for OS/400 V3R1M3 or later. See the online iSeries Access Users Guide for information about connecting iSeries Access to the server. The iSeries Access connection must use the same user ID that is used for the iSeries session. The iSeries Access Workbench Viewer must also be installed on the PC. If your workstation is not a PC or the iSeries Access Workbench Viewer is not installed on your system, skip this step.\n\nNow view what the overlay will look like by using the AFP Workbench Viewer.\n\n## Example Actions:\n\n- 1. Press the TAB key to position the cursor to the Control field.\n- 2. Type *VIEW , and press Enter.\n\nA display appears showing a simulated printout of a temporary overlay object created from your source overlay. When you are finished looking at the simulated printout, close the window and proceed.\n\nNote:\n\nIncluded page segments that are not in a library that is in the system library list will not be displayed. Message CWBNP1019, AFP Resource not found, will be displayed instead. To view these page segments, do one of the following:\n\n- v Add the library name to the system library list (command CHGSYSLIBL).\n- v Copy the page segments to library QGPL (command CRTDUPOBJ).\n\nChapter 3. Getting Started with the Overlay Utility\n\n45", + "recall": 0.7373737373737373, + "true_md": "Example Action: Press the Enter key again to place the graphics element in the source overlay.\n\nThe following display appears.\n\nAll elements have been defined.\n\nNow view what the overlay will look like by using the AFP Workbench Viewer.\n\nA display appears showing a simulated printout of a temporary overlay object created from your source overlay. When you are finished looking at the simulated printout, close the window and proceed.\n\n- Note: Included page segments that are not in a library that is in the system library list will not be displayed. Message CWBNP1019, AFP Resource not found, will be displayed instead. To view these page segments, do one of the following:\n\n- Note: To use the AFP Workbench Viewer, the workstation must be a programmable workstation (PC) and connected to the server system with iSeries Access for OS/400 V3R1M3 or later. See the online iSeries Access Users Guide for information about connecting iSeries Access to the server. The iSeries Access connection must use the same user ID that is used for the iSeries session. The iSeries Access Workbench Viewer must also be installed on the PC. If your workstation is not a PC or the iSeries Access Workbench Viewer is not installed on your system, skip this step.\n\n## Viewing the Overlay with the AFP Workbench Viewer\n\n## Example Actions:\n\n- 1. Press the TAB key to position the cursor to the Control field.\n\n- 2. Type *VIEW , and press Enter.\n\nDesign Overlay Columns: 1- 74 Control . . \\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_ Source overlay.....STATIONERY *...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7.... 025 : *T018 : 026 +------------------------------------------------------+ 027 028 *G029 -----------------+ 029 : : 030 031 : : 032 033 : : *T027 o. 5A-3233-01 034 +----------------------+ *C028 035 036 037 038 039 040 041 More... F3=Exit F6=Text F9=Line F10=Box F11=Bar code F21=Element edit F22=Block edit F24=More keys\n\n- v Add the library name to the system library list (command CHGSYSLIBL).\n\n- v Copy the page segments to library QGPL (command CRTDUPOBJ).\n\nChapter 3. Getting Started with the Overlay Utility 45" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.3619481244537575, + "doc_id": "86f3f1fd5a8dd51f9c68ffbfcbe5bb3c7c42274fd4012da65a56060f3eea7be8", + "edit_distance": 0.5457142857142857, + "f1_score": 0.7480916030534353, + "meteor": 0.5354023144194611, + "precision": 0.9702970297029703, + "pred_md": "126\n\nExample Action: Press the Enter key.\n\nThe line is defined.\n\nExample Action: Define another line element from (Across : 3, Down : 6) to (Across : 15, Down : 6) in the same way.\n\nThe following display appears.\n\n## Exiting from Design Record Layout\n\nExample Action: When you have specified all elements in the record layout, press the F3 key to exit from this display.\n\nThe Design Page Layout display appears.\n\n## Designing a Page Layout\n\nOn the Design Page Layout display, you can define how the record layout is printed on a page, and how other elements such as text and lines, are printed on the page.\n\nOther than the sample in this chapter, you can also define reserved variable data such as date, time, page number, and summary data of field values in a database file. See 'Chapter 10. Work with PFD Definitions' on page 143 for more information.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.6086956521739131, + "true_md": "Example Action: Press the Enter key.\n\nThe line is defined.\n\nExample Action: Define another line element from (Across : 3, Down : 6) to (Across : 15, Down : 6) in the same way.\n\nThe following display appears.\n\nExample Action: When you have specified all elements in the record layout, press the F3 key to exit from this display.\n\nThe Design Page Layout display appears.\n\nOn the Design Page Layout display, you can define how the record layout is printed on a page, and how other elements such as text and lines, are printed on the page.\n\nOther than the sample in this chapter, you can also define reserved variable data such as date, time, page number, and summary data of field values in a database file. See “Chapter 10. Work with PFD Definitions” on page 143 for more information.\n\nDesign Record Layout Columns: 1- 74 Control . . PFD definition.....PRODUCTLBL *...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7.... 001 *B007 ----------------------------+ 002 : : 003 : *T001 t : *T003 004 : *L008 ------------------------- : 005 : *T002 : *T004 . : 006 : *L009 ------- *S005 007 : *C006 : 008 : 009 +---------------------------------+ 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 More... F3=Exit F6=Text F9=Line F10=Box F11=Bar code F21=Element edit F22=Block edit F24=More keys\n\n## Exiting from Design Record Layout\n\n## Designing a Page Layout\n\n126 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.905625238876092, + "doc_id": "09957e6e2bcda4b992d7b32b6663dc49617f83f11b78b06b1a5aab92732e738b", + "edit_distance": 0.7212543554006968, + "f1_score": 0.9722222222222221, + "meteor": 0.7871379414393171, + "precision": 0.9722222222222222, + "pred_md": "346\n\nTable 73. Print Overlay display fields (continued)\n\n## 7=Rename Overlay\n\nTo rename an overlay, do the following on the Work with Overlays display on page 341.\n\n- 1. Type 7 in the Opt column beside the overlay which you want to rename.\n- 2. Press Enter.\n\nThe CL command RNMOBJ is called.\n\n## 8=Display Overlay Description\n\nTo display an overlay description, do the following on the Work with Overlays display on page 341.\n\n- 1. Type 8 in the Opt column beside the overlay for which you want to display the description.\n- 2. Press Enter.\n\nThe CL command DSPOBJD is called.\n\n## 9=Convert Overlay to Physical File Member\n\nTo convert an overlay to a physical file member, do the following on the Work with Overlays display on page 341.\n\nNote:\n\nBefore you use an overlay in the target system, you have to verify that the necessary resources to use that overlay (for example, font and page segment) are on the target system. Only transferring an overlay may be insufficient. You also have to check the version and the supported structured fields of the target system's Print Services Facility*.\n\nAn overlay which can be used on the iSeries system cannot necessarily be used on the target system.\n\n- 1. Type 9 in the Opt column beside the name of the overlay which you want to convert to a physical file member.\n- 2. Press Enter.\n\nThe following display appears:\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.9722222222222222, + "true_md": "346 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\nThe following display appears:\n\nTo convert an overlay to a physical file member, do the following on the Work with Overlays display on page 341.\n\n## 9=Convert Overlay to Physical File Member\n\nAn overlay which can be used on the iSeries system cannot necessarily be used on the target system.\n\n- 1. Type 9 in the Opt column beside the name of the overlay which you want to convert to a physical file member.\n\n- 2. Press Enter.\n\nNote: Before you use an overlay in the target system, you have to verify that the necessary resources to use that overlay (for example, font and page segment) are on the target system. Only transferring an overlay may be insufficient. You also have to check the version and the supported structured fields of the target system’s Print Services Facility*.\n\nThe CL command DSPOBJD is called.\n\nTo display an overlay description, do the following on the Work with Overlays display on page 341.\n\nThe CL command RNMOBJ is called.\n\nTo rename an overlay, do the following on the Work with Overlays display on page 341.\n\n- 1. Type 7 in the Opt column beside the overlay which you want to rename.\n\n- 2. Press Enter.\n\n- 1. Type 8 in the Opt column beside the overlay for which you want to display the description.\n\n- 2. Press Enter.\n\n## 8=Display Overlay Description\n\n## 7=Rename Overlay\n\nTable73.PrintOverlaydisplayfields (continued)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.06747544492337106, + "doc_id": "0d9dd2d6ebf4f921a9ee20e390d5711731e7d4b6168ff29ace39d53ad193d343", + "edit_distance": 0.6833333333333333, + "f1_score": 0.4954128440366972, + "meteor": 0.39990465392982044, + "precision": 0.9, + "pred_md": "## Prompts\n\nThe following display appears by pressing the Enter key on the previous display.\n\nThe following tables explain each field of the Work with Source Overlay Files display.\n\nTable 11. Work with Source Overlay Files prompts\n\nChapter 6. Work with Source Overlay Files\n\n85", + "recall": 0.34177215189873417, + "true_md": "The following display appears by pressing the Enter key on the previous display.\n\n## Work with Source Overlay Files\n\nThe following tables explain each field of the Work with Source Overlay Files display.\n\nTable11.WorkwithSourceOverlayFilesprompts\n\n## Prompts\n\nLibrary ......... OULIB Name, *USRLIBL, *LIBL, *CURLIB... File . . ........ *ALL Name, generic*, *ALL Position to....... Starting characters Type options, press Enter. 1=Create 2=Change 3=Copy 4=Delete 7=Rename 8=Display description 12=Work with source overlays\n\nOUFILE6 Source overlay file 6 More... Parameters or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F9=Retrieve F11=Display names only F12=Cancel\n\nChapter 6. Work with Source Overlay Files 85" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.36922502480768343, + "doc_id": "69a91843eaa36535e99c8c88e7ac1f917dc2cc8316ccf673fe443b9f9cd1fc95", + "edit_distance": 0.6445783132530121, + "f1_score": 0.7565543071161048, + "meteor": 0.606611338526203, + "precision": 0.9711538461538461, + "pred_md": "176\n\nThe records are displayed as *R001-001, *R001-002, . . . *R001-006 . Now you have completed placing the record(s) in the page. If you want to place fixed data (text, line, box, image, graphics, or bar code) in the page in addition to the record, move the cursor to the position you want to start the fixed data, and press the following keys.\n\nF6\n\nTo define a text element.\n\nF9\n\nTo define a line.\n\nF10\n\nTo define a box.\n\nF11\n\nTo define a bar code.\n\nF13, then F6\n\nTo place a graphics element.\n\nF13, then F9\n\nTo place a page segment.\n\nSee 'Chapter 13. Design Operation' on page 227 for more information about the design operation.\n\nThe following display is an example of the page layout with four fixed data elements (three text elements, *T002, *T003, *T004, and one page segment, *S005).\n\nWhen you press the F15 key to set mark off, the text can be fully displayed as follows:\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.6196319018404908, + "true_md": "The records are displayed as *R001-001, *R001-002, $_{...}$*R001-006 . Now you have completed placing the record(s) in the page. If you want to place fixed data (text, line, box, image, graphics, or bar code) in the page in addition to the record, move the cursor to the position you want to start the fixed data, and press the following keys.\n\nSee “Chapter 13. Design Operation” on page 227 for more information about the design operation.\n\nThe following display is an example of the page layout with four fixed data elements (three text elements, *T002, *T003, *T004, and one page segment, *S005).\n\nDesign Page Layout Columns: 1- 74 Control . . PFD definition.....PRODUCTLBL *...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7.... 001 *T002 print of product and price *S005 002 *T003 is as follows: 1 2 3 003 *T004 6 004 *R001-001 *R001-002 *R001-003 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 *R001-004 *R001-005 *R001-006 013 014 015 016 017 More... F3=Exit F6=Text F9=Line F10=Box F11=Bar code F21=Element edit F22=Block edit F24=More keys\n\nWhen you press the F15 key to set mark off, the text can be fully displayed as follows:\n\n176 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\n- F6 To define a text element.\n\n- F9 To define a line.\n\n- F10 To define a box.\n\n- F11 To define a bar code.\n\n- F13, then F6 To place a graphics element.\n\n- F13, then F9 To place a page segment." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7071067811865475, + "doc_id": "9745262cb9de277348deb0faefb8e780fc184557d2a487ff9ee4c4b2cd01dae8", + "edit_distance": 0.2, + "f1_score": 0.8421052631578947, + "meteor": 0.8017676767676769, + "precision": 0.8888888888888888, + "pred_md": "350\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.8, + "true_md": "350 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.89576798294472, + "doc_id": "20bd7230ac1b0146fe043168d5eb943553e6320bfbf733b586615264d2ae8ba2", + "edit_distance": 0.3096774193548387, + "f1_score": 0.9600000000000002, + "meteor": 0.9463975627240143, + "precision": 0.9655172413793104, + "pred_md": "120\n\n## Example Actions:\n\n- 1. Type QFCLOGO in the Page segment prompt.\n- 2. Press the Enter key.\n\nNote: See 'Page Segment' on page 396 for page segment restrictions.\n\n## The display changes as follows.\n\nThe image data is defined as a page segment element, and a mark *S005 that indicates a page segment element is displayed at the specified position.\n\n## Specifying a Bar Code Element\n\nYou can specify a bar code in the record layout in the following process.\n\n## Example Actions:\n\n- 1. Move the cursor to the position (Down : 7, Across : 3) where you want to place a bar code in the display.\n- 2. Press the F11 key.\n\nThe key entry area appears.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.9545454545454546, + "true_md": "120 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\n## Example Actions:\n\n- 1. Type QFCLOGO in the Page segment prompt.\n\n- 2. Press the Enter key.\n\nNote: See “Page Segment” on page 396 for page segment restrictions.\n\nThe display changes as follows.\n\nThe image data is defined as a page segment element, and a mark *S005 that indicates a page segment element is displayed at the specified position.\n\nYou can specify a bar code in the record layout in the following process.\n\nThe key entry area appears.\n\n## Specifying a Bar Code Element\n\n## Example Actions:\n\n- 1. Move the cursor to the position (Down : 7, Across : 3) where you want to place a bar code in the display.\n\n- 2. Press the F11 key." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.46715887357742747, + "doc_id": "6ce9fc543a3a83f3d24293d111a304b2237a1312c3bf05a0d81dae24e5166df1", + "edit_distance": 0.7945736434108527, + "f1_score": 0.7904191616766467, + "meteor": 0.7374252053975022, + "precision": 0.6875, + "pred_md": "50\n\n## Example Actions:\n\n- 1. Type 1 on the command line.\n- 2. Press the Enter key.\n\n## The Work with Source Overlays display appears.\n\n```\nWork with Source Overlays File . . . . . . . . . . OVLFILE Name, F4 for list Library . . . . . . . . OVLLIB Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB Source overlay . . . . . *ALL Name, generic*, *ALL Position to . . . . . . . Starting characters Type options, press Enter. 1=Create 2=Change 3=Copy 4=Delete 6=Print 7=Rename 9=Create overlay Source Opt Overlay Text Changed 2 STATIONERY Sample Form number 3 12/12/90 Bottom Parameters or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F9=Retrieve F11=Display names only F12=Cancel\n```\n\n## Example Actions:\n\n- 1. Type 2 in the Opt column next to the source overlay name STATIONERY.\n- 2. Press the Enter key.\n\n## The Change Source Overlay display appears.\n\n```\nChange Source Overlay File . . . . . . . . . . . . : OVLFILE Library . . . . . . . . . : OVLLIB Source overlay . . . . . . . : STATIONERY Type options, press Enter. 1=Select Opt Action Define overlay specifications Work with source overlay fonts 1 F3=Exit F5=Refresh F9=Select all F12=Cancel\n```\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.9295774647887324, + "true_md": "## Example Actions:\n\n## Example Actions:\n\n50 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\nF3=Exit F5=Refresh F9=Select all F12=Cancel\n\nThe Change Source Overlay display appears.\n\nBottom\n\nParameters or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F9=Retrieve F11=Display names only F12=Cancel\n\nThe Work with Source Overlays display appears.\n\n- 1. Type 1 on the command line.\n\n- 2. Press the Enter key.\n\n## Work with Source Overlays\n\n## Change Source Overlay\n\nType options, press Enter. 1=Select\n\nType options, press Enter. 1=Create 2=Change 3=Copy 4=Delete 6=Print 7=Rename 9=Create overlay\n\n- 1. Type 2 in the Opt column next to the source overlay name STATIONERY.\n\n- 2. Press the Enter key." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "8d7ff949f3f77c662a0a310193852c45aa755cec69ae101c4e5738d4078c167c", + "edit_distance": 0.9983831851253031, + "f1_score": 0.041237113402061855, + "meteor": 0.014940239043824704, + "precision": 0.021052631578947368, + "pred_md": "| . . . . . . | Page Segment Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 |\n|------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|\n| . . . . | Record Layout Element . |\n| | . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 |\n| Tasks Related to Database File Selection . Tasks Related to Record Selection. | . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454 |\n| . . Appendix F. Portability to Other Systems Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . | . . . . . . . |\n| Task Related to Printout Specifications . Task Related to Mapping Object . . . Task Related to Break Fields . . . . | . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454 . . |\n| | Tasks Related to Overlay Specifications and PFD Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454 Tasks Related to Font. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . |\n| . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . | . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . |\n| . | . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . |\n| | . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . |\n| AFP Utilities Tutorial PFD Definitions | . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461 |\n| EIA (Electronic Industries Association) Labels Appendix H. Code 128 Character Set Appendix I. Font Samples . . . . . . . | . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . |\n| Sample Overlays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DMAS Forms . . . . . . MAPICS/DB Forms . . . . . . Sample PFD Definitions . AIAG (Automotive Industry Action Group) Labels . | |\n| | . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460 |\n| . . . . . PSF (Print Service Facility) . . . . . . . . Appendix G. Sample Overlays and Sample PFD Definitions . . | . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459 |\n| . PT2 Tower (Underline and Overstrike) . . . . . Fonts . . . . Page Segments . . . . . | |\n| . . . | . . . . . . . 456 . . . . . . . 456 . . . . . . . 456 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . |\n| IPDS Towers | . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457 . . . . . . . . . . . . 457 . . . . . . . . . . . . 457 . . . . . . . . . . . . 458 . 458 458 |\n| | . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . |\n| | . . |\n| . . . . . . . | |\n| | . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . |\n| | . . . . . . . . . . . . |\n| . . . | . . . 465 . . |\n| . . | |\n| . . . . | |\n| Times New Roman Medium Helvetica Roman Bold Courier . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glossary . . . . . . . . . . | . . . . 466 . . . . . . . 466 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . |\n\nContents\n\nix\n\n.\n\n.\n\n457\n\n.\n\n459\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n463\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n46\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Contents ix" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5458041713584024, + "doc_id": "6bc4d465e2d4c8cadb038dd99babf133566abeba5b697bee83cad02411e88ddc", + "edit_distance": 0.5229357798165137, + "f1_score": 0.925531914893617, + "meteor": 0.5415016601264496, + "precision": 0.925531914893617, + "pred_md": "Basic English Language Skils\n\n## STEP 2 - FILL IN YOUR STUDENT DETAILS\n\nTo complete this section, you need to provide us with your personal details:\n\n## E-mail address\n\nPlease provide a valid e-mail address that you check on a regular basis, as we'll be using this address to communicate with you throughout your studies.\n\n## Occupation\n\nRefers to your current job (if you are employed). If you are unemployed, you can simply write 'unemployed' or 'not applicable'.\n\n## Delivery address\n\nRefers to the address at which you want your study material to be delivered. The reason why we prefer you to select your work address is so that there will always be someone available to receive your study material, even if you are not there when the courier arrives.", + "recall": 0.925531914893617, + "true_md": "To complete this section, you need to provide us with your personal details:\n\nE-mail address Please provide a valid e-mail address that you check on a regular basis, as we’ll be using this address to communicate with you throughout your studies. Occupation\n\nOccupation Refers to your current job (if you are employed). If you are unemployed, you can simply write “unemployed” or “not applicable”. Delivery address\n\nDelivery address Refers to the address at which you want your study material to be delivered. The reason why we prefer you to select your work address is sothat there will always be someone available to receive your study material, even if you are not there when the courier arrives.\n\n## unemployed, you can simply write “unemployed” or “not applicable”. Delivery address Refers to the address at which you want your study material to be\n\n## throughout your studies. Occupation Refers to your current job (if you are employed). If you are\n\n## E-mail address Please provide a valid e-mail address that you check on a regular\n\n## STEP 2 – FILL IN YOUR STUDENT DETAILS\n\nBasic English Language Skills" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9474913302668175, + "doc_id": "5edc5f1efe61858febab552676bc081e8706e3b1cc269004c4a98b1a8b4e1c0c", + "edit_distance": 0.24019607843137256, + "f1_score": 0.9476439790575916, + "meteor": 0.9506019816761699, + "precision": 0.9526315789473684, + "pred_md": "234\n\n## Define Element Operation\n\nYou can enter the define element operation by pressing the F6, F9, F10, F11, or F13 key depending on the element type to be defined. With the define element operation, you can define an element of an overlay, a record layout, or a page layout.\n\nThe key entry area is displayed. Its format depends on the type of element to be defined. The fields which allow input are the mandatory parameters to define the element. If you need to specify additional characteristics of the element, you need to show the Define Detail display by pressing F4 (Detail).\n\nFor details of this operation, see one of the following:\n\n- v 'Text' on page 227.\n- v 'Line' on page 227.\n- v 'Box' on page 227.\n- v 'Bar Code' on page 227.\n- v 'Page Segment' on page 227.\n- v 'Graphics' on page 228.\n- v 'Record Layout' on page 228.\n\n## Change Element Operation\n\nYou can enter the change element operation by pressing the F14 (Change) key when the cursor is on the mark of an element. The key entry area appears and the remainder of the operation is the same as that of Define Element Operation. The cursor is considered to be on the mark if the cursor is on the asterisk of a mark or on the four characters which follow.\n\nYou can also duplicate any element while changing the element except the placed record on a page layout. From the Change Element screen, press the F13 (Repeat element) key. The Repeat Element screen will be displayed.\n\nOn the Repeat Element screen you can specify the position of the first repetition, the element name, the direction of the repetitions, the number of repetitions across and down, and the distance across and down from one element to the next. For additional information on the Repeat element function, see the help text on the Repeat element screen.\n\n## Edit Operation\n\nYou enter the edit operation by pressing the F21 or F22 key in the screen view display. You can edit elements one by one (Element edit), or in a block by specifying two diagonally opposite positions (Block edit). F21 (Element edit) starts the element edit operation, while F22 (Block edit) starts the block edit operation. The functions for both edit types are copy, move, and remove. For the element edit, the cursor is used to select an element by placing it at the element mark. For the block edit, the cursor is used to select a block by specifying two diagonally opposite positions.\n\nSpecify one of the move, copy, or remove operations for the selected element or for the block by pressing the appropriate function key. The operation takes place for all elements in the block, even if some of them are not displayed. In the case of line elements, box elements, and graphics elements, the entire element must be surrounded by the specified block. For the other elements, those elements whose mark (first asterisk only) is in the block will be selected.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.9427083333333334, + "true_md": "## Define Element Operation\n\nYou can enter the define element operation by pressing the F6, F9, F10, F11, or F13 key depending on the element type to be defined. With the define element operation, you can define an element of an overlay, a record layout, or a page layout.\n\nThe key entry area is displayed. Its format depends on the type of element to be defined. The fields which allow input are the mandatory parameters to define the element. If you need to specify additional characteristics of the element, you need to show the Define Detail display by pressing F4 (Detail).\n\nFor details of this operation, see one of the following:\n\nYou can enter the change element operation by pressing the F14 (Change) key when the cursor is on the mark of an element. The key entry area appears and the remainder of the operation is the same as that of Define Element Operation. The cursor is considered to be on the mark if the cursor is on the asterisk of a mark or on the four characters which follow.\n\nYou can also duplicate any element while changing the element except the placed record on a page layout. From the Change Element screen, press the F13 (Repeat element) key. The Repeat Element screen will be displayed.\n\nOn the Repeat Element screen you can specify the position of the first repetition, the element name, the direction of the repetitions, the number of repetitions across and down, and the distance across and down from one element to the next. For additional information on the Repeat element function, see the help text on the Repeat element screen.\n\nYou enter the edit operation by pressing the F21 or F22 key in the screen view display. You can edit elements one by one (Element edit), or in a block by specifying two diagonally opposite positions (Block edit). F21 (Element edit) starts the element edit operation, while F22 (Block edit) starts the block edit operation. The functions for both edit types are copy, move, and remove. For the element edit, the cursor is used to select an element by placing it at the element mark. For the block edit, the cursor is used to select a block by specifying two diagonally opposite positions.\n\nSpecify one of the move, copy, or remove operations for the selected element or for the block by pressing the appropriate function key. The operation takes place for all elements in the block, even if some of them are not displayed. In the case of line elements, box elements, and graphics elements, the entire element must be surrounded by the specified block. For the other elements, those elements whose mark (first asterisk only) is in the block will be selected.\n\n## Change Element Operation\n\n## Edit Operation\n\n234 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\n- v “Text” on page 227.\n\n- v “Line” on page 227.\n\n- v “Box” on page 227.\n\n- v “Bar Code” on page 227.\n\n- v “Page Segment” on page 227.\n\n- v “Graphics” on page 228.\n\n- v “Record Layout” on page 228." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8013168067358182, + "doc_id": "2b67604349635271b96e5bb4f29d7998137eea059a128019abbd861f0704011e", + "edit_distance": 0.4444444444444444, + "f1_score": 0.8828828828828829, + "meteor": 0.8703491852524693, + "precision": 0.8909090909090909, + "pred_md": "Basic English Language Skils\n\n## CHAPTER 1:\n\n## GENERAL LANGUAGE TIPS TO GET YOU STARTED\n\nThis chapter focuses on the importance of language skills in the workplace, and covers basic tips for how you can improve your command of the English language.\n\n'The English language is nobody's special property. It is the property of the imagination. It is the property of the language itself'\n\nDerek Walcott\n\nD\n\neveloped for Oxbridge Academy", + "recall": 0.875, + "true_md": "Basic English Language Skills\n\nThis chapter focuses on the importance of language skills in the workplace, and covers basic tips for how you can improve your command of the English language.\n\n“The English language is nobody’s special property. It is the property of the imagination. It is the property of the language itself”\n\nDerek Walcott\n\nDeveloped for Oxbridge Academy\n\n## CHAPTER 1:\n\n## GENERAL LANGUAGE TIPS TO GET YOU STARTED" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5921317535174679, + "doc_id": "72e7e82f5184dc908f18fdd32f6393a6234c17117f973bda6c2178b6ee2b2b6d", + "edit_distance": 0.3584905660377358, + "f1_score": 0.8684210526315789, + "meteor": 0.8890264026402641, + "precision": 0.825, + "pred_md": "Table 89. Tasks related to PFD definitions (continued)\n\n## Tasks Related to PFD Definition Files\n\nNote: The following description assumes that you are on a display with the command line.\n\nTable 90. Tasks related to PFD definition files\n\nAppendix E. How to Do a Task\n\n445", + "recall": 0.9166666666666666, + "true_md": "Table89.TasksrelatedtoPFDdefinitions (continued)\n\nTable90.TasksrelatedtoPFDdefinitionfiles\n\n## Tasks Related to PFD Definition Files\n\n- Note: The following description assumes that you are on a display with the command line.\n\nAppendix E. How to Do a Task 445" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4924790605054523, + "doc_id": "d8ac2f68440c9be1e6e8dd4da164f9e40c3d67ed55e0449bd5c7ff00b63eb144", + "edit_distance": 0.47058823529411764, + "f1_score": 0.6923076923076923, + "meteor": 0.8405445944386755, + "precision": 0.5625, + "pred_md": "Table 83. Common symptoms and possible causes (continued)\n\nChapter 23. Problem Analysis\n\n405", + "recall": 0.9, + "true_md": "Table83.Commonsymptomsandpossiblecauses (continued)\n\nChapter 23. Problem Analysis 405" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8412209731847957, + "doc_id": "3a499c2d7d40bc6059780255d4cc58ebcbbf829b9aae4575faf407fd678c89f1", + "edit_distance": 0.2755681818181818, + "f1_score": 0.9877551020408163, + "meteor": 0.9481514475384356, + "precision": 0.983739837398374, + "pred_md": "## PFD definition (PFDMBR)\n\nSpecifies the name of the PFD definition to be worked with or created. The default value for this parameter depends on whether or not you specify the PFDFILE parameter.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\n## *SELECT\n\nThis is the default value if you specify the PFDFILE parameter. If you choose *SELECT, you will get the lists of all PFD definitions in the specified PFD definition file and library. Select one or more PFD definitions to work with on the display.\n\n## *PRV\n\nThis is the default value if you do not specify the PFDFILE parameter. *PRV is the name of the previous PFD definition that was used.\n\nPFD-definition-name\n\nSpecify the name of the PFD-definition you want to work with.\n\nOption (OPTION)\n\nSpecifies the function to perform on the selected PFD definition. The default value depends on if you specify a PFD definition name.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\n*BLANK or ' '\n\nThis is the default value if you do not specify a PFD definition name. *BLANK specifies no action.\n\n1=Create\n\nType 1 to create a PFD definition.\n\n## 2=Change\n\nThis is the default value if you specify a PFD definition name.\n\nType 2 to change a PFD definition.\n\n3=Copy\n\nType 3 to copy a PFD definition.\n\n4=Delete\n\nType 4 to delete a PFD definition.\n\n- 6=Print\n\nType 6 to print a PFD definition.\n\n## 7=Rename\n\nType 7 to rename a PFD definition.\n\n9=Print database file\n\nType 9 to print a database file member by using a PFD definition.\n\n## PRTPFDDTA (Print PFD Data) Command\n\nThis command allows you to print a database file member according to the design of a PFD definition.\n\nThe following figure shows the command syntax for PRTPFDDTA command.\n\nChapter 21. AFP Utilities for iSeries Commands\n\n367", + "recall": 0.9918032786885246, + "true_md": "## PFD definition (PFDMBR)\n\nSpecifies the name of the PFD definition to be worked with or created. The default value for this parameter depends on whether or not you specify the PFDFILE parameter.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\nThis is the default value if you specify the PFDFILE parameter. If you choose *SELECT, you will get the lists of all PFD definitions in the specified PFD definition file and library. Select one or more PFD definitions to work with on the display.\n\nThis is the default value if you do not specify the PFDFILE parameter. *PRV is the name of the previous PFD definition that was used.\n\nSpecify the name of the PFD-definition you want to work with.\n\nSpecifies the function to perform on the selected PFD definition. The default value depends on if you specify a PFD definition name.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\nThis is the default value if you do not specify a PFD definition name. *BLANK specifies no action.\n\nType 1 to create a PFD definition.\n\nThis is the default value if you specify a PFD definition name. Type 2 to change a PFD definition.\n\nType 3 to copy a PFD definition.\n\nType 4 to delete a PFD definition.\n\nType 6 to print a PFD definition.\n\nType 7 to rename a PFD definition.\n\nType 9 to print a database file member by using a PFD definition.\n\nThis command allows you to print a database file member according to the design of a PFD definition.\n\nThe following figure shows the command syntax for PRTPFDDTA command.\n\nChapter 21. AFP Utilities for iSeries Commands 367\n\n## PRTPFDDTA (Print PFD Data) Command\n\n## 9=Print database file\n\n## 7=Rename\n\n## 6=Print\n\n## 4=Delete\n\n## 3=Copy\n\n## 2=Change\n\n## *BLANK or ’ ’\n\n## Option (OPTION)\n\n## PFD-definition-name\n\n## *PRV\n\n## *SELECT\n\n## 1=Create" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.38634042246831324, + "doc_id": "d1b0f62a68cfc25f1ebe69e16cf3a3b28a175d82627bbb34718c9b0c93ce69cf", + "edit_distance": 0.5454545454545454, + "f1_score": 0.7499999999999999, + "meteor": 0.7915173237753884, + "precision": 0.6666666666666666, + "pred_md": "## Options\n\n## Columns\n\nTable 76. Work with Page segments Function options\n\nTable 77. Work with Page segments Function columns\n\nChapter 20. Work with Page Segments Function\n\n353", + "recall": 0.8571428571428571, + "true_md": "## Options\n\n## Columns\n\nTable77.WorkwithPagesegmentsFunctioncolumns\n\nTable76.WorkwithPagesegmentsFunctionoptions\n\nChapter 20. Work with Page Segments Function 353" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7549965523008277, + "doc_id": "f740e237cab299a7db534585fc826a7e61824b59fb48d6536ef2921080cd4bf2", + "edit_distance": 0.22950819672131148, + "f1_score": 0.875, + "meteor": 0.9533101262858836, + "precision": 0.8, + "pred_md": "Choice on the Define Box Detail display:\n\nFormat : 1=Horizontal Degree of rotation : 90\n\nChoice on the Define Overlay Specifications display or the Define PFD Specifications Display:\n\nDegree of rotation : 90\n\nFigure 38. Print Example - 5\n\nFigure 38. Print Example - 5\n\nAppendix B. Rotation, Format, and Shading Pattern in Box\n\n425", + "recall": 0.9655172413793104, + "true_md": "Choice on the Define Box Detail display:\n\nFormat : 1=Horizontal Degree of rotation : 90\n\nChoice on the Define Overlay Specifications display or the Define PFD Specifications Display:\n\nDegree of rotation : 90\n\nFigure38.PrintExample-5\n\nAppendix B. Rotation, Format, and Shading Pattern in Box 425" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9624187995093264, + "doc_id": "8a03a9704c2c8592ae53f57d26007e56cacb2cdf8f3b29e1579459f7fc3ec25d", + "edit_distance": 0.680365296803653, + "f1_score": 0.9908256880733944, + "meteor": 0.8494283111590816, + "precision": 0.9938650306748467, + "pred_md": "## Showing a Source Overlay File List\n\nThe source overlay files can be listed on the lower part of the display by specifying the Library field and File field. When you want to change the contents of the list, specify the name of file and library, and press the Enter key. You can page up or down the list on the display by specifying the starting characters in the Position to prompt.\n\nNote: When you specify either the File field or the Library field, you can not specify the Opt column.\n\n## Selecting a Source Overlay File from a List\n\nThe list on the display contains the names of all or a specified subset of source overlay files that exist in the library (or libraries) indicated by the Library prompt. (However, only the source overlay files and libraries for which you have the necessary authority are shown.) The text that describes the source overlay files and the date the file was last changed are also shown in the list.\n\nWhen a list is shown, a one-word indicator always appears below and to the right of the list to tell you where you are in the list. More... means that there are more items after the item currently shown. Bottom means that you are at the end of the list.\n\nUse the Page or Roll keys to move forward or backward through the list.\n\nIf you are creating a source overlay file, you can check this list to see what names are already used before you choose a new name. You can create a source overlay file by typing 1, a source overlay file name, and a library name in the first list position. You can select other source overlay files from the list using any of the options except 1 (Create).\n\nTherefore, you can select one or more names by doing one or both of the following:\n\n- v In the Opt column beside the source overlay file name in the list that you want to use, type the option number (task) to be used.\n- v In only the first (top) position of the list, type an option number (for the task), a source overlay file name and a library name in the Opt , File , and Library columns respectively.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide\n\n88", + "recall": 0.9878048780487805, + "true_md": "## Showing a Source Overlay File List\n\n## Selecting a Source Overlay File from a List\n\nTherefore, you can select one or more names by doing one or both of the following:\n\nIf you are creating a source overlay file, you can check this list to see what names are already used before you choose a new name. You can create a source overlay file by typing 1, a source overlay file name, and a library name in the first list position. You can select other source overlay files from the list using any of the options except 1 (Create).\n\nUse the Page or Roll keys to move forward or backward through the list.\n\nWhen a list is shown, a one-word indicator always appears below and to the right of the list to tell you where you are in the list. More... means that there are more items after the item currently shown. Bottom means that you are at the end of the list.\n\nThe list on the display contains the names of all or a specified subset of source overlay files that exist in the library (or libraries) indicated by the Library prompt. (However, only the source overlay files and libraries for which you have the necessary authority are shown.) The text that describes the source overlay files and the date the file was last changed are also shown in the list.\n\nThe source overlay files can be listed on the lower part of the display by specifying the Library field and File field. When you want to change the contents of the list, specify the name of file and library, and press the Enter key. You can page up or down the list on the display by specifying the starting characters in the Position to prompt.\n\n- Note: When you specify either the File field or the Library field, you can not specify the Opt column.\n\n- v In the Opt column beside the source overlay file name in the list that you want to use, type the option number (task) to be used.\n\n- v In only the first (top) position of the list, type an option number (for the task), a source overlay file name and a library name in the Opt , File , and Library columns respectively.\n\n88 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.19569439939118927, + "doc_id": "5479a913ce4f32d6d02cba528daf0f8212b2ba74ec572e29754991abd063ea97", + "edit_distance": 0.519163763066202, + "f1_score": 0.7777777777777779, + "meteor": 0.46480959276419076, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Step 2 - Creating a PFD Definition File\n\nExample Actions: To create a PFD definition file, type 12 (Work with PFD definition files) on the command line on the IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries menu and press the Enter key.\n\nThe Work with PFD Definition Files display appears to create a PFD definition file.\n\nThe library name that you used last is displayed in the Library prompt and *ALL is displayed in the File prompt.\n\nExample Actions: Type MYLIB in the Library prompt and press the Enter key to list PFD definition files stored in MYLIB.\n\nNote: No PFD definition file is shown because no PFD definition files are stored in MYLIB.\n\nChapter 8. Getting Started with Print Format Utility\n\n107", + "recall": 0.6363636363636364, + "true_md": "## Step 2 - Creating a PFD Definition File\n\n## Work with PFD Definition Files\n\n## Work with PFD Definition Files\n\nExample Actions: To create a PFD definition file, type 12 (Work with PFD definition files) on the command line on the IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries menu and press the Enter key.\n\nThe Work with PFD Definition Files display appears to create a PFD definition file.\n\nThe library name that you used last is displayed in the Library prompt and *ALL is displayed in the File prompt.\n\nExample Actions: Type MYLIB in the Library prompt and press the Enter key to list PFD definition files stored in MYLIB.\n\nLibrary ......... MYLIB Name, *USRLIBL, *LIBL, *CURLIB... File . . ........ *ALL Name, generic*, *ALL Position to....... Starting characters Type options, press Enter. 1=Create 2=Change 3=Copy 4=Delete 7=Rename 8=Display description 12=Work with PFD definitions Opt File Library Text Changed 1 PFDFILE MYLIB (No PFD definition files in library) Bottom Parameters or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F9=Retrieve F11=Display names only F12=Cancel\n\nType choices, press Enter. Library . . ........ MYLIB Name, *USRLIBL, *LIBL *CURLIB, *ALLUSR, *ALL File . . . . ........ *ALL Name, generic*, *ALL Parameters or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel\n\n- Note: No PFD definition file is shown because no PFD definition files are stored in MYLIB.\n\nChapter 8. Getting Started with Print Format Utility 107" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8916590296592382, + "doc_id": "0cc658bd9a55e4bc191c9252d39f505fd071240f60cfd53870c39af57d989c2c", + "edit_distance": 0.7117117117117117, + "f1_score": 0.9702970297029702, + "meteor": 0.9125909634837628, + "precision": 0.98, + "pred_md": "## Element Type and Position\n\nThe positions of the elements have subtle differences depending on the element type.\n\n## Text Element and Position\n\n## Measurement Method is Row/Column\n\nThe left edge of the character is positioned to the left edge of the column. The bottom of the character is positioned one fifth of the character height above the bottom of the row.\n\n## Measurement Method is Inch or Centimeter\n\nThe left edge of the character is positioned to the horizontal position. The bottom of the character is positioned to the vertical position.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide\n\n408", + "recall": 0.9607843137254902, + "true_md": "## Element Type and Position\n\n## Text Element and Position\n\n## Measurement Method is Row/Column\n\n## Measurement Method is Inch or Centimeter\n\n408 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\nThe positions of the elements have subtle differences depending on the element type.\n\nThe left edge of the character is positioned to the horizontal position. The bottom of the character is positioned to the vertical position.\n\nThe left edge of the character is positioned to the left edge of the column. The bottom of the character is positioned one fifth of the character height above the bottom of the row." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8104201895542933, + "doc_id": "dfa48dd4d0a1e825dda1746307094d9f8e7cc9c82b8dfb08cf197c44f482a107", + "edit_distance": 0.8291139240506329, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.8403128352929484, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Assess:\n\nState both the positive and the negative aspects.\n\n## Compare:\n\nHighlight or point out differences and similarities between things or ideas.\n\n## Criticise:\n\nAnalyse, identify and evaluate good and bad characteristics, and give your opinion based on the evidence you present\n\n## Describe:\n\nShow what something is like by noting important features.\n\n## Discuss:\n\nConsider the topic from various points of view.\n\nBasic English Language Skills\n\n## Evaluate:\n\nState both the positive and the negative aspects.\n\n## Consider:\n\nCarefully examine something and give a judgement or opinion.\n\n## Contrast:\n\nPoint out the differences between certain facts, ideas or views.\n\n## Define:\n\nGive the meaning of a word or concept\n\n## Distinguish:\n\nClearly identify the differences between ideas, facts or views.\n\nDeveloped for Oxbridge Academy", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## Evaluate:\n\n## Assess:\n\n## Compare:\n\n## Consider:\n\n## Criticise:\n\n## Contrast:\n\n## Define:\n\n## Describe:\n\n## Discuss:\n\n## Distinguish:\n\nClearly identify the differences between ideas, facts or views.\n\nDeveloped for Oxbridge Academy\n\nConsider the topic from various points of view.\n\nShow what something is like by noting important features.\n\nGive the meaning of a word or concept\n\nPoint out the differences between certain facts, ideas or views.\n\nAnalyse, identify and evaluate good and bad characteristics, and give your opinion based on the evidence you present\n\nCarefully examine something and give a judgement or opinion.\n\nHighlight or point out differences and similarities between things or ideas.\n\nState both the positive and the negative aspects.\n\nState both the positive and the negative aspects.\n\nBasic English Language Skills" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8564712882270613, + "doc_id": "0219a8b6078024ec4244fd4930a3fcd66c01400d578c5f060e8ddfae3171857a", + "edit_distance": 0.47282608695652173, + "f1_score": 0.9620253164556962, + "meteor": 0.9342616368106581, + "precision": 0.9661016949152542, + "pred_md": "324\n\nYou can start the following three Resource Management Utility functions from this display.\n\nSelection\n\nFunction\n\n21\n\nConvert to Page Segment\n\n22\n\nWork with Overlays\n\n23\n\nWork with Page Segments\n\nThe following describes the selections available on the above screen. To select one of the following, type the number of the selection on the command line, and press Enter.\n\n## Option 21 : Convert to Page Segment Function\n\nThe convert to page segment function allows you to create a page segment as follows:\n\n- v Specify the name of the page segment to be created and the name of the library in which to create the page segment.\n- v Specify which kind of input source object you want to convert to a page segment.\n- v Specify the names of an iSeries folder and PC document when you create a page segment from a PC document.\n- v Specify the names of an iSeries file member, file, and library when you create a page segment from a database file member.\n\nSee 'Chapter 18. Convert to Page Segment Function' on page 331 for more information.\n\n## Option 22 : Work with Overlays Function\n\nThe work with overlays function allows you to copy, delete, rename, and print an overlay object, display and change the description of an overlay object, and convert an overlay object to a physical file member.\n\nSee 'Chapter 19. Work with Overlays Function' on page 341 for more information.\n\n## Option 23 : Work with Page Segments Function\n\nThe work with page segments function allows you to copy, delete, rename, and print a page segment, display and change the description of a page segment, and convert a page segment to a physical file member.\n\nSee 'Chapter 20. Work with Page Segments Function' on page 351 for more information.\n\n## Starting the Resource Management with the CVTPCDPAGS Command\n\nWhen you start the with the CVTPCDPAGS command, the following display appears:\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.957983193277311, + "true_md": "You can start the following three Resource Management Utility functions from this display.\n\nThe following describes the selections available on the above screen. To select one of the following, type the number of the selection on the command line, and press Enter.\n\nThe convert to page segment function allows you to create a page segment as follows:\n\n## Option 21 : Convert to Page Segment Function\n\n- v Specify the names of an iSeries file member, file, and library when you create a page segment from a database file member.\n\n- v Specify the names of an iSeries folder and PC document when you create a page segment from a PC document.\n\n- v Specify which kind of input source object you want to convert to a page segment.\n\n- v Specify the name of the page segment to be created and the name of the library in which to create the page segment.\n\nSee “Chapter 18. Convert to Page Segment Function” on page 331 for more information.\n\nThe work with overlays function allows you to copy, delete, rename, and print an overlay object, display and change the description of an overlay object, and convert an overlay object to a physical file member.\n\nSee “Chapter 19. Work with Overlays Function” on page 341 for more information.\n\nThe work with page segments function allows you to copy, delete, rename, and print a page segment, display and change the description of a page segment, and convert a page segment to a physical file member.\n\nSee “Chapter 20. Work with Page Segments Function” on page 351 for more information.\n\nWhen you start the with the CVTPCDPAGS command, the following display appears:\n\n## Starting the Resource Management with the CVTPCDPAGS Command\n\n324 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\n## Option 23 : Work with Page Segments Function\n\n## Option 22 : Work with Overlays Function" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.2911321657814562, + "doc_id": "fec7a03c93105e07589d78aae5d4765f920c9740bed718246b2f2b31ca1efa2a", + "edit_distance": 0.6129032258064516, + "f1_score": 0.5945945945945946, + "meteor": 0.6800518134715026, + "precision": 0.5, + "pred_md": "## Prompts\n\n## Options\n\n342\n\nTable 69. Work with Overlays Function prompts\n\nTable 70. Work with Overlays Function options\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.7333333333333333, + "true_md": "## Prompts\n\n## Options\n\nTable70.WorkwithOverlaysFunctionoptions\n\nTable69.WorkwithOverlaysFunctionprompts\n\n342 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9193604407793042, + "doc_id": "0effc736d047380af3d900ba6e025730f2c1bdc9243d1870cf4bfca51ba3b894", + "edit_distance": 0.8827586206896552, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9095710361228423, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Chapter 21. AFP Utilities for iSeries Commands\n\nThis chapter describes the commands for AFP Utilities for iSeries. The AFP Utilities for iSeries provide the following eight commands:\n\n- v STRAFPU\n- v STROVLU\n- v STRPFU\n- v PRTPFDDTA\n- v CVTPCDPAGS\n- v CVTPFMPAGS\n- v CVTOVLPFM\n- v CVTPAGSPFM\n\nYou can enter the above commands on any display that contains the command line.\n\n## STRAFPU (Start AFP Utilities for iSeries) Command\n\nThe STRAFPU command displays the IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries menu that allows you to use the AFP Utilities functions.\n\nThere are no parameters for this command.\n\n## STROVLU (Start Overlay Utility) Command\n\nSTROVLU command allows you to perform an option of the Overlay Utility directly without viewing the Work with Source Overlays display.\n\n363", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## Chapter 21. AFP Utilities for iSeries Commands\n\n## STRAFPU (Start AFP Utilities for iSeries) Command\n\n## STROVLU (Start Overlay Utility) Command\n\nThere are no parameters for this command.\n\nThe STRAFPU command displays the IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries menu that allows you to use the AFP Utilities functions.\n\nSTROVLU command allows you to perform an option of the Overlay Utility directly without viewing the Work with Source Overlays display.\n\nYou can enter the above commands on any display that contains the command line.\n\nThis chapter describes the commands for AFP Utilities for iSeries. The AFP Utilities for iSeries provide the following eight commands:\n\n- v STRAFPU\n\n- v STROVLU\n\n- v STRPFU\n\n- v PRTPFDDTA\n\n- v CVTPCDPAGS\n\n- v CVTPFMPAGS\n\n- v CVTOVLPFM\n\n- v CVTPAGSPFM\n\n363" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7598356856515925, + "doc_id": "ad18acc8d8e7e7d93618d1a404db9301c1c6ce24a12529838a66ba2918f034aa", + "edit_distance": 0.16666666666666666, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9764705882352942, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## BASIC ENGLISH language skills", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "# BASIC ENGLISH language skills" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "c3a49e9ff7a19a5d8af795483683359c2dbf7f71d989e376d8e8826b509aafd2", + "edit_distance": 0.9880239520958084, + "f1_score": 0.11920529801324503, + "meteor": 0.12496229260935147, + "precision": 0.0661764705882353, + "pred_md": "## EXCEL TRAINING MANUAL\n\nTABLE OF CONTENTS\n\nTABLE OF CONTENTS\n\n| 1. | INTRODUCTION TO EXCEL .......................................................................................................... 5 |\n|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|\n| 1.1 | WHAT IS A SPREADSHEET? .................................................................................................. 5 |\n| 1.2 | WHAT CAN A SPREADSHEET DO? ..................................................................................... 6 |\n| 1.3 | BENEFITS OF USING EXCEL .................................................................................................. 6 |\n| 1.3.1 | USER FRIENDLY INTERFACE ....................................................................................... 6 |\n| 1.3.2 | MANAGES AND ORGANIZE MASSIVE DATA ......................................................... 6 |\n| 1.3.3 | PROVIDES BETTER ANALYSIS...................................................................................... 6 |\n| 1.3.4 | ENJOY POWERFUL AND IMPROVED TABLE FEATURES ...................................... 7 |\n| 1.3.5 | SHARE SPREADSHEETS ................................................................................................. 7 |\n| 2. | ERROR MESSAGES (CELL REFERENCE) ..................................................................................... 7 |\n| 2.1 | INVALID CELL REFERENCE ................................................................................................. 7 |\n| 2.2 | COLUMN NOT WIDE ENOUGH ........................................................................................... 8 |\n| 2.3 | DIVIDING BY ZERO ................................................................................................................. 8 |\n| 3. | CONDITIONAL FORMATTING ..................................................................................................... 8 |\n| 3.1 | ADVANTAGES OF CONDITIONAL FORMATTING ......................................................... 9 |\n| 3.2 | HOW TO APPLY CONDITONAL FORMATTING .............................................................. 9 |\n| | 3.2.1 TO APPLY CONDITIONAL FORMATTING: ............................................................... 9 TO REMOVE CONDITIONAL FORMATTING: ......................................................... 10 |\n| 3.2.2 | 3.2.3 TO APPLY NEW FORMATTING: ................................................................................. 10 |\n| 3.2.4 | TO MANAGE CONDITIONAL FORMATTING: ....................................................... 11 SORTING .......................................................................................................................................... 12 |\n| 4. | |\n| 4.1 HOW TO APPLY: .................................................................................................................... 12 | 4.1 HOW TO APPLY: .................................................................................................................... 12 |\n| 4.1.1 | TO SORT IN ALPHABETICAL ORDER: ...................................................................... 12 |\n| 4.1.2 | TO SORT FROM SMALLEST TO LARGEST: .............................................................. 12 |\n| 5. FUNCTIONS ..................................................................................................................................... 13 | 5. FUNCTIONS ..................................................................................................................................... 13 |\n| 5.1 | INDEX MATCH FUNCTION................................................................................................. 13 |\n| 5.2 | How to Apply: .......................................................................................................................... 15 |\n\nPage 1 /g3", + "recall": 0.6, + "true_md": "EXCEL TRAINING MANUAL\n\nPage 1 GLYPH<g3>\n\n## TABLE OF CONTENTS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6901803559273887, + "doc_id": "81178f9b29d05ca410d3cb5fe7a9cb7ffd71b3a5bc5aaa44ca1fbb3821bf405a", + "edit_distance": 0.3068181818181818, + "f1_score": 0.9283018867924528, + "meteor": 0.9138725895853841, + "precision": 0.8661971830985915, + "pred_md": "0123456789 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ\n\nThe length of data can be from 5 to 12 characters.\n\nThe Royal Mail Bar Code (RM4SCC) consists of four parts; the International Prefix (optional), the Outward Code (required), the Inward Code (required), and the Delivery Point Suffix (optional).\n\nThe International Prefix, when used, contains three numeric digits.\n\nThe Outward Code contains from two to four characters in one of the following seven forms where A is alphabetic and N is numeric:\n\nANA\n\nAAN\n\nAANN\n\nAANA\n\nAN\n\nANN\n\nAAA\n\nThe Inward Code contains one numeric character followed by two alphabetic characters.\n\nThe Delivery Point Suffix, when used, contains one numeric digit followed by one alphabetic character other than C, I, K, M, O, and V.\n\n- v JPBC\n\nThe following characters are valid.\n\n0123456789\n\nABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ\n\n-\n\nThe length of data can be from 7 to 50 characters.\n\nFor additional information about JPBC bar code data, press the Help key with the cursor in the Bar code data prompt on the Define Bar Code or Change Bar Code display. For a complete set of rules, see the Japan Postal Bar Code Command Specifications.\n\n- v Australian Postal\n\nThe following characters are valid:\n\n012346789\n\n# space ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ\n\nabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz\n\nAFP Utilities support four customer bar code structures for Australian Postal:\n\nStandard Customer Bar Code\n\nLength 37 bars; no bars of customer information. Data length is 10.\n\nReply Paid Bar Code\n\nLength 37 bars, no bars of customer information. Data length is 10.\n\nCustomer Bar Code 2\n\nLength 52 bars, 16 bars of customer information. Data length is from 10 to 18.\n\nCustomer Bar Code 3\n\nLength 67 bars, 31 bars of customer information. Data length is from 10 to 25.\n\n|\n\n|\n\n|\n\n|\n\n|\n\n|\n\n|\n\n| |\n\n|\n\n| |\n\n|\n\n| |\n\n|\n\n| |\n\n|\n\nChapter 13. Design Operation\n\n271", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "0123456789 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ\n\nThe length of data can be from 5 to 12 characters.\n\nThe Royal Mail Bar Code (RM4SCC) consists of four parts; the International Prefix (optional), the Outward Code (required), the Inward Code (required), and the Delivery Point Suffix (optional).\n\nThe International Prefix, when used, contains three numeric digits.\n\nThe Outward Code contains from two to four characters in one of the following seven forms where A is alphabetic and N is numeric:\n\nANA AAN AANN AANA AN ANN AAA\n\nThe Inward Code contains one numeric character followed by two alphabetic characters.\n\nThe Delivery Point Suffix, when used, contains one numeric digit followed by one alphabetic character other than C, I, K, M, O, and V.\n\nThe following characters are valid.\n\n0123456789 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ -\n\nThe length of data can be from 7 to 50 characters.\n\nFor additional information about JPBC bar code data, press the Help key with the cursor in the Bar code data prompt on the Define Bar Code or Change Bar Code display. For a complete set of rules, see the Japan Postal Bar Code Command Specifications.\n\nThe following characters are valid:\n\n012346789 # space ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz\n\nAFP Utilities support four customer bar code structures for Australian Postal:\n\n- v Australian Postal\n\n- v JPBC\n\nChapter 13. Design Operation 271" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8555391555374013, + "doc_id": "cb931275b80d3e05910abde54b9a8219818555f85ae4e1ea34daaabcb6ef32bf", + "edit_distance": 0.3978201634877384, + "f1_score": 0.994475138121547, + "meteor": 0.8565551542415073, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Specifies whether the size of the image in the page segment is changed or not.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\n## *SAME\n\nSpecifies the same value used for this parameter when you previously created a page segment of the same name. If this is the first page segment, the default value is *NO.\n\n*NO Specifies not to change the image size.\n\n*YES Specifies to change the image size.\n\nIf you specify *YES, the IMGSIZE and MAPPING parameters will appear, and you can specify the new image size in the page segment and how to map the input image to the size.\n\n## Image area size (IMGSIZE)\n\nSpecifies the unit of measurement, width, and length of the image to be created in the page segment.\n\n## Unit of measure\n\nSpecifies the unit of measure used to specify the following two parameters.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\n## *SAME\n\nSpecifies the unit of measure used when you previously created a page segment of the same name.\n\nWidth\n\nSpecifies the width of the image to be created.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\n*SAME\n\nSpecifies the value of the width used when you previously created a page segment of the same name.\n\nwidth-value\n\nSpecify the width value in the selected unit of measure.\n\n## Length\n\nSpecifies the length of the image to be created.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\n## *SAME\n\nSpecifies the value of the length used when you previously created a page segment of the same name.\n\nlength-value\n\nSpecify the length value in the selected unit of measure.\n\n## Mapping option (MAPPING)\n\nSpecifies how the input image is mapped to the specified size of the output image in the page segment.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\nChapter 21. AFP Utilities for iSeries Commands\n\n*INCH\n\nInch is used as the unit of measure.\n\n*CM Centimeter is used as the unit of measure.\n\n381", + "recall": 0.989010989010989, + "true_md": "Specifies whether the size of the image in the page segment is changed or not.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\nSpecifies the same value used for this parameter when you previously created a page segment of the same name. If this is the first page segment, the default value is *NO.\n\nIf you specify *YES, the IMGSIZE and MAPPING parameters will appear, and you can specify the new image size in the page segment and how to map the input image to the size.\n\nSpecifies the unit of measurement, width, and length of the image to be created in the page segment.\n\nSpecifies the unit of measure used to specify the following two parameters.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\nSpecifies the unit of measure used when you previously created a page segment of the same name.\n\nInch is used as the unit of measure.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\nSpecifies the value of the width used when you previously created a page segment of the same name.\n\nSpecify the width value in the selected unit of measure.\n\nSpecifies the length of the image to be created.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\nSpecifies the value of the length used when you previously created a page segment of the same name.\n\nSpecify the length value in the selected unit of measure.\n\nSpecifies how the input image is mapped to the specified size of the output image in the page segment.\n\nThe possible values are:\n\nChapter 21. AFP Utilities for iSeries Commands 381\n\n## Mapping option (MAPPING)\n\n## length-value\n\n## *SAME\n\n## Length\n\n## width-value\n\n## *SAME\n\n## *INCH\n\n## *SAME\n\n## Unit of measure\n\n## Image area size (IMGSIZE)\n\n## *SAME\n\n- *NO Specifies not to change the image size.\n\n- *YES Specifies to change the image size.\n\n- *CM Centimeter is used as the unit of measure.\n\n- Width Specifies the width of the image to be created." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9663850012005174, + "doc_id": "40d4cb7f2f2a482ee7cefcee7958299f9f5c9848ead6f8a448e3e039827650a4", + "edit_distance": 0.12295081967213115, + "f1_score": 0.9933774834437085, + "meteor": 0.9922440152136625, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "To change an element created previously, place the cursor at the element mark. Then use the change function by pressing the F14 key. The same display as the one to create the element is displayed on the image area, except that the previously entered parameters appear in their appropriate fields.\n\nThe following parameters are common to all elements in this display:\n\nIn addition to the parameters shown above, depending on the element type, you need to enter the mandatory parameters.\n\nStep 6. Define the specifications.\n\nBy pressing the F4 key, you can also more precisely specify an element by adding more parameters.\n\nChapter 13. Design Operation\n\n241", + "recall": 0.9868421052631579, + "true_md": "To change an element created previously, place the cursor at the element mark. Then use the change function by pressing the F14 key. The same display as the one to create the element is displayed on the image area, except that the previously entered parameters appear in their appropriate fields.\n\nThe following parameters are common to all elements in this display:\n\nIn addition to the parameters shown above, depending on the element type, you need to enter the mandatory parameters.\n\nBy pressing the F4 key, you can also more precisely specify an element by adding more parameters.\n\n- Step 6. Define the specifications.\n\nChapter 13. Design Operation 241" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0029441805436825614, + "doc_id": "e0aea1f649646aac84c255901da47c7228409918e869b0682409a0f0d4de9981", + "edit_distance": 0.9964469009080142, + "f1_score": 0.1702127659574468, + "meteor": 0.03291866209489266, + "precision": 0.09302325581395349, + "pred_md": "## Part 5. Resource Management Utility\n\n| Chapter 15. Introduction to Resource Management Utility (RMU) Converting to an iSeries Page Segment . Converting to a Page Segment from an iSeries Database File | | | . . | . | . . | . | . | . . | . . | . | . . . | . | . . . . | . . . . . | . . . . | . . . . . . | . . . | . . . . . | | | | | . | . | | | . 309 | . . | | | | | | | |\n|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|-------------|-----------|-----------|---------|---------|-------|---------|---------|-----------|---------------|-----------------|-----------|---------------------|-----------|-------------------|-------------------|-------------|-----------------|-------|---------|---------------|---------|-----|---------|----|---------------|-------|----|----|-------|----|----|-------|-----|\n| . . . . . . . . . 309 Converting to a Page Segment from a PC Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 . . . . . . . . . . 311 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| Working with Overlays | . | . . | . | . | . . | . | . . | | . | | | . . | | . | . . . | . . | . | . . . | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| Copying an Overlay . | . . | . . | . . | . | . . | . | . . | . . | . | . | . | . . | . | | | | | | | | | | . | | | | 311 | . | | | | | | | |\n| | | | . | . | . | | . | . | | | | | . | . . | . | . . . . | . . | . . | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| Deleting an Overlay . . | . . . | . . . . . | . | . . . | . . . | . . | . | . . | . | . | . . . | . . | . . | . . . . | | . . | | | | | | | . . | | | | 311 312 | . . | | | | | | | |\n| Renaming an Overlay | | . | | . | . | . | . | . . . | | | . | . . . . | . | . . | . | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| Printing an Overlay . | . . | . . . | . . | . . . | . | . | . . | . . | . | . | . . . | . . | . . . . | . . . . . | | . . | | | | | | | . . | | | | 312 312 | . . | | | | | | | |\n| Displaying an Overlay Description | | . | . | . . . | . | | . . | . . | | | . | . . . | . . . | . . . . | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| Changing an Overlay Description | | . | . | | . | . | . | . | . | . | . . | . | . . | | | . 312 . | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| Converting an Overlay to Physical File Member. | | | . | | . | . | . . | . . | . | . | | . . | . . . | . . . . . | . . | | . . | 312 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| Working with Page Segments . . | | . . . . . | . . . | . . | . | . . | . | . . | . | . | . . . | . . . | . . . | . . | . | . . . | . . . . | . . . . | . . . | | | | | | | | 312 | . | | | | | | . | |\n| Copying a Page Segment Deleting Page Segments . . | | . . . . . . | . . . | . . . . . | . . | . . | . . | . . . | . . . . | . . . | . . . | . . . . | . . . | . . | . . . | . | . 312 . 312 . 312 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | . | |\n| Renaming a Page Segment . Printing a Page Segment . | | . . . | . . . . . | . . . | . . | . . | . . . | . . . . | | . . . | . . . | . | . | . . | . . . | . . | . . . | . . . | | | . | | | | | | 312 | | | | | | | | |\n| Displaying a Page Segment Description | | . | | . . . | . . | . | . | . | . | | . . . | . | . . | . . . | | . | . | . | . . . . . . | . . | . | | | | | | 313 | | | | | | | | |\n| Changing a Page Segment Description . Converting a Page Segment to a Physical File Member | | | . | . | | | . . | . | . | . | . . . . . . | . . | . . . | | . . | . . . | . . | . . . | . | . | . . . . | . | 313 313 | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| Chapter 16. Getting Started with the Resource Management utility Starting Resource Management Utility | | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . . . | . . . | . . | | | . . | . . . . | . | . | . . . . . | | | | | | | | . 315 | . | | | | | | | |\n| Converting a PC Document to a Page Segment Printing an Overlay . | . . . | . . . | . . . | . . . . | . . | . . | . . | . . . | . . . | . . . . . | . . . . . . . | . . . | . . . . | . | | . | . . . . | | | | | | . | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| . | . | . . . | . | . . | . | . | | . . . | . | . . | . . . . | . . . . . . . . | . | . . | . . | . | . . . | . . . | . . | | | . 316 318 320 | . | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| Printing a Page Segment | | | | . . | | | | . | . | | . | . | | . | | . | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| Chapter 17. Starting and Ending the Resource Management Utility | | | . . | . | . | . | . | . | . . | . | . . . . | . . | . . | . . | . . . . . | . . . . | . . | . . . | . | . . . | . 323 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| Starting the Resource Management Utility . Starting the Resource Management Utility with the STRAFPU Command Option 21 : Convert to Page Segment Function Option 22 : Work with Overlays Function . | | | | | . | . | | . | | | | . . . . . . . . | | . | . | . | . . | . . . . . . | . | . | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| Option 23 : Work with Page Segments Function . | | | | | . . | . | . | . . . | | . . | | | | | . . | . | . . . . . . . . | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| Starting the Resource Management with the CVTPCDPAGS Command . | | | | | | . | . . | . . | | . | . | . . . | | | . . | . . . . . . . . . | | | 323 324 324 324 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| | | | | | | | | . . | . . | . | . | | . . | | | . | . | . . . | . . . . . | . . . | | . . . . . | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | . . . . . . . . . . | . . . . | . | . . | . . | | . . | | | | | 324 326 | | | | | | | | | | |\n| Starting the Resource Management Utility with the CVTPFMPAGS Command Starting the Resource Management Utility with the CVTOVLPFM Command . Starting the Resource Management Utility with the CVTPAGSPFM Command . . | Ending the Resource Management Utility . Chapter 18. Convert to Page Segment Function Chapter 19. Work with Overlays Function | | . . | . . . . | . . . . | . . . . | . | . | | . | . . . . | . . | . . . | . . . | . . | . . . . . . . | . . | . . . | . . . | . | | | . | | | . | 328 329 330 . | | . | . | . . . | . | . | . . . | . . |\n\n307\n\n.\n\n309\n\n.\n\n315\n\n.\n\n323\n\n.\n\n.\n\n331\n\n.\n\n.\n\n341\n\n.\n\n.\n\n351", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## Part 5. Resource Management Utility\n\n307" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.32894056830886714, + "doc_id": "5ed3e973993b9f4ae61c9a783cef1d2197fe2f8a244f7b693a70f3a9dba4a056", + "edit_distance": 0.4176470588235294, + "f1_score": 0.8554216867469879, + "meteor": 0.6131011649294912, + "precision": 0.9861111111111112, + "pred_md": "222\n\nYou can also show the list of PFD definitions in the specified PFD definition file. Move the cursor to the PFD definition prompt on the Print Database File Member display, and press the F4 key.\n\nThe Select PFD Definition display appears:\n\nSee page 215 through 221 for more information.\n\nWhen printing completes, the screen returns to the AFP Utilities menu with either a completion message or an error message which is displayed in the 24th line of the display depending on what happened during printing.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.7553191489361702, + "true_md": "Select PFD Definition File Library . ......: MYLIB Position to ...... Starting characters Type option, press Enter. 1=Select Opt File Text 1 PFDFILE PFD file for exercise Bottom F5=Refresh F12=Cancel\n\nSelect PFD Definition File.........: PFDFILE Library . .....: MYLIB Position to ...... Starting characters Type option, press Enter. 1=Select PFD Opt Definition Text 1 PRODUCTLBL PFD exercise Bottom F5=Refresh F12=Cancel\n\nYou can also show the list of PFD definitions in the specified PFD definition file. Move the cursor to the PFD definition prompt on the Print Database File Member display, and press the F4 key.\n\nThe Select PFD Definition display appears:\n\nSee page 215 through 221 for more information.\n\nWhen printing completes, the screen returns to the AFP Utilities menu with either a completion message or an error message which is displayed in the 24th line of the display depending on what happened during printing.\n\n222 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0024219846264434053, + "doc_id": "8cbb9ed4230d5aed90ed4eaa4031d546cc72f93f669bf8072b2e17a4c0478d7f", + "edit_distance": 0.9970605526161082, + "f1_score": 0.18947368421052632, + "meteor": 0.023725658648339067, + "precision": 0.10465116279069768, + "pred_md": "## Part 4. Design Operation and Fonts\n\n| Chapter 13. Design Operation Element Types . | . | . . | . | . . | | . . | . . | . . | . . | . | | . . | | | | . . . . | . . . | . | . | . . . . | . . . | . . . . . | . | . | . . | . | . | . | . | . | . . . | . | . | . . |\n|-------------------------------------------------------------------------|------------------------------------|-------|-------|-------|-------|-------|-------|---------|-------|-----|-------|-------|---------|-------------------|---------------|---------------------|---------|-----------|-------------------------------|---------------------|-------------------------|-----------------------------|---------------|-------------|-----------|-----------------------|-----------------------|-----------------------|-----------------------|-----------------------|-----------------------|-----------------------|-----------------------|-----------------------|\n| . . . | . | . | . | . . | . . | . | . . | . | . | . | . | . . | . . | . | . | . | . . | . | . | . . | | . . | . . | . | . | 227 227 | 227 227 | 227 227 | 227 227 | 227 227 | 227 227 | 227 227 | 227 227 | . |\n| . . . | . | . | | . . | . | . | . | . . | | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . . . | . . | . . . | . . . . . | | | . . . . | . . | . | 227 | 227 | 227 | 227 | 227 | 227 | 227 | 227 | 227 |\n| . . . | . . . | | . . | . | | . . | . | . . | . | | . | . | . | . | . | . . . . | . . | | . | . . . | . | . . | | . | | | | | | . | . 227 | . | | |\n| Bar Code . | . | | . . | . | . | | . | . . | . | . | | . | . | . | . | . . . | . | . . | | . | . | . | | . | | | | | | | | . | | |\n| . | | . . | . | . | | . . | | . | | | . | . | | . | . . | . . . . . . . | . . . . | . . | . . | . 227 | . | . | | . | | | | | | | | . | | |\n| Page Segment Graphics . | . | | . | | . | | . | . | . | . | . | | . | | . | . . | . | . . | . . | . 227 . 228 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . . | . . | . . . . | . . | | . | | . | | . | | | | | | | | | | |\n| Record Layout . | | . | . | . | . | . | . | . . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . . . | . . . | . | . | . | | | . . | | . | | | | | | | | | | |\n| | | . | | . | | | | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . . . | . . | . | . . | . | . 228 . | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| Defining Elements on the Design Display . Design Display . | | . . | . | . | . . . | . | . . | . | . | . . | . . | . . | . . | . . | . | . . . . | . . . | | . | . 228 . . 229 | . . | . . . . . | | . . | | | . | | | . | | . | | . |\n| Screen View . List View . | | . . . | . | . . | | . | . . | . . . | . . | . | . | . | . | . . | . . . | . . . . | . . | . . | . . . | . . . | . . | | . . | | | | | | | . . | . 229 . 229 | | | . . |\n| | . | . | . | | . | . | | | | | | | | | . | . . . . . | . . | | . . | | . | . | | | | | | | | | . 229 | | | . |\n| Defining Elements in the Screen View | | | | | . | | . . | . . | . | | . | . . | | | | . . | . | . . | . . . | . . . | . . . . | . . | . | . . . | . . . | . . . | . . . | . . . | . . . | . . . | 230 | . . | . . . | . . |\n| Layout of the Screen View | | | | | . | | . | | . | | . | . . | | . . . | . . | . . . | . . | . | . . . | . | . | . | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| Element Indication on Image Area - Element Mark . Element Mark On/Off . | | | | . | . | . | . . | . | . | . | | . . | . . | . | . | . . . | . | | . | . . | . . . . | . . . . . | . . | . . | . . . . . | 231 232 232 | 231 232 232 | 231 232 232 | 231 232 232 | . | 231 232 232 | . | 231 232 232 | . |\n| Hide . Refresh | . . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | | . | . . | | . | . . . . | | | . | . . . . . | . . | . . . . . | . | | | | | | | . | | | | . |\n| . . | . . . | . | . | . | . . . | . . | . . | . . . . | . . | . . | . | . . | | . . | . . | . . | . . | . | . | . . | . . . . | . | . . . | | | | . | | | . | 232 . 232 | | | . . |\n| Scroll . | . | . | . | . | | . | | . . | . | | . . | | | . . . | . . . . | . . . | . | . . . . | . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . | . . . . . . | . . . | . | . . . . . | . . . . | . . . . | . . . . | . . . . | . . . . | . . . . | . . . . | . . . . | . . . . | . . . . | . . . . |\n| Element Operations in the Screen View. Define Element Operation | | | | | . | | . . | | . | . . | . . . | | | | | | . | . . . | . | | . . . . . | . 233 . . . 234 . | | | | | | | | | | | | . |\n| Change Element Operation . Edit Operation . | | | . | . | | . | . . . | . | . | . | . | . | | . | . . | | . . . | . | . | . | . . . . . . . . | . . . . . | . . | . | . . . . . | 234 . 234 . 235 . 239 | 234 . 234 . 235 . 239 | 234 . 234 . 235 . 239 | 234 . 234 . 235 . 239 | 234 . 234 . 235 . 239 | 234 . 234 . 235 . 239 | 234 . 234 . 235 . 239 | 234 . 234 . 235 . 239 | 234 . 234 . 235 . 239 |\n| Function Keys on the Design Display Defining or Changing an Element | | | . | | . | . | . | . . | | . . | . . | . . | . . | . . | | | | . . . . . | . . . . . . | . | . | . | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| | . | | | | | | | . | . . | | . | | | | . | . . | . | . | . . . . | . | | . | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| . | . | | | | | | . . | . . | . | . | | | | | | | | | | . . . . . . . . . . | . . . . . . . . | . . . . . . . . . . . . | | | | | | | | | | | | |\n| Text . Line . . | . . | . | . | . | . . | . . | . | . . | . . | . . | . . . | . . | | . | | . | . . . | . | . | | . | . . . . . | . | . . . . | . . . . | . . . . | . . . . | . . . . | . . . . | . . . . | . 242 . 249 | . . . . | . . . . | . . |\n| Box. . . Bar Code . Page Segment | . . . | . . | . . | . . . | . . | . | . | . . . | . . | . . | . . . | | . . | . . | . . | . . . | . . | | . . | | . . | . . . . . | . . | | | | | | | | . 252 . 263 | | | . |\n| . | | . . | . . | . | . | . | | . . | . . | | . | . | . | | | . | . | . . | . | . . | . | . | | . . | . . . | | . | | | | . . . | . . . | . . . | . . . |\n| Graphics . . | . . | . | . | | . | . | . . | | | . . | . | | . | | . . | | . | . | . . | . | | . | . | . | . . . . | | | | . . . | . | . . . | 273 278 | 273 278 | 273 278 |\n| | | . | | . | . | . | | | . . | . | . | . | | . | . . | | | | | . | . | . . . . | . . | . . . . . . | | | . | | | | | | | |\n| Record Layout . Copy, Move, and Remove an Existing Element | | | . | . | | | . | | . . | | . . . | . | . . | | | . | . | | . . | | . . | . . . . | . . . | | | | | . . . | . . . | . . . | . . . | . . . | . . . | . . . |\n| | | . | . | . . | . | | . | . | . . | | . . | . . | | . | . | . | . | | | | . . | | | | | | 284 . 288 . 288 | 284 . 288 . 288 | 284 . 288 . 288 | 284 . 288 . 288 | 284 . 288 . 288 | 284 . 288 . 288 | 284 . 288 . 288 | 284 . 288 . 288 |\n| Element Edit Block Edit . | . . | . | . | . . | . | | | . | . . . | . . | | . . | . | . . . | . | . . | . . | . | . . | . . . . | . . . . | . . . | . . . . . . . | . . | | . | | | | | | | . | . |\n| Changing Elements in the List View. Layout of the List View . | | | | . . | . | | | | . . | . . | . . . | | . . . . | . . . . . . . . . | . . . . . . . | . . . . . . . . . . | . . | . . | . . . . . . . . . . | . . . . . . . . . . | . | . . | | . | . . | | | . . . | . | . . . | 289 . 291 . 291 | 289 . 291 . 291 | 289 . 291 . 291 | 289 . 291 . 291 |\n| Create or Change the Element . Create . . | . Copy, Move, Remove, or Restore . | . | . . . | . | . . | . | . | . . | . | | . . . | . . | . . | . . . . . . . | . . . . | . . . | . . . | | . . . . . . | . . | . . . . . . . . . . . . | . . . . . . . . . . . . . . | | . . . . . | . . . | . . . . | | . . | . . . | . 294 . 294 . 295 . | . 295 | . 294 . 294 . 295 . | . 294 . 294 . 295 . | . |\n| . Change . . Sort Element List | . | . . . | . . | . . | . | . | | | | | | . | | | . . . . | . . . | | | | | | . . | | . | | | | | | | . 295 | | | . |\n\n225\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n227\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n297", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## Part 4. Design Operation and Fonts\n\n225" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7071067811865475, + "doc_id": "bb9b74df2f83ca18f8e481c87da6fe95037caf6bf5c010688265aa182df0e258", + "edit_distance": 0.2, + "f1_score": 0.8421052631578947, + "meteor": 0.8017676767676769, + "precision": 0.8888888888888888, + "pred_md": "20\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.8, + "true_md": "20 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9156322054082036, + "doc_id": "35a68c0ec07429213f731e28098447ce834705ceb6b707e7c95857da56439558", + "edit_distance": 0.8920308483290489, + "f1_score": 0.9626168224299065, + "meteor": 0.7197320089618316, + "precision": 0.9716981132075472, + "pred_md": "60\n\n## Option 1 (Work with source overlays)\n\nWork with source overlays allows you to do the following:\n\n- v Create a source overlay. You can start this option by specifying a source overlay name with the option number.\n- v Change a source overlay.\n- v Copy a source overlay.\n- v Delete a source overlay.\n- v Print a source overlay.\n- v Rename a source overlay.\n- v Create an overlay object from a source overlay.\n\nSee 'Chapter 5. Work with Source Overlays' on page 61 for more information.\n\n## Option 2 (Work with source overlay files)\n\nWork with source overlay files allows you to do the following:\n\n- v Create a source overlay file by specifying the name of a library and a source overlay file name with the option number.\n- v Change the description of a source overlay file.\n- v Copy a source overlay file.\n- v Delete a source overlay file.\n- v Rename a source overlay file.\n- v Display the description of a source overlay file.\n- v Call the Work with Source Overlays display.\n\nSee 'Chapter 6. Work with Source Overlay Files' on page 83 for more information.\n\nIf you start by STROVLU , the Work with Source Overlays displayed on page 61 appears. You can skip the Work with Source Overlays display by specifying a source overlay name and an option number with the command.\n\nSee 'Chapter 21. AFP Utilities for iSeries Commands' on page 363 for more information.\n\n## Ending the Overlay Utility\n\nWhen you have finished working with the Overlay Utility, press the F3 key repeatedly. If you used the STRAFPU command to start the Overlay Utility, the menu panel displayed on page 59 appears.\n\nIf you started the Overlay Utility by the STROVLU command, the menu panel display on page 61 appears.\n\nTo end the Overlay Utility, press the F3 key one more time. Then the screen returns to the display from which you started the Overlay Utility.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.9537037037037037, + "true_md": "## Option 1 (Work with source overlays)\n\n## Option 2 (Work with source overlay files)\n\n## Ending the Overlay Utility\n\n60 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\nTo end the Overlay Utility, press the F3 key one more time. Then the screen returns to the display from which you started the Overlay Utility.\n\nIf you started the Overlay Utility by the STROVLU command, the menu panel display on page 61 appears.\n\nWhen you have finished working with the Overlay Utility, press the F3 key repeatedly. If you used the STRAFPU command to start the Overlay Utility, the menu panel displayed on page 59 appears.\n\nSee “Chapter 21. AFP Utilities for iSeries Commands” on page 363 for more information.\n\nIf you start by STROVLU , the Work with Source Overlays displayed on page 61 appears. You can skip the Work with Source Overlays display by specifying a source overlay name and an option number with the command.\n\nSee “Chapter 6. Work with Source Overlay Files” on page 83 for more information.\n\nWork with source overlay files allows you to do the following:\n\nSee “Chapter 5. Work with Source Overlays” on page 61 for more information.\n\nWork with source overlays allows you to do the following:\n\n- v Create a source overlay. You can start this option by specifying a source overlay name with the option number.\n\n- v Change a source overlay.\n\n- v Copy a source overlay.\n\n- v Delete a source overlay.\n\n- v Print a source overlay.\n\n- v Rename a source overlay.\n\n- v Create an overlay object from a source overlay.\n\n- v Create a source overlay file by specifying the name of a library and a source overlay file name with the option number.\n\n- v Change the description of a source overlay file.\n\n- v Copy a source overlay file.\n\n- v Delete a source overlay file.\n\n- v Rename a source overlay file.\n\n- v Display the description of a source overlay file.\n\n- v Call the Work with Source Overlays display." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8949058377971261, + "doc_id": "d564afc055722f47cb2e0be207230ad0a6e215edfaebd7af21f4872771ee5071", + "edit_distance": 0.20080321285140562, + "f1_score": 0.9908256880733944, + "meteor": 0.9678131698424384, + "precision": 0.9818181818181818, + "pred_md": "## Chapter 17. Starting and Ending the Resource Management Utility\n\n## Starting the Resource Management Utility\n\nYou can start the by typing the following commands on the command line and pressing Enter.\n\nSTRAFPU\n\nStarts AFP Utilities for iSeries. You can select any function of the Resource Management Utility.\n\n## CVTPCDPAGS\n\nAllows you to convert a PC document in a shared folder to a page segment.\n\nCVTPFMPAGS\n\nAllows you to convert a member in a physical to a page segment.\n\nCVTOVLPFM\n\nAllows you to convert an overlay to a physical file member.\n\nCVTPAGSPFM\n\nAllows you to convert a page segment to a physical file member.\n\n## Starting the Resource Management Utility with the STRAFPU Command\n\nWhen you start the Resource Management Utility with the STRAFPU command, the following display appears:\n\n```\nAFPU IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries Select one of the following: Overlay Utility 1. Work with source overlays 2. Work with source overlay files Print Format Utility 11. Work with PFD definitions 12. Work with PFD definition files 13. Print database file member 14. Print AFP Utilities tutorial Resource Management Utility 21. Convert to page segment 22. Work with overlays 23. Work with page segments Selection or command F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel F16=System main menu (C) COPYRIGHT IBM CORP. 1991, 1993.\n```\n\n323", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## Chapter 17. Starting and Ending the Resource Management Utility\n\n## Starting the Resource Management Utility\n\n## STRAFPU\n\n## CVTPCDPAGS\n\n## CVTPFMPAGS\n\n## CVTOVLPFM\n\n## CVTPAGSPFM\n\n## Starting the Resource Management Utility with the STRAFPU Command\n\n323\n\nYou can start the by typing the following commands on the command line and pressing Enter.\n\nStarts AFP Utilities for iSeries. You can select any function of the Resource Management Utility.\n\nAllows you to convert a PC document in a shared folder to a page segment.\n\nAllows you to convert a member in a physical to a page segment.\n\nAllows you to convert an overlay to a physical file member.\n\nAllows you to convert a page segment to a physical file member.\n\nWhen you start the Resource Management Utility with the STRAFPU command, the following display appears:\n\nAFPU IBM Advanced Function Printing Utilities for iSeries Select one of the following: Overlay Utility 1. Work with source overlays 2. Work with source overlay files Print Format Utility 11. Work with PFD definitions 12. Work with PFD definition files 13. Print database file member 14. Print AFP Utilities tutorial Resource Management Utility 21. Convert to page segment 22. Work with overlays 23. Work with page segments Selection or command F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel F16=System main menu (C) COPYRIGHT IBM CORP. 1991, 1993." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9847303031275643, + "doc_id": "a1e415d81c6da52c97ee8be53bc0dffb89b06493bd5bf696193d4eee3566bf55", + "edit_distance": 0.45903361344537813, + "f1_score": 0.9920508744038156, + "meteor": 0.9401188088454733, + "precision": 0.9936305732484076, + "pred_md": "code page. (1) A particular assignment of hexadecimal identifiers to graphic characters. (2) In AFP support, a font file that associates code points and graphic character identifiers.\n\ncode-page ID. A 5-digit registered identifier used to specify a particular assignment of code points to graphic characters. The code-page ID is the second part of the QCHRID system value or the CHRID parameter value. See also graphic character-set ID .\n\ncode point. (1) One of the bit patterns assigned to a character in a character set. On the system, a code point is represented by a hexadecimal number. For example, in code page 256 (EBCDIC), the letter \" e \" is assigned a code point of hex 85. (2) In AFP support, an 8-bit binary number representing one of 256 potential characters.\n\ncoded font. In AFP support, a font file that associates a code page and a font character set. For double-byte fonts, a coded font associates multiple pairs of code pages and font character sets.\n\ncommand. (1) A statement used to request a function of the system. A command consists of the command name abbreviation, which identifies the requested function, and its parameters. starts a protocol.\n\ncommand line. The blank line on a display where commands, option numbers, or selections can be entered.\n\ncommand prompt. A displayed character (or string of characters) that indicates that a user may enter a command to be processed.\n\ncompatibility. Ability to work in the system or ability to work with other devices or programs.\n\ncompletion message. A message that tells the operator when work is successfully ended.\n\nconcatenate. To join two character strings.\n\nconcept. An abstract idea.\n\ncontextual help. Help that explains the field on which the cursor is positioned when you press the Help key. Contrast with extended help .\n\ncontrol field. In AFP Utilities, an input field on the screen view that is used to move the image are up, down, left, or right.\n\ncontrol language (CL). The set of all commands with which a user requests system functions.\n\ncontrol language (CL) program. A program that is created from source statements consisting entirely of control language commands.\n\ncpi. See characters per inch (cpi) .\n\n468\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide\n\ncurrent library. The library that is specified to be the first user library searched for objects requested by a user. The name for the current library can be specified on the Sign-On display or in a user profile. When you specify an object name (such as the name of a file or program) on a command, but do not specify a library name, the system searches the libraries in the system part of the library list, then searches the current library before searching the user part of the library list. The current library is also the library that the system uses when you create a new object, if you do not specify a library name.\n\ncurrent release. The latest available release of the system that replaced the licensed internal code and/or the operating system.\n\ncursor. A movable symbol, often a blinking or solid block of light, that tells the display station user where to type, or identifies a choice to select.\n\ndata area. A system object used to communicate data, such as CL variable values between the programs within a job and between jobs. The system-recognized identifier for the data area is *DTAARA.\n\ndata integrity. (1) The condition that exists as long as accidental or intentional destruction, alteration, or loss of data does not occur. (2) Within the scope of a unit of work, either all changes to the database management systems are completed or none of them are. The set of change operations are considered an integral set.\n\ndata management. The part of the operating system that controls the storing and accessing of data to or from an application program. The data can be on internal storage (for example, database), on external media (diskette, tape, or printer), or on another system.\n\ndata stream. All information (data and control commands) sent over a data link usually in a single read or write operation.\n\ndata tower. In AFP Utilities, a set of intelligent printer data stream commands that represent a data type, such as text, image, graphics, and bar code.\n\ndatabase.\n\nAll the data files stored in the system.\n\ndatabase file. One of several types of the system object type *FILE kept in the system that contains descriptions of how input data is to be presented to a program from internal storage and how output data is to be presented to internal storage from a program. See also physical file and logical file .\n\nDBCS. See double-byte character set (DBCS) .\n\nDBCS conversion. A function of the operating system that allows a DBCS display station user to enter alphanumeric data and request that the alphanumeric data be converted to double-byte data.", + "recall": 0.9904761904761905, + "true_md": "code page. (1) A particular assignment of hexadecimal identifiers to graphic characters. (2) In AFP support, a font file that associates code points and graphic character identifiers.\n\ncode-page ID. A 5-digit registered identifier used to specify a particular assignment of code points to graphic characters. The code-page ID is the second part of the QCHRID system value or the CHRID parameter value. See also graphic character-set ID .\n\ncode point. (1) One of the bit patterns assigned to a character in a character set. On the system, a code point is represented by a hexadecimal number. For example, in code page 256 (EBCDIC), the letter † e † is assigned a code point of hex 85. (2) In AFP support, an 8-bit binary number representing one of 256 potential characters.\n\ncoded font. In AFP support, a font file that associates a code page and a font character set. For double-byte fonts, a coded font associates multiple pairs of code pages and font character sets.\n\ncommand. (1) A statement used to request a function of the system. A command consists of the command name abbreviation, which identifies the requested function, and its parameters. starts a protocol.\n\ncommand line. The blank line on a display where commands, option numbers, or selections can be entered.\n\ncommand prompt. A displayed character (or string of characters) that indicates that a user may enter a command to be processed.\n\ncompatibility. Ability to work in the system or ability to work with other devices or programs.\n\ncompletion message. A message that tells the operator when work is successfully ended.\n\nconcatenate. To join two character strings.\n\nconcept. An abstract idea.\n\ncontextual help. Help that explains the field on which the cursor is positioned when you press the Help key. Contrast with extended help .\n\ncontrol field. In AFP Utilities, an input field on the screen view that is used to move the image are up, down, left, or right.\n\ncontrol language (CL). The set of all commands with which a user requests system functions.\n\ncontrol language (CL) program. A program that is created from source statements consisting entirely of control language commands.\n\ncpi. See characters per inch (cpi) .\n\nDBCS conversion. A function of the operating system that allows a DBCS display station user to enter alphanumeric data and request that the alphanumeric data be converted to double-byte data.\n\nDBCS. See double-byte character set (DBCS) .\n\ndatabase file. One of several types of the system object type *FILE kept in the system that contains descriptions of how input data is to be presented to a program from internal storage and how output data is to be presented to internal storage from a program. See also physical file and logical file .\n\ndatabase. All the data files stored in the system.\n\ndata tower. In AFP Utilities, a set of intelligent printer data stream commands that represent a data type, such as text, image, graphics, and bar code.\n\ndata stream. All information (data and control commands) sent over a data link usually in a single read or write operation.\n\ndata management. The part of the operating system that controls the storing and accessing of data to or from an application program. The data can be on internal storage (for example, database), on external media (diskette, tape, or printer), or on another system.\n\ndata integrity. (1) The condition that exists as long as accidental or intentional destruction, alteration, or loss of data does not occur. (2) Within the scope of a unit of work, either all changes to the database management systems are completed or none of them are. The set of change operations are considered an integral set.\n\ndata area. A system object used to communicate data, such as CL variable values between the programs within a job and between jobs. The system-recognized identifier for the data area is *DTAARA.\n\ncursor. A movable symbol, often a blinking or solid block of light, that tells the display station user where to type, or identifies a choice to select.\n\ncurrent release. The latest available release of the system that replaced the licensed internal code and/or the operating system.\n\ncurrent library. The library that is specified to be the first user library searched for objects requested by a user. The name for the current library can be specified on the Sign-On display or in a user profile. When you specify an object name (such as the name of a file or program) on a command, but do not specify a library name, the system searches the libraries in the system part of the library list, then searches the current library before searching the user part of the library list. The current library is also the library that the system uses when you create a new object, if you do not specify a library name.\n\n468 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6060655437708256, + "doc_id": "88af827f4ff780634a144f2aaec954960beeea57c0a8ddaf409660f100beaaf9", + "edit_distance": 0.32142857142857145, + "f1_score": 0.875, + "meteor": 0.899078414660132, + "precision": 0.8235294117647058, + "pred_md": "The following table describes the Print Database File Member display.\n\nTable 47. Print Database File Member display fields\n\nChapter 12. Print Database File Member\n\n217", + "recall": 0.9333333333333333, + "true_md": "The following table describes the Print Database File Member display.\n\nTable47.PrintDatabaseFileMemberdisplayfields\n\nChapter 12. Print Database File Member 217" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8921162139198202, + "doc_id": "e553ab7c3803deffbe9aee7233ac385db141cf7c880ac7adf7de9545cbaf62df", + "edit_distance": 0.7345971563981043, + "f1_score": 0.9791666666666665, + "meteor": 0.7210738229304426, + "precision": 0.9690721649484536, + "pred_md": "## Chapter 22. Limitations and Restrictions\n\nThis chapter describes the limitations and the restrictions that you need to know to use the AFP Utilities for iSeries.\n\n## Overlay Utility\n\n## Limitations\n\n## Minimum and Maximum Limitations\n\nTable 81. Overlay Utility minimum and maximum limitations\n\n## Dashed and Dotted Lines\n\nIf the length of a line is too small compared with the line width, dashed and dotted lines are printed as solid lines.\n\nThe minimum length of this limitation depends on the line width.\n\n## Line Width and Overlay Size\n\nIf a line or a box is near the edge of the overlay and the line width is too big, some portion of the line may exceed the overlay size although the line or the box element is inside.\n\nIn this case, no lines are printed for that element and an error message is displayed.\n\n## Element Position\n\nIf you specify the overlay size in inches or centimeters and specify an element position in inches or centimeters, you may not be allowed to specify the position, although the position is inside the overlay size. This can occur at positions near the\n\n391", + "recall": 0.9894736842105263, + "true_md": "## Chapter 22. Limitations and Restrictions\n\n## Overlay Utility\n\n## Limitations\n\n## Minimum and Maximum Limitations\n\n## Dashed and Dotted Lines\n\n## Line Width and Overlay Size\n\n## Element Position\n\nIf you specify the overlay size in inches or centimeters and specify an element position in inches or centimeters, you may not be allowed to specify the position, although the position is inside the overlay size. This can occur at positions near the\n\nIn this case, no lines are printed for that element and an error message is displayed.\n\nIf a line or a box is near the edge of the overlay and the line width is too big, some portion of the line may exceed the overlay size although the line or the box element is inside.\n\nThe minimum length of this limitation depends on the line width.\n\nIf the length of a line is too small compared with the line width, dashed and dotted lines are printed as solid lines.\n\nThis chapter describes the limitations and the restrictions that you need to know to use the AFP Utilities for iSeries.\n\nTable81.OverlayUtilityminimumandmaximumlimitations\n\n391" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "d1e2bc54a44a504b57f78b569d35f7165d37b381d7d560e7e53f692d2612e48d", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.999958905235473, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "The following figure shows the position and the distance of the record in the page layout.\n\nChapter 13. Design Operation\n\n287", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "The following figure shows the position and the distance of the record in the page layout.\n\nChapter 13. Design Operation 287" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.537284965911771, + "doc_id": "1656eef75a24a03461d84a13cd8ef734026b1040aff2fc11ae55c5a78507b0f1", + "edit_distance": 0.6875, + "f1_score": 0.9629629629629631, + "meteor": 0.9098674889574131, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## PROFESSIONAL EMPLOYERS PRIVATE LIMITED\n\n## EXCEL TRAINING MANUAL\n\nPREPARED BY: AIMAN SALEEM", + "recall": 0.9285714285714286, + "true_md": "2013\n\nPROFESSIONAL EMPLOYERS PRIVATE LIMITED\n\nPREPARED BY: AIMAN SALEEM\n\n# EXCEL TRAINING MANUAL" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "4234cc19ad476472b9501caa0b24ed819a70be363c19b983fe563693752e3d63", + "edit_distance": 0.998898678414097, + "f1_score": 0.04411764705882353, + "meteor": 0.009199264058875294, + "precision": 0.023076923076923078, + "pred_md": "| 8=Display Description of PFD Definition File. | 12=Work with PFD Definitions | | . . | . . | . . | . | . . . . | . . | | . . . . | . . | . . . . | . . . . . . | . . . . | . . | . . . . | . . . . . . . . | . . 214 . . 214 | | | | | |\n|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|--------------------------------|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|-------------|---------|-------|-----------|-----------|-------|---------|-----------------|-----------------|---------------|---------------------|-------------------|-----------------------|-----------------|-------------------------|-------------------------------------|----|-------|-------------------|-------|-----|\n| Chapter 12. Print Database File Member | | | | | | | | . | . . | . | . . . | . | . | . . | . | . . | . | . . . | | | | | |\n| | | Start Printing from Work with PFD Definitions Display Start Printing from the AFP Utilities Menu | . | . | | . . . | . | . . | . . | . . | . . . | . . | . . | . . . | . . . . | . . | . . . . . . . | . . 215 . | | . | | | . |\n| Start Printing by PRTPFDDTA. | | | . | . . | . | . | . | . | . | . . . . . | . | . . . . | . | . . | . . | . . . | . . . . | . 221 . . 223 | | | | | |\n| Part 4. Design Operation and Fonts | | | | | | | . | . | . | . | . . . | . . . | . | . . | | . | . . | . . | | | . | | |\n| Chapter 13. Design Operation | | | | . | . | . | . | . | . | . . | . | . . | . . | | . | . | . | . . | | | | | |\n| Element Types | . . . | . . . | . . . | . | . . | . . . | . | . | . . | . | . . . | . . | . . . . . | . | . . | . . | . . | . . 227 | | . | | | |\n| Text . . Line . . | . . . . . | . . . . | . . . . . . | . . | . . | . . . . . | . . | . . | . . | . . . . . | . . | . . . . | . . | . . | . . . . | . . . . | . . . . . . | . . 227 . | | | | | |\n| Box. . . | . . . | . . | . . . | . . | . | . . | . | . . | . | . . . | . . | . . . . | . | . . | . . | . | . | . 227 . . 227 | | . | | | |\n| Bar Code . | . . | . . | . . . | . . | . | . . | . | . . | . | . . | . . | . | . | . | . . | . . . | . | . . | | | | | |\n| Page Segment | . | . . . | . . . | . . | . | . . | . | . | . | . | . . | . | . . . . . . | . . | . | . . . | . | 227 . 227 | | | | | . |\n| Graphics . | . . . | . . . | . . . | . . | . | . . | . | . | . . | . . | . . . . . | . | . . | . . | . | . . | . | . . 228 | | | | | . |\n| Record Layout . Defining Elements on the Design Display . | | . . | . . . | . . | . . | . . | . | . | . . . | . . | . | . | . . . . . | . . . . | . . | | . . | 228 | | | | | . |\n| | . | | | . | | . . . | . | . | . | . | . | . . . | . . . . . | . | . | . . . | . . | 228 229 | | | | | . |\n| Design Display . Defining Elements in the Screen View | . | . . | . . . | . . | . . | . . . | . . | . . | . . | . . | . . . | . . | . . . . | . . . . | . . | . . . | . . . . . . . . . . | . . . . . . . | | | | | . |\n| Element Operations in the Screen View. Function Keys on the Design Display | | | | . | . . | . . | . . | . . | . . | . . | . . | . | . | . . . . . | . . . . | . . | . . . | 229 | | | | | |\n| | | | | . | . . . | . | | . | . | . . . | . . . | . | . . . . . . | | . . | . . . | . | 233 235 . . | | | | | |\n| Defining or Changing an Element Copy, Move, and Remove an Existing Element | | | | . . | . | | . . | . . | . | . | . . . | . . . . | . . . | . . . | . . . . | . | . . | 239 . 288 . | | | | | |\n| Changing Elements in the List View. | | | . . | . . . | . | . . . | . | . . | . . | . . . . . . . . | . . . . . . . . | . . . . . . . | . . . | . . . . . | . | . . . | . . . . . | . . | | | | | |\n| Layout of the List View . | . . | | | . . | . . | . . . | . | | . | | . . | . . . . . | . . . . | | | | . | . . . | | | | | |\n| | | | . . . | . | | . | . | . | . . | | | . | | | . | | . . . | 291 291 . 294 | | | | | |\n| Create or Change the Element . Sort Element List Copy, Move, Remove, or Restore . | | . | . . | . . . | . . | . . . | . . | . . | . . | . . | . . . | . | . | | . | . . . . | . . . . . . . . . | . . 295 . . 295 | | | | | |\n| Chapter 14. Work with Fonts 2=Change Font . | . . | | . | . . . | . | . | . . . | | . | | | . . | . . . | . . . | . . . . . . . . | . . . . . | . . . . | . . . . | | | | | |\n| | . | . . | . . . . | | . . | . . | . | . . | . | | . . . . | . . . . | . . . . | . . . . . . . | | . | | . 300 . 304 | | | | | |\n| 5=Display Font . | . . . . | . . | | . | . . | . . | . | . . | | . . | . . . . | . . | | | | | | . | | | | | |\n| 9=Set Initial Font | | | . . . | . | . | | . | . . | | | . . . | | | | | . . | | 306 | | | | | |\n| Part 5. Resource Management Utility | | . . | | . | | . | | | | . | . . . . | . | | | . . | . | . | . . . | | | | | |\n| | | | | | | | . | | . | . | . . | | . | | | | | . . | | | | | |\n| Chapter 15. Introduction to Resource Management Utility (RMU) Converting to an iSeries Page Segment . | | | | . | . . | . | . | . | . | . | . . | . . . . | . . . . . . . . . . | . . . . . . | . . . | | . . . . . . . . . . . . | . . . | | | . . . | . 309 | |\n| | | | | | | | . | . . | | . . | . . . . | . . . | . . | | . . . . . | . . | . . | . . | | | | | |\n| Converting to a Page Segment from an iSeries Database File Converting to a Page Segment from a PC Document | . . | . | . . | . . . . | . . | . . | . . | . . . | . . | | . . . . . . | . . | . . . . . . | . . . | . . | . | . . . | . | | | | | |\n| Working with Overlays | | . . | . . . | . | . | | . . | . | | | . . | . . | . . . | . . . . . . . . . | . . . . . . . . . . . | | . . . . . . . . . | 309 . . . | . | . | | | |\n| Copying an Overlay Deleting an Overlay Renaming an Overlay Printing an Overlay | . | . | . . | . . | . | . | . . | . . | | | . . . . | . . . . . | . . . . . . . . . | . . . . . . . . | . . . . . . . . | . . . . | . . . . . | 310 311 311 311 312 312 . 312 . 312 | | . . . | | . . | |\n| | . . . . | . . | . . . | | . | . | . . | | . . . | . . . . . | . | | | | | . | | . 312 . 312 . 312 . 312 | | . . . | . . . . . . . . . | | |\n| Displaying an Overlay Description Changing an Overlay Description Converting an Overlay to Physical File Member. Working with Page Segments . | | . | . . | . . . | . . | . . . | . . . . | . | . . . . | . . . . . . | . . . . | . . . . | . . . . | | . . . . | . . . . . . . . | . . . . . . . | | | | | . . | . . |\n\nvi\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide\n\n.\n\n.\n\n215\n\n.\n\n.\n\n225\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n227\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n297\n\n.\n\n.\n\n307\n\n309", + "recall": 0.5, + "true_md": "vi AFPUtilitiesforiSeries:User’sGuide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7071067811865475, + "doc_id": "66d24e6c1003aecd208d8084896218a01a7f3381e41080c811c0866c6c18ea7f", + "edit_distance": 0.2, + "f1_score": 0.8421052631578947, + "meteor": 0.8017676767676769, + "precision": 0.8888888888888888, + "pred_md": "28\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.8, + "true_md": "28 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7071067811865475, + "doc_id": "1a7dd726c383c4528bb23cd102ac0714712e3a8b6b3fd0641a0dde5a3e38048b", + "edit_distance": 0.2, + "f1_score": 0.8421052631578947, + "meteor": 0.8017676767676769, + "precision": 0.8888888888888888, + "pred_md": "334\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.8, + "true_md": "334 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.3363109962314427, + "doc_id": "4eb1b3117f3e19427992796f0fd5d9a2754971ff049c1e0a983da3cadbdcbb6b", + "edit_distance": 0.40350877192982454, + "f1_score": 0.7894736842105263, + "meteor": 0.5977380083189522, + "precision": 0.967741935483871, + "pred_md": "192\n\nWhen you select Page segment on the Specify Mapping Object Name display, the following display appears:\n\nNote: Similar displays appear for other objects.\n\nNote: Similar displays appear for other objects.\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.6666666666666666, + "true_md": "When you select Page segment on the Specify Mapping Object Name display, the following display appears:\n\nNote: Similar displays appear for other objects.\n\n## Mapping Page Segment Name\n\nType choices, press the Enter key.\n\n\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_ More...\n\nF3=Exit F5=Refresh F12=Cancel\n\n192 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.27447938256311044, + "doc_id": "573e0e232999ac0bb48a8af3e73e70b8da7822f391e631577f6969c6016a0b25", + "edit_distance": 0.6, + "f1_score": 0.6470588235294118, + "meteor": 0.7353107664440168, + "precision": 0.55, + "pred_md": "404\n\nTable 83. Common symptoms and possible causes (continued)\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.7857142857142857, + "true_md": "Table83.Commonsymptomsandpossiblecauses (continued)\n\n404 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8519846566279036, + "doc_id": "9ad9e12a9209985ce82bd82752bb3d682c29fe91ef2d0e4b5c2beb2a0d76d557", + "edit_distance": 0.23756906077348067, + "f1_score": 0.9237668161434978, + "meteor": 0.8754680765086207, + "precision": 0.9716981132075472, + "pred_md": "The Edit Numeric display appears repeatedly for each selected field, and the Select Fields to Edit Numeric display appears again when the numeric code for the selected fields are specified.\n\nPress Enter or the F12 key on the select display, then return to the Define Text Detail display (or the Define Box Detail display).\n\n## Design Page Layout\n\nFrom the following display you can specify the design of the page layout.\n\n```\nDesign Page Layout Columns: 174 Control . . PFD definition . . . . . PRODUCTLBL *...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7.... 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 More... F3=Exit F6=Text F9=Line F10=Box F11=Bar code F21=Element edit F22=Block edit F24=More keys\n```\n\nChapter 10. Work with PFD Definitions\n\n169", + "recall": 0.8803418803418803, + "true_md": "The Edit Numeric display appears repeatedly for each selected field, and the Select Fields to Edit Numeric display appears again when the numeric code for the selected fields are specified.\n\nPress Enter or the F12 key on the select display, then return to the Define Text Detail display (or the Define Box Detail display).\n\nFrom the following display you can specify the design of the page layout.\n\nChapter 10. Work with PFD Definitions 169\n\nDesign Page Layout Columns: 1- 74 Control . . PFD definition.....PRODUCTLBL *...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7.... 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 More... F3=Exit F6=Text F9=Line F10=Box F11=Bar code F21=Element edit F22=Block edit F24=More keys\n\nSelect Fields to Edit Numeric Type options, press Enter. 1=Select Opt Field PRICE AMOUNT Bottom F5=Refresh F12=Cancel\n\n## Design Page Layout" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9714913547319529, + "doc_id": "32ef0ba22d68ae1cb0274c4f5e755d26b16bf1bf5ffe6858b705f88c5c29b49b", + "edit_distance": 0.5322128851540616, + "f1_score": 0.990033222591362, + "meteor": 0.9713634606982064, + "precision": 0.9933333333333333, + "pred_md": "4\n\nResource Management Utility: Provides full management of overlay and page segment (image) resources. Images scanned on a client workstation can be processed, resized, rotated, created, and printed. Resource Management Utility functions include:\n\n- v Manage overlays and overlay source files, including print and view options\n- v Create page segments from scanned image files, with sizing and rotation options\n- v Manage page segments, including print support\n- v Convert overlays and page segments to file format for use with client workstation applications\n\nPrint Format Utility: Provides an interactive method for creating AFP printing applications directly from database files. The Print Format Utility is similar to Query for iSeries, but the Print Format Utility is designed for creating AFP output, not reports. With the Print Format Utility, complex document applications that combine database-driven variable data with overlays, image, bar coding, fonts, and other document elements can be produced. Print Format Utility functions include:\n\n- v All of the text, box, line, bar code, graphics, and image functions supported with the Overlay Utility\n- v Ability to design a record layout and page layout\n- v Select records from a database file\n- v Place database fields anywhere in the record layout\n- v Place variable page segments (images) and graphics in the record layout\n- v Replicate the record layout across and down the page\n- v Select overlays to be added to each page\n- v Specify control breaks for selected fields in the database file\n\nThe AFP Utilities for iSeries provide you the above AFP* functions on the server interactively. You can perform your task by selecting options or typing choices on the menu display.\n\nThis chapter describes the following:\n\n- v What you can do with AFP Utilities for iSeries\n- v Functions of AFP Utilities for iSeries\n- v Requirements for use of AFP Utilities for iSeries\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.9867549668874173, + "true_md": "Resource Management Utility: Provides full management of overlay and page segment (image) resources. Images scanned on a client workstation can be processed, resized, rotated, created, and printed. Resource Management Utility functions include:\n\nPrint Format Utility: Provides an interactive method for creating AFP printing applications directly from database files. The Print Format Utility is similar to Query for iSeries, but the Print Format Utility is designed for creating AFP output, not reports. With the Print Format Utility, complex document applications that combine database-driven variable data with overlays, image, bar coding, fonts, and other document elements can be produced. Print Format Utility functions include:\n\nThe AFP Utilities for iSeries provide you the above AFP* functions on the server interactively. You can perform your task by selecting options or typing choices on the menu display.\n\nThis chapter describes the following:\n\n- v Manage overlays and overlay source files, including print and view options\n\n- v Create page segments from scanned image files, with sizing and rotation options\n\n- v Manage page segments, including print support\n\n- v Convert overlays and page segments to file format for use with client workstation applications\n\n- v All of the text, box, line, bar code, graphics, and image functions supported with the Overlay Utility\n\n- v Ability to design a record layout and page layout\n\n- v Select records from a database file\n\n- v Place database fields anywhere in the record layout\n\n- v Place variable page segments (images) and graphics in the record layout\n\n- v Replicate the record layout across and down the page\n\n- v Select overlays to be added to each page\n\n- v Specify control breaks for selected fields in the database file\n\n- v What you can do with AFP Utilities for iSeries\n\n- v Functions of AFP Utilities for iSeries\n\n- v Requirements for use of AFP Utilities for iSeries\n\n4 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.2968122670329592, + "doc_id": "6b66abea2ba083424a4f099edb1b604e92d79a9a0c491b175da320b8ad7be457", + "edit_distance": 0.8088235294117647, + "f1_score": 0.6227544910179641, + "meteor": 0.7401648305398704, + "precision": 0.4642857142857143, + "pred_md": "164\n\nTable 30. Reserved Variable Names\n\n*DATE\n\nThe date the Print Database File Member job is requested.\n\n*TIME\n\nThe time the Print Database File Member job is requested.\n\n*PAGNBR\n\nThe number of the page on which the record is printed.\n\n*RCDNBR\n\nThe record number within the database file.\n\n*DBFIL\n\nThe name of the database file to be printed.\n\n*DBLIB\n\nThe library name of the database file.\n\n*DBMBR\n\nThe name of the member to be printed.\n\nTo select reserved variable names, press the F4 key on the Define Text Detail (or the Define Box Detail) display. The following display appears:\n\n## Select Field in Record Format\n\nDatabase file\n\n.\n\n.\n\n. .\n\n. .\n\n:\n\nMLTFMT\n\nLibrary\n\n. .\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n.\n\n:\n\nSENDAI\n\nRecord Format\n\n.\n\n.\n\n. .\n\n. .\n\n:\n\nMLTFMT\n\nType an option, press Enter. 1=Select\n\nOpt Field\n\nLength\n\nType\n\nText\n\nAREA\n\n8\n\nC\n\nArea products developed\n\nPRICE\n\n3\n\nP\n\nPrice\n\nof\n\nthe\n\nproduct\n\nPRODCT\n\n12\n\nC\n\nProduct\n\nname\n\nSIZE\n\n4\n\nP\n\nSize\n\nBottom\n\nF5=Refresh F11=Select reserved variable F12=Cancel\n\n## Then press the F11 key. The following display appears:\n\n## Select Reserved Variable Name\n\nType option, press Enter. 1=Select\n\nOpt Reserved variable name\n\nDescription\n\n*DATE\n\nJob date\n\n*TIME\n\nJob time\n\n*PAGNBR\n\nPage number\n\n*RCDNBR\n\nRecord number\n\n*DBFIL\n\nDatabase file name\n\n*DBLIB\n\nDatabase library name\n\n*DBMBR\n\nDatabase member name\n\nF5=Refresh F11=Select field F12=Cancel\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.9454545454545454, + "true_md": "Table30.ReservedVariableNames\n\nTo select reserved variable names, press the F4 key on the Define Text Detail (or the Define Box Detail) display. The following display appears:\n\nThen press the F11 key. The following display appears:\n\n164 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide\n\n## Select Field in Record Format\n\nType an option, press Enter. 1=Select\n\nType option, press Enter. 1=Select\n\nF5=Refresh F11=Select field F12=Cancel\n\nF5=Refresh F11=Select reserved variable F12=Cancel\n\nBottom\n\n## Select Reserved Variable Name" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8756742598033813, + "doc_id": "fbbc9229b5a5285819b6267d66ae539c4e55727b5a9f59124853b32e4390144d", + "edit_distance": 0.07434944237918216, + "f1_score": 0.9488372093023255, + "meteor": 0.9253858838932585, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Chapter 6. Work with Source Overlay Files\n\nThis chapter provides the detail information for the Work with Source Overlay Files display.\n\nFrom the Work with Source Overlay Files display, you can choose the following functions.\n\n- v Creating a source overlay file to contain source overlays\n- v Changing the description text of a source overlay file\n- v Copying a source overlay file that contains source overlays to another source overlay file\n- v Deleting a source overlay file\n- v Renaming a source overlay file\n- v Displaying the description text of a source overlay file\n- v Going to the Work with Source Overlays display\n\nNote:\n\nTo create a source overlay file, you need a library in which the source overlay file will reside. If you do not have any libraries, you can create a library by entering CRTLIB (Create library) command on a command line on any display.\n\nTo show the Work with Source Overlay Files display, type 2 in the command line on the Advanced Function Printing Utilities menu and press Enter. The following display appears:\n\nUse this display to select the source overlay files you want to list and work with. You can use the Library and File prompts to specify subset criteria. When you press Enter, the Work with Source Overlay Files display appears with the list of source overlay files.\n\n83", + "recall": 0.9026548672566371, + "true_md": "## Chapter 6. Work with Source Overlay Files\n\nThis chapter provides the detail information for the Work with Source Overlay Files display.\n\nFrom the Work with Source Overlay Files display, you can choose the following functions.\n\n- v Creating a source overlay file to contain source overlays\n\n- v Changing the description text of a source overlay file\n\n- v Copying a source overlay file that contains source overlays to another source overlay file\n\n- v Deleting a source overlay file\n\n- v Renaming a source overlay file\n\n- v Displaying the description text of a source overlay file\n\n- v Going to the Work with Source Overlays display\n\n- Note: To create a source overlay file, you need a library in which the source overlay file will reside. If you do not have any libraries, you can create a library by entering CRTLIB (Create library) command on a command line on any display.\n\nTo show the Work with Source Overlay Files display, type 2 in the command line on the Advanced Function Printing Utilities menu and press Enter. The following display appears:\n\n## Work with Source Overlay Files\n\nParameters or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel\n\nUse this display to select the source overlay files you want to list and work with. You can use the Library and File prompts to specify subset criteria. When you press Enter, the Work with Source Overlay Files display appears with the list of source overlay files.\n\n83" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.12364052043538444, + "doc_id": "43cc77f5517b1352fc3957a8df1b1dc4beef2b5370bd297a91d5164351bc8bd2", + "edit_distance": 0.6310679611650486, + "f1_score": 0.6, + "meteor": 0.4266208024833778, + "precision": 0.9, + "pred_md": "Table 61. Select Field in Record Format (Graphics)\n\nSpecify Variable Graphics: You can specify a variable graphics element in a record layout. See 'Specify Mapping Object Name' on page 191 for more information.\n\nChapter 13. Design Operation\n\n283", + "recall": 0.45, + "true_md": "Table61.SelectFieldinRecordFormat(Graphics)\n\n## Select Field in Record Format\n\nDatabase file ......: MLTFMT Library . . ......: SENDAI Record Format ......: MLTFMT Type an option, press Enter. 1=Select Opt Field Length Type Text AREA 8 C Area products developed PRICE 3 P Price of the product PRODCT 12 C Product name SIZE 4 P Size BOTTOM F5=Refresh F11=Select Object F12=Cancel\n\nSpecify Variable Graphics: You can specify a variable graphics element in a record layout. See “Specify Mapping Object Name” on page 191 for more information.\n\nChapter 13. Design Operation 283" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6264400017630267, + "doc_id": "a8896829dc1ddb017899a964f9820010ad8708ec4e252bec7f62f2eb8efba196", + "edit_distance": 0.7325581395348837, + "f1_score": 0.7951807228915663, + "meteor": 0.703084304318026, + "precision": 0.7333333333333333, + "pred_md": "## A second Define Printout Specifications display appears.\n\nSpecify that the Print Format Utility should create an inline form definition.\n\n## Example Actions:\n\n- 1. Type *INLINE in the Form definition prompt.\n- 2. Press Enter key.\n\nThe Create PFD Definition display appears.\n\n## Exiting from Defining the PFD Definition\n\nNow you can save the PFD definition and exit from defining a PFD definition.\n\n```\nCreate PFD Definition File . . . . . . . . . . . : PFDFILE Library . . . . . . . . : MYLIB PFD definition . . . . . . : PRODUCTLBL Type options, press Enter. 1=Select Opt Action Define PFD specifications Work with PFD definition fonts Specify database file Specify break fields Design record layout Design page layout Specify record selection Define printout specifications Specify mapping object name F3=Exit F5=Refresh F9=Select all\n```\n\nChapter 8. Getting Started with Print Format Utility\n\n131", + "recall": 0.868421052631579, + "true_md": "A second Define Printout Specifications display appears.\n\nSpecify that the Print Format Utility should create an inline form definition.\n\nThe Create PFD Definition display appears.\n\nNow you can save the PFD definition and exit from defining a PFD definition.\n\nChapter 8. Getting Started with Print Format Utility 131\n\n## Exiting from Defining the PFD Definition\n\n## Example Actions:\n\n## Define Printout Specifications\n\n## Create PFD Definition\n\nType choices, press Enter.\n\nF3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel\n\nBottom\n\nForm definition . . . ...... *INLINE Name, *DEVD, *INLINE Library . . .......... Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB\n\n- 1. Type *INLINE in the Form definition prompt.\n\n- 2. Press Enter key.\n\nF3=Exit F5=Refresh F9=Select all\n\nType options, press Enter. 1=Select" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.974117000347659, + "doc_id": "13034f2429d04eeca29b64ef7f96eb48585506771a16162ba3c45cc6d269dbe3", + "edit_distance": 0.025157232704402517, + "f1_score": 0.9787234042553192, + "meteor": 0.9880346241214059, + "precision": 0.9857142857142858, + "pred_md": "182\n\nWhen you specify the above parameters and press the Enter key, the Define Text Detail display (or the Define Box Detail display) appears again.\n\nWhen you specify multiple summary data on the Text data prompt, the Select Fields to Define Summary Data display appears. You can select fields to change the summary function or specify an edit code on the display.\n\nThe Define Summary Data display appears repeatedly for each selected field.\n\nIf you specify break fields, you can print the summary data for each page break or for each page by specifying Y or N for the Print at page break only prompt on the Define Text Detail display (or the Define Box Detail display). The Print at page break only prompt appears at the bottom of the Detail display, and it appears only when\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.971830985915493, + "true_md": "When you specify the above parameters and press the Enter key, the Define Text Detail display (or the Define Box Detail display) appears again.\n\nWhen you specify multiple summary data on the Text data prompt, the Select Fields to Define Summary Data display appears. You can select fields to change the summary function or specify an edit code on the display.\n\nThe Define Summary Data display appears repeatedly for each selected field.\n\nIf you specify break fields, you can print the summary data for each page break or for each page by specifying Y or N for the Print at page break only prompt on the Define Text Detail display (or the Define Box Detail display). The Print at page break only prompt appears at the bottom of the Detail display, and it appears only when\n\n182 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.11913843156450898, + "doc_id": "326686b822bab38724349d249ab4885f97b79ad8265984ff2e074a3afdc7ad13", + "edit_distance": 0.639344262295082, + "f1_score": 0.625, + "meteor": 0.41014547710976285, + "precision": 0.8, + "pred_md": "358\n\nThe following table describes the Convert Page Segment to File display.\n\nThe following table describes the Convert Page Segment to File display.\n\nTable 80. Convert Page Segment to Files display fields\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.5128205128205128, + "true_md": "## Convert Page Segment to PFM\n\nThe following table describes the Convert Page Segment to File display.\n\nTable80.ConvertPageSegmenttoFilesdisplayfields\n\nF3=Exit F5=Refresh F12=Cancel\n\nType choices, press Enter.\n\n- Page segment........: QFCLOGO Library . ........: QGPL\n\n- Page segment........: QFCLOGO Library . ........: QGPL\n\n358 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6093972200848561, + "doc_id": "70b45aa24d3a0d516c90c8a5acbb2ddf0b49791e181722f383de0b8dbea81a8c", + "edit_distance": 0.35714285714285715, + "f1_score": 0.8727272727272726, + "meteor": 0.7603053435114504, + "precision": 0.8, + "pred_md": "Choice on the Define Box Detail display:\n\nFormat : 1=Horizontal Degree of rotation : 0\n\nFigure 34. Print Example - 1\n\nFigure 34. Print Example - 1\n\nAppendix B. Rotation, Format, and Shading Pattern in Box\n\n421", + "recall": 0.96, + "true_md": "Choice on the Define Box Detail display:\n\n- Format : 1=Horizontal Degree of rotation : 0\n\n- Format : 1=Horizontal Degree of rotation : 0\n\nFigure34.PrintExample-1\n\nAppendix B. Rotation, Format, and Shading Pattern in Box 421" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.862114217660516, + "doc_id": "c006c12a54f16d4047da682a595b27698f55f8c189954462b8d975f71fdd7655", + "edit_distance": 0.291497975708502, + "f1_score": 0.981549815498155, + "meteor": 0.9472213903391556, + "precision": 0.9779411764705882, + "pred_md": "B\n\nasic English Language Skills\n\nWhen we think about our careers, and what we need to do to establish them, we often forget about the need to develop an essential skill: communication. If you start reading through the job descriptions in a industry, you will find that the vast majority of jobs require one or more of the following:\n\n- · Effective communication skills\n- · Interpersonal skills\n- · Ability to work in a team\n- · Negotiation skills\n- · Conflict resolution skills\n- · Report writing skills\n\nWhat all of these skills have in common is that they involve the use of language to achieve a particular purpose. And for this reason, having good language skills is essential in any working environment.\n\n## In a career context, good language skills can also:\n\n- · Affect your credibility. Poor grammar indicates to a prospective employer that you are sloppy, while flawless grammar indicates that you pay attention to detail.\n- · Improve your relationships with your co- workers. If you are able to express yourself clearly, you can eliminate the confusion and misunderstanding that often leads to conflict.\n- · Increase your chances of being promoted.\n- · Help you to create a good impression.\n- · Improve your ability to persuade others (which is a valuable skill in the working world).", + "recall": 0.9851851851851852, + "true_md": "When we think about our careers, and what we need to do to establish them, we often forget about the need to develop an essential skill: communication. If you start reading through the job descriptions in a industry, you will find that the vast majority of jobs require one or more of the following:\n\nBasic English Language Skills\n\nWhat all of these skills have in common is that they involve the use of language to achieve a particular purpose. And for this reason, having good language skills is essential in any working environment.\n\n## In a career context, good language skills can also:\n\n- • Effective communication skills\n\n- • Interpersonal skills\n\n- • Ability to work in a team\n\n- • Negotiation skills\n\n- • Conflict resolution skills\n\n- • Report writing skills\n\n- • Affect your credibility. Poor grammar indicates to a prospective employer that you are sloppy, while flawless grammar indicates that you pay attention to detail.\n\n- • Improve your relationships with your co- workers. If you are able to express yourself clearly, you can eliminate the confusion and misunderstanding that often leads to conflict.\n\n- • Increase your chances of being promoted.\n\n- • Help you to create a good impression.\n\n- • Improve your ability to persuade others (which is a valuable skill in the working world)." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.40906682831178603, + "doc_id": "7194ac657a165f4f7fc14fc14265fd585a9e5822c2966c547bdd499ef07c2138", + "edit_distance": 0.7784431137724551, + "f1_score": 0.7049180327868854, + "meteor": 0.727373993095512, + "precision": 0.5657894736842105, + "pred_md": "166\n\nFigure 19. Position-and-trim mapping\n\nFigure 19. Position-and-trim mapping\n\n- 1. Variable data defined in the record layout:\n- 2. Fixed data defined in the record layout:\n- 3. Fixed data defined in the page layout (the page layout is described in a later section):\n\nText\n\nThe name (Raymond Bills) and the employee number (058297). The employee number (058297) is printed as a bar code below the employee number printed as text.\n\nBar code\n\nText\n\n″ Employee name : ″ and ″ Employee number : ″\n\nLine\n\nLine between the text elements\n\nBox\n\nBox around the text elements\n\nText\n\n″ ″ ″ The logo at the top.\n\nEmployee record and iSeries Stationery Co., Ltd. ″\n\nImage\n\nConcatenation of Variable Data and Fixed Data: You can concatenate variable data and fixed data by typing the text as follows:\n\nAFP Utilities for iSeries: User's Guide", + "recall": 0.9347826086956522, + "true_md": "Figure19.Position-and-trimmapping\n\nConcatenation of Variable Data and Fixed Data: You can concatenate variable data and fixed data by typing the text as follows:\n\n- 1. Variable data defined in the record layout:\n\n- 2. Fixed data defined in the record layout:\n\n- 3. Fixed data defined in the page layout (the page layout is described in a later section):\n\n166 AFP Utilities for iSeries: User’s Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8181493153043996, + "doc_id": "718f87aecc194b1c69e7576b224779f8965b4595dfd6c5f12e28549da8a7a25b", + "edit_distance": 0.7902097902097902, + "f1_score": 0.935483870967742, + "meteor": 0.9191347220046985, + "precision": 0.8923076923076924, + "pred_md": "Figure 22. Letter which contain a Page Segment\n\nFigure 22. Letter which contain a Page Segment\n\n## Working with Overlays\n\nThis function allows you to:\n\n- v Copy an overlay object in a library\n- v Delete overlay objects in a library\n- v Print an overlay in a library\n- v Rename an overlay in a library\n- v Display the description of the overlay object\n- v Change the description text of the overlay object\n- v Convert an overlay to a physical file member\n\n## Copying an Overlay\n\nThis function calls the CL command CRTDUPOBJ and copies an overlay object to a new one.\n\n## Deleting an Overlay\n\nThis function calls the CL command DLTOVL and deletes the specified overlay.\n\nChapter 15. Introduction to Resource Management Utility (RMU)\n\n311", + "recall": 0.9830508474576272, + "true_md": "Figure22.LetterwhichcontainaPageSegment\n\n## Working with Overlays\n\n## Copying an Overlay\n\n## Deleting an Overlay\n\nThis function allows you to:\n\nThis function calls the CL command CRTDUPOBJ and copies an overlay object to a new one.\n\nThis function calls the CL command DLTOVL and deletes the specified overlay.\n\nChapter 15. Introduction to Resource Management Utility (RMU) 311\n\n- v Copy an overlay object in a library\n\n- v Delete overlay objects in a library\n\n- v Print an overlay in a library\n\n- v Rename an overlay in a library\n\n- v Display the description of the overlay object\n\n- v Change the description text of the overlay object\n\n- v Convert an overlay to a physical file member" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "c057d42c73ca6e4cf995ce6eba3075e4871cf09b5b5348b956fe4bf115a5ae70", + "edit_distance": 0.7902097902097902, + "f1_score": 0.935483870967742, + "meteor": 0.9191347220046985, + "precision": 0.8923076923076924, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.9830508474576272, + "true_md": "aM HB HUTM\n\n03809453. 3\n\nHER, AFANFTER.\n\nREAZÄNR-TE, MAT -FOERFARZEETERRNMG HF MARKIERTE, HAZERE:\n\nS$2ZAGR, PRX AIMEE, WIP DARK Bh WERT, EFESRKOFRZAIH KR FA EN IHK GI RMZF RAN FERAL F LAA OAK SAVER RAMA BR\n\nida TAAS: HERKAPEMERBYMBS, YB BREF: AERA VES REAR KA DAKE EF DU LAAD He, dh (Hilde) EHE FAR, RS-AN MSRM, RAT — 4 <A IL ARE\n\nESAT ARA AEE DPR SLOHAS Pie ERE A IE 4B, VARA UT HAM RE. SPARAMERET: TUMIER AWRY, FAEPATOAMMERBET RA, FAA RR (4S ERRDUMA HRA) MBRAT: TRARY MITRE.\n\nAik K LABEL ETS FoR: ZA KAREN; EMGELACPHMARAYO EM, RPRARAEREABAH AI KERR, Fo/REMEKA CY AEMARAY BA, Fo/R ERMA fo BO. PRADA THAR EAEY SFR BSA, FRA MA: ARR RERRERPB SOB, BRK, RARA PAS RAM, HEMEMARAY BAAR AS SMA. ERT EF, HLA PIR REAR APA RHE BAT LEE\n\nRA MBRETARAYAALR, RIUADMEZM. BATA P\n\n11\n\nAk GIR, HRA REMERG OAS, AS:\n\nKAD, LPL ARKABREKM:\n\nHRPM, APAREAARA WALES; VR\n\nme, HPA AMARAARES WAAL &.\n\nPIR KPRGUERT AS: HILAR ARERERBA LGA RG Ue wh RO AAA EOP ABD. PHM BRET: FREAD] aext SLA A OO PALE BIT AIR, (ARATE RARER APRA POABALEA EG LA PRE LE EMER, (lee) VAT SH. SMEAR A BFF BAY." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "d5ceb22351506d311f2b169953581fd80ef7fdc2d64d4c85522563be1e722c94", + "edit_distance": 0.7902097902097902, + "f1_score": 0.935483870967742, + "meteor": 0.9191347220046985, + "precision": 0.8923076923076924, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.9830508474576272, + "true_md": "03809453. 3\n\nit AA + Hy\n\nFS 1/5 00\n\n22" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "ce6f81ff1c42dd4e5bc0b07c12aaff6748fbe98d2b908e64a4da4bc91dacdb53", + "edit_distance": 0.7902097902097902, + "f1_score": 0.935483870967742, + "meteor": 0.9191347220046985, + "precision": 0.8923076923076924, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.9830508474576272, + "true_md": "19\n\nbe AW fh 15/17\n\n03809453. 3\n\n488. EAA PRP, TASZAT THR IVdiii 2) Vdv, HPATUR Vai HERP ERE, HABE REK 40 MAEM, Fl AOI, FHARAREFUR Vay PRRRE-KELZG, FHT MRREK SON OE. KLENTUIEALA RAMP RRS ER MARSH. ZS BSP, AAP 204MM RARE HERA LERARA ERY DRG, ~RERMA SEB AFL, MABE BH.\n\nA& LRAT PER Ve PRAMS 30 iY ARBRE KMAAN PAMREA. FRAG ELA 4, KARRGRIVAAGEPERIV. B 8 C4ASR APR HALMB|HH, HPATHR Wb RP HRAM 30 ABST ELA AO. UATRA DR Va, HPAL A 40 KARE 50,\n\nRE, WMATIARGRIVe, HYP AREA 50 MLBLK 40 HRY ABA SIRI AF PRIVd, ZGREK4OERMAVEK, BAP RIVe, MAA Ra Ud k ih Rik R EA 50. FBR IVE FB RRL R EA 50 FAZER RK 40 GH. AG, HOP PR Ve MT, MATERA. we, EF PR Vegi MEBRA 40 SP oe LA 30 HAR Hed SME k, BP 3% AL 30 EAE AR HSE, PPE AIIM VU k MIR RK 50, eoRiAGR Ve GAT. ETP RIVh, AREA 50 A PA MAA k RERZER-MAIUEK YH. BARPRIVIEAYAM. Ae, BRAG AFHIREK 50 RAM. BPH GA 30 SHREK SOZMRMT MAR A, wR VAT. MVE P IRMA 30 RAMA kK, REP He A 30 ALAS txt SABRE SIRI QI REA SOARS MARE. LA-VMTH, ik RAWAM, LRARBDAMIY. Am, AREAS, FARIA KIRA AM.\n\nAORTA 1 its TFT AN TEN. OA 1 Ake He TRIGEEK 4. GROG EKA 2 TW RAMALLAH, HATA iti (ERS 5 AES PRL 30 SH REA SO. Ace, —P BPR FL 30, PP —+ARYES 30, BAS UMEBEA 4. 4222, HAASE RD I RHE HM MAB KK.\n\nA 10 RRARA 1 RAO Hike AREA M TEA. thst HWA IRI PA -MABEARH, PPR RRKA 42, REA 50 Py VA SHEAR 40 (La LAA HOLE 40) REA OK & IRI." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "a965173feb3abd3f291e4dd0caae53773fa30079954ba6e6fd364d07088adc7e", + "edit_distance": 0.7902097902097902, + "f1_score": 0.935483870967742, + "meteor": 0.9191347220046985, + "precision": 0.8923076923076924, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.9830508474576272, + "true_md": "RM A BR Th 3/3\n\n03809453. 3\n\nBe\n\n16. #RABALAIZSR 1S HAR, HP-PSP MAA AUMLBRARA.\n\n17. AREAS R 15 HAR, RPAWMA RHA ALLE RRE, HATARHREMGHEREARE, AACE R AND GAH FEN EVEL" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "33e3740ace66169f932673b12df1478620cb3460f76a809863ac8bec02583d05", + "edit_distance": 0.7902097902097902, + "f1_score": 0.935483870967742, + "meteor": 0.9191347220046985, + "precision": 0.8923076923076924, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.9830508474576272, + "true_md": "03809453. 3\n\nbe A fh 12/17\n\n16\n\nK-50, ERBERP, ATPRIVI, ZCHRA SAP 20RZ, UR P 200IMEA THAD, BREA, AP 10 RGBATHR Vd MUR TAR SOWA, ZRAAGLEA 4 BY RERAMAREA 50,\n\nA4EFR-HRHAAMNFER, APRA, PTW HRSH LAA AWD (ATIPS) BH. RRA REA SV SEP REA VZMA MEG (AER), BEIBFRRR HERAN. RERZSPRAA 30 WAAL 20 sw 30. AAR 4 PHAMIAA—F, ARE AAA 20, BPHTAAP 20. AP 20 RARER I0RA. ARI, AP 20 Eel AR KA 50, RWS 30 Aww REA 0 HO ATs RAR FTF M ATE RAFERE A SOK EH AMS 30 HZ cookie, XK HBA 320 Hae LA PRA, WARD R IL AHTAw, 8 JEILA ERA EPH, FUR Ila, AREA 50 MRS 30 HK ALA ERAMASY, HLEMAAP 20. TARAS ARMA AMITEE HM, HPAP 0 4AARKRRRAA A MAAK S IRL Hea E LI. A FUP lic, MIKREK 50 RiAR “localhost” (HFA 40 aFA a) Ate E HE LI, THR la SF HR Ilo VLR EKA 40 £EEZAPR IL, WRAA MEERA 40 (HARE) ARAM 4, MPU eA “localhost” HASHMI. RH, HRA-* ASE LABRASN, TAREE ABE ALEERKABRAA. BK A, SARPRA ORBEA IO, BRP AP eA AS ERS A400, Axe pT BAA P REAWRMAAEAARRLOA PERE RAY, ASH, CKROGRII GSFHR lla, RHA HTTP FZ 2, PME REA 50 ORS 30 RURAL, WATFRI, Ar it] WR 30 SEERA 40, RRA HAH, HY HTTP bee fos VAS H—UMX, Bio SOAP (MBM RDA) ME. AM, AIK AERA SID AEF PR 11d PEM. HREM (HIWEDR 1 PiF RAR GAY URL) RTA, HRI, AAR TAMIA PTA by SAK 40 OY AFA, RIF REA 50 MIP BH AAAS & IRI AH, WI LA Ep Se AIR VA Bik Bodh (A AF HR Ve PUR). HOR sme, LAT ASRRAER. MW “AM” HHRZELAATOR IVe ¥ 4 ¢e 2 AAROURL Masi 255 FH, MAF HR 1ld RGAE EL, GS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "b6c678c2989c1aa7c6ceb75f3f02c26bce3583738058b3bbfacd0771898d8eaa", + "edit_distance": 0.7902097902097902, + "f1_score": 0.935483870967742, + "meteor": 0.9191347220046985, + "precision": 0.8923076923076924, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.9830508474576272, + "true_md": "03809453. 3\n\nit AA +5\n\nET\n\nBig EARP YK BaF KRM\n\nZEA AR IR\n\nKAY HRA QU REARHAATPAM ARMA EM AERA %. Bob, AAWPR-M MAR EAGT AME (LARA) £ ARTE RNIT.\n\nRIA\n\nSMELH, RERELNELAM, HKRTI-PAWAATAL ENE BH, RULE LEY LSA MARFRA. EISTH, BAR ZELE HIMFR TRAHNAR. BHA, ANS L-REABS-EAM (single sign on), VA*FIRKAFRAM LY SRE.\n\nSEHRLRAAM ETHAN SHR: FOS Be Rae WPA, SP REA Se BAR EAME OD RET EM IL A APA I\n\nB-EHENNÄRFEBERTAHAR, ANARRE-NTS, a RAIA A KR A AZ A RBA, fe Pe BER PA eR 1k A) — DAA MILA TDL.\n\nBit, CHIPPER, LAAZA—iH, H)4eA Liberty Alliance(URL: http://www.projectliberty.org) 2. 4 Microsoft 2+ 4) #) Passport A& (URL: http://www.passport.com ). Microsoft 24] 4) #TiH Passport AM 2U# fa) 4K A Passport £4 SIRS, SoH Microsoft 24) 4k KiB 4T, ALITA P BRA Sh HAUT RFRSED. BROEBAAER AMAA SE, RHE SARA. Passport SAT LSE (KAA A SERFS ) AAR RIK TY IRF.\n\n5IWEBAANE-EWHARREACRHE—-EM?P SHEA BBA RREME B.\n\nRin, Gkoth* BREMP AA -PEBUSRE CHAKA ME FRSRE OT REF AEMBERLHSS CMASHARAZSAAAN HKAErRHER. Hr, HAN DSRNA ELEM BLS RE" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "4dc7150aa7b990b8444a3b91e2f496203d058eb7d6d479810ee5f26e3032d02f", + "edit_distance": 0.7902097902097902, + "f1_score": 0.935483870967742, + "meteor": 0.9191347220046985, + "precision": 0.8923076923076924, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.9830508474576272, + "true_md": "03809453. 3\n\nam EB BAM\n\n3, RES Passport 48 F)( AA Req.1). HRA RT Mies 8 AA Req3 ), El suik A PAAR (Reg.5) ULRMFEZUMAR (Req4).\n\nShibboleth( http: //middlewgre.internet2.edu/shibboleth ), #P Internet2/MACE (HEFMNFAZRZAMENL) MÄR, LEEFRIHF NN HERTZ 28H) oy AIR KR EQ, ZERVA BARAK. Shibboleth @S4RF] Pris 04 KFLAMWAKH, AADALT Req.l: RFBARA PREACH KRS TAP AS AR, EE RA WAYE 04H — RAGE AK, 7K WAYF LRA KFLAN SMH GE”. MAGA E LRA TS Mie, REKFRAMBGAFKEY FLEA PEL A SERFS. MES FLAPS WHABRBALEARKFRAMABRA, BUNKHBRA, MSBR GRFRE AL. BMA AAFAMRE (Reqgl) SESH (Req.4), # KAA AHWR TAMRLAR PERM AFR R. RA OF AERA ZILE ARH, PRR AR MOMEAL”, B-WHAKE FSA), A ARBAMRALYA SSA RA—-AMALEM. SA ES ES MMA RHE FEAL Shibboleth PAA “BRE”, BP RAMS PMA ER, LMLSAFEAMAZ. AS, BR Shibboleth & AAR, (RAH AR OA A BAM R EG (AA Req.5), RRA AAR RKEUSRS BU ha ARE. BRE, MFRPAP RAK SLARRAR FRADE BARAK AIF R, Shibboleth LA RADHA, LAAAR WEA Bp WAAP MAK) MRHA-ELMALHRL, MELA ERFSEHA-— NE EA\n\nAEA EIA, TARNAARGRAAM TRUM ES BAANE B&B, Has aA S5ARzZ HY RAM.\n\nZANZ\n\nAZNKHTERRINIDER, KTMAERLEIRFETARÄHSE MAHER, HHAESAMIDMAE EME, ZERAPAPR LAR YBRERAA KAA PORES SRO POEM HEE SHR (ALARA GRE) MARAT AKMRKH, VARRARBY EMR, RASA, KAAERFRMAUMRS (PHRF RS) HAMA PB TR— EH BItF SIAR IH 4 AE LIE RK. HAL, AR AEA FRE HTTP\n\n8" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "1560aceff96aedff6ac27fe6b1e6695a309349bcd1ce1b01f4c5a42e88936a38", + "edit_distance": 0.7902097902097902, + "f1_score": 0.935483870967742, + "meteor": 0.9191347220046985, + "precision": 0.8923076923076924, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.9830508474576272, + "true_md": "03809453. 3\n\nM Fl Bk Ff\n\n381/30\n\nL. —#P AIR EARRD OHA EMA, PRFEBS:\n\n4g RYR (11), BREAK, ARMEP HMA RATS AS WHATS BALE AMS EES:\n\nSHR (11), RARER ABA REA, UAE RIEF NA KIEFER TUR, VAR\n\nBR (Ve), RFDREDEP MAA EALAT SE OAARKA, HAH LQ R EAMG A WAKE EE.\n\n3. ARGERAIZR LAK, Lassa HR: MRA URL # REY KE BM KEA ER GSITRA DM (1Va).\n\n4 ARE RAER LAA, HPARREKASP MMAR E ZEKSEP sR RL ARERR AR EUR,\n\n5. AREA AIBZR IL MAH, RPE RAUMN TEP MAA KE.\n\nRER ER INTER, Ka: HPARKKASWiE-M, MRS RAB ZEAL ESAS HMA, RPA OBA EN RFRA NAAR.\n\nREBNER INGE, Reads: HAREKARREMAR BAKE HRA ERS.\n\n8. FAP TREAT ILERLAM GDR EMA, FIAT OSERRIGRAADEP 3M MAR SAMRAT EKA ERES BTL AT VA FOR:\n\nSLAGR (11), ARMEP MAAEKEMER, VERO RK Bek iG REA, VAR\n\nKAD (IV), ARG REAGER OMAR, 8:\n\nKAD (Va), HPRAKARABREA,\n\nRRGR (IV), AHRRFIMMAER, HARRFREE:\n\nKADR (Va), HPMBAKAKAAREA:\n\nWRDR (Vc), HPARKARRA WAS, UA\n\nLR (Ve), HP AREA LEKAEIKA WH KE E.\n\n2. ARGERAIZRK LFA, RPHRRRGR (IV) ROSSA ATS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "5003688e1ae61558cbeda741d246804b59fe89dac29cf508b4b6ce56d1a4342b", + "edit_distance": 0.7902097902097902, + "f1_score": 0.935483870967742, + "meteor": 0.9191347220046985, + "precision": 0.8923076923076924, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.9830508474576272, + "true_md": "03809453. 3\n\nan HB Bm\n\nAZ EM, MRABHHRARARLESTÄHZIIRSZÄHR LES ab,\n\nRANE —iERA RABE LSS SRBAREM FES BAYH 2 Aldo, US 5944824 AF J AUF SNMMALEM REMARK SFE.\n\nKARA RARRBOEP Mm, BARA (AA Req2). AH, HRE ATM, WRABE JOH DIBLAER (AAG Rega), Facile Fs RW (Reg.5 ).\n\nte AVAL BA hob 2e 44 (PKI), RA SHA XS09, KRLAF ATH jee (BRA Req.3). AAT es FIA LIED, PVs RRiERS AT HEA OMAK, MBER ALM, 2H Reqs FH. MTSNA ENZF EHRT, TMZHRÄH- FI ERHRZ ZEHN BEN FT, Alte, ABEEBWAAK, PALSRARMEWAP MARA (Req2), FAA HAAAEM AAR AE OTA BREA (GRR Req.2).\n\nELDILG SP EIEPRARBN GA? DARPARS. CHMNAAMREF WRE, AMRSBAMNRZFRP, RAMA ADAIEAMLARRRRSEP Ajit se FR EMR REA LREP HOLE, GEA RIEL, RS Req.2 FR. AM, CNAAREASH ZRH, RAAARAHWMYA EMR SERRE.\n\nMicrosoft #9 Passport R&— 8] 212 RARA ZY BARA AF LIRA A PO BMRA, BRA PARA RT He LAA iA, Alte, ikIE A PORTAL ERA, AMHR Reql PR. NARAAN BAHR, HIATMEÄELTEHENZERFFRFAÄHIN KEN, I wana htsvnnneneteswns BRIE A RR FRA Big kh, @Amtey AT RARA RRA AL, RAF RRA.\n\nPassport PRARPELF AF AAV (KAA Reg.3). AH, HHRAAH EBL: FEEAAM PRR | AP RBALAAS MEP HLEAES 6) oe RE RIL — AB, AM, iL IUKT MRAP HEHE (AE Reg).\n\nRRALGR IE HARB (Reg.5). HH, Passport RAMHRFB SLEEK zZ ABER, HU FRKMREMRAEREXKER, HALAL SA ELRERYH KRHA A (context) PER -— BURA HBOS\n\nUS 6226752 2A J PREM ARARE. HRAMA PMH FELLA\n\n7" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "b6ea2aca6a6f85c2ca74fe4d0b13bb08fbc35663d15547bd1ffe359ad7df5ac7", + "edit_distance": 0.7902097902097902, + "f1_score": 0.935483870967742, + "meteor": 0.9191347220046985, + "precision": 0.8923076923076924, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.9830508474576272, + "true_md": "14\n\n03809453. 3\n\na 3 BB 10/17m\n\nLEER: AED AM SARE REAR. REAR EMARE. a BEARER GIBA PRAHA REPAL EMA, ARH. ES KR TARSA RE, RERHEEN TFT. KRARLELFAFAFE TREBSHMBAH, Vee BHELAREIRELMMGBH. EGER AGAR PAM SEM US, SAH, FARA A-ZAT MAH AVA FAT VAGINA, Bh, WRAL A OS, RATA AHA KERALA LP AGA EEARAA. AMAL TERA ip AAk, BALAK TP ELAR A (RA RIESE hata se) Oi SOARS SL. HPA SETRRAAAL HH EKA Er.\n\nKA: RAR -Am LER FAHFFFSMERTME ER. DAL TUAASHARMRYRR, VPWARAMA RARE, SBRNARART VARA EPR, Fa ERI TERA RAR KAT HILDA, il dosh iT. CA (42 BARRA). ISP (HF ARSREA) URKMBE.\n\nKER AR HF ey yl gah bit HLA.\n\nRis “GRA” Bib PCZKMES, KRAFT REO FB VARA A IE.\n\nFk\n\nBRR 1, ERT TARZAN ETF BA. EM P, my Arme BIERFEAÄAF 20 HAAP, AP 204A PLE LAMTEP REI 30 PERS ER. ZPREM I ATRMTR AM RE MABAARR A 50, BR F AT RAT SS. 52 LA 30 SiR EK 50 WaT SAI 5 AAR, GoM AIK ee, WER 5 ALB Alte RRR. BP ie LA 30 RR AYT RAK AN, WAR ARMA, HPAREA 40 TURAN, PAM P 20 i Bs, RHA 42a, EP AS ARBRSSZ LE. GEKA 40 LTR AREK 50 VAATED PKA IRI. HAARE \"AMARTER”, IR] RRA RRA RA PARKER. AAAMAIEE IR] LISS AR. bh, MAR. EM jE. AU BGR. DAE. SRR. ER SUSE EY ATURE MA HE KFRAMRAEM PS FORMER. READ HA BA E" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "b6f31e64d06dacbec243cb414b03133f807e7c4223956db4946be0d40b81b48e", + "edit_distance": 0.7902097902097902, + "f1_score": 0.935483870967742, + "meteor": 0.9191347220046985, + "precision": 0.8923076923076924, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.9830508474576272, + "true_md": "che HSC AGL TO\n\n03809453. 3\n\n10\n\niAP AsSL, RA EAAKAHRAAMAERH ARYL, RAK Alk, toR FMA LIAR LAMAR, WTA HES ATA eGR.\n\nso RTE RRASRPREALADUARRP HSA BE KRSM AY Ae ik Ha Hy ERE AMIEL CHTTPS), MAA FI, RAZA DAT RIBAS BA ANGIE, (EAE ZS EN FAR ISCH,\n\nPREZ HATA Ta Pea. RHEIN, N REZ APRP HEALER “localhost”, FAFREI IH, MET VAA URL (RH MEALF ) AAR IRR KA LAE Hh HR KA HS BAZ RA URL AR RRAAE RL. BIRATPAM EE TAKE EAN FIN A HAB ERAMHR A RER BGR 44 URL.\n\nSLAPRATYRMLRLABADRES AAA MAA HTTP Set 47, & localhost RAPHY URL, Atay FAHRT YS SiR AWA RA ILS HE CARS SR, RRNA Z RIEDEL RRGRAA TH, FARELZEREP RAR (GoRE ARB) TAA PRR GR” AAA IBA RA RAL A.\n\nBFEATMAE HHKRFTAMERLEFSABLZZTNELFK, 5 BIE-EEKAMMERIR, HFAMMEATSSE SITE TI AH IT ARE, I HFHARET TMTERMRPIINHELM, BR AZMLAEER N, EELREEFTAAHMBRANFN.\n\nBFEATMNEHE WHERTIAZESH TEN INHRTERNMRS RR wm Bikhy, REARERARTY (Sido) ASiABA YP Bits] DAF AEGAN THAR ADAIR EY. REN RMABAA RM aH, | oS ADF AR (P3P). HR TUAASA-REWARS, PlwHARE BEY, RABKAYN A OMAR ELTA ASAA | AMEBRMARGH Wee RR, CHOU BREAT: TREAT UARMFARPAVUBMEEM EAM ABSA, Hise RAR AAR MEL. FREAKADT VA 4B 46 RAE TAME, RARETRY SHEL. RTM AARP, TARR ERARESHHRER, Fle h-LABAMRAF NAD," + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "e307ed544ebe9f8179e4d3fa3fcaab8111b87070858e21091940471ca0ea3a26", + "edit_distance": 0.7902097902097902, + "f1_score": 0.935483870967742, + "meteor": 0.9191347220046985, + "precision": 0.8923076923076924, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.9830508474576272, + "true_md": "03809453. 3\n\nches GC ‘HLT\n\nH, MM GRAH RA RD YY ARAB MEA OLE RAY,\n\nMEHR\n\nFHARNTFERH REES AN TFT HAAAHRÄTHTFR,\n\nBIER HARHTER.\n\nAETRBEAANEF-FREFAÄNHRÄNTER,\n\nMIEREITAFHHAÄH TER.\n\n4 BRRLRMFAANH CAH TEA.\n\nASRREAA AA LPR IL PREY ESM. GHREA PERK 248.\n\nB6ERBIFTFEFEFÄNFÄHTEN.\n\nATERRRHH. MAÄFENNF-RENE,\n\nR&S BRAGS P ROAR, P-RALZRAAMNT ANT ca A.\n\nBIER RSNIEETMRZENARNTEN,\n\nB10 RRAWARKE EHA-LAREAFLTUA DARE RE TA RIGY RANTES A\n\nMAR AT RRAEA HM, MRR THD THAZAM EBT.\n\nIME AA\n\nICH:\n\nVAF AE EA SU RAP Bh EAR AA FP AA: REPRE BAEK. WRATH, MHRAAP. HARA PPRABNA, BRAY DELARIMELAMASAUALRE, BI he, ERITMEHTE RUF.\n\nBREA: HBMELAMSHRAFSZEN LA, GlOHRFBARTHY ar. RAN TEHZIREHERARKANZEIE Frage ZRÄHMER. AKA, BRAEMADAM, Beh. ZA. Ae VAR REZLANBEIME, wWRABEIPELPASRKAREEES (8) eH ESAR), MEA “ee” MASSRELEAEN.\n\n13" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "85a75194df6ceda528964e72d74a30bb8143a702b849f808b5e15f58ad722e88", + "edit_distance": 0.7902097902097902, + "f1_score": 0.935483870967742, + "meteor": 0.9191347220046985, + "precision": 0.8923076923076924, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.9830508474576272, + "true_md": "03809453. 3\n\nkh oH #$ # F53/5 TL\n\n24\n\nA 5" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "9d40405b7f9b583790291c2b51ebace5736b86ce708ebbcb0bf346871fc9d395", + "edit_distance": 0.7902097902097902, + "f1_score": 0.935483870967742, + "meteor": 0.9191347220046985, + "precision": 0.8923076923076924, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.9830508474576272, + "true_md": "03809453. 3\n\nkh oH #$ # 55/5\n\n26" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "312b4f8e464ebd86c3a8b3a91bf8e0a111219e93bc5477645c20f161a6ce1c98", + "edit_distance": 0.7902097902097902, + "f1_score": 0.935483870967742, + "meteor": 0.9191347220046985, + "precision": 0.8923076923076924, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.9830508474576272, + "true_md": "a HR 813/17\n\n03809453. 3\n\n1 40 ARIS QR EA SI ERAMMATER RL ERRFRTIVG HERR KK 50 to FRA PALES IR]. ARADH Va, WPRARWABRA 3 AM RUE AT, Nite AKA REP SMR, HERE 40 EREIKA Kuh, BPSEE Ik 50. BEATE RG Vc, HP ABRAPE IVa eH 492, GRE ARIRG SID @RMEAMAR, REA 50 MBER 40 FRA OPK IRL. PRERTUA RES CBR, Pld M—-KH a RABIES (XML) BX. AMR Ve, AREA 50 HULA QE KAO SAB KA IRL. HAM AMT PRAY LBA, B20, KAA APO MLA. BERRA TAAL ASADURMAITA, I do, WAITER PE, AB. PAR OARKK SV RAYE ZIER. M P20 49 RMB (release) F. soF PR IVI AH. FHRIVAB FAS Hash A FERIA TPIS A AL, BAO RAAT IRR A ER OY A ALE T 99 Pram. RB, EEL A, WT HPRive MR. WA, ROLES HR IVei MALE FAK 40 RGB P I 320, BP AL 30 te ES Aik Bos, BPAAESIIER LA 50, MHAPR Ver. CHRIRREWESR, sido, RMILW AS 30 41E SE, PARA 6 MR. THRIVE AAR 4K 50 vie some RBA eR Ve Hk 4 3E Hoa AT EEE RIES 30, HAAG AT SARWKS 30 HH-PRA, AL, RA HTTPS ET ZESH, RERSSETAMMAM MAES Mal TF ik, OG, WAP 209TH. WES 30 SHREK SOL BTA KET, wR Ve.\n\nA 5 ERWAERFENWHAFSESTN ARE, AAATWER 4 HEEHRFEITFENGEREM. 4 TERAFRETGARAERH RE, MERT EHI BRRHÄ PAST IN MENE, MABEAAH KA 50 (Alta) isn, RERTEFHAÄF 20 AXHSH 2.0” HAB, EHÄPFHAIR. RM KRRIM PARRA 6) Be, Ged “RA CHR” BwS “localhost? HERA, Bat Aw fc ETI AQ, BRASH REA 50 ASH ARPERE “RAZR” ZEN LER RANTEHRT EA, BRAREITESRTIHTHERM ajsehk, MP 20 TUE RN” 2 TMT REK 50, URE RR\n\n17" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "d2a640b256e8276a642868b96bc9f076e4b775508d9f0ea88660f54961e18ea5", + "edit_distance": 0.7902097902097902, + "f1_score": 0.935483870967742, + "meteor": 0.9191347220046985, + "precision": 0.8923076923076924, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.9830508474576272, + "true_md": "he GC A/T\n\n03809453. 3\n\nEAA PER PAB Y AFP:\n\n1. SOFA wWRBRAATRAMS OMA EMERGE, DEAL MAP HOM MBBS FALREA, PPP AMA, FLIES MEE LARA PAE.\n\n2. @SF RAW KEN EP MABBZMUSH AAA AAD PAA AP, PH RESMMIAREA ER Mi RRA, KMRL ALG AAZAPMMAKEAR, BR, RARE OAPSAR ARAYA PRAM H—-—-ERRRFE HF KS AAALEAR.\n\n3, SAFER BV REMAKE EAA, RP RATA AP Bika oA AA REARS ist As.\n\n4. ESTHER EZHAP, ANG RA RRES OAKES, B 40 (e3F RAAT RINE.\n\n5. MFA OAK E LBRY REM RBA,\n\nHH LKLER MER SA Req.) HIPS BAAN ERT RAA 45 349: Req.] WDHESATRHMATRH, Cle FEY ASHLARK HEAPPYRARARAMEYEELRA, Hb, REAMNRES ARMA bh SY Uy BRIA OANA) FRA A AR. HAT, WT AKSHR ARG, ME GABE E-TSETE” HRV ARMS ENB KALAMA KREAE MAG RR BL. BAM, Req. hay fy hE EA BT (CAEL) AHATA PMR ERAT EH “SRR” AERA, UG LARA cE LET Req.4. Req 2 HE ARMRA KR, RAA KR LES A PREM AH, LAARER PISA ARRAAR RRS RAE B Gt Rater. BMA MRRRAA AP WERM OP YAM iH EAM,\n\nReg.3 Hx KAAS A PAB, Bide, REM KARATE EEE AR EP ae PRE, VAR GEA MAE be, AGE RSH. Regd 5 Req RERPHARTUMAU FA: BAY SRE MARAT RS OA, AYARELZRERSAKHE BiH HH, FH AGREE EAR ARATE AE. MH ART REN SZ FUR MRE RP, AN CR PRAM. KHMRORRAFZRH SE EBB AA RAMA, FAREA RHA lk AEE MAS PIR ZZMHEHMAAHÄARR. FI KANERTRHER EHE MAEFN\n\n6" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "55f9167173149b0b4c8d8951baca190ee756450d6565a91655ec04967a08c798", + "edit_distance": 0.7902097902097902, + "f1_score": 0.935483870967742, + "meteor": 0.9191347220046985, + "precision": 0.8923076923076924, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.9830508474576272, + "true_md": "03809453. 3\n\nbe MR OEIUVYUM\n\nAKA VALE. ERA RRIF SR OLS KIL. ET RA ITH HA G—— RH IES FAUT MAILE A AVKRS—— MAES, RHA det ay RA CAS HLA Tt PL IA HAMAR, Miki Ry HR oR HPT Ht, FER PRI BALA RRA ARIK. RAW PLA tt RAE FE, TPE APA AREAL RH EH LHF ARA Terme, FEB SRR AUAMAABRPH, ABATE AE.\n\nLYFE, RAR SAAT PAVERS. ER HE. KARA AMET RIA, RGA RBA EAT AREA ERRA BAT BSA AE REL BRA RAR : a) BHAA BERNER FG, db) UA MMRBABR,\n\n21" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "ed9d052310a24b5c0969c98d472eeca51acbb115ffcd6149ff33ff9a5626b12d", + "edit_distance": 0.7902097902097902, + "f1_score": 0.935483870967742, + "meteor": 0.9191347220046985, + "precision": 0.8923076923076924, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.9830508474576272, + "true_md": "03809453. 3\n\nbe A fh 16/17\n\n20\n\nAst, Bat AoE RK 42 47 MME H AK IR HE, (i. BEAK 42 04a B4E SLI AREA HALE 40 L. Ath, BP ae AA 30 ERTS AARDR I t-PA -BEK 40. BOF LER BBA ZUUETRA AMSA E LK 4, PREY SHAK: AFG Iva A, APALREA 40 REMARK RAMA S IRI. PHRF PKA TARRKRARIGEL A 42 HHHERFRMESEY. EAT +, AFP IVAA, PAARL A TARR PAA 30 SR ABA K ALGER AD, Mia AT RHEE LA SAP ORAZ. ZAA-BTP, FALL RM 42 TA REA 50 MRA EHRAD FOB 42, VA EB ZIELE EI 42 TWIEH HB KAE SIRI BERSERK EA 50.\n\nAWE? BRO PTA BIS AMER REA 50 SLR EA 40 (42) 7 WADERS D., RPM CRRA A WAS), Slo, BEA AS BKB PAR —RMYARARRA (root authority) AHRSHAH SAE %, Hilto, toRieH iit HTTPS KA A—4KA TCP (463k 42 FIL) i, MAKRAPR IVa, FREAK 50 TURN REBESA (SSL) RFS FLBROEEEA 40 EAD. ATRESARADA, GEKA 4 KA GRRE AHNES, Hlto, PRAGRAY Q Wisse F OX & IRI is. wRAIOKE SIRI SS CPR (HDA IOP HR LAK AO RAR EAE A) ORUA, RTA (Hilde) Hated K509 ERAN XMLEZAH. BAF HP, REA 50 SLB 40 (42) THE BRA, KARI BA LR LGR A. BATH, THER 4b tA BA (By ATTPS 25), (RT REK 50 SRK 40 HA ARR BA, RAT, PARARELAEAT BSH, ABE BRE LAA E BI e, Dike, ARB 2, RAD WaT viwitst FALE EMA 40 SRK 50 EBA P A HE (chain) #9 Kerberos #4 RAW RR. FRA3, RMAGBAKK 4 TUAW, RAAP 3% HA 30 TAMtPaFee eH, HPAP P MARA A “EI (ticket)” 5 far. BAAR ES (Ab RAMIEE BE) HBA, KF Kerberos EA, RAMHTIPZN, MRAGA BARR.\n\n4E— DF 0) KHEA AAT AES PT Ba Fe/H RA MK BA AMM SRA, BH RBAAN-AS MAECAT ARH." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "a4511a2b6bb188bef18d987bb3ec8507b0dda65795d5530df6461ce1c904bd65", + "edit_distance": 0.7902097902097902, + "f1_score": 0.935483870967742, + "meteor": 0.9191347220046985, + "precision": 0.8923076923076924, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.9830508474576272, + "true_md": "18\n\nbe MR OHM\n\n03809453. 3\n\nRE” ZT THALE, Eh RI” BATRA. WHERE 4 A, toRAP RRAFRKA PEER 4, WALA RIE RIAA PBR AE MAR.\n\nA6ETHAÄAHTNFERKFANF ÄHT EN, HARATFTTR IVd, MAP RY RBAA. REBT MAMA. LTR Ib, WS 30 ABB ELA 4, ARRGERIV, FREA5S0 RRS OKIE S IRI. sth Ke, APPR IVA, HATPAMRIE. BTPRIVII CYA RKAG TV Sig RDR Ve HHT. WRAA IRE CHIMES SE, I BHR AR, Re, AFPRIVAI, AAP 20 ZMER—FEHRE,\n\nVi AT BEN WERBEN TITEL, BANK BARA FP RAK, CART HR IVdv ARES 30 EBSA 40 HIRED R $4, ARB OMZH, AP TAAFPR IVaiv KRURY, RK 40 RAE DAR Ve HK LIRR TA 50, MERK At Re LIS x.\n\nA7TERAR 6TPRIVAiii FENAAF OWRAFHNRENE,.\n\nFAM RAMRERH, HAR HIRI RGIS, BP<ZHoAAREK 50 HAAR, BRLALK 40 AKA DR Va WME REA 50 MAP R EA, tORAEA-KHAAP BALGR Ve ZHAABBIE, MAK PRET MEM DUAR AAG Rh, He, MERAH I HTTPS #72 PARA P OMAR BIER. “ZAR. GAG RRL”, “SY OE SPR AURWIKA” ABER BABAR BF. AB, Aut” VAR “HUES” CGAMATARYH BEAM, REAALEAT PREY RPA A LA 40 RHA LH. (LBRO KF “RAIA (income )”, AsbAe. ECPM BAP, “BAR” 5 AN BERNER, AR “HUES” RRMA, Ash, CNMAZEEALE YA PRERMBE WL, HU ARM ORME, RAP 20 TARA HME CEMA, AR we RE. AP 20 SRB RASMRAS BAY RBA ZEN RER. Täk, Af 20 Bla mr ERTAKRTMELNRARZ PAE. LERAAZLZRAEALSHBAREAMEKSE A 50 NEAR LIRA HRM LHE. BRIT HP, Bu “Aes” VR OP HHA H RT ALAPRETESHTHENEN. “RR” PAAR RE PY" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "1a8f46903dbe89dc5b6df43389b4895a376e00ab3b90c7c37f1a1b561d3d51a1", + "edit_distance": 0.7902097902097902, + "f1_score": 0.935483870967742, + "meteor": 0.9191347220046985, + "precision": 0.8923076923076924, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.9830508474576272, + "true_md": "03809453. 3\n\nbe WW BR 11/17\n\n15\n\nAl Tip sel, HAR. Pi. iE. BR. AA. BARR AES, ASK RES OAK & IR THEA. REA PHHRAAT AAI FRE FUE BT REM 50 REA DAES IR] FLAT.\n\nBIERF-IABFAÄHHLÄHTER. EA, RPO 30. aE KK 40 VARI REA 50 LRA AEG ARR, Mics se HAP A TP DRS. U-DPHGRAASF VRAD RAH FLASHER. GABE RRA QTAC FRAT, HHP RRS HT. APR 1, ARPA 30 SIRREM 50 ZIAATRAT EAM RE, AGRARPRIL, LHR HI REAK S50 BM (FPR Ia), REAR SVOMES PAR TA AA WADA S IRL ASHLEE OME BERL. AFHMIle, ERE LI RikFA REA 50, Tas, FPR AEP HAA OMAR NA AFUEAESL1, Hw QA APRA ABH. He, CAH TR lll LASERS (FHRilla), APRPRAA 30 RABEL ES AQ (FPR IID), HK, BETA A RISHEA DRE 8: IRI BREA 50. ARBRGR LV, REG 50 OF REF DHKE S IRI.\n\nUAFRAPR Va, HPA EA RAG RERSO. RE, BIRD Be IVc, HPHRKA 50 WELK 0 RA WMA RI. RE, A HER Ve, FREAK SOME LA 40 EKA HK IR], PARA AY CHF ABK to PR VD a, Hlwih KKK 5) ASK HER TIL OPA ARLE EK 40 BERATER Va P ESM ABBR. FFP, At BRAK AO vA ( Hl40) AREA PE. ABSSREAS OH, WBA HA, soph Vd HR. TOMA ARM RAT He ag Paes 2 RAS ki. SHR IVE HRERSAGHR Ve 5 Ve HTRESE, ACRES SH SMRKAE B IRI, RAAB, AAD HAM FR RI. to FUR Ve PR, TRABEPR Veil PMP LEK 40 (ERB HR Vegi) MAP sew 320 SIHREASIOHELA. Re, BPA 30 FREAK SO ZA RMAT MAM RABKRAD HE, HRV Pe.\n\nA 3 LRBOLLKAAN TER, SR-KBAAAML, ALMA H FLA AAA EA, TEZAETEITÄRFRT ATMÄRAN ROAM SPM Va. Ve. We. HR, MATER OTR Ve, KHL 40 HEMER SE IRI, HPRRAK 40 BAP IAA 30 BAAR" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "8793960e0aaadc3f6ac4f6b167a1cc38d8f90880068ab19436420a23ce32ca3d", + "edit_distance": 0.7902097902097902, + "f1_score": 0.935483870967742, + "meteor": 0.9191347220046985, + "precision": 0.8923076923076924, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.9830508474576272, + "true_md": "03809453. 3\n\nte HS SAITO\n\nKerberos 2 —#Pid ERE BAe BA EP IMSS A RAEN MS ISTE .\n\nARIE AR ART PPR EAD KE EMG, PERE Le:\n\n(BAHL) KEBLE, ZHRSERBPRRZLZAPR. HAF MAK AASHR TIE (footprint) RAR, PRELSHUKH, HALE £ix4e Javascript. Java % ActiveX (Javascript 4 Java 4 Sun Mircorsystems IE) 49%, ActiveX 4 Mircorsoft HE) MH At) ZAMEAAR. Hp, A RAIS ARRABRET EKER, DEBRA RAS PRR, AmMAM PRA HARM AR mH AEREEHMAMS. A, RRAK € Bin RAE, thn 51% Passport * Kerberos #i4¢e) CAMARA RAP.\n\nSEGRE R, DHREAAHR, MRAP DARA TAF WHA RYULER Aa BE E;\n\nSEOPR, ARRARPHMMABALARA, UO EARABF WAR RAS EHRE RT, MA\n\nPRR, ARRBAIOMAKREE, HERRGRAS:\n\nREF AP AKARATREA;\n\nRGR, RPAREAARA MBAS, VA\n\nmR, RPA REAWE EWES OHA.\n\nREAL EARLY RAT AREA DO TARAP HAM HZ, HAA EPA EM TARE ARR, THREAT FB AMSR. IMELERRF (a) PMR P MAAR (db) BELFRAK BEKFTUNFLEMILFAREFMMÄTTRN, I-EMARE,\n\nHERRFRATUNRLSTRO TR, DTREMTFRUMMISE ZSAERTEHRFTH, FHHREHR TARGA MITTE 5. UHREN Be ALF. HERS HRR, RRR SOIR LES.\n\nBRERA LAL DR: A RAGEE URL (APRA) POR Rs EOKEALACIATRAPR. ZRAWERRBELA® HTTP 1.0 BKHEHRE, Ahh, HN KB SADE FRSA 255 PK FE SK URL MSAK. GRALDRATY Wi RE AMT, IRE A peERER OS OMS ELBE, CALEZOPRYAA\n\n9" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "b60da9d26f488cb133e47d101d35fda1bdca2671ade60764d1cd569590270327", + "edit_distance": 0.7902097902097902, + "f1_score": 0.935483870967742, + "meteor": 0.9191347220046985, + "precision": 0.8923076923076924, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.9830508474576272, + "true_md": "# ro] R AS A OR OH\n\n# [19] PEARKAEERMÄFNE\n\n# EAS ZL 03809453.3\n\n- [51] Int. Cl.\n\nGO6F 1/00 (2006.01 )\n\n- [45] #BMABA 2007 4E9 AH 26 H\n\n- [11] #24L2HS CN 100339781C\n\n- [22] Hi&R 2003.3.26 [21] Hig= 03809453.3\n\n- [30] SE\n\n- [32] 2002. 4.26 [33] EP [31] 02009568. 3\n\n- [86] HBeAg PCT/IB2003/001172 2003. 3. 26\n\n- [87] EBR4% WO2003/091861 3% 2003. 11.6\n\n- [85] #EAB ROMA 2004. 10. 26\n\n- [73] SFA BN PALL AS Zl toh KAHN\n\n- [72] RRA (hae M+ ERE MR Bag\n\n- [56] SSH\n\n- [54] PAZ eR\n\n- [57] BE\n\nTh ESE ARIE TIAA ARSE\n\nARM -ITNERANHRER, Hr AARTEERIFHEMESHGENFHNTERK. VE $Epe T — FP PAR SE AEE RAT PS AWATER AR. PIRTEAS: MBAR R, FHT RSE RAGE, FA OR MA Sh FE ARTA TBS RIB Be RR, FORA tin AE Re BI A SEK, ASE SA, PEE Ka TRIKE A, WRI DR, FRR Sa ae. RRA: KR RDR, PARRA AR REA, BRR, FPS ATR A eas DA Ac ey BV ER, HERTKANNDERABRN HD FERTE\n\nALA BES 3 HL DEHA 17 GE OPA S Be\n\n- [74] EHRE ALR TNC DT RelA FRE BN Ii\n\n \" Binding and Profiles for the OASIS Security AssertionMarkup Language (SAML) \" WWW. OASIS. OPEN. ORG 2002\n\nHEA mm fi" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "3e266b144a441918eec4d4f5f29f6da30fd1d857252dbe7a1691090c355157e8", + "edit_distance": 0.7902097902097902, + "f1_score": 0.935483870967742, + "meteor": 0.9191347220046985, + "precision": 0.8923076923076924, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.9830508474576272, + "true_md": "NA EEK TB H2/3N\n\n03809453. 3\n\n3\n\nERG (1Ve), HPARKAARA MBAR, MA RE (Ve), HPAAKAMARAARES BREE.\n\nAREA FAIBRR SAK, HP HAAR (IV) aS: Hees AR ARGE RE RAAT ROR (Ve) PH ROA OAKE SAPS N A\n\n10. GEAR FIZR OMAK, BPR AMR (Ve) RAS: HEH FAHRER EN ET,\n\n1L.AREBAMNERSE UN FE-AÄNFTE, HFELFMEMAERM HE(1l) FESHAZP REAL FTANER, MAEREFM LT) Hla SLAM RE.\n\n12. RAE AIZDR I AZ10PE-AMHFAA, HPHMARAABRRPAL BLE FPR:\n\nEMA RAREKY MEE;\n\nSME RA CF MARRY Bie hfe / RAR AR Be, F/ RARE AALZMPAAA TMA BEY STROMA;\n\n3.REBRNERN MT AFTÄHAENTÄZFAEN.\n\n14. RHEBAERE E10 FE-ANFTE, AFFARZEFR (TV) K Leva FR:\n\nWALA LRA RR (k );\n\nESS MMA SHR OEE L, HMA (kK) REBAR EA;\n\nIEMA (k) RHBR PH, VRRP oe EB ATT AB AME BAR EREREAZAY.\n\n15. -#PHREA HK RAK, FEARER:\n\nLA PHATE BABE;\n\nTARA LALA P eA, MA\n\nARMEPRAAARBAT AAR OA CHELSEA EEE ie KRRA, HP, RE TARA, BP MAAREL HELLA, ph gars BUI H AALS EAR RER, RP REARARARE th, HREMKERAI DMA, HLAREAMLE ERE WHR\n\nRM ABE, VR\n\nMia KREKR KS BME" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7246507296468838, + "doc_id": "47dbfed5440472219706a5ea7da00f271ccf4bd04c3d26e0b5d1acfb52c3b0c0", + "edit_distance": 0.21015138023152272, + "f1_score": 0.7855297157622739, + "meteor": 0.782632809550867, + "precision": 0.8515406162464986, + "pred_md": "11\n\n12\n\nEP 1 499 943 B1\n\nto thermal considerations. Further, after the processor transitions to the actual maximum performance state 306 , then predefined periods of time inhibiting transition to actual maximum performance state 306 occur such as thermal gaps 320 . If a user event, such as mouse click 326 , occurs during a thermal gap period 320 , then the algorithm transitions the processor to the thermal maximum performance state 304 . For example, if two user events such as a key stroke 324 and a mouse click 326 occur at virtually the same time, then the key stroke 324 transitions the processor to the actual maximum performance state 306 and the mouse click 326 occurring during a thermal gap 320 only triggers a transition to the thermal maximum performance state 304 . In one embodiment, the thermal gap periods 320 are spaced equal to the time delay observed between user events 308 generated by a fast user.\n\n[0049] Figure 4 illustrates a flow diagram of one embodiment of the algorithm to transition the state of performance of the integrated circuit. In one embodiment, a program embedded in a computer readable medium performs the following steps.\n\n[0050] In block 402, the algorithm detects a trigger to transition the integrated circuit, such as a processor, to a higher state of performance. The trigger may be detection of a prioritized event such as a user event or similar event. The trigger may also be a preset threshold such as an average percent utilization of the CPU. If the trigger is a non-prioritized event a delay in responding to the trigger may exist to balance processor performance versus power consumption considerations.\n\n[0051] In block 404 , the algorithm determines whether the processing event is a prioritized event such as a user event, to cause the algorithm to immediately transition the processor to a higher state of performance.\n\n[0052] In block 406 , if the algorithm determines the processing event is a prioritized event, then the algorithm immediately transitions the processor to a higher state of performance for a predefined period of time bypassing over the next higher state of performance, if applicable. Thus, if a first state of performance, a second state of performance higher than the first state of performance, a third state of performance higher than the second state of performance, and a fourth state of performance higher than the third state of performance exist, then the algorithm may transition to either the third state or fourth state in order to give the user a potential dramatic increase in performance. In an embodiment, if only two performance states exist, then the algorithm transitions the processor to the highest state of performance. In an embodiment, if two or more performance states exist, then the algorithm transitions the processor to the highest state of performance. In an embodiment, after the predefined period of time expires, then the power management algorithm based upon CPU utilization transitions the processor to the appropriate state of performance.\n\n[0053] In one embodiment, the highest state of performance is sustainable for a prolonged period of time\n\n5\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n7\n\nbased upon thermal considerations to operate at the highest state of performance without a failure. In one embodiment, the highest state of performance is sustainable for a momentary period of time based upon thermal considerations to operate at the highest state of performance without a failure.\n\n[0054] In block 408 , if the algorithm determines the processing event is not a prioritized event, then the algorithm transitions the processor the next higher performance state.\n\n[0055] In one embodiment, the software used to facilitate the algorithm can be embodied onto a machinereadable medium. A machine- readable medium includes any mechanism that provides (e.g., stores and/or transmits) information in a form readable by a machine (e.g., a computer). For example, a machine-readable medium includes read only memory (ROM); random access memory (RAM); magnetic disk storage media; optical storage media; flash memory devices; DVD's, electrical, optical, acoustical or other form of propagated signals (e.g., carrier waves, infrared signals, digital signals, EPROMs, EEPROMs, FLASH, magnetic or optical cards, or any type of media suitable for storing electronic instructions. Slower mediums could be cached to a faster, more practical, medium.\n\n[0056] Some portions of the detailed descriptions above are presented in terms of algorithms and symbolic representations of operations on data bits within a computer memory. These algorithmic descriptions and representations are the means used by those skilled in the data processing arts to most effectively convey the substance of their work to others skilled in the art. An algorithm is here, and generally, conceived to be a self-consistent sequence of steps leading to a desired result. The steps are those requiring physical manipulations of physical quantities. Usually, though not necessarily, these quantities take the form of electrical or magnetic signals capable of being stored, transferred, combined, compared, and otherwise manipulated. It has proven convenient at times, principally for reasons of common usage, to refer to these signals as bits, values, elements, symbols, characters, terms, numbers, or the like.\n\n[0057] It should be borne in mind, however, that all of these and similar terms are to be associated with the appropriate physical quantities and are merely convenient labels applied to these quantities. Unless specifically stated otherwise as apparent from the above discussions, it is appreciated that throughout the description, discussions utilizing terms such as \"processing\" or \"computing\" or \"calculating\" or \"determining\" or \"displaying\" or the like, refer to the action and processes of a computer system, or similar electronic computing device, that manipulates and transforms data represented as physical (electronic) quantities within the computer system's registers and memories into other data similarly represented as physical quantities within the computer system memories or registers, or other such information storage, transmission or display devices.", + "recall": 0.7290167865707434, + "true_md": "11 \n\nEP 1 499 943 B1\n\n12 \n\n10 15 to thermal considerations. Further, after the processor transitions to the actual maximum performance state 306 , then predefined periods of time inhibiting transition to actual maximum performance state 306 occur such asthermal gaps 320 . Ifa userevent, suchasmouse click 326 , occurs during a thermal gap period 320 , then the algorithm transitions the processor to the thermal maxi- mum performance state 304 . For example, if two user events such as a key stroke 324 and a mouse click 326 occur at virtually the same time, then the key stroke 324 transitions the processor totheactualmaximumperform- ance state 306 andthe mouse click 326 occurring during a thermal gap 320 only triggers a transition tothethermal maximum performance state 304 . In one embodiment, thethermal gap periods 320 are spaced equalto the time delay observed between user events 308 generated by a fast user.\n\n[0049] Figure 4 illustrates a flow diagram of one em- bodiment of the algorithm to transition the state of per- formance of the integrated circuit. In one embodiment, a programembedded ina computerreadablemediumper- forms the following steps.\n\n[0050] In block 402, the algorithm detects a trigger to transition the integrated circuit, such as a processor, to a higher state of performance. Thetrigger maybedetec- tion of a prioritized event such as a user event or similar event. The trigger may also be a preset threshold such asan average percent utilizationof theCPU.Ifthe trigger is a non-prioritized event a delay in responding to the trigger may exist to balance processor performance ver- sus power consumption considerations.\n\n[0051] In block 404 , the algorithm determines whether theprocessing eventisa prioritized event such asa user event, to cause the algorithm to immediately transition the processor to a higher state of performance.\n\n[0052] In block 406 , if the algorithm determines the processingevent is a prioritized event, thenthealgorithm immediately transitions the processor to a higher state of performance for a predefined period of timebypassing over the next higher state of performance, if applicable. Thus, if a first state of performance, a second state of performance higher than the first state of performance, a third stateof performancehigher than the second state of performance,and a fourth state of performance higher than the third state of performance exist, then the algo- rithm may transitionto either thethird state or fourth state in order to give the user a potential dramatic increase in performance. Inan embodiment, ifonly two performance states exist, then the algorithm transitions the processor to the highest state of performance. In an embodiment, if two or more performance states exist, then the algo- rithm transitionsthe processor to thehighest state ofper- formance.In an embodiment, after the predefinedperiod of time expires, then the power management algorithm based upon CPU utilization transitions the processor to the appropriate state of performance.\n\n[0053] In one embodiment, the highest state of per- formance is sustainable for a prolonged period of time\n\nbased upon thermal considerations to operate at the highest state ofperformancewithouta failure.In oneem- bodiment, thehighest state ofperformance issustainable for a momentary period of time based upon thermal con- siderationstooperate atthe highest state ofperformance without a failure.\n\n[0054] In block 408 , if the algorithm determines the processing event is not a prioritized event, then the al- gorithm transitions the processor the next higher per- formance state.\n\n[0055] In one embodiment, the software used to facil- itate the algorithm can be embodied onto a machine- readable medium. Amachine- readablemediumincludes any mechanism that provides (e.g., stores and/or trans- mits) information in a form readable by a machine (e.g., a computer). For example, a machine-readable medium includesread only memory (ROM); randomaccessmem- ory (RAM);magnetic disk storagemedia; opticalstorage media; flash memory devices; DVD’s, electrical, optical, acoustical or other form of propagated signals (e.g., car- rier waves, infrared signals, digital signals, EPROMs, EEPROMs, FLASH, magnetic or optical cards, or any type of media suitable for storing electronic instructions. Slower mediums couldbecachedtoa faster, more prac- tical, medium.\n\n[0056] Some portions of the detailed descriptions aboveare presented intermsofalgorithmsandsymbolic representations of operations on data bits within a com- puter memory. These algorithmic descriptions and rep- resentations are the means used by those skilled in the data processing arts to most effectively convey the sub- stance of their work to others skilled in the art. An algo- rithm is here, and generally, conceived to be a self-con- sistent sequenceof stepsleading to adesired result. The stepsare those requiring physical manipulations ofphys- ical quantities. Usually, though not necessarily, these quantities take the form of electrical or magnetic signals capable of being stored, transferred, combined, com- pared, and otherwise manipulated. It hasprovenconven- ient at times, principally for reasons of common usage, to refer to these signals as bits, values, elements, sym- bols, characters, terms, numbers, or the like.\n\n[0057] It should be borne in mind, however, that all of these and similar terms are to be associated with the appropriate physical quantities and are merely conven- ientlabelsappliedtothese quantities. Unlessspecifically stated otherwise as apparent from the above discus- sions, it is appreciated that throughout the description, discussions utilizingterms suchas\"processing\" or\"com- puting\" or \"calculating\" or \"determining\" or \"displaying\" or thelike, refer to the actionandprocessesof a computer system, or similar electronic computing device, that ma- nipulates and transforms data represented as physical (electronic) quantities within the computer system’s reg- istersandmemoriesinto other data similarlyrepresented as physical quantities within the computer system mem- ories or registers, or other such information storage, transmission or display devices.\n\n7" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7751671099440528, + "doc_id": "b9efefd6408fd0b54be83f68830e78417fe974614320085d3a7641c19835da44", + "edit_distance": 0.23142050799623706, + "f1_score": 0.8414634146341464, + "meteor": 0.8527499101682048, + "precision": 0.8778625954198473, + "pred_md": "15\n\n16\n\nEP 2 000 008 B1\n\n[0049] Systems and methods consistent with the embodiments disclosed herein may operate over a relatively wide range of temperatures and pressures. Necessary operating temperatures and pressures will largely be determined by specific process chemistry. However, for example, operating pressures may range from relatively low vacuum environments of approximately 0,13 Pa (1 millitorr), to positive pressure environments of 667-2000 hPa (500-1500 Torr (approximately 1 to 2 atmospheres)) Pressures may be different in different precursor zones, to accommodate the use of precursors having different vapor pressure, molecular mobility, and reactivity characteristics, for example. In some embodiments, two or more precursor zones and the inert gas zone may be maintained at different temperatures to optimize properties and/or throughput. Operating temperatures may also vary from below room temperature to well above room temperature, at operating temperatures typical of traveling wave ALD reactors.\n\n5\n\n10\n\n15\n\nfilm\n\n[0050] Heated rollers or turning guides 64, 66, 164, 166, 364, 366 may be utilized in some embodiments, to heat the substrate and promote thin film growth via ALD. One or more of the precursor zones 14, 16, 114, 116, 314, 316 and/or the isolation zone 20, 120, 320 may also be heated. The passageways 54, 56, 154, 156, 354, 356 may be heated by injecting a heated inert gas directly into the passageways.\n\n[0051] In one embodiment, a plasma discharge or other source of radicals is included in one or more of the precursor zones, or in an adjacent chamber, to enable plasma- or radical-assisted ALD film growth.\n\n[0052] The systems and methods described herein will normally result in deposition on both faces of the substrate. To achieve single-sided deposition, the substrate may be layered, folded, or masked for deposition, then peeled apart, unfolded, or the mask removed to result in a finished product. Other possible methods of singlesided deposition include deposition on a flattened tubular substrate followed by slitting lengthwise, or slitting of a solid substrate after double-sided deposition.\n\n[0053] The systems and methods described herein are not limited to deposition on web substrates such as plastic films or metal foil. The same basic configuration could be used to coat wire, flexible tubing, woven materials, such as cloth, braided materials such as braided wire or rope, non-woven sheet materials such as paper, construction vapor barrier, etc.\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\n50\n\n[0054] The following are further examples of potential applications for the systems and methods disclosed herein:\n\n55\n\n1) On plastic or metal foil, as a gas or chemical barrier, as an electrical insulator, as an electrical conductor, or as a semiconductor. Specific applications include oxygen and moisture barriers for food or medical packaging, electrically insulating, conducting or semi- conducting films for large area solar cells, flexible displays, and flexible electronics.\n\n9\n\n2) Coatings on woven materials such as cloth to provide fire retardation, or functionalize the surface - to provide moisture or stain resistance, for example. 3) Gas or chemical barriers or tubing, such as plastic tubing used in chemical or medical applications. Mechanical/ physical property improvements in woven or pressed-sheet materials - for example, a\n\n- 4) film that could provide \"filler\" to join and bind the individual particles or fibers.\n\n[0055] Throughout this specification, reference to \"one embodiment,\" or \"an embodiment,\" or \"some embodiments\" means that a particular described feature, structure, or characteristic is included in at least one embodiment. Thus appearances of the phrases \"in one embodiment,\" \"in an embodiment,\" \"in some embodiments,\" and the like, in various places throughout this specification are not necessarily all referring to the same embodiment. Furthermore, the described features, structures, or characteristics may be combined in any suitable manner in one or more embodiments. In some cases, the invention may be practiced without one or more of the specific details or with other methods, components, materials, etc. In other instances, well- known structures, materials, or operations are not shown or not described in detail to avoid obscuring aspects of the embodiments.\n\n[0056] It will be obvious to those having skill in the art that many changes may be made to the details of the above-described embodiments without departing from the underlying principles of the invention. The scope of the present invention should, therefore, be determined only by the following claims.\n\n## Claims\n\n- 1. A system (10, 110, 310) for depositing a thin film on a flexible substrate (12, 112, 312), comprising:\n- a first precursor zone (14, 114, 314) into which a first precursor gas is introduced when the system is in use; a second precursor zone ( 6, 116, 316) into 1 which a second precursor gas different from the first precursor gas is introduced when the system is in use; an isolation zone (20, 120, 320) interposed between the first and second precursor zones and into which an inert gas is introduced when the system is in use, the isolation zone including a series of flow-restricting passageways (54, 56, 154, 956, 354, 356) opening into the first and second precursor zones and arranged to provide a series of pathways along which a flexible substrate (12, 112, 312) is threaded to traverse back and forth between the first precursor zone and the second precursor zone multiple times\n\nand each time through the isolation zone; and a", + "recall": 0.8079625292740047, + "true_md": "15 \n\nEP 2 000 008 B1\n\n16 \n\n5 10 15 [0049] Systems and methods consistent with the em- bodiments disclosedherein may operateoverarelatively wide range of temperatures and pressures. Necessary operating temperaturesandpressures willlargely be de- termined byspecificprocesschemistry. However, for ex- ample, operating pressures may range from relatively low vacuum environments of approximately 0,13 Pa (1 millitorr), to positive pressure environments of 667-2000 hPa (500-1500Torr (approximately 1 to2 atmospheres)) Pressures may be different in different precursor zones, to accommodate the use of precursors having different vapor pressure, molecular mobility, and reactivity char- acteristics, for example. In some embodiments, two or more precursor zones and the inert gas zone may be maintained at different temperatures to optimize f ilm properties and/or throughput. Operating temperatures may also vary frombelowroomtemperature to well above room temperature, at operating temperatures typical of traveling wave ALD reactors.\n\n[0050] Heated rollers or turning guides 64, 66, 164, 166, 364, 366 may be utilized in some embodiments, to heat the substrate and promote thin film growth via ALD. One or more of the precursor zones 14, 16, 114, 116, 314, 316and/or theisolationzone 20,120,320 mayalso be heated. The passageways54, 56, 154, 156, 354, 356 may be heated by injecting a heated inert gas directly into the passageways.\n\n[0051] In oneembodiment, aplasmadischarge oroth- er source of radicals is included in one or more of the precursor zones, or in an adjacent chamber, to enable plasma- or radical-assisted ALD film growth.\n\n[0052] Thesystems and methodsdescribedhereinwill normally result in deposition on both faces of the sub- strate. To achieve single-sided deposition, the substrate may be layered, folded, or masked for deposition, then peeled apart, unfolded, or the mask removed to result in a finishedproduct. Other possible methods of single- sid- ed deposition include deposition on a flattened tubular substrate followed by slitting lengthwise, or slitting of a solid substrate after double-sided deposition.\n\n[0053] The systemsand methodsdescribedhereinare notlimitedto deposition onwebsubstratessuchasplas- ticfilms or metal foil. The same basicconfigurationcould be used to coat wire, flexible tubing, woven materials, such as cloth, braided materials such as braided wire or rope, non-woven sheet materials such as paper, con- struction vapor barrier, etc.\n\n50 [0054] The following are further examples of potential applications for the systems and methods disclose d herein:\n\n55 1) On plastic or metal foil, as a gas or chemical bar- rier, as an electrical insulator, as an electrical con- ductor, or as a semiconductor. Specific applications include oxygen and moisture barriers for food or medical packaging, electrically insulating, conduct- ing orsemi- conducting films for largeareasolarcells, flexible displays, and flexible electronics.\n\n2) Coatingson woven materials suchascloth topro- vide fire retardation, or functionalize the surface - to provide moisture or stain resistance, for example.\n\n3) Gasorchemicalbarriers or tubing, suchasplastic tubing used in chemical or medical applications.\n\n4) Mechanical/physical property improvements in woven or pressed-sheet materials - for example, a film that could provide \"filler\" to join and bind the in- dividual particles or fibers.\n\n[0055] Throughout thisspecification,referenceto \"one embodiment,\" or \"an embodiment,\" or \"some embodi- ments\" means that a particular described feature, struc- ture, or characteristic is included in at least one embod- iment. Thus appearances of the phrases \"in one embod- iment,\" \"in an embodiment,\"\"in some embodiments,\"and the like, in various places throughout this specification are not necessarilyallreferring to thesameembodiment. Furthermore,thedescribedfeatures, structures, orchar- acteristics may be combined in any suitable manner in one or more embodiments. In some cases, the invention may be practiced without one or more of the specific de- tails or with other methods, components, materials, etc. In other instances, well-known structures, materials, or operations are not shown or not described in detail to avoid obscuring aspects of the embodiments.\n\n[0056] It will be obvious to those having skill in the art that many changes may be made to the details of the above-described embodiments without departing from the underlying principles of the invention. The scope of the present invention should, therefore, be determined only by the following claims.\n\na first precursor zone (14, 114, 314) into which a first precursor gas is introduced when the sys- tem is in use;\n\na second precursor zone ( 16, 116, 316) into which a second precursor gas different from the first precursor gas is introduced when the sys- tem is in use;\n\nan isolation zone (20, 120, 320)interposed be- tween the first and second precursor zones and into which an inert gas is introduced when the system is in use, the isolation zone including a series of flow-restricting passageways (54, 56, 154, 956, 354, 356) opening into the first and second precursor zones and arranged to pro- vide a series of pathways along which a flexible substrate (12, 112,312) is threaded to traverse back and forth between the first precursor zone and the second precursor zone multiple times and each time through the isolation zone; and a\n\n## Claims\n\n- 1. A system (10, 110,310) for depositing a thin film on a flexible substrate (12, 112, 312), comprising:\n\n9" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6686841250156431, + "doc_id": "52ff154f870f80910783d9a0dc4f94cf1f4783bbe515de5d75ee864fdf2bea50", + "edit_distance": 0.45394736842105265, + "f1_score": 0.7906976744186047, + "meteor": 0.7946425261929768, + "precision": 0.8415841584158416, + "pred_md": "7\n\n8\n\nEP 3 800 018 A1\n\nSensor (7) erfassten Größe.\n\n- 2. Sensorvorrichtung (4) nach Anspruch 1, wobei wenigstens ein Sensor (7) ein Sensor der folgenden Gruppe ist:\n- - Beschleunigungssensor,\n- - Lichtsensor,\n- -Umweltsensor, wie Temperatursensor, Luftfeuchtesensor, Luftdrucksensor,\n- - Ortssensor.\n- 3. Sensorvorrichtung (4) nach einem der vorhergehenden Ansprüche, wobei ein Sensor (7) als Lichtsensor ausgebildet ist, der vom Inneren des Grundkörpers (6) auf eine Öffnung im Grundkörper (6) gerichtet ist, die im Betrieb des Messerhalters (1) von einem weiteren Bauteil des Messerhalters (1) verschlossen ist.\n- 4. Sensorvorrichtung (4) nach einem der vorhergehenden Ansprüche, wobei eine Energieversorgungsquelle (9) an dem Grundkörper (6) befestigt ist.\n\n5\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n- 5. Sensorvorrichtung (4) nach einem der vorhergehenden Ansprüche, wobei der mindestens eine Sensor (7), der Sender (8) und/oder die Energieversorgungsquelle (9) in dem Grundkörper (6) vergossen ist/sind.\n- 6. Sensorvorrichtung (4) nach einem der vorhergehenden Ansprüche, wobei der Sender (8) mit Bluetooth sendet.\n- 7. Messerhalter (1) mit einem drehbar gelagerten Messerkopf (2) zur Halterung oder zum Antreiben eines an dem Messerkopf (2) befestigbaren Messers (5), wobei der Messerkopf (2) eine Sensorvorrichtung (4) nach einem der vorhergehenden Ansprüche umfasst.\n- 8. Längsschneidemaschine mit einem oder mehreren Messerhaltern (1) nach Anspruch 7.\n\n30\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n5", + "recall": 0.7456140350877193, + "true_md": "8 \n\n7 \n\nEP 3 800 018 A1\n\n## Sensor (7) erfassten Größe.\n\n5\n\n55\n\n45\n\n50\n\n40\n\n35\n\n30\n\n25\n\n20\n\n15\n\n10\n\n5\n\n- 2. Sensorvorrichtung (4) nach Anspruch 1, wobei we- nigstens ein Sensor (7) ein Sensor der folgenden Gruppe ist:\n\n- 3. Sensorvorrichtung (4)nach einemdervorhergehen- denAnsprüche,wobeiein Sensor(7)als Lichtsensor ausgebildet ist, der vom Inneren des Grundkörpers (6)aufeineÖffnung imGrundkörper(6)gerichtetist, die imBetrieb desMesserhalters (1)von einemwei- teren BauteildesMesserhalters(1)verschlossenist.\n\n- 4. Sensorvorrichtung (4)nach einemdervorhergehen- den Ansprüche, wobei eine Energieversorgungs- quelle (9) an dem Grundkörper (6) befestigt ist.\n\n- Lichtsensor, - Umweltsensor, wie Temperatursensor, Luft- feuchtesensor, Luftdrucksensor, - Ortssensor.\n\n- - Beschleunigungssensor, - Lichtsensor,\n\n- - Beschleunigungssensor, - Lichtsensor, - Umweltsensor, wie\n\n- feuchtesensor, Luftdrucksensor, - Ortssensor.\n\n- 5. Sensorvorrichtung (4)nach einemdervorhergehen- den Ansprüche, wobei der mindestens eine Sensor (7), der Sender (8) und/oder die Energieverso r- gungsquelle (9) in dem Grundkörper (6) vergossen ist/sind.\n\n- 6. Sensorvorrichtung (4)nach einemdervorhergehen- den Ansprüche, wobei der Sender (8) mit Bluetooth sendet.\n\n- 7. Messerhalter(1)miteinemdrehbargelagertenMes- serkopf (2) zur Halterung oder zum Antreiben eines an dem Messerkopf (2) befestigbaren Messers (5), wobeiderMesserkopf(2)eine Sensorvorrichtung (4) nach einem der vorhergehenden Ansprüche um- fasst.\n\n- 8. Längsschneidemaschine mit einem oder mehreren Messerhaltern (1) nach Anspruch 7." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6438164334688653, + "doc_id": "41a36d4779a744bbb4817bf192ef08c3c61865a43bc4f2d6cebbd5a088c82b36", + "edit_distance": 0.7291960507757405, + "f1_score": 0.7828418230563003, + "meteor": 0.5413834615157571, + "precision": 0.874251497005988, + "pred_md": "5\n\n6\n\nEP 3 800 018 A1\n\nÖffnung von einem anderen Bauteil des Messerhalters 1 verdeckt ist. Wird nun die Ringmutter zum Wechsel des Rundmessers 5 von dem Messerhalter 1 entfernt, so fällt Licht auf den Lichtsensor 7, wodurch auf einen Messerwechsel geschlossen werden kann.\n\n5\n\n10 [0027] Die von den Sensoren 7 ermittelten Größen werden über den Sender 8 kabellos an eine übergeordnete Einheit übermittelt, die gegebenenfalls auch auf weitere Betriebsparameter des Messerhalters 1 beziehungsweise der Längsschneidemaschine zurückgreifen kann.\n\n## Bezugszeichen\n\n[0028]\n\n- 1 Messerhalter\n- 2 Messerkopf\n- 3 Messerträger\n- 4 Sensorvorrichtung\n- 5 Rundmesser\n- 6 Grundkörper\n- 7 Sensor\n- 8 Sender\n- 9 Energieversorgungsquelle\n- 10 Verbindungsleitung\n- 11 Befestigungsvorrichtung\n\n## Patentansprüche\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n- 1. Sensorvorrichtung (4) für einen Messerhalter (1), umfassend\n\n35\n\n40\n\n- -einen Grundkörper (6) zur Befestigung der Sensorvorrichtung (4) an einem Messerhalter (1), - mindestens einen an dem Grundkörper (6) befestigten Sensor (7) zur Erfassung einer Größe und - einen an dem Grundkörper (6) befestigten Sender (8) zur kabellosen Übertragung der von dem Sensor (7) erfassten Größe.\n- 2. Sensorvorrichtung (4) nach Anspruch 1, wobei wenigstens ein Sensor (7) ein Sensor der folgenden Gruppe ist:\n- - Beschleunigungssensor,\n- - Lichtsensor,\n- -Umweltsensor, wie Temperatursensor, Luftfeuchtesensor, Luftdrucksensor,\n- - Ortssensor.\n- 3. Sensorvorrichtung (4) nach einem der vorhergehenden Ansprüche, wobei ein Sensor (7) als Lichtsensor ausgebildet ist, der vom Inneren des Grundkörpers (6) auf eine Öffnung im Grundkörper (6) gerichtet ist,\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n4\n\ndie im Betrieb des Messerhalters (1) von einem weiteren Bauteil des Messerhalters (1) verschlossen ist.\n\n- 4. Sensorvorrichtung (4) nach einem der vorhergehenden Ansprüche, wobei eine Energieversorgungsquelle (9) an dem Grundkörper (6) befestigt ist.\n- 5. Sensorvorrichtung (4) nach Anspruch 4, wobei die Energieversorgungsquelle (9) durch eine Bewegung/Beschleunigung des Grundkörpers (6) aufladbar ist.\n- 6. Sensorvorrichtung (4) nach einem der vorhergehenden Ansprüche, wobei der mindestens eine Sensor (7), der Sender (8) und/oder die Energieversorgungsquelle (9) in dem Grundkörper (6) vergossen ist/sind.\n- 7. Sensorvorrichtung (4) nach einem der vorhergehenden Ansprüche, wobei der Sender (8) mit Bluetooth sendet.\n- 8. Sensorvorrichtung (4) nach einem der vorhergehenden Ansprüche, wobei der Grundkörper (6) als eines der folgenden Bauteile ausgebildet ist:\n- - Messerträger (3),\n- - Ringmutter,\n- - Unterlegscheibe.\n- 9. Messerhalter (1) mit einem drehbar gelagerten Messerkopf (2) zur Halterung oder zum Antreiben eines an dem Messerkopf (2) befestigbaren Messers (5), wobei der Messerkopf (2) eine Sensorvorrichtung (4) nach einem der vorhergehenden Ansprüche umfasst.\n- 10. Längsschneidemaschine mit einem oder mehreren Messerhaltern (1) nach Anspruch 9.\n\n## Geänderte Patentansprüche gemäss Regel 137(2) EPÜ.\n\n- 1. Sensorvorrichtung (4) für einen Messerhalter (1), umfassend\n- -einen Grundkörper (6) zur Befestigung der Sensorvorrichtung (4) an einem Messerhalter (1), wobei der Grundkörper (6) als rotationssymmetrischer Messerträger (3) für ein Rundmesser, als Ringmutter oder als Unterlegscheibe ausgebildet ist, - mindestens einen an dem Grundkörper (6) befestigten Sensor (7) zur Erfassung einer Größe und - einen an dem Grundkörper (6) befestigten Sender (8) zur kabellosen Übertragung der von dem", + "recall": 0.7087378640776699, + "true_md": "5 \n\nEP 3 800 018 A1\n\n6 \n\nÖffnung von einem anderen Bauteil des Messerhalters 1 verdeckt ist. Wird nun die Ringmutter zum Wechsel des Rundmessers 5 von dem Messerhalter 1 entfernt, so fällt Licht auf den Lichtsensor 7, wodurch auf einen Messerwechsel geschlossen werden kann. [0027] Die von den Sensoren 7 ermittelten Größen\n\ndieimBetrieb des Messerhalters (1) von einemwei- teren Bauteildes Messerhalters(1)verschlossen ist.\n\nMesserwechsel geschlossen werden kann. [0027] Die von den Sensoren 7 ermittelten Größen werden über den Sender 8 kabellos an eine übergeord- nete Einheitübermittelt,diegegebenenfallsauch aufwei- tere Betriebsparameter des Messerhalters 1 bezi e- hungsweise der Längsschneidemaschine zurückgreifen kann.\n\n5\n\n10 e-\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35 40 - einen Grundkörper (6) zur Befestigung der Sensorvorrichtung (4) an einem Messerhalter (1), -mindestenseinen an demGrundkörper(6)be- festigten Sensor (7) zur Erfassung einer Größe und -einen an demGrundkörper(6)befestigten Sen- der(8)zurkabellosen Übertragung dervon dem Sensor (7) erfassten Größe.\n\n35 der\n\n40\n\n50\n\n- Beschleunigungssensor, - Lichtsensor, - Umweltsensor, wie Temperatursensor, Luft- feuchtesensor, Luftdrucksensor, - Ortssensor.\n\n55\n\n- einen Grundkörper (6) zur Befestigung der Sensorvorrichtung (4) an einem Messerhalter (1),wobeiderGrundkörper(6)als rotationssym- metrischer Messerträger (3) für ein Rundmes- ser, als Ringmutter oder als Unterlegscheibe ausgebildet ist, -mindestens einen andemGrundkörper(6)be- festigten Sensor (7) zur Erfassung einer Größe und -einen an demGrundkörper(6)befestigten Sen- der(8)zurkabellosenÜbertragungdervondem\n\n45\n\n- Messerträger (3), - Ringmutter, - Unterlegscheibe.\n\n## Bezugszeichen\n\n## [0028]\n\n## Patentansprüche\n\n## Geänderte Patentansprüche gemäss Regel 137(2) EPÜ.\n\n4\n\n- 3. Sensorvorrichtung (4)nach einemdervorhergehen- denAnsprüche,wobeiein Sensor(7)als Lichtsensor ausgebildet ist, der vom Inneren des Grundkörpers (6)aufeineÖffnung imGrundkörper(6)gerichtetist,\n\n- 2. Sensorvorrichtung (4) nach Anspruch 1, wobei we- nigstens ein Sensor (7) ein Sensor der folgenden Gruppe ist:\n\n- 1. Sensorvorrichtung (4) für einen Messerhalter (1), umfassend\n\n- 10. Längsschneidemaschine mit einem oder mehreren Messerhaltern (1) nach Anspruch 9.\n\n- 9. Messerhalter(1)miteinemdrehbargelagerten Mes- serkopf (2) zur Halterung oder zum Antreiben eines an dem Messerkopf (2) befestigbaren Messers (5), wobeiderMesserkopf(2)eineSensorvorrichtung (4) nach einem der vorhergehenden Ansprüche um- fasst.\n\n- 1. Sensorvorrichtung (4) für einen Messerhalter (1), umfassend\n\n- 8. Sensorvorrichtung (4)nach einemdervorhergehen- den Ansprüche,wobeiderGrundkörper(6)als eines der folgenden Bauteile ausgebildet ist:\n\n- 7. Sensorvorrichtung (4)nach einemdervorhergehen- den Ansprüche, wobei der Sender (8) mit Bluetooth sendet.\n\n- 6. Sensorvorrichtung (4)nach einemdervorhergehen- den Ansprüche, wobei der mindestens eine Sensor (7), der Sender (8) und/oder die Energieversor- gungsquelle (9) in dem Grundkörper (6) vergossen ist/sind.\n\n- 5. Sensorvorrichtung (4) nach Anspruch 4, wobei die Energieversorgungsquelle (9) durch eine Bewe- gung/Beschleunigung des Grundkörpers (6) auflad- bar ist.\n\n- 4. Sensorvorrichtung (4)nach einemdervorhergehen- den Ansprüche, wobei eine Energieversorgungs- quelle (9) an dem Grundkörper (6) befestigt ist.\n\n- 1 Messerhalter 2 Messerkopf\n\n- 1 Messerhalter 2 Messerkopf 3 Messerträger\n\n- 2 Messerkopf 3 Messerträger 4 Sensorvorrichtung\n\n- 3 Messerträger 4 Sensorvorrichtung 5 Rundmesser\n\n- 4 Sensorvorrichtung 5 Rundmesser 6 Grundkörper\n\n- 5 Rundmesser 6 Grundkörper 7S e n s o r\n\n- 6 Grundkörper 7S e n s o r 8 Sender\n\n- 7S e n s o r 8 Sender 9 Energieversorgungsquelle\n\n- 8 Sender 9 Energieversorgungsquelle 10 Verbindungsleitung\n\n- 9 Energieversorgungsquelle 10 Verbindungsleitung 11 Befestigungsvorrichtung\n\n- 10 Verbindungsleitung 11 Befestigungsvorrichtung" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6781338032133328, + "doc_id": "fef32e2758c8847413923399938993f27241bd2497d588e86a3665dcae8dd87e", + "edit_distance": 0.8082010582010583, + "f1_score": 0.7747035573122529, + "meteor": 0.5934809438682138, + "precision": 0.8558951965065502, + "pred_md": "21\n\n22\n\nEP 2 000 008 B1\n\nferbereichs beabstandet sind, wobei zumindest einige der zweiten Wendeführungen dazu ausgelegt sind, das Substrat während einer Änderung der Bewegungsrichtung des Substrats in Richtung des ersten Vorläuferbereichs zu stützen.\n\n- 2. System nach Anspruch 1, weiterhin mit einem ersten Teiler (34, 134, 334), der den Isolierungsbereich von dem ersten Vorläuferbereich trennt, und einem zweiten Teiler (36, 136, 336), der den Isolierungsbereich von dem zweiten Vorläuferbereich trennt, und bei dem die strömungsbeschränkenden Durchgangswege eine Reihe erster Durchgangswege (54, 154, 354) durch den ersten Teiler und eine Reihe zweiter Durchgangswege (56, 156, 356) durch den zweiten Teiler einschließen.\n- 3. System nach Anspruch 1 oder 2, bei dem zumindest einige der ersten Wendeführungen in dem ersten Vorläuferbereich für eine Bewegung zu dem Isolierungsbereich und von diesem weg verstellbar angebracht sind, um dadurch eine Verweilzeit des Substrats im ersten Vorläuferbereich einzustellen.\n\n5\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\nAn-\n\n30\n\n35\n\n- 4. System nach irgendeinem vorhergehenden spruch, bei dem der Substrattransportmechanismus weiterhin Folgendes umfasst:\n\neine Ausgabespule (72, 172, 372) zum Ausgeben des Substrats von einer Spule (74, 174, 374) zum Empfang an einem ersten Ende (76, 376) des Isolierungsbereichs, und eine Aufnahmespule (74, 174, 374) zum Aufwikkeln des Substrats, das von einem zweiten Ende (84, 384) des Isolierungsbereichs gegenüber dem ersten Ende empfangen wird.\n\n- 5. System nach irgendeinem vorhergehenden spruch, weiter umfassend:\n\nAn-\n\n40\n\neinen dritten Vorläuferbereich (190), der von dem ersten und zweiten Vorläuferbereich getrennt ist und in den ein drittes Vorläufergas, das sich von dem ersten und zweiten Vorläufergas unterscheidet, eingeleitet wird, wenn das System in Gebrauch ist; einen dritten Teiler, der den dritten Vorläuferbereich von dem Isolierungsbereich trennt; und eine Reihe dritter Durchgangwege (192), die sich aus dem Isolierungsbereich durch den dritten Teiler und in den dritten Vorläuferbereich erstrecken, wobei die dritten Durchgangswege entlang des Vorläuferbereichs beabstandet und so angeordnet sind, dass das Substrat durch sie hindurch zwischen dem zweiten und dritten Vorläuferbereich und durch den Isolierungsbereich rückwärts und vorwärts eingezogen wird.\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n12\n\n- 6. System nach irgendeinem vorhergehenden spruch, weiter umfassend:\n\nAn-\n\n124,\n\nein erstes Vorläuferzufuhrsystem (24, 324), das mit dem ersten Vorläuferbereich gekoppelt ist, um dem ersten Vorläuferbereich das erste Vorläufergas zuzuführen; ein zweites Vorläuferzufuhrsystem (26, 126, 326), das mit dem zweiten Vorläuferbereich gekoppelt ist, um dem zweiten Vorläuferbereich das zweite Vorläufergas zuzuführen; und ein Inertgaszufuhrsystem (28, 128, 328), das mit dem Isolierungsbereich gekoppelt ist, um in den Isolierungsbereich ein Inertgas einzuspritzen, so dass ein Druck im Isolierungsbereich erreicht wird, der größer als Drücke in den Vorläuferbereichen ist.\n\n- 7. System nach irgendeinem vorhergehenden spruch, bei dem zumindest einige der Durchgangswege einen Tunnel einschließen.\n- 8. System nach irgendeinem vorhergehenden spruch, weiterhin umfassend:\n\nAn-\n\nAn-\n\neine Abgasleitung (440), die an einen oder mehrere der Vorläuferbereiche angeschlossen ist; und eine Vorläuferfalle (59, 410, 420), die sich in der Abgasleitung befindet.\n\n- 9. System nach Anspruch 8, weiterhin mit einer Rückführleitung (450), die zwischen der Vorläuferfalle und einem oder mehreren der Vorläuferbereiche angeschlossen ist.\n\nAn-\n\n- 10. System nach irgendeinem vorhergehenden spruch, weiterhin mit einem Radikalbildner zum Zuführen eines Vorläuferradikals zu einem oder mehreren der Vorläuferbereiche.\n- 11. System nach irgendeinem vorhergehenden spruch, bei dem zumindest einige der Wendeführungen eine beheizbare Walze einschließen.\n\nAn-\n\n- 12. Verfahren zum Abscheiden einer dünnen Schicht auf einem flexiblen Substrat (12, 112, 312), umfassend:\n\nEinleiten eines ersten Vorläufergases in einen ersten Vorläuferbereich (14, 114, 314); Einleiten eines zweiten Vorläufergases in einen zweiten Vorläuferbereich (16, 116, 316), der von dem ersten Vorläuferbereich beabstandet ist, wobei sich das zweite Vorläufergas von dem ersten Vorläufergas unterscheidet; Führen eines flexiblen Substrats (12, 112, 312) rückwärts und vorwärts zwischen dem ersten\n\nund zweiten Vorläuferbereich und durch eine", + "recall": 0.7075812274368231, + "true_md": "21 \n\nEP 2 000 008 B1\n\n22 \n\nferbereichsbeabstandetsind, wobeizumin- dest einige der zweiten Wendeführungen dazu ausgelegtsind, das Substratwährend einer Änderung der Bewegungsrichtu ng des Substrats in Richtung des ersten Vor- läuferbereichs zu stützen.\n\n30 eine Ausgabespule (72, 172, 372) zum Ausge- ben des Substrats von einer Spule (74, 174 , 374) zum Empfang an einem ersten Ende (76, 376) des Isolierungsbereichs, und\n\neineAufnahmespule (74,174,374) zumAufwik- kelndesSubstrats,dasvon einemzweiten Ende (84, 384) des Isolierungsbereichs gegenüber dem ersten Ende empfangen wird.\n\n45 einen dritten Vorläuferbereich (190), der von dem ersten und zweiten Vorläuferbereich ge- trenntist und inden eindrittesVorläufergas, das sich von dem ersten und zweiten Vorläufergas unterscheidet, eingeleitet wird, wenn das Sy- stem in Gebrauch ist;\n\neinen dritten Teiler, der dendrittenVorläuferbe- reich von dem Isolierungsbereich trennt; und eine Reihe dritter Durchgangwege (192), die sich aus dem Isolierungsbereich durch den drit- ten Teiler undin den dritten Vorläuferbereicher- strecken, wobei die dritten Durchgangswege entlang des Vorläuferbereichsbeabstandetund soangeordnet sind, dassdasSubstratdurchsie hindurchzwischendem zweiten unddritten Vor- läuferbereich und durch den Isolierungsbereich rückwärts und vorwärts eingezogen wird.\n\nEinleiten eines ersten Vorläufergases in einen ersten Vorläuferbereich (14, 114, 314); Einleiten eines zweiten Vorläufergases in einen zweiten Vorläuferbereich (16,116, 316), der von dem ersten Vorläuferbereich beabstandet ist, wobeisichdas zweite Vorläufergasvondem er- sten Vorläufergas unterscheidet;\n\nFühren eines flexiblen Substrats (12, 112, 312) rückwärts und vorwärts zwischen dem ersten und zweiten Vorläuferbereich und durch eine\n\neineAbgasleitung(440), die an einen oder meh- rere der Vorläuferbereiche angeschlossen ist; und eine Vorläuferfalle (59, 410, 420), die sich in der Abgasleitung befindet.\n\nein erstes Vorläuferzufuhrsystem (24, 124, 324), das mit dem ersten Vorläuferbereich ge- koppelt ist, umdem ersten Vorläuferbereich das erste Vorläufergas zuzuführen;\n\nein zweites Vorläuferzufuhrsystem (26, 126, 326), das mit dem zweiten Vorläuferbereich ge- koppelt ist, um dem zweiten Vorläuferbereich das zweite Vorläufergas zuzuführen; und ein Inertgaszufuhrsystem(28, 128, 328), dasmit demIsolierungsbereich gekoppelt ist, umin den Isolierungsbereich ein Inertgas einzuspritzen, so dassein Druck imIsolierungsbereicherreicht wird, der größer als Drücke in den Vorläuferbe- reichen ist.\n\n- 2. Systemnach Anspruch1,weiterhin mit einem ersten Teiler (34, 134, 334),der den Isolierungsbereichvon dem ersten Vorläuferbereich trennt, undeinem zwei- ten Teiler (36, 136, 336), der den Isolierungsbereich von dem zweiten Vorläuferbereich trennt, und bei dem die strömungsbeschränkenden Durchgangs- wege eine Reihe erster Durchgangswege (54, 154, 354) durch den ersten Teiler und eine Reihe zweiter Durchgangswege (56, 156, 356) durch den zweiten Teiler einschließen.\n\n- 3. Systemnach Anspruch1 oder 2,beidem zumindest einige der ersten Wendeführungen in dem ersten Vorläuferbereich für eine Bewegung zu dem Isolie- rungsbereich und vondiesemweg verstellbar ange- bracht sind, um dadurch eine Verweilzeit des Sub- strats im ersten Vorläuferbereich einzustellen.\n\n- 4. System nach irgendeinem vorhergehenden An- spruch, bei dem der Substrattransportmechanismus weiterhin Folgendes umfasst:\n\n- 40 5. System nach irgendeinem vorhergehenden An- spruch, weiter umfassend:\n\n- 7. System nach irgendeinem vorhergehenden An- spruch, bei dem zumindest einige der Durchgangs- wege einen Tunnel einschließen.\n\n- 8. System nach irgendeinem vorhergehenden An- spruch, weiterhin umfassend:\n\n- 9. System nach Anspruch 8, weiterhin mit einer Rück- führleitung (450), die zwischen der Vorläuferfalle und einem oder mehrerender Vorläuferbereichean- geschlossen ist.\n\n- 10. System nach irgendeinem vorhergehenden An- spruch, weiterhin mit einem Radikalbildner zum Zu- führen eines Vorläuferradikals zu einem oder meh- reren der Vorläuferbereiche.\n\n- 11. System nach irgendeinem vorhergehenden An- spruch, bei demzumindest einige der Wendeführun- gen eine beheizbare Walze einschließen.\n\n- 12. Verfahren zum Abscheiden einer dünnen Schicht auf einem flexiblen Substrat (12, 112, 312), umfas- send:\n\n- 6. System nach irgendeinem vorhergehenden An- spruch, weiter umfassend:\n\n12" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "7e74faba32a68830877b9121cbd67e31d928e64f7b22e6d2529e4490376c8482", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9976851851851852, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "EP 3 800 018 A1\n\n6", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "EP 3 800 018 A1\n\n6" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7530688156473982, + "doc_id": "a4b8ac5209d236404b67b52f559b844f9c5ebce0c893265cce3357f472e5b97f", + "edit_distance": 0.2753623188405797, + "f1_score": 0.9166666666666667, + "meteor": 0.9436531398369614, + "precision": 0.8870967741935484, + "pred_md": "EP 3 800 018 A1\n\n## IN DER BESCHREIBUNG AUFGEFÜHRTE DOKUMENTE\n\nDiese Liste der vom Anmelder aufgeführten Dokumente wurde ausschließlich zur Information des Lesers aufgenommen und ist nicht Bestandteil des europäischen Patentdokumentes. Sie wurde mit größter Sorgfalt zusammengestellt; das EPA übernimmt jedoch keinerlei Haftung für etwaige Fehler oder Auslassungen.\n\n## In der Beschreibung aufgeführte Patentdokumente\n\n- · DE 29915564 U1 [0002]\n\n10", + "recall": 0.9482758620689655, + "true_md": "EP 3 800 018 A1\n\n## IN DER BESCHREIBUNG AUFGEFÜHRTE DOKUMENTE\n\n## In der Beschreibung aufgeführte Patentdokumente\n\nDiese ListedervomAnmelderaufgeführten Dokumente wurde ausschließlich zurInformation des Lesers aufgenommen und ist nicht Bestandteil des europäischen Patentdokumentes. Sie wurde mit größter Sorgfalt zusammengestellt; das EPA übernimmt jedoch keinerlei Haftung für etwaige Fehler oder Auslassungen.\n\n10\n\n- • DE 29915564 U1 [0002]" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6911214687986763, + "doc_id": "5477b70891ea8e972d2199a1b32c6fac8948097b0655b32e927cdc4f665e6687", + "edit_distance": 0.65086887835703, + "f1_score": 0.7798408488063661, + "meteor": 0.6763487112170414, + "precision": 0.8855421686746988, + "pred_md": "17\n\n18\n\nEP 1 499 943 B1\n\nder erste Performance- Zustand ist, und eines dritten Performance-Zustandes, der höher als Computersystem eine Energieversorgung auf-\n\nder zweite Performance-Zustand ist, wobei das weist, die eine Batterie beinhaltet; Bestimmen (404), ob das Ereignis ein vom Benutzer eingeleitetes Ereignis oder ein von Software eingeleitetes Ereignis ist; wenn das Ereignis ein vom Benutzer eingeleitetes Ereignis ist, direktes Versetzen (406) der integrierten Schaltung aus dem ersten Performance-Zustand in den dritten Performance-Zustand, wenn das Ereignis ein von Software eingeleitetes Ereignis ist, Versetzen (408) der integrierten Schaltung aus dem ersten Performance-Zu stand in den zweiten Performance-Zustand.\n\n- 2. Verfahren nach Anspruch 1, wobei das Benutzerereignis durch eine Programmierumgebung definiert ist, innerhalb welcher das Computersystem betrieben wird.\n- 3. Verfahren nach Anspruch 1, wobei direktes Versetzen das Versetzen ohne Verzögerung ist.\n\n5\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n- 4. Verfahren nach Anspruch 1, ferner umfassend:\n\n30 Betreiben der integrierten Schaltung in einem dritten Performance-Zustand für einen vorherbestimmten Zeitrum auf Basis von thermischen Überlegungen, um in einem dritten Performance-Zustand ausfallfrei funktionieren.\n\n- 5. Verfahren nach Anspruch 4, wobei das Computersystem ein Laptop-Computer ist.\n- 6. Verfahren nach Anspruch 1, wobei das Computersystem ein persönlicher digitaler Assistent ist.\n\n35\n\n40\n\n- 7. Vorrichtung, umfassend:\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\nMittel (136) zum Detektieren eines vom Benutzer eingeleitetes Ereignisses oder eines von Software eingeleitetes Ereignisses in einem Computersystem; wobei das Computersystem eine integrierte Schaltung (112) mit mehreren Performance-Zuständen beinhaltet einschließlich eines ersten Performance-Zustandes, eines zweiten Performance-Zustands, der höher als der erste Performance-Zustand ist, und eines dritten Performance-Zustandes, der höher als der zweite Performance-Zustand ist; Mittel zum Bestimmen, ob ein detektiertes Ereignis ein vom Benutzer eingeleitetes Ereignis oder ein von Software eingeleitetes Ereignis ist; und\n\n10\n\nMittel (130, 134) zum direkten Versetzen des integrierten Schaltung aus dem ersten Performance-Zustand in den dritten Performance-Zustand auf Basis des Detektierens, dass das Ereignis ein vom Benutzer eingeleitetes Ereignis ist, oder zum Versetzen der integrierten Schaltung aus dem ersten Performance-Zustand in den zweiten Performance-Zustand auf Basis des Detektierens, dass das Ereignis ein von Software eingeleitetes Ereignis ist.\n\n- 8. Vorrichtung nach Anspruch 7, ferner umfassend:\n\nMittel (134) zum Ändern der Betriebsfrequenz der integrierten Schaltung (112), um den Performance-Zustand der integrierten Schaltung zu ändern.\n\n- 9. Vorrichtung nach Anspruch 7, ferner umfassend:\n\nMittel (130) zum Ändern des Betriebsspannungspegels der integrierten Schaltung (112), um den Performance-Zustand der integrierten Schaltung zu ändern.\n\n- 10. Vorrichtung nach einem der Ansprüche 7 bis 9, umfassend:\n\nein computerlesbares Medium; und ein im computerlesbaren Medium gespeichertes Programm zum Managen des Energieverbrauchs innerhalb der integrierten Schaltung, dem Programm zugeordnete Anweisungen zum direkten Versetzen der ersten integrierten Schaltung (112) aus dem ersten PerformanceZustand in den dritten PerformanceZustand auf Basis des Detektierens eines Benutzerereignisses.\n\n- 11. Vorrichtung nach Anspruch 10, wobei der erste Performance-Zustand einen ersten Spannungspegel und eine erste Betriebsfrequenz umfasst.\n- 12. Vorrichtung nach Anspruch 10, wobei der dritte Performance-Zustand eine zweite integrierte Schaltung umfasst, die zusammen mit der ersten integrierten Schaltung Anweisungen verarbeitet.\n- 13. Vorrichtung nach Anspruch 10, ferner umfassend:\n\nFrequenzregelungslogik zum Ändern einer Betriebsfrequenz der ersten integrierten Schaltung, wobei die Frequenzregelungslogik ein Signal vom Programm empfängt.\n\n- 14. Vorrichtung nach Anspruch 10, ferner umfassend:\n\nSpannungsregelungslogik zum Ändern einer", + "recall": 0.6966824644549763, + "true_md": "17 \n\nEP 1 499 943 B1\n\n18 \n\nder erste Performance-Zustand ist, und eines dritten Performance-Zustandes, der höher als der zweite Performance-Zustand ist, wobei das Computersystem eine Energieversorgung auf- weist, die eine Batterie beinhaltet; Bestimmen (404), ob das Ereignis ein vom Be- nutzer eingeleitetes Ereignis oder ein von Soft- ware eingeleitetes Ereignis ist; wenn das Ereignis ein vom Benutzer eingelei- tetes Ereignis ist, direktes Versetzen (406) der integrierten Schaltung aus dem ersten Perfor- mance-Zustand in den dritten Performance-Zu- stand, wenn das Ereignis ein von Software eingeleite- tesEreignisist, Versetzen(408)der integrierten Schaltung aus dem ersten Performance- Zu- stand in den zweiten Performance-Zustand.\n\n30 Betreiben der integrierten Schaltung in einem dritten Performance-Zustand für einen vorher- bestimmten Zeitrum auf Basis von thermischen Überlegungen, um in einem dritten Perfo r- mance-Zustand ausfallfrei funktionieren.\n\n45 50 55 Mittel (136) zum Detektieren eines vom Benut- zer eingeleitetes Ereignisses oder eines von Software eingeleitetes Ereignisses in ei nem Computersystem; wobei das Computersystem eine integriert e Schaltung (112) mit mehreren Performance-Zu- ständen beinhaltet einschließlich eines ersten Performance-Zustandes, eines zweiten Perfor- mance-Zustands, der höher als der erste Per- formance-Zustand ist, und eines dritten Perfor- mance-Zustandes, der höher alsder zweitePer- formance-Zustand ist; Mittel zum Bestimmen, ob ein detektiertes Er- eignis ein vom Benutzer eingeleitetes Ereignis oder einvon Software eingeleitetesEreignis ist; und\n\nSpannungsregelungslogik zum Ändern einer\n\nein computerlesbares Medium; und ein im computerlesbaren Medium gespeicher- tes Programm zum Managen des Energiever- brauchs innerhalb der integrierten Schaltung, demProgrammzugeordnete Anweisungenzum direkten Versetzen der ersten integrierten Schaltung (112) aus dem ersten Performance- Zustandin dendritten Performance- Zustand auf Basis desDetektierenseines Benutzerereignis- ses.\n\nMittel (130) zum Ändern des Betriebsspan- nungspegels der integrierten Schaltung (112), um den Performance-Zustand der integrierten Schaltung zu ändern.\n\nMittel (134) zum Ändern der Betriebsfrequenz der integrierten Schaltung (112), um den Per- formance-Zustand der integrierten Schaltungzu ändern.\n\nMittel (130, 134) zum direkten Versetzen des integrierten Schaltung aus dem ersten Perfor- mance-Zustand in den dritten Performance-Zu- stand auf Basis des Detektierens, dass das Er- eignis ein vom Benutzer eingeleitetes Ereignis ist, oder zum Versetzen der integrierten Schal- tung aus dem ersten Performance-Zustand in den zweiten Performance-Zustand auf Basis des Detektierens, dass das Ereignis ein von Software eingeleitetes Ereignis ist.\n\n- 8. Vorrichtung nach Anspruch 7, ferner umfassend:\n\n- 2. Verfahren nach Anspruch 1, wobei das Benutzerer- eignis durch eine Programmierumgebung definiert ist, innerhalb welcher das Computersystem betrie- ben wird.\n\n- 3. Verfahren nach Anspruch 1, wobei direktes Verset- zen das Versetzen ohne Verzögerung ist.\n\n- 4. Verfahren nach Anspruch 1, ferner umfassend:\n\n- 5. Verfahren nach Anspruch 4, wobei das Computer- system ein Laptop-Computer ist.\n\n- 6. Verfahren nach Anspruch 1, wobei das Computer- system ein persönlicher digitaler Assistent ist.\n\n- 7. Vorrichtung, umfassend:\n\n- 9. Vorrichtung nach Anspruch 7, ferner umfassend:\n\n- 10. Vorrichtung nach einem der Ansprüche 7 bis 9, um- fassend:\n\n- 11. Vorrichtung nachAnspruch 10, wobeider erste Per- formance-Zustand einen ersten Spannungspegel und eine erste Betriebsfrequenz umfasst.\n\n- 12. Vorrichtung nachAnspruch 10, wobeider dritte Per- formance-Zustand einezweiteintegrierte Schaltung umfasst, die zusammen mit der ersten integrierten Schaltung Anweisungen verarbeitet.\n\n- 13. Vorrichtung nach Anspruch 10, ferner umfassend:\n\n- 14. Vorrichtung nach Anspruch 10, ferner umfassend:\n\n10\n\nFrequenzregelungslogik zum Ändern einer Be- triebsfrequenz der ersten integrierten Schal- tung, wobei die Frequenzregelungslogik ein Si- gnal vom Programm empfängt." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7286536401076426, + "doc_id": "0cb12d33b02867dc8708f4877480743533f1248683091188000d25456ba12d73", + "edit_distance": 0.6873315363881402, + "f1_score": 0.9572649572649572, + "meteor": 0.726448647910407, + "precision": 0.9545454545454546, + "pred_md": "EP 3 800 018 A1\n\n## (11) EP 3 800 018 A1\n\n## (12) EUROPÄISCHE PATENTANMELDUNG\n\n- (43) Veröffentlichungstag:\n- (51) Int Cl.:\n\n07.04.2021 Patentblatt 2021/14\n\n- (21) Anmeldenummer:\n\n19200966.0\n\n- (22) Anmeldetag:\n\n02.10.2019\n\nB26D 1/16 (2006.01)\n\nB26D 1/18 (2006.01)\n\nB26D 5/00 (2006.01)\n\nB26D 7/26 (2006.01)\n\nB23Q 17/09 (2006.01)\n\n- (84) Benannte Vertragsstaaten:\n\nAL AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB\n\nGR HR HU IE IS IT LI LT LU LV MC MK MT NL NO PL PT RO RS SE SI SK SM TR Benannte Erstreckungsstaaten: BA ME Benannte Validierungsstaaten: KH MA MD TN\n\n- (71) Anmelder:\n\nDienes Werke für Maschinenteile\n\nGmbH & Co. KG 51491 Overath (DE)\n\n- (72) Erfinder:\n- • Thielen, Rolf\n\n50733 Köln (DE)\n\n- • Klöcker, Gerd\n\n51061 Köln (DE)\n\n- (74) Vertreter:\n\nFeucker, Max Martin et al\n\nBecker & Müller Patentanwälte Turmstraße 22\n\n40878 Ratingen (DE)\n\nBemerkungen:\n\nGeänderte Patentansprüche gemäss Regel 137(2) EPÜ.\n\n## (54) SENSORVORRICHTUNG FÜR EINEN MESSERHALTER\n\n(57) Die vorliegende Erfindung betrifft eine Sensorvorrichtung (4) für einen Messerhalter (1), umfassend - einen Grundkörper (6) zur Befestigung der Sensorvorrichtung (4) an einem Messerhalter (1), - mindestens einen an dem Grundkörper (6) befestigten Sensor (7) zur Erfassung einer Größe und - einen an dem Grundkörper (6) befestigten Sender (8) zur kabellosen Übertragung der von dem Sensor (7) erfassten Größe.\n\nPrinted by Jouve, 75001 PARIS (FR)", + "recall": 0.96, + "true_md": "(54) SENSORVORRICHTUNG FÜR EINEN MESSERHALTER\n\n(57) Die vorliegende Erfindung betrifft eine Sensor- vorrichtung (4) für einen Messerhalter (1), umfassend - einen Grundkörper (6) zur Befestigung der Sensorvor-\n\nvorrichtung (4) für einen Messerhalter (1), umfassend - einen Grundkörper (6) zur Befestigung der Sensorvor- richtung (4) an einem Messerhalter (1), - mindestens einen an dem Grundkörper (6) befestigten\n\nrichtung (4) an einem Messerhalter (1), - mindestens einen an dem Grundkörper (6) befestigten Sensor (7) zur Erfassung einer Größe und - einen an dem Grundkörper (6) befestigten Sender (8)\n\nSensor (7) zur Erfassung einer Größe und - einen an dem Grundkörper (6) befestigten Sender (8) zur kabellosen Übertragung der von dem Sensor (7) er- fassten Größe.\n\n- (43) Veröffentlichungstag: 07.04.2021 Patentblatt 2021/14\n\n- (21) Anmeldenummer: 19200966.0\n\n- (22) Anmeldetag: 02.10.2019\n\n- (84) Benannte Vertragsstaaten: AL AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB GR HR HU IE IS IT LI LT LU LV MC MK MT NL NO PL PT RO RS SE SI SK SM TR Benannte Erstreckungsstaaten: BA ME Benannte Validierungsstaaten: KH MA MD TN\n\n- (71) Anmelder: Dienes Werke für Maschinenteile GmbH & Co. KG 51491 Overath (DE)\n\n- (72) Erfinder: • Thielen, Rolf\n\n- Erfinder: • Thielen, Rolf 50733 Köln (DE)\n\n- • Klöcker, Gerd 51061 Köln (DE)\n\n- (74) Vertreter: Feucker, Max Martin et al Becker & Müller Patentanwälte Turmstraße 22 40878 Ratingen (DE)\n\n- Bemerkungen: Geänderte Patentansprüche gemäss Regel 137(2) EPÜ.\n\n(19)\n\n(12) EUROPÄISCHE PATENTANMELDUNG\n\n- (51) Int Cl.: B26D 1/16\n\nEP 800 018 A1\n\nPrinted by Jouve, 75001 PARIS (FR)\n\n# (11) EP 3 800 018 A1" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "352142e5e197e110f498d42c104947aba77f07a5a39459f3bcd8f9251c407855", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9976851851851852, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "EP 2 000 008 B1\n\n18", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "EP 2 000 008 B1\n\n18" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7657447038021324, + "doc_id": "f6f5b521167133c795b5ea78e8150d962bbcd59d9eaeb745d6d96a32d66a91ce", + "edit_distance": 0.17681895093062605, + "f1_score": 0.7914032869785084, + "meteor": 0.7798980273310404, + "precision": 0.871866295264624, + "pred_md": "5\n\n6\n\nEP 2 000 008 B1\n\nible substrates, such as on plastic substrates for organic light emitting diode (OLED) displays, and the deposition of conformal coatings on very large substrates. Many additional advantages and uses of the systems and methods will become apparent from the following detailed description, which proceeds with reference to the accompanying drawings.\n\n5\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n[0020] FIG. 1 illustrates a schematic cross- ction e view of a system 10 according to a first embodiment for the deposition of a thin- film coating onto a flexible substrate 12 (shown in profile in FIG. 1), such as a web of plastic film or metal foil, for example. With reference to FIG. 1, system 10 includes first and second precursor zones 14 and 16, respectively, separated by an intermediate isolation zone 20 in which an inert fluid is present. The inert fluid may comprise an inert liquid, but more preferably consists essentially of an inert gas, such as nitrogen (N 2 ). When in use, reactive first and second precursor gases (Precursor 1 and Precursor 2) are introduced into the respective first and second precursor zones 14,16 from first and second precursor delivery systems 24, 26. Precursor delivery systems 24, 26 may include precursor source containers (not shown) located outside or within precursor zones 14, 16. Additionally or alternatively, precursor delivery systems 24, 26 may include piping, pumps, valves, tanks, and other associated equipment for supplying precursor gases into precursor zones 14, 16. An inert gas delivery system 28 is similarly included for injecting inert gas into isolation zone 20.\n\n30\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n[0021] In the embodiment shown, precursor zones 14,16 and isolation zone 20 are defined and bordered by an outer reaction chamber housing or vessel 30, divided by first and second dividers 34, 36 into three sub-chambers, namely, a first precursor chamber 44, a second precursor chamber 46 and an inert gas chamber 50. Vessel 30 may comprise a pressure vessel or vacuum vessel substantially isolating the process space from the external environment. In other embodiments, the vessel 30 may have entrance and exit passageways for interfacing with other process modules or equipment, as described below with reference to FIG. 4. A series of first passageways 54 through first divider 34 are spaced apart along a general direction of travel of substrate 12, and a corresponding series of second passageways 56 are provided through second divider 36. The passageways 54, 56 are arranged and configured for substrate 12 to be threaded therethrough back and forth between first and second precursor zones 14,16 multiple times, and each time through isolation zone 20. For a web substrate, passageways 54, 56 preferably comprise slits having a width (exaggerated in FIG. 1) that is slightly greater than the thickness of substrate 12 and a length (not shown) extending into the plane of FIG.1 (i.e., normal to the page) and that is slightly greater than a width of the substrate. Isolation zone 20 is, thus, preferably separated (albeit imperfectly) from the first precursor zone 14 by first divider 34 and from second precursor zone 16 by second divider 36.\n\n4\n\n[0022] To substantially prevent non- LD A reactions caused by mixing of nonadsorbed quantities of the first and second precursor gases in one of the chambers 44, 46, 50, it is necessary for the system 10 to inhibit the migration of Precursor 1 from first precursor zone 14 into isolation zone 20 and the migration of Precursor 2 from second precursor zone 16 into isolation zone 20. Passageways 54, 56 are preferably configured to restrict the flow of gases between the zones 14,16, 20, to avoid or limit diffusion of precursor gases into a common zone. Passageways 54, 56 may include slits sized only slightly thicker and wider than the thickness and width of the substrate passing through them, leaving only a very small amount of headroom and margins to allow substrate 12 to pass therethrough without scraping against the sides of the passageways. For example, headroom and margins may range between microns and millimeters in certain embodiments. The passageways 54, 56 may also include elongate tunnels through which the substrate 12 passes, as depicted in FIGS. 1, 2, and 4. Such slits and tunnels are sometimes referred to as slit valves, although no actual moving valve gate is utilized. In some embodiments, the passageways 54, 56 include a wiper for further restricting flow. In one such embodiment, the substrate is threaded through opposing leaves of resilient material, such as a synthetic rubber, which wipe against opposing surfaces of the substrate.\n\n[0023] In an alternate embodiment (not shown), the inert gas chamber 50 of isolation zone 20 and dividers 34, 36 are eliminated, so that isolation zone 20 essentially consists of a series of long narrow passageways extending completely between precursor zones 14,16. In such an embodiment, no common inert gas chamber 50 connects the passageways, so inert gas is injected directly into the passageways medially of the first and second precursor zones 14,16 to help prevent precursor migration and mixing. Isolation zone 20 of this embodiment would include a manifold, or a number of manifolds, for routing inert gas lines to nozzles along the sides of the passageways. The manifold or manifolds would formed in the material of the reaction chamber bordering the passageways, and may be connected to an inert gas delivery system along the sides of the system, rather than at an end of the system as shown in FIG. 1.\n\n[0024] To help isolate the first precursor gas from the second precursor gas, pressure differentials are preferably established between the isolation zone 20 and the first precursor zone 14 and between the isolation zone 20 and the second precursor zone 16. In one embodiment, the pressure differentials may be generated by injecting inert gas into isolation zone 20 at a pressure greater than the operating pressure of the precursor zones 14, 16, and then passively exhausting gases from the precursor zones 14, 16. In another embodiment, the exhaust from precursor zones 14, 16 could be controlled relative to a passive exhaust from isolation zone 20 or by throttling an exhaust flow from isolation zone 20. Pressure differentials may also be generated by pumping from\n\nbe", + "recall": 0.7245370370370371, + "true_md": "5 \n\nEP 2 000 008 B1\n\n6 \n\nible substrates, such as on plastic substrates for organic light emitting diode (OLED) displays, and the deposition of conformal coatingson verylarge substrates. Manyad- ditional advantages and uses of the systems and meth- odswill become apparent fromthe following detailed de- scription, which proceeds with reference to the accom- panying drawings.\n\n10 15 20 25 [0020] FIG. 1 illustrates a schematic cross- section view of a system 10 according to a first embodiment for the deposition of a thin-film coating onto a flexible sub- strate 12 (shown in profile in FIG. 1), such as a web of plastic film or metal foil, for example. With reference to FIG. 1, system 10 includes first and second precursor zones 14 and 16, respectively, separated by an interme- diate isolation zone 20 in which an inert fluid is present. The inert fluid may comprise an inert liquid, but more preferably consists essentially of an inert gas, such as nitrogen (N$_{2}$).Wheninuse,reactive firstandsecondpre- cursor gases (Precursor 1 and Precursor 2) are intro- duced into the respective first and second precurso r zones14,16fromfirst andsecond precursor deliverysys- tems 24, 26. Precursor delivery systems 24, 26 may in- clude precursor source containers (not shown) located outside or within precursor zones 14, 16. Additionally or alternatively, precursor delivery systems 24, 26 may in- cludepiping, pumps, valves, tanks,and other associated equipment for supplying precursor gases into precursor zones14, 16. An inert gasdelivery system 28is similarly included for injecting inert gas into isolation zone 20.\n\n30 35 40 45 50 55 [0021] In the embodiment shown, precursor zo nes 14,16 andisolation zone 20aredefined and borderedby an outer reaction chamber housing or vessel 30, divided by first and second dividers 34, 36 into three sub-cham- bers, namely, a first precursor chamber 44, a second precursor chamber 46and aninertgaschamber 50. Ves- sel30maycompriseapressurevesselorvacuumvessel substantially isolating the process space from the exter- nal environment. In other embodiments, the vessel 30 may have entranceand exitpassageways for interfacing with other process modules or equipment, as described below with reference to FIG. 4. A series of first passage- ways 54 through first divider 34 are spaced apart along a general direction of travel of substrate 12, and a cor- responding series of second passageways 56 are pro- vided through second divider 36. The passageways 54, 56 are arranged and configured for substrate 12 to be threaded therethrough back and forth between first and second precursor zones 14,16 multiple times, and each time through isolation zone 20. For aweb substrate,pas- sageways54, 56 preferablycompriseslits having a width (exaggerated in FIG. 1) that is slightly greater than the thickness of substrate 12 and a length (not shown) ex- tending into the plane of FIG.1 (i.e., normal to the page) and that is slightly greater than a width of the substrate. Isolation zone 20 is, thus, preferably separated (albeit imperfectly) from the first precursor zone 14 by first di- vider 34 and from second precursor zone 16 by second divider 36.\n\n[0022] To substantially prevent non- ALD reactions caused by mixing of nonadsorbed quantities of the first and second precursor gases in one of the chambers 44, 46, 50, it is necessary for the system 10 to inhibit the migrationofPrecursor 1 from first precursor zone 14 into isolation zone 20 and the migration of Precursor 2 from second precursor zone 16 into isolation zone 20. Pas- sageways54,56 are preferablyconfigured torestrict the flow of gases between the zones 14,16, 20, to avoid or limit diffusion of precursor gases into a common zone. Passageways 54, 56 may include slits sized only slightly thicker and wider than the thickness and width of the substratepassing throughthem, leavingonlyaverysmall amount of headroom and margins to allow substrate 12 to pass therethrough without scraping against the sides of the passageways. For example, headroom and mar- gins may range between microns and millimeters in cer- tain embodiments. The passageways 54, 56 may also include elongate tunnels through which the substrate 12 passes, as depicted in FIGS. 1, 2, and 4. Such slits and tunnels are sometimes referred toasslit valves, although no actual moving valve gate is utilized. In some embod- iments, the passageways 54, 56 include a wiper for fur- ther restricting flow. In one such embodiment, the sub- strate is threaded through opposing leaves of resilient material, such as a synthetic rubber, which wipe against opposing surfaces of the substrate.\n\n[0023] In an alternate embodiment (not shown), the inert gas chamber 50 of isolation zone 20 and dividers 34,36 are eliminated, sothatisolation zone20essentially consistsofa seriesoflong narrowpassagewaysextend- ing completely between precursor zones 14,16. In such an embodiment, no common inert gas chamber 50 con- nects the passageways, so inert gas is injected directly into the passageways medially of the first and second precursor zones 14,16 to help prevent precursor migra- tion and mixing. Isolation zone 20 of this embodiment would include a manifold, or a number of manifolds, for routing inert gas lines to nozzles along the sides of the passageways. The manifold or manifolds would formedin the materialof the reactionchamber bordering the passageways, and may be connected toan inert gas deliverysystemalong the sidesof the system, ratherthan at an end of the system as shown in FIG. 1.\n\n[0024] To help isolate the first precursor gas from the second precursor gas, pressure differentials are prefer- ably established between the isolation zone 20 and the first precursor zone 14 and between the isolation zone 20 and the second precursor zone 16. In one embodi- ment, the pressure differentials may be generated by in- jecting inert gasinto isolation zone 20 at a pressure great- er than the operating pressure of the precursor zones 14, 16, and then passively exhausting gases from the precursor zones 14, 16. In another embodiment, the ex- haust from precursor zones 14, 16 could be controlled relative to a passive exhaust from isolation zone 20 or bythrottling an exhaust flowfrom isolation zone20. Pres- sure differentialsmayalsobegenerated bypumpingfrom\n\n4" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8848377152084163, + "doc_id": "4d1758f565fde0a8c262c6fa35f2749c93bf07cba5a49e6853a48f8f387a017a", + "edit_distance": 0.3274336283185841, + "f1_score": 0.9442970822281165, + "meteor": 0.9663735983709034, + "precision": 0.9222797927461139, + "pred_md": "EP 1 499 943 B1\n\n(11) EP 1 499 943 B1\n\n## (12) EUROPEAN PATENT SPECIFICATION\n\n- (45) Date of publication and mention\n- (51) Int Cl.:\n\nof the grant of the patent:\n\n20.04.2011 Bulletin 2011/16\n\n- (21) Application number:\n\n02757648.7\n\n- (22) Date of filing:\n\n04.09.2002\n\nG06F 1/32 (2006.01)\n\n- (86) International application number:\n\nPCT/US2002/028537\n\n- (87) International publication number:\n\nWO2003/027818 (03.04.2003 Gazette 2003/14)\n\n## (54) A METHOD AND APPARATUS TO PROVIDE A USER PRIORITY MODE\n\nVERFAHREN UND VORRICHTUNG ZUR BEREITSTELLUNG EINES BENUTZERPRIORITÄTSMODUS\n\nPROCEDE ET DISPOSITIF DONNANT UN MODE DE PRIORITE D'UTILISATEUR\n\n- (84) Designated Contracting States:\n\nAT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB GR IE IT LI LU MC NL PT SE SK TR\n\n- (30) Priority:\n\n25.09.2001 US 965283\n\n- (43) Date of publication of application:\n- 26.01.2005\n\nBulletin 2005/04\n\n- (73) Proprietor:\n\nIntel Corporation\n\nSanta Clara, CA 95052 (US)\n\n- (72) Inventor:\n\nSTANLEY, Randy\n\nAptos, CA 95003 (US)\n\n- (74) Representative:\n\nGoddar, Heinz J.\n\nForrester & Boehmert Pettenkoferstrasse 20-22 80336 München (DE)\n\n- (56) References cited:\n\nEP-A- 0 708 398\n\nUS-A- 5 396 635\n\nUS-A- 6 076 171\n\nNote: Within nine months of the publication of the mention of the grant of the European patent in the European Patent Bulletin, any person may give notice to the European Patent Office of opposition to that patent, in accordance with the Implementing Regulations. Notice of opposition shall not be deemed to have been filed until the opposition fee has been paid. (Art. 99(1) European Patent Convention).\n\nPrinted by Jouve, 75001 PARIS (FR)", + "recall": 0.967391304347826, + "true_md": "# (11) EP 1 499 943 B1\n\n# (12) EUROPEAN PATENT SPECIFICATION\n\n# (54) A METHOD AND APPARATUS TO PROVIDE A USER PRIORITY MODE\n\n- (45) Date of publication and mention of the grant of the patent: 20.04.2011 Bulletin 2011/16\n\n- (21) Application number: 02757648.7\n\n- (22) Date of filing: 04.09.2002\n\n- (51) Int Cl.: G06F1/32 (2006.01)\n\n- (86) International application number: PCT/US2002/028537\n\n- (87) International publication number: WO 2003/027818 (03.04.2003 Gazette 2003/14)\n\n- (84) Designated Contracting States: AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB GR IE IT LI LU MC NL PT SE SK TR\n\n- (30) Priority: 25.09.2001 US 965283\n\n- (43) Date of publication of application: 26.01.2005 Bulletin 2005/04\n\n- (73) Proprietor: Intel Corporation Santa Clara, CA 95052 (US)\n\n- (56) References cited: \n\n- (74) Representative: Goddar, Heinz J. Forrester & Boehmert Pettenkoferstrasse 20-22 80336 München (DE)\n\n- (72) Inventor: STANLEY, Randy Aptos, CA 95003 (US)\n\nVERFAHREN UND VORRICHTUNG ZUR BEREITSTELLUNG EINES BENUTZERPRIORITÄTSMODUS\n\nPROCEDE ET DISPOSITIF DONNANT UN MODE DE PRIORITE D’UTILISATEUR\n\nNote: Within nine months of the publication of the mention of the grant of the European patent in the European Patent Bulletin, any person may give notice to the European Patent Office of opposition to that patent, in accordance with the Implementing Regulations. Notice of opposition shall not be deemed to have been filed until the opposition fee has been paid. (Art. 99(1) European Patent Convention).\n\nPrinted by Jouve, 75001 PARIS (FR)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6771156767756018, + "doc_id": "87a846a709714db53b7f9809d91316cf57e819cf56924bb9e537cfe3af0641f1", + "edit_distance": 0.527027027027027, + "f1_score": 0.8620689655172413, + "meteor": 0.8519968181818182, + "precision": 0.8426966292134831, + "pred_md": "EP 2 000 008 B1\n\n## REFERENCES CITED IN THE DESCRIPTION\n\nThis list of references cited by the applicant is for the reader's convenience only. It does not form part of the European patent document. Even though great care has been taken in compiling the references, errors or omissions cannot be excluded and the EPO disclaims all liability in this regard.\n\n## Patent documents cited in the description\n\n- · US 4058430 A, Suntola [0002]\n- · US 20040208994 A1, Härkönen [0002]\n- · US 20040124131 A1, Aitchison [0002]\n\n## Non-patent literature cited in the description\n\n- · Atomic Layer Epitaxy. Blackie and Son Ltd, 1990 [0002]\n\n19\n\n- · US 20050011555 A1, Maula[0002]\n- · US 6888172 B2 [0006]", + "recall": 0.8823529411764706, + "true_md": "EP 2 000 008 B1\n\n## REFERENCES CITED IN THE DESCRIPTION\n\n## Patent documents cited in the description\n\n## Non-patent literature cited in the description\n\nThis list of references cited bytheapplicant is forthe reader’s convenience only.Itdoes notform part of the European patent document. Even though great care has been taken in compiling the references, errorsor omissions cannot be excluded and the EPOdisclaims all liability in this regard.\n\n- • US 4058430 A, Suntola [0002]\n\n- • US 20040208994 A1, Härkönen [0002]\n\n- • US 20040124131 A1, Aitchison [0002]\n\n- • US 20050011555 A1, Maula- [0002]\n\n- • US 6888172 B2 [0006]\n\n- • Atomic Layer Epitaxy. Blackie and Son Ltd, 1990 [0002]\n\n19" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7581950799903588, + "doc_id": "e48af0e7420948c29f891acbd52ba1d4ea0a34e0376a5c55955c104e2f2b2775", + "edit_distance": 0.8126747437092264, + "f1_score": 0.8099861303744799, + "meteor": 0.594312279196444, + "precision": 0.8848484848484849, + "pred_md": "3\n\n4\n\nEP 1 499 943 B1\n\n[0009] figure 1 is a block diagram of an exemplary multiple performance state computer system that may be used in conjunction with transitioning an integrated circuit from a first performance state to the higher performance state upon detecting a user event;\n\n[0010] figure 2 illustrates a graph of various performance states of one embodiment of an integrated circuit having multiple performance states;\n\n[0011] figure 3 illustrates a graph of various performance states of one embodiment of an integrated circuit having multiple performance states including the performance state of operating at a higher state of performance for a transient period of time; and\n\n[0012] figure 4 illustrates a flow diagram of one embodiment of the algorithm to transition the state of performance of the integrated circuit.\n\n[0013] While the invention is subject to various modifications and alternative forms, specific embodiments thereof have been shown by way of example in the drawings and will herein be described in detail. The invention should be understood to not be limited to the particular forms disclosed, but on the contrary, the intention is to cover all modifications, equivalents, and alternatives falling within the scope of the appended claims.\n\nprocessor. In one embodiment, a power management algorithm controls the clock frequency and voltage supplied to the processor.\n\n[0016] Figure 1 is a block diagram of an exemplary multiple performance state computer system that may be used in conjunction with transitioning an integrated circuit from a first performance state to the higher performance state upon detecting a user event. In one embodiment, computer system 100 comprises a communication mechanism or bus 111 for communicating information, and an integrated circuit component such as a processor 112 coupled with bus 111 for processing information. Processor 112 may include a microprocessor, but is not limited to a microprocessor, such as a Pentium ™ , PowerPC ™ , Alpha ™ , etc.\n\n[0017] Computer system 100 further comprises a random access memory (RAM), or other dynamic storage device 104 (referred to as main memory) coupled to bus 111 for storing information and instructions to be executed by processor 112 . Main memory 104 also may be used for storing temporary variables or other intermediate information during execution of instructions by processor 112 .\n\n[0018] Computer system 100 also comprises a read only memory (ROM) and/or other static storage device 106 coupled to bus 111 for storing static information and instructions for processor 112, and a mass storage memory 107 , such as a magnetic disk or optical disk and its corresponding disk drive. Mass storage memory 107 is coupled to bus 111 for storing information and instructions.\n\n[0019] Computer system 100 may further be coupled to a display device 121 , such as a cathode ray tube (CRT) or liquid crystal display (LCD), coupled to bus 111 for displaying information to a computer user. An alphanumeric input device (keyboard) 122 , including alphanumeric and other keys, may also be coupled to bus 111 for communicating information and command selections to processor 112 . An additional user input device is cursor control device 123 , such as a mouse, trackball, trackpad, stylus, or cursor direction keys, coupled to bus 111 for communicating direction information and command selections to processor 112 , and for controlling cursor movement on a display device 112 .\n\n[0020] Another device that may be coupled to bus 111 is a hard copy device 124 , which may be used for printing instructions, data, or other information on a medium such as paper, film, or similar types of media. Furthermore, a sound recording and playback device, such as a speaker and/or microphone (not shown) may optionally be coupled to bus 111 for audio interfacing with computer system 100 . Another device that may be coupled to bus 111 is a wired/ wireless communication capability 125 to communication to a phone.\n\n[0021] In one embodiment, processor 112 uses the clock frequency supplied by frequency regulation logic 134 to coordinate the execution of instructions within the processor 112 . For one embodiment, frequency regula-\n\n5\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n## DETAILED DISCUSSION\n\n30\n\n35\n\n40\n\n[0014] In the following description, numerous specific details are set forth, such as examples of specific data signals, named component blocks, levels of performance, storage and operating locations of an algorithm, etc., in order to provide a thorough understanding of the present invention. It will be apparent, however, to one skilled in the art that the present invention may be practiced without these specific details. In other instances, well known components or methods have not been described in detail but rather in a block diagram in order to avoid unnecessarily obscuring the present invention. Thus, the specific details set forth are merely exemplary. The specific details may be varied from and still be contemplated to be within the scope of the appended claims. The term coupled is defined as meaning connected either directly or indirectly.\n\n[0015] In general, a method, apparatus and system are described which allow a user event to trigger a direct transition of an integrated circuit from a first performance state to a higher performance state. In one embodiment, the first performance state being a first voltage level supplied to a processor and a first clock frequency of operation for that processor or other similar integrated circuit in a computer system. In one embodiment, the higher performance state being a second higher voltage level supplied to the processor and a second higher clock frequency of operation for that processor. In one embodiment, the higher performance state adds a second processor to manage the processing load. In one embodiment, lowering the clock frequency and/or voltage level of the processor reduces the power consumed by the\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n3", + "recall": 0.7468030690537084, + "true_md": "3 \n\nEP 1 499 943 B1\n\n4 \n\n[0009] figure1isa blockdiagram of anexemplarymul- tiple performance state computer system that may be used in conjunctionwithtransitioning an integrated circuit from a first performance state to the higher performance state upon detecting a user event;\n\n[0010] figure 2 illustrates a graph of various perform- ance states of one embodiment of an integrated circuit having multiple performance states;\n\n[0012] figure 4 illustrates a flow diagram of one em- bodiment of the algorithm to transition the state of per- formance of the integrated circuit.\n\n[0013] While the invention is subject to various modi- fications and alternative forms, specific embodiments thereofhavebeenshownbyway of example in thedraw- ings and will herein be described in detail. The invention should be understood to not be limited to the particular forms disclosed, but on the contrary, the intention is to coverall modifications,equivalents,and alternativesfall- ing within the scope of the appended claims.\n\n[0011] figure 3 illustrates a graph of various perform- ance states of one embodiment of an integrated circuit having multiple performance states including the per- formance state of operating at a higher state of perform- ance for a transient period of time; and\n\n30 35 40 [0014] In the following description, numerous specific details are set forth, such as examples of specific data signals, named component blocks, levels of perform- ance, storage and operating locations of an algorithm, etc., in order to provide a thorough understanding of the present invention. It will be apparent, however, to one skilled in the art that the present invention may be prac- ticed without these specific details. In other instances, well known components or methods have not been de- scribed in detail but rather in a block diagram in order to avoid unnecessarily obscuring the present invention. Thus, thespecific details set forthare merelyexemplary. The specific details may be varied from and still be con- templated tobe withinthe scope ofthe appendedclaims. Theterm coupled is defined asmeaning connectedeither directly or indirectly.\n\n[0015] In general, a method, apparatus and system are described which allow a user event to trigger a direct transitionof anintegratedcircuit froma first performance state to a higher performance state. In one embodiment, thefirst performance statebeing a firstvoltage levelsup- plied to a processor and a first clock frequency of oper- ation for that processor or other similar integrated circuit in a computer system. In one embodiment, the higher performance state being a second higher voltage level supplied to the processor and a second higher clock fre- quency of operation for that processor. In one embodi- ment, the higher performance state adds a second proc- essor to manage the processing load. In one embodi- ment, lowering the clock frequency and/or voltage level of the processor reduces the power consumed by the\n\n[0021] In one embodiment, processor 112 uses the clock frequency supplied by frequency regulation logic 134 to coordinate the execution of instructions within the processor 112 . For one embodiment, frequency regula-\n\n[0020] Another device that may be coupledto bus 111 isa hard copy device 124 , which maybeusedfor printing instructions, data, or other information on a mediumsuch as paper, film, or similar types of media. Furthermore, a soundrecordingandplaybackdevice, suchasa speaker and/or microphone (not shown) may optionally be cou- pled to bus 111 for audio interfacing with computer sys- tem 100 . Another device thatmay be coupled to bus 111 isawired/ wirelesscommunicationcapability 125 tocom- munication to a phone.\n\nprocessor. In one embodiment, a power management algorithm controls the clock frequency and voltage sup- plied to the processor.\n\n[0016] Figure 1 is a block diagram of an exemplary multiple performance state computer system that may be used in conjunction with transitioning an integrated circuit from a first performance state to the higher per- formance state upon detecting a user event. In one em- bodiment, computer system 100 comprises a communi- cation mechanism or bus 111 for communicating infor- mation, and an integrated circuit component such as a processor 112 coupled with bus 111 for processing in- formation.Processor 112 may include a microprocessor, but is not limited to a microprocessor, such as a Pen- tium$^{™}$, PowerPC$^{™}$, Alpha$^{™}$, etc.\n\n[0017] Computer system 100 further comprises a ran- dom access memory (RAM), or other dynamic storage device 104 (referred to as main memory) coupled to bus 111 for storing information and instructions to be execut- ed by processor 112 . Main memory 104 also may be used for storing temporary variables or other intermedi- ate information during execution of instructions by proc- essor 112 .\n\n[0018] Computer system 100 also comprises a read only memory (ROM) and/or other static storage device 106 coupled to bus 111 for storing static information and instructionsfor processor 112, anda massstorage mem- ory 107 , such as a magnetic disk or optical disk and its corresponding disk drive. Mass storage memory 107 is coupled to bus 111 for storing information and instruc- tions.\n\n[0019] Computer system 100 may further be coupled to adisplaydevice 121 , such asacathode ray tube(CRT) or liquid crystal display (LCD), coupled to bus 111 for displaying information to a computer user. An alphanu- meric input device (keyboard) 122 , including alphanu- meric and other keys, may also be coupled to bus 111 for communicating information and command selections to processor 112 . An additional userinputdeviceiscursor control device 123 ,suchasa mouse,trackball,trackpad, stylus, or cursor direction keys, coupled to bus 111 for communicating direction information and command se- lections to processor 112 , and for controlling cursor movement on a display device 112 .\n\n## DETAILED DISCUSSION\n\n3" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7510848191232214, + "doc_id": "870748a9a8d7c8957d02f8b79606ef02921ed32d0fe33bb3023482c97661271e", + "edit_distance": 0.8356545961002786, + "f1_score": 0.8113695090439276, + "meteor": 0.6428900810094277, + "precision": 0.8820224719101124, + "pred_md": "15\n\n16\n\nEP 1 499 943 B1\n\ncircuit.\n\n- 13. The apparatus of claim 10, further comprising:\n- frequency regulation logic to change an operating frequency of the first integrated circuit, the frequency regulation logic to receive a signal from the program.\n- 14. The apparatus of claim 10, further comprising:\n- voltage regulation logic to change an operating voltage of the first integrated circuit, the voltage regulation logic to receive a signal from the program.\n- 15. The apparatus of claim 10, wherein the instructions reside in a Basic Input Output System.\n- 16. The apparatus of claim 10, wherein the instructions reside in an operating system.\n- 17. The apparatus of claim 10, wherein the instructions reside in application software.\n- 18. The apparatus of claim 10, wherein the first integrated circuit comprises a chip set.\n- 19. The apparatus of claim 10, wherein the first integrated circuit comprises a processing unit.\n\n5\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\n- 20. The apparatus of claim 15, wherein the Basic Input Output System to receive a notification signal from an operating system that the user event has occurred.\n- 21. The apparatus of claim 14, wherein the program comprises an increasing state transition algorithm discrete from a decreasing state transition algorithm.\n\n40\n\n- 22. The apparatus of claim 10, wherein the program to transition the first integrated circuit to a next higher state of performance based upon an occurrence of a non-user event increases utilization of the first integrated circuit over a preset threshold.\n- 23. A machine-readable medium that provides instructions, which when executed by a machine, cause the machine to perform operations comprising:\n\ndetecting (402) an event to transition an integrated circuit of a computing system to a higher state of performance, the integrated circuit having multiple states of performance including a first state of performance, a second state of performance higher than the first state of performance, and a third state of performance higher than the second state of performance; and\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n9\n\ndetermining (404) whether the event is a userinitiated event or a software-initiated event; if the event is a userinitiated event directly transitioning (406) the integrated circuit from the first state of performance to the third state of performance based upon detecting the user event, if the event is a software-initiated event transitioning (408) the integrated circuit from the first state of performance to the second state of performance.\n\n- 24. The machine-readable medium of claim 23, further comprising instructions which, when executed by the machine, cause the machine to perform the further operations comprising:\n\nchanging an operating frequency of the integrated circuit to change the state of performance of the integrated circuit.\n\n- 25. The machine-readable medium of claim 23, further comprising instructions which, when executed by the machine, cause the machine to perform the further operations comprising:\n\nchanging an operating voltage level of the integrated circuit to change the state of performance of the integrated circuit.\n\n- 26. The machine-readable medium of claim 23, further comprising instructions which, when executed by the machine, cause the machine to perform the further operations comprising:\n- operating the integrated circuit at the third state of performance for a transient period of time.\n- 27. The machine-readable medium of one of claims 23 to 26, further comprising instructions which, when executed by the machine, cause the machine to perform the further operations comprising:\n- changing the state of performance of the integrated circuit by changing an amount of processors to manage the processing load.\n\n## Patentansprüche\n\n- 1. Verfahren, umfassend:\n\nDetektieren (402) eines Ereignisses, um eine integrierte Schaltung eines Computersystems in einen höheren Performance- Zustand zu versetzen, wobei die integrierte Schaltung mehrere Performance-Zustände aufweist einschließlich eines ersten Performance-Zustandes, eines zweiten Performance-Zustands, der höher als", + "recall": 0.7511961722488039, + "true_md": "15 \n\nEP 1 499 943 B1\n\n16 \n\ncircuit.\n\nfrequency regulation logic to change an operat- ing frequency of the first integrated circuit, the frequency regulation logic to receive signal from the program.\n\nvoltage regulation logic to change an operating voltage of the first integrated circuit, the voltage regulation logic to receive a signal from the pro- gram.\n\ndetecting (402) an event to transition an inte- grated circuit of a computing system to a higher state of performance, the integrated circuit hav- ing multiple states of performance including a firststate ofperformance,a secondstate ofper- formance higher than the first state of perform- ance, and a third state of performance higher than the second state of performance; and\n\nDetektieren (402) einesEreignisses,umeine in- tegrierte Schaltung eines Computersystems in einen höheren Performance- Zustandzuverset- zen, wobei die integrierte Schaltung mehrere Performance-Zustände aufweist einschließlich eines ersten Performance-Zustandes, eines zweiten Performance-Zustands, der höher als\n\nchanging the state of performance of the inte- gratedcircuit by changingan amount of proces- sors to manage the processing load.\n\noperating the integrated circuit at the third state of performance for a transient period of time.\n\nchanging an operating voltage level of the inte- gratedcircuitto change the state ofperformance of the integrated circuit.\n\nchanging an operatingfrequencyoftheintegrat- ed circuit to change the state of performance of the integrated circuit.\n\ndetermining (404) whether the event is a user- initiated event or a software-initiated event; if the eventis a user- initiatedevent directlytran- sitioning (406) theintegratedcircuit fromthe first state of performance to the third state of per- formance based upon detecting the user event, if the event is a software-initiated event transi- tioning (408) the integrated circuit from the first state of performance to the second state of per- formance.\n\n- 13. The apparatus of claim 10, further comprising:\n\n- 14. The apparatus of claim 10, further comprising:\n\n- 15. The apparatus of claim 10, wherein the instructions reside in a Basic Input Output System.\n\n- 24. The machine-readable medium of claim 23, further comprising instructions which,when executed bythe machine, cause the machine to perform the further operations comprising:\n\n- 16. The apparatus of claim 10, wherein the instructions reside in an operating system.\n\n- 17. The apparatus of claim 10, wherein the instructions reside in application software.\n\n- 18. The apparatus of claim 10,whereinthe first integrat- ed circuit comprises a chip set.\n\n- 19. The apparatus of claim 10,whereinthe first integrat- ed circuit comprises a processing unit.\n\n- 20. The apparatus of claim 15, wherein the Basic Input Output System to receive a notification signal from an operating system that the user event has curred.\n\n- 21. The apparatus of claim 14, wherein the prog ram comprises an increasing state transition algorithm discretefromadecreasing state transition algorithm.\n\n- 22. The apparatus of claim 10, wherein the program to transition the first integrated circuit to a next higher state of performance based upon an occurrence of a non-user event increases utilization of the first in- tegrated circuit over a preset threshold.\n\n- 23. A machine-readable medium that provides instruc- tions,which whenexecuted bya machine,cause the machine to perform operations comprising:\n\n- 25. The machine-readable medium of claim 23, further comprising instructions which,when executed bythe machine, cause the machine to perform the further operations comprising:\n\n- 26. The machine-readable medium of claim 23, further comprising instructions which,when executed bythe machine, cause the machine to perform the further operations comprising:\n\n- 27. The machine-readable medium of one of claims 23 to 26, further comprising instructions which, when executed by the machine,cause themachine to per- form the further operations comprising:\n\n- 1. Verfahren, umfassend:\n\n## Patentansprüche\n\n9" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5698363775444273, + "doc_id": "e7d139dcac82be8506e1659b2769d0016cd50e4e86cf9350cdfe180c6fd178ca", + "edit_distance": 0.25, + "f1_score": 0.8571428571428572, + "meteor": 0.754985754985755, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "EP 1 499 943 B1\n\n16", + "recall": 0.75, + "true_md": "EP 1 499 943 B1\n\nFigure 3\n\n16" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "89fbc098a3d717f39d846ff8f758e2f2b2a7a3bdd65c8a2ad5064488dd219940", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9976851851851852, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "EP 2 000 008 B1\n\n17", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "EP 2 000 008 B1\n\n17" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7551773723287483, + "doc_id": "80a30cfc7fbf063bb406cc97c722871d5fd523747b17007591ba898049220b42", + "edit_distance": 0.1892123287671233, + "f1_score": 0.8249194414607948, + "meteor": 0.8358429180444211, + "precision": 0.8827586206896552, + "pred_md": "13\n\n14\n\nEP 2 000 008 B1\n\nstrate transport mechanism 360 correspond to similar 2digit reference numerals identifying similar elements in the embodiment of FIG. 1. With reference to FIG. 4, system 310 includes input and takeup rolls 374, 386 located outside of the reaction chamber housing 330. Additional input/output turning guides 338 are provided within isolation zone 320. Substrate 312 is fed through one or more slits, wiper valves, or other flow- onstricting entrance c and/or exit passageways 340, 342. Positioning the input and take-up rolls 374, 386 outside of reaction chamber 330 may ease roll loading and unloading.\n\n5\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n[0043] In an alternative embodiment (not shown), the input and take-up rolls 374, 386 may be placed in separate vacuum chambers or load- locks adjacent the first and second ends 376, 384 of reactor housing 330. Additional process modules may be provided between input roll 374 and reaction chamber 330 and/or between reaction chamber 330 and take-up roll 386 such that the thin film coating process would comprise just one module in a larger substrate processing system. For example, a preheating stage or other functionalization module may be provided between input roll 374 and reaction chamber 330. Examples of pre- treating or functionalizing steps useful with ALD coating system 310 include vacuum processing to speed up out-gassing of substrate 312 before coating; ultra-violet light treatment; ozone treatment, e.g., for making normally- hydrophobic plastic films hydrophilic to enhance or enable ALD processing; exposure to a plasma or other source of radicals; and cleaning steps. Other process modules, such as lithography and other patterning steps, non- ALD deposition such as sputtering, and other surface finishing and coating steps, may also be utilized.\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\n[0044] System 310 includes adjustable turning guides 364, 366 that are movable toward and away from dividers 334, 336 and isolation zone 320 to change a substrate dwell time within the precursor zones 314, 316. The location of turning guides 364, 366 may be adjusted independently or in groups, and may be controlled by a control system 310 to change dwell time as process needs change over time. In FIG. 4, three different groups of turning guides are shown in each precursor zone, each group having a different dwell time. Adjusting dwell time may facilitate nucleation for certain precursors, and may improve precursor penetration in porous surfaces. Similarly, dividers 334, 336 may be movable along the same direction as adjustable turning guides 364, 366 (i.e., up and down), to change the substrate dwell time in isolation zone 320.\n\n[0045] System 310 further includes a precursor recycling subsystem 400 located upstream of a junction 404 of the pumping/exhaust lines from first and second precursor zones 314, 316. Subsystem 400 includes first and second traps 410, 420 flanked by a pair of three-way valves 430, 432, or their equivalent, to enable one of the traps 410, 420 to be selectively interposed in the pumping line 440 between the precursor zone 316 and pump 358. A first one of the valves 430 includes two outlets, one\n\n50\n\n55\n\n8\n\nbeing connected to the inlet of first trap 410 and the other connected to the inlet of second trap 420. Similarly, second valve 432 includes two inlets; one connected to the outlet of first trap 410 and the other to the outlet of second trap 420. FIG. 4 shows the lefthand sides of valves 430, 432 being closed and the right-hand sides open, so that second trap 420 is interposed in the pumping line 440 and serving as a precursor trap. Meanwhile, first trap 410 is isolated from the pumping line 440, as indicated by blackened shut-off valves on the left-hand side of each three-way valve 430, 432. First trap 410 is operating in a regenerative mode, whereby the trap 410 is being heated to release previously trapped precursor material into a precursor supply/recycling line 450. Isolation valves 462, 464 are provided between supply outlets of respective traps 410, 420 and a downstream supply junction 470 of the supply outlets in supply/recycling line 450. The position of valves 430, 432, 462, and 464 may be reversed from what is shown in FIG. 4, so that first trap 410 functions as the inline precursor trap, and second trap 420 operates as a precursor source. In the embodiment shown, one half of subsystem 400 is always operating as a trap, and the other half as a supply component of precursor delivery system 326.\n\n[0046] A second subsystem (not shown) may be provided in the first precursor zone exhaust line upstream of junction 404 for trapping and recycling first precursor in a similar manner.\n\n[0047] Suitable traps 410, 420 for subsystem 400 may include simple inline liquid nitrogen traps or, more preferably, cryogenic \"waterpumps\" modified to pump a precursor, rather than water, at suitable pressures and temperatures. Suitable cryogenic waterpumps preferably include built-in heaters for regeneration capability. Example of cryogenic waterpumps include the Polycold ® PFC water vapor cryopump and the CTI-ryogenics ® LowC Profile Waterpump™, both sold by Brooks Automation (www.brooks.com). Cryogenic waterpumps are normally configured to pump in a low vacuum environment, but may be modified or adjusted to work in the operating pressure ranges of methods described herein. For some precursors the trap operating temperature may range from 100-150° Kelvin, while for others, it may range between 150° and 300° Kelvin. Higher trapping temperatures may enable certain metal halide precursor chemicals to be trapped, while allowing other materials, such as background water vapor, solvents, and inert gas, to pass, thereby improving the purity of trapped precursor.\n\n[0048] The systems and methods described herein may exhibit little or no coating of moving machine parts, including the payout and take-up spools 72, 82, 172, 182, 272, 282, 372, 382 and turning guides 64, 66, 164, 166, 364, 366, since each of these parts is either resident in only one zone of the system, or entirely outside of the zones. Unlike conventional ALD systems, high- peed s pulse valves are not required in the systems described herein and, in theory, maintenance requirements would be minimal.", + "recall": 0.7741935483870968, + "true_md": "13 \n\nEP 2 000 008 B1\n\n14 \n\nstrate transport mechanism 360 correspond to similar 2- digit reference numerals identifying similar elements in the embodiment of FIG. 1. With reference to FIG. 4, sys- tem310includesinput andtake- up rolls374, 386located outside of the reaction chamber housing 330. Additional input/output turning guides 338 are provided within iso- lationzone320. Substrate312isfedthrough one ormore slits, wiper valves, or other flow- constricting entrance and/or exit passageways 340, 342. Positioning the input and take-up rolls 374, 386 outside of reaction chamber 330 may ease roll loading and unloading.\n\n15 20 25 30 [0043] In an alternative embodiment (not shown), the input and take-up rolls 374, 386 may be placed in sepa- rate vacuum chambers or load-locks adjacent the first and second ends 376, 384 of reactor housing 330. Ad- ditional process modules maybeprovided between input roll 374 and reaction chamber 330 and/or between reac- tion chamber 330 and take-up roll 386 such that the thin film coating process would comprise just one module in a larger substrate processing system. For example, a preheating stage or other functionalization module may be providedbetween input roll374and reactionchamber 330. Examples of pre-treating or functionalizing steps useful with ALD coating system 310 include vac uum processingto speed up out-gassing of substrate 312 be- forecoating; ultra-violetlight treatment; ozone treatment, e.g., for making normally-hydrophobic plastic films hy- drophilictoenhance orenable ALDprocessing;exposure to a plasma or other source of radicals; and cleaning steps. Other process modules, such as lithography and other patterningsteps, non- ALDdepositionsuch assput- tering,and other surface finishing andcoating steps,may also be utilized.\n\n35 40 45 [0044] System 310 includes adjustable turning guides 364, 366that aremovable toward andawayfromdividers 334, 336 and isolation zone 320 to change a substrate dwell time within the precursor zones 314, 316. The lo- cation of turning guides 364, 366 may be adjusted inde- pendentlyor ingroups, andmay becontrolledbyacontrol system 310 to change dwell time as process ne eds change over time. In FIG. 4, three different groups of turning guides are shown in each precursor zone, each group having a different dwell time. Adjusting dwell time may facilitate nucleation for certain precursors, and may improve precursor penetration in porous surfaces. Sim- ilarly, dividers 334, 336 may be movable along the same direction as adjustable turning guides 364, 366 (i.e., up anddown), tochange the substrate dwell timein isolation zone 320.\n\n50 55 [0045] System 310 further includes a precursor recy- cling subsystem 400 located upstream of a junction 404 of the pumping/exhaust lines from first and second pre- cursorzones 314, 316. Subsystem400includes first and second traps 410, 420 flanked by a pair of three-way valves 430, 432, or their equivalent, to enable one of the traps410,420tobeselectively interposedinthe pumping line 440between the precursor zone 316and pump 358. A first one of the valves 430 includes two outlets, one\n\nbeing connected to the inlet of first trap 410and the other connected to the inlet of second trap 420. Similarly, sec- ond valve 432 includes two inlets; one connected to the outlet offirst trap410 and theother to the outletof second trap 420. FIG. 4 shows the left- hand sides of valves 430, 432 being closed and the right-hand sides open, so that second trap 420 is interposed in the pumping line 440 andservingasa precursor trap. Meanwhile, first trap410 is isolated from the pumping line 440, as indicated by blackened shut-off valves on the left-hand side of each three-way valve 430, 432. First trap 410 is operating in a regenerative mode, wherebythe trap410 is being heat- ed to release previously trapped precursor material into a precursor supply/recycling line 450. Isolation valves 462, 464 are provided between supply outlets of respec- tive traps 410, 420 and a downstream supply junction 470ofthesupplyoutletsin supply/recycling line 450. The position of valves 430, 432, 462, and 464 may be re- versedfromwhatisshowninFIG. 4,sothat first trap410 functions as the inline precursor trap, and second trap 420 operates as a precursor source. In the embodiment shown, one half of subsystem 400 is always operating as a trap, and the other half as a supply component of precursor delivery system 326.\n\n[0046] A second subsystem (not shown) may be pro- vided in the first precursor zone exhaust line upstream of junction 404 for trapping and recycling first precursor in a similar manner.\n\n[0047] Suitable traps 410, 420 for subsystem400may include simple inline liquid nitrogen traps or, more pref- erably, cryogenic \"waterpumps\" modified to pump a pre- cursor, rather than water, at suitable pressures and tem- peratures. Suitable cryogenicwaterpumps preferablyin- clude built-in heaters for regeneration capability. Exam- ple of cryogenic waterpumps include the Polycold $^{®}$ PFC water vapor cryopump and the CTI- Cryogenics$^{®}$ Low- Profile Waterpump™, both sold by Brooks Automation (www.brooks.com). Cryogenic waterpumpsare normally configured to pump in a low vacuum environment, but may be modified or adjusted to work in the operating pressure ranges of methods described herein. For some precursors the trap operating temperature may range from 100-150° Kelvin, while for others, it may range be- tween 150° and 300° Kelvin. Higher trapping tempera- tures may enable certain metal halide precursor chemi- cals to be trapped, while allowing other materials, such as background water vapor, solvents, and inert gas, to pass, thereby improving the purity of trapped precursor. [0048] The systems and methods described herein may exhibit little or no coating of moving machine parts, including the payoutandtake-up spools72, 82, 172, 182, 272, 282, 372, 382 and turning guides 64, 66, 164, 166, 364, 366, since each of these parts is either resident in only one zone of the system, or entirely outside of the zones. Unlike conventional ALD systems, high- speed pulse valves are not required in the systems described herein and, in theory, maintenance requirements would be minimal.\n\n8" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7595942450380597, + "doc_id": "ef703d9df50438c6a21b788abcee212875703add87c42d2e6c0b757fedbb72db", + "edit_distance": 0.18306351183063513, + "f1_score": 0.8175519630484989, + "meteor": 0.8129827442623602, + "precision": 0.885, + "pred_md": "13\n\n14\n\nEP 1 499 943 B1\n\n[0058] While some specific embodiments of the invention have been shown the invention is not to be limited to these embodiments. For example, most functions performed by electronic hardware components may be duplicated by software emulation. Thus, a software program could issue a command to mimic a user event command code. The algorithm detecting a user event command, even though an actual user event has not occurred, directly transitions the processor to a higher state of performance. In an embodiment, a prioritize event may be a software command issued to invoke the direct transition the processor to a higher state of performance. The invention is to be understood as not limited by the specific embodiments described herein, but only by scope of the appended claims.\n\n## Claims\n\n- 1. A method, comprising:\n\ndetecting (402) an event to transition an integrated circuit of a computing system to a higher state of performance, the integrated circuit having multiple states of performance including a first state of performance, a second state of performance higher than the first state of performance, and a third state of performance higher than the second state of performance, the computing system having a power supply which includes a battery; determining (404) whether the event is a userinitiated event or a software-initiated event; if the event is a user-initiated event directly transitioning (406) the integrated circuit from the first state of performance to the third state of performance if the event is a software- iated init event transitioning (408) the integrated circuit from the first state of performance to the second state of performance.\n\n- 2. The method of claim 1, wherein the user event is defined by a programming environment within which the computing system is operating.\n- 3. The method of claim 1, wherein directly transitioning comprises transitioning without delay.\n- 4. The method of claim 1, further comprising:\n\noperating the integrated circuit at the third state of performance for a predefined period of time based upon thermal considerations to operate at the third state of performance without failure.\n\n- 5. The method of claim 4, wherein the computing system comprises a laptop computer.\n- 6. The method of claim 1, wherein the computing system comprises a personal digital assistant.\n- 7.\n- An apparatus, comprising:\n\nmeans (136) for detecting a user-initiated event or a software-initiated event in a computing system; the computing system including an integrated circuit (112) having multiple states of performance including a first state of performance, a second state of performance higher than the first state of performance, and a third state of performance higher than the second state of performance; means for determining whether a detected event is a user- initiated event or a software-initiated event; and means (130, 134) for directly transitioning the integrated circuit from the first state of performance to the third state of performance based upon detecting that the event is a user-initiated event or for transitioning the integrated circuit from the first state of performance to the second state of performance based upon detecting that the event is a software-initiated event.\n\n- 8. The apparatus of claim 7, further comprising:\n- means (134) for changing an operating frequency of the integrated circuit (112) to change the state of performance of the integrated circuit.\n- 9. The apparatus of claim 7, further comprising:\n\nmeans (130) for changing an operating voltage level of the integrated circuit (112) to change the state of performance of the integrated circuit.\n\n- 10. The apparatus of one of claims 7 to 9, comprising:\n\na computer readable medium; and a program stored in the computer readable medium to manage power consumption within the first integrated circuit, instructions associated with the program to directly transition the first integrated circuit (112) from the first state of performance to the third state of performance based upon detecting a user event.\n\n- 11. The apparatus of claim 10, wherein the first state of performance comprises a first voltage level and a first operating frequency.\n- 12. The apparatus of claim 10, wherein the third state of performance comprises a second integrated circuit co-processing instructions with the first integrated\n\n5\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n8", + "recall": 0.759656652360515, + "true_md": "13 \n\nEP 1 499 943 B1\n\n14 \n\n[0058] Whilesomespecificembodimentsofthe inven- tion have been shown the invention is not to be limited to these embodiments.For example, most functionsper- formed by electronic hardware components may be du- plicatedbysoftware emulation. Thus, a software program could issue a command to mimic a user event command code. The algorithm detecting a user event command, even though an actual user event has not occurred, di- rectly transitions the processor to a higher state of per- formance. In an embodiment, a prioritize event may be a softwarecommand issuedto invoke thedirecttransition the processor to a higher state of performance. The in- vention is to be understood as not limited by the specific embodiments described herein, but only by scope of the appended claims.\n\n## Claims\n\n- 1. A method, comprising:\n\ndetecting (402) an event to transition an inte- grated circuit of a computing system to a higher state of performance, the integrated circuit hav- ing multiple states of performance including a firststate ofperformance,a secondstate ofper- formance higher than the first state of performance, and a third state of performance higher than the second state of performance, the computing system having a power supply which includes a battery; determining (404) whether the event is a user- initiated event or a software-initiated event; if the eventis a user-initiated event directly tran- sitioning (406) theintegratedcircuit fromthe first state of performance to the third state of per- formance if the event is a software- initiated event transitioning (408) the integrated circuit fromthe first state of performanceto the second state of performance.\n\n- 2. The method of claim 1, wherein the user event is defined byaprogramming environmentwithinwhich the computing system is operating.\n\n- 3. The methodofclaim1, whereindirectlytransitioning comprises transitioning without delay.\n\n- 4. The method of claim 1, further comprising:\n\noperating the integrated circuit at the third state of performance for a predefined period of time based upon thermal considerations to operate at the third state of performance without failure.\n\n- 5. The method of claim 4, wherein the computing sys- tem comprises a laptop computer.\n\n- 6. The method of claim 1, wherein the computing sys- tem comprises a personal digital assistant.\n\n- 7. An apparatus, comprising:\n\nmeans (136) for detecting a user-initiated event or a software-initiated eventin a computing sys- tem;\n\nthe computing system including an integrated circuit (112) having multiple states of perform- ance including a first state of performance, a secondstateof performance higherthanthe first state of performance, and a third state of per- formance higher than the second state of per- formance;\n\nmeansfordeterminingwhetheradetectedevent is a user-initiated event or a software-initiated event; and\n\nmeans (130, 134) for directly transitioning the integrated circuit from the first state of perform- anceto the third stateofperformance basedup- on detecting that the event is a user-initiated event or for transitioning the integrated circuit fromthe first state of performanceto the second state of performance based upon detecting that the event is a software-initiated event.\n\n- 8. The apparatus of claim 7, further comprising:\n\nmeans (134) for changing an operating frequen- cy of the integrated circuit (112) to change the state of performance of the integrated circuit.\n\n- 9. The apparatus of claim 7, further comprising:\n\nmeans (130) for changing an operating voltage leveloftheintegratedcircuit(112)tochangethe state of performance of the integrated circuit.\n\n- 10. The apparatus of one of claims 7 to 9, comprising:\n\na computer readable medium;\n\nand\n\na program stored in the computer readable me- dium to manage power consumption within the first integrated circuit, instructions associated with the program to directly transition the first integratedcircuit (112)fromthefirst stateofper- formance to the third state of performance based upon detecting a user event.\n\n- 11. The apparatus of claim 10, wherein the first state of performance comprises a first voltage level and a first operating frequency.\n\n- 12. The apparatus of claim 10, wherein the third state of performance comprises a second integrated circuit co-processing instructions with the first integrated\n\n8" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8092862265381878, + "doc_id": "755b7d1e20dfb1f24f8ec726d4b4f7699ad0560a20aa73c4676477d8b4c22c32", + "edit_distance": 0.4659949622166247, + "f1_score": 0.9262672811059907, + "meteor": 0.9494876220947558, + "precision": 0.8739130434782608, + "pred_md": "EP 2 000 008 B1\n\n(11) EP 2 000 008 B1\n\n## (12) EUROPEAN PATENT SPECIFICATION\n\n- (45) Date of publication and mention\n- (51) Int Cl.:\n\nof the grant of the patent:\n\n27.04.2011 Bulletin 2011/17\n\n- (21) Application number:\n\n07759411.7\n\n- (22) Date of filing:\n\n26.03.2007\n\nC23C 16/455 (2006.01)\n\nH05B 33/10 (2006.01)\n\nC23C 16/54 (2006.01)\n\n- (86)\n- International application number:\n\nPCT/US2007/064961\n\n- (87)\n- International publication number:\n\nWO2007/112370 (04.10.2007 Gazette 2007/40)\n\n## (54) ATOMIC LAYER DEPOSITION SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR COATING FLEXIBLE SUBSTRATES\n\nATOMLAGENABSCHEIDUNGSSYSTEM UND VERFAHREN ZUR BESCHICHTUNG VON FLEXIBLEN SUBSTRATEN\n\nDISPOSITIF ET PROCEDE DE DEPOT EN COUCHES ATOMIQUES POUR REVETEMENT DE SUBSTRATS FLEXIBLES\n\n- (84) Designated Contracting States:\n\nAT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB GR HU IE IS IT LI LT LU LV MC MT NL PL PT RO SE SI SK TR\n\n- (30) Priority:\n\n26.03.2006 US 743786 P\n\n- (43) Date of publication of application:\n- 10.12.2008\n\nBulletin 2008/50\n\n- (73) Proprietor:\n\nLotus Applied Technology, Llc\n\nBeaverton, OR 97006-1997 (US)\n\n- (72) Inventors:\n- • DICKEY, Eric R.\n\nBeaverton, Oregon 97006 (US)\n\n- • BARROW, William A.\n\nBeaverton, Oregon 97006 (US)\n\n- (74) Representative:\n\nHoarton, Lloyd Douglas Charles\n\nForrester & Boehmert Pettenkoferstrasse 20-22 80336 Munich (DE)\n\n- (56) References cited:\n\nEP-A1- 1 795 625\n\nWO-A2-2008/057625\n\nJP-A- 04 187 772\n\nKR-A- 20040 035 083\n\nUS-A1- 2005 172 897\n\nUS-B1- 6 174 377\n\nUS-B2- 6 888 172\n\nNote: Within nine months of the publication of the mention of the grant of the European patent in the European Patent Bulletin, any person may give notice to the European Patent Office of opposition to that patent, in accordance with the Implementing Regulations. Notice of opposition shall not be deemed to have been filed until the opposition fee has been paid. (Art. 99(1) European Patent Convention).\n\nPrinted by Jouve, 75001 PARIS (FR)", + "recall": 0.9852941176470589, + "true_md": "# (12) EUROPEAN PATENT SPECIFICATION\n\n(11) EP 2 000 008 B1\n\n- (86) International application number: PCT/US2007/064961\n\n- (87) International publication number: WO 2007/112370 (04.10.2007 Gazette 2007/40)\n\n- (22) Date of filing: 26.03.2007\n\n- (21) Application number: 07759411.7\n\n- (45) Date of publication and mention of the grant of the patent: 27.04.2011 Bulletin 2011/17\n\n- (84) Designated Contracting States: AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB GR HU IE IS IT LI LT LU LV MC MT NL PL PT RO SE SI SK TR\n\n- (30) Priority: 26.03.2006 US 743786 P\n\n- (43) Date of publication of application: 10.12.2008 Bulletin 2008/50\n\n- (73) Proprietor: Lotus Applied Technology, Llc Beaverton, OR 97006-1997 (US)\n\n- (72) Inventors: \n\n- • DICKEY, Eric R. Beaverton, Oregon 97006 (US)\n\n- (74) Representative: Hoarton, Lloyd Douglas Charles Forrester & Boehmert Pettenkoferstrasse 20-22 80336 Munich (DE)\n\n- • BARROW, William A. Beaverton, Oregon 97006 (US)\n\n## (54) ATOMIC LAYER DEPOSITION SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR COATING FLEXIBLE SUBSTRATES\n\nATOMLAGENABSCHEIDUNGSSYSTEM UND VERFAHREN ZUR BESCHICHTUNG VON FLEXIBLEN SUBSTRATEN\n\nDISPOSITIF ET PROCEDE DE DEPOT EN COUCHES ATOMIQUES POUR REVETEMENT DE SUBSTRATS FLEXIBLES\n\n- (56) References cited: \n\n- (51) Int Cl.: C23C16/455\n\nNote: Within nine months of the publication of the mention of the grant of the European patent in the European Patent Bulletin, any person may give notice to the European Patent Office of opposition to that patent, in accordance with the Implementing Regulations. Notice of opposition shall not be deemed to have been filed until the opposition fee has been paid. (Art. 99(1) European Patent Convention).\n\nPrinted by Jouve, 75001 PARIS (FR)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.783520275808335, + "doc_id": "c74ce194b07edee9cc51c6977f8748d4030b6e34f2e37bc28adc119835aa60be", + "edit_distance": 0.24371069182389937, + "f1_score": 0.8211764705882353, + "meteor": 0.7508506422846316, + "precision": 0.8681592039800995, + "pred_md": "11\n\n12\n\nEP 2 000 008 B1\n\nrated from isolation zone 120 by a third divider and positioned opposite second precursor zone 116. In the embodiment shown, the third divider is a middle section of upper divider 134, which includes a series of third passageways 192 therethrough, spaced apart along third precursor zone 190. Similarly, a fourth precursor zone 194 for receiving a fourth precursor gas (Precursor 4) is positioned opposite second precursor zone 116 and separated from isolation zone 120 by an end section of upper divider 134, through which a series of spaced-apart fourth passageways 196 are provided. Precursor 4 is preferably different from Precursor 1, Precursor 2, and Precursor 3, but may alternatively be the same as Precursor 1 to achieve deposition of alternating layers of thin film materials. Third precursor zone 190 is isolated from first and fourth precursor zones 114, 194 by a pair of partition walls 198 at opposite ends of third precursor zone 190, each extending between upper divider 134 and an outer reaction chamber wall 132 of vessel 30.\n\n[0036] In the embodiment of FIG. 2, more than two precursor zones are utilized to fabricate multiple layers of distinct materials -for example a first ten serpentine paths may traverse between first precursor zone 114 and second precursor zone 116, respectively, and the next ten serpentine paths may traverse between third precursor zone 190 and second precursor zone 116, finally, etc., resulting in multi-layer film stacks.\n\n[0037] In one example, the system 110 illustrated in FIG. 2 may utilize TMA as Precursor 1, water as Precursor 2, TiCl as Precursor 3, and TMA as Precursor 4 to 4 coat 3 cycles of Al O 3 (approximately 0.3 nm (3Å), fol2 lowed by 4 cycles of titania (TiO 2 ) (approximately 0,2 nm (2Å)), followed by another 3 cycles of Al O . 2 3\n\n5\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\n50\n\n[0038] In another example, a thin film of aluminumdoped zinc oxide (ZnO) may be formed utilizing a system similar to the one shown in FIG. 2. Aluminum-doped ZnO is an optically transmissive conductive oxide film that may be useful as a substitute for more expensive indium-tinoxide (ITO) electrodes commonly used in electronics and solar cells. In this example, diethylzinc (DEZn) or dimethylzinc (DMZn) are used as Precursor 1 and Precursor 4, and each of the first and fourth precursor zones 114, 194 includes between 50 and 100 turning guides (i.e., the substrate transits between 50 and 100 times in each of the first and fourth precursor zones). An oxidant, such as water, or more preferably ozone, is used as Precursor 2, and TMA is used as Precursor 3. The third precursor zone 190 may include only a very small number of turning guides (and transits) - for example two - to deposit only a doping amount of Aluminum oxide within the bulk ZnO. The substrate may then be transported through the system multiple times, in multiple passes, to achieve the desired mechanical, electrical, and optical properties.\n\n[0039] In an alternative embodiment (not illustrated), third precursor zone 190 may be positioned between first and second precursor zones 114, 116 so that isolation zone 120 straddles third precursor zone 190 and substrate 112 traverses across third precursor zone 190 as\n\n55\n\n7\n\nit is transported between first and second precursor zones 114, 116. Other variations on the configuration of system 110 are also possible, the variety of configurations preferably having their various precursor zones isolated from each other by one or more isolation zones, to prevent precursor gases from reacting in any of the zones, except at the surface of substrate 112.\n\n[0040] A system 200 shown in FIG. 3 is not an embodiment according to the claimed inv ention. The system 200 may be configured without rollers, yet achieve ALDtype deposition on a long thin substrate 212, such as a web, by passing the substrate 212 along a linear transport path between alternating zones 202, 204, 206, etc., of precursor 1, inert gas, precursor 2, inert gas, precursor 1, inert gas, etc. In FIG. 3, exhaust or pumping lines from precursor zones 202, 206, etc. are omitted for simplicity. While system 200 would likely be much longer than those of FIGS. 1 and 2 for a given layer count, the system 200 of FIG. 3 could be made very thin, for example if configured as a straight-line system such as ones used for architectural glass coating systems. Accordingly, system 200 could be used to coat both flexible substrates and rigid substrates. It could also reduce issues arising, in the systems 10 and 110 of FIGS. 1 and 2, from contact between substrate 12 and the turn guides 64, 66 of substrate transport mechanism 60. In one embodiment, precursor 1 is TMA and precursor 2 is water vapor, and one pass of the substrate 212 through the system completes three ALD cycles to deposit approximately 0,3nm (three angstroms (3 Å)) of aluminium oxide (Al O 3 ). One vari2 ation on the configuration of FIG. 3 would be to have a chamber with as few zones as four, e.g., precursor 1, inert gas isolation, precursor 2, and inert gas isolation, to provide one full ALD cycle. A closed-loop substrate of flexible material (not shown) could be circulated through such a system, and the number of trips or circulations of the loop substrate through the chamber would determined the resulting coating thickness.\n\n[0041] Some systems and methods of the kind described herein may not necessarily require highly specific geometry or mechanical configuration. For instance, in addition to the configurations illustrated in FIGS. 1-3, the substrate could be wound through a path that looks like a \"zig-zag\" or a sine wave, or any path, as long as the substrate winds sequentially through regions that provide at least the following: (1) exposure to one precursor; (2) an isolation zone, wherein the substrate is not exposed to one of the primary precursors; (3) exposure at least a second precursor; and (4) a second isolation zone as in step (2), which may be a common zone as that used for step (2). The substrate does not necessarily have to pass over rollers - essentially any mechanical arrangement that allows the traversal or threading of the substrate through the sequential zones would work.\n\n[0042] FIG. 4 illustrates a system 310 according to a fourth embodiment, wherein the last two digits of 300series reference numerals designating precursor zones 314, 316, isolation zone 320, and components of sub-", + "recall": 0.7790178571428571, + "true_md": "11 \n\nEP 2 000 008 B1\n\n12 \n\n10 15 rated from isolation zone 120 by a third divider and po- sitionedopposite second precursor zone 116. In the em- bodiment shown, the third divider is a middle section of upper divider 134, which includes a series of third pas- sageways 192 therethrough, spaced apart along third precursor zone 190. Similarly, a fourth precursor zone 194 for receiving a fourth precursor gas (Precursor 4) is positioned opposite secondprecursor zone 116 andsep- arated fromisolation zone 120 byan endsection of upper divider 134,throughwhicha seriesof spaced-apart fourth passageways196 are provided. Precursor 4ispreferably different from Precursor 1, Precursor 2, and Precursor 3, but may alternatively be the same as Precursor 1 to achieve deposition of alternating layers of thin film ma- terials.Third precursor zone190is isolatedfromfirst and fourth precursor zones 114, 194 by a pair of partition walls 198 at opposite ends of third precursor zone 190, each extending between upper divider 134 and an outer reaction chamber wall 132 of vessel 30.\n\n20 25 [0036] In the embodiment of FIG. 2, more than two precursor zones are utilized to fabricate multiple layers of distinct materials -for example a first ten serpentine paths may traversebetweenfirst precursor zone114and second precursor zone 116, respectively, and the next ten serpentine paths may traverse between third precur- sor zone 190 and second precursor zone 116, finally, etc., resulting in multi-layer film stacks.\n\n[0037] In one example, the system 110 illustrated in FIG. 2 may utilize TMA as Precursor 1, water as Precur- sor 2, TiCl$_{4}$ as Precursor 3, and TMA as Precursor 4 to coat 3 cycles of Al$_{2}$O$_{3}$ (approximately 0.3 nm (3Å), fol- lowed by 4 cycles of titania (TiO $_{2}$) (approximately 0,2nm (2Å)), followed by another 3 cycles of Al$_{2}$O$_{3}$.\n\n35 40 45 50 [0038] In another example, a thin film of aluminum- doped zincoxide(ZnO) may beformed utilizing a system similar tothe one shown in FIG. 2. Aluminum-dopedZnO isan opticallytransmissive conductive oxide filmthat may be useful as a substitute for more expensive indium-tin- oxide(ITO)electrodescommonlyused inelectronics and solar cells. In thisexample,diethylzinc(DEZn) or dimeth- ylzinc (DMZn) are used as Precursor 1 and Precursor 4, andeachof the first andfourthprecursor zones 114, 194 includes between 50 and 100 turning guides (i.e., the substrate transits between 50 and 100 times in each of the first and fourth precursor zones). An oxidant, such aswater, or morepreferablyozone, is used as Precursor 2, and TMA is used as Precursor 3. The third precursor zone 190 may include onlyaverysmall number of turning guides (and transits) - for example two - to deposit only a dopingamount of Aluminum oxidewithinthe bulkZnO. The substrate may then be transported through the sys- tem multiple times, in multiple passes, to achieve the desired mechanical, electrical, and optical properties.\n\n[0039] In an alternative embodiment (not illustrated), third precursor zone 190may be positionedbetweenfirst and second precursor zones 114, 116 so that isolation zone 120 straddles third precursor zone 190 and sub- strate 112 traverses across third precursor zone 190 as\n\n[0042] FIG. 4 illustrates a system 310 according to a fourth embodiment, wherein the last two digits of 300- series reference numerals designating precursor zones 314, 316, isolation zone 320, and components of sub-\n\nit is transported between first and second precursor zones 114, 116. Other variations on the configuration of system 110 are also possible, the variety of configura- tionspreferablyhaving theirvariousprecursor zonesiso- lated from each other by one or more isolation zones, to prevent precursor gases from reacting in any of the zones, except at the surface of substrate 112.\n\n[0040] A system 200 shown in FIG. 3 isnot anembod- iment according to the claimed inv ention. The system 200may be configured without rollers, yet achieve ALD- type deposition on a long thin substrate 212, such as a web, bypassing thesubstrate 212alongalinear transport path between alternating zones 202, 204, 206, etc., of precursor 1, inert gas, precursor 2, inert gas, precursor 1, inert gas, etc.InFIG. 3,exhaust or pumpinglines from precursor zones 202, 206, etc. are omitted for simplicity. Whilesystem200 wouldlikelybe much longerthanthose of FIGS. 1 and 2 for a given layer count, the system 200 of FIG. 3 could be made very thin, for example if config- ured as a straight-line system such as ones used for ar- chitectural glass coating systems. Accordingly, system 200 could be used to coat both flexible substrates and rigid substrates. It could also reduce issues arising, in the systems 10 and 110 of FIGS. 1 and 2, from contact between substrate 12 and the turn guides 64, 66 of sub- strate transport mechanism 60. In oneembodiment, pre- cursor 1 is TMA and precursor 2 is water vapor, and one pass of the substrate 212 through the system completes three ALD cycles to deposit approximately 0,3nm (three angstroms (3 Å)) of aluminium oxide (Al$_{2}$O$_{3}$). One vari- ation on the configuration of FIG. 3 would be to have a chamber with as few zones as four, e.g., precursor 1, inert gas isolation, precursor 2, and inert gas isolation, to provide one full ALD cycle. A closed-loop substrate of flexible material (not shown) could be circulated through such a system, and the number of trips or circulations of the loop substrate through the chamber would deter- mined the resulting coating thickness.\n\n[0041] Some systems and methods of the kind de- scribedhereinmay notnecessarily require highlyspecific geometry or mechanical configuration. For instance, in addition to theconfigurations illustrated inFIGS. 1-3, the substrate could be wound through a path that looks like a \"zig-zag\" or a sine wave, or any path, as long as the substratewinds sequentiallythrough regions that provide at least the following: (1) exposure to one precursor; (2) an isolation zone, wherein the substrate is not exposed to one of the primary precursors; (3) exposure at least a second precursor; and (4) a second isolation zone as in step (2), which may be a common zone as that used for step (2). The substrate doesnot necessarily have topass over rollers - essentially any mechanical arrangement that allows the traversal or threading of the substrate through the sequential zones would work.\n\n7" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7820942460234908, + "doc_id": "2db0fa751fa229a5d55a53ff93fa7a8d6d07a2cca5257c897f14a8218f20c16b", + "edit_distance": 0.16260162601626016, + "f1_score": 0.7797202797202796, + "meteor": 0.8022358746068903, + "precision": 0.8576923076923076, + "pred_md": "7\n\n8\n\nEP 1 499 943 B1\n\n202 may trigger instant access to a higher performance state in a multiple performance state integrated circuit, such as a processor. In an embodiment, the direct transition is to the highest performance state 204 in response to a prioritized event 202 .\n\n[0031] In one embodiment, in response to a trigger to transition to a higher state of performance initiated by a non-prioritized event, the algorithm to control the performance state of the processor utilizes real-time historical data of CPU utilization over a window of time (History window 208 ), such as the past one hundred microseconds, to determine a transition to, or from, the next higher performance state. In contrast, the algorithm to control the performance state of the processor immediately enables a higher performance state such as the highest state of performance 204, for a defined period of time 206, when a prioritized event 202 such as a user event, is triggered. The duration of the defined period of time 206 may include considerations such as whether that higher performance state would be sustainable or transitory.\n\n[0032] As noted, the algorithm to control the performance state of the processor impedes the transition to the next higher performance state for a time, in response to the occurrence of non- prioritized events such as software-initiated events. In one embodiment, the algorithm to control the performance state of the processor uses a requirement that the average percent utilization of the CPU 201 within the finite time period of the History Window 208 be greater than a predetermined setting. When the average percent utilization of the CPU 201 within the time period of the History Window 208 is greater than a predetermined setting, such as a setting of 85% usage, then the algorithm to control the performance state of the processor incrementally transitions the processor to faster states of performance.\n\n5\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\ntrigger\n\n40\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n[0033] For example, after exceeding the amount set for the average percent utilization of the CPU, the algorithm may transition the processor from a minimum state of performance such as a sleep state of performance 210 to a next higher state, the idle state of performance 212 . A first brief time period 214 passes and the algorithm checks the CPU utilization 201 within the time period of the History Window 206 . The history window 208 epresenting a recordation of the most recent r finite span of time along the timeline, such as the last one hundred microseconds, reflects a higher average percent CPU utilization 201 . The average percent CPU utilization 201 will have changed because the demand for the greater CPU utilization 201 has been in the examination time frame of the history window 206 for a greater percentage of the time and because the CPU itself has been performing at a higher processing or performance state for a portion of the examination time frame of the history window 206 .\n\n[0034] Note, in one embodiment, the sleep state is the lowest state of performance, the idle state is the next higher state of performance, the active state is the second\n\n5\n\nfrom the highest state of performance, and the higher state of performance is the highest state of performance. Four states of performance are described in this example. However, two or more states of performance may exist in any embodiment.\n\n[0035] When the preset average percent utilization of the CPU still exceeds the preset threshold such as 95%, then the algorithm transitions the processor from the idle state of performance 212 to next higher state, such as the active state of performance 216. A second brief time period 218 passes and the algorithm checks the CPU utilization within the time period of the History Window 206 .\n\n[0036] However, if the preset average percent utilization of the CPU still exceeds the trigger threshold, then the algorithm may transition the processor from the active state of performance 216 to next higher state, such as the highest state of performance 204. Thus, in this example, a third time period 220 equal to all of the transition time periods elapses before the processor transitions into the highest performance state 204 . The algorithm may use this incremental increase in processing power over time to balance a demand for increased performance and an attempt to reduce the power drain on the power supply.\n\n[0037] Note, even if the demand for CPU utilization increases to one hundred percent instantly, the trigger threshold such as 95% average percent CPU utilization may not be exceeded until the average over the entire span of the finite time period in the History Window 206 equals or exceeds 95%. Thus, a time weighted delay occurs before the algorithm triggers a transition of the processor to a higher state.\n\n[0038] In contrast, when a prioritized event 202 such as a user event, is triggered, then the algorithm immediately transitions the processor to a higher state of performance such as active state of performance 216 or highest state of performance 204 . The detection of the prioritized event 202 forces the algorithm to immediate transition to a higher performance state bypassing the level of performance immediately higher than the current level of performance. In an embodiment, how many levels of performance the algorithm bypasses over is dependant on conditions such as thermal considerations and available battery power. In an embodiment, if the processor only has two levels of performance, than the algorithm transitions the processor to the highest level of performance. Note, for this embodiment, the computational overhead of the % CPU utilization determination may be averted.\n\n[0039] When the processor transitions to the higher state of performance in response to the priority event, the actual average percent CPU utilization may decrease because the processing load may not have increased but the performance capacity of the processor increased. For example, the processor may be operating at 50% CPU utilization 201 prior to the occurrence of a prioritized event 202 . The algorithm may transition the processor", + "recall": 0.7147435897435898, + "true_md": "7 \n\nEP 1 499 943 B1\n\n8 \n\n202 may trigger instant access to a higher performance state in a multiple performance state integrated circuit, such as a processor. In an embodiment, the direct tran- sition isto thehighest performance state 204 inresponse to a prioritized event 202 .\n\n[0031] In one embodiment, in response to a trigger to transition to a higher state of performance initiated by a non-prioritized event, the algorithm to control the per- formance state of the processor utilizes real-time histor- ical data ofCPUutilization overa windowoftime (History window 208 ), such as the past one hundred microsec- onds, todetermineatransitionto, or from, the next higher performance state. In contrast, the algorithm to control the performance state of the processor immediately en- ables a higher performance state such as the highest state of performance 204, for a defined period of time 206, when a prioritized event 202 such as a user event, is triggered. The duration of the defined period of time 206 may include considerations such as whether that higher performance state would be sustainable or tran- sitory.\n\n[0032] As noted, the algorithm to control the perform- ance state of the processor impedes the transition to the next higher performance state for a time, in response to the occurrence of non-prioritized events such as soft- ware-initiated events. In one embodiment, the algorithm to control the performance state of the processor uses a requirement that the average percent utilization of the CPU 201 within the finite time period of the History Win- dow 208 be greater than a predetermined setting. When the average percent utilization of the CPU 201 within the time period of the History Window 208 is greater than a predetermined setting, such as a setting of 85% usage, then the algorithm to controlthe performance state ofthe processor incrementallytransitions the processor tofast- er states of performance.\n\n[0033] For example, after exceeding the tr igger amount setfor the average percent utilizationofthe CPU, the algorithm may transition the processor from a mini- mum state of performance such as a sleep state of per- formance 210 to a next higher state, the idle state of performance 212 . A first brief time period 214 passes and the algorithm checks the CPU utilization 201 within the time period of the History Window 206 . The history window 208 representing a recordationof themostrecent finite spanof time alongthe timeline, suchasthe lastone hundred microseconds, reflects a higher average per- cent CPU utilization 201 . The average percent CPU uti- lization 201 will have changed because the demand for the greater CPU utilization 201 has been in the exami- nation time frame of the history window 206 for a greater percentage of the time and because the CPU itself has been performing at a higher processing or performance state for a portion of the examination time frame of the history window 206 .\n\n[0034] Note, inoneembodiment, thesleepstate isthe lowest state of performance, the idle state is the next higherstateofperformance,the active state isthe second\n\nfrom the highest state of performance, and the higher state ofperformance isthe highest stateof performance. Four states of performance are described in this exam- ple. However, two or more states of performance may exist in any embodiment.\n\n[0035] When the preset average percent utilization of the CPU still exceeds the preset threshold such as 95%, then thealgorithm transitions the processor from the idle state of performance 212 to next higher state, such as the active state of performance 216. A second brief time period 218 passes and the algorithm checks the CPU utilization within the time period of the History Window 206 .\n\n[0036] However, if the preset average percent utiliza- tion of the CPU still exceeds the trigger threshold, then the algorithmmaytransitionthe processor fromtheactive state of performance 216 to next higher state, such as the highest state of performance 204. Thus, in this ex- ample,a third timeperiod 220 equalto allof thetransition time periods elapses beforethe processor transitionsinto the highest performance state 204 . The algorithm may use this incremental increase in processing power over time to balancea demandfor increased performanceand an attempt to reduce the power drain on the power sup- ply.\n\n[0037] Note, even if the demand for CPU utilization increases to one hundred percent instantly, the trigger threshold such as 95% average percent CPU utilization may not be exceeded until the average over the entire span of the finite time period in the History Window 206 equals or exceeds 95%. Thus, a time weighted delay occurs before the algorithm triggers a transition of the processor to a higher state.\n\n[0038] In contrast, when a prioritized event 202 such as a user event, is triggered, then the algorithm immedi- ately transitions the processor to a higher state of per- formance such as active state of performance 216 or highest state of performance 204 . The detection of the prioritized event 202 forces the algorithm to immediate transition to a higher performance state bypassing the levelof performance immediatelyhigher thanthecurrent level of performance. In an embodiment, how many lev- els of performance the algorithm bypasses over is de- pendant on conditions such as thermal considerations and available battery power. In an embodiment, if the processor only has two levels of performance, than the algorithm transitions the processor to the highest level of performance. Note, for this embodiment, the compu- tational overhead of the % CPU utilization determination may be averted.\n\n[0039] When the processor transitions to the higher state of performance in response to the priority event, theactual average percent CPUutilization may decrease because the processing load may not have increased butthe performance capacityof the processor increased. For example, the processor may be operating at 50% CPUutilization 201 prior to the occurrence ofaprioritized event 202 . The algorithm may transition the processor\n\n5" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.48235607976922595, + "doc_id": "c1c46c35fff1cebcb608879b3f2d05cdd842a5c9e6694f1f96f9409776bb27ca", + "edit_distance": 0.3333333333333333, + "f1_score": 0.8, + "meteor": 0.6768837803320561, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "EP 1 499 943 B1\n\n15", + "recall": 0.6666666666666666, + "true_md": "EP 1 499 943 B1\n\nFIGURE 2\n\nTime\n\n15" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5805427287791901, + "doc_id": "49ac40da30e9ed9d30535782274e891da766091982c8b8260ed48b211776d189", + "edit_distance": 0.8188751191611058, + "f1_score": 0.7771428571428571, + "meteor": 0.5245469308691968, + "precision": 0.8553459119496856, + "pred_md": "3\n\n4\n\nEP 3 800 018 A1\n\nziehungsweise es kann ein Messerhalter bereitgestellt werden, dessen Sensorvorrichtung im Falle eines Versagens einfach ausgetauscht werden kann.\n\n[0012] Bevorzugt umfasst die Sensorvorrichtung nicht nur genau einen, sondern mehrere Sensoren zur Erfassung unterschiedlicher Größen.\n\n5\n\n10\n\n[0013] Beispielsweise kann ein Sensor als Beschleunigungssensor ausgebildet sein, mit dem auf die Geschwindigkeit (insbesondere Drehzahl) des entsprechenden Messers geschlossen werden kann. Hieraus lässt sich wiederum auf die Laufmeter des zugehörigen Messers und somit auf den Verschleiß des Messers schließen.\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n[0014] Ein (weiterer) Sensor kann als Lichtsensor ausgebildet sein, mit dem detektiert werden kann, ob ein Messer von dem Messerträger entfernt wurde. Hierzu ist der Lichtsensor insbesondere vom Inneren des Grundkörpers auf eine nach außen gerichtete Öffnung im Grundkörper gerichtet, wobei die Öffnung im Betrieb (also im montierten Zustand) des Messerhalters von einem weiteren Bauteil verschlossen ist. Im montierten Zustand fällt somit kein Licht auf den Lichtsensor, während bei Demontage des Messers Licht von dem Lichtsensor detektiert würde, so dass daraus geschlossen werden kann, dass das Messer ausgetauscht wurde. Der Lichtsensor muss nicht zwangsweise zur Detektion von sichtbarem Licht eingerichtet sein, sondern könnte auch beispielsweise Infrarotstrahlung oder UV-Strahlung detektieren.\n\n[0015] Mindestens ein (weiterer) Sensor kann als Umweltsensor zur Erfassung der Luftfeuchte, des Luftdrucks und/oder der Temperatur ausgebildet sein, mit dem auf das Messer wirkende Umwelteinflüsse erkannt werden können.\n\n[0016] Ein (weiterer) Sensor kann als Ortssensor ausgebildet sein, mit dem auf die Lage der Sensorvorrichtung im Raum geschlossen werden kann. Somit wäre feststellbar, an welchem Messerhalter im Raum die Sensorvorrichtung befestigt ist. Ein solcher Ortssensor kann beispielsweise zur Einrichtung eines Bluetooth (Low Energy) Mesh Netzwerkes eingerichtet sein.\n\n[0017] Die Sensorvorrichtung umfasst bevorzugt einen Beschleunigungssensor. Weitere Sensoren können auch vorgesehen sein. Insbesondere zusätzlich zu dem Beschleunigungssensor ein Lichtsensor vorgesehen.\n\n30\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\nder\n\n50\n\n55\n\n[0018] Der Sender zur drahtlosen Übertragung der von dem mindestens einen Sensor erfassten Größe kann nach einem beliebigen Standard zur kabellosen Datenübertragung eingerichtet sein. Bevorzugt sendet Sender nach dem mit Bluetooth(-Standard).\n\n[0019] Während es prinzipiell möglich ist, dass die gemessene(n) Größen unmittelbar an eine übergeordnete Einheit gesendet werden, kann alternativ oder zusätzlich vorgesehen sein, dass die Sensorvorrichtung einen Speicher aufweist, auf dem die von dem mindestens einen Sensor erfasste(n) Größe(n) (zwischen)gespeichert werden, wobei eine Datenübertragung in regelmäßigen Abständen oder nach einem vorgebbaren Intervall er-\n\n3\n\nnn auch vorgesehen sein, dass die auf dem Speicher hinterlegten Größen auf Abfrage übermittelt werden.\n\n[0020] Es kann zudem vorgesehen sein, dass eine Energieversorgungsquelle (beispielsweise Akku, Kondensator, Batterie etc.) für den Sender und/oder den Sensor an dem Grundkörper befestigt ist.\n\n[0021] Um zu vermeiden, dass die Energieversorgungsquelle ausgetauscht werden muss, kann auch vorgesehen sein, dass in dem Grundkörper eine Vorrichtung zum Aufladen der Energieversorgungsquelle vorgesehen ist, die die Energie aus der Bewegung/Beschleunigung des Grundkörpers in elektrische Energie umwandelt.\n\n[0022] Der mindestens eine Sensor, der Sender und/oder die Energieversorgungsquelle sind auf geeignete Weise kraft-, form- und/oder stoffschlüssig an dem Grundkörper befestigt. In einer bevorzugten Ausführungsform sind die Komponenten in dem Grundkörper vergossen, wobei in jedem Fall sichergestellt ist, dass zumindest eine Antenne des Senders so angeordnet ist, dass eine kabellose Übertragung der von dem Sensor erfassten Größe erfolgen kann.\n\n[0023] Die Erfindung sowie das technische Umfeld werden im Folgenden anhand der Figuren beispielhaft erläutert. Es zeigen schematisch\n\nFigur 1: einen Messerhalter und\n\nFigur 2: eine Ringmutter.\n\n[0024] Der in Figur 1 dargestellte Messerhalter 1 umfasst eine Befestigungsvorrichtung 11 zur Befestigung des Messerhalters 1 an einer Längsschneidemaschine sowie einen gegenüber der Befestigungsvorrichtung 11 absenkbaren Messerkopf 2. In der Befestigungsvorrichtung 11 können Mittel zum Absenken des Messerkopfes 2 vorgesehen sein.\n\n[0025] An dem Messerkopf 2 ist ein drehbar gelagerter Messerträger 3 befestigt, auf dem mittels einer als Sensorvorrichtung 4 ausgebildeten Ringmutter ein Rundmesser 5 befestigt ist. Die als Sensorvorrichtung 4 ausgebildete Ringmutter ist in Figur 2 dargestellt und umfasst einen Grundkörper 6, an den zwei Sensoren 7, zwei Energieversorgungsquellen 9 und ein Sender 8 befestigt sind, die über eine Leitung 10 miteinander verbunden sind. Der eine Sensor 7 ist als Beschleunigungssensor ausgeführt, während der andere Sensor 7 als Lichtsensor ausgeführt ist.\n\n[0026] Da die als Ringmutter ausgebildete Sensorvorrichtung 4 gemeinsam mit dem Rundmesser 5 rotiert, kann über den Beschleunigungssensor 7 auf die Drehzahl und damit bei Kenntnis des Durchmessers des Rundmesser 5 auf die Laufmeter des Rundmessers 5 geschlossen werden, wodurch wiederum auf den Verschleiß des Rundmessers 5 geschlossen werden kann. Der Lichtsensor 7 ist so angeordnet, dass im Betrieb kein Licht auf den Lichtsensor 7 fällt, da eine entsprechende", + "recall": 0.7120418848167539, + "true_md": "3 \n\nEP 3 800 018 A1\n\n4 \n\nziehungsweise es kann ein Messerhalter bereitgestellt werden, dessen Sensorvorrichtung im Falle eines Ver- sagens einfach ausgetauscht werden kann. [0012] Bevorzugt umfasst die Sensorvorrichtung nicht\n\nfolgt. Es kann auch vorgesehen sein, dass die auf dem Speicher hinterlegten Größen auf Abfrage übermittelt werden. [0020] Es kann zudemvorgesehen sein,dass eine En-\n\nsagens einfach ausgetauscht werden kann. [0012] Bevorzugt umfasst die Sensorvorrichtung nicht nur genau einen, sondern mehrere Sensoren zur Erfas- sung unterschiedlicher Größen. [0013] Beispielsweise kann ein Sensor als Beschleu-\n\n5\n\nwerden. [0020] Es kann zudemvorgesehen sein,dass eine En- ergieversorgungsquelle (beispielsweise Akku, Konden- sator,Batterie etc.)für den Senderund/oder den Sensor an dem Grundkörper befestigt ist. [0021] Um zu vermeiden, dass die Energieversor-\n\nsung unterschiedlicher Größen. [0013] Beispielsweise kann ein Sensor als Beschleu- nigungssensor ausgebildet sein, mit dem auf die Ge- schwindigkeit (insbesondere Drehzahl) des entspr e- chenden Messers geschlossen werden kann. Hieraus lässt sich wiederum auf die Laufmeter des zugehörigen Messers und somit auf den Verschleiß des Messer s schließen. [0014] Ein (weiterer)Sensorkann alsLichtsensoraus-\n\n10 e-\n\nan dem Grundkörper befestigt ist. [0021] Um zu vermeiden, dass die Energieversor- gungsquelleausgetauschtwerden muss,kann auch vor- gesehen sein,dass in demGrundkörpereine Vorrichtung zum Aufladen der Energieversorgungsquelle vorgese- hen ist, die die Energie aus der Bewegung/Beschleuni- gung des Grundkörpers in elektrische Energie umwan- delt. [0022] Der mindestens eine Sensor, der Sender\n\nschließen. [0014] Ein (weiterer)Sensorkann alsLichtsensoraus- gebildet sein, mit dem detektiert werden kann, ob ein Messervon demMesserträgerentferntwurde.Hierzu ist der Lichtsensor insbesondere vom Inneren des Grund- körpers auf eine nach außen gerichtete Öffnung im Grundkörper gerichtet, wobei die Öffnung imBetrieb (al- so immontiertenZustand)des Messerhaltersvon einem weiteren Bauteilverschlossen ist.Immontierten Zustand fällt somit kein Licht auf den Lichtsensor, während bei Demontage des Messers Licht von dem Lichtsensor de- tektiert würde, so dass daraus geschlossen wer den kann, dass das Messer ausgetauscht wurde. Der Licht- sensormussnichtzwangsweise zurDetektion von sicht- barem Licht eingerichtet sein, sondern könnte auch bei- spielsweise Infrarotstrahlung oder UV-Strahlung detek- tieren. [0015] Mindestensein (weiterer)Sensor kann als Um-\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25 den\n\ndelt. [0022] Der mindestens eine Sensor, der Sender und/oder die Energieversorgungsquelle sind auf geeig- nete Weise kraft-, form- und/oder stoffschlüssig an dem Grundkörper befestigt. In einer bevorzugten Ausfüh- rungsform sind die Komponenten in dem Grundkörper vergossen, wobei in jedem Fall sichergestellt ist, dass zumindesteine Antenne des Senders so angeordnet ist, dass eine kabellose Übertragung der von dem Sensor erfassten Größe erfolgen kann. [0023] Die Erfindung sowie das technische Umfeld\n\nerfassten Größe erfolgen kann. [0023] Die Erfindung sowie das technische Umfeld werden im Folgenden anhand der Figuren beispielhaft erläutert. Es zeigen schematisch\n\ntieren. [0015] Mindestensein (weiterer)Sensor kann als Um- weltsensorzurErfassung derLuftfeuchte,des Luftdrucks und/oder der Temperatur ausgebildet sein, mit dem auf das Messer wirkende Umwelteinflüsse erkannt werden können. [0016] Ein (weiterer) Sensor kann als Ortssensor aus-\n\n30\n\n35\n\n[0024] Der in Figur 1 dargestellte Messerhalter 1 um- fasst eine Befestigungsvorrichtung 11 zur Befestigung des Messerhalters 1 an einer Längsschneidemaschine sowie einen gegenüber der Befestigungsvorrichtung 11 absenkbaren Messerkopf 2. In der Befestigungsvorrich- tung 11 können MittelzumAbsenken des Messerkopfes 2 vorgesehen sein. [0025] An demMesserkopf2 istein drehbargelagerter\n\nkönnen. [0016] Ein (weiterer) Sensor kann als Ortssensor aus- gebildet sein, mit dem auf die Lage der Sensorvorrich- tung im Raum geschlossen werden kann. Somit wäre feststellbar,an welchemMesserhalterimRaumdie Sen- sorvorrichtung befestigtist.Ein solcher Ortssensor kann beispielsweisezurEinrichtung eines Bluetooth (Low En- ergy) Mesh Netzwerkes eingerichtet sein. [0017] Die Sensorvorrichtung umfasst bevorzugt ei-\n\n40\n\n45\n\n2 vorgesehen sein. [0025] An demMesserkopf2 istein drehbargelagerter Messerträger 3 befestigt, auf dem mittels einer als Sen- sorvorrichtung 4 ausgebildeten Ringmutter ein Rund- messer 5 befestigt ist. Die als Sensorvorrichtung 4 aus- gebildete Ringmutter ist in Figur 2 dargestellt und um- fassteinen Grundkörper6,an den zweiSensoren 7,zwei Energieversorgungsquellen9und ein Sender8 befestigt sind, die über eine Leitung 10 miteinander verbunden sind. Der eine Sensor 7 ist als Beschleunigungssensor ausgeführt, während der andere Sensor 7 als Lichtsen- sor ausgeführt ist. [0026] Da die als Ringmutter ausgebildete Sensorvor-\n\nergy) Mesh Netzwerkes eingerichtet sein. [0017] Die Sensorvorrichtung umfasst bevorzugt ei- nen Beschleunigungssensor. Weitere Sensoren können auch vorgesehen sein. Insbesondere zusätzlich zu dem Beschleunigungssensor ein Lichtsensor vorgesehen. [0018] DerSenderzurdrahtlosenÜbertragung dervon\n\n50 Beschleunigungssensor ein Lichtsensor vorgesehen. [0018] DerSenderzurdrahtlosenÜbertragung dervon dem mindestens einen Sensor erfassten Größe kann nach einem beliebigen Standard zur kabellosen Daten- übertragung eingerichtet sein. Bevorzugt sendet der Sender nach dem mit Bluetooth(-Standard). [0019] Während es prinzipiellmöglich ist, dass die ge-\n\n50 der\n\nsor ausgeführt ist. [0026] Da die als Ringmutter ausgebildete Sensorvor- richtung 4 gemeinsam mit dem Rundmesser 5 rotiert, kann über den Beschleunigungssensor 7 auf die Dreh- zahl und damit bei Kenntnis des Durchmessers des Rundmesser 5 auf die Laufmeter des Rundmessers 5 geschlossen werden, wodurch wiederum auf den Ver- schleiß des Rundmessers 5 geschlossen werden kann. DerLichtsensor7istso angeordnet,dass imBetrieb kein Licht auf den Lichtsensor 7 fällt, da eine entsprechende\n\nSender nach dem mit Bluetooth(-Standard). [0019] Während es prinzipiellmöglich ist, dass die ge- messene(n) Größen unmittelbar an eine übergeordnete Einheitgesendetwerden,kann alternativoderzusätzlich vorgesehen sein, dass die Sensorvorrichtung ei nen Speicher aufweist, auf dem die von dem mindestens ei- nen Sensorerfasste(n)Größe(n)(zwischen)gespeichert werden, wobei eine Datenübertragung in regelmäßigen Abständen oder nach einem vorgebbaren Intervall er-\n\n55 nen\n\n- Figur 1: einen Messerhalter und\n\n- Figur 2: eine Ringmutter.\n\n3" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7538573531512465, + "doc_id": "467cbedeb736033b6f4131e3a40d4db738d81d67fd24580ea920cf54b4284add", + "edit_distance": 0.375, + "f1_score": 0.8082026537997588, + "meteor": 0.7937274233038414, + "precision": 0.8862433862433863, + "pred_md": "9\n\n10\n\nEP 2 000 008 B1\n\nwill therefore require tension control and/or drive control systems of the kind well known in the art of web handling and coil handling systems. Additional turning guides may be provided for determining the transport path of substrate 12 through, and in some embodiments, into, the vessel 30. For example, additional turning guides (not shown) may be required to compensate for changes in the diameter of the input and take-up rolls 74, 86 during operation of system 10.\n\n5\n\n10 15 20 25 [0030] Turning guides 64, 66 may comprise rotating guide supports, such as rollers, pulleys, sprockets, or pinch rollers, as well as nonrotating guide supports, such as guide bars, rails, or channels. Suitable rotating guide supports include both idlers, e.g. idler rollers, and driven rotating supports - the latter being driven by a drive mechanism (not shown) that may include means for synchronizing the rotating guide supports with each other and with payout spool 72 and/or take-up spool 82. Nonrotating guide supports may preferably include a bearing surface made of or coated with a low-friction material, such as PTFE (TEFLON™). In one embodiment, turning guides 64, 66 may comprise fluid bearings (e.g. gas bearings) that support substrate 12 on a dynamic cushion of fluid, such as precursor gas and/or inert gas injected through small perforations in a bearing race of the fluid bearing.\n\n30\n\n35\n\n[0031] Depending on the configuration of substrate transport mechanism 60 and passageways 54, 56, the transport path of substrate 12 may have a serpentine profile, a sawtooth profile, or any other suitable shape for transporting substrate between first and second precursor zones 14, 16. Substrate 12 preferably threads through passageways 54, 56 and traverses isolation zone 20 in a direction normal to the plane of dividers 32, 34, such that opposing pairs of first and second passageways 54, 56 are aligned with a traversal axis normal to dividers 32, 34. However, other arrangements and transport path configurations may also be utilized.\n\n40 45 50 55 [0032] In the embodiment shown, each of the first turning guides 64 is positioned within the first precursor zone 14 and supports substrate 12 as it turns 180° about the turning guide 64 toward the second precursor zone 16. Similarly, each of the second turning guides 66 is positioned within the second precursor zone 16 and supports substrate 12 as it turns 180° about the turning guide 66 toward the first precursor zone 14. In an alternative embodiment (not shown), only some of the turning guides 64, 66 may support substrate 12 as it turns toward the opposite precursor zone. For example, two turning guides may be used for a single 180° turn, each supporting the substrate through 90° of the turn. In other embodiments, substrate 12 may turn through somewhat more or less than 180° between traversals of isolation zone 20. A turn of greater than 180° could be implemented to fit more turning guides, and therefore more deposition cycles, within a system of a given overall length. A transit path of substrate 12 through precursor zones 14, 16 may be curved and/or straight. In one embodiment (not\n\n6\n\nshown), some or all of the first and second turning guides may be located outboard of the respective first and second precursor zones such that the substrate follows a straight transit path completely across the respective precursor zone nearest the turning guide and through passageways in dividers bordering the inboard and outboard sides of the respective precursor zone.\n\n[0033] The system 10 illustrated in FIG. 1 includes ten first turning guides 64 and ten second turning guides 66, providing ten full cycles of ALD growth. In one example, the system of FIG. 1 may be used to deposit a coating of aluminum oxide (AlO 3 2 ) approximately 1,0 nm (ten angstroms (10 Å)) thick using trimethylaluminum (TMA) as Precursor 1 and water as Precursor 2. Additional ALD cycles may be added to system 10 by adding pairs of turning guides. For example, a 100-ycle system may c have 200 turning guides -100 first turning guides 64 and 100 second turning guides 66. By using small- diameter guide rollers or other turning guides, such a system could be as small as one meter long from the input roll 74 to the take-up roll 86, approximately 50 cm high, and only slightly wider than the width of substrate 12. Systems capable of 500, 1000, 5000, or more ALD cycles in a single pass are also envisioned. Similar expansions are possible in the systems of FIGS. 2 and 4, described below.\n\n[0034] To increase film thickness beyond what is deposited in a single pass through system 10 by the number of ALD cycles defined by transport mechanism 60, the substrate 10 may be passed through the system multiple times, either by moving the take-up roll 86 from the second end 84 to the first end 76 after a pass, by reversing the transport direction of the substrate 12 to send it back through the system, or by using a closed-loop substrate that circulates back to the input side 76 for achieving multiple passes through the system without movement or handling of the bulk roll. In between sequential passes, one or more of the precursors within the precursor zones 14, 16 may be changed to provide a multi-layer coating stack of two or more thin film materials.\n\n[0035] FIG. 2 illustrates a system 110 and method according to a second embodiment for depositing layers of different materials on a flexible substrate 112 in a single pass through system 110. In the embodiment of FIG. 2, multiple separate precursor zones are located in sequence along the length of the reaction chamber. In FIG. 2, 100-series reference numerals with the last two digits similar to the reference numerals of FIG. 1 designate similar components. For example, system 110 includes a first precursor zone 114 supplied by a first precursor delivery system 124, a second precursor zone 116 supplied by a second precursor delivery system 126, and an isolation zone 120 supplied by an inert gas delivery system 128. System 110 of FIG. 2 further includes a third precursor zone 190 into which a third precursor gas (Precursor 3) different from the first and second precursor gases (Precursor 1 and Precursor 2) is introduced when the system is in use. Third precursor zone 190 is sepa-", + "recall": 0.7427937915742794, + "true_md": "9 \n\nEP 2 000 008 B1\n\n10 \n\nwill therefore require tension control and/or drive control systemsof thekindwellknownin theart of webhandling andcoilhandling systems.Additionalturning guidesmay be provided for determining the transport path of sub- strate 12 through, and in some embodiments, into, the vessel 30. For example, additional turning guides (not shown) may be required to compensate for changes in the diameter of the input and take-up rolls 74, 86 during operation of system 10.\n\n30 35 [0031] Depending on the configuration of substrate transport mechanism 60 and passageways 54, 56, the transport path of substrate 12 may have a serpentine profile, a sawtooth profile, or any other suitable shape for transporting substrate between first and second pre- cursor zones 14, 16. Substrate 12 preferably threads through passageways 54, 56 and traverses isolatio n zone 20 in a direction normal to the plane of dividers 32, 34,such thatopposingpairsof first and second passage- ways 54, 56 are aligned with a traversal axis normal to dividers32,34.However,otherarrangementsandtrans- port path configurations may also be utilized.\n\n10 15 20 25 [0030] Turning guides 64, 66 may comprise rotating guide supports, such as rollers, pulleys, sprockets, or pinch rollers,aswellasnon- rotating guidesupports, such as guide bars, rails, or channels. Suitable rotating guide supports include both idlers, e.g. idler rollers, and driven rotatingsupports- the latter beingdrivenbya drive mech- anism (not shown) that may include means for synchro- nizing the rotating guide supports with each other and withpayout spool72and/or take-up spool 82. Non- rotat- ingguide supports maypreferablyinclude abearing sur- face made of or coated with a low-friction material, such as PTFE (TEFLON™). In one embodiment, turn ing guides64, 66may comprisefluid bearings(e.g. gasbear- ings) that support substrate 12 on a dynamic cushion of fluid, such as precursor gas and/or inert gas inject ed through small perforations in a bearing race of the fluid bearing.\n\n[0032] Intheembodimentshown,eachofthefirstturn- ingguides64 ispositionedwithinthefirst precursor zone 14 and supports substrate 12 as it turns 180° about the turning guide 64 toward the second precursor zone 16. Similarly, each of the second turning guides 66 is posi- tionedwithinthe second precursorzone16 andsupports substrate 12 as it turns 180° about the turning guide 66 toward the first precursor zone 14. In an alternative em- bodiment (not shown), only some of the turning guides 64, 66 may support substrate 12 as it turns toward the opposite precursor zone. For example, two turn ing guides may be used for asingle 180° turn, each support- ingthe substrate through 90° ofthe turn. In other embod- iments, substrate 12 may turn through somewhat more or less than 180° between traversals of isolation zone 20. A turn of greater than 180° could be implemented to fit more turning guides, and therefore more deposition cycles, within a systemof agiven overall length.A transit path ofsubstrate 12through precursor zones14, 16may be curved and/or straight. In one embodiment (not\n\nshown), someorallof the first and secondturningguides may be located outboard of the respective first and sec- ond precursor zones such that the substrate follows a straight transit path completelyacrosstherespective pre- cursor zone nearest the turning guide and through pas- sagewaysin dividers bordering the inboard and outboard sides of the respective precursor zone.\n\n[0033] The system 10 illustrated in FIG. 1 includes ten first turning guides 64 and ten second turning guides 66, providing ten full cycles of ALD growth. In one example, the system of FIG. 1 may be used to deposit a coating of aluminum oxide (Al$_{2}$O$_{3}$) approximately 1,0 nm (ten angstroms (10 Å)) thick using trimethylaluminum (TMA) asPrecursor1 andwaterasPrecursor 2.AdditionalALD cycles may be added to system 10 by adding pairs of turning guides. For example, a 100- cycle system may have 200 turning guides -100 first turning guides 64 and 100 second turning guides 66. By using small-diameter guide rollers or other turning guides, suchasystem could be as small as one meter long from the input roll 74 to the take-up roll 86, approximately 50 cm high, and only slightly wider than the width of substrate 12. Systems capable of 500, 1000, 5000, or more ALD cycles in a single pass are also envisioned. Similar expansions are possible in the systems of FIGS. 2 and 4, described be- low.\n\n[0034] To increase film thickness beyond what is de- posited ina single passthrough system10 bythe number of ALD cycles defined by transport mechanism 60, the substrate10 maybepassed through the systemmultiple times, either by moving the take-up roll 86 from the sec- ond end 84 to the first end 76 after a pass, by reversing the transport direction of the substrate 12 to send it back through the system, or by using a closed-loop substrate that circulates back to the input side 76 for achieving multiple passes through the system without movement or handlingofthe bulkroll. Inbetween sequential passes, oneor more ofthe precursors withinthe precursor zones 14, 16 may be changed to provide a multi-layer coating stack of two or more thin film materials.\n\n[0035] FIG. 2 illustrates a system 110 and method ac- cording to a second embodiment for depositing layers of different materials on a flexible substrate 112 in a single pass through system 110. In the embodiment of FIG. 2, multiple separate precursor zones are located in se- quence along the lengthof the reaction chamber. In FIG. 2, 100-series reference numerals with the last two digits similar to the reference numerals of FIG. 1 designate similar components. For example, system 110 includes a first precursor zone 114 supplied by a first precursor delivery system 124, a second precursor zone 116 sup- plied by a second precursor delivery system 126, and an isolation zone 120 supplied by an inert gas delivery sys- tem 128. System 110 of FIG. 2 further includes a third precursor zone190 intowhicha thirdprecursor gas(Pre- cursor 3) different from the first and second precursor gases (Precursor 1 and Precursor 2) is introduced when the system is in use. Third precursor zone 190 is sepa-\n\n6" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.658297661897017, + "doc_id": "5d3f6d6740d2205a586a9ba7c15ea1cb13c7028d2ca6b7f81b8f64ad0d991635", + "edit_distance": 0.5647058823529412, + "f1_score": 0.8358208955223883, + "meteor": 0.8326305249908824, + "precision": 0.8115942028985508, + "pred_md": "EP 1 499 943 B1\n\n## REFERENCES CITED IN THE DESCRIPTION\n\nThis list of references cited by the applicant is for the reader's convenience only. It does not form part of the European patent document. Even though great care has been taken in compiling the references, errors or omissions cannot be excluded and the EPO disclaims all liability in this regard.\n\n## Patent documents cited in the description\n\n- · US 5396635 A [0007]\n\n18", + "recall": 0.8615384615384616, + "true_md": "EP 1 499 943 B1\n\n## REFERENCES CITED IN THE DESCRIPTION\n\n## Patent documents cited in the description\n\n- • US 5396635 A [0007]\n\nThis list of references cited bytheapplicant is forthe reader’s convenience only.Itdoes notform part of the European patent document. Even though great care has been taken in compiling the references, errorsor omissions cannot be excluded and the EPOdisclaims all liability in this regard.\n\n18" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7031946692872556, + "doc_id": "2d704531b47d347470ef26fbef43010054918372ea8488ed378dc97537048e2e", + "edit_distance": 0.2734225621414914, + "f1_score": 0.7890173410404625, + "meteor": 0.7282163461548063, + "precision": 0.8557993730407524, + "pred_md": "3\n\n4\n\nEP 2 000 008 B1\n\nand at least some of the second turning guides are adapted to support the substrate during a change in a direction of travel of the substrate toward the first precursor zone. In some embodiments, more than two precursor zones are provided, all precursor zones being isolated from one another. The substrate transport mechanism may include a payout spool and a take- up spool for roll-to-roll processing of the substrate.\n\n5\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\n40\n\n[0008] A method of thin film deposition, according to one embodiment, includes introducing an inert gas into an isolation zone that is interposed between first and second precursor zones, introducing first and second precursor gases into the respective first and second precursor zones, and then guiding a flexible substrate back and forth between the first and second precursor zones and through a series of flow-restricting passageways of the isolation zone, so that the substrate transits through the first and second precursor zones multiple times. The method further includes generating pressure differentials between the isolation zone and the first precursor zone and between the isolation zone and the second precursor zone, the pressure differentials being sufficient to inhibit migration of the first and second precursor gases out of the respective first and second precursor zones and mixing of the first and second precursor gases within one of the zones, thereby essentially preventing reactions within the zones between nonadsorbed amounts of the first and second precursor gases. The pressure differential may be achieved, for example, by differential injection of gases into the various zones or by differential pumping or throttling of exhaust gases from the various zones. In some embodiments, an inert gas is injected into some or all of the passageways. As the substrate transits through the first precursor zone a monolayer of the first precursor gas is adsorbed to the surface of the substrate, and on a subsequent transit of the substrate through the second precursor zone the second precursor gas reacts with the adsorbed first precursor at the surface of the substrate, to thereby deposit a thin film on the substrate. Many layers of material may be deposited by guiding the substrate along a serpentine path that traverses between the first and second precursor zones many times.\n\n[0009] In some embodiments of the method and system, the substrate is transported through three or more precursor zones, all isolated from one another by the isolation zone. One or more of the turning guides, precursors, precursor zones, isolation fluid, or isolation zone may be heated.\n\n[0010] In some embodiments, the isolation and precursor zones may be operated at approximately atmospheric pressures, while in others the pressure may range from relatively low vacuum pressures (e.g. 0,13 Pa (1 millitorr)) to positive pressures of 667 to 2000 hPa (500 to 1500 Torr (approx. 1-2 atmospheres)).\n\n[0011] In some embodiments of the method and system, the flexible substrate may be advanced continuously along a serpentine path in a first direction to complete a first pass, and subsequently rewound along the serpen-\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n3\n\ntine path in a second direction opposite the first direction to complete a second pass.\n\n[0012] Embodiments of the method may also include the steps of switching precursors during or between passes, introducing dopants into one or more precursor zones, and/or introducing a radical into one or more of the precursor zones. A length or duration of some of the transits through the precursor zones may be adjusted, in some embodiments, by movably mounted turning guides or zone dividers.\n\n[0013] Systems and methods for trapping exhaust precursor gases for disposal, recycling, or reclaim are also disclosed.\n\n## Brief Description of the Drawings\n\n[0014] FIG. 1 is a schematic cross-sectional view illustrating a system and method for ALD on a flexible substrate, in accordance with a first embodiment;\n\n[0015] FIG. 2 is a schematic cross-sectional view illustrating a system and method utilizing ALD for coating layers of different materials onto a flexible substrate, in accordance with a second embodiment;\n\n[0016] FIG. 3 is a schematic cross-sectional view illustrating a system and method for ALD in which a substrate is moved through a linear multi- tage ALD reactor, in s accordance with a third embodiment; and\n\n[0017] FIG. 4 is a schematic cross-sectional view illustrating a system and method for ALD on a flexible substrate according to a fourth embodiment, including a precursor recovery and recycling system.\n\n## Detailed Description of Preferred Embodiments\n\n[0018] In accordance with embodiments described herein, a flexible substrate, such as a plastic or metallic web or filament, for example, is threaded between adjacent zones each having a different precursor chemical or isolation fluid present therein. As the substrate is advanced, each segment of the substrate is preferably resident in the precursor zones long enough to accomplish the requisite adsorption and reaction of precursor chemicals on the substrate surface. An isolation zone interposed between the precursor zones prevents mixing of the different precursor gases. The substrate is moved through the zones to achieve a thin film coating consistent with the coatings deposited by conventional ALD processes. In addition to enabling the deposition of a highly conformal thin film coating on web materials and on other flexible elongate substrates, systems and methods according to the embodiments described herein may avoid the need to deliver into a common reaction chamber a sequence of precursor and purge gas pulses in alternating succession, as is done in a conventional traveling wave-type ALD reactor.\n\n[0019] Among other possible benefits, certain systems and methods disclosed herein may facilitate the deposition of barrier layers and transparent conductors on flex-", + "recall": 0.7319034852546917, + "true_md": "3 \n\nEP 2 000 008 B1\n\n4 \n\nandatleast someofthe secondturning guidesareadapt- ed to support thesubstrate during a change ina direction of travel of the substrate toward the first precursor zone. In some embodiments, more than two precursor zones are provided, allprecursor zonesbeing isolated fromone another. The substrate transport mechanism may in- clude a payout spool and a take-up spool for roll-to-roll processing of the substrate.\n\n10 15 20 25 30 35 40 [0008] A method of thin film deposition, according to one embodiment, includes introducing an inert gas into an isolation zonethat isinterposedbetween first andsec- ond precursor zones, introducing first and second pre- cursor gases into the respective first and second precur- sor zones,andthenguiding a flexiblesubstrate backand forth between the first and second precursor zones and through a series of flow-restricting passageways of the isolation zone, so that the substrate transits through the first and second precursor zones multiple times. The methodfurtherincludesgenerating pressuredifferentials between the isolation zone and the first precursor zone andbetweentheisolation zone and the second precursor zone, the pressure differentials being sufficient to inhibit migration of the first and second precursor gases out of therespectivefirstand second precursorzones andmix- ing of the first and second precursor gases within one of thezones, thereby essentiallypreventingreactionswith- in the zones between nonadsorbed amounts of the first and second precursor gases. The pressure differential may be achieved, for example, by differential injection of gases into the various zones or by differential pumping or throttling of exhaust gases from the various zones. In some embodiments, aninert gas isinjectedintosome or allof the passageways.As the substrate transitsthrough thefirst precursor zoneamonolayer of the first precursor gas is adsorbed to the surface of the substrate, and on a subsequent transit ofthe substrate through thesecond precursor zone thesecond precursor gas reacts with the adsorbed first precursor at the surface of the substrate, to thereby deposit a thin film on the substrate. Many lay- ersof materialmaybedepositedbyguidingthesubstrate along a serpentine path that traverses between the first and second precursor zones many times.\n\n45 [0009] In some embodiments of the method and sys- tem, the substrate is transported through three or more precursor zones, all isolated from one another by the isolation zone. One or more of the turning guides, pre- cursors, precursor zones, isolationfluid,or isolation zone may be heated.\n\n[0010] In some embodiments, the isolation and pre- cursor zones may be operated at approximately atmos- phericpressures,whilein others the pressuremay range from relatively low vacuum pressures (e.g. 0,13 Pa (1 millitorr)) to positive pressures of 667 to 2000 hPa (500 to 1500 Torr (approx. 1-2 atmospheres)).\n\n[0011] In some embodiments of the method and sys- tem,the flexiblesubstrate maybe advancedcontinuously along a serpentine path in a first direction to complete a first pass, and subsequently rewound along the serpen-\n\n[0019] Amongother possiblebenefits, certain systems and methods disclosed herein may facilitate the deposi- tion of barrier layers and transparent conductors on flex-\n\ntine path in a second direction opposite the first direction to complete a second pass.\n\n[0012] Embodiments of the method may also include the steps of switching precursors during or between passes, introducing dopants into one or more precursor zones, and/or introducing a radical into one or more of the precursor zones. A length or duration of some of the transits through the precursor zonesmay be adjusted, in someembodiments,bymovably mountedturningguides or zone dividers.\n\n[0013] Systemsand methodsfor trappingexhaust pre- cursor gases for disposal, recycling, or reclaim are also disclosed.\n\n[0014] FIG. 1isaschematiccross-sectional viewillus- trating a system and method for ALD on a flexible sub- strate, in accordance with a first embodiment;\n\n[0015] FIG. 2isaschematiccross-sectional viewillus- trating a system and method utilizing ALD for coating layers of different materials onto a flexible substrate, in accordance with a second embodiment;\n\n[0016] FIG. 3isaschematiccross-sectional viewillus- tratinga systemandmethod for ALDin which asubstrate is moved through a linear multi- stage ALD reactor, in accordance with a third embodiment; and\n\n[0017] FIG. 4isaschematiccross-sectional viewillus- trating a system and method for ALD on a flexible sub- strate according to a fourth embodiment, including a pre- cursor recovery and recycling system.\n\n[0018] In accordance with embodiments described herein, a flexible substrate, such as a plastic or metallic web or filament, for example, is threaded between adja- cent zones each having a different precursor chemical or isolation fluid present therein. As the substrate is ad- vanced, each segment of the substrate ispreferablyres- ident in the precursor zones long enough to accomplish the requisite adsorption and reaction of precursor chem- icals on the substrate surface. An isolation zone inter- posed between the precursor zones prevents mixing of the different precursor gases. The substrate is moved throughthe zonestoachieve a thinfilmcoatingconsistent with the coatings deposited by conventional ALD proc- esses. In addition to enabling the deposition of a highly conformalthinfilmcoating onweb materialsandonother flexible elongate substrates, systems and methods ac- cording to the embodiments described herein may avoid the need to deliver into a common reaction chamber a sequence of precursor and purge gas pulses in alternat- ing succession, as is done in a conventional traveling wave-type ALD reactor.\n\n## Detailed Description of Preferred Embodiments\n\n## Brief Description of the Drawings\n\n3" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7514625504742263, + "doc_id": "88e6333ba86fc664529a27c5b801b9447b1ec9aacd6a83244f42d995eeb038fc", + "edit_distance": 0.6596218020022246, + "f1_score": 0.8322981366459627, + "meteor": 0.6064411577790035, + "precision": 0.9220183486238532, + "pred_md": "17\n\n18\n\nEP 2 000 008 B1\n\nsubstrate transport mechanism (0, 360), in6 cluding:\n\n10\n\n- 5 15 a plurality of first turning guides (4, 164, 6 364) spaced apart along the first precursor zone, at least some of the first turning guides adapted to support the substrate during a change in a direction of travel of the substrate toward the second precursor zone, and a plurality of second turning guides ( 66, 166, 366) spaced apart along the second precursor zone, at least some of the second turning guides adapted to support the substrate during a change in a direction of travel of the substrate toward the first precursor zone.\n- 2. The system of claim 1, further comprising a first divider ( 34, 134, 334) separating the isolation zone from the first precursor zone, and a second divider (36, 136, 336) separating the isolation zone from the second precursor zone, and in which the flow-re stricting passageways includes a series of first passageways (54, 154, 354) through the first divider and a series of second passageways (, 156, 356 ) 56 through the second divider.\n- 3. The system of claim 1 or 2, in which at least some of the first turning guides are adjustably mounted within the first precursor zone for movement toward and away from the isolation zone, to thereby adjust a dwell time of the substrate in the first precursor zone.\n- 4. The system of any preceding claim, in which the substrate transport mechanism further comprises:\n- a payout spool (72, 172, 372) for paying out the substrate from a coil (74, 174, 374) for receipt at a first end (76, 376) of the isolation zone; and a take- up spool (74, 174, 374) for coiling the substrate received from a second end (84, 384) of the isolation zone opposite the first end.\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\n- 5. The system of any preceding claims, further comprising:\n\n50\n\n55\n\na third precursor zone (190) separated from the first and second precursor zones and into which a third precursor gas different from the first and second precursor gases is introduced when the system is in use; a third divider separating the third precursor zone from the isolation zone; and a series of third passageways (192) extending through the third divider and into the third precursor zone from the isolation zone, the third\n\n10\n\npassageways spaced apart along the third precursor zone and arranged for the substrate to be threaded therethrough back and forth between the second and third precursor zones and through the isolation zone.\n\n- 6. The system of any preceding claim, further comprising:\n- a first precursor delivery system (24, 124, 324) coupled to the first precursor zone for supplying the first precursor gas to the first precursor zone; a second precursor delivery system (6, 126, 2 326) coupled to the second precursor zone for supplying the second precursor gas to the second precursor zone; and an inert gas delivery system ( 28, 128, 328) coupled to the isolation zone for injecting an inert gas into the isolation zone to achieve a pressure in the isolation zone that is greater than pressures within the precursor zones.\n- 7. The system of any preceding claim, in which at least some of the passageways include a tunnel.\n- 8. The system of any preceding claim, further comprising:\n\nan exhaust line (440) connected to one or more of the precursor zones; and a precursor trap (59, 410, 420) located in the exhaust line.\n\n- 9. The system of claim 8, further comprising a recycling line (450) connected between the precursor trap and one or more of the precursor zones.\n- 10. The system of any preceding claim, further comprising a radicals generator for supplying a precursor radical to one or more of the precursor zones.\n- 11. The system of any preceding claim, in which at least some of the turning guides include a heated roller.\n- 12. A method for depositing a thin film on a flexible substrate (12, 112, 312), comprising:\n\nintroducing a first precursor gas into a first precursor zone (14, 114, 314); introducing a second precursor gas into a second precursor zone (16, 116, 316) spaced apart from the first precursor zone, the second precursor gas being different from the first precursor gas; guiding a flexible substrate (12, 112, 312) back and forth between the first and second precursor zones and through a series of flow-restricting passageways (54, 56, 154, 156, 354, 356) of an", + "recall": 0.7584905660377359, + "true_md": "17 \n\nEP 2 000 008 B1\n\n18 \n\nsubstrate transport mechanism ( 60, 360), in- cluding:\n\n10 a plurality of first turning guides ( 64, 164, 364) spaced apart along the first precursor zone, at least some of the first turn ing guides adapted to support the substrat e during a change in a direction of travel of the substrate toward the second precursor zone, and\n\n15 apluralityofsecond turningguides( 66, 166, 366) spaced apart along the secondprecur- sor zone, at least some of the second turn- ingguidesadapted tosupport the substrate during a change in a direction of travel of the substrate toward the first prec urso r zone.\n\nintroducing a first precursor gas into a first pre- cursor zone (14, 114, 314);\n\nintroducing a second precursor gas into a sec- ond precursor zone (16, 116, 316) spaced apart from the first precursor zone, the second pre- cursor gasbeing different fromthe first precursor gas;\n\nguiding a flexible substrate (12, 112, 312) back and forthbetween the first and secondprecursor zones and through a series of flow-restricting passageways (54, 56, 154, 156, 354, 356)of an\n\na third precursor zone (190) separated from the firstand secondprecursor zonesandintowhich a third precursor gas different from the first and second precursor gases is introduced when the system is in use;\n\na series of third passageways (192) extending through the third divider and into the third pre- cursor zone from the isolation zone, the third\n\na third divider separating the third precurso r zone from the isolation zone; and\n\na payout spool (72, 172, 372) for paying out the substrate from a coil (74, 174, 374) for receipt at a first end (76, 376) of the isolation zone; and a take-up spool (74, 174, 374) for coiling the substrate received from a second end (84, 384) of the isolation zone opposite the first end.\n\nan exhaust line (440) connected to one or more of the precursor zones; and\n\na precursor trap (59, 410, 420) located in the exhaust line.\n\na first precursor delivery system (24, 124, 324) coupled to the first precursor zone for supplying the first precursor gas tothe first precursor zone; a second precursor delivery system ( 26, 126, 326) coupled to the second precursor zone for supplying the second precursor gas to the sec- ond precursor zone; and\n\nan inert gasdeliverysystem ( 28, 128, 328) cou- pled to the isolation zone for injecting an inert gas intotheisolation zone toachievea pressure in the isolation zone that is greater than pres- sures within the precursor zones.\n\npassageways spaced apart along the third pre- cursor zone and arranged for the substrate to be threaded therethrough back and forth be- tween the secondand thirdprecursor zonesand through the isolation zone.\n\n- 6. The system of anyprecedingclaim, further compris- ing:\n\n- 2. The system of claim 1, further comprising a first di- vider (34, 134, 334) separating the isolation zone from the first precursor zone, and a second divider (36, 136, 336) separating theisolation zonefromthe second precursor zone, and in which the flow- re- stricting passageways includes a series of first pas- sageways(54, 154, 354) through the first divider and a series of second passageways ( 56, 156, 356) through the second divider.\n\n- 3. The system of claim 1 or 2, in which at least some of the first turning guides are adjustably mounted within the first precursor zone for movement toward and away from the isolation zone, to thereby adjust a dwell time of the substrate in the first precursor zone.\n\n- 4. The systemofanypreceding claim,inwhich the sub- strate transport mechanism further comprises:\n\n- 5. The system of any preceding claims, further com- prising:\n\n- 7. The systemof any preceding claim,in whichat least some of the passageways include a tunnel.\n\n- 8. The system of any precedingclaim, further compris- ing:\n\n- 9. The system of claim 8, furthercomprisingarecycling line (450) connected between theprecursor trap and one or more of the precursor zones.\n\n- 10. The system of anyprecedingclaim, further compris- ing a radicals generator for supplying a precursor radical to one or more of the precursor zones.\n\n- 11. The systemof any preceding claim,in whichat least some of the turning guides include a heated roller.\n\n- 12. A method for depositing a thin film on a flexible sub- strate (12, 112, 312), comprising:\n\n10" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7892256057812824, + "doc_id": "16bb9b7cf972ea5cd0fcaeb83fd519086eb2ec22eec103b5736b01f386008468", + "edit_distance": 0.700952380952381, + "f1_score": 0.827683615819209, + "meteor": 0.7025479399871836, + "precision": 0.8772455089820359, + "pred_md": "1\n\n2\n\n## Description\n\n## FIELD OF THE INVENTION\n\n[0001] This invention generally relates to a resource allocation enhancement to the system power management mechanism. More particularly this invention relates to shifting to high state of performance in response to a prioritized event.\n\nEP 1 499 943 B1\n\nidle state of performance causing even the most processing intensive tasks to generally incur a delay to the maximum performance state for a portion of a time window. Essentially, the finite window of time acts as a weighted average to impede the transition of the processor to the highest state of performance.\n\n[0007] For example, at the beginning of the processing intensive task ninety percent of the finite window of time is filled with the CPU being used at 70% of capacity due to the processor being in the idle state of performance during that time frame and ten percent of the finite window of time is filled with the CPU being used at 100% of capacity due to demand of the processing intensive task on the processor. Thus, the algorithm determines the average percent utilization of the processor during this entire finite window of time to be 73% of capacity rather than its current utilization of 100% of capacity. The algorithm calculates ninety percent of the finite window of time multiplied by 70% utilization plus ten percent of the finite window of time multiplied by 100% utilization to equal 73% utilization. For example, an additional 40% of the window time will need to transpire to initiate a transition to the next higher performance state if the trip point were set to 85%. Perhaps by the next finite window of time the % utilization of the processor will reflect its current 100% demand and the algorithm will increase the state of performance of the processor.\n\n5\n\n10\n\n## BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n50\n\n[0002] Designers attempt to reduce the power consumed by a computer system, especially, in the arena of mobile electronic devices. Mobile electronic devices include battery operated computer systems such as, for example, notebook computers, subnotebook computers, and personal data assistants. By reducing the power consumed by these and other battery operated devices, a user can enjoy extended use and operation of the system between battery charges. Therefore, primarily considering the advantages to be gained by battery operated computer systems, system manufacturers have invested considerable resources into researching and developing technologies to aid in the reduction of power consumed by processors within these mobile electronic devices.\n\n[0003] The power consumed by a processor, such as a central processing unit (CPU), is known to be approximately proportional to the square of the voltage supplied to the processor times the frequency at which the processor operates P ~ (V 2 x f). Given this relationship, it can be seen that reducing the frequency or the voltage will result in a reduction of the power consumed by the processor. However, reducing the frequency at which the processor operates decreases the rate at which the processor may process data. Thus, a reduction in the frequency at which the processor operates decreases the power consumed by the processor as well as the state of performance of the processor.\n\n[0004] Typically, CPU power management systems use an algorithm to control the performance state of the processor. The algorithm balances reducing power consumption by the processor with the processing demands on the processor. Generally, the algorithm creates some time lag or impediment prior to transiting the processor to the maximum performance state of the processor.\n\n[0005] For example, the algorithm may be grammed to spread the processing workload of the processor across three time frames rather than increase the processing rate to complete the majority of the processing load in one time frame and under utilize the capacity of the processor in the next two time frames.\n\n[0006] Typically, modern mobile CPU power management systems transition to higher performance states based upon a brief history of the CPU utilization. The history of CPU utilization is usually defined by a small finite window of time ending with the present. Typical mobile systems spend a significant portion of time in the\n\n30 35 40 45 pro- mulated to form an activity value which indicates the acUS 5,396,635 discloses a power- conservation system in a computer system which includes a processing unit operating under control of an operating system. The computer system generates distinct call functions to the operating system where each call function is either in an active class or an idle class. The power conservation system has a plurality of states of operation including an ON state, a DOZE state, a SLEEP state and an OFF state. An activity monitor monitors the activity of the computer system and generates control signals for selecting one of the states of operation for the computer system. The activity monitor includes a storage for storing a call value for each distinct call function and activity threshold values for the various states of operation. The call values are weighted for the call functions whereby different call functions have a greater or lesser impact on the value of an activity level. The call value for each call function is retrieved when the call function is made to the operating system. The retrieved call values are sequentially accutivity level of the computer system. A comparator compares the activity value with the threshold values and in response to the comparison generates a control signal to a power controller which selects the states operation for the computer system, thereby regulating the power consumption of the computer system based on the activity of the computer system.\n\n55\n\n2\n\n## BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS\n\n[0008] The drawings refer to the invention in which:", + "recall": 0.7834224598930482, + "true_md": "1\n\nEP 1 499 943 B1\n\n2 \n\n## Description\n\n## FIELD OF THE INVENTION\n\n## BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION\n\n## BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS\n\n[0001] This invention generally relates to a resource allocation enhancement to the system power manage- ment mechanism. Moreparticularlythisinvention relates to shifting to high state of performance in response to a prioritized event.\n\n[0002] Designers attempt to reduce the power con- sumed by a computer system, especially, in the arena of mobile electronic devices. Mobile electronic devices in- clude battery operated computer systems such as, for example,notebook computers,subnotebookcomputers, andpersonal data assistants. By reducingthe power con- sumed by these and other battery operated devices, a user can enjoyextendeduse and operation ofthe system between battery charges. Therefore, primarily consider- ingtheadvantages to begained bybatteryoperated com- puter systems, system manufacturers have investe d considerable resourcesinto researching anddeveloping technologies to aid in the reduction of power consumed by processors within these mobile electronic devices.\n\n30 35 [0003] The power consumed by a processor, such as a central processing unit (CPU), is known to be approx- imately proportionaltothe squareofthe voltage supplied to the processor times the frequency at which the proc- essor operates P ~ (V$^{2}$ x f). Given this relationship, it can be seen that reducing the frequency or the voltage will result in a reduction of the power consumed by the proc- essor. However, reducing the frequency at which the processor operatesdecreasesthe rate atwhich the proc- essor may process data. Thus, a reduction in the fre- quency at which the processor operates decreases the power consumed by the processor as well as the state of performance of the processor.\n\n[0004] Typically, CPU power management systems use an algorithm to control the performance state of the processor. The algorithm balances reducing power con- sumptionbythe processor with theprocessing demands on the processor. Generally, the algorithmcreatessome time lag or impediment prior to transiting the processor to the maximum performance state of the processor.\n\n[0005] For example, the algorithm may be grammed tospreadthe processingworkloadoftheproc- essor across three time frames rather than increase the processing rate to complete the majority of the process- ing load in one time frame and under utilize the capacity of the processor in the next two time frames.\n\n55 [0006] Typically, modern mobile CPU power manage- ment systems transition to higher performance states based upon a brief history of the CPU utilization. The history of CPU utilization is usually defined by a small finite window of time ending with the present. Typical mobile systems spend a significant portion of time in the\n\n[0008] The drawings refer to the invention in which:\n\nidlestate ofperformance causing eventhe mostprocess- ing intensive tasks to generally incur a delay to the max- imum performance state for a portion of a time window. Essentially, the finite window of time acts as a weighted average to impede the transition of the processor to the highest state of performance.\n\n[0007] For example,at the beginningof the processing intensive task ninety percent of the finite window of time is filled with the CPU being used at 70% of capacity due to the processor being in the idle state of performance duringthat timeframe and ten percentof the finitewindow of time is filled with the CPU being used at 100% of ca- pacity due to demand of the processing intensive task on theprocessor.Thus, the algorithmdeterminesthe av- erage percent utilization of the processor during this en- tire finite window of time to be 73% of capacity rather than its current utilization of 100% of capacity. The algo- rithm calculates ninety percent of the finite window of time multiplied by 70% utilization plus ten percent of the finite window of time multiplied by 100% utilization to equal 73% utilization. For example, an additional 40% of the window time will need to transpire to initiate a transi- tion to the next higher performance state if the trip point were set to 85%. Perhaps by the next finite window of time the % utilization of the processor will reflect its cur- rent 100% demand and the algorithm will increase the state of performance of the processor.\n\nUS 5,396,635disclosesa power- conservation system in a computer system which includes a processing unit op- erating under control of an operating system. The com- puter system generates distinct call functions to the op- erating system where each call function is either in an active class or an idle class. The power conservation system has a plurality of states of operation including an ON state, a DOZE state, a SLEEP state and an OFF state. An activity monitor monitorsthe activity ofthe com- puter system and generates control signals for selecting one of the states of operation for the computer system. The activity monitor includes a storage for storing a call value for each distinct call function and activity threshold valuesfor the variousstates ofoperation. The callvalues are weighted for the call functions whereby different call functions have a greater or lesser impact on the value of an activity level. The call value for each call function is retrieved when the call function is made to the operating system. The retrieved call values are sequentially accu- mulated to form an activity value which indicates the ac- tivity level of the computer system. A comparator com- pares the activity value with the threshold values and in response to the comparison generates a control signal to a power controller which selects the states operation for the computer system, thereby regulating the power consumption of the computer system based on the ac- tivity of the computer system.\n\n2" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7671922310360088, + "doc_id": "dfb912fd4805ca76cd13f46bc351a6393f774f965b146d426d8a080a4c85fd9e", + "edit_distance": 0.1771689497716895, + "f1_score": 0.7717569786535304, + "meteor": 0.8146615249763374, + "precision": 0.8576642335766423, + "pred_md": "5\n\n6\n\nEP 1 499 943 B1\n\ntion logic 134 includes circuitry that doubles, triples or otherwise multiplies the clock frequency by an integer or rational value before sending the clock signal onto internal execution units of the processor 112. For one embodiment, processor 112 itself includes circuitry that doubles, triples or otherwise multiplies the clock frequency by an integer or rational value before sending the clock signal onto internal execution units of the processor 112. For example, the operating frequency of the processor 112 may be 250 megahertz at a low state of performance and even integer of eight times the initial frequency, or 2000 megahertz, at a higher state of performance. In one embodiment, the clock couples to and controls the frequency at which the processor 112 operates.\n\n[0022] In one embodiment, processor 112 uses the voltage supplied by voltage regulator logic 130 to power its operation. Voltage regulator logic 130 couples to a power supply 132 such as a battery in a battery operated computer system and generates the supply voltage that is supplied to processor 112 . In one embodiment, the voltage regulator couples to the processor in order to determine the voltage at which the processor operates. For example, the voltage regulator logic may supply a 1.8 volts voltage level and a higher 3.3 volts voltage level.\n\n[0023] In one embodiment, a power management algorithm 136 , in response to a particular predefined condition, such as a preset percent utilization of the processor, signals the frequency regulation logic 134 to lower the operating frequency supplied to the processor 112 . Thus, the predefined condition lowers the frequency at which the processor 112 operates. Once the frequency is reduced, the frequency regulation logic 134 communicates directly with the voltage regulator logic 130 , elling t the voltage regulator logic 130 to lower the voltage supplied to the processor 112 . The voltage regulation logic 130 complies, and the processor 112 continues to operate in this lower power performance state, reducing the power drain on the power supply 130 .\n\n5\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n[0024] In one embodiment, the power management algorithm 136, in response to a particular prioritized event, such as detection of a user event, signals the frequency regulation logic 134 to raise the frequency to the higher operating frequency so that the processor can again operate at full speed. Before raising the frequency, however, the frequency regulation logic 134 communicates directly with the voltage regulation logic 130 , signaling the voltage regulation logic 130 to raise the supply voltage to the higher voltage level. The voltage regulation logic 134 responds to this request and upon completion directly communicates back to the frequency regulation logic 134 that the supply voltage has been raised. Upon receiving this information from the voltage regulation logic 130 , the frequency regulation logic 134 then raises the frequency back to the higher value in order to allow the processor 112 to operate at the higher performance state. In one embodiment, the power management algorithm 136 is split into two discreet algorithms. A first algorithm to decrease the transition of processor 112 from\n\n4\n\na higher state of performance to a lower state of performance and a second algorithm to transition processor 112 from a lower state of performance to a higher state of performance.\n\n[0025] Note, various other configurations and implementations in accordance with alternate embodiments of the present invention may exist.\n\n[0026] For example, in one embodiment, processor 112 may be a single processor capable of operating with variable operating frequencies and voltage levels. In one embodiment, processor 112 may be two or more processors working in conjunction to respond to the processing load. In one embodiment, processor 112 may be a chipset having multiple performance modes.\n\n[0027] For example, the power management algorithm 136 may be software based or hardware based such as arbitration logic may be shared between the processors or a combination of software based and hardware based.\n\n[0028] For example, in one embodiment\" the power management algorithm 136 detects a user event. Upon detecting the user event, the power management algorithm 136 triggers the multiple performance state computer system 100 to transition to a higher performance state. The processor 112 has multiple states of performance including a first state of performance, a second state of performance higher than the first state of performance, and a third state of performance higher than the second state of performance. The algorithm directly transitions the processor 112 from the first state of performance to the third state of performance based upon detecting the user event. Note, the third state of performance may or may not be the maximum state of performance that the processor 112 can achieve.\n\n[0029] For example, in one embodiment, a prioritized event may be a direct request for the highest performance state directly or indirectly by initiating or simulating a benign user event by an application is aware of the power management algorithm 136 .\n\n[0030] Figure 2 illustrates a graph of various performance states of one embodiment of an integrated circuit having multiple performance states. The top graph illustrates the average percent CPU utilization 201 over time 203 for both in response to the occurrence of a prioritized event 207 and in response to the occurrence of nonprioritized events 209 . The bottom graph illustrates performance level of the processor 205 over the same timeline for both in response to the occurrence of a prioritized event 211 and in response to the occurrence of nonprioritized events 213 . The dotted line represents an exemplary average percent CPU utilization by non- prioritized events 209 and the performance level transitions in response to those nonprioritized events 213 . The solid line represents an exemplary average percent CPU utilization by a prioritized event 207 and the performance level transition in response to the prioritized event 211 . The algorithm to control the performance state of the processor may prioritize certain events such as user events, so that the occurrence of the prioritized event", + "recall": 0.7014925373134329, + "true_md": "5 \n\nEP 1 499 943 B1\n\n6 \n\ntion logic 134 includes circuitry that doubles, triples or otherwise multiplies the clock frequency by an integer or rational value before sending the clock signal onto inter- nal execution units of the processor 112. For one em- bodiment, processor 112 itself includes circuitry thatdou- bles, triples or otherwise multiplies the clock frequency by an integer or rational value before sending the clock signal onto internalexecution unitsoftheprocessor 112. For example, the operating frequency of the processor 112 may be 250 megahertz ata lowstateof performance and even integer of eight times the initial frequency, or 2000 megahertz,at a higher state ofperformance.Inone embodiment, the clock couples to and controls the fre- quency at which the processor 112 operates.\n\n[0022] In one embodiment, processor 112 uses th e voltage supplied by voltage regulator logic 130 to power its operation. Voltage regulator logic 130 couples to a power supply 132 such asa battery ina batteryoperated computer system and generates the supply voltage that is supplied to processor 112 . In one embodiment, the voltage regulator couples to the processor in order to determine the voltage at which the processor operates. For example, the voltage regulator logic may supply a 1.8voltsvoltage leveland a higher3.3voltsvoltagelevel.\n\n[0023] In one embodiment, a power management al- gorithm 136 , in response to a particular predefined con- dition, such as a preset percent utilization of the proces- sor, signals the frequency regulation logic 134 to lower the operating frequency supplied to the processor 112 . Thus, the predefined condition lowers the frequency at which the processor 112 operates. Once the frequency is reduced, the frequency regulation logic 134 commu- nicates directlywiththevoltageregulator logic 130 , telling the voltage regulator logic 130 to lower the voltage sup- plied to the processor 112 . The voltage regulation logic 130 complies, and the processor 112 continues to oper- ate in this lower power performance state, reducing the power drain on the power supply 130 .\n\n[0024] In one embodiment,the power management al- gorithm 136, in response to a particular prioritized event, such as detection of a user event, signals the frequency regulation logic 134 to raise the frequency to the higher operating frequency so that the processor can again op- erate at full speed. Before raising the frequency, howev- er, the frequency regulation logic 134 communicates di- rectly with the voltage regulation logic 130 , signaling the voltage regulation logic 130 to raise the supply voltage to the higher voltage level. The voltage regulation logic 134 responds tothisrequest and uponcompletion direct- ly communicates back to the frequency regulation logic 134 that the supply voltage has been raised. Upon re- ceiving this information from the voltage regulation logic 130 , the frequency regulation logic 134 then raises the frequency back to the higher value in order to allow the processor 112 to operate at the higher performanc e state. In one embodiment, the power management algo- rithm 136 is split into two discreet algorithms. A first al- gorithm to decrease the transition of processor 112 from\n\na higher stateofperformancetoalower state of perform- ance and a second algorithm to transition processor 112 from a lower state of performance to a higher state of performance.\n\n[0025] Note, various other configurations and imple- mentations in accordance with alternate embodiments of the present invention may exist.\n\n[0026] For example, in one embodiment, processor 112 may be a singleprocessor capableof operating with variable operating frequenciesand voltagelevels. Inone embodiment, processor 112 may be two or more proc- essors working inconjunction to respondto the process- ing load. In one embodiment, processor 112 may be a chipset having multiple performance modes.\n\n[0027] For example, thepower management algorithm 136 may be software based or hardware based such as arbitration logic may be shared between the processors or a combinationofsoftwarebased andhardware based.\n\n[0028] For example, in one embodiment\" the power management algorithm 136 detects a user event. Upon detecting the user event, the power management algo- rithm 136 triggers the multiple performance state com- puter system 100 to transition to a higher performance state. The processor 112 has multiple states of perform- ance includinga first state ofperformance, asecond state of performance higher thanthe firststate ofperformance, and a third state of performance higher than the second state of performance. The algorithm directly transitions the processor 112 from the first state of performance to the third state of performance based upon detecting the user event. Note, the third state of performance may or may not be the maximum state of performance that the processor 112 can achieve.\n\n[0029] For example, in one embodiment, a prioritized event may bea directrequest for thehighest performance state directly or indirectly by initiating or simulating a be- nign user event by an application is aware of the power management algorithm 136 .\n\n[0030] Figure 2 illustrates a graph of various perform- ance states of one embodiment of an integrated circuit having multiple performance states. The top graph illus- trates the average percent CPU utilization 201 over time 203 for bothin response to theoccurrence of a prioritized event 207 and in response to the occurrence of non- prioritized events 209 . The bottom graph illustrates per- formance levelof the processor 205 over the same time- line for both inresponsetotheoccurrence ofa prioritized event 211 and in response to the occurrence of non- prioritized events 213 . The dotted line represents an ex- emplary average percent CPU utilization by non-priori- tized events 209 and the performance level transitions in responseto thosenon- prioritized events 213 . Thesolid line represents an exemplary average percent CPU uti- lization by a prioritized event 207 and the performance level transition in response to the prioritized event 211 . The algorithm to control the performance state of the processor may prioritize certain events such as user events, so that the occurrence of the prioritized event\n\n4" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6823835574919955, + "doc_id": "83037300082623162c9ed968692bd06a398718abfb03aeadcbe6bbce14e91fa2", + "edit_distance": 0.7246722288438617, + "f1_score": 0.791578947368421, + "meteor": 0.5867242465715864, + "precision": 0.8623853211009175, + "pred_md": "25\n\n26\n\nEP 2 000 008 B1\n\nguides tournants étant adaptés pour soutenir le substrat lorsqu'il change de direction en se déplaçant vers la deuxième zone précurseur, et plusieurs deuxièmes guides tournants (66, 166, 366) espacés dans la deuxième zone précurseur, au moins certains des deuxièmes guides tournants étant adaptés pour soutenir le substrat lorsqu'il change de direction en se déplaçant vers la première zone précurseur.\n\n- 2. Le dispositif de la revendication 1, comprenant également un premier diviseur (34, 134, 334) séparant la zone d'isolation de la première zone précurseur et un deuxième diviseur (36, 136, 336) séparant la zone d'isolation de la deuxième zone précurseur et dans lequel les passages d'étranglement comprennent une série de premiers passages (54, 154, 354) au niveau du premier diviseur et une série de deuxièmes passages (56, 156, 356) au niveau du deuxième diviseur.\n- 3. Le dispositif de la revendication 1 ou 2, dans lequel au moins certains des premiers guides tournants sont montés de manière réglable dans la première zone précurseur pour le mouvement vers la zone d'isolation et dans la direction opposée à la zone d'isolation, afin d'ajuster la durée de séjour du substrat dans la première zone précurseur.\n- 4. Le dispositif de n'importe laquelle des revendications précédentes, dans lequel le mécanisme de transport du substrat comprend également :\n\nune bobine débitrice (72, 172, 372) pour dérouler le substrat d'une bobine (74, 174, 374) pour réception à une première extrémité (76, 376) de la zone d'isolation ; et une bobine réceptrice (74, 174, 374) pour embobiner le substrat reçu d'une deuxième extrémité (84, 384) de la zone d'isolation opposée à la première extrémité.\n\n- 5. Le dispositif de n'importe laquelle des revendications précédentes, comprenant également :\n- une troisième zone précurseur (190) séparée des première et deuxième zones précurseurs et dans laquelle un troisième gaz précurseur différent du premier et du deuxième est introduit lors de l'utilisation du dispositif ; un troisième diviseur séparant la troisième zone précurseur de la zone d'isolation ; et une série de troisièmes passages (192) passant par le troisième diviseur et dans la troisième zone précurseur à partir de la zone d'isolation, les troisièmes passages étant espacés sur la troi-\n\n5\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n14\n\nsième zone précurseur et disposés de façon à permettre au substrat de faire la navette entre les deuxième et troisième zones précurseurs en passant par la zone d'isolation.\n\n- 6. Le dispositif de n'importe laquelle des revendications précédentes, comprenant également : un premier dispositif d'alimentation en précurprécurseur pour alimenter la deuxième zone un dispositif d'alimentation en gaz inerte (28, 128, 328) raccordé à la zone d'isolation pour injecter un gaz inerte dans la zone d'isolation\n\nseur (24, 124, 324) raccordé à la première zone précurseur pour alimenter la première zone précurseur en premier gaz précurseur ; un deuxième dispositif d'alimentation en précurseur (26, 126, 326) raccordé à la deuxième zone précurseur en deuxième gaz précurseur ; et afin d'atteindre une pression dans la zone d'isolation supérieure aux pressions des zones précurseurs.\n\n- 7. Le dispositif de n'importe laquelle des revendications précédentes, dans lequel au moins certains des passages sont équipés d'un tunnel.\n- 8. Le dispositif de n'importe laquelle des revendications précédentes, comprenant également :\n- une conduite d'évacuation (440) raccordée à une ou plusieurs des zones précurseurs et un piège à précurseur (59, 410, 420) situé dans la conduite d'évacuation.\n- 9. Le dispositif de la revendication 8, comprenant également une conduite de recyclage (450) connectée entre le piège à précurseur et une ou plusieurs des zones précurseurs.\n- 10. Le dispositif de n'importe laquelle des revendications précédentes, comprenant également un générateur de radicaux permettant de transmettre un radical de précurseur à une ou plusieurs des zones précurseurs.\n- 11. Le dispositif de n'importe laquelle des revendications précédentes, dans lequel au moins certains des guides tournants comprennent un rouleau chauffé.\n- 12. Un procédé de dépôt d'un film mince sur un substrat flexible (12, 112, 312), se composant des opérations suivantes :\n- introduction d'un premier gaz précurseur dans une première zone précurseur (14, 114, 314) ; introduction d'un deuxième gaz précurseur dans", + "recall": 0.7315175097276264, + "true_md": "25 \n\n26 \n\nEP 2 000 008 B1\n\nguides tournants étant adaptés pour soute- nir le substrat lorsqu’il change de direction ensedéplaçantversladeuxièmezonepré- curseur, et\n\nsième zone précurseur et disposés de façon à permettre au substrat de faire la navette entre les deuxième ettroisième zonesprécurseursen passant par la zone d’isolation.\n\nplusieurs deuxièmes guides tournants (66, 166, 366) espacés dans la deuxième zone précurseur, au moins certains des deuxiè- mes guides tournants étant adaptés pour soutenir le substrat lorsqu’il change de di- rection ensedéplaçantverslapremièrezo- ne précurseur.\n\nun premier dispositif d’alimentation en précur- seur (24, 124, 324) raccordé à la première zone précurseur pour alimenter lapremièrezonepré- curseur en premier gaz précurseur ;\n\nun deuxième dispositifd’alimentationen précur- seur(26, 126, 326) raccordé à ladeuxièmezone précurseur pour alimenter la deuxième zone précurseur en deuxième gaz précurseur ; et un dispositif d’alimentation en gaz inerte (28, 128, 328) raccordé à la zone d’isolation pour injecter un gaz inerte dans la zone d’isolation afin d’atteindre une pression dans lazone d’iso- lation supérieure aux pressions des zones pré- curseurs.\n\nune conduite d’évacuation (440) raccordée à une ou plusieurs des zones précurseurs et un piège à précurseur (59, 410, 420) situé dans la conduite d’évacuation.\n\nintroduction d’un premier gaz précurseur dans une première zone précurseur (14, 114, 314) ; introductiond’undeuxième gazprécurseurdans\n\nune troisième zone précurseur (190) séparée des premièreetdeuxièmezonesprécurseurset dans laquelle un troisième gaz précurseur diffé- rent du premier et du deuxièmeest introduit lors de l’utilisation du dispositif ;\n\nuntroisième diviseurséparantlatroisième zone précurseur de la zone d’isolation ; et\n\nune série detroisièmespassages(192) passant par le troisième diviseur et dans la troisième zo- ne précurseur à partir de la zone d’isolation, les troisièmes passages étant espacés sur la troi-\n\nune bobine débitrice (72, 172, 372) pour dérou- ler le substrat d’une bobine (74, 174, 374) pour réception à une première extrémité (76,376) de la zone d’isolation ; et\n\nune bobine réceptrice (74, 174, 374) pour em- bobiner le substrat reçu d’une deuxième extré- mité (84, 384) de la zone d’isolation opposée à la première extrémité.\n\n- 2. Le dispositif de la revendication 1, comprenant éga- lement un premier diviseur (34, 134, 334) séparant la zone d’isolation de la première zone précurseur et un deuxième diviseur (36, 136, 336) séparant la zone d’isolation de la deuxième zone précurseur et dans lequel les passages d’étranglement compren- nent une série de premiers passages (54, 154, 354) auniveaudu premier diviseur etune sériededeuxiè- mes passages(56, 156, 356) au niveau du deuxième diviseur.\n\n- 3. Le dispositif de la revendication 1 ou 2, dans lequel au moins certains des premiers guides tournants sont montés de manière réglable dans la première zone précurseur pour le mouvement vers la zone d’isolation et dans la direction opposée à la zone d’isolation, afin d’ajuster la durée de séjour du subs- trat dans la première zone précurseur.\n\n- 4. Le dispositif de n’importe laquelle des revendica- tions précédentes, dans lequel le mécanisme de transport du substrat comprend également :\n\n- 5. Le dispositif de n’importe laquelle des revendica- tions précédentes, comprenant également :\n\n- 6. Le dispositif de n’importe laquelle des revendica- tions précédentes, comprenant également :\n\n- 7. Le dispositif de n’importe laquelle des revendica- tions précédentes, dans lequel au moins certains des passages sont équipés d’un tunnel.\n\n- 8. Le dispositif de n’importe laquelle des revendica- tions précédentes, comprenant également :\n\n- 9. Le dispositif de la revendication 8, comprenant éga- lement une conduite de recyclage (450) connectée entre le piège à précurseur et une ou plusieurs des zones précurseurs.\n\n- 10. Le dispositif de n’importe laquelle des revendica- tions précédentes, comprenant également un géné- rateur de radicaux permettant de transmettre un ra- dical de précurseur à une ou plusieurs des zones précurseurs.\n\n- 11. Le dispositif de n’importe laquelle des revendica- tions précédentes, dans lequel au moins certains des guides tournants comprennent un rouleau chauffé.\n\n- 12. Un procédé de dépôt d’un film mince sur un substrat flexible(12, 112, 312), se composant des opérations suivantes :\n\n14" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6918582462586975, + "doc_id": "3db2f3d89bbc09dce0a1a2b271ac5b22fb76c9660ac8ddf46b7f6f56477e34c8", + "edit_distance": 0.8325434439178515, + "f1_score": 0.8080357142857143, + "meteor": 0.6901124774609724, + "precision": 0.8916256157635468, + "pred_md": "19\n\n20\n\nEP 1 499 943 B1\n\nBetriebsspannung der ersten integrierten Schaltung, wobei die Spannungsregelungslogik ein Signal vom Programm empfängt.\n\n- 15. Vorrichtung nach Anspruch 10, wobei die Anweisungen in einem Basisdatenaustauschsystem (BIOS) residieren.\n- 16. Vorrichtung nach Anspruch 10, wobei die Anweisungen in einem Betriebssystem residieren.\n- 17. Vorrichtung nach Anspruch 10, wobei die Anweisungen in Anwendungssoftware residieren.\n- 18. Vorrichtung nach Anspruch 10, wobei die erste integrierte Schaltung ein Chipset umfasst.\n- 19. Vorrichtung nach Anspruch 10, wobei die erste integrierte Schaltung eine Verarbeitungseinheit fasst.\n\n5\n\n10\n\n15\n\num-\n\n20\n\n- 20. Vorrichtung nach Anspruch 15, wobei das Basisdatenaustauschsystem (BIOS) ein Benachrichtigungssignal von einem Betriebssystem empfängt dahin gehend, dass das Benutzerereignis eingetreten ist.\n- 21. Vorrichtung nach Anspruch 14, wobei das gramm einen Algorithmus für einen steigenden Zustandsübergang umfasst, der separat von einem Algorithmus für einen fallenden Zustandsübergang ist.\n\n25\n\nPro-\n\n30\n\nPro-\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n- 22. Vorrichtung nach Anspruch 10, wobei das gramm zum Versetzen der ersten integrierten Schaltung in den nächsthöheren Performance-Zustand auf Basis eines Eintretens eines Nichtbenutzer- Ereignisses die Nutzung der ersten integrierten Schaltung über eine voreingestellte Schwelle hinaus erhöht.\n- 23. Maschinenlesbares Medium, das Anweisungen bereitstellt, die bei Ausführung durch eine Maschine bewirken, dass die Maschine Operationen durchführt, umfassend:\n\nDetektieren (402) eines Ereignisses, um eine integrierte Schaltung eines Computersystems in einen höheren Performance- Zustand zu versetzen, wobei die integrierte Schaltung mehrere Performance-Zustände aufweist einschließlich eines ersten Performance-Zustandes, eines zweiten Performance-Zustands, der höher als der erste Performance- Zustand ist, und eines dritten Performance-Zustandes, der höher als der zweite Performance-Zustand ist, und Bestimmen (404), ob das Ereignis ein vom Benutzer eingeleitetes Ereignis oder ein von Software eingeleitetes Ereignis ist; wenn das Ereignis ein vom Benutzer eingelei-\n\n11\n\n Ereignis ist, direktes Versetzen (406) der integrierten Schaltung aus dem ersten Performance-Zustand in den dritten Performance-Zustand auf Basis des Detektierens des Benutzerereignisses, wenn das Ereignis ein von Software eingeleitetes Ereignis ist, Versetzen (408) der integrierten Schaltung aus dem ersten Performance-Zu stand in den zweiten Performance-Zustand.\n\n- 24. Maschinenlesbares Medium nach Anspruch 23, ferner umfassend Anweisungen, die bei Ausführung durch die Maschine bewirken, dass die Maschine die weiteren Operationen durchführt, umfassend:\n- Ändern einer Betriebsfrequenz der integrierten Schaltung (112), um den Performance- Zustand der integrierten Schaltung zu ändern.\n- 25. Maschinenlesbares Medium nach Anspruch 23, ferner umfassend Anweisungen, die bei Ausführung durch die Maschine bewirken, dass die Maschine die weiteren Operationen durchführt, umfassend:\n- Ändern eines Betriebsspannungspegels der integrierten Schaltung (112), um den Performance-Zustand der integrierten Schaltung zu ändern.\n- 26. Maschinenlesbares Medium nach Anspruch 23, ferner umfassend Anweisungen, die bei Ausführung durch die Maschine bewirken, dass die Maschine die weiteren Operationen durchführt, umfassend:\n- Betreiben der integrierten Schaltung im dritten Performance-Zustand für einen vorübergehenden Zeitraum.\n- 27. Maschinenlesbares Medium nach einem der Ansprüche 23 bis 26, ferner umfassend Anweisungen, die bei Ausführung durch die Maschine bewirken, dass die Maschine die weiteren Operationen durchführt, umfassend:\n\nÄndern des Performance-ustands Z der integrierten Schaltung durch Ändern der Anzahl von Prozessoren zum Managen der Verarbeitungslast.\n\n## Revendications\n\n- 1. Procédé comportant les étapes consistant à :\n\ndétecter (402) un événement pour faire passer un circuit intégré d'un système informatique à un état de performances plus élevé, le circuit intégré ayant de multiples états de performan-", + "recall": 0.7387755102040816, + "true_md": "19 \n\nEP 1 499 943 B1\n\n20 \n\nBetriebsspannung der ersten integrierten Schaltung, wobeidieSpannungsregelungslogik ein Signal vom Programm empfängt.\n\n45 50 55 Detektieren (402) einesEreignisses,umeine in- tegrierte Schaltung eines Computersystems in einen höheren Performance- Zustandzuverset- zen, wobei die integrierte Schaltung mehrere Performance-Zustände aufweist einschließlich eines ersten Performance-Zustandes, ei nes zweiten Performance-Zustands, der höher als der erste Performance-Zustand ist, und eines dritten Performance-Zustandes, der höher als der zweite Performance-Zustand ist, und Bestimmen (404), ob das Ereignis ein vom Be- nutzer eingeleitetes Ereignis oder ein von Soft- ware eingeleitetes Ereignis ist; wenn das Ereignis ein vom Benutzer eingelei-\n\ndétecter (402) un événement pour faire passer un circuit intégré d’un système informatique à un état de performances plus élevé, le circuit intégré ayant de multiples états de performan-\n\nÄndern des Performance- Zustands der inte- grierten SchaltungdurchÄndernder Anzahlvon Prozessoren zum Managen der Verarbeitungs- last.\n\nÄndern eines Betriebsspannungspegels der in- tegrierten Schaltung (112), um den Perfor- mance-Zustand der integrierten Schaltung zu ändern.\n\nÄndern einer Betriebsfrequenz der integrierten Schaltung (112), umden Performance- Zustand der integrierten Schaltung zu ändern.\n\ntetes Ereignis ist, direktes Versetzen (406) der integrierten Schaltung aus dem ersten Perfor- mance-Zustand in den dritten Performance-Zu- stand auf Basis des Detektierens des Benutze- rereignisses,\n\nwenn das Ereignis ein von Software eingeleite- tesEreignisist, Versetzen(408)der integrierten Schaltung aus dem ersten Performance- Zu- stand in den zweiten Performance-Zustand.\n\n- 15. Vorrichtungnach Anspruch10,wobeidie Anweisun- gen in einem Basisdatenaustauschsystem (BIOS) residieren.\n\n- 16. Vorrichtungnach Anspruch10,wobeidie Anweisun- gen in einem Betriebssystem residieren.\n\n- 17. Vorrichtungnach Anspruch10,wobeidie Anweisun- gen in Anwendungssoftware residieren.\n\n- 18. Vorrichtung nach Anspruch 10, wobei die erste inte- grierte Schaltung ein Chipset umfasst.\n\n- 19. Vorrichtung nach Anspruch 10, wobei die erste inte- grierte Schaltung eine Verarbeitungseinheit fasst.\n\n- 20. Vorrichtung nach Anspruch 15, wobei das Basisda- tenaustauschsystem (BIOS) ein Benachrichtigungs- signal von einem Betriebssystem empfängt dahin gehend, dass das Benutzerereignis eingetreten ist.\n\n- 21. Vorrichtung nach Anspruch 14, wobei das Pro- gramm einen Algorithmus für einen steigenden Zu- standsübergangumfasst, der separat von einem Al- gorithmus für einen fallenden Zustandsübergangist.\n\n- 22. Vorrichtung nach Anspruch 10, wobei das Pro- grammzumVersetzender ersten integriertenSchal- tung in den nächsthöheren Performance-Zustand auf Basis eines Eintretens eines Nichtbenutzer-Er- eignissesdie Nutzung der ersten integrierten Schal- tung über eine voreingestellte Schwelle hinaus er- höht.\n\n- 23. Maschinenlesbares Medium, das Anweisungen be- reitstellt, die bei Ausführung durch eine Maschine bewirken, dass die Maschine Operationen durch- führt, umfassend:\n\n- 27. Maschinenlesbares Medium nach einem der An- sprüche 23 bis 26, ferner umfassend Anweisungen, die bei Ausführung durch die Maschine bewirken, dass die Maschine die weiteren Operationen durch- führt, umfassend:\n\n- 1. Procédé comportant les étapes consistant à :\n\n- 26. Maschinenlesbares Medium nach Anspruch 23, fer- ner umfassend Anweisungen, die bei Ausführung durch die Maschine bewirken, dass die Maschine die weiteren Operationen durchführt, umfassend:\n\nBetreiben der integrierten Schaltung im dritten Performance-Zustand für einen vorübergehen- den Zeitraum.\n\n- 25. Maschinenlesbares Medium nach Anspruch 23, fer- ner umfassend Anweisungen, die bei Ausführung durch die Maschine bewirken, dass die Maschine die weiteren Operationen durchführt, umfassend:\n\n- 24. Maschinenlesbares Medium nach Anspruch 23, fer- ner umfassend Anweisungen, die bei Ausführung durch die Maschine bewirken, dass die Maschine die weiteren Operationen durchführt, umfassend:\n\n## Revendications\n\n11" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5698363775444273, + "doc_id": "46a864eb17eaf7051ebe295eef0f2ad6eb495acf6d8c8f1516e514c552d4dc23", + "edit_distance": 0.25, + "f1_score": 0.8571428571428572, + "meteor": 0.754985754985755, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "EP 1 499 943 B1\n\n17", + "recall": 0.75, + "true_md": "EP 1 499 943 B1\n\nFigure 4\n\n17" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.1357668494211033, + "doc_id": "26f6c265e8ecad23c1a2f5365522508b75e000f501fba829afb833a195ded1ac", + "edit_distance": 0.7708333333333334, + "f1_score": 0.5666666666666667, + "meteor": 0.3761530814343293, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "5\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n8\n\nEP 3 800 018 A1", + "recall": 0.3953488372093023, + "true_md": "EP 3 800 018 A1\n\n## un EUROPÄISCHER RECHERCHENBERICHT\n\n## Nummer der Anmeldung\n\nEP 19 20 0966\n\nEuropäisches Patentamt\n\nEuropean Pp . DE des brevets \"\n\n5\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\nm EPO FORM 1503 03.82 (P04C03)\n\n8" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0060092023138295925, + "doc_id": "36631f455f6ca328ac130193d3aa6e4cbf7d5d85432658eb9972f1ba6e04b4ff", + "edit_distance": 0.8709677419354839, + "f1_score": 0.3541666666666667, + "meteor": 0.19776666693678435, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "5\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\nEP 3 800 018 A1\n\n9", + "recall": 0.21518987341772153, + "true_md": "EP 3 800 018 A1\n\n## ANHANG ZUM EUROPAISCHEN RECHERCHENBERICHT UBER DIE EUROPAISCHE PATENTANMELDUNG NR.\n\nEP 19 20 0966\n\nIn diesem Anhang sind die Mitglieder der Patentfamilien der im obengenannten europäischen Recherchenbericht angeführten Patentdokumente angegeben.\n\nDie Angaben über die Familienmitglieder entsprechen dem Stand der Datei des Europäischen Patentamts am Diese Angaben dienen nur zur Unterrichtung und erfolgen ohne Gewähr.\n\n17-04-2020\n\n5\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\nEPO FORM P0461\n\nFür nähere Einzelheiten zu diesem Anhang : siehe Amtsblatt des Europäischen Patentamts, Nr.12/82\n\n9" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7264185405772773, + "doc_id": "fe4d629c1d1b79976c9d625c62261a1a4e755f1979d41e126a8fad08de8f1808", + "edit_distance": 0.6798307475317349, + "f1_score": 0.7807807807807808, + "meteor": 0.6235370996248835, + "precision": 0.8496732026143791, + "pred_md": "21\n\n22\n\nEP 1 499 943 B1\n\nces incluant un premier état de performances, un deuxième état de performances supérieur au premier état de performances, et un troisième état de performances supérieur au deuxième état de performances, le système informatique ayant un bloc d'alimentation qui inclut une batterie, déterminer (404) si l'événement est un événement déclenché par un utilisateur ou un événement déclenché par un logiciel, si l'événement est un événement déclenché par un utilisateur, faire passer directement (406) le circuit intégré du premier état de performances au troisième état de performances, si l'événement est un événement déclenché par un logiciel, faire passer (408) le circuit intégré du premier état de performances au deuxième état de performances.\n\n- 2. Procédé selon la revendication 1, dans lequel l'événement déclenché par un utilisateur est défini par un environnement de programmation dans lequel le système informatique fonctionne.\n- 3. Procédé selon la revendication 1, dans lequel le passage directement comporte un passage sans délai.\n\n5\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n- 4. Procédé selon la revendication 1, comportant en outre l'étape consistant à :\n\n30\n\n- faire fonctionner le circuit intégré au troisième état de performances pendant une période de temps prédéfinie sur la base de considérations thermiques afin de fonctionner au troisième état de performances sans défaillance.\n- 5. Procédé selon la revendication 4, dans lequel le système informatique comporte un ordinateur portable.\n- 6. Procédé selon la revendication 1, dans lequel le système informatique comporte un assistant numérique personnel.\n- 7. Dispositif, comportant :\n\ndes moyens (136) pour détecter un événement déclenché par un utilisateur ou un événement déclenché par un logiciel dans un système informatique, le système informatique incluant un circuit intégré (112) ayant de multiples états de performances incluant un premier état de performances, un deuxième état de performances supérieur au premier état de performances, et un troisième état de performances supérieur au deuxième état de performances, des moyens pour déterminer si un événement\n\ndétecté est un événement déclenché par un uti-\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n12\n\nlisateur ou un événement déclenché par un logiciel, et des moyens (130, 134) pour faire passer directement le circuit intégré du premier état de performances au troisième état de performances sur la base de la détection que l'événement est un événement déclenché par un utilisateur ou pour faire passer le circuit intégré du premier état de performances au deuxième état de performances sur la base de la détection que l'événement est un événement déclenché par logiciel,\n\n- 8. Dispositif selon la revendication 7, comportant en outre :\n\ndes moyens (134) pour changer une fréquence de fonctionnement du circuit intégré (112) afin de changer l'état de performances du circuit intégré.\n\n- 9. Dispositif selon la revendication 7, comportant en outre :\n- des moyens (130) pour changer un niveau de tension de fonctionnement du circuit intégré (112) afin de changer l'état de performances du circuit intégré.\n- 10. Dispositif selon l'une des revendications 7 à comportant :\n\n9,\n\n- un support lisible par ordinateur, et un programme mémorisé dans le support lisible par ordinateur pour gérer la consommation d'énergie dans le premier circuit intégré, des instructions associées au programme pour faire passer directement le premier circuit intégré (112) du premier état de performances au troisième état de performances sur la base de la détection d'un événement déclenché par un utilisateur.\n- 11. Dispositif selon la revendication 10, dans lequel le premier état de performances comporte un premier niveau de tension et une première fréquence opérationnelle.\n- 12. Dispositif selon la revendication 10, dans lequel le troisième état de performances comporte un second circuit intégré traitant conjointement des instructions avec le premier circuit intégré.\n- 13. Dispositif selon la revendication 10, comportant en outre :\n- une logique de régulation de fréquence pour changer une fréquence de fonctionnement du", + "recall": 0.7222222222222222, + "true_md": "ces incluant un premier état de performances, undeuxièmeétatdeperformancessupérieurau premier état de performances, et un troisième état de performances supérieur au deuxième état de performances, le système informatique ayant un bloc d’alimentation qui inclut une bat- terie, déterminer (404) si l’événement est un événe- ment déclenché par un utilisateur ou un événe- ment déclenché par un logiciel, sil’événement est un événement déclenché par un utilisateur, faire passer directement (406) le circuit intégré du premier état de performances au troisième état de performances, sil’événement est un événement déclenché par un logiciel, faire passer (408) le circuit intégré du premier état de performances au deuxième état de performances.\n\nfaire fonctionner le circuit intégré au troisième état de performances pendant une période de temps prédéfinie sur la base de considérations thermiquesafindefonctionner autroisième état de performances sans défaillance.\n\ndes moyens (136) pour détecter un événement déclenché par un utilisateur ou un événement déclenché par un logiciel dans un système in- formatique, le système informatique incluant un circuit inté- gré(112)ayantdemultiples étatsdeperforman- ces incluant un premier état de performances, undeuxièmeétatdeperformancessupérieurau premier état de performances, et un troisième état de performances supérieur au deuxième état de performances, des moyens pour déterminer si un événement détecté est un événement déclenché par un uti-\n\nune logique de régulation de fréquence pour changer une fréquence de fonctionnement du\n\nun support lisible par ordinateur, et un programme mémorisé dans le support lisible par ordinateur pour gérer la consommation d’énergie danslepremier circuitintégré,desins- tructions associées au programme pour faire passer directement le premier circuit intégré (112) du premier état de performances au troi- sième état de performances sur la base de la détection d’un événement déclenché par un uti- lisateur.\n\ndes moyens (130) pour changer un niveau de tension de fonctionnement du circuit intégré (112) afin de changer l’état de performances du circuit intégré.\n\ndes moyens (134) pour changer une fréquence de fonctionnement du circuit intégré (112) afin de changer l’état de performances du circuit in- tégré.\n\nlisateur ou un événement déclenché par un lo- giciel, et des moyens (130, 134) pour faire passer direc- tement le circuit intégré du premier état de per- formances au troisième état de performances sur la base de la détection que l’événement est un événement déclenché par un utilisateur ou pour faire passer le circuit intégré du premier état de performances au deuxième état de per- formances sur la base de la détection que l’évé- nement est un événement déclenché par logi- ciel,\n\n- 20 2. Procédé selon la revendication 1, dans lequel l’évé- nement déclenché par unutilisateur est défini par un environnement de programmation dans lequel le système informatique fonctionne.\n\n- 3. Procédé selonla revendication 1, danslequelle pas- sage directement comporte un passage sans délai.\n\n- 4. Procédé selon la revendication 1, comportant en outre l’étape consistant à :\n\n- 5. Procédé selonla revendication 4, dans lequel lesys- tème informatique comporte un ordinateur portable.\n\n- 6. Procédé selonla revendication 1, dans lequel lesys- tèmeinformatique comporteunassistant numérique personnel.\n\n- 7. Dispositif, comportant :\n\n- 13. Dispositif selon la revendication 10, comportant en outre :\n\n- 12. Dispositif selon la revendication 10, dans lequel le troisième étatdeperformancescomporte un second circuitintégrétraitantconjointementdes instructions avec le premier circuit intégré.\n\n- 11. Dispositif selon la revendication 10, dans lequel le premier état de performances comporte un premier niveau de tension et une première fréquence opé- rationnelle.\n\n- 10. Dispositif selon l’une des revendications 7 à 9, comportant :\n\n- 9. Dispositif selon la revendication 7, comportant en outre :\n\n- 8. Dispositif selon la revendication 7, comportant en outre :\n\n21 \n\nEP 1 499 943 B1\n\n22 \n\n12" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8131973635879002, + "doc_id": "ab0005c68548c3850e6c49f50f1844e7af6b5251009d5c5a27dabc032bbd7c64", + "edit_distance": 0.1786046511627907, + "f1_score": 0.821566110397946, + "meteor": 0.8420994740361195, + "precision": 0.8648648648648649, + "pred_md": "## Description\n\n## Background\n\n[0001] The field of this disclosure relates to thin film deposition systems and methods for coating flexible substrates.\n\n5\n\n10 15 20 [0002] Atomic layer deposition (\"ALD\"), formerly known as atomic layer epitaxy (\"ALE\"), is a thin film deposition process that is known for use in manufacturing electroluminescent (EL) display panels, in semiconductor integrated circuit manufacturing, and for other purposes. See U.S. Patent No. 4,058,430 of Suntola et al., and U.S. Patent Application Publication Nos. 2004/0208994 A1 of Härkönen et al. , US 2004/0124131 A1 of Aitchison et al., and US 2005/0011555 A1 of Maulaet al.,. ALD offers several benefits over other thin film deposition methods, such as physical vapor deposition (\"PVD\") (e.g., evaporation or sputtering) and chemical vapor deposition (\"CVD\"), as described in Atomic Layer Epitaxy (T. Suntola and M. Simpson, eds., Blackie and Son Ltd., Glasgow, 1990).\n\n35\n\n40\n\n25 30 [0003] In contrast to CVD, in which the flows of precursors are static (i.e., flow rates are steady during processing) and the substrate is exposed to multiple precursors simultaneously present in the reaction chamber, the precursor flows in ALD processing are dynamic and sequential, so that the substrate is exposed to only one precursor at a time. Successful ALD growth has conventionally required the sequential introduction of two or more different precursor vapors into a reaction space around a substrate. ALD is usually performed at elevated temperatures and low pressures. For example, the reaction space may be heated to between 200°C. and 600° C and operated at a pressure of between 0.1 mbar and 50 mbar. In a typical ALD reactor, the reaction space is bounded by a reaction chamber sized to accommodate one or more substrates. One or more precursor material delivery systems (also known as \"precursor sources\") are typically provided for feeding precursor materials into the reaction chamber.\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n[0004] After the substrates are loaded into the reaction chamber and heated to a desired processing temperature, a first precursor vapor is directed over the substrates. Some of the precursor vapor chemisorbs or adsorbs on the surface of the substrates to make a monolayer film. In pure ALD, the molecules of precursor vapor will not attach to other like molecules and the process is therefore self-limiting. Next, the reaction space is purged to remove excess of the first vapor and any volatile reaction products. Purging is typically accomplished by flushing the reaction space with an inert purge gas that is non-reactive with the first precursor. After purging, a second precursor vapor is introduced. Molecules of the second precursor vapor chemisorb or otherwise react with the chemisorbed or adsorbed first precursor molecules to form a thin film product of the first and second precursors. To complete the ALD cycle, the reaction\n\n2\n\n1\n\n2\n\nEP 2 000 008 B1\n\nspace is again purged with an inert purge gas to remove any excess of the second vapor as well as any volatile reaction products. The steps of first precursor pulse, purge, second precursor pulse, and purge are typically repeated hundreds or thousands of times until the desired thickness of the film is achieved.\n\n[0005] The required temperatures, pressures, and reaction chamber conditions have conventionally limited the ALD technique to deposition on substrates of relatively small size. For example, known uses of ALD include EL display panels and semiconductor wafers.\n\nUSal oxide moisture barrier over each of a plurality of dis[0006] [0006.1] US 6,888,172 B2 discloses an apparatus and method for forming a transparent dielectric metcrete OLED devices previously formed on the surface of a flexible substrate. Multiple oxidizing gas stations and metal-organic gas stations are spaced apart in alternating succession along a transport path of the substrate. At each oxidizing gas station oxygenated surface sites are formed and, when the OLED device is advanced to the next metal-organic gas station in the path, a metalorganic gas reacts with the oxygenated surface sites to form an atomic layer of a metal oxide over the OLED device. Disposed between each of the oxidizing gas stations and metal-organic gas stations are purging stations that direct an inert gas to impinge upon the substrate so as to prevent mixing of the two processing gasses that may seep from the processing gas stations. The substrate is advanced past multiple sets of the gas stations and purging stations to form successive atomic layers, one layer for each set of adjacent oxidizing gas station, purge station, and metal-organic gas station.\n\n## Summary\n\n[0007] In accordance with one embodiment, a system for depositing a thin film on a flexible substrate includes an isolation zone interposed between first and second precursor zones. When in use, reactive first and second precursor gases are introduced into the respective first and second precursor zones, and an inert gas is introduced into the isolation zone. A series of flow-restricting passageways from the isolation zone to the first and second precursor zones are spaced apart along the precursor zones. The passageways may include elongated tunnels and/or flexible wipers to restrict the flow of gases between the isolation zone and the precursor zones. When in use, a flexible substrate is threaded through the passageways so that it traverses back and forth between the first and second precursor zones multiple times and each time through the isolation zone. A substrate transport mechanism of the system includes a plurality of first turning guides, such as rollers, spaced apart along the first precursor zone and a plurality of second turning guides spaced apart along the second precursor zone. At least some of the first turning guides are adapted to support the substrate during a change in a direction of travel of the substrate toward the second precursor zone,", + "recall": 0.78239608801956, + "true_md": "1\n\nEP 2 000 008 B1\n\n2 \n\n## Description\n\n## Background\n\n[0001] The field of this disclosure relates to thin film deposition systems andmethodsfor coatingflexible sub- strates.\n\n[0002] Atomic layer deposition (\"ALD\"), form erly known as atomic layer epitaxy (\"ALE\"), is a thin film dep- osition process that is known for use in manufacturing electroluminescent (EL) display panels, in semiconduc- tor integrated circuit manufacturing, and for other pur- poses. See U.S. Patent No. 4,058,430 of Suntola et al., and U.S. Patent Application Publication Nos. 2004/0208994 A1 of Härkönen et al. , US 2004/0124131 A1 ofAitchison et al., andUS2005/0011555A1 ofMaula- et al.,. ALD offers several benefits over other thin film deposition methods, such as physical vapor deposition (\"PVD\") (e.g., evaporation or sputtering) and chemical vapor deposition (\"CVD\"), as described in Atomic Layer Epitaxy (T. Suntola and M. Simpson, eds., Blackie and Son Ltd., Glasgow, 1990).\n\n[0003] In contrast to CVD, in which the flows of pre- cursors are static (i.e., flow rates are steady du ring processing) and thesubstrate isexposed to multiplepre- cursors simultaneously present in the reaction chamber, the precursor flows in ALD processing are dynamic and sequential, so that the substrate is exposed to only one precursor at a time. SuccessfulALD growth has conven- tionally required the sequential introduction of two or more different precursor vapors into a reaction space arounda substrate. ALDisusually performed at elevated temperatures andlow pressures.For example,the reac- tion space may be heated to between 200°C. and 600° C and operated at a pressure of between 0.1 mbar and 50 mbar. In a typical ALD reactor, the reaction space is bounded by a reaction chamber sized to accommodate one or more substrates. One or more precursor material delivery systems (also known as \"precursor sources\") are typicallyprovidedfor feeding precursor materials into the reaction chamber.\n\n45 50 55 [0004] After the substratesare loadedintothe reaction chamber and heated to a desired processing tempera- ture, a first precursor vapor is directed over the su b- strates. Some of the precursor vapor chemisorbs or ad- sorbs on the surface of the substrates to make a monol- ayer film. In pure ALD, the molecules of precursor vapor will not attach to other like molecules and the process is therefore self-limiting.Next, the reactionspaceispurged to remove excess of the first vapor and any volatile re- action products. Purging is typically accomplished by flushing the reaction space with an inert purge gas that is non-reactive with the first precursor. After purging, a second precursor vapor is introduced. Molecules of the second precursor vapor chemisorb or otherwise react with the chemisorbed or adsorbed first precursor mole- cules to form a thin film product of the first and second precursors. To complete the ALD cycle, the reactio n\n\nspace is again purged with an inert purge gas to remove any excess of the second vapor as well as any volatile reaction products. The steps of first precursor pulse, purge, second precursor pulse, and purge are typically repeated hundreds or thousands of times until the de- sired thickness of the film is achieved.\n\n[0005] The required temperatures, pressures, and re- action chamber conditions have conventionally limited the ALD technique to deposition on substrates of rela- tivelysmall size.Forexample,known usesofALDinclude EL display panels and semiconductor wafers.\n\nUS [0006] [0006.1] US 6,888,172 B2 discloses an appa- ratus and methodforforming atransparent dielectricmet- al oxide moisture barrier over each of a plurality of dis- crete OLED devices previously formed on the surface of a flexible substrate. Multiple oxidizing gas stations and metal-organic gas stations are spaced apart in alternat- ing succession along a transport path of the substrate. At each oxidizing gas station oxygenated surface sites are formed and, when the OLED device is advanced to the next metal-organic gas station in the path, a metal- organic gas reacts with the oxygenated surface sites to form an atomic layer of a metal oxide over the OLED device. Disposed between each of the oxidizing gas sta- tions and metal-organic gasstationsare purging stations that direct an inert gas to impinge upon the substrate so as to prevent mixing of the two processing gasses that may seep from the processing gas stations. The sub- strate is advanced past multiple sets of the gas stations and purging stations to form successive atomic layers, one layer for each set of adjacent oxidizing gas station, purge station, and metal-organic gas station.\n\n[0007] In accordance with one embodiment, a system for depositing a thin film on a flexible substrate includes an isolation zone interposed between first and second precursor zones. When in use, reactive first and second precursor gases are introduced into the respective first and second precursor zones, and an inert gas is intro- duced into the isolation zone. A series of flow-restricting passagewaysfromtheisolation zone to the first and sec- ond precursor zones are spaced apart along the precur- sor zones.The passagewaysmay includeelongated tun- nels and/or flexible wipers to restrict the flow of gases between the isolation zone and the precursor zones. When inuse, a flexible substrate is threaded through the passagewaysso that ittraversesbackandforth between the first and second precursor zones multiple times and each time through the isolation zone. A substrate trans- port mechanism of the system includes a plurality of first turning guides, such as rollers, spaced apart along the first precursor zone and a plurality of second turning guides spaced apart along the second precursor zone. At least some of the first turning guides are adapted to support the substrate during a change in a direction of travelof the substrate towardthesecondprecursor zone,\n\n## Summary\n\n2" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5954451244434558, + "doc_id": "df7a76750923a0d62780e370bb5720d423917536efd98d14d8787fde8c0a8ca6", + "edit_distance": 0.4401294498381877, + "f1_score": 0.7356948228882834, + "meteor": 0.6620974819090851, + "precision": 0.7941176470588235, + "pred_md": "27\n\n28\n\nEP 2 000 008 B1\n\nune deuxième zone précurseur (16, 116, 316) espacée de la première, le deuxième gaz précurseur étant différent du premier ; guidage d'un substrat flexible (12, 112, 312) selon un mouvement de navette entre les première et deuxième zones précurseurs, en passant par une série de passages d'étranglement (54, 56, 154, 156, 354, 356) d'une zone d'isolation (20, 120, 320) interposée entre les première deuxième zones précurseurs, de façon à ce que le substrat traverse les première et deuxième zones précurseurs plusieurs fois, qu'une monocouche du premier gaz précurseur adsorbe à la surface du substrat pendant le transit du substrat dans la première zone précurseur et que, pendant un transit ultérieur du substrat dans la deuxième zone précurseur, le deuxième gaz précurseur réagisse avec le premier précurseur adsorbé à la surface du substrat afin de déposer un film mince sur le substrat ; introduction d'un gaz inerte dans la d'isolation ; et création d'un premier différentiel de pression entre la zone d'isolation et la première zone précurseur et d'un deuxième différentiel de pression entre la zone d'isolation et la deuxième zone précurseur, les différentiels de pression étant suffisants pour empêcher la migration des premier et deuxième gaz précurseurs hors des première et deuxième zones précurseurs respectives et le mélange des premier et deuxième gaz précurseurs dans une des zones, ce qui empêche les réactions à l'intérieur des zones entre les quantités non-adsorbées des premier deuxième gaz précurseurs.\n\n- 13. Le procédé de la revendication 12, qui suppose également de guider le substrat dans une troisième zone précurseur (190) dans laquelle un troisième gaz précurseur différent du deuxième est introduit.\n- 14. Le procédé de n'importe laquelle des revendications 12 ou 13, dans lequel la création des différentiels de pression suppose d'injecter le gaz inerte dans les passages.\n- 15. Le procédé de n'importe laquelle des revendications 12 à 14, dans lequel le guidage du substrat en navette entre les première et deuxième zones précurseurs suppose de faire avancer continuellement le substrat sur un trajet de transport ondulé.\n- 16. Le procédé de n'importe laquelle des revendications 12 à 15, qui suppose également d'ajuster une longueur d'au moins certains des transits dans la première zone précurseur.\n- 17. Le procédé de n'importe laquelle des revendications\n- 12 à 16, qui suppose également de faire sortir un flux de premier gaz précurseur de la première zone précurseur et de piéger au moins une partie du premier gaz précurseur ainsi évacué.\n- 18. Le procédé de la revendication 17, qui suppose également de recycler le premier gaz précurseur piégé dans la première zone précurseur.\n- 19. Le procédé de n'importe laquelle des revendications 12 à 18, qui suppose également de chauffer au moins une des première et deuxième zones précurseurs.\n- 20. Le procédé de n'importe laquelle des revendications 12 à 19, qui suppose également de chauffer le substrat.\n- 21. Le procédé de n'importe laquelle des revendications 12 à 20, qui suppose également d'introduire un radical dans au moins une des zones précurseurs.\n\nap-\n\n- 22. Le procédé de n'importe laquelle des revendications 12 à 21, dans lequel la première zone précurseur, la deuxième zone précurseur et la zone d'isolation fonctionnent aux pressions atmosphériques proximativement.\n\n5\n\net\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\nzone\n\n25\n\n30\n\net\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n15", + "recall": 0.6852791878172588, + "true_md": "27 \n\nEP 2 000 008 B1\n\n28 \n\nune deuxième zone précurseur (16, 116, 316) espacée de la première, le deuxième gaz pré- curseur étant différent du premier ;\n\nguidage d’un substrat flexible (12, 112, 312) se- lon un mouvement de navette entreles première etdeuxième zones précurseurs,enpassant par une série de passages d’étranglement (54, 56, 154, 156, 354, 356) d’une zone d’isolation (20, 120, 320) interposée entre les première deuxièmezones précurseurs, defaçon à ce que le substrat traverse les première et deuxième zones précurseurs plusieurs fois, qu’unemono- couche du premier gaz précurseur adsorbe à la surface du substrat pendant le transit du subs- trat dans la première zone précurseur et que, pendant un transit ultérieur du substrat dans la deuxième zone précurseur, le deuxième gaz précurseur réagisse avec le premier précurseur adsorbéàla surface du substratafinde déposer un film mince sur le substrat ;\n\nintroduction d’un gaz inerte dans la d’isolation ; et\n\ncréationd’un premier différentieldepressionen- tre la zone d’isolation et la première zone pré- curseur et d’un deuxième différentiel de pres- sion entre la zone d’isolation et la deuxième zo- neprécurseur, lesdifférentielsdepressionétant suffisants pour empêcher la migration des pre- mieretdeuxième gaz précurseurshorsdes pre- mière et deuxième zones précurseurs respecti- ves et le mélange des premier et deuxième gaz précurseurs dans une des zones, ce qui empê- che les réactions à l’intérieur des zones entre les quantités non-adsorbées des premier et deuxième gaz précurseurs.\n\n12 à 16, qui suppose également de faire sortir un flux de premier gaz précurseur de la première zone précurseur et de piéger au moins une partie du pre- mier gaz précurseur ainsi évacué.\n\n- 13. Leprocédé de larevendication 12, quisupposeéga- lement de guider le substratdansunetroisième zone précurseur (190) danslaquelle un troisième gazpré- curseur différent du deuxième est introduit.\n\n- 14. Leprocédé de n’importelaquelle des revendications 12 ou 13, dans lequel la création des différentiels de pression suppose d’injecter le gaz inerte dans les passages.\n\n- 15. Leprocédé de n’importelaquelle des revendications 12 à 14, dans lequel le guidage du substrat en na- vette entre les première et deuxième zones précur- seurs suppose de faire avancer continuellement le substrat sur un trajet de transport ondulé.\n\n- 16. Leprocédé de n’importelaquelle des revendications 12 à 15, qui suppose également d’ajuster une lon- gueur d’au moins certains des transits dans la pre- mière zone précurseur.\n\n- 17. Leprocédé de n’importelaquelle des revendications\n\n- 18. Leprocédé de larevendication 17, quisupposeéga- lement de recycler le premier gaz précurseur piégé dans la première zone précurseur.\n\n- 19. Leprocédé de n’importelaquelle des revendications 12 à 18, qui suppose également de chauffer moins une des première et deuxième zones précur- seurs.\n\n- 20. Leprocédé de n’importelaquelle des revendications 12à 19,qui suppose égalementde chauffer lesubs- trat.\n\n- 21. Leprocédé de n’importelaquelle des revendications 12 à 20, qui suppose également d’introduire un ra- dical dans au moins une des zones précurseurs.\n\n- 22. Leprocédé de n’importelaquelle des revendications 12 à 21, dans lequel la première zone précurseur, la deuxième zone précurseur et la zone d’isolation fonctionnent aux pressions atmosphériques ap- proximativement.\n\n15" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6842147918082502, + "doc_id": "7fb1731d3d765392f3859b06201281ce36d64fede36fb334ad114cfe6f35c178", + "edit_distance": 0.6442307692307693, + "f1_score": 0.7719928186714541, + "meteor": 0.6023705210691496, + "precision": 0.8531746031746031, + "pred_md": "23\n\n24\n\nEP 2 000 008 B1\n\nReihe strömungsbeschränkender Durchgangswege (54, 56, 154, 156, 354, 356) eines Isolierungsbereichs (20, 120, 320), der zwischen den ersten und zweiten Vorläuferbereich zwischengefügt ist, so dass das Substrat mehrere Male durch den ersten und zweiten Vorläuferbereichs hindurchgeht, eine Monoschicht des ersten Vorläufergases während des Übergangs des Substrats durch den ersten Vorläuferbereich an die Oberfläche des Substrats adsorbiert und das zweite Vorläufergas während eines anschließenden Übergangs des Substrats durch den zweiten Vorläuferbereich mit dem adsorbierten ersten Vorläufer an der Oberfläche des Substrats reagiert, um dadurch eine dünne Schicht\n\nauf dem Substrat abzuscheiden; Einleiten eines Inertgases in den Isolierungsbereich; und Erzeugen eines ersten Druckunterschieds zwischen dem Isolierungsbereich und dem ersten Vorläuferbereich sowie eines zweiten Druckunterschieds zwischen dem Isolierungsbereich und dem zweiten Vorläuferbereich, wobei die Druckunterschiede ausreichen, um eine Wanderung des ersten und zweiten Vorläufergases aus dem jeweiligen ersten und zweiten Vorläuferbereich zu verhindern, und Vermischen des ersten und zweiten Vorläufergases in einem der Bereiche, wodurch Reaktionen in den Bereichen zwischen nicht-adsorbierten Mengen des ersten und zweiten Vorläufergases verhindert werden.\n\n- 13. Verfahren nach Anspruch 12, weiter umfassend das Führen des Substrats durch einen dritten Vorläuferbereich (190), in den ein drittes Vorläufergas, das sich von dem zweiten Vorläufergas unterscheidet, eingeleitet wird.\n- 14. Verfahren nach irgendeinem der Ansprüche 12 oder 13, bei dem das Erzeugen der Druckunterschiede das Einspritzen des Inertgases in die Durchgangswege einschließt.\n\n5\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\n50\n\n- 15. Verfahren nach irgendeinem der Ansprüche 12 bis 14, bei dem das Führen des Substrats rückwärts und vorwärts zwischen dem ersten und dem zweiten Vorläuferbereich das ununterbrochene Vorschieben des Substrats entlang eines gewundenen Transportwegs einschließt.\n- 16. Verfahren nach irgendeinem der Ansprüche 12 bis 15, weiterhin umfassend das Einstellen einer Länge zumindest einiger der Durchgänge durch den ersten Vorläuferbereich.\n- 17. Verfahren nach irgendeinem der Ansprüche 12 bis 16, weiter umfassend:\n\n55\n\n13\n\nAusstoßen einer Strömung des ersten Vorläufergases aus dem ersten Vorläuferbereich; und Einfangen zumindest eines Teils des ausgestoßenen ersten Vorläufergases.\n\n- 18. Verfahren nach Anspruch 17, weiterhin umfassend das Rückführen des gefangenen ersten Vorläufergases in den ersten Vorläuferbereich.\n- 19. Verfahren nach irgendeinem der Ansprüche 12 bis 18, weiterhin umfassend das Beheizen zumindest eines von dem ersten und zweiten Vorläuferbereich.\n- 20. Verfahren nach irgendeinem der Ansprüche 12 bis 19, weiterhin umfassend das Beheizen des Substrats.\n- 21. Verfahren nach irgendeinem der Ansprüche 12 bis 20, weiterhin umfassend das Einleiten eines Radikals in zumindest einen der Vorläuferbereiche.\n- 22. Verfahren nach irgendeinem der Ansprüche 12 bis 21, bei dem der erste Vorläuferbereich, der zweite Vorläuferbereich und der Isolierungsbereich ungefähr bei Atmosphärendruck arbeiten.\n\n## Revendications\n\n- 1.\n- Un dispositif (10, 110, 310) de dépôt d'un film mince sur un substrat flexible (12, 112, 312), se composant de ce qui suit :\n\nune première zone précurseur (14, 114, 314) dans laquelle un premier gaz précurseur est introduit lors de l'utilisation du dispositif ; une deuxième zone précurseur (16, 116, 316) dans laquelle un deuxième gaz précurseur différent du premier est introduit lors de l'utilisation du dispositif ; une zone d'isolation (20, 120, 320) interposée entre les première et deuxième zones précurseurs et dans laquelle un gaz inerte est introduit lors de l'utilisation du dispositif, la zone d'isolation comprenant une série de passages d'étranglement (54, 56, 154, 156, 354, 356) s'ouvrant dans les première et deuxième zones précurseurs et disposés de façon à guider le substrat flexible (12, 112, 312) en navette, afin qu'il traverse les première et deuxième zones précurseurs à plusieurs reprises et à chaque fois en passant par la zone d'isolation ; et un mécanisme de transport du substrat (60, 360), comprenant :\n\nplusieurs premiers guides tournants (64, 164, 364) espacés dans la première zone précurseur, au moins certains des premiers", + "recall": 0.7049180327868853, + "true_md": "23 \n\nEP 2 000 008 B1\n\n24 \n\nReihe strömungsbeschränkender Durchgangs- wege (54, 56, 154, 156, 354, 356) eines Isolie- rungsbereichs(20,120, 320), der zwischenden ersten und zweiten Vorläuferbereich zwischen- gefügt ist, so dass das Substrat mehrere Male durch denersten und zweiten Vorläuferbereichs hindurchgeht, eineMonoschicht deserstenVor- läufergases während des Übergangs des Sub- strats durch den ersten Vorläuferbereich an die Oberfläche des Substrats adsorbiert und das zweite Vorläufergas während eines anschlie- ßenden Übergangs des Substrats durch den zweiten Vorläuferbereich mit dem adsorbierten ersten Vorläufer an der Oberfläche des Sub- stratsreagiert, um dadurch eine dünneSchicht auf dem Substrat abzuscheiden;\n\nEinleiten eines Inertgasesin denIsolierungsbe- reich; und\n\n20 25 30 Erzeugen eines ersten Druckunterschieds zwi- schen dem Isolierungsbereich und dem ersten Vorläuferbereich sowie eines zweiten Druckun- terschieds zwischen dem Isolierungsbereich und dem zweiten Vorläuferbereich, wobei die Druckunterschiede ausreichen, um eine Wan- derung des ersten und zweiten Vorläufergases aus dem jeweiligen ersten und zweiten Vorläu- ferbereich zu verhindern, und Vermischen des ersten undzweiten Vorläufergases ineinem der Bereiche, wodurch Reaktionen in den Berei- chen zwischen nicht-adsorbierten Mengen des ersten und zweiten Vorläufergases verhindert werden.\n\nplusieurs premiers guides tournants (64, 164, 364) espacés dans la première zone précurseur, au moinscertainsdes premiers\n\nune première zone précurseur (14, 114, 314) dans laquelle un premier gaz précurseur est in- troduit lors de l’utilisation du dispositif ;\n\nune deuxième zone précurseur (16, 116, 316) dans laquelle un deuxième gaz précurseur dif- férentdupremier estintroduit lorsdel’utilisation du dispositif ;\n\nune zone d’isolation (20, 120, 320) interposée entre les première et deuxième zones précur- seurs et dans laquelleun gazinerte est introduit lors de l’utilisation du dispositif, la zone d’isola- tion comprenantune sériede passages d’étran- glement (54, 56, 154, 156, 354, 356) s’ouvrant dans les première et deuxième zones précur- seurs et disposés de façon à guider le substrat flexible (12, 112, 312) en navette, afin qu’il tra- verse les première et deuxième zones précur- seurs à plusieurs reprises et à chaque fois en passant par la zone d’isolation ; et un mécanisme de transport du substrat (60, 360), comprenant :\n\nAusstoßen einer Strömung des ersten Vorläu- fergases aus dem ersten Vorläuferbereich; und Einfangen zumindest eines Teils des ausgesto- ßenen ersten Vorläufergases.\n\n- 18. Verfahren nach Anspruch 17, weiterhin umfassend das Rückführen des gefangenen ersten Vorläufer- gases in den ersten Vorläuferbereich.\n\n- 19. Verfahren nach irgendeinem der Ansprüche 12 bis 18, weiterhin umfassend das Beheizen zumindest einesvondemerstenund zweitenVorläuferbereich.\n\n- 20. Verfahren nach irgendeinem der Ansprüche 12 bis 19, weiterhin umfassend das Beheizen des Sub- strats.\n\n- 21. Verfahren nach irgendeinem der Ansprüche 12 bis 20, weiterhin umfassend das Einleiten eines Radi- kals in zumindest einen der Vorläuferbereiche.\n\n- 22. Verfahren nach irgendeinem der Ansprüche 12 bis 21, bei dem der erste Vorläuferbereich, der zweite Vorläuferbereich und der Isolierungsbereich unge- fähr bei Atmosphärendruck arbeiten.\n\n- 1. Un dispositif (10, 110, 310) de dépôt d’un film mince sur unsubstrat flexible (12, 112,312), se composant de ce qui suit :\n\n- 13. VerfahrennachAnspruch12, weiter umfassenddas Führen des Substrats durch einen dritten Vorläufer- bereich (190), in den ein drittes Vorläufergas, das sich von dem zweiten Vorläufergas unterscheidet, eingeleitet wird.\n\n- 14. Verfahrennach irgendeinemder Ansprüche12oder 13, bei dem das Erzeugen der Druckunterschiede das Einspritzen des Inertgases in die Durchgangs- wege einschließt.\n\n- 16. Verfahren nach irgendeinem der Ansprüche 12 bis 15, weiterhin umfassend das Einstellen einer Länge zumindesteiniger der Durchgänge durchden ersten Vorläuferbereich.\n\n- 17. Verfahren nach irgendeinem der Ansprüche 12 bis 16, weiter umfassend:\n\n- 45 50 15. Verfahren nach irgendeinem der Ansprüche 12 bis 14, beidemdas FührendesSubstratsrückwärts und vorwärtszwischendemerstenunddemzweitenVor- läuferbereich das ununterbrochene Vorschiebe n des Substrats entlang eines gewundenen Transport- wegs einschließt.\n\n## Revendications\n\n13" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7983072879341605, + "doc_id": "a0c982a284ab7f8c3057b1a9b45a5d601b5d346031e3bbf416cc2686289a88b7", + "edit_distance": 0.6144430844553244, + "f1_score": 0.8251473477406679, + "meteor": 0.6593434471455638, + "precision": 0.8641975308641975, + "pred_md": "19\n\n20\n\nEP 2 000 008 B1\n\nisolation zone (20, 120, 320) that is interposed between the first and second precursor zones, so that the substrate transits through the first and second precursor zones multiple times, a substrate through the first precursor zone, and substrate\n\n5\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n11\n\n- 19. The method of any one of claims 12 to 18, further comprising heating at least one of the first and second precursor zones.\n- 20. The method of any one of claims 12 to 19, further comprising heating the substrate.\n- 21. The method of any one of claims 12 to 20, further comprising introducing a radical into at least one of the precursor zones.\n- 22. The method of any one of claims 12 to 21, in which the first precursor zone, the second precursor zone, and the isolation zone operate at approximately atmospheric pressures.\n\n## Patentansprüche\n\n- 1. System (10, 110, 310) zum Abscheiden einer dünnen Schicht auf einem flexiblen Substrat (12, 112, 312), umfassend:\n\n(60,\n\neinen ersten Vorläuferbereich (14, 114, 314), in den ein erstes Vorläufergas eingeleitet wird, wenn das System in Gebrauch ist; einen zweiten Vorläuferbereich (16, 116, 316), in den ein zweites Vorläufergas, das sich von dem ersten Vorläufergas unterscheidet, eingeleitet wird, wenn das System in Gebrauch ist; einen Isolierungsbereich (20, 120, 320), der zwischen den ersten und zweiten Vorläuferbereich eingefügt ist und in den ein Inertgas eingeleitet wird, wenn das System in Gebrauch ist, wobei der Isolierungsbereich eine Reihe strömungsbeschränkender Durchgangswege (54, 56, 154, 156, 354, 356) aufweist, die sich in den ersten und zweiten Vorläuferbereich öffnen und dazu angeordnet sind, eine Reihe von Wegen vorzusehen, entlang denen ein flexibles Substrat (12, 112, 312) eingezogen ist, so dass es sich zwischen dem ersten Vorläuferbereich und dem zweiten Vorläuferbereich mehrere Male und jedes Mal durch den Isolierungsbereich rückwärts und vorwärts bewegt; und einen Substrattransportmechanismus 360), mit:\n\n(64,\n\nmehreren ersten Wendeführungen 164, 364), die entlang des ersten Vorläuferbereichs beabstandet sind, wobei zumindest einige der ersten Wendeführungen dazu ausgelegt sind, das Substrat während einer Änderung der Bewegungsrichtung des Substrats in Richtung des zweiten Vorläuferbereichs zu stützen, und mehreren zweiten Wendeführungen (66, 166, 366), die entlang des zweiten Vorläu-\n\nmonolayer of the first precursor gas adsorbs to the surface of the substrate during transit of the during a subsequent transit of the through the second precursor zone the second precursor gas reacts with the adsorbed first precursor at the surface of the substrate, to thereby deposit a thin film on the substrate; introducing an inert gas into the isolation zone; and generating a first pressure differential between the isolation zone and the first precursor zone and a second pressure differential between the isolation zone and the second precursor zone, the pressure differentials sufficient to inhibit migration of the first and second precursor gases out of the respective first and second precursor zones and mixing of the first and second precursor gases within one of the zones, thereby inhibiting reactions within the zones between nonadsorbed amounts of the first and second precursor gases.\n\n- 13. The method of claim 12, further comprising guiding the substrate through a third precursor zone (90) 1 into which a third precursor gas different from the second precursor gas is introduced.\n- 14. The method of any one of claims 12 or 13, in which generating the pressure differentials includes injecting the inert gas into the passageways.\n- 15. The method of any one of claims 12 to 14, in which the guiding of the substrate back and forth between the first and second precursor zones includes continuously advancing the substrate along a serpentine transport path.\n- 16. The method of any one of claims 12 to 15, further comprising adjusting a length of at least some of the transits through the first precursor zone.\n- 17. The method of any one of claims 12 to 16, further comprising:\n\nexhausting a flow of the first precursor gas from the first precursor zone; and trapping at least a portion of the exhausted first precursor gas.\n\n- 18. The method of claim 17, further comprising recycling the trapped first precursor gas into the first precursor zone.", + "recall": 0.7894736842105263, + "true_md": "19 \n\nEP 2 000 008 B1\n\n20 \n\nintroducing an inert gas into the isolation zone; and\n\ngenerating a first pressure differential between the isolation zone and the first precursor zone and a second pressure differential between the isolation zone and the second precursor zone, the pressure differentials sufficient to inhibit mi- gration of the first and second precursor gases out of the respective first and second precursor zones and mixing of thefirst and secondprecur- sor gases within one of the zones, thereby in- hibiting reactions withinthezonesbetweennon- adsorbed amounts of the first and second pre- cursor gases.\n\neinen ersten Vorläuferbereich (14, 114, 314), in den ein erstes Vorläufergas eingeleitet wird, wenn das System in Gebrauch ist; einen zweiten Vorläuferbereich (16, 116, 316), in den ein zweites Vorläufergas, das sich von dem ersten Vorläufergas unterscheidet, einge- leitet wird, wenn das System in Gebrauch ist; einen Isolierungsbereich(20,120,320), der zwi- schen den ersten und zweiten Vorläuferbereich eingefügt ist und in den ein Inertgas eingeleitet wird, wenn das System in Gebrauch ist, wobei der Isolierungsbereich eine Reihe strömungs- beschränkender Durchgangswege (54, 56, 154, 156, 354, 356) aufweist, die sich in den ersten und zweiten Vorläuferbereich öffnen und dazu angeordnet sind, eine Reihe von Wegen vorzu- sehen, entlangdenen ein flexiblesSubstrat(12, 112, 312) eingezogen ist, so dass es sich zwi- schen dem ersten Vorläuferbereich und dem zweiten Vorläuferbereich mehrere Male und je- des Maldurchden Isolierungsbereich rückwärts und vorwärts bewegt; und\n\neinen Substrattransportmechanismus (60, 360), mit:\n\nmehreren ersten Wendeführungen (64, 164,364),dieentlangdeserstenVorläufer- bereichs beabstandet sind, wobei zumin- desteinigeder erstenWendeführungen da- zuausgelegt sind, dasSubstratwährend ei- ner Änderung der Bewegungsrichtung des Substrats in Richtung des zweiten Vorläu- ferbereichs zu stützen, und\n\nexhausting a flow of the first precursor gas from the first precursor zone; and\n\ntrapping at least a portion of the exhausted first precursor gas.\n\nmehreren zweiten Wendeführungen (66, 166, 366), die entlang des zweiten Vorläu-\n\n- 19. The method of any one of claims 12 to 18, further comprising heating at least one of the first and sec- ond precursor zones.\n\n- 20. The method of any one of claims 12 to 19, further comprising heating the substrate.\n\n- 21. The method of any one of claims 12 to 20, further comprising introducing a radical into at least one of the precursor zones.\n\n- 22. The method of any one of claims 12 to 21, in which the first precursor zone, the second precursor zone, and the isolation zone operate at approximately at- mospheric pressures.\n\n- 1. System (10, 110, 310) zum Abscheiden einer dün- nen Schicht auf einem flexiblen Substrat (12, 112, 312), umfassend:\n\n- 13. The method of claim 12, further comprising guiding the substrate through a third precursor zone ( 190) into which a third precursor gas different from the second precursor gas is introduced.\n\n- 14. The method of any one of claims 12 or 13, in which generating the pressure differentials includes inject- ing the inert gas into the passageways.\n\n- 15. The method of any one of claims 12 to 14, in which the guiding of the substrate back and forth between the first and second precursor zones includes con- tinuously advancing the substrate along a serpentine transport path.\n\n- 16. The method of any one of claims 12 to 15, further comprising adjusting a length of at least some of the transits through the first precursor zone.\n\n- 17. The method of any one of claims 12 to 16, further comprising:\n\n- 18. The methodofclaim 17,furthercomprising recycling thetrapped first precursor gas intothefirst precursor zone.\n\n## Patentansprüche\n\n11\n\n5 10 isolation zone (20, 120, 320) that is interposed between the first and second precursor zones, so that the substrate transits through the first and second precursor zones multiple times, a monolayer of the first precursor gas adsorbs to the surface of the substrate during transit of the substrate through the first precursor zone, and during a subsequent transit of the substrat e through the second precursor zone the second precursor gasreactswith the adsorbed first pre- cursor atthesurface ofthesubstrate,tothereby deposit a thin film on the substrate;" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7858169075189908, + "doc_id": "8ab9f0f6d4ed960c6e7b14edd0d86d7614e757c251300a3dc2578930a891b390", + "edit_distance": 0.1682991985752449, + "f1_score": 0.8276797829036634, + "meteor": 0.796113790132299, + "precision": 0.8918128654970761, + "pred_md": "9\n\n10\n\nEP 1 499 943 B1\n\nto the highest level of performance 204 . However, the processing load may not increased thus decreasing the actual percent CPU utilization 201 from, for example 50% to 48% CPU utilization 201 . In one embodiment, a more rapid transition for prioritized events occurs since they are asynchronous and often happen when the system is \"ready\" for more work (idle.)\n\n[0040] In one embodiment, a user may increase the processing time for software-itiated in events. For instance, an Excel chart and graph would likely compute and re-graph more quickly as a result of a user depressing a key on the keyboard. The occurrence of the user event causes the algorithm to immediately transition to higher levels of performance irrespective of the actual average percent CPU utilization. Thus in one embodiment, even during a software initiated processing task, such as the calculation for the Excel spreadsheet, the user may increase the processing rate of those equations by simply depressing a key.\n\n[0041] The computing system can be made aware of user events, such as keystrokes, mouse movement, joystick inputs, mouse clicks, human commands via microphone, etc. In one embodiment, the programming environment within which the processor is operating defines the user event. In this embodiment, the operating environment may define what event constitutes a user event and how to detect that event.\n\n[0042] In one embodiment, the algorithm to control the performance state of the processor may reside in the operating software. In one embodiment, the algorithm to control the performance state of the processor may reside in the B asic nput I O utput System (BIOS). The BIOS can be an essential set of routines in a personal computer, which is stored on a chip and provides an interface between the operating system and the hardware of the computer. In this embodiment, depending on the programming language and system architecture, the BIOS may be directly aware that a user event has occurred or may receive a notification, for example, from the operating system that a user event has just occurred. In one embodiment, the algorithm to control the performance state of the processor may reside as an application program, an executable program module, or other similar program. In this embodiment, the application program, an executable program module, or other similar program may directly detect when a prioritized event such as a user event occurs or receive a notification from the operating system that the prioritized event occurred.\n\n[0043] In one embodiment, the threshold to trigger a transition in non-prioritized events may be a specific average percent utilization of the CPU, such as 85%, transitions based upon the idle vs. active ratio, or any other similar predefined threshold.\n\n[0044] In one embodiment, the algorithm controlling the performance state of the processor may be split into two discrete algorithms. A first algorithm to control transitioning to a higher performance state. Likewise, a second algorithm to control transitioning to a lower perform-\n\n5\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n6\n\nance state. In one embodiment, the processor may perform at the higher performance state for an extended sustainable period of time. In this embodiment, the highest performance state in combination with the heat dissipation capacity of the system is such that either extended performance will not thermally damage any component within the system or provisions for an override mode are implemented. In one embodiment, the processor may perform at the higher performance state for a momentary or transitory period of time due to thermal considerations.\n\n[0045] Figure 3 illustrates a graph of various performance states of one embodiment of an integrated circuit having multiple performance states including the performance state of operating at a higher state of performance for a transient period of time. In one embodiment, the higher performance state of the processor may not be sustained for extended periods of time without potentially causing a failure in the system due to overheating a component. The graph illustrates the operational frequency of the processor over time. Three performance states are shown, such as at 500 MHz, the idle state of performance 302 , at 1000 MHz, the thermal maximum state of performance 304 , and at 2000 MHz, the actual highest state of performance 306 referred to as the peak virtual MHz. Multiple user events 308 occur during this time period on the graph as well as nonuser events 310 .\n\n[0046] Processing requests initiated by a non-er us event 310 , such as application program, may only transition the processor to the thermal higher state of performance 304 . The processor and other system components may operate at the thermal maximum state of performance 304 for sustained periods of time without failure due to thermal considerations. A thermal guard band 312 exists between the actual higher state of performance 306 and the thermal maximum state of performance 304 . Prolonged operation at operating frequencies and voltages above the thermal maximum state of performance 304 could damage thermally sensitive components such as integrated components.\n\n[0047] However, the occurrence or repetition of user events 308 occurs very slowly in respect to processing time. Many hundreds or thousands of non-user event processing requests 310 may be responded to by a processor in the time frame it takes for a user to depress a first key and then a second key. Usually, a large relative lag time exists between a first user event 316 and a second user event 318 . The large time lag in between user events 308 generally allows the heat dissipation capacity of the computing system to remove the extra heat generated by transitioning to the actual maximum state of performance 306 in response to the first user event 316 prior to the processor transitioning again to the actual maximum state of performance 306 in response to the second user event 318.\n\n[0048] However, some design safety precautions can be added. In one embodiment, the transition to the actual maximum state of performance 306 is for a transitory period that ensures no component failures will occur due", + "recall": 0.7721518987341772, + "true_md": "9 \n\nEP 1 499 943 B1\n\n10 \n\nto the highest level of performance 204 . However, the processing load may not increased thus decreasing the actualpercent CPUutilization 201 from,forexample 50% to 48% CPU utilization 201 . In one embodiment, a more rapid transition for prioritized events occurs since they are asynchronous and often happen when the system is \"ready\" for more work (idle.)\n\n[0040] In one embodiment, a user may increase the processing time for software- initiated events. For in - stance, an Excel chart and graph would likely compute and re-graph more quickly as a result of a user depress- ing a key on the keyboard. The occurrence of the user event causes the algorithm to immediately transition to higher levels of performance irrespective of the actual average percent CPU utilization. Thus in one embodi- ment, even during a software initiated processing task, such as the calculation for the Excel spreadsheet, the user mayincreasetheprocessingrate ofthoseequations by simply depressing a key.\n\n[0041] The computing system can be made aware of user events,such as keystrokes,mouse movement,joy- stick inputs, mouse clicks, human commands via micro- phone, etc. In one embodiment, the programming envi- ronment within which the processor is operating defines the user event. In this embodiment, the operating envi- ronment may define what event constitutes a user event and how to detect that event.\n\n[0042] In oneembodiment, the algorithmto controlthe performance state of the processor may reside in the operating software. In one embodiment, the algorithm to control the performance state of the processor may re- side in the B asic I nput O utput System (BIOS). The BIOS can be an essential set of routines in a personal compu- ter, which is stored on a chip and provides an interface between the operating system and the hardware of the computer. In this embodiment, depending on the pro- gramming language and system architecture, the BIOS may be directly aware that a user event has occurred or may receive a notification, for example, from the operat- ing system that a user event has just occurred. In one embodiment, the algorithm to control the performance state of the processor may reside as an application pro- gram, an executable program module, or other similar program. In this embodiment, the application program, an executableprogram module, or other similar program may directly detect when a prioritized event such as a user event occurs or receive a notification from the op- erating system that the prioritized event occurred.\n\n[0043] In one embodiment, the threshold to trigger a transition in non-prioritized events may be a specific av- erage percent utilization of the CPU, such as 85%, tran- sitions based upon the idle vs. active ratio, or any other similar predefined threshold.\n\n[0044] In one embodiment, the algorithm controlling the performance state of the processor may be split into two discrete algorithms. A first algorithm to control tran- sitioning to a higher performance state. Likewise, a sec- ond algorithm to control transitioning to a lower perform-\n\nance state. In one embodiment, the processor may per- form at the higher performance state for an extended sustainable period of time. In this embodiment, the high- est performance state in combination with the heat dis- sipationcapacityofthe systemissuch thateither extend- ed performance will not thermally damage any compo- nent withinthesystemor provisionsfor an overridemode are implemented.In one embodiment, theprocessormay performat the higher performancestate for a momentary ortransitoryperiodoftimedue tothermalconsiderations.\n\n[0045] Figure 3 illustrates a graph of various perform- ance states of one embodiment of an integrated circuit having multiple performance states including the per- formance state of operating at a higher state of perform- ance for a transient period of time. In one embodiment, the higher performance state of the processor may not be sustained for extended periods of time without poten- tially causing a failure in the system due to overheating a component. The graph illustrates the operational fre- quency of the processor over time. Three performance states are shown, such as at 500 MHz, the idle state of performance 302 , at 1000 MHz, the thermal maximum state of performance 304 , and at 2000 MHz, the actual highest state of performance 306 referred to as the peak virtual MHz. Multiple user events 308 occur during this timeperiodon the graph aswellasnon- user events 310 .\n\n[0046] Processing requests initiated by a non- user event 310 , such as application program, may only tran- sition the processor to the thermal higher state of per- formance 304 . The processor and other system compo- nents may operate at the thermal maximum state of per- formance 304 for sustained periodsoftimewithoutfailure dueto thermal considerations. A thermalguard band 312 exists between the actual higher state of performance 306 and the thermalmaximumstateof performance 304 . Prolonged operation at operating frequencies and volt- ages above the thermal maximum state of performance 304 could damagethermally sensitive componentssuch as integrated components.\n\n[0047] However, the occurrence or repetition of user events 308 occurs very slowly in respect to processing time. Many hundreds or thousands of non-user event processingrequests 310 maybe responded to by a proc- essor in the time frame it takes for a user to depress a first key and then a second key. Usually, a large relative lag time exists between a first user event 316 and a sec- ond user event 318 . The large time lag in between user events 308 generally allowsthe heat dissipation capacity of the computing system to remove the extra heat gen- erated by transitioning to the actual maximum state of performance 306 in response to the first user event 316 prior to the processor transitioning again to the actual maximum state of performance 306 in response to the second user event 318.\n\n[0048] However, some design safety precautions can be added.In oneembodiment, the transitionto the actual maximum state of performance 306 is for a transitory periodthat ensuresno component failures willoccur due\n\n6" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "3d5e8db56570d44d8bc1464de521d0a312d8305af30944e678cb6512897a4c8b", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9976851851851852, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "EP 2 000 008 B1\n\n16", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "EP 2 000 008 B1\n\n16" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7863578514581034, + "doc_id": "f30f528620c61d45c78b8701f8447756f89887410bdbee3ee8ec23e00541c7e3", + "edit_distance": 0.16078753076292043, + "f1_score": 0.8382352941176471, + "meteor": 0.8582592800271063, + "precision": 0.9023746701846965, + "pred_md": "7\n\n8\n\nEP 2 000 008 B1\n\nprecursor zones via pump 58 or another source of suction. Optionally, pump 58 may be coupled to all zones, with flow from the various zones being controlled to maintain the pressure differential. The migration of precursors from the precursor zones 14, 16 into the isolation zone 20 may also be prevented or limited by controlling both the relative flow rates of gases into the zones and pumping speeds from the zones, through the use of flow control valves or other flow control devices. A control system (not shown) responsive to pressure sensors in the various zones may also be utilized to control gas injection and exhaust flow rates to help maintain a desired pressure differential.\n\n[0025] In one example, isolation zone 20 operates at a pressure of approximately (5 millitorr) (i.e., the inert gas injection pressure may be 0,67 Pa (5 millitorr)), and pressure differentials of approximately 0.013 Pa (0.1 millitorr)) are maintained between isolation zone 20 and each of the precursor zones 14, 16, so that an operating pressure of approximately (0.65 Pa) (4.9 millitorr) is maintained in precursor zones 14, 16 by way of suction applied to precursor zones 14, 16 by pump 58. Lower and significantly higher pressure differentials may also be used in some embodiments. The necessary pressure differential will be affected by the geometry of passageways 54, 56 (including height, width, and tunnel length, if applicable), the headroom and margins around substrate 12 within passageways 54, 56, the transport speed of substrate 12, the surface roughness of substrate 12 and passageways 54, 56, and the location at which inert gas is injected, such as direct injection into passageways 54, 56 or generally into inert gas chamber 50. Other factors, such as operating temperature, pressure, precursor species, and substrate type, may also affect the amount of pressure differential necessary to inhibit or prevent migration of precursor gases through passageways.\n\n5\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\n40\n\n[0026] In some ALD processes, precursor gases having a very low vapor pressure are utilized. To facilitate pumping and diffusion control, inert gas may be mixed with such precursor gases, either before or after introduction of the precursor gases into the system 10, to control the pressure within precursor zones 14, 16.\n\n[0027] In some embodiments, it may be desirable to equalize the pressures, or to deliberately mismatch the pressures in two or more precursor zones to optimize growth conditions, or improve utilization of precursor materials. It may also be desirable to pump two or more of the zones separately, and introduce inert gas into the precursor zones separately to further reduce zone migration; for instance, a cross- flow condition may be used to flow precursor in a direction orthogonal to the passageways 54, 56 (between first and second ends 72, 84). Inert gas may be introduced locally within or near passageways 54, 56, to inhibit gases from either adjacent zone from crossing through passageways 54, 56. If further isolation is necessary, multiple differentially-umped and p purged zones may be used in series, with flowrestricting passageways or wiper valve isolation between zones and\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n5\n\nexhaust paths from each of the zones.\n\n[0028] As described above, the precursor zones 14, 16 may be pumped to achieve an isolating pressure differential between the isolation zone and the precursor zones. In one configuration (not shown), separate pumps could be used for each of the zones 14, 16, 20, preventing mixing of precursor gases in the pump stack and the attendant growth of material or reaction byproducts in any of the pumping lines, thereby preventing powder and residue from accumulating and clogging the pump stack. Another way to inhibit undesirable material deposits in the pump stack is to trap exhaust precursors using a precursor trap 59, such as a simple inline liquid nitrogen cooled trap, for example model TLR4XI150QF sold by Kurt J. Lesker Company (www.lesker.com). Similar precursor traps may be placed in each of the precursor exhaust lines upstream of their junction before the pump 58. By using inert gases and precursor materials having different vapor pressures at a given temperature, it may be possible to trap and reclaim up to approximately 100% of exhaust precursor gases, while passing inert gases to the pump stack. And because different precursors are not mixed in the zones, the precursor purity is maintained, enabling up to 100% utilization of precursor materials. Once filled, traps 59 may be turned into precursor sources by replacing the liquid nitrogen with a heated liquid or by activating heating elements outside the trap, then reversing the pumping direction or closing an isolation valve (not shown) between pump 58 and trap 59. The particular operating temperature of trap/ source would depend on the precursor being trapped and its vapor pressure. A liquid nitrogen trap, for example, may operate at lower than 100° Kelvin. Additional trap/ source configurations are described below with reference to FIG. 4.\n\n[0029] A substrate transport mechanism 60 of system 10 includes multiple turning guides for guiding substrate 12, including a set of first turning guides 64 spaced apart along first precursor zone 14 and a second set of turning guides 66 spaced apart along second precursor zone 16. Turning guides 64, 66 cooperate to define an undulating transport path of substrate 12 as it advances through system 10. The substrate transport mechanism 60 may include a payout spool 72 for paying out substrate 12 from a first coil (input roll 74) for receipt at a first end 76 of isolation zone 20, vessel 30, or one of the precursor zones 14, 16. The substrate transport mechanism 60 may further include a take-up spool 82 for receiving the coated substrate 12 from a second end 84 of isolation zone 20, vessel 30, or one of the precursor zones 14, 16 opposite first end 76, and coiling the substrate 12 into a take-up roll 86 or second coil. Payout spool 72 and/or take-up spool 82 may be located within vessel 30, such as within isolation zone 20, as depicted in FIGS. 1-2. Alternatively, payout and take-up spools 72, 82 may be located outside of vessel 30 (i.e., outside of isolation zone 20 and first and second precursor zones 14, 16), as depicted in FIGS. 3 and 4. Input and take-p rolls 74, 86 u will change diameter during operation of system 10, and", + "recall": 0.782608695652174, + "true_md": "7 \n\nEP 2 000 008 B1\n\n8 \n\nprecursor zones via pump 58 or another source of suc- tion. Optionally, pump 58 may be coupled to all zones, withflowfromthe various zones beingcontrolled tomain- tainthe pressure differential. Themigration of precursors from the precursor zones 14, 16 into the isolation zone 20 may also be prevented or limited by controlling both the relative flow rates of gases into the zones and pump- ingspeedsfromthezones, through the use offlowcontrol valves or other flow control devices. A control system (not shown) responsive to pressure sensors in the vari- ous zones may also be utilized to control gas injection and exhaust flow rates to help maintain a desired pres- sure differential.\n\n[0025] In one example, isolation zone 20 operates at a pressure ofapproximately(5 millitorr)(i.e., the inert gas injection pressure maybe0,67Pa (5 millitorr)), andpres- sure differentialsof approximately0.013Pa (0.1millitorr)) are maintained between isolation zone 20 and each of theprecursor zones14, 16, so thatan operatingpressure of approximately (0.65 Pa) (4.9 millitorr) is maintained in precursor zones 14, 16 by way of suction applied to pre- cursor zones 14, 16 by pump 58. Lower and significantly higher pressure differentials may also be used in some embodiments. The necessary pressure differential will be affected by the geometry of passageways 54, 56 (in- cluding height, width, and tunnel length, if applicable), the headroom and margins around substrate 12 within passageways 54, 56, the transport speed of substrate 12, the surface roughness of substrate 12 and passage- ways 54, 56, and the location at which inert gas is inject- ed, such as direct injection into passageways 54, 56 or generally into inert gas chamber 50. Other factors, such as operating temperature, pressure, precursor species, and substrate type, may also affect the amount of pres- sure differential necessary to inhibit or prevent migration of precursor gases through passageways.\n\n40 [0026] In some ALD processes, precursor gases hav- ing a very low vapor pressure are utilized. To facilitate pumping and diffusion control, inert gas may be mixed with such precursor gases, either before or after intro- duction of the precursor gases into the system 10, to control the pressure within precursor zones 14, 16.\n\n[0027] In some embodiments, it may be desirable to equalize the pressures, or to deliberately mismatch the pressures in two or more precursor zones to optimize growth conditions, or improve utilization of precursor ma- terials. It may also be desirable to pump two or more of the zones separately, and introduce inert gas into the precursor zones separately to further reduce zone mi- gration; for instance, a cross- flow condition may be used to flowprecursor ina direction orthogonal to the passage- ways54, 56 (betweenfirst and secondends72, 84). Inert gas may be introduced locally within or near passage- ways 54, 56, to inhibit gases from either adjacent zone fromcrossingthrough passageways54, 56. If further iso- lation is necessary, multiple differentially- pumped and purgedzones may beusedin series, with flow- restricting passagewaysorwipervalve isolation between zonesand\n\nexhaust paths from each of the zones.\n\n[0028] As described above, the precursor zones 14, 16 may be pumped to achieve an isolating pressure dif- ferential between the isolation zone and the precursor zones. In one configuration(not shown), separate pumps couldbeusedfor eachofthe zones 14, 16, 20, preventing mixing of precursor gases in the pump stack and the at- tendant growth of material or reaction byproducts in any of the pumping lines, therebypreventingpowderandres- idue from accumulating and clogging the pump stack. Another way to inhibit undesirable material deposits in thepump stackisto trap exhaust precursors usinga pre- cursor trap 59, such as a simple inline liquid nitrogen cooled trap, for example model TLR4XI150QF sold by Kurt J. Lesker Company (www.lesker.com). Similar pre- cursor traps may be placed in each of the precursor ex- haust lines upstream of their junction before the pump 58. By using inert gases and precursor materials having different vapor pressures at a given temperature, it may be possible to trap andreclaimup to approximately100% of exhaust precursor gases, while passing inert gases to the pump stack. And because different precursors are notmixedinthe zones,theprecursor purityismaintained, enabling up to 100% utilization of precursor materials. Oncefilled, traps 59may beturned into precursor sourc- es by replacing the liquid nitrogen with a heated liquid or by activating heating elements outside the trap, then re- versing the pumping direction or closing an isolation valve (not shown) between pump 58 and trap 59. The particular operating temperatureof trap/ sourcewould de- pend on the precursor being trapped and its vapor pres- sure. A liquid nitrogen trap, for example, may operate at lower than 100° Kelvin. Additional trap/source configu- rations are described below with reference to FIG. 4.\n\n[0029] A substrate transport mechanism 60 of system 10 includes multiple turning guides for guiding substrate 12, including a set of firstturning guides 64 spacedapart along first precursor zone 14 and a second set of turning guides66 spaced apart alongsecond precursor zone 16. Turning guides 64, 66 cooperate to define an undulating transport path of substrate 12 as it advances through system 10. The substrate transport mechanism 60 may include a payout spool 72 for paying out substrate 12 from a first coil (input roll 74) for receipt at a first end 76 of isolation zone 20, vessel 30, or one of the precursor zones 14, 16. The substrate transport mechanism 60 may further include a take-up spool 82 for receiving the coated substrate 12 from a second end 84 of isolation zone 20, vessel 30, or one of the precursor zones 14, 16 opposite first end 76, and coiling the substrate 12 into a take-up roll 86 or second coil. Payout spool 72 and/or take-up spool 82 may be located within vessel 30, such as within isolation zone 20, as depicted in FIGS. 1-2. Alternatively, payout and take-up spools 72, 82 may be locatedoutsideofvessel 30(i.e.,outside ofisolation zone 20 and first and second precursor zones 14, 16), as de- picted in FIGS. 3 and 4. Input and take- up rolls 74, 86 will change diameter during operation of system 10, and\n\n5" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.15956399774635494, + "doc_id": "4823761bc09f3c01a3a93971de0eaf9ad547763eaac8580b0025246c6827bd99", + "edit_distance": 0.8536585365853658, + "f1_score": 0.5, + "meteor": 0.6892975663716814, + "precision": 0.3333333333333333, + "pred_md": "US 2020/0050106 Al\n\nFeb. 13, 2020\n\n-continued\n\n-continued\n\nLUMO: -1.56\n\nTg: 104\n\n:t\n\nLUMO: -0.39 Tg: 80\n\n+\n\nLUMO:-0.78 Tg: 108\n\nLUMO:-0.78 Tg: 108\n\nM-14\n\nM-15\n\nM-16\n\nM-17\n\n46", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "US 2020/0050106 Al \n\n46 \n\nFeb. 13, 2020" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9457993095863959, + "doc_id": "218e664e4b03da6d684cd5898985bd4ab4e6157a51996467877ba73bbaee667f", + "edit_distance": 0.0575, + "f1_score": 0.9532710280373832, + "meteor": 0.9689350660273874, + "precision": 0.9532710280373832, + "pred_md": "103\n\nThe polar group which may be possessed by the repeating unit having a polar group may be a carbonate group such as a cyclic carbonate ester structure, and the resin (A) prefer› ably contain a repeating unit having a cyclic carbonate ester structure.\n\nThe repeating unit having a cyclic carbonate ester struc› ture is preferably the repeating unit represented by Formula (A-1).\n\n5\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\nIn Formula (A-1 ), RA 1 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group.\n\nIf n is 2 or more, RA 2 's each independently represents a 40 substituent.\n\nA represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.\n\nZ represents a atomic group forming a monocyclid or polycyclic structure together with a group represented by -O----C(=O)-O- in the formula.\n\nn represents an integer of 0 or more.\n\nFormula (A-1) will be described in detail.\n\nThe alkyl group represented by RA 1 may have a substitu› ent such as a fluorine atom. RA 1 represents preferably a hydrogen atom, a methyl group or a trifluormethyl group, and more preferably a methyl group.\n\nThe substituent represented by RA 2 is, for example, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group, an amino group and an alkoxycarbonylamino group. The substituent is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, for example, a straight alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms such as a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group and a butyl group; and a branched alkyl group having 3 to 5 carbon atoms such as an isopropyl group, an isobutyl group and at-butyl group. An alkyl group may have a substituent such as a hydroxyl group.\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n60\n\nn represents the number of substituents, and is an integer of 0 or more. For example, n is preferably Oto 4, and more preferably 0.\n\nExamples of the a divalent linking group represented by 65 A may include an alkylene group, a cycloalkylene group, an ester bond, an amide bond, an ether bond, an urethane bond,\n\nUS 9,423,690 B2\n\n104\n\nan urea bond, or combination thereof. Examples of the alkylene group may include preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, and for example a methylene group, an ethylene group, an propylene group, and the like.\n\nIn one aspect of the present invention, A is preferably a single bond, or an alkylene group.\n\nThe moncyclic group containing ---O-C(=O)---0-, represented by Z is, for example, a 5- to 7-membered ring in which nA=2 to 4 in the cyclic carbonate ester represented by the following Formula (a), and preferably a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered ring (nA=2 or 3), and more preferably a 5-membered ring (nA=2).\n\nThe polycyclic group containing -O----C(=O)-O› represented by Z may, for example, be a structure in which a cyclic carbonate ester represented by the following Formula (a) are bound with 1 or 2 or more other ring structure to form a condensed ring or to form a spiro ring. \"Other ring structures\" capable of forming a condensed ring or spiro ring may be an alicyclid hydrocarbon group, an aromatic hydro› carbon group or a heterocyclic ring.\n\nThe monomer corresponding to the repeating unit repre› sented by Formula (A-1) may be synthesized by a conven› tionally known method described in, for example, Tetrahe› dron Letters, Vol. 27, No. 32 p. 3741(1986), Organic Letters, Vol. 4, No. 15 p. 2561(2002), and the like.\n\nIn the resin (A), the repeating unit represented by Formula (A-1) may be contained either alone or in a combination of two or more thereof.\n\nHereinafter, specific examples of the repeating unit hav› ing a cyclic carbonate ester structure are shown below, but the present invention is not limited thereto.\n\nIn addition, RA 1 in the following specific examples has the same meaning as RA 1 in Formula (A-1).", + "recall": 0.9532710280373832, + "true_md": "103 \n\nUS 9,423,690 B2 \n\n104 \n\nThe polar group which may be possessed by the repeating unit having a polar group may be a carbonate group such as a cyclic carbonate ester structure, and the resin (A) prefer› ably contain a repeating unit having a cyclic carbonate ester structure. \n\nThe repeating unit having a cyclic carbonate ester struc› ture is preferably the repeating unit represented by Formula (A-1). \n\nIn Formula (A-1 ), RA $^{1 }$represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group. \n\nIf n is 2 or more, RA $^{2}$’s each independently represents a substituent. \n\nA represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. \n\nZ represents a atomic group forming a monocyclid or polycyclic structure together with a group represented by -O----C(=O)-O- in the formula. \n\nn represents an integer of 0 or more. \n\nFormula (A-1) will be described in detail. \n\nThe alkyl group represented by RA $^{1 }$may have a substitu› ent such as a fluorine atom. RA 1 represents preferably a hydrogen atom, a methyl group or a trifluormethyl group, and more preferably a methyl group. \n\nThe substituent represented by RA 2 is, for example, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group, an amino group and an alkoxycarbonylamino group. The substituent is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, for example, a straight alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms such as a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group and a butyl group; and a branched alkyl group having 3 to 5 carbon atoms such as an isopropyl group, an isobutyl group and at-butyl group. An alkyl group may have a substituent such as a hydroxyl group. \n\nn represents the number of substituents, and is an integer of 0 or more. For example, n is preferably Oto 4, and more preferably 0. \n\nExamples of the a divalent linking group represented by 65 A may include an alkylene group, a cycloalkylene group, an ester bond, an amide bond, an ether bond, an urethane bond, \n\nan urea bond, or combination thereof. Examples of the alkylene group may include preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, and for example a methylene group, an ethylene group, an propylene group, and the like. \n\nIn one aspect of the present invention, A is preferably a single bond, or an alkylene group. \n\nThe moncyclic group containing ---O-C(=O)---0-, represented by Z is, for example, a 5- to 7-membered ring in which nA=2 to 4 in the cyclic carbonate ester represented by the following Formula (a), and preferably a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered ring (nA=2 or 3), and more preferably a 5-membered ring (nA=2). \n\nThe polycyclic group containing -O----C(=O)-O› represented by Z may, for example, be a structure in which a cyclic carbonate ester represented by the following For- mula (a) are bound with 1 or 2 or more other ring structure to form a condensed ring or to form a spiro ring. \"Other ring structures\" capable of forming a condensed ring or spiro ring may be an alicyclid hydrocarbon group, an aromatic hydro› carbon group or a heterocyclic ring. \n\nThe monomer corresponding to the repeating unit repre› sented by Formula (A-1) may be synthesized by a conven› tionally known method described in, for example, Tetrahe› dron Letters, Vol. 27, No. 32 p. 3741(1986), Organic Letters, Vol. 4, No. 15 p. 2561(2002), and the like. \n\nIn the resin (A), the repeating unit represented by Formula (A-1) may be contained either alone or in a combination of two or more thereof. \n\nHereinafter, specific examples of the repeating unit hav› ing a cyclic carbonate ester structure are shown below, but the present invention is not limited thereto. \n\nIn addition, RA $^{1 }$in the following specific examples has the same meaning as RA 1 in Formula (A-1). \n\n-continued Rx" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "7bacc6a70a22093d44ff622e5eaa03eaee8f8ce1edb131d00467d2e2faab6ded", + "edit_distance": 0.9, + "f1_score": 0.3529411764705882, + "meteor": 0.6222488995598239, + "precision": 0.2222222222222222, + "pred_md": "37\n\n-continued\n\nUS 7,344,821 B2\n\n11\n\n12\n\n13\n\n14\n\n15\n\n16\n\n17\n\n40\n\n18\n\n19\n\n20\n\n60\n\n65\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n5\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\n38\n\n-continued", + "recall": 0.8571428571428571, + "true_md": "38 \n\nUS 7,344,821 B2 \n\n37 \n\n-continued \n\n-continued ~0-to" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.23793665482062612, + "doc_id": "844c670039037b64923937a37de5e458b850b0ef6aa5771d6ffbde0e95190545", + "edit_distance": 0.8, + "f1_score": 0.6, + "meteor": 0.8869701726844584, + "precision": 0.42857142857142855, + "pred_md": "131\n\n132\n\n-continued\n\n-continued\n\nUS 9,423,690 B2\n\n5\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\n55", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "US 9,423,690 B2 \n\n131 \n\n132 \n\n-continued \n\n-continued" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9191975369904212, + "doc_id": "e5263ee691ae74aed8ea610c119ad0414ad3ca21f3b6430a1ba45e1bcedf4374", + "edit_distance": 0.07387140902872777, + "f1_score": 0.9490616621983914, + "meteor": 0.9348408459056825, + "precision": 0.9806094182825484, + "pred_md": "US 2020/0050106 Al\n\n## DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS\n\n[0039] Hereinafter, an example of embodiments for car› rying out the present invention will be described.\n\n[0040] In the present specification, a numerical range expressed using \"to\" is used in a meaning of a range that includes the preceding and succeeding numerical values of \"to\" as the lower limit value and the upper limit value, respectively.\n\n[0041] Moreover, in citations for a group (atomic group) in the present specification, in a case where the group is denoted without specifying whether it is substituted or unsubstituted, the group includes both a group not contain› ing a substituent and a group containing a substituent. For example, an \"alkyl group\" which is not denoted about whether it is substituted or unsubstituted includes not only an alkyl group not containing a substituent (unsubstituted alkyl group), but also an alkyl group containing a substituent (substituted alkyl group).\n\n[0042] \"(Meth)acryl\" in the present specification collec› tively refers to acryl and methacryl, and means \"at least one of acryl or methacryl\". Similarly, \"(meth)acrylic acid\" means \"at least one of acrylic acid or methacrylic acid\".\n\n[0043] In the present specification, the weight-average molecular weight (Mw), the number-average molecular weight (Mn), and the dispersity (also referred to as a molecular weight distribution) (Mw/Mn) of a resin are defined as values in terms of polystyrene by means of gel permeation chromatography (GPC) measurement (solvent: tetrahydrofuran, flow amount (amount of a sample injected): 10 µL, columns: TSK gel Multipore HXL-M manufactured by Tosoh Corporation, column temperature: 40° C., flow rate: 1.0 mL/min, detector: differential refractive index detector) using a GPC apparatus (HLC-8120 GPC manu› factured by Tosoh Corporation).\n\n[0044] 1 A is lx1010 m.\n\n[0045] «Photosensitive Composition for EUV Light»\n\n[0046] The photosensitive composition for EUV light of an embodiment of the present invention (hereinafter also referred to as a \"resist composition\") satisfies Conditions 1 and 2 which will be described later. A reason why a desired effect is obtained by satisfying these conditions is shown below.\n\n[0047] EUV light has a wavelength of 13.5 nm, which is a shorter wavelength than that of ArF (wavelength of 193 nm) light or the like, and therefore, the EUV light has a smaller number of photons upon exposure with the same sensitivity. With this, an effect of \"photon shot noise\" that the number of photos is statistically non-uniform is signifi› cant and deterioration in LER is caused. In order to reduce the photon shot noise, a method in which an exposure dose is increased to cause an increase in the number of incident photons is available, but the method is a trade-off with a demand for high sensitivity. Further, a method in which the thickness of a resist film is increased to cause an increase in the number of absorbed photons is also available, but it causes a reduction in a resolution.\n\n[0048] In contrast, according to the present invention, it is found that the problem can be solved by making a pattern thus formed into a thin film while increasing an absorption efficiency of EUV light. In a case where the A value shown in Condition 1 is high, absorption of EUV light of a resist film formed with the resist composition is high, and by satisfying Condition 2, a pattern formed with the resist\n\n2\n\nFeb. 13, 2020\n\ncomposition is made into a thin film. As a result, a Z-factor which is total performance of a resolution, a line edge roughness (LER), and a sensitivity is improved, and also, generation of pattern collapse is suppressed.\n\n[0049] The resist composition satisfies Condition 1. As described above, in a case where the A value defined in Condition 1 is high, the absorption efficiency of EUV light of the resist film formed with the resist composition is increased. The A value represents the absorption efficiency of EUV light of the resist film in terms of a mass ratio.\n\n[0050] Condition 1: The A value determined by Formula (1) is 0.14 or more.\n\n\n\n\n\n[0051] As described, the A value is 0.14 or more, but from the viewpoint that at least one of additional improvement of the Z-factor or additional suppression of pattern collapse is achieved (hereinafter also simply referred to as \"the effect of the present invention is more excellent\"), the A value is preferably 0.16 or more, more preferably 0.18 or more, and particularly preferably 0.20 or more. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but in a case where the A value is extremely high, the transmittance of EUV light of the resist film is lowered, the optical profile in the resist film is deteriorated, as a result, it is difficult to obtain a good pattern shape, and therefore, the upper limit is preferably 0.24 or less, and more preferably 0.22 or less.\n\n[0052] In a case where A is less than 0.14, the Z-factor is usually deteriorated.\n\n[0053] Moreover, in Formula (1), [HJ represents a molar ratio of hydrogen atoms derived from the total solid content with respect to all the atoms of the total solid content in the photosensitive composition for EUV light, [C] represents a molar ratio of carbon atoms derived from the total solid content with respect to all the atoms of the total solid content in the photosensitive composition for EUV light, [NJ rep› resents a molar ratio of nitrogen atoms derived from the total solid content with respect to all the atoms of the total solid content in the photosensitive composition for EUV light, [OJ represents a molar ratio of oxygen atoms derived from the total solid content with respect to all the atoms of the total solid content in the photosensitive composition for EUV light, [FJ represents a molar ratio of fluorine atoms derived from the total solid content with respect to all the atoms of the total solid content in the photosensitive composition for EUV light, [SJ represents a molar ratio of sulfur atoms derived from the total solid content with respect to all the atoms of the total solid content in the photosensitive com› position for EUV light, and [IJ represents a molar ratio of iodine atoms derived from the total solid content with respect to all the atoms of the total solid content in the photosensitive composition for EUV light.\n\n[0054] For example, in a case where the resist composition includes a resin that has an increased polarity by the action of an acid polarity and thus, has an increased solubility in an alkali developer and a decreased solubility in an organic solvent, a photoacid generator, an acid diffusion control agent, and a solvent, the resin, the photoacid generator, and the acid diffusion control agent correspond to the solid content. That is, all the atoms in the total solid content correspond to a sum of all the atoms derived from the resin, all the atoms derived from the photoacid generator, and all the atoms derived from the acid diffusion control agent. For", + "recall": 0.9194805194805195, + "true_md": "US 2020/0050106 Al \n\n2 \n\nFeb. 13, 2020 \n\n## DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS\n\n[0039] Hereinafter, an example of embodiments for car› rying out the present invention will be described. \n\n[0040] In the present specification, a numerical range expressed using \"to\" is used in a meaning of a range that includes the preceding and succeeding numerical values of \"to\" as the lower limit value and the upper limit value, respectively. \n\n[0041] Moreover, in citations for a group (atomic group) in the present specification, in a case where the group is denoted without specifying whether it is substituted or unsubstituted, the group includes both a group not contain› ing a substituent and a group containing a substituent. For example, an \"alkyl group\" which is not denoted about whether it is substituted or unsubstituted includes not only an alkyl group not containing a substituent (unsubstituted alkyl group), but also an alkyl group containing a substituent (substituted alkyl group). \n\n[0042] \"(Meth)acryl\" in the present specification collec› tively refers to acryl and methacryl, and means \"at least one of acryl or methacryl\". Similarly, \"(meth)acrylic acid\" means \"at least one of acrylic acid or methacrylic acid\". \n\n[0043] In the present specification, the weight-average molecular weight (Mw), the number-average molecular weight (Mn), and the dispersity (also referred to as a molecular weight distribution) (Mw/Mn) of a resin are defined as values in terms of polystyrene by means of gel permeation chromatography (GPC) measurement (solvent: tetrahydrofuran, flow amount (amount of a sample injected): 10 µL, columns: TSK gel Multipore HXL-M manufactured by Tosoh Corporation, column temperature: 40° C., flow rate: 1.0 mL/min, detector: differential refractive index detector) using a GPC apparatus (HLC-8120 GPC manu› factured by Tosoh Corporation). A \n\nfactured by Tosoh Corporation). [0044] 1 A is lx10- $^{10 }$m. \n\n[0045] «Photosensitive Composition for EUV Light» \n\n[0046] The photosensitive composition for EUV light of an embodiment of the present invention (hereinafter also referred to as a \"resist composition\") satisfies Conditions 1 and 2 which will be described later. A reason why a desired effect is obtained by satisfying these conditions is shown below. \n\n[0047] EUV light has a wavelength of 13.5 nm, which is a shorter wavelength than that of ArF (wavelength of 193 nm) light or the like, and therefore, the EUV light has a smaller number of photons upon exposure with the same sensitivity. With this, an effect of \"photon shot noise\" that the number of photos is statistically non-uniform is signifi› cant and deterioration in LER is caused. In order to reduce the photon shot noise, a method in which an exposure dose is increased to cause an increase in the number of incident photons is available, but the method is a trade-off with a demand for high sensitivity. Further, a method in which the thickness of a resist film is increased to cause an increase in the number of absorbed photons is also available, but it causes a reduction in a resolution. \n\n[0048] In contrast, according to the present invention, it is found that the problem can be solved by making a pattern thus formed into a thin film while increasing an absorption efficiency of EUV light. In a case where the A value shown in Condition 1 is high, absorption of EUV light of a resist film formed with the resist composition is high, and by satisfying Condition 2, a pattern formed with the resist \n\ncomposition is made into a thin film. As a result, a Z-factor which is total performance of a resolution, a line edge roughness (LER), and a sensitivity is improved, and also, generation of pattern collapse is suppressed. \n\n[0049] The resist composition satisfies Condition 1. As described above, in a case where the A value defined in Condition 1 is high, the absorption efficiency of EUV light of the resist film formed with the resist composition is increased. The A value represents the absorption efficiency of EUV light of the resist film in terms of a mass ratio. \n\n[0050] Condition 1: The A value determined by Formula (1) is 0.14 or more. \n\n$$A~([H]x0.04+[C]x 1.0+[N]x2.1 +[O]x30.6+[F]x50. 6+ [S]x 1.5+[I]x39 .5)/([H]x 1 +[C]x 12+[N]x 14+[O]x 16+[F]x19+[S]x32+[I]x127) Formula (1): $$\n\n[0051] As described, the A value is 0.14 or more, but from the viewpoint that at least one of additional improvement of the Z-factor or additional suppression of pattern collapse is achieved (hereinafter also simply referred to as \"the effect of the present invention is more excellent\"), the A value is preferably 0.16 or more, more preferably 0.18 or more, and particularly preferably 0.20 or more. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but in a case where the A value is extremely high, the transmittance of EUV light of the resist film is lowered, the optical profile in the resist film is deteriorated, as a result, it is difficult to obtain a good pattern shape, and therefore, the upper limit is preferably 0.24 or less, and more preferably 0.22 or less. \n\n[0052] In a case where A is less than 0.14, the Z-factor is usually deteriorated. \n\n[0053] Moreover, in Formula (1), [HJ represents a molar ratio of hydrogen atoms derived from the total solid content with respect to all the atoms of the total solid content in the photosensitive composition for EUV light, [C] represents a molar ratio of carbon atoms derived from the total solid content with respect to all the atoms of the total solid content in the photosensitive composition for EUV light, [NJ rep› resents a molar ratio of nitrogen atoms derived from the total solid content with respect to all the atoms of the total solid content in the photosensitive composition for EUV light, [OJ represents a molar ratio of oxygen atoms derived from the total solid content with respect to all the atoms of the total solid content in the photosensitive composition for EUV light, [FJ represents a molar ratio of fluorine atoms derived from the total solid content with respect to all the atoms of the total solid content in the photosensitive composition for EUV light, [SJ represents a molar ratio of sulfur atoms derived from the total solid content with respect to all the atoms of the total solid content in the photosensitive com› position for EUV light, and [IJ represents a molar ratio of iodine atoms derived from the total solid content with respect to all the atoms of the total solid content in the photosensitive composition for EUV light. \n\n[0054] For example, in a case where the resist composition includes a resin that has an increased polarity by the action of an acid polarity and thus, has an increased solubility in an alkali developer and a decreased solubility in an organic solvent, a photoacid generator, an acid diffusion control agent, and a solvent, the resin, the photoacid generator, and the acid diffusion control agent correspond to the solid content. That is, all the atoms in the total solid content correspond to a sum of all the atoms derived from the resin, all the atoms derived from the photoacid generator, and all the atoms derived from the acid diffusion control agent. For" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9009982235072377, + "doc_id": "ebaacda6136175fae8527d0ae2228e58f4155bf2c46c526775aff81bd828e0f5", + "edit_distance": 0.5662100456621004, + "f1_score": 0.9753424657534248, + "meteor": 0.8323722658053797, + "precision": 0.9834254143646409, + "pred_md": "US 20200050106Al\n\nUS 20200050106Al\n\n## c19) United States c12) Patent Application Publication SHIRAKAWA et al.\n\n## (54) PHOTOSENSITIVE COMPOSITION FOR EUV LIGHT, PATTERN FORMING METHOD, AND METHOD FOR MANUFACTURING ELECTRONIC DEVICE\n\n- (71) Applicant:\n\nFUJIFILM Corporation, Tokyo (JP)\n\n- (72) Inventors:\n\nMichihiro SHIRAKAWA, Haibara-gun (JP); Hajime FURUTANI, Haibara-gun (JP); Mitsuhiro FUJITA, Haibara-gun (JP); Tomotaka TSUCHIMURA,\n\nHaibara-gun (JP); Takashi Haibara-gun (JP);\n\nKAWASHIMA, Haibara-gun (JP); Michihiro OGAWA, Akihiro KANEKO, Haibara-gun (JP); Hironori OKA, Haibara-gun (JP); Yasuharu SHIRAISHI, Haibara-gun (JP)\n\n- (73) Assignee:\n\nFUJIFILM Corporation, Tokyo (JP)\n\n- (21) Appl. No.:\n\n16/655,447\n\n- (22) Filed:\n\nOct. 17, 2019\n\n## Related U.S. Application Data\n\n(63)\n\nContinuation\n\nof\n\napplication\n\nNo.\n\nPCT/JP2018/\n\n015332, filed on Apr. 12, 2018.\n\n- c10)\n\nPub. No.: US 2020/0050106 Al\n\n- (43) Pub. Date:\n\nFeb. 13, 2020\n\n## (30) Foreign Application Priority Data\n\n## Publication Classification\n\n- (51) Int. Cl.\n\nG03F 71039\n\nG03F 71004\n\nG03F 7120\n\n- (52) U.S. Cl.\n\nCPC ............\n\nG03F 71039 (2013.01); G03F\n\n(2013.01); G03F 710045\n\n712004 (2013.01)\n\n## (57) ABSTRACT\n\nA photosensitive composition for EUV light includes a predetermined resin and a photoacid generator, or includes a predetermined resin having a repeating unit having a photoacid generating group, and satisfies Conditions 1 and 2,\n\nCondition 1: The A value determined by Formula (1) is 0.14 or more,\n\nA~([H]x0.04+[C]x 1.0+[N]x2.1 +[O]x3. 6+[F]x5. 6+ [S]x 1.5+[I]x39 .5)/([H]x 1 +[C]x 12+[N]x 14+[O]x\n\n16+[F]x19+[S]x32+[I]x127)\n\nFormula (1):\n\nCondition 2: The concentration of the solid content in the photosensitive composition for EUV light is 2.5% by mass or less.\n\n(2006.01)\n\n(2006.01)\n\n(2006.01)", + "recall": 0.967391304347826, + "true_md": "1111111111111111 IIIIII IIIII 1111111111 11111 11111 1111111111 1111111111 11111 1111111111 11111111 US 20200050106Al \n\n# c19) United States c12) Patent Application Publication\n\n# SHIRAKAWA et al.\n\n# c10) Pub. No.: US 2020/0050106 Al\n\n# (43) Pub. Date: Feb. 13, 2020\n\n# (54) PHOTOSENSITIVE COMPOSITION FOR EUV LIGHT, PATTERN FORMING METHOD, AND METHOD FOR MANUFACTURING ELECTRONIC DEVICE\n\n- (71) Applicant: FUJIFILM Corporation, Tokyo (JP) \n\n- (72) Inventors: Michihiro SHIRAKAWA, Haibara-gun (JP); Hajime FURUTANI, Haibara-gun (JP); Mitsuhiro FUJITA, Haibara-gun (JP); Tomotaka TSUCHIMURA, Haibara-gun (JP); Takashi KAWASHIMA, Haibara-gun (JP); Michihiro OGAWA, Haibara-gun (JP); Akihiro KANEKO, Haibara-gun (JP); Hironori OKA, Haibara-gun (JP); Yasuharu SHIRAISHI, Haibara-gun (JP) \n\n- (73) Assignee: FUJIFILM Corporation, Tokyo (JP) \n\n- (21) Appl. No.: 16/655,447 \n\n- (22) Filed: Oct. 17, 2019 \n\n- (63) Continuation of application No. PCT/JP2018/ 015332, filed on Apr. 12, 2018. \n\n- Condition 2: The concentration of the solid content in the photosensitive composition for EUV light is 2.5% by mass or less. \n\n- 2, Condition 1: The A value determined by Formula (1) is 0.14 or more, \n\n- A~([H]x0.04+[C]x 1.0+[N]x2.1 +[O]x3. 6+[F]x5. 6+ [S]x 1.5+[I]x39 .5)/([H]x 1 +[C]x 12+[N]x 14+[O]x 16+[F]x19+[S]x32+[I]x127) Formula (1): \n\n- (52) U.S. Cl. CPC ............ G03F 71039 (2013.01); G03F 712004 (2013.01); G03F 710045 (2013.01) \n\n- (51) Int. Cl. \n\n## (30) Foreign Application Priority Data\n\n## Publication Classification\n\n## (57) ABSTRACT\n\n## Related U.S. Application Data\n\nA photosensitive composition for EUV light includes a predetermined resin and a photoacid generator, or includes a predetermined resin having a repeating unit having a photoacid generating group, and satisfies Conditions 1 and" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6493358309501979, + "doc_id": "9deb7e396d4fe749f90efa70198b4d8d9f12022e7e0614cec1177df48276e602", + "edit_distance": 0.3333333333333333, + "f1_score": 0.9411764705882353, + "meteor": 0.9616126543209877, + "precision": 0.8888888888888888, + "pred_md": "US 2012/0003590 Al\n\nJan. 5, 2012\n\n48\n\nP-16", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "US 2012/0003590 Al \n\n48 \n\nJan. 5, 2012" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5923033072023249, + "doc_id": "27c4f0b2df98a573a292ba4bccf29678f01dbd7b418cbf89b6aae7ec5c794399", + "edit_distance": 0.4, + "f1_score": 0.9411764705882353, + "meteor": 0.9498856707317073, + "precision": 0.8888888888888888, + "pred_md": "US 2012/0003590 Al\n\nJan. 5, 2012\n\n-continued\n\n-continued\n\n10", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "US 2012/0003590 Al \n\n10 \n\nJan. 5, 2012" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.894306025594834, + "doc_id": "b068fe94a1b249bb82fbcf8a6a988a1cf6b91d8736642cc8037cf4d9a40e6bc1", + "edit_distance": 0.5263157894736842, + "f1_score": 0.9820359281437125, + "meteor": 0.9359722601840388, + "precision": 0.9761904761904762, + "pred_md": "## UNITED STATES PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE CERTIFICATE OF CORRECTION\n\nPATENT NO.\n\n: 6,482,565 Bl\n\nDATED\n\n: November 19, 2002\n\nINVENTOR(S)\n\n: Jae Chang et al.\n\nPage 2 of 5\n\nIt is certified that error appears in the above-identified patent and that said Letters Patent is hereby corrected as shown below:\n\n## Column 4,\n\nLines 30-40, please replace Chemical Formula 4 with the following Chemical Formula 4: --\n\nLines 43-50, please replace Chemical Formula 5 with the following Chemical Formula 5:\n\nLine 54, the phrase \"I is a number of Oto 5;\" should read -l is a number of Oto 5; --.\n\n## Column 5,\n\nLines 19-20, the phrase \"In the following Reaction Scheme 1, m of the Chemical Formula 1 is O:\" should read -- In the following Reaction Scheme 1, m of the Chemical Formula 1 is 0: --.", + "recall": 0.9879518072289156, + "true_md": "It is certified that error appears in the above-identified patent and that said Letters Patent is hereby corrected as shown below: \n\nLines 30-40, please replace Chemical Formula 4 with the following Chemical Formula 4: --\n\nColumn 4, \n\nLines 43-50, please replace Chemical Formula 5 with the following Chemical Formula 5: \n\nLine 54, the phrase \"I is a number of Oto 5;\" should read -- l is a number of Oto 5; --. \n\nLines 19-20, the phrase \"In the following Reaction Scheme 1, m of the Chemical Formula 1 is O:\" should read -- In the following Reaction Scheme 1, m of the Chemical Formula 1 is 0: --. \n\nColumn 5, \n\nPage 2 of 5 \n\nUNITED STATES PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE CERTIFICATE OF CORRECTION \n\nPATENT NO. : 6,482,565 Bl \n\nDATED : November 19, 2002 \n\nINVENTOR(S) : Jae Chang et al." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "c8395f4918238d005fc7340c9d0ed112b5402879db54d1fe8b30a420bf909890", + "edit_distance": 0.6666666666666666, + "f1_score": 0.7142857142857143, + "meteor": 0.5186046511627908, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "32\n\n31\n\nUS 7,851,130 B2", + "recall": 0.5555555555555556, + "true_md": "32 \n\nUS 7,851,130 B2 \n\n31 \n\n-continued \n\n(zll)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "4c3c3099d2e76cd3737395472f642186f4a421c7fbeeb27cefbaef0adcd16366", + "edit_distance": 0.8181818181818182, + "f1_score": 0.4444444444444444, + "meteor": 0.673469387755102, + "precision": 0.2857142857142857, + "pred_md": "145\n\n-continued\n\nUS 9,423,690 B2\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n60\n\n65\n\nP-87\n\nP-88\n\n146\n\n-continued\n\nP-89", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "146 \n\nUS 9,423,690 B2 \n\n-continued \n\n-continued \n\n145" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6493358309501979, + "doc_id": "3aaab984d22ebd3727d1cfda98406aa697589d196387735b5c0c28b0cb0192e9", + "edit_distance": 0.3333333333333333, + "f1_score": 0.9411764705882353, + "meteor": 0.9616126543209877, + "precision": 0.8888888888888888, + "pred_md": "US 2020/0050106 Al\n\nFeb. 13, 2020\n\n-continued\n\n48", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "US 2020/0050106 Al \n\n48 \n\nFeb. 13, 2020" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.1736503239835627, + "doc_id": "689048de30fe5901046b95689985a203bc961cbf944744385075db455570428c", + "edit_distance": 0.7741935483870968, + "f1_score": 0.42105263157894735, + "meteor": 0.2704535590277778, + "precision": 0.8888888888888888, + "pred_md": "US 2020/0050106 Al\n\nFeb. 13, 2020\n\n51\n\n~N~", + "recall": 0.27586206896551724, + "true_md": "US 2020/0050106 Al \n\n51 \n\nFeb. 13, 2020 \n\n*The volumes described herein are for acids generated. \n\n[0505] <Acid Diffusion Control Agent>" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6690484408935986, + "doc_id": "ac18696d9a0b07d92a4105e4a387360ff94476b95da662bacc33eafd03026007", + "edit_distance": 0.6666666666666666, + "f1_score": 0.9090909090909091, + "meteor": 0.8203389830508474, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "US 2021/0033970 Al\n\nFeb.4,2021\n\n108", + "recall": 0.8333333333333334, + "true_md": "Feb.4,2021 \n\n108 \n\nUS 2021/0033970 Al \n\n-continued" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6493358309501979, + "doc_id": "3a3189d7ed7108998e0a5fea1de5ce9c066e2d1cbadc94ac454218fd03817e5d", + "edit_distance": 0.3333333333333333, + "f1_score": 0.9411764705882353, + "meteor": 0.9616126543209877, + "precision": 0.8888888888888888, + "pred_md": "US 2012/0003590 Al\n\nJan. 5, 2012\n\n-continued\n\n19", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "US 2012/0003590 Al \n\n19 \n\nJan. 5, 2012" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9213362036090906, + "doc_id": "382d3f899cfcf1f3971d182ca9d68f21e7004cdb35790d2d922089eaba4ea249", + "edit_distance": 0.7631578947368421, + "f1_score": 0.978723404255319, + "meteor": 0.8361632545137218, + "precision": 0.9913793103448276, + "pred_md": "US 2019/0010119 Al\n\n51\n\n## [Synthesis Example 1-7] Synthesis of PAG-7\n\n[0231]\n\n(PAG-1)\n\n[0232] A mixed solution of 3.1 g of the sulfonium salt (PAG-1), 3.2 g of the sulfonate salt (1-5), 20 g of methyl isobutyl ketone, and 15 g of pure water was stirred for 30 minutes, and the organic layer was separated. The obtained organic layer was washed with 30 g of pure water for once, 30 g of 5 mass % aqueous sulfonate salt (1-5) solution for twice, and 30 g of pure water for four times, and was subjected to concentration in vacuum to remove the solvent. This was dissolved in 8 g of added methylene chloride, and\n\nadded to 120 g of diisopropyl ether dropwise, followed by stirring at 0° C. for 30 minutes to precipitate solids. The precipitated solids were filtered off, followed by drying in vacuum to give 2.9 g of the intended photo-acid generator (PAG-7) as solids (yield: 55%).\n\n## <PAG-7>\n\n[0233] The results of the nuclear magnetic resonance spectrum (1H-NMR/DMSO-d 6 ) is shown in FIG. 9.\n\nJan. 10, 2019", + "recall": 0.9663865546218487, + "true_md": "Jan. 10, 2019 \n\n51 \n\nUS 2019/0010119 Al \n\nadded to 120 g of diisopropyl ether dropwise, followed by stirring at 0° C. for 30 minutes to precipitate solids. The precipitated solids were filtered off, followed by drying in vacuum to give 2.9 g of the intended photo-acid generator (PAG-7) as solids (yield: 55%). \n\n[0233] The results of the nuclear magnetic resonance spectrum (1H-NMR/DMSO-d$_{6}$ ) is shown in FIG. 9. \n\n<PAG-7> \n\n[0232] A mixed solution of 3.1 g of the sulfonium salt (PAG-1), 3.2 g of the sulfonate salt (1-5), 20 g of methyl isobutyl ketone, and 15 g of pure water was stirred for 30 minutes, and the organic layer was separated. The obtained organic layer was washed with 30 g of pure water for once, 30 g of 5 mass % aqueous sulfonate salt (1-5) solution for twice, and 30 g of pure water for four times, and was subjected to concentration in vacuum to remove the solvent. This was dissolved in 8 g of added methylene chloride, and \n\n[Synthesis Example 1-7] Synthesis of PAG-7 \n\n[0231]" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.896409881103725, + "doc_id": "9233cee51d877e5e718fc35af6b3e8b5d1336aad5b505e2ee71f6609f4f73a42", + "edit_distance": 0.0851063829787234, + "f1_score": 0.9673913043478262, + "meteor": 0.9346652780389209, + "precision": 0.9726775956284153, + "pred_md": "US 2020/0050106 Al\n\n-continued\n\n[0291] Among those, the photoacid generator is preferably a photoacid generator including an anionic moiety and a cationic moiety from the viewpoint that the effect of the present invention is more excellent.\n\n[0292] More specifically, the photoacid generator is pref› erably a compound represented by General Formula (ZI) or General Formula (ZII).\n\n29\n\nFeb. 13, 2020\n\n[0293] In General Formula (ZI),\n\n[0294] R201 , R202 , and R 203 each independently represent an organic group.\n\n[0295] The number of carbon atoms of the organic group as each of R 201 , R202 , and R203 is preferably 1 to 30, and more preferably 1 to 20.\n\n[0296] Furthermore, two ofR 201 to R 203 may be bonded to each other to form a ring structure, and the ring may include an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, an ester bond, an amide bond, or a carbonyl group, and examples of the group formed by the bonding of two of R 201 to R 203 include an alkylene group (for example, a butylene group and a pen› tylene group).\n\n[0297] zrepresents a non-nucleophilic anion (anion hav› ing a remarkably low ability of causing a nucleophilic reaction).\n\n[0298] Examples of the non-nucleophilic anion include a sulfonate anion (such as an aliphatic sulfonate anion, an aromatic sulfonate anion, and a camphor sulfonate anion), a carboxylate anion (such as an aliphatic carboxylate anion, an aromatic carboxylate anion, and an aralkyl carboxylate anion), a sulfonylimide anion, a bis(alkylsulfonyl)imide anion, and a tris(alkylsulfonyl)methide anion.\n\n[0299] The aliphatic moiety in the aliphatic sulfonate anion and the aliphatic carboxylate anion may be an alkyl group or a cycloalkyl group, and is preferably a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms or a cycloalkyl group having 3 to 30 carbon atoms.\n\n[0300] As the aromatic ring group in the aromatic sul› fonate anion and the aromatic carboxylate anion, an aryl group having 6 to 14 carbon atoms is preferable, and examples thereof include a phenyl group, a tolyl group, and a naphthyl group.\n\n[0301] Specific examples of the substituent which may be contained in the alkyl group, the cycloalkyl group, and the aryl group exemplified above include a nitro group, a halogen atom such as fluorine atom, a carboxyl group, a hydroxyl group, an amino group, a cyano group, an alkoxy group (preferably having 1 to 15 carbon atoms), a cycloalkyl group (preferably having 3 to 15 carbon atoms), an aryl group (preferably having 6 to 14 carbon atoms), an alkoxy› carbonyl group (preferably having 2 to 7 carbon atoms), an acyl group (preferably having 2 to 12 carbon atoms), an alkoxycarbonyloxy group (preferably having 2 to 7 carbon atoms), an alkylthio group (preferably having 1 to 15 carbon atoms), an alkylsulfonyl group (preferably having 1 to 15 carbon atoms), an alkyliminosulfonyl group (preferably having 1 to 15 carbon atoms), an aryloxysulfonyl group (preferably having 6 to 20 carbon atoms), an alkyl aryloxy› sulfonyl group (preferably having 7 to 20 carbon atoms), a cycloalkylaryloxysulfonyl group (preferably having 10 to 20 carbon atoms), an alkyloxyalkyloxy group (preferably hav› ing 5 to 20 carbon atoms), and a cycloalkylalkyloxyalkyloxy group (preferably having 8 to 20 carbon atoms).", + "recall": 0.9621621621621622, + "true_md": "US 2020/0050106 Al \n\n29 \n\nFeb. 13, 2020 \n\n[0291] Among those, the photoacid generator is preferably a photoacid generator including an anionic moiety and a cationic moiety from the viewpoint that the effect of the present invention is more excellent. \n\n[0292] More specifically, the photoacid generator is pref› erably a compound represented by General Formula (ZI) or General Formula (ZII). \n\n[0293] In General Formula (ZI), \n\n[0294] R$_{201}$, R 202 , and R $_{203 }$each independently represent an organic group. \n\n[0295] The number of carbon atoms of the organic group as each of R$_{201}$, R 202 , and R 203 is preferably 1 to 30, and more preferably 1 to 20. \n\n[0296] Furthermore, two ofR$_{201 }$to R$_{203 }$may be bonded to each other to form a ring structure, and the ring may include an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, an ester bond, an amide bond, or a carbonyl group, and examples of the group formed by the bonding of two of R$_{201 }$ to R$_{203 }$ include an alkylene group (for example, a butylene group and a pen› tylene group). z-\n\ntylene group). [0297] z- represents a non-nucleophilic anion (anion hav› ing a remarkably low ability of causing a nucleophilic reaction). \n\n[0298] Examples of the non-nucleophilic anion include a sulfonate anion (such as an aliphatic sulfonate anion, an aromatic sulfonate anion, and a camphor sulfonate anion), a carboxylate anion (such as an aliphatic carboxylate anion, an aromatic carboxylate anion, and an aralkyl carboxylate anion), a sulfonylimide anion, a bis(alkylsulfonyl)imide anion, and a tris(alkylsulfonyl)methide anion. \n\n[0299] The aliphatic moiety in the aliphatic sulfonate anion and the aliphatic carboxylate anion may be an alkyl group or a cycloalkyl group, and is preferably a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms or a cycloalkyl group having 3 to 30 carbon atoms. \n\n[0300] As the aromatic ring group in the aromatic sul› fonate anion and the aromatic carboxylate anion, an aryl group having 6 to 14 carbon atoms is preferable, and examples thereof include a phenyl group, a tolyl group, and a naphthyl group. \n\n[0301] Specific examples of the substituent which may be contained in the alkyl group, the cycloalkyl group, and the aryl group exemplified above include a nitro group, a halogen atom such as fluorine atom, a carboxyl group, a hydroxyl group, an amino group, a cyano group, an alkoxy group (preferably having 1 to 15 carbon atoms), a cycloalkyl group (preferably having 3 to 15 carbon atoms), an aryl group (preferably having 6 to 14 carbon atoms), an alkoxy› carbonyl group (preferably having 2 to 7 carbon atoms), an acyl group (preferably having 2 to 12 carbon atoms), an alkoxycarbonyloxy group (preferably having 2 to 7 carbon atoms), an alkylthio group (preferably having 1 to 15 carbon atoms), an alkylsulfonyl group (preferably having 1 to 15 carbon atoms), an alkyliminosulfonyl group (preferably having 1 to 15 carbon atoms), an aryloxysulfonyl group (preferably having 6 to 20 carbon atoms), an alkyl aryloxy› sulfonyl group (preferably having 7 to 20 carbon atoms), a cycloalkylaryloxysulfonyl group (preferably having 10 to 20 carbon atoms), an alkyloxyalkyloxy group (preferably hav› ing 5 to 20 carbon atoms), and a cycloalkylalkyloxyalkyloxy group (preferably having 8 to 20 carbon atoms)." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7476743906106103, + "doc_id": "391809b7f6ee896f95e3bafc40ba666fc2b63650e7e50b695caa6950a294a83d", + "edit_distance": 0.8, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.968, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "US 2021/0033970 Al\n\nFeb.4,2021\n\n97", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Feb.4,2021 \n\n97 \n\nUS 2021/0033970 Al" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7476743906106103, + "doc_id": "47f210c40bf9d624abb718b76755d08574d0e367b7d51fa7bb5990521d1086a6", + "edit_distance": 0.8, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.968, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "US 2021/0033970 Al\n\nFeb.4,2021\n\n92", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Feb.4,2021 \n\n92 \n\nUS 2021/0033970 Al" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5410822690539396, + "doc_id": "a199b5dceac0417ea5864c98eea2bf81b9479fcdcdc9039ae448d6494f963b92", + "edit_distance": 0.8333333333333334, + "f1_score": 0.9090909090909091, + "meteor": 0.8745098039215687, + "precision": 0.8333333333333334, + "pred_md": "US 2021/0033970 Al\n\nFeb.4,2021\n\n-I\n\n16", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Feb.4,2021 \n\n16 \n\nUS 2021/0033970 Al" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7476743906106103, + "doc_id": "4ba808405bff7fde4eae6a19519b6b8b09a966e288c77c4a1dfcaea07b42f032", + "edit_distance": 0.8, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.968, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "US 2021/0033970 Al\n\nFeb.4,2021\n\n101", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Feb.4,2021 \n\n101 \n\nUS 2021/0033970 Al" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8132882808488929, + "doc_id": "9badf5dc633086183181deeecaed046b77877369a85773cf33362202cde59482", + "edit_distance": 0.75, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9921875, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "US 2019/0010119 Al\n\nJan. 10, 2019\n\n18", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Jan. 10, 2019 \n\n18 \n\nUS 2019/0010119 Al" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9638354106769849, + "doc_id": "27318a14abe5ae51322e437c4f8992381542c718dac4a6c379db7868234ab895", + "edit_distance": 0.04008438818565401, + "f1_score": 0.9952755905511811, + "meteor": 0.9964599710520043, + "precision": 0.9937106918238994, + "pred_md": "US 9,423,690 B2\n\n237\n\nas a benzoic acid, a naphthoic acid and the like may be preferably used as a carboxylic acid.\n\nThe content of carboxylic acid is preferably 0.01 to 10% by mass, more preferably 0.01 to 5% by mass, still more preferably 0.01 to 3% by mass based on the total solid of the composition.\n\nFrom the viewpoint of improving the resolution, the electron beam-sensitive or extreme ultraviolet ray-sensitive resin composition in the present invention is preferably used in a film thickness of 10 nm to 250 nm, more preferably in a film thickness of 20 nm to 200 nm, and still more preferably in a film thickness of 30 nm to 100 nm. Such a film thickness may be achieved by setting a solid concen› tration in the composition to an adequate range to have an appropriate viscosity, thereby improving coatability and film-formation property.\n\n5\n\n10\n\n15\n\nThe solid concentration of the electron beam-sensitive or extreme ultraviolet ray-sensitive resin composition in the present invention is usually 1.0% by mass to 10% by mass, 20 preferably 2.0% by mass to 5.7% by mass, and more preferably 2.0% by mass to 5.3% by mass. By setting the solid concentration to the above-described range, the resist solution may be uniformly applied on a substrate and a resist pattern having excellent line width roughness may be 25 formed. The reason is not clear, but it is thought that by setting the solid concentration to 10% by mass or less and preferably 5.7% by mass or less, aggregation of materials, particularly, a photo-acid generator, in the resist solution is suppressed, and as a result, a uniform resist film may be formed.\n\nThe solid concentration is a weight percentage of the weight of other resist components excluding the solvent, based on the total weight of the electron beam-sensitive or extreme ultraviolet ray-sensitive resin composition.\n\nThe electron beam-sensitive or extreme ultraviolet ray› sensitive resin composition in the present invention is used by dissolving the above-described components in a prede› termined an organic solvent, preferably in the mixed solvent, filtering the solution through a filter, and then applying the 40 filtered solution on a predetermined support (substrate). The filter used for filtration is preferably a polytetrafluoroethyl› ene-, polyethylene- or nylon-made filter having a pore size of 0.1 µm or less, more preferably 0.05 µm or less, and still more preferably 0.03 µm or less. In the filtration through a 45 filter, as described in, for example, Japanese Patent Appli› cation Laid-Open No. 2002-62667, circulating filtration may be performed, or the filtration may be performed by con› necting a plurality of kinds of filters in series or in parallel. In addition, the composition may be filtered a plurality of 50 times. Further, a deaeration treatment or the like may be applied to the composition before or after filtration. [Use]\n\nThe pattern forming method of the present invention may be appropriately used to manufacture semiconductor microcircuits such as a manufacture of super LSI or high capacity of microchips. In addition, when manufacturing semicon› ductor microcircuits, the patterned resist film is provided in the process of forming circuits or etching, and the remaining resist film portion is finally removed by the solvent and the like. Accordingly, the resist film derived from the electron beam-sensitive or extreme ultraviolet ray-sensitive resin composition described in the present invention is not residual in the finally product such as a microchip, unlike the so-called permanent resist used for the printed circuit board.\n\nFurther, the present invention also relates to a method for manufacturing an electronic device, including the above-\n\n55\n\n60\n\n65\n\n238\n\ndescribed pattern forming method of the present invention, and the electronic device manufactured by this manufactur› ing method.\n\nThe electronic device of the present invention is suitably mounted on the electric electronic devices (such as home appliances, OA media-related devices, optical devices and communication devices).\n\n## Example\n\nHereinafter, the present invention will be described in detail with reference to Examples, but the scope of the present invention is not limited thereby.\n\n## Synthesis Example 1\n\n## Synthesis of Resin P-5\n\nThe resm was synthesized according to the following scheme\n\n(1)\n\nP-5\n\nA cyclohexanone solution (50.00% by mass) of 2.52 g of the compound (3), 0.78 g of the compound (2), 5.33 g of the compound (1 ), and 0.32 g of the polymerization initiator V-601 (manufactured by Waka Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.) were dissolved in 27.01 g of a cyclohexanone. 15.22 g of cyclohexanone was put in the reaction vessel, the reaction solution was added dropwise thereto under nitrogen atmo› sphere at 85° C. over 4 hours. The reaction solution was heated with stirring over 2 hours, and then it was allowed to cool to the room temperature.\n\nThe reaction solution was added dropwise to 400 g of heptanes to precipitate a polymer, and then filter it. The filtered solid was washed by pouring 200 g of heptanes thereto. After that, the solid after washing was dried under reduced pressure to obtain 2.98 g of resin (P-5).", + "recall": 0.9968454258675079, + "true_md": "237 \n\nUS 9,423,690 B2 \n\n238 \n\nas a benzoic acid, a naphthoic acid and the like may be preferably used as a carboxylic acid. \n\nThe content of carboxylic acid is preferably 0.01 to 10% by mass, more preferably 0.01 to 5% by mass, still more preferably 0.01 to 3% by mass based on the total solid of the composition. \n\nFrom the viewpoint of improving the resolution, the electron beam-sensitive or extreme ultraviolet ray-sensitive resin composition in the present invention is preferably used in a film thickness of 10 nm to 250 nm, more preferably in a film thickness of 20 nm to 200 nm, and still more preferably in a film thickness of 30 nm to 100 nm. Such a film thickness may be achieved by setting a solid concen› tration in the composition to an adequate range to have an appropriate viscosity, thereby improving coatability and film-formation property. \n\nThe solid concentration of the electron beam-sensitive or extreme ultraviolet ray-sensitive resin composition in the present invention is usually 1.0% by mass to 10% by mass, 20 preferably 2.0% by mass to 5.7% by mass, and more preferably 2.0% by mass to 5.3% by mass. By setting the solid concentration to the above-described range, the resist solution may be uniformly applied on a substrate and a resist pattern having excellent line width roughness may be 25 formed. The reason is not clear, but it is thought that by setting the solid concentration to 10% by mass or less and preferably 5.7% by mass or less, aggregation of materials, particularly, a photo-acid generator, in the resist solution is suppressed, and as a result, a uniform resist film may be formed. \n\nThe solid concentration is a weight percentage of the weight of other resist components excluding the solvent, based on the total weight of the electron beam-sensitive or extreme ultraviolet ray-sensitive resin composition. \n\nThe electron beam-sensitive or extreme ultraviolet ray› sensitive resin composition in the present invention is used by dissolving the above-described components in a prede› termined an organic solvent, preferably in the mixed solvent, filtering the solution through a filter, and then applying the 40 filtered solution on a predetermined support (substrate). The filter used for filtration is preferably a polytetrafluoroethyl› ene-, polyethylene- or nylon-made filter having a pore size of 0.1 µm or less, more preferably 0.05 µm or less, and still more preferably 0.03 µm or less. In the filtration through a 45 filter, as described in, for example, Japanese Patent Appli› cation Laid-Open No. 2002-62667, circulating filtration may be performed, or the filtration may be performed by con› necting a plurality of kinds of filters in series or in parallel. In addition, the composition may be filtered a plurality of 50 times. Further, a deaeration treatment or the like may be applied to the composition before or after filtration. \n\n[Use] \n\nThe pattern forming method of the present invention may be appropriately used to manufacture semiconductor micro- 55 circuits such as a manufacture of super LSI or high capacity of microchips. In addition, when manufacturing semicon› ductor microcircuits, the patterned resist film is provided in the process of forming circuits or etching, and the remaining resist film portion is finally removed by the solvent and the 60 like. Accordingly, the resist film derived from the electron beam-sensitive or extreme ultraviolet ray-sensitive resin composition described in the present invention is not residual in the finally product such as a microchip, unlike the so-called permanent resist used for the printed circuit board. 65 \n\nFurther, the present invention also relates to a method for manufacturing an electronic device, including the above-\n\ndescribed pattern forming method of the present invention, and the electronic device manufactured by this manufactur› ing method. \n\nThe electronic device of the present invention is suitably mounted on the electric electronic devices (such as home appliances, OA media-related devices, optical devices and communication devices). \n\nExample \n\nHereinafter, the present invention will be described in detail with reference to Examples, but the scope of the present invention is not limited thereby. \n\nThe resm was synthesized according to the following scheme \n\nA cyclohexanone solution (50.00% by mass) of 2.52 g of the compound (3), 0.78 g of the compound (2), 5.33 g of the compound (1 ), and 0.32 g of the polymerization initiator V-601 (manufactured by Waka Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.) were dissolved in 27.01 g of a cyclohexanone. 15.22 g of cyclohexanone was put in the reaction vessel, the reaction solution was added dropwise thereto under nitrogen atmo› sphere at 85° C. over 4 hours. The reaction solution was heated with stirring over 2 hours, and then it was allowed to cool to the room temperature. \n\nThe reaction solution was added dropwise to 400 g of heptanes to precipitate a polymer, and then filter it. The filtered solid was washed by pouring 200 g of heptanes thereto. After that, the solid after washing was dried under reduced pressure to obtain 2.98 g of resin (P-5). \n\nSynthesis Example 1 \n\nSynthesis of Resin P-5" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9801012922768673, + "doc_id": "f2a2cef9a5244abcf67722b52ae692ebb8d1fae2ac1745451199c1f2ce8dec97", + "edit_distance": 0.49873417721518987, + "f1_score": 0.9788359788359788, + "meteor": 0.9435356445572793, + "precision": 0.9866666666666667, + "pred_md": "US 2021/0033970 Al\n\n106\n\nthereof, hexamethoxyethyl melamine, hexaacyloxymethyl melamine, hexamethylol melamine compounds having 1 to 6 methylol groups acyloxymethylated and mixtures thereof. Examples of the guanamine compound include tetrameth› ylol guanamine, tetramethoxymethyl guanamine, tetrameth› ylol guanamine compounds having 1 to 4 methylol groups methoxymethylated and mixtures thereof, tetramethoxy› ethyl guanamine, tetraacyloxyguanamine, tetramethylol guanamine compounds having 1 to 4 methylol groups acy› loxymethylated and mixtures thereof. Examples of the gly› coluril compound include tetramethylol glycoluril, tetram› ethoxyglycoluril, tetramethoxymethyl glycoluril, tetramethylol glycoluril compounds having 1 to 4 methylol groups methoxymethylated and mixtures thereof, tetrameth› ylol glycoluril compounds having 1 to 4 methylol groups acyloxymethylated and mixtures thereof. Examples of the urea compound include tetramethylol urea, tetramethoxym› ethyl urea, tetramethylol urea compounds having 1 to 4 methylol groups methoxymethylated and mixtures thereof, and tetramethoxyethyl urea.\n\n[0147] Suitable isocyanate compounds include tolylene diisocyanate, diphenylmethane diisocyanate, hexamethyl› ene diisocyanate and cyclohexane diisocyanate. Suitable azide compounds include 1,1'-biphenyl-4,4'-bisazide, 4,4'› methylidenebisazide, and 4,4'-oxybisazide. Examples of the alkenyl ether group-containing compound include ethylene glycol divinyl ether, triethylene glycol divinyl ether, 1,2propanediol divinyl ether, 1,4-butanediol divinyl ether, tetramethylene glycol divinyl ether, neopentyl glycol divinyl ether, trimethylol propane trivinyl ether, hexanediol divinyl ether, 1,4-cyclohexanediol divinyl ether, pentaerythritol trivinyl ether, pentaerythritol tetravinyl ether, sorbitol tet› ravinyl ether, sorbitol pentavinyl ether, and trimethylol propane trivinyl ether.\n\n[0148] In the negative resist composition, the crosslinker is preferably added in an amount of 0.1 to 50 parts, more preferably 1 to 40 parts by weight per 100 parts by weight of the base polymer. The crosslinker may be used alone or in admixture.\n\n[0149] In the resist composition of the invention, a quencher other than the ammonium salt compound having formula (A) may be blended. The other quencher is typically selected from conventional basic compounds. Conventional basic compounds include primary, secondary, and tertiary aliphatic amines, mixed amines, aromatic amines, heterocy› clic amines, nitrogen-containing compounds with carboxyl group, nitrogen-containing compounds with sulfonyl group, nitrogen-containing compounds with hydroxyl group, nitro› gen-containing compounds with hydroxyphenyl group, alcoholic nitrogen-containing compounds, amide deriva› tives, imide derivatives, and carbamate derivatives. Also included are primary, secondary, and tertiary amine com› pounds, specifically amine compounds having a hydroxyl group, ether bond, ester bond, lactone ring, cyano group, or sulfonic acid ester bond as described in JP-A 2008-111103, paragraphs [0146]-[0164], and compounds having a carbam› ate group as described in JP 3790649. Addition of a basic compound may be effective for further suppressing the diffusion rate of acid in the resist film or correcting the pattern profile.\n\n[0150] Onium salts such as sulfonium salts, iodonium salts and ammonium salts of sulfonic acids which are not fluo› rinated at a-position as described in U.S. Pat. No. 8,795,942 (JP-A 2008-158339) and similar onium salts of carboxylic\n\nacid may also be used as the other quencher. While an a-fluorinated sulfonic acid, imide acid, and methide acid are necessary to deprotect the acid labile group of carboxylic acid ester, an a-non-fluorinated sulfonic acid and a carbox› ylic acid are released by salt exchange with an a-non› fluorinated onium salt. An a-non-fluorinated sulfonic acid and a carboxylic acid function as a quencher because they do not induce deprotection reaction. Since the quencher in the form of a sulfonium salt or iodonium salt is photo-decom› posable, the quencher function is reduced in the exposed region whereas acid activity is improved. This results in an improved contrast.\n\n[0151] The iodized aromatic ring-containing ammonium salt has an outstanding acid diffusion suppressing effect in the exposed region as well as in the unexposed region. In the exposed region, an iodized or brominated carboxylic acid is detached from an amine compound having an iodized aro› matic ring bonded thereto and dissolved in the alkaline developer while forming a salt with the alkaline developer. This prevents any drop of dissolution rate in the over› exposed region. Using the iodized aromatic ring-containing ammonium salt in combination with the quencher in the form of a sulfonium salt or iodonium salt, the desired properties including low acid diffusion and high contrast are achieved in a good balance.\n\n[0152] Also useful are quenchers of polymer type as described in U.S. Pat. No. 7,598,016 (JP-A 2008-239918). The polymeric quencher segregates at the resist surface after coating and thus enhances the rectangularity of resist pat› tern. When a protective film is applied as is often the case in the immersion lithography, the polymeric quencher is also effective for preventing a film thickness loss of resist pattern or rounding of pattern top.\n\n[0153] The other quencher is preferably added in an amount of 0 to 5 parts, more preferably 0 to 4 parts by weight per 100 parts by weight of the base polymer. The other quencher may be used alone or in admixture.\n\n[0154] To the resist composition, a water repellency improver may also be added for improving the water repel› lency on surface of a resist film as spin coated. The water repellency improver may be used in the topcoatless immer› sion lithography. Suitable water repellency improvers include polymers having a fluoroalkyl group and polymers having a specific structure with a 1,1,1,3,3,3-hexafluoro-2propanol residue and are described in JP-A 2007-297590 and JP-A 2008-111103, for example. The water repellency improver to be added to the resist composition should be soluble in the alkaline developer and organic solvent devel› oper. The water repellency improver of specific structure with a 1,1,1,3,3,3-hexafluoro-2-propanol residue is well soluble in the developer. A polymer having an amino group or amine salt copolymerized as recurring units may serve as the water repellent additive and is effective for preventing evaporation of acid during PEB, thus preventing any hole pattern opening failure after development. The water repel› lency improver may be used alone or in admixture. An appropriate amount of the water repellency improver is 0 to 20 parts, more preferably 0.5 to 10 parts by weight per 100 parts by weight of the base polymer.\n\n[0155] Also, an acetylene alcohol may be blended in the resist composition. Suitable acetylene alcohols are described in JP-A 2008-122932, paragraphs [0179]-[0182]. An appro› priate amount of the acetylene alcohol blended is Oto 5 parts by weight per 100 parts by weight of the base polymer.\n\nFeb.4,2021", + "recall": 0.9711286089238845, + "true_md": "Feb.4,2021 \n\n106 \n\nUS 2021/0033970 Al \n\nthereof, hexamethoxyethyl melamine, hexaacyloxymethyl melamine, hexamethylol melamine compounds having 1 to 6 methylol groups acyloxymethylated and mixtures thereof. Examples of the guanamine compound include tetrameth› ylol guanamine, tetramethoxymethyl guanamine, tetrameth› ylol guanamine compounds having 1 to 4 methylol groups methoxymethylated and mixtures thereof, tetramethoxy› ethyl guanamine, tetraacyloxyguanamine, tetramethylol guanamine compounds having 1 to 4 methylol groups acy› loxymethylated and mixtures thereof. Examples of the gly› coluril compound include tetramethylol glycoluril, tetram› ethoxyglycoluril, tetramethoxymethyl glycoluril, tetramethylol glycoluril compounds having 1 to 4 methylol groups methoxymethylated and mixtures thereof, tetrameth› ylol glycoluril compounds having 1 to 4 methylol groups acyloxymethylated and mixtures thereof. Examples of the urea compound include tetramethylol urea, tetramethoxym› ethyl urea, tetramethylol urea compounds having 1 to 4 methylol groups methoxymethylated and mixtures thereof, and tetramethoxyethyl urea. \n\n[0147] Suitable isocyanate compounds include tolylene diisocyanate, diphenylmethane diisocyanate, hexamethyl› ene diisocyanate and cyclohexane diisocyanate. Suitable azide compounds include 1,1’-biphenyl-4,4’-bisazide, 4,4’› methylidenebisazide, and 4,4’-oxybisazide. Examples of the alkenyl ether group-containing compound include ethylene glycol divinyl ether, triethylene glycol divinyl ether, 1,2- propanediol divinyl ether, 1,4-butanediol divinyl ether, tetramethylene glycol divinyl ether, neopentyl glycol divinyl ether, trimethylol propane trivinyl ether, hexanediol divinyl ether, 1,4-cyclohexanediol divinyl ether, pentaerythritol trivinyl ether, pentaerythritol tetravinyl ether, sorbitol tet› ravinyl ether, sorbitol pentavinyl ether, and trimethylol propane trivinyl ether. \n\n[0148] In the negative resist composition, the crosslinker is preferably added in an amount of 0.1 to 50 parts, more preferably 1 to 40 parts by weight per 100 parts by weight of the base polymer. The crosslinker may be used alone or in admixture. \n\n[0149] In the resist composition of the invention, a quencher other than the ammonium salt compound having formula (A) may be blended. The other quencher is typically selected from conventional basic compounds. Conventional basic compounds include primary, secondary, and tertiary aliphatic amines, mixed amines, aromatic amines, heterocy› clic amines, nitrogen-containing compounds with carboxyl group, nitrogen-containing compounds with sulfonyl group, nitrogen-containing compounds with hydroxyl group, nitro› gen-containing compounds with hydroxyphenyl group, alcoholic nitrogen-containing compounds, amide deriva› tives, imide derivatives, and carbamate derivatives. Also included are primary, secondary, and tertiary amine com› pounds, specifically amine compounds having a hydroxyl group, ether bond, ester bond, lactone ring, cyano group, or sulfonic acid ester bond as described in JP-A 2008-111103, paragraphs [0146]-[0164], and compounds having a carbam› ate group as described in JP 3790649. Addition of a basic compound may be effective for further suppressing the diffusion rate of acid in the resist film or correcting the pattern profile. \n\n[0150] Onium salts such as sulfonium salts, iodonium salts and ammonium salts of sulfonic acids which are not fluo› rinated at a-position as described in U.S. Pat. No. 8,795,942 (JP-A 2008-158339) and similar onium salts of carboxylic \n\n[0155] Also, an acetylene alcohol may be blended in the resist composition. Suitable acetylene alcohols are described in JP-A 2008-122932, paragraphs [0179]-[0182]. An appro› priate amount of the acetylene alcohol blended is Oto 5 parts by weight per 100 parts by weight of the base polymer. \n\n[0154] To the resist composition, a water repellency improver may also be added for improving the water repel› lency on surface of a resist film as spin coated. The water repellency improver may be used in the topcoatless immer› sion lithography. Suitable water repellency improvers include polymers having a fluoroalkyl group and polymers having a specific structure with a 1,1,1,3,3,3-hexafluoro-2- propanol residue and are described in JP-A 2007-297590 and JP-A 2008-111103, for example. The water repellency improver to be added to the resist composition should be soluble in the alkaline developer and organic solvent devel› oper. The water repellency improver of specific structure with a 1,1,1,3,3,3-hexafluoro-2-propanol residue is well soluble in the developer. A polymer having an amino group or amine salt copolymerized as recurring units may serve as the water repellent additive and is effective for preventing evaporation of acid during PEB, thus preventing any hole pattern opening failure after development. The water repel› lency improver may be used alone or in admixture. An appropriate amount of the water repellency improver is 0 to 20 parts, more preferably 0.5 to 10 parts by weight per 100 parts by weight of the base polymer. \n\n[0153] The other quencher is preferably added in an amount of 0 to 5 parts, more preferably 0 to 4 parts by weight per 100 parts by weight of the base polymer. The other quencher may be used alone or in admixture. \n\n[0152] Also useful are quenchers of polymer type as described in U.S. Pat. No. 7,598,016 (JP-A 2008-239918). The polymeric quencher segregates at the resist surface after coating and thus enhances the rectangularity of resist pat› tern. When a protective film is applied as is often the case in the immersion lithography, the polymeric quencher is also effective for preventing a film thickness loss of resist pattern or rounding of pattern top. \n\n[0151] The iodized aromatic ring-containing ammonium salt has an outstanding acid diffusion suppressing effect in the exposed region as well as in the unexposed region. In the exposed region, an iodized or brominated carboxylic acid is detached from an amine compound having an iodized aro› matic ring bonded thereto and dissolved in the alkaline developer while forming a salt with the alkaline developer. This prevents any drop of dissolution rate in the over› exposed region. Using the iodized aromatic ring-containing ammonium salt in combination with the quencher in the form of a sulfonium salt or iodonium salt, the desired properties including low acid diffusion and high contrast are achieved in a good balance. \n\nacid may also be used as the other quencher. While an a-fluorinated sulfonic acid, imide acid, and methide acid are necessary to deprotect the acid labile group of carboxylic acid ester, an a-non-fluorinated sulfonic acid and a carbox› ylic acid are released by salt exchange with an a-non› fluorinated onium salt. An a-non-fluorinated sulfonic acid and a carboxylic acid function as a quencher because they do not induce deprotection reaction. Since the quencher in the form of a sulfonium salt or iodonium salt is photo-decom› posable, the quencher function is reduced in the exposed region whereas acid activity is improved. This results in an improved contrast." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5445178846139404, + "doc_id": "a573ed44ffabf4b3005898ef6350ced3d1772cddca1038552169832250dbec55", + "edit_distance": 0.45454545454545453, + "f1_score": 0.8421052631578947, + "meteor": 0.9384412650602411, + "precision": 0.7272727272727273, + "pred_md": "US 2012/0003590 Al\n\nJan. 5, 2012\n\n49\n\n-continued\n\nP-19\n\nP-20", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "US 2012/0003590 Al \n\n49 \n\nJan. 5, 2012" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7476743906106103, + "doc_id": "8c39f1b61d81210409fe1ed224d9ef87b9fd673c95dc21e9fc4ee3fa84f5306c", + "edit_distance": 0.8, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.968, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "US 2021/0033970 Al\n\nFeb.4,2021\n\n11", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Feb.4,2021 \n\n11 \n\nUS 2021/0033970 Al" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7654807999361813, + "doc_id": "d7f712deac969c9dc7c8fcb9bbaf592d52f39f933e4dd43aa9e84437d153329b", + "edit_distance": 0.552710843373494, + "f1_score": 0.8895522388059701, + "meteor": 0.6024426534202013, + "precision": 0.8922155688622755, + "pred_md": "65\n\n-continued\n\nThe alicyclic hydrocarbon-based acid-decomposable resin in the invention may have a repeating unit represented by the following formula (VIII).\n\nIn formula (VIII), Z 2 represents---O-or-N(R41 )-. R 41 represents a hydrogen atom, a hydroxyl group, an alkyl group, or -OS02 -R42 . R 42 represents an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, or a camphor residue. The alkyl group represented by R 41 and R 42 may be substituted with a halogen atom (preferably a fluorine atom) and the like.\n\nAs the specific examples of the repeating units represented by formula (VIII), the following compounds are exemplified, but the invention is not restricted thereto.\n\nOH\n\nUS 7,851,130 B2\n\n66\n\nIt is preferred for the alicyclic hydrocarbon-based aciddecomposable resin in the invention to have a repeating unit having an alkali-soluble group, and it is more preferred to have a repeating unit having a carboxyl group, by which the resolution in the use for contact hole is enhanced. As the repeating units having a carboxyl group, both a repeating unit having a carboxyl group directly bonded to the main chain of resin such as a repeating unit by acrylic acid or methacrylic acid, and a repeating unit having a carboxyl group bonded to the main chain of resin via a linking group are preferred, and the linking group may have a monocyclic or polycyclic hydrocarbon structure. The repeating unit by acrylic acid or methacrylic acid is most preferred.\n\nThe alicyclic hydrocarbon-based acid-decomposable resin in the invention may have a repeating unit having one to three groups represented by the following formula (Fl), by which line edge roughness property is improved.\n\nIn formula (Fl), R 50 , R5 i, R52 , R53 , R54 and R 55 each represents a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom, or an alkyl group, provided that at least any one ofR 50 to R 55 represents a fluorine atom, or an alkyl group in which at least one hydrogen atom is substituted with a fluorine atom.\n\nRx represents a hydrogen atom or an organic group (pref› erably an acid-decomposable protective group, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an acyl group, or an alkoxycarbonyl group).\n\nThe alkyl group represented by R 50 to R 55 may be substi› tuted with a halogen atom, e.g., a fluorine atom, or a cyano group, and preferably an alkyl group having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, e.g., a methyl group and a trifluoromethyl group can be exemplified.\n\nIt is preferred that all of R 50 to R 55 represent a fluorine atom.\n\nAs the organic group represented by Rx, an acid-decomposable protective group, and an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an acyl group, an alkylcarbonyl group, an alkoxycar› bonyl group, an alkoxycarbonylmethyl group, an alkoxym› ethyl group, and a 1-alkoxyethyl group, each of which may have a substituent, are preferred.\n\nThe repeating unit having the group represented by formula (Fl) is preferably a repeating unit represented by the following formula (F2).\n\n10\n\n15\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n60\n\n65", + "recall": 0.8869047619047619, + "true_md": "66 \n\nUS 7,851,130 B2 \n\n65 \n\n-continued \n\nIt is preferred for the alicyclic hydrocarbon-based acid- decomposable resin in the invention to have a repeating unit having an alkali-soluble group, and it is more preferred to have a repeating unit having a carboxyl group, by which the resolution in the use for contact hole is enhanced. As the repeating units having a carboxyl group, both a repeating unit having a carboxyl group directly bonded to the main chain of resin such as a repeating unit by acrylic acid or methacrylic acid, and a repeating unit having a carboxyl group bonded to the main chain of resin via a linking group are preferred, and the linking group may have a monocyclic or polycyclic hydrocarbon structure. The repeating unit by acrylic acid or methacrylic acid is most preferred. \n\nThe alicyclic hydrocarbon-based acid-decomposable resin in the invention may have a repeating unit having one to three groups represented by the following formula (Fl), by which line edge roughness property is improved. \n\nIn formula (Fl), R$_{50}$, R 5 i, $^{R}$52, R 53 , R $_{54 }$and R$_{55 }$ each represents a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom, or an alkyl group, provided that at least any one ofR$_{50 }$to R$_{55 }$represents a fluorine atom, or an alkyl group in which at least one hydrogen atom is substituted with a fluorine atom. \n\nRx represents a hydrogen atom or an organic group (pref› erably an acid-decomposable protective group, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an acyl group, or an alkoxycarbo- nyl group). \n\nThe alkyl group represented by R$_{50 }$to R$_{55 }$may be substi› tuted with a halogen atom, e.g., a fluorine atom, or a cyano group, and preferably an alkyl group having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, e.g., a methyl group and a trifluoromethyl group can be exemplified. \n\nIt is preferred that all of R$_{50 }$ to R$_{55 }$ represent a fluorine atom. \n\nAs the organic group represented by Rx, an acid-decom- posable protective group, and an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an acyl group, an alkylcarbonyl group, an alkoxycar› bonyl group, an alkoxycarbonylmethyl group, an alkoxym› ethyl group, and a 1-alkoxyethyl group, each of which may have a substituent, are preferred. \n\nThe repeating unit having the group represented by for- mula (Fl) is preferably a repeating unit represented by the following formula (F2). \n\nAs the specific examples of the repeating units represented by formula (VIII), the following compounds are exemplified, but the invention is not restricted thereto. \n\nIn formula (VIII), Z$_{2}$ represents---O-or-N(R$_{41}$)-. R 41 represents a hydrogen atom, a hydroxyl group, an alkyl group, or -OS0$_{2}$-R$_{42}$. R$_{42 }$represents an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, or a camphor residue. The alkyl group represented by R$_{41 }$and R$_{42 }$may be substituted with a halogen atom (preferably a fluorine atom) and the like. \n\nThe alicyclic hydrocarbon-based acid-decomposable resin in the invention may have a repeating unit represented by the following formula (VIII)." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9612686350881422, + "doc_id": "7f6ab65adfb489f5d14ff26416bf95ab226199d8bc367dbeaf092f39c63c64dd", + "edit_distance": 0.5315645013723697, + "f1_score": 0.9855072463768116, + "meteor": 0.7839114468340231, + "precision": 0.9770114942528736, + "pred_md": "US 9,423,690 B2\n\n1\n\n## PATTERN FORMING METHOD, ELECTRON BEAM-SENSITIVE OR EXTREME ULTRAVIOLET RAY-SENSITIVE RESIN COMPOSITION, RESIST FILM, AND METHOD FOR MANUFACTURING ELECTRONIC DEVICE, AND ELECTRONIC DEVICE USING THE SAME\n\n## CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATION\n\nThis is a continuation of International Application No. PCT/JP2013/072485 filed on Aug. 16, 2013, and claims priority from Japanese Patent Application Nos. 2012181892 filed on Aug. 20, 2012, and 2013-054401 filed on Mar. 15, 2013, the entire disclosures of which are incorpo› rated herein by reference.\n\n2\n\nA high sensitivity, a high resolution and a good pattern shape are in a relationship of a tradeoff therebetween, and thus it is very important how to satisfy them at the same time.\n\nIn order to solve the problems, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-91712 discloses a positive type resist composition using a resin having a certain repeating unit of an acid-decomposable group having an alicyclic group and a certain polystyrene repeating unit. According to the document, the resolution and the sensitiv› ity are said to be improved.\n\nHowever, in a positive type image forming method, an isolated line or dot pattern may be formed well, but the shapes of patterns are easy to deteriorate when an isolated space or fine hole patterns are formed.\n\nIn addition, a pattern forming method using a developer containing an organic solvent has been developed recently (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-217884). According to this method, it is said that the stable formation of a micro pattern in high precision is possible. Further, in recent years, the needs of the formation of fine isolated space patterns and the refinement of hole patterns are rapidly increasing. Because of this, a further performance improvement on sensitivity, resolution, and space width roughness performance is required in the for› mation of fine isolated space patterns having a space width of 100 nm or less. Similarly, in the case of forming a hole pattern having fine pore diameter (for example, 50 nm or less), a further performance improvement on high resolu› tion, good exposure latitude (EL), and the uniformity of local pattern dimension (Local-CDU) is required.\n\nAn object of the present invention is to provide a pattern forming method, an electron beam-sensitive or an extreme ultraviolet ray-sensitive resin composition, and a resist film, and a method for manufacturing an electronic device, and an electronic device using the same, in which the pattern forming method provides an excellent sensitivity, resolution, and space width roughness performance in the formation of fine isolated space patterns having a space width of 100 nm or less, and also provides a high resolution, a good exposure latitude (EL), and an excellent uniformity of local pattern dimension (Local-CDU) in the case of forming a hole pattern having fine pore diameter (for example, 50 nm or less).\n\n## SUMMARY OF INVENTION\n\nThe present invention is as follows.\n\n- [1] A pattern forming method, including:\n- (a) forming a film by using an electron beam-sensitive or extreme ultraviolet ray-sensitive resin composition contain› ing a resin (A) having a repeating unit represented by Formula (1-0) and a repeating unit represented by Formula (1-2);\n- (b) exposing the film by using an electron beam or extreme ultraviolet ray; and\n- ( c) developing the exposed film by using a developer containing an organic solvent to form a negative pattern,\n\nwherein a content of the repeating unit represented by Formula (1-0) is 45 mo! % or more based on a whole repeating units in the resin (A):\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n## TECHNICAL FIELD\n\nThe present invention relates to a pattern forming method using a developer containing an organic solvent, which is suitably used in a super micro lithography process such as a manufacturing process of a super LSI or high capacity microchip or other photofabrication processes, an electron beam-sensitive or an extreme ultraviolet ray-sensitive resin composition, and a resist film, and a method for manufac› turing an electronic device, and an electronic device using the same. More specifically, the present invention relates to 25 30 a pattern forming method using a developer containing an organic solvent, which is suitably used in a micromachining process of semiconductor device using an electron beam or 35 EUV ray (wavelength: near 13 nm), an electron beam› sensitive or an extreme ultraviolet ray-sensitive resin com› position, and a resist film, and a method for manufacturing an electronic device, and an electronic device using the same. 40\n\n## BACKGROUND ART\n\nA micromachining by a lithography using a photoresist composition has been conducted in a conventional manu› facturing process of a semiconductor device such as an IC or LSI. Recently, an ultrafine pattern formation of a submicron region or a quarter micron region has been required, because an integration level of an integrated circuit becomes higher. Accordingly, an exposure wavelength has a tendency to become shorter from g line to i line, and further to a KrF excimer laser ray. Furthermore, development of a lithogra› phy using an electron beam or X-ray or EUV ray other than the excimer laser ray is now progressing.\n\nThese electron beam or X-ray or EUV ray lithography takes a position as a pattern forming technique of the next generation or the next of the next generation, and a resist composition of a high sensitivity and high resolution is desired. Particularly, a high sensitization is a very important problem to be solved for shortening of a processing time of wafer. However, when intending to the high sensitization, a resolution which is represented by a pattern shape or limit› ing resolution line width is prone to be reduced. Thus, the development of a resist composition which is capable to satisfy these characteristics at the same time is highly demanded.\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n60\n\n65", + "recall": 0.9941520467836257, + "true_md": "US 9,423,690 B2 \n\n2 \n\n1 \n\nA high sensitivity, a high resolution and a good pattern shape are in a relationship of a tradeoff therebetween, and thus it is very important how to satisfy them at the same time. \n\nIn order to solve the problems, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-91712 discloses a positive type resist composition using a resin having a certain repeating unit of an acid-decomposable group having an alicyclic group and a certain polystyrene repeating unit. According to the document, the resolution and the sensitiv› ity are said to be improved. \n\nHowever, in a positive type image forming method, an isolated line or dot pattern may be formed well, but the shapes of patterns are easy to deteriorate when an isolated space or fine hole patterns are formed. \n\nIn addition, a pattern forming method using a developer containing an organic solvent has been developed recently (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-217884). According to this method, it is said that the stable formation of a micro pattern in high precision is possible. Further, in recent years, the needs of the formation of fine isolated space patterns and the refinement of hole patterns are rapidly increasing. Because of this, a further performance improvement on sensitivity, resolution, and space width roughness performance is required in the for› mation of fine isolated space patterns having a space width of 100 nm or less. Similarly, in the case of forming a hole pattern having fine pore diameter (for example, 50 nm or less), a further performance improvement on high resolu› tion, good exposure latitude (EL), and the uniformity of local pattern dimension (Local-CDU) is required. \n\nAn object of the present invention is to provide a pattern forming method, an electron beam-sensitive or an extreme ultraviolet ray-sensitive resin composition, and a resist film, and a method for manufacturing an electronic device, and an electronic device using the same, in which the pattern forming method provides an excellent sensitivity, resolution, and space width roughness performance in the formation of fine isolated space patterns having a space width of 100 nm or less, and also provides a high resolution, a good exposure latitude (EL), and an excellent uniformity of local pattern dimension (Local-CDU) in the case of forming a hole pattern having fine pore diameter (for example, 50 nm or less). \n\n(a) forming a film by using an electron beam-sensitive or extreme ultraviolet ray-sensitive resin composition contain› ing a resin (A) having a repeating unit represented by Formula (1-0) and a repeating unit represented by Formula (1-2); \n\n(b) exposing the film by using an electron beam or extreme ultraviolet ray; and \n\n( c) developing the exposed film by using a developer containing an organic solvent to form a negative pattern, \n\nwherein a content of the repeating unit represented by Formula (1-0) is 45 mo! % or more based on a whole repeating units in the resin (A): \n\nA micromachining by a lithography using a photoresist composition has been conducted in a conventional manu› facturing process of a semiconductor device such as an IC or LSI. Recently, an ultrafine pattern formation of a submicron region or a quarter micron region has been required, because an integration level of an integrated circuit becomes higher. Accordingly, an exposure wavelength has a tendency to become shorter from g line to i line, and further to a KrF excimer laser ray. Furthermore, development of a lithogra› phy using an electron beam or X-ray or EUV ray other than the excimer laser ray is now progressing. \n\nThese electron beam or X-ray or EUV ray lithography takes a position as a pattern forming technique of the next generation or the next of the next generation, and a resist composition of a high sensitivity and high resolution is desired. Particularly, a high sensitization is a very important 60 problem to be solved for shortening of a processing time of wafer. However, when intending to the high sensitization, a resolution which is represented by a pattern shape or limit› ing resolution line width is prone to be reduced. Thus, the development of a resist composition which is capable to 65 satisfy these characteristics at the same time is highly demanded. \n\nThe present invention relates to a pattern forming method using a developer containing an organic solvent, which is suitably used in a super micro lithography process such as a manufacturing process of a super LSI or high capacity microchip or other photofabrication processes, an electron beam-sensitive or an extreme ultraviolet ray-sensitive resin composition, and a resist film, and a method for manufac› turing an electronic device, and an electronic device using the same. More specifically, the present invention relates to a pattern forming method using a developer containing an organic solvent, which is suitably used in a micromachining process of semiconductor device using an electron beam or EUV ray (wavelength: near 13 nm), an electron beam› sensitive or an extreme ultraviolet ray-sensitive resin com› position, and a resist film, and a method for manufacturing an electronic device, and an electronic device using the same. \n\nThis is a continuation of International Application No. PCT/JP2013/072485 filed on Aug. 16, 2013, and claims priority from Japanese Patent Application Nos. 2012- 181892 filed on Aug. 20, 2012, and 2013-054401 filed on Mar. 15, 2013, the entire disclosures of which are incorpo› rated herein by reference. \n\n## PATTERN FORMING METHOD, ELECTRON BEAM-SENSITIVE OR EXTREME ULTRAVIOLET RAY-SENSITIVE RESIN COMPOSITION, RESIST FILM, AND METHOD FOR MANUFACTURING ELECTRONIC DEVICE, AND ELECTRONIC DEVICE USING THE SAME\n\n## CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATION\n\n## TECHNICAL FIELD\n\n## BACKGROUND ART\n\n## SUMMARY OF INVENTION\n\nThe present invention is as follows. \n\n[1] A pattern forming method, including:" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9468074369044268, + "doc_id": "a6ea36547042dd5e8afb9e8eefce42acb4f4eb5e799f60a47058d181b908a0ba", + "edit_distance": 0.14728682170542637, + "f1_score": 0.9875518672199171, + "meteor": 0.9947843448543313, + "precision": 0.9754098360655737, + "pred_md": "US 2012/0003590 Al\n\n60\n\n-continued\n\nF*F F\n\nJan. 5, 2012\n\nF\n\n## <Other Components>\n\n[0317] The composition of the present invention may fur› ther contain a photo-acid generator, a basic compound, a surfactant, a solvent, a dye, a photo-base generator, an anti› oxidant, a solvent and the like. These components are described below.\n\n## (Photo-Acid Generator)\n\n[0318] The composition of the present invention may fur› ther contain a photo-acid generator in addition to the repeat› ing unit (A) and the repeating unit (B).\n\n[0319] The photo-acid generator is a compound capable of generating an acid upon irradiation with an actinic ray or radiation. The photo-acid generator which can be used may be appropriately selected, for example, from a photo-initiator for cationic photopolymerization, a photo-initiator for radical photopolymerization, a photo-decoloring agent, a photo-dis› coloring agent, known compounds capable of generating an acid upon irradiation with an actinic ray or radiation, which are used for microresist or the like, and a mixture thereof. Examples thereof include an onium salt such as sulfonium salt and iodonium salt, and a diazodisulfone compound such as bis(alkylsulfonyl diazomethane).\n\n[0320] Preferred examples of the photo-acid generator include compounds represented by the following formulae (ZI), (ZII) and (ZIII):", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "US 2012/0003590 Al \n\n60 \n\nJan. 5, 2012 \n\n[0317] The composition of the present invention may fur› ther contain a photo-acid generator, a basic compound, a surfactant, a solvent, a dye, a photo-base generator, an anti› oxidant, a solvent and the like. These components are described below. \n\n[0318] The composition of the present invention may fur› ther contain a photo-acid generator in addition to the repeat› ing unit (A) and the repeating unit (B). \n\n[0319] The photo-acid generator is a compound capable of generating an acid upon irradiation with an actinic ray or radiation. The photo-acid generator which can be used may be appropriately selected, for example, from a photo-initiator for cationic photopolymerization, a photo-initiator for radical photopolymerization, a photo-decoloring agent, a photo-dis› coloring agent, known compounds capable of generating an acid upon irradiation with an actinic ray or radiation, which are used for microresist or the like, and a mixture thereof. Examples thereof include an onium salt such as sulfonium salt and iodonium salt, and a diazodisulfone compound such as bis(alkylsulfonyl diazomethane). \n\n[0320] Preferred examples of the photo-acid generator include compounds represented by the following formulae (ZI), (ZII) and (ZIII): \n\n## <Other Components>\n\n## (Photo-Acid Generator)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9805610586837823, + "doc_id": "211d95b71f1e794a3d831464e4391442f641b7c6f29e9e9c2cd4ab608e929acd", + "edit_distance": 0.012345679012345678, + "f1_score": 0.9900497512437813, + "meteor": 0.9920558835993676, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "US 2020/0050106 Al\n\nFeb. 13, 2020\n\n40\n\n[0397] The content of the acid diffusion control agent in the resist composition is preferably 0.001 % to 10% by mass, and more preferably 0.01 % to 5% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the composition.\n\n[0398] The acid diffusion control agents may be used alone or in combination of two or more kinds thereof.\n\n[0399] The ratio of the photoacid generator and the acid diffusion control agent in the resist composition, photoacid generator/acid diffusion control agent (molar ratio), is pref› erably 2.5 to 300. From the viewpoints of the sensitivity and the resolution, the molar ratio is preferably 2.5 or more, and from the viewpoint of suppression of reduction in the resolution as the resist pattern is thickened with aging after exposure until the heating treatment, the molar ratio is preferably 300 or less. The photoacid generator/acid diffu› sion control agent (molar ratio) is more preferably 5 .0 to 200, and still more preferably 7.0 to 150.\n\n[0400] Examples of the acid diffusion control agent include the compounds (amine compounds, amido group› containing compounds, urea compounds, nitrogen-contain› ing heterocyclic compounds, and the like) described m paragraphs <0140> to <0144> of JP2013-011833A.\n\n[0401] <(E) Hydrophobic Resin>\n\n[0402] The resist composition may include a hydrophobic resin other than the resin (A), in addition to the resin (A).\n\n[0403] Although it is preferable that the hydrophobic resin is designed to be unevenly distributed on a surface of the resist film, it does not necessarily need to have a hydrophilic group in its molecule as different from the surfactant, and does not need to contribute to uniform mixing of polar materials and nonpolar materials.\n\n[0404] Examples of the effect of addition of the hydro› phobic resin include a control of static and dynamic contact angles of a surface of the resist film with respect to water and suppression of out gas.\n\n[0405] The hydrophobic resin preferably has any one or more of a \"fluorine atom\", a \"silicon atom\", and a \"CH 3 partial structure which is contained in a side chain moiety of a resin\" from the viewpoint of uneven distribution on the film surface layer, and more preferably has two or more kinds. Incidentally, the hydrophobic resin preferably has a hydrocarbon group having 5 or more carbon atoms. These groups may be contained in the main chain of the resin or may be substituted in the side chain.\n\n[0406] In a case where hydrophobic resin includes a fluorine atom and/or a silicon atom, the fluorine atom and/or the silicon atom in the hydrophobic resin may be included in the main chain or the side chain of the resin.\n\n[0407] In a case where the hydrophobic resin includes a fluorine atom, as a partial structure having a fluorine atom,", + "recall": 0.9802955665024631, + "true_md": "US 2020/0050106 Al \n\n40 \n\nFeb. 13, 2020 \n\n[0397] The content of the acid diffusion control agent in the resist composition is preferably 0.001 % to 10% by mass, and more preferably 0.01 % to 5% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the composition. \n\n[0398] The acid diffusion control agents may be used alone or in combination of two or more kinds thereof. \n\n[0399] The ratio of the photoacid generator and the acid diffusion control agent in the resist composition, photoacid generator/acid diffusion control agent (molar ratio), is pref› erably 2.5 to 300. From the viewpoints of the sensitivity and the resolution, the molar ratio is preferably 2.5 or more, and from the viewpoint of suppression of reduction in the resolution as the resist pattern is thickened with aging after exposure until the heating treatment, the molar ratio is preferably 300 or less. The photoacid generator/acid diffu› sion control agent (molar ratio) is more preferably 5 .0 to 200, and still more preferably 7.0 to 150. \n\n[0400] Examples of the acid diffusion control agent include the compounds (amine compounds, amido group› containing compounds, urea compounds, nitrogen-contain› ing heterocyclic compounds, and the like) described m paragraphs <0140> to <0144> of JP2013-011833A. \n\n[0401] <(E) Hydrophobic Resin> \n\n[0402] The resist composition may include a hydrophobic resin other than the resin (A), in addition to the resin (A). \n\n[0403] Although it is preferable that the hydrophobic resin is designed to be unevenly distributed on a surface of the resist film, it does not necessarily need to have a hydrophilic group in its molecule as different from the surfactant, and does not need to contribute to uniform mixing of polar materials and nonpolar materials. \n\n[0404] Examples of the effect of addition of the hydro› phobic resin include a control of static and dynamic contact angles of a surface of the resist film with respect to water and suppression of out gas. \n\n[0405] The hydrophobic resin preferably has any one or more of a \"fluorine atom\", a \"silicon atom\", and a \"CH$_{3 }$ partial structure which is contained in a side chain moiety of a resin\" from the viewpoint of uneven distribution on the film surface layer, and more preferably has two or more kinds. Incidentally, the hydrophobic resin preferably has a hydrocarbon group having 5 or more carbon atoms. These groups may be contained in the main chain of the resin or may be substituted in the side chain. \n\n[0406] In a case where hydrophobic resin includes a fluorine atom and/or a silicon atom, the fluorine atom and/or the silicon atom in the hydrophobic resin may be included in the main chain or the side chain of the resin. \n\n[0407] In a case where the hydrophobic resin includes a fluorine atom, as a partial structure having a fluorine atom," + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7923664833836566, + "doc_id": "d257f3a14d5097b83f5a1880311662930999db43a597927e0e98bd5e83611879", + "edit_distance": 0.6327307326355851, + "f1_score": 0.9521276595744681, + "meteor": 0.643274772868453, + "precision": 0.9470899470899471, + "pred_md": "US 7,049,044 B2\n\n13\n\ncally contains a sulfonium group, but other photoacid gen› erating compounds, such as iodonium are encompassed by this invention.\n\nTable 3 presents the relative weight percents of components loaded into the mixture to be polymerized, and the percent composition of that component in the resulting polymer, for three representative resist samples with various PAG and POSS content. Table 4 also presents the weightaverage molecular weights (Mw) and polydispersity indices (PDI) of each polymer sample.\n\nIn one embodiment, the chemically amplified resist of the present invention further comprises a dissolution promoter. While a range of promoters are envisioned, itaconic anhy› dride (IA) is one preferred dissolution promoter, which functions effectively in tetramethylammonium hydroxide solutions.\n\nOne embodiment of the present invention optionally incorporates a POSS component with a polymerizable group for incorporation into the resist polymeric chaim, as illus› trated in Example 7. When present, the polyhedral oli› gosilsequioxane component is typically selected from 3-(3, 5,7,9,11, 13,15-heptacyclopentylpentacyclo[9.5.1.1 3 · .1 9 5 · 1s.1 7 · 13 ]octasiloxane-l-yl)propyl methacrylate; 3-[(3,5,7,9, 11,13,15-heptacyclopentylpentacyclo-[9.5.l .1 3 · 9 .1 5 · 15 .1 7 · 13 ]-octasiloxan-l -y loxy )dimethy lsily l]propy 1 methacry late; 1,3,5, 7,9, 11, 13-heptacyclopentyl-15-vinylpentacyclo[9 .5.1.1 3 · .1 9 5 · 15 .1 7 · 13 ]octasiloxane, or combinations thereof. However, other silica cage compounds that contain poly› merizable groups are encompasses by the present invention.\n\n14\n\nWhen present in the chemically amplified resist, the polyhedral oligosilsequioxane component is present from about 1 % to about 35% by weight in the polymer, typically from about 10% to about 32% by weight in the polymer. Additionally, the photoacid generating component is present from about 2% to about 25% by weight in the polymer, typically from about 5% to about 20% by weight in the polymer. Polymers prepared according to this invention are typically characterized by a weight-average molecular weights (Mw) varying from 20,000 to 100,000 g/mol and a polydispersity index between 1 and about 2, although those polymers outside these ranges are encompassed by the present invention.\n\nIn one embodiment of this invention, the CA resist comprises methyl methacrylate, t-butyl methacrylate, meth› acrylic acid, 3-(3,5, 7,9, 11,13, 15-heptacyclopentylpentacy› clo-[9.5.1.13·9 .1 5 · 15 .l 7· 13 ]-octasiloxane-1-yl)propyl methacrylate, and [p-CH2 -C(CH 3 )C(O)OC6 H4 SMe2 ] OSO CF 3 . In another embodiment, this invention includes a 2 dissolution promoter, and therefore comprises methyl meth› acrylate, t-butyl methacrylate, methacrylic acid, itaconic anhydride, 3-(3,5, 7,9, 11, 13, 15-heptacyclopentylpentacyclo› [9 .5. l.13·9 .1 5 · 15 .l 7· 13 ]-octasiloxane-1-yl)propyl methacry› late, and [p-CH 2 -C(CH 3 )C(O)OC6 H4 SMe2 ]---0SO2 CF 3 .\n\nTo evaluate the lithographic properties of the resists, thin films were cast on silicon wafers to a typical film thickness of about 0.3 to about 0.5 µm. All resists samples had excellent film formation behavior. No pinholes were observed even with a film thickness of below 100 nm. This observation behavior could be attributed to the absence of phase separation frequently observed for CA resists contain› ing a high percentage of small-molecule PAGs that are not incorporated directly into the polymeric resist chains as part of the polymeric unit.\n\nAn illustration or schematic of the micro structure of one embodiment of this invention, viz. a copolymer containing methyl methacrylate (MMA), t-butyl methacrylate (TBMA), the polyhedral oligosilsesquioxane propyl methacrylate POSS, itaconic anhydride, and the PAG group [p-CH -C 2 (CH 3 )C(O)OC H SMe ]OSO2 6 4 2 CF 3 is presented in FIG. 2.\n\nThe resist films of this invention were first exposed on an EX7 DUY 248 nm Excimer Laser stepper at a wavelength of 248 nm. Typical processing conditions are presented in Example 9 and details of the imaging experiments for this type photoresist are provided in Example 10. High resolu› tion SEM micrographs of patterns obtained for samples at a dose of 5 mJ/cm 2 were compared for those samples that incorporated itaconic anhydride and those that did not. Itaconic anhydride (IA) functions as a dissolution promoter in TMAH solutions, and samples containing IA developed properly in either 0.21 or 0.26 N TMAH solutions. In contrast, samples that contained no IA dissolution promoter developed equally well in 0.26 N TMAH, most probably due to high conversion of tert-butyl group into an acid (-COOH) group.\n\nAll resist samples had a wide processing window in terms of post-exposure-bake (PEB) temperatures under both 248 nm deep UV and electron beam exposures. A series of PEB temperatures, namely 110, 120, 125 and 130° C. were applied, while maintaining the other processing parameters\n\n5\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n60\n\n65", + "recall": 0.9572192513368984, + "true_md": "14 \n\nUS 7,049,044 B2 \n\n13 \n\ncally contains a sulfonium group, but other photoacid gen› erating compounds, such as iodonium are encompassed by this invention. \n\nWhen present in the chemically amplified resist, the polyhedral oligosilsequioxane component is present from about 1 % to about 35% by weight in the polymer, typically from about 10% to about 32% by weight in the polymer. Additionally, the photoacid generating component is present from about 2% to about 25% by weight in the polymer, typically from about 5% to about 20% by weight in the polymer. Polymers prepared according to this invention are typically characterized by a weight-average molecular weights (Mw) varying from 20,000 to 100,000 g/mol and a polydispersity index between 1 and about 2, although those polymers outside these ranges are encompassed by the present invention. \n\nIn one embodiment of this invention, the CA resist comprises methyl methacrylate, t-butyl methacrylate, meth› acrylic acid, 3-(3,5, 7,9, 11,13, 15-heptacyclopentylpentacy› clo-[9.5.1.13•9 .1 5 • 15 .l 7•$^{13}$]-octasiloxane-1-yl)propyl meth- acrylate, and [p-CH$_{2}$ -C(CH 3 )C(O)OC$_{6}$H$_{4}$ SMe$_{2}$ ] OSO$_{2}$CF 3 . In another embodiment, this invention includes a dissolution promoter, and therefore comprises methyl meth› acrylate, t-butyl methacrylate, methacrylic acid, itaconic anhydride, 3-(3,5, 7,9, 11, 13, 15-heptacyclopentylpentacyclo› [9 .5. l.13•9 .1 5 • 15 .l 7•$^{13}$]-octasiloxane-1-yl)propyl methacry› late, and [p-CH$_{2}$-C(CH 3 )C(O)OC$_{6}$H$_{4}$ SMe$_{2}$]---0SO$_{2}$CF 3 . To evaluate the lithographic properties of the resists, thin \n\n3 3 To evaluate the lithographic properties of the resists, thin films were cast on silicon wafers to a typical film thickness of about 0.3 to about 0.5 µm. All resists samples had excellent film formation behavior. No pinholes were observed even with a film thickness of below 100 nm. This observation behavior could be attributed to the absence of phase separation frequently observed for CA resists contain› ing a high percentage of small-molecule PAGs that are not incorporated directly into the polymeric resist chains as part of the polymeric unit. \n\nTable 3 presents the relative weight percents of compo- nents loaded into the mixture to be polymerized, and the percent composition of that component in the resulting polymer, for three representative resist samples with various PAG and POSS content. Table 4 also presents the weight- average molecular weights (Mw) and polydispersity indices (PDI) of each polymer sample. \n\nAn illustration or schematic of the micro structure of one embodiment of this invention, viz. a copolymer containing methyl methacrylate (MMA), t-butyl methacrylate (TBMA), the polyhedral oligosilsesquioxane propyl methacrylate POSS, itaconic anhydride, and the PAG group [p-CH$_{2 }$-C (CH 3 )C(O)OC$_{6}$H$_{4}$ SMe$_{2}$]OSO$_{2}$CF 3 is presented in FIG. 2. The resist films of this invention were first exposed on an \n\n3 3 The resist films of this invention were first exposed on an EX7 DUY 248 nm Excimer Laser stepper at a wavelength of 248 nm. Typical processing conditions are presented in Example 9 and details of the imaging experiments for this type photoresist are provided in Example 10. High resolu› tion SEM micrographs of patterns obtained for samples at a dose of 5 mJ/cm 2 were compared for those samples that incorporated itaconic anhydride and those that did not. Itaconic anhydride (IA) functions as a dissolution promoter in TMAH solutions, and samples containing IA developed properly in either 0.21 or 0.26 N TMAH solutions. In contrast, samples that contained no IA dissolution promoter developed equally well in 0.26 N TMAH, most probably due to high conversion of tert-butyl group into an acid (-COOH) group. \n\nAll resist samples had a wide processing window in terms of post-exposure-bake (PEB) temperatures under both 248 nm deep UV and electron beam exposures. A series of PEB temperatures, namely 110, 120, 125 and 130° C. were applied, while maintaining the other processing parameters \n\nOne embodiment of the present invention optionally incorporates a POSS component with a polymerizable group for incorporation into the resist polymeric chaim, as illus› trated in Example 7. When present, the polyhedral oli› gosilsequioxane component is typically selected from 3-(3, 5,7,9,11, 13,15-heptacyclopentylpentacyclo[9.5.1.1 3 • 9 .1 5 • 1s.1 7 • $^{13}$]octasiloxane-l-yl)propyl methacrylate; 3-[(3,5,7,9, 11,13,15-heptacyclopentylpentacyclo-[9.5.l .1 3 • 9 .1 5 • 15 .1 7 • 13 ]-octasiloxan-l -y loxy )dimethy lsily l]propy 1 methacry late; 1,3,5, 7,9, 11, 13-heptacyclopentyl-15-vinylpentacyclo- [9 .5.1.1 3 • 9 .1 5 • 15 .1 7 • $^{13}$]octasiloxane, or combinations thereof. However, other silica cage compounds that contain poly› merizable groups are encompasses by the present invention. \n\nIn one embodiment, the chemically amplified resist of the present invention further comprises a dissolution promoter. While a range of promoters are envisioned, itaconic anhy› dride (IA) is one preferred dissolution promoter, which functions effectively in tetramethylammonium hydroxide solutions." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9604051809889815, + "doc_id": "7fbb8f6a1d59b24859b24526f21deb245e037a571e58f1082c1ace3925ee7e6e", + "edit_distance": 0.028428093645484948, + "f1_score": 0.9875311720698255, + "meteor": 0.977366182047052, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "US 2012/0003590 Al\n\nJan. 5, 2012\n\ngroup; a sulfonamido group; an alkyl group such as methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, isopropyl group, n-butyl group, sec-butyl group, hexyl group, 2-ethylhexyl group, octyl group and dodecyl group; an alkoxy group such as methoxy group, ethoxy group, hydroxyethoxy group, pro› poxy group, hydroxypropoxy group and butoxy group; an alkoxycarbonyl group such as methoxycarbonyl group and ethoxycarbonyl group; an acyl group such as formyl group, acetyl group and benzoyl group; an acyloxy group such as acetoxy group and butyryloxy group; and a carboxy group.\n\n[0231] The alkyl group is preferably an ethyl group, an isopropyl group, an isobutyl group, a cyclohexylethyl group, a phenylmethyl group or a phenylethyl group.\n\n[0232] The cycloalkyl group may be monocyclic or poly› cyclic. In the latter case, the cycloalkyl group may be a crosslinked cycloalkyl group. That is, in this case, the cycloalkyl group may have a bridged structure. Incidentally, a part of carbon atoms in the cycloalkyl group may be substi› tuted with a heteroatom such as oxygen atom.\n\n[0233] The monocyclic cycloalkyl group is preferably a cycloalkyl group having a carbon number of3 to 8. Examples of such a cycloalkyl group include a cyclopropyl group, a cyclopentyl group, a cyclohexyl group, a cyclobutyl group and a cyclooctyl group.\n\n[0234] The polycyclic cycloalkyl group includes, for example, a group having a bicyclo, tricyclo or tetracyclo structure. The polycyclic cycloalkyl group is preferably a cycloalkyl group having a carbon number of 6 to 20. Examples of such a polycyclic cycloalkyl group include an adamantyl group, a norbornyl group, an isoboronyl group, a camphanyl group, a dicyclopentyl group, an a-pine! group, a tricyclodecanyl group, a tetracyclododecyl group and an androstanyl group.\n\n[0235] The aralkyl group in Li, L 2 and Z 2 includes, for example, an aralky I group having a carbon number of 7 to 15, such as benzyl group and phenethyl group.\n\n[0236] These aralkyl groups may further have a substituent. Preferred substituents include an alkoxyl group, a hydroxyl group, a halogen atom, a nitro group, an acyl group, an acy› lamino group, a sulfonylamino group, an alkylthio group, an arylthio group and an aralkylthio group. Examples of the aralkyl group having a substituent include an alkoxybenzyl group, a hydroxybenzyl group and a phenylthiophenethyl group. The carbon number of the substituent which these aralkyl groups may have is preferably 12 or less.\n\n[0237] The 5- or 6-membered ring which may be formed by combining Z 2 and L 1 with each other includes, for example, a tetrahydropyran ring and a tetrahydrofuran ring. Among these, a tetrahydropyran ring is preferred.\n\n[0238] Z 2 is preferably a linear or branched alkyl group. Thanks to this configuration, the effects of the invention are more successfully brought out.\n\n[0239] Specific examples of the repeating unit represented by formula (Al) are illustrated blow, but the present invention is not limited thereto.\n\n27", + "recall": 0.9753694581280788, + "true_md": "US 2012/0003590 Al \n\n27 \n\nJan. 5, 2012 \n\ngroup; a sulfonamido group; an alkyl group such as methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, isopropyl group, n-butyl group, sec-butyl group, hexyl group, 2-ethylhexyl group, octyl group and dodecyl group; an alkoxy group such as methoxy group, ethoxy group, hydroxyethoxy group, pro› poxy group, hydroxypropoxy group and butoxy group; an alkoxycarbonyl group such as methoxycarbonyl group and ethoxycarbonyl group; an acyl group such as formyl group, acetyl group and benzoyl group; an acyloxy group such as acetoxy group and butyryloxy group; and a carboxy group. \n\n[0231] The alkyl group is preferably an ethyl group, an isopropyl group, an isobutyl group, a cyclohexylethyl group, a phenylmethyl group or a phenylethyl group. \n\n[0232] The cycloalkyl group may be monocyclic or poly› cyclic. In the latter case, the cycloalkyl group may be a crosslinked cycloalkyl group. That is, in this case, the cycloalkyl group may have a bridged structure. Incidentally, a part of carbon atoms in the cycloalkyl group may be substi› tuted with a heteroatom such as oxygen atom. \n\n[0233] The monocyclic cycloalkyl group is preferably a cycloalkyl group having a carbon number of3 to 8. Examples of such a cycloalkyl group include a cyclopropyl group, a cyclopentyl group, a cyclohexyl group, a cyclobutyl group and a cyclooctyl group. \n\n[0234] The polycyclic cycloalkyl group includes, for example, a group having a bicyclo, tricyclo or tetracyclo structure. The polycyclic cycloalkyl group is preferably a cycloalkyl group having a carbon number of 6 to 20. Examples of such a polycyclic cycloalkyl group include an adamantyl group, a norbornyl group, an isoboronyl group, a camphanyl group, a dicyclopentyl group, an a-pine! group, a tricyclodecanyl group, a tetracyclododecyl group and an androstanyl group. \n\n[0235] The aralkyl group in Li, L$_{2 }$ and Z 2 includes, for example, an aralky I group having a carbon number of 7 to 15, such as benzyl group and phenethyl group. \n\n[0236] These aralkyl groups may further have a substituent. Preferred substituents include an alkoxyl group, a hydroxyl group, a halogen atom, a nitro group, an acyl group, an acy› lamino group, a sulfonylamino group, an alkylthio group, an arylthio group and an aralkylthio group. Examples of the aralkyl group having a substituent include an alkoxybenzyl group, a hydroxybenzyl group and a phenylthiophenethyl group. The carbon number of the substituent which these aralkyl groups may have is preferably 12 or less. \n\n[0237] The 5- or 6-membered ring which may be formed by combining Z$^{2 }$and L$_{1 }$with each other includes, for example, a tetrahydropyran ring and a tetrahydrofuran ring. Among these, a tetrahydropyran ring is preferred. \n\n[0238] Z 2 is preferably a linear or branched alkyl group. Thanks to this configuration, the effects of the invention are more successfully brought out. \n\n[0239] Specific examples of the repeating unit represented by formula (Al) are illustrated blow, but the present invention is not limited thereto." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.23682079130839756, + "doc_id": "3277d8bbe4b57a9c241c9066d9771ebe54f1de5210aa2046cdd40f1ee7a14416", + "edit_distance": 0.8571428571428571, + "f1_score": 0.7619047619047619, + "meteor": 0.8070175438596492, + "precision": 0.6153846153846154, + "pred_md": "251\n\n252\n\nTABLE 7\n\nTABLE 6-continued\n\n66.99\n\n30\n\n3\n\n80/20\n\n0.01\n\nUS 9,423,690 B2", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "251 \n\nUS 9,423,690 B2 \n\n252 \n\nTABLE 6-continued \n\nTABLE 7" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8268544573635941, + "doc_id": "e2ccb8760ca80ecb6c104e59e44f78b32448dc6f7af2ff6c332f48ca0ad5fbe6", + "edit_distance": 0.8767123287671232, + "f1_score": 0.9750000000000001, + "meteor": 0.6400872167326912, + "precision": 0.9848484848484849, + "pred_md": "US 2021/0033970 Al\n\n117\n\nR 2 is hydrogen, nitro, or a C -C 1 20 hydrocarbyl group which may contain at least one moiety selected from hydroxyl, carboxyl, thiol, ether bond, ester bond, nitro, cyano, halogen and amino moiety, in case of p =1 or 2, two R 1 2 may bond together to form a ring with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached, the ring optionally containing a double bond, oxy› gen, sulfur or nitrogen, or R 2 and X 1 may bond together to form a ring with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached, the ring optionally contain› ing a double bond, oxygen, sulfur or nitrogen, XBI is iodine or bromine, X is a single bond, ether bond, ester bond, amide bond, 2 carbonyl group or carbonate group, X 3 is a single bond or a C 1 -C 20 (q 1 +1)-valent hydro› carbon group which may contain a heteroatom exclu› sive of iodine and bromine, R 3 is a C -C 1 20 (q 2 +1)-valent aliphatic hydrocarbon group which may contain at least one moiety selected from fluorine, chlorine, hydroxyl, carboxyl, CcC 12 aryl, ether bond, ester bond, carbonyl, amide bond, carbonate, urethane bond, and urea bond.\n\n- 3. The resist composition of claim 1, further comprising an acid generator capable of generating a sulfonic acid, imide acid or methide acid.\n- 4. The resist composition of claim 1, further comprising an organic solvent.\n- 5. The resist composition of claim 1 wherein the base polymer comprises recurring units having the formula (al) or recurring units having the formula (a2):\n\nwherein RA is each independently hydrogen or methyl, R 11 and R 12 each are an acid labile group, Y 1 is a single bond, phenylene group, naphthylene group, or C 1 -C 12 linking group containing at least one moiety selected from ester bond and lactone ring, and Y 2 is a single bond or ester bond.\n\n- 6. The resist composition of claim 5 which is a chemically amplified positive resist composition.\n- 7. The resist composition of claim 1 wherein the base polymer is free of an acid labile group.\n- 8. The resist composition of claim 7 which is a chemically amplified negative resist composition.\n- 9. The resist composition of claim 1 wherein the base polymer comprises recurring units of at least one type selected from recurring units having the formulae (fl) to (f3):\n\nwherein\n\nRA is each independently hydrogen or methyl, Z 1 is a single bond, phenylene group, -O-Z 11 -, -C(=0)---0-Z 11 or ----C(=0)-NH-Z 11 -, Z 11 is a C -C 1 6 aliphatic hydrocarbylene group or phenylene group, which may contain a carbonyl, ester bond, ether bond or hydroxyl moiety, Z 2 is a single bond, -Z 21 ----C(=0)---0-, -Z 21 -0-or -Z 21 ---0-C(=0)-, z 21 is a cl -C12 satu› rated hydrocarbylene group which may contain a carbonyl moiety, ester bond or ether bond, Z 3 is a single bond, methylene, ethylene, phenylene, fluorinated phenylene, ---O-Z 31 -, ----C(=0)0-Z31-, or ----C(=0)-NH-Z 31 -, Z 31 is a C1 -C 6 aliphatic hydrocarbylene group, phenylene group, fluorinated phenylene group, or trifluorom› ethyl-substituted phenylene group, which may con› tain a carbonyl moiety, ester bond, ether bond or hydroxyl moiety, R 21 to R 28 are each independently a C 1 -C 20 hydrocarbyl group which may contain a heteroatom, any two of R 23 , R 24 and R 25 or any two ofR 26 , R 27 and R 28 may bond together to form a ring with the sulfur atom to which they are attached, A 1 is hydrogen or trifluoromethyl, and\n\nMis a non-nucleophilic counter ion.\n\n- 10. The resist composition of claim 1, further comprising a surfactant.\n- 11. A process for forming a pattern comprising the steps of applying the resist composition of claim 1 onto a substrate\n\nFeb.4,2021", + "recall": 0.9653465346534653, + "true_md": "Feb.4,2021 \n\n117 \n\nUS 2021/0033970 Al \n\n9. The resist composition of claim 1 wherein the base polymer comprises recurring units of at least one type selected from recurring units having the formulae (fl) to (f3): \n\n3. The resist composition of claim 1, further comprising an acid generator capable of generating a sulfonic acid, imide acid or methide acid. \n\n4. The resist composition of claim 1, further comprising an organic solvent. \n\n5. The resist composition of claim 1 wherein the base polymer comprises recurring units having the formula (al) or recurring units having the formula (a2): \n\n10. The resist composition of claim 1, further comprising a surfactant. \n\n11. A process for forming a pattern comprising the steps of applying the resist composition of claim 1 onto a substrate \n\n6. The resist composition of claim 5 which is a chemically amplified positive resist composition. \n\n7. The resist composition of claim 1 wherein the base polymer is free of an acid labile group. \n\n8. The resist composition of claim 7 which is a chemically amplified negative resist composition. \n\n- M- is a non-nucleophilic counter ion. \n\n- A 1 is hydrogen or trifluoromethyl, and \n\n- R 21 to R 28 are each independently a C 1 -C 20 hydrocarbyl group which may contain a heteroatom, any two of R 23 , R 24 and R 25 or any two ofR 26 , R 27 and R 28 may bond together to form a ring with the sulfur atom to which they are attached, \n\n- Z 3 is a single bond, methylene, ethylene, phenylene, fluorinated phenylene, ---O-Z 31 -, ----C(=0)- 0-Z31-, or ----C(=0)-NH-Z 31 -, Z 31 is a C$_{1 }$-C$_{6 }$ aliphatic hydrocarbylene group, phenylene group, fluorinated phenylene group, or trifluorom› ethyl-substituted phenylene group, which may con› tain a carbonyl moiety, ester bond, ether bond or hydroxyl moiety, \n\n- Z 2 is a single bond, -Z 21 ----C(=0)---0-, -Z 21 - 0- or -Z 21 ---0-C(=0)-, z 21 is a cl -C12 satu› rated hydrocarbylene group which may contain a carbonyl moiety, ester bond or ether bond, \n\n- Z 1 is a single bond, phenylene group, -O-Z 11 -, -C(=0)---0-Z 11 - or ----C(=0)-NH-Z 11 -, Z 11 is a C$_{1}$-C$_{6 }$ aliphatic hydrocarbylene group or phenylene group, which may contain a carbonyl, ester bond, ether bond or hydroxyl moiety, \n\nwherein RA is each independently hydrogen or methyl, \n\n- wherein RA is each independently hydrogen or methyl, R$^{11 }$and R 12 each are an acid labile group, Y 1 is a single bond, phenylene group, naphthylene group, or C$_{1 }$-C 12 linking group containing at least one moiety selected from ester bond and lactone ring, and Y 2 is a single bond or ester bond. \n\n- R 3 is a C$_{1}$-C$_{20 }$ (q$^{2}$+1)-valent aliphatic hydrocarbon group which may contain at least one moiety selected from fluorine, chlorine, hydroxyl, carboxyl, CcC 12 aryl, ether bond, ester bond, carbonyl, amide bond, carbonate, urethane bond, and urea bond. \n\n- X 3 is a single bond or a C$_{1}$-C 20 (q$^{1}$+1)-valent hydro› carbon group which may contain a heteroatom exclu› sive of iodine and bromine, \n\n- X $^{2 }$is a single bond, ether bond, ester bond, amide bond, carbonyl group or carbonate group, \n\n- XBI is iodine or bromine, \n\n- R 2 is hydrogen, nitro, or a C 1 -C 20 hydrocarbyl group which may contain at least one moiety selected from hydroxyl, carboxyl, thiol, ether bond, ester bond, nitro, cyano, halogen and amino moiety, in case of p$^{1}$=1 or 2, two R 2 may bond together to form a ring with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached, the ring optionally containing a double bond, oxy› gen, sulfur or nitrogen, or R 2 and X 1 may bond together to form a ring with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached, the ring optionally contain› ing a double bond, oxygen, sulfur or nitrogen," + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8186419304797845, + "doc_id": "880bf27a25881d86fff1ecdfe4b84f01feb7435388ef9aa2158a16fb47844a41", + "edit_distance": 0.3767019667170953, + "f1_score": 0.9724770642201837, + "meteor": 0.8743303486356596, + "precision": 0.9636363636363636, + "pred_md": "## c12) United States Patent Takizawa et al.\n\n## (54) PATTERN FORMING METHOD, ELECTRON BEAM-SENSITIVE OR EXTREME ULTRAVIOLET RAY-SENSITIVE RESIN COMPOSITION, RESIST FILM, AND METHOD FOR MANUFACTURING ELECTRONIC DEVICE, AND ELECTRONIC DEVICE USING THE SAME\n\n- (71) Applicant:\n\nFUJIFILM Corporation, Tokyo (JP)\n\n- (72) Inventors:\n\nHiroo Takizawa, Shizuoka (JP); Shuji Hirano, Shizuoka (JP); Natsumi Yokokawa, Shizuoka (JP); Wataru Nihashi, Shizuoka (JP)\n\n- (73) Assignee:\n\nFUJIFILM Corporation, Tokyo (JP)\n\n- ( *) Notice:\n\nSubject to any disclaimer, the term of this patent is extended or adjusted under 35 U.S.C. 154(b) by 0 days.\n\n- (21) Appl. No.:\n\n14/625,897\n\n- (22) Filed:\n\n## (65) Prior Publication Data\n\nFeb. 19, 2015\n\nUS 2015/0168834 Al Jun. 18, 2015\n\n## Related U.S. Application Data\n\n(63)\n\nContinuation\n\nof\n\napplication\n\nNo.\n\nPCT/JP2013/072485, filed on Aug. 16, 2013.\n\n## (30) Foreign Application Priority Data\n\nAug. 20, 2012\n\nMar. 15, 2013\n\n(JP) ................................. 2012-181892\n\n(JP) ................................. 2013-054401\n\n- (51) Int. Cl.\n- (52) U.S. Cl.\n\n## (58) Field of Classification Search\n\nG03F 71004\n\nG03F 71038\n\nC08F 220118\n\n(2006.01)\n\n(2006.01)\n\n(2006.01)\n\n(Continued)\n\nCPC ........... G03F 710388 (2013.01); C08F 141185 (2013.01); C08F 16110 (2013.01); C08F 24100 (2013.01); C08F 220118 (2013.01); C08F 220120 (2013.01); C08F 220126 (2013.01); G03F 710045 (2013.01); G03F 710046 (2013.01); G03F 710392 (2013.01); G03F 710397 (2013.01); G03F 712002 (2013.01); G03F 712037 (2013.01); G03F 71325 (2013.01);\n\n(Continued)\n\nCPC .... G03F 7/038; G03F 7/0388; G03F 7/0392; G03F 7/32; G03F 7/40; C08F 220/18; C08F 220/12; C08F 220/20; C08F 220/26; H0lL 21/0271; H01L 21/0273; H0lL 21/0274 USPC ............ 430/270.1, 322, 325, 329, 434, 435, 430/913, 914; 526/320, 326\n\nSee application file for complete search history.\n\nUS009423690B2\n\nUS009423690B2\n\n- (IO) Patent No.:\n- (45) Date of Patent:\n\nUS 9,423,690 B2\n\nAug. 23, 2016\n\n## (56) References Cited\n\n## U.S. PATENT DOCUMENTS\n\n(Continued)\n\n## FOREIGN PATENT DOCUMENTS\n\n(Continued)\n\n## OTHER PUBLICATIONS\n\nSearch Report dated Nov. 12, 2013, issued by the International Searching Authority in counterpart International Application No. PCT/JP2013/072485.\n\n(Continued)\n\nPrimary Examiner - Amanda C Walke\n\n(74) Attorney, Agent, or Firm - Sughrue Mion, PLLC\n\n## (57) ABSTRACT\n\nThere is provided a pattern forming method, including: (a) forming a film by using an electron beam-sensitive or extreme ultraviolet ray-sensitive resin composition contain› ing a resin (A) having a repeating unit represented by Formula (1-0) and a repeating unit represented by Formula (1-2); (b) exposing the film by using an electron beam or extreme ultraviolet ray; and ( c) developing the exposed film by using a developer containing an organic solvent to form a negative pattern, wherein a content of the repeating unit represented by Formula (1-0) is 45 mo!% or more based on a whole repeating units in the resin (A).\n\n## 14 Claims, No Drawings", + "recall": 0.9814814814814815, + "true_md": "1111111111111111 11111 1111111111 1111111111 111111111111111 111111111111111111 US009423690B2 \n\n# c12) United States Patent Takizawa et al.\n\n# (IO) Patent No.: US 9,423,690 B2\n\n# (45) Date of Patent: Aug. 23, 2016\n\n# (54) PATTERN FORMING METHOD, ELECTRON BEAM-SENSITIVE OR EXTREME ULTRAVIOLET RAY-SENSITIVE RESIN COMPOSITION, RESIST FILM, AND METHOD FOR MANUFACTURING ELECTRONIC DEVICE, AND ELECTRONIC DEVICE USING THE SAME\n\n- (71) Applicant: FUJIFILM Corporation, Tokyo (JP) \n\n- (72) Inventors: Hiroo Takizawa, Shizuoka (JP); Shuji Hirano, Shizuoka (JP); Natsumi Yokokawa, Shizuoka (JP); Wataru Nihashi, Shizuoka (JP) \n\n- (73) Assignee: FUJIFILM Corporation, Tokyo (JP) \n\n- ( *) Notice: Subject to any disclaimer, the term of this patent is extended or adjusted under 35 U.S.C. 154(b) by 0 days. \n\n- (21) Appl. No.: 14/625,897 \n\n- (22) Filed: Feb. 19, 2015 \n\n- (63) Continuation of application No. PCT/JP2013/072485, filed on Aug. 16, 2013. \n\n- (51) Int. Cl. \n\n- (52) U.S. Cl. CPC ........... G03F 710388 (2013.01); C08F 141185 (2013.01); C08F 16110 (2013.01); C08F 24100 (2013.01); C08F 220118 (2013.01); C08F 220120 (2013.01); C08F 220126 (2013.01); G03F 710045 (2013.01); G03F 710046 (2013.01); G03F 710392 (2013.01); G03F 710397 (2013.01); G03F 712002 (2013.01); G03F 712037 (2013.01); G03F 71325 (2013.01); \n\n- (58) Field of Classification Search CPC .... G03F 7/038; G03F 7/0388; G03F 7/0392; G03F 7/32; G03F 7/40; C08F 220/18; C08F 220/12; C08F 220/20; C08F 220/26; H0lL 21/0271; H01L 21/0273; H0lL 21/0274 USPC ............ 430/270.1, 322, 325, 329, 434, 435, 430/913, 914; 526/320, 326 See application file for complete search history. \n\n(Continued) \n\n(Continued) \n\n## 14 Claims, No Drawings\n\n## (65) Prior Publication Data\n\n## Related U.S. Application Data\n\n## (30) Foreign Application Priority Data\n\n## (57) ABSTRACT\n\n## OTHER PUBLICATIONS\n\n## FOREIGN PATENT DOCUMENTS\n\n## U.S. PATENT DOCUMENTS\n\n## (56) References Cited\n\nUS 2015/0168834 Al Jun. 18, 2015 \n\nThere is provided a pattern forming method, including: (a) forming a film by using an electron beam-sensitive or extreme ultraviolet ray-sensitive resin composition contain› ing a resin (A) having a repeating unit represented by Formula (1-0) and a repeating unit represented by Formula (1-2); (b) exposing the film by using an electron beam or extreme ultraviolet ray; and ( c) developing the exposed film by using a developer containing an organic solvent to form a negative pattern, wherein a content of the repeating unit represented by Formula (1-0) is 45 mo!% or more based on a whole repeating units in the resin (A). \n\n(Continued) \n\nSearch Report dated Nov. 12, 2013, issued by the International Searching Authority in counterpart International Application No. PCT/JP2013/072485. \n\nPrimary Examiner - Amanda C Walke \n\n(74) Attorney, Agent, or Firm - Sughrue Mion, PLLC \n\n(Continued) \n\n(Continued)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8371077505016844, + "doc_id": "78a388960a7656a1f8a6b67eced69e8581ede2467cf5a37cf1f06533ac7652b1", + "edit_distance": 0.6069565217391304, + "f1_score": 0.9465930018416207, + "meteor": 0.8110556886780663, + "precision": 0.9178571428571428, + "pred_md": "## c12) United States Patent Gonsalves et al.\n\n## (54) NANOCOMPOSITE NEGATIVE RESISTS FOR NEXT GENERATION LITHOGRAPHIES\n\n- (75) Inventors:\n- (73) Assignee:\n- ( *) Notice:\n- (21) Appl. No.:\n\n10/324,642\n\n- (22) Filed:\n\nDec. 19, 2002\n\n## (65) Prior Publication Data\n\nUS 2006/0088787 Al Apr. 27, 2006\n\n- (51) Int. Cl.\n\nG03C 1173\n\n(2006.01)\n\nG03F 71038\n\n(2006.01)\n\nG03F 71039\n\n(2006.01)\n\nG03F 7120\n\n(2006.01)\n\n- (52) U.S. Cl.\n\n...............................\n\n430/270.1; 430/280.1;\n\n430/905; 430/910; 430/914; 430/921; 430/925;\n\n430/942; 430/966; 430/302; 430/325; 430/326;\n\n526/287; 526/279\n\n- (58) Field of Classification Search\n\n.............\n\n430/270.1,\n\n430/280.1, 302,325, 326, 905, 910, 914,\n\n430/921, 925, 966, 942\n\nSee application file for complete search history.\n\n## (56) References Cited\n\n## U.S. PATENT DOCUMENTS\n\nUS007049044B2\n\nUS007049044B2\n\n- (IO) Patent No.:\n- (45) Date of Patent:\n\nUS 7,049,044 B2\n\nMay 23, 2006\n\n6,884,562 Bl*\n\n4/2005\n\nSchadt, III et al.\n\n......\n\n430/270.1\n\n2002/0182541 Al*\n\n12/2002\n\nGonsalves ............... 430/287.1\n\nEP\n\nJP\n\n## FOREIGN PATENT DOCUMENTS\n\n0 473 547 Al * 8/1991\n\n6-228086\n\n*\n\n8/1994\n\n## OTHER PUBLICATIONS\n\nChem. Abstract (AN 1992:408654)-English abstract for EP 473547 (Steinmann et al).* Chem. Abstract (AN 1995: 198693 )-English abstract for JP 06-228086 (Muraoka et al).* JPO Abstract-English abstract for JP 06-228086 (Muraoka et al).* Full, formal English translation of JP 6-228086 of JP 6-228086 (Muraoka et al), provided by PTO.* Chem. Abstract 119:96450----English abstract for JP 5-086133 (Akashi et al).* Brainard, Robert L., et al., \"Resists for next generation lithography,\" Microelectronic Engineering (2002), article in\n\npress.\n\n## (Continued)\n\nPrimary Examiner-Sin Lee Clinton Wimbish\n\n(74) Attorney, Agent, or Firm-Kilpatrick Stockton LLP; J.\n\n## (57) ABSTRACT\n\nThe present invention provides new high resolution nano› composite resists applicable to next generation lithogra› phies, methods of making these novel resists, and methods of using these new resists in lithographic processes to effect state-of-the-art lithographies. New nanocomposite negative resists comprising a photoacid generating component, a styrene component, and an optional polyhedral oligosilse› quioxane component are provided. Negative resists of this invention may also contain an optional methacrylate com› ponent. This invention and the embodiments described herein constitute fundamentally new architectures for high resolution resists.\n\n## 32 Claims, 3 Drawing Sheets\n\nPHS\n\nPAG\n\n+\n\n## POSS (R = cyclopentyl)\n\nKenneth Gonsalves, Concord, NC (US); Mohammed Azam Ali, Charlotte, NC (US)\n\nThe University of North Carolina at Charlotte, Charlotte, NC (US)\n\nSubject to any disclaimer, the term of this patent is extended or adjusted under 35 U.S.C. 154(b) by 203 days.", + "recall": 0.9771863117870723, + "true_md": "# (IO) Patent No.: US 7,049,044 B2\n\n# (45) Date of Patent: May 23, 2006\n\n# c12) United States Patent\n\n# Gonsalves et al.\n\n# (54) NANOCOMPOSITE NEGATIVE RESISTS FOR NEXT GENERATION LITHOGRAPHIES\n\n- (75) Inventors: Kenneth Gonsalves, Concord, NC (US); Mohammed Azam Ali, Charlotte, NC (US) \n\n- (73) Assignee: The University of North Carolina at Charlotte, Charlotte, NC (US) \n\n- ( *) Notice: Subject to any disclaimer, the term of this patent is extended or adjusted under 35 U.S.C. 154(b) by 203 days. \n\n- (21) Appl. No.: 10/324,642 \n\n- (22) Filed: Dec. 19, 2002 \n\n## (65) Prior Publication Data\n\nUS 2006/0088787 Al Apr. 27, 2006 \n\nChem. Abstract (AN 1992:408654)-English abstract for EP 473547 (Steinmann et al).* \n\nChem. Abstract (AN 1995: 198693 )-English abstract for JP 06-228086 (Muraoka et al).* \n\nJPO Abstract-English abstract for JP 06-228086 (Muraoka et al).* \n\nFull, formal English translation of JP 6-228086 of JP 6-228086 (Muraoka et al), provided by PTO.* \n\nChem. Abstract 119:96450----English abstract for JP 5-086133 (Akashi et al).* \n\nBrainard, Robert L., et al., \"Resists for next generation lithography,\" Microelectronic Engineering (2002), article in press. \n\n(Continued) \n\nPrimary Examiner-Sin Lee (74) Attorney, Agent, or Firm-Kilpatrick Stockton LLP; J. Clinton Wimbish \n\n## (57) ABSTRACT\n\n## 32 Claims, 3 Drawing Sheets\n\n## U.S. PATENT DOCUMENTS\n\n## (56) References Cited\n\nThe present invention provides new high resolution nano› composite resists applicable to next generation lithogra› phies, methods of making these novel resists, and methods of using these new resists in lithographic processes to effect state-of-the-art lithographies. New nanocomposite negative resists comprising a photoacid generating component, a styrene component, and an optional polyhedral oligosilse› quioxane component are provided. Negative resists of this invention may also contain an optional methacrylate com› ponent. This invention and the embodiments described herein constitute fundamentally new architectures for high resolution resists. \n\n- (51) Int. Cl. G03C 1173 (2006.01) G03F 71038 (2006.01) G03F 71039 (2006.01) G03F 7120 (2006.01) \n\n- (52) U.S. Cl. ............................... 430/270.1; 430/280.1; 430/905; 430/910; 430/914; 430/921; 430/925; 430/942; 430/966; 430/302; 430/325; 430/326; 526/287; 526/279 \n\n- (58) Field of Classification Search ............. 430/270.1, 430/280.1, 302,325, 326, 905, 910, 914, 430/921, 925, 966, 942 See application file for complete search history. \n\n## FOREIGN PATENT DOCUMENTS\n\n## OTHER PUBLICATIONS\n\n1111111111111111 11111 1111111111 111111111111111 1111111111111111 IIII IIII IIII US007049044B2" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7186082239261684, + "doc_id": "773914aee99f3e65d2a55cfd6cca5cba9fa54c050371e57e92ea93393b9a8566", + "edit_distance": 0.75, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9736328125, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "US 2020/0050106 Al\n\nFeb. 13, 2020\n\n11", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "11 \n\nFeb. 13, 2020 \n\nUS 2020/0050106 Al" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9610822522434357, + "doc_id": "5d620401a607ffb94f6363cfcfcbbbca01094d758baf3a97be30dc577280b5e2", + "edit_distance": 0.0607661822985469, + "f1_score": 0.9818181818181817, + "meteor": 0.9856528663092228, + "precision": 0.99, + "pred_md": "US 2012/0003590 Al\n\n100\n\n[0480] Also, the pattern forming method of the present invention comprises a step of exposing and developing the resist film above.\n\n[0481] The composition of the present invention is typi› cally used as follows. That is, the composition of the present invention is typically coated on a support such as substrate to form a film.\n\n[0482] The thickness of the film is preferably from 0.02 to 0.1 µm. The method for coating the composition on a sub› strate is preferably spin coating, and the spinning speed is preferably from 1,000 to 3,000 rpm.\n\n[0483] For example, the composition is coated on such a substrate ( e.g., silicon/silicon dioxide-coated substrate, sili› con nitride and chromium-deposited quartz substrate) as used in the production of a precision integrated circuit device, an imprint mold or the like, by using a spinner, a coater or the like. Thereafter, the coating is dried to obtain an actinic ray› sensitive or radiation-sensitive film (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a \"resist film\"). Incidentally, a known antire› flection film may be previously provided by coating.\n\n[0484] Subsequently, the resist film is irradiated with an actinic ray or radiation, then preferably baked (usually at 80 to 150° C., preferably at 90 to 130° C.), and developed. By performing baking, a more excellent pattern can be obtained.\n\n[0485] Examples of the actinic ray or radiation include infrared light, visible light, ultraviolet light, far ultraviolet light, X-ray and electron beam. An actinic ray or radiation having, for example, a wavelength of250 nm or less, particu› larly 220 nm or less, is preferred. Such an actinic ray or radiation includes, for example, KrF excimer laser (248 nm), ArF excimerlaser(193 nm), F 2 excimerlaser(157 nm), X-ray and electron beam. The actinic ray or radiation is preferably, for example, KrF excimer laser, electron beam, X-ray or EUV light, more preferably electron beam, X-ray or EUV light.\n\n[0486] That is, the present invention also relates to an actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition for KrF excimer laser, electron beam, X-ray or EUV light (preferably electron beam, X-ray or EUV light).\n\n[0487] In the development step, an alkali developer is usu› ally used.\n\n[0488] Examples of the alkali developer include an alkaline aqueous solution containing inorganic alkalis such as sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, sodium carbonate, sodium silicate, sodium metasilicate and aqueous annnonia, primary amines such as ethylamine and n-propylamine, secondary amines such as diethylamine and di-n-butylamine, tertiary amines such as triethylamine and methyldiethylamine, alco› hol amines such as dimethylethanolamine and triethanola› mine, quaternary ammonium salts such as tetramethylammo› nium hydroxide and tetraethylammonium hydroxide, or cyclic amines such as pyrrole and piperidine.\n\n[0489] In the alkali developer, alcohols and a surfactant may be added in an appropriate amount.\n\n[0490] The concentration of the alkali developer is usually from 0.1 to 20 mass %. The pH of the alkali developer is usually from 10.0 to 15.0.\n\n[0491] Also, an imprint mold may be produced using the composition of the present invention. For details, please refer to, for example, Japanese Patent 4,109,085, JP-A-2008162101, and \"Yoshihiko Hirai (compiler), Nanoimprint no Kiso to Gijutsu Kaihatsu·Oyo Tenkai-Nanoimprint no Kiban Gijutsu to Saishin no Gijutsu Tenkai (Basic and Technology Expansion·Application Development of Nanoimprint-Sub› strate Technology of Nanoimprint and Latest Technology Expansion), Frontier Shuppan\".\n\n## EXAMPLES\n\n[0492] The present invention is described in greater detail below, but the contents of the present invention are not limited thereto.\n\n## <Resin>\n\n[0493] Resins P-1 to P-48 illustrated above were synthe› sized as follows.\n\n## Synthesis Example 1\n\n## Resin P-14\n\n[0494] Resin P-14 was synthesized according to the follow› ing scheme.\n\nJan. 5, 2012", + "recall": 0.9737704918032787, + "true_md": "Jan. 5, 2012 \n\n100 \n\nUS 2012/0003590 Al \n\n[0480] Also, the pattern forming method of the present invention comprises a step of exposing and developing the resist film above. \n\n[0481] The composition of the present invention is typi› cally used as follows. That is, the composition of the present invention is typically coated on a support such as substrate to form a film. \n\n[0482] The thickness of the film is preferably from 0.02 to 0.1 µm. The method for coating the composition on a sub› strate is preferably spin coating, and the spinning speed is preferably from 1,000 to 3,000 rpm. \n\n[0483] For example, the composition is coated on such a substrate ( e.g., silicon/silicon dioxide-coated substrate, sili› con nitride and chromium-deposited quartz substrate) as used in the production of a precision integrated circuit device, an imprint mold or the like, by using a spinner, a coater or the like. Thereafter, the coating is dried to obtain an actinic ray› sensitive or radiation-sensitive film (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a \"resist film\"). Incidentally, a known antire› flection film may be previously provided by coating. \n\n[0484] Subsequently, the resist film is irradiated with an actinic ray or radiation, then preferably baked (usually at 80 to 150° C., preferably at 90 to 130° C.), and developed. By performing baking, a more excellent pattern can be obtained. \n\n[0485] Examples of the actinic ray or radiation include infrared light, visible light, ultraviolet light, far ultraviolet light, X-ray and electron beam. An actinic ray or radiation having, for example, a wavelength of250 nm or less, particu› larly 220 nm or less, is preferred. Such an actinic ray or radiation includes, for example, KrF excimer laser (248 nm), ArF excimerlaser(193 nm), F$_{2 }$excimerlaser(157 nm), X-ray and electron beam. The actinic ray or radiation is preferably, for example, KrF excimer laser, electron beam, X-ray or EUV light, more preferably electron beam, X-ray or EUV light. \n\n[0486] That is, the present invention also relates to an actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition for KrF excimer laser, electron beam, X-ray or EUV light (preferably electron beam, X-ray or EUV light). \n\n[0487] In the development step, an alkali developer is usu› ally used. \n\n[0488] Examples of the alkali developer include an alkaline aqueous solution containing inorganic alkalis such as sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, sodium carbonate, sodium silicate, sodium metasilicate and aqueous annnonia, primary amines such as ethylamine and n-propylamine, secondary amines such as diethylamine and di-n-butylamine, tertiary amines such as triethylamine and methyldiethylamine, alco› hol amines such as dimethylethanolamine and triethanola› mine, quaternary ammonium salts such as tetramethylammo› nium hydroxide and tetraethylammonium hydroxide, or cyclic amines such as pyrrole and piperidine. \n\n[0489] In the alkali developer, alcohols and a surfactant may be added in an appropriate amount. \n\n[0490] The concentration of the alkali developer is usually from 0.1 to 20 mass %. The pH of the alkali developer is usually from 10.0 to 15.0. \n\n[0491] Also, an imprint mold may be produced using the composition of the present invention. For details, please refer to, for example, Japanese Patent 4,109,085, JP-A-2008- 162101, and \"Yoshihiko Hirai (compiler), Nanoimprint no Kiso to Gijutsu Kaihatsu•Oyo Tenkai-Nanoimprint no Kiban Gijutsu to Saishin no Gijutsu Tenkai (Basic and Technology Expansion•Application Development of Nanoimprint-Sub› strate Technology of Nanoimprint and Latest Technology Expansion), Frontier Shuppan\". \n\n[0492] The present invention is described in greater detail below, but the contents of the present invention are not limited thereto. \n\n[0493] Resins P-1 to P-48 illustrated above were synthe› sized as follows. \n\n## EXAMPLES\n\n## <Resin>\n\n## Resin P-14\n\n## Synthesis Example 1\n\n[0494] Resin P-14 was synthesized according to the follow› ing scheme." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8160281690518857, + "doc_id": "77b98c60f7619e7a777695bb92652d368c5d6989ed7797c43ef55e5343b1a0da", + "edit_distance": 0.398121387283237, + "f1_score": 0.9600000000000002, + "meteor": 0.6835336266261456, + "precision": 0.9368029739776952, + "pred_md": "21\n\n22\n\nThat is, the electron beam-sensitive or extreme ultraviolet ray-sensitive resin composition relating to the present inven› tion may be used as an electron beam-sensitive or extreme ultraviolet ray-sensitive resin composition for an organic solvent development, which is used for development using a developer containing an organic solvent. Here, the term, for an organic solvent development refers to a use that is used in a step of developing using a developer including at least an organic solvent.\n\nAs such, the present invention relates to an electron beam-sensitive or extreme ultraviolet ray-sensitive resin composition provided in the pattern forming method of the present invention.\n\nIt is preferred that the electron beam-sensitive or extreme ultraviolet ray-sensitive resin composition of the present invention is typically a resist composition and a negative type resist composition (that is, a resist composition for an organic solvent development), because a particularly good effect may be obtained. In addition, the composition relating to the present invention is typically a chemical amplification resist composition.\n\n## [1] Resin (A)\n\nThe resin (A) has the repeating unit represented by the following Formula (1-0), and the content of the repeating unit represented by the following Formula (1-0) is 45 mo!% or more based on the whole repeating units of the resin (A). Because the above content is 45 mo! % or more, high contrast (y value is high) may be achieved. In the case of forming a fine isolated space pattern, resolution and space width roughness may be improved, and in the case of forming a fine hole pattern, high resolution, good EL, uniformity of local pattern dimension may be achieved.\n\nThe repeating unit represented by the following Formula (1-0) is the repeating unit having the structure protected by the leaving group in which the carboxyl group as a polar group is decomposed by the action of an acid and left, and thus, the resin (A) is a resin in which the solubility to the develop contacting an organic solvent may be reduced by the action of an acid.\n\nIn Formula (1-0),\n\nR1 and R 2 each independently represent an alkyl group, Ru and R12 each independently represent an alkyl group, and R 13 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group. Ru and R 12 may be bound with each other to form a ring, and Ru and R13 may be bound with each other to form a ring.\n\nRa represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cyano group or a halogen atom, and L 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.\n\nUS 9,423,690 B2\n\nIn Formula (1-0),\n\nThe alkyl group as Ri, R 2 , Ru to R 13 is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, examples thereof include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, an-butyl group, a sec-butyl group, at-butyl group, a neopentyl group, a hexyl group, a 2-ethylhexyl group, an octyl group, a dodecyl group and the like.\n\nThe alkyl group ofR 1 and R 2 is preferably an alkyl group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably, R 1 and R2 both are an ethyl group, from the viewpoint of achieving the effect of the present invention surely.\n\nThe alkyl group of Ru and R 12 is preferably alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, more preferably, a methyl group or and ethyl group, and particularly preferably a methyl group.\n\nR13 is preferably a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.\n\nRu and R12 may be particularly preferably bound with form an alkylene group and to from a ring, and Ru and R 13 may be bound with from an alkylene group and then to form a ring.\n\nThe ring which Ru and R 12 are bound with form is preferably a 3- to 8-membered ring, and more preferably a 5- to 6-membered ring.\n\nThe ring which Ru and R 13 are bound with form is preferably a 3- to 8-membered ring, and more preferably a 5- to 6-membered ring.\n\nWhen Ru and R13 are bound with each other to form a ring is preferably the when Ru and R 12 are bound with each other to form a ring.\n\nThe ring formed by Ru and R 12 (or Ru and R 13 ) being bound with each other is more preferably an alicyclic group described as X of Formula (1-1).\n\nThe alkyl group ofR 1 , R2 , Ru to R 13 , and the ring formed by Ru and R 12 ( or Ru and R 13 ) being bound with each other, may further have a substituent.\n\nExamples of the further substituent possessed by the alkyl group ofR1 , R 2 , Ru to R 13 , and the ring formed by Ru and R12 (or Ru and R 13 ) being bound with each other may include a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an amino group, a hydroxyl group, a carboxyl group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, an arakyloxy group, a thioether group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, a cyano group and a nitro group and the like. The substituents may be bound with each other to form a ring. When the substitu› ents are bound with each other to form a ring, the ring includes a cycloalkyl group or phenyl group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms.\n\nThe alkyl group of Ra may have a substituent, and is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.\n\nPreferred examples of the substituent which may be possessed by the alkyl group of Ra may include a hydroxyl group, and a halogen atom.\n\nThe halogen atom of Ra includes a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, and an oxo atom.\n\nRa is preferably a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, a hydroxymethyl group, a perfluoroalkyl group (for example, trifluoromethyl group) having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably methyl group, from the viewpoint of improving the glass transition temperature (Tg), the resolu› tion, and the space width roughness of resin (A).\n\nBut, if L 1 is a phenylene group, Ra is preferably a hydrogen atom.\n\nThe divalent linking group represented by L 1 includes an alkylene group, a divalent aromatic ring group, -COO› Lu-, -0-Lu -, a group in combination of two or more thereof, and the like. Here, Lu represents an alkylene group,\n\n5\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n60\n\n65", + "recall": 0.984375, + "true_md": "22 \n\n21 \n\nUS 9,423,690 B2 \n\nIn Formula (1-0), \n\nThe alkyl group as Ri, R$_{2}$ , Ru to R$_{13 }$is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, examples thereof include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, an-butyl group, a sec-butyl group, at-butyl group, a neopentyl group, a hexyl group, a 2-ethylhexyl group, an octyl group, a dodecyl group and the like. \n\nThat is, the electron beam-sensitive or extreme ultraviolet ray-sensitive resin composition relating to the present inven› tion may be used as an electron beam-sensitive or extreme ultraviolet ray-sensitive resin composition for an organic solvent development, which is used for development using a developer containing an organic solvent. Here, the term, for an organic solvent development refers to a use that is used in a step of developing using a developer including at least an organic solvent. \n\nAs such, the present invention relates to an electron beam-sensitive or extreme ultraviolet ray-sensitive resin composition provided in the pattern forming method of the present invention. \n\nIt is preferred that the electron beam-sensitive or extreme ultraviolet ray-sensitive resin composition of the present invention is typically a resist composition and a negative type resist composition (that is, a resist composition for an organic solvent development), because a particularly good effect may be obtained. In addition, the composition relating to the present invention is typically a chemical amplification resist composition. \n\nThe resin (A) has the repeating unit represented by the following Formula (1-0), and the content of the repeating unit represented by the following Formula (1-0) is 45 mo!% or more based on the whole repeating units of the resin (A). Because the above content is 45 mo! % or more, high contrast (y value is high) may be achieved. In the case of forming a fine isolated space pattern, resolution and space width roughness may be improved, and in the case of forming a fine hole pattern, high resolution, good EL, uniformity of local pattern dimension may be achieved. \n\n[1] Resin (A) \n\nThe repeating unit represented by the following Formula (1-0) is the repeating unit having the structure protected by the leaving group in which the carboxyl group as a polar group is decomposed by the action of an acid and left, and thus, the resin (A) is a resin in which the solubility to the develop contacting an organic solvent may be reduced by the action of an acid. \n\nThe alkyl group ofR$_{1 }$ and R$_{2 }$ is preferably an alkyl group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably, R$_{1 }$ and R$_{2 }$ both are an ethyl group, from the viewpoint of achieving the effect of the present invention surely. \n\nThe alkyl group of Ru and R$_{12 }$is preferably alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, more preferably, a methyl group or and ethyl group, and particularly preferably a methyl group. \n\nR$_{13 }$ is preferably a hydrogen atom or a methyl group. \n\nRu and R$_{12 }$ may be particularly preferably bound with form an alkylene group and to from a ring, and Ru and R$_{13 }$ may be bound with from an alkylene group and then to form a ring. \n\nThe ring which Ru and R$_{12 }$ are bound with form is preferably a 3- to 8-membered ring, and more preferably a 5- to 6-membered ring. \n\nThe ring which Ru and R$_{13 }$ are bound with form is preferably a 3- to 8-membered ring, and more preferably a 5- to 6-membered ring. \n\nWhen Ru and R$_{13 }$ are bound with each other to form a ring is preferably the when Ru and R$_{12 }$are bound with each other to form a ring. \n\nThe ring formed by Ru and R$_{12 }$ (or Ru and R$_{13}$ ) being bound with each other is more preferably an alicyclic group described as X of Formula (1-1). \n\nThe alkyl group ofR$_{1}$ , R$_{2}$ , Ru to R$_{13}$, and the ring formed by Ru and R$_{12 }$( or Ru and R 13 ) being bound with each other, may further have a substituent. \n\nExamples of the further substituent possessed by the alkyl group ofR$_{1}$ , R 2 , Ru to R 13 , and the ring formed by Ru and R$_{12 }$ (or Ru and R$_{13}$ ) being bound with each other may include a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an amino group, a hydroxyl group, a carboxyl group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, an arakyloxy group, a thioether group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, a cyano group and a nitro group and the like. The substituents may be bound with each other to form a ring. When the substitu› ents are bound with each other to form a ring, the ring includes a cycloalkyl group or phenyl group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms. \n\nThe alkyl group of Ra may have a substituent, and is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms. \n\nPreferred examples of the substituent which may be possessed by the alkyl group of Ra may include a hydroxyl group, and a halogen atom. \n\nThe halogen atom of Ra includes a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, and an oxo atom. \n\nRa is preferably a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, a hydroxymethyl group, a perfluoroalkyl group (for example, trifluoromethyl group) having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably methyl group, from the viewpoint of improving the glass transition temperature (Tg), the resolu› tion, and the space width roughness of resin (A). \n\nBut, if L$_{1 }$ is a phenylene group, Ra is preferably a hydrogen atom. \n\nThe divalent linking group represented by L$_{1 }$ includes an alkylene group, a divalent aromatic ring group, -COO› Lu-, -0-Lu -, a group in combination of two or more thereof, and the like. Here, Lu represents an alkylene group, \n\nR$_{1 }$ and R$_{2 }$ each independently represent an alkyl group, Ru and R$_{12 }$ each independently represent an alkyl group, and R$_{13 }$ represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group. Ru and R$_{12 }$may be bound with each other to form a ring, and Ru and R$_{13 }$may be bound with each other to form a ring. \n\nRa represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cyano group or a halogen atom, and L$_{1 }$ represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. \n\nIn Formula (1-0)," + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7186082239261684, + "doc_id": "9a6458a47ad23be7301597ea56a59929cd031d0518f36d9a377c4bebe12f6910", + "edit_distance": 0.25, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9736328125, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "US 2012/0003590 Al\n\nJan. 5, 2012\n\n69", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "US 2012/0003590 Al \n\n69 \n\nJan. 5, 2012" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8374564886913898, + "doc_id": "860ce9df908ffc8251e833fe598c608b44e7332da70e1862e56c28d32fa1ea60", + "edit_distance": 0.2339622641509434, + "f1_score": 0.8888888888888888, + "meteor": 0.8884553425098475, + "precision": 0.8860759493670886, + "pred_md": "119\n\n120\n\n-continued\n\n-continued\n\nMeO\n\nFrom the results shown in Table 5, it can be seen that the photosensitive compositions in the invention have also excel› lent performances as the negative resist compositions in KrF excimer laser exposure.\n\n## Examples 27 to 32 and Comparative Example 5\n\n## Preparation of Resist\n\nA positive resist solution having the concentration of solids content of 12 mass % is prepared by dissolving the components in the solvents respectively shown in Table 3, and filtrating the solution through a polytetrafluoroethylene filter having a pore size of0.1 µm.\n\n## Evaluation of Resist:\n\nThe prepared positive resist solution is uniformly coated on a silicon substrate having been subjected to hexamethyldisilazane treatment by a spin coater, and dried by heating on a hot plate at 120° C. for 60 seconds to form a resist film having a thickness of0.3 µm.\n\nThe resist film is irradiated with an electron beam projection lithographic apparatus (accelerating voltage: 100 keV, manufactured by Nikon Corporation), and heated on a hot plate at 110° C. for 90 seconds just after irradiation. Further, the resist film is developed with a 2.38 mass% tetramethylammonium hydroxide aqueous solution at 23° C. for 60 secands, rinsed with pure water for 30 seconds, and then dried to form a line and space pattern. Performances are evaluated in the same manner as in Example 1.\n\nUS 7,851,130 B2\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n60\n\n65\n\nCL-4", + "recall": 0.89171974522293, + "true_md": "120 \n\nUS 7,851,130 B2 \n\n119 \n\n-continued \n\nFrom the results shown in Table 5, it can be seen that the photosensitive compositions in the invention have also excel› lent performances as the negative resist compositions in KrF excimer laser exposure. \n\nA positive resist solution having the concentration of solids content of 12 mass % is prepared by dissolving the compo- nents in the solvents respectively shown in Table 3, and fil- trating the solution through a polytetrafluoroethylene filter having a pore size of0.1 µm. \n\nEvaluation of Resist: \n\nThe prepared positive resist solution is uniformly coated on a silicon substrate having been subjected to hexamethyldisi- lazane treatment by a spin coater, and dried by heating on a hot plate at 120° C. for 60 seconds to form a resist film having a thickness of0.3 µm. \n\nThe resist film is irradiated with an electron beam projec- tion lithographic apparatus (accelerating voltage: 100 keV, manufactured by Nikon Corporation), and heated on a hot plate at 110° C. for 90 seconds just after irradiation. Further, the resist film is developed with a 2.38 mass% tetramethyl- ammonium hydroxide aqueous solution at 23° C. for 60 sec- ands, rinsed with pure water for 30 seconds, and then dried to form a line and space pattern. Performances are evaluated in the same manner as in Example 1. \n\n## Preparation of Resist\n\n## Examples 27 to 32 and Comparative Example 5\n\n-continued \n\nVP-5000 (manufactured by Nippon Soda Co., Ltd.)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5410822690539396, + "doc_id": "3cc9633a260c78adf4878a42d8e77e15d708b02e10a006cefd4353c26032e3d4", + "edit_distance": 0.8333333333333334, + "f1_score": 0.9090909090909091, + "meteor": 0.8745098039215687, + "precision": 0.8333333333333334, + "pred_md": "US 2021/0033970 Al\n\nFeb.4,2021\n\n-continued\n\n77", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Feb.4,2021 \n\n77 \n\nUS 2021/0033970 Al" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9540496849623685, + "doc_id": "f70fea77289f4c9f5aa344df8d3610532ec577d60aa589e615a980d0824aaec7", + "edit_distance": 0.7369668246445498, + "f1_score": 0.965925925925926, + "meteor": 0.7816718107337878, + "precision": 0.9588235294117647, + "pred_md": "15\n\n16\n\nbranched or cyclic monohydric alcohol, and specifically, it is possible to use 1-butanol, 2-butanol, 3-methyl-1-butanol, tert-butylalcohol, 1-pentanol, 2-pentanol, 1-hexanol, 1-hep› tanol, 1-octanol, 2-hexanol, 2-heptanol, 2-octanol, 3-hexa› nol, 3-heptanol, 3-octanol, 4-octanol, 3-methyl-3-pentanol, cyclopentanol, 2,3-dimethyl-2-butanol, 3,3-dimethyl-2-bu› tanol, 2-methyl-2-pentanol, 2-methyl-3-pentanol, 3-methyl2-pentanol, 3-methyl-3-pentanol, 4-methyl-2-pentanol, 4-methyl-3-pentanol, cyclohexanol, 5-methyl-2-hexanol, 4-methyl-2-hexanol, 4,5-dityl-2-hexanol, 6-methyl-2-heptano!, 7-methyl-2-octanol, 8-methyl-2-nonanol, 9-methyl-2decanol, and the like, preferably 1-hexanol, 2-hexanol, 1-pentanol, 3-methyl-1-butanol, 3-methyl-2-pentanol, 3-methyl-3-pentanol, 4-methyl-2-pentanol, 4-methyl-3-pen› tanol, and most preferably 1-hexanol or 4-methyl-2-pentano!.\n\nExamples of hydrocarbon-based solvent may include an aromatic hydrocarbon-based solvent such as toluene and xylene, and an aliphatic hydrocarbon-based solvent such as octane and decane.\n\nUS 9,423,690 B2\n\n5\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\nThe rinse liquid contains more preferably at least one kind selected from the group consisting of 1-hexanol, 4-methyl2-pentanol and decane.\n\nA plurality of the components may be mixed, or they may be used in a mixture with an organic solvent other than those described above. The solvent may be mixed with water, but the water content ratio of the rinse liquid is usually 60% by mass or less, preferably 30% by mass or less, more prefer› ably 10% by mass or less, most preferably 5% by mass or less. By setting the water content 60% by mass or less, good 30 rinse effect may be obtained. 25\n\nThe rinse liquid may also be used by adding an appro› priate amount of a surfactant thereto. As a surfactant, the same surfactant may be used as in the electron beam› sensitive or extreme ultraviolet ray-sensitive resin compo› sition. The amount of the surfactant used is usually 0.001 % by mass to 5% by mass, preferably 0.005% by mass to 2% by mass, and more preferably 0.01 % by mass to 0.5% by mass, based on the total amount of the rinse liquid.\n\n## Rinsing Method\n\n35\n\n40\n\nIn the rinsing process, the wafer subjected to development is washed by using the rinse liquid including an organic solvent.\n\nThe method of washing treatment is not particularly limited, but it is possible to apply, for example, a method of 45 continuously ejecting a rinse liquid on a substrate spinning at a constant speed (spin coating method), a method of dipping a substrate in a bath filled with a rinse liquid for a fixed time ( dipping method), a method of spraying a rinse liquid on a substrate surface (spraying method), and the like, 50 and among them, it is preferred that the rinsing treatment is performed by the spin coating method and after the rinsing, the substrate is spun at a rotational speed from 2,000 rpm to 4,000 rpm to remove the rinse liquid from the substrate.\n\nThe time of rinsing is not particularly limited, but it is usually 10 to 300 seconds, preferably 10 to 180 seconds, and most preferably 20 to 120 seconds.\n\nThe temperature of the rinse liquid is preferably 0° C. to 50° C., and more preferably 15° C. to 35° C.\n\nIn addition, after the development treatment or rinsing treatment, the process of removing the developer or the rinse liquid attached on the pattern may be performed by super› critical fluid.\n\nFurther, after the development treatment or rinsing treat› ment or the treatment by supercritical fluid, the heating treatment may be performed to remove a residual solvent in the pattern. The heating temperature is not particularly\n\n55\n\n60\n\n65\n\nlimited as long as it may obtain a good resist pattern, and it usually 40° C. to 160° C., preferably 50° C. to 150° C., and most preferably 50° C. to 110° C. The heating time is not particularly limited as long as it may obtain a good resist pattern, and it is usually 15 to 300 seconds, and preferably 15 to 180 seconds.\n\n## Alkali Development\n\nThe pattern forming method of the present invention includes further a resist pattern forming process (alkali development process) by using an alkali aqueous solution. Accordingly, the finer pattern may be formed.\n\nIn the present invention, the portion having weak expo› sure strength is removed by the organic solvent development process ( 4), but by performing more the alkali development process, the portion having strong exposure strength may be removed. Because, by the multiple development process performing the development multiple times, the pattern forming method may be carried out without dissolving only the area having an intermediate exposure strength, the finer pattern than as usual may be formed (the same mechanism as in [0077] of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-292975).\n\nThe alkaline development may be performed by using the developer containing an organic solvent before or after the development process ( 4), but developing before the organic solvent development process (4) is more preferred.\n\nExamples of an alkali aqueous solution which may be used in the alkali development include inorganic alkalis such as sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, sodium carbon› ate, sodium silicate, sodium methasilicate and ammonia water, primary amines such as ethylamine and n-propylam› ine, secondary amines such as diethylamine and di-n-butylamine, tertiary amines such as triethylamine and methyl› diethylamine, alcohol amines such as dimethylethanol amine and triethanol amine, quaternary anmionium salts such as tetramethyl ammonium hydroxide and tetraethyl ammonium hydroxide, and an alkaline aqueous solution of cyclic amine such as pyrrole and piperidine.\n\nFurther, in the alkaline aqueous solution, an appropriate amount of alcohol and surfactants may be added.\n\nThe alkaline concentration of the alkali development is usually 0.1 to 20% by mass.\n\n- The pH of the alkaline development is usually 10.0 to 15.0.\n- In particular, a 2.38% by mass aqueous solution of tetramethyl ammonium hydroxide is preferred.\n\nThe alkaline development time is not particularly limited, and it is usually 10 to 300 seconds, and preferably 20 to 120 seconds.\n\nThe temperature of the alkaline development is preferably 0° C. to 50° C., and more preferably 15° C. to 35° C.\n\nAfter the development treatment by an alkali aqueous solution, the rinsing treatment may be carried out. As a rinse liquid in the rinsing treatment, the pure water is preferred, and an appropriate amount of surfactants may be added thereto and used.\n\nIn addition, after the development process or rinsing process, the heating treatment may be performed to remove the moisture remaining in the pattern.\n\nFurther, the process of removing the residual developer or the rinse liquid may be carried out by heating. The heating temperature is not particularly limited as long as it may obtain a good resist pattern, and it usually 40° C. to 160° C. The heating temperature is preferably 50° C. to 150° C., and most preferably 50° C. to 110° C. The heating time is not", + "recall": 0.9731343283582089, + "true_md": "16 \n\nUS 9,423,690 B2 \n\n15 \n\nbranched or cyclic monohydric alcohol, and specifically, it is possible to use 1-butanol, 2-butanol, 3-methyl-1-butanol, tert-butylalcohol, 1-pentanol, 2-pentanol, 1-hexanol, 1-hep› tanol, 1-octanol, 2-hexanol, 2-heptanol, 2-octanol, 3-hexa› nol, 3-heptanol, 3-octanol, 4-octanol, 3-methyl-3-pentanol, cyclopentanol, 2,3-dimethyl-2-butanol, 3,3-dimethyl-2-bu› tanol, 2-methyl-2-pentanol, 2-methyl-3-pentanol, 3-methyl- 2-pentanol, 3-methyl-3-pentanol, 4-methyl-2-pentanol, 4-methyl-3-pentanol, cyclohexanol, 5-methyl-2-hexanol, 4-methyl-2-hexanol, 4,5-dityl-2-hexanol, 6-methyl-2-hepta- no!, 7-methyl-2-octanol, 8-methyl-2-nonanol, 9-methyl-2- decanol, and the like, preferably 1-hexanol, 2-hexanol, 1-pentanol, 3-methyl-1-butanol, 3-methyl-2-pentanol, 3-methyl-3-pentanol, 4-methyl-2-pentanol, 4-methyl-3-pen› tanol, and most preferably 1-hexanol or 4-methyl-2-penta- no!. \n\nlimited as long as it may obtain a good resist pattern, and it usually 40° C. to 160° C., preferably 50° C. to 150° C., and most preferably 50° C. to 110° C. The heating time is not particularly limited as long as it may obtain a good resist pattern, and it is usually 15 to 300 seconds, and preferably 15 to 180 seconds. \n\nAlkali Development \n\nThe pattern forming method of the present invention includes further a resist pattern forming process (alkali development process) by using an alkali aqueous solution. Accordingly, the finer pattern may be formed. \n\nIn the present invention, the portion having weak expo› sure strength is removed by the organic solvent development process ( 4), but by performing more the alkali development process, the portion having strong exposure strength may be removed. Because, by the multiple development process performing the development multiple times, the pattern forming method may be carried out without dissolving only the area having an intermediate exposure strength, the finer pattern than as usual may be formed (the same mechanism as in [0077] of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-292975). \n\nExamples of hydrocarbon-based solvent may include an aromatic hydrocarbon-based solvent such as toluene and xylene, and an aliphatic hydrocarbon-based solvent such as octane and decane. \n\nThe rinse liquid contains more preferably at least one kind selected from the group consisting of 1-hexanol, 4-methyl- 2-pentanol and decane. \n\nA plurality of the components may be mixed, or they may be used in a mixture with an organic solvent other than those described above. The solvent may be mixed with water, but the water content ratio of the rinse liquid is usually 60% by mass or less, preferably 30% by mass or less, more prefer› ably 10% by mass or less, most preferably 5% by mass or less. By setting the water content 60% by mass or less, good rinse effect may be obtained. \n\nThe alkaline development may be performed by using the developer containing an organic solvent before or after the development process ( 4), but developing before the organic solvent development process (4) is more preferred. \n\nExamples of an alkali aqueous solution which may be used in the alkali development include inorganic alkalis such as sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, sodium carbon› ate, sodium silicate, sodium methasilicate and ammonia water, primary amines such as ethylamine and n-propylam› ine, secondary amines such as diethylamine and di-n-bu- tylamine, tertiary amines such as triethylamine and methyl› diethylamine, alcohol amines such as dimethylethanol amine and triethanol amine, quaternary anmionium salts such as tetramethyl ammonium hydroxide and tetraethyl ammonium hydroxide, and an alkaline aqueous solution of cyclic amine such as pyrrole and piperidine. \n\nThe rinse liquid may also be used by adding an appro› priate amount of a surfactant thereto. As a surfactant, the same surfactant may be used as in the electron beam› sensitive or extreme ultraviolet ray-sensitive resin compo› sition. The amount of the surfactant used is usually 0.001 % by mass to 5% by mass, preferably 0.005% by mass to 2% by mass, and more preferably 0.01 % by mass to 0.5% by mass, based on the total amount of the rinse liquid. \n\nRinsing Method \n\nIn the rinsing process, the wafer subjected to development is washed by using the rinse liquid including an organic solvent. \n\nThe method of washing treatment is not particularly limited, but it is possible to apply, for example, a method of continuously ejecting a rinse liquid on a substrate spinning at a constant speed (spin coating method), a method of dipping a substrate in a bath filled with a rinse liquid for a fixed time ( dipping method), a method of spraying a rinse liquid on a substrate surface (spraying method), and the like, and among them, it is preferred that the rinsing treatment is performed by the spin coating method and after the rinsing, the substrate is spun at a rotational speed from 2,000 rpm to 4,000 rpm to remove the rinse liquid from the substrate. \n\nThe temperature of the rinse liquid is preferably 0° C. to 50° C., and more preferably 15° C. to 35° C. \n\nFurther, after the development treatment or rinsing treat› ment or the treatment by supercritical fluid, the heating treatment may be performed to remove a residual solvent in the pattern. The heating temperature is not particularly \n\nFurther, the process of removing the residual developer or the rinse liquid may be carried out by heating. The heating temperature is not particularly limited as long as it may obtain a good resist pattern, and it usually 40° C. to 160° C. The heating temperature is preferably 50° C. to 150° C., and most preferably 50° C. to 110° C. The heating time is not \n\nIn addition, after the development process or rinsing process, the heating treatment may be performed to remove the moisture remaining in the pattern. \n\nAfter the development treatment by an alkali aqueous solution, the rinsing treatment may be carried out. As a rinse liquid in the rinsing treatment, the pure water is preferred, and an appropriate amount of surfactants may be added thereto and used. \n\nThe temperature of the alkaline development is preferably 0° C. to 50° C., and more preferably 15° C. to 35° C. \n\nThe alkaline development time is not particularly limited, and it is usually 10 to 300 seconds, and preferably 20 to 120 seconds. \n\nIn particular, a 2.38% by mass aqueous solution of tetramethyl ammonium hydroxide is preferred. \n\nThe pH of the alkaline development is usually 10.0 to 15.0. \n\nThe alkaline concentration of the alkali development is usually 0.1 to 20% by mass. \n\nFurther, in the alkaline aqueous solution, an appropriate amount of alcohol and surfactants may be added. \n\nThe time of rinsing is not particularly limited, but it is 55 usually 10 to 300 seconds, preferably 10 to 180 seconds, and most preferably 20 to 120 seconds. \n\nIn addition, after the development treatment or rinsing 60 treatment, the process of removing the developer or the rinse liquid attached on the pattern may be performed by super› critical fluid." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9596047482923087, + "doc_id": "f2feff251b0380f94d4218af6b416f3a3cca556dcda92c5c0abaeddf2012c917", + "edit_distance": 0.03076923076923077, + "f1_score": 0.9579579579579579, + "meteor": 0.9858607115934013, + "precision": 0.9579579579579579, + "pred_md": "119\n\n-continued\n\n5\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\nIn the resin (A) used in the composition of the present invention, the molar ratio of respective repeating structural units contained is appropriately set in order to control dry etching resistance of the resist, suitability for a standard developer, adhesion to a substrate and resist profile and 35 further resolution, heat resistance, sensitivity and the like which are performances generally required for the resist.\n\nThe form of the resin (A) in the present invention may be any form of a random type, a block type, a comb type and a star type.\n\n40\n\nThe resin (A) may be synthesized, for example, by polymerization of radicals, cations, or anions of an unsatu› rated monomer, corresponding to each structure. In addition, it is possible to obtain a target resin by using an unsaturated monomer corresponding to a precursor of each structure to 45 polymerize, and then performing a polymerization.\n\nExamples of a general synthesis method include a batch polymerization method of dissolving an unsaturated mono› mer and a polymerization initiator in a solvent and heating the solution to perform a polymerization, a dropping polymerization method of adding dropwise a solution containing an unsaturated monomer and a polymerization initiator to a heated solvent over 1 to 10 hours, and the like, and a dropping polymerization method is preferred.\n\n50\n\nExamples of the solvent used for a polymerization include 55 the solvent that may be used to prepare an electron beam› sensitive or extreme ultraviolet ray-sensitive resin compo› sition, which will be described later. The polymerization is more preferably performed by using the same solvent as one used in the photosensitive composition of the present inven60 tion. Accordingly, generation of particles during storage may be suppressed.\n\nThe polymerization reaction is preferably performed under an inert gas atmosphere such as nitrogen or argon. As for the polymerization initiator, the polymerization is initiated by using a commercially available radical initiator (azo-based initiator, peroxide and the like). The radical\n\n65\n\nUS 9,423,690 B2\n\n120\n\ninitiator is preferably an azo-based initiator, and an azo› based initiator having an ester group, a cyano group or a carboxyl group is preferred. Preferred examples of the initiator include azobisisobutyronitrile, azobisdimethylvaleronitrile, dimethyl 2,2'-azobis(2-methylpropionate) and the like. If necessary, the polymerization may be carried out in the presence of a chain transfer agent (for example, alkyl› mercaptans, and the like).\n\nThe concentration of the reaction is 5% by mass to 70% by mass, and preferably 10% by mass to 50% by mass. The temperature of the reaction is usually 10° C. to 150° C., preferably 30° C. to 120° C., and more preferably 40° C. to 100° C.\n\nAfter the completion of reaction, the reaction solution is allowed to cool to room temperature and be purified. The purification may be performed by a typical method, such as a liquid-liquid extraction method of applying water-washing or combining water-washing with an appropriate solvent to remove residual monomers or oligomer components, a purification method in a solution state, such as ultrafiltration of removing only polymers having a molecular weight not more than a specific molecular weight by virtue of extrac› tion, a reprecipitation method of adding dropwise a resin solution in a poor solvent to solidify the resin in the poor solvent thereby removing residual monomers and the like, a purification method in a solid state, such as washing of the resin slurry separated by filtration with a poor solvent, and the like. For example, the resin is precipitated as a solid by contacting the reaction solution with a solvent (poor solvent) in which the resin is sparingly soluble or insoluble, in a volumetric amount of 10 times or less and preferably 10 to 5 times the reaction solution.\n\nThe solvent used at the time of operation of precipitation or reprecipitation from the polymer solution (precipitation or reprecipitation solvent) may be sufficient if the solvent is a poor solvent for the polymer, and the solvent may be appropriately selected from a hydrocarbon, a halogenated hydrocarbon, a nitro compound, ether, ketone, ester, carbon› ate, alcohol, carboxylic acid, water, and a mixed solvent including these solvents, according to the kind of the poly› mer, and may be used. Among these solvents, a solvent including at least alcohol (particularly, methanol or the like) or water is preferred as the precipitation or reprecipitation solvent.\n\nThe amount of the precipitation or reprecipitation solvent used may be appropriately selected by considering the efficiency, yield and the like, but in general, the amount is 100 parts by mass to 10,000 parts by mass, preferably 200 by parts by mass to 2,000 parts by mass, and more preferably 300 parts by mass to 1,000 parts by mass, based on 100 parts by mass of the polymer solution.\n\nThe temperature at the time of precipitation or reprecipitation may be appropriately selected by considering the efficiency or operability but is usually in the order from 0 to 50° C., and preferably in the vicinity of room temperature (for example, approximately from 20° C. to 35° C.). The precipitation or reprecipitation operation may be performed by a known method such as batch system and continuous system using a commonly employed mixing vessel such as a stirring tank.\n\nThe precipitated or reprecipitated polymer is usually subjected to commonly employed solid-liquid separation such as filtration and centrifugation, then dried and used. The filtration is performed by using a solvent-resistant filter element, and preferably under pressure. The drying is per› formed under atmospheric pressure or reduced pressure (preferably under reduced pressure) at a temperature of", + "recall": 0.9579579579579579, + "true_md": "120 \n\nUS 9,423,690 B2 \n\n119 \n\nIn the resin (A) used in the composition of the present invention, the molar ratio of respective repeating structural units contained is appropriately set in order to control dry etching resistance of the resist, suitability for a standard developer, adhesion to a substrate and resist profile and further resolution, heat resistance, sensitivity and the like which are performances generally required for the resist. \n\nThe form of the resin (A) in the present invention may be any form of a random type, a block type, a comb type and a star type. \n\nThe resin (A) may be synthesized, for example, by polymerization of radicals, cations, or anions of an unsatu› rated monomer, corresponding to each structure. In addition, it is possible to obtain a target resin by using an unsaturated monomer corresponding to a precursor of each structure to polymerize, and then performing a polymerization. \n\nExamples of a general synthesis method include a batch polymerization method of dissolving an unsaturated mono› mer and a polymerization initiator in a solvent and heating the solution to perform a polymerization, a dropping polym- erization method of adding dropwise a solution containing an unsaturated monomer and a polymerization initiator to a heated solvent over 1 to 10 hours, and the like, and a dropping polymerization method is preferred. \n\nExamples of the solvent used for a polymerization include the solvent that may be used to prepare an electron beam› sensitive or extreme ultraviolet ray-sensitive resin compo› sition, which will be described later. The polymerization is more preferably performed by using the same solvent as one used in the photosensitive composition of the present inven- tion. Accordingly, generation of particles during storage may be suppressed. \n\nThe polymerization reaction is preferably performed under an inert gas atmosphere such as nitrogen or argon. As for the polymerization initiator, the polymerization is initi- ated by using a commercially available radical initiator (azo-based initiator, peroxide and the like). The radical \n\ninitiator is preferably an azo-based initiator, and an azo› based initiator having an ester group, a cyano group or a carboxyl group is preferred. Preferred examples of the initiator include azobisisobutyronitrile, azobisdimethylvale- ronitrile, dimethyl 2,2’-azobis(2-methylpropionate) and the like. If necessary, the polymerization may be carried out in the presence of a chain transfer agent (for example, alkyl› mercaptans, and the like). \n\nThe concentration of the reaction is 5% by mass to 70% by mass, and preferably 10% by mass to 50% by mass. The temperature of the reaction is usually 10° C. to 150° C., preferably 30° C. to 120° C., and more preferably 40° C. to 100° C. \n\nAfter the completion of reaction, the reaction solution is allowed to cool to room temperature and be purified. The purification may be performed by a typical method, such as a liquid-liquid extraction method of applying water-washing or combining water-washing with an appropriate solvent to remove residual monomers or oligomer components, a puri- fication method in a solution state, such as ultrafiltration of removing only polymers having a molecular weight not more than a specific molecular weight by virtue of extrac› tion, a reprecipitation method of adding dropwise a resin solution in a poor solvent to solidify the resin in the poor solvent thereby removing residual monomers and the like, a purification method in a solid state, such as washing of the resin slurry separated by filtration with a poor solvent, and the like. For example, the resin is precipitated as a solid by contacting the reaction solution with a solvent (poor solvent) in which the resin is sparingly soluble or insoluble, in a volumetric amount of 10 times or less and preferably 10 to 5 times the reaction solution. \n\nThe solvent used at the time of operation of precipitation or reprecipitation from the polymer solution (precipitation or reprecipitation solvent) may be sufficient if the solvent is a poor solvent for the polymer, and the solvent may be appropriately selected from a hydrocarbon, a halogenated hydrocarbon, a nitro compound, ether, ketone, ester, carbon› ate, alcohol, carboxylic acid, water, and a mixed solvent including these solvents, according to the kind of the poly› mer, and may be used. Among these solvents, a solvent including at least alcohol (particularly, methanol or the like) or water is preferred as the precipitation or reprecipitation solvent. \n\nThe amount of the precipitation or reprecipitation solvent used may be appropriately selected by considering the efficiency, yield and the like, but in general, the amount is 100 parts by mass to 10,000 parts by mass, preferably 200 by parts by mass to 2,000 parts by mass, and more preferably 300 parts by mass to 1,000 parts by mass, based on 100 parts by mass of the polymer solution. \n\nThe temperature at the time of precipitation or reprecipi- tation may be appropriately selected by considering the efficiency or operability but is usually in the order from 0 to 50° C., and preferably in the vicinity of room temperature (for example, approximately from 20° C. to 35° C.). The precipitation or reprecipitation operation may be performed by a known method such as batch system and continuous system using a commonly employed mixing vessel such as a stirring tank. \n\nThe precipitated or reprecipitated polymer is usually subjected to commonly employed solid-liquid separation such as filtration and centrifugation, then dried and used. The filtration is performed by using a solvent-resistant filter element, and preferably under pressure. The drying is per› formed under atmospheric pressure or reduced pressure (preferably under reduced pressure) at a temperature of" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8600551563736076, + "doc_id": "da98679df1113b2b8b3f97673ffd1cd465aa723d73e464c1abfcca4533af330e", + "edit_distance": 0.15, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9762585755145309, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Patent Application Publication\n\nJan. 10, 2019 Sheet 3 of 10\n\nUS 2019/0010119 Al\n\nFIG 3.\n\nFIG 3.", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Patent Application Publication \n\nJan. 10, 2019 Sheet 3 of 10 \n\nUS 2019/0010119 Al \n\nFIG 3." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7759833060678196, + "doc_id": "a0cb25e636056e7d95ff0b4115d22a3c223ab1831e8c04784dbe020d632bb3c8", + "edit_distance": 0.6348448687350835, + "f1_score": 0.937354988399072, + "meteor": 0.8086735223450672, + "precision": 0.9181818181818182, + "pred_md": "## c12) United States Patent Kawanishi et al.\n\n## (54) PHOTOSENSITIVE COMPOSITION, COMPOUND FOR USE IN THE PHOTOSENSITIVE COMPOSITION, AND PATTERN-FORMING METHOD USING THE PHOTOSENSITIVE COMPOSITION\n\n- (75) Inventors:\n\nYasutomo Kawanishi,\n\nAshigarakami-gun (JP); Kenji Wada, Haibara-gun (JP)\n\n- (73) Assignee:\n\nFUJIFILM Corporation, Tokyo (JP)\n\n- ( *) Notice:\n\nSubject to any disclaimer, the term ofthis patent is extended or adjusted under 35 U.S.C. 154(b) by 42 days.\n\nThis patent is subject to a terminal dis› claimer.\n\n- (21) Appl. No.:\n\n11/857,645\n\n- (22) Filed:\n\n## (65) Prior Publication Data\n\nSep.19,2007\n\nUS 2008/0081288 Al Apr. 3, 2008\n\n## (30) Foreign Application Priority Data\n\nSep. 19, 2006 (JP) ............................. 2006-253381\n\n- (51) Int. Cl.\n- (52) U.S. Cl.\n- (58)\n\n## (56) References Cited\n\nG03F\n\n71038\n\n(2006.01)\n\nG03F 71039\n\n(2006.01)\n\nG03F 7120\n\n(2006.01)\n\nG03F 7130\n\n(2006.01)\n\nC07D 497100\n\n(2006.01)\n\n....................\n\n430/270.1; 430/922; 430/325;\n\n430/326; 430/942; 430/966; 549/26; 549/16;\n\n549/17; 549/20\n\n## Field of Classification Search .......................\n\nNone\n\nSee application file for complete search history.\n\n## U.S. PATENT DOCUMENTS\n\n6,680,157 Bl\n\n2006/0210919 Al *\n\n2007/0072117 Al*\n\n1/2004\n\nFedynyshyn\n\n9/2006\n\nMizutani et al.\n\n.........\n\n430/270.1\n\n3/2007\n\nMizutani et al.\n\n.........\n\n430/270.1\n\n## FOREIGN PATENT DOCUMENTS\n\n## EP 1480078 Al 5/2004\n\nUS007851130B2\n\nUS007851130B2\n\n- (IO) Patent No.:\n\nUS 7,851,130 B2\n\n- (45) Date of Patent:\n\n*Dec. 14, 2010\n\n## OTHER PUBLICATIONS\n\nMachine-assisted English translation of JP2006-276759 provided by JPO.*\n\n* cited by examiner\n\nPrimary Examiner-Sin J. Lee\n\n(74) Attorney, Agent, or Firm-Sughrue Mion, PLLC\n\n## (57) ABSTRACT\n\nA photosensitive composition includes (A) a compound rep› resented by the following formula (I):\n\nwherein R to R 1 13 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent, Z represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and x- represents an anion containing a proton acceptor functional group.\n\n## 16 Claims, 1 Drawing Sheet", + "recall": 0.957345971563981, + "true_md": "# c12) United States Patent\n\n# Kawanishi et al.\n\n# (IO) Patent No.: US 7,851,130 B2\n\n# (45) Date of Patent: *Dec. 14, 2010\n\n# (54) PHOTOSENSITIVE COMPOSITION, COMPOUND FOR USE IN THE PHOTOSENSITIVE COMPOSITION, AND PATTERN-FORMING METHOD USING THE PHOTOSENSITIVE COMPOSITION\n\n- (75) Inventors: Yasutomo Kawanishi, Ashigarakami-gun (JP); Kenji Wada, Haibara-gun (JP) \n\n- (73) Assignee: FUJIFILM Corporation, Tokyo (JP) \n\n- ( *) Notice: Subject to any disclaimer, the term ofthis patent is extended or adjusted under 35 U.S.C. 154(b) by 42 days. This patent is subject to a terminal dis› claimer. \n\n- (21) Appl. No.: 11/857,645 \n\n- (22) Filed: Sep.19,2007 \n\n- (51) Int. Cl. \n\n- (52) U.S. Cl. .................... 430/270.1; 430/922; 430/325; 430/326; 430/942; 430/966; 549/26; 549/16; 549/17; 549/20 \n\n## OTHER PUBLICATIONS\n\n## (57) ABSTRACT\n\n## 16 Claims, 1 Drawing Sheet\n\n## FOREIGN PATENT DOCUMENTS\n\n## U.S. PATENT DOCUMENTS\n\n## (56) References Cited\n\n## (30) Foreign Application Priority Data\n\n## (65) Prior Publication Data\n\n- (58) Field of Classification Search ....................... None See application file for complete search history. \n\nwherein R $^{1 }$to R $^{13 }$each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent, Z represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and x- represents an anion containing a proton acceptor functional group. \n\nA photosensitive composition includes (A) a compound rep› resented by the following formula (I): \n\nPrimary Examiner-Sin J. Lee \n\n(74) Attorney, Agent, or Firm-Sughrue Mion, PLLC \n\n* cited by examiner \n\nMachine-assisted English translation of JP2006-276759 provided by JPO.* \n\n1111111111111111 11111 1111111111 111111111111111 11111 11111 111111111111111111 US007851130B2 \n\nUS 2008/0081288 Al Apr. 3, 2008 \n\nSep. 19, 2006 (JP) ............................. 2006-253381 \n\nEP 1480078 Al 5/2004" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7983204528725996, + "doc_id": "51d5cfc7aefaa079d769a829f7bd83c84aa8918d1def187fa43910ddbec602ed", + "edit_distance": 0.14124293785310735, + "f1_score": 0.9734513274336283, + "meteor": 0.8782762782014238, + "precision": 0.9821428571428571, + "pred_md": "US 2020/0050106 Al\n\nFeb. 13, 2020\n\n[0199] The lactone structural moiety may have a substitu› ent (Rb2 ). Preferred examples of the substituent (Rb 2 ) include an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, a cycloalkyl group having 4 to 7 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, an alkoxycarbonyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, a carboxyl group, a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, a cyano group, and an acid› decomposable group. n 2 represents an integer ofO to 4. In a case where n 2 is 2 or more, the substituents (Rb 2 ) which are present in plural number may be the same as or different from each other, and the substituents (Rb 2 ) which are present in plural number may be bonded to each other to form a ring.\n\n[0200] Examples of the repeating unit having a group having a lactone structure represented by any one of General Formulae (LCl-1) to (LCl-17) include a repeating unit represented by General Formula (AI).\n\n[0201] In General Formula (AI), Rb 0 represents a hydro› gen atom, a halogen atom, or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.\n\n[0202] Preferred examples of the substituent which may be contained in the alkyl group of Rb 0 include a hydroxyl group and a halogen atom.\n\n[0203] Examples of the halogen atom of Rb 0 include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, and an iodine atom. As Rb 0 , a hydrogen atom or a methyl group is preferable.\n\n14\n\n-continued", + "recall": 0.9649122807017544, + "true_md": "US 2020/0050106 Al \n\nFeb. 13, 2020 \n\n14 \n\n[0199] The lactone structural moiety may have a substitu› ent (Rb$_{2}$). Preferred examples of the substituent (Rb 2 ) include an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, a cycloalkyl group having 4 to 7 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, an alkoxycarbonyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, a carboxyl group, a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, a cyano group, and an acid› decomposable group. n$_{2 }$ represents an integer ofO to 4. In a case where n$_{2 }$ is 2 or more, the substituents (Rb$_{2}$) which are present in plural number may be the same as or different from each other, and the substituents (Rb$_{2}$ ) which are present in plural number may be bonded to each other to form a ring. \n\n[0200] Examples of the repeating unit having a group having a lactone structure represented by any one of General Formulae (LCl-1) to (LCl-17) include a repeating unit represented by General Formula (AI). \n\n[0201] In General Formula (AI), Rb$_{0 }$ represents a hydro› gen atom, a halogen atom, or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms. \n\n[0202] Preferred examples of the substituent which may be contained in the alkyl group of Rb$_{0 }$ include a hydroxyl group and a halogen atom. \n\n[0203] Examples of the halogen atom of Rb$_{0 }$ include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, and an iodine atom. As Rb$_{0}$ , a hydrogen atom or a methyl group is preferable." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5789300674674098, + "doc_id": "fd9d634a7707f4431189c4423eed4b99b3221df53233d94c187785e51bf4e507", + "edit_distance": 0.3333333333333333, + "f1_score": 0.9090909090909091, + "meteor": 0.8203389830508474, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "US 7,851,130 B2\n\n33\n\n34", + "recall": 0.8333333333333334, + "true_md": "34 \n\nUS 7,851,130 B2 \n\n33 \n\n-continued" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "b7fd685abcdecaa4822defea8b16343c295b367847358da160b7c0195d6d25b9", + "edit_distance": 0.8333333333333334, + "f1_score": 0.5217391304347826, + "meteor": 0.6310013717421126, + "precision": 0.35294117647058826, + "pred_md": "55\n\n56\n\n-continued\n\nUS 9,423,690 B2\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\nas\n\n\"\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n60\n\n65", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "US 9,423,690 B2 \n\n55 \n\n56 \n\n-continued \n\n-continued" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9293268540260099, + "doc_id": "880650eea44b60e079c69274e6cc4296c70567e2d0930eba08503fcf12fcf54b", + "edit_distance": 0.11578947368421053, + "f1_score": 0.984375, + "meteor": 0.9967087679486838, + "precision": 0.9692307692307692, + "pred_md": "US 2019/0010119 Al\n\nJan. 10, 2019\n\n[0086] In the general formula (A2), Z represents a mon› ovalent anion. Illustrative examples thereof include a sul› fonate anion, an arylsulfonate anion, and an alkanesulfonate anion, and is preferably an arylsulfonate anion, although z› is not particularly limited. Specifically, the compounds hav› ing sulfonium anions with the following structures are more preferable, but the anion of the sulfonium salt used for the inventive resist composition is not limited thereto.\n\nlp;lp\n\n17", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Jan. 10, 2019 \n\n17 \n\nUS 2019/0010119 Al \n\n[0086] In the general formula (A2), Z represents a mon› ovalent anion. Illustrative examples thereof include a sul› fonate anion, an arylsulfonate anion, and an alkanesulfonate anion, and is preferably an arylsulfonate anion, although z› is not particularly limited. Specifically, the compounds hav› ing sulfonium anions with the following structures are more preferable, but the anion of the sulfonium salt used for the inventive resist composition is not limited thereto." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6493358309501979, + "doc_id": "2a15c346c4c3cf399d0a6b8714639c8fb6ad9181148273ffd1798f854203387e", + "edit_distance": 0.3333333333333333, + "f1_score": 0.9411764705882353, + "meteor": 0.9616126543209877, + "precision": 0.8888888888888888, + "pred_md": "US 2012/0003590 Al\n\nJan. 5, 2012\n\n-continued\n\n6", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "US 2012/0003590 Al \n\n6 \n\nJan. 5, 2012" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8555286642747182, + "doc_id": "25730c7dac012f2c70d50eccf457402d05fcc5355155d8e7a25ed5261e22585e", + "edit_distance": 0.145, + "f1_score": 0.9292929292929292, + "meteor": 0.9895509784909576, + "precision": 0.8679245283018868, + "pred_md": "89\n\n-continued\n\nAcid Crosslinking Agent (E) Capable of Crosslinking with the Alkali-Soluble Resin by the Action of an Acid:\n\nHereinafter also referred to as \"component (E)\" or \"a crosslinking agent\".\n\nA crosslinking agent is used in the negative photosensitive composition of the invention.\n\nEvery compound capable of crosslinking the resins soluble in an alkali developing solution by the action of an acid can be used as crosslinking agents, but the following (1) to (3) are preferably used.\n\n- (1) A hydroxymethyl material, an alkoxymethyl material and an acyloxymethyl material of phenol derivatives,\n- (2) Compounds having an N-hydroxymethyl group, an N-alkoxy-methyl group, or an N-acyloxymethyl group, and\n- (3) Compounds having an epoxy group.\n\nThe alkoxymethyl group preferably has 6 or less carbon atoms, and the acyloxymethyl group preferably has 6 or less carbon atoms.\n\n- Of these crosslinking agents, particularly preferred com› pounds are shown below.\n\nUS 7,851,130 B2\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n60\n\n65\n\n90\n\n-continued\n\nOH\n\nOH\n\nOH", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "90 \n\nUS 7,851,130 B2 \n\n89 \n\n-continued \n\n-continued \n\nAcid Crosslinking Agent (E) Capable of Crosslinking with the Alkali-Soluble Resin by the Action of an Acid: \n\nHereinafter also referred to as \"component (E)\" or \"a crosslinking agent\". \n\nA crosslinking agent is used in the negative photosensitive composition of the invention. \n\nEvery compound capable of crosslinking the resins soluble in an alkali developing solution by the action of an acid can be used as crosslinking agents, but the following (1) to (3) are preferably used. \n\n(1) A hydroxymethyl material, an alkoxymethyl material and an acyloxymethyl material of phenol derivatives, \n\n(2) Compounds having an N-hydroxymethyl group, an N-alkoxy-methyl group, or an N-acyloxymethyl group, and \n\n(3) Compounds having an epoxy group. \n\nThe alkoxymethyl group preferably has 6 or less carbon atoms, and the acyloxymethyl group preferably has 6 or less carbon atoms. \n\nOf these crosslinking agents, particularly preferred com› pounds are shown below." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9453069849565373, + "doc_id": "dc0322c543f38dc2e0fa938eae5aa9e9d90d12336f5c8e66786731f9e4178e9f", + "edit_distance": 0.5211864406779662, + "f1_score": 0.9512195121951221, + "meteor": 0.90870106303227, + "precision": 0.9605911330049262, + "pred_md": "US 2012/0003590 Al\n\npounds synthesized in Examples of JP-A-2002-363146 and the compounds described in paragraph 0108 of JP-A-2007298569.\n\n[0437] A photosensitive basic compound may be also used as the basic compound. Examples of the photosensitive basic compound which can be used include the compounds described in JP-T-2003-524799 (the term \"JP-T\" as used herein means a \"published Japanese translation of a PCT patent application\") and J. Photopolym. Sci. & Tech., Vol. 8, pp. 543-553 (1995).\n\n[0438] The molecular weight of the basic compound is usually from 100 to 1,500, preferably from 150 to 1,300, more preferably from 200 to 1,000.\n\n[0439] One of these basic compounds may be used alone, or two or more kinds thereof may be used in combination.\n\n[0440] In the case where the composition of the present invention contains a basic compound, the content thereof is preferably from 0.01 to 8.0 mass%, more preferably from 0.1 to 5.0 mass%, still more preferably from 0.2 to 4.0 mass%, based on the entire solid content of the composition.\n\n[0441] The molar ratio of the basic compound to the photo› acid generator is preferably from 0.01 to 10, more preferably from 0.05 to 5, still more preferably from 0.1 to 3.\n\n[0442] If this molar ratio is excessively large, there is a case that sensitivity and/or resolution may be reduced. If this molar ratio is excessively small, thinning of the pattern may occur between exposure and heating (post-baking). The molar ratio is more preferably from 0.05 to 5, still more preferably from 0.1 to 3. The photo-acid generator in the molar ratio above is based on the total amount of the repeating unit (B) in the resin and the photo-acid generator which may be further contained in the resin.\n\n## (Surfactant)\n\n[0443] The composition of the present invention may fur› ther contain a surfactant. The surfactant is preferably a fluo› rine-containing and/or silicon-containing surfactant.\n\n[0444] Examples of the fluorine-containing and/or silicon› containing surfactant include Megaface Fl 76 and Megaface ROS produced by Dainippon Ink & Chemicals, Inc.; PF656 and PF6320 produced by OMNOVA; Troysol S-366 pro› duced by Troy Chemical; Florad FC430 produced by Sumi› tomo 3M Inc.; and Polysiloxane Polymer KP-341 produced by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.\n\n[0445] A surfactant other than the fluorine-containing and/ or silicon-containing surfactant may be also used. Examples of this surfactant include a nonionic surfactant such as poly› oxyethylene alkyl ethers and polyoxyethylene alkylaryl ethers.\n\n[0446] In addition, known surfactants may be appropriately used. Examples of the surfactant which can be used include the surfactants described in paragraph [0273] et seq. of U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2008/0248425Al.\n\n[0447] One kind of a surfactant may be used alone, or two or more kinds of surfactants may be used in combination.\n\n[0448] In the case where the composition of the present invention further contains a surfactant, the amount used thereof is preferably from 0.0001 to 2 mass %, more prefer› ably from 0.001 to 1 mass%, based on the entire solid content of the composition.\n\n(Dye)\n\n[0449] The composition of the present invention may fur› ther contain a dye.\n\n98\n\nJan. 5, 2012\n\n[0450] Preferred examples of the dye include an oil dye and a basic dye. Specific examples thereof include Oil Yellow #101, Oil Yellow #103, Oil Pink #312, Oil Green BG, Oil Blue BOS, Oil Blue #603, Oil Black BY, Oil Black BS, Oil Black T-505 (all produced by Orient Chemical Industries, Ltd.), Crystal Violet (C142555), Methyl Violet (C142535), RhodamineB (C145170B), MalachiteGreen(C142000), and Methylene Blue (C152015).\n\n## (Photo-Base Generator)\n\n[0451] The composition of the present invention may fur› ther contain a photo-base generator. When a photo-base gen› erator is contained, a more excellent pattern can be formed.\n\n[0452] Examples of the photo-base generator include the compounds described in JP-A-4-151156, JP-A-4-162040, JP-A-5-197148, JP-A-5-5995, JP-A-6-194834, JP-A-8146608, JP-A-10-83079 and European Patent No. 622682. Specific preferred examples of the photo-base generator include 2-nitrobenzyl carbamate, 2,5-dinitrobenzylcyclo› hexy I carbamate, N-cyclohexy 1-4-methy lpheny !sulfonamide and 1, 1-dimethy 1-2-pheny lethy 1-N-isopropy I carbamate.\n\n## (Antioxidant)\n\n[0453] The composition of the present invention may fur› ther contain an antioxidant. When an antioxidant is contained, the organic material can be prevented from oxidation in the presence of oxygen.\n\n[0454] Examples of the antioxidant include a phenol-based antioxidant, an antioxidant composed of an organic acid derivative, a sulfur-containing antioxidant, a phosphorus› based antioxidant, an amine-based antioxidant, an antioxi› dant composed of an amine-aldehyde condensate, and an antioxidant composed of an amine-ketone condensate. Out of these antioxidants, a phenol-based antioxidant or an antioxi› dant composed of an organic acid derivative is preferably used. When such an antioxidant is used, the function as an antioxidant can be brought out without deteriorating the per› formance of the composition,\n\n[0455] Examples of the phenol-based antioxidant which can be used include substituted phenols, and bis-, trisand poly-phenols.\n\n[0456] Examples of the substituted phenols include l-oxy3-methyl-4-isopropylbenzene, 2,6-di-tert-butylphenol, 2,6di-tert-butyl-4-ethylphenol, 2,6-di-tert-butyl-4-methylphe› nol, 4-hydroxymethy 1-2, 6-di-tert-buty !phenol, buty lhydroxyanisole, 2-( 1-methy lcyclohexyl )-4, 6-dimeth› y lphenol, 2,4-dimethyl-6-tert-butylphenol, 2-methyl-4,6-di› nonylphenol, 2,6-di-tert-butyl-a-dimethylamino-p-cresol, 6-( 4-hydroxy-3,5-di-tert-butylanilino )-2,4-bis-octyl-thio-l, 3,5-triazine, n-octadecyl-3-( 4'-hydroxy-3',5'-di-tert-butyl› phenyl)propionate, octylated phenol, aralkyl-substituted phenols, alkylated p-cresol, and hindered phenol.\n\n[0457] Examples of the bis-, tris- and poly-phenols include 4,4 '-dihydroxydipheny I, methy lenebis( dimethy 1-4, 6-phe› nol ), 2,2'-methylene-bis-( -methyl-6-tert-butylphenol), 2,2'› 4 methylene-bis-( 4-methyl-6-cyclohexyl-phenol), 2,2'-meth› y lene-bis-( 4-ethyl-6-tert-buty !phenol), 4,4 '-methylene-bis(2,6-di-tert-butylphenol ), 2,2'-methylene-bis-(6alphamethyl-benzyl-p-cresol), methylene-crosslinked polyhydric alkylphenol, 4,4'-butylidenebis-(3-methyl-6-tert› butylphenol), 1, 1-bis-( 4-hydroxyphenye-cyclohexane, 2,2'› dihydroxy-3,3'-di-a-methylcyclohexyl)-5,5'-dimethyldiphe› nylmethane, alkylated bisphenol, hindered bisphenol, 1,3,5-", + "recall": 0.9420289855072463, + "true_md": "US 2012/0003590 Al \n\n98 \n\nJan. 5, 2012 \n\npounds synthesized in Examples of JP-A-2002-363146 and the compounds described in paragraph 0108 of JP-A-2007- 298569. \n\n[0437] A photosensitive basic compound may be also used as the basic compound. Examples of the photosensitive basic compound which can be used include the compounds described in JP-T-2003-524799 (the term \"JP-T\" as used herein means a \"published Japanese translation of a PCT patent application\") and J. Photopolym. Sci. & Tech., Vol. 8, pp. 543-553 (1995). \n\n[0438] The molecular weight of the basic compound is usually from 100 to 1,500, preferably from 150 to 1,300, more preferably from 200 to 1,000. \n\n[0439] One of these basic compounds may be used alone, or two or more kinds thereof may be used in combination. \n\n[0440] In the case where the composition of the present invention contains a basic compound, the content thereof is preferably from 0.01 to 8.0 mass%, more preferably from 0.1 to 5.0 mass%, still more preferably from 0.2 to 4.0 mass%, based on the entire solid content of the composition. \n\n[0441] The molar ratio of the basic compound to the photo› acid generator is preferably from 0.01 to 10, more preferably from 0.05 to 5, still more preferably from 0.1 to 3. \n\n[0442] If this molar ratio is excessively large, there is a case that sensitivity and/or resolution may be reduced. If this molar ratio is excessively small, thinning of the pattern may occur between exposure and heating (post-baking). The molar ratio is more preferably from 0.05 to 5, still more preferably from 0.1 to 3. The photo-acid generator in the molar ratio above is based on the total amount of the repeating unit (B) in the resin and the photo-acid generator which may be further contained in the resin. \n\n[0450] Preferred examples of the dye include an oil dye and a basic dye. Specific examples thereof include Oil Yellow #101, Oil Yellow #103, Oil Pink #312, Oil Green BG, Oil Blue BOS, Oil Blue #603, Oil Black BY, Oil Black BS, Oil Black T-505 (all produced by Orient Chemical Industries, Ltd.), Crystal Violet (C142555), Methyl Violet (C142535), RhodamineB (C145170B), MalachiteGreen(C142000), and Methylene Blue (C152015). \n\n[0451] The composition of the present invention may fur› ther contain a photo-base generator. When a photo-base gen› erator is contained, a more excellent pattern can be formed. \n\n[0452] Examples of the photo-base generator include the compounds described in JP-A-4-151156, JP-A-4-162040, JP-A-5-197148, JP-A-5-5995, JP-A-6-194834, JP-A-8- 146608, JP-A-10-83079 and European Patent No. 622682. Specific preferred examples of the photo-base generator include 2-nitrobenzyl carbamate, 2,5-dinitrobenzylcyclo› hexy I carbamate, N-cyclohexy 1-4-methy lpheny !sulfonamide and 1, 1-dimethy 1-2-pheny lethy 1-N-isopropy I carbamate. \n\n## (Photo-Base Generator)\n\n[0453] The composition of the present invention may fur› ther contain an antioxidant. When an antioxidant is contained, the organic material can be prevented from oxidation in the presence of oxygen. \n\n[0454] Examples of the antioxidant include a phenol-based antioxidant, an antioxidant composed of an organic acid derivative, a sulfur-containing antioxidant, a phosphorus› based antioxidant, an amine-based antioxidant, an antioxi› dant composed of an amine-aldehyde condensate, and an antioxidant composed of an amine-ketone condensate. Out of these antioxidants, a phenol-based antioxidant or an antioxi› dant composed of an organic acid derivative is preferably used. When such an antioxidant is used, the function as an antioxidant can be brought out without deteriorating the per› formance of the composition, \n\n[0443] The composition of the present invention may fur› ther contain a surfactant. The surfactant is preferably a fluo› rine-containing and/or silicon-containing surfactant. \n\n[0444] Examples of the fluorine-containing and/or silicon› containing surfactant include Megaface Fl 76 and Megaface ROS produced by Dainippon Ink & Chemicals, Inc.; PF656 and PF6320 produced by OMNOVA; Troysol S-366 pro› duced by Troy Chemical; Florad FC430 produced by Sumi› tomo 3M Inc.; and Polysiloxane Polymer KP-341 produced by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd. \n\n[0445] A surfactant other than the fluorine-containing and/ or silicon-containing surfactant may be also used. Examples of this surfactant include a nonionic surfactant such as poly› oxyethylene alkyl ethers and polyoxyethylene alkylaryl ethers. \n\n[0446] In addition, known surfactants may be appropriately used. Examples of the surfactant which can be used include the surfactants described in paragraph [0273] et seq. of U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2008/0248425Al. \n\n[0447] One kind of a surfactant may be used alone, or two or more kinds of surfactants may be used in combination. \n\n[0448] In the case where the composition of the present invention further contains a surfactant, the amount used thereof is preferably from 0.0001 to 2 mass %, more prefer› ably from 0.001 to 1 mass%, based on the entire solid content of the composition. \n\n[0449] The composition of the present invention may fur› ther contain a dye. \n\n## (Surfactant)\n\n## (Dye)\n\n## (Antioxidant)\n\n[0455] Examples of the phenol-based antioxidant which can be used include substituted phenols, and bis-, tris- and poly-phenols. \n\n[0456] Examples of the substituted phenols include l-oxy- 3-methyl-4-isopropylbenzene, 2,6-di-tert-butylphenol, 2,6- di-tert-butyl-4-ethylphenol, 2,6-di-tert-butyl-4-methylphe› nol, 4-hydroxymethy 1-2, 6-di-tert-buty !phenol, buty lhydroxyanisole, 2-( 1-methy lcyclohexyl )-4, 6-dimeth› y lphenol, 2,4-dimethyl-6-tert-butylphenol, 2-methyl-4,6-di› nonylphenol, 2,6-di-tert-butyl-a-dimethylamino-p-cresol, 6-( 4-hydroxy-3,5-di-tert-butylanilino )-2,4-bis-octyl-thio-l, 3,5-triazine, n-octadecyl-3-( 4’-hydroxy-3’,5’-di-tert-butyl› phenyl)propionate, octylated phenol, aralkyl-substituted phenols, alkylated p-cresol, and hindered phenol. \n\n[0457] Examples of the bis-, tris- and poly-phenols include 4,4 ’-dihydroxydipheny I, methy lenebis( dimethy 1-4, 6-phe› nol ), 2,2’-methylene-bis-( 4-methyl-6-tert-butylphenol), 2,2’› methylene-bis-( 4-methyl-6-cyclohexyl-phenol), 2,2’-meth› y lene-bis-( 4-ethyl-6-tert-buty !phenol), 4,4 ’-methylene-bis- (2,6-di-tert-butylphenol ), 2,2’-methylene-bis-(6- alphamethyl-benzyl-p-cresol), methylene-crosslinked polyhydric alkylphenol, 4,4’-butylidenebis-(3-methyl-6-tert› butylphenol), 1, 1-bis-( 4-hydroxyphenye-cyclohexane, 2,2’› dihydroxy-3,3’-di-a-methylcyclohexyl)-5,5’-dimethyldiphe› nylmethane, alkylated bisphenol, hindered bisphenol, 1,3,5-" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.794927944461869, + "doc_id": "4e913b7cf31184af347a56301fd441ed2ea1bfb2e54a5782054b6f889718e722", + "edit_distance": 0.3742690058479532, + "f1_score": 0.8888888888888888, + "meteor": 0.9517396184062852, + "precision": 0.8095238095238095, + "pred_md": "## UNITED STATES PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE CERTIFICATE OF CORRECTION\n\nPATENT NO.\n\n: 6,482,565 Bl\n\nDATED\n\n: November 19, 2002\n\nINVENTOR(S)\n\n: Jae Chang et al.\n\nPage 2 of 5\n\nIt is certified that error appears in the above-identified patent and that said Letters Patent is hereby corrected as shown below:\n\n## Column 4,\n\nLines 30-40, please replace Chemical Formula 4 with the following Chemical Formula 4: --\n\nLines 43-50, please replace Chemical Formula 5 with the following Chemical Formula 5:\n\nLine 54, the phrase \"I is a number of Oto 5;\" should read -l is a number of Oto 5; --.\n\n## Column 5,\n\nLines 19-20, the phrase \"In the following Reaction Scheme 1, m of the Chemical Formula 1 is O:\" should read -- In the following Reaction Scheme 1, m of the Chemical Formula 1 is 0: --.", + "recall": 0.9855072463768116, + "true_md": "It is certified that error appears in the above-identified patent and that said Letters Patent is hereby corrected as shown below: \n\nLines 30-40, please replace Chemical Formula 4 with the following Chemical Formula 4: --\n\nColumn 4, \n\nLines 43-50, please replace Chemical Formula 5 with the following Chemical Formula 5: \n\nLine 54, the phrase \"I is a number of Oto 5;\" should read -- l is a number of Oto 5; --. \n\nColumn 5, \n\nLines 19-20, the phrase \"In the following Reaction Scheme 1, m of the Chemical Formula 1 is O:\" should read -- In the following Reaction Scheme 1, m of the Chemical Formula 1 is 0: --. \n\n## UNITED STATES PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE CERTIFICATE OF CORRECTION\n\nPage 2 of 5" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7634199602276185, + "doc_id": "81dca06253724d08c1c223272dcfddb95d1aba5b66ddcd4492802508936104b6", + "edit_distance": 0.4488888888888889, + "f1_score": 0.9615384615384615, + "meteor": 0.7820482685769625, + "precision": 0.9541984732824428, + "pred_md": "US 7,344,821 B2\n\n83\n\nR1 to R 6 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a fluorine atom, provided that at least one ofR 1 to R 6 represents a fluorine atom; Z represents an alkylene group, an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom; m represents an integer of O to 2; and Re represents a hydrogen atom or an unsubstituted methyl\n\n- group;\n\n- 2. The positive resist composition according to claim 1, wherein R 1 to R 6 each represents a fluorine atom.\n- 3. The positive resist composition according to claim 1, wherein the resin (B) further comprises at least one of a repeating unit represented by formula (Bl) and a repeating unit represented by formula (B2):\n\n84\n\n- wherein B 1 and B 2 each represents a group capable of decomposing by an action of an acid, or a group including a group capable of decomposing by an action of an acid to generate a carboxyl group or a hydroxyl group; and B represents a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, a halogen 3 atom or a cyano group. 4. The positive resist composition according to claim 3, wherein B 1 and B2 each includes a cyclic structure. 5. A pattern formation method comprising: forming a resist film from a positive resist composition according to claim 1; exposing the resist film with an electron beam, an EUV light or an X ray, so as to form an exposed resist film; and developing the exposed resist film. 1,\n- 6. The positive resist composition according to claim which contains said at least one compound (A) in an amount of from 6 to 20% by weight based on a total solid content of the positive resist composition.\n- 7. The positive resist composition according to claim 1, wherein said at least one compound (A) comprises: a compound that generates a sulfonic acid upon treatment with one of an actinic ray and radiation; and a com› pound that generates a carboxylic acid upon treatment with one of an actinic ray and radiation.\n\n*\n\n*\n\n*\n\n*\n\n*\n\n5\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35", + "recall": 0.9689922480620154, + "true_md": "84 \n\nUS 7,344,821 B2 \n\n83 \n\n- R$_{1 }$ to R$_{6 }$ each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a fluorine atom, provided that at least one ofR$_{1 }$to R$_{6 }$ represents a fluorine atom; \n\n- Z represents an alkylene group, an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom; \n\n- m represents an integer of O to 2; and \n\n- Re represents a hydrogen atom or an unsubstituted methyl group; \n\n- wherein B$_{1 }$ and B$_{2 }$ each represents a group capable of decomposing by an action of an acid, or a group including a group capable of decomposing by an action of an acid to generate a carboxyl group or a hydroxyl group; and \n\n- B$_{3 }$ represents a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, a halogen atom or a cyano group. \n\n4. The positive resist composition according to claim 3, wherein B$_{1 }$ and B$_{2 }$ each includes a cyclic structure. \n\n5. A pattern formation method comprising: forming a resist film from a positive resist composition according to claim 1; exposing the resist film with an electron beam, an EUV light or an X ray, so as to form an exposed resist film; and developing the exposed resist film. \n\n6. The positive resist composition according to claim 1, which contains said at least one compound (A) in an amount of from 6 to 20% by weight based on a total solid content of the positive resist composition. \n\n7. The positive resist composition according to claim 1, wherein said at least one compound (A) comprises: a compound that generates a sulfonic acid upon treatment with one of an actinic ray and radiation; and a com› pound that generates a carboxylic acid upon treatment with one of an actinic ray and radiation. \n\n* * * * * \n\n2. The positive resist composition according to claim 1, wherein R$_{1 }$ to R$_{6 }$ each represents a fluorine atom. \n\n3. The positive resist composition according to claim 1, wherein the resin (B) further comprises at least one of a repeating unit represented by formula (Bl) and a repeating unit represented by formula (B2):" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7476743906106103, + "doc_id": "4c2a6933590f64f26136128a06df776c1022988f2b33a3a43706331642e16e09", + "edit_distance": 0.8, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.968, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "US 2021/0033970 Al\n\nFeb.4,2021\n\n17", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Feb.4,2021 \n\n17 \n\nUS 2021/0033970 Al" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9404306056842866, + "doc_id": "bde6b9413c541da0ee2df49f567d2e702fbd93789e9f8e64c5efa704e063db1d", + "edit_distance": 0.05625, + "f1_score": 0.9642857142857141, + "meteor": 0.9625168125864771, + "precision": 0.9818181818181818, + "pred_md": "US 2012/0003590 Al\n\n74\n\n[0359] Specific examples of the compound represented by formula (BS-1) include tri-n-butylamine, tri-n-pentylamine, tri-n-octylamine, tri-n-decylamine, triisodecylamine, dicy› clohexy lmethy !amine, tetradecy !amine, pentadecy !amine, hexadecylamine, octadecylamine, didecylamine, methyloc› tadecy !amine, dimethy lundecy !amine, N,N-dimethy ldode› cy lamine, methyldioctadecylamine, N,N-dihexylaniline, 2,6diisopropylaniline and 2,4,6-tri(tert-butyl)aniline.\n\n[0360] Also, the basic compound represented by formula (BS-1) is preferably a basic compound where at least one of three R's is an alkyl group having a hydrophilic group. Thanks to this configuration, the resolution can be enhanced and at the same time, a good pattern profile can be formed.\n\n[0361] The alkyl group having a hydrophilic group prefer› ably has a carbon number of 1 to 8, more preferably from 1 to 6.\n\n[0362] Examples of the alkyl group having a hydrophilic group include an alkyl group having a hydroxy group or a mercapto group. Specific examples of the basic compound having such an alkyl group include triethanolamine and N,N› dihydroxyethylaniline.\n\nJan. 5, 2012\n\n[0363] The alkyl group having a hydrophilic group also includes an alkyl group having an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom or a carbonyl group in the alkyl chain. That is, the alkyl group as R may be an oxyalkylene chain, a thioalkylene chain or a ketoalkylene chain. The oxyalkylene chain is preferably ----CH 2 CH20-. Specific examples thereofinclude tris(meth› oxyethoxyethyl)amine and compounds illustrated in U.S. Pat. No. 6,040,112, colunm 3, line 60 et seq.\n\n[0364] The alkyl group having a hydrophilic group may be also an alkyl group having a hydroxy group or a mercapto group as a substituent and having an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom or a carbonyl group in the alkyl chain.\n\n[0365] The alkyl group having a hydrophilic group may further have a substituent, and examples of the further sub› stituent include a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group. In the case where the aryl group is a substituted aryl group, examples of the substituent in the substituted aryl group include an alkyl group, an alkoxy group and an aryl group.\n\n[0366] Specific examples of the basic compound where in formula (BS-1 ), at least one of three R's is an alkyl group having a hydrophilic group, are illustrated below, but the present invention is not limited thereto.", + "recall": 0.9473684210526315, + "true_md": "US 2012/0003590 Al \n\n74 \n\nJan. 5, 2012 \n\n[0359] Specific examples of the compound represented by formula (BS-1) include tri-n-butylamine, tri-n-pentylamine, tri-n-octylamine, tri-n-decylamine, triisodecylamine, dicy› clohexy lmethy !amine, tetradecy !amine, pentadecy !amine, hexadecylamine, octadecylamine, didecylamine, methyloc› tadecy !amine, dimethy lundecy !amine, N,N-dimethy ldode› cy lamine, methyldioctadecylamine, N,N-dihexylaniline, 2,6- diisopropylaniline and 2,4,6-tri(tert-butyl)aniline. \n\n[0360] Also, the basic compound represented by formula (BS-1) is preferably a basic compound where at least one of three R’s is an alkyl group having a hydrophilic group. Thanks to this configuration, the resolution can be enhanced and at the same time, a good pattern profile can be formed. \n\n[0361] The alkyl group having a hydrophilic group prefer› ably has a carbon number of 1 to 8, more preferably from 1 to 6. \n\n[0362] Examples of the alkyl group having a hydrophilic group include an alkyl group having a hydroxy group or a mercapto group. Specific examples of the basic compound having such an alkyl group include triethanolamine and N,N› dihydroxyethylaniline. \n\n[0363] The alkyl group having a hydrophilic group also includes an alkyl group having an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom or a carbonyl group in the alkyl chain. That is, the alkyl group as R may be an oxyalkylene chain, a thioalkylene chain or a ketoalkylene chain. The oxyalkylene chain is preferably ----CH$_{2}$CH$_{2}$0-. Specific examples thereofinclude tris(meth› oxyethoxyethyl)amine and compounds illustrated in U.S. Pat. No. 6,040,112, colunm 3, line 60 et seq. \n\n[0364] The alkyl group having a hydrophilic group may be also an alkyl group having a hydroxy group or a mercapto group as a substituent and having an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom or a carbonyl group in the alkyl chain. \n\n[0365] The alkyl group having a hydrophilic group may further have a substituent, and examples of the further sub› stituent include a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group. In the case where the aryl group is a substituted aryl group, examples of the substituent in the substituted aryl group include an alkyl group, an alkoxy group and an aryl group. \n\n[0366] Specific examples of the basic compound where in formula (BS-1 ), at least one of three R’s is an alkyl group having a hydrophilic group, are illustrated below, but the present invention is not limited thereto." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7476743906106103, + "doc_id": "ee8720c5e97060bfdb76912ff16367935569f13262082b636428aff25ca98579", + "edit_distance": 0.8, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.968, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "US 2021/0033970 Al\n\nFeb.4,2021\n\n25", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Feb.4,2021 \n\n25 \n\nUS 2021/0033970 Al" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7691339105453614, + "doc_id": "72dacdc75a70b3acd3261be4aefed4173f32c4ee5fbff2fec9450bfc1de9c558", + "edit_distance": 0.17057704502219403, + "f1_score": 0.9629629629629629, + "meteor": 0.8496939657509085, + "precision": 0.9551020408163265, + "pred_md": "US 2012/0003590 Al\n\na divalent nitrogen-containing non-aromatic heterocyclic group, a divalent aromatic ring group, or a group formed by a combination thereof.\n\n[0159] The alkylene group of L 11 may be linear or branched. The alkylene group is preferably an alkylene hav› ing a carbon number of 1 to 8, more preferably an alkylene group having a carbon number of 1 to 6, still more preferably an alkylene group having a carbon number of 1 to 4.\n\n[0160] The alkenylene group ofL 11 includes, for example, a group having a double bond at an arbitrary position of the above-described alkylene group.\n\n[0161] The divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon ring group as L11 may be either monocyclic or polycyclic. The divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon ring group is preferably a divalent ali› phatic hydrocarbon ring group having a carbon number of 5 to 12, more preferably a divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon ring group having a carbon number of 6 to 10.\n\n[0162] The divalent aromatic ring group as the linking group may be an arylene group or a heteroarylene group. The aromatic ring group preferably has a carbon number of 6 to 14. This aromatic ring group may further have a substituent.\n\n[0163] Examples of -NR- and divalent nitrogen-con› taining non-aromatic heterocyclic group as the linking group are the same as those of respective groups in X 11 above.\n\n[0164] L11 is preferably an alkylene group, a divalent ali› phatic hydrocarbon ring group, or a group formed by com› bining an alkylene group and a divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon ring group through -OCO-, ---0- or ----CONH- (for example, -alkylene group-O-alkylene group-, -alkylene group-OCO-alkylene group-, or -divalent aliphatic hydrocar› bon ring group-O-alkylene group-, or -alkylene group› CONH-alkylene group-).\n\n[0165] Specific examples of -NR- and divalent nitro› gen-containing non-aromatic heterocyclic group in X 12 and X13 are the same as those of respective groups in X 11 above, and preferred examples are also the same.\n\n[0166] X12 is preferably a single bond, -S-, ---0-, -CO-, -SO 2 or a group formed by a combination thereof, more preferably a single bond, -S-, -OCO- or -OSO 2 -.\n\n[0167] X13 is preferably -0-, -CO-, -SO 2 or a group formed by a combination thereof, more preferably -OSO 2 -.\n\n[ 0168] Ar represents a divalent aromatic ring. The divalent 1 aromatic ring group may be an arylene group or a het› eroarylene group. This divalent aromatic ring group may further have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include an alkyl group, an alkoxy group and an aryl group.\n\n[0169] Ar1 is preferably an arylene group having a carbon number of 6 to 18, which may have a substituent, or an aralkylene group formed by combining an arylene group having a carbon number of 6 to 18 and an alkylene group having a carbon number of 1 to 4, more preferably a phe› nylene group, a naphthylene group, a biphenylene group, or a phenylene group substituted with a phenyl group.\n\n[0170] L12 represents an alkylene group, an alkenylene group, a divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon ring group, a divalent aromatic ring group, or a group formed by a combination of two or more thereof, and in these groups, hydrogen atoms are partially or entirely substituted for by a substituent selected from a fluorine atom, an alkyl fluoride group, a nitro group and a cyano group. In the group formed by a combination, two or more groups combined may be the same as or different from each other. Also, these groups may be connected\n\n16\n\nJan. 5, 2012\n\nthrough ---0-, -S-, -CO-, -SO2 -, -NR- (R is a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group), a divalent nitrogen-con› taining non-aromatic heterocyclic group, a divalent aromatic ring group, or a group formed by a combination thereof.\n\n[0171] L12 is preferably an alkylene group or divalent aro› matic ring group with hydrogen atoms being partially or entirely substituted for by a fluorine atom or an alkyl fluoride group (more preferably a perfluoroalkyl group), or a group formed by a combination thereof, more preferably an alky› lene group or divalent aromatic ring group with hydrogen atoms being partially or entirely substituted for by a fluorine atom. L 12 is still more preferably an alkylene group or diva› lent aromatic ring group where from 30 to 100% by number of hydrogen atoms are substituted for by a fluorine atom.\n\n[0172] The alkylene group of L 12 may be linear or branched. This alkylene group preferably has a carbon num› ber of 1 to 6, more preferably from 1 to 4.\n\n[0173] Examples of the alkenylene group ofL 12 include a group having a double bond at an arbitrary position of the above-described alkylene group.\n\n[0174] The divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon ring group of L12 may be monocyclic or polycyclic. This divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon ring group is preferably a divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon ring group having a carbon number of 3 to 17.\n\n[0175] Examples of the divalent aromatic ring group as L 12 are the same as those described above as the linking group in L11.\n\n[0176] Specific examples of -NR- and divalent nitro› gen-containing non-aromatic heterocyclic group as the link› ing group in L 12 are the same as those of respective groups in X11 above, and preferred examples are also the same.\n\n[0177] Z1 represents a moiety working out to a sulfonic acid group upon irradiation with an actinic ray or radiation, and specific examples thereof include a structure represented by formula (ZI).\n\n[0178] The moiety represented by formula (L2) is described below.\n\n[0179] Ar 2 represents a divalent aromatic ring group. The divalent aromatic ring group may be an arylene group or a heteroarylene group. The divalent aromatic ring group pref› erably has a carbon number of 6 to 18. This divalent aromatic ring group may further have a substituent.\n\n[0180] X21 represents ---0-, -S-, -CO-, -SO -, 2 -NR-(Risa hydrogen atom or an alkyl group), a divalent nitrogen-containing non-aromatic heterocyclic group, or a group formed by a combination thereof.\n\n[0181] Examples of -NR- and divalent nitrogen-con› taining non-aromatic heterocyclic group in X 21 are the same as those described above for X 11 .\n\n[0182] X21 is preferably-O-, -S-, -CO-, -SO 2 or a group formed by a combination thereof, more preferably ---0-, ---OCO- or -OSO 2 -.\n\n[0183] X22 represents a single bond, -0-, -S-, -CO-, -SO 2 -, -NR- (R is a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group), a divalent nitrogen-containing non-aromatic heterocyclic group, or a group formed by a combination thereof. Examples of-NR- and divalent nitrogen-contain› ing non-aromatic heterocyclic group in X 22 are the same as those described above for X 11 .\n\n[0184] X22 is preferably -0-, -S-, -CO-, -SO 2 or a group formed by a combination thereof, more preferably\n\n---0-, ---OCO- or -OSO\n\n2 -.\n\n[0185] L21 represents a single bond, an alkylene group, an alkenylene group, a divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon ring", + "recall": 0.970954356846473, + "true_md": "US 2012/0003590 Al \n\n16 \n\nJan. 5, 2012 \n\na divalent nitrogen-containing non-aromatic heterocyclic group, a divalent aromatic ring group, or a group formed by a combination thereof. \n\n[0159] The alkylene group of L$_{11 }$ may be linear or branched. The alkylene group is preferably an alkylene hav› ing a carbon number of 1 to 8, more preferably an alkylene group having a carbon number of 1 to 6, still more preferably an alkylene group having a carbon number of 1 to 4. \n\n[0160] The alkenylene group ofL$_{11 }$includes, for example, a group having a double bond at an arbitrary position of the above-described alkylene group. \n\n[0161] The divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon ring group as L$_{11 }$ may be either monocyclic or polycyclic. The divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon ring group is preferably a divalent ali› phatic hydrocarbon ring group having a carbon number of 5 to 12, more preferably a divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon ring group having a carbon number of 6 to 10. \n\n[0162] The divalent aromatic ring group as the linking group may be an arylene group or a heteroarylene group. The aromatic ring group preferably has a carbon number of 6 to 14. This aromatic ring group may further have a substituent. \n\n[0163] Examples of -NR- and divalent nitrogen-con› taining non-aromatic heterocyclic group as the linking group are the same as those of respective groups in X$_{11 }$above. \n\n[0164] L$_{11 }$ is preferably an alkylene group, a divalent ali› phatic hydrocarbon ring group, or a group formed by com› bining an alkylene group and a divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon ring group through -OCO-, ---0- or ----CONH- (for example, -alkylene group-O-alkylene group-, -alkylene group-OCO-alkylene group-, or -divalent aliphatic hydrocar› bon ring group-O-alkylene group-, or -alkylene group› CONH-alkylene group-). \n\n[0165] Specific examples of -NR- and divalent nitro› gen-containing non-aromatic heterocyclic group in X$_{12 }$and X$_{13 }$are the same as those of respective groups in X$_{11 }$ above, and preferred examples are also the same. \n\n[0166] X$_{12 }$ is preferably a single bond, -S-, ---0-, -CO-, -SO$_{2}$ - or a group formed by a combination thereof, more preferably a single bond, -S-, -OCO- or -OSO$_{2}$ -. \n\n[0167] X$_{13 }$ is preferably -0-, -CO-, -SO$_{2}$ - or a group formed by a combination thereof, more preferably -OSO$_{2}$ -. \n\n[ 0168] Ar $_{1 }$represents a divalent aromatic ring. The divalent aromatic ring group may be an arylene group or a het› eroarylene group. This divalent aromatic ring group may further have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include an alkyl group, an alkoxy group and an aryl group. \n\n[0169] Ar$_{1 }$ is preferably an arylene group having a carbon number of 6 to 18, which may have a substituent, or an aralkylene group formed by combining an arylene group having a carbon number of 6 to 18 and an alkylene group having a carbon number of 1 to 4, more preferably a phe› nylene group, a naphthylene group, a biphenylene group, or a phenylene group substituted with a phenyl group. \n\n[0170] L$_{12 }$ represents an alkylene group, an alkenylene group, a divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon ring group, a divalent aromatic ring group, or a group formed by a combination of two or more thereof, and in these groups, hydrogen atoms are partially or entirely substituted for by a substituent selected from a fluorine atom, an alkyl fluoride group, a nitro group and a cyano group. In the group formed by a combination, two or more groups combined may be the same as or different from each other. Also, these groups may be connected \n\nthrough ---0-, -S-, -CO-, -SO$_{2}$-, -NR- (R is a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group), a divalent nitrogen-con› taining non-aromatic heterocyclic group, a divalent aromatic ring group, or a group formed by a combination thereof. \n\n[0171] L$_{12 }$is preferably an alkylene group or divalent aro› matic ring group with hydrogen atoms being partially or entirely substituted for by a fluorine atom or an alkyl fluoride group (more preferably a perfluoroalkyl group), or a group formed by a combination thereof, more preferably an alky› lene group or divalent aromatic ring group with hydrogen atoms being partially or entirely substituted for by a fluorine atom. L$_{12 }$is still more preferably an alkylene group or diva› lent aromatic ring group where from 30 to 100% by number of hydrogen atoms are substituted for by a fluorine atom. \n\n[0172] The alkylene group of L$_{12 }$ may be linear or branched. This alkylene group preferably has a carbon num› ber of 1 to 6, more preferably from 1 to 4. \n\n[0173] Examples of the alkenylene group ofL$_{12 }$include a group having a double bond at an arbitrary position of the above-described alkylene group. \n\n[0174] The divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon ring group of L$_{12 }$may be monocyclic or polycyclic. This divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon ring group is preferably a divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon ring group having a carbon number of 3 to 17. \n\n[0175] Examples of the divalent aromatic ring group as L$_{12 }$ are the same as those described above as the linking group in L11. \n\n[0176] Specific examples of -NR- and divalent nitro› gen-containing non-aromatic heterocyclic group as the link› ing group in L$_{12 }$are the same as those of respective groups in X$_{11 }$above, and preferred examples are also the same. \n\n[0177] Z$_{1 }$ represents a moiety working out to a sulfonic acid group upon irradiation with an actinic ray or radiation, and specific examples thereof include a structure represented by formula (ZI). \n\n[0178] The moiety represented by formula (L2) is described below. \n\n[0179] Ar$_{2 }$ represents a divalent aromatic ring group. The divalent aromatic ring group may be an arylene group or a heteroarylene group. The divalent aromatic ring group pref› erably has a carbon number of 6 to 18. This divalent aromatic ring group may further have a substituent. \n\n[0180] X$_{21 }$ represents ---0-, -S-, -CO-, -SO$_{2}$ -, -NR- (Risa hydrogen atom or an alkyl group), a divalent nitrogen-containing non-aromatic heterocyclic group, or a group formed by a combination thereof. \n\n[0181] Examples of -NR- and divalent nitrogen-con› taining non-aromatic heterocyclic group in X$_{21 }$ are the same as those described above for X $_{11}$ . \n\n[0182] X$_{21 }$is preferably-O-, -S-, -CO-, -SO$_{2}$ - or a group formed by a combination thereof, more preferably ---0-, ---OCO- or -OSO$_{2}$ -. \n\n[0183] X$_{22 }$ represents a single bond, -0-, -S-, -CO-, -SO$_{2}$ -, -NR- (R is a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group), a divalent nitrogen-containing non-aromatic heterocyclic group, or a group formed by a combination thereof. Examples of-NR-and divalent nitrogen-contain› ing non-aromatic heterocyclic group in X$_{22 }$are the same as those described above for X$_{11}$. \n\n[0184] X$_{22 }$is preferably -0-, -S-, -CO-, -SO$_{2}$ - or a group formed by a combination thereof, more preferably ---0-, ---OCO- or -OSO$_{2}$ -. \n\n[0185] L$_{21 }$represents a single bond, an alkylene group, an alkenylene group, a divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon ring" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8132882808488929, + "doc_id": "3809761d64f7b231facbea66910be7c1c7e20e0d95e06ae7f8e320e3a24db63b", + "edit_distance": 0.75, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9921875, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "US 2019/0010119 Al\n\nJan. 10, 2019\n\n11", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Jan. 10, 2019 \n\n11 \n\nUS 2019/0010119 Al" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6360188027707555, + "doc_id": "95a67889fd79b9552aa96bb3e4b11ed76f94d874f7e72a65fd2ffef405e77aec", + "edit_distance": 0.2, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.968, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "US 2020/0050106 Al\n\nFeb. 13, 2020\n\n49\n\nTABLE 1", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "US 2020/0050106 Al \n\n49 \n\nFeb. 13, 2020 \n\nTABLE 1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8132882808488929, + "doc_id": "71245465717a21e86d9204ddfe86272be9d7bee7f8e8e46344066eacda159ff6", + "edit_distance": 0.75, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9921875, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "US 2019/0010119 Al\n\nJan. 10, 2019\n\n21", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Jan. 10, 2019 \n\n21 \n\nUS 2019/0010119 Al" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "477ce53db35b096366abfdba994b1002e0bd1b3a57c647b9021f7de1741e0497", + "edit_distance": 0.6, + "f1_score": 0.6666666666666666, + "meteor": 0.8109090909090909, + "precision": 0.5, + "pred_md": "79\n\nUS 9,423,690 B2\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n80\n\n-continued", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "US 9,423,690 B2 \n\n80 \n\n79" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "44327e05693b858d2961fe99091b7856966b246a004bc17039e0e6929ef2035d", + "edit_distance": 0.5555555555555556, + "f1_score": 0.8, + "meteor": 0.7098765432098765, + "precision": 0.6666666666666666, + "pred_md": "101\n\nUS 7,851,130 B2\n\n10\n\n15\n\n65\n\n102\n\n-continued", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "102 \n\nUS 7,851,130 B2 \n\n101 \n\n-continued \n\n-continued" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7186082239261684, + "doc_id": "242aae41470eebe747fb2114eefe646e582d87a218e62625e37a4348a51a28b0", + "edit_distance": 0.25, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9736328125, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "US 2012/0003590 Al\n\nJan. 5, 2012\n\n82", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "US 2012/0003590 Al \n\n82 \n\nJan. 5, 2012" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7476743906106103, + "doc_id": "14467c72339c1328ef8b8189ae1ef42f592408d92409535b7f09a642d8d19a42", + "edit_distance": 0.8, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.968, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "US 2021/0033970 Al\n\nFeb.4,2021\n\n84", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Feb.4,2021 \n\n84 \n\nUS 2021/0033970 Al" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9827352970322962, + "doc_id": "9bab60718dd2a1e761ac68b7f1d575b61c62f96619a3e558fd4251aa5a86ddaa", + "edit_distance": 0.5166163141993958, + "f1_score": 0.9892703862660944, + "meteor": 0.843577164305984, + "precision": 0.9935344827586207, + "pred_md": "US 2021/0033970 Al\n\nFeb.4,2021\n\n107\n\nPattern Forming Process\n\n[0156] The resist composition is used in the fabrication of various integrated circuits. Pattern formation using the resist composition may be performed by well-known lithography processes. The process generally involves coating, exposure, and development. If necessary, any additional steps may be added.\n\n[0157] For example, the resist composition is first applied onto a substrate on which an integrated circuit is to be formed (e.g., Si, SiO 2 , SiN, SiON, TiN, WSi, BPSG, ~OG, or organic antireflective coating) or a substrate on wh1c~ a mask circuit is to be formed (e.g., Cr, CrO, CrON, MoS12, or SiO ) by a suitable coating technique such as spin coating~ roll coating, flow coating, dipping, spraying or doctor coating. The coating is prebaked on a hot plate at a temperature of 60 to 150° C. for 10 seconds to 30 minutes, preferably at 80 to 120° C. for 30 seconds to 20 m~nutes. The resulting resist film is generally 0.01 to 2 µm thick.\n\n[0158] The resist film is then exposed to a desired pattern of high-energy radiation such as UV, deep-UV, EB, EUV, x-ray, soft x-ray, excimer laser light, y-ray or synchrotro\\_n radiation. When UV, deep-UV, EUV, x-ray, soft x-ray, exc1mer laser light, y-ray or synchrotron radiation is used as the high-energy radiation, the resi~t film is ex~osed thereto through a mask having a desJred pattern m a dose of preferably about 1 to 200 mJ/cm 2 , more pr~ferably about \\_10 to 100 mJ/cm 2 . When EB is used as the high-energy radrn› tion, the resist film is exposed thereto through a mask having a desired pattern or directly in a dose of preferably about 0.1 to 100 µC/cm 2 , more preferably about 0.5 to 50 µC/cm 2 . It is appreciated that the inventive resist composition is s1:'ited in micropatterning using KrF excimer laser, ArF exc1mer laser, EB, EUV, x-ray, soft x-ray, y-ray or synchrotron radiation, especially in micropatterning using EB or EUV.\n\n[0159] After the exposure, the resist film may be baked (PEB) on a hot plate at 60 to 150° C. for 10 seconds to 30 minutes, preferably at 80 to 120° C. for 30 seconds to 20 minutes.\n\n[0160] After the exposure or PEB, the resist film is de~el› oped in a developer in the form of an aqueous base so!ut10n for 3 seconds to 3 minutes, preferably 5 seconds to 2 mmutes by conventional techniques such as dip, puddle and spray techniques. A typical developer is a 0.1 to 10 wt %, preferably 2 to 5 wt % aqueous solution of tet~amethylam› moniumhydroxide (TMAH), tetraethylanimomum hydrox› ide (TEAH), tetrapropylammonium hydroxide (TPAH), or tetrabutylanimonium hydroxide (TBAH). In t~e \\_case of positive resist, the resist film in the exposed area 1s dissolved in the developer whereas the resist film in the unexposed area is not dissolved. In this way, the desired positive pattern is formed on the substrate. Inversely in the case of negative resist, the exposed area of resist film is insolubilized and the unexposed area is dissolved in the developer.\n\n[0161] In an alternative embodiment, a negative p~ttern may be formed via organic solvent development usmg a positive resist composition comprising a base polymer\\_ha~› ing an acid labile group. The developer used herem 1s preferably selected from among 2-octanone, 2-nonanone, 2-heptanone, 3-heptanone, 4-heptanone, 2-hexanone, 3-hexanone, diisobutyl ketone, methylcyclohexanone, acetophenone, methylacetophenone, propyl acetate, butyl acetate, isobutyl acetate, pentyl acetate, butenyl acetate, isopentyl acetate, propyl formate, butyl formate, isobutyl formate, pentyl formate, isopentyl formate, methyl valerate,\n\nmethyl pentenoate, methyl crotonate, ethyl crotonat~, methyl propionate, ethyl propionate, ethyl 3-ethoxypropi› onate, methyl lactate, ethyl lactate, propyl lactate, butyl lactate, isobutyl lactate, pentyl lactate, isopentyl lactate, methyl 2-hydroxyisobutyrate, ethyl 2-hydroxyisobutyrate, methyl benzoate, ethyl benzoate, phenyl acetate, benzyl acetate, methyl phenylacetate, benzyl formate, phen~lethyl formate methyl 3-phenylpropionate, benzyl prop10nate, ethyl phenylacetate, and 2-phenylethyl acetate, and mixtures thereof.\n\n[0162] At the end of development, the resist film is ~insed. As the rinsing liquid, a solvent which is miscible with the developer and does not dissolve the resist film is preferred. Suitable solvents include alcohols of 3 to 10 carbon atoms, ether compounds of 8 to 12 carbon atoms, alkanes, alkenes, and alkynes of 6 to 12 carbon atoms, and aromatic solvents. Specifically, suitable alcohols of 3 to 10 carbon atoms include n-propyl alcohol, isopropyl alcohol, I-butyl alcohol, 2-butyl alcohol, isobutyl alcohol, t-butyl alcohol, 1-penta› nol, 2-pentanol, 3-pentanol, t-pentyl alcohol, neopentyl alcohol, 2-methyl-1-butanol, 3-methyl-1-butanol, 3-methyl3-pentanol, cyclopentanol, 1-hexanol, 2-hexanol, 3-hexai:iol, 2,3-dimethyl-2-butanol, 3,3-dimethyl-1-butanol, 3,3-dim› ethyl-2-butanol, 2-ethyl-1-butanol, 2-methyl-1-pentanol, 2-methyl-2-pentanol, 2-methyl-3-pentanol, 3-methyl-1-pen› tanol, 3-methyl-2-pentanol, 3-methyl-3-pentanol, 4-methyl1-pentanol, 4-methyl-2-pentanol, 4-methyl-3-pentanol, cyclohexanol, and 1-octanol. Suitable ether compounds of 8 to 12 carbon atoms include di-n-butyl ether, diisobutyl ether, di-s-butyl ether, di-n-pentyl ether, diisopentyl ether, di-s› pentyl ether, di-t-pentyl ether, and di-n-hexyl ether. Suitable alkanes of 6 to 12 carbon atoms include hexane, heptane, octane, nonane, decane, undecane, dodecane, methylcyclo› pentane, dimethylcyclopentane, cyclohexane, methylcyclo› hexane, dimethylcyclohexane, cycloheptane, cyclooctane, and cyclononane. Suitable alkenes of 6 to 12 carbon atoms include hexene, heptene, octene, cyclohexene, methylcyclo› hexene, dimethylcyclohexene, cycloheptene, and cyclooctene. Suitable alkynes of 6 to 12\\_ carbon ato~s include hexyne, heptyne, and octyne. Smtable aromatic solvents include toluene, xylene, ethylbenzene, isopropyl› benzene, t-butylbenzene and mesitylene. The solvents may be used alone or in admixture.\n\n[0163] Rinsing is effective for mini~izing the risks\\_ of resist pattern collapse and defect format10n. However, nns› ing is not essential. If rinsing is omitted, the amount of solvent used may be reduced.\n\n[0164] A hole or trench pattern after development may be shrunk by the thermal flow, RELACSfi or DSA process. A hole pattern is shrunk by coating a shrink agent theret?, ~nd baking such that the shrink agent may undergo crosslmking at the resist surface as a result of the acid catalyst diffusing from the resist layer during bake, and the shrink agent may attach to the sidewall of the hole pattern. The bake is preferably at a temperature of 70 to 180° C., more preferably 80 to 170° C., for a time of 10 to 300 seconds. The extra shrink agent is stripped and the hole pattern is shrunk.\n\n## EXAMPLES\n\n[0165] Examples of the invention are given below b~ ~ay of illustration and not by way of limitation. The abbrevrnt10n \"pbw\" is parts by weight.\n\n[0166] Quenchers 1 to 35 used in resist compositions have the following structure.", + "recall": 0.9850427350427351, + "true_md": "Feb.4,2021 \n\n107 \n\nUS 2021/0033970 Al \n\n[0156] The resist composition is used in the fabrication of various integrated circuits. Pattern formation using the resist composition may be performed by well-known lithography processes. The process generally involves coating, exposure, and development. If necessary, any additional steps may be added. \n\nPattern Forming Process \n\n[0157] For example, the resist composition is first applied onto a substrate on which an integrated circuit is to be formed (e.g., Si, SiO 2 , SiN, SiON, TiN, WSi, BPSG, ~OG, or organic antireflective coating) or a substrate on wh1c~ a mask circuit is to be formed (e.g., Cr, CrO, CrON, MoS12, or SiO ) by a suitable coating technique such as spin coating~ roll coating, flow coating, dipping, spraying or doctor coating. The coating is prebaked on a hot plate at a temperature of 60 to 150° C. for 10 seconds to 30 minutes, preferably at 80 to 120° C. for 30 seconds to 20 m~nutes. The resulting resist film is generally 0.01 to 2 µm thick. \n\n[0160] After the exposure or PEB, the resist film is de~el› oped in a developer in the form of an aqueous base so!ut10n for 3 seconds to 3 minutes, preferably 5 seconds to 2 mmutes by conventional techniques such as dip, puddle and spray techniques. A typical developer is a 0.1 to 10 wt %, preferably 2 to 5 wt % aqueous solution of tet~amethylam› moniumhydroxide (TMAH), tetraethylanimomum hydrox› ide (TEAH), tetrapropylammonium hydroxide (TPAH), or tetrabutylanimonium hydroxide (TBAH). In t~e \\_case of positive resist, the resist film in the exposed area 1s dissolved in the developer whereas the resist film in the unexposed area is not dissolved. In this way, the desired positive pattern is formed on the substrate. Inversely in the case of negative resist, the exposed area of resist film is insolubilized and the unexposed area is dissolved in the developer. \n\n[0161] In an alternative embodiment, a negative p~ttern may be formed via organic solvent development usmg a positive resist composition comprising a base polymer\\_ha~› ing an acid labile group. The developer used herem 1s preferably selected from among 2-octanone, 2-nonanone, 2-heptanone, 3-heptanone, 4-heptanone, 2-hexanone, 3-hexanone, diisobutyl ketone, methylcyclohexanone, acetophenone, methylacetophenone, propyl acetate, butyl acetate, isobutyl acetate, pentyl acetate, butenyl acetate, isopentyl acetate, propyl formate, butyl formate, isobutyl formate, pentyl formate, isopentyl formate, methyl valerate, \n\n[0165] Examples of the invention are given below b~ ~ay of illustration and not by way of limitation. The abbrevrnt10n \"pbw\" is parts by weight. \n\n[0166] Quenchers 1 to 35 used in resist compositions have the following structure. \n\n[0164] A hole or trench pattern after development may be shrunk by the thermal flow, RELACSfi or DSA process. A hole pattern is shrunk by coating a shrink agent theret?, ~nd baking such that the shrink agent may undergo crosslmking at the resist surface as a result of the acid catalyst diffusing from the resist layer during bake, and the shrink agent may attach to the sidewall of the hole pattern. The bake is preferably at a temperature of 70 to 180° C., more preferably 80 to 170° C., for a time of 10 to 300 seconds. The extra shrink agent is stripped and the hole pattern is shrunk. \n\n[0163] Rinsing is effective for mini~izing the risks\\_ of resist pattern collapse and defect format10n. However, nns› ing is not essential. If rinsing is omitted, the amount of solvent used may be reduced. \n\nmethyl pentenoate, methyl crotonate, ethyl crotonat~, methyl propionate, ethyl propionate, ethyl 3-ethoxypropi› onate, methyl lactate, ethyl lactate, propyl lactate, butyl lactate, isobutyl lactate, pentyl lactate, isopentyl lactate, methyl 2-hydroxyisobutyrate, ethyl 2-hydroxyisobutyrate, methyl benzoate, ethyl benzoate, phenyl acetate, benzyl acetate, methyl phenylacetate, benzyl formate, phen~lethyl formate methyl 3-phenylpropionate, benzyl prop10nate, ethyl phenylacetate, and 2-phenylethyl acetate, and mixtures thereof. \n\n[0162] At the end of development, the resist film is ~insed. As the rinsing liquid, a solvent which is miscible with the developer and does not dissolve the resist film is preferred. Suitable solvents include alcohols of 3 to 10 carbon atoms, ether compounds of 8 to 12 carbon atoms, alkanes, alkenes, and alkynes of 6 to 12 carbon atoms, and aromatic solvents. Specifically, suitable alcohols of 3 to 10 carbon atoms include n-propyl alcohol, isopropyl alcohol, I-butyl alcohol, 2-butyl alcohol, isobutyl alcohol, t-butyl alcohol, 1-penta› nol, 2-pentanol, 3-pentanol, t-pentyl alcohol, neopentyl alcohol, 2-methyl-1-butanol, 3-methyl-1-butanol, 3-methyl- 3-pentanol, cyclopentanol, 1-hexanol, 2-hexanol, 3-hexai:iol, 2,3-dimethyl-2-butanol, 3,3-dimethyl-1-butanol, 3,3-dim› ethyl-2-butanol, 2-ethyl-1-butanol, 2-methyl-1-pentanol, 2-methyl-2-pentanol, 2-methyl-3-pentanol, 3-methyl-1-pen› tanol, 3-methyl-2-pentanol, 3-methyl-3-pentanol, 4-methyl- 1-pentanol, 4-methyl-2-pentanol, 4-methyl-3-pentanol, cyclohexanol, and 1-octanol. Suitable ether compounds of 8 to 12 carbon atoms include di-n-butyl ether, diisobutyl ether, di-s-butyl ether, di-n-pentyl ether, diisopentyl ether, di-s› pentyl ether, di-t-pentyl ether, and di-n-hexyl ether. Suitable alkanes of 6 to 12 carbon atoms include hexane, heptane, octane, nonane, decane, undecane, dodecane, methylcyclo› pentane, dimethylcyclopentane, cyclohexane, methylcyclo› hexane, dimethylcyclohexane, cycloheptane, cyclooctane, and cyclononane. Suitable alkenes of 6 to 12 carbon atoms include hexene, heptene, octene, cyclohexene, methylcyclo› hexene, dimethylcyclohexene, cycloheptene, and cyclooctene. Suitable alkynes of 6 to 12\\_ carbon ato~s include hexyne, heptyne, and octyne. Smtable aromatic solvents include toluene, xylene, ethylbenzene, isopropyl› benzene, t-butylbenzene and mesitylene. The solvents may be used alone or in admixture. \n\n## EXAMPLES\n\n[0159] After the exposure, the resist film may be baked (PEB) on a hot plate at 60 to 150° C. for 10 seconds to 30 minutes, preferably at 80 to 120° C. for 30 seconds to 20 minutes. \n\n[0158] The resist film is then exposed to a desired pattern of high-energy radiation such as UV, deep-UV, EB, EUV, x-ray, soft x-ray, excimer laser light, y-ray or synchrotro\\_n radiation. When UV, deep-UV, EUV, x-ray, soft x-ray, exc1- mer laser light, y-ray or synchrotron radiation is used as the high-energy radiation, the resi~t film is ex~osed thereto through a mask having a desJred pattern m a dose of preferably about 1 to 200 mJ/cm 2 , more pr~ferably about \\_10 to 100 mJ/cm 2 . When EB is used as the high-energy radrn› tion, the resist film is exposed thereto through a mask having a desired pattern or directly in a dose of preferably about 0.1 to 100 µC/cm 2 , more preferably about 0.5 to 50 µC/cm 2 . It is appreciated that the inventive resist composition is s1:’ited in micropatterning using KrF excimer laser, ArF exc1mer laser, EB, EUV, x-ray, soft x-ray, y-ray or synchrotron radiation, especially in micropatterning using EB or EUV." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8776486551740731, + "doc_id": "d6f8492798c7aae185d7882fdacca1799403ec55edb3e01a13246cdcbc67715e", + "edit_distance": 0.16898148148148148, + "f1_score": 0.9641873278236914, + "meteor": 0.9083080336291454, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "US 2019/0010119 Al\n\nJan. 10, 2019\n\n53\n\nvacuum. This polymer layer was dissolved in a mixed solvent of0.45 L of methanol and 0.54 L ofTHF again, and 160 g oftriethylamine and 30 g of water were added thereto. This was heated to 60° C. to perform deprotection reaction for 40 hours. This deprotected reaction solution was con› centrated in vacuum, and 548 g of methanol and 112 g of acetone were added to the concentrated liquid to be solution. With stirring, 990 g of hexane was added dropwise. After finishing the dropwise addition, this was placed for 30 minutes, allowing to separate to two layers. To the under layer (polymer layer), 300 g of THF was added, and 1,030 g of hexane was added dropwise with stirring. The under layer (polymer layer) was concentrated in vacuum after 30 minutes. The obtained polymer solution was neutralized using 82 g of acetic acid, and the solution was concentrated. Then, this was dissolved in 0.3 L of acetone, followed by addition of 10 L of water to precipitate. This was filtered off and dried to give 280 g of white polymer. The obtained polymer was subjected to 1 H-NMR and GPC measurements to reveal that this was a polymer with a copolymerization ratio of hydroxystyrene:acenaphthylene=89.3:10.7, Mw of 5,000, and Mw/Mn of 1.63.\n\n[0239] Under acid conditions, 100 g of the obtained poly› mer was allowed to react with 50 g of (2-methyl-1-propenyl) methyl ether, followed by neutralization, liquid separation treatment, and precipitation step to give a polymer- I. The yield was 125 g.\n\n## [Synthesis Examples 2-2 to 2-8] Synthesis of Polymers-2 to\n\n[0240] In the same way as in Synthesis Example 2-1 except for changing the kinds of each monomer and incor› poration ratio (molar ratio), Polymers-2 to 8 were synthe› sized.\n\n[0241] The structures of Polymers-I to 8 are shown below.\n\n(a~ 0.76, b ~ 0.12, c ~ 0.12, Mw ~ 5,500)\n\n(a~ 0.76, b ~ 0.12, c ~ 0.12, Mw ~ 5,500)", + "recall": 0.9308510638297872, + "true_md": "Jan. 10, 2019 \n\n53 \n\nUS 2019/0010119 Al \n\nvacuum. This polymer layer was dissolved in a mixed solvent of0.45 L of methanol and 0.54 L ofTHF again, and 160 g oftriethylamine and 30 g of water were added thereto. This was heated to 60° C. to perform deprotection reaction for 40 hours. This deprotected reaction solution was con› centrated in vacuum, and 548 g of methanol and 112 g of acetone were added to the concentrated liquid to be solution. With stirring, 990 g of hexane was added dropwise. After finishing the dropwise addition, this was placed for 30 minutes, allowing to separate to two layers. To the under layer (polymer layer), 300 g of THF was added, and 1,030 g of hexane was added dropwise with stirring. The under layer (polymer layer) was concentrated in vacuum after 30 minutes. The obtained polymer solution was neutralized using 82 g of acetic acid, and the solution was concentrated. Then, this was dissolved in 0.3 L of acetone, followed by addition of 10 L of water to precipitate. This was filtered off and dried to give 280 g of white polymer. The obtained polymer was subjected to $^{1}$H-NMR and GPC measurements to reveal that this was a polymer with a copolymerization ratio of hydroxystyrene:acenaphthylene=89.3:10.7, Mw of 5,000, and Mw/Mn of 1.63. \n\n[0239] Under acid conditions, 100 g of the obtained poly› mer was allowed to react with 50 g of (2-methyl-1-propenyl) methyl ether, followed by neutralization, liquid separation treatment, and precipitation step to give a polymer- I. The yield was 125 g. \n\n[0240] In the same way as in Synthesis Example 2-1 except for changing the kinds of each monomer and incor› poration ratio (molar ratio), Polymers-2 to 8 were synthe› sized. \n\n[0241] The structures of Polymers-I to 8 are shown below. \n\n## [Synthesis Examples 2-2 to 2-8] Synthesis of Polymers-2 to\n\n-continued \n\n(a~ 0.69, b ~ 0.10, c ~ 0.21, Mw ~ 4,000) \n\n(a~ 0.76, b ~ 0.12, c ~ 0.12, Mw ~ 5,500) \n\n(a~ 0.78, b ~ 0.11, c ~ 0.11, Mw ~ 5,500) \n\n(a~ 0.76, b ~ 0.11, c ~ 0.13, Mw ~ 5,800)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.772095498239424, + "doc_id": "8f74780257676d9eb9c15fcd4326cc9cb442773cb6297f7c07a1701525a769bc", + "edit_distance": 0.5430167597765363, + "f1_score": 0.9214285714285715, + "meteor": 0.7433354815397014, + "precision": 0.9084507042253521, + "pred_md": "US 9,423,690 B2\n\n3\n\nwherein in Formula (1-0), R1 and R2 Ru and R12 R represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group,\n\n- each independently represent an alkyl group, each independently represent an alkyl group, 13 Ru and R12 may be bound with each other to form a ring, and Ru and R 13 may be bound with each other to form a ring, Ra represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cyano group or a halogen atom, and L 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, in Formula (1-2), Rb represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cyano group or a halogen atom, R 3 represents a substituent, n 1 represents an integer of 1 or 2, n 2 represents an integer of Oto 4, when n 2 represents an integer of 2 to 4, R 3 's may be bound with each other to form a ring, and L2 represents a single bond, --COO- or ----CONR -, 4 and R 4 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group. [2] The pattern forming method according to [1], wherein the repeating unit represented by Formula (1-0)\n- is a repeating unit represented by Formula (1-1):\n\nwherein in Formula (1-1), X represents an alicyclic group, R1 and R2 each independently represent an alkyl group,\n\n- Ra represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cyano group or a halogen atom, and\n\n4\n\nL1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. [3] The pattern forming method according to [2], wherein X in Formula (1-1) is a cyclohexyl group or a cyclopentyl group. [4] The pattern forming method according to any one of [1] to [3], wherein the content of the repeating unit represented by Formula (1-0) or (1-1) is 55 mo! % or more based on the whole repeating units in the resin (A). [5] The pattern forming method according to any one of [1] to [4], wherein a content of the repeating unit represented by Formula (1-2) is 15 mo! % or more based on the whole repeating units in the resin (A). [ 6] The pattern forming method according to any one of [1] to [5], wherein both of R 1 and R 2 in Formula (1-0) or (1-1) are an alkyl group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms. [7] The pattern forming method according to [6], wherein both of R 1 and R 2 in Formula (1-0) or (1-1) are an ethyl group. [8] The pattern forming method according to any one of [1] to [7], wherein the resin (A) further contains a repeating unit represented by Formula (2), the content of the repeating unit represented by Formula (1-0) or (1-1) is 45 to 85 mo!% based on the whole repeating units in the resin (A), a content of the repeating unit represented by Formula (1-2) is 15 to 45 mo!% based on the whole repeating units in the resin (A), and a content of the repeating unit represented by Formula (2) is 1 to 40 mo! % based on the whole repeating units in the\n\n- resin (A):\n\n- wherein in Formula (2), L 3 and L 4 each independently represent a single bond or a divalent linking group, Y represents an atomic group capable of forming a lactone structure, and Re represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cyano group or a halogen atom. [9] The pattern forming method according to any one of [1] to [8],\n\nwherein the electron beam-sensitive or extreme ultraviolet ray-sensitive resin composition further contains a com› pound (B) capable of generating an acid upon the irradiation with an electron beam or extreme ultraviolet, and\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n60\n\n65", + "recall": 0.9347826086956522, + "true_md": "US 9,423,690 B2 \n\n4 \n\n3 \n\nwherein in Formula (1-0), \n\nRa represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cyano group or a halogen atom, and L$_{1 }$ represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, in Formula (1-2), \n\nRb represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cyano group or a halogen atom, \n\nR$_{3 }$ represents a substituent, \n\nn$_{1 }$ represents an integer of 1 or 2, n$_{2 }$ represents an integer of Oto 4, \n\nR$_{1 }$ and R$_{2 }$ each independently represent an alkyl group, \n\nRu and R$_{12 }$each independently represent an alkyl group, \n\nR$_{13 }$ represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, \n\nRu and R$_{12 }$may be bound with each other to form a ring, and Ru and R$_{13 }$ may be bound with each other to form a ring, \n\nwhen n$_{2 }$ represents an integer of 2 to 4, R$_{3 }$’s may be bound with each other to form a ring, and \n\nL$_{2 }$ represents a single bond, --COO- or ----CONR$_{4}$-, and R$_{4 }$ represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group. 45 \n\n[2] The pattern forming method according to [1], \n\nwherein the repeating unit represented by Formula (1-0) is a repeating unit represented by Formula (1-1): \n\nwherein in Formula (1-1), \n\nX represents an alicyclic group, \n\nR$_{1 }$ and R$_{2 }$ each independently represent an alkyl group, \n\nRa represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cyano group or a halogen atom, and \n\nwherein in Formula (2), \n\nL$_{3 }$ and L$_{4 }$ each independently represent a single bond or a divalent linking group, \n\nY represents an atomic group capable of forming a lactone structure, and \n\nRe represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cyano group or a halogen atom. \n\n[9] The pattern forming method according to any one of [1] to [8], \n\nwherein the electron beam-sensitive or extreme ultravio- let ray-sensitive resin composition further contains a com› pound (B) capable of generating an acid upon the irradiation with an electron beam or extreme ultraviolet, and \n\nL$_{1 }$ represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. \n\n[3] The pattern forming method according to [2], \n\nwherein X in Formula (1-1) is a cyclohexyl group or a cyclopentyl group. \n\n[4] The pattern forming method according to any one of [1] to [3], \n\nwherein the content of the repeating unit represented by Formula (1-0) or (1-1) is 55 mo! % or more based on the whole repeating units in the resin (A). \n\n[5] The pattern forming method according to any one of [1] to [4], \n\nwherein a content of the repeating unit represented by Formula (1-2) is 15 mo! % or more based on the whole repeating units in the resin (A). \n\n[ 6] The pattern forming method according to any one of [1] to [5], \n\nwherein both of R$_{1 }$ and R$_{2 }$ in Formula (1-0) or (1-1) are an alkyl group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms. \n\n[7] The pattern forming method according to [6], \n\nwherein both of R$_{1 }$ and R$_{2 }$ in Formula (1-0) or (1-1) are an ethyl group. \n\n[8] The pattern forming method according to any one of [1] to [7], \n\nwherein the resin (A) further contains a repeating unit represented by Formula (2), \n\nthe content of the repeating unit represented by Formula (1-0) or (1-1) is 45 to 85 mo!% based on the whole repeating units in the resin (A), \n\na content of the repeating unit represented by Formula (1-2) is 15 to 45 mo!% based on the whole repeating units in the resin (A), and \n\na content of the repeating unit represented by Formula (2) is 1 to 40 mo! % based on the whole repeating units in the resin (A):" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9075085240979169, + "doc_id": "749359f1f4d0cf413845da85c0bb0b07e5293090aab25aa61e5d3d205d106686", + "edit_distance": 0.872093023255814, + "f1_score": 0.9700996677740864, + "meteor": 0.818954885302645, + "precision": 0.9733333333333334, + "pred_md": "9\n\nUS 7,049,044 B2\n\nTABLE I-continued\n\nTABLE I-continued\n\nAn illustration or schematic of the microstructure of one embodiment, a copolymer containing methyl methacrylate (MMA), t-butyl methacrylate (TBMA), methacrylic acid (MAA), and the polyhedral oligosilsesquioxane, 3-(3,5,7,9, 11,13,15-heptacyclopentylpentacyclo-[9.5.1.1 3 · 9 .1 5 · 15 .1 7 · 13 ] octasiloxane-1-yl)propyl methacrylate (propyl methacrylate POSS), is presented in FIG. 1. While not wanting to be bound by this statement, it is believed that because this MMA/TBMA/MAA/POSS copolymer incorporates an inor› ganic moiety, here the POSS™ moiety with a cluster or cage-like structure, is more etch resistant than organic units without such a moiety. In addition, the silica cage of the POSS unit is surrounded by bulky cyclopentyl groups in this\n\n55\n\n60\n\n65\n\nparticular propyl methacrylate POSS, which could afford POSS even higher etch resistance.\n\nGeneral details of the preparation of a methacrylate-based CA resist incorporating a polyhedral oligosilsesquioxane (POSS) component are presented in Example 1, and Example 2 describes the characterization of these methacry› late-based CA resists. Table 2 presents the relative weight percents of components loaded into the mixture to be polymerized, and the percent composition of that component in the resulting polymer, for four representative resist samples with various POSS content. Table 2 also presents the glass transition temperatures (Tg), weight-average\n\n10", + "recall": 0.9668874172185431, + "true_md": "10 \n\nUS 7,049,044 B2 \n\n9 \n\nparticular propyl methacrylate POSS, which could afford POSS even higher etch resistance. \n\nGeneral details of the preparation of a methacrylate-based CA resist incorporating a polyhedral oligosilsesquioxane (POSS) component are presented in Example 1, and Example 2 describes the characterization of these methacry› late-based CA resists. Table 2 presents the relative weight percents of components loaded into the mixture to be polymerized, and the percent composition of that component in the resulting polymer, for four representative resist samples with various POSS content. Table 2 also presents the glass transition temperatures (Tg), weight-average \n\nAn illustration or schematic of the microstructure of one embodiment, a copolymer containing methyl methacrylate (MMA), t-butyl methacrylate (TBMA), methacrylic acid (MAA), and the polyhedral oligosilsesquioxane, 3-(3,5,7,9, 11,13,15-heptacyclopentylpentacyclo-[9.5.1.1 3 • $^{9}$.1 5 • $^{15 }$.1 7 • 13 ] octasiloxane-1-yl)propyl methacrylate (propyl methacrylate POSS), is presented in FIG. 1. While not wanting to be bound by this statement, it is believed that because this MMA/TBMA/MAA/POSS copolymer incorporates an inor› ganic moiety, here the POSS™ moiety with a cluster or cage-like structure, is more etch resistant than organic units without such a moiety. In addition, the silica cage of the POSS unit is surrounded by bulky cyclopentyl groups in this \n\nTABLE I-continued" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8166445856954877, + "doc_id": "ddaca843c41a1530994b64f02acf266b29f80213788f856b5468bfc7b324f79f", + "edit_distance": 0.9226069246435845, + "f1_score": 0.9442622950819674, + "meteor": 0.6327873536805657, + "precision": 0.9230769230769231, + "pred_md": "49\n\n-continued\n\nIn each of the above structural formulae, Rx represents H, CH3 , CF 3 or CH OH; and Rxa and Rxb each represents an 2 alkyl group having from 1 to 4 carbon atoms.\n\nAs the halogen atoms represented by R 11 ' and R 12 ' in formula (II-AB), a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, a fluorine atom and an iodine atom are exemplified.\n\nAs the alkyl groups represented by R 11 ' and R 12 ', straight chain or branched alkyl groups having from 1 to 10 carbon atoms are preferred, e.g., a methyl group, an ethyl group, an n-propyl group, an isopropyl group, a straight chain or branched butyl group, pentyl group, hexyl group, heptyl group, etc., are exemplified.\n\nThe atomic group represented by Z' to form an alicyclic structure is an atomic group to form a repeating unit having an alicyclic hydrocarbon structure in the resin, which may have a substituent, and an atomic group to form a repeating unit having a bridged alicyclic hydrocarbon structure is especially preferred.\n\nUS 7,851,130 B2\n\n50\n\nAs the skeleton of the alicyclic hydrocarbon to be formed, the same cycloalkyl groups as represented by R 12 to R 25 in formulae (pl) to (pVI) are exemplified.\n\nThe skeleton of the alicyclic hydrocarbon structure may have a substituent, and as the substituents, the groups repre› sented by R 13 ' to R 16 ' in formula (II-AB!) or (II-AB2) can be exemplified.\n\nIn the alicyclic hydrocarbon-based acid-decomposable resin in the invention, a group capable of decomposing by the action of an acid can be contained in at least one repeating unit of a repeating unit having a partial structure containing ali› cyclic hydrocarbon represented by any of formulae (pl) to (pV), a repeating unit represented by formula (II-AB), and a repeating unit of the later-described copolymer component.\n\nVarious substituents ofR 13 ' to R 16 ' in formula (II-AB!) or (II-AB2) can also be used as the substituents of the atomic group to form an alicyclic hydrocarbon structure in formula (II-AB), or atomic group Z to form a bridged alicyclic hydro› carbon structure.\n\nThe specific examples of the repeating units represented by formula (II-AB!) or(II-AB2) are shown below, but the inven› tion is not restricted thereto.\n\n5\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n60\n\n65", + "recall": 0.9664429530201343, + "true_md": "50 \n\nUS 7,851,130 B2 \n\n49 \n\n-continued \n\nAs the skeleton of the alicyclic hydrocarbon to be formed, the same cycloalkyl groups as represented by R$_{12 }$to R$_{25 }$ in formulae (pl) to (pVI) are exemplified. \n\nThe skeleton of the alicyclic hydrocarbon structure may have a substituent, and as the substituents, the groups repre› sented by R$_{13}$’ to R 16 ’ in formula (II-AB!) or (II-AB2) can be exemplified. \n\nIn the alicyclic hydrocarbon-based acid-decomposable resin in the invention, a group capable of decomposing by the action of an acid can be contained in at least one repeating unit of a repeating unit having a partial structure containing ali› cyclic hydrocarbon represented by any of formulae (pl) to (pV), a repeating unit represented by formula (II-AB), and a repeating unit of the later-described copolymer component. \n\nVarious substituents ofR$_{13}$ ’ to R 16 ’ in formula (II-AB!) or (II-AB2) can also be used as the substituents of the atomic group to form an alicyclic hydrocarbon structure in formula (II-AB), or atomic group Z to form a bridged alicyclic hydro› carbon structure. \n\nThe specific examples of the repeating units represented by formula (II-AB!) or(II-AB2) are shown below, but the inven› tion is not restricted thereto. \n\nIn each of the above structural formulae, Rx represents H, CH$_{3}$ , CF$_{3 }$ or CH$_{2}$OH; and Rxa and Rxb each represents an alkyl group having from 1 to 4 carbon atoms. \n\nAs the halogen atoms represented by R$_{11}$ ’ and R 12 ’ in formula (II-AB), a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, a fluorine atom and an iodine atom are exemplified. \n\nAs the alkyl groups represented by R$_{11}$’ and R 12 ’, straight chain or branched alkyl groups having from 1 to 10 carbon atoms are preferred, e.g., a methyl group, an ethyl group, an n-propyl group, an isopropyl group, a straight chain or branched butyl group, pentyl group, hexyl group, heptyl group, etc., are exemplified. \n\nThe atomic group represented by Z’ to form an alicyclic structure is an atomic group to form a repeating unit having an alicyclic hydrocarbon structure in the resin, which may have a substituent, and an atomic group to form a repeating unit having a bridged alicyclic hydrocarbon structure is especially preferred." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "b31c315f338f1458899b015ad4e0076aac49eb1bf78f6d55c1a344371b9365f9", + "edit_distance": 0.7894736842105263, + "f1_score": 0.5, + "meteor": 0.7740169238427078, + "precision": 0.3333333333333333, + "pred_md": "191\n\n192\n\n-continued\n\n-continued\n\nUS 9,423,690 B2\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n60\n\n65", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "192 \n\n191 \n\nUS 9,423,690 B2 \n\n-continued \n\n-continued" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.39832871551569504, + "doc_id": "82655ef6de7f323e317dacf1c5a34bfc0a7d8ecc9feac1e22ae0adf36bf900e3", + "edit_distance": 0.8888888888888888, + "f1_score": 0.8333333333333334, + "meteor": 0.8259259259259261, + "precision": 0.7142857142857143, + "pred_md": "US 2021/0033970 Al\n\nFeb.4,2021\n\n-continued\n\no-\n\no-\n\no-\n\n30", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Feb.4,2021 \n\n30 \n\nUS 2021/0033970 Al" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8638682972685434, + "doc_id": "96ebf378e84e74d65ac69d3aabed83e883a69f6f3bf83c1d2b0c3500095301bb", + "edit_distance": 0.8522727272727273, + "f1_score": 0.9710391822827937, + "meteor": 0.5564686506426864, + "precision": 0.9827586206896551, + "pred_md": "US 2021/0033970 Al\n\n[0115] Notably, the compound having the anion of for› mula (ID) does not have fluorine at the a-position relative to the sulfa group, but two trifluoromethyl groups at the ~-position. For this reason, it has a sufficient acidity to sever the acid labile groups in the base polymer. Thus the com› pound is an effective PAG.\n\n[0116] Another preferred PAG is a compound having the formula (2).\n\n[0117] In formula (2), R 201 and R 202 are each indepen› dently a C 1 -C 30 hydrocarbyl group which may contain a heteroatom. R 203 is a C 1 -C 30 hydrocarbylene group which may contain a heteroatom. Any two of R 201 , R 202 and R 203 may bond together to form a ring with the sulfur atom to which they are attached. Exemplary rings are the same as described above for the ring that R 101 and R 102 in formula (1-1), taken together, form with the sulfur atom to which they are attached.\n\n[0118] The hydrocarbyl groups R 201 and R 202 may be saturated or unsaturated and straight, branched or cyclic. Examples thereof include alkyl groups such as methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, n-pentyl, tert-pentyl, n-hexyl, n-octyl, 2-ethylhexyl, n-nonyl, and n-decyl; cyclic saturated hydrocarbyl groups such as cyclo› pentyl, cyclohexyl, cyclopentylmethyl, cyclopentylethyl, cyclopentylbutyl, cyclohexylmethyl, cyclohexylethyl, cyclohexylbutyl, norbornyl, oxanorbomyl, tricyclo[5.2.l.0 2 · 6]decanyl, and adamantyl; and aryl groups such as phenyl, naphthyl and anthracenyl. In these groups, some hydrogen may be substituted by a moiety containing a heteroatom such as oxygen, sulfur, nitrogen or halogen, or some carbon may be replaced by a moiety containing a heteroatom such as oxygen, sulfur or nitrogen, so that the group may contain a hydroxyl, cyano, carbonyl, ether bond, ester bond, sulfonic\n\n74\n\nFeb.4,2021\n\nacid ester bond, carbonate moiety, lactone ring, sultone ring, carboxylic anhydride or haloalkyl moiety.\n\n[0119] The hydrocarbylene group R 203 may be saturated or unsaturated and straight, branched or cyclic. Examples thereof include alkanediyl groups such as methylene, eth› ylene, propane-1,3-diyl, butane-1,4-diyl, pentane-1,5-diyl, hexane-1,6-diyl, heptane-I, 7-diyl, octane-1,8-diyl, nonane1,9-diyl, decane-1,10-diyl, undecane-1,11-diyl, dodecane-1, 12-diyl, tridecane-1, 13-diyl, tetradecane-1, 14-diyl, pentade› cane-1, 15-diyl, hexadecane-1, 16-diyl, and heptadecane-1, 17-diyl; cyclic saturated hydrocarbylene groups such as cyclopentanediyl, cyclohexanediyl, norbomanediyl and ada› mantanediyl; and arylene groups such as phenylene, meth› ylphenylene, ethylphenylene, n-propylphenylene, isopropy› lphenylene, n-butylphenylene, isobutylphenylene, sec› butylphenylene, tert-butylphenylene, naphthylene, methylnaphthylene, ethylnaphthylene, n-propylnaphthyl› ene, isopropylnaphthylene, n-butylnaphthylene, isobutylnaphthylene, sec-butylnaphthylene, and tert› butylnaphthylene. In these groups, some hydrogen may be substituted by a moiety containing a heteroatom such as oxygen, sulfur, nitrogen or halogen, or some carbon may be replaced by a moiety containing a heteroatom such as oxygen, sulfur or nitrogen, so that the group may contain a hydroxyl, cyano, carbonyl, ether bond, ester bond, sulfonic acid ester bond, carbonate, lactone ring, sultone ring, car› boxylic anhydride or haloalkyl moiety. Of the heteroatoms, oxygen is preferred.\n\n[0120] In formula (2), LA is a single bond, ether bond or a C1 -C 20 hydrocarbylene group which may contain a heteroa› tom. The hydrocarbylene group may be saturated or unsatu› rated and straight, branched or cyclic. Examples thereof are as exemplified above for R 203 .\n\n[0121] In formula (2), XA, XB, Xe and xn are each independently hydrogen, fluorine or trifluoromethyl, with the proviso that at least one ofXA, XB, Xe and xn is fluorine or trifluoromethyl, and k is an integer of Oto 3.\n\n[0122] Of the PAGs having formula (2), those having formula (2') are preferred.\n\n[0123] In formula (2'), LA is as defined above. RHF is hydrogen or trifluoromethyl, preferably trifluoromethyl. R 301 , R 302 and R 303 are each independently hydrogen or a C1 -C 20 hydrocarbyl group which may contain a heteroatom. The hydrocarbyl group may be saturated or unsaturated and straight, branched or cyclic. Examples thereof are as exem› plified above for R 107 in formula (IA'). The subscripts x and y are each independently an integer of 0 to 5, and z is an integer of 0 to 4.\n\n[0124] Examples of the PAG having formula (2) are as exemplified for the PAG having formula (2) in JP-A 2017026980.", + "recall": 0.9595959595959596, + "true_md": "Feb.4,2021 \n\n74 \n\nUS 2021/0033970 Al \n\nacid ester bond, carbonate moiety, lactone ring, sultone ring, carboxylic anhydride or haloalkyl moiety. \n\n[0119] The hydrocarbylene group R$^{203 }$may be saturated or unsaturated and straight, branched or cyclic. Examples thereof include alkanediyl groups such as methylene, eth› ylene, propane-1,3-diyl, butane-1,4-diyl, pentane-1,5-diyl, hexane-1,6-diyl, heptane-I, 7-diyl, octane-1,8-diyl, nonane- 1,9-diyl, decane-1,10-diyl, undecane-1,11-diyl, dodecane-1, 12-diyl, tridecane-1, 13-diyl, tetradecane-1, 14-diyl, pentade› cane-1, 15-diyl, hexadecane-1, 16-diyl, and heptadecane-1, 17-diyl; cyclic saturated hydrocarbylene groups such as cyclopentanediyl, cyclohexanediyl, norbomanediyl and ada› mantanediyl; and arylene groups such as phenylene, meth› ylphenylene, ethylphenylene, n-propylphenylene, isopropy› lphenylene, n-butylphenylene, isobutylphenylene, sec› butylphenylene, tert-butylphenylene, naphthylene, methylnaphthylene, ethylnaphthylene, n-propylnaphthyl› ene, isopropylnaphthylene, n-butylnaphthylene, isobutylnaphthylene, sec-butylnaphthylene, and tert› butylnaphthylene. In these groups, some hydrogen may be substituted by a moiety containing a heteroatom such as oxygen, sulfur, nitrogen or halogen, or some carbon may be replaced by a moiety containing a heteroatom such as oxygen, sulfur or nitrogen, so that the group may contain a hydroxyl, cyano, carbonyl, ether bond, ester bond, sulfonic acid ester bond, carbonate, lactone ring, sultone ring, car› boxylic anhydride or haloalkyl moiety. Of the heteroatoms, oxygen is preferred. \n\n[0120] In formula (2), LA is a single bond, ether bond or a C$_{1 }$-C$_{20 }$hydrocarbylene group which may contain a heteroa› tom. The hydrocarbylene group may be saturated or unsatu› rated and straight, branched or cyclic. Examples thereof are as exemplified above for R 203 . \n\n[0121] In formula (2), XA, XB, Xe and xn are each independently hydrogen, fluorine or trifluoromethyl, with the proviso that at least one ofXA, XB, Xe and xn is fluorine or trifluoromethyl, and k is an integer of Oto 3. \n\n[0122] Of the PAGs having formula (2), those having formula (2’) are preferred. \n\n[0123] In formula (2’), LA is as defined above. RHF is hydrogen or trifluoromethyl, preferably trifluoromethyl. R 301 , R $^{302 }$and R$^{303 }$are each independently hydrogen or a C$_{1 }$-C$_{20 }$hydrocarbyl group which may contain a heteroatom. The hydrocarbyl group may be saturated or unsaturated and straight, branched or cyclic. Examples thereof are as exem› plified above for R $^{107 }$in formula (IA’). The subscripts x and y are each independently an integer of 0 to 5, and z is an integer of 0 to 4. \n\n[0124] Examples of the PAG having formula (2) are as exemplified for the PAG having formula (2) in JP-A 2017- 026980. \n\n[0118] The hydrocarbyl groups R 201 and R 202 may be saturated or unsaturated and straight, branched or cyclic. Examples thereof include alkyl groups such as methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, n-pentyl, tert-pentyl, n-hexyl, n-octyl, 2-ethylhexyl, n-nonyl, and n-decyl; cyclic saturated hydrocarbyl groups such as cyclo› pentyl, cyclohexyl, cyclopentylmethyl, cyclopentylethyl, cyclopentylbutyl, cyclohexylmethyl, cyclohexylethyl, cyclohexylbutyl, norbornyl, oxanorbomyl, tricyclo[5.2.l.0 2 • 6]decanyl, and adamantyl; and aryl groups such as phenyl, naphthyl and anthracenyl. In these groups, some hydrogen may be substituted by a moiety containing a heteroatom such as oxygen, sulfur, nitrogen or halogen, or some carbon may be replaced by a moiety containing a heteroatom such as oxygen, sulfur or nitrogen, so that the group may contain a hydroxyl, cyano, carbonyl, ether bond, ester bond, sulfonic \n\n[0117] In formula (2), R 201 and R 202 are each indepen› dently a C$_{1 }$-C$_{30 }$ hydrocarbyl group which may contain a heteroatom. R 203 is a C$_{1}$-C$_{30 }$ hydrocarbylene group which may contain a heteroatom. Any two of R 201 , R $^{202 }$and R203 may bond together to form a ring with the sulfur atom to which they are attached. Exemplary rings are the same as described above for the ring that R $^{101 }$and R $^{102 }$in formula (1-1), taken together, form with the sulfur atom to which they are attached. \n\n[0116] Another preferred PAG is a compound having the formula (2). \n\n[0115] Notably, the compound having the anion of for› mula (ID) does not have fluorine at the a-position relative to the sulfa group, but two trifluoromethyl groups at the ~-position. For this reason, it has a sufficient acidity to sever the acid labile groups in the base polymer. Thus the com› pound is an effective PAG." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6166025991004304, + "doc_id": "ff132b5f9485ebebd9629a00b28fe113832d8205b9619780d27b305aa3e2e362", + "edit_distance": 0.45, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9610576634598075, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Patent Application Publication\n\nJan. 10, 2019 Sheet 9 of 10\n\nUS 2019/0010119 Al\n\nFIG. 9\n\nFIG. 9", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "US 2019/0010119 Al \n\nJan. 10, 2019 Sheet 9 of 10 \n\nPatent Application Publication \n\nFIG. 9" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9107148487584393, + "doc_id": "f866df9a18d2fb9424fde9a5a5732aee5422efb3c20d4c301b13ec89758aa68c", + "edit_distance": 0.11637931034482758, + "f1_score": 0.927038626609442, + "meteor": 0.9550574022233305, + "precision": 0.8925619834710744, + "pred_md": "US 9,423,690 B2\n\n109\n\nIn Formula (c2), R 3 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group. The alkyl group as R 3 is preferably the same as Formula (cl).\n\nHere, with respect to the extreme ultraviolet (EUV light) exposure, the light leakage (out-of-band light) occurred in the ultraviolet region having a wavelength of 100 to 400 nm worsens the surface roughness, and as a result, the perfor› mance of the resolution and the space width roughness tends to be degraded due to the bridge between patterns or pattern disconnection.\n\nHowever, the aromatic ring in the repeating unit ( c) functions as an internal filter capable of absorbing the out-of-band light. Accordingly, it is preferred that the resin (A) contains the repeating unit (c) from the viewpoint of high resolution and low space width roughness.\n\nHere, it is preferred that the repeating unit ( c) does not have a phenolic hydroxyl group (a hydroxyl group directly bound on the aromatic ring) from the viewpoint of obtaining high resolution.\n\nSpecific examples of the repeating unit ( c) are shown below, but are not limited thereto.\n\n5\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n60\n\n65\n\n110\n\n-continued", + "recall": 0.9642857142857143, + "true_md": "110 \n\nUS 9,423,690 B2 \n\n109 \n\n-continued \n\nIn Formula (c2), R$_{3 }$ represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group. The alkyl group as R$_{3 }$ is preferably the same as Formula (cl). \n\nHere, with respect to the extreme ultraviolet (EUV light) exposure, the light leakage (out-of-band light) occurred in the ultraviolet region having a wavelength of 100 to 400 nm worsens the surface roughness, and as a result, the perfor› mance of the resolution and the space width roughness tends to be degraded due to the bridge between patterns or pattern disconnection. \n\nHowever, the aromatic ring in the repeating unit ( c) functions as an internal filter capable of absorbing the out-of-band light. Accordingly, it is preferred that the resin (A) contains the repeating unit (c) from the viewpoint of high resolution and low space width roughness. \n\nHere, it is preferred that the repeating unit ( c) does not have a phenolic hydroxyl group (a hydroxyl group directly bound on the aromatic ring) from the viewpoint of obtaining high resolution. \n\nSpecific examples of the repeating unit ( c) are shown below, but are not limited thereto." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6580370064762462, + "doc_id": "5e9eeb10302e4b7f884095e7052987c3e087aad4adddb3a2b62864124b546ab4", + "edit_distance": 0.8333333333333334, + "f1_score": 0.9090909090909091, + "meteor": 0.9490196078431373, + "precision": 0.8333333333333334, + "pred_md": "US 2021/0033970 Al\n\nFeb.4,2021\n\n85\n\n-continued", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Feb.4,2021 \n\n85 \n\nUS 2021/0033970 Al" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4832697830906221, + "doc_id": "d971d7e54bd1c65e9ba4f36d28a0cc8190793f3a036e4d07a1cb05fa7da11c83", + "edit_distance": 0.5714285714285714, + "f1_score": 0.9090909090909091, + "meteor": 0.8576923076923078, + "precision": 0.8333333333333334, + "pred_md": "US 2021/0033970 Al\n\nFeb.4,2021\n\n-continued\n\n-continued\n\n87", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "US 2021/0033970 Al \n\n87 \n\nFeb.4,2021" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "7e4d03325ebb135003c77e4de99f2b5035ff10152221a32eef5fff2faec31f0a", + "edit_distance": 0.8333333333333334, + "f1_score": 0.48, + "meteor": 0.5874840357598978, + "precision": 0.3157894736842105, + "pred_md": "47\n\n48\n\n3\n\n-continued\n\n0\n\n0\n\n0\n\nQ\n\nSO3-s+ph 3\n\nUS 9,423,690 B2\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n60\n\n65\n\nSO3-s+ph 3", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "48 \n\n47 \n\nUS 9,423,690 B2 \n\n-continued \n\n-continued" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "33b2e7cd9a20517a536bb9ce337723bf6b6bb5627951ac7773cfbad09ca1d449", + "edit_distance": 0.8125, + "f1_score": 0.5454545454545455, + "meteor": 0.8035714285714285, + "precision": 0.375, + "pred_md": "61\n\n-continued\n\nUS 7,851,130 B2\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n60\n\n65\n\n62", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "62 \n\nUS 7,851,130 B2 \n\n61 \n\n-continued" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8938931777585513, + "doc_id": "afc05664bf161f9b1a62ef099d943a10c465edcbc87d9fdb0c2121637b6716e7", + "edit_distance": 0.38461538461538464, + "f1_score": 0.9565217391304348, + "meteor": 0.7757545579300933, + "precision": 0.9506172839506173, + "pred_md": "US 6,482,565 Bl\n\n7\n\nPolyacrolein thus obtained (20 g), ethane-1,2-diol (150 g), toluene-p-sulfonic acid (1 g) and benzene (200 g) were placed in a 1000-ml round-bottomed flask, and the reaction was performed under reflux with a Dean and Stark water separator attached to the flask, until no more water was generated. After the reaction was completed, the product was precipitated from distilled water, to obtain pure com› pound represented by following Chemical Formula 6a (yield: 45%).\n\nAs the reaction catalyst, an acid such as trifluoromethane› sulfonic acid, hydrochloric acid or boron trifluoride-etherate may be used instead of toluene-p-sulfonic acid. As a reaction solvent, a non-carbonyl solvent such as tetrahydrofuran may be used instead of benzene.\n\n## EXAMPLE 2\n\nThe procedure according to Example I was repeated but using propane-1,2-diol (20 g) instead of ethane-1,2-diol, to obtain the compound represented by Chemical Formula 7a (yield: 45%).\n\n## EXAMPLE 3\n\nIn a 100 ml flask, 2-vinyl-1,3-dioxolane (0.1 mole) of Chemical Formula la, acrylic acid (0.06 mole), tetrahydro› furan (20 g) and AIBN (0.2 g) were placed, and the mixture was reacted at 65° C. under nitrogen or argon atmosphere for 8 hours. After the polymerization was completed, the polymers were precipitated from distilled water or ethyl ether, to obtain the compound of Chemical Formula 6 (yield: 60%).\n\n## EXAMPLE 4\n\nThe procedure according to Example 3 was repeated but using 2-vinyl-1,3-dioxane (0.1 mole) of Chemical Formula\n\n8\n\nlb instead of 2-vinyl-1,3-dioxolane of Chemical Formula la, to obtain the compound represented by Chemical Formula 7 (yield: 55%).\n\nu\n\n## EXAMPLE 5\n\nIn a 250-ml flask, 2-vinyl-1,3-dioxolane (0.3 mole) of Chemical Formula la, maleic anhydride (0.1 mole), AIBN (0.8 g) and tetrahydrofuran ( 41 g) were placed, and the mixture was reacted at 65° C. under nitrogen or argon atmosphere for 8 hours. After the polymerization was completed, the polymers were precipitated from ethyl ether, and dried in vacuo to obtain pure compound of Chemical Formula 8 (yield: 80%).\n\nAs a polymerization initiator, conventional radical poly› merization initiators such as lauryl peroxide may be used instead of AIBN (yield: 40% ).\n\n## EXAMPLE 6\n\nThe procedure according to Example 5 was repeated but using 2-vinyl-1,3-dioxane (0.3 mole) of Chemical Formula lb instead of 2-vinyl-1,3-dioxolane of Chemical Formula la, to obtain the compound represented by Chemical Formula 9 (yield: 42%).\n\n5\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n60\n\n65", + "recall": 0.9625, + "true_md": "US 6,482,565 Bl \n\n8 \n\n7 \n\nlb instead of 2-vinyl-1,3-dioxolane of Chemical Formula la, to obtain the compound represented by Chemical Formula 7 (yield: 55%). \n\nPolyacrolein thus obtained (20 g), ethane-1,2-diol (150 g), toluene-p-sulfonic acid (1 g) and benzene (200 g) were placed in a 1000-ml round-bottomed flask, and the reaction was performed under reflux with a Dean and Stark water separator attached to the flask, until no more water was generated. After the reaction was completed, the product was precipitated from distilled water, to obtain pure com› pound represented by following Chemical Formula 6a (yield: 45%). \n\nAs the reaction catalyst, an acid such as trifluoromethane› sulfonic acid, hydrochloric acid or boron trifluoride-etherate may be used instead of toluene-p-sulfonic acid. As a reaction solvent, a non-carbonyl solvent such as tetrahydrofuran may be used instead of benzene. \n\nThe procedure according to Example I was repeated but using propane-1,2-diol (20 g) instead of ethane-1,2-diol, to obtain the compound represented by Chemical Formula 7a (yield: 45%). \n\nIn a 250-ml flask, 2-vinyl-1,3-dioxolane (0.3 mole) of Chemical Formula la, maleic anhydride (0.1 mole), AIBN (0.8 g) and tetrahydrofuran ( 41 g) were placed, and the mixture was reacted at 65° C. under nitrogen or argon atmosphere for 8 hours. After the polymerization was completed, the polymers were precipitated from ethyl ether, and dried in vacuo to obtain pure compound of Chemical Formula 8 (yield: 80%). \n\nAs a polymerization initiator, conventional radical poly› merization initiators such as lauryl peroxide may be used instead of AIBN (yield: 40% ). \n\nThe procedure according to Example 5 was repeated but using 2-vinyl-1,3-dioxane (0.3 mole) of Chemical Formula lb instead of 2-vinyl-1,3-dioxolane of Chemical Formula la, to obtain the compound represented by Chemical Formula 9 (yield: 42%). \n\nIn a 100 ml flask, 2-vinyl-1,3-dioxolane (0.1 mole) of Chemical Formula la, acrylic acid (0.06 mole), tetrahydro› furan (20 g) and AIBN (0.2 g) were placed, and the mixture was reacted at 65° C. under nitrogen or argon atmosphere for 8 hours. After the polymerization was completed, the poly- mers were precipitated from distilled water or ethyl ether, to obtain the compound of Chemical Formula 6 (yield: 60%). \n\nThe procedure according to Example 3 was repeated but using 2-vinyl-1,3-dioxane (0.1 mole) of Chemical Formula \n\n## EXAMPLE 4\n\n## EXAMPLE 3\n\n<Chemical Formula 9> \n\n<Chemical Formula la> \n\n<Chemical Formula 6> \n\n<Chemical Formula 7a> \n\n<Chemical Formula 7> \n\n<Chemical Formula 6a> \n\n<Chemical Formula lb> \n\n## EXAMPLE 5\n\n## EXAMPLE 2\n\n## EXAMPLE 6" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.3448444257953326, + "doc_id": "c8b7b1c932967f07b7330263eeea97fc8ccc872cef0e707f1e748e15f6adde84", + "edit_distance": 0.6363636363636364, + "f1_score": 0.7058823529411764, + "meteor": 0.7601351351351351, + "precision": 0.5454545454545454, + "pred_md": "171\n\n-continued\n\nUS 9 ,423,690 B2\n\n10\n\n25\n\n60\n\n65\n\n172", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "172 \n\nUS 9 ,423,690 B2 \n\n-continued \n\n-continued" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.877844640814697, + "doc_id": "1be78ae03391e1caa152146e9459ba02ce21e3e3859e814aa92cd4da9277e914", + "edit_distance": 0.13333333333333333, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9988148148148148, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "US 2021/0033970 Al\n\nFeb.4,2021\n\n[0058] Examples of the anion in the compound havin formula (A) are shown below, but not limited thereto. g\n\n24", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Feb.4,2021 \n\n24 \n\nUS 2021/0033970 Al \n\n[0058] Examples of the anion in the compound havin formula (A) are shown below, but not limited thereto. g" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.278093559995945, + "doc_id": "4785bec852cb918c24b5b0c53e709aec564438ba79af977a9d1a82f17de4323e", + "edit_distance": 0.8888888888888888, + "f1_score": 0.6315789473684211, + "meteor": 0.6944444444444445, + "precision": 0.46153846153846156, + "pred_md": "US 2021/0033970 Al\n\nFeb.4,2021\n\n109\n\n-continued\n\nQuencher 20\n\nQuencher 21\n\nQuencher 22\n\nQuencher 23\n\nQuencher 24\n\nQuencher 25", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Feb.4,2021 \n\n109 \n\nUS 2021/0033970 Al \n\n-continued \n\n-continued" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7116934560318235, + "doc_id": "407a7e4a20ce8c163f29adcac5f4bdfe4cf63cfa096cf7aa4b7c14a1f5f12171", + "edit_distance": 0.206266318537859, + "f1_score": 0.9756097560975611, + "meteor": 0.8306837602705092, + "precision": 0.9836065573770492, + "pred_md": "US 2012/0003590 Al\n\nJan. 5, 2012\n\n-continued\n\n[0278] In formulae (VIIa) to (VIIc), each of R 2 c to R 4 c independently represents a hydrogen atom, a hydroxyl group or a cyano group, provided that at least one of R 2 c to R 4 c represents a hydroxyl group or a cyano group. A structure where one or two members out ofR c to R c are a hydroxyl 2 4 group with the remaining being a hydrogen atom is preferred. In formula (VIIa), it is more preferred that two members out of R c to R 2 4 c are a hydroxyl group and the remaining is a hydrogen atom.\n\n[0279] The repeating unit having a partial structure repre› sented by formulae (VIIa) to (VIId) includes repeating units represented by the following formulae (Ana) to (AIId):\n\n-continued\n\n[0280] In formulae (Alla) to (AIId), R1c represents a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, a trifluoromethyl group or a hydroxymethyl group.\n\n[0281] R2 c to R 4 c have the same meanings as R 2 c to R 4 c in formulae (VIIa) to (VIIc). The resin (P) may or may not contain a polar group-containing repeating unit but in the case of containing the repeating unit, the content thereof is pref› erably from 1 to 60 mo! %, more preferably from 5 to 50 mo! %, based on all repeating units in the resin (P).\n\n[0282] Specific examples of the polar group-containing repeating unit are illustrated below, but the present invention is not limited thereto.\n\n40", + "recall": 0.967741935483871, + "true_md": "US 2012/0003590 Al \n\n40 \n\nJan. 5, 2012 \n\n-continued \n\n-continued \n\n[0278] In formulae (VIIa) to (VIIc), each of R$_{2}$c to R$_{4}$ c independently represents a hydrogen atom, a hydroxyl group or a cyano group, provided that at least one of R$_{2}$c to R$_{4}$ c represents a hydroxyl group or a cyano group. A structure where one or two members out ofR$_{2}$c to R$_{4}$ c are a hydroxyl group with the remaining being a hydrogen atom is preferred. In formula (VIIa), it is more preferred that two members out of R$_{2}$c to R$_{4}$ c are a hydroxyl group and the remaining is a hydrogen atom. \n\n[0279] The repeating unit having a partial structure repre› sented by formulae (VIIa) to (VIId) includes repeating units represented by the following formulae (Ana) to (AIId): \n\n[0280] In formulae (Alla) to (AIId), R$_{1}$c represents a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, a trifluoromethyl group or a hydroxymethyl group. \n\n[0281] R$_{2}$c to R$_{4}$ c have the same meanings as R$_{2}$c to R$_{4}$ c in formulae (VIIa) to (VIIc). The resin (P) may or may not contain a polar group-containing repeating unit but in the case of containing the repeating unit, the content thereof is pref› erably from 1 to 60 mo! %, more preferably from 5 to 50 mo! %, based on all repeating units in the resin (P). \n\n[0282] Specific examples of the polar group-containing repeating unit are illustrated below, but the present invention is not limited thereto." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9114214277008639, + "doc_id": "aecb66167d187f509c61209cfd7e1edb41863813b141138602316b382389e1d6", + "edit_distance": 0.7730061349693251, + "f1_score": 0.9644128113879004, + "meteor": 0.8380706610835272, + "precision": 0.9644128113879004, + "pred_md": "US 7,851,130 B2\n\n123\n\nfrom the gradient of the straight line part of the sensitivity curve. The greater the y value, the better is the dissolution contrast.\n\nOutgassing Performance (the Coefficient of Fluctuation in the Film Thickness after Exposure):\n\nThe resist film is irradiated with 2.0 times the dose of irradiation at the sensitivity determined by areal exposure with EUV (mJ/cm 2 ), and the thickness of the film after exposure (before post-baking) is measured, and the coefficient of fluctuation from the film thickness at unexposed time is found according to the following equation.\n\nCoefficient of fluctuation in film thickness (%)~[(film thickness at unexposed time-film thickness after exposure )/film thickness at unexposed time ]x 100\n\nThe results of evaluation are shown in Table 8 below.\n\nTABLES\n\n## Examples 45 to 50 and Comparative Example 8\n\nA negative resist solution having the concentration of solids content of 8 mass % is prepared by dissolving the com› ponents in the solvents respectively shown in Table 5, and filtrating the solution through a polytetrafluoroethylene filter having a pore size of0.1 µm. Each of the prepared resists is evaluated as follows.\n\n## Evaluation of Resist:\n\nThe prepared negative resist solution is uniformly coated on a silicon substrate having been subjected to hexamethyldisilazane treatment by a spin coater, and dried by heating on a hot plate at 120° C. for 60 seconds to form a resist film having a thickness of0.15 µm.\n\n## Sensitivity and y Value:\n\nThe obtained resist film is subjected to areal exposure with EUV ray (wavelength: 13 nm)with varying exposuredose0.5 by 0.5 ml within the range of exposure dose of from Oto 10.0 mJ, and the resist film is further baked at 110° C. for 90 seconds. After that, a dissolution rate of the resist film at each exposure dose is measured with a 2.38 mass % tetramethy› lammonium hydroxide (TMAH) aqueous solution to obtain a sensitivity curve.\n\n5\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n60\n\nEvaluation was performed in the same manner as in 65 Example 39 (EUV exposure of positive resist). The results obtained are shown in Table 9 below.\n\n124\n\nTABLE9\n\nFrom the results shown in Tables 8 and 9, it can be seen that the resist compositions in the invention are high in both sen› sitivity and contrast and excellent in outgassing performance in the characteristic evaluation by irradiation with EUV ray as compared with comparative compositions.\n\nThe invention can provide a photosensitive composition excellent in sensitivity, resolution, line edge roughness and outgassing characteristics; a compound for use in the photo› sensitive composition; and a pattern forming method with the photosensitive composition.\n\nThe entire disclosure of each and every foreign patent application from which the benefit of foreign priority has been claimed in the present application is incorporated herein by reference, as if fully set forth.\n\nWhat is claimed is: 1. A photosensitive composition comprising:\n\n- (A) a compound represented by the following formula (I):\n\nwherein R 1 to R 13 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent; Z represents a single bond, an alkylene group, an arylene group, an ether group or a thioether group; x- represents an anion containing a proton acceptor func› tional group; and the proton acceptor functional group is a functional group having a basicity selected from the group consisting of an amino group, an anilino group, a pyridine group, an amidino group and a guanidino group.", + "recall": 0.9644128113879004, + "true_md": "124 \n\nUS 7,851,130 B2 \n\n123 \n\nfrom the gradient of the straight line part of the sensitivity curve. The greater the y value, the better is the dissolution contrast. \n\nOutgassing Performance (the Coefficient of Fluctuation in 5 the Film Thickness after Exposure): \n\nThe resist film is irradiated with 2.0 times the dose of irradiation at the sensitivity determined by areal exposure with EUV (mJ/cm 2 ), and the thickness of the film after expo- sure (before post-baking) is measured, and the coefficient of fluctuation from the film thickness at unexposed time is found according to the following equation. \n\nThe results of evaluation are shown in Table 8 below. \n\nFrom the results shown in Tables 8 and 9, it can be seen that the resist compositions in the invention are high in both sen› sitivity and contrast and excellent in outgassing performance in the characteristic evaluation by irradiation with EUV ray as compared with comparative compositions. \n\nThe invention can provide a photosensitive composition excellent in sensitivity, resolution, line edge roughness and outgassing characteristics; a compound for use in the photo› sensitive composition; and a pattern forming method with the photosensitive composition. \n\nThe entire disclosure of each and every foreign patent application from which the benefit of foreign priority has been claimed in the present application is incorporated herein by reference, as if fully set forth. \n\nWhat is claimed is: \n\n1. A photosensitive composition comprising: \n\n(A) a compound represented by the following formula (I): \n\nwherein \n\n- R$^{1 }$to R$^{13 }$each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent; \n\n- Z represents a single bond, an alkylene group, an arylene group, an ether group or a thioether group; \n\n- x- represents an anion containing a proton acceptor func› tional group; and \n\n- the proton acceptor functional group is a functional group having a basicity selected from the group consisting of an amino group, an anilino group, a pyridine group, an amidino group and a guanidino group. \n\nEvaluation was performed in the same manner as in 65 Example 39 (EUV exposure of positive resist). The results obtained are shown in Table 9 below. \n\nThe obtained resist film is subjected to areal exposure with EUV ray (wavelength: 13 nm)with varying exposuredose0.5 by 0.5 ml within the range of exposure dose of from Oto 10.0 mJ, and the resist film is further baked at 110° C. for 90 seconds. After that, a dissolution rate of the resist film at each exposure dose is measured with a 2.38 mass % tetramethy› lammonium hydroxide (TMAH) aqueous solution to obtain a sensitivity curve. \n\nThe prepared negative resist solution is uniformly coated on a silicon substrate having been subjected to hexamethyl- disilazane treatment by a spin coater, and dried by heating on a hot plate at 120° C. for 60 seconds to form a resist film having a thickness of0.15 µm. \n\nA negative resist solution having the concentration of sol- ids content of 8 mass % is prepared by dissolving the com› ponents in the solvents respectively shown in Table 5, and filtrating the solution through a polytetrafluoroethylene filter having a pore size of0.1 µm. Each of the prepared resists is evaluated as follows. \n\n## Examples 45 to 50 and Comparative Example 8\n\n## Evaluation of Resist:\n\n## Sensitivity and y Value:\n\n(I) \n\nTABLES \n\nTABLE9 \n\n- Coefficient of fluctuation in film thickness (%)~[(film thickness at unexposed time-film thickness after exposure )/film thickness at unexposed time ]x 100" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5991417036512656, + "doc_id": "561f294a244021fd7c52c82efdc50c4c347f44497e42d7e1e5a562435c15b933", + "edit_distance": 0.3, + "f1_score": 0.9411764705882353, + "meteor": 0.7948022959183674, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "US 2012/0003590 Al\n\nJan. 5, 2012\n\n23", + "recall": 0.8888888888888888, + "true_md": "US 2012/0003590 Al \n\n23 \n\nJan. 5, 2012 \n\n-continued \n\n-continued" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "6e86937d27a1b011dbcc3826a63e984f9b47ff1a601916aae3a06c707f9e502f", + "edit_distance": 0.875, + "f1_score": 0.5714285714285714, + "meteor": 0.7246189615086541, + "precision": 0.4, + "pred_md": "133\n\n-continued\n\nUS 9,423,690 B2\n\n10\n\n15\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n60\n\n65\n\n134\n\n-continued", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "-continued \n\n-continued \n\n134 \n\n133 \n\nUS 9,423,690 B2" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9098388135127888, + "doc_id": "aa695212e287df2cf00cb53edab17a67edd0d1a2ef41191f725c095a3f58eefa", + "edit_distance": 0.6442953020134228, + "f1_score": 0.9726027397260274, + "meteor": 0.8526295969061863, + "precision": 0.9466666666666667, + "pred_md": "US 2012/0003590 Al\n\n-continued\n\n[0258] The resin above may further contain a repeating unit represented by any of the following formulae (al) to (a5), in addition to the repeating unit (A) and the repeating unit (B).\n\n(a2)\n\n(a3)\n\n33\n\nJan. 5, 2012\n\n-continued\n\n[0259] Each ofj 1,j2,j3,j4 andj5 independently represents an integer of O to 3.\n\n[0260] Each of j 1, j2, j3, j4 and j 5 independently represents preferably an integer of O to 2, more preferably O or 1.\n\n[0261] Specific examples of the repeating unit represented by any of formulae (al) to (a5) are illustrated below, but the present invention is not limited thereto.\n\nOH", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "US 2012/0003590 Al \n\n33 \n\nJan. 5, 2012 \n\n[0259] Each ofj 1,j2,j3,j4 andj5 independently represents an integer of O to 3. \n\n[0260] Each of j 1, j2, j3, j4 and j 5 independently represents preferably an integer of O to 2, more preferably O or 1. \n\n[0261] Specific examples of the repeating unit represented by any of formulae (al) to (a5) are illustrated below, but the present invention is not limited thereto. \n\n[0258] The resin above may further contain a repeating unit represented by any of the following formulae (al) to (a5), in addition to the repeating unit (A) and the repeating unit (B)." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7957265462324025, + "doc_id": "c7632e35d67642ee82938f018ba8e71316dc40e8ca855aa085698a293ca57ff7", + "edit_distance": 0.17341040462427745, + "f1_score": 0.9629629629629631, + "meteor": 0.8852845760526237, + "precision": 0.9873417721518988, + "pred_md": "US 2019/0010119 Al\n\nJan. 10, 2019\n\nwherein the broken line represents a bonding site.\n\n[0151] When any two of R 34 , R 35 , and R 36 or any two of R 27 , R 28 , and R 29 may be bonded with each other to form a ring together with the sulfur atom to which they are bonded in the sulfonium cation in the general formulae (B10) and (B8), illustrative examples of the sulfonium cation include the following:\n\nwherein R 33 represents the same groups represented by R 21 to R 22 , R 24 to R 32 , R 34 , and R 35 .\n\n[0152] Illustrative examples of the specific structure of the sulfonium cation in the general formulae (B10) and (B8) include the following, but are not limited thereto.\n\n42", + "recall": 0.9397590361445783, + "true_md": "Jan. 10, 2019 \n\n42 \n\nUS 2019/0010119 Al \n\nwherein the broken line represents a bonding site. \n\n[0151] When any two of R 34 , R 35 , and R $^{36 }$or any two of R 27 , R 28 , and R $^{29 }$may be bonded with each other to form a ring together with the sulfur atom to which they are bonded in the sulfonium cation in the general formulae (B10) and (B8), illustrative examples of the sulfonium cation include the following: \n\nwherein R$^{33 }$represents the same groups represented by R 21 to R 22 , R $^{24 }$to R32 , R 34 , and R 35 . \n\n[0152] Illustrative examples of the specific structure of the sulfonium cation in the general formulae (B10) and (B8) include the following, but are not limited thereto." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8177931431964314, + "doc_id": "242543ed4dd518a34c3bb783fc353b62566d59f652d07e070f08f29e44f36a34", + "edit_distance": 0.13247588424437298, + "f1_score": 0.9661835748792269, + "meteor": 0.8831731966011921, + "precision": 0.9569377990430622, + "pred_md": "US 2012/0003590 Al\n\n17\n\ngroup, a divalent aromatic ring group, or a group formed by a combination of two or more thereof. In the group formed by a combination, two or more groups combined may be the same as or different from each other. Also, these groups may\n\nbe connected through -0-, -S-, -CO-, -S0 2 -, -NR-(Risa hydrogen atom or an alkyl group), a divalent nitrogen-containing non-aromatic heterocyclic group, a diva› lent aromatic ring group, or a group formed by a combination thereof.\n\n[0186] Examples of the alkylene group, alkenylene group and divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon ring group of L 21 are the same as those described above for respective groups in Lu.\n\n[0187] The divalent aromatic ring group ofL 21 may be an arylene group or a heteroarylene group. This divalent aro› matic ring group preferably has a carbon number of 6 to 14.\n\n[0188] Examples of -NR- and divalent nitrogen-con› taining non-aromatic heterocyclic group in L 21 are the same as those described above for X 11 .\n\n[0189] L21 is preferably a single bond, an alkylene group, a divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon ring group, a divalent aro› matic ring group, or a group formed by a combination of two or more thereof (for example, -alkylene group-divalent aro› matic ring groupor -divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon ring group-alkylene group-), or a group formed by combining two or more of these groups through a linking group such as -OCO-, -COO-, ---0- and -S-(for example, -alky› lene group-OCO-divalent aromatic ring group-, -alkylene group-5-divalent aromatic ring group-, or -alkylene group-0alkylene group-divalent aromatic ring group).\n\n[0190] L22 represents an alkylene group, an alkenylene group, a divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon ring group, a divalent aromatic ring group, or a group formed by a combination of two or more thereof, and in these groups, hydrogen atoms may be partially or entirely substituted for by a substituent selected from a fluorine atom, an alkyl fluoride group, a nitro group and a cyano group. In the group formed by a combina› tion, two or more groups combined may be the same as or different from each other. Also, these groups may be con› nected through ---0-, -S-, -CO-, -S0 2 -, -NR› (R is a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group), a divalent nitrogen› containing non-aromatic heterocyclic group, a divalent aro› matic ring group, or a group formed by a combination thereof.\n\n[0191] L22 is preferably an alkylene group or divalent aro› matic ring group with hydrogen atoms being partially or entirely substituted for by a fluorine atom or an alkyl fluoride group (more preferably a perfluoroalkyl group), or a group formed by a combination thereof, more preferably an alky› lene group or divalent aromatic ring group with hydrogen atoms being partially or entirely substituted for by a fluorine atom.\n\n[0192] Specific examples of the alkylene group, alkenylene group, aliphatic hydrocarbon ring group, divalent aromatic ring group and group formed by a combination of two or more thereof, represented by L 22 , are the same as the groups exem› plified above as L 12 in formula (Ll ).\n\n[0193] Specific examples of -NR- and divalent nitro› gen-containing non-aromatic heterocyclic group as the link› ing group in L 22 are the same as those of respective groups in X11 above, and preferred examples are also the same.\n\n[0194] Z 2 represents a moiety working out to a sulfonic acid group upon irradiation with an actinic ray or radiation. Spe› cific examples of Z 2 are the same described above for Z 1 .\n\n[0195] The moiety represented by formula (L3) is described below.\n\nJan. 5, 2012\n\n[0196] Each of X 31 and X32 independently represents a single bond, ---0-, -S-, -CO-, -S0 -, -NR- (R 2 is a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group), a divalent nitrogen› containing non-aromatic heterocyclic group, or a group formed by a combination thereof.\n\n[0197] Examples of -NR- and divalent nitrogen-con› taining non-aromatic heterocyclic group in each ofX 31 and X32 are the same as those described above for Xu.\n\n[0198] X31 is preferably a single bond, ---0-, -CO-, -NR-(Risa hydrogen atom or an alkyl group) or a group formed by a combination thereof, more preferably a single bond, -COO- or ----CONR- (R is a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group).\n\n[0199] X32 is preferably -0-, -S-, -CO-, -S0 2 -, a divalent nitrogen-containing non-aromatic het› erocyclic group or a group formed by a combination thereof, more preferably -0-, ---OCO- or ---OS0 2 -.\n\n[0200] L31 represents a single bond, an alkylene group, an alkenylene group, a divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon ring group, a divalent aromatic ring group, or a group formed by a combination of two or more thereof. In the group formed by a combination, two or more groups combined may be the same as or different from each other. Also, these groups may be connected through -0-, -S-, -CO-, -S0 2 -, -NR-(Risa hydrogen atom or an alkyl group), a divalent nitrogen-containing non-aromatic heterocyclic group, a diva› lent aromatic ring group, or a group formed by a combination thereof.\n\n[0201] Examples of the alkylene group, alkenylene group, divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon ring group and divalent aro› matic ring group ofL 31 are the same as those described above forL 21 .\n\n[0202] Specific examples of -NR- and divalent nitro› gen-containing non-aromatic heterocyclic group as the link› ing group in L 31 are the same as those of respective groups in Xu above, and preferred examples are also the same.\n\n[0203] L32 represents an alkylene group, an alkenylene group, a divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon ring group, a divalent aromatic ring group, or a group formed by a combination of two or more thereof. In the group formed by a combination, two or more groups combined may be the same as or different from each other. Also, these groups may be connected through ---0-, -S-, -CO-, -S0 2 -, -NR-(R is a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group), a divalent nitrogen-con› taining non-aromatic heterocyclic group, a divalent aromatic ring group, or a group formed by a combination thereof.\n\n[0204] In the alkylene group, alkenylene group, divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon ring group, divalent aromatic ring group and group formed by a combination of two or more thereof, represented by L 32 , part or all of hydrogen atoms are preferably substituted for by a substituent selected from a fluorine atom, an alkyl fluoride group, a nitro group and a cyano group.\n\n[0205] L32 is preferably an alkylene group or divalent aro› matic ring group with hydrogen atoms being partially or entirely substituted for by a fluorine atom or an alkyl fluoride group (more preferably a perfluoroalkyl group), or a group formed by a combination thereof, more preferably an alky› lene group or divalent aromatic ring group with hydrogen atoms being partially or entirely substituted for by a fluorine atom.\n\n[0206] Examples of the alkylene group, alkenylene group, divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon ring group and divalent aro› matic ring group and group formed by a combination of two", + "recall": 0.975609756097561, + "true_md": "US 2012/0003590 Al \n\n17 \n\nJan. 5, 2012 \n\ngroup, a divalent aromatic ring group, or a group formed by a combination of two or more thereof. In the group formed by a combination, two or more groups combined may be the same as or different from each other. Also, these groups may be connected through -0-, -S-, -CO-, -S0$_{2}$ -, -NR- (Risa hydrogen atom or an alkyl group), a divalent nitrogen-containing non-aromatic heterocyclic group, a diva› lent aromatic ring group, or a group formed by a combination thereof. \n\n[0186] Examples of the alkylene group, alkenylene group and divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon ring group of L$_{21 }$ are the same as those described above for respective groups in Lu. \n\n[0187] The divalent aromatic ring group ofL$_{21 }$ may be an arylene group or a heteroarylene group. This divalent aro› matic ring group preferably has a carbon number of 6 to 14. \n\n[0188] Examples of -NR- and divalent nitrogen-con› taining non-aromatic heterocyclic group in L$_{21 }$ are the same as those described above for X $_{11}$. \n\n[0189] L$_{21 }$is preferably a single bond, an alkylene group, a divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon ring group, a divalent aro› matic ring group, or a group formed by a combination of two or more thereof (for example, -alkylene group-divalent aro› matic ring group- or -divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon ring group-alkylene group-), or a group formed by combining two or more of these groups through a linking group such as -OCO-, -COO-, ---0- and -S-(for example, -alky› lene group-OCO-divalent aromatic ring group-, -alkylene group-5-divalent aromatic ring group-, or -alkylene group-0- alkylene group-divalent aromatic ring group). \n\n[0190] L$_{22 }$ represents an alkylene group, an alkenylene group, a divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon ring group, a divalent aromatic ring group, or a group formed by a combination of two or more thereof, and in these groups, hydrogen atoms may be partially or entirely substituted for by a substituent selected from a fluorine atom, an alkyl fluoride group, a nitro group and a cyano group. In the group formed by a combina› tion, two or more groups combined may be the same as or different from each other. Also, these groups may be con› nected through ---0-, -S-, -CO-, -S0$_{2}$ -, -NR› (R is a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group), a divalent nitrogen› containing non-aromatic heterocyclic group, a divalent aro› matic ring group, or a group formed by a combination thereof. \n\n[0191] L$_{22 }$is preferably an alkylene group or divalent aro› matic ring group with hydrogen atoms being partially or entirely substituted for by a fluorine atom or an alkyl fluoride group (more preferably a perfluoroalkyl group), or a group formed by a combination thereof, more preferably an alky› lene group or divalent aromatic ring group with hydrogen atoms being partially or entirely substituted for by a fluorine atom. \n\n[0192] Specific examples of the alkylene group, alkenylene group, aliphatic hydrocarbon ring group, divalent aromatic ring group and group formed by a combination of two or more thereof, represented by L$_{22}$, are the same as the groups exem› plified above as L$_{12 }$in formula (Ll ). \n\n[0193] Specific examples of -NR- and divalent nitro› gen-containing non-aromatic heterocyclic group as the link› ing group in L$_{22 }$are the same as those of respective groups in X$_{11 }$above, and preferred examples are also the same. \n\n[0194] Z$_{2 }$ represents a moiety working out to a sulfonic acid group upon irradiation with an actinic ray or radiation. Spe› cific examples of Z$_{2 }$ are the same described above for Z$_{1}$ . \n\n[0195] The moiety represented by formula (L3) is described below. \n\n[0196] Each of X$_{31 }$ and X$_{32 }$ independently represents a single bond, ---0-, -S-, -CO-, -S0$_{2}$-, -NR- (R is a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group), a divalent nitrogen› containing non-aromatic heterocyclic group, or a group formed by a combination thereof. \n\n[0197] Examples of -NR- and divalent nitrogen-con› taining non-aromatic heterocyclic group in each ofX$_{31 }$ and X$_{32 }$are the same as those described above for Xu. \n\n[0198] X$_{31 }$ is preferably a single bond, ---0-, -CO-, -NR- (Risa hydrogen atom or an alkyl group) or a group formed by a combination thereof, more preferably a single bond, -COO- or ----CONR- (R is a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group). \n\n[0199] X$_{32 }$ is preferably -0-, -S-, -CO-, -S0$_{2}$ -, a divalent nitrogen-containing non-aromatic het› erocyclic group or a group formed by a combination thereof, more preferably -0-, ---OCO- or ---OS0$_{2}$ -. \n\n[0200] L$_{31 }$represents a single bond, an alkylene group, an alkenylene group, a divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon ring group, a divalent aromatic ring group, or a group formed by a combination of two or more thereof. In the group formed by a combination, two or more groups combined may be the same as or different from each other. Also, these groups may be connected through -0-, -S-, -CO-, -S0$_{2}$ -, -NR- (Risa hydrogen atom or an alkyl group), a divalent nitrogen-containing non-aromatic heterocyclic group, a diva› lent aromatic ring group, or a group formed by a combination thereof. \n\n[0201] Examples of the alkylene group, alkenylene group, divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon ring group and divalent aro› matic ring group ofL$_{31 }$are the same as those described above forL$_{21}$ . \n\n[0202] Specific examples of -NR- and divalent nitro› gen-containing non-aromatic heterocyclic group as the link› ing group in L$_{31 }$are the same as those of respective groups in Xu above, and preferred examples are also the same. \n\n[0203] L$_{32 }$ represents an alkylene group, an alkenylene group, a divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon ring group, a divalent aromatic ring group, or a group formed by a combination of two or more thereof. In the group formed by a combination, two or more groups combined may be the same as or different from each other. Also, these groups may be connected through ---0-, -S-, -CO-, -S0$_{2}$ -, -NR- (R is a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group), a divalent nitrogen-con› taining non-aromatic heterocyclic group, a divalent aromatic ring group, or a group formed by a combination thereof. \n\n[0204] In the alkylene group, alkenylene group, divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon ring group, divalent aromatic ring group and group formed by a combination of two or more thereof, represented by L$_{32}$, part or all of hydrogen atoms are preferably substituted for by a substituent selected from a fluorine atom, an alkyl fluoride group, a nitro group and a cyano group. \n\n[0205] L$_{32 }$is preferably an alkylene group or divalent aro› matic ring group with hydrogen atoms being partially or entirely substituted for by a fluorine atom or an alkyl fluoride group (more preferably a perfluoroalkyl group), or a group formed by a combination thereof, more preferably an alky› lene group or divalent aromatic ring group with hydrogen atoms being partially or entirely substituted for by a fluorine atom. \n\n[0206] Examples of the alkylene group, alkenylene group, divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon ring group and divalent aro› matic ring group and group formed by a combination of two" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.388172465412544, + "doc_id": "6fa9bceb385aa6877e60fa87bb820a3f6d6142bc915db3b29df69ddcdead39a7", + "edit_distance": 0.75, + "f1_score": 0.8421052631578947, + "meteor": 0.8851207386363636, + "precision": 0.7272727272727273, + "pred_md": "US 2019/0010119 Al\n\nJan. 10, 2019\n\n(OMe\n\n(OMe\n\n0\n\n(OMe\n\n0\n\n16", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Jan. 10, 2019 \n\n16 \n\nUS 2019/0010119 Al" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9203687837067385, + "doc_id": "a9a1744322ef6e9c69a3fe12165bb0358476b4df3cf0d8f1d32ae4a8d2430a5f", + "edit_distance": 0.5151057401812689, + "f1_score": 0.9406392694063928, + "meteor": 0.6813769906783295, + "precision": 0.9321266968325792, + "pred_md": "91\n\n-continued\n\nIn the above formulae, L 1 to L 8 , which may be the same or different, each represents a hydrogen atom, a hydroxymethyl group, a methoxymethyl group, an ethoxymethyl group, or an alkyl group having from 1 to 6 carbon atoms.\n\nCrosslinking agents are used generally in proportion of from 3 to 70 mass% in the solids content of the photosensitive composition, and preferably from 5 to 50 mass %.\n\n## Basic Compound (F):\n\nFor decreasing the fluctuation of performances due to aging during the period of time from exposure to heating, it is preferred for the photosensitive composition of the invention to contain a basic compound.\n\nAs the preferred structures of basic compounds, the struc› tures represented by any of the following formulae (A) to (E) can be exemplified.\n\nUS 7,851,130 B2\n\n92\n\n=C-N=C-\n\nI\n\nI\n\nIn formula (A), R 250 , R 251 and R 252 each represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having from 1 to 20 carbon atoms, a cycloalkyl group having from 3 to 20 carbon atoms, or an aryl group having from 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and R 250 and R 251 may be bonded to each other to form a ring. These groups may have a substituent, and as the alkyl group and cycloalkyl group having a substituent, an aminoalkyl group having from 1 to 20 carbon atoms or an aminocycloalkyl group having from 3 to 20 carbon atoms, a hydroxyalkyl group having from 1 to 20 carbon atoms or a hydroxycy› cloalkyl group having from 3 to 20 carbon atoms are pre› ferred.\n\nThese groups may contain an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom or a nitrogen atom in the alkyl chain.\n\nIn formula (E), R 253 , R 254 , R 255 and R 256 each represents an alkyl group having from 1 to 6 carbon atoms, or a cycloalkyl group having from 3 to 6 carbon atoms.\n\nAs the preferred examples of basic compounds, guanidine, aminopyrrolidine, pyrazole, pyrazoline, piperazine, aminomorpholine, aminoalkylmorpholine, and piperidine can be exemplified, and these compounds may have a substituent. As more preferred basic compounds, compounds having an imi› dazole structure, a diazabicyclo structure, an onium hydrox› ide structure, an onium carboxylate structure, a trialkylamine structure, an aniline structure, or a pyridine structure, alky› lamine derivatives having a hydroxyl group and/or an ether bond; and aniline derivatives having a hydroxyl group and/or an ether bond can be exemplified.\n\nAs the compounds having an imidazole structure, imidazole, 2,4,5-triphenylimidazole, and benzimidazole can be exemplified. As the compounds having a diazabicyclo struc› ture, 1,4-diazabicyclo[2.2.2]octane, 1,5-diazabicyclo[ 4.3.0] nona-5-ene, and 1,8-diazabicyclo[5.4.0]undeca-7-ene can be exemplified. As the compounds having an onium hydroxide structure, triarylsulfonium hydroxide, phenacylsulfonium hydroxide, sulfonium hydroxide having a 2-oxoalkyl group, specifically triphenylsulfonium hydroxide, tris(t-butyl-phe› ny l)sulfonium hydroxide, bis( t-buty lpheny l)iodonium hydroxide, phenacylthiophenium hydroxide, and 2-oxopropyl-thiophenium hydroxide can be exemplified. The com› pounds having an onium carboxylate structure are com› pounds having an onium hydroxide structure in which the anionic part is carboxylated, e.g., acetate, adamantane-1-car› boxylate, and perfluoroalkyl carboxylate are exemplified. As the compounds having a trialkylamine structure, tri(n-butyl) amine and tri(n-octyl)amine can be exemplified. As the aniline compounds, 2,6-diisopropylaniline and N,N-dim-\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n60\n\n65", + "recall": 0.9493087557603687, + "true_md": "92 \n\nUS 7,851,130 B2 \n\n91 \n\nIn formula (A), R 250 , R 251 and R 252 each represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having from 1 to 20 carbon atoms, a cycloalkyl group having from 3 to 20 carbon atoms, or an aryl group having from 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and R 250 and R $^{251 }$may be bonded to each other to form a ring. These groups may have a substituent, and as the alkyl group and cycloalkyl group having a substituent, an aminoalkyl group having from 1 to 20 carbon atoms or an aminocycloalkyl group having from 3 to 20 carbon atoms, a hydroxyalkyl group having from 1 to 20 carbon atoms or a hydroxycy› cloalkyl group having from 3 to 20 carbon atoms are pre› ferred. \n\nThese groups may contain an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom or a nitrogen atom in the alkyl chain. \n\nIn formula (E), R 253 , R 254 , R $^{255 }$and R $^{256 }$each represents an alkyl group having from 1 to 6 carbon atoms, or a cycloalkyl group having from 3 to 6 carbon atoms. \n\nAs the preferred examples of basic compounds, guanidine, aminopyrrolidine, pyrazole, pyrazoline, piperazine, amino- morpholine, aminoalkylmorpholine, and piperidine can be exemplified, and these compounds may have a substituent. As more preferred basic compounds, compounds having an imi› dazole structure, a diazabicyclo structure, an onium hydrox› ide structure, an onium carboxylate structure, a trialkylamine structure, an aniline structure, or a pyridine structure, alky› lamine derivatives having a hydroxyl group and/or an ether bond; and aniline derivatives having a hydroxyl group and/or an ether bond can be exemplified. \n\nAs the compounds having an imidazole structure, imida- zole, 2,4,5-triphenylimidazole, and benzimidazole can be exemplified. As the compounds having a diazabicyclo struc› ture, 1,4-diazabicyclo[2.2.2]octane, 1,5-diazabicyclo[ 4.3.0] nona-5-ene, and 1,8-diazabicyclo[5.4.0]undeca-7-ene can be exemplified. As the compounds having an onium hydroxide structure, triarylsulfonium hydroxide, phenacylsulfonium hydroxide, sulfonium hydroxide having a 2-oxoalkyl group, specifically triphenylsulfonium hydroxide, tris(t-butyl-phe› ny l)sulfonium hydroxide, bis( t-buty lpheny l)iodonium hydroxide, phenacylthiophenium hydroxide, and 2-oxopro- pyl-thiophenium hydroxide can be exemplified. The com› pounds having an onium carboxylate structure are com› pounds having an onium hydroxide structure in which the anionic part is carboxylated, e.g., acetate, adamantane-1-car› boxylate, and perfluoroalkyl carboxylate are exemplified. As the compounds having a trialkylamine structure, tri(n-butyl) amine and tri(n-octyl)amine can be exemplified. As the aniline compounds, 2,6-diisopropylaniline and N,N-dim-\n\nIn the above formulae, L$_{1 }$to L$_{8}$ , which may be the same or different, each represents a hydrogen atom, a hydroxymethyl group, a methoxymethyl group, an ethoxymethyl group, or an alkyl group having from 1 to 6 carbon atoms. \n\nCrosslinking agents are used generally in proportion of from 3 to 70 mass% in the solids content of the photosensitive composition, and preferably from 5 to 50 mass %. \n\nFor decreasing the fluctuation of performances due to aging during the period of time from exposure to heating, it is preferred for the photosensitive composition of the invention to contain a basic compound. \n\nAs the preferred structures of basic compounds, the struc› tures represented by any of the following formulae (A) to (E) can be exemplified. \n\n-continued \n\nBasic Compound (F):" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7186082239261684, + "doc_id": "fdd8ea78bc7c4a72c3c0cd3565163b42f4ab603f971e63060250595d49132e01", + "edit_distance": 0.25, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9736328125, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "US 2012/0003590 Al\n\nJan. 5, 2012\n\n93", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "US 2012/0003590 Al \n\n93 \n\nJan. 5, 2012" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "e131fbc4e1e592d455b3e85a0bc017dc3773dec03332c3f06063c92880cf74e5", + "edit_distance": 0.7894736842105263, + "f1_score": 0.5, + "meteor": 0.7740169238427078, + "precision": 0.3333333333333333, + "pred_md": "75\n\n-continued\n\nUS 7,851,130 B2\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n60\n\n65\n\n76\n\n-continued", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "76 \n\nUS 7,851,130 B2 \n\n75 \n\n-continued \n\n-continued" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "732fef1a25c1a4dccfcf2e9389204e9aa9ce67b8c7b743f72187e62c4fc5e0ae", + "edit_distance": 0.7727272727272727, + "f1_score": 0.48275862068965525, + "meteor": 0.6089882761615284, + "precision": 0.3333333333333333, + "pred_md": "129\n\n130\n\n-continued\n\n·i:ioo\n\nUS 9,423,690 B2\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\nt:~\n\n60\n\n65", + "recall": 0.875, + "true_md": "129 \n\nUS 9,423,690 B2 \n\n130 •i:ioo" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.942251585527356, + "doc_id": "ff7fdddf928dc133ace4cfcdb88b361fd5c42adedde38639356720a879474e27", + "edit_distance": 0.09090909090909091, + "f1_score": 0.9473684210526315, + "meteor": 0.9960381186418724, + "precision": 0.9, + "pred_md": "US 9,423,690 B2\n\n239\n\nThe resins (P-1) to (P-4), (P-6) to (P-14), (P-16), (P-22), (P-24) to (P-26), (P-28) to (P-38), (P-42) to (P-44), (P-47), (P-51), (P-53), (P-57), (P-61) to (P-64), (P-66), (P-71) to (P-73), (P-77), (P-78) to (P-91) were synthesized in the same manner as in resin (P-5). The synthesized polymer structure is described previously as specific examples.\n\nIn addition, the weight average molecular weight (Mw) and the polydispersity (Mw/Mn) of each resin, which was synthesized as described above and will be used in the Examples being described later, are shown in the following table.\n\nTABLE 1\n\nTABLE 2\n\nTABLE 2-continued\n\n5\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n60\n\n65\n\n240\n\nAs for the Comparative Examples, the following resin C-1 was synthesized according to the above-described method and used in the Examples as described below. The polymer structure, the weight average molecular weight (Mw) and the polydispersity (Mw/Mn) of resin C-1 are shown below. Further, the composition ratio of each repeat› ing unit of the polymer structure is shown in the molar ratio.\n\n[Hydrophobic Resin]\n\nThe hydrophobic resin was appropriately selected from the above-examplified hydrophobic resins HR-1 to HR-34 and then used.\n\nHereinafter, the composition ratio (molar ratio) of the hydrophobic resin, the weight average molecular weight (Mw) and the polydispersity (Mw/Mn) will be described.\n\nTABLE 3\n\n[Photo-Acid Generator]\n\nThe photo-acid generator was appropriately selected from the above-examplified acid generators zl to z141, and then used.", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "240 \n\nUS 9,423,690 B2 \n\n239 \n\nThe resins (P-1) to (P-4), (P-6) to (P-14), (P-16), (P-22), (P-24) to (P-26), (P-28) to (P-38), (P-42) to (P-44), (P-47), (P-51), (P-53), (P-57), (P-61) to (P-64), (P-66), (P-71) to (P-73), (P-77), (P-78) to (P-91) were synthesized in the same manner as in resin (P-5). The synthesized polymer structure is described previously as specific examples. \n\nIn addition, the weight average molecular weight (Mw) and the polydispersity (Mw/Mn) of each resin, which was synthesized as described above and will be used in the Examples being described later, are shown in the following table. \n\nAs for the Comparative Examples, the following resin C-1 was synthesized according to the above-described method and used in the Examples as described below. The polymer structure, the weight average molecular weight (Mw) and the polydispersity (Mw/Mn) of resin C-1 are shown below. Further, the composition ratio of each repeat› ing unit of the polymer structure is shown in the molar ratio. \n\n[Hydrophobic Resin] \n\nThe hydrophobic resin was appropriately selected from the above-examplified hydrophobic resins HR-1 to HR-34 and then used. \n\nHereinafter, the composition ratio (molar ratio) of the hydrophobic resin, the weight average molecular weight (Mw) and the polydispersity (Mw/Mn) will be described. \n\n[Photo-Acid Generator] \n\nThe photo-acid generator was appropriately selected from the above-examplified acid generators zl to z141, and then used. \n\nTABLE 3 \n\nTABLE 2 \n\nTABLE 1 \n\nTABLE 2-continued" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "a8378ad494a63e5835e1bba75a41676aa3a9c2ad60e9906e864d2433b630de7d", + "edit_distance": 0.8, + "f1_score": 0.6666666666666666, + "meteor": 0.5162738496071829, + "precision": 0.6666666666666666, + "pred_md": "143\n\nUS 9,423,690 B2\n\n10\n\n15\n\n30\n\n144\n\n-continued", + "recall": 0.6666666666666666, + "true_md": "US 9,423,690 B2 \n\n143 \n\n144 \n\n-continued \n\n-continued ~6,V" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6493358309501979, + "doc_id": "57dda7444d79cdf5784ce4fa45f1897ab43bc533b091f68d8ca06b0aeecaa959", + "edit_distance": 0.3333333333333333, + "f1_score": 0.9411764705882353, + "meteor": 0.9616126543209877, + "precision": 0.8888888888888888, + "pred_md": "US 2012/0003590 Al\n\nJan. 5, 2012\n\n80\n\n-continued", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "US 2012/0003590 Al \n\n80 \n\nJan. 5, 2012" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8915803377710267, + "doc_id": "63c860ca97c95b5e1009d2314bc4ea3c232703c11cee65fad3d6f8df72d55c1a", + "edit_distance": 0.4742268041237113, + "f1_score": 0.9850746268656717, + "meteor": 0.9837351446162658, + "precision": 0.9850746268656716, + "pred_md": "US 2012/0003590 Al\n\n[0507] Compositional molar ratio: 50/40/10\n\n[0508] Weight average molecular weight: 12,000, Polydis› persity: 1 .45\n\n## <Photo-Acid Generator>\n\n[0509] Any of B-1 to B-120 illustrated above was used as the photo-acid generator.\n\n## <Basic Compound>\n\n[0510] Any ofN-1 to N-9 shown below was used as the basic compound. Incidentally, N-7 comes under the com› pound (PA).\n\n103\n\nC-2\n\nJan. 5, 2012", + "recall": 0.9850746268656716, + "true_md": "US 2012/0003590 Al \n\n103 \n\nJan. 5, 2012 \n\n-continued \n\n[0507] Compositional molar ratio: 50/40/10 \n\n[0508] Weight average molecular weight: 12,000, Polydis› persity: 1 .45 \n\n[0509] Any of B-1 to B-120 illustrated above was used as the photo-acid generator. \n\n[0510] Any ofN-1 to N-9 shown below was used as the basic compound. Incidentally, N-7 comes under the com› pound (PA). \n\n## <Photo-Acid Generator>\n\n## <Basic Compound>" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9501313475688923, + "doc_id": "2315eb20dc92506356e5389aa8c5d0168d1d8a9fd736be4e8cb0d1c2a376cebb", + "edit_distance": 0.7606217616580311, + "f1_score": 0.9701789264413518, + "meteor": 0.6836681587337733, + "precision": 0.9878542510121457, + "pred_md": "US 7,851,130 B2\n\n67\n\nIn formula (F2), Rx represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, or an alkyl group having from 1 to 4 carbon atoms. As preferred substituents that the alkyl group represented by Rx may have, a hydroxyl group and a halogen atom are exempli› fied.\n\nFa represents a single bond or a straight chain or branched alkylene group, and preferably a single bond.\n\n- Fb represents a monocyclic or polycyclic hydrocarbon group.\n\nFe represents a single bond or a straight chain or branched alkylene group, and preferably a single bond or a methylene group.\n\n- F 1 represents a group represented by formula (F 1).\n- P1 represents from 1 to 3.\n- As the cyclic hydrocarbon group represented by Fb, a cyclopentyl group, a cyclohexyl group, or a norbomyl group is preferred.\n\nThe specific examples of the repeating units having the structure represented by formula (Fl) are shown below.\n\nThe alicyclic hydrocarbon-based acid-decomposable resin in the invention can contain various kinds of repeating struc› tural units, besides the above repeating structural units, for the purpose of the adjustments of dry etching resistance, aptitude for standard developing solutions, adhesion to a substrate, resist profile, and further, general requisite performances of resists, e.g., resolution, heat resistance and sensitivity.\n\nAs these repeating structural units, the repeating structural units corresponding to the monomers shown below can be exemplified, but the invention is not restricted thereto.\n\nBy containing such various repeating structural units, fine adjustment of performances required of the alicyclic hydro-\n\n68\n\ncarbon-based acid-decomposable resin, in particular the fol› lowing performances, becomes possible, that is,\n\n- (1) Solubility in a coating solvent,\n- (2) A film-forming property (a glass transition point),\n- (3) Alkali developability,\n- (4) Decrease of layer thickness (hydrophobic/hydrophilic properties, selection of an alkali-soluble group),\n- (5) Adhesion of an unexposed area to a substrate, and\n\n## (6) Dry etching resistance.\n\nThe examples of such monomers include compounds hav› ing one addition polymerizable unsaturated bond selected from acrylic esters, methacrylic esters, acrylamides, meth› acryl-amides, ally! compounds, vinyl ethers, vinyl esters, etc.\n\nIn addition to the aforementioned compounds, addition polymerizable unsaturated compounds copolymerizable with the monomers corresponding to the above various repeating structural units may be used for copolymerization.\n\nIn the alicyclic hydrocarbon-based acid-decomposable resin, the molar ratio of the content of each repeating struc› tural unit is arbitrarily set to adjust dry etching resistance, aptitude for standard developing solutions of a resist, adhesion to a substrate, and resist profile, in addition, general requisite performances of a resist, e.g., resolution, heat resis› tance and sensitivity.\n\nAs preferred embodiments of the alicyclic hydrocarbon› based acid-decomposable resin in the invention, the following resins are exemplified.\n\n(1) Resin containing a repeating unit having a partial structure containing the alicyclic hydrocarbon represented by any of formulae (pl) to (pV) (a side chain type), preferably resin containing a repeating unit by (meth)acrylate having the structure of any of formulae (pl) to (p V),\n\n- (2) Resin containing a repeating unit represented by formula (II-AB) (a main chain type); however, the following is further exemplified as embodiment (2),\n\n(3) Resin containing a repeating unit represented by formula (II-AB), a maleic anhydride derivative structure and a (meth) acrylate structure (a hybrid type).\n\nIn the alicyclic hydrocarbon-based acid-decomposable resin, the content of a repeating unit having an acid-decomposable group is preferably from 10 to 60 mo! % in all the repeating structural units, more preferably from 20 to 50 mo! %, and still more preferably from 25 to 40 mo! %.\n\nIn the alicyclic hydrocarbon-based acid-decomposable resin, the content of a repeating unit having a partial structure containing the alicyclic hydrocarbon represented by any of formulae (pl) to (p V) is preferably from 25 to 70 mo! % in all the repeating structural units, more preferably from 35 to 65 mo! %, and still more preferably from 40 to 60 mo! %.\n\nIn the alicyclic hydrocarbon-based acid-decomposable resin, the content of a repeating unit represented by formula (II-AB) is preferably from 10 to 60 mo!% in the total repeat› ing structural units, more preferably from 15 to 55 mo!%, and still more preferably from 20 to 50 mo!%.\n\nThe content of the repeating unit having a lactone group is preferably from 10 to 70 mo! % in all the repeating structural units, more preferably from 20 to 60 mo! %, and still more preferably from 25 to 60 mo! %.\n\nThe content of the repeating unit having the alicyclic hydrocarbon structure substituted with a polar group is preferably from 1 to 40 mo!% in all the repeating structural units, more preferably from 5 to 30 mo!%, and still more preferably from 5 to 20 mo! %.\n\n5\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n60\n\n65", + "recall": 0.953125, + "true_md": "68 \n\nUS 7,851,130 B2 \n\n67 \n\ncarbon-based acid-decomposable resin, in particular the fol› lowing performances, becomes possible, that is, \n\nThe examples of such monomers include compounds hav› ing one addition polymerizable unsaturated bond selected from acrylic esters, methacrylic esters, acrylamides, meth› acryl-amides, ally! compounds, vinyl ethers, vinyl esters, etc. \n\nIn addition to the aforementioned compounds, addition polymerizable unsaturated compounds copolymerizable with the monomers corresponding to the above various repeating structural units may be used for copolymerization. \n\nIn the alicyclic hydrocarbon-based acid-decomposable resin, the molar ratio of the content of each repeating struc› tural unit is arbitrarily set to adjust dry etching resistance, aptitude for standard developing solutions of a resist, adhe- sion to a substrate, and resist profile, in addition, general requisite performances of a resist, e.g., resolution, heat resis› tance and sensitivity. \n\nAs preferred embodiments of the alicyclic hydrocarbon› based acid-decomposable resin in the invention, the follow- ing resins are exemplified. \n\n(1) Resin containing a repeating unit having a partial structure containing the alicyclic hydrocarbon represented by any of formulae (pl) to (pV) (a side chain type), preferably resin containing a repeating unit by (meth)acrylate having the structure of any of formulae (pl) to (p V), \n\n(2) Resin containing a repeating unit represented by formula (II-AB) (a main chain type); however, the following is further exemplified as embodiment (2), \n\n(3) Resin containing a repeating unit represented by formula (II-AB), a maleic anhydride derivative structure and a (meth) acrylate structure (a hybrid type). \n\nIn the alicyclic hydrocarbon-based acid-decomposable resin, the content of a repeating unit having an acid-decom- posable group is preferably from 10 to 60 mo! % in all the repeating structural units, more preferably from 20 to 50 mo! %, and still more preferably from 25 to 40 mo! %. \n\nIn the alicyclic hydrocarbon-based acid-decomposable resin, the content of a repeating unit having a partial structure containing the alicyclic hydrocarbon represented by any of formulae (pl) to (p V) is preferably from 25 to 70 mo! % in all the repeating structural units, more preferably from 35 to 65 mo! %, and still more preferably from 40 to 60 mo! %. \n\nIn the alicyclic hydrocarbon-based acid-decomposable resin, the content of a repeating unit represented by formula (II-AB) is preferably from 10 to 60 mo!% in the total repeat› ing structural units, more preferably from 15 to 55 mo!%, and still more preferably from 20 to 50 mo!%. \n\nThe content of the repeating unit having a lactone group is preferably from 10 to 70 mo! % in all the repeating structural units, more preferably from 20 to 60 mo! %, and still more preferably from 25 to 60 mo! %. \n\nThe content of the repeating unit having the alicyclic hydrocarbon structure substituted with a polar group is pref- erably from 1 to 40 mo!% in all the repeating structural units, more preferably from 5 to 30 mo!%, and still more preferably from 5 to 20 mo! %. \n\nThe alicyclic hydrocarbon-based acid-decomposable resin in the invention can contain various kinds of repeating struc› tural units, besides the above repeating structural units, for the purpose of the adjustments of dry etching resistance, aptitude for standard developing solutions, adhesion to a substrate, resist profile, and further, general requisite performances of resists, e.g., resolution, heat resistance and sensitivity. \n\nAs these repeating structural units, the repeating structural units corresponding to the monomers shown below can be exemplified, but the invention is not restricted thereto. \n\nBy containing such various repeating structural units, fine adjustment of performances required of the alicyclic hydro-\n\nIn formula (F2), Rx represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, or an alkyl group having from 1 to 4 carbon atoms. As preferred substituents that the alkyl group represented by Rx may have, a hydroxyl group and a halogen atom are exempli› fied. \n\nFa represents a single bond or a straight chain or branched alkylene group, and preferably a single bond. \n\nFb represents a monocyclic or polycyclic hydrocarbon group. \n\nFe represents a single bond or a straight chain or branched alkylene group, and preferably a single bond or a methylene group. \n\nF $_{1 }$ represents a group represented by formula (F 1). \n\nP$_{1 }$ represents from 1 to 3. \n\nAs the cyclic hydrocarbon group represented by Fb, a cyclopentyl group, a cyclohexyl group, or a norbomyl group is preferred. \n\nThe specific examples of the repeating units having the structure represented by formula (Fl) are shown below. \n\n- (1) Solubility in a coating solvent, \n\n- (2) A film-forming property (a glass transition point), \n\n- (3) Alkali developability, \n\n- (4) Decrease of layer thickness (hydrophobic/hydrophilic properties, selection of an alkali-soluble group), \n\n- (5) Adhesion of an unexposed area to a substrate, and \n\n- (6) Dry etching resistance." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.3388714363186176, + "doc_id": "14164b5029cd2f15edd84d9a8b7e5286353e3f77d5ce4837a15a2e2491eed2b8", + "edit_distance": 0.9090909090909091, + "f1_score": 0.8333333333333334, + "meteor": 0.7964285714285715, + "precision": 0.7142857142857143, + "pred_md": "US 2021/0033970 Al\n\nFeb.4,2021\n\no-\n\no-\n\n-continued\n\no-\n\no-\n\no-\n\n29", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Feb.4,2021 \n\n29 \n\nUS 2021/0033970 Al" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6054093750973075, + "doc_id": "9585c8ebf4e55b93a12dfde903cba3156691cd973b7a6f6ba475ee34505a3131", + "edit_distance": 0.4849951597289448, + "f1_score": 0.984771573604061, + "meteor": 0.740100755985752, + "precision": 0.9948717948717949, + "pred_md": "US 2021/0033970 Al\n\nHerein m is an integer of 1 to 5, n is an integer of O to 4, lsm+ns5, p 1 is 1, 2 or 3, p 2 is 1 or 2, q 1 is 1, 2 or 3, and q 2 is 1, 2 or 3. X 1 is a C 1 -C 20 (p 2 +1)-valent hydrocarbon group which may contain at least moiety selected from ester bond and ether bond. R is hydroxyl, C 1 1 -C 6 saturated hydrocarbyl group, C 1 -C 6 saturated hydrocarbyloxy group, C 2 -C 6 satu› rated hydrocarbylcarbonyloxy group, fluorine, chlorine, bro› mine, amino group, -NR 1 A----C(=O)-R 1 B, or-NR 1 A\\_ C(=O)-O-R 1 B, wherein R A is hydrogen or a C -C 1 1 6 saturated hydrocarbyl group, RIB is a C 1 -C 6 saturated hydro› carbyl, C 2 -C 8 unsaturated aliphatic hydrocarbyl, C 6 -C 12 aryl or C 7 -C 13 aralkyl group. R 2 is hydrogen, nitro, or a C 1 -C 20 hydrocarbyl group which may contain at least one moiety selected from hydroxyl, carboxyl, thiol, ether bond, ester bond, nitro, cyano, halogen and amino moiety, in case of p =1 or 2, two R 1 2 may bond together to form a ring with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached, the ring optionally containing a double bond, oxygen, sulfur or nitrogen, or R 2 and X 1 may bond together to form a ring with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached, the ring optionally con› taining a double bond, oxygen, sulfur or nitrogen. XBI is iodine or bromine. X 2 is a single bond, ether bond, ester bond, amide bond, carbonyl group or carbonate group. X 3 is a single bond or a C 1 -C 20 ( q + )-valent hydrocarbon group 1 1 which may contain a heteroatom exclusive of iodine and bromine. R 3 is a C 1 -C 20 ( q + )-valent aliphatic hydrocarbon 2 1 group which may contain at least one moiety selected from fluorine, chlorine, hydroxyl, carboxyl, CcC 12 aryl, ether bond, ester bond, carbonyl, amide bond, carbonate, urethane bond, and urea bond.\n\n[0020] The resist composition may further comprise an acid generator capable of generating a sulfonic acid, imide acid or methide acid and/or an organic solvent.\n\n[0021] In a preferred embodiment, the base polymer com› prises recurring units having the formula (al) or recurring units having the formula (a2).\n\n2\n\n-continued\n\nHerein RA is each independently hydrogen or methyl, R 11 and R 12 each are an acid labile group, Y 1 is a single bond, phenylene group, naphthylene group, or C 1 -C 12 linking group containing at least one moiety selected from ester bond and lactone ring, and Y 2 is a single bond or ester bond.\n\n[0022] In one embodiment, the resist composition is a chemically amplified positive resist composition.\n\n[0023] In another embodiment, the base polymer is free of an acid labile group. The resist composition is typically a chemically amplified negative resist composition.\n\n[0024] The base polymer may comprise recurring units of at least one type selected from recurring units having the formulae (fl) to (f3).\n\nHerein RA is each independently hydrogen or methyl. Z 1 is a single bond, phenylene group, ---O-Z 11 -, ----C(=O)› O-Z11- or ----C(=O)-NH-Z 11 -, wherein Z 11 is a C1 -C 6 aliphatic hydrocarbylene group or phenylene group, which may contain a carbonyl, ester bond, ether bond or hydroxyl moiety. Z 2 is a single bond, -Z 21 ----C(=O)› O-, -Z 21 ---0-or-Z 21 ---0----C(=O)-, whereinZ 21 is a C 1 -C 12 saturated hydrocarbylene group which may contain\n\nFeb.4,2021", + "recall": 0.9748743718592965, + "true_md": "Feb.4,2021 \n\n2 \n\nUS 2021/0033970 Al \n\nHerein m is an integer of 1 to 5, n is an integer of O to 4, lsm+ns5, p$^{1 }$is 1, 2 or 3, p 2 is 1 or 2, q$^{1 }$is 1, 2 or 3, and q 2 is 1, 2 or 3. X$^{1 }$is a C$_{1}$-C$_{20 }$(p$^{2}$+1)-valent hydrocarbon group which may contain at least moiety selected from ester bond and ether bond. R $^{1 }$is hydroxyl, C$_{1 }$-C$_{6 }$ saturated hydrocarbyl group, C$_{1 }$-C$_{6 }$ saturated hydrocarbyloxy group, C$_{2}$ -C$_{6 }$ satu› rated hydrocarbylcarbonyloxy group, fluorine, chlorine, bro› mine, amino group, -NR$^{1}$A----C(=O)-R 1 B, or-NR $^{1}$A\\_ C(=O)-O-R 1 B, wherein R $^{1}$A is hydrogen or a C$_{1}$-C$_{6 }$ saturated hydrocarbyl group, RIB is a C$_{1 }$-C$_{6 }$ saturated hydro› carbyl, C$_{2}$-C$_{8 }$unsaturated aliphatic hydrocarbyl, C$_{6}$-C$_{12 }$aryl or C$_{7}$ -C$_{13 }$ aralkyl group. R 2 is hydrogen, nitro, or a C$_{1}$-C$_{20 }$ hydrocarbyl group which may contain at least one moiety selected from hydroxyl, carboxyl, thiol, ether bond, ester bond, nitro, cyano, halogen and amino moiety, in case of p$^{1}$=1 or 2, two R$^{2 }$may bond together to form a ring with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached, the ring optionally containing a double bond, oxygen, sulfur or nitrogen, or R 2 and X $^{1 }$may bond together to form a ring with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached, the ring optionally con› taining a double bond, oxygen, sulfur or nitrogen. XBI is iodine or bromine. X 2 is a single bond, ether bond, ester bond, amide bond, carbonyl group or carbonate group. X $^{3 }$is a single bond or a C$_{1 }$-C$_{20 }$( q$^{1 }$+ 1 )-valent hydrocarbon group which may contain a heteroatom exclusive of iodine and bromine. R$^{3 }$is a C$_{1 }$-C$_{20 }$ ( q $^{2 }$+ 1 )-valent aliphatic hydrocarbon group which may contain at least one moiety selected from fluorine, chlorine, hydroxyl, carboxyl, CcC$_{12 }$ aryl, ether bond, ester bond, carbonyl, amide bond, carbonate, urethane bond, and urea bond. \n\n[0020] The resist composition may further comprise an acid generator capable of generating a sulfonic acid, imide acid or methide acid and/or an organic solvent. \n\n[0021] In a preferred embodiment, the base polymer com› prises recurring units having the formula (al) or recurring units having the formula (a2). \n\nHerein RA is each independently hydrogen or methyl. Z 1 is a single bond, phenylene group, ---O-Z 11 -, ----C(=O)› O-Z11- or ----C(=O)-NH-Z 11 -, wherein Z 11 is a C$_{1 }$-C$_{6 }$ aliphatic hydrocarbylene group or phenylene group, which may contain a carbonyl, ester bond, ether bond or hydroxyl moiety. Z 2 is a single bond, -Z$^{21}$----C(=O)› O-, -Z$^{21}$---0-or-Z$^{21}$---0----C(=O)-, whereinZ$^{21 }$is a C$_{1 }$-C$_{12 }$saturated hydrocarbylene group which may contain \n\nHerein RA is each independently hydrogen or methyl, R 11 and R $^{12 }$each are an acid labile group, Y 1 is a single bond, phenylene group, naphthylene group, or C$_{1 }$-C$_{12 }$ linking group containing at least one moiety selected from ester bond and lactone ring, and Y $^{2 }$is a single bond or ester bond. \n\n[0022] In one embodiment, the resist composition is a chemically amplified positive resist composition. \n\n[0023] In another embodiment, the base polymer is free of an acid labile group. The resist composition is typically a chemically amplified negative resist composition. \n\n[0024] The base polymer may comprise recurring units of at least one type selected from recurring units having the formulae (fl) to (f3). \n\n-continued" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9790307679639171, + "doc_id": "7f1b741d1bba48079ce93b1560c6edbdd217986b39c7e5ea62df4e8a1abdd6e8", + "edit_distance": 0.8888888888888888, + "f1_score": 0.9918367346938773, + "meteor": 0.7980329583977439, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "US 2019/0010119 Al\n\n[0132] The repeating units B6 to B9 are units that gener› ates an acid by irradiation with a high energy beam. It is considered that these units contained in the component (B) makes it possible to regulate the acid diffusion appropriately to give a pattern with decreased LER. Additionally, it is considered that these units contained in the component (B) regulates the phenomenon that acid volatilizes from the exposed portion in baking in vacuum and adheres to the unexposed portion again, and is effective for decreasing LER and decreasing pattern defects by regulating an unde› sired deprotection reaction at the unexposed portion. When the repeating unit B6 to B9 is contained, the amount is preferably 0.5 to 30 mo! % based on the whole repeating units of the component (B).\n\n[0133] When the inventive resist composition is a chemi› cally amplified positive resist composition, the component (B) may be a mixture of a polymer containing the repeating units B6 to B9 in addition to the repeating unit Bl and a polymer without containing the repeating units B6 to B9. In this case, the amount of the polymer without containing the repeating units B6 to B9 is preferably 2 to 5,000 parts by mass, more preferably 10 to 1,000 based on 100 parts by mass of the polymer containing the repeating units B6 to B9.\n\n35\n\nJan. 10, 2019\n\n## (Negative Resist Composition)\n\n[0134] When the inventive resist composition is a chemi› cally amplified negative resist composition, the composition preferably contains a resin (polymer compound) that becomes alkaline-insoluble as a base polymer of the com› ponent (B). As this resin to become alkaline-insoluble by an action of acid, which is not particularly limited, it is pref› erable to use the ones in which the resins form crosslinking with each other by an action of acid to be polymerized or the ones that react with a crosslinking agent described later by an action of acid to be polymerized.\n\n[0135] When the inventive resist composition is a chemi› cally amplified negative resist composition, the repeating unit Bl is preferably contained in an amount ranging from the lower limit of 40 mo! %, more preferably 50 mo! %, to the upper limit of 100 mo! %, preferably 85 mo! % with respect to the whole repeating units of the component (B) in order to bring higher contrast between the portion that is turned to negative by exposure to a high energy beam and the portion without being exposed (the portion that is not turned to negative) for obtaining higher resolution.\n\n[0136] In this case, it is preferable that the component (B) further contain a repeating unit shown by the following general formula (BN2) (hereinafter, also referred to as the repeating unit BN2) in addition to the repeating unit (Bl)\n\nwherein RA has the same meaning as defined above; each R 12 independently represents a halogen atom, a linear, branched, or cyclic acyloxy group having 2 to 8 carbon atoms optionally substituted with a halogen atom, a linear, branched, or cyclic alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms optionally substituted with a halogen atom, or a linear, branched, or cyclic alkoxy group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms optionally substituted with a halogen atom; A 2 represents a single bond or a linear, branched, or cyclic alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms optionally having an ether bond between a carbon-carbon bond thereof; W represents a hydrogen atom, a linear, branched, or cyclic monovalent aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms optionally having an ether group, a carbonyl group, or a carbonyloxy group between a carbon-carbon bond thereof, or a monovalent aromatic ring group optionally having a substituent; Rx and Ry each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 15 carbon atoms optionally substituted with a hydroxy group or an alkoxy group, or a monovalent aromatic ring group optionally having a substituent, with the proviso that Rx and Ry do not both represent hydrogen atoms, and Rx and Ry are option› ally bonded with each other to form a ring together with the carbon atom to which Rx and Ry are bonded; \"y\" is an", + "recall": 0.9838056680161943, + "true_md": "Jan. 10, 2019 \n\n35 \n\nUS 2019/0010119 Al \n\n## (Negative Resist Composition)\n\nwherein RA has the same meaning as defined above; each R 12 independently represents a halogen atom, a linear, branched, or cyclic acyloxy group having 2 to 8 carbon atoms optionally substituted with a halogen atom, a linear, branched, or cyclic alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms optionally substituted with a halogen atom, or a linear, branched, or cyclic alkoxy group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms optionally substituted with a halogen atom; A $^{2 }$represents a single bond or a linear, branched, or cyclic alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms optionally having an ether bond between a carbon-carbon bond thereof; W represents a hydrogen atom, a linear, branched, or cyclic monovalent aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms optionally having an ether group, a carbonyl group, or a carbonyloxy group between a carbon-carbon bond thereof, or a monovalent aromatic ring group optionally having a substituent; Rx and Ry each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 15 carbon atoms optionally substituted with a hydroxy group or an alkoxy group, or a monovalent aromatic ring group optionally having a substituent, with the proviso that Rx and Ry do not both represent hydrogen atoms, and Rx and Ry are option› ally bonded with each other to form a ring together with the carbon atom to which Rx and Ry are bonded; \"y\" is an \n\n[0133] When the inventive resist composition is a chemi› cally amplified positive resist composition, the component (B) may be a mixture of a polymer containing the repeating units B6 to B9 in addition to the repeating unit Bl and a polymer without containing the repeating units B6 to B9. In this case, the amount of the polymer without containing the repeating units B6 to B9 is preferably 2 to 5,000 parts by mass, more preferably 10 to 1,000 based on 100 parts by mass of the polymer containing the repeating units B6 to B9. \n\n[0132] The repeating units B6 to B9 are units that gener› ates an acid by irradiation with a high energy beam. It is considered that these units contained in the component (B) makes it possible to regulate the acid diffusion appropriately to give a pattern with decreased LER. Additionally, it is considered that these units contained in the component (B) regulates the phenomenon that acid volatilizes from the exposed portion in baking in vacuum and adheres to the unexposed portion again, and is effective for decreasing LER and decreasing pattern defects by regulating an unde› sired deprotection reaction at the unexposed portion. When the repeating unit B6 to B9 is contained, the amount is preferably 0.5 to 30 mo! % based on the whole repeating units of the component (B). \n\n[0136] In this case, it is preferable that the component (B) further contain a repeating unit shown by the following general formula (BN2) (hereinafter, also referred to as the repeating unit BN2) in addition to the repeating unit (Bl) \n\n[0135] When the inventive resist composition is a chemi› cally amplified negative resist composition, the repeating unit Bl is preferably contained in an amount ranging from the lower limit of 40 mo! %, more preferably 50 mo! %, to the upper limit of 100 mo! %, preferably 85 mo! % with respect to the whole repeating units of the component (B) in order to bring higher contrast between the portion that is turned to negative by exposure to a high energy beam and the portion without being exposed (the portion that is not turned to negative) for obtaining higher resolution. \n\n[0134] When the inventive resist composition is a chemi› cally amplified negative resist composition, the composition preferably contains a resin (polymer compound) that becomes alkaline-insoluble as a base polymer of the com› ponent (B). As this resin to become alkaline-insoluble by an action of acid, which is not particularly limited, it is pref› erable to use the ones in which the resins form crosslinking with each other by an action of acid to be polymerized or the ones that react with a crosslinking agent described later by an action of acid to be polymerized." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7186082239261684, + "doc_id": "ced7b65e2543906fa1be7eadc973c0f69b66bca0edc8adb58a86eaf4f394c028", + "edit_distance": 0.25, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9736328125, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "US 2012/0003590 Al\n\nJan. 5, 2012\n\n50", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "US 2012/0003590 Al \n\n50 \n\nJan. 5, 2012" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7186082239261684, + "doc_id": "b2e02a711212cb5e7499367e2526b8a7fe4e7d67debe3f5bb8331e46880d104c", + "edit_distance": 0.25, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9736328125, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "US 2012/0003590 Al\n\nJan. 5, 2012\n\n22", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "US 2012/0003590 Al \n\n22 \n\nJan. 5, 2012" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8013114792075929, + "doc_id": "167f6658cd410df8d4d14acc53e8c8f509e94c44b8005e6b76de8d17329363a7", + "edit_distance": 0.42823529411764705, + "f1_score": 0.9609984399375976, + "meteor": 0.8121825500686397, + "precision": 0.9625, + "pred_md": "## (12) United States Patent Jung et al.\n\n## (54) PHOTORESIST CROSS-LINKER AND PHOTORESIST COMPOSITION COMPRISING THE SAME\n\n- (75) Inventors:\n- (73) Assignee:\n- ( *) Notice:\n- (21) Appl. No.:\n\n09/448,964\n\n- (22) Filed:\n\nNov. 24, 1999\n\n## (30) Foreign Application Priority Data\n\nNov. 27, 1998\n\nFeb. 22, 1999\n\n- (51) Int. Cl.7\n\n................................................\n\nG03F 7/004\n\n- (52) U.S. Cl.\n\n....................\n\n430/270.1; 430/325; 526/266;\n\n526/320; 526/271; 549/347; 549/369; 549/430\n\n- (58) Field of Search\n\n.............................. 430/270.1, 325;\n\n549/347, 369, 430; 526/266, 320, 271\n\n## (56) References Cited\n\n## U.S. PATENT DOCUMENTS\n\n## FOREIGN PATENT DOCUMENTS\n\n## OIBER PUBLICATIONS\n\n1970: 100663 Ca plus Abstract.* 1971:65746 Caplus Abstract.* 1967:10943 Caplus Abstract.* 1984:10943 Caplus Abstract.* 1972:552633 Caplus Abstract.* 1970:477088 Caplus Abstract.* 1998:604944 Caplus Abstract.*\n\n1971:112779 CaplusAbstract of JP 45040054, Dec. 1970.* 1970:510169 Caplus Abstract to Ouchi, T. et al. Kogyo Kagaku Zasshi, 1970, 73(7), 1717-19.*\n\n(KR) ............................................ 98-51356\n\n(KR) .............................................\n\n99-5825\n\nJae Chang Jung; Keun Kyu Kong; Myoung Soo Kim; Hyoung Gi Kim; Hyeong Soo Kim; Ki Ho Baik, all of Kyoungki-do (KR)\n\nHyundai Electronics Industries Co., Ltd. (KR)\n\nSubject to any disclaimer, the term of this patent is extended or adjusted under 35 U.S.C. 154(b) by O days.\n\nUS006482565Bl\n\nUS006482565Bl\n\n- (10) Patent No.:\n- (45) Date of Patent:\n\nUS 6,482,565 Bl\n\nNov. 19, 2002\n\nAnionic polymerizabilities of 2-vinyl-1,3-dioxolane and 2-vinyl-1,3---dioxane, Yamashita, N. et al., J. Polym.Sci., Polym.Lett.Ed., 1979, 17, 521-6.* 1994:496066 Caplus Abstract of JP 5216294, Aug. 1993. * Chemical Abstract No. 131:337017 & JP 11315075. Chemical Abstract No. 128:295769 & JP 10088419. Chemical Abstract No. 118:102825 & J. Maslinska-Solich et al., React. Polym. (1992), 18(2), 159-166. J.Maslinska-Solich et al., \"Studies on Co(II) and Mn(II) Reactive\n\ncomplesex of some maleic anhydride copolymers,\" Polymers, vol. 18, 1992, pp. 159-166.\n\n* cited by examiner\n\nPrimary Examiner-Rosemary E. Ashton (74) Attorney, Agent, or\n\nFirm-Townsend and Townsend LLP\n\nand Crew\n\n## (57) ABSTRACT\n\nThe present invention relates to a cross-linker for use in a photoresist which is suitable for a photolithography process using KrF (248 ru), ArF (193 nm), E-beam, ion beam or EUV light source. According to the present invention, pre› ferred cross-linkers comprise a copolymer having repeating units derived from: (i) a compound represented by following Chemical Formula 1 and/or (ii) one or more compound(s) selected from the group consisting of acrylic acid, meth› acrylic acid and maleic anhydride.\n\nwherein, R1 , R2 and R individually represent straight or branched C 1 \\_ 10 alkyl, straight or branched C 1 \\_ 10 ester, straight or branched C 1 \\_ 10 ketone, straight or branched C1 \\_ 10 carboxylic acid, straight or branched C 1 \\_ 10 acetal, straight or branched C 1 \\_ 10 alkyl including at least one hydroxyl group, straight or branched C 1 \\_ 10 ester includ› ing at least one hydroxyl group, straight or branched C1 \\_ 10 ketone including at least one hydroxyl group, straight or branched C 1 \\_ 10 carboxylic acid including at least one hydroxyl group, and straight or branched C1 \\_ 10 acetal including at least one hydroxyl group; R3 represents hydrogen or methyl; m represents O or 1; and n represents a number of 1 to 5.\n\n## 16 Claims, 5 Drawing Sheets\n\nI", + "recall": 0.9595015576323987, + "true_md": "1111111111111111 11111 lllll 111111111111111 11111 1111111111 1111111111 11111111 US006482565Bl \n\n# (12) United States Patent\n\n# Jung et al.\n\n# (10) Patent No.: US 6,482,565 Bl\n\n# (45) Date of Patent: Nov. 19, 2002\n\n# (54) PHOTORESIST CROSS-LINKER AND PHOTORESIST COMPOSITION COMPRISING THE SAME\n\n- (75) Inventors: Jae Chang Jung; Keun Kyu Kong; Myoung Soo Kim; Hyoung Gi Kim; Hyeong Soo Kim; Ki Ho Baik, all of Kyoungki-do (KR) \n\n- (73) Assignee: Hyundai Electronics Industries Co., Ltd. (KR) \n\n- ( *) Notice: Subject to any disclaimer, the term of this patent is extended or adjusted under 35 U.S.C. 154(b) by O days. \n\n- (21) Appl. No.: 09/448,964 \n\n- (22) Filed: Nov. 24, 1999 \n\n- (51) Int. Cl.7 ................................................ G03F 7/004 \n\n- (52) U.S. Cl. .................... 430/270.1; 430/325; 526/266; 526/320; 526/271; 549/347; 549/369; 549/430 \n\n- (58) Field of Search .............................. 430/270.1, 325; 549/347, 369, 430; 526/266, 320, 271 \n\n## (30) Foreign Application Priority Data\n\n## (56) References Cited\n\n## U.S. PATENT DOCUMENTS\n\n## FOREIGN PATENT DOCUMENTS\n\n## OIBER PUBLICATIONS\n\n1970: 100663 Ca plus Abstract.* \n\n1971:65746 Caplus Abstract.* \n\n1967:10943 Caplus Abstract.* \n\n1984:10943 Caplus Abstract.* \n\n1972:552633 Caplus Abstract.* \n\n1970:477088 Caplus Abstract.* \n\n1998:604944 Caplus Abstract.* \n\n1971:112779 CaplusAbstract of JP 45040054, Dec. 1970.* \n\n1970:510169 Caplus Abstract to Ouchi, T. et al. Kogyo \n\nKagaku Zasshi, 1970, 73(7), 1717-19.* \n\nAnionic polymerizabilities of 2-vinyl-1,3-dioxolane and 2-vinyl-1,3---dioxane, Yamashita, N. et al., J. Polym.Sci., Polym.Lett.Ed., 1979, 17, 521-6.* \n\n1994:496066 Caplus Abstract of JP 5216294, Aug. 1993. * \n\nChemical Abstract No. 131:337017 & JP 11315075. \n\nChemical Abstract No. 128:295769 & JP 10088419. \n\nChemical Abstract No. 118:102825 & J. Maslinska-Solich et al., React. Polym. (1992), 18(2), 159-166. \n\nJ.Maslinska-Solich et al., \"Studies on Co(II) and Mn(II) complesex of some maleic anhydride copolymers,\" Reactive Polymers, vol. 18, 1992, pp. 159-166. \n\n* cited by examiner \n\nPrimary Examiner-Rosemary E. Ashton \n\n(74) Attorney, Agent, or Firm-Townsend and Townsend and Crew LLP \n\nThe present invention relates to a cross-linker for use in a photoresist which is suitable for a photolithography process using KrF (248 ru), ArF (193 nm), E-beam, ion beam or EUV light source. According to the present invention, pre› ferred cross-linkers comprise a copolymer having repeating units derived from: (i) a compound represented by following Chemical Formula 1 and/or (ii) one or more compound(s) selected from the group consisting of acrylic acid, meth› acrylic acid and maleic anhydride. \n\n- wherein, R$_{1}$, R 2 and R individually represent straight or branched C$_{1}$ \\_ $_{10 }$alkyl, straight or branched C$_{1}$ \\_ $_{10 }$ester, straight or branched C$_{1}$ \\_ $_{10 }$ketone, straight or branched C$_{1}$ \\_ $_{10 }$carboxylic acid, straight or branched C$_{1}$ \\_ $_{10 }$acetal, straight or branched C$_{1}$ \\_ $_{10 }$alkyl including at least one hydroxyl group, straight or branched C$_{1}$ \\_ $_{10 }$ester includ› ing at least one hydroxyl group, straight or branched C$_{1}$ \\_ 10 ketone including at least one hydroxyl group, straight or branched C$_{1}$ \\_ $_{10 }$carboxylic acid including at least one hydroxyl group, and straight or branched C$_{1}$ \\_ $_{10 }$acetal including at least one hydroxyl group; R$_{3 }$ represents hydrogen or methyl; m represents O or 1; and n represents a number of 1 to 5. \n\n## 16 Claims, 5 Drawing Sheets\n\n## (57) ABSTRACT\n\n<Chemical Formula 1>" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6947735272593512, + "doc_id": "cf990a1c3a5bbd3e314cac9f83cf31169ac09ebd6ce4aebf71682d71bf45a73b", + "edit_distance": 0.4, + "f1_score": 0.9452449567723341, + "meteor": 0.8100385883046126, + "precision": 0.9265536723163842, + "pred_md": "263\n\n264\n\nwherein in Formula (2), L3 and L 4 each independently represent a single bond or a divalent linking group, Y represents an atomic group capable of forming a lactone structure, and Re represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cyano group or a halogen atom. 9. The pattern forming method according to claim 1, wherein the compound (B) is a compound represented by Formula (3-1) or (3-2):\n\nwherein in Formula (3-1), Xfs each independently represents a fluorine atom or an alkyl group substituted with at least one fluorine atom, Ru and R 12 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom or an alkyl group, and when a plurality of Ru and R 12 is present, Ru's may be the same or different and R 12 's may be the same or different, Lu represents a divalent linking group, and when a plurality of Lu is present, Lu's may be the same or different, A represents an organic group, Ml+ represents a cation, x represents an integer of 1 to 20, y represents an integer of 0 to 10, z represents an integer of 0 to 10, in Formula (3-2), Rc 1 and Rc 2 each independently represent an organic group, and Rc 1 and Rc 2 may be bound with each other to form a ring, and MY represents a cation.\n\n- 10. The pattern forming method according to claim 1, for use in fabricating semiconductor microcircuits.\n- 11. An electron beam-sensitive or extreme ultraviolet ray-sensitive resin composition, comprising a resin (A) having a repeating unit represented by Formula (1-0) and a repeating unit represented by Formula (1-2), a compound (B) capable of generating an acid upon irradiation with an electron beam-sensitive or extreme ultraviolet ray, and a solvent (C),\n- wherein a content of the repeating unit represented by Formula (1-0) is 45 mo!% or more based on a whole repeating units in the resin (A):\n\nwherein in Formula (1-0), R1 and R 2 each independently represent an alkyl group, Ru and R12 each independently represent an alkyl group, R13 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, Ru and R12 may be bound with each other to form a ring, and Ru and R 13 may be bound with each other to form a ring, Ra represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cyano group or a halogen atom, and L 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, in Formula (1-2), Rb represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cyano group or a halogen atom, R 3 represents a substituent, n 1 represents an integer of 1 or 2, n 2 represents an integer of Oto 4, when n 2 represents an integer of 2 to 4, R 3 's may be bound with each other to form a ring, and L2 represents a single bond, --COO- or -CONR -, 4 and R 4 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group.\n\n- 12. A resist film formed by using the electron beam› sensitive or extreme ultraviolet ray-sensitive resin compo› sition according to claim 11.\n- 13. A method for manufacturing an electronic device comprising:\n- (i) providing a substrate for a semiconductor or a circuit board; and\n- (ii) performing the pattern forming method according on claim 1 to the substrate.\n- 14. The pattern forming method according to claim 1, wherein the content of the repeating unit represented by Formula (1-0) is 60 mo! % or more based on the whole repeating units in the resin (A).\n\n*\n\n*\n\n*\n\n*\n\n*\n\nUS 9,423,690 B2\n\n5\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55", + "recall": 0.9647058823529412, + "true_md": "264 \n\n263 \n\nUS 9,423,690 B2 \n\nwherein in Formula (2), \n\n9. The pattern forming method according to claim 1, wherein the compound (B) is a compound represented by \n\nFormula (3-1) or (3-2): \n\nwherein in Formula (3-1), \n\n- L$_{3 }$ and L$_{4 }$ each independently represent a single bond or a divalent linking group, \n\n- Y represents an atomic group capable of forming a lactone structure, and \n\n- Re represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cyano group or a halogen atom. \n\n- Xfs each independently represents a fluorine atom or an alkyl group substituted with at least one fluorine atom, \n\n- Ru and R$_{12 }$ each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom or an alkyl group, and when a plurality of Ru and R$_{12 }$ is present, Ru’s may be the 30 same or different and R$_{12}$’s may be the same or different, \n\n- Lu represents a divalent linking group, and when a plurality of Lu is present, Lu’s may be the same or different, \n\n- Rc$_{1 }$ and Rc$_{2 }$ each independently represent an organic group, and Rc$_{1 }$ and Rc$_{2 }$ may be bound with each other to form a ring, and \n\nMY represents a cation. \n\n10. The pattern forming method according to claim 1, for use in fabricating semiconductor microcircuits. \n\n11. An electron beam-sensitive or extreme ultraviolet ray-sensitive resin composition, comprising a resin (A) having a repeating unit represented by Formula (1-0) and a repeating unit represented by Formula (1-2), a compound (B) capable of generating an acid upon irradiation with an electron beam-sensitive or extreme ultraviolet ray, and a solvent (C), \n\n- wherein a content of the repeating unit represented by Formula (1-0) is 45 mo!% or more based on a whole repeating units in the resin (A): \n\n- A represents an organic group, \n\n- Ml+ represents a cation, \n\n- x represents an integer of 1 to 20, \n\n- y represents an integer of 0 to 10, \n\n- z represents an integer of 0 to 10, \n\n- in Formula (3-2), \n\nwherein in Formula (1-0), \n\n- R$_{1 }$ and R$_{2 }$ each independently represent an alkyl group, \n\n- Ru and R$_{12 }$each independently represent an alkyl group, \n\n- R$_{13 }$ represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, \n\n- Ru and R$_{12 }$may be bound with each other to form a ring, and Ru and R$_{13 }$may be bound with each other to form a ring, \n\n- Ra represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cyano group or a halogen atom, and L$_{1 }$ represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, \n\n- in Formula (1-2), \n\n- Rb represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cyano group or a halogen atom, \n\n- R$_{3 }$ represents a substituent, \n\n- n$_{1 }$ represents an integer of 1 or 2, n$_{2 }$ represents an integer of Oto 4, \n\n- when n$_{2 }$ represents an integer of 2 to 4, R$_{3 }$’s may be bound with each other to form a ring, and \n\n- L$_{2 }$ represents a single bond, --COO- or -CONR$_{4}$ -, and R$_{4 }$ represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group. \n\n12. A resist film formed by using the electron beam› sensitive or extreme ultraviolet ray-sensitive resin compo› sition according to claim 11. \n\n13. A method for manufacturing an electronic device comprising: \n\n- (i) providing a substrate for a semiconductor or a circuit board; and \n\n- (ii) performing the pattern forming method according on claim 1 to the substrate. \n\n14. The pattern forming method according to claim 1, wherein the content of the repeating unit represented by Formula (1-0) is 60 mo! % or more based on the whole repeating units in the resin (A). \n\n* * * * *" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9879354809842851, + "doc_id": "a1d4faf31e7826d44b3653e03d1f3235b2103c1627cade938b35c789b05e8bb9", + "edit_distance": 0.02572347266881029, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999989361783824, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "US 2019/0010119 Al\n\nJan. 10, 2019\n\n[0144] As the amount of the repeating unit BN2, the lower limit is preferably 5 mo! %, more preferably 10 mo! % based on the whole repeating units constituting the component (B). The upper limit is preferably 70 mo! %, more preferably 60 mo!%.\n\n[0145] When the inventive resist composition is a chemi› cally amplified negative resist composition, the component (B) preferably contains the repeating unit BN2, additionally at least one kind of a repeating unit selected from the repeating units B3 to B5 in addition to the repeating unit Bl in view of coexisting high etching durability and resolution. In this case, these repeating units are contained in an amount of 60 mo! % or more, more preferably 70 mo! % or more, and still more preferably 80 mo! % or more in the whole repeating units. This securely gives properties demanded for the inventive negative resist composition.\n\n[0146] When the inventive resist composition is a chemi› cally amplified negative resist composition, the component (B) may contain a lactone structure, a (meth)acrylate ester unit having an adhesive group such as a hydroxy group other than the phenolic hydroxy group, and other repeating units in order to fine-tune the properties of a resist film. Illustra› tive examples of the (meth)acrylate ester unit having an adhesive group include the units shown by the following general formulae (bl) to (b3). These units can be used supplementary as a unit to control the unit to give adhesive› ness to a substrate and the solubility without showing acidity.\n\n40", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Jan. 10, 2019 \n\n40 \n\nUS 2019/0010119 Al \n\n[0144] As the amount of the repeating unit BN2, the lower limit is preferably 5 mo! %, more preferably 10 mo! % based on the whole repeating units constituting the component (B). The upper limit is preferably 70 mo! %, more preferably 60 mo!%. \n\n[0145] When the inventive resist composition is a chemi› cally amplified negative resist composition, the component (B) preferably contains the repeating unit BN2, additionally at least one kind of a repeating unit selected from the repeating units B3 to B5 in addition to the repeating unit Bl in view of coexisting high etching durability and resolution. In this case, these repeating units are contained in an amount of 60 mo! % or more, more preferably 70 mo! % or more, and still more preferably 80 mo! % or more in the whole repeating units. This securely gives properties demanded for the inventive negative resist composition. \n\n[0146] When the inventive resist composition is a chemi› cally amplified negative resist composition, the component (B) may contain a lactone structure, a (meth)acrylate ester unit having an adhesive group such as a hydroxy group other than the phenolic hydroxy group, and other repeating units in order to fine-tune the properties of a resist film. Illustra› tive examples of the (meth)acrylate ester unit having an adhesive group include the units shown by the following general formulae (bl) to (b3). These units can be used supplementary as a unit to control the unit to give adhesive› ness to a substrate and the solubility without showing acidity." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8458821747643445, + "doc_id": "2e8f038df914fdfc093f3a2b76f31e6882147c2332119798e024bd54f7ed8ad8", + "edit_distance": 0.2564102564102564, + "f1_score": 0.9369369369369369, + "meteor": 0.9744737744666256, + "precision": 0.8813559322033898, + "pred_md": "## UNITED STATES PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE CERTIFICATE OF CORRECTION\n\nPATENT NO.\n\n: 6,482,565 Bl\n\nDATED\n\n: November 19, 2002\n\nINVENTOR(S)\n\n: Jae Chang et al.\n\nPage 4 of 5\n\nIt is certified that error appears in the above-identified patent and that said Letters Patent is hereby corrected as shown below:\n\n## Column 13,\n\nLines 66-67, the sentence \"An ultramicro negative pattern of 0.20 jm L/S was obtained.\" should read -An ultramicro negative pattern of 0.20 µm L/S was\n\nobtained. --\n\n## Column 17,\n\nLines 7-9, the claim \"A negative photoresist comprosition according to claim 5 further comprising (iii) a photoacid generator and (iv) an organic solvent.\" should read -- A negative photoresist composition according to claim 5 further comprising (iii) a photoacid generator and (iv) an organic solvent. --\n\n## Column 20,\n\nLines 8-9, the phrase \"a, band c individually represent the relative amounts of each comonomer, with band c being greater then O.\" should read -- a, band c individually represent the relative amounts of each comonomer, with band c being greater than 0. -› Lines 60-66, please replace Chemical Formula 6 with the following Chemical Formula 6: \\_\\_", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "It is certified that error appears in the above-identified patent and that said Letters Patent is hereby corrected as shown below: \n\nColumn 13, \n\nLines 66-67, the sentence \"An ultramicro negative pattern of 0.20 jm L/S was obtained.\" should read -- An ultramicro negative pattern of 0.20 µm L/S was obtained. --\n\nColumn 17, \n\nLines 7-9, the claim \"A negative photoresist comprosition according to claim 5 further comprising (iii) a photoacid generator and (iv) an organic solvent.\" should read -- A negative photoresist composition according to claim 5 further comprising (iii) a photoacid generator and (iv) an organic solvent. --\n\nColumn 20, \n\nLines 8-9, the phrase \"a, band c individually represent the relative amounts of each comonomer, with band c being greater then O.\" should read -- a, band c individually represent the relative amounts of each comonomer, with band c being greater than 0. -› Lines 60-66, please replace Chemical Formula 6 with the following Chemical Formula 6: \\_\\_ \n\n## UNITED STATES PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE CERTIFICATE OF CORRECTION\n\nPage 4 of 5" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9929337176286146, + "doc_id": "d09b80474904752c2553b8ac1ec4005932c44a408201c5a00827c1361390f3a4", + "edit_distance": 0.5484147386461011, + "f1_score": 0.9980276134122288, + "meteor": 0.795085555593981, + "precision": 0.9960629921259843, + "pred_md": "US 2019/0010119 Al\n\n00\n\n[0153] The repeating units B6, B8, and BIO are units that generates an acid by irradiation with a high energy beam. It is considered that these units contained in the component (B) makes it possible to regulate the acid diffusion appropriately to give a pattern with decreased LER. Additionally, it is considered that these units contained in the component (B) decreases the phenomenon that acid volatilizes from the exposed portion in baking in vacuum and adheres to the unexposed portion again, and is effective for regulating LER and decreasing pattern defects by regulating unexpected inhibition of the negative reaction at the unexposed portion. The amount of the repeating units B6, B8, and BIO is preferably 0.5 to 20 mo! % based on the whole repeating units constituting the component (B).\n\n[0154] In case of preparing a chemically amplified nega› tive resist composition when the component (B) does not contain the repeating units B6, B8, and BIO, the amount of the repeating unit Bl is preferably 25 to 95 mo! %, more preferably 40 to 85 mo! % based on the whole repeating units of the component (B). The amount of the repeating unit BN2 is preferably 5 to 70 mo!%, more preferably 10 to 60 mo!% based on the whole repeating units of the component (B). The amount of the repeating units B3 to B5 is preferably 0 to 30 mo! %, more preferably 3 to 20 mo! % based on the whole repeating units of the component (B). Incidentally, other repeating units may be contained in an amount of O to 30 mo! %, preferably O to 20 mo! %.\n\n[0155] In case of preparing a chemically amplified nega› tive resist composition when the component (B) contains the repeating units B6, B8, and B 10, the amount of the repeating unit Bl is preferably 25 to 94.5 mo!%, more preferably 36 to 85 mo! % based on the whole repeating units of the component (B). The amount of the repeating unit BN2 is preferably 5 to 70 mo! %, more preferably 10 to 60 mo! % based on the whole repeating units of the component (B). The amount of the repeating units B3 to B5 is preferably 0 to 30 mo! %, more preferably 3 to 20 mo! % based on the whole repeating units of the component (B). The total amount of the repeating units Bl to B5 is preferably 60 to 99.5 mo! % based on the whole repeating units of the component (B). The amount of the repeating units B6, B8, and BIO is preferably 0.5 to 20 mo!%, more preferably 1 to 10 mo! %. Incidentally, other repeating units may be con› tained in an amount ofO to 30 mo!%, preferably Oto 20 mo! %.\n\n[0156] When the inventive resist composition is a chemi› cally amplified negative resist composition, the component (B) may be a mixture of a polymer containing the repeating units B6, B8, and BIO in addition to the repeating unit Bl and a polymer without containing the repeating units B6,\n\n44\n\nJan. 10, 2019\n\nB8, and BIO. In this case, the amount of the polymer without containing the repeating units B6, B8, and BIO is preferably 2 to 5,000 parts by mass, more preferably 10 to 1,000 based on 100 parts by mass of the polymer containing the repeating units B6, B8, and BIO.\n\n[0157] The inventive negative resist composition may further contain a crosslinking agent to form or reinforce the crosslinking structure of the component (B). Illustrative examples of the crosslinking agent that can be used in the present invention, which is not particularly limited, include melamine compounds, guanamine compounds, glycoluril compounds, urea compounds, epoxy compounds, isocyanate compounds, and azide compounds, each substituted with one or more groups selected from a methylol group, an alkoxymethyl group, and an acyloxymethyl group; com› pounds containing a double bond(s) such as an alkenyl ether group; and compounds containing a hydroxy group(s). They can be used as an additive or introduced into the side chain of a polymer as a pendant group.\n\n[0158] Among the specific examples of the crosslinking agent, illustrative examples of the melamine compound further include hexamethylol melamine, hexamethoxym› ethyl melamine, the compound of hexamethylol melamine the 1 to 6 methylol group(s) of which are methoxymethyl› ated and mixtures thereof, hexamethoxyethyl melamine, hexaacyloxymethyl melamine, the compound ofhexameth› ylol melamine the 1 to 6 methylol group(s) of which are acyloxymethylated and mixtures thereof.\n\n[0159] Among the specific examples of the crosslinking agent, illustrative examples of the guanamine compound further include tetramethylol guanamine, tetramethoxym› ethyl guanamine, the compound oftetramethylol guanamine the 1 to 4 methylol group(s) of which are methoxymethyl› ated and mixtures thereof, tetramethoxyethyl guanamine, tetraacyloxy guanamine, the compound of tetramethylol guanamine the 1 to 4 methylol group(s) of which are acyloxymethylated and mixtures thereof.\n\n[0160] Among the specific examples of the crosslinking agent, illustrative examples of the glycoluril compound further include tetramethylolglycoluril, tetramethoxygly› coluril, tetramethoxymethylglycoluril, the compound of tetramethylolglycoluril the 1 to 4 methylol group(s) of which are methoxymethylated and mixtures thereof, the compound of tetramethylolglycoluril the 1 to 4 methylol group(s) of which are acyloxymethylated and mixtures thereof.\n\n[0161] Among the specific examples of the crosslinking agent, illustrative examples of the urea compound further include tetramethylol urea, tetramethoxymethyl urea, the compound oftetramethylol urea the 1 to 4 methylol group(s) of which are methoxymethylated and mixtures thereof, and tetramethoxyethyl urea.\n\n[0162] Among the specific examples of the crosslinking agent, illustrative examples of the epoxy compound further include tris(2,3-epoxypropyl)isocyanurate, trimethylolmeth› ane triglycidyl ether, trimethylolpropane triglycidyl ether, triethylolethane triglycidyl ether.\n\n[0163] Among the specific examples of the crosslinking agent, illustrative examples of the isocyanate compound further include tolylene diisocyanate, diphenylmethane dii› socyanate, hexamethylene diisocyanate, and cyclohexane diisocyanate.", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Jan. 10, 2019 \n\n44 \n\nUS 2019/0010119 Al \n\nB8, and BIO. In this case, the amount of the polymer without containing the repeating units B6, B8, and BIO is preferably 2 to 5,000 parts by mass, more preferably 10 to 1,000 based on 100 parts by mass of the polymer containing the repeating units B6, B8, and BIO. \n\n[0157] The inventive negative resist composition may further contain a crosslinking agent to form or reinforce the crosslinking structure of the component (B). Illustrative examples of the crosslinking agent that can be used in the present invention, which is not particularly limited, include melamine compounds, guanamine compounds, glycoluril compounds, urea compounds, epoxy compounds, isocyanate compounds, and azide compounds, each substituted with one or more groups selected from a methylol group, an alkoxymethyl group, and an acyloxymethyl group; com› pounds containing a double bond(s) such as an alkenyl ether group; and compounds containing a hydroxy group(s). They can be used as an additive or introduced into the side chain of a polymer as a pendant group. \n\n[0158] Among the specific examples of the crosslinking agent, illustrative examples of the melamine compound further include hexamethylol melamine, hexamethoxym› ethyl melamine, the compound of hexamethylol melamine the 1 to 6 methylol group(s) of which are methoxymethyl› ated and mixtures thereof, hexamethoxyethyl melamine, hexaacyloxymethyl melamine, the compound ofhexameth› ylol melamine the 1 to 6 methylol group(s) of which are acyloxymethylated and mixtures thereof. \n\n[0153] The repeating units B6, B8, and BIO are units that generates an acid by irradiation with a high energy beam. It is considered that these units contained in the component (B) makes it possible to regulate the acid diffusion appropriately to give a pattern with decreased LER. Additionally, it is considered that these units contained in the component (B) decreases the phenomenon that acid volatilizes from the exposed portion in baking in vacuum and adheres to the unexposed portion again, and is effective for regulating LER and decreasing pattern defects by regulating unexpected inhibition of the negative reaction at the unexposed portion. The amount of the repeating units B6, B8, and BIO is preferably 0.5 to 20 mo! % based on the whole repeating units constituting the component (B). \n\n[0154] In case of preparing a chemically amplified nega› tive resist composition when the component (B) does not contain the repeating units B6, B8, and BIO, the amount of the repeating unit Bl is preferably 25 to 95 mo! %, more preferably 40 to 85 mo! % based on the whole repeating units of the component (B). The amount of the repeating unit BN2 is preferably 5 to 70 mo!%, more preferably 10 to 60 mo!% based on the whole repeating units of the component (B). The amount of the repeating units B3 to B5 is preferably 0 to 30 mo! %, more preferably 3 to 20 mo! % based on the whole repeating units of the component (B). Incidentally, other repeating units may be contained in an amount of O to 30 mo! %, preferably O to 20 mo! %. \n\n[0155] In case of preparing a chemically amplified nega› tive resist composition when the component (B) contains the repeating units B6, B8, and B 10, the amount of the repeating unit Bl is preferably 25 to 94.5 mo!%, more preferably 36 to 85 mo! % based on the whole repeating units of the component (B). The amount of the repeating unit BN2 is preferably 5 to 70 mo! %, more preferably 10 to 60 mo! % based on the whole repeating units of the component (B). The amount of the repeating units B3 to B5 is preferably 0 to 30 mo! %, more preferably 3 to 20 mo! % based on the whole repeating units of the component (B). The total amount of the repeating units Bl to B5 is preferably 60 to 99.5 mo! % based on the whole repeating units of the component (B). The amount of the repeating units B6, B8, and BIO is preferably 0.5 to 20 mo!%, more preferably 1 to 10 mo! %. Incidentally, other repeating units may be con› tained in an amount ofO to 30 mo!%, preferably Oto 20 mo! %. \n\n[0156] When the inventive resist composition is a chemi› cally amplified negative resist composition, the component (B) may be a mixture of a polymer containing the repeating units B6, B8, and BIO in addition to the repeating unit Bl and a polymer without containing the repeating units B6, \n\n[0163] Among the specific examples of the crosslinking agent, illustrative examples of the isocyanate compound further include tolylene diisocyanate, diphenylmethane dii› socyanate, hexamethylene diisocyanate, and cyclohexane diisocyanate. \n\n[0162] Among the specific examples of the crosslinking agent, illustrative examples of the epoxy compound further include tris(2,3-epoxypropyl)isocyanurate, trimethylolmeth› ane triglycidyl ether, trimethylolpropane triglycidyl ether, triethylolethane triglycidyl ether. \n\n[0161] Among the specific examples of the crosslinking agent, illustrative examples of the urea compound further include tetramethylol urea, tetramethoxymethyl urea, the compound oftetramethylol urea the 1 to 4 methylol group(s) of which are methoxymethylated and mixtures thereof, and tetramethoxyethyl urea. \n\n[0160] Among the specific examples of the crosslinking agent, illustrative examples of the glycoluril compound further include tetramethylolglycoluril, tetramethoxygly› coluril, tetramethoxymethylglycoluril, the compound of tetramethylolglycoluril the 1 to 4 methylol group(s) of which are methoxymethylated and mixtures thereof, the compound of tetramethylolglycoluril the 1 to 4 methylol group(s) of which are acyloxymethylated and mixtures thereof. \n\n[0159] Among the specific examples of the crosslinking agent, illustrative examples of the guanamine compound further include tetramethylol guanamine, tetramethoxym› ethyl guanamine, the compound oftetramethylol guanamine the 1 to 4 methylol group(s) of which are methoxymethyl› ated and mixtures thereof, tetramethoxyethyl guanamine, tetraacyloxy guanamine, the compound of tetramethylol guanamine the 1 to 4 methylol group(s) of which are acyloxymethylated and mixtures thereof." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9634821870084327, + "doc_id": "7fcee0562dc95139e71f5519b2fd4d5a1e30364ae83de7087467d3e8c0d1e145", + "edit_distance": 0.03214285714285714, + "f1_score": 0.9857549857549858, + "meteor": 0.9813165462249174, + "precision": 0.9942528735632183, + "pred_md": "US 2020/0050106 Al\n\nwith Leaving Group That Leaves by Action of Acid) and (Repeating Unit Having Acid Group) as described above.\n\n[0185] That is, neither the structure in which a polar group is protected with a leaving group that leaves by the action of an acid nor the acid group is included in the repeating unit having a fluorine atom or an iodine atom.\n\n[0186] As the repeating unit having a fluorine atom or an iodine atom, a repeating unit represented by Formula (C) is preferable.\n\n[0187] L 5 represents a single bond or an ester group.\n\n[0188] R 9 represents a hydrogen atom, or an alkyl group which may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom.\n\n[0189] R 10 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group which may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom, a cycloalkyl group which may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom, an aryl group which may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom, or a group formed by combination thereof.\n\n[0190] The content of the repeating unit having a fluorine atom or an iodine atom is preferably 0% to 50% by mole, more preferably 5% to 45% by mole, and still more pref› erably 10% to 40% by mole with respect to all the repeating units in the resin (A).\n\n[0191] Furthermore, from the viewpoint that (Repeating Unit Having Structure in Which Polar Group Is Protected with Leaving Group That Leaves by Action of Acid) and (Repeating Unit Having Acid Group) are not included in the repeating unit having a fluorine atom or an iodine atom as described above, the content of the repeating unit having a fluorine atom or an iodine atom is also intended to mean the content of the repeating unit having a fluorine atom or an iodine atom excluding (Repeating Unit Having Structure in Which Polar Group Is Protected with Leaving Group That Leaves by Action of Acid) and (Repeating Unit Having Acid Group).\n\n[0192] As described above, the repeating unit having a structure in which a polar group is protected with a leaving group that leaves by the action of an acid may include a fluorine atom or an iodine atom, and the repeating unit having an acid group may also include a fluorine atom or an iodine atom.\n\n[0193] Among the repeating units of the resin (A), the total content of the repeating unit including at least one of a fluorine atom or an iodine atom is preferably 20% to 100% by mole, more preferably 30% to 100% by mole, and still more preferably 40% to 100% by mole with respect to all the repeating units of the resin (A).\n\n[0194] In addition, examples of the repeating unit includ› ing at least one of a fluorine atom or an iodine atom include a repeating unit which has a fluorine atom or an iodine atom, and has a structure in which a polar group is protected with a leaving group that leaves by the action of an acid, and a\n\n13\n\nFeb. 13, 2020\n\nrepeating unit which has a fluorine atom or an iodine atom, and has an acid group, and a repeating unit having a fluorine atom or an iodine atom.\n\n[0195] (Repeating Unit Having Lactone Group)\n\n[0196] The resin (A) may further have a repeating unit having a lactone group.\n\n[0197] As the lactone group, any group may be used as long as it has a lactone structure, but the lactone group is preferably a group having a 5- to 7-membered ring lactone structure, and more preferably a group having a 5to 7-membered ring lactone structure to which another ring structure is fused in the form of forming a bicyclo structure or a spiro structure.\n\n[0198] The resin (A) more preferably has a repeating unit having a group having a lactone structure represented by any one of General Formulae (LCl-1) to (LCl-17). Further, the group having a lactone structure may be bonded directly to the main chain. As the lactone structure, a group represented by General Formula (LCl-1), General Formula (LCl-4), General Formula (LCl-5), General Formula (LCl-6), Gen› eral Formula (LCl-13), or General Formula (LCl-14) is preferable.", + "recall": 0.9774011299435028, + "true_md": "US 2020/0050106 Al \n\n13 \n\nFeb. 13, 2020 \n\nwith Leaving Group That Leaves by Action of Acid) and (Repeating Unit Having Acid Group) as described above. \n\n[0185] That is, neither the structure in which a polar group is protected with a leaving group that leaves by the action of an acid nor the acid group is included in the repeating unit having a fluorine atom or an iodine atom. \n\n[0186] As the repeating unit having a fluorine atom or an iodine atom, a repeating unit represented by Formula (C) is preferable. \n\n[0187] L$_{5 }$ represents a single bond or an ester group. \n\n[0188] R$_{9 }$ represents a hydrogen atom, or an alkyl group which may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom. \n\n[0189] R$_{10 }$ represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group which may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom, a cycloalkyl group which may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom, an aryl group which may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom, or a group formed by combination thereof. \n\n[0190] The content of the repeating unit having a fluorine atom or an iodine atom is preferably 0% to 50% by mole, more preferably 5% to 45% by mole, and still more pref› erably 10% to 40% by mole with respect to all the repeating units in the resin (A). \n\n[0191] Furthermore, from the viewpoint that (Repeating Unit Having Structure in Which Polar Group Is Protected with Leaving Group That Leaves by Action of Acid) and (Repeating Unit Having Acid Group) are not included in the repeating unit having a fluorine atom or an iodine atom as described above, the content of the repeating unit having a fluorine atom or an iodine atom is also intended to mean the content of the repeating unit having a fluorine atom or an iodine atom excluding (Repeating Unit Having Structure in Which Polar Group Is Protected with Leaving Group That Leaves by Action of Acid) and (Repeating Unit Having Acid Group). \n\n[0192] As described above, the repeating unit having a structure in which a polar group is protected with a leaving group that leaves by the action of an acid may include a fluorine atom or an iodine atom, and the repeating unit having an acid group may also include a fluorine atom or an iodine atom. \n\n[0193] Among the repeating units of the resin (A), the total content of the repeating unit including at least one of a fluorine atom or an iodine atom is preferably 20% to 100% by mole, more preferably 30% to 100% by mole, and still more preferably 40% to 100% by mole with respect to all the repeating units of the resin (A). \n\n[0194] In addition, examples of the repeating unit includ› ing at least one of a fluorine atom or an iodine atom include a repeating unit which has a fluorine atom or an iodine atom, and has a structure in which a polar group is protected with a leaving group that leaves by the action of an acid, and a \n\nrepeating unit which has a fluorine atom or an iodine atom, and has an acid group, and a repeating unit having a fluorine atom or an iodine atom. \n\n[0195] (Repeating Unit Having Lactone Group) \n\n[0196] The resin (A) may further have a repeating unit having a lactone group. \n\n[0197] As the lactone group, any group may be used as long as it has a lactone structure, but the lactone group is preferably a group having a 5- to 7-membered ring lactone structure, and more preferably a group having a 5- to 7-membered ring lactone structure to which another ring structure is fused in the form of forming a bicyclo structure or a spiro structure. \n\n[0198] The resin (A) more preferably has a repeating unit having a group having a lactone structure represented by any one of General Formulae (LCl-1) to (LCl-17). Further, the group having a lactone structure may be bonded directly to the main chain. As the lactone structure, a group represented by General Formula (LCl-1), General Formula (LCl-4), General Formula (LCl-5), General Formula (LCl-6), Gen› eral Formula (LCl-13), or General Formula (LCl-14) is preferable." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6493358309501979, + "doc_id": "8fb8706f6108a4abfda3cf909f58d501f5204f0e51bd674e4e0a605be9a11ba5", + "edit_distance": 0.3333333333333333, + "f1_score": 0.9411764705882353, + "meteor": 0.9616126543209877, + "precision": 0.8888888888888888, + "pred_md": "US 2012/0003590 Al\n\nJan. 5, 2012\n\n81\n\n-continued", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "US 2012/0003590 Al \n\n81 \n\nJan. 5, 2012" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8588077024925143, + "doc_id": "b8b3c98b552185c8791957ea757cf0a4d48a624d7c8f7d25ee637dcadc70826a", + "edit_distance": 0.2028301886792453, + "f1_score": 0.9405940594059407, + "meteor": 0.9208519084674925, + "precision": 0.979381443298969, + "pred_md": "## UNITED STATES PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE CERTIFICATE OF CORRECTION\n\nPATENT NO.\n\n: 6,482,565 Bl\n\nDATED\n\n: November 19, 2002\n\nINVENTOR(S)\n\n: Jae Chang et al.\n\nPage 3 of 5\n\nIt is certified that error appears in the above-identified patent and that said Letters Patent is hereby corrected as shown below:\n\n## Column 5 (cont'd),\n\nLines 49-59, please replace Reaction Scheme 1 with the following Reaction Scheme 1:\n\n## Column 7,\n\nLine 26, the phrase \"The procedure according to Example I was repeated\" should read --The procedure according to Example 1 was repeated--.\n\n## Column 10,\n\nLines 31-34, the paragraph \"The procedure according to Example 7 (Step 2) was repeated but using the monomer of Chemical Formula Id instead of the monomer of Chemical Formula le, to obtain the polymer of Chemical Formula 11.\" should read --The procedure according to Example 7 (Step 2) was repeated but using the monomer of Chemical Formula ld instead of the monomer of Chemical Formula le, to obtain the polymer of Chemical Formula 11 --.", + "recall": 0.9047619047619048, + "true_md": "Page 3 of 5 \n\nPATENT NO. : 6,482,565 Bl \n\nDATED : November 19, 2002 \n\nINVENTOR(S) : Jae Chang et al. \n\nIt is certified that error appears in the above-identified patent and that said Letters Patent is hereby corrected as shown below: \n\nColumn 5 (cont’d), \n\nLines 49-59, please replace Reaction Scheme 1 with the following Reaction Scheme 1: \n\nColumn 7, \n\nLine 26, the phrase \"The procedure according to Example I was repeated\" should read -- The procedure according to Example 1 was repeated--. \n\nColumn 10, \n\nLines 31-34, the paragraph \"The procedure according to Example 7 (Step 2) was repeated but using the monomer of Chemical Formula Id instead of the monomer of Chemical Formula le, to obtain the polymer of Chemical Formula 11.\" should read -- The procedure according to Example 7 (Step 2) was repeated but using the monomer of Chemical Formula ld instead of the monomer of Chemical Formula le, to obtain the polymer of Chemical Formula 11 --. \n\nUNITED STATES PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE CERTIFICATE OF CORRECTION \n\nAfter cross-linking, cross-linkable hydroxyl group (s) are regenerated" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7476743906106103, + "doc_id": "7741a6445c43c5463b126ea2dd4f50df0cffcd03cb82c96300cba2bf28cfd63d", + "edit_distance": 0.8, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.968, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "US 2021/0033970 Al\n\nFeb.4,2021\n\n43", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Feb.4,2021 \n\n43 \n\nUS 2021/0033970 Al" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5923033072023249, + "doc_id": "792542fb98ec422776b4b007fc07106acee67b9091f84865881ac9bd3a75d180", + "edit_distance": 0.4, + "f1_score": 0.9411764705882353, + "meteor": 0.9498856707317073, + "precision": 0.8888888888888888, + "pred_md": "US 2020/0050106 Al\n\nFeb. 13, 2020\n\n-continued\n\n16\n\n-continued", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "US 2020/0050106 Al \n\n16 \n\nFeb. 13, 2020" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7995756536286646, + "doc_id": "a0278757dc876168ef4bc9d965d858cb1c0b084555ca0df921cb3ea9a4880d41", + "edit_distance": 0.5646067415730337, + "f1_score": 0.9623430962343096, + "meteor": 0.7796068543662185, + "precision": 0.9623430962343096, + "pred_md": "US 2012/0003590 Al\n\n[0014] R1 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, a halogen atom, a cyano group or an alky› loxycarbonyl group.\n\n[2] In the actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition as described in [ 1] above, in formula (I), Rn and AR are combined with each other to form a non-aromatic ring.\n\n[3] In the actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition as described in [1] or [2] above, the repeating unit (A) represented by formula (I) contains two or more aromatic rings.\n\n[ 4] In the actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition as described in any one of [1] to [3] above, AR in formula (I) contains two or more aromatic rings.\n\n[5] In the actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition as described in any of [1] to [ 4] above, the repeating unit (B) is at least one selected from the group consisting of repeating units represented by the following formulae (Bl), (B2) and (B3):\n\n[0015] wherein A represents a structural moiety capable of decomposing upon irradiation with an actinic ray or radiation to generate an acid anion,\n\n[0016] each ofR 04 , R05 and R 07 to R 09 independently rep› resents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, a cyano group or an alkoxycarbonyl group,\n\n[0017] R06 represents a cyano group, a carboxy group, -CO-OR25 or ----CO-N(R 26 )(R 27 ), R25 represents an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, a cycloalk› enyl group, an aryl group or an aralkyl group, R 26 and R27 may combine with each other to form a ring together with the nitrogen atom, each of R 26 and R 27 independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, a cycloalkenyl group, an aryl group or an aralkyl group,\n\n[0018] each ofX 1 to X 3 independently represents a single bond, an arylene group, an alkylene group, a cycloalkylene group, -0-, -S0 2 -, -CO-, -N(R33 )- or a divalent linking group formed by combining a plurality of these mem› bers, and R 33 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a\n\n2\n\nJan. 5, 2012\n\ncycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, a cycloakenyl group, an aryl group or an aralkyl group. In the actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin\n\n[6] composition as described in\n\n[5] above, the A is an ionic structural moiety having a sulfo› nium salt structure or an iodonium salt structure.\n\n[7] In the actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition as described in any of[l] to [6], the resin further contains at least either one of a repeating unit represented by the following formula (Al) and a repeating unit represented by formula (A2):\n\n[0019] wherein in formula (A 1),\n\n[0020] m represents an integer of O to 4,\n\n[0021] n represents an integer of 1 to 5 satisfying the rela› tionship ofm+m~15,\n\n[0022] S1 represents a substituent (excluding hydrogen atom) and when m~2, each S 1 may be the same as or different from every other S , and 1\n\n[0023] A1 represents a hydrogen atom or a group capable of leaving by the action of an acid and when n~2, eachA 1 may be the same as or different from every other A 1 ; and\n\n[0024] in formula (A2),\n\n[0025] X represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a cycloalkyl group, a cycloalkyloxy group, an aryl group, a carboxy group, an alkyloxycarbonyl group, an alkylcarbony› loxy group or an aralkyl group, and\n\n[0026] A 2 represents a group capable of leaving by the action of an acid.\n\n[8] In the actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition as described in any one of [1] to [7] above, the actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition is for a KrF excimer laser, an electron beam, an X-ray or EUV light.\n\n[9] A resist film is formed using the actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition described in any of [1] to [8] above.\n\n[10] A pattern forming method comprises exposing and developing the resist film described in [9] above.\n\n[0027] The present invention preferably further includes the following configurations.\n\n[11] In the actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition as described in any one of [1] to [8] above, the weight average molecular weight of the resin is from 1,000 to 200,000.", + "recall": 0.9623430962343096, + "true_md": "US 2012/0003590 Al \n\n2 \n\nJan. 5, 2012 \n\n[0014] R$_{1 }$ represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, a halogen atom, a cyano group or an alky› loxycarbonyl group. \n\n[2] In the actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition as described in [ 1] above, in formula (I), Rn and AR are combined with each other to form a non-aromatic ring. \n\n[3] In the actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition as described in [1] or [2] above, the repeating unit (A) represented by formula (I) contains two or more aromatic rings. \n\n[ 4] In the actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition as described in any one of [1] to [3] above, AR in formula (I) contains two or more aromatic rings. \n\n[5] In the actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition as described in any of [1] to [ 4] above, the repeating unit (B) is at least one selected from the group consisting of repeating units represented by the following formulae (Bl), (B2) and (B3): \n\ncycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, a cycloakenyl group, an aryl group or an aralkyl group. \n\n[6] In the actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition as described in \n\n[5] above, the A is an ionic structural moiety having a sulfo› nium salt structure or an iodonium salt structure. \n\n[7] In the actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition as described in any of[l] to [6], the resin further contains at least either one of a repeating unit represented by the following formula (Al) and a repeating unit represented by formula (A2): \n\n[0019] wherein in formula (A 1), \n\n[0021] n represents an integer of 1 to 5 satisfying the rela› tionship ofm+m~15, \n\n[0020] m represents an integer of O to 4, \n\n[0022] S$_{1 }$ represents a substituent (excluding hydrogen atom) and when m~2, each S$_{1 }$may be the same as or different from every other S $_{1}$ , and \n\n[0023] A$_{1 }$represents a hydrogen atom or a group capable of leaving by the action of an acid and when n~2, eachA$_{1 }$ may be the same as or different from every other A$_{1}$ ; and \n\n[0024] in formula (A2), \n\n[0025] X represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a cycloalkyl group, a cycloalkyloxy group, an aryl group, a carboxy group, an alkyloxycarbonyl group, an alkylcarbony› loxy group or an aralkyl group, and \n\n[0026] A$_{2 }$ represents a group capable of leaving by the action of an acid. \n\n[0015] wherein A represents a structural moiety capable of decomposing upon irradiation with an actinic ray or radiation to generate an acid anion, \n\n[0016] each ofR$_{04}$, R$_{05 }$and R$_{07 }$to R$_{09 }$independently rep› resents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, a cyano group or an alkoxycarbonyl group, \n\n[0017] R$_{06 }$ represents a cyano group, a carboxy group, -CO-OR$_{25 }$ or ----CO-N(R$_{26}$)(R$_{27}$), R 25 represents an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, a cycloalk› enyl group, an aryl group or an aralkyl group, R$_{26 }$and R$_{27 }$ may combine with each other to form a ring together with the nitrogen atom, each of R$_{26 }$and R$_{27 }$independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, a cycloalkenyl group, an aryl group or an aralkyl group, \n\n[0018] each ofX$_{1 }$ to X$_{3 }$ independently represents a single bond, an arylene group, an alkylene group, a cycloalkylene group, -0-, -S0$_{2}$ -, -CO-, -N(R$_{33}$)-or a divalent linking group formed by combining a plurality of these mem› bers, and R$_{33 }$represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a \n\n[8] In the actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition as described in any one of [1] to [7] above, the actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition is for a KrF excimer laser, an electron beam, an X-ray or EUV light. \n\n[9] A resist film is formed using the actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition described in any of [1] to [8] above. \n\n[10] A pattern forming method comprises exposing and developing the resist film described in [9] above. \n\n[0027] The present invention preferably further includes the following configurations. \n\n[11] In the actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition as described in any one of [1] to [8] above, the weight average molecular weight of the resin is from 1,000 to 200,000." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9093047608104503, + "doc_id": "7a83feb11259109dbd654ba9ec31d56899a4ea0da1bcac8c025ce291fc9972c3", + "edit_distance": 0.37626628075253254, + "f1_score": 0.9775280898876405, + "meteor": 0.8886759627150883, + "precision": 0.9830508474576272, + "pred_md": "US 2020/0050106 Al\n\n-continued\n\n(A-8)\n\n[0243] In the formulae, R represents a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, or an ethyl group.\n\n[0244] Ra represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, an alkenyl group, a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group, an acyloxy group, a cyano group, a nitro group, an amino group, a halogen atom, an ester group (---OCOR\"' or -COOR\"': R\"' repre› sents an alkyl group or fluorinated alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms), or a carboxyl group. Further, the alkyl group, the cycloalkyl group, the aryl group, the aralkyl group, and the alkenyl group may each have a substituent. In addition, a hydrogen atom bonded to a carbon atom in the group represented by Ra may be substituted with a fluorine atom or an iodine atom.\n\n[0245] Furthermore, R' and R\" each independently repre› sent an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, an alkenyl group, a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group, an acyloxy group, a cyano group, a nitro group, an amino group, a halogen atom, an ester group (---OCOR\"' or -COOR\"': R\"' represents an alkyl group or fluorinated alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms), or a carboxyl group. Further, the alkyl group, the cycloalkyl group, the aryl group, the aralkyl group, and the alkenyl group may each have a substituent. In addition, a hydrogen atom bonded to a carbon atom in the group represented by each ofR' and R\" may be substituted with a fluorine atom or an iodine atom.\n\n[0246] L represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. Examples of the divalent linking group include -COO-, --CO-, -0-, -S-, -SO-, -SO 2 -, an\n\n21\n\nFeb. 13, 2020\n\nalkylene group, a cycloalkylene group, an alkenylene group, and a linking group formed by the linking of a plurality of these groups.\n\n[0247] m and n each independently represent an integer of 0 or more. The upper limits of m and n are not particularly limited, but are preferably 2 or less in many cases, and 1 or less in more cases.\n\n[0248] A specific example of a means for accomplishing (b) above may be a method in which a repeating unit represented by Formula (B) is introduced into the resin (A).\n\n[0249] In Formula (B), R 61 to R 64 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an organic group, and at least two or more of R 6 i, ... , or R 64 are organic groups.\n\n[0250] Furthermore, in a case where at least one of the organic groups is a group in which a ring structure is directly linked to the main chain in the repeating unit, the types of the other organic groups are not particularly limited.\n\n[0251] In addition, in a case where all the organic groups are not a group in which a ring structure is directly linked to the main chain in the repeating unit, at least two or more of the organic groups are substituents having a number of the constituent atoms excluding hydrogen atoms of 3 or more.\n\n[0252] Specific examples of the repeating unit represented by Formula (B) include the following repeating units.", + "recall": 0.9720670391061452, + "true_md": "US 2020/0050106 Al \n\n21 \n\nFeb. 13, 2020 \n\n[0243] In the formulae, R represents a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, or an ethyl group. \n\n[0244] Ra represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, an alkenyl group, a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group, an acyloxy group, a cyano group, a nitro group, an amino group, a halogen atom, an ester group (---OCOR\"’ or -COOR\"’: R\"’ repre› sents an alkyl group or fluorinated alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms), or a carboxyl group. Further, the alkyl group, the cycloalkyl group, the aryl group, the aralkyl group, and the alkenyl group may each have a substituent. In addition, a hydrogen atom bonded to a carbon atom in the group represented by Ra may be substituted with a fluorine atom or an iodine atom. \n\n[0245] Furthermore, R’ and R\" each independently repre› sent an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, an alkenyl group, a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group, an acyloxy group, a cyano group, a nitro group, an amino group, a halogen atom, an ester group (---OCOR\"’ or -COOR\"’: R\"’ represents an alkyl group or fluorinated alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms), or a carboxyl group. Further, the alkyl group, the cycloalkyl group, the aryl group, the aralkyl group, and the alkenyl group may each have a substituent. In addition, a hydrogen atom bonded to a carbon atom in the group represented by each ofR’ and R\" may be substituted with a fluorine atom or an iodine atom. \n\n[0246] L represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. Examples of the divalent linking group include -COO-, --CO-, -0-, -S-, -SO-, -SO$_{2}$ -, an \n\n[0249] In Formula (B), R$_{61 }$ to R$_{64 }$ each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an organic group, and at least two or more of R$_{6}$ i, ... , or R$_{64 }$are organic groups. \n\n[0250] Furthermore, in a case where at least one of the organic groups is a group in which a ring structure is directly linked to the main chain in the repeating unit, the types of the other organic groups are not particularly limited. \n\n[0251] In addition, in a case where all the organic groups are not a group in which a ring structure is directly linked to the main chain in the repeating unit, at least two or more of the organic groups are substituents having a number of the constituent atoms excluding hydrogen atoms of 3 or more. \n\n[0252] Specific examples of the repeating unit represented by Formula (B) include the following repeating units. \n\nalkylene group, a cycloalkylene group, an alkenylene group, and a linking group formed by the linking of a plurality of these groups. \n\n[0247] m and n each independently represent an integer of 0 or more. The upper limits of m and n are not particularly limited, but are preferably 2 or less in many cases, and 1 or less in more cases. \n\n[0248] A specific example of a means for accomplishing (b) above may be a method in which a repeating unit represented by Formula (B) is introduced into the resin (A)." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9579288422334074, + "doc_id": "83bb96f07100d376ef2eb74838c0da5dc9b5ef705b8c0938be03b761c15e3787", + "edit_distance": 0.4686971235194585, + "f1_score": 0.9979035639412998, + "meteor": 0.9119505286958117, + "precision": 0.99581589958159, + "pred_md": "US 2012/0003590 Al\n\nJan. 5, 2012\n\n106\n\nTABLE 3-continued\n\n[0527] As seen in Tables 2 and 3, the compos1t10ns of Examples were excellent in all of sensitivity, pattern profile, LER, resolution of isolated pattern and etching resistance compared with the compositions of Comparative Examples.\n\n## <Evaluation of Resist (EUV)>\n\n[0528] The components shown in Table 4 below were dis› solved in the solvent shown in the same Table to prepare a solution having a solid content concentration of3.0 mass%, and this solution was filtered through a polytetrafluoroethyl› ene filter having a pore size of0.1 µm, whereby positive resist solutions were obtained.\n\n[0529] The numerical value of\"mass %\" shown in Table 4 is a value based on the entire solid content excluding the surfactant of the composition. Incidentally, the content of the surfactant is 0.01 mass % based on the entire solid content excluding the surfactant of the composition.\n\n[0530] The positive resist solution obtained above was coated on a hexamethyldisilazane-treated silicon substrate by using a spin coater and dried by heating on a hot plate at 120° C. over 90 seconds to obtain a resist film having an average thickness of 100 nm.\n\n## [Sensitivity, Pattern Profile and Roughness Characteristics]\n\n[0531] This resist film was irradiated with EUV light by using an EUV exposure apparatus. Immediately after the irradiation, the film was heated on a hot plate at 130° C. over 90 seconds, then developed with an aqueous tetramethylam› monium hydroxide solution having a concentration of 2.38\n\nmass% at 23 ° C. for 60 seconds, rinsed with pure water for 30 seconds, and dried. In this way, a line-and-space pattern (line: space= 1: 1) was formed.\n\n## (Sensitivity)\n\n[0532] The cross-sectional profile of the obtained line-and› space pattern was observed using a scanning electron micro› scope (S-4800, manufactured by Hitachi, Ltd.), and the mini› mum irradiation energy when resolving a line having a line width of 100 nm was determined. This value was shown as \"Sensitivity (mJ/cm 2 )\".\n\n## (Pattern Profile)\n\n[0533] The cross-sectional profile of the 100-nm line pat› tern (line:space=l :1) at the irradiation dose giving the sensi› tivity above was observed using a scanning electron micro› scope (S-4800, manufactured by Hitachi, Ltd.), and the profile was evaluated on a 2-stage scale, that is, \"rectangular\" and \"tapered\".\n\n## (Roughness Characteristics: LER)\n\n[0534] The 100-nm line pattern (line:space= 1: 1) above was observed using a scanning electron microscope (S-9260, manufactured by Hitachi Ltd.), and the distance between the actual edge and the reference line where the edge should be present was measured at 30 points at regular intervals included in the portion of 50 µmin the longitudinal direction of the pattern. The standard deviation of the distance was determined, and 3a was computed. This 3a was shown as \"LER (nm)\".\n\n[0535] These evaluation results are shown in Table 4 below.\n\nTABLE4\n\n(70/30)", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "US 2012/0003590 Al \n\n106 \n\nJan. 5, 2012 \n\nTABLE 3-continued \n\n[0527] As seen in Tables 2 and 3, the compos1t10ns of Examples were excellent in all of sensitivity, pattern profile, LER, resolution of isolated pattern and etching resistance compared with the compositions of Comparative Examples. \n\nmass% at 23 ° C. for 60 seconds, rinsed with pure water for 30 seconds, and dried. In this way, a line-and-space pattern (line: space= 1: 1) was formed. \n\n[0528] The components shown in Table 4 below were dis› solved in the solvent shown in the same Table to prepare a solution having a solid content concentration of3.0 mass%, and this solution was filtered through a polytetrafluoroethyl› ene filter having a pore size of0.1 µm, whereby positive resist solutions were obtained. \n\n[0532] The cross-sectional profile of the obtained line-and› space pattern was observed using a scanning electron micro› scope (S-4800, manufactured by Hitachi, Ltd.), and the mini› mum irradiation energy when resolving a line having a line width of 100 nm was determined. This value was shown as \"Sensitivity (mJ/cm 2 )\". \n\n[0529] The numerical value of\"mass %\" shown in Table 4 is a value based on the entire solid content excluding the surfactant of the composition. Incidentally, the content of the surfactant is 0.01 mass % based on the entire solid content excluding the surfactant of the composition. \n\n[0530] The positive resist solution obtained above was coated on a hexamethyldisilazane-treated silicon substrate by using a spin coater and dried by heating on a hot plate at 120° C. over 90 seconds to obtain a resist film having an average thickness of 100 nm. \n\n[0531] This resist film was irradiated with EUV light by using an EUV exposure apparatus. Immediately after the irradiation, the film was heated on a hot plate at 130° C. over 90 seconds, then developed with an aqueous tetramethylam› monium hydroxide solution having a concentration of 2.38 \n\n[0533] The cross-sectional profile of the 100-nm line pat› tern (line:space=l :1) at the irradiation dose giving the sensi› tivity above was observed using a scanning electron micro› scope (S-4800, manufactured by Hitachi, Ltd.), and the profile was evaluated on a 2-stage scale, that is, \"rectangular\" and \"tapered\". \n\n[0534] The 100-nm line pattern (line:space= 1: 1) above was observed using a scanning electron microscope (S-9260, manufactured by Hitachi Ltd.), and the distance between the actual edge and the reference line where the edge should be present was measured at 30 points at regular intervals included in the portion of 50 µmin the longitudinal direction of the pattern. The standard deviation of the distance was determined, and 3a was computed. This 3a was shown as \"LER (nm)\". \n\n[0535] These evaluation results are shown in Table 4 below. \n\n## <Evaluation of Resist (EUV)>\n\n## (Sensitivity)\n\n## (Pattern Profile)\n\n## (Roughness Characteristics: LER)\n\n## [Sensitivity, Pattern Profile and Roughness Characteristics]\n\nTABLE4" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7476743906106103, + "doc_id": "4d8e2f06f91191549112cd16ff2492fdb4a838d3b20693e8d367437417c07e8f", + "edit_distance": 0.8, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.968, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "US 2021/0033970 Al\n\nFeb.4,2021\n\n86", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Feb.4,2021 \n\n86 \n\nUS 2021/0033970 Al" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5923033072023249, + "doc_id": "8c25476d85cef0b39c641240a17b457ef7acf2f3f428d8a46b5288fae2527ddd", + "edit_distance": 0.4, + "f1_score": 0.8888888888888888, + "meteor": 0.9498856707317073, + "precision": 0.8, + "pred_md": "US 2012/0003590 Al\n\nJan. 5, 2012\n\n~\n\n79\n\n-continued", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "US 2012/0003590 Al \n\n79 \n\nJan. 5, 2012" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9524266089905707, + "doc_id": "f8ee28f14270e110e9f8d24fe851cae6a19bb1ed4b335265620afe1fa84751cf", + "edit_distance": 0.4642857142857143, + "f1_score": 0.9691943127962086, + "meteor": 0.8469829229440361, + "precision": 0.9623529411764706, + "pred_md": "1\n\n2\n\n## PHOTOSENSITIVE COMPOSITION, COMPOUND FOR USE IN THE PHOTOSENSITIVE COMPOSITION, AND PATTERN-FORMING METHOD USING THE PHOTOSENSITIVE COMPOSITION\n\n## BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION\n\n## 1. Field of the Invention\n\nThe present invention relates to a photosensitive composi› tion preferably used in super-microlithography processes such as the manufacture of super LSI and high capacity microchips, and other photo-publication processes. More specifically, the invention relates to a positive photoresist capable of forming a highly refined pattern with electron beams, X-rays or EUV rays, and a resist composition suitable for fine processing of semiconductor devices using electron beams, X-rays or EUV rays (wavelength: 13 nm or so).\n\n## 2. Description of the Related Art\n\nIn the manufacturing process of semiconductor devices such as IC and LSI, fine processing by lithography using photoresist compositions has been conventionally carried out. In recent years, with the increment of integration of integrated circuits, ultrafine pattern formation of the levels of a sub-micron and quarter-micron has come to be required. Under such a circumstance, the exposure wavelengths show a tendency to be shortening, such as from g-ray to i-ray, further to KrF excimer laser beam. Further, lithography using elec› tron beams, X-rays or EUV rays in addition to excimer laser beams has been developed nowadays.\n\n5\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\n50\n\nIn particular, electron beam lithography is taken as the pattern forming technique of the next generation or the next of the next generation, so that resists of high sensitivity and high resolution are required. The increase in sensitivity is very important object in view of shortening of the processing time of wafers, but in positive resists for electron beams, pursuit of increment of sensitivity is accompanied by not only reduction of resolution but also deterioration ofline edge roughness, so that the development of a resist satisfying these characteris› tics at the same time is strongly desired. Here, line edge roughness means that the edge of the interface between the 40 line pattern of a resist and a substrate irregularly changes in perpendicular direction to the line direction attributable to the characteristics of the resist, and the edge looks unevenly when it is observed from right above. This unevenness is transferred to the substrate by etching processing with the resist as a mask 45 and deteriorates electric characteristic and results in the reduction of yield. In particular, line edge roughness is an extremely important object to be solved in a hyperfine region of 0.25 µm or less. High sensitivity, high resolution, a good pattern form and good line edge roughness are in relationship of trade-off, and how to satisfy these factors at the same time is a very important object.\n\nFurther, when EUV is used as the light source, since wave› lengths of the lights belong to the extreme ultraviolet region having high energy, there is a problem of contrast reduction due to concentration of photochemical reaction such as the tendency to be negative attributable to EUV rays and the like. In lithography using X-rays or EUV rays, it is also an impor› tant object to reconcile high sensitivity and high resolution, and the resolution of this problem is indispensable.\n\n55\n\n60\n\nAs the resist suitable for lithographic process using electron beams, X-rays or EUV rays, chemical amplification resists utilizing acid catalytic reaction are mainly used from the viewpoint of the enhancement of sensitivity, and in posi› tive resists, phenolic polymers having properties that are insoluble or hardly soluble in an alkali developing solution 65 but become soluble in an alkali developing solution by the action of an acid (hereinafter referred to as phenolic acid-\n\ncomposable resin), and chemical amplification resist com› positions comprising acid generators are effectively used as the main components.\n\nIn connection with these positive resists for electron beams, X-rays or EUV rays, some resist compositions con› taining phenolic acid-decomposable resin are known (e.g., JP-A-2002-323768 (The term \"JP-A\" as used herein refers to an \"unexamined published Japanese patent application\".), JP-A-6-41221, Japanese Patent No. 3173368, JP-A-2000122291, JP-A-2001-114825, and JP-A-2001-206917).\n\nFurther, when light sources such as electron beams, X-rays and EUV are used, exposure is carried out under a vacuum, so that compounds having a low boiling point such as solvents and resist materials decomposed by high energy are volatil› ized to thereby contaminate the exposure apparatus, i.e., outgassing is a serious problem. In recent years, various investi› gations are in progress on the reduction of outgassing, and a variety of trials are suggested, e.g., restraint of volatilization of low molecular weight compounds by forming a top coat layer (e.g., refer to EP 1480078), and addition of a radical trapping agent capable of inhibiting decomposition of a poly› mer (e.g., refer to U.S. Pat. No. 6,680,157). Some contriv› ances of outgassing are also required in connection with acid generators.\n\nIn addition, contrivances such as linking of a benzene ring oftriphenyl sulfonium (JP-A-2003-149800), and addition of a base capable of decomposing and becoming a neutral com› pound by actinic radiation exposure (Japanese Patent No. 3549592) have been tried.\n\nHowever, it is the present situation that high sensitivity, high resolution, good line edge roughness and low outgassing in a hyperfine region cannot be satisfied at the same time with any of these combinations.\n\n## SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION\n\nAn object of the invention is to solve the problems of the improving technique of performances in fine processing of semiconductor devices using high energy rays, X-rays, elec› tron beams or EUV rays, and another object is to provide a photosensitive composition capable of satisfying high sensi› tivity, high resolution, good line edge roughness and low outgassing at the same time.\n\nAs a result of eager examinations, the present inventors have found that the above objects of the invention can be achieved surprisingly with a photosensitive composition con› taining specific compound (A).\n\nThat is, the invention can be achieved by the following constitutions.\n\n- (1) A photosensitive composition comprising:\n- (A) a compound represented by the following formula (I):\n\nwherein R 1 to R 13 each independently represents a hydro› gen atom or a substituent;\n\nUS 7,851,130 B2", + "recall": 0.9761336515513126, + "true_md": "2 \n\nUS 7,851,130 B2 \n\n1 \n\ndecomposable resin), and chemical amplification resist com› positions comprising acid generators are effectively used as the main components. \n\nIn connection with these positive resists for electron beams, X-rays or EUV rays, some resist compositions con› taining phenolic acid-decomposable resin are known (e.g., JP-A-2002-323768 (The term \"JP-A\" as used herein refers to an \"unexamined published Japanese patent application\".), JP-A-6-41221, Japanese Patent No. 3173368, JP-A-2000- 122291, JP-A-2001-114825, and JP-A-2001-206917). \n\nAs the resist suitable for lithographic process using elec- tron beams, X-rays or EUV rays, chemical amplification resists utilizing acid catalytic reaction are mainly used from the viewpoint of the enhancement of sensitivity, and in posi› tive resists, phenolic polymers having properties that are insoluble or hardly soluble in an alkali developing solution but become soluble in an alkali developing solution by the action of an acid (hereinafter referred to as phenolic acid-\n\nFurther, when EUV is used as the light source, since wave› lengths of the lights belong to the extreme ultraviolet region having high energy, there is a problem of contrast reduction due to concentration of photochemical reaction such as the tendency to be negative attributable to EUV rays and the like. In lithography using X-rays or EUV rays, it is also an impor› tant object to reconcile high sensitivity and high resolution, and the resolution of this problem is indispensable. \n\nIn particular, electron beam lithography is taken as the pattern forming technique of the next generation or the next of the next generation, so that resists of high sensitivity and high resolution are required. The increase in sensitivity is very important object in view of shortening of the processing time of wafers, but in positive resists for electron beams, pursuit of increment of sensitivity is accompanied by not only reduction of resolution but also deterioration ofline edge roughness, so that the development of a resist satisfying these characteris› tics at the same time is strongly desired. Here, line edge roughness means that the edge of the interface between the line pattern of a resist and a substrate irregularly changes in perpendicular direction to the line direction attributable to the characteristics of the resist, and the edge looks unevenly when it is observed from right above. This unevenness is transferred to the substrate by etching processing with the resist as a mask and deteriorates electric characteristic and results in the reduction of yield. In particular, line edge roughness is an extremely important object to be solved in a hyperfine region of 0.25 µm or less. High sensitivity, high resolution, a good pattern form and good line edge roughness are in relationship of trade-off, and how to satisfy these factors at the same time is a very important object. \n\nIn the manufacturing process of semiconductor devices such as IC and LSI, fine processing by lithography using photoresist compositions has been conventionally carried out. In recent years, with the increment of integration of integrated circuits, ultrafine pattern formation of the levels of a sub-micron and quarter-micron has come to be required. Under such a circumstance, the exposure wavelengths show a tendency to be shortening, such as from g-ray to i-ray, further to KrF excimer laser beam. Further, lithography using elec› tron beams, X-rays or EUV rays in addition to excimer laser beams has been developed nowadays. \n\nThe present invention relates to a photosensitive composi› tion preferably used in super-microlithography processes such as the manufacture of super LSI and high capacity microchips, and other photo-publication processes. More specifically, the invention relates to a positive photoresist capable of forming a highly refined pattern with electron beams, X-rays or EUV rays, and a resist composition suitable for fine processing of semiconductor devices using electron beams, X-rays or EUV rays (wavelength: 13 nm or so). \n\nFurther, when light sources such as electron beams, X-rays and EUV are used, exposure is carried out under a vacuum, so that compounds having a low boiling point such as solvents and resist materials decomposed by high energy are volatil› ized to thereby contaminate the exposure apparatus, i.e., out- gassing is a serious problem. In recent years, various investi› gations are in progress on the reduction of outgassing, and a variety of trials are suggested, e.g., restraint of volatilization of low molecular weight compounds by forming a top coat layer (e.g., refer to EP 1480078), and addition of a radical trapping agent capable of inhibiting decomposition of a poly› mer (e.g., refer to U.S. Pat. No. 6,680,157). Some contriv› ances of outgassing are also required in connection with acid generators. \n\nIn addition, contrivances such as linking of a benzene ring oftriphenyl sulfonium (JP-A-2003-149800), and addition of a base capable of decomposing and becoming a neutral com› pound by actinic radiation exposure (Japanese Patent No. 3549592) have been tried. \n\nHowever, it is the present situation that high sensitivity, high resolution, good line edge roughness and low outgassing in a hyperfine region cannot be satisfied at the same time with any of these combinations. \n\nAn object of the invention is to solve the problems of the improving technique of performances in fine processing of semiconductor devices using high energy rays, X-rays, elec› tron beams or EUV rays, and another object is to provide a photosensitive composition capable of satisfying high sensi› tivity, high resolution, good line edge roughness and low outgassing at the same time. \n\nAs a result of eager examinations, the present inventors have found that the above objects of the invention can be achieved surprisingly with a photosensitive composition con› taining specific compound (A). \n\nThat is, the invention can be achieved by the following constitutions. \n\n(1) A photosensitive composition comprising: \n\n(A) a compound represented by the following formula (I): \n\n## SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION\n\n## 1. Field of the Invention\n\n## 2. Description of the Related Art\n\n## BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION\n\n# PHOTOSENSITIVE COMPOSITION, COMPOUND FOR USE IN THE PHOTOSENSITIVE COMPOSITION, AND PATTERN-FORMING METHOD USING THE PHOTOSENSITIVE COMPOSITION\n\nwherein R$^{1 }$to R$^{13 }$each independently represents a hydro› gen atom or a substituent;" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7478967873665383, + "doc_id": "4ca189c1fef302524d80e731bb9a2aae6285a93413c853224f7ddec739507e66", + "edit_distance": 0.4864864864864865, + "f1_score": 0.8933333333333334, + "meteor": 0.9532036805017996, + "precision": 0.8072289156626506, + "pred_md": "## UNITED STATES PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE CERTIFICATE OF CORRECTION\n\nPATENT NO.\n\n: 6,482,565 Bl\n\nDATED\n\n: November 19, 2002\n\nINVENTOR(S)\n\n: Jae Chang et al.\n\nPage 5 of 5\n\nIt is certified that error appears in the above-identified patent and that said Letters Patent is hereby corrected as shown below:\n\nColumn 21,\n\nLines 3-10, please replace Chemical Formula 7 with the following Chemical Formula 7:\n\n~ ~\n\nThis certificate supersedes Certificate of Correction issued August 17, 2004.\n\nSigned and Sealed this Seventh Day of December, 2004\n\nJONW.DUDAS Director of the United States Patent and Trademark Office", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "It is certified that error appears in the above-identified patent and that said Letters Patent is hereby corrected as shown below: \n\nColumn 21, \n\nLines 3-10, please replace Chemical Formula 7 with the following Chemical Formula 7: \n\nThis certificate supersedes Certificate of Correction issued August 17, 2004. \n\nSigned and Sealed this \n\nSeventh Day of December, 2004 \n\nJONW.DUDAS Director of the United States Patent and Trademark Office \n\nPage 5 of 5 \n\n## UNITED STATES PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE CERTIFICATE OF CORRECTION" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.34822073619539035, + "doc_id": "e43cc487e5b4bfa2791633de5802959cf6f9929de847aceb6b1a6ee15c391c7e", + "edit_distance": 0.6666666666666666, + "f1_score": 0.6153846153846154, + "meteor": 0.865451388888889, + "precision": 0.4444444444444444, + "pred_md": "US 2012/0003590 Al\n\nJan. 5, 2012\n\n29\n\n9\n\n10\n\n11\n\n12\n\n13\n\n14\n\n15\n\n16\n\n17\n\n18", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "US 2012/0003590 Al \n\n29 \n\nJan. 5, 2012" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7380411773078261, + "doc_id": "a3993f752d0ea1fe89d6936841bfb41c5082c6f32498494550eec9d2ae50b8d6", + "edit_distance": 0.4, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9865, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "US 2020/0050106 Al\n\n57\n\nTABLE 3-1\n\nFeb. 13, 2020", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "US 2020/0050106 Al \n\n57 \n\nFeb. 13, 2020 \n\nTABLE 3-1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9223540321711743, + "doc_id": "72ff04feceefed1f2b6aebfa24d794eda867f5dd50bb374ae92c6b4a3dc0b32e", + "edit_distance": 0.7731305449936628, + "f1_score": 0.9669117647058824, + "meteor": 0.673627914995788, + "precision": 0.9850187265917603, + "pred_md": "US 2019/0010119 Al\n\n58\n\ntrated to %, and added to 15 L of methanol, thereby forming precipitate. The obtained white solid was filtered off, dried at 40° C. under vacuum to give 309 g of white polymer.\n\n[0251] The obtained polymer was dissolved in a mixed solvent of 488 g of methanol and 540 g of THF again, and 162 g oftriethylamine and 32 g of water were added thereto to perform deprotection reaction at 60° C. for 40 hours. This reaction solution was concentrated, and then dissolved in 870 g of ethyl acetate. This was subjected to neutralization, separation, and washing with a mixed liquid of 250 g of water and 98 g of acetic acid for once, and was subjected to separation and washing with a mixture of 225 g of water and 7 5 g of pyridine for once, together with 225 g of water for four times. Then, the upper layer of ethyl acetate solution was concentrated, and dissolved in 250 g of acetone. This was added to 15 L of water to precipitate, followed by filtration and drying at 50° C. for 40 hours in vacuum to give 223 g of Polymer-9 as a white polymer. Polymer-9 was measured for 13 C-NMR, 1 H-NMR, and GPC to give the following results.\n\n## [Synthesis Examples 3-2 to 3-7] Synthesis of Polymers-IO to 15\n\n[0252] In the same manner as in Synthesis Example 3-1 except for changing the type and incorporated ratio (molar ratio) of each monomer, Polymers- IO to 15 were synthe› sized.\n\n## [Synthesis Example 3-8] Synthesis of Polymer-16\n\n[0253] Under nitrogen atmosphere, a 3,000 mL of drop› ping cylinder was charged with 890 g of 50.0 mass % PGMEA solution of 4-hydroxystyrene, 47.7 g of acenaph› thylene, 310 g of 54.7 mass % PGMEA solution of 4-(2hydroxy-2-propyl)styrene, 87.0 g of triphenylsulfonium-1, 1,3 ,3 ,3-pentafluoro-2-methacry loy loxypropane-1-sulfonate, 96.1 g of dimethyl-2,2'-azobis-(2-methylpropionate) (V-601, manufactured by Waka Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.), as well as 360 g of y-butyrolactone and 220 g of PGMEA as solvents to prepare a solution. Additionally, another 5,000 mL of flask for polymerization under nitrogen atmosphere was charged with 580 g of y-butyrolactone. To this, being heated to 80° C., the prepared solution described above was added dropwise over 4 hours. After finishing the\n\nJan. 10, 2019\n\ndropwise addition, stirring was continued for 18 hours while the polymerization temperature was kept at 80° C., followed by cooling to room temperature. The obtained polymer solution was added dropwise to 22.5 kg of diisopropyl ether, thereby making the copolymer aggregated. The diisopropyl ether was removed by decantation, and the copolymer was dissolved in 2,250 g of acetone. This acetone solution was added dropwise to 22.5 kg of diisopropyl ether, and the precipitated copolymer was filtered off. The filtered copo› lymer was dissolved in 2,250 g of acetone again. This acetone solution was added dropwise to 22.5 kg of water, and the precipitated copolymer was filtered off. Subse› quently, this was dried at 40° C. for 40 hours to give 700 g of Polymer-16 as a white polymer. Polymer-16 was mea› sured for 13 C-NMR, 1 H-NMR, and GPC to give the follow› ing results.\n\n(Mw ~ 13,000, Mw/Mn ~ 1.62)\n\n(Mw ~ 13,000, Mw/Mn ~ 1.62)\n\n## [Synthesis Examples 3-9 to 3-18] Synthesis of Polymers-17 to 26\n\n[0254] In the same manner as in Synthesis Example 3-2 except for changing the type and incorporated ratio (molar ratio) of each monomer, Polymers-17 to 26 were synthe› sized.\n\n[0255] The types and incorporated ratios of monomers in Polymers-9 to 26 are summarized in Table 4. The structures of the repeating units incorporated to the polymers are shown in Tables 5 to 8. Incidentally, each Mw of Polymers-9 to 15 and 25 is a value measured by GPC using THF as a solvent in terms of polystyrene, and each Mw of Polymers16 to 24 and 26 is a value measured by GPC using dimethylformamide as a solvent in terms of polystyrene.", + "recall": 0.9494584837545126, + "true_md": "Jan. 10, 2019 \n\n58 \n\nUS 2019/0010119 Al \n\ndropwise addition, stirring was continued for 18 hours while the polymerization temperature was kept at 80° C., followed by cooling to room temperature. The obtained polymer solution was added dropwise to 22.5 kg of diisopropyl ether, thereby making the copolymer aggregated. The diisopropyl ether was removed by decantation, and the copolymer was dissolved in 2,250 g of acetone. This acetone solution was added dropwise to 22.5 kg of diisopropyl ether, and the precipitated copolymer was filtered off. The filtered copo› lymer was dissolved in 2,250 g of acetone again. This acetone solution was added dropwise to 22.5 kg of water, and the precipitated copolymer was filtered off. Subse› quently, this was dried at 40° C. for 40 hours to give 700 g of Polymer-16 as a white polymer. Polymer-16 was mea› sured for $^{13}$C-NMR, $^{1}$H-NMR, and GPC to give the follow› ing results. \n\n[0252] In the same manner as in Synthesis Example 3-1 except for changing the type and incorporated ratio (molar ratio) of each monomer, Polymers-IO to 15 were synthe› sized. \n\n[0253] Under nitrogen atmosphere, a 3,000 mL of drop› ping cylinder was charged with 890 g of 50.0 mass % PGMEA solution of 4-hydroxystyrene, 47.7 g of acenaph› thylene, 310 g of 54.7 mass % PGMEA solution of 4-(2- hydroxy-2-propyl)styrene, 87.0 g of triphenylsulfonium-1, 1,3 ,3 ,3-pentafluoro-2-methacry loy loxypropane-1-sulfonate, 96.1 g of dimethyl-2,2’-azobis-(2-methylpropionate) (V-601, manufactured by Waka Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.), as well as 360 g of y-butyrolactone and 220 g of PGMEA as solvents to prepare a solution. Additionally, another 5,000 mL of flask for polymerization under nitrogen atmosphere was charged with 580 g of y-butyrolactone. To this, being heated to 80° C., the prepared solution described above was added dropwise over 4 hours. After finishing the \n\n[0255] The types and incorporated ratios of monomers in Polymers-9 to 26 are summarized in Table 4. The structures of the repeating units incorporated to the polymers are shown in Tables 5 to 8. Incidentally, each Mw of Polymers-9 to 15 and 25 is a value measured by GPC using THF as a solvent in terms of polystyrene, and each Mw of Polymers- 16 to 24 and 26 is a value measured by GPC using dimethylformamide as a solvent in terms of polystyrene. \n\n[0254] In the same manner as in Synthesis Example 3-2 except for changing the type and incorporated ratio (molar ratio) of each monomer, Polymers-17 to 26 were synthe› sized. \n\n## [Synthesis Examples 3-9 to 3-18] Synthesis of Polymers-17 to 26\n\n## [Synthesis Example 3-8] Synthesis of Polymer-16\n\n## [Synthesis Examples 3-2 to 3-7] Synthesis of Polymers-IO to 15\n\n6 (Mw ~ 13,000, Mw/Mn ~ 1.62) \n\n(Mw ~ 4,500, Mw/Mn ~ 1.65) \n\ntrated to ‰, and added to 15 L of methanol, thereby forming precipitate. The obtained white solid was filtered off, dried at 40° C. under vacuum to give 309 g of white polymer. \n\n[0251] The obtained polymer was dissolved in a mixed solvent of 488 g of methanol and 540 g of THF again, and 162 g oftriethylamine and 32 g of water were added thereto to perform deprotection reaction at 60° C. for 40 hours. This reaction solution was concentrated, and then dissolved in 870 g of ethyl acetate. This was subjected to neutralization, separation, and washing with a mixed liquid of 250 g of water and 98 g of acetic acid for once, and was subjected to separation and washing with a mixture of 225 g of water and 7 5 g of pyridine for once, together with 225 g of water for four times. Then, the upper layer of ethyl acetate solution was concentrated, and dissolved in 250 g of acetone. This was added to 15 L of water to precipitate, followed by filtration and drying at 50° C. for 40 hours in vacuum to give 223 g of Polymer-9 as a white polymer. Polymer-9 was measured for $^{13}$C-NMR, $^{1}$H-NMR, and GPC to give the following results." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8998673814868433, + "doc_id": "6514101a62bfe54e1a0490855eb912c1dd1ecc08f4b4dd6dd4060ace6b303784", + "edit_distance": 0.07017543859649122, + "f1_score": 0.9707602339181287, + "meteor": 0.9724653089856851, + "precision": 0.9651162790697675, + "pred_md": "US 2021/0033970 Al\n\nFeb.4,2021\n\n-continued\n\n[0074] Further, recurring units (c) h . group selected from hydrox 1 ( avmg another adhes)ve phenolic hydroxyl), lactone Jn other tha~ the foregomg ester bond sulfonate b d ~' sultone nng, ether bond, carboxyl ~roups may oanl ' cbar ~nyl, sulfonyl, cyano, and so e mcorpor t d · h p\\_olymer. Examples of suitable mono a e m \\_t e base nng units ( c) are derived . mers from which recur› thereto. Herein RA is d afire gd1ven below, but not limited as e ne above.\n\n38", + "recall": 0.9764705882352941, + "true_md": "Feb.4,2021 \n\n38 \n\nUS 2021/0033970 Al \n\n[0074] Further, recurring units (c) h . group selected from hydrox 1 ( avmg another adhes)ve phenolic hydroxyl), lactone Jn other tha~ the foregomg ester bond sulfonate b d ~’ sultone nng, ether bond, carboxyl ~roups may oanl ’ cbar ~nyl, sulfonyl, cyano, and so e mcorpor t d • h p\\_olymer. Examples of suitable mono a e m \\_t e base nng units ( c) are derived . mers from which recur› thereto. Herein RA is d afire gd1ven below, but not limited as e ne above." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "6bf9c0743d7cb0debbe7c04bb9eb1364320bfa92d2fea43b5ed9498b746aab31", + "edit_distance": 0.8333333333333334, + "f1_score": 0.5555555555555556, + "meteor": 0.6757575757575759, + "precision": 0.4166666666666667, + "pred_md": "&:?\n\n~o\n\ns~\n\n35\n\nUS 7,851,130 B2\n\n36", + "recall": 0.8333333333333334, + "true_md": "36 \n\nUS 7,851,130 B2 \n\n35 \n\n-continued" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9002912884467397, + "doc_id": "8defce5a9b93ddd58133219f48ab972cd713c73b1a36682bd78d1b7c2162cf66", + "edit_distance": 0.40703971119133575, + "f1_score": 0.9879931389365353, + "meteor": 0.9131307338593526, + "precision": 0.9965397923875432, + "pred_md": "US 2019/0010119 Al\n\n[0044] When the component (B) contains the repeating unit described above, it is possible to improve the exposure durability to electron beam in etching or inspection of the pattern.\n\n[0045] The present invention also provides a resist pat› terning process comprising the steps of:\n\n[0046] forming a resist film on a substrate to be processed by using the resist composition of the present invention,\n\n[0047] pattern-exposure to a high energy beam, and\n\n[0048] developing by using an alkaline developer to give a resist pattern.\n\n[0049] The resist patterning process using the inventive resist composition described above is capable of forming a pattern with higher resolution and decreased LER, etc. by being exposed.\n\n[0050] It is preferable to use an EUV or an electron beam as the high energy beam.\n\n[0051] The inventive resist patterning process is particu› larly useful for forming a finer pattern in such a way that an EUV or an electron beam is used.\n\n[0052] It is preferable to use a substrate the top surface of which is composed of a material containing chromium or silicon as the substrate to be processed.\n\n[0053] The inventive resist patterning process is particu› larly useful for patterning a substrate having a surface of material that is liable to occur pattern peel-off or pattern collapse.\n\n[0054] It is preferable to use a photomask blanks as the substrate to be processed.\n\n[0055] The inventive resist patterning process is capable of forming a pattern with higher resolution and decreased LER by exposure even in the case of using a substrate made from a material in which the top surface is liable to affect the resist pattern profile such as a photomask blanks.\n\n## Advantageous Effects of Invention\n\n[0056] As described above, the inventive resist composi› tion, having a sulfonium salt containing a specific partial structure incorporated as a photo-acid generator, is a resist composition that causes few defects and is excellent in lithography performance such as LER, LWR, and CDU in microprocessing technologies, particularly lithography using an electron beam or an EUV. The inventive resist patterning process using the inventive resist composition described above is particularly effective for forming a fine pattern.\n\n## BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF DRAWINGS\n\n[0057] FIG. 1 is a diagram showing 1 H-NMR spectrum data of the sulfonium salt synthesized in Synthesis Example 1-3;\n\n[0058] FIG. 2 is a diagram showing 19 F-NMR spectrum data of the sulfonium salt synthesized in Synthesis Example 1-3;\n\n[0059] FIG. 3 is a diagram showing 1 H-NMR spectrum data of the sulfonium salt synthesized in Synthesis Example 1-4;\n\n[0060] FIG. 4 is a diagram showing 19 F-NMR spectrum data of the sulfonium salt synthesized in Synthesis Example 1-4;\n\n[0061] FIG. 5 is a diagram showing 1 H-NMR spectrum data of the sulfonium salt synthesized in Synthesis Example 1-5;\n\n5\n\nJan. 10, 2019\n\n[0062] FIG. 6 is a diagram showing 19 F-NMR spectrum data of the sulfonium salt synthesized in Synthesis Example 1-5;\n\n[0063] FIG. 7 is a diagram showing 1 H-NMR spectrum data of the sulfonium salt synthesized in Synthesis Example 1-6;\n\n[0064] FIG. 8 is a diagram showing 19 F-NMR spectrum data of the sulfonium salt synthesized in Synthesis Example 1-6;\n\n[0065] FIG. 9 is a diagram showing 1 H-NMR spectrum data of the sulfonium salt synthesized in Synthesis Example 1-7;\n\n[0066] FIG. 10 is a diagram showing 1 H-NMR spectrum data of the sulfonium salt synthesized in Synthesis Example 1-8.\n\n## DESCRIPTION OF EMBODIMENTS\n\n[0067] As described above, it has been desired to develop a resist composition that causes few defects and is excellent in lithography performance, having regulated acid diffusion, in photolithography using a high energy beam as a light source, and a resist patterning process using such a resist composition.\n\n[0068] To accomplish the object, the present inventors have diligently studied on the resist material having a sulfonium salt containing a specific partial structure in which the cation contains a hexafluoroalcohol unit, for example, used as a photo-acid generator, together with a polymer compound containing a specific repeating unit(s) used as a base polymer. The present inventors have conse› quently found that this resist material causes few defects and is excellent in lithography performance such as LER, LWR, and CDU, with the acid diffusion being regulated, and accordingly, is extremely effective for fine microprocessing; thereby bringing the present invention to completion.\n\n[0069] That is, the present invention is a resist composi› tion, comprising:\n\n[0070] (A) a sulfonium salt containing an anion and a cation, the cation comprising:\n\n- [0071] a partial structure shown by the following gen› eral formula (Al); and\n\n[0072] (B) a polymer compound containing a repeating unit shown by the following general formula (Bl),\n\nwherein R'a and R:11' each independently represent a fluoro› alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms; Rxa represents a hydrogen atom or an acid-liable group; Ra and Rb each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent hydrocarbon group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms optionally containing a hetero atom, Ra and Rb are optionally bonded with each other to form a ring together with the carbon atom to which Ra and Rb are bonded;A 1 a represents an ether bond or a thioether bond; L la represents a single bond or a divalent linking group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms option› ally containing a hetero atom; and * represents a bonding site;", + "recall": 0.9795918367346939, + "true_md": "Jan. 10, 2019 \n\n5 \n\nUS 2019/0010119 Al \n\n[0044] When the component (B) contains the repeating unit described above, it is possible to improve the exposure durability to electron beam in etching or inspection of the pattern. \n\n[0045] The present invention also provides a resist pat› terning process comprising the steps of: \n\n[0046] forming a resist film on a substrate to be processed by using the resist composition of the present invention, \n\n[0047] pattern-exposure to a high energy beam, and \n\n[0048] developing by using an alkaline developer to give a resist pattern. \n\n[0049] The resist patterning process using the inventive resist composition described above is capable of forming a pattern with higher resolution and decreased LER, etc. by being exposed. \n\n[0050] It is preferable to use an EUV or an electron beam as the high energy beam. \n\n[0051] The inventive resist patterning process is particu› larly useful for forming a finer pattern in such a way that an EUV or an electron beam is used. \n\n[0052] It is preferable to use a substrate the top surface of which is composed of a material containing chromium or silicon as the substrate to be processed. \n\n[0053] The inventive resist patterning process is particu› larly useful for patterning a substrate having a surface of material that is liable to occur pattern peel-off or pattern collapse. \n\n[0054] It is preferable to use a photomask blanks as the substrate to be processed. \n\n[0055] The inventive resist patterning process is capable of forming a pattern with higher resolution and decreased LER by exposure even in the case of using a substrate made from a material in which the top surface is liable to affect the resist pattern profile such as a photomask blanks. \n\n[0056] As described above, the inventive resist composi› tion, having a sulfonium salt containing a specific partial structure incorporated as a photo-acid generator, is a resist composition that causes few defects and is excellent in lithography performance such as LER, LWR, and CDU in microprocessing technologies, particularly lithography using an electron beam or an EUV. The inventive resist patterning process using the inventive resist composition described above is particularly effective for forming a fine pattern. \n\n[0057] FIG. 1 is a diagram showing $^{1}$H-NMR spectrum data of the sulfonium salt synthesized in Synthesis Example 1-3; \n\n[0058] FIG. 2 is a diagram showing $^{19}$F-NMR spectrum data of the sulfonium salt synthesized in Synthesis Example 1-3; \n\n[0059] FIG. 3 is a diagram showing $^{1}$H-NMR spectrum data of the sulfonium salt synthesized in Synthesis Example 1-4; \n\n[0060] FIG. 4 is a diagram showing $^{19}$F-NMR spectrum data of the sulfonium salt synthesized in Synthesis Example 1-4; \n\n[0061] FIG. 5 is a diagram showing $^{1}$H-NMR spectrum data of the sulfonium salt synthesized in Synthesis Example 1-5; \n\nwherein R’a and R:11’ each independently represent a fluoro› alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms; Rxa represents a hydrogen atom or an acid-liable group; Ra and Rb each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent hydrocarbon group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms optionally containing a hetero atom, Ra and Rb are optionally bonded with each other to form a ring together with the carbon atom to which Ra and Rb are bonded;A$^{1$\\_{a }$}$represents an ether bond or a thioether bond; L la represents a single bond or a divalent linking group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms option› ally containing a hetero atom; and * represents a bonding site; \n\n[0072] (B) a polymer compound containing a repeating unit shown by the following general formula (Bl), \n\n[0070] (A) a sulfonium salt containing an anion and a cation, the cation comprising: \n\n- [0071] a partial structure shown by the following gen› eral formula (Al); and \n\n[0069] That is, the present invention is a resist composi› tion, comprising: \n\n[0068] To accomplish the object, the present inventors have diligently studied on the resist material having a sulfonium salt containing a specific partial structure in which the cation contains a hexafluoroalcohol unit, for example, used as a photo-acid generator, together with a polymer compound containing a specific repeating unit(s) used as a base polymer. The present inventors have conse› quently found that this resist material causes few defects and is excellent in lithography performance such as LER, LWR, and CDU, with the acid diffusion being regulated, and accordingly, is extremely effective for fine microprocessing; thereby bringing the present invention to completion. \n\n[0067] As described above, it has been desired to develop a resist composition that causes few defects and is excellent in lithography performance, having regulated acid diffusion, in photolithography using a high energy beam as a light source, and a resist patterning process using such a resist composition. \n\n[0066] FIG. 10 is a diagram showing $^{1}$H-NMR spectrum data of the sulfonium salt synthesized in Synthesis Example 1-8. \n\n[0065] FIG. 9 is a diagram showing $^{1}$H-NMR spectrum data of the sulfonium salt synthesized in Synthesis Example 1-7; \n\n[0064] FIG. 8 is a diagram showing $^{19}$F-NMR spectrum data of the sulfonium salt synthesized in Synthesis Example 1-6; \n\n[0063] FIG. 7 is a diagram showing $^{1}$H-NMR spectrum data of the sulfonium salt synthesized in Synthesis Example 1-6; \n\n[0062] FIG. 6 is a diagram showing $^{19}$F-NMR spectrum data of the sulfonium salt synthesized in Synthesis Example 1-5; \n\n## DESCRIPTION OF EMBODIMENTS\n\n## Advantageous Effects of Invention\n\n## BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF DRAWINGS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9811721844321643, + "doc_id": "f2a3edbaec1089f1ebdaa548adbd51cca3fae33d32b4cde07fbd7d5c05bf4512", + "edit_distance": 0.020338983050847456, + "f1_score": 0.9926470588235295, + "meteor": 0.9932190754322084, + "precision": 0.9926470588235294, + "pred_md": "US 2021/0033970 Al\n\n-continued\n\n113\n\n-continued\n\n(2) EUV Lithography Test\n\n[0177] Each of the resist compositions in Tables 1 to 4 was spin coated on a silicon substrate having a 20-nm coating of silicon-containing spin-on hard mask SHB-A940 (Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd., silicon content 43 wt%) and prebaked on a hotplate at 105° C. for 60 seconds to form a resist film of 60 nm thick. Using an EUV scanner NXE3300 (ASML, NA 0.33, a 0.9/0.6, quadrupole illumination), the resist film was exposed to EUV through a mask bearing a hole pattern at a pitch 46 nm (on-wafer size) and +20% bias. The resist film was baked (PEB) on a hotplate at the temperature shown in Tables 1 to 4 for 60 seconds and developed in a 2.38 wt % TMAH aqueous solution for 30 seconds to form a hole pattern having a size of 23 nm in Examples 1 to 23, Examples 25 to 43, and Comparative Examples 1 to 6 or a dot pattern having a size of 23 nm in Example 24 and Comparative Example 7.\n\n[0178] The resist pattern was observed under CD-SEM (CG-5000, Hitachi High-Technologies Corp.). The exposure dose that provides a hole or dot pattern having a size of 23 nm is reported as sensitivity. The size of 50 holes or dots in that dose was measured, from which a size variation (3a) was computed and reported as CDU.\n\n[0179] The resist composition is shown in Tables 1 to 4 together with the sensitivity and CDU of EUV lithography.\n\nFeb.4,2021", + "recall": 0.9926470588235294, + "true_md": "Feb.4,2021 \n\n113 \n\nUS 2021/0033970 Al \n\n## (2) EUV Lithography Test\n\n[0177] Each of the resist compositions in Tables 1 to 4 was spin coated on a silicon substrate having a 20-nm coating of silicon-containing spin-on hard mask SHB-A940 (Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd., silicon content 43 wt%) and prebaked on a hotplate at 105° C. for 60 seconds to form a resist film of 60 nm thick. Using an EUV scanner NXE3300 (ASML, NA 0.33, a 0.9/0.6, quadrupole illumination), the resist film was exposed to EUV through a mask bearing a hole pattern at a pitch 46 nm (on-wafer size) and +20% bias. The resist film was baked (PEB) on a hotplate at the temperature shown in Tables 1 to 4 for 60 seconds and developed in a 2.38 wt % TMAH aqueous solution for 30 seconds to form a hole pattern having a size of 23 nm in Examples 1 to 23, Examples 25 to 43, and Comparative Examples 1 to 6 or a dot pattern having a size of 23 nm in Example 24 and Comparative Example 7. \n\n[0178] The resist pattern was observed under CD-SEM (CG-5000, Hitachi High-Technologies Corp.). The exposure dose that provides a hole or dot pattern having a size of 23 nm is reported as sensitivity. The size of 50 holes or dots in that dose was measured, from which a size variation (3a) was computed and reported as CDU. \n\n[0179] The resist composition is shown in Tables 1 to 4 together with the sensitivity and CDU of EUV lithography." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9884554771326653, + "doc_id": "fd32e99102b1b5f0b0d7e2b82a8403d8b866e70b1ac85b732ac8199c398164ef", + "edit_distance": 0.006309148264984227, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999989954485343, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "US 2012/0003590 Al\n\nJan. 5, 2012\n\n97\n\n[0426] In the present invention, a compound (PA) other than the compound capable of generating a compound repre› sented by formula (PA-1) can be also appropriately selected. For example, a compound that is an ionic compound and has a proton acceptor site in the cation moiety may be used. More specifically, examples of such a compound include a com› pound represented by the following formula (7):\n\n[0427] In the formula, A represents a sulfur atom or an iodine atom.\n\n[0428] mrepresents 1 or 2, nrepresents 1 or 2, provided that when A is a sulfur atom, m+n=3 and whenA is an iodine atom, m+n=2.\n\n[0429] R represents an aryl group.\n\n[0430] RN represents an aryl group substituted with a pro› ton acceptor functional group.\n\n[0431] x- represents a counter anion.\n\n[0432] Specific examples ofx- are the same as those ofx› in formula (ZI).\n\n[0433] Specific preferred examples of the aryl group of R and RN include a phenyl group.\n\n[0434] Specific examples of the proton acceptor functional group contained in RN are the same as those of the proton acceptor functional group described above in formula (PA-1 ).\n\n[0435] In the composition of the present invention, the ratio of the compound (PA) blended in the entire composition is preferably from 0.1 to 10 mass%, more preferably from 1 to 8 mass%, based on the entire solid content of the composi› tion.\n\n[0436] Other examples of the compound which can be used in the composition of the present invention include the com-", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "US 2012/0003590 Al \n\n97 \n\nJan. 5, 2012 \n\n[0426] In the present invention, a compound (PA) other than the compound capable of generating a compound repre› sented by formula (PA-1) can be also appropriately selected. For example, a compound that is an ionic compound and has a proton acceptor site in the cation moiety may be used. More specifically, examples of such a compound include a com› pound represented by the following formula (7): \n\n[0427] In the formula, A represents a sulfur atom or an iodine atom. \n\n[0428] mrepresents 1 or 2, nrepresents 1 or 2, provided that when A is a sulfur atom, m+n=3 and whenA is an iodine atom, m+n=2. \n\n[0429] R represents an aryl group. \n\n[0430] RN represents an aryl group substituted with a pro› ton acceptor functional group. \n\n[0431] x- represents a counter anion. \n\n[0432] Specific examples ofx- are the same as those ofx› in formula (ZI). \n\n[0433] Specific preferred examples of the aryl group of R and RN include a phenyl group. \n\n[0434] Specific examples of the proton acceptor functional group contained in RN are the same as those of the proton acceptor functional group described above in formula (PA-1 ). \n\n[0435] In the composition of the present invention, the ratio of the compound (PA) blended in the entire composition is preferably from 0.1 to 10 mass%, more preferably from 1 to 8 mass%, based on the entire solid content of the composi› tion. \n\n[0436] Other examples of the compound which can be used in the composition of the present invention include the com-" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7207868640274891, + "doc_id": "312df236e9de2bbe3c0d8e435e2388da1536ad8af0def7e382d86ab5f97d6549", + "edit_distance": 0.5139664804469274, + "f1_score": 0.9285714285714286, + "meteor": 0.9287528473536322, + "precision": 0.8666666666666667, + "pred_md": "- (51) Int. Cl.\n- (52) U.S. Cl.\n\nC0SF 220126\n\nC0SF 220120\n\nH0JL 211027\n\nC0SF 14118\n\nC0SF 16110\n\nC0SF 24100\n\nG03F 7120\n\nG03F 71039\n\nG03F 7132\n\n(2006.01)\n\n(2006.01)\n\n(2006.01)\n\n(2006.01)\n\n(2006.01)\n\n(2006.01)\n\n(2006.01)\n\n(2006.01)\n\n(2006.01)\n\nCPC ....... H0JL 2110273 (2013.01); H0JL 2110274 (2013.01)\n\n## (56) References Cited\n\n## U.S. PATENT DOCUMENTS\n\nUS 9,423,690 B2\n\nPage 2\n\n## FOREIGN PATENT DOCUMENTS\n\n## OTHER PUBLICATIONS\n\nWritten Opinion dated Nov. 12, 2013, issued by the International Searching Authority in counterpart International Application No. PCT/JP2013/072485.\n\nNotification of Reasons for Refusal from the Japanese Patent Office dated May 12, 2015 in a counterpart Japanese application No. 2013-054401.\n\nNotice of Submission of Opinion dated Jun. 10, 2016, issued by the Korean Intellectual Property Office in corresponding KR Applica› tion No. 10-2015-7004408.\n\n## * cited by examiner", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "US 9,423,690 B2 \n\nPage 2 \n\n- (52) U.S. Cl. CPC ....... H0JL 2110273 (2013.01); H0JL 2110274 (2013.01) \n\n## FOREIGN PATENT DOCUMENTS\n\n## OTHER PUBLICATIONS\n\nWritten Opinion dated Nov. 12, 2013, issued by the International Searching Authority in counterpart International Application No. PCT/JP2013/072485. \n\nNotification of Reasons for Refusal from the Japanese Patent Office dated May 12, 2015 in a counterpart Japanese application No. 2013-054401. \n\nNotice of Submission of Opinion dated Jun. 10, 2016, issued by the Korean Intellectual Property Office in corresponding KR Applica› tion No. 10-2015-7004408. \n\n* cited by examiner \n\n## (56) References Cited\n\n- (51) Int. Cl. \n\n## U.S. PATENT DOCUMENTS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5923033072023249, + "doc_id": "198c77645d30eb5889ce01d7778364748b3fe026904e9b1e989f1b50c3b70f99", + "edit_distance": 0.4, + "f1_score": 0.8888888888888888, + "meteor": 0.9498856707317073, + "precision": 0.8, + "pred_md": "US 2012/0003590 Al\n\nJan. 5, 2012\n\nP-25\n\nP-26\n\n51", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "US 2012/0003590 Al \n\n51 \n\nJan. 5, 2012" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "f2feb6317caaa0c26547a9543c8b802d43791c6e51f4c2e22439849fff66de04", + "edit_distance": 0.7647058823529411, + "f1_score": 0.5555555555555556, + "meteor": 0.7193548387096775, + "precision": 0.38461538461538464, + "pred_md": "219\n\nUS 9,423,690 B2\n\n'\"'\n\nrn\n\n'\"·'' \"\n\nw\n\n30\n\n220\n\n-continued", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "220 \n\nUS 9,423,690 B2 \n\n-continued" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7186082239261684, + "doc_id": "3b1524179e4b7c5660f1ae8b0361c5adc0c5b6d4c04773cd3b0896dcb7e0da3d", + "edit_distance": 0.25, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9736328125, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "US 2012/0003590 Al\n\nJan. 5, 2012\n\n21", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "US 2012/0003590 Al \n\n21 \n\nJan. 5, 2012" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9431256546740322, + "doc_id": "3b229c5e7ecbc5318f507a117dfe709a28ea3f9644325c490de2e47d74108e5c", + "edit_distance": 0.1421889616463985, + "f1_score": 0.9620253164556962, + "meteor": 0.9488068883635012, + "precision": 0.9432624113475178, + "pred_md": "US 9,423,690 B2\n\n147\n\np\\_ 91\n\n6 I\n\n5\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\nF*F F F 25\n\n30\n\n35\n\n40\n\n[2] Resin (A') whose solubility in a developer containing an organic solvent is decreased by the action of an acid, which is different from the resin (A)\n\nThe electron beam-sensitive or extreme ultraviolet ray› sensitive resin composition of the present invention may preferably contain a resin whose solubility in a developer containing an organic solvent is decreased by the action of 45 an acid (hereinafter also referred to as a \"resin (A')\"), which is different from the resin (A).\n\nThe resin (A') is a resin whose polar group has a structure protected by a group capable of decomposing and leaving by the action of an acid (hereinafter also referred to as an 50 \"acid-decomposable group\").\n\nThe resin (A') may preferably have a repeating unit having an acid-decomposable group.\n\nExamples of a polar group may include a carboxyl group, a phenolic hydroxyl group, an alcoholic hydroxyl group, a sulfonate group, and thiol group.\n\nExamples of the group capable ofleaving by the action of an acid may include ----C(R 36 )(R 37 )(R 38 ), ----C(R 36 )(R 37 ) (OR 39 ), -C(=O)---0-C(R 36 )(R 37 )(R 38 ), ----C(R 01 )(R 02 ) (OR39), -CCR01)CR02)----C(=O)---O----C(R36)(R37)(R3g) and the like.\n\nIn the Formula, R 36 to R 39 each independently represent an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group or an alkenyl group. R 36 and R 37 may be bonded to each other to form a ring. R 01 and R 02 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group or an alkenyl group.\n\nIn the case where the compound (B) capable of generating an acid upon irradiation with an electron beam or extreme ultraviolet is a form of being inserted in a part of the polymer, it may be insterted in a part of the above-described acid-decomposable resin or the resin different from the acid-decomposable resin.\n\n55\n\n60\n\n65\n\n148\n\nThe resin (A') may be synthesized by a typical method (for example, radical polymerization).\n\nThe weight average molecular weight of the resin (A') in the present invention is preferably 1,000 to 200,000, more preferably 2,000 to 20,000, still more preferably 3,000 to 15,000, and particularly preferably 3,000 to 10,000, in terms of polystyrene by the GPC method. By setting the weight average molecular weight within 1,000 to 200,000, it is possible to prevent deterioration in the heat resistance or dry etching resistance and also prevent the film-forming prop› erty from deteriorating due to impaired developability or increased viscosity.\n\nThe polydispersity (molecular weight distribution) is usu› ally in a range of 1.0 to 3.0, preferably 1.0 to 2.6, more preferably 1.0 to 2.0, and particularly preferably 1.4 to 1.7. The smaller the molecular weight distribution is, the better the resolution and resist shape are, and the smoother the side wall of the resist pattern is, and thus roughness is excellent.\n\nThe resin (A') may be used in combination of a plurality thereof.\n\nThe electron beam-sensitive or extreme ultraviolet ray› sensitive resin composition of the present invention may or may not contain the resin (A'), but in the case of containing it, the adding ratio of the resin (A') in the entire composition is usually 1 % by mass to 50% by mass, preferably 1 % by mass to 30% by mass, and particularly preferably 1 % by mass to 15% by mass, based on the total solid of the electron beam-sensitive or extreme ultraviolet ray-sensitive resin composition.\n\nExamples of the resin (A') may include resins described in paragraphs 0059 to 0169 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-217884 and those described in para› graphs 0214 to 0594 of Japanese Patent Application Laid› Open No. 2011-217048.\n\n[3] (B) Compound capable of generating an acid upon irradiation with an electron beam-sensitive or extreme ultra› violet ray\n\nThe composition in the present invention may preferably contain (B) a compound capable of generating an acid upon irradiation with an electron beam-sensitive or extreme ultra› violet ray (hereinafter, also referred to as an \"acid generator\" or a \"photo-acid generator\").\n\nIf the acid generator is known, it is not particularly limited. However, it may preferably be a compound capable of generating at least anyone of organic acids such as a sulphonic acid, a bis(alkylsulponyl)imid, or a tris(alkylsulphonyl)methid upon irradiation with an electron beam or extreme ultraviolet.\n\nThe compound (B) capable of generating an acid upon irradiation with an electron beam or extreme ultraviolet may have a form of the low molecular weight compound or a form of being inserted in a part of the polymer. Further, it may be used in combination of a form of the low molecular weight compound or a form of being inserted in a part of the polymer.\n\nIn the case where the compound (B) capable of generating an acid upon irradiation with an electron beam or extreme ultraviolet is a form of the low molecular weight compound, the molecular weight thereof may preferably be 3,000 or less, more preferably be 2,000 or less, and still more preferably be 1000 or less.", + "recall": 0.981549815498155, + "true_md": "147 \n\nUS 9,423,690 B2 \n\n148 \n\n-continued Q \n\n[2] Resin (A’) whose solubility in a developer containing an organic solvent is decreased by the action of an acid, 40 which is different from the resin (A) \n\nThe electron beam-sensitive or extreme ultraviolet ray› sensitive resin composition of the present invention may preferably contain a resin whose solubility in a developer containing an organic solvent is decreased by the action of an acid (hereinafter also referred to as a \"resin (A’)\"), which is different from the resin (A). \n\nThe resin (A’) is a resin whose polar group has a structure protected by a group capable of decomposing and leaving by the action of an acid (hereinafter also referred to as an 50 \"acid-decomposable group\"). \n\nThe resin (A’) may preferably have a repeating unit having an acid-decomposable group. \n\nExamples of a polar group may include a carboxyl group, a phenolic hydroxyl group, an alcoholic hydroxyl group, a 55 sulfonate group, and thiol group. \n\nExamples of the group capable ofleaving by the action of an acid may include ----C(R 36 )(R 37 )(R 38 ), ----C(R 36 )(R 37 ) (OR 39 ), -C(=O)---0-C(R 36 )(R 37 )(R 38 ), ----C(R 01 )(R 02 ) (OR39), -CCR01)CR02)----C(=O)---O----C(R36)(R37)(R3g) and the like. \n\nIn the Formula, R 36 to R 39 each independently represent an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group or an alkenyl group. R 36 and R 37 may be bonded to each other to form a ring. R 01 and R 02 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group or an alkenyl group. \n\nThe resin (A’) may be synthesized by a typical method (for example, radical polymerization). \n\nThe weight average molecular weight of the resin (A’) in the present invention is preferably 1,000 to 200,000, more preferably 2,000 to 20,000, still more preferably 3,000 to 15,000, and particularly preferably 3,000 to 10,000, in terms of polystyrene by the GPC method. By setting the weight average molecular weight within 1,000 to 200,000, it is possible to prevent deterioration in the heat resistance or dry etching resistance and also prevent the film-forming prop› erty from deteriorating due to impaired developability or increased viscosity. \n\nThe polydispersity (molecular weight distribution) is usu› ally in a range of 1.0 to 3.0, preferably 1.0 to 2.6, more preferably 1.0 to 2.0, and particularly preferably 1.4 to 1.7. The smaller the molecular weight distribution is, the better the resolution and resist shape are, and the smoother the side wall of the resist pattern is, and thus roughness is excellent. \n\nThe resin (A’) may be used in combination of a plurality thereof. \n\nThe electron beam-sensitive or extreme ultraviolet ray› sensitive resin composition of the present invention may or may not contain the resin (A’), but in the case of containing it, the adding ratio of the resin (A’) in the entire composition is usually 1 % by mass to 50% by mass, preferably 1 % by mass to 30% by mass, and particularly preferably 1 % by mass to 15% by mass, based on the total solid of the electron beam-sensitive or extreme ultraviolet ray-sensitive resin composition. \n\nExamples of the resin (A’) may include resins described in paragraphs 0059 to 0169 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-217884 and those described in para› graphs 0214 to 0594 of Japanese Patent Application Laid› Open No. 2011-217048. \n\n[3] (B) Compound capable of generating an acid upon irradiation with an electron beam-sensitive or extreme ultra› violet ray \n\nThe composition in the present invention may preferably contain (B) a compound capable of generating an acid upon irradiation with an electron beam-sensitive or extreme ultra› violet ray (hereinafter, also referred to as an \"acid generator\" or a \"photo-acid generator\"). \n\nIf the acid generator is known, it is not particularly limited. However, it may preferably be a compound capable of generating at least anyone of organic acids such as a sulphonic acid, a bis(alkylsulponyl)imid, or a tris(alkylsul- phonyl)methid upon irradiation with an electron beam or extreme ultraviolet. \n\nThe compound (B) capable of generating an acid upon irradiation with an electron beam or extreme ultraviolet may have a form of the low molecular weight compound or a form of being inserted in a part of the polymer. Further, it may be used in combination of a form of the low molecular weight compound or a form of being inserted in a part of the polymer. \n\nIn the case where the compound (B) capable of generating an acid upon irradiation with an electron beam or extreme ultraviolet is a form of the low molecular weight compound, the molecular weight thereof may preferably be 3,000 or less, more preferably be 2,000 or less, and still more preferably be 1000 or less. \n\nIn the case where the compound (B) capable of generating an acid upon irradiation with an electron beam or extreme ultraviolet is a form of being inserted in a part of the polymer, it may be insterted in a part of the above-described acid-decomposable resin or the resin different from the acid-decomposable resin." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "daba0bd11335b77577867db9886b8a325504e10b41641dadb824abe02b95b9be", + "edit_distance": 0.7647058823529411, + "f1_score": 0.47619047619047616, + "meteor": 0.7193548387096775, + "precision": 0.3125, + "pred_md": "75\n\n76\n\n-continued\n\n-continued\n\nUS 9,423,690 B2\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n60\n\n65", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "76 \n\n75 \n\nUS 9,423,690 B2" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.15989214998944032, + "doc_id": "2b97e22fac5c5327eff6f2980ae6a31963472f6bcdc83ba2d4f32a300effaadc", + "edit_distance": 0.6666666666666666, + "f1_score": 0.5, + "meteor": 0.6944444444444445, + "precision": 0.3333333333333333, + "pred_md": "197\n\nUS 9,423,690 B2\n\n10\n\n15\n\n25\n\n50\n\n55\n\n60\n\n65\n\n198\n\n-continued\n\n(PA-50)\n\nv\n\nvV", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "197 \n\nUS 9,423,690 B2 \n\n198 \n\n-continued \n\n-continued" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8191523575334896, + "doc_id": "2d9c6e76ee558823759692556200b4cf9bfcac8e75091c6a90c11000ff7bbff0", + "edit_distance": 0.3698630136986301, + "f1_score": 0.966966966966967, + "meteor": 0.8516503494040499, + "precision": 0.9757575757575757, + "pred_md": "US 20190010119Al\n\nUS 20190010119Al\n\n## c19) United States c12) Patent Application Publication SUZUKI et al.\n\n## (54) RESIST COMPOSITION AND RESIST PATTERNING PROCESS\n\n- (71) Applicant:\n\nSHIN-ETSU CHEMICAL CO., LTD., Tokyo (JP)\n\n- (72) Inventors:\n\nTakahiro SUZUKI, Joetsu-shi (JP); Daisuke DOMON, Joetsu-shi (JP); Masaaki KOTAKE, Joetsu-shi (JP); Keiichi MASUNAGA, Joetsu-shi (JP); Satoshi WATANABE, Joetsu-shi (JP)\n\n- (73) Assignee:\n\nSHIN-ETSU CHEMICAL CO., LTD., Tokyo (JP)\n\n- (21) Appl. No.:\n\n16/012,124\n\n- (22) Filed:\n\nJun. 19, 2018\n\n## (30) Foreign Application Priority Data\n\n- (51) Int. Cl.\n\nJul. 4, 2017 (JP) ................................. 2017-131534\n\n## Publication Classification\n\nC07C 309/42\n\nC07C 309125\n\nC07C 309/29\n\nC07C 309/35\n\nC07C 309/38\n\nC07C 309/39\n\nC07C 309/44\n\nC07C 309/59\n\nC07C 323166\n\nG03F 71004\n\nG03F 71038\n\nG03F 71039\n\n(2006.01)\n\n(2006.01)\n\n(2006.01)\n\n(2006.01)\n\n(2006.01)\n\n(2006.01)\n\n(2006.01)\n\n(2006.01)\n\n(2006.01)\n\n(2006.01)\n\n(2006.01)\n\n(2006.01)\n\n- c10)\n\nPub. No.: US 2019/0010119 Al\n\n- (43) Pub. Date:\n\nJan. 10, 2019\n\n- (52) U.S. Cl.\n\nCPC .......... C07C 309/42 (2013.01); C07C 309125 (2013.01); C07C 309/29 (2013.01); C07C 309/35 (2013.01); C07C 309/38 (2013.01); G03F 710397 (2013.01); C07C 309/44 (2013.01); C07C 309/59 (2013.01); C07C 323166 (2013.01); G03F 710045 (2013.01); G03F 710382 (2013.01); C07C 309/39 (2013.01)\n\n## (57) ABSTRACT\n\nThe present invention provides a resist composition, includ› ing: (A) a sulfonium salt containing an anion and a cation, the cation including a partial structure shown by the follow› ing general formula (Al); and (B) a polymer compound containing a repeating unit shown by the following general formula (Bl). The present invention provides a resist com› position that causes few defects and is excellent in lithog› raphy performance, having regulated acid diffusion, in pho› tolithography using a high energy beam as a light source, and a resist patterning process using this resist composition.", + "recall": 0.9583333333333334, + "true_md": "1111111111111111 IIIIII IIIII 111111111111111 11111 1111111111 1111111111 111111111111111 11111111 US 20190010119Al \n\n# c19) United States c12) Patent Application Publication\n\n# SUZUKI et al.\n\n# c10) Pub. No.: US 2019/0010119 Al\n\n# (43) Pub. Date: Jan. 10, 2019\n\n# (54) RESIST COMPOSITION AND RESIST PATTERNING PROCESS\n\n- (71) Applicant: SHIN-ETSU CHEMICAL CO., LTD., Tokyo (JP) \n\n- (72) Inventors: Takahiro SUZUKI, Joetsu-shi (JP); Daisuke DOMON, Joetsu-shi (JP); Masaaki KOTAKE, Joetsu-shi (JP); Keiichi MASUNAGA, Joetsu-shi (JP); Satoshi WATANABE, Joetsu-shi (JP) \n\n- (73) Assignee: SHIN-ETSU CHEMICAL CO., LTD., Tokyo (JP) \n\n- (21) Appl. No.: 16/012,124 \n\n- (22) Filed: Jun. 19, 2018 \n\n- (51) Int. Cl. \n\n- (52) U.S. Cl. CPC .......... C07C 309/42 (2013.01); C07C 309125 (2013.01); C07C 309/29 (2013.01); C07C 309/35 (2013.01); C07C 309/38 (2013.01); G03F 710397 (2013.01); C07C 309/44 (2013.01); C07C 309/59 (2013.01); C07C 323166 (2013.01); G03F 710045 (2013.01); G03F 710382 (2013.01); C07C 309/39 (2013.01) \n\n## (57) ABSTRACT\n\n## (30) Foreign Application Priority Data\n\n## Publication Classification\n\nThe present invention provides a resist composition, includ› ing: (A) a sulfonium salt containing an anion and a cation, the cation including a partial structure shown by the follow› ing general formula (Al); and (B) a polymer compound containing a repeating unit shown by the following general formula (Bl). The present invention provides a resist com› position that causes few defects and is excellent in lithog› raphy performance, having regulated acid diffusion, in pho› tolithography using a high energy beam as a light source, and a resist patterning process using this resist composition. \n\nJul. 4, 2017 (JP) ................................. 2017-131534" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7826417123310867, + "doc_id": "8aaa11a0a88d06eb78b9135b4fa8b2c57c2ee293eb5e0bb85e1d9ad930e398a3", + "edit_distance": 0.2980769230769231, + "f1_score": 0.9130434782608695, + "meteor": 0.9610385047451367, + "precision": 0.8571428571428571, + "pred_md": "## UNITED STATES PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE CERTIFICATE OF CORRECTION\n\nPATENT NO.\n\n: 6,482,565 Bl\n\nDATED\n\n: November 19, 2002\n\nINVENTOR(S)\n\n: Jae Chang et al.\n\nPage 3 of 5\n\nIt is certified that error appears in the above-identified patent and that said Letters Patent is hereby corrected as shown below:\n\n## Column 5 (cont'd),\n\nLines 20-59, please replace Reaction Scheme 1 with the following Reaction Scheme 1:\n\n## Column 7,\n\nLine 26, the phrase \"The procedure according to Example I was repeated\" should read --The procedure according to Example 1 was repeated--.\n\n## Column 10,\n\nLines 31-34, the paragraph \"The procedure according to Example 7 (Step 2) was repeated but using the monomer of Chemical Formula Id instead of the monomer of Chemical Formula le, to obtain the polymer of Chemical Formula 11.\" should read --The procedure according to Example 9 (Step 2) was repeated but using the monomer of Chemical Formula ld instead of the monomer of Chemical Formula le, to obtain the polymer of Chemical Formula 11 --.", + "recall": 0.9767441860465116, + "true_md": "It is certified that error appears in the above-identified patent and that said Letters Patent is hereby corrected as shown below: \n\nColumn 5 (cont’d), \n\nLines 20-59, please replace Reaction Scheme 1 with the following Reaction Scheme 1: \n\nPage 3 of 5 \n\nLine 26, the phrase \"The procedure according to Example I was repeated\" should read -- The procedure according to Example 1 was repeated--. \n\nColumn 10, \n\nLines 31-34, the paragraph \"The procedure according to Example 7 (Step 2) was repeated but using the monomer of Chemical Formula Id instead of the monomer of Chemical Formula le, to obtain the polymer of Chemical Formula 11.\" should read -- The procedure according to Example 9 (Step 2) was repeated but using the monomer of Chemical Formula ld instead of the monomer of Chemical Formula le, to obtain the polymer of Chemical Formula 11 --. \n\nColumn 7, \n\n## UNITED STATES PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE CERTIFICATE OF CORRECTION" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "ee505c6a311a168c7e2a4d2f393b0183f7270b0b8b8a1d7cd07b9fad677f0c9d", + "edit_distance": 0.7894736842105263, + "f1_score": 0.5, + "meteor": 0.7740169238427078, + "precision": 0.3333333333333333, + "pred_md": "47\n\n48\n\n-continued\n\n-continued\n\nUS 7,344,821 B2\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n60\n\n65", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "48 \n\nUS 7,344,821 B2 \n\n47 \n\n-continued \n\n-continued" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8132882808488929, + "doc_id": "6a9e095d4fec6f93a0476ac7b2b42142a3661ec2952eb8c55c1f8e10acd60d49", + "edit_distance": 0.75, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9921875, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "US 2019/0010119 Al\n\nJan. 10, 2019\n\n20", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Jan. 10, 2019 \n\n20 \n\nUS 2019/0010119 Al" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6493358309501979, + "doc_id": "6cd9c963dc1698954af54ea15b6f914df7d3af74e80c59b245a1eae10b334c5b", + "edit_distance": 0.3333333333333333, + "f1_score": 0.9411764705882353, + "meteor": 0.9616126543209877, + "precision": 0.8888888888888888, + "pred_md": "US 2012/0003590 Al\n\nJan. 5, 2012\n\n24\n\n-continued", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "US 2012/0003590 Al \n\n24 \n\nJan. 5, 2012" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7186082239261684, + "doc_id": "cb7ebdb4ceaf83caf0c11848dcd84f30d04fe494f794333373ce72ff81ee7d0a", + "edit_distance": 0.25, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9736328125, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "US 2012/0003590 Al\n\nJan. 5, 2012\n\n54", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "US 2012/0003590 Al \n\n54 \n\nJan. 5, 2012" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8600551563736076, + "doc_id": "9b654fe39c0d8a5b07434f1afe8d322a6a2555901e6c7664e1ecd54430ca2c13", + "edit_distance": 0.15, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9314558873532411, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Patent Application Publication\n\nJan. 10, 2019 Sheet 10 of 10\n\nUS 2019/0010119 Al\n\nFIG. 10\n\nFIG. 10", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Patent Application Publication \n\nJan. 10, 2019 Sheet 10 of 10 \n\nUS 2019/0010119 Al \n\nFIG. 10" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7186082239261684, + "doc_id": "6b981a958f7dd146671ab2c8969b8834f00674fecbe99455e0cb08000f02e419", + "edit_distance": 0.25, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9736328125, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "US 2012/0003590 Al\n\nJan. 5, 2012\n\n94", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "US 2012/0003590 Al \n\n94 \n\nJan. 5, 2012" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.934246965436067, + "doc_id": "942832d3e21de55dc1c6f6ef86a58e36caa2c650181840e2c9685d6f8ef01458", + "edit_distance": 0.41043478260869565, + "f1_score": 0.9823874755381605, + "meteor": 0.9186926308834348, + "precision": 0.9920948616600791, + "pred_md": "US 2019/0010119 Al\n\nbranched, or cyclic alkoxy group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms optionally substituted with a halogen atom; A 1 represents a single bond or a linear, branched, or cyclic alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms optionally having an ether bond between a carbon-carbon bond thereof; \"a\" is an integer satisfying Osas5+2w-b; and \"b\" is an integer of 1 to 3.\n\n[0020] The inventive resist composition is a resist com› position that causes few defects and is excellent in lithog› raphy performance, having regulated acid diffusion, in pho› tolithography using a high energy beam as a light source.\n\n[0021] It is preferable that the component (A) be shown by the following general formula (A2),\n\nwherein R1, R 2 , and R 3 each independently represent any of a hydrogen atom, the partial structure shown by the general formula (Al), a linear, branched, or cyclic monovalent hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms optionally containing a hetero atom, and a direct bond with the adjacent benzene ring; \"p\", \"q\", and \"r\" each independently represent an integer of Oto 5; and when \"p\", \"q\", or \"r\" represents 2 or more, a plurality ofR 1 s, R 2 s, or R 3 s corresponding thereto are either the same or different; when p+q+r is 2 or more, a plurality ofR 1 s, R 2 s, or R 3 s are optionally bonded with each other to form a ring together with carbon atoms of the benzene ring to which they are bonded, and R 1 and R 2 , R 1 and R 3 , or R 2 and R 3 are optionally bonded with each other to form a ring together with the two benzene rings to which they are bonded and the sulfur atom in the formula; with the proviso that at least one of R 1 , R 2 , and R 3 is the partial structure shown by the general formula (Al), with the * in the general formula (Al) being a bonding site with the benzene ring in this case; and zrepresents a monovalent amon.\n\n[0022] The inventive resist composition is particularly excellent in lithography performance when the component (A) is shown by the general formula (A2) as described above.\n\n[0023] It is preferable that the component (A) be a sulfo› nium salt in which R'a and w1' each represent a trifluorom› ethyl group, and Ra and R 6 each represent a hydrogen atom.\n\n[0024] When the component (A) has the group(s) described above, the component (A) is easily synthesized and makes it possible to markedly improve the lithography performance such as LER and CDU.\n\n[0025] It is preferable that the component (A) be a sulfo› nium salt in which L la is a single bond.\n\n[0026] When L1a of the component (A) is a single bond as described above, the component (A) is easily synthesized. Additionally, the shorter chain portion regulates the mobility of the sulfonium salt in the resist film to improve the effect of regulating acid diffusion as a result.\n\n3\n\nJan. 10, 2019\n\n[0027] It is preferable that the component (A) be a sulfo› nium salt in which A la is an ether bond.\n\n[0028] WhenA 1 a of the component (A) is an ether bond as described above, it is possible to improve the lithography performance moreover.\n\n[0029] It is preferable that the component (A) be a sulfo› nium salt in which Rxa is a hydrogen atom or a methoxym› ethyl group.\n\n[0030] When Rxa of the component (A) is a hydrogen atom or a methoxymethyl group as described above, the component (A) is easily synthesized and is excellent in miscibility. Additionally, the acid diffusion is regulated due to the hydroxy group or the ether bonds, which makes it possible to improve the lithography performance much further.\n\n[0031] It is preferable that the component (A) be a sulfo› nium salt in which the anion is a sulfonate anion.\n\n[0032] The inventive resist composition is particularly excellent in lithography performance when the anion of the component (A) is a sulfonate anion.\n\n[0033] It is preferable that the component (A) be a sulfo› nium salt in which the anion is an arylsulfonate anion or an alkanesulfonate anion.\n\n[0034] When the anion of the component (A) is an aryl› sulfonate anion or an alkanesulfonate anion as described above, the composition generates an acid with appropriate acidity.\n\n[0035] It is preferable that the resist composition be a chemically amplified positive resist composition, and the component (B) further contain a repeating unit decompos› able by action of an acid to increase solubility of the component (B) into an alkaline developer in addition to the repeating unit (Bl).\n\n[0036] When the component (B) contains the repeating unit described above, the inventive resist composition shows better solubility to an alkaline developer in preparation thereof as a chemically amplified positive resist composi› tion.\n\n[0037] It is preferable that the repeating unit decompos› able by action of an acid to increase solubility of the component (B) into an alkaline developer be shown by the following general formula (B2),\n\nwherein RA has the same meaning as defined above; each R 12 independently represents a halogen atom, a linear, branched, or cyclic acyloxy group having 2 to 8 carbon atoms optionally substituted with a halogen atom, a linear, branched, or cyclic alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms optionally substituted with a halogen atom, or a linear, branched, or cyclic alkoxy group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms", + "recall": 0.9728682170542635, + "true_md": "Jan. 10, 2019 \n\n3 \n\nUS 2019/0010119 Al \n\nbranched, or cyclic alkoxy group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms optionally substituted with a halogen atom; A 1 represents a single bond or a linear, branched, or cyclic alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms optionally having an ether bond between a carbon-carbon bond thereof; \"a\" is an integer satisfying Osas5+2w-b; and \"b\" is an integer of 1 to 3. \n\n[0020] The inventive resist composition is a resist com› position that causes few defects and is excellent in lithog› raphy performance, having regulated acid diffusion, in pho› tolithography using a high energy beam as a light source. \n\n[0021] It is preferable that the component (A) be shown by the following general formula (A2), \n\nwherein R1, R 2 , and R 3 each independently represent any of a hydrogen atom, the partial structure shown by the general formula (Al), a linear, branched, or cyclic monovalent hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms optionally containing a hetero atom, and a direct bond with the adjacent benzene ring; \"p\", \"q\", and \"r\" each independently represent an integer of Oto 5; and when \"p\", \"q\", or \"r\" represents 2 or more, a plurality ofR$^{1}$s, R$^{2}$s, or R$^{3}$s corresponding thereto are either the same or different; when p+q+r is 2 or more, a plurality ofR$^{1}$s, R$^{2}$s, or R$^{3}$s are optionally bonded with each other to form a ring together with carbon atoms of the benzene ring to which they are bonded, and R 1 and R 2 , R 1 and R 3 , or R 2 and R 3 are optionally bonded with each other to form a ring together with the two benzene rings to which they are bonded and the sulfur atom in the formula; with the proviso that at least one of R 1 , R 2 , and R 3 is the partial structure shown by the general formula (Al), with the * in the general formula (Al) being a bonding site with the benzene ring in this case; and z- represents a monovalent amon. \n\n[0022] The inventive resist composition is particularly excellent in lithography performance when the component (A) is shown by the general formula (A2) as described above. \n\n[0023] It is preferable that the component (A) be a sulfo› nium salt in which R’a and w1’ each represent a trifluorom› ethyl group, and Ra and R $^{6 }$each represent a hydrogen atom. \n\n[0024] When the component (A) has the group(s) described above, the component (A) is easily synthesized and makes it possible to markedly improve the lithography performance such as LER and CDU. \n\n[0025] It is preferable that the component (A) be a sulfo› nium salt in which L la is a single bond. \n\n[0026] When L1a of the component (A) is a single bond as described above, the component (A) is easily synthesized. Additionally, the shorter chain portion regulates the mobility of the sulfonium salt in the resist film to improve the effect of regulating acid diffusion as a result. \n\nwherein RA has the same meaning as defined above; each R 12 independently represents a halogen atom, a linear, branched, or cyclic acyloxy group having 2 to 8 carbon atoms optionally substituted with a halogen atom, a linear, branched, or cyclic alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms optionally substituted with a halogen atom, or a linear, branched, or cyclic alkoxy group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms \n\n[0037] It is preferable that the repeating unit decompos› able by action of an acid to increase solubility of the component (B) into an alkaline developer be shown by the following general formula (B2), \n\n[0036] When the component (B) contains the repeating unit described above, the inventive resist composition shows better solubility to an alkaline developer in preparation thereof as a chemically amplified positive resist composi› tion. \n\n[0035] It is preferable that the resist composition be a chemically amplified positive resist composition, and the component (B) further contain a repeating unit decompos› able by action of an acid to increase solubility of the component (B) into an alkaline developer in addition to the repeating unit (Bl). \n\n[0034] When the anion of the component (A) is an aryl› sulfonate anion or an alkanesulfonate anion as described above, the composition generates an acid with appropriate acidity. \n\n[0033] It is preferable that the component (A) be a sulfo› nium salt in which the anion is an arylsulfonate anion or an alkanesulfonate anion. \n\n[0032] The inventive resist composition is particularly excellent in lithography performance when the anion of the component (A) is a sulfonate anion. \n\n[0031] It is preferable that the component (A) be a sulfo› nium salt in which the anion is a sulfonate anion. \n\n[0030] When Rxa of the component (A) is a hydrogen atom or a methoxymethyl group as described above, the component (A) is easily synthesized and is excellent in miscibility. Additionally, the acid diffusion is regulated due to the hydroxy group or the ether bonds, which makes it possible to improve the lithography performance much further. \n\n[0029] It is preferable that the component (A) be a sulfo› nium salt in which Rxa is a hydrogen atom or a methoxym› ethyl group. \n\n[0028] WhenA 1$_{a }$ of the component (A) is an ether bond as described above, it is possible to improve the lithography performance moreover. \n\n[0027] It is preferable that the component (A) be a sulfo› nium salt in which A la is an ether bond." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6951471371350407, + "doc_id": "a7b69d8b7e203ba08537cdea8b5813b450c9a5b05d4e48fad3bbefe1d504e4bd", + "edit_distance": 0.9001426533523538, + "f1_score": 0.915989159891599, + "meteor": 0.570902178649563, + "precision": 0.8941798941798942, + "pred_md": "43\n\n-continued\n\nUS 7,851,130 B2\n\n15\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\nIn the above specific examples, tBu means at-butyl group. The content of an acid-decomposable group is expressed by B/(B+S), taking the number of the acid-decomposable groups in the resin as (B), and the number of alkali-soluble 40 groups not protected with acid-eliminable groups as (S). The content is preferably from 0.01 to 0.7, more preferably from 0.05 to 0.50, and still more preferably from 0.05 to 0.40.\n\nWhen the positive photosensitive composition in the inven› tion is irradiated withArF excimer laser beams, it is preferred that resin (C) is resin having a monocyclic or polycyclic alicyclic hydrocarbon structure and capable of decomposing by the action of an acid to thereby increase the solubility in an alkali developing solution.\n\nAs the resin having a monocyclic or polycyclic alicyclic hydrocarbon structure and capable of decomposing by the action of an acid to thereby increase the solubility in an alkali developing solution (hereinafter also referred to as \"alicyclic hydrocarbon acid-decomposable resin\"), resin containing at least one repeating unit selected from the group consisting of a repeating unit having a partial structure containing alicyclic hydrocarbon represented by any of the following formulae (pl) to (p V), and a repeating unit represented by the following formula (II-AB) is preferred.\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n60\n\n65\n\n44\n\n-continued\n\nIn formulae (pl) to (pV), R 11 represents a methyl group, an ethyl group, ann-propyl group, anisopropyl group, ann-butyl group, an isobutyl group, or a sec-butyl group; and Z repre› sents an atomic group necessary to form a cycloalkyl group together with a carbon atom.\n\nR12 , R13 , R 14 , R15 and R 16 each represents a straight chain or branched alky 1 group or cycloalky 1 group having from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, provided that at least one of R 12 to R 14 , or either R 15 or R 16 represents a cycloalkyl group.\n\nR17 , R18 , R19 , R20 and R21 each represents a hydrogen atom, a straight chain or branched alkyl group or cycloalkyl group having from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, provided that at least one ofR 17 to R21 represents a cycloalkyl group, and either R 19 or R21 represents a straight chain or branched alkyl group or cycloalkyl group having from 1 to 4 carbon atoms.\n\nR22 , R23 , R24 and R 25 each represents a hydrogen atom, a straight chain or branched alkyl group or cycloalkyl group having from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, provided that at least one of R22 to R 25 represents a cycloalkyl group, and R 23 and R 24 may by bonded to each other to form a ring.\n\nIn formula (II-AB), R 11 ' and R 12 ' each represents a hydro› gen atom, a cyano group, a halogen atom, or an alkyl group.\n\nZ' contains bonded two carbon atoms (C----C) and represents an atomic group to form an alicyclic structure.\n\nFormula (II-AB) is more preferably represented by the following formula (II-AB!) or (II-AB2).", + "recall": 0.9388888888888889, + "true_md": "44 \n\nUS 7,851,130 B2 \n\n43 \n\n-continued \n\nIn formulae (pl) to (pV), R$_{11 }$represents a methyl group, an ethyl group, ann-propyl group, anisopropyl group, ann-butyl group, an isobutyl group, or a sec-butyl group; and Z repre› sents an atomic group necessary to form a cycloalkyl group together with a carbon atom. \n\nR$_{12}$ , R 13 , R 14 , R $_{15 }$and R$_{16 }$each represents a straight chain or branched alky 1 group or cycloalky 1 group having from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, provided that at least one of R$_{12 }$to R$_{14}$, or either R$_{15 }$or R$_{16 }$represents a cycloalkyl group. \n\nR$_{17}$ , R 18 , R 19 , R $_{20 }$and R$_{21 }$ each represents a hydrogen atom, a straight chain or branched alkyl group or cycloalkyl group having from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, provided that at least one ofR$_{17 }$to R$_{21 }$ represents a cycloalkyl group, and either R$_{19 }$ or R$_{21 }$ represents a straight chain or branched alkyl group or cycloalkyl group having from 1 to 4 carbon atoms. \n\nR$_{22}$, R 23 , R $_{24 }$and R$_{25 }$each represents a hydrogen atom, a straight chain or branched alkyl group or cycloalkyl group having from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, provided that at least one of R$_{22 }$to R$_{25 }$represents a cycloalkyl group, and R$_{23 }$and R$_{24 }$may by bonded to each other to form a ring. \n\nIn formula (II-AB), R$_{11}$’ and R 12 ’ each represents a hydro› gen atom, a cyano group, a halogen atom, or an alkyl group. \n\nZ’ contains bonded two carbon atoms (C----C) and repre- sents an atomic group to form an alicyclic structure. \n\nFormula (II-AB) is more preferably represented by the following formula (II-AB!) or (II-AB2). \n\nAs the resin having a monocyclic or polycyclic alicyclic hydrocarbon structure and capable of decomposing by the action of an acid to thereby increase the solubility in an alkali developing solution (hereinafter also referred to as \"alicyclic hydrocarbon acid-decomposable resin\"), resin containing at least one repeating unit selected from the group consisting of a repeating unit having a partial structure containing alicyclic hydrocarbon represented by any of the following formulae (pl) to (p V), and a repeating unit represented by the following formula (II-AB) is preferred. \n\nWhen the positive photosensitive composition in the inven› tion is irradiated withArF excimer laser beams, it is preferred that resin (C) is resin having a monocyclic or polycyclic alicyclic hydrocarbon structure and capable of decomposing by the action of an acid to thereby increase the solubility in an alkali developing solution. \n\nThe content of an acid-decomposable group is expressed by B/(B+S), taking the number of the acid-decomposable groups in the resin as (B), and the number of alkali-soluble groups not protected with acid-eliminable groups as (S). The content is preferably from 0.01 to 0.7, more preferably from 0.05 to 0.50, and still more preferably from 0.05 to 0.40. \n\nIn the above specific examples, tBu means at-butyl group. \n\n-continued" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7275329918516946, + "doc_id": "a9ca85c387eb04ad368cc51b88e9375bd11bce0f4c90846d2de6dad0817ee6f9", + "edit_distance": 0.25045045045045045, + "f1_score": 0.9096989966555185, + "meteor": 0.8098925665057531, + "precision": 0.8662420382165605, + "pred_md": "US 2012/0003590 Al\n\nsubstituted. Examples of the substituent which the alkyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group and electron-withdraw› ing group may have include a halogen atom, an alkoxy group (for example, having a carbon number of 1 to 5), a hydroxyl group, a cyano group and a nitro group.\n\n[0336] R209 is preferably a substituted orunsubstituted aryl group.\n\n[0337] R210 is preferably an electron-withdrawing group. This electron-withdrawing group is preferably a cyano group or a fluoroalkyl group.\n\n[0338] A represents an alkylene group, an alkenylene group or an arylene group. These alkylene group, alkenylene group and arylene group may have a substituent.\n\n[0339] Specific examples of the aryl group of Ar 3 , Ar4 , R208 , R209 and R 210 are the same as specific examples of the aryl group as R 201 , R202 and R 203 in formula (ZI-1).\n\n[0340] Specific examples of the alkyl group and cycloalkyl group of R 208 , R209 and R 210 are the same as specific examples of the alkyl group and cycloalkyl group as R 201 , R202 and R 203 in formula (ZI-2).\n\n(\n\n(\n\nGs c,c-s~\n\n3\n\nOrs c,c.,-s~\n\np\n\np\n\nb\n\n'\n\n62\n\nB-1\n\nB-3\n\nB-5\n\nB-7\n\nJan. 5, 2012\n\n[0341] The alkylene group of A includes an alkylene group having a carbon number of 1 to 12 (e.g., methylene group, ethylene group, propylene group, isopropylene group, buty› lenes group, isobutylene group); the alkenylene group of A includes an alkenylene group having a carbon number of 2 to 12 (e.g., ethynylene group, propenylene group, butenylene group); and the arylene group of A includes an arylene group having a carbon number of 6 to 10 (e.g., phenylene group, tolylene group, naphthylene group).\n\n[0342] As the photo-acid generator, a compound having a plurality of structures represented by formula (ZVI) is also preferred. For example, the compound includes a compound having a structure where R 209 or R 210 in a compound repre› sented by formula (ZVI) is bonded to R 209 or R 210 in another compound represented by formula (ZVI).\n\n[0343] The photo-acid generator is preferably a compound represented by any of formulae (ZI) to (ZIII), more preferably a compound represented by formula (ZI).\n\n[0344] Specific examples of the photo-acid generator are illustrated below, but the present invention is not limited thereto.\n\nB-4\n\nB-6\n\nB-8", + "recall": 0.9577464788732394, + "true_md": "US 2012/0003590 Al \n\n62 \n\nJan. 5, 2012 \n\nsubstituted. Examples of the substituent which the alkyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group and electron-withdraw› ing group may have include a halogen atom, an alkoxy group (for example, having a carbon number of 1 to 5), a hydroxyl group, a cyano group and a nitro group. \n\n[0336] R$_{209 }$is preferably a substituted orunsubstituted aryl group. \n\n[0337] R$_{210 }$ is preferably an electron-withdrawing group. This electron-withdrawing group is preferably a cyano group or a fluoroalkyl group. \n\n[0338] A represents an alkylene group, an alkenylene group or an arylene group. These alkylene group, alkenylene group and arylene group may have a substituent. \n\n[0339] Specific examples of the aryl group of Ar$_{3}$ , Ar$_{4}$ , R$_{208}$, R$_{209 }$and R$_{210 }$are the same as specific examples of the aryl group as R$_{201}$ , R $_{202 }$and R$_{203 }$in formula (ZI-1). \n\n[0340] Specific examples of the alkyl group and cycloalkyl group of R$_{208}$ , R 209 and R$_{210 }$ are the same as specific examples of the alkyl group and cycloalkyl group as R$_{201}$, R$_{202 }$and R$_{203 }$in formula (ZI-2). \n\n[0341] The alkylene group of A includes an alkylene group having a carbon number of 1 to 12 (e.g., methylene group, ethylene group, propylene group, isopropylene group, buty› lenes group, isobutylene group); the alkenylene group of A includes an alkenylene group having a carbon number of 2 to 12 (e.g., ethynylene group, propenylene group, butenylene group); and the arylene group of A includes an arylene group having a carbon number of 6 to 10 (e.g., phenylene group, tolylene group, naphthylene group). \n\n[0342] As the photo-acid generator, a compound having a plurality of structures represented by formula (ZVI) is also preferred. For example, the compound includes a compound having a structure where R$_{209 }$or R$_{210 }$in a compound repre› sented by formula (ZVI) is bonded to R$_{209 }$or R$_{210 }$in another compound represented by formula (ZVI). \n\n[0343] The photo-acid generator is preferably a compound represented by any of formulae (ZI) to (ZIII), more preferably a compound represented by formula (ZI). \n\n[0344] Specific examples of the photo-acid generator are illustrated below, but the present invention is not limited thereto." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8463701968396362, + "doc_id": "21de03540794669a30abd37fb300d54b9ccf378726c37fcf6b1c96a86074dcc3", + "edit_distance": 0.7846715328467153, + "f1_score": 0.9731543624161073, + "meteor": 0.6228317098006992, + "precision": 0.9797297297297297, + "pred_md": "US 2012/0003590 Al\n\n[0118] As for specific structures of the cation moiety of formula (ZI-3 ), please refer to cation moiety structures of the acid generators illustrated in paragraphs 0047 and 0048 of JP-A-2004-233661 and paragraphs 0040 to 0046 of JP-A2003-35948.\n\n[0119] The (ZI-4) group is described below.\n\n[0120] The (ZI-4) group is a group represented by the fol› lowing formula (ZI-4). This group is effective to suppress outgassing.\n\n[0121] In formula (ZI-4), each ofR' to R 13 independently represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent, and at least one ofR 1 to R 13 is preferably a substituent containing an alcoholic hydroxyl group. The term \"alcoholic hydroxyl group\" as used herein means a hydroxy 1 group bonded to a carbon atom of an alkyl group.\n\n[0122] Z represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.\n\n[0123] zcrepresents a non-nucleophilic anion, and examples thereof are the same as those of z- in formula (ZI).\n\n[0124] In the case where R 1 to R 13 are a substituent con› taining an alcoholic hydroxyl group, each of R 1 to R 13 is preferably a group represented by -(W-Y), wherein Y is an alkyl group substituted with a hydroxyl group and W is a single bond or a divalent linking group.\n\n[0125] Preferred examples of the alkyl group represented byY include an ethyl group, a propyl group and an isopropyl group. In particular, Y preferably contains a structure repre› sented by ----CH 2 CH2OH.\n\n[0126] The divalent linking group represented by Wis not particularly limited but is preferably a single bond or a diva› lent group formed by substituting a single bond for an arbi› trary hydrogen atom of an alkoxy group, an acyloxy group, an acylamino group, an alkyl- or aryl-sulfonylamino group, an alkylthio group, an alkylsulfonyl group, an acyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group or a carbamoyl group, more preferably a single bond or a divalent group formed by substituting a single bond for an arbitrary hydrogen atom of an acyloxy group, an alkylsulfonyl group, an acyl group or an alkoxycar› bonyl group.\n\n[0127] In the case where R 1 to R 13 are a substituent con› taining an alcoholic hydroxyl group, the number of carbons contained therein is preferably from 2 to 10, more preferably from 2 to 6, still more preferably from 2 to 4.\n\n[0128] The alcoholic hydroxyl group-containing substitu› ent as R 1 to R 13 may have two or more alcoholic hydroxyl groups. The number of alcoholic hydroxyl groups in the alco-\n\n14\n\nJan. 5, 2012\n\nlic hydroxyl group-containing substituent as R 1 to R 13 is from 1 to 6, preferably from 1 to 3, more preferably 1.\n\n[0129] The number of alcoholic hydroxyl groups contained in the (ZI-4) group is, in total ofall ofR 1 to R 13 , from 1 to 10, preferably from 1 to 6, more preferably from 1 to 3.\n\n[0130] In the case where R 1 to R 13 contain no alcoholic hydroxyl group, examples of R 1 to R 13 include a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, a cycloalkenyl group, analkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a cyano group, a nitro group, a carboxy group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a silyloxy group, a heterocyclic oxy group, an acyloxy group, a carbam› oyloxy group, an alkoxycarbonyloxy group, an aryloxycar› bonyloxy group, an amino group (including an anilino group), an armnonio group, an acylamino group, an ami› nocarbonylamino group, an alkoxycarbonylamino group, an aryloxycarbonylamino group, a sulfamoylamino group, an alkylor aryl-sulfonylamino group, a mercapto group, an alkylthio group, an arylthio group, a heterocyclic thio group, a sulfamoyl group, a sulfa group, an alkylor aryl-sulfinyl group, an alkylor aryl-sulfonyl group, an acyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, a carbam› oyl group, anaryl- or heterocyclic azo group, animido group, a phosphino group, a phosphinyl group, a phosphinyloxy group, a phosphinylamino group, a phosphono group, a silyl group, a hydrazino group, a ureido group, a boronic acid group [-B(OH) 2 ], a phosphato group [-OPO(OH) 2 ], a sulfato group (---OSO 3 H), and other known substituents.\n\n[0131] In the case where R 1 to R 13 contain no alcoholic hydroxyl group, each ofR 1 to R 13 is preferably a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, a cyano group, an alkoxy group, an acyloxy group, an acy› lamino group, an aminocarbonylamino group, an alkoxycar› bonylamino group, an alkyl- or aryl-sulfonylamino group, an alkylthio group, a sulfamoyl group, an alkyl- or aryl-sulfonyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group or a carbamoyl group.\n\n[0132] In the case where R 1 to R 13 contain no alcoholic hydroxyl group, each ofR to R 1 13 is more preferably a hydro› gen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, a halogen atom or an alkoxy group.\n\n[0133] Two adjacent members out of R to R 1 13 may com› bine with each other to form a ring structure. This ring struc› ture includes an aromatic or non-aromatic hydrocarbon ring and a heterocyclic ring. These ring structures may further combine to form a condensed ring.\n\n[0134] The (ZI-4) group preferably has a structure where at least one ofR 1 to R 13 contains an alcoholic hydroxyl group, more preferably a structure where at least one of R 9 to R 13 contains an alcoholic hydroxyl group.\n\n[0135] Z represents, as described above, a single bond or a divalent linking group. Examples of the divalent linking group include an alkylene group, an arylene group, a carbonyl group, a sulfonyl group, a carbonyloxy group, a carbony› lamino group, a sulfonylamido group, an ether bond, a thio› ether bond, an amino group, a disulfide group, an acyl group, an alkylsulfonyl group, ----CH=CH-, an aminocarbony› lamino group and an aminosulfonylamino group.\n\n[0136] The divalent linking group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent thereof are the same as those enumerated above for R to R 1 13 .\n\n[0137] Z is preferably a single bond, an ether bond or a thioether more, more preferably a single bond.", + "recall": 0.9666666666666667, + "true_md": "US 2012/0003590 Al \n\n14 \n\nJan. 5, 2012 \n\n[0118] As for specific structures of the cation moiety of formula (ZI-3 ), please refer to cation moiety structures of the acid generators illustrated in paragraphs 0047 and 0048 of JP-A-2004-233661 and paragraphs 0040 to 0046 of JP-A- 2003-35948. \n\n[0119] The (ZI-4) group is described below. \n\n[0120] The (ZI-4) group is a group represented by the fol› lowing formula (ZI-4). This group is effective to suppress outgassing. \n\n[0130] In the case where R 1 to R$^{13 }$contain no alcoholic hydroxyl group, examples of R 1 to R $^{13 }$include a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, a cycloalkenyl group, analkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a cyano group, a nitro group, a carboxy group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a silyloxy group, a heterocyclic oxy group, an acyloxy group, a carbam› oyloxy group, an alkoxycarbonyloxy group, an aryloxycar› bonyloxy group, an amino group (including an anilino group), an armnonio group, an acylamino group, an ami› nocarbonylamino group, an alkoxycarbonylamino group, an aryloxycarbonylamino group, a sulfamoylamino group, an alkyl- or aryl-sulfonylamino group, a mercapto group, an alkylthio group, an arylthio group, a heterocyclic thio group, a sulfamoyl group, a sulfa group, an alkyl- or aryl-sulfinyl group, an alkyl- or aryl-sulfonyl group, an acyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, a carbam› oyl group, anaryl- or heterocyclic azo group, animido group, a phosphino group, a phosphinyl group, a phosphinyloxy group, a phosphinylamino group, a phosphono group, a silyl group, a hydrazino group, a ureido group, a boronic acid group [-B(OH)$_{2}$ ], a phosphato group [-OPO(OH) 2 ], a sulfato group (---OSO$_{3}$H), and other known substituents. \n\n[0131] In the case where R 1 to R$^{13 }$contain no alcoholic hydroxyl group, each ofR 1 to R$^{13 }$is preferably a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, a cyano group, an alkoxy group, an acyloxy group, an acy› lamino group, an aminocarbonylamino group, an alkoxycar› bonylamino group, an alkyl- or aryl-sulfonylamino group, an alkylthio group, a sulfamoyl group, an alkyl- or aryl-sulfonyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group or a carbamoyl group. \n\n[0132] In the case where R 1 to R$^{13 }$contain no alcoholic hydroxyl group, each ofR $^{1 }$to R $^{13 }$is more preferably a hydro› gen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, a halogen atom or an alkoxy group. \n\n[0133] Two adjacent members out of R $^{1 }$to R $^{13 }$may com› bine with each other to form a ring structure. This ring struc› ture includes an aromatic or non-aromatic hydrocarbon ring and a heterocyclic ring. These ring structures may further combine to form a condensed ring. \n\n[0134] The (ZI-4) group preferably has a structure where at least one ofR$^{1 }$to R$^{13 }$contains an alcoholic hydroxyl group, more preferably a structure where at least one of R 9 to R 13 contains an alcoholic hydroxyl group. \n\n[0135] Z represents, as described above, a single bond or a divalent linking group. Examples of the divalent linking group include an alkylene group, an arylene group, a carbonyl group, a sulfonyl group, a carbonyloxy group, a carbony› lamino group, a sulfonylamido group, an ether bond, a thio› ether bond, an amino group, a disulfide group, an acyl group, an alkylsulfonyl group, ----CH=CH-, an aminocarbony› lamino group and an aminosulfonylamino group. \n\n[0136] The divalent linking group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent thereof are the same as those enumerated above for R $^{1 }$to R 13 . \n\n[0137] Z is preferably a single bond, an ether bond or a thioether more, more preferably a single bond. \n\n[0121] In formula (ZI-4), each ofR’ to R$^{13 }$independently represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent, and at least one ofR $^{1 }$to R $^{13 }$is preferably a substituent containing an alcoholic hydroxyl group. The term \"alcoholic hydroxyl group\" as used herein means a hydroxy 1 group bonded to a carbon atom of an alkyl group. \n\n[0122] Z represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. zc-\n\ngroup. [0123] zc- represents a non-nucleophilic anion, and examples thereof are the same as those of z- in formula (ZI). \n\n[0124] In the case where R 1 to R$^{13 }$are a substituent con› taining an alcoholic hydroxyl group, each of R 1 to R 13 is preferably a group represented by -(W-Y), wherein Y is an alkyl group substituted with a hydroxyl group and W is a single bond or a divalent linking group. \n\n[0125] Preferred examples of the alkyl group represented byY include an ethyl group, a propyl group and an isopropyl group. In particular, Y preferably contains a structure repre› sented by ----CH$_{2}$CH$_{2}$OH. \n\n[0126] The divalent linking group represented by Wis not particularly limited but is preferably a single bond or a diva› lent group formed by substituting a single bond for an arbi› trary hydrogen atom of an alkoxy group, an acyloxy group, an acylamino group, an alkyl- or aryl-sulfonylamino group, an alkylthio group, an alkylsulfonyl group, an acyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group or a carbamoyl group, more preferably a single bond or a divalent group formed by substituting a single bond for an arbitrary hydrogen atom of an acyloxy group, an alkylsulfonyl group, an acyl group or an alkoxycar› bonyl group. \n\n[0127] In the case where R 1 to R$^{13 }$are a substituent con› taining an alcoholic hydroxyl group, the number of carbons contained therein is preferably from 2 to 10, more preferably from 2 to 6, still more preferably from 2 to 4. \n\n[0128] The alcoholic hydroxyl group-containing substitu› ent as R 1 to R$^{13 }$may have two or more alcoholic hydroxyl groups. The number of alcoholic hydroxyl groups in the alco-\n\nholic hydroxyl group-containing substituent as R 1 to R$^{13 }$is from 1 to 6, preferably from 1 to 3, more preferably 1. \n\n[0129] The number of alcoholic hydroxyl groups contained in the (ZI-4) group is, in total ofall ofR$^{1 }$to R 13 , from 1 to 10, preferably from 1 to 6, more preferably from 1 to 3." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8132882808488929, + "doc_id": "b2775f2529a55e2ab742193acc7a5f6a598cbed36a0a89e4a4ea3f19adac02ae", + "edit_distance": 0.75, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9921875, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "US 2019/0010119 Al\n\nJan. 10, 2019\n\n15", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Jan. 10, 2019 \n\n15 \n\nUS 2019/0010119 Al" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7476743906106103, + "doc_id": "4d7673e6b20e3a6817a93f2d34c2ea3a3ee5dc2a780164e2ab6158f886edefce", + "edit_distance": 0.8, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.968, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "US 2021/0033970 Al\n\nFeb.4,2021\n\n56", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Feb.4,2021 \n\n56 \n\nUS 2021/0033970 Al" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "13f1ebb9d0b9434d615695683186c3691623b458e86adc0c7e2ec19a11c2ccae", + "edit_distance": 0.8260869565217391, + "f1_score": 0.46153846153846145, + "meteor": 0.7819174181300427, + "precision": 0.3, + "pred_md": "225\n\n226\n\n-continued\n\n-continued\n\n~N~\n\n~N~\n\nUS 9,423,690 B2\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n3\n\n0\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n6 0\n\n65", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "225 \n\nUS 9,423,690 B2 \n\n226 \n\n-continued \n\n-continued" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8655204955730111, + "doc_id": "b8a1bd48bcb8ffec6c41d7915e56ff736d53274e281c559a4ad635976fdebde7", + "edit_distance": 0.43125, + "f1_score": 0.9426751592356688, + "meteor": 0.8476149216935759, + "precision": 0.961038961038961, + "pred_md": "US 20210033970Al\n\nUS 20210033970Al\n\n## c19) United States c12) Patent Application Publication Hatakeyama et al.\n\n## (54) RESIST COMPOSITION AND PATTERNING PROCESS\n\n- (71) Applicant:\n\nShin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd., Tokyo (JP)\n\n- (72) Inventors:\n\nJun Hatakeyama, Joetsu-shi (JP); Takayuki Fujiwara, Joetsu-shi (JP)\n\n- (73) Assignee:\n\nShin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd., Tokyo (JP)\n\n- (21) Appl. No.:\n\n16/919,574\n\n- (22) Filed:\n\nJul. 2, 2020\n\n## (30)\n\nForeign Application Priority Data\n\nAug. 2, 2019 (JP) ................................. 2019-142948\n\n## Publication Classification\n\n- (51) Int. Cl.\n\nG03F 71004\n\nG03F 71039\n\n(2006.01)\n\n(2006.01)\n\n- c10)\n\nPub. No.: US 2021/0033970 Al\n\n- (43) Pub. Date:\n\nFeb. 4, 2021\n\n- (52) U.S. Cl.\n\nG03F 71038\n\nC08F 220118\n\nC08F 212114\n\n(2006.01)\n\n(2006.01)\n\n(2006.01)\n\nCPC .......... G03F 710045 (2013.01); G03F 710392 (2013.01); G03F 710382 (2013.01); G03F 7/162 (2013.01); C08F 220/1802 (2020.02); C08F 212124 (2020.02); C08F 220/1806 (2020.02)\n\n## (57) ABSTRACT\n\nA resist composition comprising a base polymer and a quencher in the form of an ammonium salt consisting of an ammonium cation having an iodized aromatic ring bonded to the nitrogen atom via a C -C 1 20 hydrocarbylene group which may contain an ester bond or ether bond and a carboxylate anion having an iodized or brominated hydro› carbyl group offers a high sensitivity and minimal LWR or improved CDU, independent of whether it is of positive or negative tone.", + "recall": 0.925, + "true_md": "1111111111111111 IIIIII IIIII 1111111111 11111 11111 lllll 111111111111111 11111 1111111111 11111111 US 20210033970Al \n\n# c19) United States c12) Patent Application Publication\n\n# Hatakeyama et al.\n\n# c10) Pub. No.: US 2021/0033970 Al\n\n# (43) Pub. Date: Feb. 4, 2021\n\n# (54) RESIST COMPOSITION AND PATTERNING PROCESS\n\n- (71) Applicant: Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd., Tokyo (JP) \n\n- (72) Inventors: Jun Hatakeyama, Joetsu-shi (JP); Takayuki Fujiwara, Joetsu-shi (JP) \n\n- (73) Assignee: Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd., Tokyo (JP) \n\n- (21) Appl. No.: 16/919,574 \n\n- (22) Filed: Jul. 2, 2020 \n\n- (51) Int. Cl. \n\n- (52) U.S. Cl. CPC .......... G03F 710045 (2013.01); G03F 710392 (2013.01); G03F 710382 (2013.01); G03F 7/162 (2013.01); C08F 220/1802 (2020.02); C08F 212124 (2020.02); C08F 220/1806 (2020.02) \n\n## (30) Foreign Application Priority Data\n\n## Publication Classification\n\n## (57) ABSTRACT\n\nAug. 2, 2019 (JP) ................................. 2019-142948 \n\nA resist composition comprising a base polymer and a quencher in the form of an ammonium salt consisting of an ammonium cation having an iodized aromatic ring bonded to the nitrogen atom via a C$_{1 }$-C$_{20 }$ hydrocarbylene group which may contain an ester bond or ether bond and a carboxylate anion having an iodized or brominated hydro› carbyl group offers a high sensitivity and minimal LWR or improved CDU, independent of whether it is of positive or negative tone." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "da0be280c3f42fb7aa9908535523c0347aa5315b5b51956c69ebb5638dc0e38c", + "edit_distance": 0.7894736842105263, + "f1_score": 0.48, + "meteor": 0.6233062330623306, + "precision": 0.3157894736842105, + "pred_md": "81\n\nUS 7,851,130 B2\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\n5\n\no\n\n55\n\n60\n\n65\n\n82\n\n-continued", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "82 \n\nUS 7,851,130 B2 \n\n81 \n\n-continued \n\n-continued" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8719806671583679, + "doc_id": "c21bc9f3a179ffe3820efa6717ad2fb96518e15028c12a3eb1dfd4117c94f890", + "edit_distance": 0.36752136752136755, + "f1_score": 0.946938775510204, + "meteor": 0.8626333810266157, + "precision": 0.9586776859504132, + "pred_md": "US 20120003590Al\n\nUS 20120003590Al\n\n## c19) United States c12) Patent Application Publication HIRANO et al.\n\n## (54) ACTINIC RAY-SENSITIVE OR RADIATION-SENSITIVE RESIN COMPOSITION, AND RESIST FILM AND PATTERN FORMING METHOD USING THE SAME\n\n- (75) Inventors:\n\nShuji HIRANO, Shizuoka (JP); Hidenori TAKAHASHI, Shizuoka (JP); Tomotaka TSUCHIMURA, Shizuoka (JP); Takeshi\n\nKAWABATA, Shizuoka (JP); Hideaki TSUBAKI, Shizuoka (JP)\n\n- (73) Assignee:\n- (21) Appl. No.:\n- (22) Filed:\n\nFUJIFILM CORPORATION, Tokyo (JP)\n\n13/033,079\n\nFeb.23,2011\n\n- c10)\n\nPub. No.: US 2012/0003590 Al\n\n- (43) Pub. Date:\n\nJan. 5, 2012\n\n## (30) Foreign Application Priority Data\n\n## Publication Classification\n\n- (51) Int. Cl.\n\nG03F 7120 (2006.01)\n\nCOSF 214118\n\n(2006.01)\n\n- (52) U.S. Cl.\n\n.........................................\n\n430/325; 526/243\n\n## (57) ABSTRACT\n\nAn actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composi› tion containing a resin having (A) a repeating unit represented by a specific formula (I) and (B) a repeating unit capable of generating an acid upon irradiation with an actinic ray or radiation.", + "recall": 0.9354838709677419, + "true_md": "1111111111111111 IIIIII IIIII 111111111111111 11111 11111 lllll 111111111111111 1111111111 11111111 US 20120003590Al \n\n# c10) Pub. No.: US 2012/0003590 Al\n\n# (43) Pub. Date: Jan. 5, 2012\n\n# c19) United States\n\n# c12) Patent Application Publication\n\n# HIRANO et al.\n\n# (54) ACTINIC RAY-SENSITIVE OR RADIATION-SENSITIVE RESIN COMPOSITION, AND RESIST FILM AND PATTERN FORMING METHOD USING THE SAME\n\n- (75) Inventors: Shuji HIRANO, Shizuoka (JP); Hidenori TAKAHASHI, Shizuoka (JP); Tomotaka TSUCHIMURA, Shizuoka (JP); Takeshi KAWABATA, Shizuoka (JP); Hideaki TSUBAKI, Shizuoka (JP) \n\n- (73) Assignee: FUJIFILM CORPORATION, Tokyo (JP) \n\n- (21) Appl. No.: 13/033,079 \n\n- (22) Filed: Feb.23,2011 \n\n## (30) Foreign Application Priority Data\n\n## Publication Classification\n\n## (57) ABSTRACT\n\n- (51) Int. Cl. \n\n- (52) U.S. Cl. ......................................... 430/325; 526/243 \n\nAn actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composi› tion containing a resin having (A) a repeating unit represented by a specific formula (I) and (B) a repeating unit capable of generating an acid upon irradiation with an actinic ray or radiation." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7186082239261684, + "doc_id": "7e786ba948cfabde5040fbf105b37cec9a96abd19186ba251b8a1020b63fd8e0", + "edit_distance": 0.25, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9736328125, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "US 2012/0003590 Al\n\nJan. 5, 2012\n\n59", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "US 2012/0003590 Al \n\n59 \n\nJan. 5, 2012" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9342279287337115, + "doc_id": "8d154fc7dbe817575e17fef565f6ce1db3556ffc7a1f3cd659ed844b18d1d366", + "edit_distance": 0.7433431952662722, + "f1_score": 0.9520426287744227, + "meteor": 0.6462520972605419, + "precision": 0.950354609929078, + "pred_md": "US 9,423,690 B2\n\n11\n\naromatic hydrocarbon-based solvent such as toluene, xylene, ethylbenzene, propylbenzene, 1-methylpropylben› zene, 2-methylpropylbenzene, dimethylbenzene, diethyl› benzene, ethylmethylbenzene, trimethylbenzene, ethyldim› ethylbenzene and dipropylbenzene. Among these, an aromatic hydrocarbon-based solvent is preferred.\n\nA plurality of the solvents may be mixed, or the solvents may be used in a mixture with a solvent other than those described above or with water. However, in order to suffi› ciently exhibit the effects of the present invention, the water content ratio of the entire developer is preferably less than 10% by mass, and it is more preferred that the developer contains substantially no moisture.\n\nThat is, the concentration (the sum in the case of a multiple mixture) of the organic solvent used in the devel› oper is preferably 50% by mass or more, more preferably 70% by mass or more, and still more preferably 90% by mass or more. In particular, the developer is preferably a developer substantially consisting of only an organic solvent. In addition, the case of being substantially consisted of only an organic solvent is the case where the solvent includes a small amount of surfactants, antioxidants, stabi› lizers, anti-foaming agent, and the like.\n\nAmong the solvents, those containing one or more kinds selected from the group consisting of butyl acetate, pentyl acetate, isopentyl acetate, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, 2-heptanone and anisole are more preferred.\n\nThe organic solvent used as a developer may be prefer› ably an ester based solvent. As the ester based solvent, the solvents represented by the following Formula (Sl) or the following Formula (S2) may be preferably used, the solvents represented by the following Formula (Sl) may be more preferably used, and alkyl acetate may be particularly preferably used, and butyl acetate, pentyl acetate or isopentyl acetate may be most preferably used.\n\n\n\n\n\nIn Formula (Sl),\n\nR and R' each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkoxyl group, an alkoxy carbonyl group, a carboxyl group, a hydroxyl group, a cyano group or a halogen atom. Rand R' may be bond with each other to form a ring.\n\nThe alkyl group, the alkoxyl group and the alkoxycarbo› nyl group for Rand R' have preferably 1 to 15 carbon atoms, and the cycloalkyl group has preferably 3 to 15 carbon atoms.\n\nR and R' are preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group. The alkyl group, the cycloalkyl group, the alkoxyl group and the alkoxycarbonyl group for Rand R', and the ring formed by R and R' being bound with each other may be substituted with a hydroxyl group, a group containing a carbonyl group (for example, an acyl group, an aldehyde group, an alkoxycarbonyl, and the like), a cyano group, and the like.\n\nExamples of the solvent represented by Formula (S 1) may include methyl acetate, butyl acetate, ethyl acetate, isopro› pyl acetate, amyl acetate, isoamyl acetate, methyl formate, ethyl formate, butyl formate, propyl formate, ethyl lactate, butyl lactate, propyl lactate, ethyl carbonate, propyl carbon› ate, butyl carbonate, methyl pyruvate, ethyl pyruvate, propyl pyruvate, butyl pyruvate, methyl acetoacetate, ethyl acetoac› etate, methyl propionate, ethyl propionate, propyl propi› onate, isopropyl propionate, 2-hydroxy methyl propionate, 2-hydroxy ethyl propionate, and the like.\n\n12\n\nAmong these, each R and R' is preferably an unsubstitued alkyl group.\n\nThe solvent represented by Formula (Sl) is preferably alkyl acetate, and more preferably butyl acetate, pentyl acetate or isopentyl acetate.\n\nThe solvent represented by Formula (Sl) may be used in combination with one or more kinds of other organic sol› vents. The combined solvent in this case is not particularly limited as long as the combined solvent is able to be mixed without separation from the solvent represented by Formula (Sl). The solvents represented by Formula (Sl) may be used in combination with each other, and the solvent represented by Formula (Sl) may be used in a mixture with a solvent selected from other ester-based solvents, ketone-based sol› vents, alcohol-based solvents, amide-based solvents, ether› based solvents and hydrocarbon-based solvents. One or more kinds of the combined solvents may be used, but one kind of the combined solvent is preferred to obtain a stable performance. In the case of using a mixture of one or more kinds of the combined solvents, the mixing ratio of the solvent represented by Formula (Sl) and the combined solvent is usually 20:80 to 99:1, preferably 50:50 to 97:3, more preferably 60:40 to 95:5, and most preferably 60:40 to 90:10 by mass.\n\n\n\n\n\nIn Formula (S2),\n\nR\" and R\"\" each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkoxyl group, an alkoxy carbonyl group, a carboxyl group, a hydroxyl group, a cyano group or a halogen atom. R\" and R\"\" may be bond with each other to form a ring.\n\nR\" and R\"\" are preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group. The alkyl group, the alkoxyl group and the alkoxy› carbonyl group for R\" and R\"\" have preferably 1 to 15 carbon atoms, and the cycloalkyl group has preferably 3 to 15 carbon atoms.\n\nR\"' represents an alkylene group or a cycloalkylene group. R\"' is preferably alkylene group. The alkylene group for R\"' has preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and the cycloalkylene group has preferably 3 to 15 carbon atoms.\n\nThe alkyl group, the cycloalkyl group, the alkoxyl group and the alkoxycarbonyl group for R\" and R\"\", the alkylene group and cycloalkylene group for R\"', and the ring formed by R\" and R\"\" being bound with each other may be substituted with a hydroxyl group, a group containing a carbonyl group (for example, an acyl group, an aldehyde group, an alkoxycarbonyl, and the like), a cyano group, and the like.\n\nThe alkylene group of R\"' in Formula (S2) may have an ether bond in the alkylene chain.\n\nExamples of the solvent represented by Formula (S2) may include propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, ethyl› ene glycol monoethyl ether acetate, ethylene glycol mono› propyl ether acetate, ethylene glycol monobutyl ether acetate, ethylene glycol monophenyl ether acetate, diethylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, diethylene glycol monopropyl ether acetate, diethylene glycol monophenyl ether acetate, diethylene glycol monobutyl ether acetate, diethylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate, propylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate, propylene glycol monopropyl ether acetate, methyl-3-methoxypropionate, ethy 1-3-methoxypro› pionate, ethy 1-3-ethoxypropionate, propy 1-3-methoxypropi› onate, methoxy ethyl acetate, ethoxy ethyl acetate, 2-methoxybutylacetate, 3-methoxybutylacetate, 4-methoxy› butylacetate, 3-methy 1-3-methoxybuty !acetate, 3-ethyl-3methoxybutylacetate, 2-ethoxybutylacetate, 4-ethoxybuty-\n\n5\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n60\n\n65", + "recall": 0.9537366548042705, + "true_md": "12 \n\n11 \n\nUS 9,423,690 B2 \n\naromatic hydrocarbon-based solvent such as toluene, xylene, ethylbenzene, propylbenzene, 1-methylpropylben› zene, 2-methylpropylbenzene, dimethylbenzene, diethyl› benzene, ethylmethylbenzene, trimethylbenzene, ethyldim› ethylbenzene and dipropylbenzene. Among these, an aromatic hydrocarbon-based solvent is preferred. \n\nAmong these, each R and R’ is preferably an unsubstitued alkyl group. \n\nThe solvent represented by Formula (Sl) is preferably alkyl acetate, and more preferably butyl acetate, pentyl acetate or isopentyl acetate. \n\nThe solvent represented by Formula (Sl) may be used in combination with one or more kinds of other organic sol› vents. The combined solvent in this case is not particularly limited as long as the combined solvent is able to be mixed without separation from the solvent represented by Formula (Sl). The solvents represented by Formula (Sl) may be used in combination with each other, and the solvent represented by Formula (Sl) may be used in a mixture with a solvent selected from other ester-based solvents, ketone-based sol› vents, alcohol-based solvents, amide-based solvents, ether› based solvents and hydrocarbon-based solvents. One or more kinds of the combined solvents may be used, but one kind of the combined solvent is preferred to obtain a stable performance. In the case of using a mixture of one or more kinds of the combined solvents, the mixing ratio of the solvent represented by Formula (Sl) and the combined solvent is usually 20:80 to 99:1, preferably 50:50 to 97:3, more preferably 60:40 to 95:5, and most preferably 60:40 to 90:10 by mass. \n\nA plurality of the solvents may be mixed, or the solvents may be used in a mixture with a solvent other than those described above or with water. However, in order to suffi› ciently exhibit the effects of the present invention, the water content ratio of the entire developer is preferably less than 10% by mass, and it is more preferred that the developer contains substantially no moisture. \n\nThat is, the concentration (the sum in the case of a multiple mixture) of the organic solvent used in the devel› oper is preferably 50% by mass or more, more preferably 70% by mass or more, and still more preferably 90% by mass or more. In particular, the developer is preferably a developer substantially consisting of only an organic sol- vent. In addition, the case of being substantially consisted of only an organic solvent is the case where the solvent includes a small amount of surfactants, antioxidants, stabi› lizers, anti-foaming agent, and the like. \n\nAmong the solvents, those containing one or more kinds 25 selected from the group consisting of butyl acetate, pentyl acetate, isopentyl acetate, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, 2-heptanone and anisole are more preferred. \n\nThe organic solvent used as a developer may be prefer› ably an ester based solvent. As the ester based solvent, the solvents represented by the following Formula (Sl) or the following Formula (S2) may be preferably used, the solvents represented by the following Formula (Sl) may be more preferably used, and alkyl acetate may be particularly pref- erably used, and butyl acetate, pentyl acetate or isopentyl acetate may be most preferably used. \n\n$$R’’-----C(=0)---0-R’’’---O-R’’’’ Formula (S2) $$\n\nIn Formula (S2), \n\nR\" and R\"\" each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkoxyl group, an alkoxy carbonyl group, a carboxyl group, a hydroxyl group, a cyano group or a halogen atom. R\" and R\"\" may be bond with each other to form a ring. \n\nR\" and R\"\" are preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group. The alkyl group, the alkoxyl group and the alkoxy› carbonyl group for R\" and R\"\" have preferably 1 to 15 carbon atoms, and the cycloalkyl group has preferably 3 to 15 carbon atoms. \n\nR\"’ represents an alkylene group or a cycloalkylene group. R\"’ is preferably alkylene group. The alkylene group for R\"’ has preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and the cycloalkylene group has preferably 3 to 15 carbon atoms. \n\nThe alkyl group, the cycloalkyl group, the alkoxyl group and the alkoxycarbonyl group for R\" and R\"\", the alkylene group and cycloalkylene group for R\"’, and the ring formed by R\" and R\"\" being bound with each other may be substituted with a hydroxyl group, a group containing a carbonyl group (for example, an acyl group, an aldehyde group, an alkoxycarbonyl, and the like), a cyano group, and the like. \n\nThe alkylene group of R\"’ in Formula (S2) may have an ether bond in the alkylene chain. \n\nExamples of the solvent represented by Formula (S2) may include propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, ethyl› ene glycol monoethyl ether acetate, ethylene glycol mono› propyl ether acetate, ethylene glycol monobutyl ether acetate, ethylene glycol monophenyl ether acetate, diethyl- ene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, diethylene glycol monopropyl ether acetate, diethylene glycol monophenyl ether acetate, diethylene glycol monobutyl ether acetate, diethylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate, propylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate, propylene glycol monopropyl ether acetate, methyl-3-methoxypropionate, ethy 1-3-methoxypro› pionate, ethy 1-3-ethoxypropionate, propy 1-3-methoxypropi› onate, methoxy ethyl acetate, ethoxy ethyl acetate, 2-methoxybutylacetate, 3-methoxybutylacetate, 4-methoxy› butylacetate, 3-methy 1-3-methoxybuty !acetate, 3-ethyl-3- methoxybutylacetate, 2-ethoxybutylacetate, 4-ethoxybuty-\n\nExamples of the solvent represented by Formula (S 1) may include methyl acetate, butyl acetate, ethyl acetate, isopro› pyl acetate, amyl acetate, isoamyl acetate, methyl formate, ethyl formate, butyl formate, propyl formate, ethyl lactate, butyl lactate, propyl lactate, ethyl carbonate, propyl carbon› ate, butyl carbonate, methyl pyruvate, ethyl pyruvate, propyl pyruvate, butyl pyruvate, methyl acetoacetate, ethyl acetoac› etate, methyl propionate, ethyl propionate, propyl propi› onate, isopropyl propionate, 2-hydroxy methyl propionate, 2-hydroxy ethyl propionate, and the like. \n\nR and R’ are preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group. The alkyl group, the cycloalkyl group, the alkoxyl group and the alkoxycarbonyl group for Rand R’, and the ring formed by R and R’ being bound with each other may be substituted with a hydroxyl group, a group containing a carbonyl group (for example, an acyl group, an aldehyde group, an alkoxycarbonyl, and the like), a cyano group, and the like. \n\nThe alkyl group, the alkoxyl group and the alkoxycarbo› nyl group for Rand R’ have preferably 1 to 15 carbon atoms, and the cycloalkyl group has preferably 3 to 15 carbon atoms. \n\nR and R’ each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkoxyl group, an alkoxy carbonyl group, a carboxyl group, a hydroxyl group, a cyano group or a halogen atom. Rand R’ may be bond with each other to form a ring. \n\nIn Formula (Sl), \n\n$$R-----C(=0)---0-R’ Formula (Sl) $$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "9fccb657d9f0ed207ebaf114cc64ae2598f217f3b496757eb05857e03f5b2999", + "edit_distance": 0.6363636363636364, + "f1_score": 0.7499999999999999, + "meteor": 0.8576944291230005, + "precision": 0.6, + "pred_md": "21\n\n22\n\n-continued\n\n-continued\n\nUS 7,851,130 B2\n\n10\n\n15\n\n35\n\n40", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "22 \n\nUS 7,851,130 B2 \n\n21 \n\n-continued \n\n-continued" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9183184999751117, + "doc_id": "5f5cdd4528a382734d0235c5fc4274284aae90a544dce5c945c773ccf2681eec", + "edit_distance": 0.12061855670103093, + "f1_score": 0.944206008583691, + "meteor": 0.8995264083536503, + "precision": 0.9401709401709402, + "pred_md": "115\n\n-continued\n\n5\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\nThe resin (A) may or may not contains the repeating unit ( c , ) but, if the resin contains the repeating unit ( c ), the content of the repeating unit ( c) is preferably in a range of 1 to 30 mo! %, more preferably in a range of 1 to 20 mo! %, still more preferably in a range of 1 to 15 mo! % based on 40 the whole repeating units of the resin (A). The repeating unit ( c) contained in the resin (A) may contain two kinds or more thereof.\n\nThe resin (A) of the present invention may appropriately have a repeating unit other than the repeating unit (b) or ( c ). The resin may further have a repeating unit having an alicyclic hydrocarbon structure having no polar group (for example, the acid group, the hydroxyl group and the cyano group) and not exhibiting acid decomposability as an example of such a repeating unit. Accordingly, when devel› oping by using the developer containing an organic solvent, the solubility of the resin may be appropriately adjusted. Examples of the repeating unit may include a repeating unit represented by Formula (IV).\n\nIn Formula (IV), Rs represents a hydrocarbon group having at least one cyclic structure and having no polar group.\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n60\n\n65\n\nUS 9,423,690 B2\n\n116\n\nRa represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or a ----CH 2 ---0-Ra2 group. In the formula, Ra 2 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an acyl group. Ra is preferably a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, a hydroxymethyl group and a trifluoromethyl group, and particularly preferably a hydrogen atom and a methyl group.\n\nThe cyclic structure possessed by Rs includes a monocy› clic hydrocarbon group and a polycyclic hydrocarbon group. Examples of the monocyclic hydrocarbon group may include a cycloalkyl group having 3 to 12 carbon atoms, such as a cyclopentyl group, a cyclohexyl group, a cyclo› heptyl group and a cyclooctyl group, and a cycloalkenyl group having 3 to 12 carbon atoms, such as a cyclohexenyl group. The monocyclic hydrocarbon group is preferably a monocyclic hydrocarbon group having 3 to 7 carbon atoms, and more preferably a cyclopentyl group or a cyclohexyl group.\n\nThe polycyclic hydrocarbon group includes a ring-as› sembled hydrocarbon group and a bridged cyclic hydrocarbon group, and examples of the ring-assembled hydrocarbon group may include a bicyclohexyl group, a perhydronaph› thalenyl group and the like. Examples of the bridged cyclic hydrocarbon ring may include a bicyclic hydrocarbon ring such as a pinane ring, a bornane ring, a norpinane ring, a norbornane ring and a bicyclooctane ring (a bicyclo[2.2.2] octane ring, a bicyclo[3.2.l]octane ring and the like), a tricyclic hydrocarbon ring such as a homobledane ring, an adamantine ring, a tricyclo[5.2.l.0 2 · 6 ]decane ring and a tricyclo[ 4.3. l.1 2 ·s]undecane ring, a tetracyclic hydrocarbon ring such as a tetracyclo[4.4.0.1 2 ·s.1 7 · 10 ldodecane ring and a perhydro-l,4-methano-5,8-methanonaphthalene ring, and the like. Further, the bridged cyclic hydrocarbon ring also includes a condensed cyclic hydrocarbon ring, for example, a condensed ring obtained by condensing a plurality of 5- to 8-membered cycloalkane rings, such as a perhydronaphtha› lene (decalin) ring, a perhydroanthracene ring, a perhydro› phenanthrene ring, a perhydroacenaphthene ring, a perhy› drofluorene ring, a perhydroindene ring and a perhydrophenalene ring.\n\nPreferred examples of the bridged cyclic hydrocarbon ring may include a norbornyl group, an adamantyl group, a bicyclooctanyl group, a tricyclo[5,2,l,0 2 · 6 ]decanyl group and the like. More preferred examples of the bridged cyclic hydrocarbon ring may include a norbornyl group and an adamantyl group.\n\nThe alicyclic hydrocarbon groups may have a substituent, and preferred examples of the substituent may include a halogen atom, an alkyl group, a hydroxyl group with a hydrogen atom being substituted, an amino group with a hydrogen atom being substituted and the like. Preferred examples of the halogen atom may include a bromine atom, a chlorine atom and a fluorine atom, and preferred examples of the alkyl group include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a butyl group or at-butyl group. The alkyl group may further have a substituent, and examples of the substituent which may be further possessed by the alkyl group may include a halogen atom, an alkyl group, a hydroxyl group with a hydrogen atom being substituted, and an amino group with a hydrogen atom being substituted.\n\nExamples of the substituent for the hydrogen atom may include an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aralkyl group, a substituted methyl group, a substituted ethyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group and an aralkyloxycarbonyl group. Preferred examples of the alkyl group may include an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, preferred examples of the substituted methyl group may include a methoxymethyl group, a methoxythiomethyl group, a benzyloxymethyl", + "recall": 0.9482758620689655, + "true_md": "US 9,423,690 B2 \n\n115 \n\n116 \n\nThe resin (A) may or may not contains the repeating unit ( c ), but, if the resin contains the repeating unit ( c ), the content of the repeating unit ( c) is preferably in a range of 1 to 30 mo! %, more preferably in a range of 1 to 20 mo! %, still more preferably in a range of 1 to 15 mo! % based on 40 the whole repeating units of the resin (A). The repeating unit ( c) contained in the resin (A) may contain two kinds or more thereof. \n\nThe resin (A) of the present invention may appropriately have a repeating unit other than the repeating unit (b) or ( c ). The resin may further have a repeating unit having an alicyclic hydrocarbon structure having no polar group (for example, the acid group, the hydroxyl group and the cyano group) and not exhibiting acid decomposability as an example of such a repeating unit. Accordingly, when devel› oping by using the developer containing an organic solvent, the solubility of the resin may be appropriately adjusted. Examples of the repeating unit may include a repeating unit represented by Formula (IV). \n\nRa represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or a ----CH$_{2}$---0-Ra$_{2 }$ group. In the formula, Ra$_{2 }$ represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an acyl group. Ra is preferably a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, a hydroxym- ethyl group and a trifluoromethyl group, and particularly preferably a hydrogen atom and a methyl group. \n\nThe cyclic structure possessed by Rs includes a monocy› clic hydrocarbon group and a polycyclic hydrocarbon group. Examples of the monocyclic hydrocarbon group may include a cycloalkyl group having 3 to 12 carbon atoms, such as a cyclopentyl group, a cyclohexyl group, a cyclo› heptyl group and a cyclooctyl group, and a cycloalkenyl group having 3 to 12 carbon atoms, such as a cyclohexenyl group. The monocyclic hydrocarbon group is preferably a monocyclic hydrocarbon group having 3 to 7 carbon atoms, and more preferably a cyclopentyl group or a cyclohexyl group. \n\nThe polycyclic hydrocarbon group includes a ring-as› sembled hydrocarbon group and a bridged cyclic hydrocar- bon group, and examples of the ring-assembled hydrocarbon group may include a bicyclohexyl group, a perhydronaph› thalenyl group and the like. Examples of the bridged cyclic hydrocarbon ring may include a bicyclic hydrocarbon ring such as a pinane ring, a bornane ring, a norpinane ring, a norbornane ring and a bicyclooctane ring (a bicyclo[2.2.2] octane ring, a bicyclo[3.2.l]octane ring and the like), a tricyclic hydrocarbon ring such as a homobledane ring, an adamantine ring, a tricyclo[5.2.l.0 2 • $^{6}$]decane ring and a tricyclo[ 4.3. l.1 $^{2}$•s]undecane ring, a tetracyclic hydrocarbon ring such as a tetracyclo[4.4.0.1 $^{2}$•s.17 • $^{10}$ldodecane ring and a perhydro-l,4-methano-5,8-methanonaphthalene ring, and the like. Further, the bridged cyclic hydrocarbon ring also includes a condensed cyclic hydrocarbon ring, for example, a condensed ring obtained by condensing a plurality of 5- to 8-membered cycloalkane rings, such as a perhydronaphtha› lene (decalin) ring, a perhydroanthracene ring, a perhydro› phenanthrene ring, a perhydroacenaphthene ring, a perhy› drofluorene ring, a perhydroindene ring and a perhydrophenalene ring. \n\nPreferred examples of the bridged cyclic hydrocarbon ring may include a norbornyl group, an adamantyl group, a bicyclooctanyl group, a tricyclo[5,2,l,0 2 • $^{6}$]decanyl group and the like. More preferred examples of the bridged cyclic hydrocarbon ring may include a norbornyl group and an adamantyl group. \n\nThe alicyclic hydrocarbon groups may have a substituent, and preferred examples of the substituent may include a halogen atom, an alkyl group, a hydroxyl group with a hydrogen atom being substituted, an amino group with a hydrogen atom being substituted and the like. Preferred examples of the halogen atom may include a bromine atom, a chlorine atom and a fluorine atom, and preferred examples of the alkyl group include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a butyl group or at-butyl group. The alkyl group may further have a substituent, and examples of the substituent which may be further possessed by the alkyl group may include a halogen atom, an alkyl group, a hydroxyl group with a hydrogen atom being substituted, and an amino group with a hydrogen atom being substituted. \n\nExamples of the substituent for the hydrogen atom may include an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aralkyl group, a substituted methyl group, a substituted ethyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group and an aralkyloxycarbonyl group. Preferred examples of the alkyl group may include an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, preferred examples of the substituted methyl group may include a methoxymethyl group, a methoxythiomethyl group, a benzyloxymethyl \n\nIn Formula (IV), Rs represents a hydrocarbon group having at least one cyclic structure and having no polar group." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8132882808488929, + "doc_id": "f106cfa489cbb39f1405e6bff13c3f80a703816cee58207e336357a347efab64", + "edit_distance": 0.75, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9921875, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "US 2019/0010119 Al\n\nJan. 10, 2019\n\n19", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Jan. 10, 2019 \n\n19 \n\nUS 2019/0010119 Al" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "367d588a7b10c6784ce28d24ffed26406e35bb3912aee23b65e88a61215726be", + "edit_distance": 0.8, + "f1_score": 0.48, + "meteor": 0.8101794934841406, + "precision": 0.3157894736842105, + "pred_md": "221\n\n222\n\n-continued\n\n-continued\n\nUS 9,423,690 B2\n\n5\n\nrn\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n60\n\n65", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "221 \n\nUS 9,423,690 B2 \n\n222 \n\n-continued \n\n-continued" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9342758012542193, + "doc_id": "f64097d31f3ef60ceae0976531ccc23ad8185d95ec83f2fa0f990a82f4eda594", + "edit_distance": 0.5269262634631318, + "f1_score": 0.9657228017883758, + "meteor": 0.7227723041912407, + "precision": 0.972972972972973, + "pred_md": "US 2019/0010119 Al\n\nwherein RA has the same meaning as defined above; each R 12 independently represents a halogen atom, a linear, branched, or cyclic acyloxy group having 2 to 8 carbon atoms optionally substituted with a halogen atom, a linear, branched, or cyclic alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms optionally substituted with a halogen atom, or a linear, branched, or cyclic alkoxy group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms optionally substituted with a halogen atom; A 2 represents a single bond or a linear, branched, or cyclic alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms optionally having an ether bond between a carbon-carbon bond thereof; \"s\" is 0 or 1; \"t\" is an integer of0 to 2; \"c\" is an integer satisfying 0scs5+2t-e; \"d\" is 0 or 1; \"e\" is an integer of 1 to 3; Xis an acid-liable group when \"e\" is 1, and is a hydrogen atom or an acid-liable group when \"e\" is 2 or more with the proviso that at least one of X is an acid-liable group.\n\n[0113] In the repeating unit B2, one or more of the phenolic hydroxyl group bonded to an aromatic ring is protected by an acid-liable group, or the carboxyl group bonded to an aromatic ring is protected by an acid-liable group. The acid-liable group like this is not particularly limited, and any group can be adopted so long as it is decomposed by an acid to form an acidic group that have been used for many known chemically amplified resist components.\n\n[0114] In the general formula (B2), it is preferable to select a tertiary alkyl group as the acid-liable group ofX. When X is a tertiary alkyl group, it is possible to provide a pattern with small LER even when a resist film is formed so as to have a film thickness of 10 to 100 nm and a fine pattern is formed so as to have a line width of 45 nm or less. These tertiary alkyl groups each have 4 to 18 carbon atoms so as to obtain a monomer for the polymerization by distillation. Illustrative examples of the alkyl substituent on the tertiary carbon of the tertiary alkyl group include a linear, branched, or cyclic alkyl substituent having 1 to 15 carbon atoms optionally having an oxygen-containing functional group(s) such as an ether group and a carbonyl group, in which the alkyl substituents on the tertiary carbon may be bonded with each other to form a ring.\n\n[0115] Illustrative examples of the alkyl substituent on the tertiary carbon of the tertiary alkyl group include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an adamantyl group, a norbornyl group, a tetrahydrofuran-2-yl group, 7-oxanor› bornan-2-yl group, a cyclopentyl group, 2-tetrahydrofuril group, a tricyclo[5.2.l.0 2 · ]decyl group, a tetracyclo[4.4.0. 6 1 2 5 · .1 7 · 10 ]dodecyl group, and 3-oxo-1-cyclohexyl group. The tertiary alkyl group that has these substituents is not particularly limited, and illustrative examples thereof include a tert-butyl group, a tert-pentyl group, a l-ethyl-1methylpropyl group, a 1,1-diethylpropyl group, a 1,1,2-\n\n28\n\nJan. 10, 2019\n\nlpropyl group, a l-adamantyl-1-methylethyl group, a l-methyl-1-(2-norbornyl)ethyl group, a l-methyl-1-(tetra› hydrofuran-2-yl)ethyl group, a l-methyl-1-(7-oxanorbor› nan-2-yl)ethyl group, a 1-methylcyclopentyl group, a 1-eth› ylcyclopentyl group, a 1-propylcyclopentyl group, a 1-cyclopentylcyclopentyl group, a 1-cyclohexylcyclopentyl group, a 1-(2-tetrahydrofuril)cyclopentyl group, a 1-(7-ox› anorbornan-2-yl)cyclopentyl group, a 1-methylcyclohexyl group, a 1-ethylcyclohexyl group, a 1-cyclopentylcyclo› hexyl group, a 1-cyclohexylcyclohexyl group, a 2-methyl2-norbornyl group, a 2-ethyl-2-norbornyl group, a 8-methyl8-tricyclo[5.2.l .02·6]decyl group, a 8-ethyl-8-tricyclo[5.2.1. 0 26 · ]decyl group, a 3-methyl-3-tetracyclo[ 4.4.0.1 2 · .1 5 7 · 10 ] dodecyl group, a 3-ethyl-3-tetracyclo[ 4.4.0.1 2 · .1 5 7 · 10 ] dodecyl group, a 2-methyl-2-adamantyl group, a 2-ethyl-2adamantyl group, a l-methyl-3-oxo-l-cyclohexyl group, a l-methyl-1-(tetrahydrofuran-2-yl)ethyl group, a 5-hydroxy2-methyl-2-adamantyl group, and 5-hydroxy-2-ethyl-2-ada› mantyl group.\n\n[0116] In addition, an acetal group shown by the following general formula (B2-1) is often used as the acid-labile group. This acetal group is a useful choice as an acid-labile group that stably provides a pattern whose interface with a sub› strate is relatively rectangular,\n\nwherein R 16 represents a hydrogen atom, or a linear, branched, or cyclic alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms; and Y represents a linear, branched, or cyclic alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms.\n\n[0117] In this formula, R 16 is appropriately selected in accordance with design of the group decomposable by an acid. For example, a hydrogen atom is selected in design including decomposition by a strong acid while securing relatively high stability, and a linear alkyl group is selected in design using relatively high reactivity for higher sensi› tivity to pH. In case of designing larger change of solubility by decomposition with the terminal being substituted with a relatively large alkyl group, R 16 preferably contains a sec› ondary carbon having a bond with an acetal carbon, although it depends on the combination of an acid generator and a basic compound that are blended to the resist composition of the present invention. Illustrative examples of R 16 in which acetal carbon is bonded to a secondary carbon include an isopropyl group, a sec-butyl group, a cyclopentyl group, and a cyclohexyl group.\n\n[0118] In the general formula (B2-1 ), Y preferably repre› sents a polycyclic alkyl group having 7 to 30 carbon atoms. These Y enables the inventive resist composition to have higher resolution. When Y represents a polycyclic alkyl group, it is preferable to form a bond between the acetal oxygen and the secondary carbon constituting the polycyclic structure. When the bond is on a secondary carbon of the ring structure, the polymer compound is more stable and the resist composition has better storage stability compared to the case in which the bond is on a tertiary carbon, thereby preventing the resolution from degradation. This instance is preferable compared to the case in which Y is bonded on a primary carbon that mediate the linear alkyl having one or", + "recall": 0.9585798816568047, + "true_md": "Jan. 10, 2019 \n\n28 \n\nUS 2019/0010119 Al \n\ntrimethylpropyl group, a l-adamantyl-1-methylethyl group, a l-methyl-1-(2-norbornyl)ethyl group, a l-methyl-1-(tetra› hydrofuran-2-yl)ethyl group, a l-methyl-1-(7-oxanorbor› nan-2-yl)ethyl group, a 1-methylcyclopentyl group, a 1-eth› ylcyclopentyl group, a 1-propylcyclopentyl group, a 1-cyclopentylcyclopentyl group, a 1-cyclohexylcyclopentyl group, a 1-(2-tetrahydrofuril)cyclopentyl group, a 1-(7-ox› anorbornan-2-yl)cyclopentyl group, a 1-methylcyclohexyl group, a 1-ethylcyclohexyl group, a 1-cyclopentylcyclo› hexyl group, a 1-cyclohexylcyclohexyl group, a 2-methyl- 2-norbornyl group, a 2-ethyl-2-norbornyl group, a 8-methyl- 8-tricyclo[5.2.l .02•6]decyl group, a 8-ethyl-8-tricyclo[5.2.1. 0 2 • 6 ]decyl group, a 3-methyl-3-tetracyclo[ 4.4.0.1 2 • $^{5 }$.1 7 • 10 ] dodecyl group, a 3-ethyl-3-tetracyclo[ 4.4.0.1 2 • $^{5 }$.1 7 • 10 ] dodecyl group, a 2-methyl-2-adamantyl group, a 2-ethyl-2- adamantyl group, a l-methyl-3-oxo-l-cyclohexyl group, a l-methyl-1-(tetrahydrofuran-2-yl)ethyl group, a 5-hydroxy- 2-methyl-2-adamantyl group, and 5-hydroxy-2-ethyl-2-ada› mantyl group. \n\n[0116] In addition, an acetal group shown by the following general formula (B2-1) is often used as the acid-labile group. This acetal group is a useful choice as an acid-labile group that stably provides a pattern whose interface with a sub› strate is relatively rectangular, \n\nwherein RA has the same meaning as defined above; each R 12 independently represents a halogen atom, a linear, branched, or cyclic acyloxy group having 2 to 8 carbon atoms optionally substituted with a halogen atom, a linear, branched, or cyclic alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms optionally substituted with a halogen atom, or a linear, branched, or cyclic alkoxy group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms optionally substituted with a halogen atom; A 2 represents a single bond or a linear, branched, or cyclic alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms optionally having an ether bond between a carbon-carbon bond thereof; \"s\" is 0 or 1; \"t\" is an integer of0 to 2; \"c\" is an integer satisfying 0scs5+2t-e; \"d\" is 0 or 1; \"e\" is an integer of 1 to 3; Xis an acid-liable group when \"e\" is 1, and is a hydrogen atom or an acid-liable group when \"e\" is 2 or more with the proviso that at least one of X is an acid-liable group. \n\n[0113] In the repeating unit B2, one or more of the phenolic hydroxyl group bonded to an aromatic ring is protected by an acid-liable group, or the carboxyl group bonded to an aromatic ring is protected by an acid-liable group. The acid-liable group like this is not particularly limited, and any group can be adopted so long as it is decomposed by an acid to form an acidic group that have been used for many known chemically amplified resist components. \n\n[0114] In the general formula (B2), it is preferable to select a tertiary alkyl group as the acid-liable group ofX. When X is a tertiary alkyl group, it is possible to provide a pattern with small LER even when a resist film is formed so as to have a film thickness of 10 to 100 nm and a fine pattern is formed so as to have a line width of 45 nm or less. These tertiary alkyl groups each have 4 to 18 carbon atoms so as to obtain a monomer for the polymerization by distillation. Illustrative examples of the alkyl substituent on the tertiary carbon of the tertiary alkyl group include a linear, branched, or cyclic alkyl substituent having 1 to 15 carbon atoms optionally having an oxygen-containing functional group(s) such as an ether group and a carbonyl group, in which the alkyl substituents on the tertiary carbon may be bonded with each other to form a ring. \n\n[0115] Illustrative examples of the alkyl substituent on the tertiary carbon of the tertiary alkyl group include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an adamantyl group, a norbornyl group, a tetrahydrofuran-2-yl group, 7-oxanor› bornan-2-yl group, a cyclopentyl group, 2-tetrahydrofuril group, a tricyclo[5.2.l.0 2 • 6 ]decyl group, a tetracyclo[4.4.0. 1 2 • $^{5}$.1 7 • $^{10}$]dodecyl group, and 3-oxo-1-cyclohexyl group. The tertiary alkyl group that has these substituents is not particularly limited, and illustrative examples thereof include a tert-butyl group, a tert-pentyl group, a l-ethyl-1- methylpropyl group, a 1,1-diethylpropyl group, a 1,1,2-\n\n[0118] In the general formula (B2-1 ), Y preferably repre› sents a polycyclic alkyl group having 7 to 30 carbon atoms. These Y enables the inventive resist composition to have higher resolution. When Y represents a polycyclic alkyl group, it is preferable to form a bond between the acetal oxygen and the secondary carbon constituting the polycyclic structure. When the bond is on a secondary carbon of the ring structure, the polymer compound is more stable and the resist composition has better storage stability compared to the case in which the bond is on a tertiary carbon, thereby preventing the resolution from degradation. This instance is preferable compared to the case in which Y is bonded on a primary carbon that mediate the linear alkyl having one or \n\nhaving 1 to 30 carbon atoms. [0117] In this formula, R 16 is appropriately selected in accordance with design of the group decomposable by an acid. For example, a hydrogen atom is selected in design including decomposition by a strong acid while securing relatively high stability, and a linear alkyl group is selected in design using relatively high reactivity for higher sensi› tivity to pH. In case of designing larger change of solubility by decomposition with the terminal being substituted with a relatively large alkyl group, R 16 preferably contains a sec› ondary carbon having a bond with an acetal carbon, although it depends on the combination of an acid generator and a basic compound that are blended to the resist composition of the present invention. Illustrative examples of R 16 in which acetal carbon is bonded to a secondary carbon include an isopropyl group, a sec-butyl group, a cyclopentyl group, and a cyclohexyl group. \n\nwherein R 16 represents a hydrogen atom, or a linear, branched, or cyclic alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms; and Y represents a linear, branched, or cyclic alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms. 16" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9563275956149941, + "doc_id": "6642acdd4b6527fd7e3c514135ddba6ea1b00449d821edfb9c8b73fa3eb0ce77", + "edit_distance": 0.07726597325408618, + "f1_score": 0.9855072463768116, + "meteor": 0.9793636791534249, + "precision": 0.9916666666666667, + "pred_md": "US 2012/0003590 Al\n\nJan. 5, 2012\n\n75\n\n(2) Compound Having a Nitrogen-Containing Heterocyclic Structure\n\n[0367] The nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring may or may not have aromaticity, may contain a plurality of nitrogen atoms, and may further contain a heteroatom other than nitro› gen. Specific examples of the compound include a compound having an imidazole structure ( e.g., 2-phenylbenzimidazole, 2,4,5-triphenylimidazole), a compound having a piperidine structure [e.g., N-hydroxyethylpiperidine, bis(l,2,2,6,6-pen› tamethyl-4-piperidyl)sebacate], a compound having a pyri› dine structure (e.g., 4-dimethylaminopyridine), and a com› pound having an antipyrine structure ( e.g., antipyrine, hydroxyantipyrine ).\n\n[0368] A compound having two or more ring structures is also suitably used. Specific examples thereof include 1,5diazabicyclo[4.3.0]non-5-ene and 1,8-diazabicyclo[5.4.0] undec-7-ene.\n\n## (3) Phenoxy Group-Containing Amine Compound\n\n[0369] The phenoxy group-containing amine compound is a compound where the alkyl group contained in an amine compound has a phenoxy group at the terminal opposite the N atom. The phenoxy group may have a substituent such as alkyl group, alkoxy group, halogen atom, cyano group, nitro group, carboxy group, carboxylic acid ester group, sulfonic acid ester group, aryl group, aralkyl group, acyloxy group and aryloxy group.\n\n[0370] The compound preferably has at least one oxyalky› lene chain between the phenoxy group and the nitrogen atom. The number of oxyalkylene chains in one molecule is pref› erably from 3 to 9, more preferably from 4 to 6. Among oxyalkylene chains, -CH CH 0- is preferred. 2 2\n\n[0371] Specific examples of the compound include 2-[2{ 2-(2,2-dimethoxyphenoxyethoxy )ethyl }-bis-(2-methoxy-\n\nethy 1) ]-amine and Compounds ( C 1-1) to ( C3-3) illustrated in paragraph [0066] ofU.S. Patent Application Publication No. 200710224539Al.\n\n[0372] The phenoxy group-containing amine compound is obtained, for example, by reacting a primary or secondary amine having a phenoxy group with a haloalkyl ether under heating and after adding an aqueous solution of a strong base such as sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide and tet› raalkylammonium, extracting the reaction product with an organic solvent such as ethyl acetate and chloroform. The phenoxy group-containing amine compound may be also obtained by reacting a primary or secondary amine with a haloalkyl ether having a phenoxy group at the terminal under heating and after adding an aqueous solution of a strong base such as sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide and tet› raalkylammonium, extracting the reaction product with an organic solvent such as ethyl acetate and chloroform.\n\n## ( 4) Ammonium Salt\n\n[0373] An ammonium salt is also appropriately used as the basic compound.\n\n[0374] Examples of the anion of the ammonium salt include a halide, a sulfonate, a borate and a phosphate. Among these, a halide and a sulfonate are preferred.\n\n[0375] The halide is preferably chloride, bromide or iodide.\n\n[0376] The sulfonate is preferably an organic sulfonate having a carbon number of 1 to 20. Examples of the organic sulfonate include an alkylsulfonate having a carbon number of 1 to 20 and an arylsulfonate.\n\n[0377] The alkyl group contained in the alkylsulfonate may have a substituent, and examples of the substituent include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, an alkoxy group, an acyl group and an aryl group. Specific examples of the alkylsulfonate include methanesulfonate, ethane› sulfonate, butanesulfonate, hexanesulfonate, octane› sulfonate, benzylsulfonate, trifluoromethanesulfonate, pen› tafluoroethanesulfonate and nonafluoro butanesulfonate.", + "recall": 0.9794238683127572, + "true_md": "US 2012/0003590 Al \n\n75 \n\nJan. 5, 2012 \n\n(2) Compound Having a Nitrogen-Containing Heterocyclic Structure \n\n[0367] The nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring may or may not have aromaticity, may contain a plurality of nitrogen atoms, and may further contain a heteroatom other than nitro› gen. Specific examples of the compound include a compound having an imidazole structure ( e.g., 2-phenylbenzimidazole, 2,4,5-triphenylimidazole), a compound having a piperidine structure [e.g., N-hydroxyethylpiperidine, bis(l,2,2,6,6-pen› tamethyl-4-piperidyl)sebacate], a compound having a pyri› dine structure (e.g., 4-dimethylaminopyridine), and a com› pound having an antipyrine structure ( e.g., antipyrine, hydroxyantipyrine ). \n\n[0368] A compound having two or more ring structures is also suitably used. Specific examples thereof include 1,5- diazabicyclo[4.3.0]non-5-ene and 1,8-diazabicyclo[5.4.0] undec-7-ene. \n\n[0369] The phenoxy group-containing amine compound is a compound where the alkyl group contained in an amine compound has a phenoxy group at the terminal opposite the N atom. The phenoxy group may have a substituent such as alkyl group, alkoxy group, halogen atom, cyano group, nitro group, carboxy group, carboxylic acid ester group, sulfonic acid ester group, aryl group, aralkyl group, acyloxy group and aryloxy group. \n\n[0370] The compound preferably has at least one oxyalky› lene chain between the phenoxy group and the nitrogen atom. The number of oxyalkylene chains in one molecule is pref› erably from 3 to 9, more preferably from 4 to 6. Among oxyalkylene chains, -CH$_{2}$CH$_{2}$0-is preferred. \n\n[0371] Specific examples of the compound include 2-[2- { 2-(2,2-dimethoxyphenoxyethoxy )ethyl }-bis-(2-methoxy-\n\nethy 1) ]-amine and Compounds ( C 1-1) to ( C3-3) illustrated in paragraph [0066] ofU.S. Patent Application Publication No. 200710224539Al. \n\n[0372] The phenoxy group-containing amine compound is obtained, for example, by reacting a primary or secondary amine having a phenoxy group with a haloalkyl ether under heating and after adding an aqueous solution of a strong base such as sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide and tet› raalkylammonium, extracting the reaction product with an organic solvent such as ethyl acetate and chloroform. The phenoxy group-containing amine compound may be also obtained by reacting a primary or secondary amine with a haloalkyl ether having a phenoxy group at the terminal under heating and after adding an aqueous solution of a strong base such as sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide and tet› raalkylammonium, extracting the reaction product with an organic solvent such as ethyl acetate and chloroform. \n\n[0373] An ammonium salt is also appropriately used as the basic compound. \n\n[0374] Examples of the anion of the ammonium salt include a halide, a sulfonate, a borate and a phosphate. Among these, a halide and a sulfonate are preferred. \n\n[0375] The halide is preferably chloride, bromide or iodide. \n\n[0376] The sulfonate is preferably an organic sulfonate having a carbon number of 1 to 20. Examples of the organic sulfonate include an alkylsulfonate having a carbon number of 1 to 20 and an arylsulfonate. \n\n[0377] The alkyl group contained in the alkylsulfonate may have a substituent, and examples of the substituent include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, an alkoxy group, an acyl group and an aryl group. Specific examples of the alkylsulfonate include methanesulfonate, ethane› sulfonate, butanesulfonate, hexanesulfonate, octane› sulfonate, benzylsulfonate, trifluoromethanesulfonate, pen› tafluoroethanesulfonate and nonafluoro butanesulfonate. \n\n## (3) Phenoxy Group-Containing Amine Compound\n\n## ( 4) Ammonium Salt" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9372499359922759, + "doc_id": "dbd155ececb04f4532bbdbe45dcbe72eb820b723ae08951407369a9f2d3313cf", + "edit_distance": 0.047872340425531915, + "f1_score": 0.9369369369369369, + "meteor": 0.9860640142576864, + "precision": 0.8888888888888888, + "pred_md": "213\n\n-continued\n\nUS 9,423,690 B2\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n60\n\n65\n\n214\n\n(7) Low molecular weight compound containing a nitro› gen atom and having a group capable of leaving by the action of an acid\n\nThe composition of the present invention may contain a low molecular weight compound containing a nitrogen atom and having a group capable of leaving by the action of an acid (hereinafter, also referred to as \"a low molecular weight compound (D)\" or \"compound (D)\"). The low molecular weight compound (D) has preferably basicity after the group capable of leaving by the action of an acid is left.\n\nThe group capable of leaving by the action of an acid is not particularly limited to, but preferably an acetal group, a carbonate group, a carbamate group, a tertiary ester group, a tertiary hydroxyl group or a hemiaminal ether group, and particularly preferably a carbamate group or a hemiaminal ether group.\n\nThe molecular weight of the low molecular weight com› pound (D) having a group capable of leaving by the action of an acid is preferably 100 to 1,000, more preferably 100 to 700, and particularly preferably 100 to 500.\n\nThe compound (D) is preferably an amine derivative having a group capable of leaving by the action of an acid on its nitrogen atom.\n\nThe compound (D) may have a carbamate group having a protecting group on its nitrogen atom. The protecting group constituting the carbamate group may be represented by the following Formula (d-1).\n\nIn Formula (d-1), Each of R' independently represents a hydrogen atom, a straight or branched alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group or an alkoxyalkyl group. R' may be bound with each other to form a ring.\n\nR' is preferably a straight or branched alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group or an aryl group, and more preferably a straight or branched alkyl group or a cycloalkyl group.", + "recall": 0.9904761904761905, + "true_md": "US 9,423,690 B2 \n\n213 \n\n214 \n\n-continued \n\n-continued \n\n(7) Low molecular weight compound containing a nitro› gen atom and having a group capable of leaving by the action of an acid \n\nThe composition of the present invention may contain a low molecular weight compound containing a nitrogen atom and having a group capable of leaving by the action of an acid (hereinafter, also referred to as \"a low molecular weight compound (D)\" or \"compound (D)\"). The low molecular weight compound (D) has preferably basicity after the group capable of leaving by the action of an acid is left. \n\nThe group capable of leaving by the action of an acid is not particularly limited to, but preferably an acetal group, a carbonate group, a carbamate group, a tertiary ester group, a tertiary hydroxyl group or a hemiaminal ether group, and particularly preferably a carbamate group or a hemiaminal ether group. \n\nThe molecular weight of the low molecular weight com› pound (D) having a group capable of leaving by the action of an acid is preferably 100 to 1,000, more preferably 100 to 700, and particularly preferably 100 to 500. \n\nThe compound (D) is preferably an amine derivative having a group capable of leaving by the action of an acid on its nitrogen atom. \n\nThe compound (D) may have a carbamate group having a protecting group on its nitrogen atom. The protecting group constituting the carbamate group may be represented by the following Formula (d-1). \n\nIn Formula (d-1), \n\nEach of R’ independently represents a hydrogen atom, a straight or branched alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group or an alkoxyalkyl group. R’ may be bound with each other to form a ring. \n\nR’ is preferably a straight or branched alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group or an aryl group, and more preferably a straight or branched alkyl group or a cycloalkyl group." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.974876281406177, + "doc_id": "794b0b191040cc5f7482df6c543ed365c32bc6333646ab4b98e807af684df81e", + "edit_distance": 0.19057377049180327, + "f1_score": 0.9797979797979799, + "meteor": 0.9743397056408956, + "precision": 0.9897959183673469, + "pred_md": "US 2019/0010119 Al\n\noptionally substituted with a halogen atom; A 2 represents a single bond or a linear, branched, or cyclic alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms optionally having an ether bond between a carbon-carbon bond thereof; \"s\" is 0 or 1; \"t\" is an integer of0 to 2; \"c\" is an integer satisfying 0scs5+2t-e; \"d\" is 0 or 1; \"e\" is an integer of 1 to 3; Xis an acid-liable group when \"e\" is 1, and is a hydrogen atom or an acid-liable group when \"e\" is 2 or more with the proviso that at least one of X is an acid-liable group.\n\n[0038] When the component (B) contains the repeating unit (B2) as described above, it is possible to increase the solubility of the component (B) to an alkaline developer.\n\n[0039] It is preferable that the resist composition be a chemically amplified negative resist composition, and the component (B) further contain a repeating unit shown by the following general formula (BN2) in addition to the repeating unit (Bl)\n\nwherein RA has the same meaning as defined above; each R 12 independently represents a halogen atom, a linear, branched, or cyclic acyloxy group having 2 to 8 carbon atoms optionally substituted with a halogen atom, a linear, branched, or cyclic alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms optionally substituted with a halogen atom, or a linear, branched, or cyclic alkoxy group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms optionally substituted with a halogen atom; A 2 represents a single bond or a linear, branched, or cyclic alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms optionally having an ether bond between a carbon-carbon bond thereof; W represents a hydrogen atom, a linear, branched, or cyclic monovalent aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms optionally having an ether group, a carbonyl group, or a carbonyloxy group between a carbon-carbon bond thereof, or a monovalent aromatic ring group optionally having a substituent; Rx and Ry each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 15 carbon atoms optionally substituted with a hydroxy group or an alkoxy group, or a monovalent aromatic ring group optionally having a substituent, with the proviso that Rx and Ry do not both represent hydrogen atoms, and Rx and Ry are option› ally bonded with each other to form a ring together with the carbon atom to which Rx and Ry are bonded; \"y\" is an integer of 0 to 2; \"u\" is 0 or 1; \"l\" is an integer satisfying 0sls5+2y-m; and \"m\" is an integer of 1 to 3.\n\n[0040] When the component (B) contains the repeating unit (BN2), the inventive resist composition further improves the resolution performance when it is prepared as a chemically amplified negative resist composition.\n\n[0041] It is preferable that the resist composition further contain a crosslinking agent.\n\n4\n\nJan. 10, 2019\n\n[0042] When the inventive resist composition contains a crosslinking agent as described above, it is possible to form or enhance the crosslinking structure of the component (B) in preparation as a chemically amplified negative resist composition.\n\n[0043] It is preferable that the component (B) further contain any one or more of repeating units shown by the following general formulae (B3), (B4), and (B5)\n\nwherein RA has the same meaning as defined above; R 13 and R 14 each independently represents a hydroxy group, a halo› gen atom, an acetoxy group, a linear, branched, or cyclic acyloxy group having 2 to 8 carbon atoms optionally sub› stituted with a halogen atom, a linear, branched, or cyclic alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms optionally substi› tuted with a halogen atom, a linear, branched, or cyclic alkoxy group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms optionally substi› tuted with a halogen atom, or a linear, branched, or cyclic alkylcarbonyloxy group having 2 to 8 carbon atoms option› ally substituted with a halogen atom; R 15 represents an acetyl group, an acetoxy group, a halogen atom, a nitro group, a cyano group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, a linear, branched, or cyclic alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, a linear, branched, or cyclic alkoxy group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, a linear, branched, or cyclic acyloxy group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, a linear, branched, or cyclic alkoxyalkyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, or an alkylthioalkyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms; A 3 represents a single bond or a linear, branched, or cyclic alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms optionally having an ether bond between a carbon-carbon bond thereof; \"f' and \"g\" each independently represent an integer of 0 to 4; \"h\" is an integer of 0 or 1; 'T' is an integer of 0 to 5; and \"k\" is an integer of 0 to 2.", + "recall": 0.97, + "true_md": "Jan. 10, 2019 \n\n4 \n\nUS 2019/0010119 Al \n\noptionally substituted with a halogen atom; A 2 represents a single bond or a linear, branched, or cyclic alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms optionally having an ether bond between a carbon-carbon bond thereof; \"s\" is 0 or 1; \"t\" is an integer of0 to 2; \"c\" is an integer satisfying 0scs5+2t-e; \"d\" is 0 or 1; \"e\" is an integer of 1 to 3; Xis an acid-liable group when \"e\" is 1, and is a hydrogen atom or an acid-liable group when \"e\" is 2 or more with the proviso that at least one of X is an acid-liable group. \n\n[0038] When the component (B) contains the repeating unit (B2) as described above, it is possible to increase the solubility of the component (B) to an alkaline developer. \n\n[0039] It is preferable that the resist composition be a chemically amplified negative resist composition, and the component (B) further contain a repeating unit shown by the following general formula (BN2) in addition to the repeating unit (Bl) \n\n[0042] When the inventive resist composition contains a crosslinking agent as described above, it is possible to form or enhance the crosslinking structure of the component (B) in preparation as a chemically amplified negative resist composition. \n\n[0043] It is preferable that the component (B) further contain any one or more of repeating units shown by the following general formulae (B3), (B4), and (B5) \n\nwherein RA has the same meaning as defined above; each R 12 independently represents a halogen atom, a linear, branched, or cyclic acyloxy group having 2 to 8 carbon atoms optionally substituted with a halogen atom, a linear, branched, or cyclic alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms optionally substituted with a halogen atom, or a linear, branched, or cyclic alkoxy group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms optionally substituted with a halogen atom; A 2 represents a single bond or a linear, branched, or cyclic alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms optionally having an ether bond between a carbon-carbon bond thereof; W represents a hydrogen atom, a linear, branched, or cyclic monovalent aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms optionally having an ether group, a carbonyl group, or a carbonyloxy group between a carbon-carbon bond thereof, or a monovalent aromatic ring group optionally having a substituent; Rx and Ry each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 15 carbon atoms optionally substituted with a hydroxy group or an alkoxy group, or a monovalent aromatic ring group optionally having a substituent, with the proviso that Rx and Ry do not both represent hydrogen atoms, and Rx and Ry are option› ally bonded with each other to form a ring together with the carbon atom to which Rx and Ry are bonded; \"y\" is an integer of 0 to 2; \"u\" is 0 or 1; \"l\" is an integer satisfying 0sls5+2y-m; and \"m\" is an integer of 1 to 3. \n\n[0040] When the component (B) contains the repeating unit (BN2), the inventive resist composition further improves the resolution performance when it is prepared as a chemically amplified negative resist composition. \n\n[0041] It is preferable that the resist composition further contain a crosslinking agent. \n\nwherein RA has the same meaning as defined above; R$^{13 }$and R $^{14 }$each independently represents a hydroxy group, a halo› gen atom, an acetoxy group, a linear, branched, or cyclic acyloxy group having 2 to 8 carbon atoms optionally sub› stituted with a halogen atom, a linear, branched, or cyclic alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms optionally substi› tuted with a halogen atom, a linear, branched, or cyclic alkoxy group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms optionally substi› tuted with a halogen atom, or a linear, branched, or cyclic alkylcarbonyloxy group having 2 to 8 carbon atoms option› ally substituted with a halogen atom; R 15 represents an acetyl group, an acetoxy group, a halogen atom, a nitro group, a cyano group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, a linear, branched, or cyclic alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, a linear, branched, or cyclic alkoxy group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, a linear, branched, or cyclic acyloxy group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, a linear, branched, or cyclic alkoxyalkyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, or an alkylthioalkyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms; A 3 represents a single bond or a linear, branched, or cyclic alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms optionally having an ether bond between a carbon-carbon bond thereof; \"f’ and \"g\" each independently represent an integer of 0 to 4; \"h\" is an integer of 0 or 1; ’T’ is an integer of 0 to 5; and \"k\" is an integer of 0 to 2." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6561616839933087, + "doc_id": "35475572e0154029f4bb6b5582eb85464fa43287cc42a79580caf2efc41aab14", + "edit_distance": 0.2222222222222222, + "f1_score": 0.9411764705882353, + "meteor": 0.8751755617977527, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "US 2012/0003590 Al\n\nJan. 5, 2012\n\n89", + "recall": 0.8888888888888888, + "true_md": "US 2012/0003590 Al \n\n89 \n\nJan. 5, 2012 \n\n-continued" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.010973663087257564, + "doc_id": "981b3ed1ce9c1b135b43f03ea5fc43f704642e661d653c6aaf224ba104a0d920", + "edit_distance": 0.8703703703703703, + "f1_score": 0.3076923076923077, + "meteor": 0.14217484817813764, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "US 2012/0003590 Al\n\nJan. 5, 2012\n\n71", + "recall": 0.18181818181818182, + "true_md": "US 2012/0003590 Al \n\n71 \n\nJan. 5, 2012 \n\n[0345] The composition of the present invention may fur› ther contain, as a photo-acid generator, a compound capable of generating a carboxylic acid upon irradiation with an actinic ray or radiation. Examples of such a compound include the followings. \n\n-continued" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8297797089016452, + "doc_id": "a4244265405c46aa7953c28a8d393cc35dcc7b1af0d8449067cf16e4aa85b29f", + "edit_distance": 0.37516339869281046, + "f1_score": 0.9323308270676692, + "meteor": 0.8768760120409517, + "precision": 0.9073170731707317, + "pred_md": "US 9,423,690 B2\n\n23\n\na cycloalkylene group, a divalent aromatic ring group, and a group in combination of an alkylene group and a divalent aromatic ring group.\n\nThe alkylene group of L 1 and Lu includes an alkylene group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms such as a methylene group, an ethylene group, a propylene group, a butylenes group, a hexylene group, and octylene group. An alkylene group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms is preferred, and an alkylene group having 1 or 2 carbon atoms is particularly preferred.\n\nThe cycloalkylene group of Lu is preferably a cycloalky› lene group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms, and examples thereof may include a cyclopropylene group, a cyclobuty› lene group, a cyclopentylene group, a cyclohexylene group, a cycloheptylene group, a cyclooctylene group, a norbonylene group or an adamantylene group.\n\nIn the cycloalkylene group of Lu, the carbon constituting the ring (the carbon contributing to ring formation) may be carbonyl carbon, a heteroatom such as an oxygen atom, and a group having an ester bond to form a lactone ring.\n\nThe divalent aromatic ring group of L 1 and Lu is pref› erably a phenylene group such as 1,4-phenylene group, 1,3-phenylene group, and 1,2-phenylene group, preferably 1,4-naphtylene group, and more preferably 1,4-phenylene group.\n\nL1 is preferably a single bond, a divalent aromatic ring group, a divalent group having a norbomylene group or a divalent group having an adamatylene group, and particularly preferably a single bond.\n\nSpecific examples of the divalent linking group of L 1 are shown below, but the present invention is not limited thereto.\n\n5\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\n50\n\n60\n\n65\n\n24\n\n-continued\n\n0\n\nFrom the viewpoint that, in the case of forming a fine isolated space pattern by achieving the higher contrast (y value is high), the resolution and the space width roughness may be further improved, and in the case of forming a fine hole pattern, high resolution, good EL, and uniformity of local pattern dimension may be achieved for sure, the repeating unit represented by Formula (1-0) may be prefer› ably the repeating unit represented by the following Formula (1-1).\n\nIn Formula (1-1), X represents an alicyclic group.\n\nR1 , R2 , Ra and L 1 each have the same meaning as R 1 , R2 , Ra and L 1 in Formula (1-0), and the specific examples and preferred examples thereof are the same as Ri, R 2 , Ra and L 1 in Formula (1-0).\n\nAn alicyclic group as X may represent a monocyclic, a polycyclic and a bridged group, and preferably the alicyclic group having 3 to 25 carbon atoms.\n\nIn addition, an alicyclic group may have a substituent, examples of the substituent may include the same substitu› ent which may be possessed by the alkyl group of Ri, R 2 , Ru to R 13 , and the ring formed by Ru and R 12 (or Ru and R13 ) being bound with each other, and the alkyl group (a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, a butyl group, a perfluoroalkyl group (for example, a trifluoromethyl group) and the like) and the like.\n\nX represents preferably an alicyclic group having 3 to 25 carbon atoms, more preferably an alicyclic group having 5 to 20 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably a cycloalkyl group having 5 to 15 carbon atoms.\n\nIn addition, X is preferably an alicyclic group as a 3- to 8-membered ring or the condensed ring group, more pref› erably, 5- or 6-membered ring or the condensed ring group.\n\nHereinafter, the structure examples of an alicyclic group as X are shown.\n\nD>", + "recall": 0.9587628865979382, + "true_md": "24 \n\nUS 9,423,690 B2 \n\n23 \n\na cycloalkylene group, a divalent aromatic ring group, and a group in combination of an alkylene group and a divalent aromatic ring group. \n\nThe alkylene group of L$_{1 }$ and Lu includes an alkylene group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms such as a methylene group, an ethylene group, a propylene group, a butylenes group, a hexylene group, and octylene group. An alkylene group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms is preferred, and an alkylene group having 1 or 2 carbon atoms is particularly preferred. \n\nThe cycloalkylene group of Lu is preferably a cycloalky› lene group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms, and examples thereof may include a cyclopropylene group, a cyclobuty› lene group, a cyclopentylene group, a cyclohexylene group, a cycloheptylene group, a cyclooctylene group, a norbo- nylene group or an adamantylene group. \n\nFrom the viewpoint that, in the case of forming a fine isolated space pattern by achieving the higher contrast (y value is high), the resolution and the space width roughness may be further improved, and in the case of forming a fine hole pattern, high resolution, good EL, and uniformity of local pattern dimension may be achieved for sure, the repeating unit represented by Formula (1-0) may be prefer› ably the repeating unit represented by the following Formula (1-1). \n\nIn the cycloalkylene group of Lu, the carbon constituting the ring (the carbon contributing to ring formation) may be carbonyl carbon, a heteroatom such as an oxygen atom, and a group having an ester bond to form a lactone ring. \n\nThe divalent aromatic ring group of L$_{1 }$ and Lu is pref› erably a phenylene group such as 1,4-phenylene group, 1,3-phenylene group, and 1,2-phenylene group, preferably 1,4-naphtylene group, and more preferably 1,4-phenylene group. \n\nL$_{1 }$ is preferably a single bond, a divalent aromatic ring group, a divalent group having a norbomylene group or a divalent group having an adamatylene group, and particu- larly preferably a single bond. \n\nSpecific examples of the divalent linking group of L$_{1 }$ are shown below, but the present invention is not limited thereto. \n\nIn Formula (1-1), \n\nX represents an alicyclic group. \n\nR$_{1}$ , R$_{2}$ , Ra and L$_{1 }$ each have the same meaning as R$_{1}$ , R$_{2}$ , Ra and L$_{1 }$ in Formula (1-0), and the specific examples and preferred examples thereof are the same as Ri, R$_{2}$ , Ra and L$_{1 }$ in Formula (1-0). \n\nAn alicyclic group as X may represent a monocyclic, a polycyclic and a bridged group, and preferably the alicyclic group having 3 to 25 carbon atoms. \n\nIn addition, an alicyclic group may have a substituent, examples of the substituent may include the same substitu› ent which may be possessed by the alkyl group of Ri, R$_{2}$ , Ru to R$_{13}$, and the ring formed by Ru and R$_{12 }$(or Ru and R$_{13}$) being bound with each other, and the alkyl group (a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, a butyl group, a perfluoroalkyl group (for example, a trifluoromethyl group) and the like) and the like. \n\nX represents preferably an alicyclic group having 3 to 25 carbon atoms, more preferably an alicyclic group having 5 to 20 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably a cycloalkyl group having 5 to 15 carbon atoms. \n\nIn addition, X is preferably an alicyclic group as a 3- to 8-membered ring or the condensed ring group, more pref› erably, 5- or 6-membered ring or the condensed ring group. \n\nHereinafter, the structure examples of an alicyclic group as X are shown." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9469062695652543, + "doc_id": "1abd926ec7994f3ce5abe58b28c888be554b8315fa66f617c3a20216ab5a5b38", + "edit_distance": 0.04028436018957346, + "f1_score": 0.9585492227979274, + "meteor": 0.993792082491254, + "precision": 0.9343434343434344, + "pred_md": "83\n\n-continued\n\nIf the resin (A) contains the repeating unit represented by Formula ( 4), the content is preferably 1 mo! % to 40 mo! %, more preferably 2 mo! % to 30 mo! %, and particularly preferably 5 mo! % to 25 mo! %, base on the whole repeating unit in the resin (A).\n\nThe resin (A) may contain the repeating unit (b) having a polar group other than the repeating unit represented by Formula (1-2). Because of containing the repeating unit (b'), for example, the sensitivity of the composition having the resin may be improved. The repeating unit (b) is preferably a non acid-decomposable repeating unit (that is, the unit not having acid-decomposable group).\n\n- A \"polar group\" which may be contained in the repeating unit (b) includes, for example, the following (1) to ( 4 ). Further, hereinafter, \"electronegativity\" means the value by Pauling.\n\nUS 9,423,690 B2\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\n- (1) A functional group containing a structure in which an oxygen atom and an atom having an electronegativity dif› ference of 1.1 or more from an oxygen atom are bound by a single bond.\n- This polar group includes for example, a group containing 40 the structure represented by O-H such as a hydroxyl group.\n- (2) A functional group containing a structure in which a nitrogen atom and an atom having an electronegativity difference of0.6 or more from a nitrogen atom are bound by a single bond.\n\nThis polar group includes for example, a group containing the structure represented by N-H such as an amino group.\n\n- (3) A functional group containing a structure in which two atoms having an electronegativity difference of 0.5 or more from each other are bound by a double bond or triple bond.\n\nThis polar group includes, for example, a group contain› ing the structure represented by C N, C=O, N=O, S=O or C N.\n\n- ( 4) A functional group having an ionic moiety\n- This polar group includes, for example, a group having a moiety represented by N+ ors+.\n\nThe specific examples of the partial structure which may be contained in the \"polar group\" are shown below.\n\n0\n\n\"\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n60\n\n65\n\n84\n\n-continued\n\nl\n\nThe polar group which may be contained in the repeating unit (b) is preferably selected from the group consisting of a hydroxyl group, a cyano group, a lactone group, a sultone group, a carboxylic acid group, a sulphonic acid group, an amide group, a sulpone amide group, an ammonium group, a sulphonium group, a carbonate group (---O-CO---0-) (for example, a cyclic carbonate ester structure, and the like) and a combination of two or more thereof, and particularly preferably a group containing an alcoholic hydroxy group, a cyano group, a lactone group, a sultone group, or a cyano› lactone structure.\n\nIf the resin further contains the repeating unit having an alcoholic hydroxy group, the exposure latitude (EL) of the composition containing the resin may be improved.\n\nIf the resin further contains a repeating unit having a cyano group, the sensitivity of the composition containing the resin may be improved.\n\nIf the resin further contains a repeating unit having a lactone group, a dissolution contrast against the developer containing an organic solvent may be further improved. In addition, in this way, the dry etching resistance, the coating property, and the adhesion property on the substrate of the composition containing the resin may be improved.\n\nIf the resin contains a repeating unit with a group con› taining a lactone structure having a cyano group, a dissolution contrast against the development containing an organic solvent may be improved. In addition, in this way, the dry etching resistance, the sensitivity, the coating property, and the adhesion property on the substrate of the composition containing the resin may be improved. Further, in this way, it is possible to charge the function caused by each of a cyano group and a lactone group to a single repeating unit, and to increase the degree of freedom of designing the resin.\n\nThe repeating unit having a polar group is preferably a repeating unit having a lactone structure as a polar group. The repeating unit having a lactone structure is more pref› erably a repeating unit represented by the following Formula (2).", + "recall": 0.9840425531914894, + "true_md": "US 9,423,690 B2 \n\n83 \n\n84 \n\nIf the resin (A) contains the repeating unit represented by Formula ( 4), the content is preferably 1 mo! % to 40 mo! %, more preferably 2 mo! % to 30 mo! %, and particularly preferably 5 mo! % to 25 mo! %, base on the whole repeating unit in the resin (A). \n\nThe resin (A) may contain the repeating unit (b) having a polar group other than the repeating unit represented by Formula (1-2). Because of containing the repeating unit (b’), for example, the sensitivity of the composition having the resin may be improved. The repeating unit (b) is preferably a non acid-decomposable repeating unit (that is, the unit not having acid-decomposable group). \n\nA \"polar group\" which may be contained in the repeating unit (b) includes, for example, the following (1) to ( 4 ). Further, hereinafter, \"electronegativity\" means the value by Pauling. \n\n(1) A functional group containing a structure in which an oxygen atom and an atom having an electronegativity dif› ference of 1.1 or more from an oxygen atom are bound by a single bond. \n\nThis polar group includes for example, a group containing the structure represented by O-H such as a hydroxyl group. \n\n(2) A functional group containing a structure in which a nitrogen atom and an atom having an electronegativity difference of0.6 or more from a nitrogen atom are bound by a single bond. \n\nThis polar group includes for example, a group containing the structure represented by N-H such as an amino group. \n\n(3) A functional group containing a structure in which two atoms having an electronegativity difference of 0.5 or more from each other are bound by a double bond or triple bond. \n\nThis polar group includes, for example, a group contain› ing the structure represented by C N, C=O, N=O, S=O or C N. \n\n( 4) A functional group having an ionic moiety \n\nThis polar group includes, for example, a group having a moiety represented by N+ ors+. \n\nThe specific examples of the partial structure which may be contained in the \"polar group\" are shown below. \n\n-continued \n\nThe polar group which may be contained in the repeating unit (b) is preferably selected from the group consisting of a hydroxyl group, a cyano group, a lactone group, a sultone group, a carboxylic acid group, a sulphonic acid group, an amide group, a sulpone amide group, an ammonium group, a sulphonium group, a carbonate group (---O-CO---0-) (for example, a cyclic carbonate ester structure, and the like) and a combination of two or more thereof, and particularly preferably a group containing an alcoholic hydroxy group, a cyano group, a lactone group, a sultone group, or a cyano› lactone structure. \n\nIf the resin further contains the repeating unit having an alcoholic hydroxy group, the exposure latitude (EL) of the composition containing the resin may be improved. \n\nIf the resin further contains a repeating unit having a cyano group, the sensitivity of the composition containing the resin may be improved. \n\nIf the resin further contains a repeating unit having a lactone group, a dissolution contrast against the developer containing an organic solvent may be further improved. In addition, in this way, the dry etching resistance, the coating property, and the adhesion property on the substrate of the composition containing the resin may be improved. \n\nIf the resin contains a repeating unit with a group con› taining a lactone structure having a cyano group, a dissolu- tion contrast against the development containing an organic solvent may be improved. In addition, in this way, the dry etching resistance, the sensitivity, the coating property, and the adhesion property on the substrate of the composition containing the resin may be improved. Further, in this way, it is possible to charge the function caused by each of a cyano group and a lactone group to a single repeating unit, and to increase the degree of freedom of designing the resin. \n\nThe repeating unit having a polar group is preferably a repeating unit having a lactone structure as a polar group. The repeating unit having a lactone structure is more pref› erably a repeating unit represented by the following Formula (2). \n\n-continued" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "d0aad6849d8f7179f7c1e13a2b25f49b3e54b213337d4f3002a44b0bb382965d", + "edit_distance": 0.7894736842105263, + "f1_score": 0.48, + "meteor": 0.7001522070015221, + "precision": 0.3157894736842105, + "pred_md": "71\n\n72\n\n-continued\n\nUS 9,423,690 B2\n\n5\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n60\n\n65", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "72 \n\n71 \n\nUS 9,423,690 B2 \n\n-continued" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7313220266290781, + "doc_id": "20da8672aa1279b311da8f6de67dc981670ed08b2f5b0d2a4da04f1c0fa97478", + "edit_distance": 0.5156819839533188, + "f1_score": 0.9084745762711864, + "meteor": 0.6727388201238712, + "precision": 0.9054054054054054, + "pred_md": "37\n\n## EXAMPLE 19\n\nLithographic Properties of the Nanocomposite Resists Under 13.4 mn EUV, 1 mn XRL, and Related Protocols\n\nThe lithographic properties of the nanocomposite resists of this invention were evaluated under a number of standard lithographic protocols, including 13.4 mn EUV and 1 mn X-ray protocols. For example, using both EUV and X-ray lithographic protocols for samples 2a through 2d (see Example 2), high sensitivity was observed for both EUVL exposure (1.0-1.2 mJ/cm 2 ) and XRL exposure (70---100 mJ/cm 2 ) and high contrast (y=5.2 for EUVL and y=5.1 for XRL) was also established. These resists also constitute potential candidates for low voltage EB lithography (sensitivity=0.6 µC/cm 2 ; contrast=4.5).\n\nWhat is claimed is:\n\n- 1. A nanocomposite resist polymer comprising:\n- a photoacid generating component; and\n- a styrene component, wherein the photoacid generating component and styrene component are copolymerized and wherein the photoacid generating component com› prises [p-CH 2 -C(CH3 )C(O)OC H4 6 SMe2 ]OSO2 CF . 3\n- 2. The nanocomposite resist polymer of claim 1, wherein the styrene component comprises tetrahydropyranyl oxysty› rene (THPS), para-hydroxy styrene (PHS), poly-(tetrahy› dropyranyl oxystyrene) (poly-THPS), poly-(para-hydroxy styrene (poly-PHS), or combinations thereof.\n- 3. The nanocomposite resist polymer of claim 1 further comprising a polyhedral oligosilsequioxane component.\n- 4. The nanocomposite resist polymer of claim 3, wherein the polyhedral oligosilsequioxane component comprises 3-(3,5, 7,9,11,13,15-heptacyclo-pentylpentacyclo-[9.5.l .1 3 · 9 . 1 · 5 15 .1 7 · 13 ]octasiloxane-l-yl)propyl methacrylate; 3-[(3,5,7, 9,11, 13,15-heptacyclopentylpentacyclo-[9.5.l .l 3· 9 .l 5 · 15 .1 7 · 13] octasiloxan-1-yloxy )dimethy lsily l]propy 1 methacry late; 1,3,5, 7,9, 11, 13-heptacyclopentyl-15vinylpentacyclo[9 .5.1.1 3 · 9 .1 5 · 15 .1 7 · 13 ]octasiloxane, or combinations thereof.\n- 5. The nanocomposite resist polymer of claim 3, wherein the polyhedral oligosilsequioxane component comprises Allylcyclohexyl-POSS, Allylcyclopentyl-POSS, Allylisobu› tyl-POSS, Tris(dimethylvinyl)cyclohexyl-POSS, Tris(dim› ethylvinyl)cyclo-pentyl-POSS, Tris(dimethylvinyl)isobutyl› POSS, Acrylocyclohexyl-POSS, Acrylocyclopentyl-POSS, Acryloisobutyl-POSS, Methacrylcyclohexyl POSS, Meth› acrylcyclopentyl POSS, Methacrylisobutyl POSS, Meth› acrylisooctyl POSS, Norbornenylethylcyclohexyl-POSS, N orborneny lethy lcyclopentyl-POSS, N orborneny lethyliso butyl-POSS, EpoxycyclohexylCyclohexyl-POSS, EpoxycyclohexylCyclopentyl-POSS, Epoxycyclohexyl› isobutyl-POSS, Epoxycyclohexyldisilanolisobutyl-POSS, 8-substituted Epoxycyclohexyl-POSS Cage, IO-substituted Epoxycyclohexyl-POSS Cage, 12-substituted Epoxycyclo› hexyl-POSS Cage, Epoxypropylcyclopentyl-POSS, Epoxypropylisobutyl-POSS, Glycidylcyclopentyl-POSS, Glycidylethyl-POSS, Glycidylisobutyl-POSS, Glycidyl› isooctyl-POSS, or combinations thereof.\n- 6. The nanocomposite resist polymer of claim 3, wherein the polymer is prepared from about 5% to about 20% by weight of the photoacid generating component, about 70% to about 90% by weight of the styrene component, and about 3% to about 20% by weight of the polyhedral oligosilse› quioxane component.\n\n5\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n60\n\n- 7. The nanocomposite resist polymer of claim 3, wherein 65 the polymer is prepared from about 5% to about 15% by weight of the photoacid generating component, about 70%\n\nUS 7,049,044 B2\n\n38\n\nto about 85% by weight of the styrene component, and about 10% to about 15% by weight of the polyhedral oligosilse› quioxane component.\n\n- 8. The nanocomposite resist polymer of claim 1, further comprising a methacrylate component.\n- 9. The nanocomposite resist polymer of claim 8, wherein the methacrylate component comprises methyl methacry› late, t-butyl methacrylate, methacrylic acid, or a combina› tion thereof.\n- 10. The nanocomposite resist polymer of claim 8, further comprising a dissolution promoter.\n- 11. The nanocomposite resist polymer of claim 10, wherein the dissolution promoter comprises itaconic anhy› dride.\n- 12. The nanocomposite resist polymer of claim 1, wherein the polymer is prepared from about 10% to about 20% by weight of the photoacid generating component, about 80% to about 90% by weight of the styrene component.\n- 13. A lithographic process comprising the steps of exposing a lithographic recording medium to a radiation source and developing the exposed recording medium wherein the lithographic recording medium comprises the nanocompos› ite resist polymer of claim 1.\n- 14. The lithographic process of claim 13 wherein the process is an extreme ultraviolet lithographic process.\n- 15. The lithographic process of claim 13 wherein the process is an X-ray lithographic process.\n- 16. The lithographic process of claim 13 wherein the process is a vacuum ultraviolet lithographic process.\n- 17. The lithographic process of claim 13 wherein the process is an electron beam lithographic process.\n- 18. The lithographic process of claim 13 wherein the process is an ion beam lithographic process.\n- 19. A nanocomposite resist polymer comprising tetrahydropyranyl oxystyrene or poly(hydroxystyrene), 3-(3,5,7, 9,11,13,15-heptacyclopentylpentacyclo-[9.5. l .1 3 9 · .1 5 · 15 .1 7 · 13] octasiloxane-1-y l)propy 1 methacry late, and [p-CH 2 -C (CH3 )C(O)-OC6H4 SMe2]OSO2CF 3 .\n- 20. The nanocomposite resist polymer of claim 19, further comprising t-butyl methacrylate.\n- 21. A nanocomposite resist polymer comprising:\n- a photoacid generating component; and\n- a styrene component, wherein the photoacid generating component comprises [p-CH2 -C(CH3)C(O) OC6H4 SMe2]OSO2CF 3 .\n- 22. A nanocomposite resist polymer comprising:\n- a photoacid generating component;\n- a styrene component; and\n- a polyhedral oligosilsequioxane component.\n- 23. The nanocomposite resist polymer of claim 22, wherein the polyhedral oligosilsequioxane component com› prises 3-(3,5,7,9,11,13, 15-heptacyclo-pentylpentacyclo› [9.5. l. l 3·9 l . 5 · 15 .1 7 · 13 ]octasiloxane-l-yl)propyl methacry› late; 3-[ (3,5, 7,9, 11, 13, 15-heptacyclopentylpentacyclo[9.5.1.1 3 · 9 .1 5 · 15 .1 7 · 13 ]octasiloxan-1-yloxy)dimethylsilyl] propyl methacrylate; 1,3,5, 7,9, 11,13-heptacyclopentyl15vinylpentacyclo-[9.5.l .l 3·9 .l 5 · 15 .l 7· 13 ]octasiloxane, or combinations thereof.\n- 24. The nanocomposit resist polymer of claim 22, wherein the polyhedral oligosilsequioxane component comprises Allylcyclohexyl-POSS, Allylcyclopentyl-POSS, Allylisobu› tyl-POSS, Tris(dimethylvinyl)cyclohexyl-POSS, Tris(dim› ethylvinyl)cyclo-pentyl-POSS, Tris( dimethylvinyl)isobutyl› POSS, Acrylocyclohexyl-POSS, Acrylocyclopentyl-POSS, Acryloisobutyl-POSS, Methacrylcyclohexyl POSS, Meth› acrylcyclopentyl POSS, Methacrylisobutyl POSS, Meth› acrylisooctyl POSS, Norbornenylethylcyclohexyl-POSS,", + "recall": 0.9115646258503401, + "true_md": "38 \n\nUS 7,049,044 B2 \n\n37 \n\n## EXAMPLE 19\n\nto about 85% by weight of the styrene component, and about 10% to about 15% by weight of the polyhedral oligosilse› quioxane component. \n\n8. The nanocomposite resist polymer of claim 1, further comprising a methacrylate component. \n\n9. The nanocomposite resist polymer of claim 8, wherein the methacrylate component comprises methyl methacry› late, t-butyl methacrylate, methacrylic acid, or a combina› tion thereof. \n\n10. The nanocomposite resist polymer of claim 8, further comprising a dissolution promoter. \n\n11. The nanocomposite resist polymer of claim 10, wherein the dissolution promoter comprises itaconic anhy› dride. \n\n12. The nanocomposite resist polymer of claim 1, wherein the polymer is prepared from about 10% to about 20% by weight of the photoacid generating component, about 80% to about 90% by weight of the styrene component. \n\nLithographic Properties of the Nanocomposite Resists Under 13.4 mn EUV, 1 mn XRL, and Related Protocols \n\nThe lithographic properties of the nanocomposite resists of this invention were evaluated under a number of standard lithographic protocols, including 13.4 mn EUV and 1 mn X-ray protocols. For example, using both EUV and X-ray lithographic protocols for samples 2a through 2d (see Example 2), high sensitivity was observed for both EUVL exposure (1.0-1.2 mJ/cm 2 ) and XRL exposure (70---100 mJ/cm 2 ) and high contrast (y=5.2 for EUVL and y=5.1 for XRL) was also established. These resists also constitute potential candidates for low voltage EB lithography (sensi- tivity=0.6 µC/cm 2 ; contrast=4.5). \n\nWhat is claimed is: \n\n1. A nanocomposite resist polymer comprising: \n\n2. The nanocomposite resist polymer of claim 1, wherein the styrene component comprises tetrahydropyranyl oxysty› rene (THPS), para-hydroxy styrene (PHS), poly-(tetrahy› dropyranyl oxystyrene) (poly-THPS), poly-(para-hydroxy styrene (poly-PHS), or combinations thereof. \n\n3. The nanocomposite resist polymer of claim 1 further comprising a polyhedral oligosilsequioxane component. \n\n4. The nanocomposite resist polymer of claim 3, wherein the polyhedral oligosilsequioxane component comprises 3-(3,5, 7,9,11,13,15-heptacyclo-pentylpentacyclo-[9.5.l .1 3 • 9 . 1 5 • $^{15 }$.1 7 • $^{13}$]octasiloxane-l-yl)propyl methacrylate; 3-[(3,5,7, 9,11, 13,15-heptacyclopentylpentacyclo-[9.5.l .l 3• $^{9}$.l 5 • $^{15 }$.1 7 • 13] octasiloxan-1-yloxy )dimethy lsily l]propy 1 methacry late; 1,3,5, 7,9, 11, 13-heptacyclopentyl-15vinylpentacyclo- [9 .5.1.1 3 • $^{9}$.1 5 • $^{15 }$.1 7 • $^{13}$]octasiloxane, or combinations thereof. \n\n5. The nanocomposite resist polymer of claim 3, wherein the polyhedral oligosilsequioxane component comprises Allylcyclohexyl-POSS, Allylcyclopentyl-POSS, Allylisobu› tyl-POSS, Tris(dimethylvinyl)cyclohexyl-POSS, Tris(dim› ethylvinyl)cyclo-pentyl-POSS, Tris(dimethylvinyl)isobutyl› POSS, Acrylocyclohexyl-POSS, Acrylocyclopentyl-POSS, Acryloisobutyl-POSS, Methacrylcyclohexyl POSS, Meth› acrylcyclopentyl POSS, Methacrylisobutyl POSS, Meth› acrylisooctyl POSS, Norbornenylethylcyclohexyl-POSS, N orborneny lethy lcyclopentyl-POSS, N orborneny lethyl- iso butyl-POSS, EpoxycyclohexylCyclohexyl-POSS, EpoxycyclohexylCyclopentyl-POSS, Epoxycyclohexyl› isobutyl-POSS, Epoxycyclohexyldisilanolisobutyl-POSS, 8-substituted Epoxycyclohexyl-POSS Cage, IO-substituted Epoxycyclohexyl-POSS Cage, 12-substituted Epoxycyclo› hexyl-POSS Cage, Epoxypropylcyclopentyl-POSS, Epoxypropylisobutyl-POSS, Glycidylcyclopentyl-POSS, Glycidylethyl-POSS, Glycidylisobutyl-POSS, Glycidyl› isooctyl-POSS, or combinations thereof. \n\n6. The nanocomposite resist polymer of claim 3, wherein the polymer is prepared from about 5% to about 20% by weight of the photoacid generating component, about 70% to about 90% by weight of the styrene component, and about 3% to about 20% by weight of the polyhedral oligosilse› quioxane component. \n\n7. The nanocomposite resist polymer of claim 3, wherein the polymer is prepared from about 5% to about 15% by weight of the photoacid generating component, about 70% \n\n13. A lithographic process comprising the steps of expos- ing a lithographic recording medium to a radiation source and developing the exposed recording medium wherein the lithographic recording medium comprises the nanocompos› ite resist polymer of claim 1. \n\n14. The lithographic process of claim 13 wherein the process is an extreme ultraviolet lithographic process. \n\n15. The lithographic process of claim 13 wherein the process is an X-ray lithographic process. \n\n16. The lithographic process of claim 13 wherein the process is a vacuum ultraviolet lithographic process. \n\n17. The lithographic process of claim 13 wherein the process is an electron beam lithographic process. \n\n18. The lithographic process of claim 13 wherein the process is an ion beam lithographic process. \n\n19. A nanocomposite resist polymer comprising tetra- hydropyranyl oxystyrene or poly(hydroxystyrene), 3-(3,5,7, 9,11,13,15-heptacyclopentylpentacyclo-[9.5. l .1 3 • $^{9 }$.1 5 • $^{15 }$.1 7 • 13] octasiloxane-1-y l)propy 1 methacry late, and [p-CH $_{2 }$-C (CH$_{3}$)C(O)-OC$_{6}$H$_{4}$ SMe$_{2}$]OSO$_{2}$CF $_{3}$ . \n\n20. The nanocomposite resist polymer of claim 19, further comprising t-butyl methacrylate. \n\n21. A nanocomposite resist polymer comprising: a photoacid generating component; and a styrene component, wherein the photoacid generating component comprises [p-CH$_{2}$-C(CH$_{3}$)C(O) OC$_{6}$H$_{4}$ SMe$_{2}$]OSO$_{2}$CF $_{3}$ . \n\n22. A nanocomposite resist polymer comprising: a photoacid generating component; a styrene component; and a polyhedral oligosilsequioxane component. \n\n23. The nanocomposite resist polymer of claim 22, wherein the polyhedral oligosilsequioxane component com› prises 3-(3,5,7,9,11,13, 15-heptacyclo-pentylpentacyclo› [9.5. l. l 3•9 .l 5 • $^{15 }$.1 7 • $^{13}$]octasiloxane-l-yl)propyl methacry› late; 3-[ (3,5, 7,9, 11, 13, 15-heptacyclopentylpentacyclo- [9.5.1.1 3 • $^{9}$.1 5 • $^{15 }$.1 7 • $^{13}$]octasiloxan-1-yloxy)dimethylsilyl] propyl methacrylate; 1,3,5, 7,9, 11,13-heptacyclopentyl- 15vinylpentacyclo-[9.5.l .l 3•9 .l 5 • $^{15 }$.l 7•$^{13}$]octasiloxane, or combinations thereof. \n\n24. The nanocomposit resist polymer of claim 22, wherein the polyhedral oligosilsequioxane component comprises Allylcyclohexyl-POSS, Allylcyclopentyl-POSS, Allylisobu› tyl-POSS, Tris(dimethylvinyl)cyclohexyl-POSS, Tris(dim› ethylvinyl)cyclo-pentyl-POSS, Tris( dimethylvinyl)isobutyl› POSS, Acrylocyclohexyl-POSS, Acrylocyclopentyl-POSS, Acryloisobutyl-POSS, Methacrylcyclohexyl POSS, Meth› acrylcyclopentyl POSS, Methacrylisobutyl POSS, Meth› acrylisooctyl POSS, Norbornenylethylcyclohexyl-POSS, \n\na photoacid generating component; and a styrene component, wherein the photoacid generating component and styrene component are copolymerized and wherein the photoacid generating component com› prises [p-CH$_{2 }$-C(CH$_{3}$)C(O)OC$_{6}$H$_{4}$ SMe$_{2}$]OSO$_{2}$CF $_{3}$ ." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.800079194322631, + "doc_id": "7296d14661f7cca8f3005eb06c1d3d87bfc1b64b3c4eb883500692f795a6a1d8", + "edit_distance": 0.205607476635514, + "f1_score": 0.9221556886227544, + "meteor": 0.8966429230329488, + "precision": 0.927710843373494, + "pred_md": "US 2021/0033970 Al\n\nFeb.4,2021\n\n## Synthesis Example\n\n1 to 4)\n\n(Polymers\n\n. of Base Polymers combining suitI 0167) Symhes;s mern were prepareJ '~ readion \"'7f [0168] Base po kecting copolymenz~n the reaction so\\_ u› able monomers, e (THF) solvent, P?un !peatedly washing in >etrahydrof~=l foe ''Y'\"Hi~h~~ ~ohi,g polym,)~~ tion into met\\_ lation, and drymg. lyzed for compos1 ith hexane, iso 1 to 4, were ana w s1gna e . t d Polymers de\n\n110", + "recall": 0.9166666666666666, + "true_md": "Feb.4,2021 \n\n110 \n\nUS 2021/0033970 Al \n\n## Synthesis Example\n\n(Polymers . of Base Polymers combining suit- I 0167) Symhes;s mern were prepareJ ’~ readion \"’7f [0168] Base po kecting copolymenz~n the reaction so\\_ u› able monomers, e (THF) solvent, P?un !peatedly washing in >etrahydrof~=l foe ’’Y’\"Hi~h~~ ~ohi,g polym,)~~ tion into met\\_ lation, and drymg. lyzed for compos1 ith hexane, iso 1 to 4, were ana w . t d Polymers des1gna e \n\n-continued \n\n-continued" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "3b14cda180e5ccd4fd15ffb054446e6187d50b9c36fc97593ebb46cae85387cc", + "edit_distance": 0.7647058823529411, + "f1_score": 0.5217391304347826, + "meteor": 0.6388888888888888, + "precision": 0.35294117647058826, + "pred_md": "11\n\nUS 7,851,130 B2\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n60\n\n65\n\n12\n\n-continued", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "12 \n\nUS 7,851,130 B2 \n\n11 \n\n-continued \n\n-continued" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.21380566157154418, + "doc_id": "91d12dba6aa04b066332fcc81a06051b57aa35c7d7dc488e2853ff038fcc2396", + "edit_distance": 0.8297872340425532, + "f1_score": 0.5384615384615385, + "meteor": 0.46783332497618213, + "precision": 0.525, + "pred_md": "(7) JP 2017-66264 A 2017.4.6\n\nさらに、上記のウェ-ハ⽤平坦度検査装置を⽤いて、ウェ-ハの外周から１０ｍｍの場 所における研磨取り代（以下、「研磨取り代Ｄ１」とも表記する。図１を参照）、及び、 ウェ-ハの外周から１ｍｍの場所における研磨取り代（以下、「研磨取り代Ｄ２」とも表 記する。図１を参照）を測定した。そして、研磨取り代Ｄ１と研磨取り代Ｄ２の差を、ロ -ルオフ量（Ｒｏｌｌ Ｏｆｆ Ａｍｏｕｎｔ：ＲｏＡ）として評価した。\n\n［ＲｏＡ］＝［研磨取り代Ｄ１］-［研磨取り代Ｄ２］\n\n## 【００４４】\n\n図１（ａ）及び図１（ｂ）は、それぞれ、ＲｏＡの値の評価について説明するウェ-ハ Ｗの断⾯図である。図１（ａ）及び図１（ｂ）において、破線で⽰した領域は、研磨によ って除去された部分Ｐを⽰す。斜線を付した領域は、研磨後のウェ-ハＷの断⾯を⽰す。 ＲｏＡの値については、ＲｏＡが正の値をとるとき（つまり、研磨取り代Ｄ１の値が研磨 取り代Ｄ２の値より⼤きいとき）、ウェ-ハＷの最終形状としては、周縁部が跳ね上がっ たロ-ルアップの形状となる。逆に、ＲｏＡが負の値をとるとき（つまり、研磨取り代Ｄ １の値が研磨取り代Ｄ２の値より⼩さいとき）、ウェ-ハＷの最終形状としては、周縁部 が内⽅よりも多く研磨されたロ-ルオフの形状となる。換⾔すると、ＲｏＡの値が０であ るとき、ウェ-ハＷの周縁部において、研磨が理想的に均-に⾏われていることを意味し ている。なお、必要とされるウェ-ハＷの形状によって、好ましいＲｏＡの⼤きさが異な る。例えば、周縁部において平坦なウェ-ハＷが必要とされる場合には、ＲｏＡの値が０ に近いことが好ましい。また、周縁部においてロ-ルアップまたはロ-ルオフとなった形 状のウェ-ハＷが必要とされる場合には、各々、ＲｏＡは正または負の値となっているこ とが好ましい。\n\n## 【００４５】\n\n## （評価結果）\n\n実施例１〜実施例１０及び⽐較例１〜⽐較例２の研磨⽤組成物の成分、並びに、研磨速 度（ＲＲ）、表⾯粗さ（Ｒａ）、形状悪化量、及びロ-ルオフ量（ＲｏＡ）についての測 定結果を、表１及び表２に⽰す。なお、表１及び表２の研磨⽤組成物の成分の表⽰におい て、各成分の重量％は、研磨⽤組成物（原液）全体に対する重量％を表す。\n\n## 【００４６】\n\n10\n\n20", + "recall": 0.5526315789473685, + "true_md": "(7)\n\nJP 2017-66264 A 2017.4.6\n\n 図１（ａ）及び図１（ｂ）は、それぞれ、ＲｏＡの値の評価について説明するウェーハ Ｗの断⾯図である。図１（ａ）及び図１（ｂ）において、破線で⽰した領域は、研磨によ って除去された部分Ｐを⽰す。斜線を付した領域は、研磨後のウェーハＷの断⾯を⽰す。 ＲｏＡの値については、ＲｏＡが正の値をとるとき（つまり、研磨取り代Ｄ１の値が研磨 取り代Ｄ２の値より⼤きいとき）、ウェーハＷの最終形状としては、周縁部が跳ね上がっ たロールアップの形状となる。逆に、ＲｏＡが負の値をとるとき（つまり、研磨取り代Ｄ １の値が研磨取り代Ｄ２の値より⼩さいとき）、ウェーハＷの最終形状としては、周縁部 が内⽅よりも多く研磨されたロールオフの形状となる。換⾔すると、ＲｏＡの値が０であ るとき、ウェーハＷの周縁部において、研磨が理想的に均⼀に⾏われていることを意味し ている。なお、必要とされるウェーハＷの形状によって、好ましいＲｏＡの⼤きさが異な る。例えば、周縁部において平坦なウェーハＷが必要とされる場合には、ＲｏＡの値が０ に近いことが好ましい。また、周縁部においてロールアップまたはロールオフとなった形 状のウェーハＷが必要とされる場合には、各々、ＲｏＡは正または負の値となっているこ とが好ましい。\n\n  （評価結果）  実施例１〜実施例１０及び⽐較例１〜⽐較例２の研磨⽤組成物の成分、並びに、研磨速 度（ＲＲ）、表⾯粗さ（Ｒａ）、形状悪化量、及びロールオフ量（ＲｏＡ）についての測 定結果を、表１及び表２に⽰す。なお、表１及び表２の研磨⽤組成物の成分の表⽰におい て、各成分の重量％は、研磨⽤組成物（原液）全体に対する重量％を表す。\n\n- 【００４６】\n\n- 【００４５】\n\n- 【００４４】\n\n さらに、上記のウェーハ⽤平坦度検査装置を⽤いて、ウェーハの外周から１０ｍｍの場 所における研磨取り代（以下、「研磨取り代Ｄ１」とも表記する。図１を参照）、及び、 ウェーハの外周から１ｍｍの場所における研磨取り代（以下、「研磨取り代Ｄ２」とも表 記する。図１を参照）を測定した。そして、研磨取り代Ｄ１と研磨取り代Ｄ２の差を、ロ ールオフ量（Ｒｏｌｌ Ｏｆｆ Ａｍｏｕｎｔ：ＲｏＡ）として評価した。   ［ＲｏＡ］＝［研磨取り代Ｄ１］−［研磨取り代Ｄ２］" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.22461704912273656, + "doc_id": "9b9963b460a6b1ebdaf1581a59db3ea9d41f682146eb92f11402289c259b8a75", + "edit_distance": 0.875, + "f1_score": 0.7368421052631579, + "meteor": 0.4958545918367347, + "precision": 0.7777777777777778, + "pred_md": "(11)\n\nJP 2017-66264 A 2017.4.6\n\n磨速度、表⾯粗さ、形状悪化量）は悪化すると考えられる。\n\n## 【００５９】\n\nなお、ＫＯＨに⽐べＫ２ＣＯ３の配合量の⽐率が⼤きくなっていくと凝集傾向が⾼くな る理由として、Ｋ２ＣＯ３はＫＯＨよりも塩濃度が⾼い（等モル⽐で考えたとき、Ｋ２Ｃ Ｏ３はＫＯＨよりもカリウムイオンが２倍となる）ことが挙げられる。Ｋ２ＣＯ３は塩 濃度が⾼いので、⽔中（アルカリ条件下）で静電反発により安定化している粒⼦同 ⼠間にカリウムイオン（電解質）が介在することにより粒⼦の電荷が遮蔽され、砥粒の凝 集が起こりやすくなる。\n\n## 【００６０】\n\n以上、上述した実施の形態は本発明を実施するための例⽰に過ぎない。よって、本発明 は上述した実施の形態に限定されることなく、その趣旨を逸脱しない範囲内で上述した実 施の形態を適宜変形して実施することが可能である。\n\n## 【００６１】\n\nこの発明の本実施形態による研磨⽤組成物は、アミノ酸と、無機アルカリ化合物と、キ レ-ト剤と、砥粒と、を含む。\n\n## 【００６２】\n\nこの発明の本実施形態による研磨⽤組成物に含まれるアミノ酸は、好ましくは、塩基性 荷電アミノ酸である。\n\n## 【００６３】\n\nこの発明の本実施形態による研磨⽤組成物に含まれるアミノ酸が塩基性荷電アミノ酸で ある場合、塩基性荷電アミノ酸は、好ましくは、Ｌ-アルギニン、Ｌ-リシン塩酸塩、ま たはＬ-ヒスチジンである。\n\n## 【００６４】\n\nこの発明の本実施形態による研磨⽤組成物には、好ましくは、２種類の無機アルカリ化 合物が含まれる。\n\n## 【００６５】\n\nこの発明の本実施形態による研磨⽤組成物に２種類の無機アルカリ化合物が含まれる場 合、無機アルカリ化合物は、⽔酸化カリウム及び炭酸カリウムであることが好ましい。\n\n## 【００６６】\n\nこの発明の本実施形態による研磨⽤組成物は、さらに、⽔溶性⾼分⼦を含んでいてもよ い。\n\n## 【産業上の利⽤可能性】\n\n## 【００６７】\n\n本発明は、研磨⽤組成物について利⽤可能である。\n\n10\n\n20\n\n30", + "recall": 0.7, + "true_md": "(11)\n\nJP 2017-66264 A 2017.4.6\n\n磨速度、表⾯粗さ、形状悪化量）は悪化すると考えられる。\n\n なお、ＫＯＨに⽐べＫ ２ ＣＯ ３ の配合量の⽐率が⼤きくなっていくと凝集傾向が⾼くな る理由として、Ｋ ２ ＣＯ ３ はＫＯＨよりも塩濃度が⾼い（等モル⽐で考えたとき、Ｋ Ｃ Ｏ ３ はＫＯＨよりもカリウムイオンが２倍となる）ことが挙げられる。Ｋ ２ ＣＯ は塩        濃度が⾼いので、⽔中（アルカリ条件下）で静電反発により安定化している粒⼦同 ⼠間にカリウムイオン（電解質）が介在することにより粒⼦の電荷が遮蔽され、砥粒の凝 集が起こりやすくなる。\n\n 以上、上述した実施の形態は本発明を実施するための例⽰に過ぎない。よって、本発明 は上述した実施の形態に限定されることなく、その趣旨を逸脱しない範囲内で上述した実 施の形態を適宜変形して実施することが可能である。\n\n この発明の本実施形態による研磨⽤組成物は、アミノ酸と、無機アルカリ化合物と、キ レート剤と、砥粒と、を含む。\n\n この発明の本実施形態による研磨⽤組成物に含まれるアミノ酸は、好ましくは、塩基性 荷電アミノ酸である。\n\n この発明の本実施形態による研磨⽤組成物に含まれるアミノ酸が塩基性荷電アミノ酸で ある場合、塩基性荷電アミノ酸は、好ましくは、Ｌ−アルギニン、Ｌ−リシン塩酸塩、ま たはＬ−ヒスチジンである。\n\n この発明の本実施形態による研磨⽤組成物には、好ましくは、２種類の無機アルカリ化 合物が含まれる。\n\n この発明の本実施形態による研磨⽤組成物に２種類の無機アルカリ化合物が含まれる場 合、無機アルカリ化合物は、⽔酸化カリウム及び炭酸カリウムであることが好ましい。\n\n この発明の本実施形態による研磨⽤組成物は、さらに、⽔溶性⾼分⼦を含んでいてもよ い。\n\n【産業上の利⽤可能性】\n\n 本発明は、研磨⽤組成物について利⽤可能である。\n\n- 【００６７】\n\n- 【００６６】\n\n- 【００６５】\n\n- 【００６４】\n\n- 【００６３】\n\n- 【００６２】\n\n- 【００６１】\n\n- 【００６０】\n\n- 【００５９】" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.2132005908579752, + "doc_id": "89d44ab3dc6c6a0f65f8ce7ed9fabd391104d5c4e8cde91b0fc01a6025e49259", + "edit_distance": 0.6547619047619048, + "f1_score": 0.7107438016528926, + "meteor": 0.555713763798019, + "precision": 0.6825396825396826, + "pred_md": "(4) JP 2017-66264 A 2017.4.6\n\nアルカリ化合物の配合量を増加してもｐＨが⾼くなりにくく、砥粒が溶けるのを抑制する ことができる。\n\n## 【００１６】\n\n無機アルカリ化合物として、⽔酸化カリウムと炭酸カリウムを配合する場合、研磨⽤組 成物の⻑期安定性の観点からは、無機アルカリ化合物に対する炭酸カリウムの割合が８０ 重量％未満であることが好ましく、７０重量％未満であることがより好ましい。\n\n## 【００１７】\n\n砥粒としては、この分野で常⽤されるものを使⽤でき、例えば、コロイダルシリカ、ヒ ュ-ムドシリカ、コロイダルアルミナ、ヒュ-ムドアルミナ、酸化セリウム、炭化ケイ素 、窒化シリコン等が挙げられる。これらのうち、砥粒としては、コロイダルシリカが好適 に⽤いられる。\n\n## 【００１８】\n\nキレ-ト剤としては、例えば、アミノカルボン酸キレ-ト剤および有機ホスホン酸系キ レ-ト剤が挙げられる。アミノカルボン酸キレ-ト剤には、エチレンジアミン四酢酸（Ｅ ＤＴＡ）、エチレンジアミン四酢酸ナトリウム、ヒドロキシエチレンジアミン三酢酸（Ｈ ＥＤＴＡ）、ヒドロキシエチルエチレンジアミン三酢酸ナトリウム、ジエチレントリアミ ン５酢酸（ＤＴＰＡ）、ジエチレントリアミン五酢酸ナトリウム、トリエチレンテトラミ ン六酢酸、トリエチレンテトラミン六酢酸ナトリウム、ニトリロ三酢酸（ＮＴＡ）、ニト リロ三酢酸ナトリウム、ニトリロ三酢酸アンモニウム、およびトリエチレントリアミン五 酢酸（ＴＴＨＡ）などが含まれる。有機ホスホン酸系キレ-ト剤には、２-アミノエチル ホスホン酸、１-ヒドロキシエチリデン-１，１-ジホスホン酸、アミノトリ（メチレン ホスホン酸）、エチレンジアミンテトラキス（メチレンホスホン酸）、ジエチレントリア ミンペンタ（メチレンホスホン酸）、エタン-１，１-ジホスホン酸、エタン-１-ヒド ロキシ-１，１，２-トリホスホン酸、エタン-１，２-ジカルボキシ-１，２-ジホス ホン酸、メタンヒドロキシホスホン酸、および２-ホスホノブタン-１，２-ジカルボン 酸などが含まれる。\n\n## 【００１９】\n\n研磨⽤組成物ＣＯＭＰは、この他、アミン等の有機アルカリ化合物、ｐＨ調整剤、界⾯ 活性剤等の、研磨⽤組成物の分野で-般に知られた配合剤を任意に配合することができる\n\n。\n\n## 【００２０】\n\n研磨⽤組成物ＣＯＭＰは、アミノ酸、無機アルカリ化合物、キレ-ト剤、砥粒、及びそ の他の配合材料を適宜混合して⽔を加えることによって作製される。あるいは、研磨⽤組 成物ＣＯＭＰは、アミノ酸、無機アルカリ化合物、キレ-ト剤、砥粒、及びその他の配合 材料を、順次、⽔に混合することによって作製される。これらの成分を混合する⼿段とし ては、ホモジナイザ-、および超⾳波等、研磨⽤組成物の技術分野において常⽤される⼿ 段が⽤いられる。\n\n## 【００２１】\n\n以上説明した研磨⽤組成物ＣＯＭＰは、適当な濃度となるように⽔（例えば、脱イオン ⽔）で希釈した後、シリコンウェ-ハの研磨処理に⽤いられる。\n\n## 【００２２】\n\n研磨⽤組成物ＣＯＭＰにおいて、無機アルカリ化合物を２種類配合することは、必須の 構成ではない。研磨⽤組成物ＣＯＭＰに配合された無機アルカリ化合物が１種類の場合で も、ウェ-ハの表⾯粗さ、及びウェ-ハの形状を低下させることなく、優れた研磨速度で 研磨することができる。\n\n## 【実施例】\n\n## 【００２３】\n\n以下、実施例を⽤いて本発明を詳細に説明する。\n\n## 【００２４】\n\n## （研磨⽤組成物）\n\n10\n\n20\n\n30\n\n40\n\n50", + "recall": 0.7413793103448276, + "true_md": "(4)\n\nJP 2017-66264 A 2017.4.6\n\nアルカリ化合物の配合量を増加してもｐＨが⾼くなりにくく、砥粒が溶けるのを抑制する ことができる。\n\n 無機アルカリ化合物として、⽔酸化カリウムと炭酸カリウムを配合する場合、研磨⽤組 成物の⻑期安定性の観点からは、無機アルカリ化合物に対する炭酸カリウムの割合が８０ 重量％未満であることが好ましく、７０重量％未満であることがより好ましい。\n\n 砥粒としては、この分野で常⽤されるものを使⽤でき、例えば、コロイダルシリカ、ヒ ュームドシリカ、コロイダルアルミナ、ヒュームドアルミナ、酸化セリウム、炭化ケイ素 、窒化シリコン等が挙げられる。これらのうち、砥粒としては、コロイダルシリカが好適 に⽤いられる。\n\n キレート剤としては、例えば、アミノカルボン酸キレート剤および有機ホスホン酸系キ レート剤が挙げられる。アミノカルボン酸キレート剤には、エチレンジアミン四酢酸（Ｅ ＤＴＡ）、エチレンジアミン四酢酸ナトリウム、ヒドロキシエチレンジアミン三酢酸（Ｈ ＥＤＴＡ）、ヒドロキシエチルエチレンジアミン三酢酸ナトリウム、ジエチレントリアミ ン５酢酸（ＤＴＰＡ）、ジエチレントリアミン五酢酸ナトリウム、トリエチレンテトラミ ン六酢酸、トリエチレンテトラミン六酢酸ナトリウム、ニトリロ三酢酸（ＮＴＡ）、ニト リロ三酢酸ナトリウム、ニトリロ三酢酸アンモニウム、およびトリエチレントリアミン五 酢酸（ＴＴＨＡ）などが含まれる。有機ホスホン酸系キレート剤には、２−アミノエチル ホスホン酸、１−ヒドロキシエチリデン−１，１−ジホスホン酸、アミノトリ（メチレン ホスホン酸）、エチレンジアミンテトラキス（メチレンホスホン酸）、ジエチレントリア ミンペンタ（メチレンホスホン酸）、エタン−１，１−ジホスホン酸、エタン−１−ヒド ロキシ−１，１，２−トリホスホン酸、エタン−１，２−ジカルボキシ−１，２−ジホス ホン酸、メタンヒドロキシホスホン酸、および２−ホスホノブタン−１，２−ジカルボン 酸などが含まれる。\n\n 研磨⽤組成物ＣＯＭＰは、この他、アミン等の有機アルカリ化合物、ｐＨ調整剤、界⾯ 活性剤等の、研磨⽤組成物の分野で⼀般に知られた配合剤を任意に配合することができる 。\n\n 研磨⽤組成物ＣＯＭＰは、アミノ酸、無機アルカリ化合物、キレート剤、砥粒、及びそ の他の配合材料を適宜混合して⽔を加えることによって作製される。あるいは、研磨⽤組 成物ＣＯＭＰは、アミノ酸、無機アルカリ化合物、キレート剤、砥粒、及びその他の配合 材料を、順次、⽔に混合することによって作製される。これらの成分を混合する⼿段とし ては、ホモジナイザー、および超⾳波等、研磨⽤組成物の技術分野において常⽤される⼿ 段が⽤いられる。\n\n 以上説明した研磨⽤組成物ＣＯＭＰは、適当な濃度となるように⽔（例えば、脱イオン ⽔）で希釈した後、シリコンウェーハの研磨処理に⽤いられる。\n\n 研磨⽤組成物ＣＯＭＰにおいて、無機アルカリ化合物を２種類配合することは、必須の 構成ではない。研磨⽤組成物ＣＯＭＰに配合された無機アルカリ化合物が１種類の場合で も、ウェーハの表⾯粗さ、及びウェーハの形状を低下させることなく、優れた研磨速度で 研磨することができる。\n\n【実施例】\n\n 以下、実施例を⽤いて本発明を詳細に説明する。\n\n  （研磨⽤組成物）\n\n- 【００２４】\n\n- 【００２３】\n\n- 【００２２】\n\n- 【００２１】\n\n- 【００２０】\n\n- 【００１９】\n\n- 【００１８】\n\n- 【００１７】\n\n- 【００１６】" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.2630538379058347, + "doc_id": "e6ab88dbab2e82b2b39d874b13bea1ad3049f5147b2c408cb6296c42ce28d8b9", + "edit_distance": 0.7666666666666667, + "f1_score": 0.8264462809917356, + "meteor": 0.6646955266955268, + "precision": 0.7936507936507936, + "pred_md": "ハ表⾯の特性が低下する虞がある。\n\n## 【０００６】\n\nそこで、この発明は、ウェ-ハの表⾯粗さ、及びウェ-ハの形状を低下させることなく 、優れた研磨速度で研磨可能な研磨⽤組成物の提供を⽬的とする。\n\n## 【課題を解決するための⼿段】\n\n## 【０００７】\n\n上記の課題を解決する本発明の研磨⽤組成物は、アミノ酸と、無機アルカリ化合物と、 キレ-ト剤と、砥粒と、を含む。\n\n## 【発明の効果】\n\n## 【０００８】\n\n本発明によれば、研磨⽤組成物がアミノ酸、無機アルカリ化合物、キレ-ト剤及び砥粒 を含むので、ウェ-ハの表⾯粗さ、及びウェ-ハの形状を低下させることなく、優れた研 磨速度での研磨を実現することができる。\n\n## 【図⾯の簡単な説明】\n\n## 【０００９】\n\n【図１】図１（ａ）は、研磨後のウェ-ハのロ-ルアップの状態を⽰すウェ-ハの断⾯図 であり、図１（ｂ）は、研磨後のウェ-ハのロ-ルオフの状態を⽰すウェ-ハの断⾯図で ある。\n\n## 【発明を実施するための形態】\n\n## 【００１０】\n\nこの発明の実施の形態による研磨⽤組成物ＣＯＭＰは、アミノ酸と、無機アルカリ化合 物と、キレ-ト剤と、砥粒とを含む。研磨⽤組成物ＣＯＭＰは、シリコンウェ-ハの研磨 に⽤いられる。\n\n## 【００１１】\n\nアミノ酸としては、正電荷または負電荷を有する荷電アミノ酸が好ましい。荷電アミノ 酸としては、例えば、アスパラギン酸（Ａｓｐ）、グルタミン酸（Ｇｌｕ）、アルギニン （Ａｒｇ）、リシン（Ｌｙｓ）、ヒスチジン（Ｈｉｓ）等が挙げられる。これらの中でも 、アミノ酸としては、アルギニン、リシン、ヒスチジン等の塩基性アミノ酸が好ましい。 アミノ酸としては、これらのうち１種類を単独で⽤いてもよく、２種類以上を併⽤しても よい。荷電アミノ酸の配合量は、２．０重量％以下が好ましく、１．５重量％以下がより 好ましい。荷電アミノ酸の配合量が２．０重量％より⼤きいと、ｐＨが⼤きくなり、砥粒 の溶解する虞がある。\n\n## 【００１２】\n\n無機アルカリ化合物としては、例えば、アルカリ⾦属またはアルカリ⼟類⾦属元素の⽔ 酸化物、その炭酸塩またはその炭酸⽔素塩等が挙げられる。具体的には、無機アルカリ化 合物としては、炭酸カリウム、⽔酸化カリウム、⽔酸化ナトリウム、炭酸⽔素ナトリウム 、炭酸ナトリウム、炭酸⽔素カリウム、炭酸⽔素ナトリウム等が挙げられる。\n\n## 【００１３】\n\n無機アルカリ化合物の配合量は、２．５重量％以下が好ましく、２重量％以下がより好 ましい。無機アルカリ化合物の配合量が２．５重量％より⼤きいと、研磨⽤組成物の⻑期 安定性が悪くなり、砥粒が凝集しやすくなる虞がある。\n\n## 【００１４】\n\n無機アルカリ化合物としては、１種類を単独で⽤いても、２種類以上を併⽤してもよい が、２種類を併⽤することが好ましい。配合する２種類の無機アルカリ化合物の組として は、例えば、⽔酸化カリウム及び炭酸カリウムが好ましい。\n\n## 【００１５】\n\n炭酸カリウムは⽔酸化カリウムよりも砥粒が凝集しやすい性質を有するので、無機アル カリ化合物として⽔酸化カリウムを含んでいることが好ましい。また、無機アルカリ化合 物として、⽔酸化カリウムに加えて、炭酸カリウムを配合することにより、⽔酸化カリウ ムの配合量を増加しても、電離平衡が移動し、ｐＨの変化が抑制される。そのため、無機\n\n(3) JP 2017-66264 A 2017.4.6\n\n10\n\n20\n\n30\n\n40\n\n50", + "recall": 0.8620689655172413, + "true_md": "(3)\n\nJP 2017-66264 A 2017.4.6\n\nハ表⾯の特性が低下する虞がある。\n\n そこで、この発明は、ウェーハの表⾯粗さ、及びウェーハの形状を低下させることなく 、優れた研磨速度で研磨可能な研磨⽤組成物の提供を⽬的とする。\n\n【課題を解決するための⼿段】\n\n 上記の課題を解決する本発明の研磨⽤組成物は、アミノ酸と、無機アルカリ化合物と、 キレート剤と、砥粒と、を含む。\n\n 本発明によれば、研磨⽤組成物がアミノ酸、無機アルカリ化合物、キレート剤及び砥粒 を含むので、ウェーハの表⾯粗さ、及びウェーハの形状を低下させることなく、優れた研 磨速度での研磨を実現することができる。\n\n【発明の効果】\n\n【図⾯の簡単な説明】\n\n【図１】図１（ａ）は、研磨後のウェーハのロールアップの状態を⽰すウェーハの断⾯図 であり、図１（ｂ）は、研磨後のウェーハのロールオフの状態を⽰すウェーハの断⾯図で ある。\n\n【発明を実施するための形態】\n\n この発明の実施の形態による研磨⽤組成物ＣＯＭＰは、アミノ酸と、無機アルカリ化合 物と、キレート剤と、砥粒とを含む。研磨⽤組成物ＣＯＭＰは、シリコンウェーハの研磨 に⽤いられる。\n\n アミノ酸としては、正電荷または負電荷を有する荷電アミノ酸が好ましい。荷電アミノ 酸としては、例えば、アスパラギン酸（Ａｓｐ）、グルタミン酸（Ｇｌｕ）、アルギニン （Ａｒｇ）、リシン（Ｌｙｓ）、ヒスチジン（Ｈｉｓ）等が挙げられる。これらの中でも 、アミノ酸としては、アルギニン、リシン、ヒスチジン等の塩基性アミノ酸が好ましい。 アミノ酸としては、これらのうち１種類を単独で⽤いてもよく、２種類以上を併⽤しても よい。荷電アミノ酸の配合量は、２．０重量％以下が好ましく、１．５重量％以下がより 好ましい。荷電アミノ酸の配合量が２．０重量％より⼤きいと、ｐＨが⼤きくなり、砥粒 の溶解する虞がある。\n\n 無機アルカリ化合物としては、例えば、アルカリ⾦属またはアルカリ⼟類⾦属元素の⽔ 酸化物、その炭酸塩またはその炭酸⽔素塩等が挙げられる。具体的には、無機アルカリ化 合物としては、炭酸カリウム、⽔酸化カリウム、⽔酸化ナトリウム、炭酸⽔素ナトリウム 、炭酸ナトリウム、炭酸⽔素カリウム、炭酸⽔素ナトリウム等が挙げられる。\n\n 無機アルカリ化合物の配合量は、２．５重量％以下が好ましく、２重量％以下がより好 ましい。無機アルカリ化合物の配合量が２．５重量％より⼤きいと、研磨⽤組成物の⻑期 安定性が悪くなり、砥粒が凝集しやすくなる虞がある。\n\n 無機アルカリ化合物としては、１種類を単独で⽤いても、２種類以上を併⽤してもよい が、２種類を併⽤することが好ましい。配合する２種類の無機アルカリ化合物の組として は、例えば、⽔酸化カリウム及び炭酸カリウムが好ましい。\n\n 炭酸カリウムは⽔酸化カリウムよりも砥粒が凝集しやすい性質を有するので、無機アル カリ化合物として⽔酸化カリウムを含んでいることが好ましい。また、無機アルカリ化合 物として、⽔酸化カリウムに加えて、炭酸カリウムを配合することにより、⽔酸化カリウ ムの配合量を増加しても、電離平衡が移動し、ｐＨの変化が抑制される。そのため、無機\n\n- 【００１５】\n\n- 【００１４】\n\n- 【００１３】\n\n- 【００１２】\n\n- 【００１１】\n\n- 【００１０】\n\n- 【０００９】\n\n- 【０００８】\n\n- 【０００７】\n\n- 【０００６】" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.14811650317659283, + "doc_id": "589c1cf6d1ae116ba3ebd601fa65fd547788f2eea2504aef39c31d1967070293", + "edit_distance": 0.8023255813953488, + "f1_score": 0.56, + "meteor": 0.3999666351554246, + "precision": 0.5555555555555556, + "pred_md": "(5)\n\nJP 2017-66264 A 2017.4.6\n\n以下の実施例１〜実施例１０及び⽐較例１〜⽐較例２の研磨⽤組成物を作製した。\n\n## 【００２５】\n\n実施例１の研磨⽤組成物は、６．０重量％のコロイダルシリカ、１．００重量％の⽔酸 化カリウム（ＫＯＨ）、０．５０重量％の炭酸カリウム（Ｋ２ＣＯ３）、０．０２重量％ のジエチレントリアミン五酢酸（ＤＴＰＡ）、及び０．５重量％のＬ-アルギニン（Ａｒ ｇ）を⽔に配合して全体で１００重量％としたものである。なお、コロイダルシリカとし ては、ＢＥＴ法による平均-次粒⼦径が３５ｎｍ、平均⼆次粒⼦径が７０ｎｍの砥粒を⽤ いた。⽔酸化カリウム及び炭酸カリウムは、無機アルカリ化合物として配合した。ＤＴＰ Ａは、キレ-ト剤として配合した。ここで⽰す「重量％」は、研磨⽤組成物（原液）全体 に対する重量％を⽰す。以下の実施例及び⽐較例においても同様である。\n\n## 【００２６】\n\nこの研磨⽤組成物（原液）を脱イオン⽔で１０倍希釈し、研磨液としてウェ-ハの研磨 を⾏った。\n\n## 【００２７】\n\n実施例２の研磨⽤組成物（原液）は、Ｌ-アルギニンの配合量を１．０重量％としたこ とを除いて、実施例１と同-の組成を有する。\n\n## 【００２８】\n\n実施例３の研磨⽤組成物（原液）は、炭酸カリウムを配合しないことを除いて、実施例 ２と同-の組成を有する。\n\n## 【００２９】\n\n実施例４の研磨⽤組成物（原液）は、⽔酸化カリウムの配合量を０．６２重量％とし、 さらに、炭酸カリウムの配合量を０．８８重量％としたことを除いて、実施例２と同-の 組成を有する。ただし、⽔酸化カリウムの配合量と⽔酸化カリウムの配合量の合計は、実 施例２と同じである。\n\n## 【００３０】\n\n実施例５〜実施例７の研磨⽤組成物（原液）は、Ｌ-アルギニンの配合量をそれぞれ０ ．５重量％、１．０重量％、及び１．５重量％としたことを除いて、実施例４と同-の組 成を有する。\n\n## 【００３１】\n\n実施例８及び実施例９の研磨⽤組成物（原液）は、Ｌ-アルギニンの代わりに、それぞ れ、０．５重量％のＬ-リシン塩酸塩（Ｌｙｓ塩酸塩）及び０．５重量％のＬ-ヒスチジ ン（Ｈｉｓ）を配合したことを除いて、実施例５と同-の組成を有する。\n\n## 【００３２】\n\n実施例１０の研磨⽤組成物（原液）は、実施例２の研磨⽤組成物に、さらに、０．００ ５重量％のポロキサミン（エチレンジアミンテトラポリオキシエチレンポリオキシプロピ レン）及び０．０１０重量％のヒドロキシエチルセルロ-ス（ＨＥＣ）を配合したことを 除いて実施例２と同-の組成を有する。なお、ポロキサミンとしては、エチレンオキシド とプロピレンオキシドの質量⽐ＥＯ／ＰＯが、ＥＯ／ＰＯ＝４０／６０であり、分⼦量が ６９００であるものを⽤いた。ＨＥＣの重量平均分⼦量は８０００００であった。\n\n## 【００３３】\n\n⽐較例１の研磨⽤組成物（原液）は、Ｌ-アルギニンを配合しないことを除いて実施例 ４と同-の組成を有する。\n\n## 【００３４】\n\n⽐較例２の研磨⽤組成物（原液）は、Ｌ-アルギニンを配合しないことを除いて実施例 １０と同-の組成を有する。\n\n## 【００３５】\n\n## （研磨の⽅法）\n\n実施例１〜実施例１０及び⽐較例１〜⽐較例２の研磨⽤組成物原液を２０倍に希釈して 、以下の条件でシリコンウェ-ハの研磨を⾏った。研磨装置（ＳＰＰ８００Ｓ⽚⾯研磨機 、岡本⼯作機械製作所製）を⽤い、スエ-ドからなる研磨パッドに研磨⽤組成物を０．６\n\n10\n\n20\n\n30\n\n40\n\n50", + "recall": 0.5645161290322581, + "true_md": "(5)\n\nJP 2017-66264 A 2017.4.6\n\n 以下の実施例１〜実施例１０及び⽐較例１〜⽐較例２の研磨⽤組成物を作製した。\n\n 実施例１の研磨⽤組成物は、６．０重量％のコロイダルシリカ、１．００重量％の⽔酸 化カリウム（ＫＯＨ）、０．５０重量％の炭酸カリウム（Ｋ ２ ＣＯ ３ ）、０．０２重量％ のジエチレントリアミン五酢酸（ＤＴＰＡ）、及び０．５重量％のＬ−アルギニン（Ａｒ ｇ）を⽔に配合して全体で１００重量％としたものである。なお、コロイダルシリカとし ては、ＢＥＴ法による平均⼀次粒⼦径が３５ｎｍ、平均⼆次粒⼦径が７０ｎｍの砥粒を⽤ いた。⽔酸化カリウム及び炭酸カリウムは、無機アルカリ化合物として配合した。ＤＴＰ Ａは、キレート剤として配合した。ここで⽰す「重量％」は、研磨⽤組成物（原液）全体 に対する重量％を⽰す。以下の実施例及び⽐較例においても同様である。\n\n この研磨⽤組成物（原液）を脱イオン⽔で１０倍希釈し、研磨液としてウェーハの研磨 を⾏った。\n\n 実施例２の研磨⽤組成物（原液）は、Ｌ−アルギニンの配合量を１．０重量％としたこ とを除いて、実施例１と同⼀の組成を有する。\n\n 実施例３の研磨⽤組成物（原液）は、炭酸カリウムを配合しないことを除いて、実施例 ２と同⼀の組成を有する。\n\n 実施例４の研磨⽤組成物（原液）は、⽔酸化カリウムの配合量を０．６２重量％とし、 さらに、炭酸カリウムの配合量を０．８８重量％としたことを除いて、実施例２と同⼀の 組成を有する。ただし、⽔酸化カリウムの配合量と⽔酸化カリウムの配合量の合計は、実 施例２と同じである。\n\n 実施例５〜実施例７の研磨⽤組成物（原液）は、Ｌ−アルギニンの配合量をそれぞれ０ ．５重量％、１．０重量％、及び１．５重量％としたことを除いて、実施例４と同⼀の組 成を有する。\n\n 実施例８及び実施例９の研磨⽤組成物（原液）は、Ｌ−アルギニンの代わりに、それぞ れ、０．５重量％のＬ−リシン塩酸塩（Ｌｙｓ塩酸塩）及び０．５重量％のＬ−ヒスチジ ン（Ｈｉｓ）を配合したことを除いて、実施例５と同⼀の組成を有する。\n\n 実施例１０の研磨⽤組成物（原液）は、実施例２の研磨⽤組成物に、さらに、０．００ ５重量％のポロキサミン（エチレンジアミンテトラポリオキシエチレンポリオキシプロピ レン）及び０．０１０重量％のヒドロキシエチルセルロース（ＨＥＣ）を配合したことを 除いて実施例２と同⼀の組成を有する。なお、ポロキサミンとしては、エチレンオキシド とプロピレンオキシドの質量⽐ＥＯ／ＰＯが、ＥＯ／ＰＯ＝４０／６０であり、分⼦量が ６９００であるものを⽤いた。ＨＥＣの重量平均分⼦量は８０００００であった。\n\n ⽐較例１の研磨⽤組成物（原液）は、Ｌ−アルギニンを配合しないことを除いて実施例 ４と同⼀の組成を有する。\n\n ⽐較例２の研磨⽤組成物（原液）は、Ｌ−アルギニンを配合しないことを除いて実施例 １０と同⼀の組成を有する。\n\n  （研磨の⽅法）  実施例１〜実施例１０及び⽐較例１〜⽐較例２の研磨⽤組成物原液を２０倍に希釈して 、以下の条件でシリコンウェーハの研磨を⾏った。研磨装置（ＳＰＰ８００Ｓ⽚⾯研磨機 、岡本⼯作機械製作所製）を⽤い、スエードからなる研磨パッドに研磨⽤組成物を０．６\n\n- 【００３５】\n\n- 【００３３】\n\n- 【００３４】\n\n- 【００３２】\n\n- 【００３１】\n\n- 【００３０】\n\n- 【００２９】\n\n- 【００２８】\n\n- 【００２７】\n\n- 【００２６】\n\n- 【００２５】" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.23766377245917275, + "doc_id": "2788bf10001c607693f2e1af061d29c9148232c707b26c0d85470579fef5770d", + "edit_distance": 0.803921568627451, + "f1_score": 0.6666666666666666, + "meteor": 0.5287678383086001, + "precision": 0.631578947368421, + "pred_md": "(6)\n\nJP 2017-66264 A 2017.4.6\n\nＬ／分の割合で供給し、かつ、直径１２インチのシリコンウェ-ハに１２０ｇｆ／ｃｍ ２ の圧⼒をかけながら研磨定盤を４３ｒｐｍの回転速度で回転させ、キャリアを４０ｒｐｍ の回転速度で回転させながら、４分間、研磨を⾏なった。また、⽤いたシリコンウェ-ハ は、伝導型がＰ型、結晶⽅位が＜１００＞、抵抗率が０．１Ω·ｃｍ以上且つ１００Ω· ｃｍ未満であった。\n\n## 【００３６】\n\n## （研磨速度の評価）\n\n研磨終了後、研磨によって除去されたシリコンウェ-ハの厚みの差をウェ-ハ⽤平坦度 検査装置（Ｎａｎｏｍｅｔｒｏ ３００ＴＴ-Ａ、⿊⽥精⼯株式会社製）を⽤いて測定し た。研磨速度は、単位時間当たりに研磨によって除去されたシリコンウェ-ハの厚み（μ ｍ／分）で評価した。\n\n## 【００３７】\n\nまた、研磨レ-トの値に応じて、以下の記号「◎」、「·」及び「△」によって研磨レ -トの特性を評価した。\n\n```\n◎： ０．２０μｍ／ｍｉｎ以上 ·： ０．１５μｍ／ｍｉｎ以上０．２０μｍ／ｍｉｎ未満 △： ０．１５μｍ／ｍｉｎ未満\n```\n\n## 【００３８】\n\n## （表⾯粗さの評価）\n\n表⾯粗さＲａの評価として、⾮接触表⾯粗さ測定機（Ｗｙｋｏ ＮＴ９３００、Ｖｅｅ ｃｏ社製）を⽤いて、実施例１〜実施例１０及び⽐較例１〜⽐較例２による研磨⽤組成物 を⽤いてシリコンウェ-ハを研磨した後の各ウェ-ハの表⾯の粗さを測定した。\n\n## 【００３９】\n\nまた、表⾯粗さの値に応じて、以下の記号「◎」、「·」及び「△」によって表⾯粗さ の特性を評価した。\n\n◎： ０．３０ｎｍ未満\n\n○： ０．３０ｎｍ以上０．３５ｎｍ未満\n\n△： ０．３５ｎｍ以上\n\n## 【００４０】\n\n（ウェ-ハ形状評価：形状悪化量）\n\n研磨後のウェ-ハ形状を評価するために、ウェ-ハ⽤平坦度検査装置（Ｎａｎｏｍｅｔ ｒｏ ３００ＴＴ-Ａ、⿊⽥精⼯株式会社製）を⽤いてＧＢＩＲ（Ｇｌｏｂａｌ Ｂａｃ ｋｓｉｄｅ Ｉｄｅａｌ Ｒａｎｇｅ）を測定した。このＧＢＩＲは、ウェ-ハの表側の ⾯全体について、裏側の⾯を基準とする理想平⾯と実際の表⾯との差を測定し、これらの 偏差の範囲を計算したものであり、定義すべきエッジ除外領域を除いたウェ-ハ表⾯の全 体的平坦度の指標として扱うことができる。\n\n## 【００４１】\n\nそして、以下の式により算出される値を形状悪化量として評価した。なお、式中の「研 磨取り代（Ａ）」は、上記のウェ-ハ⽤平坦度検査装置により測定した研磨前後における ウェ-ハの平均厚みの差により得られる値である。形状悪化量の値については、数値が⼩ さいほど良好な特性を有すると判断することができる。\n\n［形状悪化量］＝［ＧＢＩＲ］／［研磨取り代（Ａ）］\n\n## 【００４２】\n\nまた、形状悪化量の値に応じて、以下の記号「◎」、「·」及び「△」によって形状悪 化量の特性を評価した。\n\n◎： ０．６未満\n\n○： ０．６以上０．８未満\n\n△： ０．８以上\n\n## 【００４３】\n\n（ウェ-ハ形状評価：ロ-ルオフ量（ＲｏＡ））\n\n10\n\n20\n\n30\n\n40\n\n50", + "recall": 0.7058823529411765, + "true_md": "(6)\n\nJP 2017-66264 A 2017.4.6\n\nＬ／分の割合で供給し、かつ、直径１２インチのシリコンウェーハに１２０ｇｆ／ｃｍ ２ の圧⼒をかけながら研磨定盤を４３ｒｐｍの回転速度で回転させ、キャリアを４０ｒｐｍ の回転速度で回転させながら、４分間、研磨を⾏なった。また、⽤いたシリコンウェーハ は、伝導型がＰ型、結晶⽅位が＜１００＞、抵抗率が０．１Ω・ｃｍ以上且つ１００Ω・ ｃｍ未満であった。\n\n  （研磨速度の評価）  研磨終了後、研磨によって除去されたシリコンウェーハの厚みの差をウェーハ⽤平坦度 検査装置（Ｎａｎｏｍｅｔｒｏ ３００ＴＴ−Ａ、⿊⽥精⼯株式会社製）を⽤いて測定し た。研磨速度は、単位時間当たりに研磨によって除去されたシリコンウェーハの厚み（μ ｍ／分）で評価した。\n\n また、研磨レートの値に応じて、以下の記号「◎」、「○」及び「△」によって研磨レ ートの特性を評価した。\n\n  （表⾯粗さの評価）  表⾯粗さＲａの評価として、⾮接触表⾯粗さ測定機（Ｗｙｋｏ ＮＴ９３００、Ｖｅｅ ｃｏ社製）を⽤いて、実施例１〜実施例１０及び⽐較例１〜⽐較例２による研磨⽤組成物 を⽤いてシリコンウェーハを研磨した後の各ウェーハの表⾯の粗さを測定した。\n\n また、表⾯粗さの値に応じて、以下の記号「◎」、「○」及び「△」によって表⾯粗さ の特性を評価した。\n\n  （ウェーハ形状評価：形状悪化量）  研磨後のウェーハ形状を評価するために、ウェーハ⽤平坦度検査装置（Ｎａｎｏｍｅｔ ｒｏ ３００ＴＴ−Ａ、⿊⽥精⼯株式会社製）を⽤いてＧＢＩＲ（Ｇｌｏｂａｌ Ｂａｃ ｋｓｉｄｅ Ｉｄｅａｌ Ｒａｎｇｅ）を測定した。このＧＢＩＲは、ウェーハの表側の ⾯全体について、裏側の⾯を基準とする理想平⾯と実際の表⾯との差を測定し、これらの 偏差の範囲を計算したものであり、定義すべきエッジ除外領域を除いたウェーハ表⾯の全 体的平坦度の指標として扱うことができる。\n\n そして、以下の式により算出される値を形状悪化量として評価した。なお、式中の「研 磨取り代（Ａ）」は、上記のウェーハ⽤平坦度検査装置により測定した研磨前後における ウェーハの平均厚みの差により得られる値である。形状悪化量の値については、数値が⼩ さいほど良好な特性を有すると判断することができる。   ［形状悪化量］＝［ＧＢＩＲ］／［研磨取り代（Ａ）］\n\n  （ウェーハ形状評価：ロールオフ量（ＲｏＡ））\n\n- 【００４３】\n\n- 【００４２】\n\n- 【００４１】\n\n- 【００３９】\n\n- 【００４０】\n\n- 【００３８】\n\n- 【００３７】\n\n- 【００３６】\n\n-    ◎： ０．３０ｎｍ未満    ○： ０．３０ｎｍ以上０．３５ｎｍ未満    △： ０．３５ｎｍ以上\n\n-    ◎： ０．２０μｍ／ｍｉｎ以上    ○： ０．１５μｍ／ｍｉｎ以上０．２０μｍ／ｍｉｎ未満    △： ０．１５μｍ／ｍｉｎ未満\n\n また、形状悪化量の値に応じて、以下の記号「◎」、「○」及び「△」によって形状悪 化量の特性を評価した。\n\n-    ◎： ０．６未満    ○： ０．６以上０．８未満    △： ０．８以上" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.310186302993101, + "doc_id": "1b13799c2b8b71d1c046db7527bbd66bf390102549f807045557fe44708d2752", + "edit_distance": 0.5641025641025641, + "f1_score": 0.8363636363636364, + "meteor": 0.7578976087930934, + "precision": 0.7666666666666667, + "pred_md": "(9)\n\nJP 2017-66264 A 2017.4.6\n\n## 【表２】\n\n## 【００４８】\n\nアミノ酸を含む実施例１〜３と、アミノ酸を含まない⽐較例１とを⽐較すると、実施例 １〜実施例３によれば、表⾯粗さを維持して研磨速度と形状悪化量を著しく改善できてい ることが分かる。\n\n## 【００４９】\n\nまた、アミノ酸を含む実施例４と、アミノ酸を含まない⽐較例１とを⽐較すると、実施 例４によれば、表⾯粗さ、研磨速度を維持して形状悪化量を改善できていることが分かる 。\n\n## 【００５０】\n\nさらに、アミノ酸を含む実施例５〜７と、アミノ酸を含まない⽐較例１とを⽐較すると 、実施例５〜７によれば、表⾯粗さを維持して研磨速度と形状悪化量を⼤きく改善できて いることが分かる。\n\n## 【００５１】\n\nそれぞれＬ-アルギニン酸、Ｌ-リシン塩酸塩、及びＬ-ヒスチジンを含む実施例５、 ８及び９と、アミノ酸を含まない⽐較例１とを⽐較すると、アミノ酸を含む実施例５、８ 及び９は、⽐較例１と同等の表⾯粗さを維持し、⽐較例１と同等または優れた研磨速度と\n\n10\n\n20\n\n30\n\n40\n\n50", + "recall": 0.92, + "true_md": "(9)\n\nJP 2017-66264 A 2017.4.6\n\n【表２】\n\n アミノ酸を含む実施例１〜３と、アミノ酸を含まない⽐較例１とを⽐較すると、実施例 １〜実施例３によれば、表⾯粗さを維持して研磨速度と形状悪化量を著しく改善できてい ることが分かる。\n\n また、アミノ酸を含む実施例４と、アミノ酸を含まない⽐較例１とを⽐較すると、実施 例４によれば、表⾯粗さ、研磨速度を維持して形状悪化量を改善できていることが分かる 。\n\n さらに、アミノ酸を含む実施例５〜７と、アミノ酸を含まない⽐較例１とを⽐較すると 、実施例５〜７によれば、表⾯粗さを維持して研磨速度と形状悪化量を⼤きく改善できて いることが分かる。\n\n それぞれＬ−アルギニン酸、Ｌ−リシン塩酸塩、及びＬ−ヒスチジンを含む実施例５、 ８及び９と、アミノ酸を含まない⽐較例１とを⽐較すると、アミノ酸を含む実施例５、８ 及び９は、⽐較例１と同等の表⾯粗さを維持し、⽐較例１と同等または優れた研磨速度と\n\n- 【００５１】\n\n- 【００５０】\n\n- 【００４９】\n\n- 【００４８】" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6930977286178778, + "doc_id": "bfed484f31b00310b4addf7edef9f98c37fba4ebd6146828cd41aef4a2af1b24", + "edit_distance": 0.3333333333333333, + "f1_score": 0.8181818181818181, + "meteor": 0.8775114984265312, + "precision": 0.75, + "pred_md": "(8)\n\nJP 2017-66264 A 2017.4.6\n\n【表１】\n\n【００４７】\n\n10\n\n20\n\n30", + "recall": 0.9, + "true_md": "(8)\n\nJP 2017-66264 A 2017.4.6\n\n【表１】\n\n- 【００４７】" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.14632781364658048, + "doc_id": "908f83f51ee2f015fc636fb95c646458290a1e86beec6307283d45c0f50413b7", + "edit_distance": 0.7959183673469388, + "f1_score": 0.743801652892562, + "meteor": 0.5399061032863849, + "precision": 0.7142857142857143, + "pred_md": "## 【特許請求の範囲】\n\n## 【請求項１】\n\nアミノ酸と、\n\n無機アルカリ化合物と、\n\nキレ-ト剤と、\n\n砥粒と、\n\n## を含む、研磨⽤組成物。\n\n## 【請求項２】\n\n請求項１に記載の研磨⽤組成物において、 前記アミノ酸は、塩基性荷電アミノ酸である、研磨⽤組成物。\n\n## 【請求項３】\n\n請求項２に記載の研磨⽤組成物において、 前記塩基性荷電アミノ酸は、Ｌ-アルギニン、Ｌ-リシン塩酸塩、またはＬ-ヒスチジ ンである、研磨⽤組成物。\n\n## 【請求項４】\n\n請求項１〜請求項３のいずれか-項に記載の研磨⽤組成物において、\n\n前記無機アルカリ化合物は、２種類配合されている、研磨⽤組成物。\n\n## 【請求項５】\n\n請求項４に記載の研磨⽤組成物において、 前記２種類の無機アルカリ化合物は、⽔酸化カリウム及び炭酸カリウムである、研磨⽤ 組成物。\n\n## 【請求項６】\n\n請求項１〜請求項５のいずれか-項に記載の研磨⽤組成物において、 さらに、⽔溶性⾼分⼦を含む、研磨⽤組成物。\n\n## 【発明の詳細な説明】\n\n## 【技術分野】\n\n## 【０００１】\n\n本発明は、半導体ウェ-ハの研磨処理に⽤いる研磨⽤組成物に関する。\n\n## 【背景技術】\n\n## 【０００２】\n\n半導体シリコンウェ-ハを研磨する⼯程においては、研磨⽤組成物が⽤いられている。 研磨⽤組成物に求められる特性として、研磨速度や、研磨後のウェ-ハの表⾯特性等が挙 げられる。\n\n## 【０００３】\n\n特許⽂献１には、⽔、研磨材、ならびに添加剤として、アルカリ⾦属の炭酸塩、アルカ リ⾦属の炭酸⽔素塩、第四級アンモニウム化合物、過酸化物、およびペルオキソ酸化合物 からなる群から選ばれる少なくとも１種類の化合物を含んだ研磨⽤組成物が開⽰されてい る。そして、特許⽂献１の研磨⽤組成物によれば、抵抗率が０．１Ω·ｃｍ以下である低 抵抗シリコンウェ-ハの研磨加⼯において、凹凸のない極めて平滑な研磨表⾯を形成する ことができ、研磨速度が⼤きく、循環使⽤した場合でも研磨速度の低下が⼩さいと記載さ れている。\n\n## 【先⾏技術⽂献】\n\n【特許⽂献】\n\n## 【０００４】\n\n【特許⽂献１】特開２００１-３０３６号公報\n\n## 【発明の概要】\n\n【発明が解決しようとする課題】\n\n## 【０００５】\n\n-般に、ウェ-ハの研磨速度を向上させるために、研磨⽤組成物にアミン化合物を配合 することが⾏われている。しかしながら、アミン化合物の配合量が過剰になると、ウェ-\n\n(2)\n\nJP 2017-66264 A 2017.4.6\n\n10\n\n20\n\n30\n\n40\n\n50", + "recall": 0.7758620689655172, + "true_md": "(2)\n\nJP 2017-66264 A 2017.4.6\n\n【特許請求の範囲】\n\n アミノ酸と、  無機アルカリ化合物と、  キレート剤と、  砥粒と、 を含む、研磨⽤組成物。\n\n 請求項１に記載の研磨⽤組成物において、  前記アミノ酸は、塩基性荷電アミノ酸である、研磨⽤組成物。\n\n 請求項２に記載の研磨⽤組成物において、  前記塩基性荷電アミノ酸は、Ｌ−アルギニン、Ｌ−リシン塩酸塩、またはＬ−ヒスチジ ンである、研磨⽤組成物。\n\n 請求項１〜請求項３のいずれか⼀項に記載の研磨⽤組成物において、  前記無機アルカリ化合物は、２種類配合されている、研磨⽤組成物。\n\n 請求項４に記載の研磨⽤組成物において、  前記２種類の無機アルカリ化合物は、⽔酸化カリウム及び炭酸カリウムである、研磨⽤ 組成物。\n\n 請求項１〜請求項５のいずれか⼀項に記載の研磨⽤組成物において、  さらに、⽔溶性⾼分⼦を含む、研磨⽤組成物。\n\n【発明の詳細な説明】 【技術分野】\n\n 本発明は、半導体ウェーハの研磨処理に⽤いる研磨⽤組成物に関する。 【背景技術】\n\n 半導体シリコンウェーハを研磨する⼯程においては、研磨⽤組成物が⽤いられている。 研磨⽤組成物に求められる特性として、研磨速度や、研磨後のウェーハの表⾯特性等が挙 げられる。\n\n 特許⽂献１には、⽔、研磨材、ならびに添加剤として、アルカリ⾦属の炭酸塩、アルカ リ⾦属の炭酸⽔素塩、第四級アンモニウム化合物、過酸化物、およびペルオキソ酸化合物 からなる群から選ばれる少なくとも１種類の化合物を含んだ研磨⽤組成物が開⽰されてい る。そして、特許⽂献１の研磨⽤組成物によれば、抵抗率が０．１Ω・ｃｍ以下である低 抵抗シリコンウェーハの研磨加⼯において、凹凸のない極めて平滑な研磨表⾯を形成する ことができ、研磨速度が⼤きく、循環使⽤した場合でも研磨速度の低下が⼩さいと記載さ れている。\n\n【先⾏技術⽂献】 【特許⽂献】\n\n【特許⽂献１】特開２００１−３０３６号公報 【発明の概要】 【発明が解決しようとする課題】\n\n ⼀般に、ウェーハの研磨速度を向上させるために、研磨⽤組成物にアミン化合物を配合 することが⾏われている。しかしながら、アミン化合物の配合量が過剰になると、ウェー\n\n- 【０００５】\n\n- 【０００４】\n\n- 【０００３】\n\n- 【０００２】\n\n- 【０００１】\n\n- 【請求項６】\n\n- 【請求項５】\n\n- 【請求項４】\n\n- 【請求項３】\n\n- 【請求項１】\n\n- 【請求項２】" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.21589963942278492, + "doc_id": "edd710f6400542458f1da2608d4b73360e7fa910592e0d5b77d8a144f4046199", + "edit_distance": 0.7631578947368421, + "f1_score": 0.6984126984126985, + "meteor": 0.5120602707699, + "precision": 0.7096774193548387, + "pred_md": "(10)\n\nJP 2017-66264 A 2017.4.6\n\nなり、且つ、⽐較例１よりも形状悪化量が⼤きく向上していることが分かる。ロ-ルオフ 量については、アミノ酸を含む実施例５，８及び９の研磨⽤組成物によれば、⽐較例１の 研磨⽤組成物による場合よりも、ロ-ルアップのウェ-ハが得られる傾向となっている。 研磨⽤組成物にアミノ酸を配合することにより、表⾯粗さが維持され、且つ、優れた研磨 速度及び形状悪化量が得られるのは、ピペラジン等の-般的なアミン化合物に⽐べて、ア ミノ酸のシリコンに対するエッチング性が低いことが理由であると考えられる。アミノ酸 のシリコンに対するエッチング性が低いので、アミノ酸の添加量を増加させても、研磨速 度の増加率は⼤きくない反⾯、表⾯粗さを維持し、且つ、形状悪化量を改善できていると 考えられる。\n\n## 【００５２】\n\nアミノ酸（Ｌ-アルギニン酸）の配合量を変量した実施例４〜実施例７、及び実施例１ 〜実施例２によれば、アミノ酸の配合量が⼤きくなるほど、研磨速度が⼤きくなることが わかる。-⽅、アミノ酸の配合量が⼤きくなると、ロ-ルオフ量が増加傾向となることが 分かる。\n\n## 【００５３】\n\n実施例５、８及び９、並びに⽐較例１の⽐較と同様、⽔溶性⾼分⼦（ポロキサミン及び ＨＥＣ）を含む系である実施例１０と⽐較例２との⽐較においても、アミノ酸を含む実施 例１０は、⽐較例２と同等の表⾯粗さを維持し、且つ、⽐較例２よりも研磨速度及び形状 悪化量が⼤きく向上していることが分かる。また、ロ-ルオフ量についても、アミノ酸を 含む実施例１０の研磨⽤組成物によれば、⽐較例２の研磨⽤組成物による場合よりも、ロ -ルアップのウェ-ハが得られる傾向となっている。\n\n## 【００５４】\n\nアミノ酸及び⽔溶性⾼分⼦を含む実施例１０は、それらを含まない⽐較例１と⽐較して 、研磨速度を維持して表⾯粗さを著しく改善し、形状悪化量を⼤きく改善できることが分 かる。\n\n## 【００５５】\n\nまた、アミノ酸を含むが⽔溶性⾼分⼦を含まない実施例２と、アミノ酸及び⽔溶性⾼分 ⼦を含む実施例１０とを⽐較すると、研磨⽤組成物が⽔溶性⾼分⼦を含むことにより、表 ⾯粗さ及びロ-ルオフ量が著しく⼩さくなっていることが分かる。つまり、⽔溶性⾼分⼦ は、研磨速度、形状悪化量を許容範囲で維持して表⾯粗さを著しく改善できる。このこと から、ウェ-ハの端⾯の形状を制御するためには、研磨⽤組成物に配合する⽔溶性⾼分⼦ の種類及び量を適宜調整し、要求される性能に応じた研磨⽤組成物とすることが考えられ る。\n\n## 【００５６】\n\n無機アルカリ化合物として２種類（⽔酸化カリウム及び炭酸カリウム）を配合した実施 例２と、１種類（⽔酸化カリウム）を配合した実施例３とを⽐較すると、研磨速度、表⾯ 粗さ、形状悪化量は同程度の結果である-⽅、ロ-ルオフ量においては、無機アルカリ化 合物が１種類の場合には増加していることが分かる。\n\n## 【００５７】\n\n無機アルカリ化合物を２種類配合した系において、⽔酸化カリウムと炭酸カリウムの配 合割合を変化させる場合について検討する。⽔酸化カリウムの配合量が炭酸カリウムより も多い（ＫＯＨ＞Ｋ２ＣＯ３）実施例１及び実施例２は、炭酸カリウムの配合量が⽔酸化 カリウムよりも多い（ＫＯＨ＜Ｋ２ＣＯ３）実施例５及び実施例６と⽐較して、研磨速度 を維持して、表⾯粗さ及び形状悪化量を⼤きく向上できる。したがって、⽔酸化カリウム の配合量は、炭酸カリウムの配合量よりも多いことが好ましい。\n\n## 【００５８】\n\n⽔酸化カリウムの配合量は、炭酸カリウムの配合量よりも多いことが好ましい理由とし ては、以下が考えられる。炭酸カリウムは⽔酸化カリウムよりも砥粒が凝集しやすい性質 を有するので、ＫＯＨに⽐べＫ２ＣＯ３の配合量の⽐率が⼤きくなっていくと、砥粒が凝 集する傾向が強くなる。そのため、研磨⽤組成物の⻑期安定性も悪くなり、研磨性能（研\n\n10\n\n20\n\n30\n\n40\n\n50", + "recall": 0.6875, + "true_md": "(10)\n\nJP 2017-66264 A 2017.4.6\n\nなり、且つ、⽐較例１よりも形状悪化量が⼤きく向上していることが分かる。ロールオフ 量については、アミノ酸を含む実施例５，８及び９の研磨⽤組成物によれば、⽐較例１の 研磨⽤組成物による場合よりも、ロールアップのウェーハが得られる傾向となっている。 研磨⽤組成物にアミノ酸を配合することにより、表⾯粗さが維持され、且つ、優れた研磨 速度及び形状悪化量が得られるのは、ピペラジン等の⼀般的なアミン化合物に⽐べて、ア ミノ酸のシリコンに対するエッチング性が低いことが理由であると考えられる。アミノ酸 のシリコンに対するエッチング性が低いので、アミノ酸の添加量を増加させても、研磨速 度の増加率は⼤きくない反⾯、表⾯粗さを維持し、且つ、形状悪化量を改善できていると 考えられる。\n\n アミノ酸（Ｌ−アルギニン酸）の配合量を変量した実施例４〜実施例７、及び実施例１ 〜実施例２によれば、アミノ酸の配合量が⼤きくなるほど、研磨速度が⼤きくなることが わかる。⼀⽅、アミノ酸の配合量が⼤きくなると、ロールオフ量が増加傾向となることが 分かる。\n\n 実施例５、８及び９、並びに⽐較例１の⽐較と同様、⽔溶性⾼分⼦（ポロキサミン及び ＨＥＣ）を含む系である実施例１０と⽐較例２との⽐較においても、アミノ酸を含む実施 例１０は、⽐較例２と同等の表⾯粗さを維持し、且つ、⽐較例２よりも研磨速度及び形状 悪化量が⼤きく向上していることが分かる。また、ロールオフ量についても、アミノ酸を 含む実施例１０の研磨⽤組成物によれば、⽐較例２の研磨⽤組成物による場合よりも、ロ ールアップのウェーハが得られる傾向となっている。\n\n アミノ酸及び⽔溶性⾼分⼦を含む実施例１０は、それらを含まない⽐較例１と⽐較して 、研磨速度を維持して表⾯粗さを著しく改善し、形状悪化量を⼤きく改善できることが分 かる。\n\n また、アミノ酸を含むが⽔溶性⾼分⼦を含まない実施例２と、アミノ酸及び⽔溶性⾼分 ⼦を含む実施例１０とを⽐較すると、研磨⽤組成物が⽔溶性⾼分⼦を含むことにより、表 ⾯粗さ及びロールオフ量が著しく⼩さくなっていることが分かる。つまり、⽔溶性⾼分⼦ は、研磨速度、形状悪化量を許容範囲で維持して表⾯粗さを著しく改善できる。このこと から、ウェーハの端⾯の形状を制御するためには、研磨⽤組成物に配合する⽔溶性⾼分⼦ の種類及び量を適宜調整し、要求される性能に応じた研磨⽤組成物とすることが考えられ る。\n\n 無機アルカリ化合物として２種類（⽔酸化カリウム及び炭酸カリウム）を配合した実施 例２と、１種類（⽔酸化カリウム）を配合した実施例３とを⽐較すると、研磨速度、表⾯ 粗さ、形状悪化量は同程度の結果である⼀⽅、ロールオフ量においては、無機アルカリ化 合物が１種類の場合には増加していることが分かる。\n\n 無機アルカリ化合物を２種類配合した系において、⽔酸化カリウムと炭酸カリウムの配 合割合を変化させる場合について検討する。⽔酸化カリウムの配合量が炭酸カリウムより も多い（ＫＯＨ＞Ｋ ２ ＣＯ ３ ）実施例１及び実施例２は、炭酸カリウムの配合量が⽔酸化 カリウムよりも多い（ＫＯＨ＜Ｋ ２ ＣＯ ３ ）実施例５及び実施例６と⽐較して、研磨速度 を維持して、表⾯粗さ及び形状悪化量を⼤きく向上できる。したがって、⽔酸化カリウム の配合量は、炭酸カリウムの配合量よりも多いことが好ましい。\n\n ⽔酸化カリウムの配合量は、炭酸カリウムの配合量よりも多いことが好ましい理由とし ては、以下が考えられる。炭酸カリウムは⽔酸化カリウムよりも砥粒が凝集しやすい性質 を有するので、ＫＯＨに⽐べＫ ２ ＣＯ ３ の配合量の⽐率が⼤きくなっていくと、砥粒が凝 集する傾向が強くなる。そのため、研磨⽤組成物の⻑期安定性も悪くなり、研磨性能（研\n\n- 【００５８】\n\n- 【００５７】\n\n- 【００５６】\n\n- 【００５５】\n\n- 【００５４】\n\n- 【００５３】\n\n- 【００５２】" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.00010892268398976906, + "doc_id": "8ca8795058ee91ce3e4475c8b073e302a900332e48ec70bb2fe7b2953884e9e2", + "edit_distance": 0.9411764705882353, + "f1_score": 0.20895522388059706, + "meteor": 0.07190490114852902, + "precision": 0.7777777777777778, + "pred_md": "JP 2017-66264 A 2017.4.6\n\n## (57)【要約】 （修正有）\n\n【課題】ウェ-ハの表⾯粗さ、及びウェ-ハの形状を低下させることなく、優れた研磨速 度で研磨可能な研磨⽤組成物の提供。\n\n【解決⼿段】アミノ酸と、無機アルカリ化合物と、キレ-ト剤と、砥粒と、を含む研磨⽤ 組成物。好ましくは、研磨⽤組成物中のアミノ酸は、塩基性荷電アミノ酸であり、Ｌ-ア ルギニン、Ｌ-リシン塩酸塩、またはＬ-ヒスチジンである研磨⽤組成物。好ましくは、 研磨⽤組成物中に、無機アルカリ化合物が２種類配合されており、⽔酸化カリウム及び炭 酸カリウムであり、好ましくは、更に、⽔溶性⾼分⼦を含む研磨⽤組成物。\n\n## 【選択図】なし", + "recall": 0.1206896551724138, + "true_md": "JP 2017-66264 A 2017.4.6\n\n【課題】ウェーハの表⾯粗さ、及びウェーハの形状を低下させることなく、優れた研磨速 度で研磨可能な研磨⽤組成物の提供。\n\n【解決⼿段】アミノ酸と、無機アルカリ化合物と、キレート剤と、砥粒と、を含む研磨⽤ 組成物。好ましくは、研磨⽤組成物中のアミノ酸は、塩基性荷電アミノ酸であり、Ｌ−ア ルギニン、Ｌ−リシン塩酸塩、またはＬ−ヒスチジンである研磨⽤組成物。好ましくは、 研磨⽤組成物中に、無機アルカリ化合物が２種類配合されており、⽔酸化カリウム及び炭 酸カリウムであり、好ましくは、更に、⽔溶性⾼分⼦を含む研磨⽤組成物。\n\n【選択図】なし\n\nBARR RAR PROM OL 7 EIR)\n\n# DAHER EA\n\n# (19) ARESETFT (JP)\n\n- (11) SRA eS\n\n- (43) SBA SERR29ZEAAGE (2017.4.6)\n\n- (51) Int.Cl. COOK 3/14 (2006. 01) HO1L 21/304 (2006.01) B24B 37/00 (2012, 01) CogG 18 (2006. 01)\n\n- (71) HERA 000116127 ZY B+ N— ARASH APRA RR RRR RI 4 TA4B265\n\n- (TATRA 100104444 Er LT SH\n\n- (74) EBA 100112715 Er Bu ER\n\n- (TATRA 100125704 FELL WR el\n\n- (72) AAS A WE Rea RaQZHH awa 3S-17-1 = YR N-ARASH TEILEN\n\n- (72) BAS eRe Ramesh awa S-17-1 = YR N-ARASH PRL\n\nBERS Brit ¢\n\n- (664) [RHOZM) MERRY\n\n- (57)【要約】   （修正有）\n\n## 45B42017-66264 (P2017-66264A)\n\n550Z 622D H\n\nF-ra-R (5%) 30158 5F057\n\n- Fl CO9K HOLL B24B CO9G 3/14 21/304 37/00 1/02" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8385130047130208, + "doc_id": "35af2587614db000ea736d58e3daa93fa80482843e638685a3c22eead033a041", + "edit_distance": 0.11764705882352941, + "f1_score": 0.9180327868852458, + "meteor": 0.9315389924085576, + "precision": 0.9032258064516129, + "pred_md": "(13)\n\nJP 2017-66264 A 2017.4.6\n\n## フロントペ-ジの続き\n\nＦタ-ム(参考) 3C158 AA07 CA04 DA02 DA17 EA11 EB01 ED10 ED21 ED26 5F057 AA02 AA14 BA11 BB03 CA12 DA03 EA01 EA21 EA23", + "recall": 0.9333333333333333, + "true_md": "(13)\n\nJP 2017-66264 A 2017.4.6\n\nフロントページの続き\n\nＦターム(参考) 3C158 AA07  CA04  DA02  DA17  EA11  EB01  ED10  ED21  ED26           5F057 AA02  AA14  BA11  BB03  CA12  DA03  EA01  EA21  EA23" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4838715464638938, + "doc_id": "fb17dc7799f1e57cfc28986aa22865fd6993ee98fa39a627ecacf7fe266f631a", + "edit_distance": 0.3792517006802721, + "f1_score": 0.8562091503267973, + "meteor": 0.6607899018634602, + "precision": 0.9424460431654677, + "pred_md": "등록특허 10-0680003\n\n렌클로라이드에희석되어칼럼크로마토그래피(실리카겔)에의해정제되었다.칼럼의용리(elution)는 메틸렌클로라이드, 메탄올및트라이에틸아민(95:5 : 1)로 행해졌다. 순수한 부분(fraction)들이 모아졌고 용매는 저압에서 제거되어 0.83g (70.9%)의 3-2-[4-(6-플로로벤조(D)아이소옥사졸-3-일)-피페리딘-1-일]-에틸-2-메틸-6,7,8,9-테트라하이드로4H-피리도-(1,2-a)피리미딘-4-온(I)이 얻어졌다. 선택적으로, 반응 미정제 생성물은 적당한 유기용매 바람직하게는 에 탄올또는4-메틸-2-펜탄온으로 부터 결정화에 의해 정제되었다.\n\n1 HNMR (CDCl 3 ), δ (ppm) : 7.71 dd, J =8.8 Hz, J =5.2 Hz, 1H, CH 방향족 ; 7.23 dd, J =8.6 Hz, J =2.2 Hz, 1H, CH 방 1 2 1 2 향족;7.05 ddd, J 1 =8.8 Hz, J =8.6 Hz, J =2.2 Hz, 1H, CH 방향족 ; 3.09 t, J=6.2 Hz, 2H, CH 2 3 2 ; 3.18 d, J=11.6 Hz, 2H, CH 2 ; 3.08 m, 1H, CH ; 2.87 t, J=6.6 Hz, 2H, CH 2 ; 2.77 m, 2H, CH 2 ; 2.55 m, 2H, CH 2 ; 2.31 s, 3H, CH 3 ; 2.27 m, 2H, CH 2 ; 2.09 m, 4H, 2xCH 2 ; 1.96 m, 2H, CH 2 ; 1.89 m, 2H, CH . 2\n\n13 CNMR (CDCl₃), δ (ppm) : 165.25-166.77, d, J C -F =249 Hz, C 방향족 ; 163.88-163.75, d, J C -F =14 Hz, C 방향족 ; 162.56 ; 161.09 C 방향족 ; 158.39 C 방향족 ; 155.87 C 방향족 ; 122.67-122.55 d, J C-F =11 Hz, CH 방향족 ; 119.27C 방향족;117.28 C 방향족 ; 112.35-112.10 d, J C -F =25 Hz, CH 방향족 ; 97.48-97.21 d, J C -F =27 Hz, CH 방향족 ; 56.68 CH 2 ; 53.35 CH 2 ; 42.66 CH 2 ; 34.59 CH 2 ; 31.41 CH 2 ; 30.53 CH 2 ; 23.74 CH 2 ; 21.95 CH 2 ; 21.24 CH 2 ; 19.20 CH 2 .\n\n## 산업상이용가능성\n\n본발명은항정신병적성질에대하여약학적으로활성인리스페리돈을제조하는데이용될수있다.\n\n- 10 -", + "recall": 0.7844311377245509, + "true_md": "등록특허 10-0680003\n\n렌클로라이드에 희석되어 칼럼 크로마토그래피(실리카겔)에 의해 정제되었다. 칼럼의 용리(elution)는 메틸렌클로라이드, 메탄올 및 트라이에틸아민(95 : 5 : 1)로 행해졌다. 순수한 부분(fraction)들이 모아졌고 용매는 저압에서 제거되어 0.83g (70.9%)의 3-2-[4-(6-플로로벤조(D)아이소옥사졸-3-일)-피페리딘-1-일]-에틸-2-메틸-6,7,8,9-테트라하이드로- 4H-피리도-(1,2-a)피리미딘-4-온(I)이 얻어졌다. 선택적으로, 반응 미정제 생성물은 적당한 유기용매 바람직하게는 에 탄올 또는 4-메틸-2-펜탄온으로 부터 결정화에 의해 정제되었다.\n\n$^{1}$HNMR (CDCl$_{3}$), δ (ppm) : 7.71 dd, J$_{1}$=8.8 Hz, J$_{2}$=5.2 Hz, 1H, CH 방향족 ; 7.23 dd, J$_{1}$=8.6 Hz, J$_{2}$=2.2 Hz, 1H, CH 방 향족 ; 7.05 ddd, J$_{1}$=8.8 Hz, J$_{2}$=8.6 Hz, J$_{3}$=2.2 Hz, 1H, CH 방향족 ; 3.09 t, J=6.2 Hz, 2H, CH$_{2}$ ; 3.18 d, J=11.6 Hz, 2H, CH$_{2}$ ; 3.08 m, 1H, CH ; 2.87 t, J=6.6 Hz, 2H, CH$_{2}$ ; 2.77 m, 2H, CH$_{2}$ ; 2.55 m, 2H, CH$_{2}$ ; 2.31 s, 3H, CH$_{3}$ ; 2.27 m, 2H, CH$_{2}$ ; 2.09 m, 4H, 2xCH$_{2}$ ; 1.96 m, 2H, CH$_{2}$ ; 1.89 m, 2H, CH$_{2}$.\n\n$^{13}$CNMR (CDCl₃), δ (ppm) : 165.25-166.77, d, J$_{C -F}$=249 Hz, C 방향족 ; 163.88-163.75, d, J$_{C -F}$=14 Hz, C 방향족 ; 162.56 ; 161.09 C 방향족 ; 158.39 C 방향족 ; 155.87 C 방향족 ; 122.67-122.55 d, J$_{C-F}$=11 Hz, CH 방향족 ; 119.27C 방향족 ; 117.28 C 방향족 ; 112.35-112.10 d, J$_{C -F}$=25 Hz, CH 방향족 ; 97.48-97.21 d, J$_{C -F}$=27 Hz, CH 방향족 ; 56.68 CH$_{2}$ ; 53.35 CH$_{2}$ ; 42.66 CH$_{2}$ ; 34.59 CH$_{2}$ ; 31.41 CH$_{2}$ ; 30.53 CH$_{2}$ ; 23.74 CH$_{2}$ ; 21.95 CH$_{2}$ ; 21.24 CH$_{2}$ ; 19.20 CH$_{2}$.\n\n본 발명은 항정신병적 성질에 대하여 약학적으로 활성인 리스페리돈을 제조하는데 이용될 수 있다.\n\n## 산업상 이용 가능성\n\n- 10 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7790429995413185, + "doc_id": "1c34a160d1522dd43db7b4ef528b1020224ecbaf1f8c4feca5455c914094c27a", + "edit_distance": 0.3967611336032389, + "f1_score": 0.7861271676300579, + "meteor": 0.7898370063233185, + "precision": 0.8717948717948718, + "pred_md": "등록특허 10-0680003\n\n적당한용매에서수소화물또는보레인과함께실행되는식III화합물의환원반응이뒤따르며상기반응들은중간체III을 분리함에의해수행되거나1단계합성과정으로수행되지않고,\n\n식II의 화합물은 식 X의 3-(2-하이드록시에틸)-2-메틸-6,7,8,9-테트라하이드로-4H-피리도[1,2-a]피리미딘-4-온의 산화반응을포함하는것을특징으로하는식I의3-2-[4-(6-플로로벤조(D)아이소옥사졸-3-일)-피페리딘-1-일]-에틸 -2-메틸-6,7,8,9-테트라하이드로-4H-피리도-(1,2-a)피리미딘-4-온의 제조방법.\n\n## 청구항 2.\n\n삭제\n\n## 청구항 3.\n\n제1 항에 있어서, 상기 수소화물은 소듐사이아노보로하이드라이드 또는 소듐보로하이드라이드인 것을 특징으로 하는 식 I의 3-2-[4-(6-플로로벤조(D)아이소옥사졸-3-일)-피페리딘-1-일]-에틸-2-메틸-6,7,8,9-테트라하이드로-4H-피리 도-(1,2-a)피리미딘-4-온의 제조방법.\n\n## 청구항 4.\n\n제1 항에 있어서, 상기 적당한 용매는 에탄올인 것을 특징으로 하는 식 I의 3-2-[4-(6-플로로벤조(D)아이소옥사졸-3일)-피페리딘-1-일]-에틸-2-메틸-6,7,8,9-테트라하이드로-4H-피리도-(1,2-a)피리미딘-4-온의 제조방법.\n\n## 청구항 5.\n\n제1항에있어서, 상기 식 III 화합물의 환원반응은 수소화물, 염, 산 또는 무기 염기 및 적당한 비활성 용매의 존재 하에서 실행되는것을특징으로하는식I의3-2-[4-(6-플로로벤조(D)아이소옥사졸-3-일)-피페리딘-1-일]-에틸-2-메틸6,7,8,9-테트라하이드로-4H-피리도-(1,2-a)피리미딘-4-온의 제조방법.\n\n## 청구항 6.\n\n제3항에있어서, 상기 수소화물은 아세트산이 수반되는 것을 특징으로 하는 식 I의 3-2-[4-(6-플로로벤조(D)아이소옥 사졸-3-일)-피페리딘-1-일]-에틸-2-메틸-6,7,8,9-테트라하이드로-4H-피리도-(1,2-a)피리미딘-4-온의 제조방법.\n\n- 3 -", + "recall": 0.7157894736842105, + "true_md": "등록특허 10-0680003\n\n적당한 용매에서 수소화물 또는 보레인과 함께 실행되는 식 III 화합물의 환원반응이 뒤따르며 상기 반응들은 중간체 III을 분리함에 의해 수행되거나 1단계 합성과정으로 수행되지 않고,\n\n식 II의 화합물은 식 X의 3-(2-하이드록시에틸)-2-메틸-6,7,8,9-테트라하이드로-4H-피리도[1,2-a]피리미딘-4-온의 산화반응을 포함하는 것을 특징으로 하는 식 I의 3-2-[4-(6-플로로벤조(D)아이소옥사졸-3-일)-피페리딘-1-일]-에틸 -2-메틸-6,7,8,9-테트라하이드로-4H-피리도-(1,2-a)피리미딘-4-온의 제조방법.\n\n삭제\n\n제 1 항에 있어서, 상기 수소화물은 소듐사이아노보로하이드라이드 또는 소듐보로하이드라이드인 것을 특징으로 하는 식 I의 3-2-[4-(6-플로로벤조(D)아이소옥사졸-3-일)-피페리딘-1-일]-에틸-2-메틸-6,7,8,9-테트라하이드로-4H-피리 도-(1,2-a)피리미딘-4-온의 제조방법.\n\n제 1 항에 있어서, 상기 적당한 용매는 에탄올인 것을 특징으로 하는 식 I의 3-2-[4-(6-플로로벤조(D)아이소옥사졸-3- 일)-피페리딘-1-일]-에틸-2-메틸-6,7,8,9-테트라하이드로-4H-피리도-(1,2-a)피리미딘-4-온의 제조방법.\n\n제 1항에 있어서, 상기 식 III 화합물의 환원반응은 수소화물, 염, 산 또는 무기 염기 및 적당한 비활성 용매의 존재 하에서 실행되는 것을 특징으로 하는 식 I의 3-2-[4-(6-플로로벤조(D)아이소옥사졸-3-일)-피페리딘-1-일]-에틸-2-메틸- 6,7,8,9-테트라하이드로-4H-피리도-(1,2-a)피리미딘-4-온의 제조방법.\n\n제 3항에 있어서, 상기 수소화물은 아세트산이 수반되는 것을 특징으로 하는 식 I의 3-2-[4-(6-플로로벤조(D)아이소옥 사졸-3-일)-피페리딘-1-일]-에틸-2-메틸-6,7,8,9-테트라하이드로-4H-피리도-(1,2-a)피리미딘-4-온의 제조방법.\n\n- 3 -\n\n## 청구항 6.\n\n## 청구항 5.\n\n## 청구항 4.\n\n## 청구항 3.\n\n## 청구항 2." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5634382510054019, + "doc_id": "3106daee03439689b96fe26e5c2bd4a0090f9db8f47f3f194977660352b67c22", + "edit_distance": 0.5913461538461539, + "f1_score": 0.7982456140350878, + "meteor": 0.6349534946813464, + "precision": 0.8584905660377359, + "pred_md": "- (51) 。Int. Cl.\n\nC07D 471/04 (2006.01)\n\n## (19)대한민국특허청(KR)\n\n## (12) 등록특허공보(B1)\n\n- (45) 공고일자\n- (11) 등록번호\n- (24) 등록일자\n\n2007년02월08일\n\n10-0680003\n\n2007년02월01일\n\n- (21) 출원번호\n\n10-2004-7013537\n\n- (65) 공개번호\n\n10-2004-0091679\n\n- (22) 출원일자\n\n2004년08월31일\n\n- (43) 공개일자\n\n2004년10월28일\n\n심사청구일자\n\n2004년08월31일\n\n번역문제출일자\n\n2004년08월31일\n\n- (86) 국제출원번호\n\nPCT/EP2003/002157\n\n- (87) 국제공개번호\n\nWO 2003/074522\n\n국제출원일자\n\n2003년03월03일\n\n국제공개일자\n\n2003년09월11일\n\n- (30) 우선권주장\n\n200200531\n\n2002년03월05일\n\n스페인(ES)\n\n- (73) 특허권자\n\n페레르인터내쇼날에스.에이. 스페인바르셀로나08028, 그란비아 카를로스 3, 94\n\n- (72) 발명자\n\n포구에트라파엘 스페인바르셀로나이-08022루카네스 8\n\n라멘톨조지 스페인바르셀로나이-08022레오 XIII2\n\n페르난데즈카노디에고\n\n스페인바르셀로나이-08034마퀘스 드 무라센 2\n\n아멘골미구엘피 스페인바르셀로나이-08034오리올 메스트레스 3\n\n캄프스프란세스크엑스 스페인바르셀로나이-08019파세이그 타울랏 238\n\n실라레스후안 스페인발레스델쿠앗산이-08226파세이그드라크레우25\n\n펫셴이네스 스페인바르셀로나이-08006리오 로사스 36\n\n파스토미레이아 스페인바르셀로나이-08036론드레스 70\n\n고도에스더 스페인바르셀로나이-08026데가바이 16-18\n\n- (74) 대리인\n\n손은진\n\n심사관:김경미\n\n- 1 -\n\n등록특허 10-0680003", + "recall": 0.7459016393442623, + "true_md": "등록특허 10-0680003\n\n## 심사관 : 김경미\n\n- 1 -\n\n# (19)대한민국특허청(KR)\n\n# (12) 등록특허공보(B1)\n\n- (45) 공고일자 2007년02월08일\n\n- (11) 등록번호 10-0680003\n\n- (24) 등록일자 2007년02월01일\n\n- (65) 공개번호 10-2004-0091679\n\n- (43) 공개일자 2004년10월28일\n\n- (87) 국제공개번호 WO 2003/074522 국제공개일자 2003년09월11일\n\n- (21) 출원번호 10-2004-7013537\n\n- (51) 。Int. Cl. C07D471/04(2006.01)\n\n- (22) 출원일자 2004년08월31일 심사청구일자 2004년08월31일 번역문 제출일자 2004년08월31일\n\n- (86) 국제출원번호 PCT/EP2003/002157 국제출원일자 2003년03월03일\n\n- (30) 우선권주장 200200531 2002년03월05일 스페인(ES)\n\n- (73) 특허권자 페레르 인터내쇼날 에스.에이. 스페인 바르셀로나 08028, 그란비아 카를로스 3, 94\n\n- (72) 발명자 포구에트라파엘 스페인 바르셀로나 이-08022 루카네스 8\n\n- (74) 대리인 손은진\n\n라멘톨조지 스페인 바르셀로나 이-08022 레오 XIII 2\n\n페르난데즈카노디에고 스페인 바르셀로나 이-08034 마퀘스 드 무라센 2\n\n아멘골미구엘피 스페인 바르셀로나 이-08034 오리올 메스트레스 3\n\n캄프스프란세스크엑스 스페인 바르셀로나 이-08019 파세이그 타울랏 238\n\n실라레스후안 스페인 발레스 델 쿠앗 산 이-08226 파세이그 드 라 크레우 25\n\n펫셴이네스 스페인 바르셀로나 이-08006 리오 로사스 36\n\n파스토미레이아 스페인 바르셀로나 이-08036 론드레스 70\n\n고도에스더 스페인 바르셀로나 이-08026 데가바이 16-18" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7879477221603773, + "doc_id": "ff850a0ebda17a1b314eeb2c32291ebc7dd57d4dacf34c666f607e4028eea2ee", + "edit_distance": 0.20512820512820512, + "f1_score": 0.8057553956834532, + "meteor": 0.8071195409552806, + "precision": 0.9032258064516129, + "pred_md": "등록특허 10-0680003\n\n분자내이중N-알킬화반응에의한피페리딘고리의최종고리화반응에기초한3-2-[4-(6-플로로벤조(D)아이소옥사졸 -3-일)-피페리딘-1-일]-에틸-2-메틸-6,7,8,9-테트라하이드로-4H-피리도-(1,2-a)피리미딘-4-온(I)의 제조를 위한 방법을개시하고있다(도식2).\n\n중간체VIII의 제조에 사용되는 출발 물질들 중에 하나는 상업적으로 입수할 수 없는 4-테트라하이드로피란카보닐클로라 이드(IX)이다. 게다가, IX로부터 VIII을 제조하는 것은 다섯 단계로 이루어진다(스페인특허 제2074966호).\n\n본발명은3-2-[4-(6-플로로벤조(D)아이소옥사졸-3-일)-피페리딘-1-일]-에틸-2-메틸-6,7,8,9-테트라하이드로4H-피리도-(1,2-a)피리미딘-4-온(I)의 제조를 위한 대체적 방법을 제공하며, 그 과정이 도식 3에 도해되어있다.\n\n- 6 -", + "recall": 0.7272727272727273, + "true_md": "등록특허 10-0680003\n\n분자 내 이중 N-알킬화반응에 의한 피페리딘 고리의 최종 고리화 반응에 기초한 3-2-[4-(6-플로로벤조(D)아이소옥사졸 -3-일)-피페리딘-1-일]-에틸-2-메틸-6,7,8,9-테트라하이드로-4H-피리도-(1,2-a)피리미딘-4-온(I)의 제조를 위한 방법을 개시하고 있다(도식 2).\n\n중간체 VIII의 제조에 사용되는 출발 물질들 중에 하나는 상업적으로 입수할 수 없는 4-테트라하이드로피란카보닐클로라 이드(IX)이다. 게다가, IX로부터 VIII을 제조하는 것은 다섯 단계로 이루어진다(스페인특허 제2074966호).\n\n본 발명은 3-2-[4-(6-플로로벤조(D)아이소옥사졸-3-일)-피페리딘-1-일]-에틸-2-메틸-6,7,8,9-테트라하이드로- 4H-피리도-(1,2-a)피리미딘-4-온(I)의 제조를 위한 대체적 방법을 제공하며, 그 과정이 도식 3에 도해되어있다.\n\n- 6 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6579035553892973, + "doc_id": "69e63a3dff5bef43d2129dfa999983edf10f21fd551d9697f24156e1681f12e5", + "edit_distance": 0.277602523659306, + "f1_score": 0.8712121212121212, + "meteor": 0.7515680777686345, + "precision": 0.9426229508196722, + "pred_md": "등록특허 10-0680003\n\n무수소듐설페이트로건조되고걸러졌으며용매는증발되어4.90g(99%)의 (2-메틸-4-옥소-6,7,8,9-테트라하이드로4H-피리도[1,2-a]피리미딘-3-일)-아세트알데하이드(II)이 기름 같은 잔류물로 얻어졌다. 이렇게 얻어진 화합물은 사전 정제없이도계속되는반응단계에서사용되기에충분히순수했다.\n\n1 HNMR (CDCl 3 ), δ (ppm) : 9.71 t, J=1.2 Hz, 1H, 알데하이드 ; 3.93 t, J=6.0 Hz, 2H, CH 2 -N) ; 3.66 d, J=1.2 Hz, 2H, CH 2 CHO ; 2.90 t, J=6.8 Hz, 2H, CH CH 2 2 C(N)=N ; 2.22 s, 3H, CH 3 ; 2.00-1.85 m, 4H, CH CH 2 2 CH 2 CH 2 .\n\n13 CNMR (CDCl 3 ), δ (ppm) : 198.59 CHO ; 162.65 NCO ; 160.69 N-C =N ; 157.49 N-C=C ; 113.25 C=C-N ; 43.22, 41.31, 31.72 3xCH 2 ; 22.06, 19.36 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 ; 21.80 CH . 3\n\nRf (SiO /에틸아세테이트 : 메탄올, 9 : 1) = 0.2\n\n2\n\n실시예2 : 3-2-[4-(6-플로로벤조[d]아이소옥사졸-3-일)-피페리딘-1-일]-비닐-2-메틸-6,7,8,9-테트라하이드로피리도[1,2-a]피리미딘-4-온(III)\n\n2.96g(14.33몰)의 (2-메틸-4-옥소-6,7,8,9-테트라하이드로-4H-피리도[1,2-a]피리미딘-3-일)-아세트알데하이드(II) , 3.16g(14.33몰)의 6-플로로-3-(4-피페리디닐)-벤조[d]아이소옥사졸(IV) 및 500mL의 톨루엔으로 이루어진 혼합물이 Dean Stark 기구로 옮겨졌다. 그 혼합물이 끓는점까지 가열되어 3시간동안 환류되었고 그 후 용매는 저압 하에서 증발되 어5.70g(97.3%)의3-2-[4-(6-플로로벤조[d]아이소옥사졸-3-일)-피페리딘-1-일]-비닐-2-메틸-6,7,8,9-테트라하 이드로-피리도[1,2-a]피리미딘-4-온(III)을 짙은 오렌지색 고체로 생성하였다. 이렇게 얻어진 화합물 또는 유기 용매 바 람직하게는에탄올로부터선택적으로결정화되어진화합물은사전정제없이계속되는반응단계에서사용되기에충분히 순수했다.\n\n1 HNMR (CDCl 3 ), δ (ppm) : 7.85 d, J=14 Hz, 1H, =CHN ; 7.67 dd, J1=8.8 Hz, J2=4.8 Hz, 1H, CH 방향족 ; 7.25 dd, J =8.4 Hz, J =2.0 Hz, 1H, CH 방향족 ; 7.07 m, 1H, CH 방향족 ; 5.16 d, J=14 Hz, 1H, CH=CHN ; 3.97 t, J=6.4 Hz, 1 2 2H, CH 2 -NCO ; 3.65 d, J=12.8 Hz, 2H ; 3.23 m, 1H ; 2.95 m, 2H ; 2.88 t, J=6.6 Hz, 2H, CH 2 C=N(N) ; 2.34 s, 3H, CH 3 ; 2.11 m, 4H ; 1.97 m, 2H ; 1.88 m, 2H.\n\n13 CNMR (CDCl₃), δ (ppm) : 165.32-162.83, d, J C -F =249 Hz, C 방향족 ; 163.92-163.79, d J C -F =13 Hz, C 방향족 ; 162.83 C 방향족 ; 160.98 C 방향족 ; 160.64 C 방향족 ; 152.60 C 방향족 ; 143.59 CH 엔아민 ; 122.40-122.29 d J C F =11 Hz, CH 방향족 ; 118.42 C 방향족 ; 117.13-117.1 d J C -F =11 Hz, C 방향족 ; 112.53-112.28 d, J C -F =25 Hz, CH 방향족;97.58-97.31 d, J C -F =27 Hz, CH 방향족 ; 91.87 CH 엔아민 ; 48.16 CH 2 ; 42.55 CH 2 ; 34.43 CH 2 ; 31.29 CH 2 ; 29.69 CH 2 ; 22.19 CH 2 ; 22.07 CH 2 ; 19.38 CH . 2\n\nRf (SiO /에틸아세테이트 : 메탄올, 9 : 1) = 0.21 2\n\nRf (SiO /클로로포름 : 메탄올, 9 : 1) = 0.50 2\n\n실시예3 : 3-2-[4-(6-플로로벤조(D)아이소옥사졸-3-일)-피페리딘-1-일]-에틸-2-메틸-6,7,8,9-테트라하이드로4H-피리도-(1,2-a)피리미딘-4-온(I)\n\n실온및보호분위기에서교반중인22mL의앱솔루트에탄올에들어있는1.39g(3.42몰)의 3-2-[4-(6-플로로벤조[d]아 이소옥사졸-3-일)-피페리딘-1-일]-비닐-2-메틸-6,7,8,9-테트라하이드로-피리도[1,2-a]피리미딘-4-온(III)과 1mL 의빙상아세트산의현택액에0.254g(4.04몰)의 소듐사이아노보로하이드라이드가 1시간 동안 조금씩 첨가되었다. 1시간 후용매는증발되었고얻어진미정제생성물은250mL의에틸아세테이트에용해되었다.유기층은50mL의1M 수용성소 듐바이카보네이트용액, 50mL의 물 및 50mL의 포화 염화나트륨 용액으로 잇따라 세척되었고 무수 마그네슘설페이트로 건조되었다. 이렇게 얻어진 용액이 걸러지고 용매가 증발되어 1.17g의 잔류고체가 생성되었다(83%). 이 잔류고체는 메틸\n\n- 9 -", + "recall": 0.8098591549295775, + "true_md": "등록특허 10-0680003\n\n무수 소듐설페이트로 건조되고 걸러졌으며 용매는 증발되어 4.90g(99%)의 (2-메틸-4-옥소-6,7,8,9-테트라하이드로- 4H-피리도[1,2-a]피리미딘-3-일)-아세트알데하이드(II)이 기름 같은 잔류물로 얻어졌다. 이렇게 얻어진 화합물은 사전 정제없이도 계속되는 반응 단계에서 사용되기에 충분히 순수했다.\n\n$^{1}$HNMR (CDCl$_{3}$), δ (ppm) : 9.71 t, J=1.2 Hz, 1H, 알데하이드 ; 3.93 t, J=6.0 Hz, 2H, CH 2 -N) ; 3.66 d, J=1.2 Hz, 2H, CH 2 CHO ; 2.90 t, J=6.8 Hz, 2H, CH$_{2}$CH 2 C(N)=N ; 2.22 s, 3H, CH 3 ; 2.00-1.85 m, 4H, CH$_{2}$CH 2 CH 2 CH$_{2}$.\n\n$^{13}$CNMR (CDCl$_{3}$), δ (ppm) : 198.59 CHO ; 162.65 NCO ; 160.69 N-C =N ; 157.49 N-C=C ; 113.25 C=C-N ; 43.22, 41.31, 31.72 3xCH$_{2}$ ; 22.06, 19.36 CH$_{2}$ CH$_{2}$ CH$_{2}$CH$_{2}$ ; 21.80 CH$_{3}$.\n\nRf (SiO$_{2}$/에틸아세테이트 : 메탄올, 9 : 1) = 0.2\n\n실시예 2 : 3-2-[4-(6-플로로벤조[d]아이소옥사졸-3-일)-피페리딘-1-일]-비닐-2-메틸-6,7,8,9-테트라하이드로- 피리도[1,2-a]피리미딘-4-온(III)\n\n2.96g(14.33몰)의 (2-메틸-4-옥소-6,7,8,9-테트라하이드로-4H-피리도[1,2-a]피리미딘-3-일)-아세트알데하이드(II) , 3.16g(14.33몰)의 6-플로로-3-(4-피페리디닐)-벤조[d]아이소옥사졸(IV) 및 500mL의 톨루엔으로 이루어진 혼합물이 Dean Stark 기구로 옮겨졌다. 그 혼합물이 끓는점까지 가열되어 3시간동안 환류되었고 그 후 용매는 저압 하에서 증발되 어 5.70g(97.3%)의3-2-[4-(6-플로로벤조[d]아이소옥사졸-3-일)-피페리딘-1-일]-비닐-2-메틸-6,7,8,9-테트라하 이드로-피리도[1,2-a]피리미딘-4-온(III)을 짙은 오렌지색 고체로 생성하였다. 이렇게 얻어진 화합물 또는 유기 용매 바 람직하게는 에탄올로부터 선택적으로 결정화되어진 화합물은 사전 정제 없이 계속되는 반응 단계에서 사용되기에 충분히 순수했다.\n\n$^{1}$HNMR (CDCl$_{3}$), δ (ppm) : 7.85 d, J=14 Hz, 1H, =CHN ; 7.67 dd, J1=8.8 Hz, J2=4.8 Hz, 1H, CH 방향족 ; 7.25 dd, J$_{1}$=8.4 Hz, J$_{2}$=2.0 Hz, 1H, CH 방향족 ; 7.07 m, 1H, CH 방향족 ; 5.16 d, J=14 Hz, 1H, CH=CHN ; 3.97 t, J=6.4 Hz, 2H, CH 2 -NCO ; 3.65 d, J=12.8 Hz, 2H ; 3.23 m, 1H ; 2.95 m, 2H ; 2.88 t, J=6.6 Hz, 2H, CH 2 C=N(N) ; 2.34 s, 3H, CH 3 ; 2.11 m, 4H ; 1.97 m, 2H ; 1.88 m, 2H.\n\n$^{13}$CNMR (CDCl₃), δ (ppm) : 165.32-162.83, d, J$_{C -F}$=249 Hz, C 방향족 ; 163.92-163.79, d J$_{C -F}$=13 Hz, C 방향족 ; 162.83 C 방향족 ; 160.98 C 방향족 ; 160.64 C 방향족 ; 152.60 C 방향족 ; 143.59 CH 엔아민 ; 122.40-122.29 d J$_{C -}$ $_{F}$=11 Hz, CH 방향족 ; 118.42 C 방향족 ; 117.13-117.1 d J$_{C -F}$=11 Hz, C 방향족 ; 112.53-112.28 d, J$_{C -F}$=25 Hz, CH 방향족 ; 97.58-97.31 d, J$_{C -F}$=27 Hz, CH 방향족 ; 91.87 CH 엔아민 ; 48.16 CH$_{2}$ ; 42.55 CH$_{2}$ ; 34.43 CH$_{2}$ ; 31.29 CH$_{2}$ ; 29.69 CH$_{2}$ ; 22.19 CH$_{2}$ ; 22.07 CH$_{2}$ ; 19.38 CH$_{2}$.\n\nRf (SiO$_{2}$/에틸아세테이트 : 메탄올, 9 : 1) = 0.21\n\nRf (SiO$_{2}$/클로로포름 : 메탄올, 9 : 1) = 0.50\n\n실시예 3 : 3-2-[4-(6-플로로벤조(D)아이소옥사졸-3-일)-피페리딘-1-일]-에틸-2-메틸-6,7,8,9-테트라하이드로- 4H-피리도-(1,2-a)피리미딘-4-온(I)\n\n실온 및 보호분위기에서 교반 중인 22mL의 앱솔루트 에탄올에 들어있는1.39g(3.42몰)의 3-2-[4-(6-플로로벤조[d]아 이소옥사졸-3-일)-피페리딘-1-일]-비닐-2-메틸-6,7,8,9-테트라하이드로-피리도[1,2-a]피리미딘-4-온(III)과 1mL 의 빙상 아세트산의 현택액에 0.254g(4.04몰)의 소듐사이아노보로하이드라이드가 1시간 동안 조금씩 첨가되었다. 1시간 후 용매는 증발되었고 얻어진 미정제 생성물은 250mL의 에틸아세테이트에 용해되었다. 유기 층은 50mL의 1M 수용성 소 듐바이카보네이트 용액, 50mL의 물 및 50mL의 포화 염화나트륨 용액으로 잇따라 세척되었고 무수 마그네슘설페이트로 건조되었다. 이렇게 얻어진 용액이 걸러지고 용매가 증발되어 1.17g의 잔류고체가 생성되었다(83%). 이 잔류고체는 메틸\n\n- 9 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8256968437665677, + "doc_id": "b8d5f4ff600d0aca06fa44c7843ee87e7d90b6a9e4cc166c9ef16dcefb7239b8", + "edit_distance": 0.17518248175182483, + "f1_score": 0.8461538461538461, + "meteor": 0.8342043163132348, + "precision": 0.9041095890410958, + "pred_md": "등록특허 10-0680003\n\n본발명의식II화합물인(2-메틸-4-옥소-6,7,8,9-테트라하이드로-4H-피리도[1,2-a]피리미딘-3-일)-아세트알데하 이드는3-(2-하이드록시에틸)-2-메틸-6,7,8,9-테트라하이드로-4H-피리도[1,2-a]피리미딘-4-온(X)으로부터 제조된 다(이 화합물의 제조는 후지타 등. Ann. Rep. Sankyo Res. 1977, 29, 75-78에 설명되어있다).\n\n식III 엔아민인 3-2-[4-(6-플로로벤조[d]아이소옥사졸-3-일)-피페리딘-1-일]-비닐-2-메틸-6,7,8,9-테트라하이드 로-피리도[1,2-a]피리미딘-4-온은 알데하이드 II로부터 식 IV의 6-플로로-3-(4-피페리디닐)-벤조[d]아이소옥사졸과 의축합반응에의해얻어진다(화합물IV의제조는스페인특허제8405791에설명되어있다).\n\n출원인들은식III의 엔아민이 환원제의 활동에 의해 쉽게 3-2-[4-(6-플로로벤조(D)아이소옥사졸-3-일)-피페리딘-1일]-에틸-2-메틸-6,7,8,9-테트라하이드로-4H-피리도-(1,2-a)피리미딘-4-온(I)으로 환원될 수 있다는 것을 알아냈다.\n\n- 7 -", + "recall": 0.7951807228915663, + "true_md": "등록특허 10-0680003\n\n본 발명의 식 II 화합물인 (2-메틸-4-옥소-6,7,8,9-테트라하이드로-4H-피리도[1,2-a]피리미딘-3-일)-아세트알데하 이드는 3-(2-하이드록시에틸)-2-메틸-6,7,8,9-테트라하이드로-4H-피리도[1,2-a]피리미딘-4-온(X)으로부터 제조된 다(이 화합물의 제조는 후지타 등. Ann. Rep. Sankyo Res. 1977, 29, 75-78에 설명되어있다).\n\n식 III 엔아민인 3-2-[4-(6-플로로벤조[d]아이소옥사졸-3-일)-피페리딘-1-일]-비닐-2-메틸-6,7,8,9-테트라하이드 로-피리도[1,2-a]피리미딘-4-온은 알데하이드 II로부터 식 IV의 6-플로로-3-(4-피페리디닐)-벤조[d]아이소옥사졸과 의 축합반응에 의해 얻어진다(화합물 IV의 제조는 스페인특허 제8405791에 설명되어있다).\n\n출원인들은 식 III의 엔아민이 환원제의 활동에 의해 쉽게 3-2-[4-(6-플로로벤조(D)아이소옥사졸-3-일)-피페리딘-1- 일]-에틸-2-메틸-6,7,8,9-테트라하이드로-4H-피리도-(1,2-a)피리미딘-4-온(I)으로 환원될 수 있다는 것을 알아냈다.\n\n- 7 -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6689184057560943, + "doc_id": "1cfdaf1a563cbb53ed1c105fb07fe0ddd42cc9aa74de8d7eb88337d0d9b31fb8", + "edit_distance": 0.31869918699186994, + "f1_score": 0.7590759075907592, + "meteor": 0.7181649608356069, + "precision": 0.8949416342412452, + "pred_md": "등록특허 10-0680003\n\n택일적으로, 최종생성물인 3-2-[4-(6-플로로벤조(D)아이소옥사졸-3-일)-피페리딘-1-일]-에틸-2-메틸-6,7,8,9-테 트라하이드로-4H-피리도-(1,2-a)피리미딘-4-온(I)의 형성은 단일 단계 합성과정으로 환원성 아미노화 조건하에서 (2메틸-4-옥소-6,7,8,9-테트라하이드로-4H-피리도[1,2-a]피리미딘-3-일)-아세트알데하이드(II)와 6-플로로-3-(4-피 페리디닐)-벤조[d]아이소옥사졸(IV)로부터 직접 그리고 유리하게 일어날 수 있다.\n\n본발명에서설명된과정은합성에서의간결함과활성물질리스페리돈(I)의생산에있어서비용,안전및생태학적요구에 대한준수를겸비하고있다.화학적과정은양질의최종생산물로인도하는간단하고고수율인합성단계를통해서대규모 로쉽게재현이가능하다.\n\n식II와 식 III의 화합물은 이전에 설명되어진 바가 없으며 본 발명의 일부를 구성한다.\n\n## 발명의 상세한 설명\n\n(2-메틸-4-옥소-6,7,8,9-테트라하이드로-4H-피리도[1,2-a]피리미딘-3-일)-아세트알데하이드(II)을 제공하기 위한 3-(2-하이드록시에틸)-2-메틸-6,7,8,9-테트라하이드로-4H-피리도[1,2-a]피리미딘-4-온(X)의 산화반응에 대해서는 다이사이클로헥실카보다이이미드, 아세트안하이드라이드, 트라이플로로아세트안하이드라이드, 삼산화황 또는 바람직하 게는옥살릴클로라이드같은친전자성시약의존재하에서다이메틸설폭사이드의사용에기초한과정이바람직하다.반응 은-78℃부터 실온까지의 범위에 속하는 온도로, 염기, 바람직하게는 트라이에틸아민의 존재 하에서 그리고 비활성 용매, 바람직하게는메틸렌클로라이드에서수행된다.\n\n중간체엔아민III을 제공하기위한 (2-메틸-4-옥소-6,7,8,9-테트라하이드로-4H-피리도[1,2-a]피리미딘-3-일)-아세 트알데하이드(II)와 6-플로로-3-(4-피페리디닐)-벤조[d]아이소옥사졸(IV) 또는 그것의 염들 중의 어느 것 사이의 축합 반응은20℃부터 150℃까지의 범위에 속하는 온도, 바람직하게는 환류 온도로 비활성 용매, 바람직하게는 톨루엔에서 수 행된다. 반응은 산이나 염기를 첨가함으로써 활성화될 수 있다. 반응은 반응 중에 배출되는 물을 뽑아내는 시스템 예를 들 면, 분자체(molecular sieve)나 다른 건조제의 사용을 통한 화학 평형의 이동에 의해 유리해질 수 있다. 바람직하게는 물 은공비증류(azeotropic distillation)에 의해 반응매체로부터 치환되어질 수 있다.\n\n최종화합물I을제공하기위한중간체엔아민III의환원반응은선택적으로염, 염기또는무기산의존재하에서소듐하이드 라이드, 포타슘하이드라이드, 마그네슘하이드라이드, 칼슘하이드라이드, 소듐보로하이드라이드, 소듐사이아노보로하이드 라이드, 소듐트리스아세톡시보로하이드라이드, 리튬하이드라이드, 리튬하이드라이드와 알루미늄하이드라이드, 소듐하이 드라이드와알루미늄하이드라이드, 알루미늄하이드라이드, 소듐하이드라이드와비스(2-메톡시에톡시)알루미늄하이드라 이드, 알루미늄 모노(C 1-4 alkoxy)알루미늄하이드라이드, 리튬다이(C 1-4 alkoxy)알루미늄하이드라이드, 소듐하이드라이\n\n드와다이에텔알루미늄하이드라이드같은여러가지수소화물또는그것들의혼합물을사용해서수행될수있다.환원반 응은또한아민의존재하에서보레인또는다이보레인을사용해서수행될수도있다.바람직하게는소듐사이아노보로하 이드라이드또는소듐보로하이드라이드가아세트산의존재하에서사용된다.반응은테트라하이드로퓨란(THF),에틸에 터, tert-부탈메틸에터, 톨루엔과 THF의 혼합물 등과 같은 여러 가지 약하게 극성인 용매 또는 에탄올, 메탄올, 아이소프 로판올, 부탄올이나 다른 끓는점이 높은 알콜같은 극성용매 또는 물, 에탄올과 물의 혼합물 등과 같은 극성용매에서 수행 될수있으며,에탄올이가장사용하기에좋다.반응온도는-20℃부터80℃의범위를가질수있으며약25℃가바람직하 다.\n\n뒤따르는실시예는본발명을설명하기위한것이지만본발명의범위는거기에한정되지않는다..\n\n## 실시예\n\n실시예1 : (2-메틸-4-옥소-6,7,8,9-테트라하이드로-4H-피리도[1,2-a]피리미딘-3-일)-아세트알데하이드(II)\n\n저온(-70℃ 내지 -50℃) 및 비활성 분위기에서 70mL의 무수 메틸렌클로라이드에 2.2mL(25.22몰)의 옥살릴클로라이드 가들어가교반된혼합물에4.1mL(57.78몰)의 다이메틸설폭사이드가 첨가되었다. 그 다음에 30mL의 메틸렌클로라이드 에5g(24.02몰)의 3-(2-하이드록시에틸)-2-메틸-6,7,8,9-테트라하이드로-4H-피리도[1,2-a]피리미딘-4-온(X)이 들 어있는용액이첨가되었다.30분후에, 14.6mL(104.75몰)의 트라이에틸아민이 첨가되었고 그 혼합물은 실온에서 45분간 데워졌다. 75mL의 물이 부어졌고 유기 층이 따라내어졌다. 수용액 층은 메틸렌클로라이드로 제거되었다. 전체 유기 층은\n\n- 8 -", + "recall": 0.6590257879656161, + "true_md": "등록특허 10-0680003\n\n택일적으로, 최종생성물인 3-2-[4-(6-플로로벤조(D)아이소옥사졸-3-일)-피페리딘-1-일]-에틸-2-메틸-6,7,8,9-테 트라하이드로-4H-피리도-(1,2-a)피리미딘-4-온(I)의 형성은 단일 단계 합성과정으로 환원성 아미노화 조건하에서 (2- 메틸-4-옥소-6,7,8,9-테트라하이드로-4H-피리도[1,2-a]피리미딘-3-일)-아세트알데하이드(II)와 6-플로로-3-(4-피 페리디닐)-벤조[d]아이소옥사졸(IV)로부터 직접 그리고 유리하게 일어날 수 있다.\n\n본 발명에서 설명된 과정은 합성에서의 간결함과 활성 물질 리스페리돈(I)의 생산에 있어서 비용, 안전 및 생태학적 요구에 대한 준수를 겸비하고 있다. 화학적 과정은 양질의 최종 생산물로 인도하는 간단하고 고수율인 합성 단계를 통해서 대규모 로 쉽게 재현이 가능하다.\n\n식 II와 식 III의 화합물은 이전에 설명되어진 바가 없으며 본 발명의 일부를 구성한다.\n\n(2-메틸-4-옥소-6,7,8,9-테트라하이드로-4H-피리도[1,2-a]피리미딘-3-일)-아세트알데하이드(II)을 제공하기 위한 3-(2-하이드록시에틸)-2-메틸-6,7,8,9-테트라하이드로-4H-피리도[1,2-a]피리미딘-4-온(X)의 산화반응에 대해서는 다이사이클로헥실카보다이이미드, 아세트안하이드라이드, 트라이플로로아세트안하이드라이드, 삼산화황 또는 바람직하 게는 옥살릴클로라이드 같은 친전자성 시약의 존재 하에서 다이메틸설폭사이드의 사용에 기초한 과정이 바람직하다. 반응 은 -78℃부터 실온까지의 범위에 속하는 온도로, 염기, 바람직하게는 트라이에틸아민의 존재 하에서 그리고 비활성 용매, 바람직하게는 메틸렌클로라이드에서 수행된다.\n\n중간체 엔아민 III을 제공하기위한 (2-메틸-4-옥소-6,7,8,9-테트라하이드로-4H-피리도[1,2-a]피리미딘-3-일)-아세 트알데하이드(II)와 6-플로로-3-(4-피페리디닐)-벤조[d]아이소옥사졸(IV) 또는 그것의 염들 중의 어느 것 사이의 축합 반응은 20℃부터 150℃까지의 범위에 속하는 온도, 바람직하게는 환류 온도로 비활성 용매, 바람직하게는 톨루엔에서 수 행된다. 반응은 산이나 염기를 첨가함으로써 활성화될 수 있다. 반응은 반응 중에 배출되는 물을 뽑아내는 시스템 예를 들 면, 분자체(molecular sieve)나 다른 건조제의 사용을 통한 화학 평형의 이동에 의해 유리해질 수 있다. 바람직하게는 물 은 공비증류(azeotropic distillation)에 의해 반응매체로부터 치환되어질 수 있다.\n\n최종화합물 I을 제공하기위한 중간체 엔아민 III의 환원반응은 선택적으로 염, 염기 또는 무기산의 존재 하에서 소듐하이드 라이드, 포타슘하이드라이드, 마그네슘하이드라이드, 칼슘하이드라이드, 소듐보로하이드라이드, 소듐사이아노보로하이드 라이드, 소듐트리스아세톡시보로하이드라이드, 리튬하이드라이드, 리튬하이드라이드와 알루미늄하이드라이드, 소듐하이 드라이드와 알루미늄하이드라이드, 알루미늄하이드라이드, 소듐하이드라이드와 비스(2-메톡시에톡시)알루미늄하이드라 이드, 알루미늄 모노(C$_{1-4}$alkoxy)알루미늄하이드라이드, 리튬다이(C$_{1-4}$alkoxy)알루미늄하이드라이드, 소듐하이드라이 드와 다이에텔알루미늄하이드라이드 같은 여러 가지 수소화물 또는 그것들의 혼합물을 사용해서 수행될 수 있다. 환원반 응은 또한 아민의 존재 하에서 보레인 또는 다이보레인을 사용해서 수행될 수도 있다. 바람직하게는 소듐사이아노보로하 이드라이드 또는 소듐보로하이드라이드가 아세트산의 존재 하에서 사용된다. 반응은 테트라하이드로퓨란(THF), 에틸에 터, tert-부탈메틸에터, 톨루엔과 THF의 혼합물 등과 같은 여러 가지 약하게 극성인 용매 또는 에탄올, 메탄올, 아이소프 로판올, 부탄올이나 다른 끓는점이 높은 알콜같은 극성용매 또는 물, 에탄올과 물의 혼합물 등과 같은 극성용매에서 수행 될 수 있으며, 에탄올이 가장 사용하기에 좋다. 반응온도는 -20℃부터 80℃의 범위를 가질 수 있으며 약 25℃가 바람직하 다.\n\n뒤따르는 실시예는 본 발명을 설명하기 위한 것이지만 본 발명의 범위는 거기에 한정되지 않는다..\n\n실시예 1 : (2-메틸-4-옥소-6,7,8,9-테트라하이드로-4H-피리도[1,2-a]피리미딘-3-일)-아세트알데하이드(II)\n\n저온(-70℃ 내지 -50℃) 및 비활성 분위기에서 70mL의 무수 메틸렌클로라이드에 2.2mL(25.22몰)의 옥살릴클로라이드 가 들어가 교반된 혼합물에 4.1mL(57.78몰)의 다이메틸설폭사이드가 첨가되었다. 그 다음에 30mL의 메틸렌클로라이드 에 5g(24.02몰)의 3-(2-하이드록시에틸)-2-메틸-6,7,8,9-테트라하이드로-4H-피리도[1,2-a]피리미딘-4-온(X)이 들 어있는 용액이 첨가되었다. 30분 후에, 14.6mL(104.75몰)의 트라이에틸아민이 첨가되었고 그 혼합물은 실온에서 45분간 데워졌다. 75mL의 물이 부어졌고 유기 층이 따라내어졌다. 수용액 층은 메틸렌클로라이드로 제거되었다. 전체 유기 층은\n\n## 실시예\n\n- 8 -\n\n## 발명의 상세한 설명" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9376845357747197, + "doc_id": "43d9232d2af2482b478e011482309f0c4596930633b79ca625282d9d4712a900", + "edit_distance": 0.8970233306516492, + "f1_score": 0.9695603156708006, + "meteor": 0.6552679079269191, + "precision": 0.9598214285714286, + "pred_md": "29\n\n30\n\nand mercaptans, are components of many types of malodors, e.g., food odors (garlic, onion), body/perspiration odor, breath odor, etc. Low molecular weight amines are also components of many malodors, e.g., food odors, body odors, urine, etc.\n\nCopper salts possess some malodor control abilities. See U.S. Pat. No. 3,172,817, Leupold, et al., which discloses deodorizing compositions for treating disposable articles, comprising at least slightly water-soluble salts of acylacetone, including copper salts and zinc salts, all of said patents are incorporated herein by reference. Copper salts also have some antimicrobial benefits. Specifically, cupric abietate acts as a fungicide, copper acetate acts as a mildew inhibitor, cupric chloride acts as a fungicide, copper lactate acts as a fungicide, and copper sulfate acts as a germicide.\n\nWhen metallic salts are added to the composition of the present invention as an odor control agent, they are typically present at a level of from about 0.1 % to an effective amount to provide a saturated salt solution, preferably from about 0.2% to about 25%, more preferably from about 0.3% to about 8%, still more preferably from about 0.4% to about 5% by weight of the usage composition.\n\n## 3. Supplemental Fabric Wrinkle Control Agents\n\nThe stable, aqueous compositions herein can further com› prise an effective amount of a supplemental fabric wrinkle control agent, in addition to the low molecular weight polyalkyleneoxide polysiloxanes described hereinbefore, that will provide enhanced body, form and drape control or smoothness to the fabrics treated with the present compo› sitions. Preferably, these agents will be selected from the group consisting of fiber lubricants, shape retention polymers, hydrophilic plasticizers, lithium salts, and mix› tures thereof.\n\n## a. Fiber Lubricants\n\nThe present invention may utilize a fiber lubricant to impart a lubricating property or increased gliding ability to fibers in fabric, particularly clothing. Not to be bound by theory, it is believed that water and other alcoholic solvents break or weaken the hydrogen bonds that hold the wrinkles, thus the fabric lubricant facilitates the fibers to glide on one another to further release the fibers from the wrinkle con› dition in wet or damp fabric. After the fabric is dried, a residual fiber lubricant can provide lubricity to reduce the tendency of fabric re-wrinkling.\n\n## i. Silicone Polymers\n\nThe present invention may utilize silicone as a supple› mental fabric wrinkle control agent to impart an enhanced lubricating property or increased gliding ability to fibers in fabric, particularly clothing. Although silicones can be uti› lized as supplemental fabric wrinkle control agents, such compounds are not desirable in the present compositions because the compositions already contain low molecular weight polyalkyleneoxide polysiloxanes. Thus, the present compositions are preferably essentially free of, or free of, additional silicone materials, except for the low molecular weight polyalkyleneoxide polysiloxane surfactants described hereinbefore. It is especially preferred that the present compositions are essentially free of, or free of, additional volatile silicone oil materials, other than the low molecular weight polyalkyleneoxide polysiloxane surfactants.\n\nNonetheless, it is possible, although not preferred, to incorporate additional silicones in the present compositions. Nonlimiting examples of useful silicones include noncur› able silicones such as polydimethylsilicone, relatively high molecular weight polyalkyleneoxide modified polydimethylsilicone, amino and quaternary modified sili-\n\nnes and volatile silicones, and curable silicones such as aminosilicones and hydroxysilicones. Preferred silicone supplemental wrinkle control agents include polyalkyle› neoxide polysiloxanes having realtively high molecular weights, for example, a molecular weight of greater than about 1,000, preferably at least about 5,000, and more preferably at least about 10,000. Many types of aminofunc› tional silicones also cause fabric yellowing and such silicones are not preferred.\n\nNon-limiting examples of silicones which are useful in the present invention are: non-volatile silicone fluids such as polydimethyl siloxane gums and fluids; volatile silicone fluid which can be a cyclic silicone fluid of the formula [(CH 3 ) 2 SiO]n where n ranges between about 3 to about 7, preferably about 5, or a linear silicone polymer fluid having the formula (CH 3 ) 3 SiO[(CH3 ) 2 SiO]mSi(CH3 ) 3 where m can be O or greater and has an average value such that the viscosity at 25° C. of the silicone fluid is preferably about 5 centistokes or less.\n\nThus one type of silicone that is useful in the composition of the present invention is polyalkyl silicone with the following structure:\n\n\n\nThe alkyl groups substituted on the siloxane chain (R) or at the ends of the siloxane chains (A) can have any structure as long as the resulting silicones remain fluid at room tempera› ture.\n\nEach R group preferably is alkyl, hydroxy, or hydroxy› alkyl group, and mixtures thereof, having less than about 8, preferably less than about 6 carbon atoms, more preferably, each R group is methyl, ethyl, propyl, hydroxy group, and mixtures thereof. Most preferably, each R group is methyl. Aryl, alkylaryl and/or arylalkyl groups are not preferred. Each A group which blocks the ends of the silicone chain is hydrogen, methyl, methoxy, ethoxy, hydroxy, propoxy, and mixtures thereof, preferably methyl q is preferably an inte› ger from about 7 to about 8,000.\n\nThe preferred silicones are polydimethyl siloxanes and preferably those polydimethyl siloxanes having a viscosity of from about 10 to about 1,000,000 centistokes at 25° C. Mixtures of volatile silicones and non-volatile polydimethyl siloxanes are also preferred. Preferably, the silicones are hydrophobic, non-irritating, non-toxic, and not otherwise harmful when applied to fabric or when they come in contact with human skin. Further, the silicones are compatible with other components of the composition are chemically stable under normal use and storage conditions and are capable of being deposited on fabric.\n\nSuitable methods for preparing these silicone materials are described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 2,826,551 and 3,964,500. Silicones useful in the present invention are also commer› cially available. Suitable examples include silicones offered by Dow Corning Corporation and General Electric Company.\n\nOther useful silicone materials, include materials of the formula:\n\nwherein x and y are integers which depend on the molecular weight of the silicone, preferably having a viscosity of from about 10,000 est to about 500,000 est at 25° C. This material is also known as \"amodimethicone\". Although silicones with a high number, e.g., greater than about 0.5 millimolar equivalent of amine groups can be used, they are not preferred because they can cause fabric yellowing.\n\nUS 6,503,413 B2\n\n5\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n60\n\n65", + "recall": 0.979498861047836, + "true_md": "29 \n\nUS 6,503,413 B2 \n\n30 \n\nwherein x and y are integers which depend on the molecular weight of the silicone, preferably having a viscosity of from about 10,000 est to about 500,000 est at 25° C. This material is also known as \"amodimethicone\". Although silicones with a high number, e.g., greater than about 0.5 millimolar equivalent of amine groups can be used, they are not preferred because they can cause fabric yellowing. \n\nNonetheless, it is possible, although not preferred, to incorporate additional silicones in the present compositions. Nonlimiting examples of useful silicones include noncur› able silicones such as polydimethylsilicone, relatively high molecular weight polyalkyleneoxide modified polydimethylsilicone, amino and quaternary modified sili-\n\nThe present invention may utilize silicone as a supple› mental fabric wrinkle control agent to impart an enhanced lubricating property or increased gliding ability to fibers in fabric, particularly clothing. Although silicones can be uti› lized as supplemental fabric wrinkle control agents, such compounds are not desirable in the present compositions because the compositions already contain low molecular weight polyalkyleneoxide polysiloxanes. Thus, the present compositions are preferably essentially free of, or free of, additional silicone materials, except for the low molecular weight polyalkyleneoxide polysiloxane surfactants described hereinbefore. It is especially preferred that the present compositions are essentially free of, or free of, additional volatile silicone oil materials, other than the low molecular weight polyalkyleneoxide polysiloxane surfac- tants. \n\nSuitable methods for preparing these silicone materials are described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 2,826,551 and 3,964,500. Silicones useful in the present invention are also commer› cially available. Suitable examples include silicones offered by Dow Corning Corporation and General Electric Com- pany. \n\nOther useful silicone materials, include materials of the formula: \n\nThe preferred silicones are polydimethyl siloxanes and preferably those polydimethyl siloxanes having a viscosity of from about 10 to about 1,000,000 centistokes at 25° C. Mixtures of volatile silicones and non-volatile polydimethyl siloxanes are also preferred. Preferably, the silicones are hydrophobic, non-irritating, non-toxic, and not otherwise harmful when applied to fabric or when they come in contact with human skin. Further, the silicones are compatible with other components of the composition are chemically stable under normal use and storage conditions and are capable of being deposited on fabric. \n\nThe present invention may utilize a fiber lubricant to impart a lubricating property or increased gliding ability to fibers in fabric, particularly clothing. Not to be bound by theory, it is believed that water and other alcoholic solvents break or weaken the hydrogen bonds that hold the wrinkles, thus the fabric lubricant facilitates the fibers to glide on one another to further release the fibers from the wrinkle con› dition in wet or damp fabric. After the fabric is dried, a residual fiber lubricant can provide lubricity to reduce the tendency of fabric re-wrinkling. i. Silicone Polymers \n\nEach R group preferably is alkyl, hydroxy, or hydroxy› alkyl group, and mixtures thereof, having less than about 8, preferably less than about 6 carbon atoms, more preferably, each R group is methyl, ethyl, propyl, hydroxy group, and mixtures thereof. Most preferably, each R group is methyl. Aryl, alkylaryl and/or arylalkyl groups are not preferred. Each A group which blocks the ends of the silicone chain is hydrogen, methyl, methoxy, ethoxy, hydroxy, propoxy, and mixtures thereof, preferably methyl q is preferably an inte› ger from about 7 to about 8,000. \n\nThe stable, aqueous compositions herein can further com› prise an effective amount of a supplemental fabric wrinkle control agent, in addition to the low molecular weight polyalkyleneoxide polysiloxanes described hereinbefore, that will provide enhanced body, form and drape control or smoothness to the fabrics treated with the present compo› sitions. Preferably, these agents will be selected from the group consisting of fiber lubricants, shape retention polymers, hydrophilic plasticizers, lithium salts, and mix› tures thereof. \n\na. Fiber Lubricants \n\nThe alkyl groups substituted on the siloxane chain (R) or at the ends of the siloxane chains (A) can have any structure as long as the resulting silicones remain fluid at room tempera› ture. \n\nThus one type of silicone that is useful in the composition of the present invention is polyalkyl silicone with the following structure: \n\nWhen metallic salts are added to the composition of the present invention as an odor control agent, they are typically present at a level of from about 0.1 % to an effective amount to provide a saturated salt solution, preferably from about 0.2% to about 25%, more preferably from about 0.3% to about 8%, still more preferably from about 0.4% to about 5% by weight of the usage composition. \n\n3. Supplemental Fabric Wrinkle Control Agents \n\nNon-limiting examples of silicones which are useful in the present invention are: non-volatile silicone fluids such as polydimethyl siloxane gums and fluids; volatile silicone fluid which can be a cyclic silicone fluid of the formula [(CH$_{3}$ ) 2 SiO]n where n ranges between about 3 to about 7, preferably about 5, or a linear silicone polymer fluid having the formula (CH$_{3}$ ) $_{3}$SiO[(CH$_{3}$ ) $_{2}$SiO]mSi(CH$_{3}$ ) 3 where m can be O or greater and has an average value such that the viscosity at 25° C. of the silicone fluid is preferably about 5 centistokes or less. \n\ncones and volatile silicones, and curable silicones such as aminosilicones and hydroxysilicones. Preferred silicone supplemental wrinkle control agents include polyalkyle› neoxide polysiloxanes having realtively high molecular weights, for example, a molecular weight of greater than about 1,000, preferably at least about 5,000, and more preferably at least about 10,000. Many types of aminofunc› tional silicones also cause fabric yellowing and such sili- cones are not preferred. \n\nand mercaptans, are components of many types of malodors, e.g., food odors (garlic, onion), body/perspiration odor, breath odor, etc. Low molecular weight amines are also components of many malodors, e.g., food odors, body odors, urine, etc. \n\nCopper salts possess some malodor control abilities. See U.S. Pat. No. 3,172,817, Leupold, et al., which discloses deodorizing compositions for treating disposable articles, comprising at least slightly water-soluble salts of acylacetone, including copper salts and zinc salts, all of said patents are incorporated herein by reference. Copper salts also have some antimicrobial benefits. Specifically, cupric abietate acts as a fungicide, copper acetate acts as a mildew inhibitor, cupric chloride acts as a fungicide, copper lactate acts as a fungicide, and copper sulfate acts as a germicide." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8929204500682777, + "doc_id": "3e00231419b48d6a9f124e6fb5be6a1da7e7cd739316975a475795960864fc10", + "edit_distance": 0.34540389972144847, + "f1_score": 0.9476744186046513, + "meteor": 0.8907837977235696, + "precision": 0.9421965317919075, + "pred_md": "US 20190287691Al\n\nUS 20190287691Al\n\n## c19) United States c12) Patent Application Publication ABERGEL et al.\n\n## (54) SEPARATION OF METAL IONS BY LIQUID-LIQUID EXTRACTION\n\n- (71) Applicants:THE\n\nREGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA, Oakland, CA (US); FRED HUTCHINSON CANCER RESEARCH CENTER, Seattle, WA (US)\n\n- (72) Inventors:\n\nRebecca J. ABERGEL, Oakland, CA (US); Roland K. STRONG, Seattle, WA (US); Gauthier J.P. DEBLONDE, Oakland, CA (US); Abel RICANO, Oakland, CA (US)\n\n- (21) Appl. No.:\n\n16/365,132\n\n- (22) Filed:\n\nMar. 26, 2019\n\n## Related U.S. Application Data\n\n- (63) Continuation-in-part of application No. PCT/ US2017 /048934, filed on Aug. 28, 2017.\n- c10)\n\nPub. No.: US 2019/0287691 Al\n\n- (43) Pub. Date:\n\nSep. 19, 2019\n\n- (60) Provisional application No. 62/401,687, filed on Sep. 29, 2016, provisional application No. 62/505,458, filed on May 12, 2017.\n\n## Publication Classification\n\n- (51) Int. Cl.\n\nG21F 9112 (2006.01)\n\nG21C 19146\n\n- (52) U.S. Cl.\n\n(2006.01)\n\nCPC ..............\n\nG21F 91125 (2013.01);\n\nC07K 14/47 (2013.01)\n\n(2013.01); G21C 19146\n\n## (57) ABSTRACT\n\nProvided herein are separation processes for metal ions present in aqueous solutions based on methods involving liquid-liquid extraction. The separation process involves a chelator that can selectively bind to at least one of the metals at a relatively low pH. This can be used, for example, for recovery and purification of actinides from lanthanides, separation of metal ions based on their valence, and sepa› ration of metal ions based on the pH of the extraction conditions.\n\nLigand addition:\n\n3,4.13~U{1t2·HOPO} + base", + "recall": 0.9532163742690059, + "true_md": "1111111111111111 IIIIII IIIII 111111111111111 1111111111 11111 lllll lllll 111111111111111 11111111 US 20190287691Al \n\n# c19) United States c12) Patent Application Publication\n\n# c10) Pub. No.: US 2019/0287691 Al\n\n# (43) Pub. Date: Sep. 19, 2019\n\n# ABERGEL et al.\n\n# (54) SEPARATION OF METAL IONS BY LIQUID-LIQUID EXTRACTION\n\n- (71) Applicants:THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA, Oakland, CA (US); FRED HUTCHINSON CANCER RESEARCH CENTER, Seattle, WA (US) \n\n- (72) Inventors: Rebecca J. ABERGEL, Oakland, CA (US); Roland K. STRONG, Seattle, WA (US); Gauthier J.P. DEBLONDE, Oakland, CA (US); Abel RICANO, Oakland, CA (US) \n\n- (21) Appl. No.: 16/365,132 \n\n- (22) Filed: Mar. 26, 2019 \n\n- (63) Continuation-in-part of application No. PCT/ US2017 /048934, filed on Aug. 28, 2017. \n\n- (52) U.S. Cl. CPC .............. G21F 91125 (2013.01); C07K 14/47 (2013.01); G21C 19146 (2013.01) \n\n- (51) Int. Cl. \n\n- (60) Provisional application No. 62/401,687, filed on Sep. 29, 2016, provisional application No. 62/505,458, filed on May 12, 2017. \n\n## Publication Classification\n\n## Related U.S. Application Data\n\n## (57) ABSTRACT\n\nProvided herein are separation processes for metal ions present in aqueous solutions based on methods involving liquid-liquid extraction. The separation process involves a chelator that can selectively bind to at least one of the metals at a relatively low pH. This can be used, for example, for recovery and purification of actinides from lanthanides, separation of metal ions based on their valence, and sepa› ration of metal ions based on the pH of the extraction conditions." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9363204222100078, + "doc_id": "304c1d231ac659ef6d0347a019cd838c2d725e2fad3a5b5f6dd76c578cb102ed", + "edit_distance": 0.6, + "f1_score": 0.9831932773109244, + "meteor": 0.9045454869863978, + "precision": 0.9957446808510638, + "pred_md": "## (12) United States Patent Uchiyama et al.\n\n## (54) STABLE, AQUEOUS COMPOSITIONS FOR TREATING SURFACES, ESPECIALLY FABRICS\n\n- (75) Inventors:\n- (73) Assignee:\n- ( *) Notice:\n- (21) Appl. No.:\n\n09/783,509\n\n- (22) Filed:\n\nFeb. 14,2001\n\n## (65) Prior Publication Data\n\nUS 2002/0011584 Al Jan. 31, 2002\n\n## Related U.S. Application Data\n\n- (63) Continuation-in-part of application No. 09/634,379, filed on\n\nAug. 9, 2000.\n\n- (60) Provisional application No. 60/240,626, filed on Oct. 16, 2000, and provisional application No. 60/182,381, filed on Feb. 14, 2000.\n- (51) Int. Cl.7\n- (52) U.S. Cl.\n- (58) Field of Search\n\n.............................................\n\nD06M 15/643\n\n....................\n\n252/8.91; 252/8.61; 424/76.1;\n\n424/76.2\n\n............................... 252/8.61, 8.91;\n\n424/76.1, 76.2\n\n## (56) References Cited\n\n## U.S. PATENT DOCUMENTS\n\nHirotaka Uchiyama, Symmes Twp, OH (US); Janese Christine O'Brien Stickney, Wyoming, OH (US); Jonathan Robert Cetti, Fairfield, OH (US); Ricky Ah-Man Woo, Hamilton, OH (US); Dean Larry DuVal, Lebanon, OH (US); Gayle Marie Frankenbach, Cincinnati, OH (US)\n\nThe Procter & Gamble Company, Cincinnati, OH (US)\n\nSubject to any disclaimer, the term of this patent is extended or adjusted under 35 U.S.C. 154(b) by O days.\n\nUS006503413B2\n\nUS006503413B2\n\n- (10) Patent No.:\n\nUS 6,503,413 B2\n\nJan.7,2003\n\n- (45) Date of Patent:\n\n## FOREIGN PATENT DOCUMENTS\n\n* cited by examiner\n\nPrimary Examiner-Anthony J. Green\n\n(74) Attorney, Agent, or Firm-Jeffrey V. Bamber; Jason J. Camp\n\n## (57) ABSTRACT\n\nStable, aqueous compositions for treating surfaces, espe› cially fabrics, comprise: a relatively low molecular weight polyalkyleneoxide polysiloxane surfactant; a buffering agent to maintain the pH of the composition in the range of from about 4 to about 10, preferably from about 5 to about 9.5, and more preferably from about 6 to about 9; and an aqueous carrier. The compositions can further comprise catoinic surfactants to further enhance the spreading and/or fabric penetration ability of the compositions. The compositions can further comprise a variety of other optional ingredients. Methods of treating surfaces include methods wherein the compositions are contacted with surfaces, especially fabrics, to reduce malodor impression on the surfaces and/or reduce the appearance of wrinkles in fabrics.\n\n## 29 Claims, No Drawings", + "recall": 0.970954356846473, + "true_md": "1111111111111111 11111 111111111111111 lllll 111111111111111 111111111111111111 US006503413B2 \n\n# (12) United States Patent\n\n# Uchiyama et al.\n\n# (10) Patent No.: US 6,503,413 B2\n\n# Jan.7,2003 (45) Date of Patent:\n\n# (54) STABLE, AQUEOUS COMPOSITIONS FOR TREATING SURFACES, ESPECIALLY FABRICS\n\n- (75) Inventors: Hirotaka Uchiyama, Symmes Twp, OH (US); Janese Christine O’Brien Stickney, Wyoming, OH (US); Jonathan Robert Cetti, Fairfield, OH (US); Ricky Ah-Man Woo, Hamilton, OH (US); Dean Larry DuVal, Lebanon, OH (US); Gayle Marie Frankenbach, Cincinnati, OH (US) \n\n- (73) Assignee: The Procter & Gamble Company, Cincinnati, OH (US) \n\n- ( *) Notice: Subject to any disclaimer, the term of this patent is extended or adjusted under 35 U.S.C. 154(b) by O days. \n\n- (21) Appl. No.: 09/783,509 \n\n- (22) Filed: Feb. 14,2001 \n\n## (65) Prior Publication Data\n\nUS 2002/0011584 Al Jan. 31, 2002 \n\n## Related U.S. Application Data\n\n- (63) Continuation-in-part of application No. 09/634,379, filed on Aug. 9, 2000. \n\n- (60) Provisional application No. 60/240,626, filed on Oct. 16, 2000, and provisional application No. 60/182,381, filed on Feb. 14, 2000. \n\n- (51) Int. Cl.7 ............................................. D06M 15/643 \n\n- (52) U.S. Cl. .................... 252/8.91; 252/8.61; 424/76.1; 424/76.2 \n\n- (58) Field of Search ............................... 252/8.61, 8.91; 424/76.1, 76.2 \n\n## (56) References Cited\n\n## U.S. PATENT DOCUMENTS\n\n## FOREIGN PATENT DOCUMENTS\n\n## (57) ABSTRACT\n\n## 29 Claims, No Drawings\n\n* cited by examiner \n\nPrimary Examiner-Anthony J. Green (74) Attorney, Agent, or Firm-Jeffrey V. Bamber; Jason J. Camp \n\nStable, aqueous compositions for treating surfaces, espe› cially fabrics, comprise: a relatively low molecular weight polyalkyleneoxide polysiloxane surfactant; a buffering agent to maintain the pH of the composition in the range of from about 4 to about 10, preferably from about 5 to about 9.5, and more preferably from about 6 to about 9; and an aqueous carrier. The compositions can further comprise catoinic surfactants to further enhance the spreading and/or fabric penetration ability of the compositions. The compositions can further comprise a variety of other optional ingredients. Methods of treating surfaces include methods wherein the compositions are contacted with surfaces, especially fabrics, to reduce malodor impression on the surfaces and/or reduce the appearance of wrinkles in fabrics." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7811895757488891, + "doc_id": "e949e3c505c95d19fa5f6ddfddd5e58ae56a2a572fd35c22b94038dc9ad2e393", + "edit_distance": 0.1, + "f1_score": 0.9411764705882353, + "meteor": 0.9544065999280078, + "precision": 0.9230769230769231, + "pred_md": "Patent Application Publication\n\nSep. 19, 2019 Sheet 38 of 106 US 2019/0287691 Al\n\n8\n\n<( 00 (II') . C) LL.\n\nLL", + "recall": 0.96, + "true_md": "Patent Application Publication \n\nSep. 19, 2019 Sheet 38 of 106 \n\nUS 2019/0287691 Al \n\n<( 00 (II’) . C) LL." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "ed2e714e1ca8c5892d9ea122adad99fc2fec88b37bfe7cd7b7ed133f99b5cbb5", + "edit_distance": 0.85, + "f1_score": 0.48, + "meteor": 0.7646914187361691, + "precision": 0.3157894736842105, + "pred_md": "79\n\n80\n\n-continued\n\n-continued\n\nUS 9,164,380 B2\n\n5\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n60\n\n65", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "US 9,164,380 B2 \n\n80 \n\n79 \n\n-continued \n\n-continued" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9544236229184012, + "doc_id": "68aba86571f3dffc0e6032ed3f2a3ad96268e5cb69c4921571aa40be01eb8b3c", + "edit_distance": 0.8737270875763747, + "f1_score": 0.96987087517934, + "meteor": 0.5720363431952021, + "precision": 0.976878612716763, + "pred_md": "5,648,520\n\n9\n\nrecycled without difficulty in the form of stream (Y) or partial streams thereof, optionally a distillate part volume of (X) can be guided past the washing stages to (Y) and used in order to select a different water content in the individual extraction stages.\n\nVirtually quantitative circulation of the acid used enables costly acids such as, for example, methanesulphonic acid to be used, which in turn, having a lesser corrosive tendency, enable less costly materials to be used in the apparatus of the process according to the invention.\n\nIt has proved to be expedient to define the acid content of the aqueous phase, independently of the differing amine content which adjusts in the aqueous phase of a two-phase system, by way of what is known as a \"molarity\". The molarity is fixed as the theoretical concentration of amine which is 100% protonated (that is to say equal numbers of 15 acid and amine equivalents) in a volume of aqueous phase, which is reduced by the proportion of non-protonated amine, in accordance with the formula:\n\nThe molarity thus defined can assume values of up to 6 and, depending on the separation task which forms the basis for the embodiment in each case-in this instance, product› related-is varied in targeted manner within this range.\n\n5\n\n10\n\n20\n\n25\n\nEven within one embodiment of the process according to the invention it is optionally advantageous to operate the individual process stages through which the aqueous phase passes, in particular the extraction stages (2) to (6), with 30 differing molarity in the aqueous phase, by removing water from or supplying water to the aqueous phase between the individual stages.\n\nThis operational range has a practical upper limit, on the one hand as a result of the increasing tendency of the amine 35 salts to crystallize as concentration increases, in particular in the case of high degrees of protonation, and on the other, as a result of the increasing mutual solubility of the phases in one another, in particular at low degrees of protonation.\n\n10\n\nThe organic phase (B) generally comprises, in addition to hydrophobic solvent, auxiliary amine and/or polyamine, the latter preferably having the composition of the second process part product (0).\n\nWhen using an organic phase (B) without polyamine, there results in the aqueous phase (H) leaving the extraction stage (4) a polyamine fraction in which the relative enrich› ment of the components preferably contained in this phase can be increased and maximized in targeted manner at the expense of the polyamine concentration in the aqueous phase (H).\n\nThe effect of polyamine as a constituent of the organic phase (B) is that the phases (D) and (H) leaving the process stage (4) exhibit a higher polyamine concentration, which is hence more advantageous in energy terms for carrying out the process according to the invention, than is the case when an organic phase (B) without polyamine is used.\n\nAs a result of the, preferred, use of a polyamine having the composition of the second part product (0) as a constituent of the organic phase (B), the relative enrichment of the polyamine components preferably contained in the aqueous phase (H) leaving the separation phase ( 4), and hence of the second polyamine fraction (0), can also be varied and maximized at a higher and hence advantageous concentra› tion level as a result of an equilibrium becoming established, with the separation effect being self-reinforcing.\n\nIn the simplest case, the stream (B) is formed from the stream (E) liberated from polyamine (G) and to a large extent impoverished as to auxiliary amine, which is obtained as the distillate in stage (7.1), optionally with the addition of a part volume of stream (S), comprising substantially aux› iliary amine impoverished as to hydrophobic solvent and liberated from polyamine.\n\nIt is advantageous and preferred to incorporate first into the stream (J) which is used as the extraction agent in stage (5) at least part of the said stream (E) and optionally a corresponding volume of (S) and, after passage through the extraction stage (5), to remove from the resulting organic phase (L) and add to stream (B) a partial stream of (L) which is equivalent to a partial stream of (E) which is added by\n\nAccording to a variant of the process according to the 40 reference to the hydrophobic \"solvent\" content invention, the starting polyamine mixture (A) is fed from the supply tank (1) by mixing with the partial stream (C) and introducing the mixture into the extraction stage ( 4).\n\nThe stream (C) generally comprises water, a strong proton acid, auxiliary amine and optionally polyamine. The acid is 45 present in the form of its salts dissolved in water, with auxiliary amine and optionally with polyamine. In (C) the sum of the amino groups of the auxiliary amine and option› ally the polyamine is at all times present in a stoichiometric ratio or in excess, calculated on the acid. 50\n\nThe degree of protonation in (C) is generally from 40 to 100%, it is preferably around 60 to 100% for the aniline preferably used as the auxiliary amine.\n\nThe molarity of the stream ( C), which is well-defined and is dimensioned and controlled within narrow limits for the 55 respective embodiment of the process according to the invention, is varied in a targeted way within a broad range depending on the separation task which forms the basis for the embodiment in each case-in this instance product› related. 60\n\nThe aqueous phase ( C) supplied to the extraction stage ( 4) of the process according to the invention generally has a molarity of up to 6, preferably between 0.5 and 4.0.\n\nIn the extraction stage ( 4) which is operated preferably in multi-stage manner, the stream (C) on which (A) impinges 65 and the organic phase (B) are guided towards one another with intimate intermixing.\n\nIt is particularly preferred to add at least part of the said partial stream of (E) already to the organic phase (P) which is used as the extraction agent in the extraction stage ( 6) and to the extraction stage (5) as part of the resulting organic phase (R), and subsequently to stream (B) as a part volume of (L).\n\nOptionally, according to a less generally applicable form of use, the feeding of hydrophobic solvent and auxiliary amine from other sources may be dispensed with completely when forming stream (B), such that the organic phase (B) comprises exclusively a part volume of (L). This embodi› ment of the process according to the invention is particularly advantageous in terms of separation efficiency and energy balance and is hence particularly preferred when it can be applied.\n\nOptionally, in a less generally applicable embodiment, the total volume of streams (E) and (F) is added to the stream (J) and is first used as the extraction agent in extraction stage (5) such that stream (B) is formed exclusively from a part volume of stream (L) leaving the extraction stage (5).\n\nThe aromatic amine content of the organic phase (B) is generally 25--60%, depending on the separation task.\n\nIn the extraction stage ( 4) which is preferably operated in multi-stage manner, the organic phase (B) and the mixture of starting polyamine mixture (A) and aqueous phase (C) are guided towards one another with intimate intermixing. In this procedure, there generally takes place a partial transfer", + "recall": 0.9629629629629629, + "true_md": "9 \n\n5,648,520 \n\n10 \n\nIn the extraction stage ( 4) which is preferably operated in multi-stage manner, the organic phase (B) and the mixture of starting polyamine mixture (A) and aqueous phase (C) are guided towards one another with intimate intermixing. In this procedure, there generally takes place a partial transfer \n\nIn the extraction stage ( 4) which is operated preferably in multi-stage manner, the stream (C) on which (A) impinges and the organic phase (B) are guided towards one another with intimate intermixing. \n\nThe aqueous phase ( C) supplied to the extraction stage ( 4) of the process according to the invention generally has a molarity of up to 6, preferably between 0.5 and 4.0. \n\nThe molarity of the stream ( C), which is well-defined and is dimensioned and controlled within narrow limits for the respective embodiment of the process according to the invention, is varied in a targeted way within a broad range depending on the separation task which forms the basis for the embodiment in each case-in this instance product› related. \n\nThe aromatic amine content of the organic phase (B) is generally 25--60%, depending on the separation task. \n\nOptionally, in a less generally applicable embodiment, the total volume of streams (E) and (F) is added to the stream (J) and is first used as the extraction agent in extraction stage (5) such that stream (B) is formed exclusively from a part volume of stream (L) leaving the extraction stage (5). \n\nOptionally, according to a less generally applicable form of use, the feeding of hydrophobic solvent and auxiliary amine from other sources may be dispensed with completely when forming stream (B), such that the organic phase (B) comprises exclusively a part volume of (L). This embodi› ment of the process according to the invention is particularly advantageous in terms of separation efficiency and energy balance and is hence particularly preferred when it can be applied. \n\nThe degree of protonation in (C) is generally from 40 to 100%, it is preferably around 60 to 100% for the aniline preferably used as the auxiliary amine. \n\nIt is particularly preferred to add at least part of the said partial stream of (E) already to the organic phase (P) which is used as the extraction agent in the extraction stage ( 6) and to the extraction stage (5) as part of the resulting organic phase (R), and subsequently to stream (B) as a part volume of (L). \n\nThe stream (C) generally comprises water, a strong proton acid, auxiliary amine and optionally polyamine. The acid is present in the form of its salts dissolved in water, with auxiliary amine and optionally with polyamine. In (C) the sum of the amino groups of the auxiliary amine and option› ally the polyamine is at all times present in a stoichiometric ratio or in excess, calculated on the acid. \n\nAccording to a variant of the process according to the invention, the starting polyamine mixture (A) is fed from the supply tank (1) by mixing with the partial stream (C) and introducing the mixture into the extraction stage ( 4). \n\nIt is advantageous and preferred to incorporate first into the stream (J) which is used as the extraction agent in stage (5) at least part of the said stream (E) and optionally a corresponding volume of (S) and, after passage through the extraction stage (5), to remove from the resulting organic phase (L) and add to stream (B) a partial stream of (L) which is equivalent to a partial stream of (E) which is added by reference to the hydrophobic \"solvent\" content \n\nThis operational range has a practical upper limit, on the one hand as a result of the increasing tendency of the amine salts to crystallize as concentration increases, in particular in the case of high degrees of protonation, and on the other, as a result of the increasing mutual solubility of the phases in one another, in particular at low degrees of protonation. \n\nIn the simplest case, the stream (B) is formed from the stream (E) liberated from polyamine (G) and to a large extent impoverished as to auxiliary amine, which is obtained as the distillate in stage (7.1), optionally with the addition of a part volume of stream (S), comprising substantially aux› iliary amine impoverished as to hydrophobic solvent and liberated from polyamine. \n\nEven within one embodiment of the process according to the invention it is optionally advantageous to operate the individual process stages through which the aqueous phase passes, in particular the extraction stages (2) to (6), with differing molarity in the aqueous phase, by removing water from or supplying water to the aqueous phase between the individual stages. \n\nThe molarity thus defined can assume values of up to 6 and, depending on the separation task which forms the basis for the embodiment in each case-in this instance, product› related-is varied in targeted manner within this range. \n\nAs a result of the, preferred, use of a polyamine having the composition of the second part product (0) as a constituent of the organic phase (B), the relative enrichment of the polyamine components preferably contained in the aqueous phase (H) leaving the separation phase ( 4), and hence of the second polyamine fraction (0), can also be varied and maximized at a higher and hence advantageous concentra› tion level as a result of an equilibrium becoming established, with the separation effect being self-reinforcing. \n\nThe effect of polyamine as a constituent of the organic phase (B) is that the phases (D) and (H) leaving the process stage (4) exhibit a higher polyamine concentration, which is hence more advantageous in energy terms for carrying out the process according to the invention, than is the case when an organic phase (B) without polyamine is used. \n\nIt has proved to be expedient to define the acid content of the aqueous phase, independently of the differing amine content which adjusts in the aqueous phase of a two-phase system, by way of what is known as a \"molarity\". The molarity is fixed as the theoretical concentration of amine which is 100% protonated (that is to say equal numbers of acid and amine equivalents) in a volume of aqueous phase, which is reduced by the proportion of non-protonated amine, in accordance with the formula: \n\nWhen using an organic phase (B) without polyamine, there results in the aqueous phase (H) leaving the extraction stage (4) a polyamine fraction in which the relative enrich› ment of the components preferably contained in this phase can be increased and maximized in targeted manner at the expense of the polyamine concentration in the aqueous phase (H). \n\nThe organic phase (B) generally comprises, in addition to hydrophobic solvent, auxiliary amine and/or polyamine, the latter preferably having the composition of the second process part product (0). \n\nVirtually quantitative circulation of the acid used enables costly acids such as, for example, methanesulphonic acid to be used, which in turn, having a lesser corrosive tendency, enable less costly materials to be used in the apparatus of the process according to the invention. \n\nrecycled without difficulty in the form of stream (Y) or partial streams thereof, optionally a distillate part volume of (X) can be guided past the washing stages to (Y) and used in order to select a different water content in the individual extraction stages. \n\n$$\"M I •1y• _ Mol 100%-protonated amine $^{0 }$an - Vol. aqueous phase -vol. non-protonated amine $$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8260316076572543, + "doc_id": "d5ea64d79f2af8027f5dc8a7e51f1042178f05df7dfb722874831980f68de9d2", + "edit_distance": 0.24675324675324675, + "f1_score": 0.8888888888888888, + "meteor": 0.9023070247903331, + "precision": 0.8470588235294118, + "pred_md": "65\n\n66\n\nWhen z is 2, the plurality ofR 27 groups may be the same or different.\n\nExamples of the alkyl group, alkoxy group, halogenated alkyl group, --COOR\" group, ---OC(=O)R\" group and hydroxyalkyl group for R 27 include the same alkyl groups, alkoxy groups, halogenated alkyl groups, --COOR\" groups, -OC(=O)R\" groups and hydroxyalkyl groups as those described above as the substituent for the -SO 2 -containing cyclic group.\n\nSpecific examples of the cyclic groups represented by gen› eral formulas (3-1) to (3-4) are shown below. In the formulas shown below, \"Ac\" represents an acetyl group.\n\n## [Chemical Formula 23]\n\n-continued\n\nUS 9,164,380 B2\n\n5\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n60\n\n65", + "recall": 0.935064935064935, + "true_md": "US 9,164,380 B2 \n\n65 \n\n66 \n\n-continued \n\nWhen z is 2, the plurality ofR $^{27 }$groups may be the same or different. \n\nExamples of the alkyl group, alkoxy group, halogenated alkyl group, --COOR\" group, ---OC(=O)R\" group and hydroxyalkyl group for R$^{27 }$include the same alkyl groups, alkoxy groups, halogenated alkyl groups, --COOR\" groups, -OC(=O)R\" groups and hydroxyalkyl groups as those described above as the substituent for the -SO$_{2}$-containing cyclic group. \n\nSpecific examples of the cyclic groups represented by gen› eral formulas (3-1) to (3-4) are shown below. In the formulas shown below, \"Ac\" represents an acetyl group. \n\n[Chemical Formula 23]" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8600551563736076, + "doc_id": "ddb8ec1a818e691fe22213e009f132e6518bc0bb9aee0b5931369d941ef53afc", + "edit_distance": 0.15, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.981858911534692, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Patent Application Publication\n\nSep. 19, 2019 Sheet 85 of 106 US 2019/0287691 Al\n\nFIG. 50B\n\nFIG. 50B", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Patent Application Publication \n\nSep. 19, 2019 Sheet 85 of 106 \n\nUS 2019/0287691 Al \n\nFIG. 50B" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9923898137875925, + "doc_id": "c6904e5aa032a1a40e5e536893cb334d2ec3b707aa442106690f4c094b965d25", + "edit_distance": 0.8744113029827315, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.668408112268082, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "US 2020/0352177 Al\n\n[0131] The Bicarbonate\n\n[0132] The alkali metal bicarbonate may be lithium, but is preferably sodium or, most preferably, on health grounds as well as slightly better leavening, potassium bicarbonate. Ammonium bicarbonate is effective, but is not widely used in bakery. Mixtures of bicarbonates may be used. Alkali metal carbonates do not evolve carbon dioxide in the pres› ence of Precipitants, unless Acidulants are also present, however the term \"bicarbonate\" as used herein includes hydrates and double salts of bicarbonate, such as sodium sesquecarbonate, although such double salts are relatively inefficient and are not recommended, since they may require up to three times the amount of Precipitant to precipitate all the carbonate.\n\n[0133] The Precipitant reacts with the bicarbonate to pre› cipitate one mole of calcium carbonate for each mole of carbon dioxide. Therefore in Acidulant-free systems the carbon dioxide evolved is only about half that obtained in conventional leavening systems. This necessitates the use of increased amounts of bicarbonate, relative to flour, to obtain an equivalent leavening effect. However, the increased effi› ciency with which the bicarbonate is used at least partly compensates for any carbon dioxide trapped.\n\n[0134] The actual amount of bicarbonate used in practice varies according to the particular recipe. The amount required with leavening systems of our invention may typically be at least 10% greater than that normally recom› mended, preferably at least 20%, more usually at least 30% greater, but less than 70%, usually less than 60%, more commonly less than 50% greater. In systems according to our invention containing Acidulants the amount of bicar› bonate can often be reduced compared to conventional recipes.\n\n[0135] The bicarbonate is preferably milled to a particle size substantially all less than 500µ. Preferably, in order to avoid visible spotting in batter based products, the particle size is all less than 400µ. To avoid spotting in dough based products we particularly prefer a particle size all less than 250µ, but to avoid impaired shelf life of the end product the particle size is more preferably all less than 200µ, most preferably less than 150µ.\n\n[0136] The D50 of the bicarbonate is preferably less than 200µ, more preferably less than 150µ, even more preferably less than 100µ. However to minimise caking, and avoid excessive dust, we prefer that the D50 is greater than 35µ, more preferably greater than 40µ, even more preferably greater than 50µ, most preferably greater than 60µ.\n\n[0137] We have found milling to reduce the D50 to a level sufficient to avoid localised inhomogeneities in dough gen› erally causes caking problems and excessive fines. The product may be milled to a D50 greater than that required to reduce all the coarse particles, and removing the latter by sieving. The sieved particles may be recycled. We particu› larly prefer to mill to a D50 between 50 and 300µ, and sieve to remove at least those particles greater than 400µ.\n\n[0138] Preferably the D50 of the milled product prior to sieving is less than 200µ, more preferably less than 150µ, most preferably less than 120µ, but greater than 70, most preferably greater than 90µ. Preferably the product is sieved to remove particles greater than 300µ, more preferably greater than 250µ. We do not exclude the possibility of obtaining the desired particle size directly by selecting a mill with a very narrow size distribution, such as a universal mill, e.g. a turbine and screen mill.\n\n6\n\nNov. 12, 2020\n\n[0139] Particularly in the case of potassium bicarbonate, we prefer bicarbonate that has been coated to inhibit caking and/or degradation by atmospheric moisture or premature interaction with the Acidulant. Coatings may comprise alka› line earth metal carbonates, silicon dioxide and/or anionic surfactants, such as alkali metal or alkaline earth metal soaps. Particularly preferred are hydrophobic coatings as described in EP 2 547 211.\n\n[0140] The Precipitant\n\n[0141] The Precipitant is preferably a Non-acidic calcium salt. Magnesium alone is a relatively ineffective precipitant for carbonate. The surge in carbon dioxide evolution in the latter stages of baking that is one of the most important features of our invention is smaller with magnesium, requires higher levels of the salt and occurs later in the baking process.\n\n[0142] Magnesium salts, and especially those of strong acids, lower the pH that can be obtained using most acidu› lants. The relative effectiveness of calcium and magnesium in this respect depends mainly on the solubility of their salts with the Acidulant. Generally calcium is more effective than magnesium. However in pyrophosphate systems, where both metals form very insoluble salts, they are equivalent. Calcium is more effective in orthophosphate systems, nei› ther produce a big effect with citrates and both form soluble fumarates, and do not significantly affect the pH of fumaric acid systems or of GDL.\n\n[0143] Mixtures of calcium and magnesium containing at least 1, preferably at least 2, more preferably at least 3, still more preferably at least 4, most preferably at least 5% by weight calcium may be used and may perform similarly to calcium. Zinc is mildly acidic and seems unlikely to be commercially attractive, except as a minor component in admixture with calcium and/or magnesium, e.g. for nutri› tional purposes. Aluminium is not currently recommended on health grounds. All references herein to calcium are to be construed wherever the context permits as including cal› cium, magnesium and mixtures thereof.\n\n[0144] Examples of suitable salts include non-acidic organic salts such as salts of formic, acetic, fumaric, lactic, citric, aconitic, itaconic, citraconic, tartaric, adipic, ascorbic, malic and/or lactobionic acid, and inorganic salts such as chlorides and sulphates. Mixtures of salts are often pre› ferred. The Precipitant may be selected at least partly for its organoleptic effects. Thus chlorides with sodium bicarbon› ate give rise to sodium chloride in the product, which is desirable in many recipes. It enables the preservative and taste benefits of salt to be obtained without adding extra salt and so increasing the sodium content. Sodium chloride may, however, be unacceptable in other recipes, and many of the other available alkaline earth metal salts have similar posi› tive or negative effects depending on the recipe.\n\n[0145] Precipitants increase the Neutralising Value of cer› tain Acidulants, such as SAPP, SALP and mono and di sodium or potassium orthophosphates, wherein the pKa of one of the hydrogens is normally too high to contribute to the leavening effect. It has been found that water soluble calcium or magnesium salts of acids sufficiently strong to react with bicarbonates can react with all the Replaceable Hydrogen, up to a pKa of about 14, releasing an equivalent amount of the conjugate acid. This has the effect of sub› stantially increasing the Neutralising Value oftheAcidulants", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "US 2020/0352177 Al \n\n6 \n\nNov. 12, 2020 \n\n[0145] Precipitants increase the Neutralising Value of cer› tain Acidulants, such as SAPP, SALP and mono and di sodium or potassium orthophosphates, wherein the pKa of one of the hydrogens is normally too high to contribute to the leavening effect. It has been found that water soluble calcium or magnesium salts of acids sufficiently strong to react with bicarbonates can react with all the Replaceable Hydrogen, up to a pKa of about 14, releasing an equivalent amount of the conjugate acid. This has the effect of sub› stantially increasing the Neutralising Value oftheAcidulants \n\n[0138] Preferably the D50 of the milled product prior to sieving is less than 200µ, more preferably less than 150µ, most preferably less than 120µ, but greater than 70, most preferably greater than 90µ. Preferably the product is sieved to remove particles greater than 300µ, more preferably greater than 250µ. We do not exclude the possibility of obtaining the desired particle size directly by selecting a mill with a very narrow size distribution, such as a universal mill, e.g. a turbine and screen mill. \n\n[0137] We have found milling to reduce the D50 to a level sufficient to avoid localised inhomogeneities in dough gen› erally causes caking problems and excessive fines. The product may be milled to a D50 greater than that required to reduce all the coarse particles, and removing the latter by sieving. The sieved particles may be recycled. We particu› larly prefer to mill to a D50 between 50 and 300µ, and sieve to remove at least those particles greater than 400µ. \n\n[0144] Examples of suitable salts include non-acidic organic salts such as salts of formic, acetic, fumaric, lactic, citric, aconitic, itaconic, citraconic, tartaric, adipic, ascorbic, malic and/or lactobionic acid, and inorganic salts such as chlorides and sulphates. Mixtures of salts are often pre› ferred. The Precipitant may be selected at least partly for its organoleptic effects. Thus chlorides with sodium bicarbon› ate give rise to sodium chloride in the product, which is desirable in many recipes. It enables the preservative and taste benefits of salt to be obtained without adding extra salt and so increasing the sodium content. Sodium chloride may, however, be unacceptable in other recipes, and many of the other available alkaline earth metal salts have similar posi› tive or negative effects depending on the recipe. \n\n[0136] The D50 of the bicarbonate is preferably less than 200µ, more preferably less than 150µ, even more preferably less than 100µ. However to minimise caking, and avoid excessive dust, we prefer that the D50 is greater than 35µ, more preferably greater than 40µ, even more preferably greater than 50µ, most preferably greater than 60µ. \n\n[0135] The bicarbonate is preferably milled to a particle size substantially all less than 500µ. Preferably, in order to avoid visible spotting in batter based products, the particle size is all less than 400µ. To avoid spotting in dough based products we particularly prefer a particle size all less than 250µ, but to avoid impaired shelf life of the end product the particle size is more preferably all less than 200µ, most preferably less than 150µ. \n\n[0143] Mixtures of calcium and magnesium containing at least 1, preferably at least 2, more preferably at least 3, still more preferably at least 4, most preferably at least 5% by weight calcium may be used and may perform similarly to calcium. Zinc is mildly acidic and seems unlikely to be commercially attractive, except as a minor component in admixture with calcium and/or magnesium, e.g. for nutri› tional purposes. Aluminium is not currently recommended on health grounds. All references herein to calcium are to be construed wherever the context permits as including cal› cium, magnesium and mixtures thereof. \n\n[0142] Magnesium salts, and especially those of strong acids, lower the pH that can be obtained using most acidu› lants. The relative effectiveness of calcium and magnesium in this respect depends mainly on the solubility of their salts with the Acidulant. Generally calcium is more effective than magnesium. However in pyrophosphate systems, where both metals form very insoluble salts, they are equivalent. Calcium is more effective in orthophosphate systems, nei› ther produce a big effect with citrates and both form soluble fumarates, and do not significantly affect the pH of fumaric acid systems or of GDL. \n\n[0141] The Precipitant is preferably a Non-acidic calcium salt. Magnesium alone is a relatively ineffective precipitant for carbonate. The surge in carbon dioxide evolution in the latter stages of baking that is one of the most important features of our invention is smaller with magnesium, requires higher levels of the salt and occurs later in the baking process. \n\n[0140] The Precipitant \n\n[0139] Particularly in the case of potassium bicarbonate, we prefer bicarbonate that has been coated to inhibit caking and/or degradation by atmospheric moisture or premature interaction with the Acidulant. Coatings may comprise alka› line earth metal carbonates, silicon dioxide and/or anionic surfactants, such as alkali metal or alkaline earth metal soaps. Particularly preferred are hydrophobic coatings as described in EP 2 547 211. \n\n[0134] The actual amount of bicarbonate used in practice varies according to the particular recipe. The amount required with leavening systems of our invention may typically be at least 10% greater than that normally recom› mended, preferably at least 20%, more usually at least 30% greater, but less than 70%, usually less than 60%, more commonly less than 50% greater. In systems according to our invention containing Acidulants the amount of bicar› bonate can often be reduced compared to conventional recipes. \n\n[0133] The Precipitant reacts with the bicarbonate to pre› cipitate one mole of calcium carbonate for each mole of carbon dioxide. Therefore in Acidulant-free systems the carbon dioxide evolved is only about half that obtained in conventional leavening systems. This necessitates the use of increased amounts of bicarbonate, relative to flour, to obtain an equivalent leavening effect. However, the increased effi› ciency with which the bicarbonate is used at least partly compensates for any carbon dioxide trapped. \n\n[0132] The alkali metal bicarbonate may be lithium, but is preferably sodium or, most preferably, on health grounds as well as slightly better leavening, potassium bicarbonate. Ammonium bicarbonate is effective, but is not widely used in bakery. Mixtures of bicarbonates may be used. Alkali metal carbonates do not evolve carbon dioxide in the pres› ence of Precipitants, unless Acidulants are also present, however the term \"bicarbonate\" as used herein includes hydrates and double salts of bicarbonate, such as sodium sesquecarbonate, although such double salts are relatively inefficient and are not recommended, since they may require up to three times the amount of Precipitant to precipitate all the carbonate. \n\n[0131] The Bicarbonate" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9714868666618918, + "doc_id": "644a9be436c322a03d5c16a258dd00a3f5c020c378335d72a90c30242300ab94", + "edit_distance": 0.04943502824858757, + "f1_score": 0.9921875, + "meteor": 0.9935177637289075, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "US 2009/0197849 Al\n\n[0379] The pH of the patches was measured as described in the Methods section. The pH of the diclofenac sodium patch increased from 7.40 to 10.38 when the calculated excess NaOH concentration in the dried patch was increased from 0%to 1.8%.\n\nTABLE 63\n\n[0380] The in vitro permeation of diclofenac sodium through human cadaver skin from these discs was measured as described in the Methods section. Twelve diffusion cells were used for each formulation. The cells were filled with 10% ethanol/90% water solution. At each time point, the pH at the interface between skin and the patch for three diffusion cells was measured by removing the receiving fluid, remov› ing the clamp and the donor chamber, gently teasing the patch away from the skin with tweezers, leaving the skin on the receiver chamber, measuring the pH of the solution on the skin by placing the microelectrode directly onto the skin surface.\n\n[0381] The cumulative amount of diclofenac sodium across human cadaver skin was calculated using the measured diclofenac sodium concentrations in the receiver solutions.\n\nTABLE 64\n\n[0382] The cumulative amount of diclofenac sodium across human cadaver skin at 24 hours increased from 34.6 µg/cm 2 to 3257.7 µg/cm 2 when the calculated excess NaOH concen› tration in the dried patch was increased from 0% to 1.8%. The cumulative amount of diclofenac sodium across human cadaver skin at 24 hours from the system containing 0.4% NaOH (Diclo-10) was 227.7 µg/cm 2 , which was about six times higher than that from the formulation without NaOH (34.6 µg/cm 2 , Diclo-9). This result indicated that the perme› ation of diclofenac sodium across human skin could be enhanced by a NaOH concentration as low as 0.4%.\n\n[0383] The formulation ofDiclo-10 provided up to 7-fold more diclofenac sodium flux than in the absence of NaOH (Diclo-9). The formulation of Diclo-11 provided up to 50-fold more flux, while the highest pH formulation evalu› ated, Diclo-12, provided up to 94-fold more flux than in the absence ofNaOH.\n\n[0384] The measured pHs at the skin/patch interface are listed below.\n\n35\n\nAug. 6, 2009\n\nTABLE 65\n\n* Could not be measured because there was not enough solution at the inter› face.\n\n[0385] The pHs at the interface between skin and the patch remained about the same, even though the concentration of NaOH was increased from 0.4% to 1.8%. It was difficult to measure the pH of interface between skin and patch for the formulations without NaOH or with a low NaOH concentra› tion because there was not enough solution on the top of the skin.\n\n[0386] Since the pH measurement for the interface between the skin and patch may be difficult for low NaOH concentra› tions, the pHs of the receiver solutions were measured at various time points as references. The pHs of receiver solu› tions indicated that the pHs depend on the time interval between sampling, the NaOH concentration in the patch and the time point. The pHs at the 3-hour time point increased from 8.0 to 10.8 when the NaOH concentration in the patch was increased from 0.4% to 1.8%.\n\n## Example 20\n\n[0387] An in-vitro skin permeation study was conducted using three alendronate sodium transdermal systems, desig› nated, Al-1, Al-2 andAl-3, the compositions of which are set forth in Table 66.\n\n[0388] Round disc samples were prepared in a manner similar to that described in the Methods section, except that the formulation was dried at a temperature of 65° C. and the discs were cut into discs having a diameter of 9 /16 inch.\n\n[0389] The theoretical percent weight for each ingredient after drying ( calculated assuming all the volatile ingredients were completely removed during drying) is listed in Table 67.\n\nTABLE 66", + "recall": 0.9844961240310077, + "true_md": "Aug. 6, 2009 \n\n35 \n\nUS 2009/0197849 Al \n\n[0379] The pH of the patches was measured as described in the Methods section. The pH of the diclofenac sodium patch increased from 7.40 to 10.38 when the calculated excess NaOH concentration in the dried patch was increased from 0%to 1.8%. \n\n[0380] The in vitro permeation of diclofenac sodium through human cadaver skin from these discs was measured as described in the Methods section. Twelve diffusion cells were used for each formulation. The cells were filled with 10% ethanol/90% water solution. At each time point, the pH at the interface between skin and the patch for three diffusion cells was measured by removing the receiving fluid, remov› ing the clamp and the donor chamber, gently teasing the patch away from the skin with tweezers, leaving the skin on the receiver chamber, measuring the pH of the solution on the skin by placing the microelectrode directly onto the skin surface. \n\n[0381] The cumulative amount of diclofenac sodium across human cadaver skin was calculated using the measured diclofenac sodium concentrations in the receiver solutions. \n\n[0382] The cumulative amount of diclofenac sodium across human cadaver skin at 24 hours increased from 34.6 µg/cm 2 to 3257.7 µg/cm $^{2 }$when the calculated excess NaOH concen› tration in the dried patch was increased from 0% to 1.8%. The cumulative amount of diclofenac sodium across human cadaver skin at 24 hours from the system containing 0.4% NaOH (Diclo-10) was 227.7 µg/cm 2 , which was about six times higher than that from the formulation without NaOH (34.6 µg/cm 2 , Diclo-9). This result indicated that the perme› ation of diclofenac sodium across human skin could be enhanced by a NaOH concentration as low as 0.4%. \n\n[0383] The formulation ofDiclo-10 provided up to 7-fold more diclofenac sodium flux than in the absence of NaOH (Diclo-9). The formulation of Diclo-11 provided up to 50-fold more flux, while the highest pH formulation evalu› ated, Diclo-12, provided up to 94-fold more flux than in the absence ofNaOH. \n\n[0384] The measured pHs at the skin/patch interface are listed below. \n\n* Could not be measured because there was not enough solution at the inter› face. \n\n[0385] The pHs at the interface between skin and the patch remained about the same, even though the concentration of NaOH was increased from 0.4% to 1.8%. It was difficult to measure the pH of interface between skin and patch for the formulations without NaOH or with a low NaOH concentra› tion because there was not enough solution on the top of the skin. \n\n[0386] Since the pH measurement for the interface between the skin and patch may be difficult for low NaOH concentra› tions, the pHs of the receiver solutions were measured at various time points as references. The pHs of receiver solu› tions indicated that the pHs depend on the time interval between sampling, the NaOH concentration in the patch and the time point. The pHs at the 3-hour time point increased from 8.0 to 10.8 when the NaOH concentration in the patch was increased from 0.4% to 1.8%. \n\n[0387] An in-vitro skin permeation study was conducted using three alendronate sodium transdermal systems, desig› nated, Al-1, Al-2 andAl-3, the compositions of which are set forth in Table 66. \n\n[0388] Round disc samples were prepared in a manner similar to that described in the Methods section, except that the formulation was dried at a temperature of 65° C. and the discs were cut into discs having a diameter of 9 /16 inch. \n\n[0389] The theoretical percent weight for each ingredient after drying ( calculated assuming all the volatile ingredients were completely removed during drying) is listed in Table 67. \n\nTABLE 66 \n\nTABLE 64 \n\nTABLE 65 \n\nTABLE 63 \n\n## Example 20" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7869346515854013, + "doc_id": "327b8a8803e2aab577b5b50cb2f4f6ed7253b4cd9571c50e0e33489195cde1ef", + "edit_distance": 0.2857142857142857, + "f1_score": 0.9411764705882353, + "meteor": 0.9347967913163536, + "precision": 0.897196261682243, + "pred_md": "## United States Patent [19] Bryant et al.\n\n## [54] HYDROFORMYLATION PROCESSES\n\n- [75] Inventors:\n\nDavid Robert Bryant, South Charleston; James Clair Nicholson, Saint Albans, both of W. Va.\n\n- [73] Assignee:\n\nUnion Carbide Chemicals & Plastics Technology Corporation. Danbury. Conn.\n\n- [ * ] Notice:\n\nThe term of this patent shall not extend beyond the expiration date of Pat. No. 5,741.944.\n\n- [21] Appl. No.:\n\n757,742\n\n- [22] Filed:\n\nNov. 26, 1996\n\n## Related U.S. Application Data\n\n- [60] Provisional application Nos. 60/008,289 Dec. 6, 1995, 60/008,763 Dec. 6, 1995, 60/008,284 Dec. 6, 1995, and 60/008,286 Dec. 6, 1995.\n- [51] Int. Cl. 6\n\n.....................................................\n\nC07C 45/50\n\n- [52] U.S. Cl .\n\n.............................................\n\n568/454; 568/451\n\n- [58] Field of Search\n\n...................................... 568/451. 454\n\n## [56] References Cited\n\n## U.S. PATENT DOCUMENfS\n\n3,555,098 1/1971 Olivier et al ..\n\nI III IIIIIII Ill I I I ll 111111111111111 lff US005763671A\n\n- [lll Patent Number:\n- [45] Date of Patent:\n\n5,763,671\n\n*Jun. 9, 1998\n\n4,835,299\n\n5/1989\n\nMaher et\n\nal ..............................\n\n558/85\n\n5,288,918\n\n2/1994\n\nMaher et\n\nal ............................\n\n568/454\n\n## FOREIGN PATENT DOCUMENTS\n\n0009150\n\n4/1980\n\nEuropean Pat. Off ..\n\n0214622\n\n3/1987\n\nEuropean Pat. Off ..\n\n0285136\n\n10/1988\n\nEuropean Pat. Off ..\n\nPrimary Examiner-Gary Geist\n\nAssistant Examiner-S. Padmanabhan\n\nAttorney, Agent, or Finn-Gerald L. Coon\n\n## [57] ABSTRACT\n\nThis invention relates to a process for separating one or more phosphorus acidic compounds from a hydroformylation reaction product fluid containing said one or more phospho› rus acidic compounds. a metal-organophosphite ligand com› plex catalyst and optionally free organophosphite ligand which process comprises (a) treating said hydroformylation reaction product fluid with water sufficient to remove at least some amount of said one or more phosphorus acidic com› pounds from said hydroformylation reaction product fluid and (b) treating the water which contains phosphorus acidic compounds removed from said hydroformylation reaction product fluid with an acid removal substance sufficient to remove at least some amount of said one or more phospho› rus acidic compounds from said water.\n\n## 20 Claims, 1 Drawing Sheet", + "recall": 0.9896907216494846, + "true_md": "II lffll 111111111111111 US005763671A \n\n# United States Patent [19]\n\n# Bryant et al.\n\n# [lll Patent Number: 5,763,671\n\n# [45] Date of Patent: *Jun. 9, 1998\n\n# [54] HYDROFORMYLATION PROCESSES\n\n- [75] Inventors: David Robert Bryant, South Charleston; James Clair Nicholson, Saint Albans, both of W. Va. \n\n- [73] Assignee: Union Carbide Chemicals & Plastics Technology Corporation. Danbury. Conn. \n\n- [ * ] Notice: The term of this patent shall not extend beyond the expiration date of Pat. No. 5,741.944. \n\n- [21] Appl. No.: 757,742 \n\n- [22] Filed: Nov. 26, 1996 \n\n- [60] Provisional application Nos. 60/008,289 Dec. 6, 1995, 60/008,763 Dec. 6, 1995, 60/008,284 Dec. 6, 1995, and 60/008,286 Dec. 6, 1995. \n\n- [51] Int. Cl. 6 ..................................................... C07C 45/50 \n\n- [52] U.S. Cl . ............................................. 568/454; 568/451 \n\n- [58] Field of Search ...................................... 568/451. 454 \n\n## [56] References Cited\n\n## Related U.S. Application Data\n\n## U.S. PATENT DOCUMENfS\n\n## 20 Claims, 1 Drawing Sheet\n\n## FOREIGN PATENT DOCUMENTS\n\n## [57] ABSTRACT\n\n3,555,098 1/1971 Olivier et al .. \n\nPrimary Examiner-Gary Geist \n\nAssistant Examiner-S. Padmanabhan \n\nAttorney, Agent, or Finn-Gerald L. Coon \n\nThis invention relates to a process for separating one or more phosphorus acidic compounds from a hydroformylation reaction product fluid containing said one or more phospho› rus acidic compounds. a metal-organophosphite ligand com› plex catalyst and optionally free organophosphite ligand which process comprises (a) treating said hydroformylation reaction product fluid with water sufficient to remove at least some amount of said one or more phosphorus acidic com› pounds from said hydroformylation reaction product fluid and (b) treating the water which contains phosphorus acidic compounds removed from said hydroformylation reaction product fluid with an acid removal substance sufficient to remove at least some amount of said one or more phospho› rus acidic compounds from said water." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7079964119427561, + "doc_id": "80953c8e3a960214bebf79698e9305f0eb2d77160a7e6fc32a5a0994e30f8941", + "edit_distance": 0.28125, + "f1_score": 0.9523809523809523, + "meteor": 0.9226553448381, + "precision": 0.9523809523809523, + "pred_md": "Patent Application Publication Sep. 19, 2019 Sheet 59 of 106 US 2019/0287691 Al\n\n-, N ,q\" C) -LL\n\n-, N ,q\" C) -LL", + "recall": 0.9523809523809523, + "true_md": "Patent Application Publication \n\nSep. 19, 2019 Sheet 59 of 106 \n\nUS 2019/0287691 Al \n\n-, N ,q\" C) - LL" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.930344470192848, + "doc_id": "c826c4873f48af66abbefe7ed5b11e90e4a48357b44230a407e43e7ced28b159", + "edit_distance": 0.4953416149068323, + "f1_score": 0.989010989010989, + "meteor": 0.8762904363732511, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "US 2009/0197849 Al\n\n1 ). The highest pH formulation evaluated, Pax-3, provided up to 6-fold more flux than in the absence ofNaOH.\n\n## Example 23\n\n[0410] An in vitro skin permeation study was conducted using three galanthamine hydrobromide transdermal sys› tems, designated Gala-I, Gala-2 and Gala-3, the composi› tions of which are set forth in Table 78.\n\n[0411] Round disc samples were prepared in a manner similar to that described in the Methods section, except that the formulation was dried at a temperature of 65° C. and the discs were cut into discs having a diameter of9/26 inch.\n\n[0412] The theoretical percent weight for each ingredient after drying ( calculated assuming all volatile ingredients were completely removed during drying) is set forth in Table 79.\n\nTABLE 78\n\nTABLE 79\n\n[0413] Since galanthamine HBr is an acid addition salt of a free base, it reacts with NaOH. The concentration ofNaOH in the system after the reaction is completed depends on the amount of galanthamine HBr added. The remaining NaOH concentration after the reaction is completed is defined as the excess NaOH concentration, and was calculated as described in Example 2. The pH was measured as described in the Methods section but using a 2.4 cm 2 circular patch. The pH of the galanthamine HBr patch increased from 8.73 to 10.56 when the calculated excess NaOH concentration in the dried patch was increased from 0% to 1.0%. The pH of the formu› lation without NaOH was 6.53.\n\nTABLE 80\n\n38\n\nAug. 6, 2009\n\n[0414] The in vitro permeation of galanthamine HBr through human cadaver skin from these discs was measured as described in the Methods. Three diffusion cells were used for each formulation. The receiver solution, 5% ethanol/95% PBS buffer (0.05 M KH PO 2 4 with0.15 MNaCl, pH adjusted to 6.5), was completely withdrawn and replaced with fresh receiver solution at each time point. The samples taken were analyzed by an HPLC for the concentration galanthamine HBr in the receiver solution. The cumulative amount of gal› anthamine HBr that permeated across the human cadaver skin was calculated using the measured galanthamine HBr con› centrations in the receiver solutions.\n\nTABLE 81\n\n[0415] The cumulative amount of galanthamine HBr across human cadaver skin at 24 hours increased from 1.254 mg/cm 2 to 1.750 mg/cm 2 when the calculated excess NaOH concen› tration in the dried patch was increased from 0% to 1.0% as compared to 0.624 mg/cm 2 for the formulation without NaOH.\n\n[0416] The formulation of Gala-2 provided up to 2-fold more galanthamine HBr flux than in the absence of NaOH (Gala-I). The highest pH formulation evaluated, Gala-3, pro› vided up to 3-fold more flux than in the absence ofNaOH.\n\n## Example 24\n\n[0417] An in vitro skin permeation study was conducted using three hydromorphone hydrochloride transdermal sys› tems, designated Hymo-1, Hymo-2 and Hymo-3, the compo› sitions of which are set forth in Table 82.\n\n[0418] Round disc samples were prepared as described in the Methods section, except that the formulation was dried at a temperature of 65° C. and the discs were cut into discs having a diameter of 9 /16 inch.\n\n[0419] The theoretical percent weight for each ingredient after drying ( calculated assuming all volatile ingredients were completely removed during drying) is set forth in Table 83.\n\nTABLE 82", + "recall": 0.9782608695652174, + "true_md": "Aug. 6, 2009 \n\n38 \n\nUS 2009/0197849 Al \n\n1 ). The highest pH formulation evaluated, Pax-3, provided up to 6-fold more flux than in the absence ofNaOH. \n\n[0410] An in vitro skin permeation study was conducted using three galanthamine hydrobromide transdermal sys› tems, designated Gala-I, Gala-2 and Gala-3, the composi› tions of which are set forth in Table 78. \n\n[0411] Round disc samples were prepared in a manner similar to that described in the Methods section, except that the formulation was dried at a temperature of 65° C. and the discs were cut into discs having a diameter of9/26 inch. \n\n[0412] The theoretical percent weight for each ingredient after drying ( calculated assuming all volatile ingredients were completely removed during drying) is set forth in Table 79. \n\n[0414] The in vitro permeation of galanthamine HBr through human cadaver skin from these discs was measured as described in the Methods. Three diffusion cells were used for each formulation. The receiver solution, 5% ethanol/95% PBS buffer (0.05 M KH$_{2}$PO$_{4 }$ with0.15 MNaCl, pH adjusted to 6.5), was completely withdrawn and replaced with fresh receiver solution at each time point. The samples taken were analyzed by an HPLC for the concentration galanthamine HBr in the receiver solution. The cumulative amount of gal› anthamine HBr that permeated across the human cadaver skin was calculated using the measured galanthamine HBr con› centrations in the receiver solutions. \n\n[0415] The cumulative amount of galanthamine HBr across human cadaver skin at 24 hours increased from 1.254 mg/cm 2 to 1.750 mg/cm $^{2 }$when the calculated excess NaOH concen› tration in the dried patch was increased from 0% to 1.0% as compared to 0.624 mg/cm 2 for the formulation without NaOH. \n\n[0416] The formulation of Gala-2 provided up to 2-fold more galanthamine HBr flux than in the absence of NaOH (Gala-I). The highest pH formulation evaluated, Gala-3, pro› vided up to 3-fold more flux than in the absence ofNaOH. \n\n[0417] An in vitro skin permeation study was conducted using three hydromorphone hydrochloride transdermal sys› tems, designated Hymo-1, Hymo-2 and Hymo-3, the compo› sitions of which are set forth in Table 82. \n\n[0418] Round disc samples were prepared as described in the Methods section, except that the formulation was dried at a temperature of 65° C. and the discs were cut into discs having a diameter of 9 /16 inch. \n\n[0419] The theoretical percent weight for each ingredient after drying ( calculated assuming all volatile ingredients were completely removed during drying) is set forth in Table 83. \n\n[0413] Since galanthamine HBr is an acid addition salt of a free base, it reacts with NaOH. The concentration ofNaOH in the system after the reaction is completed depends on the amount of galanthamine HBr added. The remaining NaOH concentration after the reaction is completed is defined as the excess NaOH concentration, and was calculated as described in Example 2. The pH was measured as described in the Methods section but using a 2.4 cm $^{2 }$circular patch. The pH of the galanthamine HBr patch increased from 8.73 to 10.56 when the calculated excess NaOH concentration in the dried patch was increased from 0% to 1.0%. The pH of the formu› lation without NaOH was 6.53. \n\nTABLE 82 \n\nTABLE 80 \n\nTABLE 79 \n\nTABLE 78 \n\nTABLE 81 \n\n## Example 24\n\n## Example 23" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8600551563736076, + "doc_id": "2f32cbc8701c2e88ef17a979c50428544b38afa06d40c0684b07ebd41f37cd18", + "edit_distance": 0.15, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.981858911534692, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Patent Application Publication\n\nSep. 19, 2019 Sheet 72 of 106 US 2019/0287691 Al\n\nFIG. 45C\n\nFIG. 45C", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Patent Application Publication \n\nSep. 19, 2019 Sheet 72 of 106 \n\nUS 2019/0287691 Al \n\nFIG. 45C" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9132619973946031, + "doc_id": "68137093dd1fa46bcf10062112503c200d00ec5cb357aed9d3fc46e083c2fb8e", + "edit_distance": 0.4437627811860941, + "f1_score": 0.9808102345415776, + "meteor": 0.8344387582598306, + "precision": 0.9871244635193133, + "pred_md": "## c12) United States Patent Komuro et al.\n\n## (54) RESIST COMPOSITION AND METHOD OF FORMING RESIST PATTERN\n\n- (71) Applicant:\n\nTokyo Ohka Kogyo Co., Ltd., Kawasaki-shi (JP)\n\n- (72) Inventors:\n\nYoshitaka Komuro, Kawasaki (JP); Yoshiyuki Utsumi, Kawasaki (JP); Akiya Kawaue, Kawasaki (JP); Toshiaki Hato, Kawasaki (JP)\n\n- (73) Assignee:\n\nTOKYO OHKA KOGYO CO., LTD., Kawasaki-Shi (JP)\n\n- ( *) Notice:\n\nSubject to any disclaimer, the term ofthis patent is extended or adjusted under 35 U.S.C. 154(b) by 62 days.\n\n- (21) Appl. No.:\n\n13/710,809\n\n- (22) Filed:\n\n## (65) Prior Publication Data\n\nDec. 11, 2012\n\nUS 2013/0189619 Al Jul. 25, 2013\n\n## (30) Foreign Application Priority Data\n\nDec. 14, 2011 (JP) ................................. 2011-273759\n\n- (51) Int. Cl.\n\nG03F 71004\n\nG03F 71039\n\nG03F 7120\n\nG03F 7130\n\n- (52) U.S. Cl.\n\n(2006.01)\n\n(2006.01)\n\n(2006.01)\n\n(2006.01)\n\nCPC .............. G03F 710045 (2013.01); G03F 71004 (2013.01); G03F 710046 (2013.01); G03F 710392 (2013.01); G03F 710397 (2013.01); G03F 7120 (2013.01); G03F 712041 (2013.01); G03F 7130 (2013.01)\n\n- ( 58) Field of Classification Search\n\nNone\n\nSee application file for complete search history.\n\n## (56) References Cited\n\n## U.S. PATENT DOCUMENTS\n\nUS009164380B2\n\nUS009164380B2\n\n- (IO) Patent No.:\n\nUS 9,164,380 B2\n\nOct. 20, 2015\n\n- (45) Date of Patent:\n\n## FOREIGN PATENT DOCUMENTS\n\n## OTHER PUBLICATIONS\n\nMachine-assited English translation of JP2008-15247, as provided by JPO (2008).*\n\nOffice Action in Japanese Patent Application No. 2011-273759, mailed May 19, 2015.\n\nAnthracene-9-carboxylic acid(723-62-6)', Chemical Book, [ online ], [retrieved on May 13, 20 15], URL:http://www.chemicalbook.com/ ProductMSDSDetailCB57 l 1497.\n\n* cited by examiner\n\nPrimary Examiner -\n\nSin Lee\n\n(74) Attorney, Agent, or Firm -Knobbe Martens Olson & BearLLP\n\n## (57) ABSTRACT\n\nA resist composition containing a base component (A) that exhibits changed solubility in a developing solution under action of acid, a photoreactive quencher (C), and an acid generator component (B) that generates acid upon exposure, and further containing an acid (G) having a pKa of 4 or less.\n\n## 6 Claims, No Drawings", + "recall": 0.9745762711864406, + "true_md": "1111111111111111 11111 lllll lllll lllll lllll 111111111111111 111111111111111111 US009164380B2 \n\n# c12) United States Patent Komuro et al.\n\n# (IO) Patent No.: US 9,164,380 B2\n\n# Oct. 20, 2015 (45) Date of Patent:\n\n# (54) RESIST COMPOSITION AND METHOD OF FORMING RESIST PATTERN\n\n- (71) Applicant: Tokyo Ohka Kogyo Co., Ltd., Kawasaki-shi (JP) \n\n- (72) Inventors: Yoshitaka Komuro, Kawasaki (JP); Yoshiyuki Utsumi, Kawasaki (JP); Akiya Kawaue, Kawasaki (JP); Toshiaki Hato, Kawasaki (JP) \n\n- (73) Assignee: TOKYO OHKA KOGYO CO., LTD., Kawasaki-Shi (JP) \n\n- ( *) Notice: Subject to any disclaimer, the term ofthis patent is extended or adjusted under 35 U.S.C. 154(b) by 62 days. \n\n- (21) Appl. No.: 13/710,809 \n\n- (22) Filed: Dec. 11, 2012 \n\n## (65) Prior Publication Data\n\n## (30) Foreign Application Priority Data\n\nUS 2013/0189619 Al Jul. 25, 2013 \n\nDec. 14, 2011 (JP) ................................. 2011-273759 \n\n- (51) Int. Cl. \n\n- (52) U.S. Cl. CPC .............. G03F 710045 (2013.01); G03F 71004 (2013.01); G03F 710046 (2013.01); G03F 710392 (2013.01); G03F 710397 (2013.01); G03F 7120 (2013.01); G03F 712041 (2013.01); G03F 7130 (2013.01) \n\n- ( 58) Field of Classification Search None See application file for complete search history. \n\n## (56) References Cited\n\n## U.S. PATENT DOCUMENTS\n\n## (57) ABSTRACT\n\nA resist composition containing a base component (A) that exhibits changed solubility in a developing solution under action of acid, a photoreactive quencher (C), and an acid generator component (B) that generates acid upon exposure, and further containing an acid (G) having a pKa of 4 or less. \n\n## 6 Claims, No Drawings\n\n## OTHER PUBLICATIONS\n\n## FOREIGN PATENT DOCUMENTS\n\nMachine-assited English translation of JP2008-15247, as provided by JPO (2008).* \n\nOffice Action in Japanese Patent Application No. 2011-273759, mailed May 19, 2015. \n\nAnthracene-9-carboxylic acid(723-62-6)’, Chemical Book, [ online ], [retrieved on May 13, 20 15], URL:http://www.chemicalbook.com/ ProductMSDSDetailCB57 l 1497. \n\n* cited by examiner \n\nPrimary Examiner - Sin Lee \n\n(74) Attorney, Agent, or Firm -Knobbe Martens Olson & BearLLP" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9328909969040987, + "doc_id": "a5da1b1951c04eb14f5bf21fb942fab92afc6285c120cf84aea99ba584ac99bc", + "edit_distance": 0.44801980198019803, + "f1_score": 0.9779005524861878, + "meteor": 0.9241395910203751, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "US 20020111024Al\n\nUS 20020111024Al\n\n## (19) United States (12) Patent Application Publication Small et al.\n\n## (54) CHEMICAL MECHANICAL POLISHING COMPOSITIONS\n\n- (76) Inventors:\n\nRobert J. Small, Dublin, CA (US); Laurence McGhee, Glasgow (GB); David J. Maloney, Pleasanton, CA (US); Maria L. Peterson, Belmont, CA (US)\n\n- (21) Appl. No.:\n- (22) Filed:\n- (63) Continuation-in-part of application No. 09/481,050, filed on Jan. 11, 2000, now patented, which is a continuation of application No. 09/043,505, filed on Mar. 23, 1998, now patented, filed as 371 of interna› tional application No. PCT/US97/12220, filed on Jul. 21, 1997.\n\nCorrespondence Address: PENNIE & EDMONDS LLP 1667 K STREET NW SUITE 1000 WASHINGTON, DC 20006\n\n09/985,870\n\nNov. 6, 2001\n\n## Related U.S. Application Data\n\n- (10)\n- Pub. No.: US 2002/0111024 Al\n- ( 43) Pub. Date:\n\nAug. 15, 2002\n\n- (60) Provisional application No. 60/023,299, filed on Jul. 26, 1996.\n\n## Publication Classification\n\n- (51) Int. Cl.7\n\n.......................\n\nH0lL 21/302; H0lL 21/461\n\n- (52) U.S. Cl.\n\n..............................................................\n\n438/689\n\n## (57) ABSTRACT\n\nA composition for chemical mechanical polishing that includes a slurry is described. A sufficient amount of a selectively oxidizing and reducing compound is provided to produce a differential removal of a metal and a dielectric material. A pH adjusting compound adjusts the pH of the composition to provide a pH that makes the selectively oxidizing and reducing compound provide the differential removal of a metal and a dielectric material. A composition may include an effective amount of an hydroxylamine compound, ammonium persulfate, a compound which is an indirect source of hydrogen peroxide, and a per acetic acid or periodic acid. A method for chemical mechanical polishing is described which includes applying a slurry that includes the composition to a surface to produce mechanical removal of the metal and dielectric material.", + "recall": 0.9567567567567568, + "true_md": "# (19) United States\n\n# (12) Patent Application Publication Small et al.\n\n# (10) Pub. No.: US 2002/0111024 Al\n\n# ( 43) Pub. Date: Aug. 15, 2002\n\n# (54) CHEMICAL MECHANICAL POLISHING COMPOSITIONS\n\n1111111111111111 IIIIII IIIII 11111 1111111111 1111111111 11111 11111 lllll 111111111111111 11111111 US 20020111024Al \n\n- (76) Inventors: Robert J. Small, Dublin, CA (US); Laurence McGhee, Glasgow (GB); David J. Maloney, Pleasanton, CA (US); Maria L. Peterson, Belmont, CA (US) \n\n- (21) Appl. No.: 09/985,870 \n\n- (22) Filed: Nov. 6, 2001 \n\n- (63) Continuation-in-part of application No. 09/481,050, filed on Jan. 11, 2000, now patented, which is a continuation of application No. 09/043,505, filed on Mar. 23, 1998, now patented, filed as 371 of interna› tional application No. PCT/US97/12220, filed on Jul. 21, 1997. \n\n- (60) Provisional application No. 60/023,299, filed on Jul. 26, 1996. \n\n## (57) ABSTRACT\n\nA composition for chemical mechanical polishing that includes a slurry is described. A sufficient amount of a selectively oxidizing and reducing compound is provided to produce a differential removal of a metal and a dielectric material. A pH adjusting compound adjusts the pH of the composition to provide a pH that makes the selectively oxidizing and reducing compound provide the differential removal of a metal and a dielectric material. A composition may include an effective amount of an hydroxylamine compound, ammonium persulfate, a compound which is an indirect source of hydrogen peroxide, and a per acetic acid or periodic acid. A method for chemical mechanical polishing is described which includes applying a slurry that includes the composition to a surface to produce mechanical removal of the metal and dielectric material. \n\nCorrespondence Address: PENNIE & EDMONDS LLP 1667 K STREET NW SUITE 1000 WASHINGTON, DC 20006 \n\n## Related U.S. Application Data\n\n## Publication Classification\n\n- (51) Int. Cl.7 ....................... H0lL 21/302; H0lL 21/461 \n\n- (52) U.S. Cl. .............................................................. 438/689" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9588120983272677, + "doc_id": "e10f9660c56e2e44b105d3664e60a7124a94dd70f68111a3773c366e134dc7c1", + "edit_distance": 0.7735982966643009, + "f1_score": 0.9761526232114467, + "meteor": 0.6072495319240981, + "precision": 0.9623824451410659, + "pred_md": "5,648,520\n\n7\n\nPrimary anilines are preferably used, with aniline particu› larly preferred.\n\nThe process according to the invention may be carried out both batchwise and continuously. A preferred embodiment is the continuous mode, in which the process is carried out in all stages under the pressure inherent in the system and preferably in an inert gas atmosphere (nitrogen).\n\nThe process according to the invention may be repeated with each of the product fractions arising in order to increase the enrichment or corresponding impoverishment effect\n\nThe process according to the invention may be carried out both with three (FIG. 1) and also with four (FIGS. 2 and 3) or five extraction stages (FIG. 4).\n\nThe flow diagrams of FIGS. 1-4 serve to explain further the process according to the invention, with the following references:\n\n- (1) a tank for the starting arylamine mixture\n- (2) an extraction stage (positioned upstream)\n- (3) an extraction stage (interposed)\n- (4) a (first) extraction stage\n- (5) a (penultimate) extraction stage\n- (6) a (final) extraction stage\n- (7) a working-up stage comprising\n- (7.0) a washing stage,\n- (7.1) a first distillation stage of a multi-stage distillation,\n- (7.2) a final distillation stage of a multi-stage distillation,\n- (8) a further working-up stage comprising\n- (8.0) a washing stage,\n- (8.1) a first distillation stage of a further multi-stage distillation,\n- (8.2) a final distillation stage of a further multi-stage distillation,\n- (9) a water evaporator\n- (10) a tank for a process product\n- (11) a tank for a further process product.\n\nReference letters A-Z designate the streams to which reference is made hereinbelow and in the Examples.\n\nThe extraction stage (2) positioned upstream is generally embodied as an extractor acting in multi-stage manner.\n\nThe extraction stage (3) which is optionally interposed likewise also comprises in the simplest instance a mixer› settler unit, however here too extraction units acting in multi-stage manner are preferably used.\n\nThe extraction stage (4) is in the simplest case a mixer› settler unit acting in single stage manner, however extraction units acting in multi-stage manner are preferably used.\n\n5\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\nThe extraction stages (5) and (6) are generally embodied as extractors acting in multi-stage manner.\n\nThe working-up stages (7) and (8) serve to separate the 50 polyamine fractions which arise as distillation residues and are isolated as process products (G) and (0) in the tanks (10) and (11), and to recover as distillates the hydrophobic solvent utilized and the auxiliary amine used.\n\nThe recovery of hydrophobic solvent and of auxiliary 55 amine is generally associated with an extensive, optionally complete separation of the two components, and affords, on the one hand, in the form of distillate streams (E) and (M), hydrophobic solvent which is to a large extent impoverished at least as to auxiliary amine, optionally to a large extent 60 liberated from auxiliary amine, and affords auxiliary amine which is to a large extent impoverished at least as to hydrophobic solvent, optionally to a large extent liberated from hydrophobic solvent, in the form of distillate streams (F) and (N), generally united in stream (S). 65\n\nIt has proved to be expedient to liberate the organic phases (D) and (D') and (L) and (L'), respectively, which are\n\n8\n\nsupplied to the distillation stages, from adhering traces of acid, by extracting with water, before their treatment by distillation in the washing stages (7.0) and (8.0) positioned upstream.\n\nThe actual working-up stage (7) generally comprises an at least two-stage multi-stage distillation whereof the first stage (7.1) delivers as the distillate (E) a hydrophobic solvent which by comparison with the intake product (D) or (D') is liberated from polyarylamine and is impoverished as to auxiliary amine, optionally liberated from auxiliary amine, and whereof the final stage (7 .2) delivers as the distillate (F) an auxiliary amine which by comparison with (D) or (D') is liberated from polyarylamine and impoverished as to hydro› phobic solvent, optionally liberated from hydrophobic solvent.\n\nAdditionally there arises in the final distillation stage (7.2), as the distillate bottoms (G), the first polyamine fraction of the starting mixture (A), which was contained in stream (D) or (D').\n\nThe working-up stage (8) also generally composes an at least two-stage multi-stage distillation whereof the first stage (8.1) delivers as the distillate (M) a hydrophobic solvent liberated, by comparison with the intake product (L) or (L'), from polyamine and impoverished as to auxiliary amine, optionally liberated from auxiliary amine, and whereof the final stage (8.2) delivers as the distillate (N) an auxiliary amine which, by comparison with (L) or (L'), is liberated from polyarylamine and impoverished as to hydrophobic solvent, optionally liberated from hydrophobic solvent.\n\nThe extensive, optionally complete, separation by distil› lation of hydrophobic solvent and auxiliary amine is pre› ferred in carrying out the process according to the invention, and this applies in particular to the distillate fractions (M) and (E).\n\nThe distillation stage (9) is an apparatus with which water can be removed by distillation from the aqueous phase of the system or from a partial stream of the aqueous phase.\n\nSuch a step is fundamentally not a necessity for carrying out the process according to the invention, however because of the advantages those embodiments which include a water distillation stage (9) are preferred.\n\nIn the aqueous phase, which contains the acid, there is present in practical terms a closed circuit such that the stage (9) can be inserted fundamentally at any point in the latter circulation system. The position of stage (9) following the extraction stage ( 6) and before entry into the extraction stage (2), (3) or (4) is the most advantageous and hence the preferred embodiment.\n\nThe water volume (X) which is removed is, optionally after being split into partial streams and after being used variously, supplied again to the system at a suitable point in the form of the stream (Y) in its entirety or in partial streams, such that there results an enlarged and optionally branched closed-circuit aqueous system.\n\nThis latter also includes the washing stages (7.0) and/or (8.0). The latter are extraction stages acting in single or multi-stage manner operating on the countercurrent prin› ciple. In washing stage (7.0) the organic phase (D) or (D') is liberated from adhering traces of acid with a partial stream of (X), and in the washing stage (8.0) the same is effected with the organic phase (L) or (L') using another partial stream of (X).\n\nThe distillate (X), which is contaminated with hydropho› bic solvent and auxiliary amine, is most suitable for the washing stages (7.0) and (8.0). The resulting washing waters generally exhibit a very much lower acid concentration than the actual acid circulation, such that they are able to be", + "recall": 0.9903225806451613, + "true_md": "7 \n\n5,648,520 \n\n8 \n\nThe distillate (X), which is contaminated with hydropho› bic solvent and auxiliary amine, is most suitable for the washing stages (7.0) and (8.0). The resulting washing waters generally exhibit a very much lower acid concentration than the actual acid circulation, such that they are able to be \n\nIt has proved to be expedient to liberate the organic phases (D) and (D’) and (L) and (L’), respectively, which are \n\nThis latter also includes the washing stages (7.0) and/or (8.0). The latter are extraction stages acting in single or multi-stage manner operating on the countercurrent prin› ciple. In washing stage (7.0) the organic phase (D) or (D’) is liberated from adhering traces of acid with a partial stream of (X), and in the washing stage (8.0) the same is effected with the organic phase (L) or (L’) using another partial stream of (X). \n\nThe recovery of hydrophobic solvent and of auxiliary amine is generally associated with an extensive, optionally complete separation of the two components, and affords, on the one hand, in the form of distillate streams (E) and (M), hydrophobic solvent which is to a large extent impoverished at least as to auxiliary amine, optionally to a large extent liberated from auxiliary amine, and affords auxiliary amine which is to a large extent impoverished at least as to hydrophobic solvent, optionally to a large extent liberated from hydrophobic solvent, in the form of distillate streams (F) and (N), generally united in stream (S). \n\nThe water volume (X) which is removed is, optionally after being split into partial streams and after being used variously, supplied again to the system at a suitable point in the form of the stream (Y) in its entirety or in partial streams, such that there results an enlarged and optionally branched closed-circuit aqueous system. \n\nThe working-up stages (7) and (8) serve to separate the polyamine fractions which arise as distillation residues and are isolated as process products (G) and (0) in the tanks (10) and (11), and to recover as distillates the hydrophobic solvent utilized and the auxiliary amine used. \n\nThe extraction stages (5) and (6) are generally embodied as extractors acting in multi-stage manner. \n\nThe extraction stage (4) is in the simplest case a mixer› settler unit acting in single stage manner, however extraction units acting in multi-stage manner are preferably used. \n\nIn the aqueous phase, which contains the acid, there is present in practical terms a closed circuit such that the stage (9) can be inserted fundamentally at any point in the latter circulation system. The position of stage (9) following the extraction stage ( 6) and before entry into the extraction stage (2), (3) or (4) is the most advantageous and hence the preferred embodiment. \n\nSuch a step is fundamentally not a necessity for carrying out the process according to the invention, however because of the advantages those embodiments which include a water distillation stage (9) are preferred. \n\nThe extraction stage (3) which is optionally interposed likewise also comprises in the simplest instance a mixer› settler unit, however here too extraction units acting in multi-stage manner are preferably used. \n\nThe extraction stage (2) positioned upstream is generally embodied as an extractor acting in multi-stage manner. \n\nReference letters A-Z designate the streams to which reference is made hereinbelow and in the Examples. \n\nThe distillation stage (9) is an apparatus with which water can be removed by distillation from the aqueous phase of the system or from a partial stream of the aqueous phase. \n\nThe extensive, optionally complete, separation by distil› lation of hydrophobic solvent and auxiliary amine is pre› ferred in carrying out the process according to the invention, and this applies in particular to the distillate fractions (M) and (E). \n\nThe working-up stage (8) also generally composes an at least two-stage multi-stage distillation whereof the first stage (8.1) delivers as the distillate (M) a hydrophobic solvent liberated, by comparison with the intake product (L) or (L’), from polyamine and impoverished as to auxiliary amine, optionally liberated from auxiliary amine, and whereof the final stage (8.2) delivers as the distillate (N) an auxiliary amine which, by comparison with (L) or (L’), is liberated from polyarylamine and impoverished as to hydrophobic solvent, optionally liberated from hydrophobic solvent. \n\nAdditionally there arises in the final distillation stage (7.2), as the distillate bottoms (G), the first polyamine fraction of the starting mixture (A), which was contained in stream (D) or (D’). \n\nThe actual working-up stage (7) generally comprises an at least two-stage multi-stage distillation whereof the first stage (7.1) delivers as the distillate (E) a hydrophobic solvent which by comparison with the intake product (D) or (D’) is liberated from polyarylamine and is impoverished as to auxiliary amine, optionally liberated from auxiliary amine, and whereof the final stage (7 .2) delivers as the distillate (F) an auxiliary amine which by comparison with (D) or (D’) is liberated from polyarylamine and impoverished as to hydro› phobic solvent, optionally liberated from hydrophobic sol- vent. \n\nsupplied to the distillation stages, from adhering traces of acid, by extracting with water, before their treatment by distillation in the washing stages (7.0) and (8.0) positioned upstream. \n\nPrimary anilines are preferably used, with aniline particu› larly preferred. \n\nThe process according to the invention may be carried out both batchwise and continuously. A preferred embodiment is the continuous mode, in which the process is carried out in all stages under the pressure inherent in the system and preferably in an inert gas atmosphere (nitrogen). \n\nThe process according to the invention may be repeated with each of the product fractions arising in order to increase the enrichment or corresponding impoverishment effect \n\nThe process according to the invention may be carried out both with three (FIG. 1) and also with four (FIGS. 2 and 3) or five extraction stages (FIG. 4). \n\nThe flow diagrams of FIGS. 1-4 serve to explain further the process according to the invention, with the following references: \n\n- (1) a tank for the starting arylamine mixture \n\n- (2) an extraction stage (positioned upstream) \n\n- (3) an extraction stage (interposed) \n\n- (4) a (first) extraction stage \n\n- (5) a (penultimate) extraction stage \n\n- (6) a (final) extraction stage \n\n- (7) a working-up stage comprising \n\n- (7.0) a washing stage, \n\n- (7.1) a first distillation stage of a multi-stage distillation, \n\n- (7.2) a final distillation stage of a multi-stage distillation, \n\n- (8) a further working-up stage comprising \n\n- (8.0) a washing stage, \n\n- (8.1) a first distillation stage of a further multi-stage distillation, \n\n- (8.2) a final distillation stage of a further multi-stage distillation, \n\n- (10) a tank for a process product \n\n- (9) a water evaporator \n\n- (11) a tank for a further process product." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "32ea98f4f3a0f5c83624c4cfebf19d42779032eb13a5b6d083ab1b68ebc0c5b8", + "edit_distance": 0.8421052631578947, + "f1_score": 0.38709677419354843, + "meteor": 0.43771991555242784, + "precision": 0.3333333333333333, + "pred_md": "67\n\n-continued\n\nUS 9,164,380 B2\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n60\n\n65\n\n68\n\n-continued", + "recall": 0.46153846153846156, + "true_md": "US 9,164,380 B2 \n\n68 \n\n67 \n\n-continued \n\n-continued \n\n. 1 Formula 24] [Chem1ca" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9361390461169551, + "doc_id": "d0c92c5fc251a199757643631a3ed357853f71db9e4a603401963b506a5d14ea", + "edit_distance": 0.761180679785331, + "f1_score": 0.954248366013072, + "meteor": 0.6224360557252172, + "precision": 0.9563318777292577, + "pred_md": "49\n\n50\n\n2. The composition of claim 1, wherein said buffering agent has a pKa of from about 5 to about 9.5 and said composition has a pH of from about 5 to about 9.5. 3. The composition of claim 2, wherein said buffering agent has a pKa of from about 6 to about 9 and said composition has a pH of from about 6 to about 9. 4. The composition of claim 1, wherein said buffering agent is selected from the group consisting of acridine, phenylalanine, allothreonine, n-amylamine, aniline, n-allylaniline, 4-bromoaniline, 4-bromo-N,N› dimethylaniline, m-chloroaniline, p-chloroaniline, 3-chloro› N ,N-dimethylaniline, 3,5-dibromoaniline, N ,N› diethylaniline, N,N-dimethy laniline, N-ethy laniline, 4-fluoroaniline, N-methylaniline, 4-methylthioaniline, 3-sulfonic acid aniline, 4-sulfonic acid aniline, p-anisidine, arginine, asparagine, glycyl asparagine, DL-aspartic acid, aziridine, 2-aminoethylbenzene, benzidine, benzimidazole, 2-ethylbenzimidazole, 2-methylbenzimidazole, 2-phenylbenzimidazole, 2-aminobenzoic acid, 4-aminobenzoic acid, benzylamine, 2-aminobiphenyl, 20 brucine, 1,4-diaminobutane, t-butylamine 4-aminobutyric acid, glycyl-2-amino-n-butyric acid, cacodylic acid, a-chlortriethylammonium-n-butyric acid, codeine, cyclohexylamine, cystine, n-decylamine, diethylamine, n-dodecaneamine, 1-ephedrine, l-amino-3-methoxyethane, 25 1,2-bisme thylaminoe thane, 2-aminoe thano 1, ethylenediamine, ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid, 1-glutamic acid, a-monoethylglutamic acid, 1-glutamine, 1-glutathione, glycine, n-acetylglycine, dimethylglycine, glycylglycylglycine, leucylglycine, methylglycine, 30 y-hydroxyquinoline, iodoacetic acid, m-iodobenzoic acid, phenylglycine, N-n-propylglycine, tetraglycylglycine, glycylserine, dexadecaneamine, 1-aminoheptane, 2-aminoheptane, 2-aminohexanoic acid, DL-histidine, ~-alanylhistidine, imidazol, 1-aminoindane, 2-aminoisobutyric acid, isoquinoline, 1-aminoisoquinoline, 35 7-hydroxyisoquinoline, 1-leucine, glycylleucine, methionine, methylamine, morphine, morpholine, l-amino6-h ydroxyna p h thalene, dime thy laminonaphthalene, a-naphthylamine, ~-naphthylamine, n-methyl-a› naphthylamine, cis-neobornylamine, nicotine, 40 n-nonylamine, octadecaneamine, octylamine, omithine, papaverine, 3-aminopentane, valeric acid, permidine, phenanthridine, 1,10-phenanthroline, 2-ethoxyaniline, 3-ethoxyaniline, 4-ethoxyaniline, a-picoline, ~-picoline, y-picoline, pilocarpine, piperazine, trans-2,5dimethylpiperazine, 1-n-butylpiperidine, 1,2dimethylpiperidine, 1-ethylpiperidine, 1-methylpiperidine, praline, hydroxyproline, l-amino-2,2-dimethylpropane, 1,2d i am in op ro pane, 1,3-diaminopropane, 1,2,3triaminopropane, 3-aminopropanoic acid, pteridine, 50 2- amino -4, 6-dih ydro xyp te ridine, 2- amino -4hydroxypteridine, 6-chloropteridine, 6-hydroxy-4me th ylp teridine, purine, 6-aminopurine, 2-dim ethyl am inopurine, 8-h ydro xypurine, 2-methylpyrazine, 2-amino-4,6-dimethylpyrimidine, 55 pyridine, 2-aldoximepyridine, 2-aminopyridine, 4-aminopyridine, 2-benzylpyridine, 2,5-diaminopyridine, 2,3-dimethylpyridine, 2,4-dimethylpyridine, 3,5dimethylpyridine, 2-ethylpyridine, methyoxypyridine, 4-methylaminopyridine, 2,4,6-trimethylpyridine, 1,2d i me th ylp yrro lidine, n-me th ylp yrro lidine, 5-hydroxyquinazoline, quinine, 3-quinolinol, 8-quinolinol, 8-hydroxy-5-sulfoquinoline, 6-me thoxyquinoline, 2-methylquinoline, 4-methylquinoline, 5-methylquinoline, serine, strychnine, taurine, myristilamine, 2-aminothiazole, threonine, o-toluidine, m-toluidine, p-toluidine, 2,4,6triamino-1,2,3-triazine, tridecaneamine, trimethylamine, tryptophan, tyrosine, tyrosineamide, valine, acetic acid, acetoacetic acid, acrylic acid, adipamic acid, adipic acid, d-alinine, allantoin acid, alloxanic acid, a-aminoacetic acid, a-aminobenzoic acid, p-aminobenzoic acid, 5 m-aminobenzosulfonic acid, p-aminobenzosulfonic acid, anisic acid, o-~-anisylpropionic acid, m-~-propionic acid, p-~-propionic acid, ascorbic acid, DL-aspartic acid, barbi› turic acid, benzoic acid, m-bromobenzoic acid, n-butyric acid, iso-butyric acid, cacodylic acid, n-caproic acid, iso10 caproic acid, m-chlorobenzoic acid, p-chlorobenzoic acid, ~-chlorobutyric acid, y-chlorobutyric acid, o-chlorocinnamic acid, m-chlorocinnamic acid, p-chlorocinnamic acid, o-chlorophenylacetic acid, m-chlorophenylacetic acid, p-chlorophenylacetic acid, ~-( o15 chlorophenyl)propionic acid, ~-(m-chlorophenyl)propionic acid, ~-(p-chlorophenyl)propionic acid, ~-chloropropionic acid, cis-cinnamic acid, trans-cinnamic acid, citric acid, o-cresol, m-cresol, p-cresol, trans-crotonic acid, cyclohexane-1: 1-dicarboxylic acid, cyclopropane-1: ldicarboxylic acid, DL-cysteine, L-cysteine, deuteroacetic acid, 2,3-dichlorophenol, 3,4-dihydroxybenzoic acid, 3,5dihydroxybenzoic acid, dimethylglycine, dimethylmalic acid, 2,4-dintirophenol, 3,6-dinitrophenol, diphenylacetic acid, ethylbenzoic acid, formic acid, trans-fumaric acid, gallic acid, glutaramic acid, glutaric acid, glycine, glycolic acid, heptanoic acid, hexahydrobenzoic acid, hexanoic acid, hippuric acid, histidine, hydroquinone, m-hydroxybenzoic acid, p-hyroxybenzoic acid, ~-hyroxybutyric acid, y-hydroxybutyric acid, ~-hydroxypropionic acid, itaconic acid, lysine, maleic acid, malic acid, malonic acid, DL-mandelic acid, mesaconic acid, mesitylenic acid, methyl-a-aminobenzoic acid, methyl-m-aminobenzoic acid, methyl-p-aminobenzoic acid, o-methylcinnamic acid, m-methylcinnamic acid, p-methylcinnamic acid, ~-methylglutaric acid, n-methylglycine, methylsuccinic acid, o-monochlorophenol, m-monochlorophenol, p-monochlorophenol, a-naphthoic acid, ~-naphthoic acid, a-naphthol, ~-naphthol, nitrobenzene, m-nitrobenzoic acid, p-nitrobenzoic acid, o-nitrophenol, m-nitrophenol, p-nitrophenol, o-nitrophenylacetic acid, m-nitrophenylacetic acid, p-nitrophenylacetic acid, o-~› nitrophenylpropionic acid, m-~-nitrophenylpropionic acid, p-~-nitrophenylpropionic acid, nonanic acid, octanoic acid, 45 oxalic acid, phenol, phenylacetic acid, o-phenylbenzoic acid, y-phenylbutyric acid, a-phenylpropionic acid, ~-phenylpropionic acid, o-phthalic, m-phthalic, p-phthalic, pimelic acid, propionic acid, iso-propylbenzoic acid, 2-pyridinecarboxylic acid, 3-pyridinecarboxylic acid, 4-pyridinecarboxylic acid, pyrocatecchol, resorcinol, saccharin, suberic acid, succinic acid, a-tartaric acid, meso› tartaric acid, theobromine, terephthalic acid, thioacetic acid, thiophenecarboxylic acid, o-toluic acid, m-toluic acid, p-toluic acid, trichlorophenol, trimethylacetic acid, tryptophan, tyrosine, uric acid, n-valeric, iso-valeric, veronal acid, vinylacetic acid, xanthine, arsenic acid, arsenious acid, a-boric acid, carbonic acid, chromic acid, germanic acid, hyrocyanic acid, hydrofluoric acid, hydrogen sulfide, hypo› bromous acid, nitrous acid, a-phosphoric acid, phosphorous 60 acid, pyrophosphoric acid, selenious acid, m-silicic acid, o-silicic acid, sulfurous acid, telluric acid, tellureous acid, tetraboric acid, and mixtures thereof. 5. The composition of claim 1, wherein said buffering agent is selected from the group consisting of 3chloropro65 panoic acid, citric acid, ethylenedinitriloletraacetic acid, alanine, aminobenzene, sulfanilic acid, 2-aminoberzoic acid, 2-aminophenol. ammonia, arginine, asparagine, aspartic\n\nUS 6,503,413 B2", + "recall": 0.9521739130434783, + "true_md": "49 \n\nUS 6,503,413 B2 \n\n50 \n\ntryptophan, tyrosine, tyrosineamide, valine, acetic acid, acetoacetic acid, acrylic acid, adipamic acid, adipic acid, d-alinine, allantoin acid, alloxanic acid, a-aminoacetic acid, a-aminobenzoic acid, p-aminobenzoic acid, m-aminobenzosulfonic acid, p-aminobenzosulfonic acid, anisic acid, o-~-anisylpropionic acid, m-~-propionic acid, p-~-propionic acid, ascorbic acid, DL-aspartic acid, barbi› turic acid, benzoic acid, m-bromobenzoic acid, n-butyric acid, iso-butyric acid, cacodylic acid, n-caproic acid, iso- caproic acid, m-chlorobenzoic acid, p-chlorobenzoic acid, ~-chlorobutyric acid, y-chlorobutyric acid, o-chlorocinnamic acid, m-chlorocinnamic acid, p-chlorocinnamic acid, o-chlorophenylacetic acid, m-chlorophenylacetic acid, p-chlorophenylacetic acid, ~-( o- chlorophenyl)propionic acid, ~-(m-chlorophenyl)propionic acid, ~-(p-chlorophenyl)propionic acid, ~-chloropropionic acid, cis-cinnamic acid, trans-cinnamic acid, citric acid, o-cresol, m-cresol, p-cresol, trans-crotonic acid, cyclohexane-1: 1-dicarboxylic acid, cyclopropane-1: l- dicarboxylic acid, DL-cysteine, L-cysteine, deuteroacetic acid, 2,3-dichlorophenol, 3,4-dihydroxybenzoic acid, 3,5- dihydroxybenzoic acid, dimethylglycine, dimethylmalic acid, 2,4-dintirophenol, 3,6-dinitrophenol, diphenylacetic acid, ethylbenzoic acid, formic acid, trans-fumaric acid, gallic acid, glutaramic acid, glutaric acid, glycine, glycolic acid, heptanoic acid, hexahydrobenzoic acid, hexanoic acid, hippuric acid, histidine, hydroquinone, m-hydroxybenzoic acid, p-hyroxybenzoic acid, ~-hyroxybutyric acid, y-hydroxybutyric acid, ~-hydroxypropionic acid, y-hydroxyquinoline, iodoacetic acid, m-iodobenzoic acid, itaconic acid, lysine, maleic acid, malic acid, malonic acid, DL-mandelic acid, mesaconic acid, mesitylenic acid, methyl-a-aminobenzoic acid, methyl-m-aminobenzoic acid, methyl-p-aminobenzoic acid, o-methylcinnamic acid, 35 m-methylcinnamic acid, p-methylcinnamic acid, ~-methylglutaric acid, n-methylglycine, methylsuccinic acid, o-monochlorophenol, m-monochlorophenol, p-monochlorophenol, a-naphthoic acid, ~-naphthoic acid, a-naphthol, ~-naphthol, nitrobenzene, m-nitrobenzoic acid, 40 p-nitrobenzoic acid, o-nitrophenol, m-nitrophenol, p-nitrophenol, o-nitrophenylacetic acid, m-nitrophenylacetic acid, p-nitrophenylacetic acid, o-~› nitrophenylpropionic acid, m-~-nitrophenylpropionic acid, p-~-nitrophenylpropionic acid, nonanic acid, octanoic acid, oxalic acid, phenol, phenylacetic acid, o-phenylbenzoic acid, y-phenylbutyric acid, a-phenylpropionic acid, ~-phenylpropionic acid, o-phthalic, m-phthalic, p-phthalic, pimelic acid, propionic acid, iso-propylbenzoic acid, 2-pyridinecarboxylic acid, 3-pyridinecarboxylic acid, 4-pyridinecarboxylic acid, pyrocatecchol, resorcinol, saccharin, suberic acid, succinic acid, a-tartaric acid, meso› tartaric acid, theobromine, terephthalic acid, thioacetic acid, thiophenecarboxylic acid, o-toluic acid, m-toluic acid, p-toluic acid, trichlorophenol, trimethylacetic acid, tryptophan, tyrosine, uric acid, n-valeric, iso-valeric, veronal acid, vinylacetic acid, xanthine, arsenic acid, arsenious acid, a-boric acid, carbonic acid, chromic acid, germanic acid, hyrocyanic acid, hydrofluoric acid, hydrogen sulfide, hypo› bromous acid, nitrous acid, a-phosphoric acid, phosphorous acid, pyrophosphoric acid, selenious acid, m-silicic acid, o-silicic acid, sulfurous acid, telluric acid, tellureous acid, tetraboric acid, and mixtures thereof. \n\n5. The composition of claim 1, wherein said buffering agent is selected from the group consisting of 3chloropro- panoic acid, citric acid, ethylenedinitriloletraacetic acid, alanine, aminobenzene, sulfanilic acid, 2-aminoberzoic acid, 2-aminophenol. ammonia, arginine, asparagine, aspartic \n\n2. The composition of claim 1, wherein said buffering agent has a pKa of from about 5 to about 9.5 and said composition has a pH of from about 5 to about 9.5. \n\n3. The composition of claim 2, wherein said buffering agent has a pKa of from about 6 to about 9 and said composition has a pH of from about 6 to about 9. \n\n4. The composition of claim 1, wherein said buffering agent is selected from the group consisting of acridine, phenylalanine, allothreonine, n-amylamine, aniline, n-allylaniline, 4-bromoaniline, 4-bromo-N,N› dimethylaniline, m-chloroaniline, p-chloroaniline, 3-chloro› N ,N-dimethylaniline, 3,5-dibromoaniline, N ,N› diethylaniline, N,N-dimethy laniline, N-ethy laniline, 4-fluoroaniline, N-methylaniline, 4-methylthioaniline, 3-sulfonic acid aniline, 4-sulfonic acid aniline, p-anisidine, arginine, asparagine, glycyl asparagine, DL-aspartic acid, aziridine, 2-aminoethylbenzene, benzidine, benzimidazole, 2-ethylbenzimidazole, 2-methylbenzimidazole, 2-phenylbenzimidazole, 2-aminobenzoic acid, 4-aminobenzoic acid, benzylamine, 2-aminobiphenyl, brucine, 1,4-diaminobutane, t-butylamine 4-aminobutyric acid, glycyl-2-amino-n-butyric acid, cacodylic acid, a-chlortriethylammonium-n-butyric acid, codeine, cyclohexylamine, cystine, n-decylamine, diethylamine, n-dodecaneamine, 1-ephedrine, l-amino-3-methoxyethane, 1,2-bisme thylaminoe thane, 2-aminoe thano 1, ethylenediamine, ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid, 1-glutamic acid, a-monoethylglutamic acid, 1-glutamine, 1-glutathione, glycine, n-acetylglycine, dimethylglycine, glycylglycylglycine, leucylglycine, methylglycine, phenylglycine, N-n-propylglycine, tetraglycylglycine, glycylserine, dexadecaneamine, 1-aminoheptane, 2-aminoheptane, 2-aminohexanoic acid, DL-histidine, ~-alanylhistidine, imidazol, 1-aminoindane, 2-aminoisobutyric acid, isoquinoline, 1-aminoisoquinoline, 7-hydroxyisoquinoline, 1-leucine, glycylleucine, methionine, methylamine, morphine, morpholine, l-amino- 6-h ydroxyna p h thalene, dime thy laminonaphthalene, a-naphthylamine, ~-naphthylamine, n-methyl-a› naphthylamine, cis-neobornylamine, nicotine, n-nonylamine, octadecaneamine, octylamine, omithine, papaverine, 3-aminopentane, valeric acid, permidine, phenanthridine, 1,10-phenanthroline, 2-ethoxyaniline, 3-ethoxyaniline, 4-ethoxyaniline, a-picoline, ~-picoline, y-picoline, pilocarpine, piperazine, trans-2,5- dimethylpiperazine, 1-n-butylpiperidine, 1,2- dimethylpiperidine, 1-ethylpiperidine, 1-methylpiperidine, praline, hydroxyproline, l-amino-2,2-dimethylpropane, 1,2- d i am in op ro pane, 1,3-diaminopropane, 1,2,3- triaminopropane, 3-aminopropanoic acid, pteridine, 2- amino -4, 6-dih ydro xyp te ridine, 2- amino -4- hydroxypteridine, 6-chloropteridine, 6-hydroxy-4- me th ylp teridine, purine, 6-aminopurine, 2-dim ethyl am inopurine, 8-h ydro xypurine, 2-methylpyrazine, 2-amino-4,6-dimethylpyrimidine, pyridine, 2-aldoximepyridine, 2-aminopyridine, 4-aminopyridine, 2-benzylpyridine, 2,5-diaminopyridine, 2,3-dimethylpyridine, 2,4-dimethylpyridine, 3,5- dimethylpyridine, 2-ethylpyridine, methyoxypyridine, 4-methylaminopyridine, 2,4,6-trimethylpyridine, 1,2- d i me th ylp yrro lidine, n-me th ylp yrro lidine, 5-hydroxyquinazoline, quinine, 3-quinolinol, 8-quinolinol, 8-hydroxy-5-sulfoquinoline, 6-me thoxyquinoline, 2-methylquinoline, 4-methylquinoline, 5-methylquinoline, serine, strychnine, taurine, myristilamine, 2-aminothiazole, threonine, o-toluidine, m-toluidine, p-toluidine, 2,4,6- triamino-1,2,3-triazine, tridecaneamine, trimethylamine," + }, + { + "bleu": 0.1424465913886198, + "doc_id": "21075a378167555c69ff14ca80c43fc0983f71a3469f2cee47ed5f7fe5643c1c", + "edit_distance": 0.875, + "f1_score": 0.46153846153846145, + "meteor": 0.7952146375791698, + "precision": 0.3, + "pred_md": "41\n\n42\n\n-continued\n\n-continued\n\n0\n\n0\n\n0\n\n0\n\nUS 9,164,380 B2\n\n5\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n60\n\n65", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "US 9,164,380 B2 \n\n41 \n\n42 \n\n-continued \n\n-continued" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9935510767421227, + "doc_id": "50ad391fdf4f0c7b54cf02a1cac9689701d7026112ab27025359ef544fabf730", + "edit_distance": 0.009538950715421303, + "f1_score": 0.997090203685742, + "meteor": 0.9978128572365649, + "precision": 0.9980582524271845, + "pred_md": "US 2009/0197849 Al\n\npyl]-N,N,N-triethylammonium (DOTMA) in appropriate ratios. Methods for making liposomes using these materials are well known in the art.\n\n[0243] Micelles are known in the art and are comprised of surfactant molecules arranged so that their polar headgroups form an outer spherical shell, while the hydrophobic, hydro› carbon chains are oriented towards the center of the sphere, forming a core. Micelles form in an aqueous solution con› taining surfactant at a high enough concentration so that micelles naturally result. Surfactants useful for forming micelles include, but are not limited to, potassium laurate, sodium octane sulfonate, sodium decane sulfonate, sodium dodecane sulfonate, sodium lauryl sulfate, docusate sodium, decyltrimethylammonium bromide, dodecyltrimethylammo› nium bromide, tetradecyltrimethylammonium bromide, tet› radecyltrimethyl-ammonium chloride, dodecylammonium chloride, polyoxyl 8 dodecyl ether, polyoxyl 12 dodecyl ether, nonoxynol 10 andnonoxynol 30. Micelle formulations can be used in conjunction with the present invention either by incorporation into the reservoir of a topical or transdermal delivery system, or into a formulation to be applied to the body surface.\n\n[0244] Microspheres, similarly, may be incorporated into the present formulations and drug delivery systems. Like liposomes and micelles, microspheres essentially encapsu› late a drug or drug-containing formulation. They are gener› ally, although not necessarily, formed from lipids, preferably charged lipids such as phospholipids. Preparation of lipidic microspheres is well known in the art and described in the pertinent texts and literature.\n\n[0245] Various additives, known to those skilled in the art, may be included in the topical formulations. For example, solvents, including relatively small amounts of alcohol, may be used to solubilize certain drug substances. Other optional additives include opacifiers, antioxidants, fragrance, colo› rant, gelling agents, thickening agents, stabilizers, surfactants and the like. Other agents may also be added, such as antimi› crobial agents, to prevent spoilage upon storage, i.e., to inhibit growth of microbes such as yeasts and molds. Suitable anti› microbial agents are typically selected from the group con› sisting of the methyl and propyl esters of p-hydroxybenzoic acid (i.e., methyl and propyl paraben), sodium benzoate, sor› bic acid, imidurea, and combinations thereof.\n\n[0246] For those drugs having an unusually low rate of permeation through the skin or mucosa! tissue, it may be desirable to include a second permeation enhancer in the formulation in addition to the inorganic or organic base enhancer, although in a preferred embodiment the base enhancer is administered without any other permeation enhancers. Any other enhancers should, like the base enhancer, minimize the possibility of skin damage, irritation, and systemic toxicity. Examples of classes of suitable sec› ondary enhancers ( or \"co-enhancers\") include, but are not limited to, fatty acids, both saturated and unsaturated; fatty alcohols; bile acids; nonionic surfactants, including esters of fatty acids, fatty (long-chain alkyl or alkenyl) esters of mono› hydric alcohols, dials, and polyols, dials and polyols that are both esterified with a fatty acid and substituted with a poly› oxyalkylene, polyoxyalkylene fatty acid esters, polyoxyalky› lene fatty ethers, polyoxyalkylene fatty ethers, and polyglyc› eryl fatty acid esters; amines; amides; N-alkyl› azacycloalkanones and N-alkyl-azacycloalkenones;\n\n19\n\nAug. 6, 2009\n\nhydrocarbon solvents; terpenes; lower alkyl esters; cyclodex› trin enhancers; nitrogen-containing heterocycles; sulfoxides; and urea and its derivatives.\n\n[0247] Specific examples of suitable co-enhancers include ethers such as diethylene glycol monoethyl ether (available commercially as Transcutolfi, Gattefosse SA) and di ethylene glycol monomethyl ether; surfactants such as sodium laurate, sodium lauryl sulfate, cetyltrimethylammonium bromide, benzalkonium chloride, Poloxamer (231, 182, 184), Tween (20, 40, 60, 80) and lecithin; alcohols such as ethanol, pro› panol, octanol, benzyl alcohol, and the like; fatty acids such as !auric acid, oleic acid and valeric acid; fatty acid esters such as isopropyl myristate, isopropyl palmitate, methylpropionate, and ethyl oleate; polyols and esters thereof such as polyeth› ylene glycol, and polyethylene glycol monolaurate; amides and other nitrogenous compounds such as urea, dimethylac› etamide, dimethylformamide, 2-pyrrolidone, l-methyl-2pyrrolidone, ethanolamine, diethanolamine and triethanola› mine; terpenes; alkanones; and organic acids, particularly citric acid and succinic acid. Azonefi and sulfoxides such as dimethylsulfoxide and decylmethylsulfoxide may also be used, but are less preferred. Percutaneous Penetration Enhancers, eds. Smith et al. (CRC Press, 1995) provides an excellent overview of the field and further information con› cerning possible secondary enhancers for use in conjunction with the present invention.\n\n[0248] The formulation may also contain irritation-mitigat› ing additives to minimize or eliminate the possibility of skin irritation or skin damage resulting from the drug, the base enhancer, or other components of the formulation. Suitable irritation-mitigating additives include, for example: a-toco› pherol; monoamine oxidase inhibitors, particularly phenyl alcohols such as 2-phenyl-1-ethanol; glycerin; salicylic acids and salicylates; ascorbic acids and ascorbates; ionophores such as monensin; amphiphilic amines; ammonium chloride; N-acetylcysteine; cis-urocanic acid; capsaicin; and chloro› quine. The irritant-mitigating additive, if present, may be incorporated into the formulation at a concentration effective to mitigate irritation or skin damage, typically representing not more than about 20 wt %, more typically not more than about 5 wt%, of the formulation.\n\n[0249] The concentration of the active agent in the formu› lation will typically depend upon a variety of factors, includ› ing the disease or condition to be treated, the nature and activity of the active agent, the desired effect, possible adverse reactions, the ability and speed of the active agent to reach its intended target, and other factors within the particu› lar knowledge of the patient and physician. Preferred formu› lations will typically contain on the order of about 0.5-50 wt %, preferably about 5-30 wt%, active agent.\n\n## V. Drug Delivery Systems\n\n[0250] An alternative and preferred method involves the use of a drug delivery system, e.g., a topical or transdermal \"patch,\" wherein the active agent is contained within a lami› nated structure that is to be affixed to the skin. In such a structure, the drug composition is contained in a layer, or \"reservoir,\" underlying an upper backing layer that serves as the outer surface of the device during use. The laminated structure may contain a single reservoir, or it may contain multiple reservoirs.\n\n[0251] Accordingly, another embodiment of the invention is a system for the enhanced topical or transdermal adminis› tration of a drug, comprising: (a) at least one drug reservoir", + "recall": 0.9961240310077519, + "true_md": "Aug. 6, 2009 \n\n19 \n\nUS 2009/0197849 Al \n\npyl]-N,N,N-triethylammonium (DOTMA) in appropriate ratios. Methods for making liposomes using these materials are well known in the art. \n\n[0243] Micelles are known in the art and are comprised of surfactant molecules arranged so that their polar headgroups form an outer spherical shell, while the hydrophobic, hydro› carbon chains are oriented towards the center of the sphere, forming a core. Micelles form in an aqueous solution con› taining surfactant at a high enough concentration so that micelles naturally result. Surfactants useful for forming micelles include, but are not limited to, potassium laurate, sodium octane sulfonate, sodium decane sulfonate, sodium dodecane sulfonate, sodium lauryl sulfate, docusate sodium, decyltrimethylammonium bromide, dodecyltrimethylammo› nium bromide, tetradecyltrimethylammonium bromide, tet› radecyltrimethyl-ammonium chloride, dodecylammonium chloride, polyoxyl 8 dodecyl ether, polyoxyl 12 dodecyl ether, nonoxynol 10 andnonoxynol 30. Micelle formulations can be used in conjunction with the present invention either by incorporation into the reservoir of a topical or transdermal delivery system, or into a formulation to be applied to the body surface. \n\n[0244] Microspheres, similarly, may be incorporated into the present formulations and drug delivery systems. Like liposomes and micelles, microspheres essentially encapsu› late a drug or drug-containing formulation. They are gener› ally, although not necessarily, formed from lipids, preferably charged lipids such as phospholipids. Preparation of lipidic microspheres is well known in the art and described in the pertinent texts and literature. \n\n[0245] Various additives, known to those skilled in the art, may be included in the topical formulations. For example, solvents, including relatively small amounts of alcohol, may be used to solubilize certain drug substances. Other optional additives include opacifiers, antioxidants, fragrance, colo› rant, gelling agents, thickening agents, stabilizers, surfactants and the like. Other agents may also be added, such as antimi› crobial agents, to prevent spoilage upon storage, i.e., to inhibit growth of microbes such as yeasts and molds. Suitable anti› microbial agents are typically selected from the group con› sisting of the methyl and propyl esters of p-hydroxybenzoic acid (i.e., methyl and propyl paraben), sodium benzoate, sor› bic acid, imidurea, and combinations thereof. \n\n[0246] For those drugs having an unusually low rate of permeation through the skin or mucosa! tissue, it may be desirable to include a second permeation enhancer in the formulation in addition to the inorganic or organic base enhancer, although in a preferred embodiment the base enhancer is administered without any other permeation enhancers. Any other enhancers should, like the base enhancer, minimize the possibility of skin damage, irritation, and systemic toxicity. Examples of classes of suitable sec› ondary enhancers ( or \"co-enhancers\") include, but are not limited to, fatty acids, both saturated and unsaturated; fatty alcohols; bile acids; nonionic surfactants, including esters of fatty acids, fatty (long-chain alkyl or alkenyl) esters of mono› hydric alcohols, dials, and polyols, dials and polyols that are both esterified with a fatty acid and substituted with a poly› oxyalkylene, polyoxyalkylene fatty acid esters, polyoxyalky› lene fatty ethers, polyoxyalkylene fatty ethers, and polyglyc› eryl fatty acid esters; amines; amides; N-alkyl› azacycloalkanones and N-alkyl-azacycloalkenones; \n\nhydrocarbon solvents; terpenes; lower alkyl esters; cyclodex› trin enhancers; nitrogen-containing heterocycles; sulfoxides; and urea and its derivatives. \n\n[0247] Specific examples of suitable co-enhancers include ethers such as diethylene glycol monoethyl ether (available commercially as Transcutolfi, Gattefosse SA) and di ethylene glycol monomethyl ether; surfactants such as sodium laurate, sodium lauryl sulfate, cetyltrimethylammonium bromide, benzalkonium chloride, Poloxamer (231, 182, 184), Tween (20, 40, 60, 80) and lecithin; alcohols such as ethanol, pro› panol, octanol, benzyl alcohol, and the like; fatty acids such as !auric acid, oleic acid and valeric acid; fatty acid esters such as isopropyl myristate, isopropyl palmitate, methylpropionate, and ethyl oleate; polyols and esters thereof such as polyeth› ylene glycol, and polyethylene glycol monolaurate; amides and other nitrogenous compounds such as urea, dimethylac› etamide, dimethylformamide, 2-pyrrolidone, l-methyl-2- pyrrolidone, ethanolamine, diethanolamine and triethanola› mine; terpenes; alkanones; and organic acids, particularly citric acid and succinic acid. Azonefi and sulfoxides such as dimethylsulfoxide and decylmethylsulfoxide may also be used, but are less preferred. Percutaneous Penetration Enhancers, eds. Smith et al. (CRC Press, 1995) provides an excellent overview of the field and further information con› cerning possible secondary enhancers for use in conjunction with the present invention. \n\n[0248] The formulation may also contain irritation-mitigat› ing additives to minimize or eliminate the possibility of skin irritation or skin damage resulting from the drug, the base enhancer, or other components of the formulation. Suitable irritation-mitigating additives include, for example: a-toco› pherol; monoamine oxidase inhibitors, particularly phenyl alcohols such as 2-phenyl-1-ethanol; glycerin; salicylic acids and salicylates; ascorbic acids and ascorbates; ionophores such as monensin; amphiphilic amines; ammonium chloride; N-acetylcysteine; cis-urocanic acid; capsaicin; and chloro› quine. The irritant-mitigating additive, if present, may be incorporated into the formulation at a concentration effective to mitigate irritation or skin damage, typically representing not more than about 20 wt %, more typically not more than about 5 wt%, of the formulation. \n\n[0249] The concentration of the active agent in the formu› lation will typically depend upon a variety of factors, includ› ing the disease or condition to be treated, the nature and activity of the active agent, the desired effect, possible adverse reactions, the ability and speed of the active agent to reach its intended target, and other factors within the particu› lar knowledge of the patient and physician. Preferred formu› lations will typically contain on the order of about 0.5-50 wt %, preferably about 5-30 wt%, active agent. \n\n## V. Drug Delivery Systems\n\n[0250] An alternative and preferred method involves the use of a drug delivery system, e.g., a topical or transdermal \"patch,\" wherein the active agent is contained within a lami› nated structure that is to be affixed to the skin. In such a structure, the drug composition is contained in a layer, or \"reservoir,\" underlying an upper backing layer that serves as the outer surface of the device during use. The laminated structure may contain a single reservoir, or it may contain multiple reservoirs. \n\n[0251] Accordingly, another embodiment of the invention is a system for the enhanced topical or transdermal adminis› tration of a drug, comprising: (a) at least one drug reservoir" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8126990567178974, + "doc_id": "db5f1dbbf3e59e1485ac6469b7163c77de4cbc479335fbbc39cd38461fea53c0", + "edit_distance": 0.49714285714285716, + "f1_score": 0.932249322493225, + "meteor": 0.8468661890451058, + "precision": 0.9297297297297298, + "pred_md": "97\n\n98\n\n-continued\n\n[Structural Unit Represented by General Formula (a3-13)]\n\nIn the above formula (a3-13), R is the same as defined above for R in formula (a3-l).\n\nP 03 represents ----C(=O)-Oor -C(=O)-NRn› (wherein Rn represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group of 1 to 5 carbon atoms), and is preferably----C(=O)-O-. The alkyl group for Rn is the same as defined above for the alkyl group for R.\n\nThe linear hydrocarbon group for W 03 preferably contains 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 5 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 1 to 3 carbon atoms.\n\nThe linear hydrocarbon group for W 03 may also have a substituent (a) other than the -OH, -COOR, ----CN, -SO2NH2 and/or ----CONH 2 substituent. Examples of this substituent (a) include an alkyl group of 1 to 5 carbon atoms, an aliphatic cyclic group (monocyclic group or polycyclic group), a fluorine atom, and a fluorinated alkyl group of 1 to 5 carbon atoms. The aliphatic cyclic group (monocyclic group or polycyclic group) for the substituent (a) preferably contains 3 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 5 to 30 carbon atoms, still more preferably 5 to 20 carbon atoms, still more preferably 6 to 15 carbon atoms, and most preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms. Examples include groups in which one or more hydrogen atoms have been removed from a monocycloal› kane, and groups in which one or more hydrogen atoms have been removed from a polycycloalkane such as a bicycloalkane, tricycloalkane or tetracycloalkane. Specific examples of such groups include groups in which one or more hydrogen atoms have been removed from a monocycloalkane such as cyclopentane or cyclohexane, and groups in which one or more hydrogen atoms have been removed from a polycycloalkane such as adamantane, norbomane, isobomane, tricyclo› decane or tetracyclododecane.\n\nFurther, the linear hydrocarbon group for W 03 may have a plurality of the substituents (a), as shown below for a struc› tural unit represented by general formula (a3-13-a), and this plurality of the substituents (a) may be bonded to each other to form a ring.\n\n## [Chemical Formula 43]\n\nIn the formula, R represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group of 1 to 5 carbon atoms or a halogenated alkyl group of 1 to 5 carbon atoms, and each ofRa 1 and Ra 2 independently repre› sents an alkyl group of 1 to 5 carbon atoms, an aliphatic cyclic group (monocyclic group or polycyclic group), a fluorine atom or a fluorinated alkyl group of 1 to 5 carbon atoms. Further, Ra 1 and Ra 2 may be bonded to each other to form a ring. q 0 represents an integer of 1 to 4.\n\nIn formula (a3-13-a), R is the same as defined above for R in formula (a3-l).\n\nThe aliphatic cyclic group (monocyclic group or polycy› clic group) for Ra 1 and Ra 2 is the same as the aliphatic cyclic group (monocyclic group or polycyclic group) described above for the substituent (a).\n\nFurther, R al and R a 2 may be bonded to each other to form a ring. In this case, a cyclic group is formed from R al, R a 2 , and the carbon atom to which both Ra 1 and Ra 2 are bonded. The thus formed cyclic group may be a monocyclic group or a polycyclic group, and specific examples include groups in which one or more hydrogen atoms have been removed from the types of monocycloalkanes and polycycloalkanes men› tioned above within the description of the aliphatic cyclic group (monocyclic group or polycyclic group) for the aforementioned substituent (a).\n\n## q 0 is preferably 1 or 2, and is more preferably 1.\n\nSpecific examples of preferred structural units represented by general formula (a3-13) are shown below. In each of the following formulas, R\"' represents a hydrogen atom, a methy 1 group, or a trifluoromethyl group.\n\n## [Chemical Formula 44]\n\nUS 9,164,380 B2\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n60\n\n65", + "recall": 0.9347826086956522, + "true_md": "P 03 represents ----C(=O)-O- or -C(=O)-NRn› (wherein Rn represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group of $^{30 }$ 1 to 5 carbon atoms), and is preferably----C(=O)-O-. The alkyl group for Rn is the same as defined above for the alkyl group for R. 35 \n\n[Chemical Formula 43] \n\n[Structural Unit Represented by General Formula (a3-13)] \n\nIn the above formula (a3-13), R is the same as defined above for R in formula (a3-l). \n\nThe linear hydrocarbon group for W$^{03 }$preferably contains 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 5 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 1 to 3 carbon atoms. \n\nThe linear hydrocarbon group for W$^{03 }$may also have a substituent (a) other than the -OH, -COOR, ----CN, -SO$_{2}$NH$_{2 }$ and/or ----CONH$_{2 }$ substituent. Examples of this substituent (a) include an alkyl group of 1 to 5 carbon atoms, an aliphatic cyclic group (monocyclic group or polycyclic group), a fluorine atom, and a fluorinated alkyl group of 1 to 5 carbon atoms. The aliphatic cyclic group (monocyclic group or polycyclic group) for the substituent (a) preferably contains 3 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 5 to 30 carbon atoms, still more preferably 5 to 20 carbon atoms, still more preferably 6 to 15 carbon atoms, and most preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms. Examples include groups in which one or more hydrogen atoms have been removed from a monocycloal› kane, and groups in which one or more hydrogen atoms have been removed from a polycycloalkane such as a bicycloal- kane, tricycloalkane or tetracycloalkane. Specific examples of such groups include groups in which one or more hydrogen atoms have been removed from a monocycloalkane such as cyclopentane or cyclohexane, and groups in which one or more hydrogen atoms have been removed from a polycycloal- kane such as adamantane, norbomane, isobomane, tricyclo› decane or tetracyclododecane. \n\nFurther, the linear hydrocarbon group for W$^{03 }$may have a plurality of the substituents (a), as shown below for a struc› tural unit represented by general formula (a3-13-a), and this plurality of the substituents (a) may be bonded to each other to form a ring. \n\n[Chemical Formula 44] \n\nq $^{0 }$is preferably 1 or 2, and is more preferably 1. \n\nFurther, R al and R a $^{2 }$may be bonded to each other to form a ring. In this case, a cyclic group is formed from R al, R a 2 , and the carbon atom to which both Ra $^{1 }$and Ra $^{2 }$are bonded. The thus formed cyclic group may be a monocyclic group or a polycyclic group, and specific examples include groups in which one or more hydrogen atoms have been removed from the types of monocycloalkanes and polycycloalkanes men› tioned above within the description of the aliphatic cyclic group (monocyclic group or polycyclic group) for the afore- mentioned substituent (a). \n\nThe aliphatic cyclic group (monocyclic group or polycy› clic group) for Ra $^{1 }$and Ra $^{2 }$is the same as the aliphatic cyclic group (monocyclic group or polycyclic group) described above for the substituent (a). \n\nIn formula (a3-13-a), R is the same as defined above for R in formula (a3-l). \n\nIn the formula, R represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group of 1 to 5 carbon atoms or a halogenated alkyl group of 1 to 5 carbon atoms, and each ofRa$^{1 }$and Ra $^{2 }$independently repre› sents an alkyl group of 1 to 5 carbon atoms, an aliphatic cyclic group (monocyclic group or polycyclic group), a fluorine atom or a fluorinated alkyl group of 1 to 5 carbon atoms. Further, Ra$^{1 }$and Ra $^{2 }$may be bonded to each other to form a ring. q $^{0 }$represents an integer of 1 to 4. \n\n-continued \n\nUS 9,164,380 B2 \n\n98 \n\n97 \n\nSpecific examples of preferred structural units represented by general formula (a3-13) are shown below. In each of the following formulas, R\"’ represents a hydrogen atom, a methy 1 group, or a trifluoromethyl group." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9694385274464217, + "doc_id": "31d90e2b0c2d22f470d892ccffafbaf4b377b79869bc1a7a33a2a35624388d30", + "edit_distance": 0.045813586097946286, + "f1_score": 0.9878260869565216, + "meteor": 0.979866963092859, + "precision": 0.9964912280701754, + "pred_md": "US 2002/0111024 Al\n\nwith no abrasive, but just a POLITEX pad, the polishing rate is below 100 Angstroms per minute.\n\n[0278] Ammonium Bifluoride\n\n[0279] NH4HF2\n\n[0280] NH4HF2 , an excellent fluoridizer, gave only 40 to 90 Angstroms per minute polishing rates when used at pH 2-5, concentrations of 1 % to 5%, with or without abrasives. Addition of a small amount of hydrogen peroxide and of surfactants, less than 1 % of each, improved the polishing rate a small amount.\n\n[0281] Others\n\n[0282] Secondary oxidizers such as ammonium lactate at 5% and at pH 4-8, 20% periodic acid at pH 12, Gluconic acid at 20% and at pH 2.1, ammonium phosphate at 5% and at pH 4-7, and ammonium hydroxide at 10% and at pH 12.6, showed poor polishing rates.\n\n## Example 5\n\n[0283] Oxide Substrate\n\n[0284] Hydroxylamine, an excellent oxidizer for copper and other substrates, can also be used in a reductive capacity to polish metal oxides. The formulation is beneficially at least 9, preferably between 9 and 12, more preferably between 10 and 11. A formulation of 10% hydroxylamine was prepared and adjusted to pH 10.6. This formulation was added at 50 ml per minute to an 8% slurry of MOY SC abrasive, and the formulation was applied to a 3\" BPSG substrate with a IC 1000 pad at 33 rpm and 2 psi pressure. The polishing rate was greater than 380 Angstroms per minute. The formulation was allowed to age 21 days. It was found to have a pH of 10.7, and the polishing rate was above 340 Angstroms per minute.\n\n[0285] A formulation of 10% hydroxylamine was pre› pared and adjusted to pH 10.6. This formulation was added at 50 ml per minute to an 8% slurry of MOY SC abrasive, and the formulation was applied to a 3\" BPSG substrate with a POLITEX pad at 33 rpm and 2 psi pressure. The polishing rate was 558 Angstroms per minute.\n\n[0286] Hydroxylamine nitrate at 0.5% with 0.02% Hydroxylamine at pH 4 was found to have a polishing rate of only 37 Angstroms per minute when added at 50 ml per minute to an 2.5% slurry of MOY SC abrasive and the formulation applied to a 3\" BPSG substrate with a IC 1000 pad at 33 rpm and 2 psi pressure.\n\n[0287] Periodic acid at 3% and pH 6.5 was found to have a polishing rate of only 9 Angstroms per minute when added to a 2.5% slurry of MOY SC abrasive and the formulation applied to a 3\" BPSG substrate with a IC 1000 pad at 33 rpm and 2 psi pressure.\n\n[0288] High polishing rates, for example greater than 400 Angstroms per minute, were observer with potassium hydroxide and with ammonium biflouride in water.\n\n## Example 6\n\n## Aluminum Substrate\n\n[0289] Ammonium Persulfate\n\n[0290] A variety of Ammonium persulfate formulations were tested on aluminum wafers.\n\n23\n\nAug. 15,2002\n\n[0291] Tests were run with Ammonium persulfate com› positions of 2%, added at 50 ml per minute, using a MoycoMC™ 1 % formulation at 33 RPM at 2 psi force with a IClO00™ pad on a 3 inch IWS wafer. The polishing rate at pH 4 was 425 Nminute, while at pH 2 the rate was only 365 Nminute.\n\n[0292] The Ammonium persulfate composition is prefer› ably between about about 0.5 to 10%, preferably between 0.5 to 6%, more preferably between about 1 to 4%, and most preferably about 2%. The MoycoMC™ formulation is pref› erably between about 0.1 to 4%, and more preferably about 1%.\n\n[0293] Testing was also performed on 3\" IWS aluminum wafers with Politex™ pads at about 2 psi at 33 RPM. In a first formulation, the slurry included 20 ml/minute of 5% Moyco™ abrasive in 90 ml/minute 5% Ammonium persul› fate. The pH was held at 5.9. The polishing rate was a very low 1 Nminute. This result was confirmed in a duplicate test.\n\n[0294] In a second formulation, the slurry included 20 ml/minute of 5% alumina abrasive in 20 ml/minute 5% Ammonium persulfate. The pH was held at 4.5. The pol› ishing rate on a 3\" EMF substrate was a very high 4280 Nminute.\n\n[0295] According to the first formulation, the Ammonium persulfate is delivered at a flow rate of between about 50 to 150 ml/min., more preferably between about 80 to 120 ml/min., and most preferably about 90 ml/min. According to the second formulation, the Ammonium persulfate is deliv› ered at a flow rate of between about 5 to 50 ml/min., more preferably between about 10 to 40 ml/min., and most preferably about 20 ml/min. The MoycoMC™ abrasive formulation is preferably between about 0.5 to 10 wt. %, more preferably between about 2 to 8 wt. %, and most preferably about 5 wt. %, and is delivered at a flow rate of between about 5 to 50 ml/min., more preferably between about 10 to 40 ml/min., and most preferably about 20 ml/min. The alumina formulation is preferably between about 0.5 to 10%, more preferably between about 2 to 8%, and most preferably about 5%, and is delivered at a flow rate of between about 5 to 50 ml/min., more preferably between about 10 to 40 ml/min., and most preferably about 20 ml/min.\n\n[0296] A 5% Ammonium persulfate solution at pH of 3.4 that was added at 20 ml/minute gave an aluminum polishing rate of 105 Nminute on a 3 inch IWS wafer, polished with a Polytex™ pad at 33 RPM at 2 psi. A 10% Ammonium persulfate solution, with all other parameters remaining the same, gave a polishing rate of 23 Nminute on a 3 inch EMF wafer\n\n[0297] Certain organic acids can enhance/retard polishing rates. In addition to citric acid, oxalic acid and gluconic acid were tested here. Oxalic acid added at 1 % to a 10% Ammonium persulfate solution at 20 ml and at pH 1.4 using a Polytex™ pad on a 3 inch IWS wafer at 33 RPM and 2 psi, gave a polishing rate of 23 Nminute. Gluconic acid added at 20% to a 10% Ammonium persulfate solution at 20 ml and at pH 1.4 using a Polytex™ pad on a 3 inch IWS wafer at 33 RPM and 2 psi, gave a polishing rate of only 6.8 Nminute.\n\n[0298] The Ammonium persulfate concentration is pref› erably between about 2 to 20%, more preferably between", + "recall": 0.9793103448275862, + "true_md": "23 \n\nAug. 15,2002 \n\nUS 2002/0111024 Al \n\nwith no abrasive, but just a POLITEX pad, the polishing rate is below 100 Angstroms per minute. \n\n[0278] Ammonium Bifluoride \n\n[0279] NH$_{4}$HF$_{2 }$\n\n[0280] NH$_{4}$HF$_{2}$ , an excellent fluoridizer, gave only 40 to 90 Angstroms per minute polishing rates when used at pH 2-5, concentrations of 1 % to 5%, with or without abrasives. Addition of a small amount of hydrogen peroxide and of surfactants, less than 1 % of each, improved the polishing rate a small amount. \n\n[0281] Others \n\n[0282] Secondary oxidizers such as ammonium lactate at 5% and at pH 4-8, 20% periodic acid at pH 12, Gluconic acid at 20% and at pH 2.1, ammonium phosphate at 5% and at pH 4-7, and ammonium hydroxide at 10% and at pH 12.6, showed poor polishing rates. \n\n[0283] Oxide Substrate \n\n[0284] Hydroxylamine, an excellent oxidizer for copper and other substrates, can also be used in a reductive capacity to polish metal oxides. The formulation is beneficially at least 9, preferably between 9 and 12, more preferably between 10 and 11. A formulation of 10% hydroxylamine was prepared and adjusted to pH 10.6. This formulation was added at 50 ml per minute to an 8% slurry of MOY SC abrasive, and the formulation was applied to a 3\" BPSG substrate with a IC 1000 pad at 33 rpm and 2 psi pressure. The polishing rate was greater than 380 Angstroms per minute. The formulation was allowed to age 21 days. It was found to have a pH of 10.7, and the polishing rate was above 340 Angstroms per minute. \n\n[0285] A formulation of 10% hydroxylamine was pre› pared and adjusted to pH 10.6. This formulation was added at 50 ml per minute to an 8% slurry of MOY SC abrasive, and the formulation was applied to a 3\" BPSG substrate with a POLITEX pad at 33 rpm and 2 psi pressure. The polishing rate was 558 Angstroms per minute. \n\n[0286] Hydroxylamine nitrate at 0.5% with 0.02% Hydroxylamine at pH 4 was found to have a polishing rate of only 37 Angstroms per minute when added at 50 ml per minute to an 2.5% slurry of MOY SC abrasive and the formulation applied to a 3\" BPSG substrate with a IC 1000 pad at 33 rpm and 2 psi pressure. \n\n[0287] Periodic acid at 3% and pH 6.5 was found to have a polishing rate of only 9 Angstroms per minute when added to a 2.5% slurry of MOY SC abrasive and the formulation applied to a 3\" BPSG substrate with a IC 1000 pad at 33 rpm and 2 psi pressure. \n\n[0288] High polishing rates, for example greater than 400 Angstroms per minute, were observer with potassium hydroxide and with ammonium biflouride in water. \n\n[0289] Ammonium Persulfate \n\n[0290] A variety of Ammonium persulfate formulations were tested on aluminum wafers. \n\n[0291] Tests were run with Ammonium persulfate com› positions of 2%, added at 50 ml per minute, using a MoycoMC™ 1 % formulation at 33 RPM at 2 psi force with a IClO00™ pad on a 3 inch IWS wafer. The polishing rate at pH 4 was 425 Nminute, while at pH 2 the rate was only 365 Nminute. \n\n[0292] The Ammonium persulfate composition is prefer› ably between about about 0.5 to 10%, preferably between 0.5 to 6%, more preferably between about 1 to 4%, and most preferably about 2%. The MoycoMC™ formulation is pref› erably between about 0.1 to 4%, and more preferably about 1%. \n\n[0293] Testing was also performed on 3\" IWS aluminum wafers with Politex™ pads at about 2 psi at 33 RPM. In a first formulation, the slurry included 20 ml/minute of 5% Moyco™ abrasive in 90 ml/minute 5% Ammonium persul› fate. The pH was held at 5.9. The polishing rate was a very low 1 Nminute. This result was confirmed in a duplicate test. \n\n[0294] In a second formulation, the slurry included 20 ml/minute of 5% alumina abrasive in 20 ml/minute 5% Ammonium persulfate. The pH was held at 4.5. The pol› ishing rate on a 3\" EMF substrate was a very high 4280 Nminute. \n\n[0295] According to the first formulation, the Ammonium persulfate is delivered at a flow rate of between about 50 to 150 ml/min., more preferably between about 80 to 120 ml/min., and most preferably about 90 ml/min. According to the second formulation, the Ammonium persulfate is deliv› ered at a flow rate of between about 5 to 50 ml/min., more preferably between about 10 to 40 ml/min., and most preferably about 20 ml/min. The MoycoMC™ abrasive formulation is preferably between about 0.5 to 10 wt. %, more preferably between about 2 to 8 wt. %, and most preferably about 5 wt. %, and is delivered at a flow rate of between about 5 to 50 ml/min., more preferably between about 10 to 40 ml/min., and most preferably about 20 ml/min. The alumina formulation is preferably between about 0.5 to 10%, more preferably between about 2 to 8%, and most preferably about 5%, and is delivered at a flow rate of between about 5 to 50 ml/min., more preferably between about 10 to 40 ml/min., and most preferably about 20 ml/min. \n\n[0296] A 5% Ammonium persulfate solution at pH of 3.4 that was added at 20 ml/minute gave an aluminum polishing rate of 105 Nminute on a 3 inch IWS wafer, polished with a Polytex™ pad at 33 RPM at 2 psi. A 10% Ammonium persulfate solution, with all other parameters remaining the same, gave a polishing rate of 23 Nminute on a 3 inch EMF wafer \n\n[0297] Certain organic acids can enhance/retard polishing rates. In addition to citric acid, oxalic acid and gluconic acid were tested here. Oxalic acid added at 1 % to a 10% Ammonium persulfate solution at 20 ml and at pH 1.4 using a Polytex™ pad on a 3 inch IWS wafer at 33 RPM and 2 psi, gave a polishing rate of 23 Nminute. Gluconic acid added at 20% to a 10% Ammonium persulfate solution at 20 ml and at pH 1.4 using a Polytex™ pad on a 3 inch IWS wafer at 33 RPM and 2 psi, gave a polishing rate of only 6.8 Nminute. \n\n[0298] The Ammonium persulfate concentration is pref› erably between about 2 to 20%, more preferably between \n\n## Example 6\n\n## Aluminum Substrate\n\n## Example 5" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9363858849855172, + "doc_id": "cfe482d4e853cf9227e2df9743eacbda6b5748e5f7c01ecf10eb0042284105ad", + "edit_distance": 0.7389418907198613, + "f1_score": 0.9548387096774192, + "meteor": 0.717557138799462, + "precision": 0.940677966101695, + "pred_md": "US 9,164,380 B2\n\n59\n\nhydroxyl group is substituted with an acid-dissociable group or a substituent containing an acid-dissociable group.\n\nExamples of the acid-dissociable group that substitutes the hydrogen atom of the hydroxyl group include the same acid› dissociable groups as those described above, and of these, a tertiary alkyl ester-type acid-dissociable group or an acetal› type acid-dissociable group is preferable, and an acetal-type acid-dissociable group is more preferable.\n\nExamples of the substituent containing an acid-dissociable group include groups composed of an acid-dissociable group and a divalent linking group. Examples of this divalent link› ing group include the same divalent linking groups as those mentioned above for Y 2 in formula (al-3), and a group in which the terminal structure on the acid-dissociable groupside of the group is a carbonyloxy group is particularly desir› able. In such a case, the acid-dissociable group is preferably bonded to the oxygen atom (---0-) of the carbonyloxy group.\n\n60\n\ncarbon atoms, px represents an integer of 1 to 3 and qx represents an integer of O to 4, provided that px+qx is an integer of 1 to 5. Each of the px xc groups independently represents a hydrogen atom, an acid-dissociable group or a substituent containing an acid-dissociable group, provided that at least one xc group represents an acid-dissociable group or a substituent containing an acid-dissociable group. Each of the qx Rc groups independently represents a halogen atom, an alkyl group of 1 to 5 carbon atoms or a halogenated alkyl group of 1 to 5 carbon atoms.\n\nIn formula (al2-1), R is the same as defined above.\n\nExamples of the acid-dissociable group and the substituent containing an acid-dissociable group for xc include the same groups as those mentioned above.\n\npx represents an integer of 1 to 3, and is preferably 1.\n\nWhen px represents 2 or 3, the plurality ofXc groups in the formula may be the same or different. For example, one of the xc groups may be an acid-dissociable group or a substituent containing an acid-dissociable group, and the other one or two xc groups may be hydrogen atoms. Similarly, when qx represents an integer of 2 to 4, the plurality of Rc groups may be the same or different.\n\nThere are no particular limitations on the bonding position(s) of the oxc group(s) to the benzene ring in the formula. When px represents 1, the OXc group is preferably bonded to the para-position ( 4th position) relative to the posi› tion to which the a-position carbon atom (the carbon atom bonded to R) is bonded. When px represents an integer of 2 or greater, any arbitrary combination of bonding positions may be used.\n\nExamples of the halogen atom for Rc include a fluorine atom, chlorine atom, bromine atom and iodine atom, and a fluorine atom is particularly desirable.\n\nExamples of the alkyl group and halogenated alkyl group for Rc include the same groups as those mentioned above for the alkyl group and halogenated alkyl group for R.\n\n## {Structural Unit (a13)}\n\nThe structural unit (a13) is a structural unit derived from a vinyl(hydroxynaphthalene) in which the hydrogen atom bonded to the carbon atom on the a-position may be substi› tuted with a substituent, in which the hydrogen atoms bonded to the naphthalene ring may be substituted with a substituent other than a hydroxyl group, and in which the hydrogen atom of the hydroxyl group is substituted with an acid-dissociable group or a substituent containing an acid-dissociable group.\n\nIn the structural unit (a13), examples of the acid-disso› ciable group or substituent containing an acid-dissociable group that substitutes the hydrogen atom of the hydroxyl group include the same groups and substituents as those men› tioned above within the description of the structural unit (a12).\n\nThere are no particular limitations on the \"substituent other than a hydroxyl group\" that may substitute a hydrogen atom bonded to the naphthalene ring, and examples include a halo› gen atom, an alkyl group ofl to 5 carbon atoms, a halogenated alkyl group of 1 to 5 carbon atoms, and a carboxyl group. Examples of the halogen atom include a fluorine atom, chlo› rine atom, bromine atom and iodine atom, and a fluorine atom is particularly desirable.\n\n5\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\nAs the substituent containing an acid-dissociable group, groups represented by a formula R 11 '---0-C(=O)-and groups represented by a formula R 11 '-O----C(=O)-R 12 '› are preferable. In these formulas, R 11 ' represents an acid› dissociable group, and R 12 ' represents a linear or branched 25 alkylene group.\n\nThe acid-dissociable group for R 11 ' is preferably a tertiary alkyl ester-type acid-dissociable group or an acetal-type acid› dissociable group, and is more preferably a tertiary alkyl ester-type acid-dissociable group. Preferred examples of the tertiary alkyl ester-type acid-dissociable group include the aforementioned aliphatic branched acid-dissociable groups represented by the formula ----C(R 71 )(R 72 )(R 73 ), groups rep› resented by formulas (1-1) to (1-9), and groups represented by formulas (2-1) to (2-6).\n\nExamples of the alkylene group for R 12 ' include a methyl› ene group, ethylene group, trimethylene group, tetramethyl› ene group and 1, 1-dimethy lethy lene group. A linear alky lene group is preferable as R 12 '.\n\nThere are no particular limitations on the \"substituent other than a hydroxyl group\" that may substitute a hydrogen atom bonded to the benzene ring, and examples include a halogen atom, an alkyl group of 1 to 5 carbon atoms, a halogenated alkyl group of 1 to 5 carbon atoms, and a carboxyl group. Examples of the halogen atom include a fluorine atom, chlo› rine atom, bromine atom and iodine atom, and a fluorine atom is particularly desirable.\n\nThe structural unit (a12) is preferably a structural unit represented by general formula (al2-1) shown below.\n\n[Chemical Formula 20]\n\n[Chemical Formula 20]\n\nIn the formula, R represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group of 1 to 5 carbon atoms or a halogenated alkyl group of 1 to 5\n\n30\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n60\n\n65", + "recall": 0.9694323144104804, + "true_md": "The structural unit (a12) is preferably a structural unit 50 represented by general formula (al2-1) shown below. \n\nhydroxyl group is substituted with an acid-dissociable group or a substituent containing an acid-dissociable group. \n\nExamples of the acid-dissociable group that substitutes the hydrogen atom of the hydroxyl group include the same acid› dissociable groups as those described above, and of these, a tertiary alkyl ester-type acid-dissociable group or an acetal› type acid-dissociable group is preferable, and an acetal-type acid-dissociable group is more preferable. \n\nExamples of the substituent containing an acid-dissociable group include groups composed of an acid-dissociable group and a divalent linking group. Examples of this divalent link› ing group include the same divalent linking groups as those mentioned above for Y 2 in formula (al-3), and a group in which the terminal structure on the acid-dissociable group- side of the group is a carbonyloxy group is particularly desir› able. In such a case, the acid-dissociable group is preferably bonded to the oxygen atom (---0-) of the carbonyloxy group. \n\nAs the substituent containing an acid-dissociable group, groups represented by a formula R$^{11}$’---0-C(=O)-and groups represented by a formula R$^{11}$’-O----C(=O)-R 12 ’› are preferable. In these formulas, R 11 ’ represents an acid› dissociable group, and R 12 ’ represents a linear or branched alkylene group. \n\nThe acid-dissociable group for R 11 ’ is preferably a tertiary alkyl ester-type acid-dissociable group or an acetal-type acid› dissociable group, and is more preferably a tertiary alkyl ester-type acid-dissociable group. Preferred examples of the tertiary alkyl ester-type acid-dissociable group include the aforementioned aliphatic branched acid-dissociable groups represented by the formula ----C(R$^{71 }$)(R$^{72}$)(R 73 ), groups rep› resented by formulas (1-1) to (1-9), and groups represented by formulas (2-1) to (2-6). \n\nExamples of the alkylene group for R 12 ’ include a methyl› ene group, ethylene group, trimethylene group, tetramethyl› ene group and 1, 1-dimethy lethy lene group. A linear alky lene group is preferable as R 12 ’. \n\nThere are no particular limitations on the \"substituent other than a hydroxyl group\" that may substitute a hydrogen atom bonded to the benzene ring, and examples include a halogen atom, an alkyl group of 1 to 5 carbon atoms, a halogenated alkyl group of 1 to 5 carbon atoms, and a carboxyl group. Examples of the halogen atom include a fluorine atom, chlo› rine atom, bromine atom and iodine atom, and a fluorine atom is particularly desirable. \n\nIn the formula, R represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group of 1 to 5 carbon atoms or a halogenated alkyl group of 1 to 5 \n\nThere are no particular limitations on the \"substituent other than a hydroxyl group\" that may substitute a hydrogen atom bonded to the naphthalene ring, and examples include a halo› gen atom, an alkyl group ofl to 5 carbon atoms, a halogenated alkyl group of 1 to 5 carbon atoms, and a carboxyl group. Examples of the halogen atom include a fluorine atom, chlo› rine atom, bromine atom and iodine atom, and a fluorine atom is particularly desirable. \n\nIn the structural unit (a13), examples of the acid-disso› ciable group or substituent containing an acid-dissociable group that substitutes the hydrogen atom of the hydroxyl group include the same groups and substituents as those men› tioned above within the description of the structural unit (a12). \n\nThe structural unit (a13) is a structural unit derived from a vinyl(hydroxynaphthalene) in which the hydrogen atom bonded to the carbon atom on the a-position may be substi› tuted with a substituent, in which the hydrogen atoms bonded to the naphthalene ring may be substituted with a substituent other than a hydroxyl group, and in which the hydrogen atom of the hydroxyl group is substituted with an acid-dissociable group or a substituent containing an acid-dissociable group. \n\nExamples of the alkyl group and halogenated alkyl group for Rc include the same groups as those mentioned above for the alkyl group and halogenated alkyl group for R. {Structural Unit (a13)} \n\nExamples of the halogen atom for Rc include a fluorine atom, chlorine atom, bromine atom and iodine atom, and a fluorine atom is particularly desirable. \n\nThere are no particular limitations on the bonding position(s) of the oxc group(s) to the benzene ring in the formula. When px represents 1, the OXc group is preferably bonded to the para-position ( 4th position) relative to the posi› tion to which the a-position carbon atom (the carbon atom bonded to R) is bonded. When px represents an integer of 2 or greater, any arbitrary combination of bonding positions may be used. \n\nWhen px represents 2 or 3, the plurality ofXc groups in the formula may be the same or different. For example, one of the xc groups may be an acid-dissociable group or a substituent containing an acid-dissociable group, and the other one or two xc groups may be hydrogen atoms. Similarly, when qx represents an integer of 2 to 4, the plurality of Rc groups may be the same or different. \n\npx represents an integer of 1 to 3, and is preferably 1. \n\nIn formula (al2-1), R is the same as defined above. \n\nExamples of the acid-dissociable group and the substituent containing an acid-dissociable group for xc include the same groups as those mentioned above. \n\ncarbon atoms, px represents an integer of 1 to 3 and qx represents an integer of O to 4, provided that px+qx is an integer of 1 to 5. Each of the px xc groups independently represents a hydrogen atom, an acid-dissociable group or a substituent containing an acid-dissociable group, provided that at least one xc group represents an acid-dissociable group or a substituent containing an acid-dissociable group. Each of the qx Rc groups independently represents a halogen atom, an alkyl group of 1 to 5 carbon atoms or a halogenated alkyl group of 1 to 5 carbon atoms. \n\nUS 9,164,380 B2 \n\n60 \n\n59 \n\n[Chemical Formula 20]" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.569332146608641, + "doc_id": "b9e84b2284e955ea83b65bb168bdb717b6e940969a241eaa12aa62887cff9d0b", + "edit_distance": 0.3125, + "f1_score": 0.8826815642458102, + "meteor": 0.730953730994152, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "US 9,840,656 B2\n\nPage 2\n\n## OTHER PUBLICATIONS\n\nBall et al. Introduction to Chemistry0 Chapter 15 (2012).* \"PCT International Search Report and Written Opinion\", dated Jun. 23, 2014, Appl No. PCT/US2013/060885, \"Latent Curing Agent Compatible with Low pH Frac Fluids,\" filed Sep. 20, 2013, 10 pgs. Methods for Enhancing and Maintaining Fracture Conductivity After Fracturing Shale Formations without Proppant Placement, Appl No. PCT/US2013/060876, filed Sep. 20, 2013, 30 pgs. Methods for Etching Fractures and Microfractures in Shale Forma› tions, Appl No. PCT/US2013/060904, filed Sep. 20, 2013, 31 pgs.\n\n## * cited by examiner", + "recall": 0.79, + "true_md": "US 9,840,656 B2 \n\nPage 2 \n\n- (51) Int. Cl. \n\n- (52) U.S. Cl. CPC ................ C09K 8/887 (2013.01); C09K 8/90 (2013.01); C09K 8192 (2013.01); E21B 431267 (2013.01) \n\n## (56) References Cited\n\n## U.S. PATENT DOCUMENTS\n\n## OTHER PUBLICATIONS\n\nBall et al. Introduction to Chemistry0 Chapter 15 (2012).* \n\n\"PCT International Search Report and Written Opinion\", dated Jun. 23, 2014, Appl No. PCT/US2013/060885, \"Latent Curing Agent Compatible with Low pH Frac Fluids,\" filed Sep. 20, 2013, 10 pgs. Methods for Enhancing and Maintaining Fracture Conductivity After Fracturing Shale Formations without Proppant Placement, Appl No. PCT/US2013/060876, filed Sep. 20, 2013, 30 pgs. \n\nMethods for Etching Fractures and Microfractures in Shale Forma› tions, Appl No. PCT/US2013/060904, filed Sep. 20, 2013, 31 pgs. \n\n* cited by examiner" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9132558382066333, + "doc_id": "46d88c57c82eab1abd010272d56eb8744861bd754fb7e78106f83e5ce32ea0e5", + "edit_distance": 0.8971141781681304, + "f1_score": 0.9891472868217053, + "meteor": 0.6804336885437056, + "precision": 0.996875, + "pred_md": "US 2020/0352177 Al\n\nTABLE XIII-continued\n\n[0228] It will be seen that the amount of carbon dioxide evolved in the reaction between SAPP and bicarbonate does not approach the 100% of theoretical, which the currently accepted theory predicts, but approximates to the 75% predicted by our proposed mechanism.\n\n[0229] Addition of calcium chloride, according to the present invention, results in the evolution of amounts of carbon dioxide close to 100%. This supports our theory that the second hydrogen atom of the SAPP molecule is not sufficiently active to react with bicarbonate, but is activated by the addition of a Precipitant, e.g. by precipitation of calcium pyrophosphate accompanied by release of an equivalent amount of hydrochloric acid.\n\n## EXAMPLES 46-48\n\n[0230] To determine the effect of calcium and magnesium salts in pyrophosphate-based baking powders on the pH of cakes obtained from batter, a series of batches of celebration cakes was prepared from a batter having the following composition:\n\nTABLE XIV\n\n[0231] The following baking powder formulations were tested:\n\n[0232] A. Control:-3.92 g soda (sodium bicarbonate), 5.37 g SAPP [0233] B. Control+citric acid:-3.0 g soda, 4.1 g SAPP, 2.5 g citric acid [0234] C. SAPP+calcium:-3.0 g soda, 4.8 g SAPP, 4 g CaCl 2 ), 1.6 g SAPP 10 [0235] D. SAPP+magnesium:-3.0 g soda, 4.8 g SAPP, 8.9 g MgSO 4 .7H2 O, 1.6 g SAPPl0 2 ),\n\n[0236] E. MCP+calcium:-3.0 g soda, 3.6 g CaC1 3.92 g MCPa\n\n[0237] Batches of cakes were prepared using each of the above leavening systems and the heights and pH were compared as set out in the following table.\n\n13\n\nNov. 12, 2020\n\nTABLE XV\n\n[0238] The control, system (A), was a typical commercial SAPP formulation, which, when used in the normal stoi› chiometric proportion gives a pH far in excess of that required to allow the effective use of preservatives. For example, one of the commonest preservatives in baking, potassium sorbate, is ineffective above pH 6.5 and requires a pH of about 5.5 for optimum effectiveness.\n\n[0239] Addition of citric acid to the control, system (B), gave a pH below 6, but at the expense of leavening, which was below commercially acceptable standards.\n\n[0240] Addition of magnesium according to the invention (Example 45) gave a pH below 6, without significant loss of leavening, but best results were obtained using calcium according to the invention, (Example 46), which gave both a low pH and improved leavening.\n\n[0241] MCP with calcium according to the invention (Ex› ample 47) achieved the lowest pH, very close to the opti› mum, but at the expense of some loss of leavening.\n\n## EXAMPLES 49 and 50\n\n[0242] Example 1 was repeated, using for comparison two further Acidulant-free examples of the invention containing, respectively, an excess of 31 % and 122% calcium chloride over the stoichiometric amount. In each case the amount of sodium bicarbonate was 5.11 g. The results are set out in Table XVI.\n\nTABLE XVI\n\n[0243] All products were free from off flavours and exces› sive discolouration of the crumb.\n\n## EXAMPLE 51\n\n[0244] To test the applicability of the invention in fried products, the Acidulant free leavening system of Example 1 was added to a cake donut recipe and compared with a commercial SAPP based leavening system. The control gave a product with a pH of 7.81. Despite having a pH of 8.58, the product of the invention was similar in appearance and taste to the control.\n\n## EXAMPLES 52 and 53\n\n[0245] It was noted that in certain muffin recipes the Acidulate-free leavening system according to Example 1 of the invention gave a paler crust than usually observed with conventional acid base leavening systems and the sodium chloride formed gave the product an undesirably salty taste.\n\n[0246] To remedy the first of these defects 10% of the sucrose in the recipe was replaced by dextrose and to avoid", + "recall": 0.9815384615384616, + "true_md": "US 2020/0352177 Al \n\n13 \n\nNov. 12, 2020 \n\nTABLE XIII-continued \n\nTABLE XV \n\nTABLE XIV \n\nTABLE XVI \n\n## EXAMPLES 52 and 53\n\n## EXAMPLE 51\n\n## EXAMPLES 49 and 50\n\n## EXAMPLES 46-48\n\n[0246] To remedy the first of these defects 10% of the sucrose in the recipe was replaced by dextrose and to avoid \n\n[0245] It was noted that in certain muffin recipes the Acidulate-free leavening system according to Example 1 of the invention gave a paler crust than usually observed with conventional acid base leavening systems and the sodium chloride formed gave the product an undesirably salty taste. \n\n[0237] Batches of cakes were prepared using each of the above leavening systems and the heights and pH were compared as set out in the following table. \n\n[0231] The following baking powder formulations were tested: \n\n[0244] To test the applicability of the invention in fried products, the Acidulant free leavening system of Example 1 was added to a cake donut recipe and compared with a commercial SAPP based leavening system. The control gave a product with a pH of 7.81. Despite having a pH of 8.58, the product of the invention was similar in appearance and taste to the control. \n\n[0243] All products were free from off flavours and exces› sive discolouration of the crumb. \n\n[0242] Example 1 was repeated, using for comparison two further Acidulant-free examples of the invention containing, respectively, an excess of 31 % and 122% calcium chloride over the stoichiometric amount. In each case the amount of sodium bicarbonate was 5.11 g. The results are set out in Table XVI. \n\n[0230] To determine the effect of calcium and magnesium salts in pyrophosphate-based baking powders on the pH of cakes obtained from batter, a series of batches of celebration cakes was prepared from a batter having the following composition: \n\n[0241] MCP with calcium according to the invention (Ex› ample 47) achieved the lowest pH, very close to the opti› mum, but at the expense of some loss of leavening. \n\n[0240] Addition of magnesium according to the invention (Example 45) gave a pH below 6, without significant loss of leavening, but best results were obtained using calcium according to the invention, (Example 46), which gave both a low pH and improved leavening. \n\n[0239] Addition of citric acid to the control, system (B), gave a pH below 6, but at the expense of leavening, which was below commercially acceptable standards. \n\n[0238] The control, system (A), was a typical commercial SAPP formulation, which, when used in the normal stoi› chiometric proportion gives a pH far in excess of that required to allow the effective use of preservatives. For example, one of the commonest preservatives in baking, potassium sorbate, is ineffective above pH 6.5 and requires a pH of about 5.5 for optimum effectiveness. \n\n[0229] Addition of calcium chloride, according to the present invention, results in the evolution of amounts of carbon dioxide close to 100%. This supports our theory that the second hydrogen atom of the SAPP molecule is not sufficiently active to react with bicarbonate, but is activated by the addition of a Precipitant, e.g. by precipitation of calcium pyrophosphate accompanied by release of an equivalent amount of hydrochloric acid. \n\n[0228] It will be seen that the amount of carbon dioxide evolved in the reaction between SAPP and bicarbonate does not approach the 100% of theoretical, which the currently accepted theory predicts, but approximates to the 75% predicted by our proposed mechanism. \n\n- [0232] A. Control:-3.92 g soda (sodium bicarbonate), 5.37 g SAPP \n\n- [0233] B. Control+citric acid:-3.0 g soda, 4.1 g SAPP, 2.5 g citric acid \n\n- [0234] C. SAPP+calcium:-3.0 g soda, 4.8 g SAPP, 4 g CaCl$_{2}$ ), 1.6 g SAPP 10 \n\n- [0235] D. SAPP+magnesium:-3.0 g soda, 4.8 g SAPP, 8.9 g MgSO$_{4}$ .7H$_{2}$O, 1.6 g SAPPl0 \n\n- [0236] E. MCP+calcium:-3.0 g soda, 3.6 g CaC1$_{2}$ ), 3.92 g MCPa" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7083116115647757, + "doc_id": "c4497cefec45ce9e89de802606b7010260bf4e402a8d6e6e7cb5af987ba66669", + "edit_distance": 0.72, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9541240318842218, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "U.S. Patent\n\nDec. 12, 2017\n\nSheet 2 of 2\n\nUS 9,840,656 B2\n\nN ■ c., LL.\n\nN ■ c., LL.", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "N ■ c., LL. \n\nU.S. Patent \n\nDec. 12, 2017 \n\nSheet 2 of 2 \n\nUS 9,840,656 B2" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8435821154037829, + "doc_id": "a23c1ca1db4526c3e91a2d06cb027a08ff293fdf9ee7df089d88efafa184e820", + "edit_distance": 0.6885397412199631, + "f1_score": 0.9087452471482891, + "meteor": 0.7426646214710585, + "precision": 0.8385964912280702, + "pred_md": "5,648,520\n\n21\n\nStream (D) which is washed and liberated from acid esters is liberated from xylene and some of the aniline in a first distillation stage (7.1). Some of the water is separated mechanically from the distillate stream (E) and is added to stream (X).\n\nIn the second distillation stage (7 .2), the remaining aniline (stream F) is separated from the bottom phase of (7.1). The distillation bottoms remaining from stage (7.2) are consti› tuted by a polyamine mixture which is collected in the tank (10) at a rate of 0.704 kg/h as stream (G).\n\nThe distillate streams (E) and (F) together with a part\n\nvolume of 0.430 kg/h from stream (N) form the stream (B). The aqueous phase (H) leaving the extraction stage ( 4) has the following average composition:\n\nStream (H) (6.341 kgih)\n\n14.8% polyary !amine\n\n22.6% aniline\n\n6.2% hydrochloric acid\n\n56.4% water.\n\nAfter admixing stream (Y) (0.908 kg/h) the resulting aqueous phase is extracted in countercurrent with an organic phase (stream J) in an extractor (5) acting in multi-stage manner at 90° C.\n\nThe organic phase (stream L) thus resulting and leaving the extraction stage (5) has the following composition:\n\nStream\n\n## (L)\n\n( 4.940 kgih)\n\n18.1 % polyarylamine\n\n39.0% aniline\n\n40.2% xylene\n\n;:;0.1 % hydrochloric acid\n\n;:; 1.6% water.\n\nStream (L) is washed in the washing stage (8.0) with water (0.600 kg/h) as part of stream (X). The washing water is supplied to the aqueous stream (H) by way of stream (Y).\n\nFor safety, the washed stream (L) is washed with dilute sodium hydroxide. The aqueous phase is disposed of as effluent.\n\nThe stream (L) which is washed and liberated from acid esters is then separated in a first distillation stage (8.1) into a first distillate fraction (M) which comprises virtually xylene with an aniline content of ~ 1 % [Stream (M) (2.033 kg/h)], and a distillation bottom product which in a second distillation step is separated into a second distillate fraction (N) which comprises virtually aniline [Stream (N) (1.953 kg/h)] and a distillation residue (0) comprising polyamine [Stream (0) (0.896 kg/h)].\n\nThe polyamine fraction (0) is collected in the tank (11) as a second part product.\n\nThe aqueous phase (K) leaving the extractor (5) has the following average composition\n\nStream (K)\n\n(6.509 kgih)\n\n0.6% polyary!amine 25.3% aniline 6.1 % hydrochloric acid 68.0% water\n\nand is guided towards an organic phase (P) in a further extractor (6) acting in multi-stage manner at 90° C. (P) is in\n\n22\n\nthe present case identical as to volume and composition to the first distillate fraction (M) from distillation stage (8.1).\n\nIn this procedure the stream (R) results as the organic phase\n\nStream\n\n(R)\n\n(2.677 kg/h)\n\n;:;o.2% polyarylamine\n\n24.8% aniline\n\n74.2% xylene\n\n<l.0% water.\n\nThe stream (J) is formed from stream (R) by admixing a partial stream of (N) (1,523 kg/h).\n\nThe aqueous phase (Q) resulting in (6) has the following average composition:\n\nStream (Q) (5.865 kgih)\n\n0.6% polyarylamine\n\n17.1% aniline\n\n6.8% hydrochloric acid\n\n75.5% water.\n\nIn a subsequent distillation stage (9) water is removed from the aqueous phase ( Q) by distillation in the form of the stream (X) [Stream (X) (0.815 kg/h)].\n\nThe water distilled off in (9) together with the water separated mechanically in the distillation stages (7.1) and (8.1) is used to wash the organic phase (D) in (7.0) and the organic phase (L) in (8.0). The resulting washing waters are combined in stream (Y) and are added to the aqueous stream (H) before the latter enters the extraction stage (5).\n\nThe aqueous phase (S) resulting in the distillation stage (9) is supplied to the extraction stage ( 4) and in the present case is identical as to volume and composition to the aqueous stream (C) used there.\n\nAlthough the invention has been described in detail in the foregoing for the purpose of illustration, it is to be understood that such detail is solely for that purpose and that variations can be made therein by those skilled in the art without departing from the spirit and scope of the invention except as it may be limited by the claims.\n\nWhat is claimed is:\n\n- 1. A process for the fractionation and purification of aromatic polyamine mixtures comprising:\n- a) mixing the polyamine starting mixture in a first extraction stage with a two-phase system comprising\n- (i) a hydrophobic solvent phase which consists essentially of hydrophobic solvent and optionally an aromatic auxiliary amine which is substantially insoluble in water and exhibits at normal pressure a boiling point which is at least 20° C. below the boiling point of the lowest-boiling component of the starting mixture and at least 20° C. above the boiling point of the solvent, and optionally polyamine, and\n- (ii) an aqueous phase consisting essentially of water, a strong acid and auxiliary amine present at least in part in the salt form, and optionally polyamines present at least in part in the salt form,\n\n5\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n60\n\n65", + "recall": 0.991701244813278, + "true_md": "21 \n\n5,648,520 \n\n22 \n\n1. A process for the fractionation and purification of aromatic polyamine mixtures comprising: \n\nWhat is claimed is: \n\nAlthough the invention has been described in detail in the foregoing for the purpose of illustration, it is to be under- stood that such detail is solely for that purpose and that variations can be made therein by those skilled in the art without departing from the spirit and scope of the invention except as it may be limited by the claims. \n\nand is guided towards an organic phase (P) in a further extractor (6) acting in multi-stage manner at 90° C. (P) is in \n\nThe aqueous phase (K) leaving the extractor (5) has the following average composition \n\nThe polyamine fraction (0) is collected in the tank (11) as a second part product. \n\nThe stream (L) which is washed and liberated from acid esters is then separated in a first distillation stage (8.1) into a first distillate fraction (M) which comprises virtually xylene with an aniline content of ~ 1 % [Stream (M) (2.033 kg/h)], and a distillation bottom product which in a second distillation step is separated into a second distillate fraction (N) which comprises virtually aniline [Stream (N) (1.953 kg/h)] and a distillation residue (0) comprising polyamine [Stream (0) (0.896 kg/h)]. \n\nFor safety, the washed stream (L) is washed with dilute sodium hydroxide. The aqueous phase is disposed of as effluent. \n\nStream (L) is washed in the washing stage (8.0) with water (0.600 kg/h) as part of stream (X). The washing water is supplied to the aqueous stream (H) by way of stream (Y). \n\nThe aqueous phase (S) resulting in the distillation stage (9) is supplied to the extraction stage ( 4) and in the present case is identical as to volume and composition to the aqueous stream (C) used there. \n\nThe organic phase (stream L) thus resulting and leaving the extraction stage (5) has the following composition: \n\nThe water distilled off in (9) together with the water separated mechanically in the distillation stages (7.1) and (8.1) is used to wash the organic phase (D) in (7.0) and the organic phase (L) in (8.0). The resulting washing waters are combined in stream (Y) and are added to the aqueous stream (H) before the latter enters the extraction stage (5). \n\nIn a subsequent distillation stage (9) water is removed from the aqueous phase ( Q) by distillation in the form of the stream (X) [Stream (X) (0.815 kg/h)]. \n\nAfter admixing stream (Y) (0.908 kg/h) the resulting aqueous phase is extracted in countercurrent with an organic phase (stream J) in an extractor (5) acting in multi-stage manner at 90° C. \n\nThe aqueous phase (Q) resulting in (6) has the following average composition: \n\nThe stream (J) is formed from stream (R) by admixing a partial stream of (N) (1,523 kg/h). \n\nThe aqueous phase (H) leaving the extraction stage ( 4) has the following average composition: \n\nThe distillate streams (E) and (F) together with a part volume of 0.430 kg/h from stream (N) form the stream (B). \n\nIn the second distillation stage (7 .2), the remaining aniline (stream F) is separated from the bottom phase of (7.1). The distillation bottoms remaining from stage (7.2) are consti› tuted by a polyamine mixture which is collected in the tank (10) at a rate of 0.704 kg/h as stream (G). \n\nStream (D) which is washed and liberated from acid esters is liberated from xylene and some of the aniline in a first distillation stage (7.1). Some of the water is separated mechanically from the distillate stream (E) and is added to stream (X). \n\nIn this procedure the stream (R) results as the organic phase \n\nthe present case identical as to volume and composition to the first distillate fraction (M) from distillation stage (8.1). \n\n- a) mixing the polyamine starting mixture in a first extraction stage with a two-phase system comprising \n\n- (i) a hydrophobic solvent phase which consists essentially of hydrophobic solvent and optionally an aromatic auxiliary amine which is substantially insoluble in water and exhibits at normal pressure a boiling point which is at least 20° C. below the boiling point of the lowest-boiling component of the starting mixture and at least 20° C. above the boiling point of the solvent, and optionally polyamine, and \n\n- (ii) an aqueous phase consisting essentially of water, a strong acid and auxiliary amine present at least in part in the salt form, and optionally polyamines present at least in part in the salt form," + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4724186076216485, + "doc_id": "cc93b556f49af1f2e366719ec98a131186c16385545d8062d21e4d38b6bf7686", + "edit_distance": 0.45454545454545453, + "f1_score": 0.6597938144329897, + "meteor": 0.7927367555350514, + "precision": 0.5079365079365079, + "pred_md": "FIG. 29\n\nFIG. 29\n\n## Zr 4 +-HOPO complex, pH 3 to 11\n\n........................................................ wavelength\\_{nm)\\_········································\n\n[Zrj\"' [Hgandi \"'25 ufv\\ T \"'RT. f'ath if:'.,,gth\"' 10 mm\n\n\"\"O ~ ..... ('D = ..... t \"e -.... (') ~ ..... .... 0 = \"\"O = O\" -.... (') ~ ..... .... 0 =\n\nrJJ ('D '? .... ~\\,Ci N 0 .... \\,Ci rJJ =› ('D ('D ..... N \\,Ci 0 .... .... 0 O'I c rJJ N 0 .... \\,Ci ---0 N QO -....J O'I \\,Ci .... > ....", + "recall": 0.9411764705882353, + "true_md": "\"\"O ~ ..... (’D = ..... t \"e - .... (’) ~ ..... .... 0 = \"\"O = O\" - .... (’) ~ ..... .... 0 = \n\nrJJ (’D ’? .... ~\\,Ci N 0 .... \\,Ci rJJ =› (’D (’D ..... N \\,Ci 0 .... 0 O’I \n\nc rJJ N 0 .... \\,Ci --- 0 N QO -....J O’I \\,Ci .... > .... \n\nFIG. 29" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6168688028686571, + "doc_id": "a07533744064884d8e09594fb1980cc82a43df8b9a35620a45637ed7c302deb8", + "edit_distance": 0.3153153153153153, + "f1_score": 0.8988476312419975, + "meteor": 0.7450961945777109, + "precision": 0.8976982097186701, + "pred_md": "15\n\nwherein R 1 is derived from oleic acid, and the compound is available from Witco Company.\n\nAn example of Compound (11) is l-ethyl-1-(2hydroxyethyl)-2-isoheptadecylimidazolinium ethylsulfate wherein R 1 is a C 17 hydrocarbon group, R 2 is an ethylene group, R 5 is an ethyl group, and Ais an ethylsulfate anion.\n\n## Anion A-\n\nIn the cationic nitrogenous salts herein, the anion A-, which is any compatible anion, provides electrical neutrality. Most often, the anion used to provide electrical neutrality in these salts is from a strong acid, especially a halide, such as chloride, bromide, or iodide. However, other anions can be used, such as methylsulfate, ethylsulfate, acetate, formate, sulfate, carbonate, and the like. Chloride and methylsulfate are preferred herein as anion A-. The anion can also, but less preferably, carry a double charge in which case Arepre› sents half a group.\n\n## 2. Biguanide Compounds\n\nOther useful cationic surfactants herein include biguanide compounds. As with the quaternary compounds described hereinbefore, many biguanide compounds exhibit antimi› crobial effectiveness, depending on the level of the bigu› anide compound in the compositions. Especially useful biguanide compounds include 1,1'-hexamethylene bis(S-(p› chlorophenyl)biguanide ), commonly known as chlorhexidine, and its salts, e.g., with hydrochloric, acetic and gluconic acids. The digluconate salt is highly water› soluble, about 70% in water, and the diacetate salt has a solubility of about 1.8% in water. When chlorhexidine is used as a cationic surfactant in dilute versions of the present invention, it is typically present at a level from about 0.0001 % to about 10%, preferably from about 0.001 % to about 7%, and more preferably from about 0.01 % to about 5%, by weight of the composition. When used in concentrate versions of the present invention, it is typically present at a level from about 0.001 % to about 70%, preferably from about 0.01 % to about 60%, and more preferably from about 0.1 % to about 50%, by weight of the composition. In some cases, a level from about 0.001 % to about 10% in the dilute compositions and a level from about 0.01 % to about 70% in the concentrate compositions may be needed for antimicro› bial and/or virucidal activity.\n\n5\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\n50\n\nOther useful biguanide compounds include Cosmocifi CQfi, Vantocilfi IB, including poly (hexamethylene biguanide) hydrochloride. Other useful cationic surfactants include the bis-biguanide alkanes. Usable water soluble salts 55 of the above are chlorides, bromides, sulfates, alkyl sul› fonates such as methyl sulfonate and ethyl sulfonate, phe› nylsulfonates such as p-methylphenyl sulfonates, nitrates, acetates, gluconates, and the like.\n\nExamples of suitable bis biguanide compounds are chlo› r hexidine; 1, 6-bis-(2-e thy lhexy lbiguanidohexane) dihydrochloride; 1,6-di-(N ,N '-phenyldiguanido-N 5 ,N 5 ')› 1 1 hexane tetrahydrochloride; 1,6-di-(N ,N '-phenyl-N ,N i'› 1 1 1 methyldiguanido-N5,N5')-hexane dihydrochloride; 1,6-di (N ,N 1 1 '-o-chlorophenyidiguanido-N 5 ,N 5 ')hexane 65 dihydrochloride; 1,6-di(N 1 ,N '-2,61 dichlorophenyidiguanido-N 5 ,N 5 )hexane dihydrochloride; ' 60\n\nUS 6,503,413 B2\n\n16\n\n1,6-di[N ,N/-.beta.-(p-methoxyphenyl) diguanido-N 5 ,N 5 ']› 1 hexane dihydrochloride; 1,6-di(N ,N '-.alpha.-methyl-. 1 1 beta.-phenyldiguanido-N 5 ,N 5 ')-hexane dihydrochloride; 1,6-di(N ,N '-p-nitropheny ldiguanido-N 5 ,N 5 ')hexane 1 1 dihydrochloride; .omega.: .omega. '-di-(N 1 ,N 1 '› p hen yldigu anido -N 5 , N 5 ')-di-n-p rop yle the r dihydrochloride;. omega: omega' -di(N 1 ,N 1 '-p› chlorophenyidiguanido-N,N')-di-n-propylether tetrahydro› chloride; 1,6-di(N ,N '-2,4-dichlorophenyldiguanido-N , 1 1 5 N 5 ')hexane tetrahydrochloride; 1,6-di(N1 ,N/-p› methylphenyldiguanido-N 5 ,N 5 ')hexane dihydrochloride; 1,6-di(N ,N '-2,4,5-trichlorophenyldiguanido-N ,N 5 ') 1 1 5 hexane tetrahydrochloride; 1,6-di[N 1 ,N1 -.alpha.-(p› chlorophenyl) ethyldiguanido-N 5 ,Ns'] hexane dihydrochloride; .omega.: .omega.'di(N ,N i'-p› 1 chlorophenyldiguanido-N 5 ,N 5 ')m-xylene dihydrochloride; 1,12-di(N ,N/-p-chlorophenyldiguanido-N 5 ,N 5 ') dodecane 1 dihydrochloride; 1,10-di(N ,N i'-phenyldiguanido-N ,N 5 ')› 1 5 d e cane tetrahydrochloride; 1,12-di(N1 ,Ni'phenyldiguanido-N 5 ,N 5 ') dodecane tetrahydrochloride; 1,6di(N ,N '-o-chlorophenyldiguanido-N 5 ,N 5 ') hexane 1 1 dihydrochloride; 1,6-di(N ,N '-p-chlorophenyldiguanido› 1 1 N 5,N 5')-hexane tetrahydrochloride; ethylene bis (1-tolyl biguanide ); ethylene bis(p-tolyl biguanide ); ethylene bis(3, 5-dimethylphenyl biguanide ); ethylene bis(p-tert› amylphenyl biguanide); ethylene bis(nonylphenyl biguanide); ethylene bis(phenyl biguanide); ethylene bis(N› butylphenyl biguanide ); ethylene bis(2,5-diethoxyphenyl biguanide ); ethylene bis(2,4-dimethylphenyl biguanide ); ethylene bis( o-diphenylbiguanide ); ethylene bis(mixed amyl naphthyl biguanide); N-butyl ethylene bis (phenylbiguanide ); trimethylene bis( o-tolyl biguanide ); N-butyl trimethylene bis(phenyl biguanide); and the corre› sponding pharmaceutically acceptable salts of all of the above such as the acetates; gluconates; hydrochlorides; hydrobromides; citrates; bisulfites; fluorides; polymaleates; N-coconutalkylsarcosinates; phosphites; hypophosphites; perfluorooctanoates; silicates; sorbates; salicylates; male› ates; tartrates; fumarates; ethylenediaminetetraacetates; iminodiacetates; cinnamates; thiocyanates; arginates; pyromel› litates; tetracarboxybutyrates; benzoates; glutarates; monofluorophosphates; and perfluoropropionates, and mix› tures thereof. Preferred cationic surfactants from this group are 1,6-di-(N 1 ,N '-phenyidiguanido-N 5 ,N 5 ')-hexane tetrahy1 drochloride; 1,6-di(N ,N '-o-chlorophenyldiguanido-N , 1 1 5 N 5 ')-hexane dihydrochloride; 1,6-di(N1 ,N/-2,6dichlorophenyidiguanidoN ,N 5 5 )hexane dihydrochloride; ' 1,6-di(N ,N '-2,4-dichlorophenyidiguanido-N ,N 5 ')hexane 1 1 5 tetrahydrochloride; 1,6-di[N ,N '-.alpha.-(p-chlorophenyl) 1 1 et h y id i g u an id o N 5 , N 5 '] hexane dihydrochloride; .omega.: .omega.' di(N 1 ,N 1 ' -p› chlorophenyidiguanido-N 5 ,N 5 ')m-xylene dihydrochloride; 1,12-di(N ,N/-p-chlorophenyldiguanido-N 5 ,N 5 ') dodecane 1 dihydrochloride; 1,6-di(N ,N '-o-chlorophenyidiguanido1 1 N 5 ,Ns') hexane dihydrochloride; 1,6-di(N1 ,N/-p› chloropheny ldiguanidoN ,N 5 5 )-hexane tetrahydrochloride; ' and mixtures thereof; more preferably, 1,6-di(N ,N i'-o› 1 chlorophenyidiguanido-N 5 ,N 5 ')-hexane dihydrochloride; 1,6-di(N ,N '-2,6-dichlorophenyidiguanido-N ,N 5 ')hexane 1 1 5 d i h y d ro c h 1 o r i de ; 1 , 6 - d i ( N 1 , N 1 ' -2 , 4 dichlorophenyidiguanido-N 5 ,N 5 ')hexane tetrahydrochlo› r id e; 1,6-di[N1 ,N 1 '-.alpha.-(p-chlorophenyl) ethyidiguanido-N 5 ,N 5 '] hexane dihydrochloride; .omega.: .omega.' di(N 1 ,N 1 ' -pchlorophenyidiguanido-N 5 ,N 5 ')m-xylene dihydrochloride; 1,12-di(N ,N i'-p-chlorophenyidiguanido-N ,N 5 ') dodecane 1 5 dihydrochloride; 1,6-di(N ,N '-o-chlorophenyidiguanido1 1", + "recall": 0.9, + "true_md": "15 \n\nUS 6,503,413 B2 \n\n16 \n\nwherein R $^{1 }$is derived from oleic acid, and the compound is available from Witco Company. \n\nAn example of Compound (11) is l-ethyl-1-(2- hydroxyethyl)-2-isoheptadecylimidazolinium ethylsulfate wherein R 1 is a C$_{17 }$ hydrocarbon group, R 2 is an ethylene group, R $^{5 }$is an ethyl group, and A- is an ethylsulfate anion. \n\nIn the cationic nitrogenous salts herein, the anion A-, which is any compatible anion, provides electrical neutrality. Most often, the anion used to provide electrical neutrality in these salts is from a strong acid, especially a halide, such as chloride, bromide, or iodide. However, other anions can be used, such as methylsulfate, ethylsulfate, acetate, formate, sulfate, carbonate, and the like. Chloride and methylsulfate are preferred herein as anion A-. The anion can also, but less preferably, carry a double charge in which case A- repre› sents half a group. \n\n2. Biguanide Compounds \n\nOther useful cationic surfactants herein include biguanide compounds. As with the quaternary compounds described hereinbefore, many biguanide compounds exhibit antimi› crobial effectiveness, depending on the level of the bigu› anide compound in the compositions. Especially useful biguanide compounds include 1,1’-hexamethylene bis(S-(p› chlorophenyl)biguanide ), commonly known as chlorhexidine, and its salts, e.g., with hydrochloric, acetic and gluconic acids. The digluconate salt is highly water› soluble, about 70% in water, and the diacetate salt has a solubility of about 1.8% in water. When chlorhexidine is used as a cationic surfactant in dilute versions of the present invention, it is typically present at a level from about 0.0001 % to about 10%, preferably from about 0.001 % to about 7%, and more preferably from about 0.01 % to about 5%, by weight of the composition. When used in concentrate versions of the present invention, it is typically present at a level from about 0.001 % to about 70%, preferably from about 0.01 % to about 60%, and more preferably from about 0.1 % to about 50%, by weight of the composition. In some cases, a level from about 0.001 % to about 10% in the dilute compositions and a level from about 0.01 % to about 70% in the concentrate compositions may be needed for antimicro› bial and/or virucidal activity. \n\nOther useful biguanide compounds include Cosmocifi CQfi, Vantocilfi IB, including poly (hexamethylene biguanide) hydrochloride. Other useful cationic surfactants include the bis-biguanide alkanes. Usable water soluble salts of the above are chlorides, bromides, sulfates, alkyl sul› fonates such as methyl sulfonate and ethyl sulfonate, phe› nylsulfonates such as p-methylphenyl sulfonates, nitrates, acetates, gluconates, and the like. \n\nExamples of suitable bis biguanide compounds are chlo› r hexidine; 1, 6-bis-(2-e thy lhexy lbiguanidohexane) dihydrochloride; 1,6-di-(N$_{1}$,N$_{1}$’-phenyldiguanido-N 5 ,N 5 ’)› hexane tetrahydrochloride; 1,6-di-(N $_{1}$,N $_{1}$’-phenyl-N $_{1}$,N i’› methyldiguanido-N5,N5’)-hexane dihydrochloride; 1,6-di (N $_{1}$,N $_{1 }$’-o-chlorophenyidiguanido-N 5 ,N 5 ’)hexane dihydrochloride; 1,6-di(N 1 ,N $_{1 }$’-2,6- dichlorophenyidiguanido-N 5 ,N 5 ’)hexane dihydrochloride; \n\n1,6-di[N$_{1}$,N/-.beta.-(p-methoxyphenyl) diguanido-N 5 ,N 5 ’]› hexane dihydrochloride; 1,6-di(N $_{1}$,N $_{1}$’-.alpha.-methyl-. beta.-phenyldiguanido-N 5 ,N 5 ’)-hexane dihydrochloride; 1,6-di(N $_{1}$,N $_{1 }$’-p-nitropheny ldiguanido-N 5 ,N 5 ’)hexane dihydrochloride; .omega.: .omega. ’-di-(N $_{1 }$,N 1 ’› p hen yldigu anido -N 5 , N 5 ’)-di-n-p rop yle the r dihydrochloride;. omega: omega’ -di(N $_{1 }$,N $_{1 }$’-p› chlorophenyidiguanido-N,N’)-di-n-propylether tetrahydro› chloride; 1,6-di(N $_{1}$,N $_{1 }$’-2,4-dichlorophenyldiguanido-N 5 , 10 N 5 ’)hexane tetrahydrochloride; 1,6-di(N$_{1}$ ,N/-p› methylphenyldiguanido-N 5 ,N 5 ’)hexane dihydrochloride; 1,6-di(N $_{1}$,N $_{1 }$’-2,4,5-trichlorophenyldiguanido-N 5 ,N 5 ’) hexane tetrahydrochloride; 1,6-di[N$_{1}$ ,N$_{1}$ -.alpha.-(p› chlorophenyl) ethyldiguanido-N 5 ,Ns’] hexane 15 dihydrochloride; .omega.: .omega.’di(N 1 ,N i’-p› chlorophenyldiguanido-N 5 ,N 5 ’)m-xylene dihydrochloride; 1,12-di(N$_{1}$,N/-p-chlorophenyldiguanido-N 5 ,N 5 ’) dodecane dihydrochloride; 1,10-di(N $_{1}$,N i’-phenyldiguanido-N 5 ,N 5 ’)› d e cane tetrahydrochloride; 1,12-di(N$_{1}$ ,Ni’- $^{phenyldiguanido-N}$5,N 5 ’) dodecane tetrahydrochloride; 1,6- di(N $_{1}$,N $_{1 }$’-o-chlorophenyldiguanido-N 5 ,N 5 ’) hexane dihydrochloride; 1,6-di(N $_{1}$,N $_{1 }$’-p-chlorophenyldiguanido› N 5,N 5’)-hexane tetrahydrochloride; ethylene bis (1-tolyl biguanide ); ethylene bis(p-tolyl biguanide ); ethylene bis(3, 25 5-dimethylphenyl biguanide ); ethylene bis(p-tert› amylphenyl biguanide); ethylene bis(nonylphenyl biguanide); ethylene bis(phenyl biguanide); ethylene bis(N› butylphenyl biguanide ); ethylene bis(2,5-diethoxyphenyl biguanide ); ethylene bis(2,4-dimethylphenyl biguanide ); 30 ethylene bis( o-diphenylbiguanide ); ethylene bis(mixed amyl naphthyl biguanide); N-butyl ethylene bis (phenylbiguanide ); trimethylene bis( o-tolyl biguanide ); N-butyl trimethylene bis(phenyl biguanide); and the corre› sponding pharmaceutically acceptable salts of all of the 35 above such as the acetates; gluconates; hydrochlorides; hydrobromides; citrates; bisulfites; fluorides; polymaleates; N-coconutalkylsarcosinates; phosphites; hypophosphites; perfluorooctanoates; silicates; sorbates; salicylates; male› ates; tartrates; fumarates; ethylenediaminetetraacetates; imi- 40 nodiacetates; cinnamates; thiocyanates; arginates; pyromel› litates; tetracarboxybutyrates; benzoates; glutarates; monofluorophosphates; and perfluoropropionates, and mix› tures thereof. Preferred cationic surfactants from this group are 1,6-di-(N$_{1}$,N$_{1}$’-phenyidiguanido-N 5 ,N 5 ’)-hexane tetrahy- 45 drochloride; 1,6-di(N $_{1}$,N $_{1 }$’-o-chlorophenyldiguanido-N 5 , N 5 ’)-hexane dihydrochloride; 1,6-di(N$_{1}$ ,N/-2,6- dichlorophenyidiguanido- N $_{5}$,N 5 ’)hexane dihydrochloride; 1,6-di(N $_{1}$,N $_{1 }$’-2,4-dichlorophenyidiguanido-N 5 ,N 5 ’)hexane tetrahydrochloride; 1,6-di[N $_{1}$,N $_{1}$’-.alpha.-(p-chlorophenyl) 50 et h y id i g u an id o - N 5 , N 5 ’] hexane dihydrochloride; .omega.: .omega.’ di(N $_{1 }$,N 1 ’ -p› chlorophenyidiguanido-N 5 ,N 5 ’)m-xylene dihydrochloride; 1,12-di(N$_{1}$,N/-p-chlorophenyldiguanido-N 5 ,N 5 ’) dodecane dihydrochloride; 1,6-di(N $_{1}$,N $_{1 }$’-o-chlorophenyidiguanido- $^{N}$5,Ns’) hexane dihydrochloride; 1,6-di(N$_{1}$ ,N/-p› chloropheny ldiguanido- N $_{5}$,N 5 ’)-hexane tetrahydrochloride; and mixtures thereof; more preferably, 1,6-di(N $_{1}$,N i’-o› chlorophenyidiguanido-N 5 ,N 5 ’)-hexane dihydrochloride; 1,6-di(N $_{1}$,N $_{1 }$’-2,6-dichlorophenyidiguanido-N 5 ,N 5 ’)hexane d i h y d ro c h 1 o r i de ; 1 , 6 - d i ( N $_{1 }$ , N $_{1 }$ ’ - 2 , 4 - dichlorophenyidiguanido-N 5 ,N 5 ’)hexane tetrahydrochlo› r id e; 1,6-di[N$_{1}$ ,N$_{1}$ ’-.alpha.-(p-chlorophenyl) ethyidiguanido-N 5 ,N 5 ’] hexane dihydrochloride; .omega.: .omega.’ di(N $_{1 }$,N 1 ’ -p- 65 chlorophenyidiguanido-N 5 ,N 5 ’)m-xylene dihydrochloride; 1,12-di(N $_{1}$,N i’-p-chlorophenyidiguanido-N 5 ,N 5 ’) dodecane dihydrochloride; 1,6-di(N $_{1}$,N $_{1 }$’-o-chlorophenyidiguanido-\n\n## Anion A-" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9746024556266359, + "doc_id": "883f538002e2cd970e761394272844b01408285442a2aeb08f32ea77fb4e31a8", + "edit_distance": 0.019417475728155338, + "f1_score": 0.9695817490494295, + "meteor": 0.9916232447598218, + "precision": 0.9586466165413534, + "pred_md": "US 9,840,656 B2\n\n3\n\nneeded; and the ability to retain tackiness of the coated surface even after obtaining consolidation of the proppant pack.\n\nIn certain embodiments of the present invention, a method of treating a subterranean formation comprises placing a first stream comprising a hardenable acid curing resin, and a hydrolysable strong acid ester into a wellbore in a subter› ranean formation, said formation comprising unconsolidated particulates, wherein said ester upon hydrolyzing yields an acid with a pKa at or below about 3; and forming consoli› dated particulates upon the contacting of the unconsolidated particles with the reaction product of the hardenable acid curing resin, hydrolysable strong acid ester and water in the formation.\n\n5\n\n10\n\nSome embodiments of the present invention provide a method for treating a well including providing a wellbore in a subterranean formation; providing a first fluid comprising a hardenable acid curing resin and a hydrolysable strong acid ester, wherein said ester upon hydrolyzing yields an acid with a pKa at or below about 3; providing proppant particulates; coating the proppant particulates with the first fluid; providing a second stream comprising a diluent fluid; creating at least one fracture in said subterranean formation; placing a first stream comprising the coated proppant par› ticulates and the second stream into the subterranean for› mation and into at least one fracture therein; wherein the proppant particulates form a proppant pack in the at least one fracture; and forming consolidated proppant particulates upon the curing of the coated proppant particulates in the proppant pack upon hydrolyzing of at least a portion of said 30 strong acid ester. 15 20 25\n\nAnother embodiment of the invention includes a well treatment system including a well treatment apparatus con› figured to: place a first stream comprising a hardenable acid curing resin and a hydrolysable strong acid ester into a wellbore in a subterranean formation, said formation com› prising unconsolidated particulates, wherein said ester upon hydrolyzing yields an acid with a pKa at or below about 3; and form consolidated particulates upon the contacting of the unconsolidated particles with the reaction product of the 40 hardenable acid curing resin, hydrolysable strong acid ester, and water in the formation. 35\n\nIn one embodiment, a method of treating a well bore in a subterranean formation includes providing a first fluid com› prising a hardenable acid curable resin and a hydrolysable 45 strong acid ester, wherein said ester upon hydrolyzing yields an acid with a pKa at or below about 3; providing a diluent fluid; placing a first stream comprising the first fluid and the diluent fluid into a zone in the subterranean formation, said zone comprising unconsolidated particulates; hydrolyzing at 50 least a portion of said ester in said formation; and forming consolidated particulates upon the contacting of the uncon› solidated particles with the reaction product of the harden› able acid curable resin and hydrolysable strong acid ester upon hydrolyzing in the formation. In certain embodiments, the forming includes reacting the hardenable acid curable resin, hydrolysable strong acid ester, and water in the formation, thereby forming a reaction product. In further embodiments, the reaction product is cured to the uncon› solidated particulates. In some embodiments, the hardenable acid curable resin includes melamine resins with secondary amino groups. These melamine resins may comprise a resin selected from the group consisting of phenolic; furan; alde› hyde; novolac; epoxy; and combinations thereof. In an exemplary embodiment, the resin is a furan resin. In certain 65 embodiments, the hardenable acid curable resin is present in the amount of about 0.1 % to about 15% by weight of the 55 60\n\n4\n\ndiluent fluid. In some embodiments, the hydrolysable strong acid ester comprises at least one member selected from the group consisting of methyl tosylate and homologous series; methyl methane sulfonate and homologous series; methyl trichloroacetate and homologous series; methyl trifluroac› etate and homologous series; dimethyl methylphosphonate and homologous series; and any combination thereof. In exemplary embodiments, the hydrolysable strong acid ester comprises a tosylated ester. In certain embodiments, the hydrolysable strong acid ester is present in the amount of about 0.01 % to about 5% by weight of the diluent fluid. In some embodiments, said ester upon hydrolyzing yields an acid with a pKa value at or below about one of the following: 2.5, 2, 1.5, 1, 0.5, 0, -0.5, -1, -1.5, -2, -2.5, -3, -3.5, -4, -4.5, and -5. In an embodiment, the hydrolysable strong acid ester produces a fluid with a pH of about 3.0 or less upon being hydrolyzed by water in the formation. In other embodiments, the hydrolysable strong acid ester is encap› sulated in a hydrolysable material. In certain embodiment, the diluent fluid comprises a non-aqueous base fluid. In further embodiments, at least one of the hardenable acid curable resin and the hydrolysable strong acid ester is soluble in the diluent fluid. In several embodiments, the first stream further comprises a catalyst, wherein the catalyst comprises at least one member selected from organic amine bases, inorganic bases, and mixtures thereof. In exemplary embodiments, the organic amine base is selected from the following group consisting of pyridine, isoquinoline, qui› noline, N,N-dimethy lcyclohexy !amine, tributy !amine, tripropylamie, N-ethylmorpholine, dimethylaniline, and mixtures thereof. In other embodiments, the inorganic base is selected from the following group consisting of potassium hydroxide, sodium hydroxide, ammonium hydroxide, and mixtures thereof. In certain embodiments, the catalyst is present in the amount of about 0.01 % to about 5% by weight of the diluent fluid. In some embodiments, the first stream may include a silane coupling agent. In exemplary embodi› ments, the silane coupling agent includes at least one mem› ber selected from the group consisting ofN-2-(aminoethyl)3-aminopropyltrimethoxysilane;\n\n3-glycidoxypropy ltrimethoxysilane; n-beta-( aminoethy 1)› gamma-aminopropyl trimethoxysilane; and combinations thereof. In certain embodiments, the coupling agent is present in the amount of about 0.01 % to about 2% by weight of the diluent fluid. In some embodiments, the first stream further comprises a surfactant for facilitating the contacting of the unconsolidated particulates with the reaction product. In exemplary embodiments, the surfactant comprises at least one member selected from the group consisting of an ethoxylated nonyl phenol phosphate ester; mixtures of one or more cationic surfactants; a C 12 -C 22 alkyl phosphonate surfactant; a mixture of one or more non-ionic surfactants; an alkyl phosphonate surfactant; and mixtures thereof. In certain embodiments, the surfactant is present in the amount of about 0.01 % to about 5% by weight of the diluent fluid.\n\nSome embodiments of the present invention provide a method for treating a well including providing a wellbore in a subterranean formation; providing a first fluid comprising a hardenable acid curing resin and a hydrolysable strong acid ester, wherein said ester upon hydrolyzing yields an acid with a pKa at or below about 3; providing proppant particulates; coating the proppant particulates with the first fluid; providing a second stream comprising a diluent fluid; creating at least one fracture in said subterranean formation; placing a first stream comprising the coated proppant par› ticulates and the second stream into the subterranean for› mation and into at least one fracture therein; wherein the", + "recall": 0.9807692307692307, + "true_md": "US 9,840,656 B2 \n\n4 \n\n3 \n\nneeded; and the ability to retain tackiness of the coated surface even after obtaining consolidation of the proppant pack. \n\nIn certain embodiments of the present invention, a method of treating a subterranean formation comprises placing a first stream comprising a hardenable acid curing resin, and a hydrolysable strong acid ester into a wellbore in a subter› ranean formation, said formation comprising unconsolidated particulates, wherein said ester upon hydrolyzing yields an acid with a pKa at or below about 3; and forming consoli› dated particulates upon the contacting of the unconsolidated particles with the reaction product of the hardenable acid curing resin, hydrolysable strong acid ester and water in the formation. \n\nSome embodiments of the present invention provide a method for treating a well including providing a wellbore in a subterranean formation; providing a first fluid comprising a hardenable acid curing resin and a hydrolysable strong acid ester, wherein said ester upon hydrolyzing yields an acid with a pKa at or below about 3; providing proppant particulates; coating the proppant particulates with the first fluid; providing a second stream comprising a diluent fluid; creating at least one fracture in said subterranean formation; placing a first stream comprising the coated proppant par› ticulates and the second stream into the subterranean for› mation and into at least one fracture therein; wherein the proppant particulates form a proppant pack in the at least one fracture; and forming consolidated proppant particulates upon the curing of the coated proppant particulates in the proppant pack upon hydrolyzing of at least a portion of said strong acid ester. \n\nAnother embodiment of the invention includes a well treatment system including a well treatment apparatus con› figured to: place a first stream comprising a hardenable acid curing resin and a hydrolysable strong acid ester into a wellbore in a subterranean formation, said formation com› prising unconsolidated particulates, wherein said ester upon hydrolyzing yields an acid with a pKa at or below about 3; and form consolidated particulates upon the contacting of the unconsolidated particles with the reaction product of the hardenable acid curing resin, hydrolysable strong acid ester, and water in the formation. \n\nIn one embodiment, a method of treating a well bore in a subterranean formation includes providing a first fluid com› prising a hardenable acid curable resin and a hydrolysable strong acid ester, wherein said ester upon hydrolyzing yields an acid with a pKa at or below about 3; providing a diluent fluid; placing a first stream comprising the first fluid and the diluent fluid into a zone in the subterranean formation, said zone comprising unconsolidated particulates; hydrolyzing at least a portion of said ester in said formation; and forming consolidated particulates upon the contacting of the uncon› solidated particles with the reaction product of the harden› able acid curable resin and hydrolysable strong acid ester upon hydrolyzing in the formation. In certain embodiments, the forming includes reacting the hardenable acid curable resin, hydrolysable strong acid ester, and water in the formation, thereby forming a reaction product. In further embodiments, the reaction product is cured to the uncon› solidated particulates. In some embodiments, the hardenable acid curable resin includes melamine resins with secondary amino groups. These melamine resins may comprise a resin selected from the group consisting of phenolic; furan; alde› hyde; novolac; epoxy; and combinations thereof. In an exemplary embodiment, the resin is a furan resin. In certain embodiments, the hardenable acid curable resin is present in the amount of about 0.1 % to about 15% by weight of the \n\ndiluent fluid. In some embodiments, the hydrolysable strong acid ester comprises at least one member selected from the group consisting of methyl tosylate and homologous series; methyl methane sulfonate and homologous series; methyl trichloroacetate and homologous series; methyl trifluroac› etate and homologous series; dimethyl methylphosphonate and homologous series; and any combination thereof. In exemplary embodiments, the hydrolysable strong acid ester comprises a tosylated ester. In certain embodiments, the hydrolysable strong acid ester is present in the amount of about 0.01 % to about 5% by weight of the diluent fluid. In some embodiments, said ester upon hydrolyzing yields an acid with a pKa value at or below about one of the following: 2.5, 2, 1.5, 1, 0.5, 0, -0.5, -1, -1.5, -2, -2.5, -3, -3.5, -4, -4.5, and -5. In an embodiment, the hydrolysable strong acid ester produces a fluid with a pH of about 3.0 or less upon being hydrolyzed by water in the formation. In other embodiments, the hydrolysable strong acid ester is encap› sulated in a hydrolysable material. In certain embodiment, the diluent fluid comprises a non-aqueous base fluid. In further embodiments, at least one of the hardenable acid curable resin and the hydrolysable strong acid ester is soluble in the diluent fluid. In several embodiments, the first stream further comprises a catalyst, wherein the catalyst comprises at least one member selected from organic amine bases, inorganic bases, and mixtures thereof. In exemplary embodiments, the organic amine base is selected from the following group consisting of pyridine, isoquinoline, qui› noline, N,N-dimethy lcyclohexy !amine, tributy !amine, tripropylamie, N-ethylmorpholine, dimethylaniline, and mixtures thereof. In other embodiments, the inorganic base is selected from the following group consisting of potassium hydroxide, sodium hydroxide, ammonium hydroxide, and mixtures thereof. In certain embodiments, the catalyst is present in the amount of about 0.01 % to about 5% by weight of the diluent fluid. In some embodiments, the first stream may include a silane coupling agent. In exemplary embodi› ments, the silane coupling agent includes at least one mem› ber selected from the group consisting ofN-2-(aminoethyl)- 3-aminopropyltrimethoxysilane; 3-glycidoxypropy ltrimethoxysilane; n-beta-( aminoethy 1)› gamma-aminopropyl trimethoxysilane; and combinations thereof. In certain embodiments, the coupling agent is present in the amount of about 0.01 % to about 2% by weight of the diluent fluid. In some embodiments, the first stream further comprises a surfactant for facilitating the contacting of the unconsolidated particulates with the reaction product. In exemplary embodiments, the surfactant comprises at least one member selected from the group consisting of an ethoxylated nonyl phenol phosphate ester; mixtures of one or more cationic surfactants; a C$_{12}$-C$_{22 }$ alkyl phosphonate surfactant; a mixture of one or more non-ionic surfactants; an alkyl phosphonate surfactant; and mixtures thereof. In certain embodiments, the surfactant is present in the amount of about 0.01 % to about 5% by weight of the diluent fluid. \n\nSome embodiments of the present invention provide a method for treating a well including providing a wellbore in a subterranean formation; providing a first fluid comprising a hardenable acid curing resin and a hydrolysable strong acid ester, wherein said ester upon hydrolyzing yields an acid with a pKa at or below about 3; providing proppant particulates; coating the proppant particulates with the first fluid; providing a second stream comprising a diluent fluid; creating at least one fracture in said subterranean formation; placing a first stream comprising the coated proppant par› ticulates and the second stream into the subterranean for› mation and into at least one fracture therein; wherein the" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6965616614337463, + "doc_id": "e264da779290336b0115ef842e6d4578ac24116b9cf3c2906d7c3d8b252ca4eb", + "edit_distance": 0.4160839160839161, + "f1_score": 0.9285714285714286, + "meteor": 0.7103948601033485, + "precision": 0.9479166666666666, + "pred_md": "US 7,144,993 B2\n\n23\n\n- 9. A process according to claim 3, wherein the conversion of a compound of formula III into a compound II and of the resulting compound of formula II into a compound of formula I is carried out as a one-pot reaction.\n- 10. A process according to claim 1, wherein a compound of formula I is reacted with a suitable coupling component to form a compound of formula\n\nR 5 , R 6 and R 8 being as defined in claim 1 and A being the radical of a coupling component.\n\n24\n\n## 11. A compound of the formula\n\nwherein R 5 , R 6 and R 8 are each independently of the others a hydrogen atom, a nitro group, a sulfa group, a halogen atom, a pseudohalogen, a group COOR 1 or CONHR 2 or a C1 \\_ 8 alkyl, C 1 \\_ 8 alkoxy or aryloxy radical, an amide group, a thioalkyl or thioaryl radical, an alkyl- or aryl-sulfonyl radi› cal, an alkyl- or aryl-sulfinyl radical, a trifluoromethyl group or a phosphono group, R 1 and R 2 being a hydrogen atom, a C1 \\_ 8 alkyl radical or an aryl or aralkyl radical, having an isomeric purity of more than 95%.\n\n*\n\n*\n\n*\n\n*\n\n*\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20", + "recall": 0.91, + "true_md": "23 \n\nUS 7,144,993 B2 \n\n24 \n\n11. A compound of the formula \n\n9. A process according to claim 3, wherein the conversion of a compound of formula III into a compound II and of the resulting compound of formula II into a compound of formula I is carried out as a one-pot reaction. \n\n10. A process according to claim 1, wherein a compound of formula I is reacted with a suitable coupling component to form a compound of formula \n\n(I) \n\n(VI) \n\nwherein R 5 , R $^{6 }$and R8 are each independently of the others a hydrogen atom, a nitro group, a sulfa group, a halogen atom, a pseudohalogen, a group COOR 1 or CONHR 2 or a C$_{1}$ \\_ $_{8}$alkyl, C$_{1}$ \\_ $_{8}$alkoxy or aryloxy radical, an amide group, a thioalkyl or thioaryl radical, an alkyl- or aryl-sulfonyl radi› cal, an alkyl- or aryl-sulfinyl radical, a trifluoromethyl group or a phosphono group, R$^{1 }$and R$^{2 }$being a hydrogen atom, a C$_{1}$\\_$_{8}$alkyl radical or an aryl or aralkyl radical, having an isomeric purity of more than 95%. \n\n* * * * * \n\nR 5 , R 6 and R 8 being as defined in claim 1 and A being the radical of a coupling component." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8181176176805142, + "doc_id": "713eab81441e1814fa3e928e11131cedb1bf9498e3bd6302e3b16a618796729c", + "edit_distance": 0.38660907127429806, + "f1_score": 0.9586776859504132, + "meteor": 0.8700424366761261, + "precision": 0.9613259668508287, + "pred_md": "117\n\n[Chemical Formula 50]\n\n5\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\nIn the formulas, Rr 11 represents a hydrogen atom or a hydro› carbon group of 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, each ofRr2 1 and Rr 31 independently represents a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group of 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, and Rr2 1 and Rr 31 may be bonded to each other to form a ring. Rr 12 represents a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group of 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, each of Rr 22 and Rr3 2 independently represents a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon 30 group of 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, and Rr2 2 and Rr 32 may be bonded to each other to form a ring. Rr 13 represents a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group of 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, each of Rr 23 and Rr3 3 independently represents a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group of 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, and Rr 23 and Rr 33 may be bonded to each other to form a ring. 25 35\n\nIn formula (gl-1), Rr 11 , Rr 21 and Rr3 1 are the same as defined above for Rr 1 , Rr2 and Rr 3 respectively in general formula (gl).\n\n40\n\nRr 11 is preferably a hydrogen atom, a chain-like alkyl group of 1 to 15 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, a cyclic alkyl group of3 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or an aromatic hydrocarbon group of 5 to 20 45 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, and is more preferably a chain-like alkyl group of 1 to 15 carbon atoms which may have a substituent or an aromatic hydrocarbon group of 5 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent.\n\nIt is preferable that Rr2 1 and Rr 31 are either both hydrogen 50 atoms, or are bonded to each other to form a ring, and it is particularly desirable that R 21 and R 31 are both hydrogen atoms.\n\nIn formula (gl-2), Rr 12 , Rr 22 and Rr3 2 are the same as defined above for Rr 11 , Rr 21 and Rr 31 respectively in general formula (gl-1).\n\nIn formula (gl-3), Rr 13 , Rr 23 and Rr3 3 are the same as defined above for Rr 1 , Rr2 and Rr 3 respectively in general formula (gl).\n\nRr 13 is preferably a hydrogen atom, a chain-like alkyl group of 1 to 15 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, a cyclic alkyl group of3 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or an aromatic hydrocarbon group of 5 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, is more prefer› ably a cyclic alkyl group of3 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, and is still more preferably a polycyclic cyclic alkyl group.\n\n55\n\n60\n\n65\n\nUS 9,164,380 B2\n\n118\n\nIt is preferable that Rr2 3 and Rr 33 are either both hydrogen atoms, or are bonded to each other to form a ring, and it is particularly desirable that Rr2 3 and Rr3 3 are both hydrogen atoms.\n\n[Compound (G2)]\n\nIn formula (g2), examples of the hydrocarbon group ofl to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent for Rs include 1 the same groups as those described above for Rr 1 in the aforementioned general formula (g 1).\n\nRs 1 is preferably a fluorine atom or a fluorinated alkyl group.\n\nThe fluorinated alkyl group for Rs 1 is a group in which part or all of the hydrogen atoms of an alkyl group have each been substituted with a fluorine atom, wherein the alkyl group may be either a chain-like group or a cyclic group. Examples of the chain-like alkyl group include the same chain-like alkyl groups as those mentioned above within the description relat› ing to Rr 1 in general formula (gl ), and chain-like alkyl groups having 1 to 15 carbon atoms are preferable. Examples of the cyclic alkyl group include the same cyclic alkyl groups as those mentioned above within the description relating to Rr 1 in general formula (g 1 ), and cyclic alky groups having 3 to 20 1 carbon atoms are preferable.\n\nThe fluorinated alkyl group is preferably a chain-like fluorinated alkyl group having 1 to 15 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 11 carbon atoms, still more preferably 1 to 8 carbon atoms, and most preferably 1 to 4 carbon atoms. Specific examples include groups in which part or all of the hydrogen atoms that constitute a linear alkyl group such as a methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, butyl group, pentyl group, hexyl group, heptyl group, octyl group, nonyl group or decyl group have each been substituted with a fluorine atom, and groups in which part or all of the hydrogen atoms that constitute a branched alkyl group such as a 1-methylethyl group, 1-methylpropyl group, 2-methylpropyl group, 1-me› thylbutyl group, 2-methylbutyl group or 3-methylbutyl group have each been substituted with a fluorine atom.\n\nFurther, the fluorinated alky group for Rs 1 1 may include an atom other than the carbon, hydrogen and fluorine atoms. Examples of this atom other than the carbon, hydrogen and fluorine atoms include an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom and a nitrogen atom.\n\nThe fluorinated alkyl group for Rs 1 is preferably a group in which part or all of the hydrogen atoms that constitute a linear alkyl group have each been substituted with a fluorine atom. A group in which all of the hydrogen atoms that constitute a linear alkyl group have each been substituted with a fluorine atom (namely, a perfluoroalkyl group) is particularly desirable.\n\nRs 2 and Rs 3 are the same as defined above for Rr2 and Rr 3 in general formula (gl).\n\nExamples of the fluorinated alkyl group for Rs 4 include the same groups as those mentioned above for the fluorinated alky group for Rs . 1 1\n\nm may be either O or 1.\n\n## [Compound (G3)]\n\nIn formula (g3), examples of the chain-like alkyl group of 1 to 15 carbon atoms and the cyclic alkyl group of 3 to 20 carbon atoms for Rt 1 include the same groups as those described above for the chain-like alkyl group and cyclic alkyl group for Rr 1 in the aforementioned general formula (gl).\n\nAmong the above possibilities, Rt 1 is preferably a chain› like or cyclic alkyl group of 1 to 15 carbon atoms, more preferably a chain-like alkyl group of 1 to 5 carbon atoms or a cyclic alkyl group of 5 to 10 carbon atoms, and most pref› erably a methyl group.", + "recall": 0.9560439560439561, + "true_md": "Rr 13 is preferably a hydrogen atom, a chain-like alkyl group of 1 to 15 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, a cyclic alkyl group of3 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or an aromatic hydrocarbon group of 5 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, is more prefer› ably a cyclic alkyl group of3 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, and is still more preferably a polycyclic cyclic alkyl group. \n\nIn formula (gl-3), Rr 13 , Rr 23 and Rr3 3 are the same as defined above for Rr 1 , Rr2 and Rr 3 respectively in general formula (gl). \n\nIn formula (gl-2), Rr 12 , Rr $^{22 }$and Rr3 2 are the same as defined above for Rr 11 , Rr $^{21 }$and Rr$^{31 }$respectively in general 55 formula (gl-1). \n\nIt is preferable that Rr2 $^{1 }$and Rr$^{31 }$are either both hydrogen 50 atoms, or are bonded to each other to form a ring, and it is particularly desirable that R 21 and R 31 are both hydrogen atoms. \n\nRr 11 is preferably a hydrogen atom, a chain-like alkyl group of 1 to 15 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, a cyclic alkyl group of3 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or an aromatic hydrocarbon group of 5 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, and is more preferably a chain-like alkyl group of 1 to 15 carbon atoms which may have a substituent or an aromatic hydrocarbon group of 5 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent. \n\nIn formula (gl-1), Rr 11 , Rr 21 and Rr3 1 are the same as defined above for Rr 1 , Rr2 and Rr 3 respectively in general formula (gl). \n\nIn the formulas, Rr$^{11 }$represents a hydrogen atom or a hydro› carbon group of 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, each ofRr2$^{1 }$and Rr$^{31 }$independently represents a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group of 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, and Rr2 $^{1 }$and Rr$^{31 }$may be bonded to each other to form a ring. Rr$^{12 }$represents a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group of 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, each of Rr $^{22 }$and Rr3 2 independently represents a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group of 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, and Rr2$^{2 }$and Rr$^{32 }$may be bonded to each other to form a ring. Rr $^{13 }$represents a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group of 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, each of Rr $^{23 }$and Rr3 $^{3 }$independently represents a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group of 1 to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, and Rr $^{23 }$and Rr$^{33 }$may be bonded to each other to form a ring. \n\n[Chemical Formula 50] \n\nIt is preferable that Rr2$^{3 }$and Rr$^{33 }$are either both hydrogen atoms, or are bonded to each other to form a ring, and it is particularly desirable that Rr2 3 and Rr3 3 are both hydrogen atoms. \n\n## [Compound (G2)]\n\nIn formula (g2), examples of the hydrocarbon group ofl to 20 carbon atoms which may have a substituent for Rs $^{1 }$include the same groups as those described above for Rr 1 in the aforementioned general formula (g 1). \n\nRs 1 is preferably a fluorine atom or a fluorinated alkyl group. \n\nThe fluorinated alkyl group for Rs $^{1 }$is a group in which part or all of the hydrogen atoms of an alkyl group have each been substituted with a fluorine atom, wherein the alkyl group may be either a chain-like group or a cyclic group. Examples of the chain-like alkyl group include the same chain-like alkyl groups as those mentioned above within the description relat› ing to Rr $^{1 }$in general formula (gl ), and chain-like alkyl groups having 1 to 15 carbon atoms are preferable. Examples of the cyclic alkyl group include the same cyclic alkyl groups as those mentioned above within the description relating to Rr 1 in general formula (g 1 ), and cyclic alky 1 groups having 3 to 20 carbon atoms are preferable. \n\nThe fluorinated alkyl group is preferably a chain-like flu- orinated alkyl group having 1 to 15 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 11 carbon atoms, still more preferably 1 to 8 carbon atoms, and most preferably 1 to 4 carbon atoms. Specific examples include groups in which part or all of the hydrogen atoms that constitute a linear alkyl group such as a methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, butyl group, pentyl group, hexyl group, heptyl group, octyl group, nonyl group or decyl group have each been substituted with a fluorine atom, and groups in which part or all of the hydrogen atoms that constitute a branched alkyl group such as a 1-methylethyl group, 1-methylpropyl group, 2-methylpropyl group, 1-me› thylbutyl group, 2-methylbutyl group or 3-methylbutyl group have each been substituted with a fluorine atom. \n\nFurther, the fluorinated alky 1 group for Rs $^{1 }$may include an atom other than the carbon, hydrogen and fluorine atoms. Examples of this atom other than the carbon, hydrogen and fluorine atoms include an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom and a nitrogen atom. \n\nThe fluorinated alkyl group for Rs$^{1 }$is preferably a group in which part or all of the hydrogen atoms that constitute a linear alkyl group have each been substituted with a fluorine atom. A group in which all of the hydrogen atoms that constitute a linear alkyl group have each been substituted with a fluorine atom (namely, a perfluoroalkyl group) is particularly desir- able. \n\nRs$^{2 }$and Rs$^{3 }$are the same as defined above for Rr2 and Rr 3 in general formula (gl). \n\nExamples of the fluorinated alkyl group for Rs $^{4 }$include the same groups as those mentioned above for the fluorinated alky 1 group for Rs 1 . \n\nm may be either O or 1. \n\n## [Compound (G3)]\n\nIn formula (g3), examples of the chain-like alkyl group of 1 to 15 carbon atoms and the cyclic alkyl group of 3 to 20 carbon atoms for Rt 1 include the same groups as those described above for the chain-like alkyl group and cyclic alkyl group for Rr 1 in the aforementioned general formula (gl). \n\nAmong the above possibilities, Rt 1 is preferably a chain› like or cyclic alkyl group of 1 to 15 carbon atoms, more preferably a chain-like alkyl group of 1 to 5 carbon atoms or a cyclic alkyl group of 5 to 10 carbon atoms, and most pref› erably a methyl group. \n\nUS 9,164,380 B2 \n\n117 \n\n118" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9097368051345354, + "doc_id": "e1532e10956b1139f90b85b6d0b987dfa3c531a6a41eee4865b28b27da68c8b8", + "edit_distance": 0.607981220657277, + "f1_score": 0.9366106080206985, + "meteor": 0.7132490231740898, + "precision": 0.9526315789473684, + "pred_md": "25\n\nmis 0 or an integer equal to 1 or to 2; n is O or an integer of from 1 to 30; p is an integer equal to 1, 2 or 3; q is O or 1 ; and s is O or an integer of from 1 to 30;\n\nwith the proviso that ifE is the carbon atom, then q is equal to O, mis 1 and Xi is a bond or a divalent radical selected from among the group consisting of:\n\n\n\nco-)p]-. . . .\n\n- 14. The composition as defined by claim 9, wherem said surfactant, has a total number of carbon atoms being at most 100.\n- 15. The composition as defined by claim 9, wherein the (poly)isocyanate is a homocondensation or heterocondensation product of an alkylene diisocyanate. . .\n- 16. The composition as defined by claim 9, wherem the (poly)isocyanate comprises a (poly)isocy~nate originating from homocondensation or heterocondensat10n of the follow› ing monomeric aliphatic, ( cyclo- or aryl-)aliphatic isocyanates:\n\n1,6-hexamethylene diisocyanate, 1,12-dodecane diisocyanate, cyclobutane-1,3-diisocyanate cyclohexane-1,3 and/or 1,4-diisocyanate, l -isocyanato-3,3, 5-trimethy 1-5-diisocyanatomethy 1 cyclohexane (isophorone diisocyanate, IPDI), isocyanatomethyloctylene diisocyanates (TTI), 2,4 and/or 2,6-hexahydrotoluoylene diisocyanate (H TDI), 6 hexahydro-1,3 and/or 1,4-phenylene diisocyan~te perhydro-2,4' and/or 4,4'-diphenyl~eth~e dnsocyanate (H 12 MDI), and in general aromatic amme precursors or the perhydrogenated carbamates, . . bis-isocyanatomethyl cyclohexanes (m particular 1,3 and 1,4) (BIC), bis-isocyanatomethyl norbomanes (NBDI), 2-methylpentmnethylene diisocyanate (MPDI), tetramethylxylylene diisocyanates (TMXDI!, .. lysine diisocyanate and also the esters oflysme dnsocyanate or triisocyanate (LDI or LTI), 2 4- and/or 2,6-toluoylene diisocyanate, diphenylmethane-2,4' and/or 4,4'-diisocyanate (MDI), 1,3- and/or 1,4-phenylene diisocyanate, triphenylmethane-4,4',4\"'-triisocyanate, and the oligomers of MDI or TD I. . .\n\n5\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\n40\n\n- 17. The composition as defined by claim 9, wher~m the 45 (poly)isocyanate comprises a (poly)isocyanate havmg an average functionality in isocyanate groups at least equal to 2 and at most equal to 8. . .\n- 18. The composition as defined by claim 9, wherem the (poly)isocyanate compounds are maske~. .\n- 19. The composition as defined by claim 9, wherem the at least a mobile hydrogen moiety which reacts with t~~ (poly) isocyanate during heat treatment is a polymer contaimng two or more hydroxyl (alcohol or phenol) groups and/or thiol groups and/or primary or secondary mnine groups ancl(or containing epoxy or carbonate-type precursor groups wh~ch release the hydroxyl groups by reacting w~th an nucleoph1le.\n- 20. The composition as defined by claim 9, wherem the (poly)isocyanate has a hexmnethylene diis\\_ocy~ate-based aliphatic structure having isocyanate funct10nahty greater than2.5%.\n- 21. The composition as defined by claim 11, wherein\\_ the amount of mninoplast resin( s) is from 15% by 25% by weight based on the total weight of the composition without solvent (% dry solids).\n\n50\n\n55\n\n60\n\nUS 8,188,171 B2\n\n26\n\n- 22. The composition as defined by claim 11, further comprising:\n- f) at least one catalyst for the reaction between the com› pound a) and the compound c), and/or at least o~e strong-acid-type compound, or a latent form of s?1d acid, as a catalyst for the reaction between the melmnme and/or urea compounds or the derivatives thereof and the true urethane or carbamate groups.\n- 23. The composition as defined by claim ~1, wherein !he aminoplastic or mninoplast-type resin compnses? melmnme formal and/or urea formal and/or benzoguanmnme formaltype resin. . .\n- 24. The composition as defined by claim 11, wherem at least one of the following conditions is satisfied:\n- a) a ratio by weight of [(poly)isocyanate)l[set of resins (polyester, aminoplast and masked poly1socyanate)] of from 5% to 80% by weight;\n\nb) a ratio by weight of surfactant/masked polyisocyanate of\n\nfrom 0.1 % to 20%;\n\n- c) a level of neutralization of ionic surf~ct~t between half-neutralization and complete neutrahzat10n when an ionic surfactant is present.\n- 25. The composition as defined by claim 22, wherein the amount of catalyst(s) is from 0% to 0.5% by weight based on the total weight of the composition without solvent (% dry solids). . .\n- 26. The composition as defined by claim 12, wherem less than 50% by mass of the surfactant is in a form bound to (poly)isocyanate by a chemical bond. . .\n- 27. The composition as defined by claim 12, wherem the surfactant is an anionic agent having at least a group selected from the group consisting of aryl sulphates, and/or alkyl sulphates, aryl phosphates, alkyl phosphates, aryl phospho› nates, aryl phosphinates, aryl sulphonates, alkyl phosphonates, alkyl phosphinates and alkyl sulph?nates. .\n- 28. The composition as defined by claim 14, wherem the surfactant comprises an anionic surfactant in a neutralized form.\n- 29. The composition as defined by claim 17, wherein the (poly)isocyanate have has a viscosity gr~ater t~an l\\_0 mPa~s, at 25° C. with 100% dry extract, and bemg sohd with 1001/o dry solids. . .\n- 30. The composition as defined by claim 18, wherem the (poly )isocyanate compounds are masked by a compound having at least a group carrying a labile hydr?gen. .\n- 31. The composition as defined by claim 18, wherem the masking agent of the (poly)isocyanate is sele~ted fro~ the group consisting of a hydroxylamine, a hydr~zme, a !nazole derivatives, the imidazole, a phenol, an amide, a hmdered amine, a malonate, a ketoester, a hydroxyamate compounds having hydroxyl or sulhydril groups, cyclohexanol and compounds having carboxylic acid groups. . .\n- 32. The composition as defined by claim 19, wherem the at least one compound carrying at least a mobile hydro~e~moi› ety comprises a polyol selected from the group cons1stmg of acrylic, polyester and polyurethane poly1:1ers. .\n- 33. The composition as defined by claim 32, wherem the polyol has a functionality at least equal t~ 2. .\n- 34. The composition as defined by claim 32, wherem the polyol comprises a polyesterpolyol having a number-average molecular weight of from 500 to 10,000.. .\n- 35. The composition as defined by claim 32, wherem the polyol comprises an acrylic polyol having a number-average molecular weight of from 134 to 50,000.\n- 36. A substrate coated with at least one crosslinked (poly) isocyanate composition as defined by claim 9.\n\n*\n\n*\n\n*\n\n*\n\n*", + "recall": 0.9211195928753181, + "true_md": "US 8,188,171 B2 \n\n26 \n\n25 \n\n14. The composition as defined by claim 9, wherem said surfactant, has a total number of carbon atoms being at most 100. \n\n15. The composition as defined by claim 9, wherein the (poly)isocyanate is a homocondensation or heterocondensa- tion product of an alkylene diisocyanate. . . \n\n16. The composition as defined by claim 9, wherem the (poly)isocyanate comprises a (poly)isocy~nate originating from homocondensation or heterocondensat10n of the follow› ing monomeric aliphatic, ( cyclo- or aryl-)aliphatic isocyan- ates: \n\n1,6-hexamethylene diisocyanate, 1,12-dodecane diisocyanate, cyclobutane-1,3-diisocyanate cyclohexane-1,3 and/or 1,4-diisocyanate, l -isocyanato-3,3, 5-trimethy 1-5-diisocyanatomethy 1 cyclohexane (isophorone diisocyanate, IPDI), isocyanatomethyloctylene diisocyanates (TTI), 2,4 and/or 2,6-hexahydrotoluoylene diisocyanate (H$_{6}$TDI), hexahydro-1,3 and/or 1,4-phenylene diisocyan~te perhydro-2,4’ and/or 4,4’-diphenyl~eth~e dnsocyanate (H$_{12}$MDI), and in general aromatic amme precursors or the perhydrogenated carbamates, . . bis-isocyanatomethyl cyclohexanes (m particular 1,3 and 1,4) (BIC), bis-isocyanatomethyl norbomanes (NBDI), 2-methylpentmnethylene diisocyanate (MPDI), tetramethylxylylene diisocyanates (TMXDI!, .. lysine diisocyanate and also the esters oflysme dnsocyan- ate or triisocyanate (LDI or LTI), 2 4- and/or 2,6-toluoylene diisocyanate, diphenylmethane-2,4’ and/or 4,4’-diisocyanate (MDI), 1,3- and/or 1,4-phenylene diisocyanate, triphenylmethane-4,4’,4\"’-triisocyanate, and the oligomers of MDI or TD I. . . \n\n17. The composition as defined by claim 9, wher~m the (poly)isocyanate comprises a (poly)isocyanate havmg an average functionality in isocyanate groups at least equal to 2 and at most equal to 8. . . \n\n18. The composition as defined by claim 9, wherem the (poly)isocyanate compounds are maske~. . \n\n19. The composition as defined by claim 9, wherem the at least a mobile hydrogen moiety which reacts with t~~ (poly) isocyanate during heat treatment is a polymer contaimng two or more hydroxyl (alcohol or phenol) groups and/or thiol groups and/or primary or secondary mnine groups ancl(or containing epoxy or carbonate-type precursor groups wh~ch release the hydroxyl groups by reacting w~th an nucleoph1le. \n\n20. The composition as defined by claim 9, wherem the (poly)isocyanate has a hexmnethylene diis\\_ocy~ate-based aliphatic structure having isocyanate funct10nahty greater than2.5%. \n\n21. The composition as defined by claim 11, wherein\\_ the amount of mninoplast resin( s) is from 15% by 25% by weight based on the total weight of the composition without solvent (% dry solids). \n\n* * * * * \n\n36. A substrate coated with at least one crosslinked (poly) isocyanate composition as defined by claim 9. \n\n35. The composition as defined by claim 32, wherem the polyol comprises an acrylic polyol having a number-average molecular weight of from 134 to 50,000. \n\n34. The composition as defined by claim 32, wherem the polyol comprises a polyesterpolyol having a number-average molecular weight of from 500 to 10,000.. . \n\n33. The composition as defined by claim 32, wherem the polyol has a functionality at least equal t~ 2. . \n\n32. The composition as defined by claim 19, wherem the at least one compound carrying at least a mobile hydro~e~moi› ety comprises a polyol selected from the group cons1stmg of acrylic, polyester and polyurethane poly1:1ers. . \n\n31. The composition as defined by claim 18, wherem the masking agent of the (poly)isocyanate is sele~ted fro~ the group consisting of a hydroxylamine, a hydr~zme, a !nazole derivatives, the imidazole, a phenol, an amide, a hmdered amine, a malonate, a ketoester, a hydroxyamate compounds having hydroxyl or sulhydril groups, cyclohexanol and com- pounds having carboxylic acid groups. . . \n\n30. The composition as defined by claim 18, wherem the (poly )isocyanate compounds are masked by a compound hav- ing at least a group carrying a labile hydr?gen. . \n\n29. The composition as defined by claim 17, wherein the (poly)isocyanate have has a viscosity gr~ater t~an l\\_0 mPa~s, at 25° C. with 100% dry extract, and bemg sohd with 1001/o dry solids. . . \n\n28. The composition as defined by claim 14, wherem the surfactant comprises an anionic surfactant in a neutralized form. \n\n27. The composition as defined by claim 12, wherem the surfactant is an anionic agent having at least a group selected from the group consisting of aryl sulphates, and/or alkyl sulphates, aryl phosphates, alkyl phosphates, aryl phospho› nates, aryl phosphinates, aryl sulphonates, alkyl phospho- nates, alkyl phosphinates and alkyl sulph?nates. . \n\n26. The composition as defined by claim 12, wherem less than 50% by mass of the surfactant is in a form bound to (poly)isocyanate by a chemical bond. . . \n\n25. The composition as defined by claim 22, wherein the amount of catalyst(s) is from 0% to 0.5% by weight based on the total weight of the composition without solvent (% dry solids). . . \n\n24. The composition as defined by claim 11, wherem at least one of the following conditions is satisfied: \n\n23. The composition as defined by claim ~1, wherein !he aminoplastic or mninoplast-type resin compnses? melmnme formal and/or urea formal and/or benzoguanmnme formal- type resin. . . \n\n22. The composition as defined by claim 11, further com- prising: \n\n- f) at least one catalyst for the reaction between the com› pound a) and the compound c), and/or at least o~e strong-acid-type compound, or a latent form of s?1d acid, as a catalyst for the reaction between the melmnme and/or urea compounds or the derivatives thereof and the true urethane or carbamate groups. \n\n- a) a ratio by weight of [(poly)isocyanate)l[set of resins (polyester, aminoplast and masked poly1socyanate)] of from 5% to 80% by weight; \n\n- b) a ratio by weight of surfactant/masked polyisocyanate of from 0.1 % to 20%; \n\n- c) a level of neutralization of ionic surf~ct~t between half-neutralization and complete neutrahzat10n when an ionic surfactant is present. \n\nmis 0 or an integer equal to 1 or to 2; n is O or an integer of from 1 to 30; p is an integer equal to 1, 2 or 3; q is O or 1 ; and s is O or an integer of from 1 to 30; with the proviso that ifE is the carbon atom, then q is equal to O, mis 1 and Xi is a bond or a divalent radical selected from among the group consisting of: -Ai-, -Yi-, -Ai-Yi-, ---O-C(=0)---0- and -[C(O)m co-)p]-. . . ." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9324514688704192, + "doc_id": "214027bd18624753a6cd0e3c3ab7457d978a358d142421b92344a5888456bdff", + "edit_distance": 0.7090909090909091, + "f1_score": 0.9892473118279569, + "meteor": 0.7192237820969211, + "precision": 0.997289972899729, + "pred_md": "US 2019/0287691 Al\n\n## SEPARATION OF METAL IONS BY LIQUID-LIQUID EXTRACTION\n\n## CROSS REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS\n\n[0001] This application is a Continuation-in-Part oflnter› national Application No. PCT/US2017/048934, filed Aug. 28, 2017, designating the U.S. and published as WO 2018/ 097871 A2 on May 31, 2018, which claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/505,458, filed on May 12, 2017 and 62/401,687, filed on Sep. 29, 2016, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. Any and all applications for which a foreign or a domestic priority is claimed is/are identified in the Application Data Sheet filed herewith and is/are hereby incorporated by reference in their entireties under 37 C.F.R. § 1.57.\n\n## STATEMENT REGARDING FEDERALLY SPONSORED R&D\n\n[0002] The invention was made with government support under Contract No. DE-AC02-05CH 11231 between the U.S. Department of Energy and the University of California. The government has certain rights in the invention. This work was supported by the U.S. Department of Energy, Office of Science, Office of Basic Energy Sciences, Chemi› cal Sciences, Geosciences, and Biosciences Division at LBNL under Contract DE-AC02-05CH11231.\n\n## BACKGROUND\n\n## Field\n\n[0003] The present disclosure 1s related to separation processes for metal ions.\n\n## Description of the Related Art\n\n[0004] Owing to concerns related to global warming due to CO 2 emission by traditional energy sources, nuclear energy has emerged as an alternative energy source. How› ever, disposing of nuclear waste is a major challenge.\n\n[0005] A few processes, using liquid-liquid extraction, are under development with limited success in term of selec› tivity and efficacy: TALSPEAK process (USA), GANEX process (France), and DIAMEX-SANEX process (France). The purification of the element actinium (Ac 3 +) is also catching growing attention. In fact, actinium isotopes are emerging radioactive sources for cancer treatments such as the \"targeted alpha therapies.\" The methods of production of Ac 3 + isotopes generate Ln 3 + fission products in addition to the initial material that is usually made of thorium (Th 4 +). Current purification protocols for actinium involve numer› ous chromatographic steps that require different chemical media in order to obtain a purified fraction of Ac 3 +.\n\n## SUMMARY\n\n[0006] In some embodiments, a method of processing spent nuclear fuel is provided. This comprises obtaining spent nuclear fuel dissolved in an acidic medium, contacting the dissolved spent nuclear fuel with an octadentate ligand and an organic phase to generate a mixture, and separating an aqueous phase enriched for Pu 4 + from the mixture.\n\n[0007] In some embodiments, a method for enriching a metal ion is provided. The method comprises contacting a\n\n1\n\nSep. 19,2019\n\nfirst aqueous phase with an organic phase to generate a mixture, wherein the first aqueous phase comprises: a plu› rality of metal ions; and an octadentate ligand, and wherein the aqueous phase has an acidic pH of less than 1. The method further includes separating from the mixture a second aqueous phase enriched for a metal ion of the plurality of metal ions.\n\n[0008] In some embodiments, a method of preparing a medical isotope is provided. The method comprises obtain› ing a metallic precursor dissolved under an acidic condition, wherein the metallic precursor comprises a medical isotope; contacting the dissolved metallic precursor with an octaden› tate ligand and an organic phase to generate a mixture; and separating the medical isotope from one or more metal ions in the dissolved metallic precursor based on an interaction between the octadentate ligand and the medical isotope.\n\n[0009] In some embodiments, a method of separating metal ions for nuclear forensics is provided. The method comprises obtaining a sample derived from a nuclear mate› rial, wherein the sample comprises UO2 2 +, Ac 3 +, Pu 4 +, and Np 4 +; contacting the sample with an octadentate ligand to generate a first mixture, wherein the first mixture has an acidic pH of 1 or lower; separating UO2 2 + and Ac 3 + from Pu 4 + and Np 4 + in the mixture based on an interaction or lack of interaction between the octadentate ligand and each of UO2 2 +, Ac 3 +, Pu 4 +, and Np 4 +, to generate a second mixture comprising the Pu 4 + and Np 4 +; and further separating each metal within both mixtures by classical techniques.\n\n[0010] In some embodiments, a method of separating metal ions is provided. The method comprises contacting a liquid composition comprising a plurality of metal ions with an octadentate ligand to generate a mixture, under condi› tions sufficient to form a metal ion-ligand complex com› prising a metal ion of the plurality of metal ions, and separating a first fraction of the mixture enriched for the metal ion-ligand complex from a second fraction depleted for the metal ion-ligand complex, wherein the first fraction of the mixture has an acidic pH ofless than 1. The plurality of metal ions are selected from the group consisting of: a p-, dor f-block element of period 5 or greater, a group 3 element, or a group 4 element\n\n[0011] In some embodiments, a method of separating trivalent metal ions from tetravalent metal ions is provided. The method comprises providing an aqueous solution com› prising tetravalent metal ions and trivalent metal ions, wherein the solution has an acidic pH; adding a HOPO chelator to the aqueous solution; and performing an extrac› tion against the aqueous solution, wherein the HOPO chela› tor functions as a holdback agent to keep the tetravalent metal ions in the aqueous solution, while allowing the trivalent metal ions to be removed via decanting at the end of the extraction.\n\n[0012] In some embodiments, a method for separating metal ions is provided. The method comprises providing an aqueous solution comprising a first metal ion and a second metal ion, wherein the solution has an acidic pH; adding a HOPO chelator to the aqueous solution; and performing an extraction against the aqueous solution. The HOPO chelator functions as a holdback agent to selectively keep the first metal ion in the aqueous solution, while allowing the second metal ion to go into an organic phase during the extraction.", + "recall": 0.9813333333333333, + "true_md": "US 2019/0287691 Al \n\n1 \n\nSep. 19,2019 \n\n# SEPARATION OF METAL IONS BY LIQUID-LIQUID EXTRACTION\n\n## CROSS REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS\n\n## STATEMENT REGARDING FEDERALLY SPONSORED R&D\n\n## BACKGROUND\n\n## Field\n\n## Description of the Related Art\n\n## SUMMARY\n\n[0012] In some embodiments, a method for separating metal ions is provided. The method comprises providing an aqueous solution comprising a first metal ion and a second metal ion, wherein the solution has an acidic pH; adding a HOPO chelator to the aqueous solution; and performing an extraction against the aqueous solution. The HOPO chelator functions as a holdback agent to selectively keep the first metal ion in the aqueous solution, while allowing the second metal ion to go into an organic phase during the extraction. \n\n[0007] In some embodiments, a method for enriching a metal ion is provided. The method comprises contacting a \n\n[0006] In some embodiments, a method of processing spent nuclear fuel is provided. This comprises obtaining spent nuclear fuel dissolved in an acidic medium, contacting the dissolved spent nuclear fuel with an octadentate ligand and an organic phase to generate a mixture, and separating an aqueous phase enriched for Pu 4 + from the mixture. \n\n[0011] In some embodiments, a method of separating trivalent metal ions from tetravalent metal ions is provided. The method comprises providing an aqueous solution com› prising tetravalent metal ions and trivalent metal ions, wherein the solution has an acidic pH; adding a HOPO chelator to the aqueous solution; and performing an extrac› tion against the aqueous solution, wherein the HOPO chela› tor functions as a holdback agent to keep the tetravalent metal ions in the aqueous solution, while allowing the trivalent metal ions to be removed via decanting at the end of the extraction. \n\n[0005] A few processes, using liquid-liquid extraction, are under development with limited success in term of selec› tivity and efficacy: TALSPEAK process (USA), GANEX process (France), and DIAMEX-SANEX process (France). The purification of the element actinium (Ac $^{3}$+) is also catching growing attention. In fact, actinium isotopes are emerging radioactive sources for cancer treatments such as the \"targeted alpha therapies.\" The methods of production of Ac 3 + isotopes generate Ln 3 + fission products in addition to the initial material that is usually made of thorium (Th $^{4}$+). Current purification protocols for actinium involve numer› ous chromatographic steps that require different chemical media in order to obtain a purified fraction of Ac $^{3}$+. \n\n[0004] Owing to concerns related to global warming due to CO$_{2 }$ emission by traditional energy sources, nuclear energy has emerged as an alternative energy source. How› ever, disposing of nuclear waste is a major challenge. \n\n[0010] In some embodiments, a method of separating metal ions is provided. The method comprises contacting a liquid composition comprising a plurality of metal ions with an octadentate ligand to generate a mixture, under condi› tions sufficient to form a metal ion-ligand complex com› prising a metal ion of the plurality of metal ions, and separating a first fraction of the mixture enriched for the metal ion-ligand complex from a second fraction depleted for the metal ion-ligand complex, wherein the first fraction of the mixture has an acidic pH ofless than 1. The plurality of metal ions are selected from the group consisting of: a p-, d- or f-block element of period 5 or greater, a group 3 element, or a group 4 element \n\n[0003] The present disclosure 1s related to separation processes for metal ions. \n\n[0009] In some embodiments, a method of separating metal ions for nuclear forensics is provided. The method comprises obtaining a sample derived from a nuclear mate› rial, wherein the sample comprises UO2 2 +, Ac 3 +, Pu 4 +, and Np $^{4}$+; contacting the sample with an octadentate ligand to generate a first mixture, wherein the first mixture has an acidic pH of 1 or lower; separating UO2 2 + and Ac 3 + from Pu 4 + and Np 4 + in the mixture based on an interaction or lack of interaction between the octadentate ligand and each of UO$_{2 }$ 2 +, Ac 3 +, Pu 4 +, and Np 4 +, to generate a second mixture comprising the Pu $^{4}$+ and Np $^{4}$+; and further separating each metal within both mixtures by classical techniques. \n\n[0002] The invention was made with government support under Contract No. DE-AC02-05CH 11231 between the U.S. Department of Energy and the University of California. The government has certain rights in the invention. This work was supported by the U.S. Department of Energy, Office of Science, Office of Basic Energy Sciences, Chemi› cal Sciences, Geosciences, and Biosciences Division at LBNL under Contract DE-AC02-05CH11231. \n\n[0008] In some embodiments, a method of preparing a medical isotope is provided. The method comprises obtain› ing a metallic precursor dissolved under an acidic condition, wherein the metallic precursor comprises a medical isotope; contacting the dissolved metallic precursor with an octaden› tate ligand and an organic phase to generate a mixture; and separating the medical isotope from one or more metal ions in the dissolved metallic precursor based on an interaction between the octadentate ligand and the medical isotope. \n\nfirst aqueous phase with an organic phase to generate a mixture, wherein the first aqueous phase comprises: a plu› rality of metal ions; and an octadentate ligand, and wherein the aqueous phase has an acidic pH of less than 1. The method further includes separating from the mixture a second aqueous phase enriched for a metal ion of the plurality of metal ions. \n\n[0001] This application is a Continuation-in-Part oflnter› national Application No. PCT/US2017/048934, filed Aug. 28, 2017, designating the U.S. and published as WO 2018/ 097871 A2 on May 31, 2018, which claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/505,458, filed on May 12, 2017 and 62/401,687, filed on Sep. 29, 2016, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. Any and all applications for which a foreign or a domestic priority is claimed is/are identified in the Application Data Sheet filed herewith and is/are hereby incorporated by reference in their entireties under 37 C.F.R. § 1.57." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9737309790815002, + "doc_id": "cb12b56b3172238e4e4f0e9c730d42afbf44f23f204c5e92517cd50fd05af04d", + "edit_distance": 0.3010033444816054, + "f1_score": 0.993103448275862, + "meteor": 0.8910226871272946, + "precision": 0.998019801980198, + "pred_md": "US 2020/0352177 Al\n\n## LEAVENING AGENTS\n\n## CROSS REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS\n\n[0001] This application claims priority to and is a Con› tinuation-in-Part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 16/312, 175 filed Dec. 20, 2018, which claims priority as a national stage application of International Application No. PCT/ GB2017 /051831 which has an international filing date of Jun. 22, 2017, and which claims priority to foreign appli› cations No. GB1610976.1 filed Jun. 23, 2016, No. GB1613385.2 filedAug. 3, 2016, GB1620894.4 filed Dec. 8, 2016 and GB! 706373.6 filed Apr. 21, 2017, the contents of each of which is hereby incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. This application also claims priority to foreign applications No. GB1911296.0, filed Aug. 7, 2019, and No. GB2006222.0, filed Apr. 28, 2020, the contents of each of which is hereby incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.\n\n## FIELD\n\n[0002] The present invention relates to a leavening agent suitable for use in baking.\n\n## Definitions\n\n[0003] As used herein the following terms shall have the meanings ascribed below:\n\n[0004] \"Acidulant\" shall mean an acid or acid salt, having Replaceable Hydrogen, which is permitted for food use under prevailing regulations at the time of use;\n\n[0005] \"Baking\" shall mean any method of treating a leavenable product which involves heating the product to a temperature above 60° C., so as to form a crumb, including oven baking, microwaving, frying and grilling.\n\n[0006] \"GDL\" shall mean glucono-delta-lactone.\n\n[0007] \"MSC\" shall mean mono sodium citrate;\n\n[0008] \"MCPa\" shall mean anhydrous mono calcium phosphate;\n\n[0009] \"MCP m\" shall mean mono calcium phosphate monohydrate;\n\n[0010] \"Neutralising Value\" is the standard measure for assessing the effectiveness of Acidulants in the bakery industry. It may be determined as described on page 49 of the standard reference work \"Chemical Leavening Agents\" by Brose, Becker and Bouchain published in New York by Chemische Fabrik Budenheim (1996) referring to the method of \"Laboratoriumsbuch fur den Lebensmittelche› miker\" by Adolph Beythien and W Diemair published by Verlag Gisela Lied!; 8. MunchenAflage (1971 )-8 th Munich edition, Page: 11-17;\n\n[0011] \"Non-acidic\" shall mean having a Neutralising Value less than 2; \"Precipitating Cations\" shall mean alka› line earth metal cations that precipitate carbonate, and/or precipitate or complex with the Acidulant when heated in a bakery mix;\n\n[0012] \"Precipitant\" shall mean a water soluble salt of Precipitating Cations permitted for food use under prevail› ing regulations at the time of use;\n\n[0013] \"Precipitating Acidulant\" shall mean an Acidulant which is a partially neutralised salt of Precipitating Cations and a di- or polyvalent acid;\n\n[0014] \"Replaceable Hydrogen\" shall mean hydrogen having a pKa between 3 and 14, when in aqueous solution;\n\n1\n\nNov. 12, 2020\n\n[0015] \"SALP\" shall mean sodium aluminium phosphate;\n\n[0016] \"SAPP\" shall mean sodium acid pyrophosphate.\n\n[0017] \"Water Soluble\" shall mean having a water solu› bility greater than 3% by weight at 20° C. and preferably greater than 5%.\n\n[0018] The Problem\n\n[0019] Chemical leavening agents conventionally com› prise an alkali metal bicarbonate and an Acidulant, which reacts with the bicarbonate in an acid/base reaction to release carbon dioxide,\n\n## NaHC0 3 +HA□NaA+H 2 0±C0 2\n\n[0020] where HA is an acid having at least one replaceable hydrogen.\n\n[0021] Many of the cheaper acids, such as the stronger mineral or carboxylic acids, e.g. hydrochloric, acetic or citric acid, are too active to be used as Acidulants in industrial bakery applications, as they react too vigorously with the bicarbonate at room temperature, releasing too much of the carbon dioxide prior to baking.\n\n[0022] To avoid premature or excessively rapid release of carbon dioxide it has proved necessary to use more expen› sive acids such as sodium acid pyrophosphate, which can leave an unpleasant aftertaste when used in high levels, sodium aluminium phosphate, which is subject to health concerns, or the even more expensive glucono-delta-lactone. Currently by far the most commonly used Acidulant is SAPP. The Acidulant contributes a substantial part of the cost of a normal baking powder.\n\n[0023] We have now discovered that, even with these Acidulants, relatively little of the carbon dioxide available in theory is released at the critical stage in baking when the crumb structure is forming, which starts around the gela› tinisation temperature of starch between 60 and 70° C. Before this stage the mix is too mobile to retain most of the evolved gas, whereas beyond it the solidification of the mixture immobilises the reacting species and prevents the reaction from going to completion.\n\n[0024] If the pH of the product is too high, e.g. above 8 there are problems with discolouration and the development of off flavours. These are particularly severe with sweetened products such as cakes. This may result from using a stoichiometric deficiency of Acidulant.\n\n[0025] A major problem in commercial bakery is extend› ing the shelflife of baked products. This may be achieved by lowering the water activity, but additives used for this purpose, such as salt or calcium phosphate all have substan› tial drawbacks when added in sufficient amounts to produce a useful effect. The alternative is to use a preservative.\n\n[0026] The only effective preservatives suitable for food use need acid conditions. They are largely ineffective at any pH above 6.5, and generally require a pH value of about 6, or even lower, to be fully effective. To achieve such low values using the weak acids which are all that can be tolerated in baking powder would be difficult or impossible. In practice the result is an expensive and unsatisfactory compromise achieving a barely adequate pH with a large excess of expensive Acidulant, and often amounts of pre› servative in excess of those usually recommended, which many consumers find objectionable.\n\n[0027] Excess Acidulant also causes premature release of carbon dioxide and reduced leavening. Formulators of leav› ening systems have always striven to get as close as possible to the stoichiometric ratio of Acidulant to bicarbonate. Too", + "recall": 0.9882352941176471, + "true_md": "[0001] This application claims priority to and is a Con› tinuation-in-Part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 16/312, 175 filed Dec. 20, 2018, which claims priority as a national stage application of International Application No. PCT/ GB2017 /051831 which has an international filing date of Jun. 22, 2017, and which claims priority to foreign appli› cations No. GB1610976.1 filed Jun. 23, 2016, No. GB1613385.2 filedAug. 3, 2016, GB1620894.4 filed Dec. 8, 2016 and GB! 706373.6 filed Apr. 21, 2017, the contents of each of which is hereby incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. This application also claims priority to foreign applications No. GB1911296.0, filed Aug. 7, 2019, and No. GB2006222.0, filed Apr. 28, 2020, the contents of each of which is hereby incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. \n\n[0002] The present invention relates to a leavening agent suitable for use in baking. \n\n[0005] \"Baking\" shall mean any method of treating a leavenable product which involves heating the product to a temperature above 60° C., so as to form a crumb, including oven baking, microwaving, frying and grilling. \n\n[0009] \"MCP m\" shall mean mono calcium phosphate monohydrate; \n\n[0010] \"Neutralising Value\" is the standard measure for assessing the effectiveness of Acidulants in the bakery industry. It may be determined as described on page 49 of the standard reference work \"Chemical Leavening Agents\" by Brose, Becker and Bouchain published in New York by Chemische Fabrik Budenheim (1996) referring to the method of \"Laboratoriumsbuch fur den Lebensmittelche› miker\" by Adolph Beythien and W Diemair published by Verlag Gisela Lied!; 8. MunchenAflage (1971 )-8 $^{th }$Munich edition, Page: 11-17; \n\n[0011] \"Non-acidic\" shall mean having a Neutralising Value less than 2; \"Precipitating Cations\" shall mean alka› line earth metal cations that precipitate carbonate, and/or precipitate or complex with the Acidulant when heated in a bakery mix; \n\n[0012] \"Precipitant\" shall mean a water soluble salt of Precipitating Cations permitted for food use under prevail› ing regulations at the time of use; \n\n[0013] \"Precipitating Acidulant\" shall mean an Acidulant which is a partially neutralised salt of Precipitating Cations and a di- or polyvalent acid; \n\n[0014] \"Replaceable Hydrogen\" shall mean hydrogen having a pKa between 3 and 14, when in aqueous solution; \n\n[0019] Chemical leavening agents conventionally com› prise an alkali metal bicarbonate and an Acidulant, which reacts with the bicarbonate in an acid/base reaction to release carbon dioxide, \n\n[0020] where HA is an acid having at least one replaceable hydrogen. \n\n[0021] Many of the cheaper acids, such as the stronger mineral or carboxylic acids, e.g. hydrochloric, acetic or citric acid, are too active to be used as Acidulants in industrial bakery applications, as they react too vigorously with the bicarbonate at room temperature, releasing too much of the carbon dioxide prior to baking. \n\n[0022] To avoid premature or excessively rapid release of carbon dioxide it has proved necessary to use more expen› sive acids such as sodium acid pyrophosphate, which can leave an unpleasant aftertaste when used in high levels, sodium aluminium phosphate, which is subject to health concerns, or the even more expensive glucono-delta-lactone. Currently by far the most commonly used Acidulant is SAPP. The Acidulant contributes a substantial part of the cost of a normal baking powder. \n\n[0023] We have now discovered that, even with these Acidulants, relatively little of the carbon dioxide available in theory is released at the critical stage in baking when the crumb structure is forming, which starts around the gela› tinisation temperature of starch between 60 and 70° C. Before this stage the mix is too mobile to retain most of the evolved gas, whereas beyond it the solidification of the mixture immobilises the reacting species and prevents the reaction from going to completion. \n\n[0024] If the pH of the product is too high, e.g. above 8 there are problems with discolouration and the development of off flavours. These are particularly severe with sweetened products such as cakes. This may result from using a stoichiometric deficiency of Acidulant. \n\n[0025] A major problem in commercial bakery is extend› ing the shelflife of baked products. This may be achieved by lowering the water activity, but additives used for this purpose, such as salt or calcium phosphate all have substan› tial drawbacks when added in sufficient amounts to produce a useful effect. The alternative is to use a preservative. \n\n[0026] The only effective preservatives suitable for food use need acid conditions. They are largely ineffective at any pH above 6.5, and generally require a pH value of about 6, or even lower, to be fully effective. To achieve such low values using the weak acids which are all that can be tolerated in baking powder would be difficult or impossible. In practice the result is an expensive and unsatisfactory compromise achieving a barely adequate pH with a large excess of expensive Acidulant, and often amounts of pre› servative in excess of those usually recommended, which many consumers find objectionable. \n\n[0027] Excess Acidulant also causes premature release of carbon dioxide and reduced leavening. Formulators of leav› ening systems have always striven to get as close as possible to the stoichiometric ratio of Acidulant to bicarbonate. Too \n\nUS 2020/0352177 Al \n\n1 \n\nNov. 12, 2020 \n\n$$NaHC0 3 +HA □NaA+H 2 0±C0 2 $$\n\n## LEAVENING AGENTS\n\n## CROSS REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS\n\n## FIELD\n\n## Definitions\n\n[0003] As used herein the following terms shall have the meanings ascribed below: \n\n[0004] \"Acidulant\" shall mean an acid or acid salt, having Replaceable Hydrogen, which is permitted for food use under prevailing regulations at the time of use; \n\n[0006] \"GDL\" shall mean glucono-delta-lactone. \n\n[0007] \"MSC\" shall mean mono sodium citrate; \n\n[0008] \"MCPa\" shall mean anhydrous mono calcium phosphate; \n\n[0015] \"SALP\" shall mean sodium aluminium phosphate; \n\n[0016] \"SAPP\" shall mean sodium acid pyrophosphate. \n\n[0017] \"Water Soluble\" shall mean having a water solu› bility greater than 3% by weight at 20° C. and preferably greater than 5%. \n\n[0018] The Problem" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.42464940676773777, + "doc_id": "156b2edaf141e44927fa200e224c8955dd5d32427496818f55a80eaae12da960", + "edit_distance": 0.5952380952380952, + "f1_score": 0.6799999999999999, + "meteor": 0.8526306450181882, + "precision": 0.5151515151515151, + "pred_md": "Patent Application Publication\n\nSep. 19, 2019 Sheet 68 of 106 US 2019/0287691 Al\n\nFIG. 43C\n\nFIG. 43C\n\nLeft to right and top to bottom: CCI-IC, CCCH. CCCC (uncomplexed), HHHH:Zr:Na", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Patent Application Publication \n\nSep. 19, 2019 Sheet 68 of 106 \n\nUS 2019/0287691 Al \n\nFIG. 43C" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5889513097505535, + "doc_id": "66a73e4f33e0bf4041d68ad908a9afb1c861755c4d3f3802f72472c423e43d87", + "edit_distance": 0.36363636363636365, + "f1_score": 0.7777777777777779, + "meteor": 0.6602570273392375, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Patent Application Publication\n\nSep. 19, 2019\n\nSheet 65 of 106 US 2019/0287691 Al", + "recall": 0.6363636363636364, + "true_md": "Patent Application Publication \n\nSep. 19, 2019 Sheet 65 of 106 \n\nUS 2019/0287691 Al \n\nQ. N ~ (!) - LL" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9296078168168617, + "doc_id": "354ca28362bb2be64a2b8dbb839a8816272eb26115296562e0b37c688a00d7e2", + "edit_distance": 0.8809338521400778, + "f1_score": 0.9694835680751173, + "meteor": 0.7015152396359267, + "precision": 0.9649532710280374, + "pred_md": "37\n\n38\n\nand which, after modification, have their hydrogen atoms preferably substituted by alkyleneoxy units as described herein below, and tertiary amine units having the formula:\n\n5\n\n10\n\nwhich are the branching points of the main and secondary backbone chains, B representing a continuation of the chain 15 structure by branching. The tertiary units have no replace› able hydrogen atom and are therefore not modified by substitution with an alkyleneoxy unit.\n\nR is C2 -C12 alkylene, C -C 3 6 branched alkylene, and mixtures thereof, preferred branched alkylene is 1,2propylene; most preferred R is ethylene. The preferred polyalkyleneimines of the present invention have backbones which comprise the same R unit, for example, all units are ethylene. Most preferred backbone comprises R groups which are all ethylene units.\n\nThe polyalkyleneimines of the present invention are modified by substitution of each N-H unit hydrogen with an alkyleneoxy unit having the formula:\n\nwherein R 1 is C -C 2 12 alkylene, preferably ethylene, 1,2propylene, 1,3-propylene, 1,2-butylene, 1,4-butylene, and mixtures thereof, more preferably ethylene and 1,2propylene, most preferably ethylene. R 2 is hydrogen, CcC 4 alkyl, and mixtures thereof, preferably hydrogen or methyl, more preferably hydrogen.\n\nThe molecular weight of the backbone prior to modifica› tion as well as the value of the index n is largely dependent upon the benefits and properties which the formulator wishes to provide. For example, U.S. Pat. No. 5,565,145 Watson et al., issued Oct. 15, 1996, discloses a preferred polyamine having a backbone Mw of 1800 daltons and about 7 ethyleneoxy units per nitrogen as a modified polyalkyle› neimine suitable for use as hydrophobic, inter alia, soot, grime, soil suspending agent. The substantivity of alkyleneoxy substituted polyamines toward fabric surface can be adjusted by the formulator to meet the needs of the specific embodiment.\n\nU.S. Pat. No. 4,891,160 Vander Meer, issued Jan. 2, 1990; U.S. Pat. No. 4,597,898, Vander Meer, issued Jul. 1, 1986 describe a polyamine having a backbone Mw of 189 daltons and an average of from about 15 to 18 ethyleneoxy units per nitrogen as a suitable soil suspending agent for hydrophilic, inter alia, clay soils.\n\nA further description of poly amine soil suspending agents suitable for use in the present invention is found in; U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/103,135; U.S. Pat. No. 6,004, 922 Watson et al., issued Dec. 21, 1999; and U.S. Pat. No. 4,664,848 Oh et al., issued May 12, 1987 all of which are included herein by reference.\n\nThe polyamines herein can be prepared, for example, by polymerizing ethyleneimine in the presence of a catalyst such as carbon dioxide, sodium bisulfite, sulfuric acid, hydrogen peroxide, hydrochloric acid, acetic acid, etc. Spe› cific methods for preparing these polyamine backbones are disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 2,182,306, Ulrich et al., issued Dec. 5, 1939; U.S. Pat. No. 3,033,746, Mayle et al., issued\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n60\n\n65\n\nMay 8, 1962; U.S. Pat. No. 2,208,095, Esselmann et al., issued Jul. 16, 1940; U.S. Pat. No. 2,806,839, Crowther, issued Sep. 17, 1957; and U.S. Pat. No. 2,553,696, Wilson, issued May 21, 1951; all herein incorporated by reference. II. Methods of Use\n\nThe methods of the present invention relate to treating surfaces, preferably fabrics, with the stable, aqueous com› positions of the present invention comprising the step of contacting the surface with the stable, aqueous composition. As used herein, the term \"fabrics\" is meant to encompass a variety of fabrics and articles composed of fabric and/or fibers, including but not limited to clothes, curtains, drapes, upholstered furniture, carpeting, bed linens, bath linens, tablecloths, sleeping bags, tents, car interior ( e.g., car carpet, fabric car seats), and the like. The methods more specifically relate to reducing malodor impression on surfaces, espe› cially fabrics, and/or reducing the appearance of wrinkles on fabrics. The surfaces are preferably treated by either spray› ing dilute aqueous compositions of the present invention onto the surfaces via a spray dispenser, or by adding the concentrated compositions of the present invention to, for example, a wash and/or rinse cycle in a typical laundry process.\n\n## A MALODOR CONTROL\n\nA preferred method herein includes a method of reducing malodor impression on a surface (preferably fabrics) having malodor impression, the method comprising the step of contacting the surface with a stable, aqueous composition as described hereinbefore.\n\nThe composition for reducing malodor impression herein can be used by distributing, e.g., by placing the aqueous solution into a dispensing means, preferably a spray dis› penser and spraying an effective amount onto the desired surface or article. An effective amount as defined herein means an amount sufficient to absorb odor to the point that it is not discernible by the human sense of smell yet not so much as to saturate or create a pool of liquid on said article or surface and so that when dry there is no visual deposit readily discernible. Distribution can be achieved by using a spray device, a roller, a pad, etc. For odor control, an effective amount, as defined herein, means an amount suf› ficient to absorb odor to effect a noticeable reduction in the perceived odor, preferably to the point that it is not discernible, by the human sense of smell.\n\nPreferably, the present invention does not encompass distributing the solution on to shiny surfaces including, e.g., chrome, glass, smooth vinyl, leather, shiny plastic, shiny wood, etc. It is preferable not to distribute the solution onto shiny surfaces because spotting and filming can more readily occur on the surfaces. Furthermore, the solution is not for use on human skin, especially when an antimicrobial preservative is present in the composition because skin irrita› tion can occur.\n\nThe present invention encompasses the method of spray› ing an effective amount of the composition for reducing malodor onto household surfaces. Preferably said household surfaces are selected from the group consisting of countertops, cabinets, walls, floors, bathroom surfaces and kitchen surfaces.\n\nThe present invention encompasses the method of spray› ing a mist of an effective amount of the composition for reducing malodor onto fabric and/or fabric articles. Preferably, said fabric and/or fabric articles include, but are not limited to, clothes, curtains, drapes, upholstered furniture, carpeting, bed linens, bath linens, tablecloths, sleeping bags, tents, car interior, e.g., car carpet, fabric car seats, etc.\n\nUS 6,503,413 B2", + "recall": 0.9740566037735849, + "true_md": "37 \n\nUS 6,503,413 B2 \n\n38 \n\nand which, after modification, have their hydrogen atoms preferably substituted by alkyleneoxy units as described herein below, and tertiary amine units having the formula: \n\nMay 8, 1962; U.S. Pat. No. 2,208,095, Esselmann et al., issued Jul. 16, 1940; U.S. Pat. No. 2,806,839, Crowther, issued Sep. 17, 1957; and U.S. Pat. No. 2,553,696, Wilson, issued May 21, 1951; all herein incorporated by reference. II. Methods of Use \n\nThe methods of the present invention relate to treating surfaces, preferably fabrics, with the stable, aqueous com› positions of the present invention comprising the step of contacting the surface with the stable, aqueous composition. As used herein, the term \"fabrics\" is meant to encompass a variety of fabrics and articles composed of fabric and/or fibers, including but not limited to clothes, curtains, drapes, upholstered furniture, carpeting, bed linens, bath linens, tablecloths, sleeping bags, tents, car interior ( e.g., car carpet, fabric car seats), and the like. The methods more specifically relate to reducing malodor impression on surfaces, espe› cially fabrics, and/or reducing the appearance of wrinkles on fabrics. The surfaces are preferably treated by either spray› ing dilute aqueous compositions of the present invention onto the surfaces via a spray dispenser, or by adding the concentrated compositions of the present invention to, for example, a wash and/or rinse cycle in a typical laundry process. \n\nA preferred method herein includes a method of reducing malodor impression on a surface (preferably fabrics) having malodor impression, the method comprising the step of contacting the surface with a stable, aqueous composition as described hereinbefore. \n\nThe composition for reducing malodor impression herein can be used by distributing, e.g., by placing the aqueous solution into a dispensing means, preferably a spray dis› penser and spraying an effective amount onto the desired surface or article. An effective amount as defined herein means an amount sufficient to absorb odor to the point that it is not discernible by the human sense of smell yet not so much as to saturate or create a pool of liquid on said article or surface and so that when dry there is no visual deposit readily discernible. Distribution can be achieved by using a spray device, a roller, a pad, etc. For odor control, an effective amount, as defined herein, means an amount suf› ficient to absorb odor to effect a noticeable reduction in the perceived odor, preferably to the point that it is not discernible, by the human sense of smell. \n\nPreferably, the present invention does not encompass distributing the solution on to shiny surfaces including, e.g., chrome, glass, smooth vinyl, leather, shiny plastic, shiny wood, etc. It is preferable not to distribute the solution onto shiny surfaces because spotting and filming can more readily occur on the surfaces. Furthermore, the solution is not for use on human skin, especially when an antimicrobial pre- servative is present in the composition because skin irrita› tion can occur. \n\nThe present invention encompasses the method of spray› ing an effective amount of the composition for reducing malodor onto household surfaces. Preferably said household surfaces are selected from the group consisting of countertops, cabinets, walls, floors, bathroom surfaces and kitchen surfaces. \n\n## A MALODOR CONTROL\n\nThe present invention encompasses the method of spray› ing a mist of an effective amount of the composition for reducing malodor onto fabric and/or fabric articles. Preferably, said fabric and/or fabric articles include, but are not limited to, clothes, curtains, drapes, upholstered furniture, carpeting, bed linens, bath linens, tablecloths, sleeping bags, tents, car interior, e.g., car carpet, fabric car seats, etc. \n\nThe polyamines herein can be prepared, for example, by polymerizing ethyleneimine in the presence of a catalyst such as carbon dioxide, sodium bisulfite, sulfuric acid, hydrogen peroxide, hydrochloric acid, acetic acid, etc. Spe› cific methods for preparing these polyamine backbones are disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 2,182,306, Ulrich et al., issued Dec. 5, 1939; U.S. Pat. No. 3,033,746, Mayle et al., issued \n\nA further description of poly amine soil suspending agents suitable for use in the present invention is found in; U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/103,135; U.S. Pat. No. 6,004, 922 Watson et al., issued Dec. 21, 1999; and U.S. Pat. No. 4,664,848 Oh et al., issued May 12, 1987 all of which are included herein by reference. \n\nU.S. Pat. No. 4,891,160 Vander Meer, issued Jan. 2, 1990; U.S. Pat. No. 4,597,898, Vander Meer, issued Jul. 1, 1986 describe a polyamine having a backbone Mw of 189 daltons and an average of from about 15 to 18 ethyleneoxy units per nitrogen as a suitable soil suspending agent for hydrophilic, inter alia, clay soils. \n\nThe molecular weight of the backbone prior to modifica› tion as well as the value of the index n is largely dependent upon the benefits and properties which the formulator wishes to provide. For example, U.S. Pat. No. 5,565,145 Watson et al., issued Oct. 15, 1996, discloses a preferred polyamine having a backbone Mw of 1800 daltons and about 7 ethyleneoxy units per nitrogen as a modified polyalkyle› neimine suitable for use as hydrophobic, inter alia, soot, grime, soil suspending agent. The substantivity of alkyle- neoxy substituted polyamines toward fabric surface can be adjusted by the formulator to meet the needs of the specific embodiment. \n\nwherein R 1 is C$_{2}$-C$_{12 }$ alkylene, preferably ethylene, 1,2- propylene, 1,3-propylene, 1,2-butylene, 1,4-butylene, and mixtures thereof, more preferably ethylene and 1,2- propylene, most preferably ethylene. R$^{2 }$is hydrogen, CcC$_{4 }$ alkyl, and mixtures thereof, preferably hydrogen or methyl, more preferably hydrogen. \n\nThe polyalkyleneimines of the present invention are modified by substitution of each N-H unit hydrogen with an alkyleneoxy unit having the formula: \n\nR is C$_{2}$-C$_{12 }$ alkylene, C$_{3}$-C$_{6 }$ branched alkylene, and mixtures thereof, preferred branched alkylene is 1,2- propylene; most preferred R is ethylene. The preferred polyalkyleneimines of the present invention have backbones which comprise the same R unit, for example, all units are ethylene. Most preferred backbone comprises R groups which are all ethylene units. \n\nwhich are the branching points of the main and secondary backbone chains, B representing a continuation of the chain structure by branching. The tertiary units have no replace› able hydrogen atom and are therefore not modified by substitution with an alkyleneoxy unit." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9389764635207242, + "doc_id": "d6c4d0d5bc372bb13e485ce68f9ac5e0b1b86b5e212f5e8b05a6dd29006a238a", + "edit_distance": 0.38144329896907214, + "f1_score": 0.9908814589665654, + "meteor": 0.930617607207867, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "US005648520A\n\nUS005648520A\n\n## United States Patent [19] Knof el et al.\n\n## [54] FRACTIONATION AND PURIFICATION OF AROMATIC POLYAMINE AND THE USE THEREOF\n\n- [75] Inventors:\n\nHartmut Knofel, Odenthal; Michael Brockelt, Leverkusen, both of Germany\n\n- [73] Assignee:\n\nBayer Aktiengesellschaft, Leverkusen, Germany\n\n- [21] Appl. No.:\n\n623,286\n\n- [22] Filed:\n\nMar. 28, 1996\n\n## [30] Foreign Application Priority Data\n\nApr. 7, 1995 [DE] Germany ........................... 19513163.0\n\n- [51] Int. CI. 6\n\n...................................................\n\nC07C 209/86\n\n- [52] U.S. CI .\n\n..........................\n\n560/347; 564/315; 564/331;\n\n564/332; 564/333; 564/334; 564/437; 564/450;\n\n564/451\n\n- [58] Field of Search\n\n..................................... 564/315, 331,\n\n564/332. 333, 334, 437, 450, 451; 560/347\n\n## [56] References Cited\n\n## U.S. PATENT DOCUMENTS\n\n4,087,459 5/1978 Knofel et al ............................ 564/331\n\n- [111 Patent Number:\n- [45] Date of Patent:\n\n5,648,520\n\nJul. 15, 1997\n\n## FOREIGN PATENT DOCUMENTS\n\n2238319 2/1973 Germany .\n\n1170619\n\n11/1969\n\nUnited Kingdom.\n\n## OTHER PUBLICATIONS\n\nH. Becker et al \"Organikum\" 1976, Veb Destscher Verlag der Wissenschaften, Berlin XP002005624, pp. 74-82.\n\nPrimary Examiner-Richard L. Raymond\n\nAttorney, Agent, or Firm-Joseph C. Gil\n\n## [57] ABSTRACT\n\nThe invention relates to a process for the fractionation and purification of aromatic polyarnine mixtures and the use thereof.\n\n## 10 Claims, 4 Drawing Sheets", + "recall": 0.9819277108433735, + "true_md": "Ill lllll lllll 111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111 US005648520A \n\n# United States Patent [19]\n\n# Knof el et al.\n\n# [111 Patent Number: 5,648,520\n\n# [45] Date of Patent: Jul. 15, 1997\n\n# [54] FRACTIONATION AND PURIFICATION OF AROMATIC POLYAMINE AND THE USE THEREOF\n\n- [75] Inventors: Hartmut Knofel, Odenthal; Michael Brockelt, Leverkusen, both of Germany \n\n- [73] Assignee: Bayer Aktiengesellschaft, Leverkusen, Germany \n\n- [21] Appl. No.: 623,286 \n\n- [22] Filed: Mar. 28, 1996 \n\n- [51] Int. CI. 6 ................................................... C07C 209/86 \n\n- [52] U.S. CI . .......................... 560/347; 564/315; 564/331; 564/332; 564/333; 564/334; 564/437; 564/450; 564/451 \n\n- [58] Field of Search ..................................... 564/315, 331, 564/332. 333, 334, 437, 450, 451; 560/347 \n\n## [30] Foreign Application Priority Data\n\n## [56] References Cited\n\n## U.S. PATENT DOCUMENTS\n\n## 10 Claims, 4 Drawing Sheets\n\n## [57] ABSTRACT\n\n## OTHER PUBLICATIONS\n\n## FOREIGN PATENT DOCUMENTS\n\nApr. 7, 1995 [DE] Germany ........................... 19513163.0 \n\n4,087,459 5/1978 Knofel et al ............................ 564/331 \n\n2238319 2/1973 Germany . \n\n1170619 11/1969 United Kingdom. \n\nH. Becker et al \"Organikum\" 1976, Veb Destscher Verlag der Wissenschaften, Berlin XP002005624, pp. 74-82. \n\nPrimary Examiner-Richard L. Raymond \n\nAttorney, Agent, or Firm-Joseph C. Gil \n\nThe invention relates to a process for the fractionation and purification of aromatic polyarnine mixtures and the use thereof." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.805312203079627, + "doc_id": "165b96e9affee92cf3a162c7582138ac05290f6e6f6816c4d7fd7318859295d1", + "edit_distance": 0.21428571428571427, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9500475389453668, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "U.S. Patent\n\nJun. 9, 1998\n\n5,763,671\n\nFIG. 1\n\nFIG. 1", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "U.S. Patent \n\nJun. 9, 1998 \n\n5,763,671 \n\nFIG. 1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9694403514077401, + "doc_id": "cf46190a8635750ae65953d9bb13e4a4f59fb9af2d4fc4812a77f463e7b91f49", + "edit_distance": 0.8869143780290791, + "f1_score": 0.9941002949852508, + "meteor": 0.6289000721766368, + "precision": 0.9970414201183432, + "pred_md": "US 2020/0352177 Al\n\ntotal amount of Precipitant and Acidulant, relative to bicar› bonate, than is required for Wu's balanced system.\n\n[0087] US2015/0132437 Al describes the addition of catalytic amounts of magnesium and potassium ions to a conventionally balanced leavening system in order to con› trol the release of carbon dioxide in carmed dough during storage. The patent teaches away from the use of calcium and the amounts of magnesium used were insufficient to precipitate the Acidulant, or to boost the evolution of carbon dioxide at the critical stage of baking.\n\n[0088] U.S. Pat. No. 3,653,917 describes the addition of calcium chloride to angel cake food mixes to facilitate the recovery of sub-standard batches. There is no suggestion that the additive would have any effect on the leavening system, and the levels recommended are too small to be effective in this respect.\n\n[0089] The Invention\n\n[0090] Our invention therefore provides a leavening agent comprising:\n\n[0091] (1) An alkali metal or ammonium bicarbonate;\n\n[0092] (2) At least 0.1 and preferably at least 1 mole per mole of bicarbonate of Precipitant optionally comprising a Precipitating Acidulant; and\n\n[0093] (3) Optionally an Acidulant; wherein (2) and (3) are present in a total amount from 105 to 800% of the stoichiometric amount that would be required to react fully with (1) in a boiling aqueous solution.\n\n[0094] Preferably the Acidulant is present in a non-stoi› chiometric proportion based on the acid/base reaction between the Acidulant and the bicarbonate\n\n[0095] Preferably the amount of Acidulant is less than 90%, more preferably less than 10% of the stoichiometric amount.\n\n[0096] According to an alternative embodiment the inven› tion provides a leavening agent comprising:\n\n[0097] (1) An alkali metal bicarbonate;\n\n[0098] (2) An Acidulant in a proportion from 90 to 110% of the stoichiometric amount based on the bicar› bonate; and\n\n[0099] (3) A Precipitant in a total proportion from 28 to 120 mmol per 100 mmol bicarbonate;\n\n[0100] According to an alternative embodiment our inven› tion provides a leavening agent comprising:\n\n[0101] (1) Alkali metal bicarbonate;\n\n[0102] (2) A Precipitant and/or Precipitating Acidulant, in a total proportion sufficient to provide from 1 to 8.8 g, and preferably at least 1.1 g, Precipitating Cation per 100 mmol bicarbonate; and\n\n[0103] (3) An Acidulant, which may be or may comprise said Precipitating Acidulant, in a total proportion sufficient to provide from 0.025 to 0.2 g Replaceable Hydrogen per 100 mmol of bicarbonate.\n\n[0104] Alternatively the invention provides a leavening agent comprising as components:\n\n[0105] (1) An alkali metal bicarbonate;\n\n[0106] (2) A Precipitant; and;\n\n[0107] (3) Optionally an Acidulant; wherein y>x+5 between x=0 and x=47.5, and between x=52.5 and 105; and y>80 between x=47.5 and x=52.5; where xis the amount of sodium bicarbonate mmols per 100 mmols of the said components that would remain after complete reaction with any non-phosphate Acidulants present and y is the amount of Precipitant inmmols per 100 mmols of the said components.\n\n5\n\nNov. 12, 2020\n\n[0108] Alternatively, the invention provides a leavening agent comprising:\n\n[0109] (1) Alkali metal bicarbonate;\n\n[0110] (2) A Precipitant and/or Precipitating Acidulant, in a total proportion sufficient to provide c=from 25 to 200; and\n\n[0111] (3) An Acidulant, which may be or may comprise said Precipitating Acidulant, in a total proportion sufficient to provide h=from 25 to 200, and preferably h+2c>l00; where c is the total mmol Precipitating Cation per 100 mmol bicarbonate and h is the total mmol hydrogen ion per 100 mmol bicarbonate.\n\n[0112] According to a further embodiment the invention provides a leavening agent comprising:\n\n[0113] (1) Alkali metal or ammonium bicarbonate;\n\n[0114] (2) An Acidulant that forms a non-water soluble calcium or magnesium salt sufficient to provide more than 0.105 g Replaceable Hydrogen per 100 mmol bicarbonate;\n\n[0115] (3) A Precipitant that is a water soluble salt of an alkaline earth metal capable of precipitating or complexing with saidAcidulant in an amount sufficient to provide a final pH below 6.5 when the leavening agent is heated in a bakery mix;\n\n[0116] ( 4) An effective amount of a preservative.\n\n[0117] Alternatively the invention provides a leavening agent comprising:\n\n[0118] (1) Alkali metal bicarbonate;\n\n[0119] (2) an Acidulant that forms a water insoluble cal› cium or magnesium salt sufficient to provide more than 105 mmols replaceable hydrogen per 100 mmols bicarbonate;\n\n[0120] (3) A Precipitant that is a water insoluble salt of an alkaline earth metal capable of precipitating said Acidulant with an acid which is stronger than said Acidulant in an amount sufficient to provide a final pH below 6.5 when the leavening agent is heated in a bakery mix;\n\n[0121] and\n\n[0122] ( 4) An effective amount of a preservative.\n\n[0123] The invention further provides a leavening agent according to any of the preceding embodiments, which comprises a mixture of a bicarbonate, calcium chloride and an orthophosphate or pyrophosphate Acidulant.\n\n[0124] The invention further provides a baking powder comprising a leavening agent as aforesaid.\n\n[0125] Our invention further provides a self-raising flour comprising a leavening agent as aforesaid.\n\n[0126] Our invention further provides a bakery mix com› prising a leavening agent as aforesaid.\n\n[0127] According to a further embodiment our invention provides the use in baking of a leavening agent as aforesaid.\n\n[0128] According to a further embodiment our invention provides a method of baking comprising heating a bakery mix as aforesaid.\n\n[0129] Our invention further provides a confection pre› pared by baking a bakery mix as aforesaid.\n\n[0130] In the following discussion of the invention, unless stated to the contrary, the disclosure of alternative values for the upper or lower limit of the permitted range of a param› eter, coupled with an indication that one of said values is more highly preferred than the other, is to be construed as an implied statement that each intermediate value of said parameter, lying between the more preferred and the less preferred of said alternatives, is itself preferred to said less preferred value and also to each value lying between said less preferred value and said intermediate value.", + "recall": 0.9911764705882353, + "true_md": "US 2020/0352177 Al \n\n5 \n\nNov. 12, 2020 \n\n[0130] In the following discussion of the invention, unless stated to the contrary, the disclosure of alternative values for the upper or lower limit of the permitted range of a param› eter, coupled with an indication that one of said values is more highly preferred than the other, is to be construed as an implied statement that each intermediate value of said parameter, lying between the more preferred and the less preferred of said alternatives, is itself preferred to said less preferred value and also to each value lying between said less preferred value and said intermediate value. \n\n[0107] (3) Optionally an Acidulant; wherein y>x+5 between x=0 and x=47.5, and between x=52.5 and 105; and y>80 between x=47.5 and x=52.5; where xis the amount of sodium bicarbonate mmols per 100 mmols of the said components that would remain after complete reaction with any non-phosphate Acidulants present and y is the amount of Precipitant inmmols per 100 mmols of the said components. \n\n[0106] (2) A Precipitant; and; \n\n[0105] (1) An alkali metal bicarbonate; \n\n[0104] Alternatively the invention provides a leavening agent comprising as components: \n\n[0103] (3) An Acidulant, which may be or may comprise said Precipitating Acidulant, in a total proportion sufficient to provide from 0.025 to 0.2 g Replaceable Hydrogen per 100 mmol of bicarbonate. \n\n[0129] Our invention further provides a confection pre› pared by baking a bakery mix as aforesaid. \n\n[0128] According to a further embodiment our invention provides a method of baking comprising heating a bakery mix as aforesaid. \n\n[0127] According to a further embodiment our invention provides the use in baking of a leavening agent as aforesaid. \n\n[0126] Our invention further provides a bakery mix com› prising a leavening agent as aforesaid. \n\n[0125] Our invention further provides a self-raising flour comprising a leavening agent as aforesaid. \n\n[0124] The invention further provides a baking powder comprising a leavening agent as aforesaid. \n\n[0123] The invention further provides a leavening agent according to any of the preceding embodiments, which comprises a mixture of a bicarbonate, calcium chloride and an orthophosphate or pyrophosphate Acidulant. \n\n[0122] ( 4) An effective amount of a preservative. \n\n[0121] and \n\n[0120] (3) A Precipitant that is a water insoluble salt of an alkaline earth metal capable of precipitating said Acidulant with an acid which is stronger than said Acidulant in an amount sufficient to provide a final pH below 6.5 when the leavening agent is heated in a bakery mix; \n\n[0102] (2) A Precipitant and/or Precipitating Acidulant, in a total proportion sufficient to provide from 1 to 8.8 g, and preferably at least 1.1 g, Precipitating Cation per 100 mmol bicarbonate; and \n\n[0101] (1) Alkali metal bicarbonate; \n\n[0100] According to an alternative embodiment our inven› tion provides a leavening agent comprising: \n\n[0096] According to an alternative embodiment the inven› tion provides a leavening agent comprising: \n\n[0119] (2) an Acidulant that forms a water insoluble cal› cium or magnesium salt sufficient to provide more than 105 mmols replaceable hydrogen per 100 mmols bicarbonate; \n\n[0118] (1) Alkali metal bicarbonate; \n\n[0117] Alternatively the invention provides a leavening agent comprising: \n\n[0116] ( 4) An effective amount of a preservative. \n\n[0095] Preferably the amount of Acidulant is less than 90%, more preferably less than 10% of the stoichiometric amount. \n\n[0094] Preferably the Acidulant is present in a non-stoi› chiometric proportion based on the acid/base reaction between the Acidulant and the bicarbonate \n\n[0093] (3) Optionally an Acidulant; wherein (2) and (3) are present in a total amount from 105 to 800% of the stoichiometric amount that would be required to react fully with (1) in a boiling aqueous solution. \n\n[0115] (3) A Precipitant that is a water soluble salt of an alkaline earth metal capable of precipitating or complexing with saidAcidulant in an amount sufficient to provide a final pH below 6.5 when the leavening agent is heated in a bakery mix; \n\n[0114] (2) An Acidulant that forms a non-water soluble calcium or magnesium salt sufficient to provide more than 0.105 g Replaceable Hydrogen per 100 mmol bicarbonate; \n\n[0113] (1) Alkali metal or ammonium bicarbonate; \n\n[0112] According to a further embodiment the invention provides a leavening agent comprising: \n\n[0111] (3) An Acidulant, which may be or may comprise said Precipitating Acidulant, in a total proportion sufficient to provide h=from 25 to 200, and preferably h+2c>l00; where c is the total mmol Precipitating Cation per 100 mmol bicarbonate and h is the total mmol hydrogen ion per 100 mmol bicarbonate. \n\n[0092] (2) At least 0.1 and preferably at least 1 mole per mole of bicarbonate of Precipitant optionally comprising a Precipitating Acidulant; and \n\n[0091] (1) An alkali metal or ammonium bicarbonate; \n\n[0090] Our invention therefore provides a leavening agent comprising: \n\n[0089] The Invention \n\n[0088] U.S. Pat. No. 3,653,917 describes the addition of calcium chloride to angel cake food mixes to facilitate the recovery of sub-standard batches. There is no suggestion that the additive would have any effect on the leavening system, and the levels recommended are too small to be effective in this respect. \n\n[0110] (2) A Precipitant and/or Precipitating Acidulant, in a total proportion sufficient to provide c=from 25 to 200; and \n\n[0109] (1) Alkali metal bicarbonate; \n\n[0108] Alternatively, the invention provides a leavening agent comprising: \n\n[0087] US2015/0132437 Al describes the addition of catalytic amounts of magnesium and potassium ions to a conventionally balanced leavening system in order to con› trol the release of carbon dioxide in carmed dough during storage. The patent teaches away from the use of calcium and the amounts of magnesium used were insufficient to precipitate the Acidulant, or to boost the evolution of carbon dioxide at the critical stage of baking. \n\ntotal amount of Precipitant and Acidulant, relative to bicar› bonate, than is required for Wu’s balanced system. \n\n- [0099] (3) A Precipitant in a total proportion from 28 to 120 mmol per 100 mmol bicarbonate; \n\n- [0098] (2) An Acidulant in a proportion from 90 to 110% of the stoichiometric amount based on the bicar› bonate; and \n\n- [0097] (1) An alkali metal bicarbonate;" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9136800795988096, + "doc_id": "b2f6985e6e2d8c337e79a289c63a25df611b5689d81e0b53d12cfb3a18c6cbb6", + "edit_distance": 0.7236051502145923, + "f1_score": 0.9401273885350319, + "meteor": 0.7793155505967356, + "precision": 0.9461538461538461, + "pred_md": "US 8,188,171 B2\n\n11\n\naliphatic, cycloaliphatic or arylaliphatic isocyanate mono-\n\nmers: 1,6-hexamethylene diisocyanate, 1, 12-dodecane diisocyanate, cyclobutane-1,3-diisocyanate cyclohexane-1,3 and/or 1,4-diisocyanate, l-isocyanato-3,3,5-trimethyl-5-diisocyanatomethyl cyclohexane (isophorone diisocyanate, IPDI), isocyanatomethyloctylene diisocyanates (TTI), in particular 4-isocyanatomethy 1-1,8-octy lenediisocyanate 2,4 and/or 2,6-hexahydrotoluylene diisocyanate (H TDI), 6 hexahydro-1,3 and/or 1,4-phenylene diisocyanate perhydro-2,4' and/or 4,4'-diphenylmethane diisocyanate (H 12 MD I), and in general aromatic amine precursors or the perhydrogenated carbamates, bis-isocyanatomethyl cyclohexanes (in particular 1,3 and 1,4) (BIC), bis-isocyanatomethyl norbornanes (NBDI), 2-methylpentamethylene diisocyanate (MPDI), tetramethylxylylene diisocyanates (TMXDI), and lysine diisocyanate and also the esters oflysine diisocyanate or triisocyanate (LDI or LTI).\n\n5\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\nThe homocondensation products are the products derived from the condensation of one of the above-listed isocyanate 25 monomers with itself. The heterocondensation products are the products derived from the condensation of two or more of the above-listed monomers, with one another and/or option› ally with one or more mobile hydrogen compounds, such as for example an alcohol, a dial and other similar compounds. 30\n\nThe polyisocyanates included in the composition of the present invention may also be polyisocyanate derivatives derived from aromatic isocyanates used alone or mixed with aliphatic compounds.\n\nHowever, the use of these aromatic derivatives is limited in terms of amount or even is not preferred as it generally leads to coatings which may become discoloured, generally turn yellow, as they age, in particular if the coatings are markedly exposed to UV radiation, for example solar UV radiation.\n\nThe following may be cited as non-limiting examples of\n\naromatic isocyanates: 2,4- and/or 2,6-toluylene diisocyanate, diphenylmethane-2,4' and/or 4,4'-diisocyanate (MDI), 1,3- and/or 1,4-phenylene diisocyanate, triphenylmethane-4,4',4\"-triisocyanate, and the oligomers of MDI or TDI.\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\nMixtures of these ( cyclo )aliphatic and/or aromatic poly› isocyanates may also be used.\n\nThe polyisocyanates used to prepare the (poly)isocyanate 50 compositions for the coating according to the invention have an average functionality in isocyanate groups at least equal to 2 and at most equal to 10, preferably greater than 2.5 and at most equal to 8, advantageously between 2.8 and 6.5.\n\nThe viscosity of the non-masked polyisocyanate com› pounds which can be used in the invention is within a very broad viscosity range owing to the structure of the polyiso› cyanate compounds which may be involved. The viscosity is generally greater than 10 mPa·s, at 25° C. with 100% dry extract, preferably greater than 100 mPa·s, at 25° C. and with 100% dry extract.\n\nExamples include the viscosity of products from Rhodia such as Tolonatefi HDT-LV2 having a viscosity of approxi› mately 600 mPa·s-150 mPa·s, at 25° C., or else Tolonatefi HDT having a viscosity of2,400 mPa·s-400 mPa·s, at 25° C., or else Tolonatefi HDB having a viscosity of 9,000 mPa·s-2000 mPa·s, at 25° C., or else Tolonatefi HDT HR\n\n55\n\n60\n\n65\n\n12\n\nhaving a viscosity of approximately 20,000 mPa·s, at 25° C. with 100% dry extract, or 2,000 mPa·s at 25° C. at 90% dry extract inn-butyl acetate.\n\nSpecific polyisocyanate compounds are solid at 100% dry extract. This is the case, for example, for the isocyanurate trimer ofIPDI or for the dimer ofIPDI. Examples include the viscosities of some of these compounds in organic solutions; Tolonatefi IDT 70 S (isocyanurate trimer ofIPDI) thus has a viscosity of approximately 1,700mPa·s-600 mPa·s at 25° C. in the case of a formulation having 70% dry extract in Solvessofi 100; Tolonatefi IDT 70 B (isocyanurate trimer of IPDI) has a viscosity of approximately 600 mPa·s-300 mPa·s at 25° C. in the case of a formulation having 70% dry extract inn-butyl acetate.\n\nIn view of their capacity to impart high grit resistance to the coatings, homocondensation and/or heterocondensation products of an, in particular non-cyclic, aliphatic isocyanate monomer, preferably HDI, are preferred.\n\nMoreover, it has been found that when the average functionality in isocyanate groups of the polyisocyanate increases, the grit resistance and the hardness of the coating are improved; this phenomenon is particularly marked during touch-up operations.\n\nIn the present invention, examples and claims, the average functionality in isocyanate groups f(iNCO) is defined by the following formula:\n\nwherein: Mn represents the number-average molecular weight obtained by gel permeation and\n\n[iNCO] represents the concentration in isocyanate groups in grammes per 100 grammes.\n\nThe (poly)isocyanates present in the composition accord› ing to the invention may be in masked form, i.e. the isocyanate groups are not free but rather masked using a masking agent or a mixture of masking agents as defined hereinafter. Par› ticularly preferred are compositions of masked polyisocyan› ates for the preparation of an one-component-type coating formulation (formulation lK).\n\nIn the present disclosure, the term \"masked (poly)isocyanate\" refers to a (poly)isocyanate for which at least 50%, preferably 80%, advantageously 90% and more preferably still all of the isocyanate groups are masked.\n\nThe masking agent or mixture of masking agents which temporarily, or even permanently, protects the isocyanate groups is/are compounds having at least one group carrying a labile hydrogen, generally a group carrying a labile hydrogen, preferably a single group carrying a labile hydrogen, and which are reactive towards the isocyanate group. There may be associated with this group carrying a labile hydrogen a pKa value corresponding either to ionisation of an acid [including the hydrogen atom of the -ol groups (in the present descrip› tion, the term \"-ol(s )\" refers to phenols and alcohols)] orto the associated acid of a (generally nitrogenous) base.\n\nMore specifically, in order to optimise the results of the present invention, said pKa ( or one thereof if several may be defined) of the group carrying one or more labile hydrogens is at least equal to 4, advantageously 5, preferably 6 and is at most equal to 14, advantageously 13, preferably 12 and more preferably 10. However, one exception is the lactams, the pKa of which is greater than these values and which constitute possible (although not preferred) masking agents for the invention.", + "recall": 0.9341772151898734, + "true_md": "US 8,188,171 B2 \n\n12 \n\n11 \n\naliphatic, cycloaliphatic or arylaliphatic isocyanate mono- mers: \n\nThe homocondensation products are the products derived from the condensation of one of the above-listed isocyanate monomers with itself. The heterocondensation products are the products derived from the condensation of two or more of the above-listed monomers, with one another and/or option› ally with one or more mobile hydrogen compounds, such as for example an alcohol, a dial and other similar compounds. \n\nThe polyisocyanates included in the composition of the present invention may also be polyisocyanate derivatives derived from aromatic isocyanates used alone or mixed with aliphatic compounds. \n\nHowever, the use of these aromatic derivatives is limited in terms of amount or even is not preferred as it generally leads to coatings which may become discoloured, generally turn yellow, as they age, in particular if the coatings are markedly exposed to UV radiation, for example solar UV radiation. \n\nThe following may be cited as non-limiting examples of aromatic isocyanates: \n\nMixtures of these ( cyclo )aliphatic and/or aromatic poly› isocyanates may also be used. \n\nThe polyisocyanates used to prepare the (poly)isocyanate compositions for the coating according to the invention have an average functionality in isocyanate groups at least equal to 2 and at most equal to 10, preferably greater than 2.5 and at most equal to 8, advantageously between 2.8 and 6.5. \n\nThe viscosity of the non-masked polyisocyanate com› pounds which can be used in the invention is within a very broad viscosity range owing to the structure of the polyiso› cyanate compounds which may be involved. The viscosity is generally greater than 10 mPa•s, at 25° C. with 100% dry extract, preferably greater than 100 mPa•s, at 25° C. and with 100% dry extract. \n\nExamples include the viscosity of products from Rhodia such as Tolonatefi HDT-LV2 having a viscosity of approxi› mately 600 mPa•s–150 mPa•s, at 25° C., or else Tolonatefi HDT having a viscosity of2,400 mPa•s–400 mPa•s, at 25° C., or else Tolonatefi HDB having a viscosity of 9,000 mPa•s–2000 mPa•s, at 25° C., or else Tolonatefi HDT HR \n\nMore specifically, in order to optimise the results of the present invention, said pKa ( or one thereof if several may be defined) of the group carrying one or more labile hydrogens is at least equal to 4, advantageously 5, preferably 6 and is at most equal to 14, advantageously 13, preferably 12 and more preferably 10. However, one exception is the lactams, the pKa of which is greater than these values and which constitute possible (although not preferred) masking agents for the invention. \n\nThe masking agent or mixture of masking agents which temporarily, or even permanently, protects the isocyanate groups is/are compounds having at least one group carrying a labile hydrogen, generally a group carrying a labile hydrogen, preferably a single group carrying a labile hydrogen, and which are reactive towards the isocyanate group. There may be associated with this group carrying a labile hydrogen a pKa value corresponding either to ionisation of an acid [including the hydrogen atom of the -ol groups (in the present descrip› tion, the term \"-ol(s )\" refers to phenols and alcohols)] orto the associated acid of a (generally nitrogenous) base. \n\nIn the present disclosure, the term \"masked (poly)isocyan- ate\" refers to a (poly)isocyanate for which at least 50%, preferably 80%, advantageously 90% and more preferably still all of the isocyanate groups are masked. \n\nThe (poly)isocyanates present in the composition accord› ing to the invention may be in masked form, i.e. the isocyanate groups are not free but rather masked using a masking agent or a mixture of masking agents as defined hereinafter. Par› ticularly preferred are compositions of masked polyisocyan› ates for the preparation of an one-component-type coating formulation (formulation lK). \n\nwherein: Mn represents the number-average molecular weight obtained by gel permeation and [iNCO] represents the concentration in isocyanate groups in grammes per 100 grammes. \n\nIn the present invention, examples and claims, the average functionality in isocyanate groups f(iNCO) is defined by the following formula: \n\n1,6-hexamethylene diisocyanate, 1, 12-dodecane diisocyanate, cyclobutane-1,3-diisocyanate cyclohexane-1,3 and/or 1,4-diisocyanate, l-isocyanato-3,3,5-trimethyl-5-diisocyanatomethyl cyclo- hexane (isophorone diisocyanate, IPDI), isocyanatomethyloctylene diisocyanates (TTI), in particular 4-isocyanatomethy 1-1,8-octy lenediisocyanate 2,4 and/or 2,6-hexahydrotoluylene diisocyanate (H$_{6 }$TDI), hexahydro-1,3 and/or 1,4-phenylene diisocyanate perhydro-2,4’ and/or 4,4’-diphenylmethane diisocyanate (H $_{12}$MD I), and in general aromatic amine precursors or the perhydrogenated carbamates, bis-isocyanatomethyl cyclohexanes (in particular 1,3 and 1,4) (BIC), bis-isocyanatomethyl norbornanes (NBDI), 2-methylpentamethylene diisocyanate (MPDI), tetramethylxylylene diisocyanates (TMXDI), and lysine diisocyanate and also the esters oflysine diisocyanate or triisocyanate (LDI or LTI). \n\nMoreover, it has been found that when the average func- tionality in isocyanate groups of the polyisocyanate increases, the grit resistance and the hardness of the coating are improved; this phenomenon is particularly marked during touch-up operations. \n\nIn view of their capacity to impart high grit resistance to the coatings, homocondensation and/or heterocondensation products of an, in particular non-cyclic, aliphatic isocyanate monomer, preferably HDI, are preferred. \n\nSpecific polyisocyanate compounds are solid at 100% dry extract. This is the case, for example, for the isocyanurate trimer ofIPDI or for the dimer ofIPDI. Examples include the viscosities of some of these compounds in organic solutions; Tolonatefi IDT 70 S (isocyanurate trimer ofIPDI) thus has a viscosity of approximately 1,700mPa•s–600 mPa•s at 25° C. in the case of a formulation having 70% dry extract in Solvessofi 100; Tolonatefi IDT 70 B (isocyanurate trimer of IPDI) has a viscosity of approximately 600 mPa•s–300 mPa•s at 25° C. in the case of a formulation having 70% dry extract inn-butyl acetate. \n\nhaving a viscosity of approximately 20,000 mPa•s, at 25° C. with 100% dry extract, or 2,000 mPa•s at 25° C. at 90% dry extract inn-butyl acetate. \n\n$$. Mnx[iNCO] f(tNCO) = 42x100 $$\n\n2,4- and/or 2,6-toluylene diisocyanate, diphenylmethane-2,4’ and/or 4,4’-diisocyanate (MDI), 1,3- and/or 1,4-phenylene diisocyanate, triphenylmethane-4,4’,4\"-triisocyanate, and the oligomers of MDI or TDI." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8563736217553893, + "doc_id": "2b51ead3be0330c5e965a0dccfbd37ae756fb5c3dc555be8fc9eec564de63092", + "edit_distance": 0.178743961352657, + "f1_score": 0.896174863387978, + "meteor": 0.9437277464740044, + "precision": 0.8541666666666666, + "pred_md": "23\n\n-continued\n\nIn the formulas, R, R 11 , R 21 , n, Y and Y 2 are each the same as defined above, and X 1 represents a tertiary alkyl ester-type acid-dissociable group.\n\nIn the above formulas, R is the same as defined for R in formula (al-0-1).\n\nExamples ofX 1 include the same tertiary alkyl ester-type acid-dissociable groups as those described above.\n\n- R 11 , R 21 , n andY are the same as defined above for R 11 , R 21 , n and Y respectively in general formula (p 1) described above in connection with the \"acetal-type acid-dissociable group\".\n\nExamples ofY 2 include the same groups as those described above for Y 2 in general formula (al-0-2).\n\nSpecific examples of structural units represented by gen› eral formula (al-1) to (al-4) are shown below.\n\nIn the formulas shown below, R\"' represents a hydrogen atom, a methyl group or a trifluoromethyl group.\n\n## [Chemical Formula 8]\n\nUS 9,164,380 B2\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n60\n\n65\n\n24\n\n-continued", + "recall": 0.9425287356321839, + "true_md": "US 9,164,380 B2 \n\n23 \n\n24 \n\n-continued \n\n-continued \n\nIn the formulas, R, R 11 , R 21 , n, Y and Y 2 are each the same as defined above, and X 1 represents a tertiary alkyl ester-type 35 acid-dissociable group. \n\nIn the above formulas, R is the same as defined for R in formula (al-0-1). \n\nExamples ofX 1 include the same tertiary alkyl ester-type acid-dissociable groups as those described above. \n\nR 11 , R 21 , n andY are the same as defined above for R 11 , R 21 , n and Y respectively in general formula (p 1) described above in connection with the \"acetal-type acid-dissociable group\". \n\nExamples ofY $^{2 }$include the same groups as those described above for Y $^{2 }$in general formula (al-0-2). \n\nSpecific examples of structural units represented by gen› eral formula (al-1) to (al-4) are shown below. \n\nIn the formulas shown below, R\"’ represents a hydrogen atom, a methyl group or a trifluoromethyl group. \n\n[Chemical Formula 8]" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7619507284454842, + "doc_id": "fd9bac70f870a7e23341f53142b823559e0224a261489280c0ed71a976a493aa", + "edit_distance": 0.5306122448979592, + "f1_score": 0.9573170731707317, + "meteor": 0.7680119839829459, + "precision": 0.9936708860759493, + "pred_md": "US 20050176978Al\n\nUS 20050176978Al\n\n## (19) United States (12) Patent Application Publication Verkade et al.\n\n## (54) IMMOBILIZED IMINOPHOSPHATRANES USEFUL FOR TRANSESTERIFICATION\n\n- (76) Inventors:\n\nJohn G. Verkade, Ames, IA (US); Victor Shang-Yi Lin, Ames, IA (US); Arunkanti Sarkar, Ames, IA (US)\n\nCorrespondence Address: Schwegman, Lundberg, Woessner & Kluth, P.A. P.O. Box 2938 Minneapolis, MN 55402 (US)\n\n- (21) Appl. No.:\n- (22) Filed:\n\n10/989,538\n\nNov. 16, 2004\n\n## Related U.S. Application Data\n\n- (60) Provisional application No. 60/529,550, filed on Dec. 15, 2003.\n\n## Publication Classification\n\n- (51) Int. Cl.7\n\n.....................................................\n\nC07C 51/43\n\n- (52) U.S. Cl.\n\n............................................\n\n554/174; 502/162\n\n## (57) ABSTRACT\n\nThe present invention provides a method for transesterifying an ester, comprising combining the ester, a C 1 -C 3 alcohol, and a heterogeneous catalyst of formula (I) or formula (II):\n\n- (10)\n\nPub. No.: US 2005/0176978 Al\n\n- (43) Pub. Date:\n\nAug. 11, 2005\n\nwherein R', R\" and R\"' are each H, (C 1 -C )alkyl, (C 8 6 C9)aryl, or (alk) 3 Si, wherein each alk is (C 1 -C )alkyl; Lis an 4 organic linking moiety and Xis a solid support material, and the salts thereof under conditions wherein the catalyst cata› lyzes the formation of the ( C 1 -C ) 3 ester of the acid portion of the ester and the corresponding free alcohol of the ester.", + "recall": 0.9235294117647059, + "true_md": "# (19) United States\n\n# (12) Patent Application Publication Verkade et al.\n\n# (10) Pub. No.: US 2005/0176978 Al\n\n# (43) Pub. Date: Aug. 11, 2005\n\n# (54) IMMOBILIZED IMINOPHOSPHATRANES USEFUL FOR TRANSESTERIFICATION\n\n- (76) Inventors: John G. Verkade, Ames, IA (US); Victor Shang-Yi Lin, Ames, IA (US); Arunkanti Sarkar, Ames, IA (US) \n\n- (21) Appl. No.: 10/989,538 \n\n- (22) Filed: Nov. 16, 2004 \n\n- (60) Provisional application No. 60/529,550, filed on Dec. 15, 2003. \n\n- (51) Int. Cl.7 ..................................................... C07C 51/43 \n\n- (52) U.S. Cl. ............................................ 554/174; 502/162 \n\n1111111111111111 IIIIII IIIII 11111 1111111111 lllll lllll 111111111111111 11111 1111111111 11111111 US 20050176978Al \n\nCorrespondence Address: Schwegman, Lundberg, Woessner & Kluth, P.A. P.O. Box 2938 Minneapolis, MN 55402 (US) \n\nThe present invention provides a method for transesterifying an ester, comprising combining the ester, a C$_{1 }$-C$_{3 }$ alcohol, and a heterogeneous catalyst of formula (I) or formula (II): \n\nwherein R’, R\" and R\"’ are each H, (C$_{1}$-C$_{8}$)alkyl, (C$_{6}$ - C9)aryl, or (alk)$_{3}$Si, wherein each alk is (C$_{1}$-C$_{4}$)alkyl; Lis an organic linking moiety and Xis a solid support material, and the salts thereof under conditions wherein the catalyst cata› lyzes the formation of the ( C$_{1 }$-C$_{3}$ ) ester of the acid portion of the ester and the corresponding free alcohol of the ester. \n\nor \n\n(I) \n\n## Related U.S. Application Data\n\n## Publication Classification\n\n## (57) ABSTRACT" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9719577067939408, + "doc_id": "4449448fb0004eb448b6358d11033081a762765bc476e69db1107302ce9f9d11", + "edit_distance": 0.5271867612293144, + "f1_score": 0.9477911646586344, + "meteor": 0.7135612356531853, + "precision": 0.9147286821705426, + "pred_md": "5,763,671\n\n5\n\nhydrolytic degradation of any said organophosphite ligand and deactivation of said metal-organophosphite ligand com› plex catalyst by (a) treating in at least one scrubber zone at least a portion of said reaction product fluid derived from said hydroformylation process and which also contains phosphorus acidic compounds formed during said hydro› formylation process with water sufficient to remove at least some amount of the phosphorus acidic compounds from said reaction product fluid, (b) returning the treated reaction product fluid to said at least one reaction zone or said at least one separation zone. ( c) treating in at least one acid removal zone at least a portion of the water which contains phos› phorus acidic compounds removed from said reaction product fluid with one or more acid removal substances sufficient to remove at least some amount of the phosphorus acidic compounds from said water. and ( d) returning the treated water to said at least one scrubber zone.\n\n5\n\n10\n\n15\n\nThis invention also relates in part to an improved hydro› formylation process for producing aldehydes which com› prises (i) reacting in at least one reaction zone one or more 20 olefinic unsaturated compounds with carbon monoxide and hydrogen in the presence of a metal-organophosphite ligand complex catalyst and optionally free organophosphite ligand to produce a reaction product fluid comprising one or more aldehydes and (ii) separating in at least one separation zone 25 or in said at least one reaction zone the one or more aldehydes from said reaction product fluid, the improvement comprising preventing and/or lessening hydrolytic degrada› tion of any said organophosphite ligand and deactivation of said metal-organophosphite ligand complex catalyst by (a) 30 withdrawing from said at least one reaction zone or said at least one separation zone at least a portion of said reaction product fluid derived from said hydroformylation process and which also contains phosphorus acidic compounds formed during said hydroformylation process. (b) treating in 35 at least one acid removal zone at least a portion of the withdrawn reaction product fluid derived from said hydro› formylation process and which also contains phosphorus acidic compounds formed during said hydroformylation process with one or more acid removal substances sufficient 40 to remove at least some amount of the phosphorus acidic compounds from said reaction product fluid, (c) returning the treated reaction product fluid to said at least one reaction zone or said at least one separation zone, and (d) optionally replacing said one or more acid removal substances. 45\n\nThis invention further relates in part to an improved hydroformylation process for producing aldehydes which comprises (i) reacting in at least one reaction zone one or more olefinic unsaturated compounds with carbon monoxide and hydrogen in the presence of a metal-organophosphite 50 ligand complex catalyst and optionally free organophosphite ligand to produce a reaction product fluid comprising one or more aldehydes and (ii) separating in at least one separation zone or in said at least one reaction zone the one or more aldehydes from said reaction product fluid. the improvement 55 comprising preventing and/or lessening hydrolytic degrada› tion of any said organophosphite ligand and deactivation of said metal-organophosphite ligand complex catalyst by (a) withdrawing from said at least one reaction zone or said at least one separation zone at least a portion of said reaction 60 product fluid derived from said hydroformylation process and which also contains phosphorus acidic compounds formed during said hydroformylation process, (b) treating in at least one scrubber zone at least a portion of the withdrawn reaction product fluid derived from said hydroformylation 65 process and which also contains phosphorus acidic com› pounds formed during said hydroformylation process with\n\n6\n\nwater sufficient to remove at least some amount of the phosphorus acidic compounds from said reaction product fluid, (c) returning the treated reaction product fluid to said at least one reaction zone or said at least one separation zone, ( d) withdrawing from said at least one scrubber zone at least a portion of said water which contains phosphorus acidic compounds removed from said reaction product fluid. (e) treating in at least one acid removal zone at least a portion of the withdrawn water which contains phosphorus acidic compounds removed from said reaction product fluid with one or more acid removal substances sufficient to remove at least some amount of the phosphorus acidic compounds from said water, (f) returning the treated water to said at least one scrubber zone. and (g) optionally replacing said one or more acid removal substances.\n\nThis invention yet further relates in part to an improved hydroformylation process for producing one or more alde› hydes which comprises (i) reacting in at least one reaction zone one or more olefinic unsaturated compounds with carbon monoxide and hydrogen in the presence of a metal› organophosphite ligand complex catalyst and optionally free organophosphite ligand to produce a reaction product fluid comprising one or more aldehydes and (ii) separating in at least one separation zone or in said at least one reaction zone the one or more aldehydes from said reaction product fluid, the improvement comprising preventing and/or lessening hydrolytic degradation of any said organophosphite ligand and deactivation of said metal-organophosphite ligand com› plex catalyst by treating at least a portion of said reaction product fluid derived from said hydroformylation process and which also contains phosphorus acidic compounds formed during said hydroformylation process by introducing one or more acid removal substances into said at least one reaction zone and/or said at least one separation zone sufficient to remove at least some amount of the phosphorus acidic compounds from said reaction product fluid\n\nThis invention also relates in part to an improved hydro› formylation process for producing one or more aldehydes which comprises (i) reacting in at least one reaction zone one or more olefinic unsaturated compounds with carbon mon› oxide and hydrogen in the presence of a metal› organophosphite ligand complex catalyst and optionally free organophosphite ligand to produce a reaction product fluid comprising one or more aldehydes and (ii) separating in at least one separation zone or in said at least one reaction zone the one or more aldehydes from said reaction product fluid. the improvement comprising preventing and/or lessening hydrolytic degradation of any said organophosphite ligand and deactivation of said metal-organophosphite ligand com› plex catalyst by ( a) treating at least a portion of said reaction product fluid derived from said hydroformylation process and which also contains phosphorus acidic compounds formed during said hydroformylation process by introducing water into said at least one reaction zone and/or said at least one separation zone sufficient to remove at least some amount of the phosphorus acidic compounds from said reaction product fluid and (b) treating in at least one acid removal zone at least a portion of the water which contains phosphorus acidic compounds removed from said reaction product fluid with one or more acid removal substances sufficient to remove at least some amount of the phosphorus acidic compounds from said water.\n\nThis invention further relates in part to an improved hydroformylation process for producing aldehydes which comprises (i) reacting in at least one reaction zone one or more olefinic unsaturated compounds with carbon monoxide and hydrogen in the presence of a metal-organophosphite", + "recall": 0.9833333333333333, + "true_md": "5 \n\n5,763,671 \n\n6 \n\nThis invention further relates in part to an improved hydroformylation process for producing aldehydes which comprises (i) reacting in at least one reaction zone one or more olefinic unsaturated compounds with carbon monoxide and hydrogen in the presence of a metal-organophosphite \n\nThis invention further relates in part to an improved hydroformylation process for producing aldehydes which comprises (i) reacting in at least one reaction zone one or more olefinic unsaturated compounds with carbon monoxide and hydrogen in the presence of a metal-organophosphite ligand complex catalyst and optionally free organophosphite ligand to produce a reaction product fluid comprising one or more aldehydes and (ii) separating in at least one separation zone or in said at least one reaction zone the one or more aldehydes from said reaction product fluid. the improvement comprising preventing and/or lessening hydrolytic degrada› tion of any said organophosphite ligand and deactivation of said metal-organophosphite ligand complex catalyst by (a) withdrawing from said at least one reaction zone or said at least one separation zone at least a portion of said reaction product fluid derived from said hydroformylation process and which also contains phosphorus acidic compounds formed during said hydroformylation process, (b) treating in at least one scrubber zone at least a portion of the withdrawn reaction product fluid derived from said hydroformylation process and which also contains phosphorus acidic com› pounds formed during said hydroformylation process with \n\nThis invention also relates in part to an improved hydro› formylation process for producing one or more aldehydes which comprises (i) reacting in at least one reaction zone one or more olefinic unsaturated compounds with carbon mon› oxide and hydrogen in the presence of a metal› organophosphite ligand complex catalyst and optionally free organophosphite ligand to produce a reaction product fluid comprising one or more aldehydes and (ii) separating in at least one separation zone or in said at least one reaction zone the one or more aldehydes from said reaction product fluid. the improvement comprising preventing and/or lessening hydrolytic degradation of any said organophosphite ligand and deactivation of said metal-organophosphite ligand com› plex catalyst by ( a) treating at least a portion of said reaction product fluid derived from said hydroformylation process and which also contains phosphorus acidic compounds formed during said hydroformylation process by introducing water into said at least one reaction zone and/or said at least one separation zone sufficient to remove at least some amount of the phosphorus acidic compounds from said reaction product fluid and (b) treating in at least one acid removal zone at least a portion of the water which contains phosphorus acidic compounds removed from said reaction product fluid with one or more acid removal substances sufficient to remove at least some amount of the phosphorus acidic compounds from said water. \n\nThis invention also relates in part to an improved hydro› formylation process for producing aldehydes which com› prises (i) reacting in at least one reaction zone one or more olefinic unsaturated compounds with carbon monoxide and hydrogen in the presence of a metal-organophosphite ligand complex catalyst and optionally free organophosphite ligand to produce a reaction product fluid comprising one or more aldehydes and (ii) separating in at least one separation zone or in said at least one reaction zone the one or more aldehydes from said reaction product fluid, the improvement comprising preventing and/or lessening hydrolytic degrada› tion of any said organophosphite ligand and deactivation of said metal-organophosphite ligand complex catalyst by (a) withdrawing from said at least one reaction zone or said at least one separation zone at least a portion of said reaction product fluid derived from said hydroformylation process and which also contains phosphorus acidic compounds formed during said hydroformylation process. (b) treating in at least one acid removal zone at least a portion of the withdrawn reaction product fluid derived from said hydro› formylation process and which also contains phosphorus acidic compounds formed during said hydroformylation process with one or more acid removal substances sufficient to remove at least some amount of the phosphorus acidic compounds from said reaction product fluid, (c) returning the treated reaction product fluid to said at least one reaction zone or said at least one separation zone, and (d) optionally replacing said one or more acid removal substances. 45 \n\nThis invention yet further relates in part to an improved hydroformylation process for producing one or more alde› hydes which comprises (i) reacting in at least one reaction zone one or more olefinic unsaturated compounds with carbon monoxide and hydrogen in the presence of a metal› organophosphite ligand complex catalyst and optionally free organophosphite ligand to produce a reaction product fluid comprising one or more aldehydes and (ii) separating in at least one separation zone or in said at least one reaction zone the one or more aldehydes from said reaction product fluid, the improvement comprising preventing and/or lessening hydrolytic degradation of any said organophosphite ligand and deactivation of said metal-organophosphite ligand com› plex catalyst by treating at least a portion of said reaction product fluid derived from said hydroformylation process and which also contains phosphorus acidic compounds formed during said hydroformylation process by introducing one or more acid removal substances into said at least one reaction zone and/or said at least one separation zone sufficient to remove at least some amount of the phosphorus acidic compounds from said reaction product fluid \n\nwater sufficient to remove at least some amount of the phosphorus acidic compounds from said reaction product fluid, (c) returning the treated reaction product fluid to said at least one reaction zone or said at least one separation zone, ( d) withdrawing from said at least one scrubber zone at least a portion of said water which contains phosphorus acidic compounds removed from said reaction product fluid. (e) treating in at least one acid removal zone at least a portion of the withdrawn water which contains phosphorus acidic compounds removed from said reaction product fluid with one or more acid removal substances sufficient to remove at least some amount of the phosphorus acidic compounds from said water, (f) returning the treated water to said at least one scrubber zone. and (g) optionally replacing said one or more acid removal substances. \n\nhydrolytic degradation of any said organophosphite ligand and deactivation of said metal-organophosphite ligand com› plex catalyst by (a) treating in at least one scrubber zone at least a portion of said reaction product fluid derived from said hydroformylation process and which also contains phosphorus acidic compounds formed during said hydro› formylation process with water sufficient to remove at least some amount of the phosphorus acidic compounds from said reaction product fluid, (b) returning the treated reaction product fluid to said at least one reaction zone or said at least one separation zone. ( c) treating in at least one acid removal zone at least a portion of the water which contains phos› phorus acidic compounds removed from said reaction prod- uct fluid with one or more acid removal substances sufficient to remove at least some amount of the phosphorus acidic compounds from said water. and ( d) returning the treated water to said at least one scrubber zone." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.17334889155550148, + "doc_id": "9f7780791275f5bf9303b9ff08ece067766c0bb2f0b0dc667d6aa81c134961a9", + "edit_distance": 0.85, + "f1_score": 0.48, + "meteor": 0.8335382345709368, + "precision": 0.3157894736842105, + "pred_md": "147\n\n148\n\n-continued\n\n-continued\n\nUS 9,164,380 B2\n\n5\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n60\n\n65", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "US 9,164,380 B2 \n\n147 \n\n148 \n\n-continued \n\n-continued" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7623168491128143, + "doc_id": "4bc4cc3ca5e2e4eb91162a29bdd0906db3532e0bf708c60a22e79bbe17747b2e", + "edit_distance": 0.25, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9673239495490976, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Patent Application Publication\n\nSep. 19, 2019 Sheet 81 of 106 US 2019/0287691 Al\n\nco \"sf\" (9 LL\n\nco \"sf\" (9 LL", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Patent Application Publication \n\nSep. 19, 2019 Sheet 81 of 106 \n\nUS 2019/0287691 Al \n\nco \"sf\" (9 LL" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5781403705783446, + "doc_id": "c0f69dbe970e38af699b47f6c228f86ce9bdf28f6fb9b87032ba7a499f98c775", + "edit_distance": 0.5850556438791733, + "f1_score": 0.8875739644970414, + "meteor": 0.6330302099888001, + "precision": 0.9036144578313253, + "pred_md": "US 2019/0287691 Al\n\nwherein R2 , R14 , R16 , R18 , and R 19 , individually, include H, OH, or an alkyl group having from 1 to 10 carbon atoms; R17 includes NH 2 , C(=O)OH, maleimide, dibromo-ma› leimide, isothiocyanate, alkyne, or azide; and r is from Oto 4.\n\n## [0328] 27. A composition of embodiment 23, including a structure:\n\nwherein: R2 , R14 , R16 , R18 , R19 , and R 20 , or an alkyl group having from 1 to 10 carbon atoms; R17 includes NH 2 , C(=O)OH, maleimide, dibromo-ma› leimide, isothiocyanate, alkyne, or azide; and r can be from 0 to 4.\n\n## [0329]\n\nindividually, include H, OH, 28. A composition of embodiment 23, including a structure:\n\nwherein: R2 , R14 , R16 , R18 , R19 , and R 20 , individually, include H, OH, or an alkyl group having from 1 to 10 carbon atoms; R17 includes NH 2 , C(=O)OH, maleimide, dibromo-ma› leimide, isothiocyanate, alkyne, or azide; and r can be from 0 to 4.\n\n30\n\nSep. 19,2019\n\n## [0330] 29. A composition of embodiment 23, including a structure:\n\nwherein: R2 , R14 , R16 , R18 , and R 19 , individually, include H, OH, or an alkyl group having from 1 to 10 carbon atoms; R17 includes NH 2 , C(=O)OH, maleimide, dibromo-ma› leimide, isothiocyanate, alkyne, or azide; and r is from 0 to 4.\n\n## [0331] 30. A composition of embodiment 23, including a structure:\n\nwherein: R2 , R14 , R16 , R18 , and R 19 , individually, include H, OH, or an alkyl group having from 1 to 10 carbon atoms; R17 includes NH 2 , C(=O)OH, maleimide, dibromo-ma› leimide, isothiocyanate, alkyne, or azide; r is from 0 to 4.\n\n## [0332] 31. A composition, including a structure:\n\nwherein: R21 and R 22 , individually, include H, OH, or an alkyl group having from 1 to 10 carbon atoms; R 23 includes H, OH, an alkyl group having from 1 to 10 carbon atoms, or (CH 2 )eRa, where Ra is NH 2 , C(=O)OH, maleimide, dibromo-maleimide, isothiocyanate, alkyne, or azide;", + "recall": 0.872093023255814, + "true_md": "US 2019/0287691 Al \n\n30 \n\nSep. 19,2019 \n\nwherein \n\nR$_{2}$ , R$_{14}$, R 16 , R 18 , and R 19 , individually, include H, OH, or an alkyl group having from 1 to 10 carbon atoms; \n\nR$_{17 }$ includes NH$_{2}$ , C(=O)OH, maleimide, dibromo-ma› leimide, isothiocyanate, alkyne, or azide; and \n\nr is from Oto 4. \n\nwherein: \n\nR$_{2}$, R$_{14}$ , R 16 , R 18 , and R 19 , individually, include H, OH, or an alkyl group having from 1 to 10 carbon atoms; \n\nR$_{17 }$ includes NH$_{2}$ , C(=O)OH, maleimide, dibromo-ma› leimide, isothiocyanate, alkyne, or azide; and \n\nr is from 0 to 4. \n\nwherein: \n\nR$_{2}$ , R$_{14}$, R 16 , R 18 , R 19 , and R 20 , individually, include H, OH, or an alkyl group having from 1 to 10 carbon atoms; \n\nR$_{17 }$ includes NH$_{2}$ , C(=O)OH, maleimide, dibromo-ma› leimide, isothiocyanate, alkyne, or azide; and \n\nr can be from 0 to 4. \n\nwherein: \n\nR$_{2}$ , R$_{14}$, R 16 , R 18 , and R 19 , individually, include H, OH, or an alkyl group having from 1 to 10 carbon atoms; \n\nR$_{17 }$ includes NH$_{2}$ , C(=O)OH, maleimide, dibromo-ma› leimide, isothiocyanate, alkyne, or azide; \n\nr is from 0 to 4. \n\nwherein: \n\nR$_{21 }$ and R$_{22}$, individually, include H, OH, or an alkyl group having from 1 to 10 carbon atoms; \n\nR$_{23 }$ includes H, OH, an alkyl group having from 1 to 10 carbon atoms, or (CH$_{2}$)eRa, where Ra is NH$_{2}$, C(=O)OH, maleimide, dibromo-maleimide, isothiocyanate, alkyne, or azide; \n\nwherein: \n\nR$_{2}$ , R$_{14}$, R 16 , R 18 , R 19 , and R 20 , individually, include H, OH, or an alkyl group having from 1 to 10 carbon atoms; \n\nR$_{17 }$ includes NH$_{2}$ , C(=O)OH, maleimide, dibromo-ma› leimide, isothiocyanate, alkyne, or azide; and \n\nr can be from 0 to 4. \n\n- [0332] 31. A composition, including a structure: \n\n- [0329] 28. A composition of embodiment 23, including a structure: \n\n- [0331] 30. A composition of embodiment 23, including a structure: \n\n- [0330] 29. A composition of embodiment 23, including a structure: \n\n- [0328] 27. A composition of embodiment 23, including a structure:" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.954019601291145, + "doc_id": "9e0b359594b0948810df5dc8318a3298b5ca5d5d4bda31908bdb8d5fc6af3f2c", + "edit_distance": 0.503448275862069, + "f1_score": 0.9722222222222223, + "meteor": 0.6821174156396058, + "precision": 0.9683794466403162, + "pred_md": "19\n\n-continued\n\n17 .2 g of 95% 4-chloro-1,3-diaminobenzene are dissolved in 250 g of warm water. With stirring, 9.3 g of diketene are added dropwise in the course of 1 hour at 90---95° C., the aceto-acetyl compound being precipitated partially in oily form. After the addition of 27 g of 2N sulfuric acid, the mixture is heated at 95° C. for 2 h. The oily acetoacetyl compound rapidly changes into a fine, crystalline, dark› brown precipitate. The hot reaction mixture is neutralised with 30 ml of 2N Na OH and stirred for a further 30 minutes. The hot reaction mixture is filtered and washed neutral with 100 ml of cold water in portions. The deep-brown product is dried at 60° C. in vacuo. 18 g (yield: 78%, ratio of 4-methyl6-chloro-7-aminoquinolone: 4-methyl-5-amino-6-chloroquinolone: further, unidentified product=about 86: 13: 1) of a dark-brown solid having a melting point of 345° C. are obtained.\n\n## COMPARISON EXAMPLE 4 (DE-A-1278039)\n\n8.4 g of diketene are stirred with 15 g of toluene, and 7 .2 g of 4-chloro-1,3-diaminobenzene are added at such a rate that the heat of reaction causes the temperature to rise to 60-70° C. After being stirred for one hour at 60-70° C., the mixture is cooled to 15° C. 50 g of water and 10 g of HCI (37%) are introduced into the black oil and the mixture is then distilled until a boiling temperature of 95-100° C. is reached. That temperature is maintained for 2 h. After about one hour, the black solution changes into a suspension. The greyish-green suspension is then cooled to 15° C., stirred for 30 minutes and filtered. The greyish-green filter cake is introduced into 50 g of water; 5 g of sodium acetate are added and the mixture is boiled for one hour. The mixture is then cooled to room temperature and the suspension is filtered. The grey product is washed neutral with 200 g of cold water and dried at 60° C. in vacuo. 6 g (yield: 58%, isomeric ratio of 4-methyl-6-chloro-7-aminoquinolone to 4-methyl-5-amino-6-chloroquinolone=about 53:47) of a grey solid having a melting point of 290° C. are obtained.\n\nUS 7,144,993 B2\n\n20\n\n## COMPARISON EXAMPLE 5 (DE-A-95 86 47)\n\n18.8 g (0.1 mo!) of 4-sulfo-1,3-phenylenediamine are suspended in 150 ml of water and the suspension is heated to 35° C. 9.3 g (0.11 mo!) of diketene are added to the grey suspension in the course of 60 minutes at 35--40° C. The mixture is heated to 92° C. in the course of 30 min; 4 g of SN HCI are then added to the yellowish-green suspension and the mixture is boiled under reflux for a further 2 h. A further 33 g of SN HCI are then added. The suspension is cooled to 22° C., filtered and washed with a total of 150 ml of cold water In portions. The grey product is dried over› night at 60° C. in vacuo. 9 g (yield 35%; ratio of 4-methyl6-sulfo-7-aminoquinolone: 4-methyl-5-amino-6-sulfoqui› nolone: further, unidentified product=71:21:8) of a beige solid having a melting point of 288° C. are obtained.\n\n## What is claimed is:\n\n- 1. A process for the preparation of a compound of the formula\n\nwhich comprises converting a compound of the formula\n\nin an aprotic organic solvent in the presence of a catalyti› cally active amount of a strong acid (catalyst) or of an agent that liberates a strong acid or of an ammonium salt of a strong acid, it also being possible for the catalyst to be part of the starting material/product, into a compound of formula I,\n\nwherein R 5 , R 6 and R 8 are each independently of the others a hydrogen atom, a nitro group, a sulfa group, a halogen atom, a pseudohalogen, a group COOR 1 or\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n60\n\n65", + "recall": 0.9760956175298805, + "true_md": "19 \n\nUS 7,144,993 B2 \n\n20 \n\n## COMPARISON EXAMPLE 5 (DE-A-95 86 47)\n\n## COMPARISON EXAMPLE 4 (DE-A-1278039)\n\n- wherein R 5 , R 6 and R 8 are each independently of the others a hydrogen atom, a nitro group, a sulfa group, a halogen atom, a pseudohalogen, a group COOR 1 or \n\nin an aprotic organic solvent in the presence of a catalyti› cally active amount of a strong acid (catalyst) or of an agent that liberates a strong acid or of an ammonium salt of a strong acid, it also being possible for the catalyst to be part of the starting material/product, into a compound of formula I, \n\n8.4 g of diketene are stirred with 15 g of toluene, and 7 .2 g of 4-chloro-1,3-diaminobenzene are added at such a rate that the heat of reaction causes the temperature to rise to 60-70° C. After being stirred for one hour at 60-70° C., the mixture is cooled to 15° C. 50 g of water and 10 g of HCI (37%) are introduced into the black oil and the mixture is then distilled until a boiling temperature of 95-100° C. is reached. That temperature is maintained for 2 h. After about one hour, the black solution changes into a suspension. The greyish-green suspension is then cooled to 15° C., stirred for 30 minutes and filtered. The greyish-green filter cake is introduced into 50 g of water; 5 g of sodium acetate are added and the mixture is boiled for one hour. The mixture is then cooled to room temperature and the suspension is filtered. The grey product is washed neutral with 200 g of cold water and dried at 60° C. in vacuo. 6 g (yield: 58%, isomeric ratio of 4-methyl-6-chloro-7-aminoquinolone to 4-methyl-5-amino-6-chloroquinolone=about 53:47) of a grey solid having a melting point of 290° C. are obtained. \n\nwhich comprises converting a compound of the formula \n\n(II) \n\n(I) \n\n1. A process for the preparation of a compound of the formula \n\nWhat is claimed is: \n\n18.8 g (0.1 mo!) of 4-sulfo-1,3-phenylenediamine are suspended in 150 ml of water and the suspension is heated to 35° C. 9.3 g (0.11 mo!) of diketene are added to the grey suspension in the course of 60 minutes at 35--40° C. The mixture is heated to 92° C. in the course of 30 min; 4 g of SN HCI are then added to the yellowish-green suspension and the mixture is boiled under reflux for a further 2 h. A further 33 g of SN HCI are then added. The suspension is cooled to 22° C., filtered and washed with a total of 150 ml of cold water In portions. The grey product is dried over› night at 60° C. in vacuo. 9 g (yield 35%; ratio of 4-methyl- 6-sulfo-7-aminoquinolone: 4-methyl-5-amino-6-sulfoqui› nolone: further, unidentified product=71:21:8) of a beige solid having a melting point of 288° C. are obtained. \n\n17 .2 g of 95% 4-chloro-1,3-diaminobenzene are dissolved in 250 g of warm water. With stirring, 9.3 g of diketene are added dropwise in the course of 1 hour at 90---95° C., the aceto-acetyl compound being precipitated partially in oily form. After the addition of 27 g of 2N sulfuric acid, the mixture is heated at 95° C. for 2 h. The oily acetoacetyl compound rapidly changes into a fine, crystalline, dark› brown precipitate. The hot reaction mixture is neutralised with 30 ml of 2N Na OH and stirred for a further 30 minutes. The hot reaction mixture is filtered and washed neutral with 100 ml of cold water in portions. The deep-brown product is dried at 60° C. in vacuo. 18 g (yield: 78%, ratio of 4-methyl- 6-chloro-7-aminoquinolone: 4-methyl-5-amino-6-chloro- quinolone: further, unidentified product=about 86: 13: 1) of a dark-brown solid having a melting point of 345° C. are obtained. \n\n-continued" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.13637095534690957, + "doc_id": "c455c980251802be2cc283f14ab0a7b8101b0357d54b65ef8e3fd9b9b56a9710", + "edit_distance": 0.8260869565217391, + "f1_score": 0.4444444444444444, + "meteor": 0.738016136687233, + "precision": 0.2857142857142857, + "pred_md": "49\n\n50\n\n-continued\n\n-continued\n\nUS 9,164,380 B2\n\n(al-4-6)\n\n5\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n60\n\n65", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "US 9,164,380 B2 \n\n49 \n\n50 \n\n-continued \n\n-continued" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9574427871624145, + "doc_id": "4e14010e059b0f170238e16e3a7a3f6c9900181cd26ff2efc744bd47b3796970", + "edit_distance": 0.7511961722488039, + "f1_score": 0.9727626459143969, + "meteor": 0.7250106457005794, + "precision": 0.9652509652509652, + "pred_md": "19\n\n## EXAMPLE 1\n\n## Preparation of an Aqueous Dispersion Containing Soft Polymer Particles\n\nAn aqueous dispersion containing the soft polymer par› ticles was prepared by redox polymerization.\n\nA monomer emulsion was prepared by combining 600 g BA, 20 g MAA, 365 g MMA, 1.25 g nDDM, 400 g DI water, 6.9 g sodium carbonate and 30.5 g SLS and emulsifying with stirring. Next, 5.2 g SLS and 380 g DI water were charged to a three liter multi-neck flask fitted with mechanical stirring. The flask contents were heated to 65° C. under a nitrogen atmosphere. To the stirred flask contents were added 35 g of the monomer emulsion followed by 0.02 g ferrous sulfate heptahydrate and 0.02 g tetrasodium salt of ethylenediamine-tetraacetic acid in 15.6 g DI water. Poly› merization was initiated by the addition of 0.54 g APS in 8 g DI water followed by 0.27 g sodium hydrosulfite in 8 g DI water. Next, 30 g of a 50% solution of ureido methacrylate was added to the remainder of the monomer emulsion and gradual addition of the monomer emulsion was subsequently initiated. Separate solutions of 2.9 g APS in 50 g DI water and 1 g of D-isoascorbic acid in 50 g DI water were fed concurrently with the monomer emulsion. Total addition time for the three feeds was 90---100 minutes. The contents of the flask was maintained at 65° C. throughout the addition of the monomer emulsion. The emulsion feed line was rinsed with 20 g DI water. After completion of the monomer emulsion addition, the reactor was cooled to 60° C. Next, an aqueous solution containing 10 ppm ferrous sulfate, 1 g t-butyl hydroperoxide and 0.5 g D-isoascorbic acid was added. The contents of the flask was neutralized to a pH in the range of 9-10 with ammonium hydroxide.\n\nThe % conversion of the monomer in the reaction mixture during the addition of the monomer emulsion is shown in Table 1.2.\n\nTABLE 1.2\n\nThe resulting aqueous dispersion, Example 1, contained 49.2 weight % soft polymer particles, based on the total weight of Example 1. The soft polymer particles had an average particle diameter of 187 nm and a glass transition temperature of -10° C.\n\nExample 1 was prepared by a polymerization process wherein at least 40% of the weight of the soft polymer particles were prepared by a redox polymerization. Further, the soft polymer particles of Example 1 were formed in a process wherein at least 40 weight % of each of the soft polymer particles were polymerization in the presence of excess unreacted monomer.\n\n## EXAMPLE 2\n\n## Preparation of an Aqueous Dispersion Containing Soft Polymer Particles\n\nAn aqueous dispersion containing the soft polymer partides is prepared by a thermally initiated controlled conversion process.\n\nUS 6,930,141 B2\n\n20\n\nA monomer emulsion is prepared by combining 480 g MMA, 500 g BA, 20 g MAA, 1.25 g nDDM, 455 g DI water, and 30.5 g SLS and emulsifying with stirring. Next, 5.2 g SLS and 215 g DI water are charged to a three liter multi-neck flask fitted with mechanical stirring. The con› tents of the flask is heated to 88° C. under a nitrogen atmosphere. To the stirred flask contents, 35 g of the monomer emulsion is added followed by a solution contain› ing 0.35 g sodium carbonate and 0.3 gAPS in 20 g DI water. Next, the monomer emulsion is gradually added to the flask along with the concurrent addition of an initiator solution containing 1.05 g APS and 6.55 g sodium carbonate in 50 g DI water. The total addition time for the feeds is approxi› mately 90---100 minutes. Throughout the addition of the monomer emulsion, the contents of the flask is maintained at a temperature of 88° C. After the complete addition of the monomer emulsion and the initiator solution, the emulsion feed line is rinsed with 20 g DI water, which is added to the flask. Next, the contents of the flask is cooled to approximately 60° C. and an aqueous solution containing 10 ppm ferrous sulfate, 1 g t-butyl hydroperoxide and 0.5 g D-isoascorbic acid is added. The contents of the flask is neutralized to a pH in the range of 9-10 with ammonium hydroxide.\n\nThe % conversion of the monomer in the reaction mixture during the addition of the monomer emulsion is shown in Table 2.2.\n\nTABLE 2.2\n\nThe resulting aqueous dispersion, Example 2, contains 50.2% by weight of the soft polymer particles, based on the total weight of Example 2. The soft polymer particles have an average particle diameter of 169 nm and a glass transition temperature of 5° C.\n\n## COMPARATIVE A\n\nPreparation of an Aqueous Dispersion Containing Comparative Soft Polymer Particles\n\nAn aqueous dispersion containing comparative soft poly› mer particles was prepared by a polymer process that did not include redox polymerization.\n\nA monomer emulsion was prepared by combining 969 g of BA, 34 g of MAA, 680 g of MMA, 460 g DI water, and 18.7 g Triton™ XN-45S surfactant (Triton is a trademark of Union Carbide Co.), and emulsifying with stirring. Next, 2.5 g Triton™ XN-45S surfactant and 1000 g DI water were charged to a five liter multi-neck flask fitted with mechanical stirring. The contents of the flask was heated to 85° C. under a nitrogen atmosphere. To the stirred flask contents were added 92 g the monomer emulsion followed by 2.6 g APS in 100 g DI water and followed by 1.7 g sodium carbonate in 100 g DI water. Next, 34 g of a 50% solution of ureido methacrylate was added to the remainder of the monomer emulsion and the gradual addition of the monomer emulsion\n\n5\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n60\n\n65", + "recall": 0.9803921568627451, + "true_md": "19 \n\nUS 6,930,141 B2 \n\n20 \n\nA monomer emulsion was prepared by combining 969 g of BA, 34 g of MAA, 680 g of MMA, 460 g DI water, and 18.7 g Triton™ XN-45S surfactant (Triton is a trademark of Union Carbide Co.), and emulsifying with stirring. Next, 2.5 g Triton™ XN-45S surfactant and 1000 g DI water were charged to a five liter multi-neck flask fitted with mechanical stirring. The contents of the flask was heated to 85° C. under a nitrogen atmosphere. To the stirred flask contents were added 92 g the monomer emulsion followed by 2.6 g APS in 100 g DI water and followed by 1.7 g sodium carbonate in 100 g DI water. Next, 34 g of a 50% solution of ureido methacrylate was added to the remainder of the monomer emulsion and the gradual addition of the monomer emulsion \n\nAn aqueous dispersion containing comparative soft poly› mer particles was prepared by a polymer process that did not include redox polymerization. \n\nPreparation of an Aqueous Dispersion Containing Comparative Soft Polymer Particles \n\nAn aqueous dispersion containing the soft polymer par- tides is prepared by a thermally initiated controlled conver- sion process. \n\nPreparation of an Aqueous Dispersion Containing Soft Polymer Particles \n\nExample 1 was prepared by a polymerization process wherein at least 40% of the weight of the soft polymer particles were prepared by a redox polymerization. Further, the soft polymer particles of Example 1 were formed in a process wherein at least 40 weight % of each of the soft polymer particles were polymerization in the presence of excess unreacted monomer. \n\nThe resulting aqueous dispersion, Example 1, contained 49.2 weight % soft polymer particles, based on the total weight of Example 1. The soft polymer particles had an average particle diameter of 187 nm and a glass transition temperature of -10° C. \n\nThe resulting aqueous dispersion, Example 2, contains 50.2% by weight of the soft polymer particles, based on the total weight of Example 2. The soft polymer particles have an average particle diameter of 169 nm and a glass transition temperature of 5° C. \n\nThe % conversion of the monomer in the reaction mixture during the addition of the monomer emulsion is shown in Table 1.2. \n\nThe % conversion of the monomer in the reaction mixture during the addition of the monomer emulsion is shown in Table 2.2. \n\nA monomer emulsion was prepared by combining 600 g BA, 20 g MAA, 365 g MMA, 1.25 g nDDM, 400 g DI water, 6.9 g sodium carbonate and 30.5 g SLS and emulsifying with stirring. Next, 5.2 g SLS and 380 g DI water were charged to a three liter multi-neck flask fitted with mechanical stirring. The flask contents were heated to 65° C. under a nitrogen atmosphere. To the stirred flask contents were added 35 g of the monomer emulsion followed by 0.02 g ferrous sulfate heptahydrate and 0.02 g tetrasodium salt of ethylenediamine-tetraacetic acid in 15.6 g DI water. Poly› merization was initiated by the addition of 0.54 g APS in 8 g DI water followed by 0.27 g sodium hydrosulfite in 8 g DI water. Next, 30 g of a 50% solution of ureido methacrylate was added to the remainder of the monomer emulsion and gradual addition of the monomer emulsion was subsequently initiated. Separate solutions of 2.9 g APS in 50 g DI water and 1 g of D-isoascorbic acid in 50 g DI water were fed concurrently with the monomer emulsion. Total addition time for the three feeds was 90---100 minutes. The contents of the flask was maintained at 65° C. throughout the addition of the monomer emulsion. The emulsion feed line was rinsed with 20 g DI water. After completion of the monomer emulsion addition, the reactor was cooled to 60° C. Next, an aqueous solution containing 10 ppm ferrous sulfate, 1 g t-butyl hydroperoxide and 0.5 g D-isoascorbic acid was added. The contents of the flask was neutralized to a pH in the range of 9-10 with ammonium hydroxide. \n\nA monomer emulsion is prepared by combining 480 g MMA, 500 g BA, 20 g MAA, 1.25 g nDDM, 455 g DI water, and 30.5 g SLS and emulsifying with stirring. Next, 5.2 g SLS and 215 g DI water are charged to a three liter multi-neck flask fitted with mechanical stirring. The con› tents of the flask is heated to 88° C. under a nitrogen atmosphere. To the stirred flask contents, 35 g of the monomer emulsion is added followed by a solution contain› ing 0.35 g sodium carbonate and 0.3 gAPS in 20 g DI water. Next, the monomer emulsion is gradually added to the flask along with the concurrent addition of an initiator solution containing 1.05 g APS and 6.55 g sodium carbonate in 50 g DI water. The total addition time for the feeds is approxi› mately 90---100 minutes. Throughout the addition of the monomer emulsion, the contents of the flask is maintained at a temperature of 88° C. After the complete addition of the monomer emulsion and the initiator solution, the emulsion feed line is rinsed with 20 g DI water, which is added to the flask. Next, the contents of the flask is cooled to approxi- mately 60° C. and an aqueous solution containing 10 ppm ferrous sulfate, 1 g t-butyl hydroperoxide and 0.5 g D-isoascorbic acid is added. The contents of the flask is neutralized to a pH in the range of 9-10 with ammonium hydroxide. \n\nAn aqueous dispersion containing the soft polymer par› ticles was prepared by redox polymerization. \n\n## EXAMPLE 1\n\nPreparation of an Aqueous Dispersion Containing Soft Polymer Particles \n\n## TABLE 2.2\n\n## TABLE 1.2\n\n## COMPARATIVE A\n\n## EXAMPLE 2" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9227306413684452, + "doc_id": "190774629a25bfd27e3e0610edd5cea94fb5c980198c5130fac2c56d074429dc", + "edit_distance": 0.08390541571319603, + "f1_score": 0.9840933191940614, + "meteor": 0.945267609975795, + "precision": 0.9872340425531915, + "pred_md": "US 2005/0176978 Al\n\nlower (alkyl)ester of a fatty acid comprising combining the fatty acid, a lower alkanol and a catalyst of formula I or II under conditions wherein the catalyst catalyzes the forma› tion of the corresponding lower (alkyl)ester. In a preferred embodiment, the fatty acid is present in an organic or synthetic feedstock such as an animal or vegetable oil that comprises a major portion of glycerol fatty acid esters, such as the mono-, diand/or tri-esters.\n\n[0018] Preferably the fatty acid portion of the ester or glyceride is derived from a (C 8 -C22 ) fatty acid, preferably a (C10 -C 18 ) fatty acid, which is a saturated alkyl ester that optionally comprises 1-3 CH=CH moieties in the alkyl chain. The (C 1 -C 3 ) alcohols are preferably methanol, etha› nol, propanol or i-propyl alcohol, although higher alkanols such as (C 4 -C 6 ) alkanols may be useful in some applications. The alcohol is preferably used in a molar excess over the starting material acid and/or ester component of the feed› stock, since such esterification/transesterification reactions are highly reversible.\n\n## BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS\n\n[0019] FIG. 1 depicts general synthetic routes to precur› sors compounds of formula I, (3, and 7), and 5.\n\n[0020] FIG. 2 depicts synthetic routes to specific precur› sor compounds of formula I, 11 and 13 and 12.\n\n[0021] FIG. 3 depicts synthetic routes to specific precur› sors of compounds of formula I and II (15 and 17).\n\n[0022] FIG. 4 depicts a synthetic route to a precursor compound of a compound of formula I (20a) and salt (21a).\n\n[0023] FIG. 5 depicts intermediates useful in the present invention.\n\n[0024] FIG. 6 is a graph depicting the transesterification of soybean oil to methyl soyate in methanol at 25° C. with mesoporous silica supported superbases.\n\n## DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION\n\n[0025] Mesoporous Silicates\n\n[0026] Mesoporous silicates useful in the present method typically have a particle size of about 50 nm to about 1 µm. In one embodiment, the mesoporous silicates have a particle size of at least about 100 nm, or preferably at least about 200 nm. However, particle size is not critical to the practice of the invention and particulate bodies of larger size can be used in some cases, e.g., to facilitate separations. In another embodiment, the mesoporous silicates have a particle size of less than about 750 nm. As conventionally prepared, they are spherical, but they have also been prepared under conditions that yield other shapes such as rods. The articles of the invention can include mesoporous silicates of any shape, provided the pore structure is suitable for receiving the feedstock, e.g., is uniform and of an appropriate diameter.\n\n[0027] The mesoporous silicate pores typically have a diameter of from about 1-100 nm. In one embodiment of the invention, the pores have a diameter of at least about 2 nm. In other embodiments, the pores have diameters of greater than about 5 nm, or greater than about 10 nm. Typically, the pores have a diameter of less than about 75 nm or less than about 50 nm.\n\n3\n\nAug. 11, 2005\n\n[0028] The mesoporous silicate can be prepared from surfactant micelles of C 10 -C16 alkyl(trialkyl)ammonium salts in water, followed by introduction into the solution of an alkyl orthosilicate, such as tetraethylorthosilicate (TEOS), and one or more functionalized silanes, such as one or more mercaptoalkyl-, chloroalkyl-, aminoalkyl-, carboxy› alkyl-, sulfonylalkyl-, arylalkyl-, alkynyl-, or alkenyl-si› lanes, wherein the (C 2 -C10 )alkyl chain is optionally inter› rupted by -S-S, amido(-C( =O)NR-), -0-, ester(› C(=O)O-), and the like. The aqueous mixture is stirred at moderate temperatures until the silicate precipitates, after which it is collected and dried. The surfactant \"template\" is then removed from the pores of the ordered silicate matrix, for example, by refluxing the silicate in aqueous-alcoholic HCl. The remaining solvent can be removed from the pores of the silicate by placing it under high vacuum. The func› tional groups incorporated onto the surface of the pores can be quantified and used as linker moieties to bind to the functionalized super base, or they can be further modified by attaching terminally-functionalized organic linker moieties that can be reacted with functional groups on Z. The polarity of the interior of the pores can also be adjusted by adding other functionalized silanes to the reaction mixture, includ› ing ones comprising non-polar inert groups such as aryl, perfluoroalkyl, alkyl, arylakyl and the like. The exterior of the silicate matrix can also be functionalized by grafting organic moieties comprising functional groups thereto. These groups can in turn be employed to link the particles to catalytic moieties such as functionalized \"superbase\" catalysts.\n\n[0029] Superbase-Functionalized Mesoporous Solid Cata› lysts\n\n[0030] The three commercially available \"superbases\" of type 1, (la-le in FIG. 5) are exceptionally strong nonionic bases with pKa's of ca. 32 in acetonitrile and have superior catalytic activities for a wide variety of reactions including transesterification. See, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 5,051,533. Their derivatives of type 2a-c are weaker but still very strong bases and catalysts and both types of homogeneous catalysts convert vegetable oils, including soybean oil, to their methyl esters at room temperature. These catalysts deprotonate alcohols to liberate alkoxide ion ( the active species in the catalyst system) in concentrations effective for transesteri› fication.\n\n[0031] Compounds of types 1 and 2 lend themselves well to chemically bonding to mesoporous silica surfaces via trialkoxysilyl groups (see 11, 15 and 17). The Si(OMe h group linker reacts with up to three Si OH groups in the silica to eliminate MeOH giving robust SiOSi anchors. Precursors 11, 15 and 17 per se homogeneously and efficiently catalyze soybean oil transesterification to soy methyl ester (i.e., 100% conversion of 200 mL of soybean oil in 400 mL of methanol in 24 to 36 h at room temperature using only 0.25 mmol of catalyst). These catalysts are greatly superior to commercially available amine-type nonionic bases or their polymer-mounted forms.\n\n[0032] Intermediates 20a, Sc and 6b, have also been prepared, which are designed to take advantage of the vinyl group for linkage to mesoporous solid supports which comprise a mercaptoalkyl functional group already covalently bound thereto. The mercaptoalkyl groups react with vinyl groups to give strong CSC linkages. Such cata-", + "recall": 0.9809725158562368, + "true_md": "Aug. 11, 2005 \n\n3 \n\nUS 2005/0176978 Al \n\nlower (alkyl)ester of a fatty acid comprising combining the fatty acid, a lower alkanol and a catalyst of formula I or II under conditions wherein the catalyst catalyzes the forma› tion of the corresponding lower (alkyl)ester. In a preferred embodiment, the fatty acid is present in an organic or synthetic feedstock such as an animal or vegetable oil that comprises a major portion of glycerol fatty acid esters, such as the mono-, di- and/or tri-esters. \n\n[0018] Preferably the fatty acid portion of the ester or glyceride is derived from a (C$_{8}$-C$_{22}$ ) fatty acid, preferably a (C$_{10}$-C$_{18}$ ) fatty acid, which is a saturated alkyl ester that optionally comprises 1-3 CH=CH moieties in the alkyl chain. The (C$_{1}$ -C$_{3}$ ) alcohols are preferably methanol, etha› nol, propanol or i-propyl alcohol, although higher alkanols such as (C$_{4}$ -C$_{6}$ ) alkanols may be useful in some applications. The alcohol is preferably used in a molar excess over the starting material acid and/or ester component of the feed› stock, since such esterification/transesterification reactions are highly reversible. \n\n[0019] FIG. 1 depicts general synthetic routes to precur› sors compounds of formula I, (3, and 7), and 5. \n\n[0020] FIG. 2 depicts synthetic routes to specific precur› sor compounds of formula I, 11 and 13 and 12. \n\n[0021] FIG. 3 depicts synthetic routes to specific precur› sors of compounds of formula I and II (15 and 17). \n\n[0022] FIG. 4 depicts a synthetic route to a precursor compound of a compound of formula I (20a) and salt (21a). \n\n[0023] FIG. 5 depicts intermediates useful in the present invention. \n\n[0024] FIG. 6 is a graph depicting the transesterification of soybean oil to methyl soyate in methanol at 25° C. with mesoporous silica supported superbases. \n\n[0025] Mesoporous Silicates \n\n[0026] Mesoporous silicates useful in the present method typically have a particle size of about 50 nm to about 1 µm. In one embodiment, the mesoporous silicates have a particle size of at least about 100 nm, or preferably at least about 200 nm. However, particle size is not critical to the practice of the invention and particulate bodies of larger size can be used in some cases, e.g., to facilitate separations. In another embodiment, the mesoporous silicates have a particle size of less than about 750 nm. As conventionally prepared, they are spherical, but they have also been prepared under conditions that yield other shapes such as rods. The articles of the invention can include mesoporous silicates of any shape, provided the pore structure is suitable for receiving the feedstock, e.g., is uniform and of an appropriate diameter. \n\n[0027] The mesoporous silicate pores typically have a diameter of from about 1-100 nm. In one embodiment of the invention, the pores have a diameter of at least about 2 nm. In other embodiments, the pores have diameters of greater than about 5 nm, or greater than about 10 nm. Typically, the pores have a diameter of less than about 75 nm or less than about 50 nm. \n\n[0028] The mesoporous silicate can be prepared from surfactant micelles of C$_{10}$-C$_{16 }$ alkyl(trialkyl)ammonium salts in water, followed by introduction into the solution of an alkyl orthosilicate, such as tetraethylorthosilicate (TEOS), and one or more functionalized silanes, such as one or more mercaptoalkyl-, chloroalkyl-, aminoalkyl-, carboxy› alkyl-, sulfonylalkyl-, arylalkyl-, alkynyl-, or alkenyl-si› lanes, wherein the (C$_{2}$-C$_{10}$)alkyl chain is optionally inter› rupted by -S-S, amido(-C( =O)NR-), -0-, ester(› C(=O)O-), and the like. The aqueous mixture is stirred at moderate temperatures until the silicate precipitates, after which it is collected and dried. The surfactant \"template\" is then removed from the pores of the ordered silicate matrix, for example, by refluxing the silicate in aqueous-alcoholic HCl. The remaining solvent can be removed from the pores of the silicate by placing it under high vacuum. The func› tional groups incorporated onto the surface of the pores can be quantified and used as linker moieties to bind to the functionalized super base, or they can be further modified by attaching terminally-functionalized organic linker moieties that can be reacted with functional groups on Z. The polarity of the interior of the pores can also be adjusted by adding other functionalized silanes to the reaction mixture, includ› ing ones comprising non-polar inert groups such as aryl, perfluoroalkyl, alkyl, arylakyl and the like. The exterior of the silicate matrix can also be functionalized by grafting organic moieties comprising functional groups thereto. These groups can in turn be employed to link the particles to catalytic moieties such as functionalized \"superbase\" catalysts. \n\n[0029] Superbase-Functionalized Mesoporous Solid Cata› lysts \n\n[0030] The three commercially available \"superbases\" of type 1, (la-le in FIG. 5) are exceptionally strong nonionic bases with pKa’s of ca. 32 in acetonitrile and have superior catalytic activities for a wide variety of reactions including transesterification. See, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 5,051,533. Their derivatives of type 2a-c are weaker but still very strong bases and catalysts and both types of homogeneous catalysts convert vegetable oils, including soybean oil, to their methyl esters at room temperature. These catalysts deprotonate alcohols to liberate alkoxide ion ( the active species in the catalyst system) in concentrations effective for transesteri› fication. \n\n[0031] Compounds of types 1 and 2 lend themselves well to chemically bonding to mesoporous silica surfaces via trialkoxysilyl groups (see 11, 15 and 17). The Si(OMe h group linker reacts with up to three Si OH groups in the silica to eliminate MeOH giving robust SiOSi anchors. Precursors 11, 15 and 17 per se homogeneously and efficiently catalyze soybean oil transesterification to soy methyl ester (i.e., 100% conversion of 200 mL of soybean oil in 400 mL of methanol in 24 to 36 h at room temperature using only 0.25 mmol of catalyst). These catalysts are greatly superior to commercially available amine-type nonionic bases or their polymer-mounted forms. \n\n[0032] Intermediates 20a, Sc and 6b, have also been prepared, which are designed to take advantage of the vinyl group for linkage to mesoporous solid supports which comprise a mercaptoalkyl functional group already covalently bound thereto. The mercaptoalkyl groups react with vinyl groups to give strong CSC linkages. Such cata-\n\n## DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION\n\n## BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9664604996118464, + "doc_id": "5fe3146120a2bed373be066ae464fe054aafa5fc017659526a725b5757d563be", + "edit_distance": 0.08134394341290893, + "f1_score": 0.9817629179331308, + "meteor": 0.9830674029522979, + "precision": 0.99079754601227, + "pred_md": "US 2009/0197849 Al\n\nrepresent about 0.3-7.0 wt%, preferably 0.5-4.0 wt%, more preferably about 0.5-3.0 wt%, most preferably about 0.752.0 wt %, of a topically applied formulation or of a drug reservoir of a drug delivery system, or patch.\n\n[0039] The aforementioned amounts are particularly appli› cable to those formulations and patches in which the active agent is (1) an uncharged molecule, e.g., wherein a basic drug is in nonionized, free-base form, (2) a basic salt of an acidic drug, or (3) there are no additional species in the formulation or patch that could react with or be neutralized by the inor› ganic hydroxide, to any significant degree.\n\n[0040] For formulations and patches in which the drug is in the form of an acid addition salt, and/or wherein there are additional species in the formulations or systems that can be neutralized by or react with the inorganic base (i.e., acidic inactive ingredients), the amount of inorganic hydroxide is preferably the total of (1) the amount necessary to neutralize the acid addition salt and/or other base-neutralizable species (i.e., the \"acidic species\"), plus (2) about 0.3-7 .0 wt%, pref› erably 0.5-4.0 wt %, more preferably about 0.5-3.0 wt %, most preferably about 0.75-2.0 wt%, of the formulation or drug reservoir. That is, for an acid addition salt, the enhancer is preferably present in an amount just sufficient to neutralize the salt, plus an additional amount (i.e., about 0.3-7.0 wt%, preferably 0.5-4.0 wt%, more preferably about 0.5-3.0 wt%, most preferably about 0.75-2.0 wt%) to enhance the flux of the drug through the skin or mucosa! tissue. Basic drugs in the form of a neutral, free base or basic salt of acidic drug are usually not affected by a base, and thus for these drugs, the amount in (1) is usually the amount necessary to neutralize inactive components that are acidic. For patches, the afore› mentioned percentages are given relative to the total weight of the formulation components and the adhesive, gel or liquid reservmr.\n\n[ 0041] Still greater amounts ofinorganic hydroxide may be used by controlling the rate and/or quantity ofrelease of the base, preferably during the drug delivery period itself.\n\n## Inorganic Oxides\n\n[0042] Inorganic oxides include, for example, magnesium oxide, calcium oxide, and the like.\n\n[0043] The amount of inorganic oxide included in the com› positions and systems of the invention may be substantially higher than the numbers set forth above for the inorganic hydroxide, and may be as high as 20 wt %, in some cases as high as 25 wt% or higher, but will generally be in the range of about 2-20 wt%. These amounts may be adjusted to take into consideration the presence of any base-neutralizable species.\n\n## Inorganic Salts ofWeakAcids\n\n[0044] Inorganic salts of weak acids include, ammonium phosphate (dibasic); alkali metal salts of weak acids such as sodium acetate, sodium borate, sodium metaborate, sodium carbonate, sodium bicarbonate, sodium phosphate (tribasic ), sodium phosphate ( di basic), potassium carbonate, potassium bicarbonate, potassium citrate, potassium acetate, potassium phosphate ( dibasic ), potassium phosphate (tribasic ); alkaline earth metal salts of weak acids such as magnesium phosphate and calcium phosphate; and the like, and combinations thereof.\n\n[0045] Preferred inorganic salts of weak acids include, ammonium phosphate ( dibasic) and alkali metal salts of weak acids.\n\n5\n\nAug. 6, 2009\n\n[0046] The amount of inorganic salts of weak acids included in the compositions and systems of the invention may be substantially higher than the numbers set forth above for the inorganic hydroxide, and may be as high as 20 wt %, in some cases as high as 25 wt% or higher, but will generally be in the range of approximately 2-20 wt%. These amounts may be adjusted to take into consideration the presence of any base-neutralizable species.\n\n[0047] B. Organic Bases\n\n[0048] Organic bases suitable for use in the invention are compounds having an amino group, amido group, an oxime, a cyano group, an aromatic or non-aromatic nitrogen-contain› ing heterocycle, a urea group, and combinations thereof. More specifically, examples of suitable organic bases are nitrogenous bases, which include, but are not limited to, pri› mary amines, secondary amines, tertiary amines, amides, oximes, cyano (-CN) containing groups, aromatic and non› aromatic nitrogen-containing heterocycles, urea, and mix› tures thereof. Preferred organic bases are primary amines, secondary amines, tertiary amines, aromatic and non-aro› matic nitrogen-containing heterocycles, and mixtures thereof.\n\n[0049] For nitrogenous bases, the amount of enhancing agent will typically represent about 0.5-4.0 wt%, preferably about 0.5-3.0 wt%, more preferably about 0.75-2.0 wt%, of a topically applied formulation or of a drug reservoir of a drug delivery system or a patch. These amounts may be adjusted to take into consideration the presence of any base-neutralizable species.\n\n[0050] Still greater amounts of the nitrogenous base may be used depending on the strength of the base and the rate and/or quantity of release of the nitrogenous base preferably during the drug delivery period itself.\n\n[0051] Preferred organic bases are those whose aqueous solutions have a high pH or a high pKa (more preferably a pKa>9), and are acceptable as food or pharmaceutical addi› tives. Examples of such preferred organic bases are those listed below, along with their respective pHs ( or pKa values).\n\n- 1 listed in the \"Handbook of Pharmaceutical Additives\"\n- 2 1isted in the FDA's food additive database\n\n## Amines\n\n[0052] Amines are compounds that include at least one primary amino (-NH 2 ) group, mono-substituted (second› ary) amino group or di-substituted (tertiary) amino group.", + "recall": 0.9728915662650602, + "true_md": "Aug. 6, 2009 \n\n5 \n\nUS 2009/0197849 Al \n\nrepresent about 0.3-7.0 wt%, preferably 0.5-4.0 wt%, more preferably about 0.5-3.0 wt%, most preferably about 0.75- 2.0 wt %, of a topically applied formulation or of a drug reservoir of a drug delivery system, or patch. \n\n[0039] The aforementioned amounts are particularly appli› cable to those formulations and patches in which the active agent is (1) an uncharged molecule, e.g., wherein a basic drug is in nonionized, free-base form, (2) a basic salt of an acidic drug, or (3) there are no additional species in the formulation or patch that could react with or be neutralized by the inor› ganic hydroxide, to any significant degree. \n\n[0040] For formulations and patches in which the drug is in the form of an acid addition salt, and/or wherein there are additional species in the formulations or systems that can be neutralized by or react with the inorganic base (i.e., acidic inactive ingredients), the amount of inorganic hydroxide is preferably the total of (1) the amount necessary to neutralize the acid addition salt and/or other base-neutralizable species (i.e., the \"acidic species\"), plus (2) about 0.3-7 .0 wt%, pref› erably 0.5-4.0 wt %, more preferably about 0.5-3.0 wt %, most preferably about 0.75-2.0 wt%, of the formulation or drug reservoir. That is, for an acid addition salt, the enhancer is preferably present in an amount just sufficient to neutralize the salt, plus an additional amount (i.e., about 0.3-7.0 wt%, preferably 0.5-4.0 wt%, more preferably about 0.5-3.0 wt%, most preferably about 0.75-2.0 wt%) to enhance the flux of the drug through the skin or mucosa! tissue. Basic drugs in the form of a neutral, free base or basic salt of acidic drug are usually not affected by a base, and thus for these drugs, the amount in (1) is usually the amount necessary to neutralize inactive components that are acidic. For patches, the afore› mentioned percentages are given relative to the total weight of the formulation components and the adhesive, gel or liquid reservmr. \n\n[ 0041] Still greater amounts ofinorganic hydroxide may be used by controlling the rate and/or quantity ofrelease of the base, preferably during the drug delivery period itself. \n\n[0042] Inorganic oxides include, for example, magnesium oxide, calcium oxide, and the like. \n\n[0043] The amount of inorganic oxide included in the com› positions and systems of the invention may be substantially higher than the numbers set forth above for the inorganic hydroxide, and may be as high as 20 wt %, in some cases as high as 25 wt% or higher, but will generally be in the range of about 2-20 wt%. These amounts may be adjusted to take into consideration the presence of any base-neutralizable species. \n\n[0044] Inorganic salts of weak acids include, ammonium phosphate (dibasic); alkali metal salts of weak acids such as sodium acetate, sodium borate, sodium metaborate, sodium carbonate, sodium bicarbonate, sodium phosphate (tribasic ), sodium phosphate ( di basic), potassium carbonate, potassium bicarbonate, potassium citrate, potassium acetate, potassium phosphate ( dibasic ), potassium phosphate (tribasic ); alkaline earth metal salts of weak acids such as magnesium phosphate and calcium phosphate; and the like, and combinations thereof. \n\n[0045] Preferred inorganic salts of weak acids include, ammonium phosphate ( dibasic) and alkali metal salts of weak acids. \n\n[0046] The amount of inorganic salts of weak acids included in the compositions and systems of the invention may be substantially higher than the numbers set forth above for the inorganic hydroxide, and may be as high as 20 wt %, in some cases as high as 25 wt% or higher, but will generally be in the range of approximately 2-20 wt%. These amounts may be adjusted to take into consideration the presence of any base-neutralizable species. \n\n[0047] B. Organic Bases \n\n[0048] Organic bases suitable for use in the invention are compounds having an amino group, amido group, an oxime, a cyano group, an aromatic or non-aromatic nitrogen-contain› ing heterocycle, a urea group, and combinations thereof. More specifically, examples of suitable organic bases are nitrogenous bases, which include, but are not limited to, pri› mary amines, secondary amines, tertiary amines, amides, oximes, cyano (-CN) containing groups, aromatic and non› aromatic nitrogen-containing heterocycles, urea, and mix› tures thereof. Preferred organic bases are primary amines, secondary amines, tertiary amines, aromatic and non-aro› matic nitrogen-containing heterocycles, and mixtures thereof. \n\n[0049] For nitrogenous bases, the amount of enhancing agent will typically represent about 0.5-4.0 wt%, preferably about 0.5-3.0 wt%, more preferably about 0.75-2.0 wt%, of a topically applied formulation or of a drug reservoir of a drug delivery system or a patch. These amounts may be adjusted to take into consideration the presence of any base-neutralizable species. \n\n[0050] Still greater amounts of the nitrogenous base may be used depending on the strength of the base and the rate and/or quantity of release of the nitrogenous base preferably during the drug delivery period itself. \n\n[0051] Preferred organic bases are those whose aqueous solutions have a high pH or a high pKa (more preferably a pKa>9), and are acceptable as food or pharmaceutical addi› tives. Examples of such preferred organic bases are those listed below, along with their respective pHs ( or pKa values). \n\n[0052] Amines are compounds that include at least one primary amino (-NH$_{2}$ ) group, mono-substituted (second› ary) amino group or di-substituted (tertiary) amino group. \n\n## Amines\n\n## Inorganic Salts ofWeakAcids\n\n$^{1}$listed in the \"Handbook of Pharmaceutical Additives\" \n\n$^{2}$1isted in the FDA’s food additive database \n\n## Inorganic Oxides" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9295284868658727, + "doc_id": "f558c68779abf67cadd9095c2f7f40f84ef52d08792e6da0a6fc705af8820f2c", + "edit_distance": 0.833922261484099, + "f1_score": 0.9948717948717949, + "meteor": 0.7737162065034306, + "precision": 0.9897959183673469, + "pred_md": "US 6,503,413 B2\n\n53\n\n- (i) a polyalkyleneoxide polysiloxane having the for› mula:\n\nwherein x is from about 1 to about 8; n is from about 3 to about 4; a is from about 1 to about 15; b is from about Oto about 14; a+b is from about 5 to about 15; and R is selected from the group con› sisting of hydrogen, an alkyl group having from about 1 to about 4 carbon atoms, and an acetyl group; and wherein said polyalkylene polysilox› ane has a molecular weight of less than about 1,000;\n\n54\n\n- (ii) a buttering agent; wherein said buffering agent has at least one pKa value and/or pKb value of from about 4 to about 10; and\n- (iii) aqueous carrier; wherein said composition has a pH of from about 4 to about 10.\n- 27. The article of claim 26, wherein said spray dispenser is a manually operated spray dispenser.\n- 28. The article of claim 26, wherein said spray dispenser is a non-manually operated spray dispenser.\n- 29. The article of claim 26, wherein said polyalkyleneox› ide polysiloxane has a molecular weight of from about 600 to about 700; and wherein x is from about 1 to about 3; n is about 3; a is from about 7 to about 8; b is O; a+b is from about 7 to about 8; and R is an alkyl group having about 1 carbon atom.\n\n*\n\n*\n\n*\n\n*\n\n*\n\ns\n\n10\n\n15", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "53 \n\nUS 6,503,413 B2 \n\n54 \n\n* * * * * \n\n29. The article of claim 26, wherein said polyalkyleneox› ide polysiloxane has a molecular weight of from about 600 to about 700; and wherein x is from about 1 to about 3; n is about 3; a is from about 7 to about 8; b is O; a+b is from about 7 to about 8; and R is an alkyl group having about 1 carbon atom. \n\n28. The article of claim 26, wherein said spray dispenser is a non-manually operated spray dispenser. \n\n27. The article of claim 26, wherein said spray dispenser is a manually operated spray dispenser. \n\nwherein said composition has a pH of from about 4 to about 10. \n\n- (i) a polyalkyleneoxide polysiloxane having the for› mula: \n\n- wherein x is from about 1 to about 8; n is from about 3 to about 4; a is from about 1 to about 15; b is from about Oto about 14; a+b is from about 5 to about 15; and R is selected from the group con› sisting of hydrogen, an alkyl group having from about 1 to about 4 carbon atoms, and an acetyl group; and wherein said polyalkylene polysilox› ane has a molecular weight of less than about 1,000; \n\n- (iii) aqueous carrier; \n\n- (ii) a buttering agent; wherein said buffering agent has at least one pKa value and/or pKb value of from about 4 to about 10; and" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8955086033933233, + "doc_id": "eaad823ad8b0f565220e87ce139a83e13a04d91ed7e44c08b634d48e1879229e", + "edit_distance": 0.5274725274725275, + "f1_score": 0.9701149425287355, + "meteor": 0.8292494921585942, + "precision": 0.9504504504504504, + "pred_md": "47\n\n48\n\ntainer Connection, Clorox), U.S. Pat. No. 5,560,505, Oct. 1, 1996 (Container and Stopper Assembly Locked Together by Relative Rotation and Use Thereof, Cebal SA), and U.S. Pat. No. 5,725,132, Mar. 10, 1998 (Dispenser with Snap-Fit Container Connection, Centico International). All of said patents are incorporated herein by reference.\n\n## Bottle, Preferably with a Measuring Closure\n\nThe stable, aqueous compositions herein (especially con› centrated compositions) can also be packaged in a bottle, especially a bottle that comprises a measuring closure. The measuring closure provides a convenient means to dispense the appropriate amount of the composition, especially when dispensing concentrated compositions into a wash and/or rinse solution containing fabrics to be treated in a typical laundry process. The bottle also preferably comprises a drain-back spout, which permits the composition to be dispensed more easily and with less mess. Non-limiting examples of suitable bottles are described in detail in U.S. Pat. No. 4,666,065 issued May 19, 1987 to Ohren; U.S. Pat. No. 4,696,416 issued Sep. 29, 1987 to Muckenfuhs et al.; and U.S. Pat. No. 4,981,239 issued Jan. 1, 1991 to Cappel et al.; all of which\n\nAll percentages, ratios, and parts herein, m the Specification, Examples, and Claims are by weight and are the normal approximations, unless otherwise stated. All cited references are incorporated herein by reference, unless otherwise stated.\n\n## IV. EXAMPLES\n\nThe following are non-limiting examples of the stable, aqueous compositions of the present invention.\n\n- 'Uniquat 2250 fi (Lonza)\n- bBardac 2250 fi (Lonza)\n- cDowicide fi (Dow)\n\n-continued\n\n'Uniquat 2250 fi (Lonza)\n\nbBardac 2250 fi (Lonza)\n\ncDowicide fi (Dow)\n\nctchlorhexidine\n\n'Uniquat 2250 fi (Lonza)\n\nbBardac 2250 fi (Lonza)\n\ncDowicide fi (Dow)\n\n## What is claimed is:\n\n- 1. A stable, aqueous composition for treating fabrics, said composition comprising:\n- (a) a polyalkyleneoxide polysiloxane having the formula:\n\nwherein x is from about 1 to about 8; n is from about 3 to about 4; a is from about 1 to about 15; b is from about Oto about 14; a+b is from about 5 to about 15; and R is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, an alkyl group having from about 1 to about 4 carbon atoms, and an acetyl group; and wherein said polyalkylene polysiloxane has a molecular weight of less than about 1,000;\n\n- (b) a buffering agent; wherein said buffering agent has at least one pKa value and/or pKb value of from about 4 to about 10; and\n\n## ( c) aqueous carrier;\n\n- wherein said composition has a pH of from about 4 to about\n- 10.\n\nUS 6,503,413 B2\n\n5\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n3 o\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n60\n\n65", + "recall": 0.9906103286384976, + "true_md": "47 \n\nUS 6,503,413 B2 \n\n48 \n\nwherein said composition has a pH of from about 4 to about 10. \n\n1. A stable, aqueous composition for treating fabrics, said composition comprising: \n\nWhat is claimed is: \n\ncDowicide fi (Dow) \n\nbBardac 2250 fi (Lonza) \n\n’Uniquat 2250 fi (Lonza) \n\ncDowicide fi (Dow) \n\nbBardac 2250 fi (Lonza) \n\n’Uniquat 2250 fi (Lonza) \n\nThe following are non-limiting examples of the stable, aqueous compositions of the present invention. \n\nAll percentages, ratios, and parts herein, m the Specification, Examples, and Claims are by weight and are the normal approximations, unless otherwise stated. All cited references are incorporated herein by reference, unless otherwise stated. \n\nThe stable, aqueous compositions herein (especially con› centrated compositions) can also be packaged in a bottle, especially a bottle that comprises a measuring closure. The measuring closure provides a convenient means to dispense the appropriate amount of the composition, especially when dispensing concentrated compositions into a wash and/or rinse solution containing fabrics to be treated in a typical laundry process. The bottle also preferably comprises a drain-back spout, which permits the composition to be dispensed more easily and with less mess. Non-limiting examples of suitable bottles are described in detail in U.S. Pat. No. 4,666,065 issued May 19, 1987 to Ohren; U.S. Pat. No. 4,696,416 issued Sep. 29, 1987 to Muckenfuhs et al.; and U.S. Pat. No. 4,981,239 issued Jan. 1, 1991 to Cappel et al.; all of which \n\nctchlorhexidine \n\ncDowicide fi (Dow) \n\nbBardac 2250 fi (Lonza) \n\n’Uniquat 2250 fi (Lonza) \n\ntainer Connection, Clorox), U.S. Pat. No. 5,560,505, Oct. 1, 1996 (Container and Stopper Assembly Locked Together by Relative Rotation and Use Thereof, Cebal SA), and U.S. Pat. No. 5,725,132, Mar. 10, 1998 (Dispenser with Snap-Fit Container Connection, Centico International). All of said patents are incorporated herein by reference. \n\n-continued \n\n## Bottle, Preferably with a Measuring Closure\n\n## IV. EXAMPLES\n\n- (a) a polyalkyleneoxide polysiloxane having the formula: \n\n- wherein x is from about 1 to about 8; n is from about 3 to about 4; a is from about 1 to about 15; b is from about Oto about 14; a+b is from about 5 to about 15; and R is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, an alkyl group having from about 1 to about 4 carbon atoms, and an acetyl group; and wherein said polyalkylene polysiloxane has a molecular weight of less than about 1,000; \n\n- (b) a buffering agent; wherein said buffering agent has at least one pKa value and/or pKb value of from about 4 to about 10; and \n\n- ( c) aqueous carrier;" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9972115615372356, + "doc_id": "15de04b7d9eab3e391aea368bb9333cc36b036ec345486c40eef726b8789394b", + "edit_distance": 0.007627765064836003, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9998684775811494, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "US 2009/0197849 Al\n\ncontaining the drug and a pharmaceutically acceptable inor› ganic or organic base in an amount effective to enhance the flux of the drug through the body surface without causing damage thereto; (b) a means for maintaining the system in drug and base transmitting relationship to the body surface and forming a body surface-system interface; and ( c) a back› ing layer that serves as the outer surface of the device during use, wherein the base is effective to provide a pH within the range of about 8.0-13 .0 at the body surface-system interface during administration of the drug. The pH is more preferably about 8.5-11.5, more preferably about 9.5-11.5 and most preferably about 10.0 to 11.5.\n\n[0252] In one embodiment, the drug reservoir comprises a polymeric matrix of a pharmaceutically acceptable adhesive material that serves to affix the system to the skin during drug delivery; typically, the adhesive material is a pressure-sensi› tive adhesive (PSA) that is suitable for long-term skin contact, and which should be physically and chemically compatible with the active agent, inorganic or organic base, and any carriers, vehicles or other additives that are present. Examples of suitable adhesive materials include, but are not limited to, the following: polyethylenes; polysiloxanes; polyisobuty› lenes; polyacrylates; polyacrylamides; polyurethanes; plasti› cized ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymers; and tacky rubbers such as polyisobutene, polybutadiene, polystyrene-isoprene copolymers, polystyrene-butadiene copolymers, and neo› prene (polychloroprene). Preferred adhesives are polyisobu› tylenes.\n\n[0253] The backing layer functions as the primary struc› tural element of the transdermal system and provides the device with flexibility and, preferably, occlusivity. The mate› rial used for the backing layer should be inert and incapable of absorbing the drug, the base enhancer, or other components of the formulation contained within the device. The backing is preferably comprised of a flexible elastomeric material that serves as a protective covering to prevent loss of drug and/or vehicle via transmission through the upper surface of the patch, and will preferably impart a degree of occlusivity to the system, such that the area of the body surface covered by the patch becomes hydrated during use. The material used for the backing layer should permit the device to follow the contours of the skin and be worn comfortably on areas of skin such as at joints or other points of flexure, that are normally subjected to mechanical strain with little or no likelihood of the device disengaging from the skin due to differences in the flexibility or resiliency of the skin and the device. The materials used as the backing layer are either occlusive or permeable, as noted above, although occlusive backings are preferred, and are generally derived from synthetic polymers (e.g., polyester, polyethylene, polypropylene, polyurethane, polyvinylidine chloride, and polyether amide), natural polymers ( e.g., cellu› losic materials), or macroporous woven and nonwoven mate› rials.\n\n[0254] During storage and prior to use, the laminated struc› ture preferably includes a release liner. Immediately prior to use, this layer is removed from the device so that the system may be affixed to the skin. The release liner should be made from a drug/vehicle impermeable material, and is a dispos› able element, which serves only to protect the device prior to application. Typically, the release liner is formed from a material impermeable to the pharmacologically active agent and the base enhancer, and is easily stripped from the trans› dermal patch prior to use.\n\n20\n\nAug. 6, 2009\n\n[0255] In an alternative embodiment, the drug-containing reservoir and skin contact adhesive are present as separate and distinct layers, with the adhesive underlying the reservoir. In such a case, the reservoir may be a polymeric matrix as described above. Alternatively, the reservoir may be com› prised of a liquid or semisolid formulation contained in a closed compartment or pouch, or it may be a hydrogel reser› voir, or may take some other form. Hydrogel reservoirs are particularly preferred herein. As will be appreciated by those skilled in the art, hydrogels are macromolecular networks that absorb water and thus swell but do not dissolve in water. That is, hydrogels contain hydrophilic functional groups that pro› vide for water absorption, but the hydro gels are comprised of crosslinked polymers that give rise to aqueous insolubility. Generally, then, hydrogels are comprised of crosslinked hydrophilic polymers such as a polyurethane, a polyvinyl alcohol, a polyacrylic acid, a polyoxyethylene, a polyvi› nylpyrrolidone, a poly(hydroxyethyl methacrylate) (poly (HEMA)), or a copolymer or mixture thereof. Particularly preferred hydrophilic polymers are copolymers of HEMA and polyvinylpyrrolidone.\n\n[0256] Additional layers, e.g., intermediate fabric layers and/or rate-controlling membranes, may also be present in any of these drug delivery systems. Fabric layers may be used to facilitate fabrication of the device, while a rate-controlling membrane may be used to control the rate at which a compo› nent permeates out of the device. The component may be a drug, a base enhancer, an additional enhancer, or some other component contained in the drug delivery system.\n\n[0257] A rate-controlling membrane, if present, will be included in the system on the skin side of one or more of the drug reservoirs. The material used to form such a membrane is selected so as to limit the flux of one or more components contained in the drug formulation. Representative materials useful for forming rate-controlling membranes include poly› olefins such as polyethylene and polypropylene, polyamides, polyesters, ethylene-ethacrylate copolymer, ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymer, ethylene-vinyl methylacetate copolymer, ethylene-vinyl ethylacetate copolymer, ethylene-vinyl pro› pylacetate copolymer, polyisoprene, polyacrylonitrile, ethyl› ene-propylene copolymer, and the like.\n\n[0258] Generally, the underlying surface of the transdermal device, i.e., the skin contact area, has an area in the range of about 5-200 cm 2 , preferably 5-100 cm 2 , more preferably 20-60 cm 2 . That area will vary, of course, with the amount of drug to be delivered and the flux of the drug through the body surface. Larger patches can be used to accommodate larger quantities of drug, while smaller patches can be used for smaller quantities of drug and/or drugs that exhibit a rela› tively high permeation rate.\n\n[0259] Such drug delivery systems may be fabricated using conventional coating and laminating techniques known in the art. For example, adhesive matrix systems can be prepared by casting a fluid admixture of adhesive, drug and vehicle onto the backing layer, followed by lamination of the release liner. Similarly, the adhesive mixture may be cast onto the release liner, followed by lamination of the backing layer. Alterna› tively, the drug reservoir may be prepared in the absence of drug or excipient, and then loaded by soaking in a drug/ vehicle mixture. In general, transdermal systems of the inven› tion are fabricated by solvent evaporation, film casting, melt extrusion, thin film lamination, die cutting, or the like. The inorganic or organic base permeation enhancer will generally be incorporated into the device during patch manufacture", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Aug. 6, 2009 \n\n20 \n\nUS 2009/0197849 Al \n\ncontaining the drug and a pharmaceutically acceptable inor› ganic or organic base in an amount effective to enhance the flux of the drug through the body surface without causing damage thereto; (b) a means for maintaining the system in drug and base transmitting relationship to the body surface and forming a body surface-system interface; and ( c) a back› ing layer that serves as the outer surface of the device during use, wherein the base is effective to provide a pH within the range of about 8.0-13 .0 at the body surface-system interface during administration of the drug. The pH is more preferably about 8.5-11.5, more preferably about 9.5-11.5 and most preferably about 10.0 to 11.5. \n\n[0252] In one embodiment, the drug reservoir comprises a polymeric matrix of a pharmaceutically acceptable adhesive material that serves to affix the system to the skin during drug delivery; typically, the adhesive material is a pressure-sensi› tive adhesive (PSA) that is suitable for long-term skin contact, and which should be physically and chemically compatible with the active agent, inorganic or organic base, and any carriers, vehicles or other additives that are present. Examples of suitable adhesive materials include, but are not limited to, the following: polyethylenes; polysiloxanes; polyisobuty› lenes; polyacrylates; polyacrylamides; polyurethanes; plasti› cized ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymers; and tacky rubbers such as polyisobutene, polybutadiene, polystyrene-isoprene copolymers, polystyrene-butadiene copolymers, and neo› prene (polychloroprene). Preferred adhesives are polyisobu› tylenes. \n\n[0253] The backing layer functions as the primary struc› tural element of the transdermal system and provides the device with flexibility and, preferably, occlusivity. The mate› rial used for the backing layer should be inert and incapable of absorbing the drug, the base enhancer, or other components of the formulation contained within the device. The backing is preferably comprised of a flexible elastomeric material that serves as a protective covering to prevent loss of drug and/or vehicle via transmission through the upper surface of the patch, and will preferably impart a degree of occlusivity to the system, such that the area of the body surface covered by the patch becomes hydrated during use. The material used for the backing layer should permit the device to follow the contours of the skin and be worn comfortably on areas of skin such as at joints or other points of flexure, that are normally subjected to mechanical strain with little or no likelihood of the device disengaging from the skin due to differences in the flexibility or resiliency of the skin and the device. The materials used as the backing layer are either occlusive or permeable, as noted above, although occlusive backings are preferred, and are generally derived from synthetic polymers (e.g., polyester, polyethylene, polypropylene, polyurethane, polyvinylidine chloride, and polyether amide), natural polymers ( e.g., cellu› losic materials), or macroporous woven and nonwoven mate› rials. \n\n[0254] During storage and prior to use, the laminated struc› ture preferably includes a release liner. Immediately prior to use, this layer is removed from the device so that the system may be affixed to the skin. The release liner should be made from a drug/vehicle impermeable material, and is a dispos› able element, which serves only to protect the device prior to application. Typically, the release liner is formed from a material impermeable to the pharmacologically active agent and the base enhancer, and is easily stripped from the trans› dermal patch prior to use. \n\n[0255] In an alternative embodiment, the drug-containing reservoir and skin contact adhesive are present as separate and distinct layers, with the adhesive underlying the reservoir. In such a case, the reservoir may be a polymeric matrix as described above. Alternatively, the reservoir may be com› prised of a liquid or semisolid formulation contained in a closed compartment or pouch, or it may be a hydrogel reser› voir, or may take some other form. Hydrogel reservoirs are particularly preferred herein. As will be appreciated by those skilled in the art, hydrogels are macromolecular networks that absorb water and thus swell but do not dissolve in water. That is, hydrogels contain hydrophilic functional groups that pro› vide for water absorption, but the hydro gels are comprised of crosslinked polymers that give rise to aqueous insolubility. Generally, then, hydrogels are comprised of crosslinked hydrophilic polymers such as a polyurethane, a polyvinyl alcohol, a polyacrylic acid, a polyoxyethylene, a polyvi› nylpyrrolidone, a poly(hydroxyethyl methacrylate) (poly (HEMA)), or a copolymer or mixture thereof. Particularly preferred hydrophilic polymers are copolymers of HEMA and polyvinylpyrrolidone. \n\n[0256] Additional layers, e.g., intermediate fabric layers and/or rate-controlling membranes, may also be present in any of these drug delivery systems. Fabric layers may be used to facilitate fabrication of the device, while a rate-controlling membrane may be used to control the rate at which a compo› nent permeates out of the device. The component may be a drug, a base enhancer, an additional enhancer, or some other component contained in the drug delivery system. \n\n[0257] A rate-controlling membrane, if present, will be included in the system on the skin side of one or more of the drug reservoirs. The material used to form such a membrane is selected so as to limit the flux of one or more components contained in the drug formulation. Representative materials useful for forming rate-controlling membranes include poly› olefins such as polyethylene and polypropylene, polyamides, polyesters, ethylene-ethacrylate copolymer, ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymer, ethylene-vinyl methylacetate copolymer, ethylene-vinyl ethylacetate copolymer, ethylene-vinyl pro› pylacetate copolymer, polyisoprene, polyacrylonitrile, ethyl› ene-propylene copolymer, and the like. \n\n[0258] Generally, the underlying surface of the transdermal device, i.e., the skin contact area, has an area in the range of about 5-200 cm 2 , preferably 5-100 cm 2 , more preferably 20-60 cm 2 . That area will vary, of course, with the amount of drug to be delivered and the flux of the drug through the body surface. Larger patches can be used to accommodate larger quantities of drug, while smaller patches can be used for smaller quantities of drug and/or drugs that exhibit a rela› tively high permeation rate. \n\n[0259] Such drug delivery systems may be fabricated using conventional coating and laminating techniques known in the art. For example, adhesive matrix systems can be prepared by casting a fluid admixture of adhesive, drug and vehicle onto the backing layer, followed by lamination of the release liner. Similarly, the adhesive mixture may be cast onto the release liner, followed by lamination of the backing layer. Alterna› tively, the drug reservoir may be prepared in the absence of drug or excipient, and then loaded by soaking in a drug/ vehicle mixture. In general, transdermal systems of the inven› tion are fabricated by solvent evaporation, film casting, melt extrusion, thin film lamination, die cutting, or the like. The inorganic or organic base permeation enhancer will generally be incorporated into the device during patch manufacture" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9817047623482396, + "doc_id": "3d2d568e1770a6c65b91a0d1f0978e90751e34096c6dbb707f8aeaa3210db6bf", + "edit_distance": 0.018743109151047408, + "f1_score": 0.989010989010989, + "meteor": 0.9900659899039661, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "US 2002/0111024 Al\n\n90 rpm carrier speed (8 inch diameter). When the table speed is reduced to 70 rpm, and the downward force is reduced to 2 psi, the copper polishing rate is 2240 with an NU % of 8.6%, and the TaN polishing rate is 171 with an NU % of 14.3%.\n\n[0106] When hydroxylamine and hydroxylamine salts are used together in a formulation, the ratio of Hydroxylamine to Hydroxylamine sulfate, Hydroxylamine nitrate, or both Hydroxylamine sulfate and Hydroxylamine nitrate is advan› tageously between about 5:1 to 1:10, preferably between about 2:1 to 1:4. For example, a composition may contain 5% Hydroxylamine and 1 % each of Hydroxylamine sulfate and Hydroxylamine nitrate.\n\n[0107] Another tested oxidizer composition, formulation D, comprised of 2% hydroxylamine, 3% hydroxylamine sulfate, and DI water. The hydroxylamine solution of oxi› dizer D is preferably between about 0.5 to 5 wt. %, more preferably between about 1 to 4%, and most preferably about 2%. The hydroxylamine sulfate (solid) of oxidizer D is preferably between about 0.5 to 5%. Another preferred oxidizer (Oxidizer \"E\") according to the present invention comprises hydroxylamine, hydroxylamine sulfate, sulfuric acid, and DI water. One example of approximate component concentrations for Oxidizer E is shown in the following table.\n\n[0108] Oxidizer E composition has a preferred pH range of about 3 to 3.2. The hydroxylamine solution of oxidizer E is preferably between about 1 to 10 wt. %, more preferably between about 2 to 8%, and most preferably about 4%. The hydroxylamine sulfate (solid) of oxidizer E is preferably between about 0.5 to 5%, more preferably between about 1 to 3%, and most preferably about 3%. The sulfuric acid of oxidizer E is preferably between about 1 to 5 wt. %, more preferably between about 2 to 3%, and most preferably about 2.7%.\n\n[0109] Oxidizer Components (Oxidizer \"F\")\n\n[0110] Another preferred oxidizer (Oxidizer \"F\") accord› ing to the present invention comprises hydroxylamine, hydroxylamine sulfate, sulfuric acid, and DI water. One example of approximate component concentrations for Oxi› dizer F is shown in the following table.\n\n[0111] Oxidizer F\n\n[0112] Oxidizer F Composition has a preferred pH range of about 3 to 3.2.\n\nAug. 15,2002\n\n11\n\n[0113] The hydroxylamine solution of oxidizer F is pref› erably between about 1 to 10 wt. %, more preferably between about 2 to 8%, and most preferably about 4%. The hydroxylamine sulfate (solid) of oxidizer F is preferably between about 0.5 to 5%, more preferably between about 1 to 3%, and most preferably about 3%. The sulfuric acid of oxidizer F is preferably between about 1 to 5 wt. %, more preferably between about 2 to 3%, and most preferably about 2.7%. The citric acid of oxidizer F is preferably between about 0.05 to 1 wt. %, more preferably between about 0.1 to 0.5%, and most preferably about 0.2%.\n\n[0114] Oxidizer Components (Oxidizer \"G\")\n\n[0115] As mentioned above, the oxidizers in accordance with the present invention may further include a hydrazine inhibitor. Another preferred oxidizer (Oxidizer \"G\") accord› ing to the present invention comprises hydroxylamine sul› fate, hydroxylamine, sulfuric acid, hydrazine (NH NH 2 2 ), 4-hydrazine benzoic acid (solid), and DI water. One example of approximate component concentrations for Oxidizer G is shown in the following table.\n\n[0116] Oxidizer G\n\n[0117] Oxidizer G composition has a preferred pH range of about 3.\n\n[0118] The hydroxylamine solution of oxidizer G is pref› erably between about 1 to 10 wt. %, more preferably between about 2 to 8%, and most preferably about 4.8%. The hydroxylamine sulfate (solid) of oxidizer G is preferably between about 0.5 to 5%, more preferably between about 1 to 3%, and most preferably about 3%. The sulfuric acid of oxidizer G is preferably between about 1 to 10 wt. %, more preferably between about 2 to 8%, and most preferably about 4.2%. The hydrazine of oxidizer G is preferably between about 0.05 to 1 wt. %, more preferably between about 0.1 to 0.5%, and most preferably about 0.2%.\n\n[0119] Composition concentrations and the CMP process may be altered to acquire different CMP results. Typically, the CMP process includes covering the surface of the wafer with the slurry and polishing the wafer. Thus, the CMP process is effected by polish time in seconds (\"s\"), polish", + "recall": 0.9782608695652174, + "true_md": "Aug. 15,2002 \n\n11 \n\nUS 2002/0111024 Al \n\n90 rpm carrier speed (8 inch diameter). When the table speed is reduced to 70 rpm, and the downward force is reduced to 2 psi, the copper polishing rate is 2240 with an NU % of 8.6%, and the TaN polishing rate is 171 with an NU % of 14.3%. \n\n[0106] When hydroxylamine and hydroxylamine salts are used together in a formulation, the ratio of Hydroxylamine to Hydroxylamine sulfate, Hydroxylamine nitrate, or both Hydroxylamine sulfate and Hydroxylamine nitrate is advan› tageously between about 5:1 to 1:10, preferably between about 2:1 to 1:4. For example, a composition may contain 5% Hydroxylamine and 1 % each of Hydroxylamine sulfate and Hydroxylamine nitrate. \n\n[0107] Another tested oxidizer composition, formulation D, comprised of 2% hydroxylamine, 3% hydroxylamine sulfate, and DI water. The hydroxylamine solution of oxi› dizer D is preferably between about 0.5 to 5 wt. %, more preferably between about 1 to 4%, and most preferably about 2%. The hydroxylamine sulfate (solid) of oxidizer D is preferably between about 0.5 to 5%. Another preferred oxidizer (Oxidizer \"E\") according to the present invention comprises hydroxylamine, hydroxylamine sulfate, sulfuric acid, and DI water. One example of approximate component concentrations for Oxidizer E is shown in the following table. \n\n[0108] Oxidizer E composition has a preferred pH range of about 3 to 3.2. The hydroxylamine solution of oxidizer E is preferably between about 1 to 10 wt. %, more preferably between about 2 to 8%, and most preferably about 4%. The hydroxylamine sulfate (solid) of oxidizer E is preferably between about 0.5 to 5%, more preferably between about 1 to 3%, and most preferably about 3%. The sulfuric acid of oxidizer E is preferably between about 1 to 5 wt. %, more preferably between about 2 to 3%, and most preferably about 2.7%. \n\n[0109] Oxidizer Components (Oxidizer \"F\") \n\n[0110] Another preferred oxidizer (Oxidizer \"F\") accord› ing to the present invention comprises hydroxylamine, hydroxylamine sulfate, sulfuric acid, and DI water. One example of approximate component concentrations for Oxi› dizer F is shown in the following table. \n\n[0111] Oxidizer F \n\n[0112] Oxidizer F Composition has a preferred pH range of about 3 to 3.2. \n\n[0113] The hydroxylamine solution of oxidizer F is pref› erably between about 1 to 10 wt. %, more preferably between about 2 to 8%, and most preferably about 4%. The hydroxylamine sulfate (solid) of oxidizer F is preferably between about 0.5 to 5%, more preferably between about 1 to 3%, and most preferably about 3%. The sulfuric acid of oxidizer F is preferably between about 1 to 5 wt. %, more preferably between about 2 to 3%, and most preferably about 2.7%. The citric acid of oxidizer F is preferably between about 0.05 to 1 wt. %, more preferably between about 0.1 to 0.5%, and most preferably about 0.2%. \n\n[0114] Oxidizer Components (Oxidizer \"G\") \n\n[0115] As mentioned above, the oxidizers in accordance with the present invention may further include a hydrazine inhibitor. Another preferred oxidizer (Oxidizer \"G\") accord› ing to the present invention comprises hydroxylamine sul› fate, hydroxylamine, sulfuric acid, hydrazine (NH$_{2}$NH$_{2}$ ), 4-hydrazine benzoic acid (solid), and DI water. One example of approximate component concentrations for Oxidizer G is shown in the following table. \n\n[0116] Oxidizer G \n\n[0117] Oxidizer G composition has a preferred pH range of about 3. \n\n[0118] The hydroxylamine solution of oxidizer G is pref› erably between about 1 to 10 wt. %, more preferably between about 2 to 8%, and most preferably about 4.8%. The hydroxylamine sulfate (solid) of oxidizer G is preferably between about 0.5 to 5%, more preferably between about 1 to 3%, and most preferably about 3%. The sulfuric acid of oxidizer G is preferably between about 1 to 10 wt. %, more preferably between about 2 to 8%, and most preferably about 4.2%. The hydrazine of oxidizer G is preferably between about 0.05 to 1 wt. %, more preferably between about 0.1 to 0.5%, and most preferably about 0.2%. \n\n[0119] Composition concentrations and the CMP process may be altered to acquire different CMP results. Typically, the CMP process includes covering the surface of the wafer with the slurry and polishing the wafer. Thus, the CMP process is effected by polish time in seconds (\"s\"), polish" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.560159385967609, + "doc_id": "a75ea2d1bfbe86da160906dad44a88ce428c996d0b8c3289d47687e11ff5facd", + "edit_distance": 0.31291028446389496, + "f1_score": 0.934010152284264, + "meteor": 0.9263811865796092, + "precision": 0.9108910891089109, + "pred_md": "US 20200352177Al\n\nUS 20200352177Al\n\n## c19) United States c12) Patent Application Publication Brown\n\n## (54) LEAVENING AGENTS\n\n- (71) Applicant:\n\nKudos Blends Ltd., Cleobury Mortimer (GB)\n\n- (72) Inventor:\n\nDaniel James Brown, Bewdley (GB)\n\n- (21) Appl. No.:\n\n16/937,703\n\n- (22) Filed:\n\nJul. 24, 2020\n\n## Related U.S. Application Data\n\n- (63)\n- Continuation-in-part of application No. 16/312,175, filed on Dec. 20, 2018, filed as application No. PCT/GB2017/051831 on Jun. 22, 2017.\n\n## (30) Foreign Application Priority Data\n\nJun. 23, 2016\n\nAug. 3, 2016\n\nDec. 8, 2016\n\nApr. 21, 2017\n\nAug. 7, 2019\n\nApr. 28, 2020\n\n(GB) ...................................\n\n1610976.1\n\n(GB) ...................................\n\n1613385.2\n\n(GB) ...................................\n\n1620894.4\n\n(GB) ...................................\n\n1706373.6\n\n(GB) ...................................\n\n1911296.0\n\n(GB) ...................................\n\n2006222.0\n\n## Publication Classification\n\n- (51) Int. Cl.\n\nA21D 2102\n\nA23L 27100\n\n(2006.01)\n\n(2006.01)\n\n- c10)\n\nPub. No.: US 2020/0352177 Al\n\n- (43) Pub. Date:\n\nNov. 12, 2020\n\nA21D 2114\n\nA21D 10104\n\n(2006.01)\n\n(2006.01)\n\n- (52) U.S. Cl.\n\nCPC ............... A21D 2102 (2013.01); A21D 10104 (2013.01); A21D 21145 (2013.01); A23L 27182 (2016.08)\n\n## (57) ABSTRACT\n\nA leavening composition which gives an enhanced leaven› ing and reduced use of acidulants comprises (1) an alkali metal bicarbonate, (2) at least 0.1 and preferably at least mole per mole of bicarbonate of a precipitant which is a water-soluble alkaline earth metal salt, and (3) optionally an acidulant, wherein (2) and (3) are present in a total amount from 105 to 800% of the stoichiometric amount that would be required to react fully with (1) in a boiling aqueous solution. In a preferred embodiment the acidulant forms a water insoluble calcium or magnesium salt and is sufficient to provide more than 0.105 g replaceable hydrogen per 100 mmol bicarbonate, and the precipitant is a water soluble calcium or magnesium salt which is capable of precipitating or complexing with said acidulant and is present in an amount sufficient to provide a final pH below 6.5 when the leavening agent is heated in a bakery mix, which allows the inclusion of an effective amount of a preservative.", + "recall": 0.9583333333333334, + "true_md": "1111111111111111 IIIIII IIIII 1111111111 11111 111111111111111 IIIII lllll 111111111111111 11111111 US 20200352177Al \n\n# c19) United States c12) Patent Application Publication\n\n# Brown\n\n# c10) Pub. No.: US 2020/0352177 Al\n\n# (43) Pub. Date: Nov. 12, 2020\n\n# (54) LEAVENING AGENTS\n\n- (71) Applicant: Kudos Blends Ltd., Cleobury Mortimer (GB) \n\n- (72) Inventor: Daniel James Brown, Bewdley (GB) \n\n- (21) Appl. No.: 16/937,703 \n\n- (22) Filed: Jul. 24, 2020 \n\n## Related U.S. Application Data\n\n- (63) Continuation-in-part of application No. 16/312,175, filed on Dec. 20, 2018, filed as application No. PCT/GB2017/051831 on Jun. 22, 2017. \n\n## (30) Foreign Application Priority Data\n\n- (51) Int. Cl. \n\n## Publication Classification\n\n## (57) ABSTRACT\n\n- (52) U.S. Cl. CPC ............... A21D 2102 (2013.01); A21D 10104 (2013.01); A21D 21145 (2013.01); A23L 27182 (2016.08) \n\nA leavening composition which gives an enhanced leaven› ing and reduced use of acidulants comprises (1) an alkali metal bicarbonate, (2) at least 0.1 and preferably at least mole per mole of bicarbonate of a precipitant which is a water-soluble alkaline earth metal salt, and (3) optionally an acidulant, wherein (2) and (3) are present in a total amount from 105 to 800% of the stoichiometric amount that would be required to react fully with (1) in a boiling aqueous solution. In a preferred embodiment the acidulant forms a water insoluble calcium or magnesium salt and is sufficient to provide more than 0.105 g replaceable hydrogen per 100 mmol bicarbonate, and the precipitant is a water soluble calcium or magnesium salt which is capable of precipitating or complexing with said acidulant and is present in an amount sufficient to provide a final pH below 6.5 when the leavening agent is heated in a bakery mix, which allows the inclusion of an effective amount of a preservative." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8210789892491727, + "doc_id": "44f401a12f888cd7c4e7d8346e6a1d486e4e9a31eea2cc48376640168824b2d0", + "edit_distance": 0.413589364844904, + "f1_score": 0.9778761061946903, + "meteor": 0.8427115497061614, + "precision": 0.9954954954954955, + "pred_md": "US 2009/0197849 Al\n\nTABLE 13\n\n[ 03 04] The excess N aO H concentrations for these four ibu› profen gels, were calculated as described in Example 2, and the pH of the gels was directly measured using a pH meter. The pH of the ibuprofen gel ( determined using the procedures of the previous examples) increased from 6.58 to 12.22 when the calculated excess NaOH concentration in the gel was increased from 0% to 1.74%. The skin irritation could be related to the pH of the gel, which depends on the excess NaOH concentration.\n\nTABLE 14\n\n[0305] The in vitro permeation ofibuprofen through human cadaver skin from these gels was measured in a slightly dif› ferent manner than as described in the Methods section. Three diffusion cells were used for each formulation. Normal saline was used as the receiver solution. The entire receiver solution was collected and replaced with fresh saline at each time point. The receiver solution collected was analyzed by an HPLC for the concentration of ibuprofen. The cumulative amount of ibuprofen across human cadaver skin was calcu› lated using the measured ibuprofen concentrations in the receiver solutions, which were plotted versus time and are described below.\n\n[0306] The cumulative amount of ibuprofen across human cadaver skin at 24 hours increased from 0.33 mg/cm 2 to 5.74 mg/cm 2 when the calculated excess NaOH concentration in the gel was increased from 0% to 1.74% (Ibu-4), i.e., up to about 17-fold more flux was obtained than with the formula› tion having 0% excess NaOH concentration. The cumulative amount of ibuprofen that permeated across the human cadaver skin at 24 hours from the formulation with an excess NaOH concentration of0.98% (Ibu-3, 1.12 mg/cm 2 ) is about 3 times higher than that from the formulation with an excess NaOH concentration of0% (Ibu-2, 0.33 mg/cm 2 ).\n\n## Example 6\n\n[0307] An in vitro skin permeation study was conducted using four phenylpropanolamine hydrochloride transdermal systems, designated PPA-5, PPA-6, PPA-7, and PPA-8, the compositions of which are set forth in Table 15. The matrix\n\n25\n\nAug. 6, 2009\n\npatches were prepared and evaluated using the same proce› dures as set forth in Example 3. The theoretical percent weight for each ingredient after drying ( calculated assuming all the volatile ingredients were completely removed during drying) is listed in Table 16.\n\nTABLE 15\n\nTABLE 16\n\n[0308] Since PPA-HCl is a salt of a free base, it reacts with Na2CO3 . The concentration ofNa 2 CO3 in the system after the reaction is completed depends on the amount of PPA-HCl added. The remaining sodium carbonate concentration after the reaction is completed is defined as \"excess Na 2 CO3 con› centration,\" which is defined by the following equation.\n\nThe excess Na CO 2 3 for these four PPA-HCl systems was calculated, and the pH was measured as described in the Methods section. The pH of the PPA-HCl patch increased from 9.81 to 10.17 when the calculated excess Na 2 CO3 con› centration in the dried patch was increased from 0.4% to 16.7%.\n\nTABLE 17\n\n[0309] The cumulative amount of PPA-HCl across human cadaver skin was calculated using the measured PPA-HCl concentrations in the receiver solutions.", + "recall": 0.9608695652173913, + "true_md": "Aug. 6, 2009 \n\n25 \n\nUS 2009/0197849 Al \n\nTABLE 13 \n\nTABLE 15 \n\nTABLE 16 \n\nTABLE 14 \n\nTABLE 17 \n\n[ 03 04] The excess N aO H concentrations for these four ibu› profen gels, were calculated as described in Example 2, and the pH of the gels was directly measured using a pH meter. The pH of the ibuprofen gel ( determined using the procedures of the previous examples) increased from 6.58 to 12.22 when the calculated excess NaOH concentration in the gel was increased from 0% to 1.74%. The skin irritation could be related to the pH of the gel, which depends on the excess NaOH concentration. \n\npatches were prepared and evaluated using the same proce› dures as set forth in Example 3. The theoretical percent weight for each ingredient after drying ( calculated assuming all the volatile ingredients were completely removed during drying) is listed in Table 16. \n\n[0305] The in vitro permeation ofibuprofen through human cadaver skin from these gels was measured in a slightly dif› ferent manner than as described in the Methods section. Three diffusion cells were used for each formulation. Normal saline was used as the receiver solution. The entire receiver solution was collected and replaced with fresh saline at each time point. The receiver solution collected was analyzed by an HPLC for the concentration of ibuprofen. The cumulative amount of ibuprofen across human cadaver skin was calcu› lated using the measured ibuprofen concentrations in the receiver solutions, which were plotted versus time and are described below. \n\n[0306] The cumulative amount of ibuprofen across human cadaver skin at 24 hours increased from 0.33 mg/cm $^{2 }$to 5.74 mg/cm $^{2 }$when the calculated excess NaOH concentration in the gel was increased from 0% to 1.74% (Ibu-4), i.e., up to about 17-fold more flux was obtained than with the formula› tion having 0% excess NaOH concentration. The cumulative amount of ibuprofen that permeated across the human cadaver skin at 24 hours from the formulation with an excess NaOH concentration of0.98% (Ibu-3, 1.12 mg/cm 2 ) is about 3 times higher than that from the formulation with an excess NaOH concentration of0% (Ibu-2, 0.33 mg/cm 2 ). \n\n[0308] Since PPA-HCl is a salt of a free base, it reacts with Na$_{2}$CO$_{3}$ . The concentration ofNa$_{2}$CO$_{3 }$ in the system after the reaction is completed depends on the amount of PPA-HCl added. The remaining sodium carbonate concentration after the reaction is completed is defined as \"excess Na$_{2}$CO$_{3 }$ con› centration,\" which is defined by the following equation. \n\nThe excess Na$_{2}$CO$_{3 }$ for these four PPA-HCl systems was calculated, and the pH was measured as described in the Methods section. The pH of the PPA-HCl patch increased from 9.81 to 10.17 when the calculated excess Na$_{2}$CO$_{3 }$ con› centration in the dried patch was increased from 0.4% to 16.7%. \n\n$$[Na2CO3 exmJ~[Na2CO3 Ma1J-[Na2CO3 needed for neutralization] $$\n\n[0307] An in vitro skin permeation study was conducted using four phenylpropanolamine hydrochloride transdermal systems, designated PPA-5, PPA-6, PPA-7, and PPA-8, the compositions of which are set forth in Table 15. The matrix \n\n[0309] The cumulative amount of PPA-HCl across human cadaver skin was calculated using the measured PPA-HCl concentrations in the receiver solutions. \n\n## Example 6" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8969259535739552, + "doc_id": "70bf60f0ce215033f1cf51a41d610ae27795140e3108c33b32cc6380b84b554f", + "edit_distance": 0.20382165605095542, + "f1_score": 0.98, + "meteor": 0.8981260536141731, + "precision": 0.98, + "pred_md": "US 2002/0111024 Al\n\n[0149] Copper Slurry Composition (Slurry \"8\" Composi› tion)\n\n[0150] In another preferred form, the present invention doubles the weight percent of 1,6-dioxaspiro(4,4) nonane 2,7-dione (diether) (an Insoluble Complexing Agent).\n\n[0151] Composition concentrations for one example of the Slurry 8 Composition are shown in the following table and is should be noted that the concentration of, inter alia, the Insoluble Complexing Agent of the present invention may be changed to alter the resultant slurry.\n\n[0152] Slurry 8 Composition\n\n[0153] The slurry composition has a preferred pH range of about 2.72.\n\n[0154] The CMP process and results for two examples employing the Slurry 8 Composition are shown in the following table. This process may be altered using the same slurry to acquire different CMP Results. Abrasive A is colloidal silica, and abrasive B is alumina.\n\n[0155] CMP Process and Results Utilizing the Slurry 8 Composition\n\nAug. 15,2002\n\nOxidizer E formulations, where Oxidizer E contains 2% Hydroxylamine, 3% HAS, 2.7% sulfuric acid, balance water.\n\nCMP Mixing Ratios, Processes and Results for Slurry Compositions Comprising Oxidizer E\n\n[0156] Thus, the first above process using the Slurry 8 Composition is achieved by using a polish time of 60 seconds, a polish pressure of 5 psi, a polish table speed of 90 RPM, a spindle speed of 90 RPM and a slurry flow of 175 ml/min.\n\n[0157] The second process example using the Slurry 8 Composition is achieved using a polish time of 60 seconds, a polish pressure of 3 psi, a polish table speed of 75 RPM, a spindle speed of 75 RPM and a slurry flow of 175 ml/min.\n\n[0158] As mentioned above, the oxidizers in accordance with the present invention may further include sulfuric and/or citric acid. Sulfuric acid provides a way of modifying the pH of the oxidizer so that the hydroxylamine chemistries are on the acidic side and are therefore oxidizers. Citric acid works as a complexing agent for copper for helping to retain copper in a complex form (i.e., in a copper I or copper II state) so as to preclude copper from redepositing or coming out of solution because of other secondary chemical reac› tions. Below are some polishing rates obtained with various\n\n[0159] In further preferred forms, the present invention includes slurry compositions comprised of Oxidizer E. The following table delineates static etching rate (Nmin.) at 130° F. for twenty-two specific examples and static etching rate at a few different temperatures for a few of the twenty› two specific examples of slurry compositions in accordance with the present invention and further delineates composi› tion concentrations (mixing ratios) for the twenty-two examples.\n\n[0160] Static Etching Rate For Copper CMP Slurry Com› positions\n\n[0161] The stock solution for the 9011 Oxidizer is 1 % Hydroxylamine nitrate, 0.016% ETA, and 0.006% nitric acid. It is then diluted down at the percentage values in the Tables.\n\n[0162] The stock solution for MPX-073, also sometimes called CMP9060, is 0.2% ETA in water.\n\n14", + "recall": 0.98, + "true_md": "[0149] Copper Slurry Composition (Slurry \"8\" Composi› tion) \n\n[0150] In another preferred form, the present invention doubles the weight percent of 1,6-dioxaspiro(4,4) nonane 2,7-dione (diether) (an Insoluble Complexing Agent). \n\n[0151] Composition concentrations for one example of the Slurry 8 Composition are shown in the following table and is should be noted that the concentration of, inter alia, the Insoluble Complexing Agent of the present invention may be changed to alter the resultant slurry. \n\n[0152] Slurry 8 Composition \n\n[0153] The slurry composition has a preferred pH range of about 2.72. \n\n[0154] The CMP process and results for two examples employing the Slurry 8 Composition are shown in the following table. This process may be altered using the same slurry to acquire different CMP Results. Abrasive A is colloidal silica, and abrasive B is alumina. \n\n[0155] CMP Process and Results Utilizing the Slurry 8 Composition \n\n[0156] Thus, the first above process using the Slurry 8 Composition is achieved by using a polish time of 60 seconds, a polish pressure of 5 psi, a polish table speed of 90 RPM, a spindle speed of 90 RPM and a slurry flow of 175 ml/min. \n\n[0157] The second process example using the Slurry 8 Composition is achieved using a polish time of 60 seconds, a polish pressure of 3 psi, a polish table speed of 75 RPM, a spindle speed of 75 RPM and a slurry flow of 175 ml/min. \n\n[0158] As mentioned above, the oxidizers in accordance with the present invention may further include sulfuric and/or citric acid. Sulfuric acid provides a way of modifying the pH of the oxidizer so that the hydroxylamine chemistries are on the acidic side and are therefore oxidizers. Citric acid works as a complexing agent for copper for helping to retain copper in a complex form (i.e., in a copper I or copper II state) so as to preclude copper from redepositing or coming out of solution because of other secondary chemical reac› tions. Below are some polishing rates obtained with various $^{5.2% }$ [0160] positions [0161] Hydroxylamine nitrate, 0.016% ETA, and 0.006% nitric Tables. [0162] called CMP9060, is 0.2% ETA in water. \n\nOxidizer E formulations, where Oxidizer E contains 2% Hydroxylamine, 3% HAS, 2.7% sulfuric acid, balance water. \n\n[0159] In further preferred forms, the present invention includes slurry compositions comprised of Oxidizer E. The following table delineates static etching rate (Nmin.) at 130° F. for twenty-two specific examples and static etching rate at a few different temperatures for a few of the twenty› two specific examples of slurry compositions in accordance with the present invention and further delineates composi› tion concentrations (mixing ratios) for the twenty-two examples. \n\n[0160] Static Etching Rate For Copper CMP Slurry Com› positions \n\n[0161] The stock solution for the 9011 Oxidizer is 1 % Hydroxylamine nitrate, 0.016% ETA, and 0.006% nitric acid. It is then diluted down at the percentage values in the Tables. \n\ntions. Below are some polishing rates obtained with various $^{5.2% }$ [0162] The stock solution for MPX-073, also sometimes called CMP9060, is 0.2% ETA in water. \n\nAug. 15,2002 \n\n14 \n\nUS 2002/0111024 Al" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9274135029232825, + "doc_id": "f11c6f167de7ccc45dcfac7da2cf7a4c2d5e66611d5e4a400a70f4e8f1fb31c2", + "edit_distance": 0.3333333333333333, + "f1_score": 0.9903288201160542, + "meteor": 0.9183187026009227, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## c12) United States Patent Ochs et al.\n\n## (54) METHOD FOR THE PRODUCTION OF ORGANOSILICON COMPOUNDS COMPRISING CARBOXY RADICALS\n\n- (75) Inventors:\n\nChristian Ochs, Burghausen (DE); Elke Fritz-Langhals, Ottobrunn (DE)\n\n- (73) Assignee:\n\nWacker Chemie AG, Munich (DE)\n\n- ( *) Notice:\n\nSubject to any disclaimer, the term ofthis patent is extended or adjusted under 35 U .S.C. 154(b) by 1118 days.\n\n- (21) Appl. No.:\n- (22) PCT Filed:\n- (86) PCT No.:\n\n11/568,050\n\nApr. 11, 2005\n\nPCT /EP2005/051588\n\n§ 371 (c)(l),\n\n- (2), ( 4) Date:\n\nOct. 18, 2006\n\n- (87) PCT Pub. No.:\n\nWO2005/103060\n\nPCT Pub. Date:\n\nNov. 3, 2005\n\n## (65) Prior Publication Data\n\nUS 2009/0221842 Al Sep.3,2009\n\n## (30) Foreign Application Priority Data\n\nApr. 21, 2004 (DE) ......................... 10 2004 019 376\n\n- (51) Int. Cl.\n\nC07F 7104\n\n(2006.01)\n\nC07F 7108\n\n(2006.01)\n\n- (52) U.S. Cl.\n\n.........................................\n\n556/439; 205/420\n\n## (58) Field of Classification Search ........................ None\n\nSee application file for complete search history.\n\nUS007902392B2\n\nUS007902392B2\n\n- (IO) Patent No.:\n- (45) Date of Patent:\n\nUS 7,902,392 B2\n\nMar.8,2011\n\n## (56) References Cited\n\n## U.S. PATENT DOCUMENTS\n\n## FOREIGN PATENT DOCUMENTS\n\n## OTHER PUBLICATIONS\n\nEnglish Abstract corresponding to EP 1 302 456 Al. Anelli, et al.: \"Fast and Selective Oxidation of Primary Alcohols to Aldehydes or Tocarboxylic Acids and of Secondary Alcohols to Ketones Mediated by Oxoammonium Salts under Two-Phase Con› ditions\", Journal of Organic Chemistry, American Chemical Society. Easton, US, vol. 52, No. 12, Jun. 12, 1987, pp. 2559-2562. Enzyme Nomenclature, Academic Press, Inc., 1992, pp. 24-154.\n\n* cited by examiner\n\nPrimary Examiner - Daniel M Sullivan\n\nAssistant Examiner - Chukwuma O Nwaonicha\n\n(74) Attorney, Agent, or Firm - Brooks Kushman P.C.\n\n## (57) ABSTRACT\n\nOrganosilicon compounds bearing carboxylic acid groups are easily and economically replaced in high yield by oxidation of a carbinol-functional organosilicon compound with an oxidizer in the presence ofa moderator at a pH~3. Carboxyl› functional organopolysiloxanes highly useful as textile soft› eners may be obtained by this method.\n\n## 17 Claims, No Drawings", + "recall": 0.9808429118773946, + "true_md": "# (IO) Patent No.: US 7,902,392 B2\n\n# (45) Date of Patent: Mar.8,2011\n\n# c12) United States Patent\n\n# Ochs et al.\n\n# (54) METHOD FOR THE PRODUCTION OF ORGANOSILICON COMPOUNDS COMPRISING CARBOXY RADICALS\n\n- (75) Inventors: Christian Ochs, Burghausen (DE); Elke Fritz-Langhals, Ottobrunn (DE) \n\n- (73) Assignee: Wacker Chemie AG, Munich (DE) \n\n- ( *) Notice: Subject to any disclaimer, the term ofthis patent is extended or adjusted under 35 U .S.C. 154(b) by 1118 days. \n\n- (21) Appl. No.: 11/568,050 \n\n- (22) PCT Filed: Apr. 11, 2005 \n\n- (86) PCT No.: PCT /EP2005/051588 § 371 (c)(l), (2), ( 4) Date: Oct. 18, 2006 \n\n- (87) PCT Pub. No.: WO2005/103060 \n\n- (51) Int. Cl. C07F 7104 (2006.01) C07F 7108 (2006.01) \n\n- (52) U.S. Cl. ......................................... 556/439; 205/420 \n\n- (58) Field of Classification Search ........................ None See application file for complete search history. \n\n## (65) Prior Publication Data\n\n## (30) Foreign Application Priority Data\n\n## 17 Claims, No Drawings\n\n## (57) ABSTRACT\n\n## OTHER PUBLICATIONS\n\n## FOREIGN PATENT DOCUMENTS\n\n## U.S. PATENT DOCUMENTS\n\n## (56) References Cited\n\nPCT Pub. Date: Nov. 3, 2005 \n\nUS 2009/0221842 Al Sep.3,2009 \n\nApr. 21, 2004 (DE) ......................... 10 2004 019 376 \n\n1111111111111111 11111 111111111111111 1111111111 1111111111 111111111111111111 US007902392B2 \n\nEnglish Abstract corresponding to EP 1 302 456 Al. \n\nAnelli, et al.: \"Fast and Selective Oxidation of Primary Alcohols to Aldehydes or Tocarboxylic Acids and of Secondary Alcohols to Ketones Mediated by Oxoammonium Salts under Two-Phase Con› ditions\", Journal of Organic Chemistry, American Chemical Society. Easton, US, vol. 52, No. 12, Jun. 12, 1987, pp. 2559-2562. \n\nEnzyme Nomenclature, Academic Press, Inc., 1992, pp. 24-154. \n\n* cited by examiner \n\nPrimary Examiner - Daniel M Sullivan \n\nAssistant Examiner - Chukwuma O Nwaonicha \n\n(74) Attorney, Agent, or Firm - Brooks Kushman P.C. \n\nOrganosilicon compounds bearing carboxylic acid groups are easily and economically replaced in high yield by oxidation of a carbinol-functional organosilicon compound with an oxidizer in the presence ofa moderator at a pH~3. Carboxyl› functional organopolysiloxanes highly useful as textile soft› eners may be obtained by this method." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9330893446543408, + "doc_id": "84614120c31092df0b86b9501d9c03f24aa721319ced9ea70e584cc7ff305120", + "edit_distance": 0.05190592051905921, + "f1_score": 0.9936507936507938, + "meteor": 0.9704540475954231, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "US 2002/0111024 Al\n\nabout 5 to 15%, and most preferably about 10%. The oxalic acid is added to the Ammonium persulfate at a concentration of between about 0.1 and 5%, and more preferably about 1 %. The gluconic acid is added to the Ammonium persulfate at a concentration of between about 1 to 50%, more pref› erably between about 10 to 30%, and most preferably about 20%. The slurry is delivered at a flow rate of between about 5 to 50 ml/min., more preferably between about 10 to 40 ml/min., and most preferably about 20 ml/min.\n\n[0299] Low concentrations of Ammonium persulfate can still provide reasonable aluminum polishing rates if other parameters are adjusted. A 1 % Ammonium persulfate solu› tion added at 90 ml/min at a pH of 3.5 with a 5% Silica ST™ slurry added at 20 ml/minute using a Polytex™ pad on a 3 inch IWS wafer at 33 RPM and 2 psi gave a polishing rate of 225 Nminute.\n\n[0300] This Ammonium persulfate composition is prefer› ably between about 0.5 to 5%, more preferably between about 1 to 4%, and most preferably about 1 %. The silica is preferably between about 0.5 to 10%, more preferably between about 2 to 8%, and most preferably about 5%, and the combined slurry is delivered at a flow rate of between about 5 to 50 ml/min., more preferably between about 10 to 40 ml/min., and most preferably about 20 m/min.\n\n[0301] Additional tests were conducted with 100% Ammonium persulfate solutions dispensed at 20 ml/min. Using an alumina abrasive dispensed at 20 ml/min., a 1918 Nmin. polish rate was obtained for a 3 inch EMF wafer on a Politex pad; and a 1646 Nmin. polish rate was obtained for a 3 inch IWS wafer using a polyurethane pad. In compari› son, using a Sytron abrasive dispensed at 20 ml/min., a polish rate of 303 Nmin. was obtained for a 3 inch EMF wafer on a Politex pad.\n\n[0302] Ammonium Salts\n\n[0303] Aluminum was polished with different ammonium salt solutions added at 20 m/min. using a Polytex™ pad on a 3 inch IWS wafer at 33 RPM and 2 psi. A 5% NH 4 OH solution (pH 12) gave a polishing rate of 3000 Nmin.\n\n[0304] A 10% NH Cl solution (pH 4.5) gave a polishing 4 rate of 25 Nmin.\n\n[0305] Furthermore, a 5% NH HF 4 2 solution (pH<2) gave a polishing rate greater than 4000 Nmin. while a 0.2% NH HF 4 2 solution gave a polish rate of 1200 Nmin.\n\n[0306] It can be seen that by choosing the ammonia salts reasonably high polishing rates can be obtained at a number of pH ranges. The ammonia salt solutions can be enhanced by the addition of acids, chelators, oxidizers, and the like.\n\n[0307] Hydroxylamine\n\n[0308] The use of hydroxylamine-based formulations on aluminum substrates can provide a range of polishing rates of aluminum.\n\n[0309] At pH 10, 5% and 10% formulations of Hydroxy› lamine had between 2 and 25 Angstrom per minute polishing rates when applied at 20 ml per minute to a POLITEX pad using 2 psi pressure on 3\" IWS and 3\" EMF substrates.\n\n[0310] Hydroxylamine Nitrate\n\n[0311] A variety of 5-10% hydroxylamine nitrate formu› lations adjusted to pH 2.9-4 showed less than 5 Angstroms\n\n24\n\nAug. 15,2002\n\nper minute polishing rate when applied with 2 psi pressure and at 10-33 rpm on 3\" IWS aluminum substrates.\n\n[0312] Water\n\n[0313] Water when applied with alumina slurries at about 20 ml per minute each showed surprisingly high polishing rates on 3\" EMF and IWS aluminum substrates, between about 1600 and about 1900 Angstroms per minute, when applied at 2 psi with a POLITEX or an Polyurethane pad. With SYTRON 4% slurry added with water, the POLITEX pad showed a polishing rate of about 300 Angstroms per minute.\n\nWe claim:\n\n- 1. A method for chemical mechanical polishing of tung› sten comprising:\n\nproviding a semiconductor substrate comprising on one face tungsten and a dielectric material;\n\nproviding a chemical mechanical polishing composition comprising between about 2% and about 15% ammo› nium persulfate, between about 0.1 % and about 10% of a secondary oxidizer, a pH adjusting compound to adjust the pH of the composition, and optionally an abrasive, wherein the pH of the composition is between about 6.5 to about 12;\n\nmovably contacting the substrate face with a pad exerting between about 0.1 and about 9 psi pressure on the substrate and with the composition under conditions that tungsten is removed at a rate different than the removal of the dielectric material.\n\n- 2. The process of claim 1 wherein the secondary oxidizer comprises potassium peroxymonosulfate, peroxymonosul› furic acid, imidazole, malonic acid, or malonamide.\n- 3. The process of claim 1 wherein the chemical mechani› cal polishing composition comprises at least one of potas› sium iodate, potassium periodate, or lithium periodate.\n- 4. The process of claim 1, wherein the chemical mechani› cal composition comprises periodic acid, peracetic acid, oxalic acid, citric acid, lactic acid, NH HF 4 2 , or a mixture thereof.\n- 5. The process of claim 1 wherein the secondary oxidizer comprises hydrogen peroxide, a perborate, a peroxhydrate, or a urea hydrogen peroxide complex.\n- 6. The process of claim 1 wherein the chemical mechani› cal polishing composition additionally comprises an organic acid selected from the group consisting of gluconic, malonic acid, lactic acid, succinic acid, tartaric acid, citric acid, oxalic acid, or salts thereof.\n- 7. The process of claim 1 further comprising a second polishing operation comprising the steps of:\n\nproviding a second chemical mechanical polishing com› position comprising an oxidizer, a pH adjusting com› pound to adjust the pH of the composition, and option› ally an abrasive, wherein the pH of the composition is between about 3 to about 12;\n\nmovably contacting the substrate face with a pad exerting between about 0.1 and about 9 psi pressure on the substrate and with the second composition under con› ditions that tungsten is removed at a rate different than the removal of the dielectric material.\n\n- 8. The process of claim 7 wherein the second chemical mechanical polishing composition comprises ammonium", + "recall": 0.9873817034700315, + "true_md": "Aug. 15,2002 \n\n24 \n\nUS 2002/0111024 Al \n\nabout 5 to 15%, and most preferably about 10%. The oxalic acid is added to the Ammonium persulfate at a concentration of between about 0.1 and 5%, and more preferably about 1 %. The gluconic acid is added to the Ammonium persulfate at a concentration of between about 1 to 50%, more pref› erably between about 10 to 30%, and most preferably about 20%. The slurry is delivered at a flow rate of between about 5 to 50 ml/min., more preferably between about 10 to 40 ml/min., and most preferably about 20 ml/min. \n\n[0299] Low concentrations of Ammonium persulfate can still provide reasonable aluminum polishing rates if other parameters are adjusted. A 1 % Ammonium persulfate solu› tion added at 90 ml/min at a pH of 3.5 with a 5% Silica ST™ slurry added at 20 ml/minute using a Polytex™ pad on a 3 inch IWS wafer at 33 RPM and 2 psi gave a polishing rate of 225 Nminute. \n\n[0300] This Ammonium persulfate composition is prefer› ably between about 0.5 to 5%, more preferably between about 1 to 4%, and most preferably about 1 %. The silica is preferably between about 0.5 to 10%, more preferably between about 2 to 8%, and most preferably about 5%, and the combined slurry is delivered at a flow rate of between about 5 to 50 ml/min., more preferably between about 10 to 40 ml/min., and most preferably about 20 m/min. \n\n[0301] Additional tests were conducted with 100% Ammonium persulfate solutions dispensed at 20 ml/min. Using an alumina abrasive dispensed at 20 ml/min., a 1918 Nmin. polish rate was obtained for a 3 inch EMF wafer on a Politex pad; and a 1646 Nmin. polish rate was obtained for a 3 inch IWS wafer using a polyurethane pad. In compari› son, using a Sytron abrasive dispensed at 20 ml/min., a polish rate of 303 Nmin. was obtained for a 3 inch EMF wafer on a Politex pad. \n\n[0302] Ammonium Salts \n\n[0303] Aluminum was polished with different ammonium salt solutions added at 20 m/min. using a Polytex™ pad on a 3 inch IWS wafer at 33 RPM and 2 psi. A 5% NH$_{4}$OH solution (pH 12) gave a polishing rate of 3000 Nmin. \n\n[0304] A 10% NH$_{4}$Cl solution (pH 4.5) gave a polishing rate of 25 Nmin. \n\n[0305] Furthermore, a 5% NH$_{4}$HF$_{2 }$ solution (pH<2) gave a polishing rate greater than 4000 Nmin. while a 0.2% NH$_{4}$HF$_{2 }$ solution gave a polish rate of 1200 Nmin. \n\n[0306] It can be seen that by choosing the ammonia salts reasonably high polishing rates can be obtained at a number of pH ranges. The ammonia salt solutions can be enhanced by the addition of acids, chelators, oxidizers, and the like. \n\n[0307] Hydroxylamine \n\n[0308] The use of hydroxylamine-based formulations on aluminum substrates can provide a range of polishing rates of aluminum. \n\n[0309] At pH 10, 5% and 10% formulations of Hydroxy› lamine had between 2 and 25 Angstrom per minute polishing rates when applied at 20 ml per minute to a POLITEX pad using 2 psi pressure on 3\" IWS and 3\" EMF substrates. \n\n[0310] Hydroxylamine Nitrate \n\n[0311] A variety of 5-10% hydroxylamine nitrate formu› lations adjusted to pH 2.9-4 showed less than 5 Angstroms \n\nper minute polishing rate when applied with 2 psi pressure and at 10-33 rpm on 3\" IWS aluminum substrates. \n\n[0312] Water \n\n[0313] Water when applied with alumina slurries at about 20 ml per minute each showed surprisingly high polishing rates on 3\" EMF and IWS aluminum substrates, between about 1600 and about 1900 Angstroms per minute, when applied at 2 psi with a POLITEX or an Polyurethane pad. With SYTRON 4% slurry added with water, the POLITEX pad showed a polishing rate of about 300 Angstroms per minute. \n\nWe claim: \n\n1. A method for chemical mechanical polishing of tung› sten comprising: \n\n- providing a semiconductor substrate comprising on one face tungsten and a dielectric material; \n\n- providing a chemical mechanical polishing composition comprising between about 2% and about 15% ammo› nium persulfate, between about 0.1 % and about 10% of a secondary oxidizer, a pH adjusting compound to adjust the pH of the composition, and optionally an abrasive, wherein the pH of the composition is between about 6.5 to about 12; \n\n- movably contacting the substrate face with a pad exerting between about 0.1 and about 9 psi pressure on the substrate and with the composition under conditions that tungsten is removed at a rate different than the removal of the dielectric material. \n\n2. The process of claim 1 wherein the secondary oxidizer comprises potassium peroxymonosulfate, peroxymonosul› furic acid, imidazole, malonic acid, or malonamide. \n\n3. The process of claim 1 wherein the chemical mechani› cal polishing composition comprises at least one of potas› sium iodate, potassium periodate, or lithium periodate. \n\n4. The process of claim 1, wherein the chemical mechani› cal composition comprises periodic acid, peracetic acid, oxalic acid, citric acid, lactic acid, NH$_{4}$HF$_{2}$ , or a mixture thereof. \n\n5. The process of claim 1 wherein the secondary oxidizer comprises hydrogen peroxide, a perborate, a peroxhydrate, or a urea hydrogen peroxide complex. \n\n6. The process of claim 1 wherein the chemical mechani› cal polishing composition additionally comprises an organic acid selected from the group consisting of gluconic, malonic acid, lactic acid, succinic acid, tartaric acid, citric acid, oxalic acid, or salts thereof. \n\n7. The process of claim 1 further comprising a second polishing operation comprising the steps of: \n\n- providing a second chemical mechanical polishing com› position comprising an oxidizer, a pH adjusting com› pound to adjust the pH of the composition, and option› ally an abrasive, wherein the pH of the composition is between about 3 to about 12; \n\n- movably contacting the substrate face with a pad exerting between about 0.1 and about 9 psi pressure on the substrate and with the second composition under con› ditions that tungsten is removed at a rate different than the removal of the dielectric material. \n\n8. The process of claim 7 wherein the second chemical mechanical polishing composition comprises ammonium" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8600551563736076, + "doc_id": "434c72e9330414d40af9ff52ad55489d114cca35c18c5047809e2c80009e9f87", + "edit_distance": 0.15, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.981858911534692, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Patent Application Publication\n\nSep. 19, 2019 Sheet 97 of 106 US 2019/0287691 Al\n\nFIG. 55\n\nFIG. 55", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Patent Application Publication \n\nSep. 19, 2019 Sheet 97 of 106 \n\nUS 2019/0287691 Al \n\nFIG. 55" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7013019290958125, + "doc_id": "5110219461642e4d338bdf59af34b5c7aca7d1398c4bb914bae6abfbfe8310b6", + "edit_distance": 0.8014134275618374, + "f1_score": 0.9169363538295577, + "meteor": 0.5531435468727597, + "precision": 0.9593679458239278, + "pred_md": "US 6,503,413 B2\n\n31\n\nSimilarly, silicone materials which can be used corre› spond to the formulas:\n\n\n\nwherein G is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, OH, and/or Ci-Cs alkyl; a denotes O or an integer from 1 to 3; b denotes O or 1; the sum of n+m is a number from 1 to about 2,000; R is a monovalent radical of formula 1 CpH 2 P Lin which p is an integer from 2 to 4 and Lis selected from the group consisting of:\n\n\n\nIn the formulas herein, each definition is applied indi› vidually and averages are included.\n\nAnother silicone material which can be used has the formula:\n\n32\n\ncan attach to the surface of the fabric fibers and dry in place. The polymer can form a film on the fiber surfaces, or when residing between two fibers and in contact with the two fibers, it can bond the two fibers together. Other polymers such as starches can form a film and/or bond the fibers together when the treated fabric is pressed by a hot iron. Such a film will have adhesive strength, cohesive breaking strength, and cohesive breaking strain.\n\nNonlimiting examples of natural shape retention polymers are starches and their derivatives, and chitins and their derivatives. Starch is not normally preferred, since it makes the fabric resistant to deformation. However, it does provide increased \"body\" which is often desired. Starch is particu› larly preferred however, when the consumer intends to iron the fabrics after they have been washed and dried. When used, starch may be used as a solid or solubilized or dispersed to be combined with other materials in the com› position. Any type of starch, e.g. those derived from corn, wheat, rice, grain sorghum, waxy grain sorghum, waxy maize or tapioca, or mixtures thereof and water soluble or dispersible modifications or derivatives thereof, can be used in the compositions of the present invention. Modified starches may include natural starches that have been degraded to obtain a lower viscosity by acidic, oxidative or enzymic depolymerization. Additionally, low viscosity com› mercially available propoxylated and/or ethoxylated starches are useable in the present composition and are preferred when the composition is to be dispensed with a sprayer because of their low viscosity at relatively high solid concentrations. Suitable alkoxylated, low viscosity starches are submicron-size particles of hydrophobic starch that are readily dispersed in water and are prepared by alkoxylation of granular starch with a monofunctional alkoxylating agent which provides the starch with ether linked hydrophilic groups. A suitable method for their preparation is taught in U.S. Pat. No. 3,462,283.\n\nThe synthetic polymers useful in the present invention are comprised of monomers. Nonlimiting examples of mono› mers which can be used to form the synthetic polymers useful in the present invention include: low molecular weight CcC 6 unsaturated organic mono- and polycarboxy› lic acids, such as acry lie acid, methacry lie acid, crotonic acid, maleic acid and its half esters, itaconic acid, and mixtures thereof; esters of said acids with C -C 1 6 alcohols, such as methanol, ethanol, 1-propanol, 2-propanol, 1-butanol, 2-methyl-1-propanol, 1-pentanol, 2-pentanol, 3-pentanol, 2-methyl-1-butanol, l-methyl-1-butanol, 3-methyl-1-butanol, l-methyl-1-pentanol, 2-methyl-1pentanol, 3-methyl-1-pentanol, t-butanol, cyclohexanol, 2-ethyl-1-butanol, and the like, and mixtures thereof. Non› limiting examples of said esters are methyl acrylate, ethyl acrylate, t-butyl acrylate, methyl methacrylate, hydroxy› ethyl methacrylate, methoxy ethyl methacrylate, and mix› tures thereof, amides and imides of said acids, such as N,N-dimethylacrylamide, N-t-butyl acrylamide, maleim› ides; low molecular weight unsaturated alcohols such as vinyl alcohol (produced by the hydrolysis of vinyl acetate after polymerization), alkyl alcohol; esters of said alcohols with low molecular weight carboxylic acids, such as, vinyl acetate, vinyl propionate; ethers of said alcohols such as methyl vinyl ether; polar vinyl heterocyclics, such as vinyl pyrrolidone, vinyl caprolactam, vinyl pyridine, vinyl imidazole, and mixtures thereof; other unsaturated amines and amides, such as vinyl amine, diethylene triamine, dimethylaminoethyl methacrylate, ethenyl formamide; vinyl sulfonate; salts of acids and amines listed above; low molecular weight unsaturated hydrocarbons and derivatives\n\n5\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\nwherein n and m are the same as before. The preferred silicones of this type are those which do not cause fabric discoloration.\n\nAlternatively, the silicone material can be provided as a moiety or a part of a non-silicone molecule. Examples of 40 such materials are copolymers containing silicone moieties, typically present as block and/or graft copolymers.\n\nWhen silicone is present as a supplemental wrinkle con› trol agent, it is present at least an effective amount to provide lubrication of the fibers.\n\n45\n\n## ii. Synthetic Solid Particles\n\nSolid polymeric particles of average particle size smaller than about 10 microns, preferably smaller than 5 microns, more preferably smaller than about 1 micron, may be used as a lubricant, since they can provide a \"roller-bearing\" action. Polyethylene emulsions and suspensions are also suitable for providing this lubrication or smoothness effect to the fabrics on which they are deposited. Suitable smooth› ing agents are available under the tradename VELUSTROL from HOECHST Aktiengesellschaft of Frankfurt am Main, 55 Germany. In particular, the polyethylene emulsions sold under the tradename VELUSTROL PKS, VELUSTROL KPA, or VELUSTROL P-40 may be employed in the compositions of the present invention. The use of such polymers in fabric softening compositions is described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,830,843, 50 60\n\n## b. Shape Retention Polymers\n\nShape retention in fabrics can be imparted to the fabrics through the use of polymers that act by forming a film and/or by providing adhesive properties to the fabrics. These poly› mers may be natural, or synthetic. By \"adhesive\" it is meant that when applied as a solution or a dispersion, the polymer\n\n65", + "recall": 0.878099173553719, + "true_md": "US 6,503,413 B2 \n\n31 \n\n32 \n\nShape retention in fabrics can be imparted to the fabrics through the use of polymers that act by forming a film and/or by providing adhesive properties to the fabrics. These poly› mers may be natural, or synthetic. By \"adhesive\" it is meant that when applied as a solution or a dispersion, the polymer \n\nThe synthetic polymers useful in the present invention are comprised of monomers. Nonlimiting examples of mono› mers which can be used to form the synthetic polymers useful in the present invention include: low molecular weight CcC$_{6 }$ unsaturated organic mono- and polycarboxy› lic acids, such as acry lie acid, methacry lie acid, crotonic acid, maleic acid and its half esters, itaconic acid, and mixtures thereof; esters of said acids with C$_{1}$-C$_{6 }$ alcohols, 45 such as methanol, ethanol, 1-propanol, 2-propanol, 1-butanol, 2-methyl-1-propanol, 1-pentanol, 2-pentanol, 3-pentanol, 2-methyl-1-butanol, l-methyl-1-butanol, 3-methyl-1-butanol, l-methyl-1-pentanol, 2-methyl-1- pentanol, 3-methyl-1-pentanol, t-butanol, cyclohexanol, 2-ethyl-1-butanol, and the like, and mixtures thereof. Non› limiting examples of said esters are methyl acrylate, ethyl acrylate, t-butyl acrylate, methyl methacrylate, hydroxy› ethyl methacrylate, methoxy ethyl methacrylate, and mix› tures thereof, amides and imides of said acids, such as N,N-dimethylacrylamide, N-t-butyl acrylamide, maleim› ides; low molecular weight unsaturated alcohols such as vinyl alcohol (produced by the hydrolysis of vinyl acetate after polymerization), alkyl alcohol; esters of said alcohols with low molecular weight carboxylic acids, such as, vinyl acetate, vinyl propionate; ethers of said alcohols such as methyl vinyl ether; polar vinyl heterocyclics, such as vinyl pyrrolidone, vinyl caprolactam, vinyl pyridine, vinyl imidazole, and mixtures thereof; other unsaturated amines and amides, such as vinyl amine, diethylene triamine, dim- ethylaminoethyl methacrylate, ethenyl formamide; vinyl sulfonate; salts of acids and amines listed above; low molecular weight unsaturated hydrocarbons and derivatives \n\nSolid polymeric particles of average particle size smaller than about 10 microns, preferably smaller than 5 microns, more preferably smaller than about 1 micron, may be used as a lubricant, since they can provide a \"roller-bearing\" action. Polyethylene emulsions and suspensions are also suitable for providing this lubrication or smoothness effect to the fabrics on which they are deposited. Suitable smooth› ing agents are available under the tradename VELUSTROL from HOECHST Aktiengesellschaft of Frankfurt am Main, Germany. In particular, the polyethylene emulsions sold under the tradename VELUSTROL PKS, VELUSTROL KPA, or VELUSTROL P-40 may be employed in the compositions of the present invention. The use of such polymers in fabric softening compositions is described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,830,843, b. Shape Retention Polymers \n\nWhen silicone is present as a supplemental wrinkle con› trol agent, it is present at least an effective amount to provide lubrication of the fibers. \n\nii. Synthetic Solid Particles \n\nAlternatively, the silicone material can be provided as a moiety or a part of a non-silicone molecule. Examples of such materials are copolymers containing silicone moieties, typically present as block and/or graft copolymers. \n\nNonlimiting examples of natural shape retention poly- mers are starches and their derivatives, and chitins and their derivatives. Starch is not normally preferred, since it makes the fabric resistant to deformation. However, it does provide increased \"body\" which is often desired. Starch is particu› larly preferred however, when the consumer intends to iron the fabrics after they have been washed and dried. When used, starch may be used as a solid or solubilized or dispersed to be combined with other materials in the com› position. Any type of starch, e.g. those derived from corn, wheat, rice, grain sorghum, waxy grain sorghum, waxy maize or tapioca, or mixtures thereof and water soluble or dispersible modifications or derivatives thereof, can be used in the compositions of the present invention. Modified starches may include natural starches that have been degraded to obtain a lower viscosity by acidic, oxidative or enzymic depolymerization. Additionally, low viscosity com› mercially available propoxylated and/or ethoxylated starches are useable in the present composition and are preferred when the composition is to be dispensed with a sprayer because of their low viscosity at relatively high solid concentrations. Suitable alkoxylated, low viscosity starches are submicron-size particles of hydrophobic starch that are readily dispersed in water and are prepared by alkoxylation of granular starch with a monofunctional alkoxylating agent which provides the starch with ether linked hydrophilic groups. A suitable method for their preparation is taught in U.S. Pat. No. 3,462,283. \n\nwherein n and m are the same as before. The preferred silicones of this type are those which do not cause fabric discoloration. \n\nAnother silicone material which can be used has the formula: \n\nIII. f denotes an integer of at least about 2. In the formulas herein, each definition is applied indi› vidually and averages are included. \n\n2 II. R 3 denotes a long chain alkyl group; and \n\nI. z=-CH$_{2}$-CH(OH)-CH$_{2}$O-CH$_{2}$ ) 2 - 3 \n\nwherein \n\nIV. -N+(R $^{2}$)CH$_{2}$ -CH$_{2}$N+H$_{2}$ A-\n\nIII. -N+(R 2 ) 3 A-; and \n\nII. -N(R 2 ) 2 ; \n\nI. -N(R $^{2}$)CH$_{2}$ -CH$_{2}$-N(R 2 ) 2 ; \n\nwherein G is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, OH, and/or Ci-Cs alkyl; a denotes O or an integer from 1 to 3; b denotes O or 1; the sum of n+m is a number from 1 to about 2,000; R $^{1 }$is a monovalent radical of formula CpH$_{2}$ P Lin which p is an integer from 2 to 4 and Lis selected from the group consisting of: \n\ncan attach to the surface of the fabric fibers and dry in place. The polymer can form a film on the fiber surfaces, or when residing between two fibers and in contact with the two fibers, it can bond the two fibers together. Other polymers such as starches can form a film and/or bond the fibers together when the treated fabric is pressed by a hot iron. Such a film will have adhesive strength, cohesive breaking strength, and cohesive breaking strain. \n\nSimilarly, silicone materials which can be used corre› spond to the formulas: \n\n- wherein each R $^{2 }$is chosen from the group consisting of hydrogen, a C$_{1}$-Cs saturated hydrocarbon radical, and each A- denotes compatible anion, e.g., a halide ion; and \n\n$$R 3 -N+(CH 3 ) 2 -Z--{Si(CH 3 ) 2 0]r-,Si(CH 3 ) 2 -Z-N+(CH 3 ) 2 - R3.2CH3COO-$$\n\n$$(R $^{1}$)aG3-n-Si-(---0SiG2)n-(0SiGb(R$^{1}$)2-b)m-O-SiG3_a(R$^{1}$)a $$\n\n$$(CH 3 ) 3 -Si--{0Si(CH 3 ) 2 1-{---0-Si(CH 3 )[(CH 2 ) 3 -NH- (CH2)2-NH2]} m0Si(CH 3 ) 3 $$" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.979996945624523, + "doc_id": "b4edd6ffdde46f973a81b28926caa3f543873986b760b618b484ad14937ef34c", + "edit_distance": 0.5830357142857143, + "f1_score": 0.99203187250996, + "meteor": 0.9000284053190445, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "US 2009/0197849 Al\n\nEach formulation was applied in a 25 µl dosage and a 50 µl dosage for a total of 6 test groups. The receiver chamber was sealed to the atmosphere using parafilm wrap so that it was spill-proof and airtight. Three diffusion cells were used for each test group for a total of 18 cells.\n\n[0350] The cells were filled with DI water for a receiver solution. The DI water had been degased to remove air bubbles. The receiver solution was completely withdrawn and replaced with fresh DI water at each time point. Samples of the receiver solution were taken and analyzed by HPLC (high pressure liquid chromatography) to determine the leu› prolide concentration. The cumulative amount of leuprolide across human cadaver skin was calculated from a 25 µl and a 50 µl solution containing NaOH, using the measured leupro› lide concentrations in the receiver solutions for each time point (5 and 24 hours).\n\nTABLE 44\n\n[0351] The cumulative amount ofleuprolide across human cadaver skin for the 25 µl dosage at 24 hours increased from 0.52 µg/cm 2 to 4.43 µg/cm 2 when the calculated sodium hydroxide concentration in the dried patch was increased from 0% to 6.7%. The cumulative amount of leuprolide across human cadaver skin for the 50 µl dosage at 24 hours increased from 0.32 µg/cm 2 to 10.8 µg/cm 2 when the calcu› lated sodium hydroxide concentration in the leuprolide solu› tion was increased from 0% to 6.7%. The cumulative amount ofleuprolide across human cadaver skin at 24 hours from the 50 µl dosage group containing 3.6% NaOH (Leu-2) was 8.58 µg/cm 2 , which was about 27 times higher than that from the formulation without NaOH (0.32 µg/cm 2 , Leu-1).\n\n[0352] The formulation ofLeu-2 provided up to 6-fold (25 µl solution) and to 27-fold (50 µl solution) more leuprolide flux than in the absence ofNaOH (Leu-1 ). The formulation of Leu-3 provided up to 9-fold (25 µl solution) and up to 34-fold (50 µl solution) more flux than in the absence ofNaOH.\n\n## Example 14\n\n[0353] The in-vitro permeation of oxytocin through human cadaver skin was performed using Franz-type diffusion cells with a diffusion area of 1 cm 2 . The volume of receiver solu› tion was 8 ml. Human cadaver skin was cut to a proper size and placed on a flat surface with the stratum corneum side facing up. The skin was clamped between the donor and receiver chambers of the diffusion cell. Eighteen diffusion cells were used in this study. A 2% NaOH aqueous solution (50 µl) was introduced to the donor chambers of nine cells (cells #1 to 9) and a 4% NaOH aqueous solution (50 µl) was introduced to the donor chambers of the other nine cells ( cells #10 to 18). Once the NaOH solution is applied, the donor chamber was covered with parafilm.\n\n[0354] After 5 hours, the NaOH solution was washed away from the skin for 3 cells (cells #1 to 3) that were treated with 2% NaOH solution and 3 cells (cells #10 to 12) that were treated with 4% NaOH solution. After 10 hours, the NaOH\n\n31\n\nAug. 6, 2009\n\nsolution was washed away from the skin for 3 cells ( cells #4 to 6) that were treated with 2% NaOH solution and 3 cells (cells #13 to 15) that were treated with 4% NaOH solution. After 24 hours, the Na OH solution was washed away from the skinfor3 cells (cells #7 to 9) that were treated with2% NaOH solution and 3 cells ( cells #16 to 18) that were treated with4% Na OH solution. To wash away the Na OH solution, the receiv› ing fluid was removed and replaced with fresh DI water. This was done twice. DI water was added to the donor chamber to dilute the NaOH solution and then the donor solution was removed. This was repeated several times.\n\n[0355] After the NaOH solution was washed away from the skin, the solution in the donor chamber was completely removed and replaced by 50 µl of an oxytocin solution. The formulation of the oxytocin solution is listed in Table 45. Once the oxytocin solution was applied, the donor chamber was covered with parafilm.\n\nTABLE45\n\nThe cells were filled with DI water as a receiver solution. The DI water had been degased to remove air bubbles. The receiver solution was completely withdrawn and replaced with fresh DI water at each time point. The samples taken were analyzed by HPLC for the concentration of oxytocin in the receiver solution. The cumulative amount of oxytocin across human cadaver skin was calculated using the measured oxytocin concentrations in the receiver solutions for each time point, which were listed in Table 46. The skin was pretreated with 4% Na OH for the specified pretreatment time period.\n\nTABLE46\n\n## Example 15\n\n[0356] The in-vitro permeation of oxytocin through human cadaver skin was performed as described in Example 14, except that a 0.25% NaOH aqueous solution (50 µl) was introduced to the donor chambers of nine cells ( cells #1 to 9) and a 1.0% NaOH aqueous solution (50 µl) was introduced to the donor chambers of the other nine cells (cells #10 to 18).\n\n[0357] After 5 hours, the NaOH solution was washed away from the skin for 3 cells (cells #1 to 3) that were treated with 0.5% NaOH solution and 3 cells (cells #10 to 12) that were treated with 1.0% NaOH solution. After 11 hours, the NaOH solution was washed away from the skin for 3 cells ( cells #4 to 6) that were treated with 0.25% NaOH solution and 3 cells ( cells #13 to 15) that were treated with 1.0% NaOH solution. After 24 hours, the Na OH solution was washed away from the", + "recall": 0.9841897233201581, + "true_md": "Aug. 6, 2009 \n\n31 \n\nUS 2009/0197849 Al \n\nEach formulation was applied in a 25 µl dosage and a 50 µl dosage for a total of 6 test groups. The receiver chamber was sealed to the atmosphere using parafilm wrap so that it was spill-proof and airtight. Three diffusion cells were used for each test group for a total of 18 cells. \n\n[0350] The cells were filled with DI water for a receiver solution. The DI water had been degased to remove air bubbles. The receiver solution was completely withdrawn and replaced with fresh DI water at each time point. Samples of the receiver solution were taken and analyzed by HPLC (high pressure liquid chromatography) to determine the leu› prolide concentration. The cumulative amount of leuprolide across human cadaver skin was calculated from a 25 µl and a 50 µl solution containing NaOH, using the measured leupro› lide concentrations in the receiver solutions for each time point (5 and 24 hours). \n\nsolution was washed away from the skin for 3 cells ( cells #4 to 6) that were treated with 2% NaOH solution and 3 cells (cells #13 to 15) that were treated with 4% NaOH solution. After 24 hours, the Na OH solution was washed away from the skinfor3 cells (cells #7 to 9) that were treated with2% NaOH solution and 3 cells ( cells #16 to 18) that were treated with4% Na OH solution. To wash away the Na OH solution, the receiv› ing fluid was removed and replaced with fresh DI water. This was done twice. DI water was added to the donor chamber to dilute the NaOH solution and then the donor solution was removed. This was repeated several times. \n\n[0355] After the NaOH solution was washed away from the skin, the solution in the donor chamber was completely removed and replaced by 50 µl of an oxytocin solution. The formulation of the oxytocin solution is listed in Table 45. Once the oxytocin solution was applied, the donor chamber was covered with parafilm. \n\n[0351] The cumulative amount ofleuprolide across human cadaver skin for the 25 µl dosage at 24 hours increased from 0.52 µg/cm 2 to 4.43 µg/cm 2 when the calculated sodium hydroxide concentration in the dried patch was increased from 0% to 6.7%. The cumulative amount of leuprolide across human cadaver skin for the 50 µl dosage at 24 hours increased from 0.32 µg/cm 2 to 10.8 µg/cm $^{2 }$when the calcu› lated sodium hydroxide concentration in the leuprolide solu› tion was increased from 0% to 6.7%. The cumulative amount ofleuprolide across human cadaver skin at 24 hours from the 50 µl dosage group containing 3.6% NaOH (Leu-2) was 8.58 µg/cm 2 , which was about 27 times higher than that from the formulation without NaOH (0.32 µg/cm 2 , Leu-1). \n\n[0352] The formulation ofLeu-2 provided up to 6-fold (25 µl solution) and to 27-fold (50 µl solution) more leuprolide flux than in the absence ofNaOH (Leu-1 ). The formulation of Leu-3 provided up to 9-fold (25 µl solution) and up to 34-fold (50 µl solution) more flux than in the absence ofNaOH. \n\nThe cells were filled with DI water as a receiver solution. The DI water had been degased to remove air bubbles. The receiver solution was completely withdrawn and replaced with fresh DI water at each time point. The samples taken were analyzed by HPLC for the concentration of oxytocin in the receiver solution. The cumulative amount of oxytocin across human cadaver skin was calculated using the measured oxytocin concentrations in the receiver solutions for each time point, which were listed in Table 46. The skin was pretreated with 4% Na OH for the specified pretreatment time period. \n\n[0353] The in-vitro permeation of oxytocin through human cadaver skin was performed using Franz-type diffusion cells with a diffusion area of 1 cm 2 . The volume of receiver solu› tion was 8 ml. Human cadaver skin was cut to a proper size and placed on a flat surface with the stratum corneum side facing up. The skin was clamped between the donor and receiver chambers of the diffusion cell. Eighteen diffusion cells were used in this study. A 2% NaOH aqueous solution (50 µl) was introduced to the donor chambers of nine cells (cells #1 to 9) and a 4% NaOH aqueous solution (50 µl) was introduced to the donor chambers of the other nine cells ( cells #10 to 18). Once the NaOH solution is applied, the donor chamber was covered with parafilm. \n\n[0354] After 5 hours, the NaOH solution was washed away from the skin for 3 cells (cells #1 to 3) that were treated with 2% NaOH solution and 3 cells (cells #10 to 12) that were treated with 4% NaOH solution. After 10 hours, the NaOH \n\n[0356] The in-vitro permeation of oxytocin through human cadaver skin was performed as described in Example 14, except that a 0.25% NaOH aqueous solution (50 µl) was introduced to the donor chambers of nine cells ( cells #1 to 9) and a 1.0% NaOH aqueous solution (50 µl) was introduced to the donor chambers of the other nine cells (cells #10 to 18). \n\n[0357] After 5 hours, the NaOH solution was washed away from the skin for 3 cells (cells #1 to 3) that were treated with 0.5% NaOH solution and 3 cells (cells #10 to 12) that were treated with 1.0% NaOH solution. After 11 hours, the NaOH solution was washed away from the skin for 3 cells ( cells #4 to 6) that were treated with 0.25% NaOH solution and 3 cells ( cells #13 to 15) that were treated with 1.0% NaOH solution. After 24 hours, the Na OH solution was washed away from the \n\nTABLE46 \n\nTABLE45 \n\nTABLE 44 \n\n## Example 15\n\n## Example 14" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9107534131179565, + "doc_id": "49fedbfad02ba2f34b0ca379a2a81807b18b68f73dd1030534834bc12b25dd07", + "edit_distance": 0.5869106263194933, + "f1_score": 0.9375, + "meteor": 0.7753171590637623, + "precision": 0.9448818897637795, + "pred_md": "US 9,164,380 B2\n\n103\n\nThere are no particular limitations on these other structural units, provided they cannot be classified as one of the above structural units (al) to (a4), and any of the multitude of conventional structural units used within resist resins designed for use withArF excimer lasers, KrF excimer lasers, EB or EUV or the like can be used.\n\nThe component (Al) is preferably a polymer that includes the structural unit (al), and is more preferably a copolymer containing the structural unit (al), and at least one structural unit selected from among the structural units (a2) and (a3). Among such copolymers, a copolymer that includes the struc› tural units (al) and (a2) is preferable, and a copolymer con› taining the structural unit (al), the structural unit (a2) and the structural unit (a3) is particularly desirable.\n\nExamples of these polymers and copolymers include copolymers consisting of the structural units (al) and (a2), copolymers consisting of the structural units (al) and ( a3 ), copolymers consisting of the structural units (al), (a2) and (a3), and copolymers consisting of the structural units (al), (a2), (a3) and (a4).\n\nThe structural units (al), (a2), (a3) and (a4) within these polymers and copolymers may each include a single type of structural unit or a combination of two or more types.\n\nThe weight-average molecular weight (Mw) (the polysty› rene equivalent value determined by gel permeation chromatography (GPC)) of the component (Al) is not particularly limited, but is preferably within a range from 1,000 to 50,000, more preferably from 1,500 to 30,000, and most preferably from 2,000 to 20,000. When the weight-average molecular weight is not more than the upper limit of the above range, the component (Al) exhibits satisfactory solubility in a resist solvent when used as a resist. On the other hand, when the weight-average molecular weight is at least as large as the lower limit of the above range, the dry etching resistance and the cross-sectional shape of the resist pattern are improved.\n\nFurther, although there are no particular limitations on the dispersity (Mw/Mn) of the component (Al), the dispersity is preferably from 1.0 to 5.0, more preferably from 1.0 to 3.0, and most preferably from 1.0 to 2.5. Here, Mn represents the number-average molecular weight.\n\nA single component (Al) may be used alone, or a combi› nation of two or more types of the component (Al) may be used.\n\nThe component (Al) can be obtained, for example, by a conventional radical polymerization or the like of the monomers corresponding with each of the structural units, using a radical polymerization initiator such as azobisisobutyroni› trile (AIBN).\n\nFurthermore, by using a chain transfer agent such as HS----CH ----CH ----CH ----C(CF 2 2 2 3 ) 2 ---0H during the above polymerization, a ----C(CF 3 ) 2 ---0H group can be introduced at the terminals of the component (Al). Such a copolymer having an introduced hydroxyalkyl group in which some of the hydrogen atoms of the alkyl group have been substituted with fluorine atoms is effective in reducing developing defects and line edge roughness (LER: unevenness in the side walls of a line pattern).\n\nIn terms of the monomers used for forming each of the structural units, either commercially available monomers may be used, or the monomers may be synthesized using conventional methods.\n\n## { Component (A2)}\n\nThe component (A2) is preferably a low molecular weight compound having a molecular weight of at least 500 but less than 4,000, containing a hydrophilic group and an acid-dissociable group such as those mentioned above in the descrip› tion of the component (Al). Specific examples of the com-\n\n104\n\nponent (A2) include compounds containing a plurality of phenol structures in which a portion of the hydrogen atoms of the hydroxyl groups have each been substituted with an aforementioned acid-dissociable, group.\n\nExamples of the component (A2) include low molecular weight phenolic compounds in which a portion of the hydroxyl group hydrogen atoms have each been substituted with an aforementioned acid-dissociable group. These types of compounds are known, for example, as sensitizers or heat resistance improvers for use in non-chemically amplified g-line or i-line resists, and any of these compounds may be used.\n\nExamples of these low molecular weight phenolic com› pounds include bis( 4-hydroxyphenyl)methane, bis(2,3,4-tri› hydroxyphenyl)methane, 2-( 4-hydroxyphenyl)-2-( 4'-hy› droxyphenyl)propane, 2-(2,3,4-trihydroxyphenyl)-2-(2',3', 4 '-trihydroxypheny )propane, ! tris( 4-hydroxyphenyl) methane, bis( 4-hydroxy-3,5-dimethylphenyl)-2hydroxyphenylmethane, bis( 4-hydroxy-2,5dimethylphenyl)-2-hydroxyphenylmethane, bis(4-hydroxy3,5-dimethylphenyl)-3,4-dihydroxyphenylmethane, bis(4hydroxy-2,5-dimethylphenyl)-3,4dihydroxyphenylmethane, bis( 4-hydroxy-3-methylphenyl)3,4-dihydroxyphenylmethane, bis(3-cyclohexyl-4-hydroxy6-methylphenyl)-4-hydroxyphenylmethane, bis(3cyclohexyl-4-hydroxy-6-methylphenyl)-3,4dihydroxyphenylmethane, 1-[1-( 4-hydroxyphenyl) isopropyl]-4-[1, 1-bis( 4-hydroxyphenyl)ethyl]benzene, and dimers, trimers, tetramers, pentamers and hexamers of for› malin condensation products of phenols such as phenol, m-cresol, p-cresol and xylenol. Needless to say, the low molecular weight phenol compound is not limited to these examples.\n\nIn particular, a phenolic compound having 2 to 6 triphenyl› methane structures is preferable as the low molecular weight phenolic compound, as such compounds yield superior levels ofresolution and line width roughness (LWR).\n\nThere are no particular limitations on the acid-dissociable group, and examples include the same groups as those described above within the description relating to the com› ponent (Al).\n\nA single component (A2) may be used alone, or a combi› nation of two or more types of the component (A2) may be used.\n\nIn the resist composition of the present invention, a single component (A) may be used alone, or a combination of two or more types of the component (A) may be used.\n\nAmong the various possibilities described above, the com› ponent (A) preferably includes the component (Al).\n\nThe amount of the component (Al) within the component (A), based on the total weight of the component (A), is pref› erably at least 25% by weight, more preferably 50% by weight or more, still more preferably 7 5% by weight or more, and may even be 100% by weight. When this amount is at least 25% by weight, lithography properties such as the mask error factor (MEF) and the circularity are improved, and roughness can be further reduced.\n\nThere amount of the component (A) within the resist com› position of the present aspect may be adjusted in accordance with factors such as the thickness of the resist film that is to be formed.\n\n## <Component (G)>\n\nThe resist composition of the present invention also includes an acid (G) (hereafter referred to as \"component (G)\") having a pKa of 4 or less.\n\n5\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n60\n\n65", + "recall": 0.9302325581395349, + "true_md": "Furthermore, by using a chain transfer agent such as HS----CH$_{2}$----CH$_{2}$----CH$_{2}$----C(CF$_{3}$ ) $_{2}$---0H during the above 50 polymerization, a ----C(CF$_{3}$ ) $_{2}$---0H group can be introduced at the terminals of the component (Al). Such a copolymer having an introduced hydroxyalkyl group in which some of the hydrogen atoms of the alkyl group have been substituted with fluorine atoms is effective in reducing developing 55 defects and line edge roughness (LER: unevenness in the side walls of a line pattern). \n\nUS 9,164,380 B2 \n\n103 \n\n104 \n\nThere are no particular limitations on these other structural units, provided they cannot be classified as one of the above structural units (al) to (a4), and any of the multitude of conventional structural units used within resist resins designed for use withArF excimer lasers, KrF excimer lasers, EB or EUV or the like can be used. \n\nThe component (Al) is preferably a polymer that includes the structural unit (al), and is more preferably a copolymer containing the structural unit (al), and at least one structural unit selected from among the structural units (a2) and (a3). Among such copolymers, a copolymer that includes the struc› tural units (al) and (a2) is preferable, and a copolymer con› taining the structural unit (al), the structural unit (a2) and the structural unit (a3) is particularly desirable. \n\nExamples of these polymers and copolymers include copolymers consisting of the structural units (al) and (a2), copolymers consisting of the structural units (al) and ( a3 ), copolymers consisting of the structural units (al), (a2) and (a3), and copolymers consisting of the structural units (al), (a2), (a3) and (a4). \n\nThe structural units (al), (a2), (a3) and (a4) within these polymers and copolymers may each include a single type of structural unit or a combination of two or more types. \n\nThe weight-average molecular weight (Mw) (the polysty› rene equivalent value determined by gel permeation chroma- tography (GPC)) of the component (Al) is not particularly limited, but is preferably within a range from 1,000 to 50,000, more preferably from 1,500 to 30,000, and most preferably from 2,000 to 20,000. When the weight-average molecular weight is not more than the upper limit of the above range, the component (Al) exhibits satisfactory solubility in a resist solvent when used as a resist. On the other hand, when the weight-average molecular weight is at least as large as the lower limit of the above range, the dry etching resistance and the cross-sectional shape of the resist pattern are improved. \n\nFurther, although there are no particular limitations on the dispersity (Mw/Mn) of the component (Al), the dispersity is preferably from 1.0 to 5.0, more preferably from 1.0 to 3.0, and most preferably from 1.0 to 2.5. Here, Mn represents the number-average molecular weight. \n\nA single component (Al) may be used alone, or a combi› nation of two or more types of the component (Al) may be used. \n\nThe component (Al) can be obtained, for example, by a conventional radical polymerization or the like of the mono- mers corresponding with each of the structural units, using a radical polymerization initiator such as azobisisobutyroni› trile (AIBN). \n\nIn terms of the monomers used for forming each of the structural units, either commercially available monomers may be used, or the monomers may be synthesized using conventional methods. \n\n## { Component (A2)}\n\nThe component (A2) is preferably a low molecular weight compound having a molecular weight of at least 500 but less than 4,000, containing a hydrophilic group and an acid-dis- sociable group such as those mentioned above in the descrip› tion of the component (Al). Specific examples of the com-\n\nThe resist composition of the present invention also includes an acid (G) (hereafter referred to as \"component (G)\") having a pKa of 4 or less. \n\n## <Component (G)>\n\nThere amount of the component (A) within the resist com› position of the present aspect may be adjusted in accordance with factors such as the thickness of the resist film that is to be formed. \n\nThe amount of the component (Al) within the component (A), based on the total weight of the component (A), is pref› erably at least 25% by weight, more preferably 50% by weight or more, still more preferably 7 5% by weight or more, and may even be 100% by weight. When this amount is at least 25% by weight, lithography properties such as the mask error factor (MEF) and the circularity are improved, and roughness can be further reduced. \n\nAmong the various possibilities described above, the com› ponent (A) preferably includes the component (Al). \n\nIn the resist composition of the present invention, a single component (A) may be used alone, or a combination of two or more types of the component (A) may be used. \n\nA single component (A2) may be used alone, or a combi› nation of two or more types of the component (A2) may be used. \n\nThere are no particular limitations on the acid-dissociable group, and examples include the same groups as those described above within the description relating to the com› ponent (Al). \n\nIn particular, a phenolic compound having 2 to 6 triphenyl› methane structures is preferable as the low molecular weight phenolic compound, as such compounds yield superior levels ofresolution and line width roughness (LWR). \n\nExamples of these low molecular weight phenolic com› pounds include bis( 4-hydroxyphenyl)methane, bis(2,3,4-tri› hydroxyphenyl)methane, 2-( 4-hydroxyphenyl)-2-( 4’-hy› droxyphenyl)propane, 2-(2,3,4-trihydroxyphenyl)-2-(2’,3’, 4 ’-trihydroxypheny !)propane, tris( 4-hydroxyphenyl) methane, bis( 4-hydroxy-3,5-dimethylphenyl)-2- hydroxyphenylmethane, bis( 4-hydroxy-2,5- dimethylphenyl)-2-hydroxyphenylmethane, bis(4-hydroxy- 3,5-dimethylphenyl)-3,4-dihydroxyphenylmethane, bis(4- hydroxy-2,5-dimethylphenyl)-3,4- dihydroxyphenylmethane, bis( 4-hydroxy-3-methylphenyl)- 3,4-dihydroxyphenylmethane, bis(3-cyclohexyl-4-hydroxy- 6-methylphenyl)-4-hydroxyphenylmethane, bis(3- cyclohexyl-4-hydroxy-6-methylphenyl)-3,4- dihydroxyphenylmethane, 1-[1-( 4-hydroxyphenyl) isopropyl]-4-[1, 1-bis( 4-hydroxyphenyl)ethyl]benzene, and dimers, trimers, tetramers, pentamers and hexamers of for› malin condensation products of phenols such as phenol, m-cresol, p-cresol and xylenol. Needless to say, the low molecular weight phenol compound is not limited to these examples. \n\nExamples of the component (A2) include low molecular weight phenolic compounds in which a portion of the hydroxyl group hydrogen atoms have each been substituted with an aforementioned acid-dissociable group. These types of compounds are known, for example, as sensitizers or heat resistance improvers for use in non-chemically amplified g-line or i-line resists, and any of these compounds may be used. \n\nponent (A2) include compounds containing a plurality of phenol structures in which a portion of the hydrogen atoms of the hydroxyl groups have each been substituted with an afore- mentioned acid-dissociable, group." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9034454628192786, + "doc_id": "2cc367a84acd69867a68777fff6c4f36aab9632021a60f194dd1dc89788dba0d", + "edit_distance": 0.591304347826087, + "f1_score": 0.9838709677419355, + "meteor": 0.8975210128971152, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## c12) United States Patent Lin et al.\n\n## (54) METHOD OF PRODUCING A TIRE COMPOSITION HAVING IMPROVED SILICA REINFORCEMENT\n\n- (75) Inventors:\n\nChenchy Jeffrey Lin, Hudson, OH (US); William L. Hergenrother, Akron, OH (US)\n\n- (73) Assignee:\n- ( *) Notice:\n\nBridgestone Corporation, Chuo-ku, Tokyo (JP)\n\nSubject to any disclaimer, the term of this patent is extended or adjusted under 35 U.S.C. 154(b) by 263 days.\n\n- (21) Appl. No.:\n\n11/259,505\n\n- (22) Filed:\n\n## (65) Prior Publication Data\n\nOct. 26, 2005\n\nUS 2006/0089446 Al\n\nApr. 27, 2006\n\n## Related U.S. Application Data\n\n- (60) Provisional application No. 60/622,006, filed on Oct. 26, 2004.\n- (51) Int. Cl.\n\nB29D 23100 (2006.01)\n\n- (52) U.S. Cl.\n\n...................\n\n428/36.3; 428/36.7; 428/36.8;\n\n428/36.91; 524/526; 524/571; 524/572; 524/573; 524/574; 524/575; 524/575.5\n\nUS007335411B2\n\nUS007335411B2\n\n- (IO) Patent No.:\n\nUS 7,335,411 B2\n\n- (45) Date of Patent:\n\nFeb.26,2008\n\n- (58) Field of Classification Search\n\n...............\n\n428/36.3,\n\n428/36.7, 36.8, 36.91;\n\n524/526, 571,572,\n\n524/573, 574, 575, 575.5\n\nSee application file for complete search history.\n\n## (56) References Cited\n\n## U.S. PATENT DOCUMENTS\n\n* cited by examiner\n\nPrimary Examiner-Bernard Lipman (74) Attorney, Agent, or Firm-Arthur M.\n\nReginelli; Meredith E. Hooker\n\n## (57) ABSTRACT\n\nVulcanizable elastomeric compositions and vulcanizates are prepared by employing a strong acid. The strong acid is believed to enhance the reaction between a silica particle and a silica-reactive compound.\n\n## 19 Claims, No Drawings", + "recall": 0.9682539682539683, + "true_md": "# c12) United States Patent\n\n# Lin et al.\n\n# (IO) Patent No.: US 7,335,411 B2\n\n# Feb.26,2008 (45) Date of Patent:\n\n# (54) METHOD OF PRODUCING A TIRE COMPOSITION HAVING IMPROVED SILICA REINFORCEMENT\n\n1111111111111111 11111 1111111111 lllll lllll 111111111111111 111111111111111111 US007335411B2 \n\n## (65) Prior Publication Data\n\n## Related U.S. Application Data\n\n- (75) Inventors: Chenchy Jeffrey Lin, Hudson, OH (US); William L. Hergenrother, Akron, OH (US) \n\n- (73) Assignee: Bridgestone Corporation, Chuo-ku, Tokyo (JP) \n\n- ( *) Notice: Subject to any disclaimer, the term of this patent is extended or adjusted under 35 U.S.C. 154(b) by 263 days. \n\n- (21) Appl. No.: 11/259,505 \n\n- (22) Filed: Oct. 26, 2005 \n\n- (60) Provisional application No. 60/622,006, filed on Oct. 26, 2004. \n\n- (51) Int. Cl. B29D 23100 (2006.01) \n\n- (52) U.S. Cl. ................... 428/36.3; 428/36.7; 428/36.8; 428/36.91; 524/526; 524/571; 524/572; 524/573; 524/574; 524/575; 524/575.5 \n\nUS 2006/0089446 Al Apr. 27, 2006 \n\n* cited by examiner \n\nVulcanizable elastomeric compositions and vulcanizates are prepared by employing a strong acid. The strong acid is believed to enhance the reaction between a silica particle and a silica-reactive compound. \n\n## (57) ABSTRACT\n\n## 19 Claims, No Drawings\n\n## (56) References Cited\n\n## See application file for complete search history.\n\n- (58) Field of Classification Search ............... 428/36.3, 428/36.7, 36.8, 36.91; 524/526, 571,572, 524/573, 574, 575, 575.5 \n\n## U.S. PATENT DOCUMENTS\n\nPrimary Examiner-Bernard Lipman \n\n(74) Attorney, Agent, or Firm-Arthur M. Reginelli; Meredith E. Hooker" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9465723866718868, + "doc_id": "619ffa25eddd8abea7d7833ad4b63b886171af83f42322ca3f141355b032c67e", + "edit_distance": 0.6451612903225806, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.8331983652781041, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "US 2020/0352177 Al\n\nTABLE III\n\n## EXAMPLES 9 and 10\n\n[0193] Two phosphate-free baking powders according to the invention were prepared using fumaric acid as Acidulant. The two examples were used with a Madeira cake recipe in baking trials and compared with a commercial formulation. The results are set out in the following table IV, in which all proportions are in grams, and heights are in mm.\n\nTABLE IV\n\n## EXAMPLES 11-14\n\n[0194] Four formulations with calcium formate as the sole Precipitant were prepared and tested in the scone recipe of example II. The pH of the scones was determined. The results are set out in the following table V.\n\nNov. 12, 2020\n\nTABLE V\n\n## EXAMPLES 15-20\n\n[0195] Six leavening formulations were prepared accord› ing to the invention, using a system comprising fumaric acid, sodium bicarbonate and various mixtures of calcium and magnesium chlorides. The formulations were used in the bakery mix of Example I and compared with a sample with only magnesium. The pH of the scones was noted. The results are set out in the following table VI, in which all proportions are in grams\n\nTABLE VI\n\n[0196] It will be seen that magnesium chloride alone gave a relatively high pH, but that the addition of even small amounts of calcium chloride significantly lowered the pH of the product.\n\n## EXAMPLES 21-22\n\n[0197] Two phosphate-free baking powders according to the invention were prepared using fumaric acid as anAcidu› lant with calcium formate and calcium chloride respectively. They were compared with two SAPP based baking powders and two fumaric based baking powders using Acidulant only, in a standard Madeira cake recipe. The SAPP and pure fumaric based baking powders were used at two different addition levels. The lower addition level in baking trials and compared with a commercial formulation. The results are set out in the following table VII, in which all proportions are in percent by weight based on the weight of flour, and heights are in mm.\n\nTABLE VII\n\n10", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "US 2020/0352177 Al \n\n10 \n\nNov. 12, 2020 \n\n## EXAMPLES 9 and 10\n\n## EXAMPLES 11-14\n\n## EXAMPLES 15-20\n\n## EXAMPLES 21-22\n\n[0195] Six leavening formulations were prepared accord› ing to the invention, using a system comprising fumaric acid, sodium bicarbonate and various mixtures of calcium and magnesium chlorides. The formulations were used in the bakery mix of Example I and compared with a sample with only magnesium. The pH of the scones was noted. The results are set out in the following table VI, in which all proportions are in grams \n\n[0196] It will be seen that magnesium chloride alone gave a relatively high pH, but that the addition of even small amounts of calcium chloride significantly lowered the pH of the product. \n\n[0197] Two phosphate-free baking powders according to the invention were prepared using fumaric acid as anAcidu› lant with calcium formate and calcium chloride respectively. They were compared with two SAPP based baking powders and two fumaric based baking powders using Acidulant only, in a standard Madeira cake recipe. The SAPP and pure fumaric based baking powders were used at two different addition levels. The lower addition level in baking trials and compared with a commercial formulation. The results are set out in the following table VII, in which all proportions are in percent by weight based on the weight of flour, and heights are in mm. \n\n[0194] Four formulations with calcium formate as the sole Precipitant were prepared and tested in the scone recipe of example II. The pH of the scones was determined. The results are set out in the following table V. \n\n[0193] Two phosphate-free baking powders according to the invention were prepared using fumaric acid as Acidulant. The two examples were used with a Madeira cake recipe in baking trials and compared with a commercial formulation. The results are set out in the following table IV, in which all proportions are in grams, and heights are in mm. \n\nTABLE VII \n\nTABLE VI \n\nTABLE V \n\nTABLE III \n\nTABLE IV" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8716424514121777, + "doc_id": "892944e20446aecaaf6c45985095ba13a6530f51856da2fdbb8fbdd9c6960cd0", + "edit_distance": 0.5170603674540682, + "f1_score": 0.9655172413793105, + "meteor": 0.833139778877962, + "precision": 0.9735099337748344, + "pred_md": "## c12) United States Patent Benkhoff et al.\n\n## (54) PROCESS FOR THE PREPARATION OF 4-METHYL-7-AMINOQUINOLONES\n\n- (75) Inventors:\n- (73) Assignee:\n- ( *) Notice:\n- (21) Appl. No.:\n\n10/498,456\n\n- (22) PCT Filed:\n\nDec. 3, 2002\n\n- (86) PCT No.:\n\nPCT/EP02/13663\n\n- § 371 (c)(l),\n- (2), ( 4) Date:\n\nJun. 8, 2004\n\n- (87) PCT Pub. No.:\n\nWO03/050089\n\n- PCT Pub. Date:\n\nJun. 19, 2003\n\n## (65) Prior Publication Data\n\nUS 2005/0222397 Al Oct. 6, 2005\n\n## (30) Foreign Application Priority Data\n\nDec. 11, 2001 (EP) .................................. 01811206\n\n- (51) Int. Cl.\n\nC07D 215138\n\n(2006.01)\n\nC07C 235/80\n\n(2006.01)\n\n- (52) U.S. Cl.\n\n......................\n\n534/740; 534/768; 534/771;\n\n546/153; 562/53; 564/200\n\n- (58) Field of Classification Search\n\n................\n\n534/740,\n\n534/768, 771; 546/153; 562/53; 564/220\n\nSee application file for complete search history.\n\n## (56) References Cited\n\n## U.S. PATENT DOCUMENTS\n\n## FOREIGN PATENT DOCUMENTS\n\n1541460\n\n62-215560\n\nGB\n\nJP\n\n*\n\n2/1979\n\n9/1987\n\n## OTHER PUBLICATIONS\n\nR. M. Forbis et al., Journal of the American Chemical Society, 95:15, Jul. 1973, pp. 5003-5013.\n\nJohannes Benkhoff, Basel (CH); Bernd Lamatsch, Riehen (CH)\n\nCiba Specialty Chemicals Corp., Tarrytown, NY (US)\n\nSubject to any disclaimer, the term of this patent is extended or adjusted under 35 U.S.C. 154(b) by 232 days.\n\nUS007144993B2\n\nUS007144993B2\n\n- (IO) Patent No.:\n- (45) Date of Patent:\n\nUS 7,144,993 B2\n\nDec. 5, 2006\n\nA. Guiotto et al., J. Heterocyclic Chem., vol. 26, Jul. 1989, pp. 917-922.\n\nL. Monti, Gazz. Chim. Ital., vol. 70,(1940), pp. 648-656.\n\nP. Lopez-Alverado et al., Synthesis, (1998), pp. 186-194.\n\n* cited by examiner\n\nPrimary Examiner-Fiona\n\nT. Powers\n\n(74) Attorney, Agent, or Firm-Tyler A. Stevenson\n\n## (57) ABSTRACT\n\nThe present invention relates to a process for the preparation of a compound of the general formula (I), which comprises converting a compound of the general formula (II), in an aprotic organic solvent in the presence of a catalytically active amount of a strong acid (catalyst) or of an agent that liberates a strong acid or of an ammonium salt of a strong acid, it also being possible for the catalyst to be part of the starting material/product, into a compound of formula I, wherein R 5 , R 6 and R 8 are each independently of the others a hydrogen atom, a nitro group, a sulfa group, a halogen atom, a pseudohalogen, a group COOR 1 or CONHR 2 or a C \\_ 1 8 alkyl, C 1 \\_ 8 alkoxy or aryloxy radical, an amide group, a thioalkyl or thioaryl radical, an alkyl- or aryl-sulfonyl radi› cal, an alkyl- or aryl-sulfinyl radical, a trifluoromethyl group or a phosphono group, R 1 and R 2 being a hydrogen atom or a C 1 \\_ 8 alkyl radical or an aryl or aralkyl radical, RIO is a group ----C(O)CH C(O)CH3 2 and R 11 is a hydrogen atom or an acyl radical, or RIO and R 11 are a group -C(O)CH C 2 (O)CH 3 · The process according to the invention is simple to perform and results in products of high chemical purity and high isomeric purity in a high yield\n\n## 11 Claims, No Drawings", + "recall": 0.9576547231270358, + "true_md": "# c12) United States Patent\n\n# Benkhoff et al.\n\n# (IO) Patent No.: US 7,144,993 B2\n\n# (45) Date of Patent: Dec. 5, 2006\n\n# (54) PROCESS FOR THE PREPARATION OF 4-METHYL-7-AMINOQUINOLONES\n\n- (75) Inventors: Johannes Benkhoff, Basel (CH); Bernd Lamatsch, Riehen (CH) \n\n- (73) Assignee: Ciba Specialty Chemicals Corp., Tarrytown, NY (US) \n\n- ( *) Notice: Subject to any disclaimer, the term of this patent is extended or adjusted under 35 U.S.C. 154(b) by 232 days. \n\n- (21) Appl. No.: 10/498,456 \n\n- (22) PCT Filed: Dec. 3, 2002 \n\n- (86) PCT No.: PCT/EP02/13663 § 371 (c)(l), (2), ( 4) Date: Jun. 8, 2004 \n\n- (87) PCT Pub. No.: WO03/050089 PCT Pub. Date: Jun. 19, 2003 \n\n## (65) Prior Publication Data\n\nUS 2005/0222397 Al Oct. 6, 2005 \n\n## (30) Foreign Application Priority Data\n\nDec. 11, 2001 (EP) .................................. 01811206 \n\n- (51) Int. Cl. C07D 215138 (2006.01) C07C 235/80 (2006.01) \n\n- (52) U.S. Cl. ...................... 534/740; 534/768; 534/771; 546/153; 562/53; 564/200 \n\n- (58) Field of Classification Search ................ 534/740, 534/768, 771; 546/153; 562/53; 564/220 See application file for complete search history. \n\n## (56) References Cited\n\n## U.S. PATENT DOCUMENTS\n\n## FOREIGN PATENT DOCUMENTS\n\n## OTHER PUBLICATIONS\n\nR. M. Forbis et al., Journal of the American Chemical Society, 95:15, Jul. 1973, pp. 5003-5013. \n\nThe present invention relates to a process for the preparation of a compound of the general formula (I), which comprises converting a compound of the general formula (II), in an aprotic organic solvent in the presence of a catalytically active amount of a strong acid (catalyst) or of an agent that liberates a strong acid or of an ammonium salt of a strong acid, it also being possible for the catalyst to be part of the starting material/product, into a compound of formula I, wherein R 5 , R $^{6 }$and R8 are each independently of the others a hydrogen atom, a nitro group, a sulfa group, a halogen atom, a pseudohalogen, a group COOR 1 or CONHR 2 or a C$_{1}$\\_$_{8 }$alkyl, C$_{1}$\\_ 8 alkoxy or aryloxy radical, an amide group, a thioalkyl or thioaryl radical, an alkyl- or aryl-sulfonyl radi› cal, an alkyl- or aryl-sulfinyl radical, a trifluoromethyl group or a phosphono group, R 1 and R 2 being a hydrogen atom or a C$_{1}$ \\_ 8 alkyl radical or an aryl or aralkyl radical, RIO is a group ----C(O)CH$_{2}$C(O)CH$_{3 }$ and R$^{11 }$is a hydrogen atom or an acyl radical, or RIO and R 11 are a group -C(O)CH$_{2}$C (O)CH$_{3}$ • The process according to the invention is simple to perform and results in products of high chemical purity and high isomeric purity in a high yield \n\nA. Guiotto et al., J. Heterocyclic Chem., vol. 26, Jul. 1989, pp. 917-922. \n\nL. Monti, Gazz. Chim. Ital., vol. 70,(1940), pp. 648-656. \n\nP. Lopez-Alverado et al., Synthesis, (1998), pp. 186-194. \n\n* cited by examiner \n\nPrimary Examiner-Fiona T. Powers \n\n(74) Attorney, Agent, or Firm-Tyler A. Stevenson \n\n## (57) ABSTRACT\n\n## 11 Claims, No Drawings\n\n1111111111111111 11111 1111111111 lllll 111111111111111 111111111111111 IIII IIII US007144993B2" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9697194243195645, + "doc_id": "d745551860e97bc1036dd54ea68baa071ab9cd03f77097e8ce6339310b7f0a89", + "edit_distance": 0.7804499612102405, + "f1_score": 0.9820224719101124, + "meteor": 0.6985568374503105, + "precision": 0.9754464285714286, + "pred_md": "41\n\n42\n\ncompositions of the present invention are preferably con› centrated. Also, for these methods, the compositions can contain a DEQA compound, which will typically enhance the softness of the fabrics being treated. In this embodiment, the method comprises the steps of placing fabrics in a laundry wash and/or rinse solution and then adding the composition of the present invention to the wash and/or rinse solution. These methods include methods of reducing malodor impression on the fabrics in the wash and/or rinse solutions, and/or methods of reducing the appearance of wrinkles on the fabrics in the wash and/or rinse solutions. This reduction is, of course, relative to the amounts of malodor impression and/or wrinkles on the fabrics before placing them in the wash and/or rinse solutions.\n\n## III. Articles of Manufacture\n\nThe stable, aqueous compositions of the present invention can also be used in an article of manufacture comprising said composition contained in a spray dispenser. Preferably the articles of manufacture are in association with instructions for how to use the composition to treat surfaces, espeically surfaces having malodor impression, or wrinkled fabrics including, e.g., the manner and/or amount of composition to spray, and the preferred ways of stretching and/or smoothing of the fabrics, as will be described with more detailed herein below. It is important that the instructions be as simple and clear as possible, so that using pictures and/or icons is desirable. Thus a set of instructions can comprise an instruc› tion to reduce malodor impression on surfaces, especially fabrics, by following one or more of the methods described hereinbefore. A set of instructions can also comprise an instruction to reduce the appearance of wrinkles in fabrics by carrying out one or more of the methods described hereinbefore.\n\nAs used herein, the phrase \"in association with\" means the set of instructions are either directly printed on the container itself or presented in a separate manner including, but not limited to, a brochure, print advertisement, electronic advertisement, and/or verbal communication, so as to com› municate the set of instructions to a consumer of the article of manufacture. The set of instructions preferably comprises the instruction to apply an effective amount of the composition, preferably by spraying, to provide the indi› cated benefit, e.g., wrinkle reduction and/or reduction of malodor impression.\n\n## Spray Dispenser\n\nUS 6,503,413 B2\n\n5\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\n60\n\nThe article of manufacture herein comprises a spray dispenser. The fabric wrinkle control composition is placed into a spray dispenser in order to be distributed onto the fabric. Said spray dispenser for producing a spray of liquid 50 droplets can be any of the manually activated means as is known in the art, e.g. trigger-type, pump-type, non-aerosol self-pressurized, and aerosol-type spray means, for treating the wrinkle control composition to small fabric surface areas and/or a small number of garments, as well as non-manually operated, powered sprayers for conveniently treating the wrinkle control composition to large fabric surface areas and/or a large number of garments. The spray dispenser herein does not normally include those that will substantially foam the clear, aqueous wrinkle control composition. It has been found that the performance is increased by providing smaller particle droplets. Desirably, the Sauter mean particle diameter is from about 10 µm to about 120 µm, more preferably, from about 20 µm to about 100 µm. Dewrinkling benefits are improved by providing small particles 65 (droplets), as discussed hereinbefore, especially when the surfactant is present. 55\n\nThe spray dispenser can be an aerosol dispenser. Said aerosol dispenser comprises a container which can be con› structed of any of the conventional materials employed in fabricating aerosol containers. The dispenser must be capable of withstanding internal pressure in the range of from about 20 to about 110 p.s.i.g., more preferably from about 20 to about 70 p.s.i.g. The one important requirement concerning the dispenser is that it be provided with a valve member which will permit the clear, aqueous de-wrinkle composition contained in the dispenser to be dispensed in the form of a spray of very fine, or finely divided, particles or droplets. The aerosol dispenser utilizes a pressurized sealed container from which the clear, aqueous de-wrinkle composition is dispensed through a special actuator/valve assembly under pressure. The aerosol dispenser is pressurized by incorporating therein a gaseous component generally known as a propellant. Common aerosol propellants, e.g., gaseous hydrocarbons such as isobutane, and mixed halo› genated hydrocarbons, can be used. Halogenated hydrocar› bon propellants such as chlorofluoro hydrocarbons have been alleged to contribute to environmental problems, and are not preferred. When cyclodextrin is present hydrocarbon propellants are not preferred, because they can form com› plexes with the cyclodextrin molecules thereby reducing the availability ofuncomplexed cyclodextrin molecules for odor absorption. Preferred propellants are compressed air, nitrogen, inert gases, carbon dioxide, etc. A more complete description of commercially available aerosol-spray dis› pensers appears in U.S. Pat. No. 3,436,772, Stebbins, issued Apr. 8, 1969; and U.S. Pat. No. 3,600,325, Kaufman et al., issued Aug. 17, 1971; both of said references are incorpo› rated herein by reference.\n\nPreferably the spray dispenser can be a self-pressurized non-aerosol container having a convoluted liner and an elastomeric sleeve. Said self-pressurized dispenser comprises a liner/sleeve assembly containing a thin, flexible radially expandable convoluted plastic liner of from about 0.010 to about 0.020 inch thick, inside an essentially cylin› drical elastomeric sleeve. The liner/sleeve is capable of holding a substantial quantity of wrinkle control composition product and of causing said product to be dispensed. A more complete description of self-pressurized spray dis› pensers can be found in U.S. Pat. No. 5,111,971, Winer, issued May 12, 1992, and U.S. Pat. No. 5,232,126, Winer, issued Aug. 3, 1993; both of said references are herein incorporated by reference. Another type of aerosol spray dispenser is one wherein a barrier separates the wrinkle control composition from the propellant (preferably com› pressed air or nitrogen), as disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,260,110, issued Apr. 7, 1981, and incorporated herein by reference. Such a dispenser is available from EP Spray Systems, East Hanover, N.J.\n\nMore preferably, the spray dispenser is a non-aerosol, manually activated, pump-spray dispenser. Said pump-spray dispenser comprises a container and a pump mechanism which securely screws or snaps onto the container. The container comprises a vessel for containing the aqueous wrinkle control composition to be dispensed.\n\nThe pump mechanism comprises a pump chamber of substantially fixed volume, having an opening at the inner end thereof. Within the pump chamber is located a pump stem having a piston on the end thereof disposed for reciprocal motion in the pump chamber. The pump stem has a passageway there through with a dispensing outlet at the outer end of the passageway and an axial inlet port located inwardly thereof.\n\nThe container and the pump mechanism can be con› structed of any conventional material employed in fabricat-", + "recall": 0.9886877828054299, + "true_md": "41 \n\nUS 6,503,413 B2 \n\n42 \n\nThe container and the pump mechanism can be con› structed of any conventional material employed in fabricat-\n\nThe pump mechanism comprises a pump chamber of substantially fixed volume, having an opening at the inner end thereof. Within the pump chamber is located a pump stem having a piston on the end thereof disposed for reciprocal motion in the pump chamber. The pump stem has a passageway there through with a dispensing outlet at the outer end of the passageway and an axial inlet port located inwardly thereof. \n\nThe article of manufacture herein comprises a spray dispenser. The fabric wrinkle control composition is placed into a spray dispenser in order to be distributed onto the fabric. Said spray dispenser for producing a spray of liquid droplets can be any of the manually activated means as is known in the art, e.g. trigger-type, pump-type, non-aerosol self-pressurized, and aerosol-type spray means, for treating the wrinkle control composition to small fabric surface areas and/or a small number of garments, as well as non-manually operated, powered sprayers for conveniently treating the wrinkle control composition to large fabric surface areas and/or a large number of garments. The spray dispenser herein does not normally include those that will substantially foam the clear, aqueous wrinkle control composition. It has been found that the performance is increased by providing smaller particle droplets. Desirably, the Sauter mean particle diameter is from about 10 µm to about 120 µm, more preferably, from about 20 µm to about 100 µm. Dewrinkling benefits are improved by providing small particles (droplets), as discussed hereinbefore, especially when the surfactant is present. \n\nMore preferably, the spray dispenser is a non-aerosol, manually activated, pump-spray dispenser. Said pump-spray dispenser comprises a container and a pump mechanism which securely screws or snaps onto the container. The container comprises a vessel for containing the aqueous wrinkle control composition to be dispensed. \n\nPreferably the spray dispenser can be a self-pressurized non-aerosol container having a convoluted liner and an elastomeric sleeve. Said self-pressurized dispenser com- prises a liner/sleeve assembly containing a thin, flexible radially expandable convoluted plastic liner of from about 0.010 to about 0.020 inch thick, inside an essentially cylin› drical elastomeric sleeve. The liner/sleeve is capable of holding a substantial quantity of wrinkle control composi- tion product and of causing said product to be dispensed. A more complete description of self-pressurized spray dis› pensers can be found in U.S. Pat. No. 5,111,971, Winer, issued May 12, 1992, and U.S. Pat. No. 5,232,126, Winer, issued Aug. 3, 1993; both of said references are herein incorporated by reference. Another type of aerosol spray dispenser is one wherein a barrier separates the wrinkle control composition from the propellant (preferably com› pressed air or nitrogen), as disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,260,110, issued Apr. 7, 1981, and incorporated herein by reference. Such a dispenser is available from EP Spray Systems, East Hanover, N.J. \n\nAs used herein, the phrase \"in association with\" means the set of instructions are either directly printed on the container itself or presented in a separate manner including, but not limited to, a brochure, print advertisement, electronic advertisement, and/or verbal communication, so as to com› municate the set of instructions to a consumer of the article of manufacture. The set of instructions preferably comprises the instruction to apply an effective amount of the composition, preferably by spraying, to provide the indi› cated benefit, e.g., wrinkle reduction and/or reduction of malodor impression. \n\nThe stable, aqueous compositions of the present invention can also be used in an article of manufacture comprising said composition contained in a spray dispenser. Preferably the articles of manufacture are in association with instructions for how to use the composition to treat surfaces, espeically surfaces having malodor impression, or wrinkled fabrics including, e.g., the manner and/or amount of composition to spray, and the preferred ways of stretching and/or smoothing of the fabrics, as will be described with more detailed herein below. It is important that the instructions be as simple and clear as possible, so that using pictures and/or icons is desirable. Thus a set of instructions can comprise an instruc› tion to reduce malodor impression on surfaces, especially fabrics, by following one or more of the methods described hereinbefore. A set of instructions can also comprise an instruction to reduce the appearance of wrinkles in fabrics by carrying out one or more of the methods described hereinbefore. \n\nThe spray dispenser can be an aerosol dispenser. Said aerosol dispenser comprises a container which can be con› structed of any of the conventional materials employed in fabricating aerosol containers. The dispenser must be capable of withstanding internal pressure in the range of from about 20 to about 110 p.s.i.g., more preferably from about 20 to about 70 p.s.i.g. The one important requirement concerning the dispenser is that it be provided with a valve member which will permit the clear, aqueous de-wrinkle composition contained in the dispenser to be dispensed in the form of a spray of very fine, or finely divided, particles or droplets. The aerosol dispenser utilizes a pressurized sealed container from which the clear, aqueous de-wrinkle composition is dispensed through a special actuator/valve assembly under pressure. The aerosol dispenser is pressur- ized by incorporating therein a gaseous component generally known as a propellant. Common aerosol propellants, e.g., gaseous hydrocarbons such as isobutane, and mixed halo› genated hydrocarbons, can be used. Halogenated hydrocar› bon propellants such as chlorofluoro hydrocarbons have been alleged to contribute to environmental problems, and are not preferred. When cyclodextrin is present hydrocarbon propellants are not preferred, because they can form com› plexes with the cyclodextrin molecules thereby reducing the availability ofuncomplexed cyclodextrin molecules for odor absorption. Preferred propellants are compressed air, nitrogen, inert gases, carbon dioxide, etc. A more complete description of commercially available aerosol-spray dis› pensers appears in U.S. Pat. No. 3,436,772, Stebbins, issued Apr. 8, 1969; and U.S. Pat. No. 3,600,325, Kaufman et al., issued Aug. 17, 1971; both of said references are incorpo› rated herein by reference. \n\ncompositions of the present invention are preferably con› centrated. Also, for these methods, the compositions can contain a DEQA compound, which will typically enhance the softness of the fabrics being treated. In this embodiment, the method comprises the steps of placing fabrics in a laundry wash and/or rinse solution and then adding the composition of the present invention to the wash and/or rinse solution. These methods include methods of reducing malodor impression on the fabrics in the wash and/or rinse solutions, and/or methods of reducing the appearance of wrinkles on the fabrics in the wash and/or rinse solutions. This reduction is, of course, relative to the amounts of malodor impression and/or wrinkles on the fabrics before placing them in the wash and/or rinse solutions. III. Articles of Manufacture \n\n## Spray Dispenser" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9372159253415889, + "doc_id": "817dc6f5e28ab99c98eef7663969aa8c0522a63d4efd4e6254551cb0ebf7f42b", + "edit_distance": 0.6490066225165563, + "f1_score": 0.9847908745247148, + "meteor": 0.8187026579986273, + "precision": 0.9923371647509579, + "pred_md": "US 2009/0197849 Al\n\nAug. 6, 2009\n\n[0032] In one embodiment of the invention the pH of the formulation is higher than the pH at the interface. For example, if an aqueous formulation is used, moisture from the body surface can dilute the formulation, and thus provide for a different pH at the interface, which will typically be lower than that of the formulation itself.\n\ntion or patch. One skilled in the art may readily determine the optimum amount for any particular base such that the degree of enhancement is optimized while the possibility of damage to the body surface is eliminated or at least substantially minimized.\n\n[0033] In one preferred embodiment, the body surface is exposed to a base or basic solution for a sufficient period of time so as to provide a high pH at the skin surface, thus creating channels in the skin or mucosa for the drug to go through. It is expected that drug flux is proportional to the strength of the solution and the duration of exposure. How› ever, it is desirable to balance the maximization of drug flux with the minimization of skin damage. This can be done in numerous ways. For example, the skin damage may be mini› mized by selecting a lower pH within the 8.0-13.0 range, by\n\n[0036] Exemplary inorganic bases are inorganic hydrox› ides, inorganic oxides, inorganic salts of weak acids, and combinations thereof. Preferred inorganic bases are those whose aqueous solutions have a high pH, and are acceptable as food or pharmaceutical additives. Examples of such pre› ferred inorganic bases are those listed below, along with their respective pHs. Some of the bases are identified by their hydrate forms, and it is understood that when referring to a \"base\", both the hydrated and non-hydrated forms are intended to be included.\n\n- 1 listed in the \"Chemicals in Compliance with Pharmaceutical Standards: Inactive Ingredient Guide\"\n- 2 listed in the \"Handbook of Pharmaceutical Additives\"\n- 3 listed in the FDA's food additive database\n\nexposing the skin to the formulation or system for a shorter period of time, or by including at least one irritation-mitigat› ing additive. Alternatively, the patient can be advised to change the location of application with each subsequent administration.\n\n[0034] While certain preferred amounts are set forth below, it is understood that, for all of the inorganic and organic bases described herein, the optimum amount of any such base will depend on the strength or weakness of the base and its molecular weight, and other factors such as the number of ionizable sites in the active agent being administered and whether there are any acidic species present in the formula-\n\n## Inorganic Hydroxides\n\n[0037] Inorganic hydroxides include, for example, ammo› nium hydroxide, alkali metal hydroxide and alkaline earth metal hydroxides, and mixtures thereof. Preferred inorganic hydroxides include animonium hydroxide; monovalent alkali metal hydroxides such as sodium hydroxide and potassium hydroxide; divalent alkali earth metal hydroxides such as calcium hydroxide and magnesium hydroxide; and combina› tions thereof.\n\n[0038] The amount of inorganic hydroxide included in the compositions and systems of the invention, will typically\n\n[0035] A. Inorganic Base\n\n4", + "recall": 0.9773584905660377, + "true_md": "Aug. 6, 2009 \n\n4 \n\nUS 2009/0197849 Al \n\n[0032] In one embodiment of the invention the pH of the formulation is higher than the pH at the interface. For example, if an aqueous formulation is used, moisture from the body surface can dilute the formulation, and thus provide for a different pH at the interface, which will typically be lower than that of the formulation itself. \n\n[0033] In one preferred embodiment, the body surface is exposed to a base or basic solution for a sufficient period of time so as to provide a high pH at the skin surface, thus creating channels in the skin or mucosa for the drug to go through. It is expected that drug flux is proportional to the strength of the solution and the duration of exposure. How› ever, it is desirable to balance the maximization of drug flux with the minimization of skin damage. This can be done in numerous ways. For example, the skin damage may be mini› mized by selecting a lower pH within the 8.0-13.0 range, by \n\nexposing the skin to the formulation or system for a shorter period of time, or by including at least one irritation-mitigat› ing additive. Alternatively, the patient can be advised to change the location of application with each subsequent administration. \n\n[0034] While certain preferred amounts are set forth below, it is understood that, for all of the inorganic and organic bases described herein, the optimum amount of any such base will depend on the strength or weakness of the base and its molecular weight, and other factors such as the number of ionizable sites in the active agent being administered and whether there are any acidic species present in the formula-\n\n[0037] Inorganic hydroxides include, for example, ammo› nium hydroxide, alkali metal hydroxide and alkaline earth metal hydroxides, and mixtures thereof. Preferred inorganic hydroxides include animonium hydroxide; monovalent alkali metal hydroxides such as sodium hydroxide and potassium hydroxide; divalent alkali earth metal hydroxides such as calcium hydroxide and magnesium hydroxide; and combina› tions thereof. \n\n[0038] The amount of inorganic hydroxide included in the compositions and systems of the invention, will typically \n\n$^{1 }$listed in the \"Chemicals in Compliance with Pharmaceutical Standards: Inactive Ingredient Guide\" \n\n$^{2}$listed in the \"Handbook of Pharmaceutical Additives\" \n\n$^{3}$listed in the FDA’s food additive database \n\n[0036] Exemplary inorganic bases are inorganic hydrox› ides, inorganic oxides, inorganic salts of weak acids, and combinations thereof. Preferred inorganic bases are those whose aqueous solutions have a high pH, and are acceptable as food or pharmaceutical additives. Examples of such pre› ferred inorganic bases are those listed below, along with their respective pHs. Some of the bases are identified by their hydrate forms, and it is understood that when referring to a \"base\", both the hydrated and non-hydrated forms are intended to be included. \n\n[0035] A. Inorganic Base \n\ntion or patch. One skilled in the art may readily determine the optimum amount for any particular base such that the degree of enhancement is optimized while the possibility of damage to the body surface is eliminated or at least substantially minimized. \n\n## Inorganic Hydroxides" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9461822888394767, + "doc_id": "133812ff99d78d4e9c6b08fe0f733e9c940bbe31b3a92741058f6a89c964d674", + "edit_distance": 0.21512247071352503, + "f1_score": 0.9761467889908255, + "meteor": 0.9420665168509803, + "precision": 0.9779411764705882, + "pred_md": "US 2002/0111024 Al\n\n[0213] Ammonium Persulfate with Malonamide\n\n[0214] Ammonium persulfate combined with malonamide (H2 NCOCH2CONH2 ) shows W removal rates comparable with those of Ammonium persulfate+malonic acid using the Logitech PMS polisher (33 rpm, 12 inch IC 1000 pad, 2 psi) on 3 inch wafers (10,000 A sputtered W), with 5% alumina slurry (50 parts of 10% alumina +90% water slurry), chem› istry flow rate of 90 ml/min, and slurry flow rate of 20 ml/min, as shown below.\n\n[0215] Malonamide enhances the W removal rate when combined with Ammonium persulfate in an aqueous system over the W removal rate of Ammonium persulfate alone. Removal rates increase with pH, and is particularly fast between pH 7.9 and pH 9.\n\n[0216] As with previous examples, the slurry pH may be adjusted to any suitable value in order to give the desired polishing performance. For example, the slurry pH may be adjusted to a value of between about 1 to 10, and more preferably to between about 6 to 9.\n\n[0217] Experiments with blanket W metal (10,000 A) wafer showed that a 10 wt% ammonium persulfate solution with a 5% alumina slurry removed 162 Nmm of the metal (pH 8), yet a 10 wt % ammonium persulfate mixed with a 2% K.10 4 with only a 5 wt% alumina slurry at a pH of 6.9 removed 637 Nmm. When a 2 wt % potassium iodate (K.1O 3 ) was substituted into the ammonium persulfate solu› tion, the polishing rate decreased to 246 Nmm. Polishing was done with a Logitech SM polisher with a Politex felt cloth at 33 rpm and 2 psi pressure on the 3 inch wafer.\n\n[0218] The concentration of the ammonium persulfate solution is preferably between about 2 to 20% by weight, more preferably between about 5 to 15%, and most prefer› ably about 10 wt%. This relationship seems to hold for cases where additional oxidizers are added also. The alumina slurry is preferably between about 2 to 20% solids, more preferably between about 2 to 10%, and most preferably about 5%.\n\n[0219] Ammonium Persulfate with Periodic Acid\n\n[0220] In another aspect of the invention, a similar chem› istry to that of the previous aspect uses a synergism between ammonium persulfate (Ammonium persulfate) and periodic acid (rather than potassium periodate) for polishing tung› sten. There is a synergistic effect that enhances W removal rate when Ammonium persulfate and periodic acid are used together. The tungsten process appears to operate via the tungstate (WO4-) anion.\n\n[0221] Periodic acid in water added to Ammonium per› sulfate increases the removal rate of W over Ammonium persulfate alone at a pH of 1; increasing the amount of\n\n19\n\nAug. 15,2002\n\nperiodic acid used with 10 parts Ammonium persulfate also increases the W removal rate using the Logitech PMS polisher (33 rpm, 12 inch IClO00 pad, 2 psi), 3 inch wafers (10,000 A sputtered W), 0-3 parts NH 0H 4 to adjust pH, 1 % alumina (10 parts of 10% alumina+90% water slurry), and chemistry/slurry addition rate of 100 ml/min, as shown below.\n\nCMP with Ammonium persulfate/Periodic acid Slurries\n\n[0222] Periodic acid clearly improves the polishing rate of Ammonium persulfate formulations when used on a tung› sten substrate. The Ammonium persulfate concentration is preferably between about 2 to 20%, more preferably between about 5 to 15%, and most preferably about 10%. The concentration of the periodic acid solution is preferably between about 0 to 10% by weight, more preferably between about 0.2 to 5%, and most preferably about 2 wt %.\n\n[0223] The periodic acid can also be the primary oxidizer. However, a 10% periodic acid and 2% Ammonium persul› fate formulation at the high pH of 8.2, added at 20 ml per minute with 5% LOGITECH abrasive added at 20%, using an POLITEX pad at 2 psi and 33 rpm on a 3\" IWS substrate the disappointing polishing rate of 56 Angstroms per minute. A similar test with 10% Ammonium persulfate and 3% periodic acid at pH 1.3 gave the surprisingly high etch rate of 174 Angstroms per minute.\n\n[0224] Ammonium Persulfate with Lithium Periodate\n\n[0225] Ammonium persulfate can also be admixed with lithium periodate. Lithium periodate in water added to Ammonium persulfate increases the removal rate of W over Ammonium persulfate alone. In tests using the Logitech PMS polisher (33 rpm, 12 inch IClO00 pad, 2 psi), 3 inch wafers (10,000 A sputtered W), 5% MOYCO alumina (10 parts of 10% alumina+90% water slurry), and chemistry/ slurry addition rate of 100 ml/min, the lithium periodate provided modest increases in the etching rate as shown below.\n\nCMP with Ammonium persulfate/Lithium Periodate Slurries", + "recall": 0.9743589743589743, + "true_md": "19 \n\nUS 2002/0111024 Al \n\nAug. 15,2002 \n\n[0213] Ammonium Persulfate with Malonamide \n\n[0214] Ammonium persulfate combined with malonamide (H$_{2}$NCOCH$_{2}$ CONH$_{2}$ ) shows W removal rates comparable with those of Ammonium persulfate+malonic acid using the Logitech PMS polisher (33 rpm, 12 inch IC 1000 pad, 2 psi) on 3 inch wafers (10,000 A sputtered W), with 5% alumina slurry (50 parts of 10% alumina +90% water slurry), chem› istry flow rate of 90 ml/min, and slurry flow rate of 20 ml/min, as shown below. \n\n[0215] Malonamide enhances the W removal rate when combined with Ammonium persulfate in an aqueous system over the W removal rate of Ammonium persulfate alone. Removal rates increase with pH, and is particularly fast between pH 7.9 and pH 9. \n\n[0216] As with previous examples, the slurry pH may be adjusted to any suitable value in order to give the desired polishing performance. For example, the slurry pH may be adjusted to a value of between about 1 to 10, and more preferably to between about 6 to 9. \n\n[0217] Experiments with blanket W metal (10,000 A) wafer showed that a 10 wt% ammonium persulfate solution with a 5% alumina slurry removed 162 Nmm of the metal (pH 8), yet a 10 wt % ammonium persulfate mixed with a 2% K.10$_{4 }$ with only a 5 wt% alumina slurry at a pH of 6.9 removed 637 Nmm. When a 2 wt % potassium iodate (K.1O$_{3}$ ) was substituted into the ammonium persulfate solu› tion, the polishing rate decreased to 246 Nmm. Polishing was done with a Logitech SM polisher with a Politex felt cloth at 33 rpm and 2 psi pressure on the 3 inch wafer. \n\n[0218] The concentration of the ammonium persulfate solution is preferably between about 2 to 20% by weight, more preferably between about 5 to 15%, and most prefer› ably about 10 wt%. This relationship seems to hold for cases where additional oxidizers are added also. The alumina slurry is preferably between about 2 to 20% solids, more preferably between about 2 to 10%, and most preferably about 5%. \n\n[0219] Ammonium Persulfate with Periodic Acid \n\n[0220] In another aspect of the invention, a similar chem› istry to that of the previous aspect uses a synergism between ammonium persulfate (Ammonium persulfate) and periodic acid (rather than potassium periodate) for polishing tung› sten. There is a synergistic effect that enhances W removal rate when Ammonium persulfate and periodic acid are used together. The tungsten process appears to operate via the tungstate (WO4-) anion. \n\n[0221] Periodic acid in water added to Ammonium per› sulfate increases the removal rate of W over Ammonium persulfate alone at a pH of 1; increasing the amount of \n\n[0222] Periodic acid clearly improves the polishing rate of Ammonium persulfate formulations when used on a tung› sten substrate. The Ammonium persulfate concentration is preferably between about 2 to 20%, more preferably between about 5 to 15%, and most preferably about 10%. The concentration of the periodic acid solution is preferably between about 0 to 10% by weight, more preferably between about 0.2 to 5%, and most preferably about 2 wt %. \n\n[0223] The periodic acid can also be the primary oxidizer. However, a 10% periodic acid and 2% Ammonium persul› fate formulation at the high pH of 8.2, added at 20 ml per minute with 5% LOGITECH abrasive added at 20%, using an POLITEX pad at 2 psi and 33 rpm on a 3\" IWS substrate the disappointing polishing rate of 56 Angstroms per minute. A similar test with 10% Ammonium persulfate and 3% periodic acid at pH 1.3 gave the surprisingly high etch rate of 174 Angstroms per minute. \n\n[0224] Ammonium Persulfate with Lithium Periodate \n\n[0225] Ammonium persulfate can also be admixed with lithium periodate. Lithium periodate in water added to Ammonium persulfate increases the removal rate of W over Ammonium persulfate alone. In tests using the Logitech PMS polisher (33 rpm, 12 inch IClO00 pad, 2 psi), 3 inch wafers (10,000 A sputtered W), 5% MOYCO alumina (10 parts of 10% alumina+90% water slurry), and chemistry/ slurry addition rate of 100 ml/min, the lithium periodate provided modest increases in the etching rate as shown below. \n\nperiodic acid used with 10 parts Ammonium persulfate also increases the W removal rate using the Logitech PMS polisher (33 rpm, 12 inch IClO00 pad, 2 psi), 3 inch wafers (10,000 A sputtered W), 0-3 parts NH$_{4}$0H to adjust pH, 1 % alumina (10 parts of 10% alumina+90% water slurry), and chemistry/slurry addition rate of 100 ml/min, as shown below." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6586568846043952, + "doc_id": "2e6b0ee0d853ca449fe072acc4ce01cfa4daa32a9985134586907830388137be", + "edit_distance": 0.43820224719101125, + "f1_score": 0.7111111111111111, + "meteor": 0.6016353128379636, + "precision": 0.8421052631578947, + "pred_md": "5,763,671\n\n15\n\n2-t-butyl-4-methoxypbenyl(3,3'-di-t-butyl-5,5'-dimethoxy-l,1'-bipbenyl2,2'-<liyl)phosphite having the fonnula:\n\nmethyl(3,3'-di-t-butyl-5,5'-dimethoxy-1,1'-biphenyl-2,2'-diyl)pbosphite having the fommla:\n\n6,6'-[[4,4'-bis(l,1-dimethylethyl)-[l,1'-binaphthyl)-2,2'-diyl]bis(oxy)]bis› dibeozo[d,f][l,3,2]-dioxaphosphepin havins the fonnula:\n\n16", + "recall": 0.6153846153846154, + "true_md": "15 \n\n5,763,671 \n\n16 \n\n2-t-butyl-4-methoxypbenyl(3,3’-di-t-butyl-5,5’-dimethoxy-l,1’-bipbenyl- 2,2’-<liyl)phosphite having the fonnula: \n\nmethyl(3,3’-di-t-butyl-5,5’-dimethoxy-1,1’-biphenyl-2,2’-diyl)pbosphite having the fommla: \n\n6,6’-[[4,4’-bis(l,1-dimethylethyl)-[l,1’-binaphthyl)-2,2’-diyl]bis(oxy)]bis› dibeozo[d,f][l,3,2]-dioxaphosphepin havins the fonnula: \n\nLigandC \n\nLi,gandB \n\nLigand A" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "d34b6243d65d58771c600b3ea444c036787d442b33aff3c8ff881c7d7caaf27e", + "edit_distance": 0.8421052631578947, + "f1_score": 0.4, + "meteor": 0.44291338582677164, + "precision": 0.3157894736842105, + "pred_md": "95\n\n96\n\n-continued\n\nUS 9,164,380 B2\n\n5\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n60\n\n65", + "recall": 0.5454545454545454, + "true_md": "US 9,164,380 B2 \n\n95 \n\n96 \n\n-continued \n\n-continued \n\n[Chemical Formula 42]" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9041873643663916, + "doc_id": "a0487bc6167e9bf9f8e539b5f7cdf44dbf6c9de5db399d2c5327b551976208d4", + "edit_distance": 0.09302325581395349, + "f1_score": 0.9126984126984126, + "meteor": 0.9384668801357973, + "precision": 0.9126984126984127, + "pred_md": "135\n\n-continued\n\nUS 9,164,380 B2\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\n50\n\n60\n\n65\n\nCF3\n\n136\n\n-continued\n\nCation In formula (c3), z+ is the same as defined above for z+ in formula (cl).\n\nAs the compound (C3), a single compound may be used alone, or a combination of two or more compounds may be used.\n\nCommercially available compounds may be used for the compounds (Cl) to (C3), or the compounds may be synthe› sized using known production methods.\n\nFor example, although there are no particular limitations on the method used for producing the compound ( C 1 ), in the case where R 1 c is the group (I) (namely, the case of the compound (Cll)), the compound (Cll) can be obtained by subjecting an acid (the compound (Gl)) that yields the anion of the compound (Cl l) and a salt having the desired cation z+ to a salt exchange reaction.\n\nAlthough there are no particular limitations on the method used for producing the compound (C3), in the case where R 3 c in the aforementioned formula (c3) is a group having an oxygen atom at the terminal bonded to Y 3 , the method described below can be used.\n\nNamely, a compound (i-1) represented by general formula (i-1) shown below is reacted with a compound (i-2) represented by general formula (i-2) shown below to obtain a compound (i-3) represented by general formula (i-3) shown below, and this compound (i-3) is then reacted with a salt having the desired cation z+ (a compound (i-4) represented by general formula (i-4) shown below), thereby producing the target compound.", + "recall": 0.9126984126984127, + "true_md": "US 9,164,380 B2 \n\n135 \n\n136 \n\n-continued \n\n-continued \n\n[Chemical Formula 65] \n\nCation \n\nCation In formula (c3), z+ is the same as defined above for z+ in formula (cl). \n\nAs the compound (C3), a single compound may be used alone, or a combination of two or more compounds may be used. \n\nCommercially available compounds may be used for the compounds (Cl) to (C3), or the compounds may be synthe› sized using known production methods. \n\nFor example, although there are no particular limitations on the method used for producing the compound ( C 1 ), in the case where R 1$_{c }$ is the group (I) (namely, the case of the compound (Cll)), the compound (Cll) can be obtained by subjecting an acid (the compound (Gl)) that yields the anion of the compound (Cl l) and a salt having the desired cation z+ to a salt exchange reaction. \n\nAlthough there are no particular limitations on the method used for producing the compound (C3), in the case where R 3$_{c }$ in the aforementioned formula (c3) is a group having an oxygen atom at the terminal bonded to Y 3 , the method described below can be used. \n\nNamely, a compound (i-1) represented by general formula (i-1) shown below is reacted with a compound (i-2) repre- sented by general formula (i-2) shown below to obtain a compound (i-3) represented by general formula (i-3) shown below, and this compound (i-3) is then reacted with a salt having the desired cation z+ (a compound (i-4) represented by general formula (i-4) shown below), thereby producing the target compound. \n\n[Chemical Formula 64]" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9293152103287795, + "doc_id": "63232efceec846ed9dd29a373c895c8fcba7c98a408e6c4e64772519a2418702", + "edit_distance": 0.837126600284495, + "f1_score": 0.9854824935952177, + "meteor": 0.6499725410894266, + "precision": 0.9914089347079038, + "pred_md": "US 2019/0287691 Al\n\n!ates into efficacious in vivo europium decorporation, Dalton Trans. 40 (2011) 8340. doi: 10.1039/cldt10840a. [0488] M. Sturzbecher-Hoehne, P. Yang, A. D' Alo, R. J. Abergel, Intramolecular sensitization of americium lumi› nescence in solution: shining light on short-lived forbid› den 5f transitions, Dalton Trans. (2016). doi: 10. 1039/ C DT00328A. 6\n\n[0489] M. Sturzbecher-Hoehne, B. Kullgren, E. E. Jarvis, D. D. An, R. J. Abergel, Highly Luminescent and Stable Hydroxypyridinonate Complexes: A Step Towards New Curium Decontamination Strategies, Chem.-Eur. J. 20 (2014) 9962-9968. doi: 10.1002/chem.201402103.\n\n[0490] M. Sturzbecher-Hoehne, T. A. Choi, R. J. Abergel, Hydroxypyridinonate Complex Stability of Group (IV) Metals and Tetravalent f-Block Elements: The Key to the Next Generation of Chelating Agents for Radiopharma› ceuticals, Inorg. Chem. 54 (2015) 3462-3468. doi: 10.1021/acs.inorgchem.5b00033.\n\n[0491] G. J.-P. Deblonde, M. Sturzbecher-Hoehne, R. J. Abergel, Solution Thermodynamic Stability of Com› plexes Formed with the Octadentate Hydroxypyridinon› ate Ligand 3,4,3-LI(l,2-HOPO): A Critical Feature for Efficient Chelation of Lanthanide(IV) and Actinide(IV) Ions, Inorg. Chem. 52 (2013) 8805-8811. doi: 10.1021/ ic4010246.\n\n[0492] G. J.-P. Deblonde, M. Sturzbecher-Hoehne, P. B. Rupert, D. D. An, M.-C. Illy, C. Y. Ralston, J. Brabec, W. A. de Jong, R. K. Strong, R. J. Abergel, Chelation and stabilization of berkelium in oxidation state+IV, Nat. Chem. (2017). doi: 10.1038/nchem.2759.\n\n[0493] A. E. Martell, R. M. Smith, R. J. Motekaitis, NIST Standard Reference Database 46, (n.d.).\n\n[0494] D. Lundberg, I. Persson, The size of actinoid(III) ions-structural analysis vs. common misinterpretations, Coard. Chem. Rev. 318 (2016) 131-134. doi: 10.1016/j. ccr.2016.04.003.\n\n[0495] D. Lundberg, I. Persson, L. Eriksson, P. D' Angelo, S. De Panfilis, Structural Study of the N,N'-Dimethylpro› pyleneurea Solvated Lanthanoid(III) Ions in Solution and Solid State with an Analysis of the Ionic Radii of Lan› thanoid(III) Ions, Inorg. Chem. 49 (2010) 4420-4432. doi: 10.1021/ic100034q.\n\n[0496] C. Wai, D. Fisher, others, Carboxylate-derived cal› ixarenes with high selectivity for actinium-225, Chem. Commun. (1998) 377-378.\n\n[0497] V. Radchenko, J. W. Engle, J. J. Wilson, J. R. Maassen, F. M. Nortier, W. A. Taylor, E. R. Birnbaum, L. A. Hudston, K. D. John, M. E. Fassbender, Application of ion exchange and extraction chromatography to the sepa› ration of actinium from proton-irradiated thorium metal for analytical purposes, J. Chromatogr. A. 1380 (2015) 55-63. doi: 10.1016/j.chroma.2014.12.045.\n\n[0498] V. Ostapenko, A. Vasiliev, E. Lapshina, S. Ermo› laev, R. Aliev, Y. Totskiy, B. Zhuikov, S. Kalmykov, Extraction chromatographic behavior of actinium and REE on DGA, Ln and TRU resins in nitric acid solutions, J. Radioanal. Nucl. Chem. 306 (2015) 707-711. doi:10. 1007 /sl 0967-015-4331-y.\n\n[0499] L. R. Morss, N. M. Edelstein, J. Fuger, The Chem› istry of the Actinide and Transactinide Elements, 4th ed., Springer, 2010.\n\n[0500] K. L. Nash, The Chemistry of TALSPEAK: A Review of the Science, Solvent Extr. Ion Exch. 33 (2015) 1-55. doi: 10.1080/07366299.2014.985912.\n\n58\n\nSep. 19,2019\n\n[0501] K. V. Lohithakshan, P. Patil, S. K. Aggarwal, Solvent extraction studies of plutonium(IV) and americi› um(III) in room temperature ionic liquid (RTIL) by di-2ethyl hexyl phosphoric acid (HDEHP) as extractant, J. Radioanal. Nucl. Chem. 301 (2014) 153-157. doi:10. 1007/s 10967-014-3119-9.\n\n[0502] J. T. Harvey, Production of Actinium-225 via High Energy Proton Induced Spallation ofThorium-232. Final Technical Report DE-SC0003602, NorthStar Medical Radioisotopes, LLC, n.d. https: I/world wide web.osti. gov/ scitech/serv lets/purl/ 103 2445/.\n\n[0503] NSAC Isotopes Subcommittee. Meeting isotope needs and capturing opportunities for the future: the 2015 long range plan for the DOE-NP isotope program. 1-160 (US DOE, 2015).\n\n[0504] Hagemann, U. B. et al. In Vitro and In Vivo Efficacy of a Novel CD33-Targeted Thorium-227 Conju› gate for the Treatment of Acute Myeloid Leukemia. Mal. Cancer Therapeutics 15, 2422-2431 (2016).\n\n[0505] Witze, A. Nuclear power: Desperately seeking plu› tonium. Nature News 515, 484-486 (2014).\n\n[0506] Veliscek-Carolan, J. Separation of actinides from spent nuclear fuel: A review. J. Hazard. Mater. 318, 266-281 (2016).\n\n[0507] Roberto, J. B. et al. Actinide targets for the syn› thesis of super-heavy elements. Nucl. Phys. A 944, 99-116 (2015).\n\n[0508] Oganessian, Y. T. et al. Experimental studies of the 249 Bk+48 Ca reaction including decay properties and excitation function for isotopes of element 117, and discovery of the new isotope 277 Mt. Phys. Rev. C 87, (2013).\n\n[0509] Beltrami, D. et al. Recovery of Uranium from Wet Phosphoric Acid by Solvent Extraction Processes. Chem. Rev. 114, 12002-12023 (2014).\n\n[0510] Leydier, A. et al. Recovery of uranium (VI) from concentrated phosphoric acid using bifunctional reagents. Hydrometallurgy 171, 262-266 (2017).\n\n[0511] Zhu, Z.-X., Sasaki, Y., Suzuki, H., Suzuki, S. & Kimura, T. Cumulative study on solvent extraction of elements by N,N,N',N'-tetraoctyl-3-oxapentanediamide (TODGA) from nitric acid into n-dodecane. Anal. Chim. Acta 527, 163-168 (2004).\n\n[0512] Horwitz, E. P. & Bloomquist, C. A. A. Chemical separations for super-heavy element searches in irradiated uranium targets. J. Inorg. Nucl. Chem. 37, 425-434 (1975).\n\n[0513] Cary, S. K. et al. Advancing Understanding of the +4 Metal Extractant Thenoyltrifluoroacetonate (TTA-); Synthesis and Structure ofMwTTA 4 (Miv=zr, Hf, Ce, Th, U, Np, Pu) and Mm (TTA) 4 (MIII=Ce, Nd, Sm, Yb). Inorg. Chem. 57, 3782-3797 (2018).\n\n[0514] Abergel, R. J. et al. Biomimetic actinide chelators: an update on the preclinical development of the orally active hydroxypyridonate decorporation agents 3,4,3-LI (1,2-HOPO) and 5-LIO(Me-3,2-HOPO). Health Phys. 99, 401-407 (2010).\n\n[0515] Gorden, A. E. V., Xu, J., Raymond, K. N. & Durbin, P. Rational Design of Sequestering Agents for Plutonium and Other Actinides. Chem. Rev. 103, 42074282 (2003).\n\n[0516] Deri, M. A. et al. p-SCN-Bn-HOPO: A Superior Bifunctional Chelator for 89Zr ImmunoPET. Bioconj. Chem. 26, 2579-2591 (2015).", + "recall": 0.9796264855687606, + "true_md": "US 2019/0287691 Al \n\n58 \n\nSep. 19,2019 \n\n!ates into efficacious in vivo europium decorporation, Dalton Trans. 40 (2011) 8340. doi: 10.1039/cldt10840a. \n\n- [0500] K. L. Nash, The Chemistry of TALSPEAK: A Review of the Science, Solvent Extr. Ion Exch. 33 (2015) 1-55. doi: 10.1080/07366299.2014.985912. \n\n- [0516] Deri, M. A. et al. p-SCN-Bn-HOPO: A Superior Bifunctional Chelator for 89Zr ImmunoPET. Bioconj. Chem. 26, 2579-2591 (2015). \n\n- [0515] Gorden, A. E. V., Xu, J., Raymond, K. N. & Durbin, P. Rational Design of Sequestering Agents for Plutonium and Other Actinides. Chem. Rev. 103, 4207- 4282 (2003). \n\n- [0514] Abergel, R. J. et al. Biomimetic actinide chelators: an update on the preclinical development of the orally active hydroxypyridonate decorporation agents 3,4,3-LI (1,2-HOPO) and 5-LIO(Me-3,2-HOPO). Health Phys. 99, 401-407 (2010). \n\n- [0499] L. R. Morss, N. M. Edelstein, J. Fuger, The Chem› istry of the Actinide and Transactinide Elements, 4th ed., Springer, 2010. \n\n- [0498] V. Ostapenko, A. Vasiliev, E. Lapshina, S. Ermo› laev, R. Aliev, Y. Totskiy, B. Zhuikov, S. Kalmykov, Extraction chromatographic behavior of actinium and REE on DGA, Ln and TRU resins in nitric acid solutions, J. Radioanal. Nucl. Chem. 306 (2015) 707-711. doi:10. 1007 /sl 0967-015-4331-y. \n\n- [0513] Cary, S. K. et al. Advancing Understanding of the +4 Metal Extractant Thenoyltrifluoroacetonate (TTA-); Synthesis and Structure ofMwTTA$_{4 }$ (Miv=zr, Hf, Ce, Th, U, Np, Pu) and Mm (TTA)$_{4 }$ (MIII=Ce, Nd, Sm, Yb). Inorg. Chem. 57, 3782-3797 (2018). \n\n- [0512] Horwitz, E. P. & Bloomquist, C. A. A. Chemical separations for super-heavy element searches in irradiated uranium targets. J. Inorg. Nucl. Chem. 37, 425-434 (1975). \n\n- [0511] Zhu, Z.-X., Sasaki, Y., Suzuki, H., Suzuki, S. & Kimura, T. Cumulative study on solvent extraction of elements by N,N,N’,N’-tetraoctyl-3-oxapentanediamide (TODGA) from nitric acid into n-dodecane. Anal. Chim. Acta 527, 163-168 (2004). \n\n- [0497] V. Radchenko, J. W. Engle, J. J. Wilson, J. R. Maassen, F. M. Nortier, W. A. Taylor, E. R. Birnbaum, L. A. Hudston, K. D. John, M. E. Fassbender, Application of ion exchange and extraction chromatography to the sepa› ration of actinium from proton-irradiated thorium metal for analytical purposes, J. Chromatogr. A. 1380 (2015) 55-63. doi: 10.1016/j.chroma.2014.12.045. \n\n- [0496] C. Wai, D. Fisher, others, Carboxylate-derived cal› ixarenes with high selectivity for actinium-225, Chem. Commun. (1998) 377-378. \n\n- [0495] D. Lundberg, I. Persson, L. Eriksson, P. D’ Angelo, S. De Panfilis, Structural Study of the N,N’-Dimethylpro› pyleneurea Solvated Lanthanoid(III) Ions in Solution and Solid State with an Analysis of the Ionic Radii of Lan› thanoid(III) Ions, Inorg. Chem. 49 (2010) 4420-4432. doi: 10.1021/ic100034q. \n\n- [0510] Leydier, A. et al. Recovery of uranium (VI) from concentrated phosphoric acid using bifunctional reagents. Hydrometallurgy 171, 262-266 (2017). \n\n- [0509] Beltrami, D. et al. Recovery of Uranium from Wet Phosphoric Acid by Solvent Extraction Processes. Chem. Rev. 114, 12002-12023 (2014). \n\n- [0494] D. Lundberg, I. Persson, The size of actinoid(III) ions-structural analysis vs. common misinterpretations, Coard. Chem. Rev. 318 (2016) 131-134. doi: 10.1016/j. ccr.2016.04.003. \n\n- [0493] A. E. Martell, R. M. Smith, R. J. Motekaitis, NIST Standard Reference Database 46, (n.d.). \n\n- [0508] Oganessian, Y. T. et al. Experimental studies of the 249 Bk+48 Ca reaction including decay properties and excitation function for isotopes of element 117, and discovery of the new isotope 277 Mt. Phys. Rev. C 87, (2013). \n\n- [0507] Roberto, J. B. et al. Actinide targets for the syn› thesis of super-heavy elements. Nucl. Phys. A 944, 99-116 (2015). \n\n- [0492] G. J.-P. Deblonde, M. Sturzbecher-Hoehne, P. B. Rupert, D. D. An, M.-C. Illy, C. Y. Ralston, J. Brabec, W. A. de Jong, R. K. Strong, R. J. Abergel, Chelation and stabilization of berkelium in oxidation state+IV, Nat. Chem. (2017). doi: 10.1038/nchem.2759. \n\n- [0491] G. J.-P. Deblonde, M. Sturzbecher-Hoehne, R. J. Abergel, Solution Thermodynamic Stability of Com› plexes Formed with the Octadentate Hydroxypyridinon› ate Ligand 3,4,3-LI(l,2-HOPO): A Critical Feature for Efficient Chelation of Lanthanide(IV) and Actinide(IV) Ions, Inorg. Chem. 52 (2013) 8805-8811. doi: 10.1021/ ic4010246. \n\n- [0506] Veliscek-Carolan, J. Separation of actinides from spent nuclear fuel: A review. J. Hazard. Mater. 318, 266-281 (2016). \n\n- [0505] Witze, A. Nuclear power: Desperately seeking plu› tonium. Nature News 515, 484-486 (2014). \n\n- [0504] Hagemann, U. B. et al. In Vitro and In Vivo Efficacy of a Novel CD33-Targeted Thorium-227 Conju› gate for the Treatment of Acute Myeloid Leukemia. Mal. Cancer Therapeutics 15, 2422-2431 (2016). \n\n- [0503] NSAC Isotopes Subcommittee. Meeting isotope needs and capturing opportunities for the future: the 2015 long range plan for the DOE-NP isotope program. 1-160 (US DOE, 2015). \n\n- [0490] M. Sturzbecher-Hoehne, T. A. Choi, R. J. Abergel, Hydroxypyridinonate Complex Stability of Group (IV) Metals and Tetravalent f-Block Elements: The Key to the Next Generation of Chelating Agents for Radiopharma› ceuticals, Inorg. Chem. 54 (2015) 3462-3468. doi: 10.1021/acs.inorgchem.5b00033. \n\n- [0489] M. Sturzbecher-Hoehne, B. Kullgren, E. E. Jarvis, D. D. An, R. J. Abergel, Highly Luminescent and Stable Hydroxypyridinonate Complexes: A Step Towards New Curium Decontamination Strategies, Chem.-Eur. J. 20 (2014) 9962-9968. doi: 10.1002/chem.201402103. \n\n- [0488] M. Sturzbecher-Hoehne, P. Yang, A. D’ Alo, R. J. Abergel, Intramolecular sensitization of americium lumi› nescence in solution: shining light on short-lived forbid› den 5f transitions, Dalton Trans. (2016). doi: 10. 1039/ C$_{6}$DT00328A. \n\n- [0502] J. T. Harvey, Production of Actinium-225 via High Energy Proton Induced Spallation ofThorium-232. Final Technical Report DE-SC0003602, NorthStar Medical Radioisotopes, LLC, n.d. https: I/world wide web.osti. gov/ scitech/serv lets/purl/ 103 2445/. \n\n- [0501] K. V. Lohithakshan, P. Patil, S. K. Aggarwal, Solvent extraction studies of plutonium(IV) and americi› um(III) in room temperature ionic liquid (RTIL) by di-2- ethyl hexyl phosphoric acid (HDEHP) as extractant, J. Radioanal. Nucl. Chem. 301 (2014) 153-157. doi:10. 1007/s 10967-014-3119-9." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7179749533248937, + "doc_id": "580961992b8fb467c6df38bda250d825f0b447c1a035af10ca7eb8122a327912", + "edit_distance": 0.18181818181818182, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.977589908749329, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Patent Application Publication\n\nSep. 19, 2019 Sheet 11 of 106 US 2019/0287691 Al\n\nd ...... u..\n\nd ...... u..", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Patent Application Publication \n\nSep. 19, 2019 Sheet 11 of 106 \n\nUS 2019/0287691 Al \n\nd ...... u.." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6375252753341507, + "doc_id": "805f92bc5771fcc7b4dbdf8b44f4d9ba674aa2d777407270b02299526b5d1853", + "edit_distance": 0.5497076023391813, + "f1_score": 0.9803921568627451, + "meteor": 0.6829589173006683, + "precision": 0.9803921568627451, + "pred_md": "US 2009/0197849 Al\n\nTABLE 28\n\n[0324] Since estradiol is not expected to react with K 3 PO4 , the K 3 PO4 concentration listed in Table 28 equals the excess K3 PO 4 concentration, calculated as described in Example 7.\n\n[0325] The pH of each patch was measured as described in the Methods section. The pH of the estradiol patch increased from 6.4 to 10.83 when the K 3 PO4 concentration in the dried patch was increased from 0% to 16.9%. However, the pH of the estradiol patch decreased from 10.83 to 9.87 when the K3 PO 4 concentration in the dried patch was further increased from 16.9% to 24.5%.\n\nTABLE 29\n\n[0326] The cumulative amount of estradiol across human cadaver skin was calculated using the measured estradiol concentrations in the receiver solutions.\n\nTABLE 30\n\n[0327] The cumulative amount of estradiol that permeated across the human cadaver skin at 24 hours for Est-5 (5.6 µg/cm 2 ) with a calculated excess K 3 PO4 concentration of 6.3% was about nine times higher than that from the formu› lation without K 3 PO (Est-PK!, 0 .6 µg/ cm 4 2 ). This result indi› cated that the permeation of estradiol is enhanced by K 3 PO4 . The cumulative amount of estradiol across human cadaver skin at 24 hours increased from 5.6 to 10.2 when the excess K3 PO 4 concentration in the dried patch was increased from 6.3% to 16.9%. When the excess K 3 PO4 concentration in the dried patch was further increased from 16.9% to 24.5%, the cumulative amount of estradiol across human cadaver skin at 24 hours decreased from 10.2 to 5 .3 µg/cm 2 . This decrease in flux may be because the high concentration ofK PO 3 4 made the adhesive matrix more hydrophobic and the amount of K3 PO 4 that could be dissolved by the small amount of water on the top of the skin was reduced.\n\n[0328] The formulations ofEst-5 and Est-7 provided up to 9-fold more estradiol flux than in the absence of K 3 PO4\n\n28\n\nAug. 6, 2009\n\n(Est-4). The formulation of Est-6 provided up to 1 7-fold more flux than in the absence ofK 3 PO4 .\n\n## Example 10\n\n[0329] An in vitro skin permeation study was conducted using four estradiol transdermal systems, designated Est-1, Est-12, Est-13, and Est-14, the compositions of which are set forth in Table 31. The matrix patches were prepared and evaluated using the same procedures as set forth in Example 1. The theoretical percent weight for each ingredient after drying ( calculated assuming all the volatile ingredients were completely removed during drying) is listed in Table 32.\n\nTABLE31\n\nTABLE32\n\n[0330] Since estradiol is not expected to react with Na2CO3 , the Na 2 CO3 concentration listed in Table 32 equals the excess Na CO 2 3 concentration, calculated as described in Example 6.\n\n[0331] The pH of each patch was measured as described in the Methods section. The pH of the estradiol patch measured using the procedures listed above increased from 7 .48 to 10.51 when the Na CO 2 3 concentration in the dried patch was increased from 0% to 16.9%. However, when the Na 2 CO3 concentration in the dried patch was further increased from 16.9% to 23.3%, the pH of the estradiol patch remained about the same.\n\nTABLE33\n\n[0332] The cumulative amount of estradiol across human cadaver skin was calculated using the measured estradiol concentrations in the receiver solutions.", + "recall": 0.9803921568627451, + "true_md": "Aug. 6, 2009 \n\n28 \n\nUS 2009/0197849 Al \n\nTABLE 28 \n\nTABLE31 \n\nTABLE 29 \n\nTABLE 30 \n\nTABLE32 \n\nTABLE33 \n\n(Est-4). The formulation of Est-6 provided up to 1 7-fold more flux than in the absence ofK$_{3}$ PO$_{4}$ . \n\n[0329] An in vitro skin permeation study was conducted using four estradiol transdermal systems, designated Est-1, Est-12, Est-13, and Est-14, the compositions of which are set forth in Table 31. The matrix patches were prepared and evaluated using the same procedures as set forth in Example 1. The theoretical percent weight for each ingredient after drying ( calculated assuming all the volatile ingredients were completely removed during drying) is listed in Table 32. \n\n[0324] Since estradiol is not expected to react with K$_{3}$ PO$_{4}$ , the K$_{3}$ PO$_{4 }$ concentration listed in Table 28 equals the excess K$_{3}$ PO$_{4 }$ concentration, calculated as described in Example 7. \n\n[0325] The pH of each patch was measured as described in the Methods section. The pH of the estradiol patch increased from 6.4 to 10.83 when the K$_{3}$ PO$_{4 }$ concentration in the dried patch was increased from 0% to 16.9%. However, the pH of the estradiol patch decreased from 10.83 to 9.87 when the K$_{3}$ PO$_{4 }$ concentration in the dried patch was further increased from 16.9% to 24.5%. \n\n[0327] The cumulative amount of estradiol that permeated across the human cadaver skin at 24 hours for Est-5 (5.6 µg/cm 2 ) with a calculated excess K $_{3}$PO$_{4 }$ concentration of 6.3% was about nine times higher than that from the formu› lation without K$_{3}$ PO $_{4 }$(Est-PK!, 0 .6 µg/ cm 2 ). This result indi› cated that the permeation of estradiol is enhanced by K$_{3}$ PO$_{4}$ . The cumulative amount of estradiol across human cadaver skin at 24 hours increased from 5.6 to 10.2 when the excess K$_{3}$ PO$_{4 }$ concentration in the dried patch was increased from 6.3% to 16.9%. When the excess K$_{3}$ PO$_{4 }$ concentration in the dried patch was further increased from 16.9% to 24.5%, the cumulative amount of estradiol across human cadaver skin at 24 hours decreased from 10.2 to 5 .3 µg/cm 2 . This decrease in flux may be because the high concentration ofK$_{3}$ PO$_{4 }$ made the adhesive matrix more hydrophobic and the amount of K$_{3}$ PO$_{4 }$ that could be dissolved by the small amount of water on the top of the skin was reduced. \n\n[0328] The formulations ofEst-5 and Est-7 provided up to 9-fold more estradiol flux than in the absence of K$_{3}$ PO$_{4 }$\n\n[0332] The cumulative amount of estradiol across human cadaver skin was calculated using the measured estradiol concentrations in the receiver solutions. \n\n[0330] Since estradiol is not expected to react with Na$_{2}$CO$_{3}$ , the Na$_{2}$CO$_{3 }$ concentration listed in Table 32 equals the excess Na$_{2}$CO$_{3 }$ concentration, calculated as described in Example 6. \n\n[0331] The pH of each patch was measured as described in the Methods section. The pH of the estradiol patch measured using the procedures listed above increased from 7 .48 to 10.51 when the Na$_{2}$CO$_{3 }$ concentration in the dried patch was increased from 0% to 16.9%. However, when the Na$_{2}$CO$_{3 }$ concentration in the dried patch was further increased from 16.9% to 23.3%, the pH of the estradiol patch remained about the same. \n\n[0326] The cumulative amount of estradiol across human cadaver skin was calculated using the measured estradiol concentrations in the receiver solutions. \n\n## Example 10" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.809420510839942, + "doc_id": "b2f57341933f327c1d14aff01ea0793f84819293bb5470510c619653a560ea61", + "edit_distance": 0.6359516616314199, + "f1_score": 0.9613899613899614, + "meteor": 0.8933746527336925, + "precision": 0.9576923076923077, + "pred_md": "## c12) United States Patent Dahlen et al.\n\n## (54) CROSSLINKABLE POLYOLEFIN COMPOSITION COMPRISING SILANE GROUPS FORMING AN ACID OR A BASE UPON HYDROLYSATION\n\n- (75) Inventors:\n- (73) Assignee:\n\nBorealis AG, Vienna (AT)\n\n- ( *) Notice:\n- (21) Appl. No.:\n\n13/265,555\n\n- (22) PCT Filed:\n\nMay 14, 2010\n\n- (86) PCT No.:\n\nPCT /EP2010/002972\n\n- § 371 (c)(l),\n- (2), ( 4) Date:\n\nNov. 30, 2011\n\n- (87) PCT Pub. No.:\n\nWO2010/130458\n\n- PCT Pub. Date:\n\nNov.18, 2010\n\nSubject to any disclaimer, the term ofthis patent is extended or adjusted under 35 U.S.C. 154(b) by O days.\n\nKristian Dahlen, Stora Hoga (SE); Roger Carlsson, Save (SE)\n\n(65)\n\nPrior Publication Data\n\nUS 2012/0071607 Al Mar. 22, 2012\n\n## (30) Foreign Application Priority Data\n\nMay 14, 2009\n\nMar. 3, 2010\n\n- (51) Int. Cl.\n\nC0SG 77108\n\n(EP) ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ...\n\n09006546\n\n(EP) .....................................\n\n10002178\n\n(2006.01)\n\nC0SF 255102 (2006.01)\n\nC0SL 51106\n\n(2006.01)\n\nC0SF 255100 (2006.01)\n\n- (52) U.S. Cl.\n\nCPC .............\n\nC0SF 255100 (2013.01); C0SF 255102\n\n(2013.01); C0SL 51106 (2013.01)\n\nUSPC ..................................\n\n528/32; 528/22; 528/34\n\n- Field of Classification Search\n- ( 58) None\n\nSee application file for complete search history.\n\n## (56) References Cited\n\n## U.S. PATENT DOCUMENTS\n\nUS008846844B2\n\nUS008846844B2\n\n- (IO) Patent No.:\n\nUS 8,846,844 B2\n\nSep.30,2014\n\n- (45) Date of Patent:\n\n## FOREIGN PATENT DOCUMENTS\n\n## OTHER PUBLICATIONS\n\nInternational Search Report mailed Aug. 20, 2010 for International application No. PCT/EP2010/002972.\n\nWritten Opinion mailed Aug. 20, 2010 for International application No. PCT/EP2010/002972.\n\nResponse to Written Opinion dated Feb. 23, 2011 for International application No. PCT/EP2010/002972.\n\nInternational Preliminary Report on Patentability mailed Aug. 2, 2011 for International application No. PCT/EP2010/002972.\n\n* cited by examiner\n\nPrimary Examiner - Marc Zimmer\n\n(74) Attorney, Agent, or Firm - Fay Sharpe LLP\n\n## (57) ABSTRACT\n\nThe present invention relates to a polyolefin composition comprising (A) a crosslinkable polyolefin with hydrolysable silane groups which upon hydrolysation form an acid or a base, characterised in that the acid or base generates a gel content of at least 40% after 40 hours in the 90° C. cross› linking test, wherein the acid or base is added in an amount of 4.5 mmol/kg to an ethylene/vinyltrimethoxysilane copoly› mer with a MFR2 =2 g/10 min, a density of 923 g/cm 3 , and 2 wt.% ofvinyltrimethoxysilane and then is cross-linked in a waterbath at 90° C., and to a polyolefin composition compris› ing (i) a crosslinkable polyolefin with hydrolysable silane groups, and (ii) a non-polymeric compound with hydrolys› able silane groups which upon hydrolysation form an acid or a base, characterised in that the acid or base generates a gel content of at least 40% after 40 hours in the 90° C. cross› linking test, wherein the acid or base is added in an amount of 4.5 mmol/kg to an ethylene/vinyltrimethoxysilane copoly› mer with a MFR2 =2 g/10 min, a density of 923 g/cm 3 , and 2 wt.% ofvinyltrimethoxysilane and then is cross-linked in a waterbath at 90° C.\n\n## 8 Claims, No Drawings", + "recall": 0.9651162790697675, + "true_md": "# c12) United States Patent\n\n# Dahlen et al.\n\n# (IO) Patent No.: US 8,846,844 B2\n\n# Sep.30,2014 (45) Date of Patent:\n\n# (54) CROSSLINKABLE POLYOLEFIN COMPOSITION COMPRISING SILANE GROUPS FORMING AN ACID OR A BASE UPON HYDROLYSATION\n\n- (75) Inventors: Kristian Dahlen, Stora Hoga (SE); Roger Carlsson, Save (SE) \n\n- (73) Assignee: Borealis AG, Vienna (AT) \n\n- ( *) Notice: Subject to any disclaimer, the term ofthis patent is extended or adjusted under 35 U.S.C. 154(b) by O days. \n\n- (21) Appl. No.: 13/265,555 \n\n- (22) PCT Filed: May 14, 2010 \n\n- (86) PCT No.: PCT /EP2010/002972 § 371 (c)(l), (2), ( 4) Date: Nov. 30, 2011 \n\n- (87) PCT Pub. No.: WO2010/130458 \n\n- (51) Int. Cl. \n\n- (52) U.S. Cl. CPC ............. C0SF 255100 (2013.01); C0SF 255102 (2013.01); C0SL 51106 (2013.01) USPC .................................. 528/32; 528/22; 528/34 \n\n- ( 58) Field of Classification Search None See application file for complete search history. \n\n## FOREIGN PATENT DOCUMENTS\n\n## OTHER PUBLICATIONS\n\n## (57) ABSTRACT\n\n## 8 Claims, No Drawings\n\n## U.S. PATENT DOCUMENTS\n\n## (56) References Cited\n\n## (30) Foreign Application Priority Data\n\n## (65) Prior Publication Data\n\nThe present invention relates to a polyolefin composition comprising (A) a crosslinkable polyolefin with hydrolysable silane groups which upon hydrolysation form an acid or a base, characterised in that the acid or base generates a gel content of at least 40% after 40 hours in the 90° C. cross› linking test, wherein the acid or base is added in an amount of 4.5 mmol/kg to an ethylene/vinyltrimethoxysilane copoly› mer with a MFR$_{2}$=2 g/10 min, a density of 923 g/cm 3 , and 2 wt.% ofvinyltrimethoxysilane and then is cross-linked in a waterbath at 90° C., and to a polyolefin composition compris› ing (i) a crosslinkable polyolefin with hydrolysable silane groups, and (ii) a non-polymeric compound with hydrolys› able silane groups which upon hydrolysation form an acid or a base, characterised in that the acid or base generates a gel content of at least 40% after 40 hours in the 90° C. cross› linking test, wherein the acid or base is added in an amount of 4.5 mmol/kg to an ethylene/vinyltrimethoxysilane copoly› mer with a MFR$_{2}$=2 g/10 min, a density of 923 g/cm 3 , and 2 wt.% ofvinyltrimethoxysilane and then is cross-linked in a waterbath at 90° C. \n\nInternational Search Report mailed Aug. 20, 2010 for International application No. PCT/EP2010/002972. \n\nWritten Opinion mailed Aug. 20, 2010 for International application No. PCT/EP2010/002972. \n\nResponse to Written Opinion dated Feb. 23, 2011 for International application No. PCT/EP2010/002972. \n\nInternational Preliminary Report on Patentability mailed Aug. 2, 2011 for International application No. PCT/EP2010/002972. \n\n* cited by examiner \n\nPrimary Examiner - Marc Zimmer \n\n(74) Attorney, Agent, or Firm - Fay Sharpe LLP \n\nPCT Pub. Date: Nov.18, 2010 \n\nUS 2012/0071607 Al Mar. 22, 2012 \n\n1111111111111111 11111 111111111111111 111111111111111 111111111111111 IIII IIII US008846844B2" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9613682515342165, + "doc_id": "ab054e3c302f6657304d9c21a304a570abf3937cba8b4ffc75f4be2be83f5b2e", + "edit_distance": 0.8382541720154044, + "f1_score": 0.9897209985315714, + "meteor": 0.5780163248094993, + "precision": 0.9825072886297376, + "pred_md": "5,648,520\n\n15\n\nThe organic phase (D) or (D') is transferred, optionally after passing through the acid washing stage (7.0), into the at least two-stage distillation stage (7.1), (7.2).\n\nIn the first distillation stage (7.1) a distillate (E) is separated which includes the majority, preferably almost the entire volume, of the hydrophobic solvent contained in (D) or (D'), optionally in addition to part of the auxiliary amine contained therein.\n\nIn the final distillation stage (7 .2) the remaining auxiliary amine, optionally in addition to the residual volume of hydrophobic solvent, is separated as the distillate (F) from the first part product (G) arising as the distillation bottoms and collected in the process product tank (10).\n\n5\n\n10\n\nThe corresponding second process product is to be found in the aqueous phase (H) leaving the extraction stage ( 4).\n\n15\n\nIn an extraction stage (5) acting in multi-stage manner, operated preferably at 80° to 100° C., the second part product is extracted from the aqueous phase (H) in exchange for auxiliary amine, optionally after the addition of water to reduce the molarity and optionally after the addition of auxiliary amine to reduce the degree of protonation, and in 20 the course thereof is transferred into the organic phase (L).\n\nThe molarity of the aqueous phase used in (5) is prefer› ably <2.5. The degree of protonation of the aqueous phase used in (5) is preferably <60%.\n\nA mixture of hydrophobic solvent and auxiliary amine, which is formed substantially from the organic phase (R) leaving the subsequent extraction stage (6), optionally dis› tillate (M), optionally a part volume of (E) and generally a part volume of stream (S), serves as the extraction agent (J).\n\nThe ratio by weight of auxiliary amine to solvent in (J) is generally between 0.5:1 and3:1, preferably between 1:1 and 2: 1. The ratio by weight of extraction agent (J) to aqueous phase is generally between 0.3:1 and 3:1, preferably between 0.7:1 and 2:1.\n\nThe organic phase (L) or (L') resulting in (5) is supplied to the distillation stages (8.1) and (8.2), optionally after passing through the washing stage (8.0) and/or optionally after removal of traces of acid with dilute sodium hydroxide.\n\nIn the distillation stage (8.1), (8.2) there takes place the separation by distillation of the distillation residue (0) which is collected in the process product tank (11) as the second part product.\n\nThe working-up stage (8) generally comprises an at least two-stage multi-stage distillation (8.1), (8.2) in stage (8.1) whereof there is obtained as the distillate (M) a hydrophobic impoverished as to auxiliary amine, compared with the intake product (L) or (L').\n\nThe auxiliary amine content in (M) is generally <30%, preferably <20%; a hydrophobic solvent liberated from auxiliary amine is optionally obtained in (8.1) as a distillate. At least part of the distillate (M) is utilized, optionally also after the addition of a part volume of (E) from the distillation stage (7.1), in the extraction stage (6) as the organic phase (P) for the counter-current extraction of at least a part volume of the aqueous phase (K) resulting in the extraction stage (5), at least part of which is supplied to the extraction stage (6) directly and/or indirectly by way of an interposed distillation stage (9).\n\nDuring the extraction procedure which takes place in the extraction stage (6) auxiliary polyamine which is still present are removed from the aqueous phase such that the resulting aqueous phase (Q) exhibits at all times a higher degree of protonation than the aqueous phase (K) from the extraction stage (5).\n\n25\n\n30\n\n3 5\n\n40\n\n16\n\nThe recycled aqueous phase (C) exhibits a higher degree of protonation than the aqueous phase (K) leaving the extraction stage (5). In the case of degrees of protonation which although higher than that of (K) are <100%, this can be achieved in that either the entire aqueous phase passes through the extraction stage ( 6) or only a corresponding part volume which, optionally having a degree of protonation of 100%, affords the elevated-compared with (K)---degree of protonation of ( C), as a result of mixing with the remainder.\n\nA degree of protonation of virtually 100% in the aqueous phase (C) can be achieved only if the entire aqueous phase passes at least once by way of the extraction stage (6) and in so doing is extracted with virtually pure hydrophobic solvent.\n\nBecause the aqueous phase (C) according to the invention exhibits a degree of protonation greater than the degree of protonation preferred in the aqueous input phase to the extraction stage (5), it may be necessary and advantageous to adjust such a preferred degree of protonation in the aqueous input phase to the extraction stage (5) by the addition at a suitable point of auxiliary amine and/or polyamine.\n\nSuitable points for amine supply are the aqueous phase immediately before entering the extraction stage (5) with use of auxiliary amine, or at a point positioned upstream, preferably before the aqueous phase enters the extraction stage (3), for example by direct addition or by way of an extraction stage (2) positioned upstream.\n\nA further important parameter of the returned and recycled aqueous phase (C) is molarity. According to the invention, the molarity of (C) may be varied over a broad range in dependence on the respective separation task.\n\nFundamentally, the aqueous phase (H) resulting in pro› cess stage ( 4) may be supplied directly to the extraction stage (5). However, because the upper molarity range of the extraction stage ( 4), a range which is far preferred for certain separation tasks, exceeds the preferred molarity range of the extraction stage (5), it is a preferred embodiment of the process according to the invention to decouple the molarities in the different extraction stages by optionally removing water by distillation from the closed circuit of the aqueous phase, at a suitable point, and adding it again at a different suitable point\n\nsolvent which is liberated from polyamine and is markedly 45 removed from the aqueous phase which contains the acid, or 50 With the aid of a water distillation stage (9) water is from a partial stream of the aqueous phase, preferably after leaving the extraction stage (5) and before recycling at the beginning of the process, and is added again, in total (Y) or in part quantities, at one or more points, at the latest before the aqueous phase enters the extraction stage (5).\n\nIt is irrelevant to carrying out the process according to the invention whether the removal of water in (9) takes place before or after passing through the extraction stage (6).\n\n55 amine and optionally 60 the fractionation of polyamine mixtures and enables numer› The water (X) removed in (9) may be used simultaneously to operate the washing stages (7.0) and/or (8.0). The water volume (X) may also be removed predominantly or exclu› sively to operate the washing stages (7.0) and/or (8.0). This first variant on the process according to the invention affords the opportunity for considerable separation efficiencies in ous separation problems to be resolved in a satisfactory way.\n\nThe degree of protonation of (Q) is generally >50%, 65 preferably 60%, and may be up to 100% when pure hydro› phobic solvent is used as (P).\n\nIn particular in the second polyamine fraction (0) the relative enrichment of the components preferably contained in this fraction can be varied and maximized in targeted manner.\n\nThe proportion of these components remaining in the first polyamine fraction (G) cannot, however, be minimized in", + "recall": 0.9970414201183432, + "true_md": "15 \n\n5,648,520 \n\n16 \n\nThe proportion of these components remaining in the first polyamine fraction (G) cannot, however, be minimized in \n\nThe degree of protonation of (Q) is generally >50%, preferably 60%, and may be up to 100% when pure hydro› phobic solvent is used as (P). \n\nDuring the extraction procedure which takes place in the extraction stage (6) auxiliary amine and optionally polyamine which is still present are removed from the aqueous phase such that the resulting aqueous phase (Q) exhibits at all times a higher degree of protonation than the aqueous phase (K) from the extraction stage (5). \n\nIn particular in the second polyamine fraction (0) the relative enrichment of the components preferably contained in this fraction can be varied and maximized in targeted manner. \n\nThe water (X) removed in (9) may be used simultaneously to operate the washing stages (7.0) and/or (8.0). The water volume (X) may also be removed predominantly or exclu› sively to operate the washing stages (7.0) and/or (8.0). This first variant on the process according to the invention affords the opportunity for considerable separation efficiencies in the fractionation of polyamine mixtures and enables numer› ous separation problems to be resolved in a satisfactory way. \n\nThe auxiliary amine content in (M) is generally <30%, preferably <20%; a hydrophobic solvent liberated from auxiliary amine is optionally obtained in (8.1) as a distillate. At least part of the distillate (M) is utilized, optionally also after the addition of a part volume of (E) from the distillation stage (7.1), in the extraction stage (6) as the organic phase (P) for the counter-current extraction of at least a part volume of the aqueous phase (K) resulting in the extraction stage (5), at least part of which is supplied to the extraction stage (6) directly and/or indirectly by way of an interposed distillation stage (9). \n\nIt is irrelevant to carrying out the process according to the invention whether the removal of water in (9) takes place before or after passing through the extraction stage (6). \n\nWith the aid of a water distillation stage (9) water is removed from the aqueous phase which contains the acid, or from a partial stream of the aqueous phase, preferably after leaving the extraction stage (5) and before recycling at the beginning of the process, and is added again, in total (Y) or in part quantities, at one or more points, at the latest before the aqueous phase enters the extraction stage (5). \n\nThe working-up stage (8) generally comprises an at least two-stage multi-stage distillation (8.1), (8.2) in stage (8.1) whereof there is obtained as the distillate (M) a hydrophobic solvent which is liberated from polyamine and is markedly impoverished as to auxiliary amine, compared with the intake product (L) or (L’). \n\nFundamentally, the aqueous phase (H) resulting in pro› cess stage ( 4) may be supplied directly to the extraction stage (5). However, because the upper molarity range of the extraction stage ( 4), a range which is far preferred for certain separation tasks, exceeds the preferred molarity range of the extraction stage (5), it is a preferred embodiment of the process according to the invention to decouple the molarities in the different extraction stages by optionally removing water by distillation from the closed circuit of the aqueous phase, at a suitable point, and adding it again at a different suitable point \n\nIn the distillation stage (8.1), (8.2) there takes place the separation by distillation of the distillation residue (0) which is collected in the process product tank (11) as the second part product. \n\nThe organic phase (L) or (L’) resulting in (5) is supplied to the distillation stages (8.1) and (8.2), optionally after passing through the washing stage (8.0) and/or optionally after removal of traces of acid with dilute sodium hydroxide. \n\nA further important parameter of the returned and recycled aqueous phase (C) is molarity. According to the invention, the molarity of (C) may be varied over a broad range in dependence on the respective separation task. \n\nSuitable points for amine supply are the aqueous phase immediately before entering the extraction stage (5) with use of auxiliary amine, or at a point positioned upstream, preferably before the aqueous phase enters the extraction stage (3), for example by direct addition or by way of an extraction stage (2) positioned upstream. \n\nThe ratio by weight of auxiliary amine to solvent in (J) is generally between 0.5:1 and3:1, preferably between 1:1 and 2: 1. The ratio by weight of extraction agent (J) to aqueous phase is generally between 0.3:1 and 3:1, preferably between 0.7:1 and 2:1. \n\nA mixture of hydrophobic solvent and auxiliary amine, which is formed substantially from the organic phase (R) leaving the subsequent extraction stage (6), optionally dis› tillate (M), optionally a part volume of (E) and generally a part volume of stream (S), serves as the extraction agent (J). \n\nBecause the aqueous phase (C) according to the invention exhibits a degree of protonation greater than the degree of protonation preferred in the aqueous input phase to the extraction stage (5), it may be necessary and advantageous to adjust such a preferred degree of protonation in the aqueous input phase to the extraction stage (5) by the addition at a suitable point of auxiliary amine and/or polyamine. \n\nThe molarity of the aqueous phase used in (5) is prefer› ably <2.5. The degree of protonation of the aqueous phase used in (5) is preferably <60%. \n\nIn an extraction stage (5) acting in multi-stage manner, operated preferably at 80° to 100° C., the second part product is extracted from the aqueous phase (H) in exchange for auxiliary amine, optionally after the addition of water to reduce the molarity and optionally after the addition of auxiliary amine to reduce the degree of protonation, and in the course thereof is transferred into the organic phase (L). \n\nA degree of protonation of virtually 100% in the aqueous phase (C) can be achieved only if the entire aqueous phase passes at least once by way of the extraction stage (6) and in so doing is extracted with virtually pure hydrophobic solvent. \n\nThe corresponding second process product is to be found in the aqueous phase (H) leaving the extraction stage ( 4). \n\nIn the final distillation stage (7 .2) the remaining auxiliary amine, optionally in addition to the residual volume of hydrophobic solvent, is separated as the distillate (F) from the first part product (G) arising as the distillation bottoms and collected in the process product tank (10). \n\nThe recycled aqueous phase (C) exhibits a higher degree of protonation than the aqueous phase (K) leaving the extraction stage (5). In the case of degrees of protonation which although higher than that of (K) are <100%, this can be achieved in that either the entire aqueous phase passes through the extraction stage ( 6) or only a corresponding part volume which, optionally having a degree of protonation of 100%, affords the elevated-compared with (K)---degree of protonation of ( C), as a result of mixing with the remainder. \n\nIn the first distillation stage (7.1) a distillate (E) is separated which includes the majority, preferably almost the entire volume, of the hydrophobic solvent contained in (D) or (D’), optionally in addition to part of the auxiliary amine contained therein. \n\nThe organic phase (D) or (D’) is transferred, optionally after passing through the acid washing stage (7.0), into the at least two-stage distillation stage (7.1), (7.2)." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6229091589666236, + "doc_id": "e31d829e7ea21db3a0cf15c76a9b8a032a7c50e4098598825996076d64118cc0", + "edit_distance": 0.37662337662337664, + "f1_score": 0.8181818181818181, + "meteor": 0.9626299617613764, + "precision": 0.6923076923076923, + "pred_md": "149\n\n-continued\n\n(ca-1-33)\n\nIn the above formulas, each of gl, g2 and g3 represents a number ofrepeating units, wherein gl represents an integer of 1 to 5, g2 represents an integer of0 to 20, and g3 represents an integer of0 to 20.\n\n## [Chemical Formula 70]\n\n(ca-1-35)\n\nUS 9,164,380 B2\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n60\n\n65\n\n150\n\n-continued", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "US 9,164,380 B2 \n\n149 \n\n150 \n\n-continued \n\n-continued \n\nIn the above formulas, each of gl, g2 and g3 represents a number ofrepeating units, wherein gl represents an integer of 1 to 5, g2 represents an integer of0 to 20, and g3 represents an integer of0 to 20. \n\n[Chemical Formula 70]" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.818440788972485, + "doc_id": "ff86d932d02036ee106321d65dc869effaf785754a5fa0d29657b4e0ed1397d2", + "edit_distance": 0.4552238805970149, + "f1_score": 0.9029126213592233, + "meteor": 0.8352540476406888, + "precision": 0.8532110091743119, + "pred_md": "## c12) United States Patent Bernard et al.\n\n## (54) POLYISOCYANATE COMPOSITION HAVING IMPROVED IMPACT-PROOF PROPERTIES\n\n- (75) Inventors:\n\nJean-Marie Bernard, Saint Laurent d' Agny (FR); Mathias Dubecq, Lyons (FR)\n\n- (73) Assignee:\n\nRhodia Chimie, Aubervilliers (FR)\n\n- ( *) Notice:\n\nSubject to any disclaimer, the term ofthis patent is extended or adjusted under 35 U.S.C. 154(b) by 992 days.\n\n- (21) Appl. No.:\n\n11/793,489\n\n- (22) PCT Filed:\n\nDec. 20, 2005\n\n- (86) PCT No.:\n\nPCT /FR2005/003197\n\n§ 371 (c)(l), (2), ( 4) Date:\n\nOct. 29, 2007\n\n- (87) PCT Pub. No.:\n\nWO2006/067326\n\nPCT Pub. Date:\n\nJun. 29, 2006\n\n## (65) Prior Publication Data\n\nUS 2008/0044578 Al Feb. 21, 2008\n\n## (30) Foreign Application Priority Data\n\nDec. 21, 2004 (FR) ...................................... 04 13669\n\n- (51) Int. Cl.\n\nC0SK 5100\n\n(2006.01)\n\n- (52) U.S. Cl.\n\n.....................\n\n524/123; 427/385.5; 526/310;\n\n528/44; 528/45; 528/68\n\nUS008188171B2\n\nUS008188171B2\n\n- (IO) Patent No.:\n\nUS 8,188,171 B2\n\n- (45) Date of Patent:\n\nMay 29, 2012\n\n- (58) Field of Classification Search\n\n...................\n\n524/123\n\nSee application file for complete search history.\n\n## (56) References Cited\n\n## U.S. PATENT DOCUMENTS\n\n## FOREIGN PATENT DOCUMENTS\n\nDE\n\nEP\n\nFR\n\nGB\n\nJP\n\nJP\n\nJP\n\nWO\n\n197 25 507 Al\n\n1 074 590 A2\n\n2 243 983 Al\n\n1 487 563\n\n08-176477\n\n2001-323123\n\n2003-292887\n\n01/05861 Al\n\n12/1998\n\n2/2001\n\n4/1975\n\n10/1977\n\n7 /1996\n\n11/2001\n\n10/2003\n\n1/2001\n\n* cited by examiner\n\nPrimary Examiner -Doris Lee\n\n(74) Attorney, Agent, or Firm -Buchanan Ingersoll & Rooney PC\n\n## (57) ABSTRACT\n\nThe invention relates to the use of additived (poly)isocyanate compositions for producing coatings, especially paints or varnishes for car bodywork parts, said compositions having excellent impact-resistant properties, especially grit-resistant properties.\n\n## 36 Claims, No Drawings", + "recall": 0.9587628865979382, + "true_md": "# c12) United States Patent\n\n# Bernard et al.\n\n# (IO) Patent No.: US 8,188,171 B2\n\n# May 29, 2012 (45) Date of Patent:\n\n# (54) POLYISOCYANATE COMPOSITION HAVING IMPROVED IMPACT-PROOF PROPERTIES\n\n- (75) Inventors: Jean-Marie Bernard, Saint Laurent d’ Agny (FR); Mathias Dubecq, Lyons (FR) \n\n- (73) Assignee: Rhodia Chimie, Aubervilliers (FR) \n\n- ( *) Notice: Subject to any disclaimer, the term ofthis patent is extended or adjusted under 35 U.S.C. 154(b) by 992 days. \n\n- (21) Appl. No.: 11/793,489 \n\n- (22) PCT Filed: Dec. 20, 2005 \n\n- (86) PCT No.: PCT /FR2005/003197 § 371 (c)(l), (2), ( 4) Date: Oct. 29, 2007 \n\n- (87) PCT Pub. No.: WO2006/067326 \n\n- (51) Int. Cl. C0SK 5100 (2006.01) \n\n- (52) U.S. Cl. ..................... 524/123; 427/385.5; 526/310; 528/44; 528/45; 528/68 \n\n- (58) Field of Classification Search ................... 524/123 See application file for complete search history. \n\n## 36 Claims, No Drawings\n\n## (57) ABSTRACT\n\n## FOREIGN PATENT DOCUMENTS\n\n## U.S. PATENT DOCUMENTS\n\n## (56) References Cited\n\n## (65) Prior Publication Data\n\n## (30) Foreign Application Priority Data\n\n* cited by examiner \n\nPrimary Examiner - Doris Lee \n\n(74) Attorney, Agent, or Firm - Buchanan Ingersoll & Rooney PC \n\nThe invention relates to the use of additived (poly)isocyanate compositions for producing coatings, especially paints or varnishes for car bodywork parts, said compositions having excellent impact-resistant properties, especially grit-resistant properties. \n\nDec. 21, 2004 (FR) ...................................... 04 13669 \n\nUS 2008/0044578 Al Feb. 21, 2008 \n\nPCT Pub. Date: Jun. 29, 2006 \n\n1111111111111111 11111 111111111111111 lllll 111111111111111 111111111111111111 US008188171B2" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.968602654876083, + "doc_id": "8e6ecf45feb8c16e17ef40b75508cc22fbc321caee821d1b666025a35663e12e", + "edit_distance": 0.07859733978234583, + "f1_score": 0.9939209726443768, + "meteor": 0.9935770017931649, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "US 2020/0352177 Al\n\n[0179] Other Bakery Mixes\n\n[0180] The leavening agent of the invention may also be incorporated into self-raising flour. The latter may for example comprise at least 0.5% by weight of the leavening agent, preferably at least 1 %, more preferably at least 2%, most preferably at least 5%, but less than 15%, more preferably less than 10% most preferably less than 8%.\n\n[0181] Leavening agents of the invention, or baking pow› ders comprising them, may be incorporated into bakery mixes. These may be batters (i.e. pastes in which the volume of liquid exceeds that of solid) or doughs (i.e. pastes in which the volume of solid exceeds that of liquid) and may be adapted for the production of a range of baked confec› tions. The leavening agents may be used in conjunction with yeast.\n\n[0182] It will be apparent that the leavening agent may be preformulated as a baking powder or prepared in situ by adding the ingredients separately to the dough or batter.\n\n[0183] Baked products according to our invention include any leavened confection including, without limitation, pan› cakes, bread, cakes, biscuits, waffles, scones, buns, cookies, batter coatings, sponges and puddings.\n\n[0184] The invention will be illustrated by the following examples in which all proportions, unless otherwise stated, are percentages by weight based on total weight. All refer› ences to calcium chloride are to normal commercial calcium chloride, which was Non-acidic. The Neutralisation Value was found to be negative (-0.055 by the method of Brose, Becker and Bouchain vs). A 0.5 molar solution had a pH greater than 8. When 2 g of the calcium chloride in 200 ml deionised water was mixed with 0.25 g sodium bicarbonate in 50 ml deionised water, and the mixed solutions were stored at 23° C. and 764 mm Hg pressure, no evolution of carbon dioxide could be detected using Chittick apparatus.\n\n## EXAMPLE 1\n\n[0185] Bakery trials with sodium bicarbonate and Precipi› tant, in the stoichiometric amount required to precipitate the carbonate formed by thermal decomposition of the bicar› bonate in aqueous solution, as in the \"balanced\" system described by Wu (vs), had shown wide variations in pH, which was undesirably high giving a dark crumb and bitter aftertaste. To compensate for the expected 50% reduction in CO 2 available from the thermal decomposition compared with conventional acid/base leavening systems, the amount of bicarbonate was proportionately increased. None of the tests gave a commercially viable product.\n\n[0186] An Acidulant-free composition according to the invention comprising a substantial excess of Precipitant over the stoichiometric amount, and using conventional levels of addition of bicarbonate was compared to one of the earlier formulations, and also with sodium bicarbonate alone at both the conventional and increased levels and calcium chloride alone, in the following Madeira cake recipe.\n\n9\n\nNov. 12, 2020\n\n[0187] The comparison consisted of 8.9 g sodium bicar› bonate and 5.9 g calcium chloride. The example consisted of 5.11 g sodium bicarbonate and 5.9% calcium chloride. The results are shown in the following table I:\n\nTABLE I\n\n[0188] The product of the invention although using sub› stantially less bicarbonate than the control provided a greater increase in volume, lower pH and almost no discolouration.\n\n## EXAMPLES 2-4\n\n[0189] Four formulations were prepared using mixtures of Precipitant and Acidulant at various levels and compared with a commercial product in bakery trials, using the fol› lowing recipe.\n\n[0190] A scone mix was prepared with the composition, based on weight of flour:\n\n[0191] The pH of the scones was noted. The results are set out in the following table II, in which all proportions are in grams.\n\nTABLE II\n\n## EXAMPLE 6-8\n\n[0192] Three leavening formulations according to the invention were tested in the following Madeira cake recipe of Example 1. The pH was acceptable in all cases and the examples had a brighter crumb than the control, which used a balanced Acidulant/soda system. The height in mm was measured in the centre and edge. No sagging was observed in the middle. The improved rise compared to the control resulted from a late surge in gas evolution. The results are set out in the following table in which proportions are percent by weight based on total weight.", + "recall": 0.9879154078549849, + "true_md": "[0180] The leavening agent of the invention may also be incorporated into self-raising flour. The latter may for example comprise at least 0.5% by weight of the leavening agent, preferably at least 1 %, more preferably at least 2%, most preferably at least 5%, but less than 15%, more preferably less than 10% most preferably less than 8%. [0181] Leavening agents of the invention, or baking pow› ders comprising them, may be incorporated into bakery \n\nmixes. These may be batters (i.e. pastes in which the volume of liquid exceeds that of solid) or doughs (i.e. pastes in which the volume of solid exceeds that of liquid) and may be adapted for the production of a range of baked confec› tions. The leavening agents may be used in conjunction with yeast. \n\n[0182] It will be apparent that the leavening agent may be preformulated as a baking powder or prepared in situ by adding the ingredients separately to the dough or batter. \n\n[0183] Baked products according to our invention include any leavened confection including, without limitation, pan› cakes, bread, cakes, biscuits, waffles, scones, buns, cookies, batter coatings, sponges and puddings. \n\n[0184] The invention will be illustrated by the following examples in which all proportions, unless otherwise stated, are percentages by weight based on total weight. All refer› ences to calcium chloride are to normal commercial calcium chloride, which was Non-acidic. The Neutralisation Value was found to be negative (-0.055 by the method of Brose, Becker and Bouchain vs). A 0.5 molar solution had a pH greater than 8. When 2 g of the calcium chloride in 200 ml deionised water was mixed with 0.25 g sodium bicarbonate in 50 ml deionised water, and the mixed solutions were stored at 23° C. and 764 mm Hg pressure, no evolution of carbon dioxide could be detected using Chittick apparatus. \n\n[0185] Bakery trials with sodium bicarbonate and Precipi› tant, in the stoichiometric amount required to precipitate the carbonate formed by thermal decomposition of the bicar› bonate in aqueous solution, as in the \"balanced\" system described by Wu (vs), had shown wide variations in pH, which was undesirably high giving a dark crumb and bitter aftertaste. To compensate for the expected 50% reduction in CO$_{2 }$ available from the thermal decomposition compared with conventional acid/base leavening systems, the amount of bicarbonate was proportionately increased. None of the tests gave a commercially viable product. \n\n[0186] An Acidulant-free composition according to the invention comprising a substantial excess of Precipitant over the stoichiometric amount, and using conventional levels of addition of bicarbonate was compared to one of the earlier formulations, and also with sodium bicarbonate alone at both the conventional and increased levels and calcium chloride alone, in the following Madeira cake recipe. \n\n[0187] The comparison consisted of 8.9 g sodium bicar› bonate and 5.9 g calcium chloride. The example consisted of 5.11 g sodium bicarbonate and 5.9% calcium chloride. The results are shown in the following table I: \n\n[0188] The product of the invention although using sub› stantially less bicarbonate than the control provided a greater increase in volume, lower pH and almost no discolouration. \n\n[0189] Four formulations were prepared using mixtures of Precipitant and Acidulant at various levels and compared with a commercial product in bakery trials, using the fol› lowing recipe. \n\n[0190] A scone mix was prepared with the composition, based on weight of flour: \n\n[0191] The pH of the scones was noted. The results are set out in the following table II, in which all proportions are in grams. \n\n[0192] Three leavening formulations according to the invention were tested in the following Madeira cake recipe of Example 1. The pH was acceptable in all cases and the examples had a brighter crumb than the control, which used a balanced Acidulant/soda system. The height in mm was measured in the centre and edge. No sagging was observed in the middle. The improved rise compared to the control resulted from a late surge in gas evolution. The results are set out in the following table in which proportions are percent by weight based on total weight. \n\n[0179] Other Bakery Mixes \n\nUS 2020/0352177 Al \n\n9 \n\nNov. 12, 2020 \n\n## EXAMPLE 1\n\n## EXAMPLE 6-8\n\n## EXAMPLES 2-4\n\nTABLE I \n\nTABLE II" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9761270295722957, + "doc_id": "83ff0799b231cfae5c46f44a051ec3702608a15ba70b2a2005452827ed11341f", + "edit_distance": 0.9087669280114041, + "f1_score": 0.9806451612903224, + "meteor": 0.6547521447565382, + "precision": 0.9743589743589743, + "pred_md": "US 6,503,413 B2\n\n43\n\ning pump-spray dispensers, including, but not limited to: polyethylene; polypropylene; polyethyleneterephthalate; blends of polyethylene, vinyl acetate, and rubber elastomer. A preferred container is made of clear, e.g., polyethylene terephthalate. Other materials can include stainless steel. A more complete disclosure of commercially available dis› pensing devices appears in: U.S. Pat. No. 4,895,279, Schultz, issued Jan. 23, 1990; U.S. Pat. No. 4,735,347, Schultz et al., issued Apr. 5, 1988; and U.S. Pat. No. 4,274,560, Carter, issued Jun. 23, 1981; all of said references are herein incorporated by reference.\n\nMost preferably, the spray dispenser is a manually acti› vated trigger-spray dispenser. Said trigger-spray dispenser comprises a container and a trigger both of which can be constructed of any of the conventional material employed in fabricating trigger-spray dispensers, including, but not limited to: polyethylene; polypropylene; polyacetal; polycar› bonate; polyethyleneterephthalate; polyvinyl chloride; poly› styrene; blends of polyethylene, vinyl acetate, and rubber elastomer. Other materials can include stainless steel and glass. A preferred container is made of clear, e.g. polyeth› ylene terephthalate. The trigger-spray dispenser does not incorporate a propellant gas into the odor-absorbing composition, and preferably it does not include those that will foam the wrinkle control composition. The trigger-spray dispenser herein is typically one which acts upon a discrete amount of the wrinkle control composition itself, typically by means of a piston or a collapsing bellows that displaces the composition through a nozzle to create a spray of thin liquid. Said trigger-spray dispenser typically comprises a pump chamber having either a piston or bellows which is movable through a limited stroke response to the trigger for varying the volume of said pump chamber. This pump chamber or bellows chamber collects and holds the product for dispensing. The trigger spray dispenser typically has an outlet check valve for blocking communication and flow of fluid through the nozzle and is responsive to the pressure inside the chamber. For the piston type trigger sprayers, as the trigger is compressed, it acts on the fluid in the chamber and the spring, increasing the pressure on the fluid. For the bellows spray dispenser, as the bellows is compressed, the pressure increases on the fluid. The increase in fluid pressure in either trigger spray dispenser acts to open the top outlet check valve. The top valve allows the product to be forced through the swirl chamber and out the nozzle to form a discharge pattern. An adjustable nozzle cap can be used to vary the pattern of the fluid dispensed.\n\nFor the piston spray dispenser, as the trigger is released, the spring acts on the piston to return it to its original position. For the bellows spray dispenser, the bellows acts as the spring to return to its original position. This action causes a vacuum in the chamber. The responding fluid acts to close the outlet valve while opening the inlet valve drawing product up to the chamber from the reservoir.\n\nA more complete disclosure of commercially available dispensing devices appears in U.S. Pat. No. 4,082,223, Nozawa, issued Apr. 4, 1978; U.S. Pat. No. 4,161,288, McKinney, issued Jul. 17, 1985; U.S. Pat. No. 4,434,917, Saito et al., issued Mar. 6, 1984; and U.S. Pat. No. 4,819, 835, Tasaki, issued Apr. 11, 1989; U.S. Pat. No. 5,303,867, Peterson, issued Apr. 19, 1994; all of said references are incorporated herein by reference.\n\nA broad array of trigger sprayers or finger pump sprayers are suitable for use with the compositions of this invention. These are readily available from suppliers such as Calmar, Inc., City of Industry, California; CSI (Continental Sprayers, Inc.), St. Peters, Mo.; Berry Plastics Corp., Evansville, Ind., a distributor of Guala sprayers; or Seaquest Dispensing, Cary, Ill.\n\n44\n\nThe preferred trigger sprayers are the blue inserted Gualafi sprayer, available from Berry Plastics Corp., or the Calmar TS800-1Afi, TS1300fi, and TS-800-2fi, available from Calmar Inc., because of the fine uniform spray characteristics, spray volume, and pattern size. More pre› ferred are sprayers with precompression features and finer spray characteristics and even distribution, such as Yoshino sprayers from Japan. Any suitable bottle or container can be used with the trigger sprayer, the preferred bottle is a 17 fl-oz. bottle (about 500 ml) of good ergonomics similar in shape to the Cinchfi bottle. It can be made of any materials such as high density polyethylene, polypropylene, polyvinyl chloride, polystyrene, polyethylene terephthalate, glass, or any other material that forms bottles. Preferably, it is made of high density polyethylene or clear polyethylene tereph› thalate.\n\nFor smaller fluid ounce sizes (such as 1 to 8 ounces), a finger pump can be used with canister or cylindrical bottle. The preferred pump for this application is the cylindrical Euromist IIfi from Seaquest Dispensing. More preferred are those with precompression features.\n\nThe article of manufacture herein can also comprise a non-manually operated spray dispenser. By \"non-manually operated\" it is meant that the spray dispenser can be manu› ally activated, but the force required to dispense the wrinkle control composition is provided by another, non-manual means. Non-manually operated sprayers include, but are not limited to, powered sprayers, air aspirated sprayers, liquid aspirated sprayers, electrostatic sprayers, and nebulizer sprayers. The wrinkle control composition is placed into a spray dispenser in order to be distributed onto the fabric.\n\nPowered sprayers include self contained powered pumps that pressurize the aqueous de-wrinkle composition and dispense it through a nozzle to produce a spray of liquid droplets. Powered sprayers are attached directly or remotely through the use of piping/tubing to a reservoir (such as a bottle) to hold the aqueous wrinkle control composition. Powered sprayers may include, but are not limited to, centrifugal or positive displacement designs. It is preferred that the powered sprayer be powered by a portable DC electrical current from either disposable batteries (such as commercially available alkaline batteries) or rechargeable battery units (such as commercially available nickel cadmium battery units). Powered sprayers may also be powered by standard AC power supply available in most buildings. The discharge nozzle design can be varied to create specific spray characteristics (such as spray diameter and particle size). It is also possible to have multiple spray nozzles for different spray characteristics. The nozzle may or may not contain an adjustable nozzle shroud that would allow the spray characteristics to be altered.\n\nNonlimiting examples of commercially available pow› ered sprayers are disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,865,255, Luvisotto, issued Sep. 12, 1989 which is incorporated herein by reference. Preferred powered sprayers are readily available from suppliers such as Solo, Newport News, Va. (e.g., Solo Spraystar™ rechargeable sprayer, listed as manual part #: US 460 395) and Multi-sprayer Systems, Minneapolis, Minn. (e.g., model: Spray 1).\n\nAir aspirated sprayers include the classification of spray› ers generically known as \"air brushes\". A stream of pres› surized air draws up the aqueous wrinkle control composi› tion and dispenses it through a nozzle to create a spray of liquid. The wrinkle control composition can be supplied via separate piping/tubing or more commonly is contained in a jar to which the aspirating sprayer is attached.\n\n5\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n2 5\n\n30\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n60\n\n65", + "recall": 0.987012987012987, + "true_md": "43 \n\nUS 6,503,413 B2 \n\n44 \n\nAir aspirated sprayers include the classification of spray› ers generically known as \"air brushes\". A stream of pres› surized air draws up the aqueous wrinkle control composi› tion and dispenses it through a nozzle to create a spray of liquid. The wrinkle control composition can be supplied via separate piping/tubing or more commonly is contained in a jar to which the aspirating sprayer is attached. \n\nA broad array of trigger sprayers or finger pump sprayers are suitable for use with the compositions of this invention. These are readily available from suppliers such as Calmar, Inc., City of Industry, California; CSI (Continental Sprayers, Inc.), St. Peters, Mo.; Berry Plastics Corp., Evansville, Ind., 65 a distributor of Guala sprayers; or Seaquest Dispensing, Cary, Ill. \n\nA more complete disclosure of commercially available dispensing devices appears in U.S. Pat. No. 4,082,223, Nozawa, issued Apr. 4, 1978; U.S. Pat. No. 4,161,288, McKinney, issued Jul. 17, 1985; U.S. Pat. No. 4,434,917, Saito et al., issued Mar. 6, 1984; and U.S. Pat. No. 4,819, 835, Tasaki, issued Apr. 11, 1989; U.S. Pat. No. 5,303,867, Peterson, issued Apr. 19, 1994; all of said references are incorporated herein by reference. \n\nNonlimiting examples of commercially available pow› ered sprayers are disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,865,255, Luvisotto, issued Sep. 12, 1989 which is incorporated herein by reference. Preferred powered sprayers are readily avail- able from suppliers such as Solo, Newport News, Va. (e.g., Solo Spraystar™ rechargeable sprayer, listed as manual part #: US 460 395) and Multi-sprayer Systems, Minneapolis, Minn. (e.g., model: Spray 1). \n\nPowered sprayers include self contained powered pumps that pressurize the aqueous de-wrinkle composition and dispense it through a nozzle to produce a spray of liquid droplets. Powered sprayers are attached directly or remotely through the use of piping/tubing to a reservoir (such as a bottle) to hold the aqueous wrinkle control composition. Powered sprayers may include, but are not limited to, centrifugal or positive displacement designs. It is preferred that the powered sprayer be powered by a portable DC electrical current from either disposable batteries (such as commercially available alkaline batteries) or rechargeable battery units (such as commercially available nickel cad- mium battery units). Powered sprayers may also be powered by standard AC power supply available in most buildings. The discharge nozzle design can be varied to create specific spray characteristics (such as spray diameter and particle size). It is also possible to have multiple spray nozzles for different spray characteristics. The nozzle may or may not contain an adjustable nozzle shroud that would allow the spray characteristics to be altered. \n\nFor the piston spray dispenser, as the trigger is released, the spring acts on the piston to return it to its original position. For the bellows spray dispenser, the bellows acts as the spring to return to its original position. This action causes a vacuum in the chamber. The responding fluid acts to close the outlet valve while opening the inlet valve drawing product up to the chamber from the reservoir. \n\nThe article of manufacture herein can also comprise a non-manually operated spray dispenser. By \"non-manually operated\" it is meant that the spray dispenser can be manu› ally activated, but the force required to dispense the wrinkle control composition is provided by another, non-manual means. Non-manually operated sprayers include, but are not limited to, powered sprayers, air aspirated sprayers, liquid aspirated sprayers, electrostatic sprayers, and nebulizer sprayers. The wrinkle control composition is placed into a spray dispenser in order to be distributed onto the fabric. \n\nFor smaller fluid ounce sizes (such as 1 to 8 ounces), a finger pump can be used with canister or cylindrical bottle. The preferred pump for this application is the cylindrical Euromist IIfi from Seaquest Dispensing. More preferred are those with precompression features. \n\nMost preferably, the spray dispenser is a manually acti› vated trigger-spray dispenser. Said trigger-spray dispenser comprises a container and a trigger both of which can be constructed of any of the conventional material employed in fabricating trigger-spray dispensers, including, but not lim- ited to: polyethylene; polypropylene; polyacetal; polycar› bonate; polyethyleneterephthalate; polyvinyl chloride; poly› styrene; blends of polyethylene, vinyl acetate, and rubber elastomer. Other materials can include stainless steel and glass. A preferred container is made of clear, e.g. polyeth› ylene terephthalate. The trigger-spray dispenser does not incorporate a propellant gas into the odor-absorbing composition, and preferably it does not include those that will foam the wrinkle control composition. The trigger-spray dispenser herein is typically one which acts upon a discrete amount of the wrinkle control composition itself, typically by means of a piston or a collapsing bellows that displaces the composition through a nozzle to create a spray of thin liquid. Said trigger-spray dispenser typically comprises a pump chamber having either a piston or bellows which is movable through a limited stroke response to the trigger for varying the volume of said pump chamber. This pump chamber or bellows chamber collects and holds the product for dispensing. The trigger spray dispenser typically has an outlet check valve for blocking communication and flow of fluid through the nozzle and is responsive to the pressure inside the chamber. For the piston type trigger sprayers, as the trigger is compressed, it acts on the fluid in the chamber and the spring, increasing the pressure on the fluid. For the bellows spray dispenser, as the bellows is compressed, the pressure increases on the fluid. The increase in fluid pressure in either trigger spray dispenser acts to open the top outlet check valve. The top valve allows the product to be forced through the swirl chamber and out the nozzle to form a discharge pattern. An adjustable nozzle cap can be used to vary the pattern of the fluid dispensed. \n\nThe preferred trigger sprayers are the blue inserted Gualafi sprayer, available from Berry Plastics Corp., or the Calmar TS800-1Afi, TS1300fi, and TS-800-2fi, available from Calmar Inc., because of the fine uniform spray characteristics, spray volume, and pattern size. More pre› ferred are sprayers with precompression features and finer spray characteristics and even distribution, such as Yoshino sprayers from Japan. Any suitable bottle or container can be used with the trigger sprayer, the preferred bottle is a 17 fl-oz. bottle (about 500 ml) of good ergonomics similar in shape to the Cinchfi bottle. It can be made of any materials such as high density polyethylene, polypropylene, polyvinyl chloride, polystyrene, polyethylene terephthalate, glass, or any other material that forms bottles. Preferably, it is made of high density polyethylene or clear polyethylene tereph› thalate. \n\ning pump-spray dispensers, including, but not limited to: polyethylene; polypropylene; polyethyleneterephthalate; blends of polyethylene, vinyl acetate, and rubber elastomer. A preferred container is made of clear, e.g., polyethylene terephthalate. Other materials can include stainless steel. A more complete disclosure of commercially available dis› pensing devices appears in: U.S. Pat. No. 4,895,279, Schultz, issued Jan. 23, 1990; U.S. Pat. No. 4,735,347, Schultz et al., issued Apr. 5, 1988; and U.S. Pat. No. 4,274,560, Carter, issued Jun. 23, 1981; all of said references are herein incorporated by reference." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8619391345444501, + "doc_id": "fcf7020fa7d2f750dfb233d04399f4b07f63c5699e69adb5928d3767567e2853", + "edit_distance": 0.18211920529801323, + "f1_score": 0.9625468164794009, + "meteor": 0.9415315867863997, + "precision": 0.948339483394834, + "pred_md": "## (12) United States Patent Gebhart et al.\n\n## (54) AQUEOUS POLYMER BLEND COMPOSITION\n\n- (75) Inventors:\n\nMatthew Stewart Gebhart, New Britain, PA (US); Deborah Gay Fradkin, Horsham, PA (US); Bonnie Elizabeth Baker, Erdenheim, PA (US); John Michael Friel, Warminster, PA (US); Steven Scott Edwards, Horsham, PA (US); Caren Ann Puschak, Norristown, PA (US); Cindy Eckert, Collegeville, PA (US); Ralph Craig Even, Blue Bell, PA (US)\n\n- (73) Assignee:\n\nRohm and Haas Company, Philadelphia, PA (US)\n\n- ( *) Notice:\n\nSubject to any disclaimer, the term of this patent is extended or adjusted under 35 U.S.C. 154(b) by O days.\n\n- (21) Appl. No.:\n\n10/410,068\n\n- (22) Filed:\n\n## (65) Prior Publication Data\n\nApr. 9, 2003\n\nUS 2004/0010071 Al Jan. 15, 2004\n\n## Related U.S. Application Data\n\n- (60) Provisional application No. 60/417,855, filed on Oct. 11, 2002, and provisional application No. 60/371,192, filed on Apr. 9, 2002.\n- (51) Int. Cl.7\n\n...........................\n\nCOSL 33/04; C08L 33/02\n\n- (52) U.S. Cl.\n\n.......................\n\n524/515; 524/502; 524/556;\n\n524/560; 526/224; 526/229\n\n- (58) Field of Search\n\n................................. 524/502, 556,\n\n524/560, 515; 526/224, 229\n\n## (56) References Cited\n\n## U.S. PATENT DOCUMENTS\n\n5,308,890 A\n\n5,344,675 A\n\n5,567,773 A\n\n5/1994\n\nSnyder ....................... 523/201\n\n9/1994\n\nSnyder .................... 427 /388.4\n\n10/1996\n\nMcGee et al.\n\n.............. 525/221\n\nUS006930141B2\n\nUS006930141B2\n\n- (10) Patent No.:\n- (45) Date of Patent:\n\nUS 6,930,141 B2\n\nAug. 16, 2005\n\n## OTHER PUBLICATIONS\n\nCopendingApplication 10/162,456; filing date: Jun. 4, 2002. Copending Application 10/162,457; filing date Jun. 4, 2002. Copending Application 09/981,350, filing date Oct, 17, 2001.\n\nU.S. Appl. No. 10/162,456, filed Jun. 4, 2002.\n\nU.S. Appl. No. 10/162,457, filed Jun. 4, 2002.\n\nU.S. Appl. No. 09/981,350, filed Oct. 17, 2001.\n\n* cited by examiner\n\nPrimary Examiner-David W. Wu\n\nAssistant Examiner----Satya Sastri\n\n(74) Attorney, Agent, or Firm-Kim R. Jessum; Gary D. Greenblatt\n\n## (57) ABSTRACT\n\nAn aqueous polymer blend composition including a pre› dominant amount of soft polymer particles and a minor amount of hard polymer particles is provided. The soft polymer particles contain, as copolymerized units, 70 to 99.7% by weight monoethylenically unsaturated (meth) acrylic monomer and from 0.3 to 10% by weight monoet› hylenically unsaturated acid monomer, based on weight of soft polymer particles. The soft polymer particles are made by a select process including redox polymerization or poly› merization in the presence of excess unreacted monomer. The aqueous polymer blend composition is useful for pre› paring dry coatings having improved dirt pickup resistance and acceptable scrub resistance. A method is provided for preparing a dry coating from the aqueous polymer blend composition.\n\n## 10 Claims, No Drawings", + "recall": 0.9771863117870723, + "true_md": "# (10) Patent No.: US 6,930,141 B2\n\n# (45) Date of Patent: Aug. 16, 2005\n\n# (12) United States Patent\n\n# Gebhart et al.\n\n# (54) AQUEOUS POLYMER BLEND COMPOSITION\n\n- (75) Inventors: Matthew Stewart Gebhart, New Britain, PA (US); Deborah Gay Fradkin, Horsham, PA (US); Bonnie Elizabeth Baker, Erdenheim, PA (US); John Michael Friel, Warminster, PA (US); Steven Scott Edwards, Horsham, PA (US); Caren Ann Puschak, Norristown, PA (US); Cindy Eckert, Collegeville, PA (US); Ralph Craig Even, Blue Bell, PA (US) \n\n- (73) Assignee: Rohm and Haas Company, Philadelphia, PA (US) \n\n- ( *) Notice: Subject to any disclaimer, the term of this patent is extended or adjusted under 35 U.S.C. 154(b) by O days. \n\n- (21) Appl. No.: 10/410,068 \n\n- (22) Filed: Apr. 9, 2003 \n\n## (65) Prior Publication Data\n\nUS 2004/0010071 Al Jan. 15, 2004 \n\n## Related U.S. Application Data\n\n- (60) Provisional application No. 60/417,855, filed on Oct. 11, 2002, and provisional application No. 60/371,192, filed on Apr. 9, 2002. \n\n- (51) Int. Cl.7 ........................... COSL 33/04; C08L 33/02 \n\n- (52) U.S. Cl. ....................... 524/515; 524/502; 524/556; 524/560; 526/224; 526/229 \n\n- (58) Field of Search ................................. 524/502, 556, 524/560, 515; 526/224, 229 \n\n## (56) References Cited\n\n## U.S. PATENT DOCUMENTS\n\n## OTHER PUBLICATIONS\n\nCopendingApplication 10/162,456; filing date: Jun. 4, 2002. \n\nCopending Application 10/162,457; filing date Jun. 4, 2002. \n\nCopending Application 09/981,350, filing date Oct, 17, 2001. \n\nU.S. Appl. No. 10/162,456, filed Jun. 4, 2002. \n\nU.S. Appl. No. 10/162,457, filed Jun. 4, 2002. \n\nU.S. Appl. No. 09/981,350, filed Oct. 17, 2001. \n\n* cited by examiner \n\nPrimary Examiner-David W. Wu \n\n(74) Attorney, Agent, or Firm-Kim R. Jessum; Gary D. Greenblatt \n\nAssistant Examiner----Satya Sastri \n\n## (57) ABSTRACT\n\n## 10 Claims, No Drawings\n\nAn aqueous polymer blend composition including a pre› dominant amount of soft polymer particles and a minor amount of hard polymer particles is provided. The soft polymer particles contain, as copolymerized units, 70 to 99.7% by weight monoethylenically unsaturated (meth) acrylic monomer and from 0.3 to 10% by weight monoet› hylenically unsaturated acid monomer, based on weight of soft polymer particles. The soft polymer particles are made by a select process including redox polymerization or poly› merization in the presence of excess unreacted monomer. The aqueous polymer blend composition is useful for pre› paring dry coatings having improved dirt pickup resistance and acceptable scrub resistance. A method is provided for preparing a dry coating from the aqueous polymer blend composition. \n\n1111111111111111 11111 111111111111111 IIIII 111111111111111 IIIIII IIII IIII IIII US006930141B2" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9511749232045805, + "doc_id": "b60842921e0f48927146d63a7d2c4127e92235105d88044379d17d5bc9588b60", + "edit_distance": 0.4502967359050445, + "f1_score": 0.9657701711491443, + "meteor": 0.9157856563763948, + "precision": 0.9729064039408867, + "pred_md": "US 8,188,171 B2\n\n9\n\nThe pKa of the organic or inorganic cations is advanta› geously between 8 and 12.\n\nThe cations and, in particular, the amines corresponding to the ammoniums advantageously do not have a surfactant property; however, it is desirable for them to have good solubility, sufficient in any case to provide at the concentration of use the surfactant property of said compounds comprising an anionic group and advantageously an aqueous-phase polyeth› ylene glycol chain fragment.\n\nThe tertiary amines having at most 12 carbon atoms, advantageously at most 10 carbon atoms, preferably at most 8 carbon atoms per \"onium\" group (it will be noted that it is preferred that there is just one onium group per molecule), are preferred. The amines may comprise other groups and, in particular, the groups corresponding to the groups of the amino acids and cyclic ether groups, such as N-methylmor› pholine, or non-cyclic groups. These other groups are advan› tageously in a form which does not react with the isocyanate groups and do not significantly alter the solubility in the organic phase.\n\n5\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\nWhen the composition according to the invention com› prises the surfactant in anionic form, said surfactant is capable of reacting with the isocyanate groups. It may thus be advantageous to use the anionic surfactant according to the 25 present invention in a neutralised form so the pH induced during dissolution or bringing-into-contact in water is at least equal to 3, advantageously to 4, preferably to 5 and at most equal to 12, advantageously to 11, preferably to 10. However, this neutralisation is not necessary if most of the isocyanate groups of the (poly)isocyanate composition are masked, as will be mentioned hereinafter. 30\n\nwhen E represents phosphorus, it is desirable to use monoester and diester mixtures in a molar ratio of between %o and 10, advantageously between… and 4. Such mixtures may further comprise from 1 % to approximately 20%, but preferably no more than 10%, by mass of phosphoric acid, and from O to 5% of pyrophosphoric acid esters. Advanta› geously, the phosphoric acid is at least partly salified so as to fall within the recommended pH ranges.\n\nIn monoesters and diesters, a portion of the oxyethylene groups may be replaced with oxypropylene groups. Never› theless, the majority of the groups are preferably oxyethylene groups.\n\nThe presence of triester compounds is possible, provided that these compounds are not too light. In general, at least one of the three ester groups has to have a carbon number greater than 5, preferably greater than 6, or at least two of the three ester groups have to have a carbon number greater than 2.\n\nThe surfactants of the above-defined Formula (I) may be kept in their acid form (the charge oin this case being replaced by the OH group) if they are introduced into the polyisocyanate formulation after the isocyanate group mask› ing reaction.\n\nAccording to a second embodiment, the surfactant is a nonionic surfactant.\n\nIn general, if a nonionic surfactant is used, it has hydro› philic groups such as, for example, oxyethylene groups in sufficient number, generally greater than about 10. This sur› factant also has a hydrophobic portion which may be selected from the aromatic groups carrying aliphatic chains or simply from aliphatic chains having a number of carbon atoms between 8 and 50. Other hydrophobic units such as silicone or fluorinated units may also be used for specific applications.\n\nThere may be cited, by way of non-limiting examples, the derivatives of polyoxyalkylene esters of fatty acids, ethoxy-\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n60\n\n65\n\n10\n\nlated alkylphenols, ester-phosphates having a polyalkyloxy alkylene glycol chain (such as polyethoxy and/or propoxy ethylene glycols, for example) and tristyrylphenols having a polyethylene oxide chain.\n\nParticularly preferred is a surfactant selected from one of the condensates of poly( ethylene oxide) and/or poly(propy› lene oxide) with alcohols, polyols, alkylphenols, fatty acid esters, fatty acid amides and fatty amines, and sugars, in particular sugar esters.\n\nAccording to the invention, use may also be made of a mixture of (neutralised or non-neutralised) anionic surfac› tants and/or nonionic surfactants.\n\nAs indicated hereinbefore, the presence of surfactant in the composition according to the invention allows the impact resistance properties to be improved and the hardness/flex› ibility compromise to be optimised. In the present invention, the object of the surfactant is therefore not to obtain an emulsion, still less to obtain a stable emulsion.\n\nThus, the amount of surfactant or the mixture of surfactants has to be relatively low in relation to the composition of (poly)isocyanates. This amount is advantageously less than 20% by weight based on the composition of (poly)isocyan› ates, preferably less than 15% by weight, and more preferably less than 10%, for example less than 8% by weight, or even less than 6% by weight.\n\nSaid amount is at least equal to 0.1 %, preferably at least equal to 0.25%, more particularly at least equal to 5% by weight based on the weight of the composition of (poly) isocyanates.\n\nIf the surfactant corresponds to one of the above-defined Formulae (I), (II), (II') or (III), it is also desirable for the amount of said surfactant(s) present in the composition according to the invention to correspond to a value ofbetween 102 and 1, advantageously between 5. 102 and 0.5 atoms of E per litre of solution.\n\nThus, the ratio by mass between the composition of (poly) isocyanates and said surfactant( s) is advantageously at least equal to 1 %, preferably 2%, advantageously 4%, and at most equal to 30%, preferably to 20%, advantageously to 10%. Thus, this ratio by mass is advantageously between 1 % and 30%, preferably between 2% and 20%, advantageously between 4% and 10%.\n\nThe (poly)isocyanate composition included in the composition according to the invention consists of any isocyanate and polyisocyanate, alone or mixed with one or more isocy› anates and/or polyisocyanates. The term \"(poly)isocyanate\" must be understood in this context as encompassing the terms \"isocyanate\" and \"polyisocyanate\".\n\nThe preferred (poly)isocyanates are selected from the homocondensation or heterocondensation products of alky› lene diisocyanate including, in particular, \"biuret\"-type and \"trimer\" -type products or even \"prepolymers\" having an isocyanate group including, in particular, urea, urethane, allo› phanate, ester, amide, acylurea, isocyanurate, oxadiazinetri› one, imino-dimer, imino-trimer, (iminotriazadione), imino› oxadiazinedione (also known as asymmetrical trimer), diazetidinedione (also known as dimer) groups and from the mixtures containing the same.\n\nThe polyisocyanate compounds may also comprise true carbamate groups (R---0-C(=O)-NH 2 ) or preferably cyclic epoxy groups or carbonate groups.\n\nThe compounds may, for example, be polyisocyanates sold by Rhodia under the name \"Tolonatefi\".\n\nGenerally, the preferred (poly )isocyanates are the products ofhomocondensation or heterocondensation of the following", + "recall": 0.9587378640776699, + "true_md": "US 8,188,171 B2 \n\n10 \n\n9 \n\nThe pKa of the organic or inorganic cations is advanta› geously between 8 and 12. \n\nThe cations and, in particular, the amines corresponding to the ammoniums advantageously do not have a surfactant property; however, it is desirable for them to have good solu- bility, sufficient in any case to provide at the concentration of use the surfactant property of said compounds comprising an anionic group and advantageously an aqueous-phase polyeth› ylene glycol chain fragment. \n\nThe tertiary amines having at most 12 carbon atoms, advantageously at most 10 carbon atoms, preferably at most 8 carbon atoms per \"onium\" group (it will be noted that it is preferred that there is just one onium group per molecule), are preferred. The amines may comprise other groups and, in particular, the groups corresponding to the groups of the amino acids and cyclic ether groups, such as N-methylmor› pholine, or non-cyclic groups. These other groups are advan› tageously in a form which does not react with the isocyanate groups and do not significantly alter the solubility in the organic phase. \n\nWhen the composition according to the invention com› prises the surfactant in anionic form, said surfactant is capable of reacting with the isocyanate groups. It may thus be advantageous to use the anionic surfactant according to the present invention in a neutralised form so the pH induced during dissolution or bringing-into-contact in water is at least equal to 3, advantageously to 4, preferably to 5 and at most equal to 12, advantageously to 11, preferably to 10. However, this neutralisation is not necessary if most of the isocyanate groups of the (poly)isocyanate composition are masked, as will be mentioned hereinafter. \n\nwhen E represents phosphorus, it is desirable to use monoester and diester mixtures in a molar ratio of between ‰o and 10, advantageously between… and 4. Such mixtures may further comprise from 1 % to approximately 20%, but preferably no more than 10%, by mass of phosphoric acid, and from O to 5% of pyrophosphoric acid esters. Advanta› geously, the phosphoric acid is at least partly salified so as to fall within the recommended pH ranges. \n\nIn monoesters and diesters, a portion of the oxyethylene groups may be replaced with oxypropylene groups. Never› theless, the majority of the groups are preferably oxyethylene groups. \n\nThe presence of triester compounds is possible, provided that these compounds are not too light. In general, at least one of the three ester groups has to have a carbon number greater than 5, preferably greater than 6, or at least two of the three ester groups have to have a carbon number greater than 2. \n\nThe surfactants of the above-defined Formula (I) may be kept in their acid form (the charge o- in this case being replaced by the OH group) if they are introduced into the polyisocyanate formulation after the isocyanate group mask› ing reaction. \n\nAccording to a second embodiment, the surfactant is a nonionic surfactant. \n\nIn general, if a nonionic surfactant is used, it has hydro› philic groups such as, for example, oxyethylene groups in sufficient number, generally greater than about 10. This sur› factant also has a hydrophobic portion which may be selected from the aromatic groups carrying aliphatic chains or simply from aliphatic chains having a number of carbon atoms between 8 and 50. Other hydrophobic units such as silicone or fluorinated units may also be used for specific applications. \n\nThere may be cited, by way of non-limiting examples, the derivatives of polyoxyalkylene esters of fatty acids, ethoxy-\n\nGenerally, the preferred (poly )isocyanates are the products ofhomocondensation or heterocondensation of the following \n\nThe compounds may, for example, be polyisocyanates sold by Rhodia under the name \"Tolonatefi\". \n\nThe polyisocyanate compounds may also comprise true carbamate groups (R---0-C(=O)-NH$_{2}$ ) or preferably cyclic epoxy groups or carbonate groups. \n\nThe preferred (poly)isocyanates are selected from the homocondensation or heterocondensation products of alky› lene diisocyanate including, in particular, \"biuret\"-type and \"trimer\" -type products or even \"prepolymers\" having an iso- cyanate group including, in particular, urea, urethane, allo› phanate, ester, amide, acylurea, isocyanurate, oxadiazinetri› one, imino-dimer, imino-trimer, (iminotriazadione), imino› oxadiazinedione (also known as asymmetrical trimer), diazetidinedione (also known as dimer) groups and from the mixtures containing the same. \n\nThe (poly)isocyanate composition included in the compo- sition according to the invention consists of any isocyanate and polyisocyanate, alone or mixed with one or more isocy› anates and/or polyisocyanates. The term \"(poly)isocyanate\" must be understood in this context as encompassing the terms \"isocyanate\" and \"polyisocyanate\". \n\nThus, the ratio by mass between the composition of (poly) isocyanates and said surfactant( s) is advantageously at least equal to 1 %, preferably 2%, advantageously 4%, and at most equal to 30%, preferably to 20%, advantageously to 10%. Thus, this ratio by mass is advantageously between 1 % and 30%, preferably between 2% and 20%, advantageously between 4% and 10%. \n\nIf the surfactant corresponds to one of the above-defined Formulae (I), (II), (II’) or (III), it is also desirable for the amount of said surfactant(s) present in the composition according to the invention to correspond to a value ofbetween 10-$^{2 }$and 1, advantageously between 5. 10-$^{2 }$and 0.5 atoms of E per litre of solution. \n\nSaid amount is at least equal to 0.1 %, preferably at least equal to 0.25%, more particularly at least equal to 5% by weight based on the weight of the composition of (poly) isocyanates. \n\nThus, the amount of surfactant or the mixture of surfactants has to be relatively low in relation to the composition of (poly)isocyanates. This amount is advantageously less than 20% by weight based on the composition of (poly)isocyan› ates, preferably less than 15% by weight, and more preferably less than 10%, for example less than 8% by weight, or even less than 6% by weight. \n\nAs indicated hereinbefore, the presence of surfactant in the composition according to the invention allows the impact resistance properties to be improved and the hardness/flex› ibility compromise to be optimised. In the present invention, the object of the surfactant is therefore not to obtain an emul- sion, still less to obtain a stable emulsion. \n\nAccording to the invention, use may also be made of a mixture of (neutralised or non-neutralised) anionic surfac› tants and/or nonionic surfactants. \n\nParticularly preferred is a surfactant selected from one of the condensates of poly( ethylene oxide) and/or poly(propy› lene oxide) with alcohols, polyols, alkylphenols, fatty acid esters, fatty acid amides and fatty amines, and sugars, in particular sugar esters. \n\nlated alkylphenols, ester-phosphates having a polyalkyloxy alkylene glycol chain (such as polyethoxy and/or propoxy ethylene glycols, for example) and tristyrylphenols having a polyethylene oxide chain." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9967301403236662, + "doc_id": "f8af1e6e8e1db9ffb5339e859558e89ff7aa4b65db45805ec450af4059b424d3", + "edit_distance": 0.008904719501335707, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9958703969578512, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "US 2009/0197849 Al\n\nzankiren hydrochloride, zofenoprilat arginine; pharmaceuti› cally acceptable derivatives thereof, and combinations thereof.\n\n[0155] Of particular interest are a-adrenergic antagonists such as doxazosin, phenoxybenzamine, prazosin, and tera› zosin; angiotensin converting enzyme inhibitors such as benazepril, benazeprilat, enalapril, enelaprilat, fosinopril, fosinoprilat, lisinopril, perindopril, perindoprilat, quinapril, quinaprilat, ramipril, and ramiprilat; ~-blockers such as carvedilol, nadolol, and timolol; and calcium channel block› ers such as amlodipine, felodipine, isradipine, nicardipine, nifedipine, and nimodipine; as well as pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof.\n\n[0156] Derivatives of the aforementioned compounds, such as pharmaceutically acceptable salts and esters are also of particular interest, for example, doxazosin mesylate, enala› pril maleate, fosinopril sodium, losartan potassium, prazosin HCl, terazosin HCl, as well as those included in the list above.\n\n[0157] The methods and compositions of the invention are expected to provide an enhanced flux of antihypertensive agents of at least about 30-fold, preferably at least about 50-fold, and more preferably about 63-fold, as compared to the flux observed in the absence of the basic enhancers described herein.\n\n[0158] 0. Antiparkinsonism Drugs\n\n[0159] Suitable antiparkinsonism drugs that may be admin› istered using the methods, compositions and systems of the invention include, but are not limited to: anticholinergics such as amantadine, benztropine, beperiden, cycrimine, procycli› dine, and trihexyphenidyl; antidyskinetics such as selegiline; cabergoline; COMT inhibitors such as entacapone and tolca› pone, both of which are administered with levodopa/carbi› dopa; diphenhydramine; dopamine receptor agonists such as bromocriptine, levodopa/carbidopa, metoclopramide, per› golide, pramipexole and ropinirole; as well as other com› pounds such as diphenhydramine and hyoscyamine.\n\n[0160] Preferred antiparkinsonism drugs include benz› tropine, biperiden, bromocriptine, carbidopa, levodopa, diphenhydramine, hyoscyamine, pergolide, pramipexole, ropinirole, selegiline, and trihexyphenidyl.\n\n[0161] Derivatives of these compounds, such as pharma› ceutically acceptable salts and esters are also of particular interest, for example, amantadine HCl, benztropine mesylate, biperiden HCl, bromocriptine mesylate, carbidopa, levodopa, diphenhydramine HCl, hyoscyamine sulfate, pergolide mesylate, pramipexole dihydrochloride, ropinirole HCl, sel› egiline HCl, and trihexyphenidyl HCI.\n\n[0162] P. Antipsychotic Agents\n\n[0163] Suitable antipsychotics agents that may be admin› istered using the methods, compositions and systems of the invention include, but are not limited to: acetophenazine maleate, alentemol hydrobromide, alpertine, azaperone, batelapine maleate, benperidol, benzindopyrine hydrochlo› ride, brofbxine, bromperidol and bromperidol decanoate, buspirone, butaclamol hydrochloride, butaperazine and butaperazine maleate, carphenazine maleate, carvotroline hydrochloride, chlorpromazine and chlorpromazine hydro› chloride, chlorprothixene, cinperene, cintriamide, clomacran phosphate, clopenthixol, clopimozide, clopipazan mesylate, cloroperone hydrochloride, clothiapine, clothixamide male› ate, clozapine, cyclophenazine hydrochloride, droperidol, etazolate hydrochloride, fenimide, flucindole, flumezapine, fluphenazine decanoate and fluphenazine enanthate and fluphenazine hydrochloride, fluspiperone, fluspirilene,\n\n15\n\nAug. 6, 2009\n\nflutroline, gevotroline hydrochloride, halopemide, haloperi› dol and haloperidol decanoate, iloperidone, imidoline hydro› chloride, lenperone, loxapine, mazapertine succinate, mesoridazine and mesoridazine besylate, metiapine, milen› perone, milipertine, molindone and molindone hydrochlo› ride, naranol hydrochloride, neflumozidehydrochloride, oca› peridone, olanzapine, oxiperomide, penfluridol, pentiapine maleate, perphenazine, pimozide, pinoxepin hydrochloride, pipamperone, piperacetazine, pipotiazine palniitate, piquin› done hydrochloride, prochlorperazine and prochlorperazine edisylate and prochlorperazine maleate, promazine hydro› chloride, quetiapine and quetiapine fumarate, remoxipride and remoxipride hydrochloride, rimcazole hydrochloride, risperidone, seperidol hydrochloride, sertindole, setoperone, spiperone, thioridazine and thioridazine hydrochloride, thio› thixene and thiothixene hydrochloride, tioperidone hydro› chloride, tiospirone hydrochloride, trifluoroperazine and tri› fluoperazine hydrochloride, trifluperidol, triflupromazine and triflupromazine hydrochloride, ziprasidone and ziprasi› done hydrochloride.\n\n[0164] Derivatives of these compounds, such as pharma› ceutically acceptable salts and esters are also of particular interest, for example, trifluoperazine HCl, as well as those included in the list above.\n\n[0165] Preferred antipsychotics are atypical antipsychotic agents (i.e., drugs that act on different neurotransmitters than the conventions antipsychotic agents) such as clozapine, olanzapine, quetiapine fumarate, and risperidone; conven› tional antipsychotic agents such as chlorpromazine, fluphenazine, haloperidol, loxapine, mesoridazine, per› phenazine, pimozide, prochlorperazine (and other phenothi› azines), thiothixene and trifluoroperazine; and related drugs such as buspirone.\n\n[0166] Most preferred antipsychotic agents include bus› pirone, olanzapine, pimozide, prochlorperazine, risperidone and trifluoroperazine.\n\n[0167] The methods and compositions of the invention are expected to provide an enhanced flux of antipsychotic agents of at least about 15-fold, preferably at least about 35-fold, as compared to the flux observed in the absence of the basic enhancers described herein.\n\n[0168] Q. Bone Density Regulators\n\n[0169] Suitable bone density regulators that may be admin› istered using the methods, compositions and systems of the invention include, but are not limited to: alendronate, calci› tonin, etidronate, pamidronate, raloxifene, risedronate, and tiludronate. Derivatives of these compounds, such as pharma› ceutically acceptable salts and esters are also of particular interest, for example, alendronate sodium, etidronate sodium and etidronate disodium, pamidronate disodium, raloxifene HCl, risedronate sodium, and tiludronate sodium. Preferred bone density regulators include alendronate, etidronate, ral› oxifene, and risedronate, tiludronate, and pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof.\n\n[0170] The methods and compositions of the invention are expected to provide an enhanced flux of bone density regu› lators of at least about 2-fold, preferably at least about 3-fold, as compared to the flux observed in the absence of the basic enhancers described herein.\n\n[0171] R. Analgesic Agents\n\n[0172] Suitable analgesic agents that may be administered using the methods, compositions and systems of the invention include, but are not limited to: capsaicin, indomethacin, and centrally acting analgesics such as clonidine and tramadol. Of", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Aug. 6, 2009 \n\n15 \n\nUS 2009/0197849 Al \n\nzankiren hydrochloride, zofenoprilat arginine; pharmaceuti› cally acceptable derivatives thereof, and combinations thereof. \n\n[0155] Of particular interest are a-adrenergic antagonists such as doxazosin, phenoxybenzamine, prazosin, and tera› zosin; angiotensin converting enzyme inhibitors such as benazepril, benazeprilat, enalapril, enelaprilat, fosinopril, fosinoprilat, lisinopril, perindopril, perindoprilat, quinapril, quinaprilat, ramipril, and ramiprilat; ~-blockers such as carvedilol, nadolol, and timolol; and calcium channel block› ers such as amlodipine, felodipine, isradipine, nicardipine, nifedipine, and nimodipine; as well as pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof. \n\n[0156] Derivatives of the aforementioned compounds, such as pharmaceutically acceptable salts and esters are also of particular interest, for example, doxazosin mesylate, enala› pril maleate, fosinopril sodium, losartan potassium, prazosin HCl, terazosin HCl, as well as those included in the list above. \n\n[0157] The methods and compositions of the invention are expected to provide an enhanced flux of antihypertensive agents of at least about 30-fold, preferably at least about 50-fold, and more preferably about 63-fold, as compared to the flux observed in the absence of the basic enhancers described herein. \n\n[0158] 0. Antiparkinsonism Drugs \n\n[0159] Suitable antiparkinsonism drugs that may be admin› istered using the methods, compositions and systems of the invention include, but are not limited to: anticholinergics such as amantadine, benztropine, beperiden, cycrimine, procycli› dine, and trihexyphenidyl; antidyskinetics such as selegiline; cabergoline; COMT inhibitors such as entacapone and tolca› pone, both of which are administered with levodopa/carbi› dopa; diphenhydramine; dopamine receptor agonists such as bromocriptine, levodopa/carbidopa, metoclopramide, per› golide, pramipexole and ropinirole; as well as other com› pounds such as diphenhydramine and hyoscyamine. \n\n[0160] Preferred antiparkinsonism drugs include benz› tropine, biperiden, bromocriptine, carbidopa, levodopa, diphenhydramine, hyoscyamine, pergolide, pramipexole, ropinirole, selegiline, and trihexyphenidyl. \n\n[0161] Derivatives of these compounds, such as pharma› ceutically acceptable salts and esters are also of particular interest, for example, amantadine HCl, benztropine mesylate, biperiden HCl, bromocriptine mesylate, carbidopa, levodopa, diphenhydramine HCl, hyoscyamine sulfate, pergolide mesylate, pramipexole dihydrochloride, ropinirole HCl, sel› egiline HCl, and trihexyphenidyl HCI. \n\n[0162] P. Antipsychotic Agents \n\n[0163] Suitable antipsychotics agents that may be admin› istered using the methods, compositions and systems of the invention include, but are not limited to: acetophenazine maleate, alentemol hydrobromide, alpertine, azaperone, batelapine maleate, benperidol, benzindopyrine hydrochlo› ride, brofbxine, bromperidol and bromperidol decanoate, buspirone, butaclamol hydrochloride, butaperazine and butaperazine maleate, carphenazine maleate, carvotroline hydrochloride, chlorpromazine and chlorpromazine hydro› chloride, chlorprothixene, cinperene, cintriamide, clomacran phosphate, clopenthixol, clopimozide, clopipazan mesylate, cloroperone hydrochloride, clothiapine, clothixamide male› ate, clozapine, cyclophenazine hydrochloride, droperidol, etazolate hydrochloride, fenimide, flucindole, flumezapine, fluphenazine decanoate and fluphenazine enanthate and fluphenazine hydrochloride, fluspiperone, fluspirilene, \n\nflutroline, gevotroline hydrochloride, halopemide, haloperi› dol and haloperidol decanoate, iloperidone, imidoline hydro› chloride, lenperone, loxapine, mazapertine succinate, mesoridazine and mesoridazine besylate, metiapine, milen› perone, milipertine, molindone and molindone hydrochlo› ride, naranol hydrochloride, neflumozidehydrochloride, oca› peridone, olanzapine, oxiperomide, penfluridol, pentiapine maleate, perphenazine, pimozide, pinoxepin hydrochloride, pipamperone, piperacetazine, pipotiazine palniitate, piquin› done hydrochloride, prochlorperazine and prochlorperazine edisylate and prochlorperazine maleate, promazine hydro› chloride, quetiapine and quetiapine fumarate, remoxipride and remoxipride hydrochloride, rimcazole hydrochloride, risperidone, seperidol hydrochloride, sertindole, setoperone, spiperone, thioridazine and thioridazine hydrochloride, thio› thixene and thiothixene hydrochloride, tioperidone hydro› chloride, tiospirone hydrochloride, trifluoroperazine and tri› fluoperazine hydrochloride, trifluperidol, triflupromazine and triflupromazine hydrochloride, ziprasidone and ziprasi› done hydrochloride. \n\n[0164] Derivatives of these compounds, such as pharma› ceutically acceptable salts and esters are also of particular interest, for example, trifluoperazine HCl, as well as those included in the list above. \n\n[0165] Preferred antipsychotics are atypical antipsychotic agents (i.e., drugs that act on different neurotransmitters than the conventions antipsychotic agents) such as clozapine, olanzapine, quetiapine fumarate, and risperidone; conven› tional antipsychotic agents such as chlorpromazine, fluphenazine, haloperidol, loxapine, mesoridazine, per› phenazine, pimozide, prochlorperazine (and other phenothi› azines), thiothixene and trifluoroperazine; and related drugs such as buspirone. \n\n[0166] Most preferred antipsychotic agents include bus› pirone, olanzapine, pimozide, prochlorperazine, risperidone and trifluoroperazine. \n\n[0167] The methods and compositions of the invention are expected to provide an enhanced flux of antipsychotic agents of at least about 15-fold, preferably at least about 35-fold, as compared to the flux observed in the absence of the basic enhancers described herein. \n\n[0168] Q. Bone Density Regulators \n\n[0169] Suitable bone density regulators that may be admin› istered using the methods, compositions and systems of the invention include, but are not limited to: alendronate, calci› tonin, etidronate, pamidronate, raloxifene, risedronate, and tiludronate. Derivatives of these compounds, such as pharma› ceutically acceptable salts and esters are also of particular interest, for example, alendronate sodium, etidronate sodium and etidronate disodium, pamidronate disodium, raloxifene HCl, risedronate sodium, and tiludronate sodium. Preferred bone density regulators include alendronate, etidronate, ral› oxifene, and risedronate, tiludronate, and pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof. \n\n[0170] The methods and compositions of the invention are expected to provide an enhanced flux of bone density regu› lators of at least about 2-fold, preferably at least about 3-fold, as compared to the flux observed in the absence of the basic enhancers described herein. \n\n[0171] R. Analgesic Agents \n\n[0172] Suitable analgesic agents that may be administered using the methods, compositions and systems of the invention include, but are not limited to: capsaicin, indomethacin, and centrally acting analgesics such as clonidine and tramadol. Of" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9900655295540396, + "doc_id": "c0b8a222360563cca0eb8eb35b5655307a097d3a69a9f12417af53e32bada530", + "edit_distance": 0.7863501483679525, + "f1_score": 0.9981308411214954, + "meteor": 0.6509190418607936, + "precision": 0.996268656716418, + "pred_md": "US 2019/0287691 Al\n\nphase) for various embodiments. Thus, each process dis› closed herein regarding a chelator separation, is envisioned not only as an option for collecting the metal associated with the chelator (in the aqueous phase) but also as an option for collecting the metal that is separated therefrom (in the organic phase). This applies for all embodiments provided herein.\n\n[0250] Although this disclosure is in the context of certain embodiments and examples, those skilled in the art will understand that the present disclosure extends beyond the specifically disclosed embodiments to other alternative embodiments and/or uses of the embodiments and obvious modifications and equivalents thereof. In addition, while several variations of the embodiments have been shown and described in detail, other modifications, which are within the scope of this disclosure, will be readily apparent to those of skill in the art based upon this disclosure. It is also contem› plated that various combinations or sub-combinations of the specific features and aspects of the embodiments may be made and still fall within the scope of the disclosure. It should be understood that various features and aspects of the disclosed embodiments can be combined with, or substituted for, one another in order to form varying modes or embodi› ments of the disclosure. Thus, it is intended that the scope of the present disclosure herein disclosed should not be limited by the particular disclosed embodiments described above. For example, chemical conditions (e.g., acidity, concentra› tions, etc.) could be carried to match those of interest for various applications. In some embodiments, the ligand 3,4, 3-LI(l,2-HOPO) could also be immobilized on a solid support if the chromatographic technique is preferred over the liquid-liquid extraction methods. Thus, in some embodi› ments, any extraction process described herein can instead be performed instead via a solid support and a chromato› graphic technique. Additionally, one or more embodiments herein can be combined with any one or more of the other embodiments herein.\n\n[0251] In particular embodiments, chelators can include a number of metal-coordinating atoms that bond with a metal. The metal-coordinating atoms can bond with metals having cations with a +1 charge. The metal-coordinating atoms can also bond with metals having cations with a +2 charge. Additionally, the metal-coordinating atoms can bond with metals having cations with a +3 charge. Further, the metal› coordinating atoms can bond with metals having cations with a +4 charge. The chelators described herein can, in some cases, include siderophores.\n\n[0252] In particular embodiments, the metal-coordinating atoms of the chelators described herein can be included in one or more functional groups of the chelators. In some examples, the metal-coordinating atoms of the chelators can be included in one or more catecholate (CAM) groups. A CAM group can include at least a phenyl ring substituted by hydroxyl groups on adjacent carbon atoms. According to some illustrative embodiments, a CAM group can include:\n\nOH.\n\n17\n\nSep. 19,2019\n\n[0253] In some embodiments, the metal-coordinating atoms of the chelators can be included in one or more hydroxamate (HA) groups. According to some embodi› ments, a HA group can include:\n\nwhere Ra can include H or an alkyl group including no greater than 5 carbon atoms. For example, Ra can include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group, a sec-butyl group, an iso-butyl group, a tert-butyl group, a pentyl group, a tert-pentyl group, a neopentyl group, or an iso-pentyl group.\n\n[0254] In some embodiments, the metal-coordinating atoms of the chelators can be included in one or more hydroxypyridinone (HOPO) groups. A HOPO group can include a pyridinone ring substituted by a hydroxyl group on the N atom. In some cases, a HOPO group can include a 1,2-HOPO group. According to some illustrative embodi› ments, a 1,2-HOPO group can include:\n\n[0255] The metal-coordinating atoms of the chelators can be included in combinations of two or more of one or more CAM groups, one or more HA groups, or one or more HOPO groups. In illustrative examples, the metal-coordi› nating atoms of the chelators can be included in one or more CAM groups and one or more HA groups. In other illustra› tive examples, the metal-coordinating atoms of the chelators can be included in one or more CAM groups and one or more HOPO groups. In additional illustrative examples, the metal-coordinating atoms of the chelators can be included in one or more HA groups and one or more HOPO groups. In further illustrative examples, the metal-coordinating atoms of the chelators can be included in one or more HA groups, one or more CAM groups, and one or more HOPO groups.\n\n[0256] The chelators can include a number of functional groups having metal-coordinating atoms with the functional groups being bonded to a linear scaffold or a branched scaffold. The functional groups and/or substituents described herein may be substituted or unsubstituted. Sub› stituted functional groups and/or substituents can be substi› tuted by one or more hydroxyl groups, one or more alkyl groups having no greater than 10 carbon atoms, one or more amine groups, one or more thiol groups, one or more ester groups, or combinations thereof.\n\n[0257] The scaffold can include one or more amine groups. An amine group can include a nitrogen atom bonded to three substituents. In particular embodiments, an amine", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "US 2019/0287691 Al \n\n17 \n\nSep. 19,2019 \n\n[0257] The scaffold can include one or more amine groups. An amine group can include a nitrogen atom bonded to three substituents. In particular embodiments, an amine \n\n[0256] The chelators can include a number of functional groups having metal-coordinating atoms with the functional groups being bonded to a linear scaffold or a branched scaffold. The functional groups and/or substituents described herein may be substituted or unsubstituted. Sub› stituted functional groups and/or substituents can be substi› tuted by one or more hydroxyl groups, one or more alkyl groups having no greater than 10 carbon atoms, one or more amine groups, one or more thiol groups, one or more ester groups, or combinations thereof. \n\n[0255] The metal-coordinating atoms of the chelators can be included in combinations of two or more of one or more CAM groups, one or more HA groups, or one or more HOPO groups. In illustrative examples, the metal-coordi› nating atoms of the chelators can be included in one or more CAM groups and one or more HA groups. In other illustra› tive examples, the metal-coordinating atoms of the chelators can be included in one or more CAM groups and one or more HOPO groups. In additional illustrative examples, the metal-coordinating atoms of the chelators can be included in one or more HA groups and one or more HOPO groups. In further illustrative examples, the metal-coordinating atoms of the chelators can be included in one or more HA groups, one or more CAM groups, and one or more HOPO groups. \n\n[0252] In particular embodiments, the metal-coordinating atoms of the chelators described herein can be included in one or more functional groups of the chelators. In some examples, the metal-coordinating atoms of the chelators can be included in one or more catecholate (CAM) groups. A CAM group can include at least a phenyl ring substituted by hydroxyl groups on adjacent carbon atoms. According to some illustrative embodiments, a CAM group can include: \n\n[0251] In particular embodiments, chelators can include a number of metal-coordinating atoms that bond with a metal. The metal-coordinating atoms can bond with metals having cations with a +1 charge. The metal-coordinating atoms can also bond with metals having cations with a +2 charge. Additionally, the metal-coordinating atoms can bond with metals having cations with a +3 charge. Further, the metal› coordinating atoms can bond with metals having cations with a +4 charge. The chelators described herein can, in some cases, include siderophores. \n\n[0254] In some embodiments, the metal-coordinating atoms of the chelators can be included in one or more hydroxypyridinone (HOPO) groups. A HOPO group can include a pyridinone ring substituted by a hydroxyl group on the N atom. In some cases, a HOPO group can include a 1,2-HOPO group. According to some illustrative embodi› ments, a 1,2-HOPO group can include: \n\nwhere Ra can include H or an alkyl group including no greater than 5 carbon atoms. For example, Ra can include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group, a sec-butyl group, an iso-butyl group, a tert-butyl group, a pentyl group, a tert-pentyl group, a neopentyl group, or an iso-pentyl group. \n\n[0250] Although this disclosure is in the context of certain embodiments and examples, those skilled in the art will understand that the present disclosure extends beyond the specifically disclosed embodiments to other alternative embodiments and/or uses of the embodiments and obvious modifications and equivalents thereof. In addition, while several variations of the embodiments have been shown and described in detail, other modifications, which are within the scope of this disclosure, will be readily apparent to those of skill in the art based upon this disclosure. It is also contem› plated that various combinations or sub-combinations of the specific features and aspects of the embodiments may be made and still fall within the scope of the disclosure. It should be understood that various features and aspects of the disclosed embodiments can be combined with, or substituted for, one another in order to form varying modes or embodi› ments of the disclosure. Thus, it is intended that the scope of the present disclosure herein disclosed should not be limited by the particular disclosed embodiments described above. For example, chemical conditions (e.g., acidity, concentra› tions, etc.) could be carried to match those of interest for various applications. In some embodiments, the ligand 3,4, 3-LI(l,2-HOPO) could also be immobilized on a solid support if the chromatographic technique is preferred over the liquid-liquid extraction methods. Thus, in some embodi› ments, any extraction process described herein can instead be performed instead via a solid support and a chromato› graphic technique. Additionally, one or more embodiments herein can be combined with any one or more of the other embodiments herein. \n\nphase) for various embodiments. Thus, each process dis› closed herein regarding a chelator separation, is envisioned not only as an option for collecting the metal associated with the chelator (in the aqueous phase) but also as an option for collecting the metal that is separated therefrom (in the organic phase). This applies for all embodiments provided herein. \n\n[0253] In some embodiments, the metal-coordinating atoms of the chelators can be included in one or more hydroxamate (HA) groups. According to some embodi› ments, a HA group can include:" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.1307929141289792, + "doc_id": "b086f90c6ef7cd8db02cc594c04c741f4b43f72f8ee029d27d03a00c54227bb1", + "edit_distance": 0.875, + "f1_score": 0.4137931034482758, + "meteor": 0.7952146375791698, + "precision": 0.2608695652173913, + "pred_md": "47\n\n48\n\n-continued\n\n-continued\n\n'CD\n\nCD\n\nUS 9,164,380 B2\n\n(al-4-2)\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n60\n\n65", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "US 9,164,380 B2 \n\n47 \n\n48 \n\n-continued \n\n-continued" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8924466094659217, + "doc_id": "899b57980f899e9aff6b08a7f52c08fa2d92298a2f92638b99f072b6165946df", + "edit_distance": 0.37153419593345655, + "f1_score": 0.9718004338394793, + "meteor": 0.8670442392058607, + "precision": 0.9613733905579399, + "pred_md": "## c12) United States Patent Weaver et al.\n\n## (54) LATENT CURING AGENT COMPATIBLE WITH LOW PH FRAC FLUIDS\n\n- (71) Applicant:\n\nHalliburton Energy Services, Inc., Houston, TX (US)\n\n- (72) Inventors:\n\nJim D. Weaver, Duncan, OK (US); Philip D. Nguyen, Houston, TX (US); Dipti Singh, Kingwood, TX (US)\n\n- (73) Assignee:\n\nHalliburton Energy Services, Inc., Houston, TX (US)\n\n- ( *) Notice:\n\nSubject to any disclaimer, the term ofthis patent is extended or adjusted under 35 U.S.C. 154(b) by 60 days.\n\n- (21) Appl. No.:\n\n14/888,438\n\n- (22) PCT Filed:\n\nSep. 20, 2013\n\n- (86) PCT No.:\n\nPCT /US2013/060885\n\n- § 371 (c)(l),\n- (2) Date:\n\nNov. 1, 2015\n\n- (87) PCT Pub. No.:\n\nWO2015/041671\n\nPCT Pub. Date:\n\nMar. 26, 2015\n\n## (65) Prior Publication Data\n\n- (51) Int. Cl.\n- (52) U.S. Cl.\n\nUS 2016/0108306 Al\n\nApr. 21, 2016\n\nE21B 43126\n\nE21B 33/138\n\n(2006.01)\n\n(2006.01)\n\n(Continued)\n\nCPC ............ C09K 815755 (2013.01); C09K 8/502 (2013.01); C09K 8/5086 (2013.01); C09K 81516 (2013.01); C09K 8/565 (2013.01); C09K 8/64 (2013.01); C09K 8/68 (2013.01); C09K\n\nUS009840656B2\n\nUS009840656B2\n\n- (IO) Patent No.:\n\nUS 9,840,656 B2\n\nDec. 12, 2017\n\n- (45) Date of Patent:\n\n8/685 (2013.01);\n\nC09K 8170 (2013.01); C09K\n\n8/805 (2013.01);\n\nC09K 8182 (2013.01); C09K\n\n8/885 (2013.01);\n\n(Continued)\n\n- (58) Field of Classification Search\n\nCPC ................................ E21B 33/138; C09K 8/56 See application file for complete search history.\n\n## (56) References Cited\n\n## U.S. PATENT DOCUMENTS\n\n3,759,327 A\n\n*\n\n9/1973\n\nCarnes .\n\nC09K 8/565\n\nWO WO-2015/041671 3/2015\n\n4,427,069 A\n\n1/1984 Friedman\n\n(Continued)\n\n## FOREIGN PATENT DOCUMENTS\n\n## OTHER PUBLICATIONS\n\n166/295\n\nAllen et al. Hydrolysis Mechanisms of Alkynyl Benzonates, Tosylates, and Phosphates (1988).*\n\n(Continued)\n\nPrimary Examiner - Doug Hutton, Jr.\n\nAssistant Examiner\n\n-\n\nAvi Skaist\n\n(74) Attorney, Agent, or Firm - Craig W. Roddy; Tumey L.L.P.\n\n## (57) ABSTRACT\n\nA method of treating a subterranean formation including providing a treatment fluid comprising a hardenable acid curable resin and a hydrolysable strong acid ester. The treatment fluid is combined with a diluent fluid and is introduced into a subterranean formation. Upon the hydro› lyzing of the ester in the formation and the contacting of unconsolidated proppants, the treatment method produces consolidated proppants.\n\n## 26 Claims, 2 Drawing Sheets", + "recall": 0.9824561403508771, + "true_md": "1111111111111111 11111 111111111111111 11111 111111111111111 lll111111111111111 US009840656B2 \n\n# c12) United States Patent Weaver et al.\n\n# (54) LATENT CURING AGENT COMPATIBLE WITH LOW PH FRAC FLUIDS\n\n# (IO) Patent No.: US 9,840,656 B2\n\n# Dec. 12, 2017 (45) Date of Patent:\n\n8/685 (2013.01); C09K 8170 (2013.01); C09K 8/805 (2013.01); C09K 8182 (2013.01); C09K 8/885 (2013.01); \n\n(Continued) \n\n- (71) Applicant: Halliburton Energy Services, Inc., Houston, TX (US) \n\n- (72) Inventors: Jim D. Weaver, Duncan, OK (US); Philip D. Nguyen, Houston, TX (US); Dipti Singh, Kingwood, TX (US) \n\n- (73) Assignee: Halliburton Energy Services, Inc., Houston, TX (US) \n\n- ( *) Notice: Subject to any disclaimer, the term ofthis patent is extended or adjusted under 35 U.S.C. 154(b) by 60 days. \n\n- (21) Appl. No.: 14/888,438 \n\n- (22) PCT Filed: Sep. 20, 2013 \n\n- (86) PCT No.: PCT /US2013/060885 § 371 (c)(l), (2) Date: Nov. 1, 2015 \n\n- (87) PCT Pub. No.: WO2015/041671 PCT Pub. Date: Mar. 26, 2015 \n\n- (51) Int. Cl. \n\n- (52) U.S. Cl. CPC ............ C09K 815755 (2013.01); C09K 8/502 (2013.01); C09K 8/5086 (2013.01); C09K 81516 (2013.01); C09K 8/565 (2013.01); C09K 8/64 (2013.01); C09K 8/68 (2013.01); C09K \n\n- (58) Field of Classification Search CPC ................................ E21B 33/138; C09K 8/56 See application file for complete search history. \n\n## (56) References Cited\n\n## FOREIGN PATENT DOCUMENTS\n\n## U.S. PATENT DOCUMENTS\n\n## OTHER PUBLICATIONS\n\n## (65) Prior Publication Data\n\n## (57) ABSTRACT\n\n## 26 Claims, 2 Drawing Sheets\n\n(Continued) \n\nAllen et al. Hydrolysis Mechanisms of Alkynyl Benzonates, Tosylates, and Phosphates (1988).* \n\n(Continued) \n\nPrimary Examiner - Doug Hutton, Jr. \n\nAssistant Examiner - Avi Skaist \n\n(74) Attorney, Agent, or Firm - Craig W. Roddy; Tumey L.L.P. \n\nA method of treating a subterranean formation including providing a treatment fluid comprising a hardenable acid curable resin and a hydrolysable strong acid ester. The treatment fluid is combined with a diluent fluid and is introduced into a subterranean formation. Upon the hydro› lyzing of the ester in the formation and the contacting of unconsolidated proppants, the treatment method produces consolidated proppants. \n\nUS 2016/0108306 Al Apr. 21, 2016 \n\n(Continued) \n\nWO WO-2015/041671 3/2015" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9225336040812949, + "doc_id": "e24719a031002203052886ba4428d51a1544dd69ca8b71dc713627d4bff19726", + "edit_distance": 0.7727717923604309, + "f1_score": 0.9666666666666668, + "meteor": 0.724799593650482, + "precision": 0.9398148148148148, + "pred_md": "23\n\n## Aqueous Polymer Blend Composition and Comparative Aqueous Polymer Composition\n\nTABLE 5.1\n\n## EXAMPLE 6\n\n## Evaluation of Scrub Resistance\n\nDry coating samples are prepared from the aqueous polymer blend composition, Example 4.1, and the compara› tive aqueous polymer blend composition, Comparative B, and are evaluated according to the procedure for the scrub resistance test. The scrub resistance for the dry coating prepared from the aqueous polymer blend composition of this invention, Example 4.1, is greater than 110% of the scrub resistance of the dry coating prepared from the com› parative aqueous polymer blend composition, Comparative B. Thus, the relative scrub resistance value, RS, is greater than 1.1. This result demonstrates improved scrub resistance for the dry coating prepared from the aqueous polymer blend composition containing the hard polymer particles and the select soft polymer particles compared to the dry coating prepared from the comparative polymer blend composition containing the hard polymer particles and the comparative soft polymer particles.\n\n## EXAMPLE 7\n\n## Evaluation of Dirt Pickup Resistance\n\nDry coating samples are prepared from the aqueous polymer blend composition, Example 5.1, and the compara› tive aqueous polymer composition, Comparative C and are evaluated according to the procedure for the dirt pickup resistance test. The dirt pickup resistance for the dry coating prepared from the aqueous polymer blend composition of this invention, Example 5.1, is greater than 110% of the dirt pickup resistance of the dry coating prepared from the comparative aqueous polymer composition, Comparative C. Thus, the relative dirt pickup resistance value, RL, is greater than 1.1. This result demonstrates improved dirt pickup resistance for the dry coating prepared from the aqueous polymer blend composition containing the hard polymer particles and the select soft polymer particles compared to the dry coating prepared from the comparative aqueous polymer composition containing the soft polymer particles, but not containing the hard polymer particles.\n\n## EXAMPLE 8\n\n## Total Improvement Factor\n\nIn Example 6, the relative scrub resistance value of the dry coating, RS, which is prepared from the aqueous poly-\n\nUS 6,930,141 B2\n\n24\n\nmer blend composition of this invention, is greater than 1.1. In Example 7, the relative dirt pickup resistance value of the dry coating, RL, which is prepared from the aqueous poly› mer blend composition of this invention, is greater than 1.1. The total improvement factor of the dry coating, which is prepared from the aqueous polymer blend composition containing the select soft polymer particles, is greater than 1.2.\n\n- What is claimed is: 1. An aqueous polymer blend composition comprising: i) from 2 to 30 weight % of hard polymer particles; and ii) from 70 to 98 weight % of soft polymer particles; based on the total weight of said hard polymer particles and said soft polymer particles; wherein said soft polymer particles have a glass transition temperature (Tg) in the range of from -20° C. to 25° C., and said hard polymer particles have a T g of greater than 25° C. and at least 10° C. greater than said T g of said soft polymer particles; wherein said soft polymer particles comprise as copoly› merized units, from 70 to 99.7 weight % monoethyl› enically unsaturated (meth)acrylic monomer, from 0.3 to 10 weight % monoethylenically unsaturated acid monomer; and from Oto 29.7 weight% third monomer, based on weight of said soft polymer particles; wherein said hard polymer particles have a weight aver› age molecular weight of at least 100,000; and wherein: a) at least 40 weight % of each of said soft polymer particles, based on weight of said soft polymer particles, is formed by redox polymerization; or b) at least 40 weight % of each of said soft polymer particles is polymerized in the presence of at least 5 weight % of added monomer that remains unreacted, based on accumulated weight of said added monomer, ethylenically unsaturated (meth)acrylic monomer, said monoethylenically unsaturated acid monomer, said\n- said added monomer being selected from said mono› third monomer, and mixtures thereof.\n- 2. The aqueous polymer blend composition according to claim 1 wherein said redox polymerization is effected in the presence of 0.001 to 0.05 moles chain transfer agent per kg weight of said soft polymer particles.\n- 3. The aqueous polymer blend composition according to claim 2 wherein said redox polymerization is effected in the presence of 0.0025 to 0.025 moles chain transfer agent per kg weight of said soft polymer particles.\n- 4. The aqueous polymer blend composition according to claim 1 wherein said redox polymerization is effected at a pH of 4 to 8.\n- 5. The aqueous polymer blend composition according to claim 1 further comprising pigment, wherein said aqueous polymer blend composition has a pigment volume concentration of less than or equal to 40 and has volatile organic compound level of less than 5% by weight based on the total weight of said aqueous polymer blend composition.\n- 6. The aqueous polymer blend composition according to claim 1 further comprising pigment, wherein said aqueous polymer blend composition has a pigment volume concen› tration greater than or equal to 35 and has volatile organic compound content of less than 3% by weight based on the total weight of said aqueous polymer blend composition.\n- 7. The aqueous polymer blend composition according to claim 1 further comprising pigment, wherein said aqueous polymer blend composition has a pigment volume concen› tration of less than or equal to 85 and has volatile organic\n\n5\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n60\n\n65", + "recall": 0.9950980392156863, + "true_md": "23 \n\nUS 6,930,141 B2 \n\n24 \n\nIn Example 6, the relative scrub resistance value of the dry coating, RS, which is prepared from the aqueous poly-\n\nTotal Improvement Factor \n\nDry coating samples are prepared from the aqueous polymer blend composition, Example 5.1, and the compara› tive aqueous polymer composition, Comparative C and are evaluated according to the procedure for the dirt pickup resistance test. The dirt pickup resistance for the dry coating prepared from the aqueous polymer blend composition of this invention, Example 5.1, is greater than 110% of the dirt pickup resistance of the dry coating prepared from the comparative aqueous polymer composition, Comparative C. Thus, the relative dirt pickup resistance value, RL, is greater than 1.1. This result demonstrates improved dirt pickup resistance for the dry coating prepared from the aqueous polymer blend composition containing the hard polymer particles and the select soft polymer particles compared to the dry coating prepared from the comparative aqueous polymer composition containing the soft polymer particles, but not containing the hard polymer particles. \n\nEvaluation of Dirt Pickup Resistance \n\n3. The aqueous polymer blend composition according to claim 2 wherein said redox polymerization is effected in the presence of 0.0025 to 0.025 moles chain transfer agent per kg weight of said soft polymer particles. \n\n4. The aqueous polymer blend composition according to claim 1 wherein said redox polymerization is effected at a pH of 4 to 8. \n\n5. The aqueous polymer blend composition according to claim 1 further comprising pigment, wherein said aqueous polymer blend composition has a pigment volume concen- tration of less than or equal to 40 and has volatile organic compound level of less than 5% by weight based on the total weight of said aqueous polymer blend composition. \n\n6. The aqueous polymer blend composition according to claim 1 further comprising pigment, wherein said aqueous polymer blend composition has a pigment volume concen› tration greater than or equal to 35 and has volatile organic compound content of less than 3% by weight based on the total weight of said aqueous polymer blend composition. \n\n7. The aqueous polymer blend composition according to claim 1 further comprising pigment, wherein said aqueous polymer blend composition has a pigment volume concen› tration of less than or equal to 85 and has volatile organic \n\n2. The aqueous polymer blend composition according to claim 1 wherein said redox polymerization is effected in the presence of 0.001 to 0.05 moles chain transfer agent per kg weight of said soft polymer particles. \n\nii) from 70 to 98 weight % of soft polymer particles; based on the total weight of said hard polymer particles and said soft polymer particles; \n\nWhat is claimed is: \n\ni) from 2 to 30 weight % of hard polymer particles; and \n\n1. An aqueous polymer blend composition comprising: \n\nmer blend composition of this invention, is greater than 1.1. In Example 7, the relative dirt pickup resistance value of the dry coating, RL, which is prepared from the aqueous poly› mer blend composition of this invention, is greater than 1.1. The total improvement factor of the dry coating, which is prepared from the aqueous polymer blend composition containing the select soft polymer particles, is greater than 1.2. \n\nEvaluation of Scrub Resistance \n\nDry coating samples are prepared from the aqueous polymer blend composition, Example 4.1, and the compara› tive aqueous polymer blend composition, Comparative B, and are evaluated according to the procedure for the scrub resistance test. The scrub resistance for the dry coating prepared from the aqueous polymer blend composition of this invention, Example 4.1, is greater than 110% of the scrub resistance of the dry coating prepared from the com› parative aqueous polymer blend composition, Comparative B. Thus, the relative scrub resistance value, RS, is greater than 1.1. This result demonstrates improved scrub resistance for the dry coating prepared from the aqueous polymer blend composition containing the hard polymer particles and the select soft polymer particles compared to the dry coating prepared from the comparative polymer blend composition containing the hard polymer particles and the comparative soft polymer particles. \n\nTABLE 5.1 \n\n## EXAMPLE 8\n\n## EXAMPLE 7\n\n- b) at least 40 weight % of each of said soft polymer particles is polymerized in the presence of at least 5 weight % of added monomer that remains unreacted, based on accumulated weight of said added monomer, said added monomer being selected from said mono› ethylenically unsaturated (meth)acrylic monomer, said monoethylenically unsaturated acid monomer, said third monomer, and mixtures thereof. \n\n- a) at least 40 weight % of each of said soft polymer particles, based on weight of said soft polymer particles, is formed by redox polymerization; or \n\n- wherein: \n\n- wherein said hard polymer particles have a weight aver› age molecular weight of at least 100,000; and \n\n- wherein said soft polymer particles comprise as copoly› merized units, from 70 to 99.7 weight % monoethyl› enically unsaturated (meth)acrylic monomer, from 0.3 to 10 weight % monoethylenically unsaturated acid monomer; and from Oto 29.7 weight% third monomer, based on weight of said soft polymer particles; \n\n- wherein said soft polymer particles have a glass transition temperature (Tg) in the range of from -20° C. to 25° C., and said hard polymer particles have a T g of greater than 25° C. and at least 10° C. greater than said T g of said soft polymer particles; \n\n## EXAMPLE 6" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9535749076195181, + "doc_id": "094f33da50af1f64e3eeff341e388e73bc26fc63e30b383c7829e431f4d4d8f4", + "edit_distance": 0.665395614871306, + "f1_score": 0.9948717948717949, + "meteor": 0.8491628437024421, + "precision": 0.9931740614334471, + "pred_md": "US 2020/0352177 Al\n\ngreater than 150° C., more preferably greater than 160° C., most preferably greater than 170° C., but preferably below 200° C., more preferably below 190° C., most preferably below 180° C.\n\n## EXAMPLE\n\n[0298] A pancake batter was made up in accordance with the recipe shown in the following table in which all propor› tions are percentage by weight, based on the total weight of the batter unless stated to the contrary. After standing for five minutes the mixture was fried for 90 seconds on a griddle at 177° C. to make four pancakes, which were stacked. The height of the stack was measured and compared with a control without calcium chloride.\n\nTABLE\n\nWe claim:\n\n- 1. A leavening agent comprising:\n- (1) An alkali metal or animonium bicarbonate;\n- (2) At least 0.1 and preferably at least 1 mole per mole of bicarbonate of Precipitant optionally comprising a Pre› cipitating Acidulant; and\n- (3) Optionally an Acidulant; wherein (2) and (3) are present in a total amount from 105 to 800% of the stoichiometric amount that would be required to react fully with (1) in a boiling aqueous solution.\n- 2. A leavening agent comprising:\n- (1) Alkali metal bicarbonate;\n- (2) A Precipitant and/or Precipitating Acidulant, in a total proportion sufficient to provide from 1 to 8.8 g, and preferably at least 1.1 g, Precipitating Cation per 100 mmol bicarbonate; and\n- (3) An Acidulant, which may be or may comprise said Precipitating Acidulant, in a total proportion sufficient to provide from 0.025 to 0.2 g Replaceable Hydrogen per 100 mmol of bicarbonate.\n- 3. A leavening agent comprising as components:\n- (1) An alkali metal bicarbonate;\n- (2) A Precipitant; and;\n- (3) Optionally anAcidulant; wherein y>x+5 between x=0 and x=47.5, and between x=52.5 and 105; and y>80 between x=47.5 and x=52.5; where xis the amount of sodium bicarbonate mmols per 100 mmols of the said components that would remain after complete reaction with any non-phosphate Acidulants present and y is the amount of Precipitant in mmols per 100 mmols of the said components.\n\n18\n\n- 4. A leavening agent comprising:\n- (1) Alkali metal bicarbonate;\n- (2) A Precipitant and/or Precipitating Acidulant, in a total proportion sufficient to provide c=from 25 to 200; and\n- (3) An Acidulant, which may be or may comprise said Precipitating Acidulant, in a total proportion sufficient to provide h=from 25 to 200, and preferably h+2c> 100; where c is the total mmol Precipitating Cation per 100 mmol bicarbonate and his the total mmol hydrogen ion per 100 mmol bicarbonate.\n- 5. A leavening agent according to claim 1 comprising:\n- (1) Alkali metal bicarbonate;\n- (2) An Acidulant that forms a non-Water-Soluble calcium or magnesium salt sufficient to provide more than 0.105 g Replaceable Hydrogen per 100 mmol bicarbonate;\n- (3) A Precipitant that is a water soluble salt of an alkaline earth metal capable of precipitating or complexing with said Acidulant with an acid that is stronger than said Acidulant in an amount sufficient to provide a final pH below 6.5 when the leavening agent is heated m a bakery mix;\n- ( 4) An effective amount of a preservative.\n- 6. A leavening agent according to claim 1 comprising:\n- (1) Alkali metal bicarbonate; an Acidulant that forms a water insoluble calcium or magnesium salt sufficient to provide more than 105 mmols replaceable hydrogen per 100 mmols bicarbonate;\n- (2) A Precipitant that is a water soluble salt of an alkaline earth metal capable of precipitating said Acidulant with an acid which is stronger than said Acidulant in an amount sufficient to provide a final pH below 6.5 when the leavening agent is heated in a bakery mix; and\n- (3) An effective amount of a preservative.\n- 7. A leavening agent according to any claim 1 wherein the alkali metal bicarbonate is sodium and/or potassium bicar› bonate.\n- 8. A leavening agent according to claim 1 wherein the alkaline earth metal is calcium and/or magnesium.\n- 9. A leavening agent according to claim 1 wherein the Precipitant is a salt of formic, acetic, fumaric, lactic, aco› nitic, itaconic, citraconic, tartaric, adipic, ascorbic, malic, lactobionic, hydrochloric and/or sulphuric acid.\n- 10. A leavening agent according to claim 1 wherein the Precipitant is calcium chloride.\n- 11. A leavening agent according to claim 1 wherein the acidulant comprises phosphorus oxyacids and/or their mono-, diand/or tri-basic salts such as SALP, SAPP, phosphoric acid, mono- and/or di-sodium and/or potassium phosphates, monoand/or di-calcium phosphate and/or organic acids and/or their acid salts such as MSC, glucono› delta-lactone, fumaric acid, maleic acid, malic acid, succinic acid, adipic acid, tartaric acid, mono sodium tartrate, citra› conic acid, aconitic acid, itaconic acid, mono potassium citrate and/or tartrate, hydrolysed lactones and/or polylactic acid and/or sodium aluminium sulphate\n- 12. A leavening agent according to claim 5 wherein the preservative is selected from sorbic acid, potassium sorbate, sodium sorbate, calcium sorbate, sulphur dioxide, sodium sulphite, sodium bisulphite, sodium metabisulphite, potas› sium sulphite, potassium metabisulphite, potassium hydro› gen sulphite, calcium sulphite, calcium hydrogen sulphite, propionic acid, sodium propionate, potassium propionate and/or calcium propionate.\n- 13. A baking powder comprising a leavening agent according to claim 1.\n\nNov. 12, 2020", + "recall": 0.9965753424657534, + "true_md": "TABLE \n\n## EXAMPLE\n\nUS 2020/0352177 Al \n\n18 \n\nNov. 12, 2020 \n\ngreater than 150° C., more preferably greater than 160° C., most preferably greater than 170° C., but preferably below 200° C., more preferably below 190° C., most preferably below 180° C. \n\n[0298] A pancake batter was made up in accordance with the recipe shown in the following table in which all propor› tions are percentage by weight, based on the total weight of the batter unless stated to the contrary. After standing for five minutes the mixture was fried for 90 seconds on a griddle at 177° C. to make four pancakes, which were stacked. The height of the stack was measured and compared with a control without calcium chloride. \n\nWe claim: \n\n12. A leavening agent according to claim 5 wherein the preservative is selected from sorbic acid, potassium sorbate, sodium sorbate, calcium sorbate, sulphur dioxide, sodium sulphite, sodium bisulphite, sodium metabisulphite, potas› sium sulphite, potassium metabisulphite, potassium hydro› gen sulphite, calcium sulphite, calcium hydrogen sulphite, propionic acid, sodium propionate, potassium propionate and/or calcium propionate. \n\n13. A baking powder comprising a leavening agent according to claim 1. \n\n11. A leavening agent according to claim 1 wherein the acidulant comprises phosphorus oxyacids and/or their mono-, di- and/or tri-basic salts such as SALP, SAPP, phosphoric acid, mono- and/or di-sodium and/or potassium phosphates, mono- and/or di-calcium phosphate and/or organic acids and/or their acid salts such as MSC, glucono› delta-lactone, fumaric acid, maleic acid, malic acid, succinic acid, adipic acid, tartaric acid, mono sodium tartrate, citra› conic acid, aconitic acid, itaconic acid, mono potassium citrate and/or tartrate, hydrolysed lactones and/or polylactic acid and/or sodium aluminium sulphate \n\n10. A leavening agent according to claim 1 wherein the Precipitant is calcium chloride. \n\n9. A leavening agent according to claim 1 wherein the Precipitant is a salt of formic, acetic, fumaric, lactic, aco› nitic, itaconic, citraconic, tartaric, adipic, ascorbic, malic, lactobionic, hydrochloric and/or sulphuric acid. \n\n8. A leavening agent according to claim 1 wherein the alkaline earth metal is calcium and/or magnesium. \n\n7. A leavening agent according to any claim 1 wherein the alkali metal bicarbonate is sodium and/or potassium bicar› bonate. \n\n( 4) An effective amount of a preservative. \n\n5. A leavening agent according to claim 1 comprising: \n\n4. A leavening agent comprising: \n\n1. A leavening agent comprising: \n\n2. A leavening agent comprising: \n\n3. A leavening agent comprising as components: \n\n- (1) An alkali metal or animonium bicarbonate; \n\n- (2) At least 0.1 and preferably at least 1 mole per mole of bicarbonate of Precipitant optionally comprising a Pre› cipitating Acidulant; and \n\n- (3) Optionally an Acidulant; wherein (2) and (3) are present in a total amount from 105 to 800% of the stoichiometric amount that would be required to react fully with (1) in a boiling aqueous solution. \n\n- (1) Alkali metal bicarbonate; \n\n- (2) A Precipitant and/or Precipitating Acidulant, in a total proportion sufficient to provide from 1 to 8.8 g, and preferably at least 1.1 g, Precipitating Cation per 100 mmol bicarbonate; and \n\n- (3) An Acidulant, which may be or may comprise said Precipitating Acidulant, in a total proportion sufficient to provide from 0.025 to 0.2 g Replaceable Hydrogen per 100 mmol of bicarbonate. \n\n- (1) An alkali metal bicarbonate; \n\n- (2) A Precipitant; and; \n\n- (3) Optionally anAcidulant; wherein y>x+5 between x=0 and x=47.5, and between x=52.5 and 105; and y>80 between x=47.5 and x=52.5; where xis the amount of sodium bicarbonate mmols per 100 mmols of the said components that would remain after complete reaction with any non-phosphate Acidulants present and y is the amount of Precipitant in mmols per 100 mmols of the said components. \n\n- (1) Alkali metal bicarbonate; \n\n- (2) A Precipitant and/or Precipitating Acidulant, in a total proportion sufficient to provide c=from 25 to 200; and \n\n- (3) An Acidulant, which may be or may comprise said Precipitating Acidulant, in a total proportion sufficient to provide h=from 25 to 200, and preferably h+2c> 100; where c is the total mmol Precipitating Cation per 100 mmol bicarbonate and his the total mmol hydrogen ion per 100 mmol bicarbonate. \n\n- (1) Alkali metal bicarbonate; \n\n- (2) An Acidulant that forms a non-Water-Soluble calcium or magnesium salt sufficient to provide more than 0.105 g Replaceable Hydrogen per 100 mmol bicarbonate; \n\n- (3) A Precipitant that is a water soluble salt of an alkaline earth metal capable of precipitating or complexing with said Acidulant with an acid that is stronger than said Acidulant in an amount sufficient to provide a final pH below 6.5 when the leavening agent is heated m a bakery mix; \n\n- 6. A leavening agent according to claim 1 comprising: \n\n- (1) Alkali metal bicarbonate; an Acidulant that forms a water insoluble calcium or magnesium salt sufficient to provide more than 105 mmols replaceable hydrogen per 100 mmols bicarbonate; \n\n- (2) A Precipitant that is a water soluble salt of an alkaline earth metal capable of precipitating said Acidulant with an acid which is stronger than said Acidulant in an amount sufficient to provide a final pH below 6.5 when the leavening agent is heated in a bakery mix; and \n\n- (3) An effective amount of a preservative." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9678742253477712, + "doc_id": "401ce18ae6d0d782f60e741e473a419fc50d8134a4afc2e617eea02b2cc6da2a", + "edit_distance": 0.42296718972895864, + "f1_score": 0.9692832764505119, + "meteor": 0.9499050198924144, + "precision": 0.9594594594594594, + "pred_md": "5\n\n6\n\nThe term \"base component\" refers to an organic compound capable of forming a film, and is preferably an organic com› pound having a molecular weight of 500 or more. When the organic compound has a molecular weight of 500 or more, the film-forming ability is improved, and a nano level resist pat› tern can be more easily formed.\n\nThe organic compounds having a molecular weight of 500 or more that can be used as the base component can be broadly classified into non-polymers and polymers.\n\nIn general, compounds which have a molecular weight of at least 500 but less than 4,000 may be used as non-polymers. Hereafter, the term \"low molecular weight compound\" is used to describe a non-polymer having a molecular weight of at least 500 but less than 4,000.\n\nUS 9,164,380 B2\n\n5\n\n10\n\nIn terms of the polymers, typically, compounds which have a molecular weight of 1,000 or more may be used. In the following description, the term \"polymeric compound\" is used to describe a polymer having a molecular weight of 1,000 or more. In the case of a polymeric compound, the \"molecular weight\" refers to the weight-average molecular 20 weight in terms of the polystyrene-equivalent value deter› mined by gel permeation chromatography (GPC). Hereafter, 15 a polymeric compound may be simply referred to as a \"resin\".\n\nAs the component (A), a resin component which exhibits changed solubility in a developing solution under the action 25 of acid may be used, a low molecular weight compound which exhibits changed solubility in a developing solution under the action of acid may be used, or a combination of the two may be used.\n\nIn those cases where the resist composition of the present invention is a resist composition that forms a negative-type pattern in an alkali developing process, a base component that is soluble in an alkali developing solution is typically used as the component (A), and a cross-linking agent is also added to the composition.\n\n30\n\n35\n\nThe base component that is soluble in an alkali developing solution contains alkali-soluble groups such as a hydroxyl group, carboxyl group or sulfonamide group, and the cross› linking agent has a reactive group that is capable of reacting with these alkali-soluble groups. Accordingly, in this resist 40 composition, when acid is generated from the component (B) upon exposure, the action of the acid causes cross-linking between the base component and the cross-linking agent, and the cross-linked portions become insoluble in an alkali devel› oping solution. As a result, during resist pattern formation, by 45 conducting selective exposure of a resist film obtained by applying the resist composition to a substrate, the exposed portions change to a state that is insoluble in the alkali devel› oping solution, while the unexposed portions remain soluble in the alkali developing solution, meaning alkali developing 50 can be used to form a resist pattern.\n\nIn those cases where an alkali developing process is used, the component (AO) is substantially insoluble in an alkali developing solution prior to exposure, but when acid is gen› erated from the component (B) upon exposure, the action of the acid causes an increase in the polarity of the component (AO) that increases the solubility in the alkali developing solution. Accordingly, during resist pattern formation, by conducting selective exposure of a resist film obtained by applying the resist composition to a substrate, the exposed portions change from being substantially insoluble in an alkali developing solution to being soluble, while the unex› posed portions remain substantially insoluble in an alkali developing solution, and therefore a contrast is achieved between the exposed portions and the unexposed portions, and a positive-type pattern can be formed by performing developing with an alkali developing solution.\n\nGenerally, a resin that is soluble in an alkali developing solution (hereafter referred to as an \"alkali-soluble resin\") is used as the base component that is soluble in an alkali devel› oping solution.\n\nExamples of the alkali-soluble resin include a resin having a structural unit derived from at least one of an a-(hydroxy› alkyl)acrylic acid and an alkyl ester of an a-(hydroxyalkyl) acrylic acid (preferably an alkyl ester having 1 to 5 carbon atoms), as disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application, First Publication No. 2000-206694; an acrylic resin or polycycloolefin resin having a sulfonamide group, and in which an atom other than a hydrogen atom or a substituent may be bonded to the carbon atom on the a-position, as disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 6,949,325; an acrylic resin containing a fluorinated alcohol, and in which an atom other than a hydrogen atom or a substituent may be bonded to the carbon\n\n55\n\n60\n\n65\n\nFurther, in those cases where a solvent developing process is used, the component (AO) exhibits good solubility in an organic developing solution prior to exposure, but when acid is generated from the component (B) upon exposure, the action of the acid causes an increase in the polarity of the component (AO) that reduces the solubility in the organic developing solution. Accordingly, during resist pattern for› mation, by conducting selective exposure of a resist film obtained by applying the resist composition to a substrate, the exposed portions change from being soluble in an organic developing solution to being substantially insoluble, while the unexposed portions remain soluble in an organic devel› oping solution, and therefore developing with an organic developing solution can be used to achieve contrast between the exposed portions and the unexposed portions, and a nega-\n\natom on the a-position, as disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 6,949, 325, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application, First Publi› cation No. 2005-336452 or Japanese Unexamined Patent Application, First Publication No. 2006-317803; and a polycycloolefin resin having a fluorinated alcohol, as disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application, First Publication No. 2006-259582. These resins are preferable in that a resist pattern can be formed with minimal swelling.\n\nThe term \"a-(hydroxyalkyl)acrylic acid\" refers to, in an acrylic resin in which an atom other than a hydrogen atom or a substituent may be bonded to the carbon atom on the a-po› sition, one or both of acrylic acid in which a hydrogen atom is bonded to the carbon atom on the a-position having the carboxyl group bonded thereto, and a-hydroxyalkyl acrylic acid in which a hydroxyalkyl group (preferably a hydroxy› alkyl group of 1 to 5 carbon atoms) is bonded to the carbon atom on the a-position.\n\nAs the cross-linking agent, usually, an amino-based cross› linking agent such as a glycoluril having a methylol group or alkoxymethyl group, or a melamine-based cross-linking agent is preferable, as it enables formation of a resist pattern with minimal swelling. The amount added of the cross-link› ing agent is preferably within a range from 1 to 50 parts by weight, relative to 100 parts by weight of the alkali-soluble resm.\n\nIn those cases where the resist composition of the present invention is a resist composition which forms a positive-type pattern in an alkali developing process, but forms a negative› type pattern in a solvent developing process, a base compo› nent (AO) (hereafter referred to as \"component (AO)\") which exhibits increased polarity under the action of acid is preferably used as the component (A). By using the component (AO), the polarity of the base component changes upon expo› sure, and therefore favorable developing contrast can be achieved, not only in an alkali developing process, but also in a solvent developing process.", + "recall": 0.9793103448275862, + "true_md": "US 9,164,380 B2 \n\n6 \n\n5 \n\nThe term \"base component\" refers to an organic compound capable of forming a film, and is preferably an organic com› pound having a molecular weight of 500 or more. When the organic compound has a molecular weight of 500 or more, the film-forming ability is improved, and a nano level resist pat› tern can be more easily formed. \n\nThe organic compounds having a molecular weight of 500 or more that can be used as the base component can be broadly classified into non-polymers and polymers. \n\nIn general, compounds which have a molecular weight of at least 500 but less than 4,000 may be used as non-polymers. Hereafter, the term \"low molecular weight compound\" is used to describe a non-polymer having a molecular weight of at least 500 but less than 4,000. \n\nIn terms of the polymers, typically, compounds which have a molecular weight of 1,000 or more may be used. In the following description, the term \"polymeric compound\" is used to describe a polymer having a molecular weight of 1,000 or more. In the case of a polymeric compound, the \"molecular weight\" refers to the weight-average molecular weight in terms of the polystyrene-equivalent value deter› mined by gel permeation chromatography (GPC). Hereafter, a polymeric compound may be simply referred to as a \"resin\". \n\nAs the component (A), a resin component which exhibits changed solubility in a developing solution under the action of acid may be used, a low molecular weight compound which exhibits changed solubility in a developing solution under the action of acid may be used, or a combination of the two may be used. \n\nIn those cases where the resist composition of the present invention is a resist composition that forms a negative-type pattern in an alkali developing process, a base component that is soluble in an alkali developing solution is typically used as the component (A), and a cross-linking agent is also added to the composition. \n\nThe base component that is soluble in an alkali developing solution contains alkali-soluble groups such as a hydroxyl group, carboxyl group or sulfonamide group, and the cross› linking agent has a reactive group that is capable of reacting with these alkali-soluble groups. Accordingly, in this resist composition, when acid is generated from the component (B) upon exposure, the action of the acid causes cross-linking between the base component and the cross-linking agent, and the cross-linked portions become insoluble in an alkali devel› oping solution. As a result, during resist pattern formation, by conducting selective exposure of a resist film obtained by applying the resist composition to a substrate, the exposed portions change to a state that is insoluble in the alkali devel› oping solution, while the unexposed portions remain soluble in the alkali developing solution, meaning alkali developing can be used to form a resist pattern. \n\nGenerally, a resin that is soluble in an alkali developing solution (hereafter referred to as an \"alkali-soluble resin\") is used as the base component that is soluble in an alkali devel› oping solution. \n\nExamples of the alkali-soluble resin include a resin having a structural unit derived from at least one of an a-(hydroxy› alkyl)acrylic acid and an alkyl ester of an a-(hydroxyalkyl) acrylic acid (preferably an alkyl ester having 1 to 5 carbon atoms), as disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Appli- cation, First Publication No. 2000-206694; an acrylic resin or polycycloolefin resin having a sulfonamide group, and in which an atom other than a hydrogen atom or a substituent may be bonded to the carbon atom on the a-position, as disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 6,949,325; an acrylic resin contain- ing a fluorinated alcohol, and in which an atom other than a hydrogen atom or a substituent may be bonded to the carbon \n\nFurther, in those cases where a solvent developing process is used, the component (AO) exhibits good solubility in an organic developing solution prior to exposure, but when acid is generated from the component (B) upon exposure, the action of the acid causes an increase in the polarity of the component (AO) that reduces the solubility in the organic developing solution. Accordingly, during resist pattern for› mation, by conducting selective exposure of a resist film obtained by applying the resist composition to a substrate, the exposed portions change from being soluble in an organic developing solution to being substantially insoluble, while the unexposed portions remain soluble in an organic devel› oping solution, and therefore developing with an organic developing solution can be used to achieve contrast between the exposed portions and the unexposed portions, and a nega-\n\nIn those cases where an alkali developing process is used, the component (AO) is substantially insoluble in an alkali developing solution prior to exposure, but when acid is gen› erated from the component (B) upon exposure, the action of the acid causes an increase in the polarity of the component (AO) that increases the solubility in the alkali developing solution. Accordingly, during resist pattern formation, by conducting selective exposure of a resist film obtained by applying the resist composition to a substrate, the exposed portions change from being substantially insoluble in an alkali developing solution to being soluble, while the unex› posed portions remain substantially insoluble in an alkali developing solution, and therefore a contrast is achieved between the exposed portions and the unexposed portions, and a positive-type pattern can be formed by performing developing with an alkali developing solution. \n\nIn those cases where the resist composition of the present invention is a resist composition which forms a positive-type pattern in an alkali developing process, but forms a negative› type pattern in a solvent developing process, a base compo› nent (AO) (hereafter referred to as \"component (AO)\") which exhibits increased polarity under the action of acid is prefer- ably used as the component (A). By using the component (AO), the polarity of the base component changes upon expo› sure, and therefore favorable developing contrast can be achieved, not only in an alkali developing process, but also in a solvent developing process. \n\nAs the cross-linking agent, usually, an amino-based cross› linking agent such as a glycoluril having a methylol group or alkoxymethyl group, or a melamine-based cross-linking agent is preferable, as it enables formation of a resist pattern with minimal swelling. The amount added of the cross-link› ing agent is preferably within a range from 1 to 50 parts by weight, relative to 100 parts by weight of the alkali-soluble resm. \n\nThe term \"a-(hydroxyalkyl)acrylic acid\" refers to, in an acrylic resin in which an atom other than a hydrogen atom or a substituent may be bonded to the carbon atom on the a-po› sition, one or both of acrylic acid in which a hydrogen atom is bonded to the carbon atom on the a-position having the carboxyl group bonded thereto, and a-hydroxyalkyl acrylic acid in which a hydroxyalkyl group (preferably a hydroxy› alkyl group of 1 to 5 carbon atoms) is bonded to the carbon atom on the a-position. \n\natom on the a-position, as disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 6,949, 325, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application, First Publi› cation No. 2005-336452 or Japanese Unexamined Patent Application, First Publication No. 2006-317803; and a poly- cycloolefin resin having a fluorinated alcohol, as disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application, First Publication No. 2006-259582. These resins are preferable in that a resist pattern can be formed with minimal swelling." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9594803944491056, + "doc_id": "539826805d7fdfe56ff1c6e2e7e2a20dfc8ff3b8d59857ac04163057a8d2cf3b", + "edit_distance": 0.43846153846153846, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.956124251641874, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## UNITED STATES PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE CERTIFICATE OF CORRECTION\n\nPATENT NO.\n\nAPPLICATION NO.\n\nDATED\n\nINVENTOR(S)\n\n: 7,902,392 B2\n\n: 11/568050\n\n: March 8, 2011\n\n: Christian Ochs\n\nPage 1 of 1\n\nIt is certified that error appears in the above-identified patent and that said Letters Patent is hereby corrected as shown below:\n\nColumn 18, Lines 52-53, Claim I:\n\nDelete \"CI-CS-alkyl, C l-C5-alkoxy, C l-C5-alkylcarbonyl radical\" and Insert -- C1 -Cs-alkyl, C1 -Cs-alkoxy, C1 -Cs-alkylcarbonyl radical --.\n\nColumn 18, Line 54, Claim I:\n\nDelete \"H-N-OH\"\n\nSigned and Sealed this Twenty-fourth Day of July, 2012\n\nDavid J. Kappos\n\nDirector of the United States Patent and Trademark Office", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "# UNITED STATES PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE CERTIFICATE OF CORRECTION\n\nIt is certified that error appears in the above-identified patent and that said Letters Patent is hereby corrected as shown below: \n\nColumn 18, Lines 52-53, Claim I: \n\nDelete \"CI-CS-alkyl, C l-C5-alkoxy, C l-C5-alkylcarbonyl radical\" and Insert -- C1 -Cs-alkyl, C1 -Cs-alkoxy, C1 -Cs-alkylcarbonyl radical --. \n\nColumn 18, Line 54, Claim I: \n\nDelete \"H-N-OH\" \n\nSigned and Sealed this Twenty-fourth Day of July, 2012 \n\nDavid J. Kappos Director of the United States Patent and Trademark Office \n\nPage 1 of 1 \n\nPATENT NO. APPLICATION NO. DATED INVENTOR(S) : 7,902,392 B2 : 11/568050 : March 8, 2011 : Christian Ochs" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9235575235773112, + "doc_id": "5ddc6775c495c7061de4b69d8246185dca5526ee386b5dd08d93f8f72cfc2c9c", + "edit_distance": 0.748014440433213, + "f1_score": 0.9764397905759162, + "meteor": 0.6417078038019863, + "precision": 0.9738903394255874, + "pred_md": "5,763,671\n\n39\n\nphorus acidic compounds removed from said reaction product fluid with one or more acid removal substances sufficient to remove at least some amount of the phosphorus acidic compounds from said water, is still considered to be essen› tially a \"non-aqueous\" process, which is to say, any water present in the hydroformylation reaction medium is not present in an amount sufficient to cause either the hydro› formylation reaction or said medium to be considered as encompassing a separate aqueous or water phase or layer in addition to an organic phase.\n\n5\n\n10\n\nAlso, it is to be understood that another preferred hydro› formylation process of this invention, i.e .· the embodiment comprising preventing and/or lessening hydrolytic degrada› tion of the organophosphite ligand and deactivation of the metal-organophosphite ligand complex catalyst by treating at least a portion of the hydroformylation reaction product fluid derived from the hydroformylation process and which also contains phosphorus acidic compounds formed during said hydroformylation process by introducing one or more acid removal substances into said at least one reaction zone and/or said at least one separation zone sufficient to remove 20 at least some amount of the phosphorus acidic compounds from said reaction product fluid, is also considered to be essentially a \"non-aqueous\" process. 15\n\nThus. for example. water may be used to treat all or part of a reaction product fluid of a continuous liquid catalyst recycle hydroformylation process that has been removed from the reaction zone at any time prior to or after separation of the aldehyde product therefrom. More preferably said water treatment involves treating all or part of the reaction product fluid obtained after distillation of as much of the aldehyde product desired, for example, prior to or during the recycling of said reaction product fluid to the reaction zone. For instance, a preferred mode would be to continuously pass all or part (e.g. a slip stream) of the recycled reaction product fluid that is being recycled to the reaction zone through a liquid extractor containing the water just before said catalyst containing residue is to re-enter the reaction zone.\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\nThus it is to be understood that the metal-organophosphite ligand complex catalyst containing reaction product fluid to be treated with water may contain in addition to the catalyst 40 complex and its organic solvent, aldehyde product, free organophosphite ligand, unreacted olefin, and any other ingredient or additive consistent with the reaction medium of the hydroformylation process from which said reaction product fluids are derived. 45\n\nMoreover. removal of the desired aldehyde product can cause concentrations of the other ingredients of the reaction product fluids to be increased proportionately. Thus for example, the organophosphite ligand concentration in the metal-organophosphite ligand complex catalyst containing 50 reaction product fluid to be treated by water in accordance with the process of this invention may range from between about 0.005 and 15 weight percent based on the total weight of the reaction product fluid. Preferably the ligand concen› tration is between 0.01 and 10 weight percent, and more 55 preferably is between about 0.05 and 5 weight percent on that basis. Similarly. the concentration of the metal in the metal-organophosphite ligand complex catalyst containing reaction product fluid to be treated by the water in accor› dance with the process of this invention may be as high as 60 about 5000 parts per million by weight based on the weight of the reaction product fluid. Preferably the metal concen› tration is between about 50 and 2500 parts per million by weight based on the weight of the reaction product fluid, and more preferably is between about 70 and 2000 parts per 65 million by weight based on the weight of the reaction product fluid.\n\n40\n\nThe manner in which the metal-organophosphite ligand complex catalyst containing reaction product fluid and water are contacted, as well as such treatment conditions, as the amount of water, temperature, pressure and contact time are not narrowly critical and obviously need only be sufficient to obtain the results desired. For instance. said treatment may be carried out in any suitable vessel or container. e.g. any conventional liquid extractor. which provides a suitable means for thorough contact between the organic reaction product fluid and water. may be employed herein. In general it is preferred to pass the organic reaction product fluid through the water in a sieve tray extractor column in a counter-current fashion. The amount of water employed by the subject invention and time of contact with the reaction product fluid need only be that which is sufficient to remove at least some amount of the phosphorus acidic compounds which cause hydrolytic degradation of the desirable orga› nophosphite ligands. Preferably the amount of water is sufficient to at least maintain the concentration of such acidic compounds below the threshold level that causes rapid degradation of the organophosphite ligand.\n\nFor instance. a preferred quantity of water is the quantity which ensures that any degradation of the organophosphite ligand proceeds by the \"non-catalytic mechanism\" as described in 'The Kinetic Rate Law for Autocatalytic Reac› tions\" by Mata-Perez et al .· Journal of Chemical Education. Vol. 64. No. 11. November 1987, pages 925 to 927, rather than by the \"catalytic mechanism\" described in said article. Typically maximum water concentrations are only governed by practical considerations. As noted. treatment conditions such as temperature, pressure and contact time may also vary greatly and any suitable combination of such conditions may be employed herein. For instance, a decrease in one of such conditions may be compensated for by an increase in one or both of the other conditions, while the opposite correlation is also true. In general liquid temperatures rang› ing from about 10° C. to about 120° C .. preferably from about 20° C. to about 80° C.. and more preferably from about 25° C. to about 60° C. should be suitable for most instances, although lower or higher temperatures could be employed if desired. As noted above. it has been surprisingly discovered that minimum loss of organophosphite ligand occurs when a hydroformylation reaction product fluid con› taining a metal-organophosphite ligand complex catalyst is contacted with the acid removal substances or is contacted with water and the contacted water thereafter treated with the acid removal substances even at elevated temperatures. Normally the treatment is carried out under pressures rang› ing from ambient to reaction pressures and the contact time may vary from a matter of seconds or minutes to a few hours or more.\n\nMoreover, success in removing phosphorus acidic com› pounds from the reaction product fluid according to the subject invention may be determined by measuring the rate degradation (consumption) of the organophosphite ligand present in the hydroformylation reaction medium. The con› sumption rate can vary over a wide range, e.g., from about <0.6 up to about 5 grams per liter per day, and will be governed by the best compromise between cost of ligand and treatment frequency to keep hydrolysis below autocata› lytic levels. Preferably the acid removal substance and water treatment of this invention is carried out in such a manner that the consumption of the desired organophosphite ligand present in the hydroformylation reaction medium of the hydroformylation process is maintained at an acceptable rate, e.g., <0.5 grams of ligand per liter per day. and more preferably <O. 1 grams of ligand per liter per day. and most", + "recall": 0.979002624671916, + "true_md": "39 \n\n5,763,671 \n\n40 \n\nor more. Moreover, success in removing phosphorus acidic com› pounds from the reaction product fluid according to the subject invention may be determined by measuring the rate degradation (consumption) of the organophosphite ligand present in the hydroformylation reaction medium. The con› sumption rate can vary over a wide range, e.g., from about <0.6 up to about 5 grams per liter per day, and will be governed by the best compromise between cost of ligand and treatment frequency to keep hydrolysis below autocata› lytic levels. Preferably the acid removal substance and water treatment of this invention is carried out in such a manner that the consumption of the desired organophosphite ligand present in the hydroformylation reaction medium of the hydroformylation process is maintained at an acceptable rate, e.g., <0.5 grams of ligand per liter per day. and more preferably <O. 1 grams of ligand per liter per day. and most \n\nproduct fluids are derived. Moreover. removal of the desired aldehyde product can cause concentrations of the other ingredients of the reaction product fluids to be increased proportionately. Thus for example, the organophosphite ligand concentration in the metal-organophosphite ligand complex catalyst containing reaction product fluid to be treated by water in accordance with the process of this invention may range from between about 0.005 and 15 weight percent based on the total weight of the reaction product fluid. Preferably the ligand concen› tration is between 0.01 and 10 weight percent, and more preferably is between about 0.05 and 5 weight percent on that basis. Similarly. the concentration of the metal in the metal-organophosphite ligand complex catalyst containing reaction product fluid to be treated by the water in accor› dance with the process of this invention may be as high as about 5000 parts per million by weight based on the weight of the reaction product fluid. Preferably the metal concen› tration is between about 50 and 2500 parts per million by weight based on the weight of the reaction product fluid, and more preferably is between about 70 and 2000 parts per million by weight based on the weight of the reaction product fluid. \n\nzone. Thus it is to be understood that $_{the }$metal-organophosphite ligand complex catalyst containing reaction product fluid to be treated with water may contain in addition to the catalyst complex and its organic solvent, aldehyde product, free organophosphite ligand, unreacted olefin, and any other ingredient or additive consistent with the reaction medium of the hydroformylation process from which said reaction product fluids are derived. desired aldehyde product can \n\nessentially a \"non-aqueous\" process. Thus. for example. water may be used to treat all or part of a reaction product fluid of a continuous liquid catalyst recycle hydroformylation process that has been removed from the reaction zone at any time prior to or after separation of the aldehyde product therefrom. More preferably said water treatment involves treating all or part of the reaction product fluid obtained after distillation of as much of the aldehyde product desired, for example, prior to or during the recycling of said reaction product fluid to the reaction zone. For instance, a preferred mode would be to continuously pass all or part (e.g. a slip stream) of the recycled reaction product fluid that is being recycled to the reaction zone through a liquid extractor containing the water just before said catalyst containing residue is to re-enter the reaction zone. understood that $_{the }$metal-organophosphite \n\ndegradation of the For instance. a preferred quantity of water is the quantity which ensures that any degradation of the organophosphite ligand proceeds by the \"non-catalytic mechanism\" as described in ’The Kinetic Rate Law for Autocatalytic Reac› tions\" by Mata-Perez et al .• Journal of Chemical Education. Vol. 64. No. 11. November 1987, pages 925 to 927, rather than by the \"catalytic mechanism\" described in said article. Typically maximum water concentrations are only governed by practical considerations. As noted. treatment conditions such as temperature, pressure and contact time may also vary greatly and any suitable combination of such conditions may be employed herein. For instance, a decrease in one of such conditions may be compensated for by an increase in one or both of the other conditions, while the opposite correlation is also true. In general liquid temperatures rang› ing from about 10° C. to about 120° C .. preferably from about 20° C. to about 80° C.. and more preferably from about 25° C. to about 60° C. should be suitable for most instances, although lower or higher temperatures could be employed if desired. As noted above. it has been surprisingly discovered that minimum loss of organophosphite ligand occurs when a hydroformylation reaction product fluid con› taining $_{a }$metal-organophosphite ligand complex catalyst is contacted with the acid removal substances or is contacted with water and the contacted water thereafter treated with the acid removal substances even at elevated temperatures. Normally the treatment is carried out under pressures rang› ing from ambient to reaction pressures and the contact time 50 may vary from a matter of seconds or minutes to a few hours or more. phosphorus acidic com›\n\nThe manner in which the metal-organophosphite ligand complex catalyst containing reaction product fluid and water are contacted, as well as such treatment conditions, as the amount of water, temperature, pressure and contact time are not narrowly critical and obviously need only be sufficient to obtain the results desired. For instance. said treatment may be carried out in any suitable vessel or container. e.g. any conventional liquid extractor. which provides a suitable means for thorough contact between the organic reaction product fluid and water. may be employed herein. In general it is preferred to pass the organic reaction product fluid through the water in a sieve tray extractor column in a counter-current fashion. The amount of water employed by the subject invention and time of contact with the reaction product fluid need only be that which is sufficient to remove at least some amount of the phosphorus acidic compounds which cause hydrolytic degradation of the desirable orga› nophosphite ligands. Preferably the amount of water is sufficient to at least maintain the concentration of such acidic compounds below the threshold level that causes rapid degradation of the organophosphite ligand. water is the quantity \n\naddition to an organic phase. Also, it is to be understood that another preferred hydro› formylation process of this invention, i.e .• the embodiment comprising preventing and/or lessening hydrolytic degrada› tion of the organophosphite ligand and deactivation of the metal-organophosphite ligand complex catalyst by treating at least a portion of the hydroformylation reaction product fluid derived from the hydroformylation process and which also contains phosphorus acidic compounds formed during said hydroformylation process by introducing one or more acid removal substances into said at least one reaction zone and/or said at least one separation zone sufficient to remove at least some amount of the phosphorus acidic compounds from said reaction product fluid, is also considered to be essentially a \"non-aqueous\" process. may be used to treat all or part \n\nphorus acidic compounds removed from said reaction prod- uct fluid with one or more acid removal substances sufficient to remove at least some amount of the phosphorus acidic compounds from said water, is still considered to be essen› tially a \"non-aqueous\" process, which is to say, any water present in the hydroformylation reaction medium is not present in an amount sufficient to cause either the hydro› formylation reaction or said medium to be considered as encompassing a separate aqueous or water phase or layer in addition to an organic phase. that another preferred hydro›" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9742439383256182, + "doc_id": "fe2cf2af3ce32f32ae20fddcc3da66590ae790fad8f765c1b2bcaf6f8a975827", + "edit_distance": 0.5452991452991452, + "f1_score": 0.9848156182212581, + "meteor": 0.7779352703723036, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "US 20090197849Al\n\nUS 20090197849Al\n\n## c19) United States c12) Patent Application Publication HSU et al.\n\n## (54) TRANSDERMALAND TOPICAL ADMINISTRATION OF DRUGS USING BASIC PERMEATION ENHANCERS\n\n- (76) Inventors:\n\nTsung-Min HSU, San Diego, CA (US); Nicole T. GRICENKO, San Diego, CA (US); Alan T.J. HICKEY, San Diego, CA (US); Eric C. JACOBSON, San Diego, CA (US); Rose C. LOBELLO, San Diego, CA (US); Jane OBARA, San Diego, CA (US); Eric C. LUO, Plano, TX (US)\n\nCorrespondence Address:\n\nINTELLECTUAL PROPERTY GROUP FREDRIKSON & BYRON, P.A. 200 SOUTH SIXTH STREET, SUITE 4000 MINNEAPOLIS, MN 55402 (US)\n\n- (21) Appl. No.:\n- (22) Filed:\n\n12/203,783\n\nSep.3,2008\n\n## Related U.S. Application Data\n\n(60) Continuation of application No. 10/863,432, filed on Jun. 7, 2004, now abandoned, Continuation-in-part of application No. 10/176,952, filed on Jun. 21, 2002, now abandoned, Continuation-in-part of application No. 10/675,603, filed on Sep. 29, 2003, which is a division of application No. 10/176,265, filed on Jun. 19, 2002, now Pat. No. 6,673,363, which is a continu› ation-in-part of application No. 10/175,769, filed on Jun. 19, 2002, now abandoned, which is a continua› tion-in-part of application No. 10/175,721, filed on Jun. 19, 2002, now abandoned, which is a continua› tion-in-part of application No. 10/175,682, filed on Jun. 19, 2002, now abandoned, which is a continua› tion-in-part of application No. 10/176,264, filed on Jun. 19, 2002, now abandoned, which is a continua› tion-in-part of application No. 10/175,681, filed on Jun. 19, 2002, now abandoned, said application No. 10/176,265 is a continuation-in-part of application No. 09/972,008, filed on Oct. 4, 2001, now Pat. No. 6,582, 724, which is a continuation-in-part of application No. 09/738,410, filed on Dec. 14, 2000, now Pat. No. 6,586,000, which is a continuation-in-part of applica› tion No. 09/569,889, filed on May 11, 2000,now aban› doned, which is a continuation-in-part of application No. 09/465,098, filed on Dec. 16, 1999, now aban› doned, said application No. 10/175,769 is a continua› tion-in-part of application No. 09/972,008, filed on Oct. 4, 2001, now Pat. No. 6,582,724, which is a con› tinuation-in-part of application No. 09/738,410, filed on Dec. 14, 2000, now Pat. No. 6,586,000, which is a continuation-in-part of application No. 09/569,889, filed on May 11, 2000, now abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of application No. 09/465,098, filed on Dec. 16, 1999, now abandoned, said applica› tion No. 10/175,721 is a continuation-in-part of appli› cation No. 09/972,008, filed on Oct. 4, 2001, now Pat. No. 6,582,724, which is a continuation-in-part of application No. 09/738,410, filed on Dec. 14, 2000,\n\n- c10)\n\nPub. No.: US 2009/0197849 Al\n\n- (43) Pub. Date:\n\nAug. 6, 2009\n\nnow Pat. No. 6,586,000, which is a continuation-in› part of application No. 09/569,889, filed on May 11, 2000, now abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of application No. 09/465,098, filed on Dec. 16, 1999, now abandoned, said application No. 10/175,682 is a continuation-in-part of application No. 09/972,008, filed on Oct. 4, 2001, now Pat. No. 6,582,724, which is a continuation-in-part of application No. 09/738,410, filed on Dec. 14, 2000, now Pat. No. 6,586,000, which is a continuation-in-part of application No. 09/569, 889, filed on May 11, 2000, now abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of application No. 09/465,098, filed on Dec. 16, 1999, now abandoned, said applica› tion No. 10/176,264 is a continuation-in-part of appli› cation No. 09/972,008, filed on Oct. 4, 2001, now Pat. No. 6,582,724, which is a continuation-in-part of application No. 09/738,410, filed on Dec. 14, 2000, now Pat. No. 6,586,000, which is a continuation-in› part of application No. 09/569,889, filed on May 11, 2000, now abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of application No. 09/465,098, filed on Dec. 16, 1999, now abandoned, said application No. 10/175,681 is a continuation-in-part of application No. 09/972,008, filed on Oct. 4, 2001, now Pat. No. 6,582,724, which is a continuation-in-part of application No. 09/738,410, filed on Dec. 14, 2000, now Pat. No. 6,586,000, which is a continuation-in-part of application No. 09/569, 889, filed on May 11, 2000, now abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of application No. 09/465,098, filed on Dec. 16, 1999, now abandoned, said applica› tion No. 09/972,008 is a continuation-in-part of appli› cation No. 09/738,395, filed on Dec. 14, 2000, now Pat. No. 6,719,997, which is a continuation-in-part of application No. 09/607,892, filed on Jun. 30, 2000, now abandoned, said application No. 09/738,410 is a continuation-in-part of application No. 09/738,395, filed on Dec. 14, 2000, now Pat. No. 6,719,997, which is a continuation-in-part of application No. 09/607, 892, filed on Jun. 30, 2000, now abandoned.\n\n## Publication Classification\n\n- (51) Int. Cl.\n\nA61K 31156 (2006.01)\n\n- (52) U.S. Cl.\n\n........................................................\n\n514/178\n\n## (57) ABSTRACT\n\nMethods are provided for enhancing the permeability of skin or mucosa! tissue to topical or transdermal application of pharmacologically or cosmeceutically active agents. The methods entail the use of a base in order to increase the flux of the active agent through a body surface while minimizing the likelihood of skin damage, irritation or sensitization. The permeation enhancer can be an inorganic or organic base. Compositions and transdermal systems are also described.", + "recall": 0.9700854700854701, + "true_md": "1111111111111111 IIIIII IIIII 11111 1111111111 111111111111111 11111 11111 111111111111111 11111111 US 20090197849Al \n\n# c10) Pub. No.: US 2009/0197849 Al\n\n# (43) Pub. Date: Aug. 6, 2009\n\n# c19) United States c12) Patent Application Publication\n\n# HSU et al.\n\n# (54) TRANSDERMALAND TOPICAL ADMINISTRATION OF DRUGS USING BASIC PERMEATION ENHANCERS\n\nnow Pat. No. 6,586,000, which is a continuation-in› part of application No. 09/569,889, filed on May 11, 2000, now abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of application No. 09/465,098, filed on Dec. 16, 1999, now abandoned, said application No. 10/175,682 is a continuation-in-part of application No. 09/972,008, filed on Oct. 4, 2001, now Pat. No. 6,582,724, which is a continuation-in-part of application No. 09/738,410, filed on Dec. 14, 2000, now Pat. No. 6,586,000, which is a continuation-in-part of application No. 09/569, 889, filed on May 11, 2000, now abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of application No. 09/465,098, filed on Dec. 16, 1999, now abandoned, said applica› tion No. 10/176,264 is a continuation-in-part of appli› cation No. 09/972,008, filed on Oct. 4, 2001, now Pat. No. 6,582,724, which is a continuation-in-part of application No. 09/738,410, filed on Dec. 14, 2000, now Pat. No. 6,586,000, which is a continuation-in› part of application No. 09/569,889, filed on May 11, 2000, now abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of application No. 09/465,098, filed on Dec. 16, 1999, now abandoned, said application No. 10/175,681 is a continuation-in-part of application No. 09/972,008, filed on Oct. 4, 2001, now Pat. No. 6,582,724, which is a continuation-in-part of application No. 09/738,410, filed on Dec. 14, 2000, now Pat. No. 6,586,000, which is a continuation-in-part of application No. 09/569, 889, filed on May 11, 2000, now abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of application No. 09/465,098, filed on Dec. 16, 1999, now abandoned, said applica› tion No. 09/972,008 is a continuation-in-part of appli› cation No. 09/738,395, filed on Dec. 14, 2000, now Pat. No. 6,719,997, which is a continuation-in-part of application No. 09/607,892, filed on Jun. 30, 2000, now abandoned, said application No. 09/738,410 is a continuation-in-part of application No. 09/738,395, filed on Dec. 14, 2000, now Pat. No. 6,719,997, which is a continuation-in-part of application No. 09/607, 892, filed on Jun. 30, 2000, now abandoned. \n\n- (76) Inventors: Tsung-Min HSU, San Diego, CA (US); Nicole T. GRICENKO, San Diego, CA (US); Alan T.J. HICKEY, San Diego, CA (US); Eric C. JACOBSON, San Diego, CA (US); Rose C. LOBELLO, San Diego, CA (US); Jane OBARA, San Diego, CA (US); Eric C. LUO, Plano, TX (US) \n\n- (21) Appl. No.: 12/203,783 \n\n- (22) Filed: Sep.3,2008 \n\n- (60) Continuation of application No. 10/863,432, filed on Jun. 7, 2004, now abandoned, Continuation-in-part of application No. 10/176,952, filed on Jun. 21, 2002, now abandoned, Continuation-in-part of application No. 10/675,603, filed on Sep. 29, 2003, which is a division of application No. 10/176,265, filed on Jun. 19, 2002, now Pat. No. 6,673,363, which is a continu› ation-in-part of application No. 10/175,769, filed on Jun. 19, 2002, now abandoned, which is a continua› tion-in-part of application No. 10/175,721, filed on Jun. 19, 2002, now abandoned, which is a continua› tion-in-part of application No. 10/175,682, filed on Jun. 19, 2002, now abandoned, which is a continua› tion-in-part of application No. 10/176,264, filed on Jun. 19, 2002, now abandoned, which is a continua› tion-in-part of application No. 10/175,681, filed on Jun. 19, 2002, now abandoned, said application No. 10/176,265 is a continuation-in-part of application No. 09/972,008, filed on Oct. 4, 2001, now Pat. No. 6,582, 724, which is a continuation-in-part of application No. 09/738,410, filed on Dec. 14, 2000, now Pat. No. 6,586,000, which is a continuation-in-part of applica› tion No. 09/569,889, filed on May 11, 2000,now aban› doned, which is a continuation-in-part of application No. 09/465,098, filed on Dec. 16, 1999, now aban› doned, said application No. 10/175,769 is a continua› tion-in-part of application No. 09/972,008, filed on Oct. 4, 2001, now Pat. No. 6,582,724, which is a con› tinuation-in-part of application No. 09/738,410, filed on Dec. 14, 2000, now Pat. No. 6,586,000, which is a continuation-in-part of application No. 09/569,889, filed on May 11, 2000, now abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of application No. 09/465,098, filed on Dec. 16, 1999, now abandoned, said applica› tion No. 10/175,721 is a continuation-in-part of appli› cation No. 09/972,008, filed on Oct. 4, 2001, now Pat. No. 6,582,724, which is a continuation-in-part of application No. 09/738,410, filed on Dec. 14, 2000, \n\n- (51) Int. Cl. A61K 31156 (2006.01) \n\nCorrespondence Address: INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY GROUP FREDRIKSON & BYRON, P.A. 200 SOUTH SIXTH STREET, SUITE 4000 MINNEAPOLIS, MN 55402 (US) \n\nMethods are provided for enhancing the permeability of skin or mucosa! tissue to topical or transdermal application of pharmacologically or cosmeceutically active agents. The methods entail the use of a base in order to increase the flux of the active agent through a body surface while minimizing the likelihood of skin damage, irritation or sensitization. The permeation enhancer can be an inorganic or organic base. Compositions and transdermal systems are also described. \n\n## (57) ABSTRACT\n\n## Publication Classification\n\n## Related U.S. Application Data\n\n(52) U.S. Cl. ........................................................ 514/178" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9551665271636299, + "doc_id": "53fd114d3b6eca292ecb62bdb61cdae2d8b91fbf39d89012e44a047750887bbd", + "edit_distance": 0.034482758620689655, + "f1_score": 0.9601769911504425, + "meteor": 0.9806175193261606, + "precision": 0.9475982532751092, + "pred_md": "US 9,164,380 B2\n\n21\n\nacyl group. The substituent preferably contains 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 8 carbon atoms, and most pref› erably 1 to 5 carbon atoms.\n\nY 2 is preferably a linear or branched alkylene group, a cyclic aliphatic hydrocarbon group, or a divalent linking group containing a hetero atom.\n\nWhen Y 2 represents a linear or branched alkylene group, the alkylene group preferably contains 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms, still more preferably 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and most preferably 1 to 3 carbon atoms. Specific examples include the same linear alkylene groups and branched alkylene groups as those mentioned above, within the description of the \"divalent hydrocarbon group which may have a substituent\", for the linear or branched aliphatic hydrocarbon group.\n\nWhen Y 2 represents a cyclic aliphatic hydrocarbon group, examples of the cyclic aliphatic hydrocarbon group include the same cyclic aliphatic hydrocarbon groups as those men› tioned above, within the description for the \"divalent hydro› carbon group which may have a substituent\", for the \"ali› phatic hydrocarbon group that includes a ring within the structure\".\n\nAs the cyclic aliphatic hydrocarbon group, a group in which two or more hydrogen atoms have been removed from cyclopentane, cyclohexane, norbornane, isobornane, ada› mantane, tricyclodecane or tetracyclododecane is particu› larly preferred.\n\nWhen Y 2 represents a divalent linking group containing a hetero atom, preferred examples of the linking group include -0-, -C(=O)---0-, -C(=O)-, ---0----C(=O)› O-, ----C(=O)-NH-, -NH- (wherein H may be sub› stituted with a substituent such as an alkyl group or an acyl group), -S-, -S(=O) 2 -, -S(=O) 2 ---0-, and groups represented by a general formula -Y 21 ---0-Y 22 -, -[Y2l\\_C(=O)---0Jm,-Y22\\_ or \\_y21---0-C(=O)› Y22 -[ wherein each ofY 21 andY 22 independently represents a divalent hydrocarbon group which may have a substituent, 0 represents an oxygen atom, and m' represents an integer of 0 to 3].\n\nWhen Y 2 represents -NH-, this H may be substituted with a substituent such as an alkyl group or an acyl group. The substituent (the alkyl group, an acyl group or the like) preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 8 carbon atoms, and most preferably 1 to 5 carbon atoms.\n\nIn the formulas -Y 21 ---0-Y 22 -, -[Y 21 -C(=O)› OJm ,-Y 22 -and Y 21 ---O-C(=O)-Y 22 -, each ofY 21 and Y 22 independently represents a divalent hydrocarbon group which may have a substituent. Examples of the divalent hydrocarbon groups include the same groups as those described above for the \"divalent hydrocarbon group which may have a substituent\" within the description relating to the divalent linking group.\n\nY 21 is preferably a linear aliphatic hydrocarbon group, more preferably a linear alkylene group, still more preferably a linear alkylene group of 1 to 5 carbon atoms, and most preferably a methylene group or an ethylene group.\n\nY 22 is preferably a linear or branched aliphatic hydrocar› bon group, and is more preferably a methylene group, an ethylene group or an alkylmethylene group. The alkyl group within the alkylmethylene group is preferably a linear alkyl group of 1 to 5 carbon atoms, more preferably a linear alkyl group of 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and most preferably a methyl group.\n\n5\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n60\n\n65\n\n22\n\nIn the group represented by the formula [Y 21 ----C(=O)0]m ,-Y 22 -, m' represents an integer of Oto 3, preferably an integer of Oto 2, more preferably 0 or 1, and most preferably 1. In other words, it is particularly desirable that the group represented by formula -[Y 21 ----C(=O)-Olm ,-Y 22 -is a group represented by a formula -Y 21 ----C(=O)-O› Y22 -. Among such groups, groups represented by a formula -(CH 2 )a,----C(=O)-O-(CH 2 ) 6 ,are particularly pre› ferred. In this formula, a' is an integer of 1 to 10, preferably an integer of 1 to 8, more preferably an integer of 1 to 5, still more preferably 1 or 2, and most preferably 1. b' is an integer of 1 to 10, preferably an integer of 1 to 8, more preferably an integer of 1 to 5, still more preferably 1 or 2, and most preferably 1.\n\nThe divalent linking group containing a hetero atom for Y 2 is preferably an organic group composed of a combination of at least one non-hydrocarbon group and a divalent hydrocar› bon group. Among such groups, linear groups containing an oxygen atom as the hetero atom, for example, groups con› taining an ether linkage or ester linkage are preferable, groups represented by one of the above formulas -Y 21 -O› y22\\_, -[Y21----C(=O)---O]m,-y22\\_ or \\_y21\\_ O ----C (=O)-Y 22 are more preferable, and groups represented by either of the formulas -[Y 21 -C(=O)---0lm ,-Y 22 or -Y 21 -O----C(=O)-Y 22 are particularly preferable.\n\nOf the various possibilities described above, Y 2 is prefer› ably a linear or branched alkylene group, or a divalent linking group containing a hetero atom, and is more preferably a linear or branched alkylene group, a group represented by the above formula Y 21 ---O-Y 22 -, a group represented by the above formula -[Y 21 ----C(=O)---0]m,-Y 22 -, or a group represented by the above formula -Y 21 -O----C (=O)-Y22 \\_\\_\n\nSpecific examples of the structural unit (al 1) include struc› tural units represented by general formulas (al-1) to (al-4) shown below.\n\n## [Chemical Formula 7]", + "recall": 0.9730941704035875, + "true_md": "US 9,164,380 B2 \n\n22 \n\n21 \n\nacyl group. The substituent preferably contains 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 8 carbon atoms, and most pref› erably 1 to 5 carbon atoms. \n\nY 2 is preferably a linear or branched alkylene group, a cyclic aliphatic hydrocarbon group, or a divalent linking group containing a hetero atom. \n\nWhen Y 2 represents a linear or branched alkylene group, the alkylene group preferably contains 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms, still more preferably 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and most preferably 1 to 3 carbon atoms. Specific examples include the same linear alkylene groups and branched alkylene groups as those mentioned above, within the description of the \"divalent hydrocarbon group which may have a substituent\", for the linear or branched aliphatic hydrocarbon group. \n\nWhen Y 2 represents a cyclic aliphatic hydrocarbon group, examples of the cyclic aliphatic hydrocarbon group include the same cyclic aliphatic hydrocarbon groups as those men› tioned above, within the description for the \"divalent hydro› carbon group which may have a substituent\", for the \"ali› phatic hydrocarbon group that includes a ring within the structure\". \n\nAs the cyclic aliphatic hydrocarbon group, a group in which two or more hydrogen atoms have been removed from cyclopentane, cyclohexane, norbornane, isobornane, ada› mantane, tricyclodecane or tetracyclododecane is particu› larly preferred. \n\nWhen Y 2 represents a divalent linking group containing a hetero atom, preferred examples of the linking group include -0-, -C(=O)---0-, -C(=O)-, ---0----C(=O)› O-, ----C(=O)-NH-, -NH- (wherein H may be sub› stituted with a substituent such as an alkyl group or an acyl group), -S-, -S(=O) 2 -, -S(=O) 2 ---0-, and groups represented by a general formula -Y 21 ---0-Y 22 -, -[Y2l\\_C(=O)---0Jm,-Y22\\_ or \\_y21---0-C(=O)› Y22 - [ wherein each ofY 21 andY 22 independently represents 30 35 a divalent hydrocarbon group which may have a substituent, 40 0 represents an oxygen atom, and m’ represents an integer of 0 to 3]. \n\nWhen Y 2 represents -NH-, this H may be substituted with a substituent such as an alkyl group or an acyl group. The substituent (the alkyl group, an acyl group or the like) pref- erably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 8 carbon atoms, and most preferably 1 to 5 carbon atoms. \n\nIn the formulas -Y 21 ---0-Y 22 -, -[Y 21 -C(=O)› OJm ,-Y 22 - and - Y 21 ---O-C(=O)-Y 22 -, each ofY 21 and Y 22 independently represents a divalent hydrocarbon group which may have a substituent. Examples of the divalent hydrocarbon groups include the same groups as those described above for the \"divalent hydrocarbon group which may have a substituent\" within the description relating to the divalent linking group. \n\nY 21 is preferably a linear aliphatic hydrocarbon group, more preferably a linear alkylene group, still more preferably a linear alkylene group of 1 to 5 carbon atoms, and most preferably a methylene group or an ethylene group. \n\nY 22 is preferably a linear or branched aliphatic hydrocar› bon group, and is more preferably a methylene group, an ethylene group or an alkylmethylene group. The alkyl group within the alkylmethylene group is preferably a linear alkyl group of 1 to 5 carbon atoms, more preferably a linear alkyl group of 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and most preferably a methyl group. \n\n22 In the group represented by the formula [Y 21 ----C(=O)- 0]m ,-Y 22 -, m’ represents an integer of Oto 3, preferably an integer of Oto 2, more preferably 0 or 1, and most preferably 1. In other words, it is particularly desirable that the group represented by formula -[Y 21 ----C(=O)-Olm ,-Y 22 - is a group represented by a formula -Y 21 ----C(=O)-O› Y22 -. Among such groups, groups represented by a formula -(CH 2 )a,----C(=O)-O-(CH 2 )$_{6}$ ,- are particularly pre› ferred. In this formula, a’ is an integer of 1 to 10, preferably an integer of 1 to 8, more preferably an integer of 1 to 5, still more preferably 1 or 2, and most preferably 1. b’ is an integer of 1 to 10, preferably an integer of 1 to 8, more preferably an integer of 1 to 5, still more preferably 1 or 2, and most preferably 1. \n\nThe divalent linking group containing a hetero atom for Y 2 is preferably an organic group composed of a combination of at least one non-hydrocarbon group and a divalent hydrocar› bon group. Among such groups, linear groups containing an oxygen atom as the hetero atom, for example, groups con› taining an ether linkage or ester linkage are preferable, groups represented by one of the above formulas -Y 21 -O› y22\\_, -[Y21----C(=O)---O]m,-y22\\_ or \\_y21\\_ O ----C (=O)-Y 22 - are more preferable, and groups represented by either of the formulas -[Y 21 -C(=O)---0lm ,-Y 22 - or -Y 21 -O----C(=O)-Y 22 - are particularly preferable. \n\nOf the various possibilities described above, Y 2 is prefer› ably a linear or branched alkylene group, or a divalent linking group containing a hetero atom, and is more preferably a linear or branched alkylene group, a group represented by the above formula - Y 21 ---O-Y 22 -, a group represented by the above formula -[Y 21 ----C(=O)---0]m,-Y 22 -, or a group represented by the above formula -Y 21 -O----C (=O)-Y22 \\_\\_ \n\nSpecific examples of the structural unit (al 1) include struc› tural units represented by general formulas (al-1) to (al-4) shown below. \n\n[Chemical Formula 7]" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9798618591334691, + "doc_id": "afb4628f81f0ae332f6ce061207ccd8109079ccc65f058a8c4e0d4a3018b4458", + "edit_distance": 0.45905707196029777, + "f1_score": 0.9903225806451613, + "meteor": 0.9685811919385703, + "precision": 0.9967532467532467, + "pred_md": "US 2002/0111024 Al\n\npressure ( or polish down force (PSI)) (\"pp\"), polish table speed, RPM (\"ts\"), spindle speed ( carrier speed), RPM (\"ss\") and slurry flow in m/min (\"sf\"). The CMP results of the process include the mean copper removal rate (MRR) in Nmin. and the within wafer nonuniformity (%) (WIWNU).\n\n[0120] The result displayed below under the column head› ing \"Dia-58 pt\" represents 58-points diameter measurement across the whole wafer by DCE Resmap four point probe. The result under the column \"Polar-49pt/6 mmEE\" repre› sents 49 points polar measurement with 6 mm edge exclu› sion by Resmap.\n\n## EXAMPLE 2\n\n## Copper Substrate with Inhibited Formulations\n\n[0121] The use of an inhibitor, a fluoridizer, or both may be advantageous in CMP formulations. In further accor› dance to the present invention and as delineated above, ETA is used to block the surface of copper from corroding or dissolving away in the absence of an oxidizer, or corroding or dissolving away at a controlled rate in the presence of an oxidizer.\n\n[0122] As an alternative to ETA, 2,4 pentandione dioxime is used to block or control the rate at which the surface of copper corrodes or dissolves away. The compound 2,4 pentandione dioxime is given by the chemical formula:\n\nAug. 15,2002\n\ndioxime can form insoluble products at pH levels as low as 2 and 3. Thus, 2,4-pentandione dioxime complexes copper without stack crystallizing further pentandione dioxime lay› ers on the initial monolayer of 2,4-pentandione dioxime.\n\n[0125] In one embodiment, the present invention is com› prised of an oxidizer (Oxidizer \"D\" from Example 1), 2,4-pentandione dioxime (an Insoluble Complexing Agent), H2 0 4 , an alumina abrasive and DI Water mixed to form the Slurry 5 Composition.\n\n[0126] Composition concentrations for one example are shown in the following table. It should be noted that the concentration of, inter alia, the Insoluble Complexing Agent of the present invention may be changed to alter the resultant slurry.\n\n[0127] Slurry 5 Composition\n\n[0128] The slurry composition has a preferred pH range of about 2.82.\n\n[0129] The CMP process variables and results for two examples using the Slurry 5 Composition are shown in the following table.\n\n[0123] A characteristic of ETA is that it tends to form a resilient mono layer in the form of a cover salt, i.e., an insoluble copper reaction product at the copper surface. This layer can be removed only by polishing under extreme chemical conditions that include the use of strong acids or bases. Furthermore, ETA can stack crystallize on top of the mono layer so as to physically scratch the wafer under normal CMP processes as a result of the sharp edges of the ETA crystals. Hence, copper is not easily polished with ETA present.\n\n[0124] 2,4-pentandione dioxime also forms a copper reac› tion product with copper but apparently stops at the mono› layer, yet provides blocking that was discovered to be approximately equivalent with ETA That is, 2,4-pentandi› one dioxime and ETA both form insoluble products at approximately the same rate and at apparently about the same degree of insolubility. However, 2,4-pentandione\n\n[0130] The first above process using the Slurry 5 Com› position is achieved with a polish time of 60 seconds, a polish pressure of 5 psi, a polish table speed of 90 RPM, a spindle speed of 90 RPM and a slurry flow of 175 ml/min.\n\n[0131] The second process example using the Slurry 5 Composition is achieved by using a polish time of 60 seconds, a polish pressure of 3 psi, a polish table speed of 75 RPM, a spindle speed of 75 RPM and a slurry flow of 175 ml/min. Note that the Slurry 5 Composition is extremely advantageous in that it provides a large WIWNU (or syn› onymously, NU%) window of 4.8% to 10.4% to account for process variations.\n\n[0132] Copper Slurry Composition (Slurry \"6\" Composi› tion)\n\n[0133] In another preferred form, the present invention doubles the weight percent of 2,4-pentandione dioxime in the Slurry 5 Composition to form a Slurry 6 Composition.\n\n12", + "recall": 0.9839743589743589, + "true_md": "Aug. 15,2002 \n\n12 \n\nUS 2002/0111024 Al \n\npressure ( or polish down force (PSI)) (\"pp\"), polish table speed, RPM (\"ts\"), spindle speed ( carrier speed), RPM (\"ss\") and slurry flow in m/min (\"sf\"). The CMP results of the process include the mean copper removal rate (MRR) in Nmin. and the within wafer nonuniformity (%) (WIWNU). \n\n[0120] The result displayed below under the column head› ing \"Dia-58 pt\" represents 58-points diameter measurement across the whole wafer by DCE Resmap four point probe. The result under the column \"Polar-49pt/6 mmEE\" repre› sents 49 points polar measurement with 6 mm edge exclu› sion by Resmap. \n\n[0121] The use of an inhibitor, a fluoridizer, or both may be advantageous in CMP formulations. In further accor› dance to the present invention and as delineated above, ETA is used to block the surface of copper from corroding or dissolving away in the absence of an oxidizer, or corroding or dissolving away at a controlled rate in the presence of an oxidizer. \n\n[0122] As an alternative to ETA, 2,4 pentandione dioxime is used to block or control the rate at which the surface of copper corrodes or dissolves away. The compound 2,4 pentandione dioxime is given by the chemical formula: \n\n[0123] A characteristic of ETA is that it tends to form a resilient mono layer in the form of a cover salt, i.e., an insoluble copper reaction product at the copper surface. This layer can be removed only by polishing under extreme chemical conditions that include the use of strong acids or bases. Furthermore, ETA can stack crystallize on top of the mono layer so as to physically scratch the wafer under normal CMP processes as a result of the sharp edges of the ETA crystals. Hence, copper is not easily polished with ETA present. \n\n[0124] 2,4-pentandione dioxime also forms a copper reac› tion product with copper but apparently stops at the mono› layer, yet provides blocking that was discovered to be approximately equivalent with ETA That is, 2,4-pentandi› one dioxime and ETA both form insoluble products at approximately the same rate and at apparently about the same degree of insolubility. However, 2,4-pentandione \n\ndioxime can form insoluble products at pH levels as low as 2 and 3. Thus, 2,4-pentandione dioxime complexes copper without stack crystallizing further pentandione dioxime lay› ers on the initial monolayer of 2,4-pentandione dioxime. \n\n[0125] In one embodiment, the present invention is com› prised of an oxidizer (Oxidizer \"D\" from Example 1), 2,4-pentandione dioxime (an Insoluble Complexing Agent), H$_{2}$ 0 4 , an alumina abrasive and DI Water mixed to form the Slurry 5 Composition. \n\n[0126] Composition concentrations for one example are shown in the following table. It should be noted that the concentration of, inter alia, the Insoluble Complexing Agent of the present invention may be changed to alter the resultant slurry. \n\n[0127] Slurry 5 Composition \n\n[0128] The slurry composition has a preferred pH range of about 2.82. \n\n[0129] The CMP process variables and results for two examples using the Slurry 5 Composition are shown in the following table. \n\n[0130] The first above process using the Slurry 5 Com› position is achieved with a polish time of 60 seconds, a polish pressure of 5 psi, a polish table speed of 90 RPM, a spindle speed of 90 RPM and a slurry flow of 175 ml/min. \n\n[0131] The second process example using the Slurry 5 Composition is achieved by using a polish time of 60 seconds, a polish pressure of 3 psi, a polish table speed of 75 RPM, a spindle speed of 75 RPM and a slurry flow of 175 ml/min. Note that the Slurry 5 Composition is extremely advantageous in that it provides a large WIWNU (or syn› onymously, NU%) window of 4.8% to 10.4% to account for process variations. \n\n[0132] Copper Slurry Composition (Slurry \"6\" Composi› tion) \n\n[0133] In another preferred form, the present invention doubles the weight percent of 2,4-pentandione dioxime in the Slurry 5 Composition to form a Slurry 6 Composition. \n\n## EXAMPLE 2\n\n## Copper Substrate with Inhibited Formulations" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7288534918683263, + "doc_id": "27aaa051f645ad4986be4beb06d33afe7e05e1cd72967e1cfef4572bc4e0bfaa", + "edit_distance": 0.5831062670299727, + "f1_score": 0.9478458049886621, + "meteor": 0.6951119000392513, + "precision": 0.9288888888888889, + "pred_md": "US 9,164,380 B2\n\n17\n\nExamples of the substituent which may be bonded to the naphthalene ring of the vinylnaphthalene or derivative there› fore include the same substituents as those mentioned above for the substituent which may be bonded to the benzene ring of an a-substituted) styrene.\n\nIn a compound in which the hydrogen atom of the hydroxyl group of an a-substituted) vinyl(hydroxynaphthalene) has been substituted with an organic group, there are no particular limitations on the organic group, and examples include the same organic groups as those described above for the organic group of an ( a-substituted) acrylate ester.\n\nExamples of the structural unit (al) include a structural unit (all) derived from an acrylate ester in which the hydro› gen atom bonded to the carbon atom on the a-position may be substituted with a substituent, and containing an acid-decom› posable group, a structural unit (al2) derived from ahydroxy› styrene in which the hydrogen atom bonded to the carbon atom on the a-position may be substituted with a substituent, in which the hydrogen atoms bonded to the benzene ring may be substituted with a substituent other than a hydroxyl group, and in which the hydrogen atom of the hydroxyl group is substituted with an acid-dissociable group or a substituent containing an acid-dissociable group, and a structural unit ( al 3) derived from a vinyl(hydroxynaphthalene) in which the hydrogen atom bonded to the carbon atom on the a-position may be substituted with a substituent, in which the hydrogen atoms bonded to the naphthalene ring may be substituted with a substituent other than a hydroxyl group, and in which the hydrogen atom of the hydroxyl group is substituted with an acid-dissociable group or a substituent containing an acid› dissociable group.\n\n{Structural Unit (all)}\n\nThe structural unit (all) is a structural unit derived from an acrylate ester in which the hydrogen atom bonded to the carbon atom on the a-position may be substituted with a substituent and containing an acid-decomposable group.\n\nSpecific examples of the structural unit (all) include struc› tural units represented by general formula (al-0-1) shown below and structural units represented by general formula (al-0-2) shown below.\n\n## [Chemical Formula 6]\n\nIn the formulas, R represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group of 1 to 5 carbon atoms or a halogenated alkyl group of 1 to 5 carbon atoms, xi represents an acid-dissociable group, Y 2 represents a divalent linking group, and X 2 represents an acid-dissociable group.\n\n18\n\nIn general formula (al-0-1), examples of the alkyl group and halogenated alkyl group for R include the same groups as the alkyl groups of 1 to 5 carbon atoms and halogenated alkyl groups of 1 to 5 carbon atoms mentioned above for the substituent bonded to the carbon atom on the a-position within the description relating to the aforementioned a-substituted acrylate ester.\n\nR is preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group of 1 to 5 carbon atoms or a fluorinated alkyl group of 1 to 5 carbon atoms, and is most preferably a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.\n\nThere are no particular limitations on Xi as long as it is an acid-dissociable group. Examples include the aforemen› tioned tertiary alkyl ester-type acid-dissociable groups and acetal-type acid-dissociable groups, and of these, a tertiary alkyl ester-type acid-dissociable group is preferable.\n\nIn general formula (al-0-2), R is the same as defined for R in formula (al-0-1).\n\nX 2 is the same as defined for xi in formula (al-0-1).\n\nAlthough there are no particular limitations on the divalent linking group for Y 2 , preferred examples include divalent hydrocarbon groups which may have a substituent, and diva› lent linking groups containing a hetero atom. (Divalent Hydrocarbon Group which May have a Substituent)\n\nThe hydrocarbon group for the divalent linking group may be either an aliphatic hydrocarbon group or an aromatic hydrocarbon group.\n\nAn \"aliphatic hydrocarbon group\" refers to a hydrocarbon group that has no aromaticity. The aliphatic hydrocarbon group may be either saturated or unsaturated. In general, the aliphatic hydrocarbon group is preferably saturated.\n\nSpecific examples of the aliphatic hydrocarbon group include a linear or branched aliphatic hydrocarbon group, and an aliphatic hydrocarbon group that includes a ring within the structure.\n\nThe linear or branched aliphatic hydrocarbon group pref› erably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 8 carbon atoms, and most preferably 1 to 5 carbon atoms.\n\nAs the linear aliphatic hydrocarbon group, a linear alkylene group is preferable, and specific examples include a methyl› ene group [----CH 2 -], an ethylene group [-(CH 2 ) 2 -], a trimethylene group [-(CH 2 ) 3 -], a tetramethylene group [-(CH2 ) 4 -] and a pentamethylene group [-(CH 2 ) 5 -]. As the branched aliphatic hydrocarbon group, a branched alkylene group is preferable, and specific examples include various alkylalkylene groups, including alkylmethylene groups such as ----CH(CH 3 )-, ----CH(CH CH3 )-, 2 ----C(CH 3 ) 2 -, -C(CH3)(CH2CH3 )-, -C(CH3 ) (CH2 CH2CH3 )and -C(CH2CH3 ) 2 -, alkylethylene groups such as ----CH(CH )CH 3 2 -, ---CH(CH )CH(CH3 )-, -3 ----C(CH 3 ) 2 CH2 -, -CH(CH2CH3)CH2 and ----C(CH CH3 ) 2 2 ----CH 2 -, alkyltrimethylene groups such as ----CH(CH )CH CH 3 2 2 and -CH 2 CH(CH3 )CH 2 -, and alkyltetramethylene groups such as -CH(CH 3 ) CH2 CH 2 CH2 and -CH 2 CH(CH3 )CH 2 CH2 -. As the alkyl group within the alkylalkylene group, a linear alkyl group of 1 to 5 carbon atoms is preferable.\n\nThe linear or branched aliphatic hydrocarbon group may or may not have a substituent (a group or atom other than a hydrogen atom) that substitutes a hydrogen atom. Examples of the substituent include a fluorine atom, a fluorinated alkyl group of 1 to 5 carbon atoms, and an oxo group (=0).\n\nExamples of the aliphatic hydrocarbon group that includes a ring within the structure include cyclic aliphatic hydrocar› bon groups (groups in which two hydrogen atoms have been removed from an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring) which may\n\n5\n\n10\n\n15\n\n20\n\n25\n\n30\n\n35\n\n40\n\n45\n\n50\n\n55\n\n60\n\n65", + "recall": 0.9675925925925926, + "true_md": "US 9,164,380 B2 \n\n17 \n\n18 \n\nExamples of the substituent which may be bonded to the naphthalene ring of the vinylnaphthalene or derivative there› fore include the same substituents as those mentioned above for the substituent which may be bonded to the benzene ring of an a-substituted) styrene. \n\nIn a compound in which the hydrogen atom of the hydroxyl group of an a-substituted) vinyl(hydroxynaphthalene) has been substituted with an organic group, there are no particular limitations on the organic group, and examples include the same organic groups as those described above for the organic group of an ( a-substituted) acrylate ester. \n\nExamples of the structural unit (al) include a structural unit (all) derived from an acrylate ester in which the hydro› gen atom bonded to the carbon atom on the a-position may be substituted with a substituent, and containing an acid-decom› posable group, a structural unit (al2) derived from ahydroxy› styrene in which the hydrogen atom bonded to the carbon atom on the a-position may be substituted with a substituent, in which the hydrogen atoms bonded to the benzene ring may be substituted with a substituent other than a hydroxyl group, and in which the hydrogen atom of the hydroxyl group is substituted with an acid-dissociable group or a substituent containing an acid-dissociable group, and a structural unit ( al 3) derived from a vinyl(hydroxynaphthalene) in which the hydrogen atom bonded to the carbon atom on the a-position may be substituted with a substituent, in which the hydrogen atoms bonded to the naphthalene ring may be substituted with a substituent other than a hydroxyl group, and in which the hydrogen atom of the hydroxyl group is substituted with an acid-dissociable group or a substituent containing an acid› dissociable group. \n\n## {Structural Unit (all)}\n\nThe structural unit (all) is a structural unit derived from an acrylate ester in which the hydrogen atom bonded to the carbon atom on the a-position may be substituted with a substituent and containing an acid-decomposable group. \n\nSpecific examples of the structural unit (all) include struc› tural units represented by general formula (al-0-1) shown below and structural units represented by general formula (al-0-2) shown below. \n\n[Chemical Formula 6] \n\nIn the formulas, R represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group of 1 to 5 carbon atoms or a halogenated alkyl group of 1 to 5 carbon atoms, xi represents an acid-dissociable group, Y 2 represents a divalent linking group, and X 2 represents an acid-dissociable group. \n\nThe linear or branched aliphatic hydrocarbon group may or may not have a substituent (a group or atom other than a hydrogen atom) that substitutes a hydrogen atom. Examples of the substituent include a fluorine atom, a fluorinated alkyl group of 1 to 5 carbon atoms, and an oxo group (=0). \n\nExamples of the aliphatic hydrocarbon group that includes a ring within the structure include cyclic aliphatic hydrocar› bon groups (groups in which two hydrogen atoms have been removed from an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring) which may \n\nAs the branched aliphatic hydrocarbon group, a branched alkylene group is preferable, and specific examples include various alkylalkylene groups, including alkylmethylene groups such as ----CH(CH$_{3}$ )-, ----CH(CH$_{2}$CH$_{3}$)-, ----C(CH$_{3}$ ) 2 -, -C(CH$_{3}$)(CH$_{2}$CH$_{3}$)-, -C(CH$_{3}$ ) (CH$_{2}$CH$_{2}$CH$_{3}$)- and -C(CH$_{2}$CH$_{3}$ ) 2 -, alkylethylene groups such as ----CH(CH$_{3}$)CH$_{2}$ -, ----CH(CH$_{3}$)CH(CH$_{3}$)-, ----C(CH$_{3}$) $_{2}$CH$_{2}$ -, -CH(CH$_{2}$CH$_{3}$)CH$_{2}$ - and ----C(CH$_{2}$CH$_{3}$ ) $_{2}$----CH$_{2}$ -, alkyltrimethylene groups such as ----CH(CH$_{3}$)CH$_{2}$CH$_{2}$ - and -CH$_{2}$CH(CH$_{3}$)CH$_{2}$-, and alkyltetramethylene groups such as -CH(CH$_{3}$ ) CH$_{2}$CH$_{2}$CH$_{2}$ - and -CH$_{2}$CH(CH$_{3}$)CH$_{2}$CH$_{2}$-. As the alkyl group within the alkylalkylene group, a linear alkyl group of 1 to 5 carbon atoms is preferable. \n\nAs the linear aliphatic hydrocarbon group, a linear alkylene group is preferable, and specific examples include a methyl› ene group [----CH$_{2}$ -], an ethylene group [-(CH 2 ) 2 -], a trimethylene group [-(CH$_{2}$ ) 3 -], a tetramethylene group [-(CH$_{2}$) 4 -] and a pentamethylene group [-(CH 2 ) 5 -]. \n\nThe linear or branched aliphatic hydrocarbon group pref› erably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 8 carbon atoms, and most preferably 1 to 5 carbon atoms. \n\nSpecific examples of the aliphatic hydrocarbon group include a linear or branched aliphatic hydrocarbon group, and an aliphatic hydrocarbon group that includes a ring within the structure. \n\nAn \"aliphatic hydrocarbon group\" refers to a hydrocarbon group that has no aromaticity. The aliphatic hydrocarbon group may be either saturated or unsaturated. In general, the aliphatic hydrocarbon group is preferably saturated. \n\nThe hydrocarbon group for the divalent linking group may be either an aliphatic hydrocarbon group or an aromatic hydrocarbon group. \n\nAlthough there are no particular limitations on the divalent linking group for Y 2 , preferred examples include divalent hydrocarbon groups which may have a substituent, and diva› lent linking groups containing a hetero atom. \n\n(Divalent Hydrocarbon Group which May have a Substitu- ent) \n\nin formula (al-0-1). X $^{2 }$is the same as defined for xi in formula (al-0-1). \n\nIn general formula (al-0-2), R is the same as defined for R in formula (al-0-1). xi \n\nThere are no particular limitations on Xi as long as it is an acid-dissociable group. Examples include the aforemen› tioned tertiary alkyl ester-type acid-dissociable groups and acetal-type acid-dissociable groups, and of these, a tertiary alkyl ester-type acid-dissociable group is preferable. \n\nR is preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group of 1 to 5 carbon atoms or a fluorinated alkyl group of 1 to 5 carbon atoms, and is most preferably a hydrogen atom or a methyl group. \n\nIn general formula (al-0-1), examples of the alkyl group and halogenated alkyl group for R include the same groups as the alkyl groups of 1 to 5 carbon atoms and halogenated alkyl groups of 1 to 5 carbon atoms mentioned above for the sub- stituent bonded to the carbon atom on the a-position within the description relating to the aforementioned a-substituted acrylate ester." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "7ae26e27436ce201b61d09a5e54330353b75a517db7934d588bcf7d207e58cb4", + "edit_distance": 0.9864864864864865, + "f1_score": 0.08, + "meteor": 0.011235955056179775, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "27\n\n28\n\n5,763,671", + "recall": 0.041666666666666664, + "true_md": "27 \n\n5,763,671 \n\n28 \n\n-continued 10-dimethoxydibemo-\n\n-continued 2-[[2-[[ 4,8,-bis( 1, 1-<limethylethyl),2, 10-dimethoxydibemo- [d,f][ 1,3,2]dioxopoosphepin-6-y I ]oxy ]-3-( 1, 1 -<limethylethyl)-5- methoxyphenyl]methyl ]-4-methoxy, 6-(1,1-dimethylethyl)pbenyl dipbenyl ester of phosphorous acid having the fonnula: \n\nLigandR \n\n3-methoxy-1,3~clobexamethylene tetrakis[3,6-bis(l, 1-dimethylethy 1)- 2-naphthalenyl ]ester of phosphorous acid having the formula: \n\nLigands \n\n$_{2,5-bis( }$1,l-dimethylethyl)-1,4-phenyleoe tetrakis[2,4-bis( 1, 1- dimethy lethy !)phenyl jester of phosphorous acid having the formula: \n\nLigand T \n\nmethylenedi-2,1-pbenylene tetrakis[2,4-bis(l,1- dimethylethyl)phenyl]ester of phosphorous acid having the fonnula: \n\nLigandU" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9813365784354808, + "doc_id": "65ce305a7ad655824af96d3020692b59c0de725058a52489679d3acbb2d1e4c6", + "edit_distance": 0.012096774193548387, + "f1_score": 0.9838337182448038, + "meteor": 0.9880852394046005, + "precision": 0.9861111111111112, + "pred_md": "scope of computer readable media.\n\n[0093] By way of example, and not limitation, computer storage media can include volatile and non-volatile, removable and non-removable media implemented in any method or technology for storage of information such as computer readable instructions, data structures, program modules or other data. For example, computer storage media includes, but is not limited to, RAM, ROM, EPROM, EEPROM, flash memory or other solid-state memory technology, CD-ROM, digital versatile disks ('DVD'), HD-DVD, BLU-RAY, or other optical storage, magnetic cassettes, magnetic tape, magnetic disk storage or other magnetic storage devices, or any other medium that can be used to store the desired information and which can be accessed by the computer 1100. For purposes of the claims, the phrase 'computer storage medium,' and variations thereof, does not include waves or signals per se or communication media.\n\n[0094] According to various configurations, the computer 1100 can operate in a networked environment using logical connections to remote computers through a network such as the network 1120. The computer 1100 can connect to the network 1120 through a network interface unit 1116 connected to the bus 1110. It should be appreciated that the network interface unit 1116 can also be utilized to connect to other types of networks and remote computer systems. The computer 1100 can also include an input/output controller 1118 for receiving and processing input from a number of other devices, including a keyboard, mouse, touch input, a digital pen 202, or a physical sensor such as a video camera.\n\n[0095] The input/output controller 1118 can also, or alternately, provide output to one or more displays screens, such as the display device 104. As discussed above, the display device 104 might be a resistive touchscreen, a capacitive touchscreen, a surface acoustic wave touchscreen, an infrared touchscreen, an optical imaging touchscreen, a dispersive signal touchscreen, an acoustic pulse recognition touchscreen, or a screen implementing another touchscreen technology. In some configurations, a touchscreen is incorporated on top of a display as a transparent layer.\n\n[0096] It should be appreciated that the software components described herein, when loaded into the CPU 1102 and executed, can transform the CPU 1102 and the overall computer 1100 from a general-purpose computing device into a special-purpose computing device customized to facilitate the functionality presented herein. The CPU 1102 can be constructed from any number of transistors or other discrete circuit elements, which can individually or collectively assume any number of states. More specifically, the CPU 1102 can operate as a finite-state machine, in response to executable instructions contained within", + "recall": 0.9815668202764977, + "true_md": "scope of computer readable media.\n\n[0093] By way of example, and not limitation, computer storage media can include volatile and non-volatile, removable and non-removable media implemented in any method or technology for storage of information such as computer readable instructions, data structures, program modules or other data. For example, computer storage media includes, but is not limited to, RAM, ROM, EPROM, EEPROM, flash memory or other solid-state memory technology, CD-ROM, digital versatile disks (“DVD”), HD-DVD, BLU-RAY, or other optical storage, magnetic cassettes, magnetic tape, magnetic disk storage or other magnetic storage devices, or any other medium that can be used to store the desired information and which can be accessed by the computer 1100. For purposes of the claims, the phrase “computerstorage medium,”and variations thereof, does not include waves or signals per se or communication media.\n\n[0094] According to various configurations, the computer 1100 can operate in a networked environment using logical connections to remote computers through a network such as the network 1120. The computer 1100 can connect to the network 1120 through a network interface unit 1116 connected to the bus 1110. It should be appreciated that the network interface unit 1116 can also be utilized to connect to other types of networks and remote computer systems. The computer 1100 can also include an input/output controller 1118 for receiving and processing input from a number of other devices, including a keyboard, mouse, touch input, a digital pen 202, or a physical sensor such as a video camera.\n\n[0095] The input/output controller 1118 can also, or alternately, provide output to one or more displays screens, such as the display device 104. As discussed above, the display device 104 might be a resistive touchscreen, a capacitive touchscreen, a surface acoustic wave touchscreen, an infrared touchscreen, an optical imaging touchscreen, a dispersive signal touchscreen, an acoustic pulse recognition touchscreen, or a screen implementing another touchscreen technology. In some configurations, a touchscreen is incorporated on top of a display as a transparent layer.\n\n[0096] It should be appreciated that the software components described herein, when loaded into the CPU 1102 and executed, can transform the CPU 1102 and the overall computer 1100 from a general-purpose computing device into a special-purpose computing device customized to facilitate the functionality presented herein. The CPU 1102 can be constructed from any number of transistors or other discrete circuit elements, which can individually or collectively assume any number of states. More specifically, the CPU 1102 can operate as a finite-state machine, in response to executable instructions contained within" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.2104347389999275, + "doc_id": "24e85be8dc60df5bbb0724a8c711966a2ae5b21353c6a0f289516f2398cfe1e0", + "edit_distance": 0.775, + "f1_score": 0.45833333333333326, + "meteor": 0.7220004277464889, + "precision": 0.3142857142857143, + "pred_md": "## INTERNATIONALSEARCH REPORT\n\nInformation on patent family members\n\nPCT/US2020/024355\n\nPatent document cited in search report\n\nPublication date\n\nPatent family member(s)\n\nPublication date\n\nUS 20 19026000\n\nA1\n\n24 - 0 1-20 19\n\nNON E\n\nInternational application No", + "recall": 0.8461538461538461, + "true_md": "## INTERNATIONAL SEARCH REPORT\n\nInformation on patent family members\n\nInternational application No\n\nPCT/US2020/024355" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9931135265470431, + "doc_id": "9b4d8a094f35fe0d6f05f4bb2505cacd0bc99c3d383d51a904c7f7374db7d422", + "edit_distance": 0.0039447731755424065, + "f1_score": 0.9918699186991871, + "meteor": 0.996251695236266, + "precision": 0.9945652173913043, + "pred_md": "representation 202 for the associated object 120 to indicate that the item has been completed. Following the modification of the logical representation 202, the object 120 will no longer be displayed in the region 118 for to-do items and, instead, can be shown in a region 118 for presenting completed items.\n\n[0084] FIG. 10 is a flow diagram showing a routine 1000 that illustrate aspects of the operation of the computing device 102 described above for providing dynamic whiteboard templates 116 and regions 118. It should be appreciated that the logical operations described herein with regard to FIG. 10, and the other FIGS., can be implemented (1) as a sequence of computer implemented acts or program modules running on a computing device and/or (2) as interconnected machine logic circuits or circuit modules within a computing device.\n\n[0085] The particular implementation of the technologies disclosed herein is a matter of choice dependent on the performance and other requirements of the computing device. Accordingly, the logical operations described herein are referred to variously as states, operations, structural devices, acts, or modules. These states, operations, structural devices, acts and modules can be implemented in hardware, software, firmware, in specialpurpose digital logic, and any combination thereof. It should be appreciated that more or fewer operations can be performed than shown in the FIGS and described herein. These operations can also be performed in a different order than those described herein.\n\n[0086] The routine 1000 begins at operation 1002, where the whiteboard application 104 can present a UI 106 that includes a canvas 114. The routine 1000 then proceeds from operation 1002 to operation 1004, where a user can add a template 116 to the canvas 114, such as the manner described above with regard to FIG. 5. The routine 1000 then proceeds from operation 1004 to operation 1006.\n\n[0087] At operation 1006, a user can move an object 120 from the canvas 114 into a region 118 in the template 116 or from one region 118 in the template 116 to another region 118 in the template 116. In response thereto, the routine 1000 proceeds from operation 1006 to operation 1008, where the template 116 or the region 118 can modify the logical representation 202 associated with the moved object 120 in the manner described above. The destination region 118 can then generate a visual representation 206 of the object 120 at operation 1010 in the manner described above.\n\n[0088] From operation 1010, the routine 1000 proceeds to operation 1012, where the template 116 or region 118 can initiate one or more actions 702 based upon the change to the logical representation 202. For example, a structured summary 604 might be", + "recall": 0.9891891891891892, + "true_md": "representation 202 for the associated object 120 to indicate that the item has been completed. Following the modification of the logical representation 202, the object 120 will no longer be displayed in the region 118 for to-do items and, instead, can be shown in a region 118 for presenting completed items.\n\n[0084] FIG. 10 is a flow diagram showing a routine 1000 that illustrate aspects of the operation of the computing device 102 described above for providing dynamic whiteboard templates 116 and regions 118. It should be appreciated that the logical operations described herein with regard to FIG. 10, and the other FIGS., can be implemented (1) as a sequence of computer implemented acts or program modules running on a computing device and/or (2) as interconnected machine logic circuits or circuit modules within a computing device.\n\n[0085] The particular implementation of the technologies disclosed herein is a matter of choice dependent on the performance and other requirements of the computing device. Accordingly, the logical operations described herein are referred to variously as states, operations, structural devices, acts, or modules. These states, operations, structural devices, acts and modules can be implemented in hardware, software, firmware, in special- purpose digital logic, and any combination thereof. It should be appreciated that more or fewer operations can be performed than shown in the FIGS and described herein. These operations can also be performed in a different order than those described herein.\n\n[0086] The routine 1000 begins at operation 1002, where the whiteboard application 104 can present a UI 106 that includes a canvas 114. The routine 1000 then proceeds from operation 1002 to operation 1004, where a user can add a template 116 to the canvas 114, such as the manner described above with regard to FIG. 5. The routine 1000 then proceeds from operation 1004 to operation 1006.\n\n[0087] At operation 1006, a user can move an object 120 from the canvas 114 into a region 118 in the template 116 or from one region 118 in the template 116 to another region 118 in the template 116. In response thereto, the routine 1000 proceeds from operation 1006 to operation 1008, where the template 116 or the region 118 can modify the logical representation 202 associated with the moved object 120 in the manner described above. The destination region 118 can then generate a visual representation 206 of the object 120 at operation 1010 in the manner described above.\n\n[0088] From operation 1010, the routine 1000 proceeds to operation 1012, where the template 116 or region 118 can initiate one or more actions 702 based upon the change to the logical representation 202. For example, a structured summary 604 might be" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "f3c084152fb129a36e9c19c39946b007f0a6acc78272f2b454a1f70515bd7363", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999999940086362, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Similarly, the heterocoagulating step may at least partly be carried out at a pH that can facilitate the coalescence or merging of the organic polymer latex particles for the formation of the coating layer over the shell of the primary capsule. Depending on the identity of the organic polymer latex particles used, the pH applied to aid the coalescence or merging of the organic polymer latex particles may vary. Accordingly, a suitable pH range may be used. For example, the heterocoagulating step may be carried out at a pH of from about 2 to about 11, from about 2.5 to about 10.5, from about 3 to about 10, from about 3.5 to about 10 or about 2, about 2.5, about 3, about 3.5, about 4, about 4.5, about 5, about 5.5, about 6, about 6.5, about 7, about 7.5, about 8, about 8.5, about 9, about 9.5, about 10, about 10.5 or about 11.\n\nIn various embodiments, the method and/or the heterocoagulation step further comprises physically curing the organic polymer latex particles. For example, the curing may be carried out by using at least one of temperature or pH as a curing means. In various embodiments, curing the organic polymer latex particles does not comprise chemically curing/cross-linking the organic polymer latex particles.\n\nAccordingly, the method and/or heterocoagulating step may therefore also comprise one or more of: changing/adjusting/regulating a pH of the mixture, changing/adjusting/regulating a temperature of the mixture, or curing the organic polymer latex particles in the mixture optionally at room/ambient temperature or below room/ambient temperature. For example, this may include raising/increasing the pH of the mixture optionally by about 5 points, about 5.5 points, about 6 points, about 6.5 points, about 7 points, about 7.5 points, about 8 points, about 8.5 points or about 9 points. The changing/adjusting/regulating a pH of the mixture and/or curing the organic polymer latex particles in the mixture may comprise raising/increasing the pH of the mixture from about 2 to about 11, from about 2.5 to about 11, from about 3 to about 11, from about 3.5 to about 11, from about 4 to about 11, from about 2 to about 10.5, from about 2.5 to about 10.5, from about 3 to about 10.5, from about 3.5 to about 10.5, from about 4 to", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Similarly, the heterocoagulating step may at least partly be carried out at a pH that can facilitate the coalescence or merging of the organic polymer latex particles for the formation of the coating layer over the shell of the primary capsule. Depending on the identity of the organic polymer latex particles used, the pH applied to aid the coalescence or merging of the organic polymer latex particles may vary. Accordingly, a suitable pH range may be used. For example, the heterocoagulating step may be carried out at a pH of from about 2 to about 11, from about 2.5 to about 10.5, from about 3 to about 10, from about 3.5 to about 10 or about 2, about 2.5, about 3, about 3.5, about 4, about 4.5, about 5, about 5.5, about 6, about 6.5, about 7, about 7.5, about 8, about 8.5, about 9, about 9.5, about 10, about 10.5 or about 11.\n\nIn various embodiments, the method and/or the heterocoagulation step further comprises physically curing the organic polymer latex particles. For example, the curing may be carried out by using at least one of temperature or pH as a curing means. In various embodiments, curing the organic polymer latex particles does not comprise chemically curing/cross-linking the organic polymer latex particles.\n\nAccordingly, the method and/or heterocoagulating step may therefore also comprise one or more of: changing/adjusting/regulating a pH of the mixture, changing/adjusting/regulating a temperature of the mixture, or curing the organic polymer latex particles in the mixture optionally at room/ambient temperature or below room/ambient temperature. For example, this may include raising/increasing the pH of the mixture optionally by about 5 points, about 5.5 points, about 6 points, about 6.5 points, about 7 points, about 7.5 points, about 8 points, about 8.5 points or about 9 points. The changing/adjusting/regulating a pH of the mixture and/or curing the organic polymer latex particles in the mixture may comprise raising/increasing the pH of the mixture from about 2 to about 11, from about 2.5 to about 11, from about 3 to about 11, from about 3.5 to about 11, from about 4 to about 11, from about 2 to about 10.5, from about 2.5 to about 10.5, from about 3 to about 10.5, from about 3.5 to about 10.5, from about 4 to" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "9659ff71e65c391f21cba23aaf68b63fa6435def1adb45f1d16c7ad85e648260", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999999767278978, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "In one embodiment, the primary capsule comprises a silica capsule, a zirconia capsule, a titania capsule or combinations thereof.\n\nIn one embodiment, the polymer latex particles have an average particle size in the range of from 50 nm to 1000 nm and the primary capsule has an average particle size in the range of from 1 pm to 100 pm.\n\nIn one embodiment, the heterocoagulating step is carried out in the presence of at least two different surfactants comprising at least one cationic surfactant and at least one anionic surfactant.\n\nIn one embodiment, the at least two different surfactants are independently selected from the group consisting of a primary amine surfactant, a secondary amine surfactant, a tertiary amine surfactant, a quaternary amine surfactant, cetyl trimethylammonium bromide (CTAB), sodium dodecyl sulfate (SDS), carboxylic acid salt, sulfonic acid salt, phosphoric acid ester, alcohol sulfate, alkylbenzene sulfonate or combinations thereof.\n\nAccording to another aspect, there is provided a hybrid capsule comprising a primary capsule having a shell; and an organic polymer coating layer over the shell of the primary capsule.\n\nIn one embodiment, the hybrid capsule is an organic-inorganic capsule and the primary capsule is an inorganic capsule.\n\nIn one embodiment, the shell of the primary capsule is substantially hermetically sealed by the polymer coating layer.\n\nIn one embodiment, the hybrid capsule is micron- or submicron-sized.\n\nIn one embodiment, the hybrid capsule is substantially resistant to breaking under scanning electron microscopy (SEM) vacuum conditions.", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "In one embodiment, the primary capsule comprises a silica capsule, a zirconia capsule, a titania capsule or combinations thereof.\n\nIn one embodiment, the polymer latex particles have an average particle size in the range of from 50 nm to 1000 nm and the primary capsule has an average particle size in the range of from 1 pm to 100 pm.\n\nIn one embodiment, the heterocoagulating step is carried out in the presence of at least two different surfactants comprising at least one cationic surfactant and at least one anionic surfactant.\n\nIn one embodiment, the at least two different surfactants are independently selected from the group consisting of a primary amine surfactant, a secondary amine surfactant, a tertiary amine surfactant, a quaternary amine surfactant, cetyl trimethylammonium bromide (CTAB), sodium dodecyl sulfate (SDS), carboxylic acid salt, sulfonic acid salt, phosphoric acid ester, alcohol sulfate, alkylbenzene sulfonate or combinations thereof.\n\nAccording to another aspect, there is provided a hybrid capsule comprising a primary capsule having a shell; and an organic polymer coating layer over the shell of the primary capsule.\n\nIn one embodiment, the hybrid capsule is an organic-inorganic capsule and the primary capsule is an inorganic capsule.\n\nIn one embodiment, the shell of the primary capsule is substantially hermetically sealed by the polymer coating layer.\n\nIn one embodiment, the hybrid capsule is micron- or submicron-sized.\n\nIn one embodiment, the hybrid capsule is substantially resistant to breaking under scanning electron microscopy (SEM) vacuum conditions." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9561445501450614, + "doc_id": "a05e01bff6a8c05bc4c336306c5dbc44a69c09798608c1bfd31e23553654880a", + "edit_distance": 0.8275862068965517, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9974373693058346, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## INTERNATIONAL SEARCH REPORT\n\nInternational application No.\n\nPCT/SG201 9/05051 1\n\nForm PCT/ISA/21 0 (continuation of second sheet (1)) (July 201 9)", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Form PCT/ISA/21 0 (continuation of second sheet (1)) (July 201 9)\n\n## INTERNATIONAL SEARCH REPORT\n\nInternational application No.\n\nPCT/SG201 9/05051 1" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "50a43417caa31a8b85d711ed4fe8987c967a542a6e07868576ee6b572e652a54", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999999968942013, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "can be provided in other configurations.\n\n[0059] As also discussed briefly above, the particular visual representation 206 implemented by a template 116 or region 118 can be selected manually by a user or might be selected in other ways. For instance, and as illustrated in FIG. 6E, the visual representation used by a region 118 might be selected based upon the capabilities of a computing device. In the example shown in FIG. 6E, a tablet computing device 102 presents the regions 118C-1 18E in a manner that is suitable for the size of its display. The computing device 102A, which is displaying the same template 116 and regions 118, presents the regions 118C-1 18E in a manner that is suitable for its smaller display.\n\n[0060] In this way, objects 120 in a template 116 or region 118 can be presented differently on a computing device 102A having a small display screen (e.g. a mobile phone) than when presented on a computing device 102 having a larger display screen (e.g. a tablet, laptop, or desktop computing device). The particular visual representation 206 selected for presenting a particular template 116 or region 118 might selected based upon other hardware or software capabilities of the computing device 102 upon which it is displayed.\n\n[0061] As shown in FIG. 6F, the logical representations 202 for templates 116, regions 118, and objects 120 can also be utilized to generate structured summaries 604, data 606 for export (e.g. to a presentation application, a spreadsheet application, or a word processing application), and other types of data in some configurations. For example, a structured summary 604 might be generated having a title, a section listing top issues with a project, project tasks that went well, and project tasks that went bad. The items in each section of the structured summary 604 can be identified based upon the logical representations 202 for the corresponding objects 120 (e.g. the note objects 302 in FIG. 6F). Other types of content can also be generated based upon the semantic context contained in the logical representations 202 associated with objects 120 in templates 116 or regions 118.\n\n[0062] In some configurations, templates 116 and regions 118 can retrieve logical representations 202 of objects 120 from one or more data sources 124. For example, and as shown in FIG. 7A, a template 116 or region 118 might receive logical representations 202 for objects 120 corresponding to to-do list items from a connected data source 124. In the illustrated example, logical representations 202 for the note objects 302C shown in the regions 118F-1 18H are retrieved from a data source 124. As discussed above, a template 116 or the regions 118F-1 18H themselves can use the logical representations 202 to present the note objects 302C in the illustrated user interface.\n\n[0063] As discussed above, the logical representations 202 associated with objects", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "can be provided in other configurations.\n\n[0059] As also discussed briefly above, the particular visual representation 206 implemented by a template 116 or region 118 can be selected manually by a user or might be selected in other ways. For instance, and as illustrated in FIG. 6E, the visual representation used by a region 118 might be selected based upon the capabilities of a computing device. In the example shown in FIG. 6E, a tablet computing device 102 presents the regions 118C-1 18E in a manner that is suitable for the size of its display. The computing device 102A, which is displaying the same template 116 and regions 118, presents the regions 118C-1 18E in a manner that is suitable for its smaller display.\n\n[0060] In this way, objects 120 in a template 116 or region 118 can be presented differently on a computing device 102A having a small display screen (e.g. a mobile phone) than when presented on a computing device 102 having a larger display screen (e.g. a tablet, laptop, or desktop computing device). The particular visual representation 206 selected for presenting a particular template 116 or region 118 might selected based upon other hardware or software capabilities of the computing device 102 upon which it is displayed.\n\n[0061] As shown in FIG. 6F, the logical representations 202 for templates 116, regions 118, and objects 120 can also be utilized to generate structured summaries 604, data 606 for export (e.g. to a presentation application, a spreadsheet application, or a word processing application), and other types of data in some configurations. For example, a structured summary 604 might be generated having a title, a section listing top issues with a project, project tasks that went well, and project tasks that went bad. The items in each section of the structured summary 604 can be identified based upon the logical representations 202 for the corresponding objects 120 (e.g. the note objects 302 in FIG. 6F). Other types of content can also be generated based upon the semantic context contained in the logical representations 202 associated with objects 120 in templates 116 or regions 118.\n\n[0062] In some configurations, templates 116 and regions 118 can retrieve logical representations 202 of objects 120 from one or more data sources 124. For example, and as shown in FIG. 7A, a template 116 or region 118 might receive logical representations 202 for objects 120 corresponding to to-do list items from a connected data source 124. In the illustrated example, logical representations 202 for the note objects 302C shown in the regions 118F-1 18H are retrieved from a data source 124. As discussed above, a template 116 or the regions 118F-1 18H themselves can use the logical representations 202 to present the note objects 302C in the illustrated user interface.\n\n[0063] As discussed above, the logical representations 202 associated with objects" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9837123008407582, + "doc_id": "7fe5a0625c19b7033645b40ee5dc39fce8f9c792b2b5c5ec443fd7683a256bd9", + "edit_distance": 0.017326732673267328, + "f1_score": 0.9873417721518988, + "meteor": 0.9910014133599081, + "precision": 0.9915254237288136, + "pred_md": "In various embodiments, the organic polymer latex particle is smaller in size/diameter/volume than the primary capsule. For example, the organic polymer latex particles may comprise nanometer-sized polymer latex particles. The nanometer-sized polymer latex particles may have a size/diameter/particle size/particle size distribution/average particle size in the range of from about 50 nm to about 1000 nm, from about 50 nm to about 500 nm, from about 50 nm to about 300 nm, from about 100 nm to about 300 nm. In various embodiments, the nanometer-sized polymer latex particles have a size/diameter/particle size/particle size distribution/average particle size of about 200 nm. A desired thickness of polymer layer over the primary capsule may be achieved by determining the size/diameter/volume of the polymer latex particles to be used. In various embodiments, as the method uses polymer particle dispersions to form the second polymer layer (i.e. the coating layer), various embodiments of the disclosed method have the advantageous ability to control layer thickness in one step. In various embodiments, the method does not require multiple depositions or surface modifications and thus may allow for greater control over the wall thickness of capsules by leveraging on the polymer latex size i.e. the wall thickness are less influenced by the molecular weight of polymers. In various embodiments, the organic polymer latex particle is substantially non-capsular.\n\nIn various embodiments, the organic polymer latex particles have a polydispersity index (PDI) of from about 0.005 to about 1, from about 0.005 to about 0.50, from about 0.005 to about 0.80, from about 0.01 0 to about 0.200, from about 0.01 5 to about 0.1 50, from about 0.020 to about 0.1 00, from about 0.025 to about 0.090 or from about 0.030 to about 0.080. In one example, the organic polymer latex particles may have a PDI of from about 0.005 to about 0.050 at about 40°C and a PDI of from about 0.050 to about 0.1 00 at about 20°C. In another example, the organic polymer latex particles may have a PDI of from about 0.01 0 to about 0.050 at about 40°C and a PDI of from about 0.050 to about 0.1 60 at about 20°C. In yet another example, the organic polymer latex particles", + "recall": 0.9831932773109243, + "true_md": "In various embodiments, the organic polymer latex particle is smaller in size/diameter/volume than the primary capsule. For example, the organic polymer latex particles may comprise nanometer-sized polymer latex particles. The nanometer-sized polymer latex particles may have a size/diameter/particle size/particle size distribution/average particle size in the range of from about 50 nm to about 1000 nm, from about 50 nm to about 500 nm, from about 50 nm to about 300 nm, from about 100 nm to about 300 nm. In various embodiments, the nanometer-sized polymer latex particles have a size/diameter/particle size/particle size distribution/average particle size of about 200 nm. A desired thickness of polymer layer over the primary capsule may be achieved by determining the size/diameter/volume of the polymer latex particles to be used. In various embodiments, as the method uses polymer particle dispersions to form the second polymer layer (i.e. the coating layer), various embodiments of the disclosed method have the advantageous ability to control layer thickness in one step. In various embodiments, the method does not require multiple depositions or surface modifications and thus may allow for greater control over the wall thickness of capsules by leveraging on the polymer latex size i.e. the wall thickness are less influenced by the molecular weight of polymers. In various embodiments, the organic polymer latex particle is substantially non-capsular.\n\nIn various embodiments, the organic polymer latex particles have a polydispersity index (PDI) of from about 0.005 to about 1, from about 0.005 to about 0.50, from about 0.005 to about 0.80, from about 0.01 0 to about 0.200, from about 0.01 5 to about 0.1 50, from about 0.020 to about 0.1 00, from about 0.025 to about 0.090 or from about 0.030 to about 0.080. In one example, the organic polymer latex particles may have a PDI of from about 0.005 to about 0.050 at about 40°Cand a PDI of from about 0.050 to about 0.1 00 at about 20°C. In another example, the organic polymer latex particles may have a PDI of from about 0.01 0 to about 0.050 at about 40°Cand a PDI of from about 0.050 to about 0.1 60 at about 20°C.In yet another example, the organic polymer latex particles" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9702002417214942, + "doc_id": "9f001496e740d74712f57b6b5f83fe82c8bff9e5e0f36803ce906f42e9031459", + "edit_distance": 0.016877637130801686, + "f1_score": 0.9662921348314606, + "meteor": 0.983951652579563, + "precision": 0.9772727272727273, + "pred_md": "In one embodiment, the heterocoagulating step is carried out in the presence of two opposing charges, a first charge being associated with the organic polymer latex particles and a second charge being associated with the primary capsule, the second charge having a polarity that is opposite to that of the first charge.\n\nIn one embodiment, the method further comprises introducing the primary capsule into a larger volume of the polymer latex particles prior to the heterocoagulating step.\n\nIn one embodiment, the step of introducing the primary capsule comprises introducing a plurality of primary capsules until the concentration of the primary capsules in the mixture of primary capsules and organic polymer latex is from 10% to 40% by weight of the entire mixture.\n\nIn one embodiment, the heterocoagulating step to form a polymer coating layer over a shell of the primary capsule is substantially devoid of a polymerization reaction.\n\nIn one embodiment, the heterocoagulating step is carried out in the absence of an organic solvent.\n\nIn one embodiment, the organic polymer latex particles comprise polyN-isopropyl acrylamide (PNIPAM) latex particles, poly-methyl-methacrylateco-poly-styrene-co-polyethyl-hexyl-acrylate-co-poly-acrylic acid latex particles, poly caprolactone (PCL) latex particles, poly valerolactone latex particles, poly butyrolactone latex particles, polyurethane latex particles, polyamide latex particles, polyacrylic acid-containing latex particles or combinations thereof.", + "recall": 0.9555555555555556, + "true_md": "In one embodiment, the heterocoagulating step is carried out in the presence of two opposing charges, a first charge being associated with the organic polymer latex particles and a second charge being associated with the primary capsule, the second charge having a polarity that is opposite to that of the first charge.\n\nIn one embodiment, the method further comprises introducing the primary capsule into a larger volume of the polymer latex particles prior to the heterocoagulating step.\n\nIn one embodiment, the step of introducing the primary capsule comprises introducing a plurality of primary capsules until the concentration of the primary capsules in the mixture of primary capsules and organic polymer latex is from 10% to 40% by weight of the entire mixture.\n\nIn one embodiment, the heterocoagulating step to form a polymer coating layer over a shell of the primary capsule is substantially devoid of a polymerization reaction.\n\nIn one embodiment, the heterocoagulating step is carried out in the absence of an organic solvent.\n\nIn one embodiment, the organic polymer latex particles comprise poly- N-isopropyl acrylamide (PNIPAM) latex particles, poly-methyl-methacrylate- co-poly-styrene-co-polyethyl-hexyl-acrylate-co-poly-acrylic acid latex particles, poly caprolactone (PCL) latex particles, poly valerolactone latex particles, poly butyrolactone latex particles, polyurethane latex particles, polyamide latex particles, polyacrylic acid-containing latex particles or combinations thereof." + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "e9ec79a75999dd3d217c0f54344983fc79b48555a89a4314b99f7d1103a35f0b", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999999855683096, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## EXAMPLES\n\nExample embodiments of the disclosure will be better understood and readily apparent to one of ordinary skill in the art from the following examples, tables and if applicable, in conjunction with the figures. It should be appreciated that other modifications related to structural, and chemical changes may be made without deviating from the scope of the invention. Example embodiments are not necessarily mutually exclusive as some may be combined with one or more embodiments to form new example embodiments. The example embodiments should not be construed as limiting the scope of the disclosure.\n\n## Example 1: Method of Preparing A Hybrid Capsule\n\nFIG. 1 is a schematic flowchart 100 for illustrating a method of preparing a hybrid capsule in accordance with various embodiments disclosed herein. At step 104, the organic polymer latex particles in a suspension/dispersion/mixture are heterocoagulated with at least one primary capsule such as an inorganic capsule so that an organic polymer film can be eventually formed over the shell of the primary capsule (e.g. inorganic shell).\n\nIt will be appreciated that in some embodiments, the method may also include steps before and after step 104. For example, prior to step 104, at least one primary capsule may be introduced into a volume of organic polymer latex particles to form the suspension/dispersion/mixture at step 102. Likewise, subsequent to step 104, the organic polymer latex particles may be further physically cured by using at least one of temperature or pH as a curing means to form an organic polymer coating layer over a shell of the primary capsule, thereby obtaining a hybrid capsule at step 106. In addition, at step 108, the hybrid capsule is further purified to remove any impurities such as excess/free polymer particles and/or further concentrated to obtain a desired concentration.", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## EXAMPLES\n\nExample embodiments of the disclosure will be better understood and readily apparent to one of ordinary skill in the art from the following examples, tables and if applicable, in conjunction with the figures. It should be appreciated that other modifications related to structural, and chemical changes may be made without deviating from the scope of the invention. Example embodiments are not necessarily mutually exclusive as some may be combined with one or more embodiments to form new example embodiments. The example embodiments should not be construed as limiting the scope of the disclosure.\n\n## Example 1: Method of Preparing A Hybrid Capsule\n\nFIG. 1 is a schematic flowchart 100 for illustrating a method of preparing a hybrid capsule in accordance with various embodiments disclosed herein. At step 104, the organic polymer latex particles in a suspension/dispersion/mixture are heterocoagulated with at least one primary capsule such as an inorganic capsule so that an organic polymer film can be eventually formed over the shell of the primary capsule (e.g. inorganic shell).\n\nIt will be appreciated that in some embodiments, the method may also include steps before and after step 104. For example, prior to step 104, at least one primary capsule may be introduced into a volume of organic polymer latex particles to form the suspension/dispersion/mixture at step 102. Likewise, subsequent to step 104, the organic polymer latex particles may be further physically cured by using at least one of temperature or pH as a curing means to form an organic polymer coating layer over a shell of the primary capsule, thereby obtaining a hybrid capsule at step 106. In addition, at step 108, the hybrid capsule is further purified to remove any impurities such as excess/free polymer particles and/or further concentrated to obtain a desired concentration." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9928752088109783, + "doc_id": "c56ec45dfd9d18a5d174c267c3b2470d951ad03b1cdfa37559934a13923e78ba", + "edit_distance": 0.004106776180698152, + "f1_score": 0.9856459330143541, + "meteor": 0.9960977264222732, + "precision": 0.9903846153846154, + "pred_md": "upon one or more capabilities of the computing device.\n\n[00113] Clause 12. The computer-implemented method of any of clauses 9-1 1, wherein the user interface further comprises a second region on the canvas, and wherein the method further comprises: receiving user input moving the object from the first region to the second region; and responsive to receiving the user input moving the object from the first region to the second region, displaying the object in the second region in a third visual representation based on the logical representation associated with the object.\n\n[00114] Clause 13. The computer-implemented method of any of clauses 9-12, wherein the second region is further configured to initiate an action responsive to the user input for moving the object from the first region to the second region.\n\n[00115] Clause 14. The computer-implemented method of any of clauses 9-13, wherein the first region is further configured to receive the logical representations from a data source and wherein the second region is configured to update the data source with a modified logical representation associated with the object responsive to the movement of the object from the first region to the second region.\n\n[00116] Clause 15. A computer-readable storage medium having computerexecutable instructions stored thereupon which, when executed by a processor, cause the processor to: display a user interface (UI), the UI comprising a canvas having a first region, the first region configured to display an object in a first visual representation or a second visual representation based on a logical representation associated with the object; receive user input moving an object into the first region; responsive to receiving the user input for moving the object into the first region, display the object in the first visual representation in the first region based on the logical representation associated with the object; receive user input requesting to display the object in the second visual representation; and responsive to receiving the user input requesting to display the object in the second visual representation, display the object in the second visual representation in the first region based on the logical representation associated with the object.\n\n[00117] Clause 16. The computer-readable storage medium of clause 15, having further computer-executable instructions stored thereupon to modify the logical representation associated with the object when moving the object into the first region.\n\n[00118] Clause 17. The computer-readable storage medium of clause 15 or 16, wherein the user interface further comprises a second region on the canvas, and wherein the computer-readable storage medium has further computer-executable instructions stored thereupon to: receive user input moving the object from the first region to the second region;", + "recall": 0.9809523809523809, + "true_md": "upon one or more capabilities of the computing device.\n\n[00113] Clause 12. The computer-implemented method of any of clauses 9-1 1, wherein the user interface further comprises a second region on the canvas, and wherein the method further comprises: receiving user input moving the object from the first region to the second region; and responsive to receiving the user input moving the object from the first region to the second region, displaying the object in the second region in a third visual representation based on the logical representation associated with the object.\n\n[00114] Clause 13. The computer-implemented method of any of clauses 9-12, wherein the second region is further configured to initiate an action responsive to the user input for moving the object from the first region to the second region.\n\n[00115] Clause 14. The computer-implemented method of any of clauses 9-13, wherein the first region is further configured to receive the logical representations from a data source and wherein the second region is configured to update the data source with a modified logical representation associated with the object responsive to the movement of the object from the first region to the second region.\n\n[00116] Clause 15. A computer-readable storage medium having computer- executable instructions stored thereupon which, when executed by a processor, cause the processor to: display a user interface (UI), the UI comprising a canvas having a first region, the first region configured to display an object in a first visual representation or a second visual representation based on a logical representation associated with the object; receive user input moving an object into the first region; responsive to receiving the user input for moving the object into the first region, display the object in the first visual representation in the first region based on the logical representation associated with the object; receive user input requesting to display the object in the second visual representation; and responsive to receiving the user input requesting to display the object in the second visual representation, display the object in the second visual representation in the first region based on the logical representation associated with the object.\n\n[00117] Clause 16. The computer-readable storage medium of clause 15, having further computer-executable instructions stored thereupon to modify the logical representation associated with the object when moving the object into the first region.\n\n[00118] Clause 17. The computer-readable storage medium of clause 15 or 16, wherein the user interface further comprises a second region on the canvas, and wherein the computer-readable storage medium has further computer-executable instructions stored thereupon to: receive user input moving the object from the first region to the second region;" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9771842895055922, + "doc_id": "9f01381d03646c250d81556e4a377c4ee5de840a69d3bc6362296469f686d0ea", + "edit_distance": 0.017857142857142856, + "f1_score": 0.9702970297029702, + "meteor": 0.9827248608232959, + "precision": 0.9735099337748344, + "pred_md": "In various embodiments, the capsule/formulation is compatible for one or more of the following applications: perfumes, coatings, medicines (e.g. considered as in the 'generally recognized as safe' (GRAS) category by United States Food and Drug Administration (FDA)), agricultural chemicals, catalysts, printings, films, fibers and cosmetics (e.g. with good skin feeling).\n\n## BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF FIGURES\n\nFIG. 1 is a schematic flowchart 100 for illustrating a method of preparing a hybrid capsule in accordance with various embodiments disclosed herein.\n\nFIG. 2 is a schematic diagram 200 for illustrating a method of preparing a hybrid capsule in accordance with various embodiments disclosed herein.\n\nFIG. 3 is a schematic diagram 300 of a hybrid capsule in accordance with an example embodiment disclosed herein.\n\nFIGS. 4A and 4B are scanning electron microscopy (SEM) images of poly(N-isopropylacrylamide) (PNIPAM) polymer latex prepared via emulsion polymerization with 1% acrylic acid (AA) and 1% N,N'-Methylenebis(acrylamide) (BIS) crosslinker by weight of the monomer latex particles in the absence of a SDS surfactant, and dried at an elevated temperature (e.g. at 90°C), in accordance with an example embodiment disclosed herein. FIG. 4A shows an SEM image taken at 5,000x magnification, with the scale bar representing 1 pm. FIG. 4B shows an SEM image taken at 10,000x magnification, with the scale bar representing 1 pm.\n\nFIG. 5 is a dynamic light scattering Z-average particle size (DLS Z-ave) vs. temperature graph showing the temperature response of PNIPAM polymer latex synthesized for heterocoagulation studies, in accordance with an example embodiment disclosed herein. As shown, a higher temperature led to decreased particle size, thereby demonstrating the temperature responsiveness of the latex.", + "recall": 0.9671052631578947, + "true_md": "In various embodiments, the capsule/formulation is compatible for one or more of the following applications: perfumes, coatings, medicines (e.g. considered as in the “generallyrecognized as safe”(GRAS) category by United States Food and Drug Administration (FDA)), agricultural chemicals, catalysts, printings, films, fibers and cosmetics (e.g. with good skin feeling).\n\n## BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF FIGURES\n\nFIG. 1 is a schematic flowchart 100 for illustrating a method of preparing a hybrid capsule in accordance with various embodiments disclosed herein.\n\nFIG. 2 is a schematic diagram 200 for illustrating a method of preparing a hybrid capsule in accordance with various embodiments disclosed herein.\n\nFIG. 3 is a schematic diagram 300 of a hybrid capsule in accordance with an example embodiment disclosed herein.\n\nFIGS. 4A and 4B are scanning electron microscopy (SEM) images of poly(N-isopropylacrylamide) (PNIPAM) polymer latex prepared via emulsion polymerization with 1% acrylic acid (AA) and 1% N,N’-Methylenebis(acrylamide) (BIS) crosslinker by weight of the monomer latex particles in the absence of a SDS surfactant, and dried at an elevated temperature (e.g. at 90°C),in accordance with an example embodiment disclosed herein. FIG. 4A shows an SEM image taken at 5,000x magnification, with the scale bar representing 1 pm. FIG. 4B shows an SEM image taken at 10,000x magnification, with the scale bar representing 1 pm.\n\nFIG. 5 is a dynamic light scattering Z-average particle size (DLS Z-ave) vs. temperature graph showing the temperature response of PNIPAM polymer latex synthesized for heterocoagulation studies, in accordance with an example embodiment disclosed herein. As shown, a higher temperature led to decreased particle size, thereby demonstrating the temperature responsiveness of the latex." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9936736696042109, + "doc_id": "b9e6d07f36d5c340aebbcc1e7366a3a700595769911d326d276d10faeb60f438", + "edit_distance": 0.0036429872495446266, + "f1_score": 0.9967213114754098, + "meteor": 0.9965061148070462, + "precision": 0.9934640522875817, + "pred_md": "118 have modified the logical representations 202 associated with the note objects 302C. For instance, when a note object 302C is moved into the region 118C, the logical representation 202 associated with that note object 302C is modified to indicate that the object corresponds to a top issue.\n\n[0054] Similarly, when a note object 302C is moved to the region 118D, the logical representation 202 associated with that note object 302C is modified to indicate that the object corresponds to a project task that went well. Similarly, when a note object 302C is moved to the region 118E, the logical representation 202 associated with that note object 302C is modified to indicate that the object corresponds to a project task that went badly. Other types of modifications to the logical representations 202 can be performed by other types of regions 118 in templates 116 for accomplishing other types of tasks.\n\n[0055] In the example shown in FIG. 6A, the user has also dragged a note object 302C from the region 118E to the region 118C. In response thereto, the template 116 or the region 118C has modified the logical representation 202 associated with the relocated note object 302C to indicate that the object corresponds to a top issue rather than a project task that went badly.\n\n[0056] Auser has also utilized the toolbar shown in FIG. 6A to indicate a dislike for one of the note objects 302C in the region 118E. In particular, a user has dragged an icon (i.e. a frowning face) from the toolbar to the note object 302C in the region 118E. In response thereto, the template 116 or the region 118C has modified the logical representation 202 associated with the destination note object 302C to indicate that the note has been disliked. A user might indicate a like, an upvote, a downvote, or other types of sentiment for a particular object 120 in a similar fashion.\n\n[0057] As discussed briefly above, in some embodiments, templates 116 can define template and/or user-specific toolbars 122. For example, and as shown in FIGS. 6B-6D, a toolbar 122 might include a tool 602 for creating a new note object 302C on the canvas 133 in a user-specific color or other visual attribute. In the examples shown in FIG. 6B-6D, for instance, the tool 602A can be used to create a note object 302C (indicated by vertical/horizontal hatching) for one user, the tool 602B can be used to create a note object 302C (indicated by diagonal hatching) for another user, and the tool 602C can be used to create a note object 302C (indicated by diagonal hatching) for yet another user.\n\n[0058] Note objects 302 (and other objects) created using such a user-specific UI tool identify the creating user through a user-specific visual attribute, such as color, that is used to present the objects in the regions 118. Other types of user or template-specific tools", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "118 have modified the logical representations 202 associated with the note objects 302C. For instance, when a note object 302C is moved into the region 118C, the logical representation 202 associated with that note object 302C is modified to indicate that the object corresponds to a top issue.\n\n[0054] Similarly, when a note object 302C is moved to the region 118D, the logical representation 202 associated with that note object 302C is modified to indicate that the object corresponds to a project task that went well. Similarly, when a note object 302C is moved to the region 118E, the logical representation 202 associated with that note object 302C is modified to indicate that the object corresponds to a project task that went badly. Other types of modifications to the logical representations 202 can be performed by other types of regions 118 in templates 116 for accomplishing other types of tasks.\n\n[0055] In the example shown in FIG. 6A, the user has also dragged a note object 302C from the region 118E to the region 118C. In response thereto, the template 116 or the region 118C has modified the logical representation 202 associated with the relocated note object 302C to indicate that the object corresponds to a top issue rather than a project task that went badly.\n\n[0056] A user has also utilized the toolbar shown in FIG. 6A to indicate a dislike for one of the note objects 302C in the region 118E. In particular, a user has dragged an icon (i.e. a frowning face) from the toolbar to the note object 302C in the region 118E. In response thereto, the template 116 or the region 118C has modified the logical representation 202 associated with the destination note object 302C to indicate that the note has been disliked. A user might indicate a like, an upvote, a downvote, or other types of sentiment for a particular object 120 in a similar fashion.\n\n[0057] As discussed briefly above, in some embodiments, templates 116 can define template and/or user-specific toolbars 122. For example, and as shown in FIGS. 6B-6D, a toolbar 122 might include a tool 602 for creating a new note object 302C on the canvas 133 in a user-specific color or other visual attribute. In the examples shown in FIG. 6B-6D, for instance, the tool 602A can be used to create a note object 302C (indicated by vertical/horizontal hatching) for one user, the tool 602B can be used to create a note object 302C (indicated by diagonal hatching) for another user, and the tool 602C can be used to create a note object 302C (indicated by diagonal hatching) for yet another user.\n\n[0058] Note objects 302 (and other objects) created using such a user-specific UI tool identify the creating user through a user-specific visual attribute, such as color, that is used to present the objects in the regions 118. Other types of user or template-specific tools" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9845630086563899, + "doc_id": "1fb345f20e3e096f07e26be0525f24ccf9a983f22e85ab65ca8c1f515d557452", + "edit_distance": 0.03389830508474576, + "f1_score": 0.9925558312655088, + "meteor": 0.9957347446117962, + "precision": 0.9950248756218906, + "pred_md": "toolbars. The toolbars can include tools for creating objects on the canvas. For example, a toolbar might include a tool for creating a new note on the canvas in a user-specific color. Toolbars can also include tools for modifying the logical representations associated with objects on the canvas or in regions. For instance, a toolbar might include tools for up or down-voting objects on the canvas or in a region.\n\n[0015] Templates and regions can also be configured to initiate actions based on changes to the logical representations associated with objects. For example, and without limitation, if an object's logical representation is modified following movement from one region to another region, a template or region might initiate an action for transmitting an email or another type of message (e.g. when a to-do list item is completed).\n\n[0016] The logical representations for templates, regions, and objects can also be utilized to generate structured summaries and other types of data. For example, a summary might be generated having a title, a section listing agenda items, and a section listing action items. The items in each section can be identified based upon the logical representations for the corresponding objects. Other types of content can also be generated based upon the semantic context contained in the logical representations associated with objects in templates or regions.\n\n[0017] It is to be appreciated that the above-described subject matter can be implemented as a computer-controlled apparatus, a computer-implemented method, a computing device, or as an article of manufacture such as a computer readable medium. These and various other features will be apparent from a reading of the following Detailed Description and a review of the associated drawings.\n\n[0018] This Summary is provided to introduce a brief description of some aspects of the disclosed technologies in a simplified form that are further described below in the Detailed Description. This Summary is not intended to identify key features or essential features of the claimed subject matter, nor is it intended that this Summary be used to limit the scope of the claimed subject matter. Furthermore, the claimed subject matter is not limited to implementations that solve any or all disadvantages noted in any part of this disclosure.\n\n## BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS\n\n[0019] FIGS. 1A, IB, and 2 are schematic diagrams illustrating aspects of the configuration and operation of a computing device configured to implement the disclosed technologies, according to one particular configuration;\n\n[0020] FIG. 3 is a pictorial diagram showing additional aspects of the configuration", + "recall": 0.9900990099009901, + "true_md": "toolbars. The toolbars can include tools for creating objects on the canvas. For example, a toolbar might include a tool for creating a new note on the canvas in a user-specific color. Toolbars can also include tools for modifying the logical representations associated with objects on the canvas or in regions. For instance, a toolbar might include tools for up or down-voting objects on the canvas or in a region.\n\n[0015] Templates and regions can also be configured to initiate actions based on changes to the logical representations associated with objects. For example, and without limitation, if an object’slogical representation is modified following movement from one region to another region, a template or region might initiate an action for transmitting an email or another type of message (e.g. when a to-do list item is completed).\n\n[0016] The logical representations for templates, regions, and objects can also be utilized to generate structured summaries and other types of data. For example, a summary might be generated having a title, a section listing agenda items, and a section listing action items. The items in each section can be identified based upon the logical representations for the corresponding objects. Other types of content can also be generated based upon the semantic context contained in the logical representations associated with objects in templates or regions.\n\n[0017] It is to be appreciated that the above-described subject matter can be implemented as a computer-controlled apparatus, a computer-implemented method, a computing device, or as an article of manufacture such as a computer readable medium. These and various other features will be apparent from a reading of the following Detailed Description and a review of the associated drawings.\n\n[0018] This Summary is provided to introduce a brief description of some aspects of the disclosed technologies in a simplified form that are further described below in the Detailed Description. This Summary is not intended to identify key features or essential features of the claimed subject matter, nor is it intended that this Summary be used to limit the scope of the claimed subject matter. Furthermore, the claimed subject matter is not limited to implementations that solve any or all disadvantages noted in any part of this disclosure.\n\n[0019] FIGS. 1A, IB, and 2 are schematic diagrams illustrating aspects of the configuration and operation of a computing device configured to implement the disclosed technologies, according to one particular configuration;\n\n## BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS\n\n[0020] FIG. 3 is a pictorial diagram showing additional aspects of the configuration" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9456285778699328, + "doc_id": "2de7930ee761ea3a77267310fc59ddf661ee1bd2880582ba98ee061e23b2eeb3", + "edit_distance": 0.7648578811369509, + "f1_score": 0.9938650306748466, + "meteor": 0.676988071597853, + "precision": 0.9878048780487805, + "pred_md": "- 1. A computing device, comprising:\n\na processor; and\n\na memory storing instructions executable by the processor to:\n\npresent a user interface (UI), the UI comprising\n\na canvas configured for receiving heterogenous objects placed on the canvas in an unstructured manner, the objects having associated logical representations, and\n\n- a first region on the canvas, the first region being configured to present the objects in a first visual representation or a second visual representation based upon the logical representations associated with the objects;\n\nreceive user input moving an object of the objects into the first region; and responsive to receiving the user input for moving the object into the first region, modify a logical representation associated with the object, and display the object in the first region in the first visual representation based on the modified logical representation associated with the object.\n\n- 2. The computing device of claim 1, wherein the memory stores further instructions executable by the processor to present the object in the first region in the second visual representation based on the modified logical representation associated with the object.\n- 3. The computing device of claim 1, wherein the first region is further configured to modify the first visual representation based upon one or more capabilities of the computing device.\n- 4. The computing device of claim 1, wherein the memory stores further instructions executable by the processor to:\n\nreceive user input for moving an object from the canvas to the first region; and responsive to receiving the user input for moving the object from the canvas to the first region, modify the logical representation associated with the moved object.\n\n- 5. The computing device of claim 1, wherein the user interface further comprises a second region on the canvas, and wherein the memory stores further instructions executable by the processor to:\n\nreceive user input moving the object from the first region to the second region; and responsive to receiving the user input moving the object from the first region to the second region, displaying the object in the second region in a third visual representation\n\n## CLAIMS", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## CLAIMS\n\n1. A computing device, comprising:\n\n2. The computing device of claim 1, wherein the memory stores further instructions executable by the processor to present the object in the first region in the second visual representation based on the modified logical representation associated with the object.\n\n3. The computing device of claim 1, wherein the first region is further configured to modify the first visual representation based upon one or more capabilities of the computing device.\n\n4. The computing device of claim 1, wherein the memory stores further instructions executable by the processor to:\n\nreceive user input for moving an object from the canvas to the first region; and responsive to receiving the user input for moving the object from the canvas to the first region, modify the logical representation associated with the moved object.\n\n5. The computing device of claim 1, wherein the user interface further comprises a second region on the canvas, and wherein the memory stores further instructions executable by the processor to:\n\nreceive user input moving the object from the first region to the second region; and responsive to receiving the user input moving the object from the first region to the second region, displaying the object in the second region in a third visual representation\n\nreceive user input moving an object of the objects into the first region; and responsive to receiving the user input for moving the object into the first region, modify a logical representation associated with the object, and display the object in the first region in the first visual representation based on the modified logical representation associated with the object.\n\na processor; and a memory storing instructions executable by the processor to:\n\na first region on the canvas, the first region being configured to present the objects in a first visual representation or a second visual representation based upon the logical representations associated with the objects;\n\na canvas configured for receiving heterogenous objects placed on the canvas in an unstructured manner, the objects having associated logical representations, and\n\npresent a user interface (UI), the UI comprising" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9936507163725717, + "doc_id": "f97c8801651625c98d9d39c440170f2280c8397cbdeb1723cdf6f709b5c92537", + "edit_distance": 0.0036429872495446266, + "f1_score": 0.9943502824858758, + "meteor": 0.996538336766889, + "precision": 0.9943502824858758, + "pred_md": "template 116 or region 118 from another region or the canvas 114.\n\n[0079] As shown in FIGS. 9G-9I, objects 120 contained within regions 118 can also be sorted, filtered, arranged, projected, and otherwise operated on based on their associated logical representations 202. Individual regions 118 can also present objects 120 contained therein in multiple different visual representations. For instance, a single region 118 might present objects 120 contained therein in a grid, list, table, or in another manner. The particular visual representation utilized by a template 116 or region 118 can be selected manually by a user or might be selected in other ways (e.g. based upon the capabilities of a computing device).\n\n[0080] In the example shown in FIG. 9G, for instance, a menu 906 has been presented adj acent to the region 118M that includes items 908 for indicating how the obj ects 120 in the region 118M are to be sorted and/or presented. In the illustrated example, a user has selected the item 908A for displaying the objects 120 in the region 118M in columns.\n\n[0081] In response to the selection of the item 908A, the region 118M has displayed the note objects 302C in columns. The note objects 302C in each column are selected based upon the number of votes the objects have received. Asmentioned above, this data is stored in the logical representations 202 associated with the note objects 302C. As a result, the first column 910A includes a note object that has received one vote, the second column 9 10B includes two notes that have received two votes, and the third column 9IOC includes one note that has received only one vote.\n\n[0082] In another example shown in FIG. 9H, a user has selected the item 908B for displaying the objects 120 in the region 118M as a list. In response thereto, the region 118M utilizes the data contained in the logical representations 202 associated with the contained objects to present a list 912 that includes the text of the objects. In a similar fashion, a user has selected the item 908C to cause the region 118M to present the objects 120 contained therein as a table. The table 914 includes various types of data from the logical representations 202 associated with the objects including the text, the speaker of the text, and a color associated with the objects 120. Other types of data from the logical representations 202 can be presented in a different manner in other embodiments.\n\n[0083] In some configurations, objects 120 can be moved between regions 118 in response to conditions other than a user manually moving the objects 120 between regions 118. For example, and without limitation, a user might mark an object 120 representing a to-do item in a region 118 for presenting to-do items as having been completed. In response thereto, the template 116 or region 118 containing the to-do item might update the logical", + "recall": 0.9943502824858758, + "true_md": "template 116 or region 118 from another region or the canvas 114.\n\n[0079] As shown in FIGS. 9G-9I, objects 120 contained within regions 118 can also be sorted, filtered, arranged, projected, and otherwise operated on based on their associated logical representations 202. Individual regions 118 can also present objects 120 contained therein in multiple different visual representations. For instance, a single region 118 might present objects 120 contained therein in a grid, list, table, or in another manner. The particular visual representation utilized by a template 116 or region 118 can be selected manually by a user or might be selected in other ways (e.g. based upon the capabilities of a computing device).\n\n[0080] In the example shown in FIG. 9G, for instance, a menu 906 has been presented adj acent to the region 118M that includes items 908 for indicating how the obj ects 120 in the region 118M are to be sorted and/or presented. In the illustrated example, a user has selected the item 908A for displaying the objects 120 in the region 118M in columns.\n\n[0081] In response to the selection of the item 908A, the region 118M has displayed the note objects 302C in columns. The note objects 302C in each column are selected based upon the number of votes the objects have received. As mentioned above, this data is stored in the logical representations 202 associated with the note objects 302C. As a result, the first column 910A includes a note object that has received one vote, the second column 9 10B includes two notes that have received two votes, and the third column 9IOC includes one note that has received only one vote.\n\n[0082] In another example shown in FIG. 9H, a user has selected the item 908B for displaying the objects 120 in the region 118M as a list. In response thereto, the region 118M utilizes the data contained in the logical representations 202 associated with the contained objects to present a list 912 that includes the text of the objects. In a similar fashion, a user has selected the item 908C to cause the region 118M to present the objects 120 contained therein as a table. The table 914 includes various types of data from the logical representations 202 associated with the objects including the text, the speaker of the text, and a color associated with the objects 120. Other types of data from the logical representations 202 can be presented in a different manner in other embodiments.\n\n[0083] In some configurations, objects 120 can be moved between regions 118 in response to conditions other than a user manually moving the objects 120 between regions 118. For example, and without limitation, a user might mark an object 120 representing a to-do item in a region 118 for presenting to-do items as having been completed. In response thereto, the template 116 or region 118 containing the to-do item might update the logical" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.980601890468161, + "doc_id": "5667a67e9e7faf61d8fabc5ca0be14718eabf763912de943b56d69405ba2ff3e", + "edit_distance": 0.024070021881838075, + "f1_score": 0.9803921568627451, + "meteor": 0.9894902814462538, + "precision": 0.9831460674157303, + "pred_md": "## DYNAMICWHITEBOARD REGIONS\n\n## BACKGROUND\n\n[0001] Whiteboard applications enable users to place content on a canvas in a free form manner. For example, users participating in a whiteboard sharing session might be permitted to draw freely on a canvas using digital ink. However, although such applications provide a great deal of freedom for creating and sharing content using a free-form digital canvas, these applications also suffer from a number of drawbacks.\n\n[0002] One drawback of current whiteboard applications stems from the unstructured nature of a whiteboard canvas. In particular, because a whiteboard canvas is free-form, it can be difficult for users to create context and draw meaning from content on such a whiteboard. For example, users in a whiteboard sharing session might write a list of to-do items on a whiteboard canvas using digital ink. Digital ink on a whiteboard canvas does not, however, have any semantic context and, therefore, cannot be operated on such as, for example, by sorting or grouping the to-do items. In order to add semantic context to the to-do items, a user typically has to transcribe the digital ink and manually create to-do items from the transcribed text, which can take time, be error prone, and consume significant computing resources.\n\n[0003] Some whiteboard applications attempt to add context to whiteboard content by presenting static images that can be used as guidelines for creating and managing content. Static images, however, only provide visual cues and do not provide any semantic context. As a result, users still might have to transcribe digital ink and create to-do items, or other types of contextual items, from the transcribed text which, as mentioned above, can take time, be error prone, and consume significant computing resources.\n\n[0004] It is with respect to these and other technical challenges that the disclosure made herein is presented.\n\n## SUMMARY\n\n[0005] Technologies are disclosed herein for providing dynamic whiteboard templates and regions. Through implementations of the disclosed technologies in conjunction with a whiteboard application, semantic context can be quickly and easily associated with heterogenous digital objects ('objects'), such as digital ink. Moreover, once the semantic context has been associated with the digital objects, the objects can be sorted, filtered, arranged, projected, and otherwise operated on based upon the semantic context. As a result, users no longer have to manually generate semantic context for digital", + "recall": 0.9776536312849162, + "true_md": "## DYNAMIC WHITEBOARD REGIONS\n\n## BACKGROUND\n\n[0001] Whiteboard applications enable users to place content on a canvas in a free form manner. For example, users participating in a whiteboard sharing session might be permitted to draw freely on a canvas using digital ink. However, although such applications provide a great deal of freedom for creating and sharing content using a free-form digital canvas, these applications also suffer from a number of drawbacks.\n\n[0002] One drawback of current whiteboard applications stems from the unstructured nature of a whiteboard canvas. In particular, because a whiteboard canvas is free-form, it can be difficult for users to create context and draw meaning from content on such a whiteboard. For example, users in a whiteboard sharing session might write a list of to-do items on a whiteboard canvas using digital ink. Digital ink on a whiteboard canvas does not, however, have any semantic context and, therefore, cannot be operated on such as, for example, by sorting or grouping the to-do items. In order to add semantic context to the to-do items, a user typically has to transcribe the digital ink and manually create to-do items from the transcribed text, which can take time, be error prone, and consume significant computing resources.\n\n[0003] Some whiteboard applications attempt to add context to whiteboard content by presenting static images that can be used as guidelines for creating and managing content. Static images, however, only provide visual cues and do not provide any semantic context. As a result, users still might have to transcribe digital ink and create to-do items, or other types of contextual items, from the transcribed text which, as mentioned above, can take time, be error prone, and consume significant computing resources.\n\n[0004] It is with respect to these and other technical challenges that the disclosure made herein is presented.\n\n[0005] Technologies are disclosed herein for providing dynamic whiteboard templates and regions. Through implementations of the disclosed technologies in conjunction with a whiteboard application, semantic context can be quickly and easily associated with heterogenous digital objects (“objects”), such as digital ink. Moreover, once the semantic context has been associated with the digital objects, the objects can be sorted, filtered, arranged, projected, and otherwise operated on based upon the semantic context. As a result, users no longer have to manually generate semantic context for digital\n\n## SUMMARY" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "92c8f0a56740042c5251fd7816900f4e3385222241d9972b7d4470bedba092e1", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999999915709975, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "a zirconia-polymer capsule or a titania-polymer capsule. The inorganic shell may be porous or mesoporous.\n\nThe at least one primary capsule may have a size/diameter/particle size/particle size distribution/average particle size in the range of from about 1 pm to about 100 pm, 10 pm to about 100 pm, from about 20 pm to about 100 pm, from about 30 pm to about 100 pm, from about 40 pm to about 100 pm, from about 50 pm to about 100 pm, from about 60 pm to about 100 pm, from about 70 pm to about 100 pm, or about 10 pm, about 20 pm, about 30 pm, about 40 pm, about 50 pm, about 60 pm, about 70 pm, about 80 pm, about 90 pm or about 100 pm.\n\nIn various embodiments, the method further comprises a step of adding one or more of a silica precursor, a zirconia precursor or a titania precursor to a template, optionally a substantially spherical template, in water/aqueous medium to form the at least one inorganic capsule. The silica precursor may comprise a tetraalkyl orthosilicate, a trialkoxyalkylsilane or a silicon alkoxide (alkoxy silane) that is optionally selected from the group consisting of tetramethyl orthosilicate (TMOS), tetraethyl orthosilicate (TEOS), tetrapropyl orthosilicate (TPOS), methyltrimethoxysilane (MTMS), methyltriethoxysilane (MTES) or the like or combinations thereof. The titania precursor may comprise titanium(IV) isopropoxide and titanium(IV) bis(ammonium lactato)dihydroxide or the like or combinations thereof. The zirconia precursor may comprise zirconium isopropoxide, zirconium etoxide, zirconium n-butoxide or the like or combinations thereof.\n\nThe method may further comprise a step of growing a shell of the primary capsule such as a silica shell, a zirconia shell or a titania shell on the template by a hydrolysis condensation reaction to form the at least one primary capsule (e.g. an inorganic capsule). In various embodiments, template comprises an emulsified droplet. The droplet may be substantially hydrophobic. The droplet may be micron- or submicron-sized. In various embodiments, the method does", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "a zirconia-polymer capsule or a titania-polymer capsule. The inorganic shell may be porous or mesoporous.\n\nThe at least one primary capsule may have a size/diameter/particle size/particle size distribution/average particle size in the range of from about 1 pm to about 100 pm, 10 pm to about 100 pm, from about 20 pm to about 100 pm, from about 30 pm to about 100 pm, from about 40 pm to about 100 pm, from about 50 pm to about 100 pm, from about 60 pm to about 100 pm, from about 70 pm to about 100 pm, or about 10 pm, about 20 pm, about 30 pm, about 40 pm, about 50 pm, about 60 pm, about 70 pm, about 80 pm, about 90 pm or about 100 pm.\n\nIn various embodiments, the method further comprises a step of adding one or more of a silica precursor, a zirconia precursor or a titania precursor to a template, optionally a substantially spherical template, in water/aqueous medium to form the at least one inorganic capsule. The silica precursor may comprise a tetraalkyl orthosilicate, a trialkoxyalkylsilane or a silicon alkoxide (alkoxy silane) that is optionally selected from the group consisting of tetramethyl orthosilicate (TMOS), tetraethyl orthosilicate (TEOS), tetrapropyl orthosilicate (TPOS), methyltrimethoxysilane (MTMS), methyltriethoxysilane (MTES) or the like or combinations thereof. The titania precursor may comprise titanium(IV) isopropoxide and titanium(IV) bis(ammonium lactato)dihydroxide or the like or combinations thereof. The zirconia precursor may comprise zirconium isopropoxide, zirconium etoxide, zirconium n-butoxide or the like or combinations thereof.\n\nThe method may further comprise a step of growing a shell of the primary capsule such as a silica shell, a zirconia shell or a titania shell on the template by a hydrolysis condensation reaction to form the at least one primary capsule (e.g. an inorganic capsule). In various embodiments, template comprises an emulsified droplet. The droplet may be substantially hydrophobic. The droplet may be micron- or submicron-sized. In various embodiments, the method does" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9797635318280095, + "doc_id": "bbc386d1cabf8bc2112d24f1be55a57e89055ba20a00a18f153c32b52dc03846", + "edit_distance": 0.012578616352201259, + "f1_score": 0.9774436090225564, + "meteor": 0.9880423633656691, + "precision": 0.9848484848484849, + "pred_md": "substantially hermetically sealed by the polymer coating layer. For example, the hybrid/composite shell may comprise organic polymer latex particles or derivatives thereof blocking one or more pores of a shell of the primary capsule. Advantageously, the capsule is capable of containing cargoes/actives without substantial undesirable leakage. Therefore, in various embodiments, the hybrid/composite capsule remains substantially intact/stable/non-brittle/devoid of rupture/leakage (i.e. does not break) under high vacuum, e.g. during SEM analysis or when subject to high mechanical forces/stress or high shear. For example, when the hybrid/composite capsule is substantially resistant to breaking under scanning electron microscopy (SEM) vacuum conditions, it will be evident from the SEM images of the capsule. Advantageously, the one or more cargoes present within the capsule may be beneficially isolated/protected from an external environment for example under ambient conditions such as when the capsule is in storage.\n\nThe hybrid/composite shell may comprise an inner layer substantially made up of an inorganic material optionally selected from one or more of silica, zirconia, titania and combinations thereof, and an outer layer that is substantially a polymer layer derived from organic polymer latex particles or derivatives thereof. In various embodiments, the organic polymer coating comprises poly-Nisopropyl acrylamide (PNIPAM), poly-methyl-methacrylate-co-poly-styrene-copolyethyl-hexyl-acrylate-co-poly-acrylic acid, poly caprolactone (PCL), poly valerolactone, poly butyrolactone, polyurethane, polyamide, polyacrylic acid or combinations thereof and the at least one primary capsule comprises a silica capsule, a zirconia capsule, a titania capsule or combinations thereof.\n\nIn various embodiments, the outer layer is a direct coalesced form/product of polymer latex particles and is substantially similar in chemical composition with the polymer latex particles. In various embodiments, the hybrid/composite shell does not consist of double-layered silica shell.", + "recall": 0.9701492537313433, + "true_md": "substantially hermetically sealed by the polymer coating layer. For example, the hybrid/composite shell may comprise organic polymer latex particles or derivatives thereof blocking one or more pores of a shell of the primary capsule. Advantageously, the capsule is capable of containing cargoes/actives without substantial undesirable leakage. Therefore, in various embodiments, the hybrid/composite capsule remains substantially intact/stable/non-brittle/devoid of rupture/leakage (i.e. does not break) under high vacuum, e.g. during SEM analysis or when subject to high mechanical forces/stress or high shear. For example, when the hybrid/composite capsule is substantially resistant to breaking under scanning electron microscopy (SEM) vacuum conditions, it will be evident from the SEM images of the capsule. Advantageously, the one or more cargoes present within the capsule may be beneficially isolated/protected from an external environment for example under ambient conditions such as when the capsule is in storage.\n\nThe hybrid/composite shell may comprise an inner layer substantially made up of an inorganic material optionally selected from one or more of silica, zirconia, titania and combinations thereof, and an outer layer that is substantially a polymer layer derived from organic polymer latex particles or derivatives thereof. In various embodiments, the organic polymer coating comprises poly-N- isopropyl acrylamide (PNIPAM), poly-methyl-methacrylate-co-poly-styrene-co- polyethyl-hexyl-acrylate-co-poly-acrylic acid, poly caprolactone (PCL), poly valerolactone, poly butyrolactone, polyurethane, polyamide, polyacrylic acid or combinations thereof and the at least one primary capsule comprises a silica capsule, a zirconia capsule, a titania capsule or combinations thereof.\n\nIn various embodiments, the outer layer is a direct coalesced form/product of polymer latex particles and is substantially similar in chemical composition with the polymer latex particles. In various embodiments, the hybrid/composite shell does not consist of double-layered silica shell." + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "8eca155d937809d5b49ad035276f2fe561ee9cc24c895015f77b4be6cb750ef2", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999999924172644, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "The outer layer may be substantially uniform in thickness. The outer layer may comprise about 10%, about 15%, about 16%, about 17%, about 18%, about 19%, about 20%, about 2 1%, about 22%, about 23%, about 24%, about 25% or about 30% of the hybrid/composite capsule.\n\nIn various embodiments, the outer layer is physically deposited on the inner layer. In various embodiments, the hybrid/composite shell does not comprise a polyelectrolyte such as a poly(allylamine hydrochloride) (PAH). Accordingly, the hybrid/composite shell may be substantially inert e.g. does not react with an encapsulated active.\n\nThe hybrid/composite capsule may be substantially spherical in shape. The hybrid/composite capsule may be micron- or submicron-sized. In various embodiments, the hybrid/composite capsule has a size/diameter/particle size/particle size distribution/average particle size in the range of from about 100 nm to about 100 pm, from about 500 nm to about 100 pm, from about 1 pm to about 100 pm, 10 pm to about 100 pm, from about 20 pm to about 100 pm, from about 30 pm to about 100 pm, from about 40 pm to about 100 pm, from about 50 pm to about 100 pm, from about 60 pm to about 100 pm, from about 70 pm to about 100 pm, no less than about 70 pm, no less than about 60 pm, no less than about 50 pm or no less than about 40 pm.\n\nIn various embodiments, the hybrid/composite capsule comprises one or more actives loaded in a core of the capsule that is encapsulated by the shell of the primary capsule. For example, the hybrid/composite capsule may be loaded with one or more cargoes selected from the following: oil, silicone oil, active including sensitive active (e.g. sensitive to free radical reactions), aroma, aroma oil, flavour, fragrance, perfume, drug, therapeutic, cosmetic, skin care substance, consumer care substance, combinations or mixtures or derivatives thereof. In various embodiments, the hybrid/composite shell is substantially inert e.g. does not react with an encapsulated active.", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "The outer layer may be substantially uniform in thickness. The outer layer may comprise about 10%, about 15%, about 16%, about 17%, about 18%, about 19%, about 20%, about 2 1%, about 22%, about 23%, about 24%, about 25% or about 30% of the hybrid/composite capsule.\n\nIn various embodiments, the outer layer is physically deposited on the inner layer. In various embodiments, the hybrid/composite shell does not comprise a polyelectrolyte such as a poly(allylamine hydrochloride) (PAH). Accordingly, the hybrid/composite shell may be substantially inert e.g. does not react with an encapsulated active.\n\nThe hybrid/composite capsule may be substantially spherical in shape. The hybrid/composite capsule may be micron- or submicron-sized. In various embodiments, the hybrid/composite capsule has a size/diameter/particle size/particle size distribution/average particle size in the range of from about 100 nm to about 100 pm, from about 500 nm to about 100 pm, from about 1 pm to about 100 pm, 10 pm to about 100 pm, from about 20 pm to about 100 pm, from about 30 pm to about 100 pm, from about 40 pm to about 100 pm, from about 50 pm to about 100 pm, from about 60 pm to about 100 pm, from about 70 pm to about 100 pm, no less than about 70 pm, no less than about 60 pm, no less than about 50 pm or no less than about 40 pm.\n\nIn various embodiments, the hybrid/composite capsule comprises one or more actives loaded in a core of the capsule that is encapsulated by the shell of the primary capsule. For example, the hybrid/composite capsule may be loaded with one or more cargoes selected from the following: oil, silicone oil, active including sensitive active (e.g. sensitive to free radical reactions), aroma, aroma oil, flavour, fragrance, perfume, drug, therapeutic, cosmetic, skin care substance, consumer care substance, combinations or mixtures or derivatives thereof. In various embodiments, the hybrid/composite shell is substantially inert e.g. does not react with an encapsulated active." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9694392325400871, + "doc_id": "7d95bc93c5161421240b8c4447b19fe51a9741c052883c7afe3d3b6ed28743b1", + "edit_distance": 0.01764705882352941, + "f1_score": 0.9871244635193132, + "meteor": 0.9894872835481585, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "embodiments, the method does not rely on coacervation to facilitate an integration of an organic material on or with a shell of the primary capsule.\n\nFurthermore, in various embodiments, the method does not rely on controlled radical polymerization such as surface-initiated atom transfer radical polymerization (ATRP), in situ polymerization and/or precipitation polymerization to facilitate an integration of an organic material on or with a shell of the primary capsule.\n\nIn various embodiments, the heterocoagulating step does not comprise heterocoagulating a monomer with the shell of the at least one primary capsule. For example, in various embodiments, the method does not comprise precipitating organo-alkoxysilane monomer or vinyl monomer around a silica core/capsule.\n\nIn various embodiments, the heterocoagulating step is at least partly carried out at a temperature that is within or close to, no less than, or higher than the glass transition temperature (Tg) range or melting temperature range of the organic polymer latex particles or the organic polymer from which the organic polymer latex particles are derived. Advantageously, this may aid the coalescence or merging or melting of the organic polymer latex particles to form a continuous film/coating over the surface of the shell of the primary capsule. Depending on the identity of the organic polymer latex particles used, the temperature applied to aid the coalescence or merging of the organic polymer latex particles may vary. Accordingly, a suitable temperature range may be used. For example, the heterocoagulating step may be carried out at a temperature of from about 10°C to about 80°C, from about 15°C to about 75°C, from about 20°C to about 70°C, or about 10°C, about 15°C, about 20°C, about 25°C, about 30°C, about 35°C, about 40°C, about 45°C, about 50°C, about 55°C, about 60°C, about 65°C, about 70°C, about 75°C or about 80°C.", + "recall": 0.9745762711864406, + "true_md": "embodiments, the method does not rely on coacervation to facilitate an integration of an organic material on or with a shell of the primary capsule.\n\nFurthermore, in various embodiments, the method does not rely on controlled radical polymerization such as surface-initiated atom transfer radical polymerization (ATRP), in situ polymerization and/or precipitation polymerization to facilitate an integration of an organic material on or with a shell of the primary capsule.\n\nIn various embodiments, the heterocoagulating step does not comprise heterocoagulating a monomer with the shell of the at least one primary capsule. For example, in various embodiments, the method does not comprise precipitating organo-alkoxysilane monomer or vinyl monomer around a silica core/capsule.\n\nIn various embodiments, the heterocoagulating step is at least partly carried out at a temperature that is within or close to, no less than, or higher than the glass transition temperature (Tg) range or melting temperature range of the organic polymer latex particles or the organic polymer from which the organic polymer latex particles are derived. Advantageously, this may aid the coalescence or merging or melting of the organic polymer latex particles to form a continuous film/coating over the surface of the shell of the primary capsule. Depending on the identity of the organic polymer latex particles used, the temperature applied to aid the coalescence or merging of the organic polymer latex particles may vary. Accordingly, a suitable temperature range may be used. For example, the heterocoagulating step may be carried out at a temperature of from about 10°Cto about 80°C,from about 15°Cto about 75°C,from about 20°C to about 70°C,or about 10°C,about 15°C,about 20°C,about 25°C,about 30°C, about 35°C,about 40°C,about 45°C,about 50°C,about 55°C,about 60°C,about 65°C,about 70°C,about 75°Cor about 80°C." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9377398242628552, + "doc_id": "1a68cb9a5227d6160789b20eefc367ee42ae9bef3916917fc56d809c7bb14bf5", + "edit_distance": 0.046762589928057555, + "f1_score": 0.942408376963351, + "meteor": 0.9682894278505949, + "precision": 0.9574468085106383, + "pred_md": "## CLAIMS\n\n- 1.\n- A method of preparing a hybrid capsule, the method comprising:\n- heterocoagulating organic polymer latex particles with a primary capsule to form an organic polymer coating layer over a shell of the primary capsule.\n- 2. The method of claim 1, wherein the hybrid capsule is an organicinorganic capsule and the primary capsule is an inorganic capsule.\n- 3. The method of claim 1 or 2, wherein the heterocoagulating step is at least partly carried out at a temperature that is no less than the glass transition temperature (T g ) of the organic polymer latex particles.\n- 4. The method of claim 3, wherein the heterocoagulating step is at least partly carried out at a temperature of from 10°C to 80°C and/or at a pH from 2 to 11.\n- 5. The method of any one of the preceding claims, wherein the heterocoagulating step is carried out in the presence of two opposing charges, a first charge being associated with the organic polymer latex particles and a second charge being associated with the primary capsule, the second charge having a polarity that is opposite to that of the first charge.\n- 6. The method of any one of the preceding claims, further comprising introducing the primary capsule into a larger volume of the polymer latex particles prior to the heterocoagulating step.\n- 7. The method of claim 6, wherein the step of introducing the primary capsule comprises introducing a plurality of primary capsules until the", + "recall": 0.9278350515463918, + "true_md": "## CLAIMS\n\n- 1. A method of preparing a hybrid capsule, the method comprising:\n\nheterocoagulating organic polymer latex particles with a primary capsule to form an organic polymer coating layer over a shell of the primary capsule.\n\n- 2. The method of claim 1, wherein the hybrid capsule is an organic- inorganic capsule and the primary capsule is an inorganic capsule.\n\n- 3. The method of claim 1 or 2, wherein the heterocoagulating step is at least partly carried out at a temperature that is no less than the glass transition temperature (T$_{g}$) of the organic polymer latex particles.\n\n- 4. The method of claim 3, wherein the heterocoagulating step is at least partly carried out at a temperature of from 10°Cto 80°Cand/or at a pH from 2 to 11.\n\n- 5. The method of any one of the preceding claims, wherein the heterocoagulating step is carried out in the presence of two opposing charges, a first charge being associated with the organic polymer latex particles and a second charge being associated with the primary capsule, the second charge having a polarity that is opposite to that of the first charge.\n\n- 6. The method of any one of the preceding claims, further comprising introducing the primary capsule into a larger volume of the polymer latex particles prior to the heterocoagulating step.\n\n- 7. The method of claim 6, wherein the step of introducing the primary capsule comprises introducing a plurality of primary capsules until the" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.4586854670366487, + "doc_id": "fedf68d45c1acd279f7c34fd5b4cbae80677138bdc1d03b2869466e0cf4e89e9", + "edit_distance": 0.6816326530612244, + "f1_score": 0.7532467532467532, + "meteor": 0.8376558624195033, + "precision": 0.6041666666666666, + "pred_md": "## INTERNATIONAL SEARCH REPORT\n\nPCT/US2020/024355\n\nA. CLASSIFICATION OF SUBJECT MATTER\n\nINV.\n\nG06F3/0481\n\nG06F3/0482\n\nG06F3/0486\n\nG06F3/0488\n\nG06Q10/10\n\nADD.\n\nAccording to International Patent Classification (IPC) or to both national classification and IPC\n\n## B. FIELDS SEARCHED\n\nMinimum documentation searched (classification system followed by classification symbols)\n\nG06F\n\nG06Q\n\nDocumentation searched other than minimum documentation to the extent that such documents are included in the fields searched\n\nElectronic data base consulted during the international search (name of data base and, where practicable, search terms used)\n\nEPO-Internal\n\n, WPI\n\nData\n\n## C. DOCUMENTS CONSIDERED TO BE RELEVANT\n\n- \"T\" later document published after the international filing date or priority date and not in conflict with the application but cited to understand the principle or theory underlying the invention\n- \"A\" document defining the general state of the art which is not considered to be of particular relevance\n- Έ \" earlier application or patent but published on or after the international filing date\n- \"X\" document of particular relevance; the claimed invention cannot be considered novel or cannot be considered to involve an inventive step when the document is taken alone\n- \"L\" document which may throw doubts on priority claim(s) orwhich is\n\nrnational search report\n\nriele\n\nInternational application No\n\nPCT/US2020/024355\n\nForm PCT/ISA/210 (second sheet) (April 2005)", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## INTERNATIONAL SEARCH REPORT\n\nInternational application No\n\nPCT/US2020/024355\n\nForm PCT/ISA/210 (second sheet) (April 2005)\n\nA. CLASSIFICATION OF SUBJECT MATTER\n\nINV.\n\nAccording to International Patent Classification (IPC) or to both national classification and IPC\n\nADD.\n\nG06F3/0481\n\nG06F3/0482\n\nG06F3/0486\n\nG06Q10/10\n\nG06F3/0488\n\nB. FIELDS SEARCHED\n\nMinimum documentation searched (classification system followed by classification symbols)\n\nG06F\n\nG06Q\n\nDocumentation searched other than minimum documentation to the extent that such documents are included in the fields searched\n\nElectronic data base consulted during the international search (name of data base and, where practicable, search terms used)\n\nEPO-Internal , WPI\n\nData\n\nC. DOCUMENTS CONSIDERED TO BE RELEVANT" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9752825750247353, + "doc_id": "a9bcf93e43e81a96356f77cc9573599ed8729caf9b06df160e305ec8aedb54d3", + "edit_distance": 0.017793594306049824, + "f1_score": 0.9664804469273744, + "meteor": 0.9828347207851168, + "precision": 0.9719101123595506, + "pred_md": "[0044] As shown in FIG. 3 and described briefly above, UI controls 122 can be presented adjacent to or overlapping the canvas 114 in the UI 106. In the illustrated example, the UI controls 122 are configured as a toolbar that includes tools for selecting a pen and type of digital ink (e.g. color, pen thickness, pen type, etc.), for deleting digital ink (e.g. an eraser), for creating other types of objects 120 such as notes, for setting a timer for voting on objects 120 on the canvas 144, for up-voting or down-voting objects 120, and for organizing the objects 120 on the canvas 114. Other tools can be presented in the toolbar in other configurations. As will be discussed in greater detail below with regard to FIGS. 6B6D, the UI controls 122 can be template and/or user-specific.\n\n[0045] FIG. 4 is a user interface diagram showing aspects of the UI 106 provided by the whiteboard application 104 executing on the computing device 102 shown in FIGS. 1A3. In this example, a template 116 has been placed on the canvas 114. The example template 116 shown in FIG. 4 includes two regions 118A and 118B. Templates 116 can include other arrangements and types of regions 118 in other configurations. Additionally, regions 118 can exist outside of templates 116 in some configurations.\n\n[0046] In the example shown in FIG. 4, a user has placed an object 120A on the canvas 114. As discussed above, the object 120A has an associated logical representation 202A providing semantic context for the object 120A. The logical representation 202A might specify, for example, the object type for the object 120A, the creator of the object 120A, etc.\n\n[0047] In the illustrated example, a user has selected the object 120A using a mouse cursor 306 and moved the object 120A from the canvas 114 to a region 118A (e.g. through a 'dragging' motion'). In response thereto, the region 118A has modified the logical representation 202A associated with the object 120A. For example, the region 118A might modify the logical representation 202A to change or add metadata. Auser has also dragged the object 120B from the region 118A to the region 118B in the example shown in FIG. 4. In a similar fashion, the region 118B might modify the logical representation 202A associated with the object 120C.\n\n[0048] As described briefly above, templates 116 and regions 118 can also generate visual representations 206 of objects 120 based upon their associated logical representations 202. In the example shown in FIG. 4, for instance, the template 116 might define a region 118A on the canvas 114 that is configured to present an object 120 in a first visual representation 206 (e.g. in a particular color, format, or arrangement) that is based upon the logical representation 202 associated with the object 120. In this example, the template 116", + "recall": 0.9611111111111111, + "true_md": "[0044] As shown in FIG. 3 and described briefly above, UI controls 122 can be presented adjacent to or overlapping the canvas 114 in the UI 106. In the illustrated example, the UI controls 122 are configured as a toolbar that includes tools for selecting a pen and type of digital ink (e.g. color, pen thickness, pen type, etc.), for deleting digital ink (e.g. an eraser), for creating other types of objects 120 such as notes, for setting a timer for voting on objects 120 on the canvas 144, for up-voting or down-voting objects 120, and for organizing the objects 120 on the canvas 114. Other tools can be presented in the toolbar in other configurations. As will be discussed in greater detail below with regard to FIGS. 6B- 6D, the UI controls 122 can be template and/or user-specific.\n\n[0045] FIG. 4 is a user interface diagram showing aspects of the UI 106 provided by the whiteboard application 104 executing on the computing device 102 shown in FIGS. 1A- 3. In this example, a template 116 has been placed on the canvas 114. The example template 116 shown in FIG. 4 includes two regions 118A and 118B. Templates 116 can include other arrangements and types of regions 118 in other configurations. Additionally, regions 118 can exist outside of templates 116 in some configurations.\n\n[0046] In the example shown in FIG. 4, a user has placed an object 120A on the canvas 114. As discussed above, the object 120A has an associated logical representation 202A providing semantic context for the object 120A . The logical representation 202A might specify, for example, the object type for the object 120A, the creator of the object 120A, etc.\n\n[0047] In the illustrated example, a user has selected the object 120A using a mouse cursor 306 and moved the object 120A from the canvas 114 to a region 118A (e.g. through a “dragging” motion”). In response thereto, the region 118A has modified the logical representation 202A associated with the object 120A . For example, the region 118A might modify the logical representation 202A to change or add metadata. A user has also dragged the object 120B from the region 118A to the region 118B in the example shown in FIG. 4. In a similar fashion, the region 118B might modify the logical representation 202A associated with the object 120C.\n\n[0048] As described briefly above, templates 116 and regions 118 can also generate visual representations 206 of objects 120 based upon their associated logical representations 202. In the example shown in FIG. 4, for instance, the template 116 might define a region 118A on the canvas 114 that is configured to present an object 120 in a first visual representation 206 (e.g. in a particular color, format, or arrangement) that is based upon the logical representation 202 associated with the object 120. In this example, the template 116" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "65fd2a2a21156bc4a032f86fe863f7cb7c9bd3c7f6d4d9ad719881a7cfe668cf", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999999944392168, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "associated with the primary capsule. The first charge and the second charge may be opposite and/or having opposing polarities (e.g. one is a positive charge and the other is a negative charge) such that the opposite charges and/or opposing polarities can aid in bringing the organic polymer latex particles and the primary capsules together so as to allow individual primary capsules to be sufficiently surrounded by the organic polymer latex particles. That is, the different/opposite charges may promote attraction and enable coverage of the capsule surface with the latex particles. The first charge may be associated with the polymer latex particles by virtue of the charges that are present on the polymer latex particles per se (e.g. surface charge) or via the use of an intermediate such as a charged surfactant that surrounds the polymer latex particles. Likewise, the second charge may be associated with the primary capsules by virtue of the charges that are present on the primary capsules per se (e.g. surface charge) or via the use of an intermediate such as a charged surfactant that surrounds the primary capsules. Therefore, in some embodiments, the latex particles and primary capsules are surrounded by oppositely charged surfactants (e.g. one surfactant has a positive charge and the other surfactant has a negative charge) before they are being mixed together. It is also possible that if the latex particles inherently have a first charge on their surface (e.g. not by virtue of a surfactant), the surfactant used to stabilize the latex particles may be neutral (or not present at all if the latex particles are already sufficiently stable on their own) and the surfactant used to stabilize the primary capsules may have a second charge that is opposite to the first charge (or the surfactant may be neutral if the primary capsules already have the inherent second charge or the surfactant may not be present at all if the primary capsules already have the inherent second charge and are stable on their own) or vice versa. As an illustration, in a particular example, when the latex particles comprise NIPAM (poly-N-isopropyl acrylamide) and an acid such as acrylic acid, the acrylic acid in the latex gives a negative charge to the latex particles and so these surface charged polymer latex particles may be surfactant-free (e.g. any surfactant present may be removed by washing) before they are coated onto positively charged CTAB (cetyl trimethylammonium bromide) stabilized silica primary capsules.", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "associated with the primary capsule. The first charge and the second charge may be opposite and/or having opposing polarities (e.g. one is a positive charge and the other is a negative charge) such that the opposite charges and/or opposing polarities can aid in bringing the organic polymer latex particles and the primary capsules together so as to allow individual primary capsules to be sufficiently surrounded by the organic polymer latex particles. That is, the different/opposite charges may promote attraction and enable coverage of the capsule surface with the latex particles. The first charge may be associated with the polymer latex particles by virtue of the charges that are present on the polymer latex particles per se (e.g. surface charge) or via the use of an intermediate such as a charged surfactant that surrounds the polymer latex particles. Likewise, the second charge may be associated with the primary capsules by virtue of the charges that are present on the primary capsules per se (e.g. surface charge) or via the use of an intermediate such as a charged surfactant that surrounds the primary capsules. Therefore, in some embodiments, the latex particles and primary capsules are surrounded by oppositely charged surfactants (e.g. one surfactant has a positive charge and the other surfactant has a negative charge) before they are being mixed together. It is also possible that if the latex particles inherently have a first charge on their surface (e.g. not by virtue of a surfactant), the surfactant used to stabilize the latex particles may be neutral (or not present at all if the latex particles are already sufficiently stable on their own) and the surfactant used to stabilize the primary capsules may have a second charge that is opposite to the first charge (or the surfactant may be neutral if the primary capsules already have the inherent second charge or the surfactant may not be present at all if the primary capsules already have the inherent second charge and are stable on their own) or vice versa. As an illustration, in a particular example, when the latex particles comprise NIPAM (poly-N-isopropyl acrylamide) and an acid such as acrylic acid, the acrylic acid in the latex gives a negative charge to the latex particles and so these surface charged polymer latex particles may be surfactant-free (e.g. any surfactant present may be removed by washing) before they are coated onto positively charged CTAB (cetyl trimethylammonium bromide) stabilized silica primary capsules." + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "a2457574d8ddb61b28105b6c6e5bd08c2c3e9cfd39d11fa78fa2c63836c6d08b", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999999868188842, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "such as silica shell. The water-based polymer latex nanoparticles may then be heterocoagulated on a primary capsule e.g. silica capsule surface and allowing polymer chains to interpenetrate to seal the pores and create a polymer shell on top of the silica hollow sphere. As such, embodiments of the methods disclosed herein are capable of blocking porous channels in primary capsules by coating polymer leading to longer and better protection of the encapsulated material. The hybrid capsules may thus be hermetically sealed unlike in the case of pure silica capsules.\n\nEmbodiments of the methods disclosed herein also versatile. For example, embodiments of the methods disclosed herein are compatible with polymers having favorable film forming properties and wide-ranging polydispersity indexes (including degradable/biodegradable, bioresorbable and/or non-toxic polymers). In one particular example, embodiments of the disclosed method are capable of coating polycaprolactone latex around otherwise breakable silica capsules. Given that polycaprolactone is biodegradable, bioresorbable and non-toxic, cosmetic and even cosmeceutical applications become easy with this approach.\n\nIn embodiments of the disclosed method, the polymer can be varied to generate different properties including stimuli responsive and degradable nature. Embodiments of the method disclosed herein make it possible to introduce multiple functionalities to a capsule easily which allows the method to be adapted as one that has a modular approach. This is possible as embodiments of the disclosed methods do not involve stabilization of droplets by pickering emulsion and thus allow for a variety of functionalities to be possible to be present on the capsule through the ability to use different polymers (including stimuli responsive polymers). As such, the capsules produced by embodiments of the methods disclosed herein may be customised to release their actives at certain predetermined conditions. The benefits offered by embodiments of the disclosed methods in terms of protection of the active and versatility of the release options, make the approach valuable.", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "such as silica shell. The water-based polymer latex nanoparticles may then be heterocoagulated on a primary capsule e.g. silica capsule surface and allowing polymer chains to interpenetrate to seal the pores and create a polymer shell on top of the silica hollow sphere. As such, embodiments of the methods disclosed herein are capable of blocking porous channels in primary capsules by coating polymer leading to longer and better protection of the encapsulated material. The hybrid capsules may thus be hermetically sealed unlike in the case of pure silica capsules.\n\nEmbodiments of the methods disclosed herein also versatile. For example, embodiments of the methods disclosed herein are compatible with polymers having favorable film forming properties and wide-ranging polydispersity indexes (including degradable/biodegradable, bioresorbable and/or non-toxic polymers). In one particular example, embodiments of the disclosed method are capable of coating polycaprolactone latex around otherwise breakable silica capsules. Given that polycaprolactone is biodegradable, bioresorbable and non-toxic, cosmetic and even cosmeceutical applications become easy with this approach.\n\nIn embodiments of the disclosed method, the polymer can be varied to generate different properties including stimuli responsive and degradable nature. Embodiments of the method disclosed herein make it possible to introduce multiple functionalities to a capsule easily which allows the method to be adapted as one that has a modular approach. This is possible as embodiments of the disclosed methods do not involve stabilization of droplets by pickering emulsion and thus allow for a variety of functionalities to be possible to be present on the capsule through the ability to use different polymers (including stimuli responsive polymers). As such, the capsules produced by embodiments of the methods disclosed herein may be customised to release their actives at certain predetermined conditions. The benefits offered by embodiments of the disclosed methods in terms of protection of the active and versatility of the release options, make the approach valuable." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.958499603026603, + "doc_id": "825f102049ba88c977e80b0882d3299ce5afefb20a4900c823cb8f886ac225b4", + "edit_distance": 0.03435114503816794, + "f1_score": 0.9660574412532636, + "meteor": 0.9660280462338198, + "precision": 0.9685863874345549, + "pred_md": "accompanying drawings that form a part hereof, and which are shown by way of illustration specific configurations or examples. Referring now to the drawings, in which like numerals represent like elements throughout the several FIGS., aspects of various technologies for providing dynamic whiteboard templates and regions will be described.\n\n[0028] FIG. 1A is a schematic diagram illustrating aspects of the configuration and operation of a digital ink capable computing device 102 (which might also be referred to herein as 'the computing device 102' or simply 'the device 102') that implements the disclosed technologies in one particular configuration. The computing device 102 can be any type of computing device (e.g. a tablet, laptop, desktop, or smartphone) that includes functionality for enabling a user to a compose text or drawings from stroke inputs, sometimes referred to as 'strokes' of digital ink. For example, the computing device 102 might be configured to accept digital ink input via natural user interface input methods (e.g., touch or gesture), via a handwriting input device (e.g., a digital pen or stylus), or by movement of a mouse pointer, touchpad pointer, etc.\n\n[0029] In order to enable inking in the manner described above, the computing device 102 can be configured with a touch-sensitive display device 108. The touch-sensitive display device 108 can detect user input 110 made by a user input device 112 (e.g. a digital pen, stylus, mouse, etc.) or via touch or gesture made by a finger or other appendage. User input made to the display device 108 using any mechanism might be referred to herein as a 'touch.'\n\n[0030] It is to be appreciated that while the technologies disclosed herein are primarily presented in the context of a digital ink capable computing device 102, the disclosed technologies are not limited to use with such a computing system. Rather, the technologies disclosed herein can be utilized with computing systems not equipped with touch or digital ink capabilities such as, but not limited to, desktop or laptop computers. In this regard, it is also to be appreciated that while the embodiments disclosed herein are implemented by a whiteboard application 104, the disclosed technologies can be practiced with other types of applications, such as another type of collaboration application, a presentation application, or a word processing application.\n\n[0031] In order to provide the technical benefits described above, and potentially others, a digital whiteboard application 104 executes on the computing device 102. The whiteboard application 104 is configured to present a user interface ('UI') that includes a whiteboard canvas ('canvas') 114 upon which heterogenous objects 120 can be placed in a free-form manner. For example, the canvas 114 might be configured to accept digital ink", + "recall": 0.9635416666666666, + "true_md": "accompanying drawings that form a part hereof, and which are shown by way of illustration specific configurations or examples. Referring now to the drawings, in which like numerals represent like elements throughout the several FIGS., aspects of various technologies for providing dynamic whiteboard templates and regions will be described.\n\n[0028] FIG. 1A is a schematic diagram illustrating aspects of the configuration and operation of a digital ink capable computing device 102 (which might also be referred to herein as “thecomputing device 102”or simply “thedevice 102”)that implements the disclosed technologies in one particular configuration. The computing device 102 can be any type of computing device (e.g. a tablet, laptop, desktop, or smartphone) that includes functionality for enabling a user to a compose text or drawings from stroke inputs, sometimes referred to as “strokes” of digital ink. For example, the computing device 102 might be configured to accept digital ink input via natural user interface input methods (e.g., touch or gesture), via a handwriting input device (e.g., a digital pen or stylus), or by movement of a mouse pointer, touchpad pointer, etc.\n\n[0029] In order to enable inking in the manner described above, the computing device 102 can be configured with a touch-sensitive display device 108. The touch-sensitive display device 108 can detect user input 110 made by a user input device 112 (e.g. a digital pen, stylus, mouse, etc.) or via touch or gesture made by a finger or other appendage. User input made to the display device 108 using any mechanism might be referred to herein as a “touch.”\n\n[0030] It is to be appreciated that while the technologies disclosed herein are primarily presented in the context of a digital ink capable computing device 102, the disclosed technologies are not limited to use with such a computing system. Rather, the technologies disclosed herein can be utilized with computing systems not equipped with touch or digital ink capabilities such as, but not limited to, desktop or laptop computers. In this regard, it is also to be appreciated that while the embodiments disclosed herein are implemented by a whiteboard application 104, the disclosed technologies can be practiced with other types of applications, such as another type of collaboration application, a presentation application, or a word processing application.\n\n[0031] In order to provide the technical benefits described above, and potentially others, a digital whiteboard application 104 executes on the computing device 102. The whiteboard application 104 is configured to present a user interface (“UI”) that includes a whiteboard canvas (“canvas”) 114 upon which heterogenous objects 120 can be placed in a free-form manner. For example, the canvas 114 might be configured to accept digital ink" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9849253918457394, + "doc_id": "e32dacdfd7f9e28048e5fb0a07948f25b1ba175188eb10d5931d48f95573c5d2", + "edit_distance": 0.023148148148148147, + "f1_score": 0.9943820224719101, + "meteor": 0.9955870779133694, + "precision": 0.9943820224719101, + "pred_md": "and operation of the computing device illustrated in FIG. 1;\n\n[0021] FIG. 4 is a user interface diagram showing aspects of a user interface provided by a whiteboard application executing on the computing device shown in FIG. 1 that includes an illustrative template having two regions;\n\n[0022] FIGS. 5-91 are user interface diagrams illustrating additional aspects of the operation of the computing device shown in FIG. 1 for providing dynamic whiteboard templates and regions;\n\n[0023] FIG. 10 is a flow diagram showing a routine that illustrates aspects of the operation of the computing device shown in FIG. 1 for providing dynamic whiteboard templates and regions; and\n\n[0024] FIG. 11is a computer architecture diagram showing an illustrative computer hardware and software architecture for a computing device that can implement aspects of the technologies presented herein.\n\n## DETAILED DESCRIPTION\n\n[0025] The following detailed description is directed to technologies for providing dynamic whiteboard templates and regions. As discussed briefly above, implementations of the disclosed technologies enable semantic context to be quickly and easily associated with heterogenous digital objects on a digital whiteboard, such as digital ink. Once semantic context has been associated with the digital objects, the objects can be sorted, filtered, arranged, modified, projected, summarized, exported, and otherwise operated on based upon the semantic context. The disclosed technologies can realize savings in time and utilization of computing resources and can increase the productivity of users of the technologies presented herein. Other technical benefits not specifically mentioned herein can also be realized through implementations of the disclosed subject matter.\n\n[0026] Those skilled in the art will recognize that the subj ect matter disclosed herein can be implemented with various types of computing systems and modules, at least some of which are described in detail below. Those skilled in the art will also appreciate that the subject matter described herein can be practiced with other computer system configurations, including hand-held devices, multiprocessor systems, microprocessor-based or programmable consumer electronics, computing or processing systems embedded in devices (such as wearables, automobiles, home automation etc.), computing or processing systems embedded in devices (such as wearable computing devices, automobiles, home automation etc.), and the like.\n\n[0027] In the following detailed description, references are made to the", + "recall": 0.9943820224719101, + "true_md": "and operation of the computing device illustrated in FIG. 1;\n\n[0021] FIG. 4 is a user interface diagram showing aspects of a user interface provided by a whiteboard application executing on the computing device shown in FIG. 1 that includes an illustrative template having two regions;\n\n[0022] FIGS. 5-91 are user interface diagrams illustrating additional aspects of the operation of the computing device shown in FIG. 1 for providing dynamic whiteboard templates and regions;\n\n[0023] FIG. 10 is a flow diagram showing a routine that illustrates aspects of the operation of the computing device shown in FIG. 1 for providing dynamic whiteboard templates and regions; and\n\n[0024] FIG. 11 is a computer architecture diagram showing an illustrative computer hardware and software architecture for a computing device that can implement aspects of the technologies presented herein.\n\n[0025] The following detailed description is directed to technologies for providing dynamic whiteboard templates and regions. As discussed briefly above, implementations of the disclosed technologies enable semantic context to be quickly and easily associated with heterogenous digital objects on a digital whiteboard, such as digital ink. Once semantic context has been associated with the digital objects, the objects can be sorted, filtered, arranged, modified, projected, summarized, exported, and otherwise operated on based upon the semantic context. The disclosed technologies can realize savings in time and utilization of computing resources and can increase the productivity of users of the technologies presented herein. Other technical benefits not specifically mentioned herein can also be realized through implementations of the disclosed subject matter.\n\n[0026] Those skilled in the art will recognize that the subj ect matter disclosed herein can be implemented with various types of computing systems and modules, at least some of which are described in detail below. Those skilled in the art will also appreciate that the subject matter described herein can be practiced with other computer system configurations, including hand-held devices, multiprocessor systems, microprocessor-based or programmable consumer electronics, computing or processing systems embedded in devices (such as wearables, automobiles, home automation etc.), computing or processing systems embedded in devices (such as wearable computing devices, automobiles, home automation etc.), and the like.\n\n[0027] In the following detailed description, references are made to the\n\n## DETAILED DESCRIPTION" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9883190250027013, + "doc_id": "a26cee27d1e480da93c10b3143931daad9e710aa32e2318a55563db61f19ffc9", + "edit_distance": 0.00784313725490196, + "f1_score": 0.9784615384615384, + "meteor": 0.9923513380526373, + "precision": 0.9814814814814815, + "pred_md": "multiple user computing devices 102, the computing devices 102 can connect to a remote data source 124. The data source 124 can store data (not shown in FIG. IB) for synchronizing the contents of the canvas 114 between multiple user computing devices 102. The data can be synchronized in real or near real time in order to facilitate interactivity between the users and the contents of the canvas 114. In other configurations, a peer-topeer model might be utilized to synchronize data between instances of the whiteboard application 102 executing on multiple computing devices 102. Other implementations will be apparent to those skilled in the art.\n\n[0036] Referring now to FIG. 2, additional details regarding the operation of the regions 118 within a template 116 will be described. As shown in FIG. 2, objects 120, such as those on a canvas 114 or contained within regions 118 of a template 116, have associated logical representations 202A. The logical representation 202A for an object 120 is a data structure that maintains semantic data (e.g. metadata) about the object 120 such as, for example, data indicating the type of object 120, the object's creator, the creation date and time, and/or other types of information. Because the logical representation 202A for an object 120 maintains semantic information for the object 120, the logical representation 202A might be said to exist in a semantic domain 200A.\n\n[0037] As shown in FIG. 2, regions 118 can also include logical representations 202B. A logical representation 202B for a region 118 is a data structure that defines metadata for the region 118. For example, a logical representation 202B might specify the type of region 118, the types of objects 120 that the region 118 supports, and/or rules for modifying the logical representations 202A associated with objects 120 placed in the region 118. The logical representations 202A and 202B can include alternate or additional information in other configurations.\n\n[0038] As also shown in FIG. 2 and discussed briefly above, templates 116 and regions 118 can also generate visual representations 206 of objects 120 based upon their associated logical representations 202A and 202B. For example, and without limitation, a template 116 might define a region 118 on the canvas 114 that is configured to present an object 120 in a first visual representation 206 (e.g. in a particular color, format, or arrangement) that is based upon the logical representation 202A associated with the object 120. As will be described in greater detail below, regions 118 can be configured to present objects 120 in multiple different visual representations 206. Presentation of a visual representation 206 on the canvas 114 might be referred to herein as occurring within a presentation domain 200B.", + "recall": 0.9754601226993865, + "true_md": "multiple user computing devices 102, the computing devices 102 can connect to a remote data source 124. The data source 124 can store data (not shown in FIG. IB) for synchronizing the contents of the canvas 114 between multiple user computing devices 102. The data can be synchronized in real or near real time in order to facilitate interactivity between the users and the contents of the canvas 114. In other configurations, a peer-to- peer model might be utilized to synchronize data between instances of the whiteboard application 102 executing on multiple computing devices 102. Other implementations will be apparent to those skilled in the art.\n\n[0036] Referring now to FIG. 2, additional details regarding the operation of the regions 118 within a template 116 will be described. As shown in FIG. 2, objects 120, such as those on a canvas 114 or contained within regions 118 of a template 116, have associated logical representations 202A. The logical representation 202A for an object 120 is a data structure that maintains semantic data (e.g. metadata) about the object 120 such as, for example, data indicating the type of object 120, the object’screator, the creation date and time, and/or other types of information. Because the logical representation 202A for an object 120 maintains semantic information for the object 120, the logical representation 202A might be said to exist in a semantic domain 200A.\n\n[0037] As shown in FIG. 2, regions 118 can also include logical representations 202B. A logical representation 202B for a region 118 is a data structure that defines metadata for the region 118. For example, a logical representation 202B might specify the type of region 118, the types of objects 120 that the region 118 supports, and/or rules for modifying the logical representations 202A associated with objects 120 placed in the region 118. The logical representations 202A and 202B can include alternate or additional information in other configurations.\n\n[0038] As also shown in FIG. 2 and discussed briefly above, templates 116 and regions 118 can also generate visual representations 206 of objects 120 based upon their associated logical representations 202A and 202B. For example, and without limitation, a template 116 might define a region 118 on the canvas 114 that is configured to present an object 120 in a first visual representation 206 (e.g. in a particular color, format, or arrangement) that is based upon the logical representation 202A associated with the object 120. As will be described in greater detail below, regions 118 can be configured to present objects 120 in multiple different visual representations 206. Presentation of a visual representation 206 on the canvas 114 might be referred to herein as occurring within a presentation domain 200B." + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "76efbba4c1e4df08d70d056cfb035e133191db90791c60e135e79e5d296291af", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999999914399791, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "and/or parts of its structure. For example, the hybrid capsule may comprise a coating over a shell where the shell is formed of a different material from the coating. The different materials may be different in that the chemical make-up in each material is different. The chemical make-up in each material may be different in terms of the identity of the elements present and/or the molar ratio of the elements present and/or chemical arrangement of the elements. For example, the elements present in each material may be the same but the molar ratio and/or chemical structure in each material may be different and therefore these materials are still considered non-identical materials. In various embodiments, the hybrid capsule comprises an organic-inorganic capsule or an inorganic-organic capsule.\n\nIn various embodiments, the method comprises heterocoagulating organic polymer latex particles with one or more (or at least one) primary capsule(s) to form an organic polymer coating layer over a shell of the primary capsule. In various embodiments, the polymer coating layer is on top of or is on an outer/external surface of the shell of the primary capsule such that the shell is positioned between the polymer coating layer and an inner core of the primary capsule. The polymer coating may be in direct contact with the shell of the primary capsule, for example, the polymer coating may be disposed on the shell of the primary capsule.\n\nIn various embodiments, heterocoagulating the organic polymer latex particles with the shell of the one or more primary capsule is carried out such that the organic polymer latex particles are converted into a continuous film/coating on the surface of the shell of the primary capsule to form the hybrid capsule (e.g. an organic-inorganic capsule in some examples). In various embodiments, the heterocoagulating step comprises adsorbing the organic polymer latex particles onto the shell of the at least one primary capsule; coalescing the organic polymer latex particles to form polymer strands; and allowing the polymer strands to interpenetrate /inter diffuse with the shell of the primary capsule to form an organic coating on the shell for example such that a hybrid shell (e.g. an organic-", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "and/or parts of its structure. For example, the hybrid capsule may comprise a coating over a shell where the shell is formed of a different material from the coating. The different materials may be different in that the chemical make-up in each material is different. The chemical make-up in each material may be different in terms of the identity of the elements present and/or the molar ratio of the elements present and/or chemical arrangement of the elements. For example, the elements present in each material may be the same but the molar ratio and/or chemical structure in each material may be different and therefore these materials are still considered non-identical materials. In various embodiments, the hybrid capsule comprises an organic-inorganic capsule or an inorganic-organic capsule.\n\nIn various embodiments, the method comprises heterocoagulating organic polymer latex particles with one or more (or at least one) primary capsule(s) to form an organic polymer coating layer over a shell of the primary capsule. In various embodiments, the polymer coating layer is on top of or is on an outer/external surface of the shell of the primary capsule such that the shell is positioned between the polymer coating layer and an inner core of the primary capsule. The polymer coating may be in direct contact with the shell of the primary capsule, for example, the polymer coating may be disposed on the shell of the primary capsule.\n\nIn various embodiments, heterocoagulating the organic polymer latex particles with the shell of the one or more primary capsule is carried out such that the organic polymer latex particles are converted into a continuous film/coating on the surface of the shell of the primary capsule to form the hybrid capsule (e.g. an organic-inorganic capsule in some examples). In various embodiments, the heterocoagulating step comprises adsorbing the organic polymer latex particles onto the shell of the at least one primary capsule; coalescing the organic polymer latex particles to form polymer strands; and allowing the polymer strands to interpenetrate /inter diffuse with the shell of the primary capsule to form an organic coating on the shell for example such that a hybrid shell (e.g. an organic-" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9858434257715776, + "doc_id": "5364210c6e72b562cf0dacf5e260249b20150e77dac659756d3451c99eb289c1", + "edit_distance": 0.008032128514056224, + "f1_score": 0.9830508474576272, + "meteor": 0.9923661487983243, + "precision": 0.9886363636363636, + "pred_md": "concentration of the primary capsules in the mixture of primary capsules and organic polymer latex is from 10% to 40% by weight of the entire mixture.\n\n- 8. The method of any one of the preceding claims, wherein the heterocoagulating step to form a polymer coating layer over a shell of the primary capsule is substantially devoid of a polymerization reaction.\n- 9. The method of any one of the preceding claims, wherein the heterocoagulating step is carried out in the absence of an organic solvent.\n- 10. The method of any one of the preceding claims, wherein the organic polymer latex particles comprises poly-N-isopropyl acrylamide (PNIPAM) latex particles, poly-methyl-methacrylate-co-poly-styrene-copolyethyl-hexyl-acrylate-co-poly-acrylic acid latex particles, poly caprolactone (PCL) latex particles, poly valerolactone latex particles, poly butyrolactone latex particles, polyurethane latex particles, polyamide latex particles, polyacrylic acid-containing latex particles or combinations thereof.\n- 11. The method of any one of the preceding claims, wherein the primary capsule comprises a silica capsule, a zirconia capsule, a titania capsule or combinations thereof.\n- 12. The method of any one of the preceding claims, wherein the polymer latex particles have an average particle size in the range of from 50 nm to 1000 nm and the primary capsule has an average particle size in the range of from 1 pm to 100 pm.", + "recall": 0.9775280898876404, + "true_md": "concentration of the primary capsules in the mixture of primary capsules and organic polymer latex is from 10% to 40% by weight of the entire mixture.\n\n- 8. The method of any one of the preceding claims, wherein the heterocoagulating step to form a polymer coating layer over a shell of the primary capsule is substantially devoid of a polymerization reaction.\n\n- 9. The method of any one of the preceding claims, wherein the heterocoagulating step is carried out in the absence of an organic solvent.\n\n- 10. The method of any one of the preceding claims, wherein the organic polymer latex particles comprises poly-N-isopropyl acrylamide (PNIPAM) latex particles, poly-methyl-methacrylate-co-poly-styrene-co- polyethyl-hexyl-acrylate-co-poly-acrylic acid latex particles, poly caprolactone (PCL) latex particles, poly valerolactone latex particles, poly butyrolactone latex particles, polyurethane latex particles, polyamide latex particles, polyacrylic acid-containing latex particles or combinations thereof.\n\n- 11. The method of any one of the preceding claims, wherein the primary capsule comprises a silica capsule, a zirconia capsule, a titania capsule or combinations thereof.\n\n- 12. The method of any one of the preceding claims, wherein the polymer latex particles have an average particle size in the range of from 50 nm to 1000 nm and the primary capsule has an average particle size in the range of from 1 pm to 100 pm." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9800260676788966, + "doc_id": "7c0ea90ef4125d22b39bd8c4ea52db6908f941b8ad25c9f2dccb1684b0b5cf26", + "edit_distance": 0.14218009478672985, + "f1_score": 0.9947089947089948, + "meteor": 0.9901367565357727, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "For the current measurement method, the refractive index of silica was used for determination of the particle size distribution. FIG. 7 shows the particle size distribution of a silica capsule obtained after heterocoagulation. Exact values of the particle size distribution of the heterocoagulated sample shown in FIG. 7 are provided in Table 2 below. A bimodal size distribution is shown, indicating some percentage of aggregation.\n\nTable 2. Particle size distribution of a heterocoagulated sample shown in FIG. 7\n\nGravimetric analysis and thermogravimetric analysis of (i) silica capsule and (ii) hetero-coagulated silica capsules with poly-NIPAM latex particles\n\nThere are many ways to utilize the hetero-coagulated silica capsules with poly-NIPAM latex particles and one (ideal) way is to use the material in the form of dispersion in formulations. In this example, the solid content of the material (estimated gravi metrically) is 0.01 3 g/mL (or 0.01 4 g/g).\n\nTo determine the content of poly-NIPAM latex layer adsorbed on the silica capsules, thermogravimetric analysis (TGA) was performed on both (i) silica capsule and (ii) hetero-coagulated silica capsules with poly-NIPAM latex particles.", + "recall": 0.9894736842105263, + "true_md": "For the current measurement method, the refractive index of silica was used for determination of the particle size distribution. FIG. 7 shows the particle size distribution of a silica capsule obtained after heterocoagulation. Exact values of the particle size distribution of the heterocoagulated sample shown in FIG. 7 are provided in Table 2 below. A bimodal size distribution is shown, indicating some percentage of aggregation.\n\n## Gravimetric analysis and thermogravimetric analysis of (i) silica capsule and (ii) hetero-coagulated silica capsules with poly-NIPAM latex particles\n\nThere are many ways to utilize the hetero-coagulated silica capsules with poly-NIPAM latex particles and one (ideal) way is to use the material in the form of dispersion in formulations. In this example, the solid content of the material (estimated gravi metrically) is 0.01 3 g/mL (or 0.01 4 g/g).\n\nTo determine the content of poly-NIPAM latex layer adsorbed on the silica capsules, thermogravimetric analysis (TGA) was performed on both (i) silica capsule and (ii) hetero-coagulated silica capsules with poly-NIPAM latex particles.\n\nTable 2. Particle size distribution of a heterocoagulated sample shown in FIG. 7" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "e01ef14f1395776978b91669b7a09bddadb71860161325d61493a1215489fd08", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999999923035253, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Therefore, the method may also further comprise providing a surfactant to stabilize the organic polymer latex particles and a surfactant to stabilize the at least one primary capsule. These surfactants may be the same or different. In various embodiments, these surfactants are different. Accordingly, in various embodiments, the heterocoagulating step is carried out in the presence of at least two different surfactants. The surfactants may comprise charged surfactants. In various embodiments, the heterocoagulation is carried out in the presence of two different surfactants having charges that are opposite to each other. In various embodiments, the heterocoagulation is carried out in the presence of at least one cationic surfactant and at least one anionic surfactant. For example, in various embodiments, the charged surfactant that stabilises the primary capsule(s) has a charge that is opposite to that of the surfactant that is used to stabilize the organic polymer latex particles. Without being bound by theory, it is believed that synergistic interaction between oppositely charged surfactants (e.g. between a cationic surfactant and an anionic surfactant) favourably promotes heterocoagulation of the organic polymer latex particles with the primary capsule(s). When the oppositely charged surfactants present in each of the organic polymer latex particles dispersion and the primary capsules dispersion are mixed together (e.g. when both dispersions are mixed together), the opposite charges may attract and this may help to blend/integrate the organic polymer latex particles and the primary capsules so as to allow individual primary capsules to be sufficiently surrounded by the organic polymer latex particles. Therefore, the surfactants may be added to the dispersion of organic polymer latex particles and the dispersion of primary capsules before both dispersions are mixed together. Additional surfactants may also be added to impart extra stability to the hybrid capsules after they are formed e.g. after heterocoagulation. Each of the surfactants may independently be a cationic surfactant, for example the cationic surfactant may be one that is based on primary, secondary, or tertiary amines or quaternary ammonium cations, or the cationic surfactant cetyl trimethylammonium bromide (CTAB). Each of the surfactants may independently also be an anionic surfactant, for example the anionic surfactant may be one that", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Therefore, the method may also further comprise providing a surfactant to stabilize the organic polymer latex particles and a surfactant to stabilize the at least one primary capsule. These surfactants may be the same or different. In various embodiments, these surfactants are different. Accordingly, in various embodiments, the heterocoagulating step is carried out in the presence of at least two different surfactants. The surfactants may comprise charged surfactants. In various embodiments, the heterocoagulation is carried out in the presence of two different surfactants having charges that are opposite to each other. In various embodiments, the heterocoagulation is carried out in the presence of at least one cationic surfactant and at least one anionic surfactant. For example, in various embodiments, the charged surfactant that stabilises the primary capsule(s) has a charge that is opposite to that of the surfactant that is used to stabilize the organic polymer latex particles. Without being bound by theory, it is believed that synergistic interaction between oppositely charged surfactants (e.g. between a cationic surfactant and an anionic surfactant) favourably promotes heterocoagulation of the organic polymer latex particles with the primary capsule(s). When the oppositely charged surfactants present in each of the organic polymer latex particles dispersion and the primary capsules dispersion are mixed together (e.g. when both dispersions are mixed together), the opposite charges may attract and this may help to blend/integrate the organic polymer latex particles and the primary capsules so as to allow individual primary capsules to be sufficiently surrounded by the organic polymer latex particles. Therefore, the surfactants may be added to the dispersion of organic polymer latex particles and the dispersion of primary capsules before both dispersions are mixed together. Additional surfactants may also be added to impart extra stability to the hybrid capsules after they are formed e.g. after heterocoagulation. Each of the surfactants may independently be a cationic surfactant, for example the cationic surfactant may be one that is based on primary, secondary, or tertiary amines or quaternary ammonium cations, or the cationic surfactant cetyl trimethylammonium bromide (CTAB). Each of the surfactants may independently also be an anionic surfactant, for example the anionic surfactant may be one that" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.983893705364478, + "doc_id": "737790f84694da463c4e4d3993c94008679303cab61287cb8075e01a075ede8d", + "edit_distance": 0.02112676056338028, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999986030046576, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## A METHOD OF PREPARING A HYBRID CAPSULE AND RELATED PRODUCTS\n\n## TECHNICAL FIELD\n\nThe present disclosure relates broadly to a method of preparing a hybrid capsule as well as a hybrid capsule prepared by said method.\n\n## BACKGROUND\n\nCapsules, particularly those in the micron or submicron size, that are capable of encapsulating a variety of actives offer great promise in a large number of consumer applications, including but not limited to perfumes, coatings, medicines, agricultural chemicals, catalysts, printings, films, fibers and cosmetics.\n\nHowever, to date, the current technology used to produce such capsules suffers from several drawbacks. For example, available technology for producing flowable silica capsules for consumer care applications relies on the emulsification of an active in water using a neutral surfactant and growing silica shell around the micron sized droplet. Typically, the silica capsules obtained through such methods are easily breakable under mechanical stress and cannot withstand the high shear that is needed for many applications. Furthermore, the silica capsules obtained through such methods are also highly porous, making them unsuitable for applications where hermetic sealing is desired, for example in perfumes.\n\nAccordingly, attempts were made to produce reinforced capsules. Some of the techniques that aim to reinforce capsules include (i) layer by layer coating; (ii) grafting from the surface of capsules; (iii) infiltration of polymer electrolyte and cross linking; (iv) surface functionalization and polymerization; and (v) precipitation polymerization. However, these techniques are usually costly,", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## A METHOD OF PREPARING A HYBRID CAPSULE AND RELATED PRODUCTS\n\n## TECHNICAL FIELD\n\n## BACKGROUND\n\nThe present disclosure relates broadly to a method of preparing a hybrid capsule as well as a hybrid capsule prepared by said method.\n\nCapsules, particularly those in the micron or submicron size, that are capable of encapsulating a variety of actives offer great promise in a large number of consumer applications, including but not limited to perfumes, coatings, medicines, agricultural chemicals, catalysts, printings, films, fibers and cosmetics.\n\nHowever, to date, the current technology used to produce such capsules suffers from several drawbacks. For example, available technology for producing flowable silica capsules for consumer care applications relies on the emulsification of an active in water using a neutral surfactant and growing silica shell around the micron sized droplet. Typically, the silica capsules obtained through such methods are easily breakable under mechanical stress and cannot withstand the high shear that is needed for many applications. Furthermore, the silica capsules obtained through such methods are also highly porous, making them unsuitable for applications where hermetic sealing is desired, for example in perfumes.\n\nAccordingly, attempts were made to produce reinforced capsules. Some of the techniques that aim to reinforce capsules include (i) layer by layer coating; (ii) grafting from the surface of capsules; (iii) infiltration of polymer electrolyte and cross linking; (iv) surface functionalization and polymerization; and (v) precipitation polymerization. However, these techniques are usually costly," + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9902300038615953, + "doc_id": "edf8699ec0c9ec104badfc5e3c4fc675e04ec78e3350ccc4c6f2e7611bf5630c", + "edit_distance": 0.0058823529411764705, + "f1_score": 0.9874476987447699, + "meteor": 0.9944100176146524, + "precision": 0.9915966386554622, + "pred_md": "capsule is absent or minimal. The method may also have high scalability in the sense that the mixture can be scaled up to kilograms or even tons to produce a higher amount of the hybrid/composite capsules. Additionally, the method may have high reproducibility in the sense that the method may be performed reproducibly for no less than 5 times.\n\nIn various embodiments, the forming of the polymer layer/film over the primary capsule consist essentially of or consist of the heterocoagulation step. For example, the method does not comprise a plurality of (or multiple) deposition steps to repeatedly deposit polymer layers on the primary capsule to achieve a desired thickness of polymer layer over the primary capsule. In various embodiments, the method does not require additional deposition step(s) after the heterocoagulating step.\n\nThere is also provided a hybrid/composite capsule produced by the method disclosed herein. The hybrid/composite may therefore have one or more properties previously described.\n\nIn various embodiments, the hybrid/composite capsule comprises a primary capsule having a shell; and a polymer coating layer over the shell of the primary capsule. The hybrid/composite capsule produced by the method disclosed herein may comprise a hollow core or one or more actives/substances encapsulated by a hybrid/composite shell.\n\nIn various embodiments, the thickness of the hybrid/composite shell is from about 20 nm to about 1100 nm, from about 25 nm to about 1050 nm, from about 30 nm to about 1000 nm, from about 35 nm to about 950 nm, from about 40 nm to about 900 nm, or no less than about 20 nm, no less than about 25 nm, no less than about 30 nm, no less than about 35 nm or no less than about 40 nm.\n\nIn various embodiments, the hybrid/composite shell is substantially nonporous or hermetically sealed. The shell of the primary capsule may be", + "recall": 0.9833333333333333, + "true_md": "capsule is absent or minimal. The method may also have high scalability in the sense that the mixture can be scaled up to kilograms or even tons to produce a higher amount of the hybrid/composite capsules. Additionally, the method may have high reproducibility in the sense that the method may be performed reproducibly for no less than 5 times.\n\nIn various embodiments, the forming of the polymer layer/film over the primary capsule consist essentially of or consist of the heterocoagulation step. For example, the method does not comprise a plurality of (or multiple) deposition steps to repeatedly deposit polymer layers on the primary capsule to achieve a desired thickness of polymer layer over the primary capsule. In various embodiments, the method does not require additional deposition step(s) after the heterocoagulating step.\n\nThere is also provided a hybrid/composite capsule produced by the method disclosed herein. The hybrid/composite may therefore have one or more properties previously described.\n\nIn various embodiments, the hybrid/composite capsule comprises a primary capsule having a shell; and a polymer coating layer over the shell of the primary capsule. The hybrid/composite capsule produced by the method disclosed herein may comprise a hollow core or one or more actives/substances encapsulated by a hybrid/composite shell.\n\nIn various embodiments, the thickness of the hybrid/composite shell is from about 20 nm to about 1100 nm, from about 25 nm to about 1050 nm, from about 30 nm to about 1000 nm, from about 35 nm to about 950 nm, from about 40 nm to about 900 nm, or no less than about 20 nm, no less than about 25 nm, no less than about 30 nm, no less than about 35 nm or no less than about 40 nm.\n\nIn various embodiments, the hybrid/composite shell is substantially non- porous or hermetically sealed. The shell of the primary capsule may be" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9937452758863488, + "doc_id": "717832e8c3c991f48893df1c072cec86cda58caf9f6761324c237ba8618014d1", + "edit_distance": 0.14772727272727273, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9988097571323546, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "is selected from sodium dodecyl sulfate (SDS), carboxylic acid salt, sulfonic acid salt, phosphoric acid ester, alcohol sulfate, alkylbenzene sulfonate or combinations thereof.\n\nIn various embodiments, the concentration of the surfactant for stabilizing the organic polymer latex particles dispersion is similar to the surfactant concentration used in emulsion polymerization, optionally wherein the concentration of the surfactant is much higher than the critical micellar concentration and/or concentration of the primary capsule and is from about 0.25% to about 2.5%, from about 0.50% to about 2.25%, from about 0.75% to about 2%, from about 1% to about 1.75%, or about 0.25%, about 0.50%, about 0.75%, about 1%, about 1.25%, about 1.50%, about 1.75%, about 2%, about 2.25% or about 2.5% by weight of the polymer latex particles. The surfactant may be completely or partially removed prior to heterocoagulation.\n\nIn various embodiments, the concentration of the surfactant for stabilizing the primary capsules dispersion is from about 0.5 to about 2.5% by weight of the primary capsules while initially making primary capsules. However, free surfactant may be removed completely or partially e.g. by washing prior to heterocoagulation. Hence, in various embodiments, the concentration of the surfactant for stabilizing the primary capsules dispersion is from about 0.1 to about 2 % by weight during heterocoagulation.\n\nIn various embodiments, to reduce the likelihood of aggregation of differently charged surfactants, the method comprises using a substantially exact/accurate amount of surfactant needed by e.g. .theoretically calculating the surface area of the capsule b) removing extra surfactants e.g. by centrifugation, creaming or other approaches or c) using a neutral surfactant or a combination of the above.\n\nThe organic polymer latex particles may comprise at least one of synthetic latex, natural latex or combinations thereof. The polymer may be selected such", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "is selected from sodium dodecyl sulfate (SDS), carboxylic acid salt, sulfonic acid salt, phosphoric acid ester, alcohol sulfate, alkylbenzene sulfonate or combinations thereof.\n\nIn various embodiments, the concentration of the surfactant for stabilizing the organic polymer latex particles dispersion is similar to the surfactant concentration used in emulsion polymerization, optionally wherein the concentration of the surfactant is much higher than the critical micellar concentration and/or concentration of the primary capsule and is from about 0.25% to about 2.5%, from about 0.50% to about 2.25%, from about 0.75% to about 2%, from about 1% to about 1.75%, or about 0.25%, about 0.50%, about 0.75%, about 1%, about 1.25%, about 1.50%, about 1.75%, about 2%, about 2.25% or about 2.5% by weight of the polymer latex particles. The surfactant may be completely or partially removed prior to heterocoagulation.\n\nIn various embodiments, the concentration of the surfactant for stabilizing the primary capsules dispersion is from about 0.5 to about 2.5% by weight of the primary capsules while initially making primary capsules. However, free surfactant may be removed completely or partially e.g. by washing prior to heterocoagulation. Hence, in various embodiments, the concentration of the surfactant for stabilizing the primary capsules dispersion is from about 0.1 to about 2 % by weight during heterocoagulation.\n\nThe organic polymer latex particles may comprise at least one of synthetic latex, natural latex or combinations thereof. The polymer may be selected such\n\nIn various embodiments, to reduce the likelihood of aggregation of differently charged surfactants, the method comprises using a substantially exact/accurate amount of surfactant needed by e.g. .theoretically calculating the surface area of the capsule b) removing extra surfactants e.g. by centrifugation, creaming or other approaches or c) using a neutral surfactant or a combination of the above." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9895283225469969, + "doc_id": "a10401da9f23e572b161d456255cf3547ae2727475c82dcad6c460a1b6353ded", + "edit_distance": 0.02531645569620253, + "f1_score": 0.9781659388646288, + "meteor": 0.9827085749007131, + "precision": 0.9824561403508771, + "pred_md": "may not be required if an acid such as an acrylic acid is used as a monomer in the system.\n\n## Dynamic light scattering (DLS) of latex particles\n\nPNIPAM latex particles samples were prepared with varying concentrations of crosslinker (i.e. N,N'-methylenebis(acrylamide) (BIS)) and surfactant (i.e. sodium dodecyl sulfate (SDS)). A summary of the composition present (wt% based on the monomer latex particles) in the samples and their corresponding aggregation percentage (Aggr %) is provided in Table 1 below. The z-average particle size (DLS Z-Ave) and polydispersity index (PDI) results of the latex particles obtained from DLS experiments are also provided in Table 1. To test for reversibility in temperature response, the measurements were first taken at (i) a temperature of about 40°C, then at (ii) a temperature of about 20°C and finally (iii) at a temperature of about 40°C. As shown in Table 1, the average particle size recorded at temperature (iii) for the samples remains relatively similar to those recorded at temperature (i). Therefore, the temperature response was proven to be reversible.\n\nTable 1. Summary of composition and DLS results of PNIPAM samples synthesized for hetero-coagulation studies", + "recall": 0.9739130434782609, + "true_md": "may not be required if an acid such as an acrylic acid is used as a monomer in the system.\n\n## Dynamic light scattering (DLS) of latex particles\n\nPNIPAM latex particles samples were prepared with varying concentrations of crosslinker (i.e. N,N’-methylenebis(acrylamide) (BIS)) and surfactant (i.e. sodium dodecyl sulfate (SDS)). A summary of the composition present (wt% based on the monomer latex particles) in the samples and their corresponding aggregation percentage (Aggr %) is provided in Table 1 below. The z-average particle size (DLS Z-Ave) and polydispersity index (PDI) results of the latex particles obtained from DLS experiments are also provided in Table 1. To test for reversibility in temperature response, the measurements were first taken at (i) a temperature of about 40°C,then at (ii) a temperature of about 20°C and finally (iii) at a temperature of about 40°C.As shown in Table 1, the average particle size recorded at temperature (iii) for the samples remains relatively similar to those recorded at temperature (i). Therefore, the temperature response was proven to be reversible.\n\nTable 1. Summary of composition and DLS results of PNIPAM samples synthesized for hetero-coagulation studies" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "c93fb76b7a89f34a764fe2e01e698e2dbff35d38ffd0c7b81677e2e7ea2bb56f", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.999999989546779, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "not comprise stabilizing the droplet by pickering emulsion for the purpose of forming a shell directly on the template droplet. Additionally, in various embodiments, the template does not comprise a monomer or an initiator. In various embodiments, the template does not comprise an ionic liquid.\n\nIn various embodiments, the droplet comprises an oil droplet, an alkane droplet or combinations thereof. The droplet may comprise oil, silicone oil, hydrocarbon, alkane, pentane, hexane, dodecane, low-boiling alkane, organic solvent, non-polar solvent, low-boiling organic solvent, active including sensitive active (e.g. sensitive to free radical reactions), aroma, aroma oil, flavour, fragrance, perfume, drug, therapeutic, cosmetic, skin care substance, consumer care substance or combinations or mixtures or derivatives thereof.\n\nAccordingly, the method may further comprise a step of emulsifying one or more of the following to form the template: oil, silicone oil, hydrocarbon, alkane, pentane, hexane, dodecane, low-boiling alkane, organic solvent, non-polar solvent, low-boiling organic solvent, active including sensitive active (e.g. sensitive to free radical reactions), aroma, aroma oil, flavour, fragrance, perfume, drug, therapeutic, cosmetic, skin care substance, consumer care substance or combinations or mixtures or derivatives thereof.\n\nIn various embodiments, the method further comprises a step of providing/adding a surfactant to stabilize the template prior to the addition of a shell precursor e.g. one or more of a silica precursor, a zirconia precursor or a titania precursor. The surfactant may comprise one or more properties described herein.\n\nIn various embodiments, the method further comprises a step of evaporating the template from the at least one primary capsule to form a hollow capsule. The step of evaporating the template may comprise warming/heating the at least one primary capsule, optionally to a temperature that is close to the boiling point of the template. In various embodiments, evaporating the template", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "not comprise stabilizing the droplet by pickering emulsion for the purpose of forming a shell directly on the template droplet. Additionally, in various embodiments, the template does not comprise a monomer or an initiator. In various embodiments, the template does not comprise an ionic liquid.\n\nIn various embodiments, the droplet comprises an oil droplet, an alkane droplet or combinations thereof. The droplet may comprise oil, silicone oil, hydrocarbon, alkane, pentane, hexane, dodecane, low-boiling alkane, organic solvent, non-polar solvent, low-boiling organic solvent, active including sensitive active (e.g. sensitive to free radical reactions), aroma, aroma oil, flavour, fragrance, perfume, drug, therapeutic, cosmetic, skin care substance, consumer care substance or combinations or mixtures or derivatives thereof.\n\nAccordingly, the method may further comprise a step of emulsifying one or more of the following to form the template: oil, silicone oil, hydrocarbon, alkane, pentane, hexane, dodecane, low-boiling alkane, organic solvent, non-polar solvent, low-boiling organic solvent, active including sensitive active (e.g. sensitive to free radical reactions), aroma, aroma oil, flavour, fragrance, perfume, drug, therapeutic, cosmetic, skin care substance, consumer care substance or combinations or mixtures or derivatives thereof.\n\nIn various embodiments, the method further comprises a step of providing/adding a surfactant to stabilize the template prior to the addition of a shell precursor e.g. one or more of a silica precursor, a zirconia precursor or a titania precursor. The surfactant may comprise one or more properties described herein.\n\nIn various embodiments, the method further comprises a step of evaporating the template from the at least one primary capsule to form a hollow capsule. The step of evaporating the template may comprise warming/heating the at least one primary capsule, optionally to a temperature that is close to the boiling point of the template. In various embodiments, evaporating the template" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "c6b278aa67b8ec86325fa33c6af13723ef0d40f2418494fefba32fcd30a289b8", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999999271030763, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Embodiments of the disclosed methods also have high encapsulation efficiency since 20-30 wt% of actives in water can be emulsified and encapsulated in a primary capsule such as silica capsule with almost quantitative efficiency. Upon polymer coating, leakage of the encapsulated actives is substantially prevented and hence the efficiency is retained high.\n\nEven more advantageously, embodiments of the disclosed methods have high reproducibility (the inventors have performed embodiments of the method reproducibly for more than 5 times in lab scale ( 1 L total volume)).\n\nIt will be appreciated by a person skilled in the art that other variations and/or modifications may be made to the embodiments disclosed herein without departing from the spirit or scope of the disclosure as broadly described. For example, in the description herein, features of different example embodiments may be mixed, combined, interchanged, incorporated, adopted, modified, included etc. or the like across different example embodiments. The present embodiments are, therefore, to be considered in all respects to be illustrative and not restrictive.", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Embodiments of the disclosed methods also have high encapsulation efficiency since 20-30 wt% of actives in water can be emulsified and encapsulated in a primary capsule such as silica capsule with almost quantitative efficiency. Upon polymer coating, leakage of the encapsulated actives is substantially prevented and hence the efficiency is retained high.\n\nEven more advantageously, embodiments of the disclosed methods have high reproducibility (the inventors have performed embodiments of the method reproducibly for more than 5 times in lab scale (1 L total volume)).\n\nIt will be appreciated by a person skilled in the art that other variations and/or modifications may be made to the embodiments disclosed herein without departing from the spirit or scope of the disclosure as broadly described. For example, in the description herein, features of different example embodiments may be mixed, combined, interchanged, incorporated, adopted, modified, included etc. or the like across different example embodiments. The present embodiments are, therefore, to be considered in all respects to be illustrative and not restrictive." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8927615203845969, + "doc_id": "8b21ba6ea94edcb3abd71332295c9a69cbcbf64c3539c8cf8744627e035f5322", + "edit_distance": 0.06875, + "f1_score": 0.8739495798319328, + "meteor": 0.9612773753916699, + "precision": 0.8666666666666667, + "pred_md": "about 10.5, from about 2 to about 10, from about 2.5 to about 10, from about 3 to about 10, from about 3.5 to about 10, from about 4 to about 10, from about 2 to about 9.5, from about 2.5 to about 9.5, from about 3 to about 9.5, from about 3.5 to about 9.5, from about 4 to about 9.5, from about 2 to about 9, from about 2.5 to about 9, from about 3 to about 9, from about 3.5 to about 9, from about 4 to about 9.\n\nLikewise, in various embodiments, changing/adjusting/regulating a temperature of the mixture and/or curing the organic polymer latex particles in the mixture comprises raising the temperature of the mixture optionally by about 70°C, about 65°C, about 60°C, about 55°C, about 50°C, about 45°C, about 40°C, about 35°C or about 30°C. For example, the changing/adjusting/regulating a temperature of the mixture and/or curing the organic polymer latex particles in the mixture may comprise raising the temperature of the mixture from a first temperature of no less than about 10°C to a second temperature of no more than about 80°C, from a first temperature of no less than about 15°C to a second temperature of no more than about 80°C, from a first temperature of no less than about 20°C to a second temperature of no more than about 80°C, from a first temperature of no less than about 25°C to a second temperature of no more than about 80°C, from a first temperature of no less than about 30°C to a second temperature of no more than about 80°C, from a first temperature of no less than about 10°C to a second temperature of no more than about 75°C, from a first temperature of no less than about 15°C to a second temperature of no more than about 75°C, from a first temperature of no less than about 20°C to a second temperature of no more than about 75°C, from a first temperature of no less than about 25°C to a second temperature of no more than about 75°C, from a first temperature of no less than about 30°C to a second temperature of no more than about 75°C, from a first temperature of no less than about 10°C to a second temperature of no more than about 70°C, from a first temperature of no less than about 15°C to a second temperature of no more than about 70°C, from a first temperature of no less than about 20°C to a second temperature of no more than about 70°C, from a first temperature of no less than about 25°C to a second", + "recall": 0.8813559322033898, + "true_md": "about 10.5, from about 2 to about 10, from about 2.5 to about 10, from about 3 to about 10, from about 3.5 to about 10, from about 4 to about 10, from about 2 to about 9.5, from about 2.5 to about 9.5, from about 3 to about 9.5, from about 3.5 to about 9.5, from about 4 to about 9.5, from about 2 to about 9, from about 2.5 to about 9, from about 3 to about 9, from about 3.5 to about 9, from about 4 to about 9.\n\nLikewise, in various embodiments, changing/adjusting/regulating a temperature of the mixture and/or curing the organic polymer latex particles in the mixture comprises raising the temperature of the mixture optionally by about 70°C,about 65°C,about 60°C,about 55°C,about 50°C,about 45°C,about 40°C, about 35°Cor about 30°C.For example, the changing/adjusting/regulating a temperature of the mixture and/or curing the organic polymer latex particles in the mixture may comprise raising the temperature of the mixture from a first temperature of no less than about 10°Cto a second temperature of no more than about 80°C,from a first temperature of no less than about 15°Cto a second temperature of no more than about 80°C,from a first temperature of no less than about 20°Cto a second temperature of no more than about 80°C,from a first temperature of no less than about 25°Cto a second temperature of no more than about 80°C,from a first temperature of no less than about 30°Cto a second temperature of no more than about 80°C,from a first temperature of no less than about 10°Cto a second temperature of no more than about 75°C,from a first temperature of no less than about 15°Cto a second temperature of no more than about 75°C,from a first temperature of no less than about 20°Cto a second temperature of no more than about 75°C,from a first temperature of no less than about 25°Cto a second temperature of no more than about 75°C,from a first temperature of no less than about 30°Cto a second temperature of no more than about 75°C,from a first temperature of no less than about 10°Cto a second temperature of no more than about 70°C,from a first temperature of no less than about 15°Cto a second temperature of no more than about 70°C,from a first temperature of no less than about 20°Cto a second temperature of no more than about 70°C,from a first temperature of no less than about 25°Cto a second" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "12c38f48a5bf4c20a2d5d7beffea2ecbd5076166ba2ce4a9a127038a8ca07b45", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999999912383114, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "and primary capsules is/are substantially devoid of substances such as free radicals that react with the active and cause the active to undergo chemical transformation to an undesired form.\n\nIn various embodiments, providing a mixture (or suspension/dispersion) comprising the organic polymer latex particles and the at least one primary capsule is achieved by introducing the at least one primary capsule into a volume of the polymer latex particles prior to the heterocoagulating step. Accordingly, in various embodiments, the method further comprises a step of adding, in a controlled manner, the at least one primary capsule to the organic polymer latex particles prior to the providing step, not vice versa. In various embodiments, the method does not comprise a step of adding the organic polymer latex particles to the at least one primary capsule. For example, the primary capsules are added bit by bit into a pool of polymer latex particles instead of the other way around. Therefore, the step of adding the at least one primary capsule to the organic polymer latex particles may comprise adding a smaller volume of primary capsules to a larger volume of organic polymer latex particles. Without being bound by theory, it is believed that the manner of adding the primary capsule to the polymer latex particles may better allow for the primary capsule to be sufficiently surrounded by polymer latex particles so that the formation of the polymer coating layer may completely and continuously surround the shell of the primary capsule.\n\nThe method may further comprise a step of adding a second and subsequent primary capsules until the concentration of the primary capsules in the mixture reaches an appropriate range. Without being bound by theory, it is believed that if the concentration of the added primary capsules in the mixture is too high, the polymer latex particles may not sufficiently surround most if not all of the primary capsules to ensure that the subsequent formation of the polymer coating layer may completely and continuously surround the majority of each of the shells of the primary capsules. Accordingly, in various embodiments, the step of adding a second and subsequent primary capsules comprises adding a second", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "and primary capsules is/are substantially devoid of substances such as free radicals that react with the active and cause the active to undergo chemical transformation to an undesired form.\n\nIn various embodiments, providing a mixture (or suspension/dispersion) comprising the organic polymer latex particles and the at least one primary capsule is achieved by introducing the at least one primary capsule into a volume of the polymer latex particles prior to the heterocoagulating step. Accordingly, in various embodiments, the method further comprises a step of adding, in a controlled manner, the at least one primary capsule to the organic polymer latex particles prior to the providing step, not vice versa. In various embodiments, the method does not comprise a step of adding the organic polymer latex particles to the at least one primary capsule. For example, the primary capsules are added bit by bit into a pool of polymer latex particles instead of the other way around. Therefore, the step of adding the at least one primary capsule to the organic polymer latex particles may comprise adding a smaller volume of primary capsules to a larger volume of organic polymer latex particles. Without being bound by theory, it is believed that the manner of adding the primary capsule to the polymer latex particles may better allow for the primary capsule to be sufficiently surrounded by polymer latex particles so that the formation of the polymer coating layer may completely and continuously surround the shell of the primary capsule.\n\nThe method may further comprise a step of adding a second and subsequent primary capsules until the concentration of the primary capsules in the mixture reaches an appropriate range. Without being bound by theory, it is believed that if the concentration of the added primary capsules in the mixture is too high, the polymer latex particles may not sufficiently surround most if not all of the primary capsules to ensure that the subsequent formation of the polymer coating layer may completely and continuously surround the majority of each of the shells of the primary capsules. Accordingly, in various embodiments, the step of adding a second and subsequent primary capsules comprises adding a second" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9512695353921798, + "doc_id": "d555ddc26c696d1c70c74a59e3ae5b158a2599b2e84374c413825bbb620e7a59", + "edit_distance": 0.05410821643286573, + "f1_score": 0.945578231292517, + "meteor": 0.9474007812425219, + "precision": 0.9391891891891891, + "pred_md": "The term \"and/or\", e.g., \"X and/or Y\" is understood to mean either \"X and Y\" or \"X or Y\" and should be taken to provide explicit support for both meanings or for either meaning.\n\nFurther, in the description herein, the word 'substantially' whenever used is understood to include, but not restricted to, \"entirely\" or 'completely' and the like. In addition, terms such as \"comprising\", \"comprise\", and the like whenever used, are intended to be non-restricting descriptive language in that they broadly include elements/components recited after such terms, in addition to other components not explicitly recited. For example, when 'comprising' is used, reference to a 'one' feature is also intended to be a reference to 'at least one' of that feature. Terms such as 'consisting', 'consist', and the like, may in the appropriate context, be considered as a subset of terms such as \"comprising\", \"comprise\", and the like. Therefore, in embodiments disclosed herein using the terms such as \"comprising\", \"comprise\", and the like, it will be appreciated that these embodiments provide teaching for corresponding embodiments using terms such as 'consisting', 'consist', and the like. Further, terms such as \"about\", \"approximately\" and the like whenever used, typically means a reasonable variation, for example a variation of +/- 5% of the disclosed value, or a variance of 4% of the disclosed value, or a variance of 3% of the disclosed value, a variance of 2% of the disclosed value or a variance of 1% of the disclosed value.\n\nFurthermore, in the description herein, certain values may be disclosed in a range. The values showing the end points of a range are intended to illustrate a preferred range. Whenever a range has been described, it is intended that the range covers and teaches all possible sub-ranges as well as individual numerical values within that range. That is, the end points of a range should not be interpreted as inflexible limitations. For example, a description of a range of 1% to 5% is intended to have specifically disclosed sub-ranges 1% to 2%, 1% to 3%, 1% to 4%, 2% to 3% etc., as well as individually, values within that range such as 1%, 2%, 3%, 4% and 5%. The intention of the above specific disclosure is applicable to any depth/breadth of a range.", + "recall": 0.952054794520548, + "true_md": "The term \"and/or\", e.g., \"X and/or Y\" is understood to mean either \"X and Y\" or \"X or Y\" and should be taken to provide explicit support for both meanings or for either meaning.\n\nFurther, in the description herein, the word “substantially” whenever used is understood to include, but not restricted to, \"entirely\" or “completely” and the like. In addition, terms such as \"comprising\", \"comprise\", and the like whenever used, are intended to be non-restricting descriptive language in that they broadly include elements/components recited after such terms, in addition to other components not explicitly recited. For example, when “comprising” is used, reference to a “one” feature is also intended to be a reference to “atleast one”of that feature. Terms such as “consisting”, “consist”, and the like, may in the appropriate context, be considered as a subset of terms such as \"comprising\", \"comprise\", and the like. Therefore, in embodiments disclosed herein using the terms such as \"comprising\", \"comprise\", and the like, it will be appreciated that these embodiments provide teaching for corresponding embodiments using terms such as “consisting”, “consist”, and the like. Further, terms such as \"about\", \"approximately\" and the like whenever used, typically means a reasonable variation, for example a variation of +/- 5% of the disclosed value, or a variance of 4% of the disclosed value, or a variance of 3% of the disclosed value, a variance of 2% of the disclosed value or a variance of 1% of the disclosed value.\n\nFurthermore, in the description herein, certain values may be disclosed in a range. The values showing the end points of a range are intended to illustrate a preferred range. Whenever a range has been described, it is intended that the range covers and teaches all possible sub-ranges as well as individual numerical values within that range. That is, the end points of a range should not be interpreted as inflexible limitations. For example, a description of a range of 1% to 5% is intended to have specifically disclosed sub-ranges 1% to 2%, 1% to 3%, 1% to 4%, 2% to 3% etc., as well as individually, values within that range such as 1%, 2%, 3%, 4% and 5%. The intention of the above specific disclosure is applicable to any depth/breadth of a range." + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "b830e2c816039d03df81ec8203ef1857df7565203dc2bd8d4fbb484a19988515", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999999957500701, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "based on the modified logical representation.\n\n[0010] Continuing this example, the template might also define a second region on the canvas that is configured to present objects in a second visual representation (e.g. in a different color, format, or arrangement) based upon an associated logical representation. If an object is moved from the first region to the second region, the template or the region can modify the logical representation associated with the object and the object can be displayed in the second region based on the modified logical representation.\n\n[0011] Individual regions can also present objects contained therein in multiple different visual representations. For instance, a single region might present objects contained therein in a grid, list, table, or in another manner. The particular visual representation utilized by a template or region can be selected manually by a user or might be selected in other ways. For instance, the visual representation used by a region might be selected based upon the capabilities of a computing device. In this way, objects in a template or region can be presented differently on a computing device having a small display screen (e.g. a mobile phone) than when presented on a computing device having a larger display screen (e.g. a tablet, laptop, or desktop computing device).\n\n[0012] Objects contained within regions can also be sorted, filtered, arranged, projected, and otherwise operated on based on their associated logical representations. Templates and regions can also modify their size based upon the objects contained therein. For example, a template or region might change its size to accommodate an object moved from a region or the canvas.\n\n[0013] In some configurations, templates and regions can receive logical representations of objects from data sources. For example, a template or region might receive logical representations of objects corresponding to to-do list items from a connected data source. As discussed above, the logical representations might be modified, such as when moving a corresponding object between regions. When logical representations are modified in this way, the template or region can update the appropriate data source to reflect the modification. For instance, if an object is moved from a region containing objects for to-do items that have not been started to a region containing objects for completed to-do items, the logical representation associated with the object can be modified to indicate the completion, and a data source can be updated with the modified logical representation. Other views of the same data can then be updated based on the modified logical representation.\n\n[0014] In some embodiments, templates can define template and/or user-specific", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "based on the modified logical representation.\n\n[0010] Continuing this example, the template might also define a second region on the canvas that is configured to present objects in a second visual representation (e.g. in a different color, format, or arrangement) based upon an associated logical representation. If an object is moved from the first region to the second region, the template or the region can modify the logical representation associated with the object and the object can be displayed in the second region based on the modified logical representation.\n\n[0011] Individual regions can also present objects contained therein in multiple different visual representations. For instance, a single region might present objects contained therein in a grid, list, table, or in another manner. The particular visual representation utilized by a template or region can be selected manually by a user or might be selected in other ways. For instance, the visual representation used by a region might be selected based upon the capabilities of a computing device. In this way, objects in a template or region can be presented differently on a computing device having a small display screen (e.g. a mobile phone) than when presented on a computing device having a larger display screen (e.g. a tablet, laptop, or desktop computing device).\n\n[0012] Objects contained within regions can also be sorted, filtered, arranged, projected, and otherwise operated on based on their associated logical representations. Templates and regions can also modify their size based upon the objects contained therein. For example, a template or region might change its size to accommodate an object moved from a region or the canvas.\n\n[0013] In some configurations, templates and regions can receive logical representations of objects from data sources. For example, a template or region might receive logical representations of objects corresponding to to-do list items from a connected data source. As discussed above, the logical representations might be modified, such as when moving a corresponding object between regions. When logical representations are modified in this way, the template or region can update the appropriate data source to reflect the modification. For instance, if an object is moved from a region containing objects for to-do items that have not been started to a region containing objects for completed to-do items, the logical representation associated with the object can be modified to indicate the completion, and a data source can be updated with the modified logical representation. Other views of the same data can then be updated based on the modified logical representation.\n\n[0014] In some embodiments, templates can define template and/or user-specific" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9471690369526973, + "doc_id": "faa838796fadd4cf4ed868bc7fef6f8e4df993f0b2dbf25095c844b73998bbff", + "edit_distance": 0.7649880095923262, + "f1_score": 0.9943502824858755, + "meteor": 0.7133917779715072, + "precision": 0.9887640449438202, + "pred_md": "based on the logical representation associated with the object.\n\n- 6. A computer-implemented method, comprising:\n\npresenting a user interface (UI), the UI comprising a canvas having a first region, the first region configured to display an object in a first visual representation or a second visual representation based on a logical representation associated with the object, the logical representation being stored at a data source;\n\ndisplaying the object in the first visual representation in the first region based on the logical representation associated with the object;\n\ndetermining that the logical representation of the object has changed at the data source; and\n\nresponsive to determining the logical representation has changed at the data source, displaying the object in the second visual representation in the first region based on the changed logical representation associated with the object.\n\n- 7. The computer-implemented method of claim 6, further comprising:\n\nreceiving user input moving a second object into the first region; and\n\nresponsive to receiving the user input moving the second object into the first region, displaying the second object in the first visual representation in the first region based on a logical representation associated with the second object.\n\n- 8. The computer-implemented method of claim 6, wherein the first region is further configured to modify the first visual representation based upon one or more capabilities of the computing device.\n- 9. The computer-implemented method of claim 6, wherein the user interface further comprises a second region on the canvas, and wherein the method further comprises:\n\nreceiving user input moving the object from the first region to the second region; and\n\nresponsive to receiving the user input moving the object from the first region to the second region, displaying the object in the second region in a third visual representation based on the logical representation associated with the object.\n\n- 10. The computer-implemented method of claim 9, wherein the second region is further configured to initiate an action responsive to the user input for moving the object from the first region to the second region.\n- 11. A computer-readable storage medium having computer-executable instructions stored thereupon which, when executed by a processor, cause the processor to:\n\ndisplay a user interface (UI), the UI comprising a canvas having a first region, the", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "based on the logical representation associated with the object.\n\n11. A computer-readable storage medium having computer-executable instructions stored thereupon which, when executed by a processor, cause the processor to:\n\ndisplay a user interface (UI), the UI comprising a canvas having a first region, the\n\n10. The computer-implemented method of claim 9, wherein the second region is further configured to initiate an action responsive to the user input for moving the object from the first region to the second region.\n\nresponsive to receiving the user input moving the object from the first region to the second region, displaying the object in the second region in a third visual representation based on the logical representation associated with the object.\n\nand\n\n9. The computer-implemented method of claim 6, wherein the user interface further comprises a second region on the canvas, and wherein the method further comprises: receiving user input moving the object from the first region to the second region;\n\n8. The computer-implemented method of claim 6, wherein the first region is further configured to modify the first visual representation based upon one or more capabilities of the computing device.\n\nresponsive to determining the logical representation has changed at the data source, displaying the object in the second visual representation in the first region based on the changed logical representation associated with the object.\n\ndetermining that the logical representation of the object has changed at the data source; and\n\ndisplaying the object in the first visual representation in the first region based on the logical representation associated with the object;\n\n6. A computer-implemented method, comprising:\n\npresenting a user interface (UI), the UI comprising a canvas having a first region, the first region configured to display an object in a first visual representation or a second visual representation based on a logical representation associated with the object, the logical representation being stored at a data source;\n\n7. The computer-implemented method of claim 6, further comprising:\n\nreceiving user input moving a second object into the first region; and responsive to receiving the user input moving the second object into the first region,\n\ndisplaying the second object in the first visual representation in the first region based on a logical representation associated with the second object." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9878475997520066, + "doc_id": "c547147c274ef4d91478e2818854eb873afb8de57a30c080d05ea7a4d6bcc002", + "edit_distance": 0.006042296072507553, + "f1_score": 0.9927007299270073, + "meteor": 0.9942571905814785, + "precision": 0.9927007299270073, + "pred_md": "The method may also further comprise a step of concentrating the hybrid/composite capsules to obtain a desirable concentration of the hybrid/composite capsules, optionally in the form of a colloidal dispersion in water. In various embodiments, the concentrated hybrid/composite capsules remain substantially intact i.e. no leakages or breakages.\n\nThe method may further comprise a step of drying the hybrid/composite capsules, optionally by freeze drying or spray drying the hybrid/composite capsules with appropriate protecting agents or additives, to produce solid forms of the hybrid/composite capsules. In various embodiments, the dried hybrid/composite capsules remain substantially intact i.e. no leakages or breakages.\n\nThe method may further comprise a step of loading one or more of the following into the hybrid/composite capsules: oil, silicone oil, active including sensitive active (e.g. sensitive to free radical reactions), aroma, aroma oil, flavour, fragrance, perfume, drug, therapeutic, cosmetic, skin care substance, consumer care substance or combinations or mixtures or derivatives thereof.\n\nIn various embodiments, the steps following the step of adding the at least one primary capsule to the polymer latex particles and preceding the purifying step are conducted as a one-pot synthesis/one-step direct synthesis process to produce the hybrid/composite capsule.\n\nIn various embodiments, the method has high encapsulation efficiency, high scalability and/or high reproducibility. For example, embodiments of the method may have a high encapsulation efficiency in the sense that (i) no less than about 40%, no less than about 35%, no less than about 30% or about 2030% by weight of actives in the water/aqueous medium can be emulsified and encapsulated in the primary capsule and/or the hybrid/composite capsule with almost quantitative efficiency by use of embodiments of the method and/or (ii) leakage of the actives from the primary capsule and/or the hybrid/composite", + "recall": 0.9927007299270073, + "true_md": "The method may also further comprise a step of concentrating the hybrid/composite capsules to obtain a desirable concentration of the hybrid/composite capsules, optionally in the form of a colloidal dispersion in water. In various embodiments, the concentrated hybrid/composite capsules remain substantially intact i.e. no leakages or breakages.\n\nThe method may further comprise a step of drying the hybrid/composite capsules, optionally by freeze drying or spray drying the hybrid/composite capsules with appropriate protecting agents or additives, to produce solid forms of the hybrid/composite capsules. In various embodiments, the dried hybrid/composite capsules remain substantially intact i.e. no leakages or breakages.\n\nThe method may further comprise a step of loading one or more of the following into the hybrid/composite capsules: oil, silicone oil, active including sensitive active (e.g. sensitive to free radical reactions), aroma, aroma oil, flavour, fragrance, perfume, drug, therapeutic, cosmetic, skin care substance, consumer care substance or combinations or mixtures or derivatives thereof.\n\nIn various embodiments, the steps following the step of adding the at least one primary capsule to the polymer latex particles and preceding the purifying step are conducted as a one-pot synthesis/one-step direct synthesis process to produce the hybrid/composite capsule.\n\nIn various embodiments, the method has high encapsulation efficiency, high scalability and/or high reproducibility. For example, embodiments of the method may have a high encapsulation efficiency in the sense that (i) no less than about 40%, no less than about 35%, no less than about 30% or about 20- 30% by weight of actives in the water/aqueous medium can be emulsified and encapsulated in the primary capsule and/or the hybrid/composite capsule with almost quantitative efficiency by use of embodiments of the method and/or (ii) leakage of the actives from the primary capsule and/or the hybrid/composite" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9870427777157383, + "doc_id": "16aead0aba8825fe0965b2153b2dcc7ae447d214a8e397cb0075c42061876f10", + "edit_distance": 0.005813953488372093, + "f1_score": 0.9890909090909091, + "meteor": 0.9944750386782295, + "precision": 0.9927007299270073, + "pred_md": "and responsive to receiving the user input moving the object from the first region to the second region, display the object in the second region in a third visual representation based on the logical representation associated with the object.\n\n[00119] Clause 18. The computer-readable storage medium of any of clauses 1517, wherein the second region is further configured to initiate an action responsive to the user input for moving the object from the first region to the second region.\n\n[00120] Clause 19. The computer-readable storage medium of clauses 15-18, wherein the first region is further configured to receive the logical representations from a data source.\n\n[00121] Clause 20. The computer-readable storage medium of clauses 15-19, wherein the second region is configured to update the data source with a modified logical representation associated with the object responsive to the movement of the object from the first region to the second region.\n\n[00122] Based on the foregoing, it should be appreciated that technologies for providing dynamic whiteboard templates and regions have been disclosed herein. Although the subject matter presented herein has been described in language specific to computer structural features, methodological and transformative acts, specific computing machinery, and computer readable media, it is to be understood that the subject matter set forth in the appended claims is not necessarily limited to the specific features, acts, or media described herein. Rather, the specific features, acts and mediums are disclosed as example forms of implementing the claimed subject matter.\n\n[00123] The subject matter described above is provided by way of illustration only and should not be construed as limiting. Various modifications and changes can be made to the subject matter described herein without following the example configurations and applications illustrated and described, and without departing from the scope of the present disclosure, which is set forth in the following claims.", + "recall": 0.9855072463768116, + "true_md": "and responsive to receiving the user input moving the object from the first region to the second region, display the object in the second region in a third visual representation based on the logical representation associated with the object.\n\n[00119] Clause 18. The computer-readable storage medium of any of clauses 15- 17, wherein the second region is further configured to initiate an action responsive to the user input for moving the object from the first region to the second region.\n\n[00120] Clause 19. The computer-readable storage medium of clauses 15-18, wherein the first region is further configured to receive the logical representations from a data source.\n\n[00121] Clause 20. The computer-readable storage medium of clauses 15-19, wherein the second region is configured to update the data source with a modified logical representation associated with the object responsive to the movement of the object from the first region to the second region.\n\n[00122] Based on the foregoing, it should be appreciated that technologies for providing dynamic whiteboard templates and regions have been disclosed herein. Although the subject matter presented herein has been described in language specific to computer structural features, methodological and transformative acts, specific computing machinery, and computer readable media, it is to be understood that the subject matter set forth in the appended claims is not necessarily limited to the specific features, acts, or media described herein. Rather, the specific features, acts and mediums are disclosed as example forms of implementing the claimed subject matter.\n\n[00123] The subject matter described above is provided by way of illustration only and should not be construed as limiting. Various modifications and changes can be made to the subject matter described herein without following the example configurations and applications illustrated and described, and without departing from the scope of the present disclosure, which is set forth in the following claims." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9524753748904731, + "doc_id": "bcd1747f844a8e57351bf1ed5162a3a13654cc77c794f855017673ca7409960a", + "edit_distance": 0.028985507246376812, + "f1_score": 0.9696969696969697, + "meteor": 0.9747512949370349, + "precision": 0.9777777777777777, + "pred_md": "Silica capsules dispersion 20.0ml\\_ (10%w/w) was left to stand/allowed to cream in a sealed bottle over a day and then, the water dispersant was removed. The cream was then topped up with D.l. water and redispersed to the initial total volume of 20.0mL This process was repeated for another 2 cycles to remove free dissolved CTAB.\n\nThe washed silica capsules dispersion was then added slowly over 1 min into 20.0ml\\_ of PCL latex dispersion (5%w/w), which may be purchased or made using conventional techniques such as that described in 'Nano-emulsion formulation using spontaneous emulsification: solvent, oil and surfactant optimisation', Fessi, H. et al. Int. J. Pharm. 2004, 280(1 -2), 241 -251 ', the contents of which are fully incorporated by reference. The resulting mixture was then heated at 70°C for 10 min with stirring and cooled to room temperature. For this step, the pH of the latex solution is alkaline (around 8.5) and pH of the silica capsule solution is acidic (around 3.2). Therefore, it will be appreciated that the pH of the heterocoagulation step can fluctuate between about 3 to about 9.5. It was then filtered and dispersed in 20.0ml\\_ of D.l water.\n\nThe hybrid capsules were also purified using similar methods that were described in Example 4.\n\nScanning electron microscopy of (i) silica capsule and (ii) heterocoagulated silica capsules with polycaprolactone particles\n\nFIG. 10A shows the SEM image of original silica capsules. The silica capsules were fragile and break under vacuum conditions used for SEM imaging. Therefore, only broken films were observed.\n\nOn the other hand, the SEM image of hetero-coagulated silica capsules with polycaprolactone particles (FIG. 10B) shows that the hybrid capsule did not break. As shown, capsules with spherical morphology were observed under SEM", + "recall": 0.9617486338797814, + "true_md": "Silica capsules dispersion 20.0ml\\_ (10%w/w) was left to stand/allowed to cream in a sealed bottle over a day and then, the water dispersant was removed. The cream was then topped up with D.l. water and redispersed to the initial total volume of 20.0mL This process was repeated for another 2 cycles to remove free dissolved CTAB.\n\nThe washed silica capsules dispersion was then added slowly over 1 min into 20.0ml\\_ of PCL latex dispersion (5%w/w), which may be purchased or made using conventional techniques such as that described in “Nano-emulsion formulation using spontaneous emulsification: solvent, oil and surfactant optimisation”,Fessi, H. et al. Int. J. Pharm. 2004, 280(1 -2), 241 -251 ” , the contents of which are fully incorporated by reference. The resulting mixture was then heated at 70°Cfor 10 min with stirring and cooled to room temperature. For this step, the pH of the latex solution is alkaline (around 8.5) and pH of the silica capsule solution is acidic (around 3.2). Therefore, it will be appreciated that the pH of the heterocoagulation step can fluctuate between about 3 to about 9.5. It was then filtered and dispersed in 20.0ml\\_ of D.l water.\n\nThe hybrid capsules were also purified using similar methods that were described in Example 4.\n\n## Scanning electron microscopy of (i) silica capsule and (ii) hetero- coagulated silica capsules with polycaprolactone particles\n\nFIG. 10A shows the SEM image of original silica capsules. The silica capsules were fragile and break under vacuum conditions used for SEM imaging. Therefore, only broken films were observed.\n\nOn the other hand, the SEM image of hetero-coagulated silica capsules with polycaprolactone particles (FIG. 10B) shows that the hybrid capsule did not break. As shown, capsules with spherical morphology were observed under SEM" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "a326739490028863f42664ff2603e562b835d101fa61e82433c74b4fbc4fec3c", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999999901289164, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "While in various embodiments, the method relies on the use of preformed organic polymer latex particles and primary capsules, it will also be appreciated that optional steps to prepare the polymer latex particles and primary capsules may also be incorporated in various embodiments of the method. For example, prior to step 102, the method may optionally comprise step 110 for synthesizing the primary capsule and may also optionally comprise step 112 for synthesizing the organic polymer latex particles. The dotted lines of boxes containing steps 110 and 112 emphasise that these steps may be absent in some embodiments of the present disclosure as the primary capsule(s) and/or organic polymer latex particles may be preformed or purchased/obtained commercially. For example, preformed silica capsules may be used as the primary capsule(s) and preformed (responsive) polymer latex may be used as the organic polymer latex.\n\nFIG. 2 is a schematic diagram 200 for illustrating a method of preparing a hybrid capsule in accordance with various embodiments disclosed herein. A primary capsule 202 is introduced into a volume of organic polymer latex particles 204a, 204b and 204c, collectively known as organic polymer latex 204 as shown by arrow 203 to form a suspension/dispersion/mixture 206. The organic polymer latex particles 204a, 204b and 204c then undergo heterocoagulation as shown by arrow 205 and physical curing as shown by arrow 207 to form an organic polymer coating layer 208 over a shell of the primary capsule 202, thereby forming a hybrid capsule 2 10. In other words, in various embodiments, the steps may include resuspension/dispersion of the polymer latex particles with the primary capsule followed by heterocoagulation such that fusion of the organic polymer latex particles will occur thereby forming film around the shell of the primary capsule. Thereafter, post processing steps such as purification and concentration of the capsules may take place. It will be appreciated that although not shown in the figure, the interior/core of the primary capsule 202 may be empty or may be filled/loaded with cargo such as active molecules.", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "While in various embodiments, the method relies on the use of preformed organic polymer latex particles and primary capsules, it will also be appreciated that optional steps to prepare the polymer latex particles and primary capsules may also be incorporated in various embodiments of the method. For example, prior to step 102, the method may optionally comprise step 110 for synthesizing the primary capsule and may also optionally comprise step 112 for synthesizing the organic polymer latex particles. The dotted lines of boxes containing steps 110 and 112 emphasise that these steps may be absent in some embodiments of the present disclosure as the primary capsule(s) and/or organic polymer latex particles may be preformed or purchased/obtained commercially. For example, preformed silica capsules may be used as the primary capsule(s) and preformed (responsive) polymer latex may be used as the organic polymer latex.\n\nFIG. 2 is a schematic diagram 200 for illustrating a method of preparing a hybrid capsule in accordance with various embodiments disclosed herein. A primary capsule 202 is introduced into a volume of organic polymer latex particles 204a, 204b and 204c, collectively known as organic polymer latex 204 as shown by arrow 203 to form a suspension/dispersion/mixture 206. The organic polymer latex particles 204a, 204b and 204c then undergo heterocoagulation as shown by arrow 205 and physical curing as shown by arrow 207 to form an organic polymer coating layer 208 over a shell of the primary capsule 202, thereby forming a hybrid capsule 2 10. In other words, in various embodiments, the steps may include resuspension/dispersion of the polymer latex particles with the primary capsule followed by heterocoagulation such that fusion of the organic polymer latex particles will occur thereby forming film around the shell of the primary capsule. Thereafter, post processing steps such as purification and concentration of the capsules may take place. It will be appreciated that although not shown in the figure, the interior/core of the primary capsule 202 may be empty or may be filled/loaded with cargo such as active molecules." + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "c61500b8debd39b58fc5d5ddb3069c39542028dd9091c3eb3fc87cc790fc6757", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999999848833726, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of a hybrid capsule in accordance with various embodiments disclosed herein. The hybrid capsule 300 comprises a primary capsule having a shell 302 encapsulating an empty or a loaded/filled core 304 and an organic polymer coating layer 306. In this example, the hybrid capsule has a size/diameter/particle size/particle size distribution/average particle size in the range of from about 5 pm to about 50 pm.\n\n## Example 2: Primary Capsule(s)\n\nPrior to the synthesis of hybrid capsules/polymer reinforced structures, primary capsules stabilised by a surfactant were synthesized. In this example, the primary capsules synthesized were silica hollow microspheres stabilised by cetyltrimethylammonium bromide (CTAB) as the surfactant.\n\n36.4mg of CTAB was dissolved in 100ml\\_ of deionised (Dl) water in a 250ml\\_ reaction vessel. The solution was stirred at 600rpm for thirty minutes to ensure that all of the surfactant was dissolved. 10ml\\_ of n-pentane was injected into the solution and was stirred for thirty minutes at 600rpm. Before the addition of TEOS, light microscopy was taken to ensure that the particles have an average particle size of 30pm. 4ml\\_ of TEOS was added via a programmed syringe pump at 80pl\\_/min to the solution. After the addition of TEOS was completed, the stirring speed was lowered to 400rpm. A sample of the solution was taken for analysis using brightfield microscopy. Microscopic images were recorded for four days. SEM analysis was done on day 4. The resultant silica capsules were post processed for other applications.\n\n## Example 3: Organic Polymer Latex Particles\n\nPrior to performing heterocoagulation of organic polymer latex particles with primary capsule(s), organic polymer latex particles were synthesized using emulsion polymerization. In this example, the organic polymer latex particles", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of a hybrid capsule in accordance with various embodiments disclosed herein. The hybrid capsule 300 comprises a primary capsule having a shell 302 encapsulating an empty or a loaded/filled core 304 and an organic polymer coating layer 306. In this example, the hybrid capsule has a size/diameter/particle size/particle size distribution/average particle size in the range of from about 5 pm to about 50 pm.\n\n## Example 2: Primary Capsule(s)\n\nPrior to the synthesis of hybrid capsules/polymer reinforced structures, primary capsules stabilised by a surfactant were synthesized. In this example, the primary capsules synthesized were silica hollow microspheres stabilised by cetyltrimethylammonium bromide (CTAB) as the surfactant.\n\n36.4mg of CTAB was dissolved in 100ml\\_ of deionised (Dl) water in a 250ml\\_ reaction vessel. The solution was stirred at 600rpm for thirty minutes to ensure that all of the surfactant was dissolved. 10ml\\_ of n-pentane was injected into the solution and was stirred for thirty minutes at 600rpm. Before the addition of TEOS, light microscopy was taken to ensure that the particles have an average particle size of 30pm. 4ml\\_ of TEOS was added via a programmed syringe pump at 80pl\\_/min to the solution. After the addition of TEOS was completed, the stirring speed was lowered to 400rpm. A sample of the solution was taken for analysis using brightfield microscopy. Microscopic images were recorded for four days. SEM analysis was done on day 4. The resultant silica capsules were post processed for other applications.\n\n## Example 3: Organic Polymer Latex Particles\n\nPrior to performing heterocoagulation of organic polymer latex particles with primary capsule(s), organic polymer latex particles were synthesized using emulsion polymerization. In this example, the organic polymer latex particles" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "57b33e2bf3b53c00bdaee0df149eb5c9834bad57bbe3e23856acb2a90af152a8", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999999828873268, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "conditions, which is indicative of the robustness and stability of the hybrid capsule.\n\nThe examples above demonstrate the successful synthesis of a hybrid capsule by heterocoagulating organic polymer latex particles with a primary capsule. The examples also show that stability of the capsules is enhanced by having an additional layer of polymer around the micron sized capsules such as silica capsules. The results therefore show that the common drawbacks of micron sized capsules (such as capsule breakability and porosity etc.) can be addressed by embodiments of the method disclosed herein.\n\n## APPLICATIONS\n\nEmbodiments disclosed herein provide a method that involves applying a heterocoagulation approach and creating a polymer film to impart stability to primary capsules such as silica capsules with actives (which normally have lot of instability issues such as capsule breakability, settling or creaming in water depending on the density of the active).\n\nThe inventors have surprisingly found out that desirable capsules may be produced via a simple heterocoagulation approach to obtain a film of polymer on a shell of a primary capsule such as a silica shell without using any chemical modification, notwithstanding that the primary capsule used may be considered one that is originally unstable (e.g. fragile inorganic capsules such as silica capsules). This is surprising as there was no prior knowledge or indication that such a film coating is possible on a primary capsule surface to reinforce a primary capsule shell, without breaking the micron or submicron sized primary capsule.\n\nEmbodiments of the method are capable of producing hollow capsules (contrast with solid nanoparticles) that are biocompatible, degradable, environmentally benign, chemically and physically stable. For example, hybrid capsules produced by embodiments of the methods disclosed herein are", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "conditions, which is indicative of the robustness and stability of the hybrid capsule.\n\nThe examples above demonstrate the successful synthesis of a hybrid capsule by heterocoagulating organic polymer latex particles with a primary capsule. The examples also show that stability of the capsules is enhanced by having an additional layer of polymer around the micron sized capsules such as silica capsules. The results therefore show that the common drawbacks of micron sized capsules (such as capsule breakability and porosity etc.) can be addressed by embodiments of the method disclosed herein.\n\n## APPLICATIONS\n\nEmbodiments disclosed herein provide a method that involves applying a heterocoagulation approach and creating a polymer film to impart stability to primary capsules such as silica capsules with actives (which normally have lot of instability issues such as capsule breakability, settling or creaming in water depending on the density of the active).\n\nThe inventors have surprisingly found out that desirable capsules may be produced via a simple heterocoagulation approach to obtain a film of polymer on a shell of a primary capsule such as a silica shell without using any chemical modification, notwithstanding that the primary capsule used may be considered one that is originally unstable (e.g. fragile inorganic capsules such as silica capsules). This is surprising as there was no prior knowledge or indication that such a film coating is possible on a primary capsule surface to reinforce a primary capsule shell, without breaking the micron or submicron sized primary capsule.\n\nEmbodiments of the method are capable of producing hollow capsules (contrast with solid nanoparticles) that are biocompatible, degradable, environmentally benign, chemically and physically stable. For example, hybrid capsules produced by embodiments of the methods disclosed herein are" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9288575480924927, + "doc_id": "a00c894d80264289eedd6a2d903d15299e4bdc16116a485b73d7fce3fd03fe1a", + "edit_distance": 0.042435424354243544, + "f1_score": 0.9659442724458206, + "meteor": 0.9591339977626389, + "precision": 0.968944099378882, + "pred_md": "the example shown in FIGS. 8A-8E, the template 116 provides functionality for planning a meeting and keeping track of action items during the meeting. In order to provide this functionality, the template 116 includes three regions 118J, 118K, and 118L. The region 118J contains an object 120 representing a title for the meeting, the region 118K contains objects 120 representing agenda items for the meeting, and the region 118L contains objects 120 representing action items identified during the meeting.\n\n[0069] In the illustrated example, and as shown in FIG. 8B, a user has created a digital ink object 302B' identifying the title of the meeting ('Pitch Planning'). The region 118J stores data in the logical representation 202 associated with the digital ink object 302B' indicating that it is a meeting title. The digital ink object 302B' is converted to text and the logical representation for the digital ink object 302B' is again updated with the text title of the meeting.\n\n[0070] Continuing the example from FIGS. 8A and 8B, a user has created digital ink objects 302B' and 302B'' representing agenda items for the 'Pitch Planning' meeting in FIG> 8C. In response thereto, the region 118K has added data to the logical representations 202 associated with these objects indicating that they are agenda items. Additionally, the digital ink is converted to text and the converted text is added to the logical representations 202 associated with the objects. In this way, the digital ink objects 302B' and 302B'' are annotated with semantic data indicating the type of item they are and the text associated with the item.\n\n[0071] In FIG. 8D, the user has created a note object 302C in the manner described above. The user has also added text to the note object 302C identifying a user ('@Steve') and indicating an action item ('edit document') that the user is to complete. The logical representation of the note object 302C is then updated with this information.\n\n[0072] Subsequently, the user has dragged the note object 302C onto the region 118L. In response thereto, the region 118L identifies the user and the action item and updates the logical representation 202 to indicate that the object is an action item indicating that @Steve is to edit a document. The region 118L can then render this data to show a corresponding action item 802 in the region 812L.\n\n[0073] As described above, objects 120 in a template 116 or region 118 can be presented differently on a computing device 102A having a small display screen (e.g. a mobile phone) than when presented on a computing device 102 having a larger display screen (e.g. a tablet, laptop, or desktop computing device). The particular visual representation 206 selected for presenting a particular template 116 or region 118 might", + "recall": 0.9629629629629629, + "true_md": "the example shown in FIGS. 8A-8E, the template 116 provides functionality for planning a meeting and keeping track of action items during the meeting. In order to provide this functionality, the template 116 includes three regions 118J, 118K, and 118L. The region 118J contains an object 120 representing a title for the meeting, the region 118K contains objects 120 representing agenda items for the meeting, and the region 118L contains objects 120 representing action items identified during the meeting.\n\n[0069] In the illustrated example, and as shown in FIG. 8B, a user has created a digital ink object 302B’identifying the title of the meeting (“PitchPlanning”).The region 118J stores data in the logical representation 202 associated with the digital ink object 302B’ indicating that it is a meeting title. The digital ink object 302B’is converted to text and the logical representation for the digital ink object 302B’is again updated with the text title of the meeting.\n\n[0070] Continuing the example from FIGS. 8A and 8B, a user has created digital ink objects 302B”and 302B’” representing agenda items for the “PitchPlanning”meeting in FIG> 8C. In response thereto, the region 118K has added data to the logical representations 202 associated with these objects indicating that they are agenda items. Additionally, the digital ink is converted to text and the converted text is added to the logical representations 202 associated with the objects. In this way, the digital ink objects 302B” and 302B’” are annotated with semantic data indicating the type of item they are and the text associated with the item.\n\n[0071] In FIG. 8D, the user has created a note object 302C in the manner described above. The user has also added text to the note object 302C identifying a user (“@Steve”) and indicating an action item (“editdocument”)that the user is to complete. The logical representation of the note object 302C is then updated with this information.\n\n[0072] Subsequently, the user has dragged the note object 302C onto the region 118L. In response thereto, the region 118L identifies the user and the action item and updates the logical representation 202 to indicate that the object is an action item indicating that @Steve is to edit a document. The region 118L can then render this data to show a corresponding action item 802 in the region 812L.\n\n[0073] As described above, objects 120 in a template 116 or region 118 can be presented differently on a computing device 102A having a small display screen (e.g. a mobile phone) than when presented on a computing device 102 having a larger display screen (e.g. a tablet, laptop, or desktop computing device). The particular visual representation 206 selected for presenting a particular template 116 or region 118 might" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.961028524093093, + "doc_id": "f87a2bebda6967f11f87b66d96cc5756c710fdf366788b3d33bb0d8340b718b7", + "edit_distance": 0.038461538461538464, + "f1_score": 0.9649999999999999, + "meteor": 0.96263029264536, + "precision": 0.9601990049751243, + "pred_md": "generated (at operation 1014) and transmitted in an email message in the manner described above. From operation 1014, the routine 1000 proceeds to operation 1016, where it ends.\n\n[0089] FIG. 11is a computer architecture diagram showing an illustrative computer hardware and software architecture for a computing device that can implement the various technologies presented herein. In particular, the architecture illustrated in FIG. 11 can be utilized to implement the computing device 102 described herein. The illustrated architecture can also be utilized to implement other types of computing systems.\n\n[0090] The computer 1100 illustrated in FIG. 11 includes a central processing unit 1102 ('CPU'), a system memory 1104, including a random-access memory 1106 ('RAM') and a read-only memory ('ROM') 1108, and a system bus 1110 that couples the memory 1104 to the CPU 1102. A basic input/output system ('BIOS' or 'firmware') containing the basic routines that help to transfer information between elements within the computer 1100, such as during startup, can be stored in the ROM 1108. The computer 1100 further includes a mass storage device 1112 for storing an operating system 1122, application programs such as the whiteboard application 104, and other types of programs. The functionality described above for providing dynamic whiteboard templates and regions is implemented by one or more of these programs in various configurations. The mass storage device 1112 can also be configured to store other types of programs and data.\n\n[0091] The mass storage device 1112 is connected to the CPU 1102 through a mass storage controller (not shown) connected to the bus 1110. The mass storage device 1112 and its associated computer readable media provide non-volatile storage for the computer 1100. Although the description of computer readable media contained herein refers to a mass storage device, such as a hard disk, CD-ROM drive, DVD-ROM drive, or USB storage key, it should be appreciated by those skilled in the art that computer readable media can be any available computer storage media or communication media that can be accessed by the computer 1100.\n\n[0092] Communication media includes computer readable instructions, data structures, program modules, or other data in a modulated data signal such as a carrier wave or other transport mechanism and includes any delivery media. The term 'modulated data signal' means a signal that has one or more of its characteristics changed or set in a manner so as to encode information in the signal. By way of example, and not limitation, communication media includes wired media such as a wired network or direct-wired connection, and wireless media such as acoustic, radio frequency, infrared and other wireless media. Combinations of the any of the above should also be included within the", + "recall": 0.9698492462311558, + "true_md": "generated (at operation 1014) and transmitted in an email message in the manner described above. From operation 1014, the routine 1000 proceeds to operation 1016, where it ends.\n\n[0089] FIG. 11 is a computer architecture diagram showing an illustrative computer hardware and software architecture for a computing device that can implement the various technologies presented herein. In particular, the architecture illustrated in FIG. 11 can be utilized to implement the computing device 102 described herein. The illustrated architecture can also be utilized to implement other types of computing systems.\n\n[0090] The computer 1100 illustrated in FIG. 11 includes a central processing unit 1102 (“CPU”), a system memory 1104, including a random-access memory 1106 (“RAM”) and a read-only memory (“ROM”) 1108, and a system bus 1110 that couples the memory 1104 to the CPU 1102. A basic input/output system (“BIOS” or “firmware”) containing the basic routines that help to transfer information between elements within the computer 1100, such as during startup, can be stored in the ROM 1108. The computer 1100 further includes a mass storage device 1112 for storing an operating system 1122, application programs such as the whiteboard application 104, and other types of programs. The functionality described above for providing dynamic whiteboard templates and regions is implemented by one or more of these programs in various configurations. The mass storage device 1112 can also be configured to store other types of programs and data.\n\n[0091] The mass storage device 1112 is connected to the CPU 1102 through a mass storage controller (not shown) connected to the bus 1110. The mass storage device 1112 and its associated computer readable media provide non-volatile storage for the computer 1100. Although the description of computer readable media contained herein refers to a mass storage device, such as a hard disk, CD-ROM drive, DVD-ROM drive, or USB storage key, it should be appreciated by those skilled in the art that computer readable media can be any available computer storage media or communication media that can be accessed by the computer 1100.\n\n[0092] Communication media includes computer readable instructions, data structures, program modules, or other data in a modulated data signal such as a carrier wave or other transport mechanism and includes any delivery media. The term “modulateddata signal”means a signal that has one or more of its characteristics changed or set in a manner so as to encode information in the signal. By way of example, and not limitation, communication media includes wired media such as a wired network or direct-wired connection, and wireless media such as acoustic, radio frequency, infrared and other wireless media. Combinations of the any of the above should also be included within the" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "19ce3404b6b8601c942943d4a5f01aa2833b17abdd156908c23cd80197373068", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999999905939676, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Furthermore, embodiments of the disclosed methods do not involve the more complex and less scalable steps of stabilization of droplets by pickering emulsion and then subsequently growing shell on the pickering stabilized emulsion to obtain hollow structures. Instead, embodiments of the disclosed methods involve creating a primary inner core such as an inorganic inner core, for example, a silica inner core, then producing a pickering emulsion using polymer particles, and then curing it on the surface to create a polymer shell, thus obtaining a hybrid capsule by simple steps.\n\nAs compared to known methods that involve in situ polymerization (which can be sort of classified as precipitation polymerization), embodiments of the disclosed method are able to use preformed commercially available functional polymers. As such, embodiments of the disclosed method are able to separate a polymer coating incorporation step from a primary capsule shell (e.g. silica) formation step, thus having more versatility and do not suffer from the shortcomings of an active reacting with the functional polymer. If desired, embodiments of the methods disclosed herein may optionally involve a polymerization step that is done separate in water to form latex particles which are adsorbed onto and cured to form a polymer shell around existing primary capsule shell such as silica shell. This allows a sufficiently distinct polymer layer around a first primary capsule shell such as a first silica shell to be formed and no cross-linking (chemical reaction) is involved in creating a second polymer shell/coating and hence only a physical approach is used for shell formation.\n\nAdvantageously, embodiments of the disclosed methods are capable of preparing an active loaded primary capsule e.g. silica capsule (as opposed to hard solid particle) whilst forming substantially uniform coating around the surface e.g. a silica surface using polymer latex particles (e.g. a reinforced silica shell by physical deposition of preformed polymeric nanoparticles on micron sized silica particles may be obtained). Accordingly, embodiments of the methods disclosed herein are capable of producing capsules with potentially higher stability to high shear compared to capsules in the art.", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Furthermore, embodiments of the disclosed methods do not involve the more complex and less scalable steps of stabilization of droplets by pickering emulsion and then subsequently growing shell on the pickering stabilized emulsion to obtain hollow structures. Instead, embodiments of the disclosed methods involve creating a primary inner core such as an inorganic inner core, for example, a silica inner core, then producing a pickering emulsion using polymer particles, and then curing it on the surface to create a polymer shell, thus obtaining a hybrid capsule by simple steps.\n\nAs compared to known methods that involve in situ polymerization (which can be sort of classified as precipitation polymerization), embodiments of the disclosed method are able to use preformed commercially available functional polymers. As such, embodiments of the disclosed method are able to separate a polymer coating incorporation step from a primary capsule shell (e.g. silica) formation step, thus having more versatility and do not suffer from the shortcomings of an active reacting with the functional polymer. If desired, embodiments of the methods disclosed herein may optionally involve a polymerization step that is done separate in water to form latex particles which are adsorbed onto and cured to form a polymer shell around existing primary capsule shell such as silica shell. This allows a sufficiently distinct polymer layer around a first primary capsule shell such as a first silica shell to be formed and no cross-linking (chemical reaction) is involved in creating a second polymer shell/coating and hence only a physical approach is used for shell formation.\n\nAdvantageously, embodiments of the disclosed methods are capable of preparing an active loaded primary capsule e.g. silica capsule (as opposed to hard solid particle) whilst forming substantially uniform coating around the surface e.g. a silica surface using polymer latex particles (e.g. a reinforced silica shell by physical deposition of preformed polymeric nanoparticles on micron sized silica particles may be obtained). Accordingly, embodiments of the methods disclosed herein are capable of producing capsules with potentially higher stability to high shear compared to capsules in the art." + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "842f05fae71ad60668b8526094d5b6974b7e4bceef2c3c07acd6a0709287503c", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999999902872729, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "inorganic shell in some examples) is obtained. The adsorption, coalescence and/or interpenetration/inter diffusion may result in the pores of the shell of the primary capsule being substantially or fully blocked or result in the shell being substantially or fully hermetically sealed. The adsorption, coalescence and/or interpenetration/inter diffusion may also result in the organic polymer latex particles losing their substantially spherical structure. In various embodiments, the heterocoagulating step comprises physical changes to the organic polymer latex particles but does not comprise chemical changes to the organic polymer latex particles.\n\nIn various embodiments, the heterocoagulating step to form a polymer coating layer over a shell of the primary capsule is substantially devoid of a polymerization reaction. Accordingly, in various embodiments, the heterocoagulating step is devoid of the use of monomers or the participation of monomers in a polymerization reaction to form a polymer over the shell of the primary capsule. On the contrary, in various embodiments, preformed polymers instead of monomers are used. In embodiments of the method, the polymers are also responsive and/or degradable. Advantageously, embodiments of the methods disclosed herein are simple and straightforward (due to the use of preformed polymers) as compared to methods which require polymerization of monomers to form a polymer coating layer. Furthermore, as the coating reinforcement is carried out using physical or non-chemical methods (c.f. with polymerization) in embodiments of the methods disclosed herein, the inorganic capsules are not unnecessarily subjected to harsh chemical conditions which may compromise their integrity (for example, the capsules may collapse or break), potentially leading to leakages of any cargoes/actives contained in the capsules (e.g. the primary capsules). In various embodiments, the heterocoagulating step and/or the entire method is carried out in the absence of an organic solvent or medium. In various embodiments, the heterocoagulating step and/or the entire method is carried out using an aqueous medium such as water, optionally distilled water, as the primary medium. Advantageously, embodiments of the methods disclosed herein are safe and non-toxic to the", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "inorganic shell in some examples) is obtained. The adsorption, coalescence and/or interpenetration/inter diffusion may result in the pores of the shell of the primary capsule being substantially or fully blocked or result in the shell being substantially or fully hermetically sealed. The adsorption, coalescence and/or interpenetration/inter diffusion may also result in the organic polymer latex particles losing their substantially spherical structure. In various embodiments, the heterocoagulating step comprises physical changes to the organic polymer latex particles but does not comprise chemical changes to the organic polymer latex particles.\n\nIn various embodiments, the heterocoagulating step to form a polymer coating layer over a shell of the primary capsule is substantially devoid of a polymerization reaction. Accordingly, in various embodiments, the heterocoagulating step is devoid of the use of monomers or the participation of monomers in a polymerization reaction to form a polymer over the shell of the primary capsule. On the contrary, in various embodiments, preformed polymers instead of monomers are used. In embodiments of the method, the polymers are also responsive and/or degradable. Advantageously, embodiments of the methods disclosed herein are simple and straightforward (due to the use of preformed polymers) as compared to methods which require polymerization of monomers to form a polymer coating layer. Furthermore, as the coating reinforcement is carried out using physical or non-chemical methods (c.f. with polymerization) in embodiments of the methods disclosed herein, the inorganic capsules are not unnecessarily subjected to harsh chemical conditions which may compromise their integrity (for example, the capsules may collapse or break), potentially leading to leakages of any cargoes/actives contained in the capsules (e.g. the primary capsules). In various embodiments, the heterocoagulating step and/or the entire method is carried out in the absence of an organic solvent or medium. In various embodiments, the heterocoagulating step and/or the entire method is carried out using an aqueous medium such as water, optionally distilled water, as the primary medium. Advantageously, embodiments of the methods disclosed herein are safe and non-toxic to the" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9887546992121774, + "doc_id": "703e5b49648883ae2c788a7f3049b7a65cc6f6227475b459157fdef3a61843ba", + "edit_distance": 0.006493506493506494, + "f1_score": 0.9966996699669968, + "meteor": 0.9941519079967106, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "This process was repeated 2-3 times to get pure heterocoagulated capsules with no free silica capsule or latex articles. Most of the personal care actives and perfume capsules are lower density and hence this method of creaming may work better for such lower density capsules.\n\nFor capsules that are denser than water, the capsules could be allowed to settle, and a similar procedure could be adopted by removing the top layer and repeating the washing steps.\n\nDark field microscopy of (i) silica capsule and (ii) hetero-coagulated silica capsules with poly-NIPAM latex particles\n\nEvidence of temperature responsive poly-NIPAM latex particles adsorbing on CTAB stabilized silica capsules was demonstrated by careful optical microscopic analysis at various stages of the adsorption and poly-NIPAM film formation on the surface of the silica capsule.\n\nIn the case of silica microspheres, SEM cannot be used as a characterization tool as microcapsules (e.g. having a size above 50 micrometer (> 50 pm)) do not stay/remain stable under high vacuum conditions employed during measurement (e.g. SEM imaging). Therefore, the adsorption and film formation of poly-NIPAM latex particles on silica hollow spheres were demonstrated by dark field microscopy (see FIG. 6B).\n\nFIG. 6A shows a dark field microscopic image of silica capsule dispersion in water. After heterocoagulation of poly-NIPAM latex particles with silica capsules, a dark field microscopic image was captured for the hetero-coagulated silica capsules with poly-NIPAM latex particles as shown in FIG. 6B. Particle size analysis of the hetero-coagulated silica capsules with poly-NIPAM latex particles using laser scattering shows a monomodal size distribution. This is indicative of a good nano-film formation of poly-NIPAM around the silica capsule structures.", + "recall": 0.993421052631579, + "true_md": "This process was repeated 2-3 times to get pure heterocoagulated capsules with no free silica capsule or latex articles. Most of the personal care actives and perfume capsules are lower density and hence this method of creaming may work better for such lower density capsules.\n\nFor capsules that are denser than water, the capsules could be allowed to settle, and a similar procedure could be adopted by removing the top layer and repeating the washing steps.\n\n## Dark field microscopy of (i) silica capsule and (ii) hetero-coagulated silica capsules with poly-NIPAM latex particles\n\nEvidence of temperature responsive poly-NIPAM latex particles adsorbing on CTAB stabilized silica capsules was demonstrated by careful optical microscopic analysis at various stages of the adsorption and poly-NIPAM film formation on the surface of the silica capsule.\n\nIn the case of silica microspheres, SEM cannot be used as a characterization tool as microcapsules (e.g. having a size above 50 micrometer (> 50 pm)) do not stay/remain stable under high vacuum conditions employed during measurement (e.g. SEM imaging). Therefore, the adsorption and film formation of poly-NIPAM latex particles on silica hollow spheres were demonstrated by dark field microscopy (see FIG. 6B).\n\nFIG. 6A shows a dark field microscopic image of silica capsule dispersion in water. After heterocoagulation of poly-NIPAM latex particles with silica capsules, a dark field microscopic image was captured for the hetero-coagulated silica capsules with poly-NIPAM latex particles as shown in FIG. 6B. Particle size analysis of the hetero-coagulated silica capsules with poly-NIPAM latex particles using laser scattering shows a monomodal size distribution. This is indicative of a good nano-film formation of poly-NIPAM around the silica capsule structures." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.931684699279744, + "doc_id": "fde0fe43f9e5d6a9c1e392011b3e9a663f3dd06c2650bfc452234fc61fab195e", + "edit_distance": 0.9585253456221198, + "f1_score": 0.9880952380952381, + "meteor": 0.9157201608910939, + "precision": 0.9880952380952381, + "pred_md": "(\n\n- (51) International Patent Classification:\n- (71) Applicant:\n\nMICROSOFT\n\nTECHNOLOGY\n\nLI‹\n\nG06F 3/0481 (2013.01)\n\nG06F 3/0488 (2013.01)\n\nCENSING, LLC [US/US]; One Microsoft Way, Redmond, Washington 98052-6399 (US).\n\nG06F 3/0482 (2013.01)\n\nG06Q 10/10 (2012.01)\n\nGOOF3/0486 (2013.01)\n\n- (72)\n\nInventors: MONDRI, Ron; MICROSOFT TECHNOL‹ OGY LICENSING, LLC, One Microsoft Way, Red‹ mond, Washington 98052-6399 (US). ALMOG, Itai; MICROSOFT TECHNOLOGY LICENSING, LLC, One Microsoft Way, Redmond, Washington 98052-6399 (US). ROUAIX, Francois M.; MICROSOFT TECHNOLOGY LICENSING, LLC, One Microsoft Way, Redmond, Wash‹ ington 98052-6399 (US). COLANDO, Christian James; MICROSOFT TECHNOLOGY LICENSING, LLC, One Microsoft Way, Redmond, Washington 98052-6399 (US). ROGERS, March; MICROSOFT TECHNOLO‹ GY LICENSING, LLC, One Microsoft Way, Redmond, Washington 98052-6399 (US). SONNINO, Eduardo; MICROSOFT TECHNOLOGY LICENSING, LLC, One\n\n- (21) International Application Number:\n\nPCT/US2020/024355\n\n- (22) International\n\nFiling Date:\n\n24 March 2020 (24.03.2020)\n\n- (25) Filing Language:\n\nEnglish\n\n- (26) Publication Language:\n\nEnglish\n\n- (30) Priority\n- Data:\n\n16/377,580\n\n08 April 2019 (08.04.2019)\n\nUS\n\n## (54) Title: DYNAMIC WHITEBOARD REGIONS\n\nFIG. 1A\n\nFIG. 1A\n\n(57) Abstract: Dynamic templates include regions that provide behavior based upon a purpose or desired outcome. Templates and regions can modify the logical representations associated with objects to create semantic context for the objects. Templates and regions can also generate visual representations of objects based upon their logical representations. The visual representation utilized by a template or region can be selected manually or based upon the capabilities of a computing device. Objects contained within regions can be sorted, filtered, arranged, and projected based on their associated logical representations. Templates and regions can modify their size based upon the objects contained therein, can receive logical representations of objects from data sources and update the data sources to reflect modification of the logical representations, can initiate actions based on changes to the logical representations associated with objects, and generate structured summaries or other types of content based upon the logical representations.\n\n[Continued on nextpage]", + "recall": 0.9880952380952381, + "true_md": "(57) Abstract: Dynamic templates include regions that provide behavior based upon a purpose or desired outcome. Templates and regions can modify the logical representations associated with objects to create semantic context for the objects. Templates and regions can also generate visual representations of objects based upon their logical representations. The visual representation utilized by a template or region can be selected manually or based upon the capabilities of a computing device. Objects contained within regions can be sorted, filtered, arranged, and projected based on their associated logical representations. Templates and regions can modify their size based upon the objects contained therein, can receive logical representations of objects from data sources and update the data sources to reflect modification of the logical representations, can initiate actions based on changes to the logical representations associated with objects, and generate structured summaries or other types of content based upon the logical representations.\n\n[Continued on nextpage]\n\nFIG. 1A\n\n(54) Title: DYNAMIC WHITEBOARD REGIONS\n\n- (71) Applicant: MICROSOFT TECHNOLOGY LI‹ CENSING, LLC [US/US]; One Microsoft Way, Redmond, Washington 98052-6399 (US).\n\n- (72) Inventors: MONDRI, Ron; MICROSOFT TECHNOL‹ OGY LICENSING, LLC, One Microsoft Way, Red‹ mond, Washington 98052-6399 (US). ALMOG, Itai; MICROSOFT TECHNOLOGY LICENSING, LLC, One Microsoft Way, Redmond, Washington 98052-6399 (US). ROUAIX, Francois M.; MICROSOFT TECHNOLOGY LICENSING, LLC, One Microsoft Way, Redmond, Wash‹ ington 98052-6399 (US). COLANDO, Christian James; MICROSOFT TECHNOLOGY LICENSING, LLC, One Microsoft Way, Redmond, Washington 98052-6399 (US). ROGERS, March; MICROSOFT TECHNOLO‹ GY LICENSING, LLC, One Microsoft Way, Redmond, Washington 98052-6399 (US). SONNINO, Eduardo; MICROSOFT TECHNOLOGY LICENSING, LLC, One\n\n- (51) International Patent Classification: G06F 3/0481 (2013.01) G06F 3/0488 (2013.01) G06F 3/0482 (2013.01) G06Q 10/10 (2012.01) GOOF 3/0486 (2013.01)\n\n- (21) International Application Number:\n\n- (22) International Filing Date:\n\n- (25) Filing Language:\n\n- (26) Publication Language:\n\n- (30) Priority Data: 16/377,580 08 April 2019 (08.04.2019) US\n\nPCT/US2020/024355\n\n24 March 2020 (24.03.2020)\n\nEnglish\n\nEnglish" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9622041285507984, + "doc_id": "c31b8815cf6495d9fa02217e67cf06855516687ef3f4a81f9cf3690d511383bc", + "edit_distance": 0.02689486552567237, + "f1_score": 0.9498069498069499, + "meteor": 0.9764840478797873, + "precision": 0.9609375, + "pred_md": "that it is one that would allow inter-diffusion (e.g. between the inorganic shell) under aqueous conditions. In various embodiments, the organic polymer latex particles comprise water-dispersed organic polymer latex particles (no organic solvent). In various embodiments, the organic polymer latex particles comprise degradable polymer latex particles, biodegradable polymer latex particles, non toxic polymer latex particles, bioresorbable polymer latex particles, responsive polymer latex particles, stimuli-responsive polymer latex particles, thermoresponsive polymer latex particles, thermoplastic polymer latex particles, poly-Nisopropyl acrylamide (PNIPAM) latex particles, poly-methyl-methacrylate-copoly-styrene-co-polyethyl-hexyl-acrylate-co-poly-acrylic acid latex particles, poly caprolactone (PCL) latex particles, poly valerolactone latex particles, poly butyrolactone latex particles, polyurethane latex particles, polyamide latex particles, polyacrylic acid-containing latex particles or combinations thereof. Advantageously, embodiments of the method produce capsules that are responsive to one or more stimuli that may be useful in stimuli-driven delivery applications.\n\nThe organic polymer latex particles may optionally comprise a cross-linker optionally selected from bis-acrylates or acrylamides containing alkyl group or poly-ethylene group, or N,N'-Methylenebis(acrylamide) (BIS). In various embodiments, the heterocoagulating step is substantially devoid of the use/need of a cross-linker to form the organic polymer layer over the primary capsule. In some embodiments, where the organic polymer latex particles comprise poly caprolactone (PCL), the heterocoagulating step is carried out at a temperature of from about 60°C to about 70°C, preferably 65°C, and/or without a cross-linker. In various embodiments, the organic polymer latex particles comprise no more than about 2% BIS, no more than about 1.5% BIS, no more than about 1.4% BIS, no more than about 1.3% BIS, no more than about 1.2% BIS, no more than about 1.1% BIS, no more than about 1.0% BIS, no more than about 0.9% BIS, no more than about 0.8% BIS, no more than about 0.7% BIS, no more than about 0.6% BIS, no more than about 0.5% BIS, no more than about 0.4% BIS, no more than about 0.3% BIS, no more than about 0.2% BIS or no more than about 0.1 % BIS.", + "recall": 0.9389312977099237, + "true_md": "that it is one that would allow inter-diffusion (e.g. between the inorganic shell) under aqueous conditions. In various embodiments, the organic polymer latex particles comprise water-dispersed organic polymer latex particles (no organic solvent). In various embodiments, the organic polymer latex particles comprise degradable polymer latex particles, biodegradable polymer latex particles, non toxic polymer latex particles, bioresorbable polymer latex particles, responsive polymer latex particles, stimuli-responsive polymer latex particles, thermo- responsive polymer latex particles, thermoplastic polymer latex particles, poly-N- isopropyl acrylamide (PNIPAM) latex particles, poly-methyl-methacrylate-co- poly-styrene-co-polyethyl-hexyl-acrylate-co-poly-acrylic acid latex particles, poly caprolactone (PCL) latex particles, poly valerolactone latex particles, poly butyrolactone latex particles, polyurethane latex particles, polyamide latex particles, polyacrylic acid-containing latex particles or combinations thereof. Advantageously, embodiments of the method produce capsules that are responsive to one or more stimuli that may be useful in stimuli-driven delivery applications.\n\nThe organic polymer latex particles may optionally comprise a cross-linker optionally selected from bis-acrylates or acrylamides containing alkyl group or poly-ethylene group, or N,N’-Methylenebis(acrylamide) (BIS). In various embodiments, the heterocoagulating step is substantially devoid of the use/need of a cross-linker to form the organic polymer layer over the primary capsule. In some embodiments, where the organic polymer latex particles comprise poly caprolactone (PCL), the heterocoagulating step is carried out at a temperature of from about 60°Cto about 70°C,preferably 65°C,and/or without a cross-linker. In various embodiments, the organic polymer latex particles comprise no more than about 2% BIS, no more than about 1.5% BIS, no more than about 1.4% BIS, no more than about 1.3% BIS, no more than about 1.2% BIS, no more than about 1.1% BIS, no more than about 1.0% BIS, no more than about 0.9% BIS, no more than about 0.8% BIS, no more than about 0.7% BIS, no more than about 0.6% BIS, no more than about 0.5% BIS, no more than about 0.4% BIS, no more than about 0.3% BIS, no more than about 0.2% BIS or no more than about 0.1 % BIS." + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "90a33638bdbc769b99156fd50f269272f52d376d442612b3854d636d928fb7c3", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999999880331023, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "environment as compared to methods which require the use of harsh and toxic chemicals and/or organic solvents.\n\nTherefore, in various embodiments, the polymer coating is formed over the shell of the primary capsule in a physical or non-chemical manner. Accordingly, in various embodiments, the method does not comprise chemically modifying/functionalizing/coupling/grafting the organic polymer latex particles or the shell of the primary capsule or their surfaces thereof to facilitate an integration of the organic polymer latex particles on or with the shell of the primary capsule. In various embodiments, the method does not comprise providing/adding a chemical curing/cross-linking agent (e.g. glutaraldehyde) or chemically curing/cross-linking the organic polymer latex particles to facilitate an integration of the organic polymer latex particles on or with the shell of the primary capsule. In various embodiments, the method does not comprise chemically/covalently attaching/conjugating/coupling/anchoring/grafting a functional group e.g. an amine group to the organic polymer latex particles or the shell of the primary capsule or their surfaces thereof to facilitate an integration of the organic polymer latex particles on or with the shell of the primary capsule. For example, in various embodiments, the method does not comprise using silane coupling agent such as γ -methacryloxypropyl trimethoxysilane in conjunction with a silica precursor such as tetraethyl orthosilicate (TEOS) to facilitate an integration of an organic material on or with a shell of the primary capsule. In addition, in various embodiments, the method does not comprise providing a preformed commercially available functional polymer such as lupranate (polymeric isocyanate and/or diisocyanate) to facilitate an integration of an organic material on or with a shell of the primary capsule.\n\nIn various embodiments, the method does not require providing a block co-polymer such as one derived from poly(2-(dimethylamino)ethyl methacrylate) (PDMA) and poly(benzyl methacrylate) (PBzMA). Such co-polymer are expensive and require many synthesis steps. Additionally, in various", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "environment as compared to methods which require the use of harsh and toxic chemicals and/or organic solvents.\n\nTherefore, in various embodiments, the polymer coating is formed over the shell of the primary capsule in a physical or non-chemical manner. Accordingly, in various embodiments, the method does not comprise chemically modifying/functionalizing/coupling/grafting the organic polymer latex particles or the shell of the primary capsule or their surfaces thereof to facilitate an integration of the organic polymer latex particles on or with the shell of the primary capsule. In various embodiments, the method does not comprise providing/adding a chemical curing/cross-linking agent (e.g. glutaraldehyde) or chemically curing/cross-linking the organic polymer latex particles to facilitate an integration of the organic polymer latex particles on or with the shell of the primary capsule. In various embodiments, the method does not comprise chemically/covalently attaching/conjugating/coupling/anchoring/grafting a functional group e.g. an amine group to the organic polymer latex particles or the shell of the primary capsule or their surfaces thereof to facilitate an integration of the organic polymer latex particles on or with the shell of the primary capsule. For example, in various embodiments, the method does not comprise using silane coupling agent such as γ -methacryloxypropyl trimethoxysilane in conjunction with a silica precursor such as tetraethyl orthosilicate (TEOS) to facilitate an integration of an organic material on or with a shell of the primary capsule. In addition, in various embodiments, the method does not comprise providing a preformed commercially available functional polymer such as lupranate (polymeric isocyanate and/or diisocyanate) to facilitate an integration of an organic material on or with a shell of the primary capsule.\n\nIn various embodiments, the method does not require providing a block co-polymer such as one derived from poly(2-(dimethylamino)ethyl methacrylate) (PDMA) and poly(benzyl methacrylate) (PBzMA). Such co-polymer are expensive and require many synthesis steps. Additionally, in various" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "6ad837090950ee11a52578a34c8ac1d28a3c519683a92a9e05d165e0211bf387", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999999904422603, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "In various embodiments, the hybrid/composite capsule has a loading capacity of from about 65% to about 95% by weight, from about 70% to about 90% by weight, from about 75% to about 85% by weight, or no less than about 95% by weight, no less than about 90% by weight, no less than about 85% by weight, no less than about 80% by weight, no less than about 75% by weight, no less than about 70% by weight or no less than about 65% by weight.\n\nIn various embodiments, the hybrid/composite capsule comprises one or more of the following properties: non-toxic, hypoallergenic, biocompatible, degradable, environmentally benign, chemically stable and physically stable. Therefore, in various embodiments, the capsules may be useful in an application selected from the group consisting of: coating, therapy, medicine, agriculture, catalyst, printing, film, fiber, cosmetics, cosmeceutical, consumer care, personal care, health care, stimuli-driven delivery, and combinations thereof.\n\nIn various embodiments, the capsule is capable of releasing at least a portion of the one or more cargoes when stimulated (e.g. the polymer outer layer of the hybrid/composite capsule is degradable under suitable conditions to expose pores on the primary capsule). For example, capsule may be capable of releasing at least a portion of the one or more cargoes when stimulated by a predetermined level or change in one or more of a salt concentration, a pH, a temperature or a mechanical pressure etc.\n\nThere is also provided a formulation or colloidal suspension/dispersion comprising a plurality of the hybrid/composite capsules disclosed herein. In various embodiments, the hybrid/composite capsules are substantially monodispersed. For example, the hybrid/composite capsules may have a substantially uniform size distribution. In various embodiments, the solid content of the formulation or colloidal suspension/dispersion is from about 0.01 0 g/mL to about 0.01 5 g/mL, or about 0.01 3 g/mL (or 0.01 4 g/g).", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "In various embodiments, the hybrid/composite capsule has a loading capacity of from about 65% to about 95% by weight, from about 70% to about 90% by weight, from about 75% to about 85% by weight, or no less than about 95% by weight, no less than about 90% by weight, no less than about 85% by weight, no less than about 80% by weight, no less than about 75% by weight, no less than about 70% by weight or no less than about 65% by weight.\n\nIn various embodiments, the hybrid/composite capsule comprises one or more of the following properties: non-toxic, hypoallergenic, biocompatible, degradable, environmentally benign, chemically stable and physically stable. Therefore, in various embodiments, the capsules may be useful in an application selected from the group consisting of: coating, therapy, medicine, agriculture, catalyst, printing, film, fiber, cosmetics, cosmeceutical, consumer care, personal care, health care, stimuli-driven delivery, and combinations thereof.\n\nIn various embodiments, the capsule is capable of releasing at least a portion of the one or more cargoes when stimulated (e.g. the polymer outer layer of the hybrid/composite capsule is degradable under suitable conditions to expose pores on the primary capsule). For example, capsule may be capable of releasing at least a portion of the one or more cargoes when stimulated by a predetermined level or change in one or more of a salt concentration, a pH, a temperature or a mechanical pressure etc.\n\nThere is also provided a formulation or colloidal suspension/dispersion comprising a plurality of the hybrid/composite capsules disclosed herein. In various embodiments, the hybrid/composite capsules are substantially monodispersed. For example, the hybrid/composite capsules may have a substantially uniform size distribution. In various embodiments, the solid content of the formulation or colloidal suspension/dispersion is from about 0.01 0 g/mL to about 0.01 5 g/mL, or about 0.01 3 g/mL (or 0.01 4 g/g)." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9725606069598142, + "doc_id": "a689ed7a5de152e539aa121003daa17f78f5d054439d939dd193287739714a95", + "edit_distance": 0.03558718861209965, + "f1_score": 0.9849624060150376, + "meteor": 0.9920800128581144, + "precision": 0.9849624060150376, + "pred_md": "complicated, complex and/or require long processing time. This is because many of these techniques involve a large number of different types of chemical reactants, reaction steps, reaction conditions and post-coating processing steps. As a result, such techniques also have limited scalability.\n\nIn addition, these techniques create new problems. For example, many of the chemical reactants used or by-products produced are toxic to the environment, therefore creating a disposal problem. Furthermore, the high chemical reactivity of several of the chemical reactants used or by-products produced makes such techniques incompatible for use with chemically sensitive actives as well as for consumer care applications, where consumer safety is of paramount importance.\n\nTherefore, there is a need for a method and a capsule that overcome or at least ameliorate one or more of the problems discussed above.\n\n## SUMMARY\n\nAccording to one aspect, there is provided a method of preparing a hybrid capsule, the method comprising heterocoagulating organic polymer latex particles with a primary capsule to form an organic polymer coating layer over a shell of the primary capsule.\n\nIn one embodiment, the hybrid capsule is an organic-inorganic capsule and the primary capsule is an inorganic capsule.\n\nIn one embodiment, the heterocoagulating step is at least partly carried out at a temperature that is no less than the glass transition temperature (Tg) of the organic polymer latex particles.\n\nIn one embodiment, the heterocoagulating step is at least partly carried out at a temperature of from 10°C to 80°C and/or at a pH from 2 to 11.", + "recall": 0.9849624060150376, + "true_md": "complicated, complex and/or require long processing time. This is because many of these techniques involve a large number of different types of chemical reactants, reaction steps, reaction conditions and post-coating processing steps. As a result, such techniques also have limited scalability.\n\nIn addition, these techniques create new problems. For example, many of the chemical reactants used or by-products produced are toxic to the environment, therefore creating a disposal problem. Furthermore, the high chemical reactivity of several of the chemical reactants used or by-products produced makes such techniques incompatible for use with chemically sensitive actives as well as for consumer care applications, where consumer safety is of paramount importance.\n\nTherefore, there is a need for a method and a capsule that overcome or at least ameliorate one or more of the problems discussed above.\n\nAccording to one aspect, there is provided a method of preparing a hybrid capsule, the method comprising heterocoagulating organic polymer latex particles with a primary capsule to form an organic polymer coating layer over a shell of the primary capsule.\n\nIn one embodiment, the hybrid capsule is an organic-inorganic capsule and the primary capsule is an inorganic capsule.\n\nIn one embodiment, the heterocoagulating step is at least partly carried out at a temperature that is no less than the glass transition temperature (Tg) of the organic polymer latex particles.\n\nIn one embodiment, the heterocoagulating step is at least partly carried out at a temperature of from 10°Cto 80°Cand/or at a pH from 2 to 11.\n\n## SUMMARY" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9006478809871803, + "doc_id": "6002b8eb028cb3e1da4beb7980eb9b4c96a7181b44559bb76ba401639acf66ab", + "edit_distance": 0.057279236276849645, + "f1_score": 0.9405405405405405, + "meteor": 0.9676090630772889, + "precision": 0.9456521739130435, + "pred_md": "temperature of no more than about 70°C, from a first temperature of no less than about 30°C to a second temperature of no more than about 70°C, from a first temperature of no less than about 10°C to a second temperature of no more than about 65°C, from a first temperature of no less than about 15°C to a second temperature of no more than about 65°C, from a first temperature of no less than about 20°C to a second temperature of no more than about 65°C, from a first temperature of no less than about 25°C to a second temperature of no more than about 65°C, from a first temperature of no less than about 30°C to a second temperature of no more than about 65°C, from a first temperature of no less than about 10°C to a second temperature of no more than about 60°C, from a first temperature of no less than about 15°C to a second temperature of no more than about 60°C, from a first temperature of no less than about 20°C to a second temperature of no more than about 60°C, from a first temperature of no less than about 25°C to a second temperature of no more than about 60°C or from a first temperature of no less than about 30°C to a second temperature of no more than about 60°C.\n\nIn various embodiments, the method also comprises providing a mixture (or suspension/dispersion) comprising the organic polymer latex particles and the at least one primary capsule prior to the heterocoagulating step. The mixture may be provided as a mixture in an aqueous medium such as water. Accordingly, the organic polymer latex particles may be dispersed in an aqueous medium and the primary capsule may also be dispersed in an aqueous medium such that after they are mixed to form a mixture, the mixture will still be in an aqueous medium. Advantageously, because the aqueous medium is not an organic medium that is toxic, the method may be an environmentally friendly method.\n\nIn various embodiments, the method does not comprise providing substances such as free radicals that react or will potentially react with the cargo/active and cause or potentially cause the cargo/active to undergo chemical transformation to an undesired form. Accordingly, the polymer latex particles mixture, the primary capsule mixture and/or the mixture of polymer latex particles", + "recall": 0.9354838709677419, + "true_md": "temperature of no more than about 70°C,from a first temperature of no less than about 30°Cto a second temperature of no more than about 70°C,from a first temperature of no less than about 10°Cto a second temperature of no more than about 65°C,from a first temperature of no less than about 15°Cto a second temperature of no more than about 65°C,from a first temperature of no less than about 20°Cto a second temperature of no more than about 65°C,from a first temperature of no less than about 25°Cto a second temperature of no more than about 65°C,from a first temperature of no less than about 30°Cto a second temperature of no more than about 65°C,from a first temperature of no less than about 10°Cto a second temperature of no more than about 60°C,from a first temperature of no less than about 15°Cto a second temperature of no more than about 60°C,from a first temperature of no less than about 20°Cto a second temperature of no more than about 60°C,from a first temperature of no less than about 25°Cto a second temperature of no more than about 60°Cor from a first temperature of no less than about 30°Cto a second temperature of no more than about 60°C.\n\nIn various embodiments, the method also comprises providing a mixture (or suspension/dispersion) comprising the organic polymer latex particles and the at least one primary capsule prior to the heterocoagulating step. The mixture may be provided as a mixture in an aqueous medium such as water. Accordingly, the organic polymer latex particles may be dispersed in an aqueous medium and the primary capsule may also be dispersed in an aqueous medium such that after they are mixed to form a mixture, the mixture will still be in an aqueous medium. Advantageously, because the aqueous medium is not an organic medium that is toxic, the method may be an environmentally friendly method.\n\nIn various embodiments, the method does not comprise providing substances such as free radicals that react or will potentially react with the cargo/active and cause or potentially cause the cargo/active to undergo chemical transformation to an undesired form. Accordingly, the polymer latex particles mixture, the primary capsule mixture and/or the mixture of polymer latex particles" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "79a2800914cab27908d39a12c15ccd019ea8a8630298b3331802bcd5a413d972", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999999963606745, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "120 might be modified, such as when moving a corresponding object 120 between regions. When logical representations 202 are modified in this way, the template 116 or region 118 can update the appropriate data source 124 to reflect the modification.\n\n[0064] In the illustrated example, for instance, a note object 302C is moved from a region 118G showing note objects 302C for in-progress to-do items to a region 118H showing note objects 302C for completed to-do items. In this example, the logical representation 202 associated with the moved note object 302C can be modified to indicate the completion of the to-do item, and the data source 124 can be updated with the modified logical representation 202. Other views of the same data at other instances of the whiteboard application 104 can then be updated based on the modified logical representation 202 stored at the data source 124.\n\n[0065] As shown in FIG. 7B, templates 116 and regions 118 can also be configured to initiate actions 702 based on changes to the logical representations 202 associated with objects 120. In the illustrated example, for instance, the logical representation 202 for a note object 302C has been modified as a result of the movement of the note object 302C from the region 118F to the region 118G. In particular, the logical representation 202 associated with the moved note object 302C has been modified to indicate that the note object 302C represents a completed task rather than an in-progress task.\n\n[0066] In response to the modification of the logical representation 202 associated with the note object 302C, the template 116 or the region 118G has initiated an action 702. In this example, the action 702 is the transmission of an email message indicating completion of the task associated with the note object 302C. Other types of actions 702 can be initiated in response to the modification of logical representations 202 associated with other types of objects 302 in other configurations.\n\n[0067] As also shown in FIG. 7B, different regions 118 can provide different views of the same logical representations 202. In the illustrated example, for instance, the region 118G presents objects 120 for completed tasks as note objects 302C. Simultaneously, the region 1181 presents the objects 120 for completed tasks in a histogram shown the number of completed tasks as of their completion dates. The region 1181 is updated as changes to the logical representations 202 of the objects 120 take place. For example, when the logical representation 202 for the note object 302C is changed as a result of the movement of the note object 302C from the region 118G to the region 118H, the region 1181 updates its display to reflect completion of a task on 3/17.\n\n[0068] FIGS. 8A-8E illustrate various aspects of another example template 116. In", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "120 might be modified, such as when moving a corresponding object 120 between regions. When logical representations 202 are modified in this way, the template 116 or region 118 can update the appropriate data source 124 to reflect the modification.\n\n[0064] In the illustrated example, for instance, a note object 302C is moved from a region 118G showing note objects 302C for in-progress to-do items to a region 118H showing note objects 302C for completed to-do items. In this example, the logical representation 202 associated with the moved note object 302C can be modified to indicate the completion of the to-do item, and the data source 124 can be updated with the modified logical representation 202. Other views of the same data at other instances of the whiteboard application 104 can then be updated based on the modified logical representation 202 stored at the data source 124.\n\n[0065] As shown in FIG. 7B, templates 116 and regions 118 can also be configured to initiate actions 702 based on changes to the logical representations 202 associated with objects 120. In the illustrated example, for instance, the logical representation 202 for a note object 302C has been modified as a result of the movement of the note object 302C from the region 118F to the region 118G. In particular, the logical representation 202 associated with the moved note object 302C has been modified to indicate that the note object 302C represents a completed task rather than an in-progress task.\n\n[0066] In response to the modification of the logical representation 202 associated with the note object 302C, the template 116 or the region 118G has initiated an action 702. In this example, the action 702 is the transmission of an email message indicating completion of the task associated with the note object 302C. Other types of actions 702 can be initiated in response to the modification of logical representations 202 associated with other types of objects 302 in other configurations.\n\n[0067] As also shown in FIG. 7B, different regions 118 can provide different views of the same logical representations 202. In the illustrated example, for instance, the region 118G presents objects 120 for completed tasks as note objects 302C. Simultaneously, the region 1181 presents the objects 120 for completed tasks in a histogram shown the number of completed tasks as of their completion dates. The region 1181 is updated as changes to the logical representations 202 of the objects 120 take place. For example, when the logical representation 202 for the note object 302C is changed as a result of the movement of the note object 302C from the region 118G to the region 118H, the region 1181 updates its display to reflect completion of a task on 3/17.\n\n[0068] FIGS. 8A-8E illustrate various aspects of another example template 116. In" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "9436c675289d6c2024e98d700889d20479938d0fa1343ed947e69ca7ed314e90", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999999944762886, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "the software modules disclosed herein. These computer-executable instructions can transform the CPU 1102 by specifying how the CPU 1102 transitions between states, thereby transforming the transistors or other discrete hardware elements constituting the CPU 1102.\n\n[0097] Encoding the software modules presented herein can also transform the physical structure of the computer readable media presented herein. The specific transformation of physical structure depends on various factors, in different implementations of this description. Examples of such factors include, but are not limited to, the technology used to implement the computer readable media, whether the computer readable media is characterized as primary or secondary storage, and the like. For example, if the computer readable media is implemented as semiconductor-based memory, the software disclosed herein can be encoded on the computer readable media by transforming the physical state of the semiconductor memory. For instance, the software can transform the state of transistors, capacitors, or other discrete circuit elements constituting the semiconductor memory. The software can also transform the physical state of such components in order to store data thereupon.\n\n[0098] As another example, the computer readable media disclosed herein can be implemented using magnetic or optical technology. In such implementations, the software presented herein can transform the physical state of magnetic or optical media, when the software is encoded therein. These transformations can include altering the magnetic characteristics of particular locations within given magnetic media. These transformations can also include altering the physical features or characteristics of particular locations within given optical media, to change the optical characteristics of those locations. Other transformations of physical media are possible without departing from the scope and spirit of the present description, with the foregoing examples provided only to facilitate this discussion.\n\n[0099] In light of the above, it should be appreciated that many types of physical transformations take place in the computer 1100 in order to store and execute the software components presented herein. It also should be appreciated that the architecture shown in FIG. 11 for the computer 1100 , or a similar architecture, can be utilized to implement other types of computing devices, including hand-held computers, video game devices, embedded computer systems, mobile devices such as smartphones, tablets, and AR/VR devices, and other types of computing devices known to those skilled in the art. It is also contemplated that the computer 1100 might not include all of the components shown in FIG. 11, can", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "the software modules disclosed herein. These computer-executable instructions can transform the CPU 1102 by specifying how the CPU 1102 transitions between states, thereby transforming the transistors or other discrete hardware elements constituting the CPU 1102.\n\n[0097] Encoding the software modules presented herein can also transform the physical structure of the computer readable media presented herein. The specific transformation of physical structure depends on various factors, in different implementations of this description. Examples of such factors include, but are not limited to, the technology used to implement the computer readable media, whether the computer readable media is characterized as primary or secondary storage, and the like. For example, if the computer readable media is implemented as semiconductor-based memory, the software disclosed herein can be encoded on the computer readable media by transforming the physical state of the semiconductor memory. For instance, the software can transform the state of transistors, capacitors, or other discrete circuit elements constituting the semiconductor memory. The software can also transform the physical state of such components in order to store data thereupon.\n\n[0098] As another example, the computer readable media disclosed herein can be implemented using magnetic or optical technology. In such implementations, the software presented herein can transform the physical state of magnetic or optical media, when the software is encoded therein. These transformations can include altering the magnetic characteristics of particular locations within given magnetic media. These transformations can also include altering the physical features or characteristics of particular locations within given optical media, to change the optical characteristics of those locations. Other transformations of physical media are possible without departing from the scope and spirit of the present description, with the foregoing examples provided only to facilitate this discussion.\n\n[0099] In light of the above, it should be appreciated that many types of physical transformations take place in the computer 1100 in order to store and execute the software components presented herein. It also should be appreciated that the architecture shown in FIG. 11 for the computer 1100 , or a similar architecture, can be utilized to implement other types of computing devices, including hand-held computers, video game devices, embedded computer systems, mobile devices such as smartphones, tablets, and AR/VR devices, and other types of computing devices known to those skilled in the art. It is also contemplated that the computer 1100 might not include all of the components shown in FIG. 11, can" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9564230658677333, + "doc_id": "8b8815908aaf3e36525ad9197c92586be862e2d075bc58e1646096687c9f0fb8", + "edit_distance": 0.3507692307692308, + "f1_score": 0.9701492537313434, + "meteor": 0.9074221173983866, + "precision": 0.9701492537313433, + "pred_md": "first region configured to display an object in a first visual representation or a second visual representation based on a logical representation associated with the object;\n\nreceive user input moving an object into the first region;\n\nresponsive to receiving the user input for moving the object into the first region, display the object in the first visual representation in the first region based on the logical representation associated with the object;\n\nreceive user input requesting to display the object in the second visual representation; and\n\nresponsive to receiving the user input requesting to display the object in the second visual representation, display the object in the second visual representation in the first region based on the logical representation associated with the object.\n\n- 12. The computer-readable storage medium of claim 11, having further computerexecutable instructions stored thereupon to modify the logical representation associated with the object when moving the object into the first region.\n- 13. The computer-readable storage medium of claim 11, wherein the user interface further comprises a second region on the canvas, and wherein the computer-readable storage medium has further computer-executable instructions stored thereupon to:\n\nreceive user input moving the object from the first region to the second region; and responsive to receiving the user input moving the object from the first region to the second region, display the object in the second region in a third visual representation based on the logical representation associated with the object.\n\n- 14. The computer-readable storage medium of claim 13 wherein the second region is further configured to initiate an action responsive to the user input for moving the object from the first region to the second region.\n- 15. The computer-readable storage medium of claim 13, wherein the first region is further configured to receive the logical representations from a data source.", + "recall": 0.9701492537313433, + "true_md": "first region configured to display an object in a first visual representation or a second visual representation based on a logical representation associated with the object;\n\nreceive user input moving an object into the first region; responsive to receiving the user input for moving the object into the first region, display the object in the first visual representation in the first region based on the logical representation associated with the object;\n\n12. The computer-readable storage medium of claim 11, having further computer- executable instructions stored thereupon to modify the logical representation associated with the object when moving the object into the first region.\n\n13. The computer-readable storage medium of claim 11, wherein the user interface further comprises a second region on the canvas, and wherein the computer-readable storage medium has further computer-executable instructions stored thereupon to:\n\nreceive user input moving the object from the first region to the second region; and responsive to receiving the user input moving the object from the first region to the second region, display the object in the second region in a third visual representation based on the logical representation associated with the object.\n\n14. The computer-readable storage medium of claim 13 wherein the second region is further configured to initiate an action responsive to the user input for moving the object from the first region to the second region.\n\n15. The computer-readable storage medium of claim 13, wherein the first region is further configured to receive the logical representations from a data source.\n\nreceive user input requesting to display the object in the second visual representation; and responsive to receiving the user input requesting to display the object in the second visual representation, display the object in the second visual representation in the first region based on the logical representation associated with the object." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9903303269876933, + "doc_id": "2d751131078b6aff33d90543d8789b8308221234e0adf6a32d8c95e04481f609", + "edit_distance": 0.005714285714285714, + "f1_score": 0.9918032786885246, + "meteor": 0.99684894577639, + "precision": 0.9918032786885246, + "pred_md": "comprises warming/heating the at least one primary capsule to a temperature that is no more than about 60°C, no more than about 55°C, no more than about 50°C, no more than about 45°C, no more than about 40°C, no more than about 39°C, no more than about 38°C, no more than about 37°C, no more than about 36°C, no more than about 35°C, no more than about 34°C, no more than about 33°C, no more than about 32°C, no more than about 3 1°C, no more than about 30°C, no more than about 29°C, no more than about 28°C, no more than about 27°C or no more than about 26°C. In some embodiments, the template comprises a low boiling organic solvent. In one embodiment, the template comprises pentane.\n\nIn various embodiments, the method does not comprise adding/providing a vesicle template. For example, the method may not comprise adding/providing a polymer emulsion such as a PNIPAM emulsion particle as a template. According, in various embodiments, the method does not comprise growing a shell such as a silica shell around a PNIPAM emulsion particle template. Therefore, in various embodiments, the method does not comprise calcination or high temperatures to remove a template.\n\nThe methods disclosed herein may further comprise one or more post heterocoagulation steps. For example, the method may further comprise a step of purifying the hybrid/composite capsule formed in the mixture to remove any impurities such as excess/free polymer particles. The step of purifying the hybrid/composite capsule may comprise centrifuging the mixture, creaming the mixture, allowing the mixture to settle and subsequently decanting the mixture etc. Additional process engineering steps and automated additions or flow chemistry may also be introduced to avoid extra polymer particles without purification step.\n\nThe method may also further comprise a step of subjecting the purified hybrid/composite capsule to a temperature cycle to form a film.", + "recall": 0.9918032786885246, + "true_md": "comprises warming/heating the at least one primary capsule to a temperature that is no more than about 60°C,no more than about 55°C,no more than about 50°C,no more than about 45°C,no more than about 40°C,no more than about 39°C,no more than about 38°C,no more than about 37°C,no more than about 36°C,no more than about 35°C,no more than about 34°C,no more than about 33°C,no more than about 32°C,no more than about 3 1°C,no more than about 30°C,no more than about 29°C,no more than about 28°C,no more than about 27°Cor no more than about 26°C. In some embodiments, the template comprises a low boiling organic solvent. In one embodiment, the template comprises pentane.\n\nIn various embodiments, the method does not comprise adding/providing a vesicle template. For example, the method may not comprise adding/providing a polymer emulsion such as a PNIPAM emulsion particle as a template. According, in various embodiments, the method does not comprise growing a shell such as a silica shell around a PNIPAM emulsion particle template. Therefore, in various embodiments, the method does not comprise calcination or high temperatures to remove a template.\n\nThe methods disclosed herein may further comprise one or more post heterocoagulation steps. For example, the method may further comprise a step of purifying the hybrid/composite capsule formed in the mixture to remove any impurities such as excess/free polymer particles. The step of purifying the hybrid/composite capsule may comprise centrifuging the mixture, creaming the mixture, allowing the mixture to settle and subsequently decanting the mixture etc. Additional process engineering steps and automated additions or flow chemistry may also be introduced to avoid extra polymer particles without purification step.\n\nThe method may also further comprise a step of subjecting the purified hybrid/composite capsule to a temperature cycle to form a film." + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "379c520f0d95d686651479725707de0cbd1214dd9202c810b2f69b3147f17c13", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999999852994029, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "FIG. 6A is a dark field microscopic image of silica capsule dispersion in water and FIG. 6B is a dark field microscopic image of hetero-coagulated silica capsules with poly-NIPAM latex particles prepared from a method in accordance with an example embodiment disclosed herein. The scale bar in both figures represents 50 pm.\n\nFIG. 7 is a graph showing the particle size distribution of a silica capsule obtained after heterocoagulation.\n\nFIG. 8A is a thermogravimetric analysis (TGA) graph of silica capsules and FIG. 8B is a thermogravimetric analysis (TGA) graph of hetero-coagulated silica capsules with poly-NIPAM latex particles prepared from a method in accordance with an example embodiment disclosed herein.\n\nFIGS. 9A-9C are scanning electron microscopy (SEM) images of sub-20 micron silica capsules stabilised by cetyltrimethylammonium bromide (CTAB) in accordance with an example embodiment disclosed herein, taken at various stages of polymer coating. These images are captured after 2-3 hours after heterocoagulation and film formation under SEM conditions. FIG. 9A shows an SEM image taken at 5,000x magnification, with the scale bar representing 1 pm. FIG. 9B shows an SEM image taken at 5,000x magnification, with the scale bar representing 1 pm. FIG. 9C shows an SEM image taken at 1,000x magnification, with the scale bar representing 10 pm.\n\nFIG. 10A is a scanning electron microscopy (SEM) image of original silica capsules and FIG. 10B is a scanning electron microscopy (SEM) of polycaprolactone particles coated on silica capsules after hetero-coagulation in accordance with an example embodiment disclosed herein. FIG. 10A shows an SEM image taken at 1,000x magnification, with the scale bar representing 10 pm. FIG. 10B shows an SEM image taken at 2,000x magnification, with the scale bar representing 10 pm.", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "FIG. 6A is a dark field microscopic image of silica capsule dispersion in water and FIG. 6B is a dark field microscopic image of hetero-coagulated silica capsules with poly-NIPAM latex particles prepared from a method in accordance with an example embodiment disclosed herein. The scale bar in both figures represents 50 pm.\n\nFIG. 7 is a graph showing the particle size distribution of a silica capsule obtained after heterocoagulation.\n\nFIG. 8A is a thermogravimetric analysis (TGA) graph of silica capsules and FIG. 8B is a thermogravimetric analysis (TGA) graph of hetero-coagulated silica capsules with poly-NIPAM latex particles prepared from a method in accordance with an example embodiment disclosed herein.\n\nFIGS. 9A-9C are scanning electron microscopy (SEM) images of sub-20 micron silica capsules stabilised by cetyltrimethylammonium bromide (CTAB) in accordance with an example embodiment disclosed herein, taken at various stages of polymer coating. These images are captured after 2-3 hours after heterocoagulation and film formation under SEM conditions. FIG. 9A shows an SEM image taken at 5,000x magnification, with the scale bar representing 1 pm. FIG. 9B shows an SEM image taken at 5,000x magnification, with the scale bar representing 1 pm. FIG. 9C shows an SEM image taken at 1,000x magnification, with the scale bar representing 10 pm.\n\nFIG. 10A is a scanning electron microscopy (SEM) image of original silica capsules and FIG. 10B is a scanning electron microscopy (SEM) of polycaprolactone particles coated on silica capsules after hetero-coagulation in accordance with an example embodiment disclosed herein. FIG. 10A shows an SEM image taken at 1,000x magnification, with the scale bar representing 10 pm. FIG. 10B shows an SEM image taken at 2,000x magnification, with the scale bar representing 10 pm." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9136101962913951, + "doc_id": "20e59683dd960e2f252d0457d024ed6f25a9c5c04bfdc6cd7b941239d2b100d2", + "edit_distance": 0.2, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9995, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## INTERNATIONAL SEARCH REPORT\n\nInformation on patent family members\n\nInternational application No.\n\nPCT/SG201 9/05051 1\n\nForm PCT/ISA/21 0 (patent family annex) (July 201 9)", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## INTERNATIONAL SEARCH REPORT\n\nInformation on patent family members\n\nInternational application No.\n\nForm PCT/ISA/21 0 (patent family annex) (July 201 9)\n\nPCT/SG201 9/05051 1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9712879620975059, + "doc_id": "86e3a821f4eed5bb0df6ddd2aa8aa7046cc1a3d3648c8c2bffdc48534345551f", + "edit_distance": 0.015384615384615385, + "f1_score": 0.9904761904761905, + "meteor": 0.9918737219988114, + "precision": 0.9904761904761905, + "pred_md": "- 13. The method of claim 5, wherein the heterocoagulating step is carried out in the presence of at least two different surfactants comprising at least one cationic surfactant and at least one anionic surfactant.\n- 14. The method of claim 13, wherein the at least two different surfactants are independently selected from the group consisting of a primary amine surfactant, a secondary amine surfactant, a tertiary amine surfactant, a quaternary amine surfactant, cetyl trimethylammonium bromide (CTAB), sodium dodecyl sulfate (SDS), carboxylic acid salt, sulfonic acid salt, phosphoric acid ester, alcohol sulfate, alkylbenzene sulfonate or combinations thereof.\n- 15. A hybrid capsule comprising:\n- a primary capsule having a shell; and\n- an organic polymer coating layer over the shell of the primary capsule.\n- 16. The hybrid capsule of claim 15, wherein the hybrid capsule is an organicinorganic capsule and the primary capsule is an inorganic capsule.\n- 17. The hybrid capsule of claim 15 or 16, wherein the shell of the primary capsule is substantially hermetically sealed by the polymer coating layer.\n- 18. The hybrid capsule of any one of claims 15-1 7, wherein the hybrid capsule is micron- or submicron-sized.\n- 19. The hybrid capsule of any one of claims 15-1 8, wherein the hybrid capsule is substantially resistant to breaking under scanning electron microscopy (SEM) vacuum conditions.", + "recall": 0.9904761904761905, + "true_md": "- 13. The method of claim 5, wherein the heterocoagulating step is carried out in the presence of at least two different surfactants comprising at least one cationic surfactant and at least one anionic surfactant.\n\n- 14. The method of claim 13, wherein the at least two different surfactants are independently selected from the group consisting of a primary amine surfactant, a secondary amine surfactant, a tertiary amine surfactant, a quaternary amine surfactant, cetyl trimethylammonium bromide (CTAB), sodium dodecyl sulfate (SDS), carboxylic acid salt, sulfonic acid salt, phosphoric acid ester, alcohol sulfate, alkylbenzene sulfonate or combinations thereof.\n\n- 15. A hybrid capsule comprising:\n\na primary capsule having a shell; and\n\nan organic polymer coating layer over the shell of the primary capsule.\n\n- 16. The hybrid capsule of claim 15, wherein the hybrid capsule is an organic- inorganic capsule and the primary capsule is an inorganic capsule.\n\n- 17. The hybrid capsule of claim 15 or 16, wherein the shell of the primary capsule is substantially hermetically sealed by the polymer coating layer.\n\n- 18. The hybrid capsule of any one of claims 15-1 7, wherein the hybrid capsule is micron- or submicron-sized.\n\n- 19. The hybrid capsule of any one of claims 15-1 8, wherein the hybrid capsule is substantially resistant to breaking under scanning electron microscopy (SEM) vacuum conditions." + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "30bd181f9ef77a36cfa8404505a1bf41656964b447a43e70a91895df66dfa4b3", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9997106481481481, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Form PCT/ISA/21 0 (second sheet) (July 201 9)", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Form PCT/ISA/21 0 (second sheet) (July 201 9)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9647570763709716, + "doc_id": "23d74a41524f76ef02e829165b2989ea792344b16916ffe3848175729059cbd8", + "edit_distance": 0.0221606648199446, + "f1_score": 0.9811320754716982, + "meteor": 0.9907751027120453, + "precision": 0.9811320754716981, + "pred_md": "synthesized were poly(N-isopropylacrylamide) (PNIPAM) latex particles having an average particle size of about 200 nm.\n\n150ml\\_ of D.l. water was heated to 90°C in the 1L- jacketed reactor at the stirring speed of 200rpm. 1.5g of ammonium persulfate and 1.5g of sodium hydrogen carbonate was added. 30g of N-lsopropylacrylamide (NIPAM) and 0.3g of N,N -methylenebis (acrylamide) (BIS) dissolved in 750ml\\_ of water was added into the reactor at the feed rate of 25mL/min for 30min. The mixture was stirred for another 30min after the second feed of 0.3g NIPAM, 0.03g BIS and 0.3g acrylic acid (AA) dissolved in 7.5ml\\_ water was fed into the reactor at the rate of 1 5mL/min. The total 900ml\\_ mixture was allowed to stir at 90°C for another 3hr. The final latex was then filtered to remove aggregates and stored in glass bottle in 60°C oven.\n\nLatex particles were prepared in a few different batches to evaluate their stability against aggregation as well as their thermal response (i.e. response to temperature). The latex particles were characterized by scanning electron microscopy (SEM) and by performing dynamic light scattering (DLS) experiments.\n\n## Scanning electron microscopy (SEM) of latex particles\n\nFIG. 4A and FIG. 4B are SEM images of PNIPAM latex particles taken at different degree of magnifications (i.e. 5,000x and 20,000x respectively). The latex particles were prepared via emulsion polymerization with 1% acrylic acid (AA) and 1% Ν Ν , -methylenebis (acrylamide) (BIS) crosslinker by weight of the monomer latex particles in the absence of a SDS surfactant, and dried at an elevated temperature. As shown in FIG. 4A and FIG. 4B, the PNIPAM latex particles were stable against aggregation. The acrylic acid on the surface of the latex particles provided sufficient charge for latex particles to stabilize in aqueous system and prevented aggregation. Therefore, as demonstrated, a surfactant", + "recall": 0.9811320754716981, + "true_md": "synthesized were poly(N-isopropylacrylamide) (PNIPAM) latex particles having an average particle size of about 200 nm.\n\n150ml\\_ of D.l. water was heated to 90°Cin the 1L- jacketed reactor at the stirring speed of 200rpm. 1.5g of ammonium persulfate and 1.5g of sodium hydrogen carbonate was added. 30g of N-lsopropylacrylamide (NIPAM) and 0.3g of N,N -methylenebis (acrylamide) (BIS) dissolved in 750ml\\_ of water was added into the reactor at the feed rate of 25mL/min for 30min. The mixture was stirred for another 30min after the second feed of 0.3g NIPAM, 0.03g BIS and 0.3g acrylic acid (AA) dissolved in 7.5ml\\_ water was fed into the reactor at the rate of 1 5mL/min. The total 900ml\\_ mixture was allowed to stir at 90°Cfor another 3hr. The final latex was then filtered to remove aggregates and stored in glass bottle in 60°Coven.\n\nLatex particles were prepared in a few different batches to evaluate their stability against aggregation as well as their thermal response (i.e. response to temperature). The latex particles were characterized by scanning electron microscopy (SEM) and by performing dynamic light scattering (DLS) experiments.\n\n## Scanning electron microscopy (SEM) of latex particles\n\nFIG. 4A and FIG. 4B are SEM images of PNIPAM latex particles taken at different degree of magnifications (i.e. 5,000x and 20,000x respectively). The latex particles were prepared via emulsion polymerization with 1% acrylic acid (AA) and 1% Ν , Ν -methylenebis (acrylamide) (BIS) crosslinker by weight of the monomer latex particles in the absence of a SDS surfactant, and dried at an elevated temperature. As shown in FIG. 4A and FIG. 4B, the PNIPAM latex particles were stable against aggregation. The acrylic acid on the surface of the latex particles provided sufficient charge for latex particles to stabilize in aqueous system and prevented aggregation. Therefore, as demonstrated, a surfactant" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9772608519480401, + "doc_id": "ed428cae704cd9b330c3ea0d2b03a1f31985ae8b05b615553513a3251c12669e", + "edit_distance": 0.027422303473491772, + "f1_score": 0.9623655913978496, + "meteor": 0.9734619345935162, + "precision": 0.9623655913978495, + "pred_md": "whiteboard items (e.g. by transcribing digital ink on a whiteboard canvas and creating to-do items from the transcription) and, as a result, savings in time and utilization of computing resources can be realized. Other technical benefits not specifically mentioned herein can also be realized through implementations of the disclosed subject matter.\n\n[0006] In order to provide the technical benefits described above, and potentially others, a digital whiteboard application is configured to present a user interface ('UI') that includes a whiteboard canvas ('canvas') upon which heterogenous objects can be placed in a free-form manner. For example, the canvas might be configured to accept digital ink in the form of text or shapes, sticky notes ('notes'), images, documents, and other types of digital objects. The objects can be placed anywhere on the canvas, and the canvas can grow in order to accommodate the objects.\n\n[0007] The canvas can also present dynamic templates and regions. Dynamic templates can include one or more regions that together provide structure to objects contained therein, and behavior that is typically based upon a purpose or desired outcome. For example, and without limitation, a template can be defined and placed on a whiteboard canvas that includes regions configured for performing a retrospective analysis for a project (e.g. what went well, what didn't go well, what can be improved). As another example, a template might include regions for tracking the status of to-do items in a project (e.g. not started, in-progress, or complete). Templates including other types and arrangements of regions for performing other types of functions can be utilized in other configurations.\n\n[0008] Objects, such as those on a canvas or contained within regions of a template, have associated logical representations. The logical representation for an object maintains semantic data (e.g. metadata) about the object such as, for example, data indicating the type of object, the creator, the creation date and time, and/or other types of information. Templates and regions can modify the logical representations associated with objects in order to create semantic context for the objects.\n\n[0009] Templates and regions can also generate visual representations of objects based upon their associated logical representations. For example, and without limitation, a template might define a region on the canvas that is configured to present an object in a first visual representation (e.g. in a particular color, format, or arrangement) that is based upon the logical representation associated with the object. In this example, a user might create an object (e.g. a note containing text) on the canvas and move the object (e.g. by 'dragging' the object) to the region. In response thereto, the template or the region can modify the logical representation associated with the object and present the object in the first region", + "recall": 0.9623655913978495, + "true_md": "whiteboard items (e.g. by transcribing digital ink on a whiteboard canvas and creating to-do items from the transcription) and, as a result, savings in time and utilization of computing resources can be realized. Other technical benefits not specifically mentioned herein can also be realized through implementations of the disclosed subject matter.\n\n[0006] In order to provide the technical benefits described above, and potentially others, a digital whiteboard application is configured to present a user interface (“UI”) that includes a whiteboard canvas (“canvas”) upon which heterogenous objects can be placed in a free-form manner. For example, the canvas might be configured to accept digital ink in the form of text or shapes, sticky notes (“notes”), images, documents, and other types of digital objects. The objects can be placed anywhere on the canvas, and the canvas can grow in order to accommodate the objects.\n\n[0007] The canvas can also present dynamic templates and regions. Dynamic templates can include one or more regions that together provide structure to objects contained therein, and behavior that is typically based upon a purpose or desired outcome. For example, and without limitation, a template can be defined and placed on a whiteboard canvas that includes regions configured for performing a retrospective analysis for a project (e.g. what went well, what didn’t go well, what can be improved). As another example, a template might include regions for tracking the status of to-do items in a project (e.g. not started, in-progress, or complete). Templates including other types and arrangements of regions for performing other types of functions can be utilized in other configurations.\n\n[0008] Objects, such as those on a canvas or contained within regions of a template, have associated logical representations. The logical representation for an object maintains semantic data (e.g. metadata) about the object such as, for example, data indicating the type of object, the creator, the creation date and time, and/or other types of information. Templates and regions can modify the logical representations associated with objects in order to create semantic context for the objects.\n\n[0009] Templates and regions can also generate visual representations of objects based upon their associated logical representations. For example, and without limitation, a template might define a region on the canvas that is configured to present an object in a first visual representation (e.g. in a particular color, format, or arrangement) that is based upon the logical representation associated with the object. In this example, a user might create an object (e.g. a note containing text) on the canvas and move the object (e.g. by “dragging” the object) to the region. In response thereto, the template or the region can modify the logical representation associated with the object and present the object in the first region" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "1d9fd812e7b4b65497e0033af3f50e9214725e265f953c206c7df9d94f979d79", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999999811061174, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Additionally, when describing some embodiments, the disclosure may have disclosed a method and/or process as a particular sequence of steps. However, unless otherwise required, it will be appreciated that the method or process should not be limited to the particular sequence of steps disclosed. Other sequences of steps may be possible. The particular order of the steps disclosed herein should not be construed as undue limitations. Unless otherwise required, a method and/or process disclosed herein should not be limited to the steps being carried out in the order written. The sequence of steps may be varied and still remain within the scope of the disclosure.\n\nFurthermore, it will be appreciated that while the present disclosure provides embodiments having one or more of the features/characteristics discussed herein, one or more of these features/characteristics may also be disclaimed in other alternative embodiments and the present disclosure provides support for such disclaimers and these associated alternative embodiments.\n\n## DESCRIPTION OF EMBODIMENTS\n\nExample, non-limiting embodiments of a method of preparing a hybrid capsule, and said hybrid capsule are disclosed hereinafter.\n\nIn various embodiments, there is provided a method of preparing a hybrid capsule. In various embodiments, the capsule comprises an outer shell encapsulating an inner core that is capable of carrying one or more cargoes/actives. The core may be empty or loaded with one or more cargoes/actives. Accordingly, in various embodiments, the capsule is different from a solid particle that does not have a core for carrying one or more cargoes/actives.\n\nThe hybrid capsule may be a composite capsule. In various embodiments, the hybrid capsule comprises at least two different materials in its composition", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Additionally, when describing some embodiments, the disclosure may have disclosed a method and/or process as a particular sequence of steps. However, unless otherwise required, it will be appreciated that the method or process should not be limited to the particular sequence of steps disclosed. Other sequences of steps may be possible. The particular order of the steps disclosed herein should not be construed as undue limitations. Unless otherwise required, a method and/or process disclosed herein should not be limited to the steps being carried out in the order written. The sequence of steps may be varied and still remain within the scope of the disclosure.\n\nFurthermore, it will be appreciated that while the present disclosure provides embodiments having one or more of the features/characteristics discussed herein, one or more of these features/characteristics may also be disclaimed in other alternative embodiments and the present disclosure provides support for such disclaimers and these associated alternative embodiments.\n\n## DESCRIPTION OF EMBODIMENTS\n\nExample, non-limiting embodiments of a method of preparing a hybrid capsule, and said hybrid capsule are disclosed hereinafter.\n\nIn various embodiments, there is provided a method of preparing a hybrid capsule. In various embodiments, the capsule comprises an outer shell encapsulating an inner core that is capable of carrying one or more cargoes/actives. The core may be empty or loaded with one or more cargoes/actives. Accordingly, in various embodiments, the capsule is different from a solid particle that does not have a core for carrying one or more cargoes/actives.\n\nThe hybrid capsule may be a composite capsule. In various embodiments, the hybrid capsule comprises at least two different materials in its composition" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9775828233049177, + "doc_id": "75ac61e0b3dd32fdda32ed481f6ddd93196abcb8489e58947ce134c25992f09c", + "edit_distance": 0.022099447513812154, + "f1_score": 0.9622166246851386, + "meteor": 0.9789712668321388, + "precision": 0.9695431472081218, + "pred_md": "selected based upon other hardware or software capabilities of the computing device 102 upon which it is displayed.\n\n[0074] In the example shown in FIG. 8E, the template 116 from FIGS. 8A-8D has been presented on a mobile computing device 102A. In this example, the regions 118J118L and the objects presented therein are rendered in a manner that is suitable for the smaller display screen of the mobile computing device 102A. For example, the digital ink objects 302B'-302B'' shown on a larger screen might be displayed as text on the screen of the mobile computing device 102A. Templates 116 and regions 118 can customize their display in other ways based upon other characteristics of a hardware device.\n\n[0075] FIGS. 9A-9I are user interface diagrams showing additional aspects of the configuration and operation of the dynamic templates 116 and regions 118 disclosed herein. In the example illustrated in these FIGS., a user has created four note objects 302C on the canvas 114 in the manner described above. The user has also annotated each of the note objects 302C with text. The text is stored in the logical representations 202 associated with the note objects 302C. This is illustrated in FIG. 9A.\n\n[0076] Continuing this example with regard to FIG. 9B, a user has drawn a digital ink object 302A in the approximate shape of a square and written the word 'grid' inside the shape. In response thereto, the whiteboard application 104 has recognized the shape and the text and created a region 118M in place of the digital ink object 302A. This is illustrated in FIG. 9C. Various mechanisms known to those of skill in the art can be utilized to recognize shapes and text in this manner.\n\n[0077] As shown in FIGS. 9D and 9E, the user has then dragged the note objects 302C to the region 118M. The user and potentially other users have also utilized tools from the toolbar 122 to cast votes for the content represented in the note objects 302C. In response thereto, data is also added to the logical representation 202 of each object 302A302C indicating the number of votes. Additionally, the region 118M has presented icons 904A-904C adjacent to each note object 302C indicating the number of votes for that object.\n\n[0078] As described briefly above, regions 118 can also be resized and will adjust their presentation of contained objects 120 when this occurs. In the example shown in FIG. 9F, for instance, a user has utilized the mouse cursor 306 to resize the region 118M. In response thereto, the region 118M has updated its presentation of the note objects 302C to accommodate the changed size of the region 118M. Templates 116 and regions 118 can alsomodify their size based upon the objects 120 contained therein. For example, atemplate 116 or region 118 might change its size to accommodate an object 120 moved into the", + "recall": 0.955, + "true_md": "selected based upon other hardware or software capabilities of the computing device 102 upon which it is displayed.\n\n[0074] In the example shown in FIG. 8E, the template 116 from FIGS. 8A-8D has been presented on a mobile computing device 102A. In this example, the regions 118J- 118L and the objects presented therein are rendered in a manner that is suitable for the smaller display screen of the mobile computing device 102A. For example, the digital ink objects 302B’-302B’” shown on a larger screen might be displayed as text on the screen of the mobile computing device 102A. Templates 116 and regions 118 can customize their display in other ways based upon other characteristics of a hardware device.\n\n[0075] FIGS. 9A-9I are user interface diagrams showing additional aspects of the configuration and operation of the dynamic templates 116 and regions 118 disclosed herein. In the example illustrated in these FIGS., a user has created four note objects 302C on the canvas 114 in the manner described above. The user has also annotated each of the note objects 302C with text. The text is stored in the logical representations 202 associated with the note objects 302C. This is illustrated in FIG. 9A .\n\n[0076] Continuing this example with regard to FIG. 9B, a user has drawn a digital ink object 302A in the approximate shape of a square and written the word “grid” inside the shape. In response thereto, the whiteboard application 104 has recognized the shape and the text and created a region 118M in place of the digital ink object 302A. This is illustrated in FIG. 9C. Various mechanisms known to those of skill in the art can be utilized to recognize shapes and text in this manner.\n\n[0077] As shown in FIGS. 9D and 9E, the user has then dragged the note objects 302C to the region 118M. The user and potentially other users have also utilized tools from the toolbar 122 to cast votes for the content represented in the note objects 302C. In response thereto, data is also added to the logical representation 202 of each object 302A- 302C indicating the number of votes. Additionally, the region 118M has presented icons 904A-904C adjacent to each note object 302C indicating the number of votes for that object.\n\n[0078] As described briefly above, regions 118 can also be resized and will adjust their presentation of contained objects 120 when this occurs. In the example shown in FIG. 9F, for instance, a user has utilized the mouse cursor 306 to resize the region 118M. In response thereto, the region 118M has updated its presentation of the note objects 302C to accommodate the changed size of the region 118M. Templates 116 and regions 118 can alsomodify their size based upon the objects 120 contained therein. For example, atemplate 116 or region 118 might change its size to accommodate an object 120 moved into the" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9830341091392076, + "doc_id": "487ce504c9ec8a6a18e606fb473b1744d0abacb8afb44e12610ff1228ac364a7", + "edit_distance": 0.011904761904761904, + "f1_score": 0.9883720930232559, + "meteor": 0.9910710662399852, + "precision": 0.9941520467836257, + "pred_md": "DLS measurements were also performed at varying temperatures from 10°Cto 60°C and the results obtained on the average particle size of the PNIPAM samples are provided in FIG. 5. It is shown that a higher temperature led to decreased particle size (as expected), thereby demonstrating the temperature responsiveness of the latex particles.\n\n## Example 4: Hetero-coagulation of Organic Polymer Latex Particles (i.e. polvNIPAM) with Primary Capsule(s)\n\nIn this example, hetero-coagulation experiments were carried out using poly-NIPAM latex particles as the organic polymer latex particles and CTAB stabilized silica capsules as the primary capsule(s).\n\nSilica capsules dispersion 20.0ml\\_ (10%w/w) was left to stand/allowed to cream in a sealed bottle over a day and then, the water dispersant was removed. The cream was then topped up with D.l. water and redispersed to the initial total volume of 20.0ml\\_. This process was repeated for another 2 cycles to remove free dissolved CTAB.\n\nUnder the working temperature of 60°C, the washed silica capsules dispersion was then added slowly over 1min into 20.0ml\\_ of PNIPAM latex dispersion (5%w/w) for heterocoagulation. For this step, the pH of the latex solution is alkaline (around 8.5) and pH of the silica capsule solution is acidic (around 3.2). Therefore, it will be appreciated that the pH of the heterocoagulation step can fluctuate between about 3 to about 9.5. The resulting mixture was then filtered and dispersed in 20.0ml\\_ of D.l water.\n\nThe hybrid capsules obtained after the heterocoagulation step were also further purified. Purification was achieved by allowing the heterocoagulated, film formed hybrid capsules to cream, separating the aqueous layer containing no capsule from below, resuspending again in water by adding water and gentle stirring, stopping the stirring and allowing the hybrid capsules to cream again.", + "recall": 0.9826589595375722, + "true_md": "DLS measurements were also performed at varying temperatures from 10°Cto 60°Cand the results obtained on the average particle size of the PNIPAM samples are provided in FIG. 5. It is shown that a higher temperature led to decreased particle size (as expected), thereby demonstrating the temperature responsiveness of the latex particles.\n\n## Example 4: Hetero-coagulation of Organic Polymer Latex Particles (i.e. polv- NIPAM) with Primary Capsule(s)\n\nIn this example, hetero-coagulation experiments were carried out using poly-NIPAM latex particles as the organic polymer latex particles and CTAB stabilized silica capsules as the primary capsule(s).\n\nSilica capsules dispersion 20.0ml\\_ (10%w/w) was left to stand/allowed to cream in a sealed bottle over a day and then, the water dispersant was removed. The cream was then topped up with D.l. water and redispersed to the initial total volume of 20.0ml\\_. This process was repeated for another 2 cycles to remove free dissolved CTAB.\n\nUnder the working temperature of 60°C,the washed silica capsules dispersion was then added slowly over 1min into 20.0ml\\_ of PNIPAM latex dispersion (5%w/w) for heterocoagulation. For this step, the pH of the latex solution is alkaline (around 8.5) and pH of the silica capsule solution is acidic (around 3.2). Therefore, it will be appreciated that the pH of the heterocoagulation step can fluctuate between about 3 to about 9.5. The resulting mixture was then filtered and dispersed in 20.0ml\\_ of D.l water.\n\nThe hybrid capsules obtained after the heterocoagulation step were also further purified. Purification was achieved by allowing the heterocoagulated, film formed hybrid capsules to cream, separating the aqueous layer containing no capsule from below, resuspending again in water by adding water and gentle stirring, stopping the stirring and allowing the hybrid capsules to cream again." + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "dff407e88780bf9dc315280e030c82c88d60233c96a2e3f17d8b2cda13b4dc10", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.999999994726785, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "include other components that are not explicitly shown in FIG. 11, or can utilize an architecture completely different than that shown in FIG. 11.\n\n[00100] It should be appreciated that the computing architecture shown in FIG. 11 has been simplified for ease of discussion. It should also be appreciated that the illustrated computing architecture can include and utilize many more computing components, devices, software programs, networking devices, and other components not specifically described herein.\n\n[00101] The disclosure presented herein also encompasses the subject matter set forth in the following clauses:\n\n[00102] Clause 1. A computing device, comprising: a processor; and a memory storing instructions executable by the processor to: present a user interface (UI), the UI comprising a canvas configured for receiving heterogenous objects placed on the canvas in an unstructured manner, the objects having associated logical representations, and a first region on the canvas, the first region being configured to present the objects in a first visual representation or a second visual representation based upon the logical representations associated with the objects; receive user input moving an object of the objects into the first region; and responsive to receiving the user input for moving the object into the first region, modify a logical representation associated with the object, and display the object in the first region in the first visual representation based on the modified logical representation associated with the object.\n\n[00103] Clause 2. The computing device of clause 1, wherein the memory stores further instructions executable by the processor to present the object in the first region in the second visual representation based on the modified logical representation associated with the object.\n\n[00104] Clause 3. The computing device of clauses 1 or 2, wherein the first region is further configured to modify the first visual representation based upon one or more capabilities of the computing device.\n\n[00105] Clause 4. The computing device of any of clauses 1-3, wherein the memory stores further instructions executable by the processor to: receive user input for moving an object from the canvas to the first region; and responsive to receiving the user input for moving the object from the canvas to the first region, modify the logical representation associated with the moved object.\n\n[00106] Clause 5. The computing device of any of clauses 1-4, wherein the user interface further comprises a second region on the canvas, and wherein the memory stores", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "include other components that are not explicitly shown in FIG. 11, or can utilize an architecture completely different than that shown in FIG. 11.\n\n[00100] It should be appreciated that the computing architecture shown in FIG. 11 has been simplified for ease of discussion. It should also be appreciated that the illustrated computing architecture can include and utilize many more computing components, devices, software programs, networking devices, and other components not specifically described herein.\n\n[00101] The disclosure presented herein also encompasses the subject matter set forth in the following clauses:\n\n[00102] Clause 1. A computing device, comprising: a processor; and a memory storing instructions executable by the processor to: present a user interface (UI), the UI comprising a canvas configured for receiving heterogenous objects placed on the canvas in an unstructured manner, the objects having associated logical representations, and a first region on the canvas, the first region being configured to present the objects in a first visual representation or a second visual representation based upon the logical representations associated with the objects; receive user input moving an object of the objects into the first region; and responsive to receiving the user input for moving the object into the first region, modify a logical representation associated with the object, and display the object in the first region in the first visual representation based on the modified logical representation associated with the object.\n\n[00103] Clause 2. The computing device of clause 1, wherein the memory stores further instructions executable by the processor to present the object in the first region in the second visual representation based on the modified logical representation associated with the object.\n\n[00104] Clause 3. The computing device of clauses 1 or 2, wherein the first region is further configured to modify the first visual representation based upon one or more capabilities of the computing device.\n\n[00105] Clause 4. The computing device of any of clauses 1-3, wherein the memory stores further instructions executable by the processor to: receive user input for moving an object from the canvas to the first region; and responsive to receiving the user input for moving the object from the canvas to the first region, modify the logical representation associated with the moved object.\n\n[00106] Clause 5. The computing device of any of clauses 1-4, wherein the user interface further comprises a second region on the canvas, and wherein the memory stores" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9838082396399257, + "doc_id": "2cfb02bee108cba67daf2173a93ec13c686ce0448f0b5b9ef008756907f7f0d2", + "edit_distance": 0.015810276679841896, + "f1_score": 0.9643835616438354, + "meteor": 0.9845166043731906, + "precision": 0.967032967032967, + "pred_md": "might also define a second region 118B on the canvas 114 that is configured to present objects 120 in a second visual representation 206 (e.g. in a different color, format, or arrangement) based upon an associated logical representation 202. If an object 120 (e.g. the object 120B in FIG. 4) is moved from the first region 118A to the second region 118B, the template 116 or the region 118 can modify the logical representation 206 associated with the object 120 and the object 120 can be displayed in the second region 118B based on the modified logical representation 206. Additional details regarding this process will be provided below.\n\n[0049] FIGS. 5-6F are user interface diagrams illustrating additional aspects of the operation of the computing device 102 and whiteboard application 104 described above. In particular, FIG. 5 shows an illustrative configuration of the UI 106 for selecting a template 116.\n\n[0050] In this the example shown in FIG. 5, thumbnail images 502A and 502B of several templates 116 are shown in the UI 106. The thumbnail image 502A corresponds to a template 116 for performing a retrospective on a project (e.g. performing an analysis of what went well, what didn't go well, and what can be improved for a project). The thumbnail image 502B corresponds to a template 116 for managing a project (commonly referred to as a 'Kanban'). AKanban template 116 might include functionality for tracking the status of to-do items in a project (e.g. not started, in-progress, or complete). Templates 116 including other types and arrangements of regions 118 for performing other types of functions can be utilized in other configurations.\n\n[0051] In the example shown in FIG. 5, a user has selected the thumbnail 502A corresponding to the project retrospective template 116 using a mouse cursor 306 and dragged the thumbnail image 502A onto the canvas 114. In response thereto, the corresponding template 116 has been placed on the canvas 116. This is illustrated in FIG. 6A.\n\n[0052] As shown in FIG. 6A, the retrospective template 116 includes regions 118C, 118D, and 118E. The region 118C includes objects 120 that correspond to the top issues in a project, the region 118D includes objects 120 corresponding to project tasks that went well, and the region 118E includes objects 120 corresponding to project tasks that went badly.\n\n[0053] In the example shown in FIG. 6A, a user has utilized the mouse cursor 306 to drag note objects 302C from the toolbar to the regions 118C-1 18E. In response to the note objects 302C being placed in the regions 118C-1 18E, the template 116 or the regions", + "recall": 0.9617486338797814, + "true_md": "might also define a second region 118B on the canvas 114 that is configured to present objects 120 in a second visual representation 206 (e.g. in a different color, format, or arrangement) based upon an associated logical representation 202. If an object 120 (e.g. the object 120B in FIG. 4) is moved from the first region 118A to the second region 118B, the template 116 or the region 118 can modify the logical representation 206 associated with the object 120 and the object 120 can be displayed in the second region 118B based on the modified logical representation 206. Additional details regarding this process will be provided below.\n\n[0049] FIGS. 5-6F are user interface diagrams illustrating additional aspects of the operation of the computing device 102 and whiteboard application 104 described above. In particular, FIG. 5 shows an illustrative configuration of the UI 106 for selecting a template 116.\n\n[0050] In this the example shown in FIG. 5, thumbnail images 502A and 502B of several templates 116 are shown in the UI 106. The thumbnail image 502A corresponds to a template 116 for performing a retrospective on a project (e.g. performing an analysis of what went well, what didn’tgo well, and what can be improved for a project). The thumbnail image 502B corresponds to a template 116 for managing a project (commonly referred to as a “Kanban”). A Kanban template 116 might include functionality for tracking the status of to-do items in a project (e.g. not started, in-progress, or complete). Templates 116 including other types and arrangements of regions 118 for performing other types of functions can be utilized in other configurations.\n\n[0051] In the example shown in FIG. 5, a user has selected the thumbnail 502A corresponding to the project retrospective template 116 using a mouse cursor 306 and dragged the thumbnail image 502A onto the canvas 114. In response thereto, the corresponding template 116 has been placed on the canvas 116. This is illustrated in FIG. 6A.\n\n[0052] As shown in FIG. 6A, the retrospective template 116 includes regions 118C, 118D, and 118E. The region 118C includes objects 120 that correspond to the top issues in a project, the region 118D includes objects 120 corresponding to project tasks that went well, and the region 118E includes objects 120 corresponding to project tasks that went badly.\n\n[0053] In the example shown in FIG. 6A, a user has utilized the mouse cursor 306 to drag note objects 302C from the toolbar to the regions 118C-1 18E. In response to the note objects 302C being placed in the regions 118C-1 18E, the template 116 or the regions" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9707103233775399, + "doc_id": "325843b9a882302e4a72a5adf0e870160924b11a0eb173f6e1230600a97618a1", + "edit_distance": 0.3819444444444444, + "f1_score": 0.9856115107913669, + "meteor": 0.953174931510192, + "precision": 0.9856115107913669, + "pred_md": "In FIG. 8A, the TGA result of silica micro capsules shows that the residual amount is 82.5%. After hetero-coagulation of poly-NIPAM latex particles with silica capsules, it is shown in FIG. 8B that the residual amount decreased to 6 1%. Therefore, this indicated that the content of poly-NIPAM latex adsorbed on the silica capsules is approximately 20%.\n\nAnalysis of the silica capsules vs. poly-NIPAM coated silica capsules using dark field microscopy and TGA proved that the hetero-coagulated silica capsules with poly-NIPAM latex particles synthesized in the examples are spherical microcapsules having uniform size distribution with approximately 20% temperature responsive poly-NIPAM coating. Poly-NIPAM is also reported to be saltresponsive.\n\n## Scanning electron microscopy of sub-20 micron hetero-coagulated silica capsules with poly-NIPAM latex particles\n\nTo further prove that the hetero-coagulation was successfully achieved, the inventors performed synthesis of sub-20 micron silica capsules using CTAB as the surfactant, which are not breakable under SEM, i.e. able to withstand the vacuum condition used for SEM imaging.\n\nSEM images were obtained at various stages of the polymer coating process (see FIG. 9A, FIG. 9B and FIG. 9C). Based on the SEM images, it is shown very clearly that the inventors were able to coat a uniform layer of polymer around the silica capsules.\n\nExample 5: Fletero-coagulation of Organic Polymer Latex Particles (i.e. polvcaprolactone) with Primary Capsule(s)\n\nIn this example, hetero-coagulation experiments were carried out using polycaprolactone particles as the organic polymer latex particles and silica capsules as the primary capsule(s).", + "recall": 0.9856115107913669, + "true_md": "In FIG. 8A, the TGA result of silica micro capsules shows that the residual amount is 82.5%. After hetero-coagulation of poly-NIPAM latex particles with silica capsules, it is shown in FIG. 8B that the residual amount decreased to 6 1%. Therefore, this indicated that the content of poly-NIPAM latex adsorbed on the silica capsules is approximately 20%.\n\n## Scanning electron microscopy of sub-20 micron hetero-coagulated silica capsules with poly-NIPAM latex particles\n\nTo further prove that the hetero-coagulation was successfully achieved, the inventors performed synthesis of sub-20 micron silica capsules using CTAB as the surfactant, which are not breakable under SEM, i.e. able to withstand the vacuum condition used for SEM imaging.\n\nSEM images were obtained at various stages of the polymer coating process (see FIG. 9A, FIG. 9B and FIG. 9C). Based on the SEM images, it is shown very clearly that the inventors were able to coat a uniform layer of polymer around the silica capsules.\n\nAnalysis of the silica capsules vs. poly-NIPAM coated silica capsules using dark field microscopy and TGA proved that the hetero-coagulated silica capsules with poly-NIPAM latex particles synthesized in the examples are spherical micro- capsules having uniform size distribution with approximately 20% temperature responsive poly-NIPAM coating. Poly-NIPAM is also reported to be salt- responsive.\n\nExample 5: Fletero-coagulation of Organic Polymer Latex Particles (i.e. polvcaprolactone) with Primary Capsule(s)\n\nIn this example, hetero-coagulation experiments were carried out using polycaprolactone particles as the organic polymer latex particles and silica capsules as the primary capsule(s)." + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "146644651659136008edc8fe2d8bdfb0645448e5da8f68bde4325e756be7a66e", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999999880331023, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "advantageously stable under high vacuum such as the vacuum conditions used for SEM measurements.\n\nAdvantageously, embodiments of method involve the deposition of a polymer film on a primary capsule such as a silica capsule using polymer particles, particularly polymer latex particles, without a crosslinking chemistry or curing agent or organic solvent. For example, embodiments of the methods disclosed herein do not involve free radical chemistry which limits application potential and do not require a chemical reaction such as polymer grafting or surface functionalization (such as surface initiated ATRP) of a silica capsule. As such, embodiments of the methods disclosed herein do not need any block co polymer (which is more expensive and require synthetically more steps to produce as compared to the polymer latex particles used in embodiments of the method) or controlled radical polymerization. Special silane monomers such as organo alkoxy silanes to render the silica surface hydrophobic are also not required in embodiments of the methods disclosed herein.\n\nIn this regard, as embodiments of the methods disclosed herein do not use coupling chemistry and are based on physical phenomena, sensitive actives can be encapsulated and applied. Advantageously, embodiments, of the methods disclosed herein are suitable encapsulating a wide variety of active compounds, oils, hydrophobic actives/formulations and also for sensitive actives e.g. actives that react with free radicals. As such, embodiments of the methods disclosed herein are suitable for cosmetic/consumer-based applications such as for perfumes or aromatic oils or other consumer-based product encapsulation.\n\nAs compared to chemical-based methods, embodiments of the disclosed method rely primarily on water-based technology without the need to use organic solvents. For example, water-based chemistry may be employed for both silica capsule and latex synthesis. Advantageously, the water-dispersed polymer latex used do not require chemical curing but instead rely on physical curing (e.g. by making use of temperature or pH) of a polymer layer on a primary capsule shell", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "advantageously stable under high vacuum such as the vacuum conditions used for SEM measurements.\n\nAdvantageously, embodiments of method involve the deposition of a polymer film on a primary capsule such as a silica capsule using polymer particles, particularly polymer latex particles, without a crosslinking chemistry or curing agent or organic solvent. For example, embodiments of the methods disclosed herein do not involve free radical chemistry which limits application potential and do not require a chemical reaction such as polymer grafting or surface functionalization (such as surface initiated ATRP) of a silica capsule. As such, embodiments of the methods disclosed herein do not need any block co polymer (which is more expensive and require synthetically more steps to produce as compared to the polymer latex particles used in embodiments of the method) or controlled radical polymerization. Special silane monomers such as organo alkoxy silanes to render the silica surface hydrophobic are also not required in embodiments of the methods disclosed herein.\n\nIn this regard, as embodiments of the methods disclosed herein do not use coupling chemistry and are based on physical phenomena, sensitive actives can be encapsulated and applied. Advantageously, embodiments, of the methods disclosed herein are suitable encapsulating a wide variety of active compounds, oils, hydrophobic actives/formulations and also for sensitive actives e.g. actives that react with free radicals. As such, embodiments of the methods disclosed herein are suitable for cosmetic/consumer-based applications such as for perfumes or aromatic oils or other consumer-based product encapsulation.\n\nAs compared to chemical-based methods, embodiments of the disclosed method rely primarily on water-based technology without the need to use organic solvents. For example, water-based chemistry may be employed for both silica capsule and latex synthesis. Advantageously, the water-dispersed polymer latex used do not require chemical curing but instead rely on physical curing (e.g. by making use of temperature or pH) of a polymer layer on a primary capsule shell" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9571345080739141, + "doc_id": "1451e9f5556332a9583aa601f0ff3a9852947f4b01c09bd7b3d7cb49b02231be", + "edit_distance": 0.5247933884297521, + "f1_score": 0.9966996699669968, + "meteor": 0.7469696892129145, + "precision": 0.993421052631579, + "pred_md": "(\n\n- (51) International Patent Classification:\n\nB01J 13/10 (2006.0 1)\n\nC08L 33/26 (2006.0 1)\n\n01 33/14 (2006.0 1)\n\nC08L 67/04 (2006.0 1)\n\n- (21) International Application Number:\n\nPCT/SG20 19/0505 11\n\n- (22) International Filing Date:\n\n15 October 2019 (15. 10.2019)\n\n- (25) Filing Language:\n\nEnglish\n\n- (26) Publication Language:\n\nEnglish\n\n- (30) Priority Data:\n\n10201809076S 15 October 2018 (15. 10.2018) SG\n\n- (71) Applicant: AGENCY FOR SCIENCE, TECHNOLO‹ GY AND RESEARCH [SG/SG]; 1 Fusionopolis Way, #20-10, Connexis North Tower, Singapore 138632 (SG).\n- (72) Inventors: THONIYOT, Praveen; c/o Institute of Chemi‹ cal and Engineering Sciences, 1Pesek Road, Jurong Island, Singapore 627833 (SG). VAN HERK, Alexander Maria; c/o Institute of Chemical and Engineering Sciences, 1 Pe‹ sek Road, Jurong Island, Singapore 627833 (SG). ZHAO, Wenguang; c/o Institute of Chemical and Engineering\n\nSciences, 1 Pesek Road, Jurong Island, Singapore 627833 (SG).\n\n- (74) Agent: DONALDSON & BURKINSHAW LLP; 24 Raf‹ fles Place, #15-00 Clifford Centre, Singapore 048621 (SG).\n\n(81)\n\n- Designated States (unless otherwise indicated, for every kind o f national protection av ailable) . AE, AG, AL, AM, AO, AT, AU, AZ, BA, BB, BG, BH, BN, BR, BW, BY, BZ, CA, CH, CL, CN, CO, CR, CU, CZ, DE, DJ, DK, DM, DO, DZ, EC, EE, EG, ES, FI, GB, GD, GE, GH, GM, GT, HN, HR, HU, ID, IL, IN, IR, IS, JO, JP, KE, KG, KH, KN, KP, KR, KW, KZ, LA, LC, LK, LR, LS, LU, LY, MA, MD, ME, MG, MK, MN, MW, MX, MY, MZ, NA, NG, NI, NO, NZ, OM, PA, PE, PG, PH, PL, PT, QA, RO, RS, RU, RW, SA, SC, SD, SE, SG, SK, SL, SM, ST, SV, SY, TH, TJ, TM, TN, TR, TT, TZ, UA, UG, US, UZ, VC, VN, ZA, ZM, ZW.\n- (84) Designated States (unless otherwise indicated, for every kind o f regional protection available) . ARIPO (BW, GH, GM, KE, LR, LS, MW, MZ, NA, RW, SD, SL, ST, SZ, TZ, UG, ZM, ZW), Eurasian (AM, AZ, BY, KG, KZ, RU, TJ, TM), European (AL, AT, BE, BG, CH, CY, CZ, DE, DK, EE, ES, FI, FR, GB, GR, HR, HU, IE, IS, IT, LT, LU, LV, MC, MK, MT, NL, NO, PL, PT, RO, RS, SE, SI, SK, SM,\n\n(54) Title: A METHOD OF PREPARING A HYBRID CAPSULE AND RELATED PRODUCTS\n\nFIG 2\n\nFIG 2\n\n(57) Abstract: There is provided a method of preparing a hybrid capsule, the method comprising heterocoagulating organic polymer latex particles with a primary capsule to form an organic polymer coating layer over a shell of the primary capsule.\n\n[Continued on next page]", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "- (74) Agent: DONALDSON & BURKINSHAW LLP; 24 Raf‹ fles Place, #15-00 Clifford Centre, Singapore 048621 (SG).\n\n- (51) International Patent Classification: B01J 13/10 (2006.0 1) C08L 33/26 (2006.0 1) 01 33/14 (2006.0 1) C08L 67/04 (2006.0 1)\n\n- (21) International Application Number:\n\n- (22) International Filing Date:\n\n- (25) Filing Language:\n\n- (26) Publication Language:\n\n- (30) Priority Data: 10201809076S 15 October 2018 (15. 10.2018) SG\n\n- (71) Applicant: AGENCY FOR SCIENCE, TECHNOLO‹ GY AND RESEARCH [SG/SG]; 1 Fusionopolis Way, #20-10, Connexis North Tower, Singapore 138632 (SG).\n\n- (84) Designated States (unless otherwise indicated, for every kind of regional protection available) . ARIPO (BW, GH, GM, KE, LR, LS, MW, MZ, NA, RW, SD, SL, ST, SZ, TZ, UG, ZM, ZW), Eurasian (AM, AZ, BY, KG, KZ, RU, TJ, TM), European (AL, AT, BE, BG, CH, CY, CZ, DE, DK, EE, ES, FI, FR, GB, GR, HR, HU, IE, IS, IT, LT, LU, LV, MC, MK, MT, NL, NO, PL, PT, RO, RS, SE, SI, SK, SM,\n\n- (72) Inventors: THONIYOT, Praveen; c/o Institute of Chemi‹ cal and Engineering Sciences, 1Pesek Road, Jurong Island, Singapore 627833 (SG). VAN HERK, Alexander Maria; c/o Institute of Chemical and Engineering Sciences, 1 Pe‹ sek Road, Jurong Island, Singapore 627833 (SG). ZHAO, Wenguang; c/o Institute of Chemical and Engineering\n\n- (81) Designated States (unless otherwise indicated, for every kind of national protection av ailable) . AE, AG, AL, AM, AO, AT, AU, AZ, BA, BB, BG, BH, BN, BR, BW, BY, BZ, CA, CH, CL, CN, CO, CR, CU, CZ, DE, DJ, DK, DM, DO, DZ, EC, EE, EG, ES, FI, GB, GD, GE, GH, GM, GT, HN, HR, HU, ID, IL, IN, IR, IS, JO, JP, KE, KG, KH, KN, KP, KR, KW, KZ, LA, LC, LK, LR, LS, LU, LY, MA, MD, ME, MG, MK, MN, MW, MX, MY, MZ, NA, NG, NI, NO, NZ, OM, PA, PE, PG, PH, PL, PT, QA, RO, RS, RU, RW, SA, SC, SD, SE, SG, SK, SL, SM, ST, SV, SY, TH, TJ, TM, TN, TR, TT, TZ, UA, UG, US, UZ, VC, VN, ZA, ZM, ZW.\n\nSciences, 1 Pesek Road, Jurong Island, Singapore 627833 (SG).\n\nPCT/SG20 19/0505 11\n\n15 October 2019 (15. 10.2019)\n\nEnglish\n\nEnglish\n\n(54) Title: A METHOD OF PREPARING A HYBRID CAPSULE AND RELATED PRODUCTS\n\n(57) Abstract: There is provided a method of preparing a hybrid capsule, the method comprising heterocoagulating organic polymer latex particles with a primary capsule to form an organic polymer coating layer over a shell of the primary capsule.\n\n[Continued on next page]\n\nFIG 2" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "c4a218233c63a69579697cebb98b304045a14069a94c6eb60a923cef91a918eb", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999999858306975, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Additionally, embodiments of the methods disclosed herein are also versatile in that they are compatible with primary capsules with or without the structural feature of a mesoporous shell and have the flexibility to work with both micron to submicron sized capsules to accordingly produce micron and submicron particles (e.g. from micro-sized to nano-sized capsule products) with relative ease. Advantageously, embodiments of the method are able to address or ameliorate the challenges faced by primary capsules such as silica microcapsules having nano pores and which typically have difficulty keeping small molecules (like perfume) actives inside the capsule. Advantageously, embodiments of the disclosed method are also able to produce reinforced/strengthened capsules over 50 µΜ , which are typically brittle and easily break when produced by conventional methods.\n\nAdvantageously, embodiments of the disclosed methods employ physical methods that are simple and scalable. Embodiments of the disclosed methods do not involve coacervation to create a polymer shell around a primary capsule such as a silica capsule to produce a hybrid capsule and do not require calcination to remove a template. Instead, embodiments of the methods disclosed herein use a single polymer latex (and not multiple polymers that is e.g. used in layer by layer polymer assembly around a particle). As this is unlike a layer-by-layer approach which requires several different layers to get the desirable thickness, embodiments of the method can achieve the desirable thickness in one single step and are easily scalable. Accordingly, embodiments of the disclosed method are simpler as compared to complex approaches using hydrogen bonding and layer by layer assembly. In addition, embodiments of the disclosed methods can be scaled up to kilograms and even tons since embodiments of the method depend mainly on shear force for breakdown of actives into droplets and surfactants such as cationic surfactants for stabilization of the droplets.", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Additionally, embodiments of the methods disclosed herein are also versatile in that they are compatible with primary capsules with or without the structural feature of a mesoporous shell and have the flexibility to work with both micron to submicron sized capsules to accordingly produce micron and submicron particles (e.g. from micro-sized to nano-sized capsule products) with relative ease. Advantageously, embodiments of the method are able to address or ameliorate the challenges faced by primary capsules such as silica microcapsules having nano pores and which typically have difficulty keeping small molecules (like perfume) actives inside the capsule. Advantageously, embodiments of the disclosed method are also able to produce reinforced/strengthened capsules over 50 µΜ , which are typically brittle and easily break when produced by conventional methods.\n\nAdvantageously, embodiments of the disclosed methods employ physical methods that are simple and scalable. Embodiments of the disclosed methods do not involve coacervation to create a polymer shell around a primary capsule such as a silica capsule to produce a hybrid capsule and do not require calcination to remove a template. Instead, embodiments of the methods disclosed herein use a single polymer latex (and not multiple polymers that is e.g. used in layer by layer polymer assembly around a particle). As this is unlike a layer-by-layer approach which requires several different layers to get the desirable thickness, embodiments of the method can achieve the desirable thickness in one single step and are easily scalable. Accordingly, embodiments of the disclosed method are simpler as compared to complex approaches using hydrogen bonding and layer by layer assembly. In addition, embodiments of the disclosed methods can be scaled up to kilograms and even tons since embodiments of the method depend mainly on shear force for breakdown of actives into droplets and surfactants such as cationic surfactants for stabilization of the droplets." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9705845811312402, + "doc_id": "b1fe7d56e7e8857aa06d6591aaee88140431d7baa2d71739d7a7fd829abf07df", + "edit_distance": 0.03418803418803419, + "f1_score": 0.9763779527559056, + "meteor": 0.9669123107476798, + "precision": 0.9763779527559056, + "pred_md": "The term \"nano\" as used herein is to be interpreted broadly to include dimensions less than about 1000 nm.\n\nThe term 'particle' as used herein broadly refers to a discrete entity or a discrete body. The particle described herein can include an organic, an inorganic, a hybrid or a biological particle etc. The particle used described herein may also be a macro-particle that is formed by an aggregate of a plurality of sub-particles or a fragment of a small object. The particle of the present disclosure may be spherical, substantially spherical, or non-spherical, such as irregularly shaped particles or ellipsoidally shaped particles. The term 'size' when used to refer to the particle broadly refers to the largest dimension of the particle. For example, when the particle is substantially spherical, the term 'size' can refer to the diameter of the particle; or when the particle is substantially non-spherical, the term 'size' can refer to the largest length of the particle.\n\nThe terms \"coupled\" or \"connected\" as used in this description are intended to cover both directly connected or connected through one or more intermediate means, unless otherwise stated.\n\nThe term \"associated with\", used herein when referring to two elements refers to a broad relationship between the two elements. The relationship includes, but is not limited to a physical, a chemical or a biological relationship. For example, when element A is associated with element B, elements A and B may be directly or indirectly attached to each other or element A may contain element B or vice versa.\n\nThe term \"adjacent\" used herein when referring to two elements refers to one element being in close proximity to another element and may be but is not limited to the elements contacting each other or may further include the elements being separated by one or more further elements disposed therebetween.", + "recall": 0.9763779527559056, + "true_md": "The term \"nano\" as used herein is to be interpreted broadly to include dimensions less than about 1000 nm.\n\nThe term “particle” as used herein broadly refers to a discrete entity or a discrete body. The particle described herein can include an organic, an inorganic, a hybrid or a biological particle etc. The particle used described herein may also be a macro-particle that is formed by an aggregate of a plurality of sub-particles or a fragment of a small object. The particle of the present disclosure may be spherical, substantially spherical, or non-spherical, such as irregularly shaped particles or ellipsoidally shaped particles. The term “size” when used to refer to the particle broadly refers to the largest dimension of the particle. For example, when the particle is substantially spherical, the term “size” can refer to the diameter of the particle; or when the particle is substantially non-spherical, the term “size” can refer to the largest length of the particle.\n\nThe terms \"coupled\" or \"connected\" as used in this description are intended to cover both directly connected or connected through one or more intermediate means, unless otherwise stated.\n\nThe term \"associated with\", used herein when referring to two elements refers to a broad relationship between the two elements. The relationship includes, but is not limited to a physical, a chemical or a biological relationship. For example, when element A is associated with element B, elements A and B may be directly or indirectly attached to each other or element A may contain element B or vice versa.\n\nThe term \"adjacent\" used herein when referring to two elements refers to one element being in close proximity to another element and may be but is not limited to the elements contacting each other or may further include the elements being separated by one or more further elements disposed therebetween." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.970717751459476, + "doc_id": "919251059338afb4d166341c469ba92046e889f3baae3cfbc427c52c3e0dc97b", + "edit_distance": 0.025069637883008356, + "f1_score": 0.9884169884169884, + "meteor": 0.9872672058950518, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "may have a PDI of from about 0.01 0 to about 0.030 at about 40°C and a PDI of from about 0.030 to about 0.1 80 at about 20°C. In still yet another example, organic polymer latex particles may have a PDI of from about 0.080 to about 1 at about 40°C and a PDI of from about 0.800 to about 1 at about 20°C.\n\nIn various embodiments, the organic polymer latex particles are temperature responsive. For example, the organic polymer latex particles may exhibit a reversible decrease in size with an increase in temperature. For example, the organic polymer latex particles may decrease in size by no less than about 50% with an increase in temperature from about 20°C to about 40°C.\n\nIn various embodiments, the method further comprises a step of forming the organic polymer latex particles by emulsion polymerization.\n\nIn various embodiments, the primary capsule comprises an inorganic capsule and the shell of the primary capsule comprises an inorganic shell. Flowever, it should be appreciated that the primary capsule may comprise other different types of capsules (other than inorganic capsules). In particular, based on a desired application, the primary capsule may be chosen to be one that best suits that desired application. Accordingly, it should also be appreciated that embodiments of the methods disclosed herein are suitable for a wide variety of capsules and are not limited to inorganic capsules as the primary capsules. Without being bound by theory, it is believed that the high compatibility of embodiments of methods disclosed herein with a large variety of different types of primary capsules stems from the physical steps rather than chemical steps being employed to provide the polymer coating over the primary capsule shell.\n\nIn various embodiments, the at least one primary capsule comprises at least one inorganic particle selected from the group consisting of silica capsule, zirconia capsule, titania capsule or combinations thereof. Accordingly, in various embodiments, the hybrid/composite capsule comprises a silica-polymer capsule,", + "recall": 0.9770992366412213, + "true_md": "may have a PDI of from about 0.01 0 to about 0.030 at about 40°Cand a PDI of from about 0.030 to about 0.1 80 at about 20°C.In still yet another example, organic polymer latex particles may have a PDI of from about 0.080 to about 1 at about 40°Cand a PDI of from about 0.800 to about 1 at about 20°C.\n\nIn various embodiments, the organic polymer latex particles are temperature responsive. For example, the organic polymer latex particles may exhibit a reversible decrease in size with an increase in temperature. For example, the organic polymer latex particles may decrease in size by no less than about 50% with an increase in temperature from about 20°Cto about 40°C.\n\nIn various embodiments, the method further comprises a step of forming the organic polymer latex particles by emulsion polymerization.\n\nIn various embodiments, the primary capsule comprises an inorganic capsule and the shell of the primary capsule comprises an inorganic shell. Flowever, it should be appreciated that the primary capsule may comprise other different types of capsules (other than inorganic capsules). In particular, based on a desired application, the primary capsule may be chosen to be one that best suits that desired application. Accordingly, it should also be appreciated that embodiments of the methods disclosed herein are suitable for a wide variety of capsules and are not limited to inorganic capsules as the primary capsules. Without being bound by theory, it is believed that the high compatibility of embodiments of methods disclosed herein with a large variety of different types of primary capsules stems from the physical steps rather than chemical steps being employed to provide the polymer coating over the primary capsule shell.\n\nIn various embodiments, the at least one primary capsule comprises at least one inorganic particle selected from the group consisting of silica capsule, zirconia capsule, titania capsule or combinations thereof. Accordingly, in various embodiments, the hybrid/composite capsule comprises a silica-polymer capsule," + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9934117005191525, + "doc_id": "3af4e2a3de0bc5979a8002d4e61488437ee4be3ba5970de7463d74f9887fbf3c", + "edit_distance": 0.00392156862745098, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9964689603761319, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Presidential Decree No. 1067, s. 1976 | Official Gazette of the Republic o... https://www.officialgazette.gov.ph/1976/12/31/presidential-decree-no-10...\n\nreview the plans and speciacations and recommend to the Council proper action thereon and the latter shall approve the same only when they are in conformity with the requirements of this Code and the rules and regulations promulgated by the Council. Notwithstanding such approval, neither the engineer who drew up the plans and speciacations of the hydraulic structure, nor the constructor who built it, shall be relieved of his liability for damages in case of failure thereof by reason of defect in plans and speciacations, or failure due to defect in construction, within ten (10) years from the completion of the structure.\n\nAny action to recover such damages must be brought within ave (5) years following such failure.\n\nARTICLE 87. The Council or its duly authorized representatives, in the exercise of its power to investigate and decide cases brought to its cognizance, shall have the power to administer oaths, compel the attendance of witnesses by subpoena and the production of relevant documents by subpoena duces tecum.\n\nNon-compliance or violation of such orders or subpoena and subpoena duces tecum shall be punished in the same manner as indirect contempt of an inferior court upon application by the aggrieved party with the proper Court of First Instance in accordance with the provisions of Rule 71 of the Rules of Court.\n\nARTICLE 88. The Council shall have original jurisdiction over all disputes relating to appropriation, utilization, exploitation, development, control, conservation and protection of waters within the meaning and context of the provisions of this Code.\n\nThe decisions of the Council on water rights controversies shall be immediately executory and the enforcement thereof may be suspended only when a bond, in an amount axed by the Council to answer for damages occasioned by the suspension or stay of execution, shall have been aled by the appealing party, unless the suspension is by virtue of an order of a competent court.\n\nAll disputes shall be decided within sixty (60) days after the parties submit the same for decision or resolution.\n\nThe Council shall have the power to issue writs of execution and enforce its decisions with the assistance of local or national police agencies.\n\nARTICLE 89. The decisions of the Council on water rights controversies may be appealed to the Court of First Instance of the province where the subject matter of the controversy is situated within afteen (15) days from the date the party appealing receives a copy of the decision, on any of the following grounds: (1) grave abuse of discretion; (2) question of law; and (3) questions of fact and law.\n\n## CHAPTER VIII\n\nPenal Provisions\n\n15 of 21\n\n31.05.21, 19:45", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Presidential Decree No. 1067, s. 1976 | Official Gazette of the Republic o...\n\nhttps://www.officialgazette.gov.ph/1976/12/31/presidential-decree-no-10...\n\nreview the plans and speciacations and recommend to the Council proper action thereon and the latter shall approve the same only when they are in conformity with the requirements of this Code and the rules and regulations promulgated by the Council. Notwithstanding such approval, neither the engineer who drew up the plans and speciacations of the hydraulic structure, nor the constructor who built it, shall be relieved of his liability for damages in case of failure thereof by reason of defect in plans and speciacations, or failure due to defect in construction, within ten (10) years from the completion of the structure.\n\nAny action to recover such damages must be brought within ave (5) years following such failure.\n\nARTICLE 87. The Council or its duly authorized representatives, in the exercise of its power to investigate and decide cases brought to its cognizance, shall have the power to administer oaths, compel the attendance of witnesses by subpoena and the production of relevant documents by subpoena duces tecum.\n\nNon-compliance or violation of such orders or subpoena and subpoena duces tecum shall be punished in the same manner as indirect contempt of an inferior court upon application by the aggrieved party with the proper Court of First Instance in accordance with the provisions of Rule 71 of the Rules of Court.\n\nARTICLE 88. The Council shall have original jurisdiction over all disputes relating to appropriation, utilization, exploitation, development, control, conservation and protection of waters within the meaning and context of the provisions of this Code.\n\nThe decisions of the Council on water rights controversies shall be immediately executory and the enforcement thereof may be suspended only when a bond, in an amount axed by the Council to answer for damages occasioned by the suspension or stay of execution, shall have been aled by the appealing party, unless the suspension is by virtue of an order of a competent court.\n\nAll disputes shall be decided within sixty (60) days after the parties submit the same for decision or resolution.\n\nThe Council shall have the power to issue writs of execution and enforce its decisions with the assistance of local or national police agencies.\n\nARTICLE 89. The decisions of the Council on water rights controversies may be appealed to the Court of First Instance of the province where the subject matter of the controversy is situated within afteen (15) days from the date the party appealing receives a copy of the decision, on any of the following grounds: (1) grave abuse of discretion; (2) question of law; and (3) questions of fact and law.\n\n## CHAPTER VIII\n\n## Penal Provisions\n\n15 of 21\n\n31.05.21, 19:45" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9814873309691358, + "doc_id": "788e3b95b82e125f9303d4070d873783c8c5dab34e817567b6c5b74dd029c5d3", + "edit_distance": 0.028397565922920892, + "f1_score": 0.9976689976689977, + "meteor": 0.9928303499288836, + "precision": 0.9953488372093023, + "pred_md": "Presidential Decree No. 1067, s. 1976 | Official Gazette of the Republic o... https://www.officialgazette.gov.ph/1976/12/31/presidential-decree-no-10...\n\nARTICLE 11. The State, for reasons of public policy, may declare waters not previously appropriated, in whole or in part, exempt from appropriation for any or all purposes and, thereupon, such waters may not be appropriated for those purposes.\n\nARTICLE 12. Waters appropriated for a particular purpose may be applied for another purpose only upon prior approval of the Council and on condition that the new use does not unduly prejudice the rights of other permittees, or require an increase in the volume of water.\n\nARTICLE 13. Except as otherwise herein provided, no person, including government instrumentalities or government-owned or controlled corporations, shall appropriate water without a water right, which shall be evidenced by a document known as a water permit.\n\nWater right is the privilege granted by the government to appropriate and use water.\n\nARTICLE 14. Subject to the provisions of this Code concerning the control, protection, conservation, and regulation of the appropriation and use of waters, any person may appropriate or use natural bodies of water without securing a water permit for any of the following:\n\n- a. Appropriation of water by means of hand-carried receptacles; and\n- b. Bathing or washing, watering or dipping of domestic or farm animals, and navigation of watercrafts or transportation of logs and other objects by Xotation.\n\nARTICLE 15. Only citizens of the Philippines, of legal age, as well as juridical persons, who are duly qualiaed by law to exploit and develop water resources, may apply for water permits.\n\nARTICLE 16. Any person who desires to obtain a water permit shall ale an application with the Council who shall make known said application to the public for any protests.\n\nIn determining whether to grant or deny an application, the Council shall consider the following: protests aled, if any; prior permits granted; the availability of water; the water supply needed for beneacial use; possible adverse effects; land-use economics; and other relevant factors.\n\nUpon approval of an application, a water permit shall be issued and recorded.\n\nARTICLE 17. The right to the use of water is deemed acquired as of the date of aling of the application for a water permit in case of approved permits, or as of the date of actual use in a case where no permit is required.\n\nARTICLE 18. All water permits granted shall be subject to conditions of beneacial use, adequate standards of design and construction, and such other terms and conditions as may be imposed by the Council.\n\n5 of 21\n\n31.05.21, 19:45", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Presidential Decree No. 1067, s. 1976 | Official Gazette of the Republic o...\n\nhttps://www.officialgazette.gov.ph/1976/12/31/presidential-decree-no-10...\n\n31.05.21, 19:45\n\n5 of 21\n\nARTICLE 11. The State, for reasons of public policy, may declare waters not previously appropriated, in whole or in part, exempt from appropriation for any or all purposes and, thereupon, such waters may not be appropriated for those purposes.\n\nARTICLE 12. Waters appropriated for a particular purpose may be applied for another purpose only upon prior approval of the Council and on condition that the new use does not unduly prejudice the rights of other permittees, or require an increase in the volume of water.\n\nARTICLE 13. Except as otherwise herein provided, no person, including government instrumentalities or government-owned or controlled corporations, shall appropriate water without a water right, which shall be evidenced by a document known as a water permit.\n\nWater right is the privilege granted by the government to appropriate and use water.\n\nARTICLE 14. Subject to the provisions of this Code concerning the control, protection, conservation, and regulation of the appropriation and use of waters, any person may appropriate or use natural bodies of water without securing a water permit for any of the following:\n\na. Appropriation of water by means of hand-carried receptacles; and\n\nb. Bathing or washing, watering or dipping of domestic or farm animals, and navigation of watercrafts or transportation of logs and other objects by Xotation.\n\nARTICLE 15. Only citizens of the Philippines, of legal age, as well as juridical persons, who are duly qualiaed by law to exploit and develop water resources, may apply for water permits.\n\nARTICLE 16. Any person who desires to obtain a water permit shall ale an application with the Council who shall make known said application to the public for any protests.\n\nIn determining whether to grant or deny an application, the Council shall consider the following: protests aled, if any; prior permits granted; the availability of water; the water supply needed for beneacial use; possible adverse effects; land-use economics; and other relevant factors.\n\nUpon approval of an application, a water permit shall be issued and recorded.\n\nARTICLE 17. The right to the use of water is deemed acquired as of the date of aling of the application for a water permit in case of approved permits, or as of the date of actual use in a case where no permit is required.\n\nARTICLE 18. All water permits granted shall be subject to conditions of beneacial use, adequate standards of design and construction, and such other terms and conditions as may be imposed by the Council." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9825553170216662, + "doc_id": "be0cd7dacaa19b0ff975334ccb97100f22f624fcf9cf410e10fdce0a2a01fb74", + "edit_distance": 0.29347826086956524, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9628792514055932, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "ARTICLE 10. Water may be appropriated for the following purposes: Presidential Decree No. 1067, s. 1976 | Official Gazette of the Republic o... https://www.officialgazette.gov.ph/1976/12/31/presidential-decree-no-10...\n\n- a. Domestic\n- b. Municipal\n- c. Irrigation\n- d. Power generation\n- e. Fisheries\n- f. Livestock raising\n- g. Industrial\n- h. Recreational, and\n- i. Other purposes\n\nUse of water for domestic purposes is the utilization of water for drinking, washing, bathing, cooking or other household needs, home gardens, and watering of lawns or domestic animals.\n\nUse of water for municipal purposes is the utilization of water for supplying the water requirements of the community.\n\nUse of water for irrigation is the utilization of water for producing agricultural crops.\n\nUse of water for power generation is the utilization of water for producing electrical or mechanical power.\n\nUse of water for asheries is the utilization of water for the propagation and culture of ash as a commercial enterprise.\n\nUse of water for livestock raising is the utilization of water for large herds or Xocks of animals raised as a commercial enterprise.\n\nUse of water for industrial purposes is the utilization of water in factories, industrial plants and mines, including the use of water as an ingredient of a anished product.\n\nUse of water for recreational purposes is the utilization of water for swimming pools, bath houses, boating, water skiing, golf courses and other similar facilities in resorts and other places of recreation.\n\n4 of 21\n\n31.05.21, 19:45", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Presidential Decree No. 1067, s. 1976 | Official Gazette of the Republic o...\n\nhttps://www.officialgazette.gov.ph/1976/12/31/presidential-decree-no-10...\n\nARTICLE 10. Water may be appropriated for the following purposes:\n\nUse of water for domestic purposes is the utilization of water for drinking, washing, bathing, cooking or other household needs, home gardens, and watering of lawns or domestic animals.\n\nUse of water for municipal purposes is the utilization of water for supplying the water requirements of the community.\n\nUse of water for irrigation is the utilization of water for producing agricultural crops.\n\nUse of water for power generation is the utilization of water for producing electrical or mechanical power.\n\nUse of water for asheries is the utilization of water for the propagation and culture of ash as a commercial enterprise.\n\nUse of water for livestock raising is the utilization of water for large herds or Xocks of animals raised as a commercial enterprise.\n\nUse of water for industrial purposes is the utilization of water in factories, industrial plants and mines, including the use of water as an ingredient of a anished product.\n\nUse of water for recreational purposes is the utilization of water for swimming pools, bath houses, boating, water skiing, golf courses and other similar facilities in resorts and other places of recreation.\n\n- a. Domestic\n\n- b. Municipal\n\n- c. Irrigation\n\n- d. Power generation\n\n- e. Fisheries\n\n- f. Livestock raising\n\n- g. Industrial\n\n- h. Recreational, and\n\n- i. Other purposes\n\n4 of 21\n\n31.05.21, 19:45" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9119765863943996, + "doc_id": "de05256de9ae3327b4cf6a06c6cbc891041e1b3b5fec2070015a83c864c83cd5", + "edit_distance": 0.08522727272727272, + "f1_score": 0.9966329966329965, + "meteor": 0.9963815882880288, + "precision": 0.9932885906040269, + "pred_md": "- Presidential Decree No. 1067, s. 1976 | Official Gazette of the Republic o...\n\nhttps://www.officialgazette.gov.ph/1976/12/31/presidential-decree-no-10...\n\nARTICLE 2. The objectives of this Code are:\n\n- a. To establish the basic principles and framework relating to the appropriation, control and conservation of water resources to achieve the optimum development and rational utilization of these resources;\n- b. To deane the extent of the rights and obligations of water users and owners including the protection and regulation of such rights;\n- c. To adopt a basic law governing the ownership, appropriation, utilization, exploitation, development, conservation and protection of water resources and rights to land related thereto; and\n- d. To identify the administrative agencies which will enforce this Code.\n\nARTICLE 3. The underlying principles of this code are:\n\n- a. All waters belong to the State.\n- b. All waters that belong to the State can not be the subject to acquisitive prescription.\n- c. The State may allow the use or development of waters by administrative concession.\n- d. The utilization, exploitation, development, conservation and protection of water resources shall be subject to the control and regulation of the government through the National Water Resources Council, hereinafter referred to as the Council.\n- e. Preference in the use and development of waters shall consider current usages and be responsive to the changing needs of the country.\n\nARTICLE 4. Waters, as used in this Code, refers to water under the grounds, water above the ground, water in the atmosphere and the waters of the sea within the territorial jurisdiction of the Philippines.\n\n## CHAPTER II\n\n## Ownership of Waters\n\nARTICLE 5. The following belong to the State:\n\n- a. Rivers and their natural beds;\n- b. Continuous or intermittent waters of springs and brooks running in their natural beds and the beds themselves;\n\n2 of 21\n\n31.05.21, 19:45", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Presidential Decree No. 1067, s. 1976 | Official Gazette of the Republic o...\n\nhttps://www.officialgazette.gov.ph/1976/12/31/presidential-decree-no-10...\n\nARTICLE 2. The objectives of this Code are:\n\na. To establish the basic principles and framework relating to the appropriation, control and conservation of water resources to achieve the optimum development and rational utilization of these resources;\n\nb. To deane the extent of the rights and obligations of water users and owners including the protection and regulation of such rights;\n\nc. To adopt a basic law governing the ownership, appropriation, utilization, exploitation, development, conservation and protection of water resources and rights to land related thereto; and\n\nd. To identify the administrative agencies which will enforce this Code.\n\nARTICLE 3. The underlying principles of this code are:\n\na. All waters belong to the State.\n\nb. All waters that belong to the State can not be the subject to acquisitive prescription.\n\nc. The State may allow the use or development of waters by administrative concession.\n\nd. The utilization, exploitation, development, conservation and protection of water resources shall be subject to the control and regulation of the government through the National Water Resources Council, hereinafter referred to as the Council.\n\ne. Preference in the use and development of waters shall consider current usages and be responsive to the changing needs of the country.\n\nARTICLE 4. Waters, as used in this Code, refers to water under the grounds, water above the ground, water in the atmosphere and the waters of the sea within the territorial jurisdiction of the Philippines.\n\nARTICLE 5. The following belong to the State:\n\na. Rivers and their natural beds;\n\nb. Continuous or intermittent waters of springs and brooks running in their natural beds and the beds themselves;\n\n## CHAPTER II\n\n## Ownership of Waters\n\n2 of 21\n\n31.05.21, 19:45" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9172090013129143, + "doc_id": "7e7a7ff54538d9ea531b2aae24f94cef68d781163d275cc26a9e355f27f23ac1", + "edit_distance": 0.035794183445190156, + "f1_score": 0.9971014492753623, + "meteor": 0.9962759479447145, + "precision": 0.9942196531791907, + "pred_md": "- Presidential Decree No. 1067, s. 1976 | Official Gazette of the Republic o... https://www.officialgazette.gov.ph/1976/12/31/presidential-decree-no-10...\n- 1. Appropriation of water without a water permit, unless such person is expressly exempted from securing a permit by the provisions of this Code.\n- 2. Unauthorized obstruction of an irrigation canal.\n- 3. Cultivation of a river bed, sand bar or tidal Xat without permission.\n- 4. Malicious destruction of hydraulic works or structure valued at not exceeding Twenty-Five Thousand Pesos (P25,000.00).\n- B. A ane exceeding Three Thousand Pesos (P3,000.00) but not more than Six Thousand Pesos (P6,000.00) or imprisonment exceeding three (3) years but not more than six (6) years, or both such ane and imprisonment in the discretion of the Court, shall be imposed on any person who commits any of the following acts:\n- 1. Distribution for public consumption of water which adversely affects the health and safety of the public.\n- 2. Excavation or enlargement of the opening of a hot spring without permission.\n- 3. Unauthorized obstruction of a river or waterway, or occupancy of a river bank or seashore without permission.\n- 4. Establishment of a cemetery or a waste disposal area near a source of water supply or reservoir for domestic municipal use without permission.\n- 5. Constructing, without prior permission of the government agency concerned, works that produce dangerous or noxious substances, or performing acts that result in the introduction of sewage, industrial waste, or any substance that pollutes a source of water supply.\n- 6. Dumping mine tailings and sediments into rivers or waterways without permission.\n- 7. Malicious destruction of hydraulic works or structure valued at more than Twenty-Five Thousand Pesos (P25,000.00) but not exceeding One Hundred Thousand Pesos (P100,000.00).\n- C. A ane exceeding Six Thousand Pesos (P6,000.00) but not more than Ten Thousand Pesos (P10,000.00) or imprisonment exceeding six (6) years but not more than twelve (12) years, or both such ane and imprisonment, in the discretion of the Court, shall be imposed upon any person who commits any of the following acts:\n- 1. Misrepresentation of citizenship in order to qualify for water permit.\n- 2. Malicious destruction of hydraulic works or structure, valued at more than One Hundred Thousand\n\n17 of 21\n\n31.05.21, 19:45", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Presidential Decree No. 1067, s. 1976 | Official Gazette of the Republic o...\n\nhttps://www.officialgazette.gov.ph/1976/12/31/presidential-decree-no-10...\n\n1. Appropriation of water without a water permit, unless such person is expressly exempted from securing a permit by the provisions of this Code.\n\n2. Unauthorized obstruction of an irrigation canal.\n\n3. Cultivation of a river bed, sand bar or tidal Xat without permission.\n\n4. Malicious destruction of hydraulic works or structure valued at not exceeding Twenty-Five Thousand Pesos (P25,000.00).\n\nB. A ane exceeding Three Thousand Pesos (P3,000.00) but not more than Six Thousand Pesos (P6,000.00) or imprisonment exceeding three (3) years but not more than six (6) years, or both such ane and imprisonment in the discretion of the Court, shall be imposed on any person who commits any of the following acts:\n\n1. Distribution for public consumption of water which adversely affects the health and safety of the public.\n\n2. Excavation or enlargement of the opening of a hot spring without permission.\n\n3. Unauthorized obstruction of a river or waterway, or occupancy of a river bank or seashore without permission.\n\n4. Establishment of a cemetery or a waste disposal area near a source of water supply or reservoir for domestic municipal use without permission.\n\n5. Constructing, without prior permission of the government agency concerned, works that produce dangerous or noxious substances, or performing acts that result in the introduction of sewage, industrial waste, or any substance that pollutes a source of water supply.\n\n6. Dumping mine tailings and sediments into rivers or waterways without permission.\n\n7. Malicious destruction of hydraulic works or structure valued at more than Twenty-Five Thousand Pesos (P25,000.00) but not exceeding One Hundred Thousand Pesos (P100,000.00).\n\nC. A ane exceeding Six Thousand Pesos (P6,000.00) but not more than Ten Thousand Pesos (P10,000.00) or imprisonment exceeding six (6) years but not more than twelve (12) years, or both such ane and imprisonment, in the discretion of the Court, shall be imposed upon any person who commits any of the following acts:\n\n1. Misrepresentation of citizenship in order to qualify for water permit.\n\n2. Malicious destruction of hydraulic works or structure, valued at more than One Hundred Thousand\n\n17 of 21\n\n31.05.21, 19:45" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9911834592284198, + "doc_id": "88482330840601e4f891b86b124806cdc96b4f0083fba507a8d46f74e68d3516", + "edit_distance": 0.028513238289205704, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999990876125999, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Presidential Decree No. 1067, s. 1976 | Official Gazette of the Republic o...\n\nhttps://www.officialgazette.gov.ph/1976/12/31/presidential-decree-no-10...\n\nof those who would drill such borings.\n\nNo person shall drill a well without prior permission from the Council.\n\nARTICLE 65. Water from one river basin may be transferred to another river basin only with approval of the Council. In considering any request for such transfer, the Council shall take into account the full costs of the transfer, the beneats that would accrue to the basin of origin without the transfer, the beneats would accrue to the receiving basin on account of the transfer, alternative schemes for supplying water to the receiving basin, and other relevant factors.\n\n## CHAPTER VI\n\n## Conservation and Protection of Waters and Watersheds and Related Land Resources\n\nARTICLE 66. After due notice and hearing when warranted by circumstances, minimum stream Xows for rivers and streams, and minimum water levels for lakes may be established by the Council under such conditions as may be necessary for the protection of the environment, control of pollution, navigation, prevention of salt damage, and general public use.\n\nARTICLE 67. Any watershed or any area of land adjacent to any surface water or overlying any ground water may be declared by the Department of Natural Resources as protected area. Rules and regulations may be promulgated by such Department to prohibit or control such activities by the owners or occupants thereof within the protected area which may damage or cause the deterioration of the surface water or ground water or interfere with the investigation, use, control, protection, management or administration of such waters.\n\nARTICLE 68. It shall be the duty of any person in control of a well to prevent the water from Xowing on the surface of the land, or into any surface water, or any porous stratum underneath the surface without being beneacially used.\n\nARTICLE 69. It shall be the duty of any person in control of a well containing water with minerals or other substances injurious to man, animals, agriculture, and vegetation to prevent such waters from Xowing on the surface of the land or into any surface water or into any other aquifer or porous stratum.\n\nARTICLE 70. No person shall utilize an existing well or pond or spread waters for recharging subterranean or ground water supplies without prior permission of the Council.\n\nARTICLE 71. To promote better water conservation and usage for irrigation purposes, the merger of irrigation associations and the appropriation of waters by associations instead of by individuals shall be encouraged.\n\nNo water permit shall be granted to an individual when his water requirement can be supplied through an\n\n12 of 21\n\n31.05.21, 19:45", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "https://www.officialgazette.gov.ph/1976/12/31/presidential-decree-no-10...\n\nPresidential Decree No. 1067, s. 1976 | Official Gazette of the Republic o...\n\nof those who would drill such borings.\n\nNo person shall drill a well without prior permission from the Council.\n\nARTICLE 65. Water from one river basin may be transferred to another river basin only with approval of the Council. In considering any request for such transfer, the Council shall take into account the full costs of the transfer, the beneats that would accrue to the basin of origin without the transfer, the beneats would accrue to the receiving basin on account of the transfer, alternative schemes for supplying water to the receiving basin, and other relevant factors.\n\n## CHAPTER VI\n\n## Conservation and Protection of Waters and Watersheds and Related Land Resources\n\nARTICLE 66. After due notice and hearing when warranted by circumstances, minimum stream Xows for rivers and streams, and minimum water levels for lakes may be established by the Council under such conditions as may be necessary for the protection of the environment, control of pollution, navigation, prevention of salt damage, and general public use.\n\nARTICLE 67. Any watershed or any area of land adjacent to any surface water or overlying any ground water may be declared by the Department of Natural Resources as protected area. Rules and regulations may be promulgated by such Department to prohibit or control such activities by the owners or occupants thereof within the protected area which may damage or cause the deterioration of the surface water or ground water or interfere with the investigation, use, control, protection, management or administration of such waters.\n\nARTICLE 68. It shall be the duty of any person in control of a well to prevent the water from Xowing on the surface of the land, or into any surface water, or any porous stratum underneath the surface without being beneacially used.\n\nARTICLE 69. It shall be the duty of any person in control of a well containing water with minerals or other substances injurious to man, animals, agriculture, and vegetation to prevent such waters from Xowing on the surface of the land or into any surface water or into any other aquifer or porous stratum.\n\nARTICLE 70. No person shall utilize an existing well or pond or spread waters for recharging subterranean or ground water supplies without prior permission of the Council.\n\nARTICLE 71. To promote better water conservation and usage for irrigation purposes, the merger of irrigation associations and the appropriation of waters by associations instead of by individuals shall be encouraged.\n\nNo water permit shall be granted to an individual when his water requirement can be supplied through an\n\n31.05.21, 19:45\n\n12 of 21" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.985206645525883, + "doc_id": "06d34a87829873ed5923f54a43bbb0d118e107e994b8df9d0e302f5757fcc900", + "edit_distance": 0.8932806324110671, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.7548470402537885, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "purpose of cleaning, repairing or replacing the aqueduct or the removal of obstructions therefrom. Presidential Decree No. 1067, s. 1976 | Official Gazette of the Republic o... https://www.officialgazette.gov.ph/1976/12/31/presidential-decree-no-10...\n\nARTICLE 50. Lower estates are obliged to receive the waters which naturally and without the intervention of man Xow from the higher estates, as well as the stone or earth which they carry with them.\n\nThe owner of the lower estate can not construct works which will impede this natural Xow, unless he provides an alternative method of drainage; neither can the owner of the higher estate make works which will increase this natural Xow.\n\nARTICLE 51. The banks of rivers and streams and the shores of the seas and lakes throughout their entire length and within a zone of three (3) meters in urban areas, twenty (20) meters in agricultural areas and forty (40) meters in forest areas, along their margins, are subject to the easement of public use in the interest of recreation, navigation, Xoatage, ashing and salvage. No person shall be allowed to stay in this zone longer than what is necessary for recreation, navigation, Xoatage, ashing or salvage or to build structures of any kind.\n\nARTICLE 52. The establishment, extent, form, and conditions of easements of water not expressly determined by the provisions of this Code shall be governed by the provisions of the Civil Code.\n\n## CHAPTER V\n\n## Control of Waters\n\nARTICLE 53. To promote the best interest and the coordinated protection of Xood plain lands, the Secretary of Public Works, Transportation and Communications may declare Xood control areas and promulgate guidelines for governing Xood plain management plans in these areas.\n\nARTICLE 54. In declared Xood control areas, rules and regulations may be promulgated to prohibit or control activities that may damage or cause deterioration of lakes and dikes, obstruct the Xow of water, change the natural Xow of the river, increase Xood losses or aggravate Xood problems.\n\nARTICLE 55. The government may construct necessary Xood control structures in declared Xood control areas, and for this purpose it shall have a legal easement as wide as may be needed along and adjacent to the river bank and outside the bed or channel of the river.\n\nARTICLE 56. River beds, sand bars and tidal Xats may not be cultivated except upon prior permission from the Secretary of the Department of Public Works, Transportation and Communication and such permission shall not be granted where such cultivation obstructs the Xow of water or increase Xood levels so as to cause damage to other areas.\n\nARTICLE 57. Any person may erect levees or revetments to protect his property from Xood, encroachment by\n\n10 of 21\n\n31.05.21, 19:45", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Presidential Decree No. 1067, s. 1976 | Official Gazette of the Republic o... https://www.officialgazette.gov.ph/1976/12/31/presidential-decree-no-10...\n\n10 of 21\n\n31.05.21, 19:45\n\n## CHAPTER V\n\n## Control of Waters\n\nARTICLE 53. To promote the best interest and the coordinated protection of Xood plain lands, the Secretary of Public Works, Transportation and Communications may declare Xood control areas and promulgate guidelines for governing Xood plain management plans in these areas.\n\nARTICLE 54. In declared Xood control areas, rules and regulations may be promulgated to prohibit or control activities that may damage or cause deterioration of lakes and dikes, obstruct the Xow of water, change the natural Xow of the river, increase Xood losses or aggravate Xood problems.\n\nARTICLE 55. The government may construct necessary Xood control structures in declared Xood control areas, and for this purpose it shall have a legal easement as wide as may be needed along and adjacent to the river bank and outside the bed or channel of the river.\n\nARTICLE 56. River beds, sand bars and tidal Xats may not be cultivated except upon prior permission from the Secretary of the Department of Public Works, Transportation and Communication and such permission shall not be granted where such cultivation obstructs the Xow of water or increase Xood levels so as to cause damage to other areas.\n\nARTICLE 57. Any person may erect levees or revetments to protect his property from Xood, encroachment by\n\nARTICLE 52. The establishment, extent, form, and conditions of easements of water not expressly determined by the provisions of this Code shall be governed by the provisions of the Civil Code.\n\nARTICLE 51. The banks of rivers and streams and the shores of the seas and lakes throughout their entire length and within a zone of three (3) meters in urban areas, twenty (20) meters in agricultural areas and forty (40) meters in forest areas, along their margins, are subject to the easement of public use in the interest of recreation, navigation, Xoatage, ashing and salvage. No person shall be allowed to stay in this zone longer than what is necessary for recreation, navigation, Xoatage, ashing or salvage or to build structures of any kind.\n\nThe owner of the lower estate can not construct works which will impede this natural Xow, unless he provides an alternative method of drainage; neither can the owner of the higher estate make works which will increase this natural Xow.\n\nARTICLE 50. Lower estates are obliged to receive the waters which naturally and without the intervention of man Xow from the higher estates, as well as the stone or earth which they carry with them.\n\npurpose of cleaning, repairing or replacing the aqueduct or the removal of obstructions therefrom." + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "87aa2f823a07c8bfb1dc9dcea32ed1adafb107c1f6da453aab711d65724d3d5c", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999999941303531, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Presidential Decree No. 1067, s. 1976 | Official Gazette of the Republic o...\n\nhttps://www.officialgazette.gov.ph/1976/12/31/presidential-decree-no-10...\n\nof the government, the Council is hereby empowered to make all decisions and determinations provided for in this Code.\n\nARTICLE 80. The Council may deputize any o=cial or agency of the government to perform any of its speciac functions or activities.\n\nARTICLE 81. The Council shall provide a continuing program for data collection, research and manpower development needed for the appropriation, utilization, exploitation, conservation, and protection of the water resources of the country.\n\nARTICLE 82. In the implementation of the provisions of this Code, the Council shall promulgate the necessary rules and regulations which may provide for penalties consisting of a ane not exceeding One Thousand Pesos (P1,000.00) and/or suspension or revocation of the water permit or other right to the use of water. Violations of such rules and regulations may be administratively dealt with by the Council.\n\nSuch rules and regulations shall take effect afteen (15) days after publication in newspapers of general circulation.\n\nRules and regulations prescribed by any government agency that pertain to the utilization, exploitation, development, control, conservation, or protection of water resources shall, if the Council so requires, be subject to its approval.\n\nARTICLE 83. The Council is hereby authorized to impose and collect reasonable fees or charges for water resources development from water appropriators, except when it is for purely domestic purposes.\n\nARTICLE 84. The Council and other agencies authorized to enforce this Code are empowered to enter upon private lands, with previous notice to the owner, for the purpose of conducting surveys and hydrologic investigations, and to perform such other acts as are necessary in carrying out their functions including the power to exercise the right of eminent domain.\n\nARTICLE 85. No program or project involving the appropriation, utilization, exploitation, development, control, conservation, or protection of water resources may be undertaken without prior approval of the Council, except those which the Council may, in its discretion, exempt.\n\nThe Council may require consultation with the public prior to the implementation of certain water resources development projects.\n\nARTICLE 86. When plans and speciacations of a hydraulic structure are submitted for approval, the government agency whose functions embrace the type of project for which the structure is intended, shall\n\n14 of 21\n\n31.05.21, 19:45", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Presidential Decree No. 1067, s. 1976 | Official Gazette of the Republic o...\n\nhttps://www.officialgazette.gov.ph/1976/12/31/presidential-decree-no-10...\n\nof the government, the Council is hereby empowered to make all decisions and determinations provided for in this Code.\n\nARTICLE 80. The Council may deputize any o=cial or agency of the government to perform any of its speciac functions or activities.\n\nARTICLE 81. The Council shall provide a continuing program for data collection, research and manpower development needed for the appropriation, utilization, exploitation, conservation, and protection of the water resources of the country.\n\nARTICLE 82. In the implementation of the provisions of this Code, the Council shall promulgate the necessary rules and regulations which may provide for penalties consisting of a ane not exceeding One Thousand Pesos (P1,000.00) and/or suspension or revocation of the water permit or other right to the use of water. Violations of such rules and regulations may be administratively dealt with by the Council.\n\nSuch rules and regulations shall take effect afteen (15) days after publication in newspapers of general circulation.\n\nRules and regulations prescribed by any government agency that pertain to the utilization, exploitation, development, control, conservation, or protection of water resources shall, if the Council so requires, be subject to its approval.\n\nARTICLE 83. The Council is hereby authorized to impose and collect reasonable fees or charges for water resources development from water appropriators, except when it is for purely domestic purposes.\n\nARTICLE 84. The Council and other agencies authorized to enforce this Code are empowered to enter upon private lands, with previous notice to the owner, for the purpose of conducting surveys and hydrologic investigations, and to perform such other acts as are necessary in carrying out their functions including the power to exercise the right of eminent domain.\n\nARTICLE 85. No program or project involving the appropriation, utilization, exploitation, development, control, conservation, or protection of water resources may be undertaken without prior approval of the Council, except those which the Council may, in its discretion, exempt.\n\nThe Council may require consultation with the public prior to the implementation of certain water resources development projects.\n\nARTICLE 86. When plans and speciacations of a hydraulic structure are submitted for approval, the government agency whose functions embrace the type of project for which the structure is intended, shall\n\n14 of 21\n\n31.05.21, 19:45" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9898052186964653, + "doc_id": "ed2cd2e18c6da5c2d67dae4de32d3557d477bfe84d0644d607cc0ac6317bae1f", + "edit_distance": 0.08056872037914692, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9996349238673352, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Presidential Decree No. 1067, s. 1976 | Official Gazette of the Republic o...\n\nhttps://www.officialgazette.gov.ph/1976/12/31/presidential-decree-no-10...\n\nirrigation association.\n\nARTICLE 72. In the consideration of a proposed water resource project, due regard shall be given to ecological changes resulting from the construction of the project in order to balance the needs of development and the protection of the environment.\n\nARTICLE 73. The conservation of ash and wildlife shall receive proper consideration and shall be coordinated with other features of water resources development programs to insure that ash and wildlife values receive equal attention with other project purposes.\n\nARTICLE 74. Swamps and marshes which are owned by the State and which have primary value for waterfowl propagation or other wildlife purposes may be reserved and protected from drainage operation and development.\n\nARTICLE 75. No person shall, without prior permission from the National Pollution Control Commission, build any works that may produce dangerous or noxious substances or perform any act which may result in the introduction of sewage, industrial waste, or any pollutant into any source of water supply.\n\nWater pollution is the impairment of the quality of water beyond a certain standard. This standard may vary according to the use of the water and shall be set by the National Pollution Control Commission.\n\nARTICLE 76. The establishment of cemeteries and waste disposal areas that may affect the source of a water supply or a reservoir for domestic or municipal use shall be subject to the rules and regulations promulgated by the Department of Health.\n\nARTICLE 77. Tailings from mining operations and sediments from placer mining shall not be dumped into rivers and waterways without prior permission from the Council upon recommendation by the National Pollution Control Commission.\n\nARTICLE 78. The application of agricultural fertilizers and pesticides may be prohibited or regulated by the National Pollution Control Commission in the areas where such application may cause pollution of a source of water supply.\n\n## CHAPTER VII\n\n## Administration of Waters and Enforcement of the Provisions of This Code\n\nARTICLE 79. The administration and enforcement of the provisions of this Code, including the granting of permits and the imposition of penalties for administrative violations hereof, are hereby vested in the Council, and except in regard to those functions which under this Code are speciacally conferred upon other agencies\n\n13 of 21\n\n31.05.21, 19:45", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Presidential Decree No. 1067, s. 1976 | Official Gazette of the Republic o...\n\nhttps://www.officialgazette.gov.ph/1976/12/31/presidential-decree-no-10...\n\nirrigation association.\n\nARTICLE 72. In the consideration of a proposed water resource project, due regard shall be given to ecological changes resulting from the construction of the project in order to balance the needs of development and the protection of the environment.\n\nARTICLE 73. The conservation of ash and wildlife shall receive proper consideration and shall be coordinated with other features of water resources development programs to insure that ash and wildlife values receive equal attention with other project purposes.\n\nARTICLE 74. Swamps and marshes which are owned by the State and which have primary value for waterfowl propagation or other wildlife purposes may be reserved and protected from drainage operation and development.\n\nARTICLE 75. No person shall, without prior permission from the National Pollution Control Commission, build any works that may produce dangerous or noxious substances or perform any act which may result in the introduction of sewage, industrial waste, or any pollutant into any source of water supply.\n\nWater pollution is the impairment of the quality of water beyond a certain standard. This standard may vary according to the use of the water and shall be set by the National Pollution Control Commission.\n\nARTICLE 76. The establishment of cemeteries and waste disposal areas that may affect the source of a water supply or a reservoir for domestic or municipal use shall be subject to the rules and regulations promulgated by the Department of Health.\n\nARTICLE 77. Tailings from mining operations and sediments from placer mining shall not be dumped into rivers and waterways without prior permission from the Council upon recommendation by the National Pollution Control Commission.\n\nARTICLE 78. The application of agricultural fertilizers and pesticides may be prohibited or regulated by the National Pollution Control Commission in the areas where such application may cause pollution of a source of water supply.\n\nARTICLE 79. The administration and enforcement of the provisions of this Code, including the granting of permits and the imposition of penalties for administrative violations hereof, are hereby vested in the Council, and except in regard to those functions which under this Code are speciacally conferred upon other agencies\n\n## CHAPTER VII\n\n## Administration of Waters and Enforcement of the Provisions of This Code\n\n13 of 21\n\n31.05.21, 19:45" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6484808186652559, + "doc_id": "b5b3351801fb2983cdb837b8bf5b9c87914ffb3514f488137a0d6dce25893c0a", + "edit_distance": 0.7171717171717171, + "f1_score": 0.892430278884462, + "meteor": 0.7545678737535847, + "precision": 0.8175182481751825, + "pred_md": "-\n\n( a\n\n;t~t I~~\n\n8\n\n!\n\n[ REpUBLIC CT No.9 A\n\n2 9 G ]\n\nJ\n\n.the\n\n8\n\nI\n\nI\n\nI\n\nj\n\n;\n\n(\n\n;\n\nAN ACT STRENGTHENING THE MEAT INSPECTION SYSTEM IN THE COUNTRY, ORDAIN1NG FOR THIS PURPOSE A \"MEAT INSPECTION CODE OF THE PHILIPPINES\" AND FOR OTHER PURPOSES\n\nBe it enacted bv the Senate and House of Representatives of Philippi~es in Congress assembled:\n\nSECTION 1. Short Title. -This .\" Act shall be known as \"The Meat Inspection Code of the Philippines\n\n## CI-lt\\PTER I\n\nDECLARA nON OF POLICY AND DEFINmONS\n\nSEC. 2. Declaration of Policy. -It is hereby the policy of the Statp7\n\nS. No. 2691\n\nH. No. 6587\n\n,\n\nPMS\n\nLIBRARY\n\ne:/y--\n\n.<1Ioltgms\n\ni\n\n~'-'c-'\n\n.\n\n~tpub~c f t~t '~ilippint9 o\n\nof tqe ':JIqilippines ~rtro ~Z1niln\n\nij!;wr1ft4 Qtnngrr55\n\naI:4irb ilt~gular ~~55inn\n\nBegun and held in Metro Manila, on Monday; the twenty-eighth day of July, two thousand three.\n\n.\n\n&:.~\n\n'- '-~~\n\nt\n\n,\n\n..\n\n,\n\n,", + "recall": 0.9824561403508771, + "true_md": "# ~tpub~c of t~t ’~ilippint9\n\n# of tqe ’:JIqilippines\n\n# ~rtro ~Z1niln\n\n# ij!;wr1ft4 Qtnngrr55\n\n# aI:4irb ilt~gular ~~55inn\n\n# [ REpUBLIC ACT No.9 2 9 G ] J\n\nBegun and held in Metro Manila, on Monday; the twenty-eighth day of July, two thousand three.\n\nBe it enacted bv the Senate and House of Representatives of Philippi~es in Congress assembled:\n\nSECTION 1. Short Title. -This Act shall be known as \"The Meat Inspection Code of the Philippines.\"\n\nSEC. 2. Declaration of Policy. -It is hereby the policy of the Statp7\n\n## AN ACT STRENGTHENING THE MEAT INSPECTION SYSTEM IN THE COUNTRY, ORDAIN1NG FOR THIS PURPOSE A \"MEAT INSPECTION CODE OF THE PHILIPPINES\" AND FOR OTHER PURPOSES\n\n## CI-lt\\PTER I\n\n## DECLARA nON OF POLICY AND DEFINmONS\n\n;t~t I~~\n\nS. No. 2691\n\nH. No. 6587\n\ne:/y-- ." + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "30d0ca91d2171b5aa5bd34dfef216d89c5feb790ee5575f9f4a375db3ad2e344", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999999962527962, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Presidential Decree No. 1067, s. 1976 | Official Gazette of the Republic o...\n\nhttps://www.officialgazette.gov.ph/1976/12/31/presidential-decree-no-10...\n\ninferior right in the other.\n\nFor this purpose the Council shall promulgate rules and regulations and declare the existence of control areas for the coordinated development, protection, and utilization of subterranean or ground water and surface waters.\n\nControl area is an area of land where subterranean or ground water and surface water are so interrelated that withdrawal and use in one similarly affects the other. The boundary of a control area may be altered from time to time, as circumstances warrant.\n\nARTICLE 33. Water contained in open canals, aqueducts or reservoirs of private persons may be used by any person for domestic purpose or for watering plants as long as the water is withdrawn by manual methods without checking the stream or damaging the canal, aqueduct or reservoir; Provided, That this right may be restricted by the owner should it result in loss or injury to him.\n\nARTICLE 34. A water permittee or appropriator may use any watercourse to convey water to another point in the watercourse for the purpose stated in a permit and such water may be diverted or recaptured at that point by said permittee in the same amount less allowance for normal losses in transit.\n\nARTICLE 35. Works for the storage, diversion, distribution and utilization of water resources shall contain adequate provision for the prevention and control of diseases that may be induced or spread by such works when required by the Council.\n\nARTICLE 36. When the reuse of waste water is feasible, it shall be limited as much as possible, to such uses other than direct human consumption. No person or agency shall distribute such water for public consumption until it is demonstrated that such consumption will not adversely affect the health and safety of the public.\n\nARTICLE 37. In the construction and operation of hydraulic works, due consideration shall be given to the preservation of scenic places and historical relics and, in addition to the provisions of existing laws, no works that would require the destruction or removal of such places or relics shall be undertaken without showing that the destruction or removal is necessary and unavoidable.\n\nARTICLE 38. Authority for the construction of dams, bridges and other structures across of which may interfere with the Xow of navigable or Xoatable waterways shall arst be secured from the Department of Public Works, Transportation and Communications.\n\nARTICLE 39. Except in cases of emergency to save life or property, the construction or repair of the following works shall be undertaken only after the plans and speciacations therefor, as may be required by the Council, are approved by the proper government agency; dams for the diversion or storage of water; structures for the\n\n8 of 21\n\n31.05.21, 19:45", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Presidential Decree No. 1067, s. 1976 | Official Gazette of the Republic o...\n\nhttps://www.officialgazette.gov.ph/1976/12/31/presidential-decree-no-10...\n\ninferior right in the other.\n\nFor this purpose the Council shall promulgate rules and regulations and declare the existence of control areas for the coordinated development, protection, and utilization of subterranean or ground water and surface waters.\n\nControl area is an area of land where subterranean or ground water and surface water are so interrelated that withdrawal and use in one similarly affects the other. The boundary of a control area may be altered from time to time, as circumstances warrant.\n\nARTICLE 33. Water contained in open canals, aqueducts or reservoirs of private persons may be used by any person for domestic purpose or for watering plants as long as the water is withdrawn by manual methods without checking the stream or damaging the canal, aqueduct or reservoir; Provided, That this right may be restricted by the owner should it result in loss or injury to him.\n\nARTICLE 34. A water permittee or appropriator may use any watercourse to convey water to another point in the watercourse for the purpose stated in a permit and such water may be diverted or recaptured at that point by said permittee in the same amount less allowance for normal losses in transit.\n\nARTICLE 35. Works for the storage, diversion, distribution and utilization of water resources shall contain adequate provision for the prevention and control of diseases that may be induced or spread by such works when required by the Council.\n\nARTICLE 36. When the reuse of waste water is feasible, it shall be limited as much as possible, to such uses other than direct human consumption. No person or agency shall distribute such water for public consumption until it is demonstrated that such consumption will not adversely affect the health and safety of the public.\n\nARTICLE 37. In the construction and operation of hydraulic works, due consideration shall be given to the preservation of scenic places and historical relics and, in addition to the provisions of existing laws, no works that would require the destruction or removal of such places or relics shall be undertaken without showing that the destruction or removal is necessary and unavoidable.\n\nARTICLE 38. Authority for the construction of dams, bridges and other structures across of which may interfere with the Xow of navigable or Xoatable waterways shall arst be secured from the Department of Public Works, Transportation and Communications.\n\nARTICLE 39. Except in cases of emergency to save life or property, the construction or repair of the following works shall be undertaken only after the plans and speciacations therefor, as may be required by the Council, are approved by the proper government agency; dams for the diversion or storage of water; structures for the\n\n8 of 21\n\n31.05.21, 19:45" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9631408868977684, + "doc_id": "6f7835a75cea4571fc1c9cd409ae8d0c09ea4f8d13bf011c65fee6845bee6857", + "edit_distance": 0.15217391304347827, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9898976119878271, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Presidential Decree No. 1067, s. 1976 | Official Gazette of the Republic o...\n\nhttps://www.officialgazette.gov.ph/1976/12/31/presidential-decree-no-10...\n\nGOVPH (/)\n\n## Presidential Decree No. 1067, s. 1976\n\nSigned on December 31, 1976 (https://www.o=cialgazette.gov.ph/1976/12/31/presidential-decree-no-1067-s-1976/)\n\n## PRESIDENTIAL DECREE NO. 1067\n\n## A DECREE INSTITUTING A WATER CODE, THEREBY REVISING AND CONSOLIDATING THE LAWS GOVERNING THE OWNERSHIP, APPROPRIATION, UTILIZATION, EXPLOITATION, DEVELOPMENT, CONSERVATION AND PROTECTION OF WATER RESOURCES\n\nWHEREAS, Article XIV, Section 8 of the New Constitution of the Philippines provides, inter alia, that all waters of the Philippines belong to the State;\n\nWHEREAS, existing water legislations are piece-meal and inadequate to cope with increasing scarcity of water and changing patterns of water use;\n\nWHEREAS, there is a need for a Water Code based on rational concepts of integrated and multipurpose management of water resources and su=ciently Xexible to adequately meet future developments;\n\nWHEREAS, water is vital to national development and it has become increasingly necessary for government to intervene actively in improving the management of water resources;\n\nNOW, THEREFORE, I, FERDINAND E. MARCOS, President of the Philippines, by virtue of the powers in me vested by the Constitution, do hereby order and decree the enactment of the Water Code of the Philippines of 1976, as follows:\n\n## CHAPTER I\n\n## Declaration of Objectives and Principles\n\nARTICLE 1. This Code shall be known as The Water Code of the Philippines.\n\n1 of 21\n\n31.05.21, 19:45", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "https://www.officialgazette.gov.ph/1976/12/31/presidential-decree-no-10...\n\nPresidential Decree No. 1067, s. 1976 | Official Gazette of the Republic o...\n\n# Presidential Decree No. 1067, s. 1976\n\nSigned on December 31, 1976 (https://www.o=cialgazette.gov.ph/1976/12/31/presidential-decree-no-1067-s-1976/)\n\n## CHAPTER I\n\n## Declaration of Objectives and Principles\n\n## PRESIDENTIAL DECREE NO. 1067\n\n## A DECREE INSTITUTING A WATER CODE, THEREBY REVISING AND CONSOLIDATING THE LAWS GOVERNING THE OWNERSHIP, APPROPRIATION, UTILIZATION, EXPLOITATION, DEVELOPMENT, CONSERVATION AND PROTECTION OF WATER RESOURCES\n\nWHEREAS, Article XIV, Section 8 of the New Constitution of the Philippines provides, inter alia, that all waters of the Philippines belong to the State;\n\nWHEREAS, existing water legislations are piece-meal and inadequate to cope with increasing scarcity of water and changing patterns of water use;\n\nWHEREAS, there is a need for a Water Code based on rational concepts of integrated and multipurpose management of water resources and su=ciently Xexible to adequately meet future developments;\n\nWHEREAS, water is vital to national development and it has become increasingly necessary for government to intervene actively in improving the management of water resources;\n\nNOW, THEREFORE, I, FERDINAND E. MARCOS, President of the Philippines, by virtue of the powers in me vested by the Constitution, do hereby order and decree the enactment of the Water Code of the Philippines of 1976, as follows:\n\nARTICLE 1. This Code shall be known as The Water Code of the Philippines.\n\n31.05.21, 19:45\n\n1 of 21\n\nGOVPH (/)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9069678343190866, + "doc_id": "faaaf9decc1ac252e416c91984eb0e792a1c77a448564506eb9f7d9dfaaef2e9", + "edit_distance": 0.044009779951100246, + "f1_score": 0.9888888888888888, + "meteor": 0.9911100223068666, + "precision": 0.9888888888888889, + "pred_md": "- Presidential Decree No. 1067, s. 1976 | Official Gazette of the Republic o... https://www.officialgazette.gov.ph/1976/12/31/presidential-decree-no-10...\n\nARTICLE 90. The following acts shall be penalized by suspension or revocation of the violator's water permit or other right to the use of water and/or a ane of not exceeding One Thousand Pesos (P1,000.00), in the discretion of the Council:\n\n- a. Appropriation of subterranean or ground water for domestic use by an overlying landowner without registration required by the Council.\n- b. Non-observance of any standard of beneacial use of water.\n- c. Failure of the appropriator to keep a record of water withdrawal, when required.\n- d. Failure to comply with any of the terms or conditions in a water permit or a water rights grant.\n- e. Unauthorized use of water for a purpose other than that for which a right or permit was granted.\n- f. Construction or repair of any hydraulic work or structure without duly approved plans and speciacations, when required.\n- g. Failure to install a regulating and measuring device for the control of the volume of water appropriated, when required.\n- h. Unauthorized sale, lease, or transfer of water and/or water rights.\n- i. Failure to provide adequate facilities to prevent or control diseases when required by the Council in the construction of any work for the storage, diversion, distribution and utilization of water.\n- j. Drilling of a well without permission of the Council.\n- k. Utilization of an existing well or ponding or spreading of water for recharging subterranean or ground water supplies without permission of the Council.\n- l. Violation of or non-compliance with any order, rules, or regulations of the Council.\n- m. Illegal taking or diversion of water in an open canal, aqueduct or reservoir.\n- n. Malicious destruction of hydraulic works or structures valued at not exceeding P5,000.00.\n- ARTICLE 91. A. A ane of not exceeding Three Thousand Pesos (P3,000.00) or imprisonment for not more than three (3) years, or both such ane and imprisonment, in the discretion of the Court, shall be imposed upon any person who commits any of the following acts:\n\n16 of 21\n\n31.05.21, 19:45", + "recall": 0.9888888888888889, + "true_md": "Presidential Decree No. 1067, s. 1976 | Official Gazette of the Republic o...\n\nhttps://www.officialgazette.gov.ph/1976/12/31/presidential-decree-no-10...\n\nARTICLE 90. The following acts shall be penalized by suspension or revocation of the violator’s water permit or other right to the use of water and/or a ane of not exceeding One Thousand Pesos (P1,000.00), in the discretion of the Council:\n\na. Appropriation of subterranean or ground water for domestic use by an overlying landowner without registration required by the Council.\n\nb. Non-observance of any standard of beneacial use of water.\n\nc. Failure of the appropriator to keep a record of water withdrawal, when required.\n\nd. Failure to comply with any of the terms or conditions in a water permit or a water rights grant.\n\ne. Unauthorized use of water for a purpose other than that for which a right or permit was granted.\n\nf. Construction or repair of any hydraulic work or structure without duly approved plans and speciacations, when required.\n\ng. Failure to install a regulating and measuring device for the control of the volume of water appropriated, when required.\n\nh. Unauthorized sale, lease, or transfer of water and/or water rights.\n\ni. Failure to provide adequate facilities to prevent or control diseases when required by the Council in the construction of any work for the storage, diversion, distribution and utilization of water.\n\nj. Drilling of a well without permission of the Council.\n\nk. Utilization of an existing well or ponding or spreading of water for recharging subterranean or ground water supplies without permission of the Council.\n\nl. Violation of or non-compliance with any order, rules, or regulations of the Council.\n\nm. Illegal taking or diversion of water in an open canal, aqueduct or reservoir.\n\nn. Malicious destruction of hydraulic works or structures valued at not exceeding P5,000.00.\n\nARTICLE 91. A. A ane of not exceeding Three Thousand Pesos (P3,000.00) or imprisonment for not more than three (3) years, or both such ane and imprisonment, in the discretion of the Court, shall be imposed upon any person who commits any of the following acts:\n\n16 of 21\n\n31.05.21, 19:45" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "69976baee4c4ce4f55a8c0e4e24b1df910d7e9b5671f2d424d0f4b0457abc529", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999999962964525, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Presidential Decree No. 1067, s. 1976 | Official Gazette of the Republic o...\n\nhttps://www.officialgazette.gov.ph/1976/12/31/presidential-decree-no-10...\n\nthe river or change in the course of the river, provided that such constructions does not cause damage to the property of another.\n\nARTICLE 58. When a river or stream suddenly changes its course to traverse private lands, the owners of the affected lands may not compel the government to restore the river to its former bed; nor can they restrain the government from taking steps to revert the river or stream to its former course. The owners of the lands thus affected are not entitled to compensation for any damage sustained thereby. However, the former owners of the new bed shall be the owners of the abandoned bed in proportion to the area lost by each.\n\nThe owners of the affected lands may undertake to return the river or stream to its old bed at their own expense; Provided, That a permit therefor is secured from the Secretary of Public Works, Transportation and Communication and work pertaining thereto are commenced within two years from the change in the course of the river or stream.\n\nARTICLE 59. Rivers, lakes and lagoons may, upon the recommendation of the Philippine Coast Guard, be declared navigable either in whole or in part.\n\nARTICLE 60. The rafting of logs and other objects on rivers and lakes which are Xoatable may be controlled or prohibited during designated season of the year with due regard to the needs of irrigation and domestic water supply and other uses of water.\n\nARTICLE 61. The impounding of water in ponds or reservoirs may be prohibited by the Council upon consultation with the Department of Health if it is dangerous to public health, or it may order that such pond or reservoir be drained if such is necessary for the protection of public health.\n\nARTICLE 62. Waters of a stream may be stored in a reservoir by a permittee in such amount as will not prejudice the right of any permittee downstream. Whoever operates the reservoir shall, when required, release water for minimum stream Xow.\n\nAll reservoir operations shall be subject to rules and regulations issued by the Council or any proper government agency.\n\nARTICLE 63. The operator of a dam for the storage of water may be required to employ an engineer possessing qualiacations prescribed for the proper operations, maintenance and administration of the dam.\n\nARTICLE 64. The Council shall approve the manner, location, depth, and spacing in which borings for subterranean or ground water may be made, determine the requirements for the registration of every boring or alteration to existing borings as well as other control measures for the exploitation of subterranean or ground water resources, and in coordination with the Professional Regulation Commission prescribe the qualiacations\n\n11 of 21\n\n31.05.21, 19:45", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Presidential Decree No. 1067, s. 1976 | Official Gazette of the Republic o...\n\nhttps://www.officialgazette.gov.ph/1976/12/31/presidential-decree-no-10...\n\nthe river or change in the course of the river, provided that such constructions does not cause damage to the property of another.\n\nARTICLE 58. When a river or stream suddenly changes its course to traverse private lands, the owners of the affected lands may not compel the government to restore the river to its former bed; nor can they restrain the government from taking steps to revert the river or stream to its former course. The owners of the lands thus affected are not entitled to compensation for any damage sustained thereby. However, the former owners of the new bed shall be the owners of the abandoned bed in proportion to the area lost by each.\n\nThe owners of the affected lands may undertake to return the river or stream to its old bed at their own expense; Provided, That a permit therefor is secured from the Secretary of Public Works, Transportation and Communication and work pertaining thereto are commenced within two years from the change in the course of the river or stream.\n\nARTICLE 59. Rivers, lakes and lagoons may, upon the recommendation of the Philippine Coast Guard, be declared navigable either in whole or in part.\n\nARTICLE 60. The rafting of logs and other objects on rivers and lakes which are Xoatable may be controlled or prohibited during designated season of the year with due regard to the needs of irrigation and domestic water supply and other uses of water.\n\nARTICLE 61. The impounding of water in ponds or reservoirs may be prohibited by the Council upon consultation with the Department of Health if it is dangerous to public health, or it may order that such pond or reservoir be drained if such is necessary for the protection of public health.\n\nARTICLE 62. Waters of a stream may be stored in a reservoir by a permittee in such amount as will not prejudice the right of any permittee downstream. Whoever operates the reservoir shall, when required, release water for minimum stream Xow.\n\nAll reservoir operations shall be subject to rules and regulations issued by the Council or any proper government agency.\n\nARTICLE 63. The operator of a dam for the storage of water may be required to employ an engineer possessing qualiacations prescribed for the proper operations, maintenance and administration of the dam.\n\nARTICLE 64. The Council shall approve the manner, location, depth, and spacing in which borings for subterranean or ground water may be made, determine the requirements for the registration of every boring or alteration to existing borings as well as other control measures for the exploitation of subterranean or ground water resources, and in coordination with the Professional Regulation Commission prescribe the qualiacations\n\n11 of 21\n\n31.05.21, 19:45" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9336886310853668, + "doc_id": "c702361340add680a01f5dc287fad6f2d5db8b745d2f97365a1495688e221cce", + "edit_distance": 0.523936170212766, + "f1_score": 0.9912536443148688, + "meteor": 0.8977498759657525, + "precision": 0.9941520467836257, + "pred_md": "- Presidential Decree No. 1067, s. 1976 | Official Gazette of the Republic o...\n\nhttps://www.officialgazette.gov.ph/1976/12/31/presidential-decree-no-10...\n\n- c. Natural lakes and lagoons;\n- d. All other categories of surface waters such as water Xowing over lands, water from rainfall whether natural or artiacial, and water from agriculture runoff, seepage and drainage;\n- e. Atmospheric water;\n- f. Subterranean or ground waters; and\n- g. Seawater.\n\nARTICLE 6. The following waters found on private lands also belong to the State:\n\n- a. Continuous or intermittent waters rising on such lands;\n- b. Lakes and lagoons naturally occurring on such lands;\n- c. Rain water falling on such lands;\n- d. Subterranean or ground waters; and\n- e. Water in swamps and marshes.\n\nThe owner of the land where the water is found may use the same for domestic purposes without securing a permit, provided that such use shall be registered, when required by the Council. The Council, however, may regulate such use when there is wastage, or in times of emergency.\n\nARTICLE 7. Subject to the provisions of this Code, any person who captures or collects water by means of cisterns, tanks, or pools shall have exclusive control over such water and the right to dispose of the same.\n\nARTICLE 8. Water legally appropriated shall be subject to the control of the appropriator from the moment it reaches the appropriator's canal or aqueduct leading to the place where the water will be used or stored and, thereafter, so long as it is being beneacially used for the purposes for which it was appropriated.\n\n## CHAPTER III\n\n## Appropriation of Waters\n\nARTICLE 9. Waters may be appropriated and used in accordance with the provisions of this Code.\n\nAppropriation of water, as used in this Code, is the acquisition of rights over the use of waters or the taking or diverting of waters from a natural source in the manner and for any purpose allowed by law.\n\n3 of 21\n\n31.05.21, 19:45", + "recall": 0.9883720930232558, + "true_md": "https://www.officialgazette.gov.ph/1976/12/31/presidential-decree-no-10...\n\nPresidential Decree No. 1067, s. 1976 | Official Gazette of the Republic o...\n\nc. Natural lakes and lagoons;\n\ne. Atmospheric water;\n\nf. Subterranean or ground waters; and\n\ng. Seawater.\n\nARTICLE 6. The following waters found on private lands also belong to the State:\n\nThe owner of the land where the water is found may use the same for domestic purposes without securing a permit, provided that such use shall be registered, when required by the Council. The Council, however, may regulate such use when there is wastage, or in times of emergency.\n\nARTICLE 7. Subject to the provisions of this Code, any person who captures or collects water by means of cisterns, tanks, or pools shall have exclusive control over such water and the right to dispose of the same.\n\nARTICLE 8. Water legally appropriated shall be subject to the control of the appropriator from the moment it reaches the appropriator’s canal or aqueduct leading to the place where the water will be used or stored and, thereafter, so long as it is being beneacially used for the purposes for which it was appropriated.\n\nARTICLE 9. Waters may be appropriated and used in accordance with the provisions of this Code.\n\nAppropriation of water, as used in this Code, is the acquisition of rights over the use of waters or the taking or diverting of waters from a natural source in the manner and for any purpose allowed by law.\n\n31.05.21, 19:45\n\n3 of 21\n\n## CHAPTER III\n\n## Appropriation of Waters\n\n- a. Continuous or intermittent waters rising on such lands;\n\n- b. Lakes and lagoons naturally occurring on such lands;\n\n- c. Rain water falling on such lands;\n\n- d. Subterranean or ground waters; and\n\n- e. Water in swamps and marshes.\n\nd. All other categories of surface waters such as water Xowing over lands, water from rainfall whether natural or artiacial, and water from agriculture runoff, seepage and drainage;" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9880947646000977, + "doc_id": "b42a6bdacea139084d89a376c9bd8bea55b150f26a221ae056d13d1065217bbb", + "edit_distance": 0.06666666666666667, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999921875, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Presidential Decree No. 1067, s. 1976 | Official Gazette of the Republic o...\n\nhttps://www.officialgazette.gov.ph/1976/12/31/presidential-decree-no-10...\n\nPesos (P100,000.00).\n\nARTICLE 92. If the offense is committed by a corporation, trust, arm, partnership, association or any other juridical person, the penalty shall be imposed upon the President, General Manager, and other guilty o=cer or o=cers of such corporation, trust, arm, partnership, association or entity, without prejudice to the aling of a civil action against said juridical person. If the offender is an alien, he shall be deported after serving his sentence, without further proceedings.\n\nAfter anal judgment of conviction, the Court upon petition of the prosecution attorney in the same proceedings, and after due hearing, may, when the public interest so requires, order the suspension or dissolution of such corporation, trust, arm, partnership, association or juridical person.\n\nARTICLE 93. All actions for offenses punishable under Article 91 of this Code shall be brought before the proper court.\n\nARTICLE 94. Actions for offenses punishable under this Code by a ane of not more than Three Thousand Pesos (P3,000.00) or by an imprisonment of not more than three (3) years, or both such ane and imprisonment, shall prescribe in ave (5) years; those punishable by a ane exceeding Three Thousand Pesos (P3,000.00) but not more than Six Thousand Pesos (P6,000.00) or an imprisonment exceeding three (3) years but not more than six (6) years, or both such ane and imprisonment, shall prescribe in seven (7) years; and those punishable by a ane exceeding Six Thousand Pesos (P6,000.00) but not more than Ten Thousand Pesos (P10,000.00) or an imprisonment exceeding six (6) years but not more than twelve (12) years, or both such ane and imprisonment, shall prescribe in ten (10) years.\n\n## CHAPTER IX\n\n## Transitory and Final Provisions\n\nARTICLE 95. Within two (2) years from the promulgation of this Code, all claims for a right to use water existing on or before December 31, 1974 shall be registered with the Council which shall conarm said rights in accordance with the provisions of this Code, and shall set their respective priorities.\n\nWhen priority in time of appropriation from a certain source of supply cannot be determined, the order of preference in the use of the waters shall be as follows:\n\n- a. Domestic and municipal use\n- b. Irrigation\n- c. Power generation\n\n18 of 21\n\n31.05.21, 19:45", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Presidential Decree No. 1067, s. 1976 | Official Gazette of the Republic o...\n\nhttps://www.officialgazette.gov.ph/1976/12/31/presidential-decree-no-10...\n\nPesos (P100,000.00).\n\nARTICLE 92. If the offense is committed by a corporation, trust, arm, partnership, association or any other juridical person, the penalty shall be imposed upon the President, General Manager, and other guilty o=cer or o=cers of such corporation, trust, arm, partnership, association or entity, without prejudice to the aling of a civil action against said juridical person. If the offender is an alien, he shall be deported after serving his sentence, without further proceedings.\n\nAfter anal judgment of conviction, the Court upon petition of the prosecution attorney in the same proceedings, and after due hearing, may, when the public interest so requires, order the suspension or dissolution of such corporation, trust, arm, partnership, association or juridical person.\n\nARTICLE 93. All actions for offenses punishable under Article 91 of this Code shall be brought before the proper court.\n\nARTICLE 94. Actions for offenses punishable under this Code by a ane of not more than Three Thousand Pesos (P3,000.00) or by an imprisonment of not more than three (3) years, or both such ane and imprisonment, shall prescribe in ave (5) years; those punishable by a ane exceeding Three Thousand Pesos (P3,000.00) but not more than Six Thousand Pesos (P6,000.00) or an imprisonment exceeding three (3) years but not more than six (6) years, or both such ane and imprisonment, shall prescribe in seven (7) years; and those punishable by a ane exceeding Six Thousand Pesos (P6,000.00) but not more than Ten Thousand Pesos (P10,000.00) or an imprisonment exceeding six (6) years but not more than twelve (12) years, or both such ane and imprisonment, shall prescribe in ten (10) years.\n\nARTICLE 95. Within two (2) years from the promulgation of this Code, all claims for a right to use water existing on or before December 31, 1974 shall be registered with the Council which shall conarm said rights in accordance with the provisions of this Code, and shall set their respective priorities.\n\nWhen priority in time of appropriation from a certain source of supply cannot be determined, the order of preference in the use of the waters shall be as follows:\n\n## CHAPTER IX\n\n## Transitory and Final Provisions\n\n18 of 21\n\n31.05.21, 19:45\n\n- a. Domestic and municipal use\n\n- b. Irrigation\n\n- c. Power generation" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9873555091497423, + "doc_id": "cc7c55ad21f843f707961305188dce8a33435d3d88e7eeb9ca090027b0cfcbfe", + "edit_distance": 0.10087719298245613, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999073179736815, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "use of water power, installations for the utilization of subterranean or ground water and other structures for utilization of water resources. Presidential Decree No. 1067, s. 1976 | Official Gazette of the Republic o... https://www.officialgazette.gov.ph/1976/12/31/presidential-decree-no-10...\n\nARTICLE 40. No excavation for the purpose of emission of a hot spring or for the enlargement of the existing opening thereof shall be made without prior permit.\n\nAny person or agency who intends to develop a hot spring for human consumption must arst obtain a permit from the Department of Health.\n\nARTICLE 41. No person shall develop a stream, lake, or spring for recreational purposes without arst securing a permit from the Council.\n\nARTICLE 42. Unless otherwise ordered by the President of the Philippines and only in time of national calamity or emergency, no person shall induce or restrain rainfall by any method such as cloud seeding without a permit from the proper government emergency.\n\nARTICLE 43. No person shall raise or lower the water level of a river stream, lake, lagoon or marsh nor drain the same without a permit.\n\nARTICLE 44. Drainage systems shall be so constructed that their outlets are rivers, lakes, the sea, natural bodies of water, or such other water course as may be approved by the proper government agency.\n\nARTICLE 45. When a drainage channel is constructed by a number of persons for their common beneat, the cost of construction and maintenance of the channel shall be borne by each in proportion to the beneats derived.\n\nARTICLE 46. When artiacial means are employed to drain water from higher to lower land, the owner of the higher land shall select the routes and methods of drainage that will cause the minimum damage to the lower lands, subject to the requirements of just compensation.\n\nARTICLE 47. When the use, conveyance or storage of waters results in damage to another, the person responsible for the damage shall pay compensation.\n\nARTICLE 48. When a water resources project interferes with the access of landowner to a portion of his property or with the conveyance of irrigation or drainage water, the person or agency constructing the project shall bear the cost of construction and maintenance of the bridges, Xumes and other structures necessary for maintaining access, irrigation, or drainage, in addition to paying compensation for land and incidental damages.\n\nARTICLE 49. Any person having an easement for an aqueduct may enter upon the servient land for the\n\n9 of 21\n\n31.05.21, 19:45", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "https://www.officialgazette.gov.ph/1976/12/31/presidential-decree-no-10...\n\nPresidential Decree No. 1067, s. 1976 | Official Gazette of the Republic o...\n\nuse of water power, installations for the utilization of subterranean or ground water and other structures for utilization of water resources.\n\nARTICLE 40. No excavation for the purpose of emission of a hot spring or for the enlargement of the existing opening thereof shall be made without prior permit.\n\nAny person or agency who intends to develop a hot spring for human consumption must arst obtain a permit from the Department of Health.\n\nARTICLE 41. No person shall develop a stream, lake, or spring for recreational purposes without arst securing a permit from the Council.\n\nARTICLE 42. Unless otherwise ordered by the President of the Philippines and only in time of national calamity or emergency, no person shall induce or restrain rainfall by any method such as cloud seeding without a permit from the proper government emergency.\n\nARTICLE 43. No person shall raise or lower the water level of a river stream, lake, lagoon or marsh nor drain the same without a permit.\n\nARTICLE 44. Drainage systems shall be so constructed that their outlets are rivers, lakes, the sea, natural bodies of water, or such other water course as may be approved by the proper government agency.\n\nARTICLE 45. When a drainage channel is constructed by a number of persons for their common beneat, the cost of construction and maintenance of the channel shall be borne by each in proportion to the beneats derived.\n\nARTICLE 46. When artiacial means are employed to drain water from higher to lower land, the owner of the higher land shall select the routes and methods of drainage that will cause the minimum damage to the lower lands, subject to the requirements of just compensation.\n\nARTICLE 47. When the use, conveyance or storage of waters results in damage to another, the person responsible for the damage shall pay compensation.\n\nARTICLE 48. When a water resources project interferes with the access of landowner to a portion of his property or with the conveyance of irrigation or drainage water, the person or agency constructing the project shall bear the cost of construction and maintenance of the bridges, Xumes and other structures necessary for maintaining access, irrigation, or drainage, in addition to paying compensation for land and incidental damages.\n\nARTICLE 49. Any person having an easement for an aqueduct may enter upon the servient land for the\n\n31.05.21, 19:45\n\n9 of 21" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9952083879440782, + "doc_id": "704d1d374f1ecfd5e7ce39f931c65d480e55ea319868aa23b86d922030a0c2d6", + "edit_distance": 0.001996007984031936, + "f1_score": 0.9975186104218362, + "meteor": 0.9998000079984004, + "precision": 0.995049504950495, + "pred_md": "Presidential Decree No. 1067, s. 1976 | Official Gazette of the Republic o... https://www.officialgazette.gov.ph/1976/12/31/presidential-decree-no-10...\n\nSuch permits shall specify the maximum amount of water which may be diverted or withdrawn, the maximum rate of diversion or withdrawal, the time or times during the year when water may be diverted or withdrawn, the point or points of diversion or location of wells, the place of use, the purposes for which water may be used and such other requirements the Council deems desirable.\n\nARTICLE 19. Water rights may be leased or transferred in whole or in part to another person with prior approval of the Council, after due notice and hearing.\n\nARTICLE 20. The measure and limit of appropriation of water shall be beneacial use.\n\nBeneacial use of water is the utilization of water in the right amount during the period that the water is needed for producing the beneats for which the water is appropriated.\n\nARTICLE 21. Standards of beneacial use shall be prescribed by the Council for the appropriator of water for different purposes and conditions, and the use of waters which are appropriated shall be measured and controlled in accordance therewith.\n\nExcepting those for domestic use, every appropriator of water shall maintain water control and measuring devices, and keep records of water withdrawal. When required by the Council, all appropriators of water shall furnish information on water use.\n\nARTICLE 22. Between two or more appropriators of water from the same sources of supply, priority in time of appropriation shall give the better right, except that in times of emergency the use of water for domestic and municipal purposes shall have a better right over all other uses; Provided, That where water shortage is recurrent and the appropriator for municipal use has a lower priority in time of appropriation, then it shall be his duty to and an alternative source of supply in accordance with conditions prescribed by the Council.\n\nARTICLE 23. Priorities may be altered on grounds of greater beneacial use, multi-purpose use, and other similar grounds after due notice and hearing, subject to payment of compensation is proper cases.\n\nARTICLE 24. A water right shall be exercised in such a manner that the rights of third persons or of other appropriators are not prejudiced thereby.\n\nARTICLE 25. A holder of a water permit may demand the establishment of easements necessary for the construction and maintenance of the works and facilities needed for the beneacial use of the waters to be appropriated subject to the requirements of just compensation and to the following conditions:\n\n- a. That he is the owner, lessee, mortgagee or one having real right over the land upon which he proposes to use water; and\n\n6 of 21\n\n31.05.21, 19:45", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Presidential Decree No. 1067, s. 1976 | Official Gazette of the Republic o...\n\nhttps://www.officialgazette.gov.ph/1976/12/31/presidential-decree-no-10...\n\nSuch permits shall specify the maximum amount of water which may be diverted or withdrawn, the maximum rate of diversion or withdrawal, the time or times during the year when water may be diverted or withdrawn, the point or points of diversion or location of wells, the place of use, the purposes for which water may be used and such other requirements the Council deems desirable.\n\nARTICLE 19. Water rights may be leased or transferred in whole or in part to another person with prior approval of the Council, after due notice and hearing.\n\nARTICLE 20. The measure and limit of appropriation of water shall be beneacial use.\n\nBeneacial use of water is the utilization of water in the right amount during the period that the water is needed for producing the beneats for which the water is appropriated.\n\nARTICLE 21. Standards of beneacial use shall be prescribed by the Council for the appropriator of water for different purposes and conditions, and the use of waters which are appropriated shall be measured and controlled in accordance therewith.\n\nExcepting those for domestic use, every appropriator of water shall maintain water control and measuring devices, and keep records of water withdrawal. When required by the Council, all appropriators of water shall furnish information on water use.\n\nARTICLE 22. Between two or more appropriators of water from the same sources of supply, priority in time of appropriation shall give the better right, except that in times of emergency the use of water for domestic and municipal purposes shall have a better right over all other uses; Provided, That where water shortage is recurrent and the appropriator for municipal use has a lower priority in time of appropriation, then it shall be his duty to and an alternative source of supply in accordance with conditions prescribed by the Council.\n\nARTICLE 23. Priorities may be altered on grounds of greater beneacial use, multi-purpose use, and other similar grounds after due notice and hearing, subject to payment of compensation is proper cases.\n\nARTICLE 24. A water right shall be exercised in such a manner that the rights of third persons or of other appropriators are not prejudiced thereby.\n\nARTICLE 25. A holder of a water permit may demand the establishment of easements necessary for the construction and maintenance of the works and facilities needed for the beneacial use of the waters to be appropriated subject to the requirements of just compensation and to the following conditions:\n\na. That he is the owner, lessee, mortgagee or one having real right over the land upon which he proposes to use water; and\n\n6 of 21\n\n31.05.21, 19:45" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9863636588518182, + "doc_id": "499db2d132a293ff59fb10fc12ef1a9b4f0eb6242bf139408031f91dcb696ff7", + "edit_distance": 0.038461538461538464, + "f1_score": 0.9978401727861772, + "meteor": 0.999758564766068, + "precision": 0.9956896551724138, + "pred_md": "Presidential Decree No. 1067, s. 1976 | Official Gazette of the Republic o... https://www.officialgazette.gov.ph/1976/12/31/presidential-decree-no-10...\n\n- b. That the proposed easement is the most convenient and the least onerous to the servient estate.\n\nEasements relating to the appropriation and use of waters may be modiaed by agreement of the contracting parties provided the same is not contrary to law or prejudicial to third persons.\n\nARTICLE 26. Where water shortage is recurrent, the use of the water pursuant to a permit may, in the interest of equitable distribution of beneats among legal appropriators, be reduced after due notice and hearing.\n\nARTICLE 27. Water users shall bear the diminution of any water supply due to natural causes or force majeure.\n\nARTICLE 28. Water permits shall continue to be valid as long as water is beneacially used; however, it may be suspended on the grounds of non-compliance with approved plans and speciacations or schedules of water distribution; use of water for a purpose other than that for which it was granted; non-payment of water charges; wastage; failure to keep records of water diversion, when required; and violation of any term or condition of any permit or of rules and regulations promulgated by the Council.\n\nTemporary permits may be issued for the appropriation and use of water for short periods under special circumstances.\n\nARTICLE 29. Water permits may be revoked after due notice and hearing on grounds of non-use; gross violation of the conditions imposed in the permit; unauthorized sale of water; willful failure or refusal to comply with rules and regulations or any lawful order; pollution, public nuisance or acts detrimental to public health and safety; when the appropriator is found to be disqualiaed under the law to exploit and develop natural resources of the Philippines; when, in the case of irrigation, the land is converted to non-agricultural purposes; and other similar grounds.\n\nARTICLE 30. All water permits are subject to modiacation or cancellation by the Council, after due notice and hearing, in favor of a project of greater beneacial use or for multi-purpose development, and a water permittee who suffers thereby shall be duly compensated by the entity or person in whose favor the cancellation was made.\n\n## CHAPTER IV\n\n## Utilization of Waters\n\nARTICLE 31. Preference in the development of water resources shall consider security of the State, multiple use, beneacial effects, adverse effects and costs of development.\n\nARTICLE 32. The utilization of subterranean or ground water shall be coordinated with that of surface waters such as rivers, streams, springs and lakes, so that a superior right in one is not adversely affected by an\n\n7 of 21\n\n31.05.21, 19:45", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Presidential Decree No. 1067, s. 1976 | Official Gazette of the Republic o...\n\nhttps://www.officialgazette.gov.ph/1976/12/31/presidential-decree-no-10...\n\nb. That the proposed easement is the most convenient and the least onerous to the servient estate.\n\nEasements relating to the appropriation and use of waters may be modiaed by agreement of the contracting parties provided the same is not contrary to law or prejudicial to third persons.\n\nARTICLE 26. Where water shortage is recurrent, the use of the water pursuant to a permit may, in the interest of equitable distribution of beneats among legal appropriators, be reduced after due notice and hearing.\n\nARTICLE 27. Water users shall bear the diminution of any water supply due to natural causes or force majeure.\n\nARTICLE 28. Water permits shall continue to be valid as long as water is beneacially used; however, it may be suspended on the grounds of non-compliance with approved plans and speciacations or schedules of water distribution; use of water for a purpose other than that for which it was granted; non-payment of water charges; wastage; failure to keep records of water diversion, when required; and violation of any term or condition of any permit or of rules and regulations promulgated by the Council.\n\nTemporary permits may be issued for the appropriation and use of water for short periods under special circumstances.\n\nARTICLE 29. Water permits may be revoked after due notice and hearing on grounds of non-use; gross violation of the conditions imposed in the permit; unauthorized sale of water; willful failure or refusal to comply with rules and regulations or any lawful order; pollution, public nuisance or acts detrimental to public health and safety; when the appropriator is found to be disqualiaed under the law to exploit and develop natural resources of the Philippines; when, in the case of irrigation, the land is converted to non-agricultural purposes; and other similar grounds.\n\nARTICLE 30. All water permits are subject to modiacation or cancellation by the Council, after due notice and hearing, in favor of a project of greater beneacial use or for multi-purpose development, and a water permittee who suffers thereby shall be duly compensated by the entity or person in whose favor the cancellation was made.\n\nARTICLE 31. Preference in the development of water resources shall consider security of the State, multiple use, beneacial effects, adverse effects and costs of development.\n\nARTICLE 32. The utilization of subterranean or ground water shall be coordinated with that of surface waters such as rivers, streams, springs and lakes, so that a superior right in one is not adversely affected by an\n\n## CHAPTER IV\n\n## Utilization of Waters\n\n7 of 21\n\n31.05.21, 19:45" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9780899825765413, + "doc_id": "637afdee403c738c1294f5dc90fa27f16b60efe427421df7c61f9482f299c28e", + "edit_distance": 0.3888888888888889, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9638310185185185, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Presidential Decree No. 1067, s. 1976 | Official Gazette of the Republic o...\n\nhttps://www.officialgazette.gov.ph/1976/12/31/presidential-decree-no-10...\n\nThe President (http://president.gov.ph/)\n\nO=ce of the President (http://op-proper.gov.ph/)\n\nO=ce of the Vice President (https://ovp.gov.ph/)\n\nSenate of the Philippines (http://senate.gov.ph/)\n\nHouse of Representatives (http://www.congress.gov.ph/)\n\nSupreme Court (http://sc.judiciary.gov.ph/)\n\nCourt of Appeals (http://ca.judiciary.gov.ph/)\n\nSandiganbayan (http://sb.judiciary.gov.ph/)\n\nManaged by EDP/IT Division of the Presidential Communications Operations O=ce (PCOO) (https://pcoo.gov.ph)\n\n21 of 21\n\n31.05.21, 19:45", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "The President (http://president.gov.ph/) O=ce of the President (http://op-proper.gov.ph/) O=ce of the Vice President (https://ovp.gov.ph/) Senate of the Philippines (http://senate.gov.ph/) House of Representatives (http://www.congress.gov.ph/) Supreme Court (http://sc.judiciary.gov.ph/) Court of Appeals (http://ca.judiciary.gov.ph/) Sandiganbayan (http://sb.judiciary.gov.ph/)\n\nManaged by EDP/IT Division of the Presidential Communications Operations O=ce (PCOO) (https://pcoo.gov.ph)\n\nPresidential Decree No. 1067, s. 1976 | Official Gazette of the Republic o...\n\nhttps://www.officialgazette.gov.ph/1976/12/31/presidential-decree-no-10...\n\n31.05.21, 19:45\n\n21 of 21" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9716772248509613, + "doc_id": "0369654688c0747cbad5f9a2e1d588166602b0b176ab99ea9186111ee907ed55", + "edit_distance": 0.02857142857142857, + "f1_score": 0.9927360774818402, + "meteor": 0.9964185852276854, + "precision": 0.9903381642512077, + "pred_md": "- Presidential Decree No. 1067, s. 1976 | Official Gazette of the Republic o...\n\nhttps://www.officialgazette.gov.ph/1976/12/31/presidential-decree-no-10...\n\n- d. Fisheries\n- e. Livestock raising\n- f. Industrial use, and\n- g. Other uses.\n\nAny claim not registered within said period shall be considered waived and the use of the water deemed abandoned, and the water shall thereupon be available for disposition as unappropriated waters in accordance with the provisions of this Code.\n\nARTICLE 96. No vested or acquired right to the use of water can arise from acts or omissions which are against the law or which infringe upon the rights of others.\n\nARTICLE 97. Acts and contracts under the regime of old laws, if they are valid in accordance therewith, shall be respected, subject to the limitations established in this Code. Any modiacation or extension of these acts and contracts after the promulgation of this Code, shall be subject to the provisions hereof.\n\nARTICLE 98. Interim rules and regulations promulgated by the Council shall continue to have binding force and effect, when not in conXict with the provisions of this Code.\n\nARTICLE 99. If any provision or part of this Code, or the application thereof to any person or circumstance, is declared unconstitutional or invalid for any reason, the other provisions or parts therein shall not be affected.\n\nARTICLE 100. The following laws, parts and/or provisions of laws are hereby repealed:\n\n- a. The provisions of the Spanish Law on Waters of August 3, 1866, the Civil Code of Spain of 1889 and the Civil Code of the Philippines (R.A. 386) on ownership of waters, easements relating to waters, use of public waters and acquisitive prescription on the use of waters, which are inconsistent with the provisions of this Code;\n- b. The provisions of R.A. 6395, otherwise known as the Revised Charter of National Power Corporation, particularly section 3, paragraph (f), and section 12, insofar as they relate to the appropriation of waters and the grant thereof;\n- c. The provisions of Act No. 2152, as amended, otherwise known as the Irrigation Act, section 3, paragraphs (k) and (m) of P .D. No. 813, R.A. 2056; Section 90, C.A. 137; and,\n- d. All decrees, laws, acts, parts of acts, Rules of Court, executive orders, and administrative regulations\n\n19 of 21\n\n31.05.21, 19:45", + "recall": 0.9951456310679612, + "true_md": "Presidential Decree No. 1067, s. 1976 | Official Gazette of the Republic o...\n\nhttps://www.officialgazette.gov.ph/1976/12/31/presidential-decree-no-10...\n\n- d. Fisheries\n\n- e. Livestock raising\n\n- f. Industrial use, and\n\n- g. Other uses.\n\nAny claim not registered within said period shall be considered waived and the use of the water deemed abandoned, and the water shall thereupon be available for disposition as unappropriated waters in accordance with the provisions of this Code.\n\nARTICLE 96. No vested or acquired right to the use of water can arise from acts or omissions which are against the law or which infringe upon the rights of others.\n\nARTICLE 97. Acts and contracts under the regime of old laws, if they are valid in accordance therewith, shall be respected, subject to the limitations established in this Code. Any modiacation or extension of these acts and contracts after the promulgation of this Code, shall be subject to the provisions hereof.\n\nARTICLE 98. Interim rules and regulations promulgated by the Council shall continue to have binding force and effect, when not in conXict with the provisions of this Code.\n\nARTICLE 99. If any provision or part of this Code, or the application thereof to any person or circumstance, is declared unconstitutional or invalid for any reason, the other provisions or parts therein shall not be affected.\n\nARTICLE 100. The following laws, parts and/or provisions of laws are hereby repealed:\n\na. The provisions of the Spanish Law on Waters of August 3, 1866, the Civil Code of Spain of 1889 and the Civil Code of the Philippines (R.A. 386) on ownership of waters, easements relating to waters, use of public waters and acquisitive prescription on the use of waters, which are inconsistent with the provisions of this Code;\n\nb. The provisions of R.A. 6395, otherwise known as the Revised Charter of National Power Corporation, particularly section 3, paragraph (f), and section 12, insofar as they relate to the appropriation of waters and the grant thereof;\n\nc. The provisions of Act No. 2152, as amended, otherwise known as the Irrigation Act, section 3, paragraphs (k) and (m) of P.D. No. 813, R.A. 2056; Section 90, C.A. 137; and,\n\nd. All decrees, laws, acts, parts of acts, Rules of Court, executive orders, and administrative regulations\n\n31.05.21, 19:45\n\n19 of 21" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9184444610327377, + "doc_id": "580369b0c1d40579afb22bdc20fa43c13754387b3a0105fb46350e3a63982467", + "edit_distance": 0.12295081967213115, + "f1_score": 0.9919354838709676, + "meteor": 0.9947448949935039, + "precision": 0.984, + "pred_md": "Draft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n8459ax02.fm\n\n- 4. Click Create to create the route as shown in Figure B-25 on page 229.\n\nFigure B-25 Create Route\n\nFigure B-25 Create Route\n\n## B.8 Test load balancing across NGINX instances\n\n- 1. Open a terminal window to the OCP machine with a user with root privileges. You can directly use the ssh command or PuTTY from your local computer.\n- 2. Execute the script as shown in Example B-15 to test out the load balancing. The wget command uses a capital letter O (as in Oscar):\n\n```\n$ for i in 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 do wget -q http://app2-http-git/ -O index.test grep App index.test done\n```\n\nExample B-15 Execute script to test out the load balancing\n\n```\n$ for i in 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10; do wget -q http://app2-http-git/ -O index.test; grep App2 index.test; done App2a App2b App2a App2b App2a App2b App2a App2b App2a App2b\n```\n\n- 3. From the command output, you can see that the route alternated between App2a and App2b at a rate of 50%.\n- 4. Close the terminal window and logout from the OpenShift console.\n\nAppendix B. Sample lab: Deployments and workload balance\n\n229", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Draft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n8459ax02.fm\n\n- 4. Click Create to create the route as shown in Figure B-25 on page 229.\n\nFigure B-25 Create Route \n\n## B.8 Test load balancing across NGINX instances\n\n- 1. Open a terminal window to the OCP machine with a user with root privileges. You can directly use the ssh command or PuTTY from your local computer.\n\n- 2. Execute the script as shown in Example B-15 to test out the load balancing. The wget command uses a capital letter O (as in Oscar):\n\n$ for i in 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 do wget -q http://app2-http-git/ -O index.test grep App index.test done\n\n$ for i in 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10; do wget -q http://app2-http-git/ -O index.test; grep App2 index.test; done App2a App2b App2a App2b App2a App2b App2a App2b App2a App2b\n\nExample B-15 Execute script to test out the load balancing\n\n- 3. From the command output, you can see that the route alternated between App2a and App2b at a rate of 50%.\n\n- 4. Close the terminal window and logout from the OpenShift console.\n\nAppendix B. Sample lab: Deployments and workload balance 229" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7575478739478382, + "doc_id": "99be2e5f329ae811f4e40d525b24288a7ef225eea2ebe71c574f875cd354fa4f", + "edit_distance": 0.5882352941176471, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9856725146198831, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "8459ax02.fm\n\nDraft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n228\n\nRed Hat OpenShift and IBM Cloud Paks on IBM Power Systems: Volume 1\n\nFigure B-24 Configure Route\n\nFigure B-24 Configure Route", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "8459ax02.fm\n\nFigure B-24 Configure Route \n\n228 Red Hat OpenShift and IBM Cloud Paks on IBM Power Systems: Volume 1\n\nDraft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9169128984939131, + "doc_id": "be0fce92a69b43844238b10834f1fabfd74d687cdd2c4dd370aa48288d22423b", + "edit_distance": 0.4032697547683924, + "f1_score": 0.9767441860465117, + "meteor": 0.8233304220286004, + "precision": 0.9932432432432432, + "pred_md": "168\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\nFigure 5-59 iSCSI Configuration\n\nFigure 5-59 iSCSI Configuration\n\nThe following parameters can be updated:\n\n- /SM590000 System Name\n\nIt is important to set the system name correctly because it is part of the IQN for the node.\n\nImportant: If you change the name of the system after iSCSI is configured, you might need to reconfigure the iSCSI hosts.\n\nTo change the system name, click the system name and specify the new name.\n\nSystem name : You can use the letters A - Z and a - z, the numbers 0 - 9, and the underscore (\\_) character. The name can be 1 - 63 characters.\n\n- /SM590000 iSCSI Aliases (Optional)\n\nAn iSCSI alias is a user-defined name that identifies the node to the host. Complete the following steps to change an iSCSI alias:\n\n- a. Click an iSCSI alias.\n- b. Specify a name for it.\n\nEach node has a unique iSCSI name that is associated with two IP addresses. After the host starts the iSCSI connection to a target node, this IQN from the target node is visible in the iSCSI configuration tool on the host.\n\n- /SM590000 iSNS and CHAP\n\nYou can specify the IP address for the iSCSI Storage Name Service (iSNS). Host systems use the iSNS server to manage iSCSI targets and for iSCSI discovery.\n\nYou can also enable Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP) to authenticate the system and iSCSI-attached hosts with the specified shared secret.\n\nThe CHAP secret is the authentication method that is used to restrict access for other iSCSI hosts that use the same connection. You can set the CHAP for the whole system under the system properties or for each host definition. The CHAP must be identical on the server and the system/host definition. You can create an iSCSI host definition without the use of a CHAP.", + "recall": 0.9607843137254902, + "true_md": "Figure 5-59 iSCSI Configuration\n\nThe following parameters can be updated:\n\nImportant: If you change the name of the system after iSCSI is configured, you might need to reconfigure the iSCSI hosts.\n\nIt is important to set the system name correctly because it is part of the IQN for the node.\n\nTo change the system name, click the system name and specify the new name.\n\nSystem name : You can use the letters A - Z and a - z, the numbers 0 - 9, and the underscore (\\_) character. The name can be 1 - 63 characters.\n\nAn iSCSI alias is a user-defined name that identifies the node to the host. Complete the following steps to change an iSCSI alias:\n\nEach node has a unique iSCSI name that is associated with two IP addresses. After the host starts the iSCSI connection to a target node, this IQN from the target node is visible in the iSCSI configuration tool on the host.\n\nYou can specify the IP address for the iSCSI Storage Name Service (iSNS). Host systems use the iSNS server to manage iSCSI targets and for iSCSI discovery.\n\nYou can also enable Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP) to authenticate the system and iSCSI-attached hosts with the specified shared secret.\n\nThe CHAP secret is the authentication method that is used to restrict access for other iSCSI hosts that use the same connection. You can set the CHAP for the whole system under the system properties or for each host definition. The CHAP must be identical on the server and the system/host definition. You can create an iSCSI host definition without the use of a CHAP.\n\n168 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> iSNS and CHAP\n\n- b. Specify a name for it.\n\n- a. Click an iSCSI alias. \n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> iSCSI Aliases (Optional)\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> System Name" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9297294276483624, + "doc_id": "6698e68ce217b584ab8f70e65183d8e48dd468c3f7fafd6530a917d713b00751", + "edit_distance": 0.30659025787965616, + "f1_score": 0.9717868338557996, + "meteor": 0.9453037499368487, + "precision": 0.9627329192546584, + "pred_md": "8459ch06.fm\n\nDraft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n- GLYPH<129> Compile OpenStack plugin for the ppc64le platform:\n\n```\nmkdir -p $GOPATH/src/github.com/terraform-providers; cd $GOPATH/src/github.com/terraform-providers git clone https://github.com/terraform-providers/terraform-provider-openstack Cloning into 'terraform-provider-openstack'... remote: Enumerating objects: 189, done. remote: Counting objects: 100% (189/189), done. remote: Compressing objects: 100% (163/163), done. remote: Total 17434 (delta 59), reused 101 (delta 21), pack-reused 17245 Receiving objects: 100% (17434/17434), 11.96 MiB | 1.54 MiB/s, done. Resolving deltas: 100% (10138/10138), done. cd $GOPATH/src/github.com/terraform-providers/terraform-provider-openstack git checkout v1.22.0 Note: checking out 'v1.22.0'. ... Output truncated ... HEAD is now at 7dcd493... v1.22.0 XC_OS=linux XC_ARCH=ppc64le make build ==> Checking that code complies with gofmt requirements... go install\n```\n\n- GLYPH<129> Compile Null plugin for the ppc64le platform:\n\n```\nmkdir -p $GOPATH/src/github.com/terraform-providers ; cd $GOPATH/src/github.com/terraform-providers/ git clone https://github.com/terraform-providers/terraform-provider-null.git Cloning into 'terraform-provider-null'... ... Output truncated ... Resolving deltas: 100% (2057/2057), done. cd $GOPATH/src/github.com/terraform-providers/terraform-provider-null git checkout v2.1.2 Note: checking out 'v2.1.2'. ... Output truncated ... HEAD is now at 8d3d85a... v2.1.2 XC_OS=linux XC_ARCH=ppc64le make build ==> Checking that code complies with gofmt requirements... go install\n```\n\n## 6.3 OpenShift container platform deployment\n\nThis section provides an OpenShift container deployment platform.\n\n## 6.3.1 Deployment scenarios\n\nThis section presents the most common scenarios that can be used to start deploying OpenShift clusters:\n\n- /SM590000 Single node deployment (all-in-one) is not an officially supported OpenShift deployment. The all-in-one (AIO) configuration is considered a testing or development\n\n104\n\nRed Hat OpenShift and IBM Cloud Paks on IBM Power Systems: Volume 1", + "recall": 0.9810126582278481, + "true_md": "8459ch06.fm\n\nDraft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n- GLYPH<129> Compile OpenStack plugin for the ppc64le platform:\n\nmkdir -p $GOPATH/src/github.com/terraform-providers; cd $GOPATH/src/github.com/terraform-providers git clone https://github.com/terraform-providers/terraform-provider-openstack Cloning into 'terraform-provider-openstack'... remote: Enumerating objects: 189, done. remote: Counting objects: 100% (189/189), done. remote: Compressing objects: 100% (163/163), done. remote: Total 17434 (delta 59), reused 101 (delta 21), pack-reused 17245 Receiving objects: 100% (17434/17434), 11.96 MiB | 1.54 MiB/s, done. Resolving deltas: 100% (10138/10138), done. cd $GOPATH/src/github.com/terraform-providers/terraform-provider-openstack git checkout v1.22.0 Note: checking out 'v1.22.0'. ... Output truncated ... HEAD is now at 7dcd493... v1.22.0 XC\\_OS=linux XC\\_ARCH=ppc64le make build ==> Checking that code complies with gofmt requirements... go install\n\nmkdir -p $GOPATH/src/github.com/terraform-providers ; cd $GOPATH/src/github.com/terraform-providers/ git clone https://github.com/terraform-providers/terraform-provider-null.git Cloning into 'terraform-provider-null'... ... Output truncated ... Resolving deltas: 100% (2057/2057), done. cd $GOPATH/src/github.com/terraform-providers/terraform-provider-null git checkout v2.1.2 Note: checking out 'v2.1.2'. ... Output truncated ... HEAD is now at 8d3d85a... v2.1.2 XC\\_OS=linux XC\\_ARCH=ppc64le make build ==> Checking that code complies with gofmt requirements... go install\n\n- GLYPH<129> Compile Null plugin for the ppc64le platform:\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Single node deployment (all-in-one) is not an officially supported OpenShift deployment. The all-in-one (AIO) configuration is considered a testing or development \n\nThis section presents the most common scenarios that can be used to start deploying OpenShift clusters:\n\nThis section provides an OpenShift container deployment platform.\n\n## 6.3 OpenShift container platform deployment\n\n## 6.3.1 Deployment scenarios\n\n104 Red Hat OpenShift and IBM Cloud Paks on IBM Power Systems: Volume 1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9143306127318827, + "doc_id": "19ee9956e897f11fd68e9c2acf704b6e73a3e2b1d7b924276d116a193d672be8", + "edit_distance": 0.42032967032967034, + "f1_score": 0.9910447761194029, + "meteor": 0.8636006076888852, + "precision": 0.9940119760479041, + "pred_md": "16 online candidate tier\\_enterprise 558.4GB\n\n<...>\n\nDrive list shows Status of each drive. It can be Online, which means that drive can communicate with disk enclosure where it is installed. Drive status Offline indicates that there is no connection with it. Its status might be failed or physically removed.\n\nDrive Use defines its current role. The following use roles are available:\n\n- /SM590000 Unused : The system has access to the drive but was not told to take ownership of it. Most actions on the drive are not permitted. This is a safe state for newly added hardware.\n- /SM590000 Candidate : The drive is owned by the system, and is not currently part of the RAID configuration. It is available to be used in an array MDisk.\n- /SM590000 Spare : The drive is a hot spare. It is protecting RAID arrays. If any of the traditional array members fails, it becomes array Member .\n- /SM590000 Member : The drive is part of a (T)RAID or DRAID array.\n- /SM590000 Failed : The drive is not a part of the array configuration and is waiting for a service action.\n\nThe use that can be assigned depends on the current drive use. These dependencies are shown in Figure 6-25.\n\nFigure 6-25 Allowed usage changes for internal drives\n\nFigure 6-25 Allowed usage changes for internal drives\n\nNote: To start configuring arrays in a new system, all Unused drives need to be configured as Candidates . Initial setup or Assign storage GUI wizards do that automatically.\n\nA number of actions can be performed on internal drives. To perform any action, select one or more drives and right-click the selection, as shown in Figure 6-26 on page 210. Alternatively, select the drives and click Actions .\n\nChapter 6. Storage pools\n\n209", + "recall": 0.9880952380952381, + "true_md": "16 online candidate tier\\_enterprise 558.4GB <...>\n\nDrive list shows Status of each drive. It can be Online, which means that drive can communicate with disk enclosure where it is installed. Drive status Offline indicates that there is no connection with it. Its status might be failed or physically removed.\n\nDrive Use defines its current role. The following use roles are available:\n\nThe use that can be assigned depends on the current drive use. These dependencies are shown in Figure 6-25.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Failed : The drive is not a part of the array configuration and is waiting for a service action.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Member : The drive is part of a (T)RAID or DRAID array. \n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Spare : The drive is a hot spare. It is protecting RAID arrays. If any of the traditional array members fails, it becomes array Member . \n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Candidate : The drive is owned by the system, and is not currently part of the RAID configuration. It is available to be used in an array MDisk.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Unused : The system has access to the drive but was not told to take ownership of it. Most actions on the drive are not permitted. This is a safe state for newly added hardware.\n\nFigure 6-25 Allowed usage changes for internal drives\n\nNote: To start configuring arrays in a new system, all Unused drives need to be configured as Candidates . Initial setup or Assign storage GUI wizards do that automatically.\n\nA number of actions can be performed on internal drives. To perform any action, select one or more drives and right-click the selection, as shown in Figure 6-26 on page 210. Alternatively, select the drives and click Actions . \n\nChapter 6. Storage pools 209" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.43949445576251234, + "doc_id": "757fef3aaf533c37c0d9e415173749a28bdc85decf667ddd25162d5a998aa4a2", + "edit_distance": 0.7438725490196079, + "f1_score": 0.9330357142857144, + "meteor": 0.7766706139206263, + "precision": 0.9587155963302753, + "pred_md": "| pools 288 | | |\n|---------------------------------------------------------------------------|----------------------------------------------------------------------------|--------------------|\n| requirements 17 | | |\n| performance advantage 80 | | |\n| performance considerations 740, 742 | | |\n| performance improvement 80 | | |\n| performance monitoring tool 75 | | |\n| performance requirements 44 | | |\n| physical location 46 physical site 48 | | |\n| planning rules 44 point in time (PiT) 38 | | |\n| copies 16-17, 38 consistent 17 | | |\n| policy decision 524 pools primary 262 | | |\n| port | | |\n| mask 59 port mask 54 Port Mask field 359 | | |\n| port speeds 52 ports | | |\n| offline 364 states 365 | | |\n| post-processing based 428 | | |\n| power supply 680 power supply units (PSU) 680-681 removing 681 PPRC | | |\n| background copy 523, 532 | | |\n| commands 541 detailed states 538 | | |\n| preferred access node 68 | | |\n| preferred node 251 pre-installation planning 44 | | |\n| Prepare 782 PREPARE\\_COMPLETED 464 | | |\n| priority setting 309 | private keys 756-757, 759, 764, 766 public keys 756, 758, 760-761, 767 | |\n| PuTTY 756-757, 759, 762-764, 766 key generators 759 | | |\n| priority 309 | | |\n| presets 12 | | |\n| primary 526 | | |\n| | | primary copy 243 |\n\n## Q\n\n| quorum candidates 29 disks 29 |\n|-------------------------------------|\n| quorum disks 46 |\n\n## R\n\n| definition 27 |\n|--------------------------------|\n| overview 27 performance 27 |\n| presets 12 |\n\n798\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\n| RAID arrays 19, 28, 31 goals 27 | |\n|------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|-----------------------------------------------------------|\n| RAID levels 27 redundancy 27 RAS 784 real capacity 253 | |\n| real-time synchronized 514 rebalancing 27 | |\n| receivers 41 | |\n| Contact us xviii redundancy 77 arrays 27 MDisks 29 PSUs 680 redundant 773 Redundant SAN 784 redundant SAN 784 relationships FlashCopy 38 | reliability, availability, and serviceability (RAS) 674 |\n| Remote authentication 108 Remote Copy asynchronous 17, 37 nodes 20 synchronous 37 | image mode volumes 32 |\n| remote fabric 780 interconnect 780 | remove WWPN definitions 380 |\n\nround robin 68\n\n## S\n\n| sampling interval 742 SAN fabric 50 SAN fabrics 19, 35 clusters 756 SATA 78 scalable 82 scripting 524 scripts 769 SCSI 785 | |\n|------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|------------------------------------------|\n| SAN Volume Controller 12, 784 | |\n| commands 35 SCSI commands 61 | |\n| SCSI Disk 780 SCSI IDs 359, 372 secondary 526 security features 40 | Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) 13, 676-678 |", + "recall": 0.908695652173913, + "true_md": "pools 288 requirements 17 performance advantage 80 performance considerations 740, 742 performance improvement 80 performance monitoring tool 75 performance requirements 44 physical location 46 physical site 48 planning rules 44 point in time (PiT) 38 copies 16–17, 38 consistent 17 policy decision 524 pools primary 262 port mask 59 port mask 54 Port Mask field 359 port speeds 52 ports offline 364 states 365 post-processing based 428 power supply 680 power supply units (PSU) 680–681 removing 681 PPRC background copy 523, 532 commands 541 detailed states 538 preferred access node 68 preferred node 251 pre-installation planning 44 Prepare 782 PREPARE\\_COMPLETED 464 presets 12 primary 526 primary copy 243 priority 309 priority setting 309 private keys 756–757, 759, 764, 766 public keys 756, 758, 760–761, 767 PuTTY 756–757, 759, 762–764, 766 key generators 759\n\nRAID arrays 19, 28, 31 goals 27 RAID levels 27 redundancy 27 RAS 784 real capacity 253 real-time synchronized 514 rebalancing 27 receivers 41 Redbooks website Contact us xviii redundancy 77 arrays 27 MDisks 29 PSUs 680 redundant 773 Redundant SAN 784 redundant SAN 784 relationships FlashCopy 38 image mode volumes 32 reliability, availability, and serviceability (RAS) 674 Remote 784 remote data mirroring 23 mirroring 11, 17 service 40 Remote authentication 108 Remote Copy asynchronous 17, 37 nodes 20 synchronous 37 remote fabric 780 interconnect 780 remove WWPN definitions 380 replication 72 restore points 38 Reverse FlashCopy 16, 38 round robin 68\n\nsampling interval 742 SAN fabric 50 SAN fabrics 19, 35 SAN Volume Controller 12, 784 clusters 756 SATA 78 scalable 82 scripting 524 scripts 769 SCSI 785 commands 35 SCSI commands 61 SCSI Disk 780 SCSI IDs 359, 372 secondary 526 security features 40 Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) 13, 676–678 connectivity 679\n\nquorum candidates 29 disks 29 quorum disks 46\n\nRAID definition 27 overview 27 performance 27 presets 12\n\n## Q\n\n## R\n\n## S\n\n798 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9452331074276562, + "doc_id": "6f8681eeddd5e664dbf23de0a76a290e89d534933605fbbe0960781be8bbbf82", + "edit_distance": 0.1864406779661017, + "f1_score": 0.9565217391304348, + "meteor": 0.8898594133981527, + "precision": 0.9533333333333334, + "pred_md": "Draft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n8459ch06.fm\n\n- 5. Enable Red Hat repositories for IBM POWER9:\n\n```\nansible -i nodes -a 'subscription-manager repos --disable=\"*\" --enable=\"rhel-7-for-power-9-rpms\" --enable=\"rhel-7-for-power-9-extras-rpms\" --enable=\"rhel-7-for-power-9-optional-rpms\" --enable=\"rhel-7-server-ansible-2.6-for-power-9-rpms\" --enable=\"rhel-7-server-for-power-9-rhscl-rpms\" --enable=\"rhel-7-for-power-9-ose-3.11-rpms\" wkrnode01.domain.example.com | SUCCESS | rc=0 >> Repository 'rhel-7-for-power-9-optional-source-rpms' is disabled for this system. Repository 'rhel-7-for-power9-fast-datapath-beta-debug-rpms' is disabled for this system. Repository 'rhel-7-for-power-9-supplementary-debug-rpms' is disabled for this system. Repository 'rhel-7-for-power-9-satellite-tools-6.3-debug-rpms' is disabled for this system. ... Output truncated ... lbsnode01.domain.example.com | SUCCESS | rc=0 >> Repository 'rhel-7-for-power-9-optional-source-rpms' is disabled for this system. Repository 'rhel-7-for-power9-fast-datapath-beta-debug-rpms' is disabled for this system. ... Output truncated ... Repository 'rhel-7-for-power-9-supplementary-rpms' is disabled for this system. Repository 'rhel-7-server-ansible-2-for-power-9-rpms' is disabled for this system. Repository 'rhel-7-for-power-9-optional-beta-debug-rpms' is disabled for this system. Repository 'rhel-7-for-power-9-supplementary-beta-rpms' is disabled for this system.\n```\n\n## 6. Install the latest operating system updates:\n\n```\nansible -i nodes,lb -a 'yum -y update --security --exclude=cloud-init\\*' [WARNING]: Consider using the yum module rather than running yum. If you need to use command because yum is insufficient you can add warn=False to this command task or set command_warnings=False in ansible.cfg to get rid of this message. mstnode02.domain.example.com | SUCCESS | rc=0 >> Loaded plugins: product-id, search-disabled-repos, subscription-manager 5 package(s) needed (+0 related) for security, out of 5 available Resolving Dependencies --> Running transaction check ---> Package kernel.ppc64le 0:4.14.0-115.14.1.el7a will be installed ... Output truncated ... Installed: kernel.ppc64le 0:4.14.0-115.14.1.el7a Updated: kernel-bootwrapper.ppc64le 0:4.14.0-115.14.1.el7a kernel-tools.ppc64le 0:4.14.0-115.14.1.el7a kernel-tools-libs.ppc64le 0:4.14.0-115.14.1.el7a python-perf.ppc64le 0:4.14.0-115.14.1.el7a Complete!\n```\n\nChapter 6. Installing Red Hat OpenShift 3.11 on IBM PowerVC\n\n123", + "recall": 0.959731543624161, + "true_md": "8459ch06.fm\n\nDraft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n- 5. Enable Red Hat repositories for IBM POWER9:\n\n- 6. Install the latest operating system updates:\n\nansible -i <inventory\\_file> nodes -a 'subscription-manager repos --disable=\"*\" --enable=\"rhel-7-for-power-9-rpms\" --enable=\"rhel-7-for-power-9-extras-rpms\" --enable=\"rhel-7-for-power-9-optional-rpms\" --enable=\"rhel-7-server-ansible-2.6-for-power-9-rpms\" --enable=\"rhel-7-server-for-power-9-rhscl-rpms\" --enable=\"rhel-7-for-power-9-ose-3.11-rpms\" wkrnode01.domain.example.com | SUCCESS | rc=0 >> Repository 'rhel-7-for-power-9-optional-source-rpms' is disabled for this system. Repository 'rhel-7-for-power9-fast-datapath-beta-debug-rpms' is disabled for this system. Repository 'rhel-7-for-power-9-supplementary-debug-rpms' is disabled for this system. Repository 'rhel-7-for-power-9-satellite-tools-6.3-debug-rpms' is disabled for this system. ... Output truncated ... lbsnode01.domain.example.com | SUCCESS | rc=0 >> Repository 'rhel-7-for-power-9-optional-source-rpms' is disabled for this system. Repository 'rhel-7-for-power9-fast-datapath-beta-debug-rpms' is disabled for this system. ... Output truncated ... Repository 'rhel-7-for-power-9-supplementary-rpms' is disabled for this system. Repository 'rhel-7-server-ansible-2-for-power-9-rpms' is disabled for this system. Repository 'rhel-7-for-power-9-optional-beta-debug-rpms' is disabled for this system. Repository 'rhel-7-for-power-9-supplementary-beta-rpms' is disabled for this system.\n\nansible -i <inventory\\_file> nodes,lb -a 'yum -y update --security --exclude=cloud-init\\*' [WARNING]: Consider using the yum module rather than running yum. If you need to use command because yum is insufficient you can add warn=False to this command task or set command\\_warnings=False in ansible.cfg to get rid of this message. mstnode02.domain.example.com | SUCCESS | rc=0 >> Loaded plugins: product-id, search-disabled-repos, subscription-manager 5 package(s) needed (+0 related) for security, out of 5 available Resolving Dependencies --> Running transaction check ---> Package kernel.ppc64le 0:4.14.0-115.14.1.el7a will be installed ... Output truncated ... Installed: kernel.ppc64le 0:4.14.0-115.14.1.el7a Updated: kernel-bootwrapper.ppc64le 0:4.14.0-115.14.1.el7a kernel-tools.ppc64le 0:4.14.0-115.14.1.el7a kernel-tools-libs.ppc64le 0:4.14.0-115.14.1.el7a python-perf.ppc64le 0:4.14.0-115.14.1.el7a Complete!\n\nChapter 6. Installing Red Hat OpenShift 3.11 on IBM PowerVC 123" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9552016559356965, + "doc_id": "65984f79980d94aa77c3f26f2e8d1c6f4a26dfface4579ecb2510a28e40d4157", + "edit_distance": 0.10996563573883161, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9778033432610281, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "398\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\nClick Map Volumes and wait for the mappings to be created.\n\n- 14.Select the storage pool that you want to migrate the imported volumes into. Ensure that the selected storage pool has enough space to accommodate the migrated volumes before you continue. This is an optional step. You can decide not to migrate to Storage pool and to leave the imported MDisk as an image-mode volume. This technique is not recommended because no volume mirroring are created. Therefore, no protection is available for the imported MDisk, and no data transfer occurs from the system to be migrated and the Storwize V7000. Click Next , as shown in Figure 9-13.\n\nFigure 9-13 Select the pool to migrate the MDisk to\n\nFigure 9-13 Select the pool to migrate the MDisk to\n\nThe migration starts. This task continues running in the background and uses the volume mirroring function to place a generic copy of the image-mode volumes in the selected storage pool.\n\nNote: With volume mirroring, the system creates two copies (Copy0 and Copy1) of a volume. Typically, Copy0 is located in the migration pool, and Copy1 is created in the target pool of the migration. When the host generates a write I/O on the volume, data is written at the same time on both copies. Read I/Os are performed on the preferred copy.\n\nIn the background, a mirror synchronization of the two copies is performed and runs until the two copies are synchronized. The speed of this background synchronization can be changed in the volume properties.", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Click Map Volumes and wait for the mappings to be created.\n\n- 14.Select the storage pool that you want to migrate the imported volumes into. Ensure that the selected storage pool has enough space to accommodate the migrated volumes before you continue. This is an optional step. You can decide not to migrate to Storage pool and to leave the imported MDisk as an image-mode volume. This technique is not recommended because no volume mirroring are created. Therefore, no protection is available for the imported MDisk, and no data transfer occurs from the system to be migrated and the Storwize V7000. Click Next , as shown in Figure 9-13.\n\nFigure 9-13 Select the pool to migrate the MDisk to\n\nThe migration starts. This task continues running in the background and uses the volume mirroring function to place a generic copy of the image-mode volumes in the selected storage pool. \n\nNote: With volume mirroring, the system creates two copies (Copy0 and Copy1) of a volume. Typically, Copy0 is located in the migration pool, and Copy1 is created in the target pool of the migration. When the host generates a write I/O on the volume, data is written at the same time on both copies. Read I/Os are performed on the preferred copy. \n\nIn the background, a mirror synchronization of the two copies is performed and runs until the two copies are synchronized. The speed of this background synchronization can be changed in the volume properties. \n\n398 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9589716860530216, + "doc_id": "aaf47bbce0fb8a2609cb2c5c99a35d71b1849911d5a28d1a6069317605377d0e", + "edit_distance": 0.07370517928286853, + "f1_score": 0.982716049382716, + "meteor": 0.9403863051194229, + "precision": 0.995, + "pred_md": "- /SM590000 IBM Spectrum Virtualize does not require a control network or fabric to be installed to manage Global Mirror. For intercluster Global Mirror, the system maintains a control link between the two systems. This control link is used to control the state and to coordinate the updates at either end. The control link is implemented on top of the same FC fabric connection that the system uses for Global Mirror I/O.\n- /SM590000 IBM Spectrum Virtualize implements a configuration model that maintains the Global Mirror configuration and state through major events, such as failover, recovery, and resynchronization, to minimize user configuration action through these events.\n- /SM590000 IBM Spectrum Virtualize implements flexible resynchronization support, enabling it to resynchronize volume pairs that experienced write I/Os to both disks, and to resynchronize only those regions that changed.\n- /SM590000 An optional feature for Global Mirror is a delay simulation to be applied on writes that are sent to auxiliary volumes. It is useful in intracluster scenarios for testing purposes.\n\n## Colliding writes\n\nThe Global Mirror algorithm requires that only a single write is active on a volume. I/Os that overlap an active IO are sequential, which is called colliding writes. If another write is received from a host while the auxiliary write is still active, the new host write is delayed until the auxiliary write is complete. This rule is needed if a series of writes to the auxiliary must be tried again, which is called reconstruction . Conceptually, the data for reconstruction comes from the master volume.\n\nIf multiple writes are allowed to be applied to the master for a sector, only the most recent write gets the correct data during reconstruction. If reconstruction is interrupted for any reason, the intermediate state of the auxiliary is inconsistent. Applications that deliver such write activity do not achieve the performance that Global Mirror is intended to support. A volume statistic is maintained about the frequency of these collisions.\n\nAn attempt is made to allow multiple writes to a single location to be outstanding in the Global Mirror algorithm. There is still a need for master writes to be sequential, and the intermediate states of the master data must be kept in a non-volatile journal while the writes are outstanding to maintain the correct write ordering during reconstruction. Reconstruction must never overwrite data on the auxiliary with an earlier version. The volume statistic that is monitoring colliding writes is now limited to those writes that are not affected by this change.\n\nFigure 11-91 shows a colliding write sequence example.\n\nFigure 11-91 Colliding writes example\n\nFigure 11-91 Colliding writes example\n\nChapter 11. Advanced Copy Services\n\n527", + "recall": 0.9707317073170731, + "true_md": "- GLYPH<SM590000> IBM Spectrum Virtualize does not require a control network or fabric to be installed to manage Global Mirror. For intercluster Global Mirror, the system maintains a control link between the two systems. This control link is used to control the state and to coordinate the updates at either end. The control link is implemented on top of the same FC fabric connection that the system uses for Global Mirror I/O.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> IBM Spectrum Virtualize implements a configuration model that maintains the Global Mirror configuration and state through major events, such as failover, recovery, and resynchronization, to minimize user configuration action through these events.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> IBM Spectrum Virtualize implements flexible resynchronization support, enabling it to resynchronize volume pairs that experienced write I/Os to both disks, and to resynchronize only those regions that changed.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> An optional feature for Global Mirror is a delay simulation to be applied on writes that are sent to auxiliary volumes. It is useful in intracluster scenarios for testing purposes.\n\n## Colliding writes\n\nThe Global Mirror algorithm requires that only a single write is active on a volume. I/Os that overlap an active IO are sequential, which is called colliding writes. If another write is received from a host while the auxiliary write is still active, the new host write is delayed until the auxiliary write is complete. This rule is needed if a series of writes to the auxiliary must be tried again, which is called reconstruction . Conceptually, the data for reconstruction comes from the master volume. \n\nIf multiple writes are allowed to be applied to the master for a sector, only the most recent write gets the correct data during reconstruction. If reconstruction is interrupted for any reason, the intermediate state of the auxiliary is inconsistent. Applications that deliver such write activity do not achieve the performance that Global Mirror is intended to support. A volume statistic is maintained about the frequency of these collisions. \n\nAn attempt is made to allow multiple writes to a single location to be outstanding in the Global Mirror algorithm. There is still a need for master writes to be sequential, and the intermediate states of the master data must be kept in a non-volatile journal while the writes are outstanding to maintain the correct write ordering during reconstruction. Reconstruction must never overwrite data on the auxiliary with an earlier version. The volume statistic that is monitoring colliding writes is now limited to those writes that are not affected by this change.\n\nFigure 11-91 shows a colliding write sequence example.\n\nFigure 11-91 Colliding writes example\n\nChapter 11. Advanced Copy Services 527" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8761065861920835, + "doc_id": "8084a6426dd1adf7b0d052f4e4ddaa5554037864f6515008c659948bd9729e95", + "edit_distance": 0.42528735632183906, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9663185094156534, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "354\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\n- 2. The import mappings window opens. Select the source host from which you want to import the volume mappings. As shown in Figure 8-39, we select the host ITSO-VMHOST-01 and click Import .\n\nFigure 8-39 import volume mappings source host selection\n\nFigure 8-39 import volume mappings source host selection\n\n- 3. After the task completes, verify that the mappings are as expected from the Hosts menu (see Figure 8-26 on page 346), right-click the target host, and select Properties . Then, click the Mapped Volumes tab and verify that the required volumes were mapped to the new host (see Figure 8-37 on page 353).\n\n## Renaming a host\n\nTo rename a host, complete the following steps:\n\n- 1. Select the host, and then right-click and select Rename (see Figure 8-40).\n\nFigure 8-40 Rename a host\n\nFigure 8-40 Rename a host", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "- 2. The import mappings window opens. Select the source host from which you want to import the volume mappings. As shown in Figure 8-39, we select the host ITSO-VMHOST-01 and click Import .\n\n- 3. After the task completes, verify that the mappings are as expected from the Hosts menu (see Figure 8-26 on page 346), right-click the target host, and select Properties . Then, click the Mapped Volumes tab and verify that the required volumes were mapped to the new host (see Figure 8-37 on page 353). \n\n- 1. Select the host, and then right-click and select Rename (see Figure 8-40).\n\n## Renaming a host\n\nTo rename a host, complete the following steps:\n\nFigure 8-40 Rename a host\n\nFigure 8-39 import volume mappings source host selection\n\n354 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7509843208433777, + "doc_id": "443dc12d79ee43a652b8f37b7ff3f601ffb69216dfd6e557d3cbc05f7846984d", + "edit_distance": 0.8457831325301205, + "f1_score": 0.9702380952380955, + "meteor": 0.615950930713802, + "precision": 0.9878787878787879, + "pred_md": "Note: Before enabling Transparent Cloud Tiering, consider the following requirements:\n\n- /SM590000 Ensure that DNS server is configured on your system and accessible.\n- /SM590000 Determine whether your company's security policies require enabled encryption. If yes, ensure that the encryption licenses are properly installed and encryption enabled.\n\nEach cloud service provider requires different configuration options. The system supports the following cloud service providers:\n\n- /SM590000 SoftLayerfi\n- /SM590000 OpenStack Swift\n- /SM590000 Amazon S3\n\nTo view your IBM Spectrum Virtualize cloud provider settings, from the IBM Storwize V7000 Settings pane, point to Settings and click System . Then, select Transparent Cloud Tiering , as shown in Figure 5-76.\n\nFigure 5-76 Transparent cloud tiering settings\n\nFigure 5-76 Transparent cloud tiering settings\n\nB using this view, you can enable and disable features of your Transparent Cloud Tiering and update the system information concerning your cloud service provider. This pane allows you to set the following options:\n\n- /SM590000 Cloud service provider\n- /SM590000 Object Storage URL\n- /SM590000 The Tenant or the container information that is associated to your cloud Object Storage\n- /SM590000 User name of the cloud object account\n- /SM590000 API Key\n- /SM590000 The container prefix or location of your object\n- /SM590000 Encryption\n- /SM590000 Bandwidth\n\n## 5.10.5 Support menu\n\nUse the Support pane to configure and manage connections and upload support packages to the support center.\n\nThe following options are available from the menu:\n\n- /SM590000 Call Home\n\nThe Call Home feature transmits operational and event-related data to you and IBM through a Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) server connection in the form of an event notification email. When configured, this function alerts IBM service personnel about hardware failures and potentially serious configuration or environmental issues.\n\nChapter 5. Graphical user interface\n\n179", + "recall": 0.9532163742690059, + "true_md": "Note: Before enabling Transparent Cloud Tiering, consider the following requirements:\n\nEach cloud service provider requires different configuration options. The system supports the following cloud service providers:\n\nTo view your IBM Spectrum Virtualize cloud provider settings, from the IBM Storwize V7000 Settings pane, point to Settings and click System . Then, select Transparent Cloud Tiering , as shown in Figure 5-76.\n\nB using this view, you can enable and disable features of your Transparent Cloud Tiering and update the system information concerning your cloud service provider. This pane allows you to set the following options:\n\nUse the Support pane to configure and manage connections and upload support packages to the support center.\n\nThe following options are available from the menu: \n\nThe Call Home feature transmits operational and event-related data to you and IBM through a Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) server connection in the form of an event notification email. When configured, this function alerts IBM service personnel about hardware failures and potentially serious configuration or environmental issues.\n\nChapter 5. Graphical user interface 179\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Call Home\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Bandwidth\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Encryption\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> The container prefix or location of your object\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> API Key\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> User name of the cloud object account\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> The Tenant or the container information that is associated to your cloud Object Storage\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Object Storage URL\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Cloud service provider\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Amazon S3\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> OpenStack Swift\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> SoftLayerfi\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Determine whether your company’s security policies require enabled encryption. If yes, ensure that the encryption licenses are properly installed and encryption enabled.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Ensure that DNS server is configured on your system and accessible.\n\nFigure 5-76 Transparent cloud tiering settings\n\n## 5.10.5 Support menu" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7503401235452624, + "doc_id": "489925327596e3a91abdd48af1a015ee92d34e29cfa417e63275b73c26783243", + "edit_distance": 0.28846153846153844, + "f1_score": 0.9333333333333331, + "meteor": 0.7345600180278805, + "precision": 0.9722222222222222, + "pred_md": "Draft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n8459ch04.fm\n\nChapter 4.\n\n## Red Hat OpenShift components and architecture\n\nOpenShift is a set of modular components and services, based on Kubernetes cluster and Docker, running on top of Red Hat Linux. OpenShift is designed to provide access to container images with a focus on easy composition of applications by developers.\n\nThis chapter describes the OpenShift cluster platform components and architecture.\n\nThis chapter contains the following:\n\n- /SM590000 OpenShift cluster components\n- /SM590000 OpenShift container platform networking\n- /SM590000 OpenShift persistent storage\n- /SM590000 OpenShift registry\n- /SM590000 Managing OpenShift Resources\n\n' Copyright IBM Corp. 2019. All rights reserved.\n\n55", + "recall": 0.8974358974358975, + "true_md": "Draft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n8459ch04.fm\n\n## 4\n\n## Red Hat OpenShift components and architecture\n\nOpenShift is a set of modular components and services, based on Kubernetes cluster and Docker, running on top of Red Hat Linux. OpenShift is designed to provide access to container images with a focus on easy composition of applications by developers.\n\nThis chapter describes the OpenShift cluster platform components and architecture.\n\nThis chapter contains the following:\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> OpenShift cluster components\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> OpenShift container platform networking\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> OpenShift persistent storage\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> OpenShift registry\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Managing OpenShift Resources\n\n' Copyright IBM Corp. 2 019. All rights reserved.\n\n55" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8675836230608724, + "doc_id": "f48543d58d46890cde74d720c2f8ee42676e2ae8147b659a7abd96659718ad07", + "edit_distance": 0.2265625, + "f1_score": 0.9411764705882353, + "meteor": 0.9468098785137891, + "precision": 0.96, + "pred_md": "390\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\n- -Prerequisites:\n- GLYPH<129> Storwize V7000 and the external storage system are connected to the same SAN fabric.\n- GLYPH<129> If there are VMware ESX hosts involved in the data migration, the VMware ESX hosts are set to allow volume copies to be recognized.\n\nFor more information about the Storage Migration prerequisites, see 9.1.2, 'Prerequisites' on page 387.\n\nIf all restrictions are satisfied and prerequisites are met, select all of the options and click Next , as shown in Figure 9-4.\n\nFigure 9-4 Restrictions and prerequisites confirmation\n\nFigure 9-4 Restrictions and prerequisites confirmation", + "recall": 0.9230769230769231, + "true_md": "- – Prerequisites:\n\n- GLYPH<129> Storwize V7000 and the external storage system are connected to the same SAN fabric.\n\n- GLYPH<129> If there are VMware ESX host s involved in the data migration, the VMware ESX hosts are set to allow volume copies to be recognized.\n\nFor more information about the Storage Migration prerequisites, see 9.1.2, “Prerequisites” on page 387.\n\nIf all restrictions are satisfied and prerequisites are met, select all of the options and click Next , as shown in Figure 9-4.\n\nFigure 9-4 Restrictions and prerequisites confirmation\n\n390 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8570067284724769, + "doc_id": "1eee511b689c66082949cfbf0eb877a04842ec3b4a0427525ef21f4df6081f10", + "edit_distance": 0.14583333333333334, + "f1_score": 0.9308176100628931, + "meteor": 0.9177633541874737, + "precision": 0.961038961038961, + "pred_md": "- /SM590000 Partnerships panel\n\nTo open the Partnership panel, click Copy Services → Partnership in the main menu, as shown in Figure 11-111.\n\nFigure 11-111 Partnership menu\n\nFigure 11-111 Partnership menu\n\nThe Partnership panel opens, as shown in Figure 11-112.\n\nFigure 11-112 Partnership panel\n\nFigure 11-112 Partnership panel\n\n## 11.9.1 Creating Fibre Channel partnership\n\nIntra-cluster Metro Mirror: If you are creating an intra-cluster Metro Mirror, do not perform this next step to create the Metro Mirror partnership. Instead, see 11.9.2, 'Creating remote copy relationships' on page 573.\n\nTo create an FC partnership between IBM Spectrum Virtualize systems by using the GUI, open the Partnerships panel and click Create Partnership to create a partnership, as shown in Figure 11-113 on page 572.\n\nChapter 11. Advanced Copy Services\n\n571", + "recall": 0.9024390243902439, + "true_md": "- GLYPH<SM590000> Partnerships panel\n\nTo open the Partnership panel, click Copy Services → Partnership in the main menu, as shown in Figure 11-111.\n\nFigure 11-111 Partnership menu\n\nFigure 11-112 Partnership panel\n\nThe Partnership panel opens, as shown in Figure 11-112.\n\n## 11.9.1 Creating Fibre Channel partnership\n\nIntra-cluster Metro Mirror: If you are creating an intra-cluster Metro Mirror, do not perform this next step to create the Metro Mirror partnership. Instead, see 11.9.2, “Creating remote copy relationships” on page 573.\n\nTo create an FC partnership between IBM Spectrum Virtualize systems by using the GUI, open the Partnerships panel and click Create Partnership to create a partnership, as shown in Figure 11-113 on page 572.\n\nChapter 11. Advanced Copy Services 571" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8865814127154588, + "doc_id": "cffeaaa362bdbc2253dc84fe5b3cd2b423332e430bd01445a67a2510d4947535", + "edit_distance": 0.47714285714285715, + "f1_score": 0.9605263157894738, + "meteor": 0.9311889079415553, + "precision": 0.9605263157894737, + "pred_md": "200\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\nFigure 6-13 Editing throttle for a pool\n\nFigure 6-13 Editing throttle for a pool\n\nIf more than one throttle applies to an I/O operation, the lowest and most stringent throttle is used. For example, if a throttle of 100 MBps is defined on a pool and 200 MBps throttle is defined on a volume of that pool, the I/O operations are limited to 100 MBps.\n\nA child pool throttle is independent of its parent pool throttle. Limits for a child can be higher than limits for a parent storage pool.\n\nIf a throttle already exists for the storage pool, the dialog box that is shown in Figure 6-13 also shows the Remove button that is used to delete the throttle.\n\nTo set storage pool throttle with CLI, use the mkthrottle command. Example 6-5 shows a storage pool throttle, named iops\\_bw\\_limit, set to 3 Mbps and 1000 IOPS, on Pool0.\n\nExample 6-5 Setting storage pool throttle with CLI\n\n```\nIBM_Storwize:ITSOV7K:superuser>mkthrottle -type mdiskgrp -iops 1000 -bandwidth 3 -name iops_bw_limit -mdiskgrp Pool0 Throttle, id [0], successfully created.\n```\n\nTo remove a throttle with CLI, use the rmthrottle command. It needs throttle ID or throttle name to be supplied as an argument, as shown on Example 6-6. Command returns no feedback if executed successfully.\n\nExample 6-6 Removing pool throttle with CLI\n\n```\nIBM_Storwize:ITSOV7K:superuser>rmthrottle iops_bw_limit IBM_Storwize:ITSOV7K:superuser>\n```\n\n## View all Throttles\n\nYou can display defined throttles from Pools pane. Right-click a pool and select View all Throttles to display the list of the pool's throttles. If you want to view the throttle of other elements (like Volumes or Hosts, for example), you can select All Throttles in the drop-down list, as shown in Figure 6-14 on page 201.", + "recall": 0.9605263157894737, + "true_md": "Figure 6-13 Editing throttle for a pool\n\nIf more than one throttle applies to an I/O operation, the lowest and most stringent throttle is used. For example, if a throttle of 100 MBps is defined on a pool and 200 MBps throttle is defined on a volume of that pool, the I/O operations are limited to 100 MBps.\n\nA child pool throttle is independent of its parent pool throttle. Limits for a child can be higher than limits for a parent storage pool.\n\nIf a throttle already exists for the storage pool, the dialog box that is shown in Figure 6-13 also shows the Remove button that is used to delete the throttle.\n\nTo set storage pool throttle with CLI, use the mkthrottle command. Example 6-5 shows a storage pool throttle, named iops\\_bw\\_limit, set to 3 Mbps and 1000 IOPS, on Pool0.\n\nTo remove a throttle with CLI, use the rmthrottle command. It needs throttle ID or throttle name to be supplied as an argument, as shown on Example 6-6. Command returns no feedback if executed successfully.\n\nYou can display defined throttles from Pools pane. Right-click a pool and select View all Throttles to display the list of the pool’s throttles. If you want to view the throttle of other elements (like Volumes or Hosts, for example), you can select All Throttles in the drop-down list, as shown in Figure 6-14 on page 201.\n\n## View all Throttles\n\nExample 6-6 Removing pool throttle with CLI\n\nExample 6-5 Setting storage pool throttle with CLI\n\nIBM\\_Storwize:ITSOV7K:superuser>mkthrottle -type mdiskgrp -iops 1000 -bandwidth 3 -name iops\\_bw\\_limit -mdiskgrp Pool0 Throttle, id [0], successfully created.\n\nIBM\\_Storwize:ITSOV7K:superuser>rmthrottle iops\\_bw\\_limit IBM\\_Storwize:ITSOV7K:superuser>\n\n200 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9710653343994051, + "doc_id": "fa182abc7e0830f2d5b8817aeae28e6b1fc16814ea1f84beaeb35fabcd24e1d9", + "edit_distance": 0.14225941422594143, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9989608557961704, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Draft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n8459ch03.fm\n\n## 3.4 IBM Cloud Pak for Data\n\nIBM Cloud Pak for Data is a fully-integrated data and AI platform that modernizes data engineering for organizations. Built on Red Hat OpenShift, IBM Cloud Pak for data provides Containerised solution for data processing and analytics capability.\n\n## 3.4.1 Features\n\nIBM Cloud Pak for Data is composed of pre-configured microservices. The microservices enable you to connect to your data sources so that you can catalog and govern, explore and profile, transform, and analyze your data from a single web application.\n\nIBM Cloud Pak for Data is a native cloud solution that enables data to work quickly and efficiently. Data to be used to generate meaningful insights that can help to avoid problems.\n\nIBM Cloud Pak for Data lets you do both by enabling you to connect to your data, govern it, find it, and use it for analysis. IBM Cloud Pak for Data also enables all of your data users to collaborate from a single, unified interface, so your IT department does not need to deploy and connect multiple applications.\n\n## 3.4.2 Layers explained\n\nThis section explains the different layers in IBM Cloud Pak for Data.\n\nData accumulation : IBM Cloud Pak for Data System offers, accelerated time to value, allowing to stand up an entire cloud system for user data and AI architecture in under four hours. IBM Cloud Pak for Data System simplifies expansion. Buy small increments of computing or storage capacity as needed, rather than outlaying vast amounts of capital. Based on application demand and delivery, budgeting can be completed in quarterly expansions on an ad hoc basis.\n\nData organization : Understanding the quality, content and structure of your data is an important first step when making critical business decisions. It utilizes a reusable rules library and supports multi-level evaluations by rule record and pattern. It also facilitates the management of exceptions to established rules.\n\nData analysis: Data Analyzer helps identify data inconsistencies, redundancies and anomalies and makes inferences about the best choices for structure. Analyzing data is the primary purpose of Information Analyzer.\n\n## 3.5 IBM Cloud Pak for Integration\n\nWith time, every organization expands their IT estate with new infrastructure, software and applications. This existing investment on distributed and diverse environment is a major concern during any cloud migration.\n\n## 3.5.1 Features\n\nMaximize utilization: Support traditional integration with a containerized approach across delivery models, domains, endpoints and personas. Migrate, innovate and scale at your own pace.\n\nChapter 3. IBM Cloud Paks - Middleware anywhere\n\n45", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Draft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n8459ch03.fm\n\n## 3.4 IBM Cloud Pak for Data\n\n## 3.4.1 Features\n\n## 3.4.2 Layers explained\n\n## 3.5 IBM Cloud Pak for Integration\n\n## 3.5.1 Features\n\nIBM Cloud Pak for Data is a fully-integrated data and AI platform that modernizes data engineering for organizations. Built on Red Hat OpenShift, IBM Cloud Pak for data provides Containerised solution for data processing and analytics capability. \n\nIBM Cloud Pak for Data is composed of pre-configured microservices. The microservices enable you to connect to your data sources so that you can catalog and govern, explore and profile, transform, and analyze your data from a single web application.\n\nIBM Cloud Pak for Data is a native cloud solution that enables data to work quickly and efficiently. Data to be used to generate meaningful insights that can help to avoid problems.\n\nIBM Cloud Pak for Data lets you do both by enabling you to connect to your data, govern it, find it, and use it for analysis. IBM Cloud Pak for Data also enables all of your data users to collaborate from a single, unified interface, so your IT department does not need to deploy and connect multiple applications.\n\nData accumulation : IBM Cloud Pak for Data System offers, accelerated time to value, allowing to stand up an entire cloud system for user data and AI architecture in under four hours. IBM Cloud Pak for Data System simplifies expansion. Buy small increments of computing or storage capacity as needed, rather than outlaying vast amounts of capital. Based on application demand and delivery, budgeting can be completed in quarterly expansions on an ad hoc basis.\n\nThis section explains the different layers in IBM Cloud Pak for Data.\n\nData organization : Understanding the quality, content and structure of your data is an important first step when making critical business decisions. It utilizes a reusable rules library and supports multi-level evaluations by rule record and pattern. It also facilitates the management of exceptions to established rules. \n\nData analysis: Data Analyzer helps identify data inconsistencies, redundancies and anomalies and makes inferences about the best choices for structure. Analyzing data is the primary purpose of Information Analyzer.\n\nWith time, every organization expands their IT estate with new infrastructure, software and applications. This existing investment on distributed and diverse environment is a major concern during any cloud migration.\n\nMaximize utilization: Support traditional integration with a containerized approach across delivery models, domains, endpoints and personas. Migrate, innovate and scale at your own pace. \n\nChapter 3. IBM Cloud Paks - Middleware anywhere 45" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9858441852179346, + "doc_id": "19e2110e3096c8c36738903b96cd3a8bbbc8c9681b524a806312f709ebe29a17", + "edit_distance": 0.1357615894039735, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9998318847697804, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "The relationship status changes to c onsistent synchronized when the resynchronization process completes. The relationship automatically resumes replication after the temporary loss of connectivity.\n\nChange Volumes used for Consistency Protection are not visible and manageable from the GUI because they are used for Consistency Protection internal behavior only.\n\nIt is not required to configure a secondary change volume on a MM/GM (without cycling) relationship. However, if the link goes down or the secondary volume is offline, the relationship goes in to the Consistent stopped status. If write operations take place on either the primary or secondary volume, the data is no longer synchronized (Out of sync).\n\nConsistency protection must be enabled on all relationships in a Consistency Group. Every relationship in a Consistency Group must be configured with a secondary change volume. If a secondary change volume is not configured on one relationship, the entire Consistency Group stops with a 1720 error if host I/O is processed when the link is down or any secondary volume in the Consistency Group is offline. All relationships in the Consistency Group are unable to retain a consistent copy during resynchronization.\n\nThe option to add consistency protection is selected by default when MM/GM relationships are created. The option must be cleared to create MM/GM relationships without consistency protection.\n\n## 11.6.21 Valid combinations of FlashCopy, Metro Mirror, and Global Mirror\n\nTable 11-10 lists the combinations of FlashCopy and MM/GM functions that are valid for a single volume.\n\nTable 11-10 Valid combination for a single volume\n\n## 11.6.22 Remote Copy configuration limits\n\nTable 11-11 lists the MM/GM configuration limits.\n\nTable 11-11 Metro Mirror configuration limits\n\nChapter 11. Advanced Copy Services\n\n533", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "The relationship status changes to c onsistent synchronized when the resynchronization process completes. The relationship automatically resumes replication after the temporary loss of connectivity.\n\nChange Volumes used for Consistency Protection are not visible and manageable from the GUI because they are used for Consistency Protection internal behavior only.\n\nIt is not required to configure a secondary change volume on a MM/GM (without cycling) relationship. However, if the link goes down or the secondary volume is offline, the relationship goes in to the Consistent stopped status. If write operations take place on either the primary or secondary volume, the data is no longer synchronized (Out of sync).\n\nConsistency protection must be enabled on all relationships in a Consistency Group. Every relationship in a Consistency Group must be configured with a secondary change volume. If a secondary change volume is not configured on one relationship, the entire Consistency Group stops with a 1720 error if host I/O is processed when the link is down or any secondary volume in the Consistency Group is offline. All relationships in the Consistency Group are unable to retain a consistent copy during resynchronization.\n\nThe option to add consistency protection is selected by default when MM/GM relationships are created. The option must be cleared to create MM/GM relationships without consistency protection. \n\nTable 11-10 lists the combinations of FlashCopy and MM/GM functions that are valid for a single volume.\n\nTable 11-11 lists the MM/GM configuration limits.\n\n## 11.6.21 Valid combinations of FlashCopy, Metro Mirror, and Global Mirror\n\n## 11.6.22 Remote Copy configuration limits\n\nTable 11-10 Valid combination for a single volume\n\nTable 11-11 Metro Mirror configuration limits\n\nChapter 11. Advanced Copy Services 533" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8777903090189667, + "doc_id": "db44abdfef8c6f182449b8a89eb59cb933d733dc405503443ae977de522890b9", + "edit_distance": 0.46437994722955145, + "f1_score": 0.9249999999999999, + "meteor": 0.9057004294456785, + "precision": 0.9308176100628931, + "pred_md": "In the CLI, this task is performed with charray (see Example 6-19).\n\nExample 6-19 Adjusting array goals with charray (some columns are not shown)\n\n```\nIBM_Storwize:ITSOV7K:superuser>lsarray mdisk_id mdisk_name status mdisk_grp_id mdisk_grp_name distributed 0 mdisk0 online 0 mdiskgrp0 no 16 Distributed_array online 1 mdiskgrp1 yes IBM_Storwize:ITSOV7K:superuser>charray -sparegoal 2 mdisk0 IBM_Storwize:ITSOV7K:superuser>charray -rebuildareasgoal 0 Distributed_array\n```\n\n## Delete\n\nSelect Delete to remove the array from the storage pool and delete it. An array MDisk does not exist outside of a storage pool. Therefore, an array cannot be removed from the pool without being deleted. All drives that belong to the deleted array return into Candidate .\n\nIf there are no volumes that use extents from this array, the command runs immediately without additional confirmation. If there are volumes that use extents from this array, you are prompted to confirm the action, as shown in Figure 6-45.\n\nFigure 6-45 Deleting an array from a non-empty storage pool\n\nFigure 6-45 Deleting an array from a non-empty storage pool\n\nYour confirmation of the action triggers the migration of the volumes to extents from other MDisks that remain in the pool. After the action is completed, the array is removed from the storage pool and deleted.\n\nNote: The command fails if you don't have enough available capacity remaining in the storage pool to allocate the data that is being migrated from the removed array.\n\nTo delete the array with the CLI, use rmarray . The force parameter is required if volume extents need to be migrated to other MDisks in a storage pool.\n\n## Dependent Volumes\n\nVolumes are entities that are made of extents from a storage pool. The extents of the storage pool come from various MDisks. A volume can then be spread over multiple MDisks, and MDisks can serve multiple volumes. Clicking the Dependent Volumes Action menu of an MDisk lists the volumes that are depending on that MDisk as shown in Figure 6-46 on page 226.\n\nChapter 6. Storage pools\n\n225", + "recall": 0.9192546583850931, + "true_md": "In the CLI, this task is performed with charray (see Example 6-19).\n\nSelect Delete to remove the array from the storage pool and delete it. An array MDisk does not exist outside of a storage pool. Therefore, an array cannot be removed from the pool without being deleted. All drives that belong to the deleted array return into Candidate .\n\nIf there are no volumes that use extents from this array, the command runs immediately without additional confirmation. If there are volumes that use extents from this array, you are prompted to confirm the action, as shown in Figure 6-45.\n\nYour confirmation of the action triggers the migration of the volumes to extents from other MDisks that remain in the pool. After the action is completed, the array is removed from the storage pool and deleted. \n\nNote: The command fails if you don’t have enough available capacity remaining in the storage pool to allocate the data that is being migrated from the removed array.\n\nTo delete the array with the CLI, use rmarray . The - force parameter is required if volume extents need to be migrated to other MDisks in a storage pool.\n\nVolumes are entities that are made of extents from a storage pool. The extents of the storage pool come from various MDisks. A volume can then be spread over multiple MDisks, and MDisks can serve multiple volumes. Clicking the Dependent Volumes Action menu of an MDisk lists the volumes that are depending on that MDisk as shown in Figure 6-46 on page 226.\n\n## Dependent Volumes\n\nChapter 6. Storage pools 225\n\nFigure 6-45 Deleting an array from a non-empty storage pool\n\nExample 6-19 Adjusting array goals with charray (some columns are not shown)\n\nIBM\\_Storwize:ITSOV7K:superuser>lsarray mdisk\\_id mdisk\\_name status mdisk\\_grp\\_id mdisk\\_grp\\_name distributed 0 mdisk0 online 0 mdiskgrp0 no 16 Distributed\\_array online 1 mdiskgrp1 yes IBM\\_Storwize:ITSOV7K:superuser>charray -sparegoal 2 mdisk0 IBM\\_Storwize:ITSOV7K:superuser>charray -rebuildareasgoal 0 Distributed\\_array\n\n## Delete" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9396461544178634, + "doc_id": "29e31b0db79320b92758a2355a803a55a50fe2ff546002f8f36409b789c42f97", + "edit_distance": 0.3151618398637138, + "f1_score": 0.9839816933638443, + "meteor": 0.9105433729103211, + "precision": 0.9953703703703703, + "pred_md": "552\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\nNote: The Bandwidth setting definition when the IP partnerships are created changed in V7.7. Previously, the bandwidth setting defaulted to 50 MiB, and was the maximum transfer rate from the primary site to the secondary site for initial sync/resyncs of volumes.\n\nThe Link Bandwidth setting is now configured by using megabits (Mb) not MB. You set the Link Bandwidth setting to a value that the communication link can sustain, or to what is allocated for replication. The Background Copy Rate setting is now a percentage of the Link Bandwidth. The Background Copy Rate setting determines the available bandwidth for the initial sync and resyncs or for GM with Change Volumes.\n\n## 11.8.3 IP Partnership and data compression\n\nWhen creating an IP partnership between two systems, you can specify whether you want to use the data compression or not. When enabled, IP partnership compression compresses the data that is sent from a local system to the remote system and potentially uses less bandwidth than with uncompressed data. It is also used to decompress data that is received by a local system from a remote system.\n\nData compression is supported for IPv4 or IPv6 partnerships. To enable data compression, both systems in an IP partnership must be running a software level that supports IP partnership compression (V7.7 or later).\n\nTo fully enable compression in an IP partnership, each system must enable compression. When compression is enabled on the local system, data sent to the remote system is compressed so it needs to be decompressed on the remote system, and vice versa.\n\nAlthough IP compression uses the same RtC algorithm as for volumes, there is no need for a RtC license on any of the local or remote system.\n\nReplicated volumes using IP partnership compression can be compressed or uncompressed on the system because there is no link between volumes compression and IP Replication compression:\n\n- /SM590000 Read operation decompresses the data\n- /SM590000 Decompressed data is transferred to the Remote Copy code\n- /SM590000 Data is compressed before being sent over the IP link\n- /SM590000 Remote system remote copy code decompresses the received data\n- /SM590000 Write operation on a volume compresses the data\n\n## 11.8.4 VLAN support\n\nStarting with V7.4, VLAN tagging is supported for both iSCSI host attachment and IP replication. Hosts and remote-copy operations can connect to the system through Ethernet ports. Each traffic type has different bandwidth requirements, which can interfere with each other if they share the same IP connections. VLAN tagging creates two separate connections on the same IP network for different types of traffic. The system supports VLAN configuration on both IPv4 and IPv6 connections.\n\nWhen the VLAN ID is configured for IP addresses used for either iSCSI host attach or IP replication, the VLAN settings on the Ethernet network and servers must be configured correctly to avoid connectivity issues. After the VLANs are configured, changes to the VLAN settings will disrupt iSCSI and IP replication traffic to and from the partnerships.", + "recall": 0.9728506787330317, + "true_md": "Note: The Bandwidth setting definition when the IP partnerships are created changed in V7.7. Previously, the bandwidth setting defaulted to 50 MiB, and was the maximum transfer rate from the primary site to the secondary site for initial sync/resyncs of volumes.\n\nThe Link Bandwidth setting is now configured by using megabits (Mb) not MB. You set the Link Bandwidth setting to a value that the communication link can sustain, or to what is allocated for replication. The Background Copy Rate setting is now a percentage of the Link Bandwidth. The Background Copy Rate setting determines the available bandwidth for the initial sync and resyncs or for GM with Change Volumes.\n\nWhen creating an IP partnership between two systems, you can specify whether you want to use the data compression or not. When enabled, IP partnership compression compresses the data that is sent from a local system to the remote system and potentially uses less bandwidth than with uncompressed data. It is also used to decompress data that is received by a local system from a remote system.\n\nData compression is supported for IPv4 or IPv6 partnerships. To enable data compression, both systems in an IP partnership must be running a software level that supports IP partnership compression (V7.7 or later).\n\nTo fully enable compression in an IP partnership, each system must enable compression. When compression is enabled on the local system, data sent to the remote system is compressed so it needs to be decompressed on the remote system, and vice versa.\n\nAlthough IP compression uses the same RtC algorithm as for volumes, there is no need for a RtC license on any of the local or remote system.\n\nReplicated volumes using IP partnership compression can be compressed or uncompressed on the system because there is no link between volumes compression and IP Replication compression: \n\nStarting with V7.4, VLAN tagging is supported for both iSCSI host attachment and IP replication. Hosts and remote-copy operations can connect to the system through Ethernet ports. Each traffic type has different bandwidth requirements, which can interfere with each other if they share the same IP connections. VLAN tagging creates two separate connections on the same IP network for different types of traffic. The system supports VLAN configuration on both IPv4 and IPv6 connections.\n\nWhen the VLAN ID is configured for IP addresses used for either iSCSI host attach or IP replication, the VLAN settings on the Ethernet network and servers must be configured correctly to avoid connectivity issues. After the VLANs are configured, changes to the VLAN settings will disrupt iSCSI and IP replication traffic to and from the partnerships.\n\n## 11.8.4 VLAN support\n\n## 11.8.3 IP Partnership and data compression\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Read operation decompresses the data\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Decompressed data is transferred to the Remote Copy code\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Data is compressed before being sent over the IP link\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Remote system remote copy code decompresses the received data\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Write operation on a volume compresses the data\n\n552 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9186618381162356, + "doc_id": "c5d4fc464c9c869415d9b16ae3b255388505f737e63ba85a6361c3aacaf62517", + "edit_distance": 0.18446601941747573, + "f1_score": 0.9861111111111112, + "meteor": 0.9820021942954049, + "precision": 0.9861111111111112, + "pred_md": "8459ch06.fm\n\nDraft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n- 19.Remove the compute label from the OpenShift Master-Infrastructure node:\n\noc label node mstnode01.domain.example.com node-role.kubernetes.io/compute=false --overwrite node/mstnode01.domain.example.com labeled\n\n- 20.Use the URL ( https://icp-console.apps.domain.example.com:443 ) to connect to the IBM Multicloud Manager management console as shown in Figure 6-7.\n\nFigure 6-7 IBM Cloud Private console\n\nFigure 6-7 IBM Cloud Private console\n\nYou can find more details about IBM Cloud Pak for Multicloud Management installation at the following website:\n\nhttps://ibm.co/2OCyXeS\n\n152\n\nRed Hat OpenShift and IBM Cloud Paks on IBM Power Systems: Volume 1", + "recall": 0.9861111111111112, + "true_md": "8459ch06.fm\n\nDraft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n- 19.Remove the compute label from the OpenShift Master-Infrastructure node:\n\n- 20.Use the URL ( https://icp-console.apps.domain.example.com:443 ) to connect to the IBM Multicloud Manager management console as shown in Figure 6-7.\n\noc label node mstnode01.domain.example.com node-role.kubernetes.io/compute=false --overwrite node/mstnode01.domain.example.com labeled\n\nFigure 6-7 IBM Cloud Private console\n\nYou can find more details about IBM Cloud Pak for Multicloud Management installation at the following website:\n\nhttps://ibm.co/2OCyXeS\n\n152 Red Hat OpenShift and IBM Cloud Paks on IBM Power Systems: Volume 1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8490672120447013, + "doc_id": "af5293fd423afb6de162c9a821ce0fd2eaed929fa5ddc4169d1d731be9496d3c", + "edit_distance": 0.7767857142857143, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.7979836974969338, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Figure 11-38 Creating a consistency group\n\nFigure 11-38 Creating a consistency group\n\n- 2. Enter the FlashCopy Consistency Group name that you want to use and click Create , as shown in Figure 11-39.\n\nFigure 11-39 Enter the name of new consistency group\n\nFigure 11-39 Enter the name of new consistency group\n\nConsistency Group name: You can use the letters A - Z and a - z, the numbers 0 - 9, and the underscore (\\_) character. The volume name can be 1 - 63 characters.\n\n## 11.2.8 Creating FlashCopy mappings in a Consistency Group\n\nTo create a FlashCopy Consistency Group in the GUI, complete the following steps:\n\n- 1. Open the Consistency Groups window by clicking Copy Services → Consistency Groups . This example assumes that source and target volumes were created previously.\n- 2. Select the Consistency Group in which you want to create the FlashCopy mapping. If you prefer not to create a FlashCopy mapping in a Consistency Group, select Not in a Group , and right-click the selected consistency group or click Actions → Create FlashCopy Mapping , as shown in Figure 11-40.\n\nFigure 11-40 Creating a FlashCopy mapping\n\nFigure 11-40 Creating a FlashCopy mapping\n\nChapter 11. Advanced Copy Services\n\n483", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Figure 11-38 Creating a consistency group\n\nFigure 11-39 Enter the name of new consistency group\n\nFigure 11-40 Creating a FlashCopy mapping\n\n- 2. Select the Consistency Group in which you want to create the FlashCopy mapping. If you prefer not to create a FlashCopy mapping in a Consistency Group, select Not in a Group , and right-click the selected consistency group or click Actions → Create FlashCopy Mapping , as shown in Figure 11-40.\n\n- 1. Open the Consistency Groups window by clicking Copy Services → Consistency Groups . This example assumes that source and target volumes were created previously. \n\n- 2. Enter the FlashCopy Consistency Group name that you want to use and click Create , as shown in Figure 11-39.\n\nConsistency Group name: You can use the letters A - Z and a - z, the numbers 0 - 9, and the underscore (\\_) character. The volume name can be 1 - 63 characters.\n\nTo create a FlashCopy Consistency Group in the GUI, complete the following steps:\n\n## 11.2.8 Creating FlashCopy mappings in a Consistency Group\n\nChapter 11. Advanced Copy Services 483" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.887594675366946, + "doc_id": "1ab1b9037ddd5d8df64c31bfa8f0ab43fc8774afd4293bfa7c6c717e86917623", + "edit_distance": 0.7041036717062635, + "f1_score": 0.98005698005698, + "meteor": 0.7404927151623537, + "precision": 0.9942196531791907, + "pred_md": "184\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\nA well-chosen name serves both as a label for an object and as a tool for tracking and managing the object. Choosing a meaningful name is important if you decide to use configuration backup and restore.\n\nWhen you choose a name for an object, apply the following naming rules:\n\n- /SM590000 Names must begin with a letter.\n\nImportant : Do not start names by using an underscore (\\_) character, even though it is possible. The use of the underscore as the first character of a name is a reserved naming convention that is used by the system configuration restore process.\n\n- /SM590000 The first character cannot be numeric.\n- /SM590000 The name can be a maximum of 63 characters, but exceptions exist. The name can be a maximum of 15 characters for Remote Copy relationships and groups. The lsfabric command displays long object names that are truncated to 15 characters for nodes and systems. V5.1.0 systems display truncated volume names when they are partnered with a version V6.1.0 or later system that has volumes with long object names ( lsrcrelationshipcandidate or lsrcrelationship commands).\n- /SM590000 Valid characters are uppercase letters (A - Z), lowercase letters (a - z), digits (0 - 9), the underscore (\\_) character, a period (.), a hyphen (-), and a space.\n- /SM590000 Names must not begin or end with a space.\n- /SM590000 Object names must be unique within the object type. For example, you can have a volume called ABC and an MDisk called ABC, but you cannot have two volumes called ABC.\n- /SM590000 The default object name is valid (object prefix with an integer).\n- /SM590000 Objects can be renamed to their current names.\n\nTo rename the system from the System pane, complete the following steps:\n\n- 1. Click Actions in the upper-left corner of the System pane, as shown in Figure 5-84.\n\nFigure 5-84 Actions on the System pane\n\nFigure 5-84 Actions on the System pane\n\n- 2. The pane opens (see Figure 5-85 on page 185). Specify a new name for the system and click Rename .", + "recall": 0.9662921348314607, + "true_md": "A well-chosen name serves both as a label for an object and as a tool for tracking and managing the object. Choosing a meaningful name is important if you decide to use configuration backup and restore.\n\nWhen you choose a name for an object, apply the following naming rules:\n\nImportant : Do not start names by using an underscore (\\_) character, even though it is possible. The use of the underscore as the first character of a name is a reserved naming convention that is used by the system configuration restore process.\n\nTo rename the system from the System pane, complete the following steps:\n\n- 2. The pane opens (see Figure 5-85 on page 185). Specify a new name for the system and click Rename .\n\n- 1. Click Actions in the upper-left corner of the System pane, as shown in Figure 5-84.\n\nFigure 5-84 Actions on the System pane\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Objects can be renamed to their current names.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> The default object name is valid (object prefix with an integer).\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Object names must be unique within the object type. For example, you can have a volume called ABC and an MDisk called ABC, but you cannot have two volumes called ABC.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Names must not begin or end with a space.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Valid characters are uppercase letters (A - Z), lowercase letters (a - z), digits (0 - 9), the underscore (\\_) character, a period (.), a hyphen (-), and a space.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> The name can be a maximum of 63 characters, but exceptions exist. The name can be a maximum of 15 characters for Remote Copy relationships and groups. The lsfabric command displays long object names that are truncated to 15 characters for nodes and systems. V5.1.0 systems display truncated volume names when they are partnered with a version V6.1.0 or later system that has volumes with long object names ( lsrcrelationshipcandidate or lsrcrelationship commands).\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> The first character cannot be numeric.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Names must begin with a letter.\n\n184 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8830196055000896, + "doc_id": "79557ed7e0f2460f668f08f38ca14b0187844124ee4ed5c25b5555066a3ec0a2", + "edit_distance": 0.09876543209876543, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9869629846608093, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "- 4. In the next window, select the master and auxiliary volumes, as shown in Figure 11-118, and click ADD .\n\nFigure 11-118 Selecting the master and auxiliary volumes\n\nFigure 11-118 Selecting the master and auxiliary volumes\n\nImportant: The master and auxiliary volumes must be of equal size. Therefore, only the targets with the appropriate size are shown in the list for a specific source volume.\n\nChapter 11. Advanced Copy Services\n\n575", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "- 4. In the next window, select the master and auxiliary volumes, as shown in Figure 11-118, and click ADD .\n\nFigure 11-118 Selecting the master and auxiliary volumes\n\nImportant: The master and auxiliary volumes must be of equal size. Therefore, only the targets with the appropriate size are shown in the list for a specific source volume.\n\nChapter 11. Advanced Copy Services 575" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9814182901480932, + "doc_id": "e2c2998fbed2e77e93c0784044e6f94f9e195bd7a9a68505c323a132e38b382a", + "edit_distance": 0.047619047619047616, + "f1_score": 0.9910979228486648, + "meteor": 0.9942888999922725, + "precision": 0.9940476190476191, + "pred_md": "## 7.8.23 Tracing a volume from a host back to its physical disks\n\nIn some cases, you might need to verify exactly which physical disks are used to store data of a volume. This information is not directly available to the host; however, it might be obtained by using a sequence of queries.\n\nThe first step is to unequivocally map a logical device seen by the host to a volume that is presented by the storage system. The best volume characteristics for this purpose is the volume ID. This ID is available to the operating system in the Vendor Specified Identifier field of page 0x80 or 0x83 (vital product data, VPD), which the storage device sends in response to SCSI INQUIRY command from the host.\n\nIn practice, the ID can be obtained from the multipath driver in the operating system. After the volume ID is known, it can be used to identify physical location of data.\n\nNote: For sequential and image mode volumes, a volume copy is mapped to exactly one MDisk. This configuration often is not the case for stripped volumes, unless volume size is not greater than an extent size. Therefore, a single stripped volume uses multiple mDisks in a typical case.\n\nOn hosts that are running IBM System Storage Multipath Subsystem Device Driver, you can obtain the volume ID from the output of the datapath query device command. You see a long disk serial number for each vpath device, as shown in Example 7-37.\n\nExample 7-37 The datapath query device command\n\nState: In Example 7-38, the state of each path is OPEN . Sometimes, the state is CLOSED . This state does not necessarily indicate a problem because it might be a result of the path's processing stage.\n\n314\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1", + "recall": 0.9881656804733728, + "true_md": "## 7.8.23 Tracing a volume from a host back to its physical disks\n\nIn some cases, you might need to verify exactly which physical disks are used to store data of a volume. This information is not directly available to the host; however, it might be obtained by using a sequence of queries. \n\nThe first step is to unequivocally map a logical device seen by the host to a volume that is presented by the storage system. The best volume characteristics for this purpose is the volume ID. This ID is available to the operating system in the Vendor Specified Identifier field of page 0x80 or 0x83 (vital product data, VPD), which the storage device sends in response to SCSI INQUIRY command from the host. \n\nIn practice, the ID can be obtained from the multipath driver in the operating system. After the volume ID is known, it can be used to identify physical location of data. \n\nNote: For sequential and image mode volumes, a volume copy is mapped to exactly one MDisk. This configuration often is not the case for stripped volumes, unless volume size is not greater than an extent size. Therefore, a single stripped volume uses multiple mDisks in a typical case.\n\nOn hosts that are running IBM System Storage Multipath Subsystem Device Driver, you can obtain the volume ID from the output of the datapath query device command. You see a long disk serial number for each vpath device, as shown in Example 7-37.\n\nState: In Example 7-38, the state of each path is OPEN . Sometimes, the state is CLOSED . This state does not necessarily indicate a problem because it might be a result of the path’s processing stage. \n\nExample 7-37 The datapath query device command\n\n314 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8499517948256095, + "doc_id": "d6bf0c218ca10c5444c116900d00fcf8294e288032a21b183cd264dff249b0b9", + "edit_distance": 0.48024316109422494, + "f1_score": 0.9594594594594595, + "meteor": 0.8197248983957746, + "precision": 0.9793103448275862, + "pred_md": "## 7.2.3 Capacity savings option\n\nWhen the Basic or Mirrored method of volume creation is sued, the GUI provides a Capacity Savings option, which enables altering the volume provisioning parameters without the use of the Custom volume provisioning method. You can select Thin-provisioned or Compressed from the drop-down menu, as shown in Figure 7-16, to create thin-provisioned or compressed volumes.\n\nFigure 7-16 Volume Creation with Capacity Saving option\n\nFigure 7-16 Volume Creation with Capacity Saving option\n\nNote: Consider the compression guidelines in Chapter 10, 'Advanced features for storage efficiency' on page 403 before creating the first compressed volume copy on a system.\n\nWhen a thin-provisioned or compressed volume is defined in a data reduction pool, the Deduplicated option becomes available. Select this option to enable deduplication of the volume.\n\n## 7.3 Creating custom volumes\n\nThe Create Volumes window also enables Custom volume creation that expands the set of options for volume creation available to the administrator.\n\nThe Custom menu consists of several panes:\n\n- /SM590000 Volume Location: Mandatory, defines the number of volume copies, Pools to be used, and I/O group preferences.\n- /SM590000 Volume Details: Mandatory, defines the Capacity savings option.\n- /SM590000 Thin Provisioning: Enables configuration of Thin Provisioning settings if this capacity saving option is selected.\n- /SM590000 Compressed: Enables configuration of Compression settings if this capacity saving option is selected.\n- /SM590000 General: For configuring for Cache mode and Formatting.\n- /SM590000 Summary\n\nWork through these panes to customize your Custom volume as wanted, and then commit these changes by clicking Create .\n\nChapter 7. Volumes\n\n265", + "recall": 0.9403973509933775, + "true_md": "## 7.2.3 Capacity savings option\n\n## 7.3 Creating custom volumes\n\nWhen the Basic or Mirrored method of volume creation is sued, the GUI provides a Capacity Savings option, which enables altering the volume provisioning parameters without the use of the Custom volume provisioning method. You can select Thin-provisioned or Compressed from the drop-down menu, as shown in Figure 7-16, to create thin-provisioned or compressed volumes.\n\nNote: Consider the compression guidelines in Chapter 10, “Advanced features for storage efficiency” on page 403 before creating the first compressed volume copy on a system.\n\nWhen a thin-provisioned or compressed volume is defined in a data reduction pool, the Deduplicated option becomes available. Select this option to enable deduplication of the volume.\n\nThe Create Volumes window also enables Custom volume creation that expands the set of options for volume creation available to the administrator.\n\nThe Custom menu consists of several panes:\n\nWork through these panes to customize your Custom volume as wanted, and then commit these changes by clicking Create .\n\nChapter 7. Volumes 265\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Summary\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> General: For configuring for Cache mode and Formatting.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Compressed: Enables configuration of Compression settings if this capacity saving option is selected.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Thin Provisioning: Enables configuration of Thin Provisioning settings if this capacity saving option is selected.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Volume Details: Mandatory, defines the Capacity savings option.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Volume Location: Mandatory, defines the number of volume copies, Pools to be used, and I/O group preferences.\n\nFigure 7-16 Volume Creation with Capacity Saving option" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8877175381816171, + "doc_id": "829b4f5cd311930e97988939490625fde6becf52dab6457c5e3f711099147074", + "edit_distance": 0.16666666666666666, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9931811951754387, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "By right-clicking and selecting Properties , you see detailed technical parameters, such as ID, state (online or offline), drive capacity, and the drive use, as shown in Figure 5-30.\n\nFigure 5-30 Canister information\n\nFigure 5-30 Canister information\n\nIn an environment with multiple IBM Storwize V7000 clusters, you can easily direct the onsite personnel or technician to the correct device by enabling the identification LED on the front pane. Click Turn Identify On in the menu that is shown in Figure 5-31.\n\nFigure 5-31 Identification LED\n\nFigure 5-31 Identification LED\n\nWait for confirmation from the technician that the device in the data center was correctly identified. In the GUI, you see a flashing light, which indicates that the Identify LED was turned on.\n\nChapter 5. Graphical user interface\n\n149", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "By right-clicking and selecting Properties , you see detailed technical parameters, such as ID, state (online or offline), drive capacity, and the drive use, as shown in Figure 5-30.\n\nIn an environment with multiple IBM Storwize V7000 clusters, you can easily direct the onsite personnel or technician to the correct device by enabling the identification LED on the front pane. Click Turn Identify On in the menu that is shown in Figure 5-31.\n\nWait for confirmation from the technician that the device in the data center was correctly identified. In the GUI, you see a flashing light, which indicates that the Identify LED was turned on.\n\nFigure 5-30 Canister information\n\nFigure 5-31 Identification LED\n\nChapter 5. Graphical user interface 149" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8970212892823787, + "doc_id": "55e1134179961fa68c5245122f44e0e4d88f1c0d203591c788ec8f8d6531ef93", + "edit_distance": 0.10270270270270271, + "f1_score": 0.9726775956284152, + "meteor": 0.9751647081960765, + "precision": 0.978021978021978, + "pred_md": "## 12.8.1 Encrypted pools\n\nFor more information about how to open the Create Pool window, see Chapter 6, 'Storage pools' on page 191. After encryption is enabled, any new pool is created by default as encrypted, as shown in Figure 12-69.\n\nFigure 12-69 Create Pool window basic\n\nFigure 12-69 Create Pool window basic\n\nYou can click Create to create an encrypted pool. All storage that is added to this pool is encrypted.\n\nYou can customize the Pools view in the management GUI to show pool encryption status. Click Pools → Pools , and then, click Actions → Customize Columns → Encryption , as shown in Figure 12-70.\n\nFigure 12-70 Pool encryption state\n\nFigure 12-70 Pool encryption state\n\nIf you create an unencrypted pool but you add only encrypted arrays or self-encrypting MDisks to the pool, the pool is reported as encrypted because all extents in the pool are encrypted. The pool reverts to the unencrypted state if you add an unencrypted array or MDisk.\n\nChapter 12. Encryption\n\n657", + "recall": 0.967391304347826, + "true_md": "## 12.8.1 Encrypted pools\n\nFor more information about how to open the Create Pool window, see Chapter 6, “Storage pools” on page 191. After encryption is enabled, any new pool is created by default as encrypted, as shown in Figure 12-69.\n\nYou can click Create to create an encrypted pool. All storage that is added to this pool is encrypted.\n\nYou can customize the Pools view in the management GUI to show pool encryption status. Click Pools → Pools , and then, click Actions → Customize Columns → Encryption , as shown in Figure 12-70.\n\nFigure 12-69 Create Pool window basic\n\nFigure 12-70 Pool encryption state\n\nIf you create an unencrypted pool but you add only encrypted arrays or self-encrypting MDisks to the pool, the pool is reported as encrypted because all extents in the pool are encrypted. The pool reverts to the unencrypted state if you add an unencrypted array or MDisk.\n\nChapter 12. Encryption 657" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8849589020725622, + "doc_id": "22de5ae9fc898e965c96db9e3d7c7ec4473abb9f844f8f629f5ea3fbdac3478a", + "edit_distance": 0.1910828025477707, + "f1_score": 0.9604519774011301, + "meteor": 0.8545609121078934, + "precision": 0.9883720930232558, + "pred_md": "- /SM590000 Monitor users: Have access to all viewing operations. They cannot change any value or parameters of the system.\n- /SM590000 Service users: Can set the time and date on the system, delete dump files, add and delete nodes, apply service, and shut down the system. They have access to all views.\n- /SM590000 VASA Provider users: Can manage VMware vSphere Virtual Volumes (VVOLs).\n\n## Registering a new user\n\nAfter you defined your group (in our example Redbook1 with Administrators privileges), you can register a new user within this group. Click Create User and select MyGroup (see Figure 5-49).\n\nFigure 5-49 Registering new user account\n\nFigure 5-49 Registering new user account\n\nChapter 5. Graphical user interface\n\n159", + "recall": 0.9340659340659341, + "true_md": "- GLYPH<SM590000> Monitor users: Have access to all viewing operations. They cannot change any value or parameters of the system.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Service users: Can set the time and date on the system, delete dump files, add and delete nodes, apply service, and shut down the system. They have access to all views.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> VASA Provider users: Can manage VMware vSphere Virtual Volumes (VVOLs).\n\n## Registering a new user\n\nAfter you defined your group (in our example Redbook1 with Administrators privileges), you can register a new user within this group. Click Create User and select MyGroup (see Figure 5-49).\n\nFigure 5-49 Registering new user account\n\nChapter 5. Graphical user interface 159" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8155276215499335, + "doc_id": "c11368440d21882176c4063fd5210363dd967fb4da35be96e299268505e7c18a", + "edit_distance": 0.39097744360902253, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9358447735379959, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "182\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\nThe content of the welcome message is helpful when you need to notify users about some important information about the system, such as security warnings or a location description. To define and enable the welcome message by using the GUI, edit the text area with the message content and click Save (see Figure 5-80).\n\nFigure 5-80 Enabling login message\n\nFigure 5-80 Enabling login message\n\nThe resulting log-in screen is shown in Figure 5-81.\n\nFigure 5-81 Welcome message in GUI\n\nFigure 5-81 Welcome message in GUI\n\nThe banner message also appears in the CLI login prompt window, as shown in Figure 5-82.\n\nFigure 5-82 Banner message in CLI\n\nFigure 5-82 Banner message in CLI", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "The content of the welcome message is helpful when you need to notify users about some important information about the system, such as security warnings or a location description. To define and enable the welcome message by using the GUI, edit the text area with the message content and click Save (see Figure 5-80).\n\nThe resulting log-in screen is shown in Figure 5-81.\n\nThe banner message also appears in the CLI login prompt window, as shown in Figure 5-82.\n\nFigure 5-80 Enabling login message\n\nFigure 5-81 Welcome message in GUI\n\nFigure 5-82 Banner message in CLI\n\n182 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.690368892566235, + "doc_id": "3450d19b63fa1ed9bc7bf847c0281a0e9d2686319547fc1651a492268efa9abe", + "edit_distance": 0.3493150684931507, + "f1_score": 0.9139072847682119, + "meteor": 0.7579222615430421, + "precision": 0.9583333333333334, + "pred_md": "Draft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n8459p02.fm\n\nPart\n\n2\n\n## Red Hat OpenShift\n\nThis part induces Red Hat OpenShift, provides an overview of the modular components and services, planning (for installation) considerations, preparing an environment and deploying an OCP instance.\n\nThe following chapters are included in this part:\n\n- /SM590000 Chapter 4, 'Red Hat OpenShift components and architecture' on page 55\n- /SM590000 Chapter 5, 'Red Hat OpenShift installation planning and considerations' on page 67\n- /SM590000 Chapter 6, 'Installing Red Hat OpenShift 3.11 on IBM PowerVC' on page 95\n\n' Copyright IBM Corp. 2019. All rights reserved.\n\n53", + "recall": 0.8734177215189873, + "true_md": "## Part 2\n\n## Red Hat OpenShift\n\nDraft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n8459p02.fm\n\nThis part induces Red Hat OpenShift, provides an overview of the modular components and services, planning (for installation) considerations, preparing an environment and deploying an OCP instance.\n\nThe following chapters are included in this part:\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Chapter 4, “Red Hat OpenShift components and architecture” on page 55\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Chapter 5, “Red Hat OpenShift installation planning and considerations” on page 67\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Chapter 6, “Installing Red Hat OpenShift 3.11 on IBM PowerVC” on page 95\n\n' Copyright IBM Corp. 2 019. All rights reserved.\n\n53" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.90826765624787, + "doc_id": "d8dcc9e0d78b139e45721dcd5802a8f5d13b6f176ac38496807ee4df4fbc98a1", + "edit_distance": 0.657331136738056, + "f1_score": 0.9737991266375545, + "meteor": 0.7947020789887442, + "precision": 0.9911111111111112, + "pred_md": "In the simplest terms, iSCSI enables the transport of SCSI commands and data over an Internet Protocol network, based on IP routers and Ethernet switches. iSCSI is a block-level protocol that encapsulates SCSI commands into Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) packets and uses an IP network, rather than requiring expensive FC host bus adapters (HBAs) and a SAN fabric infrastructure.\n\nThe major functions of iSCSI include encapsulation and the reliable delivery of CDB transactions between initiators and targets through the Internet Protocol network, especially over a potentially unreliable IP network.\n\nEvery iSCSI node in the network must have an iSCSI name and address. Consider the following points:\n\n- /SM590000 An iSCSI name is a location-independent, permanent identifier for an iSCSI node. An iSCSI node has one iSCSI name that stays constant for the life of the node. The terms initiator name and target name also refer to an iSCSI name.\n- /SM590000 An iSCSI address specifies not only the iSCSI name of an iSCSI node, but a location of that node. The address consists of a host name or IP address, a TCP port number (for the target), and the iSCSI name of the node. An iSCSI node can have any number of addresses, which can change at any time, particularly if they are assigned by way of Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP). An IBM SAN Volume Controller node represents an iSCSI node and provides statically allocated IP addresses.\n\n## 2.5.20 Real-time Compression\n\nIBM Real-time Compression is an attractive solution to address increasing data storage requirements for power, cooling, and floor space. When applied, IBM Real-time Compression can significantly save storage space because more data is stored in rack space so fewer storage enclosures are required to store a data set. IBM Real-time Compression provides the following benefits:\n\n- /SM590000 Compression for active primary data. IBM Real-time Compression can be used with active primary data.\n- /SM590000 Compression for replicated/mirrored data. Remote volume copies can be compressed in addition to the volumes at the primary storage tier. This process also reduces storage requirements in Metro Mirror and Global Mirror destination volumes.\n- /SM590000 No changes to the environment are required. IBM Real-time Compression is part of the storage system.\n- /SM590000 Overall savings in operational expenses. More data is stored in a rack space, so fewer storage expansion enclosures are required to store a data set. This reduced rack space has the following benefits:\n- -Reduced power and cooling requirements. More data is stored in a system, which requires less power and cooling per gigabyte or used capacity.\n- -Reduced software licensing for more functions in the system. More data stored per enclosure reduces the overall spending on licensing.\n- /SM590000 Disk space savings are immediate. The space reduction occurs when the host writes the data. This process is unlike other compression solutions, in which some or all of the reduction is realized only after a post-process compression batch job is run.\n\nChapter 2. System overview\n\n35", + "recall": 0.9570815450643777, + "true_md": "In the simplest terms, iSCSI enables the transport of SCSI commands and data over an Internet Protocol network, based on IP routers and Ethernet switches. iSCSI is a block-level protocol that encapsulates SCSI commands into Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) packets and uses an IP network, rather than requiring expensive FC host bus adapters (HBAs) and a SAN fabric infrastructure.\n\nThe major functions of iSCSI include encapsulation and the reliable delivery of CDB transactions between initiators and targets through the Internet Protocol network, especially over a potentially unreliable IP network.\n\nEvery iSCSI node in the network must have an iSCSI name and address. Consider the following points:\n\nIBM Real-time Compression is an attractive solution to address increasing data storage requirements for power, cooling, and floor space. When applied, IBM Real-time Compression can significantly save storage space because more data is stored in rack space so fewer storage enclosures are required to store a data set. IBM Real-time Compression provides the following benefits:\n\nChapter 2. System overview 35\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Disk space savings are immediate. The space reduction occurs when the host writes the data. This process is unlike other compression solutions, in which some or all of the reduction is realized only after a post-process compression batch job is run.\n\n- – Reduced software licensing for more functions in the system. More data stored per enclosure reduces the overall spending on licensing.\n\n- – Reduced power and cooling r equirements. More data is stored in a system, which requires less power and cooling per gigabyte or used capacity.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Overall savings in operational expenses. More data is stored in a rack space, so fewer storage expansion enclosures are required to store a data set. This reduced rack space has the following benefits:\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> No changes to the environment are required. IBM Real-time Compression is part of the storage system.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Compression for replicated/mirrored data. Remote volume copies can be compressed in addition to the volumes at the primary storage tier. This process also reduces storage requirements in Metro Mirror and Global Mirror destination volumes. \n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Compression for active primary data. IBM Real-time Compression can be used with active primary data. \n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> An iSCSI address specifies not only the iSCSI name of an iSCSI node, but a location of that node. The address consists of a host name or IP address, a TCP port number (for the target), and the iSCSI name of the node. An iSCSI node can have any number of addresses, which can change at any time, particularly if they are assigned by way of Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP). An IBM SAN Volume Controller node represents an iSCSI node and provides statically allocated IP addresses.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> An iSCSI name is a location-independent, permanent identifier for an iSCSI node. An iSCSI node has one iSCSI name that stays constant for the life of the node. The terms initiator name and target name also refer to an iSCSI name.\n\n## 2.5.20 Real-time Compression" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8619704409244987, + "doc_id": "7b1f600e85cb7364b62e49221a922e8ae64fb2a527e9c349dee542c21049a355", + "edit_distance": 0.10256410256410256, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9733540873976709, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## 8.4.5 Host mappings overview\n\nTo see an overview of the host mappings, click Hosts → Mappings , as shown in Figure 8-63.\n\nFigure 8-63 Host mappings\n\nFigure 8-63 Host mappings\n\nChapter 8. Hosts\n\n371", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## 8.4.5 Host mappings overview\n\nTo see an overview of the host mappings, click Hosts → Mappings , as shown in Figure 8-63.\n\nFigure 8-63 Host mappings\n\nChapter 8. Hosts 371" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8999412948985094, + "doc_id": "4f0d206635106ea7c65e9bc9e041434fc46f13065ea0c0ee1d898022e8d7f15d", + "edit_distance": 0.34256055363321797, + "f1_score": 0.9902912621359223, + "meteor": 0.9586776564551382, + "precision": 0.9902912621359223, + "pred_md": "- 3. Create the A → C relationship (or the B → C relationship).\n- 4. Synchronize to system C, and ensure that A → C is established:\n- -A → B, A → C, A → D, B → C, B → D, and C → D\n- -A → B, A → C, and B → C\n\nFigure 11-84 shows an example of a triangle topology (A → B, A → C, and B → C).\n\nFigure 11-84 Triangle topology\n\nFigure 11-84 Triangle topology\n\nFigure 11-85 shows an example of a fully connected topology (A → B, A → C, A → D, B → D, and C → D).\n\nFigure 11-85 Fully connected topology\n\nFigure 11-85 Fully connected topology\n\nFigure 11-85 is a fully connected mesh in which every system has a partnership to each of the three other systems. This topology enables volumes to be replicated between any pair of systems, for example A → B, A → C, and B → C.\n\nFigure 11-86 shows a daisy-chain topology.\n\nFigure 11-86 Daisy-chain topology\n\nFigure 11-86 Daisy-chain topology\n\nAlthough systems can have up to three partnerships, volumes can be part of only one remote copy relationship, for example A → B.\n\nSystem partnership intermix: All of the preceding topologies are valid for the intermix of the IBM SAN Volume Controller with the Storwize V7000 if the Storwize V7000 is set to the replication layer and running IBM Spectrum Virtualize code 6.3.0 or later.\n\nChapter 11. Advanced Copy Services\n\n517", + "recall": 0.9902912621359223, + "true_md": "- 3. Create the A → C relationship (or the B → C relationship).\n\n- 4. Synchronize to system C, and ensure that A → C is established:\n\nFigure 11-84 shows an example of a triangle topology (A → B, A → C, and B → C).\n\nFigure 11-85 shows an example of a fully connected topology (A → B, A → C, A → D, B → D, and C → D).\n\n- –A → B, A → C, A → D, B → C, B → D, and C → D\n\n- –A → B, A → C, and B → C\n\nChapter 11. Advanced Copy Services 517\n\nFigure 11-86 Daisy-chain topology\n\nFigure 11-85 Fully connected topology\n\nFigure 11-84 Triangle topology\n\nFigure 11-85 is a fully connected mesh in which every system has a partnership to each of the three other systems. This topology enables volumes to be replicated between any pair of systems, for example A → B, A → C, and B → C.\n\nFigure 11-86 shows a daisy-chain topology. \n\nAlthough systems can have up to three partnerships, volumes can be part of only one remote copy relationship, for example A → B.\n\nSystem partnership intermix: All of the preceding topologies are valid for the intermix of the IBM SAN Volume Controller with the Storwize V7000 if the Storwize V7000 is set to the replication layer and running IBM Spectrum Virtualize code 6.3.0 or later." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8137723736474882, + "doc_id": "67f0bc24b441ac48445f552fe53364d3cd760d573fa0a98a8507b314a21e68b6", + "edit_distance": 0.33064516129032256, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.928544101222482, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "114\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\nComplete the following steps to create a user group with remote authentication enabled:\n\n- 1. Click Access → Users and select Create User Group , as shown in Figure 4-29.\n\nFigure 4-29 Option to create a user group\n\nFigure 4-29 Option to create a user group\n\n- 2. Enter the details for the new group. Select Enable for this group to enable remote authentication, as shown in Figure 4-30. Click Create .\n\nNote: This option is not available if LDAP authentication is not enabled.\n\nFigure 4-30 Creating a user group with remote authentication enabled\n\nFigure 4-30 Creating a user group with remote authentication enabled", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Complete the following steps to create a user group with remote authentication enabled:\n\n- 1. Click Access → Users and select Create User Group , as shown in Figure 4-29.\n\n- 2. Enter the details for the new group. Select Enable for this group to enable remote authentication, as shown in Figure 4-30. Click Create .\n\nNote: This option is not available if LDAP authentication is not enabled.\n\nFigure 4-30 Creating a user group with remote authentication enabled\n\nFigure 4-29 Option to create a user group\n\n114 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8884812756986159, + "doc_id": "ac7584412e3a3e456391a1c6f31d9cb869b9282d99a1cd08518a5617d7929cd7", + "edit_distance": 0.27514792899408286, + "f1_score": 0.9761092150170647, + "meteor": 0.8873303452654393, + "precision": 0.9930555555555556, + "pred_md": "158\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\nThe Access menu is available from the left pane, as shown in Figure 5-47.\n\nFigure 5-47 Access menu\n\nFigure 5-47 Access menu\n\n## 5.9.1 Users\n\nYou can create local users who can access the system. These user types are defined based on the administrative privileges that they have on the system.\n\nLocal users must provide a password, Secure Shell (SSH) key, or both. Local users are authenticated through the authentication methods that are configured on the system. If the local user needs access to the management GUI, a password is needed for the user. If the user requires access to the CLI through SSH, a password or a valid SSH key file is necessary.\n\nLocal users must be part of a user group that is defined on the system. User groups define roles that authorize the users within that group to a specific set of operations on the system.\n\nTo define your User Group in the IBM Storwize V7000, click Access → Users , as shown in Figure 5-48.\n\nFigure 5-48 Defining User Group in Storwize V7000\n\nFigure 5-48 Defining User Group in Storwize V7000\n\nThe following privilege User group roles exist in the IBM Spectrum Virtualize:\n\n- /SM590000 Security Administrator: Manages all functions of the systems, except tasks that are associated with commands satask and sainfo .\n- /SM590000 Administrator: Has full rights in the system, except those commands that are related to user management and authentication.\n- /SM590000 Restricted Administrator: Has the same rights as Administrators, except removing volumes, host mappings, hosts, or pools. This option is ideal for support personnel.\n- /SM590000 Copy Operators: Can start, stop, or pause any FlashCopy-based operations.", + "recall": 0.959731543624161, + "true_md": "The Access menu is available from the left pane, as shown in Figure 5-47.\n\nYou can create local users who can access the system. These user types are defined based on the administrative privileges that they have on the system.\n\nLocal users must provide a password, Secure Shell (SSH) key, or both. Local users are authenticated through the authentication methods that are configured on the system. If the local user needs access to the management GUI, a password is needed for the user. If the user requires access to the CLI through SSH, a password or a valid SSH key file is necessary. \n\nLocal users must be part of a user group that is defined on the system. User groups define roles that authorize the users within that group to a specific set of operations on the system.\n\nTo define your User Group in the IBM Storwize V7000, click Access → Users , as shown in Figure 5-48.\n\nThe following privilege User group roles exist in the IBM Spectrum Virtualize:\n\n158 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Security Administrator: Manages all functions of the systems, except tasks that are associated with commands satask and sainfo .\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Administrator: Has full rights in the system, except those commands that are related to user management and authentication.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Restricted Administrator: Has the same rights as Administrators, except removing volumes, host mappings, hosts, or pools. This option is ideal for support personnel.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Copy Operators: Can start, stop, or pause any FlashCopy-based operations.\n\n## 5.9.1 Users\n\nFigure 5-48 Defining User Group in Storwize V7000\n\nFigure 5-47 Access menu" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9300866072224167, + "doc_id": "f665364c5dc22e4f0eaada30bbda1ad779c2103b1f77b7fcf8453c338536ae40", + "edit_distance": 0.32762312633832974, + "f1_score": 0.9665071770334928, + "meteor": 0.9000496447185158, + "precision": 0.9805825242718447, + "pred_md": "## 16.4 Enhanced Retention Management use cases\n\nEnhanced Retention Management provides two methods that allow users to place documents in a hold status:\n\n- /SM590000 Ad hoc: Use the ad hoc method to put documents in a hold status selectively based on their search criteria.\n- /SM590000 Load: The load method places documents in a hold status at load time.\n\nThe following sections present two use cases that provide examples of these methods.\n\n## 16.4.1 Ad hoc holds\n\nA healthcare firm receives frequent ongoing requests to find documents that must be gathered and protected from deletion because of a legal case that involves the firm's customers. Historically, retention management was a paper-based world of file folders, filing cabinets, and off-site warehouses with elaborate and costly storage requirements. Retention management changed dramatically with the rapid proliferation of digital information.\n\nThe challenges of locating and retaining documents quickly was a problem for the firm until they set up Content Manager OnDemand as its standard tool for capturing documents. Content Manager OnDemand can capture high volumes of content and quickly search and retrieve documents with multiple client solutions for both desktop and standard web browsers. By using Content Manager OnDemand, the firm was able to enable the Enhanced Retention Management feature and have a business solution to select, hold, and prevent expiration of documents easily within seconds. The return on investment (ROI) easily justified the investment in the Enhanced Retention Management feature.\n\n## 16.4.2 Load holds\n\nA financial firm has a business requirement to review transactions for the day before they release the transactions for viewing by their customer base. Content Manager OnDemand is used as the enterprise report capture solution. The firm wants to use Content Manager OnDemand to build a simplistic workflow. The solution also must be able to put the documents back in a hold status quickly to prevent any expiration rules that are assigned by the Content Manager OnDemand application from running.\n\nBy enabling the Enhanced Retention Management feature and its 'hold on store' capability, the firm has a solution that meets its business requirements. By placing every document on hold in a specific application group in Content Manager OnDemand, the process is controlled by entitlements. User A (the reviewer) has administrator rights to apply and remove holds on documents. After the document is reviewed, User A releases the hold, which signifies to User A's application area that the document was reviewed.\n\n364\n\nIBM Content Manager OnDemand Guide", + "recall": 0.9528301886792453, + "true_md": "## 16.4 Enhanced Retention Management use cases\n\n## 16.4.1 Ad hoc holds\n\n## 16.4.2 Load holds\n\nEnhanced Retention Management provides two methods that allow users to place documents in a hold status: \n\nA healthcare firm receives frequent ongoing requests to find documents that must be gathered and protected from deletion because of a legal case that involves the firm’s customers. Historically, retention management was a paper-based world of file folders, filing cabinets, and off-site warehouses with elaborate and costly storage requirements. Retention management changed dramatically with the rapid proliferation of digital information.\n\nThe following sections present two use cases that provide examples of these methods.\n\nThe challenges of locating and retaining documents quickly was a problem for the firm until they set up Content Manager OnDemand as its standard tool for capturing documents. Content Manager OnDemand can capture high volumes of content and quickly search and retrieve documents with multiple client solutions for both desktop and standard web browsers. By using Content Manager OnDemand, the firm was able to enable the Enhanced Retention Management feature and have a business solution to select, hold, and prevent expiration of documents easily within seconds. The return on investment (ROI) easily justified the investment in the Enhanced Retention Management feature. \n\nA financial firm has a business requirement to review transactions for the day before they release the transactions for viewing by their customer base. Content Manager OnDemand is used as the enterprise report capture solution. The firm wants to use Content Manager OnDemand to build a simplistic workflow. The solution also must be able to put the documents back in a hold status quickly to prevent any expiration rules that are assigned by the Content Manager OnDemand application from running. \n\nBy enabling the Enhanced Retention Management feature and its “hold on store” capability, the firm has a solution that meets its business requirements. By placing every document on hold in a specific application group in Content Manager OnDemand, the process is controlled by entitlements. User A (the reviewer) has administrator rights to apply and remove holds on documents. After the document is reviewed, User A releases the hold, which signifies to User A’s application area that the document was reviewed.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Ad hoc: Use the ad hoc method to put documents in a hold status selectively based on their search criteria. \n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Load: The load method places documents in a hold status at load time. \n\nIBM Content Manager OnDemand Guide\n\n364" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8274483831300851, + "doc_id": "d6ebd05715ac9270783350ff7c4e857eaf29adbb449fea195027c8e1905a9164", + "edit_distance": 0.5545977011494253, + "f1_score": 0.9039145907473309, + "meteor": 0.7955824326745987, + "precision": 0.9202898550724637, + "pred_md": "20\n\nIBM Content Manager OnDemand Guide\n\n- 3. Give permission to read the following files to the Content Manager OnDemand instance owner:\n- -ARS.CACHE\n- -ARS.CFG\n- -ARS.INI\n- -ARS.DBFS\n- 4. Give permission to write to the console to the Content Manager OnDemand instance owner.\n\n## Creating a DB2 instance\n\nWhen you create a DB2 instance, you must install DB2 on the server. Complete the following steps:\n\n- 1. Install IBM DB2 Universal Database™ Enterprise Edition.\n- 2. Select Typical as the installation type to install all of the DB2 components that are required to support Content Manager OnDemand.\n- 3. Create the DB2 instance for Content Manager OnDemand when you install DB2. Use the following values:\n- -Instance Owner: archive .\n- -Group Name: gname . The group must have SYSADM authority.\n- -Home Directory: /home/archive .\n- -Auto start DB2 instance at boot time: no .\n- -Create a sample database for DB2 instance: no .\n\n## Installing IBM Global Security Kit\n\nWhen you install the IBM Global Security Kit (GSKit), you can complete the task by using one of the following methods:\n\n- /SM590000 SMIT GUI\n- /SM590000 installp command\n\nBefore you perform the installation, complete the following steps:\n\n- 1. Content Manager OnDemand is 64-bit application. Validate whether the Content Manager OnDemand Web Enablement Kit (ODWEK) installation is 32 bit or 64 bit.\n- 2. Extract the correct GSKit media based on the version that is needed:\n- -For the 32-bit version, run the following commands:\n- zcat gskcrypt32-8.0.14.45.aix.ppc.tar.Z | tar -xvf zcat gskssl32-8.0.14.45.aix.ppc.tar.Z | tar -xvf -\n- -For the 64-bit version, run the following commands:\n- zcat gskcrypt64-8.0.13.4.aix.ppc.tar.Z | tar -xvf zcat gskssl64-8.0.13.4.aix.ppc.tar.Z | tar -xvf -", + "recall": 0.8881118881118881, + "true_md": "- 3. Give permission to read the following files to the Content Manager OnDemand instance owner:\n\n- 4. Give permission to write to the console to the Content Manager OnDemand instance owner.\n\n- – ARS.CACHE\n\n- – ARS.CFG\n\n- – ARS.INI\n\n- – ARS.DBFS\n\n- 1. Install IBM DB2 Universal Database™ Enterprise Edition.\n\n- 2. Select Typical as the installation type to install all of the DB2 components that are required to support Content Manager OnDemand. \n\n- 3. Create the DB2 instance for Content Manager OnDemand when you install DB2. Use the following values:\n\n- – Instance Owner: archive .\n\n- – Group Name: gname . The group must have SYSADM authority.\n\n- – Home Directory: /home/archive .\n\n- – Auto start DB2 instance at boot time: no .\n\n- – Create a sample database for DB2 instance: no .\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> SMIT GUI\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> installp command\n\n- 1. Content Manager OnDemand is 64-bit application. Validate whether the Content Manager OnDemand Web Enablement Kit (ODWEK) installation is 32 bit or 64 bit.\n\n- 2. Extract the correct GSKit media based on the version that is needed:\n\n- – For the 32-bit version, run the following commands:\n\n- – For the 64-bit version, run the following commands:\n\n20 IBM Content Manager OnDemand Guide\n\n## Creating a DB2 instance\n\n## Installing IBM Global Security Kit\n\nWhen you create a DB2 instance, you must install DB2 on the server. Complete the following steps:\n\nWhen you install the IBM Global Security Kit (GSKit), you can complete the task by using one of the following methods:\n\nBefore you perform the installation, complete the following steps:\n\nzcat gskcrypt32-8.0.14.45.aix.ppc.tar.Z | tar -xvf - zcat gskssl32-8.0.14.45.aix.ppc.tar.Z | tar -xvf -\n\nzcat gskcrypt64-8.0.13.4.aix.ppc.tar.Z | tar -xvf - zcat gskssl64-8.0.13.4.aix.ppc.tar.Z | tar -xvf -" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.893640463181164, + "doc_id": "152bfebdf8ad0afd80efd8b96399358ad8c43be4a0c25db72e9ba22b75769c2f", + "edit_distance": 0.5309278350515464, + "f1_score": 0.9677419354838711, + "meteor": 0.9058569113130434, + "precision": 0.9905660377358491, + "pred_md": "VVOL management is enabled in IBM Storwize V7000 in the System section, as shown in Figure 5-70. The NTP server must be configured before enabling VVOL management. It is strongly advised to use the same NTP server for ESXi and for IBM Storwize V7000.\n\nFigure 5-70 Enabling VVOLs management\n\nFigure 5-70 Enabling VVOLs management\n\nRestriction: You cannot enable VVOLs support until the NTP server is configured in Storwize V7000.\n\nFor more information about VVOLs, see the following publications:\n\n- /SM590000 Quick-start Guide to Configuring VMware Virtual Volumes for Systems Powered by IBM Spectrum Virtualize , REDP-5321\n- /SM590000 Configuring VMware Virtual Volumes for Systems Powered by IBM Spectrum Virtualize , SG24-8328\n\n## IP Quorum\n\nStarting with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V7.6, a new feature was introduced for enhanced stretched systems, the IP Quorum application. By using an IP-based quorum application as the quorum device for the third site, no Fibre Channel connectivity is required. Java applications run on hosts at the third site.\n\nChapter 5. Graphical user interface\n\n175", + "recall": 0.9459459459459459, + "true_md": "VVOL management is enabled in IBM Storwize V7000 in the System section, as shown in Figure 5-70. The NTP server must be configured before enabling VVOL management. It is strongly advised to use the same NTP server for ESXi and for IBM Storwize V7000.\n\nRestriction: You cannot enable VVOLs support until the NTP server is configured in Storwize V7000.\n\nFor more information about VVOLs, see the following publications:\n\nStarting with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V7.6, a new feature was introduced for enhanced stretched systems, the IP Quorum application. By using an IP-based quorum application as the quorum device for the third site, no Fibre Channel connectivity is required. Java applications run on hosts at the third site.\n\nChapter 5. Graphical user interface 175\n\n## IP Quorum\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Quick-start Guide to Configuring VMware Virtual Volumes for Systems Powered by IBM Spectrum Virtualize , REDP-5321\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Configuring VMware Virtual Volumes for Systems Powered by IBM Spectrum Virtualize , SG24-8328\n\nFigure 5-70 Enabling VVOLs management" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9326207082951501, + "doc_id": "37f52a44bb29ab26f45a7e09f0feceb6d5c5254a24b8ff99713641c9da2b6bf3", + "edit_distance": 0.1746987951807229, + "f1_score": 0.9902912621359223, + "meteor": 0.9849618945433488, + "precision": 0.9902912621359223, + "pred_md": "## Clustered system (Storwize V7000)\n\nA clustered system, which was known as a cluster, is a group of up to eight IBM Storwize V7000 canisters (two in each system) that presents a single configuration, management, and service interface to the user.\n\n## Cold extent\n\nA cold extent is an extent of a volume that does not get any performance benefit if it is moved from a hard disk drive (HDD) to a Flash disk. A cold extent also refers to an extent that needs to be migrated onto an HDD if it is on a Flash disk drive.\n\n## Compression\n\nCompression is a function that removes repetitive characters, spaces, strings of characters, or binary data from the data that is being processed and replaces characters with control characters. Compression reduces the amount of storage space that is required for data.\n\n## Compression accelerator\n\nA compression accelerator is hardware onto which the work of compression is offloaded from the microprocessor.\n\n## Configuration node\n\nWhile the cluster is operational, a single node in the cluster is appointed to provide configuration and service functions over the network interface. This node is termed the configuration node. This configuration node manages the data that describes the clustered-system configuration and provides a focal point for configuration commands. If the configuration node fails, another node in the cluster transparently assumes that role.\n\n## Consistency Group\n\nA Consistency Group is a group of copy relationships between virtual volumes or data sets that are maintained with the same time reference so that all copies are consistent in time. A Consistency Group can be managed as a single entity.\n\n## Container\n\nA container is a software object that holds or organizes other software objects or entities.\n\n## Contingency capacity\n\nFor thin-provisioned volumes that are configured to automatically expand, the unused real capacity that is maintained. For thin-provisioned volumes that are not configured to automatically expand, the difference between the used capacity and the new real capacity.\n\n## Copied state\n\nCopied is a FlashCopy state that indicates that a copy was triggered after the copy relationship was created. The Copied state indicates that the copy process is complete and the target disk has no further dependency on the source disk. The time of the last trigger event is normally displayed with this status.\n\n## Counterpart SAN\n\nA counterpart SAN is a non-redundant portion of a redundant SAN. A counterpart SAN provides all of the connectivity of the redundant SAN, but without the 100% redundancy. IBM Storwize V7000 canisters are typically connected to a 'redundant SAN' that is made up of two counterpart SANs. A counterpart SAN is often called a SAN fabric.\n\nAppendix C. Terminology\n\n773", + "recall": 0.9902912621359223, + "true_md": "A clustered system, which was known as a cluster, is a group of up to eight IBM Storwize V7000 canisters (two in each system) that presents a single configuration, management, and service interface to the user.\n\nA cold extent is an extent of a volume that does not get any performance benefit if it is moved from a hard disk drive (HDD) to a Flash disk. A cold extent also refers to an extent that needs to be migrated onto an HDD if it is on a Flash disk drive.\n\nCompression is a function that removes repetitive characters, spaces, strings of characters, or binary data from the data that is being processed and replaces characters with control characters. Compression reduces the amount of storage space that is required for data.\n\nA compression accelerator is hardware onto which the work of compression is offloaded from the microprocessor.\n\nWhile the cluster is operational, a single node in the cluster is appointed to provide configuration and service functions over the network interface. This node is termed the configuration node. This configuration node manages the data that describes the clustered-system configuration and provides a focal point for configuration commands. If the configuration node fails, another node in the cluster transparently assumes that role.\n\nA Consistency Group is a group of copy relationships between virtual volumes or data sets that are maintained with the same time reference so that all copies are consistent in time. A Consistency Group can be managed as a single entity.\n\nA container is a software object that holds or organizes other software objects or entities.\n\nFor thin-provisioned volumes that are configured to automatically expand, the unused real capacity that is maintained. For thin-provisioned volumes that are not configured to automatically expand, the difference between the used capacity and the new real capacity.\n\nCopied is a FlashCopy state that indicates that a copy was triggered after the copy relationship was created. The Copied state indicates that the copy process is complete and the target disk has no further dependency on the source disk. The time of the last trigger event is normally displayed with this status.\n\nA counterpart SAN is a non-redundant portion of a redundant SAN. A counterpart SAN provides all of the connectivity of the redundant SAN, but without the 100% redundancy. IBM Storwize V7000 canisters are typically connected to a “redundant SAN” that is made up of two counterpart SANs. A counterpart SAN is often called a SAN fabric. \n\n## Counterpart SAN\n\n## Copied state\n\n## Contingency capacity\n\n## Container\n\n## Consistency Group\n\n## Configuration node\n\n## Compression accelerator\n\n## Compression\n\n## Cold extent\n\n## Clustered system (Storwize V7000)\n\nAppendix C. Terminology 773" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8771395729730012, + "doc_id": "808d5f6de25885737c816428625cf96c5564fb7698822c1a351a0d7c912fbe96", + "edit_distance": 0.33962264150943394, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9413438397222749, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "760\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\n## Uploading the SSH public key to the IBM Storwize V7000\n\nAfter you create your SSH key pair, upload your SSH public key onto the IBM Storwize V7000. Complete the following steps:\n\n- 1. Open the user section in the GUI, as shown in Figure B-5.\n\nFigure B-5 Open user section\n\nFigure B-5 Open user section\n\n- 2. Right-click the user name for which you want to upload the key and click Properties (see Figure B-6).\n\nFigure B-6 User properties\n\nFigure B-6 User properties", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## Uploading the SSH public key to the IBM Storwize V7000\n\nAfter you create your SSH key pair, upload your SSH public key onto the IBM Storwize V7000. Complete the following steps:\n\n- 1. Open the user section in the GUI, as shown in Figure B-5.\n\n- 2. Right-click the user name for which you want to upload the key and click Properties (see Figure B-6).\n\nFigure B-6 User properties\n\nFigure B-5 Open user section\n\n760 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8716066325886732, + "doc_id": "2d1adcf7069a228895cab2cb11229ee55fa3cee13899d7614703d5660b9346ba", + "edit_distance": 0.0975609756097561, + "f1_score": 0.942857142857143, + "meteor": 0.9473977797887552, + "precision": 0.9428571428571428, + "pred_md": "Appendix B.\n\n## CLI setup\n\nThis appendix describes access configuration to the command-line interface (CLI) by using the local SSH authentication method.\n\n' Copyright IBM Corp. 2011, 2018, 2019. All rights reserved.\n\n755", + "recall": 0.9428571428571428, + "true_md": "B\n\n## CLI setup\n\nThis appendix describes access configuration to the command-line interface (CLI) by using the local SSH authentication method.\n\n' Copyright IBM Corp. 2011, 201 8, 2019. All rights reserved.\n\n755" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6520987998269357, + "doc_id": "34d77892d93f0cb3a35380553537fedd1d941e556e344c98d3a79c6a9adf0c3c", + "edit_distance": 0.18542199488491048, + "f1_score": 0.8082901554404145, + "meteor": 0.8353085256729883, + "precision": 0.9176470588235294, + "pred_md": "Draft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n8459ch06.fm\n\n## 14.Install OpenShift Container Platform:\n\n## ansible-playbook -i <inventory\\_file>\n\n```\n/usr/share/ansible/openshift-ansible/playbooks/deploy_cluster.yml PLAY [Initialization Checkpoint Start] ************************************************************************************* ... Output truncated ... Hosted Install : Complete (0:00:34) Cluster Monitoring Operator : Complete (0:01:44) Web Console Install : Complete (0:00:32) Console Install : Complete (0:01:22) metrics-server Install : Complete (0:00:01) Service Catalog Install : Complete (0:04:46) Wednesday 30 October 2019 20:32:17 +0000 (0:00:00.035) 0:34:41.168 ***** =============================================================================== openshift_node : install needed rpm(s) ----------------------------------------- 177.38s openshift_node : Install node, clients, and conntrack packages ----------------- 126.12s template_service_broker : Verify that TSB is running --------------------------- 110.11s openshift_cluster_monitoring_operator : Wait for the ServiceMonitor CRD to be created --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 91.75s openshift_console : Waiting for console rollout to complete --------------------- 72.95s openshift_control_plane : Wait for all control plane pods to become ready ------- 67.19s Run health checks (install) - EL ------------------------------------------------ 63.83s openshift_node : Install Ceph storage plugin dependencies ----------------------- 59.41s openshift_service_catalog : Wait for API Server rollout success ----------------- 56.42s openshift_control_plane : Wait for control plane pods to appear ----------------- 54.33s openshift_ca : Install the base package for admin tooling ----------------------- 53.89s openshift_excluder : Install openshift excluder - yum --------------------------- 44.92s openshift_service_catalog : Wait for Controller Manager rollout success --------- 43.78s openshift_excluder : Install docker excluder - yum ------------------------------ 37.32s openshift_node : Install GlusterFS storage plugin dependencies ------------------ 31.13s openshift_loadbalancer : Install haproxy ---------------------------------------- 30.26s openshift_node : Install dnsmasq ------------------------------------------------ 29.97s openshift_node : Install iSCSI storage plugin dependencies ---------------------- 25.03s openshift_web_console : Verify that the console is running ---------------------- 21.61s openshift_service_catalog : oc_process ------------------------------------------ 13.35s\n```\n\n15.Check Pods status after installation:\n\nChapter 6. Installing Red Hat OpenShift 3.11 on IBM PowerVC\n\n127", + "recall": 0.7222222222222222, + "true_md": "Draft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n8459ch06.fm\n\n14.Install OpenShift Container Platform:\n\n15.Check Pods status after installation:\n\nansible-playbook -i <inventory\\_file> /usr/share/ansible/openshift-ansible/playbooks/deploy\\_cluster.yml PLAY [Initialization Checkpoint Start] ************************************************************************************* ... Output truncated ... Hosted Install : Complete (0:00:34) Cluster Monitoring Operator : Complete (0:01:44) Web Console Install : Complete (0:00:32) Console Install : Complete (0:01:22) metrics-server Install : Complete (0:00:01) Service Catalog Install : Complete (0:04:46) Wednesday 30 October 2019 20:32:17 +0000 (0:00:00.035) 0:34:41.168 ***** =============================================================================== openshift\\_node : install needed rpm(s) ----------------------------------------- 177.38s openshift\\_node : Install node, clients, and conntrack packages ----------------- 126.12s template\\_service\\_broker : Verify that TSB is running --------------------------- 110.11s openshift\\_cluster\\_monitoring\\_operator : Wait for the ServiceMonitor CRD to be created --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 91.75s openshift\\_console : Waiting for console rollout to complete --------------------- 72.95s openshift\\_control\\_plane : Wait for all control plane pods to become ready ------- 67.19s Run health checks (install) - EL ------------------------------------------------ 63.83s openshift\\_node : Install Ceph storage plugin dependencies ----------------------- 59.41s openshift\\_service\\_catalog : Wait for API Server rollout success ----------------- 56.42s openshift\\_control\\_plane : Wait for control plane pods to appear ----------------- 54.33s openshift\\_ca : Install the base package for admin tooling ----------------------- 53.89s openshift\\_excluder : Install openshift excluder - yum --------------------------- 44.92s openshift\\_service\\_catalog : Wait for Controller Manager rollout success --------- 43.78s openshift\\_excluder : Install docker excluder - yum ------------------------------ 37.32s openshift\\_node : Install GlusterFS storage plugin dependencies ------------------ 31.13s openshift\\_loadbalancer : Install haproxy ---------------------------------------- 30.26s openshift\\_node : Install dnsmasq ------------------------------------------------ 29.97s openshift\\_node : Install iSCSI storage plugin dependencies ---------------------- 25.03s openshift\\_web\\_console : Verify that the console is running ---------------------- 21.61s openshift\\_service\\_catalog : oc\\_process ------------------------------------------ 13.35s\n\noc login -u system:admin Logged into \"https://ocp.domain.example.com:8443\" as \"system:admin\" using existing credentials. oc get pod --all-namespaces NAMESPACE NAME READY STATUS RESTARTS AGE default docker-registry-1-tmbfn 1/1 Running 0 19m default registry-console-1-p5clt 1/1 Running 0 19m default router-1-2hm94 1/1 Running 0 19m default router-1-2s9zn 1/1 Running 0 19m default router-1-72f7r 1/1 Running 0 19m kube-service-catalog apiserver-26kt5 1/1 Running 0 17m ... Output truncated ... openshift-sdn sdn-vx867 1/1 Running 2 26m openshift-template-service-broker apiserver-2s57k 1/1 Running 0 15m openshift-template-service-broker apiserver-4kqhm 1/1 Running 0 15m openshift-template-service-broker apiserver-j7g57 1/1 Running 0 15m openshift-web-console webconsole-6f5f94c675-2kvmv 1/1 Running 0 19m openshift-web-console webconsole-6f5f94c675-jfl2l 1/1 Running 0 19m openshift-web-console webconsole-6f5f94c675-xcx7g 1/1 Running 0 19m\n\nChapter 6. Installing Red Hat OpenShift 3.11 on IBM PowerVC 127" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9089139523245935, + "doc_id": "ae39250f3cee78a446c1ed27c0e95bd70ec453729e9523b22a21ad934a1d4476", + "edit_distance": 0.9121140142517815, + "f1_score": 0.9919571045576406, + "meteor": 0.7610544356986875, + "precision": 0.9946236559139785, + "pred_md": "776\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\n## Event ID\n\nAn event ID is a value that is used to identify a unique error condition that was detected by the Storwize V7000. An event ID is used internally in the cluster to identify the error.\n\n## Excluded condition\n\nThe excluded condition is a status condition. It describes an MDisk that the IBM Storwize V7000 decided is no longer sufficiently reliable to be managed by the cluster. The user must issue a command to include the MDisk in the cluster-managed storage.\n\n## Extent\n\nAn extent is a fixed-size unit of data that is used to manage the mapping of data between MDisks and volumes. The size of the extent can range 16 MB - 8 GB.\n\n## External storage\n\nExternal storage refers to MDisks that are SCSI logical units that are presented by storage systems that are attached to and managed by the clustered system.\n\n## Failback\n\nFailback is the restoration of an appliance to its initial configuration after the detection and repair of a failed network or component.\n\n## Failover\n\nFailover is an automatic operation that switches to a redundant or standby system or node in a software, hardware, or network interruption. See also Failback.\n\n## Feature activation code\n\nAn alphanumeric code that activates a licensed function on a product.\n\n## Fibre Channel port logins\n\nFC port logins refer to the number of hosts that can see any one V7000 port. The IBM Storwize V7000 has a maximum limit per node port of FC logins that are allowed.\n\n## Field-replaceable unit\n\nField-replaceable units (FRUs) are individual parts that are replaced entirely when any one of the unit's components fails. They are held as spares by the IBM service organization.\n\n## FlashCopy\n\nFlashCopy refers to a point-in-time copy where a virtual copy of a volume is created. The target volume maintains the contents of the volume at the point in time when the copy was established. Any subsequent write operations to the source volume are not reflected on the target volume.\n\n## FlashCopy mapping\n\nA FlashCopy mapping is a continuous space on a direct-access storage volume that is occupied by or reserved for a particular data set, data space, or file.\n\n## FlashCopy relationship\n\nSee FlashCopy mapping.", + "recall": 0.9893048128342246, + "true_md": "## Event ID\n\n## Excluded condition\n\n## Extent\n\n## External storage\n\n## Failback\n\n## Failover\n\n## Feature activation code\n\n## Fibre Channel port logins\n\n## Field-replaceable unit\n\n## FlashCopy\n\n## FlashCopy mapping\n\n## FlashCopy relationship\n\nSee FlashCopy mapping.\n\nA FlashCopy mapping is a continuous space on a direct-access storage volume that is occupied by or reserved for a particular data set, data space, or file.\n\nFlashCopy refers to a point-in-time copy where a virtual copy of a volume is created. The target volume maintains the contents of the volume at the point in time when the copy was established. Any subsequent write operations to the source volume are not reflected on the target volume.\n\nField-replaceable units (FRUs) are individual parts that are replaced entirely when any one of the unit’s components fails. They are held as spares by the IBM service organization. \n\nFC port logins refer to the number of hosts that can see any one V7000 port. The IBM Storwize V7000 has a maximum limit per node port of FC logins that are allowed. \n\nAn alphanumeric code that activates a licensed function on a product.\n\nFailover is an automatic operation that switches to a redundant or standby system or node in a software, hardware, or network interruption. See also Failback.\n\nFailback is the restoration of an appliance to its initial configuration after the detection and repair of a failed network or component.\n\nExternal storage refers to MDisks that are SCSI logical units that are presented by storage systems that are attached to and managed by the clustered system.\n\nAn extent is a fixed-size unit of data that is used to manage the mapping of data between MDisks and volumes. The size of the extent can range 16 MB - 8 GB.\n\nThe excluded condition is a status condition. It describes an MDisk that the IBM Storwize V7000 decided is no longer sufficiently reliable to be managed by the cluster. The user must issue a command to include the MDisk in the cluster-managed storage. \n\nAn event ID is a value that is used to identify a unique error condition that was detected by the Storwize V7000. An event ID is used internally in the cluster to identify the error.\n\n776 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9201050726211264, + "doc_id": "0e26a4b4e7ad14e1d25385c173fd9c23543fbbafc9408cbb372b1f4898095a66", + "edit_distance": 0.1524390243902439, + "f1_score": 0.9726775956284152, + "meteor": 0.9648171044659032, + "precision": 0.978021978021978, + "pred_md": "616\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\n## Problems with automatic license activation\n\nIf connections problems occur with the automatic license activation procedure, the system times out after 3 minutes with an error.\n\nCheck whether the personal computer that is used to connect to the Storwize V7000 GUI and activate the license can access the internet. If you cannot complete the automatic activation procedure, use the manual activation procedure that is described in 12.3.5, 'Activate the license manually' on page 617.\n\nAlthough authorization codes and encryption license keys use the same format (four groups of four hexadecimal digits), you can only use each of them in the appropriate activation process. If you use a license key when the system expects an authorization code, the system displays an error message, as shown in Figure 12-16.\n\nFigure 12-16 Authorization code failure\n\nFigure 12-16 Authorization code failure", + "recall": 0.967391304347826, + "true_md": "## Problems with automatic license activation\n\nIf connections problems occur with the automatic license activation procedure, the system times out after 3 minutes with an error. \n\nCheck whether the personal computer that is used to connect to the Storwize V7000 GUI and activate the license can access the internet. If you cannot complete the automatic activation procedure, use the manual activation procedure that is described in 12.3.5, “Activate the license manually” on page 617. \n\nAlthough authorization codes and encryption license keys use the same format (four groups of four hexadecimal digits), you can only use each of them in the appropriate activation process. If you use a license key when the system expects an authorization code, the system displays an error message, as shown in Figure 12-16.\n\nFigure 12-16 Authorization code failure\n\n616 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8593249946444389, + "doc_id": "68f960ad8b3ed3aa08fa3cd85753c6d7fa030b926f54ff3427d608b33c5f28cb", + "edit_distance": 0.538961038961039, + "f1_score": 0.9846827133479212, + "meteor": 0.7979771929451928, + "precision": 0.995575221238938, + "pred_md": "46\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\n- /SM590000 Define subnets for the Storwize V7000 system and for the hosts for internet Small Computer System Interface (iSCSI) connectivity.\n- /SM590000 Define the IP addresses for IP replication (if required).\n- /SM590000 Define back-end storage that will be used by the system.\n- /SM590000 Define the managed disks (MDisks) in the back-end storage to be used by Storwize V7000.\n- /SM590000 Define the storage pools, specify MDisks for each pool and document mapping of MDisks to back-end storage. Parameters of the back-end storage determine the characteristics of the volumes in the pool. Make sure that each pool contains MDisks of similar (ideally, identical) performance characteristics.\n- /SM590000 Plan allocation of hosts and volumes to I/O Groups to optimize the I/O load distribution between the hosts and the Storwize V7000. Allowing a host to access more than one I/O group might better distribute the load between system nodes. However, doing so reduces the maximum number of hosts that are attached to the Storwize V7000.\n- /SM590000 Plan queue depths for the attached hosts. For more information, see this website.\n- /SM590000 Plan for the physical location of the equipment in the rack.\n- /SM590000 Verify that your planned environment is a supported configuration.\n- /SM590000 Verify that your planned environment does not exceed system configuration limits.\n\nPlanning activities required for Storwize V7000 deployment are described next.\n\n## 3.2 Planning for availability\n\nWhen planning deployment of IBM Storwize V7000, avoid creating single points of failure. Plan system availability according to the requirements specified for your solution. Consider the following aspects, depending on your availability needs:\n\n- /SM590000 Single site or multi-site configuration\n\nMulti-site configurations increase solution resiliency and can be the basis of disaster recovery solutions. Storwize V7000 allows configuration of multi-site solutions, with sites working in active-active or active-standby mode. Synchronous and asynchronous data replication is supported by multiple inter-site link options.\n\nFor more information about cross-site configurations, see IBM Storwize V7000, Spectrum Virtualize, HyperSwap, and VMware Implementation , SG24-8317.\n\n- /SM590000 Physical separation of system building blocks\n\nDual rack deployment might increase availability of your system if your back-end storage, SAN, and LAN infrastructure also do not use single rack placement scheme. You can further increase system availability by ensuring that cluster nodes are powered from different power circuits and are in different fire protection zones.\n\n- /SM590000 Quorum availability\n\nThe Storwize V7000 uses three drives that are configured as array members or hot spares, as quorum disks for the clustered system. If no external MDisks can be used as quorum disks, the preferred practice is to distribute quorum disks over SAS channels to increase system resiliency. The current locations of the quorum disks can be displayed by using the lsquorum command, and relocated by using the chquorum command.", + "recall": 0.974025974025974, + "true_md": "- GLYPH<SM590000> Define subnets for the Storwize V7000 system and for the hosts for internet Small Computer System Interface (iSCSI) connectivity.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Define the IP addresses for IP replication (if required).\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Define back-end storage that will be used by the system.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Define the managed disks (MDisks) in the back-end storage to be used by Storwize V7000.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Define the storage pools, specify MDisks for each pool and document mapping of MDisks to back-end storage. Parameters of the back-end storage determine the characteristics of the volumes in the pool. Make sure that each pool contains MDisks of similar (ideally, identical) performance characteristics.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Plan allocation of hosts and volumes to I/O Groups to optimize the I/O load distribution between the hosts and the Storwize V7000. Allowing a host to access more than one I/O group might better distribute the load between system nodes. However, doing so reduces the maximum number of hosts that are attached to the Storwize V7000.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Plan queue depths for the attached hosts. For more information, see this website.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Plan for the physical location of the equipment in the rack.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Verify that your planned environment is a supported configuration.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Verify that your planned environment does not exceed system configuration limits.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Single site or multi-site configuration\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Physical separation of system building blocks\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Quorum availability\n\n46 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\nThe Storwize V7000 uses three drives that are configured as array members or hot spares, as quorum disks for the clustered system. If no external MDisks can be used as quorum disks, the preferred practice is to distribute quorum disks over SAS channels to increase system resiliency. The current locations of the quorum disks can be displayed by using the lsquorum command, and relocated by using the chquorum command.\n\nDual rack deployment might increase availability of your system if your back-end storage, SAN, and LAN infrastructure also do not use single rack placement scheme. You can further increase system availability by ensuring that cluster nodes are powered from different power circuits and are in different fire protection zones.\n\nFor more information about cross-site configurations, see IBM Storwize V7000, Spectrum Virtualize, HyperSwap, and VMware Implementation , SG24-8317. \n\nMulti-site configurations increase solution resiliency and can be the basis of disaster recovery solutions. Storwize V7000 allows configuration of multi-site solutions, with sites working in active-active or active-standby mode. Synchronous and asynchronous data replication is supported by multiple inter-site link options.\n\nWhen planning deployment of IBM Storwize V7000, avoid creating single points of failure. Plan system availability according to the requirements specified for your solution. Consider the following aspects, depending on your availability needs:\n\nPlanning activities required for Storwize V7000 deployment are described next.\n\n## 3.2 Planning for availability" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7098817115658437, + "doc_id": "755bbe259c4428e97c7ad5b32fdeaa370095bdd6ec6eed1ea46874cba701c036", + "edit_distance": 0.5359628770301624, + "f1_score": 0.9541284403669726, + "meteor": 0.6488736451767183, + "precision": 0.9811320754716981, + "pred_md": "## Other resources\n\nThe following publications are also relevant as further information sources:\n\n- /SM590000 IBM System Storage Master Console: Installation and User's Guide , GC30-4090\n- /SM590000 IBM System Storage Open Software Family SAN Volume Controller: CIM Agent Developers Reference , SC26-7545\n- /SM590000 IBM System Storage Open Software Family SAN Volume Controller: Command-Line Interface User's Guide , SC26-7544\n- /SM590000 IBM System Storage Open Software Family SAN Volume Controller: Configuration Guide , SC26-7543\n- /SM590000 IBM System Storage Open Software Family SAN Volume Controller: Host Attachment Guide , SC26-7563\n- /SM590000 IBM System Storage Open Software Family SAN Volume Controller: Installation Guide , SC26-7541\n- /SM590000 IBM System Storage Open Software Family SAN Volume Controller: Planning Guide , GA22-1052\n- /SM590000 IBM System Storage Open Software Family SAN Volume Controller: Service Guide , SC26-7542\n- /SM590000 IBM System Storage SAN Volume Controller - Software Installation and Configuration Guide, SC23-6628\n- /SM590000 IBM System Storage SAN Volume Controller V6.2.0 - Software Installation and Configuration Guide, GC27-2286\n- /SM590000 IBM System Storage SAN Volume Controller 6.2.0 Configuration Limits and Restrictions , S1003799\n- /SM590000 IBM TotalStorage Multipath Subsystem Device Driver User's Guide , SC30-4096\n- /SM590000 IBM XIV and SVC Best Practices Implementation Guide\n- http://ibm.co/1bk64gW\n- /SM590000 Considerations and Comparisons between IBM SDD for Linux and DM-MPIO\n- http://ibm.co/1CD1gxG\n\n## Referenced websites\n\nThese websites are also relevant as further information sources:\n\n- /SM590000\n- IBM Storage home page http://www.ibm.com/systems/storage\n- /SM590000 SAN Volume Controller supported platform\n- http://ibm.co/1FNjddm\n- /SM590000 SAN Volume Controller IBM Knowledge Center\n- http://www.ibm.com/support/knowledgecenter/STPVGU/welcome\n- /SM590000 Cygwin Linux-like environment for Windows\n\nhttp://www.cygwin.com\n\n790\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1", + "recall": 0.9285714285714286, + "true_md": "## Other resources\n\n## Referenced websites\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\n790 \n\nThe following publications are also relevant as further information sources:\n\nThese websites are also relevant as further information sources:\n\nhttp://www.ibm.com/systems/storage\n\nhttp://ibm.co/1FNjddm\n\nhttp://www.ibm.com/support/knowledgecenter/STPVGU/welcome\n\nhttp://www.cygwin.com\n\nhttp://ibm.co/1CD1gxG\n\nhttp://ibm.co/1bk64gW\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> IBM System Storage Open Software Family SAN Volume Controller: CIM Agent Developers Reference , SC26-7545\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> IBM System Storage Master Console: Installation and User’s Guide , GC30-4090\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> IBM System Storage Open Software Family SAN Volume Controller: Command-Line Interface User’s Guide , SC26-7544\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> IBM System Storage Open Software Family SAN Volume Controller: Configuration Guide , SC26-7543\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> IBM System Storage Open Software Family SAN Volume Controller: Host Attachment Guide , SC26-7563\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> IBM System Storage Open Software Family SAN Volume Controller: Installation Guide , SC26-7541\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> IBM System Storage Open Software Family SAN Volume Controller: Planning Guide , GA22-1052\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> IBM System Storage Open Software Family SAN Volume Controller: Service Guide , SC26-7542\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> IBM System Storage SAN Volume Controller - Software Installation and Configuration Guide, SC23-6628\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> IBM System Storage SAN Volume Controller V6.2.0 - Software Installation and Configuration Guide, GC27-2286\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> IBM System Storage SAN Volume Controller 6.2.0 Configuration Limits and Restrictions , S1003799\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> IBM TotalStorage Multipath Subsystem Device Driver User’s Guide , SC30-4096\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> IBM XIV and SVC Best Practices Implementation Guide\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Considerations and Comparisons between IBM SDD for Linux and DM-MPIO\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> IBM Storage home page\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> SAN Volume Controller supported platform\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> SAN Volume Controller IBM Knowledge Center\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Cygwin Linux-like environment for Windows" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9337734506934504, + "doc_id": "2fdd5c6a495b782ab31c30ef4bf7e7993c2e589aae5fb1b63bf09b6155aa991e", + "edit_distance": 0.25981308411214954, + "f1_score": 0.9847494553376906, + "meteor": 0.9302720564444102, + "precision": 0.9955947136563876, + "pred_md": "For environments with higher bandwidth, non-cycling Global Mirror can be used so that less than a second of data is lost if a failure occurs. Global Mirror also works well when sites are more than 300 kilometers (186.4 miles) apart.\n\nWhen Storwize V7000 copy services are used, all components in the SAN must sustain the workload that is generated by application hosts and the data replication workload. Otherwise, the system can automatically stop copy services relationships to protect your application hosts from increased response times.\n\nStarting with software version 7.6, you can use the chsystem command to set the maximum replication delay for the system. This value ensures that the single slow write operation does not affect the entire primary site.\n\nYou can configure this delay for all relationships or consistency groups that exist on the system by using the maxreplicationdelay parameter on the chsystem command. This value indicates the amount of time (in seconds) that a host write operation can be outstanding before replication is stopped for a relationship on the system. If the system detects a delay in replication on a particular relationship or consistency group, only that relationship or consistency group is stopped.\n\nIn systems with many relationships, a single slow relationship can cause delays for the remaining relationships on the system. This setting isolates the potential relationship with delays so that you can investigate the cause of these issues. When the maximum replication delay is reached, the system generates an error message that identifies the relationship that exceeded the maximum replication delay.\n\nTo avoid such incidents, consider deploying a SAN performance monitoring tool, such as IBM Tivoli Storage Productivity Center, to continuously monitor the SAN components for error conditions and performance problems. The use of such tool helps you detect potential issues before they affect your environment.\n\nWhen planning for use of the data replication services, consider the following aspects of the solution:\n\n- /SM590000 Volumes and consistency groups for copy services\n- /SM590000 Copy services topology\n- /SM590000 Choice between Metro Mirror and Global Mirror\n- /SM590000 Connection type between clusters (FC, FCoE, IP)\n- /SM590000 Cluster configuration for copy services, including zoning\n\nIBM explicitly tests products for interoperability with the Storwize V7000. For more information about the current list of supported devices, see the IBM System Storage Interoperation Center (SSIC) website.\n\n## Volumes and consistency groups\n\nDetermine whether volumes can be replicated independently. Some applications use multiple volumes and require order of writes to these volumes to be preserved in the remote site. Notable examples of such applications are databases.\n\nIf application requires write order to be preserved for the set of volumes that it uses, create a consistency group for these volumes.\n\nChapter 3. Planning\n\n75", + "recall": 0.9741379310344828, + "true_md": "For environments with higher bandwidth, non-cycling Global Mirror can be used so that less than a second of data is lost if a failure occurs. Global Mirror also works well when sites are more than 300 kilometers (186.4 miles) apart.\n\nWhen Storwize V7000 copy services are used, all components in the SAN must sustain the workload that is generated by application hosts and the data replication workload. Otherwise, the system can automatically stop copy services relationships to protect your application hosts from increased response times. \n\nStarting with software version 7.6, you can use the chsystem command to set the maximum replication delay for the system. This value ensures that the single slow write operation does not affect the entire primary site.\n\nYou can configure this delay for all relationships or consistency groups that exist on the system by using the maxreplicationdelay parameter on the chsystem command. This value indicates the amount of time (in seconds) that a host write operation can be outstanding before replication is stopped for a relationship on the system. If the system detects a delay in replication on a particular relationship or consistency group, only that relationship or consistency group is stopped. \n\nIn systems with many relationships, a single slow relationship can cause delays for the remaining relationships on the system. This setting isolates the potential relationship with delays so that you can investigate the cause of these issues. When the maximum replication delay is reached, the system generates an error message that identifies the relationship that exceeded the maximum replication delay.\n\nTo avoid such incidents, consider deploying a SAN performance monitoring tool, such as IBM Tivoli Storage Productivity Center, to continuously monitor the SAN components for error conditions and performance problems. The use of such tool helps you detect potential issues before they affect your environment.\n\nWhen planning for use of the data replication services, consider the following aspects of the solution:\n\nIBM explicitly tests products for interoperability with the Storwize V7000. For more information about the current list of supported devices, see the IBM System Storage Interoperation Center (SSIC) website.\n\nDetermine whether volumes can be replicated independently. Some applications use multiple volumes and require order of writes to these volumes to be preserved in the remote site. Notable examples of such applications are databases. \n\nIf application requires write order to be preserved for the set of volumes that it uses, create a consistency group for these volumes.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Cluster configuration for copy services, including zoning\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Connection type between clusters (FC, FCoE, IP)\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Choice between Metro Mirror and Global Mirror\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Copy services topology\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Volumes and consistency groups for copy services\n\n## Volumes and consistency groups\n\nChapter 3. Planning 75" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8542715919743284, + "doc_id": "8ff1082f24f270d2b807c5b95564081b12c6ce8675ff705bdbf1ac64fbc64ca3", + "edit_distance": 0.2784090909090909, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9346480496675239, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "472\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\nFigure 11-22 Creating a FlashCopy mapping with an existing target\n\nFigure 11-22 Creating a FlashCopy mapping with an existing target\n\nThe Create FlashCopy Mapping window opens as shown in Figure 11-23. In this window, you create the mapping between the selected source volume and the target volume you want to create a mapping with. Then, click Add .\n\nImportant: The source volume and the target volume must be of equal size. Therefore, only targets of the same size are shown in the list for a source volume.\n\nVolumes that are a target in a FlashCopy mapping cannot be a target in a new mapping. Therefore, only volumes that are not targets can be selected.\n\nFigure 11-23 Selecting source and target for a FlashCopy mapping\n\nFigure 11-23 Selecting source and target for a FlashCopy mapping\n\nTo remove a mapping that was created, click , as shown in Figure 11-24 on page 473.", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Figure 11-23 Selecting source and target for a FlashCopy mapping\n\nFigure 11-22 Creating a FlashCopy mapping with an existing target\n\nThe Create FlashCopy Mapping window opens as shown in Figure 11-23. In this window, you create the mapping between the selected source volume and the target volume you want to create a mapping with. Then, click Add .\n\nImportant: The source volume and the target volume must be of equal size. Therefore, only targets of the same size are shown in the list for a source volume.\n\nVolumes that are a target in a FlashCopy mapping cannot be a target in a new mapping. Therefore, only volumes that are not targets can be selected.\n\nTo remove a mapping that was created, click , as shown in Figure 11-24 on page 473.\n\n472 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9118509224745593, + "doc_id": "7ea8795ecd88da7cc80e20158b399f70957202b1c81bc0b9f52ba69fa9097a0f", + "edit_distance": 0.2706766917293233, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.986953370323219, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "702\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\nImportant: Inventory notification must be enabled and operational for these features to work. It is strongly preferred to enable Call Home and Inventory reporting on your IBM Spectrum Virtualize clusters.\n\n## 13.6 Troubleshooting and fix procedures\n\nThe management GUI of IBM Storwize V7000 is a browser-based GUI for configuring and managing all aspects of your system. It provides extensive facilities to help troubleshoot and correct problems. This section explain how to effectively use its features to avoid service disruption of your IBM Storwize V7000.\n\nFigure 13-33 shows the menu to start the Monitoring menu for System information, viewing Events, or seeing real-time Performance statistics.\n\nFigure 13-33 Monitoring options\n\nFigure 13-33 Monitoring options", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Important: Inventory notification must be enabled and operational for these features to work. It is strongly preferred to enable Call Home and Inventory reporting on your IBM Spectrum Virtualize clusters.\n\nThe management GUI of IBM Storwize V7000 is a browser-based GUI for configuring and managing all aspects of your system. It provides extensive facilities to help troubleshoot and correct problems. This section explain how to effectively use its features to avoid service disruption of your IBM Storwize V7000.\n\nFigure 13-33 shows the menu to start the Monitoring menu for System information, viewing Events, or seeing real-time Performance statistics.\n\n702 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\nFigure 13-33 Monitoring options\n\n## 13.6 Troubleshooting and fix procedures" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9160624487454, + "doc_id": "40993ad56650e4c5f5c360596de0f8958438371ae8f30f3edf8a2ad988ea1e80", + "edit_distance": 0.08955223880597014, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9886695204822052, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Draft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n8459ax01.fm\n\n## A.4 Deploy an Apache server by way of the OpenShift web console\n\n- 1. In the Service Catalog view, click Apache HTTP Server as shown in Figure A-4.\n\nFigure A-4 Select Apache HTTP Server\n\nFigure A-4 Select Apache HTTP Server\n\nAppendix A. Sample lab: Deployment and Pod management\n\n197", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Draft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n8459ax01.fm\n\n## A.4 Deploy an Apache server by way of the OpenShift web console\n\n- 1. In the Service Catalog view, click Apache HTTP Server as shown in Figure A-4.\n\nFigure A-4 Select Apache HTTP Server\n\nAppendix A. Sample lab: Deployment and Pod management 197" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.970267223257992, + "doc_id": "699778217a4eb04e5ba601a31c6aa6035002999f278dc0cd5f2c8ec686d5438d", + "edit_distance": 0.8831168831168831, + "f1_score": 0.9897330595482546, + "meteor": 0.6657042710090986, + "precision": 0.9917695473251029, + "pred_md": "## 2.5.21 Data Reduction Pools\n\nData Reduction Pools (DRP) represent a significant enhancement to the storage pool concept. The reason is the virtualization layer is primarily a simple layer that runs the task of lookups between virtual and physical extents.\n\nData Reduction Pools is a new type of storage pool and implements techniques, such as thin-provisioning, compression, and deduplication to reduce the amount of physical capacity that is required to store data, and decrease the network infrastructure required. Savings in storage capacity requirements translate into reduction in the cost of storing the data.\n\nThe storage pools enable you to automatically de-allocate and reclaim capacity of thin-provisioned volumes that contain deleted data and for the first time, enable this reclaimed capacity to be reused by other volumes. Data reduction provides more performance from compressed volumes because of the new log structured pool that is implemented.\n\n## 2.5.22 Deduplication\n\nData deduplication is one of the methods of reducing storage needs by eliminating redundant copies of a file. Data reduction is a way to decrease the storage disk and network infrastructure that is required, and optimize use of storage disks and improve data recovery infrastructure efficiency. Existing data or new data are standardized into chunks that are examined for redundancy. If data duplicates are detected, pointers are shifted to reference a single copy of the chunk and the extra duplicate data is then released.\n\nDeduplication has benefits, such as storing more data per physical storage system, which saves energy by using fewer disk drives and decreasing the amount of data that must be sent across a network to another storage for backup replication and disaster recovery.\n\n## 2.5.23 IP replication\n\nIP replication was introduced in V7.2 and allows data replication between IBM Spectrum Virtualize family members. IP replication uses IP-based ports of the cluster node canisters. This function is transparent to servers and applications in the same way that traditional FC-based mirroring is. All remote mirroring modes (Metro Mirror, Global Mirror, and Global Mirror with changed volumes) are supported.\n\nThe configuration of the system is straightforward, and IBM Storwize family systems normally find each other in the network and can be selected from the GUI.\n\nIP replication includes Bridgeworks SANSlide network optimization technology and is available at no extra charge. Remember, remote mirror is a chargeable option, but the price does not change with IP replication. Remote mirror users have access to the function at no extra charge.\n\nIP connections that are used for replication can have long latency (the time to transmit a signal from one end to the other). This latency can be caused by distance or by many 'hops' between switches and other appliances in the network. Traditional replication solutions transmit data, wait for a response, and then transmit more data, which can result in network utilization as low as 20% (based on IBM measurements).\n\n36\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1", + "recall": 0.9877049180327869, + "true_md": "## 2.5.21 Data Reduction Pools\n\n## 2.5.22 Deduplication\n\n## 2.5.23 IP replication\n\n36 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\nIP connections that are used for replication can have long latency (the time to transmit a signal from one end to the other). This latency can be caused by distance or by many “hops” between switches and other appliances in the network. Traditional replication solutions transmit data, wait for a response, and then transmit more data, which can result in network utilization as low as 20% (based on IBM measurements).\n\nIP replication includes Bridgeworks SANSlide network optimization technology and is available at no extra charge. Remember, remote mirror is a chargeable option, but the price does not change with IP replication. Remote mirror users have access to the function at no extra charge.\n\nThe configuration of the system is straightforward, and IBM Storwize family systems normally find each other in the network and can be selected from the GUI.\n\nIP replication was introduced in V7.2 and allows data replication between IBM Spectrum Virtualize family members. IP replication uses IP-based ports of the cluster node canisters. This function is transparent to servers and applications in the same way that traditional FC-based mirroring is. All remote mirroring modes (Metro Mirror, Global Mirror, and Global Mirror with changed volumes) are supported.\n\nDeduplication has benefits, such as storing more data per physical storage system, which saves energy by using fewer disk drives and decreasing the amount of data that must be sent across a network to another storage for backup replication and disaster recovery.\n\nData deduplication is one of the methods of reducing storage needs by eliminating redundant copies of a file. Data reduction is a way to decrease the storage disk and network infrastructure that is required, and optimize use of storage disks and improve data recovery infrastructure efficiency. Existing data or new data are standardized into chunks that are examined for redundancy. If data duplicates are detected, pointers are shifted to reference a single copy of the chunk and the extra duplicate data is then released.\n\nThe storage pools enable you to automatically de-allocate and reclaim capacity of thin-provisioned volumes that contain deleted data and for the first time, enable this reclaimed capacity to be reused by other volumes. Data reduction provides more performance from compressed volumes because of the new log structured pool that is implemented.\n\nData Reduction Pools is a new type of storage pool and implements techniques, such as thin-provisioning, compression, and deduplication to reduce the amount of physical capacity that is required to store data, and decrease the network infrastructure required. Savings in storage capacity requirements translate into reduction in the cost of storing the data.\n\nData Reduction Pools (DRP) represent a significant enhancement to the storage pool concept. The reason is the virtualization layer is primarily a simple layer that runs the task of lookups between virtual and physical extents." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9820809021903746, + "doc_id": "ad5ffdc452677bd8deda09f0b0d310eb5f3e7feeb428687aafdbdb31dcdc53bd", + "edit_distance": 0.05200945626477541, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999777042195389, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## 2.7.3 Simple Network Management Protocol traps\n\nSNMP is a standard protocol for managing networks and exchanging messages. The IBM Spectrum Virtualize can send SNMP messages that notify personnel about an event. You can use an SNMP manager to view the SNMP messages that IBM Spectrum Virtualize sends. You can use the management GUI or the IBM Storwize V7000 CLI to configure and modify your SNMP settings.\n\nYou can use the Management Information Base (MIB) file for SNMP to configure a network management program to receive SNMP messages that are sent by the IBM Spectrum Virtualize.\n\n## 2.7.4 Syslog messages\n\nThe syslog protocol is a standard protocol for forwarding log messages from a sender to a receiver on an IP network. The IP network can be IPv4 or IPv6.\n\nIBM Storwize V7000 can send syslog messages that notify personnel about an event. The event messages can be sent in expanded or concise format. You can use a syslog manager to view the syslog messages that IBM Storwize V7000 sends.\n\nIBM Spectrum Virtualize uses the User Datagram Protocol (UDP) to transmit the syslog message. You can use the management GUI or the IBM Storwize V7000 CLI to configure and modify your syslog settings.\n\n## 2.7.5 Call Home email\n\nThe Call Home feature transmits operational and error-related data to you and IBM through an SMTP server connection in the form of an event notification email. When configured, this function alerts IBM service personnel about hardware failures and potentially serious configuration or environmental issues. You can use the Call Home function if you have a maintenance contract with IBM or if the IBM Storwize V7000 is within the warranty period.\n\nTo send email, at least one SMTP server must be configured. The system support as many as five more SMTP servers for backup purposes. The SMTP server must accept the relaying of email from the IBM Storwize V7000 clustered system IP address.\n\nUse the management GUI or the IBM Storwize V7000 CLI to configure the email settings, including contact information and email recipients. Set the reply address to a valid email address.\n\nSend a test email to check that all connections and infrastructure are set up correctly. The Call Home function can be disabled at any time by using the management GUI or the IBM Storwize V7000 CLI.\n\nChapter 2. System overview\n\n41", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## 2.7.3 Simple Network Management Protocol traps\n\n## 2.7.4 Syslog messages\n\n## 2.7.5 Call Home email\n\nSNMP is a standard protocol for managing networks and exchanging messages. The IBM Spectrum Virtualize can send SNMP messages that notify personnel about an event. You can use an SNMP manager to view the SNMP messages that IBM Spectrum Virtualize sends. You can use the management GUI or the IBM Storwize V7000 CLI to configure and modify your SNMP settings.\n\nYou can use the Management Information Base (MIB) file for SNMP to configure a network management program to receive SNMP messages that are sent by the IBM Spectrum Virtualize.\n\nThe syslog protocol is a standard protocol for forwarding log messages from a sender to a receiver on an IP network. The IP network can be IPv4 or IPv6. \n\nIBM Storwize V7000 can send syslog messages that notify personnel about an event. The event messages can be sent in expanded or concise format. You can use a syslog manager to view the syslog messages that IBM Storwize V7000 sends. \n\nIBM Spectrum Virtualize uses the User Datagram Protocol (UDP) to transmit the syslog message. You can use the management GUI or the IBM Storwize V7000 CLI to configure and modify your syslog settings.\n\nThe Call Home feature transmits operational and error-related data to you and IBM through an SMTP server connection in the form of an event notification email. When configured, this function alerts IBM service personnel about hardware failures and potentially serious configuration or environmental issues. You can use the Call Home function if you have a maintenance contract with IBM or if the IBM Storwize V7000 is within the warranty period.\n\nTo send email, at least one SMTP server must be configured. The system support as many as five more SMTP servers for backup purposes. The SMTP server must accept the relaying of email from the IBM Storwize V7000 clustered system IP address. \n\nUse the management GUI or the IBM Storwize V7000 CLI to configure the email settings, including contact information and email recipients. Set the reply address to a valid email address. \n\nSend a test email to check that all connections and infrastructure are set up correctly. The Call Home function can be disabled at any time by using the management GUI or the IBM Storwize V7000 CLI.\n\nChapter 2. System overview 41" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8632435807741969, + "doc_id": "80b80c3eb9824e07c4f8de682fa2d7a302b9ee569229450dc707cad58c7df7ad", + "edit_distance": 0.6765734265734266, + "f1_score": 0.946188340807175, + "meteor": 0.6877362572826483, + "precision": 0.9634703196347032, + "pred_md": "The system's layer configuration cannot be changed if there are defined host objects with WWPNs. Therefore, ensure that the system layer is correctly planned and configured early during the deployment.\n\n## 3.15.1 FlashCopy guidelines\n\nWhen planning to use FlashCopy, observe the following guidelines:\n\n- /SM590000 Identify each application that must have a FlashCopy function implemented for its volume.\n- /SM590000 Identify storage pool or pools that will be used by FlashCopy volumes.\n- /SM590000 Define which volumes need to use FlashCopy\n- /SM590000 For each volume, define which FlashCopy type best fits your requirements:\n- -No copy\n- -Full copy\n- -Thin-Provisioned\n- -Incremental\n- /SM590000 Define how many copies you need and the lifetime of each copy.\n- /SM590000 Estimate the expected data change rate for FlashCopy types other than full copy.\n- /SM590000 Consider memory allocation for copy services. If you plan to define multiple FlashCopy relationships, you might need to modify the default memory setting. For more information, see 11.2.18, 'Memory allocation for FlashCopy' on page 496.\n- /SM590000 Define the grain size that you want to use. When data is copied between volumes, it is copied in units of address space known as grains . The grain size is 64 KB or 256 KB. The FlashCopy bitmap contains 1 bit for each grain. The bit records whether the associated grain was split by copying the grain from the source to the target. Larger grain sizes can cause a longer FlashCopy time and a higher space usage in the FlashCopy target volume. The data structure and the source data location can modify those effects.\n\nIf the grain is larger than most host writes, this issue can lead to write amplification on the target system. This increase is because for every write IO to an unsplit grain, the whole grain must be read from the FlashCopy source and copied to the target. Such a situation might result in performance degradation.\n\nIf a thin-provisioned volume is used in a FlashCopy map, use the same grain size as the map grain size for best performance. Also, if a thin-provisioned volume is used directly with a host system, use a grain size that more closely matches the host IO size.\n\n- /SM590000 Define which FlashCopy rate best fits your requirement in terms of the storage performance and the amount of time required to complete the FlashCopy. Table 3-4 lists the relationship of the background copy rate value to the number of grain split attempts per second.\n\nFor performance-sensitive configurations, test the performance observed for different settings of grain size and FlashCopy rate in your actual environment before committing a solution to production use. See Table 3-4 for some baseline data.\n\nTable 3-4 Grain splits per second\n\nChapter 3. Planning\n\n73", + "recall": 0.9295154185022027, + "true_md": "The system’s layer configuration cannot be changed if there are defined host objects with WWPNs. Therefore, ensure that the system layer is correctly planned and configured early during the deployment.\n\nWhen planning to use FlashCopy, observe the following guidelines:\n\nIf the grain is larger than most host writes, this issue can lead to write amplification on the target system. This increase is because for every write IO to an unsplit grain, the whole grain must be read from the FlashCopy source and copied to the target. Such a situation might result in performance degradation.\n\nIf a thin-provisioned volume is used in a FlashCopy map, use the same grain size as the map grain size for best performance. Also, if a thin-provisioned volume is used directly with a host system, use a grain size that more closely matches the host IO size.\n\nFor performance-sensitive configurations, test the performance observed for different settings of grain size and FlashCopy rate in your actual environment before committing a solution to production use. See Table 3-4 for some baseline data.\n\n## 3.15.1 FlashCopy guidelines\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Identify each application that must have a FlashCopy function implemented for its volume.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Identify storage pool or pools that will be used by FlashCopy volumes. \n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Define which volumes need to use FlashCopy\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> For each volume, define which FlashCopy type best fits your requirements: \n\n- – Full copy\n\n- – No copy\n\n- – Thin-Provisioned\n\n- – Incremental\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Define how many copies you need and the lifetime of each copy.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Estimate the expected data change rate for FlashCopy types other than full copy.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Consider memory allocation for copy services. If you plan to define multiple FlashCopy relationships, you might need to modify the default memory setting. For more information, see 11.2.18, “Memory allocation for FlashCopy” on page 496.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Define the grain size that you want to use. When data is copied between volumes, it is copied in units of address space known as grains . The grain size is 64 KB or 256 KB. The FlashCopy bitmap contains 1 bit for each grain. The bit records whether the associated grain was split by copying the grain from the source to the target. Larger grain sizes can cause a longer FlashCopy time and a higher space usage in the FlashCopy target volume. The data structure and the source data location can modify those effects. \n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Define which FlashCopy rate best fits your requirement in terms of the storage performance and the amount of time required to complete the FlashCopy. Table 3-4 lists the relationship of the background copy rate value to the number of grain split attempts per second.\n\nTable 3-4 Grain splits per second\n\nChapter 3. Planning 73" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8732443365682292, + "doc_id": "93cf180afd05b0c05f9656c900bb9558607dad777a32736d1e149092a6b51750", + "edit_distance": 0.21333333333333335, + "f1_score": 0.9705882352941176, + "meteor": 0.9648426759669597, + "precision": 0.9611650485436893, + "pred_md": "- -IP Address\n\nThe IP address of the server.\n\n- -Base DN\n\nThe distinguished name to use as a starting point for searching for users on the server (for example, dc=ssd,dc=hursley,dc=ibm,dc=com ).\n\n- -SSL Certificate\n\nThe SSL certificate that is used to securely connect to the LDAP server. This certificate is required only if you chose to use SSL or Transport Layer Security as a security method earlier.\n\n## Click Finish to save the settings.\n\nFigure 4-28 Configure remote authentication: Creating an LDAP server\n\nFigure 4-28 Configure remote authentication: Creating an LDAP server\n\nNow that remote authentication is enabled, the remote user groups must be configured. You can use the default built-in user groups for remote authentication. However, the name of the default user groups cannot be changed. If the LDAP server contains a group that you want to use and you do not want to create this group on the storage system, the name of the group must be changed on the server side to match the default name. Any user group, whether default or self-defined, must be enabled for remote authentication before LDAP authentication can be used for that group.\n\nChapter 4. Initial configuration\n\n113", + "recall": 0.9801980198019802, + "true_md": "- – IP Address\n\n- – Base DN\n\n- – SSL Certificate\n\nThe IP address of the server.\n\nThe distinguished name to use as a starting point for searching for users on the server (for example, dc=ssd,dc=hursley,dc=ibm,dc=com ).\n\nThe SSL certificate that is used to securely connect to the LDAP server. This certificate is required only if you chose to use SSL or Transport Layer Security as a security method earlier.\n\nClick Finish to save the settings.\n\nNow that remote authentication is enabled, the remote user groups must be configured. You can use the default built-in user groups for remote authentication. However, the name of the default user groups cannot be changed. If the LDAP server contains a group that you want to use and you do not want to create this group on the storage system, the name of the group must be changed on the server side to match the default name. Any user group, whether default or self-defined, must be enabled for remote authentication before LDAP authentication can be used for that group.\n\nFigure 4-28 Configure remote authentication: Creating an LDAP server\n\nChapter 4. Initial configuration 113" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9412996155603862, + "doc_id": "68c800418757871d4d5a683881adeb3033dfd2af4451c1232c0c2383fe1f15b8", + "edit_distance": 0.1618705035971223, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9860778829378786, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "156\n\nIBM Content Manager OnDemand Guide\n\nAn exit routine must be eligible for execution by associating a logical exit point ( ARS.SECURITY ). In this example, the MVS Dynamic Exit Facility provides several methods to perform this association. You can use the PROGXX statement in Sys1.Parmlib to define exits to the Dynamic Exit Facility at IPL time (Exit statement for PROGXX ).\n\nThe following example shows the exit statement for PROGXX :\n\nEXIT ADD EXITNAME(ARS.SECURITY) MODNAME(ARSUSECZ)\n\nIn addition, you can use the following operator command to add the exit:\n\nSETPROG EXIT,ADD,EXITNAME=ARS.SECURITY,MODENAME=ARSUSECZ\n\nImportant: The load module must be in a link pack area (LPA) or an LNLKLST dataset.\n\n## 6.7.3 Unified logon exit (ARSPTGN): z/OS only\n\nWith the Content Manager OnDemand unified login exit ( ARS.PTGN ), you can run the Content Manager OnDemand command-line utilities (such as ARSLOAD ) without requiring a specified user ID and password.\n\nThis facility to log on without specifying a password specifies a PassTicket as a password when you use a RACROUTE REQUEST=VERIFY call. Figure 6-13 shows the unified logon exit. CMOD in the figure stands for Content Manager OnDemand.\n\nFigure 6-13 Unified logon exit\n\nFigure 6-13 Unified logon exit\n\nTo enable PassTicket in a security manager, such as RACF, you must complete the following steps:\n\n- 1. Activate the PKTDATA class.\n- 2. Define a secured sign-on application key for each application.\n- 3. Run SETROPTS RACLIST(PTKTDATA) .", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## 6.7.3 Unified logon exit (ARSPTGN): z/OS only\n\nAn exit routine must be eligible for execution by associating a logical exit point ( ARS.SECURITY ). In this example, the MVS Dynamic Exit Facility provides several methods to perform this association. You can use the PROGXX statement in Sys1.Parmlib to define exits to the Dynamic Exit Facility at IPL time (Exit statement for PROGXX ).\n\nThe following example shows the exit statement for PROGXX :\n\nEXIT ADD EXITNAME(ARS.SECURITY) MODNAME(ARSUSECZ)\n\nIn addition, you can use the following operator command to add the exit:\n\nSETPROG EXIT,ADD,EXITNAME=ARS.SECURITY,MODENAME=ARSUSECZ\n\nImportant: The load module must be in a link pack area (LPA) or an LNLKLST dataset.\n\nWith the Content Manager OnDemand unified login exit ( ARS.PTGN ), you can run the Content Manager OnDemand command-line utilities (such as ARSLOAD ) without requiring a specified user ID and password.\n\nThis facility to log on without specifying a password specifies a PassTicket as a password when you use a RACROUTE REQUEST=VERIFY call. Figure 6-13 shows the unified logon exit. CMOD in the figure stands for Content Manager OnDemand.\n\nTo enable PassTicket in a security manager, such as RACF, you must complete the following steps:\n\nFigure 6-13 Unified logon exit\n\n- 1. Activate the PKTDATA class.\n\n- 2. Define a secured sign-on application key for each application.\n\n156 IBM Content Manager OnDemand Guide\n\n- 3. Run SETROPTS RACLIST(PTKTDATA) ." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8798169338140458, + "doc_id": "1fc96ad04aeee40b8c93fc916f0dc571da5f0339931d93464154bd5b820e33f0", + "edit_distance": 0.43973941368078173, + "f1_score": 0.9450549450549449, + "meteor": 0.9051647084040018, + "precision": 0.9772727272727273, + "pred_md": "- -The expanded format provides more details about the event.\n- /SM590000 Event Notifications\n\nConsider the following points about event notifications:\n\n- -Select Error if you want the user to receive messages about problems, such as hardware failures, that must be resolved immediately.\n\nImportant: Browse to Recommended Actions to run the fix procedures on these notifications.\n\n- -Select Warning if you want the user to receive messages about problems and unexpected conditions. Investigate the cause immediately to determine whether any corrective action is necessary.\n\nImportant: Browse to Recommended Actions to run the fix procedures on these notifications.\n\n- -Select Info if you want the user to receive messages about expected events. No action is required for these events.\n\nFigure 13-64 Syslog configuration\n\nFigure 13-64 Syslog configuration\n\nTo remove a syslog server, click the Minus sign ( ). -\n\nTo add another syslog server, click the Plus sign ( + ).\n\nThe syslog messages can be sent in concise message format or expanded message format.\n\nExample 13-4 shows a compact format syslog message.\n\nExample 13-4 Compact syslog message example\n\nIBM2076 #NotificationType=Error #ErrorID=077102 #ErrorCode=1091 #Description=Node Double fan failed #ClusterName=V7000G2\\_1 #Timestamp=Wed Jul 02 08:00:00 2017 BST #ObjectType=Node #ObjectName=Node1 #CopyID=0 #ErrorSequenceNumber=120\n\nExample 13-5 shows an expanded format syslog message.\n\nExample 13-5 Full format syslog message example\n\nIBM2076 #NotificationType=Error #ErrorID=077102 #ErrorCode=1091 #Description=Node Double fan failed #ClusterName=V7000G2\\_1 #Timestamp=Wed Jul 02 08:00:00 2017 BST #ObjectType=Node #ObjectName=Node1 #CopyID=0 #ErrorSequenceNumber=120 #ObjectID=2 #NodeID=2 #MachineType=2076624#SerialNumber=1234567 #SoftwareVersion=8.1.0.0\n\nChapter 13. RAS, monitoring, and troubleshooting\n\n725", + "recall": 0.9148936170212766, + "true_md": "- – The expanded format provides more details about the event. \n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Event Notifications\n\n- –S e l c t Error if you want the user to receive messages about problems, such as hardware failures, that must be resolved immediately.\n\n- –S e l c t Warning if you want the user to receive messages about problems and unexpected conditions. Investigate the cause immediately to determine whether any corrective action is necessary.\n\n- –S e l c t Info if you want the user to receive messages about expected events. No action is required for these events. \n\nConsider the following points about event notifications:\n\nImportant: Browse to Recommended Actions to run the fix procedures on these notifications.\n\nImportant: Browse to Recommended Actions to run the fix procedures on these notifications.\n\nTo add another syslog server, click the Plus sign ( + ).\n\nTo remove a syslog server, click the Minus sign ( - ).\n\nThe syslog messages can be sent in concise message format or expanded message format.\n\nExample 13-4 shows a compact format syslog message.\n\nExample 13-5 shows an expanded format syslog message.\n\nExample 13-4 Compact syslog message example\n\nFigure 13-64 Syslog configuration\n\nIBM2076 #NotificationType=Error #ErrorID=077102 #ErrorCode=1091 #Description=Node Double fan failed #ClusterName=V7000G2\\_1 #Timestamp=Wed Jul 02 08:00:00 2017 BST #ObjectType=Node #ObjectName=Node1 #CopyID=0 #ErrorSequenceNumber=120\n\nIBM2076 #NotificationType=Error #ErrorID=077102 #ErrorCode=1091 #Description=Node Double fan failed #ClusterName=V7000G2\\_1 #Timestamp=Wed Jul 02 08:00:00 2017 BST #ObjectType=Node #ObjectName=Node1 #CopyID=0 #ErrorSequenceNumber=120 #ObjectID=2 #NodeID=2 #MachineType=2076624#SerialNumber=1234567 #SoftwareVersion=8.1.0.0\n\nExample 13-5 Full format syslog message example\n\nChapter 13. RAS, monitoring, and troubleshooting 725" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9002693607269058, + "doc_id": "88b0243724ceff054f90b6033cf9501ec82e458c34ea6b4c6942d4bc55220318", + "edit_distance": 0.13333333333333333, + "f1_score": 0.96875, + "meteor": 0.9723089182870516, + "precision": 0.9763779527559056, + "pred_md": "For the error messages with the highest internal priority, perform corrective actions by running fix procedures. Click the Run Fix button (see Figure 5-37 on page 152). The fix procedure wizard opens, as shown in Figure 5-38.\n\nFigure 5-38 Performing fix procedure\n\nFigure 5-38 Performing fix procedure\n\nThe wizard guides you through the troubleshooting and fixing process from a hardware or software perspective. If you determine that the problem cannot be fixed without a technician's intervention, you can cancel the procedure execution at any time.\n\nFor more information about fix procedures, see Chapter 13, 'RAS, monitoring, and troubleshooting' on page 673.\n\n## 5.4.3 Performance\n\nThe Performance pane reports the general system statistics that relate to processor (CPU) utilization, host and internal interfaces, volumes, and MDisks. You can switch between MBps or IOPS, and drill down in the statistics to the node level. This capability might be useful when you compare the performance of each control canister in the system if problems exist after a node failover occurs (see Figure 5-39 on page 154).\n\nChapter 5. Graphical user interface\n\n153", + "recall": 0.9612403100775194, + "true_md": "For the error messages with the highest internal priority, perform corrective actions by running fix procedures. Click the Run Fix button (see Figure 5-37 on page 152). The fix procedure wizard opens, as shown in Figure 5-38.\n\nThe wizard guides you through the troubleshooting and fixing process from a hardware or software perspective. If you determine that the problem cannot be fixed without a technician’s intervention, you can cancel the procedure execution at any time. \n\nFor more information about fix procedures, see Chapter 13, “RAS, monitoring, and troubleshooting” on page 673.\n\nThe Performance pane reports the general system statistics that relate to processor (CPU) utilization, host and internal interfaces, volumes, and MDisks. You can switch between MBps or IOPS, and drill down in the statistics to the node level. This capability might be useful when you compare the performance of each control canister in the system if problems exist after a node failover occurs (see Figure 5-39 on page 154).\n\n## 5.4.3 Performance\n\nFigure 5-38 Performing fix procedure\n\nChapter 5. Graphical user interface 153" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9660913592876718, + "doc_id": "b04068ccca34d612b4b000baaa32cd81e1e4b8ad9864ff1df55e7dbe7c6270a1", + "edit_distance": 0.11231884057971014, + "f1_score": 0.9778761061946903, + "meteor": 0.96902573423201, + "precision": 0.9910313901345291, + "pred_md": "## 17.1 Content Federation Services for Content Manager OnDemand and IBM Enterprise Records overview\n\nIBM FileNet Content Federation Services enables organizations to access content from numerous heterogeneous repositories anywhere in the enterprise and federate this information to provide a single enterprise source for critical business content. Content Federation Services for Content Manager OnDemand enables enterprises to perform federation, search, retrieve, and records management functions across Content Manager OnDemand repositories.\n\nIBM Enterprise Records positions your business to provide legally compliant records that meet government regulations at the time of inquiry that follow your corporate record policy file plan.\n\nContent Manager OnDemand handles a high volume of document ingestion to the system, typically of a static nature, such as credit card or bank statements. Each document ingestion might contain thousands of individual documents or pages. Content Manager OnDemand offers a retention feature so that you can set the document retention for a fixed period at the document ingestion time, for example, an investment company that applies a simple retention policy of eight years to all of their customer statements.\n\nContent Manager OnDemand does not apply an event-based retention policy that is based on, for example, the date that the customer closed an account. In this scenario, the clock does not begin the eight-year period until the customer closes the account. By enabling records federation services by using Content Federation Services for Content Manager OnDemand, you can manage Content Manager OnDemand content in a manner that is consistent with your organization's records retention policies.\n\nWhen Content Manager OnDemand content is federated and declared as a record in Enterprise Records, Content Manager OnDemand content can be tied to dynamic retention policies, such as account closure, policy termination, contract execution, or any other event. In these circumstances, records federation services can allow your organization to retain content for a certain amount of time, starting on the date of the event. Companies must design their policies carefully to manage a large collection of data correctly when the company deals with various regulatory policies and litigation.\n\nWhen it is time to expire data, with federated and declared content by using Content Federation Services for Content Manager OnDemand, Content Manager OnDemand can delete the original load (which contained multiple documents) and at the same time reingest those documents that must be retained.\n\nWhen you use Enhanced Retention Management, you enable the holding documents immediately and prevent expiration. Although this feature is powerful, it does not position your business to make a Content Manager OnDemand captured report or document a compliant record to meet government regulations. You must enable the feature that meets your business requirements:\n\n- /SM590000 Use Enhanced Retention Management in Content Manager OnDemand to hold documents and prevent expiration.\n- /SM590000 Use Enterprise Records to make documents into compliant records and to enable them for event-based expiration.\n\nA situation might exist where both features are enabled because of many different line-of-business requirements.\n\n366\n\nIBM Content Manager OnDemand Guide", + "recall": 0.9650655021834061, + "true_md": "## 17.1 Content Federation Services for Content Manager OnDemand and IBM Enterprise Records overview\n\n366 IBM Content Manager OnDemand Guide\n\nIBM FileNet Content Federation Services enables organizations to access content from numerous heterogeneous repositories anywhere in the enterprise and federate this information to provide a single enterprise source for critical business content. Content Federation Services for Content Manager OnDemand enables enterprises to perform federation, search, retrieve, and records management functions across Content Manager OnDemand repositories. \n\nIBM Enterprise Records positions your business to provide legally compliant records that meet government regulations at the time of inquiry that follow your corporate record policy file plan. \n\nContent Manager OnDemand handles a high volume of document ingestion to the system, typically of a static nature, such as credit card or bank statements. Each document ingestion might contain thousands of individual documents or pages. Content Manager OnDemand offers a retention feature so that you can set the document retention for a fixed period at the document ingestion time, for example, an investment company that applies a simple retention policy of eight years to all of their customer statements. \n\nContent Manager OnDemand does not apply an event-based retention policy that is based on, for example, the date that the customer closed an account. In this scenario, the clock does not begin the eight-year period until the customer closes the account. By enabling records federation services by using Content Federation Services for Content Manager OnDemand, you can manage Content Manager OnDemand content in a manner that is consistent with your organization’s records retention policies.\n\nWhen Content Manager OnDemand content is federated and declared as a record in Enterprise Records, Content Manager OnDemand content can be tied to dynamic retention policies, such as account closure, policy termination, contract execution, or any other event. In these circumstances, records federation services can allow your organization to retain content for a certain amount of time, starting on the date of the event. Companies must design their policies carefully to manage a large collection of data correctly when the company deals with various regulatory policies and litigation.\n\nWhen it is time to expire data, with federated and declared content by using Content Federation Services for Content Manager OnDemand, Content Manager OnDemand can delete the original load (which contained multiple documents) and at the same time reingest those documents that must be retained.\n\nWhen you use Enhanced Retention Management, you enable the holding documents immediately and prevent expiration. Although this feature is powerful, it does not position your business to make a Content Manager OnDemand captured report or document a compliant record to meet government regulations. You must enable the feature that meets your business requirements:\n\nA situation might exist where both features are enabled because of many different line-of-business requirements.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Use Enhanced Retention Management in Content Manager OnDemand to hold documents and prevent expiration.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Use Enterprise Records to make documents into compliant records and to enable them for event-based expiration." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8664940486390466, + "doc_id": "6895cf643fca7cba928ea1fd564a930794579783c3b2838db56066d2a92f8ab6", + "edit_distance": 0.3145539906103286, + "f1_score": 0.9741379310344828, + "meteor": 0.9687769377726556, + "precision": 0.9826086956521739, + "pred_md": "Figure 13-66 shows an example of the audit log after a volume is created, with a command highlighted. The Running Tasks button is available at the top of the window in the status pane that shows the format of this volume. If you click Running Tasks , the progress of the running tasks can be displayed by clicking the associated View button.\n\nFigure 13-66 Audit log\n\nFigure 13-66 Audit log\n\nChanging the view of the Audit Log grid is possible by right-clicking column headings or clicking the sign in the upper right corner (see Figure 13-67). The grid layout and sorting is under the user's control, so you can view everything in the audit log, sort different columns, and reset the default grid preferences.\n\nFigure 13-67 How to change audit log column headings\n\nFigure 13-67 How to change audit log column headings\n\n## 13.9 Collecting support information by using the GUI and CLI\n\nIf you encounter a problem and contact the IBM Support Center, you are most likely asked to provide a support package. You can collect and upload this package from the Settings → Support menu.\n\nChapter 13. RAS, monitoring, and troubleshooting\n\n727", + "recall": 0.9658119658119658, + "true_md": "Figure 13-66 shows an example of the audit log after a volume is created, with a command highlighted. The Running Tasks button is available at the top of the window in the status pane that shows the format of this volume. If you click Running Tasks , the progress of the running tasks can be displayed by clicking the associated View button.\n\nChanging the view of the Audit Log grid is possible by right-clicking column headings or clicking the sign in the upper right corner (see Figure 13-67). The grid layout and sorting is under the user’s control, so you can view everythi ng in the audit log, sort different columns, and reset the default grid preferences.\n\nIf you encounter a problem and contact the IBM Support Center, you are most likely asked to provide a support package. You can collect and upload this package from the Settings → Support menu. \n\n## 13.9 Collecting support information by using the GUI and CLI\n\nFigure 13-67 How to change audit log column headings \n\nFigure 13-66 Audit log\n\nChapter 13. RAS, monitoring, and troubleshooting 727" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9228809765886568, + "doc_id": "e4c04c4d86259a2dc3b6ef3fd23af93d09b17e315ecf536c3c1366298dd40b37", + "edit_distance": 0.6459948320413437, + "f1_score": 0.9471032745591939, + "meteor": 0.8917396018965865, + "precision": 0.94, + "pred_md": "684\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\nSave the current backup to a secure and safe location. The files can be downloaded using UNIX scp or pscp for Microsoft Windows, as shown in Example 13-3. Replace the IP address with the cluster IP address of your Storwize V7000 and specify a local folder on your workstation. In this example, we are saving to C:\\V7000Backup .\n\nExample 13-3 Saving config backup files to your workstation\n\n```\nC:\\ putty>pscp -unsafe superuser@9.174.157.250:/dumps/svc.config.backup.* c:\\V7000backup Using keyboard-interactive authentication. Password: svc.config.backup.bak_782 | 133 kB | 33.5 kB/s | ETA: 00:00:00 | 100% svc.config.backup.log_782 | 16 kB | 16.8 kB/s | ETA: 00:00:00 | 100% svc.config.backup.sh_7822 | 5 kB | 5.9 kB/s | ETA: 00:00:00 | 100% svc.config.backup.xml_782 | 105 kB | 52.8 kB/s | ETA: 00:00:00 | 100%\n```\n\nC:\\putty>\n\n```\nC:\\> dir V7000backup Volume in drive C has no label. Volume Serial Number is 0608-239A Directory of C:\\V7000backup 24.10.2018 10:57

. 24.10.2018 10:57 .. 24.10.2018 10:57 137.107 svc.config.backup.bak_7822DFF-1 24.10.2018 10:57 17.196 svc.config.backup.log_7822DFF-1 24.10.2018 10:57 6.018 svc.config.backup.sh_7822DFF-1 24.10.2018 10:58 108.208 svc.config.backup.xml_7822DFF-1 4 File(s) 268.529 bytes 2 Dir(s) 79.028.662.272 bytes free C:\\>\n```\n\nThe use of the -unsafe option enables you to use the wildcard for downloading all the svc.config.backup files in a single command.\n\nTip: If you encounter Fatal: Received unexpected end-of-file from server when using the pscp command, consider upgrading your version of PuTTY.\n\n## 13.3.2 Saving the backup by using the GUI\n\nAlthough it is not possible to generate an ad hoc backup, you can save the backup files by using the GUI. To do so, complete the following steps:\n\n- 1. Navigate to Settings → Support → Support Package .\n- 2. Click the Manual Upload Instructions twistie to expand it.\n- 3. Click Download Support Package , as shown in Figure 13-8 on page 685.", + "recall": 0.9543147208121827, + "true_md": "Save the current backup to a secure and safe location. The files can be downloaded using UNIX scp or pscp for Microsoft Windows, as shown in Example 13-3. Replace the IP address with the cluster IP address of your Storwize V7000 and specify a local folder on your workstation. In this example, we are saving to C:\\V7000Backup .\n\nThe use of the -unsafe option enables you to use the wildcard for downloading all the svc.config.backup files in a single command.\n\nTip: If you encounter Fatal: Received unexpected end-of-file from server when using the pscp command, consider upgrading your version of PuTTY.\n\nAlthough it is not possible to generate an ad hoc backup, you can save the backup files by using the GUI. To do so, complete the following steps:\n\n## 13.3.2 Saving the backup by using the GUI\n\nExample 13-3 Saving config backup files to your workstation\n\nC:\\ putty>pscp -unsafe superuser@9.174.157.250:/dumps/svc.config.backup.* c:\\V7000backup Using keyboard-interactive authentication. Password: svc.config.backup.bak\\_782 | 133 kB | 33.5 kB/s | ETA: 00:00:00 | 100% svc.config.backup.log\\_782 | 16 kB | 16.8 kB/s | ETA: 00:00:00 | 100% svc.config.backup.sh\\_7822 | 5 kB | 5.9 kB/s | ETA: 00:00:00 | 100% svc.config.backup.xml\\_782 | 105 kB | 52.8 kB/s | ETA: 00:00:00 | 100% C:\\putty> C:\\> dir V7000backup Volume in drive C has no label. Volume Serial Number is 0608-239A Directory of C:\\V7000backup 24.10.2018 10:57 <DIR> . 24.10.2018 10:57 <DIR> .. 24.10.2018 10:57 137.107 svc.config.backup.bak\\_7822DFF-1 24.10.2018 10:57 17.196 svc.config.backup.log\\_7822DFF-1 24.10.2018 10:57 6.018 svc.config.backup.sh\\_7822DFF-1 24.10.2018 10:58 108.208 svc.config.backup.xml\\_7822DFF-1 4 File(s) 268.529 bytes 2 Dir(s) 79.028.662.272 bytes free C:\\>\n\n- 1. Navigate to Settings → Support → Support Package .\n\n- 3. Click Download Support Package , as shown in Figure 13-8 on page 685.\n\n- 2. Click the Manual Upload Instructions twistie to expand it. \n\n684 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8537914557772197, + "doc_id": "66f099a5b93c3e8cf41d720fc2e20c4dbbe641b7dd0833b85fde6545bb6e2ccd", + "edit_distance": 0.392, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9585577390709152, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "8459ax01.fm\n\nDraft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n204\n\nRed Hat OpenShift and IBM Cloud Paks on IBM Power Systems: Volume 1\n\n- 2. Verify the Pod restart policy of the deployment, as shown in Figure A-15, to determine how OpenShift responds when containers in that Pod exit. A P od restart policy of Always tries restarting a successfully exited container.\n\nFigure A-15 Verify the Pod restart policy\n\nFigure A-15 Verify the Pod restart policy\n\n- 3. To simulate a Pod failure, terminate the Pod. Go to the Actions drop down menu and select Delete as shown in Figure A-16.\n\nFigure A-16 Simulate a Pod failure\n\nFigure A-16 Simulate a Pod failure", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "8459ax01.fm\n\nDraft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n- 2. Verify the Pod restart policy of the deployment, as shown in Figure A-15, to determine how OpenShift responds when containers in that Pod exit. A P od restart policy of Always tries restarting a successfully exited container.\n\n- 3. To simulate a Pod failure, terminate the Pod. Go to the Actions drop down menu and select Delete as shown in Figure A-16.\n\nFigure A-15 Verify the Pod restart policy\n\nFigure A-16 Simulate a Pod failure\n\n204 Red Hat OpenShift and IBM Cloud Paks on IBM Power Systems: Volume 1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.893761225657999, + "doc_id": "581abc938181c9d47b163164e8e5ed9d5259cd15f6b40527574ae034334a888f", + "edit_distance": 0.07692307692307693, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9907670454545455, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "- 2. Log in by using the superuser credentials. The IBM Storwize V7000 management home window opens. Move the cursor over Settings and click System (see Figure 13-12).\n\nFigure 13-12 Settings menu\n\nFigure 13-12 Settings menu\n\nChapter 13. RAS, monitoring, and troubleshooting\n\n689", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "- 2. Log in by using the superuser credentials. The IBM Storwize V7000 management home window opens. Move the cursor over Settings and click System (see Figure 13-12).\n\nFigure 13-12 Settings menu\n\nChapter 13. RAS, monitoring, and troubleshooting 689" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9417005027154183, + "doc_id": "6b10223c5c0a3e2f3f51f23a169f9cbd881a6b2aa1e0cbfcb18a73f0f78f14eb", + "edit_distance": 0.09310344827586207, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9969006403162466, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "118\n\nIBM Content Manager OnDemand Guide\n\nFigure 5-16 Defining a storage set for VSAM\n\nFigure 5-16 Defining a storage set for VSAM\n\nBased on these parameters, Content Manager OnDemand creates VSAM datasets during the arsload program. A catalog entry is created, as shown in Example 5-2.\n\nExample 5-2 VSAM dataset name\n\nVSAMTST.FAA.L1.FAAA\n\nThis catalog entry is created automatically by the Content Manager OnDemand system. The only part that you can create for yourself is the first-level qualifier. The space allocation during the Define Cluster is performed by the Content Manager OnDemand code, as well. The default object size that is set when you define the application group influences the number of bytes for the primary allocation and the secondary allocation. The number of bytes is divided by 16 for the primary allocation. Every time that an arsload command runs with this storage set, this amount of data is allocated even if the objects are much smaller.\n\nEvery load creates two VSAM datasets: one VSAM dataset for the data, and one VSAM dataset for the index. Every Define Cluster of a VSAM dataset is a catalog entry. If you have several million loads with this storage set, your catalog grows large.\n\nYou can browse the VSAM dataset, but if the compression is on, you cannot see much. For test purposes, compression can be switched off and then the content of the VSAM dataset is viewable. Compression can be switched off on the load information in the application window.\n\nIf you store AFP data to VSAM, the resources are stored in a different VSAM dataset.", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Figure 5-16 Defining a storage set for VSAM\n\nExample 5-2 VSAM dataset name\n\nBased on these parameters, Content Manager OnDemand creates VSAM datasets during the arsload program. A catalog entry is created, as shown in Example 5-2.\n\nThis catalog entry is created automatically by the Content Manager OnDemand system. The only part that you can create for yourself is the first-level qualifier. The space allocation during the Define Cluster is performed by the Content Manager OnDemand code, as well. The default object size that is set when you define the application group influences the number of bytes for the primary allocation and the secondary allocation. The number of bytes is divided by 16 for the primary allocation. Every time that an arsload command runs with this storage set, this amount of data is allocated even if the objects are much smaller.\n\nEvery load creates two VSAM datasets: one VSAM dataset for the data, and one VSAM dataset for the index. Every Define Cluster of a VSAM dataset is a catalog entry. If you have several million loads with this storage set, your catalog grows large.\n\nYou can browse the VSAM dataset, but if the compression is on, you cannot see much. For test purposes, compression can be switched off and then the content of the VSAM dataset is viewable. Compression can be switched off on the load information in the application window.\n\nIf you store AFP data to VSAM, the resources are stored in a different VSAM dataset.\n\nVSAMTST.FAA.L1.FAAA \n\n118 IBM Content Manager OnDemand Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8410087028694053, + "doc_id": "15065542365c9c72be035e71f0e3fc58f0fd4302bcd51f05db16ef1b03e31065", + "edit_distance": 0.8571428571428571, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.8213503685362442, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Figure 5-64 Configuring Secure Communications\n\nFigure 5-64 Configuring Secure Communications\n\n## 5.10.4 System menus\n\nClick the System option from the Settings menu (see Figure 5-65) to view and change the time and date settings, work with licensing options, download configuration settings, work with VMware VVOLs and IP Quorum, or download software upgrade packages.\n\nFigure 5-65 System option\n\nFigure 5-65 System option\n\n## Date and time\n\nComplete the following steps to view or configure the date and time settings:\n\n- 1. From the main System pane, point to Settings and click System .\n- 2. In the left column, select Date and Time , as shown in Figure 5-66 on page 172.\n\nChapter 5. Graphical user interface\n\n171", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "- 2. In the left column, select Date and Time , as shown in Figure 5-66 on page 172.\n\n- 1. From the main System pane, point to Settings and click System .\n\nFigure 5-64 Configuring Secure Communications\n\nFigure 5-65 System option\n\nComplete the following steps to view or configure the date and time settings:\n\nClick the System option from the Settings menu (see Figure 5-65) to view and change the time and date settings, work with licensing options, download configuration settings, work with VMware VVOLs and IP Quorum, or download software upgrade packages.\n\n## 5.10.4 System menus\n\n## Date and time\n\nChapter 5. Graphical user interface 171" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9227167144865145, + "doc_id": "c6814eb879e2f37b6da4555e38a4cd0ad033152f1827e45ce5bbc01f8a5a7b13", + "edit_distance": 0.5063291139240507, + "f1_score": 0.9908256880733944, + "meteor": 0.9666118006109999, + "precision": 0.9818181818181818, + "pred_md": "8459ch07.fm\n\nDraft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n176\n\nRed Hat OpenShift and IBM Cloud Paks on IBM Power Systems: Volume 1\n\nExample 7-25 Service file for AWS\n\n```\napiVersion: v1 kind: Service metadata: labels: app: appmongo-ibm-mongodb-dev name: appmongo-ibm-mongodb-dev spec: ports: - name: ibm-mongodb-dev port: 27017 protocol: TCP targetPort: 27017 selector: app: appmongo-ibm-mongodb-dev type: LoadBalancer\n```\n\nAfter applying all yaml files as shown in Example 7-26, Mongodb is available in AWS.\n\n## Example 7-26 Applying all yaml files\n\n[root@ip-10-0-2-217 ~]# oc apply -f csipv.yaml persistentvolume/appmongo-ibm-mongodb-dev-datavolume created [root@ip-10-0-2-217 ~]# oc apply -f csipvc.yaml persistentvolumeclaim/appmongo-ibm-mongodb-dev-datavolume created [root@ip-10-0-2-217 ~]# oc apply -f secret.yaml secret/appmongo-ibm-mongodb-dev created [root@ip-10-0-2-217 ~]# oc apply -f awsservice.yaml service/appmongo-ibm-mongodb-dev created [root@ip-10-0-2-217 ~]# oc apply -f mongo\\_pod.yaml pod/appmongo-ibm-mongodb-dev created [root@ip-10-0-2-217 ~]#\n\nThe service is created by AWS. To get the address, check the service as shown in Example 7-27.\n\nExample 7-27 Checking service created\n\n```\n[root@ip-10-0-2-217 ~]# oc get service appmongo-ibm-mongodb-dev NAME TYPE CLUSTER-IP EXTERNAL-IP PORT(S) AGE appmongo-ibm-mongodb-dev LoadBalancer 172.30.43.162 a1765d068fc8911e9b07106df2fba1c0-125393943.us-east-2.elb.amazonaws.com 27017:31725/TCP 9d [root@ip-10-0-2-217 ~]#\n```", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "8459ch07.fm\n\nDraft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\nExample 7-25 Service file for AWS\n\nExample 7-26 Applying all yaml files\n\nExample 7-27 Checking service created\n\napiVersion: v1 kind: Service metadata: labels: app: appmongo-ibm-mongodb-dev name: appmongo-ibm-mongodb-dev spec: ports: - name: ibm-mongodb-dev port: 27017 protocol: TCP targetPort: 27017 selector: app: appmongo-ibm-mongodb-dev type: LoadBalancer\n\n[root@ip-10-0-2-217 ~]# oc apply -f csipv.yaml persistentvolume/appmongo-ibm-mongodb-dev-datavolume created [root@ip-10-0-2-217 ~]# oc apply -f csipvc.yaml persistentvolumeclaim/appmongo-ibm-mongodb-dev-datavolume created [root@ip-10-0-2-217 ~]# oc apply -f secret.yaml secret/appmongo-ibm-mongodb-dev created [root@ip-10-0-2-217 ~]# oc apply -f awsservice.yaml service/appmongo-ibm-mongodb-dev created [root@ip-10-0-2-217 ~]# oc apply -f mongo\\_pod.yaml pod/appmongo-ibm-mongodb-dev created [root@ip-10-0-2-217 ~]#\n\n[root@ip-10-0-2-217 ~]# oc get service appmongo-ibm-mongodb-dev NAME TYPE CLUSTER-IP EXTERNAL-IP PORT(S) AGE appmongo-ibm-mongodb-dev LoadBalancer 172.30.43.162 a1765d068fc8911e9b07106df2fba1c0-125393943.us-east-2.elb.amazonaws.com 27017:31725/TCP 9d [root@ip-10-0-2-217 ~]#\n\nThe service is created by AWS. To get the address, check the service as shown in Example 7-27.\n\nAfter applying all yaml files as shown in Example 7-26, Mongodb is available in AWS.\n\n176 Red Hat OpenShift and IBM Cloud Paks on IBM Power Systems: Volume 1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.909307138693848, + "doc_id": "4075e4a8327cabe5a4656ff846ce608a07a5c03cf508bd623155dd106fe81662", + "edit_distance": 0.5584677419354839, + "f1_score": 0.9836065573770493, + "meteor": 0.8407112564389942, + "precision": 0.995260663507109, + "pred_md": "## 8.2 Host clusters\n\nIBM Storwize V7000 software supports host clusters starting with V7.7.1 and later. The host cluster allows a user to create a group of hosts to form a cluster. A cluster is treated as a single entity, which allows multiple hosts to access the same volumes.\n\nVolumes that are mapped to a host cluster are assigned to all members of the host cluster with the same SCSI ID.\n\nA typical user case is to define a host cluster that contains all of the WWPNs belonging to the hosts participating in a host operating system-based cluster, such as IBM PowerHAfi, and Microsoft Cluster Server (MSCS).\n\nThe following new commands were added to deal with host clusters:\n\n- /SM590000 lshostcluster\n- /SM590000 lshostclustermember\n- /SM590000 lshostclustervolumemap\n- /SM590000 mkhost (modified to put host in a host cluster on creation)\n- /SM590000 rmhostclustermember\n- /SM590000 rmhostcluster\n- /SM590000 rmvolumehostclustermap\n\n## 8.3 N-Port Virtualization ID support\n\nThe usage model for the Storwize V7000 is based on a two-way active/active node model. This is a pair of distinct control modules that share active/active access for any specific volume. These nodes each have their own Fibre Channel worldwide node name (WWNN). Therefore, ports that are presented from each node have a set of worldwide port names (WWPNs) that are presented to the fabric.\n\nTraditionally, if one node fails or is removed for some reason, the paths that are presented for volumes from that node go offline. In this case, it is up to the native O/S multipathing software to fail over from using both sets of WWPN to only those that remain online. Although this process is what multipathing software is designed to do, occasionally it can be problematic, particularly if paths are not seen as coming back online for some reason.\n\nStarting with Storwize V7000 V7.7, the system can be enabled into N\\_Port ID Virtualization (NPIV) mode. When NPIV mode is enabled on the Storwize V7000 system, ports do not come online until they are ready to service I/O, which improves host behavior around node unpends. In addition, path failures because of an offline node are masked from hosts and their multipathing driver do not need to perform any path recovery.\n\nWhen NPIV is enabled on Storwize V7000 nodes, each physical WWPN reports up to four virtual WWPNs, as listed in Table 8-1.\n\nTable 8-1 IBM Spectrum Virtualize NPIV Ports\n\nChapter 8. Hosts\n\n319", + "recall": 0.9722222222222222, + "true_md": "## 8.2 Host clusters\n\n## 8.3 N-Port Virtualization ID support\n\nIBM Storwize V7000 software supports host clusters starting with V7.7.1 and later. The host cluster allows a user to create a group of hosts to form a cluster. A cluster is treated as a single entity, which allows multiple hosts to access the same volumes. \n\nVolumes that are mapped to a host cluster are assigned to all members of the host cluster with the same SCSI ID. \n\nA typical user case is to define a host cluster that contains all of the WWPNs belonging to the hosts participating in a host operating system-based cluster, such as IBM PowerHAfi, and Microsoft Cluster Server (MSCS).\n\nThe following new commands were added to deal with host clusters:\n\nTraditionally, if one node fails or is removed for some reason, the paths that are presented for volumes from that node go offline. In this case, it is up to the native O/S multipathing software to fail over from using both sets of WWPN to only those that remain online. Although this process is what multipathing software is designed to do, occasionally it can be problematic, particularly if paths are not seen as coming back online for some reason. \n\nStarting with Storwize V7000 V7.7, the system can be enabled into N\\_Port ID Virtualization (NPIV) mode. When NPIV mode is enabled on the Storwize V7000 system, ports do not come online until they are ready to service I/O, which improves host behavior around node unpends. In addition, path failures because of an offline node are masked from hosts and their multipathing driver do not need to perform any path recovery. \n\nWhen NPIV is enabled on Storwize V7000 nodes, each physical WWPN reports up to four virtual WWPNs, as listed in Table 8-1.\n\nThis is a pair of distinct control modules that share active/active access for any specific volume. These nodes each have their own Fibre Channel worldwide node name (WWNN). Therefore, ports that are presented from each node have a set of worldwide port names (WWPNs) that are presented to the fabric.\n\nThe usage model for the Storwize V7000 is based on a two-way active/active node model. \n\nTable 8-1 IBM Spectrum Virtualize NPIV Ports\n\nChapter 8. Hosts 319\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> rmvolumehostclustermap\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> rmhostcluster\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> rmhostclustermember\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> mkhost (modified to put host in a host cluster on creation)\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> lshostclustervolumemap\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> lshostclustermember\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> lshostcluster" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8558866180864065, + "doc_id": "2ee2bbe901f572d154e10be74133963fd19126a06dce9fea50fab8e64da94a07", + "edit_distance": 0.15254237288135594, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9811042635931764, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "- 3. In the next window (see Figure 13-39), indicate which of these drives you want to convert to spares by selecting them. Select one drive that has the same capacity and RPM of all other drives within the same mdisk0. Then, click Next .\n\nFigure 13-39 Selecting a drive conversion\n\nFigure 13-39 Selecting a drive conversion\n\n- 4. The next window (see Figure 13-40) shows that all requested drives were converted to spares. Click Next to check whether the problem is fixed\n\nFigure 13-40 Status message of converted drives\n\nFigure 13-40 Status message of converted drives\n\nChapter 13. RAS, monitoring, and troubleshooting\n\n707", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "- 3. In the next window (see Figure 13-39), indicate which of these drives you want to convert to spares by selecting them. Select one drive that has the same capacity and RPM of all other drives within the same mdisk0. Then, click Next .\n\n- 4. The next window (see Figure 13-40) shows that all requested drives were converted to spares. Click Next to check whether the problem is fixed\n\nFigure 13-39 Selecting a drive conversion\n\nFigure 13-40 Status message of converted drives\n\nChapter 13. RAS, monitoring, and troubleshooting 707" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9240278921752679, + "doc_id": "488bcadc7ce35faaae8d82dd1fe375bce1da321712ff2df83f82cff5f830c27d", + "edit_distance": 0.08928571428571429, + "f1_score": 0.9865771812080537, + "meteor": 0.9805954845139528, + "precision": 0.9865771812080537, + "pred_md": "Figure 11-100 Multinode systems single inter-site link with only one remote copy port group\n\nFigure 11-100 Multinode systems single inter-site link with only one remote copy port group\n\nAs shown in Figure 11-100, there are two 4-node systems:\n\n- -System A\n- -System B\n\nA single remote copy port group 1 is configured on nodes A1, A2, A3, and A4 on System A, Site A; and on nodes B1, B2, B3, and B4 on System B, Site B. Although four ports are configured for remote copy group 1, only one Ethernet port in each remote copy port group on each system actively participates in the IP partnership process.\n\nPort selection is determined by a path configuration algorithm. The other ports play the role of standby ports.\n\nIf Node A1 fails in System A, the IP partnership selects one of the remaining ports that is configured with remote copy port group 1 from any of the nodes from either of the two I/O groups in System A. However, it might take some time (generally seconds) for discovery and path configuration logic to reestablish paths post failover. This process can cause partnerships to change to the Not\\_Present state.\n\nThis result causes remote copy relationships to stop. The administrator might need to manually verify the issues in the event log and start the relationships or remote copy consistency groups, if they do not autorecover. The details of the particular IP port actively participating in the IP partnership process is provided in the lsportip view (reported as used ).\n\nThis configuration has the following characteristics:\n\n- -Each node has the remote copy port group that is configured in both I/O groups. However, only one port in that remote copy port group remains active and participates in IP partnership on each system.\n\nChapter 11. Advanced Copy Services\n\n559", + "recall": 0.9865771812080537, + "true_md": "Figure 11-100 Multinode systems single inter-site link with only one remote copy port group\n\nAs shown in Figure 11-100, there are two 4-node systems: \n\nA single remote copy port group 1 is configured on nodes A1, A2, A3, and A4 on System \n\nA, Site A; and on nodes B1, B2, B3, and B4 on System B, Site B. Although four ports are configured for remote copy group 1, only one Ethernet port in each remote copy port group on each system actively participates in the IP partnership process. \n\nPort selection is determined by a path configuration algorithm. The other ports play the role of standby ports.\n\nIf Node A1 fails in System A, the IP partnership selects one of the remaining ports that is configured with remote copy port group 1 from any of the nodes from either of the two I/O groups in System A. However, it might take some time (generally seconds) for discovery and path configuration logic to reestablish paths post failover. This process can cause partnerships to change to the Not\\_Present state. \n\nThis result causes remote copy relationships to stop. The administrator might need to manually verify the issues in the event log and start the relationships or remote copy consistency groups, if they do not autorecover. The details of the particular IP port actively participating in the IP partnership process is provided in the lsportip view (reported as used ). \n\nThis configuration has the following characteristics:\n\n- – Each node has the remote copy port group that is configured in both I/O groups. However, only one port in that remote copy port group remains active and participates in IP partnership on each system. \n\n- – System B\n\n- – System A\n\nChapter 11. Advanced Copy Services 559" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8556418253533923, + "doc_id": "5b33f855dfe894719504170a88902f1ad7be38af6c3db79a61f1e0557fc2a229", + "edit_distance": 0.24358974358974358, + "f1_score": 0.9768976897689768, + "meteor": 0.8519416742966806, + "precision": 0.9932885906040269, + "pred_md": "Draft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n8459ch03.fm\n\n## 3.3.1 Features\n\nIBM Cloud Pak for Automation is a containerized automation software platform with pre-integrated automation capabilities such as workflow and decision automation, content management, document processing, and operational intelligence (Figure 3-7 on page 43). This enables organizations to digitize all styles of work with AI-infused business-oriented tools and built-in operational analytics for visibility and governance. This offering empowers business users to rapidly deliver applications and services at enterprise scale for greater cost savings and operational efficiencies. The IBM Cloud Pak for Automation can run anywhere (on-premises, on private and public clouds, and in pre-integrated systems) and is Red Hat OpenShift certified.\n\nFigure 3-7 IBM Cloud Pak for Automation\n\nFigure 3-7 IBM Cloud Pak for Automation\n\nSuccessful enterprises look for modernizing their business operations with intelligent automation lowering costs and increasing revenue as shown in Figure 3-8.\n\nFigure 3-8 IBM Cloud Pak for Automation benefits\n\nFigure 3-8 IBM Cloud Pak for Automation benefits\n\nAdditional features of the IBM Cloud Pak for Automation are:\n\n- /SM590000 Drive scale, speed, and assist with complex knowledge work.\n- /SM590000 Automate complex and less-structured business processes and optimize lighter customer experiences for task efficiency.\n- /SM590000 Drive growth with enhanced customer experiences and new business models.\n- /SM590000 Enable a few expert employees to create great customer experiences at scale.\n- /SM590000 Integrated automation platform.\n- /SM590000 Measure, in real time, the value of human and automated work across your business.\n\nChapter 3. IBM Cloud Paks - Middleware anywhere\n\n43", + "recall": 0.961038961038961, + "true_md": "Draft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n8459ch03.fm\n\n## 3.3.1 Features\n\nIBM Cloud Pak for Automation is a containerized automation software platform with pre-integrated automation capabilities such as workflow and decision automation, content management, document processing, and operational intelligence (Figure 3-7 on page 43). This enables organizations to digitize all styles of work with AI-infused business-oriented tools and built-in operational analytics for visibility and governance. This offering empowers business users to rapidly deliver applications and services at enterprise scale for greater cost savings and operational efficiencies. The IBM Cloud Pak for Automation can run anywhere (on-premises, on private and public clouds, and in pre-integrated systems) and is Red Hat OpenShift certified.\n\nSuccessful enterprises look for modernizing their business operations with intelligent automation lowering costs and increasing revenue as shown in Figure 3-8.\n\nAdditional features of the IBM Cloud Pak for Automation are:\n\nFigure 3-7 IBM Cloud Pak for Automation\n\nFigure 3-8 IBM Cloud Pak for Automation benefits\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Drive scale, speed, and assist with complex knowledge work.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Automate complex and less-structured business processes and optimize lighter customer experiences for task efficiency. \n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Drive growth with enhanced customer experiences and new business models. \n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Enable a few expert employees to create great customer experiences at scale.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Integrated automation platform.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Measure, in real time, the value of human and automated work across your business. \n\nChapter 3. IBM Cloud Paks - Middleware anywhere 43" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7817772697386702, + "doc_id": "49a75cc43b58024cdeb675bf1ad0db65dc5ed31719b2c2d8eb3dbeca631daba8", + "edit_distance": 0.5720930232558139, + "f1_score": 0.9560439560439561, + "meteor": 0.7428807649728763, + "precision": 0.9886363636363636, + "pred_md": "This pane gives the following options:\n\n- /SM590000 Quantity: Allows you to specify how many volumes are created.\n- /SM590000 Capacity: Capacity of the volume.\n- /SM590000 Name: Allows you to define the volume name.\n- /SM590000 Capacity savings: You can choose between None (fully provisioned volume), Thin-provisioned and Compressed.\n- /SM590000 Deduplicated: Thin-provisioned and Compressed volumes created in a data reduction pool can be deduplicated.\n\nIf you click Define another volume , the GUI displays a subpane in which you can define the configuration of another volume, as shown in Figure 7-19.\n\nFigure 7-19 Volume Details pane with two volume subpanes\n\nFigure 7-19 Volume Details pane with two volume subpanes\n\nIn this way, you can create volumes with different characteristics in a single invocation of the volume creation wizard.\n\n## Thin Provisioning pane\n\nIf you choose to create a thin-provisioned volume, a Thin Provisioning pane is displayed, as shown in Figure 7-20.\n\nFigure 7-20 Custom volume creation - Thin Provisioning pane\n\nFigure 7-20 Custom volume creation - Thin Provisioning pane\n\nChapter 7. Volumes\n\n267", + "recall": 0.925531914893617, + "true_md": "This pane gives the following options:\n\nIf you click Define another volume , the GUI displays a subpane in which you can define the configuration of another volume, as shown in Figure 7-19.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Deduplicated: Thin-provisioned and Compressed volumes created in a data reduction pool can be deduplicated.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Capacity savings: You can choose between None (fully provisioned volume), Thin-provisioned and Compressed. \n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Name: Allows you to define the volume name.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Capacity: Capacity of the volume.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Quantity: Allows you to specify how many volumes are created.\n\nFigure 7-19 Volume Details pane with two volume subpanes\n\nIn this way, you can create volumes with different characteristics in a single invocation of the volume creation wizard.\n\nIf you choose to create a thin-provisioned volume, a Thin Provisioning pane is displayed, as shown in Figure 7-20.\n\n## Thin Provisioning pane\n\nFigure 7-20 Custom volume creation – Thin Provisioning pane\n\nChapter 7. Volumes 267" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6770638358592271, + "doc_id": "d27908cdbdd59c82c906a7a1568beb1713bf3fcfecf196c35783453492edd6f6", + "edit_distance": 0.5391304347826087, + "f1_score": 0.9621621621621622, + "meteor": 0.6223001223969729, + "precision": 0.9888888888888889, + "pred_md": "8459ch02.fm\n\nDraft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n12\n\nRed Hat OpenShift and IBM Cloud Paks on IBM Power Systems: Volume 1\n\nCloud engineering focuses on cloud services, such as SaaS, PaaS, and IaaS. It is a multidisciplinary method that includes the foundation of cloud, implementation, cloud development-delivery lifecycle, and management. An orchestrator normally includes a range of technologies, products and components as shown in Figure 2-4.\n\nFigure 2-4 Example of Orchestration Components\n\nFigure 2-4 Example of Orchestration Components\n\nHere is an example of the cloud engineering disciplines that are addressed by an orchestrator:\n\n- /SM590000 Platform management\n- /SM590000 Virtualization services\n- /SM590000 Authentication and authorization services\n- /SM590000 Resources management\n- /SM590000 Disaster recovery\n- /SM590000 Workload resilience\n- /SM590000 Monitoring, usage, and accounting\n- /SM590000 Configuration services\n- /SM590000 Application life-cycle\n- /SM590000 Service automation\n- /SM590000 Service catalog", + "recall": 0.9368421052631579, + "true_md": "8459ch02.fm\n\nDraft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\nCloud engineering focuses on cloud services, such as SaaS, PaaS, and IaaS. It is a multidisciplinary method that includes the foundation of cloud, implementation, cloud development-delivery lifecycle, and management. An orchestrator normally includes a range of technologies, products and components as shown in Figure 2-4.\n\nFigure 2-4 Example of Orchestration Components\n\nHere is an example of the cloud engineering disciplines that are addressed by an orchestrator: \n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Platform management\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Virtualization services\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Authentication and authorization services\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Resources management\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Disaster recovery\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Workload resilience\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Monitoring, usage, and accounting\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Configuration services\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Application life-cycle\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Service automation\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Service catalog\n\n12 Red Hat OpenShift and IBM Cloud Paks on IBM Power Systems: Volume 1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8639310193752748, + "doc_id": "7ca44781af85ae9fc78d77c99f35fc451ff2cb01be0b103d7d759a82b376bc3f", + "edit_distance": 0.7563451776649747, + "f1_score": 0.9842931937172773, + "meteor": 0.901498916395923, + "precision": 0.9894736842105263, + "pred_md": "730\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\n- 4. The procedure to generate the snap on a Storwize V7000 system, including the most recent statesave from each node canister, starts. This process might take a few minutes (see Figure 13-70).\n\nFigure 13-70 Task detail window\n\nFigure 13-70 Task detail window\n\n## 13.9.2 Collecting logs using the CLI\n\nThe CLI can be used to collect and upload a support package as requested by IBM Support by performing the following steps:\n\n- 1. Log in to the CLI and issue the svc\\_snap command that matches the type of snap requested by IBM Support:\n- -Standard logs (type 1):\n- svc\\_snap upload pmr=ppppp,bbb,ccc gui1\n- -Standard logs plus one existing statesave (type 2):\n- svc\\_snap upload pmr=ppppp,bbb,ccc gui2\n- -Standard logs plus most recent statesave from each node (type 3):\n- svc\\_snap upload pmr=ppppp,bbb,ccc gui3\n- -Standard logs plus new statesaves:\n\nsvc\\_livedump -nodes all -yes svc\\_snap upload pmr=ppppp,bbb,ccc gui3", + "recall": 0.9791666666666666, + "true_md": "- 4. The procedure to generate the snap on a Storwize V7000 system, including the most recent statesave from each node canister, starts. This process might take a few minutes (see Figure 13-70).\n\n- 1. Log in to the CLI and issue the svc\\_snap command that matches the type of snap requested by IBM Support:\n\n- – Standard logs (type 1):\n\n- – Standard logs plus one existing statesave (type 2):\n\n- – Standard logs plus most recent statesave from each node (type 3):\n\n- – Standard logs plus new statesaves:\n\nsvc\\_livedump -nodes all -yes svc\\_snap upload pmr=ppppp,bbb,ccc gui3\n\nsvc\\_snap upload pmr=ppppp,bbb,ccc gui3\n\nsvc\\_snap upload pmr=ppppp,bbb,ccc gui2\n\nsvc\\_snap upload pmr=ppppp,bbb,ccc gui1\n\nThe CLI can be used to collect and upload a support package as requested by IBM Support by performing the following steps:\n\nFigure 13-70 Task detail window\n\n## 13.9.2 Collecting logs using the CLI\n\n730 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8532967306553888, + "doc_id": "4896f8a0c619982a676e0a7faa70091e59c0d09811ad7a6af273428c2dc43150", + "edit_distance": 0.6324324324324324, + "f1_score": 0.963350785340314, + "meteor": 0.8567887836721476, + "precision": 0.989247311827957, + "pred_md": "426\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\nYou can increase the synchronization rate by right-clicking the volume and selecting Modify Mirror Sync Rate .\n\nWhen copies are synchronized, Yes is displayed for both copies in the Synchronized column in the Volumes pane.\n\nFigure 10-14 Add volume copy dialog\n\nFigure 10-14 Add volume copy dialog\n\nYou can also track the synchronization process with Running tasks pane, as shown in Figure 10-15. After it reaches 100% and copies are in-sync, you can complete migration by deleting the source copy in a standard pool.\n\nFigure 10-15 Synchronization progress\n\nFigure 10-15 Synchronization progress\n\n- /SM590000 Migration strategy for fully allocated, thin, or compressed VDisk on DRP to any type of volume on a standard pool.\n- This process is the same as the previous method, but the target pool for a second copy is standard.\n- /SM590000 Migration strategy for a compressed volume on a standard pool to thin and deduplicated or compressed and deduplicated volume on a DRP.", + "recall": 0.9387755102040817, + "true_md": "You can increase the synchronization rate by right-clicking the volume and selecting Modify Mirror Sync Rate .\n\nWhen copies are synchronized, Yes is displayed for both copies in the Synchronized column in the Volumes pane. \n\nYou can also track the synchronization process with Running tasks pane, as shown in Figure 10-15. After it reaches 100% and copies are in-sync, you can complete migration by deleting the source copy in a standard pool.\n\nThis process is the same as the previous method, but the target pool for a second copy is standard.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Migration strategy for a compressed volume on a standard pool to thin and deduplicated or compressed and deduplicated volume on a DRP.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Migration strategy for fully allocated, thin, or compressed VDisk on DRP to any type of volume on a standard pool.\n\n426 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\nFigure 10-15 Synchronization progress\n\nFigure 10-14 Add volume copy dialog" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9437685016350277, + "doc_id": "9b7c4821fa0b9f4c2d6662ca3cf10f65695c0144781d147cf06f33bea95f495b", + "edit_distance": 0.7051509769094139, + "f1_score": 0.9900497512437813, + "meteor": 0.9026756515088143, + "precision": 0.995, + "pred_md": "## 7.8.1 Displaying volume information\n\nUse the lsvdisk command to display information about all volumes that are defined within the IBM Spectrum Virtualize environment. To display more d information about a specific volume, run the command again and provide the volume name or the volume ID as the command parameter, as shown in Example 7-1.\n\n## Example 7-1 The lsvdisk command\n\nIBM\\_Storwize:ITSO:superuser>lsvdisk -delim ' ' id name IO\\_group\\_id IO\\_group\\_name status mdisk\\_grp\\_id mdisk\\_grp\\_name capacity type FC\\_id FC\\_name RC\\_id RC\\_name vdisk\\_UID fc\\_map\\_count copy\\_count fast\\_write\\_state se\\_copy\\_count RC\\_change compressed\\_copy\\_count parent\\_mdisk\\_grp\\_id parent\\_mdisk\\_grp\\_name formatting encrypt volume\\_id volume\\_name function 0 A\\_MIRRORED\\_VOL\\_1 0 io\\_grp0 online many many 10.00GB many 6005076400F580049800000000000002 0 2 empty 0 no 0 many many no yes 0 A\\_MIRRORED\\_VOL\\_1 1 COMPRESSED\\_VOL\\_1 0 io\\_grp0 online 1 Pool1 15.00GB striped 6005076400F580049800000000000003 0 1 empty 0 no 1 1 Pool1 no yes 1 COMPRESSED\\_VOL\\_1 2 vdisk0 0 io\\_grp0 online 0 Pool0 10.00GB striped 6005076400F580049800000000000004 0 1 empty 0 no 0 0 Pool0 no yes 2 vdisk0 3 THIN\\_PROVISION\\_VOL\\_1 0 io\\_grp0 online 0 Pool0 100.00GB striped 6005076400F580049800000000000005 0 1 empty 1 no 0 0 Pool0 no yes 3 THIN\\_PROVISION\\_VOL\\_1 4 COMPRESSED\\_VOL\\_2 0 io\\_grp0 online 1 Pool1 30.00GB striped 6005076400F580049800000000000006 0 1 empty 0 no 1 1 Pool1 no yes 4 COMPRESSED\\_VOL\\_2 5 COMPRESS\\_VOL\\_3 0 io\\_grp0 online 1 Pool1 30.00GB striped 6005076400F580049800000000000007 0 1 empty 0 no 1 1 Pool1 no yes 5 COMPRESS\\_VOL\\_3 6 MIRRORED\\_SYNC\\_RATE\\_16 0 io\\_grp0 online many many 10.00GB many 6005076400F580049800000000000008 0 2 empty 0 no 0 many many no yes 6 MIRRORED\\_SYNC\\_RATE\\_16 7 THIN\\_PROVISION\\_MIRRORED\\_VOL 0 io\\_grp0 online many many 10.00GB many 6005076400F580049800000000000009 0 2 empty 2 no 0 many many no yes 7 THIN\\_PROVISION\\_MIRRORED\\_VOL 8 Tiger 0 io\\_grp0 online 0 Pool0 10.00GB striped 6005076400F580049800000000000010 0 1 not\\_empty 0 no 0 0 Pool0 yes yes 8 Tiger 12 vdisk0\\_restore 0 io\\_grp0 online 0 Pool0 10.00GB striped 6005076400F58004980000000000000E 0 1 empty 0 no 0 0 Pool0 no yes 12 vdisk0\\_restore 13 vdisk0\\_restore1 0 io\\_grp0 online 0 Pool0 10.00GB striped 6005076400F58004980000000000000F 0 1 empty 0 no 0 0 Pool0 no yes 13 vdisk0\\_restore1\n\n## 7.8.2 Creating a volume\n\nThe use of the mkvdisk command creates sequential, striped, or image mode volumes. When they are mapped to a host object, these objects are seen as disk drives on which the host can perform I/O operations.\n\nCreating an image mode disk: If you do not specify the -size parameter when you create an image mode disk, the entire MDisk capacity is used.\n\nYou must know the following information before you start to create the volume:\n\n- /SM590000 In which storage pool the volume will have its extents\n- /SM590000 From which I/O Group the volume will be accessed\n- /SM590000 Which IBM Spectrum Virtualize node will be the preferred node for the volume\n- /SM590000 Size of the volume\n- /SM590000 Name of the volume\n- /SM590000 Type of the volume\n- /SM590000 Whether this volume is to be managed by IBM Easy Tier to optimize its performance\n\nChapter 7. Volumes\n\n289", + "recall": 0.9851485148514851, + "true_md": "Use the lsvdisk command to display information about all volumes that are defined within the IBM Spectrum Virtualize environment. To display more d information about a specific volume, run the command again and provide the volume name or the volume ID as the command parameter, as shown in Example 7-1. \n\nThe use of the mkvdisk command creates sequential, striped, or image mode volumes. When they are mapped to a host object, these objects are seen as disk drives on which the host can perform I/O operations. \n\nCreating an image mode disk: If you do not specify the -size parameter when you create an image mode disk, the entire MDisk capacity is used.\n\nYou must know the following information before you start to create the volume:\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> In which storage pool the volume will have its extents\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> From which I/O Group the volume will be accessed\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Which IBM Spectrum Virtualize node will be the preferred node for the volume\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Size of the volume\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Name of the volume\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Type of the volume\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Whether this volume is to be managed by IBM Easy Tier to optimize its performance\n\nChapter 7. Volumes 289\n\nExample 7-1 The lsvdisk command\n\n## 7.8.1 Displaying volume information\n\n## 7.8.2 Creating a volume\n\nIBM\\_Storwize:ITSO:superuser>lsvdisk -delim ' ' id name IO\\_group\\_id IO\\_group\\_name status mdisk\\_grp\\_id mdisk\\_grp\\_name capacity type FC\\_id FC\\_name RC\\_id RC\\_name vdisk\\_UID fc\\_map\\_count copy\\_count fast\\_write\\_state se\\_copy\\_count RC\\_change compressed\\_copy\\_count parent\\_mdisk\\_grp\\_id parent\\_mdisk\\_grp\\_name formatting encrypt volume\\_id volume\\_name function 0 A\\_MIRRORED\\_VOL\\_1 0 io\\_grp0 online many many 10.00GB many 6005076400F580049800000000000002 0 2 empty 0 no 0 many many no yes 0 A\\_MIRRORED\\_VOL\\_1 1 COMPRESSED\\_VOL\\_1 0 io\\_grp0 online 1 Pool1 15.00GB striped 6005076400F580049800000000000003 0 1 empty 0 no 1 1 Pool1 no yes 1 COMPRESSED\\_VOL\\_1 2 vdisk0 0 io\\_grp0 online 0 Pool0 10.00GB striped 6005076400F580049800000000000004 0 1 empty 0 no 0 0 Pool0 no yes 2 vdisk0 3 THIN\\_PROVISION\\_VOL\\_1 0 io\\_grp0 online 0 Pool0 100.00GB striped 6005076400F580049800000000000005 0 1 empty 1 no 0 0 Pool0 no yes 3 THIN\\_PROVISION\\_VOL\\_1 4 COMPRESSED\\_VOL\\_2 0 io\\_grp0 online 1 Pool1 30.00GB striped 6005076400F580049800000000000006 0 1 empty 0 no 1 1 Pool1 no yes 4 COMPRESSED\\_VOL\\_2 5 COMPRESS\\_VOL\\_3 0 io\\_grp0 online 1 Pool1 30.00GB striped 6005076400F580049800000000000007 0 1 empty 0 no 1 1 Pool1 no yes 5 COMPRESS\\_VOL\\_3 6 MIRRORED\\_SYNC\\_RATE\\_16 0 io\\_grp0 online many many 10.00GB many 6005076400F580049800000000000008 0 2 empty 0 no 0 many many no yes 6 MIRRORED\\_SYNC\\_RATE\\_16 7 THIN\\_PROVISION\\_MIRRORED\\_VOL 0 io\\_grp0 online many many 10.00GB many 6005076400F580049800000000000009 0 2 empty 2 no 0 many many no yes 7 THIN\\_PROVISION\\_MIRRORED\\_VOL 8 Tiger 0 io\\_grp0 online 0 Pool0 10.00GB striped 6005076400F580049800000000000010 0 1 not\\_empty 0 no 0 0 Pool0 yes yes 8 Tiger 12 vdisk0\\_restore 0 io\\_grp0 online 0 Pool0 10.00GB striped 6005076400F58004980000000000000E 0 1 empty 0 no 0 0 Pool0 no yes 12 vdisk0\\_restore 13 vdisk0\\_restore1 0 io\\_grp0 online 0 Pool0 10.00GB striped 6005076400F58004980000000000000F 0 1 empty 0 no 0 0 Pool0 no yes 13 vdisk0\\_restore1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9482731765159458, + "doc_id": "dcf70e0296bea7689e8708aaaab3d47efef8574d9041a29701f212c7a4df9072", + "edit_distance": 0.2146118721461187, + "f1_score": 0.9777777777777776, + "meteor": 0.975639582984758, + "precision": 0.9821428571428571, + "pred_md": "92\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\nNote: Make sure that your PC or notebook has a network route to the system IP address that you specified. In particular, you can access the management GUI from any management console that is connected to the same subnet as the system. Enter the system IP address on a supported browser to access the management GUI.\n\n## 4.3 System setup\n\nThis section provides instructions about how to define the basic settings of the system with the system setup wizard, and how to add nodes and optional expansion enclosures.\n\n## 4.3.1 System setup wizard\n\nWhether you are redirected from your PC or notebook after completing system initialization or you browse to the management IP address manually, you must complete the system setup wizard to define the basic settings of the system.\n\nNote: The first time that you connect to the management GUI, you are prompted to accept untrusted certificates because the system certificates are self-signed.\n\nYou can install certificates that are signed by a trusted certificate authority after you complete system setup. For more information about how to perform this task, see 4.5, 'Configuring secure communications' on page 117.", + "recall": 0.9734513274336283, + "true_md": "Note: Make sure that your PC or notebook has a network route to the system IP address that you specified. In particular, you can access the management GUI from any management console that is connected to the same subnet as the system. Enter the system IP address on a supported browser to access the management GUI.\n\nThis section provides instructions about how to define the basic settings of the system with the system setup wizard, and how to add nodes and optional expansion enclosures.\n\nWhether you are redirected from your PC or notebook after completing system initialization or you browse to the management IP address manually, you must complete the system setup wizard to define the basic settings of the system.\n\nNote: The first time that you connect to the management GUI, you are prompted to accept untrusted certificates because the system certificates are self-signed.\n\nYou can install certificates that are signed by a trusted certificate authority after you complete system setup. For more information about how to perform this task, see 4.5, “Configuring secure communications” on page 117.\n\n## 4.3.1 System setup wizard\n\n## 4.3 System setup\n\n92 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8720534910999658, + "doc_id": "aea8c47b3ef3df043669d2f58040c746b359eec48437227c8a13d2bb2d317f84", + "edit_distance": 0.2747747747747748, + "f1_score": 0.9834710743801653, + "meteor": 0.9335480211093684, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "8459ch02.fm\n\nDraft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\nThe way to access web console is from a browser at https://<master\\_public\\_addr>:8443 , then, the system automatically redirected to a login page as shown in Figure 2-16. After providing the login credentials on the login page, the user gets a token to make API calls and the system shows the projects through the web console 9 .\n\nFigure 2-16 OpenShift Web Console Authentication Interface\n\nFigure 2-16 OpenShift Web Console Authentication Interface\n\nOpenShift Container Platform includes a service catalog (Figure 2-17), based on the Open Service Broker API (OSB API) for Kubernetes, offering to the developers a friendly user experience. Also, this allows users to connect any of their applications deployed in OpenShift Container Platform to a wide variety of service brokers.\n\nFigure 2-17 General view to the OpenShift 3.11 Service Catalog\n\nFigure 2-17 General view to the OpenShift 3.11 Service Catalog\n\nThe service catalog allows cluster administrators to integrate multiple platforms using a single API specification. The OpenShift Container Platform web console displays the cluster service\n\n9 OpenShift Authentication:\n\nhttps://docs.openshift.com/container-platform/3.5/admin\\_solutions/authentication.html\n\n32\n\nRed Hat OpenShift and IBM Cloud Paks on IBM Power Systems: Volume 1", + "recall": 0.967479674796748, + "true_md": "Draft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n8459ch02.fm\n\nThe way to access web console is from a browser at https://<master\\_public\\_addr>:8443 , then, the system automatically redirected to a login page as shown in Figure 2-16. After providing the login credentials on the login page, the user gets a token to make API calls and the system shows the projects through the web console$^{9}$.\n\nOpenShift Container Platform includes a service catalog (Figure 2-17), based on the Open Service Broker API (OSB API) for Kubernetes, offering to the developers a friendly user experience. Also, this allows users to connect any of their applications deployed in OpenShift Container Platform to a wide variety of service brokers.\n\nThe service catalog allows cluster administrators to integrate multiple platforms using a single API specification. The OpenShift Container Platform web console displays the cluster service \n\nFigure 2-17 General view to the OpenShift 3.11 Service Catalog\n\nFigure 2-16 OpenShift Web Console Authentication Interface\n\n32 Red Hat OpenShift and IBM Cloud Paks on IBM Power Systems: Volume 1\n\n9 OpenShift Authentication: \n\nhttps://docs.openshift.com/container-platform/3.5/admin\\_solutions/authentication.html" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9018490402269106, + "doc_id": "f40f7e6edef312d99d5ba0c14e83c1f6f0b8beadef135742df626a01018817ac", + "edit_distance": 0.32514177693761814, + "f1_score": 0.971563981042654, + "meteor": 0.9052928576846356, + "precision": 0.9855769230769231, + "pred_md": "The quota of background copy (configured on the intercluster link) is divided evenly between all nodes that are performing background copy for one of the eligible relationships. This allocation is made irrespective of the number of disks for which the node is responsible. Each node in turn divides its allocation evenly between the multiple relationships that are performing a background copy.\n\nThe default value of the background copy is 25MBps per volume.\n\nImportant: The background copy value is a system-wide parameter that can be changed dynamically, but only on a per-system basis and not on a per-relationship basis. Therefore, the copy rate of all relationships changes when this value is increased or decreased. In systems with many remote copy relationships, increasing this value might affect overall system or intercluster link performance. The background copy rate can be changed to 1 - 1000 MBps.\n\n## 11.6.16 Thin-provisioned background copy\n\nMM/GM relationships preserve the space-efficiency of the master. Conceptually, the background copy process detects a deallocated region of the master and sends a special zero buffer to the auxiliary.\n\nIf the auxiliary volume is thin-provisioned and the region is deallocated, the special buffer prevents a write and, therefore, an allocation. If the auxiliary volume is not thin-provisioned or the region in question is an allocated region of a thin-provisioned volume, a buffer of 'real' zeros is synthesized on the auxiliary and written as normal.\n\n## 11.6.17 Methods of synchronization\n\nThis section describes two methods that can be used to establish a synchronized relationship.\n\n## Full synchronization after creation\n\nThe full synchronization after creation method is the default method. It is the simplest method in that it requires no administrative activity apart from issuing the necessary commands. However, in certain environments, the available bandwidth can make this method unsuitable.\n\nUse the following command sequence for a single relationship:\n\n- /SM590000 Run mkrcrelationship without specifying the -sync option.\n- /SM590000 Run startrcrelationship without specifying the -clean option.\n\n## Synchronized before creation\n\nIn this method, the administrator must ensure that the master and auxiliary volumes contain identical data before creating the relationship by using the following technique:\n\n- /SM590000 Both disks are created with the security delete feature to make all data zero.\n- /SM590000 A complete tape image (or other method of moving data) is copied from one disk to the other disk.\n\nWith this technique, do not allow I/O on the master or auxiliary before the relationship is established. Then, the administrator must run the following commands:\n\n- /SM590000 Run mkrcrelationship with the -sync flag.\n- /SM590000 Run startrcrelationship without the -clean flag.\n\nChapter 11. Advanced Copy Services\n\n531", + "recall": 0.9579439252336449, + "true_md": "The quota of background copy (configured on the intercluster link) is divided evenly between all nodes that are performing background copy for one of the eligible relationships. This allocation is made irrespective of the number of disks for which the node is responsible. Each node in turn divides its allocation evenly between the multiple relationships that are performing a background copy.\n\nThe default value of the background copy is 25MBps per volume.\n\nImportant: The background copy value is a system-wide parameter that can be changed dynamically, but only on a per-system basis and not on a per-relationship basis. Therefore, the copy rate of all relationships changes when this value is increased or decreased. In systems with many remote copy relationships, increasing this value might affect overall system or intercluster link performance. The background copy rate can be changed to 1 - 1000 MBps.\n\nMM/GM relationships preserve the space-efficiency of the master. Conceptually, the background copy process detects a deallocated region of the master and sends a special zero buffer to the auxiliary.\n\nIf the auxiliary volume is thin-provisioned and the region is deallocated, the special buffer prevents a write and, therefore, an allocation. If the auxiliary volume is not thin-provisioned or the region in question is an allocated region of a thin-provisioned volume, a buffer of “real” zeros is synthesized on the auxiliary and written as normal.\n\nThis section describes two methods that can be used to establish a synchronized relationship.\n\nThe full synchronization after creation method is the default method. It is the simplest method in that it requires no administrative activity apart from issuing the necessary commands. However, in certain environments, the available bandwidth can make this method unsuitable. \n\nUse the following command sequence for a single relationship:\n\nIn this method, the administrator must ensure that the master and auxiliary volumes contain identical data before creating the relationship by using the following technique:\n\nWith this technique, do not allow I/O on the master or auxiliary before the relationship is established. Then, the administrator must run the following commands:\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Run startrcrelationship without the -clean flag.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Run mkrcrelationship with the -sync flag.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> A complete tape image (or other method of moving data) is copied from one disk to the other disk.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Both disks are created with the security delete feature to make all data zero.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Run mkrcrelationship without specifying the -sync option.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Run startrcrelationship without specifying the -clean option.\n\n## 11.6.16 Thin-provisioned background copy\n\n## 11.6.17 Methods of synchronization\n\n## Full synchronization after creation\n\n## Synchronized before creation\n\nChapter 11. Advanced Copy Services 531" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6008969751929306, + "doc_id": "3521489e5c729575b2b479a659cd292f0ec85b3e99dc1f38042c3beb3690a934", + "edit_distance": 0.3583815028901734, + "f1_score": 0.8941176470588237, + "meteor": 0.6734103264362985, + "precision": 0.9156626506024096, + "pred_md": "Chapter 8.\n\n## Hosts\n\nThis chapter describes the host configuration procedures that are required to attach supported hosts to the IBM Spectrum Virtualize system. It also introduces new concepts about Host Clusters, and N-Port Virtualization ID (NPIV) support from a host's perspective.\n\nThis chapter includes the following topics:\n\n- /SM590000 8.1, 'Host attachment overview' on page 318\n- /SM590000 8.2, 'Host clusters' on page 319\n- /SM590000 8.3, 'N-Port Virtualization ID support' on page 319\n- /SM590000 8.4, 'Hosts operations by using the GUI' on page 327\n- /SM590000 8.5, 'Hosts operations by using command-line interface' on page 373\n\n' Copyright IBM Corp. 2011, 2018, 2019. All rights reserved.\n\n317\n\n8", + "recall": 0.8735632183908046, + "true_md": "8\n\n## Hosts\n\nThis chapter describes the host configuration procedures that are required to attach supported hosts to the IBM Spectrum Virtualize system. It also introduces new concepts about Host Clusters, and N-Port Virtualization ID (NPIV) support from a host’s perspective.\n\nThis chapter includes the following topics:\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> 8.1, “Host attachment overview” on page 318\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> 8.2, “Host clusters” on page 319\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> 8.3, “N-Port Virtualization ID support” on page 319\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> 8.4, “Hosts operations by using the GUI” on page 327\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> 8.5, “Hosts operations by using command-line interface” on page 373\n\n' Copyright IBM Corp. 2011, 201 8, 2019. All rights reserved.\n\n317" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8705623593012797, + "doc_id": "b217f7e86d359fdcc28b70be2b1b85ad7f2b63b7310d73d23f209d5144e70e94", + "edit_distance": 0.26666666666666666, + "f1_score": 0.9480968858131488, + "meteor": 0.8867615701901566, + "precision": 0.9716312056737588, + "pred_md": "Chapter 9.\n\n## Storage migration\n\nThis chapter describes the steps that are involved in migrating data from an external storage system to the capacity of the Storwize V7000 by using the storage migration wizard. Migrating data from other storage systems to the Storwize V7000 consolidates storage. It also allows for IBM Spectrum Virtualize features, such as Easy Tier, thin provisioning, compression, encryption, storage replication, and the easy-to-use graphical user interface (GUI) to be realized across all volumes.\n\nStorage migration uses the volume mirroring functionality to allow reads and writes during the migration, and minimizing disruption and downtime. After the migration is complete, the existing system can be retired. Storwize V7000 supports migration through Fibre Channel and internet Small Computer Systems Interface (iSCSI) connections. Storage migration can be used to migrate data from other storage systems and IBM SAN Volume Controller.\n\nThis chapter includes the following topics:\n\n- /SM590000 9.1, 'Storage migration overview' on page 386\n- /SM590000 9.2, 'Storage migration wizard' on page 388\n\nNote: This chapter does not cover migration outside of the storage migration wizard. To migrate data outside of the wizard, you must use Import. For more information about the Import action, see Chapter 6, 'Storage pools' on page 191.\n\n' Copyright IBM Corp. 2011, 2018, 2019. All rights reserved.\n\n385\n\n9", + "recall": 0.9256756756756757, + "true_md": "## Storage migration\n\nThis chapter describes the steps that are involved in migrating data from an external storage system to the capacity of the Storwize V7000 by using the storage migration wizard. Migrating data from other storage systems to the Storwize V7000 consolidates storage. It also allows for IBM Spectrum Virtualize features, such as Easy Tier, thin provisioning, compression, encryption, storage replication, and the easy-to-use graphical user interface (GUI) to be realized across all volumes. \n\nStorage migration uses the volume mirroring functionality to allow reads and writes during the migration, and minimizing disruption and downtime. After the migration is complete, the existing system can be retired. Storwize V7000 supports migration through Fibre Channel and internet Small Computer Systems Interface (iSCSI) connections. Storage migration can be used to migrate data from other storage systems and IBM SAN Volume Controller.\n\nThis chapter includes the following topics:\n\nNote: This chapter does not cover migration outside of the storage migration wizard. To migrate data outside of the wizard, you must use Import. For more information about the Import action, see Chapter 6, “Storage pools” on page 191.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> 9.2, “Storage migration wizard” on page 388\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> 9.1, “Storage migration overview” on page 386\n\n' Copyright IBM Corp. 2011, 201 8, 2019. All rights reserved.\n\n385\n\n## 9" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9040129030395002, + "doc_id": "22faa85a475ba442b2b843690dde5fd6f1d7b9dd2602a410490777c3bbd0dea7", + "edit_distance": 0.8697247706422019, + "f1_score": 0.9848812095032398, + "meteor": 0.7625690367768795, + "precision": 0.9827586206896551, + "pred_md": "## 3.1 General planning rules\n\nImportant: At the time of this writing, the statements that are provided in this book are accurate but can change. Always verify any statements that are made in this book with the IBM Storwize V7000 supported hardware list, device driver, firmware, and recommended software levels information that are available at the following websites:\n\n- /SM590000 Support Information for Storwize V7000\n- /SM590000 IBM System Storage Interoperation Center (SSIC)\n\nTo maximize the benefit that is realized from the Storwize V7000, pre-installation planning must include several important steps. These steps ensure that the Storwize V7000 provides the best possible performance, reliability, and ease of management for your application needs. The correct configuration also helps minimize downtime by avoiding changes to the Storwize V7000 and the storage area network (SAN) environment to meet future growth needs.\n\nThis book is not intended to provide in-depth information about the described topics. For an enhanced analysis of advanced topics, see IBM System Storage SAN Volume Controller and Storwize V7000 Best Practices and Performance Guidelines , SG24-7521.\n\n## 3.1.1 Basic planning flow\n\nThe general rule of planning is to define your goals, and then, plan a solution that can be shown to meet these goals. Always remember to verify that each element of your configuration is supported.\n\nConsider the following points when planning for the Storwize V7000:\n\n- /SM590000 Collect and document the number of hosts (application servers) to attach to the Storwize V7000. Identify the traffic profile activity (read or write, sequential, or random), and the performance requirements (bandwidth and input/output [I/O] operations per second [IOPS]) for each host.\n- /SM590000 Decide whether you are going to use Storwize V7000 to virtualize external storage. If you do, collect and document the following items:\n- -Information on the back-end storage that exists in the environment and is intended to be virtualized by the Storwize V7000.\n- -Whether you must configure image mode volumes. If you want to use image mode volumes, decide whether and how you plan to migrate them into managed mode volumes.\n- -Information about the planned new back-end storage to be virtualized by the Storwize V7000.\n- -The required virtual storage capacity for fully provisioned and space-efficient (SE) volumes.\n- -The required storage capacity for:\n- GLYPH<129> Local mirror copy (volume mirroring)\n- GLYPH<129> Point-in-time copy (IBM FlashCopy)\n- GLYPH<129> Remote copy (Metro Mirror and Global Mirror)\n- GLYPH<129> Compressed volumes\n- GLYPH<129> Encrypted volumes\n\n44\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1", + "recall": 0.987012987012987, + "true_md": "## 3.1 General planning rules\n\n## 3.1.1 Basic planning flow\n\n- GLYPH<129> Encrypted volumes\n\n- GLYPH<129> Compressed volumes\n\n- GLYPH<129> Remote copy (Metro Mirror and Global Mirror)\n\n- GLYPH<129> Point-in-time copy (IBM FlashCopy)\n\n- GLYPH<129> Local mirror copy (volume mirroring)\n\n- – The required storage capacity for:\n\n- – The required virtual storage capacity for fully provisioned and space-efficient (SE) volumes.\n\n- – Information about the planned new back-end storage to be virtualized by the Storwize V7000.\n\n- – Whether you must configure image mode volumes. If you want to use image mode volumes, decide whether and how you plan to migrate them into managed mode volumes.\n\n- – Information on the back-end storage that exists in the environment and is intended to be virtualized by the Storwize V7000.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Decide whether you are going to use Storwize V7000 to virtualize external storage. If you do, collect and document the following items:\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Collect and document the number of hosts (application servers) to attach to the Storwize V7000. Identify the traffic profile activity (read or write, sequential, or random), and the performance requirements (bandwidth and input/output [I/O] operations per second [IOPS]) for each host.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> IBM System Storage Interoperation Center (SSIC) \n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Support Information for Storwize V7000 \n\nImportant: At the time of this writing, the statements that are provided in this book are accurate but can change. Always verify any statements that are made in this book with the IBM Storwize V7000 supported hardware list, device driver, firmware, and recommended software levels information that are available at the following websites:\n\nTo maximize the benefit that is realized from the Storwize V7000, pre-installation planning must include several important steps. These steps ensure that the Storwize V7000 provides the best possible performance, reliability, and ease of management for your application needs. The correct configuration also helps minimize downtime by avoiding changes to the Storwize V7000 and the storage area network (SAN) environment to meet future growth needs.\n\nThis book is not intended to provide in-depth information about the described topics. For an enhanced analysis of advanced topics, see IBM System Storage SAN Volume Controller and Storwize V7000 Best Practices and Performance Guidelines , SG24-7521.\n\nThe general rule of planning is to define your goals, and then, plan a solution that can be shown to meet these goals. Always remember to verify that each element of your configuration is supported.\n\nConsider the following points when planning for the Storwize V7000:\n\n44 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9415332868646726, + "doc_id": "16c7a1c76c763c74676ddac33729081dad3b66a6f737147df0e0e8ce01c311ea", + "edit_distance": 0.29411764705882354, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9724749032621391, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "8459ax01.fm\n\nDraft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n198\n\nRed Hat OpenShift and IBM Cloud Paks on IBM Power Systems: Volume 1\n\n- 2. On the Information dialog box, click Next as shown in Figure A-5 on page 198.\n\nFigure A-5 Information dialog box\n\nFigure A-5 Information dialog box\n\n- 3. On the Configuration dialog box, configure the following settings as shown in Figure A-6 on page 199:\n- a. Add to project : project1\n- b. Name : app1\n- c. Namespace : openshift\n- d. Memory limit : 512 Mi\n- e. Git repository URL : https://github.com/openshift/httpd-ex.git\n- f. Application hostname : app1-http-git", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "8459ax01.fm\n\nDraft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n- 2. On the Information dialog box, click Next as shown in Figure A-5 on page 198.\n\nFigure A-5 Information dialog box\n\n- 3. On the Configuration dialog box, configure the following settings as shown in Figure A-6 on page 199:\n\n- a. Add to project : project1\n\n- b. Name : app1\n\n- c. Namespace : openshift\n\n- d. Memory limit : 512 Mi\n\n- e. Git repository URL : https://github.com/openshift/httpd-ex.git\n\n- f. Application hostname : app1-http-git\n\n198 Red Hat OpenShift and IBM Cloud Paks on IBM Power Systems: Volume 1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.927547761028591, + "doc_id": "f412e65d16624c93bba60090fc930405fdff40a982201de482d7c58fde315010", + "edit_distance": 0.34120734908136485, + "f1_score": 0.9776357827476039, + "meteor": 0.9091190135624079, + "precision": 0.9935064935064936, + "pred_md": "## Object Size\n\nThe Object Size parameter determines the size of a storage object in kilobytes. Content Manager OnDemand, by default, segments and compresses stored data into 10 MB storage objects. The default of 10 MB is the recommended object size value.\n\nImportant : Setting the value too small or too large can adversely affect load performance.\n\nNote: The object size, which is defined here, must be equal to or larger than the size of the compressed storage objects that are defined in any application that is assigned to the application group.\n\n## Migrate Data from Cache pane\n\nThis section of the Advanced Storage Management window determines when documents and resources are migrated to archive storage. A storage set that is associated with a migration policy that uses archive media must be selected to enable migration to archive storage. The possible values are listed:\n\n- /SM590000 No: Data is never migrated from cache. This option is unavailable when a storage set that is associated with archive storage is selected for the application group.\n- /SM590000 When Data is Loaded: Data is migrated to archive storage when the load process runs because of a store command, such as Add Report ( ADDRPTOND ), Start Monitor ( STRMONOND ), or ARSLOAD .\n- /SM590000 Next Cache Migration: Data is migrated to archive storage the next time that Disk Storage Manager is run.\n- /SM590000 After Days in Cache: This value specifies the number of days that data remains in cache storage. After the data reaches the prescribed number of days in cache storage, the data is copied to archive storage the next time that Disk Storage Manager is run.\n\nASM is started with the STRASMOND command. The command must be run only in batch. For more information about running the STRASMOND command, see the IBM Content Manager OnDemand for i - Common Server Administration Guide , SC19-2792.\n\nChapter 5. Storage management\n\n129", + "recall": 0.9622641509433962, + "true_md": "## Object Size\n\nThe Object Size parameter determines the size of a storage object in kilobytes. Content Manager OnDemand, by default, segments and compresses stored data into 10 MB storage objects. The default of 10 MB is the recommended object size value.\n\nImportant : Setting the value too small or too large can adversely affect load performance.\n\nNote: The object size, which is defined here, must be equal to or larger than the size of the compressed storage objects that are defined in any application that is assigned to the application group.\n\nThis section of the Advanced Storage Management window determines when documents and resources are migrated to archive storage. A storage set that is associated with a migration policy that uses archive media must be selected to enable migration to archive storage. The possible values are listed:\n\nASM is started with the STRASMOND command. The command must be run only in batch. For more information about running the STRASMOND command, see the IBM Content Manager OnDemand for i - Common Server Administration Guide , SC19-2792.\n\n## Migrate Data from Cache pane\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> No: Data is never migrated from cache. This option is unavailable when a storage set that is associated with archive storage is selected for the application group.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> When Data is Loaded: Data is migrated to archive storage when the load process runs because of a store command, such as Add Report ( ADDRPTOND ), Start Monitor ( STRMONOND ), or ARSLOAD .\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Next Cache Migration: Data is migrated to archive storage the next time that Disk Storage Manager is run.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> After Days in Cache: This value specifies the number of days that data remains in cache storage. After the data reaches the prescribed number of days in cache storage, the data is copied to archive storage the next time that Disk Storage Manager is run.\n\nChapter 5. Storage management 129" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8243554265265172, + "doc_id": "ab98bd18cd6f2891826e473a302547c3a54bd9ede5431f89fbc2d784c5d61184", + "edit_distance": 0.31521739130434784, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9486770628283948, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "You can also display a Node Comparison by selecting the same information as for the cluster, and then switching the button, as shown in Figure A-1 and Figure A-2.\n\nFigure A-1 IBM Spectrum Virtualize Dashboard displaying System performance overview\n\nFigure A-1 IBM Spectrum Virtualize Dashboard displaying System performance overview\n\nFigure A-2 shows the display after switching the button.\n\nFigure A-2 IBM Spectrum Virtualize Dashboard displaying Nodes performance overview\n\nFigure A-2 IBM Spectrum Virtualize Dashboard displaying Nodes performance overview\n\nYou can also use real-time statistics to monitor CPU utilization, volume, interface, and MDisk bandwidth of your system and nodes. Each graph represents 5 minutes of collected statistics and provides a means of assessing the overall performance of your system.\n\nThe real-time statistics are available from the IBM Spectrum Virtualize GUI. Click Monitoring → Performance (as shown in Figure A-3) to open the Performance Monitoring window.\n\nFigure A-3 Selecting performance pane in the monitoring menu\n\nFigure A-3 Selecting performance pane in the monitoring menu\n\nAppendix A. Performance data and statistics gathering\n\n749", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "You can also display a Node Comparison by selecting the same information as for the cluster, and then switching the button, as shown in Figure A-1 and Figure A-2.\n\nFigure A-2 shows the display after switching the button.\n\nYou can also use real-time statistics to monitor CPU utilization, volume, interface, and MDisk bandwidth of your system and nodes. Each graph represents 5 minutes of collected statistics and provides a means of assessing the overall performance of your system.\n\nThe real-time statistics are available from the IBM Spectrum Virtualize GUI. Click Monitoring → Performance (as shown in Figure A-3) to open the Performance Monitoring window.\n\nFigure A-1 IBM Spectrum Virtualize Dashboard displaying System performance overview\n\nFigure A-2 IBM Spectrum Virtualize Dashboard displaying Nodes performance overview\n\nFigure A-3 Selecting performance pane in the monitoring menu\n\nAppendix A. Performance data and statistics gathering 749" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8696178351332858, + "doc_id": "cbb4a416c3ac24a64d2e712b7de5a12b5c1bc58ab40212ec5c455fec166e7366", + "edit_distance": 0.4616858237547893, + "f1_score": 0.9766355140186915, + "meteor": 0.8367420868244586, + "precision": 0.990521327014218, + "pred_md": "## 12.1 Planning for encryption\n\nData-at-rest encryption is a powerful tool that can help organizations protect the confidentiality of sensitive information. However, encryption, like any other tool, must be used correctly to fulfill its purpose.\n\nMultiple drivers exist for an organization to implement data-at-rest encryption. These can be internal, such as protection of confidential company data, and ease of storage sanitization, or external, such as compliance with legal requirements or contractual obligations.\n\nTherefore, before configuring encryption on the storage, the organization defines its needs and, if it is decided that data-at-rest encryption is required, includes it in the security policy. Without defining the purpose of the particular implementation of data-at-rest encryption, it is difficult or impossible to choose the best approach to implement encryption and verify whether the implementation meets the set of goals.\n\nThe following items are worth considering during the design of a solution that includes data-at-rest encryption:\n\n- /SM590000 Legal requirements\n- /SM590000 Contractual obligations\n- /SM590000 Organization's security policy\n- /SM590000 Attack vectors\n- /SM590000 Expected resources of an attacker\n- /SM590000 Encryption key management\n- /SM590000 Physical security\n\nMultiple regulations mandate data-at-rest encryption, from processing of Sensitive Personal Information to the guidelines of the Payment Card Industry. If any regulatory or contractual obligations govern the data that is held on the storage system, they often provide a wide and detailed range of requirements and characteristics that need to be realized by that system. Apart from mandating data-at-rest encryption, these documents might contain requirements concerning encryption key management.\n\nAnother document that should be consulted when planning data-at-rest encryption is the organization's security policy.\n\nThe outcome of a data-at-rest encryption planning session answers the following questions:\n\n- 1. What are the goals that the organization wants to realize by using data-at-rest encryption?\n- 2. How will data-at-rest encryption be implemented?\n- 3. How can it be demonstrated that the proposed solution realizes the set of goals?\n\n## 12.2 Defining encryption of data at-rest\n\nEncryption is the process of encoding data so that only authorized parties can read it. Secret keys are used to encode the data according to well-known algorithms.\n\nEncryption of data-at-rest as implemented in IBM Spectrum Virtualize is defined by the following characteristics:\n\n- /SM590000 Data-at-rest means that the data is encrypted on the end device (drives).\n- /SM590000 The algorithm that is used is the Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) US government standard from 2001.\n\n604\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1", + "recall": 0.9631336405529954, + "true_md": "## 12.1 Planning for encryption\n\n## 12.2 Defining encryption of data at-rest\n\nData-at-rest encryption is a powerful tool that can help organizations protect the confidentiality of sensitive information. However, encryption, like any other tool, must be used correctly to fulfill its purpose.\n\nMultiple drivers exist for an organization to implement data-at-rest encryption. These can be internal, such as protection of confidential company data, and ease of storage sanitization, or external, such as compliance with legal requirements or contractual obligations.\n\nTherefore, before configuring encryption on the storage, the organization defines its needs and, if it is decided that data-at-rest encryption is required, includes it in the security policy. Without defining the purpose of the particular implementation of data-at-rest encryption, it is difficult or impossible to choose the best approach to implement encryption and verify whether the implementation meets the set of goals.\n\nThe following items are worth considering during the design of a solution that includes data-at-rest encryption:\n\nMultiple regulations mandate data-at-rest encryption, from processing of Sensitive Personal Information to the guidelines of the Payment Card Industry. If any regulatory or contractual obligations govern the data that is held on the storage system, they often provide a wide and detailed range of requirements and characteristics that need to be realized by that system. Apart from mandating data-at-rest encryption, these documents might contain requirements concerning encryption key management.\n\nAnother document that should be consulted when planning data-at-rest encryption is the organization’s security policy.\n\nThe outcome of a data-at-rest encryption planning session answers the following questions:\n\nEncryption is the process of encoding data so that only authorized parties can read it. Secret keys are used to encode the data according to well-known algorithms.\n\nEncryption of data-at-rest as implemented in IBM Spectrum Virtualize is defined by the following characteristics:\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> The algorithm that is used is the Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) US government standard from 2001.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Data-at-rest means that the data is encrypted on the end device (drives).\n\n- 3. How can it be demonstrated that the proposed solution realizes the set of goals?\n\n- 2. How will data-at-rest encryption be implemented?\n\n- 1. What are the goals that the organization wants to realize by using data-at-rest encryption?\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Physical security\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Encryption key management\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Expected resources of an attacker\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Attack vectors\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Organization’s security policy\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Contractual obligations\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Legal requirements\n\n604 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.960897848315165, + "doc_id": "dc15eba8a60e62b23ede10399bf03b8acbb0831871f3d554d2696ce912af3859", + "edit_distance": 0.07238605898123325, + "f1_score": 0.9569892473118279, + "meteor": 0.9492996311696341, + "precision": 0.9621621621621622, + "pred_md": "```\n/* */ /* DESCRIPTION: This program will delete all non-AFP records (or */ /* records that do not begin with X(5A) from the */ /* output object before giving control back to ACIF */ /* */ /*********************************************************************/ /* Standard acif exit header file */ /************************************************/ */ #include \"apkexits.h\" long OUTEXIT( OUTEXIT_PARMS *exitstruc ) { /************************************************************************/ /* Delete all records from the output that do not begin with Hex '5A' */ /************************************************************************/ if(exitstruc->eof != ACIF_EOF) { if(exitstruc->record[0] == 0x5A) exitstruc->request = ACIF_USE; else exitstruc->request = ACIF_DELETE; } return( 0 ); }\n```\n\n## 11.2.5 Resource exit\n\nIf you want to prevent ACIF from collecting a specific type of resource, such as overlays, you can use the ACIF restype parameter. However, if you want to prevent ACIF from writing a specific resource to the resource file, use the resource exit.\n\nThe resource exit is best used to control resources at the file name level. For example, you want to exclude particular fonts from the resource file. You can code this exit program to contain a table of the fonts that you want to exclude and filter them from the resource file. The program that is invoked at this exit is defined in the ACIF resexit parameter.\n\nACIF does not start the exit for the following resource types:\n\n- /SM590000 Page definitions: The pagedef is a required resource for converting line data to AFP and it is never included in the resource file.\n- /SM590000 Form definitions: The formdef is a required resource for processing print files. If you do not want the formdef to be included in the resource file, specify restype=none or explicitly exclude the formdef from the restype list.\n- /SM590000 Coded fonts: If you specify MCF2REF=CF , ACIF writes coded fonts to the resource file if they are included in the restype list. The default is MCF2REF=CPCS ; therefore, ACIF does not write coded fonts to the resource file.\n\n## 11.2.6 Debugging input user exit programs\n\nWhen you work with an input exit, you must know how the exit changed your data before you load it. A way to determine how the exit changed the data is to set up ACIF to run in stand-alone mode (not called from arsload ).\n\nChapter 11. Exits\n\n247", + "recall": 0.9518716577540107, + "true_md": "/* */ /* DESCRIPTION: This program will delete all non-AFP records (or */ /* records that do not begin with X(5A) from the */ /* output object before giving control back to ACIF */ /* */ /*********************************************************************/ /* Standard acif exit header file */ /************************************************/ */ #include \"apkexits.h\" long OUTEXIT( OUTEXIT\\_PARMS *exitstruc ) { /************************************************************************/ /* Delete all records from the output that do not begin with Hex '5A' */ /************************************************************************/ if(exitstruc->eof != ACIF\\_EOF) { if(exitstruc->record[0] == 0x5A) exitstruc->request = ACIF\\_USE; else exitstruc->request = ACIF\\_DELETE; } return( 0 ); }\n\nIf you want to prevent ACIF from collecting a specific type of resource, such as overlays, you can use the ACIF restype parameter. However, if you want to prevent ACIF from writing a specific resource to the resource file, use the resource exit.\n\nThe resource exit is best used to control resources at the file name level. For example, you want to exclude particular fonts from the resource file. You can code this exit program to contain a table of the fonts that you want to exclude and filter them from the resource file. The program that is invoked at this exit is defined in the ACIF resexit parameter.\n\nACIF does not start the exit for the following resource types:\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Page definitions: The pagedef is a required resource for converting line data to AFP and it is never included in the resource file.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Form definitions: The formdef is a required resource for processing print files. If you do not want the formdef to be included in the resource file, specify restype=none or explicitly exclude the formdef from the restype list.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Coded fonts: If you specify MCF2REF=CF , ACIF writes coded fonts to the resource file if they are included in the restype list. The default is MCF2REF=CPCS ; therefore, ACIF does not write coded fonts to the resource file. \n\n## 11.2.5 Resource exit\n\n## 11.2.6 Debugging input user exit programs\n\nWhen you work with an input exit, you must know how the exit changed your data before you load it. A way to determine how the exit changed the data is to set up ACIF to run in stand-alone mode (not called from arsload ). \n\nChapter 11. Exits 247" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8908481713520137, + "doc_id": "dc7c65f7cfaf37ae4320b7da5fd28567f8ae3f8c9f4c1a62d4d1ad09961f4e3b", + "edit_distance": 0.6947115384615384, + "f1_score": 0.9798270893371759, + "meteor": 0.7794174757281553, + "precision": 0.9941520467836257, + "pred_md": "522\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\nFigure 11-88 Write on volume in Metro Mirror relationship\n\nFigure 11-88 Write on volume in Metro Mirror relationship\n\nHowever, this process also means that the application is exposed to the latency and bandwidth limitations (if any) of the communication link between the master and auxiliary volumes. This process might lead to unacceptable application performance, particularly when placed under peak load. Therefore, the use of traditional Fibre Channel Metro Mirror has distance limitations that are based on your performance requirements. IBM Spectrum Virtualize does not support more than 300 km (186.4 miles).\n\n## 11.6.7 Metro Mirror features\n\nThe IBM Spectrum Virtualize Metro Mirror function supports the following features:\n\n- /SM590000 Synchronous remote copy of volumes that are dispersed over metropolitan distances.\n- /SM590000 The Metro Mirror relationships between volume pairs, with each volume in a pair that is managed by a Storwize V7000 system or IBM SAN Volume Controller system (requires V6.3.0 or later).\n- /SM590000 Supports intracluster Metro Mirror where both volumes belong to the same system (and I/O Group).\n- /SM590000 IBM Spectrum Virtualize supports intercluster Metro Mirror where each volume belongs to a separate system. You can configure a specific system for partnership with another system. All intercluster Metro Mirror processing occurs between two IBM Spectrum Virtualize systems that are configured in a partnership.\n- /SM590000 Intercluster and intracluster Metro Mirror can be used concurrently.\n- /SM590000 IBM Spectrum Virtualize does not require that a control network or fabric is installed to manage Metro Mirror. For intercluster Metro Mirror, the system maintains a control link between two systems. This control link is used to control the state and coordinate updates at either end. The control link is implemented on top of the same FC fabric connection that the system uses for Metro Mirror I/O.\n- /SM590000 IBM Spectrum Virtualize implements a configuration model that maintains the Metro Mirror configuration and state through major events, such as failover, recovery, and resynchronization, to minimize user configuration action through these events.", + "recall": 0.9659090909090909, + "true_md": "Figure 11-88 Write on volume in Metro Mirror relationship\n\nHowever, this process also means that the application is exposed to the latency and bandwidth limitations (if any) of the communication link between the master and auxiliary volumes. This process might lead to unacceptable application performance, particularly when placed under peak load. Therefore, the use of traditional Fibre Channel Metro Mirror has distance limitations that are based on your performance requirements. IBM Spectrum Virtualize does not support more than 300 km (186.4 miles).\n\nThe IBM Spectrum Virtualize Metro Mirror function supports the following features: \n\n## 11.6.7 Metro Mirror features\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> IBM Spectrum Virtualize implements a configuration model that maintains the Metro Mirror configuration and state through major events, such as failover, recovery, and resynchronization, to minimize user configuration action through these events.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> IBM Spectrum Virtualize does not require that a control network or fabric is installed to manage Metro Mirror. For intercluster Metro Mirror, the system maintains a control link between two systems. This control link is used to control the state and coordinate updates at either end. The control link is implemented on top of the same FC fabric connection that the system uses for Metro Mirror I/O.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Intercluster and intracluster Metro Mirror can be used concurrently.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> IBM Spectrum Virtualize supports intercluster Metro Mirror where each volume belongs to a separate system. You can configure a specific system for partnership with another system. All intercluster Metro Mirror processing occurs between two IBM Spectrum Virtualize systems that are configured in a partnership. \n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Supports intracluster Metro Mirror where both volumes belong to the same system (and I/O Group).\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> The Metro Mirror relationships between volume pairs, with each volume in a pair that is managed by a Storwize V7000 system or IBM SAN Volume Controller system (requires V6.3.0 or later).\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Synchronous remote copy of volumes that are dispersed over metropolitan distances.\n\n522 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9287018984050044, + "doc_id": "8bebaf62a740add201d9a8261fec947440313e78861a66633221fc4e9157cd53", + "edit_distance": 0.3512658227848101, + "f1_score": 0.9747292418772565, + "meteor": 0.8913562681288024, + "precision": 0.9926470588235294, + "pred_md": "Although there are four I/O groups (eight nodes) in System A, any two I/O groups at maximum are supported to be configured for IP partnerships. If Node A1 fails in System A, IP partnership continues using one of the ports that is configured in remote copy port group from any of the nodes from either of the two I/O groups in System A.\n\nHowever, it might take some time for discovery and path configuration logic to reestablish paths post-failover, and this delay might cause partnerships to change to the Not\\_Present state.\n\nThis process can lead to remote copy relationships stopping, and the administrator must manually start them if the relationships do not auto-recover. The details of which particular IP port is actively participating in IP partnership process is provided in lsportip output (reported as used ).\n\nThis configuration has the following characteristics:\n\n- /SM590000 Each node has the remote copy port group that is configured in both the I/O groups that are identified for participating in IP Replication. However, only one port in that remote copy port group remains active on each system and participates in IP Replication.\n- /SM590000 If the Node A1 in System A or the Node B2 in System B fails in the system, the IP partnerships trigger discovery and continue servicing the I/O from the failover ports.\n- /SM590000 The discovery mechanism that is triggered because of failover might introduce a delay wherein the partnerships momentarily change to the Not\\_Present state and then recover.\n- /SM590000 The bandwidth of the single link is used completely.\n\nChapter 11. Advanced Copy Services\n\n561", + "recall": 0.9574468085106383, + "true_md": "Although there are four I/O groups (eight nodes) in System A, any two I/O groups at maximum are supported to be configured for IP partnerships. If Node A1 fails in System A, IP partnership continues using one of the ports that is configured in remote copy port group from any of the nodes from either of the two I/O groups in System A. \n\nHowever, it might take some time for discovery and path configuration logic to reestablish paths post-failover, and this delay might cause partnerships to change to the Not\\_Present state. \n\nThis process can lead to remote copy relationships stopping, and the administrator must manually start them if the relationships do not auto-recover. The details of which particular IP port is actively participating in IP partnership process is provided in lsportip output (reported as used ). \n\nThis configuration has the following characteristics: \n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> The bandwidth of the single link is used completely. \n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> The discovery mechanism that is triggered because of failover might introduce a delay wherein the partnerships momentarily change to the Not\\_Present state and then recover.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> If the Node A1 in System A or the Node B2 in System B fails in the system, the IP partnerships trigger discovery and continue servicing the I/O from the failover ports.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Each node has the remote copy port group that is configured in both the I/O groups that are identified for participating in IP Replication. However, only one port in that remote copy port group remains active on each system and participates in IP Replication. \n\nChapter 11. Advanced Copy Services 561" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.10510864419178163, + "doc_id": "1fadb433bffa31c43817d1f6bafbb10dff53422ad046d391ed560ebef13d9f83", + "edit_distance": 0.8045685279187818, + "f1_score": 0.6509803921568628, + "meteor": 0.41312096590835207, + "precision": 0.9880952380952381, + "pred_md": "744\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\nAs with system statistics, node statistics help you to evaluate whether the node is operating within normal performance metrics.\n\nReal-time performance monitoring gathers the following system-level performance statistics:\n\n- /SM590000 CPU utilization\n- /SM590000 Port utilization and I/O rates\n- /SM590000 Volume and MDisk I/O rates\n- /SM590000 Bandwidth\n- /SM590000 Latency\n\nReal-time statistics are not a configurable option and cannot be disabled.\n\n## Real-time performance monitoring with the CLI\n\nThe lsnodecanisterstats and lssystemstats commands are available for monitoring the statistics through the CLI.\n\nThe lsnodecanisterstats command provides performance statistics for the nodes that are part of a clustered system, as shown in Example A-4. The output is truncated and shows only part of the available statistics. You can also specify a node name in the command to limit the output for a specific node.\n\nExample A-4 The lsnodecanisterstats command output", + "recall": 0.4853801169590643, + "true_md": "As with system statistics, node statistics help you to evaluate whether the node is operating within normal performance metrics.\n\nReal-time performance monitoring gathers the following system-level performance statistics:\n\nReal-time statistics are not a configurable option and cannot be disabled. \n\nThe lsnodecanisterstats and lssystemstats commands are available for monitoring the statistics through the CLI. \n\nThe lsnodecanisterstats command provides performance statistics for the nodes that are part of a clustered system, as shown in Example A-4. The output is truncated and shows only part of the available statistics. You can also specify a node name in the command to limit the output for a specific node.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> CPU utilization\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Port utilization and I/O rates\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Volume and MDisk I/O rates\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Bandwidth\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Latency\n\n## Real-time performance monitoring with the CLI\n\nIBM\\_Storwize:ITSO-V7k:superuser>lsnodecanisterstats node\\_id node\\_name stat\\_name stat\\_current stat\\_peak stat\\_peak\\_time 1 node1 compression\\_cpu\\_pc 14 14 181101214224 1 node1 cpu\\_pc 2 2 181101214224 1 node1 fc\\_mb 0 0 181101214224 1 node1 fc\\_io 5 5 181101214224 1 node1 sas\\_mb 122 158 181101213804 1 node1 sas\\_io 485 627 181101213804 1 node1 iscsi\\_mb 0 0 181101214224 1 node1 iscsi\\_io 0 0 181101214224 1 node1 write\\_cache\\_pc 13 13 181101214224 1 node1 total\\_cache\\_pc 79 80 181101213959 1 node1 vdisk\\_mb 0 0 181101214224 1 node1 vdisk\\_io 0 0 181101214224 1 node1 vdisk\\_ms 0 0 181101214224 1 node1 mdisk\\_mb 52 55 181101213934 1 node1 mdisk\\_io 205 217 181101213934 1 node1 mdisk\\_ms 9 10 181101214219 1 node1 drive\\_mb 123 158 181101213804 1 node1 drive\\_io 485 627 181101213804 ... 2 node2 mdisk\\_w\\_ms 8 11 181101214131 2 node2 drive\\_r\\_mb 41 50 181101214041 2 node2 drive\\_r\\_io 166 242 181101214041 2 node2 drive\\_r\\_ms 8 14 181101214041 2 node2 drive\\_w\\_mb 254 271 181101214121 2 node2 drive\\_w\\_io 1011 1071 181101214121 2 node2 drive\\_w\\_ms 14 17 181101213851 2 node2 iplink\\_mb 0 0 181101214226 2 node2 iplink\\_io 0 0 181101214226 2 node2 iplink\\_comp\\_mb 0 0 181101214226 2 node2 cloud\\_up\\_mb 0 0 181101214226 2 node2 cloud\\_up\\_ms 0 0 181101214226\n\nExample A-4 The lsnodecanisterstats command output\n\n744 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9875358530665703, + "doc_id": "9eaa1e4118817f7c4eb8d0d6fb110c0e634edc64dc7a52d91e6af9b8ac6eab33", + "edit_distance": 0.02962962962962963, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9996703278209622, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "It is possible to demonstrate the potential benefit of IBM Easy Tier in the environment before installing different drives. When IBM Easy Tier is turned on, the algorithm produces the statistic file that can be offloaded from IBM Storwize V7000.\n\nThe IBM Storage Tier Advisor Tool (STAT) can be used to create a summary report that uses the statistic file offloaded from IBM Storwize V7000.\n\nThe STAT tool is available at this website.\n\n## 2.5.18 Encryption\n\nIBM Storwize V7000 provides optional encryption of data at rest, which protects against the potential exposure of sensitive user data and user metadata that is stored on discarded, lost, or stolen storage devices. Encryption of system data and system metadata is not required, so system data and metadata are not encrypted.\n\nPlanning for encryption involves purchasing a licensed function and then activating and enabling the function on the system. A license is required to encrypt data that is stored on drives. When encryption is activated and enabled on the system, valid encryption keys must be present on the system when the system unlocks the drives or the user generates a key.\n\nIBM Spectrum Virtualize V7.4, hardware encryption was introduced, with software encryption introduced in V7.6. Encryption keys can be managed by IBM SKLM or stored on USB flash drives that are attached to a minimum of one of the nodes. Since V8.1, a combination of SKLM and USB key repositories can be used.\n\nIBM Security Key Lifecycle Manager is an IBM solution that provides the infrastructure and processes to locally create, distribute, backup, and manage the lifecycle of encryption keys and certificates. Before activating and enabling encryption, you must determine the method of accessing key information during times when the system requires an encryption key to be present.\n\nWhen Security Key Lifecycle Manager is used as a key manager for encryption, you can run into a deadlock situation when the key servers are hosted on encrypted storage provided by the IBM Storwize V7000. That is, if the storage that is used by these SKLM servers is allocated from the encrypted pool on the same Storwize V7000. To avoid a deadlock situation, ensure that the IBM Storwize V7000 node canisters can communicate with an encryption server to get the unlock key after a power-on or restart scenario.\n\nData encryption is protected by the Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) algorithm that uses a 256-bit symmetric encryption key in XTS mode, as defined in the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) 1619-2007 standard as XTS-AES-256. That data encryption key is protected by a 256-bit AES key wrap when stored in non-volatile form.\n\n## 2.5.19 iSCSI\n\niSCSI is an alternative means of attaching hosts and external storage controllers to the IBM Storwize V7000. Within IBM Spectrum Virtualize release 7.7, IBM introduced software capabilities to allow the underlying virtualized storage to attach to IBM Storwize V7000 by using the iSCSI protocol.\n\n34\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "It is possible to demonstrate the potential benefit of IBM Easy Tier in the environment before installing different drives. When IBM Easy Tier is turned on, the algorithm produces the statistic file that can be offloaded from IBM Storwize V7000.\n\nThe IBM Storage Tier Advisor Tool (STAT) can be used to create a summary report that uses the statistic file offloaded from IBM Storwize V7000.\n\nThe STAT tool is available at this website.\n\nIBM Storwize V7000 provides optional encryption of data at rest, which protects against the potential exposure of sensitive user data and user metadata that is stored on discarded, lost, or stolen storage devices. Encryption of system data and system metadata is not required, so system data and metadata are not encrypted.\n\nPlanning for encryption involves purchasing a licensed function and then activating and enabling the function on the system. A license is required to encrypt data that is stored on drives. When encryption is activated and enabled on the system, valid encryption keys must be present on the system when the system unlocks the drives or the user generates a key.\n\nIBM Spectrum Virtualize V7.4, hardware encryption was introduced, with software encryption introduced in V7.6. Encryption keys can be managed by IBM SKLM or stored on USB flash drives that are attached to a minimum of one of the nodes. Since V8.1, a combination of SKLM and USB key repositories can be used. \n\nIBM Security Key Lifecycle Manager is an IBM solution that provides the infrastructure and processes to locally create, distribute, backup, and manage the lifecycle of encryption keys and certificates. Before activating and enabling encryption, you must determine the method of accessing key information during times when the system requires an encryption key to be present.\n\nWhen Security Key Lifecycle Manager is used as a key manager for encryption, you can run into a deadlock situation when the key servers are hosted on encrypted storage provided by the IBM Storwize V7000. That is, if the storage that is used by these SKLM servers is allocated from the encrypted pool on the same Storwize V7000. To avoid a deadlock situation, ensure that the IBM Storwize V7000 node canisters can communicate with an encryption server to get the unlock key after a power-on or restart scenario.\n\nData encryption is protected by the Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) algorithm that uses a 256-bit symmetric encryption key in XTS mode, as defined in the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) 1619-2007 standard as XTS-AES-256. That data encryption key is protected by a 256-bit AES key wrap when stored in non-volatile form.\n\niSCSI is an alternative means of attaching hosts and external storage controllers to the IBM Storwize V7000. Within IBM Spectrum Virtualize release 7.7, IBM introduced software capabilities to allow the underlying virtualized storage to attach to IBM Storwize V7000 by using the iSCSI protocol.\n\n## 2.5.19 iSCSI\n\n## 2.5.18 Encryption\n\n34 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9736117611975689, + "doc_id": "97440b329fba863fad77616651a2ef1a805676676e70bea048be32e438a4b1a2", + "edit_distance": 0.43346007604562736, + "f1_score": 0.9926650366748166, + "meteor": 0.8372104499619483, + "precision": 0.9950980392156863, + "pred_md": "## 7.8.3 Creating a thin-provisioned volume\n\nExample 7-4 shows an example of creating a thin-provisioned volume. This requires the following parameters to be specified:\n\n-rsize\n\nThis parameter makes the volume a thin-provisioned volume. If this parameter is missing, the volume is created as fully allocated.\n\n- -autoexpand\n\nThis parameter specifies that thin-provisioned volume copies automatically expand their real capacities by allocating new extents from their storage pool (optional).\n\n-grainsize\n\nThis parameter sets the grain size in kilobytes (KB) for a thin-provisioned volume (optional).\n\nExample 7-4 Using the command mkvdisk\n\nIBM\\_Storwize:ITSO:superuser>mkvdisk -mdiskgrp Pool0 -iogrp 0 -vtype striped -size 10 -unit gb -rsize 50% -autoexpand -grainsize 256 Virtual Disk, id [9], successfully created\n\nThis command creates a thin-provisioned volume with 10 GB of virtual capacity. The volume belongs to the storage pool that is named Site1\\_Pool and is owned by input/output (I/O) Group io\\_grp0 . The real capacity automatically expands until the real volume size of 10 GB is reached. The grain size is set to 256 KB, which is the default.\n\nDisk size: When the -rsize parameter is used to specify the real physical capacity of a thin-provisioned volume, the following options are available to specify the physical capacity: disk\\_size , disk\\_size\\_percentage , and auto .\n\nUse the disk\\_size\\_percentage option to define initial real capacity by using a percentage of the disk's virtual capacity that is defined by the -size parameter. This option takes as a parameter an integer, or an integer that is immediately followed by the percent (%) symbol.\n\nUse disk\\_size option to directly specify the real physical capacity specifying its size in the units defined by using the -unit parameter (the default unit is MB). The -rsize value can be greater than, equal to, or less than the size of the volume.\n\nThe auto option creates a volume copy that uses the entire size of the MDisk. If you specify the -rsize auto option, you must also specify the -vtype image option.\n\nAn entry of 1 GB uses 1,024 MB.\n\n## 7.8.4 Creating a volume in image mode\n\nUse image mode volume to bring a non-virtualized disk (for example, from a pre-virtualization environment) under the control of the IBM Spectrum Virtualize system. After it is managed by the system, you can migrate the volume to the standard managed disk.\n\nWhen an image mode volume is created, it directly maps to the thus far unmanaged MDisk from which it is created. Therefore, except for a thin-provisioned image mode volume, the volume's LBA x equals MDisk LBA x .\n\nSize: An image mode volume must be at least 512 bytes (the capacity cannot be 0) and always occupies at least one extent.\n\n292\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1", + "recall": 0.9902439024390244, + "true_md": "## 7.8.3 Creating a thin-provisioned volume\n\nExample 7-4 shows an example of creating a thin-provisioned volume. This requires the following parameters to be specified:\n\nThis command creates a thin-provisioned volume with 10 GB of virtual capacity. The volume belongs to the storage pool that is named Site1\\_Pool and is owned by input/output (I/O) Group io\\_grp0 . The real capacity automatically expands until the real volume size of 10 GB is reached. The grain size is set to 256 KB, which is the default.\n\nDisk size: When the -rsize parameter is used to specify the real physical capacity of a thin-provisioned volume, the following options are available to specify the physical capacity: disk\\_size , disk\\_size\\_percentage , and auto .\n\nUse the disk\\_size\\_percentage option to define initial real capacity by using a percentage of the disk’s virtual capacity that is defined by the -size parameter. This option takes as a parameter an integer, or an integer that is immediately followed by the percent (%) symbol.\n\nUse disk\\_size option to directly specify the real physical capacity specifying its size in the units defined by using the -unit parameter (the default unit is MB). The -rsize value can be greater than, equal to, or less than the size of the volume.\n\nThe auto option creates a volume copy that uses the entire size of the MDisk. If you specify the -rsize auto option, you must also specify the -vtype image option.\n\nAn entry of 1 GB uses 1,024 MB.\n\nExample 7-4 Using the command mkvdisk\n\nIBM\\_Storwize:ITSO:superuser>mkvdisk -mdiskgrp Pool0 -iogrp 0 -vtype striped -size 10 -unit gb -rsize 50% -autoexpand -grainsize 256 Virtual Disk, id [9], successfully created\n\n## 7.8.4 Creating a volume in image mode\n\nUse image mode volume to bring a non-virtualized disk (for example, from a pre-virtualization environment) under the control of the IBM Spectrum Virtualize system. After it is managed by the system, you can migrate the volume to the standard managed disk. \n\nWhen an image mode volume is created, it directly maps to the thus far unmanaged MDisk from which it is created. Therefore, except for a thin-provisioned image mode volume, the volume’s LBA x equals MDisk LBA x . \n\nSize: An image mode volume must be at least 512 bytes (the capacity cannot be 0) and always occupies at least one extent.\n\n292 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\n- -grainsize This parameter sets the grain size in kilobytes (KB) for a thin-provisioned volume (optional).\n\n- -autoexpand This parameter specifies that thin-provisioned volume copies automatically expand their real capacities by allocating new extents from their storage pool (optional).\n\n- -rsize This parameter makes the volume a thin-provisioned volume. If this parameter is missing, the volume is created as fully allocated." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9358683911500145, + "doc_id": "6b0b12a69a6b7da85d8db8c439277b5f54a5872d9fb88a165e1d9cb60d637a9d", + "edit_distance": 0.05113636363636364, + "f1_score": 0.9834254143646409, + "meteor": 0.973275593942149, + "precision": 0.9888888888888889, + "pred_md": "## Duplicating and importing mappings\n\nVolumes that are assigned to one host can be quickly and easily mapped to another host object. You might make this assignment, for example, when replacing an aging host's hardware and want to ensure that the replacement host node can access the same set of volumes as the old host.\n\nYou can accomplish this process in two ways: by duplicating the mappings on the existing host object to the new host object, or by importing the host mappings to the new host. To duplicate the mappings, complete the following steps:\n\n- 1. To duplicate an existing host mapping, select the host that you want to duplicate and click Actions → Duplicate Volume Mappings (see Figure 8-35). In our example, we duplicate the volumes that are mapped to host ITSO-VMHOST-01 to the new host ITSO-VMHOST-02 .\n\nFigure 8-35 Duplicate Host Volume Mappings menu\n\nFigure 8-35 Duplicate Host Volume Mappings menu\n\nChapter 8. Hosts\n\n351", + "recall": 0.978021978021978, + "true_md": "## Duplicating and importing mappings\n\nVolumes that are assigned to one host can be quickly and easily mapped to another host object. You might make this assignment, for example, when replacing an aging host’s hardware and want to ensure that the replacement host node can access the same set of volumes as the old host.\n\nYou can accomplish this process in two ways: by duplicating the mappings on the existing host object to the new host object, or by importing the host mappings to the new host. To duplicate the mappings, complete the following steps:\n\n- 1. To duplicate an existing host mapping, select the host that you want to duplicate and click Actions → Duplicate Volume Mappings (see Figure 8-35). In our example, we duplicate the volumes that are mapped to host ITSO-VMHOST-01 to the new host ITSO-VMHOST-02 .\n\nFigure 8-35 Duplicate Host Volume Mappings menu \n\nChapter 8. Hosts 351" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8586769308074867, + "doc_id": "3e6e711dfe8fda269b244450eb7c935aa5fc9e9fe9a62d99f66281053fd2199b", + "edit_distance": 0.2930232558139535, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9706862059712703, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "- 8. Click Resume in the Update System window and the update proceeds, as shown in Figure 13-19.\n\nFigure 13-19 Resuming the update\n\nFigure 13-19 Resuming the update\n\n- 9. Because of the utility detecting issues, another warning comes up to ensure that you investigated them and are certain you want to proceed, as shown in Figure 13-20. When you are ready to proceed, click Yes .\n\nFigure 13-20 Warning before you can continue\n\nFigure 13-20 Warning before you can continue\n\n- 10.The system begins updating the IBM Spectrum Virtualize software by taking one node offline and installing the new code. This process takes approximately 20 minutes. After the node returns from the update, it is listed as complete, as shown in Figure 13-21.\n\nFigure 13-21 Update process paused for host path recovery\n\nFigure 13-21 Update process paused for host path recovery\n\n- 11.After a 30-minute pause, a node failover occurs and you temporarily lose connection to the GUI to ensure that multipathing recovered on all attached hosts. A warning window displays, prompting you to refresh the current session, as shown in Figure 13-22 on page 694.\n\nChapter 13. RAS, monitoring, and troubleshooting\n\n693", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "- 8. Click Resume in the Update System window and the update proceeds, as shown in Figure 13-19.\n\n- 9. Because of the utility detecting issues, another warning comes up to ensure that you investigated them and are certain you want to proceed, as shown in Figure 13-20. When you are ready to proceed, click Yes .\n\n- 10.The system begins updating the IBM Spectrum Virtualize software by taking one node offline and installing the new code. This process takes approximately 20 minutes. After the node returns from the update, it is listed as complete, as shown in Figure 13-21.\n\n- 11.After a 30-minute pause, a node failover occurs and you temporarily lose connection to the GUI to ensure that multipathing recovered on all attached hosts. A warning window displays, prompting you to refresh the current session, as shown in Figure 13-22 on page 694.\n\nFigure 13-21 Update process paused for host path recovery\n\nFigure 13-20 Warning before you can continue\n\nFigure 13-19 Resuming the update \n\nChapter 13. RAS, monitoring, and troubleshooting 693" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7586090346121747, + "doc_id": "2a556bd804c4adc8be7c07e8f47120008bdd59bb66683491366edbd166d43f5b", + "edit_distance": 0.15789473684210525, + "f1_score": 0.9444444444444444, + "meteor": 0.9819344974651968, + "precision": 0.8947368421052632, + "pred_md": "Draft Document for Review December 11, 2019 2:01 pm\n\nBack cover\n\nISBN DocISBN\n\nSG24-8459-00\n\nPrinted in U.S.A.", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Draft Document for Review December 11, 2019 2:01 pm\n\nSG24-8459-00\n\nISBN DocISBN\n\nPrinted in U.S.A." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8815739603477751, + "doc_id": "1d377d76598d85635dd2e2fbcb6b87dc03b1fd0e2aca614380bd28e6f60f80a3", + "edit_distance": 0.14824120603015076, + "f1_score": 0.9593495934959351, + "meteor": 0.8926647983027474, + "precision": 0.9672131147540983, + "pred_md": "- 4. Return to the default table view by selecting Restore Default View in the column selection menu.\n\nSorting: By clicking a column, you can sort a table based on that column in ascending or descending order.\n\n## Shifting columns in tables\n\nYou can move columns by left-clicking and moving the column right or left, as shown in Figure 5-26. We are attempting to move the Capacity column before the Pool column.\n\nFigure 5-26 Reorganizing table columns\n\nFigure 5-26 Reorganizing table columns\n\n## 5.4 Monitoring menu\n\nClick the Monitoring icon in left pane to open the Monitoring menu (see Figure 5-27). The Monitoring menu offers these navigation options:\n\n- /SM590000 System: This option opens an overview of the system. It shows all control enclosures and groups them into I/O groups if more than one control enclosure is present. Useful information about each enclosure is displayed including status, number of events against each enclosure, and key enclosure information, such as ID and serial number. For more information, see 5.4.1, 'System overview' on page 148.\n- /SM590000 Events: This option tracks all informational, warning, and error messages that occurred in the system. You can apply various filters to sort the messages according to your needs or export the messages to an external comma-separated values (CSV) file. For more information, see 5.4.2, 'Events' on page 152.\n- /SM590000 Performance: This option reports the general system statistics that relate to the processor (CPU) utilization, host and internal interfaces, volumes, and MDisks. The GUI allows you to switch between megabytes per second (MBps) or IOPS. For more information, see 5.4.3, 'Performance' on page 153.\n- /SM590000 Background Tasks: The option shows the progress of all tasks running in the background as listed in 'Running jobs and suggested tasks' on page 140\n\nThe following section describes the Monitoring menu options (see Figure 5-27).\n\nFigure 5-27 Monitoring menu\n\nFigure 5-27 Monitoring menu\n\nChapter 5. Graphical user interface\n\n147", + "recall": 0.9516129032258065, + "true_md": "- 4. Return to the default table view by selecting Restore Default View in the column selection menu.\n\nSorting: By clicking a column, you can sort a table based on that column in ascending or descending order.\n\nYou can move columns by left-clicking and moving the column right or left, as shown in Figure 5-26. We are attempting to move the Capacity column before the Pool column.\n\nShifting columns in tables\n\nFigure 5-26 Reorganizing table columns\n\n## 5.4 Monitoring menu\n\nClick the Monitoring icon in left pane to open the Monitoring menu (see Figure 5-27). The Monitoring menu offers these navigation options:\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> System: This option opens an overview of the system. It shows all control enclosures and groups them into I/O groups if more than one control enclosure is present. Useful information about each enclosure is displayed including status, number of events against each enclosure, and key enclosure information, such as ID and serial number. For more information, see 5.4.1, “System overview” on page 148.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Events: This option tracks all informational, warning, and error messages that occurred in the system. You can apply various filters to sort the messages according to your needs or export the messages to an external comma-separated values (CSV) file. For more information, see 5.4.2, “Events” on page 152.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Performance: This option reports the general system statistics that relate to the processor (CPU) utilization, host and internal interfaces, volumes, and MDisks. The GUI allows you to switch between megabytes per second (MBps) or IOPS. For more information, see 5.4.3, “Performance” on page 153.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Background Tasks: The option shows the progress of all tasks running in the background as listed in “Running jobs and suggested tasks” on page 140\n\nThe following section describes the Monitoring menu options (see Figure 5-27).\n\nFigure 5-27 Monitoring menu\n\nChapter 5. Graphical user interface 147" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8225756657940696, + "doc_id": "97680c84d515e975a6f5d90f9c1a482b724d4f8c790f46e1abc0a394ed7e9e01", + "edit_distance": 0.3235294117647059, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9685259914346789, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Note: When a document is on hold, a hold icon is displayed to the left of the document.\n\nFigure 16-10 Removing holds\n\nFigure 16-10 Removing holds\n\n## 16.3.4 Search for hold documents\n\nHold capabilities were developed as part of the Content Manager OnDemand database structure as a field that can be indexed. Users can use this capability to search on selective holds that might be applied by another user, as shown in Figure 16-11.\n\nFigure 16-11 Holds as a searchable index\n\nFigure 16-11 Holds as a searchable index\n\nChapter 16. Enhanced Retention Management\n\n363", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Note: When a document is on hold, a hold icon is displayed to the left of the document.\n\nHold capabilities were developed as part of the Content Manager OnDemand database structure as a field that can be indexed. Users can use this capability to search on selective holds that might be applied by another user, as shown in Figure 16-11.\n\nChapter 16. Enhanced Retention Management 363\n\nFigure 16-11 Holds as a searchable index\n\nFigure 16-10 Removing holds\n\n## 16.3.4 Search for hold documents" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9344279991971838, + "doc_id": "2338f567263d120bda8011898135b707a97670d2cb17bfbb207fff5af8242e1e", + "edit_distance": 0.061946902654867256, + "f1_score": 0.9877551020408163, + "meteor": 0.9874687641718728, + "precision": 0.9918032786885246, + "pred_md": "8459ch03.fm\n\nDraft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n## 3.6.2 Layers explained\n\nIBM Multicloud Manager consists of several components, which are used to access and manage your clusters. A high level architecture of the components is shown in Figure 3-9 on page 48.\n\nFigure 3-9 Multicloud Manager High Level Architecture\n\nFigure 3-9 Multicloud Manager High Level Architecture\n\n## Multicloud Manager hub cluster\n\nHub cluster is used to define Multicloud Manager controller. Hub cluster aggregates information from multiple clusters by using asynchronous work request. With a graph database, the hub cluster maintains the state of clusters and applications that run on it.\n\nHub cluster also uses etcd , a distributed key value store to store the state of work requests and results from multiple clusters. It provides a set of REST API's for various functions that it supports.\n\n## Multicloud Manager managed cluster\n\nManaged cluster defines Multicloud manager Klusterlet. Klusterlet is an agent responsible for a single Kubernetes cluster. Managed cluster initiates connection to the hub cluster, receives and applies work requests and returns results. Managed cluster connects to different services in the cluster for operations such as Kubernetes API service.\n\n48\n\nRed Hat OpenShift and IBM Cloud Paks on IBM Power Systems: Volume 1", + "recall": 0.983739837398374, + "true_md": "8459ch03.fm\n\nDraft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n## 3.6.2 Layers explained\n\nIBM Multicloud Manager consists of several components, which are used to access and manage your clusters. A high level architecture of the components is shown in Figure 3-9 on page 48.\n\nFigure 3-9 Multicloud Manager High Level Architecture\n\n## Multicloud Manager hub cluster\n\n## Multicloud Manager managed cluster\n\nHub cluster is used to define Multicloud Manager controller. Hub cluster aggregates information from multiple clusters by using asynchronous work request. With a graph database, the hub cluster maintains the state of clusters and applications that run on it.\n\nHub cluster also uses etcd , a distributed key value store to store the state of work requests and results from multiple clusters. It provides a set of REST API’s for various functions that it supports.\n\nManaged cluster defines Multicloud manager Klusterlet. Klusterlet is an agent responsible for a single Kubernetes cluster. Managed cluster initiates connection to the hub cluster, receives and applies work requests and returns results. Managed cluster connects to different services in the cluster for operations such as Kubernetes API service.\n\n48 Red Hat OpenShift and IBM Cloud Paks on IBM Power Systems: Volume 1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7987351208647888, + "doc_id": "b9dbda4a26b6872dd9a642d8f454a76379ed28b806350ce3d588904a3b7537a7", + "edit_distance": 0.27956989247311825, + "f1_score": 0.9690721649484536, + "meteor": 0.8956741386925794, + "precision": 0.9791666666666666, + "pred_md": "580\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\n- 3. In the next window, select the location of the auxiliary volumes in the Consistency Group, as shown in Figure 11-124, and click Next .\n- -On this system , which means that the volumes are local.\n- -On another system , which means that you select the remote system from the menu.\n\nFigure 11-124 Selecting the system to create the Consistency Group with\n\nFigure 11-124 Selecting the system to create the Consistency Group with", + "recall": 0.9591836734693877, + "true_md": "- 3. In the next window, select the location of the auxiliary volumes in the Consistency Group, as shown in Figure 11-124, and click Next .\n\n- – On this system , which means that the volumes are local.\n\n- – On another system , which means that you select the remote system from the menu.\n\nFigure 11-124 Selecting the system to create the Consistency Group with\n\n580 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.789401107391833, + "doc_id": "7d22a77d6a359288293c147edb66ea9513c06f181f31fcd0136a9519ea3697bc", + "edit_distance": 0.43434343434343436, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.917526381695285, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "280\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\n- 4. A summary window is displayed showing the volume to be mapped along with existing volumes that are mapped to the host or host cluster, as shown in Figure 7-37. Click Map Volumes .\n\nFigure 7-37 Map volume to host cluster summary\n\nFigure 7-37 Map volume to host cluster summary\n\nThe confirmation window shows the result of the volume mapping task, as shown in Figure 7-38.\n\nFigure 7-38 Confirmation of volume to host mapping\n\nFigure 7-38 Confirmation of volume to host mapping", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "- 4. A summary window is displayed showing the volume to be mapped along with existing volumes that are mapped to the host or host cluster, as shown in Figure 7-37. Click Map Volumes .\n\nThe confirmation window shows the result of the volume mapping task, as shown in Figure 7-38.\n\nFigure 7-37 Map volume to host cluster summary\n\nFigure 7-38 Confirmation of volume to host mapping\n\n280 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6798192985902121, + "doc_id": "9a0c494e183664129c4b82569527144f2d0b3162d15587b3add20a39fdfbc85e", + "edit_distance": 0.7295081967213115, + "f1_score": 0.9384615384615383, + "meteor": 0.8348576461499745, + "precision": 0.9682539682539683, + "pred_md": "32\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\nFigure 2-12 shows how a striped volume is allocated, assuming that 10 extents are required.\n\nFigure 2-12 Striped volume\n\nFigure 2-12 shows how a striped volume is allocated, assuming that 10 extents are required.Figure 2-12 Striped volume\n\n- /SM590000 Sequential\n\nA sequential volume is where the extents are allocated one after the other, from one MDisk to the next MDisk (see Figure 2-13).\n\nFigure 2-13 Sequential volume\n\nFigure 2-13 Sequential volume\n\n- /SM590000 Image mode\n\nImage mode volumes are special volumes that have a direct relationship with one MDisk. They are used to migrate data into and out of the clustered system.", + "recall": 0.9104477611940298, + "true_md": "Figure 2-12 shows how a striped volume is allocated, assuming that 10 extents are required.\n\nA sequential volume is where the extents are allocated one after the other, from one MDisk to the next MDisk (see Figure 2-13).\n\nImage mode volumes are special volumes that have a direct relationship with one MDisk. They are used to migrate data into and out of the clustered system.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Image mode\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Sequential \n\nFigure 2-13 Sequential volume\n\nFigure 2-12 Striped volume\n\n32 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9592554424498626, + "doc_id": "b8b8cd693c6120e66c1404018e8ad1a406eb6838509a09edb54b63bdfc39ed72", + "edit_distance": 0.12921348314606743, + "f1_score": 0.9934065934065932, + "meteor": 0.9676935053147503, + "precision": 0.9955947136563876, + "pred_md": "8459ch06.fm\n\nDraft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n112\n\nRed Hat OpenShift and IBM Cloud Paks on IBM Power Systems: Volume 1\n\nvm2\\_first\\_ip = \"192.168.11.205\"\n\n# Fist IP from a consecutive pool of IPs\n\nvm2\\_image\\_name = \"xiv\\_p9\\_image\\_rhel76\" # The image name\n\nvm2\\_remote\\_restart = \"true\" # Enable Auto Remote Restart\n\nvm2\\_storage\\_name = \"xiv\\_StoragePool\" # Storage Template\n\nvm2\\_dockerdisk1 = \"64\" # Docker disk size in GB for ephemeral storage\n\n#VM3 configuration (OCP - Workers(App) Nodes)\n\n#---------------------------------\n\nvm3\\_number = \"2\" # Number of VMs\n\nvm3\\_memory = \"64\" # Memory GB\n\nvm3\\_cpu = \"8\" # Virtual CPU\n\nvm3\\_vcpu\\_ratio = \"2\" # vCPU RATIO 1:2 1 vCPU = 0.5 eCPU (cores)\n\nvm3\\_name = \"wrknode\" # Hostname prefix\n\nvm3\\_first\\_ip = \"192.168.11.208\"\n\n# Fist IP from a consecutive pool of IPs\n\nvm3\\_image\\_name = \"xiv\\_p9\\_image\\_rhel76\" # The image name\n\nvm3\\_remote\\_restart = \"false\" # Disable Auto Remote Restart\n\nvm3\\_storage\\_name = \"xiv\\_StoragePool\" # Storage Template\n\nvm3\\_dockerdisk1 = \"128\" # Docker disk size in GB for ephemeral storage\n\n#VM4 configuration (OCP - Load Balancer Node)\n\n#---------------------------------\n\nvm4\\_number = \"0\" # Number of VMs\n\nvm4\\_memory = \"8\" # Memory GB\n\nvm4\\_cpu = \"2\" # Virtual CPU\n\nvm4\\_vcpu\\_ratio = \"4\" # vCPU RATIO 1:4 1 vCPU = 0.25 eCPU (cores)\n\nvm4\\_name = \"lbsnode\" # Hostname prefix\n\nvm4\\_first\\_ip = \"192.168.11.212\"\n\n# Fist IP from a consecutive pool of IPs\n\nvm4\\_image\\_name = \"xiv\\_p9\\_image\\_rhel76\" # The image name\n\nvm4\\_remote\\_restart = \"true\" # Enable Auto Remote Restart\n\nAttention: To use an existing network, you need to remove the network.tf file before applying the configuration.\n\nMaster-Infrastructure and Worker Nodes have an additional disk DOCKER\\_DISK\\_1 for docker-vg.\n\n- /SM590000 Initialize Terraform working directory:\n\n## cd <PATH> #ocp-aio /ocp-7nodes ocp-3nodes\n\n## terraform init\n\nInitializing the backend...\n\nInitializing provider plugins...\n\nThe following providers do not have any version constraints in configuration, so the latest version was installed.\n\n...\n\nOutput truncated\n\n...\n\n* provider.null: version = \"~> 2.1\"\n\n* provider.openstack: version = \"~> 1.22\"\n\nTerraform has been successfully initialized!\n\nYou may now begin working with Terraform. Try running \"terraform plan\" to see\n\nany changes that are required for your infrastructure. All Terraform commands\n\nshould now work.\n\nIf you ever set or change modules or backend configuration for Terraform, rerun this command to reinitialize your working directory. If you forget, other commands will detect it and remind you to do so if necessary.\n\n- /SM590000 Create an execution plan:", + "recall": 0.9912280701754386, + "true_md": "Draft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n8459ch06.fm\n\nvm2\\_first\\_ip = \"192.168.11.205\" # Fist IP from a consecutive pool of IPs vm2\\_image\\_name = \"xiv\\_p9\\_image\\_rhel76\" # The image name vm2\\_remote\\_restart = \"true\" # Enable Auto Remote Restart vm2\\_storage\\_name = \"xiv\\_StoragePool\" # Storage Template vm2\\_dockerdisk1 = \"64\" # Docker disk size in GB for ephemeral storage #VM3 configuration (OCP - Workers(App) Nodes) #--------------------------------- vm3\\_number = \"2\" # Number of VMs vm3\\_memory = \"64\" # Memory GB vm3\\_cpu = \"8\" # Virtual CPU vm3\\_vcpu\\_ratio = \"2\" # vCPU RATIO 1:2 1 vCPU = 0.5 eCPU (cores) vm3\\_name = \"wrknode\" # Hostname prefix vm3\\_first\\_ip = \"192.168.11.208\" # Fist IP from a consecutive pool of IPs vm3\\_image\\_name = \"xiv\\_p9\\_image\\_rhel76\" # The image name vm3\\_remote\\_restart = \"false\" # Disable Auto Remote Restart vm3\\_storage\\_name = \"xiv\\_StoragePool\" # Storage Template vm3\\_dockerdisk1 = \"128\" # Docker disk size in GB for ephemeral storage #VM4 configuration (OCP - Load Balancer Node) #--------------------------------- vm4\\_number = \"0\" # Number of VMs vm4\\_memory = \"8\" # Memory GB vm4\\_cpu = \"2\" # Virtual CPU vm4\\_vcpu\\_ratio = \"4\" # vCPU RATIO 1:4 1 vCPU = 0.25 eCPU (cores) vm4\\_name = \"lbsnode\" # Hostname prefix vm4\\_first\\_ip = \"192.168.11.212\" # Fist IP from a consecutive pool of IPs vm4\\_image\\_name = \"xiv\\_p9\\_image\\_rhel76\" # The image name vm4\\_remote\\_restart = \"true\" # Enable Auto Remote Restart\n\nMaster-Infrastructure and Worker Nodes have an additional disk DOCKER\\_DISK\\_1 for docker-vg.\n\nAttention: To use an existing network, you need to remove the network.tf file before applying the configuration.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Initialize Terraform working directory:\n\ncd <PATH> #ocp-aio /ocp-7nodes ocp-3nodes terraform init Initializing the backend... Initializing provider plugins... The following providers do not have any version constraints in configuration, so the latest version was installed. ... Output truncated ... * provider.null: version = \"~> 2.1\" * provider.openstack: version = \"~> 1.22\" Terraform has been successfully initialized! You may now begin working with Terraform. Try running \"terraform plan\" to see any changes that are required for your infrastructure. All Terraform commands should now work. If you ever set or change modules or backend configuration for Terraform, rerun this command to reinitialize your working directory. If you forget, other commands will detect it and remind you to do so if necessary.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Create an execution plan:\n\n112 Red Hat OpenShift and IBM Cloud Paks on IBM Power Systems: Volume 1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9733976263178336, + "doc_id": "c47f78ec687115ec681529942cc2f7fbe50c2f9c07bbb162f0661b2187547a52", + "edit_distance": 0.023936170212765957, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9975536729756574, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Figure 4-2 Relationship between system tables and data tables\n\nFigure 4-2 Relationship between system tables and data tables\n\nThis application group creates an application group data table every 10 million rows (based on the seg\\_rows value in the ARSAG table, which is not shown in Figure 4-2). During the data loading process, Content Manager OnDemand uses the agid and the agid\\_name to add a row into the segment table (ARSSEG) for every 10 million rows that are created in the application group data table. When the first data load occurs into the HAA application group, the index values for the stored documents are inserted into table HAA1. A row exists for each document that is loaded. When table HAA1 reaches its max\\_rows value (in this case 10 million rows), table HAA1 is closed and table HAA2 is opened.\n\nThe important pointer in the ARSSEG table is the name of the application group data table, table\\_name , where the index values (in this case, the four defined index values) are stored. The table\\_name consists of the agid\\_name from the ARSAG table, plus a counter.\n\nFigure 4-2 shows the two rows that are created in the ARSSEG table: one row with the table\\_name HAA1 and another row with the table\\_name HAA2. Both HAA1 and HAA2 are the actual names of the application group data tables that are created.\n\nThe application group data table contains the doc\\_name , which is the actual container (storage object) for the individual document. The offset and the document length are also kept in this table. Figure 4-2 shows that the first row has an offset of 0, and the second row has an offset of the document length of the first row.\n\nFigure 4-2 shows the relationship between the tables.\n\nThe architecture of relating one application group to one or more application group data tables allows Content Manager OnDemand an unlimited growth of index space. The maximum table size is a limitation of the database subsystem and must be configured for optimal performance.\n\nChapter 4. Database structure\n\n83", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Figure 4-2 Relationship between system tables and data tables\n\nThis application group creates an application group data table every 10 million rows (based on the seg\\_rows value in the ARSAG table, which is not shown in Figure 4-2). During the data loading process, Content Manager OnDemand uses the agid and the agid\\_name to add a row into the segment table (ARSSEG) for every 10 million rows that are created in the application group data table. When the first data load occurs into the HAA application group, the index values for the stored documents are inserted into table HAA1. A row exists for each document that is loaded. When table HAA1 reaches its max\\_rows value (in this case 10 million rows), table HAA1 is closed and table HAA2 is opened.\n\nThe important pointer in the ARSSEG table is the name of the application group data table, table\\_name , where the index values (in this case, the four defined index values) are stored. The table\\_name consists of the agid\\_name from the ARSAG table, plus a counter. \n\nFigure 4-2 shows the two rows that are created in the ARSSEG table: one row with the table\\_name HAA1 and another row with the table\\_name HAA2. Both HAA1 and HAA2 are the actual names of the application group data tables that are created. \n\nThe application group data table contains the doc\\_name , which is the actual container (storage object) for the individual document. The offset and the document length are also kept in this table. Figure 4-2 shows that the first row has an offset of 0, and the second row has an offset of the document length of the first row.\n\nFigure 4-2 shows the relationship between the tables.\n\nThe architecture of relating one application group to one or more application group data tables allows Content Manager OnDemand an unlimited growth of index space. The maximum table size is a limitation of the database subsystem and must be configured for optimal performance. \n\nChapter 4. Database structure 83" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8666104637831966, + "doc_id": "7bf8d9c8f8a014c121562dbd9ffd9ef762e080f00f58b012ddf8baf551d45af3", + "edit_distance": 0.4030612244897959, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9760982369604855, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "90\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\nNote: During the system initialization, you are prompted to accept untrusted certificates because the system certificates are self-signed. If you are directly connected to the service interface, there is no doubt as to the identity of the certificate issuer, so you can safely accept the certificates.\n\n- 2. The welcome dialog box opens, as shown in Figure 4-2. Click Next to start the procedure.\n\nFigure 4-2 System initialization: Welcome\n\nFigure 4-2 System initialization: Welcome\n\n- 3. A window opens in which two options are presented, as shown in Figure 4-3. Select the first option, As the first enclosure in a new system . Click Next .\n\nFigure 4-3 System initialization: Configuring the first enclosure in a new system\n\nFigure 4-3 System initialization: Configuring the first enclosure in a new system\n\n- 4. Enter the IP address information for the new system (see Figure 4-4 on page 91). Choose between an IPv4 and IPv6 address. Enter the wanted address and click Next .", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Note: During the system initialization, you are prompted to accept untrusted certificates because the system certificates are self-signed. If you are directly connected to the service interface, there is no doubt as to the identity of the certificate issuer, so you can safely accept the certificates.\n\n- 2. The welcome dialog box opens, as shown in Figure 4-2. Click Next to start the procedure.\n\n- 3. A window opens in which two options are presented, as shown in Figure 4-3. Select the first option, As the first enclosure in a new system . Click Next .\n\n- 4. Enter the IP address information for the new system (see Figure 4-4 on page 91). Choose between an IPv4 and IPv6 address. Enter the wanted address and click Next .\n\nFigure 4-2 System initialization: Welcome\n\nFigure 4-3 System initialization: Configuring the first enclosure in a new system\n\n90 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9323644324037068, + "doc_id": "2723d4b9159e4b9e612646c3ecbcaf5441547cad18067d673dfc877e13ed3516", + "edit_distance": 0.32741116751269034, + "f1_score": 0.9880239520958083, + "meteor": 0.8955443770985445, + "precision": 0.9939759036144579, + "pred_md": "Note: If insufficient extents are available within your target storage pool, you receive an error message. Ensure that the source MDisk group and target MDisk group have the same extent size.\n\nYou can use the optional threads parameter to control priority of the migration process. The default is 4 , which is the highest priority setting. However, if you want the process to take a lower priority over other types of I/O, you can specify 3 , 2 , or 1 .\n\nYou can run the lsmigrate command at any time to see the status of the migration process, as shown in Example 7-30.\n\n## Example 7-30 The lsmigrate command\n\nIBM\\_2145:ITSO\\_CLUSTER:superuser>lsmigrate migrate\\_type MDisk\\_Group\\_Migration progress 0 migrate\\_source\\_vdisk\\_index 27 migrate\\_target\\_mdisk\\_grp 2 max\\_thread\\_count 4 migrate\\_source\\_vdisk\\_copy\\_id 0\n\nIBM\\_2145:ITSO\\_CLUSTER:superuser>lsmigrate migrate\\_type MDisk\\_Group\\_Migration progress 76 migrate\\_source\\_vdisk\\_index 27 migrate\\_target\\_mdisk\\_grp 2 max\\_thread\\_count 4 migrate\\_source\\_vdisk\\_copy\\_id 0\n\nProgress: The progress is shown in terms of percentage complete. If no output is displayed when running the command, all volume migrations finished.\n\n## 7.8.17 Migrating a fully managed volume to an image mode volume\n\nMigrating a fully managed volume to an image mode volume enables the IBM Spectrum Virtualize system to be removed from the data path. This feature might be useful when the IBM Spectrum Virtualize system is used as a data mover.\n\nTo migrate a fully managed volume to an image mode volume, the following rules apply:\n\n- /SM590000 Cloud snapshots must not be enabled on the source volume.\n- /SM590000 The destination MDisk must be greater than or equal to the size of the volume.\n- /SM590000 The MDisk that is specified as the target must be in an unmanaged state.\n- /SM590000 Regardless of the mode in which the volume starts, it is reported as a managed mode during the migration.\n- /SM590000 If the migration is interrupted by a system recovery or cache problem, the migration resumes after the recovery completes .\n\nChapter 7. Volumes\n\n309", + "recall": 0.9821428571428571, + "true_md": "Note: If insufficient extents are available within your target storage pool, you receive an error message. Ensure that the source MDisk group and target MDisk group have the same extent size.\n\nYou can use the optional threads parameter to control priority of the migration process. The default is 4 , which is the highest priority setting. However, if you want the process to take a lower priority over other types of I/O, you can specify 3 , 2 , or 1 .\n\nYou can run the lsmigrate command at any time to see the status of the migration process, as shown in Example 7-30.\n\nExample 7-30 The lsmigrate command\n\nIBM\\_2145:ITSO\\_CLUSTER:superuser>lsmigrate migrate\\_type MDisk\\_Group\\_Migration progress 0 migrate\\_source\\_vdisk\\_index 27 migrate\\_target\\_mdisk\\_grp 2 max\\_thread\\_count 4 migrate\\_source\\_vdisk\\_copy\\_id 0 IBM\\_2145:ITSO\\_CLUSTER:superuser>lsmigrate migrate\\_type MDisk\\_Group\\_Migration progress 76 migrate\\_source\\_vdisk\\_index 27 migrate\\_target\\_mdisk\\_grp 2 max\\_thread\\_count 4 migrate\\_source\\_vdisk\\_copy\\_id 0\n\nProgress: The progress is shown in terms of percentage complete. If no output is displayed when running the command, all volume migrations finished.\n\nMigrating a fully managed volume to an image mode volume enables the IBM Spectrum Virtualize system to be removed from the data path. This feature might be useful when the IBM Spectrum Virtualize system is used as a data mover.\n\nTo migrate a fully managed volume to an image mode volume, the following rules apply:\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> If the migration is interrupted by a system recovery or cache problem, the migration resumes after the recovery completes .\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Regardless of the mode in which the volume starts, it is reported as a managed mode during the migration.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> The MDisk that is specified as the target must be in an unmanaged state.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> The destination MDisk must be greater than or equal to the size of the volume.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Cloud snapshots must not be enabled on the source volume.\n\n## 7.8.17 Migrating a fully managed volume to an image mode volume\n\nChapter 7. Volumes 309" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7285152448542709, + "doc_id": "a1fa5709b41116732e66544a4876a38055173c0acdfd79427b0dc5be4add018e", + "edit_distance": 0.4080338266384778, + "f1_score": 0.9930555555555555, + "meteor": 0.9484338639116981, + "precision": 0.9862068965517241, + "pred_md": "8459ch06.fm\n\nDraft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n116\n\nRed Hat OpenShift and IBM Cloud Paks on IBM Power Systems: Volume 1\n\nbsocp01.domain.example.com\n\n[etcd]\n\nbsocp01.domain.example.com\n\n[nodes]\n\n## All-In-One with Docker\n\nbsocp01.domain.example.com openshift\\_node\\_group\\_name='node-config-all-in-one' openshift\\_node\\_problem\\_detector\\_install=true\n\n## Example 6-8 Ansible 7nodes inventory example\n\n| ##-----------------------------------------------------------------------## | | |\n|------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|-----------------------------------------------------------------|---------------------------------------------------------------|\n| ## 7Nodes (3xMaster-Infra, 3xWorkers(Applications) and 1 Load Balancer): | | |\n| ##-----------------------------------------------------------------------## | | |\n| [OSEv3:vars] | | |\n| ##-----------------------------------------------------------------------## | | |\n| ## Ansible Vars | | |\n| ##-----------------------------------------------------------------------## | | |\n| timeout=60 | | |\n| # ansible\\_user={{CHANGEME\\_ANSIBLE\\_SSH\\_USER}} | | |\n| # ansible\\_become=yes | | |\n| ansible\\_user=root | | |\n| ##-----------------------------------------------------------------------## | | |\n| ## OpenShift Basic Vars | | |\n| ##-----------------------------------------------------------------------## | | |\n| # Deployment type | | |\n| openshift\\_deployment\\_type=openshift-enterprise | | |\n| # WARNING: only disable these checks in LAB/TEST environments # OpenShift Version: openshift\\_release=3.11 openshift\\_image\\_tag=v3.11.154 openshift\\_pkg\\_version=-3.11.154 | | |\n| # openshift\\_disable\\_check=\"disk\\_availability,memory\\_availability\" # firewalld recommended for new installations (default is iptables) os\\_firewall\\_use\\_firewalld=True # enable ntp on masters to ensure proper failover | | |\n| openshift\\_clock\\_enabled=True | | |\n| ##-----------------------------------------------------------------------## | | |\n| ## OpenShift Registries Locations | | |\n| oreg\\_auth\\_password={{CHANGEME\\_SERVICE\\_KEY}} | | |\n| ##-----------------------------------------------------------------------## # NOTE: Need credentials from: https://access.redhat.com/terms-based-registry/ oreg\\_url=registry.redhat.io/openshift3/ose-${component}:${version} oreg\\_auth\\_user={{CHANGEME\\_REGISTRY\\_SERVICE\\_ACCOUNT}} | | |\n| ##-----------------------------------------------------------------------## ## OpenShift Master Vars ##-----------------------------------------------------------------------## | | |\n| # Internal cluster name | | |\n| openshift\\_master\\_api\\_port=8443 | | |\n| openshift\\_master\\_console\\_port=8443 | | |\n| openshift\\_master\\_cluster\\_hostname=ocp.domain.example.com # Note: When using an external Load Balancer service or device, the FQDN # of the northbound VIP address must be specified in the inventory file | | |\n| | openshift\\_master\\_cluster\\_public\\_hostname=ocp.domain.example.com | # using the variable openshift\\_master\\_cluster\\_public\\_hostname |", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Draft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n8459ch06.fm\n\nbsocp01.domain.example.com [etcd] bsocp01.domain.example.com [nodes] ## All-In-One with Docker bsocp01.domain.example.com openshift\\_node\\_group\\_name='node-config-all-in-one' openshift\\_node\\_problem\\_detector\\_install=true\n\n##-----------------------------------------------------------------------## ## 7Nodes (3xMaster-Infra, 3xWorkers(Applications) and 1 Load Balancer): ##-----------------------------------------------------------------------## [OSEv3:vars] ##-----------------------------------------------------------------------## ## Ansible Vars ##-----------------------------------------------------------------------## timeout=60 # ansible\\_user={{CHANGEME\\_ANSIBLE\\_SSH\\_USER}} # ansible\\_become=yes ansible\\_user=root ##-----------------------------------------------------------------------## ## OpenShift Basic Vars ##-----------------------------------------------------------------------## # Deployment type openshift\\_deployment\\_type=openshift-enterprise # WARNING: only disable these checks in LAB/TEST environments # openshift\\_disable\\_check=\"disk\\_availability,memory\\_availability\" # OpenShift Version: openshift\\_release=3.11 openshift\\_image\\_tag=v3.11.154 openshift\\_pkg\\_version=-3.11.154 # firewalld recommended for new installations (default is iptables) os\\_firewall\\_use\\_firewalld=True # enable ntp on masters to ensure proper failover openshift\\_clock\\_enabled=True ##-----------------------------------------------------------------------## ## OpenShift Registries Locations ##-----------------------------------------------------------------------## # NOTE: Need credentials from: https://access.redhat.com/terms-based-registry/ oreg\\_url=registry.redhat.io/openshift3/ose-${component}:${version} oreg\\_auth\\_user={{CHANGEME\\_REGISTRY\\_SERVICE\\_ACCOUNT}} oreg\\_auth\\_password={{CHANGEME\\_SERVICE\\_KEY}} ##-----------------------------------------------------------------------## ## OpenShift Master Vars ##-----------------------------------------------------------------------## openshift\\_master\\_api\\_port=8443 openshift\\_master\\_console\\_port=8443 # Internal cluster name openshift\\_master\\_cluster\\_hostname=ocp.domain.example.com # Note: When using an external Load Balancer service or device, the FQDN # of the northbound VIP address must be specified in the inventory file # using the variable openshift\\_master\\_cluster\\_public\\_hostname openshift\\_master\\_cluster\\_public\\_hostname=ocp.domain.example.com\n\nExample 6-8 Ansible 7nodes inventory example\n\n116 Red Hat OpenShift and IBM Cloud Paks on IBM Power Systems: Volume 1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8152193104715906, + "doc_id": "66aca7e2457e4c6c9dd7a95d417c53a47bb8a0733898da85cdc7ecc2ecebd1a8", + "edit_distance": 0.2358974358974359, + "f1_score": 0.9735449735449735, + "meteor": 0.937879299584459, + "precision": 0.9787234042553191, + "pred_md": "Figure 6-31 Upgrading a drive or a set of drives\n\nFigure 6-31 Upgrading a drive or a set of drives\n\nFor information about updating drive firmware, see Chapter 13, 'RAS, monitoring, and troubleshooting' on page 673.\n\n## Action: Show dependent volumes\n\nSelect Show Dependent Volumes to list the volumes that are dependent on the selected drive. A volume is dependent on a drive or a set of drives when removal or failure of that drive or set of drives causes the volume to become unavailable. Use this option before you do maintenance operations, to confirm which volumes will be affected.\n\nFigure 6-32 shows the list of volumes dependent on a set of three drives that belong to the same MDisk. This configuration means that all listed volumes will go offline if all selected drives go offline. If only one drive goes offline, there is no volume dependency.\n\nFigure 6-32 List of volumes dependent on disks 7, 8, 9\n\nFigure 6-32 List of volumes dependent on disks 7, 8, 9\n\nChapter 6. Storage pools\n\n213", + "recall": 0.968421052631579, + "true_md": "Figure 6-31 Upgrading a drive or a set of drives\n\nFigure 6-32 List of volumes dependent on disks 7, 8, 9\n\nFor information about updating drive firmware, see Chapter 13, “RAS, monitoring, and troubleshooting” on page 673.\n\nSelect Show Dependent Volumes to list the volumes that are dependent on the selected drive. A volume is dependent on a drive or a set of drives when removal or failure of that drive or set of drives causes the volume to become unavailable. Use this option before you do maintenance operations, to confirm which volumes will be affected.\n\nFigure 6-32 shows the list of volumes dependent on a set of three drives that belong to the same MDisk. This configuration means that all listed volumes will go offline if all selected drives go offline. If only one drive goes offline, there is no volume dependency.\n\n## Action: Show dependent volumes\n\nChapter 6. Storage pools 213" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.03887793048410622, + "doc_id": "b8400ed194e227ff3a04d0210d7efa0c6188134db8d6b0bdc2edb2f5bda37eb8", + "edit_distance": 0.9667519181585678, + "f1_score": 0.38167938931297707, + "meteor": 0.24621587149979038, + "precision": 0.2358490566037736, + "pred_md": "8459TOC.fm\n\nDraft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\nviii\n\nRed Hat OpenShift and IBM Cloud Paks on IBM Power Systems: Volume 1\n\n| B.3 Login to the OpenShift web console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 |\n|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|\n| B.4 Deploy an NGINX server by way of the OpenShift web console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 |\n| B.5 Deploy a second NGINX server by way of the OpenShift web console . . . . . . . . . . . 219 |\n| B.6 Customize the index.test file of the NGINX instances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 |\n| B.7 Create a new route to balance the network traffic between the two NGINX instances 226 |\n| B.8 Test load balancing across NGINX instances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 |\n| Appendix C. Seamless application movement across multicloud environments . . 231 |\n| Network tunneling for MongoDB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 |\n| Moving the application across clouds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 |\n| Starting the Pod at AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 |\n| Accessing MongoDB using the tunneled connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 |\n| Moving to the on-premises Power Systems cloud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 |\n| Related publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 |\n| IBM Redbooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 |\n| Online resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 |\n| Help from IBM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 |", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "8459TOC.fm\n\nDraft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\nviii Red Hat OpenShift and IBM Cloud Paks on IBM Power Systems: Volume 1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8963048266051598, + "doc_id": "42fd5fbc76fdda92b78ec856f530b872254da92925e80b434ae256d63acf93db", + "edit_distance": 0.06310679611650485, + "f1_score": 0.9975669099756691, + "meteor": 0.993372472255112, + "precision": 0.9951456310679612, + "pred_md": "Draft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n8459ch07.fm\n\nefficient, perfect for data-intensive real-time applications that run across distributed devices.\n\n```\nTags: builder, nodejs, nodejs-10.16.3\n```\n\n- * The source repository appears to match: nodejs\n- * A source build using source code from https://github.com/sclorg/nodejs-ex will be created\n- * The resulting image will be pushed to image stream tag \"nodejs-ex:latest\"\n- * Use 'start-build' to trigger a new build\n- * This image will be deployed in deployment config \"nodejs-ex\"\n- * Port 8080/tcp will be load balanced by service \"nodejs-ex\"\n- * Other containers can access this service through the hostname \"nodejs-ex\"\n- --> Creating resources with label name=myapp ... imagestream.image.openshift.io \"nodejs-ex\" created buildconfig.build.openshift.io \"nodejs-ex\" created deploymentconfig.apps.openshift.io \"nodejs-ex\" created service \"nodejs-ex\" created\n- --> Success\n\nBuild scheduled, use 'oc logs -f bc/nodejs-ex' to track its progress.\n\nApplication is not exposed. You can expose services to the outside world by executing\n\none or more of the commands below:\n\n'oc expose svc/nodejs-ex'\n\nRun 'oc status' to view your app.\n\n## 4. Run the oc status command to verify the status of the project as shown in Example 7-4.\n\n## Example 7-4 Run oc status command\n\n## # oc status\n\nIn project nodejs (nodejs-example) on server https://ocp.domain.example.com:8443\n\nsvc/nodejs-ex - 172.30.186.102:8080\n\ndc/nodejs-ex deploys istag/nodejs-ex:latest <-\n\nbc/nodejs-ex source builds https://github.com/sclorg/nodejs-ex on openshift/nodejs:10 deployment #1 pending 6 seconds ago\n\n- 3 infos identified, use 'oc status --suggest' to see details.\n- 5. Expose the nodejs-ex service as shown in Example 7-5.\n\n## Example 7-5 Expose nodejs-ex\n\n## # oc get svc\n\nNAME TYPE CLUSTER-IP EXTERNAL-IP PORT(S) AGE\n\nnodejs-ex ClusterIP 172.30.186.102 <none> 8080/TCP 7m\n\n# oc expose svc/nodejs-ex --hostname=myapp.apps.domain.example.com\n\nroute.route.openshift.io/nodejs-ex exposed\n\n## # oc get routes\n\nNAME HOST/PORT PATH SERVICES PORT TERMINATION WILDCARD\n\nnodejs-ex myapp.apps.domain.example.com nodejs-ex 8080-tcp None\n\nNote: The oc expose command currently supports generating only unsecured routes. For generating secured (edge, pass-through, re-encrypt) routes, use the oc create route command.\n\nChapter 7. Use cases\n\n157", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Draft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n8459ch07.fm\n\nefficient, perfect for data-intensive real-time applications that run across distributed devices.\n\nTags: builder, nodejs, nodejs-10.16.3 * The source repository appears to match: nodejs * A source build using source code from https://github.com/sclorg/nodejs-ex will be created * The resulting image will be pushed to image stream tag \"nodejs-ex:latest\" * Use 'start-build' to trigger a new build * This image will be deployed in deployment config \"nodejs-ex\" * Port 8080/tcp will be load balanced by service \"nodejs-ex\" * Other containers can access this service through the hostname \"nodejs-ex\" --> Creating resources with label name=myapp ... imagestream.image.openshift.io \"nodejs-ex\" created buildconfig.build.openshift.io \"nodejs-ex\" created deploymentconfig.apps.openshift.io \"nodejs-ex\" created service \"nodejs-ex\" created --> Success Build scheduled, use 'oc logs -f bc/nodejs-ex' to track its progress. Application is not exposed. You can expose services to the outside world by executing one or more of the commands below: 'oc expose svc/nodejs-ex' Run 'oc status' to view your app.\n\n- 4. Run the oc status command to verify the status of the project as shown in Example 7-4.\n\nExample 7-4 Run oc status command\n\n# oc status In project nodejs (nodejs-example) on server https://ocp.domain.example.com:8443 svc/nodejs-ex - 172.30.186.102:8080 dc/nodejs-ex deploys istag/nodejs-ex:latest <- bc/nodejs-ex source builds https://github.com/sclorg/nodejs-ex on openshift/nodejs:10 deployment #1 pending 6 seconds ago 3 infos identified, use 'oc status --suggest' to see details.\n\n- 5. Expose the nodejs-ex service as shown in Example 7-5.\n\nExample 7-5 Expose nodejs-ex\n\n# oc get svc NAME TYPE CLUSTER-IP EXTERNAL-IP PORT(S) AGE nodejs-ex ClusterIP 172.30.186.102 <none> 8080/TCP 7m # oc expose svc/nodejs-ex --hostname=myapp.apps.domain.example.com route.route.openshift.io/nodejs-ex exposed # oc get routes NAME HOST/PORT PATH SERVICES PORT TERMINATION WILDCARD nodejs-ex myapp.apps.domain.example.com nodejs-ex 8080-tcp None\n\nNote: The oc expose command currently supports generating only unsecured routes. For generating secured (edge, pass-through, re-encrypt) routes, use the oc create route command.\n\nChapter 7. Use cases 157" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9532144637338404, + "doc_id": "b20d75a39ad57593d5e0822f43e23edf6af7a6b1c9897ad7dab54db70297bd5d", + "edit_distance": 0.1832579185520362, + "f1_score": 0.9913043478260871, + "meteor": 0.9809929260180965, + "precision": 0.9941860465116279, + "pred_md": "## 4.2 System initialization\n\nThis section provides step-by-step instructions about how to create the Storwize V7000 cluster. The procedure is initiated by connecting to the technician port.\n\nAttention: Do not perform the system initialization procedure on more than one node canister. After system initialization completes, use the management GUI to add control enclosures to the system.\n\nDuring system initialization, you must specify an IPv4 or an IPv6 system address. This address is assigned to Ethernet port 1. After system initialization, you can specify more IP addresses for port 1 and port 2 until both ports have an IPv4 address and an IPv6 address.\n\nConnect a personal computer (PC) or notebook to the technician port on the rear of the control enclosure. If you plan to use more than one enclosure to configure the system, choose any of the enclosures.\n\nFigure 4-1 shows the location of the technician port.\n\nFigure 4-1 Location of the technician port\n\nFigure 4-1 Location of the technician port\n\nThe technician port runs an IPv4 DHCP server and it can assign an address to any device connected to this port. Ensure that your PC or notebook Ethernet port is configured for DHCP if you want the IP to be assigned automatically. If you prefer not to use DHCP, you can set a static IP on the Ethernet port from 192.168.0.0/24 subnet; for example, 192.168.0.2/24 .\n\nThe default IP address for a new node is 192.168.0.1/24 . Do not use this IP address for your PC or notebook.\n\nNote: The Storwize V7000 does not provide IPv6 IP addresses for the technician port.\n\nEnsure that the technician port is not connected to the organization's network, or it acts as a DHCP server for other devices in the network segment.\n\n## 4.2.1 System initialization wizard\n\nAfter connecting your PC or notebook to the technician port, ensure that you obtained a valid IPv4 DCHP address (for example, 192.168.0.12/24 ) and then complete the following steps to initialize the system:\n\n- 1. Open a supported browser and browse to http://install . The browser is automatically redirected to the System Initialization wizard. You can use instead the URL with the IP address (http://192.168.0.1 ) if you are not automatically redirected.\n\nIf the system cannot be initialized, you are redirected to the Service Assistant interface. Use the displayed error codes to troubleshoot the problem.\n\nChapter 4. Initial configuration\n\n89", + "recall": 0.9884393063583815, + "true_md": "## 4.2 System initialization\n\nThis section provides step-by-step instructions about how to create the Storwize V7000 cluster. The procedure is initiated by connecting to the technician port.\n\nAttention: Do not perform the system initialization procedure on more than one node canister. After system initialization completes, use the management GUI to add control enclosures to the system. \n\nDuring system initialization, you must specify an IPv4 or an IPv6 system address. This address is assigned to Ethernet port 1. After system initialization, you can specify more IP addresses for port 1 and port 2 until both ports have an IPv4 address and an IPv6 address.\n\nConnect a personal computer (PC) or notebook to the technician port on the rear of the control enclosure. If you plan to use more than one enclosure to configure the system, choose any of the enclosures.\n\nFigure 4-1 shows the location of the technician port.\n\nThe technician port runs an IPv4 DHCP server and it can assign an address to any device connected to this port. Ensure that your PC or notebook Ethernet port is configured for DHCP if you want the IP to be assigned automatically. If you prefer not to use DHCP, you can set a static IP on the Ethernet port from 192.168.0.0/24 subnet; for example, 192.168.0.2/24 .\n\nThe default IP address for a new node is 192.168.0.1/24 . Do not use this IP address for your PC or notebook.\n\nNote: The Storwize V7000 does not provide IPv6 IP addresses for the technician port.\n\nEnsure that the technician port is not connected to the organization’s network, or it acts as a DHCP server for other devices in the network segment.\n\nAfter connecting your PC or notebook to the technician port, ensure that you obtained a valid IPv4 DCHP address (for example, 192.168.0.12/24 ) and then complete the following steps to initialize the system:\n\nIf the system cannot be initialized, you are redirected to the Service Assistant interface. Use the displayed error codes to troubleshoot the problem.\n\n- 1. Open a supported browser and browse to http://install . The browser is automatically redirected to the System Initialization wizard. You can use instead the URL with the IP address (http://192.168.0.1 ) if you are not automatically redirected.\n\nChapter 4. Initial configuration 89\n\n## 4.2.1 System initialization wizard\n\nFigure 4-1 Location of the technician port" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7063908126918986, + "doc_id": "bc4633f4ff9618bfed1542e2d1d5a7eada2eae2dabab5365715721ad4cae0ea4", + "edit_distance": 0.3551020408163265, + "f1_score": 0.8963585434173669, + "meteor": 0.7192437344475868, + "precision": 0.9090909090909091, + "pred_md": "Chapter 5.\n\n## Graphical user interface\n\nThis chapter describes an overview of the IBM Spectrum Virtualize graphical user interface (GUI). The management GUI is a tool that is enabled and provided by IBM Spectrum Virtualize that helps you to monitor, manage, and configure your system.\n\nThis chapter explains the basic view and the configuration procedures that are required to get your IBM Storwize V7000 environment running as quickly as possible by using the GUI.\n\nThis chapter does not describe advanced troubleshooting or problem determination and some of the complex operations (compression, encryption). For more information, see Chapter 13, 'RAS, monitoring, and troubleshooting' on page 673.\n\nThroughout this chapter, all GUI menu items are introduced in a systematic, logical order as they appear in the GUI. However, topics that are described more in detail in other chapters of the book are only referred to here. For example, storage pools (Chapter 6, 'Storage pools' on page 191), volumes (Chapter 7, 'Volumes' on page 241), hosts (Chapter 8, 'Hosts' on page 317), and Copy Services (Chapter 11, 'Advanced Copy Services' on page 435) are described in separate chapters.\n\nDemonstration: The IBM Client Demonstration Center includes a demonstration of the V8.2 GUI. For more information, see the IBM Client Demonstration Center (log in required).\n\nThis chapter includes the following topics:\n\n- /SM590000 5.1, 'Normal operations by using the GUI' on page 132\n- /SM590000 5.2, 'GUI introduction' on page 136\n- /SM590000 5.3, 'System View window' on page 143\n- /SM590000 5.4, 'Monitoring menu' on page 147\n- /SM590000 5.5, 'Pools' on page 155\n- /SM590000 5.6, 'Volumes' on page 155\n- /SM590000 5.7, 'Hosts' on page 156\n- /SM590000 5.8, 'Copy Services' on page 157\n- /SM590000 5.9, 'Access' on page 157\n- /SM590000 5.10, 'Settings' on page 162\n- /SM590000 5.11, 'Additional frequent tasks in GUI' on page 183\n\n' Copyright IBM Corp. 2011, 2018, 2019. All rights reserved.\n\n131", + "recall": 0.8839779005524862, + "true_md": "## 5\n\n## Graphical user interface\n\nThis chapter describes an overview of the IBM Spectrum Virtualize graphical user interface (GUI). The management GUI is a tool that is enabled and provided by IBM Spectrum Virtualize that helps you to monitor, manage, and configure your system.\n\nThis chapter explains the basic view and the configuration procedures that are required to get your IBM Storwize V7000 environment running as quickly as possible by using the GUI.\n\nThis chapter does not describe advanced troubleshooting or problem determination and some of the complex operations (compression, encryption). For more information, see Chapter 13, “RAS, monitoring, and troubleshooting” on page 673.\n\nThroughout this chapter, all GUI menu items are introduced in a systematic, logical order as they appear in the GUI. However, topics that are described more in detail in other chapters of the book are only referred to here. For example, storage pools (Chapter 6, “Storage pools” on page 191), volumes (Chapter 7, “Volumes” on page 241), hosts (Chapter 8, “Hosts” on page 317), and Copy Services (Chapter 11, “Advanced Copy Services” on page 435) are described in separate chapters.\n\nDemonstration: The IBM Client Demonstration Center includes a demonstration of the V8.2 GUI. For more information, see the IBM Client Demonstration Center (log in required). \n\nThis chapter includes the following topics:\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> 5.11, “Additional frequent tasks in GUI” on page 183\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> 5.10, “Settings” on page 162\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> 5.9, “Access” on page 157\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> 5.8, “Copy Services” on page 157\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> 5.7, “Hosts” on page 156\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> 5.6, “Volumes” on page 155\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> 5.5, “Pools” on page 155\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> 5.4, “Monitoring menu” on page 147\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> 5.3, “System View window” on page 143\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> 5.2, “GUI introduction” on page 136\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> 5.1, “Normal operations by using the GUI” on page 132\n\n' Copyright IBM Corp. 2011, 201 8, 2019. All rights reserved.\n\n131" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8894245046445955, + "doc_id": "cadd8cedfed1cda823c070c0a2468a66b097573aa29b96068b47fe6e4ae976b5", + "edit_distance": 0.22983870967741934, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9648231205832157, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "606\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\nFigure 12-1 shows an encryption example. Encrypted disks and encrypted data paths are marked in blue. Unencrypted disks and data paths are marked in red. The server sends unencrypted data to a SAN Volume Controller 2145-DH8 system, which stores hardware-encrypted data on internal disks. The data is mirrored to a remote Storwize V7000 Gen1 system using Remote Copy. The data flowing through the Remote Copy link is not encrypted. Because the Storwize V7000 Gen1 (2076-324) cannot perform any encryption activities, data on the Storwize V7000 Gen1 is not encrypted.\n\nFigure 12-1 Encryption on single site\n\nFigure 12-1 Encryption on single site\n\nTo enable encryption of both data copies, the Storwize V7000 Gen1 must be replaced by an encryption capable IBM Spectrum Virtualize system, as shown in Figure 12-2. After such replacement, both copies of data are encrypted, but the Remote Copy communication between both sites remains unencrypted.\n\nFigure 12-2 Encryption on both sites\n\nFigure 12-2 Encryption on both sites\n\nFigure 12-3 shows an example configuration that uses software and hardware encryption. Software encryption is used to encrypt an external virtualized storage system (2076-324 in Figure 12-3). Hardware encryption is used for internal, SAS-attached disk drives.\n\nFigure 12-3 Example of software encryption and hardware encryption\n\nFigure 12-3 Example of software encryption and hardware encryption", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Figure 12-1 shows an encryption example. Encrypted disks and encrypted data paths are marked in blue. Unencrypted disks and data paths are marked in red. The server sends unencrypted data to a SAN Volume Controller 2145-DH8 system, which stores hardware-encrypted data on internal disks. The data is mirrored to a remote Storwize V7000 Gen1 system using Remote Copy. The data flowing through the Remote Copy link is not encrypted. Because the Storwize V7000 Gen1 (2076-324) cannot perform any encryption activities, data on the Storwize V7000 Gen1 is not encrypted.\n\nTo enable encryption of both data copies, the Storwize V7000 Gen1 must be replaced by an encryption capable IBM Spectrum Virtualize system, as shown in Figure 12-2. After such replacement, both copies of data are encrypted, but the Remote Copy communication between both sites remains unencrypted.\n\nFigure 12-3 shows an example configuration that uses software and hardware encryption. Software encryption is used to encrypt an external virtualized storage system (2076-324 in Figure 12-3). Hardware encryption is used for internal, SAS-attached disk drives.\n\nFigure 12-1 Encryption on single site\n\nFigure 12-2 Encryption on both sites\n\nFigure 12-3 Example of software encryption and hardware encryption\n\n606 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9264263507172961, + "doc_id": "7feada5ea90f03c99b3ee77d256c335294b29c05d93ede47b73a291283a425ad", + "edit_distance": 0.45410628019323673, + "f1_score": 0.9717514124293785, + "meteor": 0.8808634666515982, + "precision": 0.9717514124293786, + "pred_md": "42\n\nIBM Content Manager OnDemand Guide\n\n- 6. Run the ARSDB program. This program name is case-sensitive .\n\narsdb -I ARC95037 -c\n\n- 7. The ARSDB program generates a series of messages. It acknowledges the successful creation of the tables when all of the tables are created without any error; otherwise, it creates error messages.\n\nYou might see a message that is similar to the following example:\n\narsdb: 'Unable to determine the database engine'\n\nThis message might look like a DB2 error, but the ARSDB program cannot read the configuration file. Check the log for any IBM RACFfi messages that are writing to or opening the file system.\n\nMany installations run several DB2 systems on the z/OS logical partition (LPAR). Sometimes, this approach can lead to errors if the link list contains only the DSNLOAD and DSNEXIT library from a different DB2 subsystem. You can add your requested DB2 library by running the export command:\n\nexport STEPLIB='SYS1.DSNA.SDNSLOAD:SYS1.DSNA.SDSNLOD2:SYS1.DSNA.SDSNEXIT'\n\nThis command sets the environment.\n\nTip: If you exit the shell, the setting is gone. Y ou can add the export command to your OMVS login profile. Check your variables by running SET .\n\n## Initializing the system log, system load, and system migration\n\nAfter you create the Content Manager OnDemand system tables, the system log must be initialized with the ARSSYSCR program for this new instance. To do so, complete the following steps:\n\n- 1. Move to the Content Manager OnDemand executable directory by running the following command:\n\ncd /opt/IBM/ondemand/V9.5/bin\n\n- 2. Run the ARSSYSCR program for this instance and use the -I parameter:\n\narssyscr - I ARC95037 -l\n\nHere, ARC95037 is the name of the instance.\n\nContent Manager OnDemand supports the ability to track loading activity with the system load logging facility. Content Manager OnDemand stores these load messages in the system load log. You can initialize the system load log by completing the following steps:\n\n- 1. Move to the Content Manager OnDemand executable directory by running the following command:\n- /opt/IBM/ondemand/V9.5/bin\n- 2. Run the ARSSYSCR program for this instance and use the -I parameter:\n\narssyscr - I ARC95037 -a\n\nAgain, -I ARC95037 is the new Content Manager OnDemand instance.", + "recall": 0.9717514124293786, + "true_md": "- 6. Run the ARSDB program. This program name is case-sensitive .\n\n- 7. The ARSDB program generates a series of messages. It acknowledges the successful creation of the tables when all of the tables are created without any error; otherwise, it creates error messages.\n\n- 1. Move to the Content Manager OnDemand executable directory by running the following command:\n\n- 2. Run the ARSSYSCR program for this instance and use the -I parameter:\n\n- 1. Move to the Content Manager OnDemand executable directory by running the following command:\n\n- 2. Run the ARSSYSCR program for this instance and use the -I parameter:\n\n42 IBM Content Manager OnDemand Guide\n\narsdb -I ARC95037 -c\n\nYou might see a message that is similar to the following example:\n\narsdb: “Unable to determine the database engine” \n\nThis message might look like a DB2 error, but the ARSDB program cannot read the configuration file. Check the log for any IBM RACFfi messages that are writing to or opening the file system.\n\nMany installations run several DB2 systems on the z/OS logical partition (LPAR). Sometimes, this approach can lead to errors if the link list contains only the DSNLOAD and DSNEXIT library from a different DB2 subsystem. You can add your requested DB2 library by running the export command:\n\nexport STEPLIB=”SYS1.DSNA.SDNSLOAD:SYS1.DSNA.SDSNLOD2:SYS1.DSNA.SDSNEXIT”\n\nThis command sets the environment.\n\nTip: If you exit the shell, the setting is gone. You can add the export command to your OMVS login profile. Check your variables by running SET .\n\nAfter you create the Content Manager OnDemand system tables, the system log must be initialized with the ARSSYSCR program for this new instance. To do so, complete the following steps:\n\ncd /opt/IBM/ondemand/V9.5/bin\n\narssyscr - I ARC95037 -l\n\nHere, ARC95037 is the name of the instance.\n\nContent Manager OnDemand supports the ability to track loading activity with the system load logging facility. Content Manager OnDemand stores these load messages in the system load log. You can initialize the system load log by completing the following steps:\n\n/opt/IBM/ondemand/V9.5/bin\n\narssyscr - I ARC95037 -a\n\nAgain, -I ARC95037 is the new Content Manager OnDemand instance.\n\n## Initializing the system log, system load, and system migration" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9061348933424914, + "doc_id": "ab75c3623ff9e69cfee0f08771f7273d2df37c89ec13a8cee8d7a707cf945591", + "edit_distance": 0.5187637969094923, + "f1_score": 0.9679144385026737, + "meteor": 0.8790963173132089, + "precision": 0.9731182795698925, + "pred_md": "Then, the system is able to see external Storwize systems as storage controllers and can virtualize LUs that are provided by them.\n\nYou also get a warning that your Storwize is in a storage layer if you try to add an iSCSI storage controller with the GUI. The system prompts you to convert the system to replication layer automatically.\n\nNote: Before you change the system layer, the following conditions must be met:\n\n- /SM590000 No host object can be configured with worldwide port names (WWPNs) from a Storwize family system.\n- /SM590000 No system partnerships can be defined.\n- /SM590000 No Storwize family system can be visible on the SAN fabric.\n\nTo switch IBM Storwize V7000 system layer, you can also use chsystem CLI command, as shown in Example 6-23. If executed successfully, it returns no output.\n\nExample 6-23 Changing system layer\n\n```\nIBM_Storwize:ITSOV7K:superuser>lssystem |grep layer layer storage IBM_Storwize:ITSOV7K:superuser>chsystem -layer replication IBM_Storwize:ITSOV7K:superuser>\n```\n\nFor more information about layers and how to change them, see IBM Knowledge Center .\n\n## Fibre Channel external storage controllers\n\nA controller connected through Fibre Channel is detected automatically by the system, provided that the cabling, the zoning, and the system layer are configured correctly.\n\nIf the external controller is not detected, ensure that the Storwize V7000 is cabled and zoned into the same storage area network (SAN) as the external storage system. Check that layers are set correctly on both virtualizing and virtualized systems if they belong to the IBM Storwize family.\n\nAfter the problem is corrected, use Actions → Discover Storage button found in Pools → External Storage , as shown in Figure 6-49, to rescan the Fibre Channel network.\n\nFigure 6-49 Discover storage menu\n\nFigure 6-49 Discover storage menu\n\nThis action executes CLI command detectmdisk . It returns no output. Although it might appear that the command has completed, some extra time might be required for it to run. detectmdisk is asynchronous and returns a prompt while the command continues to run in the background.\n\n## iSCSI external storage controllers\n\nUnlike Fibre Channel connections, you must manually configure iSCSI connections between the Storwize V7000 and the external storage controller. Until you do this, the controller is not listed in the External Storage pane.\n\nChapter 6. Storage pools\n\n229", + "recall": 0.9627659574468085, + "true_md": "Then, the system is able to see external Storwize systems as storage controllers and can virtualize LUs that are provided by them. \n\nYou also get a warning that your Storwize is in a storage layer if you try to add an iSCSI storage controller with the GUI. The system prompts you to convert the system to replication layer automatically.\n\nTo switch IBM Storwize V7000 system layer, you can also use chsystem CLI command, as shown in Example 6-23. If executed successfully, it returns no output.\n\nNote: Before you change the system layer, the following conditions must be met:\n\nFor more information about layers and how to change them, see IBM Knowledge Center .\n\nA controller connected through Fibre Channel is detected automatically by the system, provided that the cabling, the zoning, and the system layer are configured correctly.\n\nIf the external controller is not detected, ensure that the Storwize V7000 is cabled and zoned into the same storage area network (SAN) as the external storage system. Check that layers are set correctly on both virtualizing and virtualized systems if they belong to the IBM Storwize family. \n\nAfter the problem is corrected, use Actions → Discover Storage button found in Pools → External Storage , as shown in Figure 6-49, to rescan the Fibre Channel network.\n\nThis action executes CLI command detectmdisk . It returns no output. Although it might appear that the command has completed, some extra time might be required for it to run. detectmdisk is asynchronous and returns a prompt while the command continues to run in the background.\n\nUnlike Fibre Channel connections, you must manually configure iSCSI connections between the Storwize V7000 and the external storage controller. Until you do this, the controller is not listed in the External Storage pane.\n\n## iSCSI external storage controllers\n\n## Fibre Channel external storage controllers\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> No host object can be configured with worldwide port names (WWPNs) from a Storwize family system.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> No system partnerships can be defined.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> No Storwize family system can be visible on the SAN fabric.\n\nExample 6-23 Changing system layer\n\nIBM\\_Storwize:ITSOV7K:superuser>lssystem |grep layer layer storage IBM\\_Storwize:ITSOV7K:superuser>chsystem -layer replication IBM\\_Storwize:ITSOV7K:superuser>\n\nFigure 6-49 Discover storage menu\n\nChapter 6. Storage pools 229" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8592135418026083, + "doc_id": "fa03018adfdb256951766d9ce129aa9a6eb8f4326aef0be156db0e13cb5d20b9", + "edit_distance": 0.3198757763975155, + "f1_score": 0.958490566037736, + "meteor": 0.8962780972604233, + "precision": 0.9548872180451128, + "pred_md": "454\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\nTo avoid any significant impact on performance because of multiple targets, FlashCopy creates dependencies between the targets. Dependencies can be considered as 'hidden' FlashCopy mappings that are not visible to and cannot be managed by the user. A dependency is created between the most recent target and the previous one (in order of start time). Figure 11-13 shows an example of a source volume with three targets.\n\nWhen the three targets are started, Target T0 was started first and considered the 'oldest.' Target T1 was started next and is considered 'next oldest,' and finally Target T2 was started last and considered the 'most recent' or 'newest.' The 'next oldest' target for T2 is T1. The 'next oldest' target for T1 is T0. T1 is newer than T2, and T0 is newer than T1.\n\nFigure 11-13 FlashCopy dependencies example\n\nFigure 11-13 FlashCopy dependencies example\n\n## Source read with Multiple target FlashCopy\n\nThere is no specific behavior for read operations on source volumes when there are multiple targets for that volume. The data is always read from the source.\n\n## Source write with Multiple Target FlashCopy (Copy on Write)\n\nA write to the source volume does not cause its data to be copied to all of the targets. Instead, it is copied to the most recent target volume only. For example, consider the sequence of events that are listed in Table 11-3, for a source volume and three targets started at different times. In this example, there is no background copy. The 'most recent' target is indicated with an asterisk.\n\nTable 11-3 Sequence example of write IOs on a source with multiple targets", + "recall": 0.9621212121212122, + "true_md": "To avoid any significant impact on performance because of multiple targets, FlashCopy creates dependencies between the targets. Dependencies can be considered as “hidden” FlashCopy mappings that are not visible to and cannot be managed by the user. A dependency is created between the most recent target and the previous one (in order of start time). Figure 11-13 shows an example of a source volume with three targets.\n\nWhen the three targets are started, Target T0 was started first and considered the “oldest.” Target T1 was started next and is considered “next oldest,” and finally Target T2 was started last and considered the “most recent” or “newest.” The “next oldest” target for T2 is T1. The “next oldest” target for T1 is T0. T1 is newer than T2, and T0 is newer than T1. \n\nThere is no specific behavior for read operations on source volumes when there are multiple targets for that volume. The data is always read from the source.\n\nA write to the source volume does not cause its data to be copied to all of the targets. Instead, it is copied to the most recent target volume only. For example, consider the sequence of events that are listed in Table 11-3, for a source volume and three targets started at different times. In this example, there is no background copy. The “most recent” target is indicated with an asterisk.\n\n## Source read with Multiple target FlashCopy\n\n## Source write with Multiple Target FlashCopy (Copy on Write)\n\nFigure 11-13 FlashCopy dependencies example\n\nTable 11-3 Sequence example of write IOs on a source with multiple targets\n\n454 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8077545036581911, + "doc_id": "3e224cd46608a0520d78c965004c38e1423d636a303b464c09563ceee36e4ab2", + "edit_distance": 0.326271186440678, + "f1_score": 0.9734042553191489, + "meteor": 0.7486101395044363, + "precision": 0.9891891891891892, + "pred_md": "Draft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n8459ch08.fm\n\n- /SM590000 HDFS\n- /SM590000 HGST\n- /SM590000 NetApp Object Storage\n\nFor further information about the benefits of using IBM Aspera with third party cloud storage services, see the white paper IBM Aspera Direct-to-Cloud Storage at the following website:\n\nhttps://www.ibm.com/downloads/cas/AWOQXB8G\n\n## 8.3 Configuring a multicloud data lake\n\nThis section introduces the concept of a data lake and how it fits in a multicloud environment.\n\n## 8.3.1 What is a data lake?\n\nA Data lake is a next-generation hybrid data management solution designed to meet the challenge and need to deal with big data in a hybrid multicloud environment. It is not a product but rather a hybrid data management reference architecture designed to form part of your data governance strategy. Using a data lake offers greater flexibility than a data warehouse. A data lake consolidates an organization's data into a governed and well-managed environment that supports both production workloads and analytics development.\n\nThe benefits of using a data lake are:\n\n- /SM590000 Storing data in its native format means less time spent on data preparation\n- /SM590000 Simplified data access\n- /SM590000 Enhanced agility for applications data users\n- /SM590000 Improved decision-making\n- /SM590000 Reduced costs\n\nFurther information describing a data lake and the benefits in more detail can found at:\n\nhttps://www.ibm.com/uk-en/analytics/data-lake\n\nhttps://www.ibm.com/downloads/cas/ON4WK472\n\nhttps://www.ibm.com/downloads/cas/PWN7GNX3\n\nThere are a number of data lake providers operating in a multicloud environment:\n\n- /SM590000 IBM (through a partnership with Cloudera)\n- /SM590000 Google\n- /SM590000 Amazon AWS\n- /SM590000 Microsoft Azure\n- /SM590000 Hadoop\n- /SM590000 Terradata\n- /SM590000 Hortonworks\n\n## 8.3.2 Using a data lake in a multicloud environment\n\nUsing a data lake in a multicloud environment enables secure integration and provides a means to achieve unified data governance in a hybrid environment. Your data lake repositories will accept data from any data source in its native format giving a common platform for containerized applications to use in both on-premises data centers and in the cloud.\n\nChapter 8. Special topics\n\n187", + "recall": 0.9581151832460733, + "true_md": "Draft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n8459ch08.fm\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> HDFS \n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> HGST\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> NetApp Object Storage\n\nFor further information about the benefits of using IBM Aspera with third party cloud storage services, see the white paper IBM Aspera Direct-to-Cloud Storage at the following website:\n\nhttps://www.ibm.com/downloads/cas/AWOQXB8G\n\n## 8.3 Configuring a multicloud data lake\n\n## 8.3.1 What is a data lake?\n\n## 8.3.2 Using a data lake in a multicloud environment\n\nThis section introduces the concept of a data lake and how it fits in a multicloud environment.\n\nA Data lake is a next-generation hybrid data management solution designed to meet the challenge and need to deal with big data in a hybrid multicloud environment. It is not a product but rather a hybrid data management reference architecture designed to form part of your data governance strategy. Using a data lake offers greater flexibility than a data warehouse. A data lake consolidates an organization’s data into a governed and well-managed environment that supports both production workloads and analytics development.\n\nThe benefits of using a data lake are:\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Storing data in its native format means less time spent on data preparation\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Simplified data access\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Enhanced agility for applications data users\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Improved decision-making\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Reduced costs\n\nFurther information describing a data lake and the benefits in more detail can found at:\n\nhttps://www.ibm.com/uk-en/analytics/data-lake\n\nhttps://www.ibm.com/downloads/cas/ON4WK472\n\nhttps://www.ibm.com/downloads/cas/PWN7GNX3\n\nThere are a number of data lake providers operating in a multicloud environment:\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> IBM (through a partnership with Cloudera)\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Google\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Amazon AWS\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Microsoft Azure\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Hadoop\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Terradata\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Hortonworks\n\nUsing a data lake in a multicloud environment enables secure integration and provides a means to achieve unified data governance in a hybrid environment. Your data lake repositories will accept data from any data source in its native format giving a common platform for containerized applications to use in both on-premises data centers and in the cloud.\n\nChapter 8. Special topics 187" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8452099417775327, + "doc_id": "b8a402fa3a3a9e4f90641c11e1e518bad7fe5f1d9890f3a2f1e00d52e4cbf5a4", + "edit_distance": 0.5187165775401069, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.924036252037557, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "510\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\n- 3. A list of available snapshots is displayed. The snapshots date (point-in-time), their type (full or incremental), their state, and their size are shown, as in Figure 11-78. Select the version that you want to restore and click Next .\n\nFigure 11-78 Selecting a snapshot version to restore\n\nFigure 11-78 Selecting a snapshot version to restore\n\nIf the snapshot version that you selected has later generations (more recent Snapshot dates), the newer copies are removed from the cloud.\n\n- 4. The IBM Spectrum Virtualize GUI provides two options to restore the snapshot from cloud. You can restore the snapshot from cloud directly to the selected volume, or create a volume to restore the data on, as shown in Figure 11-79. Make a selection and click Next .\n\nFigure 11-79 Restoring a snapshot on an existing volume or on a new volume\n\nFigure 11-79 Restoring a snapshot on an existing volume or on a new volume", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "- 3. A list of available snapshots is displayed. The snapshots date (point-in-time), their type (full or incremental), their state, and their size are shown, as in Figure 11-78. Select the version that you want to restore and click Next .\n\n- 4. The IBM Spectrum Virtualize GUI provides two options to restore the snapshot from cloud. You can restore the snapshot from cloud directly to the selected volume, or create a volume to restore the data on, as shown in Figure 11-79. Make a selection and click Next .\n\nIf the snapshot version that you selected has later generations (more recent Snapshot dates), the newer copies are removed from the cloud.\n\nFigure 11-78 Selecting a snapshot version to restore\n\nFigure 11-79 Restoring a snapshot on an existing volume or on a new volume\n\n510 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.19450585737961856, + "doc_id": "8368d039be24370e1fa83b51b4216dc2570abec6b1b1d87da2515db1485dd59c", + "edit_distance": 0.6488888888888888, + "f1_score": 0.7857142857142858, + "meteor": 0.4230174853766917, + "precision": 0.9758064516129032, + "pred_md": "326\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\n## Total Devices : 1\n\n## Total Devices : 1\n\n## Note: Consider the following points:\n\n- /SM590000 You can verify that you are logged in to the NPIV ports by entering the lsfabric -host host\\_id\\_or\\_name command. If I/O activity is occurring, each host has at least one line in the command output that corresponds to a host port and shows active in the activity field:\n- -Hosts where no I/O has occurred in the past 5 minutes show inactive for any login.\n- -Hosts that do not adhere to preferred paths might still be processing I/O to primary ports.\n- /SM590000 Depending on the host operating system, rescanning of for storage might be required on some hosts to recognize more paths that are now provided by using primary host attach ports (virtual WWPNs).\n- 8. After all hosts are rezoned and the pathing validated, change the system NPIV to enabled mode by entering the command that is shown in Example 8-11.\n\nNow NPIV is enabled on the Storwize V7000 system, and you confirmed the hosts are using the virtualized WWPNs for I/O. To complete the NPIV implementation, the host zones can be amended to remove the old primary attach port WWPNs.", + "recall": 0.657608695652174, + "true_md": "Now NPIV is enabled on the Storwize V7000 system, and you confirmed the hosts are using the virtualized WWPNs for I/O. To complete the NPIV implementation, the host zones can be amended to remove the old primary attach port WWPNs. \n\nTotal Devices : 1 DEV#: 0 DEVICE NAME: Disk3 Part0 TYPE: 2145 POLICY: OPTIMIZED SERIAL: 60050764008680083800000000000000 LUN SIZE: 20.0GB ============================================================================ Path# Adapter/Hard Disk State Mode Select Errors 0 * Scsi Port2 Bus0/Disk1 Part0 OPEN NORMAL 3991778 0 1 * Scsi Port2 Bus0/Disk1 Part0 OPEN NORMAL 416214 0 2 * Scsi Port3 Bus0/Disk1 Part0 OPEN NORMAL 22255 0 3 * Scsi Port3 Bus0/Disk1 Part0 OPEN NORMAL 372785 0 C:\\Program Files\\IBM\\SDDDSM>datapath query device Total Devices : 1 DEV#: 0 DEVICE NAME: Disk3 Part0 TYPE: 2145 POLICY: OPTIMIZED SERIAL: 60050764008680083800000000000000 LUN SIZE: 20.0GB ============================================================================ Path# Adapter/Hard Disk State Mode Select Errors 0 * Scsi Port2 Bus0/Disk1 Part0 OPEN NORMAL 3991778 2 1 * Scsi Port2 Bus0/Disk1 Part0 OPEN NORMAL 416214 1 2 * Scsi Port3 Bus0/Disk1 Part0 OPEN NORMAL 22255 0 3 * Scsi Port3 Bus0/Disk1 Part0 OPEN NORMAL 372785 2 4 * Scsi Port2 Bus0/Disk1 Part0 OPEN NORMAL 22219 0 5 Scsi Port2 Bus0/Disk1 Part0 OPEN NORMAL 95109 0 6 * Scsi Port3 Bus0/Disk1 Part0 OPEN NORMAL 2 0 7 Scsi Port3 Bus0/Disk1 Part0 OPEN NORMAL 91838 0\n\nNote: Consider the following points:\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> You can verify that you are logged in to the NPIV ports by entering the lsfabric -host host\\_id\\_or\\_name command. If I/O activity is occurring, each host has at least one line in the command output that corresponds to a host port and shows active in the activity field:\n\n- – Hosts where no I/O has occurred in the past 5 minutes show inactive for any login.\n\n- – Hosts that do not adhereto preferred paths might still be processing I/O to primary ports.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Depending on the host operating system, rescanning of for storage might be required on some hosts to recognize more paths that are now provided by using primary host attach ports (virtual WWPNs).\n\n- 8. After all hosts are rezoned and the pathing validated, change the system NPIV to enabled mode by entering the command that is shown in Example 8-11.\n\nExample 8-11 Enabling the NPIV\n\nIBM\\_2145:ITSO:superuser> chiogrp -fctargetportmode enabled 0\n\n326 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.45513837625403597, + "doc_id": "b44d36be96ac027ff66717def17027428d7384c743636d58aa34dd763855ca3a", + "edit_distance": 0.5119047619047619, + "f1_score": 0.8235294117647058, + "meteor": 0.5655610155610156, + "precision": 0.8555555555555555, + "pred_md": "Chapter 12.\n\n## Encryption\n\nEncryption protects against the potential exposure of sensitive user data that is stored on discarded, lost, or stolen storage devices. Storwize V7000 supports optional encryption of data at-rest.\n\nThis chapter includes the following topics:\n\n- /SM590000 12.1, 'Planning for encryption' on page 604\n- /SM590000 12.2, 'Defining encryption of data at-rest' on page 604\n- /SM590000 12.3, 'Activating encryption' on page 609\n- /SM590000 12.4, 'Enabling encryption' on page 619\n- /SM590000 12.5, 'Configuring more providers' on page 647\n- /SM590000 12.6, 'Migrating between providers' on page 653\n- /SM590000 12.7, 'Recovering from a provider loss' on page 656\n- /SM590000 12.8, 'Using encryption' on page 656\n- /SM590000 12.9, 'Rekeying an encryption-enabled system' on page 665\n- /SM590000 12.10, 'Disabling encryption' on page 671\n\n' Copyright IBM Corp. 2011, 2018, 2019. All rights reserved.\n\n603\n\n## 12", + "recall": 0.7938144329896907, + "true_md": "## 12\n\n## Encryption\n\nEncryption protects against the potential exposure of sensitive user data that is stored on discarded, lost, or stolen storage devices. Storwize V7000 supports optional encryption of data at-rest.\n\nThis chapter includes the following topics:\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> 12.1, “Planning for encryption” on page 604\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> 12.2, “Defining encryption of data at-rest” on page 604\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> 12.3, “Activating encryption” on page 609\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> 12.4, “Enabling encryption” on page 619\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> 12.5, “Configuring more providers” on page 647\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> 12.6, “Migrating between providers” on page 653\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> 12.8, “Using encryption” on page 656\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> 12.10, “Disabling encryption” on page 671\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> 12.9, “Rekeying an encryption-enabled system” on page 665\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> 12.7, “Recovering from a provider loss” on page 656\n\n' Copyright IBM Corp. 2011, 201 8, 2019. All rights reserved.\n\n603" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7960095973947503, + "doc_id": "c75f593864527844822e0029e9255592df40412b6f3248be89362a2c6516830a", + "edit_distance": 0.29234629861982436, + "f1_score": 0.9932885906040269, + "meteor": 0.9679605260413922, + "precision": 0.9866666666666667, + "pred_md": "8459ch06.fm\n\nDraft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n114\n\nRed Hat OpenShift and IBM Cloud Paks on IBM Power Systems: Volume 1\n\n| ansible\\_user=root |\n|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|\n| ##-----------------------------------------------------------------------## |\n| ## OpenShift Basic Vars |\n| ##-----------------------------------------------------------------------## |\n| # Deployment type openshift\\_deployment\\_type=openshift-enterprise |\n| # WARNING: only disable these checks in LAB/TEST environments |\n| # openshift\\_disable\\_check=\"disk\\_availability,memory\\_availability\" |\n| # OpenShift Version: |\n| openshift\\_release=3.11 |\n| openshift\\_pkg\\_version=-3.11.154 openshift\\_image\\_tag=v3.11.154 |\n| # firewalld recommended for new installations (default is iptables) |\n| os\\_firewall\\_use\\_firewalld=true |\n| # enable ntp on masters to ensure proper failover openshift\\_clock\\_enabled=true |\n| debug\\_level=5 |\n| ##-----------------------------------------------------------------------## ## OpenShift Registries Locations |\n| ##-----------------------------------------------------------------------## # NOTE: Need credentials from: https://access.redhat.com/terms-based-registry/ |\n| oreg\\_url=registry.redhat.io/openshift3/ose-${component}:${version} oreg\\_auth\\_user={{CHANGEME\\_REGISTRY\\_SERVICE\\_ACCOUNT}} |\n| oreg\\_auth\\_password={{CHANGEME\\_SERVICE\\_KEY}} ##-----------------------------------------------------------------------## ## OpenShift Master Vars |\n| ##-----------------------------------------------------------------------## |\n| openshift\\_master\\_api\\_port=8443 # Internal cluster name |\n| openshift\\_master\\_console\\_port=8443 openshift\\_master\\_cluster\\_hostname=bsocp01.domain.example.com # External cluster name |\n| # openshift\\_master\\_cluster\\_public\\_hostname=ocp-ext.example.com |\n| # Default wildcard domain for applications openshift\\_master\\_default\\_subdomain=apps.bs.ibm.com |\n| ##-----------------------------------------------------------------------## ## OpenShift Authentication Vars |\n| ##-----------------------------------------------------------------------## # Available Identity Providers |\n| # |\n| https://docs.openshift.com/container-platform/3.11/install\\_config/configuring\\_authenticatio |\n| n.html |\n| ##---------------------## # htpasswd Authentication |\n| ##---------------------## |\n| # NOTE: read initial identities in htpasswd format from /root/htpasswd.openshift openshift\\_master\\_identity\\_providers=[{'name': 'htpasswd\\_auth', 'login': 'true', 'challenge': 'true', 'kind': 'HTPasswdPasswordIdentityProvider'}] |\n| # To define initial users directly in the inventory file: # Note: |\n| tpasswd |\n| https://docs.openshift.com/container-platform/3.3/admin\\_solutions/master\\_node\\_config.html#h openshift\\_master\\_htpasswd\\_users={'admin':'$apr1$hYehsOQ6$DQWSmGhPdS2LzS5cDJuU21','developer |\n| # To use external htpassword file: |\n| ':'$apr1$I0a9K2v0$ZLPrXnQseMlwTJIYzM8Hd.'} |\n| # openshift\\_master\\_htpasswd\\_file=/root/htpasswd.openshift |", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "8459ch06.fm\n\nDraft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\nansible\\_user=root ##-----------------------------------------------------------------------## ## OpenShift Basic Vars ##-----------------------------------------------------------------------## # Deployment type openshift\\_deployment\\_type=openshift-enterprise # WARNING: only disable these checks in LAB/TEST environments # openshift\\_disable\\_check=\"disk\\_availability,memory\\_availability\" # OpenShift Version: openshift\\_release=3.11 openshift\\_pkg\\_version=-3.11.154 openshift\\_image\\_tag=v3.11.154 # firewalld recommended for new installations (default is iptables) os\\_firewall\\_use\\_firewalld=true # enable ntp on masters to ensure proper failover openshift\\_clock\\_enabled=true debug\\_level=5 ##-----------------------------------------------------------------------## ## OpenShift Registries Locations ##-----------------------------------------------------------------------## # NOTE: Need credentials from: https://access.redhat.com/terms-based-registry/ oreg\\_url=registry.redhat.io/openshift3/ose-${component}:${version} oreg\\_auth\\_user={{CHANGEME\\_REGISTRY\\_SERVICE\\_ACCOUNT}} oreg\\_auth\\_password={{CHANGEME\\_SERVICE\\_KEY}} ##-----------------------------------------------------------------------## ## OpenShift Master Vars ##-----------------------------------------------------------------------## openshift\\_master\\_api\\_port=8443 openshift\\_master\\_console\\_port=8443 # Internal cluster name openshift\\_master\\_cluster\\_hostname=bsocp01.domain.example.com # External cluster name # openshift\\_master\\_cluster\\_public\\_hostname=ocp-ext.example.com # Default wildcard domain for applications openshift\\_master\\_default\\_subdomain=apps.bs.ibm.com ##-----------------------------------------------------------------------## ## OpenShift Authentication Vars ##-----------------------------------------------------------------------## # Available Identity Providers # https://docs.openshift.com/container-platform/3.11/install\\_config/configuring\\_authenticatio n.html ##---------------------## # htpasswd Authentication ##---------------------## # NOTE: read initial identities in htpasswd format from /root/htpasswd.openshift openshift\\_master\\_identity\\_providers=[{'name': 'htpasswd\\_auth', 'login': 'true', 'challenge': 'true', 'kind': 'HTPasswdPasswordIdentityProvider'}] # To define initial users directly in the inventory file: # Note: https://docs.openshift.com/container-platform/3.3/admin\\_solutions/master\\_node\\_config.html#h tpasswd openshift\\_master\\_htpasswd\\_users={'admin':'$apr1$hYehsOQ6$DQWSmGhPdS2LzS5cDJuU21','developer ':'$apr1$I0a9K2v0$ZLPrXnQseMlwTJIYzM8Hd.'} # To use external htpassword file: # openshift\\_master\\_htpasswd\\_file=/root/htpasswd.openshift\n\n114 Red Hat OpenShift and IBM Cloud Paks on IBM Power Systems: Volume 1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9669561327074109, + "doc_id": "b32b503d0f636bb4082e359aaae76ee496deff23d0a29246f710b979009291a2", + "edit_distance": 0.05511811023622047, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9977568831925044, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## 7.1.4 Managed mode and image mode volumes\n\nVolumes are configured within IBM Spectrum Virtualize by allocating a set of extents off one or more managed mode MDisks in the storage pool. Extents are the smallest allocation unit at the time of volume creation, so each MDisk extent maps to exactly one volume extent.\n\nNote: An MDisk extent maps to exactly one volume extent. For volumes with two copies, one volume extent maps to two MDisk extents (one for each volume copy).\n\nFigure 7-3 shows this mapping. It also shows a volume that consists of several extents that are shown as V0 - V7. Each of these extents is mapped to an extent on one of the MDisks: A, B, or C. The mapping table stores the details of this indirection.\n\nFigure 7-3 Simple view of block virtualization\n\nFigure 7-3 Simple view of block virtualization\n\nSeveral of the MDisk extents are unused; that is, no volume extent maps to them. These unused extents are available for use in creating volumes, migration, expansion, and so on.\n\nThe default and most common type of volumes in IBM Spectrum Virtualize are managed mode volumes. Managed mode volumes are allocated from a set of MDisk (by default, all MDisks belonging to a storage pool) and can be subject of the full set of virtualization functions.\n\nIn particular, they offer full flexibility in mapping between logical volume representation (logical blocks) and physical storage used to store these blocks. This requires that physical storage (MDisks) are fully managed by IBM Spectrum Virtualize, which means that the LUs that are presented to the IBM Spectrum Virtualize by the back-end storage systems does not contain any data when it is added to the storage pool.\n\nImage mode volumes enable IBM Spectrum Virtualize to work with LUs that were previously directly mapped to hosts. This is often required when IBM Spectrum Virtualize is introduced into a storage environment and image mode volumes are used a method enabling seamless migration of data and smooth transition to virtualized storage.\n\nChapter 7. Volumes\n\n245", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## 7.1.4 Managed mode and image mode volumes\n\nVolumes are configured within IBM Spectrum Virtualize by allocating a set of extents off one or more managed mode MDisks in the storage pool. Extents are the smallest allocation unit at the time of volume creation, so each MDisk extent maps to exactly one volume extent.\n\nNote: An MDisk extent maps to exactly one volume extent. For volumes with two copies, one volume extent maps to two MDisk extents (one for each volume copy).\n\nFigure 7-3 shows this mapping. It also shows a volume that consists of several extents that are shown as V0 - V7. Each of these extents is mapped to an extent on one of the MDisks: A, B, or C. The mapping table stores the details of this indirection. \n\nSeveral of the MDisk extents are unused; that is, no volume extent maps to them. These unused extents are available for use in creating volumes, migration, expansion, and so on.\n\nThe default and most common type of volumes in IBM Spectrum Virtualize are managed mode volumes. Managed mode volumes are allocated from a set of MDisk (by default, all MDisks belonging to a storage pool) and can be subject of the full set of virtualization functions. \n\nIn particular, they offer full flexibility in mapping between logical volume representation (logical blocks) and physical storage used to store these blocks. This requires that physical storage (MDisks) are fully managed by IBM Spectrum Virtualize, which means that the LUs that are presented to the IBM Spectrum Virtualize by the back-end storage systems does not contain any data when it is added to the storage pool.\n\nImage mode volumes enable IBM Spectrum Virtualize to work with LUs that were previously directly mapped to hosts. This is often required when IBM Spectrum Virtualize is introduced into a storage environment and image mode volumes are used a method enabling seamless migration of data and smooth transition to virtualized storage. \n\nFigure 7-3 Simple view of block virtualization\n\nChapter 7. Volumes 245" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8323582808920602, + "doc_id": "d94629c6ceee131ebc2ca59b08e487118c1fd6e481c63e7fe64314ef547f0cec", + "edit_distance": 0.6363636363636364, + "f1_score": 0.9466357308584686, + "meteor": 0.7882817310396977, + "precision": 0.9577464788732394, + "pred_md": "## 18.1 Troubleshooting common problems\n\nWhile administrators and users work with Content Manager OnDemand systems, they might encounter various problems. These problems can occur in several main areas. We classify them into the following categories:\n\n- /SM590000 Indexing and loading issues\n- /SM590000 Content Manager OnDemand maintenance issues\n- /SM590000 Monitoring the main server task arssockd\n- /SM590000 Installation and migration issues\n- /SM590000 Common server messages\n\nIn this section, we describe several of the common problems and provide possible solutions to them. At the end of the section, we also include a list of common server messages.\n\nTip for determining the cause of the problems: For the UNIX platform, the console message might help determine the cause of the problem. However, if you use Telnet from your personal computer, you might miss the important console message. For AIX, you can switch the console to your current terminal by running the swcons 'tty' command. To switch it back to the console, run the swcons command.\n\n## 18.1.1 Client issues\n\nUsers often encounter the following common problems when they run client-side applications:\n\n- /SM590000 Problem : Client connection received the error Server failed while ....\n\nReasons : The following areas might cause this problem:\n\n- -Server is not up, or the server is up but not responding to a request\n- -TCP/IP problems between Windows and the OnDemand host\n- -Protocol problem\n- -Firewall problem\n\nResolution : Check the following conditions:\n\n- -OnDemand library server is up, and it accepts requests. For example, log on to the OnDemand host and issue an arsdoc query against the OnDemand system log.\n- -You can ping the OnDemand host. If not, consult your OS support.\n- -The port OnDemand server is listening and ready for a supported protocol. For example, issue the netstat -tulpn command.\n- -The Linux fire wall is not on. For example, use the systemctl status firewalld command to turn off the firewall by issuing the systemctl disable firewalld command.\n- /SM590000 Problem : Content Navigator or a custom application encounters an error with OnDemand.\n\nResolution : Test the scenario with the OnDemand Windows client first. If the problem cannot be reproduced, turn on the OnDemand Web Enablement Kit (ODWEK) trace. (See 18.2, 'Information collection' on page 389). After the ODWEK application programming interface (API) in question is identified from the trace, run a stand-alone program to test the API. (A sample program can be requested from IBM.)\n\n378\n\nIBM Content Manager OnDemand Guide", + "recall": 0.9357798165137615, + "true_md": "## 18.1 Troubleshooting common problems\n\n## 18.1.1 Client issues\n\nWhile administrators and users work with Content Manager OnDemand systems, they might encounter various problems. These problems can occur in several main areas. We classify them into the following categories:\n\nIn this section, we describe several of the common problems and provide possible solutions to them. At the end of the section, we also include a list of common server messages. \n\nTip for determining the cause of the problems: For the UNIX platform, the console message might help determine the cause of the problem. However, if you use Telnet from your personal computer, you might miss the important console message. For AIX, you can switch the console to your current terminal by running the swcons 'tty' command. To switch it back to the console, run the swcons command.\n\nUsers often encounter the following common problems when they run client-side applications: \n\nReasons : The following areas might cause this problem:\n\nResolution : Check the following conditions:\n\nResolution : Test the scenario with the OnDemand Windows client first. If the problem cannot be reproduced, turn on the OnDemand Web Enablement Kit (ODWEK) trace. (See 18.2, “Information collection” on page 389). After the ODWEK application programming interface (API) in question is identified from the trace, run a stand-alone program to test the API. (A sample program can be requested from IBM.) \n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Indexing and loading issues\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Content Manager OnDemand maintenance issues\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Monitoring the main server task arssockd\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Installation and migration issues\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Common server messages\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Problem : Client connection received the error Server failed while ....\n\n- – Server is not up, or the server is up but not responding to a request\n\n- – TCP/IP problems between Windows and the OnDemand host\n\n- – Protocol problem\n\n- – Firewall problem \n\n- – OnDemand library server is up, and it accepts requests. For example, log on to the OnDemand host and issue an arsdoc query against the OnDemand system log. \n\n- – You can ping the OnDemand host. If not, consult your OS support. \n\n- – The port OnDemand server is listening and ready for a supported protocol. For example, issue the netstat -tulpn command. \n\n- – The Linux fire wall is not on. For example, use the systemctl status firewalld command to turn off the firewall by issuing the systemctl disable firewalld command. \n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Problem : Content Navigator or a custom application encounters an error with OnDemand.\n\n378 IBM Content Manager OnDemand Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9084414188657312, + "doc_id": "19b9192f4363313b351a23ba1ea0f852910719006cf398c14c526f7a59dc179c", + "edit_distance": 0.4453924914675768, + "f1_score": 0.980561555075594, + "meteor": 0.8374215068718235, + "precision": 0.978448275862069, + "pred_md": "This option has two variations:\n\n- GLYPH<129> Space-efficient source and target with background copy\n- Copies only the allocated space.\n- GLYPH<129> Space-efficient target with no background copy\n\nCopies only the space that is used for changes between the source and target, and is referred to as a snapshot .\n\nThis function can be used with multitarget, cascaded, and incremental FlashCopy.\n\n- -Consistency groups\n\nConsistency groups address the issue where application data is on multiple volumes. By placing the FlashCopy relationships into a consistency group, commands can be issued against all of the volumes in the group. This action provides a consistent point-in-time copy of all of the data, even if it is on a physically separate volume.\n\nFlashCopy mappings can be members of a consistency group, or they can be operated in a stand-alone manner, not as part of a consistency group. FlashCopy commands can be issued to a FlashCopy consistency group, which affects all FlashCopy mappings in the consistency group, or to a single FlashCopy mapping if it is not part of a defined FlashCopy consistency group.\n\n## /SM590000 Metro Mirror\n\nProvides a synchronous remote mirroring function up to approximately 300 km (186.4 miles) between sites. Because the host I/O only completes after the data is cached at both locations, performance requirements might limit the practical distance. Metro Mirror provides fully synchronized copies at both sites with zero data loss after the initial copy is completed. Metro Mirror can operate between multiple IBM Storwize systems and IBM SAN Volume Controllers.\n\n## /SM590000 Global Mirror\n\nProvides a long-distance asynchronous remote mirroring function up to approximately 8,000 km (4,971 miles) between sites. With Global Mirror, the host I/O completes locally and the changed data is sent to the remote site later. This feature maintains a consistent recoverable copy of data at the remote site, which lags behind the local site. Global Mirror can operate between multiple IBM Storwize systems and IBM SAN Volume Controllers.\n\n## /SM590000 External virtualization\n\nIBM Storwize V7000 provides a data migration function that can be used to import external storage systems into the IBM Storwize V7000 system. The following tasks can be accomplished:\n\n- -Move volumes nondisruptively onto a newly installed storage system.\n- -Move volumes to rebalance a changed workload.\n- -Migrate data from other back-end storage to IBM Storwize V7000-managed storage.\n\n## /SM590000 Software Encryption\n\nIBM Storwize V7000 Gen2 and IBM Storwize Gen2+ provide optional encryption of data-at-rest functionality, which protects against the potential exposure of sensitive user data and user metadata that is stored on discarded, lost, or stolen storage devices. Encryption can only be enabled and configured on enclosures that support encryption.\n\nStarting with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V7.6, IBM Spectrum Virtualize offers software-enabled encryption (hardware encryption was introduced in V7.4), which includes encryption of internal or external storage. Encryption keys now can be stored either on USB flash drives, IBM Security Key Lifecycle Manager server, or both.\n\nChapter 2. System overview\n\n17", + "recall": 0.9826839826839827, + "true_md": "This option has two variations:\n\nThis function can be used with multitarget, cascaded, and incremental FlashCopy.\n\nConsistency groups address the issue where application data is on multiple volumes. By placing the FlashCopy relationships into a consistency group, commands can be issued against all of the volumes in the group. This action provides a consistent point-in-time copy of all of the data, even if it is on a physically separate volume.\n\nFlashCopy mappings can be members of a consistency group, or they can be operated in a stand-alone manner, not as part of a consistency group. FlashCopy commands can be issued to a FlashCopy consistency group, which affects all FlashCopy mappings in the consistency group, or to a single FlashCopy mapping if it is not part of a defined FlashCopy consistency group.\n\nProvides a synchronous remote mirroring function up to approximately 300 km (186.4 miles) between sites. Because the host I/O only completes after the data is cached at both locations, performance requirements might limit the practical distance. Metro Mirror provides fully synchronized copies at both sites with zero data loss after the initial copy is completed. Metro Mirror can operate between multiple IBM Storwize systems and IBM SAN Volume Controllers.\n\nProvides a long-distance asynchronous remote mirroring function up to approximately 8,000 km (4,971 miles) between sites. With Global Mirror, the host I/O completes locally and the changed data is sent to the remote site later. This feature maintains a consistent recoverable copy of data at the remote site, which lags behind the local site. Global Mirror can operate between multiple IBM Storwize systems and IBM SAN Volume Controllers.\n\nIBM Storwize V7000 provides a data migration function that can be used to import external storage systems into the IBM Storwize V7000 system. The following tasks can be accomplished:\n\nIBM Storwize V7000 Gen2 and IBM Storwize Gen2+ provide optional encryption of data-at-rest functionality, which protects against the potential exposure of sensitive user data and user metadata that is stored on discarded, lost, or stolen storage devices. Encryption can only be enabled and configured on enclosures that support encryption.\n\nStarting with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V7.6, IBM Spectrum Virtualize offers software-enabled encryption (hardware encryption was introduced in V7.4), which includes encryption of internal or external storage. Encryption keys now can be stored either on USB flash drives, IBM Security Key Lifecycle Manager server, or both.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Software Encryption\n\n- – Migrate data from other back-end storage to IBM Storwize V7000-managed storage.\n\n- – Move volumes to rebalance a changed workload.\n\n- – Move volumes nondisruptively onto a newly installed storage system.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> External virtualization\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Global Mirror\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Metro Mirror\n\n- – Consistency groups\n\n- GLYPH<129> Space-efficient target with no background copy\n\n- GLYPH<129> Space-efficient source and target with background copy\n\nCopies only the allocated space.\n\nCopies only the space that is used for changes between the source and target, and is referred to as a snapshot .\n\nChapter 2. System overview 17" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7615780548130091, + "doc_id": "6248ef4634d57e3c3d89d3c73ce0d0bf90e58df9afb27d1108eefcd881c8794b", + "edit_distance": 0.3592233009708738, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.8986611221640637, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "- 3. Change the roles of the volume copies by making the new copy the primary copy, as shown in Figure 7-50. The current primary copy is displayed with an asterisk next to its name.\n\nFigure 7-50 Making the new copy in a different storage pool the primary\n\nFigure 7-50 Making the new copy in a different storage pool the primary\n\n- 4. Split or delete the old copy from the volume, as shown in Figure 7-51.\n\nFigure 7-51 Deleting the old volume copy\n\nFigure 7-51 Deleting the old volume copy\n\nChapter 7. Volumes\n\n287", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "- 3. Change the roles of the volume copies by making the new copy the primary copy, as shown in Figure 7-50. The current primary copy is displayed with an asterisk next to its name.\n\n- 4. Split or delete the old copy from the volume, as shown in Figure 7-51.\n\nFigure 7-51 Deleting the old volume copy\n\nFigure 7-50 Making the new copy in a different storage pool the primary\n\nChapter 7. Volumes 287" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7982083838881272, + "doc_id": "f3a5caa21870a48f1d9d965e20445717c2fae2b38ae211924877abbbce248e26", + "edit_distance": 0.8452380952380952, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.8713654455913109, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "596\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\n- 2. Right-click the relationships that you want to delete and select Delete , as shown in Figure 11-150.\n\nFigure 11-150 Deleting Remote Copy Relationships\n\nFigure 11-150 Deleting Remote Copy Relationships\n\n- 3. A confirmation message is displayed, requesting the user to enter the number of relationships to be deleted, as shown in Figure 11-151.\n\nFigure 11-151 Confirmation of relationships deletion\n\nFigure 11-151 Confirmation of relationships deletion", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "- 3. A confirmation message is displayed, requesting the user to enter the number of relationships to be deleted, as shown in Figure 11-151.\n\n- 2. Right-click the relationships that you want to delete and select Delete , as shown in Figure 11-150.\n\nFigure 11-151 Confirmation of relationships deletion\n\nFigure 11-150 Deleting Remote Copy Relationships\n\n596 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8576375606670031, + "doc_id": "881ae4f375530b0d5dcdb658e9b47746c7d9fb6b15ec5082b561eab35a602d82", + "edit_distance": 0.5622641509433962, + "f1_score": 0.9668246445497631, + "meteor": 0.7782696744781525, + "precision": 0.9902912621359223, + "pred_md": "444\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\n## Read from the source Volume\n\nWhen a user performs a read operation on the source volume, there is no redirection. The operation is similar to what is done with a volume that is not part of a FlashCopy mapping.\n\n## Write on the source Volume\n\nPerforming a write operation on the source volume modifies a block or a set of blocks, which modifies a grain on the source. It generates one of the following actions, depending on the state of the grain to be modified:\n\n- /SM590000 If the bitmap indicates that the grain was copied, the source grain is changed and the target volume and the bitmap table remain unchanged, as shown in Figure 11-5.\n\nFigure 11-5 Modifying an already copied grain on the Source\n\nFigure 11-5 Modifying an already copied grain on the Source\n\n- /SM590000 If the bitmap indicates that the grain was not yet copied, the grain is first copied on the target (copy on write), the bitmap table is updated, and the grain is modified on the source, as shown in Figure 11-6.\n\nFigure 11-6 Modifying a non-copied grain on the source\n\nFigure 11-6 Modifying a non-copied grain on the source\n\n## Write on a Target Volume\n\nBecause FlashCopy target volumes are immediately accessible in Read and Write mode, it is possible to perform write operations on the target volume when the FlashCopy mapping is started.", + "recall": 0.9444444444444444, + "true_md": "When a user performs a read operation on the source volume, there is no redirection. The operation is similar to what is done with a volume that is not part of a FlashCopy mapping.\n\nPerforming a write operation on the source volume modifies a block or a set of blocks, which modifies a grain on the source. It generates one of the following actions, depending on the state of the grain to be modified:\n\nBecause FlashCopy target volumes are immediately accessible in Read and Write mode, it is possible to perform write operations on the target volume when the FlashCopy mapping is started. \n\n## Write on a Target Volume\n\n## Write on the source Volume\n\n## Read from the source Volume\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> If the bitmap indicates that the grain was copied, the source grain is changed and the target volume and the bitmap table remain unchanged, as shown in Figure 11-5.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> If the bitmap indicates that the grain was not yet copied, the grain is first copied on the target (copy on write), the bitmap table is updated, and the grain is modified on the source, as shown in Figure 11-6.\n\nFigure 11-5 Modifying an already copied grain on the Source\n\nFigure 11-6 Modifying a non-copied grain on the source\n\n444 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.922693310433882, + "doc_id": "ea5f0161a3ba12b4f9e156f8782959787ee572c12fba4565e49a503436209b12", + "edit_distance": 0.7369519832985386, + "f1_score": 0.9605568445475638, + "meteor": 0.8061498504474973, + "precision": 0.9672897196261683, + "pred_md": "- /SM590000 Problem : When you run the arsdb -I ARCHIVE -vu command from a BPXBATCH job, you see errors in STDOUT or in the output of arsdb -c , as shown in Figure 18-8.\n\n```\nDB Error: {DB2 for OS/390}{ODBC DRIVER} SQLSTATE=58004 ERRLOC=2:170:9\n```\n\n```\nCAF 'CONNECT' failed using DB2 system:DB2K RC=08 and REASON=00f30002 -- SQLSTATE=58004, SQLCODE=-99999 arsdb:.Unable to connect to DB2 ARSDBASE database or arsdb: Unable to determine the database engine\n```\n\nFigure 18-8 ARSDB error\n\nReason or resolution : Enter an export command for DSNAOINI in the BPXBATCH job, or ensure that export DSNAOINI='/etc/ars/cli.ini' was defined. Verify that your cli.ini file is in this directory. Also, check that your cli.ini file references the correct DB2 subsystem, for example:\n\n[COMMON] MVSDEFAULTSSID=DB1M [DB1M] PLANNAME=DSNACLI\n\n- /SM590000 Problem: During installation and migration, when you run arsdb -u -I or arsdb -I ARCHIVE -vx ARSSYS , you receive an error similar to Figure 18-9.\n\narsdb -u -I CEE3204S The system detected a protection exception (System Completion Code=0C4).\n\nFrom entry point u\\_file\\_write\\_44\\_arsxh at compile unit offset +00000054 at entry offset +00000054 at address\n\nFigure 18-9 ARSDB error during installation and migration\n\nReason or resolution : Multiple resolutions can be attempted when you encounter this error:\n\n- -Check the ARSSOCKD region parameter. We recommend that you use region=0 . Also, check your TSO logon region size. Increase TSO, log out of TSO, and log back in.\n- -When you run export (x) , the contents of the ARSxxx table are exported to a flat file. The command attempts to write the file to the directory in which the arsdb command runs. Ensure that the user has write permissions for the file. Also, ensure that the user has permissions for the ARS\\_TMP intermediate file.\n- -Check the OMVS size to see whether it can be increased to the system limit ( D OMVS,L ). Check your OMVS limits: MAXMMAPAREA and MAXSHAREPAGES. The following example is output of the D OMVS,L command:\n\nThe example shows current MAXMMAPAREA is 3107 and the maximum size that MAXMMAPAREA can go is 4096. In our experience, version 8.5 required at least 3646 for the value of MAXMMAPAREA. In this example, the minimum memory size needed for CMOD will be 3107 + 3646 = 6753. Therefore, you must increase the MAXMMAPAREA from 4096 to a higher value, for example, 40960, to solve the problem.\n\nChapter 18. Troubleshooting and tracing\n\n387", + "recall": 0.9539170506912442, + "true_md": "- GLYPH<SM590000> Problem : When you run the arsdb -I ARCHIVE -vu command from a BPXBATCH job, you see errors in STDOUT or in the output of arsdb -c , as shown in Figure 18-8.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Problem: During installation and migration, when you run arsdb -u -I or arsdb -I ARCHIVE -vx ARSSYS , you receive an error similar to Figure 18-9.\n\n- – Check the ARSSOCKD region parameter. We recommend that you use region=0 . Also, check your TSO logon region size. Increase TSO, log out of TSO, and log back in.\n\n- – When you run export (x) , the contents of the ARSxxx table are exported to a flat file. The command attempts to write the file to the directory in which the arsdb command runs. Ensure that the user has write permissions for the file. Also, ensure that the user has permissions for the ARS\\_TMP intermediate file.\n\n- – Check the OMVS size to see whether it can be increased to the system limit ( D OMVS,L ). Check your OMVS limits: MAXMMAPAREA and MAXSHAREPAGES. The following example is output of the D OMVS,L command:\n\nReason or resolution : Enter an export command for DSNAOINI in the BPXBATCH job, or ensure that export DSNAOINI='/etc/ars/cli.ini' was defined. Verify that your cli.ini file is in this directory. Also, check that your cli.ini file references the correct DB2 subsystem, for example:\n\nReason or resolution : Multiple resolutions can be attempted when you encounter this error:\n\nThe example shows current MAXMMAPAREA is 3107 and the maximum size that MAXMMAPAREA can go is 4096. In our experience, version 8.5 required at least 3646 for the value of MAXMMAPAREA. In this example, the minimum memory size needed for CMOD will be 3107 + 3646 = 6753. Therefore, you must increase the MAXMMAPAREA from 4096 to a higher value, for example, 40960, to solve the problem.\n\nChapter 18. Troubleshooting and tracing 387\n\nFigure 18-9 ARSDB error during installation and migration\n\nDB Error: {DB2 for OS/390}{ODBC DRIVER} SQLSTATE=58004 ERRLOC=2:170:9 CAF “CONNECT” failed using DB2 system:DB2K RC=08 and REASON=00f30002 -- SQLSTATE=58004, SQLCODE=-99999 arsdb:.Unable to connect to DB2 ARSDBASE database or arsdb: Unable to determine the database engine\n\nFigure 18-8 ARSDB error\n\n[COMMON] MVSDEFAULTSSID=DB1M [DB1M] PLANNAME=DSNACLI\n\narsdb -u -I CEE3204S The system detected a protection exception (System Completion Code=0C4). From entry point u\\_file\\_write\\_44\\_arsxh at compile unit offset +00000054 at entry offset +00000054 at address" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9507532640695296, + "doc_id": "8dffba19dba04562566f41fbe8d37c0ccdf209102b775963d54787566b5b8af6", + "edit_distance": 0.150997150997151, + "f1_score": 0.9781931464174456, + "meteor": 0.9745926357457267, + "precision": 0.9936708860759493, + "pred_md": "- /SM590000 Document: With this expiration type, a document at a time is deleted from the application group. Data that is stored in archive storage is deleted by the storage manager based on the archive expiration date. Storing documents with an expiration type of Document causes the expiration process to search through every document in the segment to determine whether the expiration date was reached, which results in long processing times.\n\nWhen the arsmaint expiration process is run, data is deleted only from the application group if the upper threshold for the size of the cache storage is reached. By default, the cache threshold is 80%. A lower threshold can be forced by the expiration command parameters. Unless a reason exists to clear cache, leaving data in cache improves retrieval performance.\n\n## 5.2.6 Advanced application group storage management\n\nBy using the advanced storage management settings (Figure 5-11), you can adjust the size of the load object and determine when report data, indexes, and resources are migrated to archive storage.\n\nFigure 5-11 Advanced application group storage management\n\nFigure 5-11 Advanced application group storage management\n\n## Object Size\n\nThe Object Size parameter determines the size of a storage object in kilobytes (KB). Content Manager OnDemand, by default, segments and compresses stored data into 10 MB storage objects. The default of 10 MB is the most commonly used object size value.\n\nImportant: Be careful when you change the value for Object Size. Setting the value too small or too large can adversely affect load performance. However, increasing this value might be necessary if you load large files and run out of Object IDs during the loading process.\n\nNote: The object size that is defined here must be equal to or larger than the size of the compressed storage objects that are defined in any application that is assigned to the application group.\n\nChapter 5. Storage management\n\n103", + "recall": 0.9631901840490797, + "true_md": "- GLYPH<SM590000> Document: With this expiration type, a document at a time is deleted from the application group. Data that is stored in archive storage is deleted by the storage manager based on the archive expiration date. Storing documents with an expiration type of Document causes the expiration process to search through every document in the segment to determine whether the expiration date was reached, which results in long processing times. \n\nWhen the arsmaint expiration process is run, data is deleted only from the application group if the upper threshold for the size of the cache storage is reached. By default, the cache threshold is 80%. A lower threshold can be forced by the expiration command parameters. Unless a reason exists to clear cache, leaving data in cache improves retrieval performance. \n\nBy using the advanced storage management settings (Figure 5-11), you can adjust the size of the load object and determine when report data, indexes, and resources are migrated to archive storage.\n\nThe Object Size parameter determines the size of a storage object in kilobytes (KB). Content Manager OnDemand, by default, segments and compresses stored data into 10 MB storage objects. The default of 10 MB is the most commonly used object size value. \n\nImportant: Be careful when you change the value for Object Size. Setting the value too small or too large can adversely affect load performance. However, increasing this value might be necessary if you load large files and run out of Object IDs during the loading process.\n\nNote: The object size that is defined here must be equal to or larger than the size of the compressed storage objects that are defined in any application that is assigned to the application group.\n\nChapter 5. Storage management 103\n\n## Object Size\n\n## 5.2.6 Advanced application group storage management\n\nFigure 5-11 Advanced application group storage management" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8234120952442101, + "doc_id": "d8d69718229c871b7de6349ffd5ac3b838673b937d6ea4f2fb06ce4075da17f9", + "edit_distance": 0.5314136125654451, + "f1_score": 0.8494983277591974, + "meteor": 0.8269501695866981, + "precision": 0.8466666666666667, + "pred_md": "## 7.8.13 Listing volumes mapped to the host\n\nUse the lshostvdiskmap command to show the volumes that are mapped to the specific host, as shown in Example 7-24.\n\nExample 7-24 The lshostvdiskmap command\n\n```\nIBM_2145:ITSO_CLUSTER:superuser>lshostvdiskmap -delim , Siam id,name,SCSI_id,vdisk_id,vdisk_name,wwpn,vdisk_UID 3,Siam,0,0,volume_A,210000E08B18FF8A,60050768018301BF280000000000000C\n```\n\nIn the output of the command, you can see that only one volume ( volume\\_A ) is mapped to the host Siam . The volume is mapped with SCSI LUN ID 0.\n\nIf no host name is specified as lshostvdiskmap command, it returns all defined host-to-volume mappings.\n\nSpecifying the flag before the host name: Although the -delim flag normally comes at the end of the command string, you must specify this flag before the host name in this case. Otherwise, it returns the following message:\n\nCMMVC6070E An invalid or duplicated parameter, unaccompanied argument, or incorrect argument sequence has been detected. Ensure that the input is as per the help.\n\nYou can also use the lshostclustervolumemap command to show the volumes that are mapped to a specific host cluster, as shown in Example 7-25.\n\nExample 7-25 The lshostclustervolumemap command\n\n```\nIBM_Storwize:ITSO:superuser>lshostclustervolumemap id name SCSI_id volume_id volume_name volume_UID IO_group_id IO_group_name 0 vmware_cluster 0 9 UNCOMPRESSED_VOL 6005076400F580049800000000000011 0 io_grp0\n```\n\n## 7.8.14 Listing hosts mapped to the volume\n\nTo identify the hosts to which a specific volume was mapped, issue the lsvdiskhostmap command, as shown in Example 7-26.\n\nExample 7-26 The lsvdiskhostmap command\n\n```\nIBM_2145:ITSO_CLUSTER:superuser>lsvdiskhostmap -delim , volume_B\n```\n\n```\nid,name,SCSI_id,host_id,host_name,vdisk_UID 26,volume_B,0,2,Almaden,6005076801AF813F1000000000000020\n```\n\nThis command shows the list of hosts to which the volume volume\\_B is mapped.\n\nSpecifying the -delim flag: Although the optional -delim flag normally comes at the end of the command string, you must specify this flag before the volume name in this case. Otherwise, the command does not return any data.\n\nChapter 7. Volumes\n\n307", + "recall": 0.8523489932885906, + "true_md": "## 7.8.13 Listing volumes mapped to the host\n\nUse the lshostvdiskmap command to show the volumes that are mapped to the specific host, as shown in Example 7-24.\n\nIn the output of the command, you can see that only one volume ( volume\\_A ) is mapped to the host Siam . The volume is mapped with SCSI LUN ID 0. \n\nIf no host name is specified as lshostvdiskmap command, it returns all defined host-to-volume mappings.\n\nSpecifying the flag before the host name: Although the -delim flag normally comes at the end of the command string, you must specify this flag before the host name in this case. Otherwise, it returns the following message: \n\nCMMVC6070E An invalid or duplicated parameter, unaccompanied argument, or incorrect argument sequence has been detected. Ensure that the input is as per the help.\n\nYou can also use the lshostclustervolumemap command to show the volumes that are mapped to a specific host cluster, as shown in Example 7-25.\n\nTo identify the hosts to which a specific volume was mapped, issue the lsvdiskhostmap command, as shown in Example 7-26.\n\nThis command shows the list of hosts to which the volume volume\\_B is mapped. \n\nSpecifying the -delim flag: Although the optional -delim flag normally comes at the end of the command string, you must specify this flag before the volume name in this case. Otherwise, the command does not return any data.\n\nExample 7-25 The lshostclustervolumemap command\n\nExample 7-26 The lsvdiskhostmap command\n\nExample 7-24 The lshostvdiskmap command \n\nIBM\\_2145:ITSO\\_CLUSTER:superuser>lshostvdiskmap -delim , Siam id,name,SCSI\\_id,vdisk\\_id,vdisk\\_name,wwpn,vdisk\\_UID 3,Siam,0,0,volume\\_A,210000E08B18FF8A,60050768018301BF280000000000000C\n\nIBM\\_Storwize:ITSO:superuser>lshostclustervolumemap id name SCSI\\_id volume\\_id volume\\_name volume\\_UID IO\\_group\\_id IO\\_group\\_name 0 vmware\\_cluster 0 9 UNCOMPRESSED\\_VOL 6005076400F580049800000000000011 0 io\\_grp0\n\nIBM\\_2145:ITSO\\_CLUSTER:superuser>lsvdiskhostmap -delim , volume\\_B id,name,SCSI\\_id,host\\_id,host\\_name,vdisk\\_UID 26,volume\\_B,0,2,Almaden,6005076801AF813F1000000000000020\n\n## 7.8.14 Listing hosts mapped to the volume\n\nChapter 7. Volumes 307" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "6e3c035234fb181693e87c806794ceccc885623bce42d10cc88bf93a9972ecad", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999715521165226, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "8459ch04.fm\n\nDraft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n66\n\nRed Hat OpenShift and IBM Cloud Paks on IBM Power Systems: Volume 1", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "8459ch04.fm\n\nDraft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n66 Red Hat OpenShift and IBM Cloud Paks on IBM Power Systems: Volume 1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8939759515935264, + "doc_id": "8fb32bedafd002d751da98d26452807f57f11be00aff44f2809332703b3dba10", + "edit_distance": 0.2612244897959184, + "f1_score": 0.9701492537313434, + "meteor": 0.9244715408065131, + "precision": 0.9848484848484849, + "pred_md": "214\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\nNote: A lack of dependent volumes does not imply that there are no volumes that use the drive. Volume dependency actually shows the list of volumes that would become unavailable if the drive or the group of selected drive becomes unavailable.\n\nYou can get the same information with the CLI command lsdependentvdisks . Use the parameter -drive with a list of drive IDs that you are checking, separated with a colon ( ). :\n\n## Action: Properties\n\nSelect Properties to view more information about the drive, as shown in Figure 6-33.\n\nFigure 6-33 Drive properties\n\nFigure 6-33 Drive properties\n\nYou can find a short description of each drive property by hovering on it and clicking [?] . You can also display drive slot details by changing to the Drive Slot tab.\n\nTo get all available information about the particular drive, use the CLI command lsdrive with drive ID as the parameter. To get slot information, see the lsenclosureslot command.\n\n## 6.2.2 RAID and DRAID\n\nTo use internal Storwize V7000 disks in storage pools, you must join them into RAID arrays to form array MDisks.\n\nRAID provides two key design goals:\n\n- /SM590000 Increased data reliability\n- /SM590000 Increased input/output (I/O) performance", + "recall": 0.9558823529411765, + "true_md": "Note: A lack of dependent volumes does not imply that there are no volumes that use the drive. Volume dependency actually shows the list of volumes that would become unavailable if the drive or the group of selected drive becomes unavailable.\n\nYou can get the same information with the CLI command lsdependentvdisks . Use the parameter - drive with a list of drive IDs that you are checking, separated with a colon ( : ).\n\nSelect Properties to view more information about the drive, as shown in Figure 6-33.\n\n## Action: Properties\n\nFigure 6-33 Drive properties\n\nYou can find a short description of each drive property by hovering on it and clicking [?] . You can also display drive slot details by changing to the Drive Slot tab.\n\nTo get all available information about the particular drive, use the CLI command lsdrive with drive ID as the parameter. To get slot information, see the lsenclosureslot command.\n\nTo use internal Storwize V7000 disks in storage pools, you must join them into RAID arrays to form array MDisks.\n\nRAID provides two key design goals:\n\n## 6.2.2 RAID and DRAID\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Increased data reliability\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Increased input/output (I/O) performance \n\n214 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8568671574028265, + "doc_id": "67bd68f8d9aca21dcafbf3b0cb47ad031f28fe8b58c44672388c6cff0d1cef19", + "edit_distance": 0.4403292181069959, + "f1_score": 0.9691629955947137, + "meteor": 0.8573121821464504, + "precision": 0.990990990990991, + "pred_md": "108\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\nFigure 4-23 Select Enclosure window: available control enclosures\n\nFigure 4-23 Select Enclosure window: available control enclosures\n\n- 3. Review the summary in the next window and click Finish to add the control enclosure and all its expansions to the system.\n- 4. After the control enclosure is successfully added to the system, a success message is displayed. Click Close to return to the System Overview view, as shown in Figure 4-24. The view displays two control enclosures configured on the system.\n\nFigure 4-24 System Overview view with two control enclosures visible\n\nFigure 4-24 System Overview view with two control enclosures visible\n\n## 4.4 Configuring user authentication\n\nThere are two methods of user authentication to control access to the GUI and to the CLI:\n\n- /SM590000 Local authentication is performed within the Storwize V7000 system. Local GUI authentication is done with user name and password. Local CLI authentication is done either with an SSH public key or a user name and password.\n- /SM590000 Remote authentication allows users to authenticate to the system using credentials stored on an external authentication service. This feature allows you to use user credentials and user groups defined on the remote service to simplify user management and access, enforce password policies more efficiently, and separate user management from storage management.", + "recall": 0.9482758620689655, + "true_md": "Figure 4-23 Select Enclosure window: available control enclosures\n\nFigure 4-24 System Overview view with two control enclosures visible\n\n- 3. Review the summary in the next window and click Finish to add the control enclosure and all its expansions to the system.\n\n- 4. After the control enclosure is successfully added to the system, a success message is displayed. Click Close to return to the System Overview view, as shown in Figure 4-24. The view displays two control enclosures configured on the system.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Local authentication is performed within the Storwize V7000 system. Local GUI authentication is done with user name and password. Local CLI authentication is done either with an SSH public key or a user name and password.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Remote authentication allows users to authenticate to the system using credentials stored on an external authentication service. This feature allows you to use user credentials and user groups defined on the remote service to simplify user management and access, enforce password policies more efficiently, and separate user management from storage management.\n\nThere are two methods of user authentication to control access to the GUI and to the CLI:\n\n## 4.4 Configuring user authentication\n\n108 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8914711449549652, + "doc_id": "f82dd415855275e775fecfd10f7927a1b9612e1387697cb65509c02f45148b00", + "edit_distance": 0.5303030303030303, + "f1_score": 0.9672131147540982, + "meteor": 0.9676180877994938, + "precision": 0.9672131147540983, + "pred_md": "Front cover\n\nDraft Document for Review December 11, 2019 2:00 pm SG24-8459-00\n\n## Red Hat OpenShift and IBM Cloud Paks on IBM Power Systems: Volume 1\n\nDino Quintero\n\nDaniel Casali\n\nRicardo Dobelin Barros\n\nLuis Ferreira\n\nAlain Fisher\n\nFederico Fros\n\nLuis Daniel Gonzalez\n\nMiguel Gomez Gonzalez\n\nMahesh Gurugunti\n\nNicolas Joly\n\nBoris Litichevsky\n\nGabriel Padilla\n\nSudipto Pal\n\nRogelio Rivera Gutierrez\n\nBogdan Savu\n\nIsmael Solis Moreno", + "recall": 0.9672131147540983, + "true_md": "# Red Hat OpenShift and IBM Cloud Paks on IBM Power Systems: Volume 1\n\nDino Quintero\n\nRogelio Rivera Gutierrez\n\nBogdan Savu\n\nIsmael Solis Moreno\n\nRichard Wale\n\nDaniel Casali\n\nRicardo Dobelin Barros\n\nLuis Ferreira\n\nAlain Fisher\n\nFederico Fros\n\nLuis Daniel Gonzalez\n\nMiguel Gomez Gonzalez\n\nMahesh Gurugunti\n\nNicolas Joly\n\nBoris Litichevsky\n\nGabriel Padilla\n\nSudipto Pal\n\nDraft Document for Review December 11, 2019 2:00 pm SG24-8459-00" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9274021995999663, + "doc_id": "cfde4d42d279e435b0774c1c1862b79234e3863d2b81cc28b881b7f3360ef852", + "edit_distance": 0.14218009478672985, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9797298787575349, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "- 3. In the next window, you can choose between IBM SKLM or Gemalto SefeNet KeySecure server types, as shown in Figure 12-42. Select Gemalto SefeNet KeySecure and click Next .\n\nFigure 12-42 Selecting Gemalto SafeNet KeySecure as key server type\n\nFigure 12-42 Selecting Gemalto SafeNet KeySecure as key server type\n\n- 4. Add up to four SafeNet KeySecure servers in the next wizard window, as shown in Figure 12-43 on page 638. For each key server, enter the name, IP address and TCP port for KMIP protocol (default value is 5696). Note that server name is only a label, so it does not need to be the real host name of the server.\n\nAlthough Gemalto SafeNet KeySecure uses an active-active clustered model, IBM Spectrum Virtualize asks for a primary key server. The primary key server represents only the KeySecure server that is used for key create and rekey operations. Therefore, any of the clustered key servers can be selected as the primary.\n\nSelecting a primary key server is beneficial for load balancing. Any four key servers can be used to retrieve the master key.\n\nChapter 12. Encryption\n\n637", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "- 3. In the next window, you can choose between IBM SKLM or Gemalto SefeNet KeySecure server types, as shown in Figure 12-42. Select Gemalto SefeNet KeySecure and click Next .\n\n- 4. Add up to four SafeNet KeySecure servers in the next wizard window, as shown in Figure 12-43 on page 638. For each key server, enter the name, IP address and TCP port for KMIP protocol (default value is 5696). Note that server name is only a label, so it does not need to be the real host name of the server.\n\nAlthough Gemalto SafeNet KeySecure uses an active-active clustered model, IBM Spectrum Virtualize asks for a primary key server. The primary key server represents only the KeySecure server that is used for key create and rekey operations. Therefore, any of the clustered key servers can be selected as the primary.\n\nSelecting a primary key server is beneficial for load balancing. Any four key servers can be used to retrieve the master key.\n\nFigure 12-42 Selecting Gemalto SafeNet KeySecure as key server type\n\nChapter 12. Encryption 637" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8137325718528524, + "doc_id": "84b2f512eda2ea5b723930892ea3f782fb2633d635900374483d7a716128442b", + "edit_distance": 0.5033557046979866, + "f1_score": 0.92, + "meteor": 0.8524368907427783, + "precision": 0.9583333333333334, + "pred_md": "Download the following tools:\n\n- /SM590000 PuTTY SSH client: putty.exe\n- /SM590000 PuTTY key generator: puttygen.exe\n\n## Generating a public and private key pair\n\nTo generate a public and private key pair, complete the following steps:\n\n- 1. Start the PuTTY key generator to generate the public and private key pair, as shown in Figure B-1.\n\nFigure B-1 PuTTY key generator\n\nFigure B-1 PuTTY key generator\n\nSelect the following options:\n\n- -SSH-2 RSA\n- -Number of bits in a generated key: 1024\n\nNote: Larger SSH keys, such as 2048 bits, are also supported.\n\n- 2. Click Generate and move the cursor over the blank area to generate keys (see Figure B-2 on page 758).\n\nAppendix B. CLI setup\n\n757", + "recall": 0.8846153846153846, + "true_md": "Download the following tools:\n\nTo generate a public and private key pair, complete the following steps:\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> PuTTY key generator: puttygen.exe\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> PuTTY SSH client: putty.exe\n\n- 1. Start the PuTTY key generator to generate the public and private key pair, as shown in Figure B-1.\n\n## Generating a public and private key pair\n\nFigure B-1 PuTTY key generator\n\nSelect the following options:\n\nNote: Larger SSH keys, such as 2048 bits, are also supported.\n\n- – Number of bits in a generated key: 1024\n\n- – SSH-2 RSA\n\n- 2. Click Generate and move the cursor over the blank area to generate keys (see Figure B-2 on page 758).\n\nAppendix B. CLI setup 757" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8379670387330198, + "doc_id": "e8a267df2d0b6527e1c06b1b87012639bbaf15c090efcdd9b7ffad0519f241dd", + "edit_distance": 0.6713286713286714, + "f1_score": 0.986013986013986, + "meteor": 0.9287734753353156, + "precision": 0.9791666666666666, + "pred_md": "8459ax01.fm\n\nDraft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n194\n\nRed Hat OpenShift and IBM Cloud Paks on IBM Power Systems: Volume 1\n\nExample A-6 List all currently defined OCP users\n\n```\n$ oc get user NAME UID FULL NAME IDENTITIES user615 3e8d8153-f5f8-11e9-b535-fa163e4226a4 htpasswd_auth:user615\n```\n\n- 5. Use the oc policy command to assign the user1 user cluster admin rights as shown in Example A-7.\n\nExample A-7 Assign user cluster admin rights\n\n```\n$ oc adm policy add-cluster-role-to-user cluster-admin user1 Warning: User 'user1' not found cluster role \"cluster-admin\" added: \"user1\"\n```\n\n- 6. Logout using the oc logout command as shown in Example A-8.\n\nExample A-8 Logout from OpenShift\n\n```\n$ oc logout Logged \"user615\" out on \"https://localhost:8443\"\n```\n\n- 7. Login back to OpenShift CLI as user user1 as shown in Example A-9.\n\n## Example A-9 Login to OpenShift\n\n```\n$ oc login -u user1 Authentication required for https://localhost:8443 (openshift) Username: user1 Password: ********* Login successful.\n```\n\nYou have access to the following projects and can switch between them with 'oc project <projectname>':\n\n- * default\n\nkube-public\n\nkube-service-catalog\n\nkube-system\n\nmanagement-infra\n\nopenshift\n\nopenshift-ansible-service-broker\n\nopenshift-console\n\nopenshift-infra\n\nopenshift-logging\n\nopenshift-monitoring\n\nopenshift-node\n\nopenshift-sdn\n\nopenshift-template-service-broker\n\nopenshift-web-console\n\nUsing project \"default\".\n\n- 8. List again all currently defined OCP users using the oc get command. Now you see the user1 in the list as shown in Example A-10 on page 195.", + "recall": 0.9929577464788732, + "true_md": "8459ax01.fm\n\nDraft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\nExample A-6 List all currently defined OCP users\n\n$ oc get user NAME UID FULL NAME IDENTITIES user615 3e8d8153-f5f8-11e9-b535-fa163e4226a4 htpasswd\\_auth:user615\n\n$ oc adm policy add-cluster-role-to-user cluster-admin user1 Warning: User 'user1' not found cluster role \"cluster-admin\" added: \"user1\"\n\n$ oc logout Logged \"user615\" out on \"https://localhost:8443\"\n\n$ oc login -u user1 Authentication required for https://localhost:8443 (openshift) Username: user1 Password: ********* Login successful. You have access to the following projects and can switch between them with 'oc project <projectname>': * default kube-public kube-service-catalog kube-system management-infra openshift openshift-ansible-service-broker openshift-console openshift-infra openshift-logging openshift-monitoring openshift-node openshift-sdn openshift-template-service-broker openshift-web-console Using project \"default\".\n\nExample A-7 Assign user cluster admin rights\n\nExample A-8 Logout from OpenShift\n\nExample A-9 Login to OpenShift\n\n- 5. Use the oc policy command to assign the user1 user cluster admin rights as shown in Example A-7.\n\n- 6. Logout using the oc logout command as shown in Example A-8.\n\n- 7. Login back to OpenShift CLI as user user1 as shown in Example A-9.\n\n- 8. List again all currently defined OCP users using the oc get command. Now you see the user1 in the list as shown in Example A-10 on page 195.\n\n194 Red Hat OpenShift and IBM Cloud Paks on IBM Power Systems: Volume 1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5537406407894508, + "doc_id": "623b97892f78028e1cbeed2688657f776cd225c15909b55f673474e597bcff14", + "edit_distance": 0.5674255691768827, + "f1_score": 0.9801699716713882, + "meteor": 0.5279213795127342, + "precision": 0.9942528735632183, + "pred_md": "8459ch02.fm\n\nDraft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n24\n\nRed Hat OpenShift and IBM Cloud Paks on IBM Power Systems: Volume 1\n\ndefinition. Cloud native applications take advantage of the API server to query and discover Service end points, along with notification for changes in Pods associated with a service.\n\n## Service with selector\n\n- /SM590000 New object is created with cluster IP which is assigned by Kubernetes to new Service object\n- /SM590000 Automatically creates end points\n- /SM590000 Controller scans and find this service with the reference of Service selector\n\n## Service without selector\n\n- /SM590000 Maps with Objects from external clusters\n- /SM590000 Maps with Objects from different namespace\n- /SM590000 During phased migration, section of objects from be executed as backend process\n- /SM590000 Endpoint objects are not created automatically, requires manual mapping of service with IP and ports\n\n## Storage volume\n\nKubernetes volume is an abstraction to address two important aspects like data persistency and sharing. Data persistency helps to retain most updated data set after a Container is stopped or crashed. Data sharing can be an essential requirement if multiple containers are hosted in a Pod.\n\nA Kubernetes volume is persistent till the enclosing Pod is available. Pod can select or move volumes from the long available list of that Kubernetes support:\n\n- /SM590000 awsElasticBlockStore\n- /SM590000 azureDisk\n- /SM590000 azureFile\n- /SM590000 cephfs\n- /SM590000 cinder\n- /SM590000 configMap\n- /SM590000 csi\n- /SM590000 downwardAPI\n- /SM590000 emptyDir\n- /SM590000 fc (Fibre Channel)\n- /SM590000 flexVolume\n- /SM590000 flocker\n- /SM590000 gcePersistentDisk\n- /SM590000 gitRepo (deprecated)\n- /SM590000 glusterfs\n- /SM590000 hostPath\n- /SM590000 iscsi\n- /SM590000 local\n- /SM590000 nfs\n- /SM590000 persistentVolumeClaim\n- /SM590000 projected\n- /SM590000 portworxVolume\n- /SM590000 quobyte\n- /SM590000 rbd\n- /SM590000 scaleIO\n- /SM590000 secret\n- /SM590000 storageos\n- /SM590000 vsphereVolume", + "recall": 0.9664804469273743, + "true_md": "8459ch02.fm\n\nDraft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\ndefinition. Cloud native applications take advantage of the API server to query and discover Service end points, along with notification for changes in Pods associated with a service. \n\n## Service with selector\n\n## Service without selector\n\n## Storage volume\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> New object is created with cluster IP which is assigned by Kubernetes to new Service object\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Automatically creates end points\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Controller scans and find this service with the reference of Service selector\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Maps with Objects from external clusters \n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Maps with Objects from different namespace \n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> During phased migration, section of objects from be executed as backend process \n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Endpoint objects are not created automatically, requires manual mapping of service with IP and ports \n\nKubernetes volume is an abstraction to address two important aspects like data persistency and sharing. Data persistency helps to retain most updated data set after a Container is stopped or crashed. Data sharing can be an essential requirement if multiple containers are hosted in a Pod.\n\nA Kubernetes volume is persistent till the enclosing Pod is available. Pod can select or move volumes from the long available list of that Kubernetes support:\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> awsElasticBlockStore\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> azureDisk\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> azureFile\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> cephfs\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> cinder\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> configMap\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> csi\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> downwardAPI\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> emptyDir\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> fc (Fibre Channel)\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> flexVolume\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> flocker\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> gcePersistentDisk\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> gitRepo (deprecated)\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> glusterfs\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> hostPath\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> iscsi\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> local\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> nfs\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> persistentVolumeClaim\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> projected\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> portworxVolume\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> quobyte\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> rbd\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> scaleIO\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> secret\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> storageos\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> vsphereVolume\n\n24 Red Hat OpenShift and IBM Cloud Paks on IBM Power Systems: Volume 1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7616427262998479, + "doc_id": "cb51e3fd58d7180e6ff3487abcfbdb841c664c2fd9bec996cfba4d5b8db2aafe", + "edit_distance": 0.32515337423312884, + "f1_score": 0.980821917808219, + "meteor": 0.7238347855362042, + "precision": 0.9944444444444445, + "pred_md": "## 13.1 Reliability, availability, and serviceability\n\nReliability, availability, and serviceability (RAS) are important concepts in the design of the IBM Spectrum Virtualize system. Hardware features, software features, design considerations, and operational guidelines all contribute to make the IBM Storwize V7000 system reliable.\n\nFault tolerance and high levels of availability are achieved by using the following methods:\n\n- /SM590000 The Redundant Array of Independent Disks (RAID) capabilities of the underlying disks\n- /SM590000 IBM Storwize V7000 nodes clustering using a Compass architecture\n- /SM590000 Auto-restart of hung nodes\n- /SM590000 Integrated Battery Backup Units (BBU) to provide memory protection if a site power failure occurs\n- /SM590000 Host system failover capabilities using N-Port ID Virtualization (NPIV)\n\nHigh levels of serviceability are available through the following methods:\n\n- /SM590000 Cluster error logging\n- /SM590000 Asynchronous error notification\n- /SM590000 Automatic Dump capabilities to capture software detected issues\n- /SM590000 Concurrent diagnostic procedures\n- /SM590000 Directed Maintenance Procedures (DMP) with guided online replacement process\n- /SM590000 Concurrent log analysis and memory dump data recovery tools\n- /SM590000 Concurrent maintenance of IBM Storwize V7000 components\n- /SM590000 Concurrent upgrade of IBM Storwize V7000 Spectrum Virtualize Software and firmware\n- /SM590000 Concurrent addition or deletion of node canisters in the clustered system\n- /SM590000 Automatic software version leveling when replacing a node\n- /SM590000 Detailed status and error conditions that are displayed by LED indicators\n- /SM590000 Error and event notification through Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP), syslog, and email\n- /SM590000 Optional Remote Support Assistant\n\nThe heart of IBM Storwize V7000 system is a pair of node canisters . These two canisters share the read and write data workload from the attached hosts and to the disk arrays. This section examines the RAS features of IBM Storwize V7000 system, monitoring, and troubleshooting.\n\nThroughout this chapter, the term IBM Storwize V7000 refers to both models of the product: IBM Storwize V7000 Gen2 and Gen2+.\n\n674\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1", + "recall": 0.9675675675675676, + "true_md": "## 13.1 Reliability, availability, and serviceability\n\nReliability, availability, and serviceability (RAS) are important concepts in the design of the IBM Spectrum Virtualize system. Hardware features, software features, design considerations, and operational guidelines all contribute to make the IBM Storwize V7000 system reliable. \n\nFault tolerance and high levels of availability are achieved by using the following methods:\n\nHigh levels of serviceability are available through the following methods:\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> The Redundant Array of Independent Disks (RAID) capabilities of the underlying disks\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> IBM Storwize V7000 nodes clustering using a Compass architecture\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Auto-restart of hung nodes\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Integrated Battery Backup Units (BBU) to provide memory protection if a site power failure occurs\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Host system failover capabilities using N-Port ID Virtualization (NPIV)\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Cluster error logging\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Asynchronous error notification\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Automatic Dump capabilities to capture software detected issues\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Concurrent diagnostic procedures\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Directed Maintenance Procedures (DMP) with guided online replacement process\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Concurrent log analysis and memory dump data recovery tools\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Concurrent maintenance of IBM Storwize V7000 components\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Concurrent upgrade of IBM Storwize V7000 Spectrum Virtualize Software and firmware\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Concurrent addition or deletion of node canisters in the clustered system\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Automatic software version leveling when replacing a node\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Detailed status and error conditions that are displayed by LED indicators\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Error and event notification through Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP), syslog, and email\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Optional Remote Support Assistant\n\nThe heart of IBM Storwize V7000 system is a pair of node canisters . These two canisters share the read and write data workload from the attached hosts and to the disk arrays. This section examines the RAS features of IBM Storwize V7000 system, monitoring, and troubleshooting.\n\nThroughout this chapter, the term IBM Storwize V7000 refers to both models of the product: IBM Storwize V7000 Gen2 and Gen2+.\n\n674 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7697140291047143, + "doc_id": "d7ce1be4e7c34055801de8c9e029bdd272556d4181db9eb0bee1fe7edf010797", + "edit_distance": 0.23577235772357724, + "f1_score": 0.9572649572649572, + "meteor": 0.9504304761904763, + "precision": 0.9655172413793104, + "pred_md": "Figure 12-67 IBM Storwize V7000 encryption configured with USB Flash Drives\n\nFigure 12-67 IBM Storwize V7000 encryption configured with USB Flash Drives\n\n- 2. Migrate from USB flash drives encryption to the other key server type encryption (in this example, Gemalto SafeNet KeySecure), following the steps that are described in 12.6.1, 'Changing from USB flash drive provider to encryption key server' on page 653. After completing this step, the other key server type are configured as encryption provider in IBM Spectrum Virtualize, as shown in Figure 12-68.\n\nFigure 12-68 IBM Storwize V7000 encryption configured with SafeNet KeySecure\n\nFigure 12-68 IBM Storwize V7000 encryption configured with SafeNet KeySecure\n\nChapter 12. Encryption\n\n655", + "recall": 0.9491525423728814, + "true_md": "- 2. Migrate from USB flash drives encryption to the other key server type encryption (in this example, Gemalto SafeNet KeySecure), following the steps that are described in 12.6.1, “Changing from USB flash drive provider to encryption key server” on page 653. After completing this step, the other key server type are configured as encryption provider in IBM Spectrum Virtualize, as shown in Figure 12-68.\n\nFigure 12-67 IBM Storwize V7000 encryption configured with USB Flash Drives\n\nFigure 12-68 IBM Storwize V7000 encryption configured with SafeNet KeySecure\n\nChapter 12. Encryption 655" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9608348161216606, + "doc_id": "527c37c5cac01a9df36e98412d174de454233c5a8db15113046bd436c7d92cba", + "edit_distance": 0.166015625, + "f1_score": 0.9892473118279569, + "meteor": 0.9791803634376621, + "precision": 0.989247311827957, + "pred_md": "682\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\nYou can shut down only one node canister, or you can shut down the entire cluster. When you shut down only one node canister, all activities remain active. When you shut down the entire cluster, you need to power on locally to start the system.\n\n## 13.2.1 Shutting down and powering on a complete infrastructure\n\nWhen you shut down or power on the entire infrastructure (storage, servers, applications), follow a particular sequence for both the shutdown and the power-on actions. Next, we describe an example sequence of a shutdown, and then a power-on of an infrastructure that includes IBM Storwize V7000 system.\n\n## Shutting down\n\nTo shut down the infrastructure, complete the following steps:\n\n- 1. Shut down your servers and all applications.\n- 2. Shut down your IBM Storwize V7000 systems:\n- a. Shut down the Storwize V7000 by using the GUI or CLI. For more information, see 4.7.2, 'Shutting down the system' on page 124.\n- b. Power off both switches of the controller enclosure.\n- c. Power off both switches of all the expansion enclosures.\n- 3. Shut down your SAN switches.\n\n## Powering on\n\nTo power on your infrastructure, complete the following steps:\n\n- 1. Power on your SAN switches and wait until the boot completes.\n- 2. Power on your storage systems by completing the following steps:\n- a. Power on both power supplies of all the expansion enclosures.\n- b. Power on both power supplies of the control enclosure.\n- 3. When the storage systems are up, power on your servers and start your applications.\n\n## 13.3 Configuration backup\n\nYou can download and save the configuration backup file by using the IBM Storwize V7000 graphical user interface (GUI) or command-line interface (CLI). On an ad hoc basis, manually perform this procedure because it can save the file directly to your workstation. The command-line option requires login to the system and downloading the dumped file by using specific Secure Copy Protocol (SCP). The command-line option is a good practice for an automated backup of the configuration.\n\nImportant: Generally, perform a daily backup of the Storwize V7000 configuration backup file, which is the best approach is to automate this task. Always perform another backup before any critical maintenance task, such as an update of the IBM Spectrum Virtualize software version.\n\nThe backup file is updated by the cluster every day. Saving it after any changes to your system configuration is also important. It contains configuration data of arrays, pools, volumes, and so on. The backup does not contain any data from the volumes.", + "recall": 0.989247311827957, + "true_md": "You can shut down only one node canister, or you can shut down the entire cluster. When you shut down only one node canister, all activities remain active. When you shut down the entire cluster, you need to power on locally to start the system.\n\nWhen you shut down or power on the entire infrastructure (storage, servers, applications), follow a particular sequence for both the shutdown and the power-on actions. Next, we describe an example sequence of a shutdown, and then a power-on of an infrastructure that includes IBM Storwize V7000 system. \n\nTo shut down the infrastructure, complete the following steps:\n\n## 13.2.1 Shutting down and powering on a complete infrastructure\n\n## Shutting down\n\n- 1. Shut down your servers and all applications.\n\n- 2. Shut down your IBM Storwize V7000 systems:\n\n- a. Shut down the Storwize V7000 by using the GUI or CLI. For more information, see 4.7.2, “Shutting down the system” on page 124.\n\n- b. Power off both switches of the controller enclosure.\n\n- c. Power off both switches of all the expansion enclosures.\n\n- 3. Shut down your SAN switches.\n\n- 1. Power on your SAN switches and wait until the boot completes.\n\n- 2. Power on your storage systems by completing the following steps:\n\n- a. Power on both power supplies of all the expansion enclosures.\n\n- b. Power on both power supplies of the control enclosure.\n\n- 3. When the storage systems are up, power on your servers and start your applications.\n\nTo power on your infrastructure, complete the following steps:\n\n## Powering on\n\n## 13.3 Configuration backup\n\nYou can download and save the configuration backup file by using the IBM Storwize V7000 graphical user interface (GUI) or command-line interface (CLI). On an ad hoc basis, manually perform this procedure because it can save the file directly to your workstation. The command-line option requires login to the system and downloading the dumped file by using specific Secure Copy Protocol (SCP). The command-line option is a good practice for an automated backup of the configuration.\n\nImportant: Generally, perform a daily backup of the Storwize V7000 configuration backup file, which is the best approach is to automate this task. Always perform another backup before any critical maintenance task, such as an update of the IBM Spectrum Virtualize software version.\n\nThe backup file is updated by the cluster every day. Saving it after any changes to your system configuration is also important. It contains configuration data of arrays, pools, volumes, and so on. The backup does not contain any data from the volumes.\n\n682 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8226525204864875, + "doc_id": "54deac6deb8d15e9ce756bef6069ca4f46c135388b685dc44a80ee8ddc65a989", + "edit_distance": 0.7936507936507936, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.7721058357584234, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "- 15.Click Finish to end the storage migration wizard, as shown in Figure 9-14.\n\nFigure 9-14 Migration is started\n\nFigure 9-14 Migration is started\n\nThe end of the wizard is not the end of the migration task. You can find the progress of the migration in the Storage Migration window, as shown in Figure 9-15. The target storage pool and the progress of the volume copy synchronization is also displayed there.\n\nFigure 9-15 The ongoing Migration is listed in the Storage Migration window\n\nFigure 9-15 The ongoing Migration is listed in the Storage Migration window\n\n- 16.If you want to check the progress by using the CLI, run the lsvdisksyncprogress command because the process is essentially a volume copy, as shown in Figure 9-16.\n\nFigure 9-16 Checking migration progress by using CLI\n\nFigure 9-16 Checking migration progress by using CLI\n\n- 17.When the migration completes, select all of the migrations that you want to finalize, right-click the selection, and click Finalize , as shown in Figure 9-17 on page 400.\n\nChapter 9. Storage migration\n\n399", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "- 15.Click Finish to end the storage migration wizard, as shown in Figure 9-14.\n\n- 16.If you want to check the progress by using the CLI, run the lsvdisksyncprogress command because the process is essentially a volume copy, as shown in Figure 9-16.\n\n- 17.When the migration completes, select all of the migrations that you want to finalize, right-click the selection, and click Finalize , as shown in Figure 9-17 on page 400.\n\nFigure 9-16 Checking migration progress by using CLI\n\nFigure 9-15 The ongoing Migration is listed in the Storage Migration window\n\nFigure 9-14 Migration is started\n\nChapter 9. Storage migration 399\n\nThe end of the wizard is not the end of the migration task. You can find the progress of the migration in the Storage Migration window, as shown in Figure 9-15. The target storage pool and the progress of the volume copy synchronization is also displayed there." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8570893001974217, + "doc_id": "f5ad9240f3eee805b1371aa51685dc44770ad440cc0e3eee48ecb3aba9774523", + "edit_distance": 0.5879120879120879, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.8651255754824803, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "588\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\n- 3. Enter the new name that you want to assign to the Consistency Group and click Rename , as shown in Figure 11-134.\n\nFigure 11-134 Entering new name for Consistency Group\n\nFigure 11-134 Entering new name for Consistency Group\n\nRemote copy consistency group name: You can use the letters A - Z and a - z, the numbers 0 - 9, and the underscore (\\_) character. The remote copy name can be 1 - 15 characters. No blanks are allowed.\n\n## 11.9.6 Moving stand-alone remote copy relationships to Consistency Group\n\nTo add one or multiple stand-alone relationships to a remote copy consistency group, complete the following steps:\n\n- 1. Open the Copy Services →→ Remote Copy panel.\n- 2. Right-click the relationships to be moved and select Add to Consistency Group , as shown in Figure 11-135.\n\nFigure 11-135 Adding relationships to a Consistency Group\n\nFigure 11-135 Adding relationships to a Consistency Group", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "- 3. Enter the new name that you want to assign to the Consistency Group and click Rename , as shown in Figure 11-134.\n\n- 2. Right-click the relationships to be moved and select Add to Consistency Group , as shown in Figure 11-135.\n\n- 1. Open the Copy Services →→ Remote Copy panel. \n\nFigure 11-135 Adding relationships to a Consistency Group\n\nFigure 11-134 Entering new name for Consistency Group\n\nRemote copy consistency group name: You can use the letters A - Z and a - z, the numbers 0 - 9, and the underscore (\\_) character. The remote copy name can be 1 - 15 characters. No blanks are allowed.\n\nTo add one or multiple stand-alone relationships to a remote copy consistency group, complete the following steps:\n\n## 11.9.6 Moving stand-alone remote copy relationships to Consistency Group\n\n588 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8709388880833542, + "doc_id": "81808fcb7db7e93787b03423a41465848b47d2476227a18604756cf5ca13c9e4", + "edit_distance": 0.11594202898550725, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9848807041987704, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "- 11.Enter the contact details of the person to be contacted to resolve issues on the system. You can choose to enter the contact information for a 24-hour operations desk. Figure 4-17 shows some details as an example only. Click Apply and Next .\n\nFigure 4-17 System setup: Setting contact information\n\nFigure 4-17 System setup: Setting contact information\n\nChapter 4. Initial configuration\n\n103", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "- 11.Enter the contact details of the person to be contacted to resolve issues on the system. You can choose to enter the contact information for a 24-hour operations desk. Figure 4-17 shows some details as an example only. Click Apply and Next .\n\nFigure 4-17 System setup: Setting contact information\n\nChapter 4. Initial configuration 103" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8204788727790092, + "doc_id": "3948f011a193037a0bc29ad9335473cfff5f0c75cf9529498a2ae16e84e8e700", + "edit_distance": 0.23859649122807017, + "f1_score": 0.9300411522633745, + "meteor": 0.8157593927669173, + "precision": 0.9658119658119658, + "pred_md": "Note: The ability to create HyperSwap volumes by using the GUI simplifies creation and configuration.\n\nTo start the process of creating a volume, navigate to the Volumes menu and click the Volumes option of the IBM Spectrum Virtualize GUI\n\n## 7.2.1 Creating basic volumes\n\nBasic volumes are supported in any system topology and are common to all configurations. Basic volumes can be of any type of virtualization: striped, sequential, or image. They can also use any type of capacity savings: thin-provisioning, compressed, or none. Deduplication can be configured with thin-provisioned and compressed volumes in data reduction pools for added capacity savings.\n\nTo create a basic volume, click Basic as shown in Figure 7-11 on page 260. This action opens Basic volume menu where you can define the following parameters:\n\n- /SM590000 Pool: The Pool in which the volume is created (drop-down menu).\n- /SM590000 Quantity: Number of volumes to be created (numeric up or down).\n- /SM590000 Capacity: Size of the volume in specified units (drop-down menu).\n- /SM590000 Capacity Savings (drop-down menu):\n- -None\n- -Thin-provisioned\n- -Compressed\n- /SM590000 Name: Name of the volume (cannot start with a number).\n- /SM590000 I/O group.\n\nChapter 7. Volumes\n\n259", + "recall": 0.8968253968253969, + "true_md": "Note: The ability to create HyperSwap volumes by using the GUI simplifies creation and configuration. \n\nTo start the process of creating a volume, navigate to the Volumes menu and click the Volumes option of the IBM Spectrum Virtualize GUI\n\nBasic volumes are supported in any system topology and are common to all configurations. \n\nBasic volumes can be of any type of virtualization: striped, sequential, or image. They can also use any type of capacity savings: thin-provisioning, compressed, or none. Deduplication can be configured with thin-provisioned and compressed volumes in data reduction pools for added capacity savings. \n\nTo create a basic volume, click Basic as shown in Figure 7-11 on page 260. This action opens Basic volume menu where you can define the following parameters:\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Pool: The Pool in which the volume is created (drop-down menu).\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Quantity: Number of volumes to be created (numeric up or down).\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Capacity: Size of the volume in specified units (drop-down menu).\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Capacity Savings (drop-down menu):\n\n- –N o n e\n\n- – Thin-provisioned\n\n- – Compressed\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Name: Name of the volume (cannot start with a number).\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> I/O group.\n\n## 7.2.1 Creating basic volumes\n\nChapter 7. Volumes 259" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9231044598399879, + "doc_id": "63b4d3b8cdd642faf60bcdd20962805f047bf07ba3248dabd8d7e3cf4881da61", + "edit_distance": 0.754863813229572, + "f1_score": 0.9838709677419355, + "meteor": 0.8895740561864552, + "precision": 0.9838709677419355, + "pred_md": "Figure 11-42 FlashCopy mapping preset selection\n\nFigure 11-42 FlashCopy mapping preset selection\n\nWhen selecting a preset, some options, such as Background Copy Rate, Incremental, and Delete mapping after completion, are automatically changed or selected. You can still change the automatic settings, but this is not recommended for the following reasons:\n\n- -For example, if you select the Backup preset but then clear Incremental or select Delete mapping after completion , you lose the benefits of the incremental FlashCopy. You must copy the entire source volume each time you start the mapping.\n- -As another example, if you select the Snapshot preset but then change the Background Copy Rate , you have with a full copy of your source volume.\n\nFor more information about the Background Copy Rate and Cleaning Rate options, see Table 11-1 on page 448 or see Table 11-5 on page 457.\n\n- 5. When your FlashCopy mapping setup is ready, click Finish .\n\n## 11.2.9 Showing related Volumes\n\nTo show related volumes for a specific FlashCopy mapping, complete the following steps:\n\n- 1. Open the Copy Services FlashCopy Mappings window.\n- 2. Right-click a FlashCopy mapping and select Show Related Volumes , as shown in Figure 11-43 on page 486. Also, depending on which window you are inside Copy Services, you can right-click the mappings and select Show Related Volumes .\n\nChapter 11. Advanced Copy Services\n\n485", + "recall": 0.9838709677419355, + "true_md": "Figure 11-42 FlashCopy mapping preset selection\n\nWhen selecting a preset, some options, such as Background Copy Rate, Incremental, and Delete mapping after completion, are automatically changed or selected. You can still change the automatic settings, but this is not recommended for the following reasons: \n\nFor more information about the Background Copy Rate and Cleaning Rate options, see Table 11-1 on page 448 or see Table 11-5 on page 457.\n\nTo show related volumes for a specific FlashCopy mapping, complete the following steps:\n\n- 1. Open the Copy Services FlashCopy Mappings window.\n\n- 2. Right-click a FlashCopy mapping and select Show Related Volumes , as shown in Figure 11-43 on page 486. Also, depending on which window you are inside Copy Services, you can right-click the mappings and select Show Related Volumes .\n\n- – As another example, if you select the Snapshot preset but then change the Background Copy Rate , you have with a full copy of your source volume.\n\n- 5. When your FlashCopy mapping setup is ready, click Finish .\n\n- – For example, if you select the Backup preset but then clear Incremental or select Delete mapping after completion , you lose the benefits of the incremental FlashCopy. You must copy the entire source volume each time you start the mapping.\n\n## 11.2.9 Showing related Volumes\n\nChapter 11. Advanced Copy Services 485" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8574534507423421, + "doc_id": "783be2b407a44f2c50d2c189f37eefb3783d7723ce964d6972d61b1137c91140", + "edit_distance": 0.7003058103975535, + "f1_score": 0.9288389513108614, + "meteor": 0.899821191929231, + "precision": 0.9185185185185185, + "pred_md": "380\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\n## Deleting ports from a defined host\n\nIf a mistake is made while adding a port, or if an HBA is removed from a server that is defined within the Storwize V7000, use the rmhostport command to remove WWPN definitions from a host.\n\nBefore removing the WWPN, ensure that it is the correct WWPN by issuing the lshost command, as shown in Example 8-35.\n\nExample 8-35 Using the lshost command to check the WWPNs\n\n```\nIBM_2145:ITSO-SV1:superuser> lshost ITSO-VMHOST-01 id 0 name ITSO-VMHOST-01 port_count 2 type generic mask 1111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111 iogrp_count 4 status online site_id site_name host_cluster_id 0 host_cluster_name ITSO-ESX-Cluster-01 protocol scsi WWPN 2100000E1E30E597 node_logged_in_count 2 state online WWPN 2100000E1E30E5E8 node_logged_in_count 2 state online IBM_2145:ITSO-SV1:superuser>\n```\n\nWhen the WWPN or iSCSI IQN that needs to be deleted is known, use the rmhostport command to delete a host port, as shown in Example 8-36.\n\nExample 8-36 Using the rmhostport command to remove a WWPN\n\nIBM\\_Storwize:ITSO-V7000:superuser> rmhostport -fcwwpn 2100000E1E30E597 ITSO-VMHOST-01 IBM\\_Storwize:ITSO-V7000:superuser>\n\nUse the command to remove the iSCSI IQN, as shown in Example 8-37.\n\nExample 8-37 Removing iSCSI port from the host\n\nIBM\\_Storwize:ITSO-V7000:superuser> rmhostport -iscsiname iqn.1994-05.com.redhat:e6ddffaab567 RHEL-Host-05 IBM\\_Storwize:ITSO-V7000:superuser>\n\nUse the command to remove the NVMe NQN, as shown in Example 8-38.\n\nExample 8-38 Removing NQN port from the host\n\nIBM\\_Storwize:ITSO-V7000:superuser>rmhostport -nqn nqn.2016-06.io.rhel:875adad3345\n\nRHEL-Host-08\n\nIBM\\_Storwize:ITSO-V7000:superuser>\n\nNote: Multiple ports can be removed at one time by using the separator or colon (:) between the port names, as shown in the following example:\n\nrmhostport -hbawwpn 210000E08B054CAA:210000E08B892BCD Angola", + "recall": 0.9393939393939394, + "true_md": "## Deleting ports from a defined host\n\nIf a mistake is made while adding a port, or if an HBA is removed from a server that is defined within the Storwize V7000, use the rmhostport command to remove WWPN definitions from a host.\n\nBefore removing the WWPN, ensure that it is the correct WWPN by issuing the lshost command, as shown in Example 8-35.\n\nWhen the WWPN or iSCSI IQN that needs to be deleted is known, use the rmhostport command to delete a host port, as shown in Example 8-36.\n\nUse the command to remove the iSCSI IQN, as shown in Example 8-37.\n\nUse the command to remove the NVMe NQN, as shown in Example 8-38.\n\nNote: Multiple ports can be removed at one time by using the separator or colon (:) between the port names, as shown in the following example: \n\nrmhostport -hbawwpn 210000E08B054CAA:210000E08B892BCD Angola\n\nExample 8-38 Removing NQN port from the host\n\nExample 8-37 Removing iSCSI port from the host\n\nExample 8-36 Using the rmhostport command to remove a WWPN\n\nExample 8-35 Using the lshost command to check the WWPNs\n\nIBM\\_2145:ITSO-SV1:superuser> lshost ITSO-VMHOST-01 id 0 name ITSO-VMHOST-01 port\\_count 2 type generic mask 1111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111 iogrp\\_count 4 status online site\\_id site\\_name host\\_cluster\\_id 0 host\\_cluster\\_name ITSO-ESX-Cluster-01 protocol scsi WWPN 2100000E1E30E597 node\\_logged\\_in\\_count 2 state online WWPN 2100000E1E30E5E8 node\\_logged\\_in\\_count 2 state online IBM\\_2145:ITSO-SV1:superuser>\n\nIBM\\_Storwize:ITSO-V7000:superuser> rmhostport -fcwwpn 2100000E1E30E597 ITSO-VMHOST-01 IBM\\_Storwize:ITSO-V7000:superuser>\n\nIBM\\_Storwize:ITSO-V7000:superuser> rmhostport -iscsiname iqn.1994-05.com.redhat:e6ddffaab567 RHEL-Host-05 IBM\\_Storwize:ITSO-V7000:superuser>\n\nIBM\\_Storwize:ITSO-V7000:superuser>rmhostport -nqn nqn.2016-06.io.rhel:875adad3345 RHEL-Host-08 IBM\\_Storwize:ITSO-V7000:superuser>\n\n380 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9427629966747321, + "doc_id": "d1b969509a1b4e2040beb636a72d129e8822db95f2d435c909dbef7b62cbef62", + "edit_distance": 0.10545454545454545, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9947050249284051, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Figure 11-12 Consistency groups and mappings combinations\n\nFigure 11-12 Consistency groups and mappings combinations\n\nWhen a source volume is in a FlashCopy mapping with multiple targets, in multiple consistency groups, it allows the copy of a single source at multiple points in time. Therefore, multiple versions of a single volume are kept.\n\n## Consistency Group with Multiple Target FlashCopy\n\nA Consistency Group aggregates FlashCopy mappings, not volumes. Therefore, where a source volume has multiple FlashCopy mappings, they can be in the same or separate Consistency Groups.\n\nIf a volume is the source volume for multiple FlashCopy mappings, you might want to create separate Consistency Groups to separate each mapping of the same source volume. Regardless of whether the source volume with multiple target volumes is in the same consistency group or in separate consistency groups, the resulting FlashCopy produces multiple identical copies of the source data.\n\n## Dependencies\n\nWhen a source volume has multiple target volumes, a mapping is created for each source-target relationship. When data is changed on the source volume, it is first copied on the target volume because of the copy-on-write mechanism that is used by FlashCopy.\n\nYou can create up to 256 targets for a single source volume. Therefore, a single write operation on the source volume might result in 256 write operations (one per target volume). This generates a large workload that the system cannot handle and lead to a heavy performance impact on front-end operations.\n\nChapter 11. Advanced Copy Services\n\n453", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Figure 11-12 Consistency groups and mappings combinations\n\nWhen a source volume is in a FlashCopy mapping with multiple targets, in multiple consistency groups, it allows the copy of a single source at multiple points in time. Therefore, multiple versions of a single volume are kept.\n\nA Consistency Group aggregates FlashCopy mappings, not volumes. Therefore, where a source volume has multiple FlashCopy mappings, they can be in the same or separate Consistency Groups.\n\nIf a volume is the source volume for multiple FlashCopy mappings, you might want to create separate Consistency Groups to separate each mapping of the same source volume. Regardless of whether the source volume with multiple target volumes is in the same consistency group or in separate consistency groups, the resulting FlashCopy produces multiple identical copies of the source data.\n\nWhen a source volume has multiple target volumes, a mapping is created for each source-target relationship. When data is changed on the source volume, it is first copied on the target volume because of the copy-on-write mechanism that is used by FlashCopy. \n\nYou can create up to 256 targets for a single source volume. Therefore, a single write operation on the source volume might result in 256 write operations (one per target volume). This generates a large workload that the system cannot handle and lead to a heavy performance impact on front-end operations.\n\n## Consistency Group with Multiple Target FlashCopy\n\n## Dependencies\n\nChapter 11. Advanced Copy Services 453" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9541026771188801, + "doc_id": "bbde8d7e1caf7323d100757fd91508f3ec2e0e68393822851d5089ad140384b7", + "edit_distance": 0.08737864077669903, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9973039911768987, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## 11.1.7 Interaction with cache\n\nIBM Spectrum Virtualize-based systems have their cache divided into upper and lower cache. Upper cache serves mostly as write cache and hides the write latency from the hosts and application. Lower cache is a read/write cache and optimizes I/O to and from disks. Figure 11-10 shows the IBM Spectrum Virtualize cache architecture.\n\nFigure 11-10 New cache architecture\n\nFigure 11-10 New cache architecture\n\nThis copy-on-write process introduces significant latency into write operations. To isolate the active application from this extra latency, the FlashCopy indirection layer is placed logically between upper and lower cache. Therefore, the extra latency that is introduced by the copy-on-write process is encountered only by the internal cache operations and not by the application.\n\nThe two-level cache provides more performance improvements to the FlashCopy mechanism. Because the FlashCopy layer is above lower cache in the IBM Spectrum Virtualize software stack, it can benefit from read prefetching and coalescing writes to back-end storage. Preparing FlashCopy benefits from the two-level cache because upper cache write data does not have to go directly to back-end storage, but to lower cache layer instead.\n\n## 11.1.8 Background Copy Rate\n\nThe Background Copy Rate is a property of a FlashCopy mapping. A grain copy from the source to the target can occur when triggered by a write operation on the source or target volume, or when background copy is enabled. With background copy enabled, the target volume eventually becomes a clone of the source volume at the time the mapping was started (T0). When the copy is completed, the mapping can be removed between the two volumes and you can end up with two independent volumes.\n\nChapter 11. Advanced Copy Services\n\n447", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## 11.1.7 Interaction with cache\n\n## 11.1.8 Background Copy Rate\n\nIBM Spectrum Virtualize-based systems have their cache divided into upper and lower cache. Upper cache serves mostly as write cache and hides the write latency from the hosts and application. Lower cache is a read/write cache and optimizes I/O to and from disks. Figure 11-10 shows the IBM Spectrum Virtualize cache architecture.\n\nThis copy-on-write process introduces significant latency into write operations. To isolate the active application from this extra latency, the FlashCopy indirection layer is placed logically between upper and lower cache. Therefore, the extra latency that is introduced by the copy-on-write process is encountered only by the internal cache operations and not by the application.\n\nThe two-level cache provides more performance improvements to the FlashCopy mechanism. Because the FlashCopy layer is above lower cache in the IBM Spectrum Virtualize software stack, it can benefit from read prefetching and coalescing writes to back-end storage. Preparing FlashCopy benefits from the two-level cache because upper cache write data does not have to go directly to back-end storage, but to lower cache layer instead.\n\nThe Background Copy Rate is a property of a FlashCopy mapping. A grain copy from the source to the target can occur when triggered by a write operation on the source or target volume, or when background copy is enabled. With background copy enabled, the target volume eventually becomes a clone of the source volume at the time the mapping was started (T0). When the copy is completed, the mapping can be removed between the two volumes and you can end up with two independent volumes.\n\nChapter 11. Advanced Copy Services 447\n\nFigure 11-10 New cache architecture" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9056258031396969, + "doc_id": "133694c4347d111204dbac805319e6a799dc45d7878f412c4ac31e33ceca8d05", + "edit_distance": 0.16022099447513813, + "f1_score": 0.978723404255319, + "meteor": 0.8949518018986763, + "precision": 0.9938271604938271, + "pred_md": "- /SM590000 Network: Use the Network pane to manage the management IP addresses for the system, service IP addresses for the nodes, and iSCSI and Fibre Channel configurations. The system must support Fibre Channel or Fibre Channel over Ethernet connections to your storage area network (SAN).\n- /SM590000 Security: Use the Security pane to configure and manage remote authentication services.\n- /SM590000 System: Navigate to the System menu item to manage overall system configuration options, such as licenses, updates, and date and time settings.\n- /SM590000 Support: Helps to configure and manage connections, and upload support packages to the support center.\n- /SM590000 GUI Preferences: Configure welcome message after login, refresh internals and GUI logout timeouts.\n\nThese options are described next.\n\n## 5.10.1 Notifications menu\n\nIBM Storwize V7000 can use SNMP traps, syslog messages, and Call Home email to notify you and the IBM Support Center when significant events are detected. Any combination of these notification methods can be used simultaneously.\n\nNotifications are normally sent immediately after an event is raised. However, events can occur because of service actions that are performed. If a recommended service action is active, notifications about these events are sent only if the events are still unfixed when the service action completes.\n\n## SNMP notifications\n\nSNMP is a standard protocol for managing networks and exchanging messages. The system can send SNMP messages that notify personnel about an event. You can use an SNMP manager to view the SNMP messages that are sent by IBM Storwize V7000.\n\nTo view the SNMP configuration, use the System window. Point to the Settings icon and click Notification → SNMP (see Figure 5-54).\n\nFigure 5-54 Setting SNMP server and traps\n\nFigure 5-54 Setting SNMP server and traps\n\nChapter 5. Graphical user interface\n\n163", + "recall": 0.9640718562874252, + "true_md": "- GLYPH<SM590000> Network: Use the Network pane to manage the management IP addresses for the system, service IP addresses for the nodes, and iSCSI and Fibre Channel configurations. The system must support Fibre Channel or Fibre Channel over Ethernet connections to your storage area network (SAN).\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Security: Use the Security pane to configure and manage remote authentication services.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> System: Navigate to the System menu item to manage overall system configuration options, such as licenses, updates, and date and time settings.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Support: Helps to configure and manage connections, and upload support packages to the support center.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> GUI Preferences: Configure welcome message after login, refresh internals and GUI logout timeouts. \n\nThese options are described next.\n\nIBM Storwize V7000 can use SNMP traps, syslog messages, and Call Home email to notify you and the IBM Support Center when significant events are detected. Any combination of these notification methods can be used simultaneously.\n\nNotifications are normally sent immediately after an event is raised. However, events can occur because of service actions that are performed. If a recommended service action is active, notifications about these events are sent only if the events are still unfixed when the service action completes.\n\nSNMP is a standard protocol for managing networks and exchanging messages. The system can send SNMP messages that notify personnel about an event. You can use an SNMP manager to view the SNMP messages that are sent by IBM Storwize V7000. \n\nTo view the SNMP configuration, use the System window. Point to the Settings icon and click Notification → SNMP (see Figure 5-54).\n\n## 5.10.1 Notifications menu\n\n## SNMP notifications\n\nFigure 5-54 Setting SNMP server and traps\n\nChapter 5. Graphical user interface 163" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9837574786498846, + "doc_id": "5b71c1e903de06d1f358212e481295f8fb0209e4ce62c71d4e02b295308607bc", + "edit_distance": 0.029513888888888888, + "f1_score": 0.990049751243781, + "meteor": 0.9949179270090498, + "precision": 0.9900497512437811, + "pred_md": "## 10.2.1 Concepts\n\nVolumes can be configured as thin-provisioned or fully allocated. Both of them can be configured in standard pools and data reduction pools.\n\nIn IBM Storwize V7000, each volume has virtual capacity and real capacity parameters. Virtual capacity is the volume storage capacity that is available to a host Operating System (OS) and is used by it to create a file system. Real capacity is the storage capacity that is allocated to a volume from a pool, it shows the actual amount of space that is used on physical storage.\n\nFully allocated volumes are created with the same amount of real capacity and virtual capacity . This type uses no storage efficiency features.\n\nA thin-provisioned volume presents a different capacity to mapped hosts than the capacity that the volume uses in the storage pool, so real and virtual capacities might not be equal.\n\nThe virtual capacity of a thin-provisioned volume is typically significantly larger than its real capacity. As more information is written by the host to the volume, more of the real capacity is used. The system identifies read operations to unwritten parts of the virtual capacity and returns zeros to the server without using any real capacity.\n\nThe autoexpand feature prevents a thin-provisioned volume from using up its capacity and going offline. As a thin-provisioned volume uses capacity, the autoexpand feature maintains a fixed amount of unused real capacity, called the contingency capacity . For thin-provisioned volumes in standard pools, the autoexpand feature can be turned on and off. For thin-provisioned volumes in data reduction pools, the autoexpand feature is always enabled.\n\nA thin-provisioned volume can be converted non-disruptively to a fully allocated volume, or vice versa, by using the volume mirroring function. For example, you can add a thin-provisioned copy to a fully allocated primary volume and then remove the fully allocated copy from the volume after they are synchronized.\n\nThe fully allocated to thin-provisioned migration procedure uses a zero-detection algorithm so that grains that contain all zeros do not cause any real capacity to be used. Usually, if the Storwize V7000 is to detect zeros on the volume, you must use software on the host side to write zeros to all unused space on the disk or file system.\n\n## 10.2.2 Implementation\n\nFor more information about creating thin-provisioned volumes, see Chapter 7, 'Volumes' on page 241.\n\n## Metadata\n\nIn a standard pool, the system uses the real capacity to store data that is written to the volume, and metadata that describes the thin-provisioned configuration of the volume. Metadata uses volume real capacity and usually needs less than 0.5% of virtual capacity to store its data.\n\nThis means that if your host used 100% of virtual capacity, some extra space is required on your storage pool to store thin provisioning metadata. In a worst case, the real size of a thin provisioned volume can be 100.5% of its virtual capacity.\n\nIn a data reduction pool, metadata for a thin provisioned volume is stored separately from user data, and does not count in the volumes real capacity.\n\n416\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1", + "recall": 0.9900497512437811, + "true_md": "## 10.2.1 Concepts\n\nVolumes can be configured as thin-provisioned or fully allocated. Both of them can be configured in standard pools and data reduction pools.\n\nIn IBM Storwize V7000, each volume has virtual capacity and real capacity parameters. Virtual capacity is the volume storage capacity that is available to a host Operating System (OS) and is used by it to create a file system. Real capacity is the storage capacity that is allocated to a volume from a pool, it shows the actual amount of space that is used on physical storage.\n\nFully allocated volumes are created with the same amount of real capacity and virtual capacity . This type uses no storage efficiency features. \n\nA thin-provisioned volume presents a different capacity to mapped hosts than the capacity that the volume uses in the storage pool, so real and virtual capacities might not be equal. \n\nThe virtual capacity of a thin-provisioned volume is typically significantly larger than its real capacity. As more information is written by the host to the volume, more of the real capacity is used. The system identifies read operations to unwritten parts of the virtual capacity and returns zeros to the server without using any real capacity.\n\nThe autoexpand feature prevents a thin-provisioned volume from using up its capacity and going offline. As a thin-provisioned volume uses capacity, the autoexpand feature maintains a fixed amount of unused real capacity, called the contingency capacity . For thin-provisioned volumes in standard pools, the autoexpand feature can be turned on and off. For thin-provisioned volumes in data reduction pools, the autoexpand feature is always enabled.\n\nA thin-provisioned volume can be converted non-disruptively to a fully allocated volume, or vice versa, by using the volume mirroring function. For example, you can add a thin-provisioned copy to a fully allocated primary volume and then remove the fully allocated copy from the volume after they are synchronized.\n\nThe fully allocated to thin-provisioned migration procedure uses a zero-detection algorithm so that grains that contain all zeros do not cause any real capacity to be used. Usually, if the Storwize V7000 is to detect zeros on the volume, you must use software on the host side to write zeros to all unused space on the disk or file system.\n\nFor more information about creating thin-provisioned volumes, see Chapter 7, “Volumes” on page 241.\n\nIn a standard pool, the system uses the real capacity to store data that is written to the volume, and metadata that describes the thin-provisioned configuration of the volume. Metadata uses volume real capacity and usually needs less than 0.5% of virtual capacity to store its data. \n\nThis means that if your host used 100% of virtual capacity, some extra space is required on your storage pool to store thin provisioning metadata. In a worst case, the real size of a thin provisioned volume can be 100.5% of its virtual capacity. \n\nIn a data reduction pool, metadata for a thin provisioned volume is stored separately from user data, and does not count in the volumes real capacity.\n\n## 10.2.2 Implementation\n\n## Metadata\n\n416 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9491175188233121, + "doc_id": "91e2103d95aa86d5e58e9ff6374a5a22eda0a3479b3d8dfdc3b16c35df8b7fe5", + "edit_distance": 0.0773067331670823, + "f1_score": 0.9872773536895675, + "meteor": 0.9882527342638873, + "precision": 0.9897959183673469, + "pred_md": "Draft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n8459ch02.fm\n\nby integrating them into virtual machines. IT administrators, developers, and line-of-business users want to continue a simplified access to the infrastructure and applications, which is possible by adopting the IBM Power Systems cloud technologies within the data center.\n\nFrom a Power Systems view, PowerVC delivers the IaaS layer on-premises, which simplifies virtualization management and cloud deployments virtual machines. This integration with multicloud environments is by way of cloud orchestrators, like the Kubernetes based Red Hat OpenShift platform. OpenShift provides a universal PaaS solution, covering the entire hybrid multicloud landscape. So, users can run their software of choice, built as containers, including IBM enterprise software delivered by way of IBM Cloud Paks (Chapter 3, 'IBM Cloud Paks Middleware anywhere' on page 35), ISV applications, and Open-source software (OSS). And finally, technologies such as IBM Multicloud Manager or VMware vRealize can integrate the historically separate cloud infrastructures into a single interconnected cloud fabric.\n\nFigure 2-7 shows an example of a hybrid multicloud scenario that is inclusive of the major hardware platforms, including IBM Power Systems, IBM Zfi, and x86.\n\nFigure 2-7 Hybrid multicloud scenario\n\nFigure 2-7 Hybrid multicloud scenario\n\n## Manage-To\n\nIn the Manage-To side of the picture, you see the hybrid IT, that has the foundation, platforms, apps, and tools from different vendors. As proprietary tools do not talk to each other, you need advancements in infrastructure, management, and development that bring your clouds together.\n\n## Manage-From\n\nIn the Manage-From side of the picture, you see Red Hat OpenShift, Multicloud Manager and Cloud Automation Manager (CAM) management components.\n\nMulticloud Manager is the enterprise-grade multicloud management solution for Kubernetes. It provides consistent visibility, governance, and automation across the hybrid multicloud infrastructures. It also provides a single source to provision applications and enforces access and security policies across heterogeneous cloud environments. Whether your enterprise application is a modernized traditional application or a cloud-native, 12-factor application, Multicloud Manager provides a consistent way to deploy your application across clusters.\n\nChapter 2. Introduction to Containers and Orchestration with Kubernetes\n\n15", + "recall": 0.9847715736040609, + "true_md": "Draft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n8459ch02.fm\n\nby integrating them into virtual machines. IT administrators, developers, and line-of-business users want to continue a simplified access to the infrastructure and applications, which is possible by adopting the IBM Power Systems cloud technologies within the data center. \n\nFrom a Power Systems view, PowerVC delivers the IaaS layer on-premises, which simplifies virtualization management and cloud deployments virtual machines. This integration with multicloud environments is by way of cloud orchestrators, like the Kubernetes based Red Hat OpenShift platform. OpenShift provides a universal PaaS solution, covering the entire hybrid multicloud landscape. So, users can run their software of choice, built as containers, including IBM enterprise software delivered by way of IBM Cloud Paks (Chapter 3, “IBM Cloud Paks - Middleware anywhere” on page 35), ISV applications, and Open-source software (OSS). And finally, technologies such as IBM Multicloud Manager or VMware vRealize can integrate the historically separate cloud infrastructures into a single interconnected cloud fabric.\n\nFigure 2-7 shows an example of a hybrid multicloud scenario that is inclusive of the major hardware platforms, including IBM Power Systems, IBM Zfi, and x86. \n\nIn the Manage-To side of the picture, you see the hybrid IT, that has the foundation, platforms, apps, and tools from different vendors. As proprietary tools do not talk to each other, you need advancements in infrastructure, management, and development that bring your clouds together.\n\nIn the Manage-From side of the picture, you see Red Hat OpenShift, Multicloud Manager and Cloud Automation Manager (CAM) management components.\n\nMulticloud Manager is the enterprise-grade multicloud management solution for Kubernetes. It provides consistent visibility, governance, and automation across the hybrid multicloud infrastructures. It also provides a single source to provision applications and enforces access and security policies across heterogeneous cloud environments. Whether your enterprise application is a modernized traditional application or a cloud-native, 12-factor application, Multicloud Manager provides a consistent way to deploy your application across clusters. \n\n## Manage-To\n\n## Manage-From\n\nFigure 2-7 Hybrid multicloud scenario\n\nChapter 2. Introduction to Containers and Orchestration with Kubernetes 15" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8799995663836836, + "doc_id": "b13e01011b5b44d192721d60dafbe3c37a7ec0c7783820711799db29a9757e70", + "edit_distance": 0.4707846410684474, + "f1_score": 0.97196261682243, + "meteor": 0.8596405304728009, + "precision": 0.9811320754716981, + "pred_md": "## 7.1 Introduction to volumes\n\nA volume is a logical disk that the system presents to attached hosts. For an IBM Spectrum Virtualize system cluster, the volume that is presented to a host is internally represented as a virtual disk (VDisk). A VDisk is an area of usable storage that was allocated out of a pool of storage that is managed by IBM Spectrum Virtualize cluster. The term virtual is used because the volume that is presented does not necessarily exist on a single physical entity.\n\nNote: Volumes are made out of extents that are allocated from a storage pool. Storage pools group managed disks (MDisks), which are Redundant Arrays of Independent Disks (RAIDs) from internal storage, or logical units that are presented to and virtualized by IBM Spectrum Virtualize system. Each MDisk is divided into sequentially numbered extents (0 based indexing). The extent size is a property of a storage pool, and is used for all MDisks comprising the storage pool.\n\nMDisks are not directly visible to or used by host systems.\n\nA volume is presented to hosts by an I/O Group, and within that group has a preferred node; that is, a node that by default serves I/O requests to that volume.\n\nIBM Spectrum Virtualize uses 512 bytes block size for volumes that are presented to hosts.\n\n## 7.1.1 Operations on volumes\n\nThe following operations can be performed on a volume:\n\n- /SM590000 Volumes can be created and deleted.\n- /SM590000 Volumes can be resized (expanded or shrunk).\n- /SM590000 Volumes can be migrated at run time to another MDisk or storage pool.\n- /SM590000 Volumes can be mirrored, or mirrored volumes can be split.\n- /SM590000 Point-in-time volume can be created by using FlashCopy. Multiple snapshots and quick restore from snapshots (reverse FlashCopy) are supported.\n\nNote: With V7.4 and later, it is possible to prevent accidental deletion of volumes if they recently performed any I/O operations. This feature is called Volume protection , and it prevents active volumes, or host mappings from being deleted inadvertently. This process is done by using a global system setting. For more information, see section 7.8.9, 'Volume delete protection' on page 303 and the 'Enabling volume protection' topic in IBM Knowledge Center.\n\n## 7.1.2 Volume characteristics\n\nVolumes have the following characteristics or attributes:\n\n- /SM590000 Volumes can be configured as managed or in image mode.\n- /SM590000 Volumes can have extents allocated in striped or sequential mode.\n- /SM590000 Volumes can be created as fully allocated or thin-provisioned. A conversion from a fully allocated to a thin-provisioned volume and vice versa can be done at run time.\n- /SM590000 Volumes can be configured to have single data copy, or be mirrored to make them resistant to disk subsystem failures or to improve the read performance.\n\n242\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1", + "recall": 0.9629629629629629, + "true_md": "## 7.1 Introduction to volumes\n\n## 7.1.1 Operations on volumes\n\n## 7.1.2 Volume characteristics\n\nA volume is a logical disk that the system presents to attached hosts. For an IBM Spectrum Virtualize system cluster, the volume that is presented to a host is internally represented as a virtual disk (VDisk). A VDisk is an area of usable storage that was allocated out of a pool of storage that is managed by IBM Spectrum Virtualize cluster. The term virtual is used because the volume that is presented does not necessarily exist on a single physical entity.\n\nNote: Volumes are made out of extents that are allocated from a storage pool. Storage pools group managed disks (MDisks), which are Redundant Arrays of Independent Disks (RAIDs) from internal storage, or logical units that are presented to and virtualized by IBM Spectrum Virtualize system. Each MDisk is divided into sequentially numbered extents (0 based indexing). The extent size is a property of a storage pool, and is used for all MDisks comprising the storage pool.\n\nMDisks are not directly visible to or used by host systems. \n\nA volume is presented to hosts by an I/O Group, and within that group has a preferred node; that is, a node that by default serves I/O requests to that volume.\n\nIBM Spectrum Virtualize uses 512 bytes block size for volumes that are presented to hosts.\n\nThe following operations can be performed on a volume:\n\nNote: With V7.4 and later, it is possible to prevent accidental deletion of volumes if they recently performed any I/O operations. This feature is called Volume protection , and it prevents active volumes, or host mappings from being deleted inadvertently. This process is done by using a global system setting. For more information, see section 7.8.9, “Volume delete protection” on page 303 and the “Enabling volume protection” topic in IBM Knowledge Center.\n\nVolumes have the following characteristics or attributes:\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Volumes can be configured to have single data copy, or be mirrored to make them resistant to disk subsystem failures or to improve the read performance.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Volumes can be created as fully allocated or thin-provisioned. A conversion from a fully allocated to a thin-provisioned volume and vice versa can be done at run time.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Volumes can have extents allocated in striped or sequential mode.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Volumes can be configured as managed or in image mode.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Point-in-time volume can be created by using FlashCopy. Multiple snapshots and quick restore from snapshots (reverse FlashCopy) are supported.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Volumes can be mirrored, or mirrored volumes can be split.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Volumes can be migrated at run time to another MDisk or storage pool.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Volumes can be resized (expanded or shrunk).\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Volumes can be created and deleted. \n\n242 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9327738492379379, + "doc_id": "750c740580cc3775046b6cb4d1cb403155b012b6b24a328b34e937ce91ba70bf", + "edit_distance": 0.8422174840085288, + "f1_score": 0.9878934624697338, + "meteor": 0.7669138217812904, + "precision": 0.9902912621359223, + "pred_md": "## Mirrored volume\n\nA mirrored volume is a single virtual volume that has two physical volume copies. The primary physical copy is known within the IBM Storwize V7000 as copy 0 and the secondary copy is known within the IBM Storwize V7000 as copy 1 .\n\n## Node canister\n\nA node canister is a hardware unit that includes the node hardware, fabric and service interfaces, and serial-attached SCSI (SAS) expansion ports. Node canisters are specifically recognized on IBM Storwize products. In SVC, all these components are spread within the whole system chassis, so we usually do not consider node canisters in SVC, but just the node as a whole.\n\n## Node rescue\n\nThe process by which a node with no valid software is installed on its hard disk drive can copy software from another node connected to the same Fibre Channel fabric.\n\n## NPIV\n\nN\\_Port ID Virtualization (NPIV) is a Fibre Channel feature whereby multiple Fibre Channel node port (N\\_Port) IDs can share a single physical N\\_Port.\n\n## Object Storage\n\nObject Storage is a general term that refers to the entity in which Cloud Object Storage organizes, manages, and stores with units of storage or just objects .\n\n## Oversubscription\n\nOversubscription refers to the ratio of the sum of the traffic on the initiator N-port connections to the traffic on the most heavily loaded ISLs, where more than one connection is used between these switches. Oversubscription assumes a symmetrical network, and a specific workload that is applied equally from all initiators and sent equally to all targets. A symmetrical network means that all the initiators are connected at the same level, and all the controllers are connected at the same level.\n\n## Over provisioned\n\nSee 'Capacity' on page 771.\n\n## Over provisioned ratio\n\nSee 'Capacity' on page 771.\n\n## Parent pool\n\nParent pools receive their capacity from MDisks. All MDisks in a pool are split into extents of the same size. Volumes are created from the extents that are available in the pool. You can add MDisks to a pool at any time either to increase the number of extents that are available for new volume copies or to expand existing volume copies. The system automatically balances volume extents between the MDisks to provide the best performance to the volumes.\n\n## Partnership\n\nIn Metro Mirror or Global Mirror operations, the relationship between two clustered systems. In a clustered-system partnership, one system is defined as the local system and the other system as the remote system.\n\nAppendix C. Terminology\n\n781", + "recall": 0.9855072463768116, + "true_md": "## Mirrored volume\n\n## Node canister\n\n## Node rescue\n\n## NPIV\n\n## Object Storage\n\n## Oversubscription\n\n## Over provisioned\n\n## Over provisioned ratio\n\n## Parent pool\n\n## Partnership\n\nIn Metro Mirror or Global Mirror operations, the relationship between two clustered systems. In a clustered-system partnership, one system is defined as the local system and the other system as the remote system.\n\nParent pools receive their capacity from MDisks. All MDisks in a pool are split into extents of the same size. Volumes are created from the extents that are available in the pool. You can add MDisks to a pool at any time either to increase the number of extents that are available for new volume copies or to expand existing volume copies. The system automatically balances volume extents between the MDisks to provide the best performance to the volumes.\n\nSee “Capacity” on page 771.\n\nSee “Capacity” on page 771.\n\nOversubscription refers to the ratio of the sum of the traffic on the initiator N-port connections to the traffic on the most heavily loaded ISLs, where more than one connection is used between these switches. Oversubscription assumes a symmetrical network, and a specific workload that is applied equally from all initiators and sent equally to all targets. A symmetrical network means that all the initiators are connected at the same level, and all the controllers are connected at the same level.\n\nObject Storage is a general term that refers to the entity in which Cloud Object Storage organizes, manages, and stores with units of storage or just objects .\n\nN\\_Port ID Virtualization (NPIV) is a Fibre Channel feature whereby multiple Fibre Channel node port (N\\_Port) IDs can share a single physical N\\_Port.\n\nThe process by which a node with no valid software is installed on its hard disk drive can copy software from another node connected to the same Fibre Channel fabric.\n\nA node canister is a hardware unit that includes the node hardware, fabric and service interfaces, and serial-attached SCSI (SAS) expansion ports. Node canisters are specifically recognized on IBM Storwize products. In SVC, all these components are spread within the whole system chassis, so we usually do not consider node canisters in SVC, but just the node as a whole.\n\nA mirrored volume is a single virtual volume that has two physical volume copies. The primary physical copy is known within the IBM Storwize V7000 as copy 0 and the secondary copy is known within the IBM Storwize V7000 as copy 1 .\n\nAppendix C. Terminology 781" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8933221674322052, + "doc_id": "4f176d825c98081707672db73f1a41a8728eb3ad90eefafa5114b9a8964148ad", + "edit_distance": 0.09615384615384616, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9853881251340212, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "8459ch05.fm\n\nDraft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\nDepending on the infrastructure and servers types, you must determine the appropriate choice when deciding between single and multiple Host Groups (Availability Zones) configuration. From administrative perspective is easier to have single Host Group and do not isolate the systems into multiple Host Group (Availability zones) as shown in Figure 5-4.\n\nFigure 5-4 PowerVC single Host Group (Availability Zone)\n\nFigure 5-4 PowerVC single Host Group (Availability Zone)\n\n78\n\nRed Hat OpenShift and IBM Cloud Paks on IBM Power Systems: Volume 1", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "8459ch05.fm\n\nDraft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\nDepending on the infrastructure and servers types, you must determine the appropriate choice when deciding between single and multiple Host Groups (Availability Zones) configuration. From administrative perspective is easier to have single Host Group and do not isolate the systems into multiple Host Group (Availability zones) as shown in Figure 5-4.\n\nFigure 5-4 PowerVC single Host Group (Availability Zone)\n\n78 Red Hat OpenShift and IBM Cloud Paks on IBM Power Systems: Volume 1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7252284196511647, + "doc_id": "163f860808646fb0521d743894c109c49f07ffe89e8f68f2f169c8e6d88efcc3", + "edit_distance": 0.808, + "f1_score": 0.9696969696969697, + "meteor": 0.6072291686477117, + "precision": 0.9911504424778761, + "pred_md": "Figure 2-7 shows a dense expansion drawer.\n\nFigure 2-7 IBM dense expansion drawer\n\nFigure 2-7 IBM dense expansion drawer\n\n## 2.5.9 Expansion Enclosures\n\nThe following types of Expansion Enclosures are available:\n\n- /SM590000 IBM Storwize V7000 large form factor (LFF) Expansion Enclosure Model 12F\n- /SM590000 IBM Storwize V7000 small form factor (SFF) 24F\n\nIBM Storwize V7000 Gen2 LFF 12F includes the following components:\n\n- /SM590000 Two expansion canisters\n- /SM590000 12 Gb SAS ports for control enclosure and Expansion Enclosure attachment\n- /SM590000 A total of 12 slots for 3.5-inch SAS drives\n- /SM590000 2U, 19-inch rack mount enclosure with AC power supplies\n\nIBM Storwize V7000 SFF Expansion Enclosure Model 24F includes the following components:\n\n- /SM590000 Two expansion canisters\n- /SM590000 12 Gb SAS ports for control enclosure and expansion enclosure attachment\n- /SM590000 A total of 24 slots for 2.5-inch SAS drives\n- /SM590000 2U, 19-inch rack mount enclosure with AC power supplies\n\nThe Expansion Enclosure is a 2U enclosure that includes the following components:\n\n- /SM590000 A total of 24 2.5-inch drives (HDDs or SSDs).\n- /SM590000 Two Storage Bridge Bay (SBB)-compliant enclosure services manager (ESM) canisters.\n- /SM590000 Two fan assemblies, which mount between the drive midplane and the Node Canisters. Each fan module is removable when the Node Canister is removed.\n- /SM590000 Two Power supplies.\n- /SM590000 RS232 port on the back panel (3.5 mm stereo jack), which is used for configuration during manufacturing.\n\nChapter 2. System overview\n\n25", + "recall": 0.9491525423728814, + "true_md": "Figure 2-7 shows a dense expansion drawer.\n\nFigure 2-7 IBM dense expansion drawer\n\n## 2.5.9 Expansion Enclosures\n\nThe following types of Expansion Enclosures are available:\n\nIBM Storwize V7000 Gen2 LFF 12F includes the following components:\n\nIBM Storwize V7000 SFF Expansion Enclosure Model 24F includes the following components:\n\nThe Expansion Enclosure is a 2U enclosure that includes the following components:\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> RS232 port on the back panel (3.5 mm stereo jack), which is used for configuration during manufacturing.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Two Power supplies.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Two fan assemblies, which mount between the drive midplane and the Node Canisters. Each fan module is removable when the Node Canister is removed.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Two Storage Bridge Bay (SBB)-compliant enclosure services manager (ESM) canisters.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> A total of 24 2.5-inch drives (HDDs or SSDs).\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> 2U, 19-inch rack mount enclosure with AC power supplies\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> A total of 24 slots for 2.5-inch SAS drives\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> 12 Gb SAS ports for control enclosure and expansion enclosure attachment\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Two expansion canisters\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> 2U, 19-inch rack mount enclosure with AC power supplies\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> A total of 12 slots for 3.5-inch SAS drives\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> 12 Gb SAS ports for control enclosure and Expansion Enclosure attachment\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Two expansion canisters\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> IBM Storwize V7000 small form factor (SFF) 24F\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> IBM Storwize V7000 large form factor (LFF) Expansion Enclosure Model 12F \n\nChapter 2. System overview 25" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8680210130587169, + "doc_id": "704da5f20484be7bbe3bac0eb9db59d2fa2409a014096edd6d37ce4099a4aeb4", + "edit_distance": 0.09900990099009901, + "f1_score": 0.9705882352941176, + "meteor": 0.9697772090952823, + "precision": 0.9705882352941176, + "pred_md": "Advisory note: Configure Call Home if your system is under warranty or if you have a hardware maintenance agreement.\n\n- 13.Provide data that is required to use IBM Storage Insights. Although contact information for IBM Storage Insights is copied from the Call Home configuration, you must supply an IBM ID to use this feature (see Figure 4-19). Optionally, you can skip this step by selecting I'm not interested in Storage Insights .\n\nFigure 4-19 Storage Insights System Setup window\n\nFigure 4-19 Storage Insights System Setup window\n\nChapter 4. Initial configuration\n\n105", + "recall": 0.9705882352941176, + "true_md": "Advisory note: Configure Call Home if your system is under warranty or if you have a hardware maintenance agreement.\n\n13.Provide data that is required to use IBM Storage Insights. Although contact information for IBM Storage Insights is copied from the Call Home configuration, you must supply an IBM ID to use this feature (see Figure 4-19). Optionally, you can skip this step by selecting I’m not interested in Storage Insights .\n\nFigure 4-19 Storage Insights System Setup window\n\nChapter 4. Initial configuration 105" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8079220220583221, + "doc_id": "783fe4d42c176b96d9ca4f965e8aa47c1298f2ef7ebc214acb6954841a599cd8", + "edit_distance": 0.3145539906103286, + "f1_score": 0.9728506787330315, + "meteor": 0.7903191936477366, + "precision": 0.9862385321100917, + "pred_md": "## General\n\nConsider the following general recommendations when you work with OAM for Content Manager OnDemand:\n\n- /SM590000 Define a user catalog exclusively for collection names.\n- /SM590000 Cache the user catalog in the virtual lookaside facility (VLF).\n- /SM590000 Migrate objects to optical or tape (OSMC) during non-peak hours.\n- /SM590000 Spread OAM collections over multiple DB2/disk/channels.\n- /SM590000 Spread out the application groups to different collection names:\n- OAM collections → storage groups → DB2 database\n- /SM590000 Group your applications based on retrieval expectations:\n- -Collect small, frequently used applications together.\n- -Isolate your important applications so that the other applications do not get in the way.\n\n## DB2\n\nConsider the following list of recommendations that relate to DB2:\n\n- /SM590000 Ensure that enough DB2 connections are available to support the OAM requests.\n- /SM590000 Run the REORG , RUNSTATS , and REBIND commands, as appropriate.\n- /SM590000 Partition OAM table spaces larger than 2 GB.\n\n## Devices\n\nConsider the following recommendations that relate to devices:\n\n- /SM590000 Determine and set the Initial Access Response Seconds (IARS) option.\n- /SM590000 Assign objects to storage classes that have an adequate IARS that is defined and to management classes that do not cause a transition to a slower storage class until the frequency of retrieving the objects is reasonably low.\n- /SM590000 Determine whether to place the object on disk or removable (optical or tape) media.\n- /SM590000 If the IARS opts for REMOVABLE media, determine whether to place the object on optical or tape.\n- /SM590000 Verify that the required Sustained Data Rate is achieved based on the selected object placement.\n\n## Tapes\n\nConsider the following recommendations that relate to tapes:\n\n- /SM590000 Modify (CBROAMxx) MAXTAPERETRIEVETASKS and MAXTAPESTORETASKS (if you are using tape retrieves because the default=1). Both of these parameters are configured at the global level and at the storage group level.\n- /SM590000 The global level MAXTAPERETRIEVETASKS (tasks) is defined by SETOAM . SETOAM specifies the total number of concurrent tape retrievals that are possible at a time. (It controls the maximum number of tape drives that can be concurrently allocated to the OAM address space for reading object data from tape.) This number must be less than or equal to the number of tape drives on the system. Do not specify a number that is greater than the number of tape drives that are available to OAM for the MAXTAPESTORETASKS or the MAXTAPERETRIEVETASKS subparameters because a system can go into allocation recovery and attempt to allocate tape drives after all of the tape drives are in use, causing system problems.\n- /SM590000 The storage group level MAXTAPERETRIEVETASKS (tasks) specifies the maximum concurrent tape retrievals that are possible for a specific storage group. If MAXTAPERETRIEVETASKS is\n\nChapter 5. Storage management\n\n111", + "recall": 0.9598214285714286, + "true_md": "## General\n\n## DB2\n\n## Devices\n\n## Tapes\n\nConsider the following general recommendations when you work with OAM for Content Manager OnDemand:\n\nConsider the following list of recommendations that relate to DB2:\n\nConsider the following recommendations that relate to devices:\n\nConsider the following recommendations that relate to tapes:\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Define a user catalog exclusively for collection names.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Cache the user catalog in the virtual lookaside facility (VLF).\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Migrate objects to optical or tape (OSMC) during non-peak hours.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Spread OAM collections over multiple DB2/disk/channels.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Spread out the application groups to different collection names: \n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Group your applications based on retrieval expectations:\n\n- – Collect small, frequently used applications together.\n\n- – Isolate your important applications so that the other applications do not get in the way.\n\nOAM collections → storage groups → DB2 database\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Ensure that enough DB2 connections are available to support the OAM requests. \n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Run the REORG , RUNSTATS , and REBIND commands, as appropriate.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Partition OAM table spaces larger than 2 GB.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Determine and set the Initial Access Response Seconds (IARS) option.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Assign objects to storage classes that have an adequate IARS that is defined and to management classes that do not cause a transition to a slower storage class until the frequency of retrieving the objects is reasonably low.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Determine whether to place the object on disk or removable (optical or tape) media.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> If the IARS opts for REMOVABLE media, determine whether to place the object on optical or tape.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Verify that the required Sustained Data Rate is achieved based on the selected object placement.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Modify (CBROAMxx) MAXTAPERETRIEVETASKS and MAXTAPESTORETASKS (if you are using tape retrieves because the default=1). Both of these parameters are configured at the global level and at the storage group level. \n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> The global level MAXTAPERETRIEVETASKS (tasks) is defined by SETOAM . SETOAM specifies the total number of concurrent tape retrievals that are possible at a time. (It controls the maximum number of tape drives that can be concurrently allocated to the OAM address space for reading object data from tape.) This number must be less than or equal to the number of tape drives on the system. Do not specify a number that is greater than the number of tape drives that are available to OAM for the MAXTAPESTORETASKS or the MAXTAPERETRIEVETASKS subparameters because a system can go into allocation recovery and attempt to allocate tape drives after all of the tape drives are in use, causing system problems.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> The storage group level MAXTAPERETRIEVETASKS (tasks) specifies the maximum concurrent tape retrievals that are possible for a specific storage group. If MAXTAPERETRIEVETASKS is \n\nChapter 5. Storage management 111" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9226402068452862, + "doc_id": "42daa43cee9063242a2c868f8a900af6339de0dbc769e2e7b3af1ab39442edeb", + "edit_distance": 0.12105263157894737, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9872342021153084, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "394\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\nNote: Select only the MDisks that are applicable to the current migration plan. After step 15 on page 399 of the current migration completes, another migration can be started to migrate any remaining MDisks.\n\n- 8. Click Next and wait for the MDisk to be imported. During this task, the system creates a new storage pool called MigrationPool\\_XXXX and adds the imported MDisk to the storage pool as image-mode volumes.\n- 9. The next page lists all of the hosts that are configured on the system and enables you to configure new hosts. This step is optional and can be bypassed by clicking Next . In this example, the host ISCI\\_Host is already configured, as shown in Figure 9-8. If no host is selected, you can create a host after the migration completes and map the imported volumes to it.\n\nFigure 9-8 Listing of configured hosts to map the imported Volume to\n\nFigure 9-8 Listing of configured hosts to map the imported Volume to", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Note: Select only the MDisks that are applicable to the current migration plan. After step 15 on page 399 of the current migration completes, another migration can be started to migrate any remaining MDisks.\n\n- 8. Click Next and wait for the MDisk to be imported. During this task, the system creates a new storage pool called MigrationPool\\_XXXX and adds the imported MDisk to the storage pool as image-mode volumes.\n\n- 9. The next page lists all of the hosts that are configured on the system and enables you to configure new hosts. This step is optional and can be bypassed by clicking Next . In this example, the host ISCI\\_Host is already configured, as shown in Figure 9-8. If no host is selected, you can create a host after the migration completes and map the imported volumes to it.\n\nFigure 9-8 Listing of configured hosts to map the imported Volume to\n\n394 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9171786965912858, + "doc_id": "eaaf226201cb1fae829e1d41fc7030b2a6cb541a2f76bc7dd036d285186a814e", + "edit_distance": 0.9063745019920318, + "f1_score": 0.9723502304147464, + "meteor": 0.7161539957642223, + "precision": 0.9768518518518519, + "pred_md": "## Disk tier\n\nMDisks (logical unit numbers (LUNs)) that are presented to the IBM Storwize V7000 cluster likely have different performance attributes because of the type of disk or RAID array on which they are installed. The MDisks can be on 15,000 revolutions per minute (RPM) Fibre Channel (FC) or serial-attached SCSI (SAS) disk, Nearline SAS, or Serial Advanced Technology Attachment (SATA), or even Flash Disks. Therefore, a storage tier attribute is assigned to each MDisk, and the default is generic\\_hdd .\n\n## Distributed RAID or DRAID\n\nAn alternative RAID scheme where the number of drives that are used to store the array can be greater than the equivalent, typical RAID scheme. The same data stripes are distributed across a greater number of drives, which increases the opportunity for parallel I/O and hence improves the overall performance of array. See also 'Rebuild area' on page 783.\n\n## Easy Tier\n\nEasy Tier is a volume performance function within the IBM Storwize family that provides automatic data placement of a volume's extents in a multitiered storage pool. The pool normally contains a mix of Flash Disks and HDDs. Easy Tier measures host I/O activity on the volume's extents and migrates hot extents onto the Flash Disks to ensure the maximum performance.\n\n## Effective capacity\n\nSee 'Capacity' on page 771.\n\n## Encryption key\n\nThe encryption key, also known as master access key, is created and stored on USB flash drives or on a key server when encryption is enabled. The master access key is used to decrypt the data encryption key.\n\n## Encryption key server\n\nAn internal or external system that receives and then serves existing encryption keys or certificates to a storage system.\n\n## Encryption of data-at-rest\n\nEncryption of data at rest is the inactive encryption data that is stored physically on the storage system.\n\n## Evaluation mode\n\nThe evaluation mode is an Easy Tier operating mode in which the host activity on all the volume extents in a pool are 'measured' only. No automatic extent migration is performed.\n\n## Event (error)\n\nAn event is an occurrence of significance to a task or system. Events can include the completion or failure of an operation, user action, or a change in the state of a process.\n\n## Event code\n\nAn event code is a value that is used to identify an event condition to a user. This value might map to one or more event IDs or to values that are presented on the service window. This value is used to report error conditions to IBM and to provide an entry point into the service guide.\n\nAppendix C. Terminology\n\n775", + "recall": 0.9678899082568807, + "true_md": "## Disk tier\n\n## Distributed RAID or DRAID\n\n## Easy Tier\n\n## Effective capacity\n\n## Encryption key\n\n## Encryption key server\n\n## Encryption of data-at-rest\n\n## Evaluation mode\n\n## Event (error)\n\n## Event code\n\nAn event code is a value that is used to identify an event condition to a user. This value might map to one or more event IDs or to values that are presented on the service window. This value is used to report error conditions to IBM and to provide an entry point into the service guide.\n\nAn event is an occurrence of significance to a task or system. Events can include the completion or failure of an operation, user action, or a change in the state of a process.\n\nThe evaluation mode is an Easy Tier operating mode in which the host activity on all the volume extents in a pool are “measured” only. No automatic extent migration is performed.\n\nEncryption of data at rest is the inactive encryption data that is stored physically on the storage system.\n\nAn internal or external system that receives and then serves existing encryption keys or certificates to a storage system.\n\nThe encryption key, also known as master access key, is created and stored on USB flash drives or on a key server when encryption is enabled. The master access key is used to decrypt the data encryption key.\n\nSee “Capacity” on page 771.\n\nEasy Tier is a volume performance function within the IBM Storwize family that provides automatic data placement of a volume’s extents in a multitiered storage pool. The pool normally contains a mix of Flash Disks and HDDs. Easy Tier measures host I/O activity on the volume’s extents and migrates hot extents onto the Flash Disks to ensure the maximum performance.\n\nAn alternative RAID scheme where the number of drives that are used to store the array can be greater than the equivalent, typical RAID scheme. The same data stripes are distributed across a greater number of drives, which increases the opportunity for parallel I/O and hence improves the overall performance of array. See also “Rebuild area” on page 783.\n\nMDisks (logical unit numbers (LUNs)) that are presented to the IBM Storwize V7000 cluster likely have different performance attributes because of the type of disk or RAID array on which they are installed. The MDisks can be on 15,000 revolutions per minute (RPM) Fibre Channel (FC) or serial-attached SCSI (SAS) disk, Nearline SAS, or Serial Advanced Technology Attachment (SATA), or even Flash Disks. Therefore, a storage tier attribute is assigned to each MDisk, and the default is generic\\_hdd .\n\nAppendix C. Terminology 775" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5081858243977999, + "doc_id": "24193e0c5935b64ccaa6e578aefe3b161ed64522b1f03a81ba594e8a0c9e574f", + "edit_distance": 0.583224115334207, + "f1_score": 0.9457700650759219, + "meteor": 0.8283802439462805, + "precision": 0.960352422907489, + "pred_md": "## Index\n\n## A\n\n| access 59 active-active architecture 20 |\n|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|\n| Advanced Copy Services 72 alias string 62 analyses 674 analysis 740 |\n| application testing 437 architecture 9, 20, 674 arrays 28 asynchronous notifications 464, 466 asynchronous remote 525 |\n| asynchronous remote copy 522, 524, 526 |\n| asynchronous replication 543 asynchronously 524 audit logs 726-727 authentication 334, 756, 764 |\n\n## B\n\n| back-end application 777 |\n|---------------------------------------------------------------------------|\n| background copies 17 |\n| background copy 523, 532 |\n| background copy rate 461 |\n| backup 436 of data with minimal impact on production 458 |\n| backups 16, 41 application data 23, 38 system configuration data 23 |\n| balance 64 |\n| bandwidth 37, 45, 64, 77 |\n| block-level protocol 61 |\n| boot 78, 682 |\n| bottlenecks 80, 82 |\n| business requirements 80, 740 |\n\n## C\n\n| cable connections 48 cache 20, 251, 441, 525 | |\n|------------------------------------------------------------------|--------------------------------------------------------------|\n| caching capability 80 Call Home 41 | |\n| email 40-41 | canisters 13, 20, 337, 674, 679 expansion 13-14, 677-678 |\n| capacity real physicial disks 16 storage 19, 30 volumes 30 | |\n| capacity savings 428 Cascaded FlashCopy 16 chains 680 | Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol 61, 332 |\n\n' Copyright IBM Corp. 2011, 2018, 2019. All rights reserved.\n\n793\n\n| Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol 334 channel extender 786 | |\n|------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|----------------------|\n| CHAP 61, 332, 334, 359, 375 | |\n| CHAP authentication 334 | |\n| CHAP secret 334 | |\n| chat sessions 40 | |\n| chunks 65 | |\n| CIMOM 23 cluster | |\n| IP address 88 | |\n| cluster (SVC) 773 | |\n| cluster partnership 519 | |\n| clustered system 58 | |\n| clusters 23, 31, 248 | |\n| configuration 683 data 683 configuration nodes 20 | |\n| error logging 674 extent sizes 30 I/O groups 20 | |\n| Image Mode volumes 32 IP addresses 41, 764 | |\n| image MDisks 28 MDisks | |\n| data 33 node canisters 674-675 node pairs 20 partnerships 23 | |\n| public keys 756 | |\n| shutdown 682 unmanaged MDisks 28 colliding writes 528 command-line interface (CLI) 23, 29, 681, 683, 726, 756, | |\n| 762, 766, 769 | |\n| commands 17, 35, 683, 726 compressed format 428 concepts 674 | |\n| compression engine 428 configuration 317 | |\n| backups 682 | |\n| clusters 23 | |\n| CLI commands 726 cluster activity 20 data 682 | |\n| enabling 335 events 726 | |\n| guidelines 37 hosts 328 issues 41 | |\n| nodes 20, 23, 683 options 12 | |\n| | system changes 682 |", + "recall": 0.9316239316239316, + "true_md": "## Index\n\n## A\n\n## B\n\n## C\n\naccess 59 active-active architecture 20 Advanced Copy Services 72 alias string 62 analyses 674 analysis 740 application testing 437 architecture 9, 20, 674 arrays 28 asynchronous notifications 464, 466 asynchronous remote 525 asynchronous remote copy 522, 524, 526 asynchronous replication 543 asynchronously 524 audit logs 726–727 authentication 334, 756, 764 auxiliary VDisk 525\n\nback-end application 777 background copies 17 background copy 523, 532 background copy rate 461 backup 436 of data with minimal impact on production 458 backups 16, 41 application data 23, 38 system configuration data 23 balance 64 bandwidth 37, 45, 64, 77 bitmap space 250 block-level protocol 61 boot 78, 682 bottlenecks 80, 82 business requirements 80, 740\n\ncable connections 48 cache 20, 251, 441, 525 caching capability 80 Call Home 41 email 40–41 canisters 13, 20, 337, 674, 679 expansion 13–14, 677–678 capacity real physicial disks 16 storage 19, 30 volumes 30 capacity savings 428 Cascaded FlashCopy 16 chains 680 Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol 61, 332\n\nChallenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol 334 channel extender 786 CHAP 61, 332, 334, 359, 375 CHAP authentication 334 CHAP secret 334 chat sessions 40 chunks 65 CIMOM 23 cluster IP address 88 cluster (SVC) 773 cluster partnership 519 clustered system 58 clusters 23, 31, 248 backups 682–683 configuration 683 data 683 configuration nodes 20 error logging 674 extent sizes 30 I/O groups 20 image MDisks 28 Image Mode volumes 32 IP addresses 41, 764 MDisks data 33 node canisters 674–675 node pairs 20 partnerships 23 public keys 756 shutdown 682 unmanaged MDisks 28 colliding writes 528 command-line interface (CLI) 23, 29, 681, 683, 726, 756, 762, 766, 769 commands 17, 35, 683, 726 compressed format 428 compression engine 428 concepts 674 configuration 317 backups 682 CLI commands 726 cluster activity 20 clusters 23 data 682 enabling 335 events 726 guidelines 37 hosts 328 issues 41 nodes 20, 23, 683 options 12 system changes 682 tasks 23 wizards 329, 332\n\n' Copyright IBM Corp. 2011, 201 8, 2019. All rights reserved.\n\n793" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8977375724296547, + "doc_id": "620c35c58a14ec9e86ec72f9bb5090d926041c5662ab6a3153bab91bdd186f18", + "edit_distance": 0.3107344632768362, + "f1_score": 0.9490445859872613, + "meteor": 0.8967611511358717, + "precision": 0.9738562091503268, + "pred_md": "Figure 3-8 Storwize V7000 iSCSI overview\n\nFigure 3-8 Storwize V7000 iSCSI overview\n\nBoth onboard Ethernet ports of a Storwize V7000 node can be configured for iSCSI. For each instance of an iSCSI target node (that is, each Storwize V7000 node), you can define two IPv4 and two IPv6 addresses or iSCSI network portals:\n\n- /SM590000 If the optional 10 Gbps Ethernet feature is installed, you can use them for iSCSI traffic.\n- /SM590000 Generally, enable jumbo frames in your iSCSI storage network.\n- /SM590000 iSCSI IP addresses can be configured for one or more nodes.\n- /SM590000 Decide whether you implement authentication for the host to Storwize V7000 iSCSI communication. The Storwize V7000 supports the Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP) authentication methods for iSCSI.\n\n## 3.7.1 iSCSI protocol\n\nThe iSCSI connectivity is a software feature that is provided by the Storwize V7000 code. The iSCSI protocol is a block-level protocol that encapsulates SCSI commands into Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) packets. Therefore, iSCSI uses IP network rather than requiring the Fibre Channel infrastructure. The iSCSI standard is defined by Request For Comments (RFC) 3720.\n\nFor more information about iSCSI protocol, see iSCSI Implementation and Best Practices on IBM Storwize Storage Systems , SG24-8327.\n\n## 3.7.2 Topology and IP addressing\n\nFor more information about examples of topology and addressing schemes that can be used for iSCSI connectivity, see 3.5, 'Planning IP connectivity' on page 48.\n\nIf you plan to use node's 1 Gbps Ethernet ports for iSCSI host attachment, dedicate Ethernet port one for the Storwize V7000 management and port two for iSCSI use. This way, port two can be connected to a separate network segment or virtual local area network (VLAN) dedicated to iSCSI traffic.\n\nChapter 3. Planning\n\n61", + "recall": 0.9254658385093167, + "true_md": "Figure 3-8 Storwize V7000 iSCSI overview\n\nBoth onboard Ethernet ports of a Storwize V7000 node can be configured for iSCSI. For each instance of an iSCSI target node (that is, each Storwize V7000 node), you can define two IPv4 and two IPv6 addresses or iSCSI network portals:\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Decide whether you implement authentication for the host to Storwize V7000 iSCSI communication. The Storwize V7000 supports the Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP) authentication methods for iSCSI.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> iSCSI IP addresses can be configured for one or more nodes.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Generally, enable jumbo frames in your iSCSI storage network.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> If the optional 10 Gbps Ethernet feature is installed, you can use them for iSCSI traffic.\n\n## 3.7.1 iSCSI protocol\n\n## 3.7.2 Topology and IP addressing\n\nThe iSCSI connectivity is a software feature that is provided by the Storwize V7000 code. The iSCSI protocol is a block-level protocol that encapsulates SCSI commands into Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) packets. Therefore, iSCSI uses IP network rather than requiring the Fibre Channel infrastructure. The iSCSI standard is defined by Request For Comments (RFC) 3720.\n\nFor more information about iSCSI protocol, see iSCSI Implementation and Best Practices on IBM Storwize Storage Systems , SG24-8327.\n\nFor more information about examples of topology and addressing schemes that can be used for iSCSI connectivity, see 3.5, “Pla nning IP connectivity” on page 48. \n\nIf you plan to use node’s 1 Gbps Ethernet ports for iSCSI host attachment, dedicate Ethernet port one for the Storwize V7000 management and port two for iSCSI use. This way, port two can be connected to a separate network segment or virtual local area network (VLAN) dedicated to iSCSI traffic.\n\nChapter 3. Planning 61" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8867686253850123, + "doc_id": "dfb717a74235c9696e30f19a7ad0534d58d83a5c20fad9f08dba2ffa07153fe8", + "edit_distance": 0.09333333333333334, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9898091975038154, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Figure 8-25 IBM Spectrum Virtualize Hosts menu\n\nFigure 8-25 IBM Spectrum Virtualize Hosts menu\n\nIn the Hosts → Hosts view, three hosts were created and volumes are mapped to them in our example. If needed, we can now modify these hosts by selecting a host and click Actions , or right-click the host to see the available tasks (see Figure 8-26 on page 346).\n\nChapter 8. Hosts\n\n345", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Figure 8-25 IBM Spectrum Virtualize Hosts menu\n\nIn the Hosts → Hosts view, three hosts were created and volumes are mapped to them in our example. If needed, we can now modify these hosts by selecting a host and click Actions , or right-click the host to see the available tasks (see Figure 8-26 on page 346). \n\nChapter 8. Hosts 345" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8997891339732199, + "doc_id": "7ef70cdf3ebb178fbf3ee892b6fe73ae332c03d5f53e8ec67d61855956c31d70", + "edit_distance": 0.7710651828298887, + "f1_score": 0.9675810473815463, + "meteor": 0.7112904194068066, + "precision": 0.9847715736040609, + "pred_md": "544\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\nIf 1920 events are occurring, you might need to use a performance monitoring and analysis tool, such as the IBM Spectrum Control, to help identify and resolve the problem.\n\n## 11.7.4 System partnership\n\nTo create a partnership, use the following command, depending on the connection type:\n\n- /SM590000 Use the mkfcpartnership command to establish a one-way MM/GM partnership between the local system and a remote system that are linked over an FC (or FCoE) connection.\n- /SM590000 Use the mkippartnership command to establish a one-way MM/GM partnership between the local system and a remote system that are linked over an IP connection.\n\nTo establish a fully functional MM/GM partnership, you must issue this command on both systems. This step is a prerequisite for creating MM/GM relationships between volumes on the IBM Spectrum Virtualize systems.\n\nWhen creating the partnership, you must specify the Link Bandwidth and can specify the Background Copy Rate:\n\n- /SM590000 The Link Bandwidth, expressed in Mbps (megabits per second), is the amount of bandwidth that can be used for the FC or IP connection between the systems within the partnership.\n- /SM590000 The Background Copy Rate is the maximum percentage of the Link Bandwidth that can be used for background copy operations. The default value is 50%.\n\n## Background copy bandwidth effect on foreground I/O latency\n\nThe combination of the Link Bandwidth value and the Background Copy Rate percentage is referred to as the Background Copy bandwidth . It must be at least 8 Mbps. For example, if the Link Bandwidth is set to 10000 and the Background Copy Rate is set to 20 , then the resulting Background Copy bandwidth that is used for background operations is 200 Mbps.\n\nThe background copy bandwidth determines the rate at which the background copy is attempted for MM/GM. The background copy bandwidth can affect foreground I/O latency in one of the following ways:\n\n- /SM590000 The following results can occur if the background copy bandwidth is set too high compared to the MM/GM intercluster link capacity:\n- -The background copy I/Os can back up on the MM/GM intercluster link.\n- -There is a delay in the synchronous auxiliary writes of foreground I/Os.\n- -The foreground I/O latency increases as perceived by applications.\n- /SM590000 If the background copy bandwidth is set too high for the storage at the primary site, background copy read I/Os overload the primary storage and delay foreground I/Os.\n- /SM590000 If the background copy bandwidth is set too high for the storage at the secondary site, background copy writes at the secondary site overload the auxiliary storage, and again delay the synchronous secondary writes of foreground I/Os.\n\nTo set the background copy bandwidth optimally, ensure that you consider all three resources: Primary storage, intercluster link bandwidth, and auxiliary storage. Provision the most restrictive of these three resources between the background copy bandwidth and the peak foreground I/O workload.\n\nPerform this provisioning by calculation or by determining experimentally how much background copy can be allowed before the foreground I/O latency becomes unacceptable. Then, reduce the background copy to accommodate peaks in workload.", + "recall": 0.9509803921568627, + "true_md": "If 1920 events are occurring, you might need to use a performance monitoring and analysis tool, such as the IBM Spectrum Control, to help identify and resolve the problem.\n\nTo create a partnership, use the following command, depending on the connection type:\n\nTo establish a fully functional MM/GM partnership, you must issue this command on both systems. This step is a prerequisite for creating MM/GM relationships between volumes on the IBM Spectrum Virtualize systems.\n\nWhen creating the partnership, you must specify the Link Bandwidth and can specify the Background Copy Rate:\n\nThe combination of the Link Bandwidth value and the Background Copy Rate percentage is referred to as the Background Copy bandwidth . It must be at least 8 Mbps. For example, if the Link Bandwidth is set to 10000 and the Background Copy Rate is set to 20 , then the resulting Background Copy bandwidth that is used for background operations is 200 Mbps.\n\nThe background copy bandwidth determines the rate at which the background copy is attempted for MM/GM. The background copy bandwidth can affect foreground I/O latency in one of the following ways:\n\nTo set the background copy bandwidth optimally, ensure that you consider all three resources: Primary storage, intercluster link bandwidth, and auxiliary storage. Provision the most restrictive of these three resources between the background copy bandwidth and the peak foreground I/O workload. \n\nPerform this provisioning by calculation or by determining experimentally how much background copy can be allowed before the foreground I/O latency becomes unacceptable. Then, reduce the background copy to accommodate peaks in workload. \n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> If the background copy bandwidth is set too high for the storage at the secondary site, background copy writes at the secondary site overload the auxiliary storage, and again delay the synchronous secondary writes of foreground I/Os.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> If the background copy bandwidth is set too high for the storage at the primary site, background copy read I/Os overload the primary storage and delay foreground I/Os. \n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> The following results can occur if the background copy bandwidth is set too high compared to the MM/GM intercluster link capacity: \n\n- – The background copy I/Os can back up on the MM/GM intercluster link.\n\n- – There is a delay in t he synchronous auxiliary writes of foreground I/Os.\n\n- – The foreground I/O latency increases as perceived by applications.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> The Background Copy Rate is the maximum percentage of the Link Bandwidth that can be used for background copy operations. The default value is 50%. \n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> The Link Bandwidth, expressed in Mbps (megabits per second), is the amount of bandwidth that can be used for the FC or IP connection between the systems within the partnership. \n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Use the mkippartnership command to establish a one-way MM/GM partnership between the local system and a remote system that are linked over an IP connection.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Use the mkfcpartnership command to establish a one-way MM/GM partnership between the local system and a remote system that are linked over an FC (or FCoE) connection.\n\n## 11.7.4 System partnership\n\n## Background copy bandwidth effect on foreground I/O latency\n\n544 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9347937470567504, + "doc_id": "8963918028018f1ff099a59321dd0d108d6b2847e6b4d8c5d5d8ea8fe0b23370", + "edit_distance": 0.773936170212766, + "f1_score": 0.9704142011834319, + "meteor": 0.7832093072173175, + "precision": 0.9879518072289156, + "pred_md": "## 12.8.6 Restrictions\n\nThe following restrictions apply to encryption:\n\n- /SM590000 Image mode volumes cannot be in encrypted pools.\n- /SM590000 You cannot add external non self-encrypting MDisks to encrypted pools unless all control enclosures in the system support encryption.\n\n## 12.9 Rekeying an encryption-enabled system\n\nChanging the master access key is a security requirement. Rekeying is the process of replacing current master access key with a newly generated one. The rekey operation works whether encrypted objects exist. The rekeying operation requires access to a valid copy of the original master access key on an encryption key provider that you plan to rekey. Use the rekey operation according to the schedule defined in your organization's security policy and whenever you suspect that the key might have been compromised.\n\nIf you have both USB and key server enabled, rekeying is done separately for each of the providers.\n\nImportant: Before you create a master access key, ensure that all nodes are online and that the current master access key is accessible.\n\nNo method is available to directly change data encryption keys. If you must change the data encryption key that is used to encrypt data, the only available method is to migrate that data to a new encrypted object (for example, an encrypted child pool). Because the data encryption keys are defined per encrypted object, such migration forces a change of the key that is used to encrypt that data.\n\n## 12.9.1 Rekeying using a key server\n\nEnsure that all the configured key servers can be reached by the system and that service IPs are configured on all your nodes.\n\nTo rekey the master access key kept on the key server provider, complete the following steps:\n\n- 1. Click Settings → Security → Encryption . Ensure that Encryption Keys shows that all configured SKLM servers are reported as Accessible , as shown in Figure 12-82 on page 666. Click Key Servers to expand the section.\n\nChapter 12. Encryption\n\n665", + "recall": 0.9534883720930233, + "true_md": "## 12.8.6 Restrictions\n\n## 12.9 Rekeying an encryption-enabled system\n\n## 12.9.1 Rekeying using a key server\n\nEnsure that all the configured key servers can be reached by the system and that service IPs are configured on all your nodes.\n\nTo rekey the master access key kept on the key server provider, complete the following steps:\n\nNo method is available to directly change data encryption keys. If you must change the data encryption key that is used to encrypt data, the only available method is to migrate that data to a new encrypted object (for example, an encrypted child pool). Because the data encryption keys are defined per encrypted object, such migration forces a change of the key that is used to encrypt that data.\n\nImportant: Before you create a master access key, ensure that all nodes are online and that the current master access key is accessible.\n\nIf you have both USB and key server enabled, rekeying is done separately for each of the providers.\n\nChanging the master access key is a security requirement. Rekeying is the process of replacing current master access key with a newly generated one. The rekey operation works whether encrypted objects exist. The rekeying operation requires access to a valid copy of the original master access key on an encryption key provider that you plan to rekey. Use the rekey operation according to the schedule defined in your organization’s security policy and whenever you suspect that the key might have been compromised.\n\nThe following restrictions apply to encryption:\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> You cannot add external non self-encrypting MDisks to encrypted pools unless all control enclosures in the system support encryption.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Image mode volumes cannot be in encrypted pools.\n\n- 1. Click Settings → Security → Encryption . Ensure that Encryption Keys shows that all configured SKLM servers are reported as Accessible , as shown in Figure 12-82 on page 666. Click Key Servers to expand the section.\n\nChapter 12. Encryption 665" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7254174865860883, + "doc_id": "8766ff3c37c63935e2603662154cf56c38178e2c372a00044e79c73e0f0bf322", + "edit_distance": 0.29523809523809524, + "f1_score": 0.8999999999999999, + "meteor": 0.7479353609147937, + "precision": 0.9574468085106383, + "pred_md": "Draft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n8459ch05.fm\n\nChapter 5.\n\n## Red Hat OpenShift installation planning and considerations\n\nThis chapter shows the Red Hat OpenShift planning, considerations, and installation guidelines.\n\nThis chapter contains the following:\n\n- /SM590000 IBM Power Systems\n- /SM590000 Red Hat OpenShift Container Platform 3.11 on IBM Power Systems\n- /SM590000 Red Hat OpenShift Container Platform 3.11 on IBM PowerVC\n\n' Copyright IBM Corp. 2019. All rights reserved.\n\n67", + "recall": 0.8490566037735849, + "true_md": "Draft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n8459ch05.fm\n\n## 5\n\n## Red Hat OpenShift installation planning and considerations\n\nThis chapter shows the Red Hat OpenShift planning, considerations, and installation guidelines.\n\nThis chapter contains the following:\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> IBM Power Systems\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Red Hat OpenShift Container Platform 3.11 on IBM Power Systems\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Red Hat OpenShift Container Platform 3.11 on IBM PowerVC\n\n67\n\n' Copyright IBM Corp. 2 019. All rights reserved." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8542413344945448, + "doc_id": "b953ec14cc1b66af6b72fed21331ed3d2dd76e508b0936d95b714b79c6f0d46e", + "edit_distance": 0.4590909090909091, + "f1_score": 0.954248366013072, + "meteor": 0.8062337126057482, + "precision": 0.9864864864864865, + "pred_md": "Performing a write operation on the target generates one of the following actions, depending on the bitmap:\n\n- /SM590000 If the bitmap indicates the grain to be modified on the target is not yet copied, it is first copied from the source (copy on demand). The bitmap is updated, and the grain is modified on the target with the new value, as shown in Figure 11-7. The source volume remains unchanged.\n\nFigure 11-7 Modifying a non-copied grain on the target\n\nFigure 11-7 Modifying a non-copied grain on the target\n\nNote: If the entire grain is to be modified and not only part of it (some blocks only), the copy on demand is bypassed. The bitmap is updated, and the grain on the target is modified but not copied first.\n\n- /SM590000 If the bitmap indicates the grain to be modified on the target was copied, it is directly changed. The bitmap is not updated, and the grain is modified on the target with the new value, as shown in Figure 11-8.\n\nFigure 11-8 Modifying an already copied grain on the Target\n\nFigure 11-8 Modifying an already copied grain on the Target\n\nChapter 11. Advanced Copy Services\n\n445", + "recall": 0.9240506329113924, + "true_md": "Performing a write operation on the target generates one of the following actions, depending on the bitmap:\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> If the bitmap indicates the grain to be modified on the target is not yet copied, it is first copied from the source (copy on demand). The bitmap is updated, and the grain is modified on the target with the new value, as shown in Figure 11-7. The source volume remains unchanged.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> If the bitmap indicates the grain to be modified on the target was copied, it is directly changed. The bitmap is not updated, and the grain is modified on the target with the new value, as shown in Figure 11-8.\n\nNote: If the entire grain is to be modified and not only part of it (some blocks only), the copy on demand is bypassed. The bitmap is updated, and the grain on the target is modified but not copied first.\n\nFigure 11-8 Modifying an already copied grain on the Target\n\nFigure 11-7 Modifying a non-copied grain on the target\n\nChapter 11. Advanced Copy Services 445" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9721587033763404, + "doc_id": "51139ae0222ad33b385b3d2d0044d8b7330505c4418a7dc586e85e1cd0a7c21c", + "edit_distance": 0.08267716535433071, + "f1_score": 0.9928741092636579, + "meteor": 0.9963326917837942, + "precision": 0.990521327014218, + "pred_md": "## 10.3.4 Expiring annotations\n\nAnnotations for all application groups are kept in a single application group data table, which allows the expiration of annotations to be controlled at a system-wide level. The Life Of Annotations field setup is on the System Parameters General tab. Annotations can be set to never expire or to expire after N days. After the number of days ( N ) passes and ARSMAINT is run, Content Manager OnDemand removes the annotation.\n\n## 10.4 Reloading data\n\nIf you are migrating data by unloading and then reloading the data, you need to determine your future expiration policy.\n\n## Reloading to change the expiration type\n\nFor example, if your current expiration policy is set to Storage Manager but you later want to perform holds on the data, during the migration process (when you create the application group and before you load any data), change your expiration policy from Storage Manager to Load .\n\nWhen you use the Enhanced Retention Management feature with Content Manager OnDemand or IBM Enterprise Records (formerly IBM FileNet Records Manager), Content Manager OnDemand must be in complete control of expiration processing. Therefore, if you are using Tivoli Storage Manager or OAM, you must disable the ability for either of these storage managers to expire data.\n\nAlso, you can use Enhanced Retention Management and Content Federation Services for Content Manager OnDemand only with application groups with an expiration type of Load . For those application groups with expiration types of Document , Segment , or Storage Manager , utilities exist to convert these application groups to an expiration type of Load .\n\nConsider engaging IBM Lab Services to provide these services.\n\n## Reloading ad hoc stored documents\n\nIf you choose not to take advantage of the ability of Content Manager OnDemand to aggregate documents but instead you choose to load documents ad hoc by using the storeDocument Java API, StoreDoc Object Linking and Embedding (OLE) API, or CommonStore, you must migrate the data later.\n\nIf you choose not to take advantage of the ability of Content Manager OnDemand to aggregate documents into 10 MB storage objects, this decision might result in millions of small objects that are stored in your storage manager, which might cause the storage manager to experience performance problems when it migrates these small objects to tape.\n\nNote: Consider aggregating these smaller objects into larger objects for performance reasons.\n\nFor you to aggregate all of these tiny objects into larger objects after they are stored individually requires that you retrieve and reload them as larger objects. Y ou might want to engage IBM Lab Services to assist you with this task.\n\nAnother option is to not migrate objects to tape, but to use another random access hardware device instead.\n\nChapter 10. Migration and expiring data and indexes\n\n229", + "recall": 0.9952380952380953, + "true_md": "## 10.3.4 Expiring annotations\n\n## 10.4 Reloading data\n\n## Reloading to change the expiration type\n\n## Reloading ad hoc stored documents\n\nAnnotations for all application groups are kept in a single application group data table, which allows the expiration of annotations to be controlled at a system-wide level. The Life Of Annotations field setup is on the System Parameters General tab. Annotations can be set to never expire or to expire after N days. After the number of days ( N ) passes and ARSMAINT is run, Content Manager OnDemand removes the annotation.\n\nIf you are migrating data by unloading and then reloading the data, you need to determine your future expiration policy.\n\nFor example, if your current expiration policy is set to Storage Manager but you later want to perform holds on the data, during the migration process (when you create the application group and before you load any data), change your expiration policy from Storage Manager to Load .\n\nWhen you use the Enhanced Retention Management feature with Content Manager OnDemand or IBM Enterprise Records (formerly IBM FileNet Records Manager), Content Manager OnDemand must be in complete control of expiration processing. Therefore, if you are using Tivoli Storage Manager or OAM, you must disable the ability for either of these storage managers to expire data. \n\nAlso, you can use Enhanced Retention Management and Content Federation Services for Content Manager OnDemand only with application groups with an expiration type of Load . For those application groups with expiration types of Document , Segment , or Storage Manager , utilities exist to convert these application groups to an expiration type of Load . \n\nConsider engaging IBM Lab Services to provide these services. \n\nIf you choose not to take advantage of the ability of Content Manager OnDemand to aggregate documents but instead you choose to load documents ad hoc by using the storeDocument Java API, StoreDoc Object Linking and Embedding (OLE) API, or CommonStore, you must migrate the data later. \n\nIf you choose not to take advantage of the ability of Content Manager OnDemand to aggregate documents into 10 MB storage objects, this decision might result in millions of small objects that are stored in your storage manager, which might cause the storage manager to experience performance problems when it migrates these small objects to tape. \n\nNote: Consider aggregating these smaller objects into larger objects for performance reasons.\n\nFor you to aggregate all of these tiny objects into larger objects after they are stored individually requires that you retrieve and reload them as larger objects. You might want to engage IBM Lab Services to assist you with this task.\n\nAnother option is to not migrate objects to tape, but to use another random access hardware device instead.\n\nChapter 10. Migration and expiring data and indexes 229" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8307172495623395, + "doc_id": "5a2b510f80287015929e4a88f94b52561484ece0476e1f289f9a13a8057a317b", + "edit_distance": 0.7283950617283951, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.8923297888464976, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "590\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\n- 3. Confirm your selection and click Remove as shown in Figure 11-138.\n\nFigure 11-138 Confirm the removal of relationships from a Consistency Group\n\nFigure 11-138 Confirm the removal of relationships from a Consistency Group\n\n## 11.9.8 Starting remote copy relationships\n\nWhen a remote copy relationship is created, the remote copy process can be started. Only relationships that are not members of a Consistency Group, or the only relationship in a Consistency Group, can be started. In any other case, consider starting the Consistency Group instead.\n\nTo start one or multiple relationships, complete the following steps:\n\n- 1. Open the Copy Services →→ Remote Copy panel.\n- 2. Right-click the relationships to be started and select Start , as shown in Figure 11-139.\n\nFigure 11-139 Starting remote copy relationships\n\nFigure 11-139 Starting remote copy relationships", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "- 3. Confirm your selection and click Remove as shown in Figure 11-138.\n\n## 11.9.8 Starting remote copy relationships\n\nFigure 11-138 Confirm the removal of relationships from a Consistency Group\n\nFigure 11-139 Starting remote copy relationships\n\n- 2. Right-click the relationships to be started and select Start , as shown in Figure 11-139.\n\n- 1. Open the Copy Services →→ Remote Copy panel.\n\nTo start one or multiple relationships, complete the following steps:\n\nWhen a remote copy relationship is created, the remote copy process can be started. Only relationships that are not members of a Consistency Group, or the only relationship in a Consistency Group, can be started. In any other case, consider starting the Consistency Group instead.\n\n590 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8755530451264218, + "doc_id": "70490406a22cc44d129b01dd27084579b00ee268b973776bd56f00f8546f86cb", + "edit_distance": 0.09073724007561437, + "f1_score": 0.947075208913649, + "meteor": 0.9701745412257621, + "precision": 0.9550561797752809, + "pred_md": "Draft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n8459ch06.fm\n\n```\nterraform plan Refreshing Terraform state in-memory prior to plan... ... Output truncated ... Plan: 33 to add, 0 to change, 0 to destroy. ------------------------------------------------------------------------Note: You didn't specify an \"-out\" parameter to save this plan, so Terraform can't guarantee that exactly these actions will be performed if \"terraform apply\" is subsequently run.\n```\n\n- /SM590000 Apply the changes required to reach the desired state:\n\n```\nterraform apply data.openstack_compute_availability_zones_v2.AZ: Refreshing state... ... Output truncated ... Plan: 33 to add, 0 to change, 0 to destroy. Do you want to perform these actions? Terraform will perform the actions described above. Only 'yes' will be accepted to approve. Enter a value: yes ... Output truncated ... null_resource.vm4_post_install_config[0] (remote-exec): ---start adding user_public_key---Apply complete! Resources: 33 added, 0 changed, 0 destroyed.\n```\n\nAfter this section is completed, you have the virtual machines up and running.\n\n## 6.3.4 Install OpenShift Container Platform\n\nPerform the following steps to install OpenShift Container Platform:\n\n- 1. Create the Ansible inventory file. You can use the aio.inv.example for All-In-One (AIO) configuration (see Example 6-7), 7nodes.inv.example for seven nodes configuration (see Example 6-8 on page 116), or 3nodes.inv.example for three nodes configuration (see Example 6-9 on page 119). There are many other possible configurations which can be used not covered in this book.\n\nExample 6-7 Ansible all in one inventory example\n\n```\n##-----------------------------------------------------------------------## ## All-in-One(AIO): ##-----------------------------------------------------------------------## [OSEv3:vars] ##-----------------------------------------------------------------------## ## Ansible Vars ##-----------------------------------------------------------------------## timeout=60 # ansible_user={{CHANGEME_ANSIBLE_SSH_USER}}\n```\n\nChapter 6. Installing Red Hat OpenShift 3.11 on IBM PowerVC\n\n113", + "recall": 0.9392265193370166, + "true_md": "Draft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n8459ch06.fm\n\nterraform plan Refreshing Terraform state in-memory prior to plan... ... Output truncated ... Plan: 33 to add, 0 to change, 0 to destroy. ------------------------------------------------------------------------ Note: You didn't specify an \"-out\" parameter to save this plan, so Terraform can't guarantee that exactly these actions will be performed if \"terraform apply\" is subsequently run.\n\nterraform apply data.openstack\\_compute\\_availability\\_zones\\_v2.AZ: Refreshing state... ... Output truncated ... Plan: 33 to add, 0 to change, 0 to destroy. Do you want to perform these actions? Terraform will perform the actions described above. Only 'yes' will be accepted to approve. Enter a value: yes ... Output truncated ... null\\_resource.vm4\\_post\\_install\\_config[0] (remote-exec): ---start adding user\\_public\\_key--- Apply complete! Resources: 33 added, 0 changed, 0 destroyed.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Apply the changes required to reach the desired state:\n\nAfter this section is completed, you have the virtual machines up and running.\n\n## 6.3.4 Install OpenShift Container Platform\n\nPerform the following steps to install OpenShift Container Platform:\n\n- 1. Create the Ansible inventory file. You can use the aio.inv.example for All-In-One (AIO) configuration (see Example 6-7), 7nodes.inv.example for seven nodes configuration (see Example 6-8 on page 116), or 3nodes.inv.example for three nodes configuration (see Example 6-9 on page 119). There are many other possible configurations which can be used not covered in this book.\n\nExample 6-7 Ansible all in one inventory example\n\n##-----------------------------------------------------------------------## ## All-in-One(AIO): ##-----------------------------------------------------------------------## [OSEv3:vars] ##-----------------------------------------------------------------------## ## Ansible Vars ##-----------------------------------------------------------------------## timeout=60 # ansible\\_user={{CHANGEME\\_ANSIBLE\\_SSH\\_USER}}\n\nChapter 6. Installing Red Hat OpenShift 3.11 on IBM PowerVC 113" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8895466847888537, + "doc_id": "d4e7900aa8c8ee57028377d6eaf84624974e12fe10fbd2c68dd3125f5a3d5cd8", + "edit_distance": 0.2062780269058296, + "f1_score": 0.980716253443526, + "meteor": 0.8745020107671172, + "precision": 0.994413407821229, + "pred_md": "466\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\n- /SM590000 FlashCopy licensing is based on the virtual capacity of the source volumes.\n- /SM590000 Incremental FlashCopy copies all of the data when you first start FlashCopy, and then only the changes when you stop and start FlashCopy mapping again. Incremental FlashCopy can substantially reduce the time that is required to re-create an independent image.\n- /SM590000 Reverse FlashCopy enables FlashCopy targets to become restore points for the source without breaking the FlashCopy relationship, and without having to wait for the original copy operation to complete.\n- /SM590000 The size of the source and target volumes cannot be altered (increased or decreased) while a FlashCopy mapping is defined.\n\nIBM FlashCopy limitations for IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2 are listed in Table 11-8.\n\nTable 11-8 FlashCopy limitations in V8.2\n\n## 11.2 Managing FlashCopy by using the GUI\n\nIt is often easier to work with the FlashCopy function from the GUI if you have a reasonable number of host mappings. However, in enterprise data centers with many host mappings, use the CLI to run your FlashCopy commands.\n\n## 11.2.1 FlashCopy presets\n\nThe IBM Spectrum Virtualize GUI interface provides three FlashCopy presets (Snapshot, Clone, and Backup) to simplify the more common FlashCopy operations.\n\nAlthough these presets meet most FlashCopy requirements, they do not support all possible FlashCopy options. If more specialized options are required that are not supported by the presets, the options must be performed by using CLI commands.\n\nThis section describes the preset options and their use cases.\n\n## Snapshot\n\nThis preset creates a copy-on-write point-in-time copy. The snapshot is not intended to be an independent copy. Instead, the copy is used to maintain a view of the production data at the time that the snapshot is created. Therefore, the snapshot holds only the data from regions of the production volume that changed since the snapshot was created. Because the snapshot preset uses thin provisioning, only the capacity that is required for the changes is used.\n\nSnapshot uses the following preset parameters:\n\n- /SM590000 Background copy: None\n- /SM590000 Incremental: No\n- /SM590000 Delete after completion: No", + "recall": 0.967391304347826, + "true_md": "- GLYPH<SM590000> FlashCopy licensing is based on the virtual capacity of the source volumes.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Incremental FlashCopy copies all of the data when you first start FlashCopy, and then only the changes when you stop and start FlashCopy mapping again. Incremental FlashCopy can substantially reduce the time that is required to re-create an independent image.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Reverse FlashCopy enables FlashCopy targets to become restore points for the source without breaking the FlashCopy relationship, and without having to wait for the original copy operation to complete.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> The size of the source and target volumes cannot be altered (increased or decreased) while a FlashCopy mapping is defined. \n\nIBM FlashCopy limitations for IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2 are listed in Table 11-8.\n\nTable 11-8 FlashCopy limitations in V8.2\n\n## 11.2 Managing FlashCopy by using the GUI\n\n## 11.2.1 FlashCopy presets\n\nIt is often easier to work with the FlashCopy function from the GUI if you have a reasonable number of host mappings. However, in enterprise data centers with many host mappings, use the CLI to run your FlashCopy commands.\n\nThe IBM Spectrum Virtualize GUI interface provides three FlashCopy presets (Snapshot, Clone, and Backup) to simplify the more common FlashCopy operations.\n\nAlthough these presets meet most FlashCopy requirements, they do not support all possible FlashCopy options. If more specialized options are required that are not supported by the presets, the options must be performed by using CLI commands. \n\nThis section describes the preset options and their use cases.\n\nThis preset creates a copy-on-write point-in-time copy. The snapshot is not intended to be an independent copy. Instead, the copy is used to maintain a view of the production data at the time that the snapshot is created. Therefore, the snapshot holds only the data from regions of the production volume that changed since the snapshot was created. Because the snapshot preset uses thin provisioning, only the capacity that is required for the changes is used.\n\nSnapshot uses the following preset parameters:\n\n## Snapshot\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Incremental: No\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Background copy: None\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Delete after completion: No\n\n466 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8327125274138497, + "doc_id": "9f290116a69c49aa91c60089673cf125018de055ed366229664010dd4b596758", + "edit_distance": 0.5851063829787234, + "f1_score": 0.9726775956284152, + "meteor": 0.9254575224977074, + "precision": 0.978021978021978, + "pred_md": "652\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\n- 2. After you click Configure , you are presented with a wizard similar to the one that is described in 12.4.2, 'Enabling encryption using USB flash drives' on page 622. Note that you cannot disable key server providers during this process.\n\nAfter successful completion of the process, you are presented with a message confirming that both encryption key providers are enabled, as shown in Figure 12-63.\n\nFigure 12-63 Confirmation of successful configuration of two encryption key providers\n\nFigure 12-63 Confirmation of successful configuration of two encryption key providers\n\n- 3. You can confirm that encryption is enabled and verify which key providers are in use by going to Settings → Security → Encryption , as shown in Figure 12-64. Note the state Online state of key servers and Validated state of USB ports where USB flash drives are inserted to make sure they are properly configured.\n\nFigure 12-64 Encryption enabled with two key providers available\n\nFigure 12-64 Encryption enabled with two key providers available", + "recall": 0.967391304347826, + "true_md": "- 2. After you click Configure , you are presented with a wizard similar to the one that is described in 12.4.2, “Enabling encryption using USB flash drives” on page 622. Note that you cannot disable key server providers during this process. \n\n- 3. You can confirm that encryption is enabled and verify which key providers are in use by going to Settings → Security → Encryption , as shown in Figure 12-64. Note the state Online state of key servers and Validated state of USB ports where USB flash drives are inserted to make sure they are properly configured.\n\nAfter successful completion of the process, you are presented with a message confirming that both encryption key providers are enabled, as shown in Figure 12-63.\n\nFigure 12-64 Encryption enabled with two key providers available\n\nFigure 12-63 Confirmation of successful configuration of two encryption key providers\n\n652 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.547611492256509, + "doc_id": "50f2d1c3227a173676127b8d53ed4a0bcba24a0d856e28c6b8a0585207191cac", + "edit_distance": 0.5274261603375527, + "f1_score": 0.8624999999999999, + "meteor": 0.6118469918296607, + "precision": 0.8961038961038961, + "pred_md": "Chapter 2.\n\n## System overview\n\nThis chapter provides an overview of IBM Spectrum Virtualize software and IBM Storwize V7000 architecture and components. The chapter shows the software elements that build the IBM Storwize V7000 platform and provides an overview of the useful management and support tools that helps to maintain and operate the IBM Storwize V7000.\n\nThis chapter includes the following topics:\n\n- /SM590000 2.1, 'IBM Spectrum Virtualize' on page 10\n- /SM590000 2.2, 'Storage virtualization' on page 10\n- /SM590000 2.3, 'IBM Storwize V7000 overview' on page 12\n- /SM590000 2.4, 'IBM Storwize V7000 hardware' on page 19\n- /SM590000 2.5, 'IBM Storwize V7000 components' on page 19\n- /SM590000 2.6, 'Business continuity' on page 39\n- /SM590000 2.7, 'Management and support tools' on page 40\n- /SM590000 2.8, 'Useful IBM Storwize V7000 websites' on page 42\n\n' Copyright IBM Corp. 2011, 2018, 2019. All rights reserved.\n\n9\n\n2", + "recall": 0.8313253012048193, + "true_md": "2\n\n## System overview\n\nThis chapter provides an overview of IBM Spectrum Virtualize software and IBM Storwize V7000 architecture and components. The chapter shows the software elements that build the IBM Storwize V7000 platform and provides an overview of the useful management and support tools that helps to maintain and operate the IBM Storwize V7000.\n\nThis chapter includes the following topics:\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> 2.8, “Useful IBM Storwize V7000 websites” on page 42\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> 2.7, “Management and support tools” on page 40\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> 2.6, “Business continuity” on page 39\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> 2.5, “IBM Storwize V7000 components” on page 19\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> 2.4, “IBM Storwize V7000 hardware” on page 19\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> 2.3, “IBM Storwize V7000 overview” on page 12\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> 2.2, “Storage virtualization” on page 10\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> 2.1, “IBM Spectrum Virtualize” on page 10\n\n' Copyright IBM Corp. 2011, 201 8, 2019. All rights reserved.\n\n9" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9142661614595979, + "doc_id": "f7b986fefff7056dac1ed49ab43a3a5fb158c532fed14e5e2f812b0c83c564b1", + "edit_distance": 0.8465116279069768, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.8184215404623075, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "170\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\nFigure 5-62 Security menu\n\nFigure 5-62 Security menu\n\n## Remote Authentication\n\nIn the Remote Authentication pane, you can configure remote authentication with LDAP as shown in Figure 5-63. By default, the Storwize V7000 has local authentication enabled. When you configure remote authentication, you do not need to configure users on the system or assign more passwords. Instead, you can use your passwords and user groups that are defined on the remote service to simplify user management and access, enforce password policies more efficiently, and separate user management from storage management.\n\nFigure 5-63 Configuring Remote Authentication\n\nFigure 5-63 Configuring Remote Authentication\n\n## Secure Connections\n\nTo enable or manage secure connections, select the secure connections pane, as shown in Figure 5-64 on page 171. Before you create a request for either type of certificate, ensure that your current browser does not have restrictions on the type of keys that are used for certificates.\n\nSome browsers limit the use of specific key-types for security and compatibility issues. Select Update Certificate to add new certificate details, including certificates that were created and signed by a third-party certificate authority.", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Some browsers limit the use of specific key-types for security and compatibility issues. Select Update Certificate to add new certificate details, including certificates that were created and signed by a third-party certificate authority.\n\nTo enable or manage secure connections, select the secure connections pane, as shown in Figure 5-64 on page 171. Before you create a request for either type of certificate, ensure that your current browser does not have restrictions on the type of keys that are used for certificates. \n\nIn the Remote Authentication pane, you can configure remote authentication with LDAP as shown in Figure 5-63. By default, the Storwize V7000 has local authentication enabled. When you configure remote authentication, you do not need to configure users on the system or assign more passwords. Instead, you can use your passwords and user groups that are defined on the remote service to simplify user management and access, enforce password policies more efficiently, and separate user management from storage management.\n\n## Remote Authentication\n\nFigure 5-62 Security menu\n\nFigure 5-63 Configuring Remote Authentication\n\n## Secure Connections\n\n170 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8273866067632375, + "doc_id": "b0114018458314281c10284817b229c49915a3d87e3285b077a9bfe347e948d0", + "edit_distance": 0.125, + "f1_score": 0.9911504424778759, + "meteor": 0.9857805197612638, + "precision": 0.9824561403508771, + "pred_md": "Figure 11-66 shows the available options.\n\nFigure 11-66 Selecting Cloud service provider\n\nFigure 11-66 shows the available options.Figure 11-66 Selecting Cloud service provider\n\n- 3. In the next window, you must complete the settings of the Cloud Provider, credentials, and security access keys. The required settings can change depending on your cloud service provider. An example of an empty form for an IBM Cloud connection is shown in Figure 11-67 on page 504.\n\nChapter 11. Advanced Copy Services\n\n503", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Figure 11-66 shows the available options.\n\nFigure 11-66 Selecting Cloud service provider\n\n- 3. In the next window, you must complete the settings of the Cloud Provider, credentials, and security access keys. The required settings can change depending on your cloud service provider. An example of an empty form for an IBM Cloud connection is shown in Figure 11-67 on page 504.\n\nChapter 11. Advanced Copy Services 503" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9571792379232601, + "doc_id": "b37515599365ca179e8174f4601a901b0e934d985c0ea2cae1260e057abf68cf", + "edit_distance": 0.1076923076923077, + "f1_score": 0.9707865168539326, + "meteor": 0.9576714467592593, + "precision": 0.9863013698630136, + "pred_md": "40\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\n- /SM590000 Makes a host's volumes accessible across two IBM V7000 or V5000 Storwize or IBM SAN Volume Controller I/O groups in a clustered system using the Metro Mirror relationship in the background. The volumes appear a single volume to the host.\n- /SM590000 Works with the standard multipathing drivers that are available on a various host types, with no extra host support required to access the highly available volume.\n\n## 2.7 Management and support tools\n\nThe IBM Spectrum Virtualize system can be managed through the included management software that runs on the IBM Storwize V7000 hardware.\n\n## 2.7.1 IBM Assist On-site and Remote Support Assistance\n\nThe IBM Assist On-site tool is a remote desktop-sharing solution that is offered through the IBM website. With it, the IBM service representative can remotely view your system to troubleshoot a problem.\n\nYou can maintain a chat session with the IBM service representative so that you can monitor this activity and either understand how to fix the problem yourself or allow the representative to fix it for you.\n\nTo use the IBM Assist On-site tool, the master console must access the internet. For more information about this tool, see this website.\n\nWhen you access the website, you sign in and enter a code that the IBM service representative provides to you. This code is unique to each IBM Assist On-site session. A plug-in is downloaded onto your master console to connect you and your IBM service representative to the remote service session. The IBM Assist On-site tool contains several layers of security to protect your applications and your computers. The plug-in is removed after the next restart.\n\nYou can also use security features to restrict access by the IBM service representative. Your IBM service representative can provide you with more detailed instructions for using the tool.\n\nThe embedded part of the IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.1 code is a software toolset that is called Remote Support Client. It establishes a network connection over a secured channel with Remote Support Server in the IBM network. The Remote Support Server provides predictive analysis of IBM SAN Volume Controller status and assists administrators for troubleshooting and fix activities. Remote Support Assistance is available for no extra fee, and no additional license is needed.\n\n## 2.7.2 Event notifications\n\nIBM Storwize V7000 can use Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) traps, syslog messages, and a Call Home email to notify you and the IBM Support Center when significant events are detected. Any combination of these notification methods can be used simultaneously.\n\nEach event that IBM Storwize V7000 detects is assigned a notification type of Error , Warning , or Information . You can configure the IBM Storwize V7000 to send each type of notification to specific recipients.", + "recall": 0.9557522123893806, + "true_md": "- GLYPH<SM590000> Makes a host’s volumes accessible across tw o IBM V7000 or V5000 Storwize or IBM SAN Volume Controller I/O groups in a clustered system using the Metro Mirror relationship in the background. The volumes appear a single volume to the host.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Works with the standard multipathing drivers that are available on a various host types, with no extra host support required to access the highly available volume.\n\n## 2.7 Management and support tools\n\n## 2.7.1 IBM Assist On-site and Remote Support Assistance\n\nThe IBM Spectrum Virtualize system can be managed through the included management software that runs on the IBM Storwize V7000 hardware.\n\nThe IBM Assist On-site tool is a remote desktop-sharing solution that is offered through the IBM website. With it, the IBM service representative can remotely view your system to troubleshoot a problem.\n\nYou can maintain a chat session with the IBM service representative so that you can monitor this activity and either understand how to fix the problem yourself or allow the representative to fix it for you.\n\nTo use the IBM Assist On-site tool, the master console must access the internet. For more information about this tool, see this website.\n\nWhen you access the website, you sign in and enter a code that the IBM service representative provides to you. This code is unique to each IBM Assist On-site session. A plug-in is downloaded onto your master console to connect you and your IBM service representative to the remote service session. The IBM Assist On-site tool contains several layers of security to protect your applications and your computers. The plug-in is removed after the next restart.\n\nYou can also use security features to restrict access by the IBM service representative. Your IBM service representative can provide you with more detailed instructions for using the tool.\n\nThe embedded part of the IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.1 code is a software toolset that is called Remote Support Client. It establishes a network connection over a secured channel with Remote Support Server in the IBM network. The Remote Support Server provides predictive analysis of IBM SAN Volume Controller status and assists administrators for troubleshooting and fix activities. Remote Support Assistance is available for no extra fee, and no additional license is needed.\n\n## 2.7.2 Event notifications\n\nIBM Storwize V7000 can use Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) traps, syslog messages, and a Call Home email to notify you and the IBM Support Center when significant events are detected. Any combination of these notification methods can be used simultaneously.\n\n40 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\nEach event that IBM Storwize V7000 detects is assigned a notification type of Error , Warning , or Information . You can configure the IBM Storwize V7000 to send each type of notification to specific recipients." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9831231752481563, + "doc_id": "6663193f7d7c48ae379f4741cda651f448da6643169c2fe93ef5dfecd2eb15da", + "edit_distance": 0.031746031746031744, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999707928709128, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "In the unusual case where the master and the auxiliary are still synchronized (perhaps following a user stop, and no further write I/O was received), a start command takes the relationship to ConsistentSynchronized . No -force option is required. Also, in this case, you can enter a switch command that moves the relationship or Consistency Group to ConsistentSynchronized and reverses the roles of the master and the auxiliary.\n\nIf the relationship or Consistency Group becomes disconnected, the auxiliary changes to ConsistentDisconnected . The master changes to IdlingDisconnected .\n\nAn informational status log is generated whenever a relationship or Consistency Group enters the ConsistentStopped state with a status of Online . You can configure this event to generate an SNMP trap that can be used to trigger automation or manual intervention to issue a start command after a loss of synchronization.\n\n## ConsistentSynchronized\n\nConsistentSynchronized is a connected state. In this state, the master volume is accessible for read and write I/O, and the auxiliary volume is accessible for read-only I/O. Writes that are sent to the master volume are also sent to the auxiliary volume. Either successful completion must be received for both writes, the write must be failed to the host, or a state must change out of the ConsistentSynchronized state before a write is completed to the host.\n\nA stop command takes the relationship to the ConsistentStopped state. A stop command with the -access parameter takes the relationship to the Idling state.\n\nA switch command leaves the relationship in the ConsistentSynchronized state, but it reverses the master and auxiliary roles (it switches the direction of replicating data). A start command is accepted, but has no effect.\n\nIf the relationship or Consistency Group becomes disconnected, the same changes are made as for ConsistentStopped .\n\n## Idling\n\nIdling is a connected state. Both master and auxiliary volumes operate in the master role. Therefore, both master and auxiliary volumes are accessible for write I/O.\n\nIn this state, the relationship or Consistency Group accepts a start command. MM/GM maintains a record of regions on each disk that received write I/O while they were idling. This record is used to determine what areas must be copied following a start command.\n\nThe start command must specify the new copy direction. A start command can cause a loss of consistency if either Volume in any relationship received write I/O, which is indicated by the Synchronized status. If the start command leads to loss of consistency, you must specify the -force parameter.\n\nFollowing a start command, the relationship or Consistency Group changes to ConsistentSynchronized if there is no loss of consistency, or to InconsistentCopying if there is a loss of consistency.\n\nAlso, the relationship or Consistency Group accepts a -clean option on the start command while in this state. If the relationship or Consistency Group becomes disconnected, both sides change their state to IdlingDisconnected .\n\n## IdlingDisconnected\n\nIdlingDisconnected is a disconnected state. The target volumes in this half of the relationship or Consistency Group are all in the master role and accept read or write I/O.\n\nChapter 11. Advanced Copy Services\n\n539", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "In the unusual case where the master and the auxiliary are still synchronized (perhaps following a user stop, and no further write I/O was received), a start command takes the relationship to ConsistentSynchronized . No -force option is required. Also, in this case, you can enter a switch command that moves the relationship or Consistency Group to ConsistentSynchronized and reverses the roles of the master and the auxiliary.\n\nIf the relationship or Consistency Group becomes disconnected, the auxiliary changes to ConsistentDisconnected . The master changes to IdlingDisconnected .\n\nAn informational status log is generated whenever a relationship or Consistency Group enters the ConsistentStopped state with a status of Online . You can configure this event to generate an SNMP trap that can be used to trigger automation or manual intervention to issue a start command after a loss of synchronization.\n\nConsistentSynchronized is a connected state. In this state, the master volume is accessible for read and write I/O, and the auxiliary volume is accessible for read-only I/O. Writes that are sent to the master volume are also sent to the auxiliary volume. Either successful completion must be received for both writes, the write must be failed to the host, or a state must change out of the ConsistentSynchronized state before a write is completed to the host.\n\nA stop command takes the relationship to the ConsistentStopped state. A stop command with the -access parameter takes the relationship to the Idling state. \n\nA switch command leaves the relationship in the ConsistentSynchronized state, but it reverses the master and auxiliary roles (it switches the direction of replicating data). A start command is accepted, but has no effect.\n\nIf the relationship or Consistency Group becomes disconnected, the same changes are made as for ConsistentStopped .\n\nIdling is a connected state. Both master and auxiliary volumes operate in the master role. Therefore, both master and auxiliary volumes are accessible for write I/O.\n\nIn this state, the relationship or Consistency Group accepts a start command. MM/GM maintains a record of regions on each disk that received write I/O while they were idling. This record is used to determine what areas must be copied following a start command.\n\nThe start command must specify the new copy direction. A start command can cause a loss of consistency if either Volume in any relationship received write I/O, which is indicated by the Synchronized status. If the start command leads to loss of consistency, you must specify the -force parameter.\n\nFollowing a start command, the relationship or Consistency Group changes to ConsistentSynchronized if there is no loss of consistency, or to InconsistentCopying if there is a loss of consistency.\n\nAlso, the relationship or Consistency Group accepts a -clean option on the start command while in this state. If the relationship or Consistency Group becomes disconnected, both sides change their state to IdlingDisconnected .\n\nIdlingDisconnected is a disconnected state. The target volumes in this half of the relationship or Consistency Group are all in the master role and accept read or write I/O.\n\n## IdlingDisconnected\n\n## Idling\n\nChapter 11. Advanced Copy Services 539\n\n## ConsistentSynchronized" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8626804433352736, + "doc_id": "d2c740275a6145468b4800bc06b4ca23125a4fe99cc006b26fff69b5d9bfb04f", + "edit_distance": 0.5471698113207547, + "f1_score": 0.9739130434782608, + "meteor": 0.8058629841608119, + "precision": 0.9882352941176471, + "pred_md": "Draft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n8459ch02.fm\n\n- /SM590000 Streamline of development process using standardized environment of local containers which are highly compatible for CI/CD workflow. Automation plays a significant role to build and execute test scenarios.\n- /SM590000 Docker containers are lightweight in nature which makes is highly portable to almost every possible environment from workstation to virtualized environment to cloud. This feature makes is highly scalable based on user requirements.\n- /SM590000 Docker requires minimal resources so that multiple Docker containers can be hosted on the same hardware for optimal performance and resource utilization.\n\n## 2.3.4 Docker architecture\n\nThis section describes the docker architecture. Figure 2-10 shows the components of the docker architecture and their descriptions follows.\n\nFigure 2-10 Docker architecture\n\nFigure 2-10 Docker architecture\n\n## /SM590000 Docker Server Daemon\n\nDaemon is the Docker process that runs as background process and listen API requests and manages Dockers objects like images, Container, Network and volumes.\n\n- /SM590000 Docker Client\n\nDocker client is primary interface for user to take advantage of Docker features as shown in Figure 2-11 on page 21. Docker client invokes APIs in this process. Develop build application using Docker APIs.\n\n- /SM590000 Docker Registry\n\nA Docker registry stores Docker images. Docker Hub is a public registry that anyone can use, and Docker is configured to look for images on Docker Hub by default.\n\n- /SM590000 Docker Objects\n- -Images - This is a read only template with instruction to build a Docker container. An image can be layer on another image with specific changes. Images library is available from Docker registry. DockerFile contains configuration needed to build and run an image. Based on instructions defined in Dockerfile, layers are created for an image.\n\nChapter 2. Introduction to Containers and Orchestration with Kubernetes\n\n19", + "recall": 0.96, + "true_md": "Draft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n8459ch02.fm\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Streamline of development process using standardized environment of local containers which are highly compatible for CI/CD workflow. Automation plays a significant role to build and execute test scenarios.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Docker containers are lightweight in nature which makes is highly portable to almost every possible environment from workstation to virtualized environment to cloud. This feature makes is highly scalable based on user requirements.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Docker requires minimal resources so that multiple Docker containers can be hosted on the same hardware for optimal performance and resource utilization.\n\n## 2.3.4 Docker architecture\n\nThis section describes the docker architecture. Figure 2-10 shows the components of the docker architecture and their descriptions follows.\n\nFigure 2-10 Docker architecture\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Docker Server Daemon\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Docker Client\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Docker Registry\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Docker Objects \n\n- – Images - This is a read only template with instruction to build a Docker container. An image can be layer on another image with specific changes. Images library is available from Docker registry. DockerFile contains configuration needed to build and run an image. Based on instructions defined in Dockerfile, layers are created for an image. \n\nDaemon is the Docker process that runs as background process and listen API requests and manages Dockers objects like images, Container, Network and volumes. \n\nDocker client is primary interface for user to take advantage of Docker features as shown in Figure 2-11 on page 21. Docker client invokes APIs in this process. Develop build application using Docker APIs. \n\nA Docker registry stores Docker images. Docker Hub is a public registry that anyone can use, and Docker is configured to look for images on Docker Hub by default. \n\nChapter 2. Introduction to Containers and Orchestration with Kubernetes 19" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9262863186880456, + "doc_id": "f6135c3a1692463ea6b9dd9508ce99cc72301d517dc77cae306dd61810978dad", + "edit_distance": 0.8085808580858086, + "f1_score": 0.9829351535836177, + "meteor": 0.7221927890914882, + "precision": 0.9863013698630136, + "pred_md": "52\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\nFigure 3-2 shows the Storwize V7000 zoning classes.\n\nFigure 3-2 Storwize V7000 zoning classes\n\nFigure 3-2 Storwize V7000 zoning classes\n\nThe fundamental rules of Storwize V7000 zoning are described next. However, also review the latest zoning guidelines and requirements when designing zoning for the planned solution by searching for 'SAN configuration and zoning rules summary' at IBM Knowledge Center.\n\nNote: Configurations that use Metro Mirror, Global Mirror, N\\_Port ID Virtualization, or long-distance links have extra zoning requirements. Do not follow only the general zoning rules if you plan to use any of these.\n\nThe FCoE fabric uses the same set of zoning rules as the Fibre Channel fabric.\n\n## 3.6.3 Storwize V7000 cluster system zone\n\nThe Storwize V7000 cluster system zone is required only if you deploy solution with more than one control enclosure. The purpose of cluster system zone is to enable traffic between all Storwize V7000 nodes within the clustered system. This traffic consists of heartbeats, cache synchronization, and other data that nodes must exchange to maintain a healthy cluster state.\n\nEach Storwize V7000 port must be zoned so that it can be used for internode communications. A system node cannot have more than 16 paths to another node in the same system.\n\nMixed port speeds are not possible for intracluster communication. All node ports within a clustered system must be running at the same speed.\n\nStorwize V7000 supports the use of mixed fabrics for communication between nodes. The 10 GbE FCoE ports of one Storwize V7000 can be zoned to the FC ports of another node that is part of the same clustered system.", + "recall": 0.9795918367346939, + "true_md": "Figure 3-2 Storwize V7000 zoning classes\n\nStorwize V7000 supports the use of mixed fabrics for communication between nodes. The 10 GbE FCoE ports of one Storwize V7000 can be zoned to the FC ports of another node that is part of the same clustered system.\n\nMixed port speeds are not possible for intracluster communication. All node ports within a clustered system must be running at the same speed. \n\nEach Storwize V7000 port must be zoned so that it can be used for internode communications. A system node cannot have more than 16 paths to another node in the same system.\n\nThe Storwize V7000 cluster system zone is required only if you deploy solution with more than one control enclosure. The purpose of cluster system zone is to enable traffic between all Storwize V7000 nodes within the clustered system. This traffic consists of heartbeats, cache synchronization, and other data that nodes must exchange to maintain a healthy cluster state.\n\nThe FCoE fabric uses the same set of zoning rules as the Fibre Channel fabric.\n\nNote: Configurations that use Metro Mirror, Global Mirror, N\\_Port ID Virtualization, or long-distance links have extra zoning requirements. Do not follow only the general zoning rules if you plan to use any of these.\n\nThe fundamental rules of Storwize V7000 zoning are described next. However, also review the latest zoning guidelines and requirements when designing zoning for the planned solution by searching for “SAN configuration and zoning rules summary” at IBM Knowledge Center.\n\nFigure 3-2 shows the Storwize V7000 zoning classes.\n\n## 3.6.3 Storwize V7000 cluster system zone\n\n52 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.877403183791216, + "doc_id": "910f87866a6b64b536daa36cd21921db853145b1c574f2a73870ae8e635d9a37", + "edit_distance": 0.4583333333333333, + "f1_score": 0.9878345498783455, + "meteor": 0.959489754552877, + "precision": 0.9902439024390244, + "pred_md": "## 8459glos.fm\n\n## Kubernetes (also known as k8s or kube)\n\nA container orchestration platform for scheduling and automating the deployment, management, and scaling of containerized applications.\n\n## Load Balancer as a Service (LBaaS)\n\nA service that provides the ability to distribute traffic among instances in a virtual private cloud.\n\n## Local cloud\n\nA cloud computing environment within the client's data center. The local cloud is on-premises, providing improved latency and security.\n\n## Mobile Backend as a Service (MBaaS)\n\nA computing model that connects mobile applications to cloud computing services and provides features such as user management, push notifications, and integration with social networks.\n\n## Mobile cloud\n\nAn infrastructure in which the storage and processing of data for applications is offloaded from a mobile device into the cloud.\n\n## Multicloud\n\nA cloud adoption strategy that embraces a mix of cloud models - public, dedicated, private, managed - to best meet unique business, application and workload requirements.\n\n## Microservices\n\nAn application architectural style in which an application is composed of many discrete, network-connected components called microservices.\n\n## OCI container image\n\nA container image that is compliant with the OCI Image Format Specification.\n\n## On-premises (on-prem)\n\nPertaining to software that is installed and run on the local computers of a user or organization.\n\n## Platform as a Service (PaaS)\n\nThe delivery of a computing platform, including applications, optimized middleware, development tools, and runtime environments, in a cloud-based environment.\n\n## Pod\n\nA group of containers that are running on a Kubernetes cluster. A Pod is a runnable unit of work, which can be a either a stand-alone application or a set of microservice.\n\n## Private cloud\n\nA cloud computing environment on which access is limited to members of an enterprise and partner networks.\n\n238\n\nRed Hat OpenShift and IBM Cloud Paks on IBM Power Systems: Volume 1\n\nDraft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n## Public cloud\n\nA cloud computing environment on which access to standardized resources, such as infrastructure, multi-tenant hardware, and services, is available to subscribers on a pay-per-use basis.\n\n## Registry\n\nA public or private repository that contains images used to create containers.\n\n## Software as a Service (SaaS)\n\nA model of software deployment whereby software including business processes, enterprise applications, and collaboration tools, are provided as a service to customers through the cloud.", + "recall": 0.9854368932038835, + "true_md": "8459glos.fm\n\nDraft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n## Kubernetes (also known as k8s or kube)\n\n## Load Balancer as a Service (LBaaS)\n\n## Local cloud\n\n## Mobile Backend as a Service (MBaaS)\n\n## Mobile cloud\n\n## Multicloud\n\n## Microservices\n\n## OCI container image\n\n## On-premises (on-prem)\n\n## Platform as a Service (PaaS)\n\n## Pod\n\n## Private cloud\n\n## Public cloud\n\n## Registry\n\n## Software as a Service (SaaS)\n\nA container orchestration platform for scheduling and automating the deployment, management, and scaling of containerized applications.\n\nA service that provides the ability to distribute traffic among instances in a virtual private cloud.\n\nA cloud computing environment within the client’s data center. The local cloud is on-premises, providing improved latency and security. \n\nA computing model that connects mobile applications to cloud computing services and provides features such as user management, push notifications, and integration with social networks.\n\nAn infrastructure in which the storage and processing of data for applications is offloaded from a mobile device into the cloud. \n\nA cloud adoption strategy that embraces a mix of cloud models — public, dedicated, private, managed — to best meet unique business, application and workload requirements.\n\nAn application architectural style in which an application is composed of many discrete, network-connected components called microservices.\n\nA container image that is compliant with the OCI Image Format Specification.\n\nPertaining to software that is installed and run on the local computers of a user or organization.\n\nThe delivery of a computing platform, including applications, optimized middleware, development tools, and runtime environments, in a cloud-based environment.\n\nA group of containers that are running on a Kubernetes cluster. A Pod is a runnable unit of work, which can be a either a stand-alone application or a set of microservice.\n\nA cloud computing environment on which access is limited to members of an enterprise and partner networks.\n\nA cloud computing environment on which access to standardized resources, such as infrastructure, multi-tenant hardware, and services, is available to subscribers on a pay-per-use basis.\n\nA public or private repository that contains images used to create containers.\n\nA model of software deployment whereby software including business processes, enterprise applications, and collaboration tools, are provided as a service to customers through the cloud.\n\n238 Red Hat OpenShift and IBM Cloud Paks on IBM Power Systems: Volume 1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9333211586783969, + "doc_id": "1c3e54707fcf3bce602cf133599f6950a75da696e93044ca93d926c969d42d6e", + "edit_distance": 0.10658307210031348, + "f1_score": 0.9745454545454545, + "meteor": 0.9598737739758137, + "precision": 0.9925925925925926, + "pred_md": "556\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\nYou can assign one IPv4 address and one IPv6 address to each Ethernet port on the system platforms. Each of these IP addresses can be shared between iSCSI host attach and the IP partnership. The user must configure the required IP address (IPv4 or IPv6) on an Ethernet port with a remote copy port group.\n\nThe administrator might want to use IPv6 addresses for remote copy operations and use IPv4 addresses on that same port for iSCSI host attach. This configuration also implies that for two systems to establish an IP partnership, both systems must have IPv6 addresses that are configured.\n\nAdministrators can choose to dedicate an Ethernet port for IP partnership only. In that case, host access must be explicitly disabled for that IP address and any other IP address that is configured on that Ethernet port.\n\nNote: To establish an IP partnership, each IBM SAN Volume Controller node must have only a single remote copy port group that is configured, 1 or 2. The remaining IP addresses must be in remote copy port group 0.\n\n## 11.8.8 Supported configurations\n\nNote: For explanation purposes, this section shows a node with 2 ports available, 1 and 2. This number generally increments when IBM SAN Volume Controller nodes model DH8 or SV1 are used.\n\nThe following supported configurations for IP partnership that were in the first release are described in this section:\n\n- /SM590000 Two 2-node systems in IP partnership over a single inter-site link, as shown in Figure 11-98 (configuration 1).\n\nFigure 11-98 Single link with only one remote copy port group configured in each system\n\nFigure 11-98 Single link with only one remote copy port group configured in each system", + "recall": 0.9571428571428572, + "true_md": "You can assign one IPv4 address and one IPv6 address to each Ethernet port on the system platforms. Each of these IP addresses can be shared between iSCSI host attach and the IP partnership. The user must configure the required IP address (IPv4 or IPv6) on an Ethernet port with a remote copy port group.\n\nThe administrator might want to use IPv6 addresses for remote copy operations and use IPv4 addresses on that same port for iSCSI host attach. This configuration also implies that for two systems to establish an IP partnership, both systems must have IPv6 addresses that are configured. \n\nAdministrators can choose to dedicate an Ethernet port for IP partnership only. In that case, host access must be explicitly disabled for that IP address and any other IP address that is configured on that Ethernet port. \n\nNote: To establish an IP partnership, each IBM SAN Volume Controller node must have only a single remote copy port group that is configured, 1 or 2. The remaining IP addresses must be in remote copy port group 0.\n\n## 11.8.8 Supported configurations\n\nNote: For explanation purposes, this section shows a node with 2 ports available, 1 and 2. This number generally increments when IBM SAN Volume Controller nodes model DH8 or SV1 are used.\n\nThe following supported configurations for IP partnership that were in the first release are described in this section:\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Two 2-node systems in IP partnership over a single inter-site link, as shown in Figure 11-98 (configuration 1).\n\nFigure 11-98 Single link with only one remote copy port group configured in each system\n\n556 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8831964106170506, + "doc_id": "81ffbf00975e7f81d6324ee9bf6b812dfa034496d04e058f83da8d7927530cb5", + "edit_distance": 0.24, + "f1_score": 0.9547738693467337, + "meteor": 0.9294805596852813, + "precision": 0.9313725490196079, + "pred_md": "768\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\n- 2. Log in to IBM Storwize V7000 by using SSH and run the chuser command (as shown in Example B-3) to import the public SSH key to a user.\n\nExample B-3 Importing SSH public key to a user\n\n```\nIBM_Storwize:ITSO-V7k:admin> chuser -keyfile /tmp/sshkey.pub admin IBM_Storwize:ITSO-V7k:admin> lsuser admin id 4 name admin password yes ssh_key yes remote no usergrp_id 1 usergrp_name Administrator IBM_Storwize:ITSO-V7k:admin>\n```\n\nWhen running the lsuser command as shown in Example B-3, it is indicated that a user has a configured SSH key in the field ssh\\_key .\n\n## Connecting to IBM Spectrum Virtualize system\n\nNow that the SSH key is uploaded to the IBM Spectrum Virtualize system and assigned to a user account, you can connect to the device by using the ssh command with the following options:\n\nssh -i <SSH\\_private\\_key> <user>@<IP\\_address\\_or\\_hostname>\n\nExample B-4 shows the SSH command that is running from an AIX server and connecting to IBM Storwize V7000 with an SSH private key and no password prompt.\n\nExample B-4 Connecting to IBM Storwize V7000 with SSH private key\n\n```\nssh -i /.ssh/sshkey admin@192.168.1.100\n```\n\n# IBM\\_Storwize:ITSO-V7k:admin>", + "recall": 0.979381443298969, + "true_md": "- 2. Log in to IBM Storwize V7000 by using SSH and run the chuser command (as shown in Example B-3) to import the public SSH key to a user.\n\nExample B-3 Importing SSH public key to a user\n\nIBM\\_Storwize:ITSO-V7k:admin> chuser -keyfile /tmp/sshkey.pub admin IBM\\_Storwize:ITSO-V7k:admin> lsuser admin id 4 name admin password yes ssh\\_key yes remote no usergrp\\_id 1 usergrp\\_name Administrator IBM\\_Storwize:ITSO-V7k:admin>\n\nWhen running the lsuser command as shown in Example B-3, it is indicated that a user has a configured SSH key in the field ssh\\_key .\n\nNow that the SSH key is uploaded to the IBM Spectrum Virtualize system and assigned to a user account, you can connect to the device by using the ssh command with the following options:\n\nssh -i <SSH\\_private\\_key> <user>@<IP\\_address\\_or\\_hostname>\n\nExample B-4 shows the SSH command that is running from an AIX server and connecting to IBM Storwize V7000 with an SSH private key and no password prompt.\n\n## Connecting to IBM Spectrum Virtualize system\n\nExample B-4 Connecting to IBM Storwize V7000 with SSH private key\n\n# ssh -i /.ssh/sshkey admin@192.168.1.100 IBM\\_Storwize:ITSO-V7k:admin>\n\n768 \n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9479946923733422, + "doc_id": "7264966ae365d28dd8e7171d742fe94905a4339cbfacce20e6a0577af6a61c12", + "edit_distance": 0.1348973607038123, + "f1_score": 0.9756097560975611, + "meteor": 0.9341285116958362, + "precision": 0.9929078014184397, + "pred_md": "74\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\n## 3.15.2 Combining FlashCopy and Metro Mirror or Global Mirror\n\nUse of FlashCopy in combination with Metro Mirror or Global Mirror is allowed if the following conditions are met:\n\n- /SM590000 A FlashCopy mapping must be in the idle\\_copied state when its target volume is the secondary volume of a Metro Mirror or Global Mirror relationship.\n- /SM590000 A FlashCopy mapping cannot be manipulated to change the contents of the target volume of that mapping when the target volume is the primary volume of a Metro Mirror or Global Mirror relationship that is actively mirroring.\n- /SM590000 The I/O group for the FlashCopy mappings must be the same as the I/O group for the FlashCopy target volume.\n\n## 3.15.3 Planning for Metro Mirror and Global Mirror\n\nMetro Mirror is a copy service that provides a continuous, synchronous mirror of one volume to a second volume. The systems can be up to 300 kilometers (186.4 miles) apart. Because the mirror is updated synchronously, no data is lost if the primary system becomes unavailable. Metro Mirror is typically used for disaster-recovery purposes, where it is important to avoid any data loss.\n\nGlobal Mirror is a copy service that is similar to Metro Mirror, but copies data asynchronously. You do not have to wait for the write to the secondary system to complete. For long distances, performance is improved compared to Metro Mirror. However, if a failure occurs, you might lose data.\n\nGlobal Mirror uses one of two methods to replicate data. Multicycling Global Mirror is designed to replicate data while adjusting for bandwidth constraints. It is appropriate for environments where it is acceptable to lose a few minutes of data if a failure occurs.", + "recall": 0.958904109589041, + "true_md": "## 3.15.2 Combining FlashCopy and Metro Mirror or Global Mirror\n\nUse of FlashCopy in combination with Metro Mirror or Global Mirror is allowed if the following conditions are met:\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> A FlashCopy mapping must be in the idle\\_copied state when its target volume is the secondary volume of a Metro Mirror or Global Mirror relationship.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> A FlashCopy mapping cannot be manipulated to change the contents of the target volume of that mapping when the target volume is the primary volume of a Metro Mirror or Global Mirror relationship that is actively mirroring.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> The I/O group for the FlashCopy mappings must be the same as the I/O group for the FlashCopy target volume.\n\n## 3.15.3 Planning for Metro Mirror and Global Mirror\n\nMetro Mirror is a copy service that provides a continuous, synchronous mirror of one volume to a second volume. The systems can be up to 300 kilometers (186.4 miles) apart. Because the mirror is updated synchronously, no data is lost if the primary system becomes unavailable. Metro Mirror is typically used for disaster-recovery purposes, where it is important to avoid any data loss.\n\nGlobal Mirror is a copy service that is similar to Metro Mirror, but copies data asynchronously. You do not have to wait for the write to the secondary system to complete. For long distances, performance is improved compared to Metro Mirror. However, if a failure occurs, you might lose data.\n\nGlobal Mirror uses one of two methods to replicate data. Multicycling Global Mirror is designed to replicate data while adjusting for bandwidth constraints. It is appropriate for environments where it is acceptable to lose a few minutes of data if a failure occurs. \n\n74 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9589698775468445, + "doc_id": "3a733e643f54a46b4ff8ac93bb6d8833636213f2a6afb2da2d7a8b45d44be207", + "edit_distance": 0.06766917293233082, + "f1_score": 0.9863760217983653, + "meteor": 0.9908248606814766, + "precision": 0.9890710382513661, + "pred_md": "## 10.1 Easy Tier\n\nIBM Spectrum Virtualize includes the IBM System Storage Easy Tier function. It enables automated subvolume data placement throughout different storage tiers, and automatically moves extents within the same storage tier to intelligently align the system with current workload requirements. It also optimizes the use of Flash drives or flash arrays.\n\nMany applications exhibit a significant skew in the distribution of I/O workload: a small fraction of the storage is responsible for a disproportionately large fraction of the total I/O workload of an environment.\n\nEasy Tier acts to identify this skew and to automatically place data to take advantage of it. By moving the 'hottest' data onto the fastest tier of storage, the workload on the remainder of the storage is significantly reduced. By servicing most of the application workload from the fastest storage, Easy Tier acts to accelerate application performance, and increase overall server utilization. This can reduce costs in servers and application licenses.\n\nNote: Easy Tier is a licensed function, but it is included in base code. No actions are required to activate the Easy Tier license on IBM Storwize V7000.\n\n## 10.1.1 Easy Tier concepts\n\nEasy Tier is a performance optimization function that automatically migrates (or moves) extents that belong to a volume between different storage tiers, based on their I/O load. Movement of the extents is online and unnoticed from the host point of view. As a result of extent movement, the volume no longer has all its data in one tier, but rather in two or three tiers, and each tier provides optimal performance for the extent, as shown in Figure 10-1.\n\nFigure 10-1 Easy Tier\n\nFigure 10-1 Easy Tier\n\nEasy Tier monitors the I/O activity and latency of the extents on all Easy Tier enabled storage pools. Based on the performance log, it creates an extent migration plan and promotes (moves) high activity or hot extents to a higher disk tier within the same storage pool. It also demotes extents whose activity dropped off, or cooled, by moving them from a higher disk tier MDisk back to a lower tier MDisk.\n\n404\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1", + "recall": 0.9836956521739131, + "true_md": "## 10.1 Easy Tier\n\n## 10.1.1 Easy Tier concepts\n\nIBM Spectrum Virtualize includes the IBM System Storage Easy Tier function. It enables automated subvolume data placement throughout different storage tiers, and automatically moves extents within the same storage tier to intelligently align the system with current workload requirements. It also optimizes the use of Flash drives or flash arrays.\n\nMany applications exhibit a significant skew in the distribution of I/O workload: a small fraction of the storage is responsible for a disproportionately large fraction of the total I/O workload of an environment. \n\nEasy Tier acts to identify this skew and to automatically place data to take advantage of it. By moving the “hottest” data onto the fastest tier of storage, the workload on the remainder of the storage is significantly reduced. By servicing most of the application workload from the fastest storage, Easy Tier acts to accelerate application performance, and increase overall server utilization. This can reduce costs in servers and application licenses. \n\nNote: Easy Tier is a licensed function, but it is included in base code. No actions are required to activate the Easy Tier license on IBM Storwize V7000.\n\nEasy Tier is a performance optimization function that automatically migrates (or moves) extents that belong to a volume between different storage tiers, based on their I/O load. Movement of the extents is online and unnoticed from the host point of view. As a result of extent movement, the volume no longer has all its data in one tier, but rather in two or three tiers, and each tier provides optimal performance for the extent, as shown in Figure 10-1. \n\nEasy Tier monitors the I/O activity and latency of the extents on all Easy Tier enabled storage pools. Based on the performance log, it creates an extent migration plan and promotes (moves) high activity or hot extents to a higher disk tier within the same storage pool. It also demotes extents whose activity dropped off, or cooled, by moving them from a higher disk tier MDisk back to a lower tier MDisk. \n\nFigure 10-1 Easy Tier\n\n404 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8636141467526424, + "doc_id": "e88eae40543079878d634329b442674bdbb573f34838188e4b472aaa884f07bf", + "edit_distance": 0.4742268041237113, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9701502504267504, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "264\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\nThe GUI displays the underlying CLI commands that are run to create the mirrored volume and reports completion of the operation, as shown in Figure 7-15.\n\nFigure 7-15 Task complete: Created Mirrored Volume\n\nFigure 7-15 Task complete: Created Mirrored Volume\n\nNote: When creating a Mirrored volume by using this menu, you are not required to specify the Mirrored Sync rate (it defaults to 2 MBps). The synchronization rate can be customized by using the Custom menu.", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "The GUI displays the underlying CLI commands that are run to create the mirrored volume and reports completion of the operation, as shown in Figure 7-15.\n\nNote: When creating a Mirrored volume by using this menu, you are not required to specify the Mirrored Sync rate (it defaults to 2 MBps). The synchronization rate can be customized by using the Custom menu.\n\nFigure 7-15 Task complete: Created Mirrored Volume\n\n264 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8552167293336428, + "doc_id": "74fac58dbcc0e07f55bef54bf23d4742c1ac7473f31ed339d36a516818323533", + "edit_distance": 0.6407982261640798, + "f1_score": 0.9836065573770493, + "meteor": 0.7837826465388384, + "precision": 0.995260663507109, + "pred_md": "6\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\nWith IBM Spectrum Virtualize, free space does not need to be maintained and managed in each storage subsystem, which further increases capacity usage. Today, it is typical that open systems run at less than 50% of the usable capacity that is provided by the RAID disk subsystems.\n\nThe use of the installed raw capacity in the disk subsystems shows usage numbers of less than 35%, depending on the RAID level that is used. A block-level virtualization solution, such as IBM Spectrum Virtualize, can allow a significant increase to approximately 75 - 80%.\n\n## 1.3 Latest changes and enhancements\n\nIBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1 is another step in the product line development that brings new features and enhancements. The major software changes in subsequent code releases are described in this section.\n\nV8.2.1 of the Spectrum Virtualize code brought the following changes:\n\n- /SM590000 Full IP-based quorum: Support for administrators looking to consolidate their infrastructure over Ethernet.\n- /SM590000 Support for iSCSI extensions over RDMA (iSER) host attach enhancements.\n- /SM590000 Support for host login information for Ethernet-attached hosts.\n- /SM590000 64 K host mappings: Increased from the previous limitation of 20 K.\n- /SM590000 IBM Spectrum Insights: Provides a call home protocol that uses IBM IP to deliver a more robust path and higher bandwidth and higher frequency data transmission, with end-to-end confirmation of receipt.\n- /SM590000 Improvements to call home with email notifications.\n- /SM590000 Added support for SafeNet KeySecure encryption key server.\n- /SM590000 Single copy VDisk expand with format: Enables administrators to expand a VDisk without migrating the data off and back on.\n- /SM590000 Support for RDMA-based connections between nodes. This feature requires 25 GbE adapters to be installed on the nodes. Expands the host connectivity options for those storage arrays not initially covered by 8.2.\n- /SM590000 NVMe over Fibre Channel support on 16 Gb Fibre Channel adapters: Extends the simplicity, efficiency, and end-to-end NVMe model where NVMe commands and structures are transferred end to end, requiring no translations", + "recall": 0.9722222222222222, + "true_md": "With IBM Spectrum Virtualize, free space does not need to be maintained and managed in each storage subsystem, which further increases capacity usage. Today, it is typical that open systems run at less than 50% of the usable capacity that is provided by the RAID disk subsystems. \n\nThe use of the installed raw capacity in the disk subsystems shows usage numbers of less than 35%, depending on the RAID level that is used. A block-level virtualization solution, such as IBM Spectrum Virtualize, can allow a significant increase to approximately 75 - 80%.\n\nIBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1 is another step in the product line development that brings new features and enhancements. The major software changes in subsequent code releases are described in this section.\n\nV8.2.1 of the Spectrum Virtualize code brought the following changes:\n\n## 1.3 Latest changes and enhancements\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> NVMe over Fibre Channel support on 16 Gb Fibre Channel adapters: Extends the simplicity, efficiency, and end-to-end NVMe model where NVMe commands and structures are transferred end to end, requiring no translations\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Support for RDMA-based connections between nodes. This feature requires 25 GbE adapters to be installed on the nodes. Expands the host connectivity options for those storage arrays not initially covered by 8.2.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Single copy VDisk expand with format: Enables administrators to expand a VDisk without migrating the data off and back on.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Added support for SafeNet KeySecure encryption key server.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Improvements to call home with email notifications.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> IBM Spectrum Insights: Provides a call home protocol that uses IBM IP to deliver a more robust path and higher bandwidth and higher frequency data transmission, with end-to-end confirmation of receipt.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> 64 K host mappings: Increased from the previous limitation of 20 K.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Support for host login information for Ethernet-attached hosts.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Support for iSCSI extensions over RDMA (iSER) host attach enhancements.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Full IP-based quorum: Support for administrators looking to consolidate their infrastructure over Ethernet.\n\n6 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8284468901250659, + "doc_id": "f792e252d22b6dd24797fe0eeba24bfc6b2b9d4d05eaa8bbc1c04d7a4fb5a7b9", + "edit_distance": 0.15079365079365079, + "f1_score": 0.9481481481481482, + "meteor": 0.9220715650756803, + "precision": 0.9846153846153847, + "pred_md": "Draft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n8459ch06.fm\n\nenvironment. The Master, Infrastructure and Compute Roles are deployed to a single node (Figure 6-1).\n\nFigure 6-1 OpenShift Container Platform 3.11 all-in-one\n\nFigure 6-1 OpenShift Container Platform 3.11 all-in-one\n\n- /SM590000 Seven nodes deployment is highly available and suitable for production. The Master and Infrastructure Roles are deployed to three Nodes, the Computer Role is deployed to three Worker Nodes, and the Load Balancer is deployed to a single Node (Figure 6-2).\n\nFigure 6-2 OpenShift Container Platform 3.11 6xNodes + Load Balancer\n\nFigure 6-2 OpenShift Container Platform 3.11 6xNodes + Load Balancer\n\nChapter 6. Installing Red Hat OpenShift 3.11 on IBM PowerVC\n\n105", + "recall": 0.9142857142857143, + "true_md": "Draft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n8459ch06.fm\n\nenvironment. The Master, Infrastructure and Compute Roles are deployed to a single node (Figure 6-1).\n\nFigure 6-1 OpenShift Container Platform 3.11 all-in-one\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Seven nodes deployment is highly available and suitable for production. The Master and Infrastructure Roles are deployed to three Nodes, the Computer Role is deployed to three Worker Nodes, and the Load Balancer is deployed to a single Node (Figure 6-2).\n\nFigure 6-2 OpenShift Container Platform 3.11 6xNodes + Load Balancer\n\nChapter 6. Installing Red Hat OpenShift 3.11 on IBM PowerVC 105" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9657268427631747, + "doc_id": "f7ab22daa24740b7cfa57ab3b660dcf98d47b9a05d59fc6648734168a95d11ad", + "edit_distance": 0.0903954802259887, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9913561719890224, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "406\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\nThe table columns that are shown in Figure 10-2 on page 405 represent all of the possible pool configurations; the rows report in which Easy Tier tier each MDisk tier is mapped. For example, consider a pool with all the possible tiers configured that corresponds with the T0+T1+T2+T3 configuration in the table in Figure 10-2 on page 405. With this configuration, the T1 and T2 are mapped to the same Easy Tier tier. If there is no Tier 0 flash in a storage pool, Tier 1 flash is used as the highest performance tier.\n\nFor more information about planning and configuration considerations or best practices, see IBM System Storage SAN Volume Controller and Storwize V7000 Best Practices and Performance Guidelines , SG24-7521.\n\n## Easy Tier actions\n\nThe Easy Tier function continuously monitors volumes for host I/O activity. It collects performance statistics for each extent, and derives averages for a rolling 24-hour period of I/O activity. Random and sequential I/O rate and bandwidth for reads and writes are collected, as well as I/O response time.\n\nDifferent types of analytics are used to decide whether extent data migration is required. Once per day, Easy Tier analyze the statistics to work out which data should be sent to a higher performing tier or might be sent to a tier with lower performance. Four times per day, it analyzes the statistics to identify if any data needs to be rebalanced between managed disks in the same tier. Once every 5 minutes, Easy Tier checks the statistics to identify if any of the managed disks is overloaded.\n\nAll of these analysis phases generate a list of migrations that should be executed. The system then spends as long as needed running the migration plan.\n\nThe migration plan can consist of the following actions on volume extents (as shown in Figure 10-3):\n\nFigure 10-3 Actions on extents\n\nFigure 10-3 Actions on extents", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "The table columns that are shown in Figure 10-2 on page 405 represent all of the possible pool configurations; the rows report in which Easy Tier tier each MDisk tier is mapped. For example, consider a pool with all the possible tiers configured that corresponds with the T0+T1+T2+T3 configuration in the table in Figure 10-2 on page 405. With this configuration, the T1 and T2 are mapped to the same Easy Tier tier. If there is no Tier 0 flash in a storage pool, Tier 1 flash is used as the highest performance tier. \n\nFor more information about planning and configuration considerations or best practices, see IBM System Storage SAN Volume Controller and Storwize V7000 Best Practices and Performance Guidelines , SG24-7521. \n\nThe Easy Tier function continuously monitors volumes for host I/O activity. It collects performance statistics for each extent, and derives averages for a rolling 24-hour period of I/O activity. Random and sequential I/O rate and bandwidth for reads and writes are collected, as well as I/O response time. \n\nDifferent types of analytics are used to decide whether extent data migration is required. Once per day, Easy Tier analyze the statistics to work out which data should be sent to a higher performing tier or might be sent to a tier with lower performance. Four times per day, it analyzes the statistics to identify if any data needs to be rebalanced between managed disks in the same tier. Once every 5 minutes, Easy Tier checks the statistics to identify if any of the managed disks is overloaded. \n\nAll of these analysis phases generate a list of migrations that should be executed. The system then spends as long as needed running the migration plan. \n\nThe migration plan can consist of the following actions on volume extents (as shown in Figure 10-3):\n\n## Easy Tier actions\n\nFigure 10-3 Actions on extents\n\n406 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7794471844462633, + "doc_id": "38e5135bf502e5934d5dccfa8cafc1c41cd1e630b710bc239fad1d2c6adb77ac", + "edit_distance": 0.3974358974358974, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9554538212208668, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "686\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\nFigure 13-9 Download Existing Package\n\nFigure 13-9 Download Existing Package\n\n- 4. Click Download Existing Package to show a list of files found on the config node. We filtered the view by clicking in the Filter box, entering backup , and pressing Enter , as shown in Figure 13-10.\n\nFigure 13-10 Filtering specific files for download\n\nFigure 13-10 Filtering specific files for download", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Figure 13-9 Download Existing Package\n\nFigure 13-10 Filtering specific files for download\n\n- 4. Click Download Existing Package to show a list of files found on the config node. We filtered the view by clicking in the Filter box, entering backup , and pressing Enter , as shown in Figure 13-10.\n\n686 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9220802244883892, + "doc_id": "eede862313b4e49066b9ab82a171c3abdfe7922b466df2520517c0633ecab5cb", + "edit_distance": 0.12714776632302405, + "f1_score": 0.9739130434782608, + "meteor": 0.9329064506012839, + "precision": 0.9911504424778761, + "pred_md": "188\n\nIBM Content Manager OnDemand Guide\n\nThe line data applet is a Java applet that is provided by ODWEK. It is similar to the line data viewing capabilities of the Windows client, but it does not contain all of the parallel functionality for viewing line data within the Windows client. For example, the applet does not support saving and selecting custom views.\n\nThe plug-ins for AFP and images are shipped as setup packages, which must be installed on the user's computer. The plug-ins integrate themselves with Mozilla Firefox browsers and Microsoft Internet Explorer. The AFP plug-in provides similar viewing capabilities to the Windows client.\n\nThe image plug-in can view image files, with the added benefit of displaying TIFF images (which current web browsers usually cannot display).\n\n## Conversions and transforms\n\nIn addition to the viewers, ODWEK uses conversion or transformation engines, which convert the document into another data type. ODWEK allows the integration of AFP Transform components for converting AFP into HTML or PDF documents, and it provides a generic transform interface, which can be used to plug in any conversion or transformation engine.\n\nThe transforms apply only to documents that are served by ODWEK. They are available to web clients that are based on ODWEK (such as Content Navigator) and to any other application that is written by using the ODWEK Java API. They are not available on the Windows client.\n\n## Web viewing considerations\n\nWhen you choose a viewer strategy in web clients, it is important to know the differences among the viewer architectures:\n\n- /SM590000 Java applet viewers, such as the line data applet or Content Navigator's generic applet viewer, are downloaded automatically to the user's computer and run within the browser. No deployment is needed, but a Java installation must be present on the PC. They are effectively cached on the user computers, and they can provide sophisticated functionality. On the downside, each Java applet requires a Java virtual machine (JVM) to run. On terminal servers that serve multiple users at once, this requirement might lead to larger memory consumption.\n- /SM590000 Plug-in viewers are native applications that must be installed through a setup routine on the user's computer. They integrate with the browser and provide their own viewing logic, which can be sophisticated (for example, with the AFP plug-in).\n- /SM590000 The generic and Ajax viewers that are provided by Content Navigator provide limited rendering and viewing capabilities. They do not require any rollout or JVM.\n- /SM590000 Transforms, such as the Ricoh AFP2PDF or other vendor-provided transforms, result in a PDF document that is viewed in the Acrobat viewer. Although this viewer is deployed on most user PCs, the rendering consumes processing power on the mid-tier system. Also, large documents cannot be rendered into PDFs. Because the PDF is displayed by an external application, it cannot communicate with the Content Manager OnDemand server like the line data applet.", + "recall": 0.9572649572649573, + "true_md": "The line data applet is a Java applet that is provided by ODWEK. It is similar to the line data viewing capabilities of the Windows client, but it does not contain all of the parallel functionality for viewing line data within the Windows client. For example, the applet does not support saving and selecting custom views.\n\nThe plug-ins for AFP and images are shipped as setup packages, which must be installed on the user’s computer. The plug- ins integrate themselves with Mozilla Firefox browsers and Microsoft Internet Explorer. The AFP plug-in provides similar viewing capabilities to the Windows client. \n\nThe image plug-in can view image files, with the added benefit of displaying TIFF images (which current web browsers usually cannot display).\n\nIn addition to the viewers, ODWEK uses conversion or transformation engines, which convert the document into another data type. ODWEK allows the integration of AFP Transform components for converting AFP into HTML or PDF documents, and it provides a generic transform interface, which can be used to plug in any conversion or transformation engine.\n\nThe transforms apply only to documents that are served by ODWEK. They are available to web clients that are based on ODWEK (such as Content Navigator) and to any other application that is written by using the ODWEK Java API. They are not available on the Windows client.\n\nWhen you choose a viewer strategy in web clients, it is important to know the differences among the viewer architectures:\n\n## Web viewing considerations\n\n## Conversions and transforms\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Java applet viewers, such as the line data applet or Content Navigator’s generic applet viewer, are downloaded automatically to the user’s computer and run within the browser. No deployment is needed, but a Java installation must be present on the PC. They are effectively cached on the user computers, and they can provide sophisticated functionality. On the downside, each Java applet requires a Java virtual machine (JVM) to run. On terminal servers that serve multiple users at once, this requirement might lead to larger memory consumption.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Plug-in viewers are native applications that must be installed through a setup routine on the user’s computer. They integrate with the browser and provide their own viewing logic, which can be sophisticated (for example, with the AFP plug-in). \n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> The generic and Ajax viewers that are provided by Content Navigator provide limited rendering and viewing capabilities. They do not require any rollout or JVM.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Transforms, such as the Ricoh AFP2PDF or other vendor-provided transforms, result in a PDF document that is viewed in the Acrobat viewer. Although this viewer is deployed on most user PCs, the rendering consumes processing power on the mid-tier system. Also, large documents cannot be rendered into PDFs. Because the PDF is displayed by an external application, it cannot communicate with the Content Manager OnDemand server like the line data applet.\n\n188 IBM Content Manager OnDemand Guide" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9471917632124219, + "doc_id": "878ddc2a8c1d12af456d689cb896bfd669e9ae0d80a713bca1f168892fea2f77", + "edit_distance": 0.04081632653061224, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9933074249411113, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## 11.9.2 Creating remote copy relationships\n\nThis section shows how to create remote copy relationships for volumes with their respective remote targets. Before creating a relationship between a volume on the local system and a volume on a remote system, both volumes must exist and have the same virtual size.\n\nTo create a remote copy relationship, complete these steps:\n\n- 1. Open the Copy Services → Remote Copy panel.\n- 2. Right-click the Consistency Group that you want to create the relationship for, and select Create Relationship , as shown in Figure 11-116. If you want to create a stand-alone relationship (not in a consistency group), right-click the Not in a Group group.\n\nFigure 11-116 Creating remote copy relationships\n\nFigure 11-116 Creating remote copy relationships\n\nChapter 11. Advanced Copy Services\n\n573", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## 11.9.2 Creating remote copy relationships\n\nThis section shows how to create remote copy relationships for volumes with their respective remote targets. Before creating a relationship between a volume on the local system and a volume on a remote system, both volumes must exist and have the same virtual size.\n\nTo create a remote copy relationship, complete these steps:\n\n- 1. Open the Copy Services → Remote Copy panel. \n\n- 2. Right-click the Consistency Group that you want to create the relationship for, and select Create Relationship , as shown in Figure 11-116. If you want to create a stand-alone relationship (not in a consistency group), right-click the Not in a Group group.\n\nFigure 11-116 Creating remote copy relationships\n\nChapter 11. Advanced Copy Services 573" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9519989947845512, + "doc_id": "239a13dade7af3eff7234f93f179949179709af817f49b7df3690b7208a53ae3", + "edit_distance": 0.13216957605985039, + "f1_score": 0.9704918032786887, + "meteor": 0.9593624772313295, + "precision": 0.9801324503311258, + "pred_md": "246\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\nImage mode creates one-to-one mapping of logical block addresses (LBAs) between a volume and an MDisk (LU presented by the virtualized storage). Image mode volumes have the minimum size of one block (512 bytes) and always occupy at least one extent. An Image mode MDisk cannot be used as a quorum disk and no IBM Spectrum Virtualize system metadata extents are allocated from it; however, all of the IBM Spectrum Virtualize copy services functions can be applied to image mode disks. The difference between a managed mode volume (with striped extent allocation) and an image mode volume is shown in Figure 7-4.\n\nFigure 7-4 Image mode volume versus striped volume\n\nFigure 7-4 Image mode volume versus striped volume\n\nAn image mode volume is mapped to one, and only one, image mode MDisks and is mapped to the entirety of the MDisk. Therefore, the image mode volume capacity must be equal to the size of the corresponding image mode MDisk. If the size of the (image mode) MDisk is not a multiple of the MDisk group's extent size, the last extent is marked as partial (not filled).\n\nWhen you create an image mode volume, the specified MDisk must be in unmanaged mode and must not be a member of a storage pool. As the image mode volume is configured, the MDisk is made a member of the specified storage pool ( Storage Pool\\_IMG\\_ xxx ).\n\nIBM Spectrum Virtualize also supports the reverse process, in which a managed mode volume can be migrated to an image mode volume. The extent size that is chosen for this specific storage pool must be the same as the extent size of the storage pool into which you plan to migrate the data off the image mode volumes. If a volume is migrated to another MDisk, it is represented as being in managed mode during the migration. Its mode changes to 'image' only after the process completes.\n\nIt is a preferred practice to put image mode MDisks in a dedicated storage pool and use a special name for it (for example, Storage Pool\\_IMG\\_ xxx ).", + "recall": 0.961038961038961, + "true_md": "Image mode creates one-to-one mapping of logical block addresses (LBAs) between a volume and an MDisk (LU presented by the virtualized storage). Image mode volumes have the minimum size of one block (512 bytes) and always occupy at least one extent. An Image mode MDisk cannot be used as a quorum disk and no IBM Spectrum Virtualize system metadata extents are allocated from it; however, all of the IBM Spectrum Virtualize copy services functions can be applied to image mode disks. The difference between a managed mode volume (with striped extent allocation) and an image mode volume is shown in Figure 7-4.\n\nAn image mode volume is mapped to one, and only one, image mode MDisks and is mapped to the entirety of the MDisk. Therefore, the image mode volume capacity must be equal to the size of the corresponding image mode MDisk. If the size of the (image mode) MDisk is not a multiple of the MDisk group’s ex tent size, the last extent is marked as partial (not filled).\n\nWhen you create an image mode volume, the specified MDisk must be in unmanaged mode and must not be a member of a storage pool. As the image mode volume is configured, the MDisk is made a member of the specified storage pool ( Storage Pool\\_IMG\\_ xxx ).\n\nIBM Spectrum Virtualize also supports the reverse process, in which a managed mode volume can be migrated to an image mode volume. The extent size that is chosen for this specific storage pool must be the same as the extent size of the storage pool into which you plan to migrate the data off the image mode volumes. If a volume is migrated to another MDisk, it is represented as being in managed mode during the migration. Its mode changes to “image” only after the process completes.\n\nIt is a preferred practice to put image mode MDisks in a dedicated storage pool and use a special name for it (for example, Storage Pool\\_IMG\\_ xxx ). \n\nFigure 7-4 Image mode volume versus striped volume\n\n246 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8764807367599193, + "doc_id": "e5aeeb770411172627bc73b2a575d168213cb08b6f19b78f9499ff0e075f1fd9", + "edit_distance": 0.3350253807106599, + "f1_score": 0.9106382978723404, + "meteor": 0.8884128009916957, + "precision": 0.963963963963964, + "pred_md": "## 11.4.2 Enabling Transparent Cloud Tiering\n\nAfter you complete the DNS settings, you can enable the Transparent Cloud Tiering function in your IBM Spectrum Virtualize system by completing the following steps:\n\n- 1. Using the IBM Spectrum Virtualize GUI, click Settings → System → Transparent Cloud Tiering and click Enable Cloud Connection , as shown in Figure 11-65. The Transparent Cloud Tiering wizard starts and shows the welcome warning.\n\nFigure 11-65 Enabling Cloud Tiering\n\nFigure 11-65 Enabling Cloud Tiering\n\nNote: It is important to implement encryption before enabling cloud connecting. Encryption protects your data from attacks during the transfer to the external cloud service. Because the HTTP protocol is used to connect to cloud infrastructure, it is likely to start transactions by using the internet. For purposes of this publication, encryption is not enabled on our system.\n\n- 2. Click Next to continue. You must select one of three cloud service providers:\n- -IBM Cloud\n- -OpenStack Swift\n- -Amazon S3\n\n502\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1", + "recall": 0.8629032258064516, + "true_md": "## 11.4.2 Enabling Transparent Cloud Tiering\n\nAfter you complete the DNS settings, you can enable the Transparent Cloud Tiering function in your IBM Spectrum Virtualize system by completing the following steps:\n\n- 1. Using the IBM Spectrum Virtualize GUI, click Settings → System → Transparent Cloud Tiering and click Enable Cloud Connection , as shown in Figure 11-65. The Transparent Cloud Tiering wizard starts and shows the welcome warning. \n\n- 2. Click Next to continue. You must select one of three cloud service providers:\n\n- –I B M C l o u d\n\n- – OpenStack Swift\n\n- –A m a z o n S 3\n\nNote: It is important to implement encryption before enabling cloud connecting. Encryption protects your data from attacks during the transfer to the external cloud service. Because the HTTP protocol is used to connect to cloud infrastructure, it is likely to start transactions by using the internet. For purposes of this publication, encryption is not enabled on our system.\n\nFigure 11-65 Enabling Cloud Tiering\n\n502 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8567378647404235, + "doc_id": "85aaf725cef9b025be1ceaf2c7d6875d07bf37b5feccf24658b936e87befb29d", + "edit_distance": 0.17391304347826086, + "f1_score": 0.9473684210526317, + "meteor": 0.8811095508743226, + "precision": 0.9672897196261683, + "pred_md": "- /SM590000 Volumes with encrypted data have a low compression ratio, and are not good candidates for compression. This observation is true for data that is encrypted by the host. Real-time Compression can provide satisfactory results for volumes encrypted by Storwize V7000, because compression is performed before encryption.\n\n## 3.19.5 Performance monitoring\n\nPerformance monitoring must be a part of the overall IT environment. For the Storwize V7000 and other IBM storage subsystems, the official IBM tool to collect performance statistics and provide a performance report is IBM Spectrum Control.\n\nFor more information about using IBM Spectrum Control to monitor your storage subsystem, see this website.\n\nAlso, see IBM Spectrum Family: IBM Spectrum Control Standard Edition , SG24-8321.\n\n## 3.20 Storage Insights\n\nStorage Insights is an integral part of the monitoring and ensuring continued availability of the Storwize V7000.\n\nAvailable at no charge, cloud-based IBM Storage Insights provides a single dashboard that gives you a clear view of all your IBM block storage. You can make better decisions by seeing trends in performance and capacity.\n\nStorage health information enables you to focus on areas needing attention and when IBM support is needed, Storage Insights simplifies uploading logs, speeds resolution with online configuration data, and provides an overview of open tickets all in one place.\n\nStorage Insights includes the following features:\n\n- /SM590000 A unified view of IBM systems:\n- -Provides a single pane of glass to see all your systems characteristics.\n- -See all of your IBM storage inventory.\n- -Provides a live event feed so you know, up to the second, what is going on with your storage and enables you to act quickly.\n- /SM590000 Storage IBM Insightfi collects telemetry data and call home data and provides.\n- Up to the second system reporting of capacity and performance.\n- /SM590000 Overall storage monitoring looking at:\n- -The overall health of the system.\n- -Monitor the configuration to see whether it meets the best practices.\n- -System resource management; that is, is the system being overly taxed and provide proactive recommendations to fix it.\n- /SM590000 Storage Insights provides advanced customer service with an event filter to that allows:\n- -The ability for you and support to view support tickets and open and close them and to track trends.\n- -Auto log collection capability to allow you to collect the logs and send to IBM before support start looking into the problem. This feature can save as much as 50% of the time to resolve the case.\n\nChapter 3. Planning\n\n83", + "recall": 0.9282511210762332, + "true_md": "- GLYPH<SM590000> Volumes with encrypted data have a low compression ratio, and are not good candidates for compression. This observation is true for data that is encrypted by the host. Real-time Compression can provide satisfactory results for volumes encrypted by Storwize V7000, because compression is performed before encryption.\n\n## 3.19.5 Performance monitoring\n\n## 3.20 Storage Insights\n\nPerformance monitoring must be a part of the overall IT environment. For the Storwize V7000 and other IBM storage subsystems, the official IBM tool to collect performance statistics and provide a performance report is IBM Spectrum Control. \n\nFor more information about using IBM Spectrum Control to monitor your storage subsystem, see this website.\n\nAlso, see IBM Spectrum Family: IBM Spectrum Control Standard Edition , SG24-8321.\n\nStorage Insights is an integral part of the monitoring and ensuring continued availability of the Storwize V7000.\n\nAvailable at no charge, cloud-based IBM Storage Insights provides a single dashboard that gives you a clear view of all your IBM block storage. You can make better decisions by seeing trends in performance and capacity. \n\nStorage health information enables you to focus on areas needing attention and when IBM support is needed, Storage Insights simplifies uploading logs, speeds resolution with online configuration data, and provides an overview of open tickets all in one place.\n\nStorage Insights includes the following features:\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> A unified view of IBM systems:\n\n- – Provides a single pane of glass tosee all your systems characteristics.\n\n- – See all of your IBM storage inventory.\n\n- – Provides a live event feed so you know, up to the second, what is going on with your storage and enables you to act quickly.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Storage IBM Insightfi collects telemetry data and call home data and provides.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Overall storage monitoring looking at:\n\n- – The overall health of the system.\n\n- – Monitor the configuration to see whether it meets the best practices. \n\n- – System resource management; that is, is the system being overly taxed and provide proactive recommendations to fix it.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Storage Insights provides advanced customer service with an event filter to that allows:\n\n- – The ability for you and support to view supp ort tickets and open and close them and to track trends. \n\n- – Auto log collection capability to allow you tocollect the logs and send to IBM before support start looking into the problem. This feature can save as much as 50% of the time to resolve the case.\n\nUp to the second system reporting of capacity and performance.\n\nChapter 3. Planning 83" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7846573221124173, + "doc_id": "5b6fb2869a639ad84d89e6b3a9fe91e096f0891e522a0f54d181c98e877ea5d4", + "edit_distance": 0.63718820861678, + "f1_score": 0.9102564102564104, + "meteor": 0.7279526167516929, + "precision": 0.9281045751633987, + "pred_md": "## 7.4.1 Understanding the input data\n\nOn every platform except z/OS, the FILEFORMAT parameter is used to describe the format of the input data. Before setting the FILEFORMAT parameter, it is important to understand the difference between the carriage control and the delimiter:\n\n- /SM590000 The delimiter separates the records. The most common delimiters are x'0A' and x'0D0A'.\n- /SM590000 The carriage control, if it exists, is the first byte of each record. The carriage control follows the delimiter, except at the beginning of the file, where the carriage control is the first byte. (Therefore, to search in a hexadecimal editor for the beginning of the next page of a file that uses x'0A' as the delimiter, search for x'0AF1' or x'0A31'.)\n\n## FILEFORMAT parameter\n\nFor AFP data, the FILEFORMAT parameter is not needed, unless the file is AFP in record format. For a description of record format, see 'AFP Structured Fields' on page 176.\n\nThe FILEFORMAT parameter has the following values:\n\n- /SM590000 record,n :\n- -For example: FILEFORMAT=record,100 .\n- -Fixed-length line data.\n- -This type of file has no delimiter.\n- /SM590000 stream :\n- -For example: fileformat = stream,(newline=X'0A') or (newline=X 0D0A ) ' ' .\n- -For variable record files that are created on UNIX platforms.\n- -Specify the delimiter in the FILEFORMAT parameter.\n- /SM590000 record :\n- -For example: FILEFORMAT=record .\n- -Each record has a 2-byte prefix, which contains the length of the record. This length is exclusive, which means that it does not include the length of the 2-byte prefix itself. A download for z/OS adds this prefix when it downloads files.\n- -This type of file has no delimiter.\n\n## Carriage controls\n\nIt is important to set the ACIF parameters CC and CCTYPE correctly. Table 7-2 describes the ANSI carriage controls. The encoding columns show what you see if you look at the document in a hexadecimal editor.\n\nTable 7-2 ANSI carriage controls\n\nChapter 7. Indexing and loading\n\n175", + "recall": 0.8930817610062893, + "true_md": "## 7.4.1 Understanding the input data\n\n## FILEFORMAT parameter\n\n## Carriage controls\n\nOn every platform except z/OS, the FILEFORMAT parameter is used to describe the format of the input data. Before setting the FILEFORMAT parameter, it is important to understand the difference between the carriage control and the delimiter: \n\nFor AFP data, the FILEFORMAT parameter is not needed, unless the file is AFP in record format. For a description of record format, see “AFP Structured Fields” on page 176.\n\nThe FILEFORMAT parameter has the following values:\n\nIt is important to set the ACIF parameters CC and CCTYPE correctly. Table 7-2 describes the ANSI carriage controls. The encoding columns show what you see if you look at the document in a hexadecimal editor.\n\nChapter 7. Indexing and loading 175\n\nTable 7-2 ANSI carriage controls\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> The delimiter separates the records. The most common delimiters are x’0A’ and x’0D0A’. \n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> The carriage control, if it exists, is the first byte of each record. The carriage control follows the delimiter, except at the beginning of the file, where the carriage control is the first byte. (Therefore, to search in a hexadecimal editor for the beginning of the next page of a file that uses x’0A’ as the delimiter, search for x’0AF1’ or x’0A31’.)\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> record,n :\n\n- – For example: FILEFORMAT=record,100 .\n\n- – Fixed-length line data.\n\n- – This type of file has no delimiter.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> stream :\n\n- – For example: fileformat = stream,(newline=X'0A') or (newline=X ’ 0D0A ’ ) .\n\n- – For variable record files that are created on UNIX platforms.\n\n- – Specify the delimiter in the FILEFORMAT parameter.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> record :\n\n- – For example: FILEFORMAT=record .\n\n- – Each record has a 2-byte prefix, which contains the length of the record. This length is exclusive, which means that it does not include the length of the 2-byte prefix itself. A download for z/OS adds this prefix when it downloads files.\n\n- – This type of file has no delimiter." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7925749381027408, + "doc_id": "a932f5b23552a5bd547dfc9c66c5ba778af6d8a28c46ce9c5a021d74a1df6bba", + "edit_distance": 0.1792452830188679, + "f1_score": 0.9572649572649572, + "meteor": 0.9477312493484064, + "precision": 0.9655172413793104, + "pred_md": "In the \\example, the Create option was selected. The volume-to-host mapping can be performed later, as described in section 7.6, 'Mapping a volume to a host' on page 278. When the operation completes, a confirmation window opens, as shown in Figure 7-12.\n\nFigure 7-12 Create Volumes Task Completion window\n\nFigure 7-12 Create Volumes Task Completion window\n\nSuccess is also indicated by the state of the Basic volume being reported as formatting in the Volumes pane, as shown in Figure 7-13.\n\nFigure 7-13 Basic volume formatting\n\nFigure 7-13 Basic volume formatting\n\nChapter 7. Volumes\n\n261", + "recall": 0.9491525423728814, + "true_md": "In the \\example, the Create option was selected. The volume-to-host mapping can be performed later, as described in section 7.6, “Mapping a volume to a host” on page 278. When the operation completes, a confirmation window opens, as shown in Figure 7-12.\n\nFigure 7-12 Create Volumes Task Completion window\n\nFigure 7-13 Basic volume formatting\n\nSuccess is also indicated by the state of the Basic volume being reported as formatting in the Volumes pane, as shown in Figure 7-13.\n\nChapter 7. Volumes 261" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8094156894218182, + "doc_id": "2f9299494a360b37688e0a7255635690ca394000bb33224adb3aa1115838c3c9", + "edit_distance": 0.19047619047619047, + "f1_score": 0.9789473684210527, + "meteor": 0.9319056536709953, + "precision": 0.9789473684210527, + "pred_md": "## 12.3.3 Start activation process on a running system\n\nTo activate encryption on a running system, complete the following steps:\n\n- 1. Click Settings → System → Licensed Functions .\n- 2. Click Encryption Licenses , as shown in Figure 12-9.\n\nFigure 12-9 Expanding Encryption Licenses section on the Licensed Functions window\n\nFigure 12-9 Expanding Encryption Licenses section on the Licensed Functions window\n\n- 3. The Encryption Licenses window displays information about your control enclosures. Right-click the enclosure on which you want to install an encryption license. This action opens a menu with two license activation options ( Activate License Automatically and Activate License Manually ), as shown in Figure 12-10. Use either option to activate encryption. For more information about how to complete an automatic activation process, see 12.3.4, 'Activate the license automatically' on page 614. For more information about how to complete a manual activation process, see 12.3.5, 'Activate the license manually' on page 617.\n\nFigure 12-10 Select the Control Enclosure on which you want to enable the encryption\n\nFigure 12-10 Select the Control Enclosure on which you want to enable the encryption\n\nChapter 12. Encryption\n\n613", + "recall": 0.9789473684210527, + "true_md": "## 12.3.3 Start activation process on a running system\n\nTo activate encryption on a running system, complete the following steps:\n\n- 1. Click Settings → System → Licensed Functions . \n\n- 2. Click Encryption Licenses , as shown in Figure 12-9.\n\n- 3. The Encryption Licenses window displays information about your control enclosures. Right-click the enclosure on which you want to install an encryption license. This action opens a menu with two license activation options ( Activate License Automatically and Activate License Manually ), as shown in Figure 12-10. Use either option to activate encryption. For more information about how to complete an automatic activation process, see 12.3.4, “Activate the license automatically” on page 614. For more information about how to complete a manual activation process, see 12.3.5, “Activate the license manually” on page 617.\n\nFigure 12-10 Select the Control Enclosure on which you want to enable the encryption\n\nFigure 12-9 Expanding Encryption Licenses section on the Licensed Functions window\n\nChapter 12. Encryption 613" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9522366245189402, + "doc_id": "c9d024d9211959c82cc2492db637123f721270add375f6a66d1ce60c4822111e", + "edit_distance": 0.03680981595092025, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9954422528853324, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "- 3. The Upload Support Package window provides four options for data collection. If you were contacted by IBM Support because your system called home or you manually opened a call with IBM Support, you receive a PMR number . Enter that PMR number into the PMR field and select the snap type (often referred to as an option 1, 2, 3, 4 snap ) as requested by IBM Support (see Figure 13-69). In our example, we entered our PMR number, selected snap type 3 (option 3) because this automatically collects the statesave that were created at the time the node restarted, and clicked Upload .\n\nTip: To open a service request online, see the IBM Support Service requests and PMRs web page.\n\nFigure 13-69 Upload Support Package window\n\nFigure 13-69 Upload Support Package window\n\nChapter 13. RAS, monitoring, and troubleshooting\n\n729", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "- 3. The Upload Support Package window provides four options for data collection. If you were contacted by IBM Support because your system called home or you manually opened a call with IBM Support, you receive a PMR number . Enter that PMR number into the PMR field and select the snap type (often referred to as an option 1, 2, 3, 4 snap ) as requested by IBM Support (see Figure 13-69). In our example, we entered our PMR number, selected snap type 3 (option 3) because this automatically collects the statesave that were created at the time the node restarted, and clicked Upload .\n\nTip: To open a service request online, see the IBM Support Service requests and PMRs web page.\n\nFigure 13-69 Upload Support Package window\n\nChapter 13. RAS, monitoring, and troubleshooting 729" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8308425620582625, + "doc_id": "25ec84afe252e44a8a02a2e763d6274c09171c7ac62c6c3a442f313db21f4964", + "edit_distance": 0.3523809523809524, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.982440801457195, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "216\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\nFigure 6-34 Distributed RAID 6 (for simplification, not all packs are shown)\n\nFigure 6-34 Distributed RAID 6 (for simplification, not all packs are shown)\n\nFigure 6-35 on page 217 shows a single drive failure in this DRAID6 environment. Physical disk 3 failed and the RAID 6 algorithm is using the spare capacity for a single spare drive in each pack for rebuild (which is marked in green). All disk drives are involved in the rebuild process, which significantly reduces the rebuild time.", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Figure 6-34 Distributed RAID 6 (for simplification, not all packs are shown)\n\nFigure 6-35 on page 217 shows a single drive failure in this DRAID6 environment. Physical disk 3 failed and the RAID 6 algorithm is using the spare capacity for a single spare drive in each pack for rebuild (which is marked in green). All disk drives are involved in the rebuild process, which significantly reduces the rebuild time. \n\n216 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8589459141248504, + "doc_id": "e37400ce622b585c5247574279395f4faf4491a65cba90397015e8486b5f15db", + "edit_distance": 0.6942800788954635, + "f1_score": 0.9877750611246944, + "meteor": 0.7938719559272244, + "precision": 0.9901960784313726, + "pred_md": "62\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\nNote: Ethernet link aggregation (port trunking) or channel bonding for the Storwize V7000 nodes' Ethernet ports is not supported for the 1 Gbps ports.\n\n## 3.7.3 General recommendation\n\nThis section covers general preferences that are related to iSCSI.\n\n## Planning for host attachments\n\nAn iSCSI client, which is known as an iSCSI initiator , sends SCSI commands over an IP network to an iSCSI target. A single iSCSI initiator or iSCSI target is called an iSCSI node .\n\nYou can use the following types of iSCSI initiators in host systems:\n\n- /SM590000 Software initiator: Available for most operating systems (OS), including AIX, Linux, and Windows.\n- /SM590000 Hardware initiator: Implemented as a network adapter with an integrated iSCSI processing unit, which is also known as an iSCSI HBA .\n\nMake sure that iSCSI initiators, targets, or both that you plan to use are supported. Use the following websites for reference:\n\n- /SM590000 IBM Storwize V7000 V8.1 Support page\n- /SM590000 IBM Knowledge Center for IBM Storwize V7000\n- /SM590000 hIBM System Storage Interoperation Center (SSIC)\n\n## iSCSI qualified name\n\nA Storwize V7000 cluster can provide up to eight iSCSI targets, one per node. Each Storwize V7000 node has its own IQN, which, by default, is in the following form:\n\niqn.1986-03.com.ibm:2145.< clustername >.< nodename >\n\nAn alias string can also be associated with an iSCSI node. The alias enables an organization to associate a string with the iSCSI name. However, the alias string is not a substitute for the iSCSI name.\n\nNote: The cluster name and node name form part of the IQN. Changing any of them might require reconfiguration of all iSCSI nodes that communicate with the Storwize V7000.\n\n## 3.7.4 iSCSI Extensions for RDMA (iSER)\n\nIBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1 introduced support for iSER host attachment for the Storwize V7000 Gen2+ by using RoCE or iWARP transport protocol, depending on HBA hardware and host platforms that provide the following components:\n\n- /SM590000 A fully Ethernet based infrastructure (no Fibre Channel) in the Data center\n- /SM590000 IBM SAN Volume Controller or Storwize inter-node communication\n- /SM590000 HyperSwap (SVC/Storwize)\n\nThe system supports node-to-node connections that use Ethernet protocols that support remote direct memory access (RDMA) technology, such as RDMA over Converged Ethernet (RoCE) or iWARP.", + "recall": 0.9853658536585366, + "true_md": "Note: Ethernet link aggregation (port trunking) or channel bonding for the Storwize V7000 nodes’ Ethernet ports is not supported for the 1 Gbps ports.\n\nThis section covers general preferences that are related to iSCSI.\n\nAn iSCSI client, which is known as an iSCSI initiator , sends SCSI commands over an IP network to an iSCSI target. A single iSCSI initiator or iSCSI target is called an iSCSI node . \n\nYou can use the following types of iSCSI initiators in host systems:\n\nMake sure that iSCSI initiators, targets, or both that you plan to use are supported. Use the following websites for reference:\n\nA Storwize V7000 cluster can provide up to eight iSCSI targets, one per node. Each Storwize V7000 node has its own IQN, which, by default, is in the following form: \n\nAn alias string can also be associated with an iSCSI node. The alias enables an organization to associate a string with the iSCSI name. However, the alias string is not a substitute for the iSCSI name.\n\nNote: The cluster name and node name form part of the IQN. Changing any of them might require reconfiguration of all iSCSI nodes that communicate with the Storwize V7000.\n\nIBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1 introduced support for iSER host attachment for the Storwize V7000 Gen2+ by using RoCE or iWARP transport protocol, depending on HBA hardware and host platforms that provide the following components:\n\nThe system supports node-to-node connections that use Ethernet protocols that support remote direct memory access (RDMA) technology, such as RDMA over Converged Ethernet (RoCE) or iWARP. \n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> HyperSwap (SVC/Storwize)\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> IBM SAN Volume Controller or Storwize inter-node communication\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> A fully Ethernet based infrastructure (no Fibre Channel) in the Data center \n\niqn.1986-03.com.ibm:2145.< clustername >.< nodename >\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> hIBM System Storage Interoperation Center (SSIC) \n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> IBM Knowledge Center for IBM Storwize V7000 \n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> IBM Storwize V7000 V8.1 Support page \n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Software initiator: Available for most operating systems (OS), including AIX, Linux, and Windows.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Hardware initiator: Implemented as a network adapter with an integrated iSCSI processing unit, which is also known as an iSCSI HBA .\n\n## 3.7.3 General recommendation\n\n## Planning for host attachments\n\n## iSCSI qualified name\n\n## 3.7.4 iSCSI Extensions for RDMA (iSER)\n\n62 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5399369921720492, + "doc_id": "f150efdddf1f21529ddc1d19b068f22ebf4a69a7a2d6b181401b3d6f5132e4b5", + "edit_distance": 0.6666666666666666, + "f1_score": 0.9455587392550143, + "meteor": 0.8095019897389146, + "precision": 0.9649122807017544, + "pred_md": "| traffic profile activity 44 |\n|---------------------------------|\n| transparently 428 |\n| troubleshooting 40 |\n\n## U\n\n| UDP 41 |\n|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|\n| unbalanced 27 unmap a VDisk 308 updates 37 drives and enclosures 680 |\n| software 688 upgrades software 687 use of Metro Mirror 523, 532 used capacity 253 |\n| used free capacity 253 User Datagram Protocol 41 |\n\n## V\n\n| VDisk | |\n|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|----------------|\n| assigning to host 305 creating 289, 292 creating in image mode 292 deleting 302 expanding 303 I/O governing 301 | |\n| information 289 migrating 71, 308 modifying 301 path offline for source 464 | |\n| showing for MDisk 311 shrinking 309 VDisk-to-host mapping 308 | |\n| viewing 702 virtual capacity 251 virtual disks 19 | |\n| virtualization 10, 19-20, 31, 33 VLUN 780 volume mirroring 408 | |\n| Volume Mirroring function 16 volume properties view 373 | |\n| volumes 16-17, 20, 28, 31, 33, 278, 284, 286, 372, 726 change 37 copies 284 data placement 404 deleting 287 fully allocated 16 | |\n| hot spots 19 I/O handling management 20 | |\n| image mode 33 logical 28 | |\n| maximum size 30 mirrored 23, 30 | |\n| creating 262 | mirroring 30 |\n| migrating 30, 33, 281, 283-284 | |\n\n800\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\n| overview 31 |\n|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------|\n| overwritten 726 removing 350 secondary 37 sequential 32 source 16, 38 |\n| definition 31 target 38 |\n| multiple 38 thin-provisioned 16, 38 |\n\n## W\n\n| warning capacity 253 | |\n|-------------------------------------------------------|----------------------------------|\n| warning threshold 310 | |\n| warranty period 41 Windows 708 working with 709 | working with managed disks 154 |\n\n## Z\n\n| zero contingency 253 |\n|--------------------------------|\n| zero-detection algorithm 253 |", + "recall": 0.9269662921348315, + "true_md": "traffic profile activity 44 transparently 428 troubleshooting 40\n\nUDP 41 unbalanced 27 unmap a VDisk 308 updates 37 drives and enclosures 680 IBM Storiwze V7000 software 688 upgrades software 687 use of Metro Mirror 523, 532 used capacity 253 used free capacity 253 User Datagram Protocol 41\n\nVDisk assigning to host 305 creating 289, 292 creating in image mode 292 deleting 302 expanding 303 I/O governing 301 information 289 migrating 71, 308 modifying 301 path offline for source 464 path offline for target 464 showing for MDisk 311 shrinking 309 VDisk-to-host mapping 308 viewing 702 virtual capacity 251 virtual disks 19 virtualization 10, 19–20, 31, 33 VLUN 780 volume mirroring 408 Volume Mirroring function 16 volume properties view 373 volumes 16–17, 20, 28, 31, 33, 278, 284, 286, 372, 726 change 37 copies 284 data placement 404 deleting 287 fully allocated 16 hot spots 19 I/O handling management 20 image mode 33 logical 28 maximum size 30 migrating 30, 33, 281, 283–284 mirrored 23, 30 creating 262 mirroring 30\n\nwarning capacity 253 warning threshold 310 warranty period 41 Windows 708 working with 709 working with managed disks 154 workload cycle 77 write cache 428 write ordering 518 WWPNs 20\n\noverview 31 overwritten 726 removing 350 secondary 37 sequential 32 source 16, 38 striped 31 definition 31 target 38 multiple 38 thin-provisioned 16, 38 W\n\nzero contingency 253 zero-detection algorithm 253\n\n## Z\n\n## V\n\n## U\n\n800 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9393997118147884, + "doc_id": "5e40a0c1b04b4e06e86937f6c03f5b81b86782283f78ec93af045fec53c2c255", + "edit_distance": 0.175, + "f1_score": 0.9881956155143339, + "meteor": 0.9439842122459198, + "precision": 0.9965986394557823, + "pred_md": "8459ch02.fm\n\nDraft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n8\n\nRed Hat OpenShift and IBM Cloud Paks on IBM Power Systems: Volume 1\n\nContainerize the applications, also called the VM-based lift and shift method. When you containerize an application, you reduce future costs, simplify operations, and cloud migration to a common Kubernetes platform. You also focus on a single operational model that can be used by both new cloud-native applications and traditional applications.\n\n- /SM590000 Expose on-premises assets by using APIs\n\nThe use of APIs allows new applications to use the exposed capability in an accessible way. Typically, this connection is made by way of The OpenAPI Specification (OAS) REST standard that allows the interface to be discovered and managed.\n\n- /SM590000 Refactor the monolith into macroservices\n\nTransform your monolith application to become cloud-native. For example: where you deal with a huge Java or JavaScript files and break monoliths into smaller deployable components.\n\n- /SM590000 Add capabilities as microservices\n\nEnrich your application with new business functions implemented as microservices. Your application can consume a wide variety of services that are available in the cloud, such as AI, industry, and domain services.\n\n- /SM590000 Strangle the monolith\n\nIncrementally withdraw the monolith from service by replacing functions with new cloud-native implementations.\n\nTo help you on your cloud journey, IBM introduced new and better experiences on modernization approaches such as the incremental lift-and-shift to cloud-native microservices. You do not need to rewrite your entire application assets to move to the cloud. With a cloud-native microservices approach, you can capitalize on the scalability and flexibility that is inherent in any robust cloud infrastructure.\n\n## The DevOps approach\n\nDevOps is about tools and techniques needed to bring the worlds of development and operations closer together. It is about the practices and automation required to reliably and rapidly deploy new code through the build and test cycles to production environments.\n\nDevOps is an approach where companies and their development, operations, and quality assurance teams collaborate to continuously deliver software. By following this approach, which is based on lean and agile principles, enterprises can seize market opportunities and reduce the time to include customer feedback in their products. DevOps applies to aging, traditional, cloud-ready, and cloud-native applications.\n\nFailing fast and iterating quickly are DevOps requirements for competitive app delivery. They imply application architectures that decouple services from each other in a continuous development and delivery cycle, although ensuring well-performing interactions with users.\n\nIn a cloud-native environment, applications are viewed as collections of microservices with many deployable components that deploy at various speeds and independently of each other. Manually deploying anything becomes an unsustainable effort prone to error, inconsistency, and delays. Automating continuous delivery pipelines is a way to help operations from deploying an application they have little knowledge of and rescue developers from complex configurations and deployments. Efficient delivery means more time for innovation, enabling the business to disrupt the market and competitors.\n\nWhether they are accessing a website or a mobile app, people have high expectations of the apps that they regularly use. As a result, companies must continuously deliver new features", + "recall": 0.979933110367893, + "true_md": "8459ch02.fm\n\nDraft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\nContainerize the applications, also called the VM-based lift and shift method. When you containerize an application, you reduce future costs, simplify operations, and cloud migration to a common Kubernetes platform. You also focus on a single operational model that can be used by both new cloud-native applications and traditional applications. \n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Expose on-premises assets by using APIs\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Refactor the monolith into macroservices\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Add capabilities as microservices\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Strangle the monolith\n\nThe use of APIs allows new applications to use the exposed capability in an accessible way. Typically, this connection is made by way of The OpenAPI Specification (OAS) REST standard that allows the interface to be discovered and managed. \n\nTransform your monolith application to become cloud-native. For example: where you deal with a huge Java or JavaScript files and break monoliths into smaller deployable components. \n\nEnrich your application with new business functions implemented as microservices. Your application can consume a wide variety of services that are available in the cloud, such as AI, industry, and domain services.\n\nIncrementally withdraw the monolith from service by replacing functions with new cloud-native implementations.\n\nTo help you on your cloud journey, IBM introduced new and better experiences on modernization approaches such as the incremental lift-and-shift to cloud-native microservices. You do not need to rewrite your entire application assets to move to the cloud. With a cloud-native microservices approach, you can capitalize on the scalability and flexibility that is inherent in any robust cloud infrastructure. \n\nDevOps is about tools and techniques needed to bring the worlds of development and operations closer together. It is about the practices and automation required to reliably and rapidly deploy new code through the build and test cycles to production environments.\n\nDevOps is an approach where companies and their development, operations, and quality assurance teams collaborate to continuously deliver software. By following this approach, which is based on lean and agile principles, enterprises can seize market opportunities and reduce the time to include customer feedback in their products. DevOps applies to aging, traditional, cloud-ready, and cloud-native applications.\n\nFailing fast and iterating quickly are DevOps requirements for competitive app delivery. They imply application architectures that decouple services from each other in a continuous development and delivery cycle, although ensuring well-performing interactions with users.\n\nIn a cloud-native environment, applications are viewed as collections of microservices with many deployable components that deploy at various speeds and independently of each other. Manually deploying anything becomes an unsustainable effort prone to error, inconsistency, and delays. Automating continuous delivery pipelines is a way to help operations from deploying an application they have little knowledge of and rescue developers from complex configurations and deployments. Efficient delivery means more time for innovation, enabling the business to disrupt the market and competitors.\n\nWhether they are accessing a website or a mobile app, people have high expectations of the apps that they regularly use. As a result, companies must continuously deliver new features \n\n## The DevOps approach\n\n8 Red Hat OpenShift and IBM Cloud Paks on IBM Power Systems: Volume 1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9914838000251284, + "doc_id": "252be6669696f0368f1a6b5d0067c7af086af511d3a2a4955c81d0f96705f107", + "edit_distance": 0.03409090909090909, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999728257088795, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "8459ch03.fm\n\nDraft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\nImprovement efficiency: Employ built-in features including templates, prebuilt connectors and an asset repository to drive speed in integration development and to reduce cost.\n\nIncreased flexibility: Use a wide range of integration styles that include APIs, message queues, and emerging capabilities including event-driven architecture and high-speed data transfer.\n\n## 3.5.2 Layers explained\n\nThis section explains the different layers in IBM Cloud Pak for Integration.\n\nAPI lifecycle: A set of new API created for Cloud integration and to meet some basic parameters like security, manageability, continues availability for changing needs of business users.\n\nApplication and data integration: Integrate all of your business data and applications more quickly and easily across any cloud, from the simplest SaaS application to the most complex systems without worrying about mismatched sources, formats or standards.\n\nEnterprise messaging: Reliable exchange over a flexible and secured messaging process to ensure on demand availability of data is the primary objective from this system.\n\nEvent streaming: Use Apache Kafka to deliver messages more easily and reliably and to react to events in real time. Provide more personalized customer experiences by responding to events before the moment passes.\n\nHigh-speed data transfer: Send large files and data sets virtually anywhere, reliably and at maximum speed. Accelerate collaboration and meet the demands of complex global teams, without compromising performance or security.\n\nSecure gateway: Create persistent, security-rich connections between on-premises and cloud environments. Quickly set up and manage gateways, control access on a per-resource basis, configure TLS encryption and mutual authentication, and monitor all of your traffic.\n\n## 3.6 IBM Cloud Pak for Multicloud Management\n\nOne of the best features of containers is their ability to run anywhere considering all the libraries and binaries needed for the runtime are packaged and shipped in the container. This makes it easier for a multicloud approach. With the correct multi architecture platform containers can spawn seamlessly on any cloud using any architecture as the underlying infrastructure.\n\nTo better use this feature, the IBM Cloud Pak for Multicloud Management, running on Red Hat Red Hat OpenShift, provides consistent visibility, governance, and automation from on-premises to the edge. Enterprises gain capabilities such as multicluster management, event management, application management and infrastructure management. Enterprises can use this IBM Cloud Pak to help increase operational efficiency that is driven by intelligent data, analysis, and predictive golden signals, and gain built-in support for their compliance management.\n\nThe IBM Cloud Pak for Multicloud Management includes IBM Multicloud Manager, IBM Cloud App Management, IBM Cloud Automation Manager, and IBM Cloud Event Management. With IBM Cloud Pak for Multicloud Management, you get more application and cluster visibility across the enterprise to any public or private cloud. You can improve automation by\n\n46\n\nRed Hat OpenShift and IBM Cloud Paks on IBM Power Systems: Volume 1", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "8459ch03.fm\n\nDraft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\nImprovement efficiency: Employ built-in features including templates, prebuilt connectors and an asset repository to drive speed in integration development and to reduce cost.\n\nIncreased flexibility: Use a wide range of integration styles that include APIs, message queues, and emerging capabilities including event-driven architecture and high-speed data transfer.\n\n## 3.5.2 Layers explained\n\n## 3.6 IBM Cloud Pak for Multicloud Management\n\nThis section explains the different layers in IBM Cloud Pak for Integration.\n\nAPI lifecycle: A set of new API created for Cloud integration and to meet some basic parameters like security, manageability, continues availability for changing needs of business users. \n\nApplication and data integration: Integrate all of your business data and applications more quickly and easily across any cloud, from the simplest SaaS application to the most complex systems without worrying about mismatched sources, formats or standards.\n\nEnterprise messaging: Reliable exchange over a flexible and secured messaging process to ensure on demand availability of data is the primary objective from this system. \n\nEvent streaming: Use Apache Kafka to deliver messages more easily and reliably and to react to events in real time. Provide more personalized customer experiences by responding to events before the moment passes.\n\nHigh-speed data transfer: Send large files and data sets virtually anywhere, reliably and at maximum speed. Accelerate collaboration and meet the demands of complex global teams, without compromising performance or security.\n\nSecure gateway: Create persistent, security-rich connections between on-premises and cloud environments. Quickly set up and manage gateways, control access on a per-resource basis, configure TLS encryption and mutual authentication, and monitor all of your traffic.\n\nOne of the best features of containers is their ability to run anywhere considering all the libraries and binaries needed for the runtime are packaged and shipped in the container. This makes it easier for a multicloud approach. With the correct multi architecture platform containers can spawn seamlessly on any cloud using any architecture as the underlying infrastructure.\n\nTo better use this feature, the IBM Cloud Pak for Multicloud Management, running on Red Hat Red Hat OpenShift, provides consistent visibility, governance, and automation from on-premises to the edge. Enterprises gain capabilities such as multicluster management, event management, application management and infrastructure management. Enterprises can use this IBM Cloud Pak to help increase operational efficiency that is driven by intelligent data, analysis, and predictive golden signals, and gain built-in support for their compliance management.\n\nThe IBM Cloud Pak for Multicloud Management includes IBM Multicloud Manager, IBM Cloud App Management, IBM Cloud Automation Manager, and IBM Cloud Event Management. With IBM Cloud Pak for Multicloud Management, you get more application and cluster visibility across the enterprise to any public or private cloud. You can improve automation by \n\n46 Red Hat OpenShift and IBM Cloud Paks on IBM Power Systems: Volume 1" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "38a595ca1aee521318651afc8e1d3f8c805deed9ed220d897ec2251b49e91d86", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999973001139352, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Draft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n8459ch02.fm\n\nclasses offered by service brokers in the service catalog, allowing users to discover and instantiate those services for use with their applications 10\n\n10\n\nOverview to the OpenShift Service Catalog: https://docs.openshift.com/container-platform/3.11/architecture/service\\_catalog/index.html\n\nChapter 2. Introduction to Containers and Orchestration with Kubernetes\n\n33", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Draft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n8459ch02.fm\n\nclasses offered by service brokers in the service catalog, allowing users to discover and instantiate those services for use with their applications 10\n\n10 Overview to the OpenShift Service Catalog: \n\nhttps://docs.openshift.com/container-platform/3.11/architecture/service\\_catalog/index.html\n\nChapter 2. Introduction to Containers and Orchestration with Kubernetes 33" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.011016190616501402, + "doc_id": "5480419ff3c90278020b66799b1fea4c71b932c867306e9c520f14acd04ad9e2", + "edit_distance": 0.9898595943837754, + "f1_score": 0.2325581395348837, + "meteor": 0.09275433424550929, + "precision": 0.13157894736842105, + "pred_md": "8459TOC.fm\n\nDraft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n| 3.2.2 Programming Language support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 |\n|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|\n| 3.2.3 Tools and runtime packages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 |\n| 3.3 IBM Cloud Pak for Automation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 |\n| 3.3.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 |\n| 3.3.2 Core capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 |\n| 3.4 IBM Cloud Pak for Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 |\n| 3.4.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 |\n| 3.4.2 Layers explained. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 |\n| 3.5 IBM Cloud Pak for Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 |\n| 3.5.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 |\n| 3.5.2 Layers explained. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 |\n| 3.6 IBM Cloud Pak for Multicloud Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 |\n| 3.6.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 |\n| 3.6.2 Layers explained. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 |\n| 3.7 IBM Cloud Pak for Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 |\n| 3.7.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 |\n| 3.7.2 Layers explained. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 |\n| Part 2. Red Hat OpenShift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 |\n| Chapter 4. Red Hat OpenShift components and architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 |\n| 4.1 OpenShift cluster components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 |\n| 4.1.2 etcd store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 |\n| 4.1.3 OpenShift-Kubernetes extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 |\n| 4.1.4 Containerized services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 |\n| 4.1.5 Runtimes and xPaaS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 |\n| 4.1.6 DevOps tools and user experience. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 |\n| 4.1.7 Master and nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 |\n| 4.1.8 OpenShift projects and applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 |\n| 4.2 OpenShift container platform networking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 4.2.1 OpenShift networking overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 |\n| 4.2.2 OpenShift internal cluster communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 |\n| 4.2.3 OpenShift external cluster communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 4.3 OpenShift persistent storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 |\n| 4.4 OpenShift registry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 |\n| 4.4.1 Integrated OpenShift Container Registry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 4.4.2 Third Party Registries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 |\n| 4.5 Managing OpenShift Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 |\n| Chapter 5. Red Hat OpenShift installation planning and considerations . . . . . . . . . . 67 5.1 IBM Power Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 |\n| 5.1.1 Mission-critical workloads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 |\n| 5.1.2 Big data workloads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 5.1.3 Enterprise AI workloads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 |\n| 5.2 Red Hat OpenShift Container Platform 3.11 on IBM Power Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 5.3 Red Hat OpenShift Container Platform 3.11 on IBM PowerVC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 |\n| 5.3.1 Reference architecture summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 5.3.2 Design considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 |\n| 5.3.3 Reference architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Chapter 6. Installing Red Hat OpenShift 3.11 on IBM PowerVC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 |\n| 6.1 Deployment process overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 6.2 Setting up the deployment environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 |\n\nvi\n\nRed Hat OpenShift and IBM Cloud Paks on IBM Power Systems: Volume 1", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "8459TOC.fm\n\nDraft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\nvi Red Hat OpenShift and IBM Cloud Paks on IBM Power Systems: Volume 1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9921516514725855, + "doc_id": "6abbebf5db818e0843bf69e4d0c88e78755a52c63ec2b759708b1046403471ce", + "edit_distance": 0.005747126436781609, + "f1_score": 0.9953051643192488, + "meteor": 0.9972696271875037, + "precision": 0.9968652037617555, + "pred_md": "Draft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n8459pref.fm\n\nsolutions. Nicolas holds a master degree in Computer Science with a major in parallel and distributed computing from Institut Polytechnique de Bordeaux (ENSEIRB-MATMECA), France.\n\nBoris Litichevsky is a Infrastructure Analyst IV Horizon BlueCross. He currently works with RHEL and lately with Red Hat on Power Systems. Boris participated in the IBM Cloud Private PoC. Previously, he worked as a Senior Systems Engineer Consultant working with Tivoli Storage Manager (TSM), Commvault Backup solution, VMware and created and configured Linux (RHEL and CentOS) and Wintel servers 2008 and 2012. Boris has been 20 years in the financial industry sixteen of which in computer operations and four years as a TSM administrator.\n\nGabriel Padilla is a Test Architect for Hardware on Power System. He is involved in early faces of most of the hardware general availability working closely with development to achieve best quality products. Gabriel previously worked on manufacturing lines at IBM Mexico as Test Lead for XIVfi Storage and Power Systems. Gabriel has a Masters degree in Information Technology and a Bachelors of Science in Electronic Engineering.\n\nSudipto Pal is Solution Architect for IBM Cognosfi Analytics in GBS. He successfully delivered several critical deliverable with IBM clients from USA and Europe. He led Cognos administration competency and monitored several candidates. He co-authored Redbooks on Cognos implementation with PowerVM platform. He has experience in IBM Power system for Virtualized environment setup and provisioning. He has hands on experience of Data lake implementation using DIP over a BigData platform. He is based in IBM India, Kolkata. He holds Master of Computer Application. Sudipto has prior experience of product development using C, C++ and Python,\n\nRogelio Rivera Gutierrez joined IBM in 2011 as part of the Storage Development group. As a Test Performance Lead, he has become an SME on tape technologies and has trained customers and IBMers on IBM Spectrum Archive. Rogelio has published several technical whitepapers for tapes products. Now, as a Product Field Engineer, he provides support on customer escalations from beginning to resolution for the IBM Security Appliance Product Line. He also participated and provided support as a Hardware Development Engineer in the release of IBM POWER9™. Rogelio holds a Master degree in Computer Science and is currently pursuing a Ph.D. in IT focusing on topics such as Cloud, Blockchain and Smart Cities. He has presented at IEEE technical conferences with topics related to Cloud and Blockchain technologies.\n\nBogdan Savu is a Cloud Infrastructure Architect at IBM Cloud Managed Application Services, who currently works for IBM Global Technologies Services in Romania. He has 13+ years of experience in designing, developing, and implementation of Cloud Computing, Virtualization, Automatization, and Infrastructure solutions. Bogdan holds a bachelor's degree in Computer Science from the Polytechnic University of Bucharest. He is an IBM Certified Advanced Technical Expert for Power Systems, TOGAF 9 Certified, VMware Certified Professional, and Red Hat Certified Specialist in Containerized Application Development. His areas of expertise include Cloud Computing, Virtualization, DevOps, and Scripting.\n\nIsmael Solis Moreno is a data scientist and performance analyst for IBM at Mexico Software Lab. He got his Masters from the National Center of Research and Technological Development in Mexico and his PhD from the University of Leeds in the UK. Ismael has participated as technical leader in different projects related to big data analytics and machine learning within the IBM and other companies. These include, the University of Leeds, The UK Datacenter Alliance and Apollo MIS researching predictive algorithms for Google, Alibaba and the British Premier League. Ismael has about 15 international publications in prestigious computing science journals. He has participated as speaker in over 25 international conferences related to data science and machine learning, and co-authored patents to\n\nPreface\n\nxiii", + "recall": 0.99375, + "true_md": "8459pref.fm\n\nDraft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\nsolutions. Nicolas holds a master degree in Computer Science with a major in parallel and distributed computing from Institut Polytechnique de Bordeaux (ENSEIRB-MATMECA), France.\n\nBoris Litichevsky is a Infrastructure Analyst IV Horizon BlueCross. He currently works with RHEL and lately with Red Hat on Power Systems. Boris participated in the IBM Cloud Private PoC. Previously, he worked as a Senior Systems Engineer Consultant working with Tivoli Storage Manager (TSM), Commvault Backup solution, VMware and created and configured Linux (RHEL and CentOS) and Wintel servers 2008 and 2012. Boris has been 20 years in the financial industry sixteen of which in computer operations and four years as a TSM administrator.\n\nGabriel Padilla is a Test Architect for Hardware on Power System. He is involved in early faces of most of the hardware general availability working closely with development to achieve best quality products. Gabriel previously worked on manufacturing lines at IBM Mexico as Test Lead for XIVfi Storage and Power Systems. Gabriel has a Masters degree in Information Technology and a Bachelors of Science in Electronic Engineering.\n\nSudipto Pal is Solution Architect for IBM Cognosfi Analytics in GBS. He successfully delivered several critical deliverable with IBM clients from USA and Europe. He led Cognos administration competency and monitored several candidates. He co-authored Redbooks on Cognos implementation with PowerVM platform. He has experience in IBM Power system for Virtualized environment setup and provisioning. He has hands on experience of Data lake implementation using DIP over a BigData platform. He is based in IBM India, Kolkata. He holds Master of Computer Application. Sudipto has prior experience of product development using C, C++ and Python, \n\nRogelio Rivera Gutierrez joined IBM in 2011 as part of the Storage Development group. As a Test Performance Lead, he has become an SME on tape technologies and has trained customers and IBMers on IBM Spectrum Archive. Rogelio has published several technical whitepapers for tapes products. Now, as a Product Field Engineer, he provides support on customer escalations from beginning to resolution for the IBM Security Appliance Product Line. He also participated and provided support as a Hardware Development Engineer in the release of IBM POWER9™. Rogelio holds a Master degree in Computer Science and is currently pursuing a Ph.D. in IT focusing on topics such as Cloud, Blockchain and Smart Cities. He has presented at IEEE technical conferences with topics related to Cloud and Blockchain technologies.\n\nBogdan Savu is a Cloud Infrastructure Architect at IBM Cloud Managed Application Services, who currently works for IBM Global Technologies Services in Romania. He has 13+ years of experience in designing, developing, and implementation of Cloud Computing, Virtualization, Automatization, and Infrastructure solutions. Bogdan holds a bachelor’s degree in Computer Science from the Polytechnic University of Bucharest. He is an IBM Certified Advanced Technical Expert for Power Systems, TOGAF 9 Certified, VMware Certified Professional, and Red Hat Certified Specialist in Containerized Application Development. His areas of expertise include Cloud Computing, Virtualization, DevOps, and Scripting.\n\nIsmael Solis Moreno is a data scientist and performance analyst for IBM at Mexico Software Lab. He got his Masters from the National Center of Research and Technological Development in Mexico and his PhD from the University of Leeds in the UK. Ismael has participated as technical leader in different projects related to big data analytics and machine learning within the IBM and other companies. These include, the University of Leeds, The UK Datacenter Alliance and Apollo MIS researching predictive algorithms for Google, Alibaba and the British Premier League. Ismael has about 15 international publications in prestigious computing science journals. He has participated as speaker in over 25 international conferences related to data science and machine learning, and co-authored patents to \n\n Preface xiii" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9374183053173982, + "doc_id": "fdd9cca68ab68716732380dfda973d9faa3d121345ee25095618a7f7bbf866bc", + "edit_distance": 0.12244897959183673, + "f1_score": 0.9803149606299212, + "meteor": 0.9276338278817502, + "precision": 0.9920318725099602, + "pred_md": "350\n\nIBM Content Manager OnDemand Guide\n\nExample 15-4 Content Manager OnDemand system log messages that relate to full text search\n\nMessage 397: Document Full Text Index Add: ApplGroupName(Adobe PDFs) Agid(5021) Full Text Index Notified(1) Count(16) Time(0.069)\n\nMessage 398: Document Full Text Index Add Failed: ApplGroupName(Adobe PDFs) Agid(5021) Full Text Index Notified(0) Count(16) Time(0.001)\n\nMessage 399: Document Full Text Index Delete: ApplGroupName(Adobe PDFs) Agid(5021) Full Text Index Notified(1) Count(16) Time(0.025)\n\nMessage 226: Application Group Query: Name(BaxterBayBank) Agid(5025) Time(0.120) Hits(2) Count() Sql(WHERE ODDAT\\_Sdate BETWEEN '1996-06-22' AND '2013-06-22' ) SqlR() FullTextSearch(lunch* newark) FullTextScore() ServerTextSearch() AnnColor() AnnText() OrderBy()\n\nMessage 439: FTS Error: IQQS0032E The query lunch~x cannot be processed because it has incorrect syntax. Causes of the problem: IQQP9014E The query [lunch~x] cannot be parsed because there is a syntax error at position 7. The fuzzy argument value [x] is not valid because its data type is not float or double. -File=arsfti.cpp, Line=394\n\nMessages 397, 398, and 399 are viewable and contain the list of documents (their metadata) that are affected by this operation. In the case of message 398 (fail), the failure reason is documented, as well.\n\nEach time the FTS Server reports an error, message 439 is issued, and it contains the error message that was returned by the FTS Server. In this case, the query that is entered by the user contained a wrong syntax for a proximity or fuzzy search.\n\n## 15.7.2 Full Text Search Server log\n\nYou can troubleshoot the FTS Server by configuring and viewing the FTS Server logs. The FTS Server generates logging information during server startup, indexing, and searching. The log files contain configuration information, warnings, errors, and debugging information that can be useful for monitoring the server and for troubleshooting specific issues. The command-line tools also generate log files. By default, log files are stored in the FTS\\_Home/log directory. You can run the configTool with the list -logFolder command to see your log directory.\n\nEvery message in the log file has an associated level that indicates the message type. The logging levels, in descending order of severity, are defined:\n\n- /SM590000 SEVERE: Errors and exceptions that occur while the server is running. Typically, SEVERE messages include detailed information with the stack trace.\n- /SM590000 WARNING: Mild problems that might require the attention of an administrator, such as a missing value for a setting with a default value, or the truncation of a document during indexing.\n- /SM590000 INFO: Informational messages that are generated during system operation.\n- /SM590000 FINE: Detailed messages for debugging purposes. This level includes parsed queries.\n- /SM590000 FINER: More details, for example, the results of document parsing.\n- /SM590000 FINEST: The most detailed level.", + "recall": 0.9688715953307393, + "true_md": "Example 15-4 Content Manager OnDemand system log messages that relate to full text search\n\nMessage 397: Document Full Text Index Add: ApplGroupName(Adobe PDFs) Agid(5021) Full Text Index Notified(1) Count(16) Time(0.069) Message 398: Document Full Text Index Add Failed: ApplGroupName(Adobe PDFs) Agid(5021) Full Text Index Notified(0) Count(16) Time(0.001) Message 399: Document Full Text Index Delete: ApplGroupName(Adobe PDFs) Agid(5021) Full Text Index Notified(1) Count(16) Time(0.025) Message 226: Application Group Query: Name(BaxterBayBank) Agid(5025) Time(0.120) Hits(2) Count() Sql(WHERE ODDAT\\_Sdate BETWEEN '1996-06-22' AND '2013-06-22' ) SqlR() FullTextSearch(lunch* newark) FullTextScore() ServerTextSearch() AnnColor() AnnText() OrderBy() Message 439: FTS Error: IQQS0032E The query lunch~x cannot be processed because it has incorrect syntax. Causes of the problem: IQQP9014E The query [lunch~x] cannot be parsed because there is a syntax error at position 7. The fuzzy argument value [x] is not valid because its data type is not float or double. -- File=arsfti.cpp, Line=394\n\nMessages 397, 398, and 399 are viewable and contain the list of documents (their metadata) that are affected by this operation. In the case of message 398 (fail), the failure reason is documented, as well.\n\nEach time the FTS Server reports an error, message 439 is issued, and it contains the error message that was returned by the FTS Server. In this case, the query that is entered by the user contained a wrong syntax for a proximity or fuzzy search.\n\nYou can troubleshoot the FTS Server by configuring and viewing the FTS Server logs. The FTS Server generates logging information during server startup, indexing, and searching. The log files contain configuration information, warnings, errors, and debugging information that can be useful for monitoring the server and for troubleshooting specific issues. The command-line tools also generate log files. By default, log files are stored in the FTS\\_Home/log directory. You can run the configTool with the list -logFolder command to see your log directory.\n\nEvery message in the log file has an associated level that indicates the message type. The logging levels, in descending order of severity, are defined:\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> SEVERE: Errors and exceptions that occur while the server is running. Typically, SEVERE messages include detailed information with the stack trace.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> WARNING: Mild problems that might require the attention of an administrator, such as a missing value for a setting with a default value, or the truncation of a document during indexing.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> INFO: Informational messages that are generated during system operation.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> FINE: Detailed messages for debugging purposes. This level includes parsed queries.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> FINER: More details, for example, the results of document parsing.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> FINEST: The most detailed level.\n\n350 IBM Content Manager OnDemand Guide\n\n## 15.7.2 Full Text Search Server log" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7839568028550764, + "doc_id": "d8dce8722dbd8e32d692389204d43b6275b67abd9ec1a525436de9bc377b4dcd", + "edit_distance": 0.2857142857142857, + "f1_score": 0.9459459459459459, + "meteor": 0.7419072941072021, + "precision": 0.9722222222222222, + "pred_md": "Chapter 4.\n\n## Database structure\n\nIn this chapter, we describe the IBM Content Manager OnDemand (Content Manager OnDemand) database structure and relationships between the tables. We list the system control tables and the important data table structures. We explain the relationship between the tables when you load data, show how a search is performed on the database tables, describe the system log, and describe special considerations for DB2 on z/OS.\n\nIn this chapter, we cover the following topics:\n\n- /SM590000 System control tables\n- /SM590000 Main data table structures\n- /SM590000 Relationship between tables when data is loaded\n- /SM590000 Search sequence\n- /SM590000 System log\n- /SM590000 Database creation and relationships on z/OS\n\n' Copyright IBM Corp. 2003, 2015. All rights reserved.\n\n77\n\n4", + "recall": 0.9210526315789473, + "true_md": "## 4\n\n## Database structure\n\nIn this chapter, we describe the IBM Content Manager OnDemand (Content Manager OnDemand) database structure and relationships between the tables. We list the system control tables and the important data table structures. We explain the relationship between the tables when you load data, show how a search is performed on the database tables, describe the system log, and describe special considerations for DB2 on z/OS.\n\nIn this chapter, we cover the following topics:\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> System control tables\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Main data table structures\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Relationship between tables when data is loaded\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Search sequence\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> System log\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Database creation and relationships on z/OS\n\n' Copyright IBM Corp. 2003, 2015. All rights reserved.\n\n77" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9442071473302099, + "doc_id": "50f5df530818f902d62460f0e303cf9e16059589e616e0891d7312d7303db00a", + "edit_distance": 0.2575187969924812, + "f1_score": 0.9597315436241609, + "meteor": 0.8379288125124453, + "precision": 0.9794520547945206, + "pred_md": "- /SM590000 Step 2:\n- a. When an MM/GM relationship is started in the ConsistentStopped state, the MM/GM relationship enters the ConsistentSynchronized state. Therefore, no updates (write I/O) were performed on the master volume while in the ConsistentStopped state. Otherwise, the -force option must be specified, and the MM/GM relationship then enters the InconsistentCopying state while the background copy is started.\n- b. When an MM/GM relationship is started in the InconsistentStopped state, the MM/GM relationship enters the InconsistentCopying state while the background copy is started.\n- /SM590000 Step 3:\n- When the background copy completes, the MM/GM relationship changes from the InconsistentCopying state to the ConsistentSynchronized state.\n- /SM590000 Step 4:\n- a. When a MM/GM relationship is stopped in the ConsistentSynchronized state, the MM/GM relationship enters the Idling state when you specify the -access option, which enables write I/O on the auxiliary volume.\n- b. When an MM/GM relationship is stopped in the ConsistentSynchronized state without an -access parameter, the auxiliary volumes remain read-only and the state of the relationship changes to ConsistentStopped .\n- c. To enable write I/O on the auxiliary volume, when the MM/GM relationship is in the ConsistentStopped state, issue the svctask stoprcrelationship command, which specifies the -access option, and the MM/GM relationship enters the Idling state.\n- /SM590000 Step 5:\n- a. When an MM/GM relationship is started from the Idling state, you must specify the -primary argument to set the copy direction. If no write I/O was performed (to the master or auxiliary volume) while in the Idling state, the MM/GM relationship enters the ConsistentSynchronized state.\n- b. If write I/O was performed to the master or auxiliary volume, the -force option must be specified and the MM/GM relationship then enters the InconsistentCopying state while the background copy is started. The background process copies only the data that changed on the primary volume while the relationship was stopped.\n\n## Stop on Error\n\nWhen a MM/GM relationship is stopped (intentionally, or because of an error), the state changes. For example, the MM/GM relationships in the ConsistentSynchronized state enter the ConsistentStopped state, and the MM/GM relationships in the InconsistentCopying state enter the InconsistentStopped state.\n\nIf the connection is broken between the two systems that are in a partnership, all (intercluster) MM/GM relationships enter a Disconnected state. For more information, see 'Connected versus disconnected' on page 536.\n\nCommon states: Stand-alone relationships and Consistency Groups share a common configuration and state model. All MM/GM relationships in a Consistency Group have the same state as the Consistency Group.\n\n## State overview\n\nThe following sections provide an overview of the various MM/GM states.\n\nChapter 11. Advanced Copy Services\n\n535", + "recall": 0.9407894736842105, + "true_md": "- GLYPH<SM590000> Step 2:\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Step 3:\n\n- b. When an MM/GM relationship is started in the InconsistentStopped state, the MM/GM relationship enters the InconsistentCopying state while the background copy is started. \n\n- a. When an MM/GM relationship is started in the ConsistentStopped state, the MM/GM relationship enters the ConsistentSynchronized state. Therefore, no updates (write I/O) were performed on the master volume while in the ConsistentStopped state. Otherwise, the -force option must be specified, and the MM/GM relationship then enters the InconsistentCopying state while the background copy is started.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Step 4:\n\n- a. When a MM/GM relationship is stopped in the ConsistentSynchronized state, the MM/GM relationship enters the Idling state when you specify the -access option, which enables write I/O on the auxiliary volume.\n\n- b. When an MM/GM relationship is stopped in the ConsistentSynchronized state without an -access parameter, the auxiliary volumes remain read-only and the state of the relationship changes to ConsistentStopped .\n\n- c. To enable write I/O on the auxiliary volume, when the MM/GM relationship is in the ConsistentStopped state, issue the svctask stoprcrelationship command, which specifies the -access option, and the MM/GM relationship enters the Idling state.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Step 5:\n\n- a. When an MM/GM relationship is started from the Idling state, you must specify the -primary argument to set the copy direction. If no write I/O was performed (to the master or auxiliary volume) while in the Idling state, the MM/GM relationship enters the ConsistentSynchronized state.\n\n- b. If write I/O was performed to the master or auxiliary volume, the -force option must be specified and the MM/GM relationship then enters the InconsistentCopying state while the background copy is started. The background process copies only the data that changed on the primary volume while the relationship was stopped.\n\n## Stop on Error\n\nWhen a MM/GM relationship is stopped (intentionally, or because of an error), the state changes. For example, the MM/GM relationships in the ConsistentSynchronized state enter the ConsistentStopped state, and the MM/GM relationships in the InconsistentCopying state enter the InconsistentStopped state.\n\nIf the connection is broken between the two systems that are in a partnership, all (intercluster) MM/GM relationships enter a Disconnected state. For more information, see “Connected versus disconnected” on page 536.\n\nCommon states: Stand-alone relationships and Consistency Groups share a common configuration and state model. All MM/GM relationships in a Consistency Group have the same state as the Consistency Group.\n\nThe following sections provide an overview of the various MM/GM states.\n\n## State overview\n\nChapter 11. Advanced Copy Services 535\n\nWhen the background copy completes, the MM/GM relationship changes from the InconsistentCopying state to the ConsistentSynchronized state." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8876027248484174, + "doc_id": "7437ded6ee1d935d197062c53bad003146bb1542a9150f5c720f02ed32cba43d", + "edit_distance": 0.8461538461538461, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9992319071461083, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "8459p03.fm\n\nDraft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n154\n\nRed Hat OpenShift and IBM Cloud Paks on IBM Power Systems: Volume 1", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "154 Red Hat OpenShift and IBM Cloud Paks on IBM Power Systems: Volume 1\n\nDraft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n8459p03.fm" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7623168491128143, + "doc_id": "e2a595d94da22a79dccdacf04fceb9f4ce9e8bcd86c419b5cf8bc53fc9663cab", + "edit_distance": 0.18518518518518517, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9777318640955006, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Figure 7-14 Mirrored Volume creation\n\nFigure 7-14 Mirrored Volume creation\n\n- 3. Click Create (or Create and Map ).\n\nChapter 7. Volumes\n\n263", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Figure 7-14 Mirrored Volume creation\n\n- 3. Click Create (or Create and Map ).\n\nChapter 7. Volumes 263" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9603249309462493, + "doc_id": "f0e08bff57e2688b8a76c0812bd1aec2b1d8cd1031e8a994c4d693599516ae70", + "edit_distance": 0.1761006289308176, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9941965515156808, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Draft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n8459ch03.fm\n\n## IBM Multicloud Manager Application resources\n\nAfter you configure an IBM Multicloud Manager hub cluster and a managed cluster, you can view and deploy applications with application resources. Your Application is used to only view your resource, although other application resource examples are for deployment. A multi-cluster application uses a Kubernetes specification, but with additional automation of the deployment and life-cycle management of resources to individual clusters.\n\n## IBM Multicloud Manager Governance and risk\n\nAfter you configure an IBM Multicloud Manager hub cluster and a managed cluster, you can define IBM Multicloud Manager security risk and create policies with templates from the Governance and risk page. For more information see, IBM Multicloud Manager Governance and risk.\n\nFor more information about IBM Multicloud Manager, refer to the following website:\n\nhttps://ibm.co/37lFhyv\n\n## 3.7 IBM Cloud Pak for Security\n\nEvery enterprise in its journey to the cloud has created new challenges for the security team. What becomes clear is that cyber security does not need news tools, it needs new rules. Security teams are overwhelmed with hundreds of thousands of events originating from various sources, and what they see today is that the security mechanisms are fragmented and spread across several tools.\n\n## 3.7.1 Features\n\nThe main goal of this IBM Cloud Pak is to help organizations detect, investigate, and respond to cyber security threats faster. Also, it helps to speed up your move to the cloud by facilitating integrate their existing security tools to generate more in-depth insights into threats across hybrid, multicloud environments, using an infrastructure-independent standard operating environment that runs anywhere.\n\n## Key capabilities and benefits\n\nThe key capabilities and benefits of IBM Cloud Pak for Security are:\n\n## Run anywhere - Connect security openly\n\nIBM Cloud Pak for Security is built on an open cloud-native framework integrated with Red Hat OpenShift. That means the solution can be deployed and run on any hybrid multicloud environment, on-premises, private cloud, or public cloud.\n\nThe unified interface provided by IBM Cloud Pak for Security assists the security teams to integrate data with analytic tools, and to combine that data across their cloud environments to spot advanced threats.\n\n## Gain security insights without moving data\n\nIBM Cloud Pak for Security enables enterprises to connect and coordinate with their existing security tools and data sources. Transferring data to analyze creates additional complexity. Hence, you can combine all data sources to uncover hidden threats and make better risk-based decisions while leaving the data where it resides.\n\nChapter 3. IBM Cloud Paks - Middleware anywhere\n\n49", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Draft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n8459ch03.fm\n\n## IBM Multicloud Manager Application resources\n\n## IBM Multicloud Manager Governance and risk\n\nAfter you configure an IBM Multicloud Manager hub cluster and a managed cluster, you can view and deploy applications with application resources. Your Application is used to only view your resource, although other application resource examples are for deployment. A multi-cluster application uses a Kubernetes specification, but with additional automation of the deployment and life-cycle management of resources to individual clusters.\n\nAfter you configure an IBM Multicloud Manager hub cluster and a managed cluster, you can define IBM Multicloud Manager security risk and create policies with templates from the Governance and risk page. For more information see, IBM Multicloud Manager Governance and risk.\n\nFor more information about IBM Multicloud Manager, refer to the following website:\n\nhttps://ibm.co/37lFhyv\n\nEvery enterprise in its journey to the cloud has created new challenges for the security team. What becomes clear is that cyber security does not need news tools, it needs new rules. Security teams are overwhelmed with hundreds of thousands of events originating from various sources, and what they see today is that the security mechanisms are fragmented and spread across several tools.\n\nThe main goal of this IBM Cloud Pak is to help organizations detect, investigate, and respond to cyber security threats faster. Also, it helps to speed up your move to the cloud by facilitating integrate their existing security tools to generate more in-depth insights into threats across hybrid, multicloud environments, using an infrastructure-independent standard operating environment that runs anywhere.\n\nThe key capabilities and benefits of IBM Cloud Pak for Security are:\n\nIBM Cloud Pak for Security is built on an open cloud-native framework integrated with Red Hat OpenShift. That means the solution can be deployed and run on any hybrid multicloud environment, on-premises, private cloud, or public cloud.\n\nThe unified interface provided by IBM Cloud Pak for Security assists the security teams to integrate data with analytic tools, and to combine that data across their cloud environments to spot advanced threats.\n\nIBM Cloud Pak for Security enables enterprises to connect and coordinate with their existing security tools and data sources. Transferring data to analyze creates additional complexity. Hence, you can combine all data sources to uncover hidden threats and make better risk-based decisions while leaving the data where it resides.\n\n## 3.7 IBM Cloud Pak for Security\n\n## 3.7.1 Features\n\n## Key capabilities and benefits\n\n## Run anywhere - Connect security openly\n\n## Gain security insights without moving data\n\nChapter 3. IBM Cloud Paks - Middleware anywhere 49" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9097641408519238, + "doc_id": "b248b19421e4d30d591ae26aadc5850573907db83f2c48d5dc8942d11ef6689b", + "edit_distance": 0.12334801762114538, + "f1_score": 0.9552238805970149, + "meteor": 0.8880255883658968, + "precision": 0.9770992366412213, + "pred_md": "Draft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n8459ch05.fm\n\nTerraform components are shown in Figure 5-10.\n\nFigure 5-10 Terraform components\n\nFigure 5-10 Terraform components\n\n- /SM590000 Configuration files(.tf). Terraform uses its own configuration language, designed to allow concise descriptions of infrastructure. The Terraform language is declarative, describing an intended goal rather than the steps to reach that goal.\n- /SM590000 Terraform binary (executable) file, it is written and compiled in GO language. To install Terraform, find the appropriate package for your system and download it from https://www.terraform.io/downloads.html\n\nNote: Terraform can run on any platform (including x86) to provision resources. If you have a ppc64le platform, you must compile Terraform and all needed providers (plugins). Refer to 'Setting up the deployment environment' on page 96.\n\n- /SM590000 Terraform state file (.tfstate), a JSON file with running configuration.\n\n## OpenShift-Ansible\n\nAnsible is a simple IT automation engine that automates cloud provisioning, configuration management, application deployment, intra-service orchestration, and many other IT needs.\n\nChapter 5. Red Hat OpenShift installation planning and considerations\n\n87", + "recall": 0.9343065693430657, + "true_md": "Draft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n8459ch05.fm\n\nTerraform components are shown in Figure 5-10.\n\nFigure 5-10 Terraform components\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Configuration files(.tf). Terraform uses its own configuration language, designed to allow concise descriptions of infrastructure. The Terraform language is declarative, describing an intended goal rather than the steps to reach that goal.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Terraform binary (executable) file, it is written and compiled in GO language. To install Terraform, find the appropriate package for your system and download it from https://www.terraform.io/downloads.html\n\nNote: Terraform can run on any platform (including x86) to provision resources. If you have a ppc64le platform, you must compile Terraform and all needed providers (plugins). Refer to “Setting up the deployment environment” on page 96.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Terraform state file (.tfstate), a JSON file with running configuration.\n\n## OpenShift-Ansible\n\nAnsible is a simple IT automation engine that automates cloud provisioning, configuration management, application deployment, intra-service orchestration, and many other IT needs.\n\nChapter 5. Red Hat OpenShift installation planning and considerations 87" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9793301220416203, + "doc_id": "760c8e338ed558539e7e8f5bfe0b1d31372378201e93342624bb9bf1e16efc58", + "edit_distance": 0.401840490797546, + "f1_score": 0.9851380042462846, + "meteor": 0.7540321942752943, + "precision": 0.9957081545064378, + "pred_md": "The following types of thin-provisioned volumes are available:\n\n- /SM590000 Autoexpand volumes allocate real capacity from a storage pool on demand, which minimizes required user intervention. However, a malfunctioning application can cause a volume to expand until its real capacity is equal to the virtual capacity, which potentially can starve other thin provisioned volumes in the pool.\n- /SM590000 Non-autoexpand volumes have a fixed amount of assigned real capacity. In this case, the user must monitor the volume and assign more capacity when required. Although it prevents starving other thin provisioned volumes, it introduces a risk of an unplanned outage. A thin-provisioned volume goes offline if host tries to write more data than what can fit into the allocated real capacity.\n\nThe main risk that is associated with using thin-provisioned volumes is running out of real capacity in the storage volumes, pool, or both, and the resulting unplanned outage. Therefore, strict monitoring of the used capacity on all non-autoexpand volumes and monitoring of the free space in the storage pool is required.\n\nWhen you configure a thin-provisioned volume, you can define a warning level attribute to generate a warning event when the used real capacity exceeds a specified amount or percentage of the total virtual capacity. You can also use the warning event to trigger other actions, such as taking low-priority applications offline or migrating data into other storage pools.\n\nIf a thin-provisioned volume does not have enough real capacity for a write operation, the volume is taken offline and an error is logged (error code 1865, event ID 060001). Access to the thin-provisioned volume is restored by increasing the real capacity of the volume, which might require increasing the size of the storage pool from which it is allocated. Until this time, the data is held in the Storwize V7000 cache. Although in principle this situation is not a data integrity or data loss issue, you must not rely on the Storwize V7000 cache as a backup storage mechanism.\n\nSpace is not allocated on a thin-provisioned volume if an incoming host write operation contains all zeros.\n\nImportant: Set and monitor a warning level on the used capacity so that you have adequate time to respond and provision more physical capacity.\n\nWarnings must not be ignored by an administrator.\n\nConsider the use of the autoexpand feature of the thin-provisioned volumes to reduce human intervention required to maintain access to thin-provisioned volumes.\n\nWhen you create a thin-provisioned volume, you can choose the grain size for allocating space in 32 kibibytes (KiB), 64 KiB, 128 KiB, or 256 KiB chunks. The grain size that you select affects the maximum virtual capacity for the thin-provisioned volume. The default grain size is 256 KiB, which is the preferred option. If you select 32 KiB for the grain size, the volume size cannot exceed 260,000 gibibytes (GiB). The grain size cannot be changed after the thin-provisioned volume is created.\n\nGenerally, smaller grain sizes save space, but require more metadata access, which can adversely affect performance. If you are not going to use the thin-provisioned volume as a FlashCopy source or target volume, use 256 KiB to maximize performance. If you are going to use the thin-provisioned volume as a FlashCopy source or target volume, specify the same grain size for the volume and for the FlashCopy function. In this situation, ideally grain size is equal to the typical I/O size from the host.\n\nChapter 3. Planning\n\n69", + "recall": 0.9747899159663865, + "true_md": "The following types of thin-provisioned volumes are available: \n\nThe main risk that is associated with using thin-provisioned volumes is running out of real capacity in the storage volumes, pool, or both, and the resulting unplanned outage. Therefore, strict monitoring of the used capacity on all non-autoexpand volumes and monitoring of the free space in the storage pool is required.\n\nWhen you configure a thin-provisioned volume, you can define a warning level attribute to generate a warning event when the used real capacity exceeds a specified amount or percentage of the total virtual capacity. You can also use the warning event to trigger other actions, such as taking low-priority applications offline or migrating data into other storage pools.\n\nIf a thin-provisioned volume does not have enough real capacity for a write operation, the volume is taken offline and an error is logged (error code 1865, event ID 060001). Access to the thin-provisioned volume is restored by increasing the real capacity of the volume, which might require increasing the size of the storage pool from which it is allocated. Until this time, the data is held in the Storwize V7000 cache. Although in principle this situation is not a data integrity or data loss issue, you must not rely on the Storwize V7000 cache as a backup storage mechanism.\n\nSpace is not allocated on a thin-provisioned volume if an incoming host write operation contains all zeros.\n\nImportant: Set and monitor a warning level on the used capacity so that you have adequate time to respond and provision more physical capacity. \n\nWarnings must not be ignored by an administrator.\n\nConsider the use of the autoexpand feature of the thin-provisioned volumes to reduce human intervention required to maintain access to thin-provisioned volumes.\n\nWhen you create a thin-provisioned volume, you can choose the grain size for allocating space in 32 kibibytes (KiB), 64 KiB, 128 KiB, or 256 KiB chunks. The grain size that you select affects the maximum virtual capacity for the thin-provisioned volume. The default grain size is 256 KiB, which is the preferred option. If you select 32 KiB for the grain size, the volume size cannot exceed 260,000 gibibytes (GiB). The grain size cannot be changed after the thin-provisioned volume is created. \n\nGenerally, smaller grain sizes save space, but require more metadata access, which can adversely affect performance. If you are not going to use the thin-provisioned volume as a FlashCopy source or target volume, use 256 KiB to maximize performance. If you are going to use the thin-provisioned volume as a FlashCopy source or target volume, specify the same grain size for the volume and for the FlashCopy function. In this situation, ideally grain size is equal to the typical I/O size from the host.\n\nChapter 3. Planning 69\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Non-autoexpand volumes have a fixed amount of assigned real capacity. In this case, the user must monitor the volume and assign more capacity when required. Although it prevents starving other thin provisioned volumes, it introduces a risk of an unplanned outage. A thin-provisioned volume goes offline if host tries to write more data than what can fit into the allocated real capacity.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Autoexpand volumes allocate real capacity from a storage pool on demand, which minimizes required user intervention. However, a malfunctioning application can cause a volume to expand until its real capacity is equal to the virtual capacity, which potentially can starve other thin provisioned volumes in the pool." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9652046168259125, + "doc_id": "2b7bfa9250bf6ecd6cb3dc591774aba3a002eb236d2a3c9507f1bd15007aac57", + "edit_distance": 0.12694300518134716, + "f1_score": 0.9864864864864864, + "meteor": 0.9645619284125044, + "precision": 0.9864864864864865, + "pred_md": "206\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\nExample 6-10 chmdiskgrp to rename child pool\n\nIBM\\_Storwize:ITSOV7K:superuser>chmdiskgrp -name Pool0\\_child\\_new -size 45056 Pool0\\_child0 IBM\\_Storwize:ITSOV7K:superuser>\n\nDeleting a child pool is a task similar to deleting a parent pool. As with a parent pool, the Delete action is disabled if the child pool contains volumes, as shown in Figure 6-22.\n\nFigure 6-22 Deleting a child pool\n\nFigure 6-22 Deleting a child pool\n\nAfter you delete a child pool, the extents that it occupied return to the parent pool as free capacity.\n\nTo delete a child pool with the CLI, use rmmdiskgrp .\n\n## Migrating volumes to and from child pools\n\nTo move a volume to another pool, you can use migration or volume mirroring in the same way you use them for parent pools. For more information about volume migration and volume mirroring, see Chapter 7, 'Volumes' on page 241.\n\nThe system supports migration of volumes between child pools within the same parent pool or migration of a volume between a child pool and its parent pool. Migrations between a source and target child pool with different parent pools are not supported. However, you can migrate the volume from the source child pool to its parent pool. The volume can then be migrated from the parent pool to the parent pool of the target child pool. Finally, the volume can be migrated from the target parent pool to the target child pool.\n\nDuring a volume migration within a parent pool (between a child and its parent or between children with same parent), there is no data movement but only extent reassignments.\n\nVolume migration between a child storage pool and its parent storage pool can be performed in the Volumes menu, on the Volumes by Pool page. Right-click a volume and choose to migrate it into a suitable pool.\n\nIn the example on Figure 6-23 on page 207, volume child\\_volume has been created in child pool Pool0\\_child0. Notice that child pools appear exactly like parent pools in the Volumes by Pool pane.", + "recall": 0.9864864864864865, + "true_md": "Example 6-10 chmdiskgrp to rename child pool\n\nIBM\\_Storwize:ITSOV7K:superuser>chmdiskgrp -name Pool0\\_child\\_new -size 45056 Pool0\\_child0 IBM\\_Storwize:ITSOV7K:superuser>\n\nDeleting a child pool is a task similar to deleting a parent pool. As with a parent pool, the Delete action is disabled if the child pool contains volumes, as shown in Figure 6-22. \n\nFigure 6-22 Deleting a child pool\n\nAfter you delete a child pool, the extents that it occupied return to the parent pool as free capacity.\n\nTo delete a child pool with the CLI, use rmmdiskgrp .\n\nTo move a volume to another pool, you can use migration or volume mirroring in the same way you use them for parent pools. For more information about volume migration and volume mirroring, see Chapter 7, “Volumes” on page 241.\n\nThe system supports migration of volumes between child pools within the same parent pool or migration of a volume between a child pool and its parent pool. Migrations between a source and target child pool with different parent pools are not supported. However, you can migrate the volume from the source child pool to its parent pool. The volume can then be migrated from the parent pool to the parent pool of the target child pool. Finally, the volume can be migrated from the target parent pool to the target child pool. \n\nDuring a volume migration within a parent pool (between a child and its parent or between children with same parent), there is no data movement but only extent reassignments.\n\nVolume migration between a child storage pool and its parent storage pool can be performed in the Volumes menu, on the Volumes by Pool page. Right-click a volume and choose to migrate it into a suitable pool. \n\nIn the example on Figure 6-23 on page 207, volume child\\_volume has been created in child pool Pool0\\_child0. Notice that child pools appear exactly like parent pools in the Volumes by Pool pane.\n\n## Migrating volumes to and from child pools\n\n206 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8792061704452816, + "doc_id": "2a3208826d7121fc8a5191dea0937cf0e1bfc5b3fbaf3e76b976ace05bb50447", + "edit_distance": 0.21996615905245348, + "f1_score": 0.9846153846153847, + "meteor": 0.8600261705792265, + "precision": 0.9955555555555555, + "pred_md": "8459ch05.fm\n\nDraft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n80\n\nRed Hat OpenShift and IBM Cloud Paks on IBM Power Systems: Volume 1\n\n- /SM590000 Soft-affinity : All virtual machines from this rule will be hosted on the same host if possible, but if not possible they still will be scheduled instead of failure and set the status of the rule to violated .\n- /SM590000 Soft-anti-affinity : All virtual machines from this rule will be hosted on different host, if possible, but if not possible they still will be scheduled instead of failure and set the status of the rule to violated .\n\nIf the rule status is violated , review the placement of the virtual machines. For any virtual machines that are on an incorrect host, you can migrate it to the correct host using LPM.\n\n## PowerVC image\n\nA custom image must be created in PowerVC before starting the deployment. OpenShift has specific requirements:\n\n- /SM590000 RHEL 7.6 for POWER8 and RHEL-ALT 7.6 for POWER9 Minimum installation.\n- /SM590000 SELinux must be set to enforcing.\n- /SM590000 NetworkManager must be enabled and running.\n- /SM590000 Firewall must be enabled and running.\n- /SM590000 Set host name from DNS (set\\_hostname\\_from\\_dns) in cloud-init.\n\nNote: For more details about image creation in PowerVC, see the following link:\n\nhttps://ibm.co/34wFSvt\n\n## Project and user\n\nA project, sometimes referred to as a tenant, is a unit of ownership. Most resources, such as virtual machines, volumes, and images, belong to a specific project. Only users with a role assignment for a given project can work with the resources belonging to that project. The ibm-default project is created during installation, but PowerVC supports the creation of additional projects for resource segregation.\n\nWhen possible, it is recommended to create a new user and project for the OpenShift environment.\n\n## High availability\n\nHigh availability is a requirement for any production deployment. A crucial consideration for high availability is the removal of single points of failure (SPOFs). This reference architecture is highly available at all layers (Hardware, PowerVM, PowerVC and OpenShift).\n\n## Hardware high availability\n\nYou must take care to eliminate single points of failure at the hardware layer. Hardware fault tolerance recommendations implemented in this architecture include:\n\n- /SM590000 Redundant server power supplies connected to different power sources.\n- /SM590000 Redundant network adapters connected to redundant network switches.\n- /SM590000 Redundant Fibre Channel adapters connected to redundant SAN fabrics.\n\n## PowerVM high availability\n\nThe specifics of the VIOS configuration when using LPAR with a production OpenShift Container Platform are:\n\n- /SM590000 If I/O virtualization is used, a dual-VIOS setup is mandatory. You can have more than two VIOSes in the system separating different environments, such as production and test or multiple customers", + "recall": 0.9739130434782609, + "true_md": "8459ch05.fm\n\nDraft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Soft-affinity : All virtual machines from this rule will be hosted on the same host if possible, but if not possible they still will be scheduled instead of failure and set the status of the rule to violated .\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Soft-anti-affinity : All virtual machines from this rule will be hosted on different host, if possible, but if not possible they still will be scheduled instead of failure and set the status of the rule to violated .\n\nIf the rule status is violated , review the placement of the virtual machines. For any virtual machines that are on an incorrect host, you can migrate it to the correct host using LPM.\n\n## PowerVC image\n\nA custom image must be created in PowerVC before starting the deployment. OpenShift has specific requirements:\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> RHEL 7.6 for POWER8 and RHEL-ALT 7.6 for POWER9 Minimum installation.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> SELinux must be set to enforcing.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> NetworkManager must be enabled and running.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Firewall must be enabled and running.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Set host name from DNS (set\\_hostname\\_from\\_dns) in cloud-init.\n\nNote: For more details about image creation in PowerVC, see the following link:\n\nhttps://ibm.co/34wFSvt\n\n## Project and user\n\n## High availability\n\n## Hardware high availability\n\nA project, sometimes referred to as a tenant, is a unit of ownership. Most resources, such as virtual machines, volumes, and images, belong to a specific project. Only users with a role assignment for a given project can work with the resources belonging to that project. The ibm-default project is created during installation, but PowerVC supports the creation of additional projects for resource segregation.\n\nWhen possible, it is recommended to create a new user and project for the OpenShift environment.\n\nHigh availability is a requirement for any production deployment. A crucial consideration for high availability is the removal of single points of failure (SPOFs). This reference architecture is highly available at all layers (Hardware, PowerVM, PowerVC and OpenShift).\n\nYou must take care to eliminate single points of failure at the hardware layer. Hardware fault tolerance recommendations implemented in this architecture include:\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Redundant server power supplies connected to different power sources.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Redundant network adapters connected to redundant network switches.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Redundant Fibre Channel adapters connected to redundant SAN fabrics.\n\n## PowerVM high availability\n\nThe specifics of the VIOS configuration when using LPAR with a production OpenShift Container Platform are:\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> If I/O virtualization is used, a dual-VIOS setup is mandatory. You can have more than two VIOSes in the system separating different environments, such as production and test or multiple customers\n\n80 Red Hat OpenShift and IBM Cloud Paks on IBM Power Systems: Volume 1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9249787042512815, + "doc_id": "ab4eb9e6b71229e3b7de4d76ffe161c18dcf548d1717a4ff6e33b03e13ab3c11", + "edit_distance": 0.13261648745519714, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9794518978520007, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## 11.9.9 Starting a remote copy Consistency Group\n\nWhen a remote copy consistency group is created, the remote copy process can be started, for all the relationships that are part of the consistency groups.\n\nTo start a consistency group, open the Copy Services → Remote Copy panel, right-click the consistency group to be started, and select Start , as shown in Figure 11-140.\n\nFigure 11-140 Starting a remote copy Consistency Group\n\nFigure 11-140 Starting a remote copy Consistency Group\n\n## 11.9.10 Switching a relationship copy direction\n\nWhen a remote copy relationship is in the Consistent synchronized state, the copy direction for the relationship can be changed. Only relationships that are not a member of a Consistency Group, or the only relationship in a Consistency Group, can be switched. In any other case, consider switching the Consistency Group instead.\n\nImportant: When the copy direction is switched, it is crucial that no outstanding I/O exists to the volume that changes from primary to secondary because all of the I/O is inhibited to that volume when it becomes the secondary. Therefore, careful planning is required before you switch the copy direction for a relationship.\n\nTo switch the direction of a remote copy relationship, complete the following steps:\n\n- 1. Open the Copy Services →→ Remote Copy panel.\n- 2. Right-click the relationship to be switched and select Switch , as shown in Figure 11-141.\n\nFigure 11-141 Switching remote copy relationship direction\n\nFigure 11-141 Switching remote copy relationship direction\n\nChapter 11. Advanced Copy Services\n\n591", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## 11.9.9 Starting a remote copy Consistency Group\n\n## 11.9.10 Switching a relationship copy direction\n\nWhen a remote copy consistency group is created, the remote copy process can be started, for all the relationships that are part of the consistency groups. \n\nTo start a consistency group, open the Copy Services → Remote Copy panel, right-click the consistency group to be started, and select Start , as shown in Figure 11-140.\n\nWhen a remote copy relationship is in the Consistent synchronized state, the copy direction for the relationship can be changed. Only relationships that are not a member of a Consistency Group, or the only relationship in a Consistency Group, can be switched. In any other case, consider switching the Consistency Group instead.\n\nImportant: When the copy direction is switched, it is crucial that no outstanding I/O exists to the volume that changes from primary to secondary because all of the I/O is inhibited to that volume when it becomes the secondary. Therefore, careful planning is required before you switch the copy direction for a relationship.\n\nTo switch the direction of a remote copy relationship, complete the following steps:\n\n- 1. Open the Copy Services →→ Remote Copy panel. \n\n- 2. Right-click the relationship to be switched and select Switch , as shown in Figure 11-141.\n\nFigure 11-141 Switching remote copy relationship direction\n\nFigure 11-140 Starting a remote copy Consistency Group\n\nChapter 11. Advanced Copy Services 591" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8732108502988488, + "doc_id": "82a0a729ef278728ef50f99a67ae5fdbffd0d317fb691e0d8510426f416b3487", + "edit_distance": 0.23123123123123124, + "f1_score": 0.9260700389105057, + "meteor": 0.9021347367570008, + "precision": 0.9444444444444444, + "pred_md": "As shown in Figure 11-98 on page 556, there are two systems:\n\n- -System A\n- -System B\n\nA single remote copy port group 1 is created on Node A1 on System A and on Node B2 on System B because there is only a single inter-site link to facilitate the IP partnership traffic. An administrator might choose to configure the remote copy port group on Node B1 on System B rather than Node B2.\n\nAt any time, only the IP addresses that are configured in remote copy port group 1 on the nodes in System A and System B participate in establishing data paths between the two systems after the IP partnerships are created. In this configuration, no failover ports are configured on the partner node in the same I/O group.\n\nThis configuration has the following characteristics:\n\n- -Only one node in each system has a remote copy port group that is configured, and no failover ports are configured.\n- -If the Node A1 in System A or the Node B2 in System B were to encounter a failure, the IP partnership stops and enters the Not\\_Present state until the failed nodes recover.\n- -After the nodes recover, the IP ports fail back, the IP partnership recovers, and the partnership state goes to the Fully\\_Configured state.\n- -If the inter-site system link fails, the IP partnerships change to the Not\\_Present state.\n- -This configuration is not recommended because it is not resilient to node failures.\n- /SM590000 Two 2-node systems in IP partnership over a single inter-site link (with failover ports configured), as shown in Figure 11-99 (configuration 2).\n\nFigure 11-99 One remote copy group on each system and nodes with failover ports configured\n\nFigure 11-99 One remote copy group on each system and nodes with failover ports configured\n\nChapter 11. Advanced Copy Services\n\n557", + "recall": 0.9083969465648855, + "true_md": "As shown in Figure 11-98 on page 556, there are two systems:\n\nA single remote copy port group 1 is created on Node A1 on System A and on Node B2 on System B because there is only a single inter-site link to facilitate the IP partnership traffic. An administrator might choose to configure the remote copy port group on Node B1 on System B rather than Node B2. \n\nAt any time, only the IP addresses that are configured in remote copy port group 1 on the nodes in System A and System B participate in establishing data paths between the two systems after the IP partnerships are created. In this configuration, no failover ports are configured on the partner node in the same I/O group. \n\nThis configuration has the following characteristics:\n\n- – System A\n\n- – System B\n\n- – Only one node in each system has a remote copy port group that is configured, and no failover ports are configured. \n\n- – If the Node A1 in System A or the Node B2 in System B were to encounter a failure, the IP partnership stops and enters the Not\\_Present state until the failed nodes recover. \n\n- – After the nodes recover, the IP ports fail back, the IP partnership recovers, and the partnership state goes to the Fully\\_Configured state. \n\n- – This configuration is not re commended because it is not resilient to node failures. \n\n- – If the inter-site system link fails, the IP partnerships change to the Not\\_Present state. \n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Two 2-node systems in IP partnership over a single inter-site link (with failover ports configured), as shown in Figure 11-99 (configuration 2).\n\nChapter 11. Advanced Copy Services 557\n\nFigure 11-99 One remote copy group on each system and nodes with failover ports configured" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8300589606274483, + "doc_id": "910a17778638ede3e10ecf2fe8a72cbba120868c963e74a1334d610a090589c2", + "edit_distance": 0.8115577889447236, + "f1_score": 0.9047619047619049, + "meteor": 0.7324336620615476, + "precision": 0.9047619047619048, + "pred_md": "Note: The volume RHEL\\_VOLUME is mapped to both of the hosts by using the same SCSI ID. Typically, that is the requirement for most host-based clustering software, such as Microsoft Clustering Service (MSCS), IBM PowerHA, and VMware ESX clustering.\n\n- 2. The volume RHEL\\_VOLUME is mapped to two hosts ( RHEL\\_HOST and iSCSI\\_RHEL\\_HOST ), and can be seen by issuing the lsvdiskhostmap command, as shown in Example 8-24.\n\nExample 8-24 Ensuring the same volume is mapped to multiple hosts\n\n```\nIBM_Storwize:ITSO-V7000:superuser> lsvdiskhostmap Linux1 id name SCSI_id host_id host_name vdisk_UID IO_group_id IO_group_name mapping_type host_cluster_id host_cluster_name protocol 11 Linux1 0 3 RHEL-Host-05 60050768019C8514440000000000003C 0 io_grp0 private scsi 11 Linux1 0 4 RHEL-Host-06 60050768019C8514440000000000003C 0 io_grp0 private scsi IBM_Storwize:ITSO-V7000:superuser>\n```\n\n## Unmapping a volume from a host\n\nTo unmap a volume from the host, the rmvdiskhostmap command is used, as shown in Example 8-25.\n\nExample 8-25 Unmapping a volume from a host\n\n```\nIBM_Storwize:ITSO-V7000:superuser> rmvdiskhostmap -host RHEL-Host-06 Linux1 IBM_Storwize:ITSO-V7000:superuser>\n```\n\nImportant: Before unmapping a volume from a host on Storwize V7000, ensure that the host side action is completed on that volume by using the respective host operating system platform commands, such as unmounting the file system, or removing the volume or volume group. Otherwise, it can result in data corruption.\n\n## Renaming a host\n\nTo rename a host definition, issue the chhost -name command, as shown in Example 8-26. In this example, the host RHEL\\_HOST is renamed to FC\\_RHEL\\_HOST .\n\nExample 8-26 Renaming a host\n\nchhost -name RHEL-Host-07 RHEL-Host-06\n\n```\nIBM_Storwize:ITSO-V7000:superuser> IBM_Storwize:ITSO-V7000:superuser>\n```\n\n## Removing a host\n\nTo remove a host from the Storwize V7000, the rmhost command is used, as shown in Example 8-27.\n\nExample 8-27 Removing a host\n\n```\nIBM_Storwize:ITSO-V7000:superuser> rmhost RHEL-Host-07 IBM_Storwize:ITSO-V7000:superuser>\n```\n\nNote: Before removing a host from Storwize V7000, ensure that all of the volumes are unmapped from that host, as shown in Example 8-25.\n\nChapter 8. Hosts\n\n377", + "recall": 0.9047619047619048, + "true_md": "Note: The volume RHEL\\_VOLUME is mapped to both of the hosts by using the same SCSI ID. Typically, that is the requirement for most host-based clustering software, such as Microsoft Clustering Service (MSCS), IBM PowerHA, and VMware ESX clustering.\n\nTo unmap a volume from the host, the rmvdiskhostmap command is used, as shown in Example 8-25.\n\nImportant: Before unmapping a volume from a host on Storwize V7000, ensure that the host side action is completed on that volume by using the respective host operating system platform commands, such as unmounting the file system, or removing the volume or volume group. Otherwise, it can result in data corruption.\n\nTo rename a host definition, issue the chhost -name command, as shown in Example 8-26. In this example, the host RHEL\\_HOST is renamed to FC\\_RHEL\\_HOST .\n\nTo remove a host from the Storwize V7000, the rmhost command is used, as shown in Example 8-27.\n\nNote: Before removing a host from Storwize V7000, ensure that all of the volumes are unmapped from that host, as shown in Example 8-25.\n\nChapter 8. Hosts \n\n377\n\nExample 8-27 Removing a host\n\nIBM\\_Storwize:ITSO-V7000:superuser> rmhost RHEL-Host-07 IBM\\_Storwize:ITSO-V7000:superuser>\n\nIBM\\_Storwize:ITSO-V7000:superuser> chhost -name RHEL-Host-07 RHEL-Host-06 IBM\\_Storwize:ITSO-V7000:superuser>\n\nIBM\\_Storwize:ITSO-V7000:superuser> rmvdiskhostmap -host RHEL-Host-06 Linux1 IBM\\_Storwize:ITSO-V7000:superuser>\n\nIBM\\_Storwize:ITSO-V7000:superuser> lsvdiskhostmap Linux1 id name SCSI\\_id host\\_id host\\_name vdisk\\_UID IO\\_group\\_id IO\\_group\\_name mapping\\_type host\\_cluster\\_id host\\_cluster\\_name protocol 11 Linux1 0 3 RHEL-Host-05 60050768019C8514440000000000003C 0 io\\_grp0 private scsi 11 Linux1 0 4 RHEL-Host-06 60050768019C8514440000000000003C 0 io\\_grp0 private scsi IBM\\_Storwize:ITSO-V7000:superuser>\n\nExample 8-24 Ensuring the same volume is mapped to multiple hosts\n\nExample 8-25 Unmapping a volume from a host\n\nExample 8-26 Renaming a host\n\n## Removing a host\n\n## Renaming a host\n\n## Unmapping a volume from a host\n\n- 2. The volume RHEL\\_VOLUME is mapped to two hosts ( RHEL\\_HOST and iSCSI\\_RHEL\\_HOST ), and can be seen by issuing the lsvdiskhostmap command, as shown in Example 8-24." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9333508628736048, + "doc_id": "c0ca8e928e27dc1bef2e3e7524306086a80305b7e26223a8c1c561f2c1aaf836", + "edit_distance": 0.16735537190082644, + "f1_score": 0.9784172661870504, + "meteor": 0.9770146845412853, + "precision": 0.9760765550239234, + "pred_md": "346\n\nIBM Content Manager OnDemand Guide\n\nTo connect to your Content Manager OnDemand database by using JDBC, additional driver JAR files are required. The FTS Exporter is built to reference two additional JAR files in its directory by default: jdbc1.jar and jdbc2.jar . To use JAR file execution capability, you must link (or copy) your required JDBC driver JAR files to these locations so that they are automatically loaded by the FTS Exporter.\n\nFor example, when you use DB2 on AIX or Linux, you can issue the following commands in the jars subdirectory of the server to create these two links:\n\n```\nln -s /opt/IBM/db2/V9.7/java/db2jcc.jar jdbc1.jar ln -s /opt/IBM/db2/V9.7/java/db2jcc_license_cu.jar jdbc2.jar\n```\n\nFor the connection with Content Manager OnDemand, the FTS Exporter automatically references the Java API ODApi.jar .\n\nNote: Each instance of the FTS Exporter can connect to one Content Manager OnDemand instance. Only a single instance of the FTS Exporter for each Content Manager OnDemand database is supported.\n\n## 15.5 Running the full text indexing process\n\nBoth the FTS Server and the FTS Exporter must be running for the full text indexing requests to complete.\n\nIf the FTS Exporter and the FTS Server are not running, all full text indexing requests are written to the arsftiwork table. They are not processed until the FTS Exporter processes them and sends the documents to a running FTS Server.\n\n## 15.5.1 Automatically indexing new data during the load\n\nIndexing new data is simple with Content Manager OnDemand and FTS. When FTS is configured correctly, the result of an arsload operation automatically creates work items in the arsftiwork table. Each application group that the FTS is enabled for must be configured correctly. For more information, see 'Configuring application groups for full text search' on page 343.\n\n## 15.5.2 Indexing existing data through the arsdoc command\n\nThe arsdoc command is enhanced with two new options. The first new option is fti\\_add . Parameters for this option control whether the resulting documents are queried through SQL (the -i parameter) or if an entire load will be full text indexed (the -X parameter).\n\nThe second new option that is added to arsdoc is fti\\_release . This option takes the same parameters as fti\\_add to determine the documents that need their indexes removed from the full text index.\n\nBoth of these options result in work items that are created in the arsftiwork table. Example 15-2 shows an example of the command that is used with Bank1.\n\nExample 15-2 Full text indexing all (SQL WHERE 1=1) documents of Bank1\n\n```\narsdoc fti_add -f \"Bank1\" -h localhost -i \"where 1=1\" -u admin -v -G Bank1\n```", + "recall": 0.9807692307692307, + "true_md": "To connect to your Content Manager OnDemand database by using JDBC, additional driver JAR files are required. The FTS Exporter is built to reference two additional JAR files in its directory by default: jdbc1.jar and jdbc2.jar . To use JAR file execution capability, you must link (or copy) your required JDBC driver JAR files to these locations so that they are automatically loaded by the FTS Exporter.\n\nFor example, when you use DB2 on AIX or Linux, you can issue the following commands in the jars subdirectory of the server to create these two links:\n\nln -s /opt/IBM/db2/V9.7/java/db2jcc.jar jdbc1.jar\n\nln -s /opt/IBM/db2/V9.7/java/db2jcc\\_license\\_cu.jar jdbc2.jar\n\nFor the connection with Content Manager OnDemand, the FTS Exporter automatically references the Java API ODApi.jar . \n\nNote: Each instance of the FTS Exporter can connect to one Content Manager OnDemand instance. Only a single instance of the FTS Exporter for each Content Manager OnDemand database is supported.\n\nBoth the FTS Server and the FTS Exporter must be running for the full text indexing requests to complete.\n\nIf the FTS Exporter and the FTS Server are not running, all full text indexing requests are written to the arsftiwork table. They are not processed until the FTS Exporter processes them and sends the documents to a running FTS Server.\n\nIndexing new data is simple with Content Manager OnDemand and FTS. When FTS is configured correctly, the result of an arsload operation automatically creates work items in the arsftiwork table. Each application group that the FTS is enabled for must be configured correctly. For more information, see “Configuring application groups for full text search” on page 343.\n\nThe arsdoc command is enhanced with two new options. The first new option is fti\\_add . Parameters for this option control whether the resulting documents are queried through SQL (the -i parameter) or if an entire load will be full text indexed (the -X parameter). \n\nThe second new option that is added to arsdoc is fti\\_release . This option takes the same parameters as fti\\_add to determine the documents that need their indexes removed from the full text index.\n\nBoth of these options result in work items that are created in the arsftiwork table. Example 15-2 shows an example of the command that is used with Bank1.\n\nExample 15-2 Full text indexing all (SQL WHERE 1=1) documents of Bank1\n\narsdoc fti\\_add -f \"Bank1\" -h localhost -i \"where 1=1\" -u admin -v -G Bank1\n\n346 IBM Content Manager OnDemand Guide\n\n## 15.5.2 Indexing existing data through the arsdoc command\n\n## 15.5.1 Automatically indexing new data during the load\n\n## 15.5 Running the full text indexing process" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8873488928970585, + "doc_id": "3c33e4c355ff8c2715b11a2897539cc68a915ec31f6ce670ba6fc3ec571e4633", + "edit_distance": 0.29333333333333333, + "f1_score": 0.9369369369369369, + "meteor": 0.9361326572390842, + "precision": 0.9541284403669725, + "pred_md": "Note: Restoring a snapshot on the volume overwrites the data on the volume. The volume is taken offline (no read or write access) and the data from the point-in-time copy of the volume are written. The volume returns back online when all data is restored from the cloud.\n\n- 5. If you selected the Restore to a new Volume option, you must enter the following information for the new volume to be created with the snapshot data, as shown in Figure 11-80:\n- -Name\n- -Storage Pool\n- -Capacity Savings (None, Compressed or Thin-provisioned)\n- -I/O group\n\nYou are not prompted to enter the volume size because the new volume's size is identical to the snapshot copy volume.\n\nEnter the settings for the new volume and click Next .\n\nFigure 11-80 Restoring a snapshot to a new volume\n\nFigure 11-80 Restoring a snapshot to a new volume\n\n- 6. A Summary window is displayed so you can double-check the restoration settings, as shown in Figure 11-81 on page 512. Click Finish . The system creates a volume or overwrites the selected volume. The more recent snapshots (later versions) of the volume are deleted from the cloud.\n\nChapter 11. Advanced Copy Services\n\n511", + "recall": 0.9203539823008849, + "true_md": "Note: Restoring a snapshot on the volume overwrites the data on the volume. The volume is taken offline (no read or write access) and the data from the point-in-time copy of the volume are written. The volume returns back online when all data is restored from the cloud.\n\nYou are not prompted to enter the volume size because the new volume’s size is identical to the snapshot copy volume. \n\n- 5. If you selected the Restore to a new Volume option, you must enter the following information for the new volume to be created with the snapshot data, as shown in Figure 11-80:\n\n- –N a m e\n\n- – Storage Pool\n\n- – Capacity Savings (None, Compressed or Thin-provisioned)\n\n- – I/O group\n\nEnter the settings for the new volume and click Next . \n\nFigure 11-80 Restoring a snapshot to a new volume\n\n- 6. A Summary window is displayed so you can double-check the restoration settings, as shown in Figure 11-81 on page 512. Click Finish . The system creates a volume or overwrites the selected volume. The more recent snapshots (later versions) of the volume are deleted from the cloud.\n\nChapter 11. Advanced Copy Services 511" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "48ff69bb2fb6632c4204fbdbdbf19e998a2059331d1b52b07da9a8fd978e80e2", + "edit_distance": 0.29333333333333333, + "f1_score": 0.9369369369369369, + "meteor": 0.9361326572390842, + "precision": 0.9541284403669725, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 0.9203539823008849, + "true_md": "" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9440303840888605, + "doc_id": "1759838c06994f9e6e0cb4b1b26816b9d51eb9dacd998d5799cf68ae55dd1f50", + "edit_distance": 0.08755760368663594, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9874554119599424, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "688\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\nThe installation and use of this utility is nondisruptive, and does not require restart of any IBM Storwize V7000 nodes. Therefore, there is no interruption to host I/O. The utility is only installed on the current configuration node.\n\nSystem administrators must continue to check whether the version of code that they plan to install is the latest version. For the most current information, see this website.\n\nThis utility is intended to supplement rather than duplicate the tests that are performed by the IBM Spectrum Virtualize update procedure (for example, checking for unfixed errors in the error log).\n\nConcurrent software update of all components is supported through the standard Ethernet management interfaces. However, most of the configuration tasks are restricted during the update process.\n\n## 13.4.3 Updating your Storwize V7000 to V8.2.1\n\nTo update the IBM Spectrum Virtualize software to V8.2.1, complete the following steps:\n\n- 1. Open a supported web browser and navigate to your cluster IP address. A login window opens (see Figure 13-11).\n\nFigure 13-11 IBM Storwize V7000 pre-8.1 GUI login window\n\nFigure 13-11 IBM Storwize V7000 pre-8.1 GUI login window", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "The installation and use of this utility is nondisruptive, and does not require restart of any IBM Storwize V7000 nodes. Therefore, there is no interruption to host I/O. The utility is only installed on the current configuration node.\n\nSystem administrators must continue to check whether the version of code that they plan to install is the latest version. For the most current information, see this website.\n\nThis utility is intended to supplement rather than duplicate the tests that are performed by the IBM Spectrum Virtualize update procedure (for example, checking for unfixed errors in the error log).\n\nConcurrent software update of all components is supported through the standard Ethernet management interfaces. However, most of the configuration tasks are restricted during the update process.\n\n## 13.4.3 Updating your Storwize V7000 to V8.2.1\n\nTo update the IBM Spectrum Virtualize software to V8.2.1, complete the following steps:\n\n- 1. Open a supported web browser and navigate to your cluster IP address. A login window opens (see Figure 13-11).\n\nFigure 13-11 IBM Storwize V7000 pre-8.1 GUI login window\n\n688 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6304836404240189, + "doc_id": "ece9e4907afb5b26ad39dedb317deae006f09b3290dca7afd10e316399fa75c2", + "edit_distance": 0.3601694915254237, + "f1_score": 0.8878048780487805, + "meteor": 0.6627207504704936, + "precision": 0.9191919191919192, + "pred_md": "Chapter 4.\n\n## Initial configuration\n\nThis chapter describes the initial configuration of the IBM Storwize V7000 system. It provides step-by-step instructions about how to create the cluster, define its basic settings, and add nodes and optional expansion enclosures.\n\nOther features, such as user authentication, secure communications, and local port masking, are also covered. These features are optional and do not need to be configured during the initial configuration.\n\nThis chapter includes the following topics:\n\n- /SM590000 4.1, 'Prerequisites' on page 88\n- /SM590000 4.2, 'System initialization' on page 89\n- /SM590000 4.3, 'System setup' on page 92\n- /SM590000 4.4, 'Configuring user authentication' on page 108\n- /SM590000 4.5, 'Configuring secure communications' on page 117\n- /SM590000 4.6, 'Configuring local Fibre Channel port masking' on page 121\n- /SM590000 4.7, 'Other administrative procedures' on page 124\n\n' Copyright IBM Corp. 2011, 2018, 2019. All rights reserved.\n\n87\n\n4", + "recall": 0.8584905660377359, + "true_md": "## 4\n\n## Initial configuration\n\nThis chapter describes the initial configuration of the IBM Storwize V7000 system. It provides step-by-step instructions about how to create the cluster, define its basic settings, and add nodes and optional expansion enclosures.\n\nOther features, such as user authentication, secure communications, and local port masking, are also covered. These features are optional and do not need to be configured during the initial configuration.\n\nThis chapter includes the following topics:\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> 4.1, “Prerequisites” on page 88\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> 4.2, “System initia lization” on page 89\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> 4.3, “System setup” on page 92\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> 4.4, “Configuring user authentication” on page 108\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> 4.5, “Configuring secure communications” on page 117\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> 4.6, “Configuring local Fibre Channel port masking” on page 121\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> 4.7, “Other administrative procedures” on page 124\n\n' Copyright IBM Corp. 2011, 201 8, 2019. All rights reserved.\n\n87" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8149641857330888, + "doc_id": "26646f5629382c4e6219f09a2c78a5a55f182e4df05d162a2497df922ddf7248", + "edit_distance": 0.26066350710900477, + "f1_score": 0.9592760180995477, + "meteor": 0.9180156567256765, + "precision": 0.9814814814814815, + "pred_md": "154\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\nFigure 5-39 Performance statistics of the IBM Storwize V7000\n\nFigure 5-39 Performance statistics of the IBM Storwize V7000\n\nThe performance statistics in the GUI show, by default, the latest 5 minutes of data. To see details of each sample, click the graph and select the time stamp, as shown in Figure 5-40.\n\nFigure 5-40 Sample details\n\nFigure 5-40 Sample details\n\nThe charts that are shown in Figure 5-40 represent 5 minutes of the data stream. For in-depth storage monitoring and performance statistics with historical data about your IBM Storwize system, use IBM Spectrum Control (formerly enabled by IBM Tivoli Storage Productivity Center for Disk and IBM Virtual Storage Center) or IBM Storage Insights.\n\n## 5.4.4 Background tasks\n\nThis menu provides an overview of currently running tasks triggered by the administrator. In contrast to the Running jobs and Suggested tasks indication in the middle of top pane, it does not list the suggested tasks that administrators should consider performing. The overview provides more details than the indicator, as shown in Figure 5-41.\n\nFigure 5-41 List of running tasks\n\nFigure 5-41 List of running tasks", + "recall": 0.9380530973451328, + "true_md": "Figure 5-39 Performance statistics of the IBM Storwize V7000\n\nFigure 5-40 Sample details\n\nThe performance statistics in the GUI show, by default, the latest 5 minutes of data. To see details of each sample, click the graph and select the time stamp, as shown in Figure 5-40.\n\nThe charts that are shown in Figure 5-40 represent 5 minutes of the data stream. For in-depth storage mo nitoring and performance statistics with historical data about your IBM Storwize system, use IBM Spectrum Control (formerly enabled by IBM Tivoli Storage Productivity Center for Disk and IBM Virtual Storage Center) or IBM Storage Insights.\n\nThis menu provides an overview of currently running tasks triggered by the administrator. In contrast to t he Running jobs and Suggested tasks indication in the middle of top pane, it does not list th suggested tasks that administrators should consider performing. The overview provides m ore details than the indicator, as shown in Figure 5-41.\n\n## 5.4.4 Background tasks\n\nFigure 5-41 List of running tasks\n\n154 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9711159905330281, + "doc_id": "3306a5ebb463668a6d2a6567f2e1fde2f519153d120538e4d34ec1c5536174ad", + "edit_distance": 0.35602094240837695, + "f1_score": 0.9848942598187312, + "meteor": 0.8803343074195416, + "precision": 0.9819277108433735, + "pred_md": "Draft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n8459ch06.fm\n\n```\ntar xf ibm-cloud-private-ppc64le-3.2.1.tar.gz -O | sudo docker load 22f2e14aaf41: Loading layer [=======================================>] 279.8 MB/279.8 MB 4153cc3de084: Loading layer [=======================================>] 20.48 kB/20.48 kB ceaa1e685ae1: Loading layer [=======================================>] 21.49 MB/21.49 MB e5c43e70143d: Loading layer [=======================================>] 170.9 MB/170.9 MB 35f172df1a41: Loading layer [=======================================>] 23.95 MB/23.95 MB bde32f0ec81a: Loading layer [=======================================>] 34.3 kB/34.3 kB af4acfce5260: Loading layer [=======================================>] 100.7 MB/100.7 MB 500de4764474: Loading layer [=======================================>] 28.38 MB/28.38 MB ... Output truncated ... 3f2ac47d1346: Loading layer [=======================================>] 611.3 kB/611.3 kB e9fd350aaef5: Loading layer [=======================================>] 37.7 MB/37.7 MB 8b58cfdade26: Loading layer [=======================================>] 5.12 kB/5.12 kB 2aa89bbaaba4: Loading layer [=======================================>] 31.39 MB/31.39 MB dc0532bb043a: Loading layer [=======================================>] 19.74 MB/19.74 MB 93379faa8e65: Loading layer [=======================================>] 3.072 kB/3.072 kB ca43800e3ee2: Loading layer [=======================================>] 3.072 kB/3.072 kB Loaded image: ibmcom/nginx-ingress-controller-ppc64le:0.23.1\n```\n\n- 9. Due to a limitation with OpenShift, to deploy IBM Multicloud Manager on the OpenShift Master-Infrastructure node, you must label the node as an OpenShift compute node with the following command:\n\noc label node mstnode01.domain.example.com node-role.kubernetes.io/compute=true\n\n10.Create an installation directory on the boot node:\n\nmkdir /opt/ibm-multicloud-manager-3.2.1; cd /opt/ibm-multicloud-manager-3.2.1\n\n11.Extract the cluster directory:\n\ndocker run --rm -v $(pwd):/data:z -e LICENSE=accept --security-opt label:disable ibmcom/icp-inception-ppc64le:3.2.1-ee cp -r cluster /data\n\n- 12.Copy the OpenShift admin.kubeconfig file to the cluster directory. The OpenShift admin.kubeconfig file can be found in the /etc/origin/master/admin.kubeconfig directory:\n\ncp /etc/origin/master/admin.kubeconfig /opt/ibm-multicloud-manager-3.2.1/cluster/kubeconfig\n\n- 13.Use the power.openshift.config.yaml file to replace the config.yaml for Linux on Power (ppc64le) before you deploy the services:\n\n```\ncd /opt/ibm-multicloud-manager-3.2.1/cluster/ echo y |cp power.openshift.config.yaml config.yaml\n```\n\n- 14.Update the config.yaml file:\n\nChapter 6. Installing Red Hat OpenShift 3.11 on IBM PowerVC\n\n149", + "recall": 0.9878787878787879, + "true_md": "Draft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n8459ch06.fm\n\ntar xf ibm-cloud-private-ppc64le-3.2.1.tar.gz -O | sudo docker load 22f2e14aaf41: Loading layer [=======================================>] 279.8 MB/279.8 MB 4153cc3de084: Loading layer [=======================================>] 20.48 kB/20.48 kB ceaa1e685ae1: Loading layer [=======================================>] 21.49 MB/21.49 MB e5c43e70143d: Loading layer [=======================================>] 170.9 MB/170.9 MB 35f172df1a41: Loading layer [=======================================>] 23.95 MB/23.95 MB bde32f0ec81a: Loading layer [=======================================>] 34.3 kB/34.3 kB af4acfce5260: Loading layer [=======================================>] 100.7 MB/100.7 MB 500de4764474: Loading layer [=======================================>] 28.38 MB/28.38 MB ... Output truncated ... 3f2ac47d1346: Loading layer [=======================================>] 611.3 kB/611.3 kB e9fd350aaef5: Loading layer [=======================================>] 37.7 MB/37.7 MB 8b58cfdade26: Loading layer [=======================================>] 5.12 kB/5.12 kB 2aa89bbaaba4: Loading layer [=======================================>] 31.39 MB/31.39 MB dc0532bb043a: Loading layer [=======================================>] 19.74 MB/19.74 MB 93379faa8e65: Loading layer [=======================================>] 3.072 kB/3.072 kB ca43800e3ee2: Loading layer [=======================================>] 3.072 kB/3.072 kB Loaded image: ibmcom/nginx-ingress-controller-ppc64le:0.23.1\n\n- 9. Due to a limitation with OpenShift, to deploy IBM Multicloud Manager on the OpenShift Master-Infrastructure node, you must label the node as an OpenShift compute node with the following command:\n\n- 10.Create an installation directory on the boot node:\n\n- 11.Extract the cluster directory:\n\n- 12.Copy the OpenShift admin.kubeconfig file to the cluster directory. The OpenShift admin.kubeconfig file can be found in the /etc/origin/master/admin.kubeconfig directory:\n\n- 13.Use the power.openshift.config.yaml file to replace the config.yaml for Linux on Power (ppc64le) before you deploy the services:\n\n- 14.Update the config.yaml file:\n\noc label node mstnode01.domain.example.com node-role.kubernetes.io/compute=true\n\nmkdir /opt/ibm-multicloud-manager-3.2.1; cd /opt/ibm-multicloud-manager-3.2.1\n\ndocker run --rm -v $(pwd):/data:z -e LICENSE=accept --security-opt label:disable ibmcom/icp-inception-ppc64le:3.2.1-ee cp -r cluster /data\n\ncp /etc/origin/master/admin.kubeconfig /opt/ibm-multicloud-manager-3.2.1/cluster/kubeconfig\n\ncd /opt/ibm-multicloud-manager-3.2.1/cluster/ echo y |cp power.openshift.config.yaml config.yaml\n\nChapter 6. Installing Red Hat OpenShift 3.11 on IBM PowerVC 149" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7974762612563919, + "doc_id": "41a6f261b4e22814ecde6395e304634ce750abe598d973752d3c103e0814c297", + "edit_distance": 0.4027777777777778, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9692424655047205, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "8459ax03.fm\n\nDraft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n236\n\nRed Hat OpenShift and IBM Cloud Paks on IBM Power Systems: Volume 1\n\nAfter reloading the compass connection, as shown in Figure C-4, you can access again the MongoDB instance without disconnecting.\n\nFigure C-4 Reloading the connection on the new MongoDB instance without disconnecting\n\nFigure C-4 Reloading the connection on the new MongoDB instance without disconnecting", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "8459ax03.fm\n\nDraft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\nAfter reloading the compass connection, as shown in Figure C-4, you can access again the MongoDB instance without disconnecting.\n\nFigure C-4 Reloading the connection on the new MongoDB instance without disconnecting\n\n236 Red Hat OpenShift and IBM Cloud Paks on IBM Power Systems: Volume 1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.910882100627092, + "doc_id": "b64691872b36beb08842b0b31c169eba61a6927942fe6a6c887d612dc5bbc055", + "edit_distance": 0.14426229508196722, + "f1_score": 0.9751552795031055, + "meteor": 0.9558193755890348, + "precision": 0.9691358024691358, + "pred_md": "8459ch02.fm\n\nDraft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n20\n\nRed Hat OpenShift and IBM Cloud Paks on IBM Power Systems: Volume 1\n\nDuring build process only the changed layer is rebuilt, and this is the reason Docker remains lightweight which makes it small and fast.\n\n- -Container - Container is executable instance built from the image which can be started, stopped, moved or deleted, using Docker API or CLI. Containers can be connected to one or multiple network, storage to be added and a new container can be built using an existing Container.\n- -Services - Services allow you to scale containers across multiple Docker daemons, which all work together as a swarm with multiple managers and workers. Each member of a swarm is a Docker daemon, and the daemons all communicate using the Docker API.\n- -NameSpace - In context to Docker, nameSpace is the technology which provides isolated workspace for container (Table 2-1). Each container encapsulates all its features within the namespace associated with that particular container.\n\nTable 2-1 NameSpace\n\n- -Control groups: Control Group or cgroup is the technology that limits an application to a specific set of resources. This feature allow Docker Engine to share available hardware resources to containers and optionally enforce limits and constraints.\n- -Union file system: Union file systems, or UnionFS, are file systems that operate by creating layers, making them lightweight and fast. Docker Engine uses UnionFS to provide the building blocks for containers.\n- -Container format: Container format is the wrapper around namespaces, control groups, and UnionFS. The default container format is libcontainer.", + "recall": 0.98125, + "true_md": "8459ch02.fm\n\nDraft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\nDuring build process only the changed layer is rebuilt, and this is the reason Docker remains lightweight which makes it small and fast. \n\n- – Container - Container is executable instance built from the image which can be started, stopped, moved or deleted, using Docker API or CLI. Containers can be connected to one or multiple network, storage to be added and a new container can be built using an existing Container.\n\n- – Services - Services allow you to scale co ntainers across multiple Docker daemons, which all work together as a swarm with multiple managers and workers. Each member of a swarm is a Docker daemon, and the daemons all communicate using the Docker API. \n\n- – NameSpace - In context to Docker, nameSpace is the technology which provides isolated workspace for container (Table 2-1). Each container encapsulates all its features within the namespace associated with that particular container. \n\nTable 2-1 NameSpace\n\n- – Control groups: Control Group or cgroup is the technology that limits an application to a specific set of resources. This feature allow Docker Engine to share available hardware resources to containers and optionally enforce limits and constraints. \n\n- – Union file system: Union file systems, or UnionFS, are file systems that operate by creating layers, making them lightweight and fast. Docker Engine uses UnionFS to provide the building blocks for containers. \n\n- – Container format: Container format is the wrapper around namespaces, control groups, and UnionFS. The default container format is libcontainer. \n\n20 Red Hat OpenShift and IBM Cloud Paks on IBM Power Systems: Volume 1" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "e22e6d46870f0eac656143f9c9efda8e6dd048f8a0499d68a64daa54d2c407fc", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9996243425995492, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "384\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "384 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8714120548387716, + "doc_id": "287b0df1833303415d3d6c638ebaae0306060cfd3b97dcbe1b5373a91a66ee65", + "edit_distance": 0.4647887323943662, + "f1_score": 0.9364548494983278, + "meteor": 0.908482734741442, + "precision": 0.9395973154362416, + "pred_md": "## 11.1.13 FlashCopy and image mode Volumes\n\nFlashCopy can be used with image mode volumes. Because the source and target volumes must be the same size, you must create a target volume with the same size as the image mode volume when you are creating a FlashCopy mapping. To accomplish this task with the CLI, use the svcinfo lsvdisk -bytes volumename command. The size in bytes is then used to create the volume that is used in the FlashCopy mapping.\n\nThis method provides an exact number of bytes because image mode volumes might not line up one-to-one on other measurement unit boundaries. Example 11-1 shows the size of the ITSO-TSTRS001 volume. The ITSO-TSTRS002 volume is then created, which specifies the same size.\n\nExample 11-1 Listing the size of a volume in bytes and creating a volume of equal size\n\n```\nIBM_Storwize:ITSO-V7k:superuser>lsvdisk -bytes ITSO-TSTRS001 id 19 name ITSO-TSTRS001 IO_group_id 0 IO_group_name io_grp0 status online mdisk_grp_id 0 mdisk_grp_name Pool0 capacity 1073741824 type striped ...... IBM_Storwize:ITSO-V7k:superuser>mkvdisk -mdiskgrp 0 -iogrp 0 -size 1073741824 -unit b -name ITSO-TSTRS002 Virtual Disk, id [20], successfully created IBM_Storwize:ITSO-V7k:superuser> IBM_Storwize:ITSO-V7k:superuser>lsvdisk -delim \" \" 19 ITSO-TSTRS001 0 io_grp0 online 0 Pool0 1.00GB striped 6005076400A7015B0800000000000016 0 1 not_empty 0 no 0 0 Pool0 yes no 19 ITSO-TSTRS001 20 ITSO-TSTRS002 0 io_grp0 online 0 Pool0 1.00GB striped 6005076400A7015B0800000000000017 0 1 not_empty 0 no 0 0 Pool0 yes no 20 ITSO-TSTRS002 IBM_Storwize:ITSO-V7k:superuser>\n```\n\nTip: Alternatively, you can use the expandvdisksize and shrinkvdisksize volume commands to modify the size of the volume.\n\nThese actions must be performed before a mapping is created.\n\n## 11.1.14 FlashCopy mapping events\n\nThis section describes the events that modify the states of a FlashCopy. It also describes the mapping events that are listed in Table 11-6 on page 460.\n\nChapter 11. Advanced Copy Services\n\n459", + "recall": 0.9333333333333333, + "true_md": "## 11.1.13 FlashCopy and image mode Volumes\n\nFlashCopy can be used with image mode volumes. Because the source and target volumes must be the same size, you must create a target volume with the same size as the image mode volume when you are creating a FlashCopy mapping. To accomplish this task with the CLI, use the svcinfo lsvdisk -bytes volumename command. The size in bytes is then used to create the volume that is used in the FlashCopy mapping.\n\nThis method provides an exact number of bytes because image mode volumes might not line up one-to-one on other measurement unit boundaries. Example 11-1 shows the size of the ITSO-TSTRS001 volume. The ITSO-TSTRS002 volume is then created, which specifies the same size. \n\nTip: Alternatively, you can use the expandvdisksize and shrinkvdisksize volume commands to modify the size of the volume. \n\nThese actions must be performed before a mapping is created.\n\nThis section describes the events that modify the states of a FlashCopy. It also describes the mapping events that are listed in Table 11-6 on page 460.\n\n## 11.1.14 FlashCopy mapping events\n\nExample 11-1 Listing the size of a volume in bytes and creating a volume of equal size\n\nIBM\\_Storwize:ITSO-V7k:superuser>lsvdisk -bytes ITSO-TSTRS001 id 19 name ITSO-TSTRS001 IO\\_group\\_id 0 IO\\_group\\_name io\\_grp0 status online mdisk\\_grp\\_id 0 mdisk\\_grp\\_name Pool0 capacity 1073741824 type striped ...... IBM\\_Storwize:ITSO-V7k:superuser>mkvdisk -mdiskgrp 0 -iogrp 0 -size 1073741824 -unit b -name ITSO-TSTRS002 Virtual Disk, id [20], successfully created IBM\\_Storwize:ITSO-V7k:superuser> IBM\\_Storwize:ITSO-V7k:superuser>lsvdisk -delim \" \" 19 ITSO-TSTRS001 0 io\\_grp0 online 0 Pool0 1.00GB striped 6005076400A7015B0800000000000016 0 1 not\\_empty 0 no 0 0 Pool0 yes no 19 ITSO-TSTRS001 20 ITSO-TSTRS002 0 io\\_grp0 online 0 Pool0 1.00GB striped 6005076400A7015B0800000000000017 0 1 not\\_empty 0 no 0 0 Pool0 yes no 20 ITSO-TSTRS002 IBM\\_Storwize:ITSO-V7k:superuser>\n\nChapter 11. Advanced Copy Services 459" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9155215255215919, + "doc_id": "91997ddb59cec782e83edc97fa242cee5adcea56f3955a8a524626a1b8711a1d", + "edit_distance": 0.13043478260869565, + "f1_score": 0.9791666666666665, + "meteor": 0.9786675671187236, + "precision": 0.9791666666666666, + "pred_md": "To start one or multiple FlashCopy mappings that do not belong to a consistency group, complete the following steps:\n\n- 1. Open the FlashCopy Consistency Groups, or FlashCopy Mappings window.\n- 2. Right-click the FlashCopy mappings that you want to start and select Start , as shown in Figure 11-59.\n\nFigure 11-59 Starting FlashCopy mappings\n\nFigure 11-59 Starting FlashCopy mappings\n\nYou can check the FlashCopy state and the progress of the mappings in the Status and Progress columns of the table, as shown in Figure 11-60.\n\nFigure 11-60 FlashCopy mappings status and progress examples\n\nFigure 11-60 FlashCopy mappings status and progress examples\n\nFlashCopy Snapshots are dependent on the source volume and should be in a 'copying' state if the mapping is started.\n\nFlashCopy clones and the first occurrence of FlashCopy backup can take a long time to complete, depending on the size of the source volume and on the copyrate value. The next occurrences of FlashCopy backups are faster because only the changes that were made during two occurrences are copied.\n\nFor more information about FlashCopy starting operations and states, see 11.1.10, 'Starting FlashCopy mappings and Consistency Groups' on page 450.\n\n## 11.2.17 Stopping FlashCopy mappings\n\nImportant: Only FlashCopy mappings that do not belong to a consistency group can be stopped individually. If FlashCopy mappings are part of a consistency group. They can only be stopped together by using the consistency group stop command.\n\nThe only reason to stop a FlashCopy mapping is for incremental FlashCopy. When the first occurrence of an incremental FlashCopy is started, a full copy of the source volume is made. When 100% of the source volume is copied, the FlashCopy mapping does not stop automatically and a manual stop can be performed. The target volume is available for read and write operations, during the copy, and after the mapping is stopped.\n\nChapter 11. Advanced Copy Services\n\n495", + "recall": 0.9791666666666666, + "true_md": "To start one or multiple FlashCopy mappings that do not belong to a consistency group, complete the following steps:\n\n- 1. Open the FlashCopy Consistency Groups, or FlashCopy Mappings window.\n\n- 2. Right-click the FlashCopy mappings that you want to start and select Start , as shown in Figure 11-59.\n\nYou can check the FlashCopy state and the progress of the mappings in the Status and Progress columns of the table, as shown in Figure 11-60. \n\nFlashCopy Snapshots are dependent on the source volume and should be in a “copying” state if the mapping is started.\n\nFlashCopy clones and the first occurrence of FlashCopy backup can take a long time to complete, depending on the size of the source volume and on the copyrate value. The next occurrences of FlashCopy backups are faster because only the changes that were made during two occurrences are copied.\n\nFor more information about FlashCopy starting operations and states, see 11.1.10, “Starting FlashCopy mappings and Consistency Groups” on page 450.\n\nFigure 11-60 FlashCopy mappings status and progress examples\n\nFigure 11-59 Starting FlashCopy mappings\n\n## 11.2.17 Stopping FlashCopy mappings\n\nImportant: Only FlashCopy mappings that do not belong to a consistency group can be stopped individually. If FlashCopy mappings are part of a consistency group. They can only be stopped together by using the consistency group stop command.\n\nThe only reason to stop a FlashCopy mapping is for incremental FlashCopy. When the first occurrence of an incremental FlashCopy is started, a full copy of the source volume is made. When 100% of the source volume is copied, the FlashCopy mapping does not stop automatically and a manual stop can be performed. The target volume is available for read and write operations, during the copy, and after the mapping is stopped.\n\nChapter 11. Advanced Copy Services 495" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9160417465908413, + "doc_id": "8e20e4d26b1d6e5f32a093a48cd2740d816c532c85ab250c8fdc86cdd3556cf3", + "edit_distance": 0.6689655172413793, + "f1_score": 0.9699248120300752, + "meteor": 0.873867522314297, + "precision": 0.9626865671641791, + "pred_md": "- /SM590000 Both nodes in an I/O group should have identical hardware to allow failover to work as expected.\n- /SM590000 The Fibre Channel switches to which the Storwize V7000 ports are attached must support NPIV and have this feature enabled.\n\n## 8.3.2 Enabling NPIV on a new system\n\nNew Storwize V7000 systems that are shipped with V7.7 or later should have NPIV enabled by default. If your new Storwize V7000 does not have NPIV enabled, it can be enabled by completing the following steps:\n\n- 1. Run the lsiogrp command to list the I/O groups present in a system, as shown in Example 8-1.\n\nExample 8-1 Listing the I/O groups in a system\n\n- 2. Run the lsiogrp <id> | grep fctargetportmode command for the specific I/O group ID to display the fctargetportmode setting. If this is enabled, as shown in Example 8-2, NPIV host target port mode is enabled.\n\nExample 8-2 Checking NPIV mode with the fctargetportmode field\n\n```\nIBM_Storwize:ITSO-V7000:superuser> lsiogrp 0 | grep fctargetportmode fctargetportmode enabled IBM_Storwize:ITSO-V7000:superuser>\n```\n\n- 3. The virtual WWPNs can be listed using the lstargetportfc command, as shown in Example 8-3. Look for the host\\_io\\_permitted and virtualized columns to be yes , meaning the WWPN in those lines is a primary host attach port and should be used when zoning the hosts to the Storwize V7000.\n\nExample 8-3 Listing the virtual WWPNs\n\n322\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1", + "recall": 0.9772727272727273, + "true_md": "- GLYPH<SM590000> Both nodes in an I/O group should have identical hardware to allow failover to work as expected. \n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> The Fibre Channel switches to which the Storwize V7000 ports are attached must support NPIV and have this feature enabled.\n\n- 1. Run the lsiogrp command to list the I/O groups present in a system, as shown in Example 8-1.\n\n- 2. Run the lsiogrp <id> | grep fctargetportmode command for the specific I/O group ID to display the fctargetportmode setting. If this is enabled, as shown in Example 8-2, NPIV host target port mode is enabled.\n\n- 3. The virtual WWPNs can be listed using the lstargetportfc command, as shown in Example 8-3. Look for the host\\_io\\_permitted and virtualized columns to be yes , meaning the WWPN in those lines is a primary host attach port and should be used when zoning the hosts to the Storwize V7000.\n\n## 8.3.2 Enabling NPIV on a new system\n\nNew Storwize V7000 systems that are shipped with V7.7 or later should have NPIV enabled by default. If your new Storwize V7000 does not have NPIV enabled, it can be enabled by completing the following steps:\n\nExample 8-1 Listing the I/O groups in a system\n\nExample 8-2 Checking NPIV mode with the fctargetportmode field\n\nIBM\\_Storwize:ITSO-V7000:superuser> lsiogrp 0 | grep fctargetportmode fctargetportmode enabled IBM\\_Storwize:ITSO-V7000:superuser>\n\nExample 8-3 Listing the virtual WWPNs\n\n322 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9198415103492265, + "doc_id": "e913f9dcc36fe6f40eaf8dceb4aa878ff5053bf278cbf75772c710a7cbd070fc", + "edit_distance": 0.29591836734693877, + "f1_score": 0.9715370018975332, + "meteor": 0.8996558439391992, + "precision": 0.9846153846153847, + "pred_md": "- /SM590000 Data reduction techniques for space efficiency, such as thin provisioning, Data Reduction Pools (DRP), deduplication, and IBM Real-time Compression™ (RtC). Today, open systems typically use less than 50% of the provisioned storage capacity. IBM Spectrum Virtualize, can enable significant savings, increase effective capacity of storage systems up to five times, and decrease the floor space, power, and cooling required by the storage system.\n\nIBM Storwize V7000 is a scalable solution running on a highly available platform that can use diverse back-end storage systems to provide all the benefits to various attached hosts.\n\n## 1.2 Benefits of using IBM Spectrum Virtualize\n\nThe storage virtualization functions of IBM Spectrum Virtualize are a powerful tool in the hands of storage administrators. However, for an organization to fully realize benefits of storage virtualization, its implementation must be the result of a process that begins with identifying the organization's goals. For a storage virtualization project to be a success, the organization must identify what it wants to achieve before it starts to think how to implement the solution.\n\nToday, organizations are searching for affordable and efficient ways to store, use, protect, and manage their data. Additionally, a storage environment is required to have an easy to manage interface and be sufficiently flexible to support wide range of applications, servers, and mobility requirements. Although business demands change quickly, some recurring client concerns drive adoption of storage virtualization, including the following examples:\n\n- /SM590000 Growing data center costs\n- /SM590000 Inability of IT organizations to respond quickly to business demands\n- /SM590000 Poor asset usage\n- /SM590000 Poor availability and resultant unsatisfactory (for the clients) or challenging (for the providers) service levels\n- /SM590000 Lack of skilled staff for storage administration\n\nThe importance of addressing the complexity of managing storage networks is clearly visible in the results of industry analyses of the total cost of ownership (TCO) of storage networks. Typically, storage costs are only about 20% of the TCO. Most of the remaining costs relate to managing storage systems.\n\nIn a non-virtualized storage environment, every system is an 'island' that must be managed separately. In large SAN environments, the sheer number of separate and different management interfaces and lack of unified view of the whole environment jeopardizes an organization's ability to manage their storage as a single entity and to maintain the current view of the system state.\n\nIBM Storwize V7000, running IBM Spectrum Virtualize software, reduces the number of separate environments that must be managed down to a single system. After the initial configuration of the back-end storage subsystems, all of the day-to-day storage management operations are performed by way of a single graphical user interface. At the same time, administrators gain access to the rich functionality set provided by IBM Spectrum Virtualize, whether particular features are natively available on the virtualized storage systems.\n\nChapter 1. Introduction to storage virtualization\n\n5", + "recall": 0.9588014981273408, + "true_md": "- GLYPH<SM590000> Data reduction techniques for space efficiency, such as thin provisioning, Data Reduction Pools (DRP), deduplication, and IBM Real-time Compression™ (RtC). Today, open systems typically use less than 50% of the provisioned storage capacity. IBM Spectrum Virtualize, can enable significant savings, increase effective capacity of storage systems up to five times, and decrease the floor space, power, and cooling required by the storage system.\n\nIBM Storwize V7000 is a scalable solution running on a highly available platform that can use diverse back-end storage systems to provide all the benefits to various attached hosts.\n\nThe storage virtualization functions of IBM Spectrum Virtualize are a powerful tool in the hands of storage administrators. However, for an organization to fully realize benefits of storage virtualization, its implementation must be the result of a process that begins with identifying the organization’s goals. For a storage virtualization project to be a success, the organization must identify what it wants to achieve before it starts to think how to implement the solution.\n\nToday, organizations are searching for affordable and efficient ways to store, use, protect, and manage their data. Additionally, a storage environment is required to have an easy to manage interface and be sufficiently flexible to support wide range of applications, servers, and mobility requirements. Although business demands change quickly, some recurring client concerns drive adoption of storage virtualization, including the following examples:\n\nThe importance of addressing the complexity of managing storage networks is clearly visible in the results of industry analyses of the total cost of ownership (TCO) of storage networks. Typically, storage costs are only about 20% of the TCO. Most of the remaining costs relate to managing storage systems.\n\nIn a non-virtualized storage environment, every system is an “island” that must be managed separately. In large SAN environments, the sheer number of separate and different management interfaces and lack of unified view of the whole environment jeopardizes an organization’s ability to manage their storage as a single entity and to maintain the current view of the system state.\n\nIBM Storwize V7000, running IBM Spectrum Virtualize software, reduces the number of separate environments that must be managed down to a single system. After the initial configuration of the back-end storage subsystems, all of the day-to-day storage management operations are performed by way of a single graphical user interface. At the same time, administrators gain access to the rich functionality set provided by IBM Spectrum Virtualize, whether particular features are natively available on the virtualized storage systems. \n\nChapter 1. Introduction to storage virtualization 5\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Lack of skilled staff for storage administration\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Poor availability and resultant unsatisfactory (for the clients) or challenging (for the providers) service levels\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Poor asset usage\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Inability of IT organizations to respond quickly to business demands\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Growing data center costs\n\n## 1.2 Benefits of using IBM Spectrum Virtualize" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8121401137026686, + "doc_id": "61df99a73f30e111923efd487ba03724311674f9c80c363c515c86523b0d5053", + "edit_distance": 0.6655052264808362, + "f1_score": 0.9894736842105265, + "meteor": 0.9350372587841014, + "precision": 0.986013986013986, + "pred_md": "8459ax02.fm\n\nDraft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n212\n\nRed Hat OpenShift and IBM Cloud Paks on IBM Power Systems: Volume 1\n\nExample B-6 List all currently defined OCP users\n\n```\n$ oc get user NAME UID FULL NAME IDENTITIES user618 18e66d09-fc00-11e9-a4e5-fa163e187e44 htpasswd_auth:user618\n```\n\n- 5. Use the oc policy command to assign the user2 user cluster admin rights as shown in Example B-7.\n\nExample B-7 Assign user cluster admin rights\n\n```\n$ oc adm policy add-cluster-role-to-user cluster-admin user2 Warning: User 'user2' not found cluster role \"cluster-admin\" added: \"user2\"\n```\n\n- 6. Logout using the oc logout command as shown in Example B-8.\n\nExample B-8 Logout from OpenShift\n\n```\n$ oc logout Logged \"user618\" out on \"https://localhost:8443\"\n```\n\n- 7. Login back to OpenShift CLI as user user2 as shown in Example B-9.\n\nExample B-9 Login to OpenShift\n\nAuthentication required for https://localhost:8443 (openshift)\n\n```\n$ oc login -u user2 Username: user2 Password: ********* Login successful.\n```\n\nYou have access to the following projects and can switch between them with 'oc project <projectname>':\n\n```\n* default kube-public kube-service-catalog kube-system management-infra openshift openshift-ansible-service-broker openshift-console openshift-infra openshift-logging openshift-monitoring openshift-node openshift-sdn openshift-template-service-broker openshift-web-console\n```\n\nUsing project \"default\".\n\n- 8. List again all currently defined OCP users using the oc get command. Now you see the user2 in the list as shown in Example B-10 on page 213.", + "recall": 0.9929577464788732, + "true_md": "8459ax02.fm\n\nDraft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\nExample B-6 List all currently defined OCP users\n\nExample B-9 Login to OpenShift\n\n- 5. Use the oc policy command to assign the user2 user cluster admin rights as shown in Example B-7.\n\n- 6. Logout using the oc logout command as shown in Example B-8. \n\n- 7. Login back to OpenShift CLI as user user2 as shown in Example B-9.\n\n- 8. List again all currently defined OCP users using the oc get command. Now you see the user2 in the list as shown in Example B-10 on page 213.\n\n$ oc get user NAME UID FULL NAME IDENTITIES user618 18e66d09-fc00-11e9-a4e5-fa163e187e44 htpasswd\\_auth:user618\n\nExample B-7 Assign user cluster admin rights\n\n$ oc adm policy add-cluster-role-to-user cluster-admin user2 Warning: User 'user2' not found cluster role \"cluster-admin\" added: \"user2\"\n\nExample B-8 Logout from OpenShift\n\n$ oc logout Logged \"user618\" out on \"https://localhost:8443\"\n\n$ oc login -u user2 Authentication required for https://localhost:8443 (openshift) Username: user2 Password: ********* Login successful. You have access to the following projects and can switch between them with 'oc project <projectname>': * default kube-public kube-service-catalog kube-system management-infra openshift openshift-ansible-service-broker openshift-console openshift-infra openshift-logging openshift-monitoring openshift-node openshift-sdn openshift-template-service-broker openshift-web-console Using project \"default\".\n\n212 Red Hat OpenShift and IBM Cloud Paks on IBM Power Systems: Volume 1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9887977199172902, + "doc_id": "9fc76f5440aaaf6100fb81abf03b6d4d8174ca9a56be6ec80b85bda92b146874", + "edit_distance": 0.05619834710743802, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9995818535178862, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Note: Comprestimator can run for a long period (a few hours) when it is scanning a relatively empty device. The utility randomly selects and reads 256 KB samples from the device. If the sample is empty (that is, full of null values), it is skipped. A minimum number of samples with data is required to provide an accurate estimation. When a device is mostly empty, many random samples are empty. As a result, the utility runs for a longer time as it tries to gather enough non-empty samples that are required for an accurate estimate. The scan is stopped if the number of empty samples is over 95%.\n\n## 10.6.2 Evaluating compression and deduplication\n\nTo help with the profiling and analysis of user workloads that must be migrated to the new system, IBM provides a highly accurate data reduction estimation tool that supports both deduplication and compression. The tool operates by scanning target workloads on any legacy array (from IBM or third party) and then merging all scan results to provide an integrated system level data reduction estimate.\n\nThe Data Reduction Estimator Tool (DRET) utility uses advanced mathematical and statistical algorithms to perform an analysis with low memory footprint. The utility runs on a host that can access the devices to be analyzed. It performs only read operations so it has no effect on the data stored on the device.\n\nThe following sections provide information about installing DRET on a host and using it to analyze devices on it. Depending on the environment configuration, in many cases DRET is used on more than one host to analyze more data types.\n\nWhen DRET is used to analyze a block device that is used by a file system, all underlying data in the device is analyzed, regardless of whether this data belongs to files that were deleted from the file system. For example, you can fill a 100 GB file system and make it 100% used, and then, delete all the files in the file system to make it 0% used. When scanning the block device that is used for storing the file system in this example, the DRET accesses the data that belongs to the files that are deleted.\n\nImportant: The preferred method of using DRET is to analyze volumes that contain as much active data as possible rather than volumes that are mostly empty of data. This increases the accuracy level and reduces the risk of analyzing old data that is deleted, but might still have traces on the device.\n\nFor more information and the latest version of this utility, see this IBM Support web page.\n\n## 10.7 Data deduplication and compression on external storage\n\nStarting from IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.1.x, it supports over-provisioning on selected back-end controllers. This means that if back-end storage performs data deduplication or data compression on LUs provisioned from it, they still can be used as external MDisks on IBM Storwize V7000.\n\nThin-provisioned MDisks from controllers that are supported by this feature can be used as managed mode MDisks in IBM Storwize V7000 and added to storage pools (including DRPs).\n\nImplementation steps for thin-provisioned MDisks are same as for fully allocated storage controllers. Extra caution is used when planning capacity for such configurations.\n\nChapter 10. Advanced features for storage efficiency\n\n431", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Note: Comprestimator can run for a long period (a few hours) when it is scanning a relatively empty device. The utility randomly selects and reads 256 KB samples from the device. If the sample is empty (that is, full of null values), it is skipped. A minimum number of samples with data is required to provide an accurate estimation. When a device is mostly empty, many random samples are empty. As a result, the utility runs for a longer time as it tries to gather enough non-empty samples that are required for an accurate estimate. The scan is stopped if the number of empty samples is over 95%.\n\nTo help with the profiling and analysis of user workloads that must be migrated to the new system, IBM provides a highly accurate data reduction estimation tool that supports both deduplication and compression. The tool operates by scanning target workloads on any legacy array (from IBM or third party) and then merging all scan results to provide an integrated system level data reduction estimate.\n\nThe Data Reduction Estimator Tool (DRET) utility uses advanced mathematical and statistical algorithms to perform an analysis with low memory footprint. The utility runs on a host that can access the devices to be analyzed. It performs only read operations so it has no effect on the data stored on the device. \n\nThe following sections provide information about installing DRET on a host and using it to analyze devices on it. Depending on the environment configuration, in many cases DRET is used on more than one host to analyze more data types.\n\nWhen DRET is used to analyze a block device that is used by a file system, all underlying data in the device is analyzed, regardless of whether this data belongs to files that were deleted from the file system. For example, you can fill a 100 GB file system and make it 100% used, and then, delete all the files in the file system to make it 0% used. When scanning the block device that is used for storing the file system in this example, the DRET accesses the data that belongs to the files that are deleted.\n\nImportant: The preferred method of using DRET is to analyze volumes that contain as much active data as possible rather than volumes that are mostly empty of data. This increases the accuracy level and reduces the risk of analyzing old data that is deleted, but might still have traces on the device.\n\nFor more information and the latest version of this utility, see this IBM Support web page.\n\nStarting from IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.1.x, it supports over-provisioning on selected back-end controllers. This means that if back-end storage performs data deduplication or data compression on LUs provisioned from it, they still can be used as external MDisks on IBM Storwize V7000. \n\nThin-provisioned MDisks from controllers that are supported by this feature can be used as managed mode MDisks in IBM Storwize V7000 and added to storage pools (including DRPs). \n\nImplementation steps for thin-provisioned MDisks are same as for fully allocated storage controllers. Extra caution is used when planning capacity for such configurations.\n\n## 10.7 Data deduplication and compression on external storage\n\n## 10.6.2 Evaluating compression and deduplication\n\nChapter 10. Advanced features for storage efficiency 431" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8695245708800933, + "doc_id": "53429635b2cb00524fce9fea3f75a684a00738bb191b802f65d12d991833e98b", + "edit_distance": 0.3025830258302583, + "f1_score": 0.9696969696969697, + "meteor": 0.914720771307366, + "precision": 0.9911504424778761, + "pred_md": "116\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\n- /SM590000 Each user that you want to authenticate remotely is a member of the LDAP user group configured for the system role.\n\nThe system is now ready to authenticate users using the LDAP server. To ensure that everything works correctly, test LDAP connectivity. To perform this test, click Settings → Security → Remote Authentication . Select Global Actions and then, Test LDAP Connections , as shown in Figure 4-33.\n\nFigure 4-33 Option to test LDAP connections\n\nFigure 4-33 Option to test LDAP connections\n\nIf the test completes successfully, the system displays the message CMMVC7075I The LDAP task completed successfully . Otherwise, an error is logged in the event log.\n\nThe option to test a real user authentication attempt also is available. Click Settings → Security → Remote Authentication , and select Global Actions and then, Test LDAP Authentication , as shown in Figure 4-34.\n\nFigure 4-34 Option to test LDAP authentication\n\nFigure 4-34 Option to test LDAP authentication\n\nEnter the user credentials of a user defined on the LDAP server, as shown in Figure 4-35. Click Test .\n\nFigure 4-35 LDAP authentication test\n\nFigure 4-35 LDAP authentication test\n\nAgain, the message CMMVC70751 The LDAP task completed successfully is shown after a successful test.\n\nBoth the connection test and the authentication test must complete successfully to ensure that LDAP authentication works correctly. Assuming both tests succeed, users can log in to the GUI and CLI by using their network credentials.", + "recall": 0.9491525423728814, + "true_md": "- GLYPH<SM590000> Each user that you want to authenticate remotely is a member of the LDAP user group configured for the system role.\n\nThe system is now ready to authenticate users using the LDAP server. To ensure that everything works correctly, test LDAP connectivity. To perform this test, click Settings Security → Remote Authentication . Select Global Actions and then, Test LDAP Connections , as shown in Figure 4-33.\n\nIf the test completes successfully, the system displays the message CMMVC7075I The LDAP task completed successfully . Otherwise, an error is logged in the event log.\n\nThe option to test a real user authentication attempt also is available. Click Settings → Security → Remote Authentication , and select Global Actions and then, Test LDAP Authentication , as shown in Figure 4-34.\n\nEnter the user credentials of a user defined on the LDAP server, as shown in Figure 4-35. Click Test . \n\nAgain, the message CMMVC70751 The LDAP task completed successfully is shown after a successful test.\n\nBoth the connection test and the authentication test must complete successfully to ensure that LDAP authentication works correctly. Assuming both tests succeed, users can log in to the GUI and CLI by using their network credentials.\n\n116 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\nFigure 4-35 LDAP authentication test\n\nFigure 4-34 Option to test LDAP authentication\n\nFigure 4-33 Option to test LDAP connections" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.806156247602913, + "doc_id": "a8e707949cffe6ee9529a9742fb540287215b2a447e32c34ad72ec79d80843fc", + "edit_distance": 0.25598086124401914, + "f1_score": 0.9586206896551724, + "meteor": 0.7607205306015562, + "precision": 0.9788732394366197, + "pred_md": "Table 11-7 FlashCopy and remote copy interaction\n\n## 11.1.20 FlashCopy attributes and limitations\n\nThe FlashCopy function in IBM Spectrum Virtualize features the following attributes:\n\n- /SM590000 The target is the time-zero copy of the source, which is known as FlashCopy mapping target .\n- /SM590000 FlashCopy produces an exact copy of the source volume, including any metadata that was written by the host operating system, Logical Volume Manager (LVM), and applications.\n- /SM590000 The source volume and target volume are available (almost) immediately following the FlashCopy operation.\n- /SM590000 The source and target volumes must be the same 'virtual' size.\n- /SM590000 The source and target volumes must be on the same Storwize V7000 system.\n- /SM590000 The source and target volumes do not need to be in the same I/O Group or storage pool.\n- /SM590000 The storage pool extent sizes can differ between the source and target.\n- /SM590000 The target volumes can be the source volumes for other FlashCopy mappings ( cascaded FlashCopy ). But a target volume can only have one source copy.\n- /SM590000 Consistency groups are supported to enable FlashCopy across multiple volumes at the same time.\n- /SM590000 The target volume can be updated independently of the source volume.\n- /SM590000 Bitmaps that are governing I/O redirection (I/O indirection layer) are maintained in both nodes of the Storwize V7000 I/O Group to prevent a single point of failure.\n- /SM590000 FlashCopy mapping and Consistency Groups can be automatically withdrawn after the completion of the background copy.\n- /SM590000 Thin-provisioned FlashCopy (or Snapshot in the graphical user interface (GUI) use disk space only when updates are made to the source or target data, and not for the entire capacity of a volume copy.\n\nChapter 11. Advanced Copy Services\n\n465", + "recall": 0.9391891891891891, + "true_md": "Table 11-7 FlashCopy and remote copy interaction\n\n## 11.1.20 FlashCopy attributes and limitations\n\nThe FlashCopy function in IBM Spectrum Virtualize features the following attributes:\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> The target is the time-zero copy of the source, which is known as FlashCopy mapping target .\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> FlashCopy produces an exact copy of the source volume, including any metadata that was written by the host operating system, Logical Volume Manager (LVM), and applications. \n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> The source volume and target volume are available (almost) immediately following the FlashCopy operation.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> The source and target volumes must be the same “virtual” size.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> The source and target volumes must be on the same Storwize V7000 system.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> The source and target volumes do not need to be in the same I/O Group or storage pool.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> The storage pool extent sizes can differ between the source and target.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> The target volumes can be the source volumes for other FlashCopy mappings ( cascaded FlashCopy ). But a target volume can only have one source copy.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Consistency groups are supported to enable FlashCopy across multiple volumes at the same time.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> The target volume can be updated independently of the source volume.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Bitmaps that are governing I/O redirection (I/O indirection layer) are maintained in both nodes of the Storwize V7000 I/O Group to prevent a single point of failure.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> FlashCopy mapping and Consistency Groups can be automatically withdrawn after the completion of the background copy.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Thin-provisioned FlashCopy (or Snapshot in the graphical user interface (GUI) use disk space only when updates are made to the source or target data, and not for the entire capacity of a volume copy.\n\nChapter 11. Advanced Copy Services 465" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8945648481322716, + "doc_id": "2c9bb6343cf9fa7882cb14ee6b7e31bfda127a9fee189d50d0b1cc44f21ca98d", + "edit_distance": 0.1, + "f1_score": 0.9629629629629631, + "meteor": 0.9889858655290754, + "precision": 0.9285714285714286, + "pred_md": "Front cover\n\n## Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\nJon Tate\n\nJack Armstrong\n\nTiago Bastos\n\nPawel Brodacki\n\nFrank Enders\n\nSergey Kubin\n\nDanilo Miyasiro\n\nRodrigo Suzuki", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "# Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\nJon Tate\n\nJack Armstrong\n\nTiago Bastos\n\nPawel Brodacki\n\nFrank Enders\n\nSergey Kubin\n\nDanilo Miyasiro\n\nRodrigo Suzuki" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8538354990079103, + "doc_id": "30026e83a27ebcde6f12298dbf2bcce6323707964b4f33045066739959b037ed", + "edit_distance": 0.22673434856175972, + "f1_score": 0.9790794979079499, + "meteor": 0.8202615201929486, + "precision": 0.9915254237288136, + "pred_md": "8459ch08.fm\n\nDraft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n## 8.2 Moving data across Clouds\n\nSharing data between cloud environments can be a challenge, especially if your datasets are large or your cloud environments are geographically dispersed. IBM Asperafi on Cloud is an IBM hosted service for quick and reliable movement of data between cloud environments.\n\nTraditional file transfer methods such as FTP or HTTP and other file transfer protocols can be inherently slow and unreliable for transferring large amounts of data. IBM Aspera is designed to move data files of any size of volume reliably, quickly and securely.\n\nIBM Aspera uses patented Fast, Adaptive and Secure Protocol or FASPfi technology to support thousands of concurrent transfer requests. This enables Aspera to deliver high throughput over networks with high latency such as WAN. This allows high-performance secure transport of files, directories, and other large data sets to, from and between cloud storage.\n\n## 8.2.1 Some of the key features and benefits of IBM Aspera\n\n- /SM590000 Easy and intuitive file sharing and content delivery across a hybrid-cloud environment\n- /SM590000 High-speed data transfer at any distance\n- /SM590000 Cloud-native technology with high availability and scalability\n- /SM590000 Enterprise-grade security\n- /SM590000 Real-time control over your transfers\n- /SM590000 Central administration of hybrid environments\n- /SM590000 Automated transfers based on schedule, file arrival event, or an API call\n\nFurther details of the features and benefits can be read at the following website:\n\nhttps://www.ibm.com/uk-en/cloud/high-speed-data-transfer\n\n## 8.2.2 Using Aspera in a Hybrid cloud environment\n\nAspera gives you the ability to connect your on-premises storage with both on-premises private cloud and off-premises public cloud accessing files and folders in multiple environments. Aspera supports all of the leading cloud platforms such as IBM Cloud, AWS, Azure and Google cloud Platform. You can configure access between the transfer nodes in your private and public cloud environments ensuring seamless data transfer. You can embed file and folder delivery within your applications using the Aspera API. Aspera's containerized, scalable software optimized to run on and is certified on Red Hat OpenShift. It has been included in the IBM Cloud Pak for Integration to give you an end to end solution for hybrid cloud integration.\n\nFor further information about integrating IBM Aspera in a hybrid cloud environment see the white paper IBM Aspera on Cloud at the following website:\n\nhttps://www.ibm.com/downloads/cas/YMPPVAA7\n\nIBM Aspera also has support for the main cloud object storage services such as:\n\n- /SM590000 IBM Cloud\n- /SM590000 Amazon AWS S3\n- /SM590000 OpenStack Swift version 1.12 and Up\n- /SM590000 Microsoft Azure BLOB\n- /SM590000 Akamai NetStorage\n- /SM590000 Google Storage\n- /SM590000 Limelight Object Storage\n\n186\n\nRed Hat OpenShift and IBM Cloud Paks on IBM Power Systems: Volume 1", + "recall": 0.9669421487603306, + "true_md": "8459ch08.fm\n\nDraft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n## 8.2 Moving data across Clouds\n\n## 8.2.2 Using Aspera in a Hybrid cloud environment\n\nSharing data between cloud environments can be a challenge, especially if your datasets are large or your cloud environments are geographically dispersed. IBM Asperafi on Cloud is an IBM hosted service for quick and reliable movement of data between cloud environments.\n\nTraditional file transfer methods such as FTP or HTTP and other file transfer protocols can be inherently slow and unreliable for transferring large amounts of data. IBM Aspera is designed to move data files of any size of volume reliably, quickly and securely.\n\nIBM Aspera uses patented Fast, Adaptive and Secure Protocol or FASPfi technology to support thousands of concurrent transfer requests. This enables Aspera to deliver high throughput over networks with high latency such as WAN. This allows high-performance secure transport of files, directories, and other large data sets to, from and between cloud storage.\n\n## 8.2.1 Some of the key features and benefits of IBM Aspera\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Easy and intuitive file sharing and content delivery across a hybrid-cloud environment\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> High-speed data transfer at any distance\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Cloud-native technology with high availability and scalability\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Enterprise-grade security\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Real-time control over your transfers\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Central administration of hybrid environments\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Automated transfers based on schedule, file arrival event, or an API call\n\nFurther details of the features and benefits can be read at the following website:\n\nhttps://www.ibm.com/uk-en/cloud/high-speed-data-transfer\n\nAspera gives you the ability to connect your on-premises storage with both on-premises private cloud and off-premises public cloud accessing files and folders in multiple environments. Aspera supports all of the leading cloud platforms such as IBM Cloud, AWS, Azure and Google cloud Platform. You can configure access between the transfer nodes in your private and public cloud environments ensuring seamless data transfer. You can embed file and folder delivery within your applications using the Aspera API. Aspera’s containerized, scalable software optimized to run on and is certified on Red Hat OpenShift. It has been included in the IBM Cloud Pak for Integration to give you an end to end solution for hybrid cloud integration.\n\nFor further information about integrating IBM Aspera in a hybrid cloud environment see the white paper IBM Aspera on Cloud at the following website:\n\nhttps://www.ibm.com/downloads/cas/YMPPVAA7\n\nIBM Aspera also has support for the main cloud object storage services such as:\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> IBM Cloud\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Amazon AWS S3\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> OpenStack Swift version 1.12 and Up\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Microsoft Azure BLOB\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Akamai NetStorage\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Google Storage\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Limelight Object Storage\n\n186 Red Hat OpenShift and IBM Cloud Paks on IBM Power Systems: Volume 1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9762752027786931, + "doc_id": "e81e1b76a100b3360765729372b7a4ac3461d4ee8f71085f9481a738f42f473d", + "edit_distance": 0.3333333333333333, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9788397055959039, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "748\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\n## Real-time performance statistics monitoring with the GUI\n\nThe IBM Spectrum Virtualize dashboard gives you performance at a glance by displaying some information about the system. You can see the entire cluster (the system) performance by selecting the information between Bandwidth, Response Time, IOps, or CPU utilization.", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## Real-time performance statistics monitoring with the GUI\n\nThe IBM Spectrum Virtualize dashboard gives you performance at a glance by displaying some information about the system. You can see the entire cluster (the system) performance by selecting the information between Bandwidth, Response Time, IOps, or CPU utilization. \n\n748 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8452948994471471, + "doc_id": "81c3a8295264889b3ff819cb1b631c444ed3ffe91fdef0fb2ff498581d8369c6", + "edit_distance": 0.6074498567335244, + "f1_score": 0.9315960912052116, + "meteor": 0.7881692258250267, + "precision": 0.9470198675496688, + "pred_md": "## 8459ch05.fm\n\n94\n\nRed Hat OpenShift and IBM Cloud Paks on IBM Power Systems: Volume 1\n\nDraft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\nThe architecture consists of the following components:\n\n- /SM590000 PowerVC : Provide Infrastructure as a service and manage:\n- -IBM Power Systems (PowerVM): 2 x Virtual I/O Servers: 2 cores configured in dedicated donated mode and 16 GB Memory. 2 x Ethernet cards and 2 x Fibre Channel cards for each VIO Server.\n- -Dual SAN Fabrics Brocade or Cisco.\n- -Storage backends.\n- /SM590000 Deployment host: RHEL 7.6 for POWER8 and RHEL-ALT 7.6 for POWER9 minimum installation. Responsible for deploying one or more OpenShift Container Platform environments:\n- -Terraform for deploying PowerVC infrastructure (network, storage, virtual machines).\n- -OpenShift-Ansible for deploying OpenShift Container Platform\n- /SM590000 Load balancer: RHEL 7.6 for POWER8 and RHEL-ALT 7.6 for POWER9 minimum installation. HAproxy offers a single entry point for the many Red Hat OpenShift Container Platform components.\n\nNote: The HAProxy Load Balancer is intended to demonstrate the API server's HA mode and is not recommended for production environments. If you are deploying to a cloud provider, Red Hat recommends deploying a cloud-native TCP-based Load Balancer or take other steps to provide a highly available Load Balancer.\n\n- /SM590000 Master-Infrastructure : RHEL 7.6 for POWER8 and RHEL-ALT 7.6 for POWER9 minimum installation. Responsible for running the OpenShift master and infrastructure components, including the API server, controller manager server, etcd, registry and routers.\n- /SM590000 Worker: RHEL 7.6 for POWER8 and RHEL-ALT 7.6 for POWER9 minimum installation. Responsible for running Application containers created by the end users of the OpenShift service.", + "recall": 0.9166666666666666, + "true_md": "94 Red Hat OpenShift and IBM Cloud Paks on IBM Power Systems: Volume 1\n\n8459ch05.fm\n\nDraft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\nThe architecture consists of the following components:\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> PowerVC : Provide Infrastructure as a service and manage:\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Deployment host: RHEL 7.6 for POWER8 and RHEL-ALT 7.6 for POWER9 minimum installation. Responsible for deploying one or more OpenShift Container Platform environments:\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Load balancer: RHEL 7.6 for POWER8 and RHEL-ALT 7.6 for POWER9 minimum installation. HAproxy offers a single entry point for the many Red Hat OpenShift Container Platform components.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Master-Infrastructure : RHEL 7.6 for POWER8 and RHEL-ALT 7.6 for POWER9 minimum installation. Responsible for running the OpenShift master and infrastructure components, including the API server, controller manager server, etcd, registry and routers. \n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Worker: RHEL 7.6 for POWER8 and RHEL-ALT 7.6 for POWER9 minimum installation. Responsible for running Application containers created by the end users of the OpenShift service.\n\nNote: The HAProxy Load Balancer is intended to demonstrate the API server’s HA mode and is not recommended for production environments. If you are deploying to a cloud provider, Red Hat recommends deploying a cloud-native TCP-based Load Balancer or take other steps to provide a highly available Load Balancer.\n\n- – Terraform for deploying PowerVC infrastructure (network, storage, virtual machines).\n\n- – OpenShift-Ansible for deploying OpenShift Container Platform\n\n- – Storage backends.\n\n- – Dual SAN Fabrics Brocade or Cisco.\n\n- – IBM Power Systems (PowerVM): 2 x Virtual I/O Servers: 2 cores configured in dedicated donated mode and 16 GB Memory. 2 x Ethernet cards and 2 x Fibre Channel cards for each VIO Server." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9023779190986644, + "doc_id": "3d938bf62b596f7bc24dc853c3ba11f33fc01eee78c5961c3d634257428edac3", + "edit_distance": 0.3357664233576642, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9754322889916112, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "356\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\n- 2. Confirm that the window displays the correct list of hosts that you want to remove by entering the number of hosts to remove, and clicking Delete (see Figure 8-43).\n\nFigure 8-43 Confirm the removal of the host\n\nFigure 8-43 Confirm the removal of the host\n\n- 3. If the host that you are removing has volumes mapped to it, force the removal by selecting the Remove the hosts even if volumes are mapped to them option in the lower part of the window. By selecting this option, the host is removed and it no longer can access any volumes on this system.\n- 4. After the task is completed, click Close .", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "- 2. Confirm that the window displays the correct list of hosts that you want to remove by entering the number of hosts to remove, and clicking Delete (see Figure 8-43).\n\n- 3. If the host that you are removing has volumes mapped to it, force the removal by selecting the Remove the hosts even if volumes are mapped to them option in the lower part of the window. By selecting this option, the host is removed and it no longer can access any volumes on this system.\n\n- 4. After the task is completed, click Close .\n\nFigure 8-43 Confirm the removal of the host\n\n356 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9107940564732626, + "doc_id": "22d13df68ffb0536c5073b2a42892eaff42efd9cbe417508a5ff0af102e0d9f8", + "edit_distance": 0.5187713310580204, + "f1_score": 0.9882352941176471, + "meteor": 0.8053398165781026, + "precision": 0.9921259842519685, + "pred_md": "332\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\n- /SM590000 Standard iSCSI host connection procedures can be used to discover and configure the Storwize V7000 as an iSCSI target.\n- /SM590000 The Storwize V7000 supports the Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP) authentication methods for iSCSI.\n- /SM590000 The name iqn.1986-03.com.ibm:2076.< cluster\\_name >.< node\\_name > is the iSCSI qualified name (IQN) for a Storwize V7000 node. Because the IQN contains the clustered system name and the node name, it is important not to change these names after iSCSI is deployed.\n- /SM590000 Each node can be given an iSCSI alias as an alternative to the IQN.\n\nTo create iSCSI hosts, complete the following steps:\n\n- 1. Click iSCSI and the iSCSI configuration options are displayed (see Figure 8-8).\n\nFigure 8-8 Add an iSCSI host\n\nFigure 8-8 Add an iSCSI host\n\n- 2. Enter a host name and the iSCSI initiator name into the iSCSI host IQN field. Click the plus sign ( + ) if you want to add initiator names to one host.\n- 3. If you are connecting an HP-UX or TPGS host, click the Host type menu and then select the correct host type. For our ESX host, we selected VVOL . However, generic can be selected if you are not using VVOLs.\n- 4. Click Add and then, click Close to complete the host object definition.", + "recall": 0.984375, + "true_md": "- GLYPH<SM590000> Standard iSCSI host connection procedures can be used to discover and configure the Storwize V7000 as an iSCSI target.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> The Storwize V7000 supports the Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP) authentication methods for iSCSI.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> The name iqn.1986-03.com.ibm:2076.< cluster\\_name >.< node\\_name > is the iSCSI qualified name (IQN) for a Storwize V7000 node. Because the IQN contains the clustered system name and the node name, it is important not to change these names after iSCSI is deployed. \n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Each node can be given an iSCSI alias as an alternative to the IQN.\n\nTo create iSCSI hosts, complete the following steps:\n\n- 4. Click Add and then, click Close to complete the host object definition. \n\n- 3. If you are connecting an HP-UX or TPGS host, click the Host type menu and then select the correct host type. For our ESX host, we selected VVOL . However, generic can be selected if you are not using VVOLs.\n\n- 2. Enter a host name and the iSCSI initiator name into the iSCSI host IQN field. Click the plus sign ( + ) if you want to add initiator names to one host.\n\nFigure 8-8 Add an iSCSI host\n\n332 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\n- 1. Click iSCSI and the iSCSI configuration options are displayed (see Figure 8-8)." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8745068663371944, + "doc_id": "5b95b7ddb60d40ae24300eba65e6a1adaeee0c6fb2abd9270b68b9a150387651", + "edit_distance": 0.28378378378378377, + "f1_score": 0.9487179487179488, + "meteor": 0.8760912287124929, + "precision": 0.9736842105263158, + "pred_md": "8459ch05.fm\n\nDraft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n86\n\nRed Hat OpenShift and IBM Cloud Paks on IBM Power Systems: Volume 1\n\n## Deployment host\n\nAny virtual or physical host that supports Terraform and Ansible.\n\nFor this book, the deployment host is a virtual machine that is designed to provide a simple method for deploying OpenShift:\n\n- /SM590000 Minimal operating system based on Red Hat ALT 7.6 Enterprise Linux.\n- /SM590000 Terraform for deploying OpenShift Infrastructure.\n- /SM590000 OpenShift-Ansible for installing and configure OpenShift.\n\nNote: The deployment host can run on any architecture (for example, x86) that supports the installation tools. In 6.2, 'Setting up the deployment environment' on page 96, you see an example of how to set up the deployment host on IBM POWER9 systems (ppc64le).\n\n## Terraform\n\nTerraform is an Infrastructure as Code tool for building, changing, and versioning infrastructure safely and efficiently.\n\nAnsible, Chef, Puppet, SaltStack have a focus on automating the installation and configuration of the software. Terraform automates provisioning of the infrastructure itself.", + "recall": 0.925, + "true_md": "8459ch05.fm\n\nDraft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n## Deployment host\n\nAny virtual or physical host that supports Terraform and Ansible.\n\nFor this book, the deployment host is a virtual machine that is designed to provide a simple method for deploying OpenShift:\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Minimal operating system based on Red Hat ALT 7.6 Enterprise Linux.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Terraform for deploying OpenShift Infrastructure.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> OpenShift-Ansible for installing and configure OpenShift.\n\nNote: The deployment host can run on any architecture (for example, x86) that supports the installation tools. In 6.2, “Setting up the deployment environment” on page 96, you see an example of how to set up the deployment host on IBM POWER9 systems (ppc64le).\n\nTerraform is an Infrastructure as Code tool for building, changing, and versioning infrastructure safely and efficiently.\n\nAnsible, Chef, Puppet, SaltStack have a focus on automating the installation and configuration of the software. Terraform automates provisioning of the infrastructure itself.\n\n## Terraform\n\n86 Red Hat OpenShift and IBM Cloud Paks on IBM Power Systems: Volume 1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9531509524415305, + "doc_id": "7eb034036cd99875fe3bea03ccfc11a0f70776d89ed4bf7f644120f84483df1e", + "edit_distance": 0.10843373493975904, + "f1_score": 0.9910979228486648, + "meteor": 0.9828483237725281, + "precision": 0.9940476190476191, + "pred_md": "70\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\nA thin-provisioned volume feature that is called zero detect provides clients with the ability to reclaim unused allocated disk space (zeros) when they are converting a fully allocated volume to a thin-provisioned volume by using volume mirroring.\n\n## 3.12 Host attachment planning\n\nThe typical FC host attachment to the Storwize V7000 is done through SAN fabric. However, the system allows direct attachment connectivity between its 8 Gb or 16 Gb Fibre Channel ports and host ports. No special configuration is required for host systems that are using this configuration. However, the maximum number of directly attached hosts is severely limited by the number of FC ports on Storwize V7000's nodes.\n\nThe Storwize V7000 imposes no particular limit on the distance between the Storwize V7000 nodes and host servers. However, for host attachment, the Storwize V7000 supports up to three ISL hops in the fabric. This capacity means that the server to the Storwize V7000 can be separated by up to five FC links, four of which can be 10 km long (6.2 miles) if long wave Small Form-factor Pluggables (SFPs) are used.\n\nFigure 3-9 shows an example of a supported configuration with Storwize V7000 nodes using shortwave SFPs.\n\nFigure 3-9 Example of host connectivity\n\nFigure 3-9 Example of host connectivity\n\nIn Figure 3-9, the optical distance between Storwize V7000 Node 1 and Host 2 is slightly over 40 km (24.85 miles).\n\nTo avoid latencies that lead to degraded performance, avoid ISL hops whenever possible. In an optimal setup, the servers connect to the same SAN switch as the Storwize V7000 nodes.\n\nNote: Before attaching host systems to Storwize V7000, review the Configuration Limits and Restrictions for the IBM System Storage Storwize V7000 at this IBM Support web page.", + "recall": 0.9881656804733728, + "true_md": "A thin-provisioned volume feature that is called zero detect provides clients with the ability to reclaim unused allocated disk space (zeros) when they are converting a fully allocated volume to a thin-provisioned volume by using volume mirroring.\n\nThe typical FC host attachment to the Storwize V7000 is done through SAN fabric. However, the system allows direct attachment connectivity between its 8 Gb or 16 Gb Fibre Channel ports and host ports. No special configuration is required for host systems that are using this configuration. However, the maximum number of directly attached hosts is severely limited by the number of FC ports on Storwize V7000’s nodes.\n\nThe Storwize V7000 imposes no particular limit on the distance between the Storwize V7000 nodes and host servers. However, for host attachment, the Storwize V7000 supports up to three ISL hops in the fabric. This capacity means that the server to the Storwize V7000 can be separated by up to five FC links, four of which can be 10 km long (6.2 miles) if long wave Small Form-factor Pluggables (SFPs) are used. \n\nFigure 3-9 shows an example of a supported configuration with Storwize V7000 nodes using shortwave SFPs.\n\n## 3.12 Host attachment planning\n\nFigure 3-9 Example of host connectivity\n\nIn Figure 3-9, the optical distance between Storwize V7000 Node 1 and Host 2 is slightly over 40 km (24.85 miles).\n\nTo avoid latencies that lead to degraded performance, avoid ISL hops whenever possible. In an optimal setup, the servers connect to the same SAN switch as the Storwize V7000 nodes.\n\nNote: Before attaching host systems to Storwize V7000, review the Configuration Limits and Restrictions for the IBM System Storage Storwize V7000 at this IBM Support web page.\n\n70 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8827766518913513, + "doc_id": "d11f99d0c19d3d77d4c6331005033d55c4e87e395093179dc986fe20eabc5623", + "edit_distance": 0.17880794701986755, + "f1_score": 0.9710982658959538, + "meteor": 0.9730394117285339, + "precision": 0.9767441860465116, + "pred_md": "## 13.4.4 Updating IBM Storwize V7000 drive code\n\nAfter completing the Storwize V7000 software update as described in 13.4, 'Software update' on page 687, the firmware of the Storwize V7000 drives also must be updated. The upgrade test utility identified that downlevel drives are in the system, as shown in Figure 13-25. However, this fact does not stop the system software from being performed.\n\nFigure 13-25 Upgrade test utility drive firmware warning\n\nFigure 13-25 Upgrade test utility drive firmware warning\n\nTo update the IBM Storwize V7000 drive code, complete the following steps:\n\n- 1. Download the latest Drive firmware package for IBM Storwize V7000 from Fix Central.\n- 2. On the Storwize V7000 GUI, navigate to Pools → Internal Storage and select All Internal.\n\n696\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1", + "recall": 0.9655172413793104, + "true_md": "## 13.4.4 Updating IBM Storwize V7000 drive code\n\nAfter completing the Storwize V7000 software update as described in 13.4, “Software update” on page 687, the firmware of the Storwize V7000 drives also must be updated. The upgrade test utility identified that downlevel drives are in the system, as shown in Figure 13-25. However, this fact does not stop the system software from being performed. \n\nTo update the IBM Storwize V7000 drive code, complete the following steps:\n\nFigure 13-25 Upgrade test utility drive firmware warning\n\n- 1. Download the latest Drive firmware package for IBM Storwize V7000 from Fix Central.\n\n- 2. On the Storwize V7000 GUI, navigate to Pools → Internal Storage and select All Internal.\n\n696 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9210208331408721, + "doc_id": "e7976afc7d4fefa91673320be65ecb6c8f923d916e085fdba0e612f72885b56b", + "edit_distance": 0.14049586776859505, + "f1_score": 0.9746192893401017, + "meteor": 0.9121050569678382, + "precision": 0.9896907216494846, + "pred_md": "Draft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n8459ch05.fm\n\nthe lifecycle management of the virtualization for Power Systems, it has a deep integration with IBM PowerVM virtualization technologies.\n\n## Availability zones (host groups)\n\nHost groups, also known as host aggregates in OpenStack's terminology, allow you to create virtual boundaries around a group of hosts. It is a logical group of hosts regardless of any features that they might or might not have in common. For example, the hosts do have the same architecture, network configuration, or storage, or hosts in the same rack or datacenter.\n\nWhen a host group is created through the user interface, an availability zone with the same name is created and assigned to the host group. PowerVC also supports the standard OpenStack APIs for host groups and availability zones.\n\nHost groups (availability zones) have the following features:\n\n- /SM590000 Every host must be in a host group. Any hosts that do not belong to a user-defined host group are members of the default host group. The default host group cannot be deleted.\n- /SM590000 Virtual machines are kept within the host group. A virtual machine can be deployed to a specific host or to a host group. After deployment, that virtual machine must always be migrated or remote restarted within the host group.\n- /SM590000 Placement policies are associated with host groups . Every host within a host group is subject to the host group's placement policy. The default placement policy is striping.\n- /SM590000 Automated Remote Restart . If is enabled, the PowerVC monitors hosts for failure by using the Platform Resource Scheduler (PRS) HA service. If a host fails, PowerVC automatically remote restarts the VMs from the failed host to another host within a host group.\n- /SM590000 Dynamic Resource Optimizer (DRO) . If is enabled, DRO continuously monitors your cloud environment's usage. You can specify that DRO monitors CPU usage or available memory. When a host is found to be overused, the DRO tries to correct the situation by performing the action that you specified. It can migrate VMs to another host within a host group or, when applicable, work with Capacity on Demand (CoD) to activate mobile cores.\n\nNote: A host can only belong to one host group (availability zone).\n\nChapter 5. Red Hat OpenShift installation planning and considerations\n\n77", + "recall": 0.96, + "true_md": "Draft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n8459ch05.fm\n\nthe lifecycle management of the virtualization for Power Systems, it has a deep integration with IBM PowerVM virtualization technologies.\n\n## Availability zones (host groups)\n\nHost groups, also known as host aggregates in OpenStack’s terminology, allow you to create virtual boundaries around a group of hosts. It is a logical group of hosts regardless of any features that they might or might not have in common. For example, the hosts do have the same architecture, network configuration, or storage, or hosts in the same rack or datacenter.\n\nWhen a host group is created through the user interface, an availability zone with the same name is created and assigned to the host group. PowerVC also supports the standard OpenStack APIs for host groups and availability zones.\n\nHost groups (availability zones) have the following features:\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Every host must be in a host group. Any hosts that do not belong to a user-defined host group are members of the default host group. The default host group cannot be deleted.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Virtual machines are kept within the host group. A virtual machine can be deployed to a specific host or to a host group. After deployment, that virtual machine must always be migrated or remote restarted within the host group.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Placement policies are associated with host groups . Every host within a host group is subject to the host group’s placement policy. The default placement policy is striping.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Automated Remote Restart . If is enabled, the PowerVC monitors hosts for failure by using the Platform Resource Scheduler (PRS) HA service. If a host fails, PowerVC automatically remote restarts the VMs from the failed host to another host within a host group.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Dynamic Resource Optimizer (DRO) . If is enabled, DRO continuously monitors your cloud environment’s usage. You can specify that DRO monitors CPU usage or available memory. When a host is found to be overused, the DRO tries to correct the situation by performing the action that you specified. It can migrate VMs to another host within a host group or, when applicable, work with Capacity on Demand (CoD) to activate mobile cores.\n\nChapter 5. Red Hat OpenShift installation planning and considerations 77\n\nNote: A host can only belong to one host group (availability zone)." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8030129514032833, + "doc_id": "28a1ed2c21165d32cec616bdafbc6ac70d4fbf146b7f8b4cadbcd2252a00af24", + "edit_distance": 0.5, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9689549753850129, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "94\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\n- 2. The welcome window opens, as shown in Figure 4-8. Verify the prerequisites and click Next .\n\nFigure 4-8 System setup: Welcome\n\nFigure 4-8 System setup: Welcome", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "- 2. The welcome window opens, as shown in Figure 4-8. Verify the prerequisites and click Next .\n\nFigure 4-8 System setup: Welcome\n\n94 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.874081164132457, + "doc_id": "2c01f81349405a00ab44b38f5b448e75d8ced1aae63559af005bb9b80e573900", + "edit_distance": 0.2289156626506024, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9869288731084152, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "194\n\nImplementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1\n\nFigure 6-4 Create Pool dialog box\n\nFigure 6-4 Create Pool dialog box\n\nMark the Data Reduction check box to create the Data Reduction Pool. Leaving it unmarked creates a standard storage pool.\n\nA standard storage pool that is created by using the GUI has a default extent size of 1 GB. Data Reduction Pools have a default extent size of 4 GB. The size of the extent is selected at creation time and cannot be changed later.\n\nIf you want to specify a different extent size, you can enable this option by clicking Settings → GUI Preferences → General and checking Advanced pool settings , as shown in Figure 6-5.\n\nFigure 6-5 Advanced pool settings\n\nFigure 6-5 Advanced pool settings\n\nWhen advanced pool settings are enabled, you can additionally select an extent size at creation time, as shown in Figure 6-6 on page 195.", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Figure 6-4 Create Pool dialog box\n\nFigure 6-5 Advanced pool settings\n\nMark the Data Reduction check box to create the Data Reduction Pool. Leaving it unmarked creates a standard storage pool.\n\nA standard storage pool that is created by using the GUI has a default extent size of 1 GB. Data Reduction Pools have a default extent size of 4 GB. The size of the extent is selected at creation time and cannot be changed later. \n\nIf you want to specify a different extent size, you can enable this option by clicking Settings GUI Preferences → General and checking Advanced pool settings , as shown in Figure 6-5.\n\nWhen advanced pool settings are enabled, you can additionally select an extent size at creation time, as shown in Figure 6-6 on page 195.\n\n194 Implementing the IBM Storwize V7000 with IBM Spectrum Virtualize V8.2.1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.964787914549915, + "doc_id": "2cca91a2c3c3325fc364588876687dc1181d306bad09f1fa11c54a049ba4c050", + "edit_distance": 0.5707762557077626, + "f1_score": 0.9736842105263158, + "meteor": 0.9431581277130454, + "precision": 0.9736842105263158, + "pred_md": "8459ch06.fm\n\nDraft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n144\n\nRed Hat OpenShift and IBM Cloud Paks on IBM Power Systems: Volume 1\n\nIf the details provided by the oc get command are not sufficient, additional information about the resource can be retrieved by using the oc describe RESOURCE\\_TYPE RESOURCE\\_NAME command. Unlike the oc get command, there is no way to iterate through all of the different resources by type. Although most major resources can be described, this functionality is not available across all resources. To display detailed information about a Pod resource use the following command:\n\n```\noc describe pod docker-registry-3-4flql Name: docker-registry-3-4flql Namespace: default Priority: 0 PriorityClassName: Node: mstnode02.domain.example.com/192.168.11.203 Start Time: Thu, 07 Nov 2019 16:09:12 +0000 Labels: deployment=docker-registry-3 deploymentconfig=docker-registry docker-registry=default Annotations: openshift.io/deployment-config.latest-version=3 openshift.io/deployment-config.name=docker-registry openshift.io/deployment.name=docker-registry-3 openshift.io/scc=restricted Status: Running IP: 10.130.0.48 ... Output truncated ... Volumes: registry-storage: Type: PersistentVolumeClaim (a reference to a PersistentVolumeClaim in the same namespace) ClaimName: registry-pvc ReadOnly: false registry-token-zg2tb: Type: Secret (a volume populated by a Secret) SecretName: registry-token-zg2tb Optional: false QoS Class: Burstable Node-Selectors: node-role.kubernetes.io/infra=true Tolerations: node.kubernetes.io/memory-pressure:NoSchedule Events: \n```\n\n## Use the oc export RESOURCE\\_TYPE RESOURCE\\_NAME [-o OUTPUT\\_FORMAT]\n\ncommand to export a definition of a resource. Typical use cases include creating a backup, or to aid in modifying a definition. By default, the export command prints out the object representation in YAML format, but this can be changed by providing the -o option.\n\nUse the oc create command to create resources from a resource definition. Typically, this is paired with the oc export command for editing definitions.\n\nUse the oc delete RESOURCE\\_TYPE RESOURCE\\_NAME command to remove a resource from the OpenShift cluster.\n\nNote: A fundamental understanding of the OpenShift architecture is needed because deleting managed resources such as Pods results in newer instances of those resources being automatically recreated.\n\nThe oc new-app command can create application Pods to run on OpenShift in many different ways. It can create Pods from existing docker images, from Dockerfiles, and from raw source code using the Source-to-Image (S2I) process. The command can create a service, a deployment configuration, and a build configuration if source code is used.\n\nUse the oc exec POD\\_NAME COMMAND command to execute commands against a Pod:", + "recall": 0.9736842105263158, + "true_md": "8459ch06.fm\n\nDraft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\nIf the details provided by the oc get command are not sufficient, additional information about the resource can be retrieved by using the oc describe RESOURCE\\_TYPE RESOURCE\\_NAME command. Unlike the oc get command, there is no way to iterate through all of the different resources by type. Although most major resources can be described, this functionality is not available across all resources. To display detailed information about a Pod resource use the following command:\n\nUse the oc export RESOURCE\\_TYPE RESOURCE\\_NAME [-o OUTPUT\\_FORMAT] command to export a definition of a resource. Typical use cases include creating a backup, or to aid in modifying a definition. By default, the export command prints out the object representation in YAML format, but this can be changed by providing the -o option.\n\nUse the oc delete RESOURCE\\_TYPE RESOURCE\\_NAME command to remove a resource from the OpenShift cluster. \n\nUse the oc create command to create resources from a resource definition. Typically, this is paired with the oc export command for editing definitions.\n\noc describe pod docker-registry-3-4flql Name: docker-registry-3-4flql Namespace: default Priority: 0 PriorityClassName: <none> Node: mstnode02.domain.example.com/192.168.11.203 Start Time: Thu, 07 Nov 2019 16:09:12 +0000 Labels: deployment=docker-registry-3 deploymentconfig=docker-registry docker-registry=default Annotations: openshift.io/deployment-config.latest-version=3 openshift.io/deployment-config.name=docker-registry openshift.io/deployment.name=docker-registry-3 openshift.io/scc=restricted Status: Running IP: 10.130.0.48 ... Output truncated ... Volumes: registry-storage: Type: PersistentVolumeClaim (a reference to a PersistentVolumeClaim in the s ame namespace) ClaimName: registry-pvc ReadOnly: false registry-token-zg2tb: Type: Secret (a volume populated by a Secret) SecretName: registry-token-zg2tb Optional: false QoS Class: Burstable Node-Selectors: node-role.kubernetes.io/infra=true Tolerations: node.kubernetes.io/memory-pressure:NoSchedule Events: <none>\n\nNote: A fundamental understanding of the OpenShift architecture is needed because deleting managed resources such as Pods results in newer instances of those resources being automatically recreated.\n\nThe oc new-app command can create application Pods to run on OpenShift in many different ways. It can create Pods from existing docker images, from Dockerfiles, and from raw source code using the Source-to-Image (S2I) process. The command can create a service, a deployment configuration, and a build configuration if source code is used.\n\nUse the oc exec POD\\_NAME COMMAND command to execute commands against a Pod:\n\n144 Red Hat OpenShift and IBM Cloud Paks on IBM Power Systems: Volume 1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9419736695302646, + "doc_id": "61cd352beaae9e020c39b754fa5947dfb9fc4bd8a26d5185b5359f77a6e21720", + "edit_distance": 0.7777777777777778, + "f1_score": 0.9742268041237113, + "meteor": 0.8162520730103747, + "precision": 0.9742268041237113, + "pred_md": "## Setting up Secure Sockets Layer\n\nSetting up Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is optional. If you decide to use SSL, complete the following steps:\n\n- 1. Create the key database and store it in the config subdirectory of the Content Manager OnDemand server installation directory:\n\n/opt/IBM/ondemand/V9.5/config\n\nTo create the key database, run a command that is similar to the following command: gsk8capicmd\\_64 -keydb -create -db \"ondemand.kdb\" -pw \"myKeyDBpasswd\" -stash -populate\n\n- 2. Create a digital certificate.\n- 3. Configure the Content Manager OnDemand for AIX server. Add the following lines to the ARS.INI file:\n\nSSL\\_PORT= port\\_number SSL\\_KEYRING\\_FILE=/opt/IBM/ondemand/V9.5/config/ondemand.kdb SSL\\_KEYRING\\_STASH=/opt/IBM/ondemand/V9.5/config/ondemand.sth SSL\\_KEYRING\\_LABEL=IBM Content Manager OnDemand SSL\\_CLNT\\_USE\\_SSL=0\n\n- 4. Restart the Content Manager OnDemand server.\n\n## Storing user IDs and passwords in a stash file\n\nYou can store user IDs and passwords in stash files (encrypted files). By storing passwords in a stash file, you can improve security because you do not need to specify the password on the command line, where the password might be visible to others.\n\nTo store the user IDs and passwords in a stash file, complete the following steps:\n\n- 1. Create a stash file by running the arsstash command. The command prompts you for the password. For a description of the syntax of the arsstash command and an example of the command, see 'Syntax of the ARSSTASH command' in the IBM Content Manager OnDemand for Multiplatforms - Installation and Configuration Guide , SC18-9232.\n- 2. Save the stash file in a directory with limited access to that file. Y ou can set this access by using file permissions.\n\nWhen you configure the Content Manager OnDemand instance, you modify the ARS.INI file to include the SRVR\\_OD\\_STASH parameter and specify the directory that you specified in step 2:\n\nSRVR\\_OD\\_STASH=/opt/IBM/ondemand/V9.5/config/ars.stash\n\n## Installing and configuring Tivoli Storage Manager\n\nBefore you begin, familiarize yourself with configuring and managing server storage, as described in the Tivoli Storage Manager for AIX Administrator's Guide, GC32-0768 In . addition, the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager for AIX Administrator's Reference , SC32-0123, provides information about all of the commands that are used in this section. This book is your primary reference when you work with IBM Tivoli Storage Manager. If you encounter problems while you configure Tivoli Storage Manager or if the examples in this section do not provide the information that you need to define your server storage devices, policies, and operations, see these Tivoli Storage Manager publications.\n\nChapter 2. Setting up a Content Manager OnDemand instance\n\n21", + "recall": 0.9742268041237113, + "true_md": "## Setting up Secure Sockets Layer\n\n## Storing user IDs and passwords in a stash file\n\n## Installing and configuring Tivoli Storage Manager\n\nSetting up Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is optional. If you decide to use SSL, complete the following steps:\n\n/opt/IBM/ondemand/V9.5/config \n\nTo create the key database, run a command that is similar to the following command:\n\ngsk8capicmd\\_64 -keydb -create -db \"ondemand.kdb\" -pw \"myKeyDBpasswd\" -stash -populate\n\nYou can store user IDs and passwords in stash files (encrypted files). By storing passwords in a stash file, you can improve security because you do not need to specify the password on the command line, where the password might be visible to others.\n\nTo store the user IDs and passwords in a stash file, complete the following steps:\n\nWhen you configure the Content Manager OnDemand instance, you modify the ARS.INI file to include the SRVR\\_OD\\_STASH parameter and specify the directory that you specified in step 2:\n\nSRVR\\_OD\\_STASH=/opt/IBM/ondemand/V9.5/config/ars.stash\n\nBefore you begin, familiarize yourself with configuring and managing server storage, as described in the Tivoli Storage Manager for AIX Administrator’s Guide, GC32-0768 . In addition, the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager for AIX Administrator’s Reference , SC32-0123, provides information about all of the commands that are used in this section. This book is your primary reference when you work with IBM Tivoli Storage Manager. If you encounter problems while you configure Tivoli Storage Manager or if the examples in this section do not provide the information that you need to define your server storage devices, policies, and operations, see these Tivoli Storage Manager publications.\n\nChapter 2. Setting up a Content Manager OnDemand instance 21\n\n- 1. Create the key database and store it in the config subdirectory of the Content Manager OnDemand server installation directory:\n\n- 2. Create a digital certificate.\n\n- 3. Configure the Content Manager OnDemand for AIX server. Add the following lines to the ARS.INI file:\n\n- 4. Restart the Content Manager OnDemand server.\n\n- 1. Create a stash file by running the arsstash command. The command prompts you for the password. For a description of the syntax of the arsstash command and an example of the command, see “Syntax of the ARSSTASH command” in the IBM Content Manager OnDemand for Multiplatforms - Installation and Configuration Guide , SC18-9232.\n\n- 2. Save the stash file in a directory with limited access to that file. You can set this access by using file permissions.\n\nSSL\\_PORT= port\\_number SSL\\_KEYRING\\_FILE=/opt/IBM/ondemand/V9.5/config/ondemand.kdb SSL\\_KEYRING\\_STASH=/opt/IBM/ondemand/V9.5/config/ondemand.sth SSL\\_KEYRING\\_LABEL=IBM Content Manager OnDemand SSL\\_CLNT\\_USE\\_SSL=0" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8697543123512682, + "doc_id": "ddbb3d770b6a39fc99732815a2a7fec82d7e9f18282a8998c1c4d4d2679dc626", + "edit_distance": 0.5664939550949913, + "f1_score": 0.9539170506912442, + "meteor": 0.8271041336156578, + "precision": 0.9672897196261683, + "pred_md": "- -Shared storage (volumes presented to more than one host) that is required in your environment.\n- /SM590000 Define the amount of internal storage that you plan to provision from internal arrays. Consider the following information:\n- -Amount of storage in each drive tier that you plan to deploy.\n- -The number of drives that you must provision the required storage. Consider RAID levels, number of drives per array, and hot spares for each tier. Define the number of drives and their form factor.\n\nNote: Use DRAID 6 as the default RAID level for your arrays.\n\n- -The number of expansion enclosures you must hold the drives required to provision the required storage.\n- /SM590000 Per host:\n- -Volume capacity.\n- -Logical unit number (LUN) quantity.\n- -Volume sizes.\n\nNote: When planning the capacities, note if the numbers state the net storage capacity (that is, available to be used by applications running on any host), or gross capacity, which includes overhead for spare drives (both because of RAID redundancy and planned hot spare drives) and for file system metadata.\n\nFor file system metadata, include overhead incurred by all layers of storage virtualization. In particular, if you plan storage for virtual machines whose drives are actualized as files on a parallel file system, include metadata overhead for the storage virtualization technology that is used by your hypervisor software.\n\n- /SM590000 Decide whether you must plan for more than one site. For multi-site deployment, review the extra configuration requirements that are imposed.\n- /SM590000 Define the number of clusters and the number of enclosures (1 - 4) for each cluster. The number of necessary I/O Groups depends on the overall performance requirements and the number of hosts you plan to attach.\n- /SM590000 Decide whether you are going to use N\\_Port ID Virtualization (NPIV). If you plan to use NPIV, review the extra configuration requirements that are imposed.\n- /SM590000 Design the SAN according to the requirement for high availability (HA) and best performance. Consider the total number of ports and the bandwidth that is needed at each link, especially Inter-Switch Links (ISLs). Consider ISL trunking for improved performance. Separately collect requirements for Fibre Channel and IP-based storage network.\n\nNote: Check and carefully count the required ports. Separately note the ports that are dedicated for extended links. You might need more long-wave gigabit interface converters (GBICs), especially in an enhanced stretched cluster (ESC) or HyperSwap environment.\n\n- /SM590000 Define a naming convention for the Storwize V7000 clusters, nodes, hosts, and storage objects.\n- /SM590000 Define the Storwize V7000 service Internet Protocol (IP) addresses and the system's management IP addresses.\n\nChapter 3. Planning\n\n45", + "recall": 0.9409090909090909, + "true_md": "- – Shared storage (volumes presented to more than one host) that is required in your environment.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Define the amount of internal storage that you plan to provision from internal arrays. Consider the following information:\n\n- – Amount of storage in each drive tier that you plan to deploy.\n\n- – The number of drives that you must provision the required storage. Consider RAID levels, number of drives per array, and hot spares for each tier. Define the number of drives and their form factor.\n\n- – The number of expansion enclosures you must hold the drives required to provision the required storage.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Per host: \n\n- – Volume capacity.\n\n- – Logical unit number (LUN) quantity.\n\n- – Volume sizes.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Decide whether you must plan for more than one site. For multi-site deployment, review the extra configuration requirements that are imposed.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Define the number of clusters and the number of enclosures (1 - 4) for each cluster. The number of necessary I/O Groups depends on the overall performance requirements and the number of hosts you plan to attach.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Decide whether you are going to use N\\_Port ID Virtualization (NPIV). If you plan to use NPIV, review the extra configuration requirements that are imposed.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Design the SAN according to the requirement for high availability (HA) and best performance. Consider the total number of ports and the bandwidth that is needed at each link, especially Inter-Switch Links (ISLs). Consider ISL trunking for improved performance. Separately collect requirements for Fibre Channel and IP-based storage network.\n\nNote: Use DRAID 6 as the default RAID level for your arrays.\n\nNote: When planning the capacities, note if the numbers state the net storage capacity (that is, available to be used by applications running on any host), or gross capacity, which includes overhead for spare drives (both because of RAID redundancy and planned hot spare drives) and for file system metadata. \n\nFor file system metadata, include overhead incurred by all layers of storage virtualization. In particular, if you plan storage for virtual machines whose drives are actualized as files on a parallel file system, include metadata overhead for the storage virtualization technology that is used by your hypervisor software.\n\nNote: Check and carefully count the required ports. Separately note the ports that are dedicated for extended links. You might need more long-wave gigabit interface converters (GBICs), especially in an enhanced stretched cluster (ESC) or HyperSwap environment.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Define a naming convention for the Storwize V7000 clusters, nodes, hosts, and storage objects.\n\n- GLYPH<SM590000> Define the Storwize V7000 service Internet Protocol (IP) addresses and the system’s management IP addresses.\n\nChapter 3. Planning 45" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "4e8d8575c0b2704853d82245aed7a65b450ee647aa2187d70997f73914ec8fbe", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.999999950385485, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "8459ch05.fm\n\nDraft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n## 5.1.3 Enterprise AI workloads\n\nAI holds tremendous promise for facilitating digital transformations, accelerating innovation, enhancing the efficiency of internal processes, identifying new marketplace opportunities and more. For organizations to take advantage of AI and cognitive technologies such as machine learning and deep learning, they need powerful, accelerated servers that can handle these data-intensive workloads. Accelerated servers can also play a vital role in supercomputing. With the correct accelerated servers, researchers and scientists can explore more complex, data- intensive problems and deliver results faster than before.\n\nThe IBM Power Systems Accelerated Compute Server, as shown in Table 5-5, help reduce the time to value for enterprise AI initiatives. The IBM PowerAI Enterprise platform combines this server with popular open source deep learning frameworks and efficient AI development tools to accelerate the processes of building, training and inferring deep learning neural networks. Using PowerAI Enterprise, organizations can deploy a fully optimized and supported AI platform with blazing performance, proven dependability and resilience.\n\nTable 5-5 IBM Power Systems - Accelerated Compute servers\n\n72\n\nRed Hat OpenShift and IBM Cloud Paks on IBM Power Systems: Volume 1", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "8459ch05.fm\n\nDraft Document for Review December 11, 2019 1:55 pm\n\n## 5.1.3 Enterprise AI workloads\n\nAI holds tremendous promise for facilitating digital transformations, accelerating innovation, enhancing the efficiency of internal processes, identifying new marketplace opportunities and more. For organizations to take advantage of AI and cognitive technologies such as machine learning and deep learning, they need powerful, accelerated servers that can handle these data-intensive workloads. Accelerated servers can also play a vital role in supercomputing. With the correct accelerated servers, researchers and scientists can explore more complex, data- intensive problems and deliver results faster than before.\n\nThe IBM Power Systems Accelerated Compute Server, as shown in Table 5-5, help reduce the time to value for enterprise AI initiatives. The IBM PowerAI Enterprise platform combines this server with popular open source deep learning frameworks and efficient AI development tools to accelerate the processes of building, training and inferring deep learning neural networks. Using PowerAI Enterprise, organizations can deploy a fully optimized and supported AI platform with blazing performance, proven dependability and resilience. \n\nTable 5-5 IBM Power Systems - Accelerated Compute servers\n\n72 Red Hat OpenShift and IBM Cloud Paks on IBM Power Systems: Volume 1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "a038565be7760bc2f2603133c9b8fa0f5e08ddc84f91b6fea22830e0d0c289d0", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.999999950385485, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "13\n\n2.3.2. Допускается предусматривать трансформируемые пространства для многофункционального назначения (трансформируемые) (актовый зал, обеденный зал, рекреации, библиотека, спортивный зал, учебные классы, аудитории) в соответствии с задачами образовательного процесса, при условии их оборудования согласно Правилам. Для обеспечения передвижения инвалидов и лиц с ограниченными возможностями здоровья по собственной территории и объектам хозяйствующим субъектом должны проводится мероприятия по созданию доступной среды для инвалидов.\n\n2.3.3 Помещения и оборудование, используемые для приготовления пищи, их размещение и размер должны обеспечивать последовательность (поточность) технологических процессов, исключающих встречные потоки сырья, полуфабрикатов и готовой продукции, использованной и чистой посуды, а также встречного движения посетителей и персонала. Не допускается использование пищевого сырья в столовых, работающих на полуфабрикатах.\n\nПроизводство готовых блюд осуществляется в соответствии с рецептурой и технологией приготовления блюд, отраженной в технологических картах, при условии соблюдения санитарно-эпидемиологических требований и гигиенических нормативов.\n\n2.4. В объектах должны соблюдаться следующие требования:\n\n2.4.1. Входы в здания оборудуются тамбурами или воздушно-тепловыми завесами если иное не определено главой Ш Правил.\n\n2.4.2. Количество обучающихся, воспитанников и отдыхающих не должно превышать установленное пунктами 3.1.1, 3.4.14 Правил и гигиенические нормативы.\n\n2.4.3. Обучающиеся, воспитанники и отдыхающие обеспечиваются мебелью в соответствии с их ростом и возрастом. Функциональные размеры мебели должны соответствовать обязательным требованиям, установленным техническим регламентом.\n\nМебель для учебных заведений (парты, столы и стулья) обеспечивается цветовой маркировкой в соответствии с ростовой группой (кроме палаточных лагерей и организаций, осуществляющих образовательную деятельность по образовательным программам высшего образования). Цветовая маркировка наносится на боковую наружную поверхность стола и стула.\n\nПарты (столы) расставляются в следующем порядке: меньшие по размеру - ближе к доске, большие по размеру – дальше от доски. Конторки размещают на последних от доски рядах.\n\nПри организации образовательной деятельности без использования учебной доски мебель для учебных заведений может быть расставлена в ином порядке.\n\nДетей рассаживают с учетом роста, наличия заболеваний органов дыхания, слуха и зрения.\n\n6 ТР ТС 025/2012 «Технический регламент Таможенного союза. О безопасности мебельной продукции», утвержденный решением Совета Евразийской экономической комиссии от 15.06.2012 № 32 (Официальный сайт Комиссии Таможенного союза Һір://угугу.іѕои2.ги/, 18.06.2012) (далее – ТР ТС 025/2012)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "326e6bbafc782618d1f0b1e5cec96c52f4bec1d3f23b98f2df170ef588050d62", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.999999950385485, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "47\n\nорганизации отдыха и досуга детей. Продолжительность смен в осенние, зимние и весенние каникулы должна быть не менее 7 календарных дней.\n\nПерерыв между сменами в летнее время для проведения генеральной уборки с применением дезинфицирующих средств и санитарной обработки должен составлять не менее одних суток.\n\nВ целях профилактики клещевого энцефалита, клещевого боррелиоза и геморрагической лихорадки с почечным синдромом и других инфекционных болезней перед открытием смены необходимо организовать и провести противоклещевую (акарицидную) обработку территории и мероприятия по борьбе с грызунами. После проведения обработок должен быть осуществлен контроль качества проведенных обработок против клещей и грызунов.\n\nГенеральная уборка собственной территории и всех помещений проводится перед началом каждой смены с применением моющих и дезинфицирующих средств.\n\nЗаезд детей должен осуществляться в период не более двух календарных дней. Во время заезда проводится бесконтактная термометрия каждого ребенка и сопровождающих его взрослых с фиксированием результатов в журнале.\n\nПрием детей осуществляется при наличии справки о состоянии здоровья ребенка, отъезжающего в организацию отдыха детей и их оздоровления, в том числе содержащую сведения об отсутствии в течение 21 календарного дня контактов с больными инфекционными заболеваниями!?. Указанные сведения вносятся в справку не ранее чем за 3 рабочих дня до отъезда.\n\nДети-инвалиды и дети с ограниченными возможностями здоровья принимаются в организации, в которых созданы соответствующие условия для их пребывания.\n\n3.11.3. На собственной территории выделяют следующие зоны: жилая, физкультурно-оздоровительная, хозяйственная.\n\nВстречи детей с посетителями, в том числе с родителями (законными представителями) детей проводятся в соответствии с установленным руководителем Организации распорядком дня и в специальной зоне.\n\nНе допускается пребывание на собственной территории Организации посетителей, в том числе родителей (законных представителей) детей, вне специально установленных мест.\n\n3.11.4. Минимальный набор помещений организаций отдыха детей и их оздоровления с круглосуточным пребыванием включает: спальные комнаты; комнаты воспитателя; помещения для дневного пребывания детей; умывальные с мойками для ног; душевые с раздевальными отдельно для мальчиков и\n\n13 форма № 079/у «Медицинская справка о состоянии здоровья ребенка, отъезжающего в организацию отдыха детей и их оздоровления» утверждена приказом Минздрава России от 15.12.2014 № 834н «Об утверждении унифицированных форм медицинской документации, используемых в медицинских организациях, оказывающих медицинскую помощь в амбулаторных условиях, и порядков по их заполнению» (зарегистрирован Минюстом России 20.02.2015, регистрационный № 36160) с изменениями, внесенными приказами Минздрава России 09.01.2018 № 2н (зарегистрирован Минюстом России 04.04.2018, регистрационный № 50614) и от 02.11.2020 № 1186н (зарегистрирован Минюстом России от 27.11.2020, регистрационный № 61121)." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "299b84b22836d03fcfcebb987d4a8f1ecb1b77fb514e260160d3b9cd19bb2e09", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.999999950385485, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "и лабораторных исследований, сведениями о прививках, перенесенных инфекционных заболеваниях, о прохождении профессиональной гигиенической подготовки и аттестации с допуском к работе.\n\n1.6. Эксплуатация земельного участка, используемого хозяйствующим субъектом на праве собственности или ином законном основании (далее – собственная территория), а также объектов иными юридическими и физическими лицами допускается в соответствии с заявленным хозяйствующим субъектом видом деятельности при условии соблюдения Правил.\n\n1.7. Проведение всех видов ремонтных работ в присутствии детей не допускается.\n\n1.8. На объектах должен осуществляться производственный контроль за соблюдением санитарных правил и гигиенических нормативов.\n\n1.9. При нахождении детей и молодежи на объектах более 4 часов обеспечивается возможность организации горячего питания.\n\nПитание детей и молодежи может осуществляться с привлечением сторонних организаций, юридических лиц или индивидуальных предпринимателей, осуществляющих деятельность по производству готовых блюд, кулинарных изделий и деятельность по их реализации.\n\n1.10. В случаях возникновения групповых инфекционных и неинфекционных заболеваний, аварийных ситуаций в работе систем электроснабжения, теплоснабжения, водоснабжения, водоотведения, технологического и холодильного оборудования, которые создают угрозу возникновения и распространения инфекционных заболеваний и отравлений, хозяйствующий субъект в течение двух часов с момента выявления информирует территориальные органы федерального органа исполнительной власти, осуществляющего федеральный государственный санитарно- эпидемиологический надзор, и обеспечивает проведение санитарно- противоэпидемических (профилактических) мероприятий.\n\n1.12. Количественные значения факторов, характеризующих условия воспитания, обучения и оздоровления детей и молодежи должны соответствовать гигиеническим нормативам.\n\n## П. Общие требования\n\n2.1. При размещении объектов хозяйствующим субъектом должны соблюдаться следующие требования:\n\n2.1.1. Через собственную территорию не должны проходить магистральные нефтепроводы, газопроводы и нефтепродуктопроводы, сети инженерно- технического обеспечения, предназначенные для обеспечения населенных пунктов, а также изолированные (транзитные) тепловые сети, которыми непосредственно не осуществляется теплоснабжение объектов.\n\n2.1.2. Расстояние от организаций, реализующих программы дошкольного, начального общего, основного общего и среднего общего образования до жилых" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "e3af79d5091bfa31dfa805fa69f98d7b90a0a47ab0f1d35d17e9ac90c1691185", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.999999950385485, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "22\n\n2.8.3. Остекление окон выполняется из цельного стекла. Не допускается наличие трещин и иное нарушение целостности стекла. Чистка оконных стекол проводится по мере их загрязнения.\n\n2.8.4. Конструкция регулируемых солнцезащитных устройств на окнах в исходном положении не должна уменьшать светоактивную площадь оконного проема.\n\nЗашторивание окон в спальных помещениях проводится во время дневного и ночного сна, в остальное время шторы должны быть раздвинуты в целях обеспечения естественного освещения помещения.\n\n2.8.5. Система общего освещения обеспечивается потолочными светильниками с разрядными, люминесцентными или светодиодными лампами со спектрами светоизлучения: белый, тепло-белый, естественно-белый.\n\nНе допускается в одном помещении использовать разные типы ламп, а также лампы с разным светооизлучением.\n\nУровни искусственной освещенности для детей дошкольного возраста в групповых (игровых) - не менее 400 люкс, в учебных помещениях для детей старше 7 лет – не менее 300 люкс, в учебных кабинетах черчения и рисования, изостудиях, мастерских живописи, рисунка и скульптуры – 300 люкс, в мастерских трудового обучения – 400 люкс.\n\n2.8.6. Осветительные приборы должны иметь светорассеивающую конструкцию: в помещениях, предназначенных для занятий физкультурой и спортом – защитную, в помещениях пищеблока, душевых и в прачечной – пылевлагонепроницаемую.\n\n2.8.7. В спальных корпусах дополнительно предусматривается дежурное (ночное) освещение в рекреациях (коридорах).\n\n2.8.8. Для равномерного освещения помещений используются отделочные материалы, создающие матовую поверхность светлых оттенков с коэффициентом отражения от панелей стен не менее 0,55, потолка, верхней части стен и оконных откосов – не менее 0,7, мебели – не менее - 0,45.\n\nПри использовании декоративных элементов с яркой цветовой палитрой, их площадь не должна превышать 25% от общей площади поверхности стен помещения.\n\n2.8.9. Все источники искусственного освещения должны содержаться в исправном состоянии и не должны содержать следы загрязнений.\n\n2.8.10. Неисправные и перегоревшие люминесцентные лампы хранятся в отдельном помещении (месте) и направляют на утилизацию в порядке, установленном законодательством Российской Федерации.\n\n2.9. При организации профилактических и противоэпидемических мероприятий хозяйствующими субъектами должны соблюдаться следующие требования:\n\n2.9.1. Медицинская помощь в хозяйствующих субъектах осуществляется в соответствии с законодательством в сфере охраны здоровья.\n\n2.9.2. Медицинская деятельность в хозяйствующих субъектах осуществляется самостоятельно (при наличии санитарно-эпидемиологического" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "8318ebee75da559c8e54576eaee30ce427d154e7e944f26698fe6ee25d9c672f", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.999999950385485, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "2.4.10, 2.4.11 (абзацы первый, второй, пятый), 2.4.12 (абзац первый), 2.4.13, 2.4.14, 2.5.1, 2.5.3 (абзацы второй и третий), 2.5.4, 2.6.1, 2.6.5, 2.7.1 (абзацы первый и второй), 2.7.2, 2.7.4 (абзацы первый и второй), 2.8.1, 2.8.2 (абзацы первый и второй), 2.8.5 (абзац первый), 2.8.7, 2.8.8, 2.12.2 – ко всем хозяйствующим субъектам с учетом особенностей, определенных для отдельных видов организаций в соответствии с:\n\nпунктами 3.1.1 (абзац первый), 3.1.2 (абзацы первый – четвертый), 3.1.3 (абзацы первый – седьмой, девятый, десятый), 3.1.7 (абзацы первый, второй, четвертый, шестой), 3.1.11 (абзацы первый – четвертый, шестой – восьмой) – в отношении организаций, реализующих образовательные программы дошкольного образования, осуществляющих присмотр и уход за детьми, в том числе размещенным в жилых и нежилых помещениях жилищного фонда и нежилых зданий,\n\nпунктами 3.2.1 (абзац первый и второй), 3.2.4, 3.2.7 – в отношении детских центров, центров развития детей и иных хозяйствующих субъектов, реализующих образовательные программы дошкольного образования и (или) осуществляющих присмотр и уход за детьми, размещенным в нежилых помещениях,\n\nпунктами 3.3.1 (абзац первый и второй), 3.3.3 – в отношении детских игровых комнат, размещаемым в торгово-развлекательных и культурно- досуговых центрах, павильонах, аэропортах, железнодорожных вокзалах и иных объектах нежилого назначения,\n\nпунктами 3.4.1 (абзац первый), 3.4.2, 3.4.3 (абзацы первый - третий), 3.4.4, 3.4.5, 3.4.9 – 3.4.13, 3.4.14 (абзацы первый – четвертый, шестой) – в отношении организаций, реализующих образовательные программы начального общего, основного общего и среднего общего образования,\n\nпунктами 3.6.1, 3.6.3 (абзацы первый – четвертый) – в отношении организаций дополнительного образования и физкультурно-спортивных организаций;\n\nпунктами 3.7.2, 3.7.4, 3.7.5 - в отношении организаций для детей-сирот и детей, оставшихся без попечения родителей;\n\nпунктами 3.8.1 – 3.8.4 – в отношении организаций социального обслуживания семьи и детей,\n\nпунктами 3.9.1, 3.9.2 (абзацы первый и второй), 3.9.3 (абзацы первый, второй, четвертый, шестой), 3.9.4 – в отношении профессиональных образовательных организаций,\n\nпунктами 3.10.1, 3.10.2 – в отношении образовательных организаций высшего образования,\n\nпунктами 3.11.3 (абзац первый), 3.11.4, 3.11.5, 3.11.6 – в отношении загородных стационарных детских оздоровительных лагерей с круглосуточным пребыванием,\n\nпунктом 3.15 — в отношении хозяйствующих субъектов, предоставляющих услуги временного размещению организованных групп детей в общежитиях, гостиницах, загородных отелях, туристических базах, базах отдыха." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "5e985f601a4616c2f168300f855f697ebad33fcab1fd8079b2c55eb45f0f4a5f", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.999999950385485, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "27\n\nгорячей водой с мылом или иным моющим средством; нагрудники из ткани - стираются.\n\nИгрушки моются в специально выделенных, промаркированных емкостях.\n\nПриобретенные игрушки (за исключением мягконабивных) перед использованием детьми моются проточной водой с мылом или иным моющим средством, безвредным для здоровья детей.\n\nПенолатексные, ворсованные игрушки и мягконабивныеы игрушки обрабатываются согласно инструкции производителя.\n\n` Игрушки, которые не подлежат влажной обработке (мытью, стирке), допускается использовать в качестве демонстрационного материала.\n\nИгрушки моются ежедневно в конце дня, а в группах для детей младенческого и раннего возраста - 2 раза в день. Кукольная одежда стирается по мере загрязнения с использованием детского мыла и проглаживается.\n\nТуалеты, столовые, вестибюли, рекреации подлежат влажной уборке после каждой перемены.\n\nУборка учебных и вспомогательных помещений проводится после окончания занятий, в отсутствие обучающихся, при открытых окнах или фрамугах.\n\nПри организации обучения в несколько смен, уборка проводиться по окончании каждой смены.\n\nУборка помещений интерната при общеобразовательной организации проводится не реже 1 раза в день.\n\n2.11.3. Уборочный инвентарь маркируется в зависимости от назначения помещений и видов работ. Инвентарь для уборки туалетов должен иметь иную маркировку и храниться отдельно от другого инвентаря.\n\nПо окончании уборки весь инвентарь промывается с использованием моющих средств, ополаскивается проточной водой и просушивается.\n\nИнвентарь для туалетов после использования обрабатывается дезинфекционными средствами в соответствии с инструкцией по их применению.\n\n2.11.4. Ежедневная уборка туалетов, умывальных, душевых, помещений для оказания медицинской помощи, обеденных залов столовых, буфетов, производственных цехов пищеблока, проводится с использованием дезинфицирующих средств. Дверные ручки, поручни, выключатели ежедневно протираются с использованием дезинфицирующих средств.\n\nДля технических целей в туалетных помещениях устанавливается отдельный водопроводный кран.\n\nСанитарно-техническое оборудование ежедневно должно обеззараживаться. Сидения на унитазах, ручки сливных бачков и ручки дверей моются ежедневно теплой водой с мылом или иным моющим средством, безвредным для здоровья человека. Горшки моются после каждого использования при помощи щеток и моющих средств. Ванны, раковины, унитазы чистят дважды в день или по мере загрязнения щетками с использованием моющих и дезинфицирующих средств.\n\n2.11.5. Смена постельного белья и полотенец осуществляется по мере" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "64d526c40ba8eb33bd48f89ccd78373196989d7336ca2f87d8f0a29ce3cd9ed8", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.999999950385485, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "П\n\nдопускается использование спортивных сооружений и площадок, расположенных за пределами собственной территории и оборудованных в соответствии с требованиями санитарного законодательства.\n\n2.2.3. На собственной территории должна быть оборудована площадка, расположенная в непосредственной близости от въезда на эту территорию, с водонепроницаемым твердым покрытием для сбора отходов. Размеры площадки должны превышать площадь основания контейнеров на 1 м во все стороны.\n\nНа площадке устанавливаются контейнеры (мусоросборники) закрывающимися крышками.\n\nДопускается использование иных специальных закрытых конструкций для сбора отходов, в том числе с размещением их на смежных с собственной территорией контейнерных площадках жилой застройки.\n\n2.2.4. Покрытие проездов, подходов и дорожек на собственной территории не должно иметь дефектов.\n\n2.2.5. Расположение на собственной территории построек и сооружений, функционально не связанных с деятельностью хозяйствующего субъекта не допускается.\n\n2.2.6. На собственной территории должно быть обеспечено отсутствие грызунов и насекомых, в том числе клещей, способами, предусмотренными соответствующими санитарными правилами.\n\n2.3. В отношении объектов (зданиям, строениям, сооружениям), используемых хозяйствующими субъектами при осуществлении деятельности, должны соблюдаться следующие требования:\n\n2.3.1. Планировка зданий, строений, сооружений должна обеспечивать соблюдение гигиенических нормативов и обеспечивать доступность услуг, оказываемых для инвалидов и лицам с ограниченными возможностями здоровья.\n\nПри наличии нескольких зданий, функционально связанных между собой, находящихся на одной собственной территории, должны предусматриваться отапливаемые переходы из одного здания в другое для исключения перемещения детей (молодежи) по улице, за исключением загородных стационарных детских оздоровительных лагерей с круглосуточным пребыванием. Неотапливаемые переходы допускаются: при следующих климатических условиях:\n\nсреднемесячной температуре воздуха в январе от -5°С до +2°С, средней скорости ветра за три зимних месяца 5 и более м/с, среднемесячной температуре воздуха в июле от +21°С до +25°С, среднемесячной относительной влажности воздуха в июле – более 75%,\n\nсреднемесячной температуре воздуха в январе от -15°С до +6°С, среднемесячной температуре воздуха в июле от +22°С и выше, среднемесячной относительной влажности воздуха в июле – более 50%.\n\nОрганизации, реализующие программы начального общего, основного общего и среднего общего образования размещаются на собственной территории в отдельно стоящих зданиях.\n\nОрганизации, реализующие программы начального общего, основного" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "72cf11dab4c318ea44aaf17329914afc0920c0f8169a4b5899496f10316a4227", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.999999950385485, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "32\n\nобработку и дезинфекцию.\n\n3.1.5. В игровых комнатах для детей от 1,5 лет и старше столы и стулья устанавливаются согласно общему количеству детей в группах.\n\n3.1.6. Расстановка кроватей должна обеспечивать свободный проход детей между ними.\n\nПри использовании раскладных кроватей в каждой групповом помещении предусматривается место для их хранения, а также место для индивидуального хранения постельных принадлежностей и белья.\n\nКоличество кроватей должно соответствовать общему количеству детей, находящихся в группе.\n\n3.1.7. Туалеты дошкольной организации, организации, осуществляющей присмотр и уход за детьми, делятся на умывальную зону и зону санитарных узлов. В умывальной зоне размещаются детские умывальники и душевой поддон В зоне санитарных узлов размещаются унитазы, которые обеспечиваются индивидуальными сидениями для каждого ребенка. В умывальные раковины для детей вода подается через смеситель.\n\nТуалеты для детей раннего возраста оборудуются в одном помещении. В нем устанавливаются умывальные раковины для детей, раковина и унитаз (в отдельной кабине) для персонала, шкаф (стеллаж) с ячейками для хранения индивидуальных горшков и слив для их обработки, детская ванна (для детей ясельного возраста) или душевой поддон, а также хозяйственный шкаф.\n\nИндивидуальные горшки маркируются по общему количеству детей.\n\nВ туалетной умывальной зоне дошкольной, средней, старшей и подготовительной групп устанавливаются умывальные раковины для детей, раковину и унитаз (в отдельной кабине) для персонала, а также детские унитазы. В старших и подготовительных группах туалетные комнаты (отдельные кабинки) оборудуются отдельно для мальчиков и девочек.\n\nНе допускается использование детского туалета персоналом.\n\nВ умывальной зоне устанавливаются вешалки для детских полотенец (отдельно для рук и ног), количество которых должно соответствовать общему количеству детей.\n\nПри круглосуточном режиме пребывания детей оборудуют ванные комнаты с душевыми кабинами (ваннами, поддонами).\n\n3.1.8. Ежедневный утренний прием детей проводится воспитателями и (или) медицинским работником, которые должны опрашивать родителей о состоянии здоровья детей, а также проводить бесконтактную термометрию. Заболевшие дети, а также дети с подозрением на наличие инфекционного заболевания к посещению не допускаются.\n\n3.1.9. Воспитатели и помощники воспитателя обеспечиваются санитарной одеждой из расчета не менее 2 комплектов на 1 человека. У помощника воспитателя дополнительно должны быть: фартук, колпак или косынка для надевания во время раздачи пищи, фартук для мытья посуды и отдельный халат для уборки помещений." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "1b5114fde0d87b0704b2674dbe0394737181bb32d2a9cd42786f0d1846579d10", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.999999950385485, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "4.4. У каждого ребенка, входящего в состав организованной группы детей, должна быть медицинская справка об отсутствии контакта с инфекционными больными, оформленная в период формирования группы не более чем за 3 рабочих дня до начала поездки.\n\n4.5. Не менее чем за 3 рабочих дня до отправления группы детей железнодорожным транспортом информация об организации указанной поездки направляется в территориальные органы, уполномоченные на осуществление федерального государственного санитарно-эпидемиологического надзора по месту отправления с указанием следующих сведений:\n\nнаименование или фамилия, имя, отчество (при наличии) организатора отдыха групп детей;\n\nадрес местонахождения организатора;\n\nдата выезда, станция отправления и назначения, номер поезда и вагона, его вид;\n\nколичество детей и сопровождающих;\n\nналичие медицинского сопровождения;\n\nнаименование и адрес конечного пункта назначения;\n\nпланируемый тип питания в пути следования.\n\n54" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "46abf6be9ffab02d69dc9b2a2aa060cdf034aa03a2808ef0ca3ffd48b625aa2f", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.999999950385485, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "29\n\nгрупп дошкольного возраста (от 3 до 7 лет) - не менее 2 м? на одного ребенка, без учета мебели и ее расстановки. Площадь спальной для детей до 3 дет должна составлять не менее 1,8 м? на ребенка, для детей от 3 до 7 лет – не менее 2,0 м2 не ребенка. Физкультурный зал для детей дошкольного возраста должен быть не менее 75 м2.\n\nДошкольное образование детей с ограниченными возможностями здоровья может быть организовано как совместно с другими детьми, так и в отдельных группах или в отдельных организациях, осуществляющих образовательную деятельность,\n\nКоличество воспитанников с ограниченными возможностями здоровья определяется исходя из расчета соблюдения нормы площади на одного воспитанника, а также соблюдения требований к расстановке мебели в соответствии с Правилами. Количество детей в группах компенсирующей направленности не должно превышать:\n\nдля детей с тяжелыми нарушениями речи - 6 детей в возрасте до 3 лети 10 детей в возрасте старше 3 лет,\n\nдля детей с фонетико-фонематическими нарушениями речи - 12 детей в возрасте старше 3 лет,\n\nдля глухих детей - 6 детей для обеих возрастных групп,\n\nдля слабослышащих детей - 6 детей в возрасте до 3 лети 8 детей в возрасте старше 3 лет,\n\nдля слепых детей - 6 детей для обеих возрастных групп,\n\nдля слабовидящих детей - 6 детей в возрасте до 3 лет и 10 детей в возрасте старше 3 лет,\n\nдля детей с амблиопией, косоглазием - 6 детей в возрасте до 3 лети 10 детей в возрасте старше 3 лет,\n\nдля детей с нарушениями опорно-двигательного аппарата - 6 детей в возрасте до 3 лети 8 детей в возрасте старше 3 лет,\n\nдля детей с задержкой психоречевого развития - 6 детей в возрасте до 3 лет,\n\nдля детей с задержкой психического развития - 10 детей в возрасте старше 3 лет,\n\nдля детей с умственной отсталостью легкой степени - 10 детей в возрасте старше 3 лет,\n\nдля детей с умственной отсталостью умеренной, тяжелой степени - 8 детей в возрасте старше 3 лет,\n\nдля детей с расстройствами аутистического спектра - 5 детей для обеих возрастных групп,\n\nдля детей со сложными дефектами (тяжелыми и множественными нарушениями развития) - 5 детей для обеих возрастных групп.\n\nКоличество детей в группах комбинированной направленности не должно превышать:\n\nв возрасте до 3 лет - не более 10 детей, в том числе не более 3 детей с ограниченными возможностями здоровья;\n\nв возрасте старше 3 лет, в том числе:" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "e0993c8cc0a860ac0d4de41e821b33d6db4fc985dfa761be564b904e923a5963", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.999999950385485, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "постановление Главного государственного санитарного врача Российский Федерации от 28.01.2003 № 2 «О введении в действие санитарно- эпидемиологических правил и нормативов СанПиН 2.4.3.1186-03» (зарегистрировано Минюстом России 11.02.2003, регистрационный № 4204);\n\nпостановление Главного государственного санитарного врача Российский Федерации от 17.04.2003 № 51 «О введении в действие санитарно- эпидемиологических правил и нормативов СанПиН 2.4.7/1.1.1286-03» (зарегистрировано Минюстом России 05.05.2003, регистрационный № 4499);\n\nпостановление Главного государственного санитарного врача Российский Федерации от 03.06.2003 № 118 «О введении в действие санитарно- эпидемиологических правил и нормативов СанПиН 2.2.2/2.4.1340-03» (зарегистрировано Минюстом России 10.06.2003, регистрационный № 4673);\n\nпостановление Главного государственного санитарного врача Российский Федерации от 25.04.2007 № 22 «Об утверждении СанПиН 2.2.2/2.4.2198-07» (зарегистрировано Минюстом России 07.06.2007, регистрационный № 9615);\n\nпостановление Главного государственного санитарного врача Российский Федерации от 28.04.2007 № 24 «Об утверждении СанПиН 2.4.3.2201-07» (зарегистрировано Минюстом России 07.06.2007, регистрационный № 9610);\n\nпостановление Главного государственного санитарного врача Российской Федерации от 23.07.2008 № 45 «Об утверждении СанПиН 2.4.5.2409-08» (зарегистрировано Минюстом России 07.08.2008, регистрационный № 12085);\n\nпостановление Главного государственного санитарного врача Российской Федерации от 30.09.2009 № 58 «Об утверждении СанПиН 2.4.6.2553-09» (зарегистрировано Минюстом России 05.11.2009, регистрационный № 15172);\n\nпостановление Главного государственного санитарного врача Российский Федерации от 30.09.2009 № 59 «Об утверждении СанПиН 2.4.3.2554-09» (зарегистрировано Минюстом России 06.11.2009, регистрационный № 15197);\n\nпостановление Главного государственного санитарного врача Российской Федерации от 19.04.2010 № 25 «Об утверждении СанПиН 2.4.4.2599-10» (зарегистрировано Минюстом России 26.05.2010, регистрационный № 17378);\n\nпостановление Главного государственного санитарного врача Российский Федерации от 30.04.2010 № 48 «Об утверждении СанПиН 2.2.2/2.4.2620-10» (зарегистрировано Минюстом России 07.06.2010, регистрационный № 17481);\n\nпостановление Главного государственного санитарного врача Российский Федерации от 28.06.2010 № 72 «Об утверждении СанПиН 2.4.7/1.1.2651-10» (зарегистрировано Минюстом России 22.07.2010, регистрационный № 17944);" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "cc366ff549f1e11fe690a11dad162762f23d103ce1802f51114db373bee02858", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.999999950385485, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "17\n\nобразовательным программам среднего профессионального, высшего образования.\n\nКаждое спальное место обеспечивается комплектом постельных принадлежностей (матрацем с наматрасником, подушкой, одеялом), постельным бельем (наволочкой, простыней, пододеяльником) и полотенцами (для лица и для ног, а также банным). Допускается использование одноразовых полотенец для лица, рук и ног.\n\nКоличество комплектов постельного белья, наматрасников и полотенец (для лица и для ног, а также банного) должно быть не менее 2 комплектов на одного человека.\n\nДля организаций, осуществляющих образовательную деятельность по образовательным программам среднего профессионального, высшего образования допускается использование личных постельных принадлежностей и спальных мест.\n\n2.4.9. Мебель должна иметь покрытие, допускающее проведение влажной уборки с применением моющих и дезинфекционных средств.\n\nИспользуемое спортивное оборудование должно быть выполнено из материалов, допускающих их влажную обработку моющими и дезинфекционными средствами.\n\n2.4.10. При установке в помещениях телевизионной аппаратуры расстояние от ближайшего места просмотра до экрана должно быть не менее 2 метров.\n\n2.4.11. На каждом этаже объекта размещаются туалеты для детей и молодежи. На каждом этаже объектов организаций, реализующих образовательные программы дошкольного образования, начального обшего, основного общего и среднего общего образования, организаций для детей-сирот и детей, оставшихся без попечения родителей, хозяйствующих субъектов социального обслуживания семьи и детей с круглосуточным пребыванием, загородных стационарных детских оздоровительных лагерей с круглосуточным пребыванием оборудуются туалетные комнаты для детей (молодежи) разного пола. Площадь туалетов для детей до 3 лет должна составлять не менее 12 м2, от 3 до 7 лет -16,0 м2; для детей старше 7 лет - не менее 0,1 м? на ребенка.\n\nТуалетные комнаты оборудуются умывальниками и туалетными кабинами с дверями. Во вновь строящихся хозяйствующих субъектах в туалетах для мальчиков дополнительно устанавливаются писсуары, оборудованные перегородками.\n\nТуалетные кабины оснащаются мусорными ведрами, держателями для туалетной бумаги, сиденьями на унитазы. Умывальныеы раковины обеспечиваются мылом, электро- или бумажными полотенцами, ведрами для сбора мусора.\n\nСанитарно-техническое оборудование должно гигиеническим нормативам, быть исправным и без дефектов.\n\nНа этаже проживания (обучения, пребывания) инвалидов туалетная и душевая комнаты должны быть оборудованы с учетом обеспечения условий доступности для инвалидов." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "e25c38989afa593736fd27a3131eadaa10251c86762a71b0078a49e7e949c44f", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.999999950385485, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "постановление Главного государственного санитарного врача Российский Федерации от 03.09.2010 № 116 «Об утверждении СанПиН 2.2.2/2.4.2732-10 «Изменение № 3 к СанПиН 2.2.2/2.4.1340-03 «Гигиенические требования к персональным электронно-вычислительным машинам и организации работы» (зарегистрировано Минюстом России 18.10.2010, регистрационный № 18748);\n\nпостановление Главного государственного санитарного врача Российской Федерации от 29.12.2010 № 189 «Об утверждении СанПин 2.4.2.2821-10 «Санитарно-эпидемиологические требования к условиям и организации обучения в общеобразовательных учреждениях» (зарегистрировано Минюстом России 03.03.2011, регистрационный № 19993);\n\nпостановление Главного государственного санитарного врача Российский Федерации от 04.03.2011 № 17 «О6 утверждении СанПин 2.4.3.2841-11 «Изменения № 3 к СанПин 2.4.3.1186-03 «Санитарно- эпидемиологические требования к организации учебно-производственного процесса в образовательных учреждениях начального профессионального образования» (зарегистрировано Минюстом России 29.03.2011, регистрационный № 20327);\n\nпостановление Главного государственного санитарного врача Российской Федерации от 18.03.2011 № 22 «Об утверждении СанПин 2.4.2.2842-11 «Санитарно-эпидемиологические требования к устройству, содержанию и организации работы лагерей труда и отдыха для подростков» (зарегистрировано Минюстом России 24.03.2011, регистрационный № 20277);\n\nпостановление Главного государственного санитарного врача Российской Федерации от 29.06.2011 № 85 «Об утверждении СанПин 2.4.2.2883-11 «Изменения № 1 к СанПин 2.4.2.2821-10 «Санитарно- эпидемиологические требования к условиям и организации обучения в общеобразовательных учреждениях» (зарегистрировано Минюстом России 15.12.2011, регистрационный № 22637);\n\nпостановление Главного государственного санитарного врача Российской Федерации от 18.03.2011 № 21 «Об утверждении СанПин 2.4.2.2843-11 «Санитарно-эпидемиологические требования к устройству, содержанию и организации работы детских санаториев» (зарегистрировано Минюстом России 24.03.2011, регистрационный № 20279);\n\nпостановление Главного государственного санитарного врача Российской Федерации от 14.05.2013 № 25 «Об утверждении СанПиН 2.4.4.3048-13 «Санитарно-эпидемиологические требования к устройству и организации работы детских лагерей палаточного типа» (зарегистрировано Минюстом России 29.05.2013, регистрационный № 28563);\n\nпостановление Главного государственного санитарного врача Российской Федерации от 15.05.2013 № 26 «Об утверждении СанПиН 2.4.1.3049-13 «Санитарно-эпидемиологические требования к устройству, содержанию и организации режима работы дошкольных" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "a767e978d1d7642a2d67121649fd966c1afea1b58edc164ae06cb641eb84bc7b", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.999999950385485, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "52\n\nметра. Не допускается заполнение выгреба более чем на 2/3 объема. Также допускается использовать биотуалеты.\n\n3.13.12. При отсутствии условий для организованного вывоза органических (пищевых) отходов в хозяйственной зоне для утилизации отходов оборудуется компостная яма, закрывающаяся крышкой. Содержимое компостной ямы ежедневно присыпается слоем земли. При заполнении ямы она засыпается землей.\n\n3.13.13. Сточные воды отводятся в специальную яму, закрытую крышкой. Наполнение ямы не должно превышать ее объема.\n\nМыльные воды должны проходить очистку через фильтр для улавливания МЫЛЬНЫХ ВОД.\n\nЯмы-поглотители, ямы надворных туалетов, надворные туалеты ежедневно обрабатываются раствором дезинфекционных средств.\n\n3.13.14. Дети осматриваются на предмет присасывания клеща перед дневным и ночным сном, а также при возвращении детей после их выхода за пределы территории палаточного лагеря.\n\n3.13.15. Организация питания в палаточных лагерях осуществляется в соответствии с абзацами вторым ~ четвертым, десятым пункта 2.4.6 Правил и санитарно-эпидемиологическими требованиями к организации общественного питания населения.\n\n3.14. В организациях труда и отдыха (полевой практики) должны соблюдаться следующие требования:\n\n3.14.1. В весенний, летний и осенний периоды в зависимости от климатических условий выполнение сельскохозяйственных и других видов работ на открытых площадках следует проводить в часы наименьшей ИНСОЛЯЦИИ.\n\nДети должны работать в головных уборах.\n\nПри температурах воздуха от 25°С до 28°С продолжительность работы должна составлять не более 2,5 часов для лиц в возрасте от 14 до 16 лет. Для лиц от 16 до 18 лет - не более 3,5 часов.\n\n3.14.2. Запрещается труд детей после 20:00 часов.\n\n3.14.5. В зависимости от используемой формы для организации и размещения лагеря труда и отдыха к его обустройству применяются требования пунктов 3.10, 3.11, 3.12 Правил 3.\n\n3.14.6. Прием детей осуществляется при наличии справки о состоянии здоровья ребенка, направляемого в организацию отдыха детей и их оздоровления, содержащую в том числе сведения об отсутствии в течении 21 календарного дня контактов с больными инфекционными заболеваниями. Указанные сведения вносятся в справку не ранее чем за 3 рабочих дня до направления в хозяйствующий субъект.\n\n3.15. При временном размещении организованных групп детей в общежитиях, гостиницах, турбазах, базах отдыха должны соблюдаться следующие требования:" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "c814fff32d49c775abe3abf4b585b8dfcce58cf45742cb04c2783186a26ebc87", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.999999950385485, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "48\n\nдевочек; помещение (место) для просушивания одежды и обуви, помещение (место) стирки и глажения; помещение для обработки и хранения уборочного инвентаря, для приготовления дезинфицирующих растворов - одно на отряд (или жилой корпус); помещение для стирки белья, оборудованной горячим и холодным водоснабжением и водоотведением, тазами для стирки личных вещей и скамьями (возможно использование в помещениях для стирки белья автоматических стиральных машин); помещение гладильной; место для хранения обуви, оборудованное полками или стеллажами.\n\nПомещения для стирки белья могут быть оборудованы в отдельном помещении.\n\nДопускается использование двухъярусных кроватей при условии соблюдения нормы площади на одного ребенка и количества проживающих в комнате.\n\nВ зданиях для проживания детей обеспечиваются условия для просушивания верхней одежды и обуви.\n\n3.11.5. Минимальный набор помещений для оказания медицинской помощи включает: кабинет врача; процедурный кабинет; изолятор; пост медицинской сестры; помещение для приготовления дезинфекционных растворов и хранения уборочного инвентаря, предназначенного для указанных помещений туалет с умывальником,\n\nВ изоляторе медицинского пункта предусматриваются не менее двух палат (раздельно для капельных и кишечных инфекций). В составе помещений изолятора предусматриваются: туалет с раковиной для мытья рук, а также буфетная с двумя моечными раковинами для мойки посуды и шкафами для ее хранения.\n\nВозможно оборудование в медицинском пункте или в изоляторе душевой (ванной комнаты).\n\n3.11.6. При использовании надворных туалетов обеспечивается искусственное освещение, наличие туалетной бумаги, условия для мытья рук МЫЛОМ,\n\nНадворные туалеты выгребного типа оборудуются надземной частью строения и водонепроницаемым выгребом, размещаются на расстоянии не менее 25 м от жилой зоны, столовой. Не допускается устройство и использование надворных туалетов без крыши (навеса) и без внутренних экранов-перегородок.\n\nХозяйствующим субъектом обеспечивается освещение дорожек, ведущих к туалетам.\n\n3.11.7. Для хранения и размещения личных сумок (чемоданов, рюкзаков) детей выделяется специальное помещение, оборудованное стеллажами (или выделяют специальное оборудованное место).\n\n3.11.8. С целью выявления педикулеза у детей, перед началом смены и не реже одного раза в 7 дней проводятся осмотры детей. Дети с педикулезом к посещению не допускаются.\n\nЕжедневно должна проводиться бесконтактная термометрия детей и сотрудников." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "a15735dcd7048b5418a8b571eaa5cd9035704c1e9e839e5d1c3f232f70d2d94a", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.999999950385485, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "49\n\nПри выявлении лиц с признаками инфекционных заболеваний и повышенной температурой во время нахождения их в хозяйствующем субъекте должны быть приняты меры по ограничению их контакта с иными лицами посредством размещения в помещения для оказания медицинской помощи или иные помещения, кроме вспомогательных,“ до приезда законных представителей (родителей или опекунов), до перевода в медицинскую организацию или до приезда скорой помощи.\n\n3.11.10. Перед дневным и ночным сном, а также по возвращении после выхода детей (экскурсия, поход) за пределы собственной территории в летний оздоровительный сезон дети осматриваются на предмет присасывания клеща.\n\n3.11.11. Допустимая температура воздуха составляет не ниже: в спальных помещениях +18°С, в спортивных залах +17%С, душевых +250С, в столовой, в помещениях культурно-массового назначения и для занятий + 180С.\n\nПомещения постоянного пребывания и проживания детей для дезинфекции воздушной среды оборудуются приборами по обеззараживанию воздуха.\n\n3.12. В организациях отдыха детей и их оздоровления с дневным пребыванием должны соблюдаться следующие требования:\n\n3.12.1. Хозяйствующие субъекты в срок не позднее, чем за один месяц до открытия каждого сезона информируют территориальные органы, уполномоченные осуществлять федеральный государственный санитарно- эпидемиологический надзор и федеральный государственный надзор в области защиты прав потребителей о планируемых сроках заездов детей и режиме работы, а также количестве детей.\n\n3.12.2. Минимальный набор помещений включает игровые комнаты, помещения для занятий кружков, спальные помещения (при организации сна), помещения для оказания медицинской помощи, спортивный зал, столовую, помещение для просушивания одежды и обуви, раздевалку для верхней одежды, кладовую спортинвентаря, игр и кружкового инвентаря, туалеты, помещение для хранения, обработки уборочного инвентаря и приготовления дезинфекционных растворов.\n\nВ помещениях пребывания (игровые, мастерские, помещения дополнительного образования) детей и их дневного сна (при организации) проводится дезинфекция воздушной среды приборами по обеззараживанию воздуха.\n\n3.12.3. При организации дневного сна возможно использование личных спальных принадлежностей и полотенец отдыхающих детей, а также возможность стирки постельного белья и полотенец родителями индивидуально для каждого ребенка.\n\n3.12.4. Дети осматриваются на предмет присасывания клеща перед дневным сном, при возвращении детей после их выхода (экскурсия, поход) за пределы собственной территории хозяйственного субъекта.\n\nСтатья 29 Федерального закона от 30.03.1999 № 52-Ф3 «О санитарно-эпидемиологическом благополучии населения» (Собрание законодательства Российской Федерации, 1999, № 14, ст. 1650; 2004, № 35, ст. 3607)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "b37d8aa7160c225bc9d1f5b9b5fdbf78ba10bd7b1671b4a93a9c53cacd9ddc90", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.999999950385485, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "51\n\nветроустойчивыми, иметь защиту от насекомых (защитная сетка на двери и окнах). Все палатки должны иметь закрывающийся вход, а также место для хранения обуви.\n\n3.13.5. Каждый проживающий в палаточном лагере обеспечивается индивидуальным спальным местом. Индивидуальные спальные места оборудуются кроватями (раскладушками) в комплекте с матрацем, одеялом и подушкой или при отсутствии кроватей - теплоизоляционными ковриками в комплекте со спальными мешками. Спальные мешки комплектуются индивидуальными съемными вкладышами.\n\nМогут использоваться личные теплоизоляционные коврики, спальные мешки, вкладыши.\n\nКоличество детей, проживающих в палатке должно соответствовать вместимости, указанной в техническом паспорте палатки.\n\nВ случае оборудования индивидуального спального места с использованием личного инвентаря данные условия указываются в договоре на оказание услуг отдыха детей и их оздоровления.\n\n3.13.6. В качестве источников питьевой воды используются существующие источники централизованного, нецентрализованного водоснабжения, привозная питьевая вода.\n\nДезинфекция емкостей для доставки и хранения питьевой воды проводится разрешенными к применению препаратами, в соответствии с инструкцией производителя.\n\n3.13.8. Запас постельного белья и вкладышей в спальные мешки формируется с учетом обеспечения смены комплекта не менее 1 раза в 7 календарных дней.\n\n3.13.9, Организованная помывка детей должна проводиться не реже 1 раза в 7 календарных дней.\n\n3.13.10. Для просушивания одежды и обуви на территории палаточного лагеря оборудуется специальное место.\n\n3.13.11. На территории санитарно-бытовой зоны палаточного лагеря размещаются умывальники, душевые, место для мытья ног, место для стирки белья, сушки одежды, туалеты, место сбора мусора. Количество умывальников определяется из расчета 1 умывальник на 10 человек.\n\nМесто для личной гигиены для девушек оборудуется в душевой кабине, женском туалете или отдельной палатке и обеспечивается подставками (полками) для предметов личной гигиены и емкостями для теплой воды.\n\nТуалеты в палаточных лагерях располагаются на расстоянии не менее 25 метров от жилой зоны и пищеблока и не менее 50 метров от места купания, из расчета одно очко (размером не более 0,2 м х 0,3 м) на 20 человек раздельно для мальчиков и девочек. Не допускается устройство туалетов без крыши (навеса). Возле туалетов оборудуются рукомойники.\n\nТуалеты выгребного типа организуют с надземной частью и водонепроницаемым выгребом. Глубина выгреба от поверхности земли рассчитывается в зависимости от уровня стояния грунтовых вод, но не менее 1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "b6950874ba8092749bd0d28dc90b7410cc22294b6cfb779d3a73c3d7a090f4f7", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.999999950385485, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "0 статья 28 Федерального закона от 30.03.1999 № 52-Ф3 «О санитарно-эпидемиологическом благополучии населения» (Собрание законодательства Российской Федерации, 1999, № 14, ст. 1650; 2011, № 30, ст. 4596; 2012, № 24, ст. 3069; 2013, № 27, ст. 3477) и статья 11 Федерального закона от 29.12.2012 № 273-Ф3 «Об образовании в Российской Федерации» (Собрание законодательства РФ \", 31.12.2012, № 53, ст. 7598; 2019, № 49, ст. 6962)\n\n38\n\n- не менее 3,5 м2 на одного обучающегося при организации групповых форм работы и индивидуальных занятий.\n\nдля глухих обучающихся ~ 6 человек,\n\nдля слабослышащих и позднооглохших обучающихся с легким недоразвитием речи, обусловленным нарушением слуха, – 10 человек,\n\nПредельная наполняемость отдельного класса (группы), группы продленного дня для обучающихся с ограниченными возможностями здоровья устанавливается в зависимости от нозологической группы:\n\nдля слабослышащих и позднооглохших обучающихся с глубоким недоразвитием речи, обусловленным нарушением слуха, – 6 человек,\n\nдля слепых обучающихся – 8 человек,\n\nдля слабовидящих обучающихся – 12 человек,\n\nдля обучающихся с тяжелыми нарушениями речи – 12 человек,\n\nдля обучающихся с нарушениями опорно-двигательного аппарата – 10 человек,\n\nдля обучающихся, имеющих задержку психического развития, – 12 человек,\n\nдля учащихся с умственной отсталостью (интеллектуальными нарушениями) ~ 12 человек,\n\nдля обучающихся с расстройствами аутистического спектра – 8 человек,\n\nдля обучающихся со сложными дефектами (с тяжелыми множественными нарушениями развития) ~ 5 человек.\n\nКоличество обучающихся с ограниченными возможностями здоровья устанавливается из расчета не более 3 обучающихся при получении образования совместно с другими учащимися.\n\n3.4.15. В общеобразовательных организациях, работающих в две смены, обучение 1, 5, 9-11 классов и классов для обучающихся с ограниченными возможностями здоровья проводится в первую смену.\n\nУчебные занятия следует начинать не ранее 8 часов. Проведение нулевых уроков и обучение в три смены не допускается. Занятия второй смены должны заканчиваться не позднее 19 часов.\n\n3.4.16. При реализации образовательных программ должны соблюдаться следующие санитарно-эпидемиологические требования!!:\n\nОбъем обязательной части образовательной программы начального общего образования должен составлять 80%, образовательной программы основного общего – 70% и образовательной программы среднего общего образования – 60%. Суммарный объем обязательной части образовательной программы и части, формируемой участниками образовательных отношений, реализуется в рамках максимального общего объема недельной образовательной нагрузки.\n\nЧасы, отведенные на внеурочную деятельность, должны быть организованы" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "fb085247e24d00728cd5478a7678b390eb659dab32bd7a9e7e59ca4525332194", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.999999950385485, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "50\n\n3.12.5. Прием детей осуществляется при наличии справки о состоянии здоровья ребенка, содержащую в том числе сведения об отсутствии в течении 21 календарного дня контактов с больными инфекционными заболеваниями. Указанные сведения вносятся в справку не ранее чем за 3 рабочих дня до направления в хозяйствующий субъект.\n\nДети-инвалиды и дети с ограниченными возможностями здоровья направляются в организации, в которых созданы условия для их пребывания.\n\n3.13. В палаточных лагерях должны соблюдаться следующие требования:\n\n3.13.1. Хозяйствующие субъекты в срок не позднее, чем за один месяц до открытия сезона информируют территориальные органы, уполномоченные на осуществление федерального государственного санитарно-эпидемиологического надзора о планируемых сроках заездов детей и режиме работы, о количестве детей.\n\n3.13.2. Перед открытием палаточного лагеря на территории, на которой планируется его размещение, проводятся: уборка территории от мусора, сухостоя и валежника, очистка от колючих кустарников и растительности с ядовитыми плодами, а также ее аккарицидная обработка, мероприятия по борьбе с грызунами.\n\nК палаточному лагерю должен быть обеспечен подъезд транспорта.\n\nСмены проводятся при установившейся ночной температуре воздуха окружающей среды не ниже +159С. Продолжительность смены определяется его спецификой (профилем, программой) и климатическими условиями.\n\nПрием детей осуществляется при наличии справки о состоянии здоровья ребенка, отъезжающего в организацию отдыха детей и их оздоровления, в том числе содержащую сведения об отсутствии в течение 21 календарного дня контактов с больными инфекционными заболеваниями. Указанные сведения вносятся в справку не ранее чем за 3 рабочих дня до отъезда.\n\nДети-инвалиды и дети с ограниченными возможностями здоровья принимаются в организации, в которых созданы условия для их пребывания.\n\n3.13.3. Территория, на которой размещается палаточный лагерь, обозначается по периметру знаками.\n\nНа территории размещения палаточного лагеря предусматриваются зоны: жилая; приготовления и приема пищи, хранения продуктов питания; санитарно- бытовая; административно-хозяйственная; физкультурно-оздоровительная.\n\nМедицинский пункт (для палаточных лагерей с численностью несовершеннолетних более 100 детей) размещают в помещении или отдельной палатке площадью не менее 4 м2. Для изоляции заболевших детей используются отдельные помещения или палатки не более, чем на 3 места, совместное проживание в которых детей и персонала не допускается.\n\nВ темное время суток обеспечивается дежурное освещение тропинок, ведущих к туалетам.\n\n3.13.4. По периметру размещения палаток оборудуется отвод для дождевых вод, палатки устанавливаются на настил.\n\nПалатки должны быть непромокаемыми (или устанавливаться под тентом)," + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "38dfbe146dcfcc1e3a763b3f8a0edac17d6141d7cac6c5fbc5a7b718996ee209", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.999999950385485, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "9 Статья 29 Федерального закона от 30.03.1999 № 52-Ф3 «О санитарно-эпидемиологическом благополучии населения» (Собрание законодательства Российской Федерации, 1999, № 14, ст. 1650; 2004, № 35, ст. 3607)\n\n10 Пункт 7 Порядка медицинского осмотра лиц, желающих пройти спортивную подготовку, заниматься физической культурой и спортом в организациях, осуществляющих спортивную подготовку, иных организациях для занятий физической культурой и спортом, и (или) выполнить нормативы испытаний (тестов) комплекса ГТО, в том числе инвалидов и лиц с ограниченными возможностями здоровья (приложение № 3 к Порядку организации оказания медицинской помощи лицам, занимающимся физической культурой и спортом (в том числе при подготовке и проведении физкультурных мероприятий и спортивных мероприятий), включая порядок медицинского осмотра лиц, желающих пройти спортивную подготовку, заниматься физической культурой и спортом в организациях и (или) выполнить нормативы испытаний (тестов) Всероссийского физкультурно-спортивного комплекса «Готов к труду и обороне» (ГТО)», утвержденному приказом Минздрава России от 23.10.2020 № 1144н (зарегистрирован Минюстом России 03.12.2020, регистрационный № 61238).\n\n23\n\nзаключения) или медицинской организацией.\n\n2.9.3. Лица с признаками инфекционных заболеваний в объекты не допускаются. При выявлении лиц с признаками инфекционных заболеваний во время их нахождения на объекте хозяйствующим субъектом должны быть приняты меры по ограничению или исключению их контакта с иными лицами посредством размещения в помещения для оказания медицинской помощи или иные помещения, кроме вспомогательных, до приезда законных представителей (родителей или опекунов), до перевода в медицинскую организацию или до приезда скорой помощи.\n\n2.9.4. После перенесенного заболевания дети допускаются к посещению при наличии медицинского заключения (медицинской справки).\n\n2.9.5. В целях предотвращения возникновения и распространения инфекционных и неинфекционных заболеваний и пищевых отравлений в хозяйствующим субъектом проводятся (за исключением организаций дополнительного образования, развивающих центров, игровых комнат, организаций социального обслуживания в части предоставления социальных услуг в полустационарной форме (с кратковременным дневным пребыванием)):\n\nконтроль за санитарным состоянием и содержанием собственной территории и всех объектов, за соблюдением правил личной гигиены лицами, находящимися в них;\n\nорганизация профилактических и противоэпидемических мероприятий и контроль за их проведением;\n\nработа по организации и проведению мероприятий по дезинфекции, дезинсекции и дератизации, противоклещевых (акарицидных) обработок и контроль за их проведением;\n\nорганизация профилактических осмотров воспитанников и обучающихся и проведение профилактических прививок;\n\nосмотры детей с целью выявления инфекционных заболеваний (в том числе на педикулез) при поступлении в Организацию, а также в случаях, установленных законодательством в сфере охраны здоровья;\n\nраспределение детей в соответствии с заключением о принадлежности несовершеннолетнего к медицинской группе для занятий физической культурой!;" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "fb840ccd4f0375562eb104df6175f1ea4bacbdf4d6d38aa2b832cba1f6a90436", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.999999950385485, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "39\n\nв формах, отличных от урочных, предусматривающих проведение общественно полезных практик, исследовательской деятельности, реализации образовательных проектов, экскурсий, походов, соревнований, посещений театров, музеев и иные формы.\n\nВнеурочная деятельность обучающихся с ограниченными возможностями здоровья формируется из часов, необходимых для обеспечения их индивидуальных потребностей и составляющих суммарно 10 часов в неделю на обучающегося, из которых не менее 5 часов должны включать обязательные занятия коррекционной направленности с учетом возрастных особенностей учащихся и их физиологических потребностей.\n\nУрочная деятельность обучающихся с ограниченными возможностями здоровья организуется по 5 дневной учебной неделе, в субботу возможны организация проведение внеурочной деятельности.\n\nС целью профилактики переутомления в годовом календарном учебном плане обучающихся должно быть предусмотрено чередование периодов учебного времен, сессий и каникул. Продолжительность каникул должна составлять не менее 7 календарных дней.\n\nРасписание уроков составляется с учетом дневной и недельной умственной работоспособности обучающихся и шкалы трудности учебных предметов, определенной гигиеническими нормативами.\n\nОбразовательная недельная нагрузка распределяется равномерно в течение учебной недели, при этом объем максимально допустимой нагрузки в течение дня составляет:\n\nдля обучающихся 1-х классов - не должен превышать 4 уроков и один раз в неделю - 5 уроков, за счет урока физической культуры,\n\nдля обучающихся 2 - 4 классов - не более 5 уроков и один раз в неделю 6 уроков за счет урока физической культуры,\n\nдля обучающихся 5 – 6 классов - не более 6 уроков,\n\nдля обучающихся 7 – 11 классов - не более 7 уроков.\n\nФакультативные занятия и занятия по программам дополнительного образования, планируют на дни с наименьшим количеством обязательных уроков. Между началом факультативных (дополнительных) занятий и последним уроком необходимо организовывать перерыв продолжительностью не менее 20 минут.\n\nОбучение в 1 классе осуществляется с соблюдением следующих требований:\n\nучебные занятия проводятся по 5-дневной учебной неделе и только в первую смену,\n\nобучение в первом полугодии: в сентябре, октябре - по З урока в день по 35 минут каждый, в ноябре-декабре - по 4 урока в день по 35 минут каждый; в январе - мае - по 4 урока в день по 40 минут каждый,\n\nв серединеәҹ̧ учебного дня организуется динамическая пауза продолжительностью не менее 40 минут,\n\nпредоставляются дополнительные недельные каникулы в середине третьей" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "730dd10b1af90de9e18304b73108e2ffda37de07152a73067e6d1354b4f96dad", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.999999950385485, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "34\n\n3.2. В детских центрах, центрах развития детей, реализующих образовательные программы дошкольного образования и (или) осуществляющих присмотр и уход за детьми, размещенных в нежилых помещениях, должны соблюдаться следующие требования:\n\n3.2.1. Размещение и функционирование хозяйствующего субъекта допускается без оборудования самостоятельных входа (выхода), тамбура (или воздушно-тепловой завесы) и собственной территории.\n\nНабор помещений включает игровые помещения для детей, помещения для занятий и помещения для персонала, помещение (место) для мытья игрушек и игрового оборудования.\n\nДетям должен быть обеспечен питьевой режим.\n\n3.2.2. Помещения оборудуются вешалками для верхней одежды, полками для обуви.\n\n3.2.3. Вновь приобретаемое оборудование, игры и игрушки для детей должны иметь документы об оценке (подтверждении) соответствия.\n\nИспользуемое оборудование должно быть исправным и предусматривать возможность его мытья с применением моющих и дезинфицирующих средств. Мытье игрушек и оборудования проводится в конце рабочего дня.\n\n3.2.4. В помещениях предусматривается естественное и (или) искусственное освещение.\n\n3.2.5. Заболевшие дети, а также дети с подозрением на наличие инфекционного заболевания к посещению хозяйствующего субъекта не допускаются.\n\n3.2.6. Для организации прогулок используются оборудованные детские площадки. Допускается использование внутридомовых и придомовых территорий, скверов и парков в части, не противоречащей требованиям жилищного законодательства.\n\n3.2.7. Туалет оборудуется унитазом, обеспечивается индивидуальными сидениями (в том числе, одноразовыми) для каждого ребенка. Для детей до 3 лет – индивидуальными горшками.\n\nДопускается совмещение в одном туалетном помещении туалета для детей и персонала или использование детьми туалета и умывальной комнаты персонала.\n\n3.2.8. Каждый ребенок обеспечивается индивидуальным полотенцем для рук. Допускается использование одноразовых полотенец.\n\n3.2.9, При нахождении детей до 7 лет в детском центре или иной детской организации более 4 часов необходимо обеспечить им условия для приема пищи и организации сна.\n\n3.2.10. При организации образовательной деятельности пребывание и размещение детей осуществляется в соответствии с требованиями пункта 3.1.11 Правил.\n\n3.3. В детских игровых комнатах, размещаемых в торгово-развлекательных и культурно-досуговых центрах, павильонах, аэропортах, железнодорожных вокзалах и иных объектах нежилого назначения, должны соблюдаться" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "20a04df9fe7ec539badf6727b76d991da1cc52d38b565f1f4df3ff4962be0b49", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.999999950385485, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "26\n\nстроительных и отделочных работ, подъему и переносу тяжестей.\n\n2.11. Содержание собственной территории и помещений хозяйствующего субъекта должно соответствовать следующим требованиям:\n\n2.11.1. На собственной территории не допускается скопление мусора. Уборка территории проводится ежедневно или по мере загрязнения. Для очистки собственной территории от снега использование химических реагентов не допускается.\n\nМусор должен собираться в мусоросборники, мусоросборники следует закрывать крышками. Очистка мусоросборников проводится при заполнении 2/3 их объема.\n\nНе допускается сжигание мусора на собственной территории, в том числе в мусоросборниках.\n\nНа территории используемых хозяйствующими субъектами игровых, спортивных, прогулочных площадок, в зонах отдыха должны проводится мероприятия, направленные на профилактику инфекционных, паразитарных и массовых неинфекционных заболеваний.\n\nПри наличии на собственной территории песочниц ежегодно, в весенний период, в песочницах, на игровых площадках, проводится полная смена песка. Песок должен соответствовать гигиеническим нормативам. При обнаружении возбудителей паразитарных и инфекционных болезней проводится внеочередная замена песка.\n\nПесочницы в отсутствие детей во избежание загрязнения песка закрываются крышками, полимерными пленками или иными защитными приспособлениями.\n\nВ каждом помещении должна стоять емкость для сбора мусора. Переполнение емкостей для мусора не допускается.\n\nВо встроенных, встроенно-пристроенных к жилым зданиям (или к зданиям административного общественного назначения), пристроенных, приспособленных помещениях обращение с отходами производства и потребления осуществляется в соответствии с законодательством в сфере обращения с отходами.\n\n2.11.2. Все помещения подлежат ежедневной влажной уборке с применением моющих средств.\n\nВлажная уборка в спальнях проводится после ночного и дневного сна, в спортивных залах и групповых помещениях не реже 2 раз в день.\n\nСпортивный инвентарь и маты в спортивном зале ежедневно протираются с использованием мыльно-содового раствора. Ковровые покрытия ежедневно очищаются с использованием пылесоса. Ковровое покрытие не реже одного раза в месяц подвергается влажной обработке. После каждого занятия спортивный, гимнастический, хореографический, музыкальный залы проветриваются в течение не менее 10 минут.\n\nСтолы в групповых помещениях промываются горячей водой с моющим средством до и после каждого приема пищи.\n\nСтулья, пеленальные столы, манежи и другое оборудование, а также подкладочные клеенки, клеенчатые нагрудники после использования моются" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "254866d637eca73288700dbc78c2fc9a88d3b3c3624994ab46b808c18b079278", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.999999950385485, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "41\n\nпредметам по выбору участников ЕГЭ допускается их проведение через день.\n\nПри продолжительности экзамена от 4 часов и более обучающиеся обеспечиваются питанием. Независимо от продолжительности экзамена обеспечивается питьевой режим.\n\nВремя ожидания начала экзамена в классах не должно превышать 30 минут.\n\n3.4.19. В классном журнале оформляется лист здоровья, в который для каждого обучающегося вносят сведения о его антропометрических данных, группе здоровья, медицинской группе для занятий физической культурой, номере необходимой учебной мебели, а также медицинские рекомендации.\n\n3.5. При реализации образовательных программ с применением дистанционных образовательных технологий и электронного обучения должны соблюдаться следующие требования:\n\n3.5.1. Использование ЭСО должно осуществляться при наличии документов об оценке (подтверждении) соответствия. Использование мониторов на основе электронно-лучевых трубок в образовательных организациях не допускается.\n\n3.5.2. Одновременное использование детьми на занятиях более двух различных ЭСО (интерактивная доска и персональный компьютер, интерактивная доска и планшет) не допускается.\n\n3.5.3. Для образовательных целей мобильные средства связи не используются.\n\nРазмещение базовых станций подвижной сотовой связи на собственной территории образовательных организаций не допускается.\n\n3.5.4. Использование ноутбуков обучающимися начальных классов возможно при наличии дополнительной клавиатуры.\n\n3.5.5. Оконные проемы в помещениях, где используются ЭСО, должны быть оборудованы светорегулируемыми устройствами.\n\n3.5.6. Линейные размеры (диагональ) экрана ЭСО должны соответствовать гигиеническим нормативам.\n\n3.5.7. Организация рабочих мест пользователей персональных ЭСО должна обеспечивать зрительную дистанцию до экрана не менее 50 см. Использование планшетов предполагает их размещения на столе под углом наклона 30°.\n\n3.5.8. Шрифтовое оформление электронных учебных изданий должно соответствовать гигиеническим нормативам.\n\n3.5.9. Непрерывная и суммарная продолжительность использования различных типов ЭСО на занятиях должна соответствовать гигиеническим нормативам.\n\n3.5.10. При необходимости использовать наушники время их непрерывного использования для всех возрастных групп должно составлять не более часа. Уровень громкости не должен превышать 60% от максимальной. Внутриканальные наушники должны быть предназначены только для индивидуального использования.\n\n3.5.11. Интерактивную доску (панель) и другие ЭСО следует выключать или переводить в режим ожидания, когда их использование приостановлено или завершено." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "220efcbc16a18ae960e2fbdea85b91bda250cbe1f5108df8a2a9886984760601", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.999999950385485, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "40\n\nчетверти при четвертном режиме обучения Возможна организация дополнительных каникул независимо от четвертей (триместров).\n\nПри осуществлении присмотра и ухода в общеобразовательной организации в группах продленного дня должны быть созданы условия, включающие организацию полдника и прогулок для всех обучающихся, либо полдника, прогулок и дневного сна для детей первого года обучения.\n\nДля предупреждения переутомления в течение недели обучающиеся должны иметь облегченный учебный день в среду или в четверг.\n\nПродолжительность урока не должна превышать 45 минут, за исключением 1 класса и компенсирующего класса, продолжительность урока в которых не должна превышать 40 минут.\n\nПродолжительность перемен между уроками составляет не менее 10 минут, большой перемены (после 2 или 3 урока) - 20 - 30 минут. Вместо одной большой перемены допускается после 2 и 3 уроков устанавливать две перемены по 20 минут каждая.\n\nПродолжительность перемены между урочной и внеурочной деятельностью должна составлять не менее 30 минут, за исключением обучающихся с ограниченными возможностями здоровья, обучение которых осуществляется по специальной индивидуальной программе развития.\n\nДля слабовидящих обучающихся 1-4 классов при различных видах учебной деятельности продолжительность непрерывной зрительной нагрузки не должна превышать 10 минут, для слабовидящих обучающихся, осваивающих образовательные программы основного общего и среднего общего образования - не более 15 минут.\n\nДля обучающихся с остаточным зрением для усвоения учебной информации по рельефной системе Брайля должны чередоваться тактильное восприятие информации - не менее 2 раз за урок с непрерывной зрительной работой - по 5 минут.\n\n3.4.17. Все работы в учебных кабинетах технологии, обучающиеся выполняют в специальной одежде и (или) с использованием средств индивидуальной защиты.\n\nДля организации трудового обучения кабинеты технологии обеспечиваются необходимым оборудованием и инструментом со специальными приспособлениями, учитывающими особые образовательные потребности обучающихся с ограниченными возможностями здоровья.\n\nУсловия трудового обучения должны соответствовать возрасту обучающегося, учебным, воспитательным и коррекционным задачам.\n\nОрганизация профильного обучения в 10 - 11 классах не должна приводить к увеличению образовательной нагрузки.\n\n3.4.18. При проведении итоговой аттестации не допускается проведение более одного экзамена в день. Перерыв между проведением экзаменов должен быть не менее 2-х календарных дней. При проведении государственной итоговой аттестации по образовательным программам среднего общего образования в форме единого государственного экзамена (далее – ЕГЭ) по" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "6c70e24c828eedaebad9b49f5885088b9d778693831e11c5bc52f0474ea1acd5", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.999999950385485, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "30\n\nне более 10 детей, в том числе не более 3 глухих детей, или слепых детей, или детей с нарушениями опорно-двигательного аппарата, или детей с умственной отсталостью умеренной, тяжелой степени, или с расстройствами аутистического спектра, или детей со сложным дефектом,\n\nне более 15 детей, в том числе не более 4 слабовидящих и (или) детей с амблиопией и (или) косоглазием, или слабослышащих детей, или детей, имеющих тяжелые нарушения речи, или детей с умственной отсталостью легкой степени,\n\nне более 17 детей, в том числе не более 5 детей с задержкой психического развития, детей с фонетико-фонематическими нарушениями речи.\n\nДопускается организация разновозрастных групп компенсирующей или комбинированной направленности для детей от 2 месяцев до 3 лет и от 3 лети старше с учетом возможности соблюдения в них режима дня, соответствующего анатомическим и физиологическим особенностям детей каждой возрастной группы, с предельной наполняемостью би 12 человек соответственно.\n\nПри комплектовании групп комбинированной направленности не допускается смешение более 3 категорий детей с ограниченными возможностями здоровья; при объединении детей с разными нарушениями в развитии учитываются направленность адаптированных образовательных программ дошкольного образования и возможности их одновременной реализации в одной группе.\n\n3.1.2. Дошкольные организации должны иметь собственную территорию для прогулок детей (отдельно для каждой группы).\n\nНа собственной территории дошкольной организации следует располагать игровую (групповые и физкультурно-оздоровительные площадки) и хозяйственную зоны, а также место для хранения колясок, велосипедов, санок.\n\nИгровая зона включает групповые площадки, индивидуальные для каждой группы. Для отделения групповых площадок друг от друга, а также для отделения их от хозяйственной зоны используют зеленые насаждения. На территории групповых площадок устанавливают теневой навес площадью из расчета не менее 1 м? на одного ребенка, но не менее 20 м2, песочницы, а также иные приспособления для игр. Теневые навесы оборудуют полами из дерева или иных строительных материалов в соответствии с областью применения.\n\nДопускается установка на прогулочной площадке сборно-разборных навесов, беседок.\n\nДля организации прогулок детей младенческого возраста используются прогулочные коляски (в том числе многоместные).\n\n3.1.3. Планировка помещений дошкольных организаций и организаций, осуществляющих присмотр и уход за детьми, за исключением помещений, размещенных в жилых помещениях, должна обеспечить возможность формирования изолированных помещений для каждой детской группы (далее ~ групповая ячейка) – раздевальная комната, групповая комната, спальня, буфет, туалет, совмещенный с умывальной, наличие при необходимости дополнительных помещений для занятий с детьми (музыкальный зал," + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "87f4fc4154381391a094bb9d7656764cc5e5af2d9b56a3c0fb8df252480400a3", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.999999950385485, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "УТВЕРЖДЕНЫ постановлением Главного государственного санитарного врача Российской Федерации от 40. 09. 2020г. №4 Ф\n\n## Санитарные правила СП 2.4. 52 «2-20\n\n## «САНИТАРНО-ЭПИДЕМИОЛОГИЧЕСКИЕ ТРЕБОВАНИЯ К ОРГАНИЗАЦИЯМ ВОСПИТАНИЯ И ОБУЧЕНИЯ, ОТДЫХА И ОЗДОРОВЛЕНИЯ ДЕТЕЙ И МОЛОДЕЖИ»\n\n## 1. Область применения\n\n1.1. Настоящие санитарные правила (далее - Правила) направлены на охрану здоровья детей и молодежи, предотвращение инфекционных, массовых неинфекционных заболеваний (отравлений) и устанавливают санитарно- эпидемиологические требования к обеспечению безопасных условий образовательной деятельности, оказания услуг по воспитанию и обучению, спортивной подготовке, уходу и присмотру за детьми, включая требования к организации проведения временного досуга детей в помещениях (специально выделенных местах), устроенных в торговых, культурно-досуговых центрах, аэропортах, железнодорожных вокзалах и иных объектах нежилого назначения, отдыху и оздоровлению, предоставлению мест временного проживания, социальных услуг для детей, а также к условиям проведения спортивных, художественных и культурно-массовых мероприятий с участием детей и молодежи и определяют санитарно-противоэпидемические (профилактические) меры при организации перевозок организованных групп детей железнодорожным транспортом.\n\n1.2. Правила являются обязательными для исполнения гражданами, юридическими лицами и индивидуальными предпринимателями при осуществлении деятельности, предусмотренной пунктом 1.1 Правил (далее – Хозяйствующие субъекты).\n\nПравила не распространяются на проведение экскурсионных мероприятий и организованных походов.\n\n1.3. При разработке проектной документации в отношении зданий, строений, сооружений, помещений, используемых хозяйствующими субъектами при осуществлении деятельности, предусмотренной пунктом 1.1 Правил (далее – объекты), должны соблюдаться требования Правил, установленные пунктами 2.1.1, 2.1.2 (абзацы первый, второй, четвертый, пятый), 2.1.3, 2.2.1 (абзацы первый - четвертый), 2.2.2 (абзацы первый и четвертый), 2.2.3 (абзацы первый и третий), 2.2.5, 2.2.6, 2.3.1, 2.3.2 (абзацы первый и третий), 2.3.3, 2.4.1, 2.4.2, 2.4.3 (абзацы первый, третий, четвертый, седьмой), 2.4.6 (абзацы первый, одиннадцатый - четырнадцатый), 2.4.7, 2.4.8 (абзацы первый и второй), 2.4.9," + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "caad19ed7e9516baca9d9de9c37f501ce6a182e98274d1d707b46ac96a952092", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.999999950385485, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "28\n\nзагрязнения, но не реже 1-го раза в 7 дней. Грязное белье складывается в мешки и доставляется в прачечную. Для сбора и хранения грязного белья выделяется специальное помещение или место для временного хранения. Чистое белье хранится в отдельном помещении, в гладильной или в специальном месте в закрытых стеллажах или шкафах. Выдача чистого белья организуется так, чтобы было исключено его пересечение с грязным бельем.\n\nПостельные принадлежности (матрацы, подушки, спальные мешки) проветриваются непосредственно в спальнях во время каждой генеральной уборки, а также на специально отведенных для этого площадках хозяйственной зоны. Постельные принадлежности подвергаются химической чистке или дезинфекционной обработке один раз в год.\n\nИндивидуальные мочалки для тела после использования замачиваются в дезинфекционном растворе, промываются проточной водой, просушиваются и хранятся в индивидуальных чистых мешках.\n\n2.11.6. Дезинфекционные средства хранят в упаковке производителя. Дезинфекционные растворы готовят в соответствии с инструкцией перед непосредственным их применением.\n\n2.11.7. Во всех видах помещений не реже одного раза в месяц (в смену) проводится генеральная уборка с применением моющих и дезинфицирующих средств.\n\n2.11.8. Вытяжные вентиляционные решетки не должны содержать следов загрязнений. Очистка шахт вытяжной вентиляции проводится по мере загрязнения.\n\n2.11.9. В помещениях не должно быть насекомых, грызунов и следов их жизнедеятельности, Внутри помещений допускается дополнительное использование механических методов.\n\nПри появлении синантропных насекомых и грызунов проводится дезинсекция и дератизация. Дезинсекция и дератизация проводится в отсутствии детей и молодежи.\n\n3.1. В организациях, реализующих образовательные программы дошкольного образования, осуществляющих присмотр и уход за детьми, в том числе размещенных в жилых и нежилых помещениях жилищного фонда и нежилых здания должны соблюдаться следующие требования:\n\n3.1.1. Количество детей в группах организации, реализующей образовательные программы дошкольного образования (далее – дошкольная организация), осуществляющей присмотр и уход за детьми, в том числе в группах, размещенных в жилых и нежилых помещениях жилищного фонда и нежилых зданий, определяется исходя из расчета площади групповой (игровой) комнаты.\n\nДля групп раннего возраста (до 3 лет) - не менее 2,5 м? на 1 ребенка и для\n\n## ПІ. Требования в отношении отдельных видов осуществляемой хозяйствующими субъектами деятельности." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "eab76d892d2b703d90da1b91f531a20da46a339b38f368b8e6504f4b3e516b0f", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.999999950385485, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "18\n\n2.4.12. Для приготовления дезинфекционных растворов, обработки и хранения уборочного инвентаря, моющих и дезинфекционных средств в недоступном для детей месте выделяется помещение либо оборудуется место, исключающее доступ к нему детей. Помещение оборудуют поддоном с холодной и горячей водой, подающейся через смеситель, а также системой водоотведения.\n\nИнструкции по приготовлению дезинфицирующих растворов должны размещаться в месте их приготовления.\n\n2.4.13. Окна помещений оборудуются в зависимости от климатической зоны регулируемыми солнцезащитными устройствами (подъемно-поворотные жалюзи, тканевые шторы) с длиной не ниже уровня подоконника, а окна, открываемые в весенний, летний и осенний периоды, - москитными сетками.\n\n2.4.14. В общежитиях (интернатах), кроме общежитий квартирного (гостиничного) типа, должны быть предусмотрены жилые комнаты и помещения общего пользования, в том числе:\n\nна каждом этаже туалеты, умывальные, душевые, комнаты гигиены для девушек, помещения для стирки белья, гладильные, комнаты для сушки белья, кухни (за исключением специальных учебно-исправительных учреждений), помещения для обработки и хранения уборочного инвентаря;\n\nкладовые для хранения хозяйственного инвентаря, бельевые (комнаты для раздельного хранения чистого и грязного белья), помещения для сушки одежды и обуви, помещения (камеры) для хранения личных вещей и иные подсобные помещения;\n\nкомнаты для самостоятельных занятий, комнаты отдыха и досуга, игровые комнаты для детей семейных пар, проживающих в общежитии;\n\nв общежитиях и интернатах для обучающихся в возрасте до 18 лет: комната воспитателя, помещения для оказания медицинской помощи (в случаях, установленных законодательством*) и изолятор (для временной изоляции заболевшего до его госпитализации в медицинскую организацию или до приезда родителей или законных представителей).\n\nВ помещениях (местах) для стирки белья допускается использование автоматических стиральных машин. Помещения (места) для стирки белья оборудуются раковиной, оснащенной смесителем с горячей и холодной водой, столами (стеллажами или лавками), тазами для ручной стирки, системой водоотведения, сливными трапами.\n\nПомещения (места) для стирки белья и гладильные оборудуются отдельно.\n\nДушевые комнаты оборудуются местом для раздевания, держателем полотенца, держателем мыла, смесителем с душевой насадкой, трапом для слива воды или душевым поддоном. При наличии нескольких душевых смесителей и поддонов каждый должен быть отделен перегородкой.\n\n8 Часть 3 статьи 41 Федерального закона от 29.12.2012 № 273-ФЗ «Об образовании в Российской Федерации» (Собрание законодательства Российской Федерации, 31.12.2012, № 53, ст. 7598; 2016, № 27, ст. 4246)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "7801a57beb42facaaad7d331655fc50b40aa29e2c18c875f77cb0fdd9cc6f239", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.999999950385485, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Объекты, введенные в эксплуатацию до вступления в силу Правил, а также объекты на стадии строительства, реконструкции и ввода их в эксплуатацию, в случае если указанные процессы начались до вступления в силу Правил, эксплуатируются в соответствии с утвержденной проектной документацией, по которой они были построены, при условии обеспечения доступности услуг, оказываемых хозяйствующим субъектом инвалидам и лицам с ограниченными возможностями здоровья.\n\n1.4. Функционирование хозяйствующих субъектов, осуществляющих образовательную деятельность, подлежащую лицензированию, а также деятельность по организации отдыха детей и их оздоровления, осуществляется при наличии заключения, подтверждающего их соответствие санитарному законодательству в том числе Правилам, выданного органом, уполномоченным осуществлять федеральный государственный санитарно-эпидемиологический надзор и федеральный государственный надзор в области защиты прав потребителей!.\n\n1.5. Работники хозяйствующих субъектов должны соответствовать требованиям, касающимся прохождения ими предварительных (при поступлении на работу) и периодических медицинских осмотров?, профессиональной гигиенической подготовки и аттестации (при приеме на работу и далее с периодичностью не реже 1 раза в 2 года, работники комплекса помещений для приготовления и раздачи пищи – ежегодно) вакцинации и иметь личную медицинскую книжку“ с результатами медицинских обследований\n\n1 Пункт 2 статьи 40 Федерального закона от 30.03.1999 № 52-Ф3З «О санитарно-эпидемиологическом благополучии населения» (Собрание законодательства Российской Федерации, 1999, № 14, ст. 1650; 2003, № 2, ст. 167; 2007, № 46, ст. 5554; 2009, № 1, ст. 17; 2011, № 30 (ч. 1), ст. 4596; 2015, № 1 (часть 1), ст. 11) и пункт 2 статьи 12 Федеральный закон от 24.07.1998 № 124-ФЗ «Об основных гарантиях прав ребенка в Российской Федерации» (Собрание законодательства Российской Федерации, 1998, № 31, ст. 3802; 2019, № 42 (часть П), ст. 5801);\n\n2 Приказ Минздравсоцразвития России от 12.04.2011 № 302н «Об утверждении перечней вредных и (или) опасных производственных факторов и работ, при выполнении которых проводятся обязательные предварительные и периодические медицинские осмотры (обследования), и Порядка проведения обязательных предварительных и периодических медицинских осмотров (обследований) работников, занятых на тяжелых работах и на работах с вредными и (или) опасными условиями труда» (Зарегистрировано Минюстом России 21.10.2011 № 22111) (зарегистрирован Минюстом России 21.10.2011, регистрационный № 22111), с изменениями, внесенными приказами Минздрава России от 15.05.2013 296н (зарегистрирован Минюстом России 03.07.2013, регистрационный № 28970), от 05.12.2014 № 801н (зарегистрирован Минюстом России 03.02.2015, регистрационный № 35848), от 13.12.2019 № 1032н (зарегистрирован Минюстом России 24.12.2019, регистрационный № 56976), приказами Минтруда России и Минздрава России от 06.02.2018 № 62н/49н (зарегистрирован Минюстом России 02.03.2018, регистрационный № 50237) и от 03.04.2020 № 187н/268н (зарегистрирован Минюстом России 12.05.2020, регистрационный № 58320), приказом Минздрава России от 18.05.2020 № 455н (зарегистрирован Минюстом России 22.05.2020 № 58430); 3 Приказ Минздрава России от 21.03.2014 № 125н «Об утверждении национального календаря\n\n18.05.2020 № 455н (зарегистрирован Минюстом России 22.05.2020 № 58430); 3 Приказ Минздрава России от 21.03.2014 № 125н «Об утверждении национального календаря профилактических прививок и календаря профилактических прививок по эпидемическим показаниям» (зарегистрировано Минюстом России 25.04.2014 № 32115) (зарегистрирован Минюстом России 25.04.2014, регистрационный № 32115), с изменениями, внесенными приказами Минздрава России от 16.06.2016 № 370н (зарегистрирован Минюстом России 04.07.2016, регистрационный № 42728), от 13.004.2017 № 175н (зарегистрирован Минюстом России 17.05.2017, регистрационный № 46745), от 19.02.2019 № б9н (зарегистрирован Минюстом России 19.03.2019, регистрационный № 54089), от 24.04.2019 № 243н (зарегистрирован Минюстом России 15.07.2019, регистрационный № 55249); 4 Статья 34 Федерального закона от 30.03.1999 № 52-Ф3 «О санитарно-эпидемиологическом благополучии\n\n(зарегистрирован Минюстом России 15.07.2019, регистрационный № 55249); 4 Статья 34 Федерального закона от 30.03.1999 № 52-Ф3 «О санитарно-эпидемиологическом благополучии населения» (Собрание законодательства Российской Федерации, 1999, № 14, ст. 1650; 2004, № 35, ст. 3607; 2011, № 1 ст.6; № 30 (ч. 1), ст. 4590; 2013, № 48, ст. 6165)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "99c991140b4dd010bdbd4bf482669f00b6a39b12ef7521ab7e7980bfbad444f5", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.999999950385485, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "36\n\nобщего образования, предусматривающих проведение занятий и мероприятий на свежем воздухе.\n\n3.4.2. В структуру общеобразовательной организации может входить интернат. Здание интерната может быть отдельно стоящим, а также может входить в состав основного здания с выделением его в самостоятельный блок с отдельным входом.\n\n3.4.3. Для всех обучающихся должны быть созданы условия для организации питания.\n\nКоличество мест в обеденном зале должно обеспечивать организацию питания всех обучающихся в течение не более трех перемен, во вновь строящихся и реконструируемых – не более чем в две перемены. Число одновременно питающихся детей не должно превышать количество посадочных мест в обеденном зале по проекту.\n\nПри обеденном зале устанавливаются умывальники из расчета один кран на 20 посадочных мест.\n\n3.4.4. Учебные кабинеты и рекреационные помещения для обучающихся 1-4 классов размещаются на 1-3 этажах отдельного здания или отдельного блока, кабинеты технологии для мальчиков размещаются на 1 этаже.\n\n3.4.5. В гардеробах оборудуют места для каждого класса., исходя из площади не менее 0,15 м? на ребенка.\n\nГардеробы оснащают вешалками, крючками или шкафчиками для раздельного хранения одежды и местом для хранения обуви на каждого обучающегося, а также устанавливаются лавки (скамейки).\n\nДля обучающихся 1-4 классов гардероб может размещаться в рекреациях (при условии оборудования их индивидуальными шкафчиками), а также в учебных кабинетах (при условии соблюдения нормы площади учебного кабинета на 1 обучающегося в соответствии с гигиеническими нормативами и выделении дополнительной площади для оборудования гардероба).\n\n3.4.6. Обучающиеся 1-4 классов размещаются в закрепленных за каждым классом учебных кабинетах, за исключением обучения, требующего специального оборудования.\n\n3.4.7. Для обучающихся 5-11 классов образовательный процесс может быть организован по кабинетной системе. При невозможности обеспечить обучающихся 5-11 классов учебной мебелью соответствующей их росту во всех учебных кабинетах, и лабораториях, задействованных в образовательном процессе, обучение проводится в одном учебном кабинете, оборудованного мебелью, соответствующей росту и возрасту обучающихся. Приобретаемая учебная мебель должна иметь документы об оценке (подтверждении) соответствия.\n\n3.4.8. Учебные кабинеты физики и химии оборудуют демонстрационными столами, установленными на подиуме. Демонстрационные столы должны иметь покрытие, устойчивое к действию агрессивных химических веществ и защитные бортики по наружному краю стола. Лаборантскую и учебный кабинет химии оборудуют вытяжными шкафами." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "bfc5e52b7d6221b5ffbac418bdff8ce5a6a8d9056d9be60d9ec5051e5db86feb", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.999999950385485, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "21\n\nобеспечиваются местной системой вытяжной вентиляции.\n\nКаждая группа помещений (производственные, складские, санитарно- бытовые) оборудуется раздельными системами приточно-вытяжной вентиляции с механическим и (или) естественным побуждением.\n\nОбследование технического состояния системы вентиляции (ревизия, очистка и контроль эффективности) проводится перед вводом здания в эксплуатацию, затем через 2 года после ввода в эксплуатацию, в дальнейшем не реже 1 раза в 10 лет. При обследовании технического состояния вентиляции должны осуществляться инструментальные измерения объемов вытяжки воздуха.\n\n2.7.5. Ограждающие устройства отопительных приборов должны быть выполнены из материалов, безвредных для здоровья детей.\n\nОграждения из древесно-стружечных плит к использованию не допускаются.\n\n2.8. Естественное и искусственное освежение в объектах должны соответствовать следующим требованиям:\n\n2.8.1. Уровни естественного и искусственного освещения в помещениях хозяйствующих субъектов должны соответствовать гигиеническим нормативам.\n\n2.8.2. В игровых, спальнях групповых ячеек, в учебных кабинетах и жилых помещениях обеспечивается наличие естественного бокового, верхнего или двустороннего освещения. При глубине учебных помещений (аудиторий, классов) более 6 м оборудуется правосторонний подсвет со стороны стены противоположной светонесущей, высота которого должна быть не менее 2,2 м от пола.\n\nДопускается эксплуатация без естественного освещения следующих помещений:\n\nПомещений для спортивных снарядов (далее -снарядные),\n\nумывальных, душевых, туалетов при гимнастическом (или спортивном) зале,\n\nдушевых и туалетов для персонала,\n\nкладовых и складских помещений, радиоузлов,\n\nкино- фото- лабораторий,\n\nкинозалов,\n\nкнигохранилищ,\n\nбойлерных, насосных водопровода и канализации,\n\nкамер вентиляционных,\n\nкамер кондиционирования воздуха,\n\nузлов управления и других помещений для установки и управления инженерным и технологическим оборудованием зданий,\n\nпомещений для хранения и обработки уборочного инвентаря, помещений для хранения и разведения дезинфекционных средств.\n\nПри использовании ЭСО с демонстрацией обучающих фильмов, программ или иной информации, должны быть выполнены мероприятия, предотвращающие неравномерность освещения и появление бликов на экране." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "830bb4631751ec3baf23b845d0216443ca36774af6155723fc6a881532adfa96", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.999999950385485, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "24\n\nдокументирование и контроль за организацией процесса физического воспитания и проведением мероприятий по физической культуре в зависимости от пола, возраста и состояния здоровья; за состоянием и содержанием мест занятий физической культурой; за пищеблоком и питанием детей;\n\nназначение мероприятий по закаливанию, которые организуются с согласия родителей (законных представителей) и проводятся с учетом состояния здоровья детей (молодежи);\n\nработу по формированию здорового образа жизни и реализация технологий сбережения здоровья;\n\nконтроль за соблюдением правил личной гигиены;\n\nконтроль за информированием хозяйствующего субъекта и медицинских работников обо всех случаях инфекционных заболеваний в своей семье и обращением за медицинской помощью в случае возникновения заболеваний.\n\nВ целях профилактики контагиозных гельминтозов (энтеробиоза и гименолепидоза) в дошкольных образовательных организациях организуются и проводятся меры по предупреждению передачи возбудителя и оздоровлению источников инвазии.\n\nВсе выявленные инвазированные регистрируются в журнале для инфекционных заболеваний.\n\nПри регистрации случаев заболеваний контагиозными гельминтозами санитарно-противоэпидемические (профилактические) мероприятия проводятся в течение 3 календарных дней после окончания лечения.\n\nПри наличии бассейна с целью профилактики паразитарных заболеваний проводится лабораторный контроль качества воды в ванне плавательного бассейна хозяйствующего субъекта и одновременным отбором смывов с объектов внешней среды на паразитологические показатели.\n\n2.9.6. В организациях с круглосуточным пребыванием детей обеспечиваются помывочные дни не реже 1 раза в 7 календарных дней. В бане и (или) душевых следует пользоваться индивидуальными принадлежностями: обувью, полотенцем, мылом и иным моющим средством, мочалкой.\n\nВозможность помывки в душе предоставляется ежедневно.\n\nВ организациях с круглосуточным пребыванием дети должны быть обеспечены индивидуальными средствами гигиены (зубные щетки, расчески, мочалки).\n\n2.9.7. Хозяйствующим субъектом должны быть созданы условия для мытья рук воспитанников, обучающихся и отдыхающих.\n\n2.10. В отношении организации образовательного процесса и режима дня должны соблюдаться следующие требования:\n\n2.10.1. Издательская продукция (книжные и электронные ее варианты), используемые хозяйствующим субъектом, должны соответствовать гигиеническим нормативам.\n\n2.10.2. Кабинеты информатики и работа с ЭСО должны соответствовать гигиеническим нормативам.\n\nПри использовании ЭСО во время занятий и перемен должна проводиться" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "c5658538b20e3d45224b13feb339dded0dd18fa4453552a4a82022ce8f88c9c4", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.999999950385485, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "35\n\nследующие требования:\n\n3.3.1. Размещение и функционирование хозяйствующего субъекта допускается без оборудования самостоятельных входа (выхода), тамбура (или воздушно-тепловой завесы) и собственной территории.\n\nНабор помещений включает игровые помещения для детей и помещения для персонала, помещение (место) для мытья игрушек и игрового оборудования.\n\nДопускается использование туалетов, расположенных в торгово- развлекательных и культурно-досуговых центрах, павильонах, аэропортах, железнодорожных вокзалах и иных объектах нежилого назначения, в которых функционирует хозяйствующий субъект.\n\nДля детей обеспечивается питьевой режим.\n\nИгровые помещения оборудуются вешалками для верхней одежды, полками для обуви, детской мебелью, игровым оборудованием, играми и игрушками. Приобретаемая продукция для детей должна иметь документы об оценке (подтверждении) соответствия.\n\n3.3.2. Используемое игровое оборудование должно соответствовать обязательным требованиям, установленным техническими регламентами предусматривать возможность его мытья с применением моющих и дезинфицирующих средств. Мытье игрушек и игрового оборудования проводится в конце рабочего дня и по мере необходимости.\n\n3.3.3. В игровых комнатах предусматривается естественное и (или) искусственное освещение.\n\n3.3.4. В игровые комнаты принимаются дети, не имеющие визуальных признаков инфекционных заболеваний.\n\n3.4. При реализации образовательных программ начального общего, основного общего и среднего общего образования должны соблюдаться следующие требования:\n\n3.4.1. На собственной территории организации, реализующей образовательные программы начального общего, основного общего и среднего общего образования (далее – общеобразовательные организации), выделяются зоны отдыха, физкультурно-спортивная зона и хозяйственная зона. Для маломобильных групп населения оборудуется парковочная зона.\n\nДля выполнения рабочих программ учебного предмета «Физическая культура», мероприятий программы воспитательной работы и курсов по выбору соответствующей направленности допускается использовать спортивные сооружения (площадки, стадионы, бассейны), расположенные за пределами собственной территории общеобразовательной организации, оборудованные в соответствии с санитарно-эпидемиологическими требованиями к устройству и содержанию мест, предназначенных для занятий спортом и физической культурой. Приобретаемое оборудование для детских игровых площадок должно иметь документы об оценке (подтверждении) соответствия.\n\nЗона отдыха используется для организации подвижных игр и отдыха обучающихся, посещающих группы продленного дня, а также для реализации образовательных программ, начального общего, основного общего и среднего" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "462d01db2027e09ac64041ce2ae2d14041e8575f2494b3b5badff7fb347cb63e", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.999999950385485, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "19\n\nОбщежития и интернаты квартирного (гостиничного) типа должны соответствовать санитарно-эпидемиологическим требованиям, предъявляемым к условиям проживания в жилых зданиях.\n\n2.5. При отделке объектов должны соблюдаться следующие требования:\n\n2.5.1. Применяемые строительные и отделочные материалы используют при наличии документов об оценке (подтверждении) соответствия, быть устойчивыми к уборке влажным способом с применением моющих и дезинфицирующих средств. подтверждающие их безопасность, устойчивыми к уборке влажным способом с применением моющих и дезинфицирующих средств.\n\n2.5.2. Полы не должны иметь дефектов и повреждений и должны быть выполненными из материалов, допускающих влажную обработку и дезинфекцию.\n\n2.5.3. Стены и потолки помещений не должны иметь дефектов и повреждений, следов протеканий и признаков поражений грибком, должны иметь отделку, допускающую влажную обработку с применением моющих и дезинфицирующих средств.\n\nВ помещениях с повышенной влажностью воздуха потолки должны быть влагостойкими.\n\n2.6. При обеспечении водоснабжения и водоотведения хозяйствующими субъектами должны соблюдаться следующие требования:\n\n2.6.1. Здания хозяйствующих субъектов оборудуются системами холодного и горячего водоснабжения, водоотведения в соответствии с требованиями к общественным зданиям и сооружениям в части хозяйственно-питьевого водоснабжения и водоотведения согласно законодательству о техническом регулировании в сфере безопасности зданий и сооружений. Сливные трапы оборудуются в производственных, складских, хозяйственных, подсобных и административно-бытовых помещений столовой (далее – пищеблока), в помещениях для стирки белья, душевых, туалетах, за исключением помещений, размещенных в жилых помещениях жилищного фонда и в дошкольных группах, размещенных в нежилых помещениях. Полы, оборудованные сливными трапами, должны быть оборудованы уклонами к отверстиям трапов.\n\nПри отсутствии централизованной системы водоснабжения и водоотведения хозяйствующие субъекты оборудуются нецентрализованными (автономными) системами холодного и горячего водоснабжения, водоотведения, со спуском сточных вод в локальные очистные сооружения.\n\nПри отсутствии горячего централизованного водоснабжения в помещениях хозяйствующего субъекта устанавливаются водонагревающие устройства.\n\n2.6.2. Вода, используемая в хозяйственно-питьевых и бытовых целях должна соответствовать санитарно-эпидемиологическим требованиям к питьевой воде.\n\n2.6.3. Горячая и холодная вода должна подаваться через смесители.\n\n2.6.4. Не допускается использование воды из системы отопления для технологических, а также хозяйственно-бытовых целей." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "f18c7e20f34fcd254aebd40a03ba260e0fffd5b2cbda4d7d49b4cb1e5a565894", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.999999950385485, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "15\n\nтребованиям к продукции (товарам), подлежащей санитарно- эпидемиологическому надзору (контролю)!.\n\nМинимальная диагональ ЭСО должна составлять для монитора персонального компьютера и ноутбука – не менее 39,6 см, планшета – 26,6 см. Использование мониторов на основе электронно-лучевых трубок в образовательных организациях не допускается.\n\n2.4.6. При организации питания хозяйствующими субъектами должны соблюдаться следующие требования.\n\n2.4.6.1. В составе комплекса помещений для приготовления и раздачи пищи, работающих на сырье, должны быть предусмотрены следующие помещения: загрузочный цех, горячий цех, холодный цех, мясо-рыбный цех, цех первичной обработки овощей, цех вторичной обработки овощей, моечная для кухонной посуды, моечная для столовой посуды, кладовые и складские помещения с холодильным оборудованием.\n\nВ составе комплекса помещений для приготовления и раздачи пищи, работающих на полуфабрикатах, должны быть предусмотрены следующие помещения: загрузочный цех, помещения, предназначенные для доготовив полуфабрикатов, горячий цех, холодный цех, моечная для кухонной посуды, моечная для столовой посуды, кладовые и складские помещения с холодильным оборудованием.\n\nВ составе комплекса помещений буфетов-раздаточных должны быть: помещение для приема и раздачи готовых блюд и кулинарных изделий, помещение для мытья кухонной и столовой посуды, помещение (место) для хранения контейнеров (термосов, тары).\n\n2.4.6.2. Помещения для приготовления и приема пищи, хранения пищевой продукции оборудуются технологическим, холодильным и моечным оборудованием, инвентарем в соответствии с гигиеническими нормативами, а также в целях соблюдения технологии приготовления блюд, режима обработки, условий хранения пищевой продукции.\n\nОборудование, инвентарь, посуда и тара должны быть выполнены из материалов, предназначенных для контакта с пищевыми продуктами, а также предусматривающих возможность их мытья и обеззараживания. Допускается использование одноразовой столовой посуды и приборов.\n\nПосуда для приготовления блюд должна быть выполнена из нержавеющей стали. Инвентарь, используемый для раздачи и порционирования блюд, должен иметь мерную метку объема в литрах и (или) миллилитрах.\n\nНе допускается использование деформированной, с дефектами и механическими повреждениями кухонной и столовой посуды, инвентаря; столовых приборов (вилки, ложки) из алюминия.\n\n? Утверждены решением Комиссии Таможенного союза от 28.05.2010 № 299 «О применении санитарных мер в таможенном союзе» (Официальный сайт Комиссии Таможенного союза һир:/љумгу.іѕои2.ги/, 28.06.2010) (далее – Единые санитарные требования)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "59ba5a25aad4b01fdd5facea84784e0f289b9255c4b53bc0444c5cb0cc126df1", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.999999950385485, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "10\n\nзданий должно быть не более 500 м, в условиях стесненной городской застройки и труднодоступной местности – 800 м, для сельских поселений - до 1 км.\n\nРасстояние от организаций для детей-сирот и детей, оставшихся без попечения родителей организаций социального обслуживания с предоставлением проживания до общеобразовательных и дошкольных организаций должно быть до 1 км.\n\nПри расстояниях, свыше указанных для обучающихся общеобразовательных организаций и воспитанников дошкольных организаций, расположенных в сельской местности, воспитанников организаций для детей- сирот и детей, оставшихся без попечения родителей, организаций социального обслуживания с предоставлением проживания организуется транспортное обслуживание (до организации и обратно). Расстояние транспортного обслуживания не должно превышать 30 километров в одну сторону.\n\nТранспортное обслуживание обучающихся осуществляется транспортом, предназначенным для перевозки детей. Подвоз маломобильных обучающихся осуществляется специально оборудованным транспортным средством для перевозки указанных лиц.\n\nПешеходный подход обучающихся от жилых зданий к месту сбора на остановке должен быть не более 500 м. Для сельских районов допускается увеличение радиуса пешеходной доступности до остановки до 1 км.\n\n2.1.3. В районах Крайнего Севера и приравненных к ним местностях обеспечиваются ветрозащита, а также снегозащита собственной территории.\n\n2.2. На территории хозяйствующего субъекта должны соблюдаться следующие требования:\n\n2.2.1. Собственная территория оборудуется наружным электрическим освещением, по периметру ограждается забором и зелеными насаждениями.\n\nСобственная территория должна быть озеленена из расчета не менее 50% площади территории, свободной от застройки и физкультурно-спортивных площадок, в том числе и по периметру этой территории.\n\nДопускается сокращение озеленения деревьями и кустарниками собственной территории в районах Крайнего Севера и приравненных к ним местностях с учетом климатических условий в этих районах. В городах в условиях стесненной городской застройки допускается снижение озеленения не более чем на 25% площади собственной территории, свободной от застройки.\n\nНа собственной территории не должно быть плодоносящих ядовитыми плодами деревьев и кустарников.\n\n2.2.2. Спортивные и игровые площадки должны иметь полимерное или натуральное покрытие. Полимерные покрытия должны иметь документы об оценке (подтверждения) соответствия.\n\nСпортивные занятия и мероприятия на сырых площадках и (или) на площадках, имеющих дефекты, не проводятся.\n\nБеговые дорожки и спортивные площадки должны быть спланированы с учетом необходимости отвода поверхностных вод за пределы их границ.\n\nДля проведения занятий по физической культуре, спортивных соревнований" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "fbf5fb5cc421293aaa264113f86fe58ff4f96dcae03910e901b4206a73cab35c", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.999999950385485, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "31\n\nфизкультурный зал, кабинет логопеда, помещения для иных дополнительных занятий), а также иных помещений (помещения для оказания медицинской помощи, пищеблок, помещения для стирки белья) и помещений служебно- бытового назначения.\n\nГрупповые ячейки размещаются не выше третьего этажа, в том числе, групповые ячейки для детей с ограниченными возможностями здоровья, ~ не выше второго этажа, для детей с нарушениями опорно-двигательного аппарата и зрения – на первом этаже. Групповые ячейки для детей до 3-х лет располагаются на 1 этаже.\n\nПомещения постоянного пребывания детей для дезинфекции воздушной среды оборудуются приборами по обеззараживанию воздуха. Полы в помещениях групповых, расположенных на первом этаже, должны быть утепленными или отапливаемыми.\n\nПри размещении дошкольной организации и организации, осуществляющей уход и присмотр за детьми в отдельно стоящем здании групповые ячейки для детей младенческого и раннего возраста должны иметь самостоятельный вход на игровую площадку.\n\nВ раздевальной комнате для детей младенческого и раннего возраста до года выделяется место для раздевания родителей и кормления грудных детей матерями.\n\nНа третьем этаже (при наличии) дошкольной организации и организации, осуществляющей присмотр и уход за детьми, за исключением помещений, размещенных в жилых и нежилых помещениях жилищного фонда и нежилых зданий, размещаются дополнительные помещения для работы с детьми, а также группы для детей старшего дошкольного возраста.\n\nДля групповых ячеек, располагающихся выше первого этажа, раздевальные комнаты для детей могут размещаться на первом этаже.\n\nПри численности воспитанников дошкольной организации более 120 человек предусматривается отдельный зал для занятий музыкой и отдельный зал для занятий физкультурой.\n\nИгрушки, используемые на прогулке, хранятся отдельно от игрушек, используемых в группе, в специально отведенных местах.\n\nДля хранения верхней одежды раздевальные групповых ячеек оборудуются шкафами для верхней одежды детей с индивидуальными ячейками, полками для головных уборов, крючками. Каждая индивидуальная ячейка маркируется. Количество индивидуальных ячеек должно соответствовать списочному количеству детей в группе.\n\nВ раздевальных комнатах или в отдельных помещениях создаются условия для сушки верхней одежды и обуви детей.\n\n3.1.4. Для детей младенческого и раннего возраста раздевальную комнату следует оборудовать пеленальными столами, стульями, раковиной для мытья рук, шкафом для одежды матерей, местом для грудного кормления детей.\n\nВ игровых для детей раннего возраста устанавливают пеленальные столы и столики, манеж с покрытием из материалов, позволяющих проводить влажную" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "ad16dd165893bcfbca854c7e72a384151bee12ddd9da743747bb8b0dfdf548a6", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.999999950385485, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "45\n\n3.9.1. При наличии собственной территории выделяются учебная, физкультурно-спортивная, хозяйственная и жилая (при наличии студенческого общежития) зоны.\n\nНа собственной территории хозяйствующего субъекта предусматривается не менее двух въездов (основной и хозяйственный). Хозяйственная зона должна располагаться со стороны входа в производственные помещения и иметь самостоятельный въезд.\n\n3.9.2. Учебные помещения, в которых реализуется общеобразовательная программа, и их оборудование должны соответствовать пункту 3.4 Правил.\n\nУчебные помещения и оборудование для профессиональных дисциплин должны соответствовать направленности реализуемых образовательных программ среднего профессионального образования и включать: лаборатории и кабинеты общепрофильного и профессионального циклов, а также помещения по профилю обучения.\n\nОбъем учебных занятий и практики не должен превышать 36 академических часов в неделю. Расписание занятий составляется с учетом дневной и недельной умственной работоспособности и в соответствии со шкалой трудности учебных предметов. Образовательная недельная нагрузка равномерно распределяется на всю учебную неделю. В годовом календарном учебном плане должно быть предусмотрено чередование периодов учебного времени, сессий и каникул.\n\n3.9.3. Мастерские для сварочных работ, мастерские, в которых проводится рубка и резка металла, мастерские с крупногабаритным и тяжелым оборудованием располагаются на нижних этажах с проведением звукоизолирующих и виброизолирующих мероприятий. Сварочные агрегаты устанавливаются в отдельном помещении, изолированном от учебных помещений.\n\nСверлильные, точильные и другие станки в учебных мастерских должны устанавливаться на фундаменте (кроме настольно-сверлильных и настольно- точильных) и оборудоваться предохранительными сетками, стеклами и местным освещением.\n\nСтолярные и слесарные верстаки должны соответствовать росту обучающихся и оснащаться подставками для ног.\n\nТренажерные устройства, используемые для освоения сложных профессий (горнорудной, химической, металлургической промышленности, транспорта, строительства, сельского хозяйства), размещают в отдельных помещениях или комплексах тренажерных кабинетов.\n\nСтанки, оборудование, инструменты, рычаги управления, рабочая мебель по своим параметрам должны соответствовать эргономическим требованиям с учетом роста и физического развития.\n\nУчебно-производственные мастерские оборудуют складскими помещениями для хранения инструментов, инвентаря, заготовок, сырья и готовой продукции; шкафами для хранения спецодежды и умывальниками.\n\nВ отдельно стоящем здании мастерских предусматривают гардеробную для верхней одежды и обуви, душевые, умывальные, туалеты, устройства для" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "2511d0ecf667662f9a8dc50647aac52410c82ae161b79c9068a381a00889a97b", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.999999950385485, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "43\n\nзанятий в 21.00 часов.\n\nЕжедневной дезинфекции подлежат помещения туалета, душевых, раздевальных, а также скамейки, поручни, выключатели и дверные ручки. Раздевалки оборудуются скамьями и шкафчиками (вешалками).\n\n3.6.3. Состав помещений физкультурно-спортивных организаций определяется видом спорта.\n\nПри спортивных и хореографических залах, бассейнах оборудуют туалеты, душевые, помещения для переодевания раздельно для мальчиков и девочек.\n\nРаздевалки оборудуются скамьями и шкафчиками (вешалками), устройствами для сушки волос.\n\nСпортивный инвентарь хранится в помещениях снарядных при спортивных залах.\n\nИспользуемые спортивные маты, спортивные ковры, инвентарь и оборудование должны быть покрыты материалами, обеспечивающими их влажную обработку моющими и дезинфекционными средствами.\n\n3.7. В организациях для детей-сирот и детей, оставшихся без попечения родителей должны соблюдаться следующие требования:\n\n3.7.1. При реализации в хозяйствующем субъекте образовательных программ дошкольного образования их деятельность регламентируется в соответствии с требованиями пункта 3.1. Правил, образовательных программ начального общего, основного общего и среднего общего образования – в соответствии с требованиями пункта 3.3. Правил.\n\nЧисленность детей в воспитательной группе в возрасте до 4 лет не должна превышать 6 человек, в возрасте от 4-х и старше - 8 человек.\n\nПри наличии в воспитательной группе детей в возрасте до 4 лет и старше наполняемость группы не должна превышать 6 человек.\n\n3.7.2. Проживание детей организовывается по принципам семейного воспитания в группах, размещаемых в помещениях для проживания, созданных по квартирному (гостиничному) типу.\n\nМинимальный набор помещений, в которых размещаются воспитательные группы в организациях для детей-сирот и детей, оставшихся без попечения родителей, включает: жилые комнаты (спальни, раздельные для мальчиков и девочек); помещение для отдыха и игр (гостиная); помещение для занятий (подготовки уроков); помещение для приема и (или) приготовления пищи; санитарно-бытовые помещения (санитарные узлы, душевая или ванная комната); комнату воспитателя; раздевальную (прихожую). Санитарные узлы и душевые (ванные комнаты) размещаются в отдельных и (или) в совмещенных помещениях и оборудуют стиральными машинами.\n\nПомещения постоянного пребывания и проживания детей оборудуются приборами по обеззараживанию воздуха.\n\nПомещения воспитательной группы, в которых проживают дети-инвалиды, обустраиваются с учетом условий для размещения используемых ими технических средств реабилитации.\n\n3.7.3. Раздевальное помещение (прихожая) оборудуется шкафами для" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "59755dce1d6ee4e7d4e5d8da074dda02a325755e4488b4461317f5e5dfe5e65f", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.999999950385485, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "образовательных организаций» (зарегистрировано Минюстом России 29.05.2013, регистрационный № 28564);\n\nпостановление Главного государственного санитарного врача Российской Федерации от 19.12.2013 № 68 «Об утверждении СанПиН 2.4.1.3147-13 «Санитарно-эпидемиологические требования к дошкольным группам, размещенным в жилых помещениях жилищного фонда» (зарегистрировано Минюстом России 03.02.2014, регистрационный № 31209);\n\nпостановление Главного государственного санитарного врача Российской Федерации от 25.12.2013 № 72 «О внесении изменений № 2 в СанПин 2.4.2.2821-10 «Санитарно-эпидемиологические требования к условиям и организации обучения в общеобразовательных учреждениях» (зарегистрировано Минюстом России 27.03.2014, регистрационный № 31751);\n\nпостановление Главного государственного санитарного врача Российской Федерации от 27.12.2013 № 73 «О6 утверждении СанПиН 2.4.4.3155-13 «Санитарно-эпидемиологические требования к устройству, содержанию и организации работы стационарных организаций отдыха и оздоровления детей» (зарегистрировано Минюстом России 18.04.2014, регистрационный № 32024);\n\nпостановление Главного государственного санитарного врача Российской Федерации от 04.07.2014 № 41 «Об утверждении СанПиН 2.4.4.3172-14 «Санитарно-эпидемиологические требования к устройству, содержанию и организации режима работы образовательных организаций дополнительного образования детей» (зарегистрировано Минюстом России 20.08.2014, регистрационный № 33660);\n\nпостановление Главного государственного санитарного врача Российской Федерации от 02.12.2014 № 78 «О признании утратившим силу пункта 2.2 СанПин 2.4.7.1166-02 «Гигиенические требования к изданиям учебным для общего и начального профессионального образования» (зарегистрировано Минюстом России 11.12.2014, регистрационный № 35144);\n\nпостановление Главного государственного санитарного врача Российской Федерации от 09.02.2015 № 8 «Об утверждении СанПин 2.4.3259- 15 «Санитарно-эпидемиологические требования к устройству, содержанию и организации режима работы организаций для детей-сирот и детей, оставшихся без попечения родителей» (зарегистрировано Минюстом России 26.03.2015, регистрационный № 36571);\n\nпостановление Главного государственного санитарного врача Российской Федерации от 20.07.2015 № 28 «О внесении изменений в СанПиН 2.4.1.3049-13 «Санитарно-эпидемиологические требования к устройству, содержанию и организации режима работы дошкольных образовательных организаций» (зарегистрировано Минюстом России 03.08.2015 регистрационный № 38312);\n\nпостановление Главного государственного санитарного врача Российской Федерации от 10.07.2015 № 26 «Об утверждении" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "efadf19ad871e1d5c848e98985ca27d97e5a1be1809cfe27609589a4e64fc084", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.999999950385485, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "20\n\n2.6.5. Холодной и горячей водой обеспечиваются производственные помещения пищеблока, помещения в которых оказывается медицинская помощь, туалеты, душевые, умывальные, комнаты гигиены для девушек, умывальные перед обеденным залом, помещения для стирки белья, помещения для приготовления дезинфицирующих растворов.\n\n2.6.6. Питьевой режим организуется посредством стационарных питьевых фонтанчиков и (или) выдачи детям воды, расфасованной в емкости (бутилированной) промышленного производства, в том числе через установки с дозированным розливом воды или организуется посредством выдачи кипяченой питьевой воды. Вода, расфасованная в емкости и поставляемая в хозяйствующие субъекты, должна иметь документы об оценке (подтверждения) соответствия.\n\nПри использовании установок с дозированным розливом питьевой воды, расфасованной в емкости, проводится замена емкости по мере необходимости, но не реже, чем это предусмотрено сроком годности воды, установленным производителем.\n\nПри использовании бутилированной воды хозяйствующий субъект должен быть обеспечена запасом чистой посуды (стеклянной, фаянсовой либо одноразовой), а также контейнерами для сбора использованной посуды одноразового применения.\n\n2.7. Микроклимат, отопление и вентиляция в объектах должны соответствовать следующим требованиям:\n\n2.7.1. Здания оборудуются системами отопления и вентиляции в соответствии с требованиями, предъявляемыми к отоплению, вентиляции и кондиционированию воздуха в общественных зданиях и сооружениях согласно законодательству о техническом регулировании в сфере безопасности зданий и сооружений.\n\nВ помещениях обеспечиваются параметры микроклимата, воздухообмена, определенные требованиями гигиенических нормативов.\n\nВ воздухе не допускается превышение предельно допустимых концентраций загрязняющих веществ, определенных требованиями гигиенических нормативов.\n\nНе допускается использование переносных отопительных приборов с инфракрасным излучением.\n\n2.7.2. Конструкция окон должна обеспечивать возможность проведения проветривания помещений в любое время года (за исключением детских игровых комнат, размещаемых в торгово-развлекательных и культурно- досуговых центрах, павильонах, аэропортах, железнодорожных вокзалах и иных объектах нежилого назначения).\n\nПроветривание в присутствии детей не проводится.\n\n2.7.3. Контроль температуры воздуха во всех помещениях, предназначенных для пребывания детей и молодежи осуществляется Организацией с помощью термометров.\n\n2.7.4. Помещения, где установлено оборудование, являющееся источником выделения пыли, химических веществ, избытков тепла и влаги дополнительно" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "3768f9cc00e5341fe25b3149af39663e18a681aaa8a5ec77b105534682f004d5", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.999999950385485, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "25\n\nгимнастика для глаз. При использовании книжных учебных изданий гимнастика для глаз должна проводиться во время перемен.\n\nДля профилактики нарушений осанки во время занятий должны проводиться соответствующие физические упражнения (далее - физкультминутки).\n\nПри использовании ЭСО с демонстрацией обучающих фильмов, программ или иной информации, предусматривающих ее фиксацию в тетрадях воспитанниками и обучающимися, продолжительность непрерывного использования экрана не должна превышать для детей 5-7 лет – 5-7 минут, для учащихся 1-4-х классов 10 минут, для 5-9-х классов 15 минут.\n\nОбщая продолжительность использования ЭСО на уроке не должна превышать для интерактивной доски – для детей до 10 лет – 20 минут, старше 10 лет – 30 минут; компьютера - для детей 1-2 классов – 20 минут, 3-4 классов – 25 минут, 5- 9 классов ~ 30 минут, 10-11 классов ~ 35 минут.\n\nЗанятия с использованием ЭСО в возрастных группах до 5 лет не проводятся.\n\n2.10.3. Расписание занятий составляются с учетом дневной и недельной динамики умственной работоспособности обучающихся и шкалой трудности учебных предметов.\n\nРежим двигательной активности детей в течение дня организуется с учетом возрастных особенностей и состояния здоровья.\n\nПри организации образовательной деятельности предусматривается введение в режим дня физкультминуток во время занятий, гимнастики для глаз, обеспечивается контроль за осанкой, в том числе, во время письма, рисования и использования ЭСО.\n\nФизкультурные, физкультурно-оздоровительные мероприятия, массовые спортивные мероприятия, туристические походы, спортивные соревнования организуются с учетом возраста, физической подготовленности и состояния здоровья детей. Хозяйствующим субъектом обеспечивается присутствие медицинских работников на спортивных соревнованиях и на занятиях в плавательных бассейнах.\n\nВозможность проведения занятий физической культурой и спортом на открытом воздухе, а также подвижных игр, определяется по совокупности показателей метеорологических условий (температуры, относительной влажности и скорости движения воздуха) по климатическим зонам. В дождливые, ветреные и морозные дни занятия физической культурой должны проводится в зале.\n\nОтношение времени, затраченного на непосредственное выполнение физических упражнений к общему времени занятия физической культурой должна составлять не менее 70%.\n\n2.10.4. Не допускается привлекать детей к работам с вредными или опасными условиями труда, при выполнении которых запрещается применение труда лиц моложе 18 лет, а также к уборке туалетов, душевых, умывальных, мытью окон и светильников, уборке снега с крыш, выполнению ремонтно-" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "b79ffd5e4582618d32ad422132015985e987d513352625a970358d15d1fe38dd", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.999999950385485, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "16\n\nХранение стерильных бутылочек, сосок и пустышек должно быть организовано в специальной промаркированной посуде с крышкой.\n\nСкладские помещения для хранения пищевых продуктов оборудуют приборами для измерения относительной влажности и температуры воздуха, холодильное оборудование – контрольными термометрами.\n\nТехнологическое и холодильное оборудование должно быть исправным и способным поддерживать температурный режим.\n\nПроизводственные столы, предназначенные для обработки пищевых продуктов, должны быть цельнометаллическими, устойчивыми к действию моющих и дезинфекционных средств, выполнены из материалов, для контакта с пищевыми продуктами. Покрытие стола для работы с тестом (столешница) должно быть выполнено из дерева твердых лиственных пород. В дошкольных группах, размещенных в жилых и нежилых помещениях жилищного фонда, для работы с тестом допускается использование съёмной доски, выполненной из дерева твердых лиственных пород.\n\nПри замене оборудования в помещениях для приготовления холодных закусок необходимо обеспечить установку столов с охлаждаемой поверхностью.\n\nКухонная посуда, столы, инвентарь, оборудование маркируются в зависимости от назначения и должны использоваться в соответствии с маркировкой.\n\nДля обеззараживания воздуха в холодном цехе используется бактерицидная установка для обеззараживания воздуха.\n\nПри отсутствии холодного цеха приборы для обеззараживания воздуха устанавливают на участке (в зоне) приготовления холодных блюд, в мясорыбном, овощном цехах и в помещении для обработки яиц.\n\nКоличество технологического, холодильного и моечного оборудования, инвентаря, кухонной и столовой посуды должно обеспечивать поточность технологического процесса, а объем единовременно приготавливаемых блюд должен соответствовать количеству непосредственно принимающих пищу лиц. 2.4.6.3. Обеденные залы оборудуются столовой мебелью (столами,\n\nдолжен соответствовать количеству непосредственно принимающих пищу лиц. 2.4.6.3. Обеденные залы оборудуются столовой мебелью (столами, стульями, табуретами, скамьями), имеющей без дефектов и повреждений покрытие, позволяющее проводить обработку с применением моющих и дезинфицирующих средств.\n\n2.4.7. Спальные комнаты для проживания обеспечиваются кроватями, тумбочками и стульями (табуреты) по количеству проживающих, столом, шкафом (шкафами) для раздельного хранения одежды и обуви. Количество столов и шкафов должно предусматривать возможность использования их всеми проживающими и возможность раздельного хранения вещей.\n\n2.4.8. Кровати должны иметь твердое ложе. Допускается оборудование спален раскладными кроватями с жестким ложем или трансформируемыми кроватями, не превышающими трех уровней и имеющими самостоятельный заход на них.\n\nИспользование диванов и кресел для сна не допускается, кроме общежитий организаций, осуществляющих образовательную деятельность по" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "97e39545275e827d63c642a46ab9358c0c20c7499cdd77dbe6cac7bf628dc48b", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.999999950385485, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "53\n\nПри организации временного пребывания организованных групп детей от восьми и более человек, находящихся с руководителем организованной группы, без родителей (законных представителей) им должны быть обеспечены условия для проживания с соблюдением норм площади, соблюдения правил личной гигиены, питания, организован питьевой режим.\n\nНе допускается проживание организованных групп детей в помещениях без естественного освещения, без централизованного водоснабжения и канализации, а также в помещениях, расположенных в подвальных и цокольных этажах.\n\n3.15. При проведении массовых мероприятий с участием детей и молодежи должны соблюдаться следующие требования:\n\n3.16.1. Хозяйствующие субъекты деятельность которых связана с организацией и проведением массовых мероприятий с участием детей и молодежи, в срок не позднее, чем за 1 месяц до начала мероприятия информируют территориальные органы, уполномоченные на осуществление федерального государственного санитарно-эпидемиологического надзора о планируемых сроках проведения мероприятия, о количестве участников, условиях доставки участников до планируемого места проведения мероприятия, условиях проживания, организации питьевого режима, организации питания, сроках проведения дератизационных, дезинсекционных мероприятиях и о противоклещевых обработках (в случае если мероприятие проводится в теплое время года и в природных условиях).\n\n4. При перевозке организованных групп детей железнодорожным транспортом должны соблюдаться следующие санитарно-эпидемиологические требования:\n\n4.1. Организаторами поездок организованных групп детей железнодорожным транспортом:\n\nобеспечивается сопровождение организованных групп детей взрослыми из расчета 1 сопровождающий на количество детей до 12 человек в период следования к месту назначения и обратно;\n\nорганизуется питание организованных групп детей с интервалами не более 4 часов;\n\nорганизуется питьевой режим в пути следования и при доставке организованных групп детей от железнодорожного вокзала до места назначения и обратно, а также при нахождении организованных групп детей на вокзале.\n\n4.2. При нахождении в пути следования более 12 часов группы детей в количестве свыше 30 человек организатор поездки обязать обеспечить сопровождение группы детей медицинским работником.\n\n4.3. При нахождении в пути свыше 1 дня организуется горячее питание.\n\nКратность приема пищи определяется временем нахождения групп детей в пути следования, времени суток и в соответствии с физиологическими потребностями.\n\nПри нахождении в пути следования менее 1 дня (менее 24 часов) питание детей осуществляется в соответствии с гигиеническими нормативами." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "1f429dcf68e926502fb4aa6d502e2abde02c470466037abd75b9d70e18313731", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.999999950385485, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "42\n\n3.5.12. При реализации образовательных программ с использованием дистанционных образовательных технологий, электронного обучения расписание занятий составляется с учетом дневной и недельной динамики умственной работоспособности обучающихся и трудности учебных предметов. Обучение должно заканчиваться не позднее 18.00 часов. Продолжительность урока не должна превышать 40 минут.\n\n3.5.13. Режим учебного дня, в том числе во время учебных занятий, должен включать различные формы двигательной активности.\n\nВ середине урока организуется перерыв для проведения комплекса упражнений для профилактики зрительного утомления, повышения активности центральной нервной системы, снятия напряжения с мышц шеи и плечевого пояса, с мышц туловища, для укрепления мышц и связок нижних конечностей.\n\n3.5.14. При использовании электронного оборудования, в том числе сенсорного экрана, клавиатуры, компьютерной мыши необходимо ежедневно дезинфицировать их в соответствии с рекомендациями производителя либо с использованием растворов или салфеток на спиртовой основе, содержащих не менее 70% спирта.\n\n3.5.15. В помещении, где организовано рабочее место обучающегося с компьютером (ноутбуком) или планшетом, необходимо предусмотреть естественное освещение и искусственное общее и местное на рабочем столе. Источник местного освещения на рабочем месте обучающегося должен располагаться сбоку от экрана персонального компьютера (ноутбука) или планшета. Освещение не должно создавать бликов на поверхности экрана.\n\n3.6. В организациях дополнительного образования и физкультурно- спортивных организациях должны соблюдаться следующие требования:\n\n3.6.1. Наличие собственной территории, набор помещений определяются направленностью реализуемых дополнительных общеобразовательных программ и видом спорта.\n\nРаздевалки для верхней одежды размещают на первом или цокольном (подвальном) этаже хозяйствующего субъекта.\n\nВ организациях с количеством до 20 человек допустимо оборудование одного туалета.\n\nДля персонала выделяется отдельный туалет (кабина).\n\nМастерские, лаборатории оборудуются умывальными раковинами, кладовыми (шкафами).\n\nВ помещениях для занятий на музыкальных инструментах, танцами, вокалом, мастерских с использованием оборудования, являющегося дополнительным источником шума, выполняются шумоизолирующие мероприятия.\n\n3.6.2. Образовательный процесс осуществляется в соответствии с дополнительной общеобразовательной программой. Занятия проводятся по группам, подгруппам или индивидуально.\n\nЗанятия начинаются не ранее 8.00 часов утра и заканчиваются не позднее 20.00 часов. Для обучающихся в возрасте 16-18 лет допускается окончание" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "4d3e113bf99eecc71fc6bfb557ae57fcf3f92d0cbd782ef5f320e2cd3b715e04", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.999999950385485, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "12\n\nобщего и среднего общего образования не допускается размещать в помещениях жилищного фонда, а также в функционирующих зданиях общественного и административного назначения.\n\nВстроенные в жилые здания, встроенно-пристроенные к жилым зданиям и (или) к зданиям общественного и административного назначения хозяйствующие субъекты должны иметь самостоятельные вход и выход, а также прилегающую к ним территорию, если иное не определено Правилами.\n\nВ подвальных этажах не допускается размещение помещений для детей и молодежи, помещений, в которых оказывается медицинская помощь, за исключением гардеробов, туалетов для персонала, тира, помещений для хранения книг (далее —– книгохранилища), умывальных и душевых помещений (далее – умывальные, душевые соответственно), для стирки и сушки белья, гладильных, хозяйственных иных подсобных помещений.\n\nВ помещениях цокольного этажа не допускается размещение помещений для детей и молодежи, за исключением гардеробов, туалетов, тира, книгохранилищ, умывальных, душевых, туалетов, помещений для стирки и сушки белья, гладильных, хозяйственных и иных подсобных помещений, обеденных и тренажерных залов для молодежи.\n\nПодвальные помещения должны быть сухими, не содержащими следы загрязнений, плесени и грибка, не допускается наличие в них мусора.\n\nУчебные помещения для занятий детей дошкольного и младшего школьного возраста в объектах хозяйствующих субъектов, реализующих образовательные программы дошкольного образования и начального общего, основного общего и среднего общего образования размещаются не выше третьего этажа здания, если иное не определено Правилами.\n\nМинимальное количество помещений, необходимых для функционирования хозяйствующего субъекта (далее - минимальный набор помещений) с круглосуточным пребыванием включает: жилые помещения, помещения для организации питания, помещения для оказания медицинской помощи, помещения для реализации образовательных программ (учебные классы (комнаты самоподготовки) и (или) по присмотру и уходу за детьми (игровые комнаты), или комнаты для осуществления присмотра и ухода (игровые комнаты и (или) гостиные), душевые, умывальные, туалеты для проживающих, помещения для стирки, сушки и глажки белья, комнаты для хранения постельного белья, комнаты и туалеты для персонала.\n\nДля объектов с дневным пребыванием минимальный набор помещений включает: помещения, обеспечивающие реализацию основного вида деятельности, помещения для организации питания (в случае пребывания детей (молодежи) в данных объектах более 4 часов), санитарные узлы, помещения для оказания медицинской помощи (в случаях, установленных законодательством%).\n\n3 Часть 3 статьи 41 Федерального закона от 29.12.2012 № 273-Ф3 «Об образовании в Российской Федерации» (Собрание законодательства Российской Федерации, 31.12.2012, № 53 (ч. 1), ст. 7598; 2016, № 27 (часть 12), ст. 4246)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "e6c0937046396b48caf5c12c440e9d18e2a6cc355ce2bab85e9a568169ca5798", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.999999950385485, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "33\n\n3.1.10. Допускается доставка готовых блюд из других организаций в соответствии с пунктом 1.9 Правил. Доставка готовых блюд должна осуществляться в изотермической таре.\n\n3.1.11. Для групп дошкольных организаций и организаций, осуществляющих присмотр и уход за детьми, размещенных в жилых и нежилых помещениях жилищного фонда и нежилых зданий, а также семейных дошкольных групп предусматривается следующий набор помещений и (или) мест: место (помещение), оборудованное шкафчиками или вешалками для раздельного хранения верхней одежды и полками для обуви воспитанников; игровая комната для проведения игр; помещение (место в игровой комнате) для сна; кухня (при нахождении детей более 4 часов) для хранения пищевых продуктов, приготовления пищи, мытья и хранения посуды, разделочного инвентаря и столовых приборов; помещение (место в игровой комнате или на кухне) для приема пищи детьми (при нахождении детей более 4 часов); место (в помещении кухни или игровой комнаты) для организации питьевого режима; помещение (место) для хранения белья (при организации сна детей); место или (шкаф) для хранения уборочного инвентаря; туалет; умывальная комната.\n\nВозможно совмещение в одном помещении туалета и умывальной комнаты.\n\nТуалет оборудуется унитазом, обеспечивается индивидуальными сидениями для каждого ребенка, для детей до трех лет – индивидуальными горшками.\n\nДопускается совмещение в одном туалетном помещении туалета для детей и персонала группы или использование детьми туалета и умывальной комнаты персонала группы.\n\nКаждый ребенок обеспечивается индивидуальным полотенцем для рук, а при организации сна —– индивидуальными постельными принадлежностями (комплект постельного белья, одеяло, подушка). Допускается использование одноразовых полотенец и личного постельного белья.\n\nДопускается осуществление питания детей в одном помещении (кухне), предназначенном как для приготовления пищи, так и для ее приема. Площадь помещений для приема и (или) приготовления пищи должна составлять не менее 0,7 м? на одно посадочное место. Количество посадочных мест должно обеспечивать одновременный прием пищи всеми детьми.\n\nПри отсутствии кухни организуются раздаточное помещение и место для мытья и хранения посуды, которое может быть оборудовано посудомоечной машиной.\n\nДля организации прогулок в группах по присмотру и уходу за детьми (без реализации образовательной программы) допускается использование детских игровых площадок, оборудованных в соответствии с требованиями законодательства, если это не противоречит требованиям жилищного законодательства.\n\nДля организации прогулок детей младенческого возраста используются прогулочные коляски (в том числе многоместные).\n\nНе допускается просушивание белья, одежды и обуви в игровой комнате, спальне, кухне." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "36f8afa27a32542a06e8f599ae55c313da99903e844246caffa917707dc25567", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.999999950385485, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "46\n\nпитьевого водоснабжения, а при необходимости помещение для выдачи спецодежды и индивидуальных средств защиты.\n\n3.9.4. В лабораториях, учебно-производственных мастерских, на рабочих местах на предприятиях, где проводится обучение, у станков и механизмов, работа на которых связана с выделением вредных веществ, пыли, повышенного тепла, оборудуют общую и местную механическую вентиляцию.\n\n3.9.5. В профессиональной образовательной организации должно быть организовано двухразовое горячее питание для обучающихся, а для проживающих в общежитии —– пятиразовое горячее питание. При отсутствии условий организации горячего питания для обучающихся в профессиональной образовательной организации допускается организация горячего питания посредством привлечения организации общественного питания.\n\nОбучающихся не допускается использовать на подсобных работах, не входящих в программу профессиональной подготовки, на работах с вредными и тяжелыми условиями труда в соответствии с перечнем, установленным законодательством для лиц, не достигших 18 лет!2.\n\nУсловия прохождения практики на рабочих местах для лиц, не достигших 18 лет должны соответствовать требованиям безопасности условий труда работников, не достигших 18 лет.\n\n3.10. В образовательных организациях высшего образования должны соблюдаться следующие требования:\n\n3.10.1. При наличии собственной территории выделяются учебная, физкультурно-спортивная, хозяйственная и жилая (при наличии студенческого общежития) зоны.\n\nНа собственной территории хозяйствующего субъекта предусматривается не менее двух въездов (основной и хозяйственный). Хозяйственная зона должна иметь самостоятельный въезд.\n\n3.10.2. Учебные помещения и оборудование для учебно-производственной деятельности должны соответствовать требованиям пунктов 3.4, 3.5, 3.9, 3.6 Правил.\n\n3.11. В загородных стационарных детских оздоровительных лагерях с круглосуточным пребыванием должны соблюдаться следующие требования:\n\n3.11.1. Хозяйствующие субъекты в срок не позднее, чем за два месяца до открытия каждого сезона информируют территориальные органы, уполномоченные на осуществление федерального государственного санитарно- эпидемиологического надзора о планируемых сроках заездов детей, режиме работы и количестве детей.\n\n3.11.2. Продолжительность оздоровительной смены составляет не менее 21 календарного дня. Возможна организация смен менее 20 календарных дней для\n\n02 Перечень тяжелых работ и работ с вредными или опасными условиями труда, при выполнении которых запрещается применение труда лиц моложе восемнадцати лет, утвержден постановлением Правительства Российской Федерации от 25.02.2000 № 163 (Собрание законодательства Российской Федерации, 2000, № 10, ст. 1131; 2001, № 26, ст. 2685; 2011, № 26, ст. 3803)." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9732808795096101, + "doc_id": "dd2c727558ce1810f36adad9171e920d558be81eaff1b4df9625acec3f071402", + "edit_distance": 0.25925925925925924, + "f1_score": 0.9953917050691243, + "meteor": 0.9711505696861469, + "precision": 0.9969230769230769, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS OF AMERICAN AIRLINES, INC.\n\nOn March 13, 2019, a directive from the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) grounded all U.S.-registered Boeing 737 MAX Family aircraft and, as a result, all deliveries of Boeing 737 MAX Family aircraft were suspended. Since the time of the FAA recertification of the Boeing 737 MAX Family aircraft on November 18, 2020, deliveries have resumed and American accepted delivery of 10 Boeing 737 MAX Family aircraft during the period between the date of recertification and December 31, 2020. American has rights to defer one Boeing 737 MAX Family aircraft from delivery in 2021 to 2023 and rights to defer 10 Boeing 737 MAX Family aircraft from delivery in 2022 to 2023-2024.\n\nDue to the uncertainty surrounding the timing of delivery of certain aircraft, the amounts in the table represent American's current best estimate; however, the actual delivery schedule may differ from the table above, potentially materially.\n\nThe amounts in the table exclude 19 Boeing 787-8 aircraft to be delivered in 2021 for which American has obtained committed lease financing. See Note 4 for information regarding this operating lease commitment.\n\nAdditionally, American has purchase commitments related to aircraft fuel, flight equipment maintenance, construction projects and information technology support as follows (approximately): $2.3 billion in 2021, $1.3 billion in 2022, $1.2 billion in 2023, $242 million in 2024, $163 million in 2025 and $1.0 billion in 2026 and thereafter.\n\n## (b) Capacity Purchase Agreements with Third-Party Regional Carriers\n\nAmerican has capacity purchase agreements with third-party regional carriers. The capacity purchase agreements provide that all revenues, including passenger, in-flight, ancillary, mail and freight revenues, go to American. American controls marketing, scheduling, ticketing, pricing and seat inventories. In return, American agrees to pay predetermined fees to these airlines for operating an agreed-upon number of aircraft, without regard to the number of passengers on board. In addition, these agreements provide that American either reimburses or pays 100% of certain variable costs, such as airport landing fees, fuel and passenger liability insurance.\n\nAs of December 31, 2020, American's capacity purchase agreements with third-party regional carriers had expiration dates ranging from 2021 to 2027, with rights of American to extend the respective terms of certain agreements.\n\nAs of December 31, 2020, American's minimum obligations under its capacity purchase agreements with third-party regional carriers are as follows (approximately, in millions):\n\nTable of Contents\n\nRepresents\tminimum\tpayments\tunder\tcapacity\tpurchase\tagreements\twith\tthird-party\tregional\tcarriers,\twhich\tare\testimates\tof\tcosts\tbased\ton assumed\tminimum\tlevels\tof\tflying\tunder\tthe\tcapacity\tpurchase\tagreements\tand\tAmerican's\tactual\tpayments\tcould\tdiffer\tmaterially.\tExcludes payments\tfor\tthe\tlease\tof\tcertain\taircraft\tunder\tcapacity\tpurchase\tagreements,\twhich\tare\treflected\tin\tthe\toperating\tlease\tobligations\tin\tNote\t4. (1)\n\n## (c) Airport Redevelopment\n\n## Los Angeles International Airport (LAX)\n\nFrom time to time, airports where American has operations engage in construction projects, often substantial, that result in new or improved facilities that are ultimately funded through increases in the rent and other occupancy costs payable by airlines using the airport. Unlike this construction and funding model, American is managing a project at LAX where it has legal title to the assets during construction. In 2018, American executed a lease agreement with Los Angeles World Airports (LAWA), which owns and operates LAX, in connection with a $1.6 billion modernization project related to LAX Terminals 4 and 5. Construction, which started in October 2018 and is expected to be completed in 2028, will occur in a phased approach. The modernization project will include a unified departure hall to the entranceway of Terminals 4 and 5, reconfigured ticket counter and check-in areas with seamless access to security screening areas, 10 new security screening lanes with automated technology in addition to the existing Terminal 5 lanes, and a new Terminal 4 South concourse with more open and upgraded amenities at gate areas. The project will also include renovated break rooms, multi-use meeting rooms and team gathering spaces throughout the terminals to support American's team members at LAX.\n\n192", + "recall": 0.9938650306748467, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS OF AMERICAN AIRLINES, INC.\n\nOn March 13, 2019, a directive from the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) grounded all U.S.-registered Boeing 737 MAX Family aircraft and, as a result, all deliveries of Boeing 737 MAX Family aircraft were suspended. Since the time of the FAA recertification of the Boeing 737 MAX Family aircraft on November 18, 2020, deliveries have resumed and American accepted delivery of 10 Boeing 737 MAX Family aircraft during the period between the date of recertification and December 31, 2020. American has rights to defer one Boeing 737 MAX Family aircraft from delivery in 2021 to 2023 and rights to defer 10 Boeing 737 MAX Family aircraft from delivery in 2022 to 2023-2024.\n\nDue to the uncertainty surrounding the timing of delivery of certain aircraft, the amounts in the table represent American’s current best estimate; however, the actual delivery schedule may differ from the table above, potentially materially.\n\nThe amounts in the table exclude 19 Boeing 787-8 aircraft to be delivered in 2021 for which American has obtained committed lease financing. See Note 4 for information regarding this operating lease commitment.\n\nAdditionally, American has purchase commitments related to aircraft fuel, flight equipment maintenance, construction projects and information technology support as follows (approximately): $2.3 billion in 2021, $1.3 billion in 2022, $1.2 billion in 2023, $242 million in 2024, $163 million in 2025 and $1.0 billion in 2026 and thereafter.\n\nAmerican has capacity purchase agreements with third-party regional carriers. The capacity purchase agreements provide that all revenues, including passenger, in-flight, ancillary, mail and freight revenues, go to American. American controls marketing, scheduling, ticketing, pricing and seat inventories. In return, American agrees to pay predetermined fees to these airlines for operating an agreed-upon number of aircraft, without regard to the number of passengers on board. In addition, these agreements provide that American either reimburses or pays 100% of certain variable costs, such as airport landing fees, fuel and passenger liability insurance.\n\nAs of December 31, 2020, American’s capacity purchase agreements with third-party regional carriers had expiration dates ranging from 2021 to 2027, with rights of American to extend the respective terms of certain agreements.\n\nAs of December 31, 2020, American’s minimum obligations under its capacity purchase agreements with third-party regional carriers are as follows (approximately, in millions):\n\nFrom time to time, airports where American has operations engage in construction projects, often substantial, that result in new or improved facilities that are ultimately funded through increases in the rent and other occupancy costs payable by airlines using the airport. Unlike this construction and funding model, American is managing a project at LAX where it has legal title to the assets during construction. In 2018, American executed a lease agreement with Los Angeles World Airports (LAWA), which owns and operates LAX, in connection with a $1.6 billion modernization project related to LAX Terminals 4 and 5. Construction, which started in October 2018 and is expected to be completed in 2028, will occur in a phased approach. The modernization project will include a unified departure hall to the entranceway of Terminals 4 and 5, reconfigured ticket counter and check-in areas with seamless access to security screening areas, 10 new security screening lanes with automated technology in addition to the existing Terminal 5 lanes, and a new Terminal 4 South concourse with more open and upgraded amenities at gate areas. The project will also include renovated break rooms, multi-use meeting rooms and team gathering spaces throughout the terminals to support American’s team members at LAX.\n\nRepresents minimum payments under capacity purchase agreements with third-party regional carriers, which are estimates of costs based on assumed minimum levels of flying under the capacity purchase agreements and American’s actual payments could differ materially. Excludes payments for the lease of certain aircraft under capacity purchase agreements, which are reflected in the operating lease obligations in Note 4. (1)\n\n## (c) Airport Redevelopment\n\n## Los Angeles International Airport (LAX)\n\n## (b) Capacity Purchase Agreements with Third-Party Regional Carriers\n\n192" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9250628584146023, + "doc_id": "f7b43735dd2d9a3ffd07d11fad464eb0caf0de10096223d006e68786d0708ebe", + "edit_distance": 0.23417721518987342, + "f1_score": 0.9751243781094527, + "meteor": 0.970324739203855, + "precision": 0.98, + "pred_md": "## Table of Contents\n\n- · Issuance of new or revised accounting standards by the Financial Accounting Standards Board or the Securities and Exchange Commission.\n\nThe foregoing list sets forth many, but not all, of the factors that could impact our ability to achieve results described in any forward-looking statements. Investors should understand that it is not possible to predict or identify all such factors and should not consider this list to be a complete statement of all potential risks and uncertainties.\n\n## Item 7A. Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures About Market Risk.\n\nThe information required by this item is included in Item 7. Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations, and in Notes 1, 14 and 15 to the consolidated financial statements contained in Item 8. Financial Statements and Supplementary Data, and is incorporated herein by reference.\n\n43", + "recall": 0.9702970297029703, + "true_md": "- • Issuance of new or revised accounting standards by the Financial Accounting Standards Board or the Securities and Exchange Commission.\n\nTable of Contents\n\nThe foregoing list sets forth many, but not all, of the factors that could impact our ability to achieve results described in any forward-looking statements. Investors should understand that it is not possible to predict or identify all such factors and should not consider this list to be a complete statement of all potential risks and uncertainties.\n\nThe information required by this item is included in Item 7. Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations, and in Notes 1, 14 and 15 to the consolidated financial statements contained in Item 8. Financial Statements and Supplementary Data, and is incorporated herein by reference.\n\n43\n\n## Item 7A. Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures About Market Risk." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9870142070327967, + "doc_id": "aee9cb41e7f10f4919fd5d7708cc02d9df2432aceac594b011e9a5c93a03d2dd", + "edit_distance": 0.7849223946784922, + "f1_score": 0.9969135802469136, + "meteor": 0.7526944044391701, + "precision": 0.9969135802469136, + "pred_md": "## Table of Contents\n\n## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS OF AMERICAN AIRLINES GROUP INC .\n\n- · received approximately $600 million of proceeds from enhanced equipment trust certificates (EETCs) and other aircraft and flight equipment financings, of which $17 million was used to repay existing indebtedness.\n\nIn addition to the foregoing financings, we received an aggregate of $6.0 billion in financial assistance through the payroll support program (PSP1) established under the CARES Act, all of which was received by the end of September 2020. In connection with our receipt of this financial assistance, AAG issued a promissory note (the PSP1 Promissory Note) to Treasury for $1.8 billion in aggregate principal amount and warrants to purchase up to an aggregate of approximately 14.1 million shares (the PSP1 Warrant Shares) of AAG common stock. See below for further discussion on PSP1.\n\nIn January 2021, we received $1.5 billion (of an expected total of at least $3.0 billion) in financial assistance through PSP2. In connection with our receipt of this financial assistance, AAG issued a promissory note (the PSP2 Promissory Note) to Treasury for an initial principal sum of approximately $433 million and warrants to purchase up to an aggregate of approximately 2.8 million shares (the PSP2 Warrant Shares) of AAG common stock. See Note 18 for further discussion on PSP2.\n\nAlso, we are permitted to, and have, deferred payment of the employer portion of Social Security taxes through the end of 2020 (with 50% of the deferred amount due December 31, 2021 and the remaining 50% due December 31, 2022). This deferral provided approximately $350 million in additional liquidity during 2020. Additionally, we have suspended our capital return program, including share repurchases and the payment of future dividends for at least the period that the restrictions imposed by the CARES Act and the PSP Extension Law are applicable.\n\nWe continue to evaluate future financing opportunities and work with third-party appraisers on valuations of our remaining unencumbered assets.\n\nA significant portion of our debt financing agreements contain covenants requiring us to maintain an aggregate of at least $2.0 billion of unrestricted cash and cash equivalents and amounts available to be drawn under revolving credit facilities and/or contain loan to value, collateral coverage and/or debt service coverage ratio covenants.\n\nGiven the above actions and our current assumptions about the future impact of the COVID-19 pandemic on travel demand, which could be materially different due to the inherent uncertainties of the current operating environment, we expect to meet our cash obligations as well as remain in compliance with the debt covenants in our existing financing agreements for the next 12 months based on our current level of unrestricted cash and short-term investments, our anticipated access to liquidity (including via proceeds from financings and funds from government assistance obtained pursuant to the CARES Act and the PSP Extension Law) and projected cash flows from operations.\n\n## PSP1\n\nOn April 20, 2020 (the PSP1 Closing Date), American, Envoy Air Inc. (Envoy), Piedmont Airlines, Inc. (Piedmont) and PSA Airlines, Inc. (PSA and together with American, Envoy and Piedmont, the Subsidiaries), entered into a Payroll Support Program Agreement (the PSP1 Agreement) with Treasury, with respect to PSP1 provided pursuant to the CARES Act. In connection with our entry into the PSP1 Agreement, on the PSP1 Closing Date, AAG also entered into a warrant agreement (the PSP1 Warrant Agreement) with Treasury and issued the PSP1 Promissory Note to Treasury, with the Subsidiaries as guarantors (the Guarantors).\n\n## PSP1 Agreement\n\nIn connection with PSP1, we are required to comply with the relevant provisions of the CARES Act, including the requirement that funds provided pursuant to the PSP1 Agreement be used exclusively for the continuation of payment of eligible employee wages, salaries and benefits, the requirement against involuntary furloughs and reductions in employee pay rates and benefits, which expired on September 30, 2020, the requirement that certain levels of commercial air service be maintained and the provisions that prohibit the repurchase of AAG common stock, and the payment of common stock dividends through at least September 30, 2021, as well as those that restrict the payment of certain executive compensation until March 24, 2022. The PSP1 Agreement also imposes substantial reporting obligations on us. These provisions were subsequently extended upon our entry into PSP2. See Note 18 for further discussion on PSP2. In addition, we have entered into the Treasury Loan Agreement (as defined below) and, as a result, the stock repurchase, dividend and executive compensation restrictions imposed by the Treasury Loan Agreement will remain in place through the date that is one year after the secured loan provided under the Treasury Loan Agreement is fully repaid. See below for additional information on the Treasury Loan Agreement.\n\n98", + "recall": 0.9969135802469136, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS OF AMERICAN AIRLINES GROUP INC .\n\n## PSP1\n\n## PSP1 Agreement\n\n98\n\nIn connection with PSP1, we are required to comply with the relevant provisions of the CARES Act, including the requirement that funds provided pursuant to the PSP1 Agreement be used exclusively for the continuation of payment of eligible employee wages, salaries and benefits, the requirement against involuntary furloughs and reductions in employee pay rates and benefits, which expired on September 30, 2020, the requirement that certain levels of commercial air service be maintained and the provisions that prohibit the repurchase of AAG common stock, and the payment of common stock dividends through at least September 30, 2021, as well as those that restrict the payment of certain executive compensation until March 24, 2022. The PSP1 Agreement also imposes substantial reporting obligations on us. These provisions were subsequently extended upon our entry into PSP2. See Note 18 for further discussion on PSP2. In addition, we have entered into the Treasury Loan Agreement (as defined below) and, as a result, the stock repurchase, dividend and executive compensation restrictions imposed by the Treasury Loan Agreement will remain in place through the date that is one year after the secured loan provided under the Treasury Loan Agreement is fully repaid. See below for additional information on the Treasury Loan Agreement.\n\nOn April 20, 2020 (the PSP1 Closing Date), American, Envoy Air Inc. (Envoy), Piedmont Airlines, Inc. (Piedmont) and PSA Airlines, Inc. (PSA and together with American, Envoy and Piedmont, the Subsidiaries), entered into a Payroll Support Program Agreement (the PSP1 Agreement) with Treasury, with respect to PSP1 provided pursuant to the CARES Act. In connection with our entry into the PSP1 Agreement, on the PSP1 Closing Date, AAG also entered into a warrant agreement (the PSP1 Warrant Agreement) with Treasury and issued the PSP1 Promissory Note to Treasury, with the Subsidiaries as guarantors (the Guarantors).\n\nIn addition to the foregoing financings, we received an aggregate of $6.0 billion in financial assistance through the payroll support program (PSP1) established under the CARES Act, all of which was received by the end of September 2020. In connection with our receipt of this financial assistance, AAG issued a promissory note (the PSP1 Promissory Note) to Treasury for $1.8 billion in aggregate principal amount and warrants to purchase up to an aggregate of approximately 14.1 million shares (the PSP1 Warrant Shares) of AAG common stock. See below for further discussion on PSP1.\n\nIn January 2021, we received $1.5 billion (of an expected total of at least $3.0 billion) in financial assistance through PSP2. In connection with our receipt of this financial assistance, AAG issued a promissory note (the PSP2 Promissory Note) to Treasury for an initial principal sum of approximately $433 million and warrants to purchase up to an aggregate of approximately 2.8 million shares (the PSP2 Warrant Shares) of AAG common stock. See Note 18 for further discussion on PSP2.\n\nAlso, we are permitted to, and have, deferred payment of the employer portion of Social Security taxes through the end of 2020 (with 50% of the deferred amount due December 31, 2021 and the remaining 50% due December 31, 2022). This deferral provided approximately $350 million in additional liquidity during 2020. Additionally, we have suspended our capital return program, including share repurchases and the payment of future dividends for at least the period that the restrictions imposed by the CARES Act and the PSP Extension Law are applicable.\n\nWe continue to evaluate future financing opportunities and work with third-party appraisers on valuations of our remaining unencumbered assets.\n\nA significant portion of our debt financing agreements contain covenants requiring us to maintain an aggregate of at least $2.0 billion of unrestricted cash and cash equivalents and amounts available to be drawn under revolving credit facilities and/or contain loan to value, collateral coverage and/or debt service coverage ratio covenants.\n\nGiven the above actions and our current assumptions about the future impact of the COVID-19 pandemic on travel demand, which could be materially different due to the inherent uncertainties of the current operating environment, we expect to meet our cash obligations as well as remain in compliance with the debt covenants in our existing financing agreements for the next 12 months based on our current level of unrestricted cash and short-term investments, our anticipated access to liquidity (including via proceeds from financings and funds from government assistance obtained pursuant to the CARES Act and the PSP Extension Law) and projected cash flows from operations.\n\n- • received approximately $600 million of proceeds from enhanced equipment trust certificates (EETCs) and other aircraft and flight equipment financings, of which $17 million was used to repay existing indebtedness." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7063486135430559, + "doc_id": "9c3aeadadf40a67fa8df8b8fba2bd8895f47561ca5b8a25e1100b94da906c5e5", + "edit_distance": 0.6666666666666666, + "f1_score": 0.9411764705882353, + "meteor": 0.7021186440677966, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "ITEM\t16.\t\tFORM\t10-K\tSUMMARY.\n\nNone.\n\n98", + "recall": 0.8888888888888888, + "true_md": "None.\n\n98\n\n## ITEM 16. FORM 10-K SUMMARY." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9453218221334434, + "doc_id": "e918f494e45e8420892b22c95e961e1aee26d9e2c757479f1616bc4cc7599a0d", + "edit_distance": 0.42116630669546434, + "f1_score": 0.9935483870967742, + "meteor": 0.9510116628435766, + "precision": 0.9956896551724138, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS OF AMERICAN AIRLINES GROUP INC .\n\nhave on financial markets for LIBOR-linked financial instruments. The replacement of LIBOR with a comparable or successor rate could cause the amount of interest payable on our long-term debt to be different or higher than expected.\n\n## (c) Foreign Currency Risk\n\nWe are exposed to the effect of foreign exchange rate fluctuations on the U.S. dollar value of foreign currency-denominated transactions. Our largest exposure comes from the British pound sterling, Euro, Canadian dollar and various Latin American currencies, primarily the Brazilian real. We do not currently have a foreign currency hedge program.\n\n## 9. Fair Value Measurements and Other Investments\n\n## Assets Measured at Fair Value on a Recurring Basis\n\nFair value is defined as the price that would be received from the sale of an asset or paid to transfer a liability (i.e. an exit price) on the measurement date in an orderly transaction between market participants in the principal or most advantageous market for the asset or liability. Accounting standards include disclosure requirements around fair values used for certain financial instruments and establish a fair value hierarchy. The hierarchy prioritizes valuation inputs into three levels based on the extent to which inputs used in measuring fair value are observable in the market. Each fair value measurement is reported in one of three levels:\n\n- · Level 1 - Observable inputs such as quoted prices in active markets;\n- · Level 2 - Inputs, other than quoted prices in active markets, that are observable either directly or indirectly; and\n- · Level 3 - Unobservable inputs in which there is little or no market data, which require the reporting entity to develop its own assumptions.\n\nWhen available, we use quoted market prices to determine the fair value of our financial assets. If quoted market prices are not available, we measure fair value using valuation techniques that use, when possible, current market-based or independently-sourced market parameters, such as interest rates and currency rates.\n\nWe utilize the market approach to measure the fair value of our financial assets. The market approach uses prices and other relevant information generated by market transactions involving identical or comparable assets. Our short-term investments classified as Level 2 primarily utilize broker quotes in a non-active market for valuation of these securities. No changes in valuation techniques or inputs occurred during the year ended December 31, 2020.\n\nAssets measured at fair value on a recurring basis are summarized below (in millions):\n\nTable of Contents\n\n127", + "recall": 0.9914163090128756, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS OF AMERICAN AIRLINES GROUP INC .\n\n## (c) Foreign Currency Risk\n\n## 9. Fair Value Measurements and Other Investments\n\n## Assets Measured at Fair Value on a Recurring Basis\n\nhave on financial markets for LIBOR-linked financial instruments. The replacement of LIBOR with a comparable or successor rate could cause the amount of interest payable on our long-term debt to be different or higher than expected.\n\nWe are exposed to the effect of foreign exchange rate fluctuations on the U.S. dollar value of foreign currency-denominated transactions. Our largest exposure comes from the British pound sterling, Euro, Canadian dollar and various Latin American currencies, primarily the Brazilian real. We do not currently have a foreign currency hedge program.\n\nFair value is defined as the price that would be received from the sale of an asset or paid to transfer a liability (i.e. an exit price) on the measurement date in an orderly transaction between market participants in the principal or most advantageous market for the asset or liability. Accounting standards include disclosure requirements around fair values used for certain financial instruments and establish a fair value hierarchy. The hierarchy prioritizes valuation inputs into three levels based on the extent to which inputs used in measuring fair value are observable in the market. Each fair value measurement is reported in one of three levels:\n\nWhen available, we use quoted market prices to determine the fair value of our financial assets. If quoted market prices are not available, we measure fair value using valuation techniques that use, when possible, current market-based or independently-sourced market parameters, such as interest rates and currency rates.\n\nWe utilize the market approach to measure the fair value of our financial assets. The market approach uses prices and other relevant information generated by market transactions involving identical or comparable assets. Our short-term investments classified as Level 2 primarily utilize broker quotes in a non-active market for valuation of these securities. No changes in valuation techniques or inputs occurred during the year ended December 31, 2020.\n\nAssets measured at fair value on a recurring basis are summarized below (in millions):\n\n- • Level 1 – Observable inputs such as quoted prices in active markets;\n\n- • Level 2 – Inputs, other than quoted prices in active markets, that are observable either directly or indirectly; and\n\n- • Level 3 – Unobservable inputs in which there is little or no market data, which require the reporting entity to develop its own assumptions.\n\n127" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9821041484547397, + "doc_id": "9961188e96df66a020a700be34bce8eb4e4bc8871d3ec0481ac431b69998bb17", + "edit_distance": 0.034278959810874705, + "f1_score": 0.9933065595716198, + "meteor": 0.9964677293092405, + "precision": 0.9946380697050938, + "pred_md": "Despite fewer new nuclear plants being constructed in recent years, nuclear power remains an important contributor to the global energy mix. We continue to support our significant installed base in the global nuclear fleet by providing aftermarket and life extension products and services. Due to our extensive history, we believe we are well positioned to take advantage of this ongoing source of aftermarket and new construction opportunities.\n\nPolitical efforts to limit the emissions of carbon dioxide may have some adverse effect on thermal power investment plans depending on the potential requirements imposed and the timing of compliance by country. However, many proposed methods of capturing and limiting carbon dioxide emissions offer business opportunities for our products and services. At the same time, we continue to take advantage of new investments in concentrated solar power generating capacity, where our pumps, valves, and seals are uniquely positioned for both molten salt applications as well as the traditional steam cycle.\n\nWe believe the long-term fundamentals for the power generation industry remain solid based on projected increases in demand for electricity driven by global population growth, growth of urbanization in developing markets and the increased use of electricity driven transportation. We also believe that our long-standing reputation in the power generation industry, our portfolio of offerings for the various generating methods, our advancements in serving the renewable energy market and carbon capture methodologies, as well as our global service and support structure, position us well for the future opportunities in this important industry.\n\n## Water Management\n\nThe water management industry represented approximately 3% and 4% of our bookings in 2020 and 2019, respectively. Water management industry activity levels decreased in 2020 primarily due to the pandemic's negative impact on government budgets across the globe. Worldwide demand for fresh water, water treatment and re-use, desalination and flood control are expected to create requirements for new facilities or for upgrades of existing systems, many of which require products that we offer, particularly pumps. With improved management of the pandemic, we expect capital and aftermarket spending to rise in developed and emerging markets with governments and private industry providing funding for critical projects when their priorities shift away from pandemic-management.\n\nThe proportion of people living in regions that find it difficult to meet water requirements is expected to double by 2025. We believe that the persistent demand for fresh water during all economic cycles supports continued investments, especially in North America and developing regions.\n\n## General Industries\n\nGeneral industries represented, in the aggregate, approximately 26% and 22% of our bookings in 2020 and 2019, respectively. General industries comprise a variety of different businesses, including mining and ore processing, pulp and paper, food and beverage and other smaller applications, none of which individually represented more than 5% of total bookings in 2020 and 2019. General industries also include sales to distributors, whose end customers operate in the industries we primarily serve. Sales to distributors in 2020 were negatively impacted by decreased upstream oil and gas activity in North America.\n\nThe outlook for this group of industries is heavily dependent upon the condition of global economies and consumer confidence levels. The longterm fundamentals of many of these industries remain sound, as many of the products produced by these industries are common staples of industrialized and urbanized economies. We believe that our specialty product offerings designed for these industries and our aftermarket service capabilities will provide continued business opportunities.\n\n## Outlook for 2021\n\nAs the headwinds experienced during the year continue to impact our business, we experienced approximately a 20% decline in bookings as compared to the same period in 2019, with less of an impact on revenue, which declined approximately 5% as compared to the same period in 2019. We anticipate further pressure on revenue with a year over year decline of approximately 4% to 7% in 2021 as a result of lower bookings in 2020, resulting in lower customer backlog as we enter 2021. Despite these effects, however, we expect to maintain adequate liquidity over the next 12 months as we manage through the current market environment. We will continue to actively monitor the potential impacts of COVID-19 and related events on the credit markets in order to maintain sufficient liquidity and access to capital throughout 2021.\n\nOur future results of operations and other forward-looking statements contained in this Annual Report, including this MD&A, involve a number of risks and uncertainties - in particular, the statements regarding our goals and strategies, new product introductions, plans to cultivate new businesses, future economic conditions, revenue, pricing, gross profit margin\n\n34", + "recall": 0.9919786096256684, + "true_md": "Despite fewer new nuclear plants being constructed in recent years, nuclear power remains an important contributor to the global energy mix. We continue to support our significant installed base in the global nuclear fleet by providing aftermarket and life extension products and services. Due to our extensive history, we believe we are well positioned to take advantage of this ongoing source of aftermarket and new construction opportunities.\n\nPolitical efforts to limit the emissions of carbon dioxide may have some adverse effect on thermal power investment plans depending on the potential requirements imposed and the timing of compliance by country. However, many proposed methods of capturing and limiting carbon dioxide emissions offer business opportunities for our products and services. At the same time, we continue to take advantage of new investments in concentrated solar power generating capacity, where our pumps, valves, and seals are uniquely positioned for both molten salt applications as well as the traditional steam cycle.\n\nWe believe the long-term fundamentals for the power generation industry remain solid based on projected increases in demand for electricity driven by global population growth, growth of urbanization in developing markets and the increased use of electricity driven transportation. We also believe that our long-standing reputation in the power generation industry, our portfolio of offerings for the various generating methods, our advancements in serving the renewable energy market and carbon capture methodologies, as well as our global service and support structure, position us well for the future opportunities in this important industry.\n\nThe water management industry represented approximately 3% and 4% of our bookings in 2020 and 2019, respectively. Water management industry activity levels decreased in 2020 primarily due to the pandemic's negative impact on government budgets across the globe. Worldwide demand for fresh water, water treatment and re-use, desalination and flood control are expected to create requirements for new facilities or for upgrades of existing systems, many of which require products that we offer, particularly pumps. With improved management of the pandemic, we expect capital and aftermarket spending to rise in developed and emerging markets with governments and private industry providing funding for critical projects when their priorities shift away from pandemic-management.\n\nThe proportion of people living in regions that find it difficult to meet water requirements is expected to double by 2025. We believe that the persistent demand for fresh water during all economic cycles supports continued investments, especially in North America and developing regions.\n\nGeneral industries represented, in the aggregate, approximately 26% and 22% of our bookings in 2020 and 2019, respectively. General industries comprise a variety of different businesses, including mining and ore processing, pulp and paper, food and beverage and other smaller applications, none of which individually represented more than 5% of total bookings in 2020 and 2019. General industries also include sales to distributors, whose end customers operate in the industries we primarily serve. Sales to distributors in 2020 were negatively impacted by decreased upstream oil and gas activity in North America.\n\nThe outlook for this group of industries is heavily dependent upon the condition of global economies and consumer confidence levels. The long- term fundamentals of many of these industries remain sound, as many of the products produced by these industries are common staples of industrialized and urbanized economies. We believe that our specialty product offerings designed for these industries and our aftermarket service capabilities will provide continued business opportunities.\n\nAs the headwinds experienced during the year continue to impact our business, we experienced approximately a 20% decline in bookings as compared to the same period in 2019, with less of an impact on revenue, which declined approximately 5% as compared to the same period in 2019. We anticipate further pressure on revenue with a year over year decline of approximately 4% to 7% in 2021 as a result of lower bookings in 2020, resulting in lower customer backlog as we enter 2021. Despite these effects, however, we expect to maintain adequate liquidity over the next 12 months as we manage through the current market environment. We will continue to actively monitor the potential impacts of COVID-19 and related events on the credit markets in order to maintain sufficient liquidity and access to capital throughout 2021.\n\nOur future results of operations and other forward-looking statements contained in this Annual Report, including this MD&A, involve a number of risks and uncertainties — in particular, the statements regarding our goals and strategies, new product introductions, plans to cultivate new businesses, future economic conditions, revenue, pricing, gross profit margin\n\n34\n\n## Outlook for 2021\n\n## Water Management\n\n## General Industries" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.910692857354166, + "doc_id": "f30ea0d39db5f5eb73b6e3ad52988c0c3c5f730b59f09e0f5fc6030b5ad51d41", + "edit_distance": 0.7354910714285714, + "f1_score": 0.9949066213921902, + "meteor": 0.6153033548589011, + "precision": 0.9965986394557823, + "pred_md": "EASTGROUP PROPERTIES, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES\n\nNOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\nLeasing costs are deferred and amortized using the straight-line method over the term of the lease. Leasing costs paid during the period are included in Changes in other assets and other liabilities in the Investing Activities section on the Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows. Leasing costs amortization expense was $14,449,000, $13,167,000 and $11,493,000 for 2020, 2019 and 2018, respectively.\n\nAmortization expense for in-place lease intangibles is disclosed below in Real Estate Property Acquisitions and Acquired Intangibles .\n\n## (j) Real Estate Property Acquisitions and Acquired Intangibles\n\nUpon acquisition of real estate properties, EastGroup applies the principles of ASC 805, Business Combinations. The FASB Codification provides a framework for determining whether transactions should be accounted for as acquisitions (or disposals) of assets or businesses. Under the guidance, companies are required to utilize an initial screening test to determine whether substantially all of the fair value of the gross assets acquired (or disposed of) is concentrated in a single identifiable asset or a group of similar identifiable assets; if so, the set is not a business. EastGroup determined that its real estate property acquisitions in 2020, 2019 and 2018 are considered to be acquisitions of groups of similar identifiable assets; therefore, the acquisitions are not considered to be acquisitions of a business. As a result, the Company has capitalized acquisition costs related to its 2020, 2019 and 2018 acquisitions.\n\nThe FASB Codification also provides guidance on how to properly determine the allocation of the purchase price among the individual components of both the tangible and intangible assets based on their relative fair values. If applicable, goodwill for business combinations is recorded when the purchase price exceeds the fair value of the assets and liabilities acquired. Factors considered by management in allocating the cost of the properties acquired include an estimate of carrying costs during the expected lease-up periods considering current market conditions and costs to execute similar leases. The allocation to tangible assets (land, building and improvements) is based upon management's determination of the value of the property as if it were vacant using discounted cash flow models. Land is valued using comparable land sales specific to the applicable market, provided by a third-party. The Company determines whether any financing assumed is above or below market based upon comparison to similar financing terms for similar properties. The cost of the properties acquired may be adjusted based on indebtedness assumed from the seller that is determined to be above or below market rates.\n\nThe purchase price is also allocated among the following categories of intangible assets: the above or below market component of in-place leases, the value of in-place leases, and the value of customer relationships. The value allocable to the above or below market component of an acquired in-place lease is determined based upon the present value (using a discount rate reflecting the risks associated with the acquired leases) of the difference between (i) the contractual amounts to be paid pursuant to the lease over its remaining term, and (ii) management's estimate of the amounts that would be paid using current market rents over the remaining term of the lease. The amounts allocated to above and below market leases are included in Other assets and Other liabilities , respectively, on the Consolidated Balance Sheets and are amortized to rental income over the remaining terms of the respective leases. The total amount of intangible assets is further allocated to in-place lease values and customer relationship values based upon management's assessment of their respective values. These intangible assets are included in Other assets on the Consolidated Balance Sheets and are amortized over the remaining term of the existing lease, or the anticipated life of the customer relationship, as applicable.\n\nAmortization of above and below market leases increased rental income by $1,451,000, $1,229,000 and $667,000 in 2020, 2019 and 2018, respectively. Amortization expense for in-place lease intangibles was $5,620,000, $4,967,000 and $4,204,000 for 2020, 2019 and 2018, respectively.\n\nProjected amortization of in-place lease intangibles for the next five years as of December 31, 2020 is as follows:\n\nDuring 2020, the Company acquired the following operating properties: Wells Point One in Austin; Cherokee 75 Business Center 1 in Atlanta; and The Rock in Dallas. The Company also acquired one value-add property, Rancho Distribution Center in Los Angeles. At the time of acquisition, Rancho Distribution Center was classified in the lease-up phase. The total cost for\n\n57", + "recall": 0.9932203389830508, + "true_md": "During 2020, the Company acquired the following operating properties: Wells Point One in Austin; Cherokee 75 Business Center 1 in Atlanta; and The Rock in Dallas. The Company also acquired one value-add property, Rancho Distribution Center in Los Angeles. At the time of acquisition, Rancho Distribution Center was classified in the lease-up phase. The total cost for\n\n57\n\nProjected amortization of in-place lease intangibles for the next five years as of December 31, 2020 is as follows:\n\nAmortization of above and below market leases increased rental income by $1,451,000, $1,229,000 and $667,000 in 2020, 2019 and 2018, respectively. Amortization expense for in-place lease intangibles was $5,620,000, $4,967,000 and $4,204,000 for 2020, 2019 and 2018, respectively.\n\nThe purchase price is also allocated among the following categories of intangible assets: the above or below market component of in-place leases, the value of in-place leases, and the value of customer relationships. The value allocable to the above or below market component of an acquired in-place lease is determined based upon the present value (using a discount rate reflecting the risks associated with the acquired leases) of the difference between (i) the contractual amounts to be paid pursuant to the lease over its remaining term, and (ii) management’s estimate of the amounts that would be paid using current market rents over the remaining term of the lease. The amounts allocated to above and below market leases are included in Other assets and Other liabilities , respectively, on the Consolidated Balance Sheets and are amortized to rental income over the remaining terms of the respective leases. The total amount of intangible assets is further allocated to in-place lease values and customer relationship values based upon management’s assessment of their respective values. These intangible assets are included in Other assets on the Consolidated Balance Sheets and are amortized over the remaining term of the existing lease, or the anticipated life of the customer relationship, as applicable.\n\nacquisitions. The FASB Codification also provides guidance on how to properly determine the allocation of the purchase price among the individual components of both the tangible and intangible assets based on their relative fair values. If applicable, goodwill for business combinations is recorded when the purchase price exceeds the fair value of the assets and liabilities acquired. Factors considered by management in allocating the cost of the properties acquired include an estimate of carrying costs during the expected lease-up periods considering current market conditions and costs to execute similar leases. The allocation to tangible assets (land, building and improvements) is based upon management’s determination of the value of the property as if it were vacant using discounted cash flow models. Land is valued using comparable land sales specific to the applicable market, provided by a third-party. The Company determines whether any financing assumed is above or below market based upon comparison to similar financing terms for similar properties. The cost of the properties acquired may be adjusted based on indebtedness assumed from the seller that is determined to be above or below market rates.\n\n(j) Real Estate Property Acquisitions and Acquired Intangibles Upon acquisition of real estate properties, EastGroup applies the principles of ASC 805, Business Combinations. The FASB Codification provides a framework for determining whether transactions should be accounted for as acquisitions (or disposals) of assets or businesses. Under the guidance, companies are required to utilize an initial screening test to determine whether substantially all of the fair value of the gross assets acquired (or disposed of) is concentrated in a single identifiable asset or a group of similar identifiable assets; if so, the set is not a business. EastGroup determined that its real estate property acquisitions in 2020, 2019 and 2018 are considered to be acquisitions of groups of similar identifiable assets; therefore, the acquisitions are not considered to be acquisitions of a business. As a result, the Company has capitalized acquisition costs related to its 2020, 2019 and 2018 acquisitions. The FASB Codification also provides guidance on how to properly determine the allocation of the purchase price among the individual components of both the tangible and intangible assets based on their relative fair values. If\n\n## (j) Real Estate Property Acquisitions and Acquired Intangibles Upon acquisition of real estate properties, EastGroup applies the principles of ASC 805,\n\nEASTGROUP PROPERTIES, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\nLeasing costs are deferred and amortized using the straight-line method over the term of the lease. Leasing costs paid during the period are included in Changes in other assets and other liabilities in the Investing Activities section on the Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows. Leasing costs amortization expense was $14,449,000, $13,167,000 and $11,493,000 for 2020, 2019 and 2018, respectively.\n\nAmortization expense for in-place lease intangibles is disclosed below in Real Estate Property Acquisitions and Acquired Intangibles ." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9886169450086733, + "doc_id": "e8193260930ce5d89d04a0615f91570e4e37f7f00be30fe96f869e5f03fc2714", + "edit_distance": 0.16393442622950818, + "f1_score": 0.9986541049798114, + "meteor": 0.9588184471698349, + "precision": 0.9973118279569892, + "pred_md": "## Table of Contents\n\nsabotage systems are constantly evolving and may be difficult to anticipate or to detect for long periods of time. The constantly changing nature of the threats means that we may not be able to prevent all data security breaches or misuse of data. Similarly, we depend on the ability of our key commercial partners, including our regional carriers, distribution partners and technology vendors, to conduct their businesses in a manner that complies with applicable security standards and assures their ability to perform on a timely basis. A security failure, including a failure to meet relevant payment security standards, breach or other significant cybersecurity incident affecting one of our partners could result in potentially material negative consequences for us.\n\nIn addition, the costs and operational consequences of defending against, preparing for, responding to and remediating an incident of cybersecurity breach may be substantial. As cybersecurity threats become more frequent, intense and sophisticated, costs of proactive defense measures are increasing. Further, we could be exposed to litigation, regulatory enforcement or other legal action as a result of an incident, carrying the potential for damages, fines, sanctions or other penalties, as well as injunctive relief and enforcement actions requiring costly compliance measures. A significant number of recent privacy and data security incidents, including those involving other large airlines, have resulted in very substantial adverse financial consequences to those companies. A cybersecurity incident could also impact our brand, harm our reputation and adversely impact our relationship with our customers, employees and stockholders. Accordingly, failure to appropriately address these issues could result in material financial and other liabilities and cause significant reputational harm to our company.\n\n## We rely on third-party distribution channels and must manage effectively the costs, rights and functionality of these channels.\n\nWe rely on third-party distribution channels, including those provided by or through global distribution systems (GDSs) (e.g., Amadeus, Sabre and Travelport), conventional travel agents, travel management companies and online travel agents (OTAs) (e.g., Expedia, including its booking sites Orbitz and Travelocity, and Booking Holdings, including its booking sites Kayak and Priceline), to distribute a significant portion of our airline tickets, and we expect in the future to continue to rely on these channels. We are also dependent upon the ability and willingness of these distribution channels to expand their ability to distribute and collect revenues for ancillary products (e.g., fees for selective seating). These distribution channels are more expensive and at present have less functionality in respect of ancillary product offerings than those we operate ourselves, such as our website at www.aa.com . Certain of these distribution channels also effectively restrict the manner in which we distribute our products generally. To remain competitive, we will need to manage successfully our distribution costs and rights, increase our distribution flexibility and improve the functionality of our distribution channels, while maintaining an industry-competitive cost structure. Further, as distribution technology changes we will need to continue to update our technology by acquiring new technology from third parties, building the functionality ourselves, or a combination, which in any event will likely entail significant technological and commercial risk and involve potentially material investments. These imperatives may affect our relationships with conventional travel agents, travel management companies, GDSs and OTAs, including if consolidation of conventional travel agents, travel management companies, GDSs or OTAs continues, or should any of these parties seek to acquire other technology providers thereby potentially limiting our technology alternatives. Any inability to manage our third-party distribution costs, rights and functionality at a competitive level or any material diminishment or disruption in the distribution of our tickets could have a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations and financial condition.\n\n## If we are unable to obtain and maintain adequate facilities and infrastructure throughout our system and, at some airports, adequate slots, we may be unable to operate our existing flight schedule and to expand or change our route network in the future, which may have a material adverse impact on our operations.\n\nIn order to operate our existing and proposed flight schedule and, where desirable, add service along new or existing routes, we must be able to maintain and/or obtain adequate gates, check-in counters, operations areas, operations control facilities and administrative support space. As airports around the world become more congested, it may not be possible for us to ensure that our plans for new service can be implemented in a commercially viable manner, given operating constraints at airports throughout our network, including those imposed by inadequate facilities at desirable airports.\n\nIn light of constraints on existing facilities, there is presently a significant amount of capital spending underway at major airports in the United States, including large projects underway at a number of airports where we have significant operations, such as ORD, LAX, LGA and DCA. This spending is expected to result in increased costs to airlines and the traveling public that use those facilities as the airports seek to recover their investments through increased rental, landing and other facility costs. In some circumstances, such costs could be imposed by the relevant airport authority without our approval. Accordingly, our operating costs are expected to increase significantly at many airports at which we operate,\n\n48", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\nsabotage systems are constantly evolving and may be difficult to anticipate or to detect for long periods of time. The constantly changing nature of the threats means that we may not be able to prevent all data security breaches or misuse of data. Similarly, we depend on the ability of our key commercial partners, including our regional carriers, distribution partners and technology vendors, to conduct their businesses in a manner that complies with applicable security standards and assures their ability to perform on a timely basis. A security failure, including a failure to meet relevant payment security standards, breach or other significant cybersecurity incident affecting one of our partners could result in potentially material negative consequences for us.\n\nIn addition, the costs and operational consequences of defending against, preparing for, responding to and remediating an incident of cybersecurity breach may be substantial. As cybersecurity threats become more frequent, intense and sophisticated, costs of proactive defense measures are increasing. Further, we could be exposed to litigation, regulatory enforcement or other legal action as a result of an incident, carrying the potential for damages, fines, sanctions or other penalties, as well as injunctive relief and enforcement actions requiring costly compliance measures. A significant number of recent privacy and data security incidents, including those involving other large airlines, have resulted in very substantial adverse financial consequences to those companies. A cybersecurity incident could also impact our brand, harm our reputation and adversely impact our relationship with our customers, employees and stockholders. Accordingly, failure to appropriately address these issues could result in material financial and other liabilities and cause significant reputational harm to our company.\n\nWe rely on third-party distribution channels, including those provided by or through global distribution systems (GDSs) (e.g., Amadeus, Sabre and Travelport), conventional travel agents, travel management companies and online travel agents (OTAs) (e.g., Expedia, including its booking sites Orbitz and Travelocity, and Booking Holdings, including its booking sites Kayak and Priceline), to distribute a significant portion of our airline tickets, and we expect in the future to continue to rely on these channels. We are also dependent upon the ability and willingness of these distribution channels to expand their ability to distribute and collect revenues for ancillary products (e.g., fees for selective seating). These distribution channels are more expensive and at present have less functionality in respect of ancillary product offerings than those we operate ourselves, such as our website at www.aa.com . Certain of these distribution channels also effectively restrict the manner in which we distribute our products generally. To remain competitive, we will need to manage successfully our distribution costs and rights, increase our distribution flexibility and improve the functionality of our distribution channels, while maintaining an industry-competitive cost structure. Further, as distribution technology changes we will need to continue to update our technology by acquiring new technology from third parties, building the functionality ourselves, or a combination, which in any event will likely entail significant technological and commercial risk and involve potentially material investments. These imperatives may affect our relationships with conventional travel agents, travel management companies, GDSs and OTAs, including if consolidation of conventional travel agents, travel management companies, GDSs or OTAs continues, or should any of these parties seek to acquire other technology providers thereby potentially limiting our technology alternatives. Any inability to manage our third-party distribution costs, rights and functionality at a competitive level or any material diminishment or disruption in the distribution of our tickets could have a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations and financial condition.\n\nIn order to operate our existing and proposed flight schedule and, where desirable, add service along new or existing routes, we must be able to maintain and/or obtain adequate gates, check-in counters, operations areas, operations control facilities and administrative support space. As airports around the world become more congested, it may not be possible for us to ensure that our plans for new service can be implemented in a commercially viable manner, given operating constraints at airports throughout our network, including those imposed by inadequate facilities at desirable airports.\n\nIn light of constraints on existing facilities, there is presently a significant amount of capital spending underway at major airports in the United States, including large projects underway at a number of airports where we have significant operations, such as ORD, LAX, LGA and DCA. This spending is expected to result in increased costs to airlines and the traveling public that use those facilities as the airports seek to recover their investments through increased rental, landing and other facility costs. In some circumstances, such costs could be imposed by the relevant airport authority without our approval. Accordingly, our operating costs are expected to increase significantly at many airports at which we operate,\n\nWe rely on third-party distribution channels and must manage effectively the costs, rights and functionality of these channels.\n\nIf we are unable to obtain and maintain adequate facilities and infrastructure throughout our system and, at some airports, adequate slots, we may be unable to operate our existing flight schedule and to expand or change our route network in the future, which may have a material adverse impact on our operations.\n\n48" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8610727436820033, + "doc_id": "9c49caa89ef5e0bcf713ff3ef6651a566797004a609eb3df22686120bdfa2556", + "edit_distance": 0.13434343434343435, + "f1_score": 0.9720670391061452, + "meteor": 0.7853275246799595, + "precision": 0.9747899159663865, + "pred_md": "EASTGROUP PROPERTIES, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES\n\nNOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\nissuance of common stock to employees in the form of options, stock appreciation rights, restricted stock, deferred stock units, performance shares, bonus stock or stock in lieu of cash compensation.\n\nIn April 2013, the Board of Directors adopted the EastGroup Properties, Inc. 2013 Equity Incentive Plan (the '2013 Equity Plan') upon the recommendation of the Compensation Committee; the 2013 Equity Plan was approved by the Company's stockholders and became effective May 29, 2013. The 2013 Equity Plan was further amended by the Board of Directors in March 2017. The 2013 Equity Plan replaced the 2004 Plan. Typically, the Company issues new shares to fulfill stock grants or upon the exercise of stock options.\n\nEastGroup applies the provisions of ASC 718, Compensation - Stock Compensation , to account for its stock-based compensation plans. ASC 718 requires that the compensation cost relating to share-based payment transactions be recognized in the financial statements and that the cost be measured on the fair value of the equity or liability instruments issued. The cost for market-based awards and awards that only require service are expensed on a straightline basis over the requisite service periods. The cost for performance-based awards is determined using the graded vesting attribution method which recognizes each separate vesting portion of the award as a separate award on a straight-line basis over the requisite service period. This method accelerates the expensing of the award compared to the straight-line method.\n\nThe total compensation expense for service and performance based awards is based upon the fair market value of the shares on the grant date. The grant date fair value for awards that have been granted and are subject to a future market condition (total shareholder return) are determined using a simulation pricing model developed to specifically accommodate the unique features of the awards.\n\nDuring the restricted period for awards no longer subject to contingencies, the Company accrues dividends and holds the certificates for the shares; however, the employee can vote the shares. Share certificates and dividends are delivered to the employee as they vest.\n\n## (l) Earnings Per Share\n\nThe Company applies ASC 260, Earnings Per Share , which requires companies to present basic and diluted earnings per share ('EPS'). Basic EPS represents the amount of earnings for the period attributable to each share of common stock outstanding during the reporting period. The Company's basic EPS is calculated by dividing Net Income Attributable to EastGroup Properties, Inc. Common Stockholders by the weighted average number of common shares outstanding. The weighted average number of common shares outstanding does not include any potentially dilutive securities or any unvested restricted shares of common stock. These unvested restricted shares, although classified as issued and outstanding, are considered forfeitable until the restrictions lapse and will not be included in the basic EPS calculation until the shares are vested.\n\nDiluted EPS represents the amount of earnings for the period attributable to each share of common stock outstanding during the reporting period and to each share that would have been outstanding assuming the issuance of common shares for all dilutive potential common shares outstanding during the reporting period. The Company calculates diluted EPS by dividing Net Income Attributable to EastGroup Properties, Inc. Common Stockholders by the weighted average number of common shares outstanding plus the dilutive effect of unvested restricted stock. The dilutive effect of unvested restricted stock is determined using the treasury stock method.\n\n## (m) Use of Estimates\n\nThe preparation of financial statements in conformity with U.S. generally accepted accounting principles ('GAAP') requires management to make estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets, liabilities, revenues and expenses during the reporting period and to disclose material contingent assets and liabilities at the date of the financial statements. Actual results could differ from those estimates.\n\n## (n) Risks and Uncertainties\n\nThe state of the overall economy can significantly impact the Company's operational performance and thus impact its financial position. Should EastGroup experience a significant decline in operational performance due to the current coronavirus ('COVID-19') pandemic, as discussed below, or other general economic conditions, it may affect the Company's ability to make distributions to its shareholders, service debt, or meet other financial obligations.\n\nOn March 11, 2020, the World Health Organization characterized COVID-19 as a pandemic. The United States, which is where EastGroup's properties are located, has experienced widespread infection, and there is uncertainty regarding how long the pandemic will impact the United States and the rest of the world. Unprecedented, extraordinary actions have been taken by federal, state and local governmental authorities to combat the spread of COVID19, including issuance of 'stay-at-home' directives and similar mandates for many individuals to substantially restrict daily activities and for many businesses to curtail\n\n59", + "recall": 0.9693593314763231, + "true_md": "EASTGROUP PROPERTIES, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\nissuance of common stock to employees in the form of options, stock appreciation rights, restricted stock, deferred stock units, performance shares, bonus stock or stock in lieu of cash compensation.\n\nIn April 2013, the Board of Directors adopted the EastGroup Properties, Inc. 2013 Equity Incentive Plan (the “2013 Equity Plan”) upon the recommendation of the Compensation Committee; the 2013 Equity Plan was approved by the Company's stockholders and became effective May 29, 2013. The 2013 Equity Plan was further amended by the Board of Directors in March 2017. The 2013 Equity Plan replaced the 2004 Plan. Typically, the Company issues new shares to fulfill stock grants or upon the exercise of stock options.\n\nEastGroup applies the provisions of ASC 718, Compensation – Stock Compensation , to account for its stock-based compensation plans. ASC 718 requires that the compensation cost relating to share-based payment transactions be recognized in the financial statements and that the cost be measured on the fair value of the equity or liability instruments issued. The cost for market-based awards and awards that only require service are expensed on a straight- line basis over the requisite service periods. The cost for performance-based awards is determined using the graded vesting attribution method which recognizes each separate vesting portion of the award as a separate award on a straight-line basis over the requisite service period. This method accelerates the expensing of the award compared to the straight-line method.\n\nThe total compensation expense for service and performance based awards is based upon the fair market value of the shares on the grant date. The grant date fair value for awards that have been granted and are subject to a future market condition (total shareholder return) are determined using a simulation pricing model developed to specifically accommodate the unique features of the awards.\n\nDuring the restricted period for awards no longer subject to contingencies, the Company accrues dividends and holds the certificates for the shares; however, the employee can vote the shares. Share certificates and dividends are delivered to the employee as they vest.\n\n(l) Earnings Per Share The Company applies ASC 260, Earnings Per Share , which requires companies to present basic and diluted earnings per share (“EPS”). Basic EPS represents the amount of earnings for the period attributable to each share of common stock outstanding during the reporting period. The Company’s basic EPS is calculated by dividing Net Income Attributable to EastGroup Properties, Inc. Common Stockholders by the weighted average number of common shares outstanding. The weighted average number of common shares outstanding does not include any potentially dilutive securities or any unvested restricted shares of common stock. These unvested restricted shares, although classified as issued and outstanding, are considered forfeitable until the restrictions lapse and will not be included in the basic EPS calculation until the shares are vested.\n\nDiluted EPS represents the amount of earnings for the period attributable to each share of common stock outstanding during the reporting period and to each share that would have been outstanding assuming the issuance of common shares for all dilutive potential common shares outstanding during the reporting period. The Company calculates diluted EPS by dividing Net Income Attributable to EastGroup Properties, Inc. Common Stockholders by the weighted average number of common shares outstanding plus the dilutive effect of unvested restricted stock. The dilutive effect of unvested restricted stock is determined using the treasury stock method.\n\n(m) Use of Estimates The preparation of financial statements in conformity with U.S. generally accepted accounting principles (“GAAP”) requires management to make estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets, liabilities, revenues and expenses during the reporting period and to disclose material contingent assets and liabilities at the date of the financial statements. Actual results could differ from those estimates.\n\n(n) Risks and Uncertainties The state of the overall economy can significantly impact the Company’s operational performance and thus impact its financial position. Should EastGroup experience a significant decline in operational performance due to the current coronavirus (“COVID-19”) pandemic, as discussed below, or other general economic conditions, it may affect the Company’s ability to make distributions to its shareholders, service debt, or meet other financial obligations.\n\nOn March 11, 2020, the World Health Organization characterized COVID-19 as a pandemic. The United States, which is where EastGroup’s properties are located, has experienced widespread infection, and there is uncertainty regarding how long the pandemic will impact the United States and the rest of the world. Unprecedented, extraordinary actions have been taken by federal, state and local governmental authorities to combat the spread of COVID- 19, including issuance of “stay-at-home” directives and similar mandates for many individuals to substantially restrict daily activities and for many businesses to curtail\n\n## (l) Earnings Per Share The Company applies ASC 260,\n\n## (m) Use of Estimates The preparation of financial statements in conformity with U.S. generally accepted accounting principles (“GAAP”) requires management to make estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets, liabilities,\n\n## (n) Risks and Uncertainties The state of the overall economy can significantly impact the Company’s operational performance and thus impact its financial position. Should EastGroup experience a significant decline in operational performance due to the\n\n59" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9689005134684628, + "doc_id": "5bfd48066fd64c56353dae46da63be659082e6acfd5fc3cc25fb5e91d3feca99", + "edit_distance": 0.0647887323943662, + "f1_score": 0.9850746268656717, + "meteor": 0.9882534423618339, + "precision": 0.9880239520958084, + "pred_md": "## APPLIED MATERIALS, INC.\n\n## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS - (Continued)\n\n## Gains and Losses on Investments\n\nGross realized gains and losses on sales of investments for each fiscal year were as follows:\n\nTable of Contents\n\nAt October 25, 2020, gross unrealized losses related to Applied's debt investment portfolio were not material. Applied regularly reviews its debt investment portfolio to identify and evaluate investments that have indications of possible impairment. Factors considered in determining whether an unrealized loss is considered to be temporary, or other-than-temporary and therefore impaired, include: the length of time and extent to which fair value has been lower than the cost basis; the financial condition, credit quality and near-term prospects of the investee; and whether it is more likely than not that Applied will be required to sell the security prior to recovery.\n\nApplied determined that the gross unrealized losses on its marketable fixed-income securities at October 25, 2020, October 27, 2019 and October 28, 2018 were temporary in nature and therefore it did not recognize any impairment of its marketable fixed-income securities for fiscal 2020, 2019 or 2018. During fiscal 2020, 2019 and 2018, impairment charge on equity investments in privately-held companies were not material. These impairment charges are included in interest and other income, net in the Consolidated Statement of Operations.\n\nUnrealized gains and losses on investments classified as equity investments are recognized in other income (expense), net in the Consolidated Statement of Operations. Prior to the adoption of Accounting Standards Update (ASU) 2016-01 Financial Instruments-Overall (Subtopic 825-10): Recognition and Measurement of Financial Assets and Financial Liabilities in the first quarter of fiscal 2019, these unrealized gains and temporary losses were included within accumulated other comprehensive income (loss), net of any related tax effect.\n\nThe components of gain (loss) on equity investments for each fiscal year were as follows:\n\n77", + "recall": 0.9821428571428571, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## APPLIED MATERIALS, INC.\n\n## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS — (Continued)\n\nGross realized gains and losses on sales of investments for each fiscal year were as follows:\n\nAt October 25, 2020, gross unrealized losses related to Applied’s debt investment portfolio were not material. Applied regularly reviews its debt investment portfolio to identify and evaluate investments that have indications of possible impairment. Factors considered in determining whether an unrealized loss is considered to be temporary, or other-than-temporary and therefore impaired, include: the length of time and extent to which fair value has been lower than the cost basis; the financial condition, credit quality and near-term prospects of the investee; and whether it is more likely than not that Applied will be required to sell the security prior to recovery.\n\nApplied determined that the gross unrealized losses on its marketable fixed-income securities at October 25, 2020, October 27, 2019 and October 28, 2018 were temporary in nature and therefore it did not recognize any impairment of its marketable fixed-income securities for fiscal 2020, 2019 or 2018. During fiscal 2020, 2019 and 2018, impairment charge on equity investments in privately-held companies were not material. These impairment charges are included in interest and other income, net in the Consolidated Statement of Operations.\n\nUnrealized gains and losses on investments classified as equity investments are recognized in other income (expense), net in the Consolidated Statement of Operations. Prior to the adoption of Accounting Standards Update (ASU) 2016-01 Financial Instruments-Overall (Subtopic 825-10): Recognition and Measurement of Financial Assets and Financial Liabilities in the first quarter of fiscal 2019, these unrealized gains and temporary losses were included within accumulated other comprehensive income (loss), net of any related tax effect.\n\nThe components of gain (loss) on equity investments for each fiscal year were as follows:\n\n77\n\n## Gains and Losses on Investments" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7204747681206544, + "doc_id": "6f382f1029ae65fa5026a0183df085475068e88d1445aefa1a91f60daf3c99ae", + "edit_distance": 0.5970937912813739, + "f1_score": 0.9842931937172773, + "meteor": 0.6097256748986979, + "precision": 0.9894736842105263, + "pred_md": "CP\t2020\tANNUAL\tREPORT\n\n## Year over Year Diversity Representation\n\n- Percentages are based on total workforce (total number of active employees) at year-end. (1)\n\nMinority\tis\ta\tterm\tused\tin\tthe\tU.S.,\tVisible\tMinority\tis\ta\tterm\tused\tin\tCanada. (2)\n\nCP continues to work collaboratively with our employees, communities along our network, and partner organizations in Canada and the U.S. to progress and support CP's commitment toward a more representative and inclusive workplace. Some of our initiatives include:\n\n- · Establishing three diversity councils (Indigenous, Gender and Racial). Each council is chaired by a CP executive and represents a diverse group of employees. The councils work to ensure we consider diversity and inclusion when we make decisions, provide feedback on corporate directions and promote initiatives that relate to each council's area of focus;\n- · Continuing our existing partnerships with associations and organizations that attract, recruit, and support skilled immigrants, transitioning veterans, persons with disabilities, and women;\n- · Working with Indigenous groups to develop relationships that are more meaningful, create targeted outreach programs and employment opportunities, and better understand their history, culture, and opportunities for collaboration.\n- · Supporting the development and advancement of women at CP; and\n- · Increasing employee awareness regarding CP's workplace diversity and inclusion practices through communications, education, and training.\n\nFurther, CP recently published a Diversity Commitment. This commitment re-enforces the efforts we have made, and will continue to make, in our journey to becoming a more diverse and inclusive company, one that we and those we do business with are proud to be a part.\n\nWe pride ourselves on offering a diverse workplace with a variety of careers in both our corporate and field locations. We recruit and hire talent based on relevant skills and experience, and seek to attract the highest quality candidates regardless of gender, age, cultural heritage, or ethnic origin. One of our primary objectives is attracting, recruiting, retaining, and developing a workforce representative of the communities in which we operate.\n\n## Available Information\n\nCP makes available on or through its website www.cpr.ca free of charge, its annual reports on Form 10-K, quarterly reports on Form 10-Q, current reports on Form 8-K and all amendments to those reports as soon as reasonably practicable after such reports are filed with or furnished to the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission ('SEC'). Our website also contains charters for each of the committees of our Board of Directors, our corporate governance guidelines and our Code of Business Ethics. This Form 10-K and other SEC filings made by CP are also accessible through the SEC's website at www.sec.gov.\n\nThe Company has included the Chief Executive Officer (\"CEO\") and Chief Financial Officer (\"CFO\") certifications regarding the Company's public disclosure required by Section 302 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 and applicable securities laws in Canada as Exhibits to this annual report.\n\nAll references to our websites contained herein do not constitute incorporation by reference of information contained on such websites and such information should not be considered part of this document.", + "recall": 0.9791666666666666, + "true_md": "CP 2020 ANNUAL REPORT 20\n\n## Year over Year Diversity Representation\n\n## Available Information\n\n Percentages are based on total workforce (total number of active employees) at year-end. (1)\n\n Minority is a term used in the U.S., Visible Minority is a term used in Canada. (2)\n\nCP continues to work collaboratively with our employees, communities along our network, and partner organizations in Canada and the U.S. to progress and support CP’s commitment toward a more representative and inclusive workplace. Some of our initiatives include: • Establishing three diversity councils (Indigenous, Gender and Racial). Each council is chaired by a CP executive and represents a diverse group of employees.\n\nFurther, CP recently published a Diversity Commitment. This commitment re-enforces the efforts we have made, and will continue to make, in our journey to becoming a more diverse and inclusive company, one that we and those we do business with are proud to be a part.\n\nWe pride ourselves on offering a diverse workplace with a variety of careers in both our corporate and field locations. We recruit and hire talent based on relevant skills and experience, and seek to attract the highest quality candidates regardless of gender, age, cultural heritage, or ethnic origin. One of our primary objectives is attracting, recruiting, retaining, and developing a workforce representative of the communities in which we operate.\n\nCP makes available on or through its website www.cpr.ca free of charge, its annual reports on Form 10-K, quarterly reports on Form 10-Q, current reports on Form 8-K and all amendments to those reports as soon as reasonably practicable after such reports are filed with or furnished to the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission (“SEC”). Our website also contains charters for each of the committees of our Board of Directors, our corporate governance guidelines and our Code of Business Ethics. This Form 10-K and other SEC filings made by CP are also accessible through the SEC’s website at www.sec.gov.\n\nThe Company has included the Chief Executive Officer (\"CEO\") and Chief Financial Officer (\"CFO\") certifications regarding the Company's public disclosure required by Section 302 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 and applicable securities laws in Canada as Exhibits to this annual report.\n\nAll references to our websites contained herein do not constitute incorporation by reference of information contained on such websites and such information should not be considered part of this document.\n\n- support CP’s commitment toward a more representative and inclusive workplace. Some of our initiatives include: • Establishing three diversity councils (Indigenous, Gender and Racial). Each council is chaired by a CP executive and represents a diverse group of employees. The councils work to ensure we consider diversity and inclusion when we make decisions, provide feedback on corporate directions and promote initiatives that relate to each council’s area of focus; • Continuing our existing partnerships with associations and organizations that attract, recruit, and support skilled immigrants, transitioning veterans, persons\n\n- that relate to each council’s area of focus; • Continuing our existing partnerships with associations and organizations that attract, recruit, and support skilled immigrants, transitioning veterans, persons with disabilities, and women; • Working with Indigenous groups to develop relationships that are more meaningful, create targeted outreach programs and employment opportunities, and\n\n- with disabilities, and women; • Working with Indigenous groups to develop relationships that are more meaningful, create targeted outreach programs and employment opportunities, and better understand their history, culture, and opportunities for collaboration. • Supporting the development and advancement of women at CP; and\n\n- better understand their history, culture, and opportunities for collaboration. • Supporting the development and advancement of women at CP; and • Increasing employee awareness regarding CP’s workplace diversity and inclusion practices through communications, education, and training.\n\n- • Supporting the development and advancement of women at CP; and • Increasing employee awareness regarding CP’s workplace diversity and inclusion practices through communications, education, and training." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7867626323064633, + "doc_id": "6b7b6eda68ba8f0efa5a6f0d8cebf2be59256492f4003c4d1e4c7b4ba56c5ada", + "edit_distance": 0.24430379746835443, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.7977005021226925, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "10-K\t1\ta2237254z10-k.htm\t10-K\n\nQuickLinks\t--\tClick\there\tto\trapidly\tnavigate\tthrough\tthis\tdocument\n\n## UNITED STATES SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION\n\nWASHINGTON, D.C. 20549\n\n## FORM 10-K\n\nANNUAL REPORT\n\npursuant to Section 13 or 15 (d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 FOR THE YEAR ENDED DECEMBER 31, 2018\n\n1-2360\n\n(Commission file number)\n\n## INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION\n\n(Exact name of registrant as specified in its charter)\n\n## 13-0871985\n\n(IRS\tEmployer\tIdentification\tNumber)\n\n10504 (Zip\tCode)\n\n## NEW YORK\n\n(State of Incorporation)\n\n## ARMONK, NEW YORK\n\n(Address of principal executive offices)\n\n## 914-499-1900\n\n(Registrant's telephone number)\n\nSecurities registered pursuant to Section 12(b) of the Act:\n\nIndicate by check mark if the registrant is a well-known seasoned issuer as defined in Rule 405 of the Securities Act. Yes ý No o\n\nIndicate by check mark if the registrant is not required to file reports pursuant to Section 13 or Section 15(d) of the Act. Yes o No ý\n\nIndicate by check mark whether the registrant (1) has filed all reports required to be filed by Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to file such reports), and (2) has been subject to such filing requirements for the past 90 days. Yes ý No o\n\nIndicate by check mark whether the registrant has submitted electronically every Interactive Data File required to be submitted pursuant to Rule 405 of Regulation S-T (§232.405 of this chapter) during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to submit such files). Yes ý No o\n\nIndicate by check mark if disclosure of delinquent filers pursuant to Item 405 of Regulation S-K (§229.405 of this chapter) is not contained herein, and will not be contained, to the best of registrant's knowledge, in definitive proxy or information statements incorporated by reference in Part III of this Form 10-K or any amendment to this Form 10-K. o\n\nIndicate by check mark whether the registrant is a large accelerated filer, an accelerated filer, a non-accelerated filer, a smaller reporting company, or an emerging growth company. See the definitions of \"large accelerated filer,\" \"accelerated filer,\" \"smaller reporting company\" and \"emerging growth company\" in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act.\n\n## Large accelerated filer ý\n\nAccelerated filer o\n\nNon-accelerated filer o\n\nSmaller reporting company o Emerging growth company o\n\nIf an emerging growth company, indicate by check mark if the registrant has elected not to use the extended transition period for complying with any new or revised financial accounting standards provided pursuant to Section 13(a) of the Exchange Act. o\n\nIndicate by check mark whether the registrant is a shell company (as defined in Exchange Act Rule 12b-2). Yes o No ý\n\nThe aggregate market value of the voting stock held by non-affiliates of the registrant as of the last business day of the registrant's most recently completed second fiscal quarter was $127.5 billion.\n\nDocuments incorporated by reference:\n\nPortions of IBM's Annual Report to Stockholders for the year ended December 31, 2018 are incorporated by reference into Parts I, II and IV of this Form 10-K.\n\nPortions of IBM's definitive Proxy Statement to be filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission and delivered to stockholders in connection with the Annual Meeting of Stockholders to be held April 30, 2019 are incorporated by reference into Part III of this Form 10-K.", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "# UNITED STATES SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION WASHINGTON, D.C. 20549\n\nSECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION WASHINGTON, D.C. 20549\n\nSecurities Exchange Act of 1934 FOR THE YEAR ENDED DECEMBER 31, 2018\n\nFORM 10-K ANNUAL REPORT pursuant to Section 13 or 15 (d) of the\n\nANNUAL REPORT pursuant to Section 13 or 15 (d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934\n\npursuant to Section 13 or 15 (d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 FOR THE YEAR ENDED DECEMBER 31, 2018\n\n1-2360 (Commission file number)\n\n1-2360 (Commission file number)\n\n13-0871985 (IRS Employer Identification Number)\n\n13-0871985 (IRS Employer Identification Number)\n\n10504 (Zip Code)\n\n10504 (Zip Code)\n\nNEW YORK (State of Incorporation)\n\nNEW YORK (State of Incorporation)\n\nARMONK, NEW YORK (Address of principal executive offices)\n\nARMONK, NEW YORK (Address of principal executive offices)\n\n914-499-1900 (Registrant's telephone number)\n\n914-499-1900 (Registrant's telephone number)\n\n## Securities registered pursuant to Section 12(b) of the Act:\n\nIndicate by check mark if the registrant is a well-known seasoned issuer as defined in Rule 405 of the Securities Act. Yes ý No o\n\nIndicate by check mark if the registrant is not required to file reports pursuant to Section 13 or Section 15(d) of the Act. Yes o No ý\n\nIndicate by check mark whether the registrant (1) has filed all reports required to be filed by Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to file such reports), and (2) has been subject to such filing requirements for the past 90 days. Yes ý No o\n\nIndicate by check mark whether the registrant has submitted electronically every Interactive Data File required to be submitted pursuant to Rule 405 of Regulation S-T (§232.405 of this chapter) during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to submit such files). Yes ý No o\n\nIndicate by check mark if disclosure of delinquent filers pursuant to Item 405 of Regulation S-K (§229.405 of this chapter) is not contained herein, and will not be contained, to the best of registrant's knowledge, in definitive proxy or information statements incorporated by reference in Part III of this Form 10-K or any amendment to this Form 10-K. o\n\nIndicate by check mark whether the registrant is a large accelerated filer, an accelerated filer, a non-accelerated filer, a smaller reporting company, or an emerging growth company. See the definitions of \"large accelerated filer,\" \"accelerated filer,\" \"smaller reporting company\" and \"emerging growth company\" in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act.\n\n Large accelerated filer ý Non-accelerated filer o\n\n Large accelerated filer ý Non-accelerated filer o\n\nAccelerated filer o Smaller reporting company o\n\nAccelerated filer o Smaller reporting company o Emerging growth company o\n\nSmaller reporting company o Emerging growth company o\n\nIf an emerging growth company, indicate by check mark if the registrant has elected not to use the extended transition period for complying with any new or revised financial accounting standards provided pursuant to Section 13(a) of the Exchange Act. o\n\nIndicate by check mark whether the registrant is a shell company (as defined in Exchange Act Rule 12b-2). Yes o No ý\n\nThe aggregate market value of the voting stock held by non-affiliates of the registrant as of the last business day of the registrant's most recently completed second fiscal quarter was $127.5 billion.\n\nPortions of IBM's Annual Report to Stockholders for the year ended December 31, 2018 are incorporated by reference into Parts I, II and IV of this Form 10-K.\n\nPortions of IBM's definitive Proxy Statement to be filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission and delivered to stockholders in connection with the Annual Meeting of Stockholders to be held April 30, 2019 are incorporated by reference into Part III of this Form 10-K.\n\nDocuments incorporated by reference:\n\n# FORM 10-K ANNUAL REPORT\n\n# INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION (Exact name of registrant as specified in its charter)\n\nINTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION (Exact name of registrant as specified in its charter)\n\n10-K 1 a2237254z10-k.htm 10-K QuickLinks -- Click here to rapidly navigate through this document" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9846940375957146, + "doc_id": "53c3f74225136d5eac02289f8f0d65df68580cc1c34999084f564c3587c2fecc", + "edit_distance": 0.15510204081632653, + "f1_score": 0.9986648865153537, + "meteor": 0.9081719075688827, + "precision": 0.9973333333333333, + "pred_md": "## Table of Contents\n\n## We are subject to many forms of environmental and noise regulation and may incur substantial costs as a result.\n\nWe are subject to a number of increasingly stringent federal, state, local and foreign laws, regulations and ordinances relating to the protection of the environment and noise reduction, including those relating to emissions to the air, discharges to surface and subsurface waters, safe drinking water, and the management of hazardous substances, oils and waste materials. Compliance with environmental laws and regulations can require significant expenditures, and violations can lead to significant fines and penalties.\n\nWe are also subject to other environmental laws and regulations, including those that require us to investigate and remediate soil or groundwater to meet certain remediation standards. Under federal law, generators of waste materials, and current and former owners or operators of facilities, can be subject to liability for investigation and remediation costs at locations that have been identified as requiring response actions. Liability under these laws may be strict, joint and several, meaning that we could be liable for the costs of cleaning up environmental contamination regardless of fault or the amount of waste directly attributable to us. We have liability for investigation and remediation costs at various sites, although such costs currently are not expected to have a material adverse effect on our business.\n\nWe have various leases and agreements with respect to real property, tanks and pipelines with airports and other operators. Under these leases and agreements, we have agreed to indemnify the lessor or operator against environmental liabilities associated with the real property or operations described under the agreement, even in certain cases where we are not the party responsible for the initial event that caused the environmental damage. We also participate in leases with other airlines in fuel consortiums and fuel committees at airports, and such indemnities are generally joint and several among the participating airlines.\n\nGovernmental authorities in several U.S. and foreign cities are also considering, or have already implemented, aircraft noise reduction programs, including the imposition of nighttime curfews and limitations on daytime take offs and landings. We have been able to accommodate local noise restrictions imposed to date, but our operations could be adversely affected if locally-imposed regulations become more restrictive or widespread.\n\n## We depend on a limited number of suppliers for aircraft, aircraft engines and parts.\n\nWe depend on a limited number of suppliers for aircraft, aircraft engines and many aircraft and engine parts. For example, as of the end of 2020 all of our mainline aircraft were manufactured by either Airbus or Boeing and all of our regional aircraft were manufactured by either Bombardier or Embraer. Further, our supplier base continues to consolidate as evidenced by the recent acquisition of Rockwell Collins by United Technologies, the recent transactions involving Airbus and Bombardier and Bombardier and Mitsubishi. Due to the limited number of these suppliers, we are vulnerable to any problems associated with the performance of their obligation to supply key aircraft, parts and engines, including design defects, mechanical problems, contractual performance by suppliers, adverse perception by the public that would result in customer avoidance of any of our aircraft or any action by the FAA or any other regulatory authority resulting in an inability to operate our aircraft, even temporarily. For instance, in March 2019, the FAA ordered the grounding of all Boeing 737 MAX Family aircraft, which remained in place for over a year and was not lifted in the United States until November 2020. The limited number of these suppliers may also result in reduced competition and potentially higher prices than if the supplier base was less concentrated.\n\n## Delays in scheduled aircraft deliveries or other loss of anticipated fleet capacity, and failure of new aircraft to perform as expected, may adversely impact our business, results of operations and financial condition.\n\nThe success of our business depends on, among other things, effectively managing the number and types of aircraft we operate. If, for any reason, we are unable to accept or secure deliveries of new aircraft on contractually scheduled delivery dates, this could have negative impacts on our business, results of operations and financial condition. Our failure to integrate newly purchased aircraft into our fleet as planned might require us to seek extensions of the terms for some leased aircraft or otherwise delay the exit of certain aircraft from our fleet. Such unanticipated extensions or delays may require us to operate existing aircraft beyond the point at which it is economically optimal to retire them, resulting in increased maintenance costs, or reductions to our schedule, thereby reducing revenues. If new aircraft orders are not filled on a timely basis, we could face higher financing and operating costs than planned. In addition, if the aircraft we receive do not meet expected performance or quality standards, including with respect to fuel efficiency, safety and reliability, we could face higher financing and operating costs than planned and our business, results of operations and financial condition could be adversely impacted. For instance, in March 2019, the FAA grounded all Boeing 737 MAX Family aircraft, including the 24 aircraft in our fleet at the time of the grounding, and which caused us to be unable to take delivery of the Boeing 737 MAX Family aircraft we had on order from Boeing.\n\n46", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n46\n\nWe are subject to a number of increasingly stringent federal, state, local and foreign laws, regulations and ordinances relating to the protection of the environment and noise reduction, including those relating to emissions to the air, discharges to surface and subsurface waters, safe drinking water, and the management of hazardous substances, oils and waste materials. Compliance with environmental laws and regulations can require significant expenditures, and violations can lead to significant fines and penalties.\n\nWe are also subject to other environmental laws and regulations, including those that require us to investigate and remediate soil or groundwater to meet certain remediation standards. Under federal law, generators of waste materials, and current and former owners or operators of facilities, can be subject to liability for investigation and remediation costs at locations that have been identified as requiring response actions. Liability under these laws may be strict, joint and several, meaning that we could be liable for the costs of cleaning up environmental contamination regardless of fault or the amount of waste directly attributable to us. We have liability for investigation and remediation costs at various sites, although such costs currently are not expected to have a material adverse effect on our business.\n\nWe have various leases and agreements with respect to real property, tanks and pipelines with airports and other operators. Under these leases and agreements, we have agreed to indemnify the lessor or operator against environmental liabilities associated with the real property or operations described under the agreement, even in certain cases where we are not the party responsible for the initial event that caused the environmental damage. We also participate in leases with other airlines in fuel consortiums and fuel committees at airports, and such indemnities are generally joint and several among the participating airlines.\n\nGovernmental authorities in several U.S. and foreign cities are also considering, or have already implemented, aircraft noise reduction programs, including the imposition of nighttime curfews and limitations on daytime take offs and landings. We have been able to accommodate local noise restrictions imposed to date, but our operations could be adversely affected if locally-imposed regulations become more restrictive or widespread.\n\nWe depend on a limited number of suppliers for aircraft, aircraft engines and many aircraft and engine parts. For example, as of the end of 2020 all of our mainline aircraft were manufactured by either Airbus or Boeing and all of our regional aircraft were manufactured by either Bombardier or Embraer. Further, our supplier base continues to consolidate as evidenced by the recent acquisition of Rockwell Collins by United Technologies, the recent transactions involving Airbus and Bombardier and Bombardier and Mitsubishi. Due to the limited number of these suppliers, we are vulnerable to any problems associated with the performance of their obligation to supply key aircraft, parts and engines, including design defects, mechanical problems, contractual performance by suppliers, adverse perception by the public that would result in customer avoidance of any of our aircraft or any action by the FAA or any other regulatory authority resulting in an inability to operate our aircraft, even temporarily. For instance, in March 2019, the FAA ordered the grounding of all Boeing 737 MAX Family aircraft, which remained in place for over a year and was not lifted in the United States until November 2020. The limited number of these suppliers may also result in reduced competition and potentially higher prices than if the supplier base was less concentrated.\n\nThe success of our business depends on, among other things, effectively managing the number and types of aircraft we operate. If, for any reason, we are unable to accept or secure deliveries of new aircraft on contractually scheduled delivery dates, this could have negative impacts on our business, results of operations and financial condition. Our failure to integrate newly purchased aircraft into our fleet as planned might require us to seek extensions of the terms for some leased aircraft or otherwise delay the exit of certain aircraft from our fleet. Such unanticipated extensions or delays may require us to operate existing aircraft beyond the point at which it is economically optimal to retire them, resulting in increased maintenance costs, or reductions to our schedule, thereby reducing revenues. If new aircraft orders are not filled on a timely basis, we could face higher financing and operating costs than planned. In addition, if the aircraft we receive do not meet expected performance or quality standards, including with respect to fuel efficiency, safety and reliability, we could face higher financing and operating costs than planned and our business, results of operations and financial condition could be adversely impacted. For instance, in March 2019, the FAA grounded all Boeing 737 MAX Family aircraft, including the 24 aircraft in our fleet at the time of the grounding, and which caused us to be unable to take delivery of the Boeing 737 MAX Family aircraft we had on order from Boeing.\n\nWe are subject to many forms of environmental and noise regulation and may incur substantial costs as a result.\n\nWe depend on a limited number of suppliers for aircraft, aircraft engines and parts.\n\nDelays in scheduled aircraft deliveries or other loss of anticipated fleet capacity, and failure of new aircraft to perform as expected, may adversely impact our business, results of operations and financial condition." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5155034019451475, + "doc_id": "dd13371659f9f27678437946c6aa24e4bd042dda3fb387d36a8ea2b550a09fcd", + "edit_distance": 0.4837662337662338, + "f1_score": 0.7849056603773584, + "meteor": 0.8590814650098502, + "precision": 0.6582278481012658, + "pred_md": "CP\t2020\tANNUAL\tREPORT\n\n## SIGNATURES\n\nPursuant to the requirements of Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 , the Company has duly caused this report to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned, thereunto duly authorized.\n\n## CANADIAN PACIFIC RAILWAY LIMITED\n\n(Registrant)\n\nBy: /s/\tKEITH\tCREEL Keith\tCreel Chief\tExecutive\tOfficer\n\nDated:\tFebruary\t18,\t2021\n\n## POWER OF ATTORNEY\n\nEach of the undersigned do hereby appoint each of Nadeem Velani and Jeffrey J. Ellis, his or her true and lawful attorney-in-fact and agent, to sign on his or her behalf the Company's Annual Report on Form 10-K, for the year ended December 31, 2020, and any and all amendments thereto, and to file the same, with all exhibits thereto, with the Securities and Exchange Commission.\n\nPursuant to the requirements of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 , this report has been signed below by the following persons on behalf of the Company and in the capacities indicated on February 18, 2021.\n\n## Signature\n\n## Title\n\n/s/\tKEITH\tCREEL Keith\tCreel\n\nChief\tExecutive\tOfficer\tand\tDirector (Principal\tExecutive\tOfficer) Executive\tVice-President\tand\tChief\tFinancial\tOfficer (Principal\tFinancial\tOfficer) Chair\tof\tthe\tBoard\tof\tDirectors\n\n/s/\tNADEEM\tVELANI Nadeem\tVelani\n\n/s/\tISABELLE\tCOURVILLE Isabelle\tCourville\n\n/s/\tJOHN\tR.\tBAIRD John\tR.\tBaird\n\nDirector\n\n/s/\tGILLIAN\tH.\tDENHAM Gillian\tH.\tDenham\n\nDirector\n\n/s/\tEDWARD\tR.\tHAMBERGER Edward\tR.\tHamberger\n\nDirector\n\n/s/\tREBECCA\tMACDONALD Rebecca\tMacDonald\n\nDirector\n\n/s/\tEDWARD\tL.\tMONSER Edward\tL.\tMonser\n\nDirector\n\n/s/\tMATTHEW\tH.\tPAULL Matthew\tH.\tPaull\n\nDirector\n\n/s/\tJANE\tL.\tPEVERETT Jane\tL.\tPeverett\n\nDirector\n\n/s/\tANDREA\tROBERTSON Andrea\tRobertson\n\nDirector\n\n/s/\tGORDON\tT.\tTRAFTON Gordon\tT.\tTrafton\n\nDirector", + "recall": 0.9719626168224299, + "true_md": "CP 2020 ANNUAL REPORT 136\n\nPursuant to the requirements of Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 , the Company has duly caused this report to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned, thereunto duly authorized.\n\nEach of the undersigned do hereby appoint each of Nadeem Velani and Jeffrey J. Ellis, his or her true and lawful attorney-in-fact and agent, to sign on his or her behalf the Company’s Annual Report on Form 10-K, for the year ended December 31, 2020, and any and all amendments thereto, and to file the same, with all exhibits thereto, with the Securities and Exchange Commission.\n\nDated: February 18, 2021\n\nPursuant to the requirements of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 , this report has been signed below by the following persons on behalf of the Company and in the capacities indicated on February 18, 2021.\n\n(Registrant)\n\nBy: /s/ KEITH CREEL Keith Creel Chief Executive Officer\n\n## CANADIAN PACIFIC RAILWAY LIMITED\n\n## POWER OF ATTORNEY\n\n## SIGNATURES" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9745100118628308, + "doc_id": "14f8538e07bccd0d0b7c3be85d3856ea86f4d3c3250302bec30e30e36cb8f09b", + "edit_distance": 0.06593406593406594, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9938552571688667, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Exhibits\n\nExhibits required to be filed by Item 601 of Regulation S-K: Where the amount of securities authorized to be issued under any of our long-term debt agreements does not exceed 10 percent of our assets, pursuant to paragraph (b)(4) of Item 601 of Regulation S-K, in lieu of filing such as an exhibit, we hereby agree to furnish to the Commission upon request a copy of any agreement with respect to such long-term debt.\n\nTable of Contents\n\n207", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## Exhibits\n\nExhibits required to be filed by Item 601 of Regulation S-K: Where the amount of securities authorized to be issued under any of our long-term debt agreements does not exceed 10 percent of our assets, pursuant to paragraph (b)(4) of Item 601 of Regulation S-K, in lieu of filing such as an exhibit, we hereby agree to furnish to the Commission upon request a copy of any agreement with respect to such long-term debt.\n\n207" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8508091056916879, + "doc_id": "7c818f140c0a1d8e4c0961c76c87f273e9794d3ae9f6af5b23e152a90d992053", + "edit_distance": 0.30434782608695654, + "f1_score": 0.9636363636363636, + "meteor": 0.8712826847698888, + "precision": 0.9724770642201835, + "pred_md": "## Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements - (Continued)\n\nBecton, Dickinson and Company\n\nagencies; pharmaceutical companies; and healthcare workers. Medical consists of the following organizational units:\n\nTable of Contents\n\n## Life Sciences\n\nLife Sciences provides products for the safe collection and transport of diagnostics specimens, and instruments and reagent systems to detect a broad range of infectious diseases, healthcare-associated infections ('HAIs') and cancers. In addition, Life Sciences produces research and clinical tools that facilitate the study of cells, and the components of cells, to gain a better understanding of normal and disease processes. That information is used to aid the discovery and development of new drugs and vaccines, and to improve the diagnosis and management of diseases. The primary customers served by Life Sciences are hospitals, laboratories and clinics; blood banks; healthcare workers; public health agencies; physicians' office practices; retail pharmacies; academic and government institutions; and pharmaceutical and biotechnology companies. Life Sciences consists of the following organizational units:\n\n69", + "recall": 0.954954954954955, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\nagencies; pharmaceutical companies; and healthcare workers. Medical consists of the following organizational units:\n\nLife Sciences provides products for the safe collection and transport of diagnostics specimens, and instruments and reagent systems to detect a broad range of infectious diseases, healthcare-associated infections (“HAIs”) and cancers. In addition, Life Sciences produces research and clinical tools that facilitate the study of cells, and the components of cells, to gain a better understanding of normal and disease processes. That information is used to aid the discovery and development of new drugs and vaccines, and to improve the diagnosis and management of diseases. The primary customers served by Life Sciences are hospitals, laboratories and clinics; blood banks; healthcare workers; public health agencies; physicians’ office practices; retail pharmacies; academic and government institutions; and pharmaceutical and biotechnology companies. Life Sciences consists of the following organizational units:\n\n69\n\n## Life Sciences\n\n## Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements — (Continued) Becton, Dickinson and Company\n\n## Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements — (Continued) Becton, Dickinson and Company" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9399476127863587, + "doc_id": "a2db712a5cf5c9eba75f4a0c9984a554a006f02a90e1c81f8abeb4132df6a021", + "edit_distance": 0.38545454545454544, + "f1_score": 0.9740634005763689, + "meteor": 0.9231547197232974, + "precision": 0.9684813753581661, + "pred_md": "## Table of Contents\n\ndetermine the expected long-term rate of return on pension plan assets, we consider many factors, including our historical assumptions compared with actual results; benchmark data; expected returns on various plan asset classes, as well as current and expected asset allocations. We will use a long-term expected rate of return on plan assets assumption of 7.25% for the U.S. pension plan in 2020. We believe our discount rate and expected long-term rate of return on plan assets assumptions are appropriate based upon the above factors.\n\nSensitivity to changes in key assumptions for our U.S. pension and other postretirement and postemployment plans are as follows:\n\n- · Discount rate - A change of plus (minus) 25 basis points, with other assumptions held constant, would have an estimated $7 million favorable (unfavorable) impact on the total U.S. net pension and other postretirement and postemployment benefit plan costs. This estimate assumes no change in the shape or steepness of the company-specific yield curve used to plot the individual spot rates that will be applied to the future cash outflows for future benefit payments in order to calculate interest and service cost.\n- · Expected return on plan assets - A change of plus (minus) 25 basis points, with other assumptions held constant, would have an estimated $5 million favorable (unfavorable) impact on U.S. pension plan costs.\n\n## Cautionary Statement Regarding Forward-Looking Statements\n\nBD and its representatives may from time to time make certain forward-looking statements in publicly released materials, both written and oral, including statements contained in filings with the Securities and Exchange Commission, press releases, and our reports to shareholders. Forward-looking statements may be identified by the use of words such as 'plan,' 'expect,' 'believe,' 'intend,' 'will,', 'may', 'anticipate,' 'estimate' and other words of similar meaning in conjunction with, among other things, discussions of future operations and financial performance (including volume growth, pricing, sales and earnings per share growth, and cash flows) and statements regarding our strategy for growth, future product development, regulatory approvals, competitive position and expenditures. All statements that address our future operating performance or events or developments that we expect or anticipate will occur in the future are forward-looking statements.\n\nForward-looking statements are, and will be, based on management's then-current views and assumptions regarding future events, developments and operating performance, and speak only as of their dates. Investors should realize that if underlying assumptions prove inaccurate, or risks or uncertainties materialize, actual results could vary materially from our expectations and projections. Investors are therefore cautioned not to place undue reliance on any forward-looking statements. Furthermore, we undertake no obligation to update or revise any forward-looking statements after the date they are made, whether as a result of new information, future events and developments or otherwise, except as required by applicable law or regulations.\n\nThe following are some important factors that could cause our actual results to differ from our expectations in any forward-looking statements. For further discussion of certain of these factors, see Item 1A. Risk Factors in this report.\n\n- · Weakness in the global economy and financial markets, which could increase the cost of operating our business, weaken demand for our products and services, negatively impact the prices we can charge for our products and services, or impair our ability to produce our products.\n- · Competitive factors that could adversely affect our operations, including new product introductions and technologies (for example, new forms of drug delivery) by our current or future competitors, consolidation or strategic alliances among healthcare companies, distributors and/or payers of healthcare to improve their competitive position or develop new models for the delivery of healthcare, increased pricing pressure due to the impact of low-cost manufacturers, patents attained by competitors (particularly as patents on our products expire), new entrants into our markets and changes in the practice of medicine.\n- · Risks relating to our acquisition of Bard, including our ability to successfully combine and integrate the Bard operations in order to obtain the anticipated benefits and costs savings from the transaction, and the significant additional indebtedness we incurred in connection with the financing of the acquisition and the impact it may have on our ability to operate the combined company.\n- · The adverse financial impact resulting from unfavorable changes in foreign currency exchange rates.\n\n40", + "recall": 0.9797101449275363, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\ndetermine the expected long-term rate of return on pension plan assets, we consider many factors, including our historical assumptions compared with actual results; benchmark data; expected returns on various plan asset classes, as well as current and expected asset allocations. We will use a long-term expected rate of return on plan assets assumption of 7.25% for the U.S. pension plan in 2020. We believe our discount rate and expected long-term rate of return on plan assets assumptions are appropriate based upon the above factors.\n\nSensitivity to changes in key assumptions for our U.S. pension and other postretirement and postemployment plans are as follows:\n\nBD and its representatives may from time to time make certain forward-looking statements in publicly released materials, both written and oral, including statements contained in filings with the Securities and Exchange Commission, press releases, and our reports to shareholders. Forward-looking statements may be identified by the use of words such as “plan,” “expect,” “believe,” “intend,” “will,”, “may”, “anticipate,” “estimate” and other words of similar meaning in conjunction with, among other things, discussions of future operations and financial performance (including volume growth, pricing, sales and earnings per share growth, and cash flows) and statements regarding our strategy for growth, future product development, regulatory approvals, competitive position and expenditures. All statements that address our future operating performance or events or developments that we expect or anticipate will occur in the future are forward-looking statements.\n\nForward-looking statements are, and will be, based on management’s then-current views and assumptions regarding future events, developments and operating performance, and speak only as of their dates. Investors should realize that if underlying assumptions prove inaccurate, or risks or uncertainties materialize, actual results could vary materially from our expectations and projections. Investors are therefore cautioned not to place undue reliance on any forward-looking statements. Furthermore, we undertake no obligation to update or revise any forward-looking statements after the date they are made, whether as a result of new information, future events and developments or otherwise, except as required by applicable law or regulations.\n\nThe following are some important factors that could cause our actual results to differ from our expectations in any forward-looking statements. For further discussion of certain of these factors, see Item 1A. Risk Factors in this report.\n\n- • Discount rate — A change of plus (minus) 25 basis points, with other assumptions held constant, would have an estimated $7 million favorable (unfavorable) impact on the total U.S. net pension and other postretirement and postemployment benefit plan costs. This estimate assumes no change in the shape or steepness of the company-specific yield curve used to plot the individual spot rates that will be applied to the future cash outflows for future benefit payments in order to calculate interest and service cost.\n\n- • Expected return on plan assets — A change of plus (minus) 25 basis points, with other assumptions held constant, would have an estimated $5 million favorable (unfavorable) impact on U.S. pension plan costs.\n\n- • Weakness in the global economy and financial markets, which could increase the cost of operating our business, weaken demand for our products and services, negatively impact the prices we can charge for our products and services, or impair our ability to produce our products.\n\n- • Competitive factors that could adversely affect our operations, including new product introductions and technologies (for example, new forms of drug delivery) by our current or future competitors, consolidation or strategic alliances among healthcare companies, distributors and/or payers of healthcare to improve their competitive position or develop new models for the delivery of healthcare, increased pricing pressure due to the impact of low-cost manufacturers, patents attained by competitors (particularly as patents on our products expire), new entrants into our markets and changes in the practice of medicine.\n\n- • Risks relating to our acquisition of Bard, including our ability to successfully combine and integrate the Bard operations in order to obtain the anticipated benefits and costs savings from the transaction, and the significant additional indebtedness we incurred in connection with the financing of the acquisition and the impact it may have on our ability to operate the combined company.\n\n- • The adverse financial impact resulting from unfavorable changes in foreign currency exchange rates.\n\n40\n\n## Cautionary Statement Regarding Forward-Looking Statements" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "50a33388ccad0590fe7f0bd864e2e36d2c55cf2535fad9915721307333e8616a", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.5, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "3", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "3" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9455703287076027, + "doc_id": "6cfd1bfcbb9282429ba44b253c0810cbf2d480bfc21a0ce77b9d20cc46a9f270", + "edit_distance": 0.6577840112201964, + "f1_score": 0.9863842662632377, + "meteor": 0.6864098064232697, + "precision": 0.9878787878787879, + "pred_md": "## Overview\n\nApplied provides manufacturing equipment, services and software to the semiconductor, display, and related industries. Applied's customers include manufacturers of semiconductor wafers and chips, liquid crystal and organic light-emitting diode (OLED) displays, and other electronic devices. These customers may use what they manufacture in their own end products or sell the items to other companies for use in advanced electronic components. Each of Applied's businesses is subject to variable industry conditions, as demand for manufacturing equipment and services can change depending on supply and demand for chips, display technologies, and other electronic devices, as well as other factors, such as global economic and market conditions, and the nature and timing of technological advances in fabrication processes.\n\nApplied operates in three reportable segments: Semiconductor Systems, Applied Global Services, and Display and Adjacent Markets. A summary of financial information for each reportable segment is found in Note 17 of Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements. A discussion of factors that could affect Applied's operations is set forth under 'Risk Factors' in Part I, Item 1A, which is incorporated herein by reference. Product development and manufacturing activities occur primarily in the United States, Europe, Israel, and Asia. Applied's broad range of equipment and service products are highly technical and are sold primarily through a direct sales force.\n\nApplied's results are driven primarily by customer spending on capital equipment and services to support key technology transitions or to increase production volume in response to worldwide demand for semiconductors and displays. Spending by semiconductor customers, which include companies that operate in the foundry, logic and memory markets, is driven by demand for advanced electronic products, including smartphones and other mobile devices, servers, personal computers, automotive devices, storage, and other products. The growth of data and emerging end-market drivers such as artificial intelligence, the Internet of Things, 5G networks, smart vehicles and augmented and virtual reality are also creating the next wave of growth for the industry. As a result, products within the Semiconductor Systems segment are subject to significant changes in customer requirements, including transitions to smaller dimensions, increasingly complex chip architectures, new materials and an increasing number of applications. Demand for display manufacturing equipment spending depends primarily on consumer demand for increasingly larger and more advanced TVs as well as larger and higher resolution displays for next-generation mobile devices, and investments in new types of display technologies. While certain existing technologies may be adapted to new requirements, some applications create the need for an entirely different technological approach. The timing of customer investment in manufacturing equipment is also affected by the timing of next-generation process development and the timing of capacity expansion to meet end-market demand. In light of these conditions, Applied's results can vary significantly year-over-year, as well as quarter-over-quarter.\n\nApplied's strategic priorities include developing products that help solve customers' challenges at technology inflections; expanding its served market opportunities in the semiconductor and display industries; and growing its services business. Applied's long-term growth strategy requires continued development of new materials engineering capabilities, including products and platforms that enable expansion into new and adjacent markets. Applied's significant investments in research, development and engineering must generally enable it to deliver new products and technologies before the emergence of strong demand, thus allowing customers to incorporate these products into their manufacturing plans during early-stage technology selection. Applied works closely with its global customers to design systems and processes that meet their planned technical and production requirements.\n\nThe following table presents certain significant measurements for the past three fiscal years:\n\nChange\n\nTable of Contents\n\nFiscal 2020, 2019 and 2018 each contained 52 weeks.\n\nFiscal 2018 included a one-time expense related to the enactment of U.S. income tax law that reduced diluted earnings per share by $1.08.\n\n35", + "recall": 0.9848942598187311, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## Overview\n\n35\n\nFiscal 2018 included a one-time expense related to the enactment of U.S. income tax law that reduced diluted earnings per share by $1.08.\n\nFiscal 2020, 2019 and 2018 each contained 52 weeks.\n\nThe following table presents certain significant measurements for the past three fiscal years:\n\nApplied’s strategic priorities include developing products that help solve customers’ challenges at technology inflections; expanding its served market opportunities in the semiconductor and display industries; and growing its services business. Applied’s long-term growth strategy requires continued development of new materials engineering capabilities, including products and platforms that enable expansion into new and adjacent markets. Applied’s significant investments in research, development and engineering must generally enable it to deliver new products and technologies before the emergence of strong demand, thus allowing customers to incorporate these products into their manufacturing plans during early-stage technology selection. Applied works closely with its global customers to design systems and processes that meet their planned technical and production requirements.\n\nApplied’s results are driven primarily by customer spending on capital equipment and services to support key technology transitions or to increase production volume in response to worldwide demand for semiconductors and displays. Spending by semiconductor customers, which include companies that operate in the foundry, logic and memory markets, is driven by demand for advanced electronic products, including smartphones and other mobile devices, servers, personal computers, automotive devices, storage, and other products. The growth of data and emerging end-market drivers such as artificial intelligence, the Internet of Things, 5G networks, smart vehicles and augmented and virtual reality are also creating the next wave of growth for the industry. As a result, products within the Semiconductor Systems segment are subject to significant changes in customer requirements, including transitions to smaller dimensions, increasingly complex chip architectures, new materials and an increasing number of applications. Demand for display manufacturing equipment spending depends primarily on consumer demand for increasingly larger and more advanced TVs as well as larger and higher resolution displays for next-generation mobile devices, and investments in new types of display technologies. While certain existing technologies may be adapted to new requirements, some applications create the need for an entirely different technological approach. The timing of customer investment in manufacturing equipment is also affected by the timing of next-generation process development and the timing of capacity expansion to meet end-market demand. In light of these conditions, Applied’s results can vary significantly year-over-year, as well as quarter-over-quarter.\n\nApplied operates in three reportable segments: Semiconductor Systems, Applied Global Services, and Display and Adjacent Markets. A summary of financial information for each reportable segment is found in Note 17 of Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements. A discussion of factors that could affect Applied’s operations is set forth under “Risk Factors” in Part I, Item 1A, which is incorporated herein by reference. Product development and manufacturing activities occur primarily in the United States, Europe, Israel, and Asia. Applied’s broad range of equipment and service products are highly technical and are sold primarily through a direct sales force.\n\nApplied provides manufacturing equipment, services and software to the semiconductor, display, and related industries. Applied’s customers include manufacturers of semiconductor wafers and chips, liquid crystal and organic light-emitting diode (OLED) displays, and other electronic devices. These customers may use what they manufacture in their own end products or sell the items to other companies for use in advanced electronic components. Each of Applied’s businesses is subject to variable industry conditions, as demand for manufacturing equipment and services can change depending on supply and demand for chips, display technologies, and other electronic devices, as well as other factors, such as global economic and market conditions, and the nature and timing of technological advances in fabrication processes." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9793063218165606, + "doc_id": "f3ddb9e45e356b2bbe43ee168aeac3848f0b4d4dcfb3155930fb1b3f898cc1b4", + "edit_distance": 0.026737967914438502, + "f1_score": 0.9919571045576406, + "meteor": 0.989743649119598, + "precision": 0.9946236559139785, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS OF AMERICAN AIRLINES GROUP INC .\n\n- Includes approximately 89% investments in U.S. domestic government securities, 9% in emerging market government securities and 2% in international government securities. There are no significant foreign currency risks within this classification. (e)\n- Includes limited partnerships that invest primarily in domestic private equity and private income opportunities. The pension plan's master trust does not have the right to redeem its limited partnership investment at its net asset value, but rather receives distributions as the underlying assets are liquidated. It is estimated that the underlying assets of these funds will be gradually liquidated over the next one to ten years. Additionally, the pension plan's master trust has future funding commitments of approximately $1.6 billion over the next ten years. (f)\n- Certain investments that are measured using net asset value per share (or its equivalent) as a practical expedient for fair value have not been classified in the fair value hierarchy. The fair value amounts presented in this table are intended to permit reconciliation of the fair value hierarchy to the amounts presented in the notes to the consolidated financial statements. (g)\n- Investment includes 34% in a common/collective trust investing in large market capitalization equity securities within the U.S., 30% in three common/collective trusts investing in emerging country equity securities, 21% in a common/collective trust investing in equity securities of companies located outside the U.S., 9% in a collective interest trust investing primarily in short-term securities, 5% in a common/collective trust investing in smaller market capitalization equity securities within the U.S. and 1% in Canadian segregated balanced value, income growth and diversified pooled funds. For some trusts, requests for withdrawals must meet specific requirements with advance notice of redemption preferred. (h)\n\nTable of Contents\n\nHoldings\tare\tdiversified\tas\tfollows:\t14%\tUnited\tKingdom,\t8%\tSwitzerland,\t8%\tIreland,\t7%\tJapan,\t7%\tFrance,\t6% (a)\n\n134", + "recall": 0.9893048128342246, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS OF AMERICAN AIRLINES GROUP INC .\n\n- Includes approximately 89% investments in U.S. domestic government securities, 9% in emerging market government securities and 2% in international government securities. There are no significant foreign currency risks within this classification. (e)\n\n- Includes limited partnerships that invest primarily in domestic private equity and private income opportunities. The pension plan’s master trust does not have the right to redeem its limited partnership investment at its net asset value, but rather receives distributions as the underlying assets are liquidated. It is estimated that the underlying assets of these funds will be gradually liquidated over the next one to ten years. Additionally, the pension plan’s master trust has future funding commitments of approximately $1.6 billion over the next ten years. (f)\n\n- Certain investments that are measured using net asset value per share (or its equivalent) as a practical expedient for fair value have not been classified in the fair value hierarchy. The fair value amounts presented in this table are intended to permit reconciliation of the fair value hierarchy to the amounts presented in the notes to the consolidated financial statements. (g)\n\n- Investment includes 34% in a common/collective trust investing in large market capitalization equity securities within the U.S., 30% in three common/collective trusts investing in emerging country equity securities, 21% in a common/collective trust investing in equity securities of companies located outside the U.S., 9% in a collective interest trust investing primarily in short-term securities, 5% in a common/collective trust investing in smaller market capitalization equity securities within the U.S. and 1% in Canadian segregated balanced value, income growth and diversified pooled funds. For some trusts, requests for withdrawals must meet specific requirements with advance notice of redemption preferred. (h)\n\nHoldings are diversified as follows: 14% United Kingdom, 8% Switzerland, 8% Ireland, 7% Japan, 7% France, 6% (a)\n\n134" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "c0757985905ed194a13569ab5a12782150fa18d017c0dc0942c3aaa08cb7aa37", + "edit_distance": 0.9982014388489209, + "f1_score": 0.015873015873015872, + "meteor": 0.000999000999000999, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "24", + "recall": 0.008, + "true_md": "The instrument defining the rights of the holders of the 3.625% Notes due 2024 is Exhibit 5 to Form 8-K, filed February 11, 2014, and is hereby incorporated by reference.\n\nThe instrument defining the rights of the holders of the Floating Rate Notes due 2021 is Exhibit 2 to Form 8-K, filed November 5, 2014, and is hereby incorporated by reference.\n\nThe instrument defining the rights of the holders of the 1.25% Notes due 2023 is Exhibit 2 to Form 8-K, filed November 25, 2014, and is hereby incorporated by reference.\n\nThe instrument defining the rights of the holders of the 2.625% Notes due 2022 is Exhibit 2 to Form 8-K, filed on August 4, 2015, and is hereby incorporated by reference.\n\nThe instrument defining the rights of the holders of the 2.875% Notes due 2022 is Exhibit 2 to Form 8-K, filed on November 6, 2015, and is hereby incorporated by reference.\n\nThe instruments defining the rights of the holders of the 1.800% Notes due 2019, 2.250% Notes due 2021, 3.450% Notes due 2026 and 4.700% Notes due 2046 are Exhibits 4.2, 4.3, 4.4 and 4.5 to Form 8-K filed February 18, 2016, and are hereby incorporated by reference.\n\nThe instruments defining the rights of the holders of the 0.500% Notes due 2021, 1.125% Notes due 2024 and 1.750% Notes due 2028 are Exhibits 4.1, 4.2 and 4.3 to Form 8-K filed March 4, 2016 and are hereby incorporated by reference.\n\nThe instrument defining the rights of the holders of the 0.30% Notes due 2026 is Exhibit 4 to Form 8-K filed November 1, 2016 and is hereby incorporated by reference.\n\nThe instruments defining the rights of the holders of the Floating Rate Notes due 2020, 1.900% Notes due 2020, 2.500% Notes due 2022 and 3.300% Notes due 2027 are Exhibits 4.1, 4.2, 4.3 and 4.4 to Form 8-K filed January 26, 2017, and are hereby incorporated by reference.\n\nThe instruments defining the rights of the holders of the 0.950% Notes due 2025, and 1.500% Notes due 2029 are Exhibits 4.1 and 4.2 to Form 8-K filed May 22, 2017, and are hereby incorporated by reference.\n\nThe instruments defining the rights of the holders of the 0.375% Notes due 2023, and 0.875% Notes due 2025, the 1.250% Notes due 2027 and the 1.750% Notes due 2031 are Exhibits 4.1, 4.2, 4.3 and 4.4 to Form 8-K, filed January 30, 2019, and are hereby incorporated by reference.\n\nIndenture dated as of October 1, 1993 between IBM and The Bank of New York Mellon, (as successor to The Chase Manhattan Bank (National Association)) as Trustee, is Exhibit 4.1 to Form 10-Q for the quarter ended September 30, 2017, and is hereby incorporated by reference.\n\n24\n\nExhibit Number in this Form 10- K\n\nDescription of Exhibits\n\nReference Number per Item 601 of Regulation S- K" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9737002743405976, + "doc_id": "a6b3283bfa97f57e26e0d25286bcd4476b84b1a4d0cc838fe60349db49150822", + "edit_distance": 0.04435483870967742, + "f1_score": 0.9847494553376906, + "meteor": 0.9834911899974039, + "precision": 0.9912280701754386, + "pred_md": "## Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements - (Continued)\n\nBecton, Dickinson and Company\n\nHedges of the transactional foreign exchange exposures resulting primarily from intercompany payables and receivables are undesignated hedges. As such, the gains or losses on these instruments are recognized immediately in income. These gains and losses are largely offset by gains and losses on the underlying hedged items, as well as the hedging costs associated with the derivative instruments. The net amounts recognized in Other income (expense), net , during the years ending September 30, 2019, 2018 and 2017 were immaterial to the Company's consolidated financial results. The total notional amounts of the Company's outstanding foreign exchange contracts as of September 30, 2019 and 2018 were $2.3 billion and $3.1 billion, respectively.\n\nCertain of the Company's foreign currency-denominated long-term notes outstanding, which had a total carrying value of $1.4 billion and $3.0 billion, as of September 30, 2019 and 2018, respectively, were designated as, and were effective as, economic hedges of net investments in certain of the Company's foreign subsidiaries. In connection with the Company's issuance of Euro-denominated notes during the third quarter of fiscal year 2019, the Company entered into cross-currency swaps, as well as a forward contract, which were designated and effective as economic hedges of net investments in certain of the Company's foreign subsidiaries. The notional amount of the cross-currency swaps was $2.3 billion as of September 30, 2019. The forward contract was terminated in the third quarter, in conjunction with the Company's issuance of the Eurodenominated notes. Additional disclosures regarding the Company's issuance of Euro-denominated notes in the third quarter of fiscal year 2019 are provided in Note 16.\n\nNet gains or losses relating to the net investment hedges, which are attributable to changes in the foreign currencies to U.S. dollar spot exchange rates, are recorded as accumulated foreign currency translation in Other comprehensive income (loss) . Upon the termination of a net investment hedge, any net gain or loss included in Accumulated other comprehensive income (loss) relative to the investment hedge remains until the foreign subsidiary investment is disposed of or is substantially liquidated.\n\nNet gains (losses) recorded to Accumulated other comprehensive income (loss) relating to the Company's net investment hedges as of September 30, 2019 and 2018 were as follows:\n\nTable of Contents\n\n## Interest Rate Risks and Related Strategies\n\nThe Company's primary interest rate exposure results from changes in U.S. dollar interest rates. The Company's policy is to manage interest cost using a mix of fixed and variable rate debt. The Company periodically uses interest rate swaps to manage such exposures. Under these interest rate swaps, the Company exchanges, at specified intervals, the difference between fixed and floating interest amounts calculated by reference to an agreed-upon notional principal amount. These swaps are designated as either fair value or cash flow hedges.\n\nFor interest rate swaps designated as fair value hedges (i.e., hedges against the exposure to changes in the fair value of an asset or a liability or an identified portion thereof that is attributable to a particular risk), changes in the fair value of the interest rate swaps offset changes in the fair value of the fixed rate debt due to changes in market interest rates.\n\nThe total notional amount of the Company's outstanding interest rate swaps designated as fair value hedges was $375 million and $1.2 billion at September 30, 2019 and 2018, respectively. The outstanding swaps represent fixed-to-floating interest rate swap agreements the Company entered into to convert the interest payments on certain long-term notes from the fixed rate to a floating interest rate based on LIBOR. Changes in the fair value of the interest rate swaps offset changes in the fair value of the fixed rate debt. The amounts recorded during the years ended September 30, 2019 and 2018 for changes in the fair value of these hedges were immaterial to the Company's consolidated financial results.\n\n90", + "recall": 0.9783549783549783, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements — (Continued) Becton, Dickinson and Company\n\nHedges of the transactional foreign exchange exposures resulting primarily from intercompany payables and receivables are undesignated hedges. As such, the gains or losses on these instruments are recognized immediately in income. These gains and losses are largely offset by gains and losses on the underlying hedged items, as well as the hedging costs associated with the derivative instruments. The net amounts recognized in Other income (expense), net , during the years ending September 30, 2019, 2018 and 2017 were immaterial to the Company's consolidated financial results. The total notional amounts of the Company’s outstanding foreign exchange contracts as of September 30, 2019 and 2018 were $2.3 billion and $3.1 billion, respectively.\n\nCertain of the Company's foreign currency-denominated long-term notes outstanding, which had a total carrying value of $1.4 billion and $3.0 billion, as of September 30, 2019 and 2018, respectively, were designated as, and were effective as, economic hedges of net investments in certain of the Company's foreign subsidiaries. In connection with the Company's issuance of Euro-denominated notes during the third quarter of fiscal year 2019, the Company entered into cross-currency swaps, as well as a forward contract, which were designated and effective as economic hedges of net investments in certain of the Company's foreign subsidiaries. The notional amount of the cross-currency swaps was $2.3 billion as of September 30, 2019. The forward contract was terminated in the third quarter, in conjunction with the Company's issuance of the Euro- denominated notes. Additional disclosures regarding the Company's issuance of Euro-denominated notes in the third quarter of fiscal year 2019 are provided in Note 16.\n\nNet gains or losses relating to the net investment hedges, which are attributable to changes in the foreign currencies to U.S. dollar spot exchange rates, are recorded as accumulated foreign currency translation in Other comprehensive income (loss) . Upon the termination of a net investment hedge, any net gain or loss included in Accumulated other comprehensive income (loss) relative to the investment hedge remains until the foreign subsidiary investment is disposed of or is substantially liquidated.\n\nNet gains (losses) recorded to Accumulated other comprehensive income (loss) relating to the Company's net investment hedges as of September 30, 2019 and 2018 were as follows:\n\nThe Company’s primary interest rate exposure results from changes in U.S. dollar interest rates. The Company’s policy is to manage interest cost using a mix of fixed and variable rate debt. The Company periodically uses interest rate swaps to manage such exposures. Under these interest rate swaps, the Company exchanges, at specified intervals, the difference between fixed and floating interest amounts calculated by reference to an agreed-upon notional principal amount. These swaps are designated as either fair value or cash flow hedges.\n\nFor interest rate swaps designated as fair value hedges (i.e., hedges against the exposure to changes in the fair value of an asset or a liability or an identified portion thereof that is attributable to a particular risk), changes in the fair value of the interest rate swaps offset changes in the fair value of the fixed rate debt due to changes in market interest rates.\n\nThe total notional amount of the Company’s outstanding interest rate swaps designated as fair value hedges was $375 million and $1.2 billion at September 30, 2019 and 2018, respectively. The outstanding swaps represent fixed-to-floating interest rate swap agreements the Company entered into to convert the interest payments on certain long-term notes from the fixed rate to a floating interest rate based on LIBOR. Changes in the fair value of the interest rate swaps offset changes in the fair value of the fixed rate debt. The amounts recorded during the years ended September 30, 2019 and 2018 for changes in the fair value of these hedges were immaterial to the Company's consolidated financial results.\n\n## Interest Rate Risks and Related Strategies\n\n90" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.799203971946, + "doc_id": "bfa2120f7b3dc724abe6fe1bd3cc5bc23388efe53fb167173cb9593b2614af43", + "edit_distance": 0.1888111888111888, + "f1_score": 0.9759036144578312, + "meteor": 0.8636115516176848, + "precision": 0.9878048780487805, + "pred_md": "## Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements - (Continued)\n\nBecton, Dickinson and Company\n\nFinancial information for the Company's segments is detailed below. The Company has no material intersegment revenues. As discussed in Note 10, the Company completed its acquisition of Bard on December 29, 2017. Bard's operating results were included in the Company's consolidated results of operations beginning on January 1, 2018.\n\nTable of Contents\n\n(a) Amounts\tpresented\tin\t2017\tare\tassociated\twith\tcertain\tproduct\tofferings\tthat\twere\tmoved\tfrom\tthe\tMedical\tsegment\tto\tthe Interventional\tsegment\tin\torder\tto\talign\twith\tthe\treportable\tsegment\tstructure\tthat\tbecame\teffective\tbeginning\tin\tthe\tsecond\tquarter\tof\tfiscal year\t2018.\n\n71", + "recall": 0.9642857142857143, + "true_md": "## Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements — (Continued) Becton, Dickinson and Company\n\n## Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements — (Continued) Becton, Dickinson and Company\n\nFinancial information for the Company’s segments is detailed below. The Company has no material intersegment revenues. As discussed in Note 10, the Company completed its acquisition of Bard on December 29, 2017. Bard's operating results were included in the Company’s consolidated results of operations beginning on January 1, 2018.\n\n(a) Amounts presented in 2017 are associated with certain product offerings that were moved from the Medical segment to the Interventional segment in order to align with the reportable segment structure that became effective beginning in the second quarter of fiscal year 2018.\n\n71\n\nTable of Contents" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9911778090472655, + "doc_id": "ea83f9a5db44196e34824305180961cbf46d49145663afe2a955e5b8b34c0961", + "edit_distance": 0.043683589138134596, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9997525176783896, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Table of Contents\n\nlack of capacity, regulatory requirements or otherwise, we may be unable to transition sterilization to other sites or modalities in a timely or cost effective manner, or at all, which could have an adverse impact on our operating results.\n\n## We are subject to lawsuits.\n\nWe are or have been a defendant in a number of lawsuits, including, among others, purported class action lawsuits for alleged antitrust violations, product liability claims (which may involve lawsuits seeking class action status or seeking to establish multi-district litigation proceedings, including claims relating to our hernia repair implant products, surgical continence and pelvic organ prolapse products for women and vena cava filter products), and suits alleging patent infringement. We have also been subject to government subpoenas seeking information with respect to alleged violations of law, including in connection with federal and/or state healthcare programs (such as Medicare or Medicaid) and/or sales and marketing practices (such as the civil investigative demands). A more detailed description of certain litigation to which we are a party is contained in Note 5 to the consolidated financial statements included in Item 8. Financial Statements and Supplementary Data. We could be subject to additional lawsuits or governmental investigations in the future.\n\nReserves established for estimated losses with respect to legal proceedings do not represent an exact calculation of our actual liability, but instead represent our estimate of the probable loss at the time the reserve is established. Due to the inherent uncertainty of litigation and our underlying loss reserve estimates, additional reserves may be established or current reserves may be significantly increased from time-to-time. Also, in some instances, we are not able to estimate the amount or range of loss that could result from an unfavorable outcome of the litigation to which we are a party. In view of these uncertainties, we could incur charges materially in excess of any currently established accruals and, to the extent available, excess liability insurance. Any such future charges, individually or in the aggregate, could have a material adverse effect on our results of operations, financial condition and/or liquidity.\n\nWith respect to our existing product liability litigation, we believe that some settlements and judgments, as well as legal defense costs, may be covered in whole or in part under our product liability insurance policies with a limited number of insurance companies, or, in some circumstances, indemnification obligations to us from other parties. However, amounts recovered under these arrangements may be less than the stated coverage limits or less than otherwise expected and may not be adequate to cover damages and/or costs. In addition, there is no guarantee that insurers or other parties will pay claims or that coverage or indemnity will be otherwise available. For certain product liability claims or lawsuits, BD does not maintain or has limited remaining insurance coverage, and we may not be able to obtain additional insurance on acceptable terms or at all that will provide adequate protection against potential liabilities.\n\n## We are subject to extensive regulation.\n\nOur operations are global and are affected by complex state, federal and international laws relating to healthcare, environmental protection, antitrust, anti-corruption, marketing, fraud and abuse (including anti-kickback and false claims laws), export control, employment, privacy and other areas. Violations of these laws can result in criminal or civil sanctions, including substantial fines and, in some cases, exclusion from participation in health care programs such as Medicare and Medicaid. Environmental laws, particularly with respect to the emission of greenhouse gases, are also becoming more stringent throughout the world, which may increase our costs of operations or necessitate closures of or changes to our manufacturing plants or processes or those of our suppliers, or result in liability to BD. The enactment of additional laws in the future may increase our compliance costs or otherwise adversely impact our operations.\n\nWe are also subject to extensive regulation by the FDA pursuant to the Federal Food, Drug and Cosmetic Act, by comparable agencies in foreign countries, and by other regulatory agencies and governing bodies. Most of our products must receive clearance or approval from the FDA or counterpart regulatory agencies in other countries before they can be marketed or sold. The process for obtaining marketing approval or clearance may require us to incur significant costs in terms of time and resources, and these costs have been increasing due to increased requirements from the FDA for supporting data for submissions. The regulatory process may also require changes to our products or result in limitations on the indicated uses of our products. Governmental\n\n15", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## We are subject to lawsuits.\n\n## lack of capacity, regulatory requirements or otherwise, we may be unable to transition sterilization to other sites or modalities in a timely or cost effective manner, or at all, which could have an adverse impact on our operating results.\n\nWe are or have been a defendant in a number of lawsuits, including, among others, purported class action lawsuits for alleged antitrust violations, product liability claims (which may involve lawsuits seeking class action status or seeking to establish multi-district litigation proceedings, including claims relating to our hernia repair implant products, surgical continence and pelvic organ prolapse products for women and vena cava filter products), and suits alleging patent infringement. We have also been subject to government subpoenas seeking information with respect to alleged violations of law, including in connection with federal and/or state healthcare programs (such as Medicare or Medicaid) and/or sales and marketing practices (such as the civil investigative demands). A more detailed description of certain litigation to which we are a party is contained in Note 5 to the consolidated financial statements included in Item 8. Financial Statements and Supplementary Data. We could be subject to additional lawsuits or governmental investigations in the future.\n\nReserves established for estimated losses with respect to legal proceedings do not represent an exact calculation of our actual liability, but instead represent our estimate of the probable loss at the time the reserve is established. Due to the inherent uncertainty of litigation and our underlying loss reserve estimates, additional reserves may be established or current reserves may be significantly increased from time-to-time. Also, in some instances, we are not able to estimate the amount or range of loss that could result from an unfavorable outcome of the litigation to which we are a party. In view of these uncertainties, we could incur charges materially in excess of any currently established accruals and, to the extent available, excess liability insurance. Any such future charges, individually or in the aggregate, could have a material adverse effect on our results of operations, financial condition and/or liquidity.\n\nWith respect to our existing product liability litigation, we believe that some settlements and judgments, as well as legal defense costs, may be covered in whole or in part under our product liability insurance policies with a limited number of insurance companies, or, in some circumstances, indemnification obligations to us from other parties. However, amounts recovered under these arrangements may be less than the stated coverage limits or less than otherwise expected and may not be adequate to cover damages and/or costs. In addition, there is no guarantee that insurers or other parties will pay claims or that coverage or indemnity will be otherwise available. For certain product liability claims or lawsuits, BD does not maintain or has limited remaining insurance coverage, and we may not be able to obtain additional insurance on acceptable terms or at all that will provide adequate protection against potential liabilities.\n\nOur operations are global and are affected by complex state, federal and international laws relating to healthcare, environmental protection, antitrust, anti-corruption, marketing, fraud and abuse (including anti-kickback and false claims laws), export control, employment, privacy and other areas. Violations of these laws can result in criminal or civil sanctions, including substantial fines and, in some cases, exclusion from participation in health care programs such as Medicare and Medicaid. Environmental laws, particularly with respect to the emission of greenhouse gases, are also becoming more stringent throughout the world, which may increase our costs of operations or necessitate closures of or changes to our manufacturing plants or processes or those of our suppliers, or result in liability to BD. The enactment of additional laws in the future may increase our compliance costs or otherwise adversely impact our operations.\n\nWe are also subject to extensive regulation by the FDA pursuant to the Federal Food, Drug and Cosmetic Act, by comparable agencies in foreign countries, and by other regulatory agencies and governing bodies. Most of our products must receive clearance or approval from the FDA or counterpart regulatory agencies in other countries before they can be marketed or sold. The process for obtaining marketing approval or clearance may require us to incur significant costs in terms of time and resources, and these costs have been increasing due to increased requirements from the FDA for supporting data for submissions. The regulatory process may also require changes to our products or result in limitations on the indicated uses of our products. Governmental\n\n## We are subject to extensive regulation.\n\n15" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9860386019475437, + "doc_id": "72a084d699e24b8d4607a09a060c3adcd5937a795ffdef7d36714a4b4a30bc37", + "edit_distance": 0.12924281984334204, + "f1_score": 0.9918962722852512, + "meteor": 0.9817115325788763, + "precision": 0.9935064935064936, + "pred_md": "## Table of Contents\n\ngovernment authorities (including Medicare, Medicaid and comparable foreign programs) and private insurers for the costs of our products. The coverage policies and reimbursement levels of third-party payers, which can vary among public and private sources and by country, may affect which products customers purchase and the prices they are willing to pay for those products in a particular jurisdiction. Reimbursement rates can also affect the market acceptance rate of new technologies and products. Reforms to reimbursement systems in the United States or abroad, changes in coverage or reimbursement rates by private payers, or adverse decisions relating to our products by administrators of these systems could significantly reduce reimbursement for procedures using our products or result in denial of reimbursement for those products, which would adversely affect customer demand or the price customers are willing to pay for such products. See 'Third-Party Reimbursement' under Item 1. Business.\n\nInitiatives to limit the growth of healthcare costs in the U.S. and other countries where we do business may also put pressure on medical device pricing. In the U.S., these include, among others, value-based purchasing and managed care arrangements. Governments in China and other countries are also using various mechanisms to control healthcare expenditures, including increased use of competitive bidding and tenders, and price regulation.\n\n## The reinstatement of the PPACA's medical device tax may adversely affect our results of operations.\n\nThe PPACA imposes on medical device manufacturers, such as BD, a 2.3% excise tax on U.S. sales of certain medical devices. While the excise tax has been suspended until the end of 2019, absent further legislative action, it will be reinstated in 2020, which would adversely affect our results of operation.\n\n## Cost volatility could adversely affect our operations.\n\nOur results of operations could be negatively impacted by volatility in the cost of raw materials, components, freight and energy that, in turn, increases the costs of producing and distributing our products. New laws or regulations adopted in response to climate change could also increase energy and transportation costs, as well as the costs of certain raw materials and components. In particular, we purchase supplies of resins, which are oil-based components used in the manufacture of certain products, and any significant increases in resin costs could adversely impact future operating results. Increases in oil prices can also increase our packaging and transportation costs. We may not be able to offset any increases in our operational costs.\n\n## Breaches of our information technology systems could have a material adverse effect on our operations.\n\nWe rely on information technology systems to process, transmit, and store electronic information in our day-to-day operations, including sensitive personal information and proprietary or confidential information. In addition, some of our products include information technology that collects data regarding patients and patient therapy on behalf of our customers and some connect to our systems for maintenance purposes. Our information technology systems have been subjected to attack via malicious code execution, and cyber- or phishing- attacks, and we have experienced instances of unauthorized access to our systems in the past and expect to be subject to similar attacks in the future. In addition to our own information, in the course of doing business, we sometimes store information with third parties that could be subject to these types of attacks.\n\nCyber-attacks could result in our intellectual property and other confidential information being accessed or stolen, which could adversely affect our competitive position in the market. Likewise, we could suffer disruption of our operations and other significant negative consequences, including increased costs for security measures or remediation, diversion of management attention, litigation and damage to our relationships with vendors, business partners and customers. Unauthorized tampering, adulteration or interference with our products may also create issues with product functionality that could result in a loss of data, risk to patient safety, and product recalls or field actions. Cyber-attacks could result in unauthorized access to our systems and products which could also impact our compliance with privacy and other laws and regulations, and result in actions by regulatory bodies or civil litigation. While we will continue to dedicate significant resources to\n\n12", + "recall": 0.9902912621359223, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\ngovernment authorities (including Medicare, Medicaid and comparable foreign programs) and private insurers for the costs of our products. The coverage policies and reimbursement levels of third-party payers, which can vary among public and private sources and by country, may affect which products customers purchase and the prices they are willing to pay for those products in a particular jurisdiction. Reimbursement rates can also affect the market acceptance rate of new technologies and products. Reforms to reimbursement systems in the United States or abroad, changes in coverage or reimbursement rates by private payers, or adverse decisions relating to our products by administrators of these systems could significantly reduce reimbursement for procedures using our products or result in denial of reimbursement for those products, which would adversely affect customer demand or the price customers are willing to pay for such products. See “Third-Party Reimbursement” under Item 1. Business.\n\nInitiatives to limit the growth of healthcare costs in the U.S. and other countries where we do business may also put pressure on medical device pricing. In the U.S., these include, among others, value-based purchasing and managed care arrangements. Governments in China and other countries are also using various mechanisms to control healthcare expenditures, including increased use of competitive bidding and tenders, and price regulation.\n\nThe PPACA imposes on medical device manufacturers, such as BD, a 2.3% excise tax on U.S. sales of certain medical devices. While the excise tax has been suspended until the end of 2019, absent further legislative action, it will be reinstated in 2020, which would adversely affect our results of operation.\n\nOur results of operations could be negatively impacted by volatility in the cost of raw materials, components, freight and energy that, in turn, increases the costs of producing and distributing our products. New laws or regulations adopted in response to climate change could also increase energy and transportation costs, as well as the costs of certain raw materials and components. In particular, we purchase supplies of resins, which are oil-based components used in the manufacture of certain products, and any significant increases in resin costs could adversely impact future operating results. Increases in oil prices can also increase our packaging and transportation costs. We may not be able to offset any increases in our operational costs.\n\nWe rely on information technology systems to process, transmit, and store electronic information in our day-to-day operations, including sensitive personal information and proprietary or confidential information. In addition, some of our products include information technology that collects data regarding patients and patient therapy on behalf of our customers and some connect to our systems for maintenance purposes. Our information technology systems have been subjected to attack via malicious code execution, and cyber- or phishing- attacks, and we have experienced instances of unauthorized access to our systems in the past and expect to be subject to similar attacks in the future. In addition to our own information, in the course of doing business, we sometimes store information with third parties that could be subject to these types of attacks. \n\nCyber-attacks could result in our intellectual property and other confidential information being accessed or stolen, which could adversely affect our competitive position in the market. Likewise, we could suffer disruption of our operations and other significant negative consequences, including increased costs for security measures or remediation, diversion of management attention, litigation and damage to our relationships with vendors, business partners and customers. Unauthorized tampering, adulteration or interference with our products may also create issues with product functionality that could result in a loss of data, risk to patient safety, and product recalls or field actions. Cyber-attacks could result in unauthorized access to our systems and products which could also impact our compliance with privacy and other laws and regulations, and result in actions by regulatory bodies or civil litigation. While we will continue to dedicate significant resources to\n\n12\n\n## Breaches of our information technology systems could have a material adverse effect on our operations.\n\n## Cost volatility could adversely affect our operations.\n\n## The reinstatement of the PPACA's medical device tax may adversely affect our results of operations." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9324590245508326, + "doc_id": "2847199d263c775e38c603b5ad58aef43f892108580ff19ed2edc083306c982c", + "edit_distance": 0.06535947712418301, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9380429329681865, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "EASTGROUP PROPERTIES, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES\n\nNOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\nrestricted stock compensation for employees and directors that is expected to be recognized over a weighted average period of 2.7 years.\n\nFollowing is a summary of the total restricted shares granted, forfeited and delivered (vested) to employees with the related weighted average grant date fair value share prices for 2020, 2019 and 2018. Of the shares that vested in 2020, 2019 and 2018, 36,445 shares, 28,955 shares and 23,824 shares, respectively, were withheld by the Company to satisfy the tax obligations for those employees who elected this option as permitted under the applicable equity plan. As of the grant date, the fair value of shares that were granted during 2020, 2019 and 2018 was $7,028,000, $5,672,000 and $4,223,000, respectively. As of the vesting date, the fair value of shares that vested during 2020, 2019 and 2018 was $11,754,000, $6,662,000 and $5,142,000, respectively.\n\nDoes\tnot\tinclude\tthe\trestricted\tshares\tthat\tmay\tbe\tearned\tif\tthe\tperformance\tgoals\testablished\tin\t2018\tand\t2019\tfor\tlong-term\tperformance\tand\tin\t2020\tfor\tannual\tand\tlong-term\tperformance\tare\tachieved.\tDepending\ton\tthe\tactual\tlevel\tof achievement\tof\tthe\tgoals\tat\tthe\tend\tof\tthe\topen\tperformance\tperiods,\tthe\tnumber\tof\tshares\tearned\tcould\trange\tfrom\tzero\tto\t109,884. (1)\n\nFollowing is a vesting schedule of the total unvested shares as of December 31, 2020:\n\n## Directors Equity Awards\n\nThe Board of Directors has adopted a policy under the 2013 Equity Plan pursuant to which awards will be made to non-employee Directors. The current policy provides that the Company shall automatically award an annual retainer share award to each non-employee Director who has been elected or reelected as a member of the Board of Directors at the Annual Meeting. The number of shares shall be equal to $100,000 divided by the fair market value of a share on the date of such election. If a non-employee Director is elected or appointed to the Board of Directors other than at an Annual Meeting of the Company, the annual retainer share award shall be pro rated. The policy also provides that each new non-employee Director appointed or elected will receive an automatic award of restricted shares of Common Stock on the effective date of election or appointment equal to $25,000 divided by the fair market value of the Company's Common Stock on such date. These restricted shares will vest over a four-year period upon the performance of future service as a Director, subject to certain exceptions.\n\nDirectors were issued 8,182 shares, 6,384 shares and 8,478 shares of common stock as annual retainer awards for 2020, 2019 and 2018, respectively.\n\nDuring the third quarter of 2020, 208 shares were granted to a newly elected non-employee Director subject only to continued service as of the vesting date. The shares, which have a grant date fair value of $120.39 per share, will vest 25% per year on July 13 in years 2021, 2022, 2023 and 2024. The shares are being expensed on a straight-line basis over the remaining service period.\n\n75", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "EASTGROUP PROPERTIES, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\nrestricted stock compensation for employees and directors that is expected to be recognized over a weighted average period of 2.7 years.\n\nFollowing is a summary of the total restricted shares granted, forfeited and delivered (vested) to employees with the related weighted average grant date fair value share prices for 2020, 2019 and 2018. Of the shares that vested in 2020, 2019 and 2018, 36,445 shares, 28,955 shares and 23,824 shares, respectively, were withheld by the Company to satisfy the tax obligations for those employees who elected this option as permitted under the applicable equity plan. As of the grant date, the fair value of shares that were granted during 2020, 2019 and 2018 was $7,028,000, $5,672,000 and $4,223,000, respectively. As of the vesting date, the fair value of shares that vested during 2020, 2019 and 2018 was $11,754,000, $6,662,000 and $5,142,000, respectively.\n\nDoes not include the restricted shares that may be earned if the performance goals established in 2018 and 2019 for long-term performance and in 2020 for annual and long-term performance are achieved. Depending on the actual level of achievement of the goals at the end of the open performance periods, the number of shares earned could range from zero to 109,884. (1) \n\nFollowing is a vesting schedule of the total unvested shares as of December 31, 2020:\n\n## Directors Equity Awards The Board of Directors has adopted a policy under the 2013 Equity Plan pursuant to which awards will be made to non-employee Directors. The current policy provides that the Company shall automatically award an annual retainer\n\nDirectors Equity Awards The Board of Directors has adopted a policy under the 2013 Equity Plan pursuant to which awards will be made to non-employee Directors. The current policy provides that the Company shall automatically award an annual retainer share award to each non-employee Director who has been elected or reelected as a member of the Board of Directors at the Annual Meeting. The number of shares shall be equal to $100,000 divided by the fair market value of a share on the date of such election. If a non-employee Director is elected or appointed to the Board of Directors other than at an Annual Meeting of the Company, the annual retainer share award shall be pro rated. The policy also provides that each new non-employee Director appointed or elected will receive an automatic award of restricted shares of Common Stock on the effective date of election or appointment equal to $25,000 divided by the fair market value of the Company's Common Stock on such date. These restricted shares will vest over a four-year period upon the performance of future service as a Director, subject to certain exceptions.\n\nDirectors were issued 8,182 shares, 6,384 shares and 8,478 shares of common stock as annual retainer awards for 2020, 2019 and 2018, respectively.\n\nDuring the third quarter of 2020, 208 shares were granted to a newly elected non-employee Director subject only to continued service as of the vesting date. The shares, which have a grant date fair value of $120.39 per share, will vest 25% per year on July 13 in years 2021, 2022, 2023 and 2024. The shares are being expensed on a straight-line basis over the remaining service period.\n\n75" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9535739283023111, + "doc_id": "effad1423977e0ff3eaedbaac18a061c5bd9fcbb183ce61e7e15a8a0ab95aa44", + "edit_distance": 0.8533653846153846, + "f1_score": 0.9952, + "meteor": 0.6746927041104821, + "precision": 0.9967948717948718, + "pred_md": "## Table of Contents\n\nThird parties may also assert claims against Applied and its products. Claims that Applied's products infringe the rights of others, whether or not meritorious, can be expensive and time-consuming to defend and resolve, and may divert the efforts and attention of management and personnel. The inability to obtain rights to use third party intellectual property on commercially reasonable terms could have an adverse impact on Applied's business. In addition, Applied may face claims based on the theft or unauthorized use or disclosure of third-party trade secrets and other confidential business information. Any such incidents and claims could severely harm Applied's business and reputation, result in significant expenses, harm its competitive position, and prevent Applied from selling certain products, all of which could have a significant adverse impact on Applied's business and results of operations.\n\n## Applied is exposed to risks related to cybersecurity threats and incidents.\n\nIn the conduct of its business, Applied collects, uses, transmits and stores data on information technology systems, including systems owned and maintained by Applied or third party providers. These data include confidential information and intellectual property belonging to Applied or its customers or other business partners, as well as personally-identifiable information of individuals. All information systems are subject to disruption, breach or failure. Applied has experienced, and expects to continue to be subject to, cybersecurity threats and incidents ranging from employee error or misuse to individual attempts to gain unauthorized access to these information systems, to sophisticated and targeted measures known as advanced persistent threats, none of which have been material to the Company to date. Applied devotes significant resources to network security, data encryption and other measures to protect its systems and data from unauthorized access or misuse. However, depending on their nature and scope, cybersecurity incidents could result in business disruption; the misappropriation of intellectual property, and corruption or loss of confidential information and critical data (Applied's and that of third parties); reputational damage; litigation with third parties; diminution in the value of Applied's investment in research, development and engineering; data privacy issues; and increased cybersecurity protection and remediation costs. Compliance with, and changes to, laws and regulations concerning privacy and information security could result in significant expense, and any failure to comply could result in proceedings against Applied by regulatory authorities or other third parties.\n\n## Risks Related to Legal and Compliance\n\n## Applied is exposed to risks associated with operating in jurisdictions with complex and changing tax laws.\n\nApplied is subject to income taxes in the United States and foreign jurisdictions. Significant judgment is required to determine and estimate worldwide tax liabilities. Applied's provision for income taxes and effective tax rates could be affected by numerous factors, including changes in applicable tax laws, interpretations of applicable tax laws, amount and composition of pre-tax income in jurisdictions with differing tax rates, and valuation of deferred tax assets. An increase in Applied's provision for income taxes and effective tax rate could have a material adverse impact on Applied's results of operations and financial condition.\n\nConsistent with the international nature of its business, Applied conducts certain manufacturing, supply chain, and other operations in Asia, bringing these activities closer to customers and reducing operating costs. In certain foreign jurisdictions, conditional reduced income tax rates have been granted to Applied. To obtain the benefit of these tax incentives, Applied must meet requirements relating to various activities. Applied's ability to realize benefits from these incentives could be materially affected if, among other things, applicable requirements are not met or Applied incurs net losses in these jurisdictions.\n\nIn addition, Applied is subject to examination by the U.S. Internal Revenue Service and other tax authorities, and from time to time amends previously filed tax returns. Applied regularly assesses the likelihood of favorable or unfavorable outcomes resulting from these examinations and amendments to determine the adequacy of its provision for income taxes, which requires estimates and judgments. Although Applied believes its tax estimates are reasonable, there can be no assurance that the tax authorities will agree with such estimates. Applied may have to engage in litigation to achieve the results reflected in the estimates, which may be time-consuming and expensive. There can be no assurance that Applied will be successful or that any final determination will not be materially different from the treatment reflected in Applied's historical income tax provisions and effective tax rates.\n\n27", + "recall": 0.9936102236421726, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## Applied is exposed to risks related to cybersecurity threats and incidents.\n\n## Risks Related to Legal and Compliance\n\n## Applied is exposed to risks associated with operating in jurisdictions with complex and changing tax laws.\n\n27\n\nIn addition, Applied is subject to examination by the U.S. Internal Revenue Service and other tax authorities, and from time to time amends previously filed tax returns. Applied regularly assesses the likelihood of favorable or unfavorable outcomes resulting from these examinations and amendments to determine the adequacy of its provision for income taxes, which requires estimates and judgments. Although Applied believes its tax estimates are reasonable, there can be no assurance that the tax authorities will agree with such estimates. Applied may have to engage in litigation to achieve the results reflected in the estimates, which may be time-consuming and expensive. There can be no assurance that Applied will be successful or that any final determination will not be materially different from the treatment reflected in Applied’s historical income tax provisions and effective tax rates.\n\nConsistent with the international nature of its business, Applied conducts certain manufacturing, supply chain, and other operations in Asia, bringing these activities closer to customers and reducing operating costs. In certain foreign jurisdictions, conditional reduced income tax rates have been granted to Applied. To obtain the benefit of these tax incentives, Applied must meet requirements relating to various activities. Applied’s ability to realize benefits from these incentives could be materially affected if, among other things, applicable requirements are not met or Applied incurs net losses in these jurisdictions.\n\nApplied is subject to income taxes in the United States and foreign jurisdictions. Significant judgment is required to determine and estimate worldwide tax liabilities. Applied’s provision for income taxes and effective tax rates could be affected by numerous factors, including changes in applicable tax laws, interpretations of applicable tax laws, amount and composition of pre-tax income in jurisdictions with differing tax rates, and valuation of deferred tax assets. An increase in Applied’s provision for income taxes and effective tax rate could have a material adverse impact on Applied’s results of operations and financial condition.\n\nIn the conduct of its business, Applied collects, uses, transmits and stores data on information technology systems, including systems owned and maintained by Applied or third party providers. These data include confidential information and intellectual property belonging to Applied or its customers or other business partners, as well as personally-identifiable information of individuals. All information systems are subject to disruption, breach or failure. Applied has experienced, and expects to continue to be subject to, cybersecurity threats and incidents ranging from employee error or misuse to individual attempts to gain unauthorized access to these information systems, to sophisticated and targeted measures known as advanced persistent threats, none of which have been material to the Company to date. Applied devotes significant resources to network security, data encryption and other measures to protect its systems and data from unauthorized access or misuse. However, depending on their nature and scope, cybersecurity incidents could result in business disruption; the misappropriation of intellectual property, and corruption or loss of confidential information and critical data (Applied’s and that of third parties); reputational damage; litigation with third parties; diminution in the value of Applied’s investment in research, development and engineering; data privacy issues; and increased cybersecurity protection and remediation costs. Compliance with, and changes to, laws and regulations concerning privacy and information security could result in significant expense, and any failure to comply could result in proceedings against Applied by regulatory authorities or other third parties.\n\nThird parties may also assert claims against Applied and its products. Claims that Applied’s products infringe the rights of others, whether or not meritorious, can be expensive and time-consuming to defend and resolve, and may divert the efforts and attention of management and personnel. The inability to obtain rights to use third party intellectual property on commercially reasonable terms could have an adverse impact on Applied’s business. In addition, Applied may face claims based on the theft or unauthorized use or disclosure of third-party trade secrets and other confidential business information. Any such incidents and claims could severely harm Applied’s business and reputation, result in significant expenses, harm its competitive position, and prevent Applied from selling certain products, all of which could have a significant adverse impact on Applied’s business and results of operations." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.980938511060535, + "doc_id": "b177e23e32023727e529f6eeecfd2fbc76627af4a5122604d71938c4459e9c69", + "edit_distance": 0.014617368873602751, + "f1_score": 0.9963636363636362, + "meteor": 0.9861422821955002, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "CP\t2020\tANNUAL\tREPORT\n\nThe Company's compliance with safety and security regulations may result in increased capital expenditures and operating costs. For example, compliance with the Rail Safety Improvement Act of 2008 has resulted in additional capital expenditures associated with the statutorily mandated implementation of PTC. In addition to increased capital expenditures, implementation of such regulations may result in reduced operational efficiency and service levels, as well as increased operating expenses.\n\nThe Company's operations are subject to extensive federal, state, provincial and local environmental laws concerning, among other matters, emissions to the air, land and water and the handling of hazardous materials and wastes. Violation of these laws and regulations can result in significant fines and penalties, as well as other potential impacts on CP's operations. These laws can impose strict, and in some circumstances, joint and several liability on both current and former owners, and on operators of facilities. Such environmental liabilities may also be raised by adjacent landowners or third parties. In addition, in operating a railway, it is possible that releases of hazardous materials during derailments or other accidents may occur that could cause harm to human health or to the environment. Costs of remediation, damages and changes in regulations could materially affect the Company's operating results and reputation. The Company has been, and may in the future be, subject to allegations or findings to the effect that it has violated, or is strictly liable under, environmental laws or regulations. The Company currently has obligations at existing sites for investigation, remediation and monitoring, and will likely have obligations at other sites in the future. The actual costs associated with both current and long-term liabilities may vary from the Company's estimates due to a number of factors including, but not limited to changes in: the content or interpretation of environmental laws and regulations; required remedial actions; technology associated with site investigation or remediation; and the involvement and financial viability of other parties that may be responsible for portions of those liabilities.\n\nThe Company faces competition from other transportation providers and failure to compete effectively could adversely affect financial results. The Company faces significant competition for freight transportation in Canada and the U.S., including competition from other railways, motor carriers, ship and barge operators, and pipelines. Competition is based mainly on quality of service, freight rates and access to markets. Other transportation modes generally use public rights-of-way that are built and maintained by government entities, while CP and other railways must use internal resources to build and maintain their rail networks. Competition with the trucking industry is generally based on freight rates, flexibility of service and transit time performance. Any future improvements or expenditures materially increasing the quality or reducing the cost of alternative modes of transportation, or legislation that eliminates or significantly reduces the burden of the size or weight limitations currently applicable to trucking carriers, could have a material adverse effect on CP's financial results.\n\nThe operations of carriers with which the Company interchanges may adversely affect operations. The Company's ability to provide rail services to customers in Canada and the U.S. also depends upon its ability to maintain cooperative relationships with connecting carriers with respect to, among other matters, revenue division, car supply and locomotive availability, data exchange and communications, reciprocal switching, interchange, and trackage rights. Deterioration in the operations or services provided by connecting carriers, or in the Company's relationship with those connecting carriers, could result in CP's inability to meet customers' demands or require the Company to use alternate train routes, which could result in significant additional costs and network inefficiencies and adversely affect our business, operating results, and financial condition.\n\nThe Company may be subject to litigation and other claims that could result in significant expenditures. By nature of its operations, the Company is exposed to potential for litigation and other claims, including personal injury claims, labour and employment disputes, commercial and contract disputes, environmental liability, freight claims and property damage claims. Accruals are made in accordance with applicable accounting standards and based on an ongoing assessment of the likelihood of success of the claim together with an evaluation of the damages or other monetary relief sought. Material changes to litigation trends, a catastrophic rail incident or series of incidents involving freight loss, property damage, personal injury, environmental liability, or other claims, and other significant matters could have a material adverse impact to the Company's results of operations, financial position and liquidity, in each case, to the extent not covered by insurance.\n\nThe Company may be affected by acts of terrorism, war, or risk of war. CP plays a critical role in the North American transportation system and therefore could become the target for acts of terrorism or war. CP is also involved in the transportation of hazardous materials, which could result in CP's equipment or infrastructure being direct targets or indirect casualties of terrorist attacks. Acts of terrorism, or other similar events, any government response thereto, and war or risk of war could cause significant business interruption to CP and may adversely affect the Company's results of operations, financial condition and liquidity.\n\nSevere weather or natural disasters could result in significant business interruptions and costs to the Company. CP is exposed to severe weather conditions and natural disasters including earthquakes, hurricanes, floods, fires, avalanches, mudslides, extreme temperatures and significant precipitation that may cause business interruptions that can adversely affect the Company's entire rail network. This could result in increased costs, increased liabilities and decreased revenues, which could have a material adverse effect on the Company's results of operations, financial condition, and liquidity. Insurance maintained by the Company to protect against loss of business and other related consequences resulting from these natural occurrences is subject to coverage limitations, depending on the nature of the risk insured. This insurance may not be sufficient to cover all of the Company's damages or damages to others, and may not continue to be available at commercially reasonable rates. Even with insurance, if any natural occurrence leads to a catastrophic interruption of services, the Company may not be able to restore services without a significant interruption in operations.", + "recall": 0.9927536231884058, + "true_md": "CP 2020 ANNUAL REPORT 22\n\nThe Company’s compliance with safety and security regulations may result in increased capital expenditures and operating costs. For example, compliance with the Rail Safety Improvement Act of 2008 has resulted in additional capital expenditures associated with the statutorily mandated implementation of PTC. In addition to increased capital expenditures, implementation of such regulations may result in reduced operational efficiency and service levels, as well as increased operating expenses.\n\nThe Company’s operations are subject to extensive federal, state, provincial and local environmental laws concerning, among other matters, emissions to the air, land and water and the handling of hazardous materials and wastes. Violation of these laws and regulations can result in significant fines and penalties, as well as other potential impacts on CP’s operations. These laws can impose strict, and in some circumstances, joint and several liability on both current and former owners, and on operators of facilities. Such environmental liabilities may also be raised by adjacent landowners or third parties. In addition, in operating a railway, it is possible that releases of hazardous materials during derailments or other accidents may occur that could cause harm to human health or to the environment. Costs of remediation, damages and changes in regulations could materially affect the Company’s operating results and reputation. The Company has been, and may in the future be, subject to allegations or findings to the effect that it has violated, or is strictly liable under, environmental laws or regulations. The Company currently has obligations at existing sites for investigation, remediation and monitoring, and will likely have obligations at other sites in the future. The actual costs associated with both current and long-term liabilities may vary from the Company’s estimates due to a number of factors including, but not limited to changes in: the content or interpretation of environmental laws and regulations; required remedial actions; technology associated with site investigation or remediation; and the involvement and financial viability of other parties that may be responsible for portions of those liabilities.\n\nThe Company faces competition from other transportation providers and failure to compete effectively could adversely affect financial results. The Company faces significant competition for freight transportation in Canada and the U.S., including competition from other railways, motor carriers, ship and barge operators, and pipelines. Competition is based mainly on quality of service, freight rates and access to markets. Other transportation modes generally use public rights-of-way that are built and maintained by government entities, while CP and other railways must use internal resources to build and maintain their rail networks. Competition with the trucking industry is generally based on freight rates, flexibility of service and transit time performance. Any future improvements or expenditures materially increasing the quality or reducing the cost of alternative modes of transportation, or legislation that eliminates or significantly reduces the burden of the size or weight limitations currently applicable to trucking carriers, could have a material adverse effect on CP's financial results.\n\nThe operations of carriers with which the Company interchanges may adversely affect operations. The Company's ability to provide rail services to customers in Canada and the U.S. also depends upon its ability to maintain cooperative relationships with connecting carriers with respect to, among other matters, revenue division, car supply and locomotive availability, data exchange and communications, reciprocal switching, interchange, and trackage rights. Deterioration in the operations or services provided by connecting carriers, or in the Company's relationship with those connecting carriers, could result in CP's inability to meet customers' demands or require the Company to use alternate train routes, which could result in significant additional costs and network inefficiencies and adversely affect our business, operating results, and financial condition.\n\nThe Company may be subject to litigation and other claims that could result in significant expenditures. By nature of its operations, the Company is exposed to potential for litigation and other claims, including personal injury claims, labour and employment disputes, commercial and contract disputes, environmental liability, freight claims and property damage claims. Accruals are made in accordance with applicable accounting standards and based on an ongoing assessment of the likelihood of success of the claim together with an evaluation of the damages or other monetary relief sought. Material changes to litigation trends, a catastrophic rail incident or series of incidents involving freight loss, property damage, personal injury, environmental liability, or other claims, and other significant matters could have a material adverse impact to the Company's results of operations, financial position and liquidity, in each case, to the extent not covered by insurance.\n\nThe Company may be affected by acts of terrorism, war, or risk of war. CP plays a critical role in the North American transportation system and therefore could become the target for acts of terrorism or war. CP is also involved in the transportation of hazardous materials, which could result in CP's equipment or infrastructure being direct targets or indirect casualties of terrorist attacks. Acts of terrorism, or other similar events, any government response thereto, and war or risk of war could cause significant business interruption to CP and may adversely affect the Company’s results of operations, financial condition and liquidity.\n\nSevere weather or natural disasters could result in significant business interruptions and costs to the Company. CP is exposed to severe weather conditions and natural disasters including earthquakes, hurricanes, floods, fires, avalanches, mudslides, extreme temperatures and significant precipitation that may cause business interruptions that can adversely affect the Company’s entire rail network. This could result in increased costs, increased liabilities and decreased revenues, which could have a material adverse effect on the Company’s results of operations, financial condition, and liquidity. Insurance maintained by the Company to protect against loss of business and other related consequences resulting from these natural occurrences is subject to coverage limitations, depending on the nature of the risk insured. This insurance may not be sufficient to cover all of the Company's damages or damages to others, and may not continue to be available at commercially reasonable rates. Even with insurance, if any natural occurrence leads to a catastrophic interruption of services, the Company may not be able to restore services without a significant interruption in operations." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9300480248939487, + "doc_id": "8d9213052aef7c2fbce13e5885e623ec41cc40437fc06fb2d543dbcb7b538d17", + "edit_distance": 0.19419237749546278, + "f1_score": 0.9819004524886878, + "meteor": 0.9204918101396178, + "precision": 0.9863636363636363, + "pred_md": "Merger\tintegration\texpenses\tincluded\tcosts\tassociated\twith\tintegration\tprojects,\tprincipally\tour\ttechnical\toperations,\tflight\tattendant,\thuman resources\tand\tpayroll\tsystems. (7)\n\n## Nonoperating Results\n\nTable of Contents\n\nInterest income decreased in 2020 compared to 2019 primarily as a result of lower returns on our short-term investments. Interest expense, net increased in 2020 compared to 2019 primarily due to the issuance of debt and lower capitalized interest offset in part by lower interest expense on our variable-rate debt.\n\nIn 2020, other nonoperating income, net included $329 million of non-service related pension and other postretirement benefit plan income. This income was offset in part by $170 million of net special charges principally for mark-to-market unrealized losses associated with our equity investment in China Southern Airlines and certain treasury rate lock derivative instruments and $24 million of net foreign currency losses, primarily associated with losses from Latin American currencies.\n\nIn 2019, other nonoperating income, net principally included $183 million of non-service related pension and other postretirement benefit plan income. This income was offset in part by $32 million of net foreign currency losses, primarily associated with losses from Latin American currencies.\n\nThe increase in non-service related pension and other postretirement benefit plan income in 2020 as compared to 2019 is principally due to an increase in the expected return on pension plan assets.\n\n## Income Taxes\n\nIn 2020, we recorded an income tax benefit of $2.6 billion at an effective rate of approximately 22%. Substantially all of our income or loss before income taxes is attributable to the United States. At December 31, 2020, we had approximately $16.5 billion of federal NOLs available to reduce future federal taxable income, of which $8.5 billion will expire beginning in 2023 if unused and $8.0 billion can be carried forward indefinitely. We also had approximately $5.0 billion of NOL Carryforwards to reduce future state taxable income at December 31, 2020, which will expire in taxable years 2020 through 2040 if unused.\n\nIn 2019, we recorded an income tax provision of $570 million at an effective rate of approximately 25%, which was substantially non-cash.\n\nSee Note 7 to AAG's Consolidated Financial Statements in Part II, Item 8A for additional information on income taxes.\n\n## American's Results of Operations\n\nAs discussed above, American's results of operations for 2020 were significantly impacted by the COVID-19 pandemic. As a result, the comparison of American's 2020 financial results to 2019 are largely not meaningful. Refer to the \"2020 Financial Overview\" above for discussion of American's 2020 financial results and the impact of the COVID-19 pandemic on American's business.\n\nFor a comparison of the 2019 to 2018 reporting periods, see Part II, Item 7. Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations - ' American's Results of Operations 2019 Compared to 2018' -of American's 2019 Form 10-K.\n\n73", + "recall": 0.9774774774774775, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\nInterest income decreased in 2020 compared to 2019 primarily as a result of lower returns on our short-term investments. Interest expense, net increased in 2020 compared to 2019 primarily due to the issuance of debt and lower capitalized interest offset in part by lower interest expense on our variable-rate debt.\n\nIn 2020, other nonoperating income, net included $329 million of non-service related pension and other postretirement benefit plan income. This income was offset in part by $170 million of net special charges principally for mark-to-market unrealized losses associated with our equity investment in China Southern Airlines and certain treasury rate lock derivative instruments and $24 million of net foreign currency losses, primarily associated with losses from Latin American currencies.\n\nIn 2019, other nonoperating income, net principally included $183 million of non-service related pension and other postretirement benefit plan income. This income was offset in part by $32 million of net foreign currency losses, primarily associated with losses from Latin American currencies.\n\nThe increase in non-service related pension and other postretirement benefit plan income in 2020 as compared to 2019 is principally due to an increase in the expected return on pension plan assets.\n\nIn 2020, we recorded an income tax benefit of $2.6 billion at an effective rate of approximately 22%. Substantially all of our income or loss before income taxes is attributable to the United States. At December 31, 2020, we had approximately $16.5 billion of federal NOLs available to reduce future federal taxable income, of which $8.5 billion will expire beginning in 2023 if unused and $8.0 billion can be carried forward indefinitely. We also had approximately $5.0 billion of NOL Carryforwards to reduce future state taxable income at December 31, 2020, which will expire in taxable years 2020 through 2040 if unused.\n\nIn 2019, we recorded an income tax provision of $570 million at an effective rate of approximately 25%, which was substantially non-cash.\n\nSee Note 7 to AAG’s Consolidated Financial Statements in Part II, Item 8A for additional information on income taxes.\n\nAs discussed above, American’s results of operations for 2020 were significantly impacted by the COVID-19 pandemic. As a result, the comparison of American’s 2020 financial results to 2019 are largely not meaningful. Refer to the \"2020 Financial Overview\" above for discussion of American’s 2020 financial results and the impact of the COVID-19 pandemic on American’s business.\n\nFor a comparison of the 2019 to 2018 reporting periods, see Part II, Item 7. Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations – “ American’s Results of Operations – 2019 Compared to 2018” of American’s 2019 Form 10-K.\n\n73\n\n## American’s Results of Operations\n\n## Income Taxes\n\n- Merger integration expenses included costs associated with integration projects, principally our technical operations, flight attendant, human resources and payroll systems. (7)\n\n## Nonoperating Results" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8200597688754523, + "doc_id": "37fff5a88386d05db7b47a6f4d5ad70b9bdb2fb0f33f8e9f6e523b28eecee171", + "edit_distance": 0.7021276595744681, + "f1_score": 0.9918032786885246, + "meteor": 0.7514281465807952, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "CP\t2020\tANNUAL\tREPORT\n\n## Coal\n\nThe Company's Coal business represented approximately 18% of Bulk revenues, and was 8% of total Freight revenues in 2020.\n\nThe following charts compare the percentage of the Company's Coal freight revenues generated from Canadian and U.S. shipments in 2020, 2019 and 2018:\n\n## 2020 Coal Revenues\n\n## 2019 Coal Revenues\n\n(18% of Bulk Revenues; 8% of Freight Revenues)\n\n(22% of Bulk Revenues; 9% of Freight Revenues)\n\n2018 Coal Revenues (23% of Bulk Revenues; 9% of Freight Revenues)\n\nIn Canada, CP handles mostly metallurgical coal destined for export for use in the steelmaking process. CP's Canadian coal traffic originates mainly from Teck Resources Limited's mines in southeastern B.C. CP moves coal west from these mines to port terminals for export to world markets (Pacific Rim, Europe and South America), and east for the U.S. Midwest markets.\n\nIn the U.S., CP moves primarily thermal coal from connecting railways, serving the thermal coal fields in the Powder River Basin in Montana and Wyoming, which is delivered to power-generating facilities in the U.S. Midwest.\n\n## Potash\n\nThe Company's Potash business represented approximately 15% of Bulk revenues, and was 7% of total Freight revenues in 2020.\n\nThe following charts compare the percentage of the Company's Potash freight revenues generated from export and domestic potash shipments in 2020, 2019 and 2018:\n\n## 2020 Potash Revenues\n\n## 2019 Potash Revenues\n\n## 2018 Potash Revenues\n\n(15% of Bulk Revenues; 7% of Freight Revenues)\n\n(15% of Bulk Revenues; 6% of Freight Revenues)\n\n(16% of Bulk Revenues; 7% of Freight Revenues)\n\nThe Company's Potash traffic moves mainly from Saskatchewan to offshore markets through the ports of Vancouver, Portland, and Thunder Bay, and to markets in the U.S. All potash shipments for export beyond Canada and the U.S. are marketed by Canpotex Limited and K+S Potash Canada. Canpotex is an", + "recall": 0.983739837398374, + "true_md": "9 CP 2020 ANNUAL REPORT\n\nIn Canada, CP handles mostly metallurgical coal destined for export for use in the steelmaking process. CP’s Canadian coal traffic originates mainly from Teck Resources Limited’s mines in southeastern B.C. CP moves coal west from these mines to port terminals for export to world markets (Pacific Rim, Europe and South America), and east for the U.S. Midwest markets.\n\nIn the U.S., CP moves primarily thermal coal from connecting railways, serving the thermal coal fields in the Powder River Basin in Montana and Wyoming, which is delivered to power-generating facilities in the U.S. Midwest.\n\nPotash The Company's Potash business represented approximately 15% of Bulk revenues, and was 7% of total Freight revenues in 2020.\n\nThe following charts compare the percentage of the Company's Potash freight revenues generated from export and domestic potash shipments in 2020, 2019 and 2018:\n\nThe following charts compare the percentage of the Company's Coal freight revenues generated from Canadian and U.S. shipments in 2020, 2019 and 2018:\n\nCoal The Company’s Coal business represented approximately 18% of Bulk revenues, and was 8% of total Freight revenues in 2020.\n\n## Coal The Company’s Coal business represented approximately 18% of Bulk revenues, and was 8% of total Freight revenues in 2020.\n\n## Potash The Company's Potash business represented approximately 15% of Bulk revenues, and was 7% of total Freight revenues in 2020.\n\nThe Company’s Potash traffic moves mainly from Saskatchewan to offshore markets through the ports of Vancouver, Portland, and Thunder Bay, and to markets in the U.S. All potash shipments for export beyond Canada and the U.S. are marketed by Canpotex Limited and K+S Potash Canada. Canpotex is an\n\n2020 Coal Revenues (18% of Bulk Revenues; 8% of Freight Revenues)\n\n2019 Coal Revenues (22% of Bulk Revenues; 9% of Freight Revenues)\n\n2018 Coal Revenues (23% of Bulk Revenues; 9% of Freight Revenues)\n\n2020 Potash Revenues (15% of Bulk Revenues; 7% of Freight Revenues)\n\n2019 Potash Revenues (15% of Bulk Revenues; 6% of Freight Revenues)\n\n2018 Potash Revenues (16% of Bulk Revenues; 7% of Freight Revenues)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7694297399066489, + "doc_id": "90c7e240bcc26ac872a251c00d95388e8c06877136f8b16ddba510d74b8b61af", + "edit_distance": 0.2222222222222222, + "f1_score": 0.896551724137931, + "meteor": 0.9792302106027597, + "precision": 0.8125, + "pred_md": "Exhibit Number\n\nDescription\n\n*\t\t\t\tIndicates\ta\tmanagement\tcontract\tor\tany\tcompensatory\tplan,\tcontract\tor\tarrangement.\n\n44", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "44\n\n* Indicates a management contract or any compensatory plan, contract or arrangement." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9598541398250701, + "doc_id": "ac01c207519b9aa418615233f171beacc599061298295b497b90b2f6a6a077a6", + "edit_distance": 0.24413145539906103, + "f1_score": 0.9752808988764046, + "meteor": 0.9709313469014544, + "precision": 0.9774774774774775, + "pred_md": "## Table of Contents\n\nfacilities comprise approximately 8,971,758 square feet of owned and 3,438,562 square feet of leased space. Sales offices and distribution centers included in the total square footage are also located throughout the world.\n\nOperations in each of BD's business segments are conducted at both U.S. and international locations. Particularly in the international marketplace, facilities often serve more than one business segment and are used for multiple purposes, such as administrative/sales, manufacturing and/or warehousing/distribution. BD generally seeks to own its manufacturing facilities, although some are leased.\n\nBD believes that its facilities are of good construction and in good physical condition, are suitable and adequate for the operations conducted at those facilities, and are, with minor exceptions, fully utilized and operating at normal capacity.\n\nThe U.S. facilities are located in Alabama, Arizona, California, Connecticut, Florida, Georgia, Illinois, Indiana, Maryland, Massachusetts, Minnesota, Missouri, Montana, Nebraska, New Jersey, New York, North Carolina, Ohio, Oklahoma, Oregon, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island, South Carolina, Tennessee, Texas, Utah, Virginia, Washington, D.C., Washington, and Puerto Rico.\n\nThe international facilities are as follows:\n\n- -Europe, Middle East, Africa , which includes facilities in Austria, Belgium, Bosnia, the Czech Republic, Denmark, England, Finland, France, Germany, Ghana, Greece, Hungary, Ireland, Israel, Italy, Kenya, Luxembourg, Netherlands, Norway, Pakistan, Poland, Portugal, Russia, Saudi Arabia, South Africa, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Turkey, the United Arab Emirates and Zambia.\n- -Greater Asia , which includes facilities in Australia, Bangladesh, China, India, Indonesia, Japan, Malaysia, New Zealand, the Philippines, Singapore, South Korea, Taiwan, Thailand and Vietnam.\n- -Latin America , which includes facilities in Argentina, Brazil, Chile, Colombia, Mexico, Peru and the Dominican Republic.\n- -Canada .\n\n## Item 3. Legal Proceedings.\n\nInformation with respect to certain legal proceedings is included in Note 5 to the consolidated financial statements contained in Item 8. Financial Statements and Supplementary Data, and is incorporated herein by reference.\n\n## Item 4. Mine Safety Disclosures.\n\nNot applicable.\n\n19", + "recall": 0.9730941704035875, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\nfacilities comprise approximately 8,971,758 square feet of owned and 3,438,562 square feet of leased space. Sales offices and distribution centers included in the total square footage are also located throughout the world.\n\nOperations in each of BD’s business segments are conducted at both U.S. and international locations. Particularly in the international marketplace, facilities often serve more than one business segment and are used for multiple purposes, such as administrative/sales, manufacturing and/or warehousing/distribution. BD generally seeks to own its manufacturing facilities, although some are leased.\n\nBD believes that its facilities are of good construction and in good physical condition, are suitable and adequate for the operations conducted at those facilities, and are, with minor exceptions, fully utilized and operating at normal capacity.\n\nThe U.S. facilities are located in Alabama, Arizona, California, Connecticut, Florida, Georgia, Illinois, Indiana, Maryland, Massachusetts, Minnesota, Missouri, Montana, Nebraska, New Jersey, New York, North Carolina, Ohio, Oklahoma, Oregon, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island, South Carolina, Tennessee, Texas, Utah, Virginia, Washington, D.C., Washington, and Puerto Rico.\n\nThe international facilities are as follows:\n\n- Greater Asia , which includes facilities in Australia, Bangladesh, China, India, Indonesia, Japan, Malaysia, New Zealand, the Philippines, Singapore, South Korea, Taiwan, Thailand and Vietnam.\n\n- Europe, Middle East, Africa , which includes facilities in Austria, Belgium, Bosnia, the Czech Republic, Denmark, England, Finland, France, Germany, Ghana, Greece, Hungary, Ireland, Israel, Italy, Kenya, Luxembourg, Netherlands, Norway, Pakistan, Poland, Portugal, Russia, Saudi Arabia, South Africa, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Turkey, the United Arab Emirates and Zambia.\n\n- Latin America , which includes facilities in Argentina, Brazil, Chile, Colombia, Mexico, Peru and the Dominican Republic.\n\n- Canada .\n\nInformation with respect to certain legal proceedings is included in Note 5 to the consolidated financial statements contained in Item 8. Financial Statements and Supplementary Data, and is incorporated herein by reference.\n\nNot applicable.\n\n19\n\n## Item 4. Mine Safety Disclosures.\n\n## Item 3. Legal Proceedings." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8323275305113782, + "doc_id": "4b622b4d7e185243e193f72a2f423c70d1e3606160d890e4813ce890d2db5627", + "edit_distance": 0.8144927536231884, + "f1_score": 0.9829787234042554, + "meteor": 0.6292299543455787, + "precision": 0.9871794871794872, + "pred_md": "## Table of Contents\n\n## Item 9A: Controls and Procedures\n\n## Disclosure Controls and Procedures\n\nAs of the end of the period covered by this report, management of Applied conducted an evaluation, under the supervision and with the participation of Applied's Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer, of the effectiveness of Applied's disclosure controls and procedures, as such term is defined in Rule 13a-15(e) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (the Exchange Act). Based upon that evaluation, Applied's Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer concluded that Applied's disclosure controls and procedures were effective as of the end of the period covered by this report in ensuring that information required to be disclosed was recorded, processed, summarized and reported within the time periods specified in the SEC's rules and forms, and to provide reasonable assurance that information required to be disclosed by Applied in such reports is accumulated and communicated to the Company's management, including its Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer, as appropriate to allow timely decisions regarding required disclosure.\n\n## Management's Report on Internal Control over Financial Reporting\n\nApplied's management is responsible for establishing and maintaining adequate internal control over financial reporting, as such term is defined in Rule 13a-15(f) of the Exchange Act. Under the supervision and with the participation of Applied's Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer, management of Applied conducted an evaluation of the effectiveness of Applied's internal control over financial reporting based upon the framework in 'Internal Control - Integrated Framework (2013)' issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission. Based on that evaluation, Applied's management concluded that Applied's internal control over financial reporting was effective as of October 25, 2020.\n\nKPMG LLP, an independent registered public accounting firm, has audited the consolidated financial statements included in this Form 10-K and, as part of the audit, has issued a report, included herein, on the effectiveness of Applied's internal control over financial reporting as of October 25, 2020.\n\n## Changes in Internal Control over Financial Reporting\n\nDue to the ongoing COVID-19 pandemic, Applied continues to maintain workplace flexibility such as working remotely where possible to reduce the number of people who are on campus each day. Business continuity plans are in effect in order to mitigate potential impact on Applied's control environment and its operating and disclosure controls and procedures. The design of business continuity plans, which include remote access to secure data when needed, allow for remote and reliable execution of Applied's operating and disclosure controls and procedures.\n\nApplied evaluated the impact of the ongoing COVID-19 pandemic on its internal control over financial reporting. During the fourth quarter of fiscal 2020, there were no changes in the internal control over financial reporting that materially affected, or are reasonably likely to materially affect, Applied's internal control over financial reporting.\n\n## Inherent Limitations of Disclosure Controls and Procedures and Internal Control over Financial Reporting\n\nIt should be noted that any system of controls, however well designed and operated, can provide only reasonable, and not absolute, assurance that the objectives of the system will be met. In addition, the design of any control system is based in part upon certain assumptions about the likelihood of future events.\n\n## Item 9B: Other Information\n\nNone\n\n56", + "recall": 0.9788135593220338, + "true_md": "## Table of Contents\n\n## Disclosure Controls and Procedures\n\n## Management’s Report on Internal Control over Financial Reporting\n\n## Changes in Internal Control over Financial Reporting\n\n## Inherent Limitations of Disclosure Controls and Procedures and Internal Control over Financial Reporting\n\n- Item 9B: Other Information\n\n- Item 9A: Controls and Procedures\n\n56\n\nNone\n\nIt should be noted that any system of controls, however well designed and operated, can provide only reasonable, and not absolute, assurance that the objectives of the system will be met. In addition, the design of any control system is based in part upon certain assumptions about the likelihood of future events.\n\nApplied evaluated the impact of the ongoing COVID-19 pandemic on its internal control over financial reporting. During the fourth quarter of fiscal 2020, there were no changes in the internal control over financial reporting that materially affected, or are reasonably likely to materially affect, Applied’s internal control over financial reporting.\n\nDue to the ongoing COVID-19 pandemic, Applied continues to maintain workplace flexibility such as working remotely where possible to reduce the number of people who are on campus each day. Business continuity plans are in effect in order to mitigate potential impact on Applied’s control environment and its operating and disclosure controls and procedures. The design of business continuity plans, which include remote access to secure data when needed, allow for remote and reliable execution of Applied’s operating and disclosure controls and procedures.\n\nKPMG LLP, an independent registered public accounting firm, has audited the consolidated financial statements included in this Form 10-K and, as part of the audit, has issued a report, included herein, on the effectiveness of Applied’s internal control over financial reporting as of October 25, 2020.\n\nApplied’s management is responsible for establishing and maintaining adequate internal control over financial reporting, as such term is defined in Rule 13a-15(f) of the Exchange Act. Under the supervision and with the participation of Applied’s Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer, management of Applied conducted an evaluation of the effectiveness of Applied’s internal control over financial reporting based upon the framework in “Internal Control — Integrated Framework (2013)” issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission. Based on that evaluation, Applied’s management concluded that Applied’s internal control over financial reporting was effective as of October 25,\n\nframework in “Internal Control — Integrated Framework (2013)” issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission. Based on that evaluation, Applied’s management concluded that Applied’s internal control over financial reporting was effective as of October 25, 2020.\n\nAs of the end of the period covered by this report, management of Applied conducted an evaluation, under the supervision and with the participation of Applied’s Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer, of the effectiveness of Applied’s disclosure controls and procedures, as such term is defined in Rule 13a-15(e) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (the Exchange Act). Based upon that evaluation, Applied’s Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer concluded that Applied’s disclosure controls and procedures were effective as of the end of the period covered by this report in ensuring that information required to be disclosed was recorded, processed, summarized and reported within the time periods specified in the SEC’s rules and forms, and to provide reasonable assurance that information required to be disclosed by Applied in such reports is accumulated and communicated to the Company’s management, including its Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer, as appropriate to allow timely decisions regarding required disclosure." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9625484436021717, + "doc_id": "21081172aae568228aefec04443cb20752f9e4ce22f2033d9c13315b981257a2", + "edit_distance": 0.10714285714285714, + "f1_score": 0.9844559585492227, + "meteor": 0.9837781987278278, + "precision": 0.9844559585492227, + "pred_md": "Year Ended December 31,\n\nWe use the spot method to measure the effectiveness of both of the net investment hedges and evaluate the effectiveness on a prospective basis at the beginning of each quarter. We did not record any ineffectiveness for the years ended December 31, 2020, 2019 or 2018.\n\n## 10. FAIR VALUE OF FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS\n\nOur financial instruments are presented at fair value in our consolidated balance sheets. Fair value is defined as the price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer a liability in an orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement date. Where available, fair value is based on observable market prices or parameters or derived from such prices or parameters. Where observable prices or inputs are not available, valuation models may be applied. Assets and liabilities recorded at fair value in our consolidated balance sheets are categorized based upon the level of judgment associated with the inputs used to measure their fair values. Recurring fair value measurements are limited to investments in derivative instruments and some equity securities. The fair value measurements of our derivative instruments are determined using models that maximize the use of the observable market inputs including interest rate curves and both forward and spot prices for currencies, and are classified as Level II under the fair value hierarchy. The fair values of our derivatives are included above in Note 9. The fair value measurements of our investments in equity securities are determined using quoted market prices and are classified as Level I. The fair values of our investments in equity securities, and changes thereto, are immaterial to our consolidated financial position and results of operations.\n\nThe carrying value of our debt is included in Note 13 and, except for the Senior Notes, approximates fair value. The estimated fair value of the Senior Notes is based on Level I quoted market rates. The estimated fair value of our Senior Notes at December 31, 2020 was $1,778.4 million compared to the carrying value of $1,701.5 million. The carrying amounts of our other financial instruments (i.e., cash and cash equivalents, accounts receivable, net and accounts payable) approximated fair value due to their short-term nature at December 31, 2020 and December 31, 2019.\n\n## 11. DETAILS OF CERTAIN CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET CAPTIONS\n\nThe following tables present financial information of certain consolidated balance sheet captions.\n\nAccounts Receivable, net - Accounts receivable, net were:\n\n87", + "recall": 0.9844559585492227, + "true_md": "We use the spot method to measure the effectiveness of both of the net investment hedges and evaluate the effectiveness on a prospective basis at the beginning of each quarter. W e did not record any ineffectiveness for the years ended December 31, 2020, 2019 or 2018.\n\nOur financial instruments are presented at fair value in our consolidated balance sheets. Fair value is defined as the price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer a liability in an orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement date. Where available, fair value is based on observable market prices or parameters or derived from such prices or parameters. Where observable prices or inputs are not available, valuation models may be applied. Assets and liabilities recorded at fair value in our consolidated balance sheets are categorized based upon the level of judgment associated with the inputs used to measure their fair values. Recurring fair value measurements are limited to investments in derivative instruments and some equity securities. The fair value measurements of our derivative instruments are determined using models that maximize the use of the observable market inputs including interest rate curves and both forward and spot prices for currencies, and are classified as Level II under the fair value hierarchy. The fair values of our derivatives are included above in Note 9. The fair value measurements of our investments in equity securities are determined using quoted market prices and are classified as Level I. The fair values of our investments in equity securities, and changes thereto, are immaterial to our consolidated financial position and results of operations.\n\nThe carrying value of our debt is included in Note 13 and, except for the Senior Notes, approximates fair value. The estimated fair value of the Senior Notes is based on Level I quoted market rates. The estimated fair value of our Senior Notes at December 31, 2020 was $1,778.4 million compared to the carrying value of $1,701.5 million. The carrying amounts of our other financial instruments (i.e., cash and cash equivalents, accounts receivable, net and accounts payable) approximated fair value due to their short-term nature at December 31, 2020 and December 31, 2019.\n\nThe following tables present financial information of certain consolidated balance sheet captions.\n\n## 10. FAIR VALUE OF FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS\n\n## 11. DETAILS OF CERTAIN CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET CAPTIONS\n\nAccounts Receivable, net — Accounts receivable, net were:\n\n87" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9501503746439582, + "doc_id": "b0d2833116d104fd0af3bd6a15be242afdce27a0e0483cf93dea1d5ad20c7d0c", + "edit_distance": 0.5034324942791762, + "f1_score": 0.9924812030075189, + "meteor": 0.8660140556552987, + "precision": 0.9939759036144579, + "pred_md": "## Table of Contents\n\n## Item 1A: Risk Factors\n\nThe following risk factors could materially and adversely affect Applied's business, financial condition or results of operations and cause reputational harm, and should be carefully considered in evaluating the Company and its business, in addition to other information presented elsewhere in this report.\n\n## Risks Related to the COVID-19 Pandemic\n\n## The ongoing COVID-19 pandemic and global measures taken in response thereto have adversely impacted, and may continue to adversely impact, Applied's operations and financial results.\n\nThe ongoing COVID-19 pandemic and measures taken in response by governments and businesses worldwide to contain its spread, including quarantines, facility closures, travel and logistics restrictions, border controls, and shelter in place or stay at home and social distancing orders, have adversely impacted and are expected to continue to adversely impact Applied's supply chain, manufacturing, logistics, workforce and operations, as well as the operations of Applied's customers, suppliers and partners globally. There is considerable uncertainty regarding the duration, scope and severity of the pandemic and the impacts on our business and the global economy from the effects of the ongoing pandemic and response measures. While Applied continues to see progress in the recovery within its supply chain, travel and logistics restrictions, shelter-in-place orders and other measures, including working remotely, social distancing and other policies implemented in foreign and domestic sites to protect the health and safety of employees, have resulted in, and are expected to continue to result in, transportation disruptions (such as reduced availability of air transport, port closures, and increased border controls or closures), production delays and capacity limitations at Applied and some of its customers, suppliers and partners, as well as reduced workforce availability or productivity at Applied and customer sites, and additional data, information and cyber security risks associated with an extensive workforce now working remotely full-time. There can be no assurance that Applied or its suppliers will be able to maintain manufacturing operations at current levels. In addition, the pandemic and the impact of the foregoing measures in various forms and in varying degrees have had, and may continue to have a significant adverse impact on the global economic activity and could also result in a reduced demand for our products, delayed deliveries or installation, cancelled orders or increase in logistics and operating costs, and materially adversely affect Applied's business, financial condition and results of operations.\n\nThe degree to which the pandemic ultimately impacts Applied's financial condition and results of operations and the global economy will depend on future developments beyond our control, which are highly uncertain and difficult to predict, including the severity and duration of the pandemic, the extent and effectiveness of containment actions, availability of effective vaccines against COVID-19, effectiveness of government stimulus programs, resurgence of COVID-19, how quickly and to what extent normal economic and operating activity can resume, and the severity and duration of the global economic downturn that results from the pandemic.\n\n## Risks Associated with Operating a Global Business\n\n## Applied is exposed to the risks of operating a global business.\n\nApplied has product development, engineering, manufacturing, sales and other operations distributed throughout many countries, and some of its business activities are concentrated in certain geographic areas. Moreover, in fiscal 2020, approximately 90% of Applied's net sales were to customers in regions outside the United States. As a result of the global nature of its operations, Applied's business performance and results of operations may be adversely affected by a number of factors, including:\n\n- · uncertain global economic and political business conditions and demands;\n- · political and social attitudes, laws, rules, regulations and policies within countries that favor domestic companies over non-domestic companies, including customer- or government-supported efforts to promote the development and growth of local competitors;\n- · direct and indirect global trade issues and changes in and uncertainties with respect to trade policies (including the impact of the implementation and interpretation of the rules published by the U.S. Department of Commerce on April 28, 2020 and August 17, 2020 relating to certain export license requirements and the ability to obtain required import and export licenses), trade sanctions, tariffs, and international trade disputes;\n- · customer- or government-supported efforts to influence Applied to conduct more of its operations and sourcing in a particular country, such as Korea and China;\n- · variations among, and changes in, local, regional, national or international laws and regulations, including contract, intellectual property, cybersecurity, data privacy, labor, tax, and import/export laws, and the interpretation and application of such laws and regulations;\n\n16", + "recall": 0.990990990990991, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## Item 1A: Risk Factors\n\n## Risks Related to the COVID-19 Pandemic\n\n## The ongoing COVID-19 pandemic and global measures taken in response thereto have adversely impacted, and may continue to adversely impact, Applied’s operations and financial results.\n\n## Risks Associated with Operating a Global Business\n\n## Applied is exposed to the risks of operating a global business.\n\n16\n\nApplied has product development, engineering, manufacturing, sales and other operations distributed throughout many countries, and some of its business activities are concentrated in certain geographic areas. Moreover, in fiscal 2020, approximately 90% of Applied’s net sales were to customers in regions outside the United States. As a result of the global nature of its operations, Applied’s business performance and results of operations may be adversely affected by a number of factors, including:\n\nThe degree to which the pandemic ultimately impacts Applied’s financial condition and results of operations and the global economy will depend on future developments beyond our control, which are highly uncertain and difficult to predict, including the severity and duration of the pandemic, the extent and effectiveness of containment actions, availability of effective vaccines against COVID-19, effectiveness of government stimulus programs, resurgence of COVID-19, how quickly and to what extent normal economic and operating activity can resume, and the severity and duration of the global economic downturn that results from the pandemic.\n\nThe ongoing COVID-19 pandemic and measures taken in response by governments and businesses worldwide to contain its spread, including quarantines, facility closures, travel and logistics restrictions, border controls, and shelter in place or stay at home and social distancing orders, have adversely impacted and are expected to continue to adversely impact Applied’s supply chain, manufacturing, logistics, workforce and operations, as well as the operations of Applied’s customers, suppliers and partners globally. There is considerable uncertainty regarding the duration, scope and severity of the pandemic and the impacts on our business and the global economy from the effects of the ongoing pandemic and response measures. While Applied continues to see progress in the recovery within its supply chain, travel and logistics restrictions, shelter-in-place orders and other measures, including working remotely, social distancing and other policies implemented in foreign and domestic sites to protect the health and safety of employees, have resulted in, and are expected to continue to result in, transportation disruptions (such as reduced availability of air transport, port closures, and increased border controls or closures), production delays and capacity limitations at Applied and some of its customers, suppliers and partners, as well as reduced workforce availability or productivity at Applied and customer sites, and additional data, information and cyber security risks associated with an extensive workforce now working remotely full-time. There can be no assurance that Applied or its suppliers will be able to maintain manufacturing operations at current levels. In addition, the pandemic and the impact of the foregoing measures in various forms and in varying degrees have had, and may continue to have a significant adverse impact on the global economic activity and could also result in a reduced demand for our products, delayed deliveries or installation, cancelled orders or increase in logistics and operating costs, and materially adversely affect Applied’s business, financial condition and results of operations.\n\nThe following risk factors could materially and adversely affect Applied’s business, financial condition or results of operations and cause reputational harm, and should be carefully considered in evaluating the Company and its business, in addition to other information presented elsewhere in this report.\n\n- • uncertain global economic and political business conditions and demands;\n\n- • political and social attitudes, laws, rules, regulations and policies within countries that favor domestic companies over non-domestic companies, including customer- or government-supported efforts to promote the development and growth of local competitors;\n\n- • direct and indirect global trade issues and changes in and uncertainties with respect to trade policies (including the impact of the implementation and interpretation of the rules published by the U.S. Department of Commerce on April 28, 2020 and August 17, 2020 relating to certain export license requirements and the ability to obtain required import and export licenses), trade sanctions, tariffs, and international trade disputes;\n\n- • customer- or government-supported efforts to influence Applied to conduct more of its operations and sourcing in a particular country, such as Korea and China;\n\n- • variations among, and changes in, local, regional, national or international laws and regulations, including contract, intellectual property, cybersecurity, data privacy, labor, tax, and import/export laws, and the interpretation and application of such laws and regulations;" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7228919062811082, + "doc_id": "3354e289349a6ca481ec3ecb48ee2f8d62ef9dd1fd53f8fbde84d1cd27433f44", + "edit_distance": 0.8035363457760314, + "f1_score": 0.9821428571428572, + "meteor": 0.6206473512492392, + "precision": 0.9880239520958084, + "pred_md": "CP\t2020\tANNUAL\tREPORT\n\nAt December 31, 2020, fund assets included 109,008 of the Common Shares of the Company (2019 - 119,758) at a market value of $48 million (2019 $40 million).\n\n## Estimated future benefit payments\n\nThe estimated future DB pension and other benefit payments to be paid by the plans for each of the next five years and the subsequent five-year period are as follows:\n\nThe benefit payments from the Canadian registered and U.S. qualified DB pension plans are payable from their respective pension funds. Benefit payments from the supplemental pension plan and from the other benefits plans are payable directly from the Company.\n\n## Defined contribution plan\n\nCanadian non-unionized employees hired prior to July 1, 2010 had the option to participate in the Canadian DC plan. All Canadian non-unionized employees hired after such date must participate in this plan. Employee contributions are based on a percentage of salary. The Company matches employee contributions to a maximum percentage each year.\n\nEffective July 1, 2010, a new U.S. DC plan was established. All U.S. non-unionized employees hired after such date must participate in this plan. Employees do not contribute to the plan. The Company annually contributes a percentage of salary.\n\nThe DC plans provide a pension based on total employee, where appropriate, and employer contributions plus investment income earned on those contributions.\n\nIn 2020, the net cost of the DC plans, which generally equals the employer's required contribution, was $12 million (2019 - $11 million; 2018 - $10 million).\n\n## Contributions to multi-employer plans\n\nSome of the Company's unionized employees in the U.S. are members of a U.S. national multi-employer benefit plan. Contributions made by the Company to this plan in 2020 in respect of post-retirement medical benefits were $3 million (2019 - $3 million; 2018 - $3 million).\n\n## 23. Stock-based compensation\n\nAt December 31, 2020, the Company had several stock-based compensation plans including stock option plans, various cash-settled liability plans, and an employee share purchase plan. These plans resulted in an expense of $170 million in 2020 (2019 - $133 million; 2018 - $75 million).", + "recall": 0.9763313609467456, + "true_md": "CP 2020 ANNUAL REPORT 116\n\n## Estimated future benefit payments The estimated future DB pension and other benefit payments to be paid by the plans for each of the next five years and the subsequent five-year period are as\n\n## Defined contribution plan Canadian non-unionized employees hired prior to July 1, 2010 had the option to participate in the Canadian DC plan. All Canadian non-unionized employees hired\n\n## Contributions to multi-employer plans Some of the Company’s unionized employees in the U.S. are members of a U.S. national multi-employer benefit plan. Contributions made by the Company to this\n\n## 23. Stock-based compensation\n\nAt December 31, 2020, the Company had several stock-based compensation plans including stock option plans, various cash-settled liability plans, and an employee share purchase plan. These plans resulted in an expense of $170 million in 2020 (2019 – $133 million; 2018 – $75 million).\n\nContributions to multi-employer plans Some of the Company’s unionized employees in the U.S. are members of a U.S. national multi-employer benefit plan. Contributions made by the Company to this plan in 2020 in respect of post-retirement medical benefits were $3 million (2019 – $3 million; 2018 – $3 million).\n\nThe DC plans provide a pension based on total employee, where appropriate, and employer contributions plus investment income earned on those contributions.\n\nEffective July 1, 2010, a new U.S. DC plan was established. All U.S. non-unionized employees hired after such date must participate in this plan. Employees do not contribute to the plan. The Company annually contributes a percentage of salary.\n\nIn 2020, the net cost of the DC plans, which generally equals the employer’s required contribution, was $12 million (2019 – $11 million; 2018 – $10 million).\n\nDefined contribution plan Canadian non-unionized employees hired prior to July 1, 2010 had the option to participate in the Canadian DC plan. All Canadian non-unionized employees hired after such date must participate in this plan. Employee contributions are based on a percentage of salary. The Company matches employee contributions to a maximum percentage each year.\n\nThe benefit payments from the Canadian registered and U.S. qualified DB pension plans are payable from their respective pension funds. Benefit payments from the supplemental pension plan and from the other benefits plans are payable directly from the Company.\n\nEstimated future benefit payments The estimated future DB pension and other benefit payments to be paid by the plans for each of the next five years and the subsequent five-year period are as follows:\n\nAt December 31, 2020, fund assets included 109,008 of the Common Shares of the Company (2019 – 119,758) at a market value of $48 million (2019 – $40 million)." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8667823129560368, + "doc_id": "a31073f0f9179d9cb32636fe1d53974a2243aa073ba41225371950e1e4f3900c", + "edit_distance": 0.14481409001956946, + "f1_score": 0.9939393939393939, + "meteor": 0.8004527053976457, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "45\n\nCP\t2020\tANNUAL\tREPORT\n\nIn 2020, the impact of a stronger U.S. dollar resulted in an increase in total revenues of $33 million, an increase in total operating expenses of $23 million and an increase in net interest expense of $4 million. In 2019, the impact of a stronger U.S. dollar resulted in an increase in total revenues of $87 million, an increase in total operating expenses of $48 million and an increase in net interest expense of $10 million.\n\nThe impact of fluctuations in the exchange rate between the Canadian dollar and the U.S. dollar on the Company's results is discussed further in Item 7A. Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures About Market Risk, Foreign Exchange Risk.\n\n## Impact of Fuel Price on Earnings\n\nFluctuations in fuel prices affect the Company's results because fuel expense constitutes a significant portion of CP's operating costs. As fuel prices fluctuate, there will be a timing impact on earnings, as discussed further in Item 1. Business, Operations, Fuel Cost Adjustment Program and Item 1A. Risk Factors, Volatility Risks.\n\nThe impact of fuel price on earnings includes the impacts of provincial and federal carbon taxes and levies recovered and paid, on revenues and expenses, respectively.\n\nIn 2020, the favourable impact of fuel prices on Operating income was $25 million. Lower fuel prices resulted in a decrease in total operating expenses of $195 million. Lower fuel prices, partially offset by the timing of recoveries from CP's fuel cost adjustment program and increased carbon tax recoveries, resulted in a decrease in total revenues of $170 million from 2019. In 2019, the impact of lower fuel prices resulted in a decrease in Total revenues of $39 million and a decrease in Total operating expenses of $77 million.\n\n## Impact of Share Price on Earnings\n\nFluctuations in the Common Share price affect the Company's operating expenses because share-based liabilities are measured at fair value. The Company's Common Shares are listed on the Toronto Stock Exchange (\"TSX\") and the New York Stock Exchange (\"NYSE\") with ticker symbol \"CP\". The following tables indicate the opening and closing Common Share price on the TSX and the NYSE for each quarter and the change in the price of the Common Shares on the TSX and the NYSE for the years ended December 31, 2020, 2019 and 2018:", + "recall": 0.9879518072289156, + "true_md": "45 CP 2020 ANNUAL REPORT\n\nIn 2020, the impact of a stronger U.S. dollar resulted in an increase in total revenues of $33 million, an increase in total operating expenses of $23 million and an increase in net interest expense of $4 million. In 2019, the impact of a stronger U.S. dollar resulted in an increase in total revenues of $87 million, an increase in total operating expenses of $48 million and an increase in net interest expense of $10 million.\n\nThe impact of fluctuations in the exchange rate between the Canadian dollar and the U.S. dollar on the Company's results is discussed further in Item 7A. Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures About Market Risk, Foreign Exchange Risk.\n\nImpact of Fuel Price on Earnings Fluctuations in fuel prices affect the Company’s results because fuel expense constitutes a significant portion of CP's operating costs. As fuel prices fluctuate, there will be a timing impact on earnings, as discussed further in Item 1. Business, Operations, Fuel Cost Adjustment Program and Item 1A. Risk Factors, Volatility Risks.\n\n## Impact of Fuel Price on Earnings Fluctuations in fuel prices affect the Company’s results because fuel expense constitutes a significant portion of CP's operating costs. As fuel prices fluctuate,\n\nThe impact of fuel price on earnings includes the impacts of provincial and federal carbon taxes and levies recovered and paid, on revenues and expenses, respectively.\n\nIn 2020, the favourable impact of fuel prices on Operating income was $25 million. Lower fuel prices resulted in a decrease in total operating expenses of $195 million. Lower fuel prices, partially offset by the timing of recoveries from CP's fuel cost adjustment program and increased carbon tax recoveries, resulted in a decrease in total revenues of $170 million from 2019. In 2019, the impact of lower fuel prices resulted in a decrease in Total revenues of $39 million and a decrease in Total operating expenses of $77 million.\n\nImpact of Share Price on Earnings Fluctuations in the Common Share price affect the Company's operating expenses because share-based liabilities are measured at fair value. The Company's Common Shares are listed on the Toronto Stock Exchange (\"TSX\") and the New York Stock Exchange (\"NYSE\") with ticker symbol \"CP\". The following tables indicate the opening and closing Common Share price on the TSX and the NYSE for each quarter and the change in the price of the Common Shares on the TSX and the NYSE for the years ended December 31, 2020, 2019 and 2018:\n\n## Impact of Share Price on Earnings Fluctuations in the Common Share price affect the Company's operating expenses because share-based liabilities are measured at fair value. The Company's" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9734389391210787, + "doc_id": "afcea2c4a72e15bb3ff84d19220341ca31cae25f9c66da9a535b8d8400028d3b", + "edit_distance": 0.041884816753926704, + "f1_score": 0.992721979621543, + "meteor": 0.9961007000023455, + "precision": 0.9941690962099126, + "pred_md": "retrofitting. In geographic regions where we are positioned to provide quick response, we believe customers have traditionally relied on us, rather than our competitors, for aftermarket products due to our highly engineered and customized products. However, the aftermarket for standard products is competitive, as the existence of common standards allows for easier replacement of the installed products. As proximity of service centers, timeliness of delivery and quality are important considerations for all aftermarket products and services, we continue to selectively expand our global QRC capabilities to improve our ability to capture this important aftermarket business.\n\nWe have pursued a strategy of industry diversity and geographic breadth to mitigate the impact on our business of normal economic downturns in any one of the industries or in any particular part of the world we serve. For events that may occur and adversely impact our business, financial condition, results of operations and cash flows, refer to \"Item 1A. Risk Factors\" of this Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 2020 (\"Annual Report\"). For information on our sales and long-lived assets by geographic areas, see Note 20 to our consolidated financial statements included in \"Item 8. Financial Statements and Supplementary Data\" (\"Item 8\") of this Annual Report.\n\nOur segments share a focus on industrial flow control technology and benefit from our global footprint and our economies of scale in reducing administrative and overhead costs to serve customers more cost effectively. All segments share certain resources and functions, including elements of research and development (\"R&D\"), supply chain, safety, quality assurance and administrative functions that provide efficiencies and an overall lower cost structure.\n\nOur operations leadership reports to our Chief Executive Officer and the segments share leadership for operational support functions such as R&D, marketing and supply chain. We believe this leadership structure positions the Company to leverage operational excellence, cost reduction initiatives and internal synergies across our entire operating platform to drive further growth and increase in shareholder value.\n\n## Strategies\n\nOur overarching objectives are to be a leader in each of the market segments we serve and become the employer of choice in the flow control industry. Additionally, we seek to be recognized by our customers as the most trusted brand of flow control technology in terms of reliability and quality, which we believe will help maximize shareholder value.\n\nIn pursuit of these objectives, we maintain a rolling, five-year strategic plan that takes a balanced approach to integrating both short-term and long-term initiatives in four key areas: People, Process & Technology, Customer and Finance.\n\n## People\n\nWith the goal of developing and maintaining a people-first culture, we focus on several elements in our strategic efforts to continuously enhance our organizational capability, including: (i) fully committing to providing a safe work environment for our associates, worldwide, (ii) upholding a highperformance workforce, that is empowered, accountable and flexible, (iii) becoming an employer of choice by fostering a people-first culture and (iv) recruiting, developing and retaining a global and diverse workforce.\n\n## Process and Technology\n\nWith the goal of improving our productivity and delivering a continuous stream of innovative solutions to our customers, we focus on select strategies relating to: (i) developing and maintaining an enterprise-first business approach across all operating units and functional organizations, (ii) simplifying our business processes and optimizing corporate structural costs, (iii) significantly reducing our product cost and rationalizing our product portfolio and (iv) becoming the technical leader in the flow control industry.\n\n## Customer\n\nWith the goal of achieving the highest level of customer satisfaction amongst our peers, we focus on select strategies related to rigorous and disciplined selection of target markets and customers, while maintaining competitive lead times and emphasizing the highest levels of on-time delivery and quality. We seek to provide an outstanding experience for our customers over the entire product lifecycle by providing unique, integrated flow-control solutions that solve real-world application problems in our customers' facilities.\n\n## Finance\n\n2", + "recall": 0.9912790697674418, + "true_md": "retrofitting. In geographic regions where we are positioned to provide quick response, we believe customers have traditionally relied on us, rather than our competitors, for aftermarket products due to our highly engineered and customized products. However, the aftermarket for standard products is competitive, as the existence of common standards allows for easier replacement of the installed products. As proximity of service centers, timeliness of delivery and quality are important considerations for all aftermarket products and services, we continue to selectively expand our global QRC capabilities to improve our ability to capture this important aftermarket business.\n\nWe have pursued a strategy of industry diversity and geographic breadth to mitigate the impact on our business of normal economic downturns in any one of the industries or in any particular part of the world we serve. For events that may occur and adversely impact our business, financial condition, results of operations and cash flows, refer to \"Item 1A. Risk Factors\" of this Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 2020 (\"Annual Report\"). For information on our sales and long-lived assets by geographic areas, see Note 20 to our consolidated financial statements included in \"Item 8. Financial Statements and Supplementary Data\" (\"Item 8\") of this Annual Report.\n\nOur segments share a focus on industrial flow control technology and benefit from our global footprint and our economies of scale in reducing administrative and overhead costs to serve customers more cost effectively. All segments share certain resources and functions, including elements of research and development (\"R&D\"), supply chain, safety, quality assurance and administrative functions that provide efficiencies and an overall lower cost structure.\n\nOur operations leadership reports to our Chief Executive Officer and the segments share leadership for operational support functions such as R&D, marketing and supply chain. We believe this leadership structure positions the Company to leverage operational excellence, cost reduction initiatives and internal synergies across our entire operating platform to drive further growth and increase in shareholder value.\n\nOur overarching objectives are to be a leader in each of the market segments we serve and become the employer of choice in the flow control industry. Additionally, we seek to be recognized by our customers as the most trusted brand of flow control technology in terms of reliability and quality, which we believe will help maximize shareholder value.\n\nIn pursuit of these objectives, we maintain a rolling, five-year strategic plan that takes a balanced approach to integrating both short-term and long-term initiatives in four key areas: People, Process & Technology, Customer and Finance.\n\nWith the goal of developing and maintaining a people-first culture, we focus on several elements in our strategic efforts to continuously enhance our organizational capability, including: (i) fully committing to providing a safe work environment for our associates, worldwide, (ii) upholding a high- performance workforce, that is empowered, accountable and flexible, (iii) becoming an employer of choice by fostering a people-first culture and (iv) recruiting, developing and retaining a global and diverse workforce.\n\nWith the goal of improving our productivity and delivering a continuous stream of innovative solutions to our customers, we focus on select strategies relating to: (i) developing and maintaining an enterprise-first business approach across all operating units and functional organizations, (ii) simplifying our business processes and optimizing corporate structural costs, (iii) significantly reducing our product cost and rationalizing our product portfolio and (iv) becoming the technical leader in the flow control industry.\n\nWith the goal of achieving the highest level of customer satisfaction amongst our peers, we focus on select strategies related to rigorous and disciplined selection of target markets and customers, while maintaining competitive lead times and emphasizing the highest levels of on-time delivery and quality. We seek to provide an outstanding experience for our customers over the entire product lifecycle by providing unique, integrated flow-control solutions that solve real-world application problems in our customers’ facilities.\n\n2\n\n## Finance\n\n## Customer\n\n## Process and Technology\n\n## People\n\n## Strategies" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "73820d5aec870dfc96ee3aa239ee2ece0dc8faa3a6980ae24be9b1cf9107c600", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999375, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## FLOWSERVE CORPORATION\n\n## CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF COMPREHENSIVE INCOME\n\nSee\taccompanying\tnotes\tto\tconsolidated\tfinancial\tstatements.\n\n61", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## FLOWSERVE CORPORATION\n\n## CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF COMPREHENSIVE INCOME\n\nSee accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.\n\n61" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9516377900778552, + "doc_id": "4628c686fbe4cf388c79ff256a47110f0889408eba1a874ff78c3e58e11b68b9", + "edit_distance": 0.07130434782608695, + "f1_score": 0.9691470054446462, + "meteor": 0.9695123615909451, + "precision": 0.9709090909090909, + "pred_md": "## Table of Contents\n\n## PART II\n\n## ITEM 5. MARKET FOR AMERICAN AIRLINES GROUP'S COMMON STOCK, RELATED STOCKHOLDER MATTERS AND ISSUER PURCHASES OF EQUITY SECURITIES\n\n## Stock Exchange Listing\n\nOur common stock is listed on The Nasdaq Global Select Market under the trading symbol 'AAL.' There is no trading market for the common stock of American, which is a wholly-owned subsidiary of AAG.\n\nAs of February 12, 2021, the closing price of our common stock was $17.27 and there were 12,527 holders of record. However, because many of the shares of our common stock are held by brokers and other institutions on behalf of stockholders, we believe there are substantially more beneficial holders of our common stock than record holders.\n\nInformation on securities authorized for issuance under our equity compensation plans will be set forth in our Proxy Statement for the 2021 Annual Meeting of Stockholders of American Airlines Group Inc. (the Proxy Statement) under the caption 'Equity Compensation Plan Information' and is incorporated by reference into this Annual Report on Form 10-K.\n\n## Dividends on Common Stock\n\nThe total cash payment for dividends during the years ended December 31, 2020 and 2019 was $43 million and $178 million, respectively. In connection with our receipt of financial assistance under PSP1 and PSP2, we agreed not to pay dividends on AAG common stock through at least March 31, 2022. In addition, we have entered into the Treasury Loan Agreement, and as a result, we are further prohibited from paying dividends on AAG common stock through the date that is one year after the secured loan provided under the Treasury Loan Agreement is fully repaid. If we determine to make any dividends in the future, such dividends that may be declared and paid from time to time will be subject to market and economic conditions, applicable legal requirements and other relevant factors. We are not obligated to continue a dividend for any fixed period, and the payment of dividends may be suspended or discontinued again at any time at our discretion and without prior notice.\n\n## Stock Performance Graph\n\nThe following stock performance graph and related information shall not be deemed 'soliciting material' or 'filed' with the Securities and Exchange Commission, nor shall such information be incorporated by reference into any future filings under the Securities Act of 1933 or the Exchange Act, each as amended, except to the extent that we specifically incorporate it by reference into such filing.\n\nThe following stock performance graph compares the cumulative total stockholder returns during the period from December 31, 2015 to December 31, 2020 of our common stock to the New York Stock Exchange (NYSE) ARCA Airline Index and the Standard and Poor's Financial Services, LLC (S&P) 500 Stock Index. The comparison assumes $100 was invested on December 31, 2015 in our common stock and in each of the foregoing indices and assumes that all dividends were reinvested. The stock performance shown on the following graph represents historical stock performance and is not necessarily indicative of future stock price performance.\n\n57", + "recall": 0.967391304347826, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## PART II\n\n## ITEM 5. MARKET FOR AMERICAN AIRLINES GROUP’S COMMON STOCK, RELATED STOCKHOLDER MATTERS AND ISSUER PURCHASES OF EQUITY SECURITIES\n\n## Stock Exchange Listing\n\nOur common stock is listed on The Nasdaq Global Select Market under the trading symbol “AAL.” There is no trading market for the common stock of American, which is a wholly-owned subsidiary of AAG.\n\nAs of February 12, 2021, the closing price of our common stock was $17.27 and there were 12,527 holders of record. However, because many of the shares of our common stock are held by brokers and other institutions on behalf of stockholders, we believe there are substantially more beneficial holders of our common stock than record holders.\n\nInformation on securities authorized for issuance under our equity compensation plans will be set forth in our Proxy Statement for the 2021 Annual Meeting of Stockholders of American Airlines Group Inc. (the Proxy Statement) under the caption “Equity Compensation Plan Information” and is incorporated by reference into this Annual Report on Form 10-K.\n\nThe total cash payment for dividends during the years ended December 31, 2020 and 2019 was $43 million and $178 million, respectively. In connection with our receipt of financial assistance under PSP1 and PSP2, we agreed not to pay dividends on AAG common stock through at least March 31, 2022. In addition, we have entered into the Treasury Loan Agreement, and as a result, we are further prohibited from paying dividends on AAG common stock through the date that is one year after the secured loan provided under the Treasury Loan Agreement is fully repaid. If we determine to make any dividends in the future, such dividends that may be declared and paid from time to time will be subject to market and economic conditions, applicable legal requirements and other relevant factors. We are not obligated to continue a dividend for any fixed period, and the payment of dividends may be suspended or discontinued again at any time at our discretion and without prior notice.\n\nThe following stock performance graph and related information shall not be deemed “soliciting material” or “filed” with the Securities and Exchange Commission, nor shall such information be incorporated by reference into any future filings under the Securities Act of 1933 or the Exchange Act, each as amended, except to the extent that we specifically incorporate it by reference into such filing.\n\nThe following stock performance graph compares the cumulative total stockholder returns during the period from December 31, 2015 to December 31, 2020 of our common stock to the New York Stock Exchange (NYSE) ARCA Airline Index and the Standard and Poor’s Financial Services, LLC (S&P) 500 Stock Index. The comparison assumes $100 was invested on December 31, 2015 in our common stock and in each of the foregoing indices and assumes that all dividends were reinvested. The stock performance shown on the following graph represents historical stock performance and is not necessarily indicative of future stock price performance.\n\n## Stock Performance Graph\n\n## Dividends on Common Stock\n\n57" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9562277865462264, + "doc_id": "a4079ba1a91b8ddf19fbc67819e0445aff23ed10989c817a6f1027552462be56", + "edit_distance": 0.06239737274220033, + "f1_score": 0.9885583524027461, + "meteor": 0.9825325449080181, + "precision": 0.9863013698630136, + "pred_md": "## Research, Development and Engineering\n\nResearch, Development and Engineering (RD&E) expenses for the periods indicated were as follows:\n\nTable of Contents\n\nApplied's future operating results depend to a considerable extent on its ability to maintain a competitive advantage in the equipment and service products it provides. Development cycles range from 12 to 36 months depending on whether the product is an enhancement of an existing product, which typically has a shorter development cycle, or a new product, which typically has a longer development cycle. Most of Applied's existing products resulted from internal development activities and innovations involving new technologies, materials and processes. In certain instances, Applied acquires technologies, either in existing or new product areas, to complement its existing technology capabilities and to reduce time to market.\n\nManagement believes that it is critical to continue to make substantial investments in RD&E to assure the availability of innovative technology that meets the current and projected requirements of its customers' most advanced designs. Applied has maintained and intends to continue its commitment to investing in RD&E in order to continue to offer new products and technologies.\n\nApplied continued its RD&E investments across Semiconductor Systems and Display and Adjacent Markets on the development of new unit process systems and integrated materials solutions. Areas of investment include etch, deposition, inspection, patterning, packaging and other technologies to improve chip performance, power, area, cost and time-to-market. In Display and Adjacent Markets, RD&E investments were focused on expanding the company's market opportunity with new display technologies.\n\nThe increases in RD&E expenses during fiscal 2020 compared fiscal 2019 were primarily due to additional headcount and higher expense associated with share-based compensation and variable compensation. RD&E expenses increased slightly in fiscal 2019 compared to the prior year primarily due to additional headcount and increased research and development spending in Semiconductor Systems and Display and Adjacent Market segments. These increases reflect Applied's ongoing investments in product development initiatives, consistent with the Company's growth strategy. Applied continued to prioritize existing RD&E investments in technical capabilities and critical research and development programs in current and new markets, with a focus on semiconductor technologies.\n\nRD&E expense during fiscal 2020, 2019 and 2018 included $116 million, $99 million and $96 million, respectively, of share-based compensation expense.\n\n## Marketing and Selling\n\nMarketing and selling expenses for the periods indicated were as follows:\n\nMarketing and selling expenses remained relatively flat in fiscal 2020 compared to fiscal 2019 and 2018. Marketing and selling expenses for fiscal years 2020, 2019 and 2018 included $36 million, $31 million and $31 million, respectively, of share-based compensation expense.\n\n## General and Administrative\n\nGeneral and administrative (G&A) expenses for the periods indicated were as follows:\n\nChange\n\nG&A expenses in fiscal 2020 increased compared to fiscal 2019 primarily due to higher expense associated with acquisition integration and deal costs, variable compensation, and share-based compensation. General and administrative expenses in fiscal 2019 decreased slightly compared to fiscal 2018 primarily due to lower variable compensation expenses.\n\n38", + "recall": 0.9908256880733946, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## Research, Development and Engineering\n\nResearch, Development and Engineering (RD&E) expenses for the periods indicated were as follows:\n\nApplied’s future operating results depend to a considerable extent on its ability to maintain a competitive advantage in the equipment and service products it provides. Development cycles range from 12 to 36 months depending on whether the product is an enhancement of an existing product, which typically has a shorter development cycle, or a new product, which typically has a longer development cycle. Most of Applied’s existing products resulted from internal development activities and innovations involving new technologies, materials and processes. In certain instances, Applied acquires technologies, either in existing or new product areas, to complement its existing technology capabilities and to reduce time to market.\n\nManagement believes that it is critical to continue to make substantial investments in RD&E to assure the availability of innovative technology that meets the current and projected requirements of its customers’ most advanced designs. Applied has maintained and intends to continue its commitment to investing in RD&E in order to continue to offer new products and technologies.\n\nApplied continued its RD&E investments across Semiconductor Systems and Display and Adjacent Markets on the development of new unit process systems and integrated materials solutions. Areas of investment include etch, deposition, inspection, patterning, packaging and other technologies to improve chip performance, power, area, cost and time-to-market. In Display and Adjacent Markets, RD&E investments were focused on expanding the company’s market opportunity with new display technologies.\n\nThe increases in RD&E expenses during fiscal 2020 compared fiscal 2019 were primarily due to additional headcount and higher expense associated with share-based compensation and variable compensation. RD&E expenses increased slightly in fiscal 2019 compared to the prior year primarily due to additional headcount and increased research and development spending in Semiconductor Systems and Display and Adjacent Market segments. These increases reflect Applied’s ongoing investments in product development initiatives, consistent with the Company’s growth strategy. Applied continued to prioritize existing RD&E investments in technical capabilities and critical research and development programs in current and new markets, with a focus on semiconductor technologies.\n\nRD&E expense during fiscal 2020, 2019 and 2018 included $116 million, $99 million and $96 million, respectively, of share-based compensation expense.\n\nMarketing and selling expenses for the periods indicated were as follows:\n\n## Marketing and Selling\n\nMarketing and selling expenses remained relatively flat in fiscal 2020 compared to fiscal 2019 and 2018. Marketing and selling expenses for fiscal years 2020, 2019 and 2018 included $36 million, $31 million and $31 million, respectively, of share-based compensation expense.\n\nGeneral and administrative (G&A) expenses for the periods indicated were as follows:\n\nG&A expenses in fiscal 2020 increased compared to fiscal 2019 primarily due to higher expense associated with acquisition integration and deal costs, variable compensation, and share-based compensation. General and administrative expenses in fiscal 2019 decreased slightly compared to fiscal 2018 primarily due to lower variable compensation expenses.\n\n## General and Administrative\n\n38" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7698946509563653, + "doc_id": "cf08316be23c24426901b92274676584de36da5aa98386b01d8f1487b71ae151", + "edit_distance": 0.19950124688279303, + "f1_score": 0.978723404255319, + "meteor": 0.7185765866357315, + "precision": 0.9913793103448276, + "pred_md": "CP\t2020\tANNUAL\tREPORT\n\n## Diluted Earnings per Share\n\n*Adjusted diluted EPS is defined and reconciled in Non-GAAP Measures of this Item 7. Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations.\n\nDiluted EPS was $17.97 in 2020, an increase of $0.45, or 3%, from $17.52 in 2019. This increase was due to a lower average number of outstanding Common Shares due to the Company's share repurchase program, and higher Net income.\n\nDiluted EPS was $17.52 in 2019, an increase of $3.91, or 29%, from $13.61 in 2018. This increase was due to higher Net income and lower average number of outstanding Common Shares due to the Company's share repurchase program.\n\nAdjusted diluted EPS, defined and reconciled in Non-GAAP Measures of this Item 7. Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations, was $17.67 in 2020, an increase of $1.23, or 7%, from $16.44 in 2019. Adjusted diluted EPS was $16.44 in 2019, an increase of $1.93, or 13%, from $14.51 in 2018. These increases were due to higher Adjusted income and lower average number of outstanding Common Shares due to the Company's share repurchase program.\n\n## Operating Ratio\n\nThe Operating ratio provides the percentage of revenues used to operate the railway. A lower percentage normally indicates higher efficiency in the operation of the railway. The Company's Operating ratio was 57.1% in 2020, a 280 basis point improvement from 59.9% in 2019. This improvement was primarily due to:\n\n- · liquidated damages, including customer volume commitments, and higher freight rates;\n- · the favourable impact of changes in fuel prices;", + "recall": 0.9663865546218487, + "true_md": "43 CP 2020 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n## Diluted Earnings per Share\n\n*Adjusted diluted EPS is defined and reconciled in Non-GAAP Measures of this Item 7. Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations.\n\nDiluted EPS was $17.97 in 2020, an increase of $0.45, or 3%, from $17.52 in 2019. This increase was due to a lower average number of outstanding Common Shares due to the Company's share repurchase program, and higher Net income.\n\nDiluted EPS was $17.52 in 2019, an increase of $3.91, or 29%, from $13.61 in 2018. This increase was due to higher Net income and lower average number of outstanding Common Shares due to the Company's share repurchase program.\n\nAdjusted diluted EPS, defined and reconciled in Non-GAAP Measures of this Item 7. Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations, was $17.67 in 2020, an increase of $1.23, or 7%, from $16.44 in 2019. Adjusted diluted EPS was $16.44 in 2019, an increase of $1.93, or 13%, from $14.51 in 2018. These increases were due to higher Adjusted income and lower average number of outstanding Common Shares due to the Company's share repurchase program.\n\n## Operating Ratio\n\nThe Operating ratio provides the percentage of revenues used to operate the railway. A lower percentage normally indicates higher efficiency in the operation of the railway. The Company’s Operating ratio was 57.1% in 2020, a 280 basis point improvement from 59.9% in 2019. This improvement was primarily due to: • liquidated damages, including customer volume commitments, and higher freight rates;\n\n- the railway. The Company’s Operating ratio was 57.1% in 2020, a 280 basis point improvement from 59.9% in 2019. This improvement was primarily due to: • liquidated damages, including customer volume commitments, and higher freight rates; • the favourable impact of changes in fuel prices;\n\n- • liquidated damages, including customer volume commitments, and higher freight rates; • the favourable impact of changes in fuel prices;" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9553357866160075, + "doc_id": "e30b091dcdd779ee6398bb87c12d36e7b647a6c27c6fc8be0512bb3abe01eed9", + "edit_distance": 0.11355311355311355, + "f1_score": 0.98989898989899, + "meteor": 0.9787423635685119, + "precision": 0.9932432432432432, + "pred_md": "## Item 2: Properties\n\nInformation concerning Applied's properties is set forth below:\n\nTable of Contents\n\nBecause of the interrelation of Applied's operations, properties within a country may be shared by the segments operating within that country. The Company's headquarters offices are in Santa Clara, California. Products in Semiconductor Systems are manufactured in Santa Clara, California; Austin, Texas; Gloucester, Massachusetts; Kalispell, Montana; Rehovot, Israel; and Singapore. Remanufactured equipment products in the Applied Global Services segment are produced primarily in Austin, Texas. Products in the Display and Adjacent Markets segment are manufactured in Alzenau, Germany and Tainan, Taiwan. Other products are manufactured in Treviso, Italy.\n\nApplied also owns and leases offices, plants and warehouse locations in many locations throughout the world, including in Europe, Japan, North America (principally the United States), Israel, China, India, Korea, Southeast Asia and Taiwan. These facilities are principally used for manufacturing; research, development and engineering; and marketing, sales and customer support.\n\nApplied also owns a total of approximately 269 acres of buildable land in Montana, Texas, California, Israel and Italy that could accommodate additional building space.\n\nApplied considers the properties that it owns or leases as adequate to meet its current and future requirements. Applied regularly assesses the size, capability and location of its global infrastructure and periodically makes adjustments based on these assessments.\n\n29", + "recall": 0.9865771812080537, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## Item 2: Properties\n\nBecause of the interrelation of Applied’s operations, properties within a country may be shared by the segments operating within that country. The Company’s headquarters offices are in Santa Clara, California. Products in Semiconductor Systems are manufactured in Santa Clara, California; Austin, Texas; Gloucester, Massachusetts; Kalispell, Montana; Rehovot, Israel; and Singapore. Remanufactured equipment products in the Applied Global Services segment are produced primarily in Austin, Texas. Products in the Display and Adjacent Markets segment are manufactured in Alzenau, Germany and Tainan, Taiwan. Other products are manufactured in Treviso, Italy.\n\nApplied also owns and leases offices, plants and warehouse locations in many locations throughout the world, including in Europe, Japan, North America (principally the United States), Israel, China, India, Korea, Southeast Asia and Taiwan. These facilities are principally used for manufacturing; research, development and engineering; and marketing, sales and customer support.\n\nApplied also owns a total of approximately 269 acres of buildable land in Montana, Texas, California, Israel and Italy that could accommodate additional building space.\n\nApplied considers the properties that it owns or leases as adequate to meet its current and future requirements. Applied regularly assesses the size, capability and location of its global infrastructure and periodically makes adjustments based on these assessments.\n\n29\n\nInformation concerning Applied’s properties is set forth below:" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.951977644407688, + "doc_id": "ccec45f61b8a8b645ad292a95241b4da8d1dfe343ca5e18ea1ee36fa62735991", + "edit_distance": 0.17065868263473055, + "f1_score": 0.9860724233983289, + "meteor": 0.9744889642190441, + "precision": 0.9888268156424581, + "pred_md": "## Regional\n\nAs of December 31, 2020, the fleet of our wholly-owned and third-party regional carriers operating as American Eagle consisted of the following aircraft:\n\nTable of Contents\n\nExcluded\tfrom\tthe\ttotal\toperating\taircraft\tcount\tabove\tare\t27\tregional\taircraft\tthat\tare\tbeing\theld\tin\ttemporary\tstorage\tas\tfollows:\t18\towned Embraer\t140s,\tseven\towned\tEmbraer\t175s\tand\ttwo\towned\tEmbraer\t145s. (1)\n\nSee Note 12 to AAG's Consolidated Financial Statements in Part II, Item 8A and Note 10 to American's Consolidated Financial Statements in Part II, Item 8B for additional information on our capacity purchase agreements with third-party regional carriers.\n\n## Aircraft and Engine Purchase Commitments\n\nAs of December 31, 2020, we had definitive purchase agreements for the acquisition of the following aircraft (1) :\n\nDelivery\t schedule\t represents\t our\t best\t estimate\t as\t of\t the\t date\t of\t this\t report.\t Actual\t delivery\t dates\t are\t subject\t to\t change\t based\t on\t various potential\t factors\t including\t production\t delays\t by\t the\t manufacturer\t and,\t where\t applicable,\t our\t decision\t to\t exercise\t rights\t to\t defer\t certain deliveries. (1)\n\nIn\t October\t 2019,\t the\t Office\t of\t the\t U.S.\t Trade\t Representative\t announced\t a\t 10%\t tariff\t on\t new\t Airbus\t aircraft\t imported\t from\t Europe.\t Effective March\t18,\t2020,\tthis\ttariff\trate\tincreased\tto\t15%,\tand\teffective\tJanuary\t12,\t2021,\tthe\tscope\tof\tthe\t15%\ttariff\twas\texpanded\tto\tinclude\tcertain imported\taircraft\tparts\tin\taddition\tto\taircraft.\tWe\tcontinue\tto\tendeavor\tto\tmitigate\tthe\teffect\tof\tthese\ttariffs\ton\tour\tAirbus\tdeliveries.\tSee\tPart\tI, Item\t1A.\tRisk\tFactors\t-\t' We\toperate\ta\tglobal\tbusiness\twith\tinternational\toperations\tthat\tare\tsubject\tto\teconomic\tand\tpolitical\tinstability\tand\thave been,\tand\tin\tthe\tfuture\tmay\tcontinue\tto\tbe,\tadversely\taffected\tby\tnumerous\tevents,\tcircumstances\tor\tgovernment\tactions\tbeyond\tour (2)\n\n55", + "recall": 0.9833333333333333, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## Regional\n\nAs of December 31, 2020, the fleet of our wholly-owned and third-party regional carriers operating as American Eagle consisted of the following aircraft:\n\nExcluded from the total operating aircraft count above are 27 regional aircraft that are being held in temporary storage as follows: 18 owned Embraer 140s, seven owned Embraer 175s and two owned Embraer 145s. (1)\n\nSee Note 12 to AAG’s Consolidated Financial Statements in Part II, Item 8A and Note 10 to American’s Consolidated Financial Statements in Part II, Item 8B for additional information on our capacity purchase agreements with third-party regional carriers.\n\n## Aircraft and Engine Purchase Commitments\n\nDelivery schedule represents our best estimate as of the date of this report. Actual delivery dates are subject to change based on various potential factors including production delays by the manufacturer and, where applicable, our decision to exercise rights to defer certain deliveries. (1)\n\nIn October 2019, the Office of the U.S. Trade Representative announced a 10% tariff on new Airbus aircraft imported from Europe. Effective March 18, 2020, this tariff rate increased to 15%, and effective January 12, 2021, the scope of the 15% tariff was expanded to include certain imported aircraft parts in addition to aircraft. We continue to endeavor to mitigate the effect of these tariffs on our Airbus deliveries. See Part I, Item 1A. Risk Factors - “ We operate a global business with international operations that are subject to economic and political instability and have been, and in the future may continue to be, adversely affected by numerous events, circumstances or government actions beyond our (2)\n\n55\n\nAs of December 31, 2020, we had definitive purchase agreements for the acquisition of the following aircraft : (1)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5880064197236716, + "doc_id": "501e3e52f1ee2baaae7f55430f10bc9e609a4ebfe139cdb7fbc90b5bc139f510", + "edit_distance": 0.6331360946745562, + "f1_score": 0.9779735682819384, + "meteor": 0.6691464132753631, + "precision": 0.9823008849557522, + "pred_md": "## 21. ACCUMULATED OTHER COMPREHENSIVE LOSS\n\nThe following presents the components of accumulated other comprehensive loss (AOCL), net of related tax effects:\n\n\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\n\n(1) Includes\t foreign\t currency\t translation\t adjustments\t attributable\t to\t noncontrolling\t interests\t of\t $5.9\t million,\t $5.1\t million\t and\t $4.5\t million\t for December\t 31,\t 2020,\t 2019\t and\t 2018,\t respectively.\t For\t the\t year\t ended\t December\t 31,\t 2020,\t foreign\t currency\t translation\t impacts\t primarily represented\tthe\tstrengthening\tof\tthe\tEuro,\tChinese\tyuan,\tBritish\tpound\tand\tCanadian\tdollar\texchange\trates\tversus\tthe\tU.S.\tdollar\tfor\tthe\tperiod. For\t the\t year\t ended\t December\t31,\t2019,\tforeign\tcurrency\ttranslation\timpacts\tprimarily\trepresented\tthe\tweakening\tof\tthe\tEuro,\tBritish\tpound, Chinese\tyuan\tand\tIndian\trupee\texchange\trates\tversus\tthe\tU.S.\tdollar\tfor\tthe\tperiod.\tIncludes\tnet\tinvestment\thedge\tcumulative\tlosses\tof\t$48.8 million\tand\t$12.1\tmillion,\tnet\tof\tdeferred\ttaxes,\tat\tDecember\t31,\t2020\tand\t2019,\trespectively.\tAmounts\tin\tparentheses\tindicate\tdebits.\n\nThe following table presents the reclassifications out of AOCL:\n\n\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\n\n(1)\tAmounts\tin\tparentheses\tindicate\tdecreases\tto\tincome.\tNone\tof\tthe\treclassification\tamounts\thave\ta\tnoncontrolling\tinterest\tcomponent.\n\n(2)\t These\t accumulated\t other\t comprehensive\t loss\t components\t are\t included\t in\t the\t computation\t of\t net\t periodic\t pension\t cost.\t See\t Note\t 14\t for additional\tdetails.\n\n111", + "recall": 0.9736842105263158, + "true_md": "## 21. ACCUMULATED OTHER COMPREHENSIVE LOSS\n\n111\n\nThe following presents the components of accumulated other comprehensive loss (AOCL), net of related tax effects:\n\nThe following table presents the reclassifications out of AOCL:\n\n- (1) Amounts in parentheses indicate decreases to income. None of the reclassification amounts have a noncontrolling interest component. (2) These accumulated other comprehensive loss components are included in the computation of net periodic pension cost. See Note 14 for additional details.\n\n- (1) Amounts in parentheses indicate decreases to income. None of the reclassification amounts have a noncontrolling interest component. (2) These accumulated other comprehensive loss components are included in the computation of net periodic pension cost. See Note 14 for\n\n- (1) Includes foreign currency translation adjustments attributable to noncontrolling interests of $5.9 million , $5.1 million and $4.5 million for December 31, 2020, 2019 and 2018, respectively. For the year ended December 31, 2020, foreign currency translation impacts primarily represented the strengthening of the Euro, Chinese yuan, British pound and Canadian dollar e xchange rates versus the U.S. dollar for the period. For the year ended December 31, 2019, foreign currency translation impacts primarily represented the weakening of the Euro, British pound,\n\nrepresented the strengthening of the Euro, Chinese yuan, British pound and Canadian dollar e xchange rates versus the U.S. dollar for the period. For the year ended December 31, 2019, foreign currency translation impacts primarily represented the weakening of the Euro, British pound, Chinese yuan and Indian rupee exchange rates versus the U.S. dollar for the period. Includes net investment hedge cumulative losses of $48.8 million and $12.1 million, net of deferred taxes, at December 31, 2020 and 2019, respectively. Amounts in parentheses indicate debits." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9847801285892391, + "doc_id": "d9f65fd340aeb668c957ffc8e6f6098748fd8303114550bb9929c4129b6ed05d", + "edit_distance": 0.024725274725274724, + "f1_score": 0.9946524064171123, + "meteor": 0.9947683003233114, + "precision": 0.9964285714285714, + "pred_md": "Our pension and retiree medical and other postretirement benefits costs and liabilities are calculated using various actuarial assumptions and methodologies. We use certain assumptions including, but not limited to, the selection of the: (1) discount rate and (2) expected return on plan assets (as discussed below). These assumptions as of December 31 were:\n\nTable of Contents\n\nWhen\testablishing\tour\tdiscount\trate\tto\tmeasure\tour\tobligations,\twe\tmatch\thigh\tquality\tcorporate\tbonds\tavailable\tin\tthe\tmarketplace\twhose\tcash flows\tapproximate\tour\tprojected\tbenefit\tdisbursements.\tLowering\tthe\tdiscount\trate\tby\t50\tbasis\tpoints\tas\tof\tDecember\t31,\t2020\twould\tincrease our\t pension\t and\t retiree\t medical\t and\t other\t postretirement\t benefits\t obligations\t by\t approximately\t $1.4\t billion\t and\t $45\t million,\t respectively, decrease\testimated\t2021\tpension\texpense\tby\tapproximately\t$15\tmillion\tand\tincrease\testimated\t2021\tretiree\tmedical\tand\tother\tpostretirement benefits\texpense\tby\tless\tthan\t$1\tmillion. (1)\n\nThe\texpected\trate\tof\treturn\ton\tplan\tassets\tis\tbased\tupon\tan\tevaluation\tof\tour\thistorical\ttrends\tand\texperience,\ttaking\tinto\taccount\tcurrent\tand expected\t market\t conditions\t and\t our\t target\t asset\t allocation\t of\t 30%\t fixed\t income\t securities,\t 24%\t U.S.\t stocks,\t 22%\t alternative\t (private) investments,\t16%\tdeveloped\tinternational\tstocks\tand\t8%\temerging\tmarket\tstocks.\tThe\texpected\trate\tof\treturn\ton\tplan\tassets\tcomponent\tof\tour net\tperiodic\tbenefit\tcost\tis\tcalculated\tbased\ton\tthe\tfair\tvalue\tof\tplan\tassets\tand\tour\ttarget\tasset\tallocation.\tLowering\tthe\texpected\tlong-term\trate of\treturn\ton\tplan\tassets\tby\t50\tbasis\tpoints\tas\tof\tDecember\t31,\t2020\twould\tincrease\testimated\t2021\tpension\texpense\tand\tretiree\tmedical\tand other\tpostretirement\tbenefits\texpense\tby\tapproximately\t$70\tmillion\tand\t$1\tmillion,\trespectively. (2)\n\nDuring 2020, we reviewed and revised certain economic and demographic assumptions including the pension and retiree medical and other postretirement benefits discount rates and health care cost trend rates. The net effect of changing these assumptions for the pension plans resulted in an increase of $1.7 billion in the projected benefit obligation at December 31, 2020. The net effect of changing these assumptions for retiree medical and other postretirement benefits plans resulted in an increase of $80 million in the accumulated postretirement benefit obligation at December 31, 2020. We also revised our mortality assumptions to incorporate the new improvement scale issued by the Society of Actuaries. This resulted in a decrease in our pension and retiree medical and other postretirement benefit obligations by $140 million and $1 million, respectively.\n\nSee Note 10 to AAG's Consolidated Financial Statements in Part II, Item 8A and Note 8 to American's Consolidated Financial Statements in Part II, Item 8B for additional information regarding our employee benefit plans.\n\n## Income Taxes\n\nIncome taxes are accounted for under the asset and liability method. Deferred tax assets and liabilities are recognized for the future tax consequences attributable to differences between the financial statement carrying amounts of existing assets and liabilities and their respective tax bases and operating loss and tax credit carryforwards. Deferred tax assets and liabilities are recorded net as noncurrent deferred income taxes.\n\nOur ability to use our NOL Carryforwards depends on the amount of taxable income generated in future periods. We provide a valuation allowance for our deferred tax assets when it is more likely than not that some portion, or all of our deferred tax assets, will not be realized. We consider all available positive and negative evidence and make certain assumptions in evaluating the realizability of our deferred tax assets. Many factors are considered that impact our assessment of future profitability, including conditions which are beyond our control, such as the health of the economy, the availability and price volatility of aircraft fuel and travel demand.\n\nWe presently have a $34 million valuation allowance on certain net deferred tax assets related to state NOL Carryforwards. There can be no assurance that an additional valuation allowance on our net deferred tax assets will not be required. Such valuation allowance could be material.\n\n86", + "recall": 0.9928825622775801, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\nOur pension and retiree medical and other postretirement benefits costs and liabilities are calculated using various actuarial assumptions and methodologies. We use certain assumptions including, but not limited to, the selection of the: (1) discount rate and (2) expected return on plan assets (as discussed below). These assumptions as of December 31 were:\n\nWhen establishing our discount rate to measure our obligations, we match high quality corporate bonds available in the marketplace whose cash flows approximate our projected benefit disbursements. Lowering the discount rate by 50 basis points as of December 31, 2020 would increase our pension and retiree medical and other postretirement benefits obligations by approximately $1.4 billion and $45 million, respectively, decrease estimated 2021 pension expense by approximately $15 million and increase estimated 2021 retiree medical and other postretirement benefits expense by less than $1 million. (1)\n\nThe expected rate of return on plan assets is based upon an evaluation of our historical trends and experience, taking into account current and expected market conditions and our target asset allocation of 30% fixed income securities, 24% U.S. stocks, 22% alternative (private) investments, 16% developed international stocks and 8% emerging market stocks. The expected rate of return on plan assets component of our net periodic benefit cost is calculated based on the fair value of plan assets and our target asset allocation. Lowering the expected long-term rate of return on plan assets by 50 basis points as of December 31, 2020 would increase estimated 2021 pension expense and retiree medical and other postretirement benefits expense by approximately $70 million and $1 million, respectively. (2)\n\nDuring 2020, we reviewed and revised certain economic and demographic assumptions including the pension and retiree medical and other postretirement benefits discount rates and health care cost trend rates. The net effect of changing these assumptions for the pension plans resulted in an increase of $1.7 billion in the projected benefit obligation at December 31, 2020. The net effect of changing these assumptions for retiree medical and other postretirement benefits plans resulted in an increase of $80 million in the accumulated postretirement benefit obligation at December 31, 2020. We also revised our mortality assumptions to incorporate the new improvement scale issued by the Society of Actuaries. This resulted in a decrease in our pension and retiree medical and other postretirement benefit obligations by $140 million and $1 million, respectively.\n\nSee Note 10 to AAG’s Consolidated Financial Statements in Part II, Item 8A and Note 8 to American’s Consolidated Financial Statements in Part II, Item 8B for additional information regarding our employee benefit plans.\n\nIncome taxes are accounted for under the asset and liability method. Deferred tax assets and liabilities are recognized for the future tax consequences attributable to differences between the financial statement carrying amounts of existing assets and liabilities and their respective tax bases and operating loss and tax credit carryforwards. Deferred tax assets and liabilities are recorded net as noncurrent deferred income taxes.\n\nOur ability to use our NOL Carryforwards depends on the amount of taxable income generated in future periods. We provide a valuation allowance for our deferred tax assets when it is more likely than not that some portion, or all of our deferred tax assets, will not be realized. We consider all available positive and negative evidence and make certain assumptions in evaluating the realizability of our deferred tax assets. Many factors are considered that impact our assessment of future profitability, including conditions which are beyond our control, such as the health of the economy, the availability and price volatility of aircraft fuel and travel demand.\n\nWe presently have a $34 million valuation allowance on certain net deferred tax assets related to state NOL Carryforwards. There can be no assurance that an additional valuation allowance on our net deferred tax assets will not be required. Such valuation allowance could be material.\n\n86\n\n## Income Taxes" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9693298307339191, + "doc_id": "e9406220ee68e340b904f33d7f3d5f03544db865ccd26fdaf07e5ae44f6a59d5", + "edit_distance": 0.08759124087591241, + "f1_score": 0.9911816578483245, + "meteor": 0.9853519034227901, + "precision": 0.9929328621908127, + "pred_md": "## Table of Contents\n\n## APPLIED MATERIALS, INC.\n\n## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS - (Continued)\n\nShare-based expense in fiscal 2020 increased compared to the prior years primarily due to expense related to awards with provisions that became effective in the first quarter of fiscal 2020 that allow partial accelerated vesting in the event of a qualifying retirement.\n\nThe cost associated with share-based awards that are subject solely to time-based vesting requirements, less expected forfeitures, is recognized over the awards' service period for the entire award on a straight-line basis. Share-based awards granted to certain executive officers allow partial accelerated vesting in the event of a qualifying retirement based on age and years of service. The cost associated with performance-based equity awards, which include both performance and market goals, is recognized for each tranche over the service period. The cost of equity awards related to performance goals is based on an assessment of the likelihood that the applicable performance goals will be achieved. For the equity awards based on market goals, the cost is recognized based upon the assumption of 100% achievement of the goal.\n\nAt October 25, 2020, Applied had $425 million in total unrecognized compensation expense, net of estimated forfeitures, related to grants of share-based awards and shares issued under Applied's ESPP, which will be recognized over a weighted average period of 2.4 years. At October 25, 2020, there were 56 million shares available for grants of share-based awards under the Employee Stock Incentive Plan, and an additional 10 million shares available for issuance under the ESPP.\n\n## Stock Options\n\nStock options are rights to purchase, at future dates, shares of Applied common stock. The exercise price of each stock option equals the fair market value of Applied common stock on the date of grant. Options typically vest over three to four years, subject to the grantee's continued service with Applied through the scheduled vesting date, and expire no later than seven years from the grant date. There were no stock options granted during fiscal 2020, 2019 and 2018. There were no outstanding stock options at the end of fiscal 2020.\n\n## Restricted Stock Units, Restricted Stock, Performance Shares and Performance Units\n\nRestricted stock units are converted into shares of Applied common stock upon vesting on a one-for-one basis. Restricted stock has the same rights as other issued and outstanding shares of Applied common stock except these shares generally have no right to dividends and are held in escrow until the award vests. Performance shares and performance units are awards that result in a payment to a grantee, generally in shares of Applied common stock on a one-for-one basis, if performance goals and/or other vesting criteria established by the Human Resources and Compensation Committee of Applied's Board of Directors are achieved or the awards otherwise vest. Restricted stock units, restricted stock, performance shares and performance units typically vest over three to four years and vesting is usually subject to the grantee's continued service with Applied and, in some cases, achievement of specified performance goals. The compensation expense related to the service-based awards is determined using the fair market value of Applied common stock on the date of the grant, and the compensation expense is recognized over the vesting period.\n\nDuring fiscal 2020, 2019 and 2018, certain executive officers were granted awards that are subject to the achievement of specified performance goals (performance-based awards).\n\n## Performance-based awards granted in fiscal 2018\n\nCertain awards require the achievement of positive adjusted operating profit and vest ratably over three years. Other awards require the achievement of targeted levels of adjusted operating profit margin and wafer fabrication equipment market share, and the number of shares that may vest in full after three years ranges from 0% to 200% of the target amount.\n\nThe fair value of these awards is estimated on the date of grant. If the performance goals are achieved as of the end of the performance period, the awards will vest, provided that the grantee remains employed by Applied through each applicable vesting date. If the performance goals are not achieved, no compensation expense is recognized and any previously recognized compensation expense is reversed. The expected cost is based on the awards that are probable to vest and is reflected over the service period and reduced for estimated forfeitures.\n\n## Performance-based awards granted in fiscal 2019 and 2020\n\nCertain awards are subject to the achievement of targeted levels of adjusted operating margin and total shareholder return (TSR) relative to a peer group, comprised of companies in the Standard & Poor's 500 Index. Each metric will be weighted 50% and will be measured over a three-year period. The number of shares that may vest in full after three years ranges from 0% to 200% of the target amount. The awards become eligible to vest only if performance goals are achieved and will vest only if the grantee remains employed by Applied through each applicable vesting date, subject to a qualifying retirement based on age and years of service. The awards provide for a partial payout based on actual performance at the conclusion of the three-year performance period in the event of a qualifying retirement.\n\n93", + "recall": 0.9894366197183099, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## APPLIED MATERIALS, INC.\n\n## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS — (Continued)\n\nShare-based expense in fiscal 2020 increased compared to the prior years primarily due to expense related to awards with provisions that became effective in the first quarter of fiscal 2020 that allow partial accelerated vesting in the event of a qualifying retirement.\n\nThe cost associated with share-based awards that are subject solely to time-based vesting requirements, less expected forfeitures, is recognized over the awards’ service period for the entire award on a straight-line basis. Share-based awards granted to certain executive officers allow partial accelerated vesting in the event of a qualifying retirement based on age and years of service. The cost associated with performance-based equity awards, which include both performance and market goals, is recognized for each tranche over the service period. The cost of equity awards related to performance goals is based on an assessment of the likelihood that the applicable performance goals will be achieved. For the equity awards based on market goals, the cost is recognized based upon the assumption of 100% achievement of the goal.\n\nAt October 25, 2020, Applied had $425 million in total unrecognized compensation expense, net of estimated forfeitures, related to grants of share-based awards and shares issued under Applied’s ESPP, which will be recognized over a weighted average period of 2.4 years. At October 25, 2020, there were 56 million shares available for grants of share-based awards under the Employee Stock Incentive Plan, and an additional 10 million shares available for issuance under the ESPP.\n\nStock options are rights to purchase, at future dates, shares of Applied common stock. The exercise price of each stock option equals the fair market value of Applied common stock on the date of grant. Options typically vest over three to four years, subject to the grantee’s continued service with Applied through the scheduled vesting date, and expire no later than seven years from the grant date. There were no stock options granted during fiscal 2020, 2019 and 2018. There were no outstanding stock options at the end of fiscal 2020.\n\nRestricted stock units are converted into shares of Applied common stock upon vesting on a one-for-one basis. Restricted stock has the same rights as other issued and outstanding shares of Applied common stock except these shares generally have no right to dividends and are held in escrow until the award vests. Performance shares and performance units are awards that result in a payment to a grantee, generally in shares of Applied common stock on a one-for-one basis, if performance goals and/or other vesting criteria established by the Human Resources and Compensation Committee of Applied’s Board of Directors are achieved or the awards otherwise vest. Restricted stock units, restricted stock, performance shares and performance units typically vest over three to four years and vesting is usually subject to the grantee’s continued service with Applied and, in some cases, achievement of specified performance goals. The compensation expense related to the service-based awards is determined using the fair market value of Applied common stock on the date of the grant, and the compensation expense is recognized over the vesting period.\n\nDuring fiscal 2020, 2019 and 2018, certain executive officers were granted awards that are subject to the achievement of specified performance goals (performance-based awards).\n\nCertain awards require the achievement of positive adjusted operating profit and vest ratably over three years. Other awards require the achievement of targeted levels of adjusted operating profit margin and wafer fabrication equipment market share, and the number of shares that may vest in full after three years ranges from 0% to 200% of the target amount.\n\nThe fair value of these awards is estimated on the date of grant. If the performance goals are achieved as of the end of the performance period, the awards will vest, provided that the grantee remains employed by Applied through each applicable vesting date. If the performance goals are not achieved, no compensation expense is recognized and any previously recognized compensation expense is reversed. The expected cost is based on the awards that are probable to vest and is reflected over the service period and reduced for estimated forfeitures.\n\nCertain awards are subject to the achievement of targeted levels of adjusted operating margin and total shareholder return (TSR) relative to a peer group, comprised of companies in the Standard & Poor's 500 Index. Each metric will be weighted 50% and will be measured over a three-year period. The number of shares that may vest in full after three years ranges from 0% to 200% of the target amount. The awards become eligible to vest only if performance goals are achieved and will vest only if the grantee remains employed by Applied through each applicable vesting date, subject to a qualifying retirement based on age and years of service. The awards provide for a partial payout based on actual performance at the conclusion of the three-year performance period in the event of a qualifying retirement.\n\n## Performance-based awards granted in fiscal 2019 and 2020\n\n## Performance-based awards granted in fiscal 2018\n\n## Restricted Stock Units, Restricted Stock, Performance Shares and Performance Units\n\n## Stock Options\n\n93" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9846192534077938, + "doc_id": "bec11397c8c5cf1dd3052a62ca95cc8dbf196c6cb0e066c931226d2405fdf53e", + "edit_distance": 0.034371643394199784, + "f1_score": 0.992, + "meteor": 0.990663788448659, + "precision": 0.9967845659163987, + "pred_md": "are available in print without charge to shareholders who request them. Information contained on or available through our Internet web site is not incorporated into this Annual Report or any other document we file with, or furnish to, the SEC.\n\n## ITEM 1A. RISK FACTORS\n\nPlease carefully consider the following discussion of material factors, events, and uncertainties that make an investment in our securities risky. When the factors, events and contingencies discussed below or elsewhere in this Annual Report materialize, our business, financial condition, results of operations, cash flows, reputation or prospects could be materially adversely affected. While we believe all known material risks are disclosed, additional risks and uncertainties not presently known to us, or that we currently deem immaterial, may also materially adversely affect our business, financial condition, results of operations, cash flows, reputation, prospects or stock price. Because of the risk factors discussed below and elsewhere in this Annual Report and in other filings we make with the SEC, as well as other variables affecting our operating results, past financial performance may not be a reliable indicator of future performance, historical trends should not be used to anticipate results or trends in future periods and actual results could differ materially from those projected in the forward-looking statements contained in this Annual Report.\n\n## Business and Operating Risks\n\nOur business depends on our customers' levels of capital investment and maintenance expenditures, which in turn are affected by numerous factors, including changes in the state of domestic and global economies, global energy demand and the liquidity cyclicality and condition of global credit and capital markets, which have impacted and which could continue to impact the ability or willingness of our customers to invest in our products and services and adversely affect our financial condition, results of operations and cash flow.\n\nDemand for most of our products and services depends on the level of new capital investment and planned maintenance expenditures by our customers. The level of capital expenditures by our customers depends, in turn, on general economic conditions, availability of credit, economic conditions within their respective industries and expectations of future market behavior. Additionally, volatility in commodity prices can negatively affect the level of these activities and can result in postponement of capital spending decisions or the delay or cancellation of existing orders. The ability of our customers to finance capital investment and maintenance is also affected by factors independent of the conditions in their industry, such as the condition of global credit and capital markets.\n\nThe businesses of many of our customers, particularly oil and gas companies, chemical companies and general industrial companies, are to varying degrees cyclical and have experienced periodic downturns. Our customers in these industries, particularly those whose demand for our products and services is primarily profit-driven, tend to delay large capital projects, including expensive maintenance and upgrades, during economic downturns. For example, our chemical customers generally tend to reduce their spending on capital investments and operate their facilities at lower levels in a soft economic environment, which reduces demand for our products and services. Additionally, fluctuating energy demand forecasts and lingering uncertainty concerning commodity pricing, specifically the price of oil, have caused, and may in the future cause, our customers to be more conservative in their capital planning, reducing demand for our products and services. Reduced demand for our products and services could result in the delay or cancellation of existing orders or lead to excess manufacturing capacity, which unfavorably impacts our absorption of fixed manufacturing costs. This reduced demand has in the past and may continue in the future to also erode average selling prices in our industry. Any of these results could continue to adversely affect our business, financial condition, results of operations and cash flows.\n\nThe novel coronavirus (\"COVID-19\", \"Pandemic\") pandemic, and the volatile regional and global economic conditions stemming from the pandemic, have precipitated or aggravated many of the factors described above, and we expect that these factors will continue to adversely impact our operations and financial performance as well as those of many of our customers and suppliers. For further discussion of the risks presented by the ongoing pandemic, see the discussion below under the heading 'The outbreak and global spread of the novel coronavirus (COVID-19) are having an adverse impact on our operations and financial performance, as well as on the operations and financial performance of many of our customers and suppliers. We are unable to predict the full extent to which the COVID-19 pandemic will continue to adversely impact our operations, financial performance, results of operations, financial condition, cash flows and/or stock price.'\n\nAdditionally, our customers sometimes delay capital investment and maintenance even during favorable conditions in their industries or markets. Despite these favorable conditions, the general health of global credit and capital markets and our customers' ability to access such markets impacts investments in large capital projects, including necessary maintenance and upgrades. In addition, the liquidity and financial position of our customers impacts capital investment\n\n13", + "recall": 0.9872611464968153, + "true_md": "are available in print without charge to shareholders who request them. Information contained on or available through our Internet web site is not incorporated into this Annual Report or any other document we file with, or furnish to, the SEC.\n\nPlease carefully consider the following discussion of material factors, events, and uncertainties that make an investment in our securities risky. When the factors, events and contingencies discussed below or elsewhere in this Annual Report materialize, our business, financial condition, results of operations, cash flows, reputation or prospects could be materially adversely affected. While we believe all known material risks are disclosed, additional risks and uncertainties not presently known to us, or that we currently deem immaterial, may also materially adversely affect our business, financial condition, results of operations, cash flows, reputation, prospects or stock price. Because of the risk factors discussed below and elsewhere in this Annual Report and in other filings we make with the SEC, as well as other variables affecting our operating results, past financial performance may not be a reliable indicator of future performance, historical trends should not be used to anticipate results or trends in future periods and actual results could differ materially from those projected in the forward-looking statements contained in this Annual Report.\n\nOur business depends on our customers’ levels of capital investment and maintenance expenditures, which in turn are affected by numerous factors, including changes in the state of domestic and global economies, global energy demand and the liquidity cyclicality and condition of global credit and capital markets, which have impacted and which could continue to impact the ability or willingness of our customers to invest in our products and services and adversely affect our financial condition, results of operations and cash flow.\n\nDemand for most of our products and services depends on the level of new capital investment and planned maintenance expenditures by our customers. The level of capital expenditures by our customers depends, in turn, on general economic conditions, availability of credit, economic conditions within their respective industries and expectations of future market behavior. Additionally, volatility in commodity prices can negatively affect the level of these activities and can result in postponement of capital spending decisions or the delay or cancellation of existing orders. The ability of our customers to finance capital investment and maintenance is also affected by factors independent of the conditions in their industry, such as the condition of global credit and capital markets.\n\nThe businesses of many of our customers, particularly oil and gas companies, chemical companies and general industrial companies, are to varying degrees cyclical and have experienced periodic downturns. Our customers in these industries, particularly those whose demand for our products and services is primarily profit-driven, tend to delay large capital projects, including expensive maintenance and upgrades, during economic downturns. For example, our chemical customers generally tend to reduce their spending on capital investments and operate their facilities at lower levels in a soft economic environment, which reduces demand for our products and services. Additionally, fluctuating energy demand forecasts and lingering uncertainty concerning commodity pricing, specifically the price of oil, have caused, and may in the future cause, our customers to be more conservative in their capital planning, reducing demand for our products and services. Reduced demand for our products and services could result in the delay or cancellation of existing orders or lead to excess manufacturing capacity, which unfavorably impacts our absorption of fixed manufacturing costs. This reduced demand has in the past and may continue in the future to also erode average selling prices in our industry. Any of these results could continue to adversely affect our business, financial condition, results of operations and cash flows.\n\nThe novel coronavirus (\"COVID-19\", \"Pandemic\") pandemic, and the volatile regional and global economic conditions stemming from the pandemic, have precipitated or aggravated many of the factors described above, and we expect that these factors will continue to adversely impact our operations and financial performance as well as those of many of our customers and suppliers. For further discussion of the risks presented by the ongoing pandemic, see the discussion below under the heading “The outbreak and global spread of the novel coronavirus (COVID-19) are having an adverse impact on our operations and financial performance, as well as on the operations and financial performance of many of our customers and suppliers. We are unable to predict the full extent to which the COVID-19 pandemic will continue to adversely impact our operations, financial performance, results of operations, financial condition, cash flows and/or stock price.”\n\nAdditionally, our customers sometimes delay capital investment and maintenance even during favorable conditions in their industries or markets. Despite these favorable conditions, the general health of global credit and capital markets and our customers' ability to access such markets impacts investments in large capital projects, including necessary maintenance and upgrades. In addition, the liquidity and financial position of our customers impacts capital investment\n\n## ITEM 1A. RISK FACTORS\n\n## Business and Operating Risks\n\n13" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.608460603607651, + "doc_id": "20eb46b23106f4845e23e1041e487d703069831beeb2aa4388b262765db1134f", + "edit_distance": 0.3225806451612903, + "f1_score": 0.9942196531791907, + "meteor": 0.6850686269479583, + "precision": 0.9885057471264368, + "pred_md": "34\n\nCP\t2020\tANNUAL\tREPORT\n\n## Issuer Purchase of Equity Securities\n\nCP has established a share repurchase program which is further described in Item 8. Financial Statements and Supplementary Data, Note 20 Shareholders' equity. The following table presents the number of Common Shares repurchased during each month of the fourth quarter of 2020 and the average price paid by CP for the repurchase of such Common Shares.\n\n- Includes shares repurchased but not yet cancelled at quarter end. (1)\n- Includes brokerage fees. (2)\n- The Company's NCIB expired on December 19, 2020. At the time of expiration, 529,377 Common Shares authorized for repurchase had not yet been purchased by the Company. (3)", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "CP 2020 ANNUAL REPORT 34\n\n## Issuer Purchase of Equity Securities\n\nCP has established a share repurchase program which is further described in Item 8. Financial Statements and Supplementary Data, Note 20 Shareholders' equity. The following table presents the number of Common Shares repurchased during each month of the fourth quarter of 2020 and the average price paid by CP for the repurchase of such Common Shares.\n\nIncludes shares repurchased but not yet cancelled at quarter end. Includes brokerage fees. (1) (2) \n\nIncludes shares repurchased but not yet cancelled at quarter end. Includes brokerage fees. The Company's NCIB expired on December 19, 2020. At the time of expiration, 529,377 Common Shares authorized for repurchase had not yet been purchased by the Company. (2) (3)\n\nIncludes brokerage fees. The Company's NCIB expired on December 19, 2020. At the time of expiration, 529,377 Common Shares authorized for repurchase had not yet been purchased by the Company. (3)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9528496119224701, + "doc_id": "99ea6f2ebb9f33deabb53d37ad8ef7f97d83f8fa6d4b59cc56b3eda8ca660856", + "edit_distance": 0.33613445378151263, + "f1_score": 0.9747899159663864, + "meteor": 0.8222187316085948, + "precision": 0.9830508474576272, + "pred_md": "The following is a reconciliation of the non-U.S. plans' defined benefit pension obligations:\n\n\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\n\n(1) The\t2019\tactuarial\tloss\tprimarily\treflects\tthe\tdecrease\tin\tthe\tdiscount\trates\tfor\tall\tplans.\n\n(2) In\t2020,\tthe\tcurrency\ttranslation\tloss\treflects\tthe\tweakening\tof\tthe\tU.S.\tdollar\tagainst\tthe\tEuro\tand\tthe\tBritish\tpound,\twhile\tin\t2019\tthe\tcurrency translation\tloss\treflects\tthe\tweakening\tof\tthe\tU.S.\tdollar\tagainst\tthe\tBritish\tpound,\tpartially\toffset\tby\tthe\tstrengthening\tof\tthe\tU.S.\tdollar\tagainst the\tEuro.\n\nThe following table summarizes the expected cash benefit payments for the non-U.S. defined benefit plans in the future (amounts in millions):\n\n98", + "recall": 0.9666666666666667, + "true_md": "The following table summarizes the expected cash benefit payments for the non-U.S. defined benefit plans in the future (amounts in millions):\n\n- (1) The 2019 actuarial loss primarily reflects the decrease in the discount rates for all plans.\n\n- (2) In 2020, the currency translation loss reflects the weakening of the U.S. dollar against the Euro and the British pound, while in 2019 the currency translation loss reflects the weakening of the U.S. dollar against the British pound, partially offset by the strengthening of the U.S. dollar against the Euro.\n\n98\n\nThe following is a reconciliation of the non-U.S. plans’ defined benefit pension obligations:\n\n\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9667021963339097, + "doc_id": "5cd6c6d43b7607547e124142aed796ea84ed27ded54d227d20f1323afe02224a", + "edit_distance": 0.11461318051575932, + "f1_score": 0.9947460595446586, + "meteor": 0.987688590304635, + "precision": 0.9964912280701754, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS OF AMERICAN AIRLINES, INC.\n\nThe following is American's total passenger revenue by geographic region (in millions):\n\nTable of Contents\n\nAmerican attributes passenger revenue by geographic region based upon the origin and destination of each flight segment.\n\n## Passenger Revenue\n\nAmerican recognizes all revenues generated from transportation on American and its regional flights operated under the brand name American Eagle, including associated baggage fees and other inflight services, as passenger revenue when transportation is provided. Ticket and other related sales for transportation that has not yet been provided are initially deferred and recorded as air traffic liability on American's consolidated balance sheets. The air traffic liability principally represents tickets sold for future travel on American and partner airlines, as well as estimated future refunds and exchanges of tickets sold for past travel.\n\nThe majority of tickets sold are nonrefundable. A small percentage of tickets, some of which are partially used tickets, expire unused. Due to complex pricing structures, refund and exchange policies, and interline agreements with other airlines, certain amounts are recognized in passenger revenue using estimates regarding both the timing of the revenue recognition and the amount of revenue to be recognized. These estimates are generally based on the analysis of American's historical data. American has consistently applied this accounting method to estimate revenue from unused tickets at the date of travel. Estimated future refunds and exchanges included in the air traffic liability are routinely evaluated based on subsequent activity to validate the accuracy of American's estimates. Any adjustments resulting from periodic evaluations of the estimated air traffic liability are included in passenger revenue during the period in which the evaluations are completed.\n\nVarious taxes and fees assessed on the sale of tickets to end customers are collected by American as an agent and remitted to taxing authorities. These taxes and fees have been presented on a net basis in the accompanying consolidated statements of operations and recorded as a liability until remitted to the appropriate taxing authority. The CARES Act provided for a temporary tax holiday from collecting and remitting certain government ticket taxes for tickets purchased between March 28, 2020 and December 31, 2020.\n\n## Loyalty Revenue\n\nAmerican currently operates the loyalty program, AAdvantage. This program awards mileage credits to passengers who fly on American, any one world airline or other partner airlines, or by using the services of other program participants, such as the Citi and Barclaycard US co-branded credit cards, and certain hotels and car rental companies. Mileage credits can be redeemed for travel on American and other participating partner airlines, as well as other non-air travel awards such as hotels and rental cars. For mileage credits earned by AAdvantage loyalty program members, American applies the deferred revenue method. In response to the COVID-19 pandemic, American suspended the expiration of mileage credits through June 30, 2021 and eliminated mileage reinstatement fees for canceled award tickets.\n\n## Mileage credits earned through travel\n\nFor mileage credits earned through travel, American applies a relative selling price approach whereby the total amount collected from each passenger ticket sale is allocated between the air transportation and the mileage credits earned. The portion of each passenger ticket sale attributable to mileage credits earned is initially deferred and then recognized in passenger revenue when mileage credits are redeemed and transportation is provided. The estimated selling price of mileage credits is determined using an equivalent ticket value approach, which uses historical data, including award redemption patterns by geographic region and class of service, as well as similar fares as those used to settle award redemptions. The estimated selling price of miles is adjusted for an estimate of the miles that will not be redeemed using statistical models based on historical redemption patterns to develop an estimate of the likelihood of future redemption.\n\n162", + "recall": 0.993006993006993, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS OF AMERICAN AIRLINES, INC.\n\nThe following is American’s total passenger revenue by geographic region (in millions):\n\nAmerican recognizes all revenues generated from transportation on American and its regional flights operated under the brand name American Eagle, including associated baggage fees and other inflight services, as passenger revenue when transportation is provided. Ticket and other related sales for transportation that has not yet been provided are initially deferred and recorded as air traffic liability on American’s consolidated balance sheets. The air traffic liability principally represents tickets sold for future travel on American and partner airlines, as well as estimated future refunds and exchanges of tickets sold for past travel.\n\nAmerican attributes passenger revenue by geographic region based upon the origin and destination of each flight segment.\n\nThe majority of tickets sold are nonrefundable. A small percentage of tickets, some of which are partially used tickets, expire unused. Due to complex pricing structures, refund and exchange policies, and interline agreements with other airlines, certain amounts are recognized in passenger revenue using estimates regarding both the timing of the revenue recognition and the amount of revenue to be recognized. These estimates are generally based on the analysis of American’s historical data. American has consistently applied this accounting method to estimate revenue from unused tickets at the date of travel. Estimated future refunds and exchanges included in the air traffic liability are routinely evaluated based on subsequent activity to validate the accuracy of American’s estimates. Any adjustments resulting from periodic evaluations of the estimated air traffic liability are included in passenger revenue during the period in which the evaluations are completed.\n\nVarious taxes and fees assessed on the sale of tickets to end customers are collected by American as an agent and remitted to taxing authorities. These taxes and fees have been presented on a net basis in the accompanying consolidated statements of operations and recorded as a liability until remitted to the appropriate taxing authority. The CARES Act provided for a temporary tax holiday from collecting and remitting certain government ticket taxes for tickets purchased between March 28, 2020 and December 31, 2020.\n\nAmerican currently operates the loyalty program, AAdvantage. This program awards mileage credits to passengers who fly on American, any one world airline or other partner airlines, or by using the services of other program participants, such as the Citi and Barclaycard US co-branded credit cards, and certain hotels and car rental companies. Mileage credits can be redeemed for travel on American and other participating partner airlines, as well as other non-air travel awards such as hotels and rental cars. For mileage credits earned by AAdvantage loyalty program members, American applies the deferred revenue method. In response to the COVID-19 pandemic, American suspended the expiration of mileage credits through June 30, 2021 and eliminated mileage reinstatement fees for canceled award tickets.\n\nFor mileage credits earned through travel, American applies a relative selling price approach whereby the total amount collected from each passenger ticket sale is allocated between the air transportation and the mileage credits earned. The portion of each passenger ticket sale attributable to mileage credits earned is initially deferred and then recognized in passenger revenue when mileage credits are redeemed and transportation is provided. The estimated selling price of mileage credits is determined using an equivalent ticket value approach, which uses historical data, including award redemption patterns by geographic region and class of service, as well as similar fares as those used to settle award redemptions. The estimated selling price of miles is adjusted for an estimate of the miles that will not be redeemed using statistical models based on historical redemption patterns to develop an estimate of the likelihood of future redemption.\n\n## Mileage credits earned through travel\n\n## Loyalty Revenue\n\n## Passenger Revenue\n\n162" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9397886631657552, + "doc_id": "1bbc657f713c6223b5288ce718b79d530f9b481d4647026f15ad4122af42e23c", + "edit_distance": 0.05361930294906166, + "f1_score": 0.9668508287292819, + "meteor": 0.9553634952455553, + "precision": 0.9722222222222222, + "pred_md": "## Table of Contents\n\n## Ownership Restrictions\n\nAAG's Certificate of Incorporation and Bylaws provide that, consistent with the requirements of Subtitle VII of Title 49 of the United States Code, as amended (the Aviation Act), any persons or entities who are not a 'citizen of the United States' (as defined under the Aviation Act and administrative interpretations issued by the DOT, its predecessors and successors, from time to time), including any agent, trustee or representative of such persons or entities (a non-citizen), shall not, in the aggregate, own (beneficially or of record) and/or control more than (a) 24.9% of the aggregate votes of all of our outstanding equity securities or (b) 49.0% of our outstanding equity securities. Our Certificate of Incorporation and Bylaws further specify that it is the duty of each stockholder who is a non-citizen to register his, her or its equity securities on our foreign stock record and provide for remedies applicable to stockholders that exceed the voting and ownership caps described above.\n\nIn addition, to reduce the risk of a potential adverse effect on our ability to use our NOL Carryforwards and certain other tax attributes for federal income tax purposes, our Certificate of Incorporation contains certain restrictions on the acquisition and disposition of our common stock by substantial stockholders (generally holders of more than 4.75%). This provision is currently scheduled to expire by its terms in December 2021.\n\nSee Part I, Item 1A. Risk Factors 'AAG's Certificate of Incorporation and Bylaws include provisions that limit voting and acquisition and disposition of our equity interests.' Also see AAG's Certification of Incorporation and Bylaws, which are filed as Exhibits 3.1, 3.2 and 3.3 hereto, for the full text of the foregoing restrictions and AAG's Description of the Registrants' Securities Registered Pursuant to Section 12 of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, which is filed as Exhibit 4.1 hereto, for a more detailed description.\n\n59", + "recall": 0.9615384615384616, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## Ownership Restrictions\n\nAAG’s Certificate of Incorporation and Bylaws provide that, consistent with the requirements of Subtitle VII of Title 49 of the United States Code, as amended (the Aviation Act), any persons or entities who are not a “citizen of the United States” (as defined under the Aviation Act and administrative interpretations issued by the DOT, its predecessors and successors, from time to time), including any agent, trustee or representative of such persons or entities (a non-citizen), shall not, in the aggregate, own (beneficially or of record) and/or control more than (a) 24.9% of the aggregate votes of all of our outstanding equity securities or (b) 49.0% of our outstanding equity securities. Our Certificate of Incorporation and Bylaws further specify that it is the duty of each stockholder who is a non-citizen to register his, her or its equity securities on our foreign stock record and provide for remedies applicable to stockholders that exceed the voting and ownership caps described above.\n\nIn addition, to reduce the risk of a potential adverse effect on our ability to use our NOL Carryforwards and certain other tax attributes for federal income tax purposes, our Certificate of Incorporation contains certain restrictions on the acquisition and disposition of our common stock by substantial stockholders (generally holders of more than 4.75%). This provision is currently scheduled to expire by its terms in December 2021.\n\nSee Part I, Item 1A. Risk Factors – “AAG’s Certificate of Incorporation and Bylaws include provisions that limit voting and acquisition and disposition of our equity interests.” Also see AAG’s Certification of Incorporation and Bylaws, which are filed as Exhibits 3.1, 3.2 and 3.3 hereto, for the full text of the foregoing restrictions and AAG’s Description of the Registrants’ Securities Registered Pursuant to Section 12 of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, which is filed as Exhibit 4.1 hereto, for a more detailed description.\n\n59" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9892186955168955, + "doc_id": "1baa9882aef9fc9225a0af6c34c549c53cbc791e79c897dea73b365528a94ca5", + "edit_distance": 0.24817518248175183, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9963813554576132, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "CP\t2020\tANNUAL\tREPORT\n\n48\n\nrevenue ton-mile decreased due to moving proportionately higher volumes of long haul soybeans and corn to U.S. Pacific Northwest, which also caused RTMs to increase more than carloads, and lower fuel surcharge revenue as a result of lower fuel prices.\n\nGrain revenue was $1,684 million in 2019, an increase of $118 million, or 8%, from $1,566 million in 2018. This increase was primarily due to increased freight revenue per revenue ton-mile, higher volumes of regulated Canadian grain, and the favourable impact of the change in FX. This increase was partially offset by lower volumes of U.S. grain, primarily corn, to the U.S. Pacific Northwest. Freight revenue per revenue ton-mile increased due to higher freight rates, primarily for regulated Canadian grain.\n\n## Coal\n\nFX\tadjusted\t%\tchange\tdoes\tnot\thave\tany\tstandardized\tmeaning\tprescribed\tby\tGAAP\tand,\ttherefore,\tis\tunlikely\tto\tbe\tcomparable\tto\tsimilar\tmeasures\tpresented\tby\tother\tcompanies.\tFX\tadjusted %\tchange\tis\tdefined\tand\treconciled\tin\tNon-GAAP\tMeasures\tof\tthis\tItem\t7.\tManagement's\tDiscussion\tand\tAnalysis\tof\tFinancial\tCondition\tand\tResults\tof\tOperations. (1)\n\nCoal revenue was $566 million in 2020, a decrease of $116 million, or 17%, from $682 million in 2019. This decrease was primarily due to lower volumes of Canadian coal primarily to Vancouver, driven by supply chain challenges at both the mines and the ports, lower volumes of U.S. coal to Wisconsin, and decreased freight revenue per revenue ton-mile. Freight revenue per revenue ton-mile decreased due to the unfavourable impact of lower fuel surcharge revenue as a result of lower fuel prices.\n\nCoal revenue was $682 million in 2019, an increase of $9 million, or 1%, from $673 million in 2018. This increase was primarily due to higher freight revenue per revenue ton-mile. This increase was partially offset by lower volumes of Canadian coal, driven by supply chain challenges at both the mines and the ports. Freight revenue per revenue ton-mile increased due to higher freight rates. RTMs decreased while carloads remained flat due to moving proportionately higher volumes of short haul U.S. coal.\n\n## Potash\n\nFX\tadjusted\t%\tchange\tdoes\tnot\thave\tany\tstandardized\tmeaning\tprescribed\tby\tGAAP\tand,\ttherefore,\tis\tunlikely\tto\tbe\tcomparable\tto\tsimilar\tmeasures\tpresented\tby\tother\tcompanies.\tFX\tadjusted %\tchange\tis\tdefined\tand\treconciled\tin\tNon-GAAP\tMeasures\tof\tthis\tItem\t7.\tManagement's\tDiscussion\tand\tAnalysis\tof\tFinancial\tCondition\tand\tResults\tof\tOperations. (1)\n\nPotash revenue was $493 million in 2020, an increase of $31 million, or 7%, from $462 million in 2019. This increase was primarily due to higher volumes of export potash following resolved international contract negotiations, higher freight rates, and the favourable impact of the change in FX. This increase was partially offset by decreased freight revenue per revenue ton-mile due to lower fuel surcharge revenue as a result of lower fuel prices.", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "CP 2020 ANNUAL REPORT 48\n\nrevenue ton-mile decreased due to moving proportionately higher volumes of long haul soybeans and corn to U.S. Pacific Northwest, which also caused RTMs to increase more than carloads, and lower fuel surcharge revenue as a result of lower fuel prices.\n\nGrain revenue was $1,684 million in 2019, an increase of $118 million, or 8%, from $1,566 million in 2018. This increase was primarily due to increased freight revenue per revenue ton-mile, higher volumes of regulated Canadian grain, and the favourable impact of the change in FX. This increase was partially offset by lower volumes of U.S. grain, primarily corn, to the U.S. Pacific Northwest. Freight revenue per revenue ton-mile increased due to higher freight rates, primarily for regulated Canadian grain.\n\nCoal revenue was $566 million in 2020, a decrease of $116 million, or 17%, from $682 million in 2019. This decrease was primarily due to lower volumes of Canadian coal primarily to Vancouver, driven by supply chain challenges at both the mines and the ports, lower volumes of U.S. coal to Wisconsin, and decreased freight revenue per revenue ton-mile. Freight revenue per revenue ton-mile decreased due to the unfavourable impact of lower fuel surcharge revenue as a result of lower fuel prices.\n\nFX adjusted % change does not have any standardized meaning prescribed by GAAP and, therefore, is unlikely to be comparable to similar measures presented by other companies. FX adjusted % change is defined and reconciled in Non-GAAP Measures of this Item 7. Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations. (1) \n\nCoal revenue was $682 million in 2019, an increase of $9 million, or 1%, from $673 million in 2018. This increase was primarily due to higher freight revenue per revenue ton-mile. This increase was partially offset by lower volumes of Canadian coal, driven by supply chain challenges at both the mines and the ports. Freight revenue per revenue ton-mile increased due to higher freight rates. RTMs decreased while carloads remained flat due to moving proportionately higher volumes of short haul U.S. coal.\n\nFX adjusted % change does not have any standardized meaning prescribed by GAAP and, therefore, is unlikely to be comparable to similar measures presented by other companies. FX adjusted % change is defined and reconciled in Non-GAAP Measures of this Item 7. Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations. (1) \n\nPotash revenue was $493 million in 2020, an increase of $31 million, or 7%, from $462 million in 2019. This increase was primarily due to higher volumes of export potash following resolved international contract negotiations, higher freight rates, and the favourable impact of the change in FX. This increase was partially offset by decreased freight revenue per revenue ton-mile due to lower fuel surcharge revenue as a result of lower fuel prices.\n\n## Coal\n\n## Potash" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8967570835690735, + "doc_id": "f10d5e325696c9c2e4fef01126f6d3f75fa127c59cd68c8044a4e44cfd93359b", + "edit_distance": 0.05078125, + "f1_score": 0.9777777777777777, + "meteor": 0.9531712963801662, + "precision": 0.979757085020243, + "pred_md": "## Table of Contents\n\n- · ineffective or inadequate legal protection of intellectual property rights in certain countries;\n- · positions taken by governmental agencies regarding possible national commercial and/or security issues posed by international business operations;\n- · fluctuating raw material, commodity, energy and shipping costs;\n- · delays or restrictions in shipping materials or finished products between and within countries;\n- · geographically diverse operations and projects, and our ability to maintain appropriate business processes, procedures and internal controls, and comply with environmental, health and safety, anti-corruption and other regulatory requirements;\n- · supply chain interruptions, and service interruptions from utilities, transportation, data hosting or telecommunications providers, or other events beyond our control;\n- · failure to effectively manage a diverse workforce with different experience levels, languages, cultures, customs, business practices and worker expectations, and differing employment practices and labor issues;\n- · variations in the ability to develop relationships with local customers, suppliers and governments;\n- · fluctuations in interest rates and currency exchange rates, including the relative strength or weakness of the U.S. dollar against the Japanese yen, Israeli shekel, euro, Taiwanese dollar, Singapore dollar, Chinese yuan or Korean won;\n- · the need to provide sufficient levels of technical support in different locations around the world;\n- · performance of third party providers of outsourced functions, including certain engineering, software development, manufacturing, information technology and other activities;\n- · political instability, natural disasters, regional or global health epidemics, social unrest, terrorism or acts of war in locations where Applied has operations, suppliers or sales, or that may influence the value chain of the industries that Applied serves;\n- · challenges in hiring and integration of an increasing number of workers in new countries;\n- · the increasing need for a mobile workforce to work in or travel to different regions; and\n- · uncertainties with respect to economic growth rates in various countries, including for the manufacture and sale of semiconductors and displays in the developing economies of certain countries.\n\nAs more fully discussed in the risk factor 'The ongoing COVID-19 pandemic and global measures taken in response thereto have adversely impacted, and may continue to adversely impact, Applied's operations and financial results' above, the ongoing COVID-19 pandemic and measures taken in response by governments and businesses worldwide to contain its spread, including quarantines, facility closures, travel and logistics restrictions, border controls, and shelter in place or stay at home and social distancing orders, have adversely impacted and are expected to continue to adversely impact Applied's supply chain, manufacturing, logistics, workforce and operations, as well as the operations of Applied's customers, suppliers and partners globally.\n\n17", + "recall": 0.9758064516129032, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n- • ineffective or inadequate legal protection of intellectual property rights in certain countries;\n\n- • positions taken by governmental agencies regarding possible national commercial and/or security issues posed by international business operations;\n\n- • fluctuating raw material, commodity, energy and shipping costs;\n\n- • delays or restrictions in shipping materials or finished products between and within countries;\n\n- • geographically diverse operations and projects, and our ability to maintain appropriate business processes, procedures and internal controls, and comply with environmental, health and safety, anti-corruption and other regulatory requirements;\n\n- • supply chain interruptions, and service interruptions from utilities, transportation, data hosting or telecommunications providers, or other events beyond our control;\n\n- • failure to effectively manage a diverse workforce with different experience levels, languages, cultures, customs, business practices and worker expectations, and differing employment practices and labor issues;\n\n- • variations in the ability to develop relationships with local customers, suppliers and governments;\n\n- • fluctuations in interest rates and currency exchange rates, including the relative strength or weakness of the U.S. dollar against the Japanese yen, Israeli shekel, euro, Taiwanese dollar, Singapore dollar, Chinese yuan or Korean won;\n\n- • the need to provide sufficient levels of technical support in different locations around the world;\n\n- • performance of third party providers of outsourced functions, including certain engineering, software development, manufacturing, information technology and other activities;\n\n- • political instability, natural disasters, regional or global health epidemics, social unrest, terrorism or acts of war in locations where Applied has operations, suppliers or sales, or that may influence the value chain of the industries that Applied serves;\n\n- • challenges in hiring and integration of an increasing number of workers in new countries;\n\n- • the increasing need for a mobile workforce to work in or travel to different regions; and\n\n- • uncertainties with respect to economic growth rates in various countries, including for the manufacture and sale of semiconductors and displays in the developing economies of certain countries.\n\nAs more fully discussed in the risk factor “The ongoing COVID-19 pandemic and global measures taken in response thereto have adversely impacted, and may continue to adversely impact, Applied’s operations and financial results” above, the ongoing COVID-19 pandemic and measures taken in response by governments and businesses worldwide to contain its spread, including quarantines, facility closures, travel and logistics restrictions, border controls, and shelter in place or stay at home and social distancing orders, have adversely impacted and are expected to continue to adversely impact Applied’s supply chain, manufacturing, logistics, workforce and operations, as well as the operations of Applied’s customers, suppliers and partners globally.\n\n17" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9631690444783296, + "doc_id": "63c3407bd9b555a2884312b40a84bf8e52b65e8f9ddd5fdbfd15f00da4bfacc6", + "edit_distance": 0.03125, + "f1_score": 0.9859154929577465, + "meteor": 0.9895111957525394, + "precision": 0.9859154929577465, + "pred_md": "## FLOWSERVE CORPORATION\n\n## Schedule II - Valuation and Qualifying Accounts\n\n## For the Years Ended December 31, 2020, 2019 and 2018\n\n\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\n\n(a) Deductions\tfrom\treserve\trepresent\taccounts\twritten\toff\tand\trecoveries\trelated\tto\ttrade\taccounts\treceivables.\n\n(b) Deductions\tfrom\treserve\tresult\tfrom\tthe\texpiration\tor\tutilization\tof\tnet\toperating\tlosses\tand\tforeign\ttax\tcredits\tpreviously\treserved.\tAdditions\tin 2020\tincludes\tcapital\tloss\tcarryforward.\tRefer\tto\tNote\t19\tto\tour\tconsolidated\tfinancial\tstatements\tincluded\tin\tItem\t8\tof\tthis\tAnnual\tReport.\n\n124", + "recall": 0.9859154929577465, + "true_md": "## FLOWSERVE CORPORATION\n\n## Schedule II — Valuation and Qualifying Accounts\n\n## For the Years Ended December 31, 2020, 2019 and 2018\n\n124\n\n(a) Deductions from reserve represent accounts written off and recoveries related to trade accounts receivables.\n\n(b) Deductions from reserve result from the expiration or utilization of net operating losses and foreign tax credits previously reserved. Additions in 2020 includes capital loss carryforward. Refer to Note 19 to our consolidated financial statements included in Item 8 of this Annual Report.\n\n\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.950773402243254, + "doc_id": "8537ea103ca3975aa1ab3f7f5268da50145c2689d0d97d8b7c38e138d11d4d99", + "edit_distance": 0.03428571428571429, + "f1_score": 0.9723756906077349, + "meteor": 0.9776893229856988, + "precision": 0.9777777777777777, + "pred_md": "- · Flowserve Pump Division (\"FPD\") for custom, highly-engineered pumps, pre-configured industrial pumps, pump systems, mechanical seals, auxiliary systems and replacement parts and related services; and\n- · Flow Control Division (\"FCD\") for engineered and industrial valves, control valves, actuators and controls and related services.\n\nOur revenue sources are derived from our original equipment manufacturing and our aftermarket sales and services. Our original equipment revenues are generally related to originally designed, manufactured, distributed and installed equipment that can range from pre-configured, shortcycle products to more customized, highly-engineered equipment (\"Original Equipment\"). Our aftermarket sales and services are derived from sales of replacement equipment, as well as maintenance, advanced diagnostic, repair and retrofitting services (\"Aftermarket\"). Each of our two business segments generate Original Equipment and Aftermarket revenues.\n\nThe following table presents our customer revenues disaggregated by revenue source:\n\n77", + "recall": 0.967032967032967, + "true_md": "77\n\n- • Flowserve Pump Division (\"FPD\") for custom, highly-engineered pumps, pre-configured industrial pumps, pump systems, mechanical seals, auxiliary systems and replacement parts and related services; and\n\n- • Flow Control Division (\"FCD\") for engineered and industrial valves, control valves, actuators and controls and related services.\n\nOur revenue sources are derived from our original equipment manufacturing and our aftermarket sales and services. Our original equipment revenues are generally related to originally designed, manufactured, distributed and installed equipment that can range from pre-configured, short- cycle products to more customized, highly-engineered equipment (\"Original Equipment\"). Our aftermarket sales and services are derived from sales of replacement equipment, as well as maintenance, advanced diagnostic, repair and retrofitting services (\"Aftermarket\"). Each of our two business segments generate Original Equipment and Aftermarket revenues.\n\nThe following table presents our customer revenues disaggregated by revenue source:" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6803749333171202, + "doc_id": "5a72b6340cdb8fc9f0b59382a85233bd15c840bbaa9a3dd389523c81992bf8d5", + "edit_distance": 0.13636363636363635, + "f1_score": 0.9047619047619049, + "meteor": 0.9054545454545455, + "precision": 0.9047619047619048, + "pred_md": "CP\t2020\tANNUAL\tREPORT\n\n## CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CHANGES IN SHAREHOLDERS' EQUITY\n\nAccumulated\n\nSee Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.", + "recall": 0.9047619047619048, + "true_md": "CP 2020 ANNUAL REPORT 84\n\n## CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CHANGES IN SHAREHOLDERS’ EQUITY\n\nSee Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9578365889192739, + "doc_id": "7bc3da70d56b6feb3e49fd1a0b6f9f6db0d28082e7050e00c4e9ce2694a899b7", + "edit_distance": 0.10617283950617284, + "f1_score": 0.9933774834437085, + "meteor": 0.9884042745442388, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "29 CP\t2020\tANNUAL\tREPORT\n\nAs of December 31, 2020, CP owned and leased the following units of intermodal equipment:\n\n## Headquarters Office Building\n\nCP owns and operates a multi-building campus in Calgary encompassing the head office building, a data centre, training facility and other office and operational buildings.\n\nThe Company's main dispatch centre is located in Calgary, and is the primary dispatching facility in Canada. Rail traffic controllers coordinate and dispatch crews, and manage the day-to-day locomotive management along the network, 24 hours a day, and seven days a week. The operations centre has a complete backup system in the event of any power disruption.\n\nIn addition to fully operational redundant systems, CP has a fully integrated Business Continuity Centre, should CP's operations centre be affected by any natural disaster, fire, cyber-attack or hostile threat.\n\nCP also maintains a secondary dispatch centre located in Minneapolis, where a facility similar to the one in Calgary exists. It services the dispatching needs of locomotives and train crews working in the U.S.\n\n## Capital Expenditures\n\nThe Company incurs expenditures to expand and enhance its rail network, rolling stock and other infrastructure. These expenditures are aimed at improving efficiency and safety of our operations. Such investments are also an integral part of the Company's multi-year capital program and support growth initiatives. For further details, refer to Item 7. Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations, Liquidity and Capital Resources.\n\n## Encumbrances\n\nRefer to Item 8. Financial Statements and Supplementary Data, Note 16 Debt, for information on the Company's finance lease obligations and assets held as collateral under these agreements.\n\n## ITEM 3. LEGAL PROCEEDINGS\n\nFor further details, refer to Item 8. Financial Statements and Supplementary Data, Note 25 Commitments and contingencies.\n\nSEC regulations require the disclosure of any proceeding under environmental laws to which a government authority is a party unless the registrant reasonably believes it will not result in sanctions over a certain threshold. The Company uses a threshold of U.S. $1 million for the purposes of determining proceedings requiring disclosure.\n\n## ITEM 4. MINE SAFETY DISCLOSURES\n\nNot applicable.", + "recall": 0.9868421052631579, + "true_md": "29 CP 2020 ANNUAL REPORT\n\nAs of December 31, 2020, CP owned and leased the following units of intermodal equipment:\n\nCP owns and operates a multi-building campus in Calgary encompassing the head office building, a data centre, training facility and other office and operational buildings.\n\nThe Company's main dispatch centre is located in Calgary, and is the primary dispatching facility in Canada. Rail traffic controllers coordinate and dispatch crews, and manage the day-to-day locomotive management along the network, 24 hours a day, and seven days a week. The operations centre has a complete backup system in the event of any power disruption. \n\nIn addition to fully operational redundant systems, CP has a fully integrated Business Continuity Centre, should CP's operations centre be affected by any natural disaster, fire, cyber-attack or hostile threat.\n\nCP also maintains a secondary dispatch centre located in Minneapolis, where a facility similar to the one in Calgary exists. It services the dispatching needs of locomotives and train crews working in the U.S. \n\nThe Company incurs expenditures to expand and enhance its rail network, rolling stock and other infrastructure. These expenditures are aimed at improving efficiency and safety of our operations. Such investments are also an integral part of the Company's multi-year capital program and support growth initiatives. For further details, refer to Item 7. Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations, Liquidity and Capital Resources.\n\nRefer to Item 8. Financial Statements and Supplementary Data, Note 16 Debt, for information on the Company's finance lease obligations and assets held as collateral under these agreements.\n\nFor further details, refer to Item 8. Financial Statements and Supplementary Data, Note 25 Commitments and contingencies.\n\nSEC regulations require the disclosure of any proceeding under environmental laws to which a government authority is a party unless the registrant reasonably believes it will not result in sanctions over a certain threshold. The Company uses a threshold of U.S. $1 million for the purposes of determining proceedings requiring disclosure.\n\nNot applicable.\n\n## ITEM 4. MINE SAFETY DISCLOSURES\n\n## ITEM 3. LEGAL PROCEEDINGS\n\n## Encumbrances\n\n## Headquarters Office Building\n\n## Capital Expenditures" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9764814050972652, + "doc_id": "c89b14aaa71331f426504c7da23eb96b8b86113f37b23a466a7f9aaa3ed0bc47", + "edit_distance": 0.0641399416909621, + "f1_score": 0.9950413223140496, + "meteor": 0.9939223454954788, + "precision": 0.9966887417218543, + "pred_md": "## Table of Contents\n\n## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS OF AMERICAN AIRLINES GROUP INC .\n\nIn certain transactions, including certain aircraft financing leases and loans, the lessors, lenders and/or other parties have rights to terminate the transaction based on changes in foreign tax law, illegality or certain other events or circumstances. In such a case, we may be required to make a lump sum payment to terminate the relevant transaction.\n\nWe have general indemnity clauses in many of our airport and other real estate leases where we as lessee indemnify the lessor (and related parties) against liabilities related to our use of the leased property. Generally, these indemnifications cover liabilities resulting from the negligence of the indemnified parties, but not liabilities resulting from the gross negligence or willful misconduct of the indemnified parties. In addition, we provide environmental indemnities in many of these leases for contamination related to our use of the leased property.\n\nUnder certain contracts with third parties, we indemnify the third-party against legal liability arising out of an action by the third-party, or certain other parties. The terms of these contracts vary and the potential exposure under these indemnities cannot be determined. We have liability insurance protecting us for some of the obligations we have undertaken under these indemnities.\n\nAmerican is required to make principal and interest payments for certain special facility revenue bonds issued by municipalities primarily to build or improve airport facilities and purchase equipment, which are leased to American. The payment of principal and interest of certain special facility revenue bonds is guaranteed by AAG. As of December 31, 2020, the remaining lease payments through 2035 guaranteeing the principal and interest on these bonds are $572 million and the current carrying amount of the associated operating lease liability in the accompanying consolidated balance sheet is $321 million.\n\nAs of December 31, 2020, AAG had issued guarantees covering approximately $15.0 billion of American's secured debt (and interest thereon), including the Credit Facilities and certain EETC financings and $1.0 billion of American's special facility revenue bonds (and interest thereon).\n\n## (g) Credit Card Processing Agreements\n\nWe have agreements with companies that process customer credit card transactions for the sale of air travel and other services. Our agreements allow these credit card processing companies, under certain conditions, to hold an amount of our cash (referred to as a holdback) equal to a portion of advance ticket sales that have been processed by that company, but for which we have not yet provided the air transportation. Additional holdback requirements in the event of material adverse changes in our financial condition will reduce our liquidity in the form of unrestricted cash by the amount of the holdbacks. These credit card processing companies are not currently entitled to maintain any holdbacks pursuant to these requirements.\n\n## (h) Labor Negotiations\n\nAs of December 31, 2020, we employed approximately 102,700 active full-time equivalent (FTE) employees, of which 24,400 were employed by our wholly-owned regional subsidiaries. Of the total active FTE employees, 84% are covered by collective bargaining agreements (CBAs) with various labor unions and 43% are covered by CBAs that are currently amendable or that will become amendable within one year. Joint collective bargaining agreements (JCBAs) have been reached with post-Merger employee groups, including a new five-year JCBA ratified with the TWU-IAM Association, which represents our mainline mechanics and related, fleet service, stock clerks, maintenance control technicians and maintenance training instructors. Additionally, the post-Merger JCBAs covering our pilots and flight attendants are now amendable. The JCBA covering our passenger service employees and CBAs covering certain employee groups at our wholly-owned regional subsidiaries are also amendable.\n\n141", + "recall": 0.9933993399339934, + "true_md": "## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS OF AMERICAN AIRLINES GROUP INC .\n\nTable of Contents\n\nIn certain transactions, including certain aircraft financing leases and loans, the lessors, lenders and/or other parties have rights to terminate the transaction based on changes in foreign tax law, illegality or certain other events or circumstances. In such a case, we may be required to make a lump sum payment to terminate the relevant transaction.\n\nWe have general indemnity clauses in many of our airport and other real estate leases where we as lessee indemnify the lessor (and related parties) against liabilities related to our use of the leased property. Generally, these indemnifications cover liabilities resulting from the negligence of the indemnified parties, but not liabilities resulting from the gross negligence or willful misconduct of the indemnified parties. In addition, we provide environmental indemnities in many of these leases for contamination related to our use of the leased property.\n\nUnder certain contracts with third parties, we indemnify the third-party against legal liability arising out of an action by the third-party, or certain other parties. The terms of these contracts vary and the potential exposure under these indemnities cannot be determined. We have liability insurance protecting us for some of the obligations we have undertaken under these indemnities.\n\nAmerican is required to make principal and interest payments for certain special facility revenue bonds issued by municipalities primarily to build or improve airport facilities and purchase equipment, which are leased to American. The payment of principal and interest of certain special facility revenue bonds is guaranteed by AAG. As of December 31, 2020, the remaining lease payments through 2035 guaranteeing the principal and interest on these bonds are $572 million and the current carrying amount of the associated operating lease liability in the accompanying consolidated balance sheet is $321 million.\n\nAs of December 31, 2020, AAG had issued guarantees covering approximately $15.0 billion of American’s secured debt (and interest thereon), including the Credit Facilities and certain EETC financings and $1.0 billion of American’s special facility revenue bonds (and interest thereon).\n\nWe have agreements with companies that process customer credit card transactions for the sale of air travel and other services. Our agreements allow these credit card processing companies, under certain conditions, to hold an amount of our cash (referred to as a holdback) equal to a portion of advance ticket sales that have been processed by that company, but for which we have not yet provided the air transportation. Additional holdback requirements in the event of material adverse changes in our financial condition will reduce our liquidity in the form of unrestricted cash by the amount of the holdbacks. These credit card processing companies are not currently entitled to maintain any holdbacks pursuant to these requirements.\n\nAs of December 31, 2020, we employed approximately 102,700 active full-time equivalent (FTE) employees, of which 24,400 were employed by our wholly-owned regional subsidiaries. Of the total active FTE employees, 84% are covered by collective bargaining agreements (CBAs) with various labor unions and 43% are covered by CBAs that are currently amendable or that will become amendable within one year. Joint collective bargaining agreements (JCBAs) have been reached with post-Merger employee groups, including a new five-year JCBA ratified with the TWU-IAM Association, which represents our mainline mechanics and related, fleet service, stock clerks, maintenance control technicians and maintenance training instructors. Additionally, the post-Merger JCBAs covering our pilots and flight attendants are now amendable. The JCBA covering our passenger service employees and CBAs covering certain employee groups at our wholly-owned regional subsidiaries are also amendable.\n\n141\n\n## (h) Labor Negotiations\n\n## (g) Credit Card Processing Agreements" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9296454988231186, + "doc_id": "ec39f819e5568e321004f77297cfed495881c18832de7022402878d67aab8f42", + "edit_distance": 0.7981927710843374, + "f1_score": 0.9828571428571429, + "meteor": 0.7238637535288793, + "precision": 0.9847328244274809, + "pred_md": "## Table of Contents\n\n## Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements - (Continued)\n\nBecton, Dickinson and Company\n\n## Effects of Revenue Arrangements on Consolidated Balance Sheet\n\nDue to the nature of the majority of the Company's products and services, the Company typically does not incur costs to fulfill a contract in advance of providing the customer with goods or services. Capitalized contract costs associated with the costs to fulfill contracts for certain products in the Medication Management Solutions organizational unit are immaterial to the Company's consolidated balance sheets. The Company's costs to obtain contracts are comprised of sales commissions which are paid to the Company's employees or third party agents. The majority of the sales commissions incurred by the Company relate to revenue that is recognized over a period that is less than one year and as such, the Company has elected a practical expedient provided under ASC 606 to record the majority of its expense associated with sales commissions as it is incurred. Commissions relating to revenues recognized over a period longer than one year are recorded as assets which are amortized over the period over which the revenues underlying the commissions are recognized. Capitalized contract costs related to such commissions are immaterial to the Company's consolidated balance sheets.\n\nThe Company records contract liabilities for unearned revenue that is allocable to performance obligations, such as extended warranty and software maintenance contracts, which are performed over time as discussed further above. These contract liabilities are immaterial to the Company's consolidated financial results. The Company's liability for product warranties provided under its agreements with customers is not material to its consolidated balance sheets.\n\n## Remaining Performance Obligations\n\nThe Company's obligations relative to service contracts, which are further discussed above, and pending installations of equipment, primarily in the Company's Medication Management Solutions unit, represent unsatisfied performance obligations of the Company. The revenues under existing contracts with original expected durations of more than one year, which are attributable to products and/or services that have not yet been installed or provided, are estimated to be approximately $1.8 billion at September 30, 2019. The Company expects to recognize the majority of this revenue over the next three years.\n\nWithin the Company's Medication Management Solutions, Medication Delivery Solutions, Diagnostic Systems, and Biosciences units, some contracts also contain minimum purchase commitments of reagents or other consumables and the future sales of these consumables represent additional unsatisfied performance obligations of the Company. The revenue attributable to the unsatisfied minimum purchase commitment-related performance obligations, for contracts with original expected durations of more than one year, is estimated to be approximately $2.8 billion at September 30, 2019. This revenue will be recognized over the customer relationship period.\n\n## Disaggregation of Revenues\n\nA disaggregation of the Company's revenues by segment, organizational unit and geographic region is provided in Note 7.\n\n## Note 7 - Segment Data\n\nThe Company's organizational structure is based upon three principal business segments: BD Medical ('Medical'), BD Life Sciences ('Life Sciences') and BD Interventional (\"Interventional\"). The Company's segments are strategic businesses that are managed separately because each one develops, manufactures and markets distinct products and services.\n\n## Medical\n\nMedical produces a broad array of medical technologies and devices that are used to help improve healthcare delivery in a wide range of settings. The primary customers served by Medical are hospitals and clinics; physicians' office practices; consumers and retail pharmacies; governmental and nonprofit public health\n\n68", + "recall": 0.9809885931558935, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements — (Continued) Becton, Dickinson and Company\n\n## Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements — (Continued) Becton, Dickinson and Company\n\n## Effects of Revenue Arrangements on Consolidated Balance Sheet\n\n## Remaining Performance Obligations\n\n## Disaggregation of Revenues\n\n## Note 7 — Segment Data\n\n## Medical\n\nMedical produces a broad array of medical technologies and devices that are used to help improve healthcare delivery in a wide range of settings. The primary customers served by Medical are hospitals and clinics; physicians’ office practices; consumers and retail pharmacies; governmental and nonprofit public health\n\nThe Company's organizational structure is based upon three principal business segments: BD Medical (“Medical”), BD Life Sciences (“Life Sciences”) and BD Interventional (\"Interventional\"). The Company’s segments are strategic businesses that are managed separately because each one develops, manufactures and markets distinct products and services.\n\nA disaggregation of the Company's revenues by segment, organizational unit and geographic region is provided in Note 7.\n\nWithin the Company's Medication Management Solutions, Medication Delivery Solutions, Diagnostic Systems, and Biosciences units, some contracts also contain minimum purchase commitments of reagents or other consumables and the future sales of these consumables represent additional unsatisfied performance obligations of the Company. The revenue attributable to the unsatisfied minimum purchase commitment-related performance obligations, for contracts with original expected durations of more than one year, is estimated to be approximately $2.8 billion at September 30, 2019. This revenue will be recognized over the customer relationship period.\n\nThe Company's obligations relative to service contracts, which are further discussed above, and pending installations of equipment, primarily in the Company's Medication Management Solutions unit, represent unsatisfied performance obligations of the Company. The revenues under existing contracts with original expected durations of more than one year, which are attributable to products and/or services that have not yet been installed or provided, are estimated to be approximately $1.8 billion at September 30, 2019. The Company expects to recognize the majority of this revenue over the next three years.\n\nThe Company records contract liabilities for unearned revenue that is allocable to performance obligations, such as extended warranty and software maintenance contracts, which are performed over time as discussed further above. These contract liabilities are immaterial to the Company's consolidated financial results. The Company's liability for product warranties provided under its agreements with customers is not material to its consolidated balance sheets.\n\nDue to the nature of the majority of the Company's products and services, the Company typically does not incur costs to fulfill a contract in advance of providing the customer with goods or services. Capitalized contract costs associated with the costs to fulfill contracts for certain products in the Medication Management Solutions organizational unit are immaterial to the Company's consolidated balance sheets. The Company's costs to obtain contracts are comprised of sales commissions which are paid to the Company's employees or third party agents. The majority of the sales commissions incurred by the Company relate to revenue that is recognized over a period that is less than one year and as such, the Company has elected a practical expedient provided under ASC 606 to record the majority of its expense associated with sales commissions as it is incurred. Commissions relating to revenues recognized over a period longer than one year are recorded as assets which are amortized over the period over which the revenues underlying the commissions are recognized. Capitalized contract costs related to such commissions are immaterial to the Company's consolidated balance sheets.\n\n68" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9431436677364607, + "doc_id": "c440f9a1021acf86238d09217e3cb2d53d9166ca284fe402a76da34151e9d323", + "edit_distance": 0.10714285714285714, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9990234375, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS OF AMERICAN AIRLINES, INC.\n\nSupplemental balance sheet information related to leases was as follows (in millions, except lease term and discount rate):\n\nTable of Contents\n\nSupplemental cash flow and other information related to leases was as follows (in millions):\n\n177", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS OF AMERICAN AIRLINES, INC.\n\nSupplemental balance sheet information related to leases was as follows (in millions, except lease term and discount rate):\n\nSupplemental cash flow and other information related to leases was as follows (in millions):\n\n177" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.718280576771314, + "doc_id": "9487dec9ff0d3c6c4e14f58b50fab4f16aac563821d7a1f4eed607b3c68b24cc", + "edit_distance": 0.2812834224598931, + "f1_score": 0.9966555183946488, + "meteor": 0.6475228749075677, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "EASTGROUP PROPERTIES, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES\n\nNOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\ninitial recognition threshold in current GAAP and, instead, requires an entity to reflect its current estimate of all expected credit losses. For available for sale debt securities (EastGroup does not currently hold any and does not intend to hold any in the future), credit losses should be measured in a similar manner to current GAAP; however, Topic 326 requires that credit losses be presented as an allowance rather than a write-down. The ASUs affect entities holding financial assets and are effective for annual periods beginning after December 15, 2019, and interim periods within those fiscal years. The Company adopted ASU 2016-13 and ASU 2018-19 on January 1, 2020, and the adoption did not have a material impact on its financial condition, results of operations or disclosures.\n\nIn August 2018, the FASB issued ASU 2018-13, Fair Value Measurement (Topic 820): Disclosure Framework - Changes to the Disclosure Requirements for Fair Value Measurement. The ASU is intended to improve the effectiveness of fair value measurement disclosures. ASU 2018-13 is effective for all entities for annual periods beginning after December 15, 2019, and interim periods within those fiscal years. The Company adopted ASU 2018-13 on January 1, 2020, and the adoption did not have a material impact on its financial condition, results of operations or disclosures.\n\nIn March 2020, the FASB issued ASU 2020-04, Reference Rate Reform (Topic 848): Facilitation of the Effects of Reference Rate Reform on Financial Reporting . ASU 2020-04 contains practical expedients for reference rate reform related activities that impact debt, leases, derivatives and other contracts. The guidance in ASU 2020-04 is optional and may be elected over time as reference rate reform activities occur. During the three months ended March 31, 2020, the Company elected to apply the hedge accounting expedients related to probability and the assessments of effectiveness for future LIBOR-indexed cash flows to assume that the index upon which future hedged transactions will be based matches the index on the corresponding derivatives. Application of these expedients preserves the presentation of derivatives consistent with past presentation. The Company continues to evaluate the impact of the guidance and may apply other elections as applicable as additional changes in the market occur.\n\n## (p) Classification of Book Overdraft on Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows\n\nThe Company classifies changes in book overdraft in which the bank has not advanced cash to the Company to cover outstanding checks as an operating activity. Such amounts are included in Accounts payable, accrued expenses and prepaid rent in the Operating Activities section on the Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows.\n\n## (2) REAL ESTATE PROPERTIES AND DEVELOPMENT AND VALUE-ADD PROPERTIES\n\nThe Company's Real estate properties and Development and value-add properties at December 31, 2020 and 2019 were as follows:\n\n(1) See\tGround\tLeases\tdiscussion\tbelow\tfor\tinformation\tregarding\tthe\tCompany's\tright\tof\tuse\tassets\tfor\tground\tleases.\n\n(2) Value-add\tproperties\tare\tdefined\tas\tproperties\tthat\tare\teither\tacquired\tbut\tnot\tstabilized\tor\tcan\tbe\tconverted\tto\ta\thigher\tand\tbetter\tuse.\t\tAcquired\tproperties\tmeeting\teither\tof\tthe\tfollowing\ttwo\tconditions\tare\tconsidered\tvalue-add\tproperties: (1)\tLess\tthan\t75%\toccupied\tas\tof\tthe\tacquisition\tdate\t(or\twill\tbe\tless\tthan\t75%\toccupied\twithin\tone\tyear\tof\tacquisition\tdate\tbased\ton\tnear\tterm\tlease\troll),\tor\t(2)\t20%\tor\tgreater\tof\tthe\tacquisition\tcost\twill\tbe\tspent\tto\tredevelop\tthe\tproperty.\n\nEastGroup acquired operating properties during 2020, 2019 and 2018 as discussed in Note 1(j).\n\nThe Company sold operating properties during 2020, 2019 and 2018 as shown in the table below. The results of operations and gains and losses on sales for the properties sold during the periods presented are reported in continuing operations on the\n\n61", + "recall": 0.9933333333333333, + "true_md": "EASTGROUP PROPERTIES, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\ninitial recognition threshold in current GAAP and, instead, requires an entity to reflect its current estimate of all expected credit losses. For available for sale debt securities (EastGroup does not currently hold any and does not intend to hold any in the future), credit losses should be measured in a similar manner to current GAAP; however, Topic 326 requires that credit losses be presented as an allowance rather than a write-down. The ASUs affect entities holding financial assets and are effective for annual periods beginning after December 15, 2019, and interim periods within those fiscal years. The Company adopted ASU 2016-13 and ASU 2018-19 on January 1, 2020, and the adoption did not have a material impact on its financial condition, results of operations or disclosures.\n\nIn August 2018, the FASB issued ASU 2018-13, Fair Value Measurement (Topic 820): Disclosure Framework - Changes to the Disclosure Requirements for Fair Value Measurement. The ASU is intended to improve the effectiveness of fair value measurement disclosures. ASU 2018-13 is effective for all entities for annual periods beginning after December 15, 2019, and interim periods within those fiscal years. The Company adopted ASU 2018-13 on January 1, 2020, and the adoption did not have a material impact on its financial condition, results of operations or disclosures.\n\nIn March 2020, the FASB issued ASU 2020-04, Reference Rate Reform (Topic 848): Facilitation of the Effects of Reference Rate Reform on Financial Reporting . ASU 2020-04 contains practical expedients for reference rate reform related activities that impact debt, leases, derivatives and other contracts. The guidance in ASU 2020-04 is optional and may be elected over time as reference rate reform activities occur. During the three months ended March 31, 2020, the Company elected to apply the hedge accounting expedients related to probability and the assessments of effectiveness for future LIBOR-indexed cash flows to assume that the index upon which future hedged transactions will be based matches the index on the corresponding derivatives. Application of these expedients preserves the presentation of derivatives consistent with past presentation. The Company continues to evaluate the impact of the guidance and may apply other elections as applicable as additional changes in the market occur. (p) Classification of Book Overdraft on Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows\n\nThe Company’s Real estate properties and Development and value-add properties at December 31, 2020 and 2019 were as follows:\n\n(p) Classification of Book Overdraft on Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows The Company classifies changes in book overdraft in which the bank has not advanced cash to the Company to cover outstanding checks as an operating activity. Such amounts are included in Accounts payable, accrued expenses and prepaid rent in the Operating Activities section on the Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows.\n\n(1) See Ground Leases discussion below for information regarding the Company's right of use assets for ground leases. (2) Value-add properties are defined as properties that are either acquired but not stabilized or can be converted to a higher and better use. Acquired properties meeting either of the following two conditions are considered value-add properties: \n\n(1) See Ground Leases discussion below for information regarding the Company's right of use assets for ground leases. (2) Value-add properties are defined as properties that are either acquired but not stabilized or can be converted to a higher and better use. Acquired properties meeting either of the following two conditions are considered value-add properties: (1) Less than 75% occupied as of the acquisition date (or will be less than 75% occupied within one year of acquisition date based on near term lease roll), or (2) 20% or greater of the acquisition cost will be spent to redevelop the property.\n\nValue-add properties are defined as properties that are either acquired but not stabilized or can be converted to a higher and better use. Acquired properties meeting either of the following two conditions are considered value-add properties: (1) Less than 75% occupied as of the acquisition date (or will be less than 75% occupied within one year of acquisition date based on near term lease roll), or (2) 20% or greater of the acquisition cost will be spent to redevelop the property.\n\nEastGroup acquired operating properties during 2020, 2019 and 2018 as discussed in Note 1(j).\n\nThe Company sold operating properties during 2020, 2019 and 2018 as shown in the table below. The results of operations and gains and losses on sales for the properties sold during the periods presented are reported in continuing operations on the\n\n61\n\n## guidance and may apply other elections as applicable as additional changes in the market occur. (p) Classification of Book Overdraft on Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows The Company classifies changes in book overdraft in which the bank has not advanced cash to the Company to cover outstanding checks as an operating activity. Such amounts are included in\n\n## (2) REAL ESTATE PROPERTIES AND DEVELOPMENT AND VALUE-ADD PROPERTIES" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9648549880171465, + "doc_id": "b20d3c731aec8e6827590c722c641abb908b41dd54ef42d0595f5d2e3da2439b", + "edit_distance": 0.05844155844155844, + "f1_score": 0.9861111111111112, + "meteor": 0.9801480829457595, + "precision": 0.9888579387186629, + "pred_md": "## Table of Contents\n\n## Respiratory Solutions and Vyaire Medical\n\nOn October 3, 2016, BD sold a 50.1% controlling financial interest in its Respiratory Solutions business, a component of the Medical segment, to form a venture, Vyaire Medical. BD retained a 49.9% non-controlling interest in the new standalone entity. BD agreed to various contract manufacturing and certain logistical and transition services agreements with the new entity for a period of up to two years after the sale. In April 2018, BD completed the sale of its remaining interest in Vyaire Medical. BD received gross cash proceeds of approximately $435 million and recognized a pre-tax gain on the sale of approximately $303 million.\n\nAdditional information regarding these divestitures is contained in Note 11 to the consolidated financial statements contained in Item 8. Financial Statements and Supplementary Data, which is incorporated herein by reference.\n\n## International Operations\n\nBD's products are manufactured and sold worldwide. For reporting purposes, we organize our operations outside the United States as follows: Europe, EMA (which includes the Commonwealth of Independent States, the Middle East and Africa); Greater Asia (which includes countries in East Asia, South Asia, Southeast Asia and the Oceania region); Latin America (which includes Mexico, Central America, the Caribbean and South America); and Canada. The principal products sold by BD outside the United States are hypodermic needles and syringes; insulin syringes and pen needles; BD Hypak™ brand prefillable syringe systems; infusion therapy products, including Alaris™ infusion pumps; pharmacy automation equipment, including Pyxis™ systems; devices and services for the treatment of peripheral arterial and venous disease, cancer detection, and endstage renal disease and maintenance; synthetic and resorbable mesh, biologic implants and fixation systems to complement innovative techniques for inguinal, ventral and other hernia repair procedures; medical devices for urine drainage in the acute care hospital and home care settings; BD Vacutainer™ brand blood collection products; diagnostic systems and laboratory equipment and products; and flow cytometry instruments and reagents. BD has manufacturing operations outside the United States in Bosnia and Herzegovina, Brazil, Canada, China, Dominican Republic, France, Germany, Hungary, India, Ireland, Israel, Italy, Japan, Malaysia, Mexico, the Netherlands, Singapore, Spain, and the United Kingdom. Geographic information with respect to BD's operations is included under the heading 'Geographic Information' in Note 7 to the consolidated financial statements included in Item 8. Financial Statements and Supplementary Data.\n\nForeign economic conditions and exchange rate fluctuations have caused the profitability related to foreign revenues to fluctuate more than the profitability related to domestic revenues. BD believes its activities in some countries outside the United States involve greater risk than its domestic business due to the factors cited herein, as well as the economic environment, local commercial and economic policies and political uncertainties. See further discussion of these risks in Item 1A. Risk Factors.\n\n## Distribution\n\nBD's products are marketed and distributed in the United States and internationally through independent distribution channels, and directly to hospitals and other healthcare institutions by BD and independent sales representatives. BD uses acute care, non-acute care, laboratory and drug wholesaler distributors to broadly support our overall disposable product demand from our end user customers in the United States. In international markets, products are distributed either directly or through distributors, with the practice varying by country. Order backlog is not material to BD's business inasmuch as orders for BD products generally are received and filled on a current basis, except for items temporarily out of stock. BD's worldwide sales are not generally seasonal, with the exception of certain medical devices in the Medication Delivery Solutions business unit, and flu diagnostic products in the Diagnostic Systems business unit, which relate to seasonal diseases such as influenza. In order to service its customers, optimize logistics, lower facilities costs and reduce finished goods inventory levels, BD operates consolidated distribution facilities in both the United States and Europe. Orders are normally shipped within a matter of days after receipt.\n\n## Raw Materials and Components\n\n5", + "recall": 0.9833795013850416, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## Respiratory Solutions and Vyaire Medical\n\n## International Operations\n\n## Distribution\n\n## Raw Materials and Components\n\n5\n\nOn October 3, 2016, BD sold a 50.1% controlling financial interest in its Respiratory Solutions business, a component of the Medical segment, to form a venture, Vyaire Medical. BD retained a 49.9% non-controlling interest in the new standalone entity. BD agreed to various contract manufacturing and certain logistical and transition services agreements with the new entity for a period of up to two years after the sale. In April 2018, BD completed the sale of its remaining interest in Vyaire Medical. BD received gross cash proceeds of approximately $435 million and recognized a pre-tax gain on the sale of approximately $303 million.\n\nAdditional information regarding these divestitures is contained in Note 11 to the consolidated financial statements contained in Item 8. Financial Statements and Supplementary Data, which is incorporated herein by reference. \n\nBD’s products are manufactured and sold worldwide. For reporting purposes, we organize our operations outside the United States as follows: Europe, EMA (which includes the Commonwealth of Independent States, the Middle East and Africa); Greater Asia (which includes countries in East Asia, South Asia, Southeast Asia and the Oceania region); Latin America (which includes Mexico, Central America, the Caribbean and South America); and Canada. The principal products sold by BD outside the United States are hypodermic needles and syringes; insulin syringes and pen needles; BD Hypak™ brand prefillable syringe systems; infusion therapy products, including Alaris™ infusion pumps; pharmacy automation equipment, including Pyxis™ systems; devices and services for the treatment of peripheral arterial and venous disease, cancer detection, and end- stage renal disease and maintenance; synthetic and resorbable mesh, biologic implants and fixation systems to complement innovative techniques for inguinal, ventral and other hernia repair procedures; medical devices for urine drainage in the acute care hospital and home care settings; BD Vacutainer™ brand blood collection products; diagnostic systems and laboratory equipment and products; and flow cytometry instruments and reagents. BD has manufacturing operations outside the United States in Bosnia and Herzegovina, Brazil, Canada, China, Dominican Republic, France, Germany, Hungary, India, Ireland, Israel, Italy, Japan, Malaysia, Mexico, the Netherlands, Singapore, Spain, and the United Kingdom. Geographic information with respect to BD’s operations is included under the heading “Geographic Information” in Note 7 to the consolidated financial statements included in Item 8. Financial Statements and Supplementary Data.\n\nForeign economic conditions and exchange rate fluctuations have caused the profitability related to foreign revenues to fluctuate more than the profitability related to domestic revenues. BD believes its activities in some countries outside the United States involve greater risk than its domestic business due to the factors cited herein, as well as the economic environment, local commercial and economic policies and political uncertainties. See further discussion of these risks in Item 1A. Risk Factors.\n\nBD’s products are marketed and distributed in the United States and internationally through independent distribution channels, and directly to hospitals and other healthcare institutions by BD and independent sales representatives. BD uses acute care, non-acute care, laboratory and drug wholesaler distributors to broadly support our overall disposable product demand from our end user customers in the United States. In international markets, products are distributed either directly or through distributors, with the practice varying by country. Order backlog is not material to BD’s business inasmuch as orders for BD products generally are received and filled on a current basis, except for items temporarily out of stock. BD’s worldwide sales are not generally seasonal, with the exception of certain medical devices in the Medication Delivery Solutions business unit, and flu diagnostic products in the Diagnostic Systems business unit, which relate to seasonal diseases such as influenza. In order to service its customers, optimize logistics, lower facilities costs and reduce finished goods inventory levels, BD operates consolidated distribution facilities in both the United States and Europe. Orders are normally shipped within a matter of days after receipt." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9136107333561546, + "doc_id": "ed40cf5fa20a1f4146a2f33b76514d9b30703da1616593a031475563a4fc9074", + "edit_distance": 0.08737864077669903, + "f1_score": 0.9698890649762283, + "meteor": 0.9444029352497798, + "precision": 0.9745222929936306, + "pred_md": "## Table of Contents\n\n## ITEM 1. BUSINESS\n\n## Overview\n\nAmerican Airlines Group Inc. (AAG), a Delaware corporation, is a holding company and its principal, wholly-owned subsidiaries are American Airlines, Inc. (American), Envoy Aviation Group Inc. (Envoy), PSA Airlines, Inc. (PSA) and Piedmont Airlines, Inc. (Piedmont). AAG was formed in 1982 under the name AMR Corporation (AMR) as the parent company of American, which was founded in 1934.\n\nAAG's and American's principal executive offices are located at 1 Skyview Drive, Fort Worth, Texas 76155 and their telephone number is 817-9631234.\n\n## Airline Operations\n\nTogether with our wholly-owned regional airline subsidiaries and third-party regional carriers operating as American Eagle, our primary business activity is the operation of a major network air carrier, providing scheduled air transportation for passengers and cargo through our hubs in Charlotte, Chicago, Dallas/Fort Worth, Los Angeles, Miami, New York, Philadelphia, Phoenix and Washington, D.C. and partner gateways, including in London, Madrid, Seattle/Tacoma, Sydney and Tokyo (among others).\n\nApproximately 95 million passengers boarded our flights in 2020, a decrease from approximately 215 million passengers in 2019. During 2020, we experienced an unprecedented decline in the demand for air travel due to the impact of coronavirus (COVID-19). COVID-19 has been declared a global health pandemic by the World Health Organization and has surfaced in nearly all regions of the world, which has driven the implementation of significant, government-imposed measures to prevent or reduce its spread, including travel restrictions, testing regimes, closing of borders, 'stay at home' orders and business closures. While the length and severity of the reduction in demand due to the COVID-19 pandemic is uncertain, our business, operations and financial condition in 2020 was severely impacted.\n\nAs of December 31, 2020, we operated 855 mainline aircraft supported by our regional airline subsidiaries and third-party regional carriers, which operated an additional 544 regional aircraft. See Part I, Item 2. Properties for further discussion on our mainline and regional aircraft and ' Regional ' below for further discussion on our regional operations.\n\nAmerican is a founding member of the one world ® Alliance, which brings together a global network of 13 world-class member airlines and their affiliates, working together to provide a superior and seamless travel experience. See below for further discussion on the one world Alliance and other agreements with domestic and international airlines.\n\nSee Part II, Item 7. Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations '2020 Financial Overview,' 'AAG's Results of Operations' and 'American's Results of Operations' for further discussion of AAG's and American's operating results and operating performance. Also, see Note 14 to AAG's Consolidated Financial Statements in Part II, Item 8A and Note 12 to American's Consolidated Financial Statements in Part II, Item 8B for information regarding operating segments and see Note 1(l) to each of AAG's and American's Consolidated Financial Statements in Part II, Items 8A and 8B, respectively, for passenger revenue by geographic region.\n\n## Regional\n\nOur regional carriers provide scheduled air transportation under the brand name 'American Eagle.' The American Eagle carriers include our whollyowned regional carriers Envoy, PSA and Piedmont, as well as third-party regional carriers including Republic Airways Inc. (Republic), SkyWest Airlines, Inc. (SkyWest), and Mesa Airlines, Inc. (Mesa). In addition, Compass Airlines, LLC operated regional jet aircraft for us during 2020; however, this arrangement ended in April 2020. Our regional carriers are an integral component of our operating network. We rely heavily on regional carriers to drive feeder traffic to our hubs from low-density markets that are not economical for us to serve with larger, mainline aircraft. In addition, regional carriers offer complementary service in many of our mainline markets. All American Eagle carriers use logos, service marks, aircraft paint schemes and uniforms similar to those of our mainline operations. In 2020, approximately 30 million passengers boarded our regional carriers' planes, approximately 48% of whom connected to or from our mainline flights, a decrease from approximately 59 million passengers in 2019, due to the effects of the COVID-19 pandemic.\n\n7\n\n## PART I", + "recall": 0.9652996845425867, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## PART I\n\n## ITEM 1. BUSINESS\n\n## Overview\n\n## Airline Operations\n\n## Regional\n\nAmerican Airlines Group Inc. (AAG), a Delaware corporation, is a holding company and its principal, wholly-owned subsidiaries are American Airlines, Inc. (American), Envoy Aviation Group Inc. (Envoy), PSA Airlines, Inc. (PSA) and Piedmont Airlines, Inc. (Piedmont). AAG was formed in 1982 under the name AMR Corporation (AMR) as the parent company of American, which was founded in 1934.\n\nAAG’s and American’s principal executive offices are located at 1 Skyview Drive, Fort Worth, Texas 76155 and their telephone number is 817-963- 1234.\n\nTogether with our wholly-owned regional airline subsidiaries and third-party regional carriers operating as American Eagle, our primary business activity is the operation of a major network air carrier, providing scheduled air transportation for passengers and cargo through our hubs in Charlotte, Chicago, Dallas/Fort Worth, Los Angeles, Miami, New York, Philadelphia, Phoenix and Washington, D.C. and partner gateways, including in London, Madrid, Seattle/Tacoma, Sydney and Tokyo (among others).\n\nApproximately 95 million passengers boarded our flights in 2020, a decrease from approximately 215 million passengers in 2019. During 2020, we experienced an unprecedented decline in the demand for air travel due to the impact of coronavirus (COVID-19). COVID-19 has been declared a global health pandemic by the World Health Organization and has surfaced in nearly all regions of the world, which has driven the implementation of significant, government-imposed measures to prevent or reduce its spread, including travel restrictions, testing regimes, closing of borders, “stay at home” orders and business closures. While the length and severity of the reduction in demand due to the COVID-19 pandemic is uncertain, our business, operations and financial condition in 2020 was severely impacted.\n\nAs of December 31, 2020, we operated 855 mainline aircraft supported by our regional airline subsidiaries and third-party regional carriers, which operated an additional 544 regional aircraft. See Part I, Item 2. Properties for further discussion on our mainline and regional aircraft and “ Regional ” below for further discussion on our regional operations.\n\nAmerican is a founding member of the one world Alliance, which brings together a global network of 13 world-class member airlines and their affiliates, working together to provide a superior and seamless travel experience. See below for further discussion on the one world Alliance and other agreements with domestic and international airlines. ®\n\nSee Part II, Item 7. Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations – “2020 Financial Overview,” “AAG’s Results of Operations” and “American’s Results of Operations” for further discussion of AAG’s and American’s operating results and operating performance. Also, see Note 14 to AAG’s Consolidated Financial Statements in Part II, Item 8A and Note 12 to American’s Consolidated Financial Statements in Part II, Item 8B for information regarding operating segments and see Note 1(l) to each of AAG’s and American’s Consolidated Financial Statements in Part II, Items 8A and 8B, respectively, for passenger revenue by geographic region.\n\nOur regional carriers provide scheduled air transportation under the brand name “American Eagle.” The American Eagle carriers include our wholly- owned regional carriers Envoy, PSA and Piedmont, as well as third-party regional carriers including Republic Airways Inc. (Republic), SkyWest Airlines, Inc. (SkyWest), and Mesa Airlines, Inc. (Mesa). In addition, Compass Airlines, LLC operated regional jet aircraft for us during 2020; however, this arrangement ended in April 2020. Our regional carriers are an integral component of our operating network. We rely heavily on regional carriers to drive feeder traffic to our hubs from low-density markets that are not economical for us to serve with larger, mainline aircraft. In addition, regional carriers offer complementary service in many of our mainline markets. All American Eagle carriers use logos, service marks, aircraft paint schemes and uniforms similar to those of our mainline operations. In 2020, approximately 30 million passengers boarded our regional carriers’ planes, approximately 48% of whom connected to or from our mainline flights, a decrease from approximately 59 million passengers in 2019, due to the effects of the COVID-19 pandemic.\n\n7" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.985949604343864, + "doc_id": "3d16ea57ae965a950d5709cbb1955c48a326ca3e0dc6dbb67147418d86791ad7", + "edit_distance": 0.012145748987854251, + "f1_score": 0.9852744310575635, + "meteor": 0.9900599453419795, + "precision": 0.9865951742627346, + "pred_md": "## Table of Contents\n\n## Risks Related to the Airline Industry\n\n## The airline industry is intensely competitive and dynamic.\n\nOur competitors include other major domestic airlines and foreign, regional and new entrant airlines, as well as joint ventures formed by some of these airlines, many of which have more financial or other resources and/or lower cost structures than ours, as well as other forms of transportation, including rail and private automobiles. In many of our markets, we compete with at least one low-cost carrier (including so-called ultra-low-cost carriers). Our revenues are sensitive to the actions of other carriers in many areas, including pricing, scheduling, capacity, fees (including cancellation, change and baggage fees), amenities, loyalty benefits and promotions, which can have a substantial adverse impact not only on our revenues, but on overall industry revenues. These factors may become even more significant in periods when the industry experiences large losses (such as the current one caused by the COVID-19 pandemic), as airlines under financial stress, or in bankruptcy, may institute pricing or fee structures intended to attract more customers to achieve near term survival at the expense of long-term viability.\n\nLow-cost carriers (including so-called ultra-low-cost carriers) have a profound impact on industry revenues. Using the advantage of low unit costs, these carriers offer lower fares in order to shift demand from larger, more established airlines, and represent significant competitors, particularly for customers who fly infrequently, are price sensitive and therefore tend not to be loyal to any one particular carrier. A number of these low-cost carriers have announced growth strategies including commitments to acquire significant numbers of new aircraft for delivery in the next few years. These low-cost carriers are attempting to continue to increase their market share through growth and several new entrants have announced their intention to start up new ultra-low-cost carriers and, potentially, consolidation, and are expected to continue to have an impact on our revenues and overall performance. We and several other large network carriers have implemented 'Basic Economy' fares designed to more effectively compete against low-cost carriers, but we cannot predict whether these initiatives will be successful. While historically these carriers have provided competition in domestic markets, we have recently experienced new competition from low-cost carriers on international routes, including low-cost airlines executing international long-haul expansion strategies, a trend likely to continue with the delivery of planned, long-range narrowbody aircraft. The actions of existing or future low-cost carriers, including those described above, could have a material adverse effect on our operations and financial performance.\n\nWe provide air travel internationally, directly as well as through joint businesses, alliances, codeshare and similar arrangements to which we are a party. While our network is comprehensive, compared to some of our key global competitors, we generally have somewhat greater relative exposure to certain regions (for example, Latin America) and somewhat lower relative exposure to others (for example, China). Our financial performance relative to our key competitors will therefore be influenced significantly by macro-economic conditions in particular regions around the world and the relative exposure of our network to the markets in those regions, including the duration of declines in demand for travel to specific regions as a result of the continuing outbreak of COVID-19 and the speed with which demand for travel to these regions returns.\n\nIn providing international air transportation, we compete to provide scheduled passenger and cargo service between the U.S. and various overseas locations with U.S. airlines, foreign investor-owned airlines and foreign state-owned or state-affiliated airlines. Before the COVID-19 pandemic, competition had been increasing from foreign state-owned and state-affiliated airlines in the Gulf region. These carriers have large numbers of international widebody aircraft in service and on order and had been increasing service to the U.S. from locations both in and outside the Middle East. Service to and from locations outside of the Middle East was provided by some of these carriers under so-called 'fifth freedom' rights permitted under international treaties which allow service to and from stopover points between an airline's home country and the ultimate destination. Such flights, such as a stopover in Europe on flights to the United States, allow the carrier to sell tickets for travel between the stopover point and the United States in competition with service provided by us. We believe these state-owned and state-affiliated carriers in the Gulf region, including their affiliated carriers, benefit from significant government subsidies, which have allowed them to grow quickly, reinvest in their product and expand their global presence. We expect this to continue after the COVID-19 pandemic subsides.\n\nOur international service exposes us to foreign economies and the potential for reduced demand when any foreign country we serve suffers adverse local economic conditions or if governments restrict commercial air service to or from any of these markets. For example, the COVID-19 pandemic has resulted in a precipitous decline in demand for air travel, in particular international travel, in part as a result of the imposition by the U.S. and foreign governments of restrictions on travel from certain regions. In addition, open skies agreements, which are now in place with a substantial number of countries around the world, provide international airlines with open access to U.S. markets, potentially subjecting us to increased competition on our international routes. See also 'Our business is subject to extensive government regulation,\n\n38", + "recall": 0.983957219251337, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## Risks Related to the Airline Industry\n\n## The airline industry is intensely competitive and dynamic.\n\nOur competitors include other major domestic airlines and foreign, regional and new entrant airlines, as well as joint ventures formed by some of these airlines, many of which have more financial or other resources and/or lower cost structures than ours, as well as other forms of transportation, including rail and private automobiles. In many of our markets, we compete with at least one low-cost carrier (including so-called ultra-low-cost carriers). Our revenues are sensitive to the actions of other carriers in many areas, including pricing, scheduling, capacity, fees (including cancellation, change and baggage fees), amenities, loyalty benefits and promotions, which can have a substantial adverse impact not only on our revenues, but on overall industry revenues. These factors may become even more significant in periods when the industry experiences large losses (such as the current one caused by the COVID-19 pandemic), as airlines under financial stress, or in bankruptcy, may institute pricing or fee structures intended to attract more customers to achieve near term survival at the expense of long-term viability.\n\nLow-cost carriers (including so-called ultra-low-cost carriers) have a profound impact on industry revenues. Using the advantage of low unit costs, these carriers offer lower fares in order to shift demand from larger, more established airlines, and represent significant competitors, particularly for customers who fly infrequently, are price sensitive and therefore tend not to be loyal to any one particular carrier. A number of these low-cost carriers have announced growth strategies including commitments to acquire significant numbers of new aircraft for delivery in the next few years. These low-cost carriers are attempting to continue to increase their market share through growth and several new entrants have announced their intention to start up new ultra-low-cost carriers and, potentially, consolidation, and are expected to continue to have an impact on our revenues and overall performance. We and several other large network carriers have implemented “Basic Economy” fares designed to more effectively compete against low-cost carriers, but we cannot predict whether these initiatives will be successful. While historically these carriers have provided competition in domestic markets, we have recently experienced new competition from low-cost carriers on international routes, including low-cost airlines executing international long-haul expansion strategies, a trend likely to continue with the delivery of planned, long-range narrowbody aircraft. The actions of existing or future low-cost carriers, including those described above, could have a material adverse effect on our operations and financial performance.\n\nWe provide air travel internationally, directly as well as through joint businesses, alliances, codeshare and similar arrangements to which we are a party. While our network is comprehensive, compared to some of our key global competitors, we generally have somewhat greater relative exposure to certain regions (for example, Latin America) and somewhat lower relative exposure to others (for example, China). Our financial performance relative to our key competitors will therefore be influenced significantly by macro-economic conditions in particular regions around the world and the relative exposure of our network to the markets in those regions, including the duration of declines in demand for travel to specific regions as a result of the continuing outbreak of COVID-19 and the speed with which demand for travel to these regions returns.\n\nIn providing international air transportation, we compete to provide scheduled passenger and cargo service between the U.S. and various overseas locations with U.S. airlines, foreign investor-owned airlines and foreign state-owned or state-affiliated airlines. Before the COVID-19 pandemic, competition had been increasing from foreign state-owned and state-affiliated airlines in the Gulf region. These carriers have large numbers of international widebody aircraft in service and on order and had been increasing service to the U.S. from locations both in and outside the Middle East. Service to and from locations outside of the Middle East was provided by some of these carriers under so-called “fifth freedom” rights permitted under international treaties which allow service to and from stopover points between an airline’s home country and the ultimate destination. Such flights, such as a stopover in Europe on flights to the United States, allow the carrier to sell tickets for travel between the stopover point and the United States in competition with service provided by us. We believe these state-owned and state-affiliated carriers in the Gulf region, including their affiliated carriers, benefit from significant government subsidies, which have allowed them to grow quickly, reinvest in their product and expand their global presence. We expect this to continue after the COVID-19 pandemic subsides.\n\nOur international service exposes us to foreign economies and the potential for reduced demand when any foreign country we serve suffers adverse local economic conditions or if governments restrict commercial air service to or from any of these markets. For example, the COVID-19 pandemic has resulted in a precipitous decline in demand for air travel, in particular international travel, in part as a result of the imposition by the U.S. and foreign governments of restrictions on travel from certain regions. In addition, open skies agreements, which are now in place with a substantial number of countries around the world, provide international airlines with open access to U.S. markets, potentially subjecting us to increased competition on our international routes. See also “Our business is subject to extensive government regulation,\n\n38" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.650668436472138, + "doc_id": "18e088ed25316b4885074914b44cbb1c4a04ae438c33659e4fc4f7a8436a3d78", + "edit_distance": 0.3032191069574247, + "f1_score": 0.9855072463768116, + "meteor": 0.6458719934569033, + "precision": 0.9916666666666667, + "pred_md": "- · the efficiencies generated from improved operating performance and asset utilization; and\n- · a gain as a result of the remeasurement to fair value of the previously held equity investment in DRTP.\n\nThis improvement was partially offset by:\n\n- · higher depreciation and amortization;\n- · cost inflation; and\n- · higher stock-based compensation.\n\nThe Company's Operating ratio was 59.9% in 2019, a 140 basis point improvement from 61.3% in 2018. This improvement was primarily due to:\n\n- · higher freight rates;\n- · the favourable impact of changes in fuel prices; and\n- · the efficiencies generated from improved operating performance and asset utilization.\n\nThis improvement was partially offset by:\n\n- · increased operating expense associated with higher casualty costs in 2019;\n- · higher stock-based compensation; and\n- · cost inflation.\n\n## Return on Average Shareholders' Equity and Adjusted Return on Invested Capital\n\nReturn on average shareholders' equity and Adjusted return on invested capital (\"Adjusted ROIC\") are measures used by management to determine how productively the Company uses its long-term capital investments, representing critical indicators of good operating and investment decisions. Adjusted ROIC is also an important performance criteria in determining certain elements of the Company's long-term incentive plan.\n\nReturn on average shareholders' equity was 34.0% in 2020, a 160 basis point decrease compared to 35.6% in 2019. This decrease was due to higher average shareholders' equity due to accumulated Net income, partially offset by the impact of the Company's share repurchase program.\n\nReturn on average shareholders' equity was 35.6% in 2019, a 580 basis point increase compared to 29.8% in 2018. This increase was due to higher Net income. This increase was partially offset by higher average shareholders' equity due to accumulated Net income, partially offset by the impact of the Company's share repurchase program.\n\nAdjusted ROIC was 16.7% in 2020, a 20 basis point decrease compared to 16.9% in 2019. This decrease was primarily due to higher average long-term debt, partially offset by higher Operating income.\n\nAdjusted ROIC was 16.9% in 2019, a 70 basis point increase compared to 16.2% in 2018. This increase was primarily due to higher Operating income. This increase was partially offset by the increase in adjusted average invested capital primarily due to higher Adjusted income, partially offset by lower Common Shares due to the Company's share repurchase program.\n\nAdjusted ROIC is a Non-GAAP measure, which is defined and reconciled from Return on average shareholders' equity, the most comparable measure calculated in accordance with GAAP, in Non-GAAP Measures of this Item 7. Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations.\n\n## Impact of Foreign Exchange on Earnings\n\nFluctuations in FX affect the Company's results because U.S. dollar-denominated revenues and expenses are translated into Canadian dollars. U.S. dollardenominated revenues and expenses increase (decrease) when the Canadian dollar weakens (strengthens) in relation to the U.S. dollar.\n\nOn February 12, 2021, the noon buying rate certified for customs purposes by the U.S. Federal Reserve Bank of New York was U.S. $1.00 = $1.27 Canadian dollars.\n\nThe following tables set forth, for the periods indicated, the average exchange rate between the Canadian dollar and the U.S. dollar expressed in the Canadian dollar equivalent of one U.S. dollar, the period end exchange rates, and the high and low exchange rates for the periods indicated. Average exchange rates are calculated by using the exchange rates on the last day of each full month during the relevant period. These rates are based on the noon buying rate certified for customs purposes by the U.S. Federal Reserve Bank of New York set forth in the H.10 statistical release of the Federal Reserve Board.\n\nCP\t2020\tANNUAL\tREPORT\n\n44", + "recall": 0.9794238683127572, + "true_md": "CP 2020 ANNUAL REPORT 44\n\n- • the efficiencies generated from improved operating performance and asset utilization; and • a gain as a result of the remeasurement to fair value of the previously held equity investment in DRTP.\n\n- • the efficiencies generated from improved operating performance and asset utilization; and • a gain as a result of the remeasurement to fair value of the previously held equity investment in DRTP.\n\n- This improvement was partially offset by: • higher depreciation and amortization; • cost inflation; and\n\n- • higher depreciation and amortization; • cost inflation; and • higher stock-based compensation.\n\n- • cost inflation; and • higher stock-based compensation.\n\n- The Company’s Operating ratio was 59.9% in 2019, a 140 basis point improvement from 61.3% in 2018. This improvement was primarily due to: • higher freight rates; • the favourable impact of changes in fuel prices; and\n\n- • higher freight rates; • the favourable impact of changes in fuel prices; and • the efficiencies generated from improved operating performance and asset utilization.\n\n- • the favourable impact of changes in fuel prices; and • the efficiencies generated from improved operating performance and asset utilization.\n\n- This improvement was partially offset by: • increased operating expense associated with higher casualty costs in 2019; • higher stock-based compensation; and\n\n- • increased operating expense associated with higher casualty costs in 2019; • higher stock-based compensation; and • cost inflation.\n\n- • higher stock-based compensation; and • cost inflation.\n\nThis improvement was partially offset by: • higher depreciation and amortization;\n\nThe Company’s Operating ratio was 59.9% in 2019, a 140 basis point improvement from 61.3% in 2018. This improvement was primarily due to: • higher freight rates;\n\nThis improvement was partially offset by: • increased operating expense associated with higher casualty costs in 2019;\n\nReturn on Average Shareholders' Equity and Adjusted Return on Invested Capital Return on average shareholders' equity and Adjusted return on invested capital (\"Adjusted ROIC\") are measures used by management to determine how productively the Company uses its long-term capital investments, representing critical indicators of good operating and investment decisions. Adjusted ROIC is also an important performance criteria in determining certain elements of the Company's long-term incentive plan.\n\nReturn on average shareholders' equity was 34.0% in 2020, a 160 basis point decrease compared to 35.6% in 2019. This decrease was due to higher average shareholders' equity due to accumulated Net income, partially offset by the impact of the Company's share repurchase program.\n\nReturn on average shareholders' equity was 35.6% in 2019, a 580 basis point increase compared to 29.8% in 2018. This increase was due to higher Net income. This increase was partially offset by higher average shareholders' equity due to accumulated Net income, partially offset by the impact of the Company's share repurchase program.\n\nAdjusted ROIC was 16.7% in 2020, a 20 basis point decrease compared to 16.9% in 2019. This decrease was primarily due to higher average long-term debt, partially offset by higher Operating income.\n\nAdjusted ROIC was 16.9% in 2019, a 70 basis point increase compared to 16.2% in 2018. This increase was primarily due to higher Operating income. This increase was partially offset by the increase in adjusted average invested capital primarily due to higher Adjusted income, partially offset by lower Common Shares due to the Company's share repurchase program.\n\nAdjusted ROIC is a Non-GAAP measure, which is defined and reconciled from Return on average shareholders' equity, the most comparable measure calculated in accordance with GAAP, in Non-GAAP Measures of this Item 7. Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations.\n\nImpact of Foreign Exchange on Earnings Fluctuations in FX affect the Company’s results because U.S. dollar-denominated revenues and expenses are translated into Canadian dollars. U.S. dollar- denominated revenues and expenses increase (decrease) when the Canadian dollar weakens (strengthens) in relation to the U.S. dollar.\n\nOn February 12, 2021, the noon buying rate certified for customs purposes by the U.S. Federal Reserve Bank of New York was U.S. $1.00 = $1.27 Canadian dollars.\n\nThe following tables set forth, for the periods indicated, the average exchange rate between the Canadian dollar and the U.S. dollar expressed in the Canadian dollar equivalent of one U.S. dollar, the period end exchange rates, and the high and low exchange rates for the periods indicated. Average exchange rates are calculated by using the exchange rates on the last day of each full month during the relevant period. These rates are based on the noon buying rate certified for customs purposes by the U.S. Federal Reserve Bank of New York set forth in the H.10 statistical release of the Federal Reserve Board.\n\n## Impact of Foreign Exchange on Earnings Fluctuations in FX affect the Company’s results because U.S. dollar-denominated revenues and expenses are translated into Canadian dollars. U.S. dollar-\n\n## Return on Average Shareholders' Equity and Adjusted Return on Invested Capital Return on average shareholders' equity and Adjusted return on invested capital (\"Adjusted ROIC\") are measures used by management to determine how" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8104080905524761, + "doc_id": "e33e42be977af884aa085c7dbd22821d3d896d43942f2f59f4f81048f5d2c1e1", + "edit_distance": 0.26993865030674846, + "f1_score": 0.9724770642201837, + "meteor": 0.7923986315804669, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "CP\t2020\tANNUAL\tREPORT\n\nIn 2020, the Company generated Freight revenues totalling $7,541 million ($7,613 million in 2019 and $7,152 million in 2018). The following charts compare the percentage of the Company's total Freight revenues derived from each of the three major business lines in 2020, 2019 and 2018:\n\n2020 Freight Revenues\n\n2020 Freight Revenues\n\n2019 Freight Revenues\n\n2018 Freight Revenues\n\n## BULK\n\nThe Company's Bulk business represented approximately 43% of total Freight revenues in 2020.\n\nThe following charts compare the percentage of the Company's Bulk freight revenues by commodity business in 2020, 2019 and 2018:\n\n2020 Bulk Revenues (43% of Freight Revenues)\n\n2020 Bulk Revenues (43% of Freight Revenues)\n\n2019 Bulk Revenues (40% of Freight Revenues)\n\n2018 Bulk Revenues (41% of Freight Revenues)\n\n2018 Bulk Revenues (41% of Freight Revenues)", + "recall": 0.9464285714285714, + "true_md": "7 CP 2020 ANNUAL REPORT\n\nIn 2020, the Company generated Freight revenues totalling $7,541 million ($7,613 million in 2019 and $7,152 million in 2018). The following charts compare the percentage of the Company’s total Freight revenues derived from each of the three major business lines in 2020, 2019 and 2018:\n\nBULK The Company’s Bulk business represented approximately 43% of total Freight revenues in 2020.\n\nThe following charts compare the percentage of the Company's Bulk freight revenues by commodity business in 2020, 2019 and 2018:\n\n## BULK The Company’s Bulk business represented approximately 43% of total Freight revenues in 2020.\n\n2020 Freight Revenues\n\n2019 Freight Revenues\n\n2018 Freight Revenues\n\n2020 Bulk Revenues (43% of Freight Revenues)\n\n2019 Bulk Revenues (40% of Freight Revenues)\n\n2018 Bulk Revenues (41% of Freight Revenues)" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "1c8d13b4e5048b8676892a6d1afb45b03ce2764341f9ffdd0047597c0ddb1556", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9921875, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Table of Contents\n\n225", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n225" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9577787572865123, + "doc_id": "3317a125e6a036b79918f773608ecbb4fd27d350a99137247ee67cfb00d32327", + "edit_distance": 0.7959183673469388, + "f1_score": 0.9855670103092785, + "meteor": 0.7417721103762913, + "precision": 0.987603305785124, + "pred_md": "## Table of Contents\n\n## ITEM 8A. CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS AND SUPPLEMENTARY DATA OF AMERICAN AIRLINES GROUP INC.\n\n## Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm\n\nTo the Stockholders and Board of Directors American Airlines Group Inc.:\n\n## Opinion on the Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nWe have audited the accompanying consolidated balance sheets of American Airlines Group Inc. and subsidiaries (the Company) as of December 31, 2020 and 2019, the related consolidated statements of operations, comprehensive income (loss), cash flows, and stockholders' equity (deficit) for each of the years in the three-year period ended December 31, 2020, and the related notes (collectively, the consolidated financial statements). In our opinion, the consolidated financial statements present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of the Company as of December 31, 2020 and 2019, and the results of its operations and its cash flows for each of the years in the three-year period ended December 31, 2020, in conformity with U.S. generally accepted accounting principles.\n\nWe also have audited, in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States) (PCAOB), the Company's internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2020, based on criteria established in Internal Control -Integrated Framework (2013) issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission, and our report dated February 17, 2021 expressed an unqualified opinion on the effectiveness of the Company's internal control over financial reporting.\n\n## Basis for Opinion\n\nThese consolidated financial statements are the responsibility of the Company's management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these consolidated financial statements based on our audits. We are a public accounting firm registered with the PCAOB and are required to be independent with respect to the Company in accordance with the U.S. federal securities laws and the applicable rules and regulations of the Securities and Exchange Commission and the PCAOB.\n\nWe conducted our audits in accordance with the standards of the PCAOB. Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the consolidated financial statements are free of material misstatement, whether due to error or fraud. Our audits included performing procedures to assess the risks of material misstatement of the consolidated financial statements, whether due to error or fraud, and performing procedures that respond to those risks. Such procedures included examining, on a test basis, evidence regarding the amounts and disclosures in the consolidated financial statements. Our audits also included evaluating the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall presentation of the consolidated financial statements. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.\n\n## Critical Audit Matters\n\nThe critical audit matters communicated below are matters arising from the current period audit of the consolidated financial statements that were communicated or required to be communicated to the audit committee and that: (1) relate to accounts or disclosures that are material to the consolidated financial statements and (2) involved our especially challenging, subjective, or complex judgments. The communication of critical audit matters does not alter in any way our opinion on the consolidated financial statements, taken as a whole, and we are not, by communicating the critical audit matters below, providing separate opinions on the critical audit matters or on the accounts or disclosures to which they relate.\n\n89", + "recall": 0.9835390946502057, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## ITEM 8A. CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS AND SUPPLEMENTARY DATA OF AMERICAN AIRLINES GROUP INC.\n\n## Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm\n\n## Opinion on the Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n## Basis for Opinion\n\n## Critical Audit Matters\n\n89\n\nThe critical audit matters communicated below are matters arising from the current period audit of the consolidated financial statements that were communicated or required to be communicated to the audit committee and that: (1) relate to accounts or disclosures that are material to the consolidated financial statements and (2) involved our especially challenging, subjective, or complex judgments. The communication of critical audit matters does not alter in any way our opinion on the consolidated financial statements, taken as a whole, and we are not, by communicating the critical audit matters below, providing separate opinions on the critical audit matters or on the accounts or disclosures to which they relate.\n\nWe conducted our audits in accordance with the standards of the PCAOB. Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the consolidated financial statements are free of material misstatement, whether due to error or fraud. Our audits included performing procedures to assess the risks of material misstatement of the consolidated financial statements, whether due to error or fraud, and performing procedures that respond to those risks. Such procedures included examining, on a test basis, evidence regarding the amounts and disclosures in the consolidated financial statements. Our audits also included evaluating the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall presentation of the consolidated financial statements. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.\n\nThese consolidated financial statements are the responsibility of the Company’s management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these consolidated financial statements based on our audits. We are a public accounting firm registered with the PCAOB and are required to be independent with respect to the Company in accordance with the U.S. federal securities laws and the applicable rules and regulations of the Securities and Exchange Commission and the PCAOB.\n\nWe also have audited, in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States) (PCAOB), the Company’s internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2020, based on criteria established in Internal Control – Integrated Framework (2013) issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission, and our report dated February 17, 2021 expressed an unqualified opinion on the effectiveness of the Company’s internal control over financial reporting.\n\nWe have audited the accompanying consolidated balance sheets of American Airlines Group Inc. and subsidiaries (the Company) as of December 31, 2020 and 2019, the related consolidated statements of operations, comprehensive income (loss), cash flows, and stockholders’ equity (deficit) for each of the years in the three-year period ended December 31, 2020, and the related notes (collectively, the consolidated financial statements). In our opinion, the consolidated financial statements present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of the Company as of December 31, 2020 and 2019, and the results of its operations and its cash flows for each of the years in the three-year period ended December 31, 2020, in conformity with U.S. generally accepted accounting principles.\n\nTo the Stockholders and Board of Directors American Airlines Group Inc.:" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8905254595682035, + "doc_id": "b4bbf465dd4d7743919ddb9db978dc2438b5dd1ccbc961382ca70982fc4be023", + "edit_distance": 0.15337423312883436, + "f1_score": 0.9873772791023844, + "meteor": 0.8268864411528887, + "precision": 0.9859943977591037, + "pred_md": "can be given that the effects of an adverse economic situation will not have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations.\n\nWe may fail to qualify as a REIT. If we fail to qualify as a REIT, we will not be allowed to deduct dividends to stockholders in computing our taxable income and will be subject to federal income tax at regular corporate rates. In addition, we may be barred from qualification as a REIT for the four years following disqualification. The additional tax incurred at regular corporate rates would significantly reduce the cash flow available for distribution to stockholders and for debt service. Furthermore, we would no longer be required by the Internal Revenue Code to make any dividends to our stockholders as a condition of REIT qualification. If we were to fail to qualify as a REIT, subject to certain limitations in the Internal Revenue Code, corporate stockholders may be eligible for the dividends received deduction, and individual, trust and estate stockholders may be eligible to treat the dividends received from us as qualified dividend income taxable as net capital gains under the provisions of Section 1(h)(11) of the Internal Revenue Code. However, non-corporate stockholders (including individuals) will not be able to deduct 20% of certain dividends they receive from us. The REIT qualification requirements are extremely complex, and interpretation of the U.S. federal income tax laws governing REIT qualification is limited. Although we believe we have operated and intend to operate in a manner that will continue to qualify us as a REIT, we cannot be certain that we have been or will be successful in continuing to be taxed as a REIT. In addition, facts and circumstances that may be beyond our control may affect our ability to qualify as a REIT. We cannot assure you that new legislation, regulations, administrative interpretations or court decisions will not change the tax laws significantly with respect to our qualification as a REIT or with respect to the federal income tax consequences of qualification.\n\nLegislative or regulatory action with respect to tax laws and regulations could adversely affect the Company and our stockholders. We are subject to state and local tax laws and regulations. Changes in state and local tax laws or regulations may result in an increase in our tax liability. A shortfall in tax revenues for states and municipalities in which we operate may lead to an increase in the frequency and size of such changes. If such changes occur, we may be required to pay additional taxes on our assets or income. These increased tax costs could adversely affect our financial condition, results of operations and the amount of cash available for the payment of dividends.\n\nIn addition, in recent years, numerous legislative, judicial and administrative changes have been made to the federal income tax laws applicable to investments in REITs and similar entities. Additional changes to tax laws are likely to continue to occur in the future, and we cannot assure our stockholders that any such changes will not adversely affect the taxation of a stockholder. We cannot assure you that future changes to tax laws and regulations will not have an adverse effect on an investment in our stock.\n\nTo maintain our status as a REIT, we limit the amount of shares any one stockholder can own . The Internal Revenue Code imposes certain limitations on the ownership of the stock of a REIT. For example, not more than 50% in value of our outstanding shares of capital stock may be owned, directly or indirectly, by five or fewer individuals (as defined in the Internal Revenue Code) during the last half of any taxable year. To protect our REIT status, our charter prohibits any holder from acquiring more than 9.8% (in value or in number, whichever is more restrictive) of our outstanding equity stock (defined as all of our classes of capital stock, except our excess stock (of which there is none outstanding)) unless our Board of Directors grants a waiver. The ownership limit may limit the opportunity for stockholders to receive a premium for their shares of common stock that might otherwise exist if an investor were attempting to assemble a block of shares in excess of 9.8% of the outstanding shares of equity stock or otherwise effect a change in control.\n\nCertain tax and anti-takeover provisions of our charter and bylaws may inhibit a change of our control . Certain provisions contained in our charter and bylaws and the Maryland General Corporation Law may discourage a third party from making a tender offer or acquisition proposal to us. If this were to happen, it could delay, deter or prevent a change in control or the removal of existing management. These provisions also may delay or prevent our stockholders from receiving a premium for their common shares over then-prevailing market prices. These provisions include:\n\n- · the REIT ownership limit described above;\n- · special meetings of our stockholders may be called only by the chairman of the board, the chief executive officer, the president, a majority of the board or by stockholders possessing a majority of all the votes entitled to be cast at the meeting;\n- · our Board of Directors may authorize and issue securities without stockholder approval; and\n- · advance-notice requirements for proposals to be presented at stockholder meetings.\n\nIn addition, Maryland law provides protection for Maryland corporations against unsolicited takeovers by limiting, among other things, the duties of the directors in unsolicited takeover situations and certain 'business combinations' and 'control share acquisitions.' Our bylaws contain provisions exempting us from the Maryland Control Share Acquisition Act and the\n\n12", + "recall": 0.9887640449438202, + "true_md": "can be given that the effects of an adverse economic situation will not have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations.\n\nWe may fail to qualify as a REIT. If we fail to qualify as a REIT, we will not be allowed to deduct dividends to stockholders in computing our taxable income and will be subject to federal income tax at regular corporate rates. In addition, we may be barred from qualification as a REIT for the four years following disqualification. The additional tax incurred at regular corporate rates would significantly reduce the cash flow available for distribution to stockholders and for debt service. Furthermore, we would no longer be required by the Internal Revenue Code to make any dividends to our stockholders as a condition of REIT qualification. If we were to fail to qualify as a REIT, subject to certain limitations in the Internal Revenue Code, corporate stockholders may be eligible for the dividends received deduction, and individual, trust and estate stockholders may be eligible to treat the dividends received from us as qualified dividend income taxable as net capital gains under the provisions of Section 1(h)(11) of the Internal Revenue Code. However, non-corporate stockholders (including individuals) will not be able to deduct 20% of certain dividends they receive from us. The REIT qualification requirements are extremely complex, and interpretation of the U.S. federal income tax laws governing REIT qualification is limited. Although we believe we have operated and intend to operate in a manner that will continue to qualify us as a REIT, we cannot be certain that we have been or will be successful in continuing to be taxed as a REIT. In addition, facts and circumstances that may be beyond our control may affect our ability to qualify as a REIT. We cannot assure you that new legislation, regulations, administrative interpretations or court decisions will not change the tax laws significantly with respect to our qualification as a REIT or with respect to the federal income tax consequences of qualification.\n\nLegislative or regulatory action with respect to tax laws and regulations could adversely affect the Company and our stockholders. We are subject to state and local tax laws and regulations. Changes in state and local tax laws or regulations may result in an increase in our tax liability. A shortfall in tax revenues for states and municipalities in which we operate may lead to an increase in the frequency and size of such changes. If such changes occur, we may be required to pay additional taxes on our assets or income. These increased tax costs could adversely affect our financial condition, results of operations and the amount of cash available for the payment of dividends.\n\nIn addition, in recent years, numerous legislative, judicial and administrative changes have been made to the federal income tax laws applicable to investments in REITs and similar entities. Additional changes to tax laws are likely to continue to occur in the future, and we cannot assure our stockholders that any such changes will not adversely affect the taxation of a stockholder. We cannot assure you that future changes to tax laws and regulations will not have an adverse effect on an investment in our stock.\n\nTo maintain our status as a REIT, we limit the amount of shares any one stockholder can own . The Internal Revenue Code imposes certain limitations on the ownership of the stock of a REIT. For example, not more than 50% in value of our outstanding shares of capital stock may be owned, directly or indirectly, by five or fewer individuals (as defined in the Internal Revenue Code) during the last half of any taxable year. To protect our REIT status, our charter prohibits any holder from acquiring more than 9.8% (in value or in number, whichever is more restrictive) of our outstanding equity stock (defined as all of our classes of capital stock, except our excess stock (of which there is none outstanding)) unless our Board of Directors grants a waiver. The ownership limit may limit the opportunity for stockholders to receive a premium for their shares of common stock that might otherwise exist if an investor were attempting to assemble a block of shares in excess of 9.8% of the outstanding shares of equity stock or otherwise effect a change in control.\n\nCertain tax and anti-takeover provisions of our charter and bylaws may inhibit a change of our control . Certain provisions contained in our charter and bylaws and the Maryland General Corporation Law may discourage a third party from making a tender offer or acquisition proposal to us. If this were to happen, it could delay, deter or prevent a change in control or the removal of existing management. These provisions also may delay or prevent our stockholders from receiving a premium for their common shares over then-prevailing market prices. These provisions include:\n\nIn addition, Maryland law provides protection for Maryland corporations against unsolicited takeovers by limiting, among other things, the duties of the directors in unsolicited takeover situations and certain “business combinations” and “control share acquisitions.” Our bylaws contain provisions exempting us from the Maryland Control Share Acquisition Act and the\n\n- • the REIT ownership limit described above; • special meetings of our stockholders may be called only by the chairman of the board, the chief executive officer, the president, a majority of the board or by stockholders possessing a majority of all the votes entitled to\n\n- • the REIT ownership limit described above; • special meetings of our stockholders may be called only by the chairman of the board, the chief executive officer, the president, a majority of the board or by stockholders possessing a majority of all the votes entitled to be cast at the meeting; • our Board of Directors may authorize and issue securities without stockholder approval; and\n\n- be cast at the meeting; • our Board of Directors may authorize and issue securities without stockholder approval; and • advance-notice requirements for proposals to be presented at stockholder meetings.\n\n- • our Board of Directors may authorize and issue securities without stockholder approval; and • advance-notice requirements for proposals to be presented at stockholder meetings.\n\n12" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8289803170803488, + "doc_id": "c343619a8a750241807e9ad9fa20dbb5eaf2e6b10df7da93f1f1c99aba270f42", + "edit_distance": 0.1744186046511628, + "f1_score": 0.9698189134808854, + "meteor": 0.8617085015369939, + "precision": 0.9757085020242915, + "pred_md": "## Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm\n\n## To the Shareholders and the Board of Directors of Canadian Pacific Railway Limited Opinion on Internal Control over Financial Reporting\n\nWe have audited the internal control over financial reporting of Canadian Pacific Railway Limited and subsidiaries (the 'Company') as of December 31, 2020, based on criteria established in Internal Control - Integrated Framework (2013) issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission (COSO). In our opinion, the Company maintained, in all material respects, effective internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2020, based on criteria established in Internal Control - Integrated Framework (2013) issued by COSO.\n\nWe have also audited, in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States) (PCAOB), the consolidated financial statements as of and for the year ended December 31, 2020, of the Company and our report dated February 18, 2021, expressed an unqualified opinion on those financial statements.\n\n## Basis for Opinion\n\nThe Company's management is responsible for maintaining effective internal control over financial reporting and for its assessment of the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting, included in the accompanying Management's Report on Internal Control over Financial Reporting. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on the Company's internal control over financial reporting based on our audit. We are a public accounting firm registered with the PCAOB and are required to be independent with respect to the Company in accordance with the U.S. federal securities laws and the applicable rules and regulations of the Securities and Exchange Commission and the PCAOB.\n\nWe conducted our audit in accordance with the standards of the PCAOB. Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether effective internal control over financial reporting was maintained in all material respects. Our audit included obtaining an understanding of internal control over financial reporting, assessing the risk that a material weakness exists, testing and evaluating the design and operating effectiveness of internal control based on the assessed risk, and performing such other procedures as we considered necessary in the circumstances. We believe that our audit provides a reasonable basis for our opinion.\n\n## Definition and Limitations of Internal Control over Financial Reporting\n\nA company's internal control over financial reporting is a process designed to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles. A company's internal control over financial reporting includes those policies and procedures that (1) pertain to the maintenance of records that, in reasonable detail, accurately and fairly reflect the transactions and dispositions of the assets of the company; (2) provide reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded as necessary to permit preparation of financial statements in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles, and that receipts and expenditures of the company are being made only in accordance with authorizations of management and directors of the company; and (3) provide reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of unauthorized acquisition, use, or disposition of the company's assets that could have a material effect on the financial statements.\n\nBecause of its inherent limitations, internal control over financial reporting may not prevent or detect misstatements. Also, projections of any evaluation of effectiveness to future periods are subject to the risk that controls may become inadequate because of changes in conditions, or that the degree of compliance with the policies or procedures may deteriorate.\n\n/s/ Deloitte LLP\n\nChartered\tProfessional\tAccountants Calgary,\tCanada February\t18,\t2021\n\nCP\t2020\tANNUAL\tREPORT\n\n124", + "recall": 0.964, + "true_md": "CP 2020 ANNUAL REPORT 124\n\n## Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm\n\n## To the Shareholders and the Board of Directors of Canadian Pacific Railway Limited Opinion on Internal Control over Financial Reporting We have audited the internal control over financial reporting of Canadian Pacific Railway Limited and subsidiaries (the “Company”) as of December 31, 2020,\n\n## Basis for Opinion The Company’s management is responsible for maintaining effective internal control over financial reporting and for its assessment of the effectiveness of\n\n## Definition and Limitations of Internal Control over Financial Reporting A company’s internal control over financial reporting is a process designed to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the\n\nOpinion on Internal Control over Financial Reporting We have audited the internal control over financial reporting of Canadian Pacific Railway Limited and subsidiaries (the “Company”) as of December 31, 2020, based on criteria established in Internal Control — Integrated Framework (2013) issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission (COSO). In our opinion, the Company maintained, in all material respects, effective internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2020, based on criteria established in Internal Control — Integrated Framework (2013) issued by COSO.\n\nWe have also audited, in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States) (PCAOB), the consolidated financial statements as of and for the year ended December 31, 2020, of the Company and our repor t dated February 18, 2021, expr essed an unqualified opinion on those financial statements.\n\nBasis for Opinion The Company’s management is responsible for maintaining effective internal control over financial reporting and for its assessment of the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting, included in the accompanying Management’s Report on Internal Control over Financial Reporting. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on the Company’s internal control over financial reporting based on our audit. We are a public accounting firm registered with the PCAOB and are required to be independent with respect to the Company in accordance with the U.S. federal securities laws and the applicable rules and regulations of the Securities and Exchange Commission and the PCAOB.\n\nWe conducted our audit in accordance with the standards of the PCAOB. Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether effective internal control over financial reporting was maintained in all material respects. Our audit included obtaining an understanding of internal control over financial reporting, assessing the risk that a material weakness exists, testing and evaluating the design and operating effectiveness of internal control based on the assessed risk, and performing such other procedures as we considered necessary in the circumstances. We believe that our audit provides a reasonable basis for our opinion.\n\nDefinition and Limitations of Internal Control over Financial Reporting A company’s internal control over financial reporting is a process designed to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles. A company’s internal control over financial reporting includes those policies and procedures that (1) pertain to the maintenance of records that, in reasonable detail, accurately and fairly reflect the transactions and dispositions of the assets of the company; (2) provide reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded as necessary to permit preparation of financial statements in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles, and that receipts and expenditures of the company are being made only in accordance with authorizations of management and directors of the company; and (3) provide reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of unauthorized acquisition, use, or disposition of the company’s assets that could have a material effect on the financial statements.\n\nBecause of its inherent limitations, internal control over financial reporting may not prevent or detect misstatements. Also, projections of any evaluation of effectiveness to future periods are subject to the risk that controls may become inadequate because of changes in conditions, or that the degree of compliance with the policies or procedures may deteriorate.\n\n/s/ Deloitte LLP\n\nChartered Professional Accountants Calgary, Canada February 18, 2021" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7565033917479591, + "doc_id": "5c7505146f3e5ad702dc342de9c7e2e7d58402e10502e4ef071d5017530c3649", + "edit_distance": 0.3445040214477212, + "f1_score": 0.8867187499999999, + "meteor": 0.8145187324612856, + "precision": 0.8049645390070922, + "pred_md": "Table\tof\tContents\n\n## UNITED STATES SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION Washington, D.C. 20549 Form 10-K\n\n(Mark One)\n\n☑ ANNUAL REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934 For the fiscal year ended September 30, 2019 ☐ TRANSITION REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934\n\nFor the transition period from to\n\nCOMMISSION FILE NUMBER 001-4802\n\n## BECTON,\tDICKINSON\tAND\tCOMPANY\n\n(Exact\tname\tof\tregistrant\tas\tspecified\tin\tits\tcharter)\n\nNew\tJersey\n\n22-0760120\n\n(State\tor\tother\tjurisdiction\tof\tincorporation\tor\torganization)\n\n(I.R.S.\tEmployer\tIdentification\tNo.)\n\n1\tBecton\tDrive,\n\nFranklin\tLakes,\n\nNew\tJersey\n\n07417-1880\n\n(Address\tof\tprincipal\texecutive\toffices)\n\n(Zip\tcode)\n\nRegistrant's\ttelephone\tnumber,\tincluding\tarea\tcode (201)\t847-6800\n\n## Securities\tregistered\tpursuant\tto\tSection\t12(b)\tof\tthe\tAct:\n\n## Title\tof\tEach\tClass\n\n## Trading\tSymbol\n\n## Name\tof\tEach\tExchange\ton\tWhich\tRegistered\n\nCommon\tstock,\tpar\tvalue\t$1.00\n\nBDX\n\nNew\tYork\tStock\tExchange\n\nDepositary\tShares,\teach\trepresenting\t1/20th\tof\ta\tshare\tof\t6.125%\tCumulative Preferred\tStock\tSeries\tA\n\nBDXA\n\nNew\tYork\tStock\tExchange\n\n1.000%\tNotes\tdue\tDecember\t15,\t2022\n\nBDX22A\n\nNew\tYork\tStock\tExchange\n\n1.900%\tNotes\tdue\tDecember\t15,\t2026\n\nBDX26\n\nNew\tYork\tStock\tExchange\n\n1.401%\tNotes\tdue\tMay\t24,\t2023\n\nBDX23A\n\nNew\tYork\tStock\tExchange\n\n3.020%\tNotes\tdue\tMay\t24,\t2025\n\nBDX25\n\nNew\tYork\tStock\tExchange\n\n0.174%\tNotes\tdue\tJune\t4,\t2021\n\nBDX/21\n\nNew\tYork\tStock\tExchange\n\n0.632%\tNotes\tdue\tJune\t4,\t2023\n\nBDX/23A\n\nNew\tYork\tStock\tExchange\n\n1.208%\tNotes\tdue\tJune\t4,\t2026\n\nBDX/26A\n\nNew\tYork\tStock\tExchange\n\nSecurities\tregistered\tpursuant\tto\tSection\t12(g)\tof\tthe\tAct: None\n\nIndicate\tby\tcheck\tmark\tif\tthe\tregistrant\tis\ta\twell-known\tseasoned\tissuer,\tas\tdefined\tin\tRule\t405\tof\tthe\tSecurities\tAct.\t\t\t\tYes\n\n☑\n\nNo ☐ ☐ No ☑\n\nIndicate\tby\tcheck\tmark\tif\tthe\tregistrant\tis\tnot\trequired\tto\tfile\treports\tpursuant\tto\tSection\t13\tor\tSection\t15(d)\tof\tthe\tAct.\t\t\t\tYes\n\nIndicate\tby\tcheck\tmark\twhether\tthe\tregistrant\t(1)\thas\tfiled\tall\treports\trequired\tto\tbe\tfiled\tby\tSection\t13\tor\t15(d)\tof\tthe\tSecurities\tExchange\tAct\tof\t1934\tduring\tthe\tpreceding 12\tmonths\t(or\tfor\tsuch\tshorter\tperiod\tthat\tthe\tregistrant\twas\trequired\tto\tfile\tsuch\treports),\tand\t(2)\thas\tbeen\tsubject\tto\tsuch\tfiling\trequirements\tfor\tthe\tpast\t90 days.\t\t\t\tYes ☑ No ☐\n\nIndicate\tby\tcheck\tmark\twhether\tthe\tregistrant\thas\tsubmitted\telectronically\tevery\tInteractive\tData\tFile\trequired\tto\tbe\tsubmitted\tpursuant\tto\tRule\t405\tof\tRegulation\tS-T\tduring the\tpreceding\t12\tmonths\t(or\tfor\tsuch\tshorter\tperiod\tthat\tthe\tregistrant\twas\trequired\tto\tsubmit\tsuch\tfiles).\t\t\t\tYes ☑ No ☐\n\nIndicate\tby\tcheck\tmark\twhether\tthe\tregistrant\tis\ta\t\"large\taccelerated\tfiler,\"\tan\t\"accelerated\tfiler,\"\ta\t\"non-accelerated\tfiler,\"\t\"smaller\treporting\tcompany,\"\tor\tan\t\"emerging growth\tcompany.\"\tSee\tthe\tdefinitions\tof\tlarge\taccelerated\tfiler,\taccelerated\tfiler,\tsmaller\treporting\tcompany,\tand\temerging\tgrowth\tcompany\tin\tRule\t12b-2\tof\tthe\tExchange Act.\n\nLarge\taccelerated\tfiler\n\n☑ Accelerated\tfiler\n\n☐ Non-accelerated\tfiler ☐\n\nSmaller\treporting\tcompany\n\n☐ Emerging\tgrowth\tcompany\n\n☐\n\nIf\tan\temerging\tgrowth\tcompany,\tindicate\tby\tcheck\tmark\tif\tthe\tregistrant\thas\telected\tnot\tto\tuse\tthe\textended\ttransition\tperiod\tfor complying\twith\tany\tnew\tor\trevised\tfinancial\taccounting\tstandards\tprovided\tpursuant\tto\tSection\t13(a)\tof\tthe\tExchange\tAct.\n\n☐\n\nIndicate\tby\tcheck\tmark\twhether\tthe\tregistrant\tis\ta\tshell\tcompany\t(as\tdefined\tin\tRule\t12b-2\tof\tthe\tAct).\t\t\t\tYes\n\n☐\n\nNo ☑\n\nAs\tof\tMarch\t31,\t2019,\tthe\taggregate\tmarket\tvalue\tof\tthe\tregistrant's\toutstanding\tcommon\tstock\theld\tby\tnon-affiliates\tof\tthe\tregistrant\twas\tapproximately\t$67,278,853,280.\n\nAs\tof\tOctober\t31,\t2019,\t270,459,892\tshares\tof\tthe\tregistrant's\tcommon\tstock\twere\toutstanding.\n\nDocuments\tIncorporated\tby\tReference Portions\tof\tthe\tregistrant's\tProxy\tStatement\tfor\tthe\tAnnual\tMeeting\tof\tShareholders\tto\tbe\theld\tJanuary\t28,\t2020\tare\tincorporated by\treference\tinto\tPart\tIII\thereof.", + "recall": 0.9869565217391304, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n# UNITED STATES SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION Washington, D.C. 20549\n\n# Washington, D.C. 20549 Form 10-K\n\n# ANNUAL REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934 For the fiscal year ended September 30, 2019 TRANSITION REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934\n\n# COMMISSION FILE NUMBER 001-4802 BECTON, DICKINSON AND COMPANY (Exact name of registrant as specified in its charter)\n\nUNITED STATES SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION Washington, D.C. 20549 Form 10-K\n\n(Mark One) ☑ ANNUAL REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934\n\n(Mark One) ☑ ANNUAL REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934 For the fiscal year ended September 30, 2019\n\nFor the fiscal year ended September 30, 2019 ☐ TRANSITION REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934 For the transition period from to\n\nTRANSITION REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934 For the transition period from to\n\nCOMMISSION FILE NUMBER 001-4802 BECTON, DICKINSON AND COMPANY\n\nBECTON, DICKINSON AND COMPANY (Exact name of registrant as specified in its charter)\n\nNew Jersey\n\n(State or other jurisdiction of incorporation or organization)\n\n1 Becton Drive, Franklin Lakes, New Jersey\n\n(Address of principal executive offices)\n\nRegistrant’s telephone number, including area code (201) 847-6800\n\nSecurities registered pursuant to Section 12(b) of the Act:\n\n22-0760120\n\n(I.R.S. Employer Identification No.)\n\n07417-1880\n\n(Zip code)\n\nSecurities registered pursuant to Section 12(g) of the Act: None\n\nIndicate by check mark if the registrant is a well-known seasoned issuer, as defined in Rule 405 of the Securities Act. Yes ☑ No ☐\n\nIndicate by check mark if the registrant is not required to file reports pursuant to Section 13 or Section 15(d) of the Act. Yes ☐ No ☑\n\nIndicate by check mark whether the registrant (1) has filed all reports required to be filed by Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to file such reports), and (2) has been subject to such filing requirements for the past 90 days. Yes ☑ No ☐\n\nIndicate by check mark whether the registrant has submitted electronically every Interactive Data File required to be submitted pursuant to Rule 405 of Regulation S-T during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to submit such files). Yes ☑ No ☐\n\nIndicate by check mark whether the registrant is a \"large accelerated filer,\" an \"accelerated filer,\" a \"non-accelerated filer,\" \"smaller reporting company,\" or an \"emerging growth company.\" See the definitions of large accelerated filer, accelerated filer, smaller reporting company, and emerging growth company in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act.\n\nLarge accelerated filer ☑\n\nSmaller reporting company ☐\n\nAccelerated filer ☐\n\nEmerging growth company ☐\n\nNon-accelerated filer ☐\n\nIf an emerging growth company, indicate by check mark if the registrant has elected not to use the extended transition period for complying with any new or revised financial accounting standards provided pursuant to Section 13(a) of the Exchange Act. ☐\n\nIndicate by check mark whether the registrant is a shell company (as defined in Rule 12b-2 of the Act). Yes ☐ No ☑\n\nAs of March 31, 2019, the aggregate market value of the registrant’s outstanding common stock held by non-affiliates of the registrant was approximately $67,278,853,280. As of October 31, 2019, 270,459,892 shares of the registrant’s common stock were outstanding.\n\nDocuments Incorporated by Reference Portions of the registrant’s Proxy Statement for the Annual Meeting of Shareholders to be held January 28, 2020 are incorporated by reference into Part III hereof." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9469715273692698, + "doc_id": "fdf55bcb8686a3c9142f69831a7a9d6801d4c2338d938e6451a78f25fadc5605", + "edit_distance": 0.06542056074766354, + "f1_score": 0.984375, + "meteor": 0.9904412718797723, + "precision": 0.984375, + "pred_md": "## Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements - (Continued)\n\nBecton, Dickinson and Company\n\nThe change in benefit obligation, change in fair value of pension plan assets, funded status and amounts recognized in the Consolidated Balance Sheets for these plans were as follows:\n\nTable of Contents\n\nInternational pension plan assets at fair value included in the preceding table were $859 million and $821 million at September 30, 2019 and 2018, respectively. The international pension plan projected benefit obligations were $1.244 billion and $1.064 billion at September 30, 2019 and 2018, respectively.\n\n78", + "recall": 0.984375, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements — (Continued) Becton, Dickinson and Company\n\nThe change in benefit obligation, change in fair value of pension plan assets, funded status and amounts recognized in the Consolidated Balance Sheets for these plans were as follows:\n\nInternational pension plan assets at fair value included in the preceding table were $859 million and $821 million at September 30, 2019 and 2018, respectively. The international pension plan projected benefit obligations were $1.244 billion and $1.064 billion at September 30, 2019 and 2018, respectively. \n\n78" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9708057970291877, + "doc_id": "b7efc55288367b5d428ce294ce070ca6a17f4851b44ced72f81059dafaadf2a3", + "edit_distance": 0.0451693851944793, + "f1_score": 0.9946524064171123, + "meteor": 0.985683346775366, + "precision": 0.9964285714285714, + "pred_md": "## Commitments\n\nFor further information regarding our commitments, see the Notes to AAG's Consolidated Financial Statements in Part II, Item 8A and the Notes to American's Consolidated Financial Statements in Part II, Item 8B at the referenced footnotes below.\n\nTable of Contents\n\n## Off-Balance Sheet Arrangements\n\nAn off-balance sheet arrangement is any transaction, agreement or other contractual arrangement involving an unconsolidated entity under which a company has (1) made guarantees, (2) a retained or a contingent interest in transferred assets, (3) an obligation under derivative instruments classified as equity or (4) any obligation arising out of a material variable interest in an unconsolidated entity that provides financing, liquidity, market risk or credit risk support to us, or that engages in leasing, hedging or research and development arrangements with us.\n\nWe have no off-balance sheet arrangements of the types described in the first three categories above that we believe may have a material current or future effect on financial condition, liquidity or results of operations.\n\n## Pass-Through Trusts\n\nAmerican currently operates 350 owned aircraft and 24 leased aircraft, and owns 62 spare aircraft engines, which in each case were financed with EETCs issued by pass-through trusts. These trusts are off-balance sheet entities, the primary purpose of which is to finance the acquisition of flight equipment or to permit issuance of debt backed by existing flight equipment. In the case of aircraft EETCs, rather than finance each aircraft separately when such aircraft is purchased, delivered or refinanced, these trusts allow American to raise the financing for a number of aircraft at one time and, if applicable, place such funds in escrow pending a future purchase, delivery or refinancing of the relevant aircraft. Similarly, in the case of the spare engine EETCs, the trusts allow American to use its existing pool of spare engines to raise financing under a single facility. The trusts have also been structured to provide for certain credit enhancements, such as liquidity facilities to cover certain interest payments, that reduce the risks to the purchasers of the trust certificates and, as a result, reduce the cost of aircraft financing to American.\n\nEach trust covers a set number of aircraft or spare engines scheduled to be delivered, financed or refinanced upon the issuance of the EETC or within a specific period of time thereafter. At the time of each covered aircraft or spare engine financing, the relevant trust used the proceeds of the issuance of the EETC (which may have been available at the time of issuance thereof or held in escrow until financing of the applicable aircraft following its delivery) to purchase equipment notes relating to the financed aircraft or engines. The equipment notes are issued, at American's election, in connection with a mortgage financing of the aircraft or spare engines or, in certain cases, by a separate owner trust in connection with a leveraged lease financing of the aircraft. In the case of a leveraged lease financing, the owner trust then leases the aircraft to American. In both cases, the equipment notes are secured by a security interest in the aircraft or engines, as applicable. The pass-through trust certificates are not direct obligations of, nor are they guaranteed by, AAG or American. However, in the case of mortgage financings, the equipment notes issued to the trusts are direct obligations of American and, in certain instances, have been guaranteed by AAG. As of December 31, 2020, $11.0 billion associated with these mortgage financings is reflected as debt in the accompanying consolidated balance sheet.\n\nWith respect to leveraged leases, American evaluated whether the leases had characteristics of a variable interest entity. American concluded the leasing entities met the criteria for variable interest entities; however, American concluded it is not the primary beneficiary under these leasing arrangements and accounts for the majority of its EETC leveraged lease financings as operating leases. American's total future payments to the trusts of each of the relevant EETCs under these leveraged lease financings are $78 million as of December 31, 2020, which are reflected in the operating lease obligations in Note 6 to AAG's Consolidated Financial Statements in Part II, Item 8A and Note 4 to American's Consolidated Financial Statements in Part II, Item 8B.\n\n80", + "recall": 0.9928825622775801, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## Commitments\n\n## Off-Balance Sheet Arrangements\n\n## Pass-Through Trusts\n\nFor further information regarding our commitments, see the Notes to AAG’s Consolidated Financial Statements in Part II, Item 8A and the Notes to American’s Consolidated Financial Statements in Part II, Item 8B at the referenced footnotes below.\n\nAn off-balance sheet arrangement is any transaction, agreement or other contractual arrangement involving an unconsolidated entity under which a company has (1) made guarantees, (2) a retained or a contingent interest in transferred assets, (3) an obligation under derivative instruments classified as equity or (4) any obligation arising out of a material variable interest in an unconsolidated entity that provides financing, liquidity, market risk or credit risk support to us, or that engages in leasing, hedging or research and development arrangements with us.\n\nWe have no off-balance sheet arrangements of the types described in the first three categories above that we believe may have a material current or future effect on financial condition, liquidity or results of operations.\n\nAmerican currently operates 350 owned aircraft and 24 leased aircraft, and owns 62 spare aircraft engines, which in each case were financed with EETCs issued by pass-through trusts. These trusts are off-balance sheet entities, the primary purpose of which is to finance the acquisition of flight equipment or to permit issuance of debt backed by existing flight equipment. In the case of aircraft EETCs, rather than finance each aircraft separately when such aircraft is purchased, delivered or refinanced, these trusts allow American to raise the financing for a number of aircraft at one time and, if applicable, place such funds in escrow pending a future purchase, delivery or refinancing of the relevant aircraft. Similarly, in the case of the spare engine EETCs, the trusts allow American to use its existing pool of spare engines to raise financing under a single facility. The trusts have also been structured to provide for certain credit enhancements, such as liquidity facilities to cover certain interest payments, that reduce the risks to the purchasers of the trust certificates and, as a result, reduce the cost of aircraft financing to American.\n\nEach trust covers a set number of aircraft or spare engines scheduled to be delivered, financed or refinanced upon the issuance of the EETC or within a specific period of time thereafter. At the time of each covered aircraft or spare engine financing, the relevant trust used the proceeds of the issuance of the EETC (which may have been available at the time of issuance thereof or held in escrow until financing of the applicable aircraft following its delivery) to purchase equipment notes relating to the financed aircraft or engines. The equipment notes are issued, at American’s election, in connection with a mortgage financing of the aircraft or spare engines or, in certain cases, by a separate owner trust in connection with a leveraged lease financing of the aircraft. In the case of a leveraged lease financing, the owner trust then leases the aircraft to American. In both cases, the equipment notes are secured by a security interest in the aircraft or engines, as applicable. The pass-through trust certificates are not direct obligations of, nor are they guaranteed by, AAG or American. However, in the case of mortgage financings, the equipment notes issued to the trusts are direct obligations of American and, in certain instances, have been guaranteed by AAG. As of December 31, 2020, $11.0 billion associated with these mortgage financings is reflected as debt in the accompanying consolidated balance sheet.\n\nWith respect to leveraged leases, American evaluated whether the leases had characteristics of a variable interest entity. American concluded the leasing entities met the criteria for variable interest entities; however, American concluded it is not the primary beneficiary under these leasing arrangements and accounts for the majority of its EETC leveraged lease financings as operating leases. American’s total future payments to the trusts of each of the relevant EETCs under these leveraged lease financings are $78 million as of December 31, 2020, which are reflected in the operating lease obligations in Note 6 to AAG’s Consolidated Financial Statements in Part II, Item 8A and Note 4 to American’s Consolidated Financial Statements in Part II, Item 8B.\n\n80" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.982181823918692, + "doc_id": "4e4dd58eff4bc828b363d6d9c3a01d1688fb937f634bfddc0dff7c3f4979d828", + "edit_distance": 0.024344569288389514, + "f1_score": 0.984375, + "meteor": 0.9909810906123271, + "precision": 0.9882352941176471, + "pred_md": "## FLOW CONTROL DIVISION\n\nFCD designs, manufactures, distributes and services a broad portfolio of flow control solutions, including engineered and industrial valve and automation systems, isolation and control valves, actuation, controls and related equipment. FCD leverages its experience and application know-how by offering a complete menu of engineering and project management services to complement its expansive product portfolio. FCD products are used to control, direct and manage the flow of liquids, gases and multi-phase fluids, and are a critical part of any flow control system. Our valve and automation products are based on flexible architecture that can be customized or engineered to perform specific functions within each customer's unique flow control environment or objective.\n\nOur flow control products are primarily used by companies operating in the chemical, power generation, oil and gas, water management and general industries. Our products are currently manufactured in 21 principal manufacturing facilities, five of which are located in the U.S., 10 located in Europe, five located in Asia Pacific and one located in Latin America. We deliver our services through our global network of 27 QRCs worldwide, including five sites in Europe and Africa, nine in North America, three in the Middle East, eight in Asia Pacific and two in Latin America, including those co-located in manufacturing facilities.\n\n## FCD Products\n\nOur valve, automation and controls product and solutions portfolio represent one of the most comprehensive in the flow control industry. Our products are used in a wide variety of applications, from general service to the most severe and demanding services, including those involving high levels of corrosion, extreme temperatures and/or pressures, zero fugitive emissions and emergency shutdown.\n\nOur 'smart' valve and diagnostic technologies integrate sensors, microprocessor controls and software into high performance integrated control valves, digital positioners and switchboxes for automated on/off valve assemblies and electric actuators. These technologies permit real-time system analysis, system warnings and remote indication of asset health. These technologies have been developed in response to the growing demand for reduced maintenance, improved process control efficiency and digital communications at the plant level. We are committed to further enhancing the quality of our product portfolio by continuing to upgrade our existing offerings with cutting-edge technologies.\n\nOur valve actuation products encompass a broad range of pneumatic, electric, hydraulic and stored energy actuation designs to take advantage of whatever power source the customer has available, including utilizing the process fluid flowing through the pipeline as a source of power to actuate the valve. Our actuation products also cover one of the widest ranges of output torques in the industry, providing the ability to automate anything from the smallest linear globe valve to the largest multi-turn gate valve. Most importantly, FCD combines best-in-class mechanical designs with the latest in controls and communication technologies in order to provide complete integrated automation solutions that optimize flow control performance and enhance digital end-user experience.\n\n10", + "recall": 0.980544747081712, + "true_md": "## FLOW CONTROL DIVISION\n\n## FCD Products\n\nFCD designs, manufactures, distributes and services a broad portfolio of flow control solutions, including engineered and industrial valve and automation systems, isolation and control valves, actuation, controls and related equipment. FCD leverages its experience and application know-how by offering a complete menu of engineering and project management services to complement its expansive product portfolio. FCD products are used to control, direct and manage the flow of liquids, gases and multi-phase fluids, and are a critical part of any flow control system. Our valve and automation products are based on flexible architecture that can be customized or engineered to perform specific functions within each customer’s unique flow control environment or objective.\n\nOur flow control products are primarily used by companies operating in the chemical, power generation, oil and gas, water management and general industries. Our products are currently manufactured in 21 principal manufacturing facilities, five of which are located in the U.S., 10 located in Europe, five located in Asia Pacific and one located in Latin America. We deliver our services through our global network of 27 QRCs worldwide, including five sites in Europe and Africa, nine in North America, three in the Middle East, eight in Asia Pacific and two in Latin America, including those co-located in manufacturing facilities.\n\nOur valve, automation and controls product and solutions portfolio represent one of the most comprehensive in the flow control industry. Our products are used in a wide variety of applications, from general service to the most severe and demanding services, including those involving high levels of corrosion, extreme temperatures and/or pressures, zero fugitive emissions and emergency shutdown.\n\nOur “smart” valve and diagnostic technologies integrate sensors, microprocessor controls and software into high performance integrated control valves, digital positioners and switchboxes for automated on/off valve assemblies and electric actuators. These technologies permit real-time system analysis, system warnings and remote indication of asset health. These technologies have been developed in response to the growing demand for reduced maintenance, improved process control efficiency and digital communications at the plant level. We are committed to further enhancing the quality of our product portfolio by continuing to upgrade our existing offerings with cutting-edge technologies.\n\nOur valve actuation products encompass a broad range of pneumatic, electric, hydraulic and stored energy actuation designs to take advantage of whatever power source the customer has available, including utilizing the process fluid flowing through the pipeline as a source of power to actuate the valve. Our actuation products also cover one of the widest ranges of output torques in the industry, providing the ability to automate anything from the smallest linear globe valve to the largest multi-turn gate valve. Most importantly, FCD combines best-in-class mechanical designs with the latest in controls and communication technologies in order to provide complete integrated automation solutions that optimize flow control performance and enhance digital end-user experience.\n\n10" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "6c62082720cec53bc1e1e5e50af5464e75c3e48d2472b0b9b05d4f0adede9a4e", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999999990234375, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "are risks related to the concentration of credit, client creditworthiness, interest rate and currency fluctuations on the associated debt and liabilities, the determination of residual values and the financing of assets other than traditional IT assets. The company employs a number of strategies to manage these risks, including the use of derivative financial instruments, which involve the risk of non-performance by the counterparty. In addition, there can be no assurance that the company's efforts to manage its currency and financing risks will be successful.\n\nThe Company's Financial Performance Could Be Impacted by Changes in Market Liquidity Conditions and by Customer Credit Risk on Receivables: The company's financial performance is exposed to a wide variety of industry sector dynamics worldwide. The company's earnings and cash flows, as well as its access to funding, could be negatively impacted by changes in market liquidity conditions. IBM's 2018 Annual Report to Stockholders includes information about the company's liquidity position. The company's client base includes many worldwide enterprises, from small and medium businesses to the world's largest organizations and governments, with a significant portion of the company's revenue coming from global clients across many sectors. Most of the company's sales are on an open credit basis, and the company performs ongoing credit evaluations of its clients' financial conditions. If the company becomes aware of information related to the creditworthiness of a major customer, or if future actual default rates on receivables in general differ from those currently anticipated, the company may have to adjust its allowance for credit losses, which could affect the company's consolidated net income in the period the adjustments are made.\n\nThe Company's Reliance on Third Party Distribution Channels and Ecosystems Could Impact Its Business: The company offers its products directly and through a variety of third party distributors, resellers and ecosystem partners. Changes in the business condition (financial or otherwise) of these distributors, resellers and ecosystem partners could subject the company to losses and affect its ability to bring its products to market. As the company moves into new areas, distributors, resellers and ecosystem partners may be unable to keep up with changes in technology and offerings, and the company may be unable to recruit and enable appropriate partners to achieve growth objectives. In addition, the failure of third party distributors, resellers and ecosystem partners to comply with all applicable laws and regulations may prevent the company from working with them and could subject the company to losses and affect its ability to bring products to market.\n\nRisks to the Company from Acquisitions, Alliances and Dispositions Include Integration Challenges, Failure to Achieve Objectives, the Assumption of Liabilities and Higher Debt Levels: The company has made and expects to continue to make acquisitions, alliances and dispositions. Such transactions, including the proposed Red Hat acquisition, present significant challenges and risks and there can be no assurances that the company will manage such transactions successfully or that strategic opportunities will be available to the company on acceptable terms or at all. The related risks include the company failing to achieve strategic objectives, anticipated revenue improvements and cost savings, the failure to retain key personnel and the assumption of liabilities related to litigation or other legal proceedings involving the businesses in such transactions, as well as the failure to close planned transactions. The company plans to fund the Red Hat transaction with a combination of cash and debt financing. Any significant disruption or turmoil in the capital markets could have an adverse effect on IBM's ability to access the capital markets at favorable terms. From time to time, the company disposes or attempts to dispose of assets that are no longer central to its strategic objectives. Any such disposition or attempted disposition is subject to risks, including risks related to the terms and timing of such disposition, risks related to obtaining necessary governmental or regulatory approvals and risks related to retained liabilities not subject to the company's control.\n\nThe Company Is Subject to Legal Proceedings and Investigatory Risks: As a company with a substantial employee population and with clients in more than 175 countries, IBM is or may become involved as a party and/or may be subject to a variety of claims, demands, suits, investigations, tax matters and proceedings that arise from time to time in the ordinary course of its business. The risks\n\n17", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "are risks related to the concentration of credit, client creditworthiness, interest rate and currency fluctuations on the associated debt and liabilities, the determination of residual values and the financing of assets other than traditional IT assets. The company employs a number of strategies to manage these risks, including the use of derivative financial instruments, which involve the risk of non-performance by the counterparty. In addition, there can be no assurance that the company's efforts to manage its currency and financing risks will be successful.\n\nThe Company's Financial Performance Could Be Impacted by Changes in Market Liquidity Conditions and by Customer Credit Risk on Receivables: The company's financial performance is exposed to a wide variety of industry sector dynamics worldwide. The company's earnings and cash flows, as well as its access to funding, could be negatively impacted by changes in market liquidity conditions. IBM's 2018 Annual Report to Stockholders includes information about the company's liquidity position. The company's client base includes many worldwide enterprises, from small and medium businesses to the world's largest organizations and governments, with a significant portion of the company's revenue coming from global clients across many sectors. Most of the company's sales are on an open credit basis, and the company performs ongoing credit evaluations of its clients' financial conditions. If the company becomes aware of information related to the creditworthiness of a major customer, or if future actual default rates on receivables in general differ from those currently anticipated, the company may have to adjust its allowance for credit losses, which could affect the company's consolidated net income in the period the adjustments are made.\n\nThe Company's Reliance on Third Party Distribution Channels and Ecosystems Could Impact Its Business: The company offers its products directly and through a variety of third party distributors, resellers and ecosystem partners. Changes in the business condition (financial or otherwise) of these distributors, resellers and ecosystem partners could subject the company to losses and affect its ability to bring its products to market. As the company moves into new areas, distributors, resellers and ecosystem partners may be unable to keep up with changes in technology and offerings, and the company may be unable to recruit and enable appropriate partners to achieve growth objectives. In addition, the failure of third party distributors, resellers and ecosystem partners to comply with all applicable laws and regulations may prevent the company from working with them and could subject the company to losses and affect its ability to bring products to market.\n\nRisks to the Company from Acquisitions, Alliances and Dispositions Include Integration Challenges, Failure to Achieve Objectives, the Assumption of Liabilities and Higher Debt Levels: The company has made and expects to continue to make acquisitions, alliances and dispositions. Such transactions, including the proposed Red Hat acquisition, present significant challenges and risks and there can be no assurances that the company will manage such transactions successfully or that strategic opportunities will be available to the company on acceptable terms or at all. The related risks include the company failing to achieve strategic objectives, anticipated revenue improvements and cost savings, the failure to retain key personnel and the assumption of liabilities related to litigation or other legal proceedings involving the businesses in such transactions, as well as the failure to close planned transactions. The company plans to fund the Red Hat transaction with a combination of cash and debt financing. Any significant disruption or turmoil in the capital markets could have an adverse effect on IBM's ability to access the capital markets at favorable terms. From time to time, the company disposes or attempts to dispose of assets that are no longer central to its strategic objectives. Any such disposition or attempted disposition is subject to risks, including risks related to the terms and timing of such disposition, risks related to obtaining necessary governmental or regulatory approvals and risks related to retained liabilities not subject to the company's control.\n\nThe Company Is Subject to Legal Proceedings and Investigatory Risks: As a company with a substantial employee population and with clients in more than 175 countries, IBM is or may become involved as a party and/or may be subject to a variety of claims, demands, suits, investigations, tax matters and proceedings that arise from time to time in the ordinary course of its business. The risks\n\n17" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.923271141840288, + "doc_id": "8348c6ae760fc1d3090954d168385b4a50822ef60028e5da04120438a61985e2", + "edit_distance": 0.16417910447761194, + "f1_score": 0.979591836734694, + "meteor": 0.984964982251278, + "precision": 0.9795918367346939, + "pred_md": "103 CP\t2020\tANNUAL\tREPORT\n\n## 16. Debt\n\nLong-term debt includes debt instruments and finance lease obligations. The following table outlines the Company's outstanding long-term debt as at December 31, 2020:\n\nAt December 31, 2020, the gross amount of long-term debt denominated in U.S. dollars was U.S. $6,713 million (2019 - U.S. $6,016 million).", + "recall": 0.9795918367346939, + "true_md": "## 16. Debt\n\n103 CP 2020 ANNUAL REPORT\n\nLong-term debt includes debt instruments and finance lease obligations. The following table outlines the Company's outstanding long-term debt as at December 31, 2020:\n\nAt December 31, 2020, the gross amount of long-term debt denominated in U.S. dollars was U.S. $6,713 million (2019 – U.S. $6,016 million)." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9768253430226302, + "doc_id": "1413b41fb43ba3d5872059e08facc98e4caf592fc044cb22fac1efecd99a0b49", + "edit_distance": 0.013205282112845138, + "f1_score": 0.9898477157360407, + "meteor": 0.9912073489784334, + "precision": 0.9923664122137404, + "pred_md": "## FLOWSERVE CORPORATION\n\n## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## AS OF DECEMBER 31, 2020 AND 2019 AND FOR THE\n\nTHREE YEARS ENDED DECEMBER 31, 2020\n\n## 1. SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES AND ACCOUNTING DEVELOPMENTS\n\nWe are principally engaged in the worldwide design, manufacture, distribution and service of industrial flow management equipment. We provide long lead time, custom and other highly-engineered pumps; standardized, general-purpose pumps; mechanical seals; engineered and industrial valves; related automation products; and services and solutions primarily for oil and gas, chemical, power generation, water management and other general industries requiring flow management products and services. Equipment manufactured and serviced by us is predominantly used in industries that deal with difficult-to-handle and corrosive fluids, as well as environments with extreme temperatures, pressure, horsepower and speed. Our business is affected by economic conditions in the United States (\"U.S.\") and other countries where our products are sold and serviced, by the cyclical nature and competitive environment of our industries served, by the relationship of the U.S. dollar to other currencies and by the demand for and pricing of our customers' end products.\n\nRevision to Previously Reported Financial Information - In conjunction with our close process for the third quarter of 2020, we identified accounting errors related to the recognition of a liability for unasserted asbestos claims. The adjustments primarily related to an incurred but not reported (\"IBNR\") liability associated with unasserted asbestos claims, but also included adjustments related to the associated receivables for expected insurance proceeds for asbestos settlement and defense costs from insurance coverage and the recognition as an expense the related legal fees that were previously estimated to be recoverable from insurance carriers for which coverage is not currently sufficient following the recognition of the IBNR for periods beginning with the year ended December 31, 2014 through the second quarter of 2020 and to correct certain other previously identified immaterial errors.\n\nWe have assessed these errors, individually and in the aggregate, and concluded that they were not material to any prior periods. However, the aggregate amount of the prior period errors would have been material to our consolidated statements of income and full year results and therefore, we have revised our previously issued audited consolidated financial information for the fiscal years ended December 31, 2019 and 2018. Interim periods for the three-months ended March 31, 2020 and the three and six-months ended June 30, 2020 will be revised in connection with the corresponding 2021 interim filings. Refer to Note 2 to our consolidated financial statements included in this Annual Report for additional information.\n\nCoronavirus Pandemic (\"COVID-19\") and Oil and Gas Market - Over the past year, we have been challenged by macroeconomics and global economic impacts based on the disruption and uncertainties caused by COVID-19 and the emanating impacts of the pandemic on pricing and dampened demand for oil, further resulting in instability and volatility in oil commodity prices. To date, the COVID-19 pandemic has had widespread implications worldwide and has caused substantial economic uncertainty and challenging operational conditions. For example, during the year, these conditions drove the announcement of significant and broad-based decreases in customer planned capital spending. As a result, many of our large customers have announced and executed on double-digit capital expenditure budget decreases for 2020, resulting in lower bookings during 2020 as compared to the prior year.\n\nPrinciples of Consolidation - The consolidated financial statements include the accounts of our company and our wholly and majority-owned subsidiaries. In addition, we would consolidate any variable interest entities for which we are deemed to be the primary beneficiary. Noncontrolling interests of non-affiliated parties have been recognized for all majority-owned consolidated subsidiaries. Intercompany profits/losses, transactions and balances among consolidated entities have been eliminated from our consolidated financial statements.\n\nIn the ordinary course of our operations worldwide, we have entered into joint ventures and interests (collectively referred to as 'affiliates') to provide greater flexibility in delivering our products and services, gain access to markets and geographical locations and reduce exposure and diversify risk. Investments in affiliate companies with a noncontrolling ownership interests between 20% and 50%, are unconsolidated and are accounted for using the equity method, which approximates our equity interest in their underlying equivalent net book value under accounting principles generally accepted in the U.S. (\"U.S. GAAP\"). All equity method investments are reviewed for impairment whenever events and conditions indicate that a decrease in the value of an investment has occurred that is other than temporary. If impaired, an\n\n64", + "recall": 0.9873417721518988, + "true_md": "## FLOWSERVE CORPORATION NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS AS OF DECEMBER 31, 2020 AND 2019 AND FOR THE THREE YEARS ENDED DECEMBER 31, 2020\n\n## 1. SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES AND ACCOUNTING DEVELOPMENTS\n\nWe are principally engaged in the worldwide design, manufacture, distribution and service of industrial flow management equipment. We provide long lead time, custom and other highly-engineered pumps; standardized, general-purpose pumps; mechanical seals; engineered and industrial valves; related automation products; and services and solutions primarily for oil and gas, chemical, power generation, water management and other general industries requiring flow management products and services. Equipment manufactured and serviced by us is predominantly used in industries that deal with difficult-to-handle and corrosive fluids, as well as environments with extreme temperatures, pressure, horsepower and speed. Our business is affected by economic conditions in the United States (\"U.S.\") and other countries where our products are sold and serviced, by the cyclical nature and competitive environment of our industries served, by the relationship of the U.S. dollar to other currencies and by the demand for and pricing of our customers’ end products.\n\nRevision to Previously Reported Financial Information — In conjunction with our close process for the third quarter of 2020, we identified accounting errors related to the recognition of a liability for unasserted asbestos claims. The adjustments primarily related to an incurred but not reported (\"IBNR\") liability associated with unasserted asbestos claims, but also included adjustments related to the associated receivables for expected insurance proceeds for asbestos settlement and defense costs from insurance coverage and the recognition as an expense the related legal fees that were previously estimated to be recoverable from insurance carriers for which coverage is not currently sufficient following the recognition of the IBNR for periods beginning with the year ended December 31, 2014 through the second quarter of 2020 and to correct certain other previously identified immaterial errors.\n\nWe have assessed these errors, individually and in the aggregate, and concluded that they were not material to any prior periods. However, the aggregate amount of the prior period errors would have been material to our consolidated statements of income and full year results and therefore, we have revised our previously issued audited consolidated financial information for the fiscal years ended December 31, 2019 and 2018. Interim periods for the three-months ended March 31, 2020 and the three and six-months ended June 30, 2020 will be revised in connection with the corresponding 2021 interim filings. Refer to Note 2 to our consolidated financial statements included in this Annual Report for additional information.\n\nCoronavirus Pandemic (\"COVID-19\") and Oil and Gas Market — Over the past year, we have been challenged by macroeconomics and global economic impacts based on the disruption and uncertainties caused by COVID-19 and the emanating impacts of the pandemic on pricing and dampened demand for oil, further resulting in instability and volatility in oil commodity prices. To date, the COVID-19 pandemic has had widespread implications worldwide and has caused substantial economic uncertainty and challenging operational conditions. For example, during the year, these conditions drove the announcement of significant and broad-based decreases in customer planned capital spending. As a result, many of our large customers have announced and executed on double-digit capital expenditure budget decreases for 2020, resulting in lower bookings during 2020 as compared to the prior year.\n\nPrinciples of Consolidation — The consolidated financial statements include the accounts of our company and our wholly and majority-owned subsidiaries. In addition, we would consolidate any variable interest entities for which we are deemed to be the primary beneficiary. Noncontrolling interests of non-affiliated parties have been recognized for all majority-owned consolidated subsidiaries. Intercompany profits/losses, transactions and balances among consolidated entities have been eliminated from our consolidated financial statements.\n\nIn the ordinary course of our operations worldwide, we have entered into joint ventures and interests (collectively referred to as “affiliates”) to provide greater flexibility in delivering our products and services, gain access to markets and geographical locations and reduce exposure and diversify risk. Investments in affiliate companies with a noncontrolling ownership interests between 20% and 50%, are unconsolidated and are accounted for using the equity method, which approximates our equity interest in their underlying equivalent net book value under accounting principles generally accepted in the U.S. (\"U.S. GAAP\"). All equity method investments are reviewed for impairment whenever events and conditions indicate that a decrease in the value of an investment has occurred that is other than temporary. If impaired, an\n\n64" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8895647995364195, + "doc_id": "618fb2b5d8f53bf2803d664cd446d94b9659da521651c87995efa3f69c61e933", + "edit_distance": 0.12343470483005367, + "f1_score": 0.9757281553398058, + "meteor": 0.7932468505814865, + "precision": 0.9781021897810219, + "pred_md": "74\n\nCP\t2020\tANNUAL\tREPORT\n\nIn determining deferred income taxes, the Company makes estimates and assumptions regarding deferred tax matters, including estimating the timing of the realization and settlement of deferred income tax assets (including the benefit of tax losses) and liabilities, and estimating unrecognized tax benefits for uncertain tax positions. Deferred income taxes are calculated using enacted federal, provincial, and state future income tax rates, which may differ in future periods.\n\nDeferred income tax expense is included in \"Income tax expense\" on the Company's Consolidated Statements of Income. Additional disclosures are provided in Item 8. Financial Statements and Supplementary Data, Note 6 Income taxes.\n\n## Personal Injury and Other Claims Liabilities\n\nCP estimates the potential liability arising from incidents, claims and pending litigations relating to personal injury claims by employees, third-party claims, certain occupation-related claims and property damage claims.\n\n## Personal Injury\n\nIn Canada, employee occupational injuries are governed by provincial workers' compensation legislation. Occupational injury claims in the provinces of Québec, Ontario, Manitoba and B.C. are self-insured and administered through each Worker's Compensation Board (\"WCB\"). The future costs related to occupation-related injuries are actuarially determined based on past experience and assumptions associated with the injury, compensation, income replacement, health care and administrative costs. In the four provinces where the Company is self-insured, a discount rate is applied to the future estimated costs based on market rates for investment grade corporate bonds to determine the liability. An actuarial study is performed on an annual basis. In the provinces of Saskatchewan and Alberta, the Company is assessed an annual WCB contribution on a premium basis and this amount is not subject to estimation by management. At December 31, 2020 and 2019, respectively, the WCB liability was $84 million and $85 million in \"Pension and other benefit liabilities\"; $11 million and $11 million in \"Accounts payable and accrued liabilities\", offset by deposits paid to WCB of $1 million and $1 million in \"Other assets\" on the Company's Consolidated Balance Sheets.\n\nU.S. railway employees are covered by federal law under the Federal Employers' Liability Act (\"FELA\") rather than workers' compensation programs. Accruals are set for individual cases based on facts, legal opinion and statistical analysis. U.S. accruals are also set and include alleged occupational exposure or injury.\n\n## Other Claims\n\nA provision for litigation matters, equipment damages or other claims will be accrued according to applicable accounting standards and any such accrual will be based on an ongoing assessment of the strengths and weaknesses of the litigation or claim and its likelihood of success, together with an evaluation of the damages or other monetary relief sought. CP accrues for probable claims when the facts of an incident become known and investigation results provide a reasonable basis for estimating the liability. The lower end of the range is accrued if the facts and circumstances permit only a range of reasonable estimates and no single amount in that range is a better estimate than any other. Facts and circumstances related to asserted claims can change, and a process is in place to monitor accruals for changes in accounting estimates.\n\n## Forward-Looking Statements\n\nThis Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations and Annual Report on Form 10-K contains certain forward-looking statements within the meaning of the United States Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995 and forward-looking information within the meaning of other relevant securities legislation, including applicable securities laws in Canada (collectively referred to herein as \"forward-looking statements\"). Forward-looking statements typically include words such as 'financial expectations', 'key assumptions', 'anticipate', 'believe', 'expect', 'plan', 'will', 'outlook', 'should' or similar words suggesting future outcomes. To the extent that CP has provided forecasts or targets using Non-GAAP financial measures, the Company may not be able to provide a reconciliation to a GAAP measure without unreasonable efforts, due to unknown variables and uncertainty related to future results.\n\nThis Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations and Annual Report on Form 10-K includes forward-looking statements relating, but not limited to statements concerning the Company's defined benefit pension expectations for 2021 and through 2024, our expectations for 2021 financial and operational performance, including our full-year guidance for expected RTM and adjusted diluted EPS growth, planned capital expenditures (including how such capital expenditures are expected to be financed), expected impacts resulting from changes in the U.S.-to-Canadian dollar exchange rate, and the effective tax rate, as well as statements concerning the Company's operations, anticipated financial performance, business prospects and strategies, including statements concerning the anticipation that cash flow from operations and various sources of financing will be sufficient to meet debt repayments and obligations in the foreseeable future and concerning anticipated capital programs, and statements regarding future payments including income taxes and pension contributions. The purpose of the 2021 Adjusted diluted EPS growth projection is to assist readers in understanding our expected and targeted financial results, and this information may not be appropriate for other purposes.\n\nThe forward-looking statements contained in this Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations and Annual Report on Form 10-K are based on current expectations, estimates, projections and assumptions, having regard to the Company's experience and its perception of historical trends, and includes, but is not limited to, expectations, estimates, projections and assumptions relating to: North American and", + "recall": 0.9733656174334141, + "true_md": "CP 2020 ANNUAL REPORT 74\n\nIn determining deferred income taxes, the Company makes estimates and assumptions regarding deferred tax matters, including estimating the timing of the realization and settlement of deferred income tax assets (including the benefit of tax losses) and liabilities, and estimating unrecognized tax benefits for uncertain tax positions. Deferred income taxes are calculated using enacted federal, provincial, and state future income tax rates, which may differ in future periods.\n\nDeferred income tax expense is included in \"Income tax expense\" on the Company's Consolidated Statements of Income. Additional disclosures are provided in Item 8. Financial Statements and Supplementary Data, Note 6 Income taxes.\n\nPersonal Injury and Other Claims Liabilities CP estimates the potential liability arising from incidents, claims and pending litigations relating to personal injury claims by employees, third-party claims, certain occupation-related claims and property damage claims.\n\nPersonal Injury In Canada, employee occupational injuries are governed by provincial workers' compensation legislation. Occupational injury claims in the provinces of Québec, Ontario, Manitoba and B.C. are self-insured and administered through each Worker's Compensation Board (\"WCB\"). The future costs related to occupation-related injuries are actuarially determined based on past experience and assumptions associated with the injury, compensation, income replacement, health care and administrative costs. In the four provinces where the Company is self-insured, a discount rate is applied to the future estimated costs based on market rates for investment grade corporate bonds to determine the liability. An actuarial study is performed on an annual basis. In the provinces of Saskatchewan and Alberta, the Company is assessed an annual WCB contribution on a premium basis and this amount is not subject to estimation by management. At December 31, 2020 and 2019, respectively, the WCB liability was $84 million and $85 million in \"Pension and other benefit liabilities\"; $11 million and $11 million in \"Accounts payable and accrued liabilities\", offset by deposits paid to WCB of $1 million and $1 million in \"Other assets\" on the Company's Consolidated Balance Sheets.\n\nU.S. railway employees are covered by federal law under the Federal Employers' Liability Act (\"FELA\") rather than workers' compensation programs. Accruals are set for individual cases based on facts, legal opinion and statistical analysis. U.S. accruals are also set and include alleged occupational exposure or injury.\n\nOther Claims A provision for litigation matters, equipment damages or other claims will be accrued according to applicable accounting standards and any such accrual will be based on an ongoing assessment of the strengths and weaknesses of the litigation or claim and its likelihood of success, together with an evaluation of the damages or other monetary relief sought. CP accrues for probable claims when the facts of an incident become known and investigation results provide a reasonable basis for estimating the liability. The lower end of the range is accrued if the facts and circumstances permit only a range of reasonable estimates and no single amount in that range is a better estimate than any other. Facts and circumstances related to asserted claims can change, and a process is in place to monitor accruals for changes in accounting estimates.\n\nThis Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations and Annual Report on Form 10-K contains certain forward-looking statements within the meaning of the United States Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995 and forward-looking information within the meaning of other relevant securities legislation, including applicable securities laws in Canada (collectively referred to herein as \"forward-looking statements\"). Forward-looking statements typically include words such as “financial expectations”, “key assumptions”, “anticipate”, “believe”, “expect”, “plan”, “will”, “outlook”, “should” or similar words suggesting future outcomes. To the extent that CP has provided forecasts or targets using Non-GAAP financial measures, the Company may not be able to provide a reconciliation to a GAAP measure without unreasonable efforts, due to unknown variables and uncertainty related to future results.\n\nThis Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations and Annual Report on Form 10-K includes forward-looking statements relating, but not limited to statements concerning the Company’s defined benefit pension expectations for 2021 and through 2024, our expectations for 2021 financial and operational performance, including our full-year guidance for expected RTM and adjusted diluted EPS growth, planned capital expenditures (including how such capital expenditures are expected to be financed), expected impacts resulting from changes in the U.S.-to-Canadian dollar exchange rate, and the effective tax rate, as well as statements concerning the Company’s operations, anticipated financial performance, business prospects and strategies, including statements concerning the anticipation that cash flow from operations and various sources of financing will be sufficient to meet debt repayments and obligations in the foreseeable future and concerning anticipated capital programs, and statements regarding future payments including income taxes and pension contributions. The purpose of the 2021 Adjusted diluted EPS growth projection is to assist readers in understanding our expected and targeted financial results, and this information may not be appropriate for other purposes.\n\n## Forward-Looking Statements\n\n## Other Claims A provision for litigation matters, equipment damages or other claims will be accrued according to applicable accounting standards and any such accrual will be\n\n## Personal Injury In Canada, employee occupational injuries are governed by provincial workers' compensation legislation. Occupational injury claims in the provinces of Québec,\n\n## Personal Injury and Other Claims Liabilities CP estimates the potential liability arising from incidents, claims and pending litigations relating to personal injury claims by employees, third-party claims,\n\nThe forward-looking statements contained in this Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations and Annual Report on Form 10-K are based on current expectations, estimates, projections and assumptions, having regard to the Company's experience and its perception of historical trends, and includes, but is not limited to, expectations, estimates, projections and assumptions relating to: North American and" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9215480679312017, + "doc_id": "1a89cacbdbea7a5f42cc1e8215267c7eff9f9498a75ecabb86cd0cf657d091e4", + "edit_distance": 0.1336405529953917, + "f1_score": 0.9766233766233765, + "meteor": 0.9577009169817668, + "precision": 0.9842931937172775, + "pred_md": "## ITEM 6. SELECTED CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL DATA\n\nWe adopted three new accounting standards as of January 1, 2018: Accounting Standards Update (ASU) 2016-02: Leases (Topic 842) (the New Lease Standard), ASU 2014-09: Revenue from Contracts with Customers (the New Revenue Standard) and ASU 2017-07: Compensation - Retirement Benefits (the New Retirement Standard). The 2017 and 2016 financial information presented within this Item 6. Selected Consolidated Financial Data has been recast to reflect the impact of the adoption of the New Revenue Standard and the New Retirement Standard. The New Lease Standard did not require the recast of prior periods. See Note 1(b) to each of AAG's and American's Consolidated Financial Statements in Part II, Items 8A and 8B, respectively, of AAG's and American's Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 2018, for further information on the impacts of these new accounting standards.\n\n## Selected Consolidated Financial Data of AAG\n\nThe selected consolidated financial data presented below under the captions 'Consolidated Statements of Operations data' and 'Consolidated Balance Sheet data' for the years ended and as of December 31, 2020, 2019, 2018, 2017 and 2016, are derived from AAG's audited consolidated financial statements.\n\nTable of Contents\n\nSubstantially\tall\tdefined\tbenefit\tpension\tplans\twere\tfrozen\teffective\tNovember\t1,\t2012.\tSee\tNote\t10\tto\tAAG's\tConsolidated\tFinancial\tStatements in\tPart\tII,\tItem\t8A\tfor\tfurther\tinformation\ton\tpension\tand\tpostretirement\tbenefits. (1)\n\n## Reconciliation of GAAP to Non-GAAP Financial Measures\n\nWe sometimes use financial measures that are derived from the consolidated financial statements but that are not presented in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the U.S. (GAAP) to understand and evaluate our current operating performance and to allow for period-toperiod comparisons. We believe these non-GAAP financial measures may also provide useful information to investors and others. These non-GAAP measures may not be comparable to similarly titled non-GAAP measures of other companies, and should be considered in addition to, and not as a substitute for or superior to, any measure of performance, cash flow or liquidity prepared in accordance with GAAP. We are providing a reconciliation of reported non-GAAP financial measures to their comparable financial measures on a GAAP basis.\n\n60", + "recall": 0.9690721649484536, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## ITEM 6. SELECTED CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL DATA\n\n## Selected Consolidated Financial Data of AAG\n\n## Reconciliation of GAAP to Non-GAAP Financial Measures\n\nWe adopted three new accounting standards as of January 1, 2018: Accounting Standards Update (ASU) 2016-02: Leases (Topic 842) (the New Lease Standard), ASU 2014-09: Revenue from Contracts with Customers (the New Revenue Standard) and ASU 2017-07: Compensation - Retirement Benefits (the New Retirement Standard). The 2017 and 2016 financial information presented within this Item 6. Selected Consolidated Financial Data has been recast to reflect the impact of the adoption of the New Revenue Standard and the New Retirement Standard. The New Lease Standard did not require the recast of prior periods. See Note 1(b) to each of AAG’s and American’s Consolidated Financial Statements in Part II, Items 8A and 8B, respectively, of AAG’s and American’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 2018, for further information on the impacts of these new accounting standards.\n\nThe selected consolidated financial data presented below under the captions “Consolidated Statements of Operations data” and “Consolidated Balance Sheet data” for the years ended and as of December 31, 2020, 2019, 2018, 2017 and 2016, are derived from AAG’s audited consolidated financial statements.\n\nSubstantially all defined benefit pension plans were frozen effective November 1, 2012. See Note 10 to AAG's Consolidated Financial Statements in Part II, Item 8A for further information on pension and postretirement benefits. (1)\n\nWe sometimes use financial measures that are derived from the consolidated financial statements but that are not presented in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the U.S. (GAAP) to understand and evaluate our current operating performance and to allow for period-to- period comparisons. We believe these non-GAAP financial measures may also provide useful information to investors and others. These non-GAAP measures may not be comparable to similarly titled non-GAAP measures of other companies, and should be considered in addition to, and not as a substitute for or superior to, any measure of performance, cash flow or liquidity prepared in accordance with GAAP. We are providing a reconciliation of reported non-GAAP financial measures to their comparable financial measures on a GAAP basis.\n\n60" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9730722884600366, + "doc_id": "769d6d3917df8d4e4f86781abf1a337fce8e8bf2485dd3d083302c6ce8f0d17b", + "edit_distance": 0.0615234375, + "f1_score": 0.9810126582278481, + "meteor": 0.9830248348670884, + "precision": 0.9841269841269841, + "pred_md": "## Table of Contents\n\n## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS OF AMERICAN AIRLINES, INC.\n\nSubject to certain limitations and exceptions, the Credit Facilities are secured by collateral, including certain spare parts, slots, route authorities, simulators and leasehold rights. American has the ability to make future modifications to the collateral pledged, subject to certain restrictions. American's obligations under the Credit Facilities are guaranteed by AAG. American is required to maintain a certain minimum ratio of appraised value of the collateral to the outstanding loans as further described below in 'Certain Covenants.'\n\nThe Credit Facilities contain events of default customary for similar financings, including cross default to other material indebtedness. Upon the occurrence of an event of default, the outstanding obligations may be accelerated and become due and payable immediately. In addition, if a 'change of control' occurs, American will (absent an amendment or waiver) be required to repay at par the loans outstanding under the Credit Facilities and terminate the 2013 Revolving Facility, 2014 Revolving Facility and April 2016 Revolving Facility and any revolving credit facility established under the December 2016 Credit Facilities. The Credit Facilities also include covenants that, among other things, require AAG to maintain an aggregate of at least $2.0 billion of unrestricted cash and cash equivalents and amounts available to be drawn under revolving credit facilities and limit the ability of AAG and its restricted subsidiaries to pay dividends and make certain other payments, make certain investments, incur additional indebtedness, incur liens on the collateral, dispose of the collateral, enter into certain affiliate transactions and engage in certain business activities, in each case subject to certain exceptions.\n\n## Delayed Draw Term Loan Credit Facility\n\nIn March 2020, American and AAG entered into a Credit and Guaranty Agreement which provided for a $1.0 billion senior secured delayed draw term loan credit facility (the Delayed Draw Term Loan Credit Facility), which was scheduled to be due and payable in a single installment on the maturity date in March 2021. In connection with the issuance of the 11.75% senior secured notes due 2025, as described below, the Delayed Draw Term Loan Credit Facility was repaid and the Delayed Draw Term Loan Credit Facility and all of the security documents and other loan documents related thereto were terminated as of June 30, 2020.\n\n## (b) Senior Secured Notes\n\n## 11.75% Senior Secured Notes\n\nIn June 2020, American issued $2.5 billion aggregate principal amount of 11.75% senior secured notes due 2025 (the 11.75% Senior Secured Notes) at a price equal to 99% of their aggregate principal amount. The 11.75% Senior Secured Notes bear interest at a rate of 11.75% per annum (subject to increase if the collateral coverage ratio described below is not met). Interest on the 11.75% Senior Secured Notes is payable semiannually in arrears on January 15 and July 15 of each year, beginning on January 15, 2021. The 11.75% Senior Secured Notes will mature on July 15, 2025. The obligations of American under the 11.75% Senior Secured Notes are fully and unconditionally guaranteed on a senior unsecured basis by AAG. The proceeds from the 11.75% Senior Secured Notes were used to repay and terminate the Delayed Draw Term Loan Credit Facility (and to terminate all security documents and all other loan documents related thereto) with the remaining amount for general corporate purposes and to enhance American's liquidity position.\n\nThe 11.75% Senior Secured Notes were issued pursuant to an indenture, dated as of June 30, 2020 (the 11.75% Senior Secured Notes Indenture), by and among American, AAG and Wilmington Trust, National Association, as trustee (the 11.75% Senior Secured Notes Trustee). The 11.75% Senior Secured Notes are American's senior secured obligations. Subject to certain limitations and exceptions, the 11.75% Senior Secured Notes are secured on a first-lien basis by security interests in certain assets, rights and properties utilized by American in providing its scheduled air carrier services to and from certain airports in the United States and certain airports in Australia, Canada, the Caribbean, Central America, China, Hong Kong, Japan, Mexico, South Korea, and Switzerland (collectively, the First Lien 11.75% Senior Secured Notes Collateral). American's obligations with respect to the 11.75% Senior Secured Notes are also secured on a second-lien basis by security interests in certain assets, rights and properties utilized by American in providing its scheduled air carrier services to and from certain airports in the United States and certain airports in the European Union and the United Kingdom (collectively, the Second Lien 11.75% Senior Secured Notes Collateral and together with the First Lien 11.75% Senior Secured Notes Collateral, the 11.75% Senior Secured Notes Collateral). American may be required to pledge additional collateral in the future under the terms of the 11.75% Senior Secured Notes, and in certain circumstances may elect to pledge additional collateral as a replacement for existing collateral. The Second Lien 11.75% Senior Secured Notes Collateral also secures the 2014 Credit Facilities on a first-lien basis.\n\nAmerican may redeem the 11.75% Senior Secured Notes, in whole at any time or in part from time to time, at a redemption price equal to 100% of the principal amount of the 11.75% Senior Secured Notes being redeemed plus a make whole premium, together with accrued and unpaid interest thereon, if any, to (but not including) the redemption date.\n\n170", + "recall": 0.9779179810725552, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS OF AMERICAN AIRLINES, INC.\n\nSubject to certain limitations and exceptions, the Credit Facilities are secured by collateral, including certain spare parts, slots, route authorities, simulators and leasehold rights. American has the ability to make future modifications to the collateral pledged, subject to certain restrictions. American’s obligations under the Credit Facilities are guaranteed by AAG. American is required to maintain a certain minimum ratio of appraised value of the collateral to the outstanding loans as further described below in “Certain Covenants.”\n\nThe Credit Facilities contain events of default customary for similar financings, including cross default to other material indebtedness. Upon the occurrence of an event of default, the outstanding obligations may be accelerated and become due and payable immediately. In addition, if a “change of control” occurs, American will (absent an amendment or waiver) be required to repay at par the loans outstanding under the Credit Facilities and terminate the 2013 Revolving Facility, 2014 Revolving Facility and April 2016 Revolving Facility and any revolving credit facility established under the December 2016 Credit Facilities. The Credit Facilities also include covenants that, among other things, require AAG to maintain an aggregate of at least $2.0 billion of unrestricted cash and cash equivalents and amounts available to be drawn under revolving credit facilities and limit the ability of AAG and its restricted subsidiaries to pay dividends and make certain other payments, make certain investments, incur additional indebtedness, incur liens on the collateral, dispose of the collateral, enter into certain affiliate transactions and engage in certain business activities, in each case subject to certain exceptions.\n\nIn March 2020, American and AAG entered into a Credit and Guaranty Agreement which provided for a $1.0 billion senior secured delayed draw term loan credit facility (the Delayed Draw Term Loan Credit Facility), which was scheduled to be due and payable in a single installment on the maturity date in March 2021. In connection with the issuance of the 11.75% senior secured notes due 2025, as described below, the Delayed Draw Term Loan Credit Facility was repaid and the Delayed Draw Term Loan Credit Facility and all of the security documents and other loan documents related thereto were terminated as of June 30, 2020.\n\nIn June 2020, American issued $2.5 billion aggregate principal amount of 11.75% senior secured notes due 2025 (the 11.75% Senior Secured Notes) at a price equal to 99% of their aggregate principal amount. The 11.75% Senior Secured Notes bear interest at a rate of 11.75% per annum (subject to increase if the collateral coverage ratio described below is not met). Interest on the 11.75% Senior Secured Notes is payable semiannually in arrears on January 15 and July 15 of each year, beginning on January 15, 2021. The 11.75% Senior Secured Notes will mature on July 15, 2025. The obligations of American under the 11.75% Senior Secured Notes are fully and unconditionally guaranteed on a senior unsecured basis by AAG. The proceeds from the 11.75% Senior Secured Notes were used to repay and terminate the Delayed Draw Term Loan Credit Facility (and to terminate all security documents and all other loan documents related thereto) with the remaining amount for general corporate purposes and to enhance American’s liquidity position.\n\nThe 11.75% Senior Secured Notes were issued pursuant to an indenture, dated as of June 30, 2020 (the 11.75% Senior Secured Notes Indenture), by and among American, AAG and Wilmington Trust, National Association, as trustee (the 11.75% Senior Secured Notes Trustee). The 11.75% Senior Secured Notes are American’s senior secured obligations. Subject to certain limitations and exceptions, the 11.75% Senior Secured Notes are secured on a first-lien basis by security interests in certain assets, rights and properties utilized by American in providing its scheduled air carrier services to and from certain airports in the United States and certain airports in Australia, Canada, the Caribbean, Central America, China, Hong Kong, Japan, Mexico, South Korea, and Switzerland (collectively, the First Lien 11.75% Senior Secured Notes Collateral). American’s obligations with respect to the 11.75% Senior Secured Notes are also secured on a second-lien basis by security interests in certain assets, rights and properties utilized by American in providing its scheduled air carrier services to and from certain airports in the United States and certain airports in the European Union and the United Kingdom (collectively, the Second Lien 11.75% Senior Secured Notes Collateral and together with the First Lien 11.75% Senior Secured Notes Collateral, the 11.75% Senior Secured Notes Collateral). American may be required to pledge additional collateral in the future under the terms of the 11.75% Senior Secured Notes, and in certain circumstances may elect to pledge additional collateral as a replacement for existing collateral. The Second Lien 11.75% Senior Secured Notes Collateral also secures the 2014 Credit Facilities on a first-lien basis.\n\nAmerican may redeem the 11.75% Senior Secured Notes, in whole at any time or in part from time to time, at a redemption price equal to 100% of the principal amount of the 11.75% Senior Secured Notes being redeemed plus a make whole premium, together with accrued and unpaid interest thereon, if any, to (but not including) the redemption date.\n\n170\n\n## 11.75% Senior Secured Notes\n\n## (b) Senior Secured Notes\n\n## Delayed Draw Term Loan Credit Facility" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9939294000472845, + "doc_id": "f1c3766845c4781116f4ba9c5f7e4df04e97d95bc543450d7b5938a53645548b", + "edit_distance": 0.15242494226327943, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9830998553300808, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "may be adversely affected, and we could experience business disruptions with customers and elsewhere if our transformation and realignment efforts prove ineffective.\n\n## We sell our products in highly competitive markets, which results in pressure on our profit margins and limits our ability to maintain or increase the market share of our products.\n\nThe markets for our products and services are geographically diverse and highly competitive. We compete against large and well-established national and global companies, as well as regional and local companies, low-cost replicators of spare parts and in-house maintenance departments of our end-user customers. We compete based on price, technical expertise, timeliness of delivery, contractual terms, project management, proximity to service centers, previous installation history and reputation for quality and reliability. Competitive environments in slow-growth industries and for original equipment orders have been inherently more influenced by pricing and domestic and global economic conditions and current economic forecasts suggest that the competitive influence of pricing has broadened. Additionally, some of our customers have been attempting to reduce the number of vendors from which they purchase in order to reduce the size and diversity of their supply chain. To remain competitive, we must invest in manufacturing, technology, marketing, customer service and support and our distribution networks. No assurances can be made that we will have sufficient resources to continue to make the investment required to maintain or increase our market share or that our investments will be successful. In addition, negative publicity or other organized campaigns critical of us, through social media or otherwise, could negatively affect our reputation and competitive position. If we do not compete successfully, our business, financial condition, results of operations and cash flows could be materially adversely affected.\n\n## Failure to successfully develop and introduce new products could limit our ability to grow and maintain our competitive position and adversely affect our financial condition, results of operations and cash flow.\n\nThe success of new and improved products and services depends on their initial and continued acceptance by our customers. Our businesses are affected by varying degrees of technological change and corresponding shifts in customer demand, which result in unpredictable product transitions, shortened life cycles and increased importance of being first to market with new products and services. Difficulties or delays in the research, development, production and/or marketing of new products and services may negatively impact our operating results and prevent us from recouping or realizing a return on the investments required to continue to bring these products and services to market.\n\n## Our inability to obtain raw materials at favorable prices may adversely affect our operating margins and results of operations.\n\nWe purchase substantially all electric power and other raw materials we use in the manufacturing of our products from outside sources. The costs of these raw materials have been volatile historically and are influenced by factors that are outside our control. In recent years, the prices for energy, metal alloys, nickel and certain other of our raw materials have been volatile. While we strive to offset our increased costs through supply chain management, contractual provisions and our Continuous Improvement Process initiative, where gains are achieved in operational efficiencies, our operating margins and results of operations and cash flows may be adversely affected if we are unable to pass increases in the costs of our raw materials on to our customers or operational efficiencies are not achieved.\n\n## The outbreak and global spread of the novel coronavirus (COVID-19) are having an adverse impact on our operations and financial performance, as well as on the operations and financial performance of many of our customers and suppliers. We are unable to predict the full extent to which the COVID-19 pandemic will continue to adversely impact our operations, financial performance, results of operations, financial condition, cash flows and/or stock price.\n\nThe COVID-19 pandemic has curtailed the movement of people, goods and services worldwide, including in most of the regions in which we conduct our operations. As part of intensifying efforts to contain the spread of COVID-19, a number of local, state and national governments have imposed various restrictions on the conduct of business and travel, such as stay-at-home orders and quarantines, that have led to a significant number of business slowdowns and closures. The COVID-19 pandemic has resulted in, and is expected to continue to result in, a substantial curtailment of business activities (including the decrease in demand for a broad variety of goods and services), weakened economic conditions, supply chain disruptions, significant economic uncertainty and volatility in the financial and commodity markets, including the reduction in global demand for oil and gas combined with excessive supply due to disagreements between OPEC, both in the United States and abroad.\n\n15", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## Our inability to obtain raw materials at favorable prices may adversely affect our operating margins and results of operations.\n\n## Failure to successfully develop and introduce new products could limit our ability to grow and maintain our competitive position and adversely affect our financial condition, results of operations and cash flow.\n\n## We sell our products in highly competitive markets, which results in pressure on our profit margins and limits our ability to maintain or increase the market share of our products.\n\nmay be adversely affected, and we could experience business disruptions with customers and elsewhere if our transformation and realignment efforts prove ineffective.\n\nThe markets for our products and services are geographically diverse and highly competitive. We compete against large and well-established national and global companies, as well as regional and local companies, low-cost replicators of spare parts and in-house maintenance departments of our end-user customers. We compete based on price, technical expertise, timeliness of delivery, contractual terms, project management, proximity to service centers, previous installation history and reputation for quality and reliability. Competitive environments in slow-growth industries and for original equipment orders have been inherently more influenced by pricing and domestic and global economic conditions and current economic forecasts suggest that the competitive influence of pricing has broadened. Additionally, some of our customers have been attempting to reduce the number of vendors from which they purchase in order to reduce the size and diversity of their supply chain. To remain competitive, we must invest in manufacturing, technology, marketing, customer service and support and our distribution networks. No assurances can be made that we will have sufficient resources to continue to make the investment required to maintain or increase our market share or that our investments will be successful. In addition, negative publicity or other organized campaigns critical of us, through social media or otherwise, could negatively affect our reputation and competitive position. If we do not compete successfully, our business, financial condition, results of operations and cash flows could be materially adversely affected.\n\nThe success of new and improved products and services depends on their initial and continued acceptance by our customers. Our businesses are affected by varying degrees of technological change and corresponding shifts in customer demand, which result in unpredictable product transitions, shortened life cycles and increased importance of being first to market with new products and services. Difficulties or delays in the research, development, production and/or marketing of new products and services may negatively impact our operating results and prevent us from recouping or realizing a return on the investments required to continue to bring these products and services to market.\n\nWe purchase substantially all electric power and other raw materials we use in the manufacturing of our products from outside sources. The costs of these raw materials have been volatile historically and are influenced by factors that are outside our control. In recent years, the prices for energy, metal alloys, nickel and certain other of our raw materials have been volatile. While we strive to offset our increased costs through supply chain management, contractual provisions and our Continuous Improvement Process initiative, where gains are achieved in operational efficiencies, our operating margins and results of operations and cash flows may be adversely affected if we are unable to pass increases in the costs of our raw materials on to our customers or operational efficiencies are not achieved.\n\n## The outbreak and global spread of the novel coronavirus (COVID-19) are having an adverse impact on our operations and financial performance, as well as on the operations and financial performance of many of our customers and suppliers. We are unable to predict the full extent to which the COVID-19 pandemic will continue to adversely impact our operations, financial performance, results of operations, financial condition, cash flows and/or stock price.\n\nThe COVID-19 pandemic has curtailed the movement of people, goods and services worldwide, including in most of the regions in which we conduct our operations. As part of intensifying efforts to contain the spread of COVID-19, a number of local, state and national governments have imposed various restrictions on the conduct of business and travel, such as stay-at-home orders and quarantines, that have led to a significant number of business slowdowns and closures. The COVID-19 pandemic has resulted in, and is expected to continue to result in, a substantial curtailment of business activities (including the decrease in demand for a broad variety of goods and services), weakened economic conditions, supply chain disruptions, significant economic uncertainty and volatility in the financial and commodity markets, including the reduction in global demand for oil and gas combined with excessive supply due to disagreements between OPEC, both in the United States and abroad.\n\n15" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8721913921215235, + "doc_id": "938442e4c7f6c82175fd77f6874f9fc1b2531707026d6f966abe0408a1060137", + "edit_distance": 0.11688311688311688, + "f1_score": 0.9861751152073733, + "meteor": 0.900341082583349, + "precision": 0.9907407407407407, + "pred_md": "71\n\nCP\t2020\tANNUAL\tREPORT\n\n## Environmental Liabilities\n\nEnvironmental remediation accruals cover site-specific remediation programs. CP estimates of the probable costs to be incurred in the remediation of properties contaminated by past railway activities reflect the nature of contamination at individual sites according to typical activities and scale of operations conducted. The Company screens and classifies sites according to typical activities and scale of operations conducted. CP has developed remediation strategies for each property based on the nature and extent of the contamination, as well as the location of the property and surrounding areas that may be adversely affected by the presence of contaminants. CP also considers available technologies, treatment and disposal facilities and the acceptability of site-specific plans based on the local regulatory environment. Site-specific plans range from containment and risk management of the contaminants through to the removal and treatment of the contaminants and affected soils and groundwater. The details of the estimates reflect the environmental liability at each property. The Company is committed to fully meeting regulatory and legal obligations with respect to environmental matters.\n\nSome sites include remediation activities that are projected beyond the 10-year period, which CP is unable to reasonably estimate and determine. Therefore, CP's accruals of the environmental liabilities is based on an estimate of costs for a rolling 10-year period covered by the environmental program. Payments are expected to be made over 10 years to 2030. A limited portion of the environmental accruals, the stable Perpetual Care for the environmental program, are fixed and reliably determined. This portion of the environmental liabilities is discounted using a risk-free rate, adjusted by inflation and productivity improvements.\n\nProvisions for environmental remediation costs are recorded in 'Other long-term liabilities' (refer to Item 8. Financial Statements and Supplementary Data, Note 18 Other long-term liabilities), except for the current portion which is recorded in 'Accounts payable and accrued liabilities' (refer to Item 8. Financial Statements and Supplementary Data, Note 15 Accounts payable and accrued liabilities). The accruals for environmental remediation represent CP's best estimate of its probable future obligations and include both asserted and unasserted claims, without reduction for anticipated recoveries from third parties. Although the recorded accruals include CP's best estimate of all probable costs, CP's total environmental remediation costs cannot be predicted with certainty. Accruals for environmental remediation may change from time to time as new information about previously untested sites becomes known, environmental laws and regulations evolve and advances are made in environmental remediation technology. The accruals may also vary as the courts decide legal proceedings against outside parties responsible for contamination. These potential charges, which cannot be quantified at this time, are not expected to be material to the Company's financial position, but may materially affect income in the period in which a charge is recognized.\n\nThe environmental liabilities are also sensitive to the increase in cost of materials which would be reflected as increases to \"Other long-term liabilities\" and \"Accounts payable and accrued liabilities\" on the Company's Consolidated Balance Sheets and to \"Purchased services and other\" within Operating expenses on the Company's Consolidated Statements of Income. CP's cash payments for environmental initiatives are estimated to be approximately $9 million in 2021, $10 million in 2022, $9 million in 2023 and a total of approximately $53 million over the remaining years through 2030. All payments will be funded from general operations.\n\n## Pensions and Other Benefits\n\nCP has defined benefit and defined contribution pension plans. Other benefits include post-retirement medical and life insurance for pensioners, and some postemployment workers' compensation and long-term disability benefits in Canada. Workers' compensation and long-term disability benefits are discussed in the Personal Injury and Other Claims Liabilities section below. Pension and post-retirement benefits liabilities are subject to various external influences and uncertainties.\n\nInformation concerning the measurement of costs for pensions and other benefits is discussed in Item 8. Financial Statements and Supplementary Data, Note 1 Summary of significant accounting policies and Note 22 Pensions and other benefits.\n\n## Net Periodic Benefit Costs\n\nThe Company reports the current service cost component of net periodic benefit cost in \"Compensation and benefits\" for pensions and post-retirement benefits and in \"Purchased services and other\" for self-insured workers' compensation and long-term disability benefits on the Company's Consolidated Statements of Income. The Other components of net periodic benefit recovery are reported as a separate line item outside of Operating income on the Company's Consolidated Statements of Income. Components of the net periodic benefit costs (credits) are as follows:", + "recall": 0.981651376146789, + "true_md": "71 CP 2020 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n## Environmental Liabilities Environmental remediation accruals cover site-specific remediation programs. CP estimates of the probable costs to be incurred in the remediation of properties\n\n## Pensions and Other Benefits CP has defined benefit and defined contribution pension plans. Other benefits include post-retirement medical and life insurance for pensioners, and some post-\n\n## Net Periodic Benefit Costs The Company reports the current service cost component of net periodic benefit cost in \"Compensation and benefits\" for pensions and post-retirement benefits\n\nEnvironmental Liabilities Environmental remediation accruals cover site-specific remediation programs. CP estimates of the probable costs to be incurred in the remediation of properties contaminated by past railway activities reflect the nature of contamination at individual sites according to typical activities and scale of operations conducted. The Company screens and classifies sites according to typical activities and scale of operations conducted. CP has developed remediation strategies for each property based on the nature and extent of the contamination, as well as the location of the property and surrounding areas that may be adversely affected by the presence of contaminants. CP also considers available technologies, treatment and disposal facilities and the acceptability of site-specific plans based on the local regulatory environment. Site-specific plans range from containment and risk management of the contaminants through to the removal and treatment of the contaminants and affected soils and groundwater. The details of the estimates reflect the environmental liability at each property. The Company is committed to fully meeting regulatory and legal obligations with respect to environmental matters.\n\nSome sites include remediation activities that are projected beyond the 10-year period, which CP is unable to reasonably estimate and determine. Therefore, CP's accruals of the environmental liabilities is based on an estimate of costs for a rolling 10-year period covered by the environmental program. Payments are expected to be made over 10 years to 2030. A limited portion of the environmental accruals, the stable Perpetual Care for the environmental program, are fixed and reliably determined. This portion of the environmental liabilities is discounted using a risk-free rate, adjusted by inflation and productivity improvements.\n\nProvisions for environmental remediation costs are recorded in “Other long-term liabilities” (refer to Item 8. Financial Statements and Supplementary Data, Note 18 Other long-term liabilities), except for the current portion which is recorded in “Accounts payable and accrued liabilities” (refer to Item 8. Financial Statements and Supplementary Data, Note 15 Accounts payable and accrued liabilities). The accruals for environmental remediation represent CP’s best estimate of its probable future obligations and include both asserted and unasserted claims, without reduction for anticipated recoveries from third parties. Although the recorded accruals include CP’s best estimate of all probable costs, CP’s total environmental remediation costs cannot be predicted with certainty. Accruals for environmental remediation may change from time to time as new information about previously untested sites becomes known, environmental laws and regulations evolve and advances are made in environmental remediation technology. The accruals may also vary as the courts decide legal proceedings against outside parties responsible for contamination. These potential charges, which cannot be quantified at this time, are not expected to be material to the Company’s financial position, but may materially affect income in the period in which a charge is recognized.\n\nThe environmental liabilities are also sensitive to the increase in cost of materials which would be reflected as increases to \"Other long-term liabilities\" and \"Accounts payable and accrued liabilities\" on the Company’s Consolidated Balance Sheets and to \"Purchased services and other\" within Operating expenses on the Company's Consolidated Statements of Income. CP's cash payments for environmental initiatives are estimated to be approximately $9 million in 2021, $10 million in 2022, $9 million in 2023 and a total of approximately $53 million over the remaining years through 2030. All payments will be funded from general operations.\n\nPensions and Other Benefits CP has defined benefit and defined contribution pension plans. Other benefits include post-retirement medical and life insurance for pensioners, and some post- employment workers’ compensation and long-term disability benefits in Canada. Workers’ compensation and long-term disability benefits are discussed in the Personal Injury and Other Claims Liabilities section below. Pension and post-retirement benefits liabilities are subject to various external influences and uncertainties.\n\nInformation concerning the measurement of costs for pensions and other benefits is discussed in Item 8. Financial Statements and Supplementary Data, Note 1 Summary of significant accounting policies and Note 22 Pensions and other benefits.\n\nNet Periodic Benefit Costs The Company reports the current service cost component of net periodic benefit cost in \"Compensation and benefits\" for pensions and post-retirement benefits and in \"Purchased services and other\" for self-insured workers' compensation and long-term disability benefits on the Company's Consolidated Statements of Income. The Other components of net periodic benefit recovery are reported as a separate line item outside of Operating income on the Company's Consolidated Statements of Income. Components of the net periodic benefit costs (credits) are as follows:" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9551373508512069, + "doc_id": "5bcb1a0e245ead55561c34fbf8bbdbd0a818f77c10a16e07167d6f2ac6528eab", + "edit_distance": 0.03389830508474576, + "f1_score": 0.9874999999999999, + "meteor": 0.9677011105937782, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "The\tfollowing\tare\tthe\tprimary\tprocedures\twe\tperformed\tto\taddress\tthis\tcritical\taudit\tmatter.\tWe\tevaluated\tthe\tdesign\tand\ttested\tthe\toperating\teffectiveness\tover\tthe\tCompany's\tcontrol\tto\tidentify\tand\tselect\tpublicly\tavailable comparable\tland\tsales\twithin\tthe\tCompany's\tprocess\tto\testimate\tfair\tvalue\tof\tland\tin\tan\tasset\tacquisition.\tWe\tinvolved\tvaluation\tprofessionals\twith\tspecialized\tskills\tand\tknowledge\twho\tassisted\tin\tevaluating\tthe\tCompany's estimate\tof\tfair\tvalue\tof\tland\tby\tcomparing\tto\tour\tindependently\testablished\tranges\tof\tcomparable\tland\tsales\tdeveloped\tusing\tpublicly\tavailable\tmarket\tdata.\n\n/s/\tKPMG\tLLP\n\nWe\thave\tserved\tas\tthe\tCompany's\tauditor\tsince\t1970.\n\nJackson,\tMississippi\n\nFebruary\t17,\t2021\n\n46", + "recall": 0.9753086419753086, + "true_md": "The following are the primary procedures we performed to address this critical audit matter. We evaluated the design and tested the operating effectiveness over the Company's control to identify and select publicly available comparable land sales within the Company’s process to estimate fair value of land in an asset acquisition. We involved valuation professionals with specialized skills and knowledge who assisted in evaluating the Company’s estimate of fair value of land by comparing to our independently established ranges of comparable land sales developed using publicly available market data.\n\n/s/ KPMG LLP\n\nWe have served as the Company's auditor since 1970.\n\nJackson, Mississippi February 17, 2021\n\n46" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9585824530097475, + "doc_id": "5064ac26e92880718e7c4b7fcedbf173e44a8cd13e4484d57454eb53ac8d339e", + "edit_distance": 0.6851211072664359, + "f1_score": 0.9907407407407406, + "meteor": 0.8753684160444994, + "precision": 0.9953488372093023, + "pred_md": "Interventional segment revenues in 2019 also reflected growth in the Urology and Critical Care unit's sales of acute urology products and sales by the unit's home care and targeted temperature management businesses. Fiscal year 2019 revenues in the Surgery unit reflected growth in sales of the unit's biosurgery and infection prevention products. The Peripheral Intervention unit's 2019 revenues reflected growth in emerging market sales. This growth was partially offset by an unfavorable impact related to a letter issued in March 2019 by the FDA to healthcare professionals regarding the use of paclitaxel-coated devices in the treatment of peripheral artery disease, which impacted sales of our drug-coated balloon products. The extent and duration of the impact from the FDA letter on the Peripheral Intervention unit's future revenues is difficult to predict.\n\nInterventional segment operating income was as follows:\n\nTable of Contents\n\n(a) The\tamount\tpresented\tin\t2017\tis\tassociated\twith\tcertain\tproduct\tofferings\tthat\twere\tmoved\tfrom\tthe\tMedical\tsegment\tto\tthe\tInterventional segment\tin\torder\tto\talign\twith\tthe\treportable\tsegment\tstructure\tthat\tbecame\teffective\tbeginning\tin\tthe\tsecond\tquarter\tof\tfiscal\tyear\t2018.\n\nThe Interventional segment's operating income was driven by its performance with respect to gross profit margin and operating expenses in 2019 as discussed in greater detail below:\n\n- · Gross profit margin was higher in 2019 as compared with 2018 primarily due to the unfavorable prior-year impact of recognizing a fair value step-up adjustment relating to Bard's inventory on the acquisition date and lower manufacturing costs resulting from continuous improvement projects, which enhanced the efficiency of our operations, and synergy initiatives. These favorable impacts to the Interventional segment's gross margin were partially offset by unfavorable product mix and unfavorable foreign currency translation.\n- · Selling and administrative expense as a percentage of revenues in 2019 was relatively flat compared with 2018.\n- · Research and development expense as a percentage of revenues was higher in 2019 as compared with 2018 primarily due to the Surgery unit's recognition of a write-down in the current-year period, as further discussed below.\n\nThe Interventional segment's operating income in 2018 reflected expense related to the recognition of a fair value step-up adjustment relating to Bard's inventory on the acquisition date. The fair value adjustment was a required non-cash adjustment to the value of acquired inventory and was expensed over a four-month period, consistent with an estimate of the period of time to sell the acquired inventory.\n\n## Geographic Revenues\n\nBD's worldwide revenues by geography were as follows:\n\nU.S. revenues in 2019 reflected growth in all three segments. U.S. revenues in 2019 were favorably impacted by the inclusion of revenues associated with Bard's products in results for the first quarter of fiscal year 2019, as noted above. Revenue growth in 2019 was also attributable to sales in the Medical segment's Medication Management Solutions unit as well as to sales in the Interventional segment's Urology and Critical Care and Surgery units. U.S. revenue growth in 2019 was unfavorably impacted by results in the Medical segment's Diabetes Care unit, the Life Sciences segment's Diagnostic Systems unit and the Interventional segment's Peripheral Intervention unit, as previously noted in the discussions above.\n\n28", + "recall": 0.9861751152073732, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\nInterventional segment revenues in 2019 also reflected growth in the Urology and Critical Care unit's sales of acute urology products and sales by the unit's home care and targeted temperature management businesses. Fiscal year 2019 revenues in the Surgery unit reflected growth in sales of the unit's biosurgery and infection prevention products. The Peripheral Intervention unit's 2019 revenues reflected growth in emerging market sales. This growth was partially offset by an unfavorable impact related to a letter issued in March 2019 by the FDA to healthcare professionals regarding the use of paclitaxel-coated devices in the treatment of peripheral artery disease, which impacted sales of our drug-coated balloon products. The extent and duration of the impact from the FDA letter on the Peripheral Intervention unit’s future revenues is difficult to predict.\n\nInterventional segment operating income was as follows:\n\nThe Interventional segment's operating income was driven by its performance with respect to gross profit margin and operating expenses in 2019 as discussed in greater detail below:\n\nThe Interventional segment's operating income in 2018 reflected expense related to the recognition of a fair value step-up adjustment relating to Bard's inventory on the acquisition date. The fair value adjustment was a required non-cash adjustment to the value of acquired inventory and was expensed over a four-month period, consistent with an estimate of the period of time to sell the acquired inventory.\n\nBD’s worldwide revenues by geography were as follows:\n\n28\n\nU.S. revenues in 2019 reflected growth in all three segments. U.S. revenues in 2019 were favorably impacted by the inclusion of revenues associated with Bard's products in results for the first quarter of fiscal year 2019, as noted above. Revenue growth in 2019 was also attributable to sales in the Medical segment's Medication Management Solutions unit as well as to sales in the Interventional segment's Urology and Critical Care and Surgery units. U.S. revenue growth in 2019 was unfavorably impacted by results in the Medical segment's Diabetes Care unit, the Life Sciences segment's Diagnostic Systems unit and the Interventional segment's Peripheral Intervention unit, as previously noted in the discussions above.\n\n## Geographic Revenues\n\n- (a) The amount presented in 2017 is associated with certain product offerings that were moved from the Medical segment to the Interventional segment in order to align with the reportable segment structure that became effective beginning in the second quarter of fiscal year 2018.\n\n- • Gross profit margin was higher in 2019 as compared with 2018 primarily due to the unfavorable prior-year impact of recognizing a fair value step-up adjustment relating to Bard's inventory on the acquisition date and lower manufacturing costs resulting from continuous improvement projects, which enhanced the efficiency of our operations, and synergy initiatives. These favorable impacts to the Interventional segment's gross margin were partially offset by unfavorable product mix and unfavorable foreign currency translation.\n\n- • Selling and administrative expense as a percentage of revenues in 2019 was relatively flat compared with 2018.\n\n- • Research and development expense as a percentage of revenues was higher in 2019 as compared with 2018 primarily due to the Surgery unit's recognition of a write-down in the current-year period, as further discussed below." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9312324018624782, + "doc_id": "7341c82ff4b70e571b7e9e783d8ebf344f0a6ea117bd689b0a83574352a45e81", + "edit_distance": 0.12277580071174377, + "f1_score": 0.9869565217391305, + "meteor": 0.9509009038160396, + "precision": 0.9912663755458515, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS OF AMERICAN AIRLINES, INC.\n\nGiven the inherent uncertainty of the current operating environment due to the COVID-19 pandemic, American will continue to monitor redemption patterns and may adjust its estimates in the future.\n\n## Mileage credits sold to co-branded credit cards and other partners\n\nAmerican sells mileage credits to participating airline partners and non-airline business partners, including American's co-branded credit card partners, under contracts with terms extending generally for one to seven years. Consideration received from the sale of mileage credits is variable and payment terms typically are within 30 days subsequent to the month of mileage sale. Sales of mileage credits to non-airline business partners are comprised of two components, transportation and marketing. American allocates the consideration received from these sales of mileage credits based on the relative selling price of each product or service delivered.\n\nAmerican's most significant partner agreements are its co-branded credit card agreements with Citi and Barclaycard US. American identified the following revenue elements in these co-branded credit card agreements: the transportation component; and the use of intellectual property, including the American brand and access to loyalty program member lists, which is the predominant element in the agreements, as well as advertising (collectively, the marketing component). Accordingly, American recognizes the marketing component in other revenue in the period of the mileage sale following the sales-based royalty method.\n\nThe transportation component represents the estimated selling price of future travel awards and is determined using the same equivalent ticket value approach described above. The portion of each mileage credit sold attributable to transportation is initially deferred and then recognized in passenger revenue when mileage credits are redeemed and transportation is provided.\n\nFor the portion of American's outstanding mileage credits that it estimates will not be redeemed, American recognizes the associated value proportionally as the remaining mileage credits are redeemed. American's estimates use statistical models based on historical redemption patterns to develop an estimate of the likelihood of future redemption.\n\n## Cargo Revenue\n\nCargo revenue is recognized when American provides the transportation.\n\n## Other Revenue\n\nOther revenue includes revenue associated with American's loyalty program, which is comprised principally of the marketing component of mileage sales to co-branded credit card and other partners and other marketing related payments. Loyalty revenue included in other revenue was $1.8 billion for the year ended December 31, 2020 and $2.4 billion for both 2019 and 2018. The accounting and recognition for the loyalty program marketing services are discussed above in ' Loyalty Revenue .' The remaining amounts included within other revenue relate to airport clubs, advertising and vacation-related services.\n\n## Contract Balances\n\nAmerican's significant contract liabilities are comprised of (1) outstanding loyalty program mileage credits that may be redeemed for future travel and other non-air travel awards, reported as loyalty program liability on American's consolidated balance sheets and (2) ticket sales for transportation that has not yet been provided, reported as air traffic liability on American's consolidated balance sheets.\n\nTable of Contents\n\n163", + "recall": 0.9826839826839827, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS OF AMERICAN AIRLINES, INC.\n\nGiven the inherent uncertainty of the current operating environment due to the COVID-19 pandemic, American will continue to monitor redemption patterns and may adjust its estimates in the future.\n\nAmerican sells mileage credits to participating airline partners and non-airline business partners, including American’s co-branded credit card partners, under contracts with terms extending generally for one to seven years. Consideration received from the sale of mileage credits is variable and payment terms typically are within 30 days subsequent to the month of mileage sale. Sales of mileage credits to non-airline business partners are comprised of two components, transportation and marketing. American allocates the consideration received from these sales of mileage credits based on the relative selling price of each product or service delivered.\n\nAmerican’s most significant partner agreements are its co-branded credit card agreements with Citi and Barclaycard US. American identified the following revenue elements in these co-branded credit card agreements: the transportation component; and the use of intellectual property, including the American brand and access to loyalty program member lists, which is the predominant element in the agreements, as well as advertising (collectively, the marketing component). Accordingly, American recognizes the marketing component in other revenue in the period of the mileage sale following the sales-based royalty method.\n\nThe transportation component represents the estimated selling price of future travel awards and is determined using the same equivalent ticket value approach described above. The portion of each mileage credit sold attributable to transportation is initially deferred and then recognized in passenger revenue when mileage credits are redeemed and transportation is provided.\n\nFor the portion of American’s outstanding mileage credits that it estimates will not be redeemed, American recognizes the associated value proportionally as the remaining mileage credits are redeemed. American’s estimates use statistical models based on historical redemption patterns to develop an estimate of the likelihood of future redemption.\n\nCargo revenue is recognized when American provides the transportation.\n\nOther revenue includes revenue associated with American’s loyalty program, which is comprised principally of the marketing component of mileage sales to co-branded credit card and other partners and other marketing related payments. Loyalty revenue included in other revenue was $1.8 billion for the year ended December 31, 2020 and $2.4 billion for both 2019 and 2018. The accounting and recognition for the loyalty program marketing services are discussed above in “ Loyalty Revenue .” The remaining amounts included within other revenue relate to airport clubs, advertising and vacation-related services.\n\nAmerican’s significant contract liabilities are comprised of (1) outstanding loyalty program mileage credits that may be redeemed for future travel and other non-air travel awards, reported as loyalty program liability on American’s consolidated balance sheets and (2) ticket sales for transportation that has not yet been provided, reported as air traffic liability on American’s consolidated balance sheets.\n\n## Contract Balances\n\n## Other Revenue\n\n## Cargo Revenue\n\n## Mileage credits sold to co-branded credit cards and other partners\n\n163" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9189654628267653, + "doc_id": "a7c671cb50fe6dae860f2bafb4ab7db58717efa7c99c11091d2d8dc7148a2a5d", + "edit_distance": 0.7, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9661341811400832, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION AND SUBSIDIARY COMPANIES\n\n## VALUATION AND QUALIFYING ACCOUNTS AND RESERVES\n\nFor the Years Ended December 31:\n\n(Dollars in Millions)\n\n* Additions\tfor\tAllowance\tfor\tCredit\tLosses\tand\tAllowance\tfor\tInventory\tLosses\tare\tcharged\tto\texpense\tand\tcost\taccounts, respectively,\twhile\tRevenue\tBased\tProvisions\tare\tcharged\tto\trevenue\taccounts.\tDeductions\trepresent\tthe\treversal\tof\tsuch charges.\n\n** Primarily\tcomprises\tcurrency\ttranslation\tadjustments.\n\nS-1\n\nSCHEDULE\tII", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "SCHEDULE II\n\n* Additions for Allowance for Credit Losses and Allowance for Inventory Losses are charged to expense and cost accounts, respectively, while Revenue Based Provisions are charged to revenue accounts. Deductions represent the reversal of such charges. \n\n** Primarily comprises currency translation adjustments.\n\nS-1\n\n## INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION AND SUBSIDIARY COMPANIES VALUATION AND QUALIFYING ACCOUNTS AND RESERVES For the Years Ended December 31: (Dollars in Millions)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9722538710020819, + "doc_id": "db18a29d1b6e77561f08ba300953a7a05d9e58270e12e23bed857e106833f990", + "edit_distance": 0.040194884287454324, + "f1_score": 0.9833119383825416, + "meteor": 0.9891888246109298, + "precision": 0.9871134020618557, + "pred_md": "## Table of Contents\n\n## ITEM 7. MANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS\n\n## 2020 Financial Overview\n\n## Impact of Coronavirus (COVID-19)\n\nCOVID-19 has been declared a global health pandemic by the World Health Organization. COVID-19 has surfaced in nearly all regions of the world, which has driven the implementation of significant, government-imposed measures to prevent or reduce its spread, including travel restrictions, testing regimes, closing of borders, 'stay at home' orders and business closures. As a result, we have experienced an unprecedented decline in the demand for air travel, which has resulted in a material deterioration in our revenues. While our business performed largely as expected in January and February of 2020, a severe reduction in air travel starting in March 2020 resulted in our total operating revenues decreasing approximately 62% in 2020 as compared to 2019. While the length and severity of the reduction in demand due to the COVID-19 pandemic is uncertain, we expect our results of operations for 2021 to be severely impacted.\n\nWe have taken aggressive actions to mitigate the effects of the COVID-19 pandemic on our business including deep capacity reductions, structural changes to our fleet, cost reductions, and steps to preserve cash and improve our overall liquidity position. We remain extremely focused on taking all self-help measures available to manage our business during this unprecedented time, consistent with the terms of the financial assistance we have received from the U.S. Government under the Coronavirus Aid, Relief, and Economic Security Act (CARES Act) and Subtitle A of Title IV of Division N of the Consolidated Appropriations Act, 2021 (PSP Extension Law).\n\n## Capacity Reductions\n\nWe have significantly reduced our capacity (as measured by available seat miles), with 2020 flying decreasing by 50% year-over-year. Domestic capacity in 2020 was down 41% year-over-year while international capacity was down 68% year-over-year.\n\nWe also reset our international capacity and network for 2021 in response to the severe decline in demand. We have exited 19 international routes from six hubs. These changes will allow us to operate more efficiently when demand returns.\n\nWe currently expect our first quarter 2021 system capacity to decrease by 45% as compared to the first quarter of 2019. The demand environment continues to be uncertain as COVID-19 cases have continued to fluctuate in jurisdictions to which we fly and travel restrictions have generally remained in place. Due to this uncertainty, we will continue to adjust our future capacity to match observed booking trends for future travel and make further adjustments to our capacity as needed.\n\n## Fleet\n\nTo better align our network with lower passenger demand, we accelerated the retirement of Airbus A330-200, Boeing 757, Boeing 767, Airbus A330-300 and Embraer 190 fleets as well as certain regional aircraft, including certain Embraer 140 and Bombardier CRJ200 aircraft. These retirements remove complexity from our operation and bring forward cost savings and efficiencies associated with operating fewer aircraft types. See Note 1(g) to AAG's Consolidated Financial Statements in Part II, Item 8A for further information on the accounting for our fleet retirements. Due to the inherent uncertainties of the current operating environment, we will continue to evaluate our current fleet and may decide to permanently retire additional aircraft. In addition, we have placed a number of Boeing 737-800 and certain regional aircraft into temporary storage.\n\n## Cost Reductions\n\nWe moved quickly to better align our costs with our reduced schedule. In aggregate, we estimate that we reduced our 2020 operating and capital expenditures by more than $17 billion. These savings were achieved primarily through capacity reductions. In addition, we implemented a series of actions, including the accelerated fleet retirements discussed above as well as reductions in maintenance expense and $700 million in non-aircraft capital expenditures through less fleet modification work, the elimination of ground service equipment purchases and pausing non-critical facility investments and information technology projects. We also suspended all non-essential hiring, paused non-contractual pay rate increases, reduced executive and board of director compensation, implemented voluntary leave and early retirement programs and decreased our management and support staff team, including officers, by approximately 30%. In total, more than 20,000 team members have opted for an early retirement or longterm partially paid leave. Additionally, we have made reductions in marketing, contractor, event and training expenses as well as consolidated space at airport facilities.\n\n65", + "recall": 0.979539641943734, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## ITEM 7. MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS\n\n## 2020 Financial Overview\n\n## Impact of Coronavirus (COVID-19)\n\nCOVID-19 has been declared a global health pandemic by the World Health Organization. COVID-19 has surfaced in nearly all regions of the world, which has driven the implementation of significant, government-imposed measures to prevent or reduce its spread, including travel restrictions, testing regimes, closing of borders, “stay at home” orders and business closures. As a result, we have experienced an unprecedented decline in the demand for air travel, which has resulted in a material deterioration in our revenues. While our business performed largely as expected in January and February of 2020, a severe reduction in air travel starting in March 2020 resulted in our total operating revenues decreasing approximately 62% in 2020 as compared to 2019. While the length and severity of the reduction in demand due to the COVID-19 pandemic is uncertain, we expect our results of operations for 2021 to be severely impacted.\n\nWe have taken aggressive actions to mitigate the effects of the COVID-19 pandemic on our business including deep capacity reductions, structural changes to our fleet, cost reductions, and steps to preserve cash and improve our overall liquidity position. We remain extremely focused on taking all self-help measures available to manage our business during this unprecedented time, consistent with the terms of the financial assistance we have received from the U.S. Government under the Coronavirus Aid, Relief, and Economic Security Act (CARES Act) and Subtitle A of Title IV of Division N of the Consolidated Appropriations Act, 2021 (PSP Extension Law).\n\nWe have significantly reduced our capacity (as measured by available seat miles), with 2020 flying decreasing by 50% year-over-year. Domestic capacity in 2020 was down 41% year-over-year while international capacity was down 68% year-over-year.\n\nWe also reset our international capacity and network for 2021 in response to the severe decline in demand. We have exited 19 international routes from six hubs. These changes will allow us to operate more efficiently when demand returns.\n\nWe currently expect our first quarter 2021 system capacity to decrease by 45% as compared to the first quarter of 2019. The demand environment continues to be uncertain as COVID-19 cases have continued to fluctuate in jurisdictions to which we fly and travel restrictions have generally remained in place. Due to this uncertainty, we will continue to adjust our future capacity to match observed booking trends for future travel and make further adjustments to our capacity as needed.\n\nTo better align our network with lower passenger demand, we accelerated the retirement of Airbus A330-200, Boeing 757, Boeing 767, Airbus A330-300 and Embraer 190 fleets as well as certain regional aircraft, including certain Embraer 140 and Bombardier CRJ200 aircraft. These retirements remove complexity from our operation and bring forward cost savings and efficiencies associated with operating fewer aircraft types. See Note 1(g) to AAG’s Consolidated Financial Statements in Part II, Item 8A for further information on the accounting for our fleet retirements. Due to the inherent uncertainties of the current operating environment, we will continue to evaluate our current fleet and may decide to permanently retire additional aircraft. In addition, we have placed a number of Boeing 737-800 and certain regional aircraft into temporary storage.\n\nWe moved quickly to better align our costs with our reduced schedule. In aggregate, we estimate that we reduced our 2020 operating and capital expenditures by more than $17 billion. These savings were achieved primarily through capacity reductions. In addition, we implemented a series of actions, including the accelerated fleet retirements discussed above as well as reductions in maintenance expense and $700 million in non-aircraft capital expenditures through less fleet modification work, the elimination of ground service equipment purchases and pausing non-critical facility investments and information technology projects. We also suspended all non-essential hiring, paused non-contractual pay rate increases, reduced executive and board of director compensation, implemented voluntary leave and early retirement programs and decreased our management and support staff team, including officers, by approximately 30%. In total, more than 20,000 team members have opted for an early retirement or long- term partially paid leave. Additionally, we have made reductions in marketing, contractor, event and training expenses as well as consolidated space at airport facilities.\n\n65\n\n## Cost Reductions\n\n## Fleet\n\n## Capacity Reductions" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9504462798856682, + "doc_id": "f32a1ff1eb38aaa2bb0442e6ea9996fde8aca2c208754dd39264af2abfc22e59", + "edit_distance": 0.7950481430536451, + "f1_score": 0.9887640449438201, + "meteor": 0.7181336494812226, + "precision": 0.9887640449438202, + "pred_md": "## REPORT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM\n\n## TO THE STOCKHOLDERS AND BOARD OF DIRECTORS\n\nEASTGROUP PROPERTIES, INC.:\n\nOpinion on Internal Control Over Financial Reporting\n\nWe have audited EastGroup Properties, Inc. and subsidiaries' (the Company) internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2020, based on criteria established in Internal Control - Integrated Framework (2013) issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission. In our opinion, the Company maintained, in all material respects, effective internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2020, based on criteria established in Internal Control - Integrated Framework (2013) issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission.\n\nWe also have audited, in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States) (PCAOB), the consolidated balance sheets of the Company as of December 31, 2020 and 2019, the related consolidated statements of income and comprehensive income, changes in equity, and cash flows for each of the years in the three-year period ended December 31, 2020, and the related notes and financial statement schedule III (collectively, the consolidated financial statements), and our report dated February 17, 2021 expressed an unqualified opinion on those consolidated financial statements.\n\n## Basis for Opinion\n\nThe Company's management is responsible for maintaining effective internal control over financial reporting and for its assessment of the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting, included in the accompanying Management Report on Internal Control over Financial Reporting. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on the Company's internal control over financial reporting based on our audit. We are a public accounting firm registered with the PCAOB and are required to be independent with respect to the Company in accordance with the U.S. federal securities laws and the applicable rules and regulations of the Securities and Exchange Commission and the PCAOB.\n\nWe conducted our audit in accordance with the standards of the PCAOB. Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether effective internal control over financial reporting was maintained in all material respects. Our audit of internal control over financial reporting included obtaining an understanding of internal control over financial reporting, assessing the risk that a material weakness exists, and testing and evaluating the design and operating effectiveness of internal control based on the assessed risk. Our audit also included performing such other procedures as we considered necessary in the circumstances. We believe that our audit provides a reasonable basis for our opinion.\n\nDefinition and Limitations of Internal Control Over Financial Reporting\n\nA company's internal control over financial reporting is a process designed to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles. A company's internal control over financial reporting includes those policies and procedures that (1) pertain to the maintenance of records that, in reasonable detail, accurately and fairly reflect the transactions and dispositions of the assets of the company; (2) provide reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded as necessary to permit preparation of financial statements in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles, and that receipts and expenditures of the company are being made only in accordance with authorizations of management and directors of the company; and (3) provide reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of unauthorized acquisition, use, or disposition of the company's assets that could have a material effect on the financial statements.\n\nBecause of its inherent limitations, internal control over financial reporting may not prevent or detect misstatements. Also, projections of any evaluation of effectiveness to future periods are subject to the risk that controls may become inadequate because of changes in conditions, or that the degree of compliance with the policies or procedures may deteriorate.\n\n/s/ KPMG LLP\n\nJackson, Mississippi February 17, 2021\n\n48", + "recall": 0.9887640449438202, + "true_md": "## REPORT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM\n\n## TO THE STOCKHOLDERS AND BOARD OF DIRECTORS EASTGROUP PROPERTIES, INC.:\n\n## Opinion on Internal Control Over Financial Reporting\n\n## Basis for Opinion\n\n## Definition and Limitations of Internal Control Over Financial Reporting\n\n/s/ KPMG LLP\n\nJackson, Mississippi February 17, 2021\n\n48\n\nBecause of its inherent limitations, internal control over financial reporting may not prevent or detect misstatements. Also, projections of any evaluation of effectiveness to future periods are subject to the risk that controls may become inadequate because of changes in conditions, or that the degree of compliance with the policies or procedures may deteriorate.\n\nA company’s internal control over financial reporting is a process designed to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles. A company’s internal control over financial reporting includes those policies and procedures that (1) pertain to the maintenance of records that, in reasonable detail, accurately and fairly reflect the transactions and dispositions of the assets of the company; (2) provide reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded as necessary to permit preparation of financial statements in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles, and that receipts and expenditures of the company are being made only in accordance with authorizations of management and directors of the company; and (3) provide reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of unauthorized acquisition, use, or disposition of the company’s assets that could have a material effect on the financial statements.\n\nWe conducted our audit in accordance with the standards of the PCAOB. Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether effective internal control over financial reporting was maintained in all material respects. Our audit of internal control over financial reporting included obtaining an understanding of internal control over financial reporting, assessing the risk that a material weakness exists, and testing and evaluating the design and operating effectiveness of internal control based on the assessed risk. Our audit also included performing such other procedures as we considered necessary in the circumstances. We believe that our audit provides a reasonable basis for our opinion.\n\nThe Company’s management is responsible for maintaining effective internal control over financial reporting and for its assessment of the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting, included in the accompanying Management Report on Internal Control over Financial Reporting. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on the Company’s internal control over financial reporting based on our audit. We are a public accounting firm registered with the PCAOB and are required to be independent with respect to the Company in accordance with the U.S. federal securities laws and the applicable rules and regulations of the Securities and Exchange Commission and the PCAOB.\n\nWe also have audited, in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States) (PCAOB), the consolidated balance sheets of the Company as of December 31, 2020 and 2019, the related consolidated statements of income and comprehensive income, changes in equity, and cash flows for each of the years in the three-year period ended December 31, 2020, and the related notes and financial statement schedule III (collectively, the consolidated financial statements), and our report dated February 17, 2021 expressed an unqualified opinion on those consolidated financial statements.\n\nWe have audited EastGroup Properties, Inc. and subsidiaries’ (the Company) internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2020, based on criteria established in Internal Control – Integrated Framework (2013) issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission. In our opinion, the Company maintained, in all material respects, effective internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2020, based on criteria established in Internal Control – Integrated Framework (2013) issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7700551508172104, + "doc_id": "41261139eea34d4699612332ddc3262ec94ae6cb5623d53817ecc1bedff2f784", + "edit_distance": 0.7300796812749004, + "f1_score": 0.9960578186596583, + "meteor": 0.5824364447582209, + "precision": 0.9973684210526316, + "pred_md": "CP\t2020\tANNUAL\tREPORT\n\n18\n\nunder negotiation as of December 31, 2020. Agreements are in place with the other six bargaining units in Canada, two are effective until December 31, 2021, and four are effective until 2022.\n\n## U.S.\n\nIn the U.S., there are currently 28 active bargaining units on three subsidiary railroads representing nearly 1,900 unionized active employees. Nine agreements are open for amendment and are under negotiation at this time. 15 agreements will become amendable in 2021 and one in 2022. Negotiations have been concluded with respect to the remaining three agreements which will expire beyond 2022.\n\n## Health and Safety\n\nCP is an industry leader in rail safety and we are committed to protecting our employees, our communities, our environment, and our customers' goods. This is CP's 15 th consecutive year as industry leader in train accident statistics. Operate Safely is one of our five foundations of successful railroading and it starts with knowing and following the rules. Aside from running trains, many of our employees work in yards, terminals, and shops across our network with machinery and heavy equipment, or in extreme weather conditions. Their safety and security is of utmost importance to CP and is foundational to the way we view employee safety education and training. CP HomeSafe TM is an initiative designed to improve our safety culture by tapping into the human side of safety and promoting both safety engagement and feedback. HomeSafe TM puts everyone on the same level and empowers all employees to begin a safety conversation, no matter the rank or position. Safety performance is disclosed publicly on a quarterly basis using standardized metrics set out by the FRA. Additional information on FRA safety measures is included in Performance Indicators in Item 7. Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations.\n\n## Talent Management\n\nCP's approach for talent management begins with our Human Resources department, which oversees recruitment, hiring, development, engagement, and retention with the current and future workforce and leadership of CP.\n\nThe Management Resources and Compensation Committee of the Board of Directors reviews and informs CP's compensation plan and programming, and makes recommendations to the Board on succession planning for senior management and processes to identify, develop, and retain executive talent. Additionally, as part of CP's succession planning program, senior leaders are actively engaged in building the pool of future leaders, and present their development plans to the Board.\n\nCP maintains a number of internal policies related to recruitment, relocation, compensation, employment equity, and diversity and inclusion. The effective implementation of these policies alongside our ongoing workforce initiatives ensures CP's attraction and recruitment, employee development, succession, engagement, and diversity and inclusion practices are consistent and aligned with CP's commitments, foundations and values.\n\n## Attraction and Recruitment\n\nWith a rail network spanning Canada and the U.S., we employ a number of recruitment and retention tactics to attract the best and diverse talent across North America. CP offers many rewarding career opportunities in a variety of roles within the organization in both operating and support functions. We base our recruitment strategy on workforce planning needs, and our focus is on ensuring that we have a diverse candidate pool to fill our open positions.\n\nCP recognizes the valuable skills and experience that veterans have gained from serving their country. Our veteran program was recognized as part of Canada's Best Diversity Employers® of 2020 and we were named part of the top 10 Military Friendly® employers in the U.S. for 2021.\n\nCP tracks recruitment performance and success rates to better understand which tactics, benefits, and strategic partnerships are most successful in bringing in and retaining new talent.\n\n## Talent Development & Succession\n\nAs part of our core foundation and commitment to Develop People, we encourage all employees to take an active role in their career planning and development. We believe that investing in our employees leads to improved workplace morale and fosters a supportive working environment.\n\n## Training and Development\n\nCP offers a variety of training courses through our Learning Management System that provides online and technical training, including mandatory, role-specific and voluntary courses. This enables our employees to succeed in their current roles and prepares them for career advancement opportunities.\n\nNon-union employees also complete annual performance management and development action plans with their supervisors to set individual goals and track progress against Company expectations as well as long-term career goals.", + "recall": 0.994750656167979, + "true_md": "CP 2020 ANNUAL REPORT 18\n\nunder negotiation as of December 31, 2020. Agreements are in place with the other six bargaining units in Canada, two are effective until December 31, 2021, and four are effective until 2022.\n\nU.S. In the U.S., there are currently 28 active bargaining units on three subsidiary railroads representing nearly 1,900 unionized active employees. Nine agreements are open for amendment and are under negotiation at this time. 15 agreements will become amendable in 2021 and one in 2022. Negotiations have been concluded with respect to the remaining three agreements which will expire beyond 2022.\n\n## U.S. In the U.S., there are currently 28 active bargaining units on three subsidiary railroads representing nearly 1,900 unionized active employees. Nine agreements\n\n## Health and Safety CP is an industry leader in rail safety and we are committed to protecting our employees, our communities, our environment, and our customers’ goods. This is\n\n## Talent Management CP’s approach for talent management begins with our Human Resources department, which oversees recruitment, hiring, development, engagement, and\n\n## Attraction and Recruitment With a rail network spanning Canada and the U.S., we employ a number of recruitment and retention tactics to attract the best and diverse talent across North\n\n## Talent Development & Succession As part of our core foundation and commitment to Develop People, we encourage all employees to take an active role in their career planning and development.\n\n## Training and Development CP offers a variety of training courses through our Learning Management System that provides online and technical training, including mandatory, role-specific\n\nNon-union employees also complete annual performance management and development action plans with their supervisors to set individual goals and track progress against Company expectations as well as long-term career goals.\n\nTraining and Development CP offers a variety of training courses through our Learning Management System that provides online and technical training, including mandatory, role-specific and voluntary courses. This enables our employees to succeed in their current roles and prepares them for career advancement opportunities.\n\nTalent Development & Succession As part of our core foundation and commitment to Develop People, we encourage all employees to take an active role in their career planning and development. We believe that investing in our employees leads to improved workplace morale and fosters a supportive working environment.\n\nCP tracks recruitment performance and success rates to better understand which tactics, benefits, and strategic partnerships are most successful in bringing in and retaining new talent.\n\nCP recognizes the valuable skills and experience that veterans have gained from serving their country. Our veteran program was recognized as part of Canada's Best Diversity Employers® of 2020 and we were named part of the top 10 Military Friendly® employers in the U.S. for 2021.\n\nAttraction and Recruitment With a rail network spanning Canada and the U.S., we employ a number of recruitment and retention tactics to attract the best and diverse talent across North America. CP offers many rewarding career opportunities in a variety of roles within the organization in both operating and support functions. We base our recruitment strategy on workforce planning needs, and our focus is on ensuring that we have a diverse candidate pool to fill our open positions.\n\nCP maintains a number of internal policies related to recruitment, relocation, compensation, employment equity, and diversity and inclusion. The effective implementation of these policies alongside our ongoing workforce initiatives ensures CP’s attraction and recruitment, employee development, succession, engagement, and diversity and inclusion practices are consistent and aligned with CP’s commitments, foundations and values.\n\nThe Management Resources and Compensation Committee of the Board of Directors reviews and informs CP’s compensation plan and programming, and makes recommendations to the Board on succession planning for senior management and processes to identify, develop, and retain executive talent. Additionally, as part of CP’s succession planning program, senior leaders are actively engaged in building the pool of future leaders, and present their development plans to the Board.\n\nTalent Management CP’s approach for talent management begins with our Human Resources department, which oversees recruitment, hiring, development, engagement, and retention with the current and future workforce and leadership of CP.\n\nHealth and Safety CP is an industry leader in rail safety and we are committed to protecting our employees, our communities, our environment, and our customers’ goods. This is CP's 15 consecutive year as industry leader in train accident statistics. Operate Safely is one of our five foundations of successful railroading and it starts with knowing and following the rules. Aside from running trains, many of our employees work in yards, terminals, and shops across our network with machinery and heavy equipment, or in extreme weather conditions. Their safety and security is of utmost importance to CP and is foundational to the way we view employee safety education and training. CP HomeSafe is an initiative designed to improve our safety culture by tapping into the human side of safety and promoting both safety engagement and feedback. HomeSafe puts everyone on the same level and empowers all employees to begin a safety conversation, no matter the rank or position. Safety performance is disclosed publicly on a quarterly basis using standardized metrics set out by the FRA. Additional information on FRA safety measures is included in Performance Indicators in Item 7. Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations. th TM TM" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9612715644330541, + "doc_id": "edd61485fd5d352af5e5b303eac0efa0b107c23f74765937673ad777be5599a6", + "edit_distance": 0.04518950437317784, + "f1_score": 0.9917081260364842, + "meteor": 0.9842168416647965, + "precision": 0.9933554817275747, + "pred_md": "## Table of Contents\n\n## Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements - (Continued)\n\nBecton, Dickinson and Company\n\n## Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets\n\nThe Company's unamortized intangible assets include goodwill which arise from acquisitions. The Company currently reviews goodwill for impairment using quantitative models. Goodwill is reviewed at least annually for impairment at the reporting unit level, which is defined as an operating segment or one level below an operating segment, referred to as a component. The Company's reporting units generally represent one level below reporting segments. Potential impairment of goodwill is generally identified by comparing the fair value of a reporting unit, estimated using an income approach, with its carrying value. The annual impairment review performed on July 1, 2019 indicated that all identified reporting units' fair values exceeded their respective carrying values.\n\nAmortized intangible assets include developed technology assets which arise from acquisitions. These assets represent acquired intellectual property that is already technologically feasible upon the acquisition date or acquired in-process research and development assets that are completed subsequent to acquisition. Developed technology assets are generally amortized over periods ranging from 15 to 20 years, using the straight-line method. Customer relationship assets are generally amortized over periods ranging from 10 to 15 years, using the straight-line method. Other intangibles with finite useful lives, which include patents, are amortized over periods principally ranging from one to 40 years, using the straight-line method. Finite-lived intangible assets, including developed technology assets, are periodically reviewed when impairment indicators are present to assess recoverability from future operations using undiscounted cash flows. The carrying values of these finite-lived assets are compared to the undiscounted cash flows they are expected to generate and an impairment loss is recognized in operating results to the extent any finite-lived intangible asset's carrying value exceeds its calculated fair value.\n\n## Foreign Currency Translation\n\nGenerally, foreign subsidiaries' functional currency is the local currency of operations and the net assets of foreign operations are translated into U.S. dollars using current exchange rates. The U.S. dollar results that arise from such translation, as well as exchange gains and losses on intercompany balances of a long-term investment nature, are included in the foreign currency translation adjustments in Accumulated other comprehensive income (loss).\n\n## Revenue Recognition\n\nThe Company recognizes revenue from product sales when the customer obtains control of the product, which is generally upon shipment or delivery, depending on the delivery terms specified in the sales agreement. Revenues associated with certain instruments and equipment for which installation is complex, and therefore significantly affects the customer's ability to use and benefit from the product, are recognized upon customer acceptance of these installed products. Revenue for certain service arrangements, including extended warranty and software maintenance contracts, is recognized ratably over the contract term. When arrangements include multiple performance obligations, the total transaction price of the contract is allocated to each performance obligation based on the estimated relative standalone selling prices of the promised goods or services underlying each performance obligation. Variable consideration such as rebates, sales discounts and sales returns are estimated and treated as a reduction of revenue in the same period the related revenue is recognized. These estimates are based on contractual terms, historical practices, and current trends, and are adjusted as new information becomes available. Revenues exclude any taxes that the Company collects from customers and remits to tax authorities.\n\nEquipment lease transactions with customers are evaluated and classified as either operating or sales-type leases. Generally, these arrangements are accounted for as operating leases and therefore, revenue is recognized at the contracted rate over the rental period defined within the customer agreement.\n\nAdditional disclosures regarding the Company's accounting for revenue recognition are provided in Note 6.\n\n56", + "recall": 0.9900662251655629, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements — (Continued) Becton, Dickinson and Company\n\n## Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets\n\n## Foreign Currency Translation\n\nThe Company’s unamortized intangible assets include goodwill which arise from acquisitions. The Company currently reviews goodwill for impairment using quantitative models. Goodwill is reviewed at least annually for impairment at the reporting unit level, which is defined as an operating segment or one level below an operating segment, referred to as a component. The Company’s reporting units generally represent one level below reporting segments. Potential impairment of goodwill is generally identified by comparing the fair value of a reporting unit, estimated using an income approach, with its carrying value. The annual impairment review performed on July 1, 2019 indicated that all identified reporting units’ fair values exceeded their respective carrying values.\n\nAmortized intangible assets include developed technology assets which arise from acquisitions. These assets represent acquired intellectual property that is already technologically feasible upon the acquisition date or acquired in-process research and development assets that are completed subsequent to acquisition. Developed technology assets are generally amortized over periods ranging from 15 to 20 years, using the straight-line method. Customer relationship assets are generally amortized over periods ranging from 10 to 15 years, using the straight-line method. Other intangibles with finite useful lives, which include patents, are amortized over periods principally ranging from one to 40 years, using the straight-line method. Finite-lived intangible assets, including developed technology assets, are periodically reviewed when impairment indicators are present to assess recoverability from future operations using undiscounted cash flows. The carrying values of these finite-lived assets are compared to the undiscounted cash flows they are expected to generate and an impairment loss is recognized in operating results to the extent any finite-lived intangible asset’s carrying value exceeds its calculated fair value.\n\nGenerally, foreign subsidiaries’ functional currency is the local currency of operations and the net assets of foreign operations are translated into U.S. dollars using current exchange rates. The U.S. dollar results that arise from such translation, as well as exchange gains and losses on intercompany balances of a long-term investment nature, are included in the foreign currency translation adjustments in Accumulated other comprehensive income (loss).\n\nThe Company recognizes revenue from product sales when the customer obtains control of the product, which is generally upon shipment or delivery, depending on the delivery terms specified in the sales agreement. Revenues associated with certain instruments and equipment for which installation is complex, and therefore significantly affects the customer’s ability to use and benefit from the product, are recognized upon customer acceptance of these installed products. Revenue for certain service arrangements, including extended warranty and software maintenance contracts, is recognized ratably over the contract term. When arrangements include multiple performance obligations, the total transaction price of the contract is allocated to each performance obligation based on the estimated relative standalone selling prices of the promised goods or services underlying each performance obligation. Variable consideration such as rebates, sales discounts and sales returns are estimated and treated as a reduction of revenue in the same period the related revenue is recognized. These estimates are based on contractual terms, historical practices, and current trends, and are adjusted as new information becomes available. Revenues exclude any taxes that the Company collects from customers and remits to tax authorities.\n\nEquipment lease transactions with customers are evaluated and classified as either operating or sales-type leases. Generally, these arrangements are accounted for as operating leases and therefore, revenue is recognized at the contracted rate over the rental period defined within the customer agreement.\n\nAdditional disclosures regarding the Company's accounting for revenue recognition are provided in Note 6.\n\n## Revenue Recognition\n\n56" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9657209929290014, + "doc_id": "58fe716579c5360fc52e25d5e670979538b0748fd92f79f3075d97a2ae30c14d", + "edit_distance": 0.05080213903743316, + "f1_score": 0.9806094182825484, + "meteor": 0.9897300971093864, + "precision": 0.9888268156424581, + "pred_md": "references in this section are to all of our U.S. and non-U.S. plans. None of our common stock is directly held by these plans.\n\nOur U.S. defined benefit plan assets consist of a balanced portfolio of equity and fixed income securities. Our non-U.S. defined benefit plan assets include a significant concentration of United Kingdom (\"U.K.\") fixed income securities, as discussed in Note 14 to our consolidated financial statements included in Item 8 of this Annual Report. We monitor investment allocations and manage plan assets to maintain an acceptable level of risk. At December 31, 2020, the estimated fair market value of U.S. and non-U.S. plan assets for our defined benefit pension plans increased to $765.0 million from $745.1 million at December 31, 2019. Assets were allocated as follows:\n\nThe projected benefit obligation (\"Benefit Obligation\") for our defined benefit pension plans was $957.4 million and $897.1 million as of December 31, 2020 and 2019, respectively. Benefits under our defined benefit pension plans are based primarily on participants' compensation and years of credited service.\n\nWe sponsor defined benefit postretirement medical plans covering certain current retirees and a limited number of future retirees in the U.S. These plans provide for medical and dental benefits and are administered through insurance companies. We fund the plans as benefits are paid, such that the plans hold no assets in any period presented. Accordingly, we have no investment strategy or targeted allocations for plan assets. The benefits under the plans are not available to new employees or most existing employees.\n\nThe Benefit Obligation for our defined benefit postretirement medical plans was $18.6 million and $18.9 million as of December 31, 2020 and 2019, respectively.\n\n## Accrual Accounting and Significant Assumptions\n\nWe account for pension benefits using the accrual method, recognizing pension expense before the payment of benefits to retirees. The accrual method of accounting for pension benefits requires actuarial assumptions concerning future events that will determine the amount and timing of the benefit payments.\n\n48", + "recall": 0.9725274725274725, + "true_md": "references in this section are to all of our U.S. and non-U.S. plans. None of our common stock is directly held by these plans.\n\nOur U.S. defined benefit plan assets consist of a balanced portfolio of equity and fixed income securities. Our non-U.S. defined benefit plan assets include a significant concentration of United Kingdom (\"U.K.\") fixed income securities, as discussed in Note 14 to our consolidated financial statements included in Item 8 of this Annual Report. We monitor investment allocations and manage plan assets to maintain an acceptable level of risk. At December 31, 2020, the estimated fair market value of U.S. and non-U.S. plan assets for our defined benefit pension plans increased to $765.0 million from $745.1 million at December 31, 2019. Assets were allocated as follows:\n\nThe projected benefit obligation (\"Benefit Obligation\") for our defined benefit pension plans wa s $957.4 million and $897.1 million as of December 31, 2020 and 2019, respectively. Benefits under our defined benefit pension plans are based primarily on participants’ compensation and years of credited service.\n\nWe sponsor defined benefit postretirement medical plans covering certain current retirees and a limited number of future retirees in the U.S. These plans provide for medical and dental benefits and are administered through insurance companies. We fund the plans as benefits are paid, such that the plans hold no assets in any period presented. Accordingly, we have no investment strategy or targeted allocations for plan assets. The benefits under the plans are not available to new employees or most existing employees.\n\nThe Benefit Obligation for our defined benefit postretirement medical plans was $18 .6 million and $18.9 million as of December 31, 2020 and 2019, respectively.\n\nWe account for pension benefits using the accrual method, recognizing pension expense before the payment of benefits to retirees. The accrual method of accounting for pension benefits requires actuarial assumptions concerning future events that will determine the amount and timing of the benefit payments.\n\n## Accrual Accounting and Significant Assumptions\n\n48" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9801330642714515, + "doc_id": "bee7eec674edab2770ac88ed94ae2d3b55c1314b99897e8482ff159fe2431362", + "edit_distance": 0.028, + "f1_score": 0.9884169884169884, + "meteor": 0.9921738271271047, + "precision": 0.9922480620155039, + "pred_md": "KNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS, that each individual whose signature appears below constitutes and appoints W. Douglas Parker and Derek J. Kerr and each or any of them, his or her true and lawful attorneys and agents, with full power of substitution and resubstitution, for him or her and in his or her name, place and stead, in any and all capacities, to sign any and all amendments to the registrants' Annual Report on Form 10-K for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2020, and to file the same with all exhibits thereto, and all other documents in connection therewith, with the Securities and Exchange Commission, granting unto said attorneys and agents, and each or any of them, full power and authority to do and perform each and every act and thing requisite and necessary to be done, as fully to all intents and purposes as he or she might or could do in person, hereby ratifying and confirming all that said attorneys and agents, and each of them, or his substitute or substitutes, may lawfully do or cause to be done by virtue hereof.\n\nPursuant to the requirements of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, this report has been signed below by the following persons on behalf of American Airlines Group Inc. and in the capacities and on the dates noted:\n\nTable of Contents", + "recall": 0.9846153846153847, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\nKNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS, that each individual whose signature appears below constitutes and appoints W. Douglas Parker and Derek J. Kerr and each or any of them, his or her true and lawful attorneys and agents, with full power of substitution and resubstitution, for him or her and in his or her name, place and stead, in any and all capacities, to sign any and all amendments to the registrants’ Annual Report on Form 10-K for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2020, and to file the same with all exhibits thereto, and all other documents in connection therewith, with the Securities and Exchange Commission, granting unto said attorneys and agents, and each or any of them, full power and authority to do and perform each and every act and thing requisite and necessary to be done, as fully to all intents and purposes as he or she might or could do in person, hereby ratifying and confirming all that said attorneys and agents, and each of them, or his substitute or substitutes, may lawfully do or cause to be done by virtue hereof.\n\nPursuant to the requirements of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, this report has been signed below by the following persons on behalf of American Airlines Group Inc. and in the capacities and on the dates noted:\n\n229" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9889659208945334, + "doc_id": "5fc3aa116ec42977fc79e18bed9ce595fe92396d28662a6249187051e46dfc4c", + "edit_distance": 0.0062827225130890054, + "f1_score": 0.9869706840390878, + "meteor": 0.9940294124647321, + "precision": 0.9934426229508196, + "pred_md": "million. Cash flow used by working capital increased in 2019 due primarily to cash used by higher contract assets of $45.2 million, higher inventory of $31.1 million, lower accounts receivables of $2.9 million and lower accrued liabilities and income taxes payable of $12.4 million, partially offset by cash provided by higher contract liabilities of $19.7 million. During 2020, we contributed $15.9 million to our defined benefit pension plans as compared to $37.3 million in 2019.\n\nDecreases in accounts receivable provided $45.6 million and $2.9 million of cash flow in 2020 and 2019, respectively, as compared with cash flow used of $25.4 million in 2018. For the fourth quarter of 2020 our days' sales outstanding (\"DSO\") was 69 days as compared to 67 days for 2019 and 72 days for 2018. We have not experienced a significant increase in customer payment defaults in 2020.\n\nDecreases in inventory provided $15.3 million of cash flow in 2020, as compared with cash used of $31.1 million and $29.3 million in 2019 and 2018, respectively. The cash used from inventory in 2019 was due to an increase in raw materials and work in process. Inventory turns were 4.1 times at December 31, 2020, as compared with 4.3 times for 2019 and 4.2 times for 2018. Our calculation of inventory turns does not reflect the impact of advanced cash received from our customers.\n\nDecreases in contract assets provided $4.3 million of cash flow and decreases in contact liabilities used $34.1 million of cash flow in 2020. Increases in contract assets used $45.2 million of cash flow and increases in contact liabilities provided $19.7 million of cash flow in 2019.\n\nDecreases in accounts payable used $22.6 million of cash flow in 2020 compared with cash provided of $24.7 million and $7.6 million in 2019 and 2018, respectively. Increases in accrued liabilities and income taxes payable provided $50.2 million of cash flow in 2020 compared to $12.4 million 2019 and cash used of $15.2 million in 2018.\n\nCash used by investing activities were $41.7 million in 2020, as compared to $33.4 million and $81.5 million in 2019 and 2018, respectively. The increase of cash used in 2020 was primarily due to lower proceeds provided from the disposal of assets during the year of $13.8 million, compared to $42.3 million in 2019. Capital expenditures were $57.4 million, $75.7 million and $84.0 million in 2020, 2019 and 2018, respectively. In 2021, we currently estimate capital expenditures to be between $70 million and $80 million, before consideration of any acquisition activity.\n\nCash provided by financing activities were $147.6 million in 2020 compared to cash flow used of $231.5 million and $173.3 million in 2019 and 2018, respectively. Cash inflows during 2020 resulted primarily from the $498.3 million in net proceeds from the issuance of the senior notes due October 1, 2030 (\"2030 Senior Notes\"), partially offset by a $191.3 million in payments on long-term debt resulting from our partial tender offer of our 2022 Euro Senior Notes, $104.2 million of dividend payments and the repurchase of $15.0 million of our common stock. Cash outflows during 2019 resulted primarily from $105.0 million in payments on long-term debt and $99.6 million of dividend payments. Cash outflows during 2018 resulted primarily from $99.4 million of dividend payments and $60.0 million in payments on long-term debt. On February 17, 2021, we announced that we will redeem the outstanding balance of our 2022 Euro Senior Notes on March 19, 2021. We will use the remaining net proceeds from the public offering of the 2030 Senior Notes for the redemption.\n\nIn 2020 we repurchased 1,057,115 shares of our outstanding common stock for $32.1 million. As of December 31, 2020, we had $113.6 million of remaining capacity under our share repurchase plan previously approved by the Board of Directors.\n\nOur cash needs for the next 12 months, including for our estimated 2021 capital expenditures described above, are expected to be lower than those of 2020 due to anticipated benefits from working capital reductions and savings from 2020 Realignment Program, discussed in Note 22 to our consolidated financial statements included in Item 8 of this Annual Report. We believe cash flows from operating activities, combined with availability under our senior credit facility and our existing cash balances, will be sufficient to enable us to meet our cash flow needs for the next 12 months. However, cash flows from operations could be adversely affected by a continued decrease in the rate of general global economic growth and an extended decrease in capital spending of our customers, as well as economic, political and other risks associated with sales of our products, operational factors, competition, regulatory actions, fluctuations in foreign currency exchange rates and fluctuations in interest rates, among other factors. We believe that cash flows from operating activities and our expectation of continuing availability to draw upon our credit agreements are also sufficient to meet our cash flow needs for periods beyond the next 12 months.\n\n45", + "recall": 0.9805825242718447, + "true_md": "million. Cash flow used by working capital increased in 2019 due primarily to cash used by higher contract assets of $45.2 million, higher inventory of $31.1 million, lower accounts receivables of $2.9 million and lower accrued liabilities and income taxes payable of $12.4 million, partially offset by cash provided by higher contract liabilities of $19.7 million. During 2020, we contributed $15.9 million t o our defined benefit pension plans as compared to $37.3 million in 2019.\n\nDecreases in accounts receivable provided $45.6 million and $2.9 million of cash flow in 2020 and 2019, respectively, as compared with cash flow used of $25.4 million in 2018. F or the fourth quarter of 2020 our days' sales outstanding (\"DSO\") was 69 days as compared to 67 days for 2019 and 72 days for 2018. We have not experienced a significant increase in customer payment defaults in 2020.\n\nDecreases in inventory provided $15.3 million of cash flow in 2020, as compared with cash used of $31.1 million and $29.3 million in 2019 and 2018, respectively. The cash used from inventory in 2019 was due to an increase in raw materials and work in process. Inventory turns were 4.1 times at December 31, 2020, as compared with 4.3 times for 2019 and 4.2 times for 2018. Our calculation of inventory turns does not reflect the impact of advanced cash received from our customers.\n\nDecreases in contract assets provided $4.3 million of cash flow and decreases in contact liabilities used $34.1 million of cash flow in 2020. Increases in contract assets used $45.2 million of cash flow and increases in contact liabilities provided $19.7 million of cash flow in 2019.\n\nDecreases in accounts payable used $22.6 million of cash flow in 2020 compared with cash provided of $24.7 million and $7.6 million in 2019 and 2018, respectively. Increases in accrued liabilities and income taxes payable provided $50.2 million of cash flow in 2020 compared to $12.4 million 2019 and cash used of $15.2 million in 2018.\n\nCash used by investing activities were $41.7 million in 2020, as compared to $33.4 million and $81.5 million in 2019 and 2018, respectively. The increase of cash used in 2020 was primarily due to lower proceeds provided from the disposal of assets during the year of $13.8 million, compared to $42.3 million in 2019. Capital expenditures were $57.4 million, $75.7 million and $84.0 million in 2020, 2019 and 2018, respectively. In 2021, we currently estimate capital expenditures to be between $70 million and $80 million, before consideration of any acquisition activity.\n\nCash provided by financing activities were $147.6 million in 2020 compared to cash flow used of $231.5 million and $173.3 million in 2019 and 2018, respectively. Cash inflows during 2020 resulted primarily from the $498.3 million in net proceeds from the issuance of the senior notes due October 1, 2030 (\"2030 Senior Notes\"), partially offset by a $191.3 million in payments on long-term debt resulting from our partial tender offer of our 2022 Euro Senior Notes, $104.2 million of dividend payments and the repurchase of $15.0 million of our common stock. Cash outflows during 2019 resulted primarily from $105.0 million in payments on long-term debt and $99.6 million of dividend payments. Cash outflows during 2018 resulted primarily from $99.4 million of dividend payments and $60.0 million in payments on long-term debt. On Fe bruary 17, 2021, we announced that we will redeem the outstanding balance of our 2022 Euro Senior Notes on March 19, 2021. We will use the remaining net proceeds from the public offering of the 2030 Senior Notes for the redemption.\n\nIn 2020 we repurchased 1,057,115 shares of our outstanding common stock for $32.1 million. As of December 31, 2020, we had $113.6 million of remaining capacity under our share repurchase plan previously approved by the Board of Directors.\n\nOur cash needs for the next 12 months, including for our estimated 2021 capital expenditures described above, are expected to be lower than those of 2020 due to anticipated benefits from working capital reductions and savings from 2020 Realignment Program, discussed in Note 22 to our consolidated financial statements included in Item 8 of this Annual Report. We believe cash flows from operating activities, combined with availability under our senior credit facility and our existing cash balances, will be sufficient to enable us to meet our cash flow needs for the next 12 months. However, cash flows from operations could be adversely affected by a continued decrease in the rate of general global economic growth and an extended decrease in capital spending of our customers, as well as economic, political and other risks associated with sales of our products, operational factors, competition, regulatory actions, fluctuations in foreign currency exchange rates and fluctuations in interest rates, among other factors. We believe that cash flows from operating activities and our expectation of continuing availability to draw upon our credit agreements are also sufficient to meet our cash flow needs for periods beyond the next 12 months.\n\n45" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "6f9b7db69d21fd8acc1e708d48350dd0b7e214038a2e3b27e4f2dc7e0dda6f3d", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9921875, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Table of Contents\n\n217", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n217" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9289908276266844, + "doc_id": "ca59bf2c6d979fcd4708ae2adb0eec2093447b392eb99bbb9654c56b7760c167", + "edit_distance": 0.9540983606557377, + "f1_score": 0.9837133550488599, + "meteor": 0.7363698747175789, + "precision": 0.9869281045751634, + "pred_md": "## Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements - (Continued)\n\nBecton, Dickinson and Company\n\n## Note 9 - Benefit Plans\n\nThe Company has defined benefit pension plans covering certain employees in the United States and certain international locations. Postretirement healthcare and life insurance benefits provided to qualifying domestic retirees as well as other postretirement benefit plans in international countries are not material. The measurement date used for the Company's employee benefit plans is September 30.\n\nEffective January 1, 2018, the legacy U.S. pension plan was frozen to limit the participation of employees who are hired or re-hired by the Company, or who transfer employment to the Company, on or after January 1, 2018.\n\nNet pension cost for the years ended September 30 included the following components:\n\nTable of Contents\n\nThe amounts provided above for amortization of prior service credit and amortization of loss represent the reclassifications of prior service credits and net actuarial losses that were recognized in Accumulated other comprehensive income (loss) in prior periods. The settlement losses recorded in 2019 and 2018 primarily included lump sum benefit payments associated with the Company's U.S. supplemental pension plan. The Company recognizes pension settlements when payments from the supplemental plan exceed the sum of service and interest cost components of net periodic pension cost associated with this plan for the fiscal year.\n\nAs further discussed in Note 2, upon adopting an accounting standard update on October 1, 2018, all components of the Company's net periodic pension and postretirement benefit costs, aside from service cost, are recorded to Other income (expense), net on its consolidated statements of income, for all periods presented.\n\n77", + "recall": 0.9805194805194806, + "true_md": "77\n\nThe amounts provided above for amortization of prior service credit and amortization of loss represent the reclassifications of prior service credits and net actuarial losses that were recognized in Accumulated other comprehensive income (loss) in prior periods. The settlement losses recorded in 2019 and 2018 primarily included lump sum benefit payments associated with the Company’s U.S. supplemental pension plan. The Company recognizes pension settlements when payments from the supplemental plan exceed the sum of service and interest cost components of net periodic pension cost associated with this plan for the fiscal year.\n\nAs further discussed in Note 2, upon adopting an accounting standard update on October 1, 2018, all components of the Company’s net periodic pension and postretirement benefit costs, aside from service cost, are recorded to Other income (expense), net on its consolidated statements of income, for all periods presented.\n\nNet pension cost for the years ended September 30 included the following components:\n\nEffective January 1, 2018, the legacy U.S. pension plan was frozen to limit the participation of employees who are hired or re-hired by the Company, or who transfer employment to the Company, on or after January 1, 2018.\n\nThe Company has defined benefit pension plans covering certain employees in the United States and certain international locations. Postretirement healthcare and life insurance benefits provided to qualifying domestic retirees as well as other postretirement benefit plans in international countries are not material. The measurement date used for the Company’s employee benefit plans is September 30.\n\n## Note 9 — Benefit Plans\n\nTable of Contents\n\n## Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements — (Continued) Becton, Dickinson and Company" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9903797790216416, + "doc_id": "2d20186366cdc08281ce2373155be70061d58106fcc76e2cb6265ceb5959a50d", + "edit_distance": 0.008064516129032258, + "f1_score": 0.9934123847167325, + "meteor": 0.9940517077440161, + "precision": 0.9947229551451188, + "pred_md": "## Table of Contents\n\n## We rely heavily on technology and automated systems to operate our business, and any failure of these technologies or systems could harm our business, results of operations and financial condition.\n\nWe are highly dependent on existing and emerging technology and automated systems to operate our business. These technologies and systems include our computerized airline reservation system, flight operations systems, financial planning, management and accounting systems, telecommunications systems, website, maintenance systems and check-in kiosks. In order for our operations to work efficiently, our website and reservation system must be able to accommodate a high volume of traffic, maintain secure information and deliver flight information, as well as issue electronic tickets and process critical financial information in a timely manner. Substantially all of our tickets are issued to passengers as electronic tickets. We depend on our reservation system, which is hosted and maintained under a long-term contract by a third-party service provider, to be able to issue, track and accept these electronic tickets. If our technologies or automated systems are not functioning or if our third-party service providers were to fail to adequately provide technical support, system maintenance or timely software upgrades for any one of our key existing systems, we could experience service disruptions or delays, which could harm our business and result in the loss of important data, increase our expenses and decrease our revenues. In the event that one or more of our primary technology or systems vendors goes into bankruptcy, ceases operations or fails to perform as promised, replacement services may not be readily available on a timely basis, at competitive rates or at all, and any transition time to a new system may be significant.\n\nOur technologies and automated systems cannot be completely protected against events that are beyond our control, including natural disasters, power failures, terrorist attacks, cyber-attacks, data theft, equipment and software failures, computer viruses or telecommunications failures. Substantial or sustained system failures could cause service delays or failures and result in our customers purchasing tickets from other airlines. We cannot assure that our security measures, change control procedures or disaster recovery plans are adequate to prevent disruptions or delays. Disruption in or changes to these technologies or systems could result in a disruption to our business and the loss of important data. Any of the foregoing could result in a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations and financial condition.\n\n## Evolving data security and privacy requirements could increase our costs, and any significant data security incident could disrupt our operations, harm our reputation, expose us to legal risks and otherwise materially adversely affect our business, results of operations and financial condition.\n\nOur business requires the secure processing and storage of sensitive information relating to our customers, employees, business partners and others. However, like any global enterprise operating in today's digital business environment, we are subject to threats to the security of our networks and data, including threats potentially involving criminal hackers, hacktivists, state-sponsored actors, corporate espionage, employee malfeasance, and human or technological error. These threats continue to increase as the frequency, intensity and sophistication of attempted attacks and intrusions increase around the world. We have been the target of cybersecurity attacks in the past and expect that we will continue to be in the future.\n\nFurthermore, in response to these threats there has been heightened legislative and regulatory focus on data privacy and cybersecurity in the U.S., the EU and elsewhere, particularly with respect to critical infrastructure providers, including those in the transportation sector. As a result, we must comply with a proliferating and fast-evolving set of legal requirements in this area, including substantive cybersecurity standards as well as requirements for notifying regulators and affected individuals in the event of a data security incident. This regulatory environment is increasingly challenging and may present material obligations and risks to our business, including significantly expanded compliance burdens, costs and enforcement risks. For example, in May 2018, the EU's new General Data Protection Regulation, commonly referred to as GDPR, came into effect, which imposes a host of new data privacy and security requirements, imposing significant costs on us and carrying substantial penalties for noncompliance.\n\nIn addition, many of our commercial partners, including credit card companies, have imposed data security standards that we must meet. In particular, we are required by the Payment Card Industry Security Standards Council, founded by the credit card companies, to comply with their highest level of data security standards. While we continue our efforts to meet these standards, new and revised standards may be imposed that may be difficult for us to meet and could increase our costs.\n\nA significant cybersecurity incident could result in a range of potentially material negative consequences for us, including unauthorized access to, disclosure, modification, misuse, loss or destruction of company systems or data; theft of sensitive, regulated or confidential data, such as personal identifying information or our intellectual property; the loss of functionality of critical systems through ransomware, denial of service or other attacks; a deterioration in our relationships with business partners and other third parties; and business delays, service or system disruptions, damage to equipment and injury to persons or property. The methods used to obtain unauthorized access, disable or degrade service or\n\n47", + "recall": 0.9921052631578947, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## We rely heavily on technology and automated systems to operate our business, and any failure of these technologies or systems could harm our business, results of operations and financial condition.\n\nWe are highly dependent on existing and emerging technology and automated systems to operate our business. These technologies and systems include our computerized airline reservation system, flight operations systems, financial planning, management and accounting systems, telecommunications systems, website, maintenance systems and check-in kiosks. In order for our operations to work efficiently, our website and reservation system must be able to accommodate a high volume of traffic, maintain secure information and deliver flight information, as well as issue electronic tickets and process critical financial information in a timely manner. Substantially all of our tickets are issued to passengers as electronic tickets. We depend on our reservation system, which is hosted and maintained under a long-term contract by a third-party service provider, to be able to issue, track and accept these electronic tickets. If our technologies or automated systems are not functioning or if our third-party service providers were to fail to adequately provide technical support, system maintenance or timely software upgrades for any one of our key existing systems, we could experience service disruptions or delays, which could harm our business and result in the loss of important data, increase our expenses and decrease our revenues. In the event that one or more of our primary technology or systems vendors goes into bankruptcy, ceases operations or fails to perform as promised, replacement services may not be readily available on a timely basis, at competitive rates or at all, and any transition time to a new system may be significant.\n\nOur technologies and automated systems cannot be completely protected against events that are beyond our control, including natural disasters, power failures, terrorist attacks, cyber-attacks, data theft, equipment and software failures, computer viruses or telecommunications failures. Substantial or sustained system failures could cause service delays or failures and result in our customers purchasing tickets from other airlines. We cannot assure that our security measures, change control procedures or disaster recovery plans are adequate to prevent disruptions or delays. Disruption in or changes to these technologies or systems could result in a disruption to our business and the loss of important data. Any of the foregoing could result in a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations and financial condition.\n\n## Evolving data security and privacy requirements could increase our costs, and any significant data security incident could disrupt our operations, harm our reputation, expose us to legal risks and otherwise materially adversely affect our business, results of operations and financial condition.\n\nOur business requires the secure processing and storage of sensitive information relating to our customers, employees, business partners and others. However, like any global enterprise operating in today’s digital business environment, we are subject to threats to the security of our networks and data, including threats potentially involving criminal hackers, hacktivists, state-sponsored actors, corporate espionage, employee malfeasance, and human or technological error. These threats continue to increase as the frequency, intensity and sophistication of attempted attacks and intrusions increase around the world. We have been the target of cybersecurity attacks in the past and expect that we will continue to be in the future.\n\nFurthermore, in response to these threats there has been heightened legislative and regulatory focus on data privacy and cybersecurity in the U.S., the EU and elsewhere, particularly with respect to critical infrastructure providers, including those in the transportation sector. As a result, we must comply with a proliferating and fast-evolving set of legal requirements in this area, including substantive cybersecurity standards as well as requirements for notifying regulators and affected individuals in the event of a data security incident. This regulatory environment is increasingly challenging and may present material obligations and risks to our business, including significantly expanded compliance burdens, costs and enforcement risks. For example, in May 2018, the EU’s new General Data Protection Regulation, commonly referred to as GDPR, came into effect, which imposes a host of new data privacy and security requirements, imposing significant costs on us and carrying substantial penalties for non- compliance.\n\nIn addition, many of our commercial partners, including credit card companies, have imposed data security standards that we must meet. In particular, we are required by the Payment Card Industry Security Standards Council, founded by the credit card companies, to comply with their highest level of data security standards. While we continue our efforts to meet these standards, new and revised standards may be imposed that may be difficult for us to meet and could increase our costs.\n\nA significant cybersecurity incident could result in a range of potentially material negative consequences for us, including unauthorized access to, disclosure, modification, misuse, loss or destruction of company systems or data; theft of sensitive, regulated or confidential data, such as personal identifying information or our intellectual property; the loss of functionality of critical systems through ransomware, denial of service or other attacks; a deterioration in our relationships with business partners and other third parties; and business delays, service or system disruptions, damage to equipment and injury to persons or property. The methods used to obtain unauthorized access, disable or degrade service or\n\n47" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9665972065321458, + "doc_id": "edd3795e799eee82c952758685600fd315c01db35555d3ba8016f0485fd75468", + "edit_distance": 0.12238325281803543, + "f1_score": 0.9934354485776804, + "meteor": 0.9748219007347899, + "precision": 0.9956140350877193, + "pred_md": "## Table of Contents\n\n## Applied is exposed to various risks related to legal proceedings.\n\nApplied from time to time is, and in the future may be involved in legal proceedings or claims regarding patent infringement, intellectual property rights, antitrust, environmental regulations, securities, contracts, product performance, product liability, unfair competition, misappropriation of trade secrets, employment, workplace safety, and other matters. Applied also on occasion receives notification from customers who believe that Applied owes them indemnification, product warranty or has other obligations related to claims made against such customers by third parties.\n\nLegal proceedings and claims, whether with or without merit, and associated internal investigations, may be time-consuming and expensive to prosecute, defend or conduct; divert management's attention and other Applied resources; inhibit Applied's ability to sell its products; result in adverse judgments for damages, injunctive relief, penalties and fines; and negatively affect Applied's business. There can be no assurance regarding the outcome of current or future legal proceedings, claims or investigations.\n\n## Applied is subject to risks associated with environmental, health and safety regulations.\n\nApplied is subject to environmental, health and safety regulations in connection with its global business operations, including but not limited to: regulations related to the development, manufacture, shipping and use of its products; handling, discharge, recycling and disposal of hazardous materials used in its products or in producing its products; the operation of its facilities; and the use of its real property. The failure or inability to comply with existing or future environmental and safety regulations could result in: significant remediation or other legal liabilities; the imposition of penalties and fines; restrictions on the development, manufacture, sale, shipping or use of certain of its products; limitations on the operation of its facilities or ability to use its real property; and a decrease in the value of its real property. Applied could be required to alter its manufacturing and operations and incur substantial expense in order to comply with environmental, health and safety regulations. Any failure to comply with these regulations could subject Applied to significant costs and liabilities that could adversely affect Applied's business, financial condition and results of operations.\n\n## Applied is exposed to various risks related to the global regulatory environment.\n\nAs a public company with global operations, Applied is subject to the laws of the United States and multiple foreign jurisdictions and the rules and regulations of various governing bodies, which may differ among jurisdictions, including those related to financial and other disclosures, accounting standards, corporate governance, intellectual property, tax, trade, antitrust, employment, immigration and travel regulations, privacy, and anti-corruption. Changing, inconsistent or conflicting laws, rules and regulations, and ambiguities in their interpretation and application create uncertainty and challenges, and compliance with laws, rules and regulations may be onerous and expensive, divert management time and attention from revenue-generating activities, and otherwise adversely impact Applied's business operations. Violations of law, rules and regulations could result in fines, criminal sanctions, restrictions on Applied's business, and damage to its reputation, and could have an adverse impact on its business operations, financial condition and results of operations.\n\n## Item 1B: Unresolved Staff Comments\n\nNone.\n\n28", + "recall": 0.9912663755458515, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## Applied is exposed to various risks related to legal proceedings.\n\n## Applied is subject to risks associated with environmental, health and safety regulations.\n\nApplied from time to time is, and in the future may be involved in legal proceedings or claims regarding patent infringement, intellectual property rights, antitrust, environmental regulations, securities, contracts, product performance, product liability, unfair competition, misappropriation of trade secrets, employment, workplace safety, and other matters. Applied also on occasion receives notification from customers who believe that Applied owes them indemnification, product warranty or has other obligations related to claims made against such customers by third parties.\n\nLegal proceedings and claims, whether with or without merit, and associated internal investigations, may be time-consuming and expensive to prosecute, defend or conduct; divert management’s attention and other Applied resources; inhibit Applied’s ability to sell its products; result in adverse judgments for damages, injunctive relief, penalties and fines; and negatively affect Applied’s business. There can be no assurance regarding the outcome of current or future legal proceedings, claims or investigations.\n\nApplied is subject to environmental, health and safety regulations in connection with its global business operations, including but not limited to: regulations related to the development, manufacture, shipping and use of its products; handling, discharge, recycling and disposal of hazardous materials used in its products or in producing its products; the operation of its facilities; and the use of its real property. The failure or inability to comply with existing or future environmental and safety regulations could result in: significant remediation or other legal liabilities; the imposition of penalties and fines; restrictions on the development, manufacture, sale, shipping or use of certain of its products; limitations on the operation of its facilities or ability to use its real property; and a decrease in the value of its real property. Applied could be required to alter its manufacturing and operations and incur substantial expense in order to comply with environmental, health and safety regulations. Any failure to comply with these regulations could subject Applied to significant costs and liabilities that could adversely affect Applied’s business, financial condition and results of operations.\n\nAs a public company with global operations, Applied is subject to the laws of the United States and multiple foreign jurisdictions and the rules and regulations of various governing bodies, which may differ among jurisdictions, including those related to financial and other disclosures, accounting standards, corporate governance, intellectual property, tax, trade, antitrust, employment, immigration and travel regulations, privacy, and anti-corruption. Changing, inconsistent or conflicting laws, rules and regulations, and ambiguities in their interpretation and application create uncertainty and challenges, and compliance with laws, rules and regulations may be onerous and expensive, divert management time and attention from revenue-generating activities, and otherwise adversely impact Applied’s business operations. Violations of law, rules and regulations could result in fines, criminal sanctions, restrictions on Applied’s business, and damage to its reputation, and could have an adverse impact on its business operations, financial condition and results of operations. \n\n## Applied is exposed to various risks related to the global regulatory environment.\n\n## Item 1B: Unresolved Staff Comments\n\nNone.\n\n28" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9290902614160945, + "doc_id": "63dfcf0f88aace227586630ac4e5ea4b45f2ff1ad986a8bff67cf1691fcae282", + "edit_distance": 0.14004914004914004, + "f1_score": 0.994186046511628, + "meteor": 0.9590988901565244, + "precision": 0.9941860465116279, + "pred_md": "## Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements - (Continued)\n\nBecton, Dickinson and Company\n\nDuring the third quarter of fiscal year 2018, the Company issued Euro-denominated debt consisting of 300 million Euros ($354 million) of 1.401% notes due May 24, 2023. Also in the third quarter of fiscal year 2018, the Company issued British Pound-denominated debt of 250 million British Pounds ($337.5 million) of 3.02% notes due May 24, 2025. The Company used the net proceeds from these long-term debt offerings to redeem certain notes in the third quarter and to repay a portion of the balance outstanding on its term loan, as well as accrued interest, related premiums, fees and expenses related to this repaid amount.\n\n## Capitalized interest\n\nThe Company capitalizes interest costs as a component of the cost of construction in progress. A summary of interest costs and payments for the years ended September 30 is as follows:\n\nTable of Contents\n\n## Note 17 - Income Taxes\n\n## Provision for Income Taxes\n\nThe provision for income taxes the years ended September 30 consisted of:\n\nThe components of Income Before Income Taxes for the years ended September 30 consisted of:\n\nU.S. tax legislation, commonly referred to as the Tax Cuts and Jobs Act (the \"Act\"), was enacted on December 22, 2017. The Act reduced the U.S. federal corporate tax rate from 35% to 21%, required companies to pay a one-time transition tax on earnings of certain foreign subsidiaries that were previously tax deferred, and created new taxes on certain foreign-sourced earnings.\n\nDuring fiscal year 2019, the Company finalized its accounting for the income tax effects of the Act, and all adjustments related to finalization of its calculations were included as a component of Income tax (benefit) provision in fiscal year 2019. The Company recognized additional tax benefit of $50 million and additional tax cost of $640 million in 2019 and 2018, respectively, as a result of this legislation. These amounts are reflected in the Company's consolidated statements of income within Income tax (benefit) provision .\n\n97", + "recall": 0.9941860465116279, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements — (Continued) Becton, Dickinson and Company\n\n## Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements — (Continued) Becton, Dickinson and Company\n\n## Capitalized interest\n\n## Note 17 — Income Taxes\n\n## Provision for Income Taxes\n\nDuring the third quarter of fiscal year 2018, the Company issued Euro-denominated debt consisting of 300 million Euros ($354 million) of 1.401% notes due May 24, 2023. Also in the third quarter of fiscal year 2018, the Company issued British Pound-denominated debt of 250 million British Pounds ($337.5 million) of 3.02% notes due May 24, 2025. The Company used the net proceeds from these long-term debt offerings to redeem certain notes in the third quarter and to repay a portion of the balance outstanding on its term loan, as well as accrued interest, related premiums, fees and expenses related to this repaid amount.\n\nThe Company capitalizes interest costs as a component of the cost of construction in progress. A summary of interest costs and payments for the years ended September 30 is as follows:\n\nThe provision for income taxes the years ended September 30 consisted of:\n\nThe components of Income Before Income Taxes for the years ended September 30 consisted of:\n\nU.S. tax legislation, commonly referred to as the Tax Cuts and Jobs Act (the \"Act\"), was enacted on December 22, 2017. The Act reduced the U.S. federal corporate tax rate from 35% to 21%, required companies to pay a one-time transition tax on earnings of certain foreign subsidiaries that were previously tax deferred, and created new taxes on certain foreign-sourced earnings.\n\nDuring fiscal year 2019, the Company finalized its accounting for the income tax effects of the Act, and all adjustments related to finalization of its calculations were included as a component of Income tax (benefit) provision in fiscal year 2019. The Company recognized additional tax benefit of $50 million and additional tax cost of $640 million in 2019 and 2018, respectively, as a result of this legislation. These amounts are reflected in the Company's consolidated statements of income within Income tax (benefit) provision .\n\n97" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9384161491284805, + "doc_id": "7edeba7daad049d6c357794503dd21e9b63cdf1197a496a3b1c9f0b399fbc706", + "edit_distance": 0.08278457196613359, + "f1_score": 0.9864864864864864, + "meteor": 0.8284562693141819, + "precision": 0.9909502262443439, + "pred_md": "EASTGROUP PROPERTIES, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES\n\nNOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\nStock-based compensation cost for employees was $7,605,000, $8,647,000 and $5,322,000 for 2020, 2019 and 2018, respectively, of which $1,923,000, $2,536,000 and $1,173,000 were capitalized as part of the Company's development costs for the respective years.\n\n## Employee Equity Awards\n\nThe Company's restricted stock program is designed to provide incentives for management to achieve goals established by the Compensation Committee of the Company's Board of Directors (the 'Committee'). The awards act as a retention device, as they vest over time, allowing participants to benefit from dividends on shares as well as potential stock appreciation. Equity awards align management's interests with the long-term interests of shareholders. The vesting periods of the Company's restricted stock plans vary, as determined by the Committee. Restricted stock is granted to executive officers subject to both continued service and the satisfaction of certain annual performance goals and multi-year market conditions as determined by the Committee. Restricted stock is granted to non-executive officers subject only to continued service. The cost for market-based awards and awards that only require service is amortized on a straight-line basis over the requisite service periods. The total compensation expense for service and performance based awards is based upon the fair market value of the shares on the grant date.\n\nIn the second quarter of 2017, the Committee approved a long-term equity compensation plan for certain of the Company's executive officers that includes three components based on total shareholder return and one component based only on continued service as of the vesting dates.\n\nThe three long-term equity compensation plan components based on total shareholder return are subject to bright-line tests that compare the Company's total shareholder return to the Nareit Equity Index and to the member companies of the Nareit industrial index. The first plan measured the bright-line tests over the one-year period ended December 31, 2017. During the first quarter of 2018, the Committee measured the Company's performance for the one-year period against bright-line tests established by the Committee on the grant date of May 10, 2017. The number of shares determined on the measurement date was 4,257. These shares vested 100% on March 1, 2018, the date the earned shares were determined. On the grant date of May 10, 2017, the Company began recognizing expense for this plan based on the grant date fair value of the awards which was determined using a simulation pricing model developed to specifically accommodate the unique features of the award.\n\nThe second plan measured the bright-line tests over the two-year period ended December 31, 2018. During the first quarter of 2019, the Committee measured the Company's performance for the two-year period against bright-line tests established by the Committee on the grant date of May 10, 2017. The number of shares determined on the measurement date was 9,460. These shares vested 100% on February 14, 2019, the date the earned shares were determined. On the grant date of May 10, 2017, the Company began recognizing expense for this plan based on the grant date fair value of the awards which was determined using a simulation pricing model developed to specifically accommodate the unique features of the award.\n\nThe third plan measured the bright-line tests over the three-year period ended December 31, 2019. During the first quarter of 2020, the Committee measured the Company's performance for the three-year period against bright-line tests established by the Committee on the grant date of May 10, 2017. The number of shares determined on the measurement date was 18,917. These shares vested 75% on February 13, 2020, the date the earned shares were determined, and 25% on January 1, 2021. On the grant date of May 10, 2017, the Company began recognizing expense for this plan based on the grant date fair value of the awards which was determined using a simulation pricing model developed to specifically accommodate the unique features of the award.\n\nThe component of the long-term equity compensation plan based only on continued service as of the vesting dates was awarded on May 10, 2017. On that date, 5,406 shares were granted to certain executive officers subject only to continued service as of the vesting dates. These shares, which have a grant date fair value of $78.18 per share, vested 25% in the first quarter of 2018 and on each January 1 of 2019, 2020 and 2021. The shares were expensed on a straight-line basis over the service period.\n\nIn the second quarter of 2018, the Committee approved a long-term equity compensation plan for the Company's executive officers that includes one component based on total shareholder return and one component based only on continued service as of the vesting dates.\n\nThe component of the long-term equity compensation plan based on total shareholder return is subject to bright-line tests that will compare the Company's total shareholder return to the Nareit Equity Index and to the member companies of the Nareit industrial index. The plan will measure the bright-line tests over the three-year period ended December 31, 2020. During the first quarter of 2021, the Committee will measure the Company's performance for the three-year period against bright-line tests established by the Committee on the grant date of June 1, 2018. The number of shares to be earned on the measurement date could range from zero to 27,087. These shares would vest 75% on the date the earned shares are determined in the first quarter\n\n72", + "recall": 0.9820627802690582, + "true_md": "Stock-based compensation cost for employees was $7,605,000, $8,647,000 and $5,322,000 for 2020, 2019 and 2018, respectively, of which $1,923,000, $2,536,000 and $1,173,000 were capitalized as part of the Company’s development costs for the respective years.\n\nEmployee Equity Awards The Company's restricted stock program is designed to provide incentives for management to achieve goals established by the Compensation Committee of the Company's Board of Directors (the “Committee”). The awards act as a retention device, as they vest over time, allowing participants to benefit from dividends on shares as well as potential stock appreciation. Equity awards align management's interests with the long-term interests of shareholders. The vesting periods of the Company’s restricted stock plans vary, as determined by the Committee. Restricted stock is granted to executive officers subject to both continued service and the satisfaction of certain annual performance goals and multi-year market conditions as determined by the Committee. Restricted stock is granted to non-executive officers subject only to continued service. The cost for market-based awards and awards that only require service is amortized on a straight-line basis over the requisite service periods. The total compensation expense for service and performance based awards is based upon the fair market value of the shares on the grant date.\n\nIn the second quarter of 2017, the Committee approved a long-term equity compensation plan for certain of the Company’s executive officers that includes three components based on total shareholder return and one component based only on continued service as of the vesting dates.\n\nThe three long-term equity compensation plan components based on total shareholder return are subject to bright-line tests that compare the Company's total shareholder return to the Nareit Equity Index and to the member companies of the Nareit industrial index. The first plan measured the bright-line tests over the one-year period ended December 31, 2017. During the first quarter of 2018, the Committee measured the Company's performance for the one-year period against bright-line tests established by the Committee on the grant date of May 10, 2017. The number of shares determined on the measurement date was 4,257. These shares vested 100% on March 1, 2018, the date the earned shares were determined. On the grant date of May 10, 2017, the Company began recognizing expense for this plan based on the grant date fair value of the awards which was determined using a simulation pricing model developed to specifically accommodate the unique features of the award.\n\nThe second plan measured the bright-line tests over the two-year period ended December 31, 2018. During the first quarter of 2019, the Committee measured the Company’s performance for the two-year period against bright-line tests established by the Committee on the grant date of May 10, 2017. The number of shares determined on the measurement date was 9,460. These shares vested 100% on February 14, 2019, the date the earned shares were determined. On the grant date of May 10, 2017, the Company began recognizing expense for this plan based on the grant date fair value of the awards which was determined using a simulation pricing model developed to specifically accommodate the unique features of the award.\n\nThe third plan measured the bright-line tests over the three-year period ended December 31, 2019. During the first quarter of 2020, the Committee measured the Company’s performance for the three-year period against bright-line tests established by the Committee on the grant date of May 10, 2017. The number of shares determined on the measurement date was 18,917. These shares vested 75% on February 13, 2020, the date the earned shares were determined, and 25% on January 1, 2021. On the grant date of May 10, 2017, the Company began recognizing expense for this plan based on the grant date fair value of the awards which was determined using a simulation pricing model developed to specifically accommodate the unique features of the award.\n\nThe component of the long-term equity compensation plan based only on continued service as of the vesting dates was awarded on May 10, 2017. On that date, 5,406 shares were granted to certain executive officers subject only to continued service as of the vesting dates. These shares, which have a grant date fair value of $78.18 per share, vested 25% in the first quarter of 2018 and on each January 1 of 2019, 2020 and 2021. The shares were expensed on a straight-line basis over the service period.\n\nIn the second quarter of 2018, the Committee approved a long-term equity compensation plan for the Company’s executive officers that includes one component based on total shareholder return and one component based only on continued service as of the vesting dates.\n\nThe component of the long-term equity compensation plan based on total shareholder return is subject to bright-line tests that will compare the Company’s total shareholder return to the Nareit Equity Index and to the member companies of the Nareit industrial index. The plan will measure the bright-line tests over the three-year period ended December 31, 2020. During the first quarter of 2021, the Committee will measure the Company’s performance for the three-year period against bright-line tests established by the Committee on the grant date of June 1, 2018. The number of shares to be earned on the measurement date could range from zero to 27,087. These shares would vest 75% on the date the earned shares are determined in the first quarter\n\n72\n\n## Employee Equity Awards The Company's restricted stock program is designed to provide incentives for management to achieve goals established by the Compensation Committee of the Company's Board of Directors (the “Committee”). The awards act as a\n\nEASTGROUP PROPERTIES, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5988032815680335, + "doc_id": "964debada38d81a383ab4e04e454cadc6bbb6999f9acc2bbaba8878731daabf0", + "edit_distance": 0.3888888888888889, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.7507082152974505, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## APPLIED MATERIALS, INC.\n\n## CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF COMPREHENSIVE INCOME\n\n(In millions)\n\nTable of Contents\n\nSee accompanying Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.\n\n65", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## APPLIED MATERIALS, INC. CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF COMPREHENSIVE INCOME (In millions)\n\nCONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF COMPREHENSIVE INCOME (In millions)\n\nSee accompanying Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.\n\n65" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9366489168325773, + "doc_id": "4f1b4aa0750d7b550c921f65bcd7e848d3901e24e2697b100ba0117df34bdf66", + "edit_distance": 0.09141583054626533, + "f1_score": 0.9883381924198249, + "meteor": 0.8529188086857078, + "precision": 0.9941348973607038, + "pred_md": "## Goodwill impairment could negatively impact our net income and shareholders' equity.\n\nGoodwill is not amortized, but is tested for impairment at the reporting unit level, which is an operating segment or one level below an operating segment. Goodwill is required to be tested for impairment annually and between annual tests if events or circumstances indicate that it is more likely than not that the fair value of a reporting unit is less than its carrying value. Reductions in or impairment of the value of our goodwill or other intangible assets will result in charges against our earnings, which could have a material adverse effect on our reported results of operations and financial position in future periods.\n\nThere are numerous risks that may cause the fair value of a reporting unit to fall below its carrying amount, which could lead to the measurement and recognition of goodwill impairment. These risks include, but are not limited to, lowered expectations of future financial results, adverse changes in the business climate, increase in the discount rate, an adverse action or assessment by a regulator, the loss of key personnel, a more-likely-than-not expectation that all or a significant portion of a reporting unit may be disposed of, failure to realize anticipated synergies from acquisitions, a sustained decline in the Company's market capitalization, and significant, prolonged negative variances between actual and expected financial results. In recent years, the estimated fair value of our Pump reporting unit has fluctuated, partially due to broad-based capital spending declines and heightened pricing pressures experienced in the oil and gas markets. Although we have concluded that there is no impairment on the goodwill associated with our Pump reporting unit as of December 31, 2020, we will continue to monitor their performance and related market conditions for future indicators of potential impairment. For additional information, see the discussion in Item 7 of this Annual Report and under Note 1 to our consolidated financial statements included in Item 8 of this Annual Report.\n\n## Ineffective internal controls could impact the accuracy and timely reporting of our business and financial results.\n\nOur internal control over financial reporting has not always prevented or detected misstatements because of its inherent limitations, including the possibility of human error, the circumvention or overriding of controls or fraud. We have in the past discovered, and may in the future discover, areas of our internal controls that need improvement, including material weaknesses in internal controls. We have devoted significant resources to remediate and improve our internal controls and to monitor the effectiveness of these remediated measures. There can be no assurance that these measures will ensure that we maintain at all times effective internal controls over our financial processes and reporting in the future. Even effective internal controls can provide only reasonable assurance with respect to the preparation and fair presentation of financial statements. Failure to maintain the adequacy of our internal controls, including any failure to implement required new or improved controls, or difficulties in their implementation, could harm our business and financial results and we could fail to meet our financial reporting obligations.\n\n## General Risks\n\n## We depend on key personnel, the loss of whom would harm our business.\n\nOur future success will depend in part on the continued service of key executive officers and personnel. The loss of the services of any key individual could harm our business. Our future success also depends on our ability to recruit, retain and engage our personnel sufficiently, both to maintain our current business and to execute our strategic initiatives. Competition for officers and employees in our industry is intense and we may not be successful in attracting and retaining such personnel.\n\n## Changes in accounting principles and guidance could result in unfavorable accounting charges or effects.\n\nWe prepare our consolidated financial statements in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the U.S. A change in these principles can have a significant effect on our reported financial position and financial results. The adoption of new or revised accounting principles may require us to make changes to our systems, processes and internal controls, which could have a significant effect on our reported financial results and internal controls, cause unexpected financial reporting fluctuations, retroactively affect previously reported results or require us to make costly changes to our operational processes and accounting systems upon our following the adoption of these standards.\n\n## Forward-Looking Information is Subject to Risk and Uncertainty\n\nThis Annual Report and other written reports and oral statements we make from time-to-time include 'forward-looking statements' within the meaning of Section 27A of the Securities Act of 1933, Section 21E of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 and the Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995. All statements other than statements of\n\n24", + "recall": 0.9826086956521739, + "true_md": "Goodwill impairment could negatively impact our net income and shareholders' equity.\n\nGoodwill is not amortized, but is tested for impairment at the reporting unit level, which is an operating segment or one level below an operating segment. Goodwill is required to be tested for impairment annually and between annual tests if events or circumstances indicate that it is more likely than not that the fair value of a reporting unit is less than its carrying value. Reductions in or impairment of the value of our goodwill or other intangible assets will result in charges against our earnings, which could have a material adverse effect on our reported results of operations and financial position in future periods.\n\nThere are numerous risks that may cause the fair value of a reporting unit to fall below its carrying amount, which could lead to the measurement and recognition of goodwill impairment. These risks include, but are not limited to, lowered expectations of future financial results, adverse changes in the business climate, increase in the discount rate, an adverse action or assessment by a regulator, the loss of key personnel, a more-likely-than-not expectation that all or a significant portion of a reporting unit may be disposed of, failure to realize anticipated synergies from acquisitions, a sustained decline in the Company’s market capitalization, and significant, prolonged negative variances between actual and expected financial results. In recent years, the estimated fair value of our Pump reporting unit has fluctuated, partially due to broad-based capital spending declines and heightened pricing pressures experienced in the oil and gas markets. Although we have concluded that there is no impairment on the goodwill associated with our Pump reporting unit as of December 31, 2020, we will continue to monitor their performance and related market conditions for future indicators of potential impairment. For additional information, see the discussion in Item 7 of this Annual Report and under Note 1 to our consolidated financial statements included in Item 8 of this Annual Report.\n\nIneffective internal controls could impact the accuracy and timely reporting of our business and financial results.\n\nOur internal control over financial reporting has not always prevented or detected misstatements because of its inherent limitations, including the possibility of human error, the circumvention or overriding of controls or fraud. We have in the past discovered, and may in the future discover, areas of our internal controls that need improvement, including material weaknesses in internal controls. We have devoted significant resources to remediate and improve our internal controls and to monitor the effectiveness of these remediated measures. There can be no assurance that these measures will ensure that we maintain at all times effective internal controls over our financial processes and reporting in the future. Even effective internal controls can provide only reasonable assurance with respect to the preparation and fair presentation of financial statements. Failure to maintain the adequacy of our internal controls, including any failure to implement required new or improved controls, or difficulties in their implementation, could harm our business and financial results and we could fail to meet our financial reporting obligations.\n\nWe depend on key personnel, the loss of whom would harm our business.\n\nOur future success will depend in part on the continued service of key executive officers and personnel. The loss of the services of any key individual could harm our business. Our future success also depends on our ability to recruit, retain and engage our personnel sufficiently, both to maintain our current business and to execute our strategic initiatives. Competition for officers and employees in our industry is intense and we may not be successful in attracting and retaining such personnel.\n\nChanges in accounting principles and guidance could result in unfavorable accounting charges or effects.\n\nWe prepare our consolidated financial statements in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the U.S. A change in these principles can have a significant effect on our reported financial position and financial results. The adoption of new or revised accounting principles may require us to make changes to our systems, processes and internal controls, which could have a significant effect on our reported financial results and internal controls, cause unexpected financial reporting fluctuations, retroactively affect previously reported results or require us to make costly changes to our operational processes and accounting systems upon our following the adoption of these standards.\n\nThis Annual Report and other written reports and oral statements we make from time-to-time include “forward-looking statements” within the meaning of Section 27A of the Securities Act of 1933, Section 21E of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 and the Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995. All statements other than statements of\n\n24\n\n## Forward-Looking Information is Subject to Risk and Uncertainty\n\n## General Risks\n\n- conditions for future indicators of potential impairment. For additional information, see the discussion in Item 7 of this Annual Report and under Note 1 to our consolidated financial statements included in Item 8 of this Annual Report." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6853793715722196, + "doc_id": "1eac20e5ac5fac655a611343f86927d6a76277e170430c1eba741585437a2e90", + "edit_distance": 0.2978723404255319, + "f1_score": 0.946127946127946, + "meteor": 0.6585746955937322, + "precision": 0.9756944444444444, + "pred_md": "OR\n\n## UNITED STATES SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION Washington, D.C. 20549\n\n## Form 10-K\n\n☑ ANNUAL REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934 FOR THE FISCAL YEAR ENDED DECEMBER 31, 2020\n\n☐\n\nTRANSITION REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934 FOR THE TRANSITION PERIOD\n\nFROM TO\n\nCommission file number 1-13179\n\n## FLOWSERVE CORPORATION\n\n(Exact name of registrant as specified in its charter)\n\nNew York\n\n(State or other jurisdiction of incorporation or organization)\n\n5215 N. O'Connor Boulevard Suite 2300,\n\nIrving,\n\nTexas\n\n75039\n\n(Address of principal executive offices)\n\n(Zip Code)\n\n(972) 443-6500\n\n(Registrant's telephone number, including area code)\n\n## Securities registered pursuant to Section 12(b) of the Act:\n\n## Securities registered pursuant to Section 12(g) of the Act:\n\n## None\n\nIndicate by check mark if the registrant is a well-known seasoned issuer, as defined in Rule 405 of the Securities Act. Yes ☑ No ☐\n\nIndicate by check mark if the registrant is not required to file reports pursuant to Section 13 or Section 15(d) of the Act. Yes ☐ No ☑\n\nIndicate by check mark whether the registrant (1) has filed all reports required to be filed by Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to file such reports), and (2) has been subject to such filing requirements for the past 90 days. Yes ☑ No ☐\n\nIndicate by check mark whether the registrant has submitted electronically every Interactive Data File required to be submitted pursuant to Rule 405 of Regulation S-T (§ 232.405 of this chapter) during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to submit such files). Yes ☑ No ☐\n\nIndicate by check mark whether the registrant is a large accelerated filer, an accelerated filer, a non-accelerated filer, a smaller reporting company, or an emerging growth company. See the definitions of 'large accelerated filer,' 'accelerated filer', 'smaller reporting company' and 'emerging growth company' in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act.\n\nLarge\taccelerated\tfiler\n\n☑\n\nAccelerated\tfiler\n\n☐\n\nNon-accelerated\tfiler\n\n☐\n\nSmaller\treporting\tcompany ☐\n\nEmerging growth company\n\n☐\n\nIf an emerging growth company, indicate by check mark if the registrant has elected not to use the extended transition period for complying with any new or revised financial accounting standards provided pursuant to Section 13(a) of the Exchange Act. ☐\n\nIndicate by check mark whether the registrant has filed a report on and attestation to its management's assessment of the effectiveness of its internal control over financial reporting under Section 404(b) of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act (15 U.S.C. 7262(b)) by the registered public accounting firm that prepared or issued its audit report. Yes ☑ No ☐\n\nIndicate by check mark whether the registrant is a shell company (as defined in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act). Yes ☐ No ☑\n\nThe aggregate market value of the common stock held by non-affiliates of the registrant, computed by reference to the closing price of the registrant's common stock as reported on June 30, 2020 (the last business day of the registrant's most recently completed second fiscal quarter), was approximately $3,069,855,077. For purposes of the foregoing calculation only, all directors, executive officers and known 5% beneficial owners have been deemed affiliates.\n\nNumber of the registrant's common shares outstanding as of February 17, 2021 was 130,276,070.\n\n## DOCUMENTS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE\n\nCertain information contained in the definitive proxy statement for the registrant's 2021 Annual Meeting of Shareholders scheduled to be held on May 20, 2021 is incorporated by reference into Part III hereof.\n\n31-0267900\n\n(I.R.S.\tEmployer\tIdentification\tNo.)", + "recall": 0.9183006535947712, + "true_md": "# UNITED STATES SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION Washington, D.C. 20549\n\n# Washington, D.C. 20549 Form 10-K\n\n# FOR THE FISCAL YEAR ENDED DECEMBER 31, 2020\n\nUNITED STATES SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION Washington, D.C. 20549 Form 10-K\n\n☑\n\n☐\n\nOR\n\nANNUAL REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934\n\nTRANSITION REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934 FOR THE TRANSITION PERIOD FROM TO\n\nCommission file number 1-13179 FLOWSERVE CORPORATION\n\nCommission file number 1-13179 FLOWSERVE CORPORATION (Exact name of registrant as specified in its charter)\n\nFLOWSERVE CORPORATION (Exact name of registrant as specified in its charter)\n\nNew York\n\n(State or other jurisdiction of incorporation or organization)\n\n31-0267900\n\n(I.R.S. Employer Identification No.)\n\n75039\n\n(Zip Code)\n\nTexas\n\nIrving,\n\n5215 N. O'Connor Boulevard Suite 2300,\n\n(Address of principal executive offices)\n\n(972) 443-6500 (Registrant’s telephone number, including area code)\n\n(972) 443-6500 (Registrant’s telephone number, including area code)\n\nSecurities registered pursuant to Section 12(b) of the Act:\n\nTitle of Each Class\n\nName of Each Exchange on Which Registered\n\nNew York Stock Exchange New York Stock Exchange\n\nTrading Symbol\n\nFLS FLS22A\n\nCommon Stock, $1.25 Par Value 1.25% Senior Notes due 2022\n\nSecurities registered pursuant to Section 12(g) of the Act: None\n\nSecurities registered pursuant to Section 12(g) of the Act: None\n\nIndicate by check mark if the registrant is a well-known seasoned issuer, as defined in Rule 405 of the Securities Act. Yes ☑ No ☐\n\nIndicate by check mark if the registrant is not required to file reports pursuant to Section 13 or Section 15(d) of the Act. Yes ☐ No ☑\n\nIndicate by check mark whether the registrant (1) has filed all reports required to be filed by Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to file such reports), and (2) has been subject to such filing requirements for the past 90 days. Yes ☑ No ☐\n\nIndicate by check mark whether the registrant has submitted electronically every Interactive Data File required to be submitted pursuant to Rule 405 of Regulation S-T (§ 232.405 of this chapter) during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to submit such files). Yes ☑ No ☐\n\nIndicate by check mark whether the registrant is a large accelerated filer, an accelerated filer, a non-accelerated filer, a smaller reporting company, or an emerging growth company. See the definitions of “large accelerated filer,” “accelerated filer”, “smaller reporting company” and “emerging growth company” in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act.\n\nLarge accelerated filer ☑ Emerging growth company ☐\n\nLarge accelerated filer ☑ Emerging growth company ☐ If an emerging growth company, indicate by check mark if the registrant has elected not to use the extended transition period for complying with any new or\n\nAccelerated filer ☐\n\nNon-accelerated filer ☐\n\nSmaller reporting company ☐\n\nEmerging growth company ☐ If an emerging growth company, indicate by check mark if the registrant has elected not to use the extended transition period for complying with any new or revised financial accounting standards provided pursuant to Section 13(a) of the Exchange Act. ☐\n\nIndicate by check mark whether the registrant has filed a report on and attestation to its management’s assessment of the effectiveness of its internal control over financial reporting under Section 404(b) of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act (15 U.S.C. 7262(b)) by the registered public accounting firm that prepared or issued its audit report. Yes ☑ No ☐\n\nIndicate by check mark whether the registrant is a shell company (as defined in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act). Yes ☐ No ☑\n\nThe aggregate market value of the common stock held by non-affiliates of the registrant, computed by reference to the closing price of the registrant’s common stock as reported on June 30, 2020 (the last business day of the registrant’s most recently completed second fiscal quarter), was approximately $3,069,855,077. For purposes of the foregoing calculation only, all directors, executive officers and known 5% beneficial owners have been deemed affiliates. Number of the registrant’s common shares outstanding as of Fe bruary 17, 2021 was 130,276,070 .\n\nDOCUMENTS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE Certain information contained in the definitive proxy statement for the registrant’s 2021 Annual Meeting of Shareholders scheduled to be held on May 20, 2021 is\n\nDOCUMENTS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE Certain information contained in the definitive proxy statement for the registrant’s 2021 Annual Meeting of Shareholders scheduled to be held on May 20, 2021 is incorporated by reference into Part III hereof.\n\nforegoing calculation only, all directors, executive officers and known 5% beneficial owners have been deemed affiliates. Number of the registrant’s common shares outstanding as of Fe bruary 17, 2021 was 130,276,070 ." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8282709021033637, + "doc_id": "81357e598092464d606c6ebfdb4fcab928a75237d71308401dce1fe8814caf54", + "edit_distance": 0.22844827586206898, + "f1_score": 0.982078853046595, + "meteor": 0.7233964607835515, + "precision": 0.9891696750902527, + "pred_md": "## ITEM 6. RESERVED.\n\n## ITEM 7. MANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS.\n\nThe following discussion and analysis of results of operations and financial condition should be read in conjunction with the consolidated financial statements and notes thereto appearing elsewhere in this Annual Report on Form 10K.\n\n## OVERVIEW\n\nEastGroup's goal is to maximize shareholder value by being a leading provider in its markets of functional, flexible and quality business distribution space for location-sensitive customers (primarily in the 15,000 to 70,000 square foot range). The Company develops, acquires and operates distribution facilities, the majority of which are clustered around major transportation features in supply-constrained submarkets in major Sunbelt regions. The Company's core markets are in the states of Florida, Texas, Arizona, California and North Carolina.\n\n## Impact of the COVID-19 Pandemic\n\nOn March 11, 2020, the World Health Organization characterized the COVID-19 outbreak as a pandemic. Global, national and local economies continue to be impacted by the pandemic and the mitigation efforts to combat the spread of COVID-19.\n\nDuring the course of the COVID-19 pandemic, the United States has experienced, and may continue to experience, significant health, social and economic impacts from COVID-19. EastGroup's operations, occupancy and rent collections have remained substantially stable during this period. As of February 16, 2021, the Company has received rent relief requests, primarily in the form of payment deferral requests, from approximately 28% of its customers based on rental revenue. These requests have largely ended; for comparison, this is only a slight increase from 26% at the end of April 2020 during the beginning of the pandemic. To date, approximately 18% of these requests have been granted some form of relief, which represents approximately 5% of the Company's customers on a square foot basis. The Company has executed rent deferral agreements totaling $1.7 million, which represents approximately 0.4% of the Company's 2020 revenue. The deferrals all relate to 2020 rental income with no future period deferred rents. The terms differ for each deferral agreement, and all deferred rent payments that were due through December 31, 2020 have been collected with the exception of $27,000. As of February 16, 2021, 59% of total deferred rent has been collected. Under modified COVID-19-related guidance provided by the Financial Accounting Standards Board ('FASB'), rental income for the majority of these deferral agreements ($1.4 million of the $1.7 million) qualifies to be recognized as rental income in the periods in which it was charged under the original terms of the leases. When requests were made, they were handled on a case-by-case basis, and the Company's responses were dependent on its understanding of the financial strength of the customer, the operational and earnings impacts being experienced by the customer, and the customer's ability or inability to obtain capital through debt or equity issuances, government assistance programs or by other means. As of February 16, 2021, rent payment deferrals representing approximately 0.4% of the Company's 2020 revenue have not been significant; the Company is continuing to actively monitor the evolving COVID-19 situation and its impact on the Company's cash flows and operations.\n\n18", + "recall": 0.9750889679715302, + "true_md": "The following discussion and analysis of results of operations and financial condition should be read in conjunction with the consolidated financial statements and notes thereto appearing elsewhere in this Annual Report on Form 10- K.\n\nOVERVIEW EastGroup’s goal is to maximize shareholder value by being a leading provider in its markets of functional, flexible and quality business distribution space for location-sensitive customers (primarily in the 15,000 to 70,000 square foot range). The Company develops, acquires and operates distribution facilities, the majority of which are clustered around major transportation features in supply-constrained submarkets in major Sunbelt regions. The Company’s core markets are in the states of Florida, Texas, Arizona, California and North Carolina.\n\nImpact of the COVID-19 Pandemic On March 11, 2020, the World Health Organization characterized the COVID-19 outbreak as a pandemic. Global, national and local economies continue to be impacted by the pandemic and the mitigation efforts to combat the spread of COVID-19.\n\nDuring the course of the COVID-19 pandemic, the United States has experienced, and may continue to experience, significant health, social and economic impacts from COVID-19. EastGroup’s operations, occupancy and rent collections have remained substantially stable during this period. As of February 16, 2021, the Company has received rent relief requests, primarily in the form of payment deferral requests, from approximately 28% of its customers based on rental revenue. These requests have largely ended; for comparison, this is only a slight increase from 26% at the end of April 2020 during the beginning of the pandemic. To date, approximately 18% of these requests have been granted some form of relief, which represents approximately 5% of the Company’s customers on a square foot basis. The Company has executed rent deferral agreements totaling $1.7 million, which represents approximately 0.4% of the Company’s 2020 revenue. The deferrals all relate to 2020 rental income with no future period deferred rents. The terms differ for each deferral agreement, and all deferred rent payments that were due through December 31, 2020 have been collected with the exception of $27,000. As of February 16, 2021, 59% of total deferred rent has been collected. Under modified COVID-19-related guidance provided by the Financial Accounting Standards Board (“FASB”), rental income for the majority of these deferral agreements ($1.4 million of the $1.7 million) qualifies to be recognized as rental income in the periods in which it was charged under the original terms of the leases. When requests were made, they were handled on a case-by-case basis, and the Company’s responses were dependent on its understanding of the financial strength of the customer, the operational and earnings impacts being experienced by the customer, and the customer’s ability or inability to obtain capital through debt or equity issuances, government assistance programs or by other means. As of February 16, 2021, rent payment deferrals representing approximately 0.4% of the Company's 2020 revenue have not been significant; the Company is continuing to actively monitor the evolving COVID-19 situation and its impact on the Company’s cash flows and operations.\n\n18\n\n## ITEM 7. MANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS.\n\n## OVERVIEW EastGroup’s goal is to maximize shareholder value by being a leading provider in its markets of functional, flexible and quality business distribution space for location-sensitive customers (primarily in the 15,000 to 70,000 square\n\n## Impact of the COVID-19 Pandemic On March 11, 2020, the World Health Organization characterized the COVID-19 outbreak as a pandemic. Global, national and local economies continue to be impacted by the pandemic and the mitigation efforts to combat the spread\n\nITEM 6. RESERVED." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.880773500588743, + "doc_id": "ecd455972ecbdde46e8d1a0d2b6b840a0ce255f1d2f322bf30b8548832324350", + "edit_distance": 0.047619047619047616, + "f1_score": 0.972972972972973, + "meteor": 0.9564593301435406, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "CP\t2020\tANNUAL\tREPORT\n\n*\tManagement\tcontract\tor\tcompensatory\tarrangement\n\n**\tFiled\twith\tthis\tAnnual\tReport\ton\tForm\t10-K", + "recall": 0.9473684210526315, + "true_md": "CP 2020 ANNUAL REPORT 134\n\n* Management contract or compensatory arrangement\n\n** Filed with this Annual Report on Form 10-K" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8879146613766385, + "doc_id": "bec6277403ee8cd6153011c328740afbd8ae88689a8c98ee9620411ea521e4e4", + "edit_distance": 0.11218229623137599, + "f1_score": 0.990632318501171, + "meteor": 0.9066755734210776, + "precision": 0.9929577464788732, + "pred_md": "15 CP\t2020\tANNUAL\tREPORT\n\n## Government Regulation\n\nThe Company's railway operations are subject to extensive federal laws, regulations, and rules in both Canada and the U.S., which directly affect how operations and business activities are managed.\n\n## Economic Regulation - Canada\n\nThe Company's rail operations in Canada are subject to economic regulation by the Canadian Transportation Agency (the \"Agency') as delegated by the Canada Transportation Act . The Canada Transportation Act indirectly regulates rates by providing remedies for freight rates, including ancillary charges, remedies for level of service, long-haul interswitching rates, and regulated interswitching rates in Canada. The CTA regulates the MRE for the movement of export grain, construction and abandonment of railways, commuter and passenger access, and noise and vibration-related disputes.\n\nIn 2018, the Transportation Modernization Act became law. The legislation amended the Canada Transportation Act and the Railway Safety Act (\"RSA\"), among other Acts, to (1) replace the previous 160 kilometre extended interswitching limit and the competitive line rate provisions with a new long-haul interswitching regime; (2) modify the existing Level of Service remedy for shippers by instructing the Agency to determine, upon receipt of a complaint, if a railway company is fulfilling its common carrier obligation to the 'highest level of service that is reasonable in the circumstances'; (3) allow the existing Service Level Agreement arbitration remedy to include the consideration of reciprocal financial penalties; (4) increase the threshold for summary Final Offer Arbitration from $750,000 to $2 million; (5) bifurcate the Volume-Related Composite Price Index component of the annual MRE determination for transportation of regulated grain, to encourage hopper car investment by CP and Canadian National Railway (\"CN\"); (6) mandate the installation of locomotive voice and video recorders (\"LVVRs\"), with statutory permission for random access by railway companies and Transport Canada (\"TC\") to the LVVR data in order to proactively strengthen railway safety in Canada; and (7) compel railways to provide additional data to the federal government.\n\n## Economic Regulation - U.S.\n\nThe Company's U.S. rail operations are subject to economic regulation by the Surface Transportation Board (the 'STB'). The STB provides economic regulatory oversight and administers Title 49 of the United States Code and related Code of Federal Regulations . The STB has jurisdiction over railroad rate and service issues and proposed railroad mergers and other transactions.\n\nThe STB Reauthorization Act of 2015 resulted in numerous changes to the structure and composition of the STB, removing it from under the Department of Transport and establishing the STB as an independent U.S. agency, as well as increasing STB Board membership from three to five members. Notably, the law vests in the STB certain limited enforcement powers, by authorizing it to investigate rail carrier violations on the STB Board's own initiative. The law also requires the STB to establish a voluntary binding arbitration process to resolve rail rate and practice disputes.\n\n## Safety Regulation - Canada\n\nThe Company's operations in Canada are subject to safety regulatory oversight by TC pursuant to the RSA. The RSA regulates safety-related aspects of railway operations in Canada, including the delegation of inspection, investigation and enforcement powers to TC. TC is also responsible for overseeing the transportation of dangerous goods as set out under the Transportation of Dangerous Goods Act (\"TDGA\").\n\nAfter the tragic accident in Lac-Mégantic, Québec, in July 2013 involving a non-related short-line railway company, the Government of Canada implemented several measures pursuant to the RSA and the TDGA. These modifications implemented changes with respect to rules associated with securing unattended trains; the classification of crude being imported, handled, offered for transport, or transported; and the provision of information to municipalities through which dangerous goods are transported by rail. The U.S. federal government has taken similar actions. These changes did not have a material impact on CP's operating practices.\n\nIn 2015, An Act to amend the Canada Transportation Act and the Railway Safety Act became law. The legislation sets out minimum insurance requirements for federally regulated railways based on amounts of crude and toxic inhalation hazards (\"TIH\") or poisonous inhalation hazards moved. It also imposes strict liability; limits railway liability to the minimum insurance level; mandates the creation of a fund paid for by levies on crude shipments, to be utilized for damages beyond a railway's liability; allows railways and insurers to maintain rights to pursue other parties (subrogation); and prevents shifting liability to shippers from railways except through written agreement.\n\nThe Company is allocating resources, including working with public and private rail crossing owners, to meet the Grade Crossings Regulations , under the RSA, which came into force in 2014. The regulations require existing crossings to meet specified safety standards by November 2021.\n\nOn November 25, 2020, the Minister of Transport announced updated Duty and Rest Period Rules for Railway Operating Employees . The new rules, founded on modern-day fatigue management principles, reduce the length of a duty period and increase the length of the minimum rest period between shifts. The rules establish limits on the total number of duty hours, 60 hours in a seven-day period and 192 hours in a 28-day period. These requirements will be phased in 30 months from the date of the announcement. The new rules also require federally regulated railways, including the Company, to complete a Fatigue Management Plan by November 25, 2021, and implement the Fitness for Duty provisions by November 25, 2022.", + "recall": 0.9883177570093458, + "true_md": "15 CP 2020 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n## Government Regulation\n\n## Economic Regulation - Canada The Company’s rail operations in Canada are subject to economic regulation by the Canadian Transportation Agency (the \"Agency”) as delegated by the\n\n## Economic Regulation - U.S. The Company’s U.S. rail operations are subject to economic regulation by the Surface Transportation Board (the “STB”). The STB provides economic regulatory\n\n## Safety Regulation - Canada The Company’s operations in Canada are subject to safety regulatory oversight by TC pursuant to the RSA. The RSA regulates safety-related aspects of railway\n\nThe Company’s railway operations are subject to extensive federal laws, regulations, and rules in both Canada and the U.S., which directly affect how operations and business activities are managed.\n\nEconomic Regulation - Canada The Company’s rail operations in Canada are subject to economic regulation by the Canadian Transportation Agency (the \"Agency”) as delegated by the Canada Transportation Act . The Canada Transportation Act indirectly regulates rates by providing remedies for freight rates, including ancillary charges, remedies for level of service, long-haul interswitching rates, and regulated interswitching rates in Canada. The CTA regulates the MRE for the movement of export grain, construction and abandonment of railways, commuter and passenger access, and noise and vibration-related disputes.\n\nIn 2018, the Transportation Modernization Act became law. The legislation amended the Canada Transportation Act and the Railway Safety Act (\"RSA\"), among other Acts, to (1) replace the previous 160 kilometre extended interswitching limit and the competitive line rate provisions with a new long-haul interswitching regime; (2) modify the existing Level of Service remedy for shippers by instructing the Agency to determine, upon receipt of a complaint, if a railway company is fulfilling its common carrier obligation to the “highest level of service that is reasonable in the circumstances”; (3) allow the existing Service Level Agreement arbitration remedy to include the consideration of reciprocal financial penalties; (4) increase the threshold for summary Final Offer Arbitration from $750,000 to $2 million; (5) bifurcate the Volume-Related Composite Price Index component of the annual MRE determination for transportation of regulated grain, to encourage hopper car investment by CP and Canadian National Railway (\"CN\"); (6) mandate the installation of locomotive voice and video recorders (\"LVVRs\"), with statutory permission for random access by railway companies and Transport Canada (\"TC\") to the LVVR data in order to proactively strengthen railway safety in Canada; and (7) compel railways to provide additional data to the federal government.\n\nEconomic Regulation - U.S. The Company’s U.S. rail operations are subject to economic regulation by the Surface Transportation Board (the “STB”). The STB provides economic regulatory oversight and administers Title 49 of the United States Code and related Code of Federal Regulations . The STB has jurisdiction over railroad rate and service issues and proposed railroad mergers and other transactions.\n\nThe STB Reauthorization Act of 2015 resulted in numerous changes to the structure and composition of the STB, removing it from under the Department of Transport and establishing the STB as an independent U.S. agency, as well as increasing STB Board membership from three to five members. Notably, the law vests in the STB certain limited enforcement powers, by authorizing it to investigate rail carrier violations on the STB Board’s own initiative. The law also requires the STB to establish a voluntary binding arbitration process to resolve rail rate and practice disputes.\n\nSafety Regulation - Canada The Company’s operations in Canada are subject to safety regulatory oversight by TC pursuant to the RSA. The RSA regulates safety-related aspects of railway operations in Canada, including the delegation of inspection, investigation and enforcement powers to TC. TC is also responsible for overseeing the transportation of dangerous goods as set out under the Transportation of Dangerous Goods Act (\"TDGA\").\n\nAfter the tragic accident in Lac-Mégantic, Québec, in July 2013 involving a non-related short-line railway company, the Government of Canada implemented several measures pursuant to the RSA and the TDGA. These modifications implemented changes with respect to rules associated with securing unattended trains; the classification of crude being imported, handled, offered for transport, or transported; and the provision of information to municipalities through which dangerous goods are transported by rail. The U.S. federal government has taken similar actions. These changes did not have a material impact on CP’s operating practices.\n\nIn 2015, An Act to amend the Canada Transportation Act and the Railway Safety Act became law. The legislation sets out minimum insurance requirements for federally regulated railways based on amounts of crude and toxic inhalation hazards (\"TIH\") or poisonous inhalation hazards moved. It also imposes strict liability; limits railway liability to the minimum insurance level; mandates the creation of a fund paid for by levies on crude shipments, to be utilized for damages beyond a railway's liability; allows railways and insurers to maintain rights to pursue other parties (subrogation); and prevents shifting liability to shippers from railways except through written agreement.\n\nThe Company is allocating resources, including working with public and private rail crossing owners, to meet the Grade Crossings Regulations , under the RSA, which came into force in 2014. The regulations require existing crossings to meet specified safety standards by November 2021.\n\nOn November 25, 2020, the Minister of Transport announced updated Duty and Rest Period Rules for Railway Operating Employees . The new rules, founded on modern-day fatigue management principles, reduce the length of a duty period and increase the length of the minimum rest period between shifts. The rules establish limits on the total number of duty hours, 60 hours in a seven-day period and 192 hours in a 28-day period. These requirements will be phased in 30 months from the date of the announcement. The new rules also require federally regulated railways, including the Company, to complete a Fatigue Management Plan by November 25, 2021, and implement the Fitness for Duty provisions by November 25, 2022." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.956202696434722, + "doc_id": "82ad59151a5a977c928ed8486ee6c5d134d402f850e41bc65345e1bc90cfb5b6", + "edit_distance": 0.07713498622589532, + "f1_score": 0.9952755905511811, + "meteor": 0.9784749886880161, + "precision": 0.9968454258675079, + "pred_md": "## Table of Contents\n\n## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS OF AMERICAN AIRLINES, INC.\n\nparty, generally if withholding taxes are imposed on such lender or other financing party as a result of a change in the applicable tax law.\n\nIn certain transactions, including certain aircraft financing leases and loans, the lessors, lenders and/or other parties have rights to terminate the transaction based on changes in foreign tax law, illegality or certain other events or circumstances. In such a case, American may be required to make a lump sum payment to terminate the relevant transaction.\n\nAmerican has general indemnity clauses in many of its airport and other real estate leases where American as lessee indemnifies the lessor (and related parties) against liabilities related to American's use of the leased property. Generally, these indemnifications cover liabilities resulting from the negligence of the indemnified parties, but not liabilities resulting from the gross negligence or willful misconduct of the indemnified parties. In addition, American provides environmental indemnities in many of these leases for contamination related to American's use of the leased property.\n\nUnder certain contracts with third parties, American indemnifies the third-party against legal liability arising out of an action by the third-party, or certain other parties. The terms of these contracts vary and the potential exposure under these indemnities cannot be determined. American has liability insurance protecting American for some of the obligations it has undertaken under these indemnities.\n\nAmerican is required to make principal and interest payments for certain special facility revenue bonds issued by municipalities primarily to build or improve airport facilities and purchase equipment, which are leased to American. The payment of principal and interest of certain special facility revenue bonds is guaranteed by American. As of December 31, 2020, the remaining lease payments through 2035 guaranteeing the principal and interest on these bonds are $572 million and the current carrying amount of the associated operating lease liability in the accompanying consolidated balance sheet is $321 million.\n\nAs of December 31, 2020, American had issued guarantees covering AAG's $1.8 billion aggregate principal amount of the PSP1 Promissory Note due April 2030, $1.0 billion aggregate principal amount of 6.50% convertible senior notes due July 2025, $750 million aggregate principal amount of 5.000% senior notes due June 2022 and $500 million aggregate principal amount of 3.75% senior notes due March 2025.\n\n## (g) Credit Card Processing Agreements\n\nAmerican has agreements with companies that process customer credit card transactions for the sale of air travel and other services. American's agreements allow these credit card processing companies, under certain conditions, to hold an amount of its cash (referred to as a holdback) equal to a portion of advance ticket sales that have been processed by that company, but for which American has not yet provided the air transportation. Additional holdback requirements in the event of material adverse changes in American's financial condition will reduce its liquidity in the form of unrestricted cash by the amount of the holdbacks. These credit card processing companies are not currently entitled to maintain any holdbacks pursuant to these requirements.\n\n## (h) Labor Negotiations\n\nAs of December 31, 2020, American employed approximately 78,300 active full-time equivalent (FTE) employees. Of the total active FTE employees, 84% are covered by collective bargaining agreements (CBAs) with various labor unions and 47% are covered by CBAs that are currently amendable or that will become amendable within one year. Joint collective bargaining agreements (JCBAs) have been reached with post-Merger employee groups, including a new five-year JCBA ratified with the TWU-IAM Association, which represents American's mainline mechanics and related, fleet service, stock clerks, maintenance control technicians and maintenance training instructors. Additionally, the post-Merger JCBAs covering American's pilots and flight attendants are now amendable. The JCBA covering American's passenger service employees is also amendable.\n\n195", + "recall": 0.9937106918238994, + "true_md": "## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS OF AMERICAN AIRLINES, INC.\n\nTable of Contents\n\nparty, generally if withholding taxes are imposed on such lender or other financing party as a result of a change in the applicable tax law.\n\nIn certain transactions, including certain aircraft financing leases and loans, the lessors, lenders and/or other parties have rights to terminate the transaction based on changes in foreign tax law, illegality or certain other events or circumstances. In such a case, American may be required to make a lump sum payment to terminate the relevant transaction.\n\nAmerican has general indemnity clauses in many of its airport and other real estate leases where American as lessee indemnifies the lessor (and related parties) against liabilities related to American’s use of the leased property. Generally, these indemnifications cover liabilities resulting from the negligence of the indemnified parties, but not liabilities resulting from the gross negligence or willful misconduct of the indemnified parties. In addition, American provides environmental indemnities in many of these leases for contamination related to American’s use of the leased property.\n\nUnder certain contracts with third parties, American indemnifies the third-party against legal liability arising out of an action by the third-party, or certain other parties. The terms of these contracts vary and the potential exposure under these indemnities cannot be determined. American has liability insurance protecting American for some of the obligations it has undertaken under these indemnities.\n\nAmerican is required to make principal and interest payments for certain special facility revenue bonds issued by municipalities primarily to build or improve airport facilities and purchase equipment, which are leased to American. The payment of principal and interest of certain special facility revenue bonds is guaranteed by American. As of December 31, 2020, the remaining lease payments through 2035 guaranteeing the principal and interest on these bonds are $572 million and the current carrying amount of the associated operating lease liability in the accompanying consolidated balance sheet is $321 million.\n\nAs of December 31, 2020, American had issued guarantees covering AAG’s $1.8 billion aggregate principal amount of the PSP1 Promissory Note due April 2030, $1.0 billion aggregate principal amount of 6.50% convertible senior notes due July 2025, $750 million aggregate principal amount of 5.000% senior notes due June 2022 and $500 million aggregate principal amount of 3.75% senior notes due March 2025.\n\nAmerican has agreements with companies that process customer credit card transactions for the sale of air travel and other services. American’s agreements allow these credit card processing companies, under certain conditions, to hold an amount of its cash (referred to as a holdback) equal to a portion of advance ticket sales that have been processed by that company, but for which American has not yet provided the air transportation. Additional holdback requirements in the event of material adverse changes in American’s financial condition will reduce its liquidity in the form of unrestricted cash by the amount of the holdbacks. These credit card processing companies are not currently entitled to maintain any holdbacks pursuant to these requirements.\n\nAs of December 31, 2020, American employed approximately 78,300 active full-time equivalent (FTE) employees. Of the total active FTE employees, 84% are covered by collective bargaining agreements (CBAs) with various labor unions and 47% are covered by CBAs that are currently amendable or that will become amendable within one year. Joint collective bargaining agreements (JCBAs) have been reached with post-Merger employee groups, including a new five-year JCBA ratified with the TWU-IAM Association, which represents American’s mainline mechanics and related, fleet service, stock clerks, maintenance control technicians and maintenance training instructors. Additionally, the post-Merger JCBAs covering American’s pilots and flight attendants are now amendable. The JCBA covering American’s passenger service employees is also amendable.\n\n## (g) Credit Card Processing Agreements\n\n## (h) Labor Negotiations\n\n195" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9537090815999548, + "doc_id": "18d891d70289e497544150e7a5696a9714345fde14139f27eb5f3ed62f375d1b", + "edit_distance": 0.07530120481927711, + "f1_score": 0.9847094801223242, + "meteor": 0.9855024919472039, + "precision": 0.9877300613496932, + "pred_md": "## APPLIED MATERIALS, INC.\n\n## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS - (Continued)\n\nContract balances at the end of each reporting period were as follows:\n\nTable of Contents\n\nThe increase in contract assets during fiscal 2020, was primarily due to goods transferred to customers where payment was conditional upon technical sign off, offset by the reclassification of contract assets to net accounts receivable upon meeting conditions to the right to payment.\n\nDuring fiscal 2020, Applied recognized revenue of approximately $1.1 billion related to contract liabilities at October 27, 2019. This reduction in contract liabilities was offset by new billings for products and services for which there were unsatisfied performance obligations to customers and revenue had not yet been recognized as of October 25, 2020.\n\nThere were no impairment losses recognized on Applied's accounts receivables and contract assets during fiscal 2020 and 2019.\n\nAs of October 25, 2020, the amount of remaining unsatisfied performance obligations on contracts with an original estimated duration of one year or more was approximately $1.1 billion, of which approximately 70% is expected to be recognized within 12 months and the remainder is expected to be recognized within the following 24 months thereafter. Applied has elected the available practical expedient to exclude the value of unsatisfied performance obligations for contracts with an original expected duration of one year or less.\n\n## Note 8 Balance Sheet Detail\n\nIncluded in finished goods inventory is $16 million at October 25, 2020 and $13 million at October 27, 2019, of newly-introduced systems at customer locations where the sales transaction did not meet Applied's revenue recognition criteria as set forth in Note 1. Finished goods inventory includes $416 million and $318 million of evaluation inventory at October 25, 2020 and October 27, 2019, respectively.\n\n83", + "recall": 0.9817073170731707, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## APPLIED MATERIALS, INC.\n\n## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS — (Continued)\n\n## Note 8 Balance Sheet Detail\n\nContract balances at the end of each reporting period were as follows:\n\nThe increase in contract assets during fiscal 2020, was primarily due to goods transferred to customers where payment was conditional upon technical sign off, offset by the reclassification of contract assets to net accounts receivable upon meeting conditions to the right to payment.\n\nDuring fiscal 2020, Applied recognized revenue of approximately $1.1 billion related to contract liabilities at October 27, 2019. This reduction in contract liabilities was offset by new billings for products and services for which there were unsatisfied performance obligations to customers and revenue had not yet been recognized as of October 25, 2020.\n\nThere were no impairment losses recognized on Applied’s accounts receivables and contract assets during fiscal 2020 and 2019.\n\nAs of October 25, 2020, the amount of remaining unsatisfied performance obligations on contracts with an original estimated duration of one year or more was approximately $1.1 billion, of which approximately 70% is expected to be recognized within 12 months and the remainder is expected to be recognized within the following 24 months thereafter. Applied has elected the available practical expedient to exclude the value of unsatisfied performance obligations for contracts with an original expected duration of one year or less.\n\nIncluded in finished goods inventory is $16 million at October 25, 2020 and $13 million at October 27, 2019, of newly-introduced systems at customer locations where the sales transaction did not meet Applied’s revenue recognition criteria as set forth in Note 1. Finished goods inventory includes $416 million and $318 million of evaluation inventory at October 25, 2020 and October 27, 2019, respectively.\n\n83" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.1690512593835076, + "doc_id": "dfc0287dd435bc1810c53c6614c686a73c7e1bf3a5dc8909da28752ee3712f09", + "edit_distance": 0.5555555555555556, + "f1_score": 0.6923076923076923, + "meteor": 0.42388344226579516, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## FLOWSERVE CORPORATION\n\n## CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS\n\n63", + "recall": 0.5294117647058824, + "true_md": "## FLOWSERVE CORPORATION CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS\n\n## FLOWSERVE CORPORATION CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS\n\nSee accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.\n\n63" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9428161760377307, + "doc_id": "72a3678464d1274664324bc62f52de84211d3fdad844ad98f9f70b6bd89badc2", + "edit_distance": 0.2558139534883721, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9971938102240104, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Table of Contents\n\n## Item 13: Certain Relationships and Related Transactions, and Director Independence\n\nThe information required by this Item will be provided in accordance with Instruction G(3) to Form 10-K no later than February 22, 2021.\n\n## Item 14: Principal Accounting Fees and Services\n\nThe information required by this Item will be provided in accordance with Instruction G(3) to Form 10-K no later than February 22, 2021.\n\n59", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## Item 13: Certain Relationships and Related Transactions, and Director Independence\n\n## Item 14: Principal Accounting Fees and Services\n\nThe information required by this Item will be provided in accordance with Instruction G(3) to Form 10-K no later than February 22, 2021.\n\nThe information required by this Item will be provided in accordance with Instruction G(3) to Form 10-K no later than February 22, 2021.\n\n59" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9640354220253747, + "doc_id": "684c673990045df83703a75a8d63a2fca6ed4f32f9c4536030fcf9c2a0ea4c90", + "edit_distance": 0.023379383634431455, + "f1_score": 0.979591836734694, + "meteor": 0.9791601218254006, + "precision": 0.9809264305177112, + "pred_md": "## Table of Contents\n\n- · the granting and timing of certain governmental approvals (including antitrust or foreign government approvals) needed for codesharing alliances, joint businesses and other arrangements with other airlines;\n- · restrictions on competitive practices (for example, court orders, or agency regulations or orders, that would curtail an airline's ability to respond to a competitor);\n- · the adoption of new passenger security standards or regulations that impact customer service standards;\n- · restrictions on airport operations, such as restrictions on the use of slots at airports or the auction or reallocation of slot rights currently held by us;\n- · the adoption of more restrictive locally-imposed noise restrictions; and\n- · restrictions on travel or special guidelines regarding aircraft occupancy or hygiene related to COVID-19, including the imposition of preflight testing regimes which have to date and may in the future have the effect of reducing demand for air travel in the markets where such requirements are imposed.\n\nEach additional regulation or other form of regulatory oversight increases costs and adds greater complexity to airline operations and, in some cases, may reduce the demand for air travel. There can be no assurance that the increased costs or greater complexity associated with our compliance with new rules, anticipated rules or other forms of regulatory oversight will not have a material adverse effect on us.\n\nAny significant reduction in air traffic capacity at and in the airspace serving key airports in the U.S. or overseas could have a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations and financial condition. In addition, the ATC system is not successfully modernizing to meet the growing demand for U.S. air travel. Air traffic controllers rely on outdated procedures and technologies that routinely compel airlines, including ourselves, to fly inefficient routes or take significant delays on the ground. The ATC system's inability to manage existing travel demand has led government agencies to implement short-term capacity constraints during peak travel periods or adverse weather conditions in certain markets, resulting in delays and disruptions of air traffic. The outdated technologies also cause the ATC system to be less resilient in the event of a failure. For example, an automation failure and an evacuation, in 2015 and 2017, respectively, at the Washington Air Route Control Center resulted in cancellations and delays of hundreds of flights traversing the greater Washington, D.C. airspace.\n\nIn the early 2000s, the FAA embarked on a path to modernize the national airspace system, including migration from the current radar-based ATC system to a GPS-based system. This modernization of the ATC system, generally referred to as 'NextGen,' has been plagued by delays and cost overruns, and it remains uncertain when the full array of benefits expected from this modernization will be available to the public and the airlines, including ourselves. Failure to update the ATC system and the substantial costs that may be imposed on airlines, including ourselves, to fund a modernized ATC system may have a material adverse effect on our business.\n\nFurther, our business has been adversely impacted when government agencies have ceased to operate as expected including due to partial shutdowns, sequestrations or similar events and the COVID-19 pandemic. These events have resulted in, among other things, reduced demand for air travel, an actual or perceived reduction in ATC and security screening resources and related travel delays, as well as disruption in the ability of the FAA to grant required regulatory approvals, such as those that are involved when a new aircraft is first placed into service.\n\nOur operating authority in international markets is subject to aviation agreements between the U.S. and the respective countries or governmental authorities, such as the EU, and in some cases, fares and schedules require the approval of the DOT and/or the relevant foreign governments. Moreover, alliances with international carriers may be subject to the jurisdiction and regulations of various foreign agencies. The U.S. government has negotiated 'open skies' agreements with 130 trading partners, which agreements allow unrestricted route authority access between the U.S. and the foreign markets. While the U.S. has worked to increase the number of countries with which open skies agreements are in effect, a number of markets important to us, including China, do not have open skies agreements. For example, the open skies air services agreement between the U.S. and the EU, which took effect in March 2008, provides airlines from the U.S. and EU member states open access to each other's markets, with freedom of pricing and unlimited rights to fly from the U.S. to any airport in the EU. As a result of the agreement and a subsequent open skies agreement involving the U.S. and the United Kingdom, which was agreed in anticipation of Brexit, we face increased competition in these markets, including LHR. Bilateral and multilateral agreements among the U.S. and various foreign governments of countries we serve but which are not covered by an open skies treaty are subject to periodic renegotiation. We currently operate a number of international routes under government arrangements that limit the number of airlines permitted to operate on the route, the\n\n42", + "recall": 0.9782608695652174, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n- • the granting and timing of certain governmental approvals (including antitrust or foreign government approvals) needed for codesharing alliances, joint businesses and other arrangements with other airlines;\n\n- • restrictions on competitive practices (for example, court orders, or agency regulations or orders, that would curtail an airline’s ability to respond to a competitor);\n\n- • the adoption of new passenger security standards or regulations that impact customer service standards;\n\n- • restrictions on airport operations, such as restrictions on the use of slots at airports or the auction or reallocation of slot rights currently held by us;\n\n- • the adoption of more restrictive locally-imposed noise restrictions; and\n\n- • restrictions on travel or special guidelines regarding aircraft occupancy or hygiene related to COVID-19, including the imposition of preflight testing regimes which have to date and may in the future have the effect of reducing demand for air travel in the markets where such requirements are imposed.\n\nEach additional regulation or other form of regulatory oversight increases costs and adds greater complexity to airline operations and, in some cases, may reduce the demand for air travel. There can be no assurance that the increased costs or greater complexity associated with our compliance with new rules, anticipated rules or other forms of regulatory oversight will not have a material adverse effect on us.\n\nAny significant reduction in air traffic capacity at and in the airspace serving key airports in the U.S. or overseas could have a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations and financial condition. In addition, the ATC system is not successfully modernizing to meet the growing demand for U.S. air travel. Air traffic controllers rely on outdated procedures and technologies that routinely compel airlines, including ourselves, to fly inefficient routes or take significant delays on the ground. The ATC system’s inability to manage existing travel demand has led government agencies to implement short-term capacity constraints during peak travel periods or adverse weather conditions in certain markets, resulting in delays and disruptions of air traffic. The outdated technologies also cause the ATC system to be less resilient in the event of a failure. For example, an automation failure and an evacuation, in 2015 and 2017, respectively, at the Washington Air Route Control Center resulted in cancellations and delays of hundreds of flights traversing the greater Washington, D.C. airspace.\n\nIn the early 2000s, the FAA embarked on a path to modernize the national airspace system, including migration from the current radar-based ATC system to a GPS-based system. This modernization of the ATC system, generally referred to as “NextGen,” has been plagued by delays and cost overruns, and it remains uncertain when the full array of benefits expected from this modernization will be available to the public and the airlines, including ourselves. Failure to update the ATC system and the substantial costs that may be imposed on airlines, including ourselves, to fund a modernized ATC system may have a material adverse effect on our business.\n\nFurther, our business has been adversely impacted when government agencies have ceased to operate as expected including due to partial shut- downs, sequestrations or similar events and the COVID-19 pandemic. These events have resulted in, among other things, reduced demand for air travel, an actual or perceived reduction in ATC and security screening resources and related travel delays, as well as disruption in the ability of the FAA to grant required regulatory approvals, such as those that are involved when a new aircraft is first placed into service.\n\nOur operating authority in international markets is subject to aviation agreements between the U.S. and the respective countries or governmental authorities, such as the EU, and in some cases, fares and schedules require the approval of the DOT and/or the relevant foreign governments. Moreover, alliances with international carriers may be subject to the jurisdiction and regulations of various foreign agencies. The U.S. government has negotiated “open skies” agreements with 130 trading partners, which agreements allow unrestricted route authority access between the U.S. and the foreign markets. While the U.S. has worked to increase the number of countries with which open skies agreements are in effect, a number of markets important to us, including China, do not have open skies agreements. For example, the open skies air services agreement between the U.S. and the EU, which took effect in March 2008, provides airlines from the U.S. and EU member states open access to each other’s markets, with freedom of pricing and unlimited rights to fly from the U.S. to any airport in the EU. As a result of the agreement and a subsequent open skies agreement involving the U.S. and the United Kingdom, which was agreed in anticipation of Brexit, we face increased competition in these markets, including LHR. Bilateral and multilateral agreements among the U.S. and various foreign governments of countries we serve but which are not covered by an open skies treaty are subject to periodic renegotiation. We currently operate a number of international routes under government arrangements that limit the number of airlines permitted to operate on the route, the\n\n42" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9892386694357593, + "doc_id": "269faa10822dd97807eeea186463b263fce028b09aabeaa9467344470b8bd501", + "edit_distance": 0.006369426751592357, + "f1_score": 0.99644128113879, + "meteor": 0.9936250391147069, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "For the years ended December 31, 2020, 2019 and 2018 we have asserted indefinite reinvestment on certain earnings of our foreign subsidiaries. As of December 31, 2020, we have not recorded approximately $19.1 million of deferred tax liabilities associated with remaining unremitted earnings considered indefinitely reinvested, primarily related to foreign withholding taxes that would be due upon repatriation of the designated earnings to the U.S.\n\nDeferred income taxes reflect the net tax effects of temporary differences between the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities for financial reporting purposes and the amounts used for income tax purposes. Significant components of the consolidated deferred tax assets and liabilities were:\n\nWe have $481.7 million of U.S. and foreign net operating loss carryforwards at December 31, 2020. Of this total, $33.1 million are state net operating losses. Net operating losses generated in the U.S., if unused, will expire in 2024 through 2026 tax years. The majority of our foreign net operating losses carry forward without expiration. Additionally, we have $35.9 million of foreign tax credit carryforwards at December 31, 2020. The foreign tax credit carryforwards, if unused, will expire in 2026, 2028-2030 tax years.\n\nOur valuation allowances primarily relate to the deferred tax assets established for U.S. foreign tax credit carryforwards of $35.9 million, a foreign capital loss carryforward of $97.8 million, and other foreign deferred tax assets of $154.1 million. The foreign capital loss carryforward was the result of a reorganization of certain foreign subsidiaries in the current year. Due to its capital nature, it is uncertain if the loss will be utilized within its ten year carryforward period and, therefore, has a full valuation allowance.\n\n107", + "recall": 0.9929078014184397, + "true_md": "For the years ended December 31, 2020, 2019 and 2018 we have asserted indefinite reinvestment on certain earnings of our foreign subsidiaries. As of December 31, 2020, we have not recorded approximately $19.1 million of deferred tax liabilities associated with remaining unremitted earnings considered indefinitely reinvested, primarily related to foreign withholding taxes that would be due upon repatriation of the designated earnings to the U.S.\n\nDeferred income taxes reflect the net tax effects of temporary differences between the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities for financial reporting purposes and the amounts used for income tax purposes. Significant components of the consolidated deferred tax assets and liabilities were:\n\nWe have $481.7 million of U.S. and foreign net operating loss carryforwards at December 31, 2020. Of this total, $33.1 million are state net operating losses. Net operating losses generated in the U.S., if unused, will expire in 2024 through 2026 tax years. The majority of our foreign net operating losses carry forward without expiration. Additionally, we have $35.9 million of foreign tax credit carryforwards at December 31, 2020. The foreign tax credit carryforwards, if unused, will expire in 2026, 2028-2030 tax years.\n\nOur valuation allowances primarily relate to the deferred tax assets established for U.S. foreign tax credit carryforwards of $35.9 million, a foreign capital loss carryforward of $97.8 million, and other foreign deferred tax assets of $154.1 million. The for eign capital loss carryforward was the result of a reorganization of certain foreign subsidiaries in the current year. Due to its capital nature, it is uncertain if the loss will be utilized within its ten year carryforward period and, therefore, has a full valuation allowance.\n\n107" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7313080070996577, + "doc_id": "9ff95dd1bad246a7cb136e0a2af1a2dbab3af15cccce1df46e391f3a16ae61e8", + "edit_distance": 0.310838445807771, + "f1_score": 0.983739837398374, + "meteor": 0.885225390563257, + "precision": 0.9918032786885246, + "pred_md": "## Specialty Products\n\n- · Ag Chem\n- · Submersible Pumps\n- · Barge Pumps\n- · Solids Handling Submersible\n- · Cryogenic Pumps\n- · Wireless Transmitters\n- · Concrete Volute Pumps\n- · Power Recovery - DWEER\n- · Ebullator Recycle Pumps\n- · Power Recovery - Hydro Turbine\n- · Geothermal Deepwell Pumps\n- · Energy Recovery Devices\n- · Molten Salt Pumps\n- · Hydraulic Decoking Systems\n- · Nuclear Pumps\n- · API Slurry Pumps\n- · Nuclear Seals\n\n## FPD Brand Names\n\n- · BW Seals\n- · Meregalli\n- · Byron Jackson\n- · Niigata Worthington\n- · Calder Energy Recovery Devices\n- · QRC™\n- · Durametallic\n- · Pacific\n- · Durco\n- · Pacific Weitz\n- · Five Star Seal\n- · Pac-Seal\n- · Flowserve\n- · ReadySeal\n- · GASPAC™\n- · Scienco\n- · Halberg\n- · SIHI\n- · IDP\n- · TKL\n- · Innomag\n- · United Centrifugal\n- · Interseal\n- · Western Land Roller\n- · Lawrence\n- · Worthington\n- · LifeCycle Advantage\n- · Worthington-Simpson\n- · Labour\n\n## FPD Services\n\nWe market our pump products through our worldwide sales force, regional service and repair centers, independent distributors and sales representatives. We also provide engineered aftermarket services through our global network of 137 QRCs, some of which are co-located in manufacturing facilities, in 48 countries. Our FPD service personnel provide a comprehensive set of equipment services for flow management control systems, including installation, commissioning services, seal systems spare parts, repairs, advanced diagnostics, re-rate and upgrade solutions and retrofit programs, machining and comprehensive asset management solutions. We provide asset management services and condition monitoring for rotating equipment through special contracts with many of our customers that reduce maintenance costs. A large portion of FPD's service work is performed on a quick response basis, and we offer 24-hour service in all of our major markets.\n\n## FPD New Product Development\n\nOur investments in new product R&D continue to focus on increasing the capability of our products as customer applications become more advanced, demanding greater levels of production (i.e., flow and power) and under more extreme conditions (i.e., erosive, corrosive and temperature) beyond the level of traditional technology. We will invest in our product platform to expand and enhance our products offered to the global chemical industry. We continue to develop innovations that improve our competitive position in the engineered equipment industry, specifically upstream, offshore and downstream applications for the oil and gas market. Continued engagement with our end users is exemplified through the completion of advancements that significantly improve energy efficiency, reduce total cost-of-ownership and enhance safety.\n\n8", + "recall": 0.9758064516129032, + "true_md": "## Specialty Products\n\n- • Ag Chem\n\n- • Barge Pumps\n\n- • Cryogenic Pumps\n\n- • Concrete Volute Pumps\n\n- • Ebullator Recycle Pumps\n\n- • Geothermal Deepwell Pumps\n\n- • Molten Salt Pumps\n\n- • Nuclear Pumps\n\n- • Nuclear Seals\n\n- • Submersible Pumps\n\n- • Solids Handling Submersible\n\n- • Wireless Transmitters\n\n- • Power Recovery — DWEER\n\n- • Power Recovery — Hydro Turbine\n\n- • Energy Recovery Devices\n\n- • Hydraulic Decoking Systems\n\n- • API Slurry Pumps\n\n- • BW Seals\n\n- • Byron Jackson\n\n- • Calder Energy Recovery Devices\n\n- • Durametallic\n\n- • Durco\n\n- • Five Star Seal\n\n- • Flowserve\n\n- • GASPAC™\n\n- • Halberg\n\n- • IDP\n\n- • Innomag\n\n- • Interseal\n\n- • Lawrence\n\n- • LifeCycle Advantage\n\n- • Labour\n\n- • Meregalli\n\n- • Niigata Worthington\n\n- • QRC™\n\n- • Pacific\n\n- • Pacific Weitz\n\n- • Pac-Seal\n\n- • ReadySeal\n\n- • Scienco\n\n- • SIHI\n\n- • TKL\n\n- • United Centrifugal\n\n- • Western Land Roller\n\n- • Worthington\n\n- • Worthington-Simpson\n\n## FPD Brand Names\n\n## FPD Services\n\n## FPD New Product Development\n\nWe market our pump products through our worldwide sales force, regional service and repair centers, independent distributors and sales representatives. We also provide engineered aftermarket services through our global network of 137 QRCs, some of which are co-located in manufacturing facilities, in 48 countries. Our FPD service personnel provide a comprehensive set of equipment services for flow management control systems, including installation, commissioning se rvices, seal systems spare parts, repairs, advanced diagnostics, re-rate and upgrade solutions and retrofit programs, machining and comprehensive asset management solutions. We provide asset management services and condition monitoring for rotating equipment through special contracts with many of our customers that reduce maintenance costs. A large portion of FPD’s service work is performed on a quick response basis, and we offer 24-hour service in all of our major markets.\n\nOur investments in new product R&D continue to focus on increasing the capability of our products as customer applications become more advanced, demanding greater levels of production (i.e., flow and power) and under more extreme conditions (i.e., erosive, corrosive and temperature) beyond the level of traditional technology. We will invest in our product platform to expand and enhance our products offered to the global chemical industry. We continue to develop innovations that improve our competitive position in the engineered equipment industry, specifically upstream, offshore and downstream applications for the oil and gas market. Continued engagement with our end users is exemplified through the completion of advancements that significantly improve energy efficiency, reduce total cost-of-ownership and enhance safety.\n\n8" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9568945470519832, + "doc_id": "3bc18f2bac16bf8ff1d9c1df239d630ec5d80383dca51bdd2c18aa49a062afc3", + "edit_distance": 0.05432098765432099, + "f1_score": 0.9934210526315791, + "meteor": 0.979896527322037, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "CP\t2020\tANNUAL\tREPORT\n\n## ITEM 7A. QUANTITATIVE AND QUALITATIVE DISCLOSURES ABOUT MARKET RISK\n\n## Foreign Exchange Risk\n\nAlthough CP conducts business primarily in Canada, a significant portion of its revenues, expenses, assets and liabilities including debt are denominated in U.S. dollars. The value of the Canadian dollar is affected by a number of domestic and international factors, including, without limitation, economic performance, and Canadian, U.S. and international monetary policies. Consequently, the Company's results are affected by fluctuations in the exchange rate between these currencies. In 2021, CP expects that every $0.01 weakening (or strengthening) of the Canadian dollar relative to the U.S. dollar, positively (or negatively) impacts Total revenues by approximately $27 million (2019 - approximately $30 million), negatively (or positively) impacts Operating expenses by approximately $14 million (2019 - approximately $15 million), and negatively (or positively) impacts Net interest expense by approximately $3 million (2019 - approximately $3 million) on an annualized basis.\n\nCP uses U.S. dollar-denominated debt to hedge its net investment in U.S. operations. As at December 31, 2020, the net investment in U.S. operations is less than the total U.S. denominated debt. Consequently, FX translation on the Company's undesignated debt and lease liabilities causes additional impacts on earnings in Other income.\n\nTo manage its exposure to fluctuations in exchange rates between Canadian and U.S. dollars, CP may sell or purchase U.S. dollar forwards at fixed rates in future periods. In addition, changes in the exchange rate between the Canadian dollar and other currencies (including the U.S. dollar) make the goods transported by the Company more or less competitive in the world marketplace and may in turn positively or negatively affect revenues.\n\n## Share Price Impact on Stock-Based Compensation\n\nBased on information available at December 31, 2020 and expectations for 2021 grants, for every $1.00 change in share price, stock-based compensation expense has a corresponding change of approximately $0.4 million to $0.6 million (2019 - approximately $0.4 million to $0.6 million). This excludes the impact of changes in share price relative to the S&P/TSX 60 Index, the S&P/TSX Capped Industrial Index, the S&P 1500 Road and Rail Index, and to Class I railways, which may trigger different performance share unit payouts. Stock-based compensation may also be impacted by non-market performance conditions.\n\nAdditional information concerning stock-based compensation is included in Item 8. Financial Statements and Supplementary Data, Note 23 Stock-based compensation.\n\n## Interest Rate Risk\n\nDebt financing forms part of the Company's capital structure. The debt agreements entered into expose CP to increased interest costs on future fixed debt instruments and existing variable rate debt instruments, should market rates increase. In addition, the present value of the Company's assets and liabilities will also vary with interest rate changes. To manage interest rate exposure, CP may enter into forward rate agreements such as treasury rate locks or bond forwards that lock in rates for a future date, thereby protecting against interest rate increases. CP may also enter into swap agreements whereby one party agrees to pay a fixed rate of interest while the other party pays a floating rate. Contingent on the direction of interest rates, the Company may incur higher costs depending on the contracted rate.\n\nAs at December 31, 2020, CP did not have any floating rate debt obligations outstanding, and therefore fluctuations in interest rates would not have an impact on the Company's financial condition, results of operations, or liquidity.\n\nThe fair value of the Company's fixed rate debt may fluctuate with changes in market interest rates. A hypothetical one percent decrease in interest rates as of December 31, 2020 would result in an increase of approximately $1.5 billion to the fair value of our debt as at December 31, 2020 (December 31, 2019 approximately $1.2 billion). Fair values of CP's fixed rate debt are estimated by considering the impact of the hypothetical interest rates on quoted market prices and current borrowing rates, but do not consider other factors that could impact actual results.\n\nInformation concerning market risks is supplemented in Item 8. Financial Statements and Supplementary Data, Note 17 Financial instruments.", + "recall": 0.9869281045751634, + "true_md": "CP 2020 ANNUAL REPORT 76\n\n## ITEM 7A. QUANTITATIVE AND QUALITATIVE DISCLOSURES ABOUT MARKET RISK\n\n## Foreign Exchange Risk\n\n## Share Price Impact on Stock-Based Compensation\n\n## Interest Rate Risk\n\nAlthough CP conducts business primarily in Canada, a significant portion of its revenues, expenses, assets and liabilities including debt are denominated in U.S. dollars. The value of the Canadian dollar is affected by a number of domestic and international factors, including, without limitation, economic performance, and Canadian, U.S. and international monetary policies. Consequently, the Company’s results are affected by fluctuations in the exchange rate between these currencies. In 2021, CP expects that every $0.01 weakening (or strengthening) of the Canadian dollar relative to the U.S. dollar, positively (or negatively) impacts Total revenues by approximately $27 million (2019 – approximately $30 million), negatively (or positively) impacts Operating expenses by approximately $14 million (2019 – approximately $15 million), and negatively (or positively) impacts Net interest expense by approximately $3 million (2019 – approximately $3 million) on an annualized basis.\n\nCP uses U.S. dollar-denominated debt to hedge its net investment in U.S. operations. As at December 31, 2020, the net investment in U.S. operations is less than the total U.S. denominated debt. Consequently, FX translation on the Company’s undesignated debt and lease liabilities causes additional impacts on earnings in Other income.\n\nTo manage its exposure to fluctuations in exchange rates between Canadian and U.S. dollars, CP may sell or purchase U.S. dollar forwards at fixed rates in future periods. In addition, changes in the exchange rate between the Canadian dollar and other currencies (including the U.S. dollar) make the goods transported by the Company more or less competitive in the world marketplace and may in turn positively or negatively affect revenues.\n\nBased on information available at December 31, 2020 and expectations for 2021 grants, for every $1.00 change in share price, stock-based compensation expense has a corresponding change of approximately $0.4 million to $0.6 million (2019 – approximately $0.4 million to $0.6 million). This excludes the impact of changes in share price relative to the S&P/TSX 60 Index, the S&P/TSX Capped Industrial Index, the S&P 1500 Road and Rail Index, and to Class I railways, which may trigger different performance share unit payouts. Stock-based compensation may also be impacted by non-market performance conditions.\n\nAdditional information concerning stock-based compensation is included in Item 8. Financial Statements and Supplementary Data, Note 23 Stock-based compensation.\n\nDebt financing forms part of the Company's capital structure. The debt agreements entered into expose CP to increased interest costs on future fixed debt instruments and existing variable rate debt instruments, should market rates increase. In addition, the present value of the Company’s assets and liabilities will also vary with interest rate changes. To manage interest rate exposure, CP may enter into forward rate agreements such as treasury rate locks or bond forwards that lock in rates for a future date, thereby protecting against interest rate increases. CP may also enter into swap agreements whereby one party agrees to pay a fixed rate of interest while the other party pays a floating rate. Contingent on the direction of interest rates, the Company may incur higher costs depending on the contracted rate.\n\nAs at December 31, 2020, CP did not have any floating rate debt obligations outstanding, and therefore fluctuations in interest rates would not have an impact on the Company’s financial condition, results of operations, or liquidity.\n\nThe fair value of the Company’s fixed rate debt may fluctuate with changes in market interest rates. A hypothetical one percent decrease in interest rates as of December 31, 2020 would result in an increase of approximately $1.5 billion to the fair value of our debt as at December 31, 2020 (December 31, 2019 - approximately $1.2 billion). Fair values of CP’s fixed rate debt are estimated by considering the impact of the hypothetical interest rates on quoted market prices and current borrowing rates, but do not consider other factors that could impact actual results.\n\nInformation concerning market risks is supplemented in Item 8. Financial Statements and Supplementary Data, Note 17 Financial instruments." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9947173487426748, + "doc_id": "a35b8be830cbeba122b73d9a55e29798a95b4adab0e57533849a7a499d8fc1ff", + "edit_distance": 0.002107481559536354, + "f1_score": 0.9972527472527474, + "meteor": 0.9978925025781111, + "precision": 0.9972527472527473, + "pred_md": "similar components within the operating segments and resulted in three reporting units. Other factors that were considered in determining whether the aggregation of components was appropriate included the similarity of the nature of the products and services, the nature of the production processes, the methods of distribution and the types of industries served.\n\nAccounting Standards Codification (\"ASC\") 350 allows an optional qualitative assessment, prior to a quantitative assessment test, to determine whether it is more likely than not that the fair value of a reporting unit exceeds its carrying amount. We generally do not attempt a qualitative assessment and proceed directly to the quantitative test. If the carrying value of a reporting unit exceeds its fair value, the goodwill of that reporting unit is impaired and an impairment loss is recorded equal to the excess of the carrying value over its fair value. We estimate the fair value of our reporting units based on an income approach, whereby we calculate the fair value of a reporting unit based on the present value of estimated future cash flows. A discounted cash flow analysis requires us to make various judgmental assumptions about future sales, operating margins, growth rates and discount rates, which are based on our budgets, business plans, economic projections, anticipated future cash flows and market participants.\n\nWe did not record an impairment of goodwill in 2020, 2019 or 2018; however, the estimated fair value of our Pump reporting unit has reduced moderately during the year due to decreased broad-based capital spending resulting from the ongoing COVID-19 pandemic and to a lesser extent the heightened pricing pressure experienced in the oil and gas markets, both of which are anticipated to continue in the near to mid-term. The Pump reporting unit is a component of EPD reporting segment and is primarily focused on highly engineered custom and pre-configured pump products and systems. As of December 31, 2020, our Pump reporting unit had approximately $482.7 million of goodwill and an estimated fair value that exceeded its carrying value by approximately 46% as compared to approximately $468.8 million of goodwill and an estimated fair value that exceeded its carrying value by approximately 131% as of December 31, 2019. The key factors considered in determining the estimated fair value of our reporting units included the annual operating plan and forecasted operating results, successful execution of our current continuous improvement and identified strategic initiatives, a constant cost of capital, continued stabilization and mid to long-term improvement of the macro-economic conditions of the oil and gas market, and a relatively stable global gross domestic product. Although we have concluded that there is no impairment on the goodwill associated with our Pump reporting unit as of December 31, 2020, we will continue to closely monitor their performance and related market conditions for future indicators of potential impairment and reassess accordingly.\n\nWe also considered our market capitalization in our evaluation of the fair value of our goodwill. Our market capitalization decreased as compared with 2019, however this did not indicate a potential impairment of our goodwill as of December 31, 2020.\n\nImpairment losses for indefinite-lived intangible assets are recognized whenever the estimated fair value is less than the carrying value. Fair values are calculated for trademarks using a \"relief from royalty\" method, which estimates the fair value of a trademark by determining the present value of estimated royalty payments that are avoided as a result of owning the trademark. This method includes judgmental assumptions about sales growth and discount rates that have a significant impact on the fair value and are substantially consistent with the assumptions used to determine the fair value of our reporting unit discussed above. We did not record a material impairment of our trademarks in 2020, 2019 or 2018.\n\nThe recoverable value of other long-lived assets, including property, plant and equipment and finite-lived intangible assets, is reviewed when indicators of potential impairments are present. The recoverable value is based upon an assessment of the estimated future cash flows related to those assets, utilizing assumptions similar to those for goodwill. Additional considerations related to our long-lived assets include expected maintenance and improvements, changes in expected uses and ongoing operating performance and utilization.\n\nDeferred Loan Costs - Deferred loan costs, consisting of fees and other expenses associated with debt financing, are amortized over the term of the associated debt using the effective interest method. Additional amortization is recorded in periods where optional prepayments on debt are made.\n\nFair Values of Financial Instruments - Our financial instruments are presented at fair value in our consolidated balance sheets, with the exception of our long-term debt. Fair value is defined as the price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer a liability in an orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement date. Where available, fair value is based on observable market prices or parameters or derived from such prices or parameters. Where observable prices or inputs are not available, valuation models may be applied.\n\nAssets and liabilities recorded at fair value in our consolidated balance sheets are categorized based upon the level of judgment associated with the inputs used to measure their fair values. Hierarchical levels, as defined by ASC 820, \"Fair\n\n69", + "recall": 0.9972527472527473, + "true_md": "similar components within the operating segments and resulted in three reporting units. Other factors that were considered in determining whether the aggregation of components was appropriate included the similarity of the nature of the products and services, the nature of the production processes, the methods of distribution and the types of industries served.\n\nAccounting Standards Codification (\"ASC\") 350 allows an optional qualitative assessment, prior to a quantitative assessment test, to determine whether it is more likely than not that the fair value of a reporting unit exceeds its carrying amount. We generally do not attempt a qualitative assessment and proceed directly to the quantitative test. If the carrying value of a reporting unit exceeds its fair value, the goodwill of that reporting unit is impaired and an impairment loss is recorded equal to the excess of the carrying value over its fair value. We estimate the fair value of our reporting units based on an income approach, whereby we calculate the fair value of a reporting unit based on the present value of estimated future cash flows. A discounted cash flow analysis requires us to make various judgmental assumptions about future sales, operating margins, growth rates and discount rates, which are based on our budgets, business plans, economic projections, anticipated future cash flows and market participants.\n\nWe did not record an impairment of goodwill in 2020, 2019 or 2018; however, the estimated fair value of our Pump reporting unit has reduced moderately during the year due to decreased broad-based capital spending resulting from the ongoing COVID-19 pandemic and to a lesser extent the heightened pricing pressure experienced in the oil and gas markets, both of which are anticipated to continue in the near to mid-term. The Pump reporting unit is a component of EPD reporting segment and is primarily focused on highly engineered custom and pre-configured pump products and systems. As of December 31, 2020, our Pump reporting unit had approximately $482.7 million of goodwill and an estimated fair value that exceeded its carrying value by approximately 46% as compared to approximately $468.8 million of goodwill and an estimated fair value that exceeded its carrying value by approximately 131% as of December 31, 2019. The key factors considered in determining the estimated fair value of our reporting units included the annual operating plan and forecasted operating results, successful execution of our current continuous improvement and identified strategic initiatives, a constant cost of capital, continued stabilization and mid to long-term improvement of the macro-economic conditions of the oil and gas market, and a relatively stable global gross domestic product. Although we have concluded that there is no impairment on the goodwill associated with our Pump reporting unit as of December 31, 2020, we will continue to closely monitor their performance and related market conditions for future indicators of potential impairment and reassess accordingly.\n\nWe also considered our market capitalization in our evaluation of the fair value of our goodwill. Our market capitalization decreased as compared with 2019, however this did not indicate a potential impairment of our goodwill as of December 31, 2020.\n\nImpairment losses for indefinite-lived intangible assets are recognized whenever the estimated fair value is less than the carrying value. Fair values are calculated for trademarks using a \"relief from royalty\" method, which estimates the fair value of a trademark by determining the present value of estimated royalty payments that are avoided as a result of owning the trademark. This method includes judgmental assumptions about sales growth and discount rates that have a significant impact on the fair value and are substantially consistent with the assumptions used to determine the fair value of our reporting unit discussed above. We did not record a material impairment of our trademarks in 2020, 2019 or 2018.\n\nThe recoverable value of other long-lived assets, including property, plant and equipment and finite-lived intangible assets, is reviewed when indicators of potential impairments are present. The recoverable value is based upon an assessment of the estimated future cash flows related to those assets, utilizing assumptions similar to those for goodwill. Additional considerations related to our long-lived assets include expected maintenance and improvements, changes in expected uses and ongoing operating performance and utilization.\n\nDeferred Loan Costs — Deferred loan costs, consisting of fees and other expenses associated with debt financing, are amortized over the term of the associated debt using the effective interest method. Additional amortization is recorded in periods where optional prepayments on debt are made.\n\nFair Values of Financial Instruments — Our financial instruments are presented at fair value in our consolidated balance sheets, with the exception of our long-term debt. Fair value is defined as the price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer a liability in an orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement date. Where available, fair value is based on observable market prices or parameters or derived from such prices or parameters. Where observable prices or inputs are not available, valuation models may be applied.\n\nAssets and liabilities recorded at fair value in our consolidated balance sheets are categorized based upon the level of judgment associated with the inputs used to measure their fair values. Hierarchical levels, as defined by ASC 820, \"Fair\n\n69" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "db70c835a7f59f0a6045b9c9350524ee1c85ef5e1a2bfd4a8695d8d7d12b923e", + "edit_distance": 0.9938650306748467, + "f1_score": 0.03191489361702128, + "meteor": 0.0034059945504087193, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Table of Contents", + "recall": 0.016216216216216217, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n“PSP2 Maturity Date” means the tenth anniversary of the PSP2 Closing Date.\n\n“PSP2 Closing Date” means January 15, 2021.\n\n“PSP2 Agreement” means the Payroll Support Program Extension Agreement entered into by the Subsidiaries with Treasury on the PSP2 Closing Date.\n\n“PSP2” means the payroll support program established under the PSP Extension Law.\n\n“PSP1 Warrants” means the warrants issued or to be issued to Treasury pursuant to the PSP1 Warrant Agreement.\n\n“PSP1 Warrant Shares” means up to approximately 14.1 million shares of AAG common stock which Treasury will have the right to purchase pursuant to PSP1 Warrants issued by AAG in accordance with the PSP1 Warrant Agreement.\n\n“PSP1 Warrant Agreement” means the agreement entered into between AAG and Treasury in connection with the PSP1 Agreement, pursuant to which AAG issued PSP1 Warrants to Treasury to purchase up to an aggregate of approximately 14.1 million shares of AAG common stock.\n\n“PSP1 Promissory Note” means the promissory note issued to Treasury in connection with PSP1.\n\n“PSP1 Maturity Date” means the tenth anniversary of the PSP1 Closing Date.\n\n\"PSP1 Financial Assistance\" means the portion of financial assistance received from Treasury pursuant to the PSP1 Agreement that is not allocated to the PSP1 Warrants or PSP1 Promissory Note.\n\n“PSP1 Closing Date” means April 20, 2020.\n\n“PSP1 Agreement” means the Payroll Support Program Agreement entered into by the Subsidiaries with Treasury on the PSP1 Closing Date.\n\n“PSP1” means the payroll support program established under the CARES Act.\n\n“PSA” means PSA Airlines, Inc.\n\n“PRP” means potentially responsible party.\n\n“Proxy Statement” means American Airlines Group Inc.’s Proxy Statement for the 2021 Annual Meeting of Stockholders of American Airlines Group Inc.\n\n“PRASM” means passenger revenue per available seat mile and is equal to passenger revenues divided by ASMs.\n\n“Plan” means the Debtors’ fourth amended joint plan of reorganization.\n\n“Piedmont” means Piedmont Airlines, Inc.\n\n“PEB” means Presidential Emergency Board.\n\n“PCAOB” means the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board in the U.S.\n\n“Passenger load factor” means the percentage of available seats that are filled with revenue passengers.\n\n“PAFCA” means Professional Airline Flight Control Association.\n\n“OTAs” means online travel agents.\n\n“NOL Carryforwards” means a deduction in any taxable year for net operating losses carried over from prior taxable years.\n\n“NOLs” means net operating losses.\n\n“NYSE” means the New York Stock Exchange.\n\n“NYTDC” means the New York Transportation Development Corporation.\n\n“ORD” means Chicago O’Hare International Airport.\n\n25" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7747755127069358, + "doc_id": "3e226cd42c354db8b9cf06aa6be3d14386e66331f89c6b88db89809a0dbfe63f", + "edit_distance": 0.28846153846153844, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9249965748579716, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## QuickLinks\n\n## PART I\n\nItem\t1A.\tRisk\tFactors\n\nItem\t1B.\tUnresolved\tStaff\tComments\n\nItem\t2.\tProperties\n\nItem\t3.\tLegal\tProceedings\n\nItem\t4.\tMine\tSafety\tDisclosures\n\n## PART II\n\nItem 5. Market for the Registrant's Common Equity, Related Stockholder Matters and Issuer Purchases of Equity Securities\n\nItem 6. Selected Financial Data\n\n- Item 7. Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations\n\nItem 7A. Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures About Market Risk\n\nItem 8. Financial Statements and Supplementary Data\n\n- Item 9. Changes in and Disagreements with Accountants on Accounting and Financial Disclosure\n\nItem 9A. Controls and Procedures\n\nItem 9B. Other Information\n\n## PART III\n\n- Item 10. Directors, Executive Officers and Corporate Governance\n\nItem 11. Executive Compensation\n\nItem 12. Security Ownership of Certain Beneficial Owners and Management and Related Stockholder Matters\n\nItem 13. Certain Relationships and Related Transactions, and Director Independence\n\nItem 14. Principal Accounting Fees and Services\n\n## PART IV\n\nItem 15. Exhibits, Financial Statement Schedules\n\nItem 16. Form 10-K Summary\n\n## SIGNATURES\n\nREPORT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM ON FINANCIAL STATEMENT SCHEDULE\n\n## SCHEDULE II\n\nINTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION AND SUBSIDIARY COMPANIES VALUATION AND QUALIFYING ACCOUNTS AND RESERVES For the Years Ended December 31: (Dollars in Millions)", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## QuickLinks\n\n## PART I\n\n## PART II\n\n## PART III\n\n## PART IV\n\n- Item 1A. Risk Factors\n\n- Item 1B. Unresolved Staff Comments\n\n- Item 2. Properties\n\n- Item 3. Legal Proceedings\n\n- Item 4. Mine Safety Disclosures\n\n- Item 5. Market for the Registrant's Common Equity, Related Stockholder Matters and Issuer Purchases of Equity Securities\n\n- Item 6. Selected Financial Data\n\n- Item 7. Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations\n\n- Item 7A. Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures About Market Risk\n\n- Item 8. Financial Statements and Supplementary Data\n\n- Item 9. Changes in and Disagreements with Accountants on Accounting and Financial Disclosure\n\n- Item 9A. Controls and Procedures\n\n- Item 9B. Other Information\n\n- Item 10. Directors, Executive Officers and Corporate Governance\n\n- Item 11. Executive Compensation\n\n- Item 12. Security Ownership of Certain Beneficial Owners and Management and Related Stockholder Matters\n\n- Item 13. Certain Relationships and Related Transactions, and Director Independence\n\n- Item 14. Principal Accounting Fees and Services\n\n- Item 15. Exhibits, Financial Statement Schedules\n\n- Item 16. Form 10-K Summary\n\n## INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION AND SUBSIDIARY COMPANIES VALUATION AND QUALIFYING ACCOUNTS AND RESERVES For the Years Ended December 31: (Dollars in Millions)\n\n## SIGNATURES\n\n## REPORT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM ON FINANCIAL STATEMENT SCHEDULE\n\n## SCHEDULE II" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7669019280328232, + "doc_id": "4c09e06d70b7656e06ac3d199204ccecd41af7e07ec2237edc994136d8d77280", + "edit_distance": 0.2580037664783427, + "f1_score": 0.9741100323624596, + "meteor": 0.7653625528904363, + "precision": 0.9836601307189542, + "pred_md": "## Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm\n\n## To the Shareholders and the Board of Directors of Canadian Pacific Railway Limited Opinion on the Financial Statements\n\nWe have audited the accompanying consolidated balance sheets of Canadian Pacific Railway Limited and subsidiaries (the \"Company\") as of December 31, 2020 and 2019, the related consolidated statements of income, comprehensive income, cash flows, and changes in shareholders' equity, for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2020, and the related notes and the financial statement schedule listed in the Index at Item 8 (collectively referred to as the \"financial statements\"). In our opinion, the financial statements present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of the Company as of December 31, 2020 and 2019, and the results of its operations and its cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2020, in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America ('US GAAP').\n\nWe have also audited, in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States) (PCAOB), the Company's internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2020, based on criteria established in Internal Control - Integrated Framework (2013) issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission and our report dated February 18, 2021, expressed an unqualified opinion on the Company's internal control over financial reporting.\n\n## Basis for Opinion\n\nThese financial statements are the responsibility of the Company's management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on the Company's financial statements based on our audits. We are a public accounting firm registered with the PCAOB and are required to be independent with respect to the Company in accordance with the U.S. federal securities laws and the applicable rules and regulations of the Securities and Exchange Commission and the PCAOB.\n\nWe conducted our audits in accordance with the standards of the PCAOB. Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement, whether due to error or fraud. Our audits included performing procedures to assess the risks of material misstatement of the financial statements, whether due to error or fraud, and performing procedures that respond to those risks. Such procedures included examining, on a test basis, evidence regarding the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements. Our audits also included evaluating the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall presentation of the financial statements. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.\n\n## Critical Audit Matters\n\nThe critical audit matters communicated below are matters arising from the current period audit of the financial statements that were communicated or required to be communicated to the audit committee and that (1) relate to accounts or disclosures that are material to the financial statements and (2) involved our especially challenging, subjective, or complex judgments. The communication of critical audit matters does not alter in any way our opinion on the financial statements, taken as a whole, and we are not, by communicating the critical audit matters below, providing separate opinions on the critical audit matters or on the accounts or disclosures to which they relate.\n\nProperties - Direct Costs that are Capitalized to Self-constructed Assets - Refer to Notes 1, 12 and 19 to the Financial Statements\n\n## Critical Audit Matter Description\n\nThe Company recognizes direct costs as capitalized additions to self-constructed assets, within properties, based on expenditures necessary to make an asset ready for its intended use. The capitalization of self-constructed assets requires management to make significant estimates and assumptions related to the capitalization of direct cost additions to self-constructed assets based on whether the expenditures meet capitalization criteria under US GAAP.\n\nWe identified the capitalization of direct cost additions to self-constructed assets as a critical audit matter because the judgments and assumptions management makes could have a significant impact on the capitalization of direct cost additions. As such auditing the capitalization of direct cost additions involves a high degree of auditor judgment.\n\n## How the Critical Audit Matter was Addressed in the Audit\n\nOur audit procedures related to the capitalization of direct cost additions to self-constructed assets included the following, among others:\n\n- · Evaluated the effectiveness of controls over self-constructed assets, including those over the capitalization of direct cost additions to self-constructed assets.\n- · Selected a sample of direct costs and obtained evidence to support the capitalized additions to self-constructed assets and assessed whether these expenditures met the capitalization criteria under US GAAP.\n\nCP\t2020\tANNUAL\tREPORT", + "recall": 0.9647435897435898, + "true_md": "CP 2020 ANNUAL REPORT 78\n\n## Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm\n\n## To the Shareholders and the Board of Directors of Canadian Pacific Railway Limited\n\n## Opinion on the Financial Statements We have audited the accompanying consolidated balance sheets of Canadian Pacific Railway Limited and subsidiaries (the \"Company\") as of December 31, 2020\n\n## Basis for Opinion These financial statements are the responsibility of the Company's management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on the Company's financial\n\n## Critical Audit Matters The critical audit matters communicated below are matters arising from the current period audit of the financial statements that were communicated or required\n\n## Critical Audit Matter Description The Company recognizes direct costs as capitalized additions to self-constructed assets, within properties, based on expenditures necessary to make an asset\n\n## How the Critical Audit Matter was Addressed in the Audit Our audit procedures related to the capitalization of direct cost additions to self-constructed assets included the following, among others:\n\nOpinion on the Financial Statements We have audited the accompanying consolidated balance sheets of Canadian Pacific Railway Limited and subsidiaries (the \"Company\") as of December 31, 2020 and 2019, the related consolidated statements of income, comprehensive income, cash flows, and changes in shareholders’ equity, for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2020, and the related notes and the financial statement schedule listed in the Index at Item 8 (collectively referred to as the \"financial statements\"). In our opinion, the financial statements present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of the Company as of December 31, 2020 and 2019, and the results of its operations and its cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2020, in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America (“US GAAP”).\n\nWe have also audited, in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States) (PCAOB), the Company's internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2020, based on criteria established in Internal Control — Integrated Framework (2013) issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission and our report d ated February 18, 2021, exp ressed an unqualified opinion on the Company's internal control over financial reporting.\n\nBasis for Opinion These financial statements are the responsibility of the Company's management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on the Company's financial statements based on our audits. We are a public accounting firm registered with the PCAOB and are required to be independent with respect to the Company in accordance with the U.S. federal securities laws and the applicable rules and regulations of the Securities and Exchange Commission and the PCAOB.\n\nWe conducted our audits in accordance with the standards of the PCAOB. Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement, whether due to error or fraud. Our audits included performing procedures to assess the risks of material misstatement of the financial statements, whether due to error or fraud, and performing procedures that respond to those risks. Such procedures included examining, on a test basis, evidence regarding the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements. Our audits also included evaluating the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall presentation of the financial statements. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.\n\nCritical Audit Matters The critical audit matters communicated below are matters arising from the current period audit of the financial statements that were communicated or required to be communicated to the audit committee and that (1) relate to accounts or disclosures that are material to the financial statements and (2) involved our especially challenging, subjective, or complex judgments. The communication of critical audit matters does not alter in any way our opinion on the financial statements, taken as a whole, and we are not, by communicating the critical audit matters below, providing separate opinions on the critical audit matters or on the accounts or disclosures to which they relate.\n\nCritical Audit Matter Description The Company recognizes direct costs as capitalized additions to self-constructed assets, within properties, based on expenditures necessary to make an asset ready for its intended use. The capitalization of self-constructed assets requires management to make significant estimates and assumptions related to the capitalization of direct cost additions to self-constructed assets based on whether the expenditures meet capitalization criteria under US GAAP.\n\n## Properties – Direct Costs that are Capitalized to Self-constructed Assets – Refer to Notes 1, 12 and 19 to the Financial Statements\n\nWe identified the capitalization of direct cost additions to self-constructed assets as a critical audit matter because the judgments and assumptions management makes could have a significant impact on the capitalization of direct cost additions. As such auditing the capitalization of direct cost additions involves a high degree of auditor judgment.\n\nHow the Critical Audit Matter was Addressed in the Audit Our audit procedures related to the capitalization of direct cost additions to self-constructed assets included the following, among others:\n\n- • Evaluated the effectiveness of controls over self-constructed assets, including those over the capitalization of direct cost additions to self-constructed assets. • Selected a sample of direct costs and obtained evidence to support the capitalized additions to self-constructed assets and assessed whether these\n\n- • Evaluated the effectiveness of controls over self-constructed assets, including those over the capitalization of direct cost additions to self-constructed assets. • Selected a sample of direct costs and obtained evidence to support the capitalized additions to self-constructed assets and assessed whether these expenditures met the capitalization criteria under US GAAP." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9221308083743877, + "doc_id": "1851d2cf94d2e8098a2df9aedc3fa33d2ca0d0f8a8c9c31bd7e10dbcf66a41a1", + "edit_distance": 0.09055627425614489, + "f1_score": 0.9879518072289156, + "meteor": 0.9383033645751135, + "precision": 0.9930795847750865, + "pred_md": "EASTGROUP PROPERTIES, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES\n\nNOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\nDuring the third quarter of 2017, 282 shares were granted to a newly elected non-employee Director subject only to continued service as of the vesting date. The shares, which have a grant date fair value of $88.86 per share, vested 25% on each of September 8, 2018, 2019 and 2020, and will vest 25% on September 8, 2021. The shares are being expensed on a straight-line basis over the remaining service period.\n\nAs of the vesting date, the fair value of shares that vested during 2020, 2019 and 2018 was $9,000, $9,000 and $7,000, respectively. Stock-based compensation expense for directors was $897,000, $727,000 and $1,134,000 for 2020, 2019 and 2018, respectively.\n\n## (12)COMPREHENSIVE INCOME\n\nTotal Comprehensive Income is comprised of net income plus all other changes in equity from non-owner sources and is presented on the Consolidated Statements of Income and Comprehensive Income. The components of Accumulated other comprehensive income (loss) for 2020, 2019 and 2018 are presented in the Company's Consolidated Statements of Changes in Equity and are summarized below. See Note 13 for information regarding the Company's interest rate swaps.\n\n## (13)DERIVATIVE INSTRUMENTS AND HEDGING ACTIVITIES\n\nThe Company is exposed to certain risks arising from both its business operations and economic conditions. The Company principally manages its exposures to a wide variety of business and operational risks through management of its core business activities. The Company manages economic risk, including interest rate, liquidity and credit risk primarily by managing the amount, sources and duration of its debt funding and, to a limited extent, the use of derivative instruments.\n\nSpecifically, the Company has entered into derivative instruments to manage exposures that arise from business activities that result in the payment of future known and uncertain cash amounts, the value of which are determined by interest rates. The Company's derivative instruments, described below, are used to manage differences in the amount, timing and duration of the Company's known or expected cash payments principally related to certain of the Company's borrowings.\n\nThe Company's objective in using interest rate derivatives is to change variable interest rates to fixed interest rates by using interest rate swaps. Interest rate swaps designated as cash flow hedges involve the receipt of variable rate amounts from a counterparty in exchange for the Company making fixed rate payments over the life of the agreements without exchange of the underlying notional amount.\n\nAs of December 31, 2020, EastGroup had five interest rate swaps outstanding, all of which are used to hedge the variable cash flows associated with unsecured loans. All of the Company's interest rate swaps convert the related loans' LIBOR rate components to effectively fixed interest rates, and the Company has concluded that each of the hedging relationships is highly effective.\n\nThe changes in the fair value of derivatives designated and qualifying as cash flow hedges is recorded in Other comprehensive income (loss) and is subsequently reclassified into earnings through interest expense as interest payments are made in the period that the hedged forecasted transaction affects earnings.\n\nAmounts reported in Accumulated o ther comprehensive income (loss) related to derivatives will be reclassified to Interest expense as interest payments are made or received on the Company's variable rate debt. The Company estimates that an additional $4,026,000 will be reclassified from Accumulated other comprehensive income (loss) as an increase to Interest expense over the next twelve months.\n\nThe Company's valuation methodology for over-the-counter ('OTC') derivatives is to discount cash flows based on Overnight Index Swap ('OIS') rates. Uncollateralized or partially-collateralized trades are discounted at OIS rates, but include appropriate economic adjustments for funding costs (i.e., a LIBOR-OIS basis adjustment to approximate uncollateralized cost of funds) and credit risk. The Company calculates its derivative values using mid-market prices.\n\n76", + "recall": 0.9828767123287672, + "true_md": "EASTGROUP PROPERTIES, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\n## (12)COMPREHENSIVE INCOME\n\n## (13)DERIVATIVE INSTRUMENTS AND HEDGING ACTIVITIES The Company is exposed to certain risks arising from both its business operations and economic conditions. The Company principally manages its exposures to a wide variety of business and operational risks through management\n\nDuring the third quarter of 2017, 282 shares were granted to a newly elected non-employee Director subject only to continued service as of the vesting date. The shares, which have a grant date fair value of $88.86 per share, vested 25% on each of September 8, 2018, 2019 and 2020, and will vest 25% on September 8, 2021. The shares are being expensed on a straight-line basis over the remaining service period.\n\nAs of the vesting date, the fair value of shares that vested during 2020, 2019 and 2018 was $9,000, $9,000 and $7,000, respectively. Stock-based compensation expense for directors was $897,000, $727,000 and $1,134,000 for 2020, 2019 and 2018, respectively.\n\nTotal Comprehensive Income is comprised of net income plus all other changes in equity from non-owner sources and is presented on the Consolidated Statements of Income and Comprehensive Income. The components of Accumulated other comprehensive income (loss) for 2020, 2019 and 2018 are presented in the Company’s Consolidated Statements of Changes in Equity and are summarized below. See Note 13 for information regarding the Company’s interest rate swaps.\n\n(13)DERIVATIVE INSTRUMENTS AND HEDGING ACTIVITIES The Company is exposed to certain risks arising from both its business operations and economic conditions. The Company principally manages its exposures to a wide variety of business and operational risks through management of its core business activities. The Company manages economic risk, including interest rate, liquidity and credit risk primarily by managing the amount, sources and duration of its debt funding and, to a limited extent, the use of derivative instruments.\n\nSpecifically, the Company has entered into derivative instruments to manage exposures that arise from business activities that result in the payment of future known and uncertain cash amounts, the value of which are determined by interest rates. The Company's derivative instruments, described below, are used to manage differences in the amount, timing and duration of the Company's known or expected cash payments principally related to certain of the Company's borrowings.\n\nThe Company's objective in using interest rate derivatives is to change variable interest rates to fixed interest rates by using interest rate swaps. Interest rate swaps designated as cash flow hedges involve the receipt of variable rate amounts from a counterparty in exchange for the Company making fixed rate payments over the life of the agreements without exchange of the underlying notional amount. \n\nAs of December 31, 2020, EastGroup had five interest rate swaps outstanding, all of which are used to hedge the variable cash flows associated with unsecured loans. All of the Company's interest rate swaps convert the related loans' LIBOR rate components to effectively fixed interest rates, and the Company has concluded that each of the hedging relationships is highly effective.\n\nThe changes in the fair value of derivatives designated and qualifying as cash flow hedges is recorded in Other comprehensive income (loss) and is subsequently reclassified into earnings through interest expense as interest payments are made in the period that the hedged forecasted transaction affects earnings.\n\nAmounts reported in Accumulated o ther comprehensive income (loss) related to derivatives will be reclassified to Interest expense as interest payments are made or received on the Company's variable rate debt. The Company estimates that an additional $4,026,000 will be reclassified from Accumulated other comprehensive income (loss) as an increase to Interest expense over the next twelve months.\n\nThe Company's valuation methodology for over-the-counter (“OTC”) derivatives is to discount cash flows based on Overnight Index Swap (“OIS”) rates. Uncollateralized or partially-collateralized trades are discounted at OIS rates, but include appropriate economic adjustments for funding costs (i.e., a LIBOR-OIS basis adjustment to approximate uncollateralized cost of funds) and credit risk. The Company calculates its derivative values using mid-market prices.\n\n76" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.28574640517418526, + "doc_id": "dda2b47d08aae501e315e76f663d12ac61fc2d17f3c5ab0a70bff025190fccac", + "edit_distance": 0.7510094212651414, + "f1_score": 0.6587537091988132, + "meteor": 0.7814577162704762, + "precision": 0.4977578475336323, + "pred_md": "Indicate\tby\tcheck\tmark\tif\tthe\tregistrant\tis\ta\twell-known\tseasoned\tissuer,\tas\tdefined\tin\tRule\t405\tof\tthe\tSecurities\tAct.\n\nAmerican\tAirlines\tGroup\tInc.\n\nYes\n\n☒\n\nNo ☐\n\nAmerican\tAirlines,\tInc.\n\nYes\n\n☒\n\nNo ☐\n\nIndicate\tby\tcheck\tmark\tif\tthe\tregistrant\tis\tnot\trequired\tto\tfile\treports\tpursuant\tto\tSection\t13\tor\tSection\t15(d)\tof\tthe\tAct.\n\nAmerican\tAirlines\tGroup\tInc.\n\nYes ☐\n\nNo\n\n☒\n\nAmerican\tAirlines,\tInc.\n\nYes ☐\n\nNo\n\n☒\n\nIndicate\tby\tcheck\tmark\twhether\tthe\tregistrant\t(1)\thas\tfiled\tall\treports\trequired\tto\tbe\tfiled\tby\tSection\t13\tor\t15(d)\tof\tthe\tSecurities\tExchange\tAct\tof 1934\tduring\tthe\tpreceding\t12\tmonths\t(or\tfor\tsuch\tshorter\tperiod\tthat\tthe\tregistrant\twas\trequired\tto\tfile\tsuch\treports),\tand\t(2)\thas\tbeen\tsubject\tto such\tfiling\trequirements\tfor\tthe\tpast\t90\tdays.\n\nAmerican\tAirlines\tGroup\tInc.\n\nYes\n\n☒\n\nNo ☐\n\nAmerican\tAirlines,\tInc.\n\nYes ☒\n\nNo ☐\n\nIndicate\tby\tcheck\tmark\twhether\tthe\tregistrant\thas\tsubmitted\telectronically\tevery\tInteractive\tData\tFile\trequired\tto\tbe\tsubmitted\tpursuant\tto\tRule 405\tof\tRegulation\tS-T\t(§232.405\tof\tthis\tchapter)\tduring\tthe\tpreceding\t12\tmonths\t(or\tfor\tsuch\tshorter\tperiod\tthat\tthe\tregistrant\twas\trequired\tto submit\tsuch\tfiles).\n\nAmerican\tAirlines\tGroup\tInc.\n\nYes\n\n☒\n\nNo ☐\n\nAmerican\tAirlines,\tInc.\n\nYes\n\n☒\n\nNo\n\n☐\n\nIndicate\tby\tcheck\tmark\twhether\tthe\tregistrant\tis\ta\tlarge\taccelerated\tfiler,\tan\taccelerated\tfiler,\ta\tnon-accelerated\tfiler,\ta\tsmaller\treporting\tcompany, or\tan\temerging\tgrowth\tcompany.\tSee\tthe\tdefinitions\tof\t'large\taccelerated\tfiler,'\t'accelerated\tfiler,'\t'smaller\treporting\tcompany,'\tand\t'emerging growth\tcompany'\tin\tRule\t12b-2\tof\tthe\tExchange\tAct.\n\nAmerican\tAirlines\tGroup\tInc.\n\n☒ Large\taccelerated\tfiler\n\n☐ Accelerated\tfiler\n\n☐ Non-accelerated\tfiler\n\n☐ Smaller\treporting\tcompany\n\n☐ Emerging\tgrowth\tcompany\n\nAmerican\tAirlines,\tInc.\n\n☐ Large\taccelerated\tfiler\n\n☐ Accelerated\tfiler\n\n☒ Non-accelerated\tfiler\n\n☐ Smaller\treporting\tcompany\n\n☐ Emerging\tgrowth\tcompany\n\nIf\tan\temerging\tgrowth\tcompany,\tindicate\tby\tcheck\tmark\tif\tthe\tregistrant\thas\telected\tnot\tto\tuse\tthe\textended\ttransition\tperiod\tfor\tcomplying\twith any\tnew\tor\trevised\tfinancial\taccounting\tstandards\tprovided\tpursuant\tto\tSection\t13(a)\tof\tthe\tExchange\tAct.\n\nAmerican\tAirlines\tGroup\tInc.\n\n☐\n\nAmerican\tAirlines,\tInc.\n\n☐\n\nIndicate\tby\tcheck\tmark\twhether\tthe\tregistrant\thas\tfiled\ta\treport\ton\tand\tattestation\tto\tits\tmanagement's\tassessment\tof\tthe\teffectiveness\tof\tits internal\tcontrol\tover\tfinancial\treporting\tunder\tSection\t404(b)\tof\tthe\tSarbanes-Oxley\tAct\t(15\tU.S.C.\t7262(b))\tby\tthe\tregistered\tpublic\taccounting\tfirm that\tprepared\tor\tissued\tits\taudit\treport.\n\nAmerican\tAirlines\tGroup\tInc.\n\nYes\n\n☒\n\nNo ☐\n\nAmerican\tAirlines,\tInc.\n\nYes\n\n☒\n\nNo\n\n☐\n\nIndicate\tby\tcheck\tmark\twhether\tthe\tregistrant\tis\ta\tshell\tcompany\t(as\tdefined\tin\tRule\t12b-2\tof\tthe\tAct).\n\nAmerican\tAirlines\tGroup\tInc.\n\nYes\n\n☐\n\nNo\n\n☒\n\nAmerican\tAirlines,\tInc.\n\nYes ☐\n\nNo\n\n☒\n\nAs\tof\tFebruary\t12,\t2021,\tthere\twere\t639,675,800\tshares\tof\tAmerican\tAirlines\tGroup\tInc.\tcommon\tstock\toutstanding.\tThe\taggregate\tmarket\tvalue\tof the\tvoting\tstock\theld\tby\tnon-affiliates\tof\tthe\tregistrant\tas\tof\tJune\t30,\t2020,\twas\tapproximately\t$6.6\tbillion.\n\nAs\tof\tFebruary\t12,\t2021,\tthere\twere\t1,000\tshares\tof\tAmerican\tAirlines,\tInc.\tcommon\tstock\toutstanding,\tall\tof\twhich\twere\theld\tby\tAmerican\tAirlines Group\tInc.\n\n## OMISSION\tOF\tCERTAIN\tINFORMATION\n\nAmerican\tAirlines\tGroup\tInc.\tand\tAmerican\tAirlines,\tInc.\tmeet\tthe\tconditions\tset\tforth\tin\tGeneral\tInstruction\tI(1)(a)\tand\t(b)\tof\tForm\t10-K\tand\thave therefore\tomitted\tthe\tinformation\totherwise\tcalled\tfor\tby\tItems\t10-13\tof\tForm\t10-K\tas\tallowed\tunder\tGeneral\tInstruction\tI(2)(c).\n\n## DOCUMENTS\tINCORPORATED\tBY\tREFERENCE\n\nPortions\tof\tthe\tproxy\tstatement\trelated\tto\tAmerican\tAirlines\tGroup\tInc.'s\t2021\tAnnual\tMeeting\tof\tStockholders,\twhich\tproxy\tstatement\twill\tbe\tfiled under\tthe\tSecurities\tExchange\tAct\tof\t1934\twithin\t120\tdays\tof\tthe\tend\tof\tAmerican\tAirlines\tGroup\tInc.'s\tfiscal\tyear\tended\tDecember\t31,\t2020,\tare incorporated\tby\treference\tinto\tPart\tIII\tof\tthis\tAnnual\tReport\ton\tForm\t10-K.", + "recall": 0.9736842105263158, + "true_md": "As of February 12, 2021, there were 639,675,800 shares of American Airlines Group Inc. common stock outstanding. The aggregate market value of the voting stock held by non-affiliates of the registrant as of June 30, 2020, was approximately $6.6 billion.\n\nAs of February 12, 2021, there were 1,000 shares of American Airlines, Inc. common stock outstanding, all of which were held by American Airlines Group Inc.\n\nAmerican Airlines Group Inc. and American Airlines, Inc. meet the conditions set forth in General Instruction I(1)(a) and (b) of Form 10-K and have therefore omitted the information otherwise called for by Items 10-13 of Form 10-K as allowed under General Instruction I(2)(c).\n\nPortions of the proxy statement related to American Airlines Group Inc.’s 2021 Annual Meeting of Stockholders, which proxy statement will be filed under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 within 120 days of the end of American Airlines Group Inc.’s fiscal year ended December 31, 2020, are incorporated by reference into Part III of this Annual Report on Form 10-K.\n\n## OMISSION OF CERTAIN INFORMATION\n\n## DOCUMENTS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.49773299092379064, + "doc_id": "1ec8ccc863f554e1d88ace1650522d371d5232d798d5d48d750e85fef9b865a3", + "edit_distance": 0.594017094017094, + "f1_score": 0.7525773195876289, + "meteor": 0.857297558805127, + "precision": 0.6033057851239669, + "pred_md": "## SIGNATURES\n\nPursuant to the requirements of Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, the registrant has duly caused this report to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned, thereunto duly authorized.\n\nPursuant\tto\tthe\trequirements\tof\tthe\tSecurities\tExchange\tAct\tof\t1934,\tthis\treport\thas\tbeen\tsigned\tbelow\tby\tthe\tfollowing\tpersons\ton\tbehalf\tof the\tregistrant\tand\tin\tthe\tcapacities\tand\ton\tthe\tdates\tindicated.\n\n30\n\nINTERNATIONAL\tBUSINESS\tMACHINES\tCORPORATION (Registrant)\n\nBy:\n\n/s/\tVIRGINIA\tM.\tROMETTY\n\nVirginia\tM.\tRometty Chairman\tof\tthe\tBoard, President\tand\tChief\tExecutive\tOfficer\n\nDate:\tFebruary\t26,\t2019\n\nSignature\n\nTitle\n\nDate\n\n/s/\tVIRGINIA\tM.\tROMETTY\n\nVirginia\tM.\tRometty\n\nChairman\tof\tthe\tBoard, President\tand\tChief\tExecutive Officer\n\nFebruary\t26,\t2019\n\n/s/\tJAMES\tJ.\tKAVANAUGH\n\nJames\tJ.\tKavanaugh\n\nSenior\tVice\tPresident\tand\tChief Financial\tOfficer,\tFinance\tand\tOperations\n\nFebruary\t26,\t2019\n\n/s/\tROBERT\tF.\tDEL\tBENE\n\nRobert\tF.\tDel\tBene\n\nVice\tPresident\tand\tController (Chief\tAccounting\tOfficer)\n\nFebruary\t26,\t2019\n\nBy:\n\n/s/\tCHRISTINA\tM.\tMONTGOMERY\n\nChristina\tM.\tMontgomery Attorney-in-fact February\t26,\t2019\n\nMichael\tL.\tEskew\n\nDirector\n\nDavid\tN.\tFarr\n\nDirector\n\nAlex\tGorsky\n\nDirector\n\nShirley\tAnn\tJackson\n\nDirector\n\nAndrew\tN.\tLiveris\n\nDirector\n\nJames\tW.\tOwens\n\nDirector\n\nMartha\tE.\tPollack\n\nDirector\n\nSidney\tTaurel\n\nDirector\n\nPeter\tR.\tVoser\n\nDirector\n\nFrederick\tH.\tWaddell\n\nDirector", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## SIGNATURES\n\nPursuant to the requirements of Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, the registrant has duly caused this report to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned, thereunto duly authorized.\n\nINTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION (Registrant)\n\nBy: /s/ VIRGINIA M. ROMETTY\n\nVirginia M. Rometty Chairman of the Board, President and Chief Executive Officer\n\nDate: February 26, 2019\n\nPursuant to the requirements of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, this report has been signed below by the following persons on behalf of the registrant and in the capacities and on the dates indicated.\n\nBy: /s/ CHRISTINA M. MONTGOMERY\n\nChristina M. Montgomery Attorney-in-fact February 26, 2019\n\n30" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9728237594352325, + "doc_id": "eff23713bd1f1c3d219a93ce89f13f3f4a3989f90e39cab753a3077ab2c3491c", + "edit_distance": 0.030534351145038167, + "f1_score": 0.9758454106280193, + "meteor": 0.9852195293175113, + "precision": 0.9805825242718447, + "pred_md": "## APPLIED MATERIALS, INC.\n\n## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS - (Continued)\n\nA summary of the components of net periodic benefit costs and the weighted average assumptions used for net periodic benefit cost calculations for each fiscal year is presented below:\n\nTable of Contents\n\nAsset return assumptions are derived based on actuarial and statistical methodologies, from analysis of long-term historical data relevant to the country in which each plan is in effect and the investments applicable to the corresponding plan. The discount rate for each plan was derived by reference to appropriate benchmark yields on high quality corporate bonds, allowing for the approximate duration of both plan obligations and the relevant benchmark yields.\n\nFuture expected benefit payments for the pension plans and the postretirement plan over the next ten fiscal years are as follows:\n\nCompany contributions to these plans for fiscal 2021 are expected to be approximately $6 million.\n\n## Executive Deferred Compensation Plans\n\nApplied sponsors two unfunded deferred compensation plans, the Executive Deferred Compensation Plan (Predecessor EDCP) and the 2016 Deferred Compensation Plan (2016 DCP) (formerly known as the 2005 Executive Deferred Compensation Plan), under which certain employees may elect to defer a portion of their following year's eligible earnings. The Predecessor EDCP was frozen as of December 31, 2004 such that no new deferrals could be made under the plan after that date and the plan would qualify for 'grandfather' relief under Section 409A of the Code. The Predecessor EDCP participant accounts continue to be maintained under the plan and credited with deemed interest. The 2016 DCP was originally implemented by Applied effective as of January 1, 2005, and amended and restated as of October 12, 2015, and is intended to comply with the requirements of Section 409A of the Code. In addition, Applied also sponsors a non-qualified deferred compensation plan as a result of the acquisition of Varian. Amounts payable for all plans, including accrued deemed interest, totaled $151 million and $123 million at October 25, 2020 and October 27, 2019, respectively, which were included in other liabilities in the Consolidated Balance Sheets.\n\n98", + "recall": 0.9711538461538461, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## APPLIED MATERIALS, INC.\n\n## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS — (Continued)\n\nA summary of the components of net periodic benefit costs and the weighted average assumptions used for net periodic benefit cost calculations for each fiscal year is presented below:\n\nAsset return assumptions are derived based on actuarial and statistical methodologies, from analysis of long-term historical data relevant to the country in which each plan is in effect and the investments applicable to the corresponding plan. The discount rate for each plan was derived by reference to appropriate benchmark yields on high quality corporate bonds, allowing for the approximate duration of both plan obligations and the relevant benchmark yields.\n\nFuture expected benefit payments for the pension plans and the postretirement plan over the next ten fiscal years are as follows:\n\nCompany contributions to these plans for fiscal 2021 are expected to be approximately $6 million.\n\n## Executive Deferred Compensation Plans\n\nApplied sponsors two unfunded deferred compensation plans, the Executive Deferred Compensation Plan (Predecessor EDCP) and the 2016 Deferred Compensation Plan (2016 DCP) (formerly known as the 2005 Executive Deferred Compensation Plan), under which certain employees may elect to defer a portion of their following year’s eligible earnings. The Predecessor EDCP was frozen as of December 31, 2004 such that no new deferrals could be made under the plan after that date and the plan would qualify for “grandfather” relief under Section 409A of the Code. The Predecessor EDCP participant accounts continue to be maintained under the plan and credited with deemed interest. The 2016 DCP was originally implemented by Applied effective as of January 1, 2005, and amended and restated as of October 12, 2015, and is intended to comply with the requirements of Section 409A of the Code. In addition, Applied also sponsors a non-qualified deferred compensation plan as a result of the acquisition of Varian. Amounts payable for all plans, including accrued deemed interest, totaled $151 million and $123 million at October 25, 2020 and October 27, 2019, respectively, which were included in other liabilities in the Consolidated Balance Sheets.\n\n98" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9701828044876326, + "doc_id": "765210fb6e06158cfc8e53d4617ffe6cc82a390ed6e17752192e35520883ae94", + "edit_distance": 0.04791929382093316, + "f1_score": 0.9955686853766619, + "meteor": 0.9874104566651509, + "precision": 0.9970414201183432, + "pred_md": "## Table of Contents\n\nor assumption made by management, it is possible that other people applying reasonable judgment to the same facts and circumstances could develop different estimates. Actual results that differ from management's estimates could have an unfavorable effect on our consolidated financial statements. Management believes the following critical accounting policies reflect the more significant judgments and estimates used in the preparation of the consolidated financial statements:\n\n## Revenue Recognition\n\nOur revenues are primarily recognized when the customer obtains control of the product sold, which is generally upon shipment or delivery, depending on the delivery terms specified in the sales agreement. Revenues associated with certain instruments and equipment for which installation is complex, and therefore significantly affects the customer's ability to use and benefit from the product, are recognized when customer acceptance of these installed products has been confirmed. For certain service arrangements, including extended warranty and software maintenance contracts, revenue is recognized ratably over the contract term. The majority of revenues relating to extended warranty contracts associated with certain instruments and equipment is generally recognized within a few years whereas deferred revenue relating to software maintenance contracts is generally recognized over a longer period.\n\nOur agreements with customers within certain organizational units including Medication Management Solutions, Diagnostic Systems and Biosciences, contain multiple performance obligations including both products and certain services noted above. Determining whether products and services are considered distinct performance obligations that should be accounted for separately may require judgment. The transaction price for these agreements is allocated to each performance obligation based upon its relative standalone selling price. Standalone selling price is the amount at which we would sell a promised good or service separately to a customer. We generally estimate standalone selling prices using its list prices and a consideration of typical discounts offered to customers. The use of alternative estimates could result in a different amount of revenue deferral.\n\nOur gross revenues are subject to a variety of deductions, which include rebates and sales discounts. These deductions represent estimates of the related obligations and judgment is required when determining the impact on gross revenues for a reporting period. Additional factors considered in the estimate of our rebate liability include the quantification of inventory that is either in stock at or in transit to our distributors, as well as the estimated lag time between the sale of product and the payment of corresponding rebates.\n\n## Impairment of Assets\n\nGoodwill assets are subject to impairment reviews at least annually, or whenever indicators of impairment arise. Intangible assets with finite lives, including developed technology, and other long-lived assets, are periodically reviewed for impairment when impairment indicators are present.\n\nWe assess goodwill for impairment at the reporting unit level, which is defined as an operating segment or one level below an operating segment, referred to as a component. Our reporting units generally represent one level below reporting segments. Potential impairment of goodwill is generally identified by comparing the fair value of a reporting unit with its carrying value. Our annual goodwill impairment test performed on July 1, 2019 did not result in any impairment charges, as the fair value of each reporting unit exceeded its carrying value.\n\nWe generally use the income approach to derive the fair value for impairment assessments. This approach calculates fair value by estimating future cash flows attributable to the assets and then discounting these cash flows to a present value using a risk-adjusted discount rate. We selected this method because we believe the income approach most appropriately measures our income producing assets. This approach requires significant management judgment with respect to future volume, revenue and expense growth rates, changes in working capital use, appropriate discount rates, terminal values and other assumptions and estimates. The estimates and assumptions used are consistent with BD's business plans. The use of alternative estimates and assumptions could increase or decrease the estimated fair value of the asset, and potentially result in different impacts to BD's results of operations. Actual results may differ from management's estimates.\n\n## Income Taxes\n\nBD maintains valuation allowances where it is more likely than not that all or a portion of a deferred tax asset will not be realized. Changes in valuation allowances are included in our tax provision in the period of change. In determining whether a valuation allowance is warranted, management evaluates factors such as prior\n\n38", + "recall": 0.9941002949852508, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\nor assumption made by management, it is possible that other people applying reasonable judgment to the same facts and circumstances could develop different estimates. Actual results that differ from management’s estimates could have an unfavorable effect on our consolidated financial statements. Management believes the following critical accounting policies reflect the more significant judgments and estimates used in the preparation of the consolidated financial statements:\n\nOur revenues are primarily recognized when the customer obtains control of the product sold, which is generally upon shipment or delivery, depending on the delivery terms specified in the sales agreement. Revenues associated with certain instruments and equipment for which installation is complex, and therefore significantly affects the customer’s ability to use and benefit from the product, are recognized when customer acceptance of these installed products has been confirmed. For certain service arrangements, including extended warranty and software maintenance contracts, revenue is recognized ratably over the contract term. The majority of revenues relating to extended warranty contracts associated with certain instruments and equipment is generally recognized within a few years whereas deferred revenue relating to software maintenance contracts is generally recognized over a longer period.\n\nOur agreements with customers within certain organizational units including Medication Management Solutions, Diagnostic Systems and Biosciences, contain multiple performance obligations including both products and certain services noted above. Determining whether products and services are considered distinct performance obligations that should be accounted for separately may require judgment. The transaction price for these agreements is allocated to each performance obligation based upon its relative standalone selling price. Standalone selling price is the amount at which we would sell a promised good or service separately to a customer. We generally estimate standalone selling prices using its list prices and a consideration of typical discounts offered to customers. The use of alternative estimates could result in a different amount of revenue deferral.\n\nOur gross revenues are subject to a variety of deductions, which include rebates and sales discounts. These deductions represent estimates of the related obligations and judgment is required when determining the impact on gross revenues for a reporting period. Additional factors considered in the estimate of our rebate liability include the quantification of inventory that is either in stock at or in transit to our distributors, as well as the estimated lag time between the sale of product and the payment of corresponding rebates.\n\nGoodwill assets are subject to impairment reviews at least annually, or whenever indicators of impairment arise. Intangible assets with finite lives, including developed technology, and other long-lived assets, are periodically reviewed for impairment when impairment indicators are present.\n\nWe assess goodwill for impairment at the reporting unit level, which is defined as an operating segment or one level below an operating segment, referred to as a component. Our reporting units generally represent one level below reporting segments. Potential impairment of goodwill is generally identified by comparing the fair value of a reporting unit with its carrying value. Our annual goodwill impairment test performed on July 1, 2019 did not result in any impairment charges, as the fair value of each reporting unit exceeded its carrying value.\n\nWe generally use the income approach to derive the fair value for impairment assessments. This approach calculates fair value by estimating future cash flows attributable to the assets and then discounting these cash flows to a present value using a risk-adjusted discount rate. We selected this method because we believe the income approach most appropriately measures our income producing assets. This approach requires significant management judgment with respect to future volume, revenue and expense growth rates, changes in working capital use, appropriate discount rates, terminal values and other assumptions and estimates. The estimates and assumptions used are consistent with BD’s business plans. The use of alternative estimates and assumptions could increase or decrease the estimated fair value of the asset, and potentially result in different impacts to BD’s results of operations. Actual results may differ from management’s estimates.\n\nBD maintains valuation allowances where it is more likely than not that all or a portion of a deferred tax asset will not be realized. Changes in valuation allowances are included in our tax provision in the period of change. In determining whether a valuation allowance is warranted, management evaluates factors such as prior\n\n38\n\n## Income Taxes\n\n## Impairment of Assets\n\n## Revenue Recognition" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7476743906106103, + "doc_id": "f0b6dd09e175fd78368bb6b1f8d06c606dc17e0750a0a291030b4831e0ff8d4c", + "edit_distance": 0.8888888888888888, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9945130315500685, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## PART I\n\nCP\t2020\tANNUAL\tREPORT 2", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "CP 2020 ANNUAL REPORT 2\n\n## PART I" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9671636052116402, + "doc_id": "fcf41bf8fd1fb9b7ebe6f884ea1e2a8ab43186dd9dd46b1fd48a7c596a9abdbb", + "edit_distance": 0.06218905472636816, + "f1_score": 0.9838472834067546, + "meteor": 0.9847193044154255, + "precision": 0.9852941176470589, + "pred_md": "## Table of Contents\n\n## Airport Access and Operations\n\nDomestically, any U.S. airline authorized by the DOT is generally free to operate scheduled passenger service between any two points within the U.S. and its territories, with the exception of certain airports that require landing and take-off rights and authorizations (slots) and other facilities, and certain airports that impose geographic limitations on operations or curtail operations based on the time of day. Operations at three major domestic airports we serve (JFK and LGA in New York City, and DCA near Washington, D.C.) and many foreign airports we serve (including LHR) are regulated by governmental entities through allocations of slots or similar regulatory mechanisms that limit the rights of carriers to conduct operations at those airports. Each slot represents the authorization to land at or take off from the particular airport during a specified time period. In addition to slot restrictions, operations at DCA and LGA are also limited based on a so-called 'perimeter rule' which generally limits the stage length of the flights that can be operated from those airports to 1,250 and 1,500 miles, respectively.\n\nOur ability to provide service can also be impaired at airports, such as Chicago O'Hare International Airport (ORD) and LAX where the airport gate and other facilities are currently inadequate to accommodate all of the service that we would like to provide, or airports such as Dallas Love Field Airport where we have no access to gates at all.\n\nExisting law also permits domestic local airport authorities to implement procedures and impose restrictions designed to abate noise, provided such procedures and restrictions do not unreasonably interfere with interstate or foreign commerce or the national transportation system. In some instances, these restrictions have caused curtailments in service or increases in operating costs.\n\n## Airline Fares, Taxes and User Fees\n\nAirlines are permitted to establish their own domestic fares without governmental regulation. The DOT maintains authority over certain international fares, rates and charges, but only applies this authority on a limited basis. In addition, international fares and rates are sometimes subject to the jurisdiction of the governments of the foreign countries which we serve.\n\nAirlines are obligated to collect a federal excise tax, commonly referred to as the 'ticket tax,' on domestic and international air transportation, and to collect other taxes and charge other fees, such as foreign taxes, security fees and passenger facility charges. Although these taxes and fees are not our operating expenses, they represent an additional cost to our customers. These taxes and fees are subject to increase from time to time. The CARES Act provided for a temporary tax holiday from collecting and remitting certain government ticket taxes for tickets purchased between March 28, 2020 and December 31, 2020.\n\n## DOT Passenger Protection Rules\n\nThe DOT regulates airline interactions with passengers through the ticketing process, at the airport and on board the aircraft. Among other things, these regulations govern how our fares are displayed online, required customer disclosures, access by disabled passengers, handling of long onboard flight delays and reporting of mishandled bags. In 2021, the DOT is expected to implement a number of new regulations that will impact us, including disability rules for accessible lavatories and wheelchair assistance, and refunds for checked bag fees in the event of certain delays in delivery.\n\n## International\n\nInternational air transportation is subject to extensive government regulation, including aviation agreements between the U.S. and other countries or governmental authorities, such as the EU and the United Kingdom. Moreover, our alliances with international carriers may be subject to the jurisdiction and regulations of various foreign agencies. The U.S. government has negotiated 'open skies' agreements with 130 trading partners, which allow unrestricted route authority access between the U.S. and the foreign markets. While the U.S. has worked to increase the number of countries with which open skies agreements are in effect, a number of markets important to us, including China, do not have open skies agreements.\n\nIn addition, foreign countries impose passenger protection rules, which are analogous to, and often meet or exceed the requirements of, the DOT passenger protection rules discussed above. In cases where these foreign requirements exceed the DOT rules, we may bear additional burdens and liabilities. Further, various foreign airport authorities impose noise and curfew restrictions at their local airports.\n\n16", + "recall": 0.9824046920821115, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## Airport Access and Operations\n\n## Airline Fares, Taxes and User Fees\n\n## DOT Passenger Protection Rules\n\n## International\n\nDomestically, any U.S. airline authorized by the DOT is generally free to operate scheduled passenger service between any two points within the U.S. and its territories, with the exception of certain airports that require landing and take-off rights and authorizations (slots) and other facilities, and certain airports that impose geographic limitations on operations or curtail operations based on the time of day. Operations at three major domestic airports we serve (JFK and LGA in New York City, and DCA near Washington, D.C.) and many foreign airports we serve (including LHR) are regulated by governmental entities through allocations of slots or similar regulatory mechanisms that limit the rights of carriers to conduct operations at those airports. Each slot represents the authorization to land at or take off from the particular airport during a specified time period. In addition to slot restrictions, operations at DCA and LGA are also limited based on a so-called “perimeter rule” which generally limits the stage length of the flights that can be operated from those airports to 1,250 and 1,500 miles, respectively.\n\nOur ability to provide service can also be impaired at airports, such as Chicago O’Hare International Airport (ORD) and LAX where the airport gate and other facilities are currently inadequate to accommodate all of the service that we would like to provide, or airports such as Dallas Love Field Airport where we have no access to gates at all.\n\nExisting law also permits domestic local airport authorities to implement procedures and impose restrictions designed to abate noise, provided such procedures and restrictions do not unreasonably interfere with interstate or foreign commerce or the national transportation system. In some instances, these restrictions have caused curtailments in service or increases in operating costs.\n\nAirlines are permitted to establish their own domestic fares without governmental regulation. The DOT maintains authority over certain international fares, rates and charges, but only applies this authority on a limited basis. In addition, international fares and rates are sometimes subject to the jurisdiction of the governments of the foreign countries which we serve.\n\nAirlines are obligated to collect a federal excise tax, commonly referred to as the “ticket tax,” on domestic and international air transportation, and to collect other taxes and charge other fees, such as foreign taxes, security fees and passenger facility charges. Although these taxes and fees are not our operating expenses, they represent an additional cost to our customers. These taxes and fees are subject to increase from time to time. The CARES Act provided for a temporary tax holiday from collecting and remitting certain government ticket taxes for tickets purchased between March 28, 2020 and December 31, 2020.\n\nThe DOT regulates airline interactions with passengers through the ticketing process, at the airport and on board the aircraft. Among other things, these regulations govern how our fares are displayed online, required customer disclosures, access by disabled passengers, handling of long onboard flight delays and reporting of mishandled bags. In 2021, the DOT is expected to implement a number of new regulations that will impact us, including disability rules for accessible lavatories and wheelchair assistance, and refunds for checked bag fees in the event of certain delays in delivery.\n\nInternational air transportation is subject to extensive government regulation, including aviation agreements between the U.S. and other countries or governmental authorities, such as the EU and the United Kingdom. Moreover, our alliances with international carriers may be subject to the jurisdiction and regulations of various foreign agencies. The U.S. government has negotiated “open skies” agreements with 130 trading partners, which allow unrestricted route authority access between the U.S. and the foreign markets. While the U.S. has worked to increase the number of countries with which open skies agreements are in effect, a number of markets important to us, including China, do not have open skies agreements.\n\nIn addition, foreign countries impose passenger protection rules, which are analogous to, and often meet or exceed the requirements of, the DOT passenger protection rules discussed above. In cases where these foreign requirements exceed the DOT rules, we may bear additional burdens and liabilities. Further, various foreign airport authorities impose noise and curfew restrictions at their local airports.\n\n16" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9514444755145702, + "doc_id": "e9fa5445d8b7ff527ce641e184ecff6999d54c529b92af80aff2df822a841ce6", + "edit_distance": 0.4076809453471196, + "f1_score": 0.9768421052631578, + "meteor": 0.8894476147610505, + "precision": 0.9830508474576272, + "pred_md": "## Table of Contents\n\n## APPLIED MATERIALS, INC.\n\n## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS - (Continued)\n\n## Note 11 Borrowing Facilities and Debt\n\n## Revolving Credit Facilities\n\nIn February 2020, Applied entered into a five-year $1.5 billion committed unsecured revolving credit agreement (Revolving Credit Agreement) with a group of banks. The Revolving Credit Agreement includes a provision under which Applied may request an increase in the amount of the facility of up to $500 million for a total commitment of no more than $2.0 billion, subject to the receipt of commitments from one or more lenders for any such increase and other customary conditions. The Revolving Credit Agreement is scheduled to expire in February 2025, unless extended as permitted under the Revolving Credit Agreement. The Revolving Credit Agreement replaced Applied's prior $1.5 billion credit agreement that was scheduled to expire in September 2021. The Revolving Credit Agreement provides for borrowings that bear interest for each advance at one of two rates selected by Applied, plus an applicable margin, which varies according to Applied's public debt credit ratings.\n\nIn March 2020, Applied borrowed the full $1.5 billion available under the Revolving Credit Agreement in order to increase its cash position and preserve financial flexibility in light of the uncertainty in the global markets resulting from the COVID-19 outbreak. In May 2020, Applied repaid the full $1.5 billion of borrowings under the Revolving Credit Agreement. Applied may at any time and from time to time, borrow, repay and reborrow under the Revolving Credit Agreement during the term of the facility. The interest rate for the March 2020 borrowing under the Revolving Credit Agreement was one-month LIBOR plus a margin of 0.875%, based on Applied's public debt credit ratings.\n\nNo amounts were outstanding under the Revolving Credit Agreement as of October 25, 2020 and October 27, 2019.\n\nIn addition, Applied has revolving credit facilities with Japanese banks pursuant to which it may borrow up to approximately $76 million in aggregate at any time. Applied's ability to borrow under these facilities is subject to bank approval at the time of the borrowing request, and any advances will be at rates indexed to the banks' prime reference rate denominated in Japanese yen. As of October 25, 2020 and October 27, 2019, no amounts were outstanding under these revolving credit facilities.\n\n## Term Loan and Short-term Commercial Paper\n\nIn August 2019, Applied entered into a term loan credit agreement with a group of lenders. Under the agreement, the lenders have committed to make an unsecured term loan to Applied of up to $2.0 billion to finance in part Applied's planned acquisition of all outstanding shares of Kokusai Electric, to pay related transaction fees and expenses and for general corporate purposes. The commitments of the lenders to make the term loan will terminate if the transactions contemplated by the Share Purchase Agreement are not consummated on or before December 30, 2020. The term loan, if advanced, will bear interest at one of two rates selected by Applied, plus an applicable margin, which varies according to Applied's public debt credit ratings, and must be repaid in full on the third anniversary of the funding date of the term loan. No amounts were outstanding under this term loan credit agreement at both October 25, 2020 and October 27, 2019.\n\nApplied has a short-term commercial paper program under which Applied may issue unsecured commercial paper notes of up to a total amount of $1.5 billion. At October 25, 2020 and October 27, 2019, Applied did not have any commercial paper outstanding.\n\n88", + "recall": 0.9707112970711297, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## APPLIED MATERIALS, INC.\n\n## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS — (Continued)\n\n## Note 11 Borrowing Facilities and Debt\n\n## Revolving Credit Facilities\n\n## Term Loan and Short-term Commercial Paper\n\nIn February 2020, Applied entered into a five-year $1.5 billion committed unsecured revolving credit agreement (Revolving Credit Agreement) with a group of banks. The Revolving Credit Agreement includes a provision under which Applied may request an increase in the amount of the facility of up to $500 million for a total commitment of no more than $2.0 billion, subject to the receipt of commitments from one or more lenders for any such increase and other customary conditions. The Revolving Credit Agreement is scheduled to expire in February 2025, unless extended as permitted under the Revolving Credit Agreement. The Revolving Credit Agreement replaced Applied’s prior $1.5 billion credit agreement that was scheduled to expire in September 2021. The Revolving Credit Agreement provides for borrowings that bear interest for each advance at one of two rates selected by Applied, plus an applicable margin, which varies according to Applied’s public debt credit ratings.\n\nNo amounts were outstanding under the Revolving Credit Agreement as of October 25, 2020 and October 27, 2019.\n\nIn addition, Applied has revolving credit facilities with Japanese banks pursuant to which it may borrow up to approximately $76 million in aggregate at any time. Applied’s ability to borrow under these facilities is subject to bank approval at the time of the borrowing request, and any advances will be at rates indexed to the banks’ prime reference rate denominated in Japanese yen. As of October 25, 2020 and October 27, 2019, no amounts were outstanding under these revolving credit facilities.\n\nIn August 2019, Applied entered into a term loan credit agreement with a group of lenders. Under the agreement, the lenders have committed to make an unsecured term loan to Applied of up to $2.0 billion to finance in part Applied’s planned acquisition of all outstanding shares of Kokusai Electric, to pay related transaction fees and expenses and for general corporate purposes. The commitments of the lenders to make the term loan will terminate if the transactions contemplated by the Share Purchase Agreement are not consummated on or before December 30, 2020. The term loan, if advanced, will bear interest at one of two rates selected by Applied, plus an applicable margin, which varies according to Applied’s public debt credit ratings, and must be repaid in full on the third anniversary of the funding date of the term loan. No amounts were outstanding under this term loan credit agreement at both October 25, 2020 and October 27, 2019.\n\nApplied has a short-term commercial paper program under which Applied may issue unsecured commercial paper notes of up to a total amount of $1.5 billion. At October 25, 2020 and October 27, 2019, Applied did not have any commercial paper outstanding.\n\n88\n\nIn March 2020, Applied borrowed the full $1.5 billion available under the Revolving Credit Agreement in order to increase its cash position and preserve financial flexibility in light of the uncertainty in the global markets resulting from the COVID-19 outbreak. In Ma y 2020, Applied repaid the full $1.5 billion of borrowings under the Revolving Credit Agreement. Ap plied may at any time and from time to time, borrow, repay and reborrow under the Revolving Credit Agreement during the term of the facility. The interest rate for the March 2020 borrowing under the Revolving Credit Agreement was one-month LIBOR plus a margin of 0.875%, based on Applied’s public debt credit ratings." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9867686856280202, + "doc_id": "5ff53a3b25cbd4ff5f253e720fcfe2a68d9ad5eea802726a4949dd41e0ae4578", + "edit_distance": 0.006309148264984227, + "f1_score": 0.9928263988522238, + "meteor": 0.9937947629669369, + "precision": 0.9942528735632183, + "pred_md": "could be experienced through 2049, which represents the expected end of our asbestos liability exposure with no further ongoing claims expected beyond that date. This estimate is based on the Company's historical claim experience and estimates of the number and resolution cost of potential future claims that may be filed based on anticipated levels of unique plaintiff asbestos-related claims in the U.S. tort system against all defendants, the diminished volatility and consistency of observable claims data, the period of time that has elapsed since we stopped manufacturing products that contained encapsulated asbestos and an expected downward trend in claims due to the average age of our claimants. This estimate is not discounted to present value. In light of the uncertainties and variables inherent in the long-term projection of the total asbestos liability, as part of our ongoing review of asbestos claims, each year we will reassess the projected liability of unasserted asbestos claims to be filed through 2049, and we will continually reassess the time horizon over which a reasonable estimate of unasserted claims can be projected.\n\nWe assess the sufficiency of the estimated liability for pending and future claims on an ongoing basis by evaluating actual experience regarding claims filed, settled and dismissed, and amounts paid in settlements. In addition to claims and settlement experience, we consider additional quantitative and qualitative factors such as changes in legislation, the legal environment and the Company's defense strategy. In connection with our ongoing review of asbestos-related claims, we have also reviewed the amount of potential insurance coverage for such claims, taking into account the remaining limits of such coverage, the number and amount of claims on our insurance from co-insured parties, ongoing litigation against the Company's insurers, potential remaining recoveries from insolvent insurers, the impact of previous insurance settlements and coverage available from solvent insurers not party to the coverage litigation. Continuously, we review ongoing insurance coverage available for a significant amount of the potential future asbestos-related claims and in the future could secure additional insurance coverage as deemed necessary.\n\nThe study from the Company's actuary, based on data as of September 30, 2020, provided for a range of possible future liability from approximately $80.1 million to $131.7 million. The Company does not believe any amount within the range of potential outcomes represents a better estimate than another given the many factors and assumptions inherent in the projections and therefore the Company has recorded the liability at the actuarial central estimate of approximately $99.5 million as of December 31, 2020. In addition, the Company has recorded estimated insurance receivables of approximately $69.5 million as of December 31, 2020. The amounts recorded for the asbestos-related liability and the related insurance receivables are based on facts known at the time and a number of assumptions. However, projecting future events, such as the number of new claims to be filed each year, the length of time it takes to defend, resolve, or otherwise dispose of such claims, coverage issues among insurers and the continuing solvency of various insurance companies, as well as the numerous uncertainties surrounding asbestos litigation in the United States, could cause the actual liability and insurance recoveries for us to be higher or lower than those projected or recorded. Additionally, we have claims pending against certain insurers that, if resolved more favorably than reflected in the recorded receivables, would result in discrete gains in the applicable year. Changes recorded in the estimated liability and estimated insurance recovery based on projections of asbestos litigation and corresponding insurance coverage, result in the recognition of additional expense or income. For a discussion pertaining to the activity related to asbestos claims refer to Note 16.\n\nWarranty Accruals - Warranty obligations are based upon product failure rates, materials usage, service delivery costs, an analysis of all identified or expected claims and an estimate of the cost to resolve such claims. The estimates of expected claims are generally a factor of historical claims and known product issues. Warranty obligations based on these factors are adjusted based on historical sales trends for the preceding 24 months.\n\nInsurance Accruals - Insurance accruals are recorded for wholly or partially self-insured risks such as medical benefits and workers' compensation and are based upon an analysis of our claim loss history, insurance deductibles, policy limits and other relevant factors that are updated annually and are included in accrued liabilities in our consolidated balance sheets. The estimates are based upon information received from actuaries, insurance company adjusters, independent claims administrators or other independent sources. Receivables from insurance carriers are estimated using our historical experience with insurance recovery rates and estimates of future recoveries, which include estimates of coverage and financial viability of our insurance carriers. Estimated receivables are included in accounts receivable, net and other assets, net, as applicable, in our consolidated balance sheets.\n\nPension and Postretirement Obligations - Determination of pension and postretirement benefits obligations is based on estimates made by management in consultation with independent actuaries and investment advisors. Inherent in these valuations are assumptions including discount rates, expected rates of return on plan assets, retirement rates, mortality rates and rates of compensation increase and other factors all of which are reviewed annually and updated if necessary.\n\n67", + "recall": 0.9914040114613181, + "true_md": "could be experienced through 2049, which represents the expected end of our asbestos liability exposure with no further ongoing claims expected beyond that date. This estimate is based on the Company's historical claim experience and estimates of the number and resolution cost of potential future claims that may be filed based on anticipated levels of unique plaintiff asbestos-related claims in the U.S. tort system against all defendants, the diminished volatility and consistency of observable claims data, the period of time that has elapsed since we stopped manufacturing products that contained encapsulated asbestos and an expected downward trend in claims due to the average age of our claimants. This estimate is not discounted to present value. In light of the uncertainties and variables inherent in the long-term projection of the total asbestos liability, as part of our ongoing review of asbestos claims, each year we will reassess the projected liability of unasserted asbestos claims to be filed through 2049, and we will continually reassess the time horizon over which a reasonable estimate of unasserted claims can be projected.\n\nWe assess the sufficiency of the estimated liability for pending and future claims on an ongoing basis by evaluating actual experience regarding claims filed, settled and dismissed, and amounts paid in settlements. In addition to claims and settlement experience, we consider additional quantitative and qualitative factors such as changes in legislation, the legal environment and the Company's defense strategy. In connection with our ongoing review of asbestos-related claims, we have also reviewed the amount of potential insurance coverage for such claims, taking into account the remaining limits of such coverage, the number and amount of claims on our insurance from co-insured parties, ongoing litigation against the Company’s insurers, potential remaining recoveries from insolvent insurers, the impact of previous insurance settlements and coverage available from solvent insurers not party to the coverage litigation. Continuously, we review ongoing insurance coverage available for a significant amount of the potential future asbestos-related claims and in the future could secure additional insurance coverage as deemed necessary.\n\nThe study from the Company's actuary, based on data as of September 30, 2020, provided for a range of possible future liability from approximately $80.1 million to $131.7 million. The Company does not believe any amount within the range of potential outcomes represents a better estimate than another given the many factors and assumptions inherent in the projections and therefore the Company has recorded the liability at the actuarial central estimate of approximately $99.5 million as of December 31, 2020. In addition, the Company has recorded estimated insurance receivables of approximately $69.5 million as of December 31, 2020. The amounts recorded for the asbestos-related liability and the related insurance receivables are based on facts known at the time and a number of assumptions. However, projecting future events, such as the number of new claims to be filed each year, the length of time it takes to defend, resolve, or otherwise dispose of such claims, coverage issues among insurers and the continuing solvency of various insurance companies, as well as the numerous uncertainties surrounding asbestos litigation in the United States, could cause the actual liability and insurance recoveries for us to be higher or lower than those projected or recorded. Additionally, we have claims pending against certain insurers that, if resolved more favorably than reflected in the recorded receivables, would result in discrete gains in the applicable year. Changes recorded in the estimated liability and estimated insurance recovery based on projections of asbestos litigation and corresponding insurance coverage, result in the recognition of additional expense or income. For a discussion pertaining to the activity related to asbestos claims refer to Note 16.\n\nWarranty Accruals — Warranty obligations are based upon product failure rates, materials usage, service delivery costs, an analysis of all identified or expected claims and an estimate of the cost to resolve such claims. The estimates of expected claims are generally a factor of historical claims and known product issues. Warranty obligations based on these factors are adjusted based on historical sales trends for the preceding 24 months .\n\nInsurance Accruals — Insurance accruals are recorded for wholly or partially self-insured risks such as medical benefits and workers’ compensation and are based upon an analysis of our claim loss history, insurance deductibles, policy limits and other relevant factors that are updated annually and are included in accrued liabilities in our consolidated balance sheets. The estimates are based upon information received from actuaries, insurance company adjusters, independent claims administrators or other independent sources. Receivables from insurance carriers are estimated using our historical experience with insurance recovery rates and estimates of future recoveries, which include estimates of coverage and financial viability of our insurance carriers. Estimated receivables are included in accounts receivable, net and other assets, net, as applicable, in our consolidated balance sheets.\n\nPension and Postretirement Obligations — Determination of pension and postretirement benefits obligations is based on estimates made by management in consultation with independent actuaries and investment advisors. Inherent in these valuations are assumptions including discount rates, expected rates of return on plan assets, retirement rates, mortality rates and rates of compensation increase and other factors all of which are reviewed annually and updated if necessary.\n\n67" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9840024405157974, + "doc_id": "b13a628ccfd29445d15014442b3e9c33b95f1f4300254a3a315589a97e540836", + "edit_distance": 0.7854984894259819, + "f1_score": 0.9960264900662252, + "meteor": 0.6984195949256358, + "precision": 0.9973474801061007, + "pred_md": "## Table of Contents\n\ndomestic and international tickets, which has reduced our change fee revenue, a trend which is expected to continue as demand for air travel recovers, assuming this change remains in place. We may introduce additional initiatives in the future; however, as time goes on, we expect that it will be more difficult to identify and implement additional initiatives. We cannot assure that these measures or any future initiatives will be successful in increasing our revenues. Additionally, the implementation of these initiatives may create logistical challenges that could harm the operational performance of our airline or result in decreased demand. Also, our implementation of any new or increased fees might reduce the demand for air travel on our airline or across the industry in general, particularly if weakened economic conditions make our customers more sensitive to increased travel costs or provide a significant competitive advantage to other carriers that determine not to institute similar charges.\n\n## Our intellectual property rights, particularly our branding rights, are valuable, and any inability to protect them may adversely affect our business and financial results.\n\nWe consider our intellectual property rights, particularly our branding rights such as our trademarks applicable to our airline and AAdvantage loyalty program, to be a significant and valuable aspect of our business. We protect our intellectual property rights through a combination of trademark, copyright and other forms of legal protection, contractual agreements and policing of third-party misuses of our intellectual property. Our failure to obtain or adequately protect our intellectual property or any change in law that lessens or removes the current legal protections of our intellectual property may diminish our competitiveness and adversely affect our business and financial results. Any litigation or disputes regarding intellectual property may be costly and time-consuming and may divert the attention of our management and key personnel from our business operations, either of which may adversely affect our business and financial results.\n\nIn addition, we have used certain of our branding and AAdvantage loyalty program intellectual property as collateral for various financings (including the Treasury Loan Agreement), which contain covenants that impose restrictions on the use of such intellectual property and, in the case of the Treasury Loan Agreement, on certain amendments or changes to our AAdvantage loyalty program. These covenants may have an adverse effect on our ability to use such intellectual property.\n\n## We may be a party to litigation in the normal course of business or otherwise, which could affect our financial position and liquidity.\n\nFrom time to time, we are a party to or otherwise involved in legal proceedings, claims and government inspections or investigations and other legal matters, both inside and outside the United States, arising in the ordinary course of our business or otherwise. We are currently involved in various legal proceedings and claims that have not yet been fully resolved, and additional claims may arise in the future. Legal proceedings can be complex and take many months, or even years, to reach resolution, with the final outcome depending on a number of variables, some of which are not within our control. Litigation is subject to significant uncertainty and may be expensive, time-consuming, and disruptive to our operations. Although we will vigorously defend ourselves in such legal proceedings, their ultimate resolution and potential financial and other impacts on us are uncertain. For these and other reasons, we may choose to settle legal proceedings and claims, regardless of their actual merit. If a legal proceeding is resolved against us, it could result in significant compensatory damages, and in certain circumstances punitive or trebled damages, disgorgement of revenue or profits, remedial corporate measures or injunctive relief imposed on us. If our existing insurance does not cover the amount or types of damages awarded, or if other resolution or actions taken as a result of the legal proceeding were to restrain our ability to operate or market our services, our consolidated financial position, results of operations or cash flows could be materially adversely affected. In addition, legal proceedings, and any adverse resolution thereof, can result in adverse publicity and damage to our reputation, which could adversely impact our business. Additional information regarding certain legal matters in which we are involved can be found in Note 12 to AAG's Consolidated Financial Statements in Part II, Item 8A and Note 10 to American's Consolidated Financial Statements in Part II, Item 8B.\n\n## Our ability to utilize our NOL Carryforwards may be limited.\n\nUnder the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended (the Code), a corporation is generally allowed a deduction for net operating losses (NOLs) carried over from prior taxable years (NOL Carryforwards). As of December 31, 2020, we had approximately $16.5 billion of federal NOLs available to reduce future federal taxable income, of which $8.5 billion will expire beginning in 2023 if unused and $8.0 billion can be carried forward indefinitely. We also had approximately $5.0 billion of NOL Carryforwards to reduce future state taxable income at December 31, 2020, which will expire in taxable years 2020 through 2040 if unused. Our NOL Carryforwards are subject to adjustment on audit by the Internal Revenue Service and the respective state taxing authorities. Additionally, due to the COVID-19 pandemic and other economic factors, the NOL Carryforwards may expire before we can generate sufficient taxable income to use them.\n\n36", + "recall": 0.9947089947089947, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## Our intellectual property rights, particularly our branding rights, are valuable, and any inability to protect them may adversely affect our business and financial results.\n\n## We may be a party to litigation in the normal course of business or otherwise, which could affect our financial position and liquidity.\n\n## Our ability to utilize our NOL Carryforwards may be limited.\n\n36\n\nUnder the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended (the Code), a corporation is generally allowed a deduction for net operating losses (NOLs) carried over from prior taxable years (NOL Carryforwards). As of December 31, 2020, we had approximately $16.5 billion of federal NOLs available to reduce future federal taxable income, of which $8.5 billion will expire beginning in 2023 if unused and $8.0 billion can be carried forward indefinitely. We also had approximately $5.0 billion of NOL Carryforwards to reduce future state taxable income at December 31, 2020, which will expire in taxable years 2020 through 2040 if unused. Our NOL Carryforwards are subject to adjustment on audit by the Internal Revenue Service and the respective state taxing authorities. Additionally, due to the COVID-19 pandemic and other economic factors, the NOL Carryforwards may expire before we can generate sufficient taxable income to use them.\n\nFrom time to time, we are a party to or otherwise involved in legal proceedings, claims and government inspections or investigations and other legal matters, both inside and outside the United States, arising in the ordinary course of our business or otherwise. We are currently involved in various legal proceedings and claims that have not yet been fully resolved, and additional claims may arise in the future. Legal proceedings can be complex and take many months, or even years, to reach resolution, with the final outcome depending on a number of variables, some of which are not within our control. Litigation is subject to significant uncertainty and may be expensive, time-consuming, and disruptive to our operations. Although we will vigorously defend ourselves in such legal proceedings, their ultimate resolution and potential financial and other impacts on us are uncertain. For these and other reasons, we may choose to settle legal proceedings and claims, regardless of their actual merit. If a legal proceeding is resolved against us, it could result in significant compensatory damages, and in certain circumstances punitive or trebled damages, disgorgement of revenue or profits, remedial corporate measures or injunctive relief imposed on us. If our existing insurance does not cover the amount or types of damages awarded, or if other resolution or actions taken as a result of the legal proceeding were to restrain our ability to operate or market our services, our consolidated financial position, results of operations or cash flows could be materially adversely affected. In addition, legal proceedings, and any adverse resolution thereof, can result in adverse publicity and damage to our reputation, which could adversely impact our business. Additional information regarding certain legal matters in which we are involved can be found in Note 12 to AAG’s Consolidated Financial Statements in Part II, Item 8A and Note 10 to American’s Consolidated Financial Statements in Part II, Item 8B.\n\nIn addition, we have used certain of our branding and AAdvantage loyalty program intellectual property as collateral for various financings (including the Treasury Loan Agreement), which contain covenants that impose restrictions on the use of such intellectual property and, in the case of the Treasury Loan Agreement, on certain amendments or changes to our AAdvantage loyalty program. These covenants may have an adverse effect on our ability to use such intellectual property.\n\nWe consider our intellectual property rights, particularly our branding rights such as our trademarks applicable to our airline and AAdvantage loyalty program, to be a significant and valuable aspect of our business. We protect our intellectual property rights through a combination of trademark, copyright and other forms of legal protection, contractual agreements and policing of third-party misuses of our intellectual property. Our failure to obtain or adequately protect our intellectual property or any change in law that lessens or removes the current legal protections of our intellectual property may diminish our competitiveness and adversely affect our business and financial results. Any litigation or disputes regarding intellectual property may be costly and time-consuming and may divert the attention of our management and key personnel from our business operations, either of which may adversely affect our business and financial results.\n\ndomestic and international tickets, which has reduced our change fee revenue, a trend which is expected to continue as demand for air travel recovers, assuming this change remains in place. We may introduce additional initiatives in the future; however, as time goes on, we expect that it will be more difficult to identify and implement additional initiatives. We cannot assure that these measures or any future initiatives will be successful in increasing our revenues. Additionally, the implementation of these initiatives may create logistical challenges that could harm the operational performance of our airline or result in decreased demand. Also, our implementation of any new or increased fees might reduce the demand for air travel on our airline or across the industry in general, particularly if weakened economic conditions make our customers more sensitive to increased travel costs or provide a significant competitive advantage to other carriers that determine not to institute similar charges." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7073916880220986, + "doc_id": "beeab7f3d8f28fe5e8ba671995fa414d3fc2c7e496a40c77b56f22476a041ae7", + "edit_distance": 0.3471933471933472, + "f1_score": 0.9157303370786518, + "meteor": 0.7854143778483073, + "precision": 0.8489583333333334, + "pred_md": "## UNITED STATES\n\n## SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION\n\nWashington, D.C. 20549\n\nFORM 10-K\n\n(Mark\tone)\n\n☒\n\nANNUAL\tREPORT\tPURSUANT\tTO\tSECTION\t13\tOR\t15(d)\tOF\tTHE\tSECURITIES\tAND\tEXCHANGE\tACT\tOF 1934\n\nFor\tfiscal\tyear\tended\tDecember\t31,\t2020\n\nOR\n\n☐ TRANSITION\tREPORT\tPURSUANT\tTO\tSECTION\t13\tOR\t15(d)\tOF\tTHE\tSECURITIES\tEXCHANGE\tACT\tOF 1934\n\nFor\tthe\ttransition\tperiod\tfrom\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\tto Commission\tFile\tNumber\t001-01342\n\n## Canadian\tPacific\tRailway\tLimited\n\n(Exact\tname\tof\tregistrant\tas\tspecified\tin\tits\tcharter)\n\nCanada\n\n98-0355078\n\n(State\tor\tOther\tJurisdiction of\tIncorporation\tor\tOrganization)\n\n(IRS\tEmployer Identification\tNo.)\n\n7550\tOgden\tDale\tRoad\tS.E. Calgary AB\n\nT2C\t4X9\n\n(Address\tof\tPrincipal\tExecutive\tOffices)\n\n(Zip\tCode)\n\nRegistrant's\tTelephone\tNumber,\tIncluding\tArea\tCode:\t(403)\t319-7000 Securities\tregistered\tpursuant\tto\tSection\t12(b)\tof\tthe\tAct:\n\nTitle\tof\tEach\tClass\n\nTrading\tSymbol(s)\n\nName\tof\tEach\tExchange\ton\twhich\n\nRegistered\n\nCommon\tShares,\twithout\tpar\tvalue,\tof Canadian\tPacific\tRailway\tLimited\n\nCP\n\nNew\tYork\tStock\tExchange\n\nToronto\tStock\tExchange\n\nPerpetual\t4%\tConsolidated\tDebenture\tStock\tof\tCanadian Pacific\tRailway\tCompany\n\nCP/40\n\nNew\tYork\tStock\tExchange\n\nBC87\n\nLondon\tStock\tExchange\n\nSecurities\tregistered\tpursuant\tto\tSection\t12(g)\tof\tthe\tAct:\tNone\n\nIndicate\tby\tcheck\tmark\tif\tthe\tregistrant\tis\ta\twell-known\tseasoned\tissuer,\tas\tdefined\tin\tRule\t405\tof\tthe\tSecurities\tAct. Yes\t\tþ\t\t\tNo\to\n\nIndicate\tby\tcheck\tmark\tif\tthe\tregistrant\tis\tnot\trequired\tto\tfile\treports\tpursuant\tto\tSection\t13\tor\tSection\t15(d)\tof\tthe\tExchange\tAct.\n\nYes\t\to\tNo\tþ\n\nIndicate\tby\tcheck\tmark\twhether\tthe\tregistrant\t(1)\thas\tfiled\tall\treports\trequired\tto\tbe\tfiled\tby\tSection\t13\tor\t15(d)\tof\tthe\tSecurities\tExchange\tAct\tof\t1934\tduring\tthe preceding\t12\tmonths\t(or\tfor\tsuch\tshorter\tperiod\tthat\tthe\tregistrant\twas\trequired\tto\tfile\tsuch\treports),\tand\t(2)\thas\tbeen\tsubject\tto\tsuch\tfiling\trequirements\tfor\tthe past\t90\tdays.\tYes\t\tþ\t\t\t\tNo\t\to\n\nIndicate\t by\t check\t mark\t whether\t the\t registrant\t has\t submitted\t electronically\t every\t Interactive\t Data\t File\t required\t to\t be\t submitted\t pursuant\t to\t Rule\t 405\t of Regulation\tS-T\t(§232.405\tof\tthis\tchapter)\tduring\tthe\tpreceding\t12\tmonths\t(or\tfor\tsuch\tshorter\tperiod\tthat\tthe\tregistrant\twas\trequired\tto\tsubmit\tsuch\tfiles). Yes\t\tþ\t\t\t\tNo\t\to", + "recall": 0.9939024390243902, + "true_md": "# UNITED STATES SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION Washington, D.C. 20549\n\n# Washington, D.C. 20549 FORM 10-K\n\n# For fiscal year ended December 31, 2020 OR\n\n# Commission File Number 001-01342 Canadian Pacific Railway Limited (Exact name of registrant as specified in its charter)\n\nSECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION Washington, D.C. 20549 FORM 10-K\n\n(Mark one)\n\n☒\n\n☐\n\nANNUAL REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934\n\nFor fiscal year ended December 31, 2020 OR\n\nTRANSITION REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934\n\nFor the transition period from to Commission File Number 001-01342\n\nFor the transition period from to Commission File Number 001-01342 Canadian Pacific Railway Limited\n\nCanadian Pacific Railway Limited (Exact name of registrant as specified in its charter)\n\n98-0355078\n\n(IRS Employer Identification No.)\n\nCanada\n\n(State or Other Jurisdiction of Incorporation or Organization)\n\n7550 Ogden Dale Road S.E. Calgary AB\n\n(Address of Principal Executive Offices)\n\nT2C 4X9\n\n(Zip Code)\n\nRegistrant’s Telephone Number, Including Area Code: (403) 319-7000 Securities registered pursuant to Section 12(b) of the Act:\n\nRegistrant’s Telephone Number, Including Area Code: (403) 319-7000 Securities registered pursuant to Section 12(b) of the Act:\n\nSecurities registered pursuant to Section 12(g) of the Act: None\n\nIndicate by check mark if the registrant is a well-known seasoned issuer, as defined in Rule 405 of the Securities Act. Yes þ No o Indicate by check mark if the registrant is not required to file reports pursuant to Section 13 or Section 15(d) of the Exchange Act.\n\nYes þ No o Indicate by check mark if the registrant is not required to file reports pursuant to Section 13 or Section 15(d) of the Exchange Act. Yes o No þ\n\nIndicate by check mark whether the registrant (1) has filed all reports required to be filed by Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to file such reports), and (2) has been subject to such filing requirements for the past 90 days. Yes þ No o\n\nIndicate by check mark whether the registrant has submitted electronically every Interactive Data File required to be submitted pursuant to Rule 405 of Regulation S-T (§232.405 of this chapter) during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to submit such files). Yes þ No o" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7647663319324098, + "doc_id": "61a4a7e8f4a5ba0c232496c4e0ca830ecbc31f68ced8874c42cae4dca379d3c2", + "edit_distance": 0.21710526315789475, + "f1_score": 0.9813242784380306, + "meteor": 0.7486643471247715, + "precision": 0.9829931972789115, + "pred_md": "CP\t2020\tANNUAL\tREPORT\n\n61\n\n## Balances with Non-Guarantor Subsidiaries\n\n## Share Capital\n\nAt February 17, 2021, the latest practicable date prior to the date of this Annual Report on Form 10-K, there were 133,297,236 Common Shares and no preferred shares issued and outstanding, which consists of 13,779 holders of record of the Common Shares. In addition, CP has a Management Stock Option Incentive Plan ('MSOIP'), under which key officers and employees are granted options to purchase the Common Shares. Each option granted can be exercised for one Common Share. At February 17, 2021, 1,521,584 options were outstanding under the MSOIP and stand-alone option agreements entered into with Mr. Keith Creel. There are 733,836 options available to be issued by the Company's MSOIP in the future. CP has a Director's Stock Option Plan ('DSOP'), under which directors are granted options to purchase Common Shares. There are no outstanding options under the DSOP, which has 340,000 options available to be issued in the future.\n\n## Non-GAAP Measures\n\nThe Company presents Non-GAAP measures to provide a basis for evaluating underlying earnings and liquidity trends in the Company's business that can be compared with the results of operations in prior periods. In addition, these Non-GAAP measures facilitate a multi-period assessment of long-term profitability, allowing management and other external users of the Company's consolidated financial information to compare profitability on a long-term basis, including assessing future profitability, with that of the Company's peers.\n\nThese Non-GAAP measures have no standardized meaning and are not defined by GAAP and, therefore, may not be comparable to similar measures presented by other companies. The presentation of these Non-GAAP measures is not intended to be considered in isolation from, as a substitute for, or as superior to the financial information presented in accordance with GAAP.\n\n## Non-GAAP Performance Measures\n\nThe Company uses adjusted earnings results including Adjusted income, Adjusted diluted earnings per share, Adjusted operating income, and Adjusted operating ratio to evaluate the Company's operating performance and for planning and forecasting future business operations and future profitability. These Non-GAAP measures are presented in Item 6. Selected Financial Data and discussed further in other sections of this Item 7. Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations. These Non-GAAP measures provide meaningful supplemental information regarding operating results because they exclude certain significant items that are not considered indicative of future financial trends either by nature or amount. As a result, these items are excluded for management assessment of operational performance, allocation of resources, and preparation of annual budgets. These significant items may include, but are not limited to, restructuring and asset impairment charges, individually significant gains and losses from sales of assets, the FX impact of translating the Company's debt and lease liabilities (including borrowings under the credit facility), discrete tax items, changes in income tax rates, changes to an uncertain tax item, and certain items outside the control of management. These items may not be non-recurring. However, excluding these significant items from GAAP results allows for a consistent understanding of the Company's consolidated financial performance when performing a multi-period assessment including assessing the likelihood of future results. Accordingly, these Non-GAAP financial measures may provide insight to investors and other external users of the Company's consolidated financial information.\n\nIn 2020, there were two significant items included in Net income as follows:\n\n- · in the fourth quarter, a deferred tax recovery of $29 million due to a change relating to a tax return filing election for the state of North Dakota that favourably impacted Diluted EPS by 22 cents; and\n- · during the course of the year, a net non-cash gain of $14 million ($12 million after deferred tax) due to FX translation of debt and lease liabilities that favourably impacted Diluted EPS by 9 cents as follows:\n- -in the fourth quarter, a $103 million gain ($90 million after deferred tax) that favourably impacted Diluted EPS by 67 cents;", + "recall": 0.9796610169491525, + "true_md": "61 CP 2020 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n## Share Capital\n\n## Non-GAAP Measures\n\n## Non-GAAP Performance Measures The Company uses adjusted earnings results including Adjusted income, Adjusted diluted earnings per share, Adjusted operating income, and Adjusted operating\n\nAt February 17, 2021, the latest practicable date prior to the date of this Annual Report on Form 10-K, there were 133,297,236 Common Shares and no preferred shares issued and outstanding, which consists of 13,779 holders of record of the Common Shares. In addition, CP has a Management Stock Option Incentive Plan (“MSOIP”), under which key officers and employees are granted options to purchase the Common Shares. Each option granted can be exercised for one Common Share. At February 17, 2021, 1,521,584 options were outstanding under the MSOIP and stand-alone option agreements entered into with Mr. Keith Creel. There are 733,836 options available to be issued by the Company’s MSOIP in the future. CP has a Director's Stock Option Plan (“DSOP”), under which directors are granted options to purchase Common Shares. There are no outstanding options under the DSOP, which has 340,000 options available to be issued in the future.\n\nThe Company presents Non-GAAP measures to provide a basis for evaluating underlying earnings and liquidity trends in the Company’s business that can be compared with the results of operations in prior periods. In addition, these Non-GAAP measures facilitate a multi-period assessment of long-term profitability, allowing management and other external users of the Company’s consolidated financial information to compare profitability on a long-term basis, including assessing future profitability, with that of the Company’s peers.\n\nThese Non-GAAP measures have no standardized meaning and are not defined by GAAP and, therefore, may not be comparable to similar measures presented by other companies. The presentation of these Non-GAAP measures is not intended to be considered in isolation from, as a substitute for, or as superior to the financial information presented in accordance with GAAP.\n\nNon-GAAP Performance Measures The Company uses adjusted earnings results including Adjusted income, Adjusted diluted earnings per share, Adjusted operating income, and Adjusted operating ratio to evaluate the Company’s operating performance and for planning and forecasting future business operations and future profitability. These Non-GAAP measures are presented in Item 6. Selected Financial Data and discussed further in other sections of this Item 7. Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations. These Non-GAAP measures provide meaningful supplemental information regarding operating results because they exclude certain significant items that are not considered indicative of future financial trends either by nature or amount. As a result, these items are excluded for management assessment of operational performance, allocation of resources, and preparation of annual budgets. These significant items may include, but are not limited to, restructuring and asset impairment charges, individually significant gains and losses from sales of assets, the FX impact of translating the Company’s debt and lease liabilities (including borrowings under the credit facility), discrete tax items, changes in income tax rates, changes to an uncertain tax item, and certain items outside the control of management. These items may not be non-recurring. However, excluding these significant items from GAAP results allows for a consistent understanding of the Company's consolidated financial performance when performing a multi-period assessment including assessing the likelihood of future results. Accordingly, these Non-GAAP financial measures may provide insight to investors and other external users of the Company's consolidated financial information.\n\nIn 2020, there were two significant items included in Net income as follows: • in the fourth quarter, a deferred tax recovery of $29 million due to a change relating to a tax return filing election for the state of North Dakota that\n\n## Balances with Non-Guarantor Subsidiaries\n\n- In 2020, there were two significant items included in Net income as follows: • in the fourth quarter, a deferred tax recovery of $29 million due to a change relating to a tax return filing election for the state of North Dakota that favourably impacted Diluted EPS by 22 cents; and • during the course of the year, a net non-cash gain of $14 million ($12 million after deferred tax) due to FX translation of debt and lease liabilities that\n\n- favourably impacted Diluted EPS by 22 cents; and • during the course of the year, a net non-cash gain of $14 million ($12 million after deferred tax) due to FX translation of debt and lease liabilities that favourably impacted Diluted EPS by 9 cents as follows: – in the fourth quarter, a $103 million gain ($90 million after deferred tax) that favourably impacted Diluted EPS by 67 cents;\n\n- favourably impacted Diluted EPS by 9 cents as follows: – in the fourth quarter, a $103 million gain ($90 million after deferred tax) that favourably impacted Diluted EPS by 67 cents;" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9600294582738277, + "doc_id": "42bcf0531c9dbd7ab83f9ccb8ecf4553b94ca15d9759caaee72f23d94cc1e284", + "edit_distance": 0.07531380753138076, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9988092803046167, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Table\tof\tContents\n\n## SIGNATURES\n\nPursuant to the requirements of Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, the registrant has duly caused this report to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned, thereunto duly authorized.\n\nAPPLIED MATERIALS, INC.\n\nBy:\n\n/S/ GARY E. DICKERSON\n\nGary E. Dickerson\n\nPresident, Chief Executive Officer\n\nDated: December 11, 2020\n\n## POWER OF ATTORNEY\n\nKNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS, that each person whose signature appears below constitutes and appoints Gary E. Dickerson, Daniel J. Durn and Teri Little, jointly and severally, his or her attorneys-in-fact, each with the power of substitution, for him or her in any and all capacities, to sign any amendments to this Annual Report on Form 10-K, and to file the same, with exhibits thereto and other documents in connection therewith, with the Securities and Exchange Commission, hereby ratifying and confirming all that each of said attorneys-in-fact, or his substitute or substitutes, may do or cause to be done by virtue hereof.\n\n## ******\n\nPursuant to the requirements of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, this report has been signed below by the following persons on behalf of the registrant and in the capacities and on the dates indicated.\n\n109", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## SIGNATURES\n\nTable of Contents\n\nPursuant to the requirements of Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, the registrant has duly caused this report to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned, thereunto duly authorized.\n\nAPPLIED MATERIALS, INC.\n\nBy: /S/ GARY E. DICKERSON\n\nGary E. Dickerson President, Chief Executive Officer\n\nDated: December 11, 2020\n\nKNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS, that each person whose signature appears below constitutes and appoints Gary E. Dickerson, Daniel J. Durn and Teri Little, jointly and severally, his or her attorneys-in-fact, each with the power of substitution, for him or her in any and all capacities, to sign any amendments to this Annual Report on Form 10-K, and to file the same, with exhibits thereto and other documents in connection therewith, with the Securities and Exchange Commission, hereby ratifying and confirming all that each of said attorneys-in-fact, or his substitute or substitutes, may do or cause to be done by virtue hereof.\n\n******\n\nPursuant to the requirements of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, this report has been signed below by the following persons on behalf of the registrant and in the capacities and on the dates indicated.\n\n## POWER OF ATTORNEY\n\n109" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9528065494063647, + "doc_id": "f0708e50a1d998776f6b0330b4ffd2e8da4be7ec14dfc0ae4eabb8aa5bbc8b11", + "edit_distance": 0.14657210401891252, + "f1_score": 0.9868073878627968, + "meteor": 0.9763771251469271, + "precision": 0.9894179894179894, + "pred_md": "## Table of Contents\n\n## Item 7A: Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures About Market Risk\n\nApplied is exposed to interest rate risk related to its investment portfolio and debt issuances. Applied's investment portfolio includes fixedincome securities with a fair value of approximately $1.7 billion at October 25, 2020. These securities are subject to interest rate risk and will decline in value if interest rates increase. Based on Applied's investment portfolio at October 25, 2020, an immediate 100 basis point increase in interest rates would result in a decrease in the fair value of the portfolio of approximately $25 million. While an increase in interest rates reduces the fair value of the investment portfolio, Applied will not realize the losses in the consolidated statement of operations unless the individual fixed-income securities are sold prior to recovery or the loss is determined to be other-than-temporary. At October 25, 2020, the aggregate principal of long-term senior unsecured notes issued by Applied was $5.5 billion with an estimated fair values of $6.6 billion. A hypothetical decrease in interest rates of 100 basis points would result in an increase in the fair value of Applied's long-term debt issuances of approximately $798 million at October 25, 2020.\n\nCertain operations of Applied are conducted in foreign currencies, such as Japanese yen, Israeli shekel, euro and Taiwanese dollar. Applied enters into currency forward exchange and option contracts to hedge a portion of, but not all, existing and anticipated foreign currency denominated transactions generally expected to occur within the next 24 months. Gains and losses on these contracts are generally recognized in income at the time that the related transactions being hedged are recognized. Because the effect of movements in currency exchange rates on currency forward exchange and option contracts generally offsets the related effect on the underlying items being hedged, these financial instruments are not expected to subject Applied to risks that would otherwise result from changes in currency exchange rates. Applied does not use derivative financial instruments for trading or speculative purposes.\n\n## Item 8: Financial Statements and Supplementary Data\n\nThe consolidated financial statements required by this Item are set forth on the pages indicated at Item 15(a).\n\n## Item 9: Changes in and Disagreements with Accountants on Accounting and Financial Disclosure\n\nNone.\n\n55", + "recall": 0.9842105263157894, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## Item 7A: Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures About Market Risk\n\n## Item 8: Financial Statements and Supplementary Data\n\n## Item 9: Changes in and Disagreements with Accountants on Accounting and Financial Disclosure\n\nApplied is exposed to interest rate risk related to its investment portfolio and debt issuances. Applied’s investment portfolio includes fixed- income securities with a fair value of approximately $1.7 billion at October 25, 2020. These securities are subject to interest rate risk and will decline in value if interest rates increase. Based on Applied’s investment portfolio at October 25, 2020, an immediate 100 basis point increase in interest rates would result in a decrease in the fair value of the portfolio of approximately $25 million. While an increase in interest rates reduces the fair value of the investment portfolio, Applied will not realize the losses in the consolidated statement of operations unless the individual fixed-income securities are sold prior to recovery or the loss is determined to be other-than-temporary. At October 25, 2020, the aggregate principal of long-term senior unsecured notes issued by Applied was $5.5 billion with an estimated fair values of $6.6 billion. A hypothetical decrease in interest rates of 100 basis points would result in an increase in the fair value of Applied’s long-term debt issuances of approximately $798 million at October 25, 2020.\n\nCertain operations of Applied are conducted in foreign currencies, such as Japanese yen, Israeli shekel, euro and Taiwanese dollar. Applied enters into currency forward exchange and option contracts to hedge a portion of, but not all, existing and anticipated foreign currency denominated transactions generally expected to occur within the next 24 months. Gains and losses on these contracts are generally recognized in income at the time that the related transactions being hedged are recognized. Because the effect of movements in currency exchange rates on currency forward exchange and option contracts generally offsets the related effect on the underlying items being hedged, these financial instruments are not expected to subject Applied to risks that would otherwise result from changes in currency exchange rates. Applied does not use derivative financial instruments for trading or speculative purposes.\n\nThe consolidated financial statements required by this Item are set forth on the pages indicated at Item 15(a).\n\nNone.\n\n55" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7940058269884509, + "doc_id": "558b1c90961088894a788439cd28c9fafc9b89e4818596629cbe17ad0e3b2a72", + "edit_distance": 0.27765237020316025, + "f1_score": 0.9943820224719103, + "meteor": 0.837816692637544, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "CP\t2020\tANNUAL\tREPORT\n\n122\n\n## Indemnifications\n\nPursuant to a trust and custodial services agreement with the trustee of the Canadian Pacific Railway Company Pension Plan, the Company has undertaken to indemnify and save harmless the trustee, to the extent not paid by the fund, from any and all taxes, claims, liabilities, damages, costs, and expenses arising out of the performance of the trustee's obligations under the agreement, except as a result of misconduct by the trustee. The indemnity includes liabilities, costs, or expenses relating to any legal reporting or notification obligations of the trustee with respect to the defined benefit and defined contribution options of the pension plans, or otherwise with respect to the assets of the pension plans that are not part of the fund. The indemnity survives the termination or expiry of the agreement with respect to claims and liabilities arising prior to the termination or expiry. At December 31, 2020, the Company had not recorded a liability associated with this indemnification as it does not expect to make any payments pertaining to it.\n\n## 27. Segmented and geographic information\n\n## Operating segment\n\nThe Company operates in only one operating segment: rail transportation. Operating results by geographic areas, railway corridors, or other lower-level components or units of operation are not reviewed by the Company's chief operating decision-maker to make decisions about the allocation of resources to, or the assessment of performance of, such geographic areas, corridors, components, or units of operation.\n\nIn the years ended December 31, 2020, 2019, and 2018, no one customer comprised more than 10% of total revenues and accounts receivable.\n\n## Geographic information\n\nAll of the company's revenue and long-lived assets excluding financial instruments are held within Canada and the United States.\n\n## 28. Selected quarterly data (unaudited)\n\nEarnings\tper\tshare\tfor\tthe\tfour\tquarters\tcombined\tmay\tnot\tequal\tearnings\tper\tshare\tfor\tthe\tyear\tdue\tto\trounding. (1)", + "recall": 0.9888268156424581, + "true_md": "CP 2020 ANNUAL REPORT 122\n\n## Indemnifications Pursuant to a trust and custodial services agreement with the trustee of the Canadian Pacific Railway Company Pension Plan, the Company has undertaken to\n\n## 27. Segmented and geographic information\n\n## Operating segment The Company operates in only one operating segment: rail transportation. Operating results by geographic areas, railway corridors, or other lower-level\n\n## Geographic information All of the company's revenue and long-lived assets excluding financial instruments are held within Canada and the United States.\n\n## 28. Selected quarterly data (unaudited)\n\nIndemnifications Pursuant to a trust and custodial services agreement with the trustee of the Canadian Pacific Railway Company Pension Plan, the Company has undertaken to indemnify and save harmless the trustee, to the extent not paid by the fund, from any and all taxes, claims, liabilities, damages, costs, and expenses arising out of the performance of the trustee’s obligations under the agreement, except as a result of misconduct by the trustee. The indemnity includes liabilities, costs, or expenses relating to any legal reporting or notification obligations of the trustee with respect to the defined benefit and defined contribution options of the pension plans, or otherwise with respect to the assets of the pension plans that are not part of the fund. The indemnity survives the termination or expiry of the agreement with respect to claims and liabilities arising prior to the termination or expiry. At December 31, 2020, the Company had not recorded a liability associated with this indemnification as it does not expect to make any payments pertaining to it.\n\nOperating segment The Company operates in only one operating segment: rail transportation. Operating results by geographic areas, railway corridors, or other lower-level components or units of operation are not reviewed by the Company’s chief operating decision-maker to make decisions about the allocation of resources to, or the assessment of performance of, such geographic areas, corridors, components, or units of operation.\n\nIn the years ended December 31, 2020, 2019, and 2018, no one customer comprised more than 10% of total revenues and accounts receivable.\n\nGeographic information All of the company's revenue and long-lived assets excluding financial instruments are held within Canada and the United States.\n\nEarnings per share for the four quarters combined may not equal earnings per share for the year due to rounding. (1)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9713302712132232, + "doc_id": "4b1e65c733cbc34e3d70f8f689f9893efe7a949ee2a8c7dc505b6e8e2bab9613", + "edit_distance": 0.21246458923512748, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9981088152522961, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## PART II\n\n## Item 5. Market for the Registrant's Common Equity, Related Stockholder Matters and Issuer Purchases of Equity Securities:\n\nRefer to page 150 of IBM's 2018 Annual Report to Stockholders, which is incorporated herein by reference solely as it relates to this item.\n\nIBM common stock is listed on the New York Stock Exchange and the Chicago Stock Exchange under the symbol \"IBM.\" There were 395,480 common stockholders of record at February 8, 2019.\n\nThe following table provides information relating to the company's repurchase of common stock for the fourth quarter of 2018.\n\n(1) On\tOctober\t31,\t2017,\tthe\tBoard\tof\tDirectors\tauthorized\t$3.0\tbillion\tin\tfunds\tfor\tuse\tin\tthe\tcompany's\tcommon\tstock repurchase\tprogram.\tOn\tOctober\t30,\t2018,\tthe\tBoard\tof\tDirectors\tauthorized\tan\tadditional\t$4.0\tbillion\tin\tfunds\tfor\tuse\tin\tsuch program.\tIn\teach\tcase,\tthe\tcompany\tstated\tthat\tit\twould\trepurchase\tshares\ton\tthe\topen\tmarket\tor\tin\tprivate\ttransactions depending\ton\tmarket\tconditions.\tThe\tcommon\tstock\trepurchase\tprogram\tdoes\tnot\thave\tan\texpiration\tdate.\tThis\ttable\tdoes\tnot include\tshares\ttendered\tto\tsatisfy\tthe\texercise\tprice\tin\tconnection\twith\tcashless\texercises\tof\temployee\tstock\toptions\tor\tshares tendered\tto\tsatisfy\ttax\twithholding\tobligations\tin\tconnection\twith\temployee\tequity\tawards.\n\n## Item 6. Selected Financial Data:\n\nRefer to pages 147 and 148 of IBM's 2018 Annual Report to Stockholders, which are incorporated herein by reference.\n\n## Item 7. Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations:\n\nRefer to pages 18 through 67 of IBM's 2018 Annual Report to Stockholders, which are incorporated herein by reference.\n\n## Item 7A. Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures About Market Risk:\n\nRefer to the section titled \"Market Risk\" on pages 66 and 67 of IBM's 2018 Annual Report to Stockholders, which is incorporated herein by reference.\n\n19", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## Item 5. Market for the Registrant's Common Equity, Related Stockholder Matters and Issuer Purchases of Equity Securities:\n\nRefer to page 150 of IBM's 2018 Annual Report to Stockholders, which is incorporated herein by reference solely as it relates to this item.\n\nIBM common stock is listed on the New York Stock Exchange and the Chicago Stock Exchange under the symbol \"IBM.\" There were 395,480 common stockholders of record at February 8, 2019.\n\nThe following table provides information relating to the company's repurchase of common stock for the fourth quarter of 2018.\n\n(1) On October 31, 2017, the Board of Directors authorized $3.0 billion in funds for use in the company's common stock repurchase program. On October 30, 2018, the Board of Directors authorized an additional $4.0 billion in funds for use in such program. In each case, the company stated that it would repurchase shares on the open market or in private transactions depending on market conditions. The common stock repurchase program does not have an expiration date. This table does not include shares tendered to satisfy the exercise price in connection with cashless exercises of employee stock options or shares tendered to satisfy tax withholding obligations in connection with employee equity awards.\n\nRefer to pages 147 and 148 of IBM's 2018 Annual Report to Stockholders, which are incorporated herein by reference.\n\nRefer to pages 18 through 67 of IBM's 2018 Annual Report to Stockholders, which are incorporated herein by reference.\n\nRefer to the section titled \"Market Risk\" on pages 66 and 67 of IBM's 2018 Annual Report to Stockholders, which is incorporated herein by reference.\n\n## Item 7A. Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures About Market Risk:\n\n## Item 7. Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations:\n\n## Item 6. Selected Financial Data:\n\n19\n\n## PART II" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8401939628197204, + "doc_id": "bac346747d48f0f80dbb97f855e3fa8b991c964cd4002899c7c0cd0d202f0b11", + "edit_distance": 0.26908752327746743, + "f1_score": 0.9837837837837838, + "meteor": 0.7768765943143157, + "precision": 0.9837837837837838, + "pred_md": "120\n\nCP\t2020\tANNUAL\tREPORT\n\n## C. Employee share purchase plan\n\nThe Company has an employee share purchase plan whereby both employee and the Company contributions are used to purchase shares on the open market for employees. The Company's contributions are expensed over the one year vesting period. Under the plan, the Company matches $1 for every $3 contributed by employees up to a maximum employee contribution of 6% of annual salary.\n\nThe total number of shares purchased in 2020 on behalf of participants, including the Company's contributions, was 115,344 (2019 - 137,942; 2018 - 118,865). In 2020, the Company's contributions totalled $9 million (2019 - $8 million; 2018 - $6 million) and the related expense was $7 million (2019 - $6 million; 2018 - $5 million).\n\n## 24. Variable interest entities\n\nThe Company leases equipment from certain trusts, which have been determined to be variable interest entities financed by a combination of debt and equity provided by unrelated third parties. The lease agreements, which are classified as operating leases, have fixed price purchase options which create the Company's variable interests and result in the trusts being considered variable interest entities.\n\nMaintaining and operating the leased assets according to specific contractual obligations outlined in the terms of the lease agreements and industry standards is the Company's responsibility. The rigour of the contractual terms of the lease agreements and industry standards are such that the Company has limited discretion over the maintenance activities associated with these assets. As such, the Company concluded these terms do not provide the Company with the power to direct the activities of the variable interest entities in a way that has a significant impact on the entities' economic performance.\n\nThe financial exposure to the Company as a result of its involvement with the variable interest entities is equal to the fixed lease payments due to the trusts. In 2020, lease payments after tax were $14 million. Future minimum lease payments, before tax, of $126 million will be payable over the next 10 years. The Company does not guarantee the residual value of the assets to the lessor; however, it must deliver to the lessor the assets in good operating condition, subject to normal wear and tear, at the end of the lease term.\n\nAs the Company's actions and decisions do not significantly affect the variable interest entities' performance, and the Company's fixed price purchase option is not considered to be potentially significant to the variable interest entities, the Company is not considered to be the primary beneficiary, and does not consolidate these variable interest entities.\n\n## 25. Commitments and contingencies\n\nIn the normal course of its operations, the Company becomes involved in various legal actions, including claims relating to injuries and damage to property. The Company maintains provisions it considers to be adequate for such actions. While the final outcome with respect to actions outstanding or pending at December 31, 2020 cannot be predicted with certainty, it is the opinion of management that their resolution will not have a material adverse effect on the Company's business, financial position, or results of operations. However, an unexpected adverse resolution of one or more of these legal actions could have a material adverse effect on the Company's business, financial position, results of operations, or liquidity in a particular quarter or fiscal year.\n\n## Commitments\n\nAt December 31, 2020, the Company had committed to total future capital expenditures amounting to $547 million and operating expenditures relating to supplier purchase obligations, such as bulk fuel purchase agreements, locomotive maintenance and overhaul agreements, as well as agreements to purchase other goods and services amounting to approximately $1.7 billion for the years 2021-2032, of which CP estimates approximately $1.6 billion will be incurred in the next five years.\n\nCommitments related to leases, including minimum annual payments for the next five years and thereafter, are included in Note 19.\n\n## Legal proceedings related to Lac-Mégantic rail accident\n\nOn July 6, 2013, a train carrying petroleum crude oil operated by Montréal Maine and Atlantic Railway ('MMAR') or a subsidiary, Montréal Maine & Atlantic Canada Co. ('MMAC' and collectively the 'MMA Group'), derailed in Lac-Mégantic, Québec. The derailment occurred on a section of railway owned and operated by the MMA Group and while the MMA Group exclusively controlled the train.\n\nFollowing the derailment, MMAC sought court protection in Canada under the Companies' Creditors Arrangement Act and MMAR filed for bankruptcy in the U.S. Plans of arrangement were approved in both Canada and the U.S. (the 'Plans'), providing for the distribution of approximately $440 million amongst those claiming derailment damages.\n\nA number of legal proceedings, set out below, were commenced in Canada and the U.S. against CP and others:\n\n- (1) Québec's Minister of Sustainable Development, Environment, Wildlife and Parks ordered various parties, including CP, to remediate the derailment site (the \"Cleanup Order\") and served CP with a Notice of Claim for $95 million for those costs. CP appealed the Cleanup Order and contested the Notice", + "recall": 0.9837837837837838, + "true_md": "CP 2020 ANNUAL REPORT 120\n\n- 24. Variable interest entities\n\n- C. Employee share purchase plan The Company has an employee share purchase plan whereby both employee and the Company contributions are used to purchase shares on the open market for\n\n- 25. Commitments and contingencies\n\n- (1) Québec's Minister of Sustainable Development, Environment, Wildlife and Parks ordered various parties, including CP, to remediate the derailment site (the \"Cleanup Order\") and served CP with a Notice of Claim for $95 million for those costs. CP appealed the Cleanup Order and contested the Notice\n\n## Legal proceedings related to Lac-Mégantic rail accident On July 6, 2013, a train carrying petroleum crude oil operated by Montréal Maine and Atlantic Railway (“MMAR”) or a subsidiary, Montréal Maine & Atlantic Canada\n\n## Commitments At December 31, 2020, the Company had committed to total future capital expenditures amounting to $547 million and operating expenditures relating to\n\nC. Employee share purchase plan The Company has an employee share purchase plan whereby both employee and the Company contributions are used to purchase shares on the open market for employees. The Company’s contributions are expensed over the one year vesting period. Under the plan, the Company matches $1 for every $3 contributed by employees up to a maximum employee contribution of 6% of annual salary.\n\nThe total number of shares purchased in 2020 on behalf of participants, including the Company's contributions, was 115,344 (2019 – 137,942; 2018 – 118,865). In 2020, the Company’s contributions totalled $9 million (2019 – $8 million; 2018 – $6 million) and the related expense was $7 million (2019 – $6 million; 2018 – $5 million).\n\nThe Company leases equipment from certain trusts, which have been determined to be variable interest entities financed by a combination of debt and equity provided by unrelated third parties. The lease agreements, which are classified as operating leases, have fixed price purchase options which create the Company’s variable interests and result in the trusts being considered variable interest entities.\n\nMaintaining and operating the leased assets according to specific contractual obligations outlined in the terms of the lease agreements and industry standards is the Company’s responsibility. The rigour of the contractual terms of the lease agreements and industry standards are such that the Company has limited discretion over the maintenance activities associated with these assets. As such, the Company concluded these terms do not provide the Company with the power to direct the activities of the variable interest entities in a way that has a significant impact on the entities’ economic performance.\n\nThe financial exposure to the Company as a result of its involvement with the variable interest entities is equal to the fixed lease payments due to the trusts. In 2020, lease payments after tax were $14 million. Future minimum lease payments, before tax, of $126 million will be payable over the next 10 years. The Company does not guarantee the residual value of the assets to the lessor; however, it must deliver to the lessor the assets in good operating condition, subject to normal wear and tear, at the end of the lease term.\n\nAs the Company’s actions and decisions do not significantly affect the variable interest entities’ performance, and the Company’s fixed price purchase option is not considered to be potentially significant to the variable interest entities, the Company is not considered to be the primary beneficiary, and does not consolidate these variable interest entities.\n\nIn the normal course of its operations, the Company becomes involved in various legal actions, including claims relating to injuries and damage to property. The Company maintains provisions it considers to be adequate for such actions. While the final outcome with respect to actions outstanding or pending at December 31, 2020 cannot be predicted with certainty, it is the opinion of management that their resolution will not have a material adverse effect on the Company’s business, financial position, or results of operations. However, an unexpected adverse resolution of one or more of these legal actions could have a material adverse effect on the Company's business, financial position, results of operations, or liquidity in a particular quarter or fiscal year.\n\nCommitments At December 31, 2020, the Company had committed to total future capital expenditures amounting to $547 million and operating expenditures relating to supplier purchase obligations, such as bulk fuel purchase agreements, locomotive maintenance and overhaul agreements, as well as agreements to purchase other goods and services amounting to approximately $1.7 billion for the years 2021–2032, of which CP estimates approximately $1.6 billion will be incurred in the next five years.\n\nCommitments related to leases, including minimum annual payments for the next five years and thereafter, are included in Note 19.\n\nLegal proceedings related to Lac-Mégantic rail accident On July 6, 2013, a train carrying petroleum crude oil operated by Montréal Maine and Atlantic Railway (“MMAR”) or a subsidiary, Montréal Maine & Atlantic Canada Co. (“MMAC” and collectively the “MMA Group”), derailed in Lac-Mégantic, Québec. The derailment occurred on a section of railway owned and operated by the MMA Group and while the MMA Group exclusively controlled the train.\n\nFollowing the derailment, MMAC sought court protection in Canada under the Companies’ Creditors Arrangement Act and MMAR filed for bankruptcy in the U.S. Plans of arrangement were approved in both Canada and the U.S. (the “Plans”), providing for the distribution of approximately $440 million amongst those claiming derailment damages.\n\nA number of legal proceedings, set out below, were commenced in Canada and the U.S. against CP and others:" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9374907198147912, + "doc_id": "5584afeaaa8e83e372b63e45862ff0527e644a7bc7e7ae737994e0ae283e67bc", + "edit_distance": 0.13071895424836602, + "f1_score": 0.9887640449438203, + "meteor": 0.981428037585418, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "EASTGROUP PROPERTIES, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES\n\nNOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\nThe Company's unsecured bank credit facilities have certain restrictive covenants, such as maintaining debt service coverage and leverage ratios and maintaining insurance coverage, and the Company was in compliance with all of its financial debt covenants at December 31, 2020.\n\nSee Note 7 for a detail of the outstanding balances of the Company's Unsecured bank credit facilities as of December 31, 2020 and 2019.\n\n## (7) UNSECURED AND SECURED DEBT\n\nThe Company's debt is detailed below. EastGroup presents debt issuance costs as reductions of Unsecured bank credit facilities, Unsecured debt and Secured debt on the Consolidated Balance Sheets as detailed below.\n\nDecember 31,\n\n(1) These\tloans\thave\ta\tfixed\tinterest\trate\tor\tan\teffectively\tfixed\tinterest\trate\tdue\tto\tinterest\trate\tswaps.\n\n67", + "recall": 0.9777777777777777, + "true_md": "EASTGROUP PROPERTIES, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\nThe Company’s unsecured bank credit facilities have certain restrictive covenants, such as maintaining debt service coverage and leverage ratios and maintaining insurance coverage, and the Company was in compliance with all of its financial debt covenants at December 31, 2020.\n\nSee Note 7 for a detail of the outstanding balances of the Company's Unsecured bank credit facilities as of December 31, 2020 and 2019.\n\nThe Company's debt is detailed below. EastGroup presents debt issuance costs as reductions of Unsecured bank credit facilities, Unsecured debt and Secured debt on the Consolidated Balance Sheets as detailed below.\n\n## (7)UNSECURED AND SECURED DEBT\n\n(1) These loans have a fixed interest rate or an effectively fixed interest rate due to interest rate swaps.\n\n67" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9590900360676374, + "doc_id": "28821c894bcc66a27882d1a333bee71e4d1413c7e4c5e964604d5c6775c03181", + "edit_distance": 0.8937644341801386, + "f1_score": 0.9873417721518988, + "meteor": 0.7517192487199837, + "precision": 0.9887323943661972, + "pred_md": "## Table of Contents\n\n## APPLIED MATERIALS, INC.\n\n## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS - (Continued)\n\n## Derivative Financial Instruments\n\nApplied uses financial instruments, such as forward exchange and currency option contracts, to hedge a portion of, but not all, existing and anticipated foreign currency denominated transactions typically expected to occur within 24 months. The purpose of Applied's foreign currency management is to mitigate the effect of exchange rate fluctuations on certain foreign currency denominated revenues, costs and eventual cash flows. In certain cases, Applied also uses interest rate swap or lock agreements to hedge against the variability of cash flows due to changes in the benchmark interest rate of fixed rate debt. The terms of derivative financial instruments used for hedging purposes are generally consistent with the timing of the transactions being hedged. All of Applied's derivative financial instruments are recorded at fair value based upon quoted market prices for comparable instruments. For derivative instruments designated and qualifying as cash flow hedges, the effective portion of the gain or loss on these hedges is reported as a component of accumulated other comprehensive income (loss) in stockholders' equity, and is reclassified into earnings when the hedged transaction affects earnings. If the transaction being hedged fails to occur, or if a portion of any derivative is ineffective, the gain or loss on the associated financial instrument is recorded promptly in earnings. For derivative instruments used to hedge existing foreign currency denominated assets or liabilities, the gain or loss on these hedges is recorded promptly in earnings to offset the changes in the fair value of the assets or liabilities being hedged. Applied does not use derivative financial instruments for trading or speculative purposes.\n\n## Foreign Currencies\n\nAs of October 25, 2020, all of Applied's subsidiaries use the United States dollar as their functional currency. Accordingly, assets and liabilities of these subsidiaries are remeasured using exchange rates in effect at the end of the period, except for non-monetary assets, such as inventories and property, plant and equipment, which are remeasured using historical exchange rates. Foreign currency-denominated revenues and costs are remeasured using average exchange rates for the period, except for costs related to those balance sheet items that are remeasured using historical exchange rates. The resulting remeasurement gains and losses are included in interest and other income, net in the Consolidated Statements of Operations as incurred.\n\n## Concentrations of Credit Risk\n\nFinancial instruments that potentially subject Applied to significant concentrations of credit risk consist principally of cash equivalents, investments, trade accounts receivable and derivative financial instruments used in hedging activities. Applied invests in a variety of financial instruments, such as, but not limited to, commercial paper, corporate and municipal bonds, United States Treasury and agency securities, and assetbacked and mortgage-backed securities, and, by policy, limits the amount of credit exposure with any one financial institution or commercial issuer. Applied is exposed to credit-related losses in the event of nonperformance by counterparties to derivative financial instruments, but does not expect any counterparties to fail to meet their obligations. Applied performs ongoing credit evaluations of its customers' financial condition and generally requires no collateral to secure accounts receivable. Applied maintains an allowance reserve for potentially uncollectible accounts receivable based on its assessment of the collectability of accounts receivable. Applied regularly reviews the allowance by considering factors such as historical experience, credit quality, age of the accounts receivable balances, and current economic conditions that may affect a customer's ability to pay. In addition, Applied utilizes deposits and/or letters of credit to mitigate credit risk when considered appropriate.\n\n## Recent Accounting Pronouncements\n\n## Accounting Standards Adopted\n\nLeases. In February 2016, the Financial Accounting Standard Board (FASB) issued authoritative guidance for lease accounting, which requires lessees to recognize lease assets and liabilities on the balance sheet for certain lease arrangements that are classified as operating leases under the previous standard, and to provide for enhanced disclosures. Applied adopted this guidance in the first quarter of fiscal 2020 using the modified retrospective transition method which required applying the new standard as of the beginning of the period of adoption with no adjustment to comparative prior periods. Applied elected the package of practical expedients permitted under the transition guidance, which allow Applied not to reassess whether a contract contains a lease, initial direct costs and lease classification for leases existing prior to adoption. Applied also elected to combine the lease and non-lease components as a single lease component and not to use hindsight in determining the lease term. Upon adoption, Applied recognized right-of-use assets of $160 million, net of deferred rent of $4 million and lease liabilities of $164 million.\n\n72", + "recall": 0.9859550561797753, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## APPLIED MATERIALS, INC. NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS — (Continued)\n\n## Derivative Financial Instruments\n\n## Foreign Currencies\n\n## Concentrations of Credit Risk\n\n## Recent Accounting Pronouncements\n\n## Accounting Standards Adopted\n\nLeases. In February 2016, the Financial Accounting Standard Board (FASB) issued authoritative guidance for lease accounting, which requires lessees to recognize lease assets and liabilities on the balance sheet for certain lease arrangements that are classified as operating leases under the previous standard, and to provide for enhanced disclosures. Applied adopted this guidance in the first quarter of fiscal 2020 using the modified retrospective transition method which required applying the new standard as of the beginning of the period of adoption with no adjustment to comparative prior periods. Applied elected the package of practical expedients permitted under the transition guidance, which allow Applied not to reassess whether a contract contains a lease, initial direct costs and lease classification for leases existing prior to adoption. Applied also elected to combine the lease and non-lease components as a single lease component and not to use hindsight in determining the lease term. Upon adoption, Applied recognized right-of-use assets of $160 million, net of deferred rent of $4 million and lease liabilities of $164 million.\n\nFinancial instruments that potentially subject Applied to significant concentrations of credit risk consist principally of cash equivalents, investments, trade accounts receivable and derivative financial instruments used in hedging activities. Applied invests in a variety of financial instruments, such as, but not limited to, commercial paper, corporate and municipal bonds, United States Treasury and agency securities, and asset- backed and mortgage-backed securities, and, by policy, limits the amount of credit exposure with any one financial institution or commercial issuer. Applied is exposed to credit-related losses in the event of nonperformance by counterparties to derivative financial instruments, but does not expect any counterparties to fail to meet their obligations. Applied performs ongoing credit evaluations of its customers’ financial condition and generally requires no collateral to secure accounts receivable. Applied maintains an allowance reserve for potentially uncollectible accounts receivable based on its assessment of the collectability of accounts receivable. Applied regularly reviews the allowance by considering factors such as historical experience, credit quality, age of the accounts receivable balances, and current economic conditions that may affect a customer’s ability to pay. In addition, Applied utilizes deposits and/or letters of credit to mitigate credit risk when considered appropriate.\n\nAs of October 25, 2020, all of Applied’s subsidiaries use the United States dollar as their functional currency. Accordingly, assets and liabilities of these subsidiaries are remeasured using exchange rates in effect at the end of the period, except for non-monetary assets, such as inventories and property, plant and equipment, which are remeasured using historical exchange rates. Foreign currency-denominated revenues and costs are remeasured using average exchange rates for the period, except for costs related to those balance sheet items that are remeasured using historical exchange rates. The resulting remeasurement gains and losses are included in interest and other income, net in the Consolidated Statements of Operations as incurred.\n\nApplied uses financial instruments, such as forward exchange and currency option contracts, to hedge a portion of, but not all, existing and anticipated foreign currency denominated transactions typically expected to occur within 24 months. The purpose of Applied’s foreign currency management is to mitigate the effect of exchange rate fluctuations on certain foreign currency denominated revenues, costs and eventual cash flows. In certain cases, Applied also uses interest rate swap or lock agreements to hedge against the variability of cash flows due to changes in the benchmark interest rate of fixed rate debt. The terms of derivative financial instruments used for hedging purposes are generally consistent with the timing of the transactions being hedged. All of Applied’s derivative financial instruments are recorded at fair value based upon quoted market prices for comparable instruments. For derivative instruments designated and qualifying as cash flow hedges, the effective portion of the gain or loss on these hedges is reported as a component of accumulated other comprehensive income (loss) in stockholders’ equity, and is reclassified into earnings when the hedged transaction affects earnings. If the transaction being hedged fails to occur, or if a portion of any derivative is ineffective, the gain or loss on the associated financial instrument is recorded promptly in earnings. For derivative instruments used to hedge existing foreign currency denominated assets or liabilities, the gain or loss on these hedges is recorded promptly in earnings to offset the changes in the fair value of the assets or liabilities being hedged. Applied does not use derivative financial instruments for trading or speculative purposes.\n\n72" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8499786309111924, + "doc_id": "c53580c6b960b06e63d9b619b4b67397bd8eb6a5d231d22cc7e78d580927564f", + "edit_distance": 0.44936708860759494, + "f1_score": 0.8914728682170541, + "meteor": 0.9103060457339165, + "precision": 0.8214285714285714, + "pred_md": "## UNITED STATES SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION Washington, D.C. 20549\n\nFORM10-K\n\n☒\n\nANNUAL\tREPORT\tPURSUANT\tTO\tSECTION\t13\tOR\t15(d)\tOF\tTHE\tSECURITIES\tEXCHANGE\tACT\tOF\t1934 For\tthe\tFiscal\tYear\tEnded\tDecember\t31,\t2020\n\n☐\n\nTRANSITION\tREPORT\tPURSUANT\tTO\tSECTION\t13\tOR\t15(d)\tOF\tTHE\tSECURITIES\tEXCHANGE\tACT\tOF\t1934\n\nFor\tthe\tTransition\tPeriod\tFrom\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\tto\n\nCommission\tfile\tnumber\t1-8400\n\n## American\tAirlines\tGroup\tInc.\n\n(Exact\tname\tof\tregistrant\tas\tspecified\tin\tits\tcharter)\n\nDelaware\n\n75-1825172\n\n(State\tor\tother\tjurisdiction\tof\tincorporation\tor\torganization)\n\n(I.R.S.\tEmployer\tIdentification\tNo.)\n\n1\tSkyview\tDrive,\n\nFort\tWorth,\n\nTexas\n\n76155\n\n(817) 963-1234\n\n(Address\tof\tprincipal\texecutive\toffices,\tincluding\tzip\tcode)\n\nRegistrant's\ttelephone\tnumber,\tincluding\tarea\tcode\n\n(Former\tname,\tformer\taddress\tand\tformer\tfiscal\tyear,\tif\tchanged\tsince\tlast\treport)\n\nSecurities\tregistered\tpursuant\tto\tSection\t12(b)\tof\tthe\tAct:\n\nTitle\tof\teach\tclass\n\nTrading\tSymbol(s)\n\nName\tof\teach\texchange\ton\twhich\tregistered\n\nCommon\tStock,\t$0.01\tpar\tvalue\tper\tshare\n\nAAL\n\nThe\tNasdaq\tGlobal\tSelect\tMarket\n\nSecurities\tregistered\tpursuant\tto\tSection\t12(g)\tof\tthe\tAct:\tNone\n\nCommission\tfile\tnumber\t1-2691\n\n## American\tAirlines,\tInc.\n\n(Exact\tname\tof\tregistrant\tas\tspecified\tin\tits\tcharter)\n\nDelaware\n\n13-1502798\n\n(State\tor\tother\tjurisdiction\tof\tincorporation\tor\torganization)\n\n(I.R.S.\tEmployer\tIdentification\tNo.)\n\n1\tSkyview\tDrive,\n\nFort\tWorth,\n\nTexas 76155\n\n(817) 963-1234\n\n(Address\tof\tprincipal\texecutive\toffices,\tincluding\tzip\tcode)\n\nRegistrant's\ttelephone\tnumber,\tincluding\tarea\tcode\n\nSecurities\tregistered\tpursuant\tto\tSection\t12(b)\tof\tthe\tAct:\tNone\n\nSecurities\tregistered\tpursuant\tto\tSection\t12(g)\tof\tthe\tAct:\tNone\n\n\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_", + "recall": 0.9745762711864406, + "true_md": "# UNITED STATES SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION Washington, D.C. 20549\n\n# FORM 10-K\n\n# For the Fiscal Year Ended December 31, 2020\n\n# American Airlines Group Inc.\n\n# American Airlines, Inc.\n\n☒ ANNUAL REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934\n\n☐ TRANSITION REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934 For the Transition Period From to\n\nCommission file number 1-8400\n\n(Exact name of registrant as specified in its charter)\n\nDelaware\n\n(State or other jurisdiction of incorporation or organization)\n\n1 Skyview Drive, Fort Worth, Texas 76155\n\n(Address of principal executive offices, including zip code)\n\n75-1825172\n\n(I.R.S. Employer Identification No.)\n\n(817) 963-1234\n\nRegistrant’s telephone number, including area code\n\n(Former name, former address and former fiscal year, if changed since last report)\n\nSecurities registered pursuant to Section 12(b) of the Act:\n\nSecurities registered pursuant to Section 12(g) of the Act: None\n\nCommission file number 1-2691\n\n(Exact name of registrant as specified in its charter)\n\nDelaware\n\n(State or other jurisdiction of incorporation or organization)\n\n1 Skyview Drive, Fort Worth, Texas 76155\n\n(Address of principal executive offices, including zip code)\n\n13-1502798\n\n(I.R.S. Employer Identification No.)\n\n(817) 963-1234\n\nRegistrant’s telephone number, including area code\n\nSecurities registered pursuant to Section 12(b) of the Act: None\n\nSecurities registered pursuant to Section 12(g) of the Act: None \\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\n\nUNITED STATES SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION Washington, D.C. 20549" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "306f3ce596e56a8b7354be3c2dbb7ca3c65d9fbd777a7a2243513b64c590aa8c", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.996, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "31 CP\t2020\tANNUAL\tREPORT", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "31 CP 2020 ANNUAL REPORT" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9220684529187837, + "doc_id": "b974803e759ad3da61487b2698b12bbe2ebfbb5e77361c9c3c7d6650e161f660", + "edit_distance": 0.05853658536585366, + "f1_score": 0.9789473684210527, + "meteor": 0.9467731375825807, + "precision": 0.9789473684210527, + "pred_md": "## Table of Contents\n\n## Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements - (Continued)\n\nBecton, Dickinson and Company\n\nasserted or threatened against the Company but lack sufficient information to determine whether a pelvic mesh device of the Company is actually at issue. The claims identified above also include products manufactured by both the Company and two subsidiaries of Medtronic plc (as successor in interest to Covidien plc) ('Medtronic'), each a supplier of the Company. Medtronic has an obligation to defend and indemnify the Company with respect to any product defect liability relating to products its subsidiaries had manufactured. As described below, in July 2015 the Company reached an agreement with Medtronic (which was amended in June 2017) regarding certain aspects of Medtronic's indemnification obligation. The foregoing lawsuits, unfiled claims, putative class actions, and other claims, together with claims that have settled or are the subject of agreements or agreements in principle to settle, are referred to collectively as the 'Women's Health Product Claims.' The Women's Health Product Claims generally seek damages for personal injury allegedly resulting from use of the products.\n\nAs of September 30, 2019, the Company has reached agreements or agreements in principle with various plaintiffs' law firms to settle their respective inventories of cases totaling approximately 15,160 of the Women's Health Product Claims. The Company believes that these Women's Health Product Claims are not the subject of Medtronic's indemnification obligation. These settlement agreements and agreements in principle include unfiled and previously unknown claims held by various plaintiffs' law firms, which are not included in the approximate number of lawsuits set forth in the first paragraph of this section. Each agreement is subject to certain conditions, including requirements for participation in the proposed settlements by a certain minimum number of plaintiffs. The Company continues to engage in discussions with other plaintiffs' law firms regarding potential resolution of unsettled Women's Health Product Claims, which may include additional inventory settlements.\n\nStarting in 2014 in the MDL, the court entered certain pre-trial orders requiring trial work up and remand of a significant number of Women's Health Product Claims, including an order entered in the MDL on January 30, 2018, that requires the work up and remand of all remaining unsettled cases (the 'WHP Pre-Trial Orders'). The WHP Pre-Trial Orders may result in material additional costs or trial verdicts in future periods in defending Women's Health Product Claims. Trials are anticipated throughout 2020 in state and federal courts. A trial in the New Jersey coordinated proceeding began in March 2018, and in April 2018 a jury entered a verdict against the Company in the total amount of $68 million ($33 million compensatory; $35 million punitive). The Company is in the process of appealing that verdict. A consolidated trial involving three plaintiffs is scheduled to begin in January 2020 in the New Jersey coordinated proceeding. The Company expects additional trials of Women's Health Product Claims to take place over the next 12 months, which may potentially include consolidated trials.\n\nIn July 2015, as part of the agreement with Medtronic noted above, Medtronic agreed to take responsibility for pursuing settlement of certain of the Women's Health Product Claims that relate to products distributed by the Company under supply agreements with Medtronic, and the Company has paid Medtronic $121 million towards these potential settlements. In June 2017, the Company amended the agreement with Medtronic to transfer responsibility for settlement of additional Women's Health Product Claims to Medtronic on terms similar to the July 2015 agreement, including with respect to the obligation to make payments to Medtronic towards these potential settlements. In August 2019, the Company paid Medtronic an additional $20 million toward additional settlements. The Company also may, in its sole discretion, transfer responsibility for settlement of additional Women's Health Product Claims to Medtronic on similar terms. The agreements do not resolve the dispute between the Company and Medtronic with respect to Women's Health Product Claims that do not settle, if any.\n\nDuring the course of engaging in settlement discussions with plaintiffs' law firms, the Company has learned, and may in future periods learn, additional information regarding these and other unfiled claims, or other lawsuits, which could materially impact the Company's estimate of the number of claims or lawsuits against the Company.\n\n64", + "recall": 0.9789473684210527, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements — (Continued) Becton, Dickinson and Company\n\nasserted or threatened against the Company but lack sufficient information to determine whether a pelvic mesh device of the Company is actually at issue. The claims identified above also include products manufactured by both the Company and two subsidiaries of Medtronic plc (as successor in interest to Covidien plc) (“Medtronic”), each a supplier of the Company. Medtronic has an obligation to defend and indemnify the Company with respect to any product defect liability relating to products its subsidiaries had manufactured. As described below, in July 2015 the Company reached an agreement with Medtronic (which was amended in June 2017) regarding certain aspects of Medtronic’s indemnification obligation. The foregoing lawsuits, unfiled claims, putative class actions, and other claims, together with claims that have settled or are the subject of agreements or agreements in principle to settle, are referred to collectively as the “Women’s Health Product Claims.” The Women’s Health Product Claims generally seek damages for personal injury allegedly resulting from use of the products.\n\nAs of September 30, 2019, the Company has reached agreements or agreements in principle with various plaintiffs’ law firms to settle their respective inventories of cases totaling approximately 15,160 of the Women’s Health Product Claims. The Company believes that these Women’s Health Product Claims are not the subject of Medtronic’s indemnification obligation. These settlement agreements and agreements in principle include unfiled and previously unknown claims held by various plaintiffs’ law firms, which are not included in the approximate number of lawsuits set forth in the first paragraph of this section. Each agreement is subject to certain conditions, including requirements for participation in the proposed settlements by a certain minimum number of plaintiffs. The Company continues to engage in discussions with other plaintiffs’ law firms regarding potential resolution of unsettled Women’s Health Product Claims, which may include additional inventory settlements.\n\nStarting in 2014 in the MDL, the court entered certain pre-trial orders requiring trial work up and remand of a significant number of Women’s Health Product Claims, including an order entered in the MDL on January 30, 2018, that requires the work up and remand of all remaining unsettled cases (the “WHP Pre-Trial Orders”). The WHP Pre-Trial Orders may result in material additional costs or trial verdicts in future periods in defending Women’s Health Product Claims. Trials are anticipated throughout 2020 in state and federal courts. A trial in the New Jersey coordinated proceeding began in March 2018, and in April 2018 a jury entered a verdict against the Company in the total amount of $68 million ($33 million compensatory; $35 million punitive). The Company is in the process of appealing that verdict. A consolidated trial involving three plaintiffs is scheduled to begin in January 2020 in the New Jersey coordinated proceeding. The Company expects additional trials of Women’s Health Product Claims to take place over the next 12 months, which may potentially include consolidated trials.\n\nIn July 2015, as part of the agreement with Medtronic noted above, Medtronic agreed to take responsibility for pursuing settlement of certain of the Women’s Health Product Claims that relate to products distributed by the Company under supply agreements with Medtronic, and the Company has paid Medtronic $121 million towards these potential settlements. In June 2017, the Company amended the agreement with Medtronic to transfer responsibility for settlement of additional Women’s Health Product Claims to Medtronic on terms similar to the July 2015 agreement, including with respect to the obligation to make payments to Medtronic towards these potential settlements. In August 2019, the Company paid Medtronic an additional $20 million toward additional settlements. The Company also may, in its sole discretion, transfer responsibility for settlement of additional Women’s Health Product Claims to Medtronic on similar terms. The agreements do not resolve the dispute between the Company and Medtronic with respect to Women’s Health Product Claims that do not settle, if any.\n\nDuring the course of engaging in settlement discussions with plaintiffs’ law firms, the Company has learned, and may in future periods learn, additional information regarding these and other unfiled claims, or other lawsuits, which could materially impact the Company’s estimate of the number of claims or lawsuits against the Company.\n\n64" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9461564643349163, + "doc_id": "214735cd1a4f01895ca6ec4ec82fd4c73080d112afb95d350afb0ad487388937", + "edit_distance": 0.07597173144876325, + "f1_score": 0.9755102040816327, + "meteor": 0.9772675834219087, + "precision": 0.9795081967213115, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS OF AMERICAN AIRLINES GROUP INC .\n\nThe fair value of our retiree medical and other postretirement benefits plans assets by asset category, were as follows (in millions):\n\nTable of Contents\n\nInvestments in the retiree medical and other postretirement benefits plans' mutual funds are valued by quoted prices on the active market, which is fair value, and represents the net asset value of the shares of such funds as of the close of business at the end of the period. Net asset value is based on the fair market value of the funds' underlying assets and liabilities at the date of determination. The AAL Class mutual funds are offered only to benefit plans of American, therefore, trading is restricted only to American, resulting in a fair value classification of Level 2. Investments included approximately 25% and 24% of investments in non-U.S. common stocks in 2020 and 2019, respectively.\n\n## Defined Contribution and Multiemployer Plans\n\nThe costs associated with our defined contribution plans were $860 million for each of the years ended December 31, 2020 and 2019 and $846 million for the year ended December 31, 2018.\n\nWe participate in the International Association of Machinists & Aerospace Workers (IAM) National Pension Fund, Employer Identification No. 516031295 and Plan No. 002 (the IAM Pension Fund). Our contributions to the IAM Pension Fund were $40 million, $32 million and $31 million for the years ended December 31, 2020, 2019 and 2018, respectively. The IAM Pension Fund reported $510 million in employers' contributions for the year ended December 31, 2019, which is the most recent year for which such information is available. For 2019, our contributions represented more than 5% of total contributions to the IAM Pension Fund.\n\nOn March 29, 2019, the actuary for the IAM Pension Fund certified that the fund was in 'endangered' status despite reporting a funded status of over 80%. Additionally, the IAM Pension Fund's Board voluntarily elected to enter into 'critical' status on April 17, 2019. Upon entry into critical status, the IAM Pension Fund was required by law to adopt a rehabilitation plan aimed at restoring the financial health of the pension plan and did so on April 17, 2019 (the Rehabilitation Plan). Under the Rehabilitation Plan, we were subject to an immaterial contribution surcharge, which ceased to apply June 14, 2019 upon our mandatory adoption of a contribution schedule under the Rehabilitation Plan. The contribution schedule requires 2.5% annual increases to our contribution rate. This contribution schedule will remain in effect through the earlier of December 31, 2031 or the date the IAM Pension Fund emerges from critical status.\n\n## Profit Sharing Program\n\nWe accrue 5% of our pre-tax income excluding net special items for our profit sharing program. As a result of our pre-tax loss excluding net special items, there will not be a payout for 2020 under our profit sharing program.\n\n136", + "recall": 0.9715447154471545, + "true_md": "## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS OF AMERICAN AIRLINES GROUP INC .\n\nTable of Contents\n\nThe fair value of our retiree medical and other postretirement benefits plans assets by asset category, were as follows (in millions):\n\nInvestments in the retiree medical and other postretirement benefits plans’ mutual funds are valued by quoted prices on the active market, which is fair value, and represents the net asset value of the shares of such funds as of the close of business at the end of the period. Net asset value is based on the fair market value of the funds’ underlying assets and liabilities at the date of determination. The AAL Class mutual funds are offered only to benefit plans of American, therefore, trading is restricted only to American, resulting in a fair value classification of Level 2. Investments included approximately 25% and 24% of investments in non-U.S. common stocks in 2020 and 2019, respectively.\n\nThe costs associated with our defined contribution plans were $860 million for each of the years ended December 31, 2020 and 2019 and $846 million for the year ended December 31, 2018.\n\nWe participate in the International Association of Machinists & Aerospace Workers (IAM) National Pension Fund, Employer Identification No. 51- 6031295 and Plan No. 002 (the IAM Pension Fund). Our contributions to the IAM Pension Fund were $40 million, $32 million and $31 million for the years ended December 31, 2020, 2019 and 2018, respectively. The IAM Pension Fund reported $510 million in employers’ contributions for the year ended December 31, 2019, which is the most recent year for which such information is available. For 2019, our contributions represented more than 5% of total contributions to the IAM Pension Fund.\n\nOn March 29, 2019, the actuary for the IAM Pension Fund certified that the fund was in “endangered” status despite reporting a funded status of over 80%. Additionally, the IAM Pension Fund’s Board voluntarily elected to enter into “critical” status on April 17, 2019. Upon entry into critical status, the IAM Pension Fund was required by law to adopt a rehabilitation plan aimed at restoring the financial health of the pension plan and did so on April 17, 2019 (the Rehabilitation Plan). Under the Rehabilitation Plan, we were subject to an immaterial contribution surcharge, which ceased to apply June 14, 2019 upon our mandatory adoption of a contribution schedule under the Rehabilitation Plan. The contribution schedule requires 2.5% annual increases to our contribution rate. This contribution schedule will remain in effect through the earlier of December 31, 2031 or the date the IAM Pension Fund emerges from critical status.\n\nWe accrue 5% of our pre-tax income excluding net special items for our profit sharing program. As a result of our pre-tax loss excluding net special items, there will not be a payout for 2020 under our profit sharing program.\n\n## Defined Contribution and Multiemployer Plans\n\n## Profit Sharing Program\n\n136" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.30351945162365135, + "doc_id": "53492de2879997d3da7a0226d1c1f7ad30aac49514fe232c12cfc99c708828be", + "edit_distance": 0.5217391304347826, + "f1_score": 0.9666666666666666, + "meteor": 0.5182399358595663, + "precision": 0.9666666666666667, + "pred_md": "\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\n\n(1)\tIncludes\tgains\tfrom\tthe\tsales\tof\tnon-strategic\tmanufacturing\tfacilities\tthat\tare\tincluded\tin\tour\tRealignment\tPrograms.\n\n(2)\tIncome\ttax\texpense\t(benefit)\tincludes\texit\ttaxes.\n\n113", + "recall": 0.9666666666666667, + "true_md": "113\n\n- (1) Includes gains from the sales of non-strategic manufacturing facilities that are included in our Realignment Programs. (2) Income tax expense (benefit) includes exit taxes.\n\n- (1) Includes gains from the sales of non-strategic manufacturing facilities that are included in our Realignment Programs. (2) Income tax expense (benefit) includes exit taxes." + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "33879221d42d5b3fe7bda29aa073a7ecfd8b6951498d417a6aeafec75e33ea50", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9921875, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Table of Contents\n\n219", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n219" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9344907601956737, + "doc_id": "6ce80b8238ef937f9ac8ef3f67c8f3cc09401e8e5a6e6fd6c114dc5bf065344d", + "edit_distance": 0.11428571428571428, + "f1_score": 0.9746192893401017, + "meteor": 0.9717482362442891, + "precision": 0.9795918367346939, + "pred_md": "## APPLIED MATERIALS, INC.\n\n## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS - (Continued)\n\n## Note 2 Earnings Per Share\n\nBasic earnings per share is determined using the weighted average number of common shares outstanding during the period. Diluted earnings per share is determined using the weighted average number of common shares and potential common shares (representing the dilutive effect of stock options, restricted stock units, and employee stock purchase plan shares) outstanding during the period. Applied's net income has not been adjusted for any period presented for purposes of computing basic or diluted earnings per share due to the Company's non-complex capital structure.\n\nTable of Contents\n\nPotentially dilutive securities attributable to outstanding stock options and restricted stock units are excluded from the calculation of diluted earnings per share where the combined exercise price and average unamortized fair value are greater than the average market price of Applied common stock, and therefore their inclusion would be anti-dilutive.\n\n74", + "recall": 0.9696969696969697, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS — (Continued)\n\n## APPLIED MATERIALS, INC.\n\n## Note 2 Earnings Per Share\n\nBasic earnings per share is determined using the weighted average number of common shares outstanding during the period. Diluted earnings per share is determined using the weighted average number of common shares and potential common shares (representing the dilutive effect of stock options, restricted stock units, and employee stock purchase plan shares) outstanding during the period. Applied’s net income has not been adjusted for any period presented for purposes of computing basic or diluted earnings per share due to the Company’s non-complex capital structure.\n\nPotentially dilutive securities attributable to outstanding stock options and restricted stock units are excluded from the calculation of diluted earnings per share where the combined exercise price and average unamortized fair value are greater than the average market price of Applied common stock, and therefore their inclusion would be anti-dilutive.\n\n74" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.839587623092576, + "doc_id": "b365516bb6785debf5e12bf43899d0d7aec29a46ddda0294203322d5cf2665fa", + "edit_distance": 0.08333333333333333, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9897345692800238, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## SCHEDULE III\n\n## REAL ESTATE PROPERTIES AND ACCUMULATED DEPRECIATION DECEMBER 31, 2020 (In thousands, except footnotes)\n\n86", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## SCHEDULE III REAL ESTATE PROPERTIES AND ACCUMULATED DEPRECIATION DECEMBER 31, 2020 (In thousands, except footnotes)\n\n86" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.936586071961294, + "doc_id": "4c4d3f309ead20cf6ffe415f158c0c57e440a4d0477ce016cfa546092ed5fb3c", + "edit_distance": 0.3333333333333333, + "f1_score": 0.9929078014184397, + "meteor": 0.987027027027027, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "97 CP\t2020\tANNUAL\tREPORT\n\nChanges in Accumulated other comprehensive loss by component are as follows:\n\nAmounts\tare\tpresented\tnet\tof\ttax. (1)\n\nAmounts in Pension and post-retirement defined benefit plans reclassified from Accumulated other comprehensive loss are as follows:\n\nImpacts\t\"Other\tcomponents\tof\tnet\tperiodic\tbenefit\trecovery\"\ton\tthe\tConsolidated\tStatements\tof\tIncome. (1)\n\n## 9. Accounts receivable, net\n\nPrior\tyear\tamounts\thave\tnot\tbeen\tadjusted\tunder\tthe\tmodified\tretrospective\tmethod\t(Note\t2). (1)\n\nOpening\tbalance\tat\tJanuary\t1,\t2020\twas\trestated\tas\tdescribed\tin\tNote\t2. (1)", + "recall": 0.9859154929577465, + "true_md": "97 CP 2020 ANNUAL REPORT\n\nChanges in Accumulated other comprehensive loss by component are as follows:\n\nAmounts in Pension and post-retirement defined benefit plans reclassified from Accumulated other comprehensive loss are as follows:\n\n## 9. Accounts receivable, net\n\nAmounts are presented net of tax. (1) \n\nImpacts \"Other components of net periodic benefit recovery\" on the Consolidated Statements of Income. (1) \n\n Prior year amounts have not been adjusted under the modified retrospective method (Note 2). (1)\n\n Opening balance at January 1, 2020 was restated as described in Note 2. (1)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5400275674689445, + "doc_id": "e7f4a9349c6bc4e1d326d6c36874e8c043beaf8957b9a85a3e06eda3f60339a9", + "edit_distance": 0.4090909090909091, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.7362551109813084, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## AMERICAN AIRLINES, INC.\n\n## CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF COMPREHENSIVE INCOME (LOSS)\n\n(In millions)\n\nTable of Contents\n\nSee accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.\n\n150", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## AMERICAN AIRLINES, INC. CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF COMPREHENSIVE INCOME (LOSS)\n\n## AMERICAN AIRLINES, INC. CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF COMPREHENSIVE INCOME (LOSS) (In millions)\n\nSee accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.\n\n150" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9130125170128133, + "doc_id": "eba437c2b8d45e41d66f8b8d9f571f5bef225695561ecaf02be7825828b06ad5", + "edit_distance": 0.6093959731543624, + "f1_score": 0.991212653778559, + "meteor": 0.8664821631472174, + "precision": 0.9929577464788732, + "pred_md": "## Table of Contents\n\n- · the importance of increasing market positions in segments with growing demand;\n- · semiconductor manufacturer's ability to reconfigure and re-use equipment, and the resulting effect on their need to purchase new equipment and services;\n- · shorter cycle times between order placements by customers and product shipment require greater reliance on forecasting of customer investment, which may lead to inventory write-offs and manufacturing inefficiencies that decrease gross margin;\n- · competitive factors that make it difficult to enhance position, including challenges in securing development-tool-of-record (DTOR) and production-tool-of-record (PTOR) positions with customers;\n- · consolidation in the semiconductor industry, including among semiconductor manufacturers and among manufacturing equipment suppliers;\n- · shifts in sourcing strategies by computer and electronics companies, and manufacturing processes for advanced circuit technologies, that impact the equipment requirements of Applied's foundry customers;\n- · the concentration of new wafer starts in Korea and Taiwan, where Applied's service penetration and service-revenue-per-wafer-start have been lower than in other regions;\n- · investment in semiconductor manufacturing capabilities in China, which may be affected by changes in economic conditions and governmental policies in China and the United States;\n- · the increasing fragmentation of semiconductor markets, leading certain markets to become too small to support the cost of a new fabrication plant, while others require less technologically advanced products; and\n- · the growing importance of specialty markets (such as Internet of Things, communications, automotive, power and sensors) that use mature process technologies and have a low barrier to entry.\n\nIf Applied does not accurately forecast and allocate appropriate resources and investment towards addressing, key technology changes and inflections, successfully develop and commercialize products to meet demand for new technologies, and effectively address industry trends, its business and results of operations may be adversely impacted.\n\n## Applied is exposed to risks as a result of ongoing changes specific to the display industry.\n\nThe global display industry historically has experienced considerable volatility in capital equipment investment levels, due in part to the limited number of display manufacturers, the concentrated nature of end-use applications, production capacity relative to end-use demand, and panel manufacturer profitability. Industry growth depends primarily on consumer demand for increasingly larger and more advanced TVs, and on demand for advanced smartphones and mobile device displays, which demand is highly sensitive to cost and improvements in technologies and features. The display industry is characterized by ongoing changes particular to this industry that impact demand for and the profitability of Applied's display products and services, including:\n\n- · the importance of new types of display technologies, such as organic light-emitting diode (OLED), low temperature polysilicon (LTPS) and metal oxide transistor backplanes, flexible displays, and new touch panel films;\n- · the increasing cost of research and development, and complexity of technology transitions and inflections, and Applied's ability to timely and effectively anticipate and adapt to these changes;\n- · the timing and extent of an expansion of manufacturing facilities in China, which may be affected by changes in local economic conditions and governmental policies in China, Korea, Japan and the United States;\n- · the importance of increasing market positions in products and technologies with growing demand;\n- · the rate of transition to larger substrate sizes for TVs and to new display technologies for TVs and mobile applications, and the resulting effect on capital intensity in the industry and on Applied's product differentiation, gross margin and return on investment; and\n- · fluctuations in customer spending quarter over quarter and year over year for display manufacturing equipment, concentration of display manufacturer customers and their ability to successfully commercialize new products and technologies, and uncertainty with respect to future display technology end-use applications and growth drivers.\n\nIf Applied does not successfully develop and commercialize products to meet demand for new and emerging display technologies, or if industry demand for display manufacturing equipment and technologies slows, Applied's business and its results of operations may be adversely impacted.\n\n21", + "recall": 0.9894736842105263, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n- • the importance of increasing market positions in segments with growing demand;\n\n- • semiconductor manufacturer’s ability to reconfigure and re-use equipment, and the resulting effect on their need to purchase new equipment and services;\n\n- • shorter cycle times between order placements by customers and product shipment require greater reliance on forecasting of customer investment, which may lead to inventory write-offs and manufacturing inefficiencies that decrease gross margin;\n\n- • competitive factors that make it difficult to enhance position, including challenges in securing development-tool-of-record (DTOR) and production-tool-of-record (PTOR) positions with customers;\n\n- • consolidation in the semiconductor industry, including among semiconductor manufacturers and among manufacturing equipment suppliers;\n\n- • shifts in sourcing strategies by computer and electronics companies, and manufacturing processes for advanced circuit technologies, that impact the equipment requirements of Applied’s foundry customers;\n\n- • the concentration of new wafer starts in Korea and Taiwan, where Applied’s service penetration and service-revenue-per-wafer-start have been lower than in other regions;\n\n- • the increasing fragmentation of semiconductor markets, leading certain markets to become too small to support the cost of a new fabrication plant, while others require less technologically advanced products; and\n\n- • the growing importance of specialty markets (such as Internet of Things, communications, automotive, power and sensors) that use mature process technologies and have a low barrier to entry.\n\n- • the importance of new types of display technologies, such as organic light-emitting diode (OLED), low temperature polysilicon (LTPS) and metal oxide transistor backplanes, flexible displays, and new touch panel films;\n\n- • the increasing cost of research and development, and complexity of technology transitions and inflections, and Applied’s ability to timely and effectively anticipate and adapt to these changes;\n\n- • the timing and extent of an expansion of manufacturing facilities in China, which may be affected by changes in local economic conditions and governmental policies in China, Korea, Japan and the United States;\n\n- • the importance of increasing market positions in products and technologies with growing demand;\n\n- • the rate of transition to larger substrate sizes for TVs and to new display technologies for TVs and mobile applications, and the resulting effect on capital intensity in the industry and on Applied’s product differentiation, gross margin and return on investment; and\n\n- • fluctuations in customer spending quarter over quarter and year over year for display manufacturing equipment, concentration of display manufacturer customers and their ability to successfully commercialize new products and technologies, and uncertainty with respect to future display technology end-use applications and growth drivers.\n\nIf Applied does not successfully develop and commercialize products to meet demand for new and emerging display technologies, or if industry demand for display manufacturing equipment and technologies slows, Applied’s business and its results of operations may be adversely impacted.\n\nThe global display industry historically has experienced considerable volatility in capital equipment investment levels, due in part to the limited number of display manufacturers, the concentrated nature of end-use applications, production capacity relative to end-use demand, and panel manufacturer profitability. Industry growth depends primarily on consumer demand for increasingly larger and more advanced TVs, and on demand for advanced smartphones and mobile device displays, which demand is highly sensitive to cost and improvements in technologies and features. The display industry is characterized by ongoing changes particular to this industry that impact demand for and the profitability of Applied’s display products and services, including:\n\nIf Applied does not accurately forecast and allocate appropriate resources and investment towards addressing, key technology changes and inflections, successfully develop and commercialize products to meet demand for new technologies, and effectively address industry trends, its business and results of operations may be adversely impacted.\n\n## Applied is exposed to risks as a result of ongoing changes specific to the display industry.\n\n21\n\n- • investment in semiconductor manufacturing capabilities in China, which may be affected by changes in economic conditions and governmental policies in China and the United States;" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.987069799441062, + "doc_id": "45e0ec93967d50818a385ef59a3aa0f90ed0f5b8319c481e618e58292814d61c", + "edit_distance": 0.02774922918807811, + "f1_score": 0.9933110367892977, + "meteor": 0.9938897096608428, + "precision": 0.9933110367892977, + "pred_md": "## Table of Contents\n\n## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS OF AMERICAN AIRLINES GROUP INC .\n\nThe PSP1 Promissory Note bears interest on the outstanding principal amount at a rate equal to 1.00% per annum until the fifth anniversary of the PSP1 Closing Date and 2.00% plus an interest rate based on the secured overnight financing rate per annum or other benchmark replacement rate consistent with customary market conventions (but not to be less than 0.00%) thereafter until the tenth anniversary of the PSP1 Closing Date (the PSP1 Maturity Date), and interest accrued thereon will be payable in arrears on the last business day of March and September of each year, which began on September 30, 2020. The aggregate principal amount outstanding under the PSP1 Promissory Note, together with all accrued and unpaid interest thereon and all other amounts payable under the PSP1 Promissory Note, will be due and payable on the PSP1 Maturity Date.\n\nWe may, at any time and from time to time, voluntarily prepay amounts outstanding under the PSP1 Promissory Note, in whole or in part, without penalty or premium. Within 30 days of the occurrence of certain change of control triggering events, we are required to prepay the aggregate outstanding principal amount of the PSP1 Promissory Note at such time, together with any accrued interest or other amounts owing under the PSP1 Promissory Note at such time.\n\nThe PSP1 Promissory Note is our senior unsecured obligation and each guarantee of the PSP1 Promissory Note is the senior unsecured obligation of each of the Subsidiaries, respectively.\n\nThe PSP1 Promissory Note contains events of default, including cross-default with respect to acceleration or failure to pay at maturity other material indebtedness. Upon the occurrence of an event of default and subject to certain grace periods, the outstanding obligations under the PSP1 Promissory Note may, and in certain circumstances will automatically, be accelerated and become due and payable immediately.\n\n## (h) 6.50% Convertible Senior Notes\n\nIn June 2020, AAG completed the public offering of $1.0 billion aggregate principal amount of AAG's 6.50% convertible senior notes due 2025 (the Convertible Notes). The Convertible Notes are fully and unconditionally guaranteed by American on a senior unsecured basis (the Convertible Notes Guarantee). The net proceeds to us from the Convertible Notes were approximately $970 million, after deducting the underwriters' discounts and commissions and our estimated offering expenses. The net proceeds from the Convertible Notes are being used for general corporate purposes and to enhance our liquidity position. The Convertible Notes were priced to investors in the offering at 100% of their principal amount.\n\nThe Convertible Notes were issued pursuant to an indenture, dated as of June 25, 2020 (the Base Indenture), between AAG and Wilmington Trust, National Association as trustee (the Convertible Notes Trustee), as supplemented by that certain first supplemental indenture, dated as of June 25, 2020, among AAG, American and the Convertible Notes Trustee (the Convertible Notes Supplemental Indenture and, together with the Base Indenture, the Convertible Notes Indenture). The Convertible Notes bear interest at a rate of 6.50% per annum. Interest on the Convertible Notes is payable semiannually in arrears on January 1 and July 1 of each year, beginning on January 1, 2021. The Convertible Notes will mature on July 1, 2025, unless earlier converted or redeemed or repurchased by us.\n\nUpon conversion, AAG will pay or deliver, as the case may be, cash, shares of AAG common stock or a combination of cash and shares of AAG common stock, at AAG's election. The initial conversion rate is 61.7284 shares of AAG common stock per $1,000 principal amount of Convertible Notes (equivalent to an initial conversion price of approximately $16.20 per share of AAG common stock). The conversion rate is subject to adjustment in some events as described in the Convertible Notes Indenture.\n\nHolders may convert their Convertible Notes at their option only in the following circumstances: (1) during any calendar quarter (and only during such calendar quarter) commencing after the calendar quarter ending on September 30, 2020, if the last reported sale price per share of AAG common stock exceeds 130% of the conversion price for each of at least 20 trading days (whether or not consecutive) during the 30 consecutive trading days ending on, and including, the last trading day of the immediately preceding calendar quarter; (2) during the five consecutive business days immediately after any 10 consecutive trading day period (such 10 consecutive trading day period, the measurement period) in which the trading price per $1,000 principal amount of Convertible Notes for each trading day of the measurement period was less than 98% of the product of the last reported sale price per share of AAG common stock on such trading day and the conversion rate on such trading day; (3) upon the occurrence of certain corporate events or distributions on AAG common stock; (4) if AAG calls such Convertible Notes for redemption; and (5) at any time from, and including, April 1, 2025 until the close of business on the scheduled trading day immediately before the maturity date of the Convertible Notes.\n\n119", + "recall": 0.9933110367892977, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS OF AMERICAN AIRLINES GROUP INC .\n\nThe PSP1 Promissory Note bears interest on the outstanding principal amount at a rate equal to 1.00% per annum until the fifth anniversary of the PSP1 Closing Date and 2.00% plus an interest rate based on the secured overnight financing rate per annum or other benchmark replacement rate consistent with customary market conventions (but not to be less than 0.00%) thereafter until the tenth anniversary of the PSP1 Closing Date (the PSP1 Maturity Date), and interest accrued thereon will be payable in arrears on the last business day of March and September of each year, which began on September 30, 2020. The aggregate principal amount outstanding under the PSP1 Promissory Note, together with all accrued and unpaid interest thereon and all other amounts payable under the PSP1 Promissory Note, will be due and payable on the PSP1 Maturity Date.\n\nWe may, at any time and from time to time, voluntarily prepay amounts outstanding under the PSP1 Promissory Note, in whole or in part, without penalty or premium. Within 30 days of the occurrence of certain change of control triggering events, we are required to prepay the aggregate outstanding principal amount of the PSP1 Promissory Note at such time, together with any accrued interest or other amounts owing under the PSP1 Promissory Note at such time.\n\nThe PSP1 Promissory Note is our senior unsecured obligation and each guarantee of the PSP1 Promissory Note is the senior unsecured obligation of each of the Subsidiaries, respectively.\n\nThe PSP1 Promissory Note contains events of default, including cross-default with respect to acceleration or failure to pay at maturity other material indebtedness. Upon the occurrence of an event of default and subject to certain grace periods, the outstanding obligations under the PSP1 Promissory Note may, and in certain circumstances will automatically, be accelerated and become due and payable immediately.\n\nIn June 2020, AAG completed the public offering of $1.0 billion aggregate principal amount of AAG’s 6.50% convertible senior notes due 2025 (the Convertible Notes). The Convertible Notes are fully and unconditionally guaranteed by American on a senior unsecured basis (the Convertible Notes Guarantee). The net proceeds to us from the Convertible Notes were approximately $970 million, after deducting the underwriters’ discounts and commissions and our estimated offering expenses. The net proceeds from the Convertible Notes are being used for general corporate purposes and to enhance our liquidity position. The Convertible Notes were priced to investors in the offering at 100% of their principal amount.\n\nThe Convertible Notes were issued pursuant to an indenture, dated as of June 25, 2020 (the Base Indenture), between AAG and Wilmington Trust, National Association as trustee (the Convertible Notes Trustee), as supplemented by that certain first supplemental indenture, dated as of June 25, 2020, among AAG, American and the Convertible Notes Trustee (the Convertible Notes Supplemental Indenture and, together with the Base Indenture, the Convertible Notes Indenture). The Convertible Notes bear interest at a rate of 6.50% per annum. Interest on the Convertible Notes is payable semiannually in arrears on January 1 and July 1 of each year, beginning on January 1, 2021. The Convertible Notes will mature on July 1, 2025, unless earlier converted or redeemed or repurchased by us.\n\nUpon conversion, AAG will pay or deliver, as the case may be, cash, shares of AAG common stock or a combination of cash and shares of AAG common stock, at AAG’s election. The initial conversion rate is 61.7284 shares of AAG common stock per $1,000 principal amount of Convertible Notes (equivalent to an initial conversion price of approximately $16.20 per share of AAG common stock). The conversion rate is subject to adjustment in some events as described in the Convertible Notes Indenture.\n\nHolders may convert their Convertible Notes at their option only in the following circumstances: (1) during any calendar quarter (and only during such calendar quarter) commencing after the calendar quarter ending on September 30, 2020, if the last reported sale price per share of AAG common stock exceeds 130% of the conversion price for each of at least 20 trading days (whether or not consecutive) during the 30 consecutive trading days ending on, and including, the last trading day of the immediately preceding calendar quarter; (2) during the five consecutive business days immediately after any 10 consecutive trading day period (such 10 consecutive trading day period, the measurement period) in which the trading price per $1,000 principal amount of Convertible Notes for each trading day of the measurement period was less than 98% of the product of the last reported sale price per share of AAG common stock on such trading day and the conversion rate on such trading day; (3) upon the occurrence of certain corporate events or distributions on AAG common stock; (4) if AAG calls such Convertible Notes for redemption; and (5) at any time from, and including, April 1, 2025 until the close of business on the scheduled trading day immediately before the maturity date of the Convertible Notes.\n\n119\n\n## (h) 6.50% Convertible Senior Notes" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8911336211435464, + "doc_id": "3ce0b442bc038081a1e34587b15c5dfc777064d3bd63537cb3b20ad8603ad0ef", + "edit_distance": 0.7430340557275542, + "f1_score": 0.9807692307692306, + "meteor": 0.7286354896995403, + "precision": 0.9807692307692307, + "pred_md": "## Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements - (Continued)\n\nBecton, Dickinson and Company\n\nsecurities classified within Level 1 are based on the closing price reported on the major market on which the investments are traded.\n\n## Cash and Cash Equivalents\n\nA portion of the U.S. plans' assets consists of investments in cash and cash equivalents, primarily to accommodate liquidity requirements relating to trade settlement and benefit payment activity, and the values of these assets are based upon quoted market prices.\n\n## Other Securities\n\nOther U.S. pension plan assets include fund investments comprised of underlying assets of real estate, infrastructure, commodities and hedge funds. The values of such instruments classified within Level 1 are based on the closing price reported on the major market on which the investments are traded.\n\n## International Plans\n\nInternational plan assets comprise 29% of the Company's total benefit plan assets, based on market value at September 30, 2019. Such plans have local independent fiduciary committees, with responsibility for development and oversight of investment policy, including asset allocation decisions. In making such decisions, consideration is given to local regulations, investment practices and funding rules.\n\nThe following table provides the fair value measurements of international plan assets, as well as the measurement techniques and inputs utilized to measure fair value of these assets, at September 30, 2019 and 2018.\n\nTable of Contents\n\n(a) As\tper\tapplicable\tdisclosure\trequirements,\tcertain\tinvestments\tthat\twere\tmeasured\tat\tnet\tasset\tvalue\tper\tshare\tor\tits\tequivalent\thave\tnot been\tcategorized\twithin\tthe\tfair\tvalue\thierarchy.\tValues\tof\tsuch\tassets\tare\tbased\ton\tthe\tcorroborated\tnet\tasset\tvalue\tprovided\tby\tthe\tfund administrator.\n\n82", + "recall": 0.9807692307692307, + "true_md": "## Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements — (Continued) Becton, Dickinson and Company\n\n## Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements — (Continued) Becton, Dickinson and Company\n\nTable of Contents\n\n(a) As per applicable disclosure requirements, certain investments that were measured at net asset value per share or its equivalent have not been categorized within the fair value hierarchy. Values of such assets are based on the corroborated net asset value provided by the fund administrator.\n\nInternational plan assets comprise 29% of the Company’s total benefit plan assets, based on market value at September 30, 2019. Such plans have local independent fiduciary committees, with responsibility for development and oversight of investment policy, including asset allocation decisions. In making such decisions, consideration is given to local regulations, investment practices and funding rules.\n\nThe following table provides the fair value measurements of international plan assets, as well as the measurement techniques and inputs utilized to measure fair value of these assets, at September 30, 2019 and 2018.\n\nOther U.S. pension plan assets include fund investments comprised of underlying assets of real estate, infrastructure, commodities and hedge funds. The values of such instruments classified within Level 1 are based on the closing price reported on the major market on which the investments are traded.\n\nA portion of the U.S. plans’ assets consists of investments in cash and cash equivalents, primarily to accommodate liquidity requirements relating to trade settlement and benefit payment activity, and the values of these assets are based upon quoted market prices.\n\nsecurities classified within Level 1 are based on the closing price reported on the major market on which the investments are traded.\n\n## Cash and Cash Equivalents\n\n## Other Securities\n\n## International Plans\n\n82" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "60b8ee1bfd8b4d51f3f19e866ce33f2f94a73fc1b51a3a4baa683ace6e333c4e", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999999235380825, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "The following is a summary of total inception to date charges, net of adjustments, related to the 2020 Realignment Program initiated in 2020:\n\nRestructuring charges represent costs associated with the relocation or reorganization of certain business activities and facility closures and include costs related to employee severance at closed facilities, contract termination costs, asset write-downs and other costs. Severance costs primarily include costs associated with involuntary termination benefits. Contract termination costs include costs related to the termination of operating leases or other contract termination costs. Asset write-downs include accelerated depreciation of fixed assets, accelerated amortization of intangible assets, divestiture of certain non-strategic assets and inventory write-downs. Other costs generally include costs related to employee relocation, asset relocation, vacant facility costs (i.e., taxes and insurance) and other charges.\n\nThe following is a summary of restructuring charges, net of adjustments, for our restructuring activities. Restructuring charges incurred in 2020 related to our 2020 Realignment Program and restructuring charges incurred in 2019 related to our 2015 Realignment Programs:\n\n114", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "The following is a summary of total inception to date charges, net of adjustments, related to the 2020 Realignment Program initiated in 2020:\n\nRestructuring charges represent costs associated with the relocation or reorganization of certain business activities and facility closures and include costs related to employee severance at closed facilities, contract termination costs, asset write-downs and other costs. Severance costs primarily include costs associated with involuntary termination benefits. Contract termination costs include costs related to the termination of operating leases or other contract termination costs. Asset write-downs include accelerated depreciation of fixed assets, accelerated amortization of intangible assets, divestiture of certain non-strategic assets and inventory write-downs. Other costs generally include costs related to employee relocation, asset relocation, vacant facility costs (i.e., taxes and insurance) and other charges.\n\nThe following is a summary of restructuring charges, net of adjustments, for our restructuring activities. Restructuring charges incurred in 2020 related to our 2020 Realignment Program and restructuring charges incurred in 2019 related to our 2015 Realignment Programs:\n\n114" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.952430753315281, + "doc_id": "7ab77d838e8299371489e87c186179642ea71b48d805fb921892f461b3f47472", + "edit_distance": 0.9241486068111455, + "f1_score": 0.9814323607427056, + "meteor": 0.7479502748885676, + "precision": 0.9893048128342246, + "pred_md": "- · The Medical segment's gross profit margin in 2019 was higher as compared with 2018 primarily due to lower manufacturing costs resulting from continuous improvement projects which enhanced the efficiency of our operations. Additionally, the comparison of gross profit margin in 2019 with gross profit margin in 2018 reflected the unfavorable impacts in 2018 of a fair value step-up adjustment relating to Bard's inventory on the acquisition date and charges to write down the value of fixed assets, primarily in the Diabetes Care unit. These favorable impacts to the Medical segment's gross margin in 2019 were partially offset by unfavorable foreign currency translation, higher raw material costs and pricing pressures. The Medical segment's gross profit margin in 2018 was lower as compared with 2017 primarily due to the expense related to amortization of intangible assets acquired in the Bard transaction as well as the impact of the fair value step-up adjustment and writedown charges noted above. The Medical segment's gross profit margin in 2018 was also unfavorably impacted by higher raw material costs and pricing pressures. These unfavorable impacts to the Medical segment's gross margin were partially offset by lower manufacturing costs resulting from continuous improvement projects which enhanced the efficiency of our operations and favorable product mix impact relating to the Bard products reported within the segment.\n- · Selling and administrative expense as a percentage of revenues in 2019 was relatively flat compared with 2018. Selling and administrative expense as a percentage of revenues in 2018 was lower compared with 2017 which primarily reflected a reduction in the general and administrative costs allocated to the segment, as noted above.\n- · Research and development expense as a percentage of revenues was lower in 2019 due to recent completion of projects and the timing of project spending. Research and development expense as a percentage of revenues in 2018 was higher compared with 2017 which reflected increased investment in new products and platforms.\n\n## Life Sciences Segment\n\nThe following summarizes Life Sciences revenues by organizational unit:\n\nTable of Contents\n\nThe Life Sciences segment's revenues in 2019 reflected continued strength in sales of the Preanalytical Systems unit's sales of core products in emerging markets. The Diagnostic Systems unit's 2019 revenues reflected growth in its BD MAX TM molecular platform as well as growth in sales of core microbiology products. This sales growth in the Diagnostic Systems unit was partially offset by an unfavorable comparison of the unit's U.S. revenues in 2019 to revenues in 2018, as the prior-year period benefited from a more severe influenza season. Revenues in the Biosciences unit in 2019 reflected growth in research reagent sales, as well as growth in U.S. research instrument sales, but were unfavorably impacted by the divestiture of the Advanced Bioprocessing business, as previously discussed. The Biosciences unit's results for 2018 and 2017 included revenues associated with the Advanced Bioprocessing business of $106 million and $103 million, respectively.\n\nThe Life Sciences segment's 2018 revenues was driven by growth across all three of its organizational units. The Diagnostic Systems unit's revenues were primarily driven by sales of core microbiology products as well as continued strength in sales of the unit's BD MAX TM molecular platform. Revenue growth in the Diagnostic Systems unit also reflected a more severe influenza season in 2018 compared with 2017. The Life Sciences segment's 2018 revenue growth was also driven by the Biosciences unit's sales of research reagents and recently launched instruments. Growth in the Preanalytical Systems unit reflected global sales of core products.\n\n26", + "recall": 0.9736842105263158, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\nThe following summarizes Life Sciences revenues by organizational unit:\n\nThe Life Sciences segment's revenues in 2019 reflected continued strength in sales of the Preanalytical Systems unit's sales of core products in emerging markets. The Diagnostic Systems unit's 2019 revenues reflected growth in its BD MAX $^{TM}$ molecular platform as well as growth in sales of core microbiology products. This sales growth in the Diagnostic Systems unit was partially offset by an unfavorable comparison of the unit's U.S. revenues in 2019 to revenues in 2018, as the prior-year period benefited from a more severe influenza season. Revenues in the Biosciences unit in 2019 reflected growth in research reagent sales, as well as growth in U.S. research instrument sales, but were unfavorably impacted by the divestiture of the Advanced Bioprocessing business, as previously discussed. The Biosciences unit's results for 2018 and 2017 included revenues associated with the Advanced Bioprocessing business of $106 million and $103 million, respectively.\n\nThe Life Sciences segment's 2018 revenues was driven by growth across all three of its organizational units. The Diagnostic Systems unit's revenues were primarily driven by sales of core microbiology products as well as continued strength in sales of the unit's BD MAX $^{TM}$ molecular platform. Revenue growth in the Diagnostic Systems unit also reflected a more severe influenza season in 2018 compared with 2017. The Life Sciences segment's 2018 revenue growth was also driven by the Biosciences unit's sales of research reagents and recently launched instruments. Growth in the Preanalytical Systems unit reflected global sales of core products.\n\n26\n\n## Life Sciences Segment\n\n- • The Medical segment's gross profit margin in 2019 was higher as compared with 2018 primarily due to lower manufacturing costs resulting from continuous improvement projects which enhanced the efficiency of our operations. Additionally, the comparison of gross profit margin in 2019 with gross profit margin in 2018 reflected the unfavorable impacts in 2018 of a fair value step-up adjustment relating to Bard's inventory on the acquisition date and charges to write down the value of fixed assets, primarily in the Diabetes Care unit. These favorable impacts to the Medical segment's gross margin in 2019 were partially offset by unfavorable foreign currency translation, higher raw material costs and pricing pressures. The Medical segment's gross profit margin in 2018 was lower as compared with 2017 primarily due to the expense related to amortization of intangible assets acquired in the Bard transaction as well as the impact of the fair value step-up adjustment and write- down charges noted above. The Medical segment's gross profit margin in 2018 was also unfavorably impacted by higher raw material costs and pricing pressures. These unfavorable impacts to the Medical segment's gross margin were partially offset by lower manufacturing costs resulting from continuous improvement projects which enhanced the efficiency of our operations and favorable product mix impact relating to the Bard products reported within the segment.\n\n- • Selling and administrative expense as a percentage of revenues in 2019 was relatively flat compared with 2018. Selling and administrative expense as a percentage of revenues in 2018 was lower compared with 2017 which primarily reflected a reduction in the general and administrative costs allocated to the segment, as noted above.\n\n- • Research and development expense as a percentage of revenues was lower in 2019 due to recent completion of projects and the timing of project spending. Research and development expense as a percentage of revenues in 2018 was higher compared with 2017 which reflected increased investment in new products and platforms." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6909031239684927, + "doc_id": "a72b5bef98068151a0d2e0cb426fa9e25a55fd0828db9cc7c6b6f403414e8bc6", + "edit_distance": 0.4444444444444444, + "f1_score": 0.9354838709677418, + "meteor": 0.7267961819036655, + "precision": 0.90625, + "pred_md": "CP\t2020\tANNUAL\tREPORT\n\nThe following table provides the Company's weighted-average remaining lease terms and discount rates:\n\nSupplemental information related to leases is as follows:\n\nThe following table provides the maturities of lease liabilities for the next five years and thereafter as at December 31, 2020:\n\n## 20. Shareholders' equity\n\n## Authorized and issued share capital\n\nThe Company is authorized to issue an unlimited number of Common Shares, an unlimited number of First Preferred Shares, and an unlimited number of Second Preferred Shares. At December 31, 2020, no First or Second Preferred Shares had been issued.", + "recall": 0.9666666666666667, + "true_md": "CP 2020 ANNUAL REPORT 108\n\nThe following table provides the Company's weighted-average remaining lease terms and discount rates:\n\nThe following table provides the maturities of lease liabilities for the next five years and thereafter as at December 31, 2020:\n\nAuthorized and issued share capital The Company is authorized to issue an unlimited number of Common Shares, an unlimited number of First Preferred Shares, and an unlimited number of Second Preferred Shares. At December 31, 2020, no First or Second Preferred Shares had been issued.\n\n## 20. Shareholders’ equity\n\n## Authorized and issued share capital The Company is authorized to issue an unlimited number of Common Shares, an unlimited number of First Preferred Shares, and an unlimited number of Second" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9511253775583349, + "doc_id": "b739a27d46362365e7a474c2c6ffa22c4623eb156f3137ebbb527f7104ac35d2", + "edit_distance": 0.08898305084745763, + "f1_score": 0.9915611814345994, + "meteor": 0.9805916246032602, + "precision": 0.9957627118644068, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS OF AMERICAN AIRLINES, INC.\n\n## 11. Supplemental Cash Flow Information\n\nSupplemental disclosure of cash flow information and non-cash investing and financing activities are as follows (in millions):\n\nTable of Contents\n\n## 12. Operating Segments and Related Disclosures\n\nAmerican is managed as a single business unit that provides air transportation for passengers and cargo. This allows it to benefit from an integrated revenue pricing and route network that includes American and AAG's wholly-owned and third-party regional carriers that fly under capacity purchase agreements operating as American Eagle. The flight equipment of all these carriers is combined to form one fleet that is deployed through a single route scheduling system. Financial information and annual operational plans and forecasts are prepared and reviewed by the chief operating decision maker at the consolidated level. When making operational decisions, the chief operating decision maker evaluates flight profitability data, which considers aircraft type and route economics, but is indifferent to the results of the individual regional carriers. The objective in making operational decisions is to maximize consolidated financial results, not the individual results of American or American Eagle.\n\nSee Note 1(l) for American's passenger revenue by geographic region. American's tangible assets consist primarily of flight equipment, which are mobile across geographic markets and, therefore, have not been allocated.\n\n## 13. Share-based Compensation\n\nThe 2013 AAG Incentive Award Plan (the 2013 Plan) provides that awards may be in the form of an option, restricted stock award, restricted stock unit award, performance award, dividend equivalent award, deferred stock award, deferred stock unit award, stock payment award or stock appreciation right. The 2013 Plan initially authorized the grant of awards for the issuance of up to 40 million shares. Any shares underlying awards granted under the 2013 Plan that are forfeited, terminate or are settled in cash (in whole or in part) without the delivery of shares will again be available for grant.\n\nFor the years ended December 31, 2020, 2019 and 2018, American recorded $91 million, $95 million and $88 million, respectively, of share-based compensation costs principally in salaries, wages and benefits expense on its consolidated statements of operations.\n\nDuring 2020, 2019 and 2018, AAG withheld approximately 0.7 million, 0.8 million and 0.8 million shares of AAG common stock, respectively, and paid approximately $15 million, $25 million and $37 million, respectively, in satisfaction of certain tax withholding obligations associated with employee equity awards.\n\n196", + "recall": 0.9873949579831933, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS OF AMERICAN AIRLINES, INC.\n\n- 11. Supplemental Cash Flow Information\n\n- 12. Operating Segments and Related Disclosures\n\n- 13. Share-based Compensation\n\nSupplemental disclosure of cash flow information and non-cash investing and financing activities are as follows (in millions):\n\nAmerican is managed as a single business unit that provides air transportation for passengers and cargo. This allows it to benefit from an integrated revenue pricing and route network that includes American and AAG’s wholly-owned and third-party regional carriers that fly under capacity purchase agreements operating as American Eagle. The flight equipment of all these carriers is combined to form one fleet that is deployed through a single route scheduling system. Financial information and annual operational plans and forecasts are prepared and reviewed by the chief operating decision maker at the consolidated level. When making operational decisions, the chief operating decision maker evaluates flight profitability data, which considers aircraft type and route economics, but is indifferent to the results of the individual regional carriers. The objective in making operational decisions is to maximize consolidated financial results, not the individual results of American or American Eagle.\n\nSee Note 1(l) for American’s passenger revenue by geographic region. American’s tangible assets consist primarily of flight equipment, which are mobile across geographic markets and, therefore, have not been allocated.\n\nThe 2013 AAG Incentive Award Plan (the 2013 Plan) provides that awards may be in the form of an option, restricted stock award, restricted stock unit award, performance award, dividend equivalent award, deferred stock award, deferred stock unit award, stock payment award or stock appreciation right. The 2013 Plan initially authorized the grant of awards for the issuance of up to 40 million shares. Any shares underlying awards granted under the 2013 Plan that are forfeited, terminate or are settled in cash (in whole or in part) without the delivery of shares will again be available for grant.\n\nFor the years ended December 31, 2020, 2019 and 2018, American recorded $91 million, $95 million and $88 million, respectively, of share-based compensation costs principally in salaries, wages and benefits expense on its consolidated statements of operations.\n\nDuring 2020, 2019 and 2018, AAG withheld approximately 0.7 million, 0.8 million and 0.8 million shares of AAG common stock, respectively, and paid approximately $15 million, $25 million and $37 million, respectively, in satisfaction of certain tax withholding obligations associated with employee equity awards.\n\n196" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9535773470753847, + "doc_id": "6aa9bc96cac89b2f6a7d9d0efbbb6c84b1d229037ef153919e896a1835472027", + "edit_distance": 0.05612244897959184, + "f1_score": 0.9818181818181817, + "meteor": 0.9804023601535014, + "precision": 0.9878048780487805, + "pred_md": "The following table presents the components of our total net special items and the reconciliation of pre-tax income (loss) and net income (loss) (GAAP measures) to pre-tax income (loss) excluding net special items and net income (loss) excluding net special items (non-GAAP measures). Management uses pre-tax income (loss) excluding net special items and net income (loss) excluding net special items to evaluate our current operating performance and to allow for period-to-period comparisons. As net special items may vary from period-to-period in nature and amount, the adjustment to exclude net special items allows management an additional tool to understand our core operating performance.\n\nTable of Contents\n\nSee\tNote\t2\tto\tAAG's\tConsolidated\tFinancial\tStatements\tin\tPart\tII,\tItem\t8A\tfor\tfurther\tinformation\ton\tnet\tspecial\titems. (1)\n\nPSP1\tFinancial\tAssistance\trepresents\trecognition\tof\tfinancial\tassistance\treceived\tfrom\tTreasury\tpursuant\tto\tthe\tPSP1\tAgreement.\tSee\tNote\t1(b) to\tAAG's\tConsolidated\tFinancial\tStatements\tin\tPart\tII,\tItem\t8A\tfor\tfurther\tinformation. (2)\n\n61", + "recall": 0.9759036144578314, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\nThe following table presents the components of our total net special items and the reconciliation of pre-tax income (loss) and net income (loss) (GAAP measures) to pre-tax income (loss) excluding net special items and net income (loss) excluding net special items (non-GAAP measures). Management uses pre-tax income (loss) excluding net special items and net income (loss) excluding net special items to evaluate our current operating performance and to allow for period-to-period comparisons. As net special items may vary from period-to-period in nature and amount, the adjustment to exclude net special items allows management an additional tool to understand our core operating performance.\n\n61\n\nSee Note 2 to AAG’s Consolidated Financial Statements in Part II, Item 8A for further information on net special items. (1)\n\nPSP1 Financial Assistance represents recognition of financial assistance received from Treasury pursuant to the PSP1 Agreement. See Note 1(b) to AAG’s Consolidated Financial Statements in Part II, Item 8A for further information. (2)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7994413183680626, + "doc_id": "ac14f0312cddda7cc5d6722278e67bdca036a08580c53a1c35fc588da20e4b17", + "edit_distance": 0.19076923076923077, + "f1_score": 0.994475138121547, + "meteor": 0.7815601283611426, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "U.S. revenues in 2018 benefited from the inclusion of revenues associated with Bard products in our financial results beginning on January 1, 2018. Underlying 2018 revenue growth in the United States was driven by revenues in the Medical segment's Medication Delivery Solutions and Medication Management Solutions units, as well as by revenues in the Life Sciences segment's Diagnostic Systems unit.\n\nInternational revenues in 2019 reflected growth in all three segments. International revenues in 2019 were favorably impacted by the inclusion of revenues associated with Bard's products in results for the first quarter of fiscal year 2019, as noted above. Fiscal year 2019 international revenue growth was also driven by sales in the Medical segment's Medication Delivery Solutions and Pharmaceutical Systems units as well as by sales in the Life Sciences segment's Diagnostic Systems and Preanalytical Systems units.\n\nInternational revenue growth in 2018 benefited from the inclusion of revenues associated with Bard products in our financial results. International revenue growth in 2018 also reflected increased sales in the Medical segment's Medication Delivery Solutions, Medication Management Solutions and Pharmaceutical Systems units, as well as growth attributable to sales in all three of the Life Sciences segment's organizational units.\n\nEmerging market revenues were $2.71 billion, $2.53 billion and $1.95 billion in 2019, 2018 and 2017, respectively. Foreign currency translation unfavorably impacted emerging market revenues in 2019 by an estimated $155 million and favorably impacted emerging market revenues in 2018 by an estimated $19 million. Emerging market revenue growth in 2019 was favorably impacted by the inclusion of revenues associated with Bard's products in our results for the first quarter of fiscal year 2019, as noted above. Emerging market revenue growth in 2018 benefited from the inclusion of revenues associated with Bard products in our financial results beginning on January 1, 2018. Underlying growth in fiscal years 2019 and 2018 was particularly driven by sales in China and EMA.\n\n## Specified Items\n\nReflected in the financial results for 2019, 2018 and 2017 were the following specified items:\n\nTable of Contents\n\n(a) Represents\tintegration,\trestructuring\tand\ttransaction\tcosts,\trecorded\tin Acquisitions\tand\tother\trestructurings ,\twhich\tare\tfurther\tdiscussed below.\n\n(b) Represents\tfinancing\timpacts\tassociated\twith\tthe\tBard\tacquisition,\twhich\twere\trecorded\tin Interest\tincome and Interest\texpense .\n\n(c) Primarily\trepresents\tnon-cash\tamortization\texpense\tassociated\twith\tacquisition-related\tidentifiable\tintangible\tassets\tand\tother\tadjustments related\tto\tthe\tpurchase\taccounting\tfor\tacquisitions.\tBD's\tamortization\texpense\tis\tprimarily\trecorded\tin Cost\tof\tproducts\tsold .\tThe\tamount\tin 2018\tincluded\tfair\tvalue\tstep-up\tadjustments\tof\t$478\tmillion\trelating\tto\tBard's\tinventory\ton\tthe\tacquisition\tdate.\n\n(d) The\tamount\tin\t2019\tincludes\tcharges\trelating\tto\tcertain\tproduct\tliability\tmatters\tand\tthe\testimated\tcost\tof\ta\tproduct\trecall,\tas\twell\tas\tthe pre-tax\tgain\trecognized\ton\tBD's\tsale\tof\tits\tAdvanced\tBioprocessing\tbusiness.\tThe\tamount\tin\t2017\tlargely\trepresents\tthe\treversal\tof\tcertain reserves\trelated\tto\tan\tappellate\n\n29", + "recall": 0.989010989010989, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\nU.S. revenues in 2018 benefited from the inclusion of revenues associated with Bard products in our financial results beginning on January 1, 2018. Underlying 2018 revenue growth in the United States was driven by revenues in the Medical segment's Medication Delivery Solutions and Medication Management Solutions units, as well as by revenues in the Life Sciences segment's Diagnostic Systems unit.\n\nInternational revenues in 2019 reflected growth in all three segments. International revenues in 2019 were favorably impacted by the inclusion of revenues associated with Bard's products in results for the first quarter of fiscal year 2019, as noted above. Fiscal year 2019 international revenue growth was also driven by sales in the Medical segment's Medication Delivery Solutions and Pharmaceutical Systems units as well as by sales in the Life Sciences segment's Diagnostic Systems and Preanalytical Systems units.\n\nInternational revenue growth in 2018 benefited from the inclusion of revenues associated with Bard products in our financial results. International revenue growth in 2018 also reflected increased sales in the Medical segment's Medication Delivery Solutions, Medication Management Solutions and Pharmaceutical Systems units, as well as growth attributable to sales in all three of the Life Sciences segment's organizational units.\n\nEmerging market revenues were $2.71 billion, $2.53 billion and $1.95 billion in 2019, 2018 and 2017, respectively. Foreign currency translation unfavorably impacted emerging market revenues in 2019 by an estimated $155 million and favorably impacted emerging market revenues in 2018 by an estimated $19 million. Emerging market revenue growth in 2019 was favorably impacted by the inclusion of revenues associated with Bard's products in our results for the first quarter of fiscal year 2019, as noted above. Emerging market revenue growth in 2018 benefited from the inclusion of revenues associated with Bard products in our financial results beginning on January 1, 2018. Underlying growth in fiscal years 2019 and 2018 was particularly driven by sales in China and EMA.\n\nReflected in the financial results for 2019, 2018 and 2017 were the following specified items:\n\n## Specified Items\n\n(a) Represents integration, restructuring and transaction costs, recorded in Acquisitions and other restructurings , which are further discussed below. (b) Represents financing impacts associated with the Bard acquisition, which were recorded in Interest income and Interest expense .\n\nbelow. (b) Represents financing impacts associated with the Bard acquisition, which were recorded in Interest income and Interest expense . (c) Primarily represents non-cash amortization expense associated with acquisition-related identifiable intangible assets and other adjustments\n\n(b) Represents financing impacts associated with the Bard acquisition, which were recorded in Interest income and Interest expense . (c) Primarily represents non-cash amortization expense associated with acquisition-related identifiable intangible assets and other adjustments related to the purchase accounting for acquisitions. BD’s amortization expense is primarily recorded in Cost of products sold . The amount in 2018 included fair value step-up adjustments of $478 million relating to Bard's inventory on the acquisition date. (d) The amount in 2019 includes charges relating to certain product liability matters and the estimated cost of a product recall, as well as the\n\n2018 included fair value step-up adjustments of $478 million relating to Bard's inventory on the acquisition date. (d) The amount in 2019 includes charges relating to certain product liability matters and the estimated cost of a product recall, as well as the pre-tax gain recognized on BD's sale of its Advanced Bioprocessing business. The amount in 2017 largely represents the reversal of certain reserves related to an appellate\n\n29" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9899249103436869, + "doc_id": "440bcd5c0f8e548ca71229e6aa63457acf6dc6892ddb40873de8cb1507502d00", + "edit_distance": 0.20102564102564102, + "f1_score": 0.9956458635703918, + "meteor": 0.9315494408014361, + "precision": 0.997093023255814, + "pred_md": "## Table of Contents\n\nDamage to our reputation or brand image or loss of customer confidence in our services could adversely affect our business and financial results, as well as require additional resources to rebuild our reputation.\n\nMoreover, the outbreak and spread of COVID-19 have adversely impacted consumer perceptions of the health and safety of travel, and in particular airline travel, and these negative perceptions could continue even after the pandemic subsides. Actual or perceived risk of infection on our flights has had, and may continue to have, a material adverse effect on the public's perception of us, which has harmed, and may continue to harm, our reputation and business. We have taken various measures to reassure our team members and the traveling public of the safety of air travel, including requirements that passengers wear face coverings, the provision of protective equipment for team members and enhanced cleaning procedures onboard aircraft and in airports. We expect that we will continue to incur COVID-19 related costs as we sanitize aircraft, implement additional hygiene-related protocols and take other actions to limit the threat of infection among our employees and passengers. However, we cannot assure that these or any other actions we might take in response to the COVID-19 pandemic will be sufficient to restore the confidence of consumers in the safety of air travel.\n\n## We are at risk of losses and adverse publicity stemming from any public incident involving our company, our people or our brand, including any accident or other public incident involving our personnel or aircraft, or the personnel or aircraft of our regional, codeshare or joint business operators.\n\nIn a modern world where news can be captured and travel rapidly, we are at risk of adverse publicity stemming from any public incident involving our company, our people or our brand. Such an incident could involve the actual or alleged behavior of any of our employees. Further, if our personnel, one of our aircraft, a type of aircraft in our fleet, or personnel of, or an aircraft that is operated under our brand by, one of our regional operators or an airline with which we have a marketing alliance, joint business or codeshare relationship, were to be involved in a public incident, accident, catastrophe or regulatory enforcement action, we could be exposed to significant reputational harm and potential legal liability. The insurance we carry may be inapplicable or inadequate to cover any such incident, accident, catastrophe or action. In the event that our insurance is inapplicable or inadequate, we may be forced to bear substantial losses from an incident or accident. In addition, any such incident, accident, catastrophe or action involving our personnel, one of our aircraft (or personnel and aircraft of our regional operators and our codeshare partners), or a type of aircraft fleet could create an adverse public perception, which could harm our reputation, result in air travelers being reluctant to fly on our aircraft or those of our regional operators or codeshare partners, and adversely impact our business, results of operations and financial condition.\n\n## We face challenges in integrating our computer, communications and other technology systems.\n\nWhile we have to date successfully integrated many of our computer, communication and other technology systems in connection with the merger of US Airways and American, including our customer reservations system and our pilot, flight attendant and fleet scheduling system, we still have to complete several additional important system integration or replacement projects. In a number of prior airline mergers, the integration of these systems or deployment of replacement systems has taken longer, been more disruptive and cost more than originally forecasted. The implementation process to integrate or replace these various systems will involve a number of risks that could adversely impact our business, results of operations and financial condition. New systems will replace multiple legacy systems and the related implementations will be a complex and timeconsuming project involving substantial expenditures for implementation consultants, system hardware, software and implementation activities, as well as the transformation of business and financial processes.\n\nWe cannot assure that our security measures, change control procedures or disaster recovery plans will be adequate to prevent disruptions or delays in connection with systems integration or replacement. Disruptions in or changes to these systems could result in a disruption to our business and the loss of important data. Any of the foregoing could result in a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations and financial condition.\n\n## Changes to our business model that are designed to increase revenues may not be successful and may cause operational difficulties or decreased demand.\n\nWe have recently instituted, and intend to institute in the future, changes to our business model designed to increase revenues and offset costs. These measures include further segmentation of the classes of services we offer, such as Premium Economy service and Basic Economy service, enhancements to our AAdvantage loyalty program, charging separately for services that had previously been included within the price of a ticket, changing (whether it be increasing, decreasing or eliminating) other pre-existing fees, reconfiguration of our aircraft cabins, and efforts to optimize our network including by focusing growth on a limited number of large hubs. For example, in 2020, we eliminated change fees for most\n\n35", + "recall": 0.9942028985507246, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\nDamage to our reputation or brand image or loss of customer confidence in our services could adversely affect our business and financial results, as well as require additional resources to rebuild our reputation.\n\nMoreover, the outbreak and spread of COVID-19 have adversely impacted consumer perceptions of the health and safety of travel, and in particular airline travel, and these negative perceptions could continue even after the pandemic subsides. Actual or perceived risk of infection on our flights has had, and may continue to have, a material adverse effect on the public's perception of us, which has harmed, and may continue to harm, our reputation and business. We have taken various measures to reassure our team members and the traveling public of the safety of air travel, including requirements that passengers wear face coverings, the provision of protective equipment for team members and enhanced cleaning procedures onboard aircraft and in airports. We expect that we will continue to incur COVID-19 related costs as we sanitize aircraft, implement additional hygiene-related protocols and take other actions to limit the threat of infection among our employees and passengers. However, we cannot assure that these or any other actions we might take in response to the COVID-19 pandemic will be sufficient to restore the confidence of consumers in the safety of air travel.\n\nIn a modern world where news can be captured and travel rapidly, we are at risk of adverse publicity stemming from any public incident involving our company, our people or our brand. Such an incident could involve the actual or alleged behavior of any of our employees. Further, if our personnel, one of our aircraft, a type of aircraft in our fleet, or personnel of, or an aircraft that is operated under our brand by, one of our regional operators or an airline with which we have a marketing alliance, joint business or codeshare relationship, were to be involved in a public incident, accident, catastrophe or regulatory enforcement action, we could be exposed to significant reputational harm and potential legal liability. The insurance we carry may be inapplicable or inadequate to cover any such incident, accident, catastrophe or action. In the event that our insurance is inapplicable or inadequate, we may be forced to bear substantial losses from an incident or accident. In addition, any such incident, accident, catastrophe or action involving our personnel, one of our aircraft (or personnel and aircraft of our regional operators and our codeshare partners), or a type of aircraft fleet could create an adverse public perception, which could harm our reputation, result in air travelers being reluctant to fly on our aircraft or those of our regional operators or codeshare partners, and adversely impact our business, results of operations and financial condition.\n\nWhile we have to date successfully integrated many of our computer, communication and other technology systems in connection with the merger of US Airways and American, including our customer reservations system and our pilot, flight attendant and fleet scheduling system, we still have to complete several additional important system integration or replacement projects. In a number of prior airline mergers, the integration of these systems or deployment of replacement systems has taken longer, been more disruptive and cost more than originally forecasted. The implementation process to integrate or replace these various systems will involve a number of risks that could adversely impact our business, results of operations and financial condition. New systems will replace multiple legacy systems and the related implementations will be a complex and time- consuming project involving substantial expenditures for implementation consultants, system hardware, software and implementation activities, as well as the transformation of business and financial processes.\n\nWe cannot assure that our security measures, change control procedures or disaster recovery plans will be adequate to prevent disruptions or delays in connection with systems integration or replacement. Disruptions in or changes to these systems could result in a disruption to our business and the loss of important data. Any of the foregoing could result in a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations and financial condition.\n\nWe have recently instituted, and intend to institute in the future, changes to our business model designed to increase revenues and offset costs. These measures include further segmentation of the classes of services we offer, such as Premium Economy service and Basic Economy service, enhancements to our AAdvantage loyalty program, charging separately for services that had previously been included within the price of a ticket, changing (whether it be increasing, decreasing or eliminating) other pre-existing fees, reconfiguration of our aircraft cabins, and efforts to optimize our network including by focusing growth on a limited number of large hubs. For example, in 2020, we eliminated change fees for most\n\n35\n\n## Changes to our business model that are designed to increase revenues may not be successful and may cause operational difficulties or decreased demand.\n\n## We face challenges in integrating our computer, communications and other technology systems.\n\n## We are at risk of losses and adverse publicity stemming from any public incident involving our company, our people or our brand, including any accident or other public incident involving our personnel or aircraft, or the personnel or aircraft of our regional, codeshare or joint business operators." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9846507940524608, + "doc_id": "e56e8bcd9e7e2185a244dff848f0133be3809d39d1d01846887d0248684251fa", + "edit_distance": 0.057649667405764965, + "f1_score": 0.9946140035906642, + "meteor": 0.995542885410713, + "precision": 0.9964028776978417, + "pred_md": "## Table of Contents\n\n## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS OF AMERICAN AIRLINES GROUP INC .\n\n2016 Credit Facilities. The Credit Facilities also include covenants that, among other things, require AAG to maintain an aggregate of at least $2.0 billion of unrestricted cash and cash equivalents and amounts available to be drawn under revolving credit facilities and limit the ability of AAG and its restricted subsidiaries to pay dividends and make certain other payments, make certain investments, incur additional indebtedness, incur liens on the collateral, dispose of the collateral, enter into certain affiliate transactions and engage in certain business activities, in each case subject to certain exceptions.\n\n## Delayed Draw Term Loan Credit Facility\n\nIn March 2020, American and AAG entered into a Credit and Guaranty Agreement which provided for a $1.0 billion senior secured delayed draw term loan credit facility (the Delayed Draw Term Loan Credit Facility), which was scheduled to be due and payable in a single installment on the maturity date in March 2021. In connection with the issuance of the 11.75% senior secured notes due 2025, as described below, the Delayed Draw Term Loan Credit Facility was repaid and the Delayed Draw Term Loan Credit Facility and all of the security documents and other loan documents related thereto were terminated as of June 30, 2020.\n\n## (b) Senior Secured Notes\n\n## 11.75% Senior Secured Notes\n\nIn June 2020, American issued $2.5 billion aggregate principal amount of 11.75% senior secured notes due 2025 (the 11.75% Senior Secured Notes) at a price equal to 99% of their aggregate principal amount. The 11.75% Senior Secured Notes bear interest at a rate of 11.75% per annum (subject to increase if the collateral coverage ratio described below is not met). Interest on the 11.75% Senior Secured Notes is payable semiannually in arrears on January 15 and July 15 of each year, beginning on January 15, 2021. The 11.75% Senior Secured Notes will mature on July 15, 2025. The obligations of American under the 11.75% Senior Secured Notes are fully and unconditionally guaranteed on a senior unsecured basis by AAG. The proceeds from the 11.75% Senior Secured Notes were used to repay and terminate the Delayed Draw Term Loan Credit Facility (and to terminate all security documents and all other loan documents related thereto) with the remaining amount for general corporate purposes and to enhance our liquidity position.\n\nThe 11.75% Senior Secured Notes were issued pursuant to an indenture, dated as of June 30, 2020 (the 11.75% Senior Secured Notes Indenture), by and among American, AAG and Wilmington Trust, National Association, as trustee (the 11.75% Senior Secured Notes Trustee). The 11.75% Senior Secured Notes are American's senior secured obligations. Subject to certain limitations and exceptions, the 11.75% Senior Secured Notes are secured on a first-lien basis by security interests in certain assets, rights and properties utilized by American in providing its scheduled air carrier services to and from certain airports in the United States and certain airports in Australia, Canada, the Caribbean, Central America, China, Hong Kong, Japan, Mexico, South Korea, and Switzerland (collectively, the First Lien 11.75% Senior Secured Notes Collateral). American's obligations with respect to the 11.75% Senior Secured Notes are also secured on a second-lien basis by security interests in certain assets, rights and properties utilized by American in providing its scheduled air carrier services to and from certain airports in the United States and certain airports in the European Union and the United Kingdom (collectively, the Second Lien 11.75% Senior Secured Notes Collateral and together with the First Lien 11.75% Senior Secured Notes Collateral, the 11.75% Senior Secured Notes Collateral). American may be required to pledge additional collateral in the future under the terms of the 11.75% Senior Secured Notes, and in certain circumstances may elect to pledge additional collateral as a replacement for existing collateral. The Second Lien 11.75% Senior Secured Notes Collateral also secures the 2014 Credit Facilities on a first-lien basis.\n\nAmerican may redeem the 11.75% Senior Secured Notes, in whole at any time or in part from time to time, at a redemption price equal to 100% of the principal amount of the 11.75% Senior Secured Notes being redeemed plus a make whole premium, together with accrued and unpaid interest thereon, if any, to (but not including) the redemption date.\n\nIn the event of a specified change of control, each holder of 11.75% Senior Secured Notes may require American to repurchase its 11.75% Senior Secured Notes in whole or in part at a repurchase price of 101% of the aggregate principal amount thereof, plus accrued and unpaid interest thereon, if any, to (but not including) the repurchase date.\n\n114", + "recall": 0.992831541218638, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS OF AMERICAN AIRLINES GROUP INC .\n\n## Delayed Draw Term Loan Credit Facility\n\n## (b) Senior Secured Notes\n\n## 11.75% Senior Secured Notes\n\n2016 Credit Facilities. The Credit Facilities also include covenants that, among other things, require AAG to maintain an aggregate of at least $2.0 billion of unrestricted cash and cash equivalents and amounts available to be drawn under revolving credit facilities and limit the ability of AAG and its restricted subsidiaries to pay dividends and make certain other payments, make certain investments, incur additional indebtedness, incur liens on the collateral, dispose of the collateral, enter into certain affiliate transactions and engage in certain business activities, in each case subject to certain exceptions.\n\nIn March 2020, American and AAG entered into a Credit and Guaranty Agreement which provided for a $1.0 billion senior secured delayed draw term loan credit facility (the Delayed Draw Term Loan Credit Facility), which was scheduled to be due and payable in a single installment on the maturity date in March 2021. In connection with the issuance of the 11.75% senior secured notes due 2025, as described below, the Delayed Draw Term Loan Credit Facility was repaid and the Delayed Draw Term Loan Credit Facility and all of the security documents and other loan documents related thereto were terminated as of June 30, 2020.\n\nIn June 2020, American issued $2.5 billion aggregate principal amount of 11.75% senior secured notes due 2025 (the 11.75% Senior Secured Notes) at a price equal to 99% of their aggregate principal amount. The 11.75% Senior Secured Notes bear interest at a rate of 11.75% per annum (subject to increase if the collateral coverage ratio described below is not met). Interest on the 11.75% Senior Secured Notes is payable semiannually in arrears on January 15 and July 15 of each year, beginning on January 15, 2021. The 11.75% Senior Secured Notes will mature on July 15, 2025. The obligations of American under the 11.75% Senior Secured Notes are fully and unconditionally guaranteed on a senior unsecured basis by AAG. The proceeds from the 11.75% Senior Secured Notes were used to repay and terminate the Delayed Draw Term Loan Credit Facility (and to terminate all security documents and all other loan documents related thereto) with the remaining amount for general corporate purposes and to enhance our liquidity position.\n\nThe 11.75% Senior Secured Notes were issued pursuant to an indenture, dated as of June 30, 2020 (the 11.75% Senior Secured Notes Indenture), by and among American, AAG and Wilmington Trust, National Association, as trustee (the 11.75% Senior Secured Notes Trustee). The 11.75% Senior Secured Notes are American’s senior secured obligations. Subject to certain limitations and exceptions, the 11.75% Senior Secured Notes are secured on a first-lien basis by security interests in certain assets, rights and properties utilized by American in providing its scheduled air carrier services to and from certain airports in the United States and certain airports in Australia, Canada, the Caribbean, Central America, China, Hong Kong, Japan, Mexico, South Korea, and Switzerland (collectively, the First Lien 11.75% Senior Secured Notes Collateral). American’s obligations with respect to the 11.75% Senior Secured Notes are also secured on a second-lien basis by security interests in certain assets, rights and properties utilized by American in providing its scheduled air carrier services to and from certain airports in the United States and certain airports in the European Union and the United Kingdom (collectively, the Second Lien 11.75% Senior Secured Notes Collateral and together with the First Lien 11.75% Senior Secured Notes Collateral, the 11.75% Senior Secured Notes Collateral). American may be required to pledge additional collateral in the future under the terms of the 11.75% Senior Secured Notes, and in certain circumstances may elect to pledge additional collateral as a replacement for existing collateral. The Second Lien 11.75% Senior Secured Notes Collateral also secures the 2014 Credit Facilities on a first-lien basis.\n\nAmerican may redeem the 11.75% Senior Secured Notes, in whole at any time or in part from time to time, at a redemption price equal to 100% of the principal amount of the 11.75% Senior Secured Notes being redeemed plus a make whole premium, together with accrued and unpaid interest thereon, if any, to (but not including) the redemption date.\n\nIn the event of a specified change of control, each holder of 11.75% Senior Secured Notes may require American to repurchase its 11.75% Senior Secured Notes in whole or in part at a repurchase price of 101% of the aggregate principal amount thereof, plus accrued and unpaid interest thereon, if any, to (but not including) the repurchase date.\n\n114" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.908310875925963, + "doc_id": "effa98788204fad045ef7bc48cf68ca18205d519fffae433480963cf19ee0539", + "edit_distance": 0.16666666666666666, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9963241598079561, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Consolidated Statements of Income\n\n## Becton, Dickinson and Company Years Ended September 30\n\nTable of Contents\n\nAmounts\tmay\tnot\tadd\tdue\tto\trounding.\n\nSee notes to consolidated financial statements.\n\n51", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## Consolidated Statements of Income\n\n## Becton, Dickinson and Company Years Ended September 30\n\nAmounts may not add due to rounding.\n\nSee notes to consolidated financial statements.\n\n51" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9479535686154344, + "doc_id": "f937b8da64331d8eb4ed56afa32285a16c9931d5c0330e1530dc35c4c24cc2da", + "edit_distance": 0.1426086956521739, + "f1_score": 0.9780439121756487, + "meteor": 0.9627335030886239, + "precision": 0.9760956175298805, + "pred_md": "Indicate\t by\t check\t mark\t whether\t the\t registrant\t is\t a\t large\t accelerated\t filer,\t an\t accelerated\t filer,\t a\t non-accelerated\t filer,\t a\t smaller\t reporting\t company\t or\t an emerging\tgrowth\tcompany.\tSee\tthe\tdefinitions\tof\t'large\taccelerated\tfiler,'\t'accelerated\tfiler,'\t'smaller\treporting\tcompany,'\tand\t\"emerging\tgrowth\tcompany\"\tin Rule\t12b-2\tof\tthe\tExchange\tAct.\n\nLarge\taccelerated\tfiler\n\nþ Accelerated\tfiler\n\n☐ Non-accelerated\tfiler\n\n☐\n\nSmaller\treporting company ☐\n\nEmerging\tgrowth company ☐\n\nIf\tan\temerging\tgrowth\tcompany,\tindicate\tby\tcheck\tmark\tif\tthe\tregistrant\thas\telected\tnot\tto\tuse\tthe\textended\ttransition\tperiod\tfor\tcomplying\twith\tany\tnew\tor revised\tfinancial\taccounting\tstandards\tprovided\tpursuant\tto\tSection\t13(a)\tof\tthe\tExchange\tAct.\to\n\nIndicate\tby\tcheck\tmark\twhether\tthe\tregistrant\thas\tfiled\ta\treport\ton\tand\tattestation\tto\tits\tmanagement's\tassessment\tof\tthe\teffectiveness\tof\tits\tinternal\tcontrol over\tfinancial\treporting\tunder\tSection\t404(b)\tof\tthe\tSarbanes-Oxley\tAct\t(15\tU.S.C.\t7262(b))\tby\tthe\tregistered\tpublic\taccounting\tfirm\tthat\tprepared\tor\tissued\tits audit\treport.\t☑\n\nIndicate\tby\tcheck\tmark\twhether\tthe\tregistrant\tis\ta\tshell\tcompany\t(as\tdefined\tin\tRule\t12b-2\tof\tthe\tExchange\tAct).\tYes\t☐\tNo\tþ\n\nAs\tof\tJune\t30,\t2020,\tthe\tlast\tbusiness\tday\tof\tthe\tregistrant's\tmost\trecently\tcompleted\tsecond\tfiscal\tquarter,\tthe\taggregate\tmarket\tvalue\tof\tthe\tvoting\tstock\theld by\tnon-affiliates\tof\tthe\tregistrant,\tin\tU.S.\tdollars,\twas\t$34,600,245,541,\tbased\ton\tthe\tclosing\tsales\tprice\tper\tshare\tas\treported\tby\tthe\tNew\tYork\tStock\tExchange\ton such\tdate.\n\nAs\tof\tthe\tclose\tof\tbusiness\ton\tFebruary\t17,\t2021,\tthere\twere\t133,297,236\tshares\tof\tthe\tregistrant's\tcommon\tshares\toutstanding.\n\n## DOCUMENTS\tINCORPORATED\tBY\tREFERENCE\n\nNot\tapplicable.\n\n## EXPLANATORY\tNOTE\n\nCanadian\tPacific\t Railway\t Limited\t (\"CPRL\"\t or\t the\t \"Company\"),\t a\t corporation\t incorporated\t under\t the Canada\tBusiness\tCorporations\tAct ,\t qualifies\t as\t a\t foreign private\t issuer\t in\t the\t U.S.\t for\t purposes\t of the\t Securities\t Exchange\t Act\t of\t 1934 ,\t as\t amended\t (the\t 'Exchange\t Act').\t Although\t as\t a\t foreign\t private\t issuer\t the Company\tis\tno\tlonger\trequired\tto\tdo\tso,\tthe\tCompany\tcurrently\tcontinues\tto\tfile\tannual\treports\ton\tForm\t10-K,\tquarterly\treports\ton\tForm\t10-Q,\tand\tcurrent\treports on\tForm\t8-K\twith\tthe\tSecurities\tand\tExchange\tCommission\t('SEC')\tinstead\tof\tfiling\treports\ton\tforms\tavailable\tto\tforeign\tprivate\tissuers.\n\nCPRL\tprepares\tand\tfiles\ta\tmanagement\tinformation\tcircular\tand\trelated\tmaterial\tunder\tCanadian\trequirements.\tAs\tthe\tCompany's\tmanagement\tinformation circular\t is\t not\t filed\t pursuant\t to\t Regulation\t 14A,\t the\t Company\t may\t not\t incorporate\t by\t reference\t information\t required\t by\t Part\t III\t of\t this\t Form\t 10-K\t from\t its management\tinformation\tcircular.\tAccordingly,\tin\treliance\tupon\tand\tas\tpermitted\tby\tInstruction\tG(3)\tto\tForm\t10-K,\tthe\tCompany\twill\tbe\tfiling\tan\tamendment\tto this\tForm\t10-K\tcontaining\tthe\tPart\tIII\tinformation\tno\tlater\tthan\t120\tdays\tafter\tthe\tend\tof\tthe\tfiscal\tyear\tcovered\tby\tthis\tForm\t10-K.\tAll\treferences\tto\tour\twebsites contained\therein\tdo\tnot\tconstitute\tincorporation\tby\treference\tof\tinformation\tcontained\ton\tsuch\twebsites\tand\tsuch\tinformation\tshould\tnot\tbe\tconsidered\tpart\tof this\tdocument.", + "recall": 0.98, + "true_md": "Indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a large accelerated filer, an accelerated filer, a non-accelerated filer, a smaller reporting company or an emerging growth company. See the definitions of “large accelerated filer,” “accelerated filer,” “smaller reporting company,” and \"emerging growth company\" in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act.\n\nIf an emerging growth company, indicate by check mark if the registrant has elected not to use the extended transition period for complying with any new or revised financial accounting standards provided pursuant to Section 13(a) of the Exchange Act. o\n\nIndicate by check mark whether the registrant has filed a report on and attestation to its management’s assessment of the effectiveness of its internal control over financial reporting under Section 404(b) of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act (15 U.S.C. 7262(b)) by the registered public accounting firm that prepared or issued its audit report. ☑\n\nIndicate by check mark whether the registrant is a shell company (as defined in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act). Yes ☐ No þ\n\nAs of June 30, 2020, the last business day of the registrant's most recently completed second fiscal quarter, the aggregate market value of the voting stock held by non-affiliates of the registrant, in U.S. dollars, was $34,600,245,541, based on the closing sales price per share as reported by the New York Stock Exchange on such date.\n\nAs of the close of business on February 17, 2021, there were 133,297,236 shares of the registrant's common shares outstanding.\n\nCanadian Pacific Railway Limited (\"CPRL\" or the \"Company\"), a corporation incorporated under the Canada Business Corporations Act , qualifies as a foreign private issuer in the U.S. for purposes of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 , as amended (the “Exchange Act”). Although as a foreign private issuer the Company is no longer required to do so, the Company currently continues to file annual reports on Form 10-K, quarterly reports on Form 10-Q, and current reports on Form 8-K with the Securities and Exchange Commission (“SEC”) instead of filing reports on forms available to foreign private issuers.\n\nCPRL prepares and files a management information circular and related material under Canadian requirements. As the Company’s management information circular is not filed pursuant to Regulation 14A, the Company may not incorporate by reference information required by Part III of this Form 10-K from its management information circular. Accordingly, in reliance upon and as permitted by Instruction G(3) to Form 10-K, the Company will be filing an amendment to this Form 10-K containing the Part III information no later than 120 days after the end of the fiscal year covered by this Form 10-K. All references to our websites contained herein do not constitute incorporation by reference of information contained on such websites and such information should not be considered part of this document.\n\n## EXPLANATORY NOTE\n\nNot applicable.\n\nLarge accelerated filer\n\n þ Accelerated filer\n\n☐ Non-accelerated filer\n\n☐ Smaller reporting company ☐\n\nEmerging growth company ☐\n\n## DOCUMENTS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9850710811869007, + "doc_id": "a9388452da39fefe63e7daf2b641ce6066ed44583c48b50fdf89e51d60cd19c9", + "edit_distance": 0.23839009287925697, + "f1_score": 0.988929889298893, + "meteor": 0.9694248687142186, + "precision": 0.9925925925925926, + "pred_md": "93 CP\t2020\tANNUAL\tREPORT\n\nThe provision for deferred income taxes arises from temporary differences in the carrying values of assets and liabilities for financial statement and income tax purposes and the effect of loss carry forwards. The items comprising the deferred income tax assets and liabilities are as follows:\n\nThe Company's consolidated effective income tax rate differs from the expected Canadian statutory tax rates. Expected income tax expense at statutory rates is reconciled to income tax expense as follows:\n\nIn 2020, the Company revalued its deferred income tax balances as a result of a tax filing election for the state of North Dakota resulting in a lower corporate income tax rate and a net recovery of $29 million.\n\nIn 2019, the Company revalued its deferred income tax balances as a result of a corporate income tax rate decrease in the province of Alberta, resulting in a net recovery of $88 million.\n\nIn 2018, the Company revalued its deferred income tax balances as a result of corporate income tax rate decreases in the states of Iowa and Missouri, resulting in a net recovery of $21 million.\n\nThe Company has not provided a deferred liability for the income taxes, if any, which might become payable on any temporary difference associated with its foreign investments because the Company intends to indefinitely reinvest in its foreign investments and has no intention to realize this difference by a sale of its interest in foreign investments. It is not practical to calculate the amount of the deferred tax liability.\n\nIt is more likely than not that the Company will realize the majority of its deferred income tax assets from the generation of future taxable income, as the payments for provisions, reserves and accruals are made and losses and tax credits carried forward are utilized.", + "recall": 0.9852941176470589, + "true_md": "The provision for deferred income taxes arises from temporary differences in the carrying values of assets and liabilities for financial statement and income tax purposes and the effect of loss carry forwards. The items comprising the deferred income tax assets and liabilities are as follows:\n\nIn 2020, the Company revalued its deferred income tax balances as a result of a tax filing election for the state of North Dakota resulting in a lower corporate income tax rate and a net recovery of $ 29 million .\n\nIn 2019, the Company revalued its deferred income tax balances as a result of a corporate income tax rate decrease in the province of Alberta, resulting in a net recovery of $88 million .\n\nIn 2018, the Company revalued its deferred income tax balances as a result of corporate income tax rate decreases in the states of Iowa and Missouri, resulting in a net recovery of $21 million .\n\nThe Company has not provided a deferred liability for the income taxes, if any, which might become payable on any temporary difference associated with its foreign investments because the Company intends to indefinitely reinvest in its foreign investments and has no intention to realize this difference by a sale of its interest in foreign investments. It is not practical to calculate the amount of the deferred tax liability.\n\nIt is more likely than not that the Company will realize the majority of its deferred income tax assets from the generation of future taxable income, as the payments for provisions, reserves and accruals are made and losses and tax credits carried forward are utilized.\n\nThe Company’s consolidated effective income tax rate differs from the expected Canadian statutory tax rates. Expected income tax expense at statutory rates is reconciled to income tax expense as follows:\n\n93 CP 2020 ANNUAL REPORT" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9694795649433705, + "doc_id": "8401bf516f4c6e2db4add8b2a3d256e6bbc58087ca90c1bfe7aac3a1edb652b7", + "edit_distance": 0.02857142857142857, + "f1_score": 0.9811320754716982, + "meteor": 0.9851983487882935, + "precision": 0.985781990521327, + "pred_md": "## APPLIED MATERIALS, INC.\n\n## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS - (Continued)\n\nThe Display and Adjacent Markets segment includes products for manufacturing liquid crystal displays (LCDs), organic light-emitting diodes (OLEDs), equipment upgrades and flexible coating systems and other display technologies for TVs, monitors, laptops, personal computers, smart phones, and other consumer-oriented devices.\n\nEach operating segment is separately managed and has separate financial results that are reviewed by Applied's chief operating decisionmaker. Each reportable segment contains closely related products that are unique to the particular segment. Segment operating income is determined based upon internal performance measures used by Applied's chief operating decision-maker. The chief operating decision-maker does not evaluate operating segments using total asset information.\n\nApplied derives the segment results directly from its internal management reporting system. The accounting policies Applied uses to derive reportable segment results are substantially the same as those used for external reporting purposes. Management measures the performance of each reportable segment based upon several metrics including orders, net sales and operating income. Management uses these results to evaluate the performance of, and to assign resources to, each of the reportable segments.\n\nThe Corporate and Other category includes revenues from products, as well as costs of products sold, for fabricating solar photovoltaic cells and modules, and certain operating expenses that are not allocated to its reportable segments and are managed separately at the corporate level. These operating expenses include costs related to share-based compensation; certain management, finance, legal, human resources, and research, development and engineering functions provided at the corporate level; and unabsorbed information technology and occupancy. In addition, Applied does not allocate to its reportable segments restructuring and asset impairment charges and any associated adjustments related to restructuring actions, unless these actions pertain to a specific reportable segment. Segment operating income also excludes interest income/expense and other financial charges and income taxes. Management does not consider the unallocated costs in measuring the performance of the reportable segments.\n\nInformation for each reportable segment for and as of the end of each fiscal year were as follows:\n\nTable of Contents\n\nSemiconductor Systems and Display and Adjacent Markets revenues are recognized at a point in time. Applied Global Services revenue is recognized at a point in time for tangible goods such as spare parts and equipment, and over time for service agreements. The majority of revenue recognized over time is recognized within 12 months of the contract inception.\n\n103", + "recall": 0.9765258215962441, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## APPLIED MATERIALS, INC.\n\n## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS — (Continued)\n\nThe Display and Adjacent Markets segment includes products for manufacturing liquid crystal displays (LCDs), organic light-emitting diodes (OLEDs), equipment upgrades and flexible coating systems and other display technologies for TVs, monitors, laptops, personal computers, smart phones, and other consumer-oriented devices.\n\nEach operating segment is separately managed and has separate financial results that are reviewed by Applied’s chief operating decision- maker. Each reportable segment contains closely related products that are unique to the particular segment. Segment operating income is determined based upon internal performance measures used by Applied’s chief operating decision-maker. The chief operating decision-maker does not evaluate operating segments using total asset information.\n\nApplied derives the segment results directly from its internal management reporting system. The accounting policies Applied uses to derive reportable segment results are substantially the same as those used for external reporting purposes. Management measures the performance of each reportable segment based upon several metrics including orders, net sales and operating income. Management uses these results to evaluate the performance of, and to assign resources to, each of the reportable segments.\n\nThe Corporate and Other category includes revenues from products, as well as costs of products sold, for fabricating solar photovoltaic cells and modules, and certain operating expenses that are not allocated to its reportable segments and are managed separately at the corporate level. These operating expenses include costs related to share-based compensation; certain management, finance, legal, human resources, and research, development and engineering functions provided at the corporate level; and unabsorbed information technology and occupancy. In addition, Applied does not allocate to its reportable segments restructuring and asset impairment charges and any associated adjustments related to restructuring actions, unless these actions pertain to a specific reportable segment. Segment operating income also excludes interest income/expense and other financial charges and income taxes. Management does not consider the unallocated costs in measuring the performance of the reportable segments.\n\nInformation for each reportable segment for and as of the end of each fiscal year were as follows:\n\nSemiconductor Systems and Display and Adjacent Markets revenues are recognized at a point in time. Applied Global Services revenue is recognized at a point in time for tangible goods such as spare parts and equipment, and over time for service agreements. The majority of revenue recognized over time is recognized within 12 months of the contract inception.\n\n103" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.980424198788121, + "doc_id": "279bb5b547fde320ae3b012132edbc2e752f194f8acb84f3c91bd8d4b2e5a67a", + "edit_distance": 0.05429864253393665, + "f1_score": 0.9908814589665654, + "meteor": 0.9913644186286147, + "precision": 0.9939024390243902, + "pred_md": "## Financial Condition, Liquidity and Capital Resources\n\nApplied's cash, cash equivalents and investments consist of the following:\n\nTable of Contents\n\n## Sources and Uses of Cash\n\nA summary of cash provided by (used in) operating, investing, and financing activities is as follows:\n\n## Operating Activities\n\nCash from operating activities for fiscal 2020 was $3.8 billion, which reflects net income adjusted for the effect of non-cash charges and changes in working capital components. Non-cash charges included depreciation, amortization, share-based compensation and deferred income taxes. Cash provided by operating activities increased in fiscal 2020 compared to fiscal 2019 primarily due to higher net income and better cash collections. Cash provided from operating activities in fiscal 2019 decreased compared to fiscal 2018 due to lower net income, cash collections, change in income taxes payable and higher payments to suppliers, offset by a decrease in inventories.\n\nApplied has agreements with various financial institutions to sell accounts receivable and discount promissory notes from selected customers. Applied sells its accounts receivable without recourse. Applied, from time to time, also discounts letters of credit issued by customers through various financial institutions. The discounting of letters of credit depends on many factors, including the willingness of financial institutions to discount the letters of credit and the cost of such arrangements. Applied sold $1.2 billion, $1.5 billion and $1.6 billion of accounts receivable during fiscal 2020, 2019 and 2018, respectively. Applied discounted letters of credit issued by customers of $105 million, $48 million and $37 million in fiscal 2020, 2019 and 2018, respectively. There was no discounting of promissory notes in each of fiscal 2020, 2019 and 2018.\n\nApplied's working capital was $8.9 billion at October 25, 2020 and $5.8 billion at October 27, 2019.\n\nDays sales outstanding at the end of fiscal 2020, 2019 and 2018 was 57 days, 61 days, and 58 days, respectively. Days sales outstanding varies due to the timing of shipments and payment terms. The decrease in days sales outstanding at the end of fiscal 2020 was primarily due to higher accounts receivable factoring and favorable revenue linearity compared to the end of fiscal 2019. The increase in days sales outstanding at the end of fiscal 2019 compared to the end of fiscal 2018 was primarily due to lower factoring of accounts receivable.\n\n44", + "recall": 0.9878787878787879, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## Financial Condition, Liquidity and Capital Resources\n\nApplied’s cash, cash equivalents and investments consist of the following:\n\nA summary of cash provided by (used in) operating, investing, and financing activities is as follows:\n\n## Sources and Uses of Cash\n\n## Operating Activities\n\nCash from operating activities for fiscal 2020 was $3.8 billion, which reflects net income adjusted for the effect of non-cash charges and changes in working capital components. Non-cash charges included depreciation, amortization, share-based compensation and deferred income taxes. Cash provided by operating activities increased in fiscal 2020 compared to fiscal 2019 primarily due to higher net income and better cash collections. Cash provided from operating activities in fiscal 2019 decreased compared to fiscal 2018 due to lower net income, cash collections, change in income taxes payable and higher payments to suppliers, offset by a decrease in inventories.\n\nApplied has agreements with various financial institutions to sell accounts receivable and discount promissory notes from selected customers. Applied sells its accounts receivable without recourse. Applied, from time to time, also discounts letters of credit issued by customers through various financial institutions. The discounting of letters of credit depends on many factors, including the willingness of financial institutions to discount the letters of credit and the cost of such arrangements. Applied sold $1.2 billion, $1.5 billion and $1.6 billion of accounts receivable during fiscal 2020, 2019 and 2018, respectively. Applied discounted letters of credit issued by customers of $105 million, $48 million and $37 million in fiscal 2020, 2019 and 2018, respectively. There was no discounting of promissory notes in each of fiscal 2020, 2019 and 2018.\n\nApplied’s working capital was $8.9 billion at October 25, 2020 and $5.8 billion at October 27, 2019.\n\nDays sales outstanding at the end of fiscal 2020, 2019 and 2018 was 57 days, 61 days, and 58 days, respectively. Days sales outstanding varies due to the timing of shipments and payment terms. The decrease in days sales outstanding at the end of fiscal 2020 was primarily due to higher accounts receivable factoring and favorable revenue linearity compared to the end of fiscal 2019. The increase in days sales outstanding at the end of fiscal 2019 compared to the end of fiscal 2018 was primarily due to lower factoring of accounts receivable.\n\n44" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "a6f7d0b842867f15697772b4884d5837776169228b0fd94c2a011501af3a3f52", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9921875, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Table of Contents\n\n213", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n213" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6638077729048784, + "doc_id": "ab715cc4a4dc994d57724a307d68b726def636129ba0346b826ab71cc09b819d", + "edit_distance": 0.7607361963190185, + "f1_score": 0.9950248756218907, + "meteor": 0.916526521240753, + "precision": 0.9900990099009901, + "pred_md": "## 6. GOODWILL AND OTHER INTANGIBLE ASSETS\n\nThe changes in the carrying amount of goodwill for the years ended December 31, 2020 and 2019 are as follows:\n\nThe following table provides information about our intangible assets for the years ended December 31, 2020 and 2019:\n\n\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\n\n(1) Engineering\tdrawings\trepresent\tthe\testimated\tfair\tvalue\tassociated\twith\tspecific\tacquired\tproduct\tand\tcomponent\tschematics.\n\n(2) Existing\tcustomer\trelationships\tacquired\tprior\tto\t2011\thad\ta\tuseful\tlife\tof\tfive\tyears.\n\n(3) Accumulated\tamortization\tfor\tindefinite-lived\tintangible\tassets\trelates\tto\tamounts\trecorded\tprior\tto\tthe\timplementation\tdate\tof\tguidance\tissued in\tASC\t350.\n\nThe following schedule outlines actual amortization expense recognized during 2020 and an estimate of future amortization based upon the finite-lived intangible assets owned at December 31, 2020:\n\nAmortization expense for finite-lived intangible assets was $13.8 million in 2019 and $14.1 million in 2018.\n\n83", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## 6. GOODWILL AND OTHER INTANGIBLE ASSETS\n\nThe following schedule outlines actual amortization expense recognized during 2020 and an estimate of future amortization based upon the finite-lived intangible assets owned at December 31, 2020:\n\nAmortization expense for finite-lived intangible assets was $13.8 million in 2019 and $14.1 million in 2018.\n\nThe following table provides information about our intangible assets for the years ended December 31, 2020 and 2019:\n\nThe changes in the carrying amount of goodwill for the years ended December 31, 2020 and 2019 are as follows:\n\n(1) Engineering drawings represent the estimated fair value associated with specific acquired product and component schematics.\n\n(3) Accumulated amortization for indefinite-lived intangible assets relates to amounts recorded prior to the implementation date of guidance issued in ASC 350.\n\n(2) Existing customer relationships acquired prior to 2011 had a useful life of five years .\n\n83" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7689867573555587, + "doc_id": "97e1113049f844308c8f8bf08c5d5d16c01a9a062d291b7895d0ff43a6ac51db", + "edit_distance": 0.5549374130737135, + "f1_score": 0.9843137254901961, + "meteor": 0.681579367145586, + "precision": 0.9920948616600791, + "pred_md": "As of February 16, 2021, the Company's rent collection and rent payment deferral status was as follows:\n\n(1)\t\t\t\t\tCustomer\tpayments\tare\treceived\tdaily.\tThe\tcollection\tinformation\tpresented\tis\tcurrent\tthrough\tFebruary\t16,\t2021,\tand\tthe\tCompany\tanticipates\tcontinuing\tto\treceive\tpayments\twhich\twill\tincrease\tthe\t%\tof\tRent\tCollected.\n\n(2)\t\t\t\t\tRepresents\tthe\tperiod\tof\tFebruary\t1,\t2021\tthrough\tFebruary\t16,\t2021\tand\tassumes\tcollections\tfrom\tgovernment-related\ttenants.\tFor\tcomparison,\tas\tof\tFebruary\t16,\t2021,\tFebruary\trental\treceipts\tare\tslightly\thigher\tthan\tthe\tJanuary\trental receipts\twere\tas\tof\tJanuary\t16,\t2021.\n\nWe believe EastGroup's financial condition and balance sheet remain strong. As of December 31, 2020, the outstanding balance on the Company's $395 million unsecured revolving credit facilities was $125 million, providing $270 million of available capacity. During 2020, EastGroup has only drawn amounts on its unsecured revolving credit facilities for general corporate purposes in the ordinary course of business. The Company is in compliance with its debt covenants at December 31, 2020 and anticipates remaining in compliance for the foreseeable future. The Company's recent debt and equity activity is further described under Liquidity and Capital Resources. The Company has been continuing construction on already-active development and value-add projects. During the second and third quarters of 2020, EastGroup did not begin construction on any new development projects. During the fourth quarter of 2020, the Company started construction on three new development projects. Management will continue to monitor the economic conditions of the Company's markets to determine whether to begin construction on additional future development projects.\n\nThe future impacts of COVID-19 on the Company are largely dependent on the severity and duration of the economic uncertainty and its effect on EastGroup's customers and cannot be predicted with certainty at this time .\n\n## General\n\nThe Company believes its current operating cash flow and unsecured bank credit facilities provide the capacity to fund the operations of the Company, and the Company also believes it can issue common and/or preferred equity and obtain debt financing. During 2020, EastGroup issued 709,924 shares of common stock through its continuous common equity offering program, providing net proceeds to the Company of $92.7 million. Also during 2020, the Company closed on a private placement of $175 million of senior unsecured notes with a weighted average fixed interest rate of 2.65% and a $100 million senior unsecured term loan with an effective fixed interest rate of 2.39%. EastGroup's financing and equity issuances are further described in Liquidity and Capital Resources .\n\nThe Company's primary revenue is rental income. During 2020, EastGroup executed leases on 8,118,000 square feet (18.5% of EastGroup's total square footage of 43,854,000 as of December 31, 2020). For new and renewal leases\n\nsigned during 2020, average rental rates increased by 21.7% as compared to the former leases on the same spaces.\n\nProperty Net Operating Income ('PNOI') Excluding Income from Lease Terminations from same properties (defined as operating properties owned during the entire current and prior year reporting periods - January 1, 2019 through December 31, 2020), increased 2.1% for 2020 compared to 2019.\n\n19", + "recall": 0.9766536964980544, + "true_md": "As of February 16, 2021, the Company’s rent collection and rent payment deferral status was as follows:\n\nWe believe EastGroup’s financial condition and balance sheet remain strong. As of December 31, 2020, the outstanding balance on the Company’s $395 million unsecured revolving credit facilities was $125 million, providing $270 million of available capacity. During 2020, EastGroup has only drawn amounts on its unsecured revolving credit facilities for general corporate purposes in the ordinary course of business. The Company is in compliance with its debt covenants at December 31, 2020 and anticipates remaining in compliance for the foreseeable future. The Company’s recent debt and equity activity is further described under Liquidity and Capital Resources. The Company has been continuing construction on already-active development and value-add projects. During the second and third quarters of 2020, EastGroup did not begin construction on any new development projects. During the fourth quarter of 2020, the Company started construction on three new development projects. Management will continue to monitor the economic conditions of the Company’s markets to determine whether to begin construction on additional future development projects.\n\nGeneral The Company believes its current operating cash flow and unsecured bank credit facilities provide the capacity to fund the operations of the Company, and the Company also believes it can issue common and/or preferred equity and obtain debt financing. During 2020, EastGroup issued 709,924 shares of common stock through its continuous common equity offering program, providing net proceeds to the Company of $92.7 million. Also during 2020, the Company closed on a private placement of $175 million of senior unsecured notes with a weighted average fixed interest rate of 2.65% and a $100 million senior unsecured term loan with an effective fixed interest rate of 2.39%. EastGroup's financing and equity issuances are further described in Liquidity and Capital Resources .\n\nThe Company’s primary revenue is rental income. During 2020, EastGroup executed leases on 8,118,000 square feet (18.5% of EastGroup’s total square footage of 43,854,000 as of December 31, 2020). For new and renewal leases signed during 2020, average rental rates increased by 21.7% as compared to the former leases on the same spaces.\n\nProperty Net Operating Income (“PNOI”) Excluding Income from Lease Terminations from same properties (defined as operating properties owned during the entire current and prior year reporting periods – January 1, 2019 through December 31, 2020), increased 2.1% for 2020 compared to 2019.\n\nThe future impacts of COVID-19 on the Company are largely dependent on the severity and duration of the economic uncertainty and its effect on EastGroup’s customers and cannot be predicted with certainty at this time .\n\n19\n\n- (1) Customer payments are received daily. The collection information presented is current through February 16, 2021, and the Company anticipates continuing to receive payments which will increase the % of Rent Collected. (2) Represents the period of February 1, 2021 through February 16, 2021 and assumes collections from government-related tenants. For comparison, as of February 16, 2021, February rental receipts are slightly higher than the January rental\n\n- (1) Customer payments are received daily. The collection information presented is current through February 16, 2021, and the Company anticipates continuing to receive payments which will increase the % of Rent Collected. (2) Represents the period of February 1, 2021 through February 16, 2021 and assumes collections from government-related tenants. For comparison, as of February 16, 2021, February rental receipts are slightly higher than the January rental receipts were as of January 16, 2021.\n\n## General The Company believes its current operating cash flow and unsecured bank credit facilities provide the capacity to fund the operations of the Company, and the Company also believes it can issue common and/or preferred equity" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9357662918485252, + "doc_id": "62238d740873b38eadd4851bc44e7c9e6ca988afbfc41aac772e41880e66cda2", + "edit_distance": 0.055984555984555984, + "f1_score": 0.9843400447427292, + "meteor": 0.9575954767428413, + "precision": 0.9865470852017937, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS OF AMERICAN AIRLINES, INC.\n\nThe components of American's deferred tax assets and liabilities were (in millions):\n\nTable of Contents\n\nAt December 31, 2020, American had approximately $16.5 billion of federal net operating losses (NOLs) available to reduce future federal taxable income, of which $8.9 billion will expire beginning in 2023 if unused and $7.6 billion can be carried forward indefinitely (NOL Carryforwards). American is a member of AAG's consolidated federal and certain state income tax returns. American also had approximately $5.0 billion of NOL Carryforwards to reduce future state taxable income at December 31, 2020, which will expire in taxable years 2020 through 2040 if unused.\n\nAmerican's ability to use its NOL Carryforwards depends on the amount of taxable income generated in future periods. American provides a valuation allowance for its deferred tax assets, which include the NOLs, when it is more likely than not that some portion, or all of its deferred tax assets, will not be realized. American considers all available positive and negative evidence and makes certain assumptions in evaluating the realizability of its deferred tax assets. Many factors are considered that impact American's assessment of future profitability, including conditions which are beyond its control, such as the health of the economy, the availability and price volatility of aircraft fuel and travel demand. American presently has a $24 million valuation allowance on certain net deferred tax assets related to state NOL Carryforwards. There can be no assurance that an additional valuation allowance on American's net deferred tax assets will not be required. Such valuation allowance could be material.\n\nAmerican's ability to deduct its NOL Carryforwards and to utilize certain other available tax attributes can be substantially constrained under the general annual limitation rules of Section 382 where an 'ownership change' has occurred. Substantially all of American's remaining federal NOL Carryforwards attributable to US Airways Group are subject to limitation under Section 382; however, American's ability to utilize such NOL Carryforwards is not anticipated to be effectively constrained as a result of such limitation. Similar limitations may apply for state income tax purposes. American's ability to utilize any new NOL Carryforwards arising after the ownership changes is not affected by the annual limitation rules imposed by Section 382 unless another ownership change occurs. Under the Section 382 limitation, cumulative stock ownership changes among material stockholders exceeding 50% during a rolling three-year period can potentially limit American's future use of NOLs and tax credits.\n\nAt December 31, 2019, American had an AMT credit carryforward of approximately $226 million available for federal income tax purposes, which was fully refunded in 2020 as a result of the CARES Act.\n\n179", + "recall": 0.9821428571428571, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS OF AMERICAN AIRLINES, INC.\n\nThe components of American’s deferred tax assets and liabilities were (in millions):\n\nAt December 31, 2020, American had approximately $16.5 billion of federal net operating losses (NOLs) available to reduce future federal taxable income, of which $8.9 billion will expire beginning in 2023 if unused and $7.6 billion can be carried forward indefinitely (NOL Carryforwards). American is a member of AAG’s consolidated federal and certain state income tax returns. American also had approximately $5.0 billion of NOL Carryforwards to reduce future state taxable income at December 31, 2020, which will expire in taxable years 2020 through 2040 if unused.\n\nAmerican’s ability to use its NOL Carryforwards depends on the amount of taxable income generated in future periods. American provides a valuation allowance for its deferred tax assets, which include the NOLs, when it is more likely than not that some portion, or all of its deferred tax assets, will not be realized. American considers all available positive and negative evidence and makes certain assumptions in evaluating the realizability of its deferred tax assets. Many factors are considered that impact American’s assessment of future profitability, including conditions which are beyond its control, such as the health of the economy, the availability and price volatility of aircraft fuel and travel demand. American presently has a $24 million valuation allowance on certain net deferred tax assets related to state NOL Carryforwards. There can be no assurance that an additional valuation allowance on American’s net deferred tax assets will not be required. Such valuation allowance could be material.\n\nAmerican’s ability to deduct its NOL Carryforwards and to utilize certain other available tax attributes can be substantially constrained under the general annual limitation rules of Section 382 where an “ownership change” has occurred. Substantially all of American’s remaining federal NOL Carryforwards attributable to US Airways Group are subject to limitation under Section 382; however, American’s ability to utilize such NOL Carryforwards is not anticipated to be effectively constrained as a result of such limitation. Similar limitations may apply for state income tax purposes. American’s ability to utilize any new NOL Carryforwards arising after the ownership changes is not affected by the annual limitation rules imposed by Section 382 unless another ownership change occurs. Under the Section 382 limitation, cumulative stock ownership changes among material stockholders exceeding 50% during a rolling three-year period can potentially limit American’s future use of NOLs and tax credits.\n\nAt December 31, 2019, American had an AMT credit carryforward of approximately $226 million available for federal income tax purposes, which was fully refunded in 2020 as a result of the CARES Act.\n\n179" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9818035027944909, + "doc_id": "6b15026c76368a8f57c1f50eefb06e7cb94a6110ca2d21cd37334e6312b7a041", + "edit_distance": 0.8039832285115304, + "f1_score": 0.9961240310077519, + "meteor": 0.6708998833960713, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Table of Contents\n\n## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS OF AMERICAN AIRLINES, INC.\n\nFor accounting purposes, the $6.0 billion of aggregate financial assistance AAG and the Subsidiaries received pursuant to the PSP1 Agreement is allocated to the PSP1 Promissory Note, the PSP1 Warrants and other PSP1 financial assistance (the PSP1 Financial Assistance). The aggregate principal amount of approximately $1.8 billion of the PSP1 Promissory Note was recorded as unsecured long-term debt, and the total fair value of the PSP1 Warrants of $63 million, estimated using a Black-Scholes option pricing model, was recorded in stockholders' equity in AAG's consolidated balance sheet. The remaining amount of approximately $4.2 billion of PSP1 Financial Assistance was recognized as a credit to special items, net in the consolidated statement of operations in the second and third quarters of 2020, the period over which the continuation of payment of eligible employee wages, salaries and benefits was required.\n\n## PSP1 Warrant Agreement and PSP1 Warrants\n\nAs partial compensation to the U.S. Government for the provision of financial assistance under the PSP1 Agreement, and pursuant to the PSP1 Warrant Agreement, AAG agreed to issue warrants to Treasury to purchase up to an aggregate of approximately 14.1 million PSP1 Warrant Shares of AAG common stock. The exercise price of the PSP1 Warrant Shares is $12.51 per share (which was the closing price of AAG common stock on The Nasdaq Global Select Market on April 9, 2020) subject to certain anti-dilution provisions provided for in the PSP1 Warrants.\n\nPursuant to the PSP1 Warrant Agreement, on each of the PSP1 Closing Date, May 29, 2020, June 30, 2020, July 30, 2020 and September 30, 2020, AAG issued to Treasury a PSP1 Warrant to purchase up to an aggregate of approximately 6.7 million shares, 2.8 million shares, 2.8 million shares, 1.4 million shares and 0.4 million shares, respectively, of AAG common stock based on the terms described herein.\n\nThe PSP1 Warrants do not have any voting rights and are freely transferrable, with registration rights. Each PSP1 Warrant expires on the fifth anniversary of the date of issuance of such PSP1 Warrant. The PSP1 Warrants will be exercisable either through net share settlement or cash, at AAG's option. The PSP1 Warrants were issued solely as compensation to the U.S. Government related to entry into the PSP1 Agreement. No separate proceeds (apart from the financial assistance described above) were received upon issuance of the PSP1 Warrants or will be received upon exercise thereof.\n\n## Treasury Loan Agreement\n\nOn September 25, 2020 (the Treasury Loan Closing Date), AAG and American entered into a Loan and Guarantee Agreement (the Treasury Loan Agreement) with Treasury, which provided for a secured term loan facility (the Treasury Term Loan Facility) that permitted American to borrow up to $5.5 billion. Subsequently, on October 21, 2020, AAG and American entered into an amendment to the Treasury Loan Agreement, which increased the borrowing amount to up to $7.5 billion. The Treasury Loan Agreement will involve the issuance of additional warrants to purchase up to an aggregate of approximately 60.0 million shares of AAG common stock, assuming the Treasury Term Loan Facility is fully drawn. As of December 31, 2020, American had borrowed $550 million under the Treasury Term Loan Facility, which is scheduled to mature on June 30, 2025, and issued warrants to Treasury to purchase up to an aggregate of approximately 4.4 million shares of AAG common stock. See Note 3 for further information on the Treasury Loan Agreement and below for more information on the Treasury Loan Warrant Agreement and Treasury Loan Warrants.\n\n## Treasury Loan Warrant Agreement and Warrants\n\nIn connection with the Treasury Loan Agreement, AAG also entered into a warrant agreement (the Treasury Loan Warrant Agreement) with Treasury. Pursuant to the Treasury Loan Warrant Agreement, AAG agreed to issue warrants (each a Treasury Loan Warrant and, collectively, the Treasury Loan Warrants) to Treasury to purchase up to an aggregate of approximately 60.0 million shares (the Treasury Loan Warrant Shares) of AAG's common stock based on the $7.5 billion commitment amount under the Treasury Term Loan Facility. The exercise price of the Treasury Loan Warrant Shares is $12.51 per share subject to certain anti-dilution provisions provided for in the Treasury Loan Warrant Agreement. For accounting purposes, the fair value for the Treasury Loan Warrant Shares is estimated using a Black-Scholes option pricing model and recorded in stockholders' equity in AAG's consolidated balance sheet with an offsetting debt discount to the Treasury Term Loan Facility in American's consolidated balance sheet.\n\nPursuant to the Treasury Loan Warrant Agreement, on the Treasury Loan Closing Date, AAG issued to Treasury a Treasury Loan Warrant to purchase up to an aggregate of approximately 4.4 million Treasury Loan Warrant Shares based on the terms described herein. On the date of each additional borrowing under the Treasury Loan Agreement, AAG will issue to Treasury an additional Treasury Loan Warrant for a number of Treasury Loan Warrant Shares equal to 10% of such borrowing, divided by $12.51, the exercise price of such shares.\n\n157", + "recall": 0.9922779922779923, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS OF AMERICAN AIRLINES, INC.\n\n## PSP1 Warrant Agreement and PSP1 Warrants\n\n## Treasury Loan Agreement\n\n## Treasury Loan Warrant Agreement and Warrants\n\n157\n\nPursuant to the Treasury Loan Warrant Agreement, on the Treasury Loan Closing Date, AAG issued to Treasury a Treasury Loan Warrant to purchase up to an aggregate of approximately 4.4 million Treasury Loan Warrant Shares based on the terms described herein. On the date of each additional borrowing under the Treasury Loan Agreement, AAG will issue to Treasury an additional Treasury Loan Warrant for a number of Treasury Loan Warrant Shares equal to 10% of such borrowing, divided by $12.51, the exercise price of such shares.\n\nIn connection with the Treasury Loan Agreement, AAG also entered into a warrant agreement (the Treasury Loan Warrant Agreement) with Treasury. Pursuant to the Treasury Loan Warrant Agreement, AAG agreed to issue warrants (each a Treasury Loan Warrant and, collectively, the Treasury Loan Warrants) to Treasury to purchase up to an aggregate of approximately 60.0 million shares (the Treasury Loan Warrant Shares) of AAG's common stock based on the $7.5 billion commitment amount under the Treasury Term Loan Facility. The exercise price of the Treasury Loan Warrant Shares is $12.51 per share subject to certain anti-dilution provisions provided for in the Treasury Loan Warrant Agreement. For accounting purposes, the fair value for the Treasury Loan Warrant Shares is estimated using a Black-Scholes option pricing model and recorded in stockholders' equity in AAG's consolidated balance sheet with an offsetting debt discount to the Treasury Term Loan Facility in American’s consolidated balance sheet.\n\nOn September 25, 2020 (the Treasury Loan Closing Date), AAG and American entered into a Loan and Guarantee Agreement (the Treasury Loan Agreement) with Treasury, which provided for a secured term loan facility (the Treasury Term Loan Facility) that permitted American to borrow up to $5.5 billion. Subsequently, on October 21, 2020, AAG and American entered into an amendment to the Treasury Loan Agreement, which increased the borrowing amount to up to $7.5 billion. The Treasury Loan Agreement will involve the issuance of additional warrants to purchase up to an aggregate of approximately 60.0 million shares of AAG common stock, assuming the Treasury Term Loan Facility is fully drawn. As of December 31, 2020, American had borrowed $550 million under the Treasury Term Loan Facility, which is scheduled to mature on June 30, 2025, and issued warrants to Treasury to purchase up to an aggregate of approximately 4.4 million shares of AAG common stock. See Note 3 for further information on the Treasury Loan Agreement and below for more information on the Treasury Loan Warrant Agreement and Treasury Loan Warrants.\n\nThe PSP1 Warrants do not have any voting rights and are freely transferrable, with registration rights. Each PSP1 Warrant expires on the fifth anniversary of the date of issuance of such PSP1 Warrant. The PSP1 Warrants will be exercisable either through net share settlement or cash, at AAG's option. The PSP1 Warrants were issued solely as compensation to the U.S. Government related to entry into the PSP1 Agreement. No separate proceeds (apart from the financial assistance described above) were received upon issuance of the PSP1 Warrants or will be received upon exercise thereof.\n\nPursuant to the PSP1 Warrant Agreement, on each of the PSP1 Closing Date, May 29, 2020, June 30, 2020, July 30, 2020 and September 30, 2020, AAG issued to Treasury a PSP1 Warrant to purchase up to an aggregate of approximately 6.7 million shares, 2.8 million shares, 2.8 million shares, 1.4 million shares and 0.4 million shares, respectively, of AAG common stock based on the terms described herein.\n\nAs partial compensation to the U.S. Government for the provision of financial assistance under the PSP1 Agreement, and pursuant to the PSP1 Warrant Agreement, AAG agreed to issue warrants to Treasury to purchase up to an aggregate of approximately 14.1 million PSP1 Warrant Shares of AAG common stock. The exercise price of the PSP1 Warrant Shares is $12.51 per share (which was the closing price of AAG common stock on The Nasdaq Global Select Market on April 9, 2020) subject to certain anti-dilution provisions provided for in the PSP1 Warrants.\n\nFor accounting purposes, the $6.0 billion of aggregate financial assistance AAG and the Subsidiaries received pursuant to the PSP1 Agreement is allocated to the PSP1 Promissory Note, the PSP1 Warrants and other PSP1 financial assistance (the PSP1 Financial Assistance). The aggregate principal amount of approximately $1.8 billion of the PSP1 Promissory Note was recorded as unsecured long-term debt, and the total fair value of the PSP1 Warrants of $63 million, estimated using a Black-Scholes option pricing model, was recorded in stockholders' equity in AAG's consolidated balance sheet. The remaining amount of approximately $4.2 billion of PSP1 Financial Assistance was recognized as a credit to special items, net in the consolidated statement of operations in the second and third quarters of 2020, the period over which the continuation of payment of eligible employee wages, salaries and benefits was required." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8446928838416219, + "doc_id": "bb1987fb32215a977f04a86807363b77e50fe9ac3a8b589b43dabc3c5a3b2819", + "edit_distance": 0.4, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9865, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## ITEM 16. FORM 10-K SUMMARY\n\nNone\n\n122", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "122\n\nNone\n\n## ITEM 16. FORM 10-K SUMMARY" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9204385191301889, + "doc_id": "a3478b908fe3852430a18ca919f77eddb9c0e2fe06af2e11d5be54fdf5791263", + "edit_distance": 0.10863509749303621, + "f1_score": 0.9945054945054946, + "meteor": 0.9633552756404443, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS OF AMERICAN AIRLINES, INC.\n\nTable of Contents\n\nAll\tshort-term\tinvestments\tare\tclassified\tas\tavailable-for-sale\tand\tstated\tat\tfair\tvalue.\tUnrealized\tgains\tand\tlosses\tare\trecorded\tin\taccumulated other\tcomprehensive\tloss\tat\teach\treporting\tperiod.\tThere\twere\tno\tcredit\tlosses. (1)\n\nAmerican's\tshort-term\tinvestments\tas\tof\tDecember\t31,\t2020\tmature\tin\tone\tyear\tor\tless\texcept\tfor\t$235\tmillion\tof\tbank\tnotes/certificates\tof deposit/time\tdeposits. (2)\n\nRestricted\tcash\tand\tshort-term\tinvestments\tprimarily\tinclude\tmoney\tmarket\tfunds\tto\tbe\tused\tto\tfinance\ta\tsubstantial\tportion\tof\tthe\tcost\tof\tthe renovation\tand\texpansion\tof\tTerminal\t8\tat\tJFK\tand\tcollateral\theld\tto\tsupport\tworkers'\tcompensation\tobligations. (3)\n\nLong-term\tinvestments\tprimarily\tinclude\tAmerican's\tequity\tinvestment\tin\tChina\tSouthern\tAirlines,\tin\twhich\tAmerican\tpresently\towns\ta\t1.8% equity\tinterest,\tand\tare\tclassified\tin\tother\tassets\ton\tthe\tconsolidated\tbalance\tsheets. (4)\n\n## Fair Value of Debt\n\nThe fair value of American's long-term debt was estimated using quoted market prices or discounted cash flow analyses, based on American's current estimated incremental borrowing rates for similar types of borrowing arrangements. If American's long-term debt was measured at fair value, it would have been classified as Level 2 except for $550 million which would have been classified as Level 3 in the fair value hierarchy.\n\nThe carrying value and estimated fair value of American's long-term debt, including current maturities, were as follows (in millions):\n\n## Other Investments\n\nAmerican has an approximate 25% ownership interest in Republic Holdings, which it received in 2017 in consideration for its unsecured claim in the Republic Holdings bankruptcy case. This ownership interest is accounted for under the equity method and American's portion of Republic Holdings' financial results is recognized within other, net on the consolidated statements of operations and the investment is reflected within other assets on its consolidated balance sheets.\n\n182", + "recall": 0.9890710382513661, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS OF AMERICAN AIRLINES, INC.\n\nAll short-term investments are classified as available-for-sale and stated at fair value. Unrealized gains and losses are recorded in accumulated other comprehensive loss at each reporting period. There were no credit losses. (1)\n\nAmerican’s short-term investments as of December 31, 2020 mature in one year or less except for $235 million of bank notes/certificates of deposit/time deposits. (2)\n\nRestricted cash and short-term investments primarily include money market funds to be used to finance a substantial portion of the cost of the renovation and expansion of Terminal 8 at JFK and collateral held to support workers' compensation obligations. (3)\n\nLong-term investments primarily include American's equity investment in China Southern Airlines, in which American presently owns a 1.8% equity interest, and are classified in other assets on the consolidated balance sheets. (4)\n\nThe fair value of American’s long-term debt was estimated using quoted market prices or discounted cash flow analyses, based on American’s current estimated incremental borrowing rates for similar types of borrowing arrangements. If American’s long-term debt was measured at fair value, it would have been classified as Level 2 except for $550 million which would have been classified as Level 3 in the fair value hierarchy.\n\nThe carrying value and estimated fair value of American’s long-term debt, including current maturities, were as follows (in millions):\n\nAmerican has an approximate 25% ownership interest in Republic Holdings, which it received in 2017 in consideration for its unsecured claim in the Republic Holdings bankruptcy case. This ownership interest is accounted for under the equity method and American’s portion of Republic Holdings’ financial results is recognized within other, net on the consolidated statements of operations and the investment is reflected within other assets on its consolidated balance sheets.\n\n## Fair Value of Debt\n\n## Other Investments\n\n182" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6860244561401397, + "doc_id": "f2e2ab272188c6d3bcc931abac008a40c0db5b3a720817d67f5163b8454bb493", + "edit_distance": 0.2831168831168831, + "f1_score": 0.9576271186440677, + "meteor": 0.7428611987988912, + "precision": 0.9338842975206612, + "pred_md": "11\n\nCP\t2020\tANNUAL\tREPORT\n\nMerchandise products move in both mixed freight and unit trains, in a variety of car types. Service involves delivering products to many different customers and destinations. In addition to traditional rail service, CP moves merchandise traffic through a network of truck-rail transload facilities, expanding the reach of CP's network to non-rail served facilities.\n\n## Forest Products\n\nThe Company's Forest products business represented approximately 12% of Merchandise revenues, and was 4% of total Freight revenues in 2020.\n\nThe following charts compare the percentage of the Company's Forest products freight revenues generated from pulp and paper (wood pulp, paperboard, newsprint, and paper), lumber and panel, and other shipments in 2020, 2019 and 2018:\n\n## 2020 Forest Products Revenues\n\n## 2019 Forest Products Revenues\n\n## 2018 Forest Products Revenues\n\n(12% of Merchandise Revenues; 4% of Freight Revenues)\n\n(10% of Merchandise Revenues; 4% of Freight Revenues)\n\n(11% of Merchandise Revenues; 4% of Freight Revenues)\n\nForest products traffic includes pulp and paper, and lumber and panel shipped from key producing areas in B.C., Ontario, Québec, Alberta, and New Brunswick, to destinations throughout North America, including Vancouver and Montreal to export markets.\n\n## Energy, Chemicals and Plastics\n\nThe Company's Energy, chemicals and plastics business represented approximately 54% of Merchandise revenues, and was 20% of total Freight revenues in 2020.\n\nThe following charts compare the percentage of the Company's Energy, chemicals and plastics freight revenues generated from petroleum products, crude, chemicals, biofuels, and plastics shipments in 2020, 2019 and 2018:\n\n## 2020 Energy, Chemicals & Plastics Revenues\n\n## 2019 Energy, Chemicals & Plastics Revenues\n\n## 2018 Energy, Chemicals & Plastics Revenues\n\n(54% of Merchandise Revenues; 20% of Freight Revenues)\n\n(52% of Merchandise Revenues; 20% of Freight Revenues)\n\n(47% of Merchandise Revenues; 17% of Freight Revenues)", + "recall": 0.9826086956521739, + "true_md": "11 CP 2020 ANNUAL REPORT\n\nMerchandise products move in both mixed freight and unit trains, in a variety of car types. Service involves delivering products to many different customers and destinations. In addition to traditional rail service, CP moves merchandise traffic through a network of truck-rail transload facilities, expanding the reach of CP's network to non-rail served facilities.\n\nForest Products The Company’s Forest products business represented approximately 12% of Merchandise revenues, and was 4% of total Freight revenues in 2020.\n\nThe following charts compare the percentage of the Company's Forest products freight revenues generated from pulp and paper (wood pulp, paperboard, newsprint, and paper), lumber and panel, and other shipments in 2020, 2019 and 2018:\n\n## Forest Products The Company’s Forest products business represented approximately 12% of Merchandise revenues, and was 4% of total Freight revenues in 2020.\n\nForest products traffic includes pulp and paper, and lumber and panel shipped from key producing areas in B.C., Ontario, Québec, Alberta, and New Brunswick, to destinations throughout North America, including Vancouver and Montreal to export markets.\n\nEnergy, Chemicals and Plastics The Company’s Energy, chemicals and plastics business represented approximately 54% of Merchandise revenues, and was 20% of total Freight revenues in 2020.\n\nThe following charts compare the percentage of the Company's Energy, chemicals and plastics freight revenues generated from petroleum products, crude, chemicals, biofuels, and plastics shipments in 2020, 2019 and 2018:\n\n## Energy, Chemicals and Plastics The Company’s Energy, chemicals and plastics business represented approximately 54% of Merchandise revenues, and was 20% of total Freight revenues in" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9255321104704765, + "doc_id": "354be5b148cd8d9c3cb490276ad9671ff64017c6d825e768a9cc667843761e58", + "edit_distance": 0.15293185419968305, + "f1_score": 0.987538940809969, + "meteor": 0.834916175101812, + "precision": 0.9875389408099688, + "pred_md": "115 CP\t2020\tANNUAL\tREPORT\n\n## Investments measured at net asset value (\"NAV\"): (1)\n\nAmounts are comprised of certain investments measured using NAV (or its equivalent) as a practical expedient. These investments have not been classified in the fair value hierarchy.\n\n## Government & Corporate Bonds: (2)\n\nFair values for bonds are based on market prices supplied by independent sources as of the last trading day.\n\n## Mortgages: (3)\n\nThe fair values of mortgages are based on current market yields of financial instruments of similar maturity, coupon and risk factors.\n\n## Real estate: (4)\n\nReal estate fund values are based on the NAV of the funds that invest directly in real estate investments. The values of the investments have been estimated using the capital accounts representing the plan's ownership interest in the funds. Of the total, $580 million is subject to redemption frequencies ranging from monthly to annually and a redemption notice period of 90 days (2019 - $606 million). The remaining $124 million is not subject to redemption and is normally returned through distributions as a result of the liquidation of the underlying real estate investments (2019 - $118 million). As at December 31, 2020, there are $32 million of unfunded commitments for real estate investments (December 31, 2019 - $35 million).\n\n## Infrastructure: (5)\n\nInfrastructure fund values are based on the NAV of the funds that invest directly in infrastructure investments. The values of the investments have been estimated using the capital accounts representing the plans' ownership interest in the funds. Of the total, $112 million is subject to redemption frequencies ranging from monthly to annually and a redemption notice period of 90 days (2019 - $119 million). The remaining $87 million is not subject to redemption and is normally returned through distributions as a result of the liquidation of the underlying infrastructure investments (2019 - $68 million). As at December 31, 2020, there are $491 million of unfunded commitments for infrastructure investments (December 31, 2019 - $286 million).\n\n## Private debt: (6)\n\nPrivate debt fund values are based on the NAV of the funds that invest directly in private debt investments. The values of the investments have been estimated using the capital accounts representing the plans' ownership interest in the funds. Of the total, $154 million is subject to redemption frequencies ranging from monthly to annually and a redemption notice period of 90 days (2019 - $154 million). The remaining $311 million is not subject to redemption and is normally returned through distributions as a result of the repayment of the underlying loans (2019 $159 million). As at December 31, 2020, there are $533 million of unfunded commitments for private debt investments (December 31, 2019 - $392 million).\n\n## Derivatives: (7)\n\nThe investment managers may utilize the following derivative instruments: equity futures to replicate equity index returns (Level 2); currency forwards to partially hedge foreign currency exposures (Level 2); bond forwards to reduce asset/liability interest rate risk exposures (Level 2); interest rate swaps to manage duration and interest rate risk (Level 2); credit default swaps to manage credit risk (Level 2); and options to manage interest rate risk and volatility (Level 2). The Company may utilize derivatives directly, but only for the purpose of hedging foreign currency exposures. As at December 31, 2020, there are currency forwards with a notional value of $1,041 million (December 31, 2019 - $334 million) and a fair value of $73 million (December 31, 2019 - $13 million). The fixed income investment manager utilizes a portfolio of bond forwards for the purpose of reducing asset/liability interest rate exposure. As at December 31, 2020, there are bond forwards with a notional value of $3,540 million (December 31, 2019 - $3,269 million) and a negative fair value of $2 million (December 31, 2019 - $(72) million).\n\n## Absolute return: (8)\n\nThe value of absolute return fund investments is based on the NAV reported by the fund administrators. The funds have different redemption policies with redemption notice periods varying from 60 to 95 days and frequencies ranging from monthly to triennially.\n\n## Additional plan assets information\n\nThe Company's primary investment objective for pension plan assets is to achieve a long-term return, net of all fees and expenses, that is sufficient for the plan's assets to satisfy the current and future obligations to plan beneficiaries, while minimizing the financial impact on the Company. In identifying the asset allocation ranges, consideration was given to the long-term nature of the underlying plan liabilities, the solvency and going-concern financial position of the plan, long-term return expectations, and the risks associated with key asset classes as well as the relationships of returns on key asset classes with each other, inflation, and interest rates. When advantageous and with due consideration, derivative instruments may be utilized by investment managers, provided the total value of the underlying assets represented by financial derivatives (excluding currency forwards, liability hedging derivatives in fixed income portfolios, and derivatives held by absolute return funds) is limited to 30% of the market value of the fund.\n\nThe funded status of the plans is exposed to fluctuations in interest rates, which affects the relative values of the plans' liabilities and assets. In order to mitigate interest rate risk, the Company's main Canadian defined benefit pension plan utilizes a liability driven investment strategy in its fixed income portfolio, which uses a combination of long duration bonds and derivatives to hedge interest rate risk, managed by the investment manager. At December 31, 2020, the plan's solvency funded position was 47% hedged against interest rate risk (2019 - 45%).\n\nWhen investing in foreign securities, the plans are exposed to foreign currency risk; the effect of which is included in the valuation of the foreign securities. At December 31, 2020, the plans were 33% exposed to the U.S. dollar net of currency forwards (40% excluding the currency forwards), 6% exposed to the Euro, and 14% exposed to various other currencies. At December 31, 2019, the plans were 39% exposed to the U.S. dollar net of currency forwards (41% excluding the currency forwards), 6% exposed to the Euro, and 14% exposed to various other currencies.", + "recall": 0.9875389408099688, + "true_md": "Amounts are comprised of certain investments measured using NAV (or its equivalent) as a practical expedient. These investments have not been classified in the fair value hierarchy.\n\nFair values for bonds are based on market prices supplied by independent sources as of the last trading day.\n\nThe fair values of mortgages are based on current market yields of financial instruments of similar maturity, coupon and risk factors.\n\nReal estate fund values are based on the NAV of the funds that invest directly in real estate investments. The values of the investments have been estimated using the capital accounts representing the plan’s ownership interest in the funds. Of the total, $580 million is subject to redemption frequencies ranging from monthly to annually and a redemption notice period of 90 days (2019 – $606 million). The remaining $124 million is not subject to redemption and is normally returned through distributions as a result of the liquidation of the underlying real estate investments (2019 – $118 million). As at December 31, 2020, there are $32 million of unfunded commitments for real estate investments (December 31, 2019 – $35 million).\n\nInfrastructure fund values are based on the NAV of the funds that invest directly in infrastructure investments. The values of the investments have been estimated using the capital accounts representing the plans' ownership interest in the funds. Of the total, $112 million is subject to redemption frequencies ranging from monthly to annually and a redemption notice period of 90 days (2019 – $119 million). The remaining $87 million is not subject to redemption and is normally returned through distributions as a result of the liquidation of the underlying infrastructure investments (2019 – $68 million). As at December 31, 2020, there are $491 million of unfunded commitments for infrastructure investments (December 31, 2019 – $286 million).\n\nPrivate debt fund values are based on the NAV of the funds that invest directly in private debt investments. The values of the investments have been estimated using the capital accounts representing the plans' ownership interest in the funds. Of the total, $154 million is subject to redemption frequencies ranging from monthly to annually and a redemption notice period of 90 days (2019 – $154 million). The remaining $311 million is not subject to redemption and is normally returned through distributions as a result of the repayment of the underlying loans (2019 - $159 million). As at December 31, 2020, there are $533 million of unfunded commitments for private debt investments (December 31, 2019 – $392 million).\n\nThe investment managers may utilize the following derivative instruments: equity futures to replicate equity index returns (Level 2); currency forwards to partially hedge foreign currency exposures (Level 2); bond forwards to reduce asset/liability interest rate risk exposures (Level 2); interest rate swaps to manage duration and interest rate risk (Level 2); credit default swaps to manage credit risk (Level 2); and options to manage interest rate risk and volatility (Level 2). The Company may utilize derivatives directly, but only for the purpose of hedging foreign currency exposures. As at December 31, 2020, there are currency forwards with a notional value of $1,041 million (December 31, 2019 – $334 million) and a fair value of $73 million (December 31, 2019 – $13 million). The fixed income investment manager utilizes a portfolio of bond forwards for the purpose of reducing asset/liability interest rate exposure. As at December 31, 2020, there are bond forwards with a notional value of $3,540 million ( December 31, 2019 – $3,269 million) and a negative fair value of $2 million (December 31, 2019 – $(72) million).\n\nThe value of absolute return fund investments is based on the NAV reported by the fund administrators. The funds have different redemption policies with redemption notice periods varying from 60 to 95 days and frequencies ranging from monthly to triennially.\n\nAdditional plan assets information The Company's primary investment objective for pension plan assets is to achieve a long–term return, net of all fees and expenses, that is sufficient for the plan's assets to satisfy the current and future obligations to plan beneficiaries, while minimizing the financial impact on the Company. In identifying the asset allocation ranges, consideration was given to the long-term nature of the underlying plan liabilities, the solvency and going-concern financial position of the plan, long-term return expectations, and the risks associated with key asset classes as well as the relationships of returns on key asset classes with each other, inflation, and interest rates. When advantageous and with due consideration, derivative instruments may be utilized by investment managers, provided the total value of the underlying assets represented by financial derivatives (excluding currency forwards, liability hedging derivatives in fixed income portfolios, and derivatives held by absolute return funds) is limited to 30% of the market value of the fund.\n\nThe funded status of the plans is exposed to fluctuations in interest rates, which affects the relative values of the plans' liabilities and assets. In order to mitigate interest rate risk, the Company's main Canadian defined benefit pension plan utilizes a liability driven investment strategy in its fixed income portfolio, which uses a combination of long duration bonds and derivatives to hedge interest rate risk, managed by the investment manager. At December 31, 2020, the plan's solvency funded position was 47% hedged against interest rate risk (2019 – 45%).\n\nWhen investing in foreign securities, the plans are exposed to foreign currency risk; the effect of which is included in the valuation of the foreign securities. At December 31, 2020, the plans were 33% exposed to the U.S. dollar net of currency forwards (40% excluding the currency forwards), 6% exposed to the Euro, and 14% exposed to various other currencies. At December 31, 2019, the plans were 39% exposed to the U.S. dollar net of currency forwards (41% excluding the currency forwards), 6% exposed to the Euro, and 14% exposed to various other currencies.\n\n## Additional plan assets information The Company's primary investment objective for pension plan assets is to achieve a long–term return, net of all fees and expenses, that is sufficient for the plan's\n\nInvestments measured at net asset value (\"NAV\"): (1) \n\nGovernment & Corporate Bonds: (2) \n\nMortgages: (3) \n\nReal estate: (4) \n\n Infrastructure: (5)\n\n Private debt: (6)\n\n Derivatives: (7)\n\n Absolute return: (8)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9232228259941136, + "doc_id": "262cbdad5740c45f63e51a2a1bdfa9d99a23527cd52d023da35e1a938d3d4f27", + "edit_distance": 0.07894736842105263, + "f1_score": 0.9863945578231292, + "meteor": 0.9488589317777963, + "precision": 0.9863945578231292, + "pred_md": "## Marketing and Sales\n\nBecause of the highly technical nature of its products, Applied markets and sells products worldwide almost entirely through a direct sales force.\n\nApplied has operations in many countries, with some of its business activities concentrated in certain geographic areas, and global and regional economic conditions can impact the company's business and financial results. Applied's business is based on capital equipment investments by major semiconductor, display and other manufacturers, and is subject to significant variability in customer demand for Applied's products. Customers' expenditures depend on many factors, including: general economic conditions; anticipated market demand and pricing for semiconductors, display technologies and other electronic devices; the development of new technologies; customers' factory utilization; capital resources and financing; and government policies and incentives. In addition, a significant driver in the semiconductor and display industries has been end-demand for mobile consumer products, which has been characterized by seasonality that impacts the timing of customer investments in manufacturing equipment and, in turn, Applied's business.\n\nInformation on net sales to unaffiliated customers and long-lived assets attributable to Applied's geographic regions is included in Note 17 of Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements. The following companies accounted for at least 10 percent of Applied's net sales in each fiscal year, which were for products and services in multiple reportable segments.\n\nTable of Contents\n\n\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\n\n*\tLess\tthan\t10%\n\n9", + "recall": 0.9863945578231292, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## Marketing and Sales\n\nBecause of the highly technical nature of its products, Applied markets and sells products worldwide almost entirely through a direct sales force.\n\nApplied has operations in many countries, with some of its business activities concentrated in certain geographic areas, and global and regional economic conditions can impact the company’s business and financial results. Applied’s business is based on capital equipment investments by major semiconductor, display and other manufacturers, and is subject to significant variability in customer demand for Applied’s products. Customers’ expenditures depend on many factors, including: general economic conditions; anticipated market demand and pricing for semiconductors, display technologies and other electronic devices; the development of new technologies; customers’ factory utilization; capital resources and financing; and government policies and incentives. In addition, a significant driver in the semiconductor and display industries has been end-demand for mobile consumer products, which has been characterized by seasonality that impacts the timing of customer investments in manufacturing equipment and, in turn, Applied’s business.\n\nInformation on net sales to unaffiliated customers and long-lived assets attributable to Applied’s geographic regions is included in Note 17 of Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements. The following companies accounted for at least 10 percent of Applied’s net sales in each fiscal year, which were for products and services in multiple reportable segments.\n\n9\n\n\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_ * Less than 10%" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9541247481021333, + "doc_id": "859244a48bc0435d2f1a8210c8eae7ac9f9edab13882c1b920a2718215965676", + "edit_distance": 0.7893296853625171, + "f1_score": 0.9923954372623576, + "meteor": 0.7256564665929663, + "precision": 0.9923954372623575, + "pred_md": "## Table of Contents\n\n## REPORT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM\n\nTo the Stockholders and Board of Directors Applied Materials, Inc.:\n\n## Opinion on Internal Control Over Financial Reporting\n\nWe have audited Applied Materials, Inc. and subsidiaries' (the Company) internal control over financial reporting as of October 25, 2020, based on criteria established in Internal Control - Integrated Framework (2013) issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission. In our opinion, the Company maintained, in all material respects, effective internal control over financial reporting as of October 25, 2020, based on criteria established in Internal Control - Integrated Framework (2013) issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission.\n\nWe also have audited, in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States) (PCAOB), the consolidated balance sheets of the Company as of October 25, 2020 and October 27, 2019, the related consolidated statements of operations, comprehensive income, stockholders' equity, and cash flows for each of the years in the three-year period ended October 25, 2020, and the related notes (collectively, the consolidated financial statements), and our report dated December 11, 2020 expressed an unqualified opinion on those consolidated financial statements.\n\n## Basis for Opinion\n\nThe Company's management is responsible for maintaining effective internal control over financial reporting and for its assessment of the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting, included in the accompanying Management's Report on Internal Control over Financial Reporting. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on the Company's internal control over financial reporting based on our audit. We are a public accounting firm registered with the PCAOB and are required to be independent with respect to the Company in accordance with the U.S. federal securities laws and the applicable rules and regulations of the Securities and Exchange Commission and the PCAOB.\n\nWe conducted our audit in accordance with the standards of the PCAOB. Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether effective internal control over financial reporting was maintained in all material respects. Our audit of internal control over financial reporting included obtaining an understanding of internal control over financial reporting, assessing the risk that a material weakness exists, and testing and evaluating the design and operating effectiveness of internal control based on the assessed risk. Our audit also included performing such other procedures as we considered necessary in the circumstances. We believe that our audit provides a reasonable basis for our opinion.\n\n## Definition and Limitations of Internal Control Over Financial Reporting\n\nA company's internal control over financial reporting is a process designed to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles. A company's internal control over financial reporting includes those policies and procedures that (1) pertain to the maintenance of records that, in reasonable detail, accurately and fairly reflect the transactions and dispositions of the assets of the company; (2) provide reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded as necessary to permit preparation of financial statements in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles, and that receipts and expenditures of the company are being made only in accordance with authorizations of management and directors of the company; and (3) provide reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of unauthorized acquisition, use, or disposition of the company's assets that could have a material effect on the financial statements.\n\nBecause of its inherent limitations, internal control over financial reporting may not prevent or detect misstatements. Also, projections of any evaluation of effectiveness to future periods are subject to the risk that controls may become inadequate because of changes in conditions, or that the degree of compliance with the policies or procedures may deteriorate.\n\n/s/\t\t\t\tKPMG\tLLP KPMG\tLLP\n\nSanta Clara, California December 11, 2020\n\n63", + "recall": 0.9923954372623575, + "true_md": "## REPORT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM\n\nTo the Stockholders and Board of Directors Applied Materials, Inc.:\n\nTable of Contents\n\n## Opinion on Internal Control Over Financial Reporting\n\n## Basis for Opinion\n\n## Definition and Limitations of Internal Control Over Financial Reporting\n\n/s/ KPMG LLP KPMG LLP\n\nSanta Clara, California December 11, 2020\n\nA company’s internal control over financial reporting is a process designed to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles. A company’s internal control over financial reporting includes those policies and procedures that (1) pertain to the maintenance of records that, in reasonable detail, accurately and fairly reflect the transactions and dispositions of the assets of the company; (2) provide reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded as necessary to permit preparation of financial statements in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles, and that receipts and expenditures of the company are being made only in accordance with authorizations of management and directors of the company; and (3) provide reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of unauthorized acquisition, use, or disposition of the company’s assets that could have a material effect on the financial statements.\n\nBecause of its inherent limitations, internal control over financial reporting may not prevent or detect misstatements. Also, projections of any evaluation of effectiveness to future periods are subject to the risk that controls may become inadequate because of changes in conditions, or that the degree of compliance with the policies or procedures may deteriorate.\n\nWe conducted our audit in accordance with the standards of the PCAOB. Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether effective internal control over financial reporting was maintained in all material respects. Our audit of internal control over financial reporting included obtaining an understanding of internal control over financial reporting, assessing the risk that a material weakness exists, and testing and evaluating the design and operating effectiveness of internal control based on the assessed risk. Our audit also included performing such other procedures as we considered necessary in the circumstances. We believe that our audit provides a reasonable basis for our opinion.\n\nThe Company’s management is responsible for maintaining effective internal control over financial reporting and for its assessment of the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting, included in the accompanying Management’s Report on Internal Control over Financial Reporting. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on the Company’s internal control over financial reporting based on our audit. We are a public accounting firm registered with the PCAOB and are required to be independent with respect to the Company in accordance with the U.S. federal securities laws and the applicable rules and regulations of the Securities and Exchange Commission and the PCAOB.\n\nWe also have audited, in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States) (PCAOB), the consolidated balance sheets of the Company as of October 25, 2020 and October 27, 2019, the related consolidated statements of operations, comprehensive income, stockholders’ equity, and cash flows for each of the years in the three-year period ended October 25, 2020, and the related notes (collectively, the consolidated financial statements), and our report dated December 11, 2020 expressed an unqualified opinion on those consolidated financial statements.\n\nWe have audited Applied Materials, Inc. and subsidiaries’ (the Company) internal control over financial reporting as of October 25, 2020, based on criteria established in Internal Control - Integrated Framework (2013) issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission. In our opinion, the Company maintained, in all material respects, effective internal control over financial reporting as of October 25, 2020, based on criteria established in Internal Control - Integrated Framework (2013) issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission.\n\n63" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9593350535251268, + "doc_id": "25fd89f640aefcfcf5d91c60769433fdb00f114bdc6c37a6ed0eef3cc291721e", + "edit_distance": 0.0345821325648415, + "f1_score": 0.9811320754716982, + "meteor": 0.9874759667690419, + "precision": 0.9811320754716981, + "pred_md": "## APPLIED MATERIALS, INC.\n\n## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS - (Continued)\n\nThe fair value of the portion of the awards subject to targeted levels of adjusted operating margin is estimated on the date of grant. If the performance goals are not achieved as of the end of the performance period, no compensation expense is recognized and any previously recognized compensation expense is reversed. The expected cost is based on the awards that are probable to vest and is reflected over the service period and reduced for estimated forfeitures.\n\nThe fair value of the portion of the awards subject to targeted levels of TSR is estimated on the date of grant using a Monte Carlo simulation model. Compensation expense is recognized based upon the assumption of 100% achievement of the TSR goal and will not be reversed even if the threshold level of TSR is never achieved, and is reflected over the service period and reduced for estimated forfeitures.\n\nA summary of the changes in restricted stock units, restricted stock, performance shares and performance units outstanding under Applied's equity compensation plans is presented below:\n\nTable of Contents\n\nAt October 25, 2020, 1.2 million additional performance-based awards could be earned based upon achievement of certain levels of specified performance goals.\n\n## Employee Stock Purchase Plans\n\nUnder the ESPP, substantially all employees may purchase Applied common stock through payroll deductions at a price equal to 85 percent of the lower of the fair market value of Applied common stock at the beginning or end of each 6-month purchase period, subject to certain limits. Applied issued 3 million shares in each of fiscal 2020, 4 million shares in fiscal 2019 and 3 million shares in fiscal 2018, under the ESPP. Compensation expense is calculated using the fair value of the employees' purchase rights under the Black-Scholes model. Underlying assumptions used in the model are outlined in the following table:\n\n94", + "recall": 0.9811320754716981, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## APPLIED MATERIALS, INC. NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS — (Continued)\n\nThe fair value of the portion of the awards subject to targeted levels of adjusted operating margin is estimated on the date of grant. If the performance goals are not achieved as of the end of the performance period, no compensation expense is recognized and any previously recognized compensation expense is reversed. The expected cost is based on the awards that are probable to vest and is reflected over the service period and reduced for estimated forfeitures.\n\nThe fair value of the portion of the awards subject to targeted levels of TSR is estimated on the date of grant using a Monte Carlo simulation model. Compensation expense is recognized based upon the assumption of 100% achievement of the TSR goal and will not be reversed even if the threshold level of TSR is never achieved, and is reflected over the service period and reduced for estimated forfeitures.\n\nA summary of the changes in restricted stock units, restricted stock, performance shares and performance units outstanding under Applied’s equity compensation plans is presented below:\n\nAt October 25, 2020, 1.2 million additional performance-based awards could be earned based upon achievement of certain levels of specified performance goals.\n\n## Employee Stock Purchase Plans\n\nUnder the ESPP, substantially all employees may purchase Applied common stock through payroll deductions at a price equal to 85 percent of the lower of the fair market value of Applied common stock at the beginning or end of each 6-month purchase period, subject to certain limits. Applied issued 3 million shares in each of fiscal 2020, 4 million shares in fiscal 2019 and 3 million shares in fiscal 2018, under the ESPP. Compensation expense is calculated using the fair value of the employees’ purchase rights under the Black-Scholes model. Underlying assumptions used in the model are outlined in the following table:\n\n94" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8937614723099424, + "doc_id": "76ab8ae5766a4b1d0375ab6be31d3af1070ef28dcf25d1b4f78c292d2edb9d4d", + "edit_distance": 0.1088139281828074, + "f1_score": 0.9939209726443771, + "meteor": 0.8311891623220394, + "precision": 0.9969512195121951, + "pred_md": "EASTGROUP PROPERTIES, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\nan entity must determine, on a lease by lease basis, if a lease concession was the result of a new arrangement reached with the tenant, which would be accounted for under the lease modification framework, or if the lease concession was under the enforceable rights and obligations that existed in the original lease, which would be accounted for outside the lease modification framework. The Q&A provides a practical expedient for entities to make an election to account for certain lease concessions consistent with how those concessions would be accounted for outside of the lease modification framework. This election is available for concessions related to the effects of the COVID-19 pandemic that do not result in a substantial increase in the rights of the lessor or the obligations of the lessee. The FASB staff provided two possible methods to account for deferral of payments with no substantive changes to the consideration in the original contract: (a) account for the concessions as if no changes to the lease contract were made and, (b) account for the deferred payments as variable lease payments. The Company has elected the practical expedient provided by the FASB staff and is accounting for lease concessions meeting the criterion as if no changes to the lease contract were made. For the year ended December 31, 2020, the Company recognized approximately $1,483,000 in Income from real estate operations from lease concessions under this election.\n\n## Future Minimum Rental Receipts Under Non-Cancelable Leases\n\nThe Company's leases with its customers may include various provisions such as scheduled rent increases, renewal options and termination options. The majority of the Company's leases include defined rent increases rather than variable payments based on an index or unknown rate. In calculating the disclosures presented below, the Company included the fixed, non-cancelable terms of the leases. The following schedule indicates approximate future minimum rental receipts under non-cancelable leases for real estate properties by year as of December 31, 2020:\n\nThe Company recognizes gains on sales of real estate in accordance with the principles set forth in the Codification. For each transaction, the Company evaluates whether the guidance in ASC 606, Revenue from Contracts with Customers, or ASC 610, Other Income - Gains and Losses from the Derecognition of Nonfinancial Assets, is applicable. Upon closing of real estate transactions, the provisions of the Codification require consideration of whether the seller has a controlling financial interest in the entity that holds the nonfinancial asset after the transaction. In addition, the seller evaluates whether a contract exists under ASC 606 and whether the counterparty obtained control of each nonfinancial asset that is sold. If a contract exists and the counterparty obtained control of each nonfinancial asset, the seller derecognizes the assets at the close of the transaction with resulting gains or losses reflected on the Consolidated Statements of Income and Comprehensive Income.\n\nThe Company recognizes interest income on mortgage loans on the accrual method unless a significant uncertainty of collection exists. If a significant uncertainty exists, interest income is recognized as collected. If applicable, discounts on mortgage loans receivable are amortized over the lives of the loans using a method that does not differ materially from the interest method. The Company evaluates the collectibility of both interest and principal on each of its loans to determine whether the loans are impaired. A loan is considered to be impaired when, based on current information and events, it is probable that the Company will be unable to collect all amounts due according to the existing contractual terms. When a loan is considered to be impaired, the amount of loss is calculated by comparing the recorded investment to the value determined by discounting the expected future cash flows at the loan's effective interest rate or to the fair value of the underlying collateral (if the loan is collateralized) less costs to sell. During the years ended December 31, 2020 and 2019, there was no significant uncertainty of collection; therefore, interest income was recognized. As of December 31, 2019, the Company determined that no allowance for collectibility of the mortgage loans receivable was necessary. The Company's mortgage loans receivable was fully collected during the year ended December 31, 2020.\n\n## (d) Real Estate Properties\n\nEastGroup has one reportable segment-industrial properties. These properties are primarily located in major Sunbelt regions of the United States. The Company's properties have similar economic characteristics and as a result, have been aggregated into one reportable segment.\n\n55", + "recall": 0.990909090909091, + "true_md": "EASTGROUP PROPERTIES, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\nan entity must determine, on a lease by lease basis, if a lease concession was the result of a new arrangement reached with the tenant, which would be accounted for under the lease modification framework, or if the lease concession was under the enforceable rights and obligations that existed in the original lease, which would be accounted for outside the lease modification framework. The Q&A provides a practical expedient for entities to make an election to account for certain lease concessions consistent with how those concessions would be accounted for outside of the lease modification framework. This election is available for concessions related to the effects of the COVID-19 pandemic that do not result in a substantial increase in the rights of the lessor or the obligations of the lessee. The FASB staff provided two possible methods to account for deferral of payments with no substantive changes to the consideration in the original contract: (a) account for the concessions as if no changes to the lease contract were made and, (b) account for the deferred payments as variable lease payments. The Company has elected the practical expedient provided by the FASB staff and is accounting for lease concessions meeting the criterion as if no changes to the lease contract were made. For the year ended December 31, 2020, the Company recognized approximately $1,483,000 in Income from real estate operations from lease concessions under this election.\n\nFuture Minimum Rental Receipts Under Non-Cancelable Leases The Company’s leases with its customers may include various provisions such as scheduled rent increases, renewal options and termination options. The majority of the Company’s leases include defined rent increases rather than variable payments based on an index or unknown rate. In calculating the disclosures presented below, the Company included the fixed, non-cancelable terms of the leases. The following schedule indicates approximate future minimum rental receipts under non-cancelable leases for real estate properties by year as of December 31, 2020:\n\nThe Company recognizes gains on sales of real estate in accordance with the principles set forth in the Codification. For each transaction, the Company evaluates whether the guidance in ASC 606, Revenue from Contracts with Customers, or ASC 610, Other Income - Gains and Losses from the Derecognition of Nonfinancial Assets, is applicable. Upon closing of real estate transactions, the provisions of the Codification require consideration of whether the seller has a controlling financial interest in the entity that holds the nonfinancial asset after the transaction. In addition, the seller evaluates whether a contract exists under ASC 606 and whether the counterparty obtained control of each nonfinancial asset that is sold. If a contract exists and the counterparty obtained control of each nonfinancial asset, the seller derecognizes the assets at the close of the transaction with resulting gains or losses reflected on the Consolidated Statements of Income and Comprehensive Income.\n\nThe Company recognizes interest income on mortgage loans on the accrual method unless a significant uncertainty of collection exists. If a significant uncertainty exists, interest income is recognized as collected. If applicable, discounts on mortgage loans receivable are amortized over the lives of the loans using a method that does not differ materially from the interest method. The Company evaluates the collectibility of both interest and principal on each of its loans to determine whether the loans are impaired. A loan is considered to be impaired when, based on current information and events, it is probable that the Company will be unable to collect all amounts due according to the existing contractual terms. When a loan is considered to be impaired, the amount of loss is calculated by comparing the recorded investment to the value determined by discounting the expected future cash flows at the loan’s effective interest rate or to the fair value of the underlying collateral (if the loan is collateralized) less costs to sell. During the years ended December 31, 2020 and 2019, there was no significant uncertainty of collection; therefore, interest income was recognized. As of December 31, 2019, the Company determined that no allowance for collectibility of the mortgage loans receivable was necessary. The Company's mortgage loans receivable was fully collected during the year ended December 31, 2020.\n\n(d) Real Estate Properties EastGroup has one reportable segment–industrial properties. These properties are primarily located in major Sunbelt regions of the United States. The Company's properties have similar economic characteristics and as a result, have been aggregated into one reportable segment.\n\n55\n\n## (d) Real Estate Properties EastGroup has one reportable segment–industrial properties. These properties are primarily located in major Sunbelt regions of the United States. The Company's properties have similar economic characteristics and as a result,\n\n## Future Minimum Rental Receipts Under Non-Cancelable Leases The Company’s leases with its customers may include various provisions such as scheduled rent increases, renewal options and termination options. The majority of the Company’s leases include defined rent increases rather than" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9913417950561817, + "doc_id": "ff53c7ca2dcd955e07db19643809483cd29dd4e2caedc4e494253cdf0bd51ffc", + "edit_distance": 0.004878048780487805, + "f1_score": 0.994535519125683, + "meteor": 0.9951668733449208, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## 22. REALIGNMENT AND TRANSFORMATION PROGRAMS\n\nIn the second quarter of 2020, we identified and initiated certain realignment activities resulting from our Flowserve 2.0 Transformation Program (defined below) to right-size our organizational operations based on the current business environment, with the overall objective to reduce our workforce costs, including manufacturing optimization through the consolidation of certain facilities (\"2020 Realignment Program\"). The realignment activities consist of restructuring and non-restructuring charges. Restructuring charges represent costs associated with the relocation of certain business activities and facility closures and include related severance costs. Non-restructuring charges are primarily employee severance associated with the workforce reductions. Expenses are primarily reported in cost of sales (\"COS\") or selling, general and administrative (\"SG&A\"), as applicable, in our consolidated statements of income. We anticipate a total investment in these initiated realignment activities of approximately $80 million and that the majority of the charges were incurred in 2020 with the remainder to be incurred in early 2021. There are certain other realignment activities that are currently being evaluated, but have not yet been finalized. The realignment programs initiated in 2015 (\"2015 Realignment Programs\"), which consisted of both restructuring and non-restructuring charges, were substantially complete as of March 31, 2020, resulting in $362.4 million of total charges incurred through the completion of the programs.\n\nIn the second quarter of 2018, we launched and committed resources to our Flowserve 2.0 Transformation (\"Flowserve 2.0 Transformation\"), a program designed to transform our business model to drive operational excellence, reduce complexity, accelerate growth, improve organizational health and better leverage our existing global platform. The Flowserve 2.0 Transformation expenses incurred primarily consist of professional services, project management and related travel costs recorded in SG&A.\n\nGenerally, the aforementioned charges will be paid in cash, except for asset write-downs, which are non-cash charges. The following is a summary of total charges, net of adjustments, related to our realignment activities and Flowserve 2.0 Transformation charges. Realignment charges incurred in 2020 related to our 2020 Realignment Program and realignment charges incurred in 2019 related to our 2015 Realignment Programs:\n\n112", + "recall": 0.9891304347826086, + "true_md": "## 22. REALIGNMENT AND TRANSFORMATION PROGRAMS\n\nIn the second quarter of 2020, we identified and initiated certain realignment activities resulting from our Flowserve 2.0 Transformation Program (defined below) to right-size our organizational operations based on the current business environment, with the overall objective to reduce our workforce costs, including manufacturing optimization through the consolidation of certain facilities (\"2020 Realignment Program\"). The realignment activities consist of restructuring and non-restructuring charges. Restructuring charges represent costs associated with the relocation of certain business activities and facility closures and include related severance costs. Non-restructuring charges are primarily employee severance associated with the workforce reductions. Expenses are primarily reported in cost of sales (\"COS\") or selling, general and administrative (\"SG&A\"), as applicable, in our consolidated statements of income. We anticipate a total investment in these initiated realignment activities of approximately $80 million and that the majority of the charges were incurred in 2020 with the remainder to be incurred in early 2021. There are certain other realignment activities that are currently being evaluated, but have not yet been finalized. The realignment programs initiated in 2015 (\"2015 Realignment Programs\"), which consisted of both restructuring and non-restructuring charges, were substantially complete as of March 31, 2020, resulting in $362.4 million of total charges incurred through the completion of the programs.\n\nIn the second quarter of 2018, we launched and committed resources to our Flowserve 2.0 Transformation (\"Flowserve 2.0 Transformation\"), a program designed to transform our business model to drive operational excellence, reduce complexity, accelerate growth, improve organizational health and better leverage our existing global platform. T he Flowserve 2.0 Transformation expenses incurred primarily consist of professional services, project management and related travel costs recorded in SG&A.\n\nGenerally, the aforementioned charges will be paid in cash, except for asset write-downs, which are non-cash charges. The following is a summary of total charges, net of adjustments, related to our realignment activities and Flowserve 2.0 Transformation charges. Realignment charges incurred in 2020 related to our 2020 Realignment Program and realignment charges incurred in 2019 related to our 2015 Realignment Programs:\n\n112" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9948698749927851, + "doc_id": "a51ac0785259ea331436e07602c11cb4fcce02553bd0e2308963bdfa28516198", + "edit_distance": 0.004398826979472141, + "f1_score": 0.9950083194675542, + "meteor": 0.9958928802398282, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "CP\t2020\tANNUAL\tREPORT\n\nglobal economic growth; commodity demand growth; sustainable industrial and agricultural production; commodity prices and interest rates; foreign exchange rates (as specified herein); effective tax rates (as specified herein); performance of our assets and equipment; sufficiency of our budgeted capital expenditures in carrying out our business plan; geopolitical conditions; applicable laws, regulations and government policies; the availability and cost of labour, services and infrastructure; the satisfaction by third parties of their obligations to the Company; and the anticipated impacts of the COVID-19 pandemic on the Company's business, operating results, cash flows and/or financial condition. Although the Company believes the expectations, estimates, projections and assumptions reflected in the forward-looking statements presented herein are reasonable as of the date hereof, there can be no assurance that they will prove to be correct. Current conditions, economic and otherwise, render assumptions, although reasonable when made, subject to greater uncertainty.\n\nUndue reliance should not be placed on forward-looking statements as actual results may differ materially from those expressed or implied by forward-looking statements. By their nature, forward-looking statements involve numerous inherent risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from the forward-looking statements, including but not limited to the following factors: changes in business strategies; general North American and global economic, credit and business conditions; risks associated with agricultural production such as weather conditions and insect populations; the availability and price of energy commodities; the effects of competition and pricing pressures; industry capacity; shifts in market demand; changes in commodity prices; uncertainty surrounding timing and volumes of commodities being shipped via CP; inflation; geopolitical instability; changes in laws, regulations and government policies, including regulation of rates; changes in taxes and tax rates; potential increases in maintenance and operating costs; changes in fuel prices; uncertainties of investigations, proceedings or other types of claims and litigation; labour disputes; risks and liabilities arising from derailments; transportation of dangerous goods; timing of completion of capital and maintenance projects; currency and interest rate fluctuations; effects of changes in market conditions and discount rates on the financial position of pension plans and investments; trade restrictions or other changes to international trade arrangements; climate change; various events that could disrupt operations, including severe weather, such as droughts, floods, avalanches and earthquakes, and cybersecurity attacks, as well as security threats and governmental response to them, and technological changes; and the pandemic created by the outbreak of COVID-19 and resulting effects on economic conditions, the demand environment for logistics requirements and energy prices, restrictions imposed by public health authorities or governments, fiscal and monetary policy responses by governments and financial institutions, and disruptions to global supply chains. The foregoing list of factors is not exhaustive.\n\nThere are more specific factors that could cause actual results to differ materially from those described in the forward-looking statements contained in this Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations and Annual Report on Form 10-K. These more specific factors are identified and discussed in Item 1A. Risk Factors. Other risks are detailed from time to time in reports filed by CP with securities regulators in Canada and the United States.\n\nThe forward-looking statements contained in this Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations and Annual Report on Form 10-K are made as of the date hereof. Except as required by law, CP undertakes no obligation to update publicly or otherwise revise any forward-looking statements, or the foregoing assumptions and risks affecting such forward-looking statements, whether as a result of new information, future events or otherwise.", + "recall": 0.9900662251655629, + "true_md": "75 CP 2020 ANNUAL REPORT\n\nglobal economic growth; commodity demand growth; sustainable industrial and agricultural production; commodity prices and interest rates; foreign exchange rates (as specified herein); effective tax rates (as specified herein); performance of our assets and equipment; sufficiency of our budgeted capital expenditures in carrying out our business plan; geopolitical conditions; applicable laws, regulations and government policies; the availability and cost of labour, services and infrastructure; the satisfaction by third parties of their obligations to the Company; and the anticipated impacts of the COVID-19 pandemic on the Company's business, operating results, cash flows and/or financial condition. Although the Company believes the expectations, estimates, projections and assumptions reflected in the forward-looking statements presented herein are reasonable as of the date hereof, there can be no assurance that they will prove to be correct. Current conditions, economic and otherwise, render assumptions, although reasonable when made, subject to greater uncertainty.\n\nUndue reliance should not be placed on forward-looking statements as actual results may differ materially from those expressed or implied by forward-looking statements. By their nature, forward-looking statements involve numerous inherent risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from the forward-looking statements, including but not limited to the following factors: changes in business strategies; general North American and global economic, credit and business conditions; risks associated with agricultural production such as weather conditions and insect populations; the availability and price of energy commodities; the effects of competition and pricing pressures; industry capacity; shifts in market demand; changes in commodity prices; uncertainty surrounding timing and volumes of commodities being shipped via CP; inflation; geopolitical instability; changes in laws, regulations and government policies, including regulation of rates; changes in taxes and tax rates; potential increases in maintenance and operating costs; changes in fuel prices; uncertainties of investigations, proceedings or other types of claims and litigation; labour disputes; risks and liabilities arising from derailments; transportation of dangerous goods; timing of completion of capital and maintenance projects; currency and interest rate fluctuations; effects of changes in market conditions and discount rates on the financial position of pension plans and investments; trade restrictions or other changes to international trade arrangements; climate change; various events that could disrupt operations, including severe weather, such as droughts, floods, avalanches and earthquakes, and cybersecurity attacks, as well as security threats and governmental response to them, and technological changes; and the pandemic created by the outbreak of COVID-19 and resulting effects on economic conditions, the demand environment for logistics requirements and energy prices, restrictions imposed by public health authorities or governments, fiscal and monetary policy responses by governments and financial institutions, and disruptions to global supply chains. The foregoing list of factors is not exhaustive.\n\nThere are more specific factors that could cause actual results to differ materially from those described in the forward-looking statements contained in this Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations and Annual Report on Form 10-K. These more specific factors are identified and discussed in Item 1A. Risk Factors. Other risks are detailed from time to time in reports filed by CP with securities regulators in Canada and the United States.\n\nThe forward-looking statements contained in this Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations and Annual Report on Form 10-K are made as of the date hereof. Except as required by law, CP undertakes no obligation to update publicly or otherwise revise any forward-looking statements, or the foregoing assumptions and risks affecting such forward-looking statements, whether as a result of new information, future events or otherwise." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9558316128671996, + "doc_id": "5248a49433af857a61dec9826e50348176956484e92fc71a863ab0d10f2a9275", + "edit_distance": 0.7813953488372093, + "f1_score": 0.9868995633187774, + "meteor": 0.8315586555582111, + "precision": 0.9912280701754386, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS OF AMERICAN AIRLINES, INC.\n\n## Restricted Stock Unit Awards (RSUs)\n\nThe majority of American's RSUs have service conditions (time vested primarily over three years). The grant-date fair value of these RSUs is equal to the market price of the underlying shares of AAG common stock on the date of grant. The expense for these RSUs is recognized on a straight-line basis over the vesting period for the entire award. RSUs are classified as equity awards as the vesting results in the issuance of shares of AAG common stock.\n\nRSU award activity for all plans for the years ended December 31, 2020, 2019 and 2018 is as follows:\n\nTable of Contents\n\nAs of December 31, 2020, there was $107 million of unrecognized compensation cost related to RSUs. These costs are expected to be recognized over a weighted average period of one year. The total fair value of RSUs vested during the years ended December 31, 2020, 2019 and 2018 was $51 million, $68 million and $91 million, respectively.\n\n## 14. Valuation and Qualifying Accounts (in millions)\n\n197", + "recall": 0.9826086956521739, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS OF AMERICAN AIRLINES, INC.\n\n## Restricted Stock Unit Awards (RSUs)\n\n## 14. Valuation and Qualifying Accounts (in millions)\n\n197\n\nAs of December 31, 2020, there was $107 million of unrecognized compensation cost related to RSUs. These costs are expected to be recognized over a weighted average period of one year. The total fair value of RSUs vested during the years ended December 31, 2020, 2019 and 2018 was $51 million, $68 million and $91 million, respectively.\n\nRSU award activity for all plans for the years ended December 31, 2020, 2019 and 2018 is as follows:\n\nThe majority of American’s RSUs have service conditions (time vested primarily over three years). The grant-date fair value of these RSUs is equal to the market price of the underlying shares of AAG common stock on the date of grant. The expense for these RSUs is recognized on a straight-line basis over the vesting period for the entire award. RSUs are classified as equity awards as the vesting results in the issuance of shares of AAG common stock." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9278978502574977, + "doc_id": "e3a13b54e811bb5841fd6037d232dea4f41269add4e35f8c0375584693880bd7", + "edit_distance": 0.05555555555555555, + "f1_score": 0.9735449735449735, + "meteor": 0.9516698865949907, + "precision": 0.9787234042553191, + "pred_md": "## Table of Contents\n\n## Employee Engagement, Organizational Health and Pandemic Response\n\nApplied manages and measures organizational health with a view to gaining insight into employees' experiences, levels of workplace satisfaction, and feelings of engagement and inclusion with the company. The Company uses McKinsey & Company's Organizational Health Index (OHI) and employee engagement pulse surveys to measure its organizational health and employee experiences. In fiscal 2019, Applied achieved an overall 'healthy' rating on the OHI and continued to rank in the top quartile for overall health in the McKinsey database. Insights from the Company's OHI survey are used to develop both company-wide and business unit level organizational and talent development plans.\n\nApplied's top priority during the ongoing COVID-19 pandemic remains protecting the health and safety of its employees and their families, customers and community. Applied continues to maintain workplace flexibility such as working remotely where possible to reduce the number of people who are on campus each day. Applied is keeping its critical labs and operations active consistent with local laws and regulations and continuing to support customers. In the interest of public health, all onsite operations are utilizing the minimum number of people to safely execute tasks and following enhanced safety and health protocols-including screenings, social distancing, and use of personal protective equipment.\n\nAdditional information regarding Applied's activities related to its people and sustainability, as well as its workforce diversity data, can be found in Applied's latest Sustainability Report and Annex thereto, which are located on its website at https://www.appliedmaterials.com/news/citizenship\\_report.html. The Sustainability Report and the Annex thereto are updated periodically. This website address is intended to be an inactive textual reference only. None of the information on, or accessible through, Applied's website is part of this Form 10-K or is incorporated by reference herein.\n\n13", + "recall": 0.968421052631579, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## Employee Engagement, Organizational Health and Pandemic Response\n\nApplied manages and measures organizational health with a view to gaining insight into employees’ experiences, levels of workplace satisfaction, and feelings of engagement and inclusion with the company. The Company uses McKinsey & Company’s Organizational Health Index (OHI) and employee engagement pulse surveys to measure its organizational health and employee experiences. In fiscal 2019, Applied achieved an overall “healthy” rating on the OHI and continued to rank in the top quartile for overall health in the McKinsey database. Insights from the Company’s OHI survey are used to develop both company-wide and business unit level organizational and talent development plans.\n\nApplied’s top priority during the ongoing COVID-19 pandemic remains protecting the health and safety of its employees and their families, customers and community. Applied continues to maintain workplace flexibility such as working remotely where possible to reduce the number of people who are on campus each day. Applied is keeping its critical labs and operations active consistent with local laws and regulations and continuing to support customers. In the interest of public health, all onsite operations are utilizing the minimum number of people to safely execute tasks and following enhanced safety and health protocols—including screenings, social distancing, and use of personal protective equipment.\n\nAdditional information regarding Applied’s activities related to its people and sustainability, as well as its workforce diversity data, can be found in Applied’s latest Sustainability Report and Annex thereto, which are located on its website at https://www.appliedmaterials.com/news/citizenship\\_report.html. The Sustainability Report and the Annex thereto are updated periodically. This website address is intended to be an inactive textual reference only. None of the information on, or accessible through, Applied’s website is part of this Form 10-K or is incorporated by reference herein.\n\n13" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9624491381043719, + "doc_id": "15d7cc78e6644e3bb89e1a93020640f553e4f36abc1f47d9dd9fd173b0db6e69", + "edit_distance": 0.1319796954314721, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9892241010674405, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "CP\t2020\tANNUAL\tREPORT\n\n65\n\n## Reconciliation of Net Income to Adjusted Return\n\nTax\twas\tcalculated\tat\tthe\tadjusted\tannualized\teffective\ttax\trate\tof\t24.61%,\t24.96%,\t24.55%,\t26.42%,\tand\t26.20%\tfor\teach\tof\tthe\tabove\titems\tfor\tthe\tyears\tpresented,\trespectively. (1)\n\nTax\twas\tcalculated\tas\tthe\tpre-tax\teffect\tof\tthe\tadjustments\tmultiplied\tby\tthe\tapplicable\ttax\trate\tof\t13.58%,\t8.55%,\t10.64%,\t15.27%,\tand\t7.17%\tfor\teach\tof\tthe\tabove\titems\tfor\tthe\tyears presented,\trespectively.\tThe\tapplicable\ttax\trates\treflect\tthe\ttaxable\tjurisdictions\tand\tnature,\tbeing\ton\taccount\tof\tcapital\tor\tincome,\tof\tthe\tsignificant\titems. (2)\n\nReconciliation of Average shareholders' equity to Adjusted average invested capital\n\nTax\twas\tcalculated\tas\tthe\tpre-tax\teffect\tof\tthe\tadjustments\tmultiplied\tby\tthe\tapplicable\ttax\trate\tof\t15.27%\tand\t7.17%\tfor\t2017\tand\t2016,\trespectively.\tThe\tapplicable\ttax\trates\treflect\tthe taxable\tjurisdictions\tand\tnature,\tbeing\ton\taccount\tof\tcapital\tor\tincome,\tof\tthe\tsignificant\titems. (1)", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "65 CP 2020 ANNUAL REPORT\n\n## Reconciliation of Net Income to Adjusted Return\n\n## Reconciliation of Average shareholders' equity to Adjusted average invested capital\n\n Tax was calculated at the adjusted annualized effective tax rate of 24.61%, 24.96%, 24.55%, 26.42%, and 26.20% for each of the above items for the years presented, respectively. (1)\n\n Tax was calculated as the pre-tax effect of the adjustments multiplied by the applicable tax rate of 13.58%, 8.55%, 10.64%, 15.27%, and 7.17% for each of the above items for the years presented, respectively. The applicable tax rates reflect the taxable jurisdictions and nature, being on account of capital or income, of the significant items. (2)\n\n Tax was calculated as the pre-tax effect of the adjustments multiplied by the applicable tax rate of 15.27% and 7.17% for 2017 and 2016, respectively. The applicable tax rates reflect the taxable jurisdictions and nature, being on account of capital or income, of the significant items. (1)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6098575462898268, + "doc_id": "7c43975e0442f3e4fe2b28f708a920d475a83b94098f6af076bfadb48cbabf2d", + "edit_distance": 0.038461538461538464, + "f1_score": 0.9894736842105263, + "meteor": 0.998632980542122, + "precision": 0.9791666666666666, + "pred_md": "Other information related to our leases is as follows:\n\nThe costs components of operating and finance leases are as follows:\n\n\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\n\n(1)\tIncluded\tin\tproperty\tplant\tand\tequipment,\tnet\n\n(2)\tIncluded\tin\tdebt\tdue\twithin\tone\tyear\tand\tlong-term\tdebt\tdue\tafter\tone\tyear,\taccordingly\n\n(3)\tIncluded\tin\tcost\tof\tsales\tand\tselling,\tgeneral\tand\tadministrative\texpense,\taccordingly\n\n(4)\tIncluded\tin\tinterest\texpense\n\n81", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Other information related to our leases is as follows:\n\n81\n\nThe costs components of operating and finance leases are as follows:\n\n(1) Included in property plant and equipment, net\n\n(2) Included in debt due within one year and long-term debt due after one year, accordingly\n\n(3) Included in cost of sales and selling, general and administrative expense, accordingly\n\n(4) Included in interest expense" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5825386410967256, + "doc_id": "1904c002666dacfa7b2898f2cd78f6d73f963678b960bbe655280e19817bfb86", + "edit_distance": 0.5277777777777778, + "f1_score": 0.9259259259259258, + "meteor": 0.7757371676375663, + "precision": 0.8620689655172413, + "pred_md": "## AMERICAN AIRLINES, INC.\n\n## CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF OPERATIONS\n\n(In millions)\n\nYear Ended December 31,\n\nTable of Contents\n\nSee accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.\n\n149", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## AMERICAN AIRLINES, INC. CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF OPERATIONS\n\n## AMERICAN AIRLINES, INC. CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF OPERATIONS (In millions)\n\nSee accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.\n\n149" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9518504582937887, + "doc_id": "e7ce74cf084326270e960e7f81c93df5481023f9c0e3a352d3de334918f4c2b5", + "edit_distance": 0.8350409836065574, + "f1_score": 0.9960053262316911, + "meteor": 0.714883160080428, + "precision": 0.9973333333333333, + "pred_md": "## Table of Contents\n\n## The ability to attract, retain and motivate key employees is vital to Applied's success.\n\nApplied's success, competitiveness and ability to execute on its global strategies and maintain a culture of innovation depend in large part on its ability to attract, retain and motivate qualified employees and leaders with expertise and capabilities, representing diverse backgrounds and experiences. Achieving this objective may be difficult due to many factors, including fluctuations in global economic and industry conditions, management changes, Applied's organizational structure, increasing global competition for talent, the availability of qualified employees in the local and global markets, cost reduction activities (including workforce reductions and unpaid shutdowns), availability of career development opportunities, the ability to obtain necessary authorizations for workers to provide services outside their home countries, and the attractiveness of Applied's compensation and benefit programs, including its share-based programs. If we are unable to attract, retain and motivate qualified employees and leaders, we may be unable to fully capitalize on current and new market opportunities, which could adversely impact Applied's business and results of operations. The loss or retirement of employees presents particular challenges to the extent they involve the departure of knowledgeable and experienced employees and the resulting need to identify and train existing or new workers to perform necessary functions, which may result in unexpected costs, reduced productivity, and/or difficulties with respect to internal processes and controls.\n\n## The failure to successfully implement enterprise resource planning and other information systems changes could adversely impact Applied's business and results of operations.\n\nApplied periodically implements new or enhanced enterprise resource planning and related information systems in order to better manage its business operations, align its global organizations and enable future growth. Implementation of new business processes and information systems requires the commitment of significant personnel, training and financial resources, and entails risks to Applied's business operations. If Applied does not successfully implement enterprise resource planning and related information systems improvements, or if there are delays or difficulties in implementing these systems, Applied may not realize anticipated productivity improvements or cost efficiencies, and may experience interruptions in service and operational difficulties, such as its ability to track orders, timely manufacture and ship products, project inventory requirements, effectively manage its supply chain and allocate human resources, aggregate financial data and report operating results, and otherwise effectively manage its business, all of which could result in quality issues, reputational harm, lost market and revenue opportunities, and otherwise adversely affect Applied's business, financial condition and results of operations.\n\n## Applied may incur impairment charges related to goodwill or long-lived assets.\n\nApplied has a significant amount of goodwill and other acquired intangible assets related to acquisitions. Goodwill and purchased intangible assets with indefinite useful lives are not amortized, but are reviewed for impairment annually during the fourth quarter of each fiscal year, and more frequently when events or changes in circumstances indicate that the carrying value of an asset may not be recoverable. The review compares the fair value for each of Applied's reporting units to its associated carrying value, including goodwill. Factors that could lead to impairment of goodwill and intangible assets include adverse industry or economic trends, reduced estimates of future cash flows, declines in the market price of Applied common stock, changes in Applied's strategies or product portfolio, and restructuring activities. Applied's valuation methodology for assessing impairment requires management to make judgments and assumptions based on historical experience and projections of future operating performance. Applied may be required to record future charges to earnings during the period in which an impairment of goodwill or intangible assets is determined to exist.\n\n## Risks Related to Intellectual Property and Cybersecurity\n\n## Applied is exposed to various risks related to protection and enforcement of intellectual property rights.\n\nApplied's success depends in significant part on the protection of its patents, trade secrets, copyrights and other intellectual property rights. Infringement of Applied's rights by a third party, such as the unauthorized manufacture or sale of equipment or spare parts, could result in uncompensated lost market and revenue opportunities for Applied. Policing any unauthorized use of intellectual property is difficult and costly and Applied cannot be certain that the measures it has implemented will prevent misuse. Applied's ability to enforce its intellectual property rights is subject to litigation risks, as well as uncertainty as to the protection and enforceability of those rights in some countries. If Applied seeks to enforce its intellectual property rights, it may be subject to claims that those rights are invalid or unenforceable, and others may seek counterclaims against Applied, which could have a negative impact on its business. If Applied is unable to enforce and protect intellectual property rights, or if they are circumvented, invalidated, rendered obsolete by the rapid pace of technological change, it could have an adverse impact on its competitive position and business. In addition, changes in intellectual property laws or their interpretation may impact Applied's ability to protect and assert its intellectual property rights, increase costs and uncertainties in the prosecution of patent applications and enforcement or defense of issued patents, and diminish the value of Applied's intellectual property.\n\n26", + "recall": 0.9946808510638298, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## The ability to attract, retain and motivate key employees is vital to Applied’s success.\n\n## The failure to successfully implement enterprise resource planning and other information systems changes could adversely impact Applied’s business and results of operations.\n\n## Applied may incur impairment charges related to goodwill or long-lived assets.\n\n## Risks Related to Intellectual Property and Cybersecurity\n\n## Applied is exposed to various risks related to protection and enforcement of intellectual property rights.\n\n26\n\nApplied’s success depends in significant part on the protection of its patents, trade secrets, copyrights and other intellectual property rights. Infringement of Applied’s rights by a third party, such as the unauthorized manufacture or sale of equipment or spare parts, could result in uncompensated lost market and revenue opportunities for Applied. Policing any unauthorized use of intellectual property is difficult and costly and Applied cannot be certain that the measures it has implemented will prevent misuse. Applied’s ability to enforce its intellectual property rights is subject to litigation risks, as well as uncertainty as to the protection and enforceability of those rights in some countries. If Applied seeks to enforce its intellectual property rights, it may be subject to claims that those rights are invalid or unenforceable, and others may seek counterclaims against Applied, which could have a negative impact on its business. If Applied is unable to enforce and protect intellectual property rights, or if they are circumvented, invalidated, rendered obsolete by the rapid pace of technological change, it could have an adverse impact on its competitive position and business. In addition, changes in intellectual property laws or their interpretation may impact Applied’s ability to protect and assert its intellectual property rights, increase costs and uncertainties in the prosecution of patent applications and enforcement or defense of issued patents, and diminish the value of Applied’s intellectual property.\n\nApplied has a significant amount of goodwill and other acquired intangible assets related to acquisitions. Goodwill and purchased intangible assets with indefinite useful lives are not amortized, but are reviewed for impairment annually during the fourth quarter of each fiscal year, and more frequently when events or changes in circumstances indicate that the carrying value of an asset may not be recoverable. The review compares the fair value for each of Applied’s reporting units to its associated carrying value, including goodwill. Factors that could lead to impairment of goodwill and intangible assets include adverse industry or economic trends, reduced estimates of future cash flows, declines in the market price of Applied common stock, changes in Applied’s strategies or product portfolio, and restructuring activities. Applied’s valuation methodology for assessing impairment requires management to make judgments and assumptions based on historical experience and projections of future operating performance. Applied may be required to record future charges to earnings during the period in which an impairment of goodwill or intangible assets is determined to exist.\n\nApplied periodically implements new or enhanced enterprise resource planning and related information systems in order to better manage its business operations, align its global organizations and enable future growth. Implementation of new business processes and information systems requires the commitment of significant personnel, training and financial resources, and entails risks to Applied’s business operations. If Applied does not successfully implement enterprise resource planning and related information systems improvements, or if there are delays or difficulties in implementing these systems, Applied may not realize anticipated productivity improvements or cost efficiencies, and may experience interruptions in service and operational difficulties, such as its ability to track orders, timely manufacture and ship products, project inventory requirements, effectively manage its supply chain and allocate human resources, aggregate financial data and report operating results, and otherwise effectively manage its business, all of which could result in quality issues, reputational harm, lost market and revenue opportunities, and otherwise adversely affect Applied’s business, financial condition and results of operations.\n\nApplied’s success, competitiveness and ability to execute on its global strategies and maintain a culture of innovation depend in large part on its ability to attract, retain and motivate qualified employees and leaders with expertise and capabilities, representing diverse backgrounds and experiences. Achieving this objective may be difficult due to many factors, including fluctuations in global economic and industry conditions, management changes, Applied’s organizational structure, increasing global competition for talent, the availability of qualified employees in the local and global markets, cost reduction activities (including workforce reductions and unpaid shutdowns), availability of career development opportunities, the ability to obtain necessary authorizations for workers to provide services outside their home countries, and the attractiveness of Applied’s compensation and benefit programs, including its share-based programs. If we are unable to attract, retain and motivate qualified employees and leaders, we may be unable to fully capitalize on current and new market opportunities, which could adversely impact Applied’s business and results of operations. The loss or retirement of employees presents particular challenges to the extent they involve the departure of knowledgeable and experienced employees and the resulting need to identify and train existing or new workers to perform necessary functions, which may result in unexpected costs, reduced productivity, and/or difficulties with respect to internal processes and controls." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9749261876113844, + "doc_id": "a5988207f207134fcb80975c46bfcc1caa8a8f480a495eb997df94ce1ec2cd2c", + "edit_distance": 0.02608695652173913, + "f1_score": 0.9955156950672647, + "meteor": 0.9443358990570399, + "precision": 0.9970059880239521, + "pred_md": "earnings and cash distributions; and (iv) the market price of our capital stock. Additional debt financing may substantially increase our debt-to-total market capitalization ratio. Additional equity financing may dilute the holdings of our current stockholders.\n\nCovenants in our credit agreements could limit our flexibility and adversely affect our financial condition . The terms of our various credit agreements and other indebtedness require us to comply with a number of customary financial and other covenants, such as maintaining debt service coverage and leverage ratios and maintaining insurance coverage. These covenants may limit our flexibility in our operations, and breaches of these covenants could result in defaults under the instruments governing the applicable indebtedness even if we had satisfied our payment obligations. If we are unable to refinance our indebtedness at maturity or meet our payment obligations, the amount of our distributable cash flow and our financial condition would be adversely affected.\n\nAdverse changes in our credit ratings could impair our ability to obtain additional debt and equity financing on favorable terms, if at all. Our credit ratings are based on our operating performance, liquidity and leverage ratios, overall financial position and other factors employed by the credit rating agencies in their rating analysis of us. Our credit ratings can affect the amount and type of capital we can access, as well as the terms of any financings we may obtain. There can be no assurance that we will be able to maintain our current credit ratings. In the event our current credit ratings deteriorate, it may be more difficult or expensive to obtain additional financing or refinance existing obligations and commitments. Also, a downgrade in our credit ratings would trigger additional costs or other potentially negative consequences under our current and future credit facilities and debt instruments.\n\nIncreases in interest rates would increase our interest expense. At December 31, 2020, we had $125 million of variable rate debt outstanding not protected by interest rate hedge contracts. We may incur additional variable rate debt in the future. If interest rates increase, then so would the interest expense on our unhedged variable rate debt, which would adversely affect our financial condition and results of operations. From time to time, we manage our exposure to interest rate risk with interest rate hedge contracts that effectively fix or cap a portion of our variable rate debt. In addition, we refinance fixed rate debt at times when we believe rates and terms are appropriate. Our efforts to manage these exposures may not be successful. Our use of interest rate hedge contracts to manage risk associated with interest rate volatility may expose us to additional risks, including a risk that a counterparty to a hedge contract may fail to honor its obligations. Developing an effective interest rate risk strategy is complex and no strategy can completely insulate us from risks associated with interest rate fluctuations. There can be no assurance that our hedging activities will have the desired beneficial impact on our results of operations or financial condition. Termination of interest rate hedge contracts typically involves costs, such as transaction fees or breakage costs.\n\nThe lack of certain limitations on our debt could result in our becoming more highly leveraged . Our governing documents do not limit the amount of indebtedness we may incur. Accordingly, we may incur additional debt and would do so, for example, if it were necessary to maintain our status as a REIT. We might become more highly leveraged as a result, and our financial condition and cash available for distribution to stockholders might be negatively affected and the risk of default on our indebtedness could increase.\n\n## Other Risks\n\nThe market value of our common stock could decrease based on our performance and market perception and conditions. The market value of our common stock may be affected by the market's perception of our operating results, growth potential, and current and future cash dividends and may also be affected by the real estate market value of our underlying assets. The market price of our common stock may also be influenced by the dividend on our common stock relative to market interest rates. Rising interest rates may lead potential buyers of our common stock to expect a higher dividend rate, which would adversely affect the market price of our common stock. In addition, rising interest rates would result in increased expense, thereby adversely affecting cash flow and our ability to service our indebtedness and pay dividends.\n\nThe state of the economy or other adverse changes in general or local economic conditions may adversely affect our operating results and financial condition. Turmoil in the global financial markets may have an adverse impact on the availability of credit to businesses generally and could lead to a further weakening of the U.S. and global economies. Currently these conditions have not impaired our ability to access credit markets and finance our operations. However, our ability to access the capital markets may be restricted at a time when we would like, or need, to raise financing, which could have an impact on our flexibility to react to changing economic and business conditions. Furthermore, deteriorating economic conditions including business layoffs, downsizing, industry slowdowns and other similar factors that affect our customers could continue to negatively impact commercial real estate fundamentals and result in lower occupancy, lower rental rates and declining values in our real estate portfolio and in the collateral securing any loan investments we may make. Additionally, an adverse economic situation could have an impact on our lenders or customers, causing them to fail to meet their obligations to us. No assurances\n\n11", + "recall": 0.9940298507462687, + "true_md": "earnings and cash distributions; and (iv) the market price of our capital stock. Additional debt financing may substantially increase our debt-to-total market capitalization ratio. Additional equity financing may dilute the holdings of our current stockholders.\n\nCovenants in our credit agreements could limit our flexibility and adversely affect our financial condition . The terms of our various credit agreements and other indebtedness require us to comply with a number of customary financial and other covenants, such as maintaining debt service coverage and leverage ratios and maintaining insurance coverage. These covenants may limit our flexibility in our operations, and breaches of these covenants could result in defaults under the instruments governing the applicable indebtedness even if we had satisfied our payment obligations. If we are unable to refinance our indebtedness at maturity or meet our payment obligations, the amount of our distributable cash flow and our financial condition would be adversely affected.\n\nAdverse changes in our credit ratings could impair our ability to obtain additional debt and equity financing on favorable terms, if at all. Our credit ratings are based on our operating performance, liquidity and leverage ratios, overall financial position and other factors employed by the credit rating agencies in their rating analysis of us. Our credit ratings can affect the amount and type of capital we can access, as well as the terms of any financings we may obtain. There can be no assurance that we will be able to maintain our current credit ratings. In the event our current credit ratings deteriorate, it may be more difficult or expensive to obtain additional financing or refinance existing obligations and commitments. Also, a downgrade in our credit ratings would trigger additional costs or other potentially negative consequences under our current and future credit facilities and debt instruments.\n\nIncreases in interest rates would increase our interest expense. At December 31, 2020, we had $125 million of variable rate debt outstanding not protected by interest rate hedge contracts. We may incur additional variable rate debt in the future. If interest rates increase, then so would the interest expense on our unhedged variable rate debt, which would adversely affect our financial condition and results of operations. From time to time, we manage our exposure to interest rate risk with interest rate hedge contracts that effectively fix or cap a portion of our variable rate debt. In addition, we refinance fixed rate debt at times when we believe rates and terms are appropriate. Our efforts to manage these exposures may not be successful. Our use of interest rate hedge contracts to manage risk associated with interest rate volatility may expose us to additional risks, including a risk that a counterparty to a hedge contract may fail to honor its obligations. Developing an effective interest rate risk strategy is complex and no strategy can completely insulate us from risks associated with interest rate fluctuations. There can be no assurance that our hedging activities will have the desired beneficial impact on our results of operations or financial condition. Termination of interest rate hedge contracts typically involves costs, such as transaction fees or breakage costs.\n\nThe lack of certain limitations on our debt could result in our becoming more highly leveraged . Our governing documents do not limit the amount of indebtedness we may incur. Accordingly, we may incur additional debt and would do so, for example, if it were necessary to maintain our status as a REIT. We might become more highly leveraged as a result, and our financial condition and cash available for distribution to stockholders might be negatively affected and the risk of default on our indebtedness could increase.\n\nOther Risks The market value of our common stock could decrease based on our performance and market perception and conditions. The market value of our common stock may be affected by the market’s perception of our operating results, growth potential, and current and future cash dividends and may also be affected by the real estate market value of our underlying assets. The market price of our common stock may also be influenced by the dividend on our common stock relative to market interest rates. Rising interest rates may lead potential buyers of our common stock to expect a higher dividend rate, which would adversely affect the market price of our common stock. In addition, rising interest rates would result in increased expense, thereby adversely affecting cash flow and our ability to service our indebtedness and pay dividends.\n\nThe state of the economy or other adverse changes in general or local economic conditions may adversely affect our operating results and financial condition. Turmoil in the global financial markets may have an adverse impact on the availability of credit to businesses generally and could lead to a further weakening of the U.S. and global economies. Currently these conditions have not impaired our ability to access credit markets and finance our operations. However, our ability to access the capital markets may be restricted at a time when we would like, or need, to raise financing, which could have an impact on our flexibility to react to changing economic and business conditions. Furthermore, deteriorating economic conditions including business layoffs, downsizing, industry slowdowns and other similar factors that affect our customers could continue to negatively impact commercial real estate fundamentals and result in lower occupancy, lower rental rates and declining values in our real estate portfolio and in the collateral securing any loan investments we may make. Additionally, an adverse economic situation could have an impact on our lenders or customers, causing them to fail to meet their obligations to us. No assurances\n\n## Other Risks The market value of our common stock could decrease based on our performance and market perception and conditions.\n\n11" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9741929893109743, + "doc_id": "5ea522c6ff65c2979a14f81aff1469ed095db087ba0759793bd1921bd828f0f1", + "edit_distance": 0.022082018927444796, + "f1_score": 0.9906542056074765, + "meteor": 0.9845342080547314, + "precision": 0.99375, + "pred_md": "## Table of Contents\n\n- (7) Mr. Salehpour, age 59, has been Senior Vice President, Services, Display and Flexible Technology since September 2013. He previously served as Group Vice President, General Manager Energy and Environmental Solutions and Display Business Groups, since joining Applied in November 2012. Prior to Applied, Mr. Salehpour worked at KLA-Tencor for 16 years, where he served as a Senior Vice President and General Manager, and worked for 10 years in senior management positions at Schlumberger Test Systems.\n\n(8) Mr.\tRead,\tage\t54,\thas\tbeen\tCorporate\tVice\tPresident,\tCorporate\tController\tand\tChief\tAccounting\tOfficer\tof\tApplied\tsince\tjoining\tthe\tCompany\tin September\t2013.\tPrior\tto\tApplied,\tMr.\tRead\tworked\tat\tBrocade\tCommunications\tSystems,\tInc.,\ta\tprovider\tof\tsemiconductor\tand\tsoftware-based network\tsolutions,\tsince\tOctober\t2002,\twhere\the\tmost\trecently\tserved\tas\tVice\tPresident,\tCorporate\tController.\tPrior\tto\tBrocade,\tMr.\tRead\tworked at\tKPMG\tLLP,\tan\taudit,\ttax\tand\tadvisory\tfirm,\tfrom\t1996\tto\t2002.\n\n## Available Information\n\nApplied's website is http://www.appliedmaterials.com. Applied makes available free of charge, on or through its website, its annual, quarterly and current reports, and any amendments to those reports, as soon as reasonably practicable after electronically filing such reports with, or furnishing them to, the SEC. The SEC's website, www.sec.gov, contains reports, proxy and information statements, and other information regarding issuers that file electronically with the SEC. These website addresses are intended to be an inactive textual references only. None of the information on, or accessible through, these websites is part of this Form 10-K or is incorporated by reference herein.\n\n15", + "recall": 0.9875776397515528, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n- (7) Mr. Salehpour, age 59, has been Senior Vice President, Services, Display and Flexible Technology since September 2013. He previously served as Group Vice President, General Manager Energy and Environmental Solutions and Display Business Groups, since joining Applied in November 2012. Prior to Applied, Mr. Salehpour worked at KLA-Tencor for 16 years, where he served as a Senior Vice President and General Manager, and worked for 10 years in senior management positions at Schlumberger Test Systems.\n\n- (8) Mr. Read, age 54, has been Corporate Vice President, Corporate Controller and Chief Accounting Officer of Applied since joining the Company in September 2013. Prior to Applied, Mr. Read worked at Brocade Communications Systems, Inc., a provider of semiconductor and software-based network solutions, since October 2002, where he most recently served as Vice President, Corporate Controller. Prior to Brocade, Mr. Read worked at KPMG LLP, an audit, tax and advisory firm, from 1996 to 2002.\n\n## Available Information\n\nApplied’s website is http://www.appliedmaterials.com. Applied makes available free of charge, on or through its website, its annual, quarterly and current reports, and any amendments to those reports, as soon as reasonably practicable after electronically filing such reports with, or furnishing them to, the SEC. The SEC’s website, www.sec.gov, contains reports, proxy and information statements, and other information regarding issuers that file electronically with the SEC. These website addresses are intended to be an inactive textual references only. None of the information on, or accessible through, these websites is part of this Form 10-K or is incorporated by reference herein.\n\n15" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "b6187919a51705a5a49246d11eb8c9a2128535f4c7644e730acd0dc4fd77d9e8", + "edit_distance": 0.5, + "f1_score": 0.8, + "meteor": 0.8522727272727273, + "precision": 0.6666666666666666, + "pred_md": "## PART IV", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "PART IV" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9278220205900852, + "doc_id": "91c2ecd44d421263528f42b621a012d03bf34615bd763750ee666d0356a9f21e", + "edit_distance": 0.4689655172413793, + "f1_score": 0.9746835443037974, + "meteor": 0.9779626256686793, + "precision": 0.9746835443037974, + "pred_md": "- Flowserve Corporation Consolidated Financial Statements:\n- Consolidated Balance Sheets at December 31, 2020 and 2019:\n\nFor each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2020:\n\nConsolidated Statements of Income\n\nConsolidated Statements of Comprehensive Income\n\nConsolidated Statements of Shareholders' Equity\n\nConsolidated Statements of Cash Flows\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\n- 2. Consolidated Financial Statement Schedules\n\nThe following consolidated financial statement schedule is filed as part of this Annual Report:\n\nSchedule II - Valuation and Qualifying Accounts For each of the three years in the period ended December 31,\n\n2020:........................................................................................................\n\n## 124\n\nFinancial statement schedules not included in this Annual Report have been omitted because they are not applicable or the required information is shown in the consolidated financial statements or notes thereto.\n\n## 3. Exhibits\n\n119", + "recall": 0.9746835443037974, + "true_md": "Flowserve Corporation Consolidated Financial Statements:\n\nConsolidated Balance Sheets at December 31, 2020 and 2019:\n\nFor each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2020:\n\nConsolidated Statements of Income\n\nConsolidated Statements of Comprehensive Income\n\nConsolidated Statements of Shareholders’ Equity\n\nConsolidated Statements of Cash Flows\n\nNotes to Consolidated Financial Statements\n\nThe following consolidated financial statement schedule is filed as part of this Annual Report:\n\nFinancial statement schedules not included in this Annual Report have been omitted because they are not applicable or the required information is shown in the consolidated financial statements or notes thereto.\n\n## 2. Consolidated Financial Statement Schedules\n\n## 3. Exhibits\n\n119\n\nSchedule II — Valuation and Qualifying Accounts For each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2020:........................................................................................................ 124" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9733095017955128, + "doc_id": "bb5f773130291ea089a2251e2c6283deeca5e8031aa83d8d5243603d42d5963e", + "edit_distance": 0.8420365535248042, + "f1_score": 0.9845679012345679, + "meteor": 0.7123827452279397, + "precision": 0.9876160990712074, + "pred_md": "## Table of Contents\n\n## Foreign Currency\n\nWe are exposed to the effect of foreign exchange rate fluctuations on the U.S. dollar value of foreign currency-denominated transactions. Our largest exposure comes from the British pound sterling, Euro, Canadian dollar and various Latin American currencies, primarily the Brazilian real. We do not currently have a foreign currency hedge program. We estimate a uniform 10% strengthening in the value of the U.S. dollar from 2020 levels relative to each of the currencies in which we have foreign currency exposure would have resulted in a decrease in pre-tax income of approximately $56 million for the year ended December 31, 2020.\n\nGenerally, fluctuations in foreign currencies, including devaluations, cannot be predicted by us and can significantly affect the value of our assets located outside the United States. These conditions, as well as any further delays, devaluations or imposition of more stringent repatriation restrictions, may materially adversely affect our business, results of operations and financial condition. See Part I, Item 1A. Risk Factors 'We operate a global business with international operations that are subject to economic and political instability and have been, and in the future may continue to be, adversely affected by numerous events, circumstances or government actions beyond our control' for additional discussion of this and other currency risks.\n\n## Interest\n\nOur earnings and cash flow are affected by changes in interest rates due to the impact those changes have on our interest expense from variablerate debt instruments and our interest income from short-term, interest-bearing investments.\n\nOur largest exposure with respect to variable-rate debt comes from changes in LIBOR. We had variable-rate debt instruments representing approximately 40% of our total long-term debt at December 31, 2020. We currently do not have an interest rate hedge program to hedge our exposure to floating interest rates on our variable-rate debt obligations. If annual interest rates increase 100 basis points, based on our December 31, 2020 variable-rate debt and short-term investments balances, annual interest expense on variable-rate debt would increase by approximately $130 million and annual interest income on short-term investments would increase by approximately $70 million. Additionally, the fair value of fixed-rate debt would have decreased by approximately $590 million for AAG and $450 million for American.\n\nOn July 27, 2017, the U.K. Financial Conduct Authority (the authority that regulates LIBOR) announced that it intends to stop compelling banks to submit rates for the calculation of LIBOR after 2021. The discontinuation date for submission and publication of rates for certain tenors of USD LIBOR (1-month, 3-month, 6-month, and 12-month) is currently under consultation by the ICE Benchmark Administration (the administrator of LIBOR) and may be extended until June 30, 2023. It is unclear whether new methods of calculating LIBOR will be established such that it continues to exist after 2021. Similarly, it is not possible to predict whether LIBOR will continue to be viewed as an acceptable market benchmark, what rate or rates may become acceptable alternatives to LIBOR, or what effect these changes in views or alternatives may have on financial markets for LIBOR-linked financial instruments. While the U.S. Federal Reserve, in conjunction with the Alternative Reference Rates Committee, has chosen SOFR as the recommended risk-free reference rate for the U.S. (calculated based on repurchase agreements backed by treasury securities), we cannot currently predict the extent to which this index will gain widespread acceptance as a replacement for LIBOR. It is not possible to predict the effect of these changes, other reforms or the establishment of alternative reference rates in the United Kingdom, the United States or elsewhere.\n\nWe may in the future pursue amendments to our LIBOR-based debt transactions to provide for a transaction mechanism or other reference rate in anticipation of LIBOR's discontinuation, but we may not be able to reach agreement with our lenders on any such amendments. As of December 31, 2020, we had $12.8 billion of borrowings based on LIBOR. The replacement of LIBOR with a comparable or successor rate could cause the amount of interest payable on our long-term debt to be different or higher than expected.\n\n88", + "recall": 0.9815384615384616, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## Foreign Currency\n\n## Interest\n\n88\n\nWe may in the future pursue amendments to our LIBOR-based debt transactions to provide for a transaction mechanism or other reference rate in anticipation of LIBOR’s discontinuation, but we may not be able to reach agreement with our lenders on any such amendments. As of December 31, 2020, we had $12.8 billion of borrowings based on LIBOR. The replacement of LIBOR with a comparable or successor rate could cause the amount of interest payable on our long-term debt to be different or higher than expected.\n\nOn July 27, 2017, the U.K. Financial Conduct Authority (the authority that regulates LIBOR) announced that it intends to stop compelling banks to submit rates for the calculation of LIBOR after 2021. The discontinuation date for submission and publication of rates for certain tenors of USD LIBOR (1-month, 3-month, 6-month, and 12-month) is currently under consultation by the ICE Benchmark Administration (the administrator of LIBOR) and may be extended until June 30, 2023. It is unclear whether new methods of calculating LIBOR will be established such that it continues to exist after 2021. Similarly, it is not possible to predict whether LIBOR will continue to be viewed as an acceptable market benchmark, what rate or rates may become acceptable alternatives to LIBOR, or what effect these changes in views or alternatives may have on financial markets for LIBOR-linked financial instruments. While the U.S. Federal Reserve, in conjunction with the Alternative Reference Rates Committee, has chosen SOFR as the recommended risk-free reference rate for the U.S. (calculated based on repurchase agreements backed by treasury securities), we cannot currently predict the extent to which this index will gain widespread acceptance as a replacement for LIBOR. It is not possible to predict the effect of these changes, other reforms or the establishment of alternative reference rates in the United Kingdom, the United States or elsewhere.\n\nOur largest exposure with respect to variable-rate debt comes from changes in LIBOR. We had variable-rate debt instruments representing approximately 40% of our total long-term debt at December 31, 2020. We currently do not have an interest rate hedge program to hedge our exposure to floating interest rates on our variable-rate debt obligations. If annual interest rates increase 100 basis points, based on our December 31, 2020 variable-rate debt and short-term investments balances, annual interest expense on variable-rate debt would increase by approximately $130 million and annual interest income on short-term investments would increase by approximately $70 million. Additionally, the fair value of fixed-rate debt would have decreased by approximately $590 million for AAG and $450 million for American.\n\nOur earnings and cash flow are affected by changes in interest rates due to the impact those changes have on our interest expense from variable- rate debt instruments and our interest income from short-term, interest-bearing investments.\n\nGenerally, fluctuations in foreign currencies, including devaluations, cannot be predicted by us and can significantly affect the value of our assets located outside the United States. These conditions, as well as any further delays, devaluations or imposition of more stringent repatriation restrictions, may materially adversely affect our business, results of operations and financial condition. See Part I, Item 1A. Risk Factors – “We operate a global business with international operations that are subject to economic and political instability and have been, and in the future may continue to be, adversely affected by numerous events, circumstances or government actions beyond our control” for additional discussion of this and other currency risks.\n\nWe are exposed to the effect of foreign exchange rate fluctuations on the U.S. dollar value of foreign currency-denominated transactions. Our largest exposure comes from the British pound sterling, Euro, Canadian dollar and various Latin American currencies, primarily the Brazilian real. We do not currently have a foreign currency hedge program. We estimate a uniform 10% strengthening in the value of the U.S. dollar from 2020 levels relative to each of the currencies in which we have foreign currency exposure would have resulted in a decrease in pre-tax income of approximately $56 million for the year ended December 31, 2020." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9695689570432737, + "doc_id": "689e8adb67f100854b36024cd35f7cf8e6c1eb29be620304047b08ee83a24600", + "edit_distance": 0.6815286624203821, + "f1_score": 0.9938837920489296, + "meteor": 0.6647805355168376, + "precision": 0.9938837920489296, + "pred_md": "## Table of Contents\n\n## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS OF AMERICAN AIRLINES, INC.\n\nAs each phase is completed, the assets will be sold and transferred to LAWA, including the site improvements and non-proprietary improvements. As American controls the assets during construction, they are recognized on its balance sheet until legal title has transferred. As of December 31, 2020, American has incurred approximately $223 million in costs relating to the LAX modernization project, of which $114 million were incurred during 2020, and have been included within operating property and equipment on its consolidated balance sheet. As of December 31, 2020, American has sold and transferred $111 million of non-proprietary improvements to LAWA, all of which occurred during 2020.\n\n## (d) Off-Balance Sheet Arrangements\n\n## Aircraft and Engines\n\nAmerican currently operates 350 owned aircraft and 24 leased aircraft, and owns 62 spare aircraft engines, which in each case were financed with EETCs issued by pass-through trusts. These trusts are off-balance sheet entities, the primary purpose of which is to finance the acquisition of flight equipment or to permit issuance of debt backed by existing flight equipment. In the case of aircraft EETCs, rather than finance each aircraft separately when such aircraft is purchased, delivered or refinanced, these trusts allow American to raise the financing for a number of aircraft at one time and, if applicable, place such funds in escrow pending a future purchase, delivery or refinancing of the relevant aircraft. Similarly, in the case of the spare engine EETCs, the trusts allow American to use its existing pool of spare engines to raise financing under a single facility. The trusts have also been structured to provide for certain credit enhancements, such as liquidity facilities to cover certain interest payments, that reduce the risks to the purchasers of the trust certificates and, as a result, reduce the cost of aircraft financing to American.\n\nEach trust covers a set number of aircraft or spare engines scheduled to be delivered, financed or refinanced upon the issuance of the EETC or within a specific period of time thereafter. At the time of each covered aircraft or spare engine financing, the relevant trust used the proceeds of the issuance of the EETC (which may have been available at the time of issuance thereof or held in escrow until financing of the applicable aircraft following its delivery) to purchase equipment notes relating to the financed aircraft or engines. The equipment notes are issued, at American's election, in connection with a mortgage financing of the aircraft or spare engines or, in certain cases, by a separate owner trust in connection with a leveraged lease financing of the aircraft. In the case of a leveraged lease financing, the owner trust then leases the aircraft to American. In both cases, the equipment notes are secured by a security interest in the aircraft or engines, as applicable. The pass-through trust certificates are not direct obligations of, nor are they guaranteed by, AAG or American. However, in the case of mortgage financings, the equipment notes issued to the trusts are direct obligations of American and, in certain instances, have been guaranteed by AAG. As of December 31, 2020, $11.0 billion associated with these mortgage financings is reflected as debt in the accompanying consolidated balance sheet.\n\nWith respect to leveraged leases, American evaluated whether the leases had characteristics of a variable interest entity. American concluded the leasing entities met the criteria for variable interest entities; however, American concluded it is not the primary beneficiary under these leasing arrangements and accounts for the majority of its EETC leveraged lease financings as operating leases. American's total future payments to the trusts of each of the relevant EETCs under these leveraged lease financings are $78 million as of December 31, 2020, which are reflected in the operating lease obligations in Note 4.\n\n## Letters of Credit and Other\n\nAmerican provides financial assurance, such as letters of credit, surety bonds or restricted cash and investments, primarily to support projected workers' compensation obligations and airport commitments. As of December 31, 2020, American had $476 million of letters of credit and surety bonds securing various obligations, of which $110 million is collateralized with American's restricted cash. The letters of credit and surety bonds that are subject to expiration will expire on various dates through 2024.\n\n## (e) Legal Proceedings\n\nChapter 11 Cases . On November 29, 2011, AMR, American, and certain of AMR's other direct and indirect domestic subsidiaries (the Debtors) filed voluntary petitions for relief under Chapter 11 of the United States Bankruptcy Code in the United States Bankruptcy Court for the Southern District of New York (the Bankruptcy Court). On October 21, 2013, the Bankruptcy Court entered an order approving and confirming the Debtors' fourth amended joint plan of reorganization (as amended, the Plan). On the Effective Date, December 9, 2013, the Debtors consummated their reorganization pursuant to the Plan and completed the Merger.\n\n193", + "recall": 0.9938837920489296, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS OF AMERICAN AIRLINES, INC.\n\n## (d) Off-Balance Sheet Arrangements\n\n## Aircraft and Engines\n\n## Letters of Credit and Other\n\n## (e) Legal Proceedings\n\n193\n\nChapter 11 Cases . On November 29, 2011, AMR, American, and certain of AMR’s other direct and indirect domestic subsidiaries (the Debtors) filed voluntary petitions for relief under Chapter 11 of the United States Bankruptcy Code in the United States Bankruptcy Court for the Southern District of New York (the Bankruptcy Court). On October 21, 2013, the Bankruptcy Court entered an order approving and confirming the Debtors’ fourth amended joint plan of reorganization (as amended, the Plan). On the Effective Date, December 9, 2013, the Debtors consummated their reorganization pursuant to the Plan and completed the Merger.\n\nAmerican provides financial assurance, such as letters of credit, surety bonds or restricted cash and investments, primarily to support projected workers’ compensation obligations and airport commitments. As of December 31, 2020, American had $476 million of letters of credit and surety bonds securing various obligations, of which $110 million is collateralized with American’s restricted cash. The letters of credit and surety bonds that are subject to expiration will expire on various dates through 2024.\n\nWith respect to leveraged leases, American evaluated whether the leases had characteristics of a variable interest entity. American concluded the leasing entities met the criteria for variable interest entities; however, American concluded it is not the primary beneficiary under these leasing arrangements and accounts for the majority of its EETC leveraged lease financings as operating leases. American’s total future payments to the trusts of each of the relevant EETCs under these leveraged lease financings are $78 million as of December 31, 2020, which are reflected in the operating lease obligations in Note 4.\n\nEach trust covers a set number of aircraft or spare engines scheduled to be delivered, financed or refinanced upon the issuance of the EETC or within a specific period of time thereafter. At the time of each covered aircraft or spare engine financing, the relevant trust used the proceeds of the issuance of the EETC (which may have been available at the time of issuance thereof or held in escrow until financing of the applicable aircraft following its delivery) to purchase equipment notes relating to the financed aircraft or engines. The equipment notes are issued, at American’s election, in connection with a mortgage financing of the aircraft or spare engines or, in certain cases, by a separate owner trust in connection with a leveraged lease financing of the aircraft. In the case of a leveraged lease financing, the owner trust then leases the aircraft to American. In both cases, the equipment notes are secured by a security interest in the aircraft or engines, as applicable. The pass-through trust certificates are not direct obligations of, nor are they guaranteed by, AAG or American. However, in the case of mortgage financings, the equipment notes issued to the trusts are direct obligations of American and, in certain instances, have been guaranteed by AAG. As of December 31, 2020, $11.0 billion associated with these mortgage financings is reflected as debt in the accompanying consolidated balance sheet.\n\nAmerican currently operates 350 owned aircraft and 24 leased aircraft, and owns 62 spare aircraft engines, which in each case were financed with EETCs issued by pass-through trusts. These trusts are off-balance sheet entities, the primary purpose of which is to finance the acquisition of flight equipment or to permit issuance of debt backed by existing flight equipment. In the case of aircraft EETCs, rather than finance each aircraft separately when such aircraft is purchased, delivered or refinanced, these trusts allow American to raise the financing for a number of aircraft at one time and, if applicable, place such funds in escrow pending a future purchase, delivery or refinancing of the relevant aircraft. Similarly, in the case of the spare engine EETCs, the trusts allow American to use its existing pool of spare engines to raise financing under a single facility. The trusts have also been structured to provide for certain credit enhancements, such as liquidity facilities to cover certain interest payments, that reduce the risks to the purchasers of the trust certificates and, as a result, reduce the cost of aircraft financing to American.\n\nAs each phase is completed, the assets will be sold and transferred to LAWA, including the site improvements and non-proprietary improvements. As American controls the assets during construction, they are recognized on its balance sheet until legal title has transferred. As of December 31, 2020, American has incurred approximately $223 million in costs relating to the LAX modernization project, of which $114 million were incurred during 2020, and have been included within operating property and equipment on its consolidated balance sheet. As of December 31, 2020, American has sold and transferred $111 million of non-proprietary improvements to LAWA, all of which occurred during 2020." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7845733197681928, + "doc_id": "aef5c7049f9c8aed8a41c2b855aa5350b5cc6f1a7513f37d2f66ababdb358446", + "edit_distance": 0.24324324324324326, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.982722634508349, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Consolidated Statements of Comprehensive Income\n\n## Becton, Dickinson and Company Years Ended September 30\n\nTable of Contents\n\nAmounts may not add due to rounding.\n\nSee notes to consolidated financial statements.\n\n52", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## Consolidated Statements of Comprehensive Income Becton, Dickinson and Company Years Ended September 30\n\n52\n\nAmounts may not add due to rounding.\n\nSee notes to consolidated financial statements." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "6ff2778a2fc86449d0ff4481c171584699aaaec8f94497f8b096745fdfb7d5f0", + "edit_distance": 0.7142857142857143, + "f1_score": 0.4, + "meteor": 0.2798507462686567, + "precision": 0.6666666666666666, + "pred_md": "## PART III", + "recall": 0.2857142857142857, + "true_md": "CP 2020 ANNUAL REPORT 126\n\nPART III" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9864892469320675, + "doc_id": "9dd081497232aefb96a1cf7568d363686a4b21eb088012c296a0e66ea05fafa1", + "edit_distance": 0.07906295754026355, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999327159652659, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "associated with such legal proceedings are described in more detail in note M, \"Contingencies and Commitments,\" in IBM's 2018 Annual Report to Stockholders. The company believes it has adopted appropriate risk management and compliance programs. Legal and compliance risks, however, will continue to exist and additional legal proceedings and other contingencies, the outcome of which cannot be predicted with certainty, may arise from time to time.\n\nRisk Factors Related to IBM Securities: The company and its subsidiaries issue debt securities in the worldwide capital markets from time to time, with a variety of different maturities and in different currencies. The value of the company's debt securities fluctuates based on many factors, including the methods employed for calculating principal and interest, the maturity of the securities, the aggregate principal amount of securities outstanding, the redemption features for the securities, the level, direction and volatility of interest rates, changes in exchange rates, exchange controls, governmental and stock exchange regulations and other factors over which the company has little or no control. The company's ability to pay interest and repay the principal for its debt securities is dependent upon its ability to manage its business operations, as well as the other risks described under this Item 1A. entitled \"Risk Factors.\" There can be no assurance that the company will be able to manage any of these risks successfully.\n\nThe company also issues its common stock from time to time in connection with various compensation plans, contributions to its pension plan and certain acquisitions. The market price of IBM common stock is subject to significant volatility, due to other factors described under this Item 1A. entitled \"Risk Factors,\" as well as economic and geopolitical conditions generally, trading volumes, speculation by the press or investment community about the company's financial condition, and other factors, many of which are beyond the company's control. Since the market price of IBM's common stock fluctuates significantly, stockholders may not be able to sell the company's stock at attractive prices.\n\nIn addition, changes by any rating agency to the company's outlook or credit ratings can negatively impact the value and liquidity of both the company's debt and equity securities. The company does not make a market in either its debt or equity securities and cannot provide any assurances with respect to the liquidity or value of such securities.\n\n## Item 1B. Unresolved Staff Comments:\n\nNot applicable.\n\n## Item 2. Properties:\n\nThe company's corporate headquarters are located at an owned site in Armonk, New York. As of December 31, 2018, in aggregate, the company owns or leases facilities for current use consisting of approximately 75 million square feet worldwide.\n\nAt December 31, 2018, IBM's manufacturing and development facilities in the United States had aggregate floor space of approximately 7 million square feet, of which 4 million was owned and 3 million was leased. Outside the U.S., similar facilities totaled more than 6 million square feet, of which 3 million was owned and 3 million was leased. The company's facilities are utilized for current operations of all its segments.\n\nAlthough improved production techniques, productivity gains, divestitures and infrastructure reduction actions have resulted in reduced manufacturing floor space, continuous maintenance and upgrading of facilities is essential to maintain technological leadership, improve productivity and meet customer demand.\n\n## Item 3. Legal Proceedings:\n\nRefer to note M, \"Contingencies and Commitments,\" on pages 115 to 117 of IBM's 2018 Annual Report to Stockholders, which is incorporated herein by reference.\n\n## Item 4. Mine Safety Disclosures:\n\nNot applicable.\n\n18", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "associated with such legal proceedings are described in more detail in note M, \"Contingencies and Commitments,\" in IBM's 2018 Annual Report to Stockholders. The company believes it has adopted appropriate risk management and compliance programs. Legal and compliance risks, however, will continue to exist and additional legal proceedings and other contingencies, the outcome of which cannot be predicted with certainty, may arise from time to time.\n\nRisk Factors Related to IBM Securities: The company and its subsidiaries issue debt securities in the worldwide capital markets from time to time, with a variety of different maturities and in different currencies. The value of the company's debt securities fluctuates based on many factors, including the methods employed for calculating principal and interest, the maturity of the securities, the aggregate principal amount of securities outstanding, the redemption features for the securities, the level, direction and volatility of interest rates, changes in exchange rates, exchange controls, governmental and stock exchange regulations and other factors over which the company has little or no control. The company's ability to pay interest and repay the principal for its debt securities is dependent upon its ability to manage its business operations, as well as the other risks described under this Item 1A. entitled \"Risk Factors.\" There can be no assurance that the company will be able to manage any of these risks successfully.\n\nThe company also issues its common stock from time to time in connection with various compensation plans, contributions to its pension plan and certain acquisitions. The market price of IBM common stock is subject to significant volatility, due to other factors described under this Item 1A. entitled \"Risk Factors,\" as well as economic and geopolitical conditions generally, trading volumes, speculation by the press or investment community about the company's financial condition, and other factors, many of which are beyond the company's control. Since the market price of IBM's common stock fluctuates significantly, stockholders may not be able to sell the company's stock at attractive prices.\n\nIn addition, changes by any rating agency to the company's outlook or credit ratings can negatively impact the value and liquidity of both the company's debt and equity securities. The company does not make a market in either its debt or equity securities and cannot provide any assurances with respect to the liquidity or value of such securities.\n\nThe company's corporate headquarters are located at an owned site in Armonk, New York. As of December 31, 2018, in aggregate, the company owns or leases facilities for current use consisting of approximately 75 million square feet worldwide.\n\nAt December 31, 2018, IBM's manufacturing and development facilities in the United States had aggregate floor space of approximately 7 million square feet, of which 4 million was owned and 3 million was leased. Outside the U.S., similar facilities totaled more than 6 million square feet, of which 3 million was owned and 3 million was leased. The company's facilities are utilized for current operations of all its segments.\n\nAlthough improved production techniques, productivity gains, divestitures and infrastructure reduction actions have resulted in reduced manufacturing floor space, continuous maintenance and upgrading of facilities is essential to maintain technological leadership, improve productivity and meet customer demand.\n\nRefer to note M, \"Contingencies and Commitments,\" on pages 115 to 117 of IBM's 2018 Annual Report to Stockholders, which is incorporated herein by reference.\n\nNot applicable.\n\n## Item 4. Mine Safety Disclosures:\n\n## Item 3. Legal Proceedings:\n\n## Item 2. Properties:\n\n## Item 1B. Unresolved Staff Comments:\n\nNot applicable.\n\n18" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9664688101322458, + "doc_id": "611bf2fb46f641a5b457c6aabe229dc71e9b24442fa9cf577a5ec9790bfc3ef3", + "edit_distance": 0.10011123470522804, + "f1_score": 0.9852744310575635, + "meteor": 0.9851382596872283, + "precision": 0.9865951742627346, + "pred_md": "## Table of Contents\n\ncontinue to cause periodic service disruptions and delays. We have at times found it necessary or desirable to make significant expenditures to comply with security-related requirements while seeking to reduce their impact on our customers, such as expenditures for automated security screening lines at airports. As a result of competitive pressure, and the need to improve security screening throughput to support the pace of our operations, it is unlikely that we will be able to capture all security-related costs through increased fares. In addition, we cannot forecast what new security requirements may be imposed in the future, or their impact on our business.\n\n## We are subject to risks associated with climate change, including increased regulation of our CO2 emissions, changing consumer preferences and the potential increased impacts of severe weather events on our operations and infrastructure.\n\nEfforts to transition to a low-carbon future have increased the focus by global, regional and national regulators on climate change and GHG emissions, including CO2 emissions. In particular, ICAO has adopted rules to implement CORSIA, which will require American to address the growth in CO emissions of a significant majority of our international flights. For more information on CORSIA, see 'Aircraft Emissions and Climate Change Requirements' under Item 1. Business - Domestic and Global Regulatory Landscape - Environmental Matters. 2\n\nAt this time, the costs of complying with our future obligations under CORSIA are uncertain, primarily because it is difficult to estimate the return of demand for international air travel during and in the recovery from the COVID-19 pandemic. There is also significant uncertainty with respect to the future supply and price of carbon offset credits and sustainable or lower carbon aircraft fuels that could allow us to reduce our emissions of CO2. In addition, we will not directly control our CORSIA compliance costs through 2029 because those obligations are based on the growth in emissions of the global aviation sector and begin to incorporate a factor for individual airline operator emissions growth beginning in 2030. Due to the competitive nature of the airline industry and unpredictability of the market for air travel, we can offer no assurance that we may be able to increase our fares, impose surcharges or otherwise increase revenues or decrease other operating costs sufficiently to offset our costs of meeting obligations under CORSIA.\n\nIn the event that CORSIA does not come into force as expected, American and other airlines could become subject to an unpredictable and inconsistent array of national or regional emissions restrictions, creating a patchwork of complex regulatory requirements that could affect global competitors differently without offering meaningful aviation environmental improvements. Concerns over climate change are likely to result in continued attempts by municipal, state, regional, and federal agencies to adopt requirements or change business environments related to aviation that, if successful, may result in increased costs to the airline industry and us. In addition, several countries and U.S. states have adopted or are considering adopting programs, including new taxes, to regulate domestic GHG emissions. Finally, certain airports have adopted, and others could in the future adopt, GHG emission or climate-related goals that could impact our operations or require us to make changes or investments in our infrastructure.\n\nAll such climate change-related regulatory activity and developments may adversely affect our business and financial results by requiring us to reduce our emissions, make capital investments to purchase specific types of equipment or technologies, purchase carbon offset credits, or otherwise incur additional costs related to our emissions. Such activity may also impact us indirectly by increasing our operating costs, including fuel costs.\n\nGrowing recognition among consumers of the dangers of climate change may mean some customers choose to fly less frequently or fly on an airline they perceive as operating in a manner that is more sustainable to the climate. Business customers may choose to use alternatives to travel, such as virtual meetings and workspaces. Greater development of high-speed rail in markets now served by short-haul flights could provide passengers with lower-carbon alternatives to flying with us. Our collateral to secure loans, in the form of aircraft, spare parts and airport slots, could lose value as customer demand shifts and economies move to low-carbon alternatives, which may increase our financing cost.\n\nFinally, the potential acute and chronic physical effects of climate change, such as increased frequency and severity of storms, floods, fires, sealevel rise, excessive heat, longer-term changes in weather patterns and other climate-related events, could affect our operations, infrastructure and financial results. Operational impacts, such as the canceling of flights, could result in loss of revenue. We could incur significant costs to improve the climate resiliency of our infrastructure and otherwise prepare for, respond to, and mitigate such physical effects of climate change. We are not able to predict accurately the materiality of any potential losses or costs associated with the physical effects of climate change.\n\n45", + "recall": 0.983957219251337, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## We are subject to risks associated with climate change, including increased regulation of our CO emissions, changing consumer preferences and the potential increased impacts of severe weather events on our operations and infrastructure. 2\n\ncontinue to cause periodic service disruptions and delays. We have at times found it necessary or desirable to make significant expenditures to comply with security-related requirements while seeking to reduce their impact on our customers, such as expenditures for automated security screening lines at airports. As a result of competitive pressure, and the need to improve security screening throughput to support the pace of our operations, it is unlikely that we will be able to capture all security-related costs through increased fares. In addition, we cannot forecast what new security requirements may be imposed in the future, or their impact on our business.\n\nEfforts to transition to a low-carbon future have increased the focus by global, regional and national regulators on climate change and GHG emissions, including CO emissions. In particular, ICAO has adopted rules to implement CORSIA, which will require American to address the growth in CO emissions of a significant majority of our international flights. For more information on CORSIA, see “Aircraft Emissions and Climate Change Requirements” under Item 1. Business – Domestic and Global Regulatory Landscape – Environmental Matters. 2 2\n\nAt this time, the costs of complying with our future obligations under CORSIA are uncertain, primarily because it is difficult to estimate the return of demand for international air travel during and in the recovery from the COVID-19 pandemic. There is also significant uncertainty with respect to the future supply and price of carbon offset credits and sustainable or lower carbon aircraft fuels that could allow us to reduce our emissions of CO In addition, we will not directly control our CORSIA compliance costs through 2029 because those obligations are based on the growth in emissions of the global aviation sector and begin to incorporate a factor for individual airline operator emissions growth beginning in 2030. Due to the competitive nature of the airline industry and unpredictability of the market for air travel, we can offer no assurance that we may be able to increase our fares, impose surcharges or otherwise increase revenues or decrease other operating costs sufficiently to offset our costs of meeting obligations under CORSIA. 2.\n\nIn the event that CORSIA does not come into force as expected, American and other airlines could become subject to an unpredictable and inconsistent array of national or regional emissions restrictions, creating a patchwork of complex regulatory requirements that could affect global competitors differently without offering meaningful aviation environmental improvements. Concerns over climate change are likely to result in continued attempts by municipal, state, regional, and federal agencies to adopt requirements or change business environments related to aviation that, if successful, may result in increased costs to the airline industry and us. In addition, several countries and U.S. states have adopted or are considering adopting programs, including new taxes, to regulate domestic GHG emissions. Finally, certain airports have adopted, and others could in the future adopt, GHG emission or climate-related goals that could impact our operations or require us to make changes or investments in our infrastructure.\n\nAll such climate change-related regulatory activity and developments may adversely affect our business and financial results by requiring us to reduce our emissions, make capital investments to purchase specific types of equipment or technologies, purchase carbon offset credits, or otherwise incur additional costs related to our emissions. Such activity may also impact us indirectly by increasing our operating costs, including fuel costs.\n\nGrowing recognition among consumers of the dangers of climate change may mean some customers choose to fly less frequently or fly on an airline they perceive as operating in a manner that is more sustainable to the climate. Business customers may choose to use alternatives to travel, such as virtual meetings and workspaces. Greater development of high-speed rail in markets now served by short-haul flights could provide passengers with lower-carbon alternatives to flying with us. Our collateral to secure loans, in the form of aircraft, spare parts and airport slots, could lose value as customer demand shifts and economies move to low-carbon alternatives, which may increase our financing cost.\n\nFinally, the potential acute and chronic physical effects of climate change, such as increased frequency and severity of storms, floods, fires, sea- level rise, excessive heat, longer-term changes in weather patterns and other climate-related events, could affect our operations, infrastructure and financial results. Operational impacts, such as the canceling of flights, could result in loss of revenue. We could incur significant costs to improve the climate resiliency of our infrastructure and otherwise prepare for, respond to, and mitigate such physical effects of climate change. We are not able to predict accurately the materiality of any potential losses or costs associated with the physical effects of climate change.\n\n45" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9432959953340394, + "doc_id": "50ba24462fa09473444f5fee9ada666d6138773b53afdf9ff43536f63604e65f", + "edit_distance": 0.05735140771637122, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.8432979355455433, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "ability or desire to continue to operate at similar levels in certain jurisdictions as historically seen or as currently anticipated, which could negatively impact their demand for our products and services. In addition, new laws and regulations that might favor the increased use of non-fossil fuels, including nuclear, wind, solar and bio-fuels or that are designed to increase energy efficiency, could dampen demand for oil and gas production or power generation resulting in lower spending by customers for our products and services. These actions could also increase costs associated with our operations, including costs for raw materials and transportation. There is also increased focus, including by governmental and non-governmental organizations, environmental advocacy groups, investors and other stakeholders on these and other sustainability matters, and adverse publicity in the global marketplace about the levels of greenhouse gas emissions by companies in the manufacturing and energy industry could reduce customer demand for our products and services or harm our reputation. Because it is uncertain what laws will be enacted, we cannot predict the potential impact of such laws on our future financial condition, results of operations and cash flows, but such new or additional laws could adversely affect our business.\n\n## We are party to asbestos-containing product litigation that could adversely affect our financial condition, results of operations and cash flows.\n\nWe are a defendant in a substantial number of lawsuits that seek to recover damages for personal injury allegedly resulting from exposure to asbestos-containing products formerly manufactured and/or distributed by us. Such products were used as internal components of process equipment, and we do not believe that there was any significant emission of asbestos-containing fibers during the use of this equipment. Although we are defending these allegations vigorously and believe that a high percentage of these lawsuits are covered by insurance or indemnities from other companies, there can be no assurance that we will prevail or that coverage or payments made by insurance or such other companies would be adequate. Unfavorable rulings, judgments or settlement terms could have a material adverse impact on our business, financial condition, results of operations and cash flows.\n\n## Inability to protect our intellectual property could negatively affect our competitive position.\n\nWe rely on a combination of patents, copyrights, trademarks, trade secrets, confidentiality provisions and licensing arrangements to establish and protect our proprietary rights. We cannot guarantee, however, that the steps we have taken to protect our intellectual property will be adequate to prevent infringement of our rights or misappropriation of our technology. For example, effective patent, trademark, copyright and trade secret protection are unavailable or limited in some of the foreign countries in which we operate. In addition, while we generally enter into confidentiality agreements with our employees and third parties to protect our intellectual property, such confidentiality agreements could be breached or otherwise may not provide meaningful protection for our trade secrets and know-how related to the design, manufacture or operation of our products. Resorting to litigation to protect our intellectual property rights is burdensome and costly, and we may not always prevail. Further, adequate remedies are not always available in the event of an unauthorized use or disclosure of our trade secrets and manufacturing expertise. Failure to successfully enforce our intellectual property rights could harm our competitive position, business, financial condition, results of operations and cash flows.\n\n## Increased costs as a result of product liability and warranty claims could adversely affect our financial condition, results of operations and cash flows.\n\nFrom time to time, we are exposed to product liability and warranty claims when the use of one of our products results in, or is alleged to result in, bodily injury and/or property damage or our products actually or allegedly fail to perform as expected. Some of our products are designed to support the most critical, severe service applications in the markets that we serve and any failure of such products could result in significant product liability and warranty claims, as well as damage to our reputation in the marketplace. While we maintain insurance coverage with respect to certain product liability claims, we may not be able to obtain such insurance on acceptable terms in the future, and any such insurance may not provide adequate coverage against product liability claims. In addition, product liability claims can be expensive to defend and can divert the attention of management and other personnel for significant periods of time, regardless of the ultimate outcome. An unsuccessful defense of a product liability claim could have an adverse effect on our business, financial condition, results of operations and cash flows. Even if we are successful in defending against a claim relating to our products, claims of this nature could cause our customers to lose confidence in our products and our company. Warranty claims are not generally covered by insurance, and we may incur significant warranty costs that are not reimbursable, which could adversely affect our financial condition, results of operations and cash flows.\n\n## Financial and Accounting Risks\n\n22", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "ability or desire to continue to operate at similar levels in certain jurisdictions as historically seen or as currently anticipated, which could negatively impact their demand for our products and services. In addition, new laws and regulations that might favor the increased use of non-fossil fuels, including nuclear, wind, solar and bio-fuels or that are designed to increase energy efficiency, could dampen demand for oil and gas production or power generation resulting in lower spending by customers for our products and services. These actions could also increase costs associated with our operations, including costs for raw materials and transportation. There is also increased focus, including by governmental and non-governmental organizations, environmental advocacy groups, investors and other stakeholders on these and other sustainability matters, and adverse publicity in the global marketplace about the levels of greenhouse gas emissions by companies in the manufacturing and energy industry could reduce customer demand for our products and services or harm our reputation. Because it is uncertain what laws will be enacted, we cannot predict the potential impact of such laws on our future financial condition, results of operations and cash flows, but such new or additional laws could adversely affect our business.\n\nWe are party to asbestos-containing product litigation that could adversely affect our financial condition, results of operations and cash flows.\n\nWe are a defendant in a substantial number of lawsuits that seek to recover damages for personal injury allegedly resulting from exposure to asbestos-containing products formerly manufactured and/or distributed by us. Such products were used as internal components of process equipment, and we do not believe that there was any significant emission of asbestos-containing fibers during the use of this equipment. Although we are defending these allegations vigorously and believe that a high percentage of these lawsuits are covered by insurance or indemnities from other companies, there can be no assurance that we will prevail or that coverage or payments made by insurance or such other companies would be adequate. Unfavorable rulings, judgments or settlement terms could have a material adverse impact on our business, financial condition, results of operations and cash flows.\n\nInability to protect our intellectual property could negatively affect our competitive position.\n\nWe rely on a combination of patents, copyrights, trademarks, trade secrets, confidentiality provisions and licensing arrangements to establish and protect our proprietary rights. We cannot guarantee, however, that the steps we have taken to protect our intellectual property will be adequate to prevent infringement of our rights or misappropriation of our technology. For example, effective patent, trademark, copyright and trade secret protection are unavailable or limited in some of the foreign countries in which we operate. In addition, while we generally enter into confidentiality agreements with our employees and third parties to protect our intellectual property, such confidentiality agreements could be breached or otherwise may not provide meaningful protection for our trade secrets and know-how related to the design, manufacture or operation of our products. Resorting to litigation to protect our intellectual property rights is burdensome and costly, and we may not always prevail. Further, adequate remedies are not always available in the event of an unauthorized use or disclosure of our trade secrets and manufacturing expertise. Failure to successfully enforce our intellectual property rights could harm our competitive position, business, financial condition, results of operations and cash flows.\n\nIncreased costs as a result of product liability and warranty claims could adversely affect our financial condition, results of operations and cash flows.\n\nFrom time to time, we are exposed to product liability and warranty claims when the use of one of our products results in, or is alleged to result in, bodily injury and/or property damage or our products actually or allegedly fail to perform as expected. Some of our products are designed to support the most critical, severe service applications in the markets that we serve and any failure of such products could result in significant product liability and warranty claims, as well as damage to our reputation in the marketplace. While we maintain insurance coverage with respect to certain product liability claims, we may not be able to obtain such insurance on acceptable terms in the future, and any such insurance may not provide adequate coverage against product liability claims. In addition, product liability claims can be expensive to defend and can divert the attention of management and other personnel for significant periods of time, regardless of the ultimate outcome. An unsuccessful defense of a product liability claim could have an adverse effect on our business, financial condition, results of operations and cash flows. Even if we are successful in defending against a claim relating to our products, claims of this nature could cause our customers to lose confidence in our products and our company. Warranty claims are not generally covered by insurance, and we may incur significant warranty costs that are not reimbursable, which could\n\nagainst a claim relating to our products, claims of this nature could cause our customers to lose confidence in our products and our company. Warranty claims are not generally covered by insurance, and we may incur significant warranty costs that are not reimbursable, which could adversely affect our financial condition, results of operations and cash flows.\n\n## Financial and Accounting Risks\n\n22" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9856441187159024, + "doc_id": "d90945c721e338270caebdca40eff1753752b6f9d4d4c31f601990eb98ab0514", + "edit_distance": 0.01729559748427673, + "f1_score": 0.9908592321755028, + "meteor": 0.9953964572796437, + "precision": 0.9926739926739927, + "pred_md": "Technical Support Services: delivers comprehensive support services to maintain and improve the availability of clients' IT infrastructures. These offerings include maintenance for IBM products and other technology platforms, as well as open source and vendor software and solution support, drawing on innovative technologies and leveraging the IBM Services Platform with Watson capabilities.\n\nIntegration Software: delivers industry-leading hybrid cloud solutions that empower clients to achieve rapid innovation, hybrid integration, and process transformation with choice and consistency across public, dedicated and local cloud environments, leveraging the IBM Platform-as-aService solution. Integration Software offerings and capabilities help clients address the digital imperatives to create, connect and optimize their applications, data and infrastructure on their journey to become cognitive businesses.\n\nSystems provides clients with innovative infrastructure platforms to help meet the new requirements of hybrid cloud and enterprise AI workloads. More than one-third of Systems Hardware's server and storage sales transactions are through the company's business partners, with the balance direct to end-user clients. IBM Systems also designs advanced semiconductor and systems technology in collaboration with IBM Research, primarily for use in the company's systems.\n\n## Systems Capabilities\n\nSystems Hardware: includes IBM's servers: IBM Z, Power Systems and Storage Systems.\n\nServers: a range of high-performance systems designed to address computing capacity, security and performance needs of businesses, hyperscale cloud service providers and scientific computing organizations. The portfolio includes IBM Z, a trusted enterprise platform for integrating data, transactions and insight, and Power Systems, a system designed from the ground up for big data and enterprise AI, optimized for hybrid cloud and Linux, and delivering open innovation with OpenPOWER.\n\nStorage Systems: data storage products and solutions that allow clients to retain and manage rapidly growing, complex volumes of digital information and to fuel data-centric cognitive applications. These solutions address critical client requirements for information retention and archiving, security, compliance and storage optimization including data deduplication, availability and virtualization. The portfolio consists of a broad range of flash storage, disk and tape storage solutions.\n\nOperating Systems Software: IBM Z operating system environments include z/OS, a security-rich, high-performance enterprise operating system, as well as Linux. Power Systems offers a choice of AIX, IBM i or Linux operating systems. These operating systems leverage POWER architecture to deliver secure, reliable and high performing enterprise-class workloads across a breadth of server offerings.\n\nGlobal Financing encompasses two primary businesses: financing, primarily conducted through IBM Credit LLC (IBM Credit), and remanufacturing and remarketing. IBM Credit is a wholly owned subsidiary of IBM that accesses the capital markets directly. IBM Credit, through its financing solutions, facilitates IBM clients' acquisition of information technology systems, software and services in the areas where the company has expertise. The financing arrangements are predominantly for products or services that are critical to the end users' business operations. The company conducts a comprehensive credit evaluation of its clients prior to extending financing. As a captive financier, Global Financing has the benefit of both deep knowledge of its client base and a clear insight into the products and services financed. These factors allow the business to effectively manage two of the major risks associated with financing, credit and residual value, while generating strong returns on equity. Global Financing also maintains a long-term partnership with the company's clients through various stages of the IT asset life cycle-from initial purchase and technology upgrades to asset disposition decisions.\n\n6", + "recall": 0.9890510948905109, + "true_md": "Technical Support Services: delivers comprehensive support services to maintain and improve the availability of clients' IT infrastructures. These offerings include maintenance for IBM products and other technology platforms, as well as open source and vendor software and solution support, drawing on innovative technologies and leveraging the IBM Services Platform with Watson capabilities.\n\nIntegration Software: delivers industry-leading hybrid cloud solutions that empower clients to achieve rapid innovation, hybrid integration, and process transformation with choice and consistency across public, dedicated and local cloud environments, leveraging the IBM Platform-as-a- Service solution. Integration Software offerings and capabilities help clients address the digital imperatives to create, connect and optimize their applications, data and infrastructure on their journey to become cognitive businesses.\n\nSystems provides clients with innovative infrastructure platforms to help meet the new requirements of hybrid cloud and enterprise AI workloads. More than one-third of Systems Hardware's server and storage sales transactions are through the company's business partners, with the balance direct to end-user clients. IBM Systems also designs advanced semiconductor and systems technology in collaboration with IBM Research, primarily for use in the company's systems.\n\nSystems Hardware: includes IBM's servers: IBM Z, Power Systems and Storage Systems.\n\nServers: a range of high-performance systems designed to address computing capacity, security and performance needs of businesses, hyperscale cloud service providers and scientific computing organizations. The portfolio includes IBM Z, a trusted enterprise platform for integrating data, transactions and insight, and Power Systems, a system designed from the ground up for big data and enterprise AI, optimized for hybrid cloud and Linux, and delivering open innovation with OpenPOWER.\n\nStorage Systems: data storage products and solutions that allow clients to retain and manage rapidly growing, complex volumes of digital information and to fuel data-centric cognitive applications. These solutions address critical client requirements for information retention and archiving, security, compliance and storage optimization including data deduplication, availability and virtualization. The portfolio consists of a broad range of flash storage, disk and tape storage solutions.\n\nOperating Systems Software: IBM Z operating system environments include z/OS, a security-rich, high-performance enterprise operating system, as well as Linux. Power Systems offers a choice of AIX, IBM i or Linux operating systems. These operating systems leverage POWER architecture to deliver secure, reliable and high performing enterprise-class workloads across a breadth of server offerings.\n\nGlobal Financing encompasses two primary businesses: financing, primarily conducted through IBM Credit LLC (IBM Credit), and remanufacturing and remarketing. IBM Credit is a wholly owned subsidiary of IBM that accesses the capital markets directly. IBM Credit, through its financing solutions, facilitates IBM clients' acquisition of information technology systems, software and services in the areas where the company has expertise. The financing arrangements are predominantly for products or services that are critical to the end users' business operations. The company conducts a comprehensive credit evaluation of its clients prior to extending financing. As a captive financier, Global Financing has the benefit of both deep knowledge of its client base and a clear insight into the products and services financed. These factors allow the business to effectively manage two of the major risks associated with financing, credit and residual value, while generating strong returns on equity. Global Financing also maintains a long-term partnership with the company's clients through various stages of the IT asset life cycle—from initial purchase and technology upgrades to asset disposition decisions.\n\n6\n\n## Systems Capabilities" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9535436019011616, + "doc_id": "2c7da8794f8d75840e3ee09b30878ce792da7fb0cd7f237ef5bd8571fde67065", + "edit_distance": 0.19808306709265175, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9959228316892443, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "As previously discussed, cash flows from operating activities in 2019, 2018 and 2017 reflected losses recorded upon our extinguishment of certain long-term notes which are included within Other, net .\n\n## Net Cash Flows from Investing Activities\n\n## Capital expenditures\n\nOur investments in capital expenditures are focused on projects that enhance our cost structure and manufacturing capabilities, and support our strategy of geographic expansion with select investments in growing markets. Capital expenditures of $957 million, $895 million and $727 million in 2019, 2018 and 2017, respectively, primarily related to manufacturing capacity expansions. Details of spending by segment are contained in Note 7 to the consolidated financial statements contained in Item 8. Financial Statements and Supplementary Data.\n\n## Acquisitions of Businesses\n\nCash outflows for acquisitions in 2018 primarily related to our acquisition of Bard. Cash outflows for acquisitions in 2017 included payments for acquisitions which were immaterial both individually and in the aggregate. For further discussion, refer to Note 10 to the consolidated financial statements contained in Item 8. Financial Statements and Supplementary Data.\n\n## Divestitures\n\nCash inflows relating to divestitures in 2019, 2018 and 2017 were $477 million, $534 million and $165 million, respectively. For further discussion, refer to Note 11 to the consolidated financial statements contained in Item 8. Financial Statements and Supplementary Data.\n\n## Net Cash Flows from Financing Activities\n\nNet cash from financing activities in 2019, 2018 and 2017 included the following significant cash flows:\n\nTable of Contents\n\nAdditional disclosures regarding the equity and debt-related financing activities detailed above are provided in Notes 3 and 16 to the consolidated financial statements contained in Item 8. Financial Statements and Supplementary Data.\n\n35", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\nAs previously discussed, cash flows from operating activities in 2019, 2018 and 2017 reflected losses recorded upon our extinguishment of certain long-term notes which are included within Other, net .\n\nOur investments in capital expenditures are focused on projects that enhance our cost structure and manufacturing capabilities, and support our strategy of geographic expansion with select investments in growing markets. Capital expenditures of $957 million, $895 million and $727 million in 2019, 2018 and 2017, respectively, primarily related to manufacturing capacity expansions. Details of spending by segment are contained in Note 7 to the consolidated financial statements contained in Item 8. Financial Statements and Supplementary Data.\n\nCash outflows for acquisitions in 2018 primarily related to our acquisition of Bard. Cash outflows for acquisitions in 2017 included payments for acquisitions which were immaterial both individually and in the aggregate. For further discussion, refer to Note 10 to the consolidated financial statements contained in Item 8. Financial Statements and Supplementary Data.\n\nCash inflows relating to divestitures in 2019, 2018 and 2017 were $477 million, $534 million and $165 million, respectively. For further discussion, refer to Note 11 to the consolidated financial statements contained in Item 8. Financial Statements and Supplementary Data.\n\nNet cash from financing activities in 2019, 2018 and 2017 included the following significant cash flows:\n\nAdditional disclosures regarding the equity and debt-related financing activities detailed above are provided in Notes 3 and 16 to the consolidated financial statements contained in Item 8. Financial Statements and Supplementary Data.\n\n## Net Cash Flows from Investing Activities\n\n## Capital expenditures\n\n## Acquisitions of Businesses\n\n## Divestitures\n\n## Net Cash Flows from Financing Activities\n\n35" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8171875338030217, + "doc_id": "fc9dfec6115fecd89f851cb5bdd7655408ec6437c9bed6bfe0e19b1466d2fec5", + "edit_distance": 0.19421965317919074, + "f1_score": 0.9955686853766619, + "meteor": 0.8340294024835372, + "precision": 0.9970414201183432, + "pred_md": "## Table of Contents\n\n## Note 1 Summary of Significant Accounting Policies\n\nPrinciples of Consolidation and Basis of Presentation\n\nThe consolidated financial statements include the accounts of Applied Materials, Inc. and its subsidiaries (Applied or the Company) after elimination of intercompany balances and transactions. All references to a fiscal year apply to Applied's fiscal year which ends on the last Sunday in October. Fiscal 2020, 2019 and 2018 contained 52 weeks each. Each fiscal quarter of 2020, 2019 and 2018 contained 13 weeks.\n\nCertain prior year amounts have been reclassified to conform to current year presentation.\n\n## Use of Estimates\n\nThe preparation of financial statements in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America requires management to make judgments, estimates and assumptions that affect the amounts reported in the financial statements and accompanying notes. Actual results could differ materially from those estimates. On an ongoing basis, Applied evaluates its estimates, including those related to standalone selling price (SSP) related to revenue recognition, accounts receivable and sales allowances, fair values of financial instruments, inventories, intangible assets and goodwill, useful lives of intangible assets and property and equipment, fair values of share-based awards, and income taxes, among others. Applied bases its estimates on historical experience and on various other assumptions that are believed to be reasonable, the results of which form the basis for making judgments about the carrying values of assets and liabilities.\n\nAs of October 25, 2020, the COVID-19 pandemic and worldwide response remains fluid. As a result, many of Applied's estimates and assumptions are subject to increased judgment and volatility. These estimates may differ materially in future periods as the pandemic continues to evolve and additional information becomes available.\n\n## Cash Equivalents\n\nAll highly-liquid investments with a remaining maturity of three months or less at the time of purchase are considered to be cash equivalents. Cash equivalents consist primarily of investments in institutional money market funds.\n\n## Investments\n\nAll of Applied's investments, except equity investments held in privately-held companies, are classified as available-for-sale at the respective balance sheet dates. Investments classified as available-for-sale are measured and recorded at fair value with changes in fair value recorded in the accompanying Consolidated Statements of Operations. Interest earned on cash and investments, as well as realized gains and losses on sale of securities, are included in interest and other income, net in the Consolidated Statements of Operations.\n\nEquity investments without readily determinable fair value are measured at cost, less impairment, adjusted by observable price changes. Adjustments resulting from impairments and observable prices changes will be recorded in the Consolidated Statements of Operations.\n\n## Allowance for Doubtful Accounts\n\nApplied maintains an allowance for doubtful accounts for estimated losses resulting from the inability of its customers to make required payments. This allowance is based on historical experience, credit evaluations, specific customer collection history and any customer-specific issues Applied has identified. Changes in circumstances, such as an unexpected material adverse change in a major customer's ability to meet its financial obligation to Applied or its payment trends, may require Applied to further adjust its estimates of the recoverability of amounts due to Applied. Bad debt expense and any reversals are recorded in marketing and selling expenses in the Consolidated Statement of Operations.\n\n## Inventories\n\nInventories are stated at the lower of cost or net realizable value, with cost determined on a first-in, first-out (FIFO) basis. Applied adjusts inventory carrying value for estimated obsolescence equal to the difference between the cost of inventory and the estimated net realizable value based upon assumptions about future demand and market conditions. Applied fully writes down inventories and noncancelable purchase orders for inventory deemed obsolete. Applied performs periodic reviews of inventory items to identify excess inventories on hand by comparing on-hand balances to anticipated usage using recent historical activity as well as anticipated or forecasted demand. If estimates of customer demand diminish further or market conditions become less favorable than those projected by Applied, additional inventory adjustments may be required.\n\n69", + "recall": 0.9941002949852508, + "true_md": "## Note 1 Summary of Significant Accounting Policies\n\nTable of Contents\n\n## Principles of Consolidation and Basis of Presentation\n\n## Use of Estimates\n\n## Cash Equivalents\n\n## Investments\n\n## Allowance for Doubtful Accounts\n\n## Inventories\n\nThe consolidated financial statements include the accounts of Applied Materials, Inc. and its subsidiaries (Applied or the Company) after elimination of intercompany balances and transactions. All references to a fiscal year apply to Applied’s fiscal year which ends on the last Sunday in October. Fiscal 2020, 2019 and 2018 contained 52 weeks each. Each fiscal quarter of 2020, 2019 and 2018 contained 13 weeks.\n\nCertain prior year amounts have been reclassified to conform to current year presentation.\n\nThe preparation of financial statements in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America requires management to make judgments, estimates and assumptions that affect the amounts reported in the financial statements and accompanying notes. Actual results could differ materially from those estimates. On an ongoing basis, Applied evaluates its estimates, including those related to\n\nmanagement to make judgments, estimates and assumptions that affect the amounts reported in the financial statements and accompanying notes. Actual results could differ materially from those estimates. On an ongoing basis, Applied evaluates its estimates, including those related to standalone selling price (SSP) related to revenue recognition, accounts receivable and sales allowances, fair values of financial instruments, inventories, intangible assets and goodwill, useful lives of intangible assets and property and equipment, fair values of share-based awards, and income taxes, among others. Applied bases its estimates on historical experience and on various other assumptions that are believed to be reasonable, the results of which form the basis for making judgments about the carrying values of assets and liabilities.\n\nAs of October 25, 2020, the COVID-19 pandemic and worldwide response remains fluid. As a result, many of Applied’s estimates and assumptions are subject to increased judgment and volatility. These estimates may differ materially in future periods as the pandemic continues to evolve and additional information becomes available.\n\nAll highly-liquid investments with a remaining maturity of three months or less at the time of purchase are considered to be cash equivalents. Cash equivalents consist primarily of investments in institutional money market funds.\n\nAll highly-liquid investments with a remaining maturity of three months or less at the time of purchase are considered to be cash equivalents. Cash equivalents consist primarily of investments in institutional money market funds.\n\nAll of Applied’s investments, except equity investments held in privately-held companies, are classified as available-for-sale at the respective balance sheet dates. Investments classified as available-for-sale are measured and recorded at fair value with changes in fair value recorded in the accompanying Consolidated Statements of Operations. Interest earned on cash and investments, as well as realized gains and losses on sale of securities, are included in interest and other income, net in the Consolidated Statements of Operations.\n\nEquity investments without readily determinable fair value are measured at cost, less impairment, adjusted by observable price changes. Adjustments resulting from impairments and observable prices changes will be recorded in the Consolidated Statements of Operations.\n\nEquity investments without readily determinable fair value are measured at cost, less impairment, adjusted by observable price changes. Adjustments resulting from impairments and observable prices changes will be recorded in the Consolidated Statements of Operations.\n\nApplied maintains an allowance for doubtful accounts for estimated losses resulting from the inability of its customers to make required payments. This allowance is based on historical experience, credit evaluations, specific customer collection history and any customer-specific issues Applied has identified. Changes in circumstances, such as an unexpected material adverse change in a major customer’s ability to meet its financial obligation to Applied or its payment trends, may require Applied to further adjust its estimates of the recoverability of amounts due to Applied. Bad debt expense and any reversals are recorded in marketing and selling expenses in the Consolidated Statement of Operations.\n\nInventories are stated at the lower of cost or net realizable value, with cost determined on a first-in, first-out (FIFO) basis. Applied adjusts inventory carrying value for estimated obsolescence equal to the difference between the cost of inventory and the estimated net realizable value based upon assumptions about future demand and market conditions. Applied fully writes down inventories and noncancelable purchase orders for inventory deemed obsolete. Applied performs periodic reviews of inventory items to identify excess inventories on hand by comparing on-hand balances to anticipated usage using recent historical activity as well as anticipated or forecasted demand. If estimates of customer demand diminish further or market conditions become less favorable than those projected by Applied, additional inventory adjustments may be required.\n\n69" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9753342932353655, + "doc_id": "3feeb5dcdc9e8a8a96ac5243b871f7855d34a8a4f06eefe71facae4177a39c04", + "edit_distance": 0.432, + "f1_score": 0.9922480620155039, + "meteor": 0.8948743136920381, + "precision": 0.9948186528497409, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS OF AMERICAN AIRLINES, INC.\n\n- Includes limited partnerships that invest primarily in domestic private equity and private income opportunities. The pension plan's master trust does not have the right to redeem its limited partnership investment at its net asset value, but rather receives distributions as the underlying assets are liquidated. It is estimated that the underlying assets of these funds will be gradually liquidated over the next one to ten years. Additionally, the pension plan's master trust has future funding commitments of approximately $1.6 billion over the next ten years. (e)\n- Certain investments that are measured using net asset value per share (or its equivalent) as a practical expedient for fair value have not been classified in the fair value hierarchy. The fair value amounts presented in this table are intended to permit reconciliation of the fair value hierarchy to the amounts presented in the notes to the consolidated financial statements. (f)\n- Investment includes 34% in a common/collective trust investing in large market capitalization equity securities within the U.S., 30% in three common/collective trusts investing in emerging country equity securities, 21% in a common/collective trust investing in equity securities of companies located outside the U.S., 9% in a collective interest trust investing primarily in short-term securities, 5% in a common/collective trust investing in smaller market capitalization equity securities within the U.S. and 1% in Canadian segregated balanced value, income growth and diversified pooled funds. For some trusts, requests for withdrawals must meet specific requirements with advance notice of redemption preferred. (g)\n\nTable of Contents\n\nHoldings\tare\tdiversified\tas\tfollows:\t14%\tUnited\tKingdom,\t8%\tSwitzerland,\t8%\tIreland,\t7%\tJapan,\t7%\tFrance,\t6%\tSouth\tKorea,\t6%\tCanada,\t18% emerging\tmarkets\tand\tthe\tremaining\t26%\twith\tno\tconcentration\tgreater\tthan\t5%\tin\tany\tone\tcountry. (a)\n\nThere\tare\tno\tsignificant\tconcentrations\tof\tholdings\tby\tcompany\tor\tindustry. (b)\n\n188", + "recall": 0.9896907216494846, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS OF AMERICAN AIRLINES, INC.\n\nHoldings are diversified as follows: 14% United Kingdom, 8% Switzerland, 8% Ireland, 7% Japan, 7% France, 6% South Korea, 6% Canada, 18% emerging markets and the remaining 26% with no concentration greater than 5% in any one country. (a)\n\nThere are no significant concentrations of holdings by company or industry. (b)\n\n188\n\n- Includes limited partnerships that invest primarily in domestic private equity and private income opportunities. The pension plan’s master trust does not have the right to redeem its limited partnership investment at its net asset value, but rather receives distributions as the underlying assets are liquidated. It is estimated that the underlying assets of these funds will be gradually liquidated over the next one to ten years. Additionally, the pension plan’s master trust has future funding commitments of approximately $1.6 billion over the next ten years. (e)\n\n- Certain investments that are measured using net asset value per share (or its equivalent) as a practical expedient for fair value have not been classified in the fair value hierarchy. The fair value amounts presented in this table are intended to permit reconciliation of the fair value hierarchy to the amounts presented in the notes to the consolidated financial statements. (f)\n\n- Investment includes 34% in a common/collective trust investing in large market capitalization equity securities within the U.S., 30% in three common/collective trusts investing in emerging country equity securities, 21% in a common/collective trust investing in equity securities of companies located outside the U.S., 9% in a collective interest trust investing primarily in short-term securities, 5% in a common/collective trust investing in smaller market capitalization equity securities within the U.S. and 1% in Canadian segregated balanced value, income growth and diversified pooled funds. For some trusts, requests for withdrawals must meet specific requirements with advance notice of redemption preferred. (g)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.839587623092576, + "doc_id": "b27b04ac23ee5a09a24bb66450fcdccf352ab6c98c4ac80a481a1be70cab384f", + "edit_distance": 0.08333333333333333, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9897345692800238, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## SCHEDULE III\n\n## REAL ESTATE PROPERTIES AND ACCUMULATED DEPRECIATION\n\nDECEMBER 31, 2020 (In thousands, except footnotes)\n\n95", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## SCHEDULE III REAL ESTATE PROPERTIES AND ACCUMULATED DEPRECIATION DECEMBER 31, 2020 (In thousands, except footnotes)\n\n95" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.49964311713890636, + "doc_id": "6ce349f34e9d8e04095877f6f6c311c3a9467bbc8f4cbcbf0349329c150ac39f", + "edit_distance": 0.5256198347107438, + "f1_score": 0.984771573604061, + "meteor": 0.45544256120176385, + "precision": 0.9847715736040609, + "pred_md": "54\n\nCP\t2020\tANNUAL\tREPORT\n\n## Equipment Rents\n\nEquipment rents expense includes the cost associated with using other companies' freight cars, intermodal equipment, and locomotives, net of rental income received from other railways for the use of CP's equipment. Equipment rents expense was $142 million in 2020, an increase of $5 million, or 4%, from $137 million in 2019. This increase was primarily due to lower receipts for CP freight cars used by other railways and the unfavourable impact of the change in FX of $2 million, partially offset by lower usage of pooled freight cars as a result of lower volumes.\n\nEquipment rents expense was $137 million in 2019, an increase of $7 million, or 5%, from $130 million in 2018. This increase was primarily due to greater usage of pooled freight cars and the unfavourable impact of the change in FX of $3 million.\n\n## Depreciation and Amortization\n\nDepreciation and amortization expense represents the charge associated with the use of track and roadway, buildings, rolling stock, information systems, and other depreciable assets. Depreciation and amortization expense was $779 million for 2020, an increase of $73 million, or 10%, from $706 million in 2019. This increase was primarily due to:\n\n- · a higher asset base, as a result of the capital program spending in 2020;\n- · the impact of depreciation studies and other adjustments made in 2019; and\n- · the unfavourable impact of the change in FX of $2 million.\n\nDepreciation and amortization expense was $706 million for 2019, an increase of $10 million, or 1%, from $696 million in 2018. This increase was primarily due to a higher asset base, as a result of the capital program spending in 2019, and the unfavourable impact of the change in FX of $4 million, partially offset by the impact of depreciation studies and other adjustments.\n\n## Purchased Services and Other\n\nPurchased services and other expense encompasses a wide range of third-party costs, including contractor and consulting fees, locomotive and freight car repairs performed by third parties, property and other taxes, intermodal pickup and delivery services, casualty expense, expenses for joint facilities, and gains on land sales. Purchased services and other expense was $1,050 million in 2020, a decrease of $143 million, or 12%, from $1,193 million in 2019. This decrease was primarily due to:\n\n- · a gain of $68 million as a result of the remeasurement to fair value of the previously held equity investment in DRTP, reported in Other.\n- · lower expenses primarily due to reduced number and severity of casualty incidents, reported in Casualty;\n- · reduced business travel and event cost due to COVID-19, reported in primarily Support and facilities and Track and operations;\n- · a decrease in charges associated with contingencies of $10 million, reported in Other; and\n- · reduced variable expenses from lower volumes, reported in Intermodal and Equipment.\n\nThis decrease was partially offset by lower gains on land sales of $11 million in 2020, reported in Land sales and the unfavourable impact of the change in FX of $6 million.\n\nPurchased services and other expense was $1,193 million in 2019, an increase of $121 million, or 11%, from $1,072 million in 2018. This increase was primarily due to:\n\n- · an increase in number and severity of casualty incidents of $73 million (excluding FX), which were the result of difficult operating conditions due to weather in the first half of 2019, reported in Casualty;\n- · lower gains on land sales of $20 million mainly as a result of the sale of the Bass Lake railway line in 2018;\n- · the unfavourable impact of the change in FX of $11 million;\n- · an increase in legal fees, reported in Support and facilities;", + "recall": 0.9847715736040609, + "true_md": "CP 2020 ANNUAL REPORT 54\n\nEquipment Rents Equipment rents expense includes the cost associated with using other companies’ freight cars, intermodal equipment, and locomotives, net of rental income received from other railways for the use of CP’s equipment. Equipment rents expense was $142 million in 2020, an increase of $5 million, or 4%, from $137 million in 2019. This increase was primarily due to lower receipts for CP freight cars used by other railways and the unfavourable impact of the change in FX of $2 million, partially offset by lower usage of pooled freight cars as a result of lower volumes.\n\nEquipment rents expense was $137 million in 2019, an increase of $7 million, or 5%, from $130 million in 2018. This increase was primarily due to greater usage of pooled freight cars and the unfavourable impact of the change in FX of $3 million.\n\nDepreciation and Amortization Depreciation and amortization expense represents the charge associated with the use of track and roadway, buildings, rolling stock, information systems, and other depreciable assets. Depreciation and amortization expense was $779 million for 2020, an increase of $73 million, or 10%, from $706 million in 2019. This increase was primarily due to: • a higher asset base, as a result of the capital program spending in 2020;\n\nDepreciation and amortization expense was $706 million for 2019, an increase of $10 million, or 1%, from $696 million in 2018. This increase was primarily due to a higher asset base, as a result of the capital program spending in 2019, and the unfavourable impact of the change in FX of $4 million, partially offset by the impact of depreciation studies and other adjustments.\n\nPurchased services and other expense encompasses a wide range of third-party costs, including contractor and consulting fees, locomotive and freight car repairs performed by third parties, property and other taxes, intermodal pickup and delivery services, casualty expense, expenses for joint facilities, and gains on land sales. Purchased services and other expense was $1,050 million in 2020, a decrease of $143 million, or 12%, from $1,193 million in 2019. This decrease was primarily due to: • a gain of $68 million as a result of the remeasurement to fair value of the previously held equity investment in DRTP, reported in Other.\n\nThis decrease was partially offset by lower gains on land sales of $11 million in 2020, reported in Land sales and the unfavourable impact of the change in FX of $6 million.\n\nPurchased services and other expense was $1,193 million in 2019, an increase of $121 million, or 11%, from $1,072 million in 2018. This increase was primarily due to: • an increase in number and severity of casualty incidents of $73 million (excluding FX), which were the result of difficult operating conditions due to weather in\n\n## Depreciation and Amortization Depreciation and amortization expense represents the charge associated with the use of track and roadway, buildings, rolling stock, information systems, and\n\n## Equipment Rents Equipment rents expense includes the cost associated with using other companies’ freight cars, intermodal equipment, and locomotives, net of rental income\n\n## Purchased Services and Other\n\n- increase was primarily due to: • a higher asset base, as a result of the capital program spending in 2020; • the impact of depreciation studies and other adjustments made in 2019; and\n\n- • a higher asset base, as a result of the capital program spending in 2020; • the impact of depreciation studies and other adjustments made in 2019; and • the unfavourable impact of the change in FX of $2 million.\n\n- • the impact of depreciation studies and other adjustments made in 2019; and • the unfavourable impact of the change in FX of $2 million.\n\n- primarily due to: • a gain of $68 million as a result of the remeasurement to fair value of the previously held equity investment in DRTP, reported in Other. • lower expenses primarily due to reduced number and severity of casualty incidents, reported in Casualty;\n\n- • a gain of $68 million as a result of the remeasurement to fair value of the previously held equity investment in DRTP, reported in Other. • lower expenses primarily due to reduced number and severity of casualty incidents, reported in Casualty; • reduced business travel and event cost due to COVID-19, reported in primarily Support and facilities and Track and operations;\n\n- • lower expenses primarily due to reduced number and severity of casualty incidents, reported in Casualty; • reduced business travel and event cost due to COVID-19, reported in primarily Support and facilities and Track and operations; • a decrease in charges associated with contingencies of $10 million, reported in Other; and\n\n- • reduced business travel and event cost due to COVID-19, reported in primarily Support and facilities and Track and operations; • a decrease in charges associated with contingencies of $10 million, reported in Other; and • reduced variable expenses from lower volumes, reported in Intermodal and Equipment.\n\n- • a decrease in charges associated with contingencies of $10 million, reported in Other; and • reduced variable expenses from lower volumes, reported in Intermodal and Equipment.\n\n- due to: • an increase in number and severity of casualty incidents of $73 million (excluding FX), which were the result of difficult operating conditions due to weather in the first half of 2019, reported in Casualty; • lower gains on land sales of $20 million mainly as a result of the sale of the Bass Lake railway line in 2018;\n\n- the first half of 2019, reported in Casualty; • lower gains on land sales of $20 million mainly as a result of the sale of the Bass Lake railway line in 2018; • the unfavourable impact of the change in FX of $11 million;\n\n- • lower gains on land sales of $20 million mainly as a result of the sale of the Bass Lake railway line in 2018; • the unfavourable impact of the change in FX of $11 million; • an increase in legal fees, reported in Support and facilities;\n\n- • the unfavourable impact of the change in FX of $11 million; • an increase in legal fees, reported in Support and facilities;" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8359566749479015, + "doc_id": "75e0d1f04ea0df8b8fec1c969a46f74e13001c5c0e7d808875576e98c664ca18", + "edit_distance": 0.5550122249388753, + "f1_score": 0.9919354838709676, + "meteor": 0.7456594410175569, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "13\n\nCP\t2020\tANNUAL\tREPORT\n\n## Automotive\n\nThe Company's Automotive business represented approximately 12% of Merchandise revenues, and was 4% of total Freight revenues in 2020.\n\nThe following charts compare the percentage of the Company's Automotive freight revenues generated by movements of finished vehicles from Canadian, U.S., overseas, and Mexican origins, machinery, and parts and other in 2020, 2019 and 2018:\n\n## 2020 Automotive Revenues\n\n## 2019 Automotive Revenues\n\n## 2018 Automotive Revenues\n\n(12% of Merchandise Revenues; 4% of Freight Revenues)\n\n(12% of Merchandise Revenues; 5% of Freight Revenues)\n\n(12% of Merchandise Revenues; 5% of Freight Revenues)\n\nCP's Automotive portfolio consists of four finished vehicle traffic components: Canadian-produced vehicles that ship to the U.S. from Ontario production facilities; U.S.-produced vehicles that ship within the U.S. as well as cross border shipments to Canadian markets; vehicles from overseas that move through the Port of Vancouver to eastern Canadian markets; and Mexican-produced vehicles that ship to the U.S. and Canada. In addition to finished vehicles, CP ships machinery, pre-owned vehicles, and automotive parts. A comprehensive network of automotive compounds is utilized to facilitate final delivery of vehicles to dealers throughout Canada and in the U.S.\n\n## INTERMODAL\n\nThe Company's Intermodal business represented approximately 21% of total Freight revenues in 2020.\n\nThe following charts compare the percentage of the Company's Intermodal freight revenues generated from Canada, ports, cross border transportation, other international, and U.S. in 2020, 2019 and 2018:\n\n2020 Intermodal Revenues (21% of Freight Revenues)\n\n2020 Intermodal Revenues (21% of Freight Revenues)\n\n2019 Intermodal Revenues (21% of Freight Revenues)\n\n2018 Intermodal Revenues\n\n(22% of Freight Revenues)\n\nDomestic intermodal freight consists primarily of manufactured consumer products that are predominantly moved in 53-foot containers within North America. International intermodal freight moves in marine containers to and from ports and North American inland markets.", + "recall": 0.984, + "true_md": "13 CP 2020 ANNUAL REPORT\n\nThe following charts compare the percentage of the Company's Automotive freight revenues generated by movements of finished vehicles from Canadian, U.S., overseas, and Mexican origins, machinery, and parts and other in 2020, 2019 and 2018:\n\nAutomotive The Company’s Automotive business represented approximately 12% of Merchandise revenues, and was 4% of total Freight revenues in 2020.\n\nCP’s Automotive portfolio consists of four finished vehicle traffic components: Canadian-produced vehicles that ship to the U.S. from Ontario production facilities; U.S.-produced vehicles that ship within the U.S. as well as cross border shipments to Canadian markets; vehicles from overseas that move through the Port of Vancouver to eastern Canadian markets; and Mexican-produced vehicles that ship to the U.S. and Canada. In addition to finished vehicles, CP ships machinery, pre-owned vehicles, and automotive parts. A comprehensive network of automotive compounds is utilized to facilitate final delivery of vehicles to dealers throughout Canada and in the U.S.\n\nINTERMODAL The Company’s Intermodal business represented approximately 21% of total Freight revenues in 2020.\n\nThe following charts compare the percentage of the Company's Intermodal freight revenues generated from Canada, ports, cross border transportation, other international, and U.S. in 2020, 2019 and 2018:\n\nDomestic intermodal freight consists primarily of manufactured consumer products that are predominantly moved in 53-foot containers within North America. International intermodal freight moves in marine containers to and from ports and North American inland markets.\n\n## INTERMODAL The Company’s Intermodal business represented approximately 21% of total Freight revenues in 2020.\n\n## Automotive The Company’s Automotive business represented approximately 12% of Merchandise revenues, and was 4% of total Freight revenues in 2020.\n\n## 2018 Automotive Revenues\n\n## 2019 Automotive Revenues\n\n## 2020 Automotive Revenues\n\n## 2020 Intermodal Revenues\n\n## 2019 Intermodal Revenues\n\n## 2018 Intermodal Revenues\n\n(22% of Freight Revenues)\n\n(21% of Freight Revenues)\n\n(21% of Freight Revenues)\n\n(12% of Merchandise Revenues; 4% of Freight Revenues)\n\n(12% of Merchandise Revenues; 5% of Freight Revenues)\n\n(12% of Merchandise Revenues; 5% of Freight Revenues)" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.0, + "doc_id": "99a0c6bb2506d75417fbf17178f784b3ce16f66fe46f723c1376179066bd6a9b", + "edit_distance": 0.9915254237288136, + "f1_score": 0.034482758620689655, + "meteor": 0.004703668861712135, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Table of Contents", + "recall": 0.017543859649122806, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## Goodwill impairment - Interventional segment\n\n/s/ ERNST & YOUNG LLP\n\nWe have served as the Company's auditor since 1959.\n\nNew York, New York\n\nNovember 27, 2019\n\n49\n\nAt September 30, 2019, the Company’s goodwill assigned to the Interventional segment was $12.6 billion. As discussed in Note 1 of the consolidated financial statements, goodwill is tested for impairment at least annually at the reporting unit level using quantitative models.\n\nAuditing management’s annual goodwill impairment test was complex and highly judgmental due to the significant estimation required in determining the fair value of the reporting units. In particular, the fair value estimates were sensitive to significant assumptions such as the discount rate, revenue growth rate, operating margin, and terminal value, which are affected by expectations about future market or economic conditions.\n\nWe obtained an understanding, evaluated the design and tested the operating effectiveness of controls over the Company’s goodwill impairment review process. For example, we tested controls over management’s review of the inputs and assumptions to the goodwill impairment analysis.\n\nTo test the estimated fair value of the Company’s reporting units, our audit procedures included, among others, assessing fair value methodology, evaluating the prospective financial information used by the Company in its valuation analysis and involving our valuation specialists to assist in testing the significant assumptions discussed above. We compared the significant assumptions used by management to current industry and economic trends, historical financial results, and other relevant factors that would affect the significant assumptions. We assessed the historical accuracy of management’s estimates and performed sensitivity analyses of significant assumptions to evaluate the changes in the fair value of the reporting units. In addition, we tested the reconciliation of the fair value of the reporting units to the market capitalization of the Company.\n\nDescription of the Matter\n\nHow We Addressed the Matter in Our Audit" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9811280860354744, + "doc_id": "41c53aadb826d9e715b212499879de34d2c012ec7b41adcd6c6d01c2c591d0ec", + "edit_distance": 0.01971326164874552, + "f1_score": 0.9888143176733781, + "meteor": 0.9913918339772823, + "precision": 0.9910313901345291, + "pred_md": "## APPLIED MATERIALS, INC.\n\n## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS - (Continued)\n\nA valuation allowance is recorded to reflect the estimated amount of net deferred tax assets that may not be realized. Changes in the valuation allowance in each fiscal year were as follows:\n\nTable of Contents\n\nAt October 25, 2020, Applied has state research and development tax credit carryforwards of $327 million, including $309 million of credits that are carried over until exhausted and $15 million that are carried over for 15 years and begin to expire in fiscal 2031. It is more likely than not that all tax credit carryforwards, net of valuation allowance, will be utilized.\n\nApplied maintains liabilities for uncertain tax positions. These liabilities involve considerable judgment and estimation and are continuously monitored based on the best information available. Gross unrecognized tax benefits are classified as non-current income taxes payable or as a reduction in deferred tax assets. A reconciliation of the beginning and ending balances of gross unrecognized tax benefits in each fiscal year is as follows:\n\nThe increases in tax positions for prior years of $441 million for fiscal 2019 include the effect of adoption of Accounting Standard Update 2016-16 Income Tax (Topic 740): Intra-Entity Transfers of Assets Other Than Inventory . Tax expense for interest and penalties on unrecognized tax benefits for fiscal 2020, 2019 and 2018 was $24 million, $24 million and $12 million, respectively. The income tax liability for interest and penalties for fiscal 2020, 2019 and 2018 was $74 million, $50 million and $26 million, respectively, and was classified as non-current income taxes payable.\n\nIncluded in the balance of unrecognized tax benefits for fiscal 2020, 2019 and 2018 are $410 million, $758 million, and $294 million, respectively, of tax benefits that, if recognized, would affect the effective tax rate.\n\nIn fiscal 2020, Applied settled tax audits in Singapore related to fiscal 2012 through fiscal 2019 for additional tax payments of $72 million and a reduction of future tax deductions of $374 million. The tax expense impact of these settlements was $26 million. In fiscal 2019, Applied paid an immaterial amount as a result of settlements with tax authorities. In fiscal 2018, Applied paid $158 million, including interest and penalties, as a result of a settlement in Israel for fiscal 2011 through fiscal 2015 resulting in the recognition of a tax expense of $6 million.\n\nApplied's tax returns remain subject to examination by taxing authorities. These include U.S. returns for fiscal 2015 and later years, and foreign tax returns for fiscal 2010 and later years.\n\nThe timing of the resolution of income tax examinations, as well as the amounts and timing of various tax payments that may be part of the settlement process, is highly uncertain. This could cause fluctuations in Applied's financial condition and results of operations. Applied continues to have ongoing negotiations with various taxing authorities throughout the year.\n\n101", + "recall": 0.9866071428571429, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## APPLIED MATERIALS, INC.\n\n## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS — (Continued)\n\nA valuation allowance is recorded to reflect the estimated amount of net deferred tax assets that may not be realized. Changes in the valuation allowance in each fiscal year were as follows:\n\nAt October 25, 2020, Applied has state research and development tax credit carryforwards of $327 million, including $309 million of credits that are carried over until exhausted and $15 million that are carried over for 15 years and begin to expire in fiscal 2031. It is more likely than not that all tax credit carryforwards, net of valuation allowance, will be utilized.\n\nApplied maintains liabilities for uncertain tax positions. These liabilities involve considerable judgment and estimation and are continuously monitored based on the best information available. Gross unrecognized tax benefits are classified as non-current income taxes payable or as a reduction in deferred tax assets. A reconciliation of the beginning and ending balances of gross unrecognized tax benefits in each fiscal year is as follows: \n\nThe increases in tax positions for prior years of $441 million for fiscal 2019 include the effect of adoption of Accounting Standard Update 2016-16 Income Tax (Topic 740): Intra-Entity Transfers of Assets Other Than Inventory . Tax expense for interest and penalties on unrecognized tax benefits for fiscal 2020, 2019 and 2018 was $24 million, $24 million and $12 million, respectively. The income tax liability for interest and penalties for fiscal 2020, 2019 and 2018 was $74 million, $50 million and $26 million, respectively, and was classified as non-current income taxes payable.\n\nIncluded in the balance of unrecognized tax benefits for fiscal 2020, 2019 and 2018 are $410 million, $758 million, and $294 million, respectively, of tax benefits that, if recognized, would affect the effective tax rate.\n\nIn fiscal 2020, Applied settled tax audits in Singapore related to fiscal 2012 through fiscal 2019 for additional tax payments of $72 million and a reduction of future tax deductions of $374 million. The tax expense impact of these settlements was $26 million. In fiscal 2019, Applied paid an immaterial amount as a result of settlements with tax authorities. In fiscal 2018, Applied paid $158 million, including interest and penalties, as a result of a settlement in Israel for fiscal 2011 through fiscal 2015 resulting in the recognition of a tax expense of $6 million.\n\nApplied’s tax returns remain subject to examination by taxing authorities. These include U.S. returns for fiscal 2015 and later years, and foreign tax returns for fiscal 2010 and later years.\n\nThe timing of the resolution of income tax examinations, as well as the amounts and timing of various tax payments that may be part of the settlement process, is highly uncertain. This could cause fluctuations in Applied’s financial condition and results of operations. Applied continues to have ongoing negotiations with various taxing authorities throughout the year.\n\n101" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "206dfaa9808d3635beba3f070978a51b5a38b7da5479c9ad2803baeb2c567eec", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9998779296875, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Amounts may not add due to rounding.\n\nSee notes to consolidated financial statements.\n\n53", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Amounts may not add due to rounding. See notes to consolidated financial statements. 53" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9872168462705545, + "doc_id": "f1787331401d0b91d42c530120854109816eef3c1dcc6bca06d9a7717ac8a5c8", + "edit_distance": 0.031476997578692496, + "f1_score": 0.9943502824858755, + "meteor": 0.997030285666849, + "precision": 0.9962264150943396, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS OF AMERICAN AIRLINES GROUP INC .\n\nIn addition, following certain corporate events that occur prior to the maturity date or upon AAG's issuance of a notice of redemption, AAG will increase the conversion rate for a holder who elects to convert its Convertible Notes in connection with such corporate event or during the related redemption period in certain circumstances by a specified number of shares of AAG common stock as described in the Convertible Notes Indenture.\n\nAAG will not have the right to redeem the Convertible Notes prior to July 5, 2023. On or after July 5, 2023 and on or before the 20th scheduled trading day immediately before the maturity date, AAG may redeem the Convertible Notes, in whole or in part, if the last reported sale price of AAG common stock has been at least 130% of the conversion price then in effect on (1) each of at least 20 trading days (whether or not consecutive) during the 30 consecutive trading days ending on, and including, the trading day immediately before the date AAG sends the related redemption notice; and (2) the trading day immediately before the date AAG sends such notice. In the case of any optional redemption, AAG will redeem the Convertible Notes at a redemption price equal to 100% of the principal amount of such Convertible Notes to be redeemed, plus accrued and unpaid interest to, but excluding, the redemption date.\n\nIf AAG undergoes a fundamental change described in the Convertible Notes Indenture prior to the maturity date of the Convertible Notes, except as described in the Convertible Notes Indenture, holders of the Convertible Notes may require AAG to repurchase for cash all or part of their Convertible Notes at a repurchase price equal to 100% of the principal amount of the Convertible Notes to be repurchased, plus accrued and unpaid interest to, but excluding, the fundamental change repurchase date.\n\nThe Convertible Notes Indenture provides for customary terms and covenants, including that upon certain events of default, either the Convertible Notes Trustee or the holders of not less than 25% in aggregate principal amount of the Convertible Notes then outstanding may declare the unpaid principal amount of the Convertible Notes and accrued and unpaid interest, if any, thereon immediately due and payable. In the case of certain events of bankruptcy, insolvency or reorganization, the principal amount of the Convertible Notes together with accrued and unpaid interest thereon, if any, will automatically become and be immediately due and payable.\n\nAs the Convertible Notes can be settled in cash upon conversion, for accounting purposes, the Convertible Notes were bifurcated into a debt component that was recorded at fair value and an equity component. The following table details the debt and equity components recognized related to the Convertible Notes as of December 31, 2020 (in millions):\n\nTable of Contents\n\nThe effective interest rate on the liability component approximates 20%. We recognized $61 million of interest expense in 2020 including $28 million of non-cash amortization of the debt discount and $33 million of contractual coupon interest. The remaining period over which the unamortized debt discount will be recognized as non-cash interest expense is five years as follows: $63 million in 2021, $77 million in 2022, $95 million in 2023, $116 million in 2024 and $66 million in 2025. As previously discussed in Note 1(c), as of January 1, 2021, we early adopted the New Convertible Debt Standard. Accordingly, our unamortized debt discount as of January 1, 2021 was reduced by $389 million and the adjusted non-cash interest expense to be recognized over the next five years is as follows: $5 million in 2021, $6 million in 2022, $6 million in 2023, $7 million in 2024 and $4 million in 2025.\n\nAt December 31, 2020, the if-converted value of the Convertible Notes did not exceed the principal amount.\n\n## (i) Unsecured Senior Notes\n\n## 5.000% Senior Notes\n\nIn May 2019, AAG issued $750 million aggregate principal amount of 5.000% senior notes due 2022 (the 5.000% Senior Notes). The 5.000% Senior Notes bear interest at a rate of 5.000% per annum, payable semi-annually in arrears on June 1 and December 1 of each year, which began on December 1, 2019. The 5.000% Senior Notes mature in June 2022.\n\n120", + "recall": 0.9924812030075187, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS OF AMERICAN AIRLINES GROUP INC .\n\nIn addition, following certain corporate events that occur prior to the maturity date or upon AAG’s issuance of a notice of redemption, AAG will increase the conversion rate for a holder who elects to convert its Convertible Notes in connection with such corporate event or during the related redemption period in certain circumstances by a specified number of shares of AAG common stock as described in the Convertible Notes Indenture.\n\nAAG will not have the right to redeem the Convertible Notes prior to July 5, 2023. On or after July 5, 2023 and on or before the 20th scheduled trading day immediately before the maturity date, AAG may redeem the Convertible Notes, in whole or in part, if the last reported sale price of AAG common stock has been at least 130% of the conversion price then in effect on (1) each of at least 20 trading days (whether or not consecutive) during the 30 consecutive trading days ending on, and including, the trading day immediately before the date AAG sends the related redemption notice; and (2) the trading day immediately before the date AAG sends such notice. In the case of any optional redemption, AAG will redeem the Convertible Notes at a redemption price equal to 100% of the principal amount of such Convertible Notes to be redeemed, plus accrued and unpaid interest to, but excluding, the redemption date.\n\nIf AAG undergoes a fundamental change described in the Convertible Notes Indenture prior to the maturity date of the Convertible Notes, except as described in the Convertible Notes Indenture, holders of the Convertible Notes may require AAG to repurchase for cash all or part of their Convertible Notes at a repurchase price equal to 100% of the principal amount of the Convertible Notes to be repurchased, plus accrued and unpaid interest to, but excluding, the fundamental change repurchase date.\n\nThe Convertible Notes Indenture provides for customary terms and covenants, including that upon certain events of default, either the Convertible Notes Trustee or the holders of not less than 25% in aggregate principal amount of the Convertible Notes then outstanding may declare the unpaid principal amount of the Convertible Notes and accrued and unpaid interest, if any, thereon immediately due and payable. In the case of certain events of bankruptcy, insolvency or reorganization, the principal amount of the Convertible Notes together with accrued and unpaid interest thereon, if any, will automatically become and be immediately due and payable.\n\nAs the Convertible Notes can be settled in cash upon conversion, for accounting purposes, the Convertible Notes were bifurcated into a debt component that was recorded at fair value and an equity component. The following table details the debt and equity components recognized related to the Convertible Notes as of December 31, 2020 (in millions):\n\nThe effective interest rate on the liability component approximates 20%. We recognized $61 million of interest expense in 2020 including $28 million of non-cash amortization of the debt discount and $33 million of contractual coupon interest. The remaining period over which the unamortized debt discount will be recognized as non-cash interest expense is five years as follows: $63 million in 2021, $77 million in 2022, $95 million in 2023, $116 million in 2024 and $66 million in 2025. As previously discussed in Note 1(c), as of January 1, 2021, we early adopted the New Convertible Debt Standard. Accordingly, our unamortized debt discount as of January 1, 2021 was reduced by $389 million and the adjusted non-cash interest expense to be recognized over the next five years is as follows: $5 million in 2021, $6 million in 2022, $6 million in 2023, $7 million in 2024 and $4 million in 2025.\n\nAt December 31, 2020, the if-converted value of the Convertible Notes did not exceed the principal amount.\n\n5.000% Senior Notes\n\nIn May 2019, AAG issued $750 million aggregate principal amount of 5.000% senior notes due 2022 (the 5.000% Senior Notes). The 5.000% Senior Notes bear interest at a rate of 5.000% per annum, payable semi-annually in arrears on June 1 and December 1 of each year, which began on December 1, 2019. The 5.000% Senior Notes mature in June 2022.\n\n## (i) Unsecured Senior Notes\n\n120" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6009248846931547, + "doc_id": "9b9a445cb97bfac65b51c4ef11ebea580559228e49e4a652fd35cd0f65b02492", + "edit_distance": 0.4209486166007905, + "f1_score": 0.982078853046595, + "meteor": 0.6274210377061742, + "precision": 0.9785714285714285, + "pred_md": "Table\tof\tContents\n\n(Mark one)\n\n☑\n\nANNUAL\tREPORT\tPURSUANT\tTO\tSECTION\t13\tOR\t15(d)\tOF\tTHE\tSECURITIES\tEXCHANGE\tACT\tOF\t1934\n\nFor\tthe\tfiscal\tyear\tended\tOctober\t25,\t2020\n\nor\n\n☐\n\nTRANSITION\tREPORT\tPURSUANT\tTO\tSECTION\t13\tOR\t15(d)\tOF\tTHE\tSECURITIES\tEXCHANGE\tACT\tOF\t1934\n\nFor\tthe\ttransition\tperiod\tfrom\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\tto\n\nCommission\tfile\tnumber\t000-06920\n\n## Applied\tMaterials,\tInc.\n\n(Exact\tname\tof\tregistrant\tas\tspecified\tin\tits\tcharter)\n\nDelaware\n\n94-1655526\n\n(State\tor\tother\tjurisdiction\tof incorporation\tor\torganization)\n\n(I.R.S.\tEmployer Identification\tNo.)\n\n## 3050\tBowers\tAvenue P.O.\tBox\t58039\n\n## Santa\tClara,\tCalifornia\t95052-8039\n\n(Address\tof\tprincipal\texecutive\toffices)\n\n## (408)\t727-5555\n\n(Registrant's\ttelephone\tnumber,\tincluding\tarea\tcode)\n\nSecurities\tregistered\tpursuant\tto\tSection\t12(b)\tof\tthe\tAct:\n\nTitle\tof\tEach\tClass\n\nTrading\tSymbol\n\nName\tof\tEach\tExchange\ton\tWhich\tRegistered The\tNASDAQ\tStock\tMarket\tLLC\n\nCommon\tStock,\tpar\tvalue\t$.01\tper\tshare\n\nAMAT\n\n## Securities\tregistered\tpursuant\tto\tSection\t12(g)\tof\tthe\tAct:\tNone\n\nIndicate\tby\tcheck\tmark\tif\tthe\tregistrant\tis\ta\twell-known\tseasoned\tissuer,\tas\tdefined\tin\tRule\t405\tof\tthe\tSecurities\tAct.\t\t\t\tYes\t\t☑\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\tNo\t\t☐\n\nIndicate\tby\tcheck\tmark\tif\tthe\tregistrant\tis\tnot\trequired\tto\tfile\treports\tpursuant\tto\tSection\t13\tor\tSection\t15(d)\tof\tthe\tAct.\t\t\t\tYes\t\t☐\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\tNo\t\t☑\n\nIndicate\tby\tcheck\tmark\twhether\tthe\tregistrant\t(1)\thas\tfiled\tall\treports\trequired\tto\tbe\tfiled\tby\tSection\t13\tor\t15(d)\tof\tthe\tSecurities\tExchange\tAct of\t1934\tduring\tthe\tpreceding\t12\tmonths\t(or\tfor\tsuch\tshorter\tperiod\tthat\tthe\tregistrant\twas\trequired\tto\tfile\tsuch\treports),\tand\t(2)\thas\tbeen\tsubject\tto such\tfiling\trequirements\tfor\tthe\tpast\t90\tdays.\t\t\t\tYes\t\t☑\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\tNo\t\t☐\n\nIndicate\tby\tcheck\tmark\twhether\tthe\tregistrant\thas\tsubmitted\telectronically\tevery\tInteractive\tData\tFile\trequired\tto\tbe\tsubmitted\tpursuant\tto\tRule 405\tof\tRegulation\tS-T\t(§232.405\tof\tthis\tchapter)\tduring\tthe\tpreceding\t12\tmonths\t(or\tfor\tsuch\tshorter\tperiod\tthat\tthe\tregistrant\twas\trequired\tto submit).\t\t\t\tYes\t\t☑\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\tNo\t\t☐\n\nIndicate\tby\tcheck\tmark\twhether\tthe\tregistrant\tis\ta\tlarge\taccelerated\tfiler,\tan\taccelerated\tfiler,\ta\tnon-accelerated\tfiler,\ta\tsmaller\treporting company\tor\tan\temerging\tgrowth\tcompany.\tSee\tdefinitions\tof\t'large\taccelerated\tfiler,'\t'accelerated\tfiler,'\t'smaller\treporting\tcompany'\tand 'emerging\tgrowth\tcompany'\tin\tRule\t12b-2\tof\tthe\tExchange\tAct.\n\nLarge\taccelerated\tfiler\n\n☑ Accelerated\tfiler\n\n☐\n\nNon-accelerated\tfiler\n\n☐ Smaller\treporting\tcompany\n\n☐\n\nEmerging\tgrowth\tcompany\n\n☐\n\nIf\tan\temerging\tgrowth\tcompany,\tindicate\tby\tcheck\tmark\tif\tthe\tregistrant\thas\telected\tnot\tto\tuse\tthe\textended\ttransition\tperiod\tfor\tcomplying\twith\tany new\tor\trevised\tfinancial\taccounting\tstandards\tprovided\tpursuant\tto\tSection\t13(a)\tof\tthe\tExchange\tAct.\t☐\n\nIndicate\tby\tcheck\tmark\twhether\tthe\tregistrant\thas\tfiled\ta\treport\ton\tand\tattestation\tto\tits\tmanagement's\tassessment\tof\tthe\teffectiveness\tof\tits internal\tcontrol\tover\tfinancial\treporting\tunder\tSection\t404(b)\tof\tthe\tSarbanes-Oxley\tAct\t(15\tU.S.C.7262(b))\tby\tthe\tregistered\tpublic\taccounting\tfirm that\tprepared\tor\tissued\tits\taudit\treport.\t☑\n\nIndicate\tby\tcheck\tmark\twhether\tthe\tregistrant\tis\ta\tshell\tcompany\t(as\tdefined\tin\tRule\t12b-2\tof\tthe\tAct).\t\t\t\tYes\t\t☐\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\tNo\t\t☑\n\nAggregate\tmarket\tvalue\tof\tthe\tvoting\tstock\theld\tby\tnon-affiliates\tof\tthe\tregistrant\tas\tof\tApril\t26,\t2020,\tbased\tupon\tthe\tclosing\tsale\tprice\treported by\tthe\tNASDAQ\tGlobal\tSelect\tMarket\ton\tthat\tdate:\t$47,228,292,437\n\nNumber\tof\tshares\toutstanding\tof\tthe\tregistrant's\tCommon\tStock,\t$.01\tpar\tvalue,\tas\tof\tDecember\t4,\t2020:\t914,344,189\n\n## DOCUMENTS\tINCORPORATED\tBY\tREFERENCE:\n\nPortions\tof\tPart\tIII\twill\tbe\tprovided\tin\taccordance\twith\tInstruction\tG(3)\tto\tForm\t10-K\tno\tlater\tthan\tFebruary\t22,\t2021.\n\n## UNITED STATES SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION Washington, D.C. 20549 Form 10-K", + "recall": 0.9856115107913669, + "true_md": "# UNITED STATES SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION Washington, D.C. 20549\n\n# Washington, D.C. 20549 Form 10-K\n\nUNITED STATES SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION Washington, D.C. 20549 Form 10-K\n\n(Mark one)\n\n☑ ANNUAL REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934\n\n☐ TRANSITION REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934\n\nor\n\n# Commission file number 000-06920 Applied Materials, Inc.\n\nCommission file number 000-06920 Applied Materials, Inc.\n\nFor the transition period from to\n\n(Exact name of registrant as specified in its charter)\n\nDelaware\n\n94-1655526\n\n(I.R.S. Employer Identification No.)\n\n(State or other jurisdiction of incorporation or organization)\n\n3050 Bowers Avenue\n\nP.O. Box 58039\n\nSanta Clara, California 95052-8039\n\n(Address of principal executive offices)\n\n(408) 727-5555\n\n# For the fiscal year ended October 25, 2020\n\n(Registrant’s telephone number, including area code) Securities registered pursuant to Section 12(b) of the Act:\n\n(Registrant’s telephone number, including area code) Securities registered pursuant to Section 12(b) of the Act:\n\nTitle of Each Class Common Stock, par value $.01 per share\n\nTitle of Each Class Common Stock, par value $.01 per share\n\nTrading Symbol AMAT\n\nTrading Symbol AMAT\n\nName of Each Exchange on Which Registered The NASDAQ Stock Market LLC\n\nName of Each Exchange on Which Registered The NASDAQ Stock Market LLC\n\nIndicate by check mark if the registrant is a well-known seasoned issuer, as defined in Rule 405 of the Securities Act. Yes ☑ No ☐ Indicate by check mark if the registrant is not required to file reports pursuant to Section 13 or Section 15(d) of the Act. Yes ☐ No ☑ Indicate by check mark whether the registrant (1) has filed all reports required to be filed by Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act\n\nIndicate by check mark if the registrant is a well-known seasoned issuer, as defined in Rule 405 of the Securities Act. Yes ☑ No ☐ Indicate by check mark if the registrant is not required to file reports pursuant to Section 13 or Section 15(d) of the Act. Yes ☐ No\n\nSecurities registered pursuant to Section 12(g) of the Act: None\n\nIndicate by check mark if the registrant is not required to file reports pursuant to Section 13 or Section 15(d) of the Act. Yes ☐ No ☑ Indicate by check mark whether the registrant (1) has filed all reports required to be filed by Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to file such reports), and (2) has been subject to such filing requirements for the past 90 days. Yes ☑ No ☐ Indicate by check mark whether the registrant has submitted electronically every Interactive Data File required to be submitted pursuant to Rule\n\nsuch filing requirements for the past 90 days. Yes ☑ No ☐ Indicate by check mark whether the registrant has submitted electronically every Interactive Data File required to be submitted pursuant to Rule 405 of Regulation S-T (§232.405 of this chapter) during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to submit). Yes ☑ No ☐ Indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a large accelerated filer, an accelerated filer, a non-accelerated filer, a smaller reporting\n\nsubmit). Yes ☑ No ☐ Indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a large accelerated filer, an accelerated filer, a non-accelerated filer, a smaller reporting company or an emerging growth company. See definitions of “large accelerated filer,” “accelerated filer,” “smaller reporting company” and “emerging growth company” in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act. \n\nLarge accelerated filer ☑\n\nNon-accelerated filer ☐\n\nSmaller reporting company ☐\n\nAccelerated filer ☐\n\nEmerging growth company ☐\n\nIf an emerging growth company, indicate by check mark if the registrant has elected not to use the extended transition period for complying with any new or revised financial accounting standards provided pursuant to Section 13(a) of the Exchange Act. ☐ Indicate by check mark whether the registrant has filed a report on and attestation to its management’s assessment of the effectiveness of its\n\nnew or revised financial accounting standards provided pursuant to Section 13(a) of the Exchange Act. ☐ Indicate by check mark whether the registrant has filed a report on and attestation to its management’s assessment of the effectiveness of its internal control over financial reporting under Section 404(b) of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act (15 U.S.C.7262(b)) by the registered public accounting firm that prepared or issued its audit report. ☑\n\nIndicate by check mark whether the registrant is a shell company (as defined in Rule 12b-2 of the Act). Yes ☐ No ☑\n\nAggregate market value of the voting stock held by non-affiliates of the registrant as of April 26, 2020, based upon the closing sale price reported by the NASDAQ Global Select Market on that date: $47,228,292,437\n\nNumber of shares outstanding of the registrant’s Common Stock, $.01 par value, as of December 4, 2020: 914,344,189\n\nPortions of Part III will be provided in accordance with Instruction G(3) to Form 10-K no later than February 22, 2021.\n\n## DOCUMENTS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE:\n\nTable of Contents" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9768871324656431, + "doc_id": "f299772a77290fcca8fc1dc21967df242e83775c4a1e3b4a4e369162b6a2ba51", + "edit_distance": 0.06699751861042183, + "f1_score": 0.9878419452887538, + "meteor": 0.9817498669090168, + "precision": 0.9878419452887538, + "pred_md": "## Table of Contents\n\nagencies may also impose new requirements regarding registration, labeling or prohibited materials that require us to modify or re-register products already on the market or otherwise impact our ability to market our products in those countries.\n\nFollowing the introduction of a product, these agencies also periodically review our manufacturing processes and product performance. Our failure to comply with the applicable good manufacturing practices, adverse event reporting, and other requirements of these agencies could delay or prevent the production, marketing or sale of our products and result in fines, delays or suspensions of regulatory clearances, warning letters or consent decrees, closure of manufacturing sites, import bans, seizures or recalls of products and damage to our reputation. More stringent oversight by the FDA and other agencies in recent years has resulted in increased enforcement activity, which increases our compliance risk.\n\nWe are operating under a consent decree with the FDA, entered into by CareFusion in 2007 and amended in 2009, that affects our Alaris™ infusion pump business in the United States. We are also currently operating under a warning letter issued by the FDA. For more information regarding the consent decree and warning letter, see 'Regulation' under Item 1. Business.\n\nIn March 2019, the FDA issued a letter to healthcare professionals regarding the use of paclitaxel-coated devices in the treatment of peripheral artery disease, advising clinicians to consider using alternative treatments. The FDA letter resulted in decreased sales of BD's drug-coated balloons in fiscal year 2019 compared to the prior year. The extent and duration of the impact from the FDA letter beyond fiscal year 2019, and the likelihood of FDA approval of new drug-coated devices, is difficult to predict, and no assurance can be given that it will not have a material impact on our results of operations in future periods.\n\nIn addition, the European Union ('EU') has adopted the EU Medical Device Regulation (the 'EU MDR') and the In Vitro Diagnostic Regulation (the 'EU IVDR'), each of which impose stricter requirements for the marketing and sale of medical devices, including in the area of clinical evaluation requirements, quality systems and post-market surveillance. Manufacturers of currently approved medical devices will have until May 2020 to meet the requirements of the EU MDR and until May 2022 to meet the EU IVDR. Complying with these regulations will require us to incur significant expenditures. Failure to meet these requirements could adversely impact our business in the EU and other regions that tie their product registrations to EU requirements.\n\nWe are also subject to complex and frequently changing laws in the U.S. and elsewhere regarding privacy and the collection, use, storage and protection of personal information, and noncompliance with these laws could result in substantial fines or litigation. For instance, the EU has also adopted the General Data Protection Regulation (\"GDPR\"), which will apply to personal data involved in our operations in the EU or products and services that we offer to EU users involving personal data. The GDPR creates a range of new compliance obligations that could require us to change our existing business practices policies, and significantly increases financial penalties for noncompliance.\n\n## Defects or quality issues associated with our products could adversely affect the results of our operations.\n\nThe design, manufacture and marketing of medical devices involve certain inherent risks. Manufacturing or design defects, component failures, unapproved or improper use of our products, or inadequate disclosure of risks or other information relating to the use of our products can lead to injury or other serious adverse events. These events could lead to recalls or safety alerts relating to our products (either voluntary or as required by the FDA or similar governmental authorities in other countries), and could result, in certain cases, in the removal of a product from the market. A recall could result in significant costs and lost sales and customers, enforcement actions and/or investigations by state and federal governments or other enforcement bodies, as well as negative publicity and damage to our reputation that could reduce future demand for our products. Personal injuries relating to the use of our products can also result in significant product liability claims being brought against us. In some circumstances, such adverse events could also cause delays in regulatory approval of new products or the imposition of post-market approval requirements.\n\n16", + "recall": 0.9878419452887538, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\nagencies may also impose new requirements regarding registration, labeling or prohibited materials that require us to modify or re-register products already on the market or otherwise impact our ability to market our products in those countries.\n\nFollowing the introduction of a product, these agencies also periodically review our manufacturing processes and product performance. Our failure to comply with the applicable good manufacturing practices, adverse event reporting, and other requirements of these agencies could delay or prevent the production, marketing or sale of our products and result in fines, delays or suspensions of regulatory clearances, warning letters or consent decrees, closure of manufacturing sites, import bans, seizures or recalls of products and damage to our reputation. More stringent oversight by the FDA and other agencies in recent years has resulted in increased enforcement activity, which increases our compliance risk.\n\nWe are operating under a consent decree with the FDA, entered into by CareFusion in 2007 and amended in 2009, that affects our Alaris™ infusion pump business in the United States. We are also currently operating under a warning letter issued by the FDA. For more information regarding the consent decree and warning letter, see “Regulation” under Item 1. Business.\n\nIn March 2019, the FDA issued a letter to healthcare professionals regarding the use of paclitaxel-coated devices in the treatment of peripheral artery disease, advising clinicians to consider using alternative treatments. The FDA letter resulted in decreased sales of BD’s drug-coated balloons in fiscal year 2019 compared to the prior year. The extent and duration of the impact from the FDA letter beyond fiscal year 2019, and the likelihood of FDA approval of new drug-coated devices, is difficult to predict, and no assurance can be given that it will not have a material impact on our results of operations in future periods.\n\nIn addition, the European Union (“EU”) has adopted the EU Medical Device Regulation (the “EU MDR”) and the In Vitro Diagnostic Regulation (the “EU IVDR”), each of which impose stricter requirements for the marketing and sale of medical devices, including in the area of clinical evaluation requirements, quality systems and post-market surveillance. Manufacturers of currently approved medical devices will have until May 2020 to meet the requirements of the EU MDR and until May 2022 to meet the EU IVDR. Complying with these regulations will require us to incur significant expenditures. Failure to meet these requirements could adversely impact our business in the EU and other regions that tie their product registrations to EU requirements.\n\nWe are also subject to complex and frequently changing laws in the U.S. and elsewhere regarding privacy and the collection, use, storage and protection of personal information, and noncompliance with these laws could result in substantial fines or litigation. For instance, the EU has also adopted the General Data Protection Regulation (\"GDPR\"), which will apply to personal data involved in our operations in the EU or products and services that we offer to EU users involving personal data. The GDPR creates a range of new compliance obligations that could require us to change our existing business practices policies, and significantly increases financial penalties for noncompliance.\n\nThe design, manufacture and marketing of medical devices involve certain inherent risks. Manufacturing or design defects, component failures, unapproved or improper use of our products, or inadequate disclosure of risks or other information relating to the use of our products can lead to injury or other serious adverse events. These events could lead to recalls or safety alerts relating to our products (either voluntary or as required by the FDA or similar governmental authorities in other countries), and could result, in certain cases, in the removal of a product from the market. A recall could result in significant costs and lost sales and customers, enforcement actions and/or investigations by state and federal governments or other enforcement bodies, as well as negative publicity and damage to our reputation that could reduce future demand for our products. Personal injuries relating to the use of our products can also result in significant product liability claims being brought against us. In some circumstances, such adverse events could also cause delays in regulatory approval of new products or the imposition of post-market approval requirements.\n\n## Defects or quality issues associated with our products could adversely affect the results of our operations.\n\n16" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9747603046997061, + "doc_id": "1fb12a97e91c747c7479f10bf507a1d3c7a9d51f97ac65f3560c3d83e1ac1c8b", + "edit_distance": 0.3978779840848806, + "f1_score": 0.9972899728997292, + "meteor": 0.9369815638459977, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## 23. QUARTERLY FINANCIAL DATA (UNAUDITED)\n\nThe following presents a summary of the unaudited quarterly data for 2020 and 2019 (amounts in millions, except per share data):\n\n2020\n\n\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\n\n(1) Earnings\tper\tshare\tis\tcomputed\tindependently\tfor\teach\tof\tthe\tquarters\tpresented.\tThe\tsum\tof\tthe\tquarters\tmay\tnot\tequal\tthe\ttotal\tyear\tamount due\tto\tthe\timpact\tof\tchanges\tin\tweighted\taverage\tquarterly\tshares\toutstanding.\n\nWe have revised our consolidated financial statements for the annual periods 2019 and 2018, herein to correct errors, as further discussed in Note 2 to the consolidated financial statements. We previously revised our consolidated financial statements as of and for the quarterly period ended September 30, 2019 in connection with filing of the Form 10-Q for the period ended September 30, 2020 as filed on November 9, 2020. Other periods above have been derived from our Quarterly Reports on Form 10-Q filed for the respective period, in each case adjusted to reflect the impact of the revisions as described in Note 2 of this Annual Report. The consolidated financial statements for the quarterly periods ended March 31, 2020 and June 30, 2020 will be revised in connection with the filing of each respective period in 2021.\n\n## ITEM 9. CHANGES IN AND DISAGREEMENTS WITH ACCOUNTANTS ON ACCOUNTING AND FINANCIAL DISCLOSURE\n\nNone.\n\n## ITEM 9A. CONTROLS AND PROCEDURES\n\n## Disclosure Controls and Procedures\n\nOur disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e) under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended (the \"Exchange Act\") are designed to provide reasonable assurance that the information, which we are required to disclose in the reports that we file or submit under the Exchange Act, is recorded, processed, summarized and reported within the time periods specified in the U.S. SEC rules and forms, and that such information is accumulated and communicated to our management, including our Principal Executive Officer and Principal Financial Officer, as appropriate to allow timely decisions regarding required disclosure.\n\n116", + "recall": 0.9945945945945946, + "true_md": "## 23. QUARTERLY FINANCIAL DATA (UNAUDITED)\n\nThe following presents a summary of the unaudited quarterly data for 2020 and 2019 (amounts in millions, except per share data):\n\nWe have revised our consolidated financial statements for the annual periods 2019 and 2018, herein to correct errors, as further discussed in Note 2 to the consolidated financial statements. We previously revised our consolidated financial statements as of and for the quarterly period ended September 30, 2019 in connection with filing of the Form 10-Q for the period ended September 30, 2020 as filed on November 9, 2020. Other periods above have been derived from our Quarterly Reports on Form 10-Q filed for the respective period, in each case adjusted to reflect the impact of the revisions as described in Note 2 of this Annual Report. The consolidated financial statements for the quarterly periods ended March 31, 2020 and June 30, 2020 will be revised in connection with the filing of each respective period in 2021.\n\nOur disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e) under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended (the \"Exchange Act\") are designed to provide reasonable assurance that the information, which we are required to disclose in the reports that we file or submit under the Exchange Act, is recorded, processed, summarized and reported within the time periods specified in the U.S. SEC rules and forms, and that such information is accumulated and communicated to our management, including our Principal Executive Officer and Principal Financial Officer, as appropriate to allow timely decisions regarding required disclosure.\n\n## Disclosure Controls and Procedures\n\n## ITEM 9A. CONTROLS AND PROCEDURES\n\n## ITEM 9. CHANGES IN AND DISAGREEMENTS WITH ACCOUNTANTS ON ACCOUNTING AND FINANCIAL DISCLOSURE\n\n- (1) Earnings per share is computed independently for each of the quarters presented. The sum of the quarters may not equal the total year amount due to the impact of changes in weighted average quarterly shares outstanding.\n\nNone.\n\n116\n\n\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8409290931503642, + "doc_id": "1cdeb130c84e03ff107e245eb226c01f4a5bbbb1225380fdfd657b08f531cbbd", + "edit_distance": 0.14285714285714285, + "f1_score": 0.920096852300242, + "meteor": 0.8699690945934411, + "precision": 0.9178743961352657, + "pred_md": "## Table of Contents\n\n## Caution Regarding Forward-Looking Statements\n\nThis Annual Report on Form 10-K of Applied Materials, Inc. and its subsidiaries, including 'Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations' in Item 7, contains forward-looking statements that involve a number of risks and uncertainties.\n\nThis report contains forward-looking statements that involve a number of risks and uncertainties. Examples of forward-looking statements include those regarding Applied's future financial or operating results, customer demand and spending, end-user demand, Applied's and market and industry trends and outlooks, the impact of the ongoing COVID-19 pandemic and responses thereto on Applied's operations and financial results, cash flows and cash deployment strategies, declaration of dividends, share repurchases, business strategies and priorities, costs and cost controls, products, competitive positions, management's plans and objectives for future operations, research and development, strategic acquisitions and investments, including the proposed acquisition of Kokusai Electric Corporation (Kokusai Electric), growth opportunities, restructuring activities, backlog, working capital, liquidity, investment portfolio and policies, taxes, supply chain, manufacturing, properties, legal proceedings and claims, and other statements that are not historical facts, as well as their underlying assumptions. Forward-looking statements may contain words such as 'may,' 'will,' 'should,' 'could,' 'would,' 'expect,' 'plan,' 'anticipate,' 'believe,' 'estimate,' 'intend,' 'potential' and 'continue,' the negative of these terms, or other comparable terminology. All forward-looking statements are subject to risks and uncertainties and other important factors, including those discussed in Part I, Item 1A, 'Risk Factors,' below and elsewhere in this report. These and many other factors could affect Applied's future financial condition and operating results and could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations based on forward-looking statements made in this document or elsewhere by Applied or on its behalf. Forward-looking statements are based on management's estimates, projections and expectations as of the date hereof, and Applied undertakes no obligation to revise or update any such statements.\n\nThe following information should be read in conjunction with the Consolidated Financial Statements and the accompanying Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements included in this report.\n\n2", + "recall": 0.9223300970873787, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## Caution Regarding Forward-Looking Statements\n\n2\n\nThis Annual Report on Form 10-K of Applied Materials, Inc. and its subsidiaries, including “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” in Item 7, contains forward-looking statements that involve a number of risks and uncertainties.\n\nThis report contains forward-looking statements that involve a number of risks and uncertainties. Examples of forward-looking statements include those regarding Applied’s future financial or operating results, customer demand and spending, end-user demand, Applied’s and market and industry trends and outlooks, the impact of the ongoing COVID-19 pandemic and responses thereto on Applied’s operations and financial results, cash flows and cash deployment strategies, declaration of dividends, share repurchases, business strategies and priorities, costs and cost controls, products, competitive positions, management’s plans and objectives for future operations, research and development, strategic acquisitions and investments, including the proposed acquisition of Kokusai Electric Corporation (Kokusai Electric), growth opportunities, restructuring activities, backlog, working capital, liquidity, investment portfolio and policies, taxes, supply chain, manufacturing, properties, legal proceedings and claims, and other statements that are not historical facts, as well as their underlying assumptions. Forward-looking statements may contain words such as “may,” “will,” “should,” “could,” “would,” “expect,” “plan,” “anticipate,” “believe,” “estimate,” “intend,” “potential” and “continue,” the negative of these terms, or other comparable terminology. All forward-looking statements are subject to risks and uncertainties and other important factors, including those discussed in Part I, Item 1A, “Risk Factors,” below and elsewhere in this report. These and many other factors could affect Applied’s future financial condition and operating results and could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations based on forward-looking statements made in this document or elsewhere by Applied or on its behalf. Forward-looking statements are based on management’s estimates, projections and expectations as of the date hereof, and Applied undertakes no obligation to revise or update any such statements.\n\nThe following information should be read in conjunction with the Consolidated Financial Statements and the accompanying Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements included in this report." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9875249771832765, + "doc_id": "7fd3c2bb9c5e8b8cf0ef424b942db933d03f315294e708151416ad6ad8f7543c", + "edit_distance": 0.017110266159695818, + "f1_score": 0.9914893617021278, + "meteor": 0.9944810172762593, + "precision": 0.9914893617021276, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS OF AMERICAN AIRLINES GROUP INC .\n\nThe components of our deferred tax assets and liabilities were (in millions):\n\nTable of Contents\n\nAt December 31, 2020, we had approximately $16.5 billion of federal net operating losses (NOLs) available to reduce future federal taxable income, of which $8.5 billion will expire beginning in 2023 if unused and $8.0 billion can be carried forward indefinitely (NOL Carryforwards). We also had approximately $5.0 billion of NOL Carryforwards to reduce future state taxable income at December 31, 2020, which will expire in taxable years 2020 through 2040 if unused.\n\nOur ability to use our NOL Carryforwards depends on the amount of taxable income generated in future periods. We provide a valuation allowance for our deferred tax assets, which include our NOLs, when it is more likely than not that some portion, or all of our deferred tax assets, will not be realized. We consider all available positive and negative evidence and make certain assumptions in evaluating the realizability of our deferred tax assets. Many factors are considered that impact our assessment of future profitability, including conditions which are beyond our control, such as the health of the economy, the availability and price volatility of aircraft fuel and travel demand. We presently have a $34 million valuation allowance on certain net deferred tax assets related to state NOL Carryforwards. There can be no assurance that an additional valuation allowance on our net deferred tax assets will not be required. Such valuation allowance could be material.\n\nOur ability to deduct our NOL Carryforwards and to utilize certain other available tax attributes can be substantially constrained under the general annual limitation rules of Section 382 where an 'ownership change' has occurred. Substantially all of our remaining federal NOL Carryforwards attributable to US Airways Group are subject to limitation under Section 382; however, our ability to utilize such NOL Carryforwards is not anticipated to be effectively constrained as a result of such limitation. Similar limitations may apply for state income tax purposes. Our ability to utilize any new NOL Carryforwards arising after the ownership changes is not affected by the annual limitation rules imposed by Section 382 unless another ownership change occurs. Under the Section 382 limitation, cumulative stock ownership changes among material stockholders exceeding 50% during a rolling three-year period can potentially limit our future use of NOLs and tax credits.\n\nAt December 31, 2019, we had an AMT credit carryforward of approximately $170 million available for federal income tax purposes, which was fully refunded in 2020 as a result of the CARES Act.\n\nIn 2020, we recorded an income tax benefit of $2.6 billion, with an effective rate of approximately 22%, which was substantially non-cash. Substantially all of our income before income taxes is attributable to the United States.\n\n125", + "recall": 0.9914893617021276, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS OF AMERICAN AIRLINES GROUP INC .\n\nThe components of our deferred tax assets and liabilities were (in millions):\n\nAt December 31, 2020, we had approximately $16.5 billion of federal net operating losses (NOLs) available to reduce future federal taxable income, of which $8.5 billion will expire beginning in 2023 if unused and $8.0 billion can be carried forward indefinitely (NOL Carryforwards). We also had approximately $5.0 billion of NOL Carryforwards to reduce future state taxable income at December 31, 2020, which will expire in taxable years 2020 through 2040 if unused.\n\nOur ability to use our NOL Carryforwards depends on the amount of taxable income generated in future periods. We provide a valuation allowance for our deferred tax assets, which include our NOLs, when it is more likely than not that some portion, or all of our deferred tax assets, will not be realized. We consider all available positive and negative evidence and make certain assumptions in evaluating the realizability of our deferred tax assets. Many factors are considered that impact our assessment of future profitability, including conditions which are beyond our control, such as the health of the economy, the availability and price volatility of aircraft fuel and travel demand. We presently have a $34 million valuation allowance on certain net deferred tax assets related to state NOL Carryforwards. There can be no assurance that an additional valuation allowance on our net deferred tax assets will not be required. Such valuation allowance could be material.\n\nOur ability to deduct our NOL Carryforwards and to utilize certain other available tax attributes can be substantially constrained under the general annual limitation rules of Section 382 where an “ownership change” has occurred. Substantially all of our remaining federal NOL Carryforwards attributable to US Airways Group are subject to limitation under Section 382; however, our ability to utilize such NOL Carryforwards is not anticipated to be effectively constrained as a result of such limitation. Similar limitations may apply for state income tax purposes. Our ability to utilize any new NOL Carryforwards arising after the ownership changes is not affected by the annual limitation rules imposed by Section 382 unless another ownership change occurs. Under the Section 382 limitation, cumulative stock ownership changes among material stockholders exceeding 50% during a rolling three-year period can potentially limit our future use of NOLs and tax credits.\n\nAt December 31, 2019, we had an AMT credit carryforward of approximately $170 million available for federal income tax purposes, which was fully refunded in 2020 as a result of the CARES Act.\n\nIn 2020, we recorded an income tax benefit of $2.6 billion, with an effective rate of approximately 22%, which was substantially non-cash. Substantially all of our income before income taxes is attributable to the United States.\n\n125" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5471351692090666, + "doc_id": "5dcaf70e59414bc05025402140b711f0a81369321982025a221934beeca44ac2", + "edit_distance": 0.4375, + "f1_score": 0.9230769230769229, + "meteor": 0.6235180686065407, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## 8. Other comprehensive loss and accumulated other comprehensive loss\n\nThe components of Other comprehensive loss and the related tax effects are as follows:\n\nCP\t2020\tANNUAL\tREPORT", + "recall": 0.8571428571428571, + "true_md": "CP 2020 ANNUAL REPORT 96\n\n## 8. Other comprehensive loss and accumulated other comprehensive loss\n\nThe components of Other comprehensive loss and the related tax effects are as follows:\n\nThe components of Accumulated other comprehensive loss, net of tax, are as follows:" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9837380598312618, + "doc_id": "d81c112c6becb603121074acaed93d0edf8dcef9eaf57de2675add39415407c7", + "edit_distance": 0.007042253521126761, + "f1_score": 0.9873417721518988, + "meteor": 0.9929563295977262, + "precision": 0.9873417721518988, + "pred_md": "The following table summarizes the expected cash benefit payments for the U.S. defined benefit pension plans in the future (amounts in millions):\n\nThe following table shows the change in accumulated other comprehensive loss attributable to the components of the net cost and the change in Benefit Obligations for U.S. plans, net of tax:\n\nAmounts recorded in accumulated other comprehensive loss consist of:\n\nThe following is a reconciliation of the U.S. defined benefit pension plans' assets:\n\nWe contributed $1.4 million and $20.6 million to the U.S. defined benefit pension plans during 2020 and 2019, respectively. These payments exceeded the minimum funding requirements mandated by the U.S. Department of Labor rules. Our estimated contribution in 2021 is expected to be approximately $20 million, excluding direct benefits paid.\n\n94", + "recall": 0.9873417721518988, + "true_md": "The following table summarizes the expected cash benefit payments for the U.S. defined benefit pension plans in the future (amounts in millions):\n\nThe following table shows the change in accumulated other comprehensive loss attributable to the components of the net cost and the change in Benefit Obligations for U.S. plans, net of tax:\n\nAmounts recorded in accumulated other comprehensive loss consist of:\n\nThe following is a reconciliation of the U.S. defined benefit pension plans’ assets:\n\nWe contributed $1.4 million and $20.6 million to the U.S. defined benefit pension plans during 2020 and 2019, respectively. These payments exceeded the minimum funding requirements mandated by the U.S. Department of Labor rules. Our estimated contribution in 2021 is expected to be approximately $20 million, excluding direct benefits paid.\n\n94" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9821636210384017, + "doc_id": "65c6ab9346b11fee76298179a5d5b20c978067f0fa603c7bc34fb4cec88f5cea", + "edit_distance": 0.033261802575107295, + "f1_score": 0.9882044560943642, + "meteor": 0.991230796251789, + "precision": 0.9921052631578947, + "pred_md": "economies of scale in reducing administrative and overhead costs to serve customers more cost effectively and shared leadership for operational support functions, such as research and development, marketing and supply chain.\n\nThe reputation of our product portfolio is built on more than 50 well-respected brand names such as Worthington, IDP, Valtek, Limitorque, Durco, Argus, Edward, Valbart and Durametallic, which we believe to be one of the most comprehensive in the industry. Our products and services are sold either directly or through designated channels to more than 10,000 companies, including some of the world's leading engineering, procurement and construction (\"EPC\") firms, original equipment manufacturers, distributors and end users.\n\nWe continue to leverage our QRC network to be positioned as near to customers as possible for service and support in order to capture valuable aftermarket business. Along with ensuring that we have the local capability to sell, install and service our equipment in remote regions, we continuously improve our global operations. Despite recent headwinds caused by the COVID-19 pandemic, we continue to enhance our global supply chain capability to increase our ability to meet global customer demands and improve the quality and timely delivery of our products over the longterm. Additionally, we continue to devote resources to improving the supply chain processes across our business segments to find areas of synergy and cost reduction and to improve our supply chain management capability to meet global customer demands. We also remain focused on improving on-time delivery and quality, while managing warranty costs as a percentage of sales across our global operations, through the assistance of a focused Continuous Improvement Process (\"CIP\") initiative. The goal of the CIP initiative, which includes lean manufacturing, six sigma business management strategy and value engineering, is to maximize service fulfillment to customers through on-time delivery, reduced cycle time and quality at the highest internal productivity.\n\n## COVID-19 Update\n\nThe COVID-19 pandemic continues to have an impact on human health, the global economy and society at large. The pandemic is expected to continue to adversely impact, for its duration, our operations and financial performance. In response, we continue to actively monitor the impacts of the COVID-19 pandemic on all aspects of our business and geographies. Our cross-functional crisis management team established during the first quarter of 2020 has continued monitoring and making recommendations to management to help us continue operating as an essential business across jurisdictions, while also protecting the health and safety of our associates.\n\nDespite our evolving response, the COVID-19 pandemic has had an adverse effect on our performance during the year, and we expect the impact will continue through at least the second quarter of 2021. While we cannot reasonably estimate with certainty the ongoing duration and severity of the COVID-19 pandemic, including the effects of any vaccine, or its ultimate impact on the global economy, our business or our financial condition and results, we nonetheless remain committed to providing the critical support, products and services that our customers rely on, and currently believe that we will emerge from these events well positioned for long-term growth.\n\n## Health and Safety of Our Associates\n\nThe health and safety of our associates, suppliers and customers around the world continues to be our first priority as we continue to navigate the COVID-19 pandemic, including recent spikes in cases and returning work-from-home restrictions in various geographies in which we operate. We are incredibly proud of the great teamwork exhibited by our global workforce who have demonstrated strong resilience in adapting to continually evolving health and safety guidelines while addressing these challenging times and providing products and services to our customers.\n\nWe have implemented policies and practices to help protect our workforce so they can safely and effectively carry out their vital work, and we have continued to revise those policies and practices in light of guidance received from local and regional health authorities where appropriate. We instituted global restrictions on non-essential travel in March 2020 and the work-from-home policy for all non-essential employees who are able to do so has continued in effect in locations where health officials have advised such policies, including for our global headquarters in Irving, Texas, which will maintain its work-from-home policy at least through the second quarter of 2021. In those locations where employees are going to work in our facilities, we have continued taking steps, in light of guidelines from local and global health experts to protect our employees so that we can continue to manufacture critical technologies and equipment, including providing face coverings and other personal protective equipment, enhanced cleaning of sites and implemented social distancing protocols.\n\nOur employees and facilities have a key role in keeping essential infrastructure and industries operating, including oil and gas, water, chemical, power generation and other essential industries, such as food and beverage and healthcare. While some of our facilities have experienced periods of temporary closures during 2020 in accordance with decrees, orders and laws in their respective countries and geographies, as of February 18, 2021, all of our facilities are open and operational,\n\n31", + "recall": 0.9843342036553525, + "true_md": "economies of scale in reducing administrative and overhead costs to serve customers more cost effectively and shared leadership for operational support functions, such as research and development, marketing and supply chain.\n\nThe reputation of our product portfolio is built on more than 50 well-respected brand names such as Worthington, IDP, Valtek, Limitorque, Durco, Argus, Edward, Valbart and Durametallic, which we believe to be one of the most comprehensive in the industry. Our products and services are sold either directly or through designated channels to more than 10, 000 companies, including some of the world’s leading engineering, procurement and construction (\"EPC\") firms, original equipment manufacturers, distributors and end users.\n\nWe continue to leverage our QRC network to be positioned as near to customers as possible for service and support in order to capture valuable aftermarket business. Along with ensuring that we have the local capability to sell, install and service our equipment in remote regions, we continuously improve our global operations. Despite recent headwinds caused by the COVID-19 pandemic, we continue to enhance our global supply chain capability to increase our ability to meet global customer demands and improve the quality and timely delivery of our products over the long- term. Additionally, we continue to devote resources to improving the supply chain processes across our business segments to find areas of synergy and cost reduction and to improve our supply chain management capability to meet global customer demands. We also remain focused on improving on-time delivery and quality, while managing warranty costs as a percentage of sales across our global operations, through the assistance of a focused Continuous Improvement Process (\"CIP\") initiative. The goal of the CIP initiative, which includes lean manufacturing, six sigma business management strategy and value engineering, is to maximize service fulfillment to customers through on-time delivery, reduced cycle time and quality at the highest internal productivity.\n\nThe COVID-19 pandemic continues to have an impact on human health, the global economy and society at large. The pandemic is expected to continue to adversely impact, for its duration, our operations and financial performance. In response, we continue to actively monitor the impacts of the COVID-19 pandemic on all aspects of our business and geographies. Our cross-functional crisis management team established during the first quarter of 2020 has continued monitoring and making recommendations to management to help us continue operating as an essential business across jurisdictions, while also protecting the health and safety of our associates.\n\nDespite our evolving response, the COVID-19 pandemic has had an adverse effect on our performance during the year, and we expect the impact will continue through at least the second quarter of 2021. While we cannot reasonably estimate with certainty the ongoing duration and severity of the COVID-19 pandemic, including the effects of any vaccine, or its ultimate impact on the global economy, our business or our financial condition and results, we nonetheless remain committed to providing the critical support, products and services that our customers rely on, and currently believe that we will emerge from these events well positioned for long-term growth.\n\nThe health and safety of our associates, suppliers and customers around the world continues to be our first priority as we continue to navigate the COVID-19 pandemic, including recent spikes in cases and returning work-from-home restrictions in various geographies in which we operate. We are incredibly proud of the great teamwork exhibited by our global workforce who have demonstrated strong resilience in adapting to continually evolving health and safety guidelines while addressing these challenging times and providing products and services to our customers.\n\nWe have implemented policies and practices to help protect our workforce so they can safely and effectively carry out their vital work, and we have continued to revise those policies and practices in light of guidance received from local and regional health authorities where appropriate. We instituted global restrictions on non-essential travel in March 2020 and the work-from-home policy for all non-essential employees who are able to do so has continued in effect in locations where health officials have advised such policies, including for our global headquarters in Irving, Texas, which will maintain its work-from-home policy at least through the second quarter of 2021. In those locations where employees are going to work in our facilities, we have continued taking steps, in light of guidelines from local and global health experts to protect our employees so that we can continue to manufacture critical technologies and equipment, including providing face coverings and other personal protective equipment, enhanced cleaning of sites and implemented social distancing protocols.\n\nOur employees and facilities have a key role in keeping essential infrastructure and industries operating, including oil and gas, water, chemical, power generation and other essential industries, such as food and beverage and healthcare. While some of our facilities have experienced periods of temporary closures during 2020 in accordance with decrees, orders and laws in their respective countries and geographies, as of February 18, 2021, all of our facilities are open and operational,\n\n31\n\n## Health and Safety of Our Associates\n\n## COVID-19 Update" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6917167664351056, + "doc_id": "b86ed0a472641db7d1a3a9bc1dbb0f8b960b998e342334a5ef6bffa124dd0f81", + "edit_distance": 0.4589041095890411, + "f1_score": 0.8226950354609928, + "meteor": 0.9259658320051634, + "precision": 0.703030303030303, + "pred_md": "Our customer sales are diversified geographically. The following table presents our revenues disaggregated by geography, based on the shipping addresses of our customers:\n\nDecember 31, 2019\n\n(Amounts in thousands)\n\nNorth America(1)\n\n$\n\n1,085,627\n\n$\n\n542,182\n\n$\n\n1,627,809\n\nLatin America(1)\n\n202,247\n\n28,899\n\n231,146\n\nMiddle East and Africa\n\n355,937\n\n98,959\n\n454,896\n\nAsia Pacific\n\n499,932\n\n315,886\n\n815,818\n\nEurope\n\n560,702\n\n249,326\n\n810,028\n\n(Amounts in thousands)\n\nNorth America(1)\n\n$\n\n1,037,637\n\n$\n\n541,378\n\n$\n\n1,579,015\n\nLatin America(1)\n\n219,376\n\n22,405\n\n241,781\n\nMiddle East and Africa\n\n329,484\n\n138,240\n\n467,724\n\nAsia Pacific\n\n502,559\n\n281,080\n\n783,639\n\nEurope\n\n531,432\n\n232,108\n\n763,540\n\n$\n\n2,620,488\n\n$\n\n1,215,211\n\n$\n\n3,835,699\n\n\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\n\n(1)\tNorth\tAmerica\trepresents\tUnited\tStates\tand\tCanada;\tLatin\tAmerica\tincludes\tMexico.\n\nOn December 31, 2020, the aggregate transaction price allocated to unsatisfied (or partially unsatisfied) performance obligations related to contracts having an original expected duration in excess of one year was approximately $541 million. We estimate recognition of approximately $412 million of this amount as revenue in 2021 and an additional $129 million in 2022 and thereafter.\n\n## Contract Balances\n\nWe receive payment from customers based on a contractual billing schedule and specific performance requirements as established in our contracts. We record billings as accounts receivable when an unconditional right to consideration exists. A contract asset represents revenue recognized in advance of our right to bill the customer under the terms of a contract. A contract liability represents our contractual billings in advance of revenue recognized for a contract.\n\n78\n\n$\n\n2,704,445\n\n$\n\n1,235,252\n\n$\n\n3,939,697\n\nFPD\n\nFCD\n\nTotal\n\nDecember 31, 2018\n\nFPD\n\nFCD\n\nTotal", + "recall": 0.9914529914529915, + "true_md": "Our customer sales are diversified geographically. The following table presents our revenues disaggregated by geography, based on the shipping addresses of our customers:\n\nOn December 31, 2020, the aggregate transaction price allocated to unsatisfied (or partially unsatisfied) performance obligations related to contracts having an original expected duration in excess of one year was approximately $541 million. We estimate recognition of approximately $412 million of this amount as revenue in 2021 and an additional $129 million in 2022 and thereafter.\n\nWe receive payment from customers based on a contractual billing schedule and specific performance requirements as established in our contracts. We record billings as accounts receivable when an unconditional right to consideration exists. A contract asset represents revenue recognized in advance of our right to bill the customer under the terms of a contract. A contract liability represents our contractual billings in advance of revenue recognized for a contract.\n\n- \\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_ (1) North America represents United States and Canada; Latin America includes Mexico.\n\n## Contract Balances\n\n78" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8899320251828898, + "doc_id": "6939a7a18fc851e8241368754762f67e1aa2401b532a36cfe37850dfc64cfbe4", + "edit_distance": 0.10820559062218214, + "f1_score": 0.9855491329479769, + "meteor": 0.7453880102248623, + "precision": 0.9912790697674418, + "pred_md": "CP\t2020\tANNUAL\tREPORT\n\nFor the sale or retirement of larger groups of depreciable assets that are unusual and were not considered in the Company's depreciation studies, CP records a gain or loss for the difference between net proceeds and net book value of the assets sold or retired. The accumulated depreciation to be retired includes assetspecific accumulated depreciation, when known, and an appropriate portion of the accumulated depreciation recorded for the relevant asset class as a whole, calculated using a cost-based allocation.\n\nRevisions to the estimated useful lives and net salvage projections constitute a change in accounting estimate and are addressed prospectively by amending depreciation rates.\n\nEquipment under finance lease is included in Properties and depreciated over the period of expected use.\n\n## Leases\n\nThe Company has leases for rolling stock, buildings, vehicles, railway equipment, roadway machines, and information systems hardware. CP has entered into rolling stock and roadway machine leases that are fully variable or contain both fixed and variable components. Variable components are dependent on the hours and miles that the underlying equipment has been used. Fixed term, short-term, and variable operating lease costs are recorded in \"Equipment rents\" and \"Purchased services and other\" on the Company's Consolidated Statements of Income. Components of finance lease costs are recorded in \"Depreciation and amortization\" and \"Net interest expense\" on the Company's Consolidated Statements of Income.\n\nThe Company determines lease existence and classification at the lease inception date. Leases are identified when an agreement conveys the right to control identified property for a period of time in exchange for consideration. The Company recognizes both an operating lease liability and right-of-use ('ROU') asset for operating leases with fixed terms and in-substance fixed terms. ROU assets represent our right to use an underlying asset for the lease term and lease liabilities represent our obligation to make lease payments arising from the lease. Operating and finance lease ROU assets and liabilities are recognized at the lease commencement date based on the present value of lease payments over the lease term. Lease payments include fixed and variable payments that are based on an index or a rate. If the Company's leases do not provide a readily determinable implicit interest rate, the Company uses internal incremental secured borrowing rates for comparable tenor in the same currency at the commencement date in determining the present value of lease payments. Operating and finance lease ROU assets also include lease prepayments and initial direct costs, but are reduced by lease incentives. The lease term may include periods associated with options to extend or exclude periods associated with options to terminate the lease when it is reasonably certain that the Company will exercise these options.\n\nThe Company has short-term operating leases with terms of 12 months or less, some of which include options to purchase that the Company is not reasonably certain to exercise. The Company has elected to apply the recognition exemption and, as such, accounts for leases with a term of 12 months or less off-balance sheet. Therefore, lease payments on these short-term operating leases are not included in operating lease ROU assets and liabilities, but are recognized as an expense in the Company's Consolidated Statements of Income on a straight-line basis over the term of the lease. Further, the Company has elected to combine lease and non-lease components for all leases, except for leases of roadway machines and information systems hardware.\n\n## Assets held for sale\n\nAssets to be disposed that meet the held for sale criteria are reported in \"Other assets\" at the lower of their carrying amount and fair value, less costs to sell, and are no longer depreciated.\n\n## Goodwill and intangible assets\n\nGoodwill represents the excess of the purchase price over the fair value of identifiable net assets upon acquisition of a business. Goodwill is assigned to the reporting units that are expected to benefit from the business acquisition which, after integration of operations with the railway network, may be different than the acquired business.\n\nThe carrying value of goodwill, which is not amortized, is assessed for impairment annually in the fourth quarter of each year as at October 1 st , or more frequently as economic events dictate. The Company has the option of performing an assessment of certain qualitative factors to determine if it is more likely than not that the fair value of a reporting unit is less than its carrying value or proceeding directly to a quantitative impairment test. Qualitative factors include but are not limited to, economic, market and industry conditions, cost factors and overall financial performance of the reporting unit. If the assessment of qualitative factors indicates that the carrying value is less than the fair value, then performing the quantitative goodwill impairment test is unnecessary. The quantitative assessment compares the fair value of the reporting unit to its carrying value, including goodwill. If the fair value of the reporting unit is less than its carrying value, goodwill is impaired. The impairment charge that would be recognized is the excess of the carrying value over the fair value of the reporting unit, limited to the total amount of goodwill allocated to the reporting unit.\n\nIntangible assets with finite lives are amortized on a straight-line basis over the estimated useful lives of the respective assets. Favourable leases, customer relationships and interline contracts have amortization periods ranging from 15 to 20 years. When there is a change in the estimated useful life of an intangible asset with a finite life, amortization is adjusted prospectively.", + "recall": 0.9798850574712644, + "true_md": "CP 2020 ANNUAL REPORT 88\n\nFor the sale or retirement of larger groups of depreciable assets that are unusual and were not considered in the Company’s depreciation studies, CP records a gain or loss for the difference between net proceeds and net book value of the assets sold or retired. The accumulated depreciation to be retired includes asset- specific accumulated depreciation, when known, and an appropriate portion of the accumulated depreciation recorded for the relevant asset class as a whole, calculated using a cost-based allocation.\n\nRevisions to the estimated useful lives and net salvage projections constitute a change in accounting estimate and are addressed prospectively by amending depreciation rates.\n\nEquipment under finance lease is included in Properties and depreciated over the period of expected use.\n\nLeases The Company has leases for rolling stock, buildings, vehicles, railway equipment, roadway machines, and information systems hardware. CP has entered into rolling stock and roadway machine leases that are fully variable or contain both fixed and variable components. Variable components are dependent on the hours and miles that the underlying equipment has been used. Fixed term, short-term, and variable operating lease costs are recorded in \"Equipment rents\" and \"Purchased services and other\" on the Company's Consolidated Statements of Income. Components of finance lease costs are recorded in \"Depreciation and amortization\" and \"Net interest expense\" on the Company's Consolidated Statements of Income.\n\nThe Company determines lease existence and classification at the lease inception date. Leases are identified when an agreement conveys the right to control identified property for a period of time in exchange for consideration. The Company recognizes both an operating lease liability and right-of-use (“ROU”) asset for operating leases with fixed terms and in-substance fixed terms. ROU assets represent our right to use an underlying asset for the lease term and lease liabilities represent our obligation to make lease payments arising from the lease. Operating and finance lease ROU assets and liabilities are recognized at the lease commencement date based on the present value of lease payments over the lease term. Lease payments include fixed and variable payments that are based on an index or a rate. If the Company's leases do not provide a readily determinable implicit interest rate, the Company uses internal incremental secured borrowing rates for comparable tenor in the same currency at the commencement date in determining the present value of lease payments. Operating and finance lease ROU assets also include lease prepayments and initial direct costs, but are reduced by lease incentives. The lease term may include periods associated with options to extend or exclude periods associated with options to terminate the lease when it is reasonably certain that the Company will exercise these options.\n\nThe Company has short-term operating leases with terms of 12 months or less, some of which include options to purchase that the Company is not reasonably certain to exercise. The Company has elected to apply the recognition exemption and, as such, accounts for leases with a term of 12 months or less off-balance sheet. Therefore, lease payments on these short-term operating leases are not included in operating lease ROU assets and liabilities, but are recognized as an expense in the Company's Consolidated Statements of Income on a straight-line basis over the term of the lease. Further, the Company has elected to combine lease and non-lease components for all leases, except for leases of roadway machines and information systems hardware.\n\nAssets held for sale Assets to be disposed that meet the held for sale criteria are reported in \"Other assets\" at the lower of their carrying amount and fair value, less costs to sell, and are no longer depreciated.\n\nGoodwill and intangible assets Goodwill represents the excess of the purchase price over the fair value of identifiable net assets upon acquisition of a business. Goodwill is assigned to the reporting units that are expected to benefit from the business acquisition which, after integration of operations with the railway network, may be different than the acquired business.\n\nThe carrying value of goodwill, which is not amortized, is assessed for impairment annually in the fourth quarter of each year as at October 1 , or more frequently as economic events dictate. The Company has the option of performing an assessment of certain qualitative factors to determine if it is more likely than not that the fair value of a reporting unit is less than its carrying value or proceeding directly to a quantitative impairment test. Qualitative factors include but are not limited to, economic, market and industry conditions, cost factors and overall financial performance of the reporting unit. If the assessment of qualitative factors indicates that the carrying value is less than the fair value, then performing the quantitative goodwill impairment test is unnecessary. The quantitative assessment compares the fair value of the reporting unit to its carrying value, including goodwill. If the fair value of the reporting unit is less than its carrying value, goodwill is impaired. The impairment charge that would be recognized is the excess of the carrying value over the fair value of the reporting unit, limited to the total amount of goodwill allocated to the reporting unit. st\n\nIntangible assets with finite lives are amortized on a straight-line basis over the estimated useful lives of the respective assets. Favourable leases, customer relationships and interline contracts have amortization periods ranging from 15 to 20 years. When there is a change in the estimated useful life of an intangible asset with a finite life, amortization is adjusted prospectively.\n\n## Assets held for sale Assets to be disposed that meet the held for sale criteria are reported in \"Other assets\" at the lower of their carrying amount and fair value, less costs to sell, and\n\n## Goodwill and intangible assets Goodwill represents the excess of the purchase price over the fair value of identifiable net assets upon acquisition of a business. Goodwill is assigned to the\n\n## Leases The Company has leases for rolling stock, buildings, vehicles, railway equipment, roadway machines, and information systems hardware. CP has entered into" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7014233360613932, + "doc_id": "e140c3ff13f1d5de5241ec93c7c5ddb3cc9382f68b98cc9025e051518bdad66c", + "edit_distance": 0.4377880184331797, + "f1_score": 0.9807692307692306, + "meteor": 0.6956030932149465, + "precision": 0.9807692307692307, + "pred_md": "## UNITED STATES SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION\n\nWashington, D.C. 20549\n\n\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\n\n## FORM 10-K\n\n☒\n\nANNUAL\tREPORT\tPURSUANT\tTO\tSECTION\t13\tOR\t15(d)\tOF\tTHE\tSECURITIES\tEXCHANGE\tACT\tOF\t1934\n\nFOR\tTHE\tFISCAL\tYEAR\tENDED December\t31,\t2020\n\nOR\n\n- ☐ TRANSITION\tREPORT\tPURSUANT\tTO\tSECTION\t13\tOR\t15(d)\tOF\tTHE\tSECURITIES\tEXCHANGE\tACT\tOF\t1934\n\nFor\tthe\ttransition\tperiod\tfrom\t\\_\\_\\_\tto\t\\_\\_\\_\n\nCOMMISSION\tFILE\tNUMBER 1-07094\n\n## EASTGROUP PROPERTIES, INC .\n\n(Exact Name of Registrant as Specified in its Charter)\n\nMaryland (State or other jurisdiction of incorporation or organization)\n\n13-2711135 (I.R.S. Employer Identification No.)\n\n400 W Parkway Place\n\nSuite 100 Ridgeland,Mississippi (Address of principal executive offices)\n\nRegistrant's telephone number: (601) 354-3555\n\nSecurities registered pursuant to Section 12(b) of the Act:\n\n1\n\n39157 (Zip code)", + "recall": 0.9807692307692307, + "true_md": "# UNITED STATES SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION Washington, D.C. 20549\n\nSECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION Washington, D.C. 20549 \\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\n\n# FORM 10-K\n\n# FOR THE FISCAL YEAR ENDED December 31, 2020\n\nANNUAL REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934\n\n☒\n\nOR\n\nTRANSITION REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934\n\n☐\n\nFor the transition period from \\_\\_\\_ to \\_\\_\\_\n\nCOMMISSION FILE NUMBER 1-07094\n\n# EASTGROUP PROPERTIES, INC . (Exact Name of Registrant as Specified in its Charter)\n\nEASTGROUP PROPERTIES, INC . (Exact Name of Registrant as Specified in its Charter)\n\nMaryland (State or other jurisdiction of incorporation or organization)\n\nMaryland (State or other jurisdiction of incorporation or organization)\n\n13-2711135 (I.R.S. Employer Identification No.)\n\n13-2711135 (I.R.S. Employer Identification No.)\n\n400 W Parkway Place Suite 100 Ridgeland,Mississippi (Address of principal executive offices)\n\nRidgeland,Mississippi (Address of principal executive offices)\n\n39157 (Zip code)\n\n39157 (Zip code)\n\nRegistrant’s telephone number: (601) 354-3555\n\nSecurities registered pursuant to Section 12(b) of the Act:\n\n1" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9260128187146691, + "doc_id": "3d53c65f6663ed9dd491d5794a4c559cf6af562573c1987e35236123c7870c61", + "edit_distance": 0.17548746518105848, + "f1_score": 0.993827160493827, + "meteor": 0.9466560619563792, + "precision": 0.9938271604938271, + "pred_md": "## Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements - (Continued)\n\nBecton, Dickinson and Company\n\nA summary of restricted stock units outstanding as of September 30, 2019 and changes during the year then ended is as follows:\n\nTable of Contents\n\n(a) Based\ton\t200%\tof\ttarget\tpayout.\n\n(b) Net\tof\texpected\tforfeited\tunits\tand\tunits\tin\texcess\tof\tthe\texpected\tperformance\tpayout\tof\t65\tthousand\tand\t585\tthousand\tshares,\trespectively.\n\nThe weighted average grant date fair value of restricted stock units granted during the years 2019, 2018 and 2017 are as follows:\n\nThe total fair value of stock units vested during 2019, 2018 and 2017 was as follows:\n\nAt September 30, 2019, the weighted average remaining vesting term of performance-based and time vested restricted stock units is 1.22 and 0.90 years, respectively.\n\n## Unrecognized Compensation Expense and Other Stock Plans\n\nThe amount of unrecognized compensation expense for all non-vested share-based awards as of September 30, 2019, is approximately $266 million, which is expected to be recognized over a weighted-average remaining life of approximately 1.91 years. At September 30, 2019, 5.6 million shares were authorized for future grants under the 2004 Plan. The Company has a policy of satisfying share-based payments through either open market purchases or shares held in treasury. At September 30, 2019, the Company has sufficient shares held in treasury to satisfy these payments.\n\nAs of September 30, 2019, 105 thousand shares were held in trust relative to a Director's Deferral plan, which provides a means to defer director compensation, from time to time, on a deferred stock or cash basis. Also as of September 30, 2019, 320 thousand shares were issuable under a Deferred Compensation Plan that allows certain highly-compensated employees, including executive officers, to defer salary, annual incentive awards and certain equity-based compensation.\n\n76", + "recall": 0.9938271604938271, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements — (Continued) Becton, Dickinson and Company\n\n## Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements — (Continued) Becton, Dickinson and Company\n\nA summary of restricted stock units outstanding as of September 30, 2019 and changes during the year then ended is as follows:\n\n(b) Net of expected forfeited units and units in excess of the expected performance payout of 65 thousand and 585 thousand shares, respectively.\n\nThe weighted average grant date fair value of restricted stock units granted during the years 2019, 2018 and 2017 are as follows:\n\nThe total fair value of stock units vested during 2019, 2018 and 2017 was as follows:\n\nAt September 30, 2019, the weighted average remaining vesting term of performance-based and time vested restricted stock units is 1.22 and 0.90 years, respectively.\n\nThe amount of unrecognized compensation expense for all non-vested share-based awards as of September 30, 2019, is approximately $266 million, which is expected to be recognized over a weighted-average remaining life of approximately 1.91 years. At September 30, 2019, 5.6 million shares were authorized for future grants under the 2004 Plan. The Company has a policy of satisfying share-based payments through either open market purchases or shares held in treasury. At September 30, 2019, the Company has sufficient shares held in treasury to satisfy these payments.\n\nAs of September 30, 2019, 105 thousand shares were held in trust relative to a Director's Deferral plan, which provides a means to defer director compensation, from time to time, on a deferred stock or cash basis. Also as of September 30, 2019, 320 thousand shares were issuable under a Deferred Compensation Plan that allows certain highly-compensated employees, including executive officers, to defer salary, annual incentive awards and certain equity-based compensation.\n\n76\n\n## Unrecognized Compensation Expense and Other Stock Plans\n\n(a) Based on 200% of target payout." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.871217591326569, + "doc_id": "17f2e516215b7724276b951633c3f5ddc7bc02c2841508163c23a7078cdf49d5", + "edit_distance": 0.4100817438692098, + "f1_score": 0.9880478087649404, + "meteor": 0.782572000452239, + "precision": 0.9880478087649402, + "pred_md": "## Table of Contents\n\n## Applied is exposed to risks as a result of ongoing changes in the various industries in which it operates.\n\nThe global semiconductor, display and related industries in which Applied operates are characterized by ongoing changes affecting some or all of these industries that impact demand for and the profitability of Applied's products and its consolidated results of operations, including:\n\n- · the nature, timing and degree of visibility of changes in end demand for electronic products, including those related to fluctuations in consumer buying patterns tied to seasonality or the introduction of new products, and the effects of these changes on customers' businesses and on demand for Applied's products;\n- · increasing capital requirements for building and operating new fabrication plants and customers' ability to raise the necessary capital;\n- · trade, regulatory or tax policies impacting the timing of customers' investment in new or expanded fabrication plants;\n- · differences in growth rates among the semiconductor, display and other industries in which Applied operates;\n- · the increasing importance of establishing, improving and maintaining strong relationships with customers;\n- · the increasing cost and complexity for customers to move from product design to volume manufacturing, which may slow the adoption rate of new manufacturing technology;\n- · the need for customers to continually reduce the total cost of manufacturing system ownership;\n- · the heightened importance to customers of system reliability and productivity and the effect on demand for fabrication systems as a result of their increasing productivity, device yield and reliability;\n- · manufacturers' ability to reconfigure and re-use fabrication systems which can reduce demand for new equipment;\n- · the increasing importance of, and difficulties in, developing products with sufficient differentiation to influence customers' purchasing decisions;\n- · requirements for shorter cycle times for the development, manufacture and installation of manufacturing equipment;\n- · price and performance trends for semiconductor devices and displays, and the corresponding effect on demand for such products;\n- · the increasing importance of the availability of spare parts to maximize the time that customers' systems are available for production;\n- · the increasing role for and complexity of software in Applied products; and\n- · the increasing focus on reducing energy usage and improving the environmental impact and sustainability associated with manufacturing operations.\n\n## Applied is exposed to risks as a result of ongoing changes specific to the semiconductor industry.\n\nThe largest proportion of Applied's consolidated net sales and profitability is derived from sales of manufacturing equipment in the Semiconductor Systems segment to the global semiconductor industry. In addition, a majority of the revenues of Applied Global Services is from sales to semiconductor manufacturers. The semiconductor industry is characterized by ongoing changes particular to this industry that impact demand for and the profitability of Applied's semiconductor manufacturing equipment and service products, including:\n\n- · the increasing frequency and complexity of technology transitions and inflections, and Applied's ability to timely and effectively anticipate and adapt to these changes;\n- · the increasing cost of research and development due to many factors, including shrinking geometries, the use of new materials, new and more complex device structures, more applications and process steps, increasing chip design costs, and the increasing cost and complexity of integrated manufacturing processes;\n- · the need to reduce product development time, despite the increasing difficulty of technical challenges;\n- · the growing number of types and varieties of semiconductors and number of applications across multiple substrate sizes;\n- · the increasing cost and complexity for semiconductor manufacturers to move more technically advanced capability and smaller geometries to volume manufacturing, and the resulting impact on the rates of technology transition and investment in capital equipment;\n- · challenges in generating organic growth given semiconductor manufacturers' levels of capital expenditures and the allocation of capital investment to market segments that Applied does not serve, such as lithography, or segments where Applied's products have lower relative market presence;\n\n20", + "recall": 0.9880478087649402, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## Applied is exposed to risks as a result of ongoing changes in the various industries in which it operates.\n\n## Applied is exposed to risks as a result of ongoing changes specific to the semiconductor industry.\n\n- • the nature, timing and degree of visibility of changes in end demand for electronic products, including those related to fluctuations in consumer buying patterns tied to seasonality or the introduction of new products, and the effects of these changes on customers’ businesses and on demand for Applied’s products;\n\n- • increasing capital requirements for building and operating new fabrication plants and customers’ ability to raise the necessary capital;\n\n- • trade, regulatory or tax policies impacting the timing of customers’ investment in new or expanded fabrication plants;\n\n- • differences in growth rates among the semiconductor, display and other industries in which Applied operates;\n\n- • the increasing importance of establishing, improving and maintaining strong relationships with customers;\n\n- • the increasing cost and complexity for customers to move from product design to volume manufacturing, which may slow the adoption rate of new manufacturing technology;\n\n- • the need for customers to continually reduce the total cost of manufacturing system ownership;\n\n- • the heightened importance to customers of system reliability and productivity and the effect on demand for fabrication systems as a result of their increasing productivity, device yield and reliability;\n\n- • manufacturers’ ability to reconfigure and re-use fabrication systems which can reduce demand for new equipment;\n\n- • the increasing importance of, and difficulties in, developing products with sufficient differentiation to influence customers’ purchasing decisions;\n\n- • requirements for shorter cycle times for the development, manufacture and installation of manufacturing equipment;\n\n- • price and performance trends for semiconductor devices and displays, and the corresponding effect on demand for such products;\n\n- • the increasing importance of the availability of spare parts to maximize the time that customers’ systems are available for production;\n\n- • the increasing role for and complexity of software in Applied products; and\n\n- • the increasing focus on reducing energy usage and improving the environmental impact and sustainability associated with manufacturing operations.\n\n- • the increasing frequency and complexity of technology transitions and inflections, and Applied’s ability to timely and effectively anticipate and adapt to these changes;\n\n- • the increasing cost of research and development due to many factors, including shrinking geometries, the use of new materials, new and more complex device structures, more applications and process steps, increasing chip design costs, and the increasing cost and complexity of integrated manufacturing processes;\n\n- • the need to reduce product development time, despite the increasing difficulty of technical challenges;\n\n- • the growing number of types and varieties of semiconductors and number of applications across multiple substrate sizes;\n\n- • the increasing cost and complexity for semiconductor manufacturers to move more technically advanced capability and smaller geometries to volume manufacturing, and the resulting impact on the rates of technology transition and investment in capital equipment;\n\n- • challenges in generating organic growth given semiconductor manufacturers’ levels of capital expenditures and the allocation of capital investment to market segments that Applied does not serve, such as lithography, or segments where Applied’s products have lower relative market presence;\n\n20\n\nThe largest proportion of Applied’s consolidated net sales and profitability is derived from sales of manufacturing equipment in the Semiconductor Systems segment to the global semiconductor industry. In addition, a majority of the revenues of Applied Global Services is from sales to semiconductor manufacturers. The semiconductor industry is characterized by ongoing changes particular to this industry that impact demand for and the profitability of Applied’s semiconductor manufacturing equipment and service products, including:\n\nThe global semiconductor, display and related industries in which Applied operates are characterized by ongoing changes affecting some or all of these industries that impact demand for and the profitability of Applied’s products and its consolidated results of operations, including:" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9822373494253722, + "doc_id": "98f891da1ebeb59638bc8cae7eb5ca59c1fb9aecc2df1662438f67634c4e1a6c", + "edit_distance": 0.019076305220883535, + "f1_score": 0.9825581395348836, + "meteor": 0.9816126744112726, + "precision": 0.9825581395348837, + "pred_md": "December 31, 2020, was LIBOR plus 100 basis points with an annual facility fee of 20 basis points. The margin and facility fee are subject to changes in the Company's credit ratings. As of December 31, 2020, the Company had $125,000,000 of variable rate borrowings outstanding on this unsecured bank credit facility with a weighted average interest rate of 1.152%. The Company has a standby letter of credit of $674,000 pledged on this facility.\n\nThe Company also has a $45 million unsecured bank credit facility with a maturity date of July 30, 2022, or such later date as designated by the bank; the Company also has two six-month extensions available if the extension options in the $350 million facility are exercised. The interest rate is reset on a daily basis and as of December 31, 2020, was LIBOR plus 100 basis points with an annual facility fee of 20 basis points. The margin and facility fee are subject to changes in the Company's credit ratings. As of December 31, 2020, the interest rate was 1.144% with no outstanding balance.\n\nAs market conditions permit, EastGroup issues equity and/or employs fixed rate debt, including variable rate debt that has been swapped to an effectively fixed rate through the use of interest rate swaps, to replace the short-term bank borrowings. The Company believes its current operating cash flow and unsecured bank credit facilities provide the capacity to fund the operations of the Company. The Company also believes it can obtain debt financing and issue common and/or preferred equity. For future debt issuances, the Company intends to issue primarily unsecured fixed rate debt, including variable rate debt that has been swapped to an effectively fixed rate through the use of interest rate swaps. The Company may also access the public debt market in the future as a means to raise capital.\n\nIn March 2020, the Company closed a $100 million senior unsecured term loan with a seven-year term and interest only payments. It bears interest at the annual rate of LIBOR plus an applicable margin (1.45% as of December 31, 2020) based on the Company's senior unsecured long-term debt rating. The Company also entered into an interest rate swap agreement to convert the loan's LIBOR rate component to a fixed interest rate for the entire term of the loan providing a total effective fixed interest rate of 2.39%.\n\nIn July 2020, the Company and a group of lenders agreed to terms on the private placement of $175 million of senior unsecured notes with a weighted average fixed interest rate of 2.65%. The $100 million note has a 10-year term and a fixed interest rate of 2.61%, and the $75 million note has a 12-year term and a fixed interest rate of 2.71%. These maturity dates complement the Company's existing debt maturity schedule. The notes dated August 17, 2020, were issued and sold on October 14, 2020 and require interest-only payments. The notes will not be and have not been registered under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, and may not be offered or sold in the United States absent registration or an applicable exemption from the registration requirements.\n\nIn August 2020, the Company made a required $30 million principal repayment on $100 million of senior unsecured notes with a fixed interest rate of 3.80%.\n\nIn October 2020, EastGroup repaid (with no penalty) a mortgage loan with a balance of $45.9 million, an interest rate of 4.39% and an original maturity date of January 5, 2021.\n\nIn December 2020, the Company repaid a $75 million unsecured term loan at maturity with an effectively fixed interest rate of 3.45%.\n\nIn July 2017, the Financial Conduct Authority ('FCA') that regulates LIBOR announced it intends to stop compelling banks to submit rates for the calculation of LIBOR after 2021. As a result, the Federal Reserve Board and the Federal Reserve Bank of New York organized the Alternative Reference Rates Committee ('ARRC') which identified the Secured Overnight Financing Rate ('SOFR') as its preferred alternative to USD-LIBOR in derivatives and other financial contracts that are currently indexed to USD-LIBOR. ARRC has proposed a paced market transition plan to SOFR from USD-LIBOR and organizations are currently working on industry wide and company specific transition plans as it relates to derivatives and cash markets exposed to USD-LIBOR. In November 2020, the Intercontinental Exchange ('ICE') Benchmark Administration Limited ('IBA'), the administrator of LIBOR, announced that it would consult on its intention to cease the publication of the one-week and two-month USD LIBOR settings immediately following December 31, 2021, and the remaining USD LIBOR settings immediately following the LIBOR publication on June 30, 2023.\n\nThe Company is not able to predict when LIBOR will cease to be available or when there will be sufficient liquidity in the SOFR markets. Any changes adopted by the FCA or other governing bodies in the method used for determining LIBOR may result in a sudden or prolonged increase or decrease in reported LIBOR. If that were to occur, our interest payments could change. In addition, uncertainty about the extent and manner of future changes may result in interest rates and/or payments that are higher or lower than if LIBOR were to remain available in its current form.\n\n36", + "recall": 0.9825581395348837, + "true_md": "December 31, 2020, was LIBOR plus 100 basis points with an annual facility fee of 20 basis points. The margin and facility fee are subject to changes in the Company's credit ratings. As of December 31, 2020, the Company had $125,000,000 of variable rate borrowings outstanding on this unsecured bank credit facility with a weighted average interest rate of 1.152%. The Company has a standby letter of credit of $674,000 pledged on this facility.\n\nThe Company also has a $45 million unsecured bank credit facility with a maturity date of July 30, 2022, or such later date as designated by the bank; the Company also has two six-month extensions available if the extension options in the $350 million facility are exercised. The interest rate is reset on a daily basis and as of December 31, 2020, was LIBOR plus 100 basis points with an annual facility fee of 20 basis points. The margin and facility fee are subject to changes in the Company's credit ratings. As of December 31, 2020, the interest rate was 1.144% with no outstanding balance.\n\nAs market conditions permit, EastGroup issues equity and/or employs fixed rate debt, including variable rate debt that has been swapped to an effectively fixed rate through the use of interest rate swaps, to replace the short-term bank borrowings. The Company believes its current operating cash flow and unsecured bank credit facilities provide the capacity to fund the operations of the Company. The Company also believes it can obtain debt financing and issue common and/or preferred equity. For future debt issuances, the Company intends to issue primarily unsecured fixed rate debt, including variable rate debt that has been swapped to an effectively fixed rate through the use of interest rate swaps. The Company may also access the public debt market in the future as a means to raise capital.\n\nIn March 2020, the Company closed a $100 million senior unsecured term loan with a seven-year term and interest only payments. It bears interest at the annual rate of LIBOR plus an applicable margin (1.45% as of December 31, 2020) based on the Company’s senior unsecured long-term debt rating. The Company also entered into an interest rate swap agreement to convert the loan’s LIBOR rate component to a fixed interest rate for the entire term of the loan providing a total effective fixed interest rate of 2.39%.\n\nIn July 2020, the Company and a group of lenders agreed to terms on the private placement of $175 million of senior unsecured notes with a weighted average fixed interest rate of 2.65%. The $100 million note has a 10-year term and a fixed interest rate of 2.61%, and the $75 million note has a 12-year term and a fixed interest rate of 2.71%. These maturity dates complement the Company's existing debt maturity schedule. The notes dated August 17, 2020, were issued and sold on October 14, 2020 and require interest-only payments. The notes will not be and have not been registered under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, and may not be offered or sold in the United States absent registration or an applicable exemption from the registration requirements.\n\nIn August 2020, the Company made a required $30 million principal repayment on $100 million of senior unsecured notes with a fixed interest rate of 3.80%.\n\nIn October 2020, EastGroup repaid (with no penalty) a mortgage loan with a balance of $45.9 million, an interest rate of 4.39% and an original maturity date of January 5, 2021.\n\nIn December 2020, the Company repaid a $75 million unsecured term loan at maturity with an effectively fixed interest rate of 3.45%. In July 2017, the Financial Conduct Authority (“FCA”) that regulates LIBOR announced it intends to stop compelling banks to submit rates for the calculation of LIBOR after 2021. As a result, the Federal Reserve Board and the Federal Reserve Bank of New York organized the Alternative Reference Rates Committee (“ARRC”) which identified the Secured Overnight Financing Rate (“SOFR”) as its preferred alternative to USD-LIBOR in derivatives and other financial contracts that are currently indexed to USD-LIBOR. ARRC has proposed a paced market transition plan to SOFR from USD-LIBOR and organizations are currently working on industry wide and company specific transition plans as it relates to derivatives and cash markets exposed to USD-LIBOR. In November 2020, the Intercontinental Exchange (“ICE”) Benchmark Administration Limited (“IBA”), the administrator of LIBOR, announced that it would consult on its intention to cease the publication of the one-week and two-month USD LIBOR settings immediately following December 31, 2021, and the remaining USD LIBOR settings immediately following the LIBOR publication on June 30, 2023.\n\nThe Company is not able to predict when LIBOR will cease to be available or when there will be sufficient liquidity in the SOFR markets. Any changes adopted by the FCA or other governing bodies in the method used for determining LIBOR may result in a sudden or prolonged increase or decrease in reported LIBOR. If that were to occur, our interest payments could change. In addition, uncertainty about the extent and manner of future changes may result in interest rates and/or payments that are higher or lower than if LIBOR were to remain available in its current form.\n\n36" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7780498497548121, + "doc_id": "c9c0bb565f068359965770f45c499710665bb3c7639301c2bd92e476dca4e710", + "edit_distance": 0.32558139534883723, + "f1_score": 0.9872881355932203, + "meteor": 0.9177076828815969, + "precision": 0.9914893617021276, + "pred_md": "Our pump products are manufactured in a wide range of metal alloys and with a variety of configurations to reliably meet the operating requirements of our customers. Mechanical seals are critical to the reliable operation of rotating equipment in that they prevent leakage and emissions of hazardous substances from the rotating equipment and reduce shaft wear on the equipment caused by the use of non-mechanical seals. We also manufacture a gas-lubricated mechanical seal that is used in high-speed compressors for gas pipelines and in the oil and gas production and process markets. Our products are currently manufactured in 39 manufacturing facilities worldwide, 13 of which are located in Europe, 12 in North America, eight in Asia Pacific and six in Latin America, and we have 137 QRCs, including those co-located in manufacturing facilities and/or shared with FCD.\n\nWe also conduct business through strategic foreign joint ventures. We have six unconsolidated joint ventures that are located in Chile, China, India, Saudi Arabia, South Korea and the United Arab Emirates, where a portion of our products are manufactured, assembled or serviced in these territories. These relationships provide numerous strategic opportunities, including increased access to our current and new markets, access to additional manufacturing capacity and expansion of our operational platform to support best-cost sourcing initiatives and balance capacity demands for other markets.\n\n## FPD Products\n\nWe manufacture more than 40 different active types of pumps and approximately 185 different models of mechanical seals and sealing systems. The following is a summary list of our FPD product types and globally recognized brands:\n\n## FPD Product Types\n\n## Single and Multistage Between Bearings Pumps\n\n## Single Stage Overhung Pumps\n\n- · Single Case - Axially Split\n- · API Process\n- · Single Case - Radially Split\n- · Double Case\n\n## Overhung Pumps\n\n## Between Bearings Pumps\n\n- · Chemical Process ASME and ISO\n- · Single Case - Radially Split\n- · Industrial Process\n- · Side Channel Multistage\n- · Slurry and Solids Handling\n- · Split Case - Axially Split\n- · Metallic & Lined Magnetic Drive Process\n- · Split Case - Radially Split\n\n## Positive Displacement Pumps\n\n## Mechanical Seals and Seal Support Systems\n\n- · Rotary Multiphase\n- · Dry-Running Seals\n- · Rotary Screw\n- · Barrier Fluids and Lubricants\n\n## Vertical Pumps\n\n- · Compressor Seals\n- · Deepwell Submersible\n- · Gas Barrier Seals\n- · Slurry and Solids Handling\n- · Mixer Seals\n- · Sump & Cantilever\n- · Standard Cartridge Seals\n- · Vertical Inline\n- · Seal Support Systems\n- · Vertical Line Shaft\n- · Vertical Canned Shaft\n\n## Vacuum Systems\n\n- · Wet Pit, Double Case API & Double\n- · Liquid Ring\n\n## Positive Displacement Pumps\n\n- · Dry Systems\n- · Gear\n\n7\n\n- · LR Systems\n- · Bearing Isolators", + "recall": 0.9831223628691983, + "true_md": "Our pump products are manufactured in a wide range of metal alloys and with a variety of configurations to reliably meet the operating requirements of our customers. Mechanical seals are critical to the reliable operation of rotating equipment in that they prevent leakage and emissions of hazardous substances from the rotating equipment and reduce shaft wear on the equipment caused by the use of non-mechanical seals. We also manufacture a gas-lubricated mechanical seal that is used in high-speed compressors for gas pipelines and in the oil and gas production and process markets. Our products are currently manufactured in 39 manufacturing facilities worldwide, 13 of which are located in Europe, 12 in North America, eight in Asia Pacific and six in Latin America, and we have 137 QRCs, including those co-located in manufacturing facilities and/or shared with FCD.\n\nWe also conduct business through strategic foreign joint ventures. We have six unconsolidated joint ventures that are located in Chile, China, India, Saudi Arabia, South Korea and the United Arab Emirates, where a portion of our products are manufactured, assembled or serviced in these territories. These relationships provide numerous strategic opportunities, including increased access to our current and new markets, access to additional manufacturing capacity and expansion of our operational platform to support best-cost sourcing initiatives and balance capacity demands for other markets.\n\nWe manufacture more t han 40 different active types of pumps and approximately 185 different models of mechanical seals and sealing systems. The following is a summary list of our FPD product types and globally recognized brands:\n\n## FPD Products\n\n## FPD Product Types\n\n## Single and Multistage Between Bearings Pumps\n\n## Overhung Pumps\n\n- • Single Case — Axially Split\n\n- • Single Case — Radially Split\n\n- • Double Case\n\n## Between Bearings Pumps\n\n## Single Stage Overhung Pumps\n\n## Positive Displacement Pumps\n\n## Mechanical Seals and Seal Support Systems\n\n## Vacuum Systems\n\n## Vertical Pumps\n\n## Positive Displacement Pumps\n\n- • API Process\n\n- • Chemical Process ASME and ISO\n\n- • Industrial Process\n\n- • Slurry and Solids Handling\n\n- • Metallic & Lined Magnetic Drive Process\n\n- • Rotary Multiphase\n\n- • Rotary Screw\n\n- • Single Case — Radially Split\n\n- • Side Channel Multistage\n\n- • Split Case — Axially Split\n\n- • Split Case — Radially Split\n\n- • Dry-Running Seals\n\n- • Barrier Fluids and Lubricants\n\n- • Bearing Isolators\n\n- • Compressor Seals\n\n- • Mixer Seals\n\n- • Gas Barrier Seals\n\n- • Standard Cartridge Seals\n\n- • Seal Support Systems\n\n- • Deepwell Submersible\n\n- • Slurry and Solids Handling\n\n- • Sump & Cantilever\n\n- • Vertical Inline\n\n- • Vertical Line Shaft\n\n- • Vertical Canned Shaft\n\n- • Wet Pit, Double Case API & Double\n\n- • Gear\n\n7\n\n- • Liquid Ring\n\n- • LR Systems\n\n- • Dry Systems" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7819420380868337, + "doc_id": "b9d0417f0981e5b089e16672d0ed30802f5697ac982154372a3d7d46d4c11b1e", + "edit_distance": 0.5462184873949579, + "f1_score": 0.9702127659574469, + "meteor": 0.8046882453151618, + "precision": 0.9661016949152542, + "pred_md": "The Company's lease expirations for the next ten years are detailed below:\n\nTotal Area of Leases Expiring\n\n(1) Represents\tthe\tmonthly\tcash\trental\trates,\texcluding\ttenant\texpense\treimbursements,\tas\tof\tDecember\t31,\t2020,\tmultiplied\tby\t12\tmonths.\n\n(2) Includes\tmonth-to-month\tleases.\n\n## ITEM 3. LEGAL PROCEEDINGS.\n\nThe Company is not presently involved in any material litigation nor, to its knowledge, is any material litigation threatened against the Company or its properties, other than routine litigation arising in the ordinary course and other actions not deemed to be material. Of these matters, substantially all of which are to be covered by the Company's liability insurance and which, in the aggregate, are not expected to have a material adverse effect on the Company's financial condition or results of operations. The Company cannot predict the outcome of any litigation with certainty, and some lawsuits, claims or proceedings may be disposed of unfavorably to the Company, which could materially affect its financial condition or results of operations.\n\n## ITEM 4. MINE SAFETY DISCLOSURES.\n\nNot applicable.\n\n15", + "recall": 0.9743589743589743, + "true_md": "The Company's lease expirations for the next ten years are detailed below:\n\nThe Company is not presently involved in any material litigation nor, to its knowledge, is any material litigation threatened against the Company or its properties, other than routine litigation arising in the ordinary course and other actions not deemed to be material. Of these matters, substantially all of which are to be covered by the Company’s liability insurance and which, in the aggregate, are not expected to have a material adverse effect on the Company's financial condition or results of operations. The Company cannot predict the outcome of any litigation with certainty, and some lawsuits, claims or proceedings may be disposed of unfavorably to the Company, which could materially affect its financial condition or results of operations.\n\nNot applicable.\n\n## 15\n\n- ITEM 4. MINE SAFETY DISCLOSURES.\n\n- ITEM 3. LEGAL PROCEEDINGS.\n\n- (1) Represents the monthly cash rental rates, excluding tenant expense reimbursements, as of December 31, 2020, multiplied by 12 months. (2) Includes month-to-month leases.\n\n- (1) Represents the monthly cash rental rates, excluding tenant expense reimbursements, as of December 31, 2020, multiplied by 12 months. (2) Includes month-to-month leases." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7708808676682097, + "doc_id": "3aaafdfd27141d74c4f211f24c1b97af7434459f20052f11d199f290f5e74767", + "edit_distance": 0.04411764705882353, + "f1_score": 0.9664804469273744, + "meteor": 0.9775344850973137, + "precision": 0.9558011049723757, + "pred_md": "The plan's financial instruments, shown below, are presented at fair value. See Note 1 for further discussion on how the hierarchical levels of the fair values of the Plan's investments are determined. The fair values of our U.S. defined benefit plan assets were:\n\n\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\\_\n\n(a) Global\tEquity\tfund\tseeks\tto\tclosely\ttrack\tthe\tperformance\tof\tthe\tMSCI\tAll\tCountry\tWorld\tIndex.\n\n(b) Global\tReal\tAsset\tfunds\tseek\tto\tprovide\texposure\tto\tthe\tlisted\tglobal\treal\testate\tinvestment\ttrusts\t(REITs)\tand\tinfrastructure\tmarkets.\n\n(c) Diversified\tCredit\tfunds\tseek\tto\tprovide\texposure\tto\tthe\thigh\tyield,\temerging\tmarkets,\tbank\tloans\tand\tsecuritized\tcredit\tmarkets.\n\n(d) Liability-Driven\t Investment\t (\"LDI\")\t funds\t seek\t to\t invest\t in\t high\t quality\t fixed\t income\t securities\t that\t collectively\t closely\t match\t those\t found\t in discount\tcurves\tused\tto\tvalue\tthe\tplan's\tliabilities.\n\n## Non-U.S. Defined Benefit Plans\n\nWe maintain defined benefit pension plans, which cover some or all of our employees in the following countries: Austria, Belgium, Canada, France, Germany, India, Italy, Japan, Mexico, The Netherlands, Sweden, Switzerland and the U.K. The assets of the plans in the U.K. (two plans), The Netherlands and Canada represent 94% of the total non-U.S. plan assets (\"non-U.S. assets\"). Details of other countries' plan assets have not been provided due to immateriality.\n\nThe following are assumptions related to the non-U.S. defined benefit pension plans:\n\nAt December 31, 2020, as compared with December 31, 2019, we decreased our average discount rate for non-U.S. plans from 1.61% to 1.23% based on analysis of bonds and other publicly-traded instruments, by country, which had lower yields due to market conditions. To determine 2020 pension expense, we decreased our average expected rate of\n\n96", + "recall": 0.9774011299435028, + "true_md": "The plan’s financial instruments, shown below, are presented at fair value. See Note 1 for further discussion on how the hierarchical levels of the fair values of the Plan’s investments are determined. The fair values of our U.S. defined benefit plan assets were:\n\n(a) Global Equity fund seeks to closely track the performance of the MSCI All Country World Index.\n\n(b) Global Real Asset funds seek to provide exposure to the listed global real estate investment trusts (REITs) and infrastructure markets.\n\n(c) Diversified Credit funds seek to provide exposure to the high yield, emerging markets, bank loans and securitized credit markets.\n\n(d) Liability-Driven Investment (\"LDI\") funds seek to invest in high quality fixed income securities that collectively closely match those found in discount curves used to value the plan's liabilities.\n\nWe maintain defined benefit pension plans, which cover some or all of our employees in the following countries: Austria, Belgium, Canada, France, Germany, India, Italy, Japan, Mexico, The Netherlands, Sweden, Switzerland and the U.K. The assets of the plans in the U.K. (two plans), The Netherlands and Canada represent 9 4% of the total non-U.S. plan assets (\"non-U.S. assets\"). Details of other countries’ plan assets have not been provided due to immateriality.\n\nThe following are assumptions related to the non-U.S. defined benefit pension plans:\n\nAt December 31, 2020, as compared with December 31, 2019, we decreased our average discount rate for non-U.S. plans from 1.61% to 1.23% based on analysis of bonds and other publicly-traded instruments, by country, which had lower yields due to market conditions. To determine 2020 pension expense, we decreased our average expected rate of\n\n96" + }, + { + "bleu": 1.0, + "doc_id": "a1d7c0dce5c0e8380986d1cd14e0cc34e1d8277ec848285f006bc7217ed4f774", + "edit_distance": 0.0, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999999990379407, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "disruptions to or failures in power, information technology, communication systems or other critical infrastructure could result in interruptions or delays to company, customer, or other third party operations or services, financial loss, injury to persons or property, potential liability, and damage to brand and reputation. Although the company continuously takes significant steps to mitigate cybersecurity risk across a range of functions, such measures can never eliminate the risk entirely or provide absolute security.\n\nAs a global enterprise, the regulatory environment with regard to cybersecurity, privacy and data protection issues is increasingly complex and may have impacts on the company's business, including increased risk, costs, and expanded compliance obligations. As the company's business focus on data grows, the potential impact of these vulnerabilities and regulations on the company's business, risks, and reputation may grow accordingly. The European Union's General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) and an increased number of data protection laws around the globe could continue to result in increased compliance costs and risks as a result of (i) increased regulatory enforcement of GDPR and other data protection rules and (ii) the trend of shifting and sharing data processing responsibilities from companies having direct relationship with consumers to all companies in the data processing chain. Any additional costs and penalties associated with increased compliance and risk reduction could make certain offerings less profitable or increase the difficulty of bringing certain offerings to market.\n\nThe Company's Financial Results for Particular Periods Are Difficult to Predict: IBM's revenues are affected by such factors as the introduction of new products and services, the ability to compete effectively in increasingly competitive marketplaces, the length of the sales cycles and the seasonality of technology purchases. In addition, certain of the company's growth areas involve new products, new customers, new and evolving competitors, and new markets, all of which contribute to the difficulty of predicting the company's financial results. The company's financial results may also be impacted by the structure of products and services contracts and the nature of its customers' businesses; for example, certain of the company's services contracts with commercial customers in regulated industries are subject to periodic review by regulators with respect to controls and processes. As a result of the above-mentioned factors, the company's financial results are difficult to predict. Historically, the company has had lower revenue in the first quarter than in the immediately preceding fourth quarter. In addition, the high volume of products typically ordered at the end of each quarter, especially at the end of the fourth quarter, make financial results for a given period difficult to predict.\n\nDue to the Company's Global Presence, Its Business and Operations Could Be Impacted by Local Legal, Economic, Political and Health Conditions: The company is a globally integrated entity, operating in over 175 countries worldwide and deriving more than sixty percent of its revenues from sales outside the United States. Changes in the laws or policies of the countries in which the company operates, or inadequate enforcement of such laws or policies, could affect the company's business and the company's overall results of operations. The company's results of operations also could be affected by economic and political changes in those countries and by macroeconomic changes, including recessions, inflation, currency fluctuations between the U.S. dollar and non-U.S. currencies and adverse changes in trade relationships amongst those countries. Further, as the company expands its customer base and the scope of its offerings, both within the U.S. and globally, it may be impacted by additional regulatory or other risks, including compliance with U.S. and foreign data privacy requirements, labor relations laws, laws relating to anti-corruption, anti-competition regulations, import and trade restrictions and export requirements. In addition, any widespread outbreak of an illness, pandemic or other local or global health issue, natural disasters, climate change impacts, or uncertain political climates, international hostilities, or any terrorist activities, could adversely affect customer demand, the company's operations and supply chain, and its ability to source and deliver products and services to its customers. For example, the U.K. referendum to exit from the E.U., commonly referred to as \"Brexit\", has caused global economic, trade and regulatory uncertainty. The company is actively monitoring and planning for Brexit.\n\n14", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "disruptions to or failures in power, information technology, communication systems or other critical infrastructure could result in interruptions or delays to company, customer, or other third party operations or services, financial loss, injury to persons or property, potential liability, and damage to brand and reputation. Although the company continuously takes significant steps to mitigate cybersecurity risk across a range of functions, such measures can never eliminate the risk entirely or provide absolute security.\n\nAs a global enterprise, the regulatory environment with regard to cybersecurity, privacy and data protection issues is increasingly complex and may have impacts on the company's business, including increased risk, costs, and expanded compliance obligations. As the company's business focus on data grows, the potential impact of these vulnerabilities and regulations on the company's business, risks, and reputation may grow accordingly. The European Union's General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) and an increased number of data protection laws around the globe could continue to result in increased compliance costs and risks as a result of (i) increased regulatory enforcement of GDPR and other data protection rules and (ii) the trend of shifting and sharing data processing responsibilities from companies having direct relationship with consumers to all companies in the data processing chain. Any additional costs and penalties associated with increased compliance and risk reduction could make certain offerings less profitable or increase the difficulty of bringing certain offerings to market.\n\nThe Company's Financial Results for Particular Periods Are Difficult to Predict: IBM's revenues are affected by such factors as the introduction of new products and services, the ability to compete effectively in increasingly competitive marketplaces, the length of the sales cycles and the seasonality of technology purchases. In addition, certain of the company's growth areas involve new products, new customers, new and evolving competitors, and new markets, all of which contribute to the difficulty of predicting the company's financial results. The company's financial results may also be impacted by the structure of products and services contracts and the nature of its customers' businesses; for example, certain of the company's services contracts with commercial customers in regulated industries are subject to periodic review by regulators with respect to controls and processes. As a result of the above-mentioned factors, the company's financial results are difficult to predict. Historically, the company has had lower revenue in the first quarter than in the immediately preceding fourth quarter. In addition, the high volume of products typically ordered at the end of each quarter, especially at the end of the fourth quarter, make financial results for a given period difficult to predict.\n\nDue to the Company's Global Presence, Its Business and Operations Could Be Impacted by Local Legal, Economic, Political and Health Conditions: The company is a globally integrated entity, operating in over 175 countries worldwide and deriving more than sixty percent of its revenues from sales outside the United States. Changes in the laws or policies of the countries in which the company operates, or inadequate enforcement of such laws or policies, could affect the company's business and the company's overall results of operations. The company's results of operations also could be affected by economic and political changes in those countries and by macroeconomic changes, including recessions, inflation, currency fluctuations between the U.S. dollar and non-U.S. currencies and adverse changes in trade relationships amongst those countries. Further, as the company expands its customer base and the scope of its offerings, both within the U.S. and globally, it may be impacted by additional regulatory or other risks, including compliance with U.S. and foreign data privacy requirements, labor relations laws, laws relating to anti-corruption, anti-competition regulations, import and trade restrictions and export requirements. In addition, any widespread outbreak of an illness, pandemic or other local or global health issue, natural disasters, climate change impacts, or uncertain political climates, international hostilities, or any terrorist activities, could adversely affect customer demand, the company's operations and supply chain, and its ability to source and deliver products and services to its customers. For example, the U.K. referendum to exit from the E.U., commonly referred to as \"Brexit\", has caused global economic, trade and regulatory uncertainty. The company is actively monitoring and planning for Brexit.\n\n14" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9806680311675299, + "doc_id": "c4e6ecef14a2260df992fa355176c9c1ea694f8964a62b5fa46057e65ae3c46c", + "edit_distance": 0.025878003696857672, + "f1_score": 0.9856459330143541, + "meteor": 0.9882551164255388, + "precision": 0.987220447284345, + "pred_md": "## Table of Contents\n\n## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS OF AMERICAN AIRLINES GROUP INC .\n\nAmerican is required to deliver an appraisal of the First Lien 11.75% Senior Secured Notes Collateral and officer's certificate on a semi-annual basis demonstrating the calculation of a collateral coverage ratio in relation to the First Lien 11.75% Senior Secured Notes Collateral as of the end of each semi-annual period based on such appraisal. If American fails to deliver the officer's certificate in a timely manner or the collateral coverage ratio is less than 1.6 to 1.0 as of the end of the semi-annual period, then, subject to an opportunity to cure the deficiency in the collateral coverage ratio, American will be required to pay special interest in an additional amount equal to 2.0% per annum of the outstanding principal amount of the 11.75% Senior Secured Notes until the collateral coverage ratio is established to be at least 1.6 to 1.0.\n\nThe 11.75% Senior Secured Notes Indenture contains covenants that, among other things, restrict the ability of AAG and the ability of its restricted subsidiaries (including American) to: (i) pay dividends, redeem or repurchase stock or make other distributions or restricted payments, (ii) incur liens on the 11.75% Senior Secured Notes Collateral and dispose of or release the 11.75% Senior Secured Notes Collateral, (iii) repay subordinated indebtedness, (iv) make certain loans and investments, (v) incur indebtedness or issue preferred stock, (vi) merge, consolidate or sell assets, (vii) undergo certain change of control transactions, and (viii) designate subsidiaries as unrestricted. These covenants are subject to a number of important exceptions and qualifications set forth in the 11.75% Senior Secured Notes Indenture.\n\nUpon the occurrence of any event of default (other than certain bankruptcy or insolvency or reorganization events affecting AAG or certain of its subsidiaries, including American), the 11.75% Senior Secured Notes may be declared to be due and payable immediately. Upon the occurrence of certain bankruptcy, insolvency or reorganization events affecting American or certain of its subsidiaries (including American), all outstanding 11.75% Senior Secured Notes will become due and payable immediately without further action or notice on the part of the 11.75% Senior Secured Notes Trustee or any holder of the 11.75% Senior Secured Notes.\n\n## 10.75% Senior Secured Notes\n\nOn September 25, 2020 (the 10.75% Senior Secured Notes Closing Date), American issued $1.0 billion in initial principal amount of senior secured IP notes (the IP Notes) and $200 million in initial principal amount of senior secured LGA/DCA notes (the LGA/DCA Notes and together with the IP Notes, the 10.75% Senior Secured Notes). The obligations of American under the 10.75% Senior Secured Notes are fully and unconditionally guaranteed (the 10.75% Senior Secured Notes Guarantees) on a senior unsecured basis by AAG. The 10.75% Senior Secured Notes bear interest at a rate of 10.75% per annum in cash. For any interest period on or prior to September 1, 2022, American may, at its election, pay interest at a rate of 12.00% per annum payable one-half in cash and one-half in kind. Interest on the 10.75% Senior Secured Notes is payable semiannually in arrears on September 1 and March 1 of each year, beginning on March 1, 2021. The 10.75% Senior Secured Notes will mature on February 15, 2026.\n\nThe proceeds from the 10.75% Senior Secured Notes were used to pay transaction-related fees and expenses and for general corporate purposes.\n\nThe 10.75% Senior Secured Notes were each issued pursuant to a separate indenture, dated as of September 25, 2020 (individually, the IP Notes Indenture and the LGA/DCA Notes Indenture and collectively, the 10.75% Senior Secured Notes Indentures), by and among American, AAG and Wilmington Trust, National Association, as trustee and as collateral trustee (the 10.75% Senior Secured Notes Trustee). The IP Notes are secured by a first lien security interest on certain intellectual property of American, including the 'American Airlines' trademark and the 'aa.com' domain name in the United States and certain foreign jurisdictions (the IP Collateral), and a second lien on certain slots related to American's operations at New York LaGuardia and Ronald Reagan Washington National airports and certain other assets (the LGA/DCA Collateral and together with the IP Collateral, the 10.75% Senior Secured Notes Collateral). Subject to certain conditions, American will be permitted to incur up to $4.0 billion of additional pari passu debt and unlimited second lien debt secured by the IP Collateral securing the IP Notes. The LGA/DCA Notes are secured by a first lien security interest in the LGA/DCA Collateral. American may be required to pledge additional collateral in the future under the terms of the 10.75% Senior Secured Notes, and in certain circumstances may elect to pledge additional collateral including as a replacement for existing collateral. The LGA/DCA Collateral also secures on a first-lien basis the December 2016 Credit Facilities.\n\nOn or prior to the fourth anniversary of the 10.75% Senior Secured Notes Closing Date, American may redeem all or any part of the 10.75% Senior Secured Notes, at its option, at a redemption price equal to 100% of the principal amount of the 10.75% Senior Secured Notes redeemed plus a make whole premium, together with accrued and unpaid interest thereon, if any. After the fourth anniversary of the 10.75% Senior Secured Notes Closing Date and on or prior to the fifth anniversary of the 10.75% Senior Secured Notes Closing Date, American may redeem all or any part of the 10.75% Senior Secured Notes, at its option, at a redemption price equal to 105.375% of the principal amount of the 10.75% Senior\n\n115", + "recall": 0.9840764331210191, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS OF AMERICAN AIRLINES GROUP INC .\n\nAmerican is required to deliver an appraisal of the First Lien 11.75% Senior Secured Notes Collateral and officer’s certificate on a semi-annual basis demonstrating the calculation of a collateral coverage ratio in relation to the First Lien 11.75% Senior Secured Notes Collateral as of the end of each semi-annual period based on such appraisal. If American fails to deliver the officer’s certificate in a timely manner or the collateral coverage ratio is less than 1.6 to 1.0 as of the end of the semi-annual period, then, subject to an opportunity to cure the deficiency in the collateral coverage ratio, American will be required to pay special interest in an additional amount equal to 2.0% per annum of the outstanding principal amount of the 11.75% Senior Secured Notes until the collateral coverage ratio is established to be at least 1.6 to 1.0.\n\nThe 11.75% Senior Secured Notes Indenture contains covenants that, among other things, restrict the ability of AAG and the ability of its restricted subsidiaries (including American) to: (i) pay dividends, redeem or repurchase stock or make other distributions or restricted payments, (ii) incur liens on the 11.75% Senior Secured Notes Collateral and dispose of or release the 11.75% Senior Secured Notes Collateral, (iii) repay subordinated indebtedness, (iv) make certain loans and investments, (v) incur indebtedness or issue preferred stock, (vi) merge, consolidate or sell assets, (vii) undergo certain change of control transactions, and (viii) designate subsidiaries as unrestricted. These covenants are subject to a number of important exceptions and qualifications set forth in the 11.75% Senior Secured Notes Indenture.\n\nUpon the occurrence of any event of default (other than certain bankruptcy or insolvency or reorganization events affecting AAG or certain of its subsidiaries, including American), the 11.75% Senior Secured Notes may be declared to be due and payable immediately. Upon the occurrence of certain bankruptcy, insolvency or reorganization events affecting American or certain of its subsidiaries (including American), all outstanding 11.75% Senior Secured Notes will become due and payable immediately without further action or notice on the part of the 11.75% Senior Secured Notes Trustee or any holder of the 11.75% Senior Secured Notes.\n\nOn September 25, 2020 (the 10.75% Senior Secured Notes Closing Date), American issued $1.0 billion in initial principal amount of senior secured IP notes (the IP Notes) and $200 million in initial principal amount of senior secured LGA/DCA notes (the LGA/DCA Notes and together with the IP Notes, the 10.75% Senior Secured Notes). The obligations of American under the 10.75% Senior Secured Notes are fully and unconditionally guaranteed (the 10.75% Senior Secured Notes Guarantees) on a senior unsecured basis by AAG. The 10.75% Senior Secured Notes bear interest at a rate of 10.75% per annum in cash. For any interest period on or prior to September 1, 2022, American may, at its election, pay interest at a rate of 12.00% per annum payable one-half in cash and one-half in kind. Interest on the 10.75% Senior Secured Notes is payable semiannually in arrears on September 1 and March 1 of each year, beginning on March 1, 2021. The 10.75% Senior Secured Notes will mature on February 15, 2026.\n\nThe proceeds from the 10.75% Senior Secured Notes were used to pay transaction-related fees and expenses and for general corporate purposes.\n\nThe 10.75% Senior Secured Notes were each issued pursuant to a separate indenture, dated as of September 25, 2020 (individually, the IP Notes Indenture and the LGA/DCA Notes Indenture and collectively, the 10.75% Senior Secured Notes Indentures), by and among American, AAG and Wilmington Trust, National Association, as trustee and as collateral trustee (the 10.75% Senior Secured Notes Trustee). The IP Notes are secured by a first lien security interest on certain intellectual property of American, including the “American Airlines” trademark and the “aa.com” domain name in the United States and certain foreign jurisdictions (the IP Collateral), and a second lien on certain slots related to American’s operations at New York LaGuardia and Ronald Reagan Washington National airports and certain other assets (the LGA/DCA Collateral and together with the IP Collateral, the 10.75% Senior Secured Notes Collateral). Subject to certain conditions, American will be permitted to incur up to $4.0 billion of additional pari passu debt and unlimited second lien debt secured by the IP Collateral securing the IP Notes. The LGA/DCA Notes are secured by a first lien security interest in the LGA/DCA Collateral. American may be required to pledge additional collateral in the future under the terms of the 10.75% Senior Secured Notes, and in certain circumstances may elect to pledge additional collateral including as a replacement for existing collateral. The LGA/DCA Collateral also secures on a first-lien basis the December 2016 Credit Facilities.\n\nOn or prior to the fourth anniversary of the 10.75% Senior Secured Notes Closing Date, American may redeem all or any part of the 10.75% Senior Secured Notes, at its option, at a redemption price equal to 100% of the principal amount of the 10.75% Senior Secured Notes redeemed plus a make whole premium, together with accrued and unpaid interest thereon, if any. After the fourth anniversary of the 10.75% Senior Secured Notes Closing Date and on or prior to the fifth anniversary of the 10.75% Senior Secured Notes Closing Date, American may redeem all or any part of the 10.75% Senior Secured Notes, at its option, at a redemption price equal to 105.375% of the principal amount of the 10.75% Senior\n\n## 10.75% Senior Secured Notes\n\n115" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9618720973522689, + "doc_id": "630e70df0228a3a82fb5ef610355179ce57f3495dc2f573938ffab65f4ed7c69", + "edit_distance": 0.04225352112676056, + "f1_score": 0.9928571428571429, + "meteor": 0.9737936305286855, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "Accounts payable and accrued expenses decreased $22,451,000 during 2020. A summary of the Company's Accounts payable and accrued expenses follows:\n\n(1) Represents\tchecks\twritten\tbefore\tthe\tend\tof\tthe\tperiod\twhich\thave\tnot\tcleared\tthe\tbank;\ttherefore,\tthe\tbank\thas\tnot\tyet\tadvanced\tcash\tto\tthe\tCompany.\tWhen\tthe\tchecks\tclear\tthe\tbank,\tthey\twill\tbe\tfunded\tthrough\tthe\tCompany's\tworking cash\tline\tof\tcredit.\tSee\tNote\t1(p)\tin\tthe\tNotes\tto\tConsolidated\tFinancial\tStatements.\n\nOther liabilities increased $694,000 during 2020. A summary of the Company's Other liabilities follows:\n\n## Equity\n\nAdditional paid-in capital increased $95,998,000 during 2020 primarily due to the issuance of common stock under the Company's continuous common equity offering program (as discussed below under Liquidity and Capital Resources) and stock-based compensation (as discussed in Note 11 in the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements). EastGroup issued 709,924 shares of common stock under its continuous common equity offering program with net proceeds to the Company of $92,663,000.\n\nDuring 2020, Distributions in excess of earnings increased $13,365,000 as a result of dividends on common stock of $121,728,000 exceeding Net Income Attributable to EastGroup Properties, Inc. Common Stockholders of $108,363,000.\n\nAccumulated other comprehensive income (loss) decreased $13,559,000 during 2020. The decrease resulted from the change in fair value of the Company's interest rate swaps (cash flow hedges) which are further discussed in Notes 12 and 13 in the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.\n\n29", + "recall": 0.9858156028368794, + "true_md": "Accounts payable and accrued expenses decreased $22,451,000 during 2020. A summary of the Company’s Accounts payable and accrued expenses follows:\n\n(1) Represents checks written before the end of the period which have not cleared the bank; therefore, the bank has not yet advanced cash to the Company. When the checks clear the bank, they will be funded through the Company's working cash line of credit. See Note 1(p) in the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.\n\nOther liabilities increased $694,000 during 2020. A summary of the Company’s Other liabilities follows:\n\nEquity Additional paid-in capital increased $95,998,000 during 2020 primarily due to the issuance of common stock under the Company's continuous common equity offering program (as discussed below under Liquidity and Capital Resources) and stock-based compensation (as discussed in Note 11 in the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements). EastGroup issued 709,924 shares of common stock under its continuous common equity offering program with net proceeds to the Company of $92,663,000.\n\nDuring 2020, Distributions in excess of earnings increased $13,365,000 as a result of dividends on common stock of $121,728,000 exceeding Net Income Attributable to EastGroup Properties, Inc. Common Stockholders of $108,363,000.\n\nAccumulated other comprehensive income (loss) decreased $13,559,000 during 2020. The decrease resulted from the change in fair value of the Company's interest rate swaps (cash flow hedges) which are further discussed in Notes 12 and 13 in the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.\n\n29\n\n## Equity Additional paid-in capital" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.976179869745855, + "doc_id": "21de9b74df2a697fda4c422108fcdf0b4864e0d28ae6e76952087d4a4adab577", + "edit_distance": 0.04497354497354497, + "f1_score": 0.9843971631205675, + "meteor": 0.9870405570904016, + "precision": 0.9886039886039886, + "pred_md": "## Table of Contents\n\n## Competitive Pay and Comprehensive Benefits\n\nWe offer competitive pay and comprehensive benefits that support the physical, emotional and financial well-being of our team members. We're committed to providing medical coverage that is both affordable and flexible along with health care navigation and support tools. Additionally, we launched a well-being program in 2020 to help team members and their families make lasting changes in four key areas: physical, emotional, financial and work.\n\nOur internal recognition programs give team members and customers the opportunity to show their appreciation for a job well done. In 2019, our team members were recognized by customers, peers and company leaders more than 2.5 million times. Last year, we launched a new Nonstop Thanks program whereby team members award each other points for a job well done or as an expression of gratitude. Those points can be redeemed for items in an online catalog. Every quarter, hundreds of team members are nominated for the Chairman's Award, the highest honor that we bestow upon our team members.\n\n## Effects of the COVID-19 Pandemic\n\nThe COVID-19 pandemic has resulted in a severe decline in demand for our services. In 2020, we moved quickly to better align our costs with our reduced schedule. In addition to other cost reduction measures discussed below, we suspended all non-essential hiring, paused non-contractual pay rate increases, reduced executive and board of director compensation, implemented voluntary leave and early retirement programs and decreased our management and support staff team, including officers, by approximately 30%. In total, more than 20,000 team members opted for an early retirement or long-term partially paid leave.\n\nPursuant to the payroll support program (PSP1) established under the Coronavirus Aid, Relief, and Economic Security Act, as amended (the CARES Act), the U.S. Department of the Treasury (Treasury) provided us with an aggregate of $6.0 billion of financial assistance in 2020. These funds were used to fund eligible salaries, wages and benefits of our team members. Due to the effects of the COVID-19 pandemic, we involuntarily furloughed certain team members starting October 1, 2020.\n\nPursuant to the payroll support program (PSP2) established under Subtitle A of Title IV of Division N of the Consolidated Appropriations Act, 2021 (PSP Extension Law), Treasury is to provide us financial assistance to be paid in installments expected to total at least $3.0 billion in the aggregate, of which $1.5 billion was received on January 15, 2021. Using these funds, we recalled the involuntarily furloughed team members covered by PSP2 and provided them with back pay to December 1, 2020. PSP2 includes restrictions on involuntary furloughs and reductions in employee pay rates and benefits through March 31, 2021.\n\nOn February 5, 2021, we informed approximately 13,000 U.S.-based team members of the possibility of a workforce reduction at their work location. We expect that any workforce reductions will take effect on or after April 1, 2021. In connection with this notification, we announced the reopening of the voluntary early out and long-term leave of absence programs for team members of certain represented workgroups. Eligible team members must opt in by February 26, 2021 for the early out program and March 12, 2021 for the voluntary leave program.\n\nOur future success depends in large part on our ability to attract, develop and retain highly qualified management, technical and other personnel. For more discussion, see Part I, Item 1A. Risk Factors 'The loss of key personnel upon whom we depend to operate our business or the inability to attract and develop additional qualified personnel could adversely affect our business.'\n\n## Labor Relations\n\nIn 2020, salaries, wages and benefits were our largest expense and represented 45% of our total operating expenses. As of December 31, 2020, we had approximately 102,700 active full-time equivalent employees, approximately 84% of whom were represented by various labor unions responsible for negotiating the collective bargaining agreements (CBAs) governing their compensation and job duties, among other things.\n\n12", + "recall": 0.980225988700565, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## Competitive Pay and Comprehensive Benefits\n\n## Effects of the COVID-19 Pandemic\n\n## Labor Relations\n\nWe offer competitive pay and comprehensive benefits that support the physical, emotional and financial well-being of our team members. We’re committed to providing medical coverage that is both affordable and flexible along with health care navigation and support tools. Additionally, we launched a well-being program in 2020 to help team members and their families make lasting changes in four key areas: physical, emotional, financial and work.\n\nOur internal recognition programs give team members and customers the opportunity to show their appreciation for a job well done. In 2019, our team members were recognized by customers, peers and company leaders more than 2.5 million times. Last year, we launched a new Nonstop Thanks program whereby team members award each other points for a job well done or as an expression of gratitude. Those points can be redeemed for items in an online catalog. Every quarter, hundreds of team members are nominated for the Chairman’s Award, the highest honor that we bestow upon our team members.\n\nThe COVID-19 pandemic has resulted in a severe decline in demand for our services. In 2020, we moved quickly to better align our costs with our reduced schedule. In addition to other cost reduction measures discussed below, we suspended all non-essential hiring, paused non-contractual pay rate increases, reduced executive and board of director compensation, implemented voluntary leave and early retirement programs and decreased our management and support staff team, including officers, by approximately 30%. In total, more than 20,000 team members opted for an early retirement or long-term partially paid leave.\n\nPursuant to the payroll support program (PSP1) established under the Coronavirus Aid, Relief, and Economic Security Act, as amended (the CARES Act), the U.S. Department of the Treasury (Treasury) provided us with an aggregate of $6.0 billion of financial assistance in 2020. These funds were used to fund eligible salaries, wages and benefits of our team members. Due to the effects of the COVID-19 pandemic, we involuntarily furloughed certain team members starting October 1, 2020.\n\nPursuant to the payroll support program (PSP2) established under Subtitle A of Title IV of Division N of the Consolidated Appropriations Act, 2021 (PSP Extension Law), Treasury is to provide us financial assistance to be paid in installments expected to total at least $3.0 billion in the aggregate, of which $1.5 billion was received on January 15, 2021. Using these funds, we recalled the involuntarily furloughed team members covered by PSP2 and provided them with back pay to December 1, 2020. PSP2 includes restrictions on involuntary furloughs and reductions in employee pay rates and benefits through March 31, 2021.\n\nOn February 5, 2021, we informed approximately 13,000 U.S.-based team members of the possibility of a workforce reduction at their work location. We expect that any workforce reductions will take effect on or after April 1, 2021. In connection with this notification, we announced the reopening of the voluntary early out and long-term leave of absence programs for team members of certain represented workgroups. Eligible team members must opt in by February 26, 2021 for the early out program and March 12, 2021 for the voluntary leave program.\n\nOur future success depends in large part on our ability to attract, develop and retain highly qualified management, technical and other personnel. For more discussion, see Part I, Item 1A. Risk Factors – “The loss of key personnel upon whom we depend to operate our business or the inability to attract and develop additional qualified personnel could adversely affect our business.”\n\nIn 2020, salaries, wages and benefits were our largest expense and represented 45% of our total operating expenses. As of December 31, 2020, we had approximately 102,700 active full-time equivalent employees, approximately 84% of whom were represented by various labor unions responsible for negotiating the collective bargaining agreements (CBAs) governing their compensation and job duties, among other things.\n\n12" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9512636994655952, + "doc_id": "51e1cec0a95d74f92691643d8d20ca8d74f28de5a26087f186cf3f0b22166050", + "edit_distance": 0.29965156794425085, + "f1_score": 0.9902280130293161, + "meteor": 0.9308423337652864, + "precision": 0.987012987012987, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS OF AMERICAN AIRLINES GROUP INC .\n\n## 2. Special Items, Net\n\nSpecial items, net on our consolidated statements of operations consisted of the following (in millions):\n\nYear Ended December 31,\n\nTable of Contents\n\nPSP1\tFinancial\tAssistance\trepresents\trecognition\tof\tfinancial\tassistance\treceived\tfrom\tTreasury\tpursuant\tto\tthe\tPSP1\tAgreement.\tSee\tNote\t1(b) for\tfurther\tinformation. (1)\n\nThe\t2020\tfleet\timpairment\tresulted\tfrom\tour\tdecision\tto\tretire\tcertain\taircraft\tearlier\tthan\tplanned\tdriven\tby\tthe\tsevere\tdecline\tin\tair\ttravel\tdue to\tthe\tCOVID-19\tpandemic.\tAircraft\tretired\tinclude\tAirbus\tA330-200,\tBoeing\t757,\tBoeing\t767,\tAirbus\tA330-300,\tEmbraer\t190,\tcertain\tEmbraer 140\tand\tBombardier\tCRJ200\taircraft.\tThis\tincluded\ta\t$1.5\tbillion\tnon-cash\twrite-down\tof\tmainline\tand\tregional\taircraft\tand\tspare\tparts\tand\t$109 million\t in\t cash\t charges\t primarily\t for\t impairment\t of\t ROU\t assets\t and\t lease\t return\t costs.\t See\t Note\t 1(g)\t for\t further\t information\t related\t to\t these charges. (2)\n\nThe 2019 fleet impairment principally included a non-cash write-down of aircraft related to the retirement of our Embraer 190 fleet.\n\nThe\t2020\tseverance\texpenses\tincluded\tsalary\tand\tmedical\tcosts\tprimarily\tassociated\twith\tcertain\tteam\tmembers\twho\topted\tin\tto\tvoluntary\tearly retirement\tprograms\toffered\tas\ta\tresult\tof\treductions\tto\tour\toperation\tdue\tto\tthe\tCOVID-19\tpandemic.\tCash\tpayments\trelated\tto\tthese\tcharges for\tthe\tyear\tended\tDecember\t31,\t2020\twere\tapproximately\t$365\tmillion. (3)\n\nThe 2019 and 2018 severance expenses primarily included costs associated with reductions of management and support staff team members.\n\n108", + "recall": 0.9934640522875817, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS OF AMERICAN AIRLINES GROUP INC .\n\n## 2. Special Items, Net\n\nSpecial items, net on our consolidated statements of operations consisted of the following (in millions):\n\nThe 2019 fleet impairment principally included a non-cash write-down of aircraft related to the retirement of our Embraer 190 fleet.\n\nThe 2019 and 2018 severance expenses primarily included costs associated with reductions of management and support staff team members.\n\n- PSP1 Financial Assistance represents recognition of financial assistance received from Treasury pursuant to the PSP1 Agreement. See Note 1(b) for further information. (1)\n\n- The 2020 fleet impairment resulted from our decision to retire certain aircraft earlier than planned driven by the severe decline in air travel due to the COVID-19 pandemic. Aircraft retired include Airbus A330-200, Boeing 757, Boeing 767, Airbus A330-300, Embraer 190, certain Embraer 140 and Bombardier CRJ200 aircraft. This included a $1.5 billion non-cash write-down of mainline and regional aircraft and spare parts and $109 million in cash charges primarily for impairment of ROU assets and lease return costs. See Note 1(g) for further information related to these charges. (2)\n\n- The 2020 severance expenses included salary and medical costs primarily associated with certain team members who opted in to voluntary early retirement programs offered as a result of reductions to our operation due to the COVID-19 pandemic. Cash payments related to these charges for the year ended December 31, 2020 were approximately $365 million. (3)\n\n108" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.016901906676937396, + "doc_id": "4f96f1ca0c2ff92e86737a219d22d517688180c72ef289de6728026328af634d", + "edit_distance": 0.9832134292565947, + "f1_score": 0.12949640287769784, + "meteor": 0.19470899470899472, + "precision": 0.06923076923076923, + "pred_md": "## FLOWSERVE CORPORATION\n\n## FORM 10-K\n\nPage\n\nTABLE OF CONTENTS\n\nTABLE OF CONTENTS\n\n| PART I | PART I | PART I |\n|------------|------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|----------|\n| Item 1. | Business | 1 |\n| Item 1A. | Risk Factors | 13 |\n| Item 1B. | Unresolved Staff Comments | 25 |\n| Item 2. | Properties | 25 |\n| Item 3. | Legal Proceedings | 26 |\n| Item 4. | Mine Safety Disclosures | 26 |\n| PART II | PART II | PART II |\n| Item 5. | Market for the Registrant's Common Equity, Related Stockholder Matters and Issuer Purchases of Equity Securities | 26 |\n| Item 6. | Selected Financial Data | 29 |\n| Item 7. | Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations | 30 |\n| Item 7A. | Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures About Market Risk | 55 |\n| Item 8. | Financial Statements and Supplementary Data | 56 |\n| Item 9. | Changes in and Disagreements with Accountants on Accounting and Financial Disclosure | 116 |\n| Item 9A. | Controls and Procedures | 116 |\n| Item 9B. | Other Information | 117 |\n| PART III | PART III | PART III |\n| Item 10. | Directors, Executive Officers and Corporate Governance | 117 |\n| Item 11. | Executive Compensation | 118 |\n| Item 12. | Security Ownership of Certain Beneficial Owners and Management and Related Stockholder Matters | 118 |\n| Item 13. | Certain Relationships and Related Transactions, and Director Independence | 118 |\n| Item 14. | Principal Accountant Fees and Services | 118 |\n| PART IV | PART IV | PART IV |\n| Item 15. | Exhibits and Financial Statement Schedules | 118 |\n| Item 16. | Form 10-K Summary | 122 |\n| Signatures | | 123 |\n\ni", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "## TABLE OF CONTENTS\n\n## FLOWSERVE CORPORATION FORM 10-K\n\ni" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8022155587137966, + "doc_id": "2db51afec95dde3d32386f392347faf03888a20d360a5d91cec97969b8747371", + "edit_distance": 0.3423913043478261, + "f1_score": 0.9971098265895956, + "meteor": 0.7815484301798639, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "EASTGROUP PROPERTIES, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES\n\nNOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\nThe Company reviews long-lived assets for impairment whenever events or changes in circumstances indicate the carrying amount of an asset may not be recoverable. Recoverability of assets to be held and used is measured by a comparison of the carrying amount of an asset to future undiscounted net cash flows (including estimated future expenditures necessary to substantially complete the asset) expected to be generated by the asset. If the carrying amount of an asset exceeds its estimated future cash flows, an impairment charge is recognized for the amount by which the carrying amount of the asset exceeds the fair value of the asset. During the years ended December 31, 2020 and 2019, the Company did not identify any impairment charges which should be recorded.\n\nDepreciation of buildings and other improvements is computed using the straight-line method over estimated useful lives of generally 40 years for buildings and 3 to 15 years for improvements. Building improvements are capitalized, while maintenance and repair expenses are charged to expense as incurred. Significant renovations and improvements that improve or extend the useful life of the assets are capitalized. Depreciation expense was $96,290,000, $86,590,000 and $76,007,000 for 2020, 2019 and 2018, respectively.\n\n## (e) Development and Value-Add Properties\n\nFor properties under development and value-add properties (defined in Note 2) acquired in the development stage, costs associated with development (i.e., land, construction costs, interest expense, property taxes and other direct and indirect costs associated with development) are aggregated into the total capitalized costs of the property. Included in these costs are management's estimates for the portions of internal costs (primarily personnel costs) deemed related to such development activities. The internal costs are allocated to specific development projects based on development activity. As the property becomes occupied, depreciation commences on the occupied portion of the building, and costs are capitalized only for the portion of the building that remains vacant. The Company transfers properties from the development and value-add program to Real estate properties as follows: (i) for development properties, at the earlier of 90% occupancy or one year after completion of the shell construction, and (ii) for value-add properties, at the earlier of 90% occupancy or one year after acquisition. Upon the earlier of 90% occupancy or one year after completion of the shell construction, capitalization of development costs, including interest expense, property taxes and internal personnel costs, ceases and depreciation commences on the entire property (excluding the land).\n\n## (f) Real Estate Held for Sale\n\nThe Company considers a real estate property to be held for sale when it meets the criteria established under ASC 360, Property, Plant and Equipment, including when it is probable that the property will be sold within a year. Real estate properties held for sale are reported at the lower of the carrying amount or fair value less estimated costs to sell and are not depreciated while they are held for sale.\n\nIn accordance with ASU 2014-08, Presentation of Financial Statements (Topic 205) and Property, Plant, and Equipment (Topic 360), Reporting Discontinued Operations and Disclosures of Disposals of Components of an Entity, the Company would report a disposal of a component of an entity or a group of components of an entity in discontinued operations if the disposal represents a strategic shift that has (or will have) a major effect on an entity's operations and financial results when the component or group of components meets the criteria to be classified as held for sale or when the component or group of components is disposed of by sale or other than by sale. In addition, the Company would provide additional disclosures about both discontinued operations and the disposal of an individually significant component of an entity that does not qualify for discontinued operations presentation in the financial statements. EastGroup performs an analysis of properties sold to determine whether the sales qualify for discontinued operations presentation.\n\n## (g) Derivative Instruments and Hedging Activities\n\nEastGroup applies ASC 815, Derivatives and Hedging , which requires all entities with derivative instruments to disclose information regarding how and why the entity uses derivative instruments and how derivative instruments and related hedged items affect the entity's financial position, financial performance and cash flows. See Note 13 for a discussion of the Company's derivative instruments and hedging activities.\n\n## (h) Cash Equivalents\n\nThe Company considers all highly liquid investments with a maturity of three months or less when purchased to be cash equivalents.\n\n## (i) Amortization\n\nDebt origination costs are deferred and amortized over the term of each loan using the effective interest method. Amortization of debt issuance costs was $1,418,000, $1,344,000 and $1,352,000 for 2020, 2019 and 2018, respectively. Amortization of facility fees was $790,000, $790,000 and $736,000 for 2020, 2019 and 2018, respectively.\n\n56", + "recall": 0.9942363112391931, + "true_md": "EASTGROUP PROPERTIES, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS\n\nThe Company reviews long-lived assets for impairment whenever events or changes in circumstances indicate the carrying amount of an asset may not be recoverable. Recoverability of assets to be held and used is measured by a comparison of the carrying amount of an asset to future undiscounted net cash flows (including estimated future expenditures necessary to substantially complete the asset) expected to be generated by the asset. If the carrying amount of an asset exceeds its estimated future cash flows, an impairment charge is recognized for the amount by which the carrying amount of the asset exceeds the fair value of the asset. During the years ended December 31, 2020 and 2019, the Company did not identify any impairment charges which should be recorded.\n\nDepreciation of buildings and other improvements is computed using the straight-line method over estimated useful lives of generally 40 years for buildings and 3 to 15 years for improvements. Building improvements are capitalized, while maintenance and repair expenses are charged to expense as incurred. Significant renovations and improvements that improve or extend the useful life of the assets are capitalized. Depreciation expense was $96,290,000, $86,590,000 and $76,007,000 for 2020, 2019 and 2018, respectively.\n\n## (e) Development and Value-Add Properties For properties under development and value-add properties (defined in Note 2) acquired in the development stage, costs associated with development (i.e., land, construction costs, interest expense, property taxes and other direct\n\n## (f) Real Estate Held for Sale The Company considers a real estate property to be held for sale when it meets the criteria established under ASC 360,\n\n## (g) Derivative Instruments and Hedging Activities EastGroup applies ASC 815, Derivatives and Hedging , which requires all entities with derivative instruments to disclose information regarding how and why the entity uses derivative instruments and how derivative instruments and\n\n## (h) Cash Equivalents The Company considers all highly liquid investments with a maturity of three months or less when purchased to be cash equivalents.\n\n## (i) Amortization Debt origination costs are deferred and amortized over the term of each loan using the effective interest method. Amortization of debt issuance costs was $1,418,000, $1,344,000 and $1,352,000 for 2020, 2019 and 2018,\n\n(e) Development and Value-Add Properties For properties under development and value-add properties (defined in Note 2) acquired in the development stage, costs associated with development (i.e., land, construction costs, interest expense, property taxes and other direct and indirect costs associated with development) are aggregated into the total capitalized costs of the property. Included in these costs are management’s estimates for the portions of internal costs (primarily personnel costs) deemed related to such development activities. The internal costs are allocated to specific development projects based on development activity. As the property becomes occupied, depreciation commences on the occupied portion of the building, and costs are capitalized only for the portion of the building that remains vacant. The Company transfers properties from the development and value-add program to Real estate properties as follows: (i) for development properties, at the earlier of 90% occupancy or one year after completion of the shell construction, and (ii) for value-add properties, at the earlier of 90% occupancy or one year after acquisition. Upon the earlier of 90% occupancy or one year after completion of the shell construction, capitalization of development costs, including interest expense, property taxes and internal personnel costs, ceases and depreciation commences on the entire property (excluding the land).\n\nIn accordance with ASU 2014-08, Presentation of Financial Statements (Topic 205) and Property, Plant, and Equipment (Topic 360), Reporting Discontinued Operations and Disclosures of Disposals of Components of an Entity, the Company would report a disposal of a component of an entity or a group of components of an entity in discontinued operations if the disposal represents a strategic shift that has (or will have) a major effect on an entity's operations and financial results when the component or group of components meets the criteria to be classified as held for sale or when the component or group of components is disposed of by sale or other than by sale. In addition, the Company would provide additional disclosures about both discontinued operations and the disposal of an individually significant component of an entity that does not qualify for discontinued operations presentation in the financial statements. EastGroup performs an analysis of properties sold to determine whether the sales qualify for discontinued operations presentation.\n\n(g) Derivative Instruments and Hedging Activities EastGroup applies ASC 815, Derivatives and Hedging , which requires all entities with derivative instruments to disclose information regarding how and why the entity uses derivative instruments and how derivative instruments and related hedged items affect the entity’s financial position, financial performance and cash flows. See Note 13 for a discussion of the Company's derivative instruments and hedging activities.\n\n(h) Cash Equivalents The Company considers all highly liquid investments with a maturity of three months or less when purchased to be cash equivalents.\n\n(i) Amortization Debt origination costs are deferred and amortized over the term of each loan using the effective interest method. Amortization of debt issuance costs was $1,418,000, $1,344,000 and $1,352,000 for 2020, 2019 and 2018, respectively. Amortization of facility fees was $790,000, $790,000 and $736,000 for 2020, 2019 and 2018, respectively. \n\n(f) Real Estate Held for Sale The Company considers a real estate property to be held for sale when it meets the criteria established under ASC 360, Property, Plant and Equipment, including when it is probable that the property will be sold within a year. Real estate properties held for sale are reported at the lower of the carrying amount or fair value less estimated costs to sell and are not depreciated while they are held for sale.\n\n56" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9145765392088578, + "doc_id": "78a8072a6e65707e0b89e44eb6bb70538c325608432a4db6776e4b2b27e43904", + "edit_distance": 0.07003891050583658, + "f1_score": 0.9820554649265907, + "meteor": 0.9543924284881536, + "precision": 0.9868852459016394, + "pred_md": "## Table of Contents\n\n## Patents and Licenses\n\nApplied's competitive position significantly depends upon its research, development, engineering, manufacturing and marketing capabilities, as well as its patent position. Protection of Applied's technology assets through enforcement of its intellectual property rights, including patents, is important. Applied's practice is to file patent applications in the United States and other countries for inventions that it considers significant. Applied has approximately 14,300 patents in the United States and other countries, and additional applications are pending for new inventions. Although Applied does not consider its business materially dependent upon any one patent, the rights of Applied and the products made and sold under its patents, taken as a whole, are a significant element of its business. In addition to its patents, Applied possesses other intellectual property, including trademarks, know-how, trade secrets, and copyrights.\n\nApplied enters into patent and technology licensing agreements with other companies when it is determined to be in its best interest. Applied pays royalties under existing patent license agreements for the use, in several of its products, of certain patented technologies. Applied also receives royalties from licenses granted to third parties. Royalties received from or paid to third parties have not been material to Applied's consolidated results of operations.\n\nIn the normal course of business, Applied periodically receives and makes inquiries regarding possible patent infringement. In responding to such inquiries, it may become necessary or useful for Applied to obtain or grant licenses or other rights. However, there can be no assurance that such licenses or rights will be available to Applied on commercially reasonable terms, or at all. If Applied is not able to resolve or settle claims, obtain necessary licenses on commercially reasonable terms, or successfully prosecute or defend its position, Applied's business, financial condition and results of operations could be materially and adversely affected.\n\n## Governmental Regulation\n\nAs a public company with global operations, Applied is subject to the laws and regulations of the United States and multiple foreign jurisdictions. These regulations, which differ among jurisdictions, include those related to financial and other disclosures, accounting standards, corporate governance, intellectual property, tax, trade, antitrust, employment, immigration and travel regulations, privacy, and anti-corruption.\n\nWith respect to environmental, health and safety regulation, Applied maintains a number of programs that are primarily preventative in nature and regularly monitors ongoing compliance with applicable laws and regulations. In addition, Applied has trained personnel to conduct investigations of any environmental, health, or safety incidents, including, but not limited to, spills, releases, or possible contamination. See also ' Risk Factors Risks Related to Legal and Compliance - Applied is subject to risks associated with environmental, health and safety regulations ' for further details.\n\nApplied is subject to income taxes in the United States and foreign jurisdictions. Applied's provision for income taxes and effective tax rate could be affected by numerous factors, including changes in applicable tax laws, interpretations of applicable tax laws, amount and composition of pre-tax income in jurisdictions with differing tax rates, and valuation of deferred tax assets. See ' Risk Factors - Risks Related to Legal and Compliance Applied is exposed to risks associated with operating in jurisdictions with complex and changing tax laws '. For additional discussions regarding the impact of compliance with income tax laws and regulations on Applied's business and operations, see also ' Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations- Results of Operations - Income Taxes ' and 'Note 15 of the Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements'.\n\nAdditionally, Applied is regulated under various international laws regarding the purchase and sale of goods and related items, including but not limited to those related to imposition of tariffs and other taxes, requirements for import/export licenses and limitations on transfer of intellectual property. See ' Risk Factors - Risks Associated with Operating a Global Business - International trade disputes could result in increase in tariffs and other trade restrictions and protectionist measures that could have an adverse impact on our operations ' for further details.\n\n11", + "recall": 0.9772727272727273, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\nApplied’s competitive position significantly depends upon its research, development, engineering, manufacturing and marketing capabilities, as well as its patent position. Protection of Applied’s technology assets through enforcement of its intellectual property rights, including patents, is important. Applied’s practice is to file patent applications in the United States and other countries for inventions that it considers significant. Applied has approximately 14,300 patents in the United States and other countries, and additional applications are pending for new inventions. Although Applied does not consider its business materially dependent upon any one patent, the rights of Applied and the products made and sold under its patents, taken as a whole, are a significant element of its business. In addition to its patents, Applied possesses other intellectual property, including trademarks, know-how, trade secrets, and copyrights.\n\nApplied enters into patent and technology licensing agreements with other companies when it is determined to be in its best interest. Applied pays royalties under existing patent license agreements for the use, in several of its products, of certain patented technologies. Applied also receives royalties from licenses granted to third parties. Royalties received from or paid to third parties have not been material to Applied’s consolidated results of operations.\n\nIn the normal course of business, Applied periodically receives and makes inquiries regarding possible patent infringement. In responding to such inquiries, it may become necessary or useful for Applied to obtain or grant licenses or other rights. However, there can be no assurance that such licenses or rights will be available to Applied on commercially reasonable terms, or at all. If Applied is not able to resolve or settle claims, obtain necessary licenses on commercially reasonable terms, or successfully prosecute or defend its position, Applied’s business, financial condition and results of operations could be materially and adversely affected.\n\nAs a public company with global operations, Applied is subject to the laws and regulations of the United States and multiple foreign jurisdictions. These regulations, which differ among jurisdictions, include those related to financial and other disclosures, accounting standards, corporate governance, intellectual property, tax, trade, antitrust, employment, immigration and travel regulations, privacy, and anti-corruption.\n\nWith respect to environmental, health and safety regulation, Applied maintains a number of programs that are primarily preventative in nature and regularly monitors ongoing compliance with applicable laws and regulations. In addition, Applied has trained personnel to conduct investigations of any environmental, health, or safety incidents, including, but not limited to, spills, releases, or possible contamination. See also “ Risk Factors – Risks Related to Legal and Compliance - Applied is subject to risks associated with environmental, health and safety regulations ” for further details.\n\nApplied is subject to income taxes in the United States and foreign jurisdictions. Applied’s provision for income taxes and effective tax rate could be affected by numerous factors, including changes in applicable tax laws, interpretations of applicable tax laws, amount and composition of pre-tax income in jurisdictions with differing tax rates, and valuation of deferred tax assets. See “ Risk Factors – Risks Related to Legal and Compliance – Applied is exposed to risks associated with operating in jurisdictions with complex and changing tax laws ”. For additional discussions regarding the impact of compliance with income tax laws and regulations on Applied’s business and operations, see also “ Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations– Results of Operations – Income Taxes ” and “Note 15 of the Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements”.\n\nAdditionally, Applied is regulated under various international laws regarding the purchase and sale of goods and related items, including but not limited to those related to imposition of tariffs and other taxes, requirements for import/export licenses and limitations on transfer of intellectual property. See “ Risk Factors – Risks Associated with Operating a Global Business – International trade disputes could result in increase in tariffs and other trade restrictions and protectionist measures that could have an adverse impact on our operations ” for further details.\n\n11\n\n## Governmental Regulation\n\n## Patents and Licenses" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9765268643434584, + "doc_id": "9aa2d515496193fd4cc65dd22a434213d8873cd6281724b9f36d7dcfe2348042", + "edit_distance": 0.045454545454545456, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9999941303531179, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## Operating Revenues\n\nTable of Contents\n\nTotal operating revenues in 2020 decreased $28.4 billion, or 62.1%, from 2019, primarily due to a severe decline in passenger demand and government travel restrictions related to the COVID-19 pandemic.\n\n## Operating Expenses\n\nTotal operating expenses decreased $15.2 billion, or 35.5%, in 2020 from 2019 due to American's reduced schedule and cost reduction actions as described in the \"2020 Financial Overview\" above.\n\nDepreciation and amortization increased $58 million, or 3.0%, in 2020 from 2019 due in part to accelerated depreciation for certain aircraft and related equipment expected to be retired earlier than planned. Depreciation associated with facility improvements also contributed to the increase.\n\n74", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## Operating Revenues\n\nTotal operating revenues in 2020 decreased $28.4 billion, or 62.1%, from 2019, primarily due to a severe decline in passenger demand and government travel restrictions related to the COVID-19 pandemic.\n\n## Operating Expenses\n\nTotal operating expenses decreased $15.2 billion, or 35.5%, in 2020 from 2019 due to American's reduced schedule and cost reduction actions as described in the \"2020 Financial Overview\" above.\n\nDepreciation and amortization increased $58 million, or 3.0%, in 2020 from 2019 due in part to accelerated depreciation for certain aircraft and related equipment expected to be retired earlier than planned. Depreciation associated with facility improvements also contributed to the increase.\n\n74" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9205666005233449, + "doc_id": "b10fca2df90ab9431fd9a658946cd6f7f3c7faf6874e98d026d520b1a981165b", + "edit_distance": 0.07917888563049853, + "f1_score": 0.9837037037037037, + "meteor": 0.9726922251128522, + "precision": 0.9880952380952381, + "pred_md": "## Table of Contents\n\nwhich have allowed them to grow quickly, reinvest in their product and expand their global presence. We expect this to continue after the COVID-19 pandemic subsides. Competition had also been increasing from low-cost airlines executing international long-haul expansion strategies, a trend we also expect to continue after the COVID-19 pandemic subsides and the delivery of planned, long-range narrowbody aircraft commences.\n\nIn order to increase our ability to compete for international air transportation service, which is subject to extensive government regulation, U.S. and foreign carriers have entered into bilateral and multilateral marketing relationships, alliances, cooperation agreements and joint business agreements to exchange traffic among each other's flights and route networks. See ' Distribution and Marketing Agreements ' above for further discussion.\n\n## Our People\n\nThe airline business is labor intensive, and our team members are our most important asset. The operational complexity of our business requires a diverse team of personnel trained and experienced in a variety of technical areas such as flight operations, ground operations, safety and maintenance, customer service, and airline scheduling and planning. We believe that if we create an environment where our team members feel supported, they will take care of our customers and thereby support the success of our business. To do this, we must continue to build a diverse and inclusive environment, helping all team members reach their full potential and providing them with the right resources and support.\n\n## Talent Development\n\nWe give our team members the tools, training and resources they need to do their best work and stay true to our purpose - caring for people on life's journey. We have a suite of programs aimed at helping our people develop the skills and experience to succeed in their roles and build rewarding, long-term careers within our company. Additionally, we've partnered with leading online learning platforms to make professional development available on-demand to all our team members.\n\n## Diversity, Equity and Inclusion\n\nCultivating an environment that celebrates diversity, equity and inclusion (DEI) is a top priority for us, and we seek to create a workplace where diverse perspectives and experiences are welcomed and encouraged, where team members feel comfortable to be their authentic selves and where we are always learning from one another. In 2020, we:\n\n- · established the role of Chief Inclusion and Diversity Officer and created the DEI office within our talent function so that hiring and development is viewed through the lens of equity and inclusion;\n- · formed a team member experience organization to listen to the concerns of team members;\n- · launched an Executive Sponsorship Program whereby a group of 15 Black leaders have been paired with an executive leader for a year-long mentorship program; this program will be scaled to an expanded audience starting in late 2021;\n- · created an implicit bias training program delivered to approximately 105,000 team members;\n- · launched an external community council composed of executives and a cross-section of Black community leaders to provide feedback on our company initiatives; and\n- · formed a specialized customer relations team to listen to, resolve and learn from customer complaints of discrimination.\n\n## Our DEI goals include:\n\n- · diversifying our leadership team by establishing specific objectives and laying out a plan to achieve them, including by enhancing our recruiting, development and mentoring programs;\n- · providing additional learning opportunities beyond implicit bias to generate further education and awareness of diversity and inclusion matters; and\n- · pledging to assist Black youth in developing job skills and expanding access to well-paying careers as part of our overall strategy to increase opportunities in our hub cities and Tulsa, Oklahoma, where our largest maintenance facility is based.\n\n11", + "recall": 0.9793510324483776, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\nwhich have allowed them to grow quickly, reinvest in their product and expand their global presence. We expect this to continue after the COVID-19 pandemic subsides. Competition had also been increasing from low-cost airlines executing international long-haul expansion strategies, a trend we also expect to continue after the COVID-19 pandemic subsides and the delivery of planned, long-range narrowbody aircraft commences.\n\nIn order to increase our ability to compete for international air transportation service, which is subject to extensive government regulation, U.S. and foreign carriers have entered into bilateral and multilateral marketing relationships, alliances, cooperation agreements and joint business agreements to exchange traffic among each other’s flights and route networks. See “ Distribution and Marketing Agreements ” above for further discussion.\n\nThe airline business is labor intensive, and our team members are our most important asset. The operational complexity of our business requires a diverse team of personnel trained and experienced in a variety of technical areas such as flight operations, ground operations, safety and maintenance, customer service, and airline scheduling and planning. We believe that if we create an environment where our team members feel supported, they will take care of our customers and thereby support the success of our business. To do this, we must continue to build a diverse and inclusive environment, helping all team members reach their full potential and providing them with the right resources and support.\n\nWe give our team members the tools, training and resources they need to do their best work and stay true to our purpose – caring for people on life’s journey. We have a suite of programs aimed at helping our people develop the skills and experience to succeed in their roles and build rewarding, long-term careers within our company. Additionally, we’ve partnered with leading online learning platforms to make professional development available on-demand to all our team members.\n\nCultivating an environment that celebrates diversity, equity and inclusion (DEI) is a top priority for us, and we seek to create a workplace where diverse perspectives and experiences are welcomed and encouraged, where team members feel comfortable to be their authentic selves and where we are always learning from one another. In 2020, we:\n\n11\n\n## Our People\n\n## Talent Development\n\n## Diversity, Equity and Inclusion\n\n- • established the role of Chief Inclusion and Diversity Officer and created the DEI office within our talent function so that hiring and development is viewed through the lens of equity and inclusion;\n\n- • formed a team member experience organization to listen to the concerns of team members;\n\n- • launched an Executive Sponsorship Program whereby a group of 15 Black leaders have been paired with an executive leader for a year-long mentorship program; this program will be scaled to an expanded audience starting in late 2021;\n\n- • created an implicit bias training program delivered to approximately 105,000 team members;\n\n- • launched an external community council composed of executives and a cross-section of Black community leaders to provide feedback on our company initiatives; and\n\n- • formed a specialized customer relations team to listen to, resolve and learn from customer complaints of discrimination.\n\nOur DEI goals include:\n\n- • diversifying our leadership team by establishing specific objectives and laying out a plan to achieve them, including by enhancing our recruiting, development and mentoring programs;\n\n- • providing additional learning opportunities beyond implicit bias to generate further education and awareness of diversity and inclusion matters; and\n\n- • pledging to assist Black youth in developing job skills and expanding access to well-paying careers as part of our overall strategy to increase opportunities in our hub cities and Tulsa, Oklahoma, where our largest maintenance facility is based." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9738849614031846, + "doc_id": "a15e46465acb78df58bdcc35b0176a2b6140266dff9c867c7d84917d0519924c", + "edit_distance": 0.03353658536585366, + "f1_score": 0.9827586206896551, + "meteor": 0.9914476788054485, + "precision": 0.9884393063583815, + "pred_md": "We also considered our market capitalization in our evaluation of the fair value of our goodwill. Our market capitalization decreased as compared with 2019, however this did not indicate a potential impairment of our goodwill as of December 31, 2020.\n\nImpairment losses for indefinite-lived intangible assets are recognized whenever the estimated fair value is less than the carrying value. Fair values are calculated for trademarks using a \"relief from royalty\" method, which estimates the fair value of a trademark by determining the present value of estimated royalty payments that are avoided as a result of owning the trademark. This method includes judgmental assumptions about sales growth and discount rates that have a significant impact on the fair value and are substantially consistent with the assumptions used to determine the fair value of our reporting unit discussed above. We did not record a material impairment of our trademarks in 2020, 2019 or 2018.\n\nThe recoverable value of other long-lived assets, including property, plant and equipment and finite-lived intangible assets, is reviewed when indicators of potential impairments are present. The recoverable value is based upon an assessment of the estimated future cash flows related to those assets, utilizing assumptions similar to those for goodwill. Additional considerations related to our long-lived assets include expected maintenance and improvements, changes in expected uses and ongoing operating performance and utilization.\n\nDue to uncertain market conditions and potential changes in strategy and product portfolio, it is possible that forecasts used to support asset carrying values may change in the future, which could result in non-cash charges that would adversely affect our financial condition and results of operations.\n\n## ACCOUNTING DEVELOPMENTS\n\nWe have presented the information about accounting pronouncements not yet implemented in Note 1 to our consolidated financial statements included in Item 8 of this Annual Report.\n\n54", + "recall": 0.9771428571428571, + "true_md": "We also considered our market capitalization in our evaluation of the fair value of our goodwill. Our market capitalization decreased as compared with 2019, however this did not indicate a potential impairment of our goodwill as of December 31, 2020.\n\nImpairment losses for indefinite-lived intangible assets are recognized whenever the estimated fair value is less than the carrying value. Fair values are calculated for trademarks using a \"relief from royalty\" method, which estimates the fair value of a trademark by determining the present value of estimated royalty payments that are avoided as a result of owning the trademark. This method includes judgmental assumptions about sales growth and discount rates that have a significant impact on the fair value and are substantially consistent with the assumptions used to determine the fair value of our reporting unit discussed above. We did not record a material impairment of our trademarks in 2020, 2019 or 2018.\n\nThe recoverable value of other long-lived assets, including property, plant and equipment and finite-lived intangible assets, is reviewed when indicators of potential impairments are present. The recoverable value is based upon an assessment of the estimated future cash flows related to those assets, utilizing assumptions similar to those for goodwill. Additional considerations related to our long-lived assets include expected maintenance and improvements, changes in expected uses and ongoing operating performance and utilization.\n\nDue to uncertain market conditions and potential changes in strategy and product portfolio, it is possible that forecasts used to support asset carrying values may change in the future, which could result in non-cash charges that would adversely affect our financial condition and results of operations.\n\nWe have presented the informatio n about accounting pronouncements not yet implemented in Note 1 to our consolidated financial statements included in Item 8 of this Annual Report.\n\n## ACCOUNTING DEVELOPMENT S\n\n54" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9797780949335702, + "doc_id": "8663b403fbecb569f22edde0764a34f77931590d8c12791900822c449aa60d20", + "edit_distance": 0.04927536231884058, + "f1_score": 0.9874055415617129, + "meteor": 0.9918295597180344, + "precision": 0.9949238578680203, + "pred_md": "Other expense, net decreased $7.3 million as compared to 2019, due to a $12.4 million increase in gains from transactions in currencies other than our sites' functional currencies, partially offset by a $3.8 million increase in losses from foreign exchange contracts. The net change was primarily due to the foreign currency exchange rate movements in the Canadian dollar, Mexican peso, Euro and Brazilian real in relation to the U.S. dollar during the year ended December 31, 2020, as compared with the same period in 2019.\n\nOther expense, net decreased $2.0 million in 2019, due to a $7.6 million decrease in losses from transactions in currencies other than our sites' functional currencies, partially offset by a $3.3 million increase in losses from foreign exchange contracts. The net change was primarily due to the foreign currency exchange rate movements in the Euro, Indian rupee, Singapore dollar and Mexican peso in relation to the U.S. dollar during the year ended December 31, 2019, as compared with the same period in 2018.\n\n## Tax Expense and Tax Rate\n\nOur effective tax rate of 32.1% for the year ended December 31, 2020 increased from 23.4% in 2019 primarily due to the establishment of a valuation allowance against certain deferred tax assets given the current and anticipated impact to the Company's operations resulting from the COVID-19 pandemic and the distressed oil prices. The 2020 effective tax rate differed from the federal statutory rate of 21% primarily due to the establishment of a valuation allowance described above. The 2019 effective tax rate differed from the federal statutory rate of 21% primarily due to state tax and foreign audit assessments, partially offset by the net impact of foreign operations. The 2018 effective tax rate differed from the federal statutory rate of 21% primarily due to the net impact of foreign operations, including losses in certain foreign jurisdictions for which no tax benefit was provided.\n\nOur effective tax rate is based upon current earnings and estimates of future taxable earnings for each domestic and international location. Changes in any of these and other factors, including our ability to utilize foreign tax credits and net operating losses or results from tax audits, could impact the tax rate in future periods. As of December 31, 2020, we have foreign tax credits of $35.9 million, expiring in 2026 and 2028-2030 tax years, against which we recorded a valuation allowance of $35.9 million. Additionally, we have recorded other net deferred tax assets of $30.5 million, which relate to net operating losses, tax credits and other deductible temporary differences that are available to reduce taxable income in future periods, most of which do not have a definite expiration. Should we not be able to utilize all or a portion of these credits and losses, our effective tax rate would increase.\n\n## Net Earnings and Earnings Per Share\n\nNet earnings in 2020 decreased by $122.5 million to $116.3 million, or to $0.89 per diluted share, as compared with 2019. The decrease was primarily attributable to a decrease in operating income of $136.3 million and a $6.6 million increase in interest expense, net, partially offset by a $7.3 million decrease in other expense, net and a $15.5 million decrease in tax expense.\n\nNet earnings in 2019 increased by $134.3 million to $238.8 million, or to $1.81 per diluted share, as compared with 2018. The increase was primarily attributable to an increase in operating income of $158.9 million, a $2.0 million decrease in other expense, net and a $5.1 million decrease in interest expense, net, partially offset by a $28.9 million increase in tax expense.\n\n40", + "recall": 0.98, + "true_md": "Other expense, net decreased $7.3 million as compared to 2019, due to a $12 .4 million increase in gains from transactions in currencies other than our sites' functional currencies, partially offset by a $3.8 million increase in losses from foreign exchange contracts. The net change was primarily due to the foreign currency exchange rate movem ents in the Canadian dollar, Mexican peso, Euro and Brazilian real in relation to the U.S. dollar during the year ended December 31, 2020, as compared with the same period in 2019.\n\nOther expense, net decreased $2.0 million in 2019, due to a $7.6 million decrease in losses from transactions in currencies other than our sites' functional currencies, partially offset by a $3.3 million increase in losses from foreign exchange contracts. The net change was primarily due to the foreign currency exchange rate movements in the Euro, Indian rupee, Singapore dollar and Mexican peso in relation to the U.S. dollar during the year ended December 31, 2019, as compared with the same period in 2018.\n\nOur effective tax rate of 32.1% for the year ended December 31, 2020 increased from 23.4% in 2019 primarily due to the establishment of a valuation allowance against certain deferred tax assets given the current and anticipated impact to the Company's operations resulting from the COVID-19 pandemic and the distressed oil prices. The 2020 effective tax rate differed from the federal statutory rate of 21% primarily due to the establishment of a valuation allowance described above. The 2019 effective tax rate differed from the federal statutory rate of 21% primarily due to state tax and foreign audit assessments, partially offset by the net impact of foreign operations. The 2018 effective tax rate differed from the federal statutory rate of 21% primarily due to the net impact of foreign operations, including losses in certain foreign jurisdictions for which no tax benefit was provided.\n\nOur effective tax rate is based upon current earnings and estimates of future taxable earnings for each domestic and international location. Changes in any of these and other factors, including our ability to utilize foreign tax credits and net operating losses or results from tax audits, could impact the tax rate in future periods. As of December 31, 2020, we have foreign tax credits of $35.9 million, expiring in 2026 and 2028-2030 tax years, against which we recorded a valuation allowance of $35.9 million. Additionally, we have recorded other net deferred tax assets of $30.5 million, which relate to net operating losses, tax credits and other deductible temporary differences that are available to reduce taxable income in future periods, most of which do not have a definite expiration. Should we not be able to utilize all or a portion of these credits and losses, our effective tax rate would increase.\n\nNet earnings in 2020 decreased by $122.5 million to $116.3 million, or to $0.89 per diluted share, as compared with 2019. The decrease was primarily attributable to a decrease in operating income of $136.3 million and a $6.6 million increase in interest expense, net, partially offset by a $7.3 million decrease in other expense, net and a $15.5 million decrease in tax expense.\n\nNet earnings in 2019 increased by $134.3 million to $238.8 million, or to $1.81 per diluted share, as compared with 2018. The increase was primarily attributable to an increase in operating income of $158.9 million, a $2.0 million decrease in other expense, net and a $5.1 million decrease in interest expense, net, partially offset by a $28.9 million increase in tax expense.\n\n## Net Earnings and Earnings Per Share\n\n## Tax Expense and Tax Rate\n\n40" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9793491373589468, + "doc_id": "cc8325efaa02206cce07118bf10ea5e8b70119b0b5ebadd3807d46e0ff0f5e02", + "edit_distance": 0.7825484764542936, + "f1_score": 0.9956709956709957, + "meteor": 0.7187610399148169, + "precision": 0.9971098265895953, + "pred_md": "\"black belts\" or \"green belts\" and deploying them to CIP led projects throughout the Company. As a result, we have developed and implemented processes to shorten engineering and manufacturing cycle times, improve on-time delivery and service response time, lower inventory levels and otherwise reduce costs. To date, over 800 of our employees are CIP certified.\n\n## Environmental Regulations and Proceedings\n\nWe are subject to environmental laws and regulations in all jurisdictions in which we have operating facilities. These requirements primarily relate to the generation and disposal of waste, air emissions and waste water discharges. We periodically make capital expenditures to enhance our compliance with environmental requirements, as well as to abate and control pollution. At present, we have no plans for any material capital expenditures for environmental control equipment at any of our facilities. However, we have incurred and continue to incur operating costs relating to ongoing environmental compliance matters. Based on existing and proposed environmental requirements and our anticipated production schedule, we believe that future environmental compliance expenditures will not have a material adverse effect on our financial condition, results of operations or cash flows.\n\nWe use hazardous substances and generate hazardous wastes in many of our manufacturing and foundry operations. Most of our current and former properties are or have been used for industrial purposes and some may require clean-up of historical contamination. During the due diligence phase of our acquisitions, we conduct environmental site assessments to identify potential environmental liabilities and required clean-up measures. We are currently conducting follow-up investigation and/or remediation activities at those locations where we have known environmental concerns. We have cleaned up a majority of the sites with known historical contamination and are addressing the remaining identified issues.\n\nOver the years, we have been involved as one of many potentially responsible parties (\"PRP\") at former public waste disposal sites that are or were subject to investigation and remediation. We are currently involved as a PRP at four Superfund sites. The sites are in various stages of evaluation by government authorities. Our total projected \"fair share\" cost allocation at these four sites is expected to be immaterial. See \"Item 3. Legal Proceedings\" included in this Annual Report for more information.\n\nWe have established reserves that we currently believe to be adequate to cover our currently identified on-site and off-site environmental liabilities.\n\n## Exports\n\nOur export sales from the U.S. to foreign unaffiliated customers were $264.6 million in 2020, $300.9 million in 2019 and $234.3 million in 2018.\n\nLicenses are required from U.S. and other government agencies to export certain products. In particular, products with nuclear power generation and/or military applications are restricted, as are certain other pump, valve and seal products.\n\n## BUSINESS SEGMENTS\n\nWe report a two operating segment structure, consisting of our Flowserve Pumps Division and our Flow Control Division. In addition to the business segment information presented below, Note 20 to our consolidated financial statements in Item 8 of this Annual Report contains additional financial information about our business segments and geographic areas in which we have conducted business in 2020, 2019 and 2018.\n\n## FLOWSERVE PUMP DIVISION\n\nOur largest business segment is FPD, through which we design, manufacture, pre-test, distribute and service specialty and highly-engineered custom and pre-configured pumps and pump systems, mechanical seals, auxiliary systems, replacement parts and upgrades and related aftermarket services (collectively referred to as \"aftermarket\"). FPD products and services are primarily used by companies that operate in the oil and gas, petrochemical, chemical, power generation, water management and general industries. We market our pump and mechanical seal products through our global sales force and our regional QRCs and service and repair centers or through independent distributors and sales representatives. A portion of our mechanical seal products are sold directly to other original equipment manufacturers for incorporation into their rotating equipment requiring mechanical seals.\n\n6", + "recall": 0.9942363112391931, + "true_md": "6\n\nOur largest business segment is FPD, through which we design, manufacture, pre-test, distribute and service specialty and highly-engineered custom and pre-configured pumps and pump systems, mechanical seals, auxiliary systems, replacement parts and upgrades and related aftermarket services (collectively referred to as \"aftermarket\"). FPD products and services are primarily used by companies that operate in the oil and gas, petrochemical, chemical, power generation, water management and general industries. We market our pump and mechanical seal products through our global sales force and our regional QRCs and service and repair centers or through independent distributors and sales representatives. A portion of our mechanical seal products are sold directly to other original equipment manufacturers for incorporation into their rotating equipment requiring mechanical seals.\n\n## FLOWSERVE PUMP DIVISION\n\n## BUSINESS SEGMENTS\n\n## Exports\n\nWe report a two operating segment structure, consisting of our Flowserve Pumps Division and our Flow Control Division. In addition to the business segment information presented below, Note 20 to our consolidated financial statements in Item 8 of this Annual Report contains additional financial information about our business segments and geographic areas in which we have conducted business in 2020, 2019 and 2018.\n\nOur export sales from the U.S. to foreign unaffiliated customers were $264.6 million in 2020, $300.9 million in 2019 and $234.3 million in 2018.\n\nLicenses are required from U.S. and other government agencies to export certain products. In particular, products with nuclear power generation and/or military applications are restricted, as are certain other pump, valve and seal products.\n\nWe have established reserves that we currently believe to be adequate to cover our currently identified on-site and off-site environmental liabilities.\n\nWe use hazardous substances and generate hazardous wastes in many of our manufacturing and foundry operations. Most of our current and former properties are or have been used for industrial purposes and some may require clean-up of historical contamination. During the due diligence phase of our acquisitions, we conduct environmental site assessments to identify potential environmental liabilities and required clean-up measures. We are currently conducting follow-up investigation and/or remediation activities at those locations where we have known environmental concerns. We have cleaned up a majority of the sites with known historical contamination and are addressing the remaining identified issues.\n\nOver the years, we have been involved as one of many potentially responsible parties (\"PRP\") at former public waste disposal sites that are or were subject to investigation and remediation. We are currently involved as a PRP at four Superfund sites. The sites are in various stages of evaluation by government authorities. Our total projected \"fair share\" cost allocation at these four sites is expected to be immaterial. See \"Item 3. Legal Proceedings\" included in this Annual Report for more information.\n\nWe are subject to environmental laws and regulations in all jurisdictions in which we have operating facilities. These requirements primarily relate to the generation and disposal of waste, air emissions and waste water discharges. We periodically make capital expenditures to enhance our compliance with environmental requirements, as well as to abate and control pollution. At present, we have no plans for any material capital expenditures for environmental control equipment at any of our facilities. However, we have incurred and continue to incur operating costs relating to ongoing environmental compliance matters. Based on existing and proposed environmental requirements and our anticipated production schedule, we believe that future environmental compliance expenditures will not have a material adverse effect on our financial condition, results of operations or cash flows.\n\n\"black belts\" or \"green belts\" and deploying them to CIP led projects throughout the Company. As a result, we have developed and implemented processes to shorten engineering and manufacturing cycle times, improve on-time delivery and service response time, lower inventory levels and otherwise reduce costs. To date, ov er 800 of our employees are CIP certified.\n\n## Environmental Regulations and Proceedings" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9705810385775694, + "doc_id": "a8c8857882dd5848cfdcc8cea2f2e87708aea8a416d8afa09e90cb9e8d7ee882", + "edit_distance": 0.07394366197183098, + "f1_score": 0.9921568627450981, + "meteor": 0.9963506707942346, + "precision": 0.9921568627450981, + "pred_md": "## Global Business Services:\n\nGBS competes in consulting, systems integration, application management and business process outsourcing services. The company competes with broad based competitors including: Accenture, Capgemini, DXC Technology (DXC), Fujitsu, Google and Microsoft; India-based service providers; the consulting practices of public accounting firms; and many companies that primarily focus on local markets or niche service areas.\n\n## Technology Services & Cloud Platforms:\n\nTechnology Services & Cloud Platforms competes in project services, managed and outsourcing services, cloud-delivered services, and a wide range of technical and IT support services. The company competes with IT service providers including: Atos, DXC, Fujitsu, HCL, Tata Consulting Services, Wipro and many companies that primarily focus on local markets or niche service areas. The company also competes with cloud platform vendors such as Amazon, Google, Microsoft and Oracle.\n\nThis segment also includes the company's Integration Software offerings. Integration Software helps clients address the digital imperatives to create, connect and optimize their applications, data and infrastructure on their journey to become cognitive businesses. The company competes with Amazon, BMC, Microsoft, Oracle and VMWare, as well as companies that primarily focus on niche solutions and offerings.\n\n## Systems:\n\nThe enterprise server and storage market is characterized by competition in technology and service innovation focused on value, function, reliability, price and cost performance. The company's principal competitors include Dell Technologies, Hewlett-Packard Enterprise (HPE), Intel and lower cost original device manufacturer systems that are often re-branded. Also, alternative as-a-service providers are leveraging innovation in technology and service delivery both to compete with traditional providers and to offer new routes to market for server and storage systems. These alternative providers include Amazon, Google, Microsoft, and IBM's own cloud-based services.\n\nThe company gains advantage and differentiation through investments in higher value capabilities-from semiconductor through software stack innovation-that increase efficiency, lower cost and improve performance. The company's research and development capabilities and intellectual property patent portfolio contribute significantly to this segment's leadership across areas as diverse as high performance computing, virtualization technologies, software optimization, power management, security, multi-operating system capabilities and open technologies like interconnect standards to be leveraged by broad ecosystems.\n\n## Global Financing:\n\nGlobal Financing provides client financing, commercial financing and participates in the remarketing of used equipment. Global Financing's access to capital and its ability to manage credit and residual value risk generates a competitive advantage for the company. The key competitive factors include interest rates charged, IT product experience, client service, contract flexibility, ease of doing business, global capabilities and residual values. In client and commercial financing, Global Financing competes with three types of companies in providing financial services to IT customers: other captive financing entities of IT companies such as Cisco and HPE, non-captive financing entities and banks or financial institutions. In remarketing, the company competes with local and regional brokers plus original manufacturers in the fragmented worldwide used IT equipment market.\n\n10", + "recall": 0.9921568627450981, + "true_md": "## Global Business Services:\n\n## Technology Services & Cloud Platforms:\n\n## Systems:\n\n## Global Financing:\n\n10\n\nGBS competes in consulting, systems integration, application management and business process outsourcing services. The company competes with broad based competitors including: Accenture, Capgemini, DXC Technology (DXC), Fujitsu, Google and Microsoft; India-based service providers; the consulting practices of public accounting firms; and many companies that primarily focus on local markets or niche service areas.\n\nTechnology Services & Cloud Platforms competes in project services, managed and outsourcing services, cloud-delivered services, and a wide range of technical and IT support services. The company competes with IT service providers including: Atos, DXC, Fujitsu, HCL, Tata Consulting Services, Wipro and many companies that primarily focus on local markets or niche service areas. The company also competes with cloud platform vendors such as Amazon, Google, Microsoft and Oracle.\n\nThis segment also includes the company's Integration Software offerings. Integration Software helps clients address the digital imperatives to create, connect and optimize their applications, data and infrastructure on their journey to become cognitive businesses. The company competes with Amazon, BMC, Microsoft, Oracle and VMWare, as well as companies that primarily focus on niche solutions and offerings.\n\nThe enterprise server and storage market is characterized by competition in technology and service innovation focused on value, function, reliability, price and cost performance. The company's principal competitors include Dell Technologies, Hewlett-Packard Enterprise (HPE), Intel and lower cost original device manufacturer systems that are often re-branded. Also, alternative as-a-service providers are leveraging innovation in technology and service delivery both to compete with traditional providers and to offer new routes to market for server and storage systems. These alternative providers include Amazon, Google, Microsoft, and IBM's own cloud-based services.\n\nThe company gains advantage and differentiation through investments in higher value capabilities—from semiconductor through software stack innovation—that increase efficiency, lower cost and improve performance. The company's research and development capabilities and intellectual property patent portfolio contribute significantly to this segment's leadership across areas as diverse as high performance computing, virtualization technologies, software optimization, power management, security, multi-operating system capabilities and open technologies like interconnect standards to be leveraged by broad ecosystems.\n\nGlobal Financing provides client financing, commercial financing and participates in the remarketing of used equipment. Global Financing's access to capital and its ability to manage credit and residual value risk generates a competitive advantage for the company. The key competitive factors include interest rates charged, IT product experience, client service, contract flexibility, ease of doing business, global capabilities and residual values. In client and commercial financing, Global Financing competes with three types of companies in providing financial services to IT customers: other captive financing entities of IT companies such as Cisco and HPE, non-captive financing entities and banks or financial institutions. In remarketing, the company competes with local and regional brokers plus original manufacturers in the fragmented worldwide used IT equipment market." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9690436362234692, + "doc_id": "3a0e7e72114de2185f65b4c7eca590c6f57d85ae9f0dc28c26be77b89041f05a", + "edit_distance": 0.7970479704797048, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.8049896317102903, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS OF AMERICAN AIRLINES GROUP INC .\n\n## 11. Accumulated Other Comprehensive Loss\n\nThe components of AOCI are as follows (in millions):\n\nTable of Contents\n\nRelates\tprincipally\tto\tpension,\tretiree\tmedical\tand\tother\tpostretirement\tbenefits\tobligations\tthat\twill\tnot\tbe\trecognized\tin\tnet\tincome\t(loss)\tuntil the\tobligations\tare\tfully\textinguished. (1)\n\nRelates\tto\tpension,\tretiree\tmedical\tand\tother\tpostretirement\tbenefits\tobligations\tand\tis\trecognized\twithin\tthe\tincome\ttax\tprovision\t(benefit)\ton our\tconsolidated\tstatements\tof\toperations. (2)\n\nReclassifications out of AOCI for the years ended December 31, 2020 and 2019 are as follows (in millions):\n\nAmounts allocated to other comprehensive income for income taxes as further described in Note 7 will remain in AOCI until we cease all related activities, such as termination of the pension plan.\n\n## 12. Commitments, Contingencies and Guarantees\n\n## (a) Aircraft, Engine and Other Purchase Commitments\n\nUnder all of our aircraft and engine purchase agreements, our total future commitments as of December 31, 2020 are expected to be as follows (approximately, in millions):\n\nThese\tamounts\tare\tnet\tof\tpurchase\tdeposits\tcurrently\theld\tby\tthe\tmanufacturers.\tWe\thave\tgranted\ta\tsecurity\tinterest\tin\tcertain\tof\tour\tpurchase deposits\twith\tBoeing\tto\tsecure\tcertain\tobligations\tto\tBoeing\tand\tthird-party\tfinancing\tsources.\tOur\tpurchase\tdeposits\theld\tby\tall\tmanufacturers totaled\t$1.4\tbillion\tas\tof\tDecember\t31,\t2020. (1)\n\n137", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS OF AMERICAN AIRLINES GROUP INC .\n\n## 11. Accumulated Other Comprehensive Loss\n\n## 12. Commitments, Contingencies and Guarantees\n\n## (a) Aircraft, Engine and Other Purchase Commitments\n\nUnder all of our aircraft and engine purchase agreements, our total future commitments as of December 31, 2020 are expected to be as follows (approximately, in millions):\n\nThese amounts are net of purchase deposits currently held by the manufacturers. We have granted a security interest in certain of our purchase deposits with Boeing to secure certain obligations to Boeing and third-party financing sources. Our purchase deposits held by all manufacturers totaled $1.4 billion as of December 31, 2020. (1)\n\nAmounts allocated to other comprehensive income for income taxes as further described in Note 7 will remain in AOCI until we cease all related activities, such as termination of the pension plan.\n\nRelates principally to pension, retiree medical and other postretirement benefits obligations that will not be recognized in net income (loss) until the obligations are fully extinguished. (1)\n\nRelates to pension, retiree medical and other postretirement benefits obligations and is recognized within the income tax provision (benefit) on our consolidated statements of operations. (2)\n\nReclassifications out of AOCI for the years ended December 31, 2020 and 2019 are as follows (in millions):\n\nThe components of AOCI are as follows (in millions):\n\n137" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9322322084949072, + "doc_id": "bfb12bdecdf6ad3ab935d4487093d402b8aeacac4ec9c07f4b4ce19167587fe8", + "edit_distance": 0.039764359351988215, + "f1_score": 0.9904761904761905, + "meteor": 0.9721402772215249, + "precision": 0.9923664122137404, + "pred_md": "## Table of Contents\n\nDue to the effects of the COVID-19 pandemic, we involuntarily furloughed certain team members starting October 1, 2020, and subsequently recalled the team members covered by the PSP2 financial assistance effective December 1, 2020 (see Note 18 to AAG's Consolidated Financial Statements in Part II, Item 8A for further information).\n\nOn February 5, 2021, we informed approximately 13,000 U.S.-based team members of the possibility of a workforce reduction at their work location. We expect that any workforce reductions will take effect on or after April 1, 2021. In connection with this notification, we announced the reopening of the voluntary early out and long-term leave of absence programs for team members of certain represented workgroups. Eligible team members must opt in by February 26, 2021 for the early out program and March 12, 2021 for the voluntary leave program.\n\n## Liquidity\n\nAs of December 31, 2020, we had $14.3 billion in total available liquidity, consisting of $6.9 billion in unrestricted cash and short-term investments, $7.0 billion in an undrawn term loan facility under the CARES Act and a total of $446 million in undrawn short-term revolving and other facilities.\n\nDuring 2020, we completed the following financing transactions (see Note 5 to AAG's Consolidated Financial Statements in Part II, Item 8A for further information):\n\n- · refinanced the $1.2 billion 2014 Term Loan Facility at a lower interest rate and extended the maturity from 2021 to 2027;\n- · issued $500 million in aggregate principal amount of 3.75% unsecured senior notes due 2025;\n- · raised $1.0 billion from the senior secured delayed draw term loan credit facility (Delayed Draw Term Loan Credit Facility);\n- · borrowed $750 million under the 2013 Revolving Facility, $1.6 billion under the 2014 Revolving Facility and $450 million under the April 2016 Revolving Facility;\n- · issued $1.0 billion in aggregate principal amount of 6.50% convertible senior notes due 2025;\n- · issued 85.2 million shares of AAG common stock at a price of $13.50 per share and 44.3 million shares of AAG common stock at a price of $12.975 per share pursuant to two underwritten public offerings of common stock for aggregate net proceeds of $1.7 billion;\n- · issued $2.5 billion in aggregate principal amount of 11.75% senior secured notes due 2025 and used the proceeds thereof, in part, to repay the $1.0 billion Delayed Draw Term Loan Credit Facility that we borrowed in March 2020;\n- · issued approximately $360 million in special facility revenue bonds, of which $47 million was used to fund the redemption of certain outstanding bonds;\n- · entered into a $7.5 billion secured term loan facility with the U.S. Department of Treasury (Treasury) (the Treasury Loan Agreement), of which we borrowed $550 million;\n- · issued $1.2 billion in aggregate principal amount of two series of 10.75% senior secured notes due 2026 secured by various collateral;\n- · issued 68.6 million shares of AAG common stock at an average price of $12.87 per share pursuant to an at-the-market offering for net proceeds of $869 million (see Note 18 to AAG's Consolidated Financial Statements in Part II, Item 8A for further information);\n- · raised $665 million principally from aircraft sale-leaseback transactions as well as $351 million from asset sales primarily related to previously parked aircraft; and\n- · received approximately $600 million of proceeds from enhanced equipment trust certificates (EETCs) and other aircraft and flight equipment financings, of which $17 million was used to repay existing indebtedness.\n\n66", + "recall": 0.9885931558935361, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\nDue to the effects of the COVID-19 pandemic, we involuntarily furloughed certain team members starting October 1, 2020, and subsequently recalled the team members covered by the PSP2 financial assistance effective December 1, 2020 (see Note 18 to AAG’s Consolidated Financial Statements in Part II, Item 8A for further information).\n\nOn February 5, 2021, we informed approximately 13,000 U.S.-based team members of the possibility of a workforce reduction at their work location. We expect that any workforce reductions will take effect on or after April 1, 2021. In connection with this notification, we announced the reopening of the voluntary early out and long-term leave of absence programs for team members of certain represented workgroups. Eligible team members must opt in by February 26, 2021 for the early out program and March 12, 2021 for the voluntary leave program.\n\nAs of December 31, 2020, we had $14.3 billion in total available liquidity, consisting of $6.9 billion in unrestricted cash and short-term investments, $7.0 billion in an undrawn term loan facility under the CARES Act and a total of $446 million in undrawn short-term revolving and other facilities.\n\nDuring 2020, we completed the following financing transactions (see Note 5 to AAG’s Consolidated Financial Statements in Part II, Item 8A for further information):\n\n## Liquidity\n\n- • refinanced the $1.2 billion 2014 Term Loan Facility at a lower interest rate and extended the maturity from 2021 to 2027;\n\n- • issued $500 million in aggregate principal amount of 3.75% unsecured senior notes due 2025;\n\n- • raised $1.0 billion from the senior secured delayed draw term loan credit facility (Delayed Draw Term Loan Credit Facility);\n\n- • borrowed $750 million under the 2013 Revolving Facility, $1.6 billion under the 2014 Revolving Facility and $450 million under the April 2016 Revolving Facility;\n\n- • issued $1.0 billion in aggregate principal amount of 6.50% convertible senior notes due 2025;\n\n- • issued 85.2 million shares of AAG common stock at a price of $13.50 per share and 44.3 million shares of AAG common stock at a price of $12.975 per share pursuant to two underwritten public offerings of common stock for aggregate net proceeds of $1.7 billion;\n\n- • issued $2.5 billion in aggregate principal amount of 11.75% senior secured notes due 2025 and used the proceeds thereof, in part, to repay the $1.0 billion Delayed Draw Term Loan Credit Facility that we borrowed in March 2020;\n\n- • issued approximately $360 million in special facility revenue bonds, of which $47 million was used to fund the redemption of certain outstanding bonds;\n\n- • entered into a $7.5 billion secured term loan facility with the U.S. Department of Treasury (Treasury) (the Treasury Loan Agreement), of which we borrowed $550 million;\n\n- • issued $1.2 billion in aggregate principal amount of two series of 10.75% senior secured notes due 2026 secured by various collateral;\n\n- • issued 68.6 million shares of AAG common stock at an average price of $12.87 per share pursuant to an at-the-market offering for net proceeds of $869 million (see Note 18 to AAG’s Consolidated Financial Statements in Part II, Item 8A for further information);\n\n- • raised $665 million principally from aircraft sale-leaseback transactions as well as $351 million from asset sales primarily related to previously parked aircraft; and\n\n- • received approximately $600 million of proceeds from enhanced equipment trust certificates (EETCs) and other aircraft and flight equipment financings, of which $17 million was used to repay existing indebtedness.\n\n66" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9564745835214493, + "doc_id": "8a0218e4db2698027e0402bd32f951ce46c67d56c0e54872c0c948cc4d892435", + "edit_distance": 0.8112244897959183, + "f1_score": 0.9858585858585858, + "meteor": 0.7436738191661042, + "precision": 0.991869918699187, + "pred_md": "## Table of Contents\n\n## Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements - (Continued)\n\nBecton, Dickinson and Company\n\nShort-term investments are held to their maturities and are carried at cost, which approximates fair value. The short-term investments consist of instruments with maturities greater than three months and less than one year.\n\nLong-term debt is recorded at amortized cost. The fair value of long-term debt is measured based upon quoted prices in active markets for similar instruments, which are considered Level 2 inputs in the fair value hierarchy. The fair value of long-term debt was $19.2 billion and $18.8 billion at September 30, 2019 and 2018, respectively. The fair value of the current portion of long-term debt was $1.3 billion and $1.9 billion at September 30, 2019 and 2018, respectively.\n\nAll other instruments measured by the Company at fair value, including derivatives and contingent consideration liabilities, are immaterial to the Company's consolidated balance sheets.\n\n## Nonrecurring Fair Value Measurements\n\nIn fiscal year 2019, the Company recorded a charge of $30 million to write down the carrying value of certain intangible assets in the Surgery unit. In fiscal year 2018, the Company recorded charges of $58 million to write down the value of fixed assets, primarily in the Diabetes Care unit, as well as charges of $81 million to write down the carrying value of certain intangible and other assets in the Biosciences unit. The amounts recognized in 2019 and 2018 were recorded to adjust the carrying amount of assets to the assets' fair values, which were estimated, based upon a market participant's perspective, using either Level 2 inputs, including quoted prices for similar assets, or Level 3 inputs, including values estimated using the income approach.\n\n## Concentration of Credit Risk\n\nThe Company maintains cash deposits in excess of government-provided insurance limits. Such cash deposits are exposed to loss in the event of nonperformance by financial institutions. Substantially all of the Company's trade receivables are due from public and private entities involved in the healthcare industry. Due to the large size and diversity of the Company's customer base, concentrations of credit risk with respect to trade receivables are limited. The Company does not normally require collateral. The Company is exposed to credit loss in the event of nonperformance by financial institutions with which it conducts business. However, this loss is limited to the amounts, if any, by which the obligations of the counterparty to the financial instrument contract exceed the obligations of the Company. The Company also minimizes exposure to credit risk by dealing with a diversified group of major financial institutions.\n\nThe Company continually evaluates its accounts receivables for potential collection risks particularly those resulting from sales to governmentowned or government-supported healthcare facilities in certain countries as payment may be dependent upon the financial stability and creditworthiness of those countries' national economies. The Company continually evaluates all governmental receivables for potential collection risks associated with the availability of government funding and reimbursement practices. The Company believes the current reserves related to all governmental receivables are adequate and that this concentration of credit risk will not have a material adverse impact on its financial position or liquidity.\n\n92", + "recall": 0.9799196787148594, + "true_md": "92\n\nThe Company continually evaluates its accounts receivables for potential collection risks particularly those resulting from sales to government- owned or government-supported healthcare facilities in certain countries as payment may be dependent upon the financial stability and creditworthiness of those countries’ national economies. The Company continually evaluates all governmental receivables for potential collection risks associated with the availability of government funding and reimbursement practices. The Company believes the current reserves related to all governmental receivables are adequate and that this concentration of credit risk will not have a material adverse impact on its financial position or liquidity.\n\nThe Company maintains cash deposits in excess of government-provided insurance limits. Such cash deposits are exposed to loss in the event of nonperformance by financial institutions. Substantially all of the Company’s trade receivables are due from public and private entities involved in the healthcare industry. Due to the large size and diversity of the Company’s customer base, concentrations of credit risk with respect to trade receivables are limited. The Company does not normally require collateral. The Company is exposed to credit loss in the event of nonperformance by financial institutions with which it conducts business. However, this loss is limited to the amounts, if any, by which the obligations of the counterparty to the financial instrument contract exceed the obligations of the Company. The Company also minimizes exposure to credit risk by dealing with a diversified group of major financial institutions.\n\nIn fiscal year 2019, the Company recorded a charge of $30 million to write down the carrying value of certain intangible assets in the Surgery unit. In fiscal year 2018, the Company recorded charges of $58 million to write down the value of fixed assets, primarily in the Diabetes Care unit, as well as charges of $81 million to write down the carrying value of certain intangible and other assets in the Biosciences unit. The amounts recognized in 2019 and 2018 were recorded to adjust the carrying amount of assets to the assets' fair values, which were estimated, based upon a market participant's perspective, using either Level 2 inputs, including quoted prices for similar assets, or Level 3 inputs, including values estimated using the income approach.\n\nAll other instruments measured by the Company at fair value, including derivatives and contingent consideration liabilities, are immaterial to the Company's consolidated balance sheets.\n\nLong-term debt is recorded at amortized cost. The fair value of long-term debt is measured based upon quoted prices in active markets for similar instruments, which are considered Level 2 inputs in the fair value hierarchy. The fair value of long-term debt was $19.2 billion and $18.8 billion at September 30, 2019 and 2018, respectively. The fair value of the current portion of long-term debt was $1.3 billion and $1.9 billion at September 30, 2019 and 2018, respectively.\n\nShort-term investments are held to their maturities and are carried at cost, which approximates fair value. The short-term investments consist of instruments with maturities greater than three months and less than one year.\n\n## Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements — (Continued) Becton, Dickinson and Company\n\nTable of Contents\n\n## Nonrecurring Fair Value Measurements\n\n## Concentration of Credit Risk" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.889804587487893, + "doc_id": "b19d9923f7f1c1772bae8cf9d61d7178142c64773976c827b87dae53412e1596", + "edit_distance": 0.041666666666666664, + "f1_score": 0.9756097560975608, + "meteor": 0.9582004174543164, + "precision": 0.975609756097561, + "pred_md": "95 CP\t2020\tANNUAL\tREPORT\n\nThe number of shares used in the earnings per share calculations are reconciled as follows:\n\nIn 2020, there were no options excluded from the computation of diluted earnings per share (2019 - nil; 2018 - 0.2 million).", + "recall": 0.975609756097561, + "true_md": "95 CP 2020 ANNUAL REPORT\n\nThe number of shares used in the earnings per share calculations are reconciled as follows:\n\nIn 2020, there were no options excluded from the computation of diluted earnings per share (2019 – nil; 2018 – 0.2 million)." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8532528811521388, + "doc_id": "413bb1f6d45e44526ac14f12905879a278f3ef91c445f596a9f56ca3b010b375", + "edit_distance": 0.1337579617834395, + "f1_score": 0.9837837837837838, + "meteor": 0.911573268753065, + "precision": 0.9891304347826086, + "pred_md": "## Item 6. Selected Financial Data.\n\n## FIVE-YEAR SUMMARY OF SELECTED FINANCIAL DATA\n\n## Becton, Dickinson and Company\n\nTable of Contents\n\n(a) Prior-year\tamounts\twere\trevised\tto\treflect\tthe\trecognition\tof\tall\tcomponents\tof\tthe\tCompany's\tnet\tperiodic\tpension\tand\tpostretirement benefit\tcosts,\taside\tfrom\tservice\tcost,\tto Other\tincome\t(expense),\tnet on\tits\tconsolidated\tincome\tstatements,\tas\tis\tfurther\tdiscussed\tin\tNote 2\tto\tthe\tconsolidated\tfinancial\tstatements\tcontained\tin\tItem\t8.\tFinancial\tStatements\tand\tSupplementary\tData.\n\nThe results above include the net expense associated with specified items as detailed below. Additional discussion regarding the specified items in fiscal years 2019, 2018 and 2017 are provided in Item 7. Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations.\n\n22", + "recall": 0.978494623655914, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## Item 6. Selected Financial Data.\n\n## FIVE-YEAR SUMMARY OF SELECTED FINANCIAL DATA Becton, Dickinson and Company\n\n## FIVE-YEAR SUMMARY OF SELECTED FINANCIAL DATA Becton, Dickinson and Company\n\n(a) Prior-year amounts were revised to reflect the recognition of all components of the Company’s net periodic pension and postretirement benefit costs, aside from service cost, to Other income (expense), net on its consolidated income statements, as is further discussed in Note 2 to the consolidated financial statements contained in Item 8. Financial Statements and Supplementary Data.\n\nThe results above include the net expense associated with specified items as detailed below. Additional discussion regarding the specified items in fiscal years 2019, 2018 and 2017 are provided in Item 7. Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations.\n\n22" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.902097795821846, + "doc_id": "4e890690b7693395e84f3312eeb5184722de1d293ca6fe3d39be8db087db74ab", + "edit_distance": 0.7906403940886699, + "f1_score": 0.9936575052854123, + "meteor": 0.6401263790888795, + "precision": 0.9957627118644068, + "pred_md": "## Table of Contents\n\n## Estimate of mileage credits not expected to be redeemed\n\nAs discussed in Note 1(l) to the consolidated financial statements, American's loyalty program awards mileage credits to passengers for flights on American, flights on partner airlines, or for using the services of other program participants. American accounts for such mileage credits earned using the deferred revenue method, which includes an estimate for mileage credits not expected to be redeemed. American's loyalty program liability was $9.2 billion as of December 31, 2020 and the associated passenger revenue for mileage credits redeemed for travel was $1.1 billion for the year ended December 31, 2020.\n\nWe identified the assessment of the estimated number of mileage credits not expected to be redeemed as a critical audit matter. A high degree of auditor judgment was required to evaluate the applicability of historical data used to develop the estimate.\n\nThe following are the primary procedures we performed to address this critical audit matter. We evaluated the design and tested the operating effectiveness of certain internal controls over American's loyalty program accounting process, including controls related to the estimation of mileage credits not expected to be redeemed. We assessed American's methodology used to evaluate this estimate and determined it was consistent with historical periods. We developed an independent expectation of mileage credits not expected to be redeemed, which included consideration of industry and historical information. We compared the results of our independent expectation to American's recorded amount of loyalty program liability and the associated passenger revenue.\n\n## Sufficiency of audit evidence over realizability of operating loss carryforwards\n\nAs discussed in Notes 1(i) and 5 to the consolidated financial statements, American had $3.9 billion of operating loss carryforwards, which are recorded as deferred tax assets at December 31, 2020. Deferred tax assets are recognized related to operating loss carryforwards that will reduce future taxable income. American provides a valuation allowance for deferred tax assets when it is more likely than not that some portion, or all the deferred tax assets, will not be realized. In evaluating the need for a valuation allowance, management considers the weighting of all available positive and negative evidence, which includes, among other things, the nature, frequency and severity of current and cumulative taxable income or losses, as well as future projections of profitability.\n\nWe identified the evaluation of the sufficiency of audit evidence over the realizability of operating loss carryforwards as a critical audit matter. Evaluating the sufficiency of audit evidence required subjective auditor judgment, and the involvement of tax professionals in order to assess the nature and extent of procedures performed in assessing the realizability of the operating loss carryforwards.\n\nThe following are the primary procedures we performed to address this critical audit matter. We performed risk assessment procedures and applied auditor judgment to determine the nature and extent of procedures to be performed over the income tax accounts and disclosures. We evaluated the design and tested the operating effectiveness of certain internal controls over American's deferred tax asset valuation allowance process, including controls related to the realizability of operating loss carryforwards. We evaluated positive and negative evidence used in assessing whether the deferred tax assets were more-likely-than-not to be realized in the future, including evaluating the nature, frequency and severity of current and cumulative taxable income or losses, as well as future projections of profitability. We evaluated the reasonableness of management's future projections of profitability considering (i) historical profitability of American, (ii) consistency with industry data and economic trends, and (iii) whether these assumptions were consistent with evidence obtained in other areas of the audit. We involved tax professionals who assisted in the evaluation of the nature, frequency and severity of current and cumulative taxable income or losses. Further, we assessed the sufficiency of audit evidence obtained over the realizability of the operating loss carryforwards by evaluating the cumulative results of the audit procedures, qualitative aspects of American's accounting practices, and potential bias in the accounting estimate.\n\n/s/\t\t\t\tKPMG\tLLP\n\nWe have served as American's auditor since 2014.\n\nDallas,\tTexas February\t17,\t2021\n\n148", + "recall": 0.9915611814345991, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## Estimate of mileage credits not expected to be redeemed\n\n## Sufficiency of audit evidence over realizability of operating loss carryforwards\n\nThe following are the primary procedures we performed to address this critical audit matter. We performed risk assessment procedures and applied auditor judgment to determine the nature and extent of procedures to be performed over the income tax accounts and disclosures. We evaluated the design and tested the operating effectiveness of certain internal controls over American’s deferred tax asset valuation allowance process, including controls related to the realizability of operating loss carryforwards. We evaluated positive and negative evidence used in assessing whether the deferred tax assets were more-likely-than-not to be realized in the future, including evaluating the nature, frequency and severity of current and cumulative taxable income or losses, as well as future projections of profitability. We evaluated the reasonableness of management’s future projections of profitability considering (i) historical profitability of American, (ii) consistency with industry data and economic trends, and (iii) whether these assumptions were consistent with evidence obtained in other areas of the audit. We involved tax professionals who assisted in the evaluation of the nature, frequency and severity of current and cumulative taxable income or losses. Further, we assessed the sufficiency of audit evidence obtained over the realizability of the operating loss carryforwards by evaluating the cumulative results of the audit procedures, qualitative aspects of American’s accounting practices, and potential bias in the accounting estimate.\n\n/s/ KPMG LLP\n\nWe have served as American’s auditor since 2014.\n\nDallas, Texas February 17, 2021\n\n148\n\nWe identified the evaluation of the sufficiency of audit evidence over the realizability of operating loss carryforwards as a critical audit matter. Evaluating the sufficiency of audit evidence required subjective auditor judgment, and the involvement of tax professionals in order to assess the\n\nWe identified the evaluation of the sufficiency of audit evidence over the realizability of operating loss carryforwards as a critical audit matter. Evaluating the sufficiency of audit evidence required subjective auditor judgment, and the involvement of tax professionals in order to assess the nature and extent of procedures performed in assessing the realizability of the operating loss carryforwards.\n\nAs discussed in Notes 1(i) and 5 to the consolidated financial statements, American had $3.9 billion of operating loss carryforwards, which are recorded as deferred tax assets at December 31, 2020. Deferred tax assets are recognized related to operating loss carryforwards that will reduce future taxable income. American provides a valuation allowance for deferred tax assets when it is more likely than not that some portion, or all the deferred tax assets, will not be realized. In evaluating the need for a valuation allowance, management considers the weighting of all available positive and negative evidence, which includes, among other things, the nature, frequency and severity of current and cumulative taxable income or losses, as well as future projections of profitability.\n\nThe following are the primary procedures we performed to address this critical audit matter. We evaluated the design and tested the operating effectiveness of certain internal controls over American’s loyalty program accounting process, including controls related to the estimation of mileage credits not expected to be redeemed. We assessed American’s methodology used to evaluate this estimate and determined it was consistent with historical periods. We developed an independent expectation of mileage credits not expected to be redeemed, which included consideration of industry and historical information. We compared the results of our independent expectation to American’s recorded amount of loyalty program liability and the associated passenger revenue.\n\nWe identified the assessment of the estimated number of mileage credits not expected to be redeemed as a critical audit matter. A high degree of auditor judgment was required to evaluate the applicability of historical data used to develop the estimate.\n\nAs discussed in Note 1(l) to the consolidated financial statements, American’s loyalty program awards mileage credits to passengers for flights on American, flights on partner airlines, or for using the services of other program participants. American accounts for such mileage credits earned using the deferred revenue method, which includes an estimate for mileage credits not expected to be redeemed. American’s loyalty program liability was $9.2 billion as of December 31, 2020 and the associated passenger revenue for mileage credits redeemed for travel was $1.1 billion for the year ended December 31, 2020." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9746138308599552, + "doc_id": "31abd66574c5ef37680c7642bb8c0473a7599bf65d0337f04a8d32c250c70705", + "edit_distance": 0.05475504322766571, + "f1_score": 0.9972752043596729, + "meteor": 0.9966021048084693, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS OF AMERICAN AIRLINES GROUP INC .\n\nTable of Contents\n\nAll\tshort-term\tinvestments\tare\tclassified\tas\tavailable-for-sale\tand\tstated\tat\tfair\tvalue.\tUnrealized\tgains\tand\tlosses\tare\trecorded\tin\taccumulated other\tcomprehensive\tloss\tat\teach\treporting\tperiod.\tThere\twere\tno\tcredit\tlosses. (1)\n\nOur\tshort-term\tinvestments\tas\tof\tDecember\t31,\t2020\tmature\tin\tone\tyear\tor\tless\texcept\tfor\t$235\tmillion\tof\tbank\tnotes/certificates\tof\tdeposit/time deposits. (2)\n\nRestricted\tcash\tand\tshort-term\tinvestments\tprimarily\tinclude\tmoney\tmarket\tfunds\tto\tbe\tused\tto\tfinance\ta\tsubstantial\tportion\tof\tthe\tcost\tof\tthe renovation\tand\texpansion\tof\tTerminal\t8\tat\tJFK\tand\tcollateral\theld\tto\tsupport\tworkers'\tcompensation\tobligations. (3)\n\nLong-term\tinvestments\tprimarily\tinclude\tour\tequity\tinvestment\tin\tChina\tSouthern\tAirlines,\tin\twhich\twe\tpresently\town\ta\t1.8%\tequity\tinterest,\tand are\tclassified\tin\tother\tassets\ton\tthe\tconsolidated\tbalance\tsheets. (4)\n\n## Fair Value of Debt\n\nThe fair value of our long-term debt was estimated using quoted market prices or discounted cash flow analyses, based on our current estimated incremental borrowing rates for similar types of borrowing arrangements. If our long-term debt was measured at fair value, it would have been classified as Level 2 except for $2.3 billion which would have been classified as Level 3 in the fair value hierarchy.\n\nThe carrying value and estimated fair value of our long-term debt, including current maturities, were as follows (in millions):\n\n## Other Investments\n\nWe have an approximate 25% ownership interest in Republic Holdings, which we received in 2017 in consideration for our unsecured claim in the Republic Holdings bankruptcy case. This ownership interest is accounted for under the equity method and our portion of Republic Holdings' financial results is recognized within other, net on the consolidated statements of operations and the investment is reflected within other assets on our consolidated balance sheets.\n\n128", + "recall": 0.9945652173913043, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS OF AMERICAN AIRLINES GROUP INC .\n\nAll short-term investments are classified as available-for-sale and stated at fair value. Unrealized gains and losses are recorded in accumulated other comprehensive loss at each reporting period. There were no credit losses. (1)\n\nOur short-term investments as of December 31, 2020 mature in one year or less except for $235 million of bank notes/certificates of deposit/time deposits. (2)\n\nRestricted cash and short-term investments primarily include money market funds to be used to finance a substantial portion of the cost of the renovation and expansion of Terminal 8 at JFK and collateral held to support workers' compensation obligations. (3)\n\nLong-term investments primarily include our equity investment in China Southern Airlines, in which we presently own a 1.8% equity interest, and are classified in other assets on the consolidated balance sheets. (4)\n\nThe fair value of our long-term debt was estimated using quoted market prices or discounted cash flow analyses, based on our current estimated incremental borrowing rates for similar types of borrowing arrangements. If our long-term debt was measured at fair value, it would have been classified as Level 2 except for $2.3 billion which would have been classified as Level 3 in the fair value hierarchy.\n\nThe carrying value and estimated fair value of our long-term debt, including current maturities, were as follows (in millions):\n\n## Fair Value of Debt\n\n## Other Investments\n\nWe have an approximate 25% ownership interest in Republic Holdings, which we received in 2017 in consideration for our unsecured claim in the Republic Holdings bankruptcy case. This ownership interest is accounted for under the equity method and our portion of Republic Holdings’ financial results is recognized within other, net on the consolidated statements of operations and the investment is reflected within other assets on our consolidated balance sheets.\n\n128" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9510243565615378, + "doc_id": "e7af627c62642bc17559b5e60f3426c0a995305b89b6143b4d310c34880420f5", + "edit_distance": 0.19701492537313434, + "f1_score": 0.9919743178170144, + "meteor": 0.9798775881987025, + "precision": 0.9935691318327974, + "pred_md": "## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS OF AMERICAN AIRLINES, INC.\n\nThe Treasury Loan Warrants do not have any voting rights and are freely transferrable, with registration rights. Each Treasury Loan Warrant expires on the fifth anniversary of the date of issuance of such Treasury Loan Warrant. The Treasury Loan Warrants will be exercisable either through net share settlement or cash, at AAG's option. The Treasury Loan Warrants were issued solely as compensation to the U.S. Government related to entry into the Treasury Loan Agreement. No separate proceeds were received upon issuance of the Treasury Loan Warrants or will be received upon exercise thereof.\n\n## (c) Recent Accounting Pronouncement\n\nASU 2016-13: Measurement of Credit Losses on Financial Instruments\n\nThis ASU requires the use of an expected loss model for certain types of financial instruments and requires consideration of a broader range of reasonable and supportable information to calculate credit loss estimates. For trade receivables, loans and held-to-maturity debt securities, an estimate of lifetime expected credit losses is required. For available-for-sale debt securities, an allowance for credit losses will be required rather than a reduction to the carrying value of the asset. American adopted this accounting standard prospectively as of January 1, 2020, and it did not have a material impact on American's consolidated financial statements.\n\n## (d) Short-term Investments\n\nShort-term investments are classified as available-for-sale and stated at fair value. Realized gains and losses are recorded in nonoperating expense on American's consolidated statements of operations. Unrealized gains and losses are recorded in accumulated other comprehensive loss on American's consolidated balance sheets. For investments in an unrealized loss position, American determines whether a credit loss exists by considering information about the collectability of the instrument, current market conditions and reasonable and supportable forecasts of economic conditions. There have been no credit losses.\n\n## (e) Restricted Cash and Short-term Investments\n\nAmerican has restricted cash and short-term investments related primarily to money market funds to be used to finance a substantial portion of the cost of the renovation and expansion of Terminal 8 at JFK and collateral held to support workers' compensation obligations.\n\n## (f) Aircraft Fuel, Spare Parts and Supplies, Net\n\nAircraft fuel is recorded on a first-in, first-out basis. Spare parts and supplies are recorded at average costs less an allowance for obsolescence. These items are expensed when used.\n\n## (g) Operating Property and Equipment\n\nOperating property and equipment is recorded at cost and depreciated or amortized to residual values over the asset's estimated useful life or the lease term, whichever is less, using the straight-line method. Residual values for aircraft, engines and related rotable parts are generally 5% to 10% of original cost. Costs of major improvements that enhance the usefulness of the asset are capitalized and depreciated or amortized over the estimated useful life of the asset or the lease term, whichever is less. The estimated useful lives for the principal property and equipment classifications are as follows:\n\nTable of Contents\n\nTotal depreciation and amortization expense was $2.3 billion, $2.5 billion and $2.4 billion for the years ended December 31, 2020, 2019 and 2018, respectively.\n\nAmerican assesses impairment of operating property and equipment when events and circumstances indicate that the assets may be impaired. An impairment of an asset or group of assets exists only when the sum of the estimated undiscounted cash flows expected to be generated directly by the assets are less than the carrying value of the assets. American groups assets principally by fleet-type when estimating future cash flows, which is generally the lowest level for\n\n158", + "recall": 0.9903846153846154, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS OF AMERICAN AIRLINES, INC.\n\n## (c) Recent Accounting Pronouncement\n\n## (d) Short-term Investments\n\n## (e) Restricted Cash and Short-term Investments\n\n## (f) Aircraft Fuel, Spare Parts and Supplies, Net\n\n## (g) Operating Property and Equipment\n\nThe Treasury Loan Warrants do not have any voting rights and are freely transferrable, with registration rights. Each Treasury Loan Warrant expires on the fifth anniversary of the date of issuance of such Treasury Loan Warrant. The Treasury Loan Warrants will be exercisable either through net share settlement or cash, at AAG's option. The Treasury Loan Warrants were issued solely as compensation to the U.S. Government related to entry into the Treasury Loan Agreement. No separate proceeds were received upon issuance of the Treasury Loan Warrants or will be received upon exercise thereof.\n\nThis ASU requires the use of an expected loss model for certain types of financial instruments and requires consideration of a broader range of reasonable and supportable information to calculate credit loss estimates. For trade receivables, loans and held-to-maturity debt securities, an estimate of lifetime expected credit losses is required. For available-for-sale debt securities, an allowance for credit losses will be required rather than a reduction to the carrying value of the asset. American adopted this accounting standard prospectively as of January 1, 2020, and it did not have a material impact on American's consolidated financial statements.\n\nShort-term investments are classified as available-for-sale and stated at fair value. Realized gains and losses are recorded in nonoperating expense on American’s consolidated statements of operations. Unrealized gains and losses are recorded in accumulated other comprehensive loss on American’s consolidated balance sheets. For investments in an unrealized loss position, American determines whether a credit loss exists by considering information about the collectability of the instrument, current market conditions and reasonable and supportable forecasts of economic conditions. There have been no credit losses.\n\nAmerican has restricted cash and short-term investments related primarily to money market funds to be used to finance a substantial portion of the cost of the renovation and expansion of Terminal 8 at JFK and collateral held to support workers’ compensation obligations.\n\nAircraft fuel is recorded on a first-in, first-out basis. Spare parts and supplies are recorded at average costs less an allowance for obsolescence. These items are expensed when used.\n\nOperating property and equipment is recorded at cost and depreciated or amortized to residual values over the asset’s estimated useful life or the lease term, whichever is less, using the straight-line method. Residual values for aircraft, engines and related rotable parts are generally 5% to 10% of original cost. Costs of major improvements that enhance the usefulness of the asset are capitalized and depreciated or amortized over the estimated useful life of the asset or the lease term, whichever is less. The estimated useful lives for the principal property and equipment classifications are as follows:\n\nTotal depreciation and amortization expense was $2.3 billion, $2.5 billion and $2.4 billion for the years ended December 31, 2020, 2019 and 2018, respectively.\n\nAmerican assesses impairment of operating property and equipment when events and circumstances indicate that the assets may be impaired. An impairment of an asset or group of assets exists only when the sum of the estimated undiscounted cash flows expected to be generated directly by the assets are less than the carrying value of the assets. American groups assets principally by fleet-type when estimating future cash flows, which is generally the lowest level for\n\n158\n\n## ASU 2016-13: Measurement of Credit Losses on Financial Instruments" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9504901155860037, + "doc_id": "93a9cd956ceffff29be5cdebb71c0093add4c4d6fb460888c43fcc33ff6dd75d", + "edit_distance": 0.07668231611893583, + "f1_score": 0.9917627677100496, + "meteor": 0.9832197807014776, + "precision": 0.9933993399339934, + "pred_md": "## APPLIED MATERIALS, INC.\n\n## NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS - (Continued)\n\n## Note 16 Warranty, Guarantees, Commitments and Contingencies\n\n## Warranty\n\nChanges in the warranty reserves during each fiscal year were as follows:\n\nTable of Contents\n\nApplied products are generally sold with a warranty for a 12-month period following installation. The provision for the estimated cost of warranty is recorded when revenue is recognized. Parts and labor are covered under the terms of the warranty agreement. The warranty provision is based on historical experience by product, configuration and geographic region. Quarterly warranty consumption is generally associated with sales that occurred during the preceding four quarters, and quarterly warranty provisions are generally related to the current quarter's sales.\n\n## Guarantees\n\nIn the ordinary course of business, Applied provides standby letters of credit or other guarantee instruments to third parties as required for certain transactions initiated by either Applied or its subsidiaries. As of October 25, 2020, the maximum potential amount of future payments that Applied could be required to make under these guarantee agreements was approximately $233 million. Applied has not recorded any liability in connection with these guarantee agreements beyond that required to appropriately account for the underlying transaction being guaranteed. Applied does not believe, based on historical experience and information currently available, that it is probable that any amounts will be required to be paid under these guarantee agreements.\n\nApplied also has agreements with various banks to facilitate subsidiary banking operations worldwide, including overdraft arrangements, issuance of bank guarantees, and letters of credit. As of October 25, 2020, Applied has provided parent guarantees to banks for approximately $153 million to cover these arrangements.\n\n## Legal Matters\n\nFrom time to time, Applied receives notification from third parties, including customers and suppliers, seeking indemnification, litigation support, payment of money or other actions by Applied in connection with claims made against them. In addition, from time to time, Applied receives notification from third parties claiming that Applied may be or is infringing or misusing their intellectual property or other rights. Applied also is subject to various other legal proceedings and claims, both asserted and unasserted, that arise in the ordinary course of business.\n\nAlthough the outcome of the above-described matters, claims and proceedings cannot be predicted with certainty, Applied does not believe that any will have a material effect on its consolidated financial condition or results of operations.\n\n## Note 17 Industry Segment Operations\n\nApplied's three reportable segments are: Semiconductor Systems, Applied Global Services, and Display and Adjacent Markets. As defined under the accounting literature, Applied's chief operating decision-maker has been identified as the President and Chief Executive Officer, who reviews operating results to make decisions about allocating resources and assessing performance for the entire Company. Segment information is presented based upon Applied's management organization structure as of October 25, 2020 and the distinctive nature of each segment. Future changes to this internal financial structure may result in changes to Applied's reportable segments.\n\nThe Semiconductor Systems reportable segment includes semiconductor capital equipment for etch, rapid thermal processing, deposition, chemical mechanical planarization, metrology and inspection, wafer packaging, and ion implantation.\n\nThe Applied Global Services segment provides integrated solutions to optimize equipment and fab performance and productivity, including spares, upgrades, services, certain remanufactured earlier generation equipment and factory automation software for semiconductor, display and other products.\n\n102", + "recall": 0.9901315789473685, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## APPLIED MATERIALS, INC. NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS — (Continued)\n\n## Note 16 Warranty, Guarantees, Commitments and Contingencies\n\n## Warranty\n\n## Guarantees\n\n## Legal Matters\n\n## Note 17 Industry Segment Operations\n\n102\n\nChanges in the warranty reserves during each fiscal year were as follows: \n\nApplied products are generally sold with a warranty for a 12-month period following installation. The provision for the estimated cost of warranty is recorded when revenue is recognized. Parts and labor are covered under the terms of the warranty agreement. The warranty provision is based on historical experience by product, configuration and geographic region. Quarterly warranty consumption is generally associated with sales that occurred during the preceding four quarters, and quarterly warranty provisions are generally related to the current quarter’s sales.\n\nIn the ordinary course of business, Applied provides standby letters of credit or other guarantee instruments to third parties as required for certain transactions initiated by either Applied or its subsidiaries. As of October 25, 2020, the maximum potential amount of future payments that Applied could be required to make under these guarantee agreements was approximately $233 million. Applied has not recorded any liability in connection with these guarantee agreements beyond that required to appropriately account for the underlying transaction being guaranteed. Applied does not believe, based on historical experience and information currently available, that it is probable that any amounts will be required to be paid under these guarantee agreements.\n\nApplied also has agreements with various banks to facilitate subsidiary banking operations worldwide, including overdraft arrangements, issuance of bank guarantees, and letters of credit. As of October 25, 2020, Applied has provided parent guarantees to banks for approximately $153 million to cover these arrangements.\n\nFrom time to time, Applied receives notification from third parties, including customers and suppliers, seeking indemnification, litigation support, payment of money or other actions by Applied in connection with claims made against them. In addition, from time to time, Applied receives notification from third parties claiming that Applied may be or is infringing or misusing their intellectual property or other rights. Applied also is subject to various other legal proceedings and claims, both asserted and unasserted, that arise in the ordinary course of business. \n\nAlthough the outcome of the above-described matters, claims and proceedings cannot be predicted with certainty, Applied does not believe that any will have a material effect on its consolidated financial condition or results of operations.\n\nApplied’s three reportable segments are: Semiconductor Systems, Applied Global Services, and Display and Adjacent Markets. As defined under the accounting literature, Applied’s chief operating decision-maker has been identified as the President and Chief Executive Officer, who reviews operating results to make decisions about allocating resources and assessing performance for the entire Company. Segment information is presented based upon Applied’s management organization structure as of October 25, 2020 and the distinctive nature of each segment. Future changes to this internal financial structure may result in changes to Applied’s reportable segments.\n\nThe Semiconductor Systems reportable segment includes semiconductor capital equipment for etch, rapid thermal processing, deposition, chemical mechanical planarization, metrology and inspection, wafer packaging, and ion implantation.\n\nThe Applied Global Services segment provides integrated solutions to optimize equipment and fab performance and productivity, including spares, upgrades, services, certain remanufactured earlier generation equipment and factory automation software for semiconductor, display and other products." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9755368905249522, + "doc_id": "8fb64f47cbf29a0036b48f82df22f2ae4160458386b58354b4510f4a70dfde2e", + "edit_distance": 0.037037037037037035, + "f1_score": 0.983539094650206, + "meteor": 0.9906996210803674, + "precision": 0.987603305785124, + "pred_md": "## Table of Contents\n\nIn 2020, cargo revenue was $769 million, a decrease of $94 million, or 10.8%, as compared to 2019, primarily due to a 44.4% decrease in cargo ton miles reflecting declines in freight volumes, principally as a result of international schedule reductions, which was offset in part by a 60.5% increase in yield as a result of rate increases.\n\nOther operating revenue decreased $845 million, or 29.2%, in 2020 as compared to 2019, driven primarily by lower revenue associated with our loyalty program and airport clubs.\n\nOur total revenue per available seat mile (TRASM) was 12.11 cents in 2020, a 24.6% decrease as compared to 16.05 cents in 2019.\n\n## Fuel\n\nOur mainline and regional fuel expense totaled $3.4 billion in 2020, which was $6.0 billion, or 63.8%, lower compared to 2019. This decrease was primarily driven by a 49.4% decrease in gallons of fuel consumed as a result of lower capacity and a 28.5% decrease in the average price per gallon of aircraft fuel including related taxes to $1.48 in 2020 from $2.07 in 2019.\n\nAs of December 31, 2020, we did not have any fuel hedging contracts outstanding to hedge our fuel consumption. Our current policy is not to enter into transactions to hedge our fuel consumption, although we review that policy from time to time based on market conditions and other factors. We do not currently view the market opportunities to hedge fuel prices as attractive because, among other things, our future fuel needs remain unclear due to uncertainties regarding air travel demand and any hedging would potentially require significant capital or collateral to be placed at risk. As such, and assuming we do not enter into any future transactions to hedge our fuel consumption, we will continue to be fully exposed to fluctuations in fuel prices.\n\n## Other Costs\n\nWe remain committed to actively managing our cost structure, which we believe is necessary in an industry whose economic prospects are heavily dependent upon two variables we cannot control: general economic conditions and the price of fuel. In particular, the COVID-19 pandemic has resulted in a very rapid deterioration in general economic conditions, particularly as applicable to the travel industry.\n\nOur 2020 total cost per available seat mile (CASM) was 19.39 cents, an increase of 29.4%, from 14.98 cents in 2019. Lower than planned capacity in 2020 due to decreased passenger demand and government travel restrictions related to the COVID-19 pandemic drove the increase in our CASM, offset in part by the PSP1 Financial Assistance recognized in 2020.\n\nOur 2020 CASM excluding net special items and fuel was 17.69 cents, an increase of 54.4%, from 11.46 cents in 2019. The increase was primarily driven by lower capacity in 2020 as described above.\n\nFor a reconciliation of total operating CASM to total operating CASM excluding net special items and fuel, see Part II, Item 6. Selected Consolidated Financial Data 'Reconciliation of GAAP to Non-GAAP Financial Measures.'\n\n69", + "recall": 0.9795081967213115, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## Fuel\n\n## Other Costs\n\nIn 2020, cargo revenue was $769 million, a decrease of $94 million, or 10.8%, as compared to 2019, primarily due to a 44.4% decrease in cargo ton miles reflecting declines in freight volumes, principally as a result of international schedule reductions, which was offset in part by a 60.5% increase in yield as a result of rate increases.\n\nOther operating revenue decreased $845 million, or 29.2%, in 2020 as compared to 2019, driven primarily by lower revenue associated with our loyalty program and airport clubs.\n\nOur total revenue per available seat mile (TRASM) was 12.11 cents in 2020, a 24.6% decrease as compared to 16.05 cents in 2019.\n\nOur mainline and regional fuel expense totaled $3.4 billion in 2020, which was $6.0 billion, or 63.8%, lower compared to 2019. This decrease was primarily driven by a 49.4% decrease in gallons of fuel consumed as a result of lower capacity and a 28.5% decrease in the average price per gallon of aircraft fuel including related taxes to $1.48 in 2020 from $2.07 in 2019.\n\nAs of December 31, 2020, we did not have any fuel hedging contracts outstanding to hedge our fuel consumption. Our current policy is not to enter into transactions to hedge our fuel consumption, although we review that policy from time to time based on market conditions and other factors. We do not currently view the market opportunities to hedge fuel prices as attractive because, among other things, our future fuel needs remain unclear due to uncertainties regarding air travel demand and any hedging would potentially require significant capital or collateral to be placed at risk. As such, and assuming we do not enter into any future transactions to hedge our fuel consumption, we will continue to be fully exposed to fluctuations in fuel prices.\n\nWe remain committed to actively managing our cost structure, which we believe is necessary in an industry whose economic prospects are heavily dependent upon two variables we cannot control: general economic conditions and the price of fuel. In particular, the COVID-19 pandemic has resulted in a very rapid deterioration in general economic conditions, particularly as applicable to the travel industry.\n\nOur 2020 total cost per available seat mile (CASM) was 19.39 cents, an increase of 29.4%, from 14.98 cents in 2019. Lower than planned capacity in 2020 due to decreased passenger demand and government travel restrictions related to the COVID-19 pandemic drove the increase in our CASM, offset in part by the PSP1 Financial Assistance recognized in 2020.\n\nOur 2020 CASM excluding net special items and fuel was 17.69 cents, an increase of 54.4%, from 11.46 cents in 2019. The increase was primarily driven by lower capacity in 2020 as described above.\n\nFor a reconciliation of total operating CASM to total operating CASM excluding net special items and fuel, see Part II, Item 6. Selected Consolidated Financial Data – “Reconciliation of GAAP to Non-GAAP Financial Measures.”\n\n69" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9682719889394243, + "doc_id": "c46f89ec21748889362748833b2c770a074414d8bd606ad6d3b42fe0da17f994", + "edit_distance": 0.09563409563409564, + "f1_score": 0.9826086956521739, + "meteor": 0.9809464337268997, + "precision": 0.9912280701754386, + "pred_md": "Our U.S. defined benefit plan assets consist of a balanced portfolio of equity and fixed income securities. Our non-U.S. defined benefit plan assets include a significant concentration of United Kingdom (\"U.K.\") fixed income securities. We monitor investment allocations and manage plan assets to maintain acceptable levels of risk.\n\nFor all periods presented, we used a measurement date of December 31 for each of our U.S. pension plans, non-U.S. pension plans and postretirement medical plans.\n\n## U.S. Defined Benefit Plans\n\nWe maintain qualified and non-qualified defined benefit pension plans in the U.S. The qualified plan provides coverage for substantially all fulltime U.S. employees who receive benefits, up to an earnings threshold specified by the U.S. Department of Labor. The non-qualified plans primarily cover a small number of employees including current and former members of senior management, providing them with benefit levels equivalent to other participants, but that are otherwise limited by U.S. Department of Labor rules. The U.S. plans are designed to operate as \"cash balance\" arrangements, under which the employee has the option to take a lump sum payment at the end of their service. The difference between total accumulated benefit obligation and total projected benefit obligation (\"Benefit Obligation\") is immaterial.\n\nThe following are assumptions related to the U.S. defined benefit pension plans:\n\nAt December 31, 2020 as compared with December 31, 2019, we decreased our discount rate from 3.41% to 2.62% based on an analysis of publicly-traded investment grade U.S. corporate bonds, which had a lower yield due to current market conditions. In determining 2020 expense, the expected rate of return on U.S. plan assets remained constant at 6.00%, primarily based on our target allocations and expected long-term asset returns. The long-term rate of return assumption is calculated using a quantitative approach that utilizes unadjusted historical returns and asset allocation as inputs for the calculation. For all U.S. plans, we adopted the Pri-2012 mortality tables and the MP-2020 improvement scale published in October 2020. We applied the Pri-2012 tables based on the constituency of our plan population for union and non-union participants. We adjusted the improvement scale to utilize the Proxy SSA Long Term Improvement Rates (\"LTIR\"), consistent with assumptions adopted by the Social Security Administration trustees, based on long-term historical experience. Currently, we believe this approach provides the best estimate of our future obligation. Most plan participants elect to receive plan benefits as a lump sum at the end of service, rather than an annuity. As such, the updated mortality tables had an immaterial effect on our pension obligation.\n\n92", + "recall": 0.9741379310344828, + "true_md": "Our U.S. defined benefit plan assets consist of a balanced portfolio of equity and fixed income securities. Our non-U.S. defined benefit plan assets include a significant concentration of United Kingdom (\"U.K.\") fixed income securities. We monitor investment allocations and manage plan assets to maintain acceptable levels of risk.\n\nFor all periods presented, we used a measurement date of December 31 for each of our U.S. pension plans, non-U.S. pension plans and postretirement medical plans.\n\nWe maintain qualified and non-qualified defined benefit pension plans in the U.S. The qualified plan provides coverage for substantially all full- time U.S. employees who receive benefits, up to an earnings threshold specified by the U.S. Department of Labor. The non-qualified plans primarily cover a small number of employees including current and former members of senior management, providing them with benefit levels equivalent to other participants, but that are otherwise limited by U.S. Department of Labor rules. The U.S. plans are designed to operate as \"cash balance\" arrangements, under which the employee has the option to take a lump sum payment at the end of their service. The difference between total accumulated benefit obligation and total projected benefit obligation (\"Benefit Obligation\") is immaterial.\n\nAt December 31, 2020 as compared with December 31, 2019, we decreased our discount rate from 3.41% to 2.62% based on an analysis of publicly-traded investment grade U.S. corporate bonds, which had a lower yield due to current market conditions. In determining 2020 expense, the expected rate of return on U.S. plan assets remained constant at 6.0 0%, primarily based on our target allocations and expected long-term asset returns. The long-term rate of return assumption is calculated using a quantitative approach that utilizes unadjusted historical returns and asset allocation as inputs for the calculation. F or all U.S. plans, we adopted the Pri-2012 mortality tables and the MP-2020 improvement scale published in October 2020. We applied the Pri-2012 tables based on the constituency of our plan population for union and non-union participants. We adjusted the improvement scale to utilize the Proxy SSA Long Term Improvement Rates (\"LTIR\"), consistent with assumptions adopted by the Social Security Administration trustees, based on long-term historical experience. Currently, we believe this approach provides the best estimate of our future obligation. Most plan participants elect to receive plan benefits as a lump sum at the end of service, rather than an annuity. As such, the updated mortality tables had an immaterial effect on our pension obligation.\n\n## U.S. Defined Benefit Plans\n\nThe following are assumptions related to the U.S. defined benefit pension plans:\n\n92" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7884264391068992, + "doc_id": "4fa0abf7d0a46e98e755c2f456e175d21f6ada308c47e5b1e4cfe52fef03d995", + "edit_distance": 0.24242424242424243, + "f1_score": 1.0, + "meteor": 0.9915052429360441, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "## AMERICAN AIRLINES GROUP INC.\n\n## CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEETS\n\n(In millions, except share and par value)\n\nTable of Contents\n\nSee accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.\n\n93", + "recall": 1.0, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## AMERICAN AIRLINES GROUP INC. CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEETS (In millions, except share and par value)\n\nSee accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.\n\n93" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9625747372724496, + "doc_id": "6ba38607beb3628409d7a64e8e8b1cf9c7cc3a9ad3ee0c8d0734b7c70f4ae29b", + "edit_distance": 0.8779395296752519, + "f1_score": 0.9899244332493704, + "meteor": 0.7026359810911261, + "precision": 0.9924242424242424, + "pred_md": "## Table of Contents\n\nSubstantially all of our regional carrier arrangements are in the form of capacity purchase agreements. The capacity purchase agreements provide that all revenues, including passenger, in-flight, ancillary, mail and freight revenues, go to us. We control marketing, scheduling, ticketing, pricing and seat inventories. In return, we agree to pay predetermined fees to these airlines for operating an agreed-upon number of aircraft, without regard to the number of passengers on board. In addition, these agreements provide that we either reimburse or pay 100% of certain variable costs, such as airport landing fees, fuel and passenger liability insurance.\n\n## Cargo\n\nOur cargo division provides a wide range of freight and mail services, with facilities and interline connections available across the globe. In 2020, we expanded our cargo service and launched our first cargo-only flights since 1984 to transport critical goods, including the COVID-19 vaccine, between the U.S. and Europe, Asia and Latin America. We operated more than 5,200 cargo-only flights serving 41 destinations. These cargo-only flights have helped our customers move more than 167 million pounds of critical goods around the world amidst the COVID-19 pandemic.\n\n## Distribution and Marketing Agreements\n\nPassengers can purchase tickets for travel on American through several distribution channels, including our website ( www.aa.com ), our mobile app, our reservations centers and third-party distribution channels, including those provided by or through global distribution systems (e.g., Amadeus, Sabre and Travelport), conventional travel agents, travel management companies and online travel agents (e.g., Expedia, including its booking sites Orbitz and Travelocity, and Booking Holdings, including its booking sites Kayak and Priceline). To remain competitive, we will need to manage our distribution costs and rights effectively, increase our distribution flexibility and improve the functionality of our proprietary and thirdparty distribution channels, while maintaining an industry-competitive cost structure. For more discussion, see Part I, Item 1A. Risk Factors - ' We rely on third-party distribution channels and must manage effectively the costs, rights and functionality of these channels .'\n\nIn general, beyond nonstop city pairs, carriers that have the greatest ability to seamlessly connect passengers to and from markets have a competitive advantage. In some cases, however, foreign governments limit U.S. air carriers' rights to transport passengers beyond designated gateway cities in foreign countries. In order to improve access to domestic and foreign markets, we have arrangements with other airlines including through the one world Alliance, other cooperation agreements, joint business agreements, and marketing relationships, as further discussed below.\n\n## Member of oneworld Alliance\n\nAmerican is a founding member of the one world Alliance, which currently includes British Airways, Cathay Pacific, Finnair, Iberia, Japan Airlines, Malaysia Airlines, Qantas Airways (Qantas), Qatar Airways, Royal Air Maroc, Royal Jordanian, S7 Airlines and SriLankan Airlines. Fiji Airways is a one world connect partner and Alaska Airlines is a one world member elect, expected to join the one world Alliance in 2021. The one world Alliance links the networks of member carriers and their respective affiliates to enhance customer service and provide smooth connections to the destinations served by the alliance, including linking the carriers' loyalty programs and providing access to the carriers' airport lounge facilities.\n\n## Cooperation and Joint Business Agreements\n\nAmerican has established a transatlantic joint business with British Airways, Aer Lingus, Iberia and Finnair, a transpacific joint business with Japan Airlines and a joint business relating to Australia and New Zealand with Qantas, each of which has been granted antitrust immunity. Joint business agreements enable the carriers involved to cooperate on flights between particular destinations and allow pooling and sharing of certain revenues and costs, enhanced loyalty program reciprocity and cooperation in other areas. American and its joint business partners received regulatory approval to enter into these cooperation agreements. Joint business agreements have become a common approach among major carriers to address key regulatory restrictions typically applicable to international airline service, including limitations on the foreign ownership of airlines and national laws prohibiting foreign airlines from carrying passengers beyond specific gateway cities. Our competitors, including Delta Air Lines and United Airlines, are party to similar arrangements.\n\nThe business relationship under the transatlantic joint business benefits from a grant of antitrust immunity from the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT) and was reviewed by the European Commission (EC) in July 2010. In connection with this review, we provided certain commitments to the EC regarding, among other things, the availability of take-off and landing slots at London Heathrow (LHR) or London Gatwick (LGW) airports. The commitments accepted by the EC were binding for 10 years. In October 2018, in anticipation of the exit of the United Kingdom from the European Union (EU),\n\n8", + "recall": 0.9874371859296482, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## Cargo\n\n## Distribution and Marketing Agreements\n\n## Member of oneworld Alliance\n\n## Cooperation and Joint Business Agreements\n\n8\n\nThe business relationship under the transatlantic joint business benefits from a grant of antitrust immunity from the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT) and was reviewed by the European Commission (EC) in July 2010. In connection with this review, we provided certain commitments to the EC regarding, among other things, the availability of take-off and landing slots at London Heathrow (LHR) or London Gatwick (LGW) airports. The commitments accepted by the EC were binding for 10 years. In October 2018, in anticipation of the exit of the United Kingdom from the European Union (EU),\n\nAmerican has established a transatlantic joint business with British Airways, Aer Lingus, Iberia and Finnair, a transpacific joint business with Japan Airlines and a joint business relating to Australia and New Zealand with Qantas, each of which has been granted antitrust immunity. Joint business agreements enable the carriers involved to cooperate on flights between particular destinations and allow pooling and sharing of certain revenues and costs, enhanced loyalty program reciprocity and cooperation in other areas. American and its joint business partners received regulatory approval to enter into these cooperation agreements. Joint business agreements have become a common approach among major carriers to address key regulatory restrictions typically applicable to international airline service, including limitations on the foreign ownership of airlines and national laws prohibiting foreign airlines from carrying passengers beyond specific gateway cities. Our competitors, including Delta Air Lines and United Airlines, are party to similar arrangements.\n\nAmerican is a founding member of the one world Alliance, which currently includes British Airways, Cathay Pacific, Finnair, Iberia, Japan Airlines, Malaysia Airlines, Qantas Airways (Qantas), Qatar Airways, Royal Air Maroc, Royal Jordanian, S7 Airlines and SriLankan Airlines. Fiji Airways is a one world connect partner and Alaska Airlines is a one world member elect, expected to join the one world Alliance in 2021. The one world Alliance links the networks of member carriers and their respective affiliates to enhance customer service and provide smooth connections to the destinations served by the alliance, including linking the carriers’ loyalty programs and providing access to the carriers’ airport lounge facilities.\n\nIn general, beyond nonstop city pairs, carriers that have the greatest ability to seamlessly connect passengers to and from markets have a competitive advantage. In some cases, however, foreign governments limit U.S. air carriers’ rights to transport passengers beyond designated gateway cities in foreign countries. In order to improve access to domestic and foreign markets, we have arrangements with other airlines including through the one world Alliance, other cooperation agreements, joint business agreements, and marketing relationships, as further discussed below.\n\nPassengers can purchase tickets for travel on American through several distribution channels, including our website ( www.aa.com ), our mobile app, our reservations centers and third-party distribution channels, including those provided by or through global distribution systems (e.g., Amadeus, Sabre and Travelport), conventional travel agents, travel management companies and online travel agents (e.g., Expedia, including its booking sites Orbitz and Travelocity, and Booking Holdings, including its booking sites Kayak and Priceline). To remain competitive, we will need to manage our distribution costs and rights effectively, increase our distribution flexibility and improve the functionality of our proprietary and third- party distribution channels, while maintaining an industry-competitive cost structure. For more discussion, see Part I, Item 1A. Risk Factors – “ We rely on third-party distribution channels and must manage effectively the costs, rights and functionality of these channels .”\n\nOur cargo division provides a wide range of freight and mail services, with facilities and interline connections available across the globe. In 2020, we expanded our cargo service and launched our first cargo-only flights since 1984 to transport critical goods, including the COVID-19 vaccine, between the U.S. and Europe, Asia and Latin America. We operated more than 5,200 cargo-only flights serving 41 destinations. These cargo-only flights have helped our customers move more than 167 million pounds of critical goods around the world amidst the COVID-19 pandemic.\n\nSubstantially all of our regional carrier arrangements are in the form of capacity purchase agreements. The capacity purchase agreements provide that all revenues, including passenger, in-flight, ancillary, mail and freight revenues, go to us. We control marketing, scheduling, ticketing, pricing and seat inventories. In return, we agree to pay predetermined fees to these airlines for operating an agreed-upon number of aircraft, without regard to the number of passengers on board. In addition, these agreements provide that we either reimburse or pay 100% of certain variable costs, such as airport landing fees, fuel and passenger liability insurance." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8889416293006712, + "doc_id": "77a1fec8ead2e88d14910e0348d1310e1e00de2369731d00d3dd81bc1b588ef8", + "edit_distance": 0.07120743034055728, + "f1_score": 0.9798657718120807, + "meteor": 0.9433601947388442, + "precision": 0.9864864864864865, + "pred_md": "## Table of Contents\n\n## Item 7: Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations\n\n## Introduction\n\nManagement's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations (MD&A) is intended to facilitate an understanding of Applied's business and results of operations. This MD&A should be read in conjunction with Applied's Consolidated Financial Statements and the accompanying Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements included elsewhere in this Form 10-K. The following discussion contains forward-looking statements and should also be read in conjunction with the cautionary statement set forth at the beginning of this Form 10-K. MD&A consists of the following sections:\n\n- · Applied's Pandemic Response\n- · Overview: a summary of Applied's business and measurements\n- · Results of Operations: a discussion of operating results\n- · Segment Information: a discussion of segment operating results\n- · Recent Accounting Pronouncements: a discussion of new accounting pronouncements and its impact to Applied's consolidated financial statements\n- · Financial Condition, Liquidity and Capital Resources: an analysis of cash flows, sources and uses of cash\n- · Off-Balance Sheet Arrangements and Contractual Obligations\n- · Critical Accounting Policies and Estimates: a discussion of critical accounting policies that require the exercise of judgments and estimates\n- · Non-GAAP Adjusted Results: a presentation of results reconciling GAAP to non-GAAP adjusted measures\n\n## Applied's Pandemic Response\n\nApplied Materials' business has been identified by the U.S. Department of Homeland Security as part of the Critical Infrastructure Sectors that the Federal government deems 'essential to ensure the continuity of functions critical to public health and safety, as well as economic and national security' and that have 'a special responsibility in these times to continue operations.'\n\nApplied responded quickly to put in place precautionary measures to keep its workplaces healthy and safe, while ensuring compliance with orders and restrictions imposed by government authorities, everywhere Applied operates in the world.\n\nApplied's top priority during the ongoing COVID-19 pandemic remains protecting the health and safety of its employees and their families, customers and community. Applied continues to maintain workplace flexibility such as working remotely where possible to reduce the number of people who are on campus each day. Applied is keeping its critical labs and operations active and continuing to support customers. In the interest of public health, all onsite operations are utilizing the minimum number of people to safely execute tasks and following enhanced safety and health protocols-including screenings, social distancing, and use of personal protective equipment.\n\nApplied has a multi-phase plan to return to working on-site, which takes into consideration factors such as Applied's business needs, local government regulations, community case trends, and recommendation from public health officials. The plan involves multiple phases that gradually allow additional workers to return onsite while practicing social distancing and other safety measures.\n\nApplied Materials is committed to helping those most impacted by the ongoing COVID-19 pandemic. In regions around the world, Applied and its Foundation are addressing immediate humanitarian needs while investing resources to combat the long-term effect of the virus on the nonprofit organizations in its communities. Applied has shared masks and equipment with medical facilities, provided blood analysis systems to medical professionals and sent emergency support to food banks.\n\nApplied will continue to monitor and evaluate the ongoing COVID-19 pandemic and will work to respond appropriately to the impact of COVID-19 on its business, its customers' and suppliers' businesses and its communities.\n\n34", + "recall": 0.9733333333333334, + "true_md": "## Item 7: Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations\n\n## Introduction\n\nManagement’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations (MD&A) is intended to facilitate an understanding of Applied’s business and results of operations. This MD&A should be read in conjunction with Applied’s Consolidated Financial Statements and the accompanying Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements included elsewhere in this Form 10-K. The following discussion contains forward-looking statements and should also be read in conjunction with the cautionary statement set forth at the beginning of this Form 10-K. MD&A consists of the following sections:\n\nTable of Contents\n\n- • Applied's Pandemic Response\n\n- • Overview: a summary of Applied’s business and measurements\n\n- • Results of Operations: a discussion of operating results\n\n- • Segment Information: a discussion of segment operating results\n\n- • Recent Accounting Pronouncements: a discussion of new accounting pronouncements and its impact to Applied’s consolidated financial statements\n\n- • Financial Condition, Liquidity and Capital Resources: an analysis of cash flows, sources and uses of cash\n\n- • Off-Balance Sheet Arrangements and Contractual Obligations\n\n- • Critical Accounting Policies and Estimates: a discussion of critical accounting policies that require the exercise of judgments and estimates\n\n- • Non-GAAP Adjusted Results: a presentation of results reconciling GAAP to non-GAAP adjusted measures\n\n## Applied’s Pandemic Response\n\nApplied Materials’ business has been identified by the U.S. Department of Homeland Security as part of the Critical Infrastructure Sectors that the Federal government deems “essential to ensure the continuity of functions critical to public health and safety, as well as economic and national security” and that have “a special responsibility in these times to continue operations.”\n\nApplied responded quickly to put in place precautionary measures to keep its workplaces healthy and safe, while ensuring compliance with orders and restrictions imposed by government authorities, everywhere Applied operates in the world.\n\nApplied’s top priority during the ongoing COVID-19 pandemic remains protecting the health and safety of its employees and their families, customers and community. Applied continues to maintain workplace flexibility such as working remotely where possible to reduce the number of people who are on campus each day. Applied is keeping its critical labs and operations active and continuing to support customers. In the interest of public health, all onsite operations are utilizing the minimum number of people to safely execute tasks and following enhanced safety and health protocols—including screenings, social distancing, and use of personal protective equipment.\n\nApplied has a multi-phase plan to return to working on-site, which takes into consideration factors such as Applied’s business needs, local government regulations, community case trends, and recommendation from public health officials. The plan involves multiple phases that gradually allow additional workers to return onsite while practicing social distancing and other safety measures.\n\nApplied Materials is committed to helping those most impacted by the ongoing COVID-19 pandemic. In regions around the world, Applied and its Foundation are addressing immediate humanitarian needs while investing resources to combat the long-term effect of the virus on the nonprofit organizations in its communities. Applied has shared masks and equipment with medical facilities, provided blood analysis systems to medical professionals and sent emergency support to food banks.\n\nApplied will continue to monitor and evaluate the ongoing COVID-19 pandemic and will work to respond appropriately to the impact of COVID-19 on its business, its customers’ and suppliers’ businesses and its communities.\n\n34" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9514025437890385, + "doc_id": "a3086d8dbf27188631dccae3404dbd4a3f1cf5d713b91564d04389a9cd736708", + "edit_distance": 0.09806629834254144, + "f1_score": 0.9864603481624759, + "meteor": 0.9698149753510925, + "precision": 0.9883720930232558, + "pred_md": "## Table of Contents\n\n## Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm\n\nTo the Stockholder and Board of Directors American Airlines, Inc.:\n\n## Opinion on Internal Control Over Financial Reporting\n\nWe have audited American Airlines, Inc. and subsidiaries' (American) internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2020, based on criteria established in Internal Control -Integrated Framework (2013) issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission. In our opinion, American maintained, in all material respects, effective internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2020, based on criteria established in Internal Control -Integrated Framework (2013) issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission.\n\nWe also have audited, in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States) (PCAOB), the consolidated balance sheets of American as of December 31, 2020 and 2019, the related consolidated statements of operations, comprehensive income (loss), cash flows, and stockholder's equity for each of the years in the three-year period ended December 31, 2020, and the related notes (collectively, the consolidated financial statements), and our report dated February 17, 2021 expressed an unqualified opinion on those consolidated financial statements.\n\n## Basis for Opinion\n\nAmerican's management is responsible for maintaining effective internal control over financial reporting and for its assessment of the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting, included in the accompanying Management's Annual Report on Internal Control over Financial Reporting. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on American's internal control over financial reporting based on our audit. We are a public accounting firm registered with the PCAOB and are required to be independent with respect to American in accordance with the U.S. federal securities laws and the applicable rules and regulations of the Securities and Exchange Commission and the PCAOB.\n\nWe conducted our audit in accordance with the standards of the PCAOB. Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether effective internal control over financial reporting was maintained in all material respects. Our audit of internal control over financial reporting included obtaining an understanding of internal control over financial reporting, assessing the risk that a material weakness exists, and testing and evaluating the design and operating effectiveness of internal control based on the assessed risk. Our audit also included performing such other procedures as we considered necessary in the circumstances. We believe that our audit provides a reasonable basis for our opinion.\n\n## Definition and Limitations of Internal Control Over Financial Reporting\n\nA company's internal control over financial reporting is a process designed to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles. A company's internal control over financial reporting includes those policies and procedures that (1) pertain to the maintenance of records that, in reasonable detail, accurately and fairly reflect the transactions and dispositions of the assets of the company; (2) provide reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded as necessary to permit preparation of financial statements in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles, and that receipts and expenditures of the company are being made only in accordance with authorizations of management and directors of the company; and (3) provide reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of unauthorized acquisition, use, or disposition of the company's assets that could have a material effect on the financial statements.\n\nBecause of its inherent limitations, internal control over financial reporting may not prevent or detect misstatements. Also, projections of any evaluation of effectiveness to future periods are subject to the risk that controls may become inadequate because of changes in conditions, or that the degree of compliance with the policies or procedures may deteriorate.\n\n/s/ KPMG LLP\n\nDallas, Texas February 17, 2021\n\n204", + "recall": 0.9845559845559846, + "true_md": "Table of Contents\n\n## Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm\n\nTo the Stockholder and Board of Directors American Airlines, Inc.:\n\nWe have audited American Airlines, Inc. and subsidiaries’ (American) internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2020, based on criteria established in Internal Control – Integrated Framework (2013) issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission. In our opinion, American maintained, in all material respects, effective internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2020, based on criteria established in Internal Control – Integrated Framework (2013) issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission.\n\nWe also have audited, in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States) (PCAOB), the consolidated balance sheets of American as of December 31, 2020 and 2019, the related consolidated statements of operations, comprehensive income (loss), cash flows, and stockholder’s equity for each of the years in the three-year period ended December 31, 2020, and the related notes (collectively, the consolidated financial statements), and our report dated February 17, 2021 expressed an unqualified opinion on those consolidated financial statements.\n\nAmerican’s management is responsible for maintaining effective internal control over financial reporting and for its assessment of the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting, included in the accompanying Management’s Annual Report on Internal Control over Financial Reporting. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on American’s internal control over financial reporting based on our audit. We are a public accounting firm registered with the PCAOB and are required to be independent with respect to American in accordance with the U.S. federal securities laws and the applicable rules and regulations of the Securities and Exchange Commission and the PCAOB.\n\nWe conducted our audit in accordance with the standards of the PCAOB. Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether effective internal control over financial reporting was maintained in all material respects. Our audit of internal control over financial reporting included obtaining an understanding of internal control over financial reporting, assessing the risk that a material weakness exists, and testing and evaluating the design and operating effectiveness of internal control based on the assessed risk. Our audit also included performing such other procedures as we considered necessary in the circumstances. We believe that our audit provides a reasonable basis for our opinion.\n\nA company’s internal control over financial reporting is a process designed to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles. A company’s internal control over financial reporting includes those policies and procedures that (1) pertain to the maintenance of records that, in reasonable detail, accurately and fairly reflect the transactions and dispositions of the assets of the company; (2) provide reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded as necessary to permit preparation of financial statements in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles, and that receipts and expenditures of the company are being made only in accordance with authorizations of management and directors of the company; and (3) provide reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of unauthorized acquisition, use, or disposition of the company’s assets that could have a material effect on the financial statements.\n\nBecause of its inherent limitations, internal control over financial reporting may not prevent or detect misstatements. Also, projections of any evaluation of effectiveness to future periods are subject to the risk that controls may become inadequate because of changes in conditions, or that the degree of compliance with the policies or procedures may deteriorate.\n\n/s/ KPMG LLP\n\nDallas, Texas February 17, 2021\n\n## Opinion on Internal Control Over Financial Reporting\n\n## Basis for Opinion\n\n## Definition and Limitations of Internal Control Over Financial Reporting\n\n204" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.9908693389532057, + "doc_id": "eb75ad4331e641f391bc0558331a3e955b325770357224c8c336c73a83267d69", + "edit_distance": 0.0068143100511073255, + "f1_score": 0.9947826086956519, + "meteor": 0.99352314143316, + "precision": 1.0, + "pred_md": "CP\t2020\tANNUAL\tREPORT\n\nAverage train weight is defined as the average gross weight of CP trains, both loaded and empty. This excludes trains in short-haul service, work trains used to move CP's track equipment and materials, and the haulage of other railways' trains on CP's network. An increase in average train weight indicates improved asset utilization and may also be the result of moving heavier commodities. Average train weight of 9,707 tons in 2020 increased by 578 tons, or 6% compared with 9,129 tons in 2019. This increase was a result of improvements in operating plan efficiency, continued improvements in operational efficiency due to moving longer and heavier export potash and Grain trains, and improved winter operating conditions in the first quarter of 2020. This increase was partially offset by moving lower volumes of heavier commodities such as Canadian coal and crude. Improvements for Grain trains were driven by the High Efficiency Product (\"HEP\") train model, which is an 8,500-foot train model that features the new high-capacity grain hopper cars and increased grain carrying capacity.\n\nAverage train weight of 9,129 tons in 2019 increased by 29 tons from 9,100 tons in 2018. This slight increase was a result of improvements in operating plan efficiency. This increase was partially offset by the implementation of CP's winter contingency plan in the first quarter of 2019 resulting in shorter and lighter trains within the operating plan.\n\nAverage train length is defined as the average total length of CP trains, both loaded and empty. This includes all cars and locomotives on the train and is calculated as the sum of each car or locomotive's length multiplied by the distance travelled, divided by train miles. This excludes trains in short-haul service, work trains used to move CP's track equipment and materials, and the haulage of other railroads' trains on CP's network. An increase in average train length indicates improved asset utilization. Average train length of 7,929 feet in 2020 increased by 541 feet, or 7%, compared with 7,388 feet in 2019. This increase was a result of improvements in operating plan efficiency and continued improvements in operational efficiency due to moving longer Grain and export potash trains. This increase was partially offset by moving lower volumes of commodities such as Canadian coal, which move in longer trains. Improvements for Grain trains were driven by the 8,500-foot HEP train model.\n\nAverage train length of 7,388 feet in 2019 increased by 75 feet, or 1%, from 7,313 feet in 2018. This was a result of improvements in operating plan efficiency and increased Intermodal volumes which move on longer trains. This increase was partially offset by the implementation of CP's winter contingency plan in the first quarter of 2019 resulting in shorter and lighter trains within the operating plan.\n\nAverage terminal dwell is defined as the average time a freight car resides within terminal boundaries expressed in hours. The timing starts with a train arriving at the terminal, a customer releasing the car to the Company, or a car arriving at interchange from another railroad. The timing ends when the train leaves, a customer receives the car from CP, or the freight car is transferred to another railroad. Freight cars are excluded if they are being stored at the terminal or used in track repairs. A decrease in average terminal dwell indicates improved terminal performance resulting in faster cycle times and improved railcar utilization. Average terminal dwell of 6.5 hours in 2020 increased by 2% from 6.4 hours in 2019. This unfavourable increase was a result of aligning the operating plan to demand in order to maintain network efficiencies in the last three quarters of 2020. Aligning the operating plan to demand resulted in increased average train weight, average train length, and increased locomotive productivity.\n\nAverage terminal dwell of 6.4 hours in 2019 favourably decreased by 6% from 6.8 hours in 2018. This favourable decrease was due to improved network fluidity.\n\nAverage train speed is defined as a measure of the line-haul movement from origin to destination including terminal dwell hours. It is calculated by dividing the total train miles travelled by the total train hours operated. This calculation does not include delay time related to customers or foreign railways and excludes the time and distance travelled by: i) trains used in or around CP's yards; ii) passenger trains; and iii) trains used for repairing track. An increase in average train speed indicates improved on-time performance resulting in improved asset utilization. Average train speed was 22.0 mph in 2020, a decrease of 1%, from 22.2 mph in 2019. This decrease in speed was a result of aligning the operating plan to demand in order to maintain network efficiencies in the last three quarters of 2020, partially offset by improved winter operating conditions in the first quarter of 2020. Aligning the operating plan to demand resulted in increased average train weight, average train length, and increased locomotive productivity.\n\nAverage train speed in 2019 was 22.2 mph, an increase of 3%, from 21.5 mph in 2018. This increase in speed was due to the completion of network infrastructure projects, partially offset by the impact of harsh winter operating conditions and network disruptions in the first quarter of 2019.\n\nLocomotive productivity is defined as the daily average GTMs divided by daily average operating horsepower. Operating horsepower excludes units offline, tied up or in storage, or in use on other railways, and includes foreign units online. An increase in locomotive productivity indicates more efficient locomotive utilization and may also be the result of moving heavier commodities. Locomotive productivity was 207 GTMs/OHP in 2020, an increase of 5 GTMs/OHP, or 2%, compared to 202 GTMs/OHP in 2019. This increase was primarily due to improvements in operating plan efficiency as a result of aligning the operating plan to demand.\n\nLocomotive productivity was 202 GTMs/OHP in 2019, an increase of 4 GTMs/OHP, or 2%, compared to 198 GTMs/OHP in 2018. This increase was primarily due to improvements in operating plan efficiency as a result of aligning the operating plan to demand.\n\nFuel efficiency is defined as U.S. gallons of locomotive fuel consumed per 1,000 GTMs. Fuel consumed includes gallons from freight, yard and commuter service but excludes fuel used in capital projects and other non-freight activities. An improvement in fuel efficiency indicates operational cost savings and", + "recall": 0.9896193771626297, + "true_md": "39 CP 2020 ANNUAL REPORT\n\nAverage train weight is defined as the average gross weight of CP trains, both loaded and empty. This excludes trains in short-haul service, work trains used to move CP’s track equipment and materials, and the haulage of other railways’ trains on CP’s network. An increase in average train weight indicates improved asset utilization and may also be the result of moving heavier commodities. Average train weight of 9,707 tons in 2020 increased by 578 tons, or 6% compared with 9,129 tons in 2019. This increase was a result of improvements in operating plan efficiency, continued improvements in operational efficiency due to moving longer and heavier export potash and Grain trains, and improved winter operating conditions in the first quarter of 2020. This increase was partially offset by moving lower volumes of heavier commodities such as Canadian coal and crude. Improvements for Grain trains were driven by the High Efficiency Product (\"HEP\") train model, which is an 8,500-foot train model that features the new high-capacity grain hopper cars and increased grain carrying capacity.\n\nAverage train weight of 9,129 tons in 2019 increased by 29 tons from 9,100 tons in 2018. This slight increase was a result of improvements in operating plan efficiency. This increase was partially offset by the implementation of CP's winter contingency plan in the first quarter of 2019 resulting in shorter and lighter trains within the operating plan.\n\nAverage train length is defined as the average total length of CP trains, both loaded and empty. This includes all cars and locomotives on the train and is calculated as the sum of each car or locomotive's length multiplied by the distance travelled, divided by train miles. This excludes trains in short-haul service, work trains used to move CP's track equipment and materials, and the haulage of other railroads' trains on CP's network. An increase in average train length indicates improved asset utilization. Average train length of 7,929 feet in 2020 increased by 541 feet, or 7%, compared with 7,388 feet in 2019. This increase was a result of improvements in operating plan efficiency and continued improvements in operational efficiency due to moving longer Grain and export potash trains. This increase was partially offset by moving lower volumes of commodities such as Canadian coal, which move in longer trains. Improvements for Grain trains were driven by the 8,500-foot HEP train model.\n\nAverage train length of 7,388 feet in 2019 increased by 75 feet, or 1%, from 7,313 feet in 2018. This was a result of improvements in operating plan efficiency and increased Intermodal volumes which move on longer trains. This increase was partially offset by the implementation of CP's winter contingency plan in the first quarter of 2019 resulting in shorter and lighter trains within the operating plan.\n\nAverage terminal dwell is defined as the average time a freight car resides within terminal boundaries expressed in hours. The timing starts with a train arriving at the terminal, a customer releasing the car to the Company, or a car arriving at interchange from another railroad. The timing ends when the train leaves, a customer receives the car from CP, or the freight car is transferred to another railroad. Freight cars are excluded if they are being stored at the terminal or used in track repairs. A decrease in average terminal dwell indicates improved terminal performance resulting in faster cycle times and improved railcar utilization. Average terminal dwell of 6.5 hours in 2020 increased by 2% from 6.4 hours in 2019. This unfavourable increase was a result of aligning the operating plan to demand in order to maintain network efficiencies in the last three quarters of 2020. Aligning the operating plan to demand resulted in increased average train weight, average train length, and increased locomotive productivity.\n\nAverage terminal dwell of 6.4 hours in 2019 favourably decreased by 6% from 6.8 hours in 2018. This favourable decrease was due to improved network fluidity.\n\nAverage train speed is defined as a measure of the line-haul movement from origin to destination including terminal dwell hours. It is calculated by dividing the total train miles travelled by the total train hours operated. This calculation does not include delay time related to customers or foreign railways and excludes the time and distance travelled by: i) trains used in or around CP’s yards; ii) passenger trains; and iii) trains used for repairing track. An increase in average train speed indicates improved on-time performance resulting in improved asset utilization. Average train speed was 22.0 mph in 2020, a decrease of 1%, from 22.2 mph in 2019. This decrease in speed was a result of aligning the operating plan to demand in order to maintain network efficiencies in the last three quarters of 2020, partially offset by improved winter operating conditions in the first quarter of 2020. Aligning the operating plan to demand resulted in increased average train weight, average train length, and increased locomotive productivity.\n\nAverage train speed in 2019 was 22.2 mph, an increase of 3%, from 21.5 mph in 2018. This increase in speed was due to the completion of network infrastructure projects, partially offset by the impact of harsh winter operating conditions and network disruptions in the first quarter of 2019.\n\nLocomotive productivity is defined as the daily average GTMs divided by daily average operating horsepower. Operating horsepower excludes units offline, tied up or in storage, or in use on other railways, and includes foreign units online. An increase in locomotive productivity indicates more efficient locomotive utilization and may also be the result of moving heavier commodities. Locomotive productivity was 207 GTMs/OHP in 2020, an increase of 5 GTMs/OHP, or 2%, compared to 202 GTMs/OHP in 2019. This increase was primarily due to improvements in operating plan efficiency as a result of aligning the operating plan to demand.\n\nLocomotive productivity was 202 GTMs/OHP in 2019, an increase of 4 GTMs/OHP, or 2%, compared to 198 GTMs/OHP in 2018. This increase was primarily due to improvements in operating plan efficiency as a result of aligning the operating plan to demand.\n\nFuel efficiency is defined as U.S. gallons of locomotive fuel consumed per 1,000 GTMs. Fuel consumed includes gallons from freight, yard and commuter service but excludes fuel used in capital projects and other non-freight activities. An improvement in fuel efficiency indicates operational cost savings and" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6977828718875637, + "doc_id": "c871d52ca79ee91d5ee3c9ebf2b7ab451a5f1e4bad9530f9a95a938949db9ac5", + "edit_distance": 0.42016806722689076, + "f1_score": 0.8307692307692307, + "meteor": 0.7739917304996743, + "precision": 0.7714285714285715, + "pred_md": "dkrause on DSKBC28HB2PROD with PUBLAWS\n\nVerDate Sep 11 2014\n\n15:46 Aug 08, 2019\n\nJkt 089139\n\nPO 00030\n\nFrm 00002\n\nFmt 6580\n\nSfmt 6580\n\nE:\\PUBLAW\\PUBL030.116\n\nPUBL030\n\nPUBLIC LAW 116-30-JULY 25, 2019\n\n133 STAT. 1033\n\n''(2) new construction would be required to create a lactation room in the public building and the cost of such construction is unfeasible.\n\n''(d) NO UNAUTHORIZED ENTRY.-Nothing in this section shall be construed to authorize an individual to enter a public building or portion thereof that the individual is not otherwise authorized to enter.''.\n\n(b) CLERICAL AMENDMENT.-The table of sections at the beginning of chapter 33 of title 40, United States Code, is amended by inserting after the item related to section 3316 the following new item:\n\n40 USC 3301 prec.\n\n''3318. Lactation room in public buildings.''.\n\n(c) EFFECTIVE DATE.-The amendments made by this section shall take effect 1 year after the date of the enactment of this Act. 40 USC 3318 note.\n\nApproved July 25, 2019.\n\nLEGISLATIVE HISTORY-H.R. 866 (S. 528):\n\nCONGRESSIONAL RECORD, Vol. 165 (2019): Feb. 6, considered and passed House. June 26, considered and passed Senate.\n\nÆ", + "recall": 0.9, + "true_md": "PUBLIC LAW 116–30—JULY 25, 2019 \n\n133 STAT. 1033 \n\n‘‘(2) new construction would be required to create a lacta- tion room in the public building and the cost of such construc- tion is unfeasible. ‘‘(d) NO UNAUTHORIZED ENTRY.—Nothing in this section shall \n\ntion is unfeasible. ‘‘(d) NO UNAUTHORIZED ENTRY.—Nothing in this section shall be construed to authorize an individual to enter a public building or portion thereof that the individual is not otherwise authorized to enter.’’. (b) CLERICAL AMENDMENT.—The table of sections at the begin-\n\nto enter.’’. (b) CLERICAL AMENDMENT.—The table of sections at the begin- ning of chapter 33 of title 40, United States Code, is amended by inserting after the item related to section 3316 the following new item: \n\n‘‘3318. Lactation room in public buildings.’’. \n\n40 USC 3301 prec. \n\n40 USC 3318 note. \n\n(c) EFFECTIVE DATE.—The amendments made by this section shall take effect 1 year after the date of the enactment of this Act. \n\nApproved July 25, 2019. \n\nLEGISLATIVE HISTORY—H.R. 866 (S. 528): \n\nCONGRESSIONAL RECORD, Vol. 165 (2019): Feb. 6, considered and passed House. June 26, considered and passed Senate. \n\nÆ" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.6255425371437896, + "doc_id": "93378882ca73cd6278221d33aa5260f47ea5be24739f2cd3eb8d5a56bf0ffa2e", + "edit_distance": 0.6235632183908046, + "f1_score": 0.8500000000000001, + "meteor": 0.6401406193433231, + "precision": 0.7777777777777778, + "pred_md": "<unknown>\n\ndkrause on DSKBC28HB2PROD with PUBLAWS\n\nVerDate Sep 11 2014\n\n10:09 Aug 26, 2019\n\nJkt 089139\n\nPO 00049\n\nFrm 00001\n\nFmt 6580\n\nSfmt 6580\n\nE:\\PUBLAW\\PUBL049.116\n\nPUBL049\n\n133 STAT. 1072\n\nPUBLIC LAW 116-49-AUG. 22, 2019\n\n## Public Law 116-49 116th Congress\n\n## An Act\n\nTo amend the Public Health Service Act to reauthorize the Emergency Medical Services for Children program.\n\nBe it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the United States of America in Congress assembled,\n\n## SECTION 1. SHORT TITLE.\n\nThis Act may be cited as the ''Emergency Medical Services for Children Program Reauthorization Act of 2019''.\n\n## SEC. 2. REAUTHORIZATION OF THE EMERGENCY MEDICAL SERVICES FOR CHILDREN PROGRAM.\n\nSection 1910(d) of the Public Health Service Act (42 U.S.C. 300w-9(d)) is amended-\n\n(1) by striking ''2014, and'' and inserting ''2014,''; and (2) by inserting before the period the following: '', and $22,334,000 for each of fiscal years 2020 through 2024''.\n\nApproved August 22, 2019.\n\nLEGISLATIVE HISTORY-H.R. 776 (S. 1173):\n\nHOUSE REPORTS: No. 116-176 (Comm. on Energy and Commerce).\n\nCONGRESSIONAL RECORD, Vol. 165 (2019):\n\nJuly 24, considered and passed House.\n\nJuly 31, considered and passed Senate.\n\nÆ\n\nAug. 22, 2019\n\n## [H.R. 776]\n\nEmergency Medical Services for Children Program Reauthorization Act of 2019. 42 USC 201 note.", + "recall": 0.937007874015748, + "true_md": "PUBLIC LAW 116–49—AUG. 22, 2019 \n\n133 STAT. 1072 \n\n# Public Law 116–49 116th Congress\n\n# An Act\n\nTo amend the Public Health Service Act to reauthorize the Emergency Medical Services for Children program. \n\nBe it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the United States of America in Congress assembled, \n\nThis Act may be cited as the ‘‘Emergency Medical Services for Children Program Reauthorization Act of 2019’’. \n\nSection 1910(d) of the Public Health Service Act (42 U.S.C. 300w–9(d)) is amended— (1) by striking ‘‘2014, and’’ and inserting ‘‘2014,’’; and \n\n300w–9(d)) is amended— (1) by striking ‘‘2014, and’’ and inserting ‘‘2014,’’; and (2) by inserting before the period the following: ‘‘, and \n\n(1) by striking ‘‘2014, and’’ and inserting ‘‘2014,’’; and (2) by inserting before the period the following: ‘‘, and $22,334,000 for each of fiscal years 2020 through 2024’’. \n\nApproved August 22, 2019. \n\nAug. 22, 2019 \n\n[H.R. 776] \n\n## SECTION 1. SHORT TITLE.\n\n## SEC. 2. REAUTHORIZATION OF THE EMERGENCY MEDICAL SERVICES FOR CHILDREN PROGRAM.\n\nLEGISLATIVE HISTORY—H.R. 776 (S. 1173): \n\nHOUSE REPORTS: No. 116–176 (Comm. on Energy and Commerce). CONGRESSIONAL RECORD, Vol. 165 (2019): \n\nHOUSE REPORTS: No. 116–176 (Comm. on Energy and Commerce). CONGRESSIONAL RECORD, Vol. 165 (2019): July 24, considered and passed House. July 31, considered and passed Senate. \n\nÆ \n\nEmergency Medical Services for Children Program Reauthorization Act of 2019. 42 USC 201 note." + }, + { + "bleu": 0.5374831890591615, + "doc_id": "ff69aaffb9dcb6b8b682804fff48a54d96bf2d594ecae9749835dc048769213f", + "edit_distance": 0.5319465081723626, + "f1_score": 0.8486352357320099, + "meteor": 0.49683625857752856, + "precision": 0.7880184331797235, + "pred_md": "<unknown>\n\ndkrause on DSKBC28HB2PROD with PUBLAWS\n\nVerDate Sep 11 2014\n\n15:46 Aug 08, 2019\n\nJkt 089139\n\nPO 00030\n\nFrm 00001\n\nFmt 6580\n\nSfmt 6581\n\nE:\\PUBLAW\\PUBL030.116\n\nPUBL030\n\n133 STAT. 1032\n\nPUBLIC LAW 116-30-JULY 25, 2019\n\nPublic Law 116-30 116th Congress\n\n## An Act\n\nTo provide a lactation room in public buildings.\n\nBe it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the United States of America in Congress assembled,\n\n## SECTION 1. SHORT TITLE.\n\nThis Act may be cited as the ''Fairness For Breastfeeding Mothers Act of 2019''.\n\n## SEC. 2. LACTATION ROOM IN PUBLIC BUILDINGS.\n\n(a) LACTATION ROOM IN PUBLIC BUILDINGS.-Chapter 33 of title 40, United States Code, is amended by adding at the end the following new section:\n\n## ''§ 3318. Lactation room in public buildings\n\n''(a) DEFINITIONS.-In this section:\n\n''(1) APPROPRIATE AUTHORITY.-The term 'appropriate authority' means the head of a Federal agency, the Architect of the Capitol, or other official authority responsible for the operation of a public building.\n\n''(2) COVERED PUBLIC BUILDING.-The term 'covered public building' means a public building (as defined in section 3301) that is open to the public and contains a public restroom, and includes a building listed in section 6301 or 5101.\n\n''(3) LACTATION ROOM.-The term 'lactation room' means a hygienic place, other than a bathroom, that-\n\n''(A) is shielded from view;\n\n''(B) is free from intrusion; and\n\n''(C) contains a chair, a working surface, and, if the public building is otherwise supplied with electricity, an electrical outlet.\n\n''(b) LACTATION ROOM REQUIRED.-Except as provided in subsection (c), the appropriate authority of a covered public building shall ensure that the building contains a lactation room that is made available for use by members of the public to express breast milk.\n\n''(c) EXCEPTIONS.-A covered public building may be excluded from the requirement in subsection (b) at the discretion of the appropriate authority if-\n\n''(1) the public building-\n\n''(A) does not contain a lactation room for employees who work in the building; and\n\n''(B) does not have a room that could be repurposed as a lactation room or a space that could be made private using portable materials, at a reasonable cost; or\n\nJuly 25, 2019\n\n[H.R. 866]\n\nFairness For Breastfeeding Mothers Act of 2019. 40 USC 101 note.\n\n40 USC 3318.", + "recall": 0.9193548387096774, + "true_md": "PUBLIC LAW 116–30—JULY 25, 2019 \n\n133 STAT. 1032 \n\n# Public Law 116–30 116th Congress\n\n# An Act\n\nJuly 25, 2019 \n\n[H.R. 866] \n\nFairness For Breastfeeding Mothers Act of 2019. 40 USC 101 note. \n\n40 USC 3318. \n\nTo provide a lactation room in public buildings. \n\nBe it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the United States of America in Congress assembled, \n\nThis Act may be cited as the ‘‘Fairness For Breastfeeding Mothers Act of 2019’’. \n\n(a) LACTATION ROOM IN PUBLIC BUILDINGS.—Chapter 33 of title 40, United States Code, is amended by adding at the end the following new section: \n\n‘‘(a) DEFINITIONS.—In this section: ‘‘(1) APPROPRIATE\n\n‘‘(a) DEFINITIONS.—In this section: ‘‘(1) APPROPRIATE AUTHORITY.—The term ‘appropriate authority’ means the head of a Federal agency, the Architect of the Capitol, or other official authority responsible for the operation of a public building. ‘‘(2) COVERED PUBLIC BUILDING.—The term ‘covered public \n\noperation of a public building. ‘‘(2) COVERED PUBLIC BUILDING.—The term ‘covered public building’ means a public building (as defined in section 3301) that is open to the public and contains a public restroom, and includes a building listed in section 6301 or 5101. ‘‘(3) LACTATION ROOM.—The term ‘lactation room’ means \n\nand includes a building listed in section 6301 or 5101. ‘‘(3) LACTATION ROOM.—The term ‘lactation room’ means a hygienic place, other than a bathroom, that— ‘‘(A) is shielded from view; \n\na hygienic place, other than a bathroom, that— ‘‘(A) is shielded from view; ‘‘(B) is free from intrusion; and \n\n‘‘(A) is shielded from view; ‘‘(B) is free from intrusion; and ‘‘(C) contains a chair, a working surface, and, if the \n\n‘‘(B) is free from intrusion; and ‘‘(C) contains a chair, a working surface, and, if the public building is otherwise supplied with electricity, an electrical outlet. ‘‘(b) LACTATION ROOM REQUIRED.—Except as provided in sub-\n\nelectrical outlet. ‘‘(b) LACTATION ROOM REQUIRED.—Except as provided in sub- section (c), the appropriate authority of a covered public building shall ensure that the building contains a lactation room that is made available for use by members of the public to express breast milk. ‘‘(c) EXCEPTIONS.—A covered public building may be excluded \n\nmilk. ‘‘(c) EXCEPTIONS.—A covered public building may be excluded from the requirement in subsection (b) at the discretion of the appropriate authority if— ‘‘(1) the public building— \n\nappropriate authority if— ‘‘(1) the public building— ‘‘(A) does not contain a lactation room for employees \n\n‘‘(1) the public building— ‘‘(A) does not contain a lactation room for employees who work in the building; and ‘‘(B) does not have a room that could be repurposed \n\nwho work in the building; and ‘‘(B) does not have a room that could be repurposed as a lactation room or a space that could be made private using portable materials, at a reasonable cost; or \n\n## SECTION 1. SHORT TITLE.\n\n## SEC. 2. LACTATION ROOM IN PUBLIC BUILDINGS.\n\n## ‘‘§ 3318. Lactation room in public buildings" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.7954881260023429, + "doc_id": "df847aacd0d0f6dbe3a22cc14a42a4b246eecab6d69a11c880ccb83d779c950a", + "edit_distance": 0.2926829268292683, + "f1_score": 0.8811188811188811, + "meteor": 0.7889396615278018, + "precision": 0.8235294117647058, + "pred_md": "dkrause on DSKBC28HB2PROD with PUBLAWS\n\nVerDate Sep 11 2014\n\n15:43 Aug 08, 2019\n\nJkt 089139\n\nPO 00028\n\nFrm 00002\n\nFmt 6580\n\nSfmt 6580\n\nE:\\PUBLAW\\PUBL028.116\n\nPUBL028\n\n133 STAT. 1030\n\nPUBLIC LAW 116-28-JULY 5, 2019\n\nWhereas the National Air and Space Museum continues to memorialize the history of American discovery and invention, and seeks to educate and inspire new generations of innovators and explorers to ensure that our future achievements in space are fully empowered by the achievements of the past: Now, therefore, be it\n\nResolved by the Senate and House of Representatives of the United States of America in Congress assembled,\n\nThat Congress(1) requests the Secretary of the Interior to authorize unique and one-time arrangements for the display of NASA and Smithsonian artifacts, digital content, film footage, and associated historic audio and imagery, in and around the vicinity of the National Mall, including projected onto the surface of the Washington Monument for five nights of public display during the period beginning on July 16, 2019 and ending on July 20, 2019; and\n\n(2) respectfully requests that the Clerk of the House of Representatives transmit an enrolled copy of this resolution to the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution and Director of the National Air and Space Museum.\n\nApproved July 5, 2019.\n\nLEGISLATIVE HISTORY-H.J. Res. 60:\n\nCONGRESSIONAL RECORD, Vol. 165 (2019): June 10, considered and passed House. June 18, considered and passed Senate.\n\nÆ\n\nTime period.", + "recall": 0.9473684210526315, + "true_md": "PUBLIC LAW 116–28—JULY 5, 2019 \n\n133 STAT. 1030 \n\nWhereas the National Air and Space Museum continues to memori- alize the history of American discovery and invention, and seeks to educate and inspire new generations of innovators and explorers to ensure that our future achievements in space are fully empowered by the achievements of the past: Now, therefore, be it \n\nResolved by the Senate and House of Representatives of the United States of America in Congress assembled, That Congress— (1) requests the Secretary of the Interior to authorize \n\nTime period. \n\nUnited States of America in Congress assembled, That Congress— (1) requests the Secretary of the Interior to authorize unique and one-time arrangements for the display of NASA and Smithsonian artifacts, digital content, film footage, and associated historic audio and imagery, in and around the vicinity of the National Mall, including projected onto the sur- face of the Washington Monument for five nights of public display during the period beginning on July 16, 2019 and ending on July 20, 2019; and (2) respectfully requests that the Clerk of the House of \n\nending on July 20, 2019; and (2) respectfully requests that the Clerk of the House of Representatives transmit an enrolled copy of this resolution to the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution and Director of the National Air and Space Museum. \n\nApproved July 5, 2019. \n\nLEGISLATIVE HISTORY—H.J. Res. 60: \n\nCONGRESSIONAL RECORD, Vol. 165 (2019): June 10, considered and passed House. June 18, considered and passed Senate. \n\nÆ" + }, + { + "bleu": 0.8203943888889716, + "doc_id": "839ffe7afb9f14a687b2f7824ef18330bbc780ec0e494da9d344fecfdcf4a988", + "edit_distance": 0.1702970297029703, + "f1_score": 0.9098712446351931, + "meteor": 0.927614039525647, + "precision": 0.8688524590163934, + "pred_md": "<unknown>\n\ndkrause on DSKBC28HB2PROD with PUBLAWS\n\nVerDate Sep 11 2014\n\n15:43 Aug 08, 2019\n\nJkt 089139\n\nPO 00028\n\nFrm 00001\n\nFmt 6580\n\nSfmt 6581\n\nE:\\PUBLAW\\PUBL028.116\n\nPUBL028\n\nPUBLIC LAW 116-28-JULY 5, 2019\n\nPublic Law 116-28 116th Congress\n\n## Joint Resolution\n\nRequesting the Secretary of the Interior to authorize unique and one-time arrangements for displays on the National Mall and the Washington Monument during the period beginning on July 16, 2019 and ending on July 20, 2019.\n\nWhereas Congress enacted the Act of August 12, 1946 (60 Stat. 997; ch. 955, 1), to establish a National Air Museum, later known as the Smithsonian's National Air and Space Museum (NASM), to commemorate and memorialize the American story of human flight in the atmosphere and in outer space;\n\nWhereas Congress enacted the Act of July 29, 1958 (commonly known as the National Aeronautics and Space Act) (72 Stat. 426-438; 42 U.S.C. 2451 et seq.), to declare a policy of peaceful space activities designed for the benefit of humankind and to establish the National Aeronautics and Space Administration (NASA);\n\nWhereas in July of 1960, NASA announced the creation of the Apollo Program, the Nation's first orchestrated initiative to ferry humankind out of Earth's orbit and to the Moon;\n\nWhereas on July 20, 1969, the Apollo 11 Mission succeeded in landing the spacecraft Eagle on the surface of the Moon, piloted by two American astronauts, the first humans to ever make landfall on another celestial body;\n\nWhereas on July 20 and 21, 1969, those brave Americans became the first humans to set foot on the surface of the Moon, forever changing Earth's relationship with the heavens;\n\nWhereas this momentous event was watched in wonder by hundreds of millions of people back on Earth, including the hundreds of thousands of NASA civilian and military staff and partners who made the Apollo Program possible;\n\nWhereas the Apollo Program continued through December of 1972 and spurred the greatest development of human scientific and technological understanding of any decade to that point, leading to advances in rocketry, spaceflight, avionics, telecommunications, and computers, on which the American public still relies today;\n\nWhereas the National Air and Space Museum opened on the American Bicentennial in July 1976 as a birthday gift to the country in celebration of the Nation's highest achievements, under the leadership and vision of Museum Director, NASA astronaut, and Apollo 11 Command Module Pilot Michael Collins;\n\nWhereas NASA continues to pursue space exploration on behalf of the American people to increase humankind's understanding of the heavens; and\n\n133 STAT. 1029\n\nJuly 5, 2019\n\n[H.J. Res. 60]", + "recall": 0.954954954954955, + "true_md": "PUBLIC LAW 116–28—JULY 5, 2019 \n\n133 STAT. 1029 \n\n# Public Law 116–28 116th Congress\n\n# Joint Resolution\n\nJuly 5, 2019 \n\n[H.J. Res. 60] \n\n- Requesting the Secretary of the Interior to authorize unique and one-time arrange- ments for displays on the National Mall and the Washington Monument during the period beginning on July 16, 2019 and ending on July 20, 2019. \n\n- Whereas Congress enacted the Act of August 12, 1946 (60 Stat. 997; ch. 955, 1), to establish a National Air Museum, later known as the Smithsonian’s National Air and Space Museum (NASM), to commemorate and memorialize the American story of human flight in the atmosphere and in outer space; \n\n- Whereas Congress enacted the Act of July 29, 1958 (commonly known as the National Aeronautics and Space Act) (72 Stat. 426–438; 42 U.S.C. 2451 et seq.), to declare a policy of peaceful space activities designed for the benefit of humankind and to establish the National Aeronautics and Space Administration (NASA); \n\n- Whereas in July of 1960, NASA announced the creation of the Apollo Program, the Nation’s first orchestrated initiative to ferry humankind out of Earth’s orbit and to the Moon; \n\n- Whereas on July 20, 1969, the Apollo 11 Mission succeeded in landing the spacecraft Eagle on the surface of the Moon, piloted by two American astronauts, the first humans to ever make landfall on another celestial body; \n\n- Whereas on July 20 and 21, 1969, those brave Americans became the first humans to set foot on the surface of the Moon, forever changing Earth’s relationship with the heavens; \n\n- Whereas this momentous event was watched in wonder by hundreds of millions of people back on Earth, including the hundreds of thousands of NASA civilian and military staff and partners who made the Apollo Program possible; \n\n- Whereas the Apollo Program continued through December of 1972 and spurred the greatest development of human scientific and technological understanding of any decade to that point, leading to advances in rocketry, spaceflight, avionics, telecommunications, and computers, on which the American public still relies today; \n\n- Whereas the National Air and Space Museum opened on the Amer- ican Bicentennial in July 1976 as a birthday gift to the country in celebration of the Nation’s highest achievements, under the leadership and vision of Museum Director, NASA astronaut, and Apollo 11 Command Module Pilot Michael Collins; \n\n- Whereas NASA continues to pursue space exploration on behalf of the American people to increase humankind’s understanding of the heavens; and" + } + ], + "f1_score_stats": { + "bins": [ + 0.0, + 0.05, + 0.1, + 0.15000000000000002, + 0.2, + 0.25, + 0.30000000000000004, + 0.35000000000000003, + 0.4, + 0.45, + 0.5, + 0.55, + 0.6000000000000001, + 0.65, + 0.7000000000000001, + 0.75, + 0.8, + 0.8500000000000001, + 0.9, + 0.9500000000000001, + 1.0 + ], + "hist": [ + 18.0, + 19.0, + 18.0, + 17.0, + 23.0, + 13.0, + 10.0, + 20.0, + 20.0, + 24.0, + 33.0, + 38.0, + 39.0, + 58.0, + 55.0, + 105.0, + 210.0, + 404.0, + 1050.0, + 2825.0 + ], + "mean": 0.9095792032129206, + "median": 0.9594594594594595, + "std": 0.15408985511291087, + "total": 4999 + }, + "meteor_stats": { + "bins": [ + 0.0, + 0.05, + 0.1, + 0.15000000000000002, + 0.2, + 0.25, + 0.30000000000000004, + 0.35000000000000003, + 0.4, + 0.45, + 0.5, + 0.55, + 0.6000000000000001, + 0.65, + 0.7000000000000001, + 0.75, + 0.8, + 0.8500000000000001, + 0.9, + 0.9500000000000001, + 1.0 + ], + "hist": [ + 34.0, + 25.0, + 31.0, + 48.0, + 50.0, + 52.0, + 48.0, + 75.0, + 90.0, + 79.0, + 104.0, + 122.0, + 171.0, + 263.0, + 311.0, + 384.0, + 459.0, + 507.0, + 788.0, + 1358.0 + ], + "mean": 0.7958583010927757, + "median": 0.8675523349436393, + "std": 0.21354472585212073, + "total": 4999 + }, + "precision_stats": { + "bins": [ + 0.0, + 0.05, + 0.1, + 0.15000000000000002, + 0.2, + 0.25, + 0.30000000000000004, + 0.35000000000000003, + 0.4, + 0.45, + 0.5, + 0.55, + 0.6000000000000001, + 0.65, + 0.7000000000000001, + 0.75, + 0.8, + 0.8500000000000001, + 0.9, + 0.9500000000000001, + 1.0 + ], + "hist": [ + 29.0, + 26.0, + 29.0, + 9.0, + 21.0, + 14.0, + 23.0, + 14.0, + 17.0, + 10.0, + 33.0, + 22.0, + 22.0, + 35.0, + 34.0, + 64.0, + 100.0, + 249.0, + 789.0, + 3459.0 + ], + "mean": 0.9237839713738605, + "median": 0.9726775956284153, + "std": 0.16149332587991827, + "total": 4999 + }, + "recall_stats": { + "bins": [ + 0.0, + 0.05, + 0.1, + 0.15000000000000002, + 0.2, + 0.25, + 0.30000000000000004, + 0.35000000000000003, + 0.4, + 0.45, + 0.5, + 0.55, + 0.6000000000000001, + 0.65, + 0.7000000000000001, + 0.75, + 0.8, + 0.8500000000000001, + 0.9, + 0.9500000000000001, + 1.0 + ], + "hist": [ + 7.0, + 0.0, + 2.0, + 4.0, + 10.0, + 7.0, + 11.0, + 14.0, + 18.0, + 28.0, + 37.0, + 34.0, + 30.0, + 51.0, + 64.0, + 113.0, + 233.0, + 484.0, + 1041.0, + 2811.0 + ], + "mean": 0.9219399105700586, + "median": 0.960352422907489, + "std": 0.11903688400627939, + "total": 4999 + } +} \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/evaluations/DocLayNetV1/evaluation_DocLayNetV1_markdown_text.txt b/docs/evaluations/DocLayNetV1/evaluation_DocLayNetV1_markdown_text.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..16af5086 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/evaluations/DocLayNetV1/evaluation_DocLayNetV1_markdown_text.txt @@ -0,0 +1,158 @@ +DocLayNetV1 size: 4999 + +DocLayNetV1 markdown_text BLEU: mean=0.71 median=0.84 std=0.30 + +| BLEU | prob [%] | acc [%] | 1-acc [%] | total | +|----------------|------------|-----------|-------------|---------| +| (0.000, 0.050] | 7.76 | 0 | 100 | 388 | +| (0.050, 0.100] | 1.1 | 7.76 | 92.24 | 55 | +| (0.100, 0.150] | 1.3 | 8.86 | 91.14 | 65 | +| (0.150, 0.200] | 1.08 | 10.16 | 89.84 | 54 | +| (0.200, 0.250] | 1.48 | 11.24 | 88.76 | 74 | +| (0.250, 0.300] | 1.4 | 12.72 | 87.28 | 70 | +| (0.300, 0.350] | 1.22 | 14.12 | 85.88 | 61 | +| (0.350, 0.400] | 1.34 | 15.34 | 84.66 | 67 | +| (0.400, 0.450] | 2.04 | 16.68 | 83.32 | 102 | +| (0.450, 0.500] | 2.76 | 18.72 | 81.28 | 138 | +| (0.500, 0.550] | 2.3 | 21.48 | 78.52 | 115 | +| (0.550, 0.600] | 2.56 | 23.78 | 76.22 | 128 | +| (0.600, 0.650] | 3.08 | 26.35 | 73.65 | 154 | +| (0.650, 0.700] | 3.62 | 29.43 | 70.57 | 181 | +| (0.700, 0.750] | 4.8 | 33.05 | 66.95 | 240 | +| (0.750, 0.800] | 6.38 | 37.85 | 62.15 | 319 | +| (0.800, 0.850] | 8.62 | 44.23 | 55.77 | 431 | +| (0.850, 0.900] | 13.36 | 52.85 | 47.15 | 668 | +| (0.900, 0.950] | 17.22 | 66.21 | 33.79 | 861 | +| (0.950, 1.000] | 16.56 | 83.44 | 16.56 | 828 | + + +DocLayNetV1 markdown_text F1: mean=0.91 median=0.96 std=0.15 + +| F1 | prob [%] | acc [%] | 1-acc [%] | total | +|----------------|------------|-----------|-------------|---------| +| (0.000, 0.050] | 0.36 | 0 | 100 | 18 | +| (0.050, 0.100] | 0.38 | 0.36 | 99.64 | 19 | +| (0.100, 0.150] | 0.36 | 0.74 | 99.26 | 18 | +| (0.150, 0.200] | 0.34 | 1.1 | 98.9 | 17 | +| (0.200, 0.250] | 0.46 | 1.44 | 98.56 | 23 | +| (0.250, 0.300] | 0.26 | 1.9 | 98.1 | 13 | +| (0.300, 0.350] | 0.2 | 2.16 | 97.84 | 10 | +| (0.350, 0.400] | 0.4 | 2.36 | 97.64 | 20 | +| (0.400, 0.450] | 0.4 | 2.76 | 97.24 | 20 | +| (0.450, 0.500] | 0.48 | 3.16 | 96.84 | 24 | +| (0.500, 0.550] | 0.66 | 3.64 | 96.36 | 33 | +| (0.550, 0.600] | 0.76 | 4.3 | 95.7 | 38 | +| (0.600, 0.650] | 0.78 | 5.06 | 94.94 | 39 | +| (0.650, 0.700] | 1.16 | 5.84 | 94.16 | 58 | +| (0.700, 0.750] | 1.1 | 7 | 93 | 55 | +| (0.750, 0.800] | 2.1 | 8.1 | 91.9 | 105 | +| (0.800, 0.850] | 4.2 | 10.2 | 89.8 | 210 | +| (0.850, 0.900] | 8.08 | 14.4 | 85.6 | 404 | +| (0.900, 0.950] | 21 | 22.48 | 77.52 | 1050 | +| (0.950, 1.000] | 56.51 | 43.49 | 56.51 | 2825 | + + +DocLayNetV1 markdown_text precision: mean=0.92 median=0.97 std=0.16 + +| precision | prob [%] | acc [%] | 1-acc [%] | total | +|----------------|------------|-----------|-------------|---------| +| (0.000, 0.050] | 0.58 | 0 | 100 | 29 | +| (0.050, 0.100] | 0.52 | 0.58 | 99.42 | 26 | +| (0.100, 0.150] | 0.58 | 1.1 | 98.9 | 29 | +| (0.150, 0.200] | 0.18 | 1.68 | 98.32 | 9 | +| (0.200, 0.250] | 0.42 | 1.86 | 98.14 | 21 | +| (0.250, 0.300] | 0.28 | 2.28 | 97.72 | 14 | +| (0.300, 0.350] | 0.46 | 2.56 | 97.44 | 23 | +| (0.350, 0.400] | 0.28 | 3.02 | 96.98 | 14 | +| (0.400, 0.450] | 0.34 | 3.3 | 96.7 | 17 | +| (0.450, 0.500] | 0.2 | 3.64 | 96.36 | 10 | +| (0.500, 0.550] | 0.66 | 3.84 | 96.16 | 33 | +| (0.550, 0.600] | 0.44 | 4.5 | 95.5 | 22 | +| (0.600, 0.650] | 0.44 | 4.94 | 95.06 | 22 | +| (0.650, 0.700] | 0.7 | 5.38 | 94.62 | 35 | +| (0.700, 0.750] | 0.68 | 6.08 | 93.92 | 34 | +| (0.750, 0.800] | 1.28 | 6.76 | 93.24 | 64 | +| (0.800, 0.850] | 2 | 8.04 | 91.96 | 100 | +| (0.850, 0.900] | 4.98 | 10.04 | 89.96 | 249 | +| (0.900, 0.950] | 15.78 | 15.02 | 84.98 | 789 | +| (0.950, 1.000] | 69.19 | 30.81 | 69.19 | 3459 | + + +DocLayNetV1 markdown_text recall: mean=0.92 median=0.96 std=0.12 + +| recall | prob [%] | acc [%] | 1-acc [%] | total | +|----------------|------------|-----------|-------------|---------| +| (0.000, 0.050] | 0.14 | 0 | 100 | 7 | +| (0.050, 0.100] | 0 | 0.14 | 99.86 | 0 | +| (0.100, 0.150] | 0.04 | 0.14 | 99.86 | 2 | +| (0.150, 0.200] | 0.08 | 0.18 | 99.82 | 4 | +| (0.200, 0.250] | 0.2 | 0.26 | 99.74 | 10 | +| (0.250, 0.300] | 0.14 | 0.46 | 99.54 | 7 | +| (0.300, 0.350] | 0.22 | 0.6 | 99.4 | 11 | +| (0.350, 0.400] | 0.28 | 0.82 | 99.18 | 14 | +| (0.400, 0.450] | 0.36 | 1.1 | 98.9 | 18 | +| (0.450, 0.500] | 0.56 | 1.46 | 98.54 | 28 | +| (0.500, 0.550] | 0.74 | 2.02 | 97.98 | 37 | +| (0.550, 0.600] | 0.68 | 2.76 | 97.24 | 34 | +| (0.600, 0.650] | 0.6 | 3.44 | 96.56 | 30 | +| (0.650, 0.700] | 1.02 | 4.04 | 95.96 | 51 | +| (0.700, 0.750] | 1.28 | 5.06 | 94.94 | 64 | +| (0.750, 0.800] | 2.26 | 6.34 | 93.66 | 113 | +| (0.800, 0.850] | 4.66 | 8.6 | 91.4 | 233 | +| (0.850, 0.900] | 9.68 | 13.26 | 86.74 | 484 | +| (0.900, 0.950] | 20.82 | 22.94 | 77.06 | 1041 | +| (0.950, 1.000] | 56.23 | 43.77 | 56.23 | 2811 | + + +DocLayNetV1 markdown_text edit_distance: mean=0.42 median=0.40 std=0.29 + +| edit_distance | prob [%] | acc [%] | 1-acc [%] | total | +|-----------------|------------|-----------|-------------|---------| +| (0.000, 0.050] | 10.98 | 0 | 100 | 549 | +| (0.050, 0.100] | 7.14 | 10.98 | 89.02 | 357 | +| (0.100, 0.150] | 7 | 18.12 | 81.88 | 350 | +| (0.150, 0.200] | 5.44 | 25.13 | 74.87 | 272 | +| (0.200, 0.250] | 5.08 | 30.57 | 69.43 | 254 | +| (0.250, 0.300] | 4.76 | 35.65 | 64.35 | 238 | +| (0.300, 0.350] | 4.78 | 40.41 | 59.59 | 239 | +| (0.350, 0.400] | 4.28 | 45.19 | 54.81 | 214 | +| (0.400, 0.450] | 5.36 | 49.47 | 50.53 | 268 | +| (0.450, 0.500] | 4.54 | 54.83 | 45.17 | 227 | +| (0.500, 0.550] | 5.16 | 59.37 | 40.63 | 258 | +| (0.550, 0.600] | 4.6 | 64.53 | 35.47 | 230 | +| (0.600, 0.650] | 4.08 | 69.13 | 30.87 | 204 | +| (0.650, 0.700] | 4.4 | 73.21 | 26.79 | 220 | +| (0.700, 0.750] | 4.3 | 77.62 | 22.38 | 215 | +| (0.750, 0.800] | 6.3 | 81.92 | 18.08 | 315 | +| (0.800, 0.850] | 5.1 | 88.22 | 11.78 | 255 | +| (0.850, 0.900] | 3.22 | 93.32 | 6.68 | 161 | +| (0.900, 0.950] | 1.76 | 96.54 | 3.46 | 88 | +| (0.950, 1.000] | 1.7 | 98.3 | 1.7 | 85 | + + +DocLayNetV1 markdown_text meteor: mean=0.80 median=0.87 std=0.21 + +| meteor | prob [%] | acc [%] | 1-acc [%] | total | +|----------------|------------|-----------|-------------|---------| +| (0.000, 0.050] | 0.68 | 0 | 100 | 34 | +| (0.050, 0.100] | 0.5 | 0.68 | 99.32 | 25 | +| (0.100, 0.150] | 0.62 | 1.18 | 98.82 | 31 | +| (0.150, 0.200] | 0.96 | 1.8 | 98.2 | 48 | +| (0.200, 0.250] | 1 | 2.76 | 97.24 | 50 | +| (0.250, 0.300] | 1.04 | 3.76 | 96.24 | 52 | +| (0.300, 0.350] | 0.96 | 4.8 | 95.2 | 48 | +| (0.350, 0.400] | 1.5 | 5.76 | 94.24 | 75 | +| (0.400, 0.450] | 1.8 | 7.26 | 92.74 | 90 | +| (0.450, 0.500] | 1.58 | 9.06 | 90.94 | 79 | +| (0.500, 0.550] | 2.08 | 10.64 | 89.36 | 104 | +| (0.550, 0.600] | 2.44 | 12.72 | 87.28 | 122 | +| (0.600, 0.650] | 3.42 | 15.16 | 84.84 | 171 | +| (0.650, 0.700] | 5.26 | 18.58 | 81.42 | 263 | +| (0.700, 0.750] | 6.22 | 23.84 | 76.16 | 311 | +| (0.750, 0.800] | 7.68 | 30.07 | 69.93 | 384 | +| (0.800, 0.850] | 9.18 | 37.75 | 62.25 | 459 | +| (0.850, 0.900] | 10.14 | 46.93 | 53.07 | 507 | +| (0.900, 0.950] | 15.76 | 57.07 | 42.93 | 788 | +| (0.950, 1.000] | 27.17 | 72.83 | 27.17 | 1358 | + + diff --git a/docs/evaluations/DocLayNetV1/evaluation_DocLayNetV1_markdown_text_BLEU.png b/docs/evaluations/DocLayNetV1/evaluation_DocLayNetV1_markdown_text_BLEU.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000..afa58556fd578cc02de7c05174c39dc9d13e2464 GIT binary patch literal 19710 zcmdtK2UJzrx+c0YXRB01lwbfA6c7<42$&TR$w`umfaIK`rDzF=l0^_ya#nIiML+~W z;wB18&PWad{Y|UtoZI8w@kYOXw@3GTXN)>k;%4o&X88Xv&Gk_F>ZQ#ac5k3iD4WGD zpO>XjR=83qG#%^K;3vG*tzGz+pydT+OF0uAOPd?!+7!tfmZpX#mWFya_gZV4Tj-e> z^Kfz><2-hB?`=yZE~9^ag44uYm&?yw*&J6{Z+cn9fe&?sy zCeOHwvxdvdy2K zc5a_>d>-P-eG&KZdQy1H&r71Q+< zrbgQfZ8yB69uxibkILTnX`JP}C^GO?X^O`67&Ls)z;5RKigBD}tqP-F|r|C@8 z)YOtX>ykA^tC)|OsF=czWE_U`_4 zg?PpM@1yZLpPyMf^;SNQUl=XaREU%J_VwMquk6m!(t^p<%$f1AF=_ngiR*7E z7_6hzrP0FWg7-y5-TnQs&v*^=r-zzWCkY7%sBAxY<;!EyCFKroTqk1v_JfB-L<-(& z?TC7`=VY^ph53Sra*k!}?vutxrKF@35|m|DuH90Ru4!nPux8V)7jNI5wzIQ~HR~+7 zh6hM0uPA?NHQ1nlA>cJ`&3dmQbJ<7DBbU+`%y0H8P9grFmgh|^t@P{fR#*+xiD^1b z`R7>n`;7izS4v7?lZ)!QJu@+J#M68@B075T(aEo0EUJVL(a{B-WiDjtYcDJe;L=Re z4RccDHE2j%Txv*Ejcze1T#QS8&TA0hJdH9MVmIOK=lQTqvc4e06u-? zkW}c=$*C+E27c4im6aze+hfJV#Pn;U9&OvUZ8B{6=Otrf<7WaEQP>1U@${vL)BNo(FV46>eoPe_%?npdyw=|v=AxLY^VvMFC%JH`rmM^s6QM32 zubrx2&;B`xr}W0YW0+f9sUb-{_k?-ZWrY~&Gq~4`YnjH0!!4P;vqin;Le@iMjx1-| zY~t0j%?0fzW4>Yr6VYV#hx+kIbNieJ6j zFi|BMHrnj#>pN8=!6hbpN4JB_V4#M**y6%WU}2%losz>xRa8{$=li3{I+^IL>a}$q zY0ch!;`Wo~bc1Mm9-TgN`+H3CUK+Jz=#>X>j89Jbv9KOII56E}qJ%jPwd{)O zuat;PRj4pF~;YK?Wgo11535Vo(od>n(v^<`XS zX;$k%*-_PuiU#X}I=0TyQ4=P|v3DyTWgE5d9VojJbiBABASA?a#flYIum^_cr$^da zY#kheQ+2C)90a1J!uWhDW`A^Ul#k{v$(tXDzvv@iKY9C3>FxSBg;0^OWNl2(!M%Im zo|>rO5h&P-dgEDGSeV`EC1e;TRI+QLUP+T)tmpH|_Ox`#Fp;*)#|@}S>FL@!I?q&% zvx`@)T^pR1mge|a&y$;uQ|(yyCx0Fkl>8B^;tMA$!x}#N<6?Pvd0hkcol*@+%5To1 zs(k)IRastIRKWhdaOqOKL?9=-YDU7+RI-a+Wr%=Jgs{VO3|7bZ^t7U~^3#B$Dn436 zv$M9s3qz?JHgEQS@Zf=dUCc|p+9_Pv0$p8-3s2r=oPvzwjzyJPwbE@v+ z2oIjay!v%dqNAg++nx^^XK<)y#GHGuWqe{nF6g+nA&+WcOO{!6r@ z-sd*viT&eR6s+0!-w#}jIdgXn83sour}{Tqmxi0u%SWt4muAC5LP93X4u$pkD{07J zcu6_69&YYO1${jj91@a%t*80pw?8E~@HCmN<{sorR8^k~TGb_~3ptIK9a3^KvbWEX zm6hGGW5+Ej)2>~Ib#--7L%VH1ONlNUxvh(76ch2B(VPW-!nbE4+iplZra@rj` zA{<8ZsSS#6ZeAcwNYn9$8`jl$ekdkCy*}8eEyqgGqQ`U1=H0ibHdyn5E=zd@OY?({ z9G#7CwBnTCykhB(4Ae+5ikHy6>N5LnZMtET?ANbf$7g1g(8_ku(rP<6qc!bDxnzk& z1Qfdlo%m8z4rxAudp*$#e|p)qn768kmt|qQ+1_^KYX~2T~2Bc zs!Lstm4VZbVmdnwE;UA)u{FL=p1jD);(spUbj@LAq+U)+I5HxFWvah6`gAAu2|Jcp z>48kPrNMN)+Jk6Pv+h=wLya;oU%q@M;*=Aom>9S3-2K~t3tSRS?9&gyH8xsx1Xw+?638I_AHJ`*uJkKh{t*nt+_taq}?EC z*^5y~K3KI>yE~HAxdlaC|L5!vaz_~E`V1pgOniNV2^M_L zU{bCn%9-TTV`o;b+4KbkYHF@GOf$9Mz$LHSKp6uykshQGdLOu?kI(DZ$N66k;r9+- zu8Wl;pEUUJ=kL3P?bDp+y6L7+@sg_0n`xPtk}|*A55|>Oe)?21(w19~e#}rsx-nWt z10E}Bc790fEZtG%7sVcQM+610<=TuYl2VkUCXg%25aF?`8|pl-Cp_O5j^}!(U{LOX zC+@>qlnv%Hnru)t=`W_!l=o*>Ff45m{_$aZ&P1gUtJv~F`?BFyvEwB%s+q>~?aNEi zXyAR_ftn4PE{l<5k0@8RyDTS;jhQ}T5}tp?JKXr@9MDeXo8Ur~R2|Y<-`!n1k!Gx0 z8B!f97oCRMzIoTN(>`Pi=XPKI^dr}xCgLGhqfu3_0*1%v#!#rk$Qz^hp}h->Gwnx? zAFr8aV&*e^O8W6mj%$r8zUI$-jbF>`DD88?qUTD>uBLb9DD)dPZme}#nqbbyWKv9YmJ$yL~Xvqf!dntJ`+9}J8BrRs09 zAF-94!f0hUyS>@SFD%@~FCY-~t>{6oZIWi8^F^N^ERn?FFqb864GoQwva+(H>N#}{ z1un}=47m#Uj$3*8`JXXD!zE7N+~_<#JUkwHd1a)t9y-)Am2LX%k66vZ0=<@uMD<*j z&XE!0%v^hFk~%Ic>|pIxVAoVEo2-$~P|jWQG~Z!nx0ue?JUc2wr)<%KttWjd3Y->_ znv-8!)94nqbG9)~RSJ#n5N_wR=qICy#MZ|UeXPod?;{1_WMw*Ao6 zv~+NX%FD;UefyT7eiaS2WRJ-%F&!*&fq4xBC5>s$LWw|MBQ!$bh(ecTg;IXYz9)LE zS#R2wi-V1G*r?R}sRq@Os;a6GL90)@d}q!HCUs%W*?6hH2+XbF?4UiOhzrh7_Ge^x zdTy#s(Jp7mbxpO|*xN1KKRj&2WY^`*FpPzn?tM!!S;OfwwsxpmKbwHRrTSSAY9xH}CN~ckc9{dSqm%=UUUFjnrnEXsWi~SlqeJqOpr(NOZ-JjIoRE0kl(O<{} zB+;iPC8D{W1Jp=M$6`?hQL@%m;8e}Hg4QjcZQea(T?=NXAs2nM9`|-DxITL_xy)s0 z?ov=tkbYB2qzGyR!&I6{`&VNdD^$qt!NK58&#PKjH2ChI*LHpT<{d7)aJt9O&+pWu z1L`40*Fb8F3+8$p7g=5M0fu#3+zyI;4n7&kGSydoPDDgRp!qR_0O2h90CIwu^b${c zU#&Ii80ud&B_ZJ`z1HM#W_ujgT%2sAd!m%BZPxw+2Y~3~;u~!Gr$1Lz$U8dbeG1@+ z#~1Y4_w>2atn9*$Sjg5c56H+#t%@PNH`KYbsjzTxj&WgjHbx`g-u=%%r2+qUY~LP^ z;zO?9Oq!s4%-;U*o()-MohPh^lv_N%Orif$zveqwfesjis+nb@otM?uD@X}X`6YfX zF1|n}kHE0%|L%7b$t~P8c*)7@sV@yHzA6*rY(^-2F{5zywLN`>a{Ne*LQ7 zUa)9I^`~}zPMUld=H$K{2@ph<3WL_d++07(*PBJhzAyWRzveHvYu<~#`aEUP0f^0h zt~)T@qW5ZU=L7TjB3=3gVbay=@Gr54oRoechq&a zuq;R%JaOU#b$ZAMBfd}UlU3mLjC=Q1MMg%lv9hvKDTK2bI1A`#YxfiCiZMzIzx0@$ zho^R0%~-cXqd=rdbMNXoM&0G54f8^kA3sVjOb^!sz2ufZ#=_MA1*(ltE+BYA%m<4t z9N=xRKRT?^=DE^wv+w7@t0l3vWC4BZU!Gel{Bx{Gzwz}qUd;uNQFa!V^H@~r2FdEV z(^mEJ%FDXoJ_p1G8sCHi9Y+Bz#2YrHWJqWOYWBZ(+n8Oz$IHvBxqLFYyGnG~&u<}P z{no8i$O!RZI+_y+BN#vxKyPZ#=U{&@nwi%071uSK0M2n;xzMEK8IrrsxMaaInX?fmt39KT#OE(sXX@z3&vQKmzDLqYbGe=9Ifzg z=GyE7W=r}#kbaEXf=<;_U8X9WMD*A0B}cnQ&W?*=acXqlQVu!36*39Ef?dOw`(HA*fk6C(E6u_QmcCSH4bxG^V-kz^hfVDR&xD z3;U^4t=1_OFV8)g9LXKk2e`K`<&BDpVh2pew((6)PHr2L)o3*c!>7Q5Rl-1=OS}W9zTpXV0G9kSClR0k)De*Aq;bxGH7S`t>q8I#E}j3r0eTQElHy z$4TJi>T6eJ$h8Q`7ql9BKSQxnvVD&*fI&g{{sGo7}Fdqb<>X9z*g^^q-GS;9zkrfqJ0HYiEjsz{* zJ#XiZTwW;RaEM}{KA$l}hZJsH%WNpf=adL7>o_8R$1x(kF=YF7|X~$dMz*NUMb3p!!LFJs!*Nwmwc+JCQVCG+H!}*#qu70} z&IHM^?+Mb~V5wt@$>)X0MgSrtr5rHz6F1(kQl;e8RET5Hp#Q{!f8?qJ<^8NoijoPx zNUC{CO3KjHRZS_{9-sW!wCHw@A7EuI9(nv|XxX79!w6mOx#2MR4@E`A&}9>i0sR*7 zPfjgE?S-1O?DDTaFRAN!CKt?$>*?vukC$@|>%5^Rss@eV@ZQXK$ zot>T9KH3e%*1X~?mc&tN5H;^pmG*U9T4Zs4Fxh%^0(xcN17_zh*pnvIneiFP>A;5W zz|2{+Zp)6hG;NL(pM5yL+Vw(9s`?S5lpGo-ANvY5QH=<==B-9r=boi&a4sY?lxHejzWgUy z_HG;LnuTYeDU&I&rkNCP5pw96ubHt&Q3zdr`gu_My17G`@YvgxJ`r0*e@gS{R^|;1 z0xc(cdU_f##hIgFp^iv_C}!)}<~BcV$uv;{mUQpBxJL2ArjE^EjsId3C|VTwQTGQX4Wowm$za#kJM!!AQY^ zu|J#KMO5;dOUzCYxg$9efJ^y0!%cw?`EAFpzg%+TgBI$97ECDR{LE-F;VeJrCWvlB z)Lp1mv1i>j476sa62iHKQLyjj1Ev}Pp%c254D~TG=fDv;$Hsw>0WISVn3UV{>@3=_ zkO}`Jbr9oq``ddrL4YJL`grgOeKgGM5qGsb+cyv*%ojKEw?I$S&Yf1r=C&UFYUIGx z>NL}q(U}A09R;Wa{^ESWzEBZ>dU2)@kl%|@Az4G1?C|AzYT+a(mH}`ZlzgahPOSak zt!jbX6Cp$q_WkMO$1g)osrZe2gQZZ&+pivOKcxTGl_qC6qa_W~&Y_W~e6r0_?v6n_ zgh_PM@E@I}niE@g-CeV}21-qI<#QoIsLd@bYCY+BAQMG^oV85l|8%O25Zm5n*ZZ8n zt8Lr2TT#_*`k_5P6L!czt(!zk63@wUhzDd82zV~sX)|Zh6lkLYjYeVgvJ4cMbmO*b zWJ{rDrGwN$qiP)q@WD^KEq{D){rK^6c2*X4fW|;`dOXoI=rnB4;OXV?w4|-G?c2An z)I5c2rElO28M0_qlY9jt7+{nQZB~?3RHU_OA5fjvR!^}}ILOM%cH)Hm)>C7ysPKnO zOiYHGQZE5q1fsc=crh9{BnAcsV)`RMB?r-mly2RM09<_mw9pTA?M=(`rOwBqJ^hOv z-QAJEFa!7#+E==Kfumi0vZf}C5i04{m^JqO`_E#x%8QG;gSv5uii+lPr)JK0a1{_h zUH192B$i>lx=kA^ikQ`Kvx3yAANODwOoE!Q9XobR>fOA47+2t@VW$A$PAc@iT$L#- zIbtFy!Jp|ymje5`jm<~U*VRI`LZn|PzIFF|e!f@6@EZzgQ zjuyZ;0r4-WuCDG>;<;!cs-u8g zO4{1mN&i)}9O=Bq>U`gQA$F)=Y6JbJWZa;T|xB#Bb8 zE7f_?o-Aad4H)P2ALKFlny2O>m94%;XLjt{K^B$|&^Ur1n>do3w;y+M6TuEz} zzv)T_0BJC=N7d~7{4>*e)cUhF4p1udTn~xA~ zn2gqik5NybqJ=c#Yj@+a6JteNgW;;FQMIpoX4__l-&wi#nX4;B4)wbhRf)mo{PCXe z4*T%b(-xRIJ3xgiAf=B0^~@|Rcy8Rdq0{m9j#6G~N$zNY0obomYg?Nn!1HH-Hw(uM zo%VmKa~*fLnyc~k*mJG4$UdUJ(+~_O3L;lYX=$k+n_Nk&{a|7b%$+hT zPwbSSFJGj|w6H70-6HnR_C0%o!!?~texg5kMyM?(zq}se$=31v=xI)}apxv_2Z7cD z@|njTb)lU$#K?qOVh$N>UYzd#lAyxl=H{k{-dU_J9(zo`?y%Ej^`&|2V)Oj-o82$X zjI?!kb@@eaEIDApzvef$f$ZK;IdFBa&JgKS#M=X6-nJwj`{BcR$nO#mYmSb{ia!Db z)EjDibFXmEWqEl&#U!;@G2er=0 zzpw9had9ziStDSfG;~n+TZTI}ldq0cv$Rapr>!X>myJkiSASj3o}XJ0}-NxNCR0hL37s5<%f>CTH& zO1wtR@;)aVrVWWbo18!W4EtIB)RDDV${)nLHg&*4i%K`34s^V`>l1;_sMlHYhzJEN z{e9Kp?hhZzK$tK}{sFfPkC1LRp(9oU6#(O4veCt-uE5DbKuE{{W^p#>Ne&LlhYufG zZ^f4Li8^0NDHwadQT)mkc^F<@-@m`YsOOJ=IzmR0h3(+Mi$28kn#py z^Xi;*D~ACt>ZGm<2M(@zCLgOjN@n2Mp^On;mdT;J5xRB*+YSjnmUit8~3H*n#} zA3v%SR8k?$B^;SHLxkqT!|l9g-#;9gW`iyQ?jXC07NMioEb%UGS3K=ueo}D$|C3Jo zuYML!12Z}d(~=a*_4n`JH&|7~#KfFs+{(&~^60wf{J*QXS>PYCUPyPn-MpWZ^J*+x z*@nL3YQ{7#-S~_@c^ip0zK;1)a<1$W3TMZf&Yi!pKknG=#-}kK)ak~zQ+(~!6-bBu zZ;Xnu@==yRzz1rhA0r#l1w;?K`8FhujNV7w2p5Hb$&#PK$s&-#S_>;!5&lpBAk)vq zMPAd6(-2t&>=iIr3~{LEMEeIKdIE(HD*hfsYNQZl$@%1eM0b$KY2Gp)8ridxCZSMu z_JeysGGK@O(-3Vl`n5UNCb?i?M2O^UL>DK0u@QcJS7ybPADD5Btk`f9xQp0vpruAe zsKBXjne<>*4>TkOv-B5j6_uBkexjJ5{1V%a4Hhi23=R1HxG2eBaUXDyL{QOw z;BPtXT83Pt5-D3`_v=y$e~wF#>I`C02=Z(NNq!L6I#t+ZvQGxSb_^`53_d_i&(S=Z=JXGFJcIstSD8-)QQZq+%cFKh!#1UDGLOCz^a=r^*pDS> zCZ_kc39Q_;ZQCo5v*vWS2M>sa>$8J_;iwpdkn};IM*{~=etu=5y*r2;IB*W4e>%!M zx{UvmC)XVStMa59aHY52C@qH7uiUmU@L#7|k9C{@aumz4J$o6|8VZ_$g9tabjB19V z%=z>8SlGb!{uZ+ms~~s0fHX(w7q#0SB^&T~1cM`8GCiR0mi| zRHp%i_WW5OP4$D-)|Yb?CP1f+gQ&M#$T|VdG6HV3L=L}JBhlHX8@0$nLK=hj*2mva ztvz^LX(*>-75A^~09E=W6+!54KqXX2yv9pB-FU{< z*Z-$fSuq+Nsh4nI1#>oG1(uuJQVi>2yuaFZZhp>hc9z+3?9SEDQ?am8)Ct>%8e%y=sdp(5 zVCgzrvGuk;vZz>0;nunj;~*KL0%D<8=Rx@DW91GB z2x(TlLPefb{I_WhH`$iAKl@}-35atX_6tdair*+-lx@l7# zWFAKKEx1-Uu5}SPEv#07X877W7#WBANIv;!={Fi^8PX8QDys_&sGO@;t>VvNAmfVZ zK}u~cuVtS!2Ky>J(@zx@b!6-4hT2_(5NK{GfX@YVj-|RD0c@_N^iDsUX$38~h-b?H;2% z4GM}~y>aJl01FrrenkHcT?RB_P~V1Uio`RCAn}Gg?;Sy#kpzewaC^$CNljLMhE-D& zDKQ0`kj#ab24<8ZzbWvJnT?GSTyTbbW&Gf$3uXZ#D-~hJeOjL3ber)*+9J*lU>>*w zRwVQ*4;3#vJG)7E8QWeUhXtRIz|c&>M-`rF?d&VY?(0~#u%(2Ex)l7gmVfR#Ek-mw zl9l@APR=(KVLVy zse`BLR5)tv030@NaFN7Cgh#3YBLA6R$2F#4@r3+iwG1~y5066?ZmI6Z{VIDE=~7Zt zQv5K7;fv@vK93(i4lgGI&wzm^iYsENDT_m0UGP#^9x;oCwiMxS`CW@_XbO=targ9; z$8eDB(E}#?%eZA(w+*x)=F9^BS}O@^*(t=?iIfP`2TK(r{<`ZUu67qMylIRyI zzUk5|Lvy!&jQeCnEEjH%(4jl{J^s^gS~t#`BPdh{>}pZ51=I3ktnD`%=^WdeAEBm# zlVaFqtG<;|kT?po7Tu#|3G%2*ZtBm7#i<0)3+>l;Pmtu`ni7nD)!=HPHd*ZJLA zZAs6W>H6g?qfqxpK2}3z`53Jg*;rbwZ?qm*4>i7=oV2V*tii_;t&M1`$V+E9LtFCV z+)Qyj^*4z<%gD1>@dMy5Ya6B#x#3TUoq^~OQ=3ISkAD*Jfw~lJiOtL+t<|iURAu*~ z{m)=Ju6d2@tNp@o zrd3Y`eGC0NbozRfZ4MKY(G`ybtOn%&Zno*^;KBL`8E#m&P8!lsefXuVAYskE9QcH`9o-X$CGM z*}aocRtYEmZ!EPDFjxw~b)$2Xqbh1o@};3^{LNWPLMHXJ50IZTA- z$#2$dWlF$I#iM~)1M!(Cf#0b+fSk(1#Up6YCk>38_x6|5Ncm@oAmanRU56aV#uR;A zo%N3*sTBaLj|vv2RS~3XO3EkD5F2gcR3#~+n3aC2rpxCaYFDm!qQDSZPi2D1@bu{} z)i8-7&FP7zs_ugz_HY+7!nSYUKB2~ij`ZmLHy+pCs<6!9xpM32Ar;W$ELi4~KZ zL9=pA44}IG(p)d??%nLjs35kcC~QCZ{7Q;5YzE8G{Fz^Ce*OBg+Fi&N#UUZ59-Nt( z2`*$fOm-Z~3h^}%`W%4ttO%HEoIj-~Rs+xCm-m5I*?`C>EkZ%uS|zu!f$p6`A&wI` zL5Yfvj)w+LFsg>*kK+C64G@vL|3a0AF^yOuWMdjtfw>&6v}C~@2@GgT_1l3_EsQdg`89o6SN(Bq0S5;<&r-ES}I#M zx{`JRKnM#=P>jxGaT*J(Cu&Xugz{v6XT=Gfd!@I&8NHt@*Mm9C)u~B*h!u^iY`N@lutyUwYBg(kjGs z(iGo;o^aUzRd~2U?$s;^!XCLhI_{GrVt(RS3*wSuil+m=nQvUjk!B|6WhnRl{slKa zCTRxTuB+_lzx3e^MtKmAHyRy%k!89KO4| z`2F25B?6Ahpc=D^!2ni*fJu_#ZSbD{X_!dmXrR_3%jHcPCK7ELIGFY%H`l=|0Xyfk z_YrR%*FcHOm!Gisb7^Y$q&Y2EBcejOWQGXZhYZXQ(ieXz)d*6r#96wgc_f6{Asj$) z|7<0Ic7{%w=71gNcY;-fz&}F&6+Cuw$QL?0iOK$let7cm;mgpcGeiRK7Y_BNhLwN* zcUQZ=bG#YX*pa`DnX(qm8udvXWSwJN8)@=?%h8TO_>f!Td8U<5jXplvcP-mI61k>B zq$M{nA=C|E2a))z@y=rqqu;%Immz|*diox&g`?kwL;@$q#-2QQaA{vMDHK}%AL&nP zc@mYEmeQ-pIv^Sz?H}t|{BpEX(SA$P! z(T)$VVKrZ4iZy_s&_j~)nwy<%^lF-zm>|vwLX;;UwgFLHfhZq{UnCKHT(u8zdw-TT zWDep~Gn1H{XK&yDk~#)yH;;}dKug6@=6}RzA)6$YSon0-!(_G*=w}s!gX;IUpbUBh zHEsZYVaAk|nOQX?JEB?x7UPJDFXtqh6TT&lyQ#8Qg*DszV3Ji zq1Er1Pr@%_N!pg~os>X|JwB z_yr1!{l{+VD*J$Z_K16VDCM-?ManAIo6@xs6DyVgj`>6b7$PjjZ! z_^@cXckQnYNuYU=^*e>8gWdi6-+waut4ADLx$f=0tclf>R(_1AJA+LD#O{r_eecdn zI=Hboxoo;?#F2(_a?SsQa$V&1;)dM?v&YxO;t-mE`61iaxq@Pvzs~h_+N-=viP1{* zjE&3})~%wnn*RD(&LtxV<$|f>Rz?Vs;w%6}bv_+B8VdC;WnIkJs7!FsuoFm!M z{4|g~uBrG{Gb0naXrI;!$_6jWpJ$7ISkh@nvWk`Ln6G#>>5}R}z*LT;ySWWNEaJ12 z^Dn>I=7el;(D@y7<>+9B6Tv}JB!P~=L=;9kl#c^L*j&APSofghfE$lh3Mq|;A%E4a>er(9j`R*$n{ z3G^6LdYUgc-N%ROUNyTZZ!=g!>9}~2k{07*`@-d~zxTHIWk66$u`+&VEc1yZg6 z;+-eiT2wkZ8~Wn+DLk&LxpC|hMHT@OSc#Q5bm;0z0Y|1CNP!*?DiQ}~RZgX5N|%-_ z-w+a7)6&GC~Yh}qUP}-|#dF*v&65GnxyoF5o5sCjdZ{AoBift@6520O=`u1P z{DBKK7ze^sJgukIM1NXrH_kMHoJHe--8xlmF=Gj?Y!(-#Ca zNidK&8lb_%mxfdAo_hkM@iq>j30Mn+o4$F@cz1Ycm!WRyb@F`Kw^gQ(UdKh^Q-*$7 zhl>B{>kX8z;KWNf+TSO%1O$Yrko1$AUBLO{aDJaGFf@NikDt!?2RP0(HGq1BLSK!= ziIZ3a{mH2TUYCh0>b-=c{wo2&qyK&%#m{H%py@bU2W6pam zehy7d7K73ahYCp#h=ms7k{qoLBLRHGK+3TmjuZE1hr%UBLasdq&Od)#B77Dz0DJlV z&ZElGT~-0t)@;eN?3X1083s;P`yPsJRXY{mKkmv#QCl=ASratph=GOH$sgvQcXdL?p?%C=WU= zK7>bk+npB@VXt!&7v=5|E)@_xZBWb$6M#)Pg$zxhP=6Um1fL$){`B-l(fuHD(@m+m zd!UM?!s;m9q4w!FipLp@UInrSMxwenr;LFLB1iq33!xE30jgRXVH!^&k$2v^L1i}{ zQj_z*fg)sVo?AW%d~Kl~G?*@l$oCh((-+6&q;f@eQ^AHW*(ha%qf z(t(% zG^b-FJK+|P(?2?5F8&A;*-u0Y5@1C&+F>IQc@32f9E2EdaR}SkcidS!`Q3v{9|!)5 z)vv{lLrow)BM~QlsZyy`BDGMa5`X2n^xo2Puk5>yT+GVFcVzwu6@?i>+)gZKSe-I#&Y2cK>;$;u7*_3c7J`oTQIdPenJk=6_BvYl z;qb?WY)FeFLuW{%>a&IERLqknzrAm#-Em6@Vn^>fyQY^dyW}j3uWf2~b4$poI{W4o zMEu=<9sgXBig%+-V9W0z6=(Z)ob&6!l<|?MOyV+_g&~eAf5!QJoma13k+&3NZ@R+N zZKEpnT(CYXH#Zo3AQ(%znF$r+NRq9DatqJuB*NdmL2#Ig201xGJa0Gy@;8>yti`L51GS}Dqb~<(&GjlS)$!&O0kB!`BOpojmG;-fMoJ%FrCSF<-$YRu*B?E-y2eNtg z+&SV&J{NWQYIbBR#qK<1m2{jRhpHmf;(B;C@Xi7{=Kw^ka6(^n`DZFp!4YUOdH{#! zW@g?jsH5ue^;_KmogqU36=e!H zV*mwX_wieQ9#Gsv881c}&^;G|*p)En`B(xr@!|mD)Zj>fKNd|Sv900m6HyJ0znT{1BeM>L#!ryk8SJe|Xftt8bmwu0^;u?GL~0ST8Igx}Yq8nI2k%>mB!|k= z({ERwCH@^+OJX8U4O-(}Ce4v>SsQisB8nD|b)XH618EDlLLZ7LBiQBX*e0AT!x$E7oIT{7IOsEmrR#g5Fl^14CSlNXWct!qp1z?)cg$6`8^W|c zdNY~Dwp^P*+!>%*5Xnmdr^I5h5XqL=BuL{DS_*svc6dfbii7z*rP@F~kM&qKa2Ivf@(TjbjSZ zA=OqdnTbl5V71M08O*0Z37N(tZHOFSG z?Zz61oZhRu^PIzNymen`CyKu*-CQeoQYfyUext0QP!2z!{6e8zxAex-~&FS2)S-y6T&YzVaTdq7(MpgbYi)_HwAde=8Fr?Avhq z9skO!V*F0?R+;bL>&)7Zq%{mrzu;7h)XcSyF|3cZu(p<-DL%$`?%9r*w{MS#PL%AC zX}Po5wKz99SR3WBNTVr5%k2^{ZMmGkyyOtsusqx4p%f#(x6xRT*2T8`<>kq{KK}mx ziEScdIj@V^T-0yhzI`u3J>95*OTes6{r>u`%FlP7txGd%kXpW$b?e8gH5<0Q{Ql`l znO;ha{F{q`yt<#Ihq$%!)IG%JqaB@`dPYVPgslf}R0a!GHu+fTRfQ(tHwTKFs!Ft6 zXm6+^&1F?pvSMOlhP9DT=~<8a$5`_@lnXn~j!S#o)^eIwN-uI+oW1#U8_y}V4AY9Q z^Ioa9etgd!Y#)tRP3ivr{nf|&>-FCsPbrR~EzHDeWZPto2jn|VJavf~DIyAz7#N@U-Pbw}ismt0(y!sK$M!C&X@!Gzmq_dVzQJ;ay3DJH5n z-g0mV%5|7&v!Q*syOvoZ5_h8a+2>&I{jHiuOifKARa5i^1~2lSJb7~8?%f|R@D{o; zRNdzMtkIfnD?1aC?Kqb#At6y3v_iL|zxs9L<#*R3jT@8oKHmGaH^jD$XQtIQEauYd z2ND-AX7yyLBxwpTh%dgqX={6Q)mnOf@BOlZCQYe4Ugg*{@5H6PFc(vGb#d>Cz;$fX)i#%9T5!{GMkc0!H!d@A$_cz)<*`a}$@T5n)^gfRyV=T>E6e?Pw999I zbV=X15q(fI=e>~A{FF&U)iBS{m+;f)yav9#)6UZF=qz+g5ujoR>o4%uMoO1`oiEzP zxOubg=u{O6SLvD2*0Jb~+KDb(cJ0~~DHnc<{26$mPo3Sw$f*5z^C7*Jt5#LucD2Rk z`}ZikKDV)}w^#3LysCGC;8PyGiSE*(va&LEcJ`JZ>AM|%ah;R9LRp+{&@xjUOUhs3 zEiElA@{eEMb)?AuM^`bktgNhM=g0fQ^a5HzeEQFx>-1KJ7;%f(O+@^doaAE>vB~Ml zD)wMIN;bl%A(6g^alZ_|SNTl4%b1*V|Ce3b?mSU4Az4wYI$C?@`ofNehKBZ*Jl{i2 z?(e^`r_^zxbbp5W%urIkpjWwmm{YG@Te^uFiIwl)zYpuW(X;T9H+p1V#<-Cws^s;@GnmaZUv zN7(%IkbX-`OZjMP_K5DIN00XL^ViiSYKW+rY}b}jR}a2Pj`rBvOgDvsnYW&vzimEz z`AG8+_vN=Iu3ft}Aj8IQSa(4wPPsnaq`B_xwbOQXb}{Oi7W2J9X6zD1U*j)bzU+To zR8%Sa6dk8l-f@j)7uvL6s9i4;-I_I@ae6QMa?CGIRP(wfamzY*@L*G}LxxQ7v75~!%edyI zZQG)wLhV0m_KuAu;g}C)kL4-I%hyOZw7$RjI#Dw>mYzlUm`_yh@`6F^aByh8FY`=k zgoL+Zq!bgmbsQLB`>AMmp6vpLK99F@b77Oy3~JBmSA|M9RN~l0W4+=KRTEUIvW`xK z&G5J9iEVf2)+?qND%st-6^&#VDDL9?plg0%U}VqvXVF^u&aragcgPx~-nc}Y3|p>4 z7_)qp%pSf*o1fm!f5VgJv*;}=7BFgM;^>%TGuDwB@Qr$%f^P_~*^_GK-EEtg`R8y>?i4^C4wL?|ssy+2U`8SyKLB zWb_RV4t`_3WI8=qPvw~zZmiAAkCY8FP2#g1Rj-dxIFDH6P>%P{vKn}mzcgQ#mxJmQ z$Zz1qE)?t~Gx=dHTYsk;n{xH5vpoX?F-YCtJOVN-I|^2?95dfp+ni$7F6K1b>9$?m zIS0X7!&&wDhrviw8uG{s4#nuJ+>;X%HC-O!iR~`S8Vl5sGK(OuO~3v2ajYvu3~LQnwYr6ZAXKzq#3?J*?P(%Lc)th*y>BLkY!!? z>9uLbjq+o;Gog6EdYlQ3_vRn+kmQ0{?fZ8joYj&28}9weh*T_u2QTZie{=8NYT8Wx zveN5wPxj%$Wxb1LdKjYGe7!d7%!YLb)_*GYZbzQ2W7yZz3YT4Ut3> zs~F?;fS$#^+3Brr*%n+}nDAmZY0H^Q zr->AzF7ew<=;V%nTyH9pl*$YmE=5&)D6uRoy=Z7Bc50$G56`gK2 z%Wt)D#P-Dr8h?9|C@E(*jx0h$ z(rapdC@D^_B9O$LUS)6$s&3P=lSZDSs&pWKbe`g|9c+@<-UE7>*)YZzFA6T@)I z2%eY+JTVgrt*cWsX-*%BT$n7ly^6kgh5oIfgbc;^=GSo0`){vh{gSL(mRv7`<2Brw zgVm+d>R+B*CDE|FHo|Fv3QSaws#>3IYgQ3-R2C~+J2%<4SE5RECYYQ-M9j@qk@=?~flU zj*5tgu$tzL4GPiL3=y_Yy;k_3+3YuqbDFXzcMsLbtk9pz3WyI~*Oc#)|6FIEOt8PH zYT<*8Pubm!R@siVnXm_}q+917=CahNnP)XnV-=+Y?4o<;?%i4qMiTm6LqkSf8d*B- zna)q^+mi}~aZY~Suz|no_@sO8;Sno2Y(zz4ivCDXyVFd_a~NQVj`Xw$ z)zll$pX(s@ENZQfnzb3T2OvO%e7IGU|GdD9%3o=I(avEGmHsI^ zDavj}KZI?DZ?v?wRv^K-^E4!}O`xIz=-AviDk%7Mc79&iry*XocJl?;;23;iZAu+mdhH@sT`l zgZ5THzeqJfgBtcdrJelWM_LB`t&xFi<5l_i5WOB|Zl(ecW_FuHdlx`y;hZ zE&X~?uHN3>(n#MiSJGlL0ormMfjiE5F$o&`=MF1Jxh^kh$jZnFq6`ZV0DRi+T$HQi zi^Bl}T{8fxPlJMj8sBNV@$}BW+2$fn7wp@mF!VLyX;_$6meKUb!osKQBmwJWR`3JG zCO+>r&s=T6z~?&m4TW(N3(Ls3#S1?D$_rkjD5e|ywsNU|yB3>|Qh`lTK=5zcvPF+u zc3~_voAQ)rp4x0ypJi>tq`gCrd(ZCOo7mXQ#P3^o4PP`gjI9h6jf+!BiZyM`VrqM| zFjXrn;-2A5o2Pe@Y>-XcuDwHMq@}#4%uhF^vBuZo)~#=T?NT_(o40I<1h~1;lxjdS zrt{*D^P)2?mK>Mgc5pUWN4hLchD}UQr{&8o97hKFZfgsA?m!%wp zQ~x+qW>yx*;lt(5+n4@)#MqQ&9hYT0Hu|MX+e0++v+tpH8^@!STX3lQ%LDibbYEOt zTFZzmkBv%(58?e6~aAI`>fZYd3eE3@4v+P5Pd#Rqqv|WN`g@zN+J|0o_={ z9507C&&TYO4GlJJeX^B%uqD&d9+`t2aFVA0kmVawNbW*&QZr~rEKO)K6; zLlBjHc=sNx*7jrOFOka~%3NGjg~UXc7bnTeg*wk0m^3Dzb(k5gcU`e+m~YX*I>oYF zQbbc^a(FYZ2gTn*bhhKJVN+^MVOe9jbfN+W;Cmt4bqOqq(v2H8vUmsPSIByyjeIlN zS2a{CEAE@0pI;aUMCBEMyKHI*zQ~~uMG2F_rSZ&; z&s>TO!nAC}yI#KB>9kCnxp?uSJT^@+%gP{kelRZZ*v(h$LXJfSBUZ!Ts>7c?V-Xpg z=qbw(Z4G|@PP^C;_+#D1jrDgK#G=uw>CE3ebpF|nOPLluH8keRa(x><+br=hMbgiv z=*x~Yrkn@*vb>UQ(Eh`nD*fs4W|pPCF6Av;>d|hj_7_-LSvlk*9-@Orne&m-hznF@ zbDj;C2@^}mXtN(mN8jpbSpDig5_~kGP6EhK8TdZ+M)mI8$x0Eg9r=B#qP=fuPIC)0 zzh&;B)rY%A0Qz0bnqyN|QE52r8$~-Uo81;8>BlwLmh14q8t0QsVt%5GyB>Uj=#M`c z?U5rl|MuI}{5AVuuYYCMV5>~GcCG%clnYl>FI*_$Y*;Q9UkbM#`f7ku{P^k9dZe)= zEZqHj_o5x=CK|UZD7Oyu@uSkw(b2t$^Q*q!)A-}#dTw%>x1*#X|MUzE9Rdkqjh?8` zs4IAmY3l+dC*}+Iw~&$Kd-kcEJ?TQ#Q^T60lg)^S=;e6tV!8OYfLK5djGQCsAALd zw_s5RWnhb{>b&IZNHq3~KZ;2SmkvFy`r*R|B$$_|ACahXB5yoqXKxYAHrS99_QxN8 z_;`Bm99T9zMiLSZ>Tr7|>7{1Il0rot41t}1U{ops1*RMI!z3&gL-nWq{iwOzKq3m% z70C}M4>$N8xO57jSlFuHQ=xf!X2vfgBO?)gTQgG`s?0fTc6E;3!F73AzK`ZFJ1=Z#tPByc{{H8q>?Mh1Jh!iv=*yNtOAgiK zh=}DNo}6mjmT7a<(RRnzX!ML)-ruAqA5uyD#vNZJu{>KW-aR%J)>*+3BxoX!yXLEZ zMoMLCYId7hi<$LcU3H$*!W8OSj8p(Gbt3g`KVJTn^F8bJh3TOvq{e~nQtw!e?DRIf zJ{AW`PGk8+wBu<`3pOYNgF3x@*#vAv17{ynft|MMlS^Fx2MQmlZa%~`knw$vCSNc7dksTsWWAM+*XhcVp(R-MdeLV6q2^!ZP|w#+xdH zV?*F*Aktl7Ogt(D0QY1%?R{2OWKeDpk_xu}#mGDT9-bqBo%N{P)>HkL92&t}q}q;Y zlGZWRPnYUoIaqh_DHGqh`ZyKaUtDFyX{qdu`qB|Y?QRCOkuevZ??w+T6PY3FMLy4T z0qn}AKmPb`zAhcWjA_&j_;CupE4hP0g4ib)uk+o zO{ZrTD0U4&%enT`7VoJ?<4jE3avFCj?zZJwb&CPVDku;9p+tkr=lvs_ZnM`%Upk$j zmXX&p4EnOnoFJQJ~ChDYXL-$PDy6MqYHQ>mvIL6ZpWBEpCqp5w>X@>O|QH5*K zdB>naqUpPUWm5uXv;Oh@lks#2b(=qqN;~zOCs~c3#{$V1 z0(R1;6k)M1q50>xpSlqu=5$5CuOkW|xFVJDDQ^vir`8W}45c}|0*${Lv5#jXCH zkhO#-jRl>!ZYx(jK;94uHh*d9g_z8fch?M{pOVAJ6YNMfjLl{79qA1b42O;#yA1r9 zDxTbR4hib>lx-rA&3u*1(rav7?!@OqBvBW6uq71~6j&YASBzDZ*vKqsHQU-*&YFV8 zE*^YFw1oG*b-(^v4en*Sbbr_Z9-d3+yUhFb=cfh&=EZ!#EIB(n2MSxq=H%uQ_UZop z`!VQ?NONpY9gYD|h}ABB_V~$@TGH^xDjwXpj24&JuZ3V!v!?9if*%5Rg{##e(AJ+1UwOO-)Vv?~nG^_!1rs&vY^4Ft}tw7omKS zDztgirU)>IVQM=`0?Yc5$Ybd?hhfw?@tHN_Ij#`a_!^u zIQi(w6F#twdI&fA9xMUB5|%mkDUOkhy(7A>+!Ml2>=)A=ui0pG- z0pNHzi=9%Oyr>sEm|a@gP2!oHqHtn$ckkZqo|KgIV|@Gw3YmbY{nU|s8a3#2E>iSY zEPN@NF@;PET|Tq6oDD9&c8`S>XIl12;c!a7yZ%WEF(iHF%)Les>sjZowHP|Ow4V=f z+8`A;(wq^5^vlG}&E3`4r;mQt_`0?>%V5i}1D|=v2?a2K+9{3h0H*_WG2TM>(F2+~ z2%ns(8p(YJ4wSsl&JMx}3*gRQcCqW7Zpr>IzdNjkTJzU7L*Pj&MpbEXmn+{$lj}Fk<`*sN>q+&gH&Q-w6r%#?d zDco~SY+;zs5}216uLW^(gNPO+KaIZQv7O)MpI_F`bEHUTY1WE5tO}}`d0{3Ur$n#B za~IRnJvHTLc38*GsE!H$Cp@;Z$Lw2b5hicYxi`5?Q|ydTBIm&w5!Ixfx`wV>7CO)1 z*MuOV5#+Fb77a)E6GVm7>CFMA6dw zOYh5e{m*5;TN}z*E=Wt)qd|kLlNlx{ndm4?}otW>PjK~QB#V($LSD6 zY3Zj=pE^lf?k3E`!-GQLfMqiQ3Ui0ge{6^U9(a}*- zB`*SX-|Q-q@B;LRK=((Es3KVIN|T*CeT#5GRP||P3{jLekpp&Y-y-~qcFP8wsk|t zQ+WjifvW`+A}^Cq%FO{{BQ4G;^noVLf*YB5&p1$rN#DdS@$TI_`c7Fdnv=2dFy|07 zy?$V!iK!{6qoENI?0fg_ZEWAq&VEe)G)})owFV32^{ZE@=vc6BmEk|x+~q{&gg_9Y z^$`+`kReW>8dbde;m#_0#VmJP`B@qRh2qIP+N4lGQ~;oLAWDwS+?tCotP4MWWS3Z& z8S`UD&wG%It1?`sX(4rJjhS+Baq<4bMsbPl!dB7WyShe_UZ3~Sb1K9mPJGkY3jS=c zJwKoHt^lmD*tQG}eUKYo5gi>@CFF12dcU+dDI0R!u10geu<#Y+j9B%|(;FF!n;P}i61|1-ok@*AGOt>xIcbe1BNLE__wUNSq%$AARTshuf$sV9bd4w zBnAj=1@$DCfG+gg(a76g5vZ3j7CoN{TqTS?r$&|{Q50UidZm-n$S#3wT@T?|;MVw6 zA`}r&3{aPFd)3>;HKx|0?PS>H+ zibq8qbYpXVo6$Kq7z@<#xxQWrecWKpn(lMA<<(eY8TP=`j`z0&IywLhGCAB>|j?2uf5>NIWbgjWLK$c@kQhG?kG2Rgluy4S?OZ^XfbV^SKvt z7D-MB-5Q9}BTk^YPWDxWHF)inX`}55}8=hN7vnV&*FD)<81VG~^sAtN99k#iw870F4+k)I7<@mRLgm6W9UdO=T z$Bqtn2nuCgsrUX7>sPN|lMWo=*F4nn?c9}+R6*YBDUID-U0vgFft8qzW*Lzp!4Fdo z+A&**k?C3~ec&$92Vnm|VQUgKpX>x18yit#agm1845I83hF{|YASuLy6)_zC_A~!7 zo8^Q@M;`$5EI}xv=^w>x1RmS>2I!|+^jvhJO*ar4Jk&%4_0;q|>S>fzz$=iDXtytb zoTN5DqaL;vTO2=4q7LUv32nh9^o?*HHTq>|Wszf0ZG_09p*8>eQjm1~>BKH^G0# ztQZFgqJm6>)4mgxdmytf6j&rExRDMo81+(v5h}J&%Fj=~t+1-Y=b*w=IbT&YOc(3u=_}vLKujc^p1#d` zB)r4shLn~Jvv!jq^tf?QdMbyv;99C3bw-pZ@ZU(Tk%z)WY!iVsJIfQv^GVBWbOm%# zM#o*_yLR>Jel(ocdMe}&_eHHKKr7+Pr6H_ghn8zIBV*UUy$Lk}bgNp{g!t0z>9bF^ z{L7n&j)F(2gQ>#`hBvT9(qJL$B)M}Vh-oL~5I$YUTVZS^E4(@MY+~^U%#w-``&uL| zG?B~=#H`t}7aQE#+A5%5xdS$ri!O^l+=%xk;fjFoVbz*|R(wbY{V@SbvT zVT{s1DjoDf0u)VL5$#L^GN%`-dHj0z{P{zB_nsAXpemxLA?aB{{?w^E=%*racnwiSiEuQH_%DI!6UM^QsmoZx z31;jCtO1BKPK`MTcj)Ot25gXY!?$o=X-R$t%aoj)+=DXEzi*KJ`T=c~uuXd<;Nw#y z=MJLz0W1O0b1f{A2``?B^8-g4(Ux(FWhtnFGyGAZD@~FAiREy?0XmmP&aF!zF>L3n z3gNrGf)hauVxcZeb|FHRMR~@k)lk+`+{7h_s=98|ftQd>K50gQC8baC{r&gfNyiDf z$M0Ggsks*}nEwU!5fON6EevW(pvN>aEzZIgk{q_g0t&Nso-AD6?DzEvm*1Tt*$B&1 z_v-BWg<);fbfBCaUqL4+K$S$vH%emMwyj@o|A^C-kbGuP&T!<7B!RGqGGQdu=;q+T z4%C7n_~E{gs7LV`z`xPs`hi;-HdiPK8T=A{mzE!=6c>q~#=%v3CD%R;)#Q7s^O7kl z_fOxO)2UM{cL9iZi{RdCrUTMpI60QxsK%iX>5fQ?B<5Pe+pb$zgA&a$sGe)Dgvd(M zI=T&Y4u{W8*kH`e#w5H#PtrC8XySx(R~=;*Nu`-uhy}Yh3SA2&w0|xjcYP{AncRX;1X$L;FMv_}7 zM^-|j8uhb#bd-ymJ4tG70b#{~H>fjcy=!nLl+f;OJ}7?%E#eEJD?te*z2n`r49ZY| zH~s$mE(v1t3Os6-2)We=!AUxOd_p}uH_%Kkc!3y=fV3+K38V&YP12J}`yV+;R9|l@ zfoiR#F-LDh2CM9ZQgN2x8Jw@$<)xW?sf&`7%T>z^JQ!fSLT-8cpnZ2&rb8utub4e&U@MY@Z4_`rM;!MteC zRosPW)j$JfsgYD<3#3HKY@ydxi&#s*Lyd;&h}Sa4$vNlkV9h*xz!4GOnnrb$nC9--=u_$3O%ig9>e z$o7-iAOax_GF}k~k{`c-&2-Jahw=skl@f$g@P{R!t~Hn7-Z4UXuN)>LBaPj_3Vs*} zz^=!_sYl-fD3uSl%=f=bf5-|cDJd)eIY~<}$3VURwi5AJQ<9l}CPx%qf{=+U_V?CK zZyJZ#OIR4l?`EVgfEOSQ{Ywbc`=N#;+rM!~B?XbMgdJ7F*{K6Ly?5U}EM;g7o=7p> zSoQBqHf^|i@#1501hFfFuwB|Jr{Eb-oGU0>&?i7*u~hz9S9i&X(zU#i-0B1tt>faSqu}>n)qUSOEJVB#e9q0&zUX#M! zvLb4A0gkCi&KPJFzCZ-y33~I3lwd)VK)yiS+6k_b=Rqg%O7ofB6kO%MWA>#8ohGhe zp(!Qh4j;?Nl#T63Q_qy(^GVV|v~*p+eqAyA`d*Dp$Ad|3cd}Q5T6T440VQDFGqHEG z$#n9%EgP*3oBbG;B4^XIgwv$EbFwG47ZCRg&aCo<3lA}dkb3pQO1GY(ZBW6a&@F-Z zQv_UsC06V|04I_#6j(*4fI@`lTnlXv@$Vq!EbVKNHu&hCJot%B_lCT zcK?7Vpa2Yk$jE6Hxc=uaPV)m%LU~SDAG?9X<8&=3(Zsh>s9Utn3GN8{uBS&yWJ}a+ z)p86kC^*3h0g)J%(OIVIl>R}3=QUO>Baz(zUJ%2^5|LdPFVDo!zAU?@bI|k>d*i^Pr%hGMbAtKSD{sM+X(zhn;X7kVmQG`z7!@rQ0j% zrqDcn8{!8o0z#N7{4c0PQVqfAxiI>fsX*<~)2F`dbZdk)Eq~j#?S|GCX687s=59R@ zDT%A;bO^j1QAT@A8qrYuC64_IG27Dl6>HF)=Xi9LzaNHZI3a2;9OAFbw3SDgc0X|3 zO1XRI4!gw7n>Xou@E@u!I0IqKUKCEi!88bxhTfXju&YSyC))TYPteBDs9dSCd5!i@F+2$U}O4G)I8aVPK!dI zGS-%hX@h+UTKSs5J}STzux{*@07~!%V~QHeJ@W0{Y0KX7YKYKS{Fld@43RBbZmP7c zo*<Khhc-n1Uv5NczwGz#Z-7tOE@aUyJ+ujs zCq=(1PgndOg+4`825(sGM+|Sk{{;V^GB$_c`rmN`u)B&ZM*)<42F4lW7N4xNAsXlxqs< zTj|xAUrBEAO1;^24)$kh=*d5m5xSx;;1eutPm>2%%?nQ{i989x=dki6 z!4+@_84pPeJ(uO>{Sdq$ka$IW`*zuF+%NsONn-`XB3!d{No?1y4-#r5e>hC&QjB4` zM1!M}ln9Fvs0De9rKN#su#9gfGZS!Uett(qG+CU^6Qy$`U9c~=mL^0Y6*)OiFK=(s zh`0%p%w@C&nXIODb1+rx_0YQ74J^Wnpqi--_?VFFUAX_uj?iCRiRTT%$|ksj0R*G3 zezoyUXGJ ziPD7bLl7$b*@@77dg}@0(H-c>M9GKCLXB$%u0XhIU@nOW`g#xo;1+Jp;o)$+sAYQe z(a#3J({A+%EZu)J!RyUEwsH-nLz9popnF8pDnJ1UrHOXCkhhHf0d_c6?wwbndLHp0 zh(3cxRG{%4v6E#n=k++IJAwBD{!+jDQmOKlJFKs$ zy+3OHzgPpmSvG_<@ofL|Z_VEpM_R^=vE&zmsSZDU^yt$4$G%oQ6K`@@*Lj+d$4~C~ zcMqC2^7n%_?eqMdJZPib+Z)lwCwqdM^gai?mN8*?&t$q1*ZD6EMLYkxnqpps!(9!4 z7t+)V924Bc>bVtA(A7a62$4fEKH`ucch9t(Yc@S@+gw%{Q(V}bh*t@k${${Z%NWf} zd}!a4PnC>HTiZ>CJM0Km{>L4D)g*Ulw7%p}%W9z6zsI^eHyxquRIvE|>!#m2r_NHpk$f^D5}b}Mu98qd(4RUHV?DRi_XzYvccda7v*I`vM!^?YJ6 z=-~+NR1x_rDr5cmIo=4GOL^pql0z@(T}gSzKs3Mgpdw6Y0~jhHnhkZh@wKa~YYwYs zp2%4rZ<9X7Y@xaHZH2Xx4mM+-RdyYT%CnTObbK(!6Cts@HPT;tm8Z&K777~dBoGaM z+3nHpz$<>13|vk(871`$e47}dYY?ipp%43NL1mls;X7}w*Lf^KBU>4h;ui3vPw4u8 z{!n#9{67DqBXm2*R0S#fFsBK;N(AiOcmf=div>+v{5ysJ7JxiFJp9=ALR)uobYo!q z>Raa5Jz1b&F+FX2CA+kEhT~=*M^r`-o}kEILBY!>(D9SOh-R+2)0PC-0%VM8pFd&u z-ox2fJoX?(TwH=z#e1)W#Jh!%HX97F+B6H*o64kD_*+JeI12Tq6thbZ>^|S#m`Zgo z4d}Yz+;RPI)-)kL#g~3Cn0$MCl6Zk9pi&!wyPxmz)2d0}LnY0f{;HNKB!$y)`d_R% z_jL6sDcb*}r~War0kiJ=Jpb>R*4Al+ujd3H3@0 zw{_E+qs#l>!`q`3a^8GnCN3~hL5 zXlP0hAF{ONZFcrgH4s|)w=%dO(tujs6h2ZwFK#cZq+F~)ywt(*M)+C=vDue|Yee(g zG`4OH8pExs!W823Mcwcr0}rTe#HNY~p-WeQ6@5?qSN<@2ag;1ieB@gn(MR z9I$i@o;iG1eFi{@34PHdB<3LaF8y(2m{GDBw{G>jMw=dLU?$VlaNnfB|2v6-=MTec zAYcuj-}%sG9cwLH4259@NwbqfDjSeKyW|X z@eC;__$^H1q7NwkYgrw~Pm<|*7Z<24jDP%b9c@;~H5vr!ASm>1$-p&}EtXY1{l~`W zR9hQdY^Mj6x<*D!z=%CpIGwX!M_*hk*S`KZ44u8`ev<~;az$1gVNA{ngHm}NUqhe` zm}6=5aONJK9#ZFI|7#CnpN-r3OOC_9BP3kuAfdOi15}ALlFg3KWYUQ7_urr2-IHy5 zbKNn&y?-T|pIGnzooLXKT19h9pyxcA;4ze(lC(UEK9W#+psy_q{pU1oW+pL7kExZH z;IMj%j!fnb5BFj6mH-RV*nnq&93G3{Q$a;6OSsl2(%4un{QFMLedZ1%Vx4kBFb7t*%aBeU8GM`R&52A5O{hR!LeotAL|BBV7-*ac$Y6&F| z>AbA4a8Ht(Wz~E0&O4Z0i(Ovq6US-1tjW+9`XVqe7M(a@8_2{xS$i@G3ul+1Cc{W* zG7buvMGZV|m+ZVuvn3=Y=@Q@-ny|l7AkDMNzYGLDVU>{>g?#?f=noWHqgO~)WNXmX z*NU1$t($6d7&Cxb6CP%J8G630%QPDG(cDerQEG_OP+M1 zr>9p&o6$2kXviH0wj3*r`SQbP5O%OwI{Sps7BP%T=G}?AZLb6|kzK$33Qq3V&}cO1 z)*Wg1zTxPCT7Oqp;jotActW`@@I84>JpDCpNtiit^P5;%Lpy~L5cJb~4+;yD}W%3;SL!=!c?ubDJt zoVbtEiBDuUGc%jSF|OKy%yAfT4@>-4GF_D*NLyy)+e^qWq&rV< zT7xDZZY!-p)?q_=TvDDP1T$UG3V&)}9i^;5We7f2O=en&fqE^Q!7VO|S z--lUF;su9s8fKRqKJ4i(CmQR5leDgL$RgH$btFum>TJWf`j8RDiV$HDl%b!=!9k!uw#H* zNJtf-D^w#$>0S+=MTIC}T|K`4z%+?u?1N}xL1Ge% zBpRw4W?f*0l#pX_4`grwLpPP-9?)0~(0mj3HSFdXG-Z>hfzR%zKx=Q$0hq&`H~R`- zd|+wTwPL3?@c8IKARA?vO47is!a(^(EfiSXKUr~90N)|xWGQ0yzUUiUJUJMz~07*?qD2T+7un67&)c`M~i>a|7 zMd#5Io}%vQos@!rJQ`JvjEDGfYbj%3uO4G6#7jj;CkRzU(8NzAL2t-rm=bvyqf#V? zYYM`mh=KYGA~wUGR!(c)f_2B&bmZk$rc{X?LKY)~E7WB8SYt3oe^E-x$Ib0Ly(tex zXCogToXlLe?bnBA`AZ zVY=5lw*E4{&%ny#iE6%cF0>u9e3>JA5I$caA7eyFD9VF{68u!50DFs0y&A1XEJQwe zL}YFFX*V(=M6w~7_rZB1laXY8naorJqY$eCr)u&UuPJQ35y%*riF_b*#37LT5sP^v z<()*o1a*XOf6yXyGnRyWT?wq=uGxQ(h5Z>(AXkZtiO8fVfS}%$K!Z*vxzHqQri0FC z+VyNEOaep@GL(&iA}Z0KKasaIZ$!9#WNLYMX2=&$!GX|{+zzUNAboqtxk><-Oxi^G z5e51c$}OdM>b4L%@+wa-7=Zs;!%8~fe`jl7W~fm-p=5UQKorshMdGZ?nZ#39@BBZM CdI3rR literal 0 HcmV?d00001 diff --git a/docs/evaluations/DocLayNetV1/evaluation_DocLayNetV1_markdown_text_edit_distance.png b/docs/evaluations/DocLayNetV1/evaluation_DocLayNetV1_markdown_text_edit_distance.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000..1ac7d77568d85c25e680ca24ee701dc56988eec9 GIT binary patch literal 20830 zcmeIaXH=Ehwk^8Q(kgS6q9hSZQ4|ma1SFdk0YRcjQpp(!iyW*nlnR0%8AK&#CBq_F zDkxF1gasl=vXV2ePxs#E>~r7y@$P%KwR`Vt@3iLG1*|Z?`HeY7AHDbS-B-GFe#=JI zjT8!Hi|mCn$`r~PFA9a>^Dpc18{xW+Ui^=^{n;z_D%M8!j@NAsDGJx^Z7i(qElh9h zr5f7WnOa*3@d+H|JIcG)#NOV_+63T4}M@{b`w zCf<}nQL2zVb5hkQVwCRcRx{nR`h8%;?WI_iNQPKczn>B>=e@rU7)J45^u8V9cS`xU zJF17oVtnOepFB|Hh>uYD%6YM7;PDo_kV%pD;n{m#X}*;rIjw1}oxY2sRC=E7c+0d) zNoV@-RL8J;UWB*6IV|F(_r7^L1ODUqE{0zzl+qi&c;Sa#rzt<-Z_I1Uex=|A zymu+TP$<^~ema4_Km47thC;cr`G1qQ6em6#*Qkoj? z(%U9ArR3qbc3su;)AxFNdt<(SHPLGQS{L2d+xx^b^6w*3bD#fo`S$wfNg7+wPImSq zTwGl2;`WD1X#Vl6!e%ko-`wqU6t&&L@R5N}ry!;-`h5GHY>9V|*d>m+Onp5yT_)x9 z?b*umxaV+RuwKo0T5tGx@#3ZFp{9U)_wJoKb?TT|;~||Q7vc8Ns&G-oOP4N9eE
|ZPrxJW?lH4MdI+4jC>OC*&}sTE7z(z)4{-CW~4Rga`atE zNlDe%i#rt}#f9Y%A-P@0u9Z@nQZ!XMJ3BXS*l;=iQe>8K?bFS}p164Oh7LO2p+(2h z^u6Ej1y0{@JX&0yABZxqcyd_GV<~cG`AI}X%EymNVq#*0k&d0Rxo%y>?h7p?E3seR zJ*=#(lv4;hR@atoE@Z)ztRLAVa&H?)nrTDaVLraG8PTar*KD+!({#)^L$l3W+A940 z{i_0bG%RKnpGul?hF*?7CuU!y`Rdy1KkP>t?f+cAMNlnSy?WfLH#}A@m=$-Vq0re* z$h?_%vcs-6bl=$rA;wYeB3h#nGM=4J4y%+oxw^7hTaVjUa)zGsVGR}Sbb3=2CR{l+ z(%QgySoy6aZt+23VPR3x57)Quku>296|?LARN)^GP~BGoJM3i)MxNqOzr)*QdXK-#&RIB|qn}{DG?T9PS2XkJ!!EtX=Dqo15F3 zV;QbPM|`o!_Uo-K1cwUf-zBf}e)#aADZRkq(c&Jgqau(exTk!eY_=gn%+8zB?%U_r zyK^7+(;d5naU;+9JLA@l2EBXxmf6$Oa|biCNvGSSf{BJ=!wC^$;MM$@Hf2BAL)*n#GF!*5K9yL=S?*b9S^mtewoGHi9l!p1 zt)rtu9=j1LecKjM69>Ks%t~1lbpF7ei^4jqsG|})|XXRSF5I6 zsq!Ls_Ek3 z|M`7pMr37WrT-3-?gi1Z@<;4K5{_fXWMySV=_{k{xoomVZCR$&zSX5k-^b*u+NU2@em~%rLm08m0LiVTMDqJlj>Pyv!DxI{dBs%|S`Y4zf}~!-|k?(sQNF9+Umm zKEc7k8#ZhZz<lZkrFM8 zN3J%$Eh{r(rXZ=Z z$!bxSG_E6FQuDn5t-9wCTlGFo(_IYYfRMwt;g?^Ij*X4QU5XSxC@$WXv!vdoh!w}* z_x3)vlUtSi?cmX)A4x`iTVCEiy+4}bG&7=^X*Y1m4h4tTTCw)2RJHpo-FWNn<9^pE zDLS;A{Mk;|1}Q#n?urY7t}`P7Wd_zMnQca4t4jki*a>W0Mxl-)cW}h$aX!gM95QK$ zXJi=Jwd*%4B`U{eS+okGj>-+xL^gbW{pSH$6m|8=pd&kX?1;X#_U9z|P{D<%2E}Zn z>ag$}y(HDc)gc0>5r_@=;55|di~d86i2<=IefCBES+;!_rM|!2Vb+=v+vzfVM7F*r zQX(7qWDD!D3)>{Wd9B~NJ7KoVQ;)x7DZ{KW;dj{_&*rRH?aj7i{qjfTi;7nk%(rkzYooxax93zPn=}9+xTGelgv6aEVsM+2e%|ABLMzAO@~a!~IAu5O z;{AwH+nBB=6UeKnT(Yu|OkRV`VD|ctb<|}Xk;~yCmW?m3pDvoLk+_;|7TD=NtD}~r zDvKS@Y+@6*al5}JGWpM+w{=dPi8`W{bHShWn8`H_-8gxcz$04C2&nbj_N4SzhbJT3 zEes{6XG}56=IHA$EiY#-g|NlO#3Wd@=eT^n_4BctU(QqmD72f>ERt&P3DLpPWpsX2d?scdwctgw1Qoi`)q5FsA+v~oFy=c z?wfntT98>&o;`ae-?E>+Vm|27o@?E*-&gX5xWkYMs*$auV+&Gs7D7DOB!*kk(}9gla7J8)65}(nBg>fCWjs2@<`v}SpKv<6xU@A*PfYl8T6PwSX$||u zJl=nv`}f~Zp7-6;glci%1GR7rcxd|bpWDm;?pTjr^8);Qwrh>6^P-LOp63ndf((nAAzv zEs`Isk8M~!+Yl?q)H5((9G;C5_~5ZY@xl;~R^&q_{xATfF581+)VNR9#zh1=78e(b z(ht~Y>XeGsTw&3d$EA=uKp(l%ruRI`ZQ_0^uYf?^PwUo&{`J={TCL?Ao)(;;vH=HU z%|$K6m+|8<|N82Ym})1ZV?B07@lRbUp73f4>NvMmokH~k$74J57af67+$m($GVp9!k9Df2C(9IsO!04j+CK-UaosQM~q)ez^Cc;(d#9nE~(K9muUWf!g1`#ZS2 zX*8O1_Z_DCrs|5cLV|yX1^U|t{@|Rfm*b~r_yFG2sU|4Bo{_FGS$|YiS57oc(mCU? z!KJ5?p{9{lR0ggC2SUBPC@Q&DIy9X$lpR5AE+x*LkA6{A^~p^twZ=vhxn4e)PsggY z%tv~8N@f2CE5&*w3ZV!wg++_W@83VnxOjhXW3p*;EXO%E;*q;}QSkcp>t*HTdu z#T~nLp)xymI+rsC6uqi33vaPQWk)ij^-<}AyzaYR3Y_b5oAhbRwdU9N{?gN9nJZ%1 zb_mDCbLsm%PE&*>w@yLU%5=JC>z?txzF2AZg>nlP8muV;|_0q;cfp&~Qsj>yoVEEx=L}Cb>A0Nu5P@ zHxsq0&u+bojh@7O-Ucn(ng9qWCUs?t1DnfGTD+z9znoy>lWtGCmWO0 zc#!i=u;Kn`Md{kw+9O7qk&%%?Zk9&93j@co&)>g)H)~D_1)g|z`}R+?0(@&uDDPmK z?k#+Ntm`A3xhJui-}&{5BL*kKbC!&NL!tpW6s=2^sdq=UOZFTdNRRc7DdJn1j9NW} z{!h!7R9=TKZ#PKcnr-duG6QG7)}6*44-Tbk<&Fhqde&!;78Vx`_Zdhyj<&_36x_LU zr?vV}OR|O{Dsm&RcPx6xuOFYEzM5kZx-c`!qoL8V+h?GfSEoP~yX^AiK9_}IT3QV%s|ajRP{95lQCxJA7#{5^DFLKR%CT%u0z7vCn9p{bpWsb* z#i4LP>(Dnaz=iBWK5Ey5)sjCCR!|_li(gmUxF+Hiy{p8tBuOp#AX9LaujD71WBT^( z+ZliT)o)BJ-=_PI(fPd4aQCnGZr}byS6uv(cXRe}R8$oDJn9$?rt9sUO{* zUxyO4lY=82l|)KwczL3de;R#if=0S7^*J|}AnOhpnUc+V`nZ`?{cL>Y5xrtbx*dr# z*_rVHG$Qe|LIw4%S~RLk$?B=Sqob)e-aSAQpqx{=743Z2Tv&kBs#wj)yn>d85J78* zmGr;<`b#VAe8s%^;r)>kj_N&SKGRh~wTF%#RnjT2uhYq5#_cB zz#ztTET4;R{+-G$?REv&>hj}#GkTMz_qN6$z#^pGuVPio*RDN7Cy2iuZtvbDT3ll{ zgu2QK{B?ILd)S!W+&RFgrp82-Y~*nC*oruz4d@M~`opa+`qP<>98xkHj9B&MpXZ4r z#QHMGFMf0eSP+z&;YuzaqTgS$W=)pEu)6!|@+^t)pd(sw2>1lo*|9LRX$l+w@|uV^ zc~n_eAtP_xJWh0j%V=v@rQMtgwvDjKe62U=*?HK zn}i10Kjzb?Pxc&fuU@^%>3J*Y@8|anRL|+<#n~2gUG`%gVzTvjHZd7^*AcD{IT@9Q zR-USzuS};oYB)LN8P!BMx3~K>3|uIfk(8SHcsf)!1;krYF1-XFl8n_P=@u0nR0xat z{P|jbem=?aC}_4%i$v?6@abGNZ%I>_J;2Du#xvL^;1a5tY2*{cua|~|(`=RV9Tl~} zZ9ZcwyLim@0~g=7w9Mw{%7uOhTu1KCrjA}cqM31~GMK+5SkEJI*O99x$cy}-Q4&wHSveynD;N&Erm>@3?9MH`ij^O8z=RN8>i(GdyF~wu|4;?ym z0nPh|z!oE`VYDFx0pseEtmp+`8ZU!i*@FyZQTy4bAGFC&~^K2>bnBN@_TNg8vH`97utTwKO3`_3bAWSKQ_3tM#@ zKQFWyA>C5wJo&`W&#&9+c?4;ryake!p8u^NlaOoK9w+5GV=~r}Kh#-7OO=eLb!R4H zC;Zb!`DiPf7Cybw7YA#ru#Nq=UB5R;&&ZZ$U*6sy4AMYDLAr$(XCGP^mMl#?+~c`) zQ`qF=2|bWy3dWA?&vD5GHr=O!I%|_P(wh-yBP)N`RxA#ctS+Z--?3vFlw51|7=7s5 z?G9zYo#n-@)n;^=qtu2~BrBBA`}glZ=4^kx(y}-Z<*AAWP2s7eCOW3#)Ry{c@RVoJ zP^bdD3!Bz+qJ_V-|NNsyFseAf$?`G*z`0z5ZM@bGcO9|lLz^rP-g&HeacuYWz{03S zOIl>=5=y#;nc0v+xllEdW@E9t>u77{c_h1nzV02!7_X`g#y-6|jpL))rWW=%+y}XI zITj#+rdgWx#<9LkD6>3D%w(N#i`sGv8Eqd)0gki^_qT5QD8t;gdausQJFN~aiD(+A*=7Ap9LMY6X z=1^EvBs8McruU_#R+;m_0n>%4!Pd^Z$A0_mw+FtyEkAR(`B`bUxsY@Uy3>bULPRGL z7u0FH`OV*d8+d=HV{s70H=Y-hkQm07DvH|ad%yB=IM-w3T?Zb=QES-O$EOJ(4TQH_ zg9~z5zrZ2l=`}Qm_iS20-NHa&Y^N!L}ohSPzzI`KIrtpoo zzqI!_j&&q{`(_i!ucr&tRde}TttCKFJy@YB6qk4{Dw1itKqT1%#I>+~+2;0%Cr_U6 zE-#!uS9|l+sXu`9?X=uU>75zx@~m`0g!&~XC(~W)n4`fz45iV=G9m?dVm;|ufc9?& z@=(sqK0doe8ZhvNauuEChm(<1Bhz?CA14(WBz41K;7w5^>v}0XZY^ zE+J#nbKUniE*4OCcVp))X^}!1H+#;xgV;t!ZBbbLT3d6aE2TPXJZQMfcwJzuG39{i z-?ukhrBPE^MJy5!qCCfrsm3ctHG`;o4&|U#`lZY4SSo116G;3m=q1z&>`mQ)cydH* zt4VFf>-9Y5V+kHYs!l*-g+tbSgu_*0*u6j0*nVNkG~1-^6beEU%8@Ww<)&1vmYEhg z@TPqTHQuuOCmMbyh)(D(tc3WJxbjOV!E^!X2I&qZ7dV6*M1hkV!G% zpn__Kfh_vZ3ag;cRKmMh7k)@;MJt`oQ9lm`&i9l2Wi%|EFzc>NgmyE3C z^8FptG&*xsBn`AQ3XgneF9tMKmR_iDw=PMADxr!mRYz+wg#9>iAdVOE1ptPd14|feBUu0`hSC*W!O&iVu71jX)t%q?%P%iS?^fSW(OplNWmZY2mz^GqmZ%TIXqKChvZuiLnROOA zQ)!p2-RQS(-!^cP{{qr*Co^-%*nI7fIf&=es1kpGiyrkjKYvcY%)1U%dFP%zY3S1i z-`?L5ChcBO5p=|yX0L#X10G(WIzmhZR~-lvio_Yn-LF2Pol003zH$@6=s$1U(+F8c zP;&jz*HC7ybOVTiL`2%BArI`4%kp#!!2|8q+e*Iu zy=eh$DoNInKzLE^God<*Em6BgO+N0`$+ta=8mR{TMS69~uDwsu%1yVvb0F763QV0I ziQv1NSzaJ(Y2b8`9YrpT-X^o8B;_*ok%WD*o3lHUtp)&a%3{c@Cp37sRr2r{N!e{^^4t-mr0_Aj-rswEY>$jzGziU!#3l z`T6;K#>cI}B|YieBxv1{SBHz~%FE9;T=YLGrZbKpv%H#XWl1Y_0HZh9o|}H($0yr- z6^jrAygpV_Q$w}1`tjP+iL&r;2rRgpWd_TEIdzW=1Ss6jDiUYFFd9?zK z(h%9xTEn_IMKjK0d7-SKp@C5EjcGdVo7qIFc0)o6>LCQIO1`ZjEhDS4l=sTZ(lp6Y z<#i>?GvT0qVr8rfwcm+$x#@=;Grh6soP~V~M|YU%I%}mB$u2<+A>0fH2M4(_Cb(I2sGQhc*-U^3!h;ayiUgXjb6=o6)8m>ULsr2dVuk z#n`z5!xAC3fGS;m7M}i`f?vOV;~D- zB5)xSjq=StKA4;yUbSE<->fT#wzRVTfQfp#uBEvB*K5#%^~no~3bjK~@^SY&>gm&` zeI7oPD;Us6=;dtMLBh6S(@EoL!K0=i<_(ePjA%}C=-nEY+fKKccbCTU)DSnOttjFqA`>gl%5L4o1bwjcVuFyq1Jm5qIU)jdLv8zZ5{LF6-(daS{qp zWIX3lJF++kaj_q*hbWM=5IVp9)s^wpD!_?)_j~j)!)sPgS`DwE{QX!xs7h}l`ydOj zkXA)5FD6xnM?W%BL`7Md(2Sd^`4z-i0?Ix8*KVbLE@e<)1=(f&utG>E%mN3hZhu@EOU z%GgosqUoUZo0*jk{T;y`njOw-USz2vg6xZ(-g`xn^#M+d*=<&pCS#;D-0V< zi!#F2k?|)>shcfOgqChn47T@PR&DO=~_|URXRF3Al<1 zBO2wp7T@~?P3gw1TXWofwSI%j95XsIJw1H@wi2b%EA!uun2*iDaP#u$|40YQ%@5;S z_u2^v2ml7wPE(hcmv?U8?ms-bhT`?dEsE2<2lww^&K?rB@0*C#wr+pZAV+f?<@{+4 z<=W++N+nd?+zQjQi(~wK3-`A8zs_&Ann>I)o;|1YuDpB)3^Fedt@+GelWp*_<4^7Z zM^Osp#P5IqWB2|S^wMlJpzM}%$pRrfVg+28dxUULFJ8PL5Mq9A?$Ew{r=a`gn(se& z@LYFy_XMEci4$Jn50U_s#a&bo6uWB})n;?wx><2y$U(b{ z#IVY(DtjFnc};aKKfi`T6~7*_I{ipJm!` z5a?bDhc-tXzo`RrKopE}EBK$h{@nSVrS$F=Hg0fo=(|)bEK+nmmmLUf^ITod{qp5Y zFDP5^My*niLzUn=@Q(q%L;Dt-BWbB=gf=h`1_hcYI#BJleOO`nVLyhK=;3o#TVUY< zg{TUGeX2=A??Xd_P;IjWP+!r?!mx9*G`@X5<0qZc79RDK5CTjgX&pv$59y5%06LL9 z<-YBYST=9mc+pYarfu2#5s$nOx(tv6pR8a>_(0!6cG>IHZxntswuH|BWs-zqqOGHo z4H2?^0=I+*w;bHLe+)D3ze)=8ibUhfFs1@_h!! zf0;D#Shzj08nFsrL7DQqp@(o7ZByfLpLz_<(TYd$ z!iA3`t(k;mAuZnYa7zmyd=@&+Wqgl+3?QZnK73&$vsM*oE!(nP9d)k>c>|sK6TNWk zwco%-dy4mi2c$uU6mF^x}%Jl!6MtI+xV_upY)3E)J?DI~!L0lSx_1AY^Y^_hYR zd(?^u^>X{{-^Knu5kWfaE3@(u6k?E-rnYtjavSMAXcMKSCm{T_4rz0&)Ca{Msk{Ku z6#2z+wiZORL^wXfkAGwD=Fbpuj{$TM#T-h_R;}^5?>(UMjcG6zN?6eGy8Kw22K;>( zT}~1(KE#&ZFJE4eodj+!#*d85%n8^;FfPqwH&Gfi;3nck@;OA;d~G`0Fw|iJ@OkmV zg_rb4yT$w$*?z{Cm!ry{8HFSUpGq7?~tssha@k^@Ux3!Sb5GMS2+>h(w5i9Ktt01hJeR;E=!Ljq@<6*vpL zbo%b*%OEFuhli5~p1NK_4uehOF=rzBqm5g(sO4JGiEjWqHW;X(dl}jy@)&!u0xtiN z^4_)A)aAjooqfP~`OKNy*u|ze1vZ5!X?jjaYpW)x8FdIRWSKytz~E+(Xy-qfV?l)) zCTl(yI1G=BxjH$S;3kHNSYD0ug;gygh)*Z1Tnbq-FO%`TKFJ_{cK_4dv)U81weLAV z&{qZg3;1wZuBCW&oTOxhJlSN-$;Bl#-KgSRUwkhE94(3V?YDV1Og6D@_(yY|u=T4d+A&-RLoc_rI=Nw~lyc7C_*!(~-<6 zm9}`NR&E;j04cO%^2D-rLtnosMs^2cNe=u;{f7W9cKQLlR_;S?zzIZsBUnJ9u@ZC* zvMinyy4SB?6Y3amolHgmQ0`nUURT=Xxe7XWRs%f(NgG9TUmmuBl2cF9PDE-*1OqeQ zB#dY|Roz|klOSGE9V&F5<~Xhn9&G9ZS5yK}3Ab|Z)m^FRJ%~96ZTWdpgG#sW-a`SS z_#B-6RrKsi_y(aA7!IF-d6&pD#sZo@f1~7~InZi`^GpQ>!?iBB4cDZ$%B;76z2fT2 zYbOgP0LTdG{b+0}R?&A{k^(oCE=ZQainVLj93#ZJBaUpTExt|v#tl%mVM133OP%mCvbBnhs#(uFZlEarf{z}q=#%?bw409} z{P$>I7xZTBXZQoj`$5{0uz_9s(byVF>8bxb0(sHcUMTu{&;z1w_#xx z6%|!WtJ1rH-I#xec!k07Be)qZefdZ2fF^fQ%=Uw|nO|7o24*3h<$o72@6S`jC$GEn z#*twax*?%Ii8=@Av;zKGt9c0iu9YHS7LqsYIGAuTkXx|qhY|wIB{7uYbwjwZEzkn9 zuDxC}KR<6;>cueh=~c9d#izZ4ZTAnM71+3OV?7Z2PByk=n2Rc#ngY##L;rLN$L}Q? zaUv62C;Q;Aw9|=(Nf>KVHMzBNQjBV!rUJHUgGKiHaR7+lir_f7`b^QEx4qK82a+Tf zbq!pq2C1pAZ3??gnLucxtFPkP#taaKaJPJDnt_9rtWu}Y=`vD%TcL9%+}gM$F#Vvk z@NjaT0lTJ5I)(oR&tFC+CwQI?8%2KGd7K9c*<$Tq7Vs{RN|7Lf(z&ACl)>vYp`$=K z;o;zj;>~_#*)D=+dk~=r*{qKE#8_FAP}eFDvRHj)G6!lTAgru1inPw0oYvDEULioz zi}LbWbQ#An?Vtq=mDq40T4Bh13DNC3OxcG71TGU@^TDnoNrW@T8(?BH3TjJKPYuhl zq9?)GKnOa5UcuY>#k+IBFoc$4T2com_Jpq8oMtIeeesVt{D_CE0=eyGs&0{ZPi;ysXptUwmK;tpc({A->{nQN>93gBmdPNd6N37+Gl9#->L3k0PV4A%g}-&nXV6VBYBB$iSpKJAYQm!mV5CT-C1D9w)15#l^B z+LFNvr1zpdE?<9_tp`n|7IWdZvuDnb8%MfB&^(sDj#O$h7;G?eGPr7DZGkTk>bLxu z^--i%_A(rHklktsNk&8s9OPe-^&8Qa_KlCHlQ{x8%c`eRi*c1wl9IaF<7y|eV+7?cXAH{Rp8Owicysyk2L z_%bYkv>q8_(}x(IOoSG6{ZxBg2!*#Cy8%HWlQs?=1WjBb&YBAdNp?CqK1$_>;I1`T z_lcE!{U7a@m;Q0L^)_fBHPa+a>tiHGHf#(7!tIy+R}BcrVW8yg5R;@>wPu_pj#bd% z;3N*p!kq65I|XPuDJ>~nDN3qi!Vj<$FS$5>Vw)oWXlHi7ufI@UZpI!VX(dCkhKnH$ zeE{EJ+q>uRG9;oo973YDu@APnC#O)jmnHgN6i^%W-zlKUD=3!m@7NXT7}+rFT|}*c z=~E~5%B#P3t#Bqn{c-8>5hd}tX0Kr1RlzG`Cj&83^!^q~np(2%X$?NTis_ut*Xz7S z?2sZH$0CSFE^P@RC+@jYh+139fRA?|>{Qe{!}UxQTM||vH#Oi6p2ltuLF^6SB*qt3 zar*>u>d4oxV-%acMmHHg*8n6y(UvF3giwxwkSAq9k|*Nrd8bOuCj*#+aQQ23hY{wou;dA(bQh7lM2shHY>=pDKV)Q*f{`aMtk~ zbS2^K!RZWsCD=)glq=8Cis%A2Wb>rMsJ4|udIVSJKhba8AJTpJ)5Oq^S0Cn`bH2z( zssu!|C&9rQ1rzY$SJLV9I{K}5eSNi60&i4~+YGXH{1p{{<~nxeQ1FXWzaI9KOtq%6=*0_+>~IjaUt7D?!-E6JP6KLp-6m zu#bLkdAE6u^w_Ok7y5>OtqR;#L}LeMaTzL>{r4|tF^+YaL@7k1-T#RAn_o9yL(Gzr zKqMvbr1rf@0JYy%#q8IAY-&t3s?YJA$H=ONQg8y8yaZlz}cYADq4?HuC zP#|6aFghLuU6iNCO#P#2XhyFc-nz*P20|r_piD!+O9mt39|If2rzRLrZB>7q$;#^t zFM$XiK-mUnIiRyRn2VPZ=K9gl8YPq7ChNwDO+QhtZNX=iG1C?SPKbw*J=&8U>gy=$PU%K)z76f5WbErA4M}oE zWx(y@0c|V0V%f(sYZ4-YX!qZ1UFRZ<>QQTnU}NA63vk~d5BH+{}sJEq2EB+TmIvQ?tD*i ziUv%QRYv>IDH|?ot&YP)XqRM_A{U1{w{M$(Xdz?(u_Yk7c`&D<9*+_`)RG>RW8IYo zS6%rlHr&zsLir2^YPYs|VYrfr$V7j}2g&;X8?W26W%FiLK)lqN>27{Y=e7)Q&VvWJ zVHl^bLej|3W}*0*|MSuVPNXs6u9U2%=Kr znU9_T#n6nUspVK`YB_^kfq+ANp0tI3k}at59pA(PVt#_upSrC2Vh({KY^y z@mgi?+GhgiK(-TK38r0GG5he^${EhtzM-KcWQO(%>Ud`=35Gj&Wc~mC`|m7(*~sHJ z|5i5!!~ld+Gchr_JM7@-7@VG-PTJ*X&kp;QQ_h_|I|#JV;<+-(u@ibIwdyI*7hF7` zkNzL?x*k@0P~4w_*R{b=gMSSCI3Ls8{xJvu+w?^52X5tAoULs=0c*pSu1+qdvuTmHPh9x%$MOsR z1#SFS!Rhz=7{@MUFaHn0N$Ibf1fl(ZU|O4S)gic_E$Mpc1d~BcMwzOIHDM%(O@FG* zJUtP*1%{k3Uz(Z)BQH%H)*f{*i=@LKmR*pn1R1Z*CGgY}DG1=}EFH6Fgq*uu34s4& zluO9CrV%M`A2>Z?R{@vws%fw-JDH>eBvdnuR$MLdAeM=q1O?p0_o96B^ji@o?K!E$ ztI{o~?@c@tXo}7f+Z88)5gRveZp2C(F^w|Xk*`9`oM3L_z=T}zCj(Q|(Ka$2eHjY* z?wlj|&`0WfjVadsu%bM8_z-9z)xr=N!tB$_=ZJkySp;$b3>Ze6JpGANc_&PO@E*#= zS#ljbNPNBjWJN!&EB(=WLJHGy#{aV5Jv-X%2 z4q+#cJ;PCcpMUH3CTMb4Q>*&dHP;BkJBa>}+DD|oBb(6p0~d`1>7h_yzjK;C{DmS7 zNoUjwZ&|1Ce3KXE0G04I;s)SBz(){|=D$)7$z~WUYE?IeivYBX8s>P|I|+exp4-ou zK@Y74sP9a=3|xz(?}ZoU5V}9OADhY4JB+LeaBGk`HKOE6&3w}Lk0E*>jA81)nZf|K zAlS_bV*#Pwm;!F|RQieaKd3oS+qrZOIIK7iBWs`%!L1X*r(2kSk&LgP`pxQN?!%_b z2cL4gJ}Oi^!`k%;fSUhIL{o6rOSoxask>A0iAY#VWg+sx5or1pbPfS$rv4sOrr|*%C^5}0{{Sv^`i&*ZwXi46GU`pv`xIv#Hp`3 z@tCRis-UCi+r9IRzeQeMN`t}oJedv9Xg4wv7$*SabDp#u*Fr2sc|={r~G(|2H0Jp+8SKj#iv_GohQ1 z6A6P}%hDKl=o3#f>?uoVw1h!56TOp+{1AeL8 zr=<#6MJWfQ^Msc;AZ!GwvbnU74n%Ec&+D z^grHyxMDx-%PtW|8!M1w6SY#kawR0y?bFNa3phwq7)gwAt%BS-4Wd^f0~*p^-+wo9 zRMt@XA@uAg414=BXdB{4g97s;AV4K8ZTKISj%M&ipv}UQEqgqfjmxh^u>X0Jy1A@X zV8S-SM}YLQAYKBJM|W`sZSew)YYXz^dr$djg)b(2F%Y?#0|qEQM@L6m29kN78q)z; z$UknS$0gmSDpW#S4`s%fmz_eo&j2pPq3jl26{Jt% zDFD+2w0N|Hb`a~qjpnBF8TazxTK?_A#H=-Ec&||?l;n&N0i0lp`dOg<|C8PtqDW-s ziN4CpH*ZdpQ6bpqT^bfJSgVA^_5rv6|Cxi|-#TRaIymyx3aoIAXij%xz6PBZ#&lAx z<~u%zjTFZ!1^IM;Ue3=Nrq!t4M1 zlu5FceHff-y?nSxH5jaSctk|Q)YrN?F<8(1etEf=eP{pZisI*xQhlxZ{A z$v%hF?7D_ac>DHD!?TlX8`5+nCNUlwikd(s142Q*{`0NQaCVlV$;T5^YIjRIeRPB0 zmOL<_AAGi>P3@*2n3Ka0mSJQNAE!p!MHLq{nGGCMtnJ}s zCSElm*t!dcZanu3xLNEnos_@2vRDmy+Ij~Ii!7z;kC8`{c!GmGNMi*MvC#!r4jDK` zM89|;52x@*1q_=v(04?{FZ0T0Y^U7Y!e)diH&cyfJWBz6Ot|ETX7@Y3Yd>Sik)(_t zl=pv485V6>AJU3Bk&6yCEaV;J(sz%R3+6j4CZ-94+WTayT~1=`0|NSGhcJADdu@A0 zbW>r3_oQQ&JHggx&z?OD=L&h;47~bJ{QbWqSTP+JV;KPXs)yz(XY`=7&1WyDn*_{= z#nh_5cDz28F~xtY_a25A36Z;){TL)ZOzS*v%HO_wXLv=1kB_f*L6f=HAjSF^o<ZK1Vj{+9W$pMFqZxWX(y69sW~yTTmbiGyoCU0{ zlQi=?70`N#UIuMgha`PilC{Xx4%CWjB=pc5>p#B6#5%En6FW{I*m}|VPjBXY%(}d^lc$$$8?ZA+wgU%D4p%B+U&roX0h& zKHgWA-FvsHc$2%kd+2f{gKpr~ez=v;RGA|Mj=xt(xg%Vng=QPMi zNxRD<*T^F&3zUUmTqhK!@DJ*qfRJSNnV4LS@DK<#NqQOlk2 zf#fCq@X8+rgLV|otE0FZf)JT2(iIN<3YpIu(%B92@5hLED5${@4EM9?dpqNaLGo}N zSWGwYtrfEWsze@zAp}6dx7LpB7q58(sC@@HIo}e$DklAEmq51U7y=v%K|7#M<3{oj zQM0GN|Ht`&x3uy+jq!6nfHyPw55-#wPV(guisdDMeJ%zR>c&$~xL*9%YN5P4JEp7qKHkMzJg z_3E(+qd7t*@44B zOk0o`{knA4dP)2t=K(^}Rtq)^a3IH^n-SL@T96iS)tFUIl+@Hi)`SaYBF2*Pep40b zIaP>R$q>CR6QQ111BhdvlzBjvDU{K+A!KO{aG99BQNoBs7M@(mW$Y^sle0rZ7+P>E6zLtkM4Y(mnT#`8mXU~MA=a54J6W$3!(u?zb}*eDtAJ}~P~&~{M# z!tn?Xw&^jt7I^>)GJ0c*rVx3e2)?Nf&0`}LLz+tyHP2uXR8+TGI0Q|1v zkvZsip?7TlEH&E^4RF~uB#GyM5L`wcD8sXei9+&`L~8{ScFuc8@slF^ZV#4*IR4OC zJGx**2Yx2cG3y6VOlY~)lsv*e((7Xcu{crG?V+ctnl4$&Rbq>n~ zSmOzJM&85R+O;ujPD;mm5VuN)F!GD}_C58dw@JldoK~$?a?%@$aV*Rj0vc_zGc!3f zPguCfb1+cRXIW1bXI@{fR0}Ye)K6q zX5t1x(rYAt#Up7jSFG(n_4g)z6C_n4E0CNA6X_5JXY%^0x*=+3!%VgXtRGa$CTz%b z)auf`fD@FC#~}6xp+v&ZM2X_Q(GL+-cU= literal 0 HcmV?d00001 diff --git a/docs/evaluations/DocLayNetV1/evaluation_DocLayNetV1_markdown_text_meteor.png b/docs/evaluations/DocLayNetV1/evaluation_DocLayNetV1_markdown_text_meteor.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000..f0328e57e140c058352796d5f7b5169c17b09130 GIT binary patch literal 22368 zcmdVC1yt7Sx;^@#Vk^tUKnxHC1f&~mq?MFb5s+?>#$~V!q@+uwq?K-PxkMzD`lL}x zKtfXb&ewJJ+57zOx%ZBJ$Ni6S&mLoK#gFe7Z#>U@=A6&_;F5yWmW}&1QYe%y(ihJu zQ7EfCDHNLS^=t7j{GZx;@rQ`r`73tHmWFnY*K75*86O1VowQA{e zr&Vr6jC43%QEmEK{$rNH^T#SSo}*j8h$RF)4~^@+qM>0}yL7@bE-;g7Bg0{PQJ&Y! zLinj+sBu4kLsmv(_2KNDUiE(|U1B(NiRRkU^7u79pYFTsew&@06dQ07GfgjUZe3ug zb?R_QcVj5u!-NOeXkfR;{w5>NpO*rIW1A8C@7FO=nY0s%UG|+Qp{wu`y9uCwp(+ z@87=N%)a^Q%=w2qFaP-Zt|{Nv=zygAVpy}d<7hw-KU;Zo@$!VMVYlq@Z zYMPG1G@f5VnBj@p!FwBbReIO>Gjm*dbt>SPVr}+J=HzUbN3u?#!^ZXNeWRnJTeFN~ zRKhs|8$Fh$sng?c>DYyYJ|A6q zEo9sO7{g|L_KV}&`&;&LU%#smE#Y=n-#YN1$KogF=y&hm8)=kSeL2&Vs4Ugl*~zAn z5nJFm7G++XmnS5?G}W+i<3@iUAD^Md#F+Dsb{n(}WM^q)o2X`6bZFv&wl()#@4ex8 zN2OBjMq2qxz5G%e8&#AuZb(m-@3-v52+J?bjCgx_c@1`zmWB%3#y@!cn2(W>vES>U zd)`oip6ic$)#Jp*@l{BYn898l9>us|v<@c}7?Q#!~SzewSIH>&m4DF7cJ8zUfIbezh zzWL|dxAKWfadNJ%i@T_p2tDt&Urt`WeA%!)&)N|0(*H^7Aiuv{FsDvNWAKeLXU@n? z_Sbkb^Sb^VXYdwo_|fy;GA|PUzhAn)`^_C;ix}&k@_76wtShPP>|BtjQ<(E(dK!;_ z--!$=T^KFI=(J`fh62>bp&}`him*=lR zTQh7bVUvbE`f4dxt}%ypd8{nm&u!vd@0lC2xY^U#*jRnhe_?U5&U|TIfpG&1(}%|g zB|F(faj^$~{BhFH&re-v<@P$plh>|Y>u=AuRnySa3?rZLn>J@v)FL5w6S13eSjG(KDV73tk}E|&e*EC}+Ik?PQY~HAoH;a<*GSj8qjY(` z>LSn5!mJ~kUZI0|&fyiMgYG}C<>CZf#}o>Y_p!xQH!;7jIQtO zeGW=mxMP-2^eIX%W%=Eh8S5HTiQ1c?y{%olskUY(B|$OTf;^J0`&{1%nv+M5zFV_q zO^C}_G4;lc8&~@D+~?x_Zp6!lUJvx%FIan#$Fw=+btQID4VIxXW+!FLci6ZgWYfAm zWDVWldcgT@n+biys@l~|7ase*{qnKIZ2~_S3pdhp zrWn?Q4dP-vgwv+7%#s+Qp|}*R#eYzI&dGq3A3J_-YyPJl~k?VS{r9& z|Lm^f;$qceXL}Bf4CXd#9p|LckI&CKf4N7mlBjf)yy3YA+nv8YI5ve4A(AR+RLdaD zur*b$RM%}`M)iaL(Z1o~WT}I0d{u+3ckiwlX~~q@uwjFGhvFl8uI4**5-%|iS_X&& zNmpLKkU&^vPg}rtxaj};ojZ}0XV0EJ`eBg2w)S`0O})5~fO)I7eMInZspD8Dn^sOr zQBl#(ojYUKG2S}WmSY}Z_a$r6V`V|_fQVhiylei?uxe}|Ss$^9KV041cHtK#+~$Sc zBn(6l`)9tl1dJrUk#(DCF)Em>6}2CTbksBmWLH;fh?h?$mJVdCFfU zO##ccZ&du|%^<8qLqnqx zv@+9XDdIMt73Df1jp0ldo1Aq0^5;FZ7COnrXZ}ZJlcWP!)I!6^-g?mq`pb>9X4fbyiW_vg&FVB1*qaV}Ob4>5 z@{rKugs;dWXL&PEF3omn4JRZdgk!OU{&{axI97Q$Vo{iGvGZO!Iy#Ka{^U-isGAsi zxtI&yDGg`#3z(fO-?L-?ep8u1HUmWZnhHOr8oXi+fPoovD4tcrJVMyE94qGCPBxVa zeDoe$=^dX*W5q=tr1hMk17f#6UgW{h@RQZ*G+8596Du7M@x)a-$#rg`|Mh#uDy2^3 zwVsg?^CY!YlPH%_VP5lAzJ_O~S2KO6juLOXd+%N-&FZxwiOLCKNNRf>9UX1E%VvZsga)vCMq?}uHExe$tJ3P+~v*vY9aRF!y4nmQ%<{pHK!%5gG*C;GZvC%ye{ z1aW9NyqjLPW#0|v(8Fi%hah%`Bb{_SW)QB=D=Z9u_lRC=`hpK5LOgIp!nCrI(qqiy zU|a5(>U-zJYHFdwNNYS^!0_u|4-6}O50^JIG_(WP^#`i!a&OtkcM_?co2z)rALyWe zFd^E(M8C7hsr-vo$ZihJUvK|f|9x17K~T4RZnq!DC4)c9d1m+s=j;e`13 zFr_$|P+#BQGR<0eY=4el%R~Zg$g|d0#`drUw5dvSLHO?Z^5vR{!}nY7B+_EfdTk|d zJvGusT^x{H;nsiugr81)%6INtjL&0kdIeEn#I`kS*J?&{$p)R^F4z9q{u0sS$IOfX zkRTrxlz{zkGe44VwauE7lP|lQo;;3ANZ8NC#Wjf}ZlocAy~gx`nT17n)}c0xzv^O! z#D1>6hfI#r($a?WQ-c@$ou)oXr7mUbzu&4~eJ|!u;IjDZ?;aAg(w|M$<-L9TcKnss z*PFZkd~!gvnrth#3r0D9PoLg+%-xS=#0PNBi?QNSPEg>l3FGJWuNECE>fsCe{)8f6 z(f(Pxj=HjmtLQ2~lwobOq@`Q5j_VpLY(b=RlF?GM02F(Adi0TVy}8Tz@Fq_=bwp%~ zjT_?kN*h*(a8o-B<3Ghn?H3dj4Dj`}s%bMcT2m(GJGZVOMv5-^`{LYWJhmH_g^*4# zrh^q1>#^H6iyg^lVPT<>wxg=3-)L!mTCJr|fdK8Qc20J!ixSt6h>-H$XMhk~16UBzx-?t5V&2}-A&+#c8k8SNZ>cps)FhALil{ug zS5Z+hp`l6C;rmH{veGgei-RavNFZL?qhF0s`#Hu*i zV3DTbmdpfeN5{GxZ^X$kR5N<^DZ!Pl#aJoEK=|f?bc|x3H&)T>J(_J)RwTC@wwsn* zS=2{0Q=M5SG2CcjW|o2-;>eZ`RJmcx7W*M1Y?cf4s;j%>($l%i&D!%mUE~2i&8*}( ztD~awv|%s~iDeHWPC`jKKgFW6NLW@fbnWInSDA$)OX_NYBjkX)r{`sO$ht&=FaGLG zR)&8y;8WU_F`31sC3%cg`jr8j1W#T`K_o)uJ_#c zdyaMD)2BO?QEgxoS63;g9bQ4l(Rd+v4Pv9(Ez(`3KQ#fz^L zCR47wK6Ci+VdtU5gp}z`yVzobb)B&l2t-KPA8 znvxR~B1I5=-ED^6H#G3J2^19$9gF|8$Tg#`{HLydK->BOEPGU(d7(wCN?_zdCG-!6#OEqmztuZhvC>NF% zx>lNjulTS1xn>Df0)c6EqwV=sX}MS5tO`7#p+qM(Ubd^P)E}wByfsT&>Ip;ssJ(j1 zmFFKnUJ_sa*`uZb)Dg+)SYZby;lm!=CXJl5&(Xnn|6qr)&Q!-vr}u+PVZl6IJ%o+G zbf!*(@tY2z6#7V3c4FkCu3^Bvhdw^)J>}l^-DS6vb<@T>9J_EW`K6+%dRdc}j5vJ7 zp+y8S)dcCJzcw;Cx6@g6-ByN=1nnG)cC8N!jGEIFpRDG!adcEig3P-1cJ0!S_Xqd! z8a}oUl`cS=V!fCP`T#k3$JuN11@NucmzZ^`p`{p z$mXC(sPZCL|JYbM5}L5vX``TM5&KH#5|0)4k@oz_u$ej(G5pR`H_f|B#H*$Qf(xdm z{W)FBwA*K=$AA3zFcbE&nrkLmrw5ss3qV(~HOD-BdOpjPs(|p)P{mc6f?cIC5*r_H z*jAozJCKI;bYqq=D0X~&+^mXswh509G+YqLfJiLf)@V*N z3ETY1d)t_WNu{3mK2(&D2|!AK6KcYYRPRbxAER7L{LYK?(q&DQa}(3k#n(lLsp(Wy zBH7kG7b1ZRjWy1k`Mts8naxmuqQs~BTlS|7E<1zGX>7?fYAW^cm>%oWtG~Ch=fb&j z-@s0&`yDyYth2sg)9w==ZR^An@C6xv6s3Gl6F06m{OiX=aV_aTupCi#3 zh5ly8(Nn@08o_sdDR9o|w3J_Vsrg<-_<`+h&~=Hlr+3 z6#H=(|D5{aSm-RX7$^ZHW#v?A8TKlnyig01LXuS4Y|8PE_wn5%<&KCvqtoJ#_k_JO zMedSOR8)@?u}{f79vV%hw#84CuH@-BU!rYcqU@$@+qSLswZ2!FfVp$iO3RJhBJdAv znprOqEO+hNW&duv>M3hXq^Khs6VqGPn>T9rumezU&FTJ=-W54|E2CIQ%yc?4r~;%M z^^P2jToo8if}$Jfe_*fZNW_0{Ow-XKmG|}?J5rf+{Zp76k$y_P7aUWF_&7H?kXd}& z9Jq*whbP4#bi}MBCQRXhEgs+O)(-Pk&5WLswt_F^T@5t<0!eudd!c za^#2|s<;8OZh9b=CSc2Fpaf21u#_=UQ}e^=S~TM}(UJz0Pd|a_Wzm1E9BJxQ!}-3Z zMxGyKn1hD};yU2sE;VWb7{mRjMYmIv#( z6Bxpwl~X-KRLPHn^=yvKj}1VMk(--C%ul2+&t5@^BK8xJL6V zl5$wb64>O6N;%PV)Ykqtch>a*Z|po`?WDc>3WdZ)&~Uk+B8yK{)kcXYqmUcUPfxcD z;t~ba$~JFP!#1s*xwQN)xAG?5r3CK^L>C=JAeD_*-_abp~y~o8JT)A4B&FKr1Zo2j9+|x_sA&!=wB#tRr9Q_ zfeaRT-xj7^6D}AG%uM+9xVSh2ji@=s&Dij$$@vLUrJR$jo?h~m<30}%fswGYAP~FR zoyqKisJ5~!yeBC|3*zdKC$lWOB*cL+eld&)0zGzi?31#?^=(=wv~uJSU<**CWlYT? zn;aJr(F75aH#$;q#o5_8Xk^pIjY?Opgfy^T(bMZPn?0MXmTK2qu`NN14MCWtO;#ao zK;R@GPM&~e=l7}n*N$Vlsh~EDJ!D!|4y0-2Dxf%^7SDDjV~HE(XB`#X#i@P8Kf{$# zZ;`R|RtuI@JPG?t2^_rZ4QE3+S*wn2rOrpUm=+ixO)Qn{Bs^zxCs*A%L%12Pnb40Ev^$ zT9%=B!_SLIzvUsDGC2?o^udjp5hj4wwqK6duzJrVWQY({dm6(=oojy;qQlfWa@{cQ zpbqn^oF$1rnq0veUGQ%ybhLajb2gsGpi-!#R|t3=%kKTHTem`tqMXX*q9r=yLQcLh z5wtB$*T^it$OF{LgH@O7Zg6-~Z5MsO(~-v&`0kBRgH+Q9TC>O8Bsl&UA3upCeG&Ctj;oS z$XK+I>F3bk!RD-cypO*!ti>HPS~wwk@SkwamEx!$>ZzJdckkW}LEZiL!a*c04_WD0 z8*kHBX^0eQ*jwQjj}$}b0EOJVdBALMyDwCo{+e(jiRGXA0Vq?kPxX=VGD0HG@%7E;HYM=}C|sK1|T=pr{>!+%Uo@ezuIh*y8! z-N3@n-;^{9(J*}DF19^jVU$q}^195J4NvD^v7jv@G8M3GI7p(NzCMG|qDh5J46j+P zcp=?41e%a+AgB z9w0xBQdE`YU0q$bTwKEc_+xzomU5;+)$RmmWDWt=2TBOO_h`@ zpU6;yoNp*`b4j@5%PKD3(T*%0k7`k!K@l9aw~tTVt}&(%fB)-*Ai%v1ka0~wj>sd5 zRTqwx46AUlvVO4p_VEo~`9?lR9g31_06;Smry$|gAhw&SrD;2zC4(-RJ`3EnADW6X z(%mG;Bg45}bov>~2MlLy^WVoU87C!~w%`h+O?hlRvJQwOmOl_xWz$tZY(ANsUc#f)tas~8pYY=k zUv`b0+KMG4g9Xrx1;FJ(BQa5nDr6eLY#3;{^y?bho!U@!h7i=seGW!dVV9(8y^wO8spBVETWs1}yF#-%?Rg@zIY-N+s*&r{v`eTog*4@E-js z0JGyKPMlEmI5KW{hEha>D%yH}NsU6eWW^xidId|g68ih5Roz>T1Bb?LvOEN`!Ig0f zzP|gxg9jVw=yFTmk9>>Y>^a<=+VJy7PqzKA8bR-%tUfXMi20j$3`Dsokb(#ytr0mV zd9n9Hfb)-c^wWL8dX<21fK*K&rc;lce|W{-VYEFFN{|UMA3=|V$l1amG#>Uo)TxzP zSLXw(!zmj5fvQ}K${k&R3`nCvpr{<)Ig=YgF(ehsi7K$MWcZB1>S&g@<|7>^fO@!6 zg^=HrqQM);s(b;wLld5tABqP^&Z@q))f9>qZ$7IJ1&~zL+FVm^4To8(Ui_72zo&L^3DUh6wIP zg_Z$em1wpgFD-rf`t=tLc-&{tSbcv9sT1SlA7#0UpN>pGPk~e;90=y-B_i!ZZ}04( zHS5-iHhpl7(il(z`{-9%S~`7o?MVvd_#Yd!DeVRJ$(`;C<~5?eAq zA(39O|N8Z7#Lx|ix)fVhgiX_OE?y5B%Bj<;-K(ymM##1uP$2l)8QO<&nJ3LWlG9OX zsL@0^%CYD$NzHW_(KNVmgV;CJBEdbfa&XinWjarrAofW^PpoS5hC8O>tYF`XZrDqf z5TlzX@2sOU!3Jj2Ey|M#=1kpwR7R+YOXa06N^Al+qzRqZ_~QH~@rCc1Vch!n>+9=@ zvY8F^RbU{8mzsieAQ4<5cAYP%KEdLpnYJ)KW2H{>;}ps%i9FWT-Kd7_kZiT;a3gkU z!ZUz!wv{)pj+WGe&qN8cm%9J7B19t1Q7|r89*H16leBWv5CQp-3@vCdc@|Dv^&fv2 zJH1l{`v|m~`k6DUsH;~|E}a@*(xIf&z~)ot{a*|~7M0R){XFab4eyi)wTAozy5lu)W;^`IP9AgLMmu zmmXLJXNNm{eWh^1Ll#+dO_}y7;wutN!6#1lp4N?B>)yw`fjq+hWZMx|?|)~ZvQ=JN zhV?Y~+>4Ra6d>V)ICV@oWMyTc$lXzixv&L#IopX7a)dKN$c$(eg5d!nmCWNeZ$v4&BAUL-^v9UT?8ZQ}YQZaUEH*l|k%1NT9?^kYnB! zkEpASi!>oKepg9HQUZq)4DUoLl9DOd$e~X$UfE)h%@LWDp=4ztsCpli)P+IeBanlQ z+XA^ufRsDkAyGss70@x6I)vQ=JtrDiJXtGRFq~GnbH|PtFsSUv8SLsPN@~JY({;tA z>w)t@+Of-roIH&L7bfXZ0vcob&ANjX4GrXz2JkWb)?d#hJj1%NN+uyuHy!#n#9X}n zMSoI-f^=nHlvaX((B9q-Jj#+>i|UFU1x>O7Vs|#`FBH*iZSJr`JPir?HiZX1esiNM zMGV#{;>}8ka+Yy-clVF|kBHSYIX->~BegRO9W_3R?yatP>!q~2({+3s;P^E4Gqv5G2c3&w9 z@7pfq_Gwi5#44ar#l*y9KR;z`-ciuRrd8;W3YtU(pf0%<==5n&kYSTXv2!-;39&$| zeKq&-(!F=Wc_=JLj~XLb5SE;I5YI~f0=5X>h<|_3LmMdN6GX4TsHilI#=G)zHt=fx zDuB+!eO4#2km9~PXGDAnB)s54yLRtpkskW^{0`DXQ?ZL9YH`_U*NF!tkWY`a36=`% zr%(@B4TANIHR8b^n7;X) zRy~Di)=MC~sNxc^DgORFUW|4#{?h(G(!7XC{O_X3zx6H_m6SZtDdK>s8#iqVfXN6O zGcstuJ|EJ-z5Dko-@lha>TfOeC{>Px2AqUtIx#t^eCm`ZvC<&DC5VVRjv_XB_l}ID zj*nZxUBj6x2po2(tK%unNjPT!CF)6Ks3QU1NIsP3Jotc*020J|g1tXXyj_t<(;$*` z;D^i(;?he)7)*qu*F1sp6OywWq1XVH_}v$8dGFyq1972pdIZU;LXmM!-1B?Z-^i%i zA(Z<9p0e5Z@L6KQ`NfOuWMD{vh?xZI%)=*7n!ze%J53rQASwFu*$=4@4xZSH5ODkJ zqSN6gbOT#5F*QX#$#Pq8kVnbPdK_D~-Nd4j$y42Cy!$lS3T$kZY?DZjD6y4%+5Pub zRynRYDe1kJ_X0HLW+u1|OTCaFtvUdrHgDMA$NcWyJK@0h@7`%t0c_a87Ld?K$UMk> zkwZ7A2 zL@+LTr!VmIxO z%(3iB3klhS7(PAPp%o+L(+r!%6r7Yvvca5KlMMjtN2HUK;vQ;d-F$8o?WP7@IkP!k zFC9TA5tB;REi)v$(;)nZI*WVYsGgNNDepw&V1 zDM4E%A`Ylqlh3cNwXZ^OZl8c}I-u*$@t0t+AtI3Mq_A!^#SErWa{{!^6et9#UvvV< z*}hPCePE`U5ON6$2ZFQNe=Koy#3pzmllZ#)54KeQ-$$k3wPg@%@-l?U`d@{gAb1S} zAXDLHi?to7&Ch_-os##5?CNerdKH9gqz!c}!g*@xa$K~>a!a5NexZA9J|CqSf&rQ2 zCk(+e}m6TeCD%07LgyZ6~aEG19ns$ z1$BYl;0vs~{tLO})@$>(Q%G(iO#k!e&%=bQU(C;rrAsdVJPSU#8L$hHCA|IHZu~N} zERMzsw<7u%QB|0vp4^0QNW|`&FQ~v&&@G7|y~22np5SF1&Mw6!B$$5t_?%5WEdq4e z&TZSCeaPHpHMMU8y>*=La)^@6)|x%M zWjYhGakg>81&9zq%z+$QYH)hL=I{BuCk6q=6!cm1U_S^WRw1D)*wCs3Bpf)93IUju z(n;#+QOx9d2x~_ir6`j3?_(l&s*IDOpgKtrVkzWCCA8vr?hS%kkbpl`p^zF%TCr%WCYlzs2l|g*9 z0KISGr1oYKt{etmEg$I9+9PPaI3$?IM_G#&1=OY*m5$#(KS%ADml6$I-W4et)5e$2 zYa>OI;hiPAJu@pa^Ev;W^z;K+x`2<_C-5WY(^k`cdC>`$)OtJ~Bq4TqwVgqud^Tu9 zrtnqQ7TM67m=INuQa$#?`A0*LhXR?2{n2@@FSrS;Tktfb$^K^z%C`O_ngS zNtR*Fz9wu#e?V!H9tOeG1~Z?(aA644T`Ma1q2^R}Y0duxq)TQC(-RZ^Fx*z`SC2>Ae_VM zs4a<#u{2S|MfT_N*vhh^Kd380<9IWQYr?U4Dc`1#&+gl$d-v`Q`bjbRF{>sjo#)WZ z`Up2tGTe&CIXLA11GI+HY^LPJ{j)}ubEl&f+z`C>6p9A7i4VtM;C%{T)?pB(O)oE> z1r)J15DXKsPl81|=^uh1;KTBCx`#2gv0CKq)$535SloH)BetJ?o%rlcEG4+8bB6w< z7XKGG%XxsELYd?E*GhN;RkzfArfm1o#c@B`wsWJlA&)#HR#T6n_(GmXwnm?Zo;%$- zil-S8lRN;E>P6~@iH)pd^*I3!Zpk~Ux@?@HzaW35rRy{pUrkq;#v zkq8!glG+hr40Qs6je*tEzHh~@5bmz0{KU|bUohz?$i^mxZvUmSAE~K(73UVuP4t|N zaOuD@s+pgmfp6sb%8sr6HaM6#(Wm2Lj$fl_SH;o1f`82!wBfs=?ZDXK!Lo`pE1*^9 z!T3%?7D}!vw0%_P`E&?a(^RKd9g-coGXTq{)>-kO_!D+`@pLY;Mb@(>#qu zULFR|`U!rzX?*vhKgj@qqUw&cxDkWZ;I=Y^#Y9AohhQXNhG)FhO+)sjb^J=j;b2CZ#V=k5i9N>2*;yno7%`4$ zsO*KnNvF2vPp!Xt;lh0g$C*!8usDe<{*RCNC<4H)#ETmx%CPk)imjjHUlzsiDrNG2 z#wB=mIS+Fn>T07NM-R_H-EH7g6RG}C5F{+ zR2$(3E)WE`90gGzZ$qBlZlV%JFhZnnEp$vLScv5|zSqvIy{uIhoOJ2=@1z~(gw#6R zz*o{noFYTda-TuihMB7XV^OA>H?^+}Y__ntVEH$wEY5I$H@>=dR^8#(yx161TtP8M zkg*^>DHs?&X;~KcRi@z{zGv~gu#%*iktLXaNHOgf(NyymX#hFHrN$mUfNzy)xU-cv zR*A=4A3fRsGP1J7Da8=gY z%jchyEHVEr#(91)VH(j7z;(GE#)dd}9Fjq$5UpSP9}`KX)P``MC9ngAUceU>!JBRpF}wCses7 zV1EZb`?Y@*(Yb&WmxM~6WYs5(;%w5u4x+i97`r@atdyC-1}S2efmM{qAAyo{y#bo} zHgW%WBg`UJ4`yXqzByo(C61Ni;IiIXfWDQ$PPUyu7@oAmb~xlufkeF>I-Cs zZ-`Cys+lb$9_$k^dx_`QBYhk)K_?P1b;-~q|B0T^NP~hh0cuhbKn}WKa^YD#Dh*)L zi0R1&DGY1EAcQ_OA4c)4t8aeSJ|Kyx;clZrIf2**RbeoxKkX)*bA+fvpi9jFYSdT} zD8D(;`(Yo?jXy|pk93%zWfXchvh4J3bFbqNAqhOb73{axs+?H__|(_BZ`x)_MG9Mslz7@AF-8$3xnC8lT^M3YRxc!MPjOCN03)T$ES z89cxV8DPtZm)1WPWSq1T&=fvN6@hM>1P8O~z~|Tc3g!`TS{zf1%4#lc1bfz$YpFNv z1Pug=ujMTlY?cXs*)$ryav|}Rq2%3WiF?!`q#y#oUSe{+}G&Red=%dUQ&JdJG) zZ^K8}1)ie_9)#tq8Kf+H?kA+_6$GI|lJZ&&J3pnZ4C=-&Tx9p23hY(yoI2$#-H5C;2%ZDPsV$JR|oV*S5DJ@dBd{N13Hj z+&x1J*_$d(MVF%*tkarw#1+GY^HY|2^zD-y!+TB<$Ke$LIb$5S% zz1}M9hq4-?(f#k~VD?$WDy9642GWNeyD+N;jf25CUcZw&mdPJsVYv{@hFyls3aR9OYx)78HUy7)PgOKY!lPp8jawF+0G9?t#OPkKF*J^tet zL)IXt|9cJJ{Xy$JElcL&p>q{UchG|XSlQ4&3SSA| z)iMe!OA1Ic35}lL&8?NZ>4%HR+v1Cr&Kv-nvkNKk1{bmILry9TZd` zOrTKQZ^DC3Ds2S+AZj><$v0u69Ysz?MhP%!8j+4z*VUY0itY4RaRaG$8TjKesAGP3 zCd@y-It@$^z-$befkbhnbS6^RK*T^_Uko3*qM)DlQ(3T*dJ9$^pup;p2=0a*EMTH5 zo&p=kmMvX7KZB@y;6P=5sS!v@$I%&`)KKJPi<*!yoKBgz1ZA#_sdSyMGC|TP0JD%g zPE^5a2cj_16CFkqXvRcf)U@Z^>JeJS8*Fgw=+X0_{+cIIrtEJ)*79_{e8`8w2q_#H zF$2scm!;*H*svqa%ET(qh^9}cW7zbBKu42(CVvD6Q=+~4h)5Z{onni$pQ~@wxrv0U!l8#T(QJP$fKtPOxIj4+?YyL!HV|zzI;86np_qJ)UeEP1#MlBfBOjF}DikJ+^uJ@s z6+oSmj0w*Tgxz$pE*6R>S!%~6Bs$~FFGxuhW{Dq?#Bki=V37}F{*OR}Q8fWGOFH;W zVH7MR>@xz7E^Y!}wJK(e-=??1m4P4l7Sf1HqRp;IQ5Tj{uT|}K7NL}%0BXYGvokZz zpt!M2vZ~S$+V-Yid3_{UYAvOL4k{+mJ!Ql`E8dgIv#9TES*`VS{H+wHDP09!E`i>M zMDNMmtzwTYs%n)LeY57&PFGr+?FdyAntx+9%>M2@8?46K@vRfM|9nFP!EJ-*0os{QSZcoU@^w4N=9@ zRsH3;yrMIeh<{l-ymVR_t=O-T_xLxDgRoe$g_6gT|0BG3QJ2eCl3Y0%k?XeBCLA|m zrJ6teFCUop4|RR-n{~du_=Xv0QT)HsLx@!YyN0x@lH(2FQXq-(6MPMkLlOUd0JF!q zHKN^6;Wr@L%peqF$%u+F^72gxVuTce_dyE%YgIn-xNrq8?L@98#DKvmS5)Q@ z3F;Am>|sx2L+=eDV+p#5o?&HQ^fv@=2Ke#~MS4BfXDZOVG1C8hf4C)4L!hvMH@Zxm z1URhWu%cq!;%6iYPi=LC6kT#Pf0d$J*3#tqfsg_TGE^X37+ec_K-V%iK_WRiw2x^+Ch2cjl>3fZxemLvmSgDYKY;}Laslp(q=ax!JE)d>?@N4 zvaJV~OuWHxQdF|hZP;+x#3Tv$X~b^lN!awkA*)3a0y(j`TI0`uimLRMC{9mxvO!b@ z3IRwVR(%klN!s}~3RQ^gq#=ZaG_@8iiCrM9{(;Thm!{PbRjYq_KOk`s64NR3FrItv z*(pXEfcXS6Bk<{*0Tq#*)&jLC82m2CNurGsVjB>KSeS{Mh>&JDp(BWy$X%E)RRAGk zw8n^;fJGf@$vh@C2N=VVdg>SRE9+0r^GKM0nJyWYA%D1-SU&viS|S_=Duy)TcT5@{ z9ZiFJKaAQ`9e@&^I0C{+=Uch};MXBN1jL(<^Gyy|T3Ui~lSf!DG>e3R_9jZ;G=_b+ zrF{CSwWlbjX8xCG;kgK@(NpW(e~lLHz1XoAn-3=DZ_o1WVRg9HpI*@Wkj<2oqrPZ$=Gwm_jB_<59l$ z^ysu2g6)=VTWvLbgtF=s<0G&@ah0lequ)ap88=eG|Nh5+eZV8_1|w18ug-6fbnVTU zf%gdS;H&t*;ICCyrc9JoWd^Lo^j0c#Vp+)IplOKw!E<`}6H1qyEZvrc4|} zq)IDmq7F)HC$BrSf)9Hiv=>Bio;-O8N~D8RA;pRvm#VPOcM^}xRlGLRu|t0S8qZ;P zU3`aahMfx#Kkcv2X`#jI8186~s9eFDZ!I4AR5Vxhiy8;T!T`4p`rVGuq4+M2#`myry z6>^qOg6B1teEvy(01fyzIW5({QsKoDyifUK)#2PTttge6W_}!dYBQQr)fV(to@Z~G zr8D>X*}J2qgXdoJ!%WcbM80oPocJlTy_~v*AXe6kt8N`omNgt znZ$a}yurSABhuR9ll->LrfD@VYwo#pS$Bz2UeT@UmOqiJ;Ig}M_-(XMg*K@1<&oucdgJZljp9hz~yPwR#CLHotitHJ*lIWy?fqmAfFL zlvaHxP)KPV9AVcMC_(^!#NYyG@ypSNLL0tW_EN9F;gHLlD4uRD^SPejPj-;qj57hK zKy#!+gRpwQomFGc31Hl(wXO`M@enMwO$~~Yskjs=wg~=}_}P7DkrBJ>RNCti)^1QD zgsVlA%c+EcWhWXffou#575-5Z1Bm&@LKF}7fuVKqOf>jirs;^P)*3PS;UNdxO!M*x zL37^z-@63#Yr}K)+ID6|I!tg$)0fccEQyD=L~)nLjqGOLs^5?*Y18|MMd645!M*@H zYIDRRN?;)(fJXCPoZX}AGLl`yz=9ol6v8m!f+k${%>9`oMX|k(0+7`A(_+wmQ2`T( z4+37hRsHYs*B(9T2#NVw=8JR-!j`Y1C)fV{#|4W~BmKwZG#fDU`B@#m|CK`n_2m*e zMjk$TWXtCB=#es-vT}yu`NhEwRf#7K9XgbI|F|?<2R*A<=>B;na>3qa_Zc)5JB8Ce zFh6!14%{Rh4f3~M?dSI#kyI#h`&v*uO`m7hKVv3y1lbn{Z%mUTmW;u$$S5c@V@4vo z&SEoE@aJsxgmfJH}JYv=kxuxz6d% zfBsQuCQ95VWoc$ETS)xUA$8vW=@6{`0Jz>0(Y{2^RDpG18YXGI*UL~{NHZ_GW0TQk ztNHr+c}DN7?!qXyB~rOSC1g`e2|*74a`DUL5`nyK=dOlO(80&ir6$Gb#O%24)}y@6 zC0Bs>>F+Jd*pL$w6H18SbBlRvsfE#)q7<}Vet?|=mBCO$f=_Lv?TF=QrwMX=f)}In zML4d|vZDzxRFyi1)S?1anw$rNlOj-7DWv&K1{wGc;FdSRv1BsF<#_06Mws@fcJfb0Zq<%E`aD&E*N9rP8 z@G5NaqR$D17))+g3MOcgmz4rEFyo`bb(2 z62GG*i;uKeyz}cQ5TcEEj{=SuoX?*>uVDbD4h9rrN6FMNLSLf7^wC5Vn8B$&n`|=h zX#LfDK}sgVg`3Y`y^1Sg!3pgafRjpqh?CbtXmu54CgH&#E)O`K*&y5kx={(MG&MC< zw9nyoK)_NvjtC)UGZA@L@N%ej&R|w51Gw90yY8hK4C}4>Knfr96xL0cG65#yNEXGM zVOU)ZwIl@u1gPas>=hqMN*dv7+_`&qP~X{gE4b<+njMD_f~aIhuinkQAMt&Fkcp6{ zNOg&Gq@EMqo~vm5cOYs$oMTnA=kLdXa)Qu5j1x@!xGxZQ3+Z81*L6C|b>D1%@B$}c z?}3#1dU^sBnb<>wR;|}AhlG>}P-%jLXRsM-$G)`lkhnw~(4^-Fp4dqjq1-I6ZsdeG zP-(=#LE5c~(Jlhr{DM2(NYDiE^`N(4=SMUdBtwWB#D1od<8siK!dB|FR(rP;W%3Hn zbwj`GF6go<=rv66_4PHQB9iB)&F39Dwjk1Qcf*b;fb$_d60ug=+J?|}Vl@-f0Xc4o z(fQlq|y+fHKPl&&@-y2w+6mF!I_5Y)?N8 zSQ3K@O5UkXZ1OR4BBBdo9$}-Wun#J0y!AQKtn$asz(M+CxsNhdDb^1T0(7nkfxH^v z@bTh+ycK3toTX-$#3fC->df4S>(OHT)(} z-rITA{QlS(`l>OF;|^Ik_=5DYK!(;QvBi1n+cj9z<)HYZNeL2oI0n5-Z3*o4en|1W z=+579;D9-zb*=f;v`^Ec!=R}fkRifgTdZafcW!h>f41aY_6FKNG19W!n|`)pH$Hjr zfE!?)A1Q(d3*}0x* zLy*n&s!`-!XAVW)4+DMmjseFf;joR;l_kpt@D<7K{pMFmv&xH@m>LARye-wp8vOwX zK4Gxn?FYGKiyRdi?LPlOvpLUNzX7N{VIDswg2;M7nn1vO@RC!hCU5;kOP&5c49vbq zT7wZNq;BCh{YmOVRLLHi@m5So=c{XX67@<;eoRd8kakoj1mqfo%E?=ev~|=tcUw)D@GScc-{`+?if%Md>g}z3*=9AIcO41kH`=pG)ln%^(q;$u3`w_^hZi)l? z5bubd*8wLyU_%3lLOb|yv6Nsb=!0#7q7nv1nlus=Pd95RxIKmX0DVgd=jnlc zCw&_i{oNOTND-$s+I@(CLktwXy}d z5y1+0(*%{`d~bl_6rv|Y5M8I&Efg!Azl~@ZF3qA_uSuGY6n9Yr0eBgEmRLH_ZlX+F zY_74c?8ySgwq_vqs^+MZ^g)nKKfm;gJOdjGE##tAU&~0LbZToM6G6X%Ll0z&x zF)>6CNyq@@VS)}uq>S83l;Hy^M!?U6(6wKafdM2O9Zb!3Na|EeW=cB+%5>gQ;H6=5 zE(ST=0~*{Ap6nA?N^-tIaMl}Xg7BU+2HgG ze&hOcn(Pq~a))IJ9;La_Q+3LOynr)C4gd0ZWkc#guN|dU7_QphJ#tFJL$M literal 0 HcmV?d00001 diff --git a/docs/evaluations/DocLayNetV1/evaluation_DocLayNetV1_markdown_text_precision.png b/docs/evaluations/DocLayNetV1/evaluation_DocLayNetV1_markdown_text_precision.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000..1f6d247eaecaf23d37890ac665b0abcba6b99ce3 GIT binary patch literal 22898 zcmdtK2UL~Wwk3Qpmx-z}A_7*43L+p$f&>-QktjhVt0V!*Niu3F1{5S`L~>Sg1`7pA zA_5{ABxfaO{<*z%L;vsn{lC}Uqes8KV|XbM&iT&XYp*reoOA6*veFl}ZQi$;LZNJ< zUOX#Dp{#MCP-r?gZNPWz1asOe}Bd-#B2cV{V~u zV$8$Ab)4h)u>&_PEln+iI5~~}@e>>-=6amo=2y+}DnFTCRJNc{Xs?q$G_hha`V`95 zcIw&F3b%tt+icZ#HFU3j=l@+zjdD&$;;qO#z9hGbwzG#?Sa{g|BzbDhsnv<~iN`9V z-le~Ld#NZo&T%1oJn+($=$tO;aMtX5YzKlnm{zixQaaaYoC>#s~ z7e6bPW8Ui>930#sl@s+d#Y}=u$TBw6wvTT8#*O_p@)PfhR#y_NN1Nl$KKgZHV&YST zyJ-CK;%vvq+_<>7eOx#GIC>?KC8#?3@h-NZ5S#YecTe^(R4lJ7jt{lvWf|1RhTnMi zI8H6c+@LWz#Cp6vgg);NwnWV$4O-E;7ms(dA9Z$iE?AnV6td{6+LjdL;qf9_J+Gp% zQR&>{otF#jrg;rNCrb8K_;GUX+2ePNNikl*Y=)!Bab>>WmN8rF#*O-TMYdg>8fv1V zqIP3B{gzV$we%{pu1roJ(`rN$jw;5#fA{WP7wyBurTP9ayPoG4db+zKUY>gruUj3s z(BmazUO&cg()#Ayw=Vu&PBAiJ$=|!n`foex+0VAw^kTUK`3!YctRuo?Jk!m(&u17k zT+-0cn3$SUsPtveu$}DN-`Er-u_r1ra^MMPp=onr`|hpAs{J)#{8*hPl_Q4^y;I9J z{moCs(kSSJ5w~a6!u0T@&f@&&)L>ooC7+|Ejg5^C-`;H09r^P5Fbm6jZ+6ws`%hYr z(qKaN5oB5lE9&h2XXx4BmLS>2ZkIzdNEOKZ`nZu8@1 z!^K_q1y$>+WEfbrS?$=dL#nsJ=V?q#jBWQ*{wlpNN8NpV2HMO4`gPHQ-XSM#lIO?r z#`iOh=TAO+u5C9xlp#>P2SVrO~&)e~rc~M{AdRHr`tN`tHfoyu3X9k1y`fowQDz zpQz-l?tF8vy7T1jqvto~Wn^R|Yu$&?<&L=EexkS1j~~0J+y5a%FurcD)`o5SwC~=# zCuL{1AT>TbdY5v0%S8zZ9_(VxxNc9LpQcljH=ELjRFjVg+Tx4cMawfmjvA7ZZe~_i zeBuwb=Je%~Z#~y;cbJrNonO0Q>v0Yaj=q$lmDC#5EMxU(&a$>V8+t6WkoCyGA0p*U zN*jt*FAslCk~($Dg(@kTUbBdObYo7#f*2;Bw41tlu>6>2VXG)7J9~AjMU6;lN5^XJ z9lf6S&(C`*XBoFukG|#Wv7$H(M)^rT|NUH**y@s2SeE6W+`)2(@9*|Bs*7=Oe29#S zqSH!ln|b^8YrgU z0S{J<{A}B=kB*ot#Bh~j`QS)*OqcT&4SkZ-2BLZEl!bSlDM{W3%JeUvC_i2@Te_ zCx@iu!8RToX|5AN)pLuBL1j$Nts`xDjn_~56}|TI^sHh_$-jY}Az{HPAMK`J`|^HM zwpm1hB({#n@kOwpMd{RdM+Z4I*?Dxg>sSksgbXnZbdsSFZ7A6&bx~TbeFjY(X8Fzj}$>-j!s5KrViOC&301P z)tpT!nb)%l4|A>Ewx7YGjKO9v_Mc>vnUSV$S^QrbS;ze%c2l{F&NU*l{`O-zN9vY* z*;NA(tLheQTv{Zw7iUJdPdcwI+Z-&Esiya@9pi_#LwkELt2pDW9St(%sc{{gUr7{ZOX` z{T)cEajkna9j+sb-xL-Wt`eDT)%u*M?8QncEiK(g)vfSmow0RZp7tAT%}I-s4Zn*u zD6Off!ItvL(;Aj8+SY`ML|gQKC~awJxovA3fXd{brdK26jZYT)=+UEc-qlO^5{*p= zuygbD@{;=g^_>)AI623uCDTYMfLn*Vdi7fg?NjD7p|s`S3IM4SjQbOI&G# z$P1nv%PzqN)1z2SzCY;xr9{=#^wsm8Z`n)pUowq?^qbS;zJL36+@{scl}^w+GCL5MC)#P22BhtY)nFCM)_G)oB9&VTX zxoT6Pk|+o5y&Z=okN@`DZ>4Q*ZR^&p^VcY_3-CH3)9lBOGgG%f7uJR})>qBn!Al|q z*(CaA?aRJ58<}|7t|Y#%_f1@L4GBU#wlK6IL5W^TNhwXI()ZZfYu2J+!XhGR4$>th zB_yl`9TzM!hpRlkhqy^>J~{gbcXNhe%tUXcVSVi7h3Q7k>GC6C13l$l3o|Vy3>8UN zU!MW$Q5bJ8P|UT|_uol7dr+&|3+xjl1GrVPO~Z4ohNB}RnWslvlsvtC zeWOtjuU7hTDj}SvE7(#7P<~W$E#oqcT1aNpY03;0u^+Ewhc#{Gaf&B zM2c{#TG`%+3yijB5!DLVI{Z;**T}!RcH{PX0uPYO1-&)%tdshx0wS{aVM;+Xj+{Q;&u-*(8L$1! zEs>SEZqG;{lVN1HPx3M%QJZ%iW%=#5)0z(7@9*O`PQ)Iw96$asTxz^%wGjUnsif(s zh{)V0VwaA*9J`JF#Fxq?EVBWk>A^O7>*_5@$Z#1tmAgfNtpa@8?8ggKQnepRhl#Sw z$kZHbtjW&Kx%m9|?UPS{V+KF*@ipFXyL{%%T@*yKYV$@OgL;--ta4{l3T6VyN0t#= zRxma;KB^GwAss3lhm$+psOhYzpx}*fy~t{}t1LuuEll9=aFEB^*KOgTpuOA}jlmuZ7eA{9O|(=L3k4 zY0{C*S+peAl4a6}aE&~*Z@Eq{OWE?zv|GC`ZYdlkF&?mf z%kG}rnknhGnz(IkZ3h8s8?@X-qETrRuD-rOz#u7awzqF=hIg^k6$fJnAO{ir9)EFq9cp zPEO9VaAmXsAD>=l_gUlbpw?udhD@ ztfq0hYkdO>L?w6AyhHBiVc|oE&LIQVInK8EMbzX2P3gDgS~a#EseC`a&Mxo$0M~8c z)%|_5Lk*P|%?F=cfB)WatjtHmMQnM>3m^sc$kkj%bUxC|%&fe=dthvA?D#mM1Lzb- z$F6#mLp8JNBKPX@xHAuX<$!YbQgbm-Jv}u*dX=DyfE7>U_WYbU#ROk*cX>Oz+#Cd= zl+RJckx7&ukHM6MFJG=|r8QNdF)<4Bt8Gz4Mt7|aEF^WV@rldaI#M%CnpoMX~mL-*p<&Vy}r2Q?Y*;mc-RnIGi*9i zgl0ohL|S>8qMPr^G3&fK>kLelru)=UqjYf|=fQ?$ajx4v2uVw@s*=UNK;D)vW{IOi z`T?p(1yG8n#j>d5g8!NOn*)&hTCO`Gr#@w_%d;6zNIrS3nBvNqI3i>_5&2wObm?1( zp>LiFr%FemBg)(Lk`0Ub2QNI^Yhp4kDdIv`pyelKqFg>OIFGEu!%iI;w3>Cwy54dwwJvY5ztWv${ zo>|VXhc4X&^b@ii__%Gn=I;6}JwrqB1ZH1faiLkO?N@4Hhnr zc|{%z>qg}klH|YjMHb7WgyiJd{;jJ-$1P`!A+pi_S<3W&>L*l^1ArhIhKvr+TawL3V0qNM!I z*y>bxUoLybz~eKDXL93e99i}zP(EAWviw|5MCx66oqWp**x`!zOT}X|0qvIjV zA9L$MZhectr{_yNK(m-Ta~!%^LMbfGPo}84CL|;*FF(g>>^LI*#Xc;}E=03@uZ4Jl zGd@?Ns!2f7rfcTso!x>HB;%pcwd+5w6^6JR`@0x(-LRU2^uJt?c>e6Qb8bQmQOhKNr50bR{8U)nYS+AxbfAh#rqcxi;49CzeuL;iy6X^*shcMwW}+9ezHG7Ax`e` z!-ul-6TJ;s@q+2ksuSP8zYg1%ODZXv<(o1pL=>=Iooba7gM` z%AG2!2XM?V=@1q9R=hS|EhklUzGuhc@dHZs&j8wzP@wrMUs*-mIuRr~*SVHmEn60^ z132{jygOqOdPRDb)iCFka`U+WEG$o%QEt<$q;%$V6;F*o)%eHod(5mtLd~o#&sS#m z6-|5r;!gm|;}*9fu;dgowA7vNs&}Qy;x=-Mf+0Fy_G~y|4lU zPD!96lX!N5k&vPIfI--mQ_nIv&4rUsR2{%`AxSl>FfNxzjs27w`xl+}*`nVJG!vB) zX6;%k1(H(=7vhm^Qje+TnCnnK;mE|0u&ohW%|HKaKPwXx)2^cm7abR8G8(-?jPzXH z-QBTR%PFmuI#qcS``)rO#9kIBpa4145~&-xH5L$as4*oB7&bW0;l_=ZDp|%!@-fnb zNSHas%luz;LyrL0VX==_rYddWZ}O?NKVjN=ia<5g0401lWOtw88Z(d$%<9vEh0nWJ z!F&xpzra|l>AW13p3VzARMRdm4|?lZW55ZcKms&a^R<;ww;D2yRF|jfWK{BRzb5>~ z(|vrGkYGQm+q7B9TlK%4ex_GyUqQEK?b-~-Me9Yrr*saEj)!_jXz#X8Ezfo&NceI5 zfarK4v|tqt4Ft=6LIwyG{R1ZAJ@ZqR>w&`iGW(&yDy}iAMuvXNjMF%?& zaX->6%Iw6<4E8gFGzk*s4k3E8JmYAMj;f@`)~y_88QA0^oryf-+Fnp#KYLU}WI4Ae z`7)YdTRXd>?CetPD(Ts}O-KOx*x5@`QdRoRY=T3V1VebWQ?WxTq57?7&m*%tLyjBVBc<_KgH4i_3KyDgJmds$o!%D9h^w#Xu}L<$J$gf zZv~X}Zki7V_TVm!#Y-q{c~(}|=6u_MGthRB>bhOTg6>VfN{m=apGw)KT+3S=;|g8Lv5=$l>GK8F#zF$yG zym}dAuNjM%+2<0vmE~DYq^4n@^ADDfJS+!~HG=f{dR%t;sgo$x&#r~Z;oIrOsZ^ax zh0I&Zi#F$^huoe%t^Tg_bJjs=nv+d`{Ip|#G=QxFMc`>Z^r?g`2l-&F`z}MqhOv2t6Q^5A8xucD6uL|2OoQ zviP4bQy+f`xM-GU7hd7+lP`hceqNOo(=%bCUNUj-24DDKL($T!y6H!{(+wUV4A8vSbxlT~hf)@$HEK?;MLLb|a9XSu9Y+mBm!=Y( zinh5K)qYz@yc?D`-*(cnvzTTvAHAI+;&^)*4TcBpPv?2v1(?wlh6|@<8?RF(%QrxOz8G*Fm%K@<#&i*I4`Pc@HsIK zZ>VbrT0|U7UL86fB)F`EWao^Um_z_=+681A9`!u|Z9+r|X+te)Z1wf|xOPDM_3PJ! z`6p7rxeFJD5vNM7+ZmFZc%FCRcN&3q8vx0y#@p2aD}~Iy{;`4=0H~G(IfRHjvuIMZ zdfLgo7(c7Sl+p@t~WIfAKFg#dVY{H$4$vU6eIG&qpyg9){f}S2%ZShi43j`h ztMu;iE+2>^0|PhFi^>v0j(M=lmFY8jtRx)EAsp1k&q=C$*f9Fs%n<`)%e{LCKfSBb zbe#499v~UC0!1ES>I11@!`8i>vL_O*?;~sz=tGnl7FJejhr{I4nemPkAdHh!jNA7f zKLuhrjXe7gOlHC@yf~6JvwGp&xwelU`}q@)r|kMeY#ME_EH6#5r}BE3OmBd$+?(eh>V}x{p@5qxWAw=tHRpr*CHii zGRKNmop2tn;x#_Lxwnx|w`y<3ttL4n|5U%c=HbK4%x7gproFLsF?ctrV1dgJfC72- z<$PN}PXwZ-A`c`tM}(k;;DY;=|2*I1&+1M?nywiO%v%&@3t> zy+3(e^b)=)DJkTMPv6@xh=x=?;Y!jJc(X6AcYfNw{WJDN&8Gz*0)>NoKR0#nJlTf58)8pXj5^rBG$QF96hCAH}m zPDKE!Eg#nZ>0YigSe;J?-GyHw^AF;sNV@O-wgR!O&}pt~B06xPjzAc3gbC2m6 zHXJU&Ggcw1>F4L?OM>pME}<0*);Aq=b1X9Ve?W*ffQf3+hZESX8z+pKz4hA?H+U2* zndN{ZtiQ+&J~3A}FU4At`@z&44i-b7UcP4X{sX`PO+PqhWCI@Z2ibw=`Sa(xjmhfU zdqr25EEcbQK)#>dM!U}OTj%LXLS&%X2H{{bSuZaWAnv+d$L?A3=fXs%oUi9y@05ST ziu)rWb=*q))^C=UBh`N419d!&2stAfz&%MQ0J-v(DjJG1jPq<)-QnHM8h|1TzS;+N*E{q(S+;Q+;YCx z#2|MB5@7}>f~a^n+`3>CeR?_DT5pDw?&Z1t?V7~uCxt6&Zsl(ps@^kqrxb#??OT|> zk(CCef$jKlS!{~B6aV_$sXa5O3Zte&+q2w3=v0=KT>#f!!~4fB^FH*IiqJK1?tMC> z-mLls2PZ-a7|v+asH}f-Q%7y>L)8k>QJ@>?df+N_YK&{u`PeHr`5W2GfDh-1`jKlh z9tt6!o%ztALDcO}C=U?(-{?e32K>&?pC#FCr@|oOB7KGyE(jKu0h%9{2)nNaR1#v}cuuYh|bDbvz@7lFaK4*+_WSpHNTb0GOQk*HS1w5NtOB ztu-wfpD#Q>Y5&8mW1p~Trwb0lL=GQ?(s>?F$I8OOQfIP3^(UHdhqZ%erY9zdWka_3 z>ih(|VdxzEDX)(I|5!Du*!K|mCKffU#r4Wh+qN~JM;@&V;?@71@Z1*=uM9&EpFEMj zeLI^t4Ky`1x9t~@MRK)dNi%3Til#^AM35A+{S^fT1&t9#7)J{8dP`}Jsb(g&JFhw_ z#>t&4-3wkpk(6ef(@1ob7d^4Y$ypsvErrsxFVBsx%1B6%cUW3p&Tv|`V-R(?3P|M% z?ikxCLX`vbMg46^)02VpE(Hyyk?{J!fA{a-?;YJv){AS8mRtGwc{MbH?%)i?t%g5K z0dihOzUOmVnmbkr%10Jb;wy+I%!Don67=Fl&@qVEDS*A*Cw%)A+Tj#n-lj&wj=};! zkf?J{cDI@4d3t*GfC>PGz2WW#$_tmy#l_vi>m71{Jgfb=#Pw=I6+xXkt^foR`k^6F zSssEmVRA+)Uq(bICR|~+pYw`*_3HScLx=Ryg3WNFjWYdm1n#uH6L2^z%VC)l{uohbz}@KF|)i@*Hx z3wh^};k?{jgZ6w|JGd5hVg=9z#6dXT-o4>Utn6vftV%^r%TsV0B;0CBC8`wN+Mg*d zx1i1Wa|DaU$kEbzsIvB}?+LS8a(PxmAAxG|3&r9M$pSK=4h=e|PoGvn|86zBY5VpM zmXBvIk+uz>JGD)eLh%StjXTh^#MW=aV|vfHJc#5v5BvX1oMHb7ms?Knn$EY6cKjgI zY;DUcD2OkQd7fIwZAP&%zDIwPpl@O_Y2wS~f2joT+8lZCB zv^Z#mj~_p-c+!Ss_TC2J@%IF3)S7+SdFi_=LDFcH6d*(TF_R!A+7h^mV@VnXDkvSF zcE|`{*AxRs12~2rw-%^^&uT~k&b7g$toBsDM^B$BBF7Sm5GOyuq@&QT>;9f}Jf?7m zCeC1f-wije`L>6{i1J$Wwy{8sa^NUxL06Kd?2;$x(T5rm*o1^sKq!Un=1_|znmFFv z6a5ggK2j=4qt6&cjzZ?##wdIh0oe$gJkoOW|0AP9briITp`ox)NWa*SqN%wOQdZfg z*`z;xxNKZ;slE{ENCe)rKi%$7VNsOotBv2x!88PNX+8K5Dw6Q=qbykE# zeN(`>M~f=q`EPP>ll?Cd5fKbS?^(PqZ-l9FG||+F{{S28MI?a}O#r)MIM$l8`KO<1 zfjN4|#*%^j1iWV_C*{EjGqVC%{kEiYtmdk95;v7f6>?t5f4q~`Qzs8;%Lk%QnDnJf zxpB)t1n+6Hv}ymIW)0DVlM`Ey9%l5*>w`r>QIO`#;r3YBw0U#I_+cOd?G|=A3bYeN zKr^xqVEE)v1j$*h?C8)0358_gEk6IpAM5597bQGVD|y;>1#>wTaKkyFG`j2+iAINo zi>r1;z_hctdh94tbSTO7KA-C9@NkI;h)T4tD4$uJEs$wJq9KJGr9uR1K-+88^Zpn6 z04U5A2xv6%Gu(cS&o3X2c$NUW%1oC&H)=a&eKotywoZ@V#Oq;_L)DiCi1|$TY+wQ6 zW`K|ii7;qkcAOL3BX&0q>NR--2((A222H6^K)+M4W9h?W_}JaOk=`Uf9H1AqfGP*D zF%60d=C#vyPz5q>yxUwIEGUm4s;N=OhP~hM-%XoT&(f##F<|^yfB*dqoF$vLY^j5` zWUSc%!gR8)x=w<#AQAxskShsAgS7odoTNdj4inQv!&8UCl?ak-2>mE(^VQICPEsz} ze(t8U$M3zciE_=#ZSB?LyB-=6tk)_0U&QkIpGa)~G5cJ+b3hBf}#On640IOmAM{_l_U?@ZUb*?L z^9?a!z}9n+iW6qD$=P$H4mrK?7@E>Z9Hs<_Apy-^$OyoliJ zqF?c-G0vgfbh``(6_JgIRSQ~A_Lxu*zlksN`gQ9rdO{V>fGdGP(EP22E?^$SPdPxe zf-1Cm3`5E=WZ@@Lav1>7K#sX0ZJau7QMtYtNrv#bfufGNFpuqGVoI5tyB#9ttlWcXMha^0(g>2WbHQ$TJe5 zZm_ztj9%S?R7fB}HR3M=5SuXSK&F`Z^RFfg9RwfF2MrC)Oc`2{15|V92}n5gsX7wq z5~N^ym4!=kWwB$mdDzs-ssW@hQT36tL_ius!1HQ%S~Ri`fV6ZIAd|Sy@XZJW-~e)# z?xwvIifKz;ukjkF?iRM-g|4J%IJVg#I5MuixohZ)3jK&sB}p@QteuvK&I8El=6n9D zTKr4nXiTy49}>6YW8@Ua(YykTB2rS}>WV$2ur~pUfK$cP;C&RrXE!9PtD=GNLpW+U zd_T7g7VbkU&MC#%Q-19=bc)j`w!-c-X1Ytd4lJy+;)W zDt)4M?`KHc#ih$YIv&3CD1UCViw$x)V>LkEUb(h4ve*zd@+Efwn&KNa*c93x)qj%0iF;mV}Ze8l$mx0E>q- zs-0Uo3-U(}p9>H2?^FsTu2?Lx;lk7)p^!nihr)E3OzIW^$G*puUy`8+C>j$$kA#LW z@3}}YG5S3}>;zGe$T@~W=oyKkN35bmo`&*mymAds)A};FdF>oz{Q=^-1557%4=OkZ zk`z<&Cms_?K0*lQ+#kioGZJ38qmYb1Exht0%pKwNA$3sYEG^Rw8sZOu^so>3R}$iH z@D4}ErNu|yo&xDM4rVM>BzmQ;KmFpRWn`3Mq(hA7_7zt`UHs87fUi}6&HIPfuoYPK z<=LNHQ$Y`+&Sd%J2>(0KI8Fpe?2@!}rVQpdbnL_M!6t&_*S^3C5JH{gU6NCQqF<6i zBOoAfVH)lz0~8?@m|=N>0<;L$fWvSij}E`g|1OT^xHvdlML^D=_z0Wv_CS7T^Rbdbr!a`_x`2s1hJ|EO5dulEmWAc+?|OZ;-{MANOz z;W3i0lB(ipzWFF=T!yWc93reZG*#`qXQ*L>tssgQG$Q>XUAU@LG34_cRy5*PURhow zWGKoj@k*i&T7fd9dJ+KT;qf!@ngucHe(mm_E~PhN;pYCt*l9O25?3R-C<$ZL59tKp z_$Hu3pqO*vB|6R7iZgDhgREIz(V#Coaa#{e#t_W$`ae2CND-D*w*j~Emr${7o zGLq7ls{>a(@AW^|N%wlE2G^- zI1?5+@6nRKQoRlf{;hV9pDmoIV9Q+`%d>(v#WhUc9>XCS4)f-E#$?1$u&17}7_!Pa zn9N9;C|M%(HDHNVUo?3lap_SSNt{d-6_x1ujkJv3m^0$xUynn)-`s!#(kBY6kx7^} zhSWes@!tCKDrmu00KX~VE-yplPRDcp`t|FizXel4*u>GMv-7Sv>NL9 z=L&0LkivBk*&AJ#G=MYACM*PUbnfn~&vTIp6(0O1VA1D>dJ?sf$-(0XuVnm-^eTHN z8=;TkNOg*CKaF?jaaW^t`4mMjjt%hM6GZmQN?>|lF%VnR_2#`1NUg)fe7%-dxU))% zY_Kb~lgWOB%T*tAHZg`_G^Ng;ODi~smAoD)JAl(X35dB<9Phn;batl0rUtavkQ7X^ zF;S)!l7lf!O6vi9IFw-ooD_U74Iofism%rUSuh&FsVrhIh&T9WO~yopDoUjR;Mq|O zy+lgf6Ssj68~*ru=wHD(g5=#@>D;D#KsR2du z(xp!@*YQ+~!RQN<^yt5QC`=*|XE$6RwGel$pj1_dil}0f>Ocf_{rv|~l}fI2sMvkqsy;vyn_$(X*K@s$02fO5=#bSl7KT{0DC98v}05d0rcX<_=(ovu?vgS z!$+VzAu-0`y=La2(xvZaSLykeC-poe0Xpi24E7L$p%`xg~YQzePB}>3Q{o~WcxLkmB4v#nNF18|j>C$6x(~;n{he6`O z2o~~>^Fw}@{$S6=KPqi ztcA70l^bG=EKV6X?kG@CvEZgK)#)Z407w#x$+3xV-yjirzzXPCXS9(*$!-vwKI{R@ z{}3E8wK%n;?T{>@5k}`qA5Vs{;^kwWg*va;l8>S6tB)K79qUF|p}Btm{Bc9@V3IaM zPF}tt!%%5@pjI3i&JW_!p*S?Ygj6Fy1?>3{61vi(Uk}v-2#<`MzHhlFykt7VxJ`u^{dDQji;$C*!y$DWnu-8B;hFv(@_Sz zLrjiS&moV(dBID@K=E0gBlnTXSD+C?oI=92n5tS-uy$e_25>4>a?GQyB&)GP6o3d* zB3fYHdkM(sPr9H~RXFva=v%>6F$CH26FkbJKZF>d6(YnS>S9r=nqep_kOa8sfi}yz zWB2Z8qWQxMCv60oq&Vp%mFxE;RLtgkl3MIHGl^L+gJ&T z2|f12^t9F081x2kl3xCcG1Nc@Ysx~V2Q{yxYL`p4NJ&dyL6LM6Vr4CF$|GIxFv`re z2W)G@(;!H+|7f}6kPYJ%;yejOjL7Y8w!ZLmU(_!L&-bV-Bd~1Wu*SIXjJ+)|*U-Q* zeR;``gSay;5n7NCd9K`$=<0D&MjE#*022Mcr|6E>1_rNL2vWB56ZY6TnkO7gX5;jR}^sY%~_kRM6anggjx~8VfQ}!jlLdQ&X0F zH$N6@=)#tR{Ne-A?gz@rMJ7uVUS?Cz{oYfN_Y}!^^S+pM#o#NWp!z9y1Kq_V7 zRS4<&*IE|{vkbQb;hHf*&@HQr{WAFSDjYy@=gysxr~v&l$%wh0JXLN|IIa+35O3scj&}JtI*J6^Km`0#77jnW)?#{0R+#V8la|Gy;$zWzp*q|F_DaOWv8Wnp~b0oqJ<#kq(fXbYR^{& zjubm#(w+#nD!Qv!qKBbkOaaInVsMR+ZKz1oU$oq*KgeAqVlr#70HA?!DWU1HHdR0f zrEAw-FvkH}fyz@Na}@AzFB2mrI+}(e=T(PhLmcaTGl}hMC(&fYBALt#y2*Zq5JZ|w zWH%wW*brpl#Ep*8S48@g9!wW&>H%|*^oH&>`7cd_jDtGnpw}bh0(wCr6A|o=!H#!7 z9|xY!?EjmDclRjdf9%dBNy#3&Qxum&WJWO_9=4^E?taxpsdYnA&pHz3;v6$@9|N*# zjsEl{2WN?_0oH3+`5wmq^|?s0YsnZd{oWBuC=sLUhMzuqWM&ug-jP&xV~c+Zl%=zf%d7M1TGNj4tYu=6C}@3rQ~2}vxlg)wZOay zzDr9>BRVMX-pH~zQkqslgfhBx>F;TPn?j@n+`K|^Ch?cTt;&a4E#jX7#`-%CWrf#) z35N48(Sxp%$5*`?It9EtM$YTjuNSl_Lu5>xx+A>46`*Z#71TfyIsq1Bb;8%9%$OVH z{VN~z2SQV}bLV@;Vm2}~4DPZ4BwHW9yoQcK%P1VH7ixQ+%)j9_fhiCdLu9ZT|IJJ#<5jp!U?=90p%}q) zMVzr&DdUhPp!h)7)*$&9m)ArC-3=o_en?SAZ~mTVJvZfpKUa5PrO5w_zkwXFMvos^ zxzpE1Rc$SJCKvh(6qL6AO?M0V|2f}=VE88XS2~g(c0)QcaAcX=h&P*Tr#v!v1M&ph6p<<&)hSM$y z2PtbP#u7PJNsNtyUDns;DFR^Q2!jCPSBbb324lj8;MJ=h*QHhzT;D+25wLfH1sZYJ zGU>7dTkS+7)=%<)^~-V&ajg!{l~EqrpF%V_T@q3)DYzXdkvI?`Szq!b{Vj6o zFlnH1CxUN^QDu_+o;}-*8{>9q4ucP|RtZruw+@nbXZrZvR%;5VFBYa9=>(;UHqMN@ zd(-tNSKq#U+tVz|l(QgO)qC7WHAbFJZvA^z-)$~rb_fQR2V3cGgek?!{)QxY25C<@ z`5*EthS8YuQ{{uBC(-CLvx@L353=qFzGAYFbGCf1ZQJA@Y6X=7NgC8kg6XPyHi?#Y zL7bt5^@dYm6@-#Lun8{Sj$~X`)mu>sPBSC$2Y4Gl z#!c^L#^M3n_+lD~NXLCgn3>;qbcj`2-8!Kf{UiaT?Q>NrZ)WrX-)X!y3Vg7=*B#9N z*BA3)0egGdpoq*s;>wx7p-9kuzMPt4rk5a=c3NvSF`l9hbrcm52PB3R zRA<}mQ~vVZHIHxJ0IE3wSCifP z@2_?V^ly7+(cbxwFC3NagwDIB=v%M>nV>kH9L|4(PbSOJn-Eox3}<4!3Cc`XCWHDQ znF7(&06nm?Uww7JT}9=aPXATs=>{dz?qD1s4y;)`^r=QiV^gZNW*wbwmH%(xB1LAt zXyvpNx16fulT>_a-03~qx`myVZvVi@u;Smnd$&GCQ%pU(v$dnO zppAH;(UB%b#G{CRion|H%37})MU)czov}IY;s#08Ux(Mh0!7V>Itv{{8&*w zXvO@vN9;KIwm5Q46&x8AK^r=BH@VDrBH8i505CHMxV2;N-kZeBt}_qPCg9sQQ&(H` zV#hJDb0ax((%Pd<%P|TR-9DIQc+iKo8hkbS?MT@?o}>>WNBjU<8MqmUhvwS`?O6et zV1ZhN#H+QqprJ=`hsl;Ekq>yEXw1iKpM@z$854_(izS(a=E8#a_Y+4AuqnnbEf~|k&3Jfqlb0t7 zD74jj=x4-VLgr4v1(7qT!JAiHUT!u9M-0f#Xs8LYrF)5d0|C4q7KzY3QkiZEj(ZNn z+K-8OOlMyd%}BiVa^uh0kMR*Sd338jVk)k;tLu43b&gT6sG|z5l?pCg7-9p#BUBV* zp(-IGLmJ}3r3nere-Rp+TyO%3r`M*=n2i{V$$SBEfslI}$Zb9ZspHzQ`8M9p_yL+K zt$#PKfw)UkWc2IlxvDoe5aB+B$RM+`@gOCQPox!Bj+wPX@LgG1Gyx9$EXs+ocTWXe z%|S{e@n^T4-*ZaPR%GM4b??DIV~AtMmhfc&e7J1|EJA345ywMw^I*)UNf9NGm_M1R z5K%v2p0Od~0_~6c7dF>6e%-3H$T2lB@p6`P<88%0E^=cHJ}9vb*5Jc8LXX-tBxj(?3mj6Ac2Xd+8^B|Zx|1uAz;BSh z?Ap20+pn7QxcP*g6O?7Lm-fZJkr>ruJ8;0|o6Rl+7NWCq=LGkeEUv?|`wY1p_6R9E zb=<#k4m))mIO6QNbL8SFe?}2IfAHo0;6t?BxX7N_j%GBD^fo4`>S0XnmgvI3L6TaK zK1z=t=V!?)BP29G=#W0N<-D%6OqpU3SVA=OWDnpFYCg(yF_A>xfhXbn)D$nM)f4bz zaD#>60Uqgt`cs~w&hm4reX#2`dR-Wbs)>LWfQ%7@s|)-go&*qkL?g$}O=O%3J`Qg3 z$FmC5bv07akK5+lxcV@c!b6_6zyXg1MwS=APWR70e%iX$Vh7Sp4-zjQxpa*@C`mcQ z3gM^>KrV%aVW_AH7OYc9QfVL;w}B<{N2K+eJ=u~xvVXX<^V&hyIxSr5XWQ{@&EdS1 z!OCAKCTge#Xda~?_qt(Ths^sBdwmXM7sjmI&higt(o#}<(9!r2Q`{I(A{Q!7;qshd zVO#ETdJUIEwH)rsnie;$7El;<*=F66!}Uq3jpPB)00cr1?y=1?*~3x#Q4H|@+Myrd z{y%*^XlJIy)WBtOpAcylF^P!Nu?q}6QW8!Xx&~t4qfkEVMoWTTjEtAyqbQ&oLv2sS zFi?NR%wJ*8X0`T|@r#W=7aR40+FgK`VhS`1A!0UT3K3~60hna~bNsLUY;iG9Z-4(0 zTxLgxII!7ija-<6Cc-g>T*$3UkPi1}UPhrN#svUhPd`6Dus6R^iCF;|DE9Yrk1>^V z5f?_K!k-*ubCQGD>Lrpppm?V_NfTEmtxylarf! z=|{_q_=y7p-kfWdKtLC{0s%en_Gt&`Qbg1tvoz$J7$_m5m83g^NHhR)@*~*21_&|v zUyLa4cmHiLhT_8WLm$kuX+)3^#gdGM5(WziBtyIWSEAM+_~Ox^M_Zxl#iCs_!2KUH zw!|8MWJ#_jz%V&wJa?FbTzjI?cYlwD2k=?p+*ec?r0RIM00^B0ykc(VPIJH>vr(ok zk1*Yg8?6YjhOv?>czqw(U1DNmSqKXUk*S({i7JPS-cZ?STy1HEzx|k=M_paaC#5~S z3I#F>KWs_IJY8KOxexp%GWAj14%hcg|G9Q zb*5a{BYF5uMjL<9je>QF>=S}=WGZv5OPbl{y@)GZy+ABL#B^rVlzNU#fnu_qT-QMi z``{?AKxHEPgT#OI#EC0g_HYoIkC{sR3P`6!Xc%oTPz43pfa^l7+d@kKeGI`C5CV{J zl;n~JT$o79e}|HNsCMmN;RM~~6jDJQY?T3TA9q>*lB z-=5!hzWHYUn6)O>d^2Y)kBaa6Joj_Qb?v>ceLWB4WW+Yp?4hAhD4WGEotLLjR=QIt zE55H^i=XgRwRGV(LF)@wtQE}ktnIE_>QbbyTbmo3SsNSN*l(+AX=Pw$%EiWUlI`S) z{Wq*UvpNYMxb3Pp}a{QMb3`@o@A zJ9Xvm&gEZxw_Dt4{wk3;-;yzQJp9=ME(@Jf&g2(mDYv|vXSf6X{QZ@~rBjo<45GaK zxmcyudL%5m)=SD+bm(a2i!NBW<*cD^bGO&5Eb4R>;%~^Tu!*-Cp6n6qwB;z=wSqz^ z;C#5#b{z&Im$=>?zx{EJvYJ9k+_iE)h2s8s3k4rJai6lDLb=AV`ZWIi(E-Xz3gybC z6;XwK{3TQ z=QpsbrbH%YTh{ESeCRtY?H?*1CJ|-TTXC<|`|LA+|LFI3)*a{PzY-iAY*-ul>?Nz3 zZCz=lKab?(K!cBmhewI`@rZrGjz;g^a$%A_%8g07b+K2uShez6 z8UyaAFU*hR_t!=}cXn~<9vX^s8p&00ni|ZE)~%_jAzxF9RutzAkoIO#s{Zoqp!c(9 z&x{sDmuAjQw^(^CEG%?&cZW5l8V$syw^{b|@Lx%}`RqO|qrcfuZ_muH&i=X>A2OD0 zha@5$#(U<-gBmt!xh*PHipZ5$Jp7~z1cKW=|pC(#k+{w^uL&!=zBZX zU0SM_d`w74T_Iem*d|D&M$eB^ccSaLY`?dPrbVINS?VV9X9hLlyT$cJ+H$9o!leWJ z@k`U9F(rjtAzod83-h@!@O^VUCcCh_ynNHHlLa}`ZBBY)(|M{RIfQQl-|yZrRjMlwvS^ZXZ(pDzr~v25r%+1YRS*jIz&V!bG<|1_#)4Q#q|>wWrbYq)V^ zQqM~@Qw|SW#-xVQFJDgDwODwNC&0nr8OfWE&%~5JW*%=cO6ZP~*7j^nGYNR6qa1ss zgrbp^LQUu;l-Bq z(ctCbshgRb^N)-?`rO-FmwkDv*$g+RS2JrYU0N8IwVD~d?$KQtbV?r^;5sIKBsA`r zedd~iz2&|f+Mdkg0}1&}r9V15AIHSRJb3gddoU?~X)flOj;2HRPLDC1vAy*4^vMP_ zhn*T9Y(FA(`m}rI^3uGto?f^W-w#e2L5l0I&-53meq8!batFV@K3CY#&>%GS<)DhX z$gyL^fdW>AyR2r(1o!CCxIdz2=N%p%?&bjFSHx8Xn$M%4^zk6R|>X zZgN1MJwVtg4V!B2=RuF|Q?`RQg@lC45E>FP%Z*cw8hACbZF7fB)~p!4|8y}d-DW^} z{L4YFU0PaN3JIFR^9!<~i?y{0TJ84s_P*6&k^vq}uHTrMnY(WG_J+9enlz{JeRvWw1UjAPNipWX#uhmjXiA z_;kBl0HR|6PQUN>@7KmFPL1rsTIM(;8?@zQ{u&$O+{vPNl1sm$tg7&xc2U_z_MB^E zySKEqN_Urdm;bDKYvnAE_p5L(Iejy;v%Bf&=oIo@T|C%*jHyz_#<6~UX2DTPF)zv1 z;W4V`Zg-j1c#`$&*RLLO1b$4>G4OxQ$jb8Henf`hhfXLLRs7->idd8Q*TFCTw}kFRlFXKJwVu#iv-nVe>`{8r<(oW@<+W!QIQ zY>&(JxTFJkZR{WG%+L0QNLyQ{{F<5~hyE}NOG)h2A*=ffvzqxx%Df$JX(&NSqi?<&waiqAZW%OFk*DpR{ zFfh&R{zE&tQR>kjtYz^U*$n-`A}&pzii&#Iug}aJN^34NNpF4mHpgb5KHRdq#7Dz+ zVdmG=^xQqy`60f8#S6Wn%kO-o{Ww2g;%rVc;VKMVju>^kb4^v%f487@WR!f^!*`9w zg_V_++@>wxPH1G+?$RE7`;1;RiSd+e*{4sRcA1%(b#``YXW0zs@fv@7dXN$x7UnlI zV{i4n;MVb}zSkc6I9IG#A&?fQlAuX8OW-NH;pp@c)sHb84b#EJCR!RZs*4ExQUSas zQn;VggKdX?KMbxoIG!wO#O|u&@qTu^H^6qN$?w&x{hhI)PvlrIv0Qt(qEr zSjzX6h|Ao~&kuJ#eE6{XS7*^sDVtiF)aA>Un-GdL?K{>yW)jsb58!LKy=Egr|6pUX zSZlUj12#%rMbIgrfvbiM@j;#(GL83f5Tjie=Q1lw%gPk71Ut8FdxPB`4Ls1_nw=gl z8xqfJ(iDmCxQ9#6Q^K1i%(OMjfMh4#%0Pj)$WHyql_Co1rmYi*R#6t6g%2M+!YNo} zsOK`MW?pPxUJSuh#b17VvADcknofA)=^t$BzHenQiYk0Fh74%%+dDzK;Xpy#!N`MR zPxxy$($T5lit!nXdwGrJQVr|6hK7dZ+7hpy6R$3Oyq7)G*w8SVxwxi=t4K&zR@UTO z;+d;guli`X$;(r7a&nOMZ9eB|mLR{^<-56k{`BeQ&#$i^dU-Xp+O@|OKR-h7KsCAf ztySv`TeEB&e>^zC@NyArv2*9nuoo|OY~Iaz{_VxbWNPc)T-dlcH;^#psFr4Yd7wVd z=I7S~$p4CDMxP!y$8FY@b9~ASna*F-EpIq)-c;K6z>D z*)tcyf;$I$jTYx7r;@r$eM*~~)eyiFqE!;&5hP0R*Gi#rPfVs=qpM~KA~-=uJZ5d= z!cR0E`wl5Z%Ds2ZYgLdH4$B_SlB7=bMT9glQFT14a;Mv35Ns8_gr|IQq@&!HX2p;( z1?tBUrpVZUAXElx?r+|!i0HQSc+ZSYEtVok!0I9nQ&~-#X54^7rSn{0L{g)%VRh&O z7cJq*S_NuooLYLc`18X}DF)9GX+l*r9WFRc4=W|>l~0ti=U<|}dGlssVZ2h3x-=fL z{H=LC9i5N$(rps-qP6l}{kaXOz+e;oF$w*j>9ulhv}59S?AsUbw!AnUou>Qa(*tZ6 zUrpE9ZuMTR;ql_qQpt6+406~5x$#JYh|^ZJ&zGhJ^I!5NUpRmMClFr~PPLK=J=@#F z?MIjRR@(pSc!He1TScXTp;roN|1&^TV<{IWr__}zz8f}g<|%r@Xcg(y;U?bbA`tN3bK2)}ZRmy>pq&h%dwD8IDM0Kng%7 zR<*hQTfeHN8g^gt;wUt3&8oY^sSqKP+m+-&$CMVb*Y@?`;(@-TUf-dn)Ka7a^@fhE z;)Qz20z%UxxzoYVbXKlf#duL1bH|{01g9k2urB(rprByU0NaTZWi2)h8dFL0!`YSi zD!*s6X>(dRQj(^{>d}@=D}jrTriNRMjCligi#TWGo^V=y5;>=16hP^@Cv&oH=}QJ1 zcIWc$p3#nv7pWf|lca-%8WG9U&GNg(v|J{=k^L7Z6g;#2L`*Rm_tn_uc zGGj>l_~p^dAB28=+AdH+&!&Ep+3)isdaZYlk54Yj2mT7qtUd6ZJX1z?b^wlPb15wY z|24!eUF^6)U7u5{1Do}ya1y+=b-2^F77SLlv|Q|Cf9dOclYFSnX+&7tv)E?!NiMD$ zg354^1y2M71{#a%j{-ID6)u>C&i@z>)^h%J;b3u#%XDi)i(VQcX_MHLh0CrLIk$us zCu(SG0REJem0t?l^oMqJ>C7KIc~VX(M!61@<518tog;#1e@%oJ3HwbMqYpDSE|-!h z2smwnb(gGG(z37<5cAsS&2bUTC{HKoNQiUwQhGwd?^91m3--a(7@}M$&{{`yiGWp4 zB+eU)Mpnwlyqk5=-T={)$Zb7YLD&6R%r8hDQ%j2_8rkgtoTk;EJ8L! z8H9-pk>&VtNk2b7RZxZD>=6+XtlBi~?K9rIeVg!26c~kxwWO@9me9{69dRW9#D?As z1QXhWTd^%Hex_S5@ro7t9@kv-&s`p$V@Nk@ka_+3H3_#p6+tl|XKKm%mGzSBxy*cg zd>*>8L4sj`cHhKunC!o=$epZLbL@|b;5Mp1fnzj~K~y?&#FqkBRpQl zHN~l-q9Tk0F3=COf4R^%CX1(RGDkn&gR7m39vQS2K-C5?4?sddAQH5Qptx+qpP#??U7*nvxIi$xy(->gAE|Z*+km0 zn&_1-xn|B(tk1ArU9k5O;@QUu05l!X%XQI8O5lD1AQ zi4>;#47sTT*)6m->OYZ(6fg?zYXuaH?<&wtv_ixaLF=FU#aXT<={(WJcCO2`(g*aH z)^eQf3T5u=Fn6`Z7EoA$dN9>;MO z=BG#UZ=Ax7>K3Ql+3|c1PEIlEnU;=&?~0fOM!4p|f$AedT%-BgowzM%?$ik< zxYVYmOT$d3@5J;fe`73IR$n;dyRhK;ne_4RRTJGX54o|u!LpC6jD<{Q}iP+P7V8SqOs zjc7X21v#_4*>F%R$HuCVg&jL~SZmC4u?H>&7tc1a0jovb5_+?qF5wr%&e(F*AQ#eqd>5*MJBd*`Vnp4FskLHjkYh&ZdzS z35FXD(v;gu#sb(6%v#k~6JZ0y+f-RqzLb+!&l|R!JB)xa@M0*P6JkXy?#)?9Zqu>( zxtg%}9I)xo!5j2o?7k%UT>p5#4@o-Jr?*?~YZw4h6uv-9Z^kbPrfCDIL()_$Eg^4C zV&A@fBz}Lq9tN@~kSm)RrIHY=9IqY)K<%;dOp@$ep5n=@EB9!24l-ro`5Pb-)PZX- zOs=J6h{Sgc0Ob-pbw?4E0BB~d-wi*Ll7(^zZV}xL&$NJ z$#tAeahx>N)zua7JWaHmv9YnNL47Sv{(0f&%}XpQ@qu6;maTjMKq~KUd>%a5@6*(d zyjqRC#cemNe&ND}#?qk0S^uX`Um+BnD%yHfJgYa@31Pg`{QYa@HLF*DTjnT69>IFn zLUClcvyH&S5Qj#-){3F=4#VcMwxz+1x=-yGR_5Ij9xYgf(^;2z{iCI)GMKSSbbW%B z*7fVx{rN3!JmE8(vTS_2pFW+-;>Y=jDFLw62KJ%>M5H4?<}#8mPZV>E02EJYT{gF| z@rHPZ06R23J=AQcVb||d;db)~Gqd`;wmWnpk!594x!@a9Nwu|#*#FYd@+|p1@f_x# z$L&MMRmOF7bRx~#^Ju%xa(>-MrjJ+#w|DHgM<0LPXiV(<`Ma2%Sg^xBNE8A+Oo(^Y zv%NT8H| z6d>fsNftHeKH??6u2#ouoWg+l7yQpb0b5LLyH{OPlL{uFE;hwB_5BWAKN7M3DZBXG z69NKPt$NBXLkeVAde)rll)m`FC+CaTG|>qx2af{}q?)#>k|Y0-U6nz|UM|FKDRVey zTxMSMFD!nhi(W)nSYzeeY$}c~(!B;qgHPNvo`KLoTCc%z!J@}|?LLQ0Fz}fMZri>c zjCHxR{uDA+q37^X0uZ>Y*-@NPOX>8z{7snK8U!Pk?A~vwFik#fjG_&@2>;OXqMxZ}s1Y=OUtX_d#Y zxwQ*7fhe&T(K`?!;Uk?WzjJ}tK4Dc*(TF`fh6I0=hlpz7x^LB-T*#fwHayCNN=%xw6r*_ z6{nsl-`3VP2fg)>_{aO3YkquwR2M3~U3h*lx#Y{2uS7Bd_tN;~kOe})<2++dzD*KP znsMVB2sDC$#%^)0i<2sZYoEKnDf7p@{iJ#zGV^^^s#&|{stgiE{UyZ3tBRQ1VuhWi2+E*+>#;oTwj4oH6mr2k9NEF4GCwXcEHkag z#bmRQBn02mwI5NKYmZGC{LA z^LQ^`{Ui3gNU~nIGq$&BeD53G_O(5RnpP-OyfV#Sv?Wi6X;MHLW)kbo!o{V4S+R<2 zPSTYWw_L9T?w!7<%+vVVx$Da_YK507IGvLGQm#G;uFkWTMEiLE{yojcjS5(1Zp*Gq z^Rj_tGA*sFYEZq2K>T>jc&a|n8NsxxzdxEoyYMFv8c`0we<5|!lDY}x2gjw^-tHei z-awg{h?dp(>(Qec&)r-pb|Y=2n(GP9V$f~8o`S4Fn=Ujrm|Qu597O^+P)RKcEj&(B z#=^5*&jp^yaho(LLS-j;kxHfh#>fals)^TbeY`Z1nsO{CKjC z2A10=_|t8)oYmH8bemlB6j&~0!k#;M>((uZ0DjG;*{ls}S1|?LVj+K=xN>a|ukmk^ zi$qn13W%v*WpI#o#2q1cCU!TDqK2u|W zC7(_n$Ec<5snVS)PJ4ZgfpPiBz9Z5!R*f5FE4wEFl6#-e59pQoa)e)eyk}}}cDq%j zupahcX8e))!g6rBa3IET@bn(Uq_WHG^FHTM_h4@xL5}r@Mzse81aePODA9Bp;_;Z4 zy?F7y!*FJ=6wm}IQGFb@==!p?Ce=t~{_!gi4*!A2uM)a>Pol&D`cv~(jE+1X5hw^S z?Nm96Nmb35u|3jQsbT81aoWW-S05qN6k>vBM1+1k-|Z()p8S3SO-;>k6cY77)&!bn zkVmA#B)kXH&y)<8VjJs_14f1h;!^(V%$+g_U6vEmj%KT@-nE#n(k`3T5`>=133|i} zEY$-&l?SM#d@{TYXO;(Xk`rtH;>%u<^yNf83MJ!RSZL@`X68>F z)9G>d@x3Ivc}FLw?I`CTy%Fm?_mYRsc@@g|yZ(2U@iTrK2~JnN1geA16OoS0c$Fv^ zeM7g2gCPFg*|WE!8`d{uChG^brFlg7*cy8sS>3aWcn!WJ<10a@oG$7P4=4Q4JsVhW zI`?c*FzH$jbf69Hv+lpIp!SRNK++oJV}qvOSuD2Vn*SeI6o}ozcP|?yZ)t8I3zZ^8 zRCZ_Q=LhoUhif1kG4w-?k%Ep&>jj?M^jZd!2&4n)kR6{gLU{-I**r4Yu#Tk;pcf_p zcmb*=`fA3V#^KkXY28duahvH__qnjJACb8}Nw@SxaBw`r&;UL}J4uKmAlbY&iVsr` z(4Gi@sjjY0u^m!HQS}_$4-GL1d4>teb|ac3laq1^fNfobEE7pApgQ8WOpa41r>~nI zAEZ?`MwX|oA+8IsLBQ|?FfgY~A0Hp+uU017ebr&4HuI8QE8g9mLcka(=vTl@9_ycS znc3M!AX3PhHNfMC#5+1VRFm}{w>ghXUl0@PZC?xP$&RGGrmIJ99FYlp$~-$eEARs4 z7X>J=N(eSP>FFbgn$=5iJ-E$` zzYr$sp+C9qSt!Fqj6|f41;uYJ&9?4)^YyD7V2Tkmkv%BaBkjG0AwU8-l*;fSgn8at zUcOp)AT%`eCkjks6BA`sAq`q?8U!!&^O6y#>=mRGV)`pZmumr77)qQb`*oMIWr750 zXlUd?K~rI$AW~HO+;%(x%216F3i9$hwr!)D4d9r5q2n7o@Vzb9$>{y`*hr}VqP(#0bxn$Cqbm4co|7x1CUruf=iWJgLLD1m%QDRXdsE%GL_;}r+7YoT&Ex65{~CmM}S9BmduIu)ZkU|>fzRG9)#aGt$fY-si7Lk zGj9P82rxkj)SH=*1(bpn8{#!mQH^K4nslB$ez_R#EDH_BP5NPVx7ePgtX zo)BO=WCBIs5K{=QsHCG4y3c8l1A~!wTgu)ol^w1RHKhAPMz=AUiPo;#O%v+7N0y#YK$sJNO-FXEF&`%N>pp2qxiv6G>Gs89_m;M{ zYTQ{zSC9QWiSIWx5URr{>Z%TdN?vpxBHS0~ha_UAr>Bqe?W4HwZ6OL92<)0dsTZt? z4{MsFrROBYx#n)7uu3MYrpbF|>7{AG)`CZ5WYjKbg5s+AuDK8hFrUYrfFVkg%}T#1S4IrKqT=slFF4UJNwjh`FCNKj-yN zScR8^Ci^(GLhBVku(sRXyLWfk`rsVKH*Vfbffx`+v{B42i&kDvt`G`P1_lO#t_vCG z7BO)wCr^IW?EMjQJ2@gjv8cKER6~`hILh~=QZ(qbI6tk`@H>v*$A?&TUon31@2NeCY3<;)0Mj;hAQT<9R9PBD%zkXeY4gedFC~{sgsd5WX2mX2R;O`0< zm1x<72^%%U?>S`~i&>q3DtDZhR~c}CIx$frI{-6Y6|nZir|q&o;U#Q9s!BEQ_;9w_ z7E^iK{NrPaj34I(>=8MjTqv|UZq9H*O$id=mK5`C2EU;YahYb*rdkw4hsHHDG*VI9 z$jr)O!DEt=IWlTEB;4i!*p3Xq;Z>1AOmiodi3Nknb>=lnSR4O70!^Dya^^`tGy$a- zbs!#xu`bDaRGDEhc*NE$g8`&KY&9A_Nan>BLqihX@3!?nw->cAYK1w>4;99=*mko8 zQ7aO$f+P%x%nx$Gj!@wzjRa939=M0HJkv>67pJCzv!-zE+N)s4{$s>hQK7zu?AYfD ztFA#5;D&1imWk6u{(u~2(;H+L4UxhBBhSM+(L?SP(c0RStC*z z3~!P|ZMk&mFR~;k0xeu&B^N%Mx4HmnUxUapw{PF(h7?1zF=DL%D75}wu%Z>p#Oym& zd{})ApFS@yK0){s6mU6ks0jqJNSM`Fln0$FHX&aEKPtVuaX~-+4}7Bmk4!Q$@sLc+ zbb1|!6xkq%xIOpttyf^??~AUASX+P#XuNxpot=H-#*Ke|9K4Dj%)H!>>xkGaOm;*E z(~l<(Y=^E|$_(Zv28>*wWN~qk2S%WO|0iEijl{%6hHmg-96R%#Xng0Xn9OE(+_)*n z!RpBv9w17}kF!F3C;n;dOVo-{_&uwj?I*x>NOT=Q-rrK{hmGu!;OqZeJGUyFFdv)8_{$NZUT$K+>b}>+yFWzO)26ys3Zyk8U$tT!QIr?;dzY_ zE)`Jo8G8$NH%0vjegqL&8l}$T%CYdLco0$kwk10l*QlE^!55%eZeBnB+Z)u@Gg4D*$}L{kZ@SWoo2d3*}WRN1?fZRaZrMP5IiY+Hx#wUnO&12Gs(yPq`qQZcq`gmgep zSq~W+U7#cFD`qIhH-WGmVXLqn>k=2QMoO~ouRW%p@O#B@jTyKDVgPTm;1Au2n1&oB zNhN!8#j3UHHm8Vj1iI)exD7KiGHxy{%+iiyn_J*7{6Z+Bb;|X^ROmQSC5EyPE0V+H z&#HrB>sw(-gc;^fROIj7y?YaU#i7|85BujQEb2XaO*yEbqz>!g=-5;W%Z_W@m3Kd) zn~BAY#36VxW~nx~{98hII`fwo6Fx48F}Wy`>LLyRDb+4w;}SQti>rjhLlRX1{RxC6 zVm{or(Ri-qJ!!iL{kG^AaF0<*s0T~v#@x$k;v_6$;#68?ARN}EnKYNy!?TBgS!Sb& z3iBWAnz8M!^U|C5a6e_vMMfvq0BB&0dq9oLG7&}z_G_?R5^b8=YDj7EN# zF#dK12$U?(_A&tymH5R}qdL+xGLnE15BTW^S3&t190##Gf+=&Fc^;}9r%J4zbMU7Q z+CZgY_+W_aO!x~RQ+HOyf6adOU}NE{MkqZ^8KB}x^bW|l7X6hU0njgoIFCIbMKB^$ zqU0urM;z+lI(AGP=Zv-##jxVaN?CDn@hL&1aaxC!sLI}lP?@%@5h24!A|#GzJt+Y}b&ZJYy@6xU z5C5l&;GskJwt)RVWWcB)avDKVNB(=sYt|MEr6>w!5wd$2*=Q`%5QWLL5kvCHWk>}W zr;gSJlCm{qu6c($kO=?AkAr=ZL25UX8+DQ!$F6V0hNpR=uR^1v)H~a zAqDJU#-L?IX1kKcvuy@!m4*T_)ozQEJ}$%w(*$oRG3@vDMj!`9VWCLMC2Z>E*ZuHB zT&Sw5qK1x+nv+$5T3!p?(Hndo>@Wt=i-wl=B{MNwfPE?eF>u?DUR#7BOH5>-(d9y> z!bqxBuIUCWl+q;ILOjnXmSpwit1cOwEdjh>-FL*xb&oTVLaB^+S~I{^KNt z@;$t_mg3tyq=2XvrXTEZ5uiG!-xiB^Si9^{FG^Hh4^7}9?n8jiHx5DqGeq%PrIj7$ zJm6N1+s2t2(0=QP=h%}LJL;8rmlNehh1M=h2qCwxkQg6d5ar>XKijj{!$8{;nR60` z=16GA{{;3GqX>UizP1(?m!X8#!q*6h(&iU~%bnhbz^RA2X0iaT)OBa2z&iA~Q21yg zo=`MrPGzcaA|>j_li;pWjC_Y#Zc4m<2P>@vv#WSDDn;E8^HI=k9w5=oDixp1Sc{0x zC}>S|J(AhxNBZ`ivXvr5D8%PlI5Yo=zE%{}gA<@0wC-DCj)J_oN5GOcZ8{fNX6 z1*~UAI~clQc_VhnpiCAr%x4O#zC&~v)|VX}=Vo_iWd1%daN`I5bG=vC4#b&|3tM*+s(s9)*v$eDG?xkn z<38||o$t1cl$0X;3DL@N(J*0s+4Y<$28r?XK7Jm`J^{<~WLF^X)uP6D=0frL_xGyLbnM?@1f(Oi&K!zkL}-Iu)CbV&If^(w68b{ug_(V7 zBd2m(VSkTEf3RS8ZfyZk^hpvYf+W&EQNW-ng}CH#Ttt?u0^@$wS>zRiFyW7;9c*dC z1X2Vc9ycN#DaBslAPflSRUXyiAsdouzJ0rbG;T)h4#dHU#2&eyZzsjw*$1e!pXYz2ghY#PX$NEEaJ@2%ylGT(T5p?J`z9_23Bu)YNBz_em*!7{1i?-$H{)BSIrwK zr(I#LtB206*fYGuqIvjJlu1bIc(zRJQdyMApUbUJS0v&_#M2W$?#Tg{#2eU$bqV~Z zh9WhcM-nG4Zsg}!Od_jh&K2T2*u#BuzqlhjnRPhRD5J`t!if&LaHz!-zlxZM41ohr zoav;@yK+CGy<(2kU&gnT0-N-p=F6DSt$F)JV|5ag{+Y1%dmth5&Z@Sui5 zPWBkX|K@W-Lzy9spDMGnvU-lH@VOvD5lnO{k0azgv55!|XF;2hND!538Kj1dE;stH zW&O45j*wEj{}vDUr-cAz-EYfvt-J<;#@q*enznl#-M*B{jmX9T?F>EoII>7Xv^JJT zogZw}PoRnq_M9j>HPV~24i}x+kxAKw+B>9K;Ls16FR9cwaO+(_1@^bnO7t1jn9>_& z5rw?r5JQ=-abN)uP(oHVy@BYjFtrB{bZCjAC=7pstvw!i2M^gy@Zu102}>X$=+;q$ z2`6zBsBN;ZMhu+;wM1^kwul6@1tLgmKMudLIw;CzFw{vPp?;JS|or_+Mz--BC>8Clwe%!AQwC#BI1m05zj%aA&wqLy6}TQkh`NGXyu#QnV0B0{idb zH-7~rP2;FQPGcZK@csnEr7$Gz=7`porSxM+^mPy>dGsq7;M<9WZ-K-=a|Y?C_zbn3E3x~T>UkI*;#(M1R; zblfDD2;-<+zcd>{^xARv&)pRE9!t z4I%=CDq^aphJvvY9@*cN8bhpG2>iJVW2F%E4}D)jp^>(b$t@4Yr;?xIg z+sYBacXM13sUB|wEj@9{Ox}hBAagvy^C3d(_YhpAQ%I<2L`xFC!RLD*$g){?}le^e|Y3=2bMSFfMZi zqSH_A=@7J=lDclUCZmJA?0_%qzqKI@HwxzueCn?ZtluZM3#rCEK=r>_;a7>~|G|oI z4);9k&7{&Vp&qwUofh|!yO|+Rf0SYMX-a`oae`BScaeA2HkE;uK4jL^FS~lx3d~Dr zJczNmRf^Xu6ddYm$TXn7@b_m4C|A~LDo=POc(Kp@!}VDTzr&agp=5|C)o2llPH%Tr z+q{?e#GvVl42jvD)x%GSd$KlwT=9kQwJDy7^R~bw%cLqBal)tZDF^UqY9F9FV zI3Nit=(ttZ7P2jtXUQ#EwNa$e*gU={tZueRA8 zVizeUfxisu!kejpvOIB*sr!gaODo~9xy-=}M-7ExI%3*vd1>+CO>?z8=iS-OLKBS< zAxA-L`b_9?Hm_c-Sf*Ac*wXD2iY&^qRZ#60h)8G6yu>;C)pRLs$fbFe<>ay6THYGk z!P-8P<3VkNQo{56IB)TjKRK zjnV)nvQS_X!0700`DpIxic!Y@1V#jVOP1Bw)$IdzB)t@{X9s4*<3Wj}i6m_+W6BA1B*E2aGy46E$JpORtdkA8q-AM5 z9+_r5<`I<{#U+tzG?e+wYl$Hn*Z%$6Mb{yHps zs~t}v)fAK$CLMIAlA04bM@i=^9_{sEnZQWkzUBm)wV;T*uL@F7CjUqpOGy2bpnA|0 zRiyAdbw;N+5cB(+c2mvLx4w56?7jWom2KBQzb)uC#t;A(TawgEDm+(q;-vg{?-aRq zz)#2_iA6c~C}dxg^A4aD%br+AA7DEHe7kN(&xC;KSRsIh^`dGr?4t~cmF zih+QFq*%8zWN)BdTtc5Q&?Oa#4`DoSVd%T`57p^$D0oDnhJOGY7lh<-rB{r3+`I#H z&}hxvEF@gg2@D@?e@o`V%;R4HMP8yyk!Tk>iWhspl>?fzwA1Hms-ZWON%ny9aJUw4 z!b3LORvGZ}%&h>ZlBDgORB;;NK$pbD?mbygDa9G1~=n>@*jLSfFj33go zo5E8oUm(ox7;mFx2a6ke;2VvHc>qkZEi*GSzQhsi?xdNbKHyrB20mp~%9`$r zHVI#Fxb$m+YIijTTxF!CdB93f0$XvR`HBN|P#&B#&b@r5C%y;Mvo>UfpxMR%i{u9u z*O+aWfcByX8)#@a0oqu}C(zB#Nu*3ac)*|OK*q3ZoWpxZI8b5_2RG0If$Sl#(SSK$ z4{FYunvQ@?D-ySG8-M%ysj#pqf{Tkw+T1+R0o2MWt{rw?bZ0qvB!TMqMFcytXw5rt zWz@U4yz}(jL|$mYrCsQ`(EmgF0Qp`v zud?hFGU^u@;6znTx!EBHYA;%oVbSS4)LY(Vxbi!gi4<5QL&-kZnd{pb8H2opvmGqf zXSj!jg&E)&68fAQ3w@mY0YJiMfD=g1Dw16s601+F*Z5dc0=q4m)50PmN-Hbb^RupY zb=!#2ftCRHqN7OcjCJyt(o)x@o&d8QyLU%H4}i5f60j1r@fX0h8>5>q$Y@TDEoY8p*wrSf~b*H%~Od`{Dx15&{ktQMLs!LkHXW$*weNNr}lEE?w0 zUE4O1vG7961zGEz`TBmjOII}EYVt)Umx*U!f>$WQIRf|*xjZTqx%*ruE(0H5BC2w* z%hXjofe~77*HjJtd4zpF6G}9Z2gv(bv^{~|iK;Uox;!g;#=4P{ZBoM*R25x40D1AC-7w6YYhr0gaBCw^Qg<{`*kd+b6>aX4S$JtDK|Ga(jozV z_mzlxKAMi=(BxSM<69LWQH4Ps?}L}24kv=xs0>jl-otU@{B^s{8O#?c8?S&95($-X zjTcPlBY--e$+mshE_>-o3r)=_n>1)N1`|K4RP&rO`|&c1kk%7p@iw9$nrft02lLXP zE^G!=;*}rz_U;@?2o>!z^k*C#gxCGuW(E6Cst>Fc$5FmOB7*i^*&srH!J)A-A!qDi zmhDh98cgM>il{*le?Mxm)##TDz43XMk;Q#U7kU^ex#oP<<*;n@1*#{8?;D?KoUWn; zi~!>=U%sgOJn;0i#zum8ldaa<>jBFcA3W4$M`N1w- z4^wTaC7b#iGi=sLAM$8EKLj8~9tiM*CxyI`r4RKi5^}Jg3U_Ja@eDQ5uj{lJ;yPE1 z!i^v1le{Q`3$KweU1jBsm;=qYiL?wOr&Ti_KHS7~L^k+Dtn|@sm}f1|825yV)Zt#> zesW}M;3rFlD<>J%v(AwbGc?X$y%HeDjJULqQ|B-8%8c0&w`C&~EVa=LW(c*+7`;S_ zY56-TY#mQ*ktoF|svob3 z>aFQ{y^b53I%@!Jl|Kl$|IZ*?Q$eErb5#nxrP;~y1#eM;mj&?(FC7S>$u^>xpCcwr zihD9qE3vsr-3A#c6vydz7Z*Iqd9m!QtkNi1&Q|kMy4GE!tY}drr5$)NjbJw?mIYL> z(M)v?J^g)9Hs3WkpeLA^j*x;O{i$vI<3wWmFO+nmaG)VhMPGUMrqGLNB=HF}YD2s^ zh@4B92XRGq@oLm|2oXkA7MuD!mMMqy`I_&gqo_Qftp6S^4+E+9iL3HxfKo9uG<-6P z(+g!X&ULQuh|5%?KCz2l^xDUY79;U$(kh2EVl&)wl~`*)Hc8hLNw~B_o=_yy+ZfO(GTvrF%2Fn6Iakr8eh;rAc#BFI{U^Ou1w0nmWgmuDQ}}Dp;Sd%q>_lD= zLd;LFyGNsv6GQYSl(8^?7#t9Q1Jq7=Y?5sPwOQz`M1-`hxUh`fOw5Xw?JUh;t? zsh=>8cUhHy!jd-+?3iRmpjYlI2(@;w$SHtCk(a}+c^hdMUbc$%Qop-pMNnV@<2t(ix zf9?q7yD`JcwdM)}c!Lg-^J`d6qyqTN>M{332twzJGRi3lWTN4HBYPF0vIhT3Y;FcX z64X!_H;sTvksI#X4!1<1@%|?gR_2c{9Z)n c=d9ZwuX-fjrw#7Fr77YUWX{K*y>|P*08uK;KL7v# literal 0 HcmV?d00001 From 70a4c53234b9ca6ace49be85630fc6bdabde7114 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Nikos Livathinos Date: Tue, 25 Feb 2025 16:23:13 +0100 Subject: [PATCH 04/11] fix: Change the initialization of the create_smol_docling_converter() to allow flash-attn Signed-off-by: Nikos Livathinos --- docling_eval/converters/conversion.py | 12 +++++------- 1 file changed, 5 insertions(+), 7 deletions(-) diff --git a/docling_eval/converters/conversion.py b/docling_eval/converters/conversion.py index 3629464b..f82fb381 100644 --- a/docling_eval/converters/conversion.py +++ b/docling_eval/converters/conversion.py @@ -11,11 +11,11 @@ OcrOptions, PdfPipelineOptions, RapidOcrOptions, - SmolDoclingOptions, TableFormerMode, TesseractCliOcrOptions, TesseractOcrOptions, VlmPipelineOptions, + smoldocling_vlm_conversion_options, ) from docling.datamodel.settings import settings from docling.document_converter import DocumentConverter, PdfFormatOption @@ -134,12 +134,10 @@ def create_image_docling_converter( def create_smol_docling_converter( timings: bool = True, ): - vlm_options = SmolDoclingOptions() - pipeline_options = VlmPipelineOptions( - generate_page_images=True, - force_backend_text=False, - vlm_options=vlm_options, - ) + pipeline_options = VlmPipelineOptions() + pipeline_options.generate_page_images = True + pipeline_options.accelerator_options.cuda_use_flash_attention2 = True + pipeline_options.vlm_options = smoldocling_vlm_conversion_options converter = DocumentConverter( format_options={ From b5e4e18ab1ade3be7bdb7aeb2d9f010ddb601c59 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Nikos Livathinos Date: Tue, 25 Feb 2025 17:21:01 +0100 Subject: [PATCH 05/11] docs: List benchmarks in the main readme with short description. Fix broken links in the documentation. Signed-off-by: Nikos Livathinos --- README.md | 34 +++++---------------------- docling_eval/converters/conversion.py | 1 + docs/DP-Bench_benchmarks.md | 4 ++++ docs/DocLayNetv1_benchmarks.md | 2 +- docs/FinTabNet_benchmarks.md | 12 +++++----- docs/OmniDocBench_benchmarks.md | 4 +++- docs/P1M_benchmarks.md | 12 +++++----- docs/PubTabNet_benchmarks.md | 12 +++++----- 8 files changed, 33 insertions(+), 48 deletions(-) diff --git a/README.md b/README.md index 2124caa3..da9a8311 100644 --- a/README.md +++ b/README.md @@ -44,34 +44,12 @@ docling-eval % poetry run evaluate --help ## Benchmarks -### DP-Bench - -[DP-Bench benchmarks](docs/DP-Bench_benchmarks.md) - - -### OmniDocBench - -[OmniDocBench benchmarks](docs/OmniDocBench_benchmarks.md) - - -### DocLayNet v1 - -[DocLayNetV1 Benchmarks](docs/DocLayNetv1_benchmarks.md) - - -### FinTabNet - -[FinTabnet Benchmarks](docs/FinTabNet_benchmarks.md) - - -### PubTabNet - -[PubTabNet benchmarks](docs/PubTabNet_benchmarks.md) - - -### Pub1M - -[Pub1M benchmarks](docs/Pub1M_benchmarks.md) +- [DP-Bench benchmarks](docs/DP-Bench_benchmarks.md): Text, layout, reading order and table structure evaluation on the DP-Bench dataset. +- [OmniDocBench benchmarks](docs/OmniDocBench_benchmarks.md): Text, layout, reading order and table structure evaluation on the OmniDocBench dataset. +- [DocLayNetV1 Benchmarks](docs/DocLayNetv1_benchmarks.md): Text and layout evaluation on the DocLayNet v1.2 dataset. +- [FinTabnet Benchmarks](docs/FinTabNet_benchmarks.md): Table structure evaluation on the FinTabNet dataset. +- [PubTabNet benchmarks](docs/PubTabNet_benchmarks.md): Table structure evaluation on the PubTabNet dataset. +- [Pub1M benchmarks](docs/Pub1M_benchmarks.md): Table structure evaluation on the Pub1M dataset. ## Contributing diff --git a/docling_eval/converters/conversion.py b/docling_eval/converters/conversion.py index f82fb381..70387900 100644 --- a/docling_eval/converters/conversion.py +++ b/docling_eval/converters/conversion.py @@ -136,6 +136,7 @@ def create_smol_docling_converter( ): pipeline_options = VlmPipelineOptions() pipeline_options.generate_page_images = True + pipeline_options.accelerator_options.device = "cuda:0" pipeline_options.accelerator_options.cuda_use_flash_attention2 = True pipeline_options.vlm_options = smoldocling_vlm_conversion_options diff --git a/docs/DP-Bench_benchmarks.md b/docs/DP-Bench_benchmarks.md index c24a29d4..3eafeee5 100644 --- a/docs/DP-Bench_benchmarks.md +++ b/docs/DP-Bench_benchmarks.md @@ -1,5 +1,7 @@ # DP-Bench Benchmarks +[DP-Bench on HuggingFace](https://huggingface.co/datasets/upstage/dp-bench) + Create and evaluate DP-Bench using a single command: ```sh @@ -8,6 +10,8 @@ poetry run python docs/examples/benchmark_dpbench.py This command downloads the DP-Bench dataset, runs the evaluations and produces the following files + + ## Layout Evaluation Create the evaluation report: diff --git a/docs/DocLayNetv1_benchmarks.md b/docs/DocLayNetv1_benchmarks.md index a002e084..2d7628a0 100644 --- a/docs/DocLayNetv1_benchmarks.md +++ b/docs/DocLayNetv1_benchmarks.md @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -# DocLayNet V1 Benchmarks +# DocLayNet V1.2 Benchmarks Create and evaluate DocLayNetv1.2 dataset using a single command. This command downloads from Huggingface the [DocLayNetv1.2_OTSL](https://huggingface.co/datasets/ds4sd/DocLayNet-v1.2) and runs the evaluations using the PDF Docling converter for all supported modalities. diff --git a/docs/FinTabNet_benchmarks.md b/docs/FinTabNet_benchmarks.md index 4019a26a..055ba17e 100644 --- a/docs/FinTabNet_benchmarks.md +++ b/docs/FinTabNet_benchmarks.md @@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ poetry run evaluate \ -o benchmarks/FinTabNet-dataset/tableformer ``` -[Tableformer evaluation json](docs/evaluations/FinTabNet/evaluation_FinTabNet_tableformer.json) +[Tableformer evaluation json](evaluations/FinTabNet/evaluation_FinTabNet_tableformer.json) Visualize the report: @@ -32,12 +32,12 @@ poetry run evaluate \ -o benchmarks/FinTabNet-dataset/tableformer ``` -![TEDS plot](docs/evaluations/FinTabNet/evaluation_FinTabNet_tableformer-delta_row_col.png) +![TEDS plot](evaluations/FinTabNet/evaluation_FinTabNet_tableformer-delta_row_col.png) -![TEDS struct only plot](docs/evaluations/FinTabNet/evaluation_FinTabNet_tableformer_TEDS_struct-only.png) +![TEDS struct only plot](evaluations/FinTabNet/evaluation_FinTabNet_tableformer_TEDS_struct-only.png) -[TEDS struct only report](docs/evaluations/FinTabNet/evaluation_FinTabNet_tableformer_TEDS_struct-only.txt) +[TEDS struct only report](evaluations/FinTabNet/evaluation_FinTabNet_tableformer_TEDS_struct-only.txt) -![TEDS struct with text plot](docs/evaluations/FinTabNet/evaluation_FinTabNet_tableformer_TEDS_struct-with-text.png) +![TEDS struct with text plot](evaluations/FinTabNet/evaluation_FinTabNet_tableformer_TEDS_struct-with-text.png) -[TEDS struct with text report](docs/evaluations/FinTabNet/evaluation_FinTabNet_tableformer_TEDS_struct-with-text.txt) +[TEDS struct with text report](evaluations/FinTabNet/evaluation_FinTabNet_tableformer_TEDS_struct-with-text.txt) diff --git a/docs/OmniDocBench_benchmarks.md b/docs/OmniDocBench_benchmarks.md index 52992ad6..6dee4c2e 100644 --- a/docs/OmniDocBench_benchmarks.md +++ b/docs/OmniDocBench_benchmarks.md @@ -1,4 +1,6 @@ -# OmniDocBench +# OmniDocBench Benchmarks + +[OmniDocBench on HuggingFace](https://huggingface.co/datasets/opendatalab/OmniDocBench) Create and evaluate OmniDocBench using a single command: diff --git a/docs/P1M_benchmarks.md b/docs/P1M_benchmarks.md index 8ecad74f..840927de 100644 --- a/docs/P1M_benchmarks.md +++ b/docs/P1M_benchmarks.md @@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ poetry run evaluate \ -o benchmarks/Pub1M-dataset/tableformer ``` -[Tableformer evaluation json](docs/evaluations/Pub1M/evaluation_Pub1M_tableformer.json) +[Tableformer evaluation json](evaluations/Pub1M/evaluation_Pub1M_tableformer.json) Visualize the report: @@ -32,12 +32,12 @@ poetry run evaluate \ -o benchmarks/Pub1M-dataset/tableformer ``` -![TEDS plot](docs/evaluations/Pub1M/evaluation_Pub1M_tableformer-delta_row_col.png) +![TEDS plot](evaluations/Pub1M/evaluation_Pub1M_tableformer-delta_row_col.png) -![TEDS struct only plot](docs/evaluations/Pub1M/evaluation_Pub1M_tableformer_TEDS_struct-only.png) +![TEDS struct only plot](evaluations/Pub1M/evaluation_Pub1M_tableformer_TEDS_struct-only.png) -[TEDS struct only report](docs/evaluations/Pub1M/evaluation_Pub1M_tableformer_TEDS_struct-only.txt) +[TEDS struct only report](evaluations/Pub1M/evaluation_Pub1M_tableformer_TEDS_struct-only.txt) -![TEDS struct with text plot](docs/evaluations/Pub1M/evaluation_Pub1M_tableformer_TEDS_struct-with-text.png) +![TEDS struct with text plot](evaluations/Pub1M/evaluation_Pub1M_tableformer_TEDS_struct-with-text.png) -[TEDS struct with text report](docs/evaluations/Pub1M/evaluation_Pub1M_tableformer_TEDS_struct-with-text.txt) +[TEDS struct with text report](evaluations/Pub1M/evaluation_Pub1M_tableformer_TEDS_struct-with-text.txt) diff --git a/docs/PubTabNet_benchmarks.md b/docs/PubTabNet_benchmarks.md index c50b34c4..ba739cf8 100644 --- a/docs/PubTabNet_benchmarks.md +++ b/docs/PubTabNet_benchmarks.md @@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ poetry run evaluate \ -o benchmarks/PubTabNet-dataset/tableformer ``` -[Tableformer evaluation json](docs/evaluations/PubTabNet/evaluation_PubTabNet_tableformer.json) +[Tableformer evaluation json](evaluations/PubTabNet/evaluation_PubTabNet_tableformer.json) Visualize the report: @@ -32,13 +32,13 @@ poetry run evaluate \ -o benchmarks/PubTabNet-dataset/tableformer ``` -![TEDS plot](docs/evaluations/PubTabNet/evaluation_PubTabNet_tableformer-delta_row_col.png) +![TEDS plot](evaluations/PubTabNet/evaluation_PubTabNet_tableformer-delta_row_col.png) -![TEDS struct only plot](docs/evaluations/PubTabNet/evaluation_PubTabNet_tableformer_TEDS_struct-only.png) +![TEDS struct only plot](evaluations/PubTabNet/evaluation_PubTabNet_tableformer_TEDS_struct-only.png) -[TEDS struct only report](docs/evaluations/PubTabNet/evaluation_PubTabNet_tableformer_TEDS_struct-only.txt) +[TEDS struct only report](evaluations/PubTabNet/evaluation_PubTabNet_tableformer_TEDS_struct-only.txt) -![TEDS struct with text plot](docs/evaluations/PubTabNet/evaluation_PubTabNet_tableformer_TEDS_struct-with-text.png) +![TEDS struct with text plot](evaluations/PubTabNet/evaluation_PubTabNet_tableformer_TEDS_struct-with-text.png) -[TEDS struct with text report](docs/evaluations/PubTabNet/evaluation_PubTabNet_tableformer_TEDS_struct-with-text.txt) +[TEDS struct with text report](evaluations/PubTabNet/evaluation_PubTabNet_tableformer_TEDS_struct-with-text.txt) From 710fb936fad7961e8a044865ad98096c8e8f0325 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Nikos Livathinos Date: Tue, 25 Feb 2025 17:24:01 +0100 Subject: [PATCH 06/11] docs: Fix broken link in Readme. Signed-off-by: Nikos Livathinos --- README.md | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/README.md b/README.md index da9a8311..70b17c44 100644 --- a/README.md +++ b/README.md @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ docling-eval % poetry run evaluate --help - [DocLayNetV1 Benchmarks](docs/DocLayNetv1_benchmarks.md): Text and layout evaluation on the DocLayNet v1.2 dataset. - [FinTabnet Benchmarks](docs/FinTabNet_benchmarks.md): Table structure evaluation on the FinTabNet dataset. - [PubTabNet benchmarks](docs/PubTabNet_benchmarks.md): Table structure evaluation on the PubTabNet dataset. -- [Pub1M benchmarks](docs/Pub1M_benchmarks.md): Table structure evaluation on the Pub1M dataset. +- [Pub1M benchmarks](docs/P1M_benchmarks.md): Table structure evaluation on the Pub1M dataset. ## Contributing From 2d2bfc17e628a569faced2b92ca505cc371c70eb Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Nikos Livathinos Date: Wed, 26 Feb 2025 09:59:24 +0100 Subject: [PATCH 07/11] chore: Update lock file Signed-off-by: Nikos Livathinos --- poetry.lock | 701 +++++++++++++++++++++++++------------------------ pyproject.toml | 2 +- 2 files changed, 360 insertions(+), 343 deletions(-) diff --git a/poetry.lock b/poetry.lock index 82cb1be5..ca895f5e 100644 --- a/poetry.lock +++ b/poetry.lock @@ -13,92 +13,92 @@ files = [ [[package]] name = "aiohttp" -version = "3.11.12" +version = "3.11.13" description = "Async http client/server framework (asyncio)" optional = false python-versions = ">=3.9" files = [ - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp310-cp310-macosx_10_9_universal2.whl", hash = "sha256:aa8a8caca81c0a3e765f19c6953416c58e2f4cc1b84829af01dd1c771bb2f91f"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp310-cp310-macosx_10_9_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:84ede78acde96ca57f6cf8ccb8a13fbaf569f6011b9a52f870c662d4dc8cd854"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp310-cp310-macosx_11_0_arm64.whl", hash = "sha256:584096938a001378484aa4ee54e05dc79c7b9dd933e271c744a97b3b6f644957"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp310-cp310-manylinux_2_17_aarch64.manylinux2014_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:392432a2dde22b86f70dd4a0e9671a349446c93965f261dbaecfaf28813e5c42"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp310-cp310-manylinux_2_17_ppc64le.manylinux2014_ppc64le.whl", hash = "sha256:88d385b8e7f3a870146bf5ea31786ef7463e99eb59e31db56e2315535d811f55"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp310-cp310-manylinux_2_17_s390x.manylinux2014_s390x.whl", hash = "sha256:b10a47e5390c4b30a0d58ee12581003be52eedd506862ab7f97da7a66805befb"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp310-cp310-manylinux_2_17_x86_64.manylinux2014_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:0b5263dcede17b6b0c41ef0c3ccce847d82a7da98709e75cf7efde3e9e3b5cae"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp310-cp310-manylinux_2_5_i686.manylinux1_i686.manylinux_2_17_i686.manylinux2014_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:50c5c7b8aa5443304c55c262c5693b108c35a3b61ef961f1e782dd52a2f559c7"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp310-cp310-musllinux_1_2_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:d1c031a7572f62f66f1257db37ddab4cb98bfaf9b9434a3b4840bf3560f5e788"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp310-cp310-musllinux_1_2_armv7l.whl", hash = "sha256:7e44eba534381dd2687be50cbd5f2daded21575242ecfdaf86bbeecbc38dae8e"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp310-cp310-musllinux_1_2_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:145a73850926018ec1681e734cedcf2716d6a8697d90da11284043b745c286d5"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp310-cp310-musllinux_1_2_ppc64le.whl", hash = "sha256:2c311e2f63e42c1bf86361d11e2c4a59f25d9e7aabdbdf53dc38b885c5435cdb"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp310-cp310-musllinux_1_2_s390x.whl", hash = "sha256:ea756b5a7bac046d202a9a3889b9a92219f885481d78cd318db85b15cc0b7bcf"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp310-cp310-musllinux_1_2_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:526c900397f3bbc2db9cb360ce9c35134c908961cdd0ac25b1ae6ffcaa2507ff"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp310-cp310-win32.whl", hash = "sha256:b8d3bb96c147b39c02d3db086899679f31958c5d81c494ef0fc9ef5bb1359b3d"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp310-cp310-win_amd64.whl", hash = "sha256:7fe3d65279bfbee8de0fb4f8c17fc4e893eed2dba21b2f680e930cc2b09075c5"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp311-cp311-macosx_10_9_universal2.whl", hash = "sha256:87a2e00bf17da098d90d4145375f1d985a81605267e7f9377ff94e55c5d769eb"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp311-cp311-macosx_10_9_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:b34508f1cd928ce915ed09682d11307ba4b37d0708d1f28e5774c07a7674cac9"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp311-cp311-macosx_11_0_arm64.whl", hash = "sha256:936d8a4f0f7081327014742cd51d320296b56aa6d324461a13724ab05f4b2933"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp311-cp311-manylinux_2_17_aarch64.manylinux2014_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:2de1378f72def7dfb5dbd73d86c19eda0ea7b0a6873910cc37d57e80f10d64e1"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp311-cp311-manylinux_2_17_ppc64le.manylinux2014_ppc64le.whl", hash = "sha256:b9d45dbb3aaec05cf01525ee1a7ac72de46a8c425cb75c003acd29f76b1ffe94"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp311-cp311-manylinux_2_17_s390x.manylinux2014_s390x.whl", hash = "sha256:930ffa1925393381e1e0a9b82137fa7b34c92a019b521cf9f41263976666a0d6"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp311-cp311-manylinux_2_17_x86_64.manylinux2014_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:8340def6737118f5429a5df4e88f440746b791f8f1c4ce4ad8a595f42c980bd5"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp311-cp311-manylinux_2_5_i686.manylinux1_i686.manylinux_2_17_i686.manylinux2014_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:4016e383f91f2814e48ed61e6bda7d24c4d7f2402c75dd28f7e1027ae44ea204"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp311-cp311-musllinux_1_2_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:3c0600bcc1adfaaac321422d615939ef300df81e165f6522ad096b73439c0f58"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp311-cp311-musllinux_1_2_armv7l.whl", hash = "sha256:0450ada317a65383b7cce9576096150fdb97396dcfe559109b403c7242faffef"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp311-cp311-musllinux_1_2_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:850ff6155371fd802a280f8d369d4e15d69434651b844bde566ce97ee2277420"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp311-cp311-musllinux_1_2_ppc64le.whl", hash = "sha256:8fd12d0f989c6099e7b0f30dc6e0d1e05499f3337461f0b2b0dadea6c64b89df"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp311-cp311-musllinux_1_2_s390x.whl", hash = "sha256:76719dd521c20a58a6c256d058547b3a9595d1d885b830013366e27011ffe804"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp311-cp311-musllinux_1_2_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:97fe431f2ed646a3b56142fc81d238abcbaff08548d6912acb0b19a0cadc146b"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp311-cp311-win32.whl", hash = "sha256:e10c440d142fa8b32cfdb194caf60ceeceb3e49807072e0dc3a8887ea80e8c16"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp311-cp311-win_amd64.whl", hash = "sha256:246067ba0cf5560cf42e775069c5d80a8989d14a7ded21af529a4e10e3e0f0e6"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp312-cp312-macosx_10_13_universal2.whl", hash = "sha256:e392804a38353900c3fd8b7cacbea5132888f7129f8e241915e90b85f00e3250"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp312-cp312-macosx_10_13_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:8fa1510b96c08aaad49303ab11f8803787c99222288f310a62f493faf883ede1"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp312-cp312-macosx_11_0_arm64.whl", hash = "sha256:dc065a4285307607df3f3686363e7f8bdd0d8ab35f12226362a847731516e42c"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp312-cp312-manylinux_2_17_aarch64.manylinux2014_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:cddb31f8474695cd61fc9455c644fc1606c164b93bff2490390d90464b4655df"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp312-cp312-manylinux_2_17_ppc64le.manylinux2014_ppc64le.whl", hash = "sha256:9dec0000d2d8621d8015c293e24589d46fa218637d820894cb7356c77eca3259"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp312-cp312-manylinux_2_17_s390x.manylinux2014_s390x.whl", hash = "sha256:e3552fe98e90fdf5918c04769f338a87fa4f00f3b28830ea9b78b1bdc6140e0d"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp312-cp312-manylinux_2_17_x86_64.manylinux2014_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:6dfe7f984f28a8ae94ff3a7953cd9678550dbd2a1f9bda5dd9c5ae627744c78e"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp312-cp312-manylinux_2_5_i686.manylinux1_i686.manylinux_2_17_i686.manylinux2014_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:a481a574af914b6e84624412666cbfbe531a05667ca197804ecc19c97b8ab1b0"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp312-cp312-musllinux_1_2_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:1987770fb4887560363b0e1a9b75aa303e447433c41284d3af2840a2f226d6e0"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp312-cp312-musllinux_1_2_armv7l.whl", hash = "sha256:a4ac6a0f0f6402854adca4e3259a623f5c82ec3f0c049374133bcb243132baf9"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp312-cp312-musllinux_1_2_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:c96a43822f1f9f69cc5c3706af33239489a6294be486a0447fb71380070d4d5f"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp312-cp312-musllinux_1_2_ppc64le.whl", hash = "sha256:a5e69046f83c0d3cb8f0d5bd9b8838271b1bc898e01562a04398e160953e8eb9"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp312-cp312-musllinux_1_2_s390x.whl", hash = "sha256:68d54234c8d76d8ef74744f9f9fc6324f1508129e23da8883771cdbb5818cbef"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp312-cp312-musllinux_1_2_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:c9fd9dcf9c91affe71654ef77426f5cf8489305e1c66ed4816f5a21874b094b9"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp312-cp312-win32.whl", hash = "sha256:0ed49efcd0dc1611378beadbd97beb5d9ca8fe48579fc04a6ed0844072261b6a"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp312-cp312-win_amd64.whl", hash = "sha256:54775858c7f2f214476773ce785a19ee81d1294a6bedc5cc17225355aab74802"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp313-cp313-macosx_10_13_universal2.whl", hash = "sha256:413ad794dccb19453e2b97c2375f2ca3cdf34dc50d18cc2693bd5aed7d16f4b9"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp313-cp313-macosx_10_13_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:4a93d28ed4b4b39e6f46fd240896c29b686b75e39cc6992692e3922ff6982b4c"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp313-cp313-macosx_11_0_arm64.whl", hash = "sha256:d589264dbba3b16e8951b6f145d1e6b883094075283dafcab4cdd564a9e353a0"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp313-cp313-manylinux_2_17_aarch64.manylinux2014_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:e5148ca8955affdfeb864aca158ecae11030e952b25b3ae15d4e2b5ba299bad2"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp313-cp313-manylinux_2_17_ppc64le.manylinux2014_ppc64le.whl", hash = "sha256:525410e0790aab036492eeea913858989c4cb070ff373ec3bc322d700bdf47c1"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp313-cp313-manylinux_2_17_s390x.manylinux2014_s390x.whl", hash = "sha256:9bd8695be2c80b665ae3f05cb584093a1e59c35ecb7d794d1edd96e8cc9201d7"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp313-cp313-manylinux_2_17_x86_64.manylinux2014_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:f0203433121484b32646a5f5ea93ae86f3d9559d7243f07e8c0eab5ff8e3f70e"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp313-cp313-manylinux_2_5_i686.manylinux1_i686.manylinux_2_17_i686.manylinux2014_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:40cd36749a1035c34ba8d8aaf221b91ca3d111532e5ccb5fa8c3703ab1b967ed"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp313-cp313-musllinux_1_2_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:a7442662afebbf7b4c6d28cb7aab9e9ce3a5df055fc4116cc7228192ad6cb484"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp313-cp313-musllinux_1_2_armv7l.whl", hash = "sha256:8a2fb742ef378284a50766e985804bd6adb5adb5aa781100b09befdbfa757b65"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp313-cp313-musllinux_1_2_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:2cee3b117a8d13ab98b38d5b6bdcd040cfb4181068d05ce0c474ec9db5f3c5bb"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp313-cp313-musllinux_1_2_ppc64le.whl", hash = "sha256:f6a19bcab7fbd8f8649d6595624856635159a6527861b9cdc3447af288a00c00"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp313-cp313-musllinux_1_2_s390x.whl", hash = "sha256:e4cecdb52aaa9994fbed6b81d4568427b6002f0a91c322697a4bfcc2b2363f5a"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp313-cp313-musllinux_1_2_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:30f546358dfa0953db92ba620101fefc81574f87b2346556b90b5f3ef16e55ce"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp313-cp313-win32.whl", hash = "sha256:ce1bb21fc7d753b5f8a5d5a4bae99566386b15e716ebdb410154c16c91494d7f"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp313-cp313-win_amd64.whl", hash = "sha256:f7914ab70d2ee8ab91c13e5402122edbc77821c66d2758abb53aabe87f013287"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp39-cp39-macosx_10_9_universal2.whl", hash = "sha256:7c3623053b85b4296cd3925eeb725e386644fd5bc67250b3bb08b0f144803e7b"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp39-cp39-macosx_10_9_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:67453e603cea8e85ed566b2700efa1f6916aefbc0c9fcb2e86aaffc08ec38e78"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp39-cp39-macosx_11_0_arm64.whl", hash = "sha256:6130459189e61baac5a88c10019b21e1f0c6d00ebc770e9ce269475650ff7f73"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp39-cp39-manylinux_2_17_aarch64.manylinux2014_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:9060addfa4ff753b09392efe41e6af06ea5dd257829199747b9f15bfad819460"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp39-cp39-manylinux_2_17_ppc64le.manylinux2014_ppc64le.whl", hash = "sha256:34245498eeb9ae54c687a07ad7f160053911b5745e186afe2d0c0f2898a1ab8a"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp39-cp39-manylinux_2_17_s390x.manylinux2014_s390x.whl", hash = "sha256:8dc0fba9a74b471c45ca1a3cb6e6913ebfae416678d90529d188886278e7f3f6"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp39-cp39-manylinux_2_17_x86_64.manylinux2014_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:a478aa11b328983c4444dacb947d4513cb371cd323f3845e53caeda6be5589d5"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp39-cp39-manylinux_2_5_i686.manylinux1_i686.manylinux_2_17_i686.manylinux2014_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:c160a04283c8c6f55b5bf6d4cad59bb9c5b9c9cd08903841b25f1f7109ef1259"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp39-cp39-musllinux_1_2_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:edb69b9589324bdc40961cdf0657815df674f1743a8d5ad9ab56a99e4833cfdd"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp39-cp39-musllinux_1_2_armv7l.whl", hash = "sha256:4ee84c2a22a809c4f868153b178fe59e71423e1f3d6a8cd416134bb231fbf6d3"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp39-cp39-musllinux_1_2_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:bf4480a5438f80e0f1539e15a7eb8b5f97a26fe087e9828e2c0ec2be119a9f72"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp39-cp39-musllinux_1_2_ppc64le.whl", hash = "sha256:e6b2732ef3bafc759f653a98881b5b9cdef0716d98f013d376ee8dfd7285abf1"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp39-cp39-musllinux_1_2_s390x.whl", hash = "sha256:f752e80606b132140883bb262a457c475d219d7163d996dc9072434ffb0784c4"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp39-cp39-musllinux_1_2_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:ab3247d58b393bda5b1c8f31c9edece7162fc13265334217785518dd770792b8"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp39-cp39-win32.whl", hash = "sha256:0d5176f310a7fe6f65608213cc74f4228e4f4ce9fd10bcb2bb6da8fc66991462"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12-cp39-cp39-win_amd64.whl", hash = "sha256:74bd573dde27e58c760d9ca8615c41a57e719bff315c9adb6f2a4281a28e8798"}, - {file = "aiohttp-3.11.12.tar.gz", hash = "sha256:7603ca26d75b1b86160ce1bbe2787a0b706e592af5b2504e12caa88a217767b0"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp310-cp310-macosx_10_9_universal2.whl", hash = "sha256:a4fe27dbbeec445e6e1291e61d61eb212ee9fed6e47998b27de71d70d3e8777d"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp310-cp310-macosx_10_9_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:9e64ca2dbea28807f8484c13f684a2f761e69ba2640ec49dacd342763cc265ef"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp310-cp310-macosx_11_0_arm64.whl", hash = "sha256:9840be675de208d1f68f84d578eaa4d1a36eee70b16ae31ab933520c49ba1325"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp310-cp310-manylinux_2_17_aarch64.manylinux2014_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:28a772757c9067e2aee8a6b2b425d0efaa628c264d6416d283694c3d86da7689"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp310-cp310-manylinux_2_17_ppc64le.manylinux2014_ppc64le.whl", hash = "sha256:b88aca5adbf4625e11118df45acac29616b425833c3be7a05ef63a6a4017bfdb"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp310-cp310-manylinux_2_17_s390x.manylinux2014_s390x.whl", hash = "sha256:ce10ddfbe26ed5856d6902162f71b8fe08545380570a885b4ab56aecfdcb07f4"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp310-cp310-manylinux_2_17_x86_64.manylinux2014_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:fa48dac27f41b36735c807d1ab093a8386701bbf00eb6b89a0f69d9fa26b3671"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp310-cp310-manylinux_2_5_i686.manylinux1_i686.manylinux_2_17_i686.manylinux2014_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:89ce611b1eac93ce2ade68f1470889e0173d606de20c85a012bfa24be96cf867"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp310-cp310-musllinux_1_2_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:78e4dd9c34ec7b8b121854eb5342bac8b02aa03075ae8618b6210a06bbb8a115"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp310-cp310-musllinux_1_2_armv7l.whl", hash = "sha256:66047eacbc73e6fe2462b77ce39fc170ab51235caf331e735eae91c95e6a11e4"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp310-cp310-musllinux_1_2_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:5ad8f1c19fe277eeb8bc45741c6d60ddd11d705c12a4d8ee17546acff98e0802"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp310-cp310-musllinux_1_2_ppc64le.whl", hash = "sha256:64815c6f02e8506b10113ddbc6b196f58dbef135751cc7c32136df27b736db09"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp310-cp310-musllinux_1_2_s390x.whl", hash = "sha256:967b93f21b426f23ca37329230d5bd122f25516ae2f24a9cea95a30023ff8283"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp310-cp310-musllinux_1_2_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:cf1f31f83d16ec344136359001c5e871915c6ab685a3d8dee38e2961b4c81730"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp310-cp310-win32.whl", hash = "sha256:00c8ac69e259c60976aa2edae3f13d9991cf079aaa4d3cd5a49168ae3748dee3"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp310-cp310-win_amd64.whl", hash = "sha256:90d571c98d19a8b6e793b34aa4df4cee1e8fe2862d65cc49185a3a3d0a1a3996"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp311-cp311-macosx_10_9_universal2.whl", hash = "sha256:6b35aab22419ba45f8fc290d0010898de7a6ad131e468ffa3922b1b0b24e9d2e"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp311-cp311-macosx_10_9_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:f81cba651db8795f688c589dd11a4fbb834f2e59bbf9bb50908be36e416dc760"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp311-cp311-macosx_11_0_arm64.whl", hash = "sha256:f55d0f242c2d1fcdf802c8fabcff25a9d85550a4cf3a9cf5f2a6b5742c992839"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp311-cp311-manylinux_2_17_aarch64.manylinux2014_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:c4bea08a6aad9195ac9b1be6b0c7e8a702a9cec57ce6b713698b4a5afa9c2e33"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp311-cp311-manylinux_2_17_ppc64le.manylinux2014_ppc64le.whl", hash = "sha256:c6070bcf2173a7146bb9e4735b3c62b2accba459a6eae44deea0eb23e0035a23"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp311-cp311-manylinux_2_17_s390x.manylinux2014_s390x.whl", hash = "sha256:718d5deb678bc4b9d575bfe83a59270861417da071ab44542d0fcb6faa686636"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp311-cp311-manylinux_2_17_x86_64.manylinux2014_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:0f6b2c5b4a4d22b8fb2c92ac98e0747f5f195e8e9448bfb7404cd77e7bfa243f"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp311-cp311-manylinux_2_5_i686.manylinux1_i686.manylinux_2_17_i686.manylinux2014_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:747ec46290107a490d21fe1ff4183bef8022b848cf9516970cb31de6d9460088"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp311-cp311-musllinux_1_2_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:01816f07c9cc9d80f858615b1365f8319d6a5fd079cd668cc58e15aafbc76a54"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp311-cp311-musllinux_1_2_armv7l.whl", hash = "sha256:a08ad95fcbd595803e0c4280671d808eb170a64ca3f2980dd38e7a72ed8d1fea"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp311-cp311-musllinux_1_2_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:c97be90d70f7db3aa041d720bfb95f4869d6063fcdf2bb8333764d97e319b7d0"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp311-cp311-musllinux_1_2_ppc64le.whl", hash = "sha256:ab915a57c65f7a29353c8014ac4be685c8e4a19e792a79fe133a8e101111438e"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp311-cp311-musllinux_1_2_s390x.whl", hash = "sha256:35cda4e07f5e058a723436c4d2b7ba2124ab4e0aa49e6325aed5896507a8a42e"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp311-cp311-musllinux_1_2_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:af55314407714fe77a68a9ccaab90fdb5deb57342585fd4a3a8102b6d4370080"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp311-cp311-win32.whl", hash = "sha256:42d689a5c0a0c357018993e471893e939f555e302313d5c61dfc566c2cad6185"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp311-cp311-win_amd64.whl", hash = "sha256:b73a2b139782a07658fbf170fe4bcdf70fc597fae5ffe75e5b67674c27434a9f"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp312-cp312-macosx_10_13_universal2.whl", hash = "sha256:2eabb269dc3852537d57589b36d7f7362e57d1ece308842ef44d9830d2dc3c90"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp312-cp312-macosx_10_13_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:7b77ee42addbb1c36d35aca55e8cc6d0958f8419e458bb70888d8c69a4ca833d"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp312-cp312-macosx_11_0_arm64.whl", hash = "sha256:55789e93c5ed71832e7fac868167276beadf9877b85697020c46e9a75471f55f"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp312-cp312-manylinux_2_17_aarch64.manylinux2014_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:c929f9a7249a11e4aa5c157091cfad7f49cc6b13f4eecf9b747104befd9f56f2"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp312-cp312-manylinux_2_17_ppc64le.manylinux2014_ppc64le.whl", hash = "sha256:d33851d85537bbf0f6291ddc97926a754c8f041af759e0aa0230fe939168852b"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp312-cp312-manylinux_2_17_s390x.manylinux2014_s390x.whl", hash = "sha256:9229d8613bd8401182868fe95688f7581673e1c18ff78855671a4b8284f47bcb"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp312-cp312-manylinux_2_17_x86_64.manylinux2014_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:669dd33f028e54fe4c96576f406ebb242ba534dd3a981ce009961bf49960f117"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp312-cp312-manylinux_2_5_i686.manylinux1_i686.manylinux_2_17_i686.manylinux2014_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:7c1b20a1ace54af7db1f95af85da530fe97407d9063b7aaf9ce6a32f44730778"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp312-cp312-musllinux_1_2_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:5724cc77f4e648362ebbb49bdecb9e2b86d9b172c68a295263fa072e679ee69d"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp312-cp312-musllinux_1_2_armv7l.whl", hash = "sha256:aa36c35e94ecdb478246dd60db12aba57cfcd0abcad43c927a8876f25734d496"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp312-cp312-musllinux_1_2_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:9b5b37c863ad5b0892cc7a4ceb1e435e5e6acd3f2f8d3e11fa56f08d3c67b820"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp312-cp312-musllinux_1_2_ppc64le.whl", hash = "sha256:e06cf4852ce8c4442a59bae5a3ea01162b8fcb49ab438d8548b8dc79375dad8a"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp312-cp312-musllinux_1_2_s390x.whl", hash = "sha256:5194143927e494616e335d074e77a5dac7cd353a04755330c9adc984ac5a628e"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp312-cp312-musllinux_1_2_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:afcb6b275c2d2ba5d8418bf30a9654fa978b4f819c2e8db6311b3525c86fe637"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp312-cp312-win32.whl", hash = "sha256:7104d5b3943c6351d1ad7027d90bdd0ea002903e9f610735ac99df3b81f102ee"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp312-cp312-win_amd64.whl", hash = "sha256:47dc018b1b220c48089b5b9382fbab94db35bef2fa192995be22cbad3c5730c8"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp313-cp313-macosx_10_13_universal2.whl", hash = "sha256:9862d077b9ffa015dbe3ce6c081bdf35135948cb89116e26667dd183550833d1"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp313-cp313-macosx_10_13_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:fbfef0666ae9e07abfa2c54c212ac18a1f63e13e0760a769f70b5717742f3ece"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp313-cp313-macosx_11_0_arm64.whl", hash = "sha256:93a1f7d857c4fcf7cabb1178058182c789b30d85de379e04f64c15b7e88d66fb"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp313-cp313-manylinux_2_17_aarch64.manylinux2014_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:ba40b7ae0f81c7029583a338853f6607b6d83a341a3dcde8bed1ea58a3af1df9"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp313-cp313-manylinux_2_17_ppc64le.manylinux2014_ppc64le.whl", hash = "sha256:b5b95787335c483cd5f29577f42bbe027a412c5431f2f80a749c80d040f7ca9f"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp313-cp313-manylinux_2_17_s390x.manylinux2014_s390x.whl", hash = "sha256:a7d474c5c1f0b9405c1565fafdc4429fa7d986ccbec7ce55bc6a330f36409cad"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp313-cp313-manylinux_2_17_x86_64.manylinux2014_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:1e83fb1991e9d8982b3b36aea1e7ad27ea0ce18c14d054c7a404d68b0319eebb"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp313-cp313-manylinux_2_5_i686.manylinux1_i686.manylinux_2_17_i686.manylinux2014_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:4586a68730bd2f2b04a83e83f79d271d8ed13763f64b75920f18a3a677b9a7f0"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp313-cp313-musllinux_1_2_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:9fe4eb0e7f50cdb99b26250d9328faef30b1175a5dbcfd6d0578d18456bac567"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp313-cp313-musllinux_1_2_armv7l.whl", hash = "sha256:2a8a6bc19818ac3e5596310ace5aa50d918e1ebdcc204dc96e2f4d505d51740c"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp313-cp313-musllinux_1_2_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:7f27eec42f6c3c1df09cfc1f6786308f8b525b8efaaf6d6bd76c1f52c6511f6a"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp313-cp313-musllinux_1_2_ppc64le.whl", hash = "sha256:2a4a13dfbb23977a51853b419141cd0a9b9573ab8d3a1455c6e63561387b52ff"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp313-cp313-musllinux_1_2_s390x.whl", hash = "sha256:02876bf2f69b062584965507b07bc06903c2dc93c57a554b64e012d636952654"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp313-cp313-musllinux_1_2_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:b992778d95b60a21c4d8d4a5f15aaab2bd3c3e16466a72d7f9bfd86e8cea0d4b"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp313-cp313-win32.whl", hash = "sha256:507ab05d90586dacb4f26a001c3abf912eb719d05635cbfad930bdbeb469b36c"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp313-cp313-win_amd64.whl", hash = "sha256:5ceb81a4db2decdfa087381b5fc5847aa448244f973e5da232610304e199e7b2"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp39-cp39-macosx_10_9_universal2.whl", hash = "sha256:51c3ff9c7a25f3cad5c09d9aacbc5aefb9267167c4652c1eb737989b554fe278"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp39-cp39-macosx_10_9_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:e271beb2b1dabec5cd84eb488bdabf9758d22ad13471e9c356be07ad139b3012"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp39-cp39-macosx_11_0_arm64.whl", hash = "sha256:0e9eb7e5764abcb49f0e2bd8f5731849b8728efbf26d0cac8e81384c95acec3f"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp39-cp39-manylinux_2_17_aarch64.manylinux2014_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:baae005092e3f200de02699314ac8933ec20abf998ec0be39448f6605bce93df"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp39-cp39-manylinux_2_17_ppc64le.manylinux2014_ppc64le.whl", hash = "sha256:1982c98ac62c132d2b773d50e2fcc941eb0b8bad3ec078ce7e7877c4d5a2dce7"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp39-cp39-manylinux_2_17_s390x.manylinux2014_s390x.whl", hash = "sha256:d2b25b2eeb35707113b2d570cadc7c612a57f1c5d3e7bb2b13870fe284e08fc0"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp39-cp39-manylinux_2_17_x86_64.manylinux2014_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:b27961d65639128336b7a7c3f0046dcc62a9443d5ef962e3c84170ac620cec47"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp39-cp39-manylinux_2_5_i686.manylinux1_i686.manylinux_2_17_i686.manylinux2014_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:a01fe9f1e05025eacdd97590895e2737b9f851d0eb2e017ae9574d9a4f0b6252"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp39-cp39-musllinux_1_2_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:fa1fb1b61881c8405829c50e9cc5c875bfdbf685edf57a76817dfb50643e4a1a"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp39-cp39-musllinux_1_2_armv7l.whl", hash = "sha256:25de43bb3cf83ad83efc8295af7310219af6dbe4c543c2e74988d8e9c8a2a917"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp39-cp39-musllinux_1_2_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:fe7065e2215e4bba63dc00db9ae654c1ba3950a5fff691475a32f511142fcddb"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp39-cp39-musllinux_1_2_ppc64le.whl", hash = "sha256:7836587eef675a17d835ec3d98a8c9acdbeb2c1d72b0556f0edf4e855a25e9c1"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp39-cp39-musllinux_1_2_s390x.whl", hash = "sha256:85fa0b18558eb1427090912bd456a01f71edab0872f4e0f9e4285571941e4090"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp39-cp39-musllinux_1_2_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:a86dc177eb4c286c19d1823ac296299f59ed8106c9536d2b559f65836e0fb2c6"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp39-cp39-win32.whl", hash = "sha256:684eea71ab6e8ade86b9021bb62af4bf0881f6be4e926b6b5455de74e420783a"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13-cp39-cp39-win_amd64.whl", hash = "sha256:82c249f2bfa5ecbe4a1a7902c81c0fba52ed9ebd0176ab3047395d02ad96cfcb"}, + {file = "aiohttp-3.11.13.tar.gz", hash = "sha256:8ce789231404ca8fff7f693cdce398abf6d90fd5dae2b1847477196c243b1fbb"}, ] [package.dependencies] @@ -257,17 +257,18 @@ testing = ["jaraco.test", "pytest (!=8.0.*)", "pytest (>=6,!=8.1.*)", "pytest-ch [[package]] name = "beautifulsoup4" -version = "4.12.3" +version = "4.13.3" description = "Screen-scraping library" optional = false -python-versions = ">=3.6.0" +python-versions = ">=3.7.0" files = [ - {file = "beautifulsoup4-4.12.3-py3-none-any.whl", hash = "sha256:b80878c9f40111313e55da8ba20bdba06d8fa3969fc68304167741bbf9e082ed"}, - {file = "beautifulsoup4-4.12.3.tar.gz", hash = "sha256:74e3d1928edc070d21748185c46e3fb33490f22f52a3addee9aee0f4f7781051"}, + {file = "beautifulsoup4-4.13.3-py3-none-any.whl", hash = "sha256:99045d7d3f08f91f0d656bc9b7efbae189426cd913d830294a15eefa0ea4df16"}, + {file = "beautifulsoup4-4.13.3.tar.gz", hash = "sha256:1bd32405dacc920b42b83ba01644747ed77456a65760e285fbc47633ceddaf8b"}, ] [package.dependencies] soupsieve = ">1.2" +typing-extensions = ">=4.0.0" [package.extras] cchardet = ["cchardet"] @@ -725,13 +726,13 @@ tests = ["pytest", "pytest-cov", "pytest-xdist"] [[package]] name = "datasets" -version = "3.3.1" +version = "3.3.2" description = "HuggingFace community-driven open-source library of datasets" optional = false python-versions = ">=3.9.0" files = [ - {file = "datasets-3.3.1-py3-none-any.whl", hash = "sha256:85182cbfa18faed0fb9dfc202f2668f1fed130fb88f8b3651b3cd8c4b3e61b1b"}, - {file = "datasets-3.3.1.tar.gz", hash = "sha256:7dfb7bb345513bce194cf612cebd6f78e46f7d981342b89364b5ab813c7049a9"}, + {file = "datasets-3.3.2-py3-none-any.whl", hash = "sha256:fdaf3d5d70242621210b044e9b9b15a56e908bfc3e9d077bcf5605ac390f70bd"}, + {file = "datasets-3.3.2.tar.gz", hash = "sha256:20901a97da870fb80b407ccc45f034a7ac99accd07da897ed42f11641bdb8c6e"}, ] [package.dependencies] @@ -802,13 +803,13 @@ files = [ [[package]] name = "decorator" -version = "5.1.1" +version = "5.2.1" description = "Decorators for Humans" optional = false -python-versions = ">=3.5" +python-versions = ">=3.8" files = [ - {file = "decorator-5.1.1-py3-none-any.whl", hash = "sha256:b8c3f85900b9dc423225913c5aace94729fe1fa9763b38939a95226f02d37186"}, - {file = "decorator-5.1.1.tar.gz", hash = "sha256:637996211036b6385ef91435e4fae22989472f9d571faba8927ba8253acbc330"}, + {file = "decorator-5.2.1-py3-none-any.whl", hash = "sha256:d316bb415a2d9e2d2b3abcc4084c6502fc09240e292cd76a76afc106a1c8e04a"}, + {file = "decorator-5.2.1.tar.gz", hash = "sha256:65f266143752f734b0a7cc83c46f4618af75b8c5911b00ccb61d0ac9b6da0360"}, ] [[package]] @@ -885,13 +886,13 @@ typer = "^0.12.5" ocrmac = ["ocrmac (>=1.0.0,<2.0.0)"] rapidocr = ["onnxruntime (>=1.7.0,<1.20.0)", "onnxruntime (>=1.7.0,<2.0.0)", "rapidocr-onnxruntime (>=1.4.0,<2.0.0)"] tesserocr = ["tesserocr (>=2.7.1,<3.0.0)"] -vlm = ["transformers (>=4.42.0,<4.43.0)", "transformers (>=4.46.0,<5.0.0)"] +vlm = ["accelerate (>=1.2.1,<2.0.0)", "transformers (>=4.42.0,<4.43.0)", "transformers (>=4.46.0,<5.0.0)"] [package.source] type = "git" url = "https://github.com/DS4SD/docling.git" reference = "cau/vlm-pipeline-generalizations" -resolved_reference = "10f64a948cee65c3e168f0df5cd6edf1fcc2b417" +resolved_reference = "d269c8596c19bd1afb6f4573ab3deaf0675588a9" [[package]] name = "docling-core" @@ -1440,13 +1441,13 @@ test = ["coverage[toml]", "ddt (>=1.1.1,!=1.4.3)", "mock", "mypy", "pre-commit", [[package]] name = "huggingface-hub" -version = "0.28.1" +version = "0.29.1" description = "Client library to download and publish models, datasets and other repos on the huggingface.co hub" optional = false python-versions = ">=3.8.0" files = [ - {file = "huggingface_hub-0.28.1-py3-none-any.whl", hash = "sha256:aa6b9a3ffdae939b72c464dbb0d7f99f56e649b55c3d52406f49e0a5a620c0a7"}, - {file = "huggingface_hub-0.28.1.tar.gz", hash = "sha256:893471090c98e3b6efbdfdacafe4052b20b84d59866fb6f54c33d9af18c303ae"}, + {file = "huggingface_hub-0.29.1-py3-none-any.whl", hash = "sha256:352f69caf16566c7b6de84b54a822f6238e17ddd8ae3da4f8f2272aea5b198d5"}, + {file = "huggingface_hub-0.29.1.tar.gz", hash = "sha256:9524eae42077b8ff4fc459ceb7a514eca1c1232b775276b009709fe2a084f250"}, ] [package.dependencies] @@ -1474,13 +1475,13 @@ typing = ["types-PyYAML", "types-requests", "types-simplejson", "types-toml", "t [[package]] name = "identify" -version = "2.6.7" +version = "2.6.8" description = "File identification library for Python" optional = false python-versions = ">=3.9" files = [ - {file = "identify-2.6.7-py2.py3-none-any.whl", hash = "sha256:155931cb617a401807b09ecec6635d6c692d180090a1cedca8ef7d58ba5b6aa0"}, - {file = "identify-2.6.7.tar.gz", hash = "sha256:3fa266b42eba321ee0b2bb0936a6a6b9e36a1351cbb69055b3082f4193035684"}, + {file = "identify-2.6.8-py2.py3-none-any.whl", hash = "sha256:83657f0f766a3c8d0eaea16d4ef42494b39b34629a4b3192a9d020d349b3e255"}, + {file = "identify-2.6.8.tar.gz", hash = "sha256:61491417ea2c0c5c670484fd8abbb34de34cdae1e5f39a73ee65e48e4bb663fc"}, ] [package.extras] @@ -2787,35 +2788,35 @@ test = ["pytest (>=7.2)", "pytest-cov (>=4.0)"] [[package]] name = "nh3" -version = "0.2.20" +version = "0.2.21" description = "Python binding to Ammonia HTML sanitizer Rust crate" optional = false python-versions = ">=3.8" files = [ - {file = "nh3-0.2.20-cp313-cp313t-macosx_10_12_x86_64.macosx_11_0_arm64.macosx_10_12_universal2.whl", hash = "sha256:e1061a4ab6681f6bdf72b110eea0c4e1379d57c9de937db3be4202f7ad6043db"}, - {file = "nh3-0.2.20-cp313-cp313t-manylinux_2_17_x86_64.manylinux2014_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:eb4254b1dac4a1ee49919a5b3f1caf9803ea8dada1816d9e8289e63d3cd0dd9a"}, - {file = "nh3-0.2.20-cp313-cp313t-manylinux_2_5_i686.manylinux1_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:0ae9cbd713524cdb81e64663d0d6aae26f678db9f2cd9db0bf162606f1f9f20c"}, - {file = "nh3-0.2.20-cp313-cp313t-musllinux_1_2_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:e1f7370b4e14cc03f5ae141ef30a1caf81fa5787711f80be9081418dd9eb79d2"}, - {file = "nh3-0.2.20-cp313-cp313t-musllinux_1_2_armv7l.whl", hash = "sha256:ac4d27dc836a476efffc6eb661994426b8b805c951b29c9cf2ff36bc9ad58bc5"}, - {file = "nh3-0.2.20-cp313-cp313t-musllinux_1_2_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:4fd2e9248725ebcedac3997a8d3da0d90a12a28c9179c6ba51f1658938ac30d0"}, - {file = "nh3-0.2.20-cp313-cp313t-musllinux_1_2_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:f7d564871833ddbe54df3aa59053b1110729d3a800cb7628ae8f42adb3d75208"}, - {file = "nh3-0.2.20-cp313-cp313t-win32.whl", hash = "sha256:d2a176fd4306b6f0f178a3f67fac91bd97a3a8d8fafb771c9b9ef675ba5c8886"}, - {file = "nh3-0.2.20-cp313-cp313t-win_amd64.whl", hash = "sha256:6ed834c68452a600f517dd3e1534dbfaff1f67f98899fecf139a055a25d99150"}, - {file = "nh3-0.2.20-cp38-abi3-macosx_10_12_x86_64.macosx_11_0_arm64.macosx_10_12_universal2.whl", hash = "sha256:76e2f603b30c02ff6456b233a83fc377dedab6a50947b04e960a6b905637b776"}, - {file = "nh3-0.2.20-cp38-abi3-manylinux_2_17_aarch64.manylinux2014_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:181063c581defe683bd4bb78188ac9936d208aebbc74c7f7c16b6a32ae2ebb38"}, - {file = "nh3-0.2.20-cp38-abi3-manylinux_2_17_armv7l.manylinux2014_armv7l.whl", hash = "sha256:231addb7643c952cd6d71f1c8702d703f8fe34afcb20becb3efb319a501a12d7"}, - {file = "nh3-0.2.20-cp38-abi3-manylinux_2_17_ppc64.manylinux2014_ppc64.whl", hash = "sha256:1b9a8340a0aab991c68a5ca938d35ef4a8a3f4bf1b455da8855a40bee1fa0ace"}, - {file = "nh3-0.2.20-cp38-abi3-manylinux_2_17_ppc64le.manylinux2014_ppc64le.whl", hash = "sha256:10317cd96fe4bbd4eb6b95f3920b71c902157ad44fed103fdcde43e3b8ee8be6"}, - {file = "nh3-0.2.20-cp38-abi3-manylinux_2_17_s390x.manylinux2014_s390x.whl", hash = "sha256:8698db4c04b140800d1a1cd3067fda399e36e1e2b8fc1fe04292a907350a3e9b"}, - {file = "nh3-0.2.20-cp38-abi3-manylinux_2_17_x86_64.manylinux2014_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:3eb04b9c3deb13c3a375ea39fd4a3c00d1f92e8fb2349f25f1e3e4506751774b"}, - {file = "nh3-0.2.20-cp38-abi3-manylinux_2_5_i686.manylinux1_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:92f3f1c4f47a2c6f3ca7317b1d5ced05bd29556a75d3a4e2715652ae9d15c05d"}, - {file = "nh3-0.2.20-cp38-abi3-musllinux_1_2_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:ddefa9fd6794a87e37d05827d299d4b53a3ec6f23258101907b96029bfef138a"}, - {file = "nh3-0.2.20-cp38-abi3-musllinux_1_2_armv7l.whl", hash = "sha256:ce3731c8f217685d33d9268362e5b4f770914e922bba94d368ab244a59a6c397"}, - {file = "nh3-0.2.20-cp38-abi3-musllinux_1_2_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:09f037c02fc2c43b211ff1523de32801dcfb0918648d8e651c36ef890f1731ec"}, - {file = "nh3-0.2.20-cp38-abi3-musllinux_1_2_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:813f1c8012dd64c990514b795508abb90789334f76a561fa0fd4ca32d2275330"}, - {file = "nh3-0.2.20-cp38-abi3-win32.whl", hash = "sha256:47b2946c0e13057855209daeffb45dc910bd0c55daf10190bb0b4b60e2999784"}, - {file = "nh3-0.2.20-cp38-abi3-win_amd64.whl", hash = "sha256:da87573f03084edae8eb87cfe811ec338606288f81d333c07d2a9a0b9b976c0b"}, - {file = "nh3-0.2.20.tar.gz", hash = "sha256:9705c42d7ff88a0bea546c82d7fe5e59135e3d3f057e485394f491248a1f8ed5"}, + {file = "nh3-0.2.21-cp313-cp313t-macosx_10_12_x86_64.macosx_11_0_arm64.macosx_10_12_universal2.whl", hash = "sha256:fcff321bd60c6c5c9cb4ddf2554e22772bb41ebd93ad88171bbbb6f271255286"}, + {file = "nh3-0.2.21-cp313-cp313t-manylinux_2_17_x86_64.manylinux2014_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:31eedcd7d08b0eae28ba47f43fd33a653b4cdb271d64f1aeda47001618348fde"}, + {file = "nh3-0.2.21-cp313-cp313t-manylinux_2_5_i686.manylinux1_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:d426d7be1a2f3d896950fe263332ed1662f6c78525b4520c8e9861f8d7f0d243"}, + {file = "nh3-0.2.21-cp313-cp313t-musllinux_1_2_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:9d67709bc0d7d1f5797b21db26e7a8b3d15d21c9c5f58ccfe48b5328483b685b"}, + {file = "nh3-0.2.21-cp313-cp313t-musllinux_1_2_armv7l.whl", hash = "sha256:55823c5ea1f6b267a4fad5de39bc0524d49a47783e1fe094bcf9c537a37df251"}, + {file = "nh3-0.2.21-cp313-cp313t-musllinux_1_2_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:818f2b6df3763e058efa9e69677b5a92f9bc0acff3295af5ed013da544250d5b"}, + {file = "nh3-0.2.21-cp313-cp313t-musllinux_1_2_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:b3b5c58161e08549904ac4abd450dacd94ff648916f7c376ae4b2c0652b98ff9"}, + {file = "nh3-0.2.21-cp313-cp313t-win32.whl", hash = "sha256:637d4a10c834e1b7d9548592c7aad760611415fcd5bd346f77fd8a064309ae6d"}, + {file = "nh3-0.2.21-cp313-cp313t-win_amd64.whl", hash = "sha256:713d16686596e556b65e7f8c58328c2df63f1a7abe1277d87625dcbbc012ef82"}, + {file = "nh3-0.2.21-cp38-abi3-macosx_10_12_x86_64.macosx_11_0_arm64.macosx_10_12_universal2.whl", hash = "sha256:a772dec5b7b7325780922dd904709f0f5f3a79fbf756de5291c01370f6df0967"}, + {file = "nh3-0.2.21-cp38-abi3-manylinux_2_17_aarch64.manylinux2014_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:d002b648592bf3033adfd875a48f09b8ecc000abd7f6a8769ed86b6ccc70c759"}, + {file = "nh3-0.2.21-cp38-abi3-manylinux_2_17_armv7l.manylinux2014_armv7l.whl", hash = "sha256:2a5174551f95f2836f2ad6a8074560f261cf9740a48437d6151fd2d4d7d617ab"}, + {file = "nh3-0.2.21-cp38-abi3-manylinux_2_17_ppc64.manylinux2014_ppc64.whl", hash = "sha256:b8d55ea1fc7ae3633d758a92aafa3505cd3cc5a6e40470c9164d54dff6f96d42"}, + {file = "nh3-0.2.21-cp38-abi3-manylinux_2_17_ppc64le.manylinux2014_ppc64le.whl", hash = "sha256:6ae319f17cd8960d0612f0f0ddff5a90700fa71926ca800e9028e7851ce44a6f"}, + {file = "nh3-0.2.21-cp38-abi3-manylinux_2_17_s390x.manylinux2014_s390x.whl", hash = "sha256:63ca02ac6f27fc80f9894409eb61de2cb20ef0a23740c7e29f9ec827139fa578"}, + {file = "nh3-0.2.21-cp38-abi3-manylinux_2_17_x86_64.manylinux2014_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:a5f77e62aed5c4acad635239ac1290404c7e940c81abe561fd2af011ff59f585"}, + {file = "nh3-0.2.21-cp38-abi3-manylinux_2_5_i686.manylinux1_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:087ffadfdcd497658c3adc797258ce0f06be8a537786a7217649fc1c0c60c293"}, + {file = "nh3-0.2.21-cp38-abi3-musllinux_1_2_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:ac7006c3abd097790e611fe4646ecb19a8d7f2184b882f6093293b8d9b887431"}, + {file = "nh3-0.2.21-cp38-abi3-musllinux_1_2_armv7l.whl", hash = "sha256:6141caabe00bbddc869665b35fc56a478eb774a8c1dfd6fba9fe1dfdf29e6efa"}, + {file = "nh3-0.2.21-cp38-abi3-musllinux_1_2_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:20979783526641c81d2f5bfa6ca5ccca3d1e4472474b162c6256745fbfe31cd1"}, + {file = "nh3-0.2.21-cp38-abi3-musllinux_1_2_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:a7ea28cd49293749d67e4fcf326c554c83ec912cd09cd94aa7ec3ab1921c8283"}, + {file = "nh3-0.2.21-cp38-abi3-win32.whl", hash = "sha256:6c9c30b8b0d291a7c5ab0967ab200598ba33208f754f2f4920e9343bdd88f79a"}, + {file = "nh3-0.2.21-cp38-abi3-win_amd64.whl", hash = "sha256:bb0014948f04d7976aabae43fcd4cb7f551f9f8ce785a4c9ef66e6c2590f8629"}, + {file = "nh3-0.2.21.tar.gz", hash = "sha256:4990e7ee6a55490dbf00d61a6f476c9a3258e31e711e13713b2ea7d6616f670e"}, ] [[package]] @@ -3448,13 +3449,13 @@ xmp = ["defusedxml"] [[package]] name = "pkginfo" -version = "1.12.1.1" +version = "1.12.1.2" description = "Query metadata from sdists / bdists / installed packages." optional = false python-versions = ">=3.8" files = [ - {file = "pkginfo-1.12.1.1-py3-none-any.whl", hash = "sha256:57f0b56061c84d5875556fb9437ef80b69863dea56dbad30b0b9a9887652b47c"}, - {file = "pkginfo-1.12.1.1.tar.gz", hash = "sha256:4a09d6ab00af353d24021a42c1b00ac9d0beef0ccc012a5c122430acbeb01c0e"}, + {file = "pkginfo-1.12.1.2-py3-none-any.whl", hash = "sha256:c783ac885519cab2c34927ccfa6bf64b5a704d7c69afaea583dd9b7afe969343"}, + {file = "pkginfo-1.12.1.2.tar.gz", hash = "sha256:5cd957824ac36f140260964eba3c6be6442a8359b8c48f4adf90210f33a04b7b"}, ] [package.extras] @@ -3525,93 +3526,109 @@ wcwidth = "*" [[package]] name = "propcache" -version = "0.2.1" +version = "0.3.0" description = "Accelerated property cache" optional = false python-versions = ">=3.9" files = [ - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp310-cp310-macosx_10_9_universal2.whl", hash = "sha256:6b3f39a85d671436ee3d12c017f8fdea38509e4f25b28eb25877293c98c243f6"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp310-cp310-macosx_10_9_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:39d51fbe4285d5db5d92a929e3e21536ea3dd43732c5b177c7ef03f918dff9f2"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp310-cp310-macosx_11_0_arm64.whl", hash = "sha256:6445804cf4ec763dc70de65a3b0d9954e868609e83850a47ca4f0cb64bd79fea"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp310-cp310-manylinux_2_17_aarch64.manylinux2014_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:f9479aa06a793c5aeba49ce5c5692ffb51fcd9a7016e017d555d5e2b0045d212"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp310-cp310-manylinux_2_17_ppc64le.manylinux2014_ppc64le.whl", hash = "sha256:d9631c5e8b5b3a0fda99cb0d29c18133bca1e18aea9effe55adb3da1adef80d3"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp310-cp310-manylinux_2_17_s390x.manylinux2014_s390x.whl", hash = "sha256:3156628250f46a0895f1f36e1d4fbe062a1af8718ec3ebeb746f1d23f0c5dc4d"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp310-cp310-manylinux_2_17_x86_64.manylinux2014_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:6b6fb63ae352e13748289f04f37868099e69dba4c2b3e271c46061e82c745634"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp310-cp310-manylinux_2_5_i686.manylinux1_i686.manylinux_2_17_i686.manylinux2014_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:887d9b0a65404929641a9fabb6452b07fe4572b269d901d622d8a34a4e9043b2"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp310-cp310-musllinux_1_2_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:a96dc1fa45bd8c407a0af03b2d5218392729e1822b0c32e62c5bf7eeb5fb3958"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp310-cp310-musllinux_1_2_armv7l.whl", hash = "sha256:a7e65eb5c003a303b94aa2c3852ef130230ec79e349632d030e9571b87c4698c"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp310-cp310-musllinux_1_2_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:999779addc413181912e984b942fbcc951be1f5b3663cd80b2687758f434c583"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp310-cp310-musllinux_1_2_ppc64le.whl", hash = "sha256:19a0f89a7bb9d8048d9c4370c9c543c396e894c76be5525f5e1ad287f1750ddf"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp310-cp310-musllinux_1_2_s390x.whl", hash = "sha256:1ac2f5fe02fa75f56e1ad473f1175e11f475606ec9bd0be2e78e4734ad575034"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp310-cp310-musllinux_1_2_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:574faa3b79e8ebac7cb1d7930f51184ba1ccf69adfdec53a12f319a06030a68b"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp310-cp310-win32.whl", hash = "sha256:03ff9d3f665769b2a85e6157ac8b439644f2d7fd17615a82fa55739bc97863f4"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp310-cp310-win_amd64.whl", hash = "sha256:2d3af2e79991102678f53e0dbf4c35de99b6b8b58f29a27ca0325816364caaba"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp311-cp311-macosx_10_9_universal2.whl", hash = "sha256:1ffc3cca89bb438fb9c95c13fc874012f7b9466b89328c3c8b1aa93cdcfadd16"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp311-cp311-macosx_10_9_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:f174bbd484294ed9fdf09437f889f95807e5f229d5d93588d34e92106fbf6717"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp311-cp311-macosx_11_0_arm64.whl", hash = "sha256:70693319e0b8fd35dd863e3e29513875eb15c51945bf32519ef52927ca883bc3"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp311-cp311-manylinux_2_17_aarch64.manylinux2014_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:b480c6a4e1138e1aa137c0079b9b6305ec6dcc1098a8ca5196283e8a49df95a9"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp311-cp311-manylinux_2_17_ppc64le.manylinux2014_ppc64le.whl", hash = "sha256:d27b84d5880f6d8aa9ae3edb253c59d9f6642ffbb2c889b78b60361eed449787"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp311-cp311-manylinux_2_17_s390x.manylinux2014_s390x.whl", hash = "sha256:857112b22acd417c40fa4595db2fe28ab900c8c5fe4670c7989b1c0230955465"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp311-cp311-manylinux_2_17_x86_64.manylinux2014_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:cf6c4150f8c0e32d241436526f3c3f9cbd34429492abddbada2ffcff506c51af"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp311-cp311-manylinux_2_5_i686.manylinux1_i686.manylinux_2_17_i686.manylinux2014_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:66d4cfda1d8ed687daa4bc0274fcfd5267873db9a5bc0418c2da19273040eeb7"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp311-cp311-musllinux_1_2_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:c2f992c07c0fca81655066705beae35fc95a2fa7366467366db627d9f2ee097f"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp311-cp311-musllinux_1_2_armv7l.whl", hash = "sha256:4a571d97dbe66ef38e472703067021b1467025ec85707d57e78711c085984e54"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp311-cp311-musllinux_1_2_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:bb6178c241278d5fe853b3de743087be7f5f4c6f7d6d22a3b524d323eecec505"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp311-cp311-musllinux_1_2_ppc64le.whl", hash = "sha256:ad1af54a62ffe39cf34db1aa6ed1a1873bd548f6401db39d8e7cd060b9211f82"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp311-cp311-musllinux_1_2_s390x.whl", hash = "sha256:e7048abd75fe40712005bcfc06bb44b9dfcd8e101dda2ecf2f5aa46115ad07ca"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp311-cp311-musllinux_1_2_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:160291c60081f23ee43d44b08a7e5fb76681221a8e10b3139618c5a9a291b84e"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp311-cp311-win32.whl", hash = "sha256:819ce3b883b7576ca28da3861c7e1a88afd08cc8c96908e08a3f4dd64a228034"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp311-cp311-win_amd64.whl", hash = "sha256:edc9fc7051e3350643ad929df55c451899bb9ae6d24998a949d2e4c87fb596d3"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp312-cp312-macosx_10_13_universal2.whl", hash = "sha256:081a430aa8d5e8876c6909b67bd2d937bfd531b0382d3fdedb82612c618bc41a"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp312-cp312-macosx_10_13_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:d2ccec9ac47cf4e04897619c0e0c1a48c54a71bdf045117d3a26f80d38ab1fb0"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp312-cp312-macosx_11_0_arm64.whl", hash = "sha256:14d86fe14b7e04fa306e0c43cdbeebe6b2c2156a0c9ce56b815faacc193e320d"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp312-cp312-manylinux_2_17_aarch64.manylinux2014_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:049324ee97bb67285b49632132db351b41e77833678432be52bdd0289c0e05e4"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp312-cp312-manylinux_2_17_ppc64le.manylinux2014_ppc64le.whl", hash = "sha256:1cd9a1d071158de1cc1c71a26014dcdfa7dd3d5f4f88c298c7f90ad6f27bb46d"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp312-cp312-manylinux_2_17_s390x.manylinux2014_s390x.whl", hash = "sha256:98110aa363f1bb4c073e8dcfaefd3a5cea0f0834c2aab23dda657e4dab2f53b5"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp312-cp312-manylinux_2_17_x86_64.manylinux2014_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:647894f5ae99c4cf6bb82a1bb3a796f6e06af3caa3d32e26d2350d0e3e3faf24"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp312-cp312-manylinux_2_5_i686.manylinux1_i686.manylinux_2_17_i686.manylinux2014_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:bfd3223c15bebe26518d58ccf9a39b93948d3dcb3e57a20480dfdd315356baff"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp312-cp312-musllinux_1_2_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:d71264a80f3fcf512eb4f18f59423fe82d6e346ee97b90625f283df56aee103f"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp312-cp312-musllinux_1_2_armv7l.whl", hash = "sha256:e73091191e4280403bde6c9a52a6999d69cdfde498f1fdf629105247599b57ec"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp312-cp312-musllinux_1_2_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:3935bfa5fede35fb202c4b569bb9c042f337ca4ff7bd540a0aa5e37131659348"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp312-cp312-musllinux_1_2_ppc64le.whl", hash = "sha256:f508b0491767bb1f2b87fdfacaba5f7eddc2f867740ec69ece6d1946d29029a6"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp312-cp312-musllinux_1_2_s390x.whl", hash = "sha256:1672137af7c46662a1c2be1e8dc78cb6d224319aaa40271c9257d886be4363a6"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp312-cp312-musllinux_1_2_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:b74c261802d3d2b85c9df2dfb2fa81b6f90deeef63c2db9f0e029a3cac50b518"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp312-cp312-win32.whl", hash = "sha256:d09c333d36c1409d56a9d29b3a1b800a42c76a57a5a8907eacdbce3f18768246"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp312-cp312-win_amd64.whl", hash = "sha256:c214999039d4f2a5b2073ac506bba279945233da8c786e490d411dfc30f855c1"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp313-cp313-macosx_10_13_universal2.whl", hash = "sha256:aca405706e0b0a44cc6bfd41fbe89919a6a56999157f6de7e182a990c36e37bc"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp313-cp313-macosx_10_13_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:12d1083f001ace206fe34b6bdc2cb94be66d57a850866f0b908972f90996b3e9"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp313-cp313-macosx_11_0_arm64.whl", hash = "sha256:d93f3307ad32a27bda2e88ec81134b823c240aa3abb55821a8da553eed8d9439"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp313-cp313-manylinux_2_17_aarch64.manylinux2014_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:ba278acf14471d36316159c94a802933d10b6a1e117b8554fe0d0d9b75c9d536"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp313-cp313-manylinux_2_17_ppc64le.manylinux2014_ppc64le.whl", hash = "sha256:4e6281aedfca15301c41f74d7005e6e3f4ca143584ba696ac69df4f02f40d629"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp313-cp313-manylinux_2_17_s390x.manylinux2014_s390x.whl", hash = "sha256:5b750a8e5a1262434fb1517ddf64b5de58327f1adc3524a5e44c2ca43305eb0b"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp313-cp313-manylinux_2_17_x86_64.manylinux2014_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:bf72af5e0fb40e9babf594308911436c8efde3cb5e75b6f206c34ad18be5c052"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp313-cp313-manylinux_2_5_i686.manylinux1_i686.manylinux_2_17_i686.manylinux2014_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:b2d0a12018b04f4cb820781ec0dffb5f7c7c1d2a5cd22bff7fb055a2cb19ebce"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp313-cp313-musllinux_1_2_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:e800776a79a5aabdb17dcc2346a7d66d0777e942e4cd251defeb084762ecd17d"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp313-cp313-musllinux_1_2_armv7l.whl", hash = "sha256:4160d9283bd382fa6c0c2b5e017acc95bc183570cd70968b9202ad6d8fc48dce"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp313-cp313-musllinux_1_2_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:30b43e74f1359353341a7adb783c8f1b1c676367b011709f466f42fda2045e95"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp313-cp313-musllinux_1_2_ppc64le.whl", hash = "sha256:58791550b27d5488b1bb52bc96328456095d96206a250d28d874fafe11b3dfaf"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp313-cp313-musllinux_1_2_s390x.whl", hash = "sha256:0f022d381747f0dfe27e99d928e31bc51a18b65bb9e481ae0af1380a6725dd1f"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp313-cp313-musllinux_1_2_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:297878dc9d0a334358f9b608b56d02e72899f3b8499fc6044133f0d319e2ec30"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp313-cp313-win32.whl", hash = "sha256:ddfab44e4489bd79bda09d84c430677fc7f0a4939a73d2bba3073036f487a0a6"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp313-cp313-win_amd64.whl", hash = "sha256:556fc6c10989f19a179e4321e5d678db8eb2924131e64652a51fe83e4c3db0e1"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp39-cp39-macosx_10_9_universal2.whl", hash = "sha256:6a9a8c34fb7bb609419a211e59da8887eeca40d300b5ea8e56af98f6fbbb1541"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp39-cp39-macosx_10_9_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:ae1aa1cd222c6d205853b3013c69cd04515f9d6ab6de4b0603e2e1c33221303e"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp39-cp39-macosx_11_0_arm64.whl", hash = "sha256:accb6150ce61c9c4b7738d45550806aa2b71c7668c6942f17b0ac182b6142fd4"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp39-cp39-manylinux_2_17_aarch64.manylinux2014_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:5eee736daafa7af6d0a2dc15cc75e05c64f37fc37bafef2e00d77c14171c2097"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp39-cp39-manylinux_2_17_ppc64le.manylinux2014_ppc64le.whl", hash = "sha256:f7a31fc1e1bd362874863fdeed71aed92d348f5336fd84f2197ba40c59f061bd"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp39-cp39-manylinux_2_17_s390x.manylinux2014_s390x.whl", hash = "sha256:cba4cfa1052819d16699e1d55d18c92b6e094d4517c41dd231a8b9f87b6fa681"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp39-cp39-manylinux_2_17_x86_64.manylinux2014_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:f089118d584e859c62b3da0892b88a83d611c2033ac410e929cb6754eec0ed16"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp39-cp39-manylinux_2_5_i686.manylinux1_i686.manylinux_2_17_i686.manylinux2014_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:781e65134efaf88feb447e8c97a51772aa75e48b794352f94cb7ea717dedda0d"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp39-cp39-musllinux_1_2_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:31f5af773530fd3c658b32b6bdc2d0838543de70eb9a2156c03e410f7b0d3aae"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp39-cp39-musllinux_1_2_armv7l.whl", hash = "sha256:a7a078f5d37bee6690959c813977da5291b24286e7b962e62a94cec31aa5188b"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp39-cp39-musllinux_1_2_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:cea7daf9fc7ae6687cf1e2c049752f19f146fdc37c2cc376e7d0032cf4f25347"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp39-cp39-musllinux_1_2_ppc64le.whl", hash = "sha256:8b3489ff1ed1e8315674d0775dc7d2195fb13ca17b3808721b54dbe9fd020faf"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp39-cp39-musllinux_1_2_s390x.whl", hash = "sha256:9403db39be1393618dd80c746cb22ccda168efce239c73af13c3763ef56ffc04"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp39-cp39-musllinux_1_2_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:5d97151bc92d2b2578ff7ce779cdb9174337390a535953cbb9452fb65164c587"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp39-cp39-win32.whl", hash = "sha256:9caac6b54914bdf41bcc91e7eb9147d331d29235a7c967c150ef5df6464fd1bb"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-cp39-cp39-win_amd64.whl", hash = "sha256:92fc4500fcb33899b05ba73276dfb684a20d31caa567b7cb5252d48f896a91b1"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1-py3-none-any.whl", hash = "sha256:52277518d6aae65536e9cea52d4e7fd2f7a66f4aa2d30ed3f2fcea620ace3c54"}, - {file = "propcache-0.2.1.tar.gz", hash = "sha256:3f77ce728b19cb537714499928fe800c3dda29e8d9428778fc7c186da4c09a64"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp310-cp310-macosx_10_9_universal2.whl", hash = "sha256:efa44f64c37cc30c9f05932c740a8b40ce359f51882c70883cc95feac842da4d"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp310-cp310-macosx_10_9_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:2383a17385d9800b6eb5855c2f05ee550f803878f344f58b6e194de08b96352c"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp310-cp310-macosx_11_0_arm64.whl", hash = "sha256:d3e7420211f5a65a54675fd860ea04173cde60a7cc20ccfbafcccd155225f8bc"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp310-cp310-manylinux_2_17_aarch64.manylinux2014_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:3302c5287e504d23bb0e64d2a921d1eb4a03fb93a0a0aa3b53de059f5a5d737d"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp310-cp310-manylinux_2_17_ppc64le.manylinux2014_ppc64le.whl", hash = "sha256:7e2e068a83552ddf7a39a99488bcba05ac13454fb205c847674da0352602082f"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp310-cp310-manylinux_2_17_s390x.manylinux2014_s390x.whl", hash = "sha256:2d913d36bdaf368637b4f88d554fb9cb9d53d6920b9c5563846555938d5450bf"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp310-cp310-manylinux_2_17_x86_64.manylinux2014_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:8ee1983728964d6070ab443399c476de93d5d741f71e8f6e7880a065f878e0b9"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp310-cp310-manylinux_2_5_i686.manylinux1_i686.manylinux_2_17_i686.manylinux2014_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:36ca5e9a21822cc1746023e88f5c0af6fce3af3b85d4520efb1ce4221bed75cc"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp310-cp310-musllinux_1_2_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:9ecde3671e62eeb99e977f5221abcf40c208f69b5eb986b061ccec317c82ebd0"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp310-cp310-musllinux_1_2_armv7l.whl", hash = "sha256:d383bf5e045d7f9d239b38e6acadd7b7fdf6c0087259a84ae3475d18e9a2ae8b"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp310-cp310-musllinux_1_2_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:8cb625bcb5add899cb8ba7bf716ec1d3e8f7cdea9b0713fa99eadf73b6d4986f"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp310-cp310-musllinux_1_2_ppc64le.whl", hash = "sha256:5fa159dcee5dba00c1def3231c249cf261185189205073bde13797e57dd7540a"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp310-cp310-musllinux_1_2_s390x.whl", hash = "sha256:a7080b0159ce05f179cfac592cda1a82898ca9cd097dacf8ea20ae33474fbb25"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp310-cp310-musllinux_1_2_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:ed7161bccab7696a473fe7ddb619c1d75963732b37da4618ba12e60899fefe4f"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp310-cp310-win32.whl", hash = "sha256:bf0d9a171908f32d54f651648c7290397b8792f4303821c42a74e7805bfb813c"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp310-cp310-win_amd64.whl", hash = "sha256:42924dc0c9d73e49908e35bbdec87adedd651ea24c53c29cac103ede0ea1d340"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp311-cp311-macosx_10_9_universal2.whl", hash = "sha256:9ddd49258610499aab83b4f5b61b32e11fce873586282a0e972e5ab3bcadee51"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp311-cp311-macosx_10_9_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:2578541776769b500bada3f8a4eeaf944530516b6e90c089aa368266ed70c49e"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp311-cp311-macosx_11_0_arm64.whl", hash = "sha256:d8074c5dd61c8a3e915fa8fc04754fa55cfa5978200d2daa1e2d4294c1f136aa"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp311-cp311-manylinux_2_17_aarch64.manylinux2014_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:b58229a844931bca61b3a20efd2be2a2acb4ad1622fc026504309a6883686fbf"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp311-cp311-manylinux_2_17_ppc64le.manylinux2014_ppc64le.whl", hash = "sha256:e45377d5d6fefe1677da2a2c07b024a6dac782088e37c0b1efea4cfe2b1be19b"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp311-cp311-manylinux_2_17_s390x.manylinux2014_s390x.whl", hash = "sha256:ec5060592d83454e8063e487696ac3783cc48c9a329498bafae0d972bc7816c9"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp311-cp311-manylinux_2_17_x86_64.manylinux2014_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:15010f29fbed80e711db272909a074dc79858c6d28e2915704cfc487a8ac89c6"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp311-cp311-manylinux_2_5_i686.manylinux1_i686.manylinux_2_17_i686.manylinux2014_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:a254537b9b696ede293bfdbc0a65200e8e4507bc9f37831e2a0318a9b333c85c"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp311-cp311-musllinux_1_2_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:2b975528998de037dfbc10144b8aed9b8dd5a99ec547f14d1cb7c5665a43f075"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp311-cp311-musllinux_1_2_armv7l.whl", hash = "sha256:19d36bb351ad5554ff20f2ae75f88ce205b0748c38b146c75628577020351e3c"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp311-cp311-musllinux_1_2_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:6032231d4a5abd67c7f71168fd64a47b6b451fbcb91c8397c2f7610e67683810"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp311-cp311-musllinux_1_2_ppc64le.whl", hash = "sha256:6985a593417cdbc94c7f9c3403747335e450c1599da1647a5af76539672464d3"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp311-cp311-musllinux_1_2_s390x.whl", hash = "sha256:6a1948df1bb1d56b5e7b0553c0fa04fd0e320997ae99689488201f19fa90d2e7"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp311-cp311-musllinux_1_2_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:8319293e85feadbbfe2150a5659dbc2ebc4afdeaf7d98936fb9a2f2ba0d4c35c"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp311-cp311-win32.whl", hash = "sha256:63f26258a163c34542c24808f03d734b338da66ba91f410a703e505c8485791d"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp311-cp311-win_amd64.whl", hash = "sha256:cacea77ef7a2195f04f9279297684955e3d1ae4241092ff0cfcef532bb7a1c32"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp312-cp312-macosx_10_13_universal2.whl", hash = "sha256:e53d19c2bf7d0d1e6998a7e693c7e87300dd971808e6618964621ccd0e01fe4e"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp312-cp312-macosx_10_13_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:a61a68d630e812b67b5bf097ab84e2cd79b48c792857dc10ba8a223f5b06a2af"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp312-cp312-macosx_11_0_arm64.whl", hash = "sha256:fb91d20fa2d3b13deea98a690534697742029f4fb83673a3501ae6e3746508b5"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp312-cp312-manylinux_2_17_aarch64.manylinux2014_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:67054e47c01b7b349b94ed0840ccae075449503cf1fdd0a1fdd98ab5ddc2667b"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp312-cp312-manylinux_2_17_ppc64le.manylinux2014_ppc64le.whl", hash = "sha256:997e7b8f173a391987df40f3b52c423e5850be6f6df0dcfb5376365440b56667"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp312-cp312-manylinux_2_17_s390x.manylinux2014_s390x.whl", hash = "sha256:8d663fd71491dde7dfdfc899d13a067a94198e90695b4321084c6e450743b8c7"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp312-cp312-manylinux_2_17_x86_64.manylinux2014_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:8884ba1a0fe7210b775106b25850f5e5a9dc3c840d1ae9924ee6ea2eb3acbfe7"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp312-cp312-manylinux_2_5_i686.manylinux1_i686.manylinux_2_17_i686.manylinux2014_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:aa806bbc13eac1ab6291ed21ecd2dd426063ca5417dd507e6be58de20e58dfcf"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp312-cp312-musllinux_1_2_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:6f4d7a7c0aff92e8354cceca6fe223973ddf08401047920df0fcb24be2bd5138"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp312-cp312-musllinux_1_2_armv7l.whl", hash = "sha256:9be90eebc9842a93ef8335291f57b3b7488ac24f70df96a6034a13cb58e6ff86"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp312-cp312-musllinux_1_2_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:bf15fc0b45914d9d1b706f7c9c4f66f2b7b053e9517e40123e137e8ca8958b3d"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp312-cp312-musllinux_1_2_ppc64le.whl", hash = "sha256:5a16167118677d94bb48bfcd91e420088854eb0737b76ec374b91498fb77a70e"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp312-cp312-musllinux_1_2_s390x.whl", hash = "sha256:41de3da5458edd5678b0f6ff66691507f9885f5fe6a0fb99a5d10d10c0fd2d64"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp312-cp312-musllinux_1_2_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:728af36011bb5d344c4fe4af79cfe186729efb649d2f8b395d1572fb088a996c"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp312-cp312-win32.whl", hash = "sha256:6b5b7fd6ee7b54e01759f2044f936dcf7dea6e7585f35490f7ca0420fe723c0d"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp312-cp312-win_amd64.whl", hash = "sha256:2d15bc27163cd4df433e75f546b9ac31c1ba7b0b128bfb1b90df19082466ff57"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp313-cp313-macosx_10_13_universal2.whl", hash = "sha256:a2b9bf8c79b660d0ca1ad95e587818c30ccdb11f787657458d6f26a1ea18c568"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp313-cp313-macosx_10_13_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:b0c1a133d42c6fc1f5fbcf5c91331657a1ff822e87989bf4a6e2e39b818d0ee9"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp313-cp313-macosx_11_0_arm64.whl", hash = "sha256:bb2f144c6d98bb5cbc94adeb0447cfd4c0f991341baa68eee3f3b0c9c0e83767"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp313-cp313-manylinux_2_17_aarch64.manylinux2014_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:d1323cd04d6e92150bcc79d0174ce347ed4b349d748b9358fd2e497b121e03c8"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp313-cp313-manylinux_2_17_ppc64le.manylinux2014_ppc64le.whl", hash = "sha256:3b812b3cb6caacd072276ac0492d249f210006c57726b6484a1e1805b3cfeea0"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp313-cp313-manylinux_2_17_s390x.manylinux2014_s390x.whl", hash = "sha256:742840d1d0438eb7ea4280f3347598f507a199a35a08294afdcc560c3739989d"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp313-cp313-manylinux_2_17_x86_64.manylinux2014_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:7c6e7e4f9167fddc438cd653d826f2222222564daed4116a02a184b464d3ef05"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp313-cp313-manylinux_2_5_i686.manylinux1_i686.manylinux_2_17_i686.manylinux2014_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:a94ffc66738da99232ddffcf7910e0f69e2bbe3a0802e54426dbf0714e1c2ffe"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp313-cp313-musllinux_1_2_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:3c6ec957025bf32b15cbc6b67afe233c65b30005e4c55fe5768e4bb518d712f1"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp313-cp313-musllinux_1_2_armv7l.whl", hash = "sha256:549722908de62aa0b47a78b90531c022fa6e139f9166be634f667ff45632cc92"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp313-cp313-musllinux_1_2_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:5d62c4f6706bff5d8a52fd51fec6069bef69e7202ed481486c0bc3874912c787"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp313-cp313-musllinux_1_2_ppc64le.whl", hash = "sha256:24c04f8fbf60094c531667b8207acbae54146661657a1b1be6d3ca7773b7a545"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp313-cp313-musllinux_1_2_s390x.whl", hash = "sha256:7c5f5290799a3f6539cc5e6f474c3e5c5fbeba74a5e1e5be75587746a940d51e"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp313-cp313-musllinux_1_2_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:4fa0e7c9c3cf7c276d4f6ab9af8adddc127d04e0fcabede315904d2ff76db626"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp313-cp313-win32.whl", hash = "sha256:ee0bd3a7b2e184e88d25c9baa6a9dc609ba25b76daae942edfb14499ac7ec374"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp313-cp313-win_amd64.whl", hash = "sha256:1c8f7d896a16da9455f882870a507567d4f58c53504dc2d4b1e1d386dfe4588a"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp313-cp313t-macosx_10_13_universal2.whl", hash = "sha256:e560fd75aaf3e5693b91bcaddd8b314f4d57e99aef8a6c6dc692f935cc1e6bbf"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp313-cp313t-macosx_10_13_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:65a37714b8ad9aba5780325228598a5b16c47ba0f8aeb3dc0514701e4413d7c0"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp313-cp313t-macosx_11_0_arm64.whl", hash = "sha256:07700939b2cbd67bfb3b76a12e1412405d71019df00ca5697ce75e5ef789d829"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp313-cp313t-manylinux_2_17_aarch64.manylinux2014_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:7c0fdbdf6983526e269e5a8d53b7ae3622dd6998468821d660d0daf72779aefa"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp313-cp313t-manylinux_2_17_ppc64le.manylinux2014_ppc64le.whl", hash = "sha256:794c3dd744fad478b6232289c866c25406ecdfc47e294618bdf1697e69bd64a6"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp313-cp313t-manylinux_2_17_s390x.manylinux2014_s390x.whl", hash = "sha256:4544699674faf66fb6b4473a1518ae4999c1b614f0b8297b1cef96bac25381db"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp313-cp313t-manylinux_2_17_x86_64.manylinux2014_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:fddb8870bdb83456a489ab67c6b3040a8d5a55069aa6f72f9d872235fbc52f54"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp313-cp313t-manylinux_2_5_i686.manylinux1_i686.manylinux_2_17_i686.manylinux2014_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:f857034dc68d5ceb30fb60afb6ff2103087aea10a01b613985610e007053a121"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp313-cp313t-musllinux_1_2_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:02df07041e0820cacc8f739510078f2aadcfd3fc57eaeeb16d5ded85c872c89e"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp313-cp313t-musllinux_1_2_armv7l.whl", hash = "sha256:f47d52fd9b2ac418c4890aad2f6d21a6b96183c98021f0a48497a904199f006e"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp313-cp313t-musllinux_1_2_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:9ff4e9ecb6e4b363430edf2c6e50173a63e0820e549918adef70515f87ced19a"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp313-cp313t-musllinux_1_2_ppc64le.whl", hash = "sha256:ecc2920630283e0783c22e2ac94427f8cca29a04cfdf331467d4f661f4072dac"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp313-cp313t-musllinux_1_2_s390x.whl", hash = "sha256:c441c841e82c5ba7a85ad25986014be8d7849c3cfbdb6004541873505929a74e"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp313-cp313t-musllinux_1_2_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:6c929916cbdb540d3407c66f19f73387f43e7c12fa318a66f64ac99da601bcdf"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp313-cp313t-win32.whl", hash = "sha256:0c3e893c4464ebd751b44ae76c12c5f5c1e4f6cbd6fbf67e3783cd93ad221863"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp313-cp313t-win_amd64.whl", hash = "sha256:75e872573220d1ee2305b35c9813626e620768248425f58798413e9c39741f46"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp39-cp39-macosx_10_9_universal2.whl", hash = "sha256:03c091bb752349402f23ee43bb2bff6bd80ccab7c9df6b88ad4322258d6960fc"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp39-cp39-macosx_10_9_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:46ed02532cb66612d42ae5c3929b5e98ae330ea0f3900bc66ec5f4862069519b"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp39-cp39-macosx_11_0_arm64.whl", hash = "sha256:11ae6a8a01b8a4dc79093b5d3ca2c8a4436f5ee251a9840d7790dccbd96cb649"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp39-cp39-manylinux_2_17_aarch64.manylinux2014_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:df03cd88f95b1b99052b52b1bb92173229d7a674df0ab06d2b25765ee8404bce"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp39-cp39-manylinux_2_17_ppc64le.manylinux2014_ppc64le.whl", hash = "sha256:03acd9ff19021bd0567582ac88f821b66883e158274183b9e5586f678984f8fe"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp39-cp39-manylinux_2_17_s390x.manylinux2014_s390x.whl", hash = "sha256:cd54895e4ae7d32f1e3dd91261df46ee7483a735017dc6f987904f194aa5fd14"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp39-cp39-manylinux_2_17_x86_64.manylinux2014_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:26a67e5c04e3119594d8cfae517f4b9330c395df07ea65eab16f3d559b7068fe"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp39-cp39-manylinux_2_5_i686.manylinux1_i686.manylinux_2_17_i686.manylinux2014_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:ee25f1ac091def37c4b59d192bbe3a206298feeb89132a470325bf76ad122a1e"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp39-cp39-musllinux_1_2_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:58e6d2a5a7cb3e5f166fd58e71e9a4ff504be9dc61b88167e75f835da5764d07"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp39-cp39-musllinux_1_2_armv7l.whl", hash = "sha256:be90c94570840939fecedf99fa72839aed70b0ced449b415c85e01ae67422c90"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp39-cp39-musllinux_1_2_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:49ea05212a529c2caffe411e25a59308b07d6e10bf2505d77da72891f9a05641"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp39-cp39-musllinux_1_2_ppc64le.whl", hash = "sha256:119e244ab40f70a98c91906d4c1f4c5f2e68bd0b14e7ab0a06922038fae8a20f"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp39-cp39-musllinux_1_2_s390x.whl", hash = "sha256:507c5357a8d8b4593b97fb669c50598f4e6cccbbf77e22fa9598aba78292b4d7"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp39-cp39-musllinux_1_2_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:8526b0941ec5a40220fc4dfde76aed58808e2b309c03e9fa8e2260083ef7157f"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp39-cp39-win32.whl", hash = "sha256:7cedd25e5f678f7738da38037435b340694ab34d424938041aa630d8bac42663"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-cp39-cp39-win_amd64.whl", hash = "sha256:bf4298f366ca7e1ad1d21bbb58300a6985015909964077afd37559084590c929"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0-py3-none-any.whl", hash = "sha256:67dda3c7325691c2081510e92c561f465ba61b975f481735aefdfc845d2cd043"}, + {file = "propcache-0.3.0.tar.gz", hash = "sha256:a8fd93de4e1d278046345f49e2238cdb298589325849b2645d4a94c53faeffc5"}, ] [[package]] @@ -3973,13 +3990,13 @@ typing-extensions = ">=4.6.0,<4.7.0 || >4.7.0" [[package]] name = "pydantic-settings" -version = "2.7.1" +version = "2.8.0" description = "Settings management using Pydantic" optional = false python-versions = ">=3.8" files = [ - {file = "pydantic_settings-2.7.1-py3-none-any.whl", hash = "sha256:590be9e6e24d06db33a4262829edef682500ef008565a969c73d39d5f8bfb3fd"}, - {file = "pydantic_settings-2.7.1.tar.gz", hash = "sha256:10c9caad35e64bfb3c2fbf70a078c0e25cc92499782e5200747f942a065dec93"}, + {file = "pydantic_settings-2.8.0-py3-none-any.whl", hash = "sha256:c782c7dc3fb40e97b238e713c25d26f64314aece2e91abcff592fcac15f71820"}, + {file = "pydantic_settings-2.8.0.tar.gz", hash = "sha256:88e2ca28f6e68ea102c99c3c401d6c9078e68a5df600e97b43891c34e089500a"}, ] [package.dependencies] @@ -4381,29 +4398,29 @@ files = [ [[package]] name = "pywin32" -version = "307" +version = "308" description = "Python for Window Extensions" optional = false python-versions = "*" files = [ - {file = "pywin32-307-cp310-cp310-win32.whl", hash = "sha256:f8f25d893c1e1ce2d685ef6d0a481e87c6f510d0f3f117932781f412e0eba31b"}, - {file = "pywin32-307-cp310-cp310-win_amd64.whl", hash = "sha256:36e650c5e5e6b29b5d317385b02d20803ddbac5d1031e1f88d20d76676dd103d"}, - {file = "pywin32-307-cp310-cp310-win_arm64.whl", hash = "sha256:0c12d61e0274e0c62acee79e3e503c312426ddd0e8d4899c626cddc1cafe0ff4"}, - {file = "pywin32-307-cp311-cp311-win32.whl", hash = "sha256:fec5d27cc893178fab299de911b8e4d12c5954e1baf83e8a664311e56a272b75"}, - {file = "pywin32-307-cp311-cp311-win_amd64.whl", hash = "sha256:987a86971753ed7fdd52a7fb5747aba955b2c7fbbc3d8b76ec850358c1cc28c3"}, - {file = "pywin32-307-cp311-cp311-win_arm64.whl", hash = "sha256:fd436897c186a2e693cd0437386ed79f989f4d13d6f353f8787ecbb0ae719398"}, - {file = "pywin32-307-cp312-cp312-win32.whl", hash = "sha256:07649ec6b01712f36debf39fc94f3d696a46579e852f60157a729ac039df0815"}, - {file = "pywin32-307-cp312-cp312-win_amd64.whl", hash = "sha256:00d047992bb5dcf79f8b9b7c81f72e0130f9fe4b22df613f755ab1cc021d8347"}, - {file = "pywin32-307-cp312-cp312-win_arm64.whl", hash = "sha256:b53658acbfc6a8241d72cc09e9d1d666be4e6c99376bc59e26cdb6223c4554d2"}, - {file = "pywin32-307-cp313-cp313-win32.whl", hash = "sha256:ea4d56e48dc1ab2aa0a5e3c0741ad6e926529510516db7a3b6981a1ae74405e5"}, - {file = "pywin32-307-cp313-cp313-win_amd64.whl", hash = "sha256:576d09813eaf4c8168d0bfd66fb7cb3b15a61041cf41598c2db4a4583bf832d2"}, - {file = "pywin32-307-cp313-cp313-win_arm64.whl", hash = "sha256:b30c9bdbffda6a260beb2919f918daced23d32c79109412c2085cbc513338a0a"}, - {file = "pywin32-307-cp37-cp37m-win32.whl", hash = "sha256:5101472f5180c647d4525a0ed289ec723a26231550dbfd369ec19d5faf60e511"}, - {file = "pywin32-307-cp37-cp37m-win_amd64.whl", hash = "sha256:05de55a7c110478dc4b202230e98af5e0720855360d2b31a44bb4e296d795fba"}, - {file = "pywin32-307-cp38-cp38-win32.whl", hash = "sha256:13d059fb7f10792542082f5731d5d3d9645320fc38814759313e5ee97c3fac01"}, - {file = "pywin32-307-cp38-cp38-win_amd64.whl", hash = "sha256:7e0b2f93769d450a98ac7a31a087e07b126b6d571e8b4386a5762eb85325270b"}, - {file = "pywin32-307-cp39-cp39-win32.whl", hash = "sha256:55ee87f2f8c294e72ad9d4261ca423022310a6e79fb314a8ca76ab3f493854c6"}, - {file = "pywin32-307-cp39-cp39-win_amd64.whl", hash = "sha256:e9d5202922e74985b037c9ef46778335c102b74b95cec70f629453dbe7235d87"}, + {file = "pywin32-308-cp310-cp310-win32.whl", hash = "sha256:796ff4426437896550d2981b9c2ac0ffd75238ad9ea2d3bfa67a1abd546d262e"}, + {file = "pywin32-308-cp310-cp310-win_amd64.whl", hash = "sha256:4fc888c59b3c0bef905ce7eb7e2106a07712015ea1c8234b703a088d46110e8e"}, + {file = "pywin32-308-cp310-cp310-win_arm64.whl", hash = "sha256:a5ab5381813b40f264fa3495b98af850098f814a25a63589a8e9eb12560f450c"}, + {file = "pywin32-308-cp311-cp311-win32.whl", hash = "sha256:5d8c8015b24a7d6855b1550d8e660d8daa09983c80e5daf89a273e5c6fb5095a"}, + {file = "pywin32-308-cp311-cp311-win_amd64.whl", hash = "sha256:575621b90f0dc2695fec346b2d6302faebd4f0f45c05ea29404cefe35d89442b"}, + {file = "pywin32-308-cp311-cp311-win_arm64.whl", hash = "sha256:100a5442b7332070983c4cd03f2e906a5648a5104b8a7f50175f7906efd16bb6"}, + {file = "pywin32-308-cp312-cp312-win32.whl", hash = "sha256:587f3e19696f4bf96fde9d8a57cec74a57021ad5f204c9e627e15c33ff568897"}, + {file = "pywin32-308-cp312-cp312-win_amd64.whl", hash = "sha256:00b3e11ef09ede56c6a43c71f2d31857cf7c54b0ab6e78ac659497abd2834f47"}, + {file = "pywin32-308-cp312-cp312-win_arm64.whl", hash = "sha256:9b4de86c8d909aed15b7011182c8cab38c8850de36e6afb1f0db22b8959e3091"}, + {file = "pywin32-308-cp313-cp313-win32.whl", hash = "sha256:1c44539a37a5b7b21d02ab34e6a4d314e0788f1690d65b48e9b0b89f31abbbed"}, + {file = "pywin32-308-cp313-cp313-win_amd64.whl", hash = "sha256:fd380990e792eaf6827fcb7e187b2b4b1cede0585e3d0c9e84201ec27b9905e4"}, + {file = "pywin32-308-cp313-cp313-win_arm64.whl", hash = "sha256:ef313c46d4c18dfb82a2431e3051ac8f112ccee1a34f29c263c583c568db63cd"}, + {file = "pywin32-308-cp37-cp37m-win32.whl", hash = "sha256:1f696ab352a2ddd63bd07430080dd598e6369152ea13a25ebcdd2f503a38f1ff"}, + {file = "pywin32-308-cp37-cp37m-win_amd64.whl", hash = "sha256:13dcb914ed4347019fbec6697a01a0aec61019c1046c2b905410d197856326a6"}, + {file = "pywin32-308-cp38-cp38-win32.whl", hash = "sha256:5794e764ebcabf4ff08c555b31bd348c9025929371763b2183172ff4708152f0"}, + {file = "pywin32-308-cp38-cp38-win_amd64.whl", hash = "sha256:3b92622e29d651c6b783e368ba7d6722b1634b8e70bd376fd7610fe1992e19de"}, + {file = "pywin32-308-cp39-cp39-win32.whl", hash = "sha256:7873ca4dc60ab3287919881a7d4f88baee4a6e639aa6962de25a98ba6b193341"}, + {file = "pywin32-308-cp39-cp39-win_amd64.whl", hash = "sha256:71b3322d949b4cc20776436a9c9ba0eeedcbc9c650daa536df63f0ff111bb920"}, ] [[package]] @@ -4808,114 +4825,114 @@ jupyter = ["ipywidgets (>=7.5.1,<9)"] [[package]] name = "rpds-py" -version = "0.22.3" +version = "0.23.1" description = "Python bindings to Rust's persistent data structures (rpds)" optional = false python-versions = ">=3.9" files = [ - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp310-cp310-macosx_10_12_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:6c7b99ca52c2c1752b544e310101b98a659b720b21db00e65edca34483259967"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp310-cp310-macosx_11_0_arm64.whl", hash = "sha256:be2eb3f2495ba669d2a985f9b426c1797b7d48d6963899276d22f23e33d47e37"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp310-cp310-manylinux_2_17_aarch64.manylinux2014_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:70eb60b3ae9245ddea20f8a4190bd79c705a22f8028aaf8bbdebe4716c3fab24"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp310-cp310-manylinux_2_17_armv7l.manylinux2014_armv7l.whl", hash = "sha256:4041711832360a9b75cfb11b25a6a97c8fb49c07b8bd43d0d02b45d0b499a4ff"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp310-cp310-manylinux_2_17_ppc64le.manylinux2014_ppc64le.whl", hash = "sha256:64607d4cbf1b7e3c3c8a14948b99345eda0e161b852e122c6bb71aab6d1d798c"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp310-cp310-manylinux_2_17_s390x.manylinux2014_s390x.whl", hash = "sha256:81e69b0a0e2537f26d73b4e43ad7bc8c8efb39621639b4434b76a3de50c6966e"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp310-cp310-manylinux_2_17_x86_64.manylinux2014_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:bc27863442d388870c1809a87507727b799c8460573cfbb6dc0eeaef5a11b5ec"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp310-cp310-manylinux_2_5_i686.manylinux1_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:e79dd39f1e8c3504be0607e5fc6e86bb60fe3584bec8b782578c3b0fde8d932c"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp310-cp310-musllinux_1_2_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:e0fa2d4ec53dc51cf7d3bb22e0aa0143966119f42a0c3e4998293a3dd2856b09"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp310-cp310-musllinux_1_2_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:fda7cb070f442bf80b642cd56483b5548e43d366fe3f39b98e67cce780cded00"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp310-cp310-musllinux_1_2_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:cff63a0272fcd259dcc3be1657b07c929c466b067ceb1c20060e8d10af56f5bf"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp310-cp310-win32.whl", hash = "sha256:9bd7228827ec7bb817089e2eb301d907c0d9827a9e558f22f762bb690b131652"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp310-cp310-win_amd64.whl", hash = "sha256:9beeb01d8c190d7581a4d59522cd3d4b6887040dcfc744af99aa59fef3e041a8"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp311-cp311-macosx_10_12_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:d20cfb4e099748ea39e6f7b16c91ab057989712d31761d3300d43134e26e165f"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp311-cp311-macosx_11_0_arm64.whl", hash = "sha256:68049202f67380ff9aa52f12e92b1c30115f32e6895cd7198fa2a7961621fc5a"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp311-cp311-manylinux_2_17_aarch64.manylinux2014_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:fb4f868f712b2dd4bcc538b0a0c1f63a2b1d584c925e69a224d759e7070a12d5"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp311-cp311-manylinux_2_17_armv7l.manylinux2014_armv7l.whl", hash = "sha256:bc51abd01f08117283c5ebf64844a35144a0843ff7b2983e0648e4d3d9f10dbb"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp311-cp311-manylinux_2_17_ppc64le.manylinux2014_ppc64le.whl", hash = "sha256:0f3cec041684de9a4684b1572fe28c7267410e02450f4561700ca5a3bc6695a2"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp311-cp311-manylinux_2_17_s390x.manylinux2014_s390x.whl", hash = "sha256:7ef9d9da710be50ff6809fed8f1963fecdfecc8b86656cadfca3bc24289414b0"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp311-cp311-manylinux_2_17_x86_64.manylinux2014_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:59f4a79c19232a5774aee369a0c296712ad0e77f24e62cad53160312b1c1eaa1"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp311-cp311-manylinux_2_5_i686.manylinux1_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:1a60bce91f81ddaac922a40bbb571a12c1070cb20ebd6d49c48e0b101d87300d"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp311-cp311-musllinux_1_2_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:e89391e6d60251560f0a8f4bd32137b077a80d9b7dbe6d5cab1cd80d2746f648"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp311-cp311-musllinux_1_2_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:e3fb866d9932a3d7d0c82da76d816996d1667c44891bd861a0f97ba27e84fc74"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp311-cp311-musllinux_1_2_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:1352ae4f7c717ae8cba93421a63373e582d19d55d2ee2cbb184344c82d2ae55a"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp311-cp311-win32.whl", hash = "sha256:b0b4136a252cadfa1adb705bb81524eee47d9f6aab4f2ee4fa1e9d3cd4581f64"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp311-cp311-win_amd64.whl", hash = "sha256:8bd7c8cfc0b8247c8799080fbff54e0b9619e17cdfeb0478ba7295d43f635d7c"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp312-cp312-macosx_10_12_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:27e98004595899949bd7a7b34e91fa7c44d7a97c40fcaf1d874168bb652ec67e"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp312-cp312-macosx_11_0_arm64.whl", hash = "sha256:1978d0021e943aae58b9b0b196fb4895a25cc53d3956b8e35e0b7682eefb6d56"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp312-cp312-manylinux_2_17_aarch64.manylinux2014_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:655ca44a831ecb238d124e0402d98f6212ac527a0ba6c55ca26f616604e60a45"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp312-cp312-manylinux_2_17_armv7l.manylinux2014_armv7l.whl", hash = "sha256:feea821ee2a9273771bae61194004ee2fc33f8ec7db08117ef9147d4bbcbca8e"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp312-cp312-manylinux_2_17_ppc64le.manylinux2014_ppc64le.whl", hash = "sha256:22bebe05a9ffc70ebfa127efbc429bc26ec9e9b4ee4d15a740033efda515cf3d"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp312-cp312-manylinux_2_17_s390x.manylinux2014_s390x.whl", hash = "sha256:3af6e48651c4e0d2d166dc1b033b7042ea3f871504b6805ba5f4fe31581d8d38"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp312-cp312-manylinux_2_17_x86_64.manylinux2014_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:e67ba3c290821343c192f7eae1d8fd5999ca2dc99994114643e2f2d3e6138b15"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp312-cp312-manylinux_2_5_i686.manylinux1_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:02fbb9c288ae08bcb34fb41d516d5eeb0455ac35b5512d03181d755d80810059"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp312-cp312-musllinux_1_2_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:f56a6b404f74ab372da986d240e2e002769a7d7102cc73eb238a4f72eec5284e"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp312-cp312-musllinux_1_2_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:0a0461200769ab3b9ab7e513f6013b7a97fdeee41c29b9db343f3c5a8e2b9e61"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp312-cp312-musllinux_1_2_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:8633e471c6207a039eff6aa116e35f69f3156b3989ea3e2d755f7bc41754a4a7"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp312-cp312-win32.whl", hash = "sha256:593eba61ba0c3baae5bc9be2f5232430453fb4432048de28399ca7376de9c627"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp312-cp312-win_amd64.whl", hash = "sha256:d115bffdd417c6d806ea9069237a4ae02f513b778e3789a359bc5856e0404cc4"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp313-cp313-macosx_10_12_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:ea7433ce7e4bfc3a85654aeb6747babe3f66eaf9a1d0c1e7a4435bbdf27fea84"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp313-cp313-macosx_11_0_arm64.whl", hash = "sha256:6dd9412824c4ce1aca56c47b0991e65bebb7ac3f4edccfd3f156150c96a7bf25"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp313-cp313-manylinux_2_17_aarch64.manylinux2014_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:20070c65396f7373f5df4005862fa162db5d25d56150bddd0b3e8214e8ef45b4"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp313-cp313-manylinux_2_17_armv7l.manylinux2014_armv7l.whl", hash = "sha256:0b09865a9abc0ddff4e50b5ef65467cd94176bf1e0004184eb915cbc10fc05c5"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp313-cp313-manylinux_2_17_ppc64le.manylinux2014_ppc64le.whl", hash = "sha256:3453e8d41fe5f17d1f8e9c383a7473cd46a63661628ec58e07777c2fff7196dc"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp313-cp313-manylinux_2_17_s390x.manylinux2014_s390x.whl", hash = "sha256:f5d36399a1b96e1a5fdc91e0522544580dbebeb1f77f27b2b0ab25559e103b8b"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp313-cp313-manylinux_2_17_x86_64.manylinux2014_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:009de23c9c9ee54bf11303a966edf4d9087cd43a6003672e6aa7def643d06518"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp313-cp313-manylinux_2_5_i686.manylinux1_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:1aef18820ef3e4587ebe8b3bc9ba6e55892a6d7b93bac6d29d9f631a3b4befbd"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp313-cp313-musllinux_1_2_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:f60bd8423be1d9d833f230fdbccf8f57af322d96bcad6599e5a771b151398eb2"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp313-cp313-musllinux_1_2_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:62d9cfcf4948683a18a9aff0ab7e1474d407b7bab2ca03116109f8464698ab16"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp313-cp313-musllinux_1_2_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:9253fc214112405f0afa7db88739294295f0e08466987f1d70e29930262b4c8f"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp313-cp313-win32.whl", hash = "sha256:fb0ba113b4983beac1a2eb16faffd76cb41e176bf58c4afe3e14b9c681f702de"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp313-cp313-win_amd64.whl", hash = "sha256:c58e2339def52ef6b71b8f36d13c3688ea23fa093353f3a4fee2556e62086ec9"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp313-cp313t-macosx_10_12_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:f82a116a1d03628a8ace4859556fb39fd1424c933341a08ea3ed6de1edb0283b"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp313-cp313t-macosx_11_0_arm64.whl", hash = "sha256:3dfcbc95bd7992b16f3f7ba05af8a64ca694331bd24f9157b49dadeeb287493b"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp313-cp313t-manylinux_2_17_aarch64.manylinux2014_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:59259dc58e57b10e7e18ce02c311804c10c5a793e6568f8af4dead03264584d1"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp313-cp313t-manylinux_2_17_armv7l.manylinux2014_armv7l.whl", hash = "sha256:5725dd9cc02068996d4438d397e255dcb1df776b7ceea3b9cb972bdb11260a83"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp313-cp313t-manylinux_2_17_ppc64le.manylinux2014_ppc64le.whl", hash = "sha256:99b37292234e61325e7a5bb9689e55e48c3f5f603af88b1642666277a81f1fbd"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp313-cp313t-manylinux_2_17_s390x.manylinux2014_s390x.whl", hash = "sha256:27b1d3b3915a99208fee9ab092b8184c420f2905b7d7feb4aeb5e4a9c509b8a1"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp313-cp313t-manylinux_2_17_x86_64.manylinux2014_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:f612463ac081803f243ff13cccc648578e2279295048f2a8d5eb430af2bae6e3"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp313-cp313t-manylinux_2_5_i686.manylinux1_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:f73d3fef726b3243a811121de45193c0ca75f6407fe66f3f4e183c983573e130"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp313-cp313t-musllinux_1_2_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:3f21f0495edea7fdbaaa87e633a8689cd285f8f4af5c869f27bc8074638ad69c"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp313-cp313t-musllinux_1_2_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:1e9663daaf7a63ceccbbb8e3808fe90415b0757e2abddbfc2e06c857bf8c5e2b"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp313-cp313t-musllinux_1_2_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:a76e42402542b1fae59798fab64432b2d015ab9d0c8c47ba7addddbaf7952333"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp313-cp313t-win32.whl", hash = "sha256:69803198097467ee7282750acb507fba35ca22cc3b85f16cf45fb01cb9097730"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp313-cp313t-win_amd64.whl", hash = "sha256:f5cf2a0c2bdadf3791b5c205d55a37a54025c6e18a71c71f82bb536cf9a454bf"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp39-cp39-macosx_10_12_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:378753b4a4de2a7b34063d6f95ae81bfa7b15f2c1a04a9518e8644e81807ebea"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp39-cp39-macosx_11_0_arm64.whl", hash = "sha256:3445e07bf2e8ecfeef6ef67ac83de670358abf2996916039b16a218e3d95e97e"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp39-cp39-manylinux_2_17_aarch64.manylinux2014_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:7b2513ba235829860b13faa931f3b6846548021846ac808455301c23a101689d"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp39-cp39-manylinux_2_17_armv7l.manylinux2014_armv7l.whl", hash = "sha256:eaf16ae9ae519a0e237a0f528fd9f0197b9bb70f40263ee57ae53c2b8d48aeb3"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp39-cp39-manylinux_2_17_ppc64le.manylinux2014_ppc64le.whl", hash = "sha256:583f6a1993ca3369e0f80ba99d796d8e6b1a3a2a442dd4e1a79e652116413091"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp39-cp39-manylinux_2_17_s390x.manylinux2014_s390x.whl", hash = "sha256:4617e1915a539a0d9a9567795023de41a87106522ff83fbfaf1f6baf8e85437e"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp39-cp39-manylinux_2_17_x86_64.manylinux2014_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:0c150c7a61ed4a4f4955a96626574e9baf1adf772c2fb61ef6a5027e52803543"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp39-cp39-manylinux_2_5_i686.manylinux1_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:2fa4331c200c2521512595253f5bb70858b90f750d39b8cbfd67465f8d1b596d"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp39-cp39-musllinux_1_2_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:214b7a953d73b5e87f0ebece4a32a5bd83c60a3ecc9d4ec8f1dca968a2d91e99"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp39-cp39-musllinux_1_2_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:f47ad3d5f3258bd7058d2d506852217865afefe6153a36eb4b6928758041d831"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp39-cp39-musllinux_1_2_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:f276b245347e6e36526cbd4a266a417796fc531ddf391e43574cf6466c492520"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp39-cp39-win32.whl", hash = "sha256:bbb232860e3d03d544bc03ac57855cd82ddf19c7a07651a7c0fdb95e9efea8b9"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-cp39-cp39-win_amd64.whl", hash = "sha256:cfbc454a2880389dbb9b5b398e50d439e2e58669160f27b60e5eca11f68ae17c"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-pp310-pypy310_pp73-macosx_10_12_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:d48424e39c2611ee1b84ad0f44fb3b2b53d473e65de061e3f460fc0be5f1939d"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-pp310-pypy310_pp73-macosx_11_0_arm64.whl", hash = "sha256:24e8abb5878e250f2eb0d7859a8e561846f98910326d06c0d51381fed59357bd"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-pp310-pypy310_pp73-manylinux_2_17_aarch64.manylinux2014_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:4b232061ca880db21fa14defe219840ad9b74b6158adb52ddf0e87bead9e8493"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-pp310-pypy310_pp73-manylinux_2_17_armv7l.manylinux2014_armv7l.whl", hash = "sha256:ac0a03221cdb5058ce0167ecc92a8c89e8d0decdc9e99a2ec23380793c4dcb96"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-pp310-pypy310_pp73-manylinux_2_17_ppc64le.manylinux2014_ppc64le.whl", hash = "sha256:eb0c341fa71df5a4595f9501df4ac5abfb5a09580081dffbd1ddd4654e6e9123"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-pp310-pypy310_pp73-manylinux_2_17_s390x.manylinux2014_s390x.whl", hash = "sha256:bf9db5488121b596dbfc6718c76092fda77b703c1f7533a226a5a9f65248f8ad"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-pp310-pypy310_pp73-manylinux_2_17_x86_64.manylinux2014_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:0b8db6b5b2d4491ad5b6bdc2bc7c017eec108acbf4e6785f42a9eb0ba234f4c9"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-pp310-pypy310_pp73-manylinux_2_5_i686.manylinux1_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:b3d504047aba448d70cf6fa22e06cb09f7cbd761939fdd47604f5e007675c24e"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-pp310-pypy310_pp73-musllinux_1_2_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:e61b02c3f7a1e0b75e20c3978f7135fd13cb6cf551bf4a6d29b999a88830a338"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-pp310-pypy310_pp73-musllinux_1_2_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:e35ba67d65d49080e8e5a1dd40101fccdd9798adb9b050ff670b7d74fa41c566"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-pp310-pypy310_pp73-musllinux_1_2_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:26fd7cac7dd51011a245f29a2cc6489c4608b5a8ce8d75661bb4a1066c52dfbe"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-pp310-pypy310_pp73-win_amd64.whl", hash = "sha256:177c7c0fce2855833819c98e43c262007f42ce86651ffbb84f37883308cb0e7d"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-pp39-pypy39_pp73-macosx_10_12_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:bb47271f60660803ad11f4c61b42242b8c1312a31c98c578f79ef9387bbde21c"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-pp39-pypy39_pp73-macosx_11_0_arm64.whl", hash = "sha256:70fb28128acbfd264eda9bf47015537ba3fe86e40d046eb2963d75024be4d055"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-pp39-pypy39_pp73-manylinux_2_17_aarch64.manylinux2014_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:44d61b4b7d0c2c9ac019c314e52d7cbda0ae31078aabd0f22e583af3e0d79723"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-pp39-pypy39_pp73-manylinux_2_17_armv7l.manylinux2014_armv7l.whl", hash = "sha256:5f0e260eaf54380380ac3808aa4ebe2d8ca28b9087cf411649f96bad6900c728"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-pp39-pypy39_pp73-manylinux_2_17_ppc64le.manylinux2014_ppc64le.whl", hash = "sha256:b25bc607423935079e05619d7de556c91fb6adeae9d5f80868dde3468657994b"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-pp39-pypy39_pp73-manylinux_2_17_s390x.manylinux2014_s390x.whl", hash = "sha256:fb6116dfb8d1925cbdb52595560584db42a7f664617a1f7d7f6e32f138cdf37d"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-pp39-pypy39_pp73-manylinux_2_17_x86_64.manylinux2014_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:a63cbdd98acef6570c62b92a1e43266f9e8b21e699c363c0fef13bd530799c11"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-pp39-pypy39_pp73-manylinux_2_5_i686.manylinux1_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:2b8f60e1b739a74bab7e01fcbe3dddd4657ec685caa04681df9d562ef15b625f"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-pp39-pypy39_pp73-musllinux_1_2_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:2e8b55d8517a2fda8d95cb45d62a5a8bbf9dd0ad39c5b25c8833efea07b880ca"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-pp39-pypy39_pp73-musllinux_1_2_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:2de29005e11637e7a2361fa151f780ff8eb2543a0da1413bb951e9f14b699ef3"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-pp39-pypy39_pp73-musllinux_1_2_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:666ecce376999bf619756a24ce15bb14c5bfaf04bf00abc7e663ce17c3f34fe7"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3-pp39-pypy39_pp73-win_amd64.whl", hash = "sha256:5246b14ca64a8675e0a7161f7af68fe3e910e6b90542b4bfb5439ba752191df6"}, - {file = "rpds_py-0.22.3.tar.gz", hash = "sha256:e32fee8ab45d3c2db6da19a5323bc3362237c8b653c70194414b892fd06a080d"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp310-cp310-macosx_10_12_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:2a54027554ce9b129fc3d633c92fa33b30de9f08bc61b32c053dc9b537266fed"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp310-cp310-macosx_11_0_arm64.whl", hash = "sha256:b5ef909a37e9738d146519657a1aab4584018746a18f71c692f2f22168ece40c"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp310-cp310-manylinux_2_17_aarch64.manylinux2014_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:3ee9d6f0b38efb22ad94c3b68ffebe4c47865cdf4b17f6806d6c674e1feb4246"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp310-cp310-manylinux_2_17_armv7l.manylinux2014_armv7l.whl", hash = "sha256:f7356a6da0562190558c4fcc14f0281db191cdf4cb96e7604c06acfcee96df15"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp310-cp310-manylinux_2_17_ppc64le.manylinux2014_ppc64le.whl", hash = "sha256:9441af1d25aed96901f97ad83d5c3e35e6cd21a25ca5e4916c82d7dd0490a4fa"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp310-cp310-manylinux_2_17_s390x.manylinux2014_s390x.whl", hash = "sha256:3d8abf7896a91fb97e7977d1aadfcc2c80415d6dc2f1d0fca5b8d0df247248f3"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp310-cp310-manylinux_2_17_x86_64.manylinux2014_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:1b08027489ba8fedde72ddd233a5ea411b85a6ed78175f40285bd401bde7466d"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp310-cp310-manylinux_2_5_i686.manylinux1_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:fee513135b5a58f3bb6d89e48326cd5aa308e4bcdf2f7d59f67c861ada482bf8"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp310-cp310-musllinux_1_2_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:35d5631ce0af26318dba0ae0ac941c534453e42f569011585cb323b7774502a5"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp310-cp310-musllinux_1_2_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:a20cb698c4a59c534c6701b1c24a968ff2768b18ea2991f886bd8985ce17a89f"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp310-cp310-musllinux_1_2_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:5e9c206a1abc27e0588cf8b7c8246e51f1a16a103734f7750830a1ccb63f557a"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp310-cp310-win32.whl", hash = "sha256:d9f75a06ecc68f159d5d7603b734e1ff6daa9497a929150f794013aa9f6e3f12"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp310-cp310-win_amd64.whl", hash = "sha256:f35eff113ad430b5272bbfc18ba111c66ff525828f24898b4e146eb479a2cdda"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp311-cp311-macosx_10_12_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:b79f5ced71efd70414a9a80bbbfaa7160da307723166f09b69773153bf17c590"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp311-cp311-macosx_11_0_arm64.whl", hash = "sha256:c9e799dac1ffbe7b10c1fd42fe4cd51371a549c6e108249bde9cd1200e8f59b4"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp311-cp311-manylinux_2_17_aarch64.manylinux2014_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:721f9c4011b443b6e84505fc00cc7aadc9d1743f1c988e4c89353e19c4a968ee"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp311-cp311-manylinux_2_17_armv7l.manylinux2014_armv7l.whl", hash = "sha256:f88626e3f5e57432e6191cd0c5d6d6b319b635e70b40be2ffba713053e5147dd"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp311-cp311-manylinux_2_17_ppc64le.manylinux2014_ppc64le.whl", hash = "sha256:285019078537949cecd0190f3690a0b0125ff743d6a53dfeb7a4e6787af154f5"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp311-cp311-manylinux_2_17_s390x.manylinux2014_s390x.whl", hash = "sha256:b92f5654157de1379c509b15acec9d12ecf6e3bc1996571b6cb82a4302060447"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp311-cp311-manylinux_2_17_x86_64.manylinux2014_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:e768267cbe051dd8d1c5305ba690bb153204a09bf2e3de3ae530de955f5b5580"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp311-cp311-manylinux_2_5_i686.manylinux1_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:c5334a71f7dc1160382d45997e29f2637c02f8a26af41073189d79b95d3321f1"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp311-cp311-musllinux_1_2_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:d6adb81564af0cd428910f83fa7da46ce9ad47c56c0b22b50872bc4515d91966"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp311-cp311-musllinux_1_2_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:cafa48f2133d4daa028473ede7d81cd1b9f9e6925e9e4003ebdf77010ee02f35"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp311-cp311-musllinux_1_2_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:0fced9fd4a07a1ded1bac7e961ddd9753dd5d8b755ba8e05acba54a21f5f1522"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp311-cp311-win32.whl", hash = "sha256:243241c95174b5fb7204c04595852fe3943cc41f47aa14c3828bc18cd9d3b2d6"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp311-cp311-win_amd64.whl", hash = "sha256:11dd60b2ffddba85715d8a66bb39b95ddbe389ad2cfcf42c833f1bcde0878eaf"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp312-cp312-macosx_10_12_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:3902df19540e9af4cc0c3ae75974c65d2c156b9257e91f5101a51f99136d834c"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp312-cp312-macosx_11_0_arm64.whl", hash = "sha256:66f8d2a17e5838dd6fb9be6baaba8e75ae2f5fa6b6b755d597184bfcd3cb0eba"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp312-cp312-manylinux_2_17_aarch64.manylinux2014_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:112b8774b0b4ee22368fec42749b94366bd9b536f8f74c3d4175d4395f5cbd31"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp312-cp312-manylinux_2_17_armv7l.manylinux2014_armv7l.whl", hash = "sha256:e0df046f2266e8586cf09d00588302a32923eb6386ced0ca5c9deade6af9a149"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp312-cp312-manylinux_2_17_ppc64le.manylinux2014_ppc64le.whl", hash = "sha256:0f3288930b947cbebe767f84cf618d2cbe0b13be476e749da0e6a009f986248c"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp312-cp312-manylinux_2_17_s390x.manylinux2014_s390x.whl", hash = "sha256:ce473a2351c018b06dd8d30d5da8ab5a0831056cc53b2006e2a8028172c37ce5"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp312-cp312-manylinux_2_17_x86_64.manylinux2014_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:d550d7e9e7d8676b183b37d65b5cd8de13676a738973d330b59dc8312df9c5dc"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp312-cp312-manylinux_2_5_i686.manylinux1_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:e14f86b871ea74c3fddc9a40e947d6a5d09def5adc2076ee61fb910a9014fb35"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp312-cp312-musllinux_1_2_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:1bf5be5ba34e19be579ae873da515a2836a2166d8d7ee43be6ff909eda42b72b"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp312-cp312-musllinux_1_2_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:d7031d493c4465dbc8d40bd6cafefef4bd472b17db0ab94c53e7909ee781b9ef"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp312-cp312-musllinux_1_2_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:55ff4151cfd4bc635e51cfb1c59ac9f7196b256b12e3a57deb9e5742e65941ad"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp312-cp312-win32.whl", hash = "sha256:a9d3b728f5a5873d84cba997b9d617c6090ca5721caaa691f3b1a78c60adc057"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp312-cp312-win_amd64.whl", hash = "sha256:b03a8d50b137ee758e4c73638b10747b7c39988eb8e6cd11abb7084266455165"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp313-cp313-macosx_10_12_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:4caafd1a22e5eaa3732acb7672a497123354bef79a9d7ceed43387d25025e935"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp313-cp313-macosx_11_0_arm64.whl", hash = "sha256:178f8a60fc24511c0eb756af741c476b87b610dba83270fce1e5a430204566a4"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp313-cp313-manylinux_2_17_aarch64.manylinux2014_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:c632419c3870507ca20a37c8f8f5352317aca097639e524ad129f58c125c61c6"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp313-cp313-manylinux_2_17_armv7l.manylinux2014_armv7l.whl", hash = "sha256:698a79d295626ee292d1730bc2ef6e70a3ab135b1d79ada8fde3ed0047b65a10"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp313-cp313-manylinux_2_17_ppc64le.manylinux2014_ppc64le.whl", hash = "sha256:271fa2184cf28bdded86bb6217c8e08d3a169fe0bbe9be5e8d96e8476b707122"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp313-cp313-manylinux_2_17_s390x.manylinux2014_s390x.whl", hash = "sha256:b91cceb5add79ee563bd1f70b30896bd63bc5f78a11c1f00a1e931729ca4f1f4"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp313-cp313-manylinux_2_17_x86_64.manylinux2014_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:f3a6cb95074777f1ecda2ca4fa7717caa9ee6e534f42b7575a8f0d4cb0c24013"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp313-cp313-manylinux_2_5_i686.manylinux1_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:50fb62f8d8364978478b12d5f03bf028c6bc2af04082479299139dc26edf4c64"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp313-cp313-musllinux_1_2_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:c8f7e90b948dc9dcfff8003f1ea3af08b29c062f681c05fd798e36daa3f7e3e8"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp313-cp313-musllinux_1_2_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:5b98b6c953e5c2bda51ab4d5b4f172617d462eebc7f4bfdc7c7e6b423f6da957"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp313-cp313-musllinux_1_2_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:2893d778d4671ee627bac4037a075168b2673c57186fb1a57e993465dbd79a93"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp313-cp313-win32.whl", hash = "sha256:2cfa07c346a7ad07019c33fb9a63cf3acb1f5363c33bc73014e20d9fe8b01cdd"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp313-cp313-win_amd64.whl", hash = "sha256:3aaf141d39f45322e44fc2c742e4b8b4098ead5317e5f884770c8df0c332da70"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp313-cp313t-macosx_10_12_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:759462b2d0aa5a04be5b3e37fb8183615f47014ae6b116e17036b131985cb731"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp313-cp313t-macosx_11_0_arm64.whl", hash = "sha256:3e9212f52074fc9d72cf242a84063787ab8e21e0950d4d6709886fb62bcb91d5"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp313-cp313t-manylinux_2_17_aarch64.manylinux2014_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:9e9f3a3ac919406bc0414bbbd76c6af99253c507150191ea79fab42fdb35982a"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp313-cp313t-manylinux_2_17_armv7l.manylinux2014_armv7l.whl", hash = "sha256:c04ca91dda8a61584165825907f5c967ca09e9c65fe8966ee753a3f2b019fe1e"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp313-cp313t-manylinux_2_17_ppc64le.manylinux2014_ppc64le.whl", hash = "sha256:4ab923167cfd945abb9b51a407407cf19f5bee35001221f2911dc85ffd35ff4f"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp313-cp313t-manylinux_2_17_s390x.manylinux2014_s390x.whl", hash = "sha256:ed6f011bedca8585787e5082cce081bac3d30f54520097b2411351b3574e1219"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp313-cp313t-manylinux_2_17_x86_64.manylinux2014_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:6959bb9928c5c999aba4a3f5a6799d571ddc2c59ff49917ecf55be2bbb4e3722"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp313-cp313t-manylinux_2_5_i686.manylinux1_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:1ed7de3c86721b4e83ac440751329ec6a1102229aa18163f84c75b06b525ad7e"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp313-cp313t-musllinux_1_2_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:5fb89edee2fa237584e532fbf78f0ddd1e49a47c7c8cfa153ab4849dc72a35e6"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp313-cp313t-musllinux_1_2_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:7e5413d2e2d86025e73f05510ad23dad5950ab8417b7fc6beaad99be8077138b"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp313-cp313t-musllinux_1_2_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:d31ed4987d72aabdf521eddfb6a72988703c091cfc0064330b9e5f8d6a042ff5"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp313-cp313t-win32.whl", hash = "sha256:f3429fb8e15b20961efca8c8b21432623d85db2228cc73fe22756c6637aa39e7"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp313-cp313t-win_amd64.whl", hash = "sha256:d6f6512a90bd5cd9030a6237f5346f046c6f0e40af98657568fa45695d4de59d"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp39-cp39-macosx_10_12_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:09cd7dbcb673eb60518231e02874df66ec1296c01a4fcd733875755c02014b19"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp39-cp39-macosx_11_0_arm64.whl", hash = "sha256:c6760211eee3a76316cf328f5a8bd695b47b1626d21c8a27fb3b2473a884d597"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp39-cp39-manylinux_2_17_aarch64.manylinux2014_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:72e680c1518733b73c994361e4b06441b92e973ef7d9449feec72e8ee4f713da"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp39-cp39-manylinux_2_17_armv7l.manylinux2014_armv7l.whl", hash = "sha256:ae28144c1daa61366205d32abd8c90372790ff79fc60c1a8ad7fd3c8553a600e"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp39-cp39-manylinux_2_17_ppc64le.manylinux2014_ppc64le.whl", hash = "sha256:c698d123ce5d8f2d0cd17f73336615f6a2e3bdcedac07a1291bb4d8e7d82a05a"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp39-cp39-manylinux_2_17_s390x.manylinux2014_s390x.whl", hash = "sha256:98b257ae1e83f81fb947a363a274c4eb66640212516becaff7bef09a5dceacaa"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp39-cp39-manylinux_2_17_x86_64.manylinux2014_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:5c9ff044eb07c8468594d12602291c635da292308c8c619244e30698e7fc455a"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp39-cp39-manylinux_2_5_i686.manylinux1_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:7938c7b0599a05246d704b3f5e01be91a93b411d0d6cc62275f025293b8a11ce"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp39-cp39-musllinux_1_2_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:e9cb79ecedfc156c0692257ac7ed415243b6c35dd969baa461a6888fc79f2f07"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp39-cp39-musllinux_1_2_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:7b77e07233925bd33fc0022b8537774423e4c6680b6436316c5075e79b6384f4"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp39-cp39-musllinux_1_2_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:a970bfaf130c29a679b1d0a6e0f867483cea455ab1535fb427566a475078f27f"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp39-cp39-win32.whl", hash = "sha256:4233df01a250b3984465faed12ad472f035b7cd5240ea3f7c76b7a7016084495"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-cp39-cp39-win_amd64.whl", hash = "sha256:c617d7453a80e29d9973b926983b1e700a9377dbe021faa36041c78537d7b08c"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-pp310-pypy310_pp73-macosx_10_12_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:c1f8afa346ccd59e4e5630d5abb67aba6a9812fddf764fd7eb11f382a345f8cc"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-pp310-pypy310_pp73-macosx_11_0_arm64.whl", hash = "sha256:fad784a31869747df4ac968a351e070c06ca377549e4ace94775aaa3ab33ee06"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-pp310-pypy310_pp73-manylinux_2_17_aarch64.manylinux2014_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:b5a96fcac2f18e5a0a23a75cd27ce2656c66c11c127b0318e508aab436b77428"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-pp310-pypy310_pp73-manylinux_2_17_armv7l.manylinux2014_armv7l.whl", hash = "sha256:3e77febf227a1dc3220159355dba68faa13f8dca9335d97504abf428469fb18b"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-pp310-pypy310_pp73-manylinux_2_17_ppc64le.manylinux2014_ppc64le.whl", hash = "sha256:26bb3e8de93443d55e2e748e9fd87deb5f8075ca7bc0502cfc8be8687d69a2ec"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-pp310-pypy310_pp73-manylinux_2_17_s390x.manylinux2014_s390x.whl", hash = "sha256:db7707dde9143a67b8812c7e66aeb2d843fe33cc8e374170f4d2c50bd8f2472d"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-pp310-pypy310_pp73-manylinux_2_17_x86_64.manylinux2014_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:1eedaaccc9bb66581d4ae7c50e15856e335e57ef2734dbc5fd8ba3e2a4ab3cb6"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-pp310-pypy310_pp73-manylinux_2_5_i686.manylinux1_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:28358c54fffadf0ae893f6c1050e8f8853e45df22483b7fff2f6ab6152f5d8bf"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-pp310-pypy310_pp73-musllinux_1_2_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:633462ef7e61d839171bf206551d5ab42b30b71cac8f10a64a662536e057fdef"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-pp310-pypy310_pp73-musllinux_1_2_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:a98f510d86f689fcb486dc59e6e363af04151e5260ad1bdddb5625c10f1e95f8"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-pp310-pypy310_pp73-musllinux_1_2_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:e0397dd0b3955c61ef9b22838144aa4bef6f0796ba5cc8edfc64d468b93798b4"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-pp310-pypy310_pp73-win_amd64.whl", hash = "sha256:75307599f0d25bf6937248e5ac4e3bde5ea72ae6618623b86146ccc7845ed00b"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-pp39-pypy39_pp73-macosx_10_12_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:3614d280bf7aab0d3721b5ce0e73434acb90a2c993121b6e81a1c15c665298ac"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-pp39-pypy39_pp73-macosx_11_0_arm64.whl", hash = "sha256:e5963ea87f88bddf7edd59644a35a0feecf75f8985430124c253612d4f7d27ae"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-pp39-pypy39_pp73-manylinux_2_17_aarch64.manylinux2014_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:ad76f44f70aac3a54ceb1813ca630c53415da3a24fd93c570b2dfb4856591017"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-pp39-pypy39_pp73-manylinux_2_17_armv7l.manylinux2014_armv7l.whl", hash = "sha256:2c6ae11e6e93728d86aafc51ced98b1658a0080a7dd9417d24bfb955bb09c3c2"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-pp39-pypy39_pp73-manylinux_2_17_ppc64le.manylinux2014_ppc64le.whl", hash = "sha256:fc869af5cba24d45fb0399b0cfdbcefcf6910bf4dee5d74036a57cf5264b3ff4"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-pp39-pypy39_pp73-manylinux_2_17_s390x.manylinux2014_s390x.whl", hash = "sha256:c76b32eb2ab650a29e423525e84eb197c45504b1c1e6e17b6cc91fcfeb1a4b1d"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-pp39-pypy39_pp73-manylinux_2_17_x86_64.manylinux2014_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:4263320ed887ed843f85beba67f8b2d1483b5947f2dc73a8b068924558bfeace"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-pp39-pypy39_pp73-manylinux_2_5_i686.manylinux1_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:7f9682a8f71acdf59fd554b82b1c12f517118ee72c0f3944eda461606dfe7eb9"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-pp39-pypy39_pp73-musllinux_1_2_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:754fba3084b70162a6b91efceee8a3f06b19e43dac3f71841662053c0584209a"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-pp39-pypy39_pp73-musllinux_1_2_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:a1c66e71ecfd2a4acf0e4bd75e7a3605afa8f9b28a3b497e4ba962719df2be57"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-pp39-pypy39_pp73-musllinux_1_2_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:8d67beb6002441faef8251c45e24994de32c4c8686f7356a1f601ad7c466f7c3"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1-pp39-pypy39_pp73-win_amd64.whl", hash = "sha256:a1e17d8dc8e57d8e0fd21f8f0f0a5211b3fa258b2e444c2053471ef93fe25a00"}, + {file = "rpds_py-0.23.1.tar.gz", hash = "sha256:7f3240dcfa14d198dba24b8b9cb3b108c06b68d45b7babd9eefc1038fdf7e707"}, ] [[package]] @@ -5133,13 +5150,13 @@ files = [ [[package]] name = "setuptools" -version = "75.8.0" +version = "75.8.1" description = "Easily download, build, install, upgrade, and uninstall Python packages" optional = false python-versions = ">=3.9" files = [ - {file = "setuptools-75.8.0-py3-none-any.whl", hash = "sha256:e3982f444617239225d675215d51f6ba05f845d4eec313da4418fdbb56fb27e3"}, - {file = "setuptools-75.8.0.tar.gz", hash = "sha256:c5afc8f407c626b8313a86e10311dd3f661c6cd9c09d4bf8c15c0e11f9f2b0e6"}, + {file = "setuptools-75.8.1-py3-none-any.whl", hash = "sha256:3bc32c0b84c643299ca94e77f834730f126efd621de0cc1de64119e0e17dab1f"}, + {file = "setuptools-75.8.1.tar.gz", hash = "sha256:65fb779a8f28895242923582eadca2337285f0891c2c9e160754df917c3d2530"}, ] [package.extras] @@ -6402,4 +6419,4 @@ type = ["pytest-mypy"] [metadata] lock-version = "2.0" python-versions = "^3.10" -content-hash = "207f5708095a91f518a5db86d4c20b24d3895fc4cc4a0a4886e39130b2c87a35" +content-hash = "120db6370555e9161c5e27f4a3a1f0906603a5b738d80618766d2c7ed22fe566" diff --git a/pyproject.toml b/pyproject.toml index 0d546b7e..d3004424 100644 --- a/pyproject.toml +++ b/pyproject.toml @@ -32,7 +32,6 @@ datasets = "^3.2.0" apted = "^1.0.3" Distance = "^0.1.3" # docling = "^2.24.0" -# docling = { git = "https://github.com/DS4SD/docling.git", branch = "mly/smol-docling-integration" } docling = { git = "https://github.com/DS4SD/docling.git", branch = "cau/vlm-pipeline-generalizations" } matplotlib = "^3.10.0" torch = "^2.5.1" @@ -43,6 +42,7 @@ tqdm = "^4.67.1" pillow = "^10.3.0" evaluate = "^0.4.3" nltk = "^3.9.1" +beautifulsoup4 = "^4.12.3" [tool.poetry.group.dev.dependencies] black = {extras = ["jupyter"], version = "^24.4.2"} From 72bd897f5d35c68ecca6e04edd5af0fed0ac5bcd Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Nikos Livathinos Date: Wed, 26 Feb 2025 10:31:10 +0100 Subject: [PATCH 08/11] fix: Add debug code to dump the predicted text in create_dlnv1_e2e_dataset() Signed-off-by: Nikos Livathinos --- docling_eval/benchmarks/doclaynet_v1/create.py | 11 +++++++++++ docling_eval/benchmarks/utils.py | 2 +- docling_eval/cli/main.py | 1 + docling_eval/converters/conversion.py | 1 - 4 files changed, 13 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/docling_eval/benchmarks/doclaynet_v1/create.py b/docling_eval/benchmarks/doclaynet_v1/create.py index a123b4c1..71946088 100644 --- a/docling_eval/benchmarks/doclaynet_v1/create.py +++ b/docling_eval/benchmarks/doclaynet_v1/create.py @@ -180,6 +180,7 @@ def create_dlnv1_e2e_dataset( converter_type: ConverterTypes = ConverterTypes.DOCLING, do_viz: bool = False, max_items: int = -1, # If -1 take the whole split + do_save_page_text: bool = False, ): ds = load_dataset(name, split=split) @@ -217,6 +218,16 @@ def create_dlnv1_e2e_dataset( pred_doc = conv_results.document + # Debugging code that dumps the VLM predicted text in files + if do_save_page_text: + debug_dir = output_dir / "debug" + os.makedirs(debug_dir, exist_ok=True) + if len(conv_results.pages): + for page_id, page in enumerate(conv_results.pages): + page_text_fn = debug_dir / f"{page_hash}_{page_id}.txt" + with open(page_text_fn, "w") as fd: + fd.write(page.predictions.vlm_response.text) + true_doc = DoclingDocument(name=page_hash) true_doc, true_page_images = add_pages_to_true_doc( pdf_path=pdf_stream, true_doc=true_doc, image_scale=1.0 diff --git a/docling_eval/benchmarks/utils.py b/docling_eval/benchmarks/utils.py index ec0dc992..5ab410b0 100644 --- a/docling_eval/benchmarks/utils.py +++ b/docling_eval/benchmarks/utils.py @@ -154,7 +154,7 @@ def yield_cells_from_html_table( ): soup = BeautifulSoup(table_html, "html.parser") table = soup.find("table") or soup # Ensure table context - rows = table.find_all("tr") + rows = table.find_all("tr") # type: ignore max_cols = 0 for row in rows: diff --git a/docling_eval/cli/main.py b/docling_eval/cli/main.py index 1c52a585..50960129 100644 --- a/docling_eval/cli/main.py +++ b/docling_eval/cli/main.py @@ -229,6 +229,7 @@ def create( converter_type=converter_type, do_viz=True, max_items=max_items, + do_save_page_text=True, # TODO: Debug ) else: log.error(f"{modality} is not yet implemented for {benchmark}") diff --git a/docling_eval/converters/conversion.py b/docling_eval/converters/conversion.py index 70387900..f82fb381 100644 --- a/docling_eval/converters/conversion.py +++ b/docling_eval/converters/conversion.py @@ -136,7 +136,6 @@ def create_smol_docling_converter( ): pipeline_options = VlmPipelineOptions() pipeline_options.generate_page_images = True - pipeline_options.accelerator_options.device = "cuda:0" pipeline_options.accelerator_options.cuda_use_flash_attention2 = True pipeline_options.vlm_options = smoldocling_vlm_conversion_options From cad00e95551daaf37fe451e3d26b285e89d33233 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Nikos Livathinos Date: Wed, 26 Feb 2025 05:23:59 -0500 Subject: [PATCH 09/11] chore: Update toml to pin docling with branch and extras Signed-off-by: Nikos Livathinos --- poetry.lock | 86 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++--------------- pyproject.toml | 2 +- 2 files changed, 62 insertions(+), 26 deletions(-) diff --git a/poetry.lock b/poetry.lock index ca895f5e..024e8347 100644 --- a/poetry.lock +++ b/poetry.lock @@ -1,5 +1,36 @@ # This file is automatically @generated by Poetry 1.8.5 and should not be changed by hand. +[[package]] +name = "accelerate" +version = "1.4.0" +description = "Accelerate" +optional = false +python-versions = ">=3.9.0" +files = [ + {file = "accelerate-1.4.0-py3-none-any.whl", hash = "sha256:f6e1e7dfaf9d799a20a1dc45efbf4b1546163eac133faa5acd0d89177c896e55"}, + {file = "accelerate-1.4.0.tar.gz", hash = "sha256:37d413e1b64cb8681ccd2908ae211cf73e13e6e636a2f598a96eccaa538773a5"}, +] + +[package.dependencies] +huggingface-hub = ">=0.21.0" +numpy = ">=1.17,<3.0.0" +packaging = ">=20.0" +psutil = "*" +pyyaml = "*" +safetensors = ">=0.4.3" +torch = ">=2.0.0" + +[package.extras] +deepspeed = ["deepspeed"] +dev = ["bitsandbytes", "black (>=23.1,<24.0)", "datasets", "diffusers", "evaluate", "hf-doc-builder (>=0.3.0)", "parameterized", "pytest (>=7.2.0,<=8.0.0)", "pytest-subtests", "pytest-xdist", "rich", "ruff (>=0.6.4,<0.7.0)", "scikit-learn", "scipy", "timm", "torchdata (>=0.8.0)", "torchpippy (>=0.2.0)", "tqdm", "transformers"] +quality = ["black (>=23.1,<24.0)", "hf-doc-builder (>=0.3.0)", "ruff (>=0.6.4,<0.7.0)"] +rich = ["rich"] +sagemaker = ["sagemaker"] +test-dev = ["bitsandbytes", "datasets", "diffusers", "evaluate", "scikit-learn", "scipy", "timm", "torchdata (>=0.8.0)", "torchpippy (>=0.2.0)", "tqdm", "transformers"] +test-prod = ["parameterized", "pytest (>=7.2.0,<=8.0.0)", "pytest-subtests", "pytest-xdist"] +test-trackers = ["comet-ml", "dvclive", "tensorboard", "wandb"] +testing = ["bitsandbytes", "datasets", "diffusers", "evaluate", "parameterized", "pytest (>=7.2.0,<=8.0.0)", "pytest-subtests", "pytest-xdist", "scikit-learn", "scipy", "timm", "torchdata (>=0.8.0)", "torchpippy (>=0.2.0)", "tqdm", "transformers"] + [[package]] name = "aiohappyeyeballs" version = "2.4.6" @@ -176,8 +207,8 @@ files = [ lazy-object-proxy = ">=1.4.0" typing-extensions = {version = ">=4.0.0", markers = "python_version < \"3.11\""} wrapt = [ - {version = ">=1.11,<2", markers = "python_version < \"3.11\""}, {version = ">=1.14,<2", markers = "python_version >= \"3.11\""}, + {version = ">=1.11,<2", markers = "python_version < \"3.11\""}, ] [[package]] @@ -858,6 +889,7 @@ files = [] develop = false [package.dependencies] +accelerate = {version = "^1.2.1", optional = true, markers = "sys_platform != \"darwin\" or platform_machine != \"x86_64\""} beautifulsoup4 = "^4.12.3" certifi = ">=2024.7.4" docling-core = {version = "^2.19.0", extras = ["chunking"]} @@ -880,6 +912,10 @@ requests = "^2.32.2" rtree = "^1.3.0" scipy = {version = "^1.6.0", markers = "python_version >= \"3.10\""} tqdm = "^4.65.0" +transformers = [ + {version = ">=4.46.0,<5.0.0", optional = true, markers = "sys_platform != \"darwin\" or platform_machine != \"x86_64\""}, + {version = ">=4.42.0,<4.43.0", optional = true, markers = "sys_platform == \"darwin\" and platform_machine == \"x86_64\""}, +] typer = "^0.12.5" [package.extras] @@ -892,7 +928,7 @@ vlm = ["accelerate (>=1.2.1,<2.0.0)", "transformers (>=4.42.0,<4.43.0)", "transf type = "git" url = "https://github.com/DS4SD/docling.git" reference = "cau/vlm-pipeline-generalizations" -resolved_reference = "d269c8596c19bd1afb6f4573ab3deaf0675588a9" +resolved_reference = "f994654918d84801db9f7178cf8f77eef6ca303c" [[package]] name = "docling-core" @@ -2514,8 +2550,8 @@ files = [ [package.dependencies] multiprocess = [ - {version = "*", optional = true, markers = "python_version < \"3.11\" and extra == \"dill\""}, {version = ">=0.70.15", optional = true, markers = "python_version >= \"3.11\" and extra == \"dill\""}, + {version = "*", optional = true, markers = "python_version < \"3.11\" and extra == \"dill\""}, ] pygments = ">=2.0" pywin32 = {version = ">=301", markers = "platform_system == \"Windows\""} @@ -3178,10 +3214,10 @@ files = [ [package.dependencies] numpy = [ + {version = ">=1.26.0", markers = "python_version >= \"3.12\""}, + {version = ">=1.23.5", markers = "python_version >= \"3.11\" and python_version < \"3.12\""}, {version = ">=1.21.4", markers = "python_version >= \"3.10\" and platform_system == \"Darwin\" and python_version < \"3.11\""}, {version = ">=1.21.2", markers = "platform_system != \"Darwin\" and python_version >= \"3.10\" and python_version < \"3.11\""}, - {version = ">=1.23.5", markers = "python_version >= \"3.11\" and python_version < \"3.12\""}, - {version = ">=1.26.0", markers = "python_version >= \"3.12\""}, ] [[package]] @@ -3262,9 +3298,9 @@ files = [ [package.dependencies] numpy = [ - {version = ">=1.22.4", markers = "python_version < \"3.11\""}, - {version = ">=1.23.2", markers = "python_version == \"3.11\""}, {version = ">=1.26.0", markers = "python_version >= \"3.12\""}, + {version = ">=1.23.2", markers = "python_version == \"3.11\""}, + {version = ">=1.22.4", markers = "python_version < \"3.11\""}, ] python-dateutil = ">=2.8.2" pytz = ">=2020.1" @@ -4048,8 +4084,8 @@ files = [ astroid = ">=2.15.8,<=2.17.0-dev0" colorama = {version = ">=0.4.5", markers = "sys_platform == \"win32\""} dill = [ - {version = ">=0.2", markers = "python_version < \"3.11\""}, {version = ">=0.3.6", markers = "python_version >= \"3.11\""}, + {version = ">=0.2", markers = "python_version < \"3.11\""}, ] isort = ">=4.2.5,<6" mccabe = ">=0.6,<0.8" @@ -4956,26 +4992,26 @@ files = [ [[package]] name = "safetensors" -version = "0.5.2" +version = "0.5.3" description = "" optional = false python-versions = ">=3.7" files = [ - {file = "safetensors-0.5.2-cp38-abi3-macosx_10_12_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:45b6092997ceb8aa3801693781a71a99909ab9cc776fbc3fa9322d29b1d3bef2"}, - {file = "safetensors-0.5.2-cp38-abi3-macosx_11_0_arm64.whl", hash = "sha256:6d0d6a8ee2215a440e1296b843edf44fd377b055ba350eaba74655a2fe2c4bae"}, - {file = "safetensors-0.5.2-cp38-abi3-manylinux_2_17_aarch64.manylinux2014_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:86016d40bcaa3bcc9a56cd74d97e654b5f4f4abe42b038c71e4f00a089c4526c"}, - {file = "safetensors-0.5.2-cp38-abi3-manylinux_2_17_armv7l.manylinux2014_armv7l.whl", hash = "sha256:990833f70a5f9c7d3fc82c94507f03179930ff7d00941c287f73b6fcbf67f19e"}, - {file = "safetensors-0.5.2-cp38-abi3-manylinux_2_17_ppc64le.manylinux2014_ppc64le.whl", hash = "sha256:3dfa7c2f3fe55db34eba90c29df94bcdac4821043fc391cb5d082d9922013869"}, - {file = "safetensors-0.5.2-cp38-abi3-manylinux_2_17_s390x.manylinux2014_s390x.whl", hash = "sha256:46ff2116150ae70a4e9c490d2ab6b6e1b1b93f25e520e540abe1b81b48560c3a"}, - {file = "safetensors-0.5.2-cp38-abi3-manylinux_2_17_x86_64.manylinux2014_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:3ab696dfdc060caffb61dbe4066b86419107a24c804a4e373ba59be699ebd8d5"}, - {file = "safetensors-0.5.2-cp38-abi3-manylinux_2_5_i686.manylinux1_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:03c937100f38c9ff4c1507abea9928a6a9b02c9c1c9c3609ed4fb2bf413d4975"}, - {file = "safetensors-0.5.2-cp38-abi3-musllinux_1_2_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:a00e737948791b94dad83cf0eafc09a02c4d8c2171a239e8c8572fe04e25960e"}, - {file = "safetensors-0.5.2-cp38-abi3-musllinux_1_2_armv7l.whl", hash = "sha256:d3a06fae62418ec8e5c635b61a8086032c9e281f16c63c3af46a6efbab33156f"}, - {file = "safetensors-0.5.2-cp38-abi3-musllinux_1_2_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:1506e4c2eda1431099cebe9abf6c76853e95d0b7a95addceaa74c6019c65d8cf"}, - {file = "safetensors-0.5.2-cp38-abi3-musllinux_1_2_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:5c5b5d9da594f638a259fca766046f44c97244cc7ab8bef161b3e80d04becc76"}, - {file = "safetensors-0.5.2-cp38-abi3-win32.whl", hash = "sha256:fe55c039d97090d1f85277d402954dd6ad27f63034fa81985a9cc59655ac3ee2"}, - {file = "safetensors-0.5.2-cp38-abi3-win_amd64.whl", hash = "sha256:78abdddd03a406646107f973c7843276e7b64e5e32623529dc17f3d94a20f589"}, - {file = "safetensors-0.5.2.tar.gz", hash = "sha256:cb4a8d98ba12fa016f4241932b1fc5e702e5143f5374bba0bbcf7ddc1c4cf2b8"}, + {file = "safetensors-0.5.3-cp38-abi3-macosx_10_12_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:bd20eb133db8ed15b40110b7c00c6df51655a2998132193de2f75f72d99c7073"}, + {file = "safetensors-0.5.3-cp38-abi3-macosx_11_0_arm64.whl", hash = "sha256:21d01c14ff6c415c485616b8b0bf961c46b3b343ca59110d38d744e577f9cce7"}, + {file = "safetensors-0.5.3-cp38-abi3-manylinux_2_17_aarch64.manylinux2014_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:11bce6164887cd491ca75c2326a113ba934be596e22b28b1742ce27b1d076467"}, + {file = "safetensors-0.5.3-cp38-abi3-manylinux_2_17_armv7l.manylinux2014_armv7l.whl", hash = "sha256:4a243be3590bc3301c821da7a18d87224ef35cbd3e5f5727e4e0728b8172411e"}, + {file = "safetensors-0.5.3-cp38-abi3-manylinux_2_17_ppc64le.manylinux2014_ppc64le.whl", hash = "sha256:8bd84b12b1670a6f8e50f01e28156422a2bc07fb16fc4e98bded13039d688a0d"}, + {file = "safetensors-0.5.3-cp38-abi3-manylinux_2_17_s390x.manylinux2014_s390x.whl", hash = "sha256:391ac8cab7c829452175f871fcaf414aa1e292b5448bd02620f675a7f3e7abb9"}, + {file = "safetensors-0.5.3-cp38-abi3-manylinux_2_17_x86_64.manylinux2014_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:cead1fa41fc54b1e61089fa57452e8834f798cb1dc7a09ba3524f1eb08e0317a"}, + {file = "safetensors-0.5.3-cp38-abi3-manylinux_2_5_i686.manylinux1_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:1077f3e94182d72618357b04b5ced540ceb71c8a813d3319f1aba448e68a770d"}, + {file = "safetensors-0.5.3-cp38-abi3-musllinux_1_2_aarch64.whl", hash = "sha256:799021e78287bac619c7b3f3606730a22da4cda27759ddf55d37c8db7511c74b"}, + {file = "safetensors-0.5.3-cp38-abi3-musllinux_1_2_armv7l.whl", hash = "sha256:df26da01aaac504334644e1b7642fa000bfec820e7cef83aeac4e355e03195ff"}, + {file = "safetensors-0.5.3-cp38-abi3-musllinux_1_2_i686.whl", hash = "sha256:32c3ef2d7af8b9f52ff685ed0bc43913cdcde135089ae322ee576de93eae5135"}, + {file = "safetensors-0.5.3-cp38-abi3-musllinux_1_2_x86_64.whl", hash = "sha256:37f1521be045e56fc2b54c606d4455573e717b2d887c579ee1dbba5f868ece04"}, + {file = "safetensors-0.5.3-cp38-abi3-win32.whl", hash = "sha256:cfc0ec0846dcf6763b0ed3d1846ff36008c6e7290683b61616c4b040f6a54ace"}, + {file = "safetensors-0.5.3-cp38-abi3-win_amd64.whl", hash = "sha256:836cbbc320b47e80acd40e44c8682db0e8ad7123209f69b093def21ec7cafd11"}, + {file = "safetensors-0.5.3.tar.gz", hash = "sha256:b6b0d6ecacec39a4fdd99cc19f4576f5219ce858e6fd8dbe7609df0b8dc56965"}, ] [package.dependencies] @@ -6419,4 +6455,4 @@ type = ["pytest-mypy"] [metadata] lock-version = "2.0" python-versions = "^3.10" -content-hash = "120db6370555e9161c5e27f4a3a1f0906603a5b738d80618766d2c7ed22fe566" +content-hash = "40da02415b0d173c74445c22b379e69341075fc4e98006eb4491309b9ec7e147" diff --git a/pyproject.toml b/pyproject.toml index d3004424..4113617b 100644 --- a/pyproject.toml +++ b/pyproject.toml @@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ datasets = "^3.2.0" apted = "^1.0.3" Distance = "^0.1.3" # docling = "^2.24.0" -docling = { git = "https://github.com/DS4SD/docling.git", branch = "cau/vlm-pipeline-generalizations" } +docling = { git = "https://github.com/DS4SD/docling.git", branch = "cau/vlm-pipeline-generalizations", extras = ["vlm"] } matplotlib = "^3.10.0" torch = "^2.5.1" torchmetrics = "^1.6.0" From 6d2717ad379425f74b1970600ea49027b0bdf636 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Nikos Livathinos Date: Wed, 26 Feb 2025 12:46:26 +0100 Subject: [PATCH 10/11] fix: Disable the generation of VLM text debugging files for DLNv1 benchmark Signed-off-by: Nikos Livathinos --- docling_eval/cli/main.py | 1 - 1 file changed, 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/docling_eval/cli/main.py b/docling_eval/cli/main.py index 50960129..1c52a585 100644 --- a/docling_eval/cli/main.py +++ b/docling_eval/cli/main.py @@ -229,7 +229,6 @@ def create( converter_type=converter_type, do_viz=True, max_items=max_items, - do_save_page_text=True, # TODO: Debug ) else: log.error(f"{modality} is not yet implemented for {benchmark}") From 23bedf7d24d6f319633511d20c5a79f29c0b3625 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Nikos Livathinos Date: Wed, 26 Feb 2025 15:21:46 +0100 Subject: [PATCH 11/11] chore: Update toml to docling v2.25.0 with vln extra Signed-off-by: Nikos Livathinos --- poetry.lock | 62 +++++++++++++++++++++++--------------------------- pyproject.toml | 4 ++-- 2 files changed, 31 insertions(+), 35 deletions(-) diff --git a/poetry.lock b/poetry.lock index 024e8347..526d767a 100644 --- a/poetry.lock +++ b/poetry.lock @@ -881,42 +881,44 @@ files = [ [[package]] name = "docling" -version = "2.24.0" +version = "2.25.0" description = "SDK and CLI for parsing PDF, DOCX, HTML, and more, to a unified document representation for powering downstream workflows such as gen AI applications." optional = false -python-versions = "^3.9" -files = [] -develop = false +python-versions = "<4.0,>=3.9" +files = [ + {file = "docling-2.25.0-py3-none-any.whl", hash = "sha256:c6653dafcf6e3d405adc9c669d4a8ee5e36c9f1d4a2cc4d5b9240137c2b8a4ba"}, + {file = "docling-2.25.0.tar.gz", hash = "sha256:afd55504f24a3768d559ddd110690a11e61ea9a9a0858b3bb545cffd02d02c7c"}, +] [package.dependencies] -accelerate = {version = "^1.2.1", optional = true, markers = "sys_platform != \"darwin\" or platform_machine != \"x86_64\""} -beautifulsoup4 = "^4.12.3" +accelerate = {version = ">=1.2.1,<2.0.0", optional = true, markers = "(sys_platform != \"darwin\" or platform_machine != \"x86_64\") and extra == \"vlm\""} +beautifulsoup4 = ">=4.12.3,<5.0.0" certifi = ">=2024.7.4" -docling-core = {version = "^2.19.0", extras = ["chunking"]} -docling-ibm-models = "^3.4.0" -docling-parse = "^3.3.0" -easyocr = "^1.7" -filetype = "^1.2.0" +docling-core = {version = ">=2.19.0,<3.0.0", extras = ["chunking"]} +docling-ibm-models = ">=3.4.0,<4.0.0" +docling-parse = ">=3.3.0,<4.0.0" +easyocr = ">=1.7,<2.0" +filetype = ">=1.2.0,<2.0.0" huggingface_hub = ">=0.23,<1" lxml = ">=4.0.0,<6.0.0" -marko = "^2.1.2" -openpyxl = "^3.1.5" -pandas = "^2.1.4" +marko = ">=2.1.2,<3.0.0" +openpyxl = ">=3.1.5,<4.0.0" +pandas = ">=2.1.4,<3.0.0" pillow = ">=10.0.0,<12.0.0" -pydantic = "^2.0.0" -pydantic-settings = "^2.3.0" -pypdfium2 = "^4.30.0" -python-docx = "^1.1.2" -python-pptx = "^1.0.2" -requests = "^2.32.2" -rtree = "^1.3.0" -scipy = {version = "^1.6.0", markers = "python_version >= \"3.10\""} -tqdm = "^4.65.0" +pydantic = ">=2.0.0,<3.0.0" +pydantic-settings = ">=2.3.0,<3.0.0" +pypdfium2 = ">=4.30.0,<5.0.0" +python-docx = ">=1.1.2,<2.0.0" +python-pptx = ">=1.0.2,<2.0.0" +requests = ">=2.32.2,<3.0.0" +rtree = ">=1.3.0,<2.0.0" +scipy = {version = ">=1.6.0,<2.0.0", markers = "python_version >= \"3.10\""} +tqdm = ">=4.65.0,<5.0.0" transformers = [ - {version = ">=4.46.0,<5.0.0", optional = true, markers = "sys_platform != \"darwin\" or platform_machine != \"x86_64\""}, - {version = ">=4.42.0,<4.43.0", optional = true, markers = "sys_platform == \"darwin\" and platform_machine == \"x86_64\""}, + {version = ">=4.46.0,<5.0.0", optional = true, markers = "sys_platform != \"darwin\" and extra == \"vlm\" or platform_machine != \"x86_64\" and extra == \"vlm\""}, + {version = ">=4.42.0,<4.43.0", optional = true, markers = "sys_platform == \"darwin\" and platform_machine == \"x86_64\" and extra == \"vlm\""}, ] -typer = "^0.12.5" +typer = ">=0.12.5,<0.13.0" [package.extras] ocrmac = ["ocrmac (>=1.0.0,<2.0.0)"] @@ -924,12 +926,6 @@ rapidocr = ["onnxruntime (>=1.7.0,<1.20.0)", "onnxruntime (>=1.7.0,<2.0.0)", "ra tesserocr = ["tesserocr (>=2.7.1,<3.0.0)"] vlm = ["accelerate (>=1.2.1,<2.0.0)", "transformers (>=4.42.0,<4.43.0)", "transformers (>=4.46.0,<5.0.0)"] -[package.source] -type = "git" -url = "https://github.com/DS4SD/docling.git" -reference = "cau/vlm-pipeline-generalizations" -resolved_reference = "f994654918d84801db9f7178cf8f77eef6ca303c" - [[package]] name = "docling-core" version = "2.20.0" @@ -6455,4 +6451,4 @@ type = ["pytest-mypy"] [metadata] lock-version = "2.0" python-versions = "^3.10" -content-hash = "40da02415b0d173c74445c22b379e69341075fc4e98006eb4491309b9ec7e147" +content-hash = "e67808adfdbe0daac63173d1a105ee7a3de930edd20b71e037a8e24f490624f1" diff --git a/pyproject.toml b/pyproject.toml index 4113617b..14beec41 100644 --- a/pyproject.toml +++ b/pyproject.toml @@ -31,8 +31,8 @@ lxml = "^5.3.0" datasets = "^3.2.0" apted = "^1.0.3" Distance = "^0.1.3" -# docling = "^2.24.0" -docling = { git = "https://github.com/DS4SD/docling.git", branch = "cau/vlm-pipeline-generalizations", extras = ["vlm"] } +# docling = "^2.25.0" +docling = {extras = ["vlm"], version = "^2.25.0"} matplotlib = "^3.10.0" torch = "^2.5.1" torchmetrics = "^1.6.0"